i
^1
1
^^^B ^^^^^^^^^^^^^H *^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^l
1
ki W^m *4 M ■
H
1
^n
1
1
Tbi*1
1
1
^^^^^Q
^^^
%
f i ^ . \-'-l
vV-Vt*!'
OFHCIAL
JITCTT
of IhB
1 v> •
mz
* t"
. f»-J, ^'^'" *■'
f*T ANl. ■;-RAC:;MA!-h H^
;■! ,
,l<fw ••■•^
^..^'
■ ». ? ?■<
IF.
.» t f. ( ^
difit
^■«SiyL
>» y ^-
■»-
w."i'-
6tt^MEp'Wlge$tY BVJUfTHd^ITY OF CONGRESS
■^;j'-^,^^^
*•-■.+ - /.
'^
..iPi^ c.» •!» «^?« * •» -'Jlk (Wl ^,«jj-aii».u
Vi^^i
:*H:kA„
:.<■ »;•
l^r't^'^
■ii«2ii3 . f'^i-':::
' frifjiMim-if ) r\irtiih
ritby..'^
n-
i"^-
il^JV.
l'<-''
■JWi^
::^
/ OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES^FATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
March 6, 1984 Volume 1040 Number 1
<
CONTENTS
Page
Patent and Trademark Office Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1040 OG 2
Reissue Applications Filed 1040 OG 2
Requests for Reexaminations Filed 1040 OG 2
Patent Certificates of Correction 1040 qq ^
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries 104Q qg 4
Condition of Patent Applications 1040 OG 5
Reexaminations ^
Defensive Patent Publication (104,001) 3
Reissue Patents Granted (31,527) <^
Plant Patents Granted (5,199) y
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,434,51 1) 1 1
Chemical (4,435,181) 349
Electrical (4,435,610) 3^7
Design Patents Granted (272,864) 451
Index of Patentees p| |
Indices of Reissue, Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees p| 5 1
Index of Applicants of Defensive Publications PI 54
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues and Reexaminations) PI 55
Designs, Plants and Defensive Publications PI 5K
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors
Patents (Including Reissues) P| 59
Designs, Plants and Applicants of Defensive Publications PI 60
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form B^ck Page
imr'.t * . /:
*-■:■ .' . ,"-" ■
■^'- - ,'- >:^
*" ,', '.'. /'-' .- ' < "'
■ .'*"',■" . ■• ' ' ' , . ,^-
>■■;■ i ' i' i '.<**i, ', - ■
--«:•■ „■ ■' ' • • -."■-. r
-.- .*!?&.
'. ^r--^'-iiH
iHUkP. '
A ,^B|
HH^?' , i.,,.^ U- ;,,
fei ,''"'' *w
^f-''la::i|H
^^^K \ -im
■H'i^^' '"'''"'-" "-^m^^^i
^^Bk' -v'^^^^'u- - M^
HHk;?' '-''^^'"''''''^^^H
^^^H^S
a
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents. Government
"Printing Office, Washington, DC. 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weekly
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at SI. 00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color, $8.00 each; cofiies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address
orders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Washington, DC. 20231.
Printing authorized by Section ll(a)3 of Title 35. U.S. Code P.T.O.
[^^i^^-':/-
.t--^^^
i ■ ---V A- ,
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent CooperatioB Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
countries see the notice appearing in the Official Gazette
at 1037 O.G. 12 on Dec. 13, 1983. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent OfTice as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United States Receiving OfTice,
see the notice appearing in the Official Gazette at 1022
O.G. 52 on Sept. 28, 1982. ,
Domestic PCT fees were increased on Oct. 1, 1982 by
a rule change to 37 CFR 1.44S that was published at
1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. International PCT fees
were changed by the PCT Assembly effective Jan. 1,
1984 and were announced at 1037 O.G. 12 on Dec. 13,
1983. The search fee for the European Patent Office was
changed as of Feb. 14, 1984 and was announced at 1039
O.G. 142 on Feb. 21, 1984.
The current schedule of PCT fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee S 125.00
Search fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
• Pnor corresponding U.S. national
application filed 250.00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
• All cases 620.00
International Fees
Basic fee (first 30 pases) 295.00
Basic Supplemental fee (for each
page over 30) 6.00
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) 70.00
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Jan. 30, 1984. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
REISSUE APPUCATIONS FILED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.1 1(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
1040 OG 2
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
4,088^24, Re. S.N. 546,420, Filed Oct. 28. 1983, CI.
417/368, WET PICK-UP VACUUM UNIT MOTOR
BEARING AIR SEAL, Robert L. Hyatt, et al.. Owner
of Record: Ametek, Inc.. Kent, Ohio. Attorney or Agent:
Albert L. Ely, Jr., Ex. Gp.: 343
4^18,105, Re. S.N. 568,557, Filed Jan. 5, 1984, CI.
343/103, LORAN-C NAVIGATION APPARATUS,
Lester R. Brodeur, Owner of Record: Sanders Associates,
Inc., Nashua, N.H., Attorney or Agent: Louis Etlinger,
et al., Ex. Gp.: 222
4^71,495, Re. S.N. 568,458, Filed Jan. 5, 1984, CI.
376/209, SELF RUPTURING GAS MODERATOR
ROD FOR A NUCLEAR REACTOR, George R.V
Marlatt, Owner of Record: Westinghouse Electric Corp.,
Pittsburgh, Pa., Attorney or Agent: Z. L. Dermer, et al.,
Ex. Gp.: 221
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requests and related papers may be obtainoJ by paying the
fee therefor esUblished in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR 1.248(aXS) and l.S23(b)).
4,190,602, Reexam. No. 90/000,496. Requested: Feb.
2, 1984, CI. 560/053, MONOACETALS OR ARO-
MATIC 1,2-DIKETONES, Jean Brunisholz, et al..
Owner of Record: Ciba-Geigy Corp., Ardsley, N. Y., At-
tomeyj)r Agent: Karl F. Jorda, Ex. Gp.: 126, Request-
er: Ciba^igy Corp., Ardsley, N.Y.
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correction for the Week of Mar. 6, 1984
Re. 31,450
D. 271,082
3.997.298
4.155.787
4.232,144
4,250,156
4,295,004
4,298,787
4,318.935
4.325.121
4,335.039
4.346.460
4,348,496
4,349.658
4.353,921
4,357,152
4,357,480
4,368.852
4,375,246
4.377,843
4,384,215
4,384.328
4,384,342
4,387.972
4.393,210
4,393,318
4,393,952
4.397,251
4,397,517
4,397,572
4,397,656
4,398,082
4,398,266
4,398,425
4.398,479
4.399,033
4,399,040
4.399.618
4.399,703
4,401,080
4,401,700
4,402,493
4,402,587
4,402,701
4.402,821
4.402.993
4.403,114
4,403,156
4,403,343
4,403,917
4,403,997
4,404,076
4,404,424
4,404,571
4,404.816
4.404.881
4,405,016
4,405,656
4.406,036
4.406,779
4,407,926
4,408,057
4,409.067
4,409,495
4,409,496
4.411.460
4.411,496
4,411,792
4,412,052
4,413,025
4,413,029
4,413.132
4.414.148
4.414.225
4.414,995
4,415,222
4,415.456
4,415,555
4,415,774
4,416.687
4,416,696
4,416.887
4,416,915
4,417,543
4,418,745
4,418,949
4,419,085
4.419.169
4.419,278
4.419,683
4.420.124
4,420,402
4,420.499
4,420,568
4,420.792
4.420.934
4.421.854
4.423.481
4.423,974
4,424.105
1040 OG 3
\
\
O
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
tnPf Irl'S!!'",* libraries, designated as Patent Deposi- tion contained in patents. With one exception, as noted
tory Libranes. receive current issues of U.S. Patents and in the table following, the collections are organized in
maintain co lections of earher issued patents. The scope patent number sequence *'°"**="°"' organizea in
of these collections varies from library to library, rang- Facilities for making paper copies from either micro-
"hf nrnts' iS l^V^""' ''*" '° *" °^ '"°'* °^ ^"'" '" reader-printers'or'fr^m th? S,und volumL™ pa-
tEI2 n« !f„f;« r . u, . Per-to-papcr copies are generally provided for a fee.
.J^^fSi%\ ^'e'S''"^"! are open to public use and Owing to variatr6ns in the sco^ of patent collections
f^^ th ww^°^P?''l°'\f'i*'T"''"i?^''l°"'°'^- ^'"^"g 'he Patent Depository CbrarL and in their
Sv«em re^f -Sfi mL^Ii o? rV^ /T' Classification . hoi*s of service to the public, anyone contemplaSng u^
System (e^. The Manual of Classification. Index to the of the patents at a particular library is advised to contact
.f^{ .;? Classification - Classification Definitions. that library, in advance, about its collection and hours,
etc.) and provides technical staff assistance in their use so as to avert possible inconvenience
to aid the public in gaining effective access to informa-
State Name of Library ^ Telephone Contact
Alabama Auburn University Libraries .'^. 005^ sia 4500 P.t 71^
Birmingham Public Library 205 islls?? 1^
Arizona Tempe: Science Library. Arizona State University '.'.'/.'..'.'" ((mi ^TliO
California Los Angeles Public Library \, [?i'3{ 626.7555 P,, -jti
Sacramento: California State Library Jo I 525^555 ^^^ ^^^
San Diego Public Library VAgl iil/^ln ^
^ , ^ Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse* [408! 738 5580
Co orado Denver Public Library * J^X?; I^J 5i ??
Delaware Newark: University of Delaware [SJ 71« 22«
Georgia Athinta: Price Gilbert Memorial Library. Georgia Institute of " " * '
Idaho Moscow°U?ilersity" of Idaho Library ■.■.■::.■::;;.;:; ffi 88sl2?5
Illinois Chicago Public Library • * " t , ? Sjg SJi
Springfield: Illinois State Library \\\\\."\ [2 ?{ 782 54?n
Indiana Indianapolis-Marion County Public Library '. n 7) fto 170A
Louisiana Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library. Louisiana State " ' " ^-^ '^ ^°^ ' '"*
Maryland College Park: Engineering and Physical Sciences Library.' " ' ' ^^°*^ 388-2570
University of Maryland non 454.1^7
Massachusetts Boston Public Library [iVii ^rcY^ c , ,.,
Michigan Ann Arbor: Engineering Transportation Library. Universiiy of " '
Michigan ^■^^y. 704.7404
Detroit Public Library OH) 833.1450
Minnesota Minneapolis Public Library & Information Center \\\\ (6 2 372-6570
Missouri Kansas City: Linda Hall Library Sij ^^^^
St. Louis Public Library [3,45 241-2288 Ext. 390.
NevSfi'* t'""""'?; U"'^««''y oj Nebraska-Lincoln. Engineering Library . . (402) 472-341 1 ^"' ^''
Nevada Reno: University of Nevada Library . (702! 784-6579
New Hampshire Durham: University of New Hampshire Library 603 862^1777 \
New Jersey Newark PublicSLibrary *. . . J^l 733-7815
New Mexico Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Library (505 277-5441
New York Albany: New York State Library \ JsJg 474.5 iij
BufTalo and Ene County Public Library (7i6^ 856-7525 F«t 567
Mnrthr 1 New. York Public Library (The Research Libraries) W 2 2 930^850
North Carolina Raleigh: D. H. Hill Library. N.C. State University 919 737O280
""'o Cincinnati & Hamilton County, Public Library of (513) 369-6936
Cleveland Public Library (216) 623-2870
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries (614) 422-6286
^, , ^ Toledo/Lucas County Public Library (419^ 255-7055 Fut ^n
Oklahoma Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library 405 624-6546
Pennsylvania Cambridge Springs: Alliance College Library 814) 398-2098
Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library (215) 448-1321
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh (412) 622-3138
Rh«H^ ici»„^ University Park: Pattee Library. Pennsylvania State University . . (814) 865-4861
Rhode Island Providence Public Library ^ )40n 521 7792 F«t i-)f.
South Carolina Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina ..■:::;■■ 803 792^2372
Tennessee Memphis & Shelby County Public Library and Information
Center . , (901) 725-8876
^^^ Austin: McKinney Engineering Library. University of Texas. . . (512) 471-1610
College Station: Steriing C. Evans Library. Texas A & M v -t; -m loiu
DalirSfc Library' ! .' .' ! ; ^^J ^49^4176
^ , . Houston: The Fondren Library, Rice University (713) 527-8101 Ext 2587
Washington Seattle: Engineering Library. University of W Jhington 206 543-0740
Wisconsin Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library. University of ^^-^t^
Milwaukee Public Library '.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.':.'. WWW.':.'. JJ?J} 278-1o43
pro^J!d°iS?ei^rn:Ki^^^^^ tt^^^ S"P-« '"formation System), which
'Collection organized by subject nutter.
1040 OG 4
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Auiitant Commissioner ^
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF Febnivy 4, 1984
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual
Filing Date
of Oldest
New C«M
Awaiting
Action
r •
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY. GROUP IIO-D. E. TALBERT. Director 5-20-82
Inorganic Compounds; Inorganic Compositions; Organo-Metal and Organo-Metalloid Chemistry; Metallurgy; MeUl-
lurgical Apparatus; MeUl Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices.
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, GROUP 120— C E. VAN HORN. Director 7-16.73
Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Cosmetics:
Steroids; Oxo and Oxy; Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides.
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY, PLASTICS AND MOLDING. GROUP 140— J. O. THOMAS, JR.. Director 9.15-82
Synthetic Resins; Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions; Synthetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Part) e.g., Coating; Molding;
Ink; Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding. Shaping, Treating Process, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and Textile Treating Compositions.
COATING, LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY, GROUP 160-S N ZAHARNA, Director 7-26-82
Coating: Processes, Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Materials; Adhesive
Bonding; Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; andJPhotqgraphy.
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170-
R. F. WHITE, Director '•16-76
Fertilirers; Foods; Fermentation; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and Surch; Paper Making; Glass Manufac-
ture; Gas; Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation; Preserving; Liquid. Gas,
and Solid Separition; Gas and LiquilTContact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS, GROUP 210— S. W. ENGLE, Director 1-03.82
Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors;
Switches; Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION. GROUP 220-KENNETH L. CAGE. Director 6-01-81
Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, Communications, Op-
tics; Radar; Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser
Devices; Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special. Fuel. Explosive and Thermic Composi-
tions; Thermal and Photoelectric Batteries. , „^ „.
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION, STORAGE, AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230-EARL LEVY, Director 7-06-81
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; Dau Processing, CompuUtion and Conversion;
Storage Devices and Related Arts.
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING, AND MEASURING, GROUP 240- ,
G. M. FORLENZA, Director ;,; ' ' ■ • '''''"
Receptacles; Bearings; Joint Packing; Conduits; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures; Textile Spinning; Cleaning;
Food Treating; Agiuting; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical Instruments; Sound Recording; Image Projectors;
Web Feeding; Winding and Reeling; Cable Hoists; Measuring and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Matenal Handling;
Shaft; Impellers; Rotary Fluid Motors.
ELECTRONICCOMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES, GROUP 250-S. S. MATTHEWS. Director 9-30-80
Semi-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Grcuits; Wave Transmission
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measuring. ,,..,,
DESIGN, GROUP 290— KENNETH L. CAGE. Director 1-14-71
^\^ Industrial Arts; Household, Personal and Fine Arte.
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA, GROUP 310-B. R. GRAY. Director ^- : ; U" ' ' *'°***'
Conveyors; Hoists; Elevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding; Dispensing; Fluid Sprin-
kling; Fire Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids; BoaU;
Ships; Aeronautics; Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment
MATERIAL SHAPING, ARTICLE MANUFACTURING. TOOLS, GROUP 320-STEPHEN G. KUNIN. Director 6-18-82
Manufacturing Processes, Assembling, Combined Machines, Special Article Making; Metal Deforming; Sheet Metal
and Wire Working; Metal Fusion-Bonding, Metal Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividing; Work and
Tool Holders, Wobdworking; "Pbols; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchering; and Books and Printed Matter.
AMUSEMENT, HUSBANDRY, PERSONAL TREATMENT, INF0RMATI0^4, GROUP 330- , . ,,^,^
R E AEGERTER Director ih)4.76
Amusement and Exercising Devices; Projectors; Animal and Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvesting; Earth Working and
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Pnnting; Typewriters; Infor.
mation Dissemination. „.^^^„.^,^ ^ c-itai
HEAT, POWER, AND FLUID ENGINEERING, GROUP 340— D. J. STOCKING, Director . . . 5-26-81
Power Plants; Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumps; Heat Gener-
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Gearing^^
Fluid Handlina and Control; Lubrication. ^„._ ^„^..„ ,.„
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS. TEXTILES. MINING AND GEARING. GROUP 350-
A L SMITH Director 3-20-81
Building Structiires; Racks; Cabinets; Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Couplingsr Joints; Miscel-
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineering; Earth Dnlling; Mining;
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine ElemenU; Clutches.
ExpiratioB of patnts: The patenU within the range of numbers indicated below expire during February 1984. except those which
may have had their terms curtailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, issued after the dates of the
range of numbers indicated below, nuy have expired before the full term of 17 years for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the
provision, of 35 U.S.C. 151. ^^^^^ 3 3^^ ^,3 ^^ 3 3^, ,^ ,^^,^^,^^
Plant Patents !!!!!!!!!! 1 !!!! 1 1 ! i ! i ""!' " Numbers 2.707 to 2.722 inclusive
I040OG 5
REEXAMINATIONS
MARCH 6, 1984
Matter enclosed in heavy brackeU C J appears in the patent but fomu no part of this reexamination ipecincation; matter printed in italics indicates
additions ijiade by reexamination.
)
Bl 4,072,309 (171it)
MULTI-PURPOSE EXERaSE DEVICE
Jerry L. WUson, 5816 Vtau Cl«r«, El Poo, Tex. 79912
Recxamlnatioii Request No. 90/000,357, Mar. 28, 1983.
Reexaminatioii Certificate for Patent No. 4,072,309, iuued Feb.
7, 1978, Ser. No. 698,463, Jun. 21, 1976.
Int. a.} A63B 21/04
U.S. a. ni—\i6
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
liins
Claiihs 6 and 8, having been finally determined to be unpat-
entable, are cancelled.
Claims 1 and 7 are determined to be patentable as amended:
Claims 2-5, Dependent on amended claims, are determine
to be patentable.
New claim 9 is added and determined to be patentable.
1. Multiple purpose exercise apparatus comprising:
a frame having forward and rearward positions comprising a
ground-supported base and a stationary vertical support
member extending upwardly from the rear of the base,
wherein the vertical support member includes a rail having a
plurality of vertically aligned bores therein,
a bench, support means associated with said frame for main-
taining the bench at a level above the base,
a lever arm pivotally attached to said vertical support mem-
ber and extending outwardly over said base, the lever arm
also comprising two fingers extending from the rearward
portion thereof each finger having a bore therein axially
aligned with respect to the other, the apparatus also compris-
ing a removable pin having circular-cross section for insertion
consecutively through the bore in one finger, a bore in the rail,
and the bore in the other finger, thereby pivotally connecting
the lever arm to the rail so that the lever arm can move freely
only in a vertical plane, [fastening means for securing the
lever arm to the support member comprising a plurality of
vertically aligned bores in the support member, a trans-
verse bore carried by the rearward portion of the lever
arm, and pin means extending through both bores for
removably pivotally attaching the lever arm to the verti-
cal support member such that the lever arm can move
freely only in a vertical planfe, J
biasing means attachable to the lever arm at a position
spaced from the connection of the lever arm on the verti-
cal support member for selectively providing resistance to
upward or downward motion of the lever arm in the
vertical plane, and
removable attachment means selectively mountable in a bore in
the rail at a location either above or below the connection of
the lever arm to the rail [the vertically aligned bores J for
selectively attaching the biasing means at various [posi-
tion J positions on the vertical support member.
Bl 4,266,976 (172nd)
FABRIC TREATING COMPOSITIGNS
Razraic S. Gregorian, Aiken, and Chettoor G. Naraboodri, North
Augusta, botii of S.C, assignors to United Merchants and
Manufacturers, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,270, Oct. 4, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,266,976, iuued May
12, 1981, Ser. No. 15,030, Feb. 26, 1979.
Continuation of Ser. No. 794,627, May 6, 1977, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 584,389, Jun. 6, 1975, Pat. No.
4,118,526.
Int. a.3 C09K 3/18
U.S. a. 106—2
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
The patenubility of claims 1-14 is confirmed.
1. In a foamable composition suit-.ble for treating fabrics
with a finishing agent comprising a fabric fmishing agent in an
amount effective to impart the properties of the finishing agent
to a fabric, a foam stabilizer, and a liquid diluent; the improve-
ment comprising about 0.5 to 8 percent foam subilirer and m
an amount sufficient to form said composition into a stable
foam having a blow ratio in the range from about 2:1 to 20:1,
a foam density in the range from about 0.5 gm/cc to 0.05
gm/cc, and which is sufficiently stable to substantially retain
its characteristics during application until a mechanical force is
applied thereto.
6. In a stable foamed composition suitable for continuously
treating fabrics with a finishing agent comprising a fabric
finishing agent in an amount effective to impart the properties
of the finishing agent to a fabric, a foam subilizer and a liquid
diluent; the improvement comprising about 0.5 to 8 percent
foam stabilizer and in an amount sufficient to form a stable
foam having a flow ratio in the range from about 2:1 to 20:1, a
foam density in the range from about 0.5 gm/cc to 0.05 gm/cc,
and which is sufficiently suble so that upon application onto a
fabric said foam composition will flow on the fabric surface
and not break down until a mechanical force is applied thereto,
I
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS
PUBLISHED MARCH 6, 1984
Published at the request of the applicant or owner in accordance with the Notice of Dec. 16, 1969, 869 O.O. 687. The abstrafctt of Defensive
Publication applications are identified by distinctly numbered series and are arranged chronologically. The heading of each abstract indicates the
number of pages of specification, including claims and sheets of drawings contained in the application u originally filed. The files of these
applications are available to the public for inspection and reproduction may be purchased for 30 centt a sheet.
Defensive Publication applications have not been examined as to the meriu of alleged invention. The Patent and Trademark Office make* no
assertion as to the novelty of the disclosed subject matter.
T104,001
METHOD FOR RECOVERING GOLD FROM
REFRACTORY ORES
Richard S. Kunter, 2614 S. Field St., Ukewood, Colo. 80227,
and John R. Turney, 12128 W. 70th Ave., Arvada, Colo. 80004
Continuation of Ser. No. 349,149, Feb. 16, 1982, abandoned.
Thii appUcation Sep. 26, 1983, Ser. No. 536,222
Int. a.3 COIG 7/00
U.S. a. 75—118 R
No Drawing. 30 Paget Specification
A process for pretreating refractory ores improves the recov-
ery of gold from such ores upon subsequent cyanidation. After
comminuting the ore and forming an aqueous slurry, the ore is
subjected to pressurized oxidation at an elevated temperature.
By adjusting the pH to below about 1. 83 and maintaining the
pressure and temperature above 300 psig and 160* C, respecr
lively, very high recovery of gold can be achieved. Addition-
ally, by maintaining a preselected soluble iron concentration in
the slurry, the oxidation of the ore is promoted and proceeds at
a more rapid rate.
T104,002
MODULAR INSULATED CABINET CONSTRUCTION
John F. Morrison, 3151 W. Owaaso Blvd., St. Paul, Minn.
55112; Harold E. Jensen, 1016 Island Lake Ave., Shoreview,
Minn. 55112, and Donald F. Gode, 3538 Glenarden Rd., St.
Paul, Minn. 55112
Continuation of Ser. No. 71^51, Aug. 29, 1979. This application
Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,748
Int. a.J A47B %1/00
U.S. a. 312—214
2 Sheets Drawing. 22 Pages Specification
An insulative cabinet construction having a shell portion
formed of a plurality of panels having securing portions inter-
locked in secured relationship. A liner is spaced inwardly of
the shell structure, and foamed-in-place insulation is formed
between the shell structure and liner so as to be adhered to the
shell structure and liner and effectively embed the securing
portions of the shell to maintain the interlocked secured rela-
tionship thereof. The interlocked portions of the shell may be
crimped portions, staked portions, or stamped-together por-
tions, as desired. The shell panels may include flanges on edge
portions to provide column strength at the comers of the
cabinet. The shell panels may be prermished. Preformed clo-
sure means are provided extending between the liner and shell
structure outwardly of the insulation.
T104,003
SYNCHRONOUS DATA LINK SLOW-POLL PROTOCOL
Lon E. Hall, 8413 Maine Dr., Austin, Tex. 78758, and Richard
E. Eveland, 11214 Deadoak U.. Austin, Tex. 78759
Filed Nov. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 440,263
Int. a.3 G06F i/00
U.S. a. 364—200
3 Sheets Drawing. 13 Pages Spcciflcatioa
rf^vSHD \r-7 I
'''''■' ' — ' " '
IvHKlit OKI. «
MtiWi » I UTS I
A first data processor (10) and at least a second data processor
(11) are connected by a data link (12), The processors each
have a communication adapter (14) which is connected to the
data link and system clock (21) which times functions within
the processor. Under a synchronous dau link control (SDLC)
protocol which has information frames and supervisory
frames, one of the processors is designated as the primary
station and the other, the secondary station. Whenever super-
visory frames are transmitted between the primary and second-
ary stations, means are operative for inserting a mandatory
non-polling quiet period of a predetermined length prior. to
each poll so that the processor at the secondary station is freed
for non-polling functions.
T104,004
TASTE IMPROVEMENT OF TABLE TOP
PREPARATIONS CONTAINING ACESULFAME K
Gcrt'Wolfhard von Rymon Lipinskl, c/o Hoechst Aktiengesell-
schafl P.O. Box 80 03 20, D^230 Frankfurt am Main 80, Fed.
Rep. of Gcnnany
FUed Aug. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 528,057
Claims priority, appUcation Luxembourg, Sep. 3, 1982, 84363
Int. a.J A23F l/2i6
U.S. a. 426-548
No Drawing. 13 Pages Specification
For special applications modifications of the sweetness inten-
sity or the taste characteristics of the new non-nutritive sweet-
ener Acesulfame K may be required. The taste of Acesulfame
K can be modified using mixtures with magnesium sulphate,
sodium glutamate, disodium inosinate, disodium guanylate,
quinine sulphate, maltol, ethyl maltol, 2.S-dimethyl-3-hydroxy-
4-oxo-4.S-dihydrofurane, or thaumatin alone or in suitable
combinations, in which Acesulfame K is the main ingredient.
These mixtures may be used instead of pure Acesulfame K in
the following preparations. For preparing granules, powders,
tablets, or solutions Acesulfame K can be mixed with potas-
sium chloride, potassiumdihydrogen phosphate, potassium
acetate, potassium hydrogentartrate, disodium hydrogenphos-
I OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
phate, trisodium citrate glucono-6-Iactone, starch syrups of
low DE (= Dextrose Equivalent) values, low- viscosity car- "**"*' **^'**' *^'*"'^ '^'^^^ ""^''c acid, tartaric acid, glucono-8
boxymethyl cellulose, and gumarabic alone or in suitable com- lacton, glucose, fructose maltose lactose «>rhitnl «t«rrh
buiations. A dilution ofAcesulfameK to low sweetness intensi- ' ' °^' '°'''"'*'' '^''''
ties IS possible using calcium chloride, tricalcium phosphate, ^^^P* having low to medium DE-values, gum arabic, hydro-
SLIr ^^T' '^^^'i"'". 8'"«^°"«^«'. potassium hydrogen car- lyzed soluble casein, and soluble gelatin. The taste of the mix.
bonate, potassium chloride, potassium polyphosphate potas- t "c i»ic oi mc mix
sium hydrogen tartrate, sodium chloride, trisodium phosphate, *"'" ^** ^^^^ superior or equivalent to the pure Acesulfame
disodium hydrogenphosphate, sodium gluconate, glycin, fu- K.
/
REISSUES
MARCH 6, 1984
Matter enclced in heavy brackeU t J appear, in the origin^ patent but form, no part of thi. reiuue .peciflcation; matter printed in italic
indicate, addition, made by reiuue.
METHOD AND APPARAnfsFOR EVlWTTRATiMr "^«"^'"8 »'°n8 subsUntially the entire length of said flanges
Al'P/^TUSFOR EVISCERATING on the side thereof remote from said bulb, and a .tlfTener
WllUam R. Lunbert, 750 ScaUop Dr.. Port Ouuiferal Fta IJT"' °[* "'''"f"'*' ^^"^ ""^ °^'"^''' ^"'''°**^ '*'''^'" *»'^
32920 ^'"■▼er.i, n«. bulb, a substantial portion of said stiffencr engaging the surface
Origiiial No. 3,829.933, dated Aug. 20, 1974, Ser. No. 277,«00,
Aug. 3, 1972. Continuation of Ser. No. 96,534, Nov. 21, 1979,
abandoned. Application for rciaauc Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No.
402,712
Int. a.3 A22C 29/00
U.S.ai7-51 sctataif
14 10
of said bulb so that said stiffener and the material of said bulb
cooperate to provide a substantially unitary structure, said
stiffener and cap increasing the material at the extremities of
said tee without increasing the thickness of said web.
11. Apparatus for eviscerating shucked scallops having attached
viscera comprising; a plurality of parallel rollers mounted adjacent
each other in an inclined flight, means for driving at least selected
ones of said plurality of parallel rollers, means for directing scal-
lops onto the upper portion of said rollers, displaceable scrubber
means mounted above said rollers for urging scallops into contact
with said rollers and for distributing said scallops upon said plural-
ity of rollers by leveling, turning and displacing scallops over the
rollers, and means for displacing said scallop urging and distribut-
ing means, mounted above said plurality of rollers, longitudinally
of the inclined flight of rollers for controlling the flow of scallops
along the incline of flight of rollers, and further including fluid
spray means mounted upon said scallop urging and distributing
means mounted above said rollers for displacement therewith.
13. The method of separating edible r.allop muscles from the
viscera of shucked scallops comprising the steps of placing the
muscles and attached viscera on the upper surface of an inclined
path formed by a plurality of parallel rollers; longitudinally recip-
rocating water sprays spaced above said inclined path of parallel
rollers and scallop muscles for evenly distributing and leveling the
scallops on the rollers by positively forcing the scallops onto the
rollers and into the valleys between adjacent rollers and positively
turning scallops over the rollers; pulling the viscera from the mus-
cles by gripping the viscera in the nips between adjacent rollers by
rotating the upper portions of selected rollers; and controlling the
flow of muscles down the inclined path.
Re. 31,529
ELECTRONIC VALVE ASSEMBLY FOR GLASSWARE
FORMING MACHINERY
Etrl L. Lowe, Winchester, Ind., auignor to Ball Corporation,
Muncie, Ind.
Original No. 4,293,004, dated Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 68,276, Aug.
20, 1979. Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 12,862, Feb. 16,
1979, abandoned. Application for reiarae Jan. IS, 1982, Ser.
No. 339,367
Int. a.J F15B 13/08
U.S. a. 137-884 40 CitAmM
Re. 31,528
GRID TEE FOR SUSPENSION CEILINGS OR THE LIKE
Da?id F. Mieyal, Strongarille, Ohio, assignor to Donn Incorpo-
rated. Westlake, Ohio
Original No. 4,206,578, dated Jun. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 929.281.
Jul. 31. 1978. AppUcation for reissue Not. 12. 1981. Ser. No.
320.618
Int. a.J E04B 5/52
\3S. a. 52—730 38 ciainu
1. An elongated grid tee for suspension ceilings or the like
haying a web, a bulb, and oppositely extending flanges com-
prising a first elongated strip of thin metal bent along its center
to provide a closed bulb and extending from said bulb in face-
to-face abutting adjacency to provide a central web having
two abutting layers and at the edge of said web remote from
said bulb bent to provide oppositely extending flanges, a cap
formed of a separate second strip of thin metal secured to and
— "^
r
33. A valve block for selectively effecting operation of respective
machine elements from two supplies of fluid under different pres-
sures, comprising first and second plenums connected to respective
supplies of fluid, a plurality of valve means for selectively effecting
fluid communication between two ports associated with each valve
means, fluid passageway at each valve means communicating with
one of said ports, an output passageway at each valve means com-
municating with the other of said ports, the output passageways
from the valve block being adapted for connection to the machine
elements, and selector means for coupling said first plenum at one
pressure or said second plenum at another pressure to said fluid
passageway.
5
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
Re. 31,530
MULTIPLE LEAD CUT AND CLINCH MECHANISM
Phillip A. Ragard, Biiigiiaffltoii« N.Y., and Crawford A. Matioii,
Wyalnsiag, Pa., assignors to Uniisi lif Instruments Corpora-
tion, Bingtaanton, N.Y. ^^
Original No. 4,135,558, datei^Jan. 23, 1979, Ser. No. 883,242,
Mar. 3, 1978. Continuation^>f Ser. No. 773,347, Mar. 1, 1977,
abandoned. Application /6r reissue Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No.
229,777
M. a.3 B21F 7/00
U.S. CL 140—105 10 Qaims
Re. 31,531
BRAKE ASSEMBLY
William J. Williams, Franklin, Mich., assignor to RockweU
Iqtemational Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Origiaal No. 4,206,834, dated Jun. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 791,368,
Apr. 27, 1977. Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 687,063, May
17, 1976. AppUcation for reissue Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No.
276,065
Int a.3 F16D 65/09
U.S. a 188-341 ■ 18 Claims
15. An apparatus for cutting and clinching leads of electronic
components, said leads inserted into and projecting from a circuit
board, said mechanism cutting the projecting leads to trim their
length and clinching the tritnmed leads to said circuit board, and
comprising:
a first housing assembly raisable and lowerable along and
angularly positionable about a vertical axis;
single lead means, attached to said first housing assembly for
vertical and angular movement with said first housing as-
sembly, for cutting and clinching of a single lead of aligned
leads of an electronic component;
multiple lead means, attached to said first housing assembly for
vertical and angular movement with said first housing as-
sembly, for cutting and clinching of at least one other lead oj
said aligned leads of said component in a direction trans-
verse to that of said single lead;
means for actuating said multiple lead means and comprising
cut and clinch piston means and first cut and clinch linkage
means, said cut and clinch piston means for driving said
first cut and clinch linkage means to actuate said multiple
lead means;
for actuating said single lead means and comprising said cut
and clinch piston means and second cut and clinch linkage
means, said cut and clinch piston means for driving said
second cut and clinch linkage means whereby said single and
multiple lead means are actuated substantially simulta-
neously;
vertical positioning piston means and vertically positioning
linkage means for vertically raising and lowering said first
housing assembly along said vertical axis, said vertical
positioning piston means for actuating said vertical position-
ing linkage means to raise and lower said first housing
assembly; and
means for angularly positioning said first housing assembly,
whereby said multiple lead means is angularly positioned
about said vertical axis to receive said other lead.
16. An apparatus as in claim 15, wherein said vertical position-
ing linkage means is of adjustable length such that vertical raising
and lowering of said first housing assembly is variable.
17. An apparatus as in claim IS, wherein said single lead
means comprises a shaft having a beveled cutting and clinching
end, said shaft received within a bore in said first housing
assembly.
18. An apparatus as in claim 15, wherein said means to
angularly position, to vertically raise and lower, and to actuate
include linear actuator means.
1. A brake shoe for a brake assembly of the type including a
brake drum and a pair of brake shoes having adjacent ends pivot-
ally mounted to a support and actuating means disposed between
the other ends of the brake shoes to pivot said brake shoes into
frictional contact with said brake drum thereby developing a
circumferential force which complements the force actuating one
shoe and a circumferential force opposite to the force actuating the
other shoe, said shoe including at least one continuous rigid web
having an open ended recess at one end, said recess being of a
width to radially, slidably engage a cylindrical bearing surface
of an anchor pin mounted to a support on a vehicle axle [hous-
ing! and being [oriented] adapted to pivot about said cylin-
drical bearing surface of said pin in response to an outwardly
directed brake actuating force applied at the other end of said
brake shoe [and], said recess having an inner arcuate surface in
bearing abutment with said bearing surface of said pin and being
oriented to extend on both sides of a plane passing through the axis
of curvature of said bearing surface and parallel to a major axis of
said brake assembly which passes through the center of said actu-
ating means, said arcuate surface intersecting said plane on the
side of the axis of curvature of said bearing surface remote from
said actuating means and said portion of said arcuate surface
which lies on the side of said plane opposite to the major part of the
web extending between 5' and 30° therebeyond to [abut] main-
tain said arcuate surface in abutment with said [cylindrical]
bearing surface and prevent substantial movement other than
pivotal movement of said brake shoe relative to said anchor pin in
response to a drum derived force tending to move said brake
shoe away from said anchor pin.
Re. 31,532
PRIMARY CELLS AND IODINE CONTAINING
CATHODES THEREFOR
Alan A. Schneider, Baltimore, Md., and James R. Moser,
Shrewsbury, Pa., assignors to Catalyst Research Corporation,
Baltimore, Md.
Original No. 3,674,562, dated Jul. 4, 1972, Ser. No. 106,657,
Jan. 15, 1971. Application for reissue Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No.
270,216
Int a.3 HOIM 6/18
U.S. a. 429—191 12 Qaims
'Pl.."l
^
ii'>yvyVV>?>>'»^<>"«!»^<'V«v»»xvv«vvc«vv^ii
1. A plastic cathode consisting essentially of a mixture of
iodine and a charge transfer complex of iodine with an organic
March 6, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
donor component selected from the group consisting of poly-
2-vinylquinoline and poly-2-vinylpyridine the mixture contain-
ing between about 2 and 15jnolepules of iodine for each atom
of nitrogen.
^=S^'
A'-Z-A2
0)
wherein A' and A^ independently are alkoxyalkyl groups
having terminal ethylenic unsaturation and having the formula
0R2
R-0-CH2-C-R3—
R'
wherein R— O— is a monovalent residue of an aliphatic termi-
nally unsaturated primary alcohol, ROH, formed by the re-
moval of the active hydrogen from the primary —OH group,
R having the formula:
[E-fCH,-)-»-„R».K;H,-H
wherein E is
CH2=C-
0
II
-C-
-0—
R*
b is zero or an integer of from 1 to 6,
c is an integer of from 1 to 6,
R' and R* are independently selected from hydrogen and
methyl,
R' is an aliphatic group having from I to 15 carbon atoms,
and no more than two catenary oxygen or carboxy
groups, a valence of m + 1 .
m is an integer of from 1 to 5,
R2 is selected from hydrogen and groups of the formula
O
— C— R'
O
— C— NHR7
wherein
R* is selected from alkyl and alkenyl groups
R' is an aliphatic or aromatic group of up to eight carbon
atoms,
R3 is an alkylene group of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms with up
to one catenary oxygen atom, and
Z is a heterocyclic group of the formula
Re. 31 533
INFORMATION CARRYING DISCS
Terry W. Lewis, Woodbury, Minn., assignor to Minnesota Min-
ing and Manufacturing Company, Saint Paul, Minn.
Original No. 4,296,158, dated Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 117,466,
Feb. 1, 1980. Application for reissue Dec. 3, 1982, Ser. No.
446,635
Int. a.3 B32B 3/02
U.S. a. 428—65 16 Claims
1. An information-carrying element comprising a substrate
having adhered to at least one surface thereof a separate layer
having a maximum thickness of from 1.0 to 100 ^m and a
circular or spiral pattern of grooves with or without modula-
tions, depressions, protuberances, said separate layer compris-
ing a polymer layer derived from 15 to 100% by weight of at
least one polyacryloyl-containing heterocyclic wherein said
heterocyclic is selected from the formulae:
wherein X is a divalent group which is required to complete a
5- or 6-membered heterocyclic ring, or
CH2-C-C-Pf-0-CH-CH
n
(2)
wherein
R'2 and R'^ independently represent hydrogen or methyl,
R'* repi«iesents hydrogen, an alkyl group, or a phenyl group,
R'^ and R'* together may represent trimethylene or tetra-
methylene group,
m represents a number of from 1 to 30,
n is 2 or 3, and
A represents a group of the formula
c«o
X'-
I
O
wherein X' represents the divalent radical necessary to com-
plete a 5- or 6-membered heterocyclic ring group [, said pro-
cess comprising exposing said composition to radiation while
the composition is in the presence of an atmosphere of at least
1% by volume of oxygen to polymerize said components
having formula (1) or (2)].
Re. 31,534
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONFERENaNG
ARRANGEMENT
Francis M. Fenton, Middletown; James H. Van Omum, Hazlet;
Tse L. Wang, Holmdel, and Carl D. Weiss, Little Silver, all of
N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated,
Murray Hill, N.J.
Original No. 4,150,259, dated Apr. 17, 1979, Ser. No. 847,216,
Oct. 31, 1977. Application for reissue Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No.
412,873
Int. a.' H04M 1/00
U.S. a. 179—99 R 10 Qaims
7. [The invention set forth in claim 6 further comprising]
In a communication system having a plurality of stations each
having capability of communicating with other stations over com-
munication links internal to the system as well as having the
capability of communicating with stations external to the system
over communication lines extended between the system and a
central source, an arrangement for establishing conference con-
nections between at least three stations each station having a
plurality of nonlocking buttons operable to establish features or
communication connections to said station,
a switching network having a plurality of communication paths
with a single communication path extended to each said
station from said switching network,
means including the designation of one of said buttons at each
said station as a conference control button responsive to the
operation of said conference control button followed by the
operation of a button associated with an idle system facility
for connecting said system facility in common with already
active system facilities connected to said station, and means
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
responsive to the operation of said conference control
button followed by the operation of a button associated
March 6, 1984
' I
with a currently active communication path for disassoci-
ating said communication path from said network.
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED MARCH 6, 1984
Illustrations for plant patenu are usually in color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,199
LILY NAMED ROSARIO
Ted T. Kirach, Myrtle Point, Oreg., assignor to Sun Valley Bulb
Farms, Inc., Myrtle Point, Oreg.
Filed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 421,901
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Ph.— 68 1 Ctaim
1. A new and distinct Oriental hybrid lily cultivar, substan-
tially as herein shown and described, characterized by its large
pink outwardly facing flowers, the petals of which are re-
curved slightly and have numerous maroon spots on the basal
half, the flowers being borne on strong still outwardly project-
ing pedicels and the blooms being long lasting whether on the
plant or as cut flowers.
5,200
LILY NAMED WHITE DREAM
Ted T. Kirsch, Myrtle Point, Oreg., assignor to Sun Valley Bulb
Farms, Inc., Myrtle Point, Oreg.
FUed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 422,203
Int. a.J AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 68 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct variety of Oriental Hybrid lily plant
substantially as herein shown and described, characterized by
its large, white, slightly down-facing flowers borne on long,
strong, outwardly projecting pedicels having petals that are
moderately covered with red spots and recurve slightly at their
tips, by its dark green and relatively disease-free foliage, and by
blooms that are relatively long Jasting whether on the plant or
as cut flowers.
■ '.
*■. ■■
5,201
LILY NAMED PINK SENSATION
Ted T. Kirsch, Myrtle Point, Oreg., assignor to Sun Valley Bulb
Farms, Inc., Myrtle Point, Oreg.
Filed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 422,201
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit— 68 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct variety of Oriental Hybrid lily, sub-
stantially as herein shown and described, characterized by its
large generally pink outwardly facing flowers having white
edged recurved petals moderately covered with dark maroon
spots, the flowers being borne on long, strong outwardly and
upwardly projecting pedicels and long lasting whether on the
plant or as cut flowers and the foliage is dark green.
5,202
CHRYSANTHEMUM PLANT(FLASH)
Williun E. Duffett, Salinas, CaUf., assignor to Yoder Brothers,
Inc., Barberton, Ohio
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,923
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Ph.— 74 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct plant of Chrysanthemum morifolium,
Ramat., known by the cultivar name Flash, as described and
illustrated, and particularly characterized as to uniqueness by
the combined characteristics of flat capitulum form; daisy
capitulum type; bronze ray floret color, with minimum color
oxidation; diameter across face of capitulum ranging from 70
to 80 mm. at maturity; uniform eight week photopenodic
flowering response to short days; long peduncle length; me-
dium plant height when grown single stem; 10 to 20 cm. pedun-
cles on open, normally terminal sprays; slow development of
tight green discs, and 13* C. minimum temperature tolerance
for initiation and development of flowering buds.
^
/
k
PATENTS
GRANTED MAR. 6, 1984
ERRATA
For See
CLASS PATENT NO.
409-109 4.435.105
502-157 4,435,312
502-101 4,435.313
502-154 4.435.314
548^73 4.435,323
528^93 4.435.337
381-044 4.435.617
381-007. 4.435.618
J
PATENTS
GRANTED MARCH 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4,434^11
HOSPITAL GOWN
GMTgiaiui Weiier, Dallas, Oreg^ aisigBor to Weiier Dcdgu,
Ltd^ Amity, Oreg.
FUcd Jan. 24, 1983, Scr. No. 460,451
Int a.} A41B 9/00
\}&. CI. 2—114 6 dainu
A
f
\ 1
1
1
mM
1^.
i
1. A gown for hospital patients and the like comprising; a
first front panel portion having a starting end edge adapted to
be located at the front of one side of the patient and extending
across the front of the patient to the other side, a back panel
interconnected with the first front panel portion at said other
side and adapted to extend across the back of the patient to said
one side, and a second front panel portion interconnected with
the back panel at said one side and extending to said starting
end edge of the first panel portion and forming thereat an
ending end edge; said back panel and first front panel portion
having interconnected upper edge sections adjacent said other
side to form a first shoulder portion, and said back panel hav-
ing an upper edge section adapted to engage an upper edge
section of each of the first and second front panel portions
adjacent to starting and end edges thereof, and releasable
fastening means for releasably fastening the end edges together
and the upper edges of the front panel portions to the back
panel to thereby form a second shoulder portion.
4,434,512
STAYLESS SHIRT COLLAR
Vagn A. Hansen, Prescott, Canada, assignor to Wamaco of
Canada Limited, Prescott, Canada
FUed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,362
Claims priority, appUcation Canada, Oct. 10, 1980, 362244
Int a.i A41B 3/00
VJS. a. 2—129 9 Oaims
Lo
L»
1. A stayless shirt collar cape having a base edge for attach-
ment to a collar band, a finished free edge substantially parallel
with said base edge, and two relatively short finished leading
edges extending outwardly from th»base edge to the free edge
to form points, said cape comprising exterior shells with an
interlining disposed therebetween, stiffening material disposed
between the shells and secured to the interlining, the stiffening
material being in the form of at least one patch extending from
the points along the free edge in a longitudinal direction of the
cape and along the leading edges in a transverse direction of
the cape to coincide with a substantial area of the cape between
the leading edges, the stiffening material being relatively stiff in
the transverse direction of the cape and relatively flexible in
the longitudinal direction of the cape.
4,434,513
INFANT HEAD PROTECTOR
Marilyn L. Welch, Aurora, Colo., assignor to Gold, Inc., Denver,
Colo.
FUed Nov. 13, 1981, Scr. No. 321,245
Int. a.3 A42B 1/06; A47C 27/Oa- B60R 7/00
U.S. a. 2—410 15 Claims
1. A protector for surrounding the head of an infant, com-
prising:
a panel which an infant may engage;
a roll attached to and extending around one end and at least
a portion of each side of said panel, said one end of said
panel being convexly curved and said roll following such
curvature of said panel and being constructed and ar-
ranged to surround the head of an infant;
said roll being formed of an outer layer surrounding a resil-
ient but compressible material;
said roll extending with a generally similar transverse dimen-
sion around said one end and along the sides of said panel
to a predetermined position; and
the transverse dimension of the sides of said roll decreasing
from said predetermined position to a position spaced
from the opposite end of said panel.
4,434,514
BICYCLISTS HELMET WITH AIR FLOW AND
PERSPIRATION CONTROL
James G. Sundahl, Irvine, and Lester V. Broersma, Bcllflower,
both of Calif., assignors to BeU Helmets Inc., Norwalk, Calif.
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Scr. No. 337,815
Int. a.3 A42C 5/04; A42B 3/00
U.S. a. 2—425 28 Claims
1. In a forwardly extending protective helmet, the combina-
tion including
(a) an outer shell containing distributed openings located
inwardly of a dome defined by the shell outer surface
through which air streams may enter the helmet, said
openings defmed by transversely elongated, narrow slits
11
;-•
12
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
of substantially constant width along the lengths of the a radially outward root portion connected at one end to its
openings, body member and having an angularly offsetting intermediate
(b) a Imer m said outer shell and supporting same adjacent portion integrally connected at one end to the other end of said
said openings,
(c) the liner forming left and right air flow channels commu-
nicating with said op>enings, the channels openly facing
tesh
si Si
the interior of the helmet lengthwise of said channels for
conducting air toward the rear of the helmet,
(d) each slit having two elongated edges, one of which is
closer to the helmet interior than the other, the liner
extending into proximity to said edges at the inner side of
said shell and forming additional through openings in
registration with said slits.
4,434.515
INTRAOCULAR LENS
Stanley Poler, New York, N.Y., assignor to Lynell Medical
Technology Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 402,037
Int. a.3 A61F 1/16, 1/24
U.S. a. 3—13 24 Claims
^6l(
^7r
■JW
1. As an article of manufacture, an optically finished intraoc-
ular lens element having a generally circular periphery about
its optical axis, and a mounting adapter for said lens element,
said adapter comprising two circumferentially continuous
annular body members having a circular inner edge of diame-
ter less than the diameter of said lens element, said body mem-
bers being adjacent opposite axial sides of the peripheral region
of said lens element and being connected to each other within
a geometrical annulus radially outside said lens element, and a
plurality of angularly spaced lens-positioning foot elements
having cantilevered radially compliant connection to at least
one of said body members; a first of said foot elements having
root portion, and said foot element having a radially inward
end portion integrally connected at one end to the other end of
said intermediate portion, whereby said radially outward root
portion and said radially inward end portion are at angular
offset from each other; a second of said foot elements having a
radially outward root portion connected at one end to its body
member at substantially the location of such angular offset; and
interengaging means formed integrally with one of said first
and second foot elements and establishing generally radially
guided displacement of part of said radially inward end portion
of said first foot element along the root portion of said second
foot element.
4,434,516
WALL SLEEVE AND INSTALLATION JIG FOR
MULTIPLE ADJACENT nXTURE MOUNTING
Earl L. Morris, La Habra Heights, and V. Walter Hafher,
Whittier, both of Calif., assignors to Acorn Engineering Com*
pany. City of Industry, Calif.
Filed Jan. 5, 1983, Ser. No. 455,746
Int. a.3 A47K 4/00: E03D U/00
U.S. a. 4—252 R 12 Claims
1. A wall sleeve and installation jig having multiple adjacent
fixtures mounted thereon comprising:
a horizontal base member having a chase edge and a cell
edge and a web therebetween, said base member having a
flange positioned along its chase edge;
a first vertical side member affixed at its bottom to one end
of said base member, said first side member having a chase
edge and^ a cell edge and a web therebetween, said first
vertical member having a flange positioned along its chase
edge;
a second vertical side member affixed at its bottom to the
other end of said base member, said second side member
having a chase edge and a cell edge and a web therebe-
tween, said second vertical member having a flange posi-
tioned along its chase edge;
a horizontal top member affixed at one end to the first verti-
cal side member and at the other end to the second verti-
cal side member, said top member having a chase edge and
a cell edge and a web therebetween, said top member
having a flange positioned along its chase edge;
a least one horizontal cross channel member affixed at one
end to said first vertical side member and at its other end
to said second vertical side member, said cross channel
member having a chase edge and a cell edge, said cell edge
of said cross channel member having a cell flange posi-
tioned on the plane formed by the cell edges of said hori-
MaRCH 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
13
zontal base member, said first and second vertical side
members- and said horizontal top member, the vertical
position of said cross channel being such that the cell
flange is located at the intersection of the fixtures mounted
on the jig;
a bottom rectangular fixture mounted on said jig, the upper
edge of said bottom fixture lying along the cell flange of a
cross channel, the lower edge of said bottoB^ fixture lying
below the surface of said horizontal base member; and
a top rectangular fixture mounted on said jig, the lower edge
thereof being adjacent the cell flange of a cross channel,
the upper edge of said top fixture lying above the surface
of said horizontal top member.
1. An invalid's bathtub comprising:
a supporting framework having a pair of side frames and a
pair of end frames, said side frames each including a pair
of vertically spaced horizontal members connected at
opposing ends by a pair of vertically spaced end members,
said end members each provided at their uppermost op-
posing terminal ends with a pin-socket joint member; and
each of said end frames including at least one horizontal
member provided at opposing ends with a mating pin-
socket joint member temporarily engagable with a respec-
tive pin-socket joint member of each of the end members
of each of said side frames to produce a boxlike frame-
work; and
a watertight, flexible liner having a bottom section, two
opposing side wall sections and two opposing end wall
sections defining a boxlike reservoir when in use, said liner
provided with a pair of side panels, each of said side panels
connected at its sides and top to a respective side wall
section of said liner to define a bottom opening pocket
adapted to slip over and be held in place by respective side
frame of said supporting framework, without fasteners,
and said liner provided with openings for accommodating
respective pins of said pin-socket joint members.
4,434,518
SPORT SHOES
Morio Watanabe, Sakai, Japan, assignor to Daicel Chemical
Industries, Ltd., Sakai, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 120,952, Feb. 13, 1980, Pat. No. 4,335,528.
This application Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 353,799
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 30, 1979, 54-97905
Int. C\? A43C 13/0%; A43B U/U, 5/00
U.S. a. 12—142 RS 7 Claims
1. A process for making a sport shoe comprising the steps of:
(a) forming a shoe upper made of natural or artificial leather;
(b) separately from said shoe ypper, preparing an integrally
laminated shoe sole by placing into an injection mold a
preformed insert material layer made of a material which
does not undergo thermal deformation at injection-mold-
ing temperatures and pressures and which displays good
bondability to the shpe upper, said material being selected
from the group c(Misisting of natural leather, artificial
leather, rubber, nonwoven fabric, felts, and fibers, and
then injecting'a molten synthetic resin into said mold so as
4,434,517
V INVALID'S BATHTUB
Gordon LMterris, 2445 Mobile Dr., Boise, Id. 83709 \
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,920
Int. a.3 A47K 3/06
U.S. a. 4—585 2 Claims
to form a monolithic synthetic resin layer which is bonded
to the lower surface of said insert material layer and then
solidifying said synthetic resin whereby to obtain said
integrally laminated shoe sole;
(c) removing said shoe sole from said injection mold; and
(d) bonding the upper surface of said insert material layer to
the lower portion and insole of said shoe upper with an
adhesive.
4,434,519
APPARATUS FOR CLEANING SUBMERGED SURFACES
Johann N. Raubenheimer, Bedfordiiew, South Africa, assignor
to Peacock Investments (Proprietary) Limited, Johannesburg,
South Africa
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,616
Claims priority, application South Africa, Sep. 30, 1980,
80/6049
Int. a.3 E04H 3/20
U.S. a. 15—1.7 8 Claims
1. Apparatus for cleaning a submerged surface (118) com-
prising:
(a) a housing (99);
(b) an outlet (98) from the housing adapted to be connected
to a suction box (109) which connects wm a source of
section; ■'
(c) an inlet (123) to the housing arranged to face the sub-
merged surface so that when suction is applied to the
outlet the apparatus is biafeed towards the surface;
(d) a shaft (103) joumalled for rotation in the housing;
(e) a turbine having a series of blades (104) mounted on the
shaft adapted to be rotated by uninterrupted flow of liquid
from the inlet to the outlet through the housing;
(0 carrying structure (111) separate from the housing;
'V
14
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
(g) at last one friction support (115) mounted on the carry-
ing structure for engaging the submerged surface; and
(h) means (110) connecting the shaft to the carrying struc-
ture to cause the carrying structure to reciprocate relative
to the housing to thereby generate reciprocating forces
oblique to the surface and alternately acting through the
friction support in two opposed directions, the force in a
first direction tending to lift the friction support from the
surface and the force in a second direction tending to push
the friction support back onto the surface, the resulting
effect of said oblique forces and the bias caused by suction
causing the apparatus to advance over the surface in a step
by step manner.
4,434^20
EYEGLASS WIPING DEVICE
Joseph E. Caniglia, 5368 E. 134di St, aevefauid, Ohio 44125
FUed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,310
Int. a.3 G02C J3/00
U.S. a. 15-214 ITCtaimi
a. a core having an inner and outer surface surface, where
the core is adaptable for being held;
b. a mat of one or more glass fibers engaged to the outer
surface of the core, where the one or more glass fibers
have on a substantial portion of their surface the dried
residue of a treating composition of a carrier, fUm forming
polymer, and compatible coupling agent.
4,434,522
KNIFE SCRAPER FOR DRUMS, PARTICULARLY THE
DRUMS OF A CYLINDER MILL
Robert Unzberger, AbtwU, Switzerland, assignor to Gebnider
Bohler AG, Uzwil, Switzerland
per No. PCr/EP81/00049, § 371 Date Dec. 11, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 11, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/03289, PCT Pub.
Date Not. 26, 1981
PCT Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 330,312
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerland, May 10, 1980,
3913/80; Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 25, 1980, 3023824
Int a.3 B02C 4/40
VS. a. 15-256.51 9 0.^,
1. An apparatus for cleaning lenses or the like, comprising
wipmg means for wiping a lens, support means for supporting
said wiping means, and adhesive means for attaching said
wiping means to said support meam wherein said support
means further comprising a pair of support platforms for sup-
portmg at least two wiping means, a pair of arms and connec-
tor means, said arms respectively coupling said support plat-
forms with said connector means, and said connector means
comprising means for connecting said support means to sup-
port said wiping means in opposed relation to each other to
wipe a lens, including a protruding member associated with
one of said support means a receptacle associated with the
other of said support means, at least one of said member and
receptacle being tapered, whereby upon forced insertion of
said member into said receptacle the two cooperate to form a
secure connection therebetween.
4,434,521
APPUCATOR FOR APPLYING A COATING TO A
SURFACE
EmU Martin, Pittsburgh; Heriwrt W. Barch, Natrona Heights,
and S. Thomas Greer, Pittsburgh, aU of Pa., assignors to PPG
Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jon. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,916
Int a.3 B05C 77/00. J 7/02
VS. CL 15-230.11 17 cu^,^
1. A knife scraper for a drum having an axis, particularly for
the drum of a cylinder mill, comprising:
a knife having a cutting edge and knife surface;
a bendable knife beam on which said knife is mounted, said
knife and knife beam being elongated in the axial direction
of said drum;
means pivotally mounting said knife beam for pivotal move-
ment about a pivot axis substantially parallel to said drum
axis;
counterweight means operatively associated with said knife
beam for pressing the knife on said drum, said counter-
weight means and said knife being spaced from said pivot
axis; and
a plurality of tension elements connected to said knife beam
along the length of said knife beam and upon which said
counterweight means are mounted wherein said knife
beam is selectively elastically bendable under the influ-
ence of force applied to said tension elements, said knife
being positioned relative to said drum such that said entire
cutting edge is pressed against said drum by said tension
elements.
1. A coating appUcator comprising:
4,434,523
DOOR HINGE FOR FURNITURE DOORS OR THE LIKE
Alfred Grass, Konsomstrasse 20, A-6973 HScfast Austria
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,265
Claims priority, appllcatloB Austria, No?. 14, 1980, 5623/80
Int a.3 E05D 7/04
UA a 16-242 6 Claims
1. An improved semi-concealed door hinge for mounting
between a frame and a door wherein the door has a receiving
slot portion that is open to a back side thereof which com-
prises, a socket part adapted to fit in the slot portion of the
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
IS
door, means for securing said socket part in position within the
slot portion, a connector plate, ^ swing arm extending from
said connector plate and swingably connected to said socket
part for door opening and closing movements with respect to
the frame, an adjustment plate having spaced-apart wedge-
shaped projecting portions on a face thereof, said connector
plate having offset portions in a cooperatively aligned and
engaging relation with said wedge-shaped projecting portions,
one of said plates having opposed side-positioned flange means
positioned along opposite side edges of the other of said plates
for accurately aligned sliding adjusting movement between
said plates to move said adjustment plate on said wedge-shaped
projecting portions in an "in" and "out" relation with respect
to said connector plate and provide lateral adjustment of the
door with respect to the frame, single screw means adapted to
extend through said connector and adjustment plates for secur-
ing.them in an adjusted relation with respect to each other on
the frame in such a manner that the door may be adjusted and
retained in a parallel relation with respect to the frame and said
adjustment plate being rotatably adjustable with respect to said
connector plate.
4,434,524
MAGNETIC DOOR HARDWARE
Henry R. Gilchrist Burlington, Mass., assignor to Eckel Indus-
tries, Inc., Cambridge, Maas.
FUed Apr. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 370,113
Int a.3 E05D 77/00. 77/70; E05F 1/14
VS. a. 16—250 \ 10 Claims
<r-^^v.
1. Magnetic door hardware for a swinging door, said hard-
ware comprising in combination:
a door mounting post to which one side of said door is
affixed, said post having an upper end and a lower end;
a door frame around the periphery of said door, said frame
comprising at least a header member above said door and
a vertical side jamb member parallel to and adjacent said
one side of said door affixed to said door mounting post;
means for rotatably connecting said post to said side jamb
member so as to allow said door to rotate to the open or
closed position; and
magnetic means for urging said door to rotate from open
position back to closed position;
said magnetic means comprising a first permanent magnet
attached to one end of said door post so as to rotate there-
with; a second permanent magnet affixed to said door
frame so as to be aligned with and adjacent said first
magnet; and a first magnetic field, associated with said
first magnet, interacting with a second magnetic field
associated with said second magnet, so that when said first
magnet rotates relative to said second magnet, a radial
torque results that urges said door to rotate to the closed
position.
. 4,434,525
HINGE HAVING OPEN CURVED PORTIONS
Henri M. R. Labclle, Cornwall, Canada, assignor 4o Martlnniy
Industries Ltd., Cornwall, Canada
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 141,277, Apr. 18, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 917,154,
Jun. 20, 1978, abandoned. This appUcation Apr. 1, 1982, Ser. No.
364,312
Int a.3 E05D 1/04
VS. a. 16—355 9 Claims
»v-
1. A hinge having first and second elongated hinge members;
the first hinge member having a base portion and a curved
guide spaced from one side of the base portion; a long, curved,
first arm extending from the one side of the base portion in one
direction about the curved guide and concentric therewith; a
web, spaced inwardly from the free end of the first arm, con-
necting the curved guide to the first arm; a short, curved
second arm extending from the one side of the base in an
opposite direction to the first arm; the second hinge member
having a base portion with a long, curved, third arm extending
from one side of the base portion in one direction and a long
curved fourth arm extending from the one side in the opposite
direction to the third arm; the third and fourth arms curving
toward each other and having a gap between their free ends,
the first and second hinge members adapted to slidably inter-
connect with the curved guide located within the fourth arm,
the fourth arm located within the first and second arms, and
the first arm located within the third arm; the arms having a
length such that with the interconnected hinge members in a
closed position, with the base portions located on the same side
of the curved guide, the third arm slightly overlaps the first
arm; and with the interconnected hinge members in an open
position, with the base portions nearly aligned on opposite
sides of the curved guide, the second arm slightly overlaps the
fourth arm.
4,434,526
DEVICE FOR SEPARATING AND PROCESSING THE
GIZZARDS OF SLAUGHTERED POULTRY
MartlBiis P. G. van MU, Bozmeer, Netherlands, assignor to
Stork PMT BV, Netherlands
FUed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,531
Claims priority, appUcation Netherbuds, Mar. 4, 1981,
8101055
Int a.J A22C 27/Oa 21/06
VS. a. 17—11 6 Claims
1. A device for separating gizzards from the connected
intestines of slaughtered poultry comprising side-by-side paral-
lel synchronously counter-rotating elongated substantially
cylindrical bar elements, a continuous spiral raised conveyor
element for gizzards on one of said bar elements turning there-
with, plural circumferentially equidistantly spaced longitudinal
rows of ribs on the other bar element, the ribs in the rows being
equidistantly spaced longitudinally and being of equal lengths
and being adapted to enter into spaces between adjacent con-
16
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
volutions of said spiral raised conveyor element, the tips of said
ribs wipingly contacting the cylindrical surface of the rotating
bar element having the spiral raised conveyor element thereon,
the engaging surfaces of the ribs and the rotating bar element
having the spiral, raised conveyor element thereon being
adapted to mutually yield during engagement elastically,
means at the upstream ends of said bar elements to deliver
gizzards with attached intestines onto the upstream ends of the
bar elements, and means at the downstream ends of the bar
elements to complete the separation of gizzards from the intes-
tines.
4,434^27
SAUSAGE SKIN STORAGE AND FEEDER APPARATUS
FOR A SAUSAGE STUFHNG MACHINE
Georg Staudenrausdi, Rissegg, and Hans-Ernst Weerth, Winter-
stettenstadt, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Al-
bert Handtmann GmbH ft Co., Biberach, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,897
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Gerraaay, May 24,
1980, 3019981
Int. a.3 A22C 11/00; B65G 41/12
UA CL 17-33 20 Claims
4 434 528
PROCESS AND APPARATUs'fOR MAKING PARTIALLY
FILLED AIR-FREE SAUSAGE CASINGS
Herbert Niedecker, Am Ellerhang 6, D 6240 KSnigrtein 2, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,264
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 27,
1981,3121101
Lit a.3 A22C 11/02
UA a. 17-49 J Claims
1. In the filling of a sausage casing initially closed at one end
and closing the second end of the casing on a machine having
filling means and means for closing the casing, wherein the
casing is filled to less than its entire volumetric capacity and
thereafter is closed at its second end, the improvement which
comprises first tightly filling the casing beginning with the first
end, when the desired amount of filling has been supplied
compressing the casing laterally between its two ends while
permitting the casing to advance forwardly to provide addi-
tional casing material to accommodate the filling displaced by
the compression, the additional casing material sliding past the
locus of partial closure, and thereafter closing the second end.
1. A sausage skin storage and feeder apparatus for a sausage
stuffing machine, comprising a storage container for storing a
plurality of layers of sausage skins folded bellows-fashion in
their longitudinal direction, said storage container having a
bottom wall, power-operated conveyor means for slowly ad-
vancing the lowermost layer of sausage skins in said container
transversely of their length over a distance corresponding to a
multiple of their diameter in a first direction along the bottom
wall of the storage container toward a withdrawal location at
the end of the container, the bottom wall of the container being
upwardly inclined in the first direction at an angle to the hori-
zontal at least equal to a flow angle permitting the sausage
skins overiying the lowermost layer to roll backwards in said
container in a second direction opposite said first direction, a
chute extending from said withdrawal location to a location
adjacent a stufFer barrel for receiving the lowermost layer of
sausage skins from the conveyor means and for storing a plu-
rality of sausage skins, means for dispensing individual sausage
skins from the chute and for mounting them one at a time on
the stufTer barrel, and means in said container adjacent said
withdrawal location for removing surplus sausage skins and
causing them to be conveyed in said second direction in said
container when said chute is filled with sausage skins.
4 434 529
SAUSAGE DIAMETER MONITORING APPARATUS AND
METHOD
Ronald W. Jensen, Chicago, 111., assignor to Oscar Mayer Foods
Corporation, Madison, Wis.
FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,776
Int. a. J A22C 11/00
U.S. a. 17-49 17 Claims
10. A method for monitoring the difference of the diameter
of sausages from a selected standard diameter, as the sausages
are carried by a conveyor away from the sausage stuffing
apparatus, the method comprising:
contacting the surface of a sausage as the sausage moves
along the conveyor with a sausage contact member which
is mounted at a fixed position along the conveyor but is
movable toward and away from the conveyor;
detecting the change in position of the contact member as
the sausage diameter differs;
numerically displaying the difference between the sausage
diameter and the selected standard diameter; and
triggering said numerical displaying step, said triggering
step including contacting an end of the sausage at a loca-
tion along the conveyor that is spaced from the sausage
contact member by a selected distance.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
17
4,434,530
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF HIGHLY '
SHRINKABLE SPLIT TOWS OF ACRYLONITRILE
POLYMERS
Ralf Miessen; Hans Wilsing, and Fritz Schultze-Gebhardt, all of
Dormagen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktien-
geseUschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 241,199
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 15,
1980, 3010045
Int. a.3 DOIG 1/08; DOIF 6/16
U.S. a. 19—0.46 10 Claims
1. An improved process for the production of high-shrink-
age stretch-broken tows of acrylonitrile polymers by spinning,
drawing and stretch breaking in the usual way, comprising
fixing with saturated steam at maximum temperature of 140* C.
after drawing and before stretch breaking and stretch breaking
at a draft of at least 30% whereby the resultant stretch broken
yam has a shrinkage of at least 30%.
4,434,532
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DEPOSITING
TEXTILE nBER SLIVER
Peter Ochy, Winterthur, Switaerlaad, assignor to Rieter Ma-
chine Works, Ltd., Winterthur, Switaerland
Filed May 4, 1982, Ser. No. 374,880
Qaims priority, application Switaerland, May 4, 1981,
2873/81
Int Q.^ B65H i4/90
U.S. a. 19—159 R 15 Claims
4,434,531.
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE WORKING
CONDITIONS IN A PROCESSING MACHINE OF THE
STAPLE nBER SPINNING PLANT
Giancarlo Mondini, Winterthur, Switzerland, assignor to Rieter
Machine Works, Ltd., Winterthur, Switzerland
Division of ^r. No. 179,291, Dec. 11, 1979, Pat. No. 4,384,388.
ThU application Jun. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 389,480
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Apr. 25, 1978,
4442/78
Int. a.3 DOIG 15/12
U.S. a. 19—99 22 Qaims
1. An apparatus for depositing a textile fiber sliver in a can,
said apparatus comprising
a rotatable turntable for supporting a can thereon to rotate
about a first longitudinal axis;
a funnel gear wheel rotatably mounted above said turntable
on a second longitudinal axis spaced from and parallel to
said first longitudinal axis, said gear wheel having a funnel
for passage of a sliver therethrough, said funnel being
radially offset from said second axis;
means for moving said turntable relative to said gear wheel
to vary the lateral distance between said axes; and
means for varying the rotational speed of said turntable as a
function of the lateral distance between said axes whereby
said turntable is routed at a maximum speed with said
lateral distance being at a minimum and said turntable is
rotated at a minimum speed with said lateral distance
being at a maximum.
1. Apparatus for controlling the working conditions be-
tween two rotating cylinders equipped with a point clothing,
and on the cylindrical surface of which a fiber web is mutually
transferred, and which cooperate at a small mutual distance of
a processing machine of a staple fiber spinning plant, charac-
terized in that a measuring element is provided for continu-
ously or cyclically scanning a characteristic which is directly
connected with the dimensions of at least one of the two cylin-
ders and that the support members of at least one cylinder are
arranged movable mutually parallel in a plane substantially
parallel to the plane containing the axes of both cylinders, and
that moving elements for the movable support members of the
cylinder and control means are providqfl, which control the
moving elements in function of the characteristic scanned.
4,434,533
HIGH DRAFT APPARATUS FOR WORSTED SPINNING
PROCESS
Goro Ogawa, Mie, Japan, assignor to Nakagawa, Seisakusho
Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,850
Int. Q.} DOIH 5/i6
U.S. Q. 19—247 12 Qaims
1. A high draft apparatus for use in the worsted spinning
process wherein between a front roller and a back roller at the
gilling or bobinoir step of the worsted spinning process a
porcupine roller is arranged on the side of the front roller, and
an intermediate roller separate from and not engaged with the
porcupine roller is arranged on the side of theNui^lK roller
between the back roller and separate porcupine ri^lWro con-
struct a series of a draft apparatus. ^
18
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4*434,534
HOLDING-DOWN AND CLAMPING DEVICE FOR
SHACKLE MECHANISMS
Antbooy Handler, MiihllMcliergMM 14, VUmu, Austria A-
1130 ?
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,291
Claims priority, application Anstria, Feb. 4, 1981, 491/81
Int a.J B42F WOO. 3/00. 1/00
U.S. a. 24-47.1 5 cUdnM
1. A clamping device for a paper filing system having at least
two spaced apart sheet reciving shackles for receiving
punched paper, each shackle having two legs, which com-
prises a substantially flat body portion having at least two
spaced L-shaped apertures having two legs, the spacing be-
tween the apertures at corresponding portions thereof corre-
sponding to the spacing between the sheet receiving shackles,
the shackles lying in parallel planes and one leg of each aper-
ture extending parallel to the planes containing the shackles
and the other leg of each aperture extending transversely to
said planes, the transverse legs being aligned one with the
other, the body portion also having two hock portions, one
associated with each aperture in the body portion and each
defining a bite for receiving one leg of the shackles, the hook
portions extending substantially parallel to the transverse legs
of the associated apertures and the spacing between each hook
portion and its associated transverse leg being substantially
equal to the spacing of the two legs of each shackle so that the
clamping device may be clamped to the shackles when one
shackle leg is engaged in the transverse leg of the aperture and
the other shackle leg is engaged in the associated hook portion
bite.
4,434,535
CLOTHES PEG
Raymond L. Woodley, 20 Nook Road, Scholes, Leeds LS15
4BU, Yorkshire, England
FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,448
Int a.3 D06F 7/00
UAa.24-5«2R 7Qatett
centrally located longitudinally extending rib which has a
generally flat face lying parallel to the inner face of the limb so
that the flat face of the rib and the portions of the limb face on
opposite sides of the rib, form a clothes line engaging face.
4,434,536
LOCKING SNAP HOOK
Terraace L. Schmidt, Littleton, and Wayne L. Olson, Evergreen,
both of Colo., assignors to Rose Manufacturing Company.
Englewood, Colo.
FUed Oct. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 433^73 /^-\
Int a.3 A44B 13/02 )
UA a 24-241 PP TOt^m/
'",« r*».
1. A locking snap hook comprising:
a snap hook body having an open hook shaped end having
pivotally attached thereto a spring biased latching means
for closing the open portion of the hook;
said spring biased latching means including a latch body,
spring means within said latch body for urging said latch
body into a position where the open hook shaped end of
the snap book body is closed by said latch body; and
locking means at least partially received within said latch
body and cooperating with said snap hook body and with
the spring means and the latch body for alternatively
permitting opening and closing of the open portion of the
hook shaped end of the snap hook body by said latching
means; and
wherein said locking means is capable of occupying at least
two different positions and when in a first position a por-
tion of said locking means rests in a recess in said snap
hook body proximate to the pivbtal attachement of said
* latch body to said snap hook body, while another portion
or said locking means engages a portion of said body in a
manner to interfere with the movement thereof and when
in a second position said locking means rests in said recess
in said snap hook body in a manner such that the remain-
der of said locking means does not interfere with the
movement of said latch body; and
said spring means within said latch body cooperates with
said locking means, said latch body and said snap hook
body so as to urge movement of said latching means about
its pivot connection to the snap hook body to effect clo-
sure of the open portion of the hook shaped end with the
latch body.
1. A one-piece plastics clothes peg comprising a pair of limbs
which engage over a clothes line to grip clothes thereto, said
limbs extending from a shoulder region so as to converge to an
open end and to be resiliently spread when the peg is pushed
over the clothes line, and wherein at least one of the inner faces
of the limbs adjacent the shoulder region is flat and has a
4,434,537
INTEGRAL LATCHING MECHANISM FOR MODULE
FRONT PLATE
Thomas R. Bean, Concord; Edward F. Stockmaster, Mentor, and
George S. Whaley, Eastlake, all of Ohio, assignors to The
Babcock A WUcox Company, New Orleans, La.
FUed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,262
Int a^ G12B 9/00: H05K 1/14. 7/12
U.S. a. 24-380 „ ctal^
11. A method for latching and unlatching to and from a
mounting rack a circuit board module having a module front
plate and being slidably disposed in the mounting rack having
a latch aperture comprising the steps of:
providing a finger hold on a lower portion of the module
front plate which finger hold extends from the module
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
19
front plate in a direction away from the circuit board
defining a forwardly direction;
providing a resilient tab integrally connected with the finger
hold and extending in a direction toward the circuit board
defining a rearwardly direction;
providing a prong including a shaft extending rearwardly
from the resilient tab and terminating in a portion defining
an head having a shoulder forwardly thereof;
deflecting said resilient tab to align said head with said aper-
ture;
1. A bottom stop applying and gapping apparatus for a slide
fastener chain having a pair of support tapes each carrying on
and along its one longitudinal edge a row of fastener coupling
elements, which apparatus comprises a punch assembly includ-
ing a clamping punch and a cutting punch integral therewith,
a die assembly including a clamping die and a cutting die
integral therewith, said punch assembly and said die assembly
cooperating in applying a bottom stop to the fastener chain and
simultaneously gapping the chain at predetermined intervals,
and a means for positioning and holding a group of fastener
coupling elements on the chain, said means comprising a crank
arm resUiently supported on a machine frame and having two
parallel prongs spaced by a distance corresponding to the
transverse width of a coupled set of fastener elements and have
respective flat bottoms engageable with the support tapes, said
crank arm having at one of its ends a link, a spring member
connecting said link to the machine frame and normally biasing
said crank arm toward said die assembly.
ftiUy inserting the circuit board module in the rack and said
head of said prong through the aperture;
releasing said resilient tab to allow said shoulder to engage
said rack to preclude withdrawal of said module there-
from;
gripping said finger hold and said resilient tab to deflect said
resilient tab toward said finger hold to align said head with
said aperture; and
withdrawing said head of said prong through the aperture
and the circuit board module from the rack.
4,434,538
BOTTOM STOP APPLYING AND GAPPING APPARATUS
FOR A SLIDE FASTENER CHAIN
Tatsuo Osaki, Uozu, Japan, assignor to Yoshida Kogyo K.K.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264^09
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 28, 1980, 55*
73689[U]
Int a.3 B21D 53/i6
U.S. Q. 29— 33 J 7 Claims
4,434,539
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A HEAT EXCHANGER
David M. Sanborn, RosweU, and Andrew L. Blackshaw, Dun*
woody, both of Ga., assignors to E-Tech, Inc., Atlanta, Ga.
Division of Ser. No. 202,888, Nov. 3, 1980, Pat. No. 4,316,502.
This appUcation Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,180
Int a.i B23P 15/26
U.S. a. 29—157.3 V 12 Claims
""^mmrnvm
1. A method of forming a heat transfer coil comprising the
steps of:
(a) winding first and second pieces of tubing helically around
a winding mandrel to form a coil so that the second piece
of tubing lies against said first piece of tubing with both
the pieces of tubing lying in generally the same radial
plane around the winding mandrel where each of the
pieces of tubing is deformed into a non-circular shape and
the passage through at least one of the pieces of tubing has
a deformed cross-sectional area smaller than the desired
cross-sectional area the passage is to have when the heat
transfer coil is completed; and,
(b) internally pressurizing at least the piece of tubing having
the passage with the deformed cross-sectional area smaller
than the desired cross-sectional area while the tubing is
maintained in the helical configuration to non-elastically
deform both pieces of tubing to change the cross-sectional
areas of the passages through the pieces of tubing to a
desired final size while maintaining intimate physical
contact between the pieces of tubing.
4,434,540
PROCESS FOR REPAIRING OR MODIFYING
REFRACTORY PLATES OF LADLE CASTING
CASSETTES
Romano CappcUi, MUah, Italy, assignor to USS Engineers and
Consultants, Inc., Pittsbuixh, Pa.
■ FUed Oct 5, 1981, Sw . No. 308,733
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Aug. 7, 1981, 23358 A/80
Int a.} B22D 11/10
U.S. a 29—402.11 6 Claims
1. A method of renovating a spent orificed slide gate of a
sliding gate valve for use in controlling the flow of molten
metal, said slide gate comprising a flat, elongated refractory
plate having a sliding face on one side thereof, a flow passage
through the interior portion of the plate and a refractory dis-
charge nozzle forming an extension of said flow passage being
integral with and depending from the other side of said refrac-
tory plate, said method comprising the steps of:
/
20
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
(a) boring said flow passage to remove areas of wear, said
boring being to a greater diameter through said plate and
part way along said discharge nozzle and to a smaller
diameter along the remainder of said flow passage
through said discharge nozzle;
(b) securing a prefabricated refractory insert ring having an
axial length greater than the thickness of said plate in said
greater diameter portion of said boring;
(c) positioning an elongate tubular former concentrically
within said smaller diameter portion of said boring; and
(d) filling the space between said former and the confronting
inside wall of said smaller diameter boring portion with
cementitious material to form a lining through said dis-
charge nozzle.
4,434^1
ELECTROMAGNETIC SHIELDING
Donald H. Powers, Jr^ Needham, Mass., assignor to Chomerics,
Inc^ Wobum, Mass.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,069
Int. a.3 B23P 79/00; HOIP 7/00. 77/00
y A a. 29-526 R 10 Claims
CONDUCTIVE
PLASTIC
1. The method of providing electromagnetic shielding be-
tween two surfaces which comprises placing an electromag-
netic energy shieldjjetween said two surfaces, said electromag-
netic energy shield having a volume resistivity to be effective
as an electromagnetic energy shield, said shield having dis-
persed therein electrically conductive irregularly shaped parti-
cles, said particles comprising an outer surface of silver on a
sensitizing layer of tin which is on an aluminum central core,
said tin being present on said aluminum in an amount sufficient
to provide a surface to which the silver may be placed thereon,
said particles having the ability to withstand 120* C. for 120
hours without exhibiting substantial loss in conductivity.
togues defining a longitudinal contact slot, said tool compris-
ing:
a handle grip member comprising a hollow housing;
a striker mechanism within said housing, said striker mecha-
nism comprising:
a Slider mounted for selective longitudinal movement
with respect to said housing;
a rear compression spring normally biasing said slider
forwardly with respect to said housing;
a ram member mounted to said housing for selective longitu-
dinal movement with respect thereto, the rearward end of
said ram being detachable coupled to said slider for longi-
13 ltd
tudii^l movement therewith, the forward end of said ram
projecting outwardly from the forward end of said hous-
ing;
a longitudinally slotted pressing plate mounted on the for-
ward end of said ram, said plate being adapted to trans-
versely urge the wire into the contact slot in the terminal,
said pressing plate being formed with stop means for
limiting the depth of insertion of the wire into the contact
slot;
a scissors blade pivotably mounted to said ram; and
means on said housing for pivoting said blade to sever the
wire a predetermined distance from said terminal upon
insertion of the wire therein.
4,434543
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING ADJACENT TUBS
IMPLANTED WITH DOPANT IONS IN THE
MANUFACTURE OF LSI COMPLEMENTARY MOS
HELD EFFECT TRANSISTORS
Ulrich Schwabe, Munich, and Erwin Jacobs, Vaterstetten, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 438,903
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 11.
1981, 3149185
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/263. 21/22; BOIJ 77/00
U.S. a. 29-576 B 15 claims
4,434,542
TOOL FOR ELECTRICALLY CONNECTING INSULATED
WIRES
Horst Forberg; Hermann Herfort; Gunter Hegner, and Manfred
MiiUer, aU of Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Krone GmbH, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,699
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 20.
1960, 8013494{U]
lot a.} HOIR 43/00
MS. a. 29-566.4 9 Qaims
1. A tool for electrically connecting an insulated wire to a
terminal element having two oppositely disposed resilient
1. In a method for producing adjacent tubs implanted with
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
21
doping material ions in the manufacture of LSI complemenury
MOS field effect transistor circuits, with which, for the accep-
tance of the n- or, respectively, p- channel transistors of the
circuit in a silicon substrate (1), p-doped or respectively, n-
doped tubs (5, 8) arc produced in an epitaxial layer (2) applied
to the substrate (1), with the corresponding dopant material
atoms being introduced into said tubs by means of multiple ion
implantations (6, 9, 10, 16, 21, 23) for defining the different
transistor threshold voltages and whereby masking for the
individual ion implantations occurs by structures composed of
a material selected from the group consisting of photosensitive
resist, silicon oxide and silicon nitride, wherein the improve-
ment comprises a sequence of the following steps:
(a) producing a p-tub (5) by a boron ion implantation (6) in
a n-doped epitaxial layer (2) applied onto a n^ -doped
substrate (1) and covered with an oxide layer (3), after
carrying out a masking of the remaining regions with a
silicon nitride mask (4);
(b) stripping off the oxide layer (3) while undertaking a
deliberate underetching (25) of the silicon nitride layer (4);
(c) conducting a local oxidation process and diffusing the
implanted boron ions down to a penetration depth xjp,
which is in the range of the epitaxial layer (2) thickness;
(d) stripping off the silicon nitride mask (4);
(e) producing a n-tub (8) by a implantation (9) of phospho-
rous or arsenic ions and subequently diffusing the so-
implanted ions to a significantly lower penetration depth
Xj„ than the depth of the p-tub (x/p), so that xjp is ^4x/i|.
4,434,544
MULTILAYER QRCUTT AND PROCESS FOR
MANUFACTURING THE SAME
Akihiro Dobya; Yasuhiko Hino, and Mitsuo Abe, all of Tokyo,
Japan, assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 232,051, Feb. 5, 1981, abandoned. This
application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,636
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 25, 1980, 5^22471;
Feb. 25, 1980, 55-22472
Int a.3 HOIL 29/46
U.S. a. 29—578 10 Claims
ClSi
V II
.ss^
V/////////////. /:■,■/. -.X
1. A process for manufacturing a multilayer circuit compris-
ing the steps of:
depositing a layer consisting of a base metal on a heat-resist-
ant insulating substrate;
depositing a thin film layer of a first noble metal on said layer
of base metal;
depositing a conducting layer of second noble metal on a
predetermined region of said thin film layer of said first
noble metal;
converting the remaining region, not covered by said con-
ducting layer, of said base metal into an insulating metal
oxide by oxidizing at a high temperature, said oxidizing
step also producing an alloy of said first noble metal and
said second noble metal; and
removing the remaining region, not covered by said con-
ducting layer, of said thin film layer of said first noble
metal by etching with an etching solution ineffective for
etching the alloy of said first noble metal and said second
noble metal.
4,434,545
METHOD FOR ASSEMBLING DYNAMOELECTRIC
MACHINE END SHIELD PARTS
James M. Tomson, Fort Wayne, Ind., assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Fort Wayne, Ind.
Division of Ser. No. 128,085, Mar. 7, 1980, Pat. No. 4^48,791.
This application Jul. 16, 1962, Ser. No. 399,121
Int. a.» H02K 15/14
U.S. a. 29—596 3 Clalou
1. A method of lifting the end frame of a dynamoelectric
machine from a conveyor at an oil well cover assembly work
station; wherein the end frame includes a centrally disposed
bearing supporting portion and laterally extending portions, at
least some of which are susceptible of being supported on
conveyor means; the method comprising; moving an end frame
on the conveyor means into proximity with a lift mechanism
and guiding the end frame in the vicinity of the lift mechanism
with guide means; aligning the end frame with the lift mecha-
nism and arresting movement of the end frame with a lift
mechanism by moving a latch mechanism into the path of
movement of the end frame by moving an inclined surface
thereof into interfering relation with a portion of the end frame
so that movement of the end frame up the incline will at least
tend to raise a portion of the end frame from the conveyor;
engaging the end shield in the vicinity of the bearing support^
ing portion thereof while holding the end frame in engagement
with the conveyor means with the guide means; elevating the
end frame above the conveyor means with the lift mechanism
while continuing to engage the end frame with the guide means
and thereby holding the end frame against the lift mechanism;
performing a work operation on the end frame at the work
station between the time !h«t the lift mechanism elevates the
end frame from the conveyor means and a subsequent time at
which the lift mechanism has redeposited the end frame on the
conveyor means; and further comprising: grasping an oil well
cover about a cylindrical periphery thereof, moving the oil
well cover into overlying and aligned relationship with the
centrally disposed bearing supporting portion of the end frame
while the end frame is held stopped by the latch mechanism
over the lift mechanism and while the end shield is supported
on the conveyor means; thereafter elevating the lift mechanism
and guide means as set forth hereinabove, and inserting the
centrally disposed bearing supporting portion of the end frame
into the oil well cover while lifting the end frame from the
conveyor, and thereby effecting assembly of the oil well cover
and end frame; releasing the oil well cover; and only thereafter
lowering the lift mechanism.
22
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4M4346
METHOD OF MAKING A CORE
DoTM D. Herahberger, Sycamore, Dl^ assignor to General
ElecMc Company, Port Wayne, Ind.
Division of Ser. No. 77,784, Sep. 21, 1979, Pat No. 4,327^2.
This appUcation Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,536
Int. a.3 H02K J5/02
VS, a. 29—598 35 claims
M^**!"!'".
I
II*
^?^^^E]
1. A method of making a core adapted to be used in a dyna-
moelectric machine, the core having a plurality of laminations
with each lamination respectively including a body of gener-
ally thin ferromagnetic material, an inner peripheral edge and
an outer peripheral edge on the body, a plurality of openings
through the body and spaced apart generally thereabout, each
opening having a pair of leg parts with a pair of end portions
spaced apart generally adjacent the outer peripheral edge and
a common end edge opposite the end portion pair spaced
generally adjacent the inner peripheral edge, a plurality of first
pole sections on the body between adjacent ones of the open-
ings and the inner and outer peripheral edges, a plurality of
means on the body between the inner peripheral edge and the
common edge of the openings for integrally interconnecting
with the first pole sections, a plurality of second pole sections
on the body between the leg part pair of the openings and
extending from the outer peripheral edge generally toward the
common end edge, a pair of opposite seats on the second pole
sections extending into the leg part pair, and a plurality of
means on the body between the outer peripheral edge and the
end portion pair of the openings for bridging between the
second pole sections and the ones adjacent thereto of the first
pole sections, respectively, and a plurality of pairs of magnetic
material elements, the method comprising the steps of:
stacking the laminations and aligning the openings with each
other so as to define a plurality of corresponding slots
extending through the laminations in the stack thereof,
respectively;
disposing the magnetic material element pairs within the leg
part pairs of the slots and engaging the magnetic material
element pairs with the opposite seat pair on the second
pole sections, respectively;
deforming the bridging means pairs and moving thereby the
second pole sections with respect to the adjacent ones of
the first pole sections so as to insure abutting engagement
• of the magnetic material element pairs between the second
pole sections and the adjacent ones of the first pole sec-
tions, respectively;
providing in the slots a nonmagnetic hardenable material so
as to at least generally fill the interstices of the slots be-
tween the magnetic material element pairs therein, the
second pole sections and the adjacent ones of the first pole
! sections and forming a pair of opposite end rings of the
hardenable material adjacent a pair of opposite ends of the
lamination stack, with the hardenable material of the end
rings being integral with that in the slots, respectively;
solidifying the hardenable material;
removing a part of the deformed bridging means pairs so as
to disjoin the second pole sections from the adjacent ones
of the first pole sections, respectively; and
machining the outer peripheral edges of the laminations in
the stack thereof to provide the core with a preselected
outside diameter, respectively.
4434547
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE AND
ADJUSTMENT OF A JOSEPHSON EFFECT MAGNETIC
FLUX PICK-UP
Daniel Pascal, Orsay, and Denis Duret, Grenoble, both of
France, assignors to Commissariat a I'Energie Atomique.
Paris, France
FUed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 323,534
Claims priority, application France, May 5, 1980, 80 09968
Int. aj HOIL 39/24
U.S. a. 29-599 15 cudnu
1. Process for manufacturing and adjusting a Josephson
effect magnetic flux pick-up, comprising depositing a thin,
uniform layer (1) of a superconducting material on a cylindri-
cal insulating bar (2) having an axis and a cylindrical surface,
then making a cut (5) through the layer of superconducting
material on a line along the cylindrical surface of the cylindri-
cal bar (2), which line is parallel to the axis of the cylindrical
bar, while leaving a bridge (7) between two edges of the layer
of superconducting material defined by the cut, then subjecting
the pickup thus manufactured to pulses for adjustment of the
critical current, by induction, and measuring, by induction, the
parameters of the pick-up.
4434548
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING PLUG-IN
ELECTRICAL FUSES
David G. E. Beswick, Warminster, England, aasignor to Kenneth
E. Beswick Limited, Fromc, England
per No. PCr/GB80/00209, § 371 Date Jul. 27, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 27, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01627, PCT Pub.
Date Jun. 11, 1981
PCT FUed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 286^15
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 3. 1979.
7941694
Int a.J HOIH 69/02
U.S. a. 29—623 13 Claims
1. A method of manufacturing a plug-in electrical fuse of the
type in which the fusible element is disposed within an insulat-
ing housing and is electrically connected between the adjacent
ends of two spaced substantially-coplanar blade-like terminals
secured within and projecting from the housing comprising the
steps of:
forming a generally H-shaped terminal blank from sheet
metal material, said blank having laminar uprights inte-
grally joined by a laminar cross-bar portion,
folding said H-shaped blank about an axis substantially paral-
lel to said cross-bar portion of said blank to dispose upper
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
23
and lower laminar portions of said uprights of said H-
shaped blank in generally mutually opposed relationship,
locating a fusible element so that it is disposed between the
opposed laminar portions of said blank,
flattening said opposed laminar portions together with said
fusible element disposed therebetween to form an assem-
bly including blade-like terminal portions of double lami-
from said matrix to form an individual infrared sensing
device.
nar construction having said fusible element electrically
connected therebetween,
mounting said assembly in an insulating housing with said
fusible element disposed within said housing and the lead-
ing ends of said blade-like terminal portions projecting
therefrom, and
severing said cross-bar portion from between said terminal
portions.
4434 549
METHOD OF MAKING AN IMPROVED
PYROELECTRIC SENSOR
Peter R. Smith, Littleton, and Charles Coleman, Lakewood, both
of Colo., assignors to Statitrol, Inc., Lakewood, Colo.
Division of Ser. No. 205,146, Nov. 10, 1980, Pat. No. 4,379,971.
This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,002
Int. a.3 H05K 3/30
VJS. a. 29—832 4 claims
1. A method of making a infrared sensing device including
the steps of:
a. mounting a sheet of thin film pyroelectric material in a
peripheral holding frame;
b. forming a symetrical pattern of electrodes on both sides of
said thin film material and properly aligning the respective
electrodes on each side to form a plurality of individual
infrared sensors;
c. coating the entire outer surface of one side of said thin film
material with a layer of energy absorbing material, said
absorbing material being transparent to all energy outside
of the infrared band but capable of absorbing and convert-
ing to heat energy all energy within this band;
d. forming an equal number of sensor holders sized and
symetrically positioned to correspond to and receive said
plurality of infrared sensors, said holders being joined
together in an integral matrix and each of said holders
having a central opening formed therein; <
e. adhering the sheet of thin film to the surface of the holder
matrix with the coated surface in contact with the surface
of the matrix, said sheet being properly positioned so that
each infrared sensor is precisely aligned with a holder and
its central opening; and
f. separating each holder and iu attached infrared sensor
4,434,550
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INSERTION OF
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS INTO A aRCUTT BOARD
Heinz Wilke, Diekholzen, and KUus-Uwc Fonck, Hildeabeim,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Blaupunkt*Werkt
GmbH, Hildeabeim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,426
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 28.
1980,3044860
Int. a.J H05K 3/00; B23P 79/00
U.S. a. 29-837 7 cuims
1. Method of insertion of electrical network components (3),
having at least one connection wire (7), into a printed circuit
board (2) formed with receiving holes (4, 5) therethrough,
in which the network componenu are gripped by an inser-
tion gripper (16) and moved towards the printed circuit
board, with the at least one wire thereof extending essen-
. tially perpendiculariy to the plane of the printed circuit
board,
and in which the printed circuit board is aligned with respect
to the at least connection wire so that the receiving holes
are in essential alignment therewith,
comprising, in accordance with the invention, the steps of
guiding at least one thin-walled tube (8) to and through
the holes (4, 5) of the printed circuit board from the side
remote from said gripper means (16) until the at least one
tube extends out of the plane of the printed circuit board
at the side close to the gripper means and beyond said
plane;
introducing the at least one connection wire (7) into the at
least one tube (8) by moving the gripper means towards
the printed circuit t>oard;
releasing the network component from the gripper meani to
permit the component, with the at least one connection
wire in the tube, to drop;
and withdrawing the tube (8) from the hole to thereby intro-
duce the at least one connection wire into the hole, and
continuing to withdraw the at least one tube until it clears
the connection wire.
4. Apparatus for insertion of electrical network components
(3) having at least one connection wire (7) into a printed circuit
board (2) formed with at least one receiving hole (4, 5) there-
through,
and having an insertion gripper means (16) positioned above
the printed circuit board, and movable towards the
printed circuit board, for gnpping a network component
(3) with iu insertion wire (7) extending essentially perpen-
dicularly to the plane of the printed circuit board, and in
alignment with a receiving hole (4, 5) through the printed
circuit board,
comprising, in accordance with the invention,
/
24
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a holder or carrier (6) positioned below the printed circuit
board, and movable upwardly towards the printed circuit
board;
a thin-walled tube (8) extending upwardly from the holder
or carrier and in alignment with the receiving hole (4, 5)
and of sufficient length to extend upwardly through and
beyond the upper surface of the printed circuit board
upon movement of the holder or carrier to an upper posi-
tion, while clearing the printed circuit board upon move-
ment of the holder or carrier (6) to a lower position to
permit introduction of the tube (8) through the hole and
insertion of the connection wire (7) of the component into
the tube (8) extending above and beyond the upper surface
of the printed circuit board, and subsequent withdrawal of
the tube through the hole (4, 5) and lowering of the com-
ponent towards the top surface of the printed circuit
board, and subsequent withdrawal of the tubes (8) from
the printed circuit board to effect positioning of the con-
nection wire (7) through the hole (4, 5) of the printed
circuit board.
for actuating the terminating means, the improvement com-
prising: ry
wire hold-down means which are integral with said termi-
nating means and which move linearly in unison with said
actuating means, said wire hold-down means being used
for applying a clamping force to said conductors only
during termination thereof
4434552
METHOD OF MAKING a'pIN TYPE ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR CONTACT
Robert W. Brush, Sr., Unadilla, and R. Amelia PiscitelU, Sidney,
both of N.Y., assignors to The Bcndix Corporation, South-
field, Mich.
FUed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,757
Int. a.J HOIR 43/00
U A a. 29-876 , Claim
4,434 551 I
CONDUCTOR TERMINATION APPARATCS
Ifarley R. Holt, Forest Park, lU., assignor to Allied Corpora-
tioB, Morris Township, Morris County, N J.
CoBtiBuation-iB-|Mit of Ser. No. 2324)28, Feb. 9, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,192
Int. a.3 HOIR 43/04; B23P 79/00
U.S. a. 29-861 37 chdms
1. A method for terminating a plurality of conductors to a
corresponding plurality of contacts mounted in a connector
body comprising the steps of:
A. supporting said connector body at a loading station;
B. aligning retention means with a group of said contacts
corresponding to a portion of said connector body and
inserting a group of said conductors in said retention
means;
C. transporting said corresponding portion of said connector
body along with said retention means to a termination
station and efTecting termination of said group of conduc-
tors to said group of contacts; and
D. sequentially performing steps B and C on succeeding
groups of said conductors and said contacts correspond-
ing to succeeding portions of said connector body until
said plurality of conductors has been terminated to said
plurality of contacts.
3. In an apparatus for terminating a plurality of conductors
to a corresponding plurality of contacts mounted in a connec-
tor body, the apparatus including terminating means for effect-
ing termination of the conductors to the contacts, and means
1. A method of making a two piece pin type electrical con-
nector contact comprising the steps of:
stamping from a sheet of metal a rectangular shaped piece;
forming said rectangular piece into a sleeve having an axial
opening running the entire length of said sleeve, a rear
open end portion and a forward closed end pin shaped
portion, the diameter of the opened end portion being
greater than the diameter of the closed end portion of said
sleeve;
cold drawing from a piece of metal a tubular member having
a rear open end portion, an enlarged middle portion hav-
ing a forwardly facing shoulder and a rearwardly facing
shoulder, and a forward closed end pin shaped portion,
said diameters of said forward and rear end portions of
said tubular member being slightly less than the respective
diameters of said forward and rear end portions of said
sleeve;
radially compressing said sleeve so that the axial opening in
said sleeve is reduced, thereby reducing the diameter of
the forward and rear portions of said sleeve;
inserting said sleeve into ^d tubular member so that the
closed end portion of said tubular member surrounds the
closed end portion of said sleeve; and
punching a wire stop and inspection hole through said sleeve
and member in the open end portions thereof
4,434,553
DRY-SHAVING APPARATUS HAVING A TRIMMER
Werner Kness, Klagenfurt, Austria, assignor to U.S. Philips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,872
Claims priority, appUcation Austria, May 5, 1981, 1983-8i
Int. Q\? B26B 19/38
U.S. a. 30-34.1 3 Claims
1. A dry-shaving apparatus which comprises a housing sec-
tion having an opening formed therein; a trimmer constructed
as a flat unit and arranged on said housing section so as to be
slidable between at least two positions, the trimmer unit being
mounted in said opening; two lateral guide portions formed on
the trimmer unit and extending parallel to each other and to the
sliding direction of the trimmer unit; guides formed on the
housing section and respectively co-operating with said guide
portions, said guides, viewed in the sliding direction, being
arranged near one end of the opening; a bridge arranged near
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
25
the other end of the opening and extending across said opening
transversely of the sliding direction, said bridge engaging the
trimmer unit from the inside of the housing section; and a
resilient strip extending from the trimmer unit in the sliding
direction and projecting intrf the interior of the housing section
\
i
/
>
i
2t -r
f
1
I
-J
I'
being a jaw, said jaws being moved between a closed position
adjacent each other and an open position spaced from each
other in response to relative pivotal movement of said first and
second members; said blade being releasably secured to said
jaw of said first member, projecting therefrom toward said jaw
of said second member, and having a cutting edge facing said
jaw of said second member; said jaw of said second member
having means defining a V-shaped surface which faces and
opens toward said blade and which has therein a deep, elongate
towards the bridge, the normal distance, measured in the slid-
ing direction, between the free end of the strip and those ends
of the guide portions remote from said free end of the strip being
greater than the clearance between the bridge and those ends
of the guides facing said bridge.
4,434,554
OPTICAL HBER STRIPPING DEVICE
Kenneth N. KorbehUi, Jackson, N J., assignor to GK Technolo-
gies, Incorporated, Greenwich, Conn.
Filed Jun. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 393,378
Int. a.3 H02G J/J2
U.S. CI. 30—90.8
.?/ — o
slot which is parallel to and receives said blade in said closed
5 Claims position of said jaws; and said jaw of said first member being
disposed on one side of said blade, having a fiat surface against
which said blade is disposed, having means defining a threaded
opening in said flat surface, and including a screw which has a
threaded shank engaging said threaded opening and a head
disposed against a side of said blade remote from said flat
surface, said blade being securely clamped between said flat
surface and said head of said screw.
1. A stripping tool for stripping the buffer coat from a buffer-
coated optical fiber that is characterized by overall coated
diameter of magnitude Dc on an optical fiber of diameter of
magnitude D/r, said tool comprising a base having a flat upper
surface with at least two elongate grooves therein, a knife and
knife holder having a flat bottom surface transversely spanning
said grooves and having an articulated connection to said base
suqh that in one position the cutting edge of the knife held by
said holder and the bottom of said holder are both in contact
with the flat upper surface of said base and in another position
said knife and holder are sufficiently removed from the flat
upper surface of said base to permit manually applied entry of
a length of coated optical fiber in one of said grooves, the
width of said grooves being in excess of the magnitude Dc. the
depth of one of said grooves being in a first slight excess of the
magnitude (Dc-l-Df)/2, and the depth of the other of said
grooves being in a second slight excess of the magnitude Df-
4434 556
ARRANGEMENT FOR LUBRICATING SAW CHAINS OF
POWER SAWS
Karl Nitschmann, Schorndorf; Giinther Weyda, Waiblinge-
Hohenacker; Bode Emmrich, Stuttgart, and K|ri O. Stimpfig,
Waiblingen-Beinstein, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Andreas StiU, Waiblingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,614
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 30,
1980, 3016596
Int. a.J B27B 77/72
U.S. a. 30—123.4 14 cUdms
4,434,555
CUTTER FOR FLEXIBLE PIPES
Kurt StoU, Lenzhaide 72, 7300 EssUngen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,636
Int. a.3 B26B 77/00
U.S. a. 30-92 15 Qaims
1. A hand-held cutting tool, comprising elongate first and
second members and a blade; said first and second members
being pivotally coupled to each other between their ends and
being pivotal relative to one another about an axis; one end of
each said member being a handle and the other end thereof
1. An arrangement for lubricating the saw chain of a power-
driven chain saw having a guide for accommodating and guid-
ing the saw chain, the saw chain including chip-removing
members, cutting-tooth members, and connecting members, all
of which are respectively provided with two rivet holes, said
members being interconnected in a specific pattern by means of
rivets and said rivet holes to form rivet connections, said chip-
removing members having respective extensions which run in
1040 O.G.— 2
26
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
the guide bar provided with an oil supply for lubricating the
saw chain, the arrangement comprising:
at least one groove defining an oil guide formed in the side
surface of each of said chip-removing members, the oil
guide having an inlet opening communicating with the oil
supply, the oil guide being disposed in said surface to
extend counter to the running direction of the saw chain
and to extend at an angle upwardly toward one of the
rivet holes;
each of said chip-removing members further having at least
one oil channel formed in said side surface and communi-
cating with the end of said oil guide remote from said inlet
opening; said oil channel of each of said chip-removing
members being at least partially covered by a member of
the saw chain connected to the chip-removing member;
and,
said oil channel having two ends, one end of said channel
being located in the vicinity of one of the rivet holes, and
the other end of the channel being located in the vicinity
of the other one of said rivet holes whereby oil from said
oil guide is directed to both of said rivet holes.
4,434 Ji57
INDICATOR SNAP GAGE ASSEMBLIES
Franklin Meyer, Jr, P.O. Box 1, Forestdale, R.I. 02824
FUed Dec. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 448,840
Int aj GOIB 5/08
VS. a. 33-148 R 9 Claims
a pair of frame supporting elements mounted on the frame a
fixed distance from each other along said sensitivity axis, each
of the said supporting elements having surface contacting
means engageable with the surface at point locations, means
connected to the frame for angular displacement thereof about
7* ^«,
1. An indicator snap gage head adapted to being releasably
coupled to an indicator mechanism for indicating, on the
mechanism, a graduated value of an external dimension of a
workpiece, comprising a base, a fixed jaw mounted on the base
and having a workpiece engaging surface spaced from the
base, a movable jaw pivotally mounted on the base opposite
the fixed jaw for movement in a measuring plane toward and
away from the fixed jaw, the pivot being located inwardly
towards the mechanism from the measuring plane and inter-
connecting means between the movable jaw and the indicator
mechanism including a spring-pressed plunger slidable in the
base in a direction generally perpendicular to the measuring
plane and having a tapered end engaging the movable jaw and
its opposite end adapted to be releasably coupled to the indica-
tor mechanism for urging the movable jaw toward the fixed
jaw and for translating, by the degree of its taper, the position
of the movable jaw in engagement with the workpiece into an
indication on the mechanism of the value of the dimension.
4,434,558
SURFACE PROnLE MEASURING APPARATUS AND
METHOD
Samuel A. Face, Jr., and Samuel A. Face, III, both of P.O. Box
6341, Norfolk, Va. 23508
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,714
Int a.3 GOIB 7/34
VS. a. 33—174 P 11 Claims
1. In a device for measuring flatness deviations of a surface
profile having an undulation wavelength, including a rigid
frame, an inclination sensor mounted on the frame and having
a sensitivity axis extending therethrough, and signal readout
means connected to the sensor for indicating inclination mea-
surements of said sensitivity axis, the improvement comprising
one of the point locations at which the frame may be pivoted,
and signal adjustment means connected to the signal readout
means for converting said inclination measurements into eleva-
tion differences between the surface contacting means of the
respective frame supporting elements.
4 434 559 *^
TOOL FOR GAUGING THE CORNERS OF WORKPIECES
OF SHEET METAL OR THE LIKE
Gerhard Lauer, Grosswaldstnuse 6, D-6686 Eppelbom; Alfred
Morawiez, Oderring 13, D-6610 Lebach, and Jiirgen WUd,
Am Stehlsberg 4, D.6601 Riegekberg, aU of Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed No?. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,794
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 18.
1980, 3043430
Int. a.5 GOIB 3/56
VS. a. 33-174 L 23 Clainu
1. A tool for use in a system for automatically ascertaining
the location of a comer between mutually inclined first and
second surfaces of a workpiece, especially a rounded comer of
a workpiece which is made of sheet metal, comprising: first
and second sensors; means for supporting said sensors in such
orientation that each sensor is movable toward the respective
surface of the workpiece; means for moving said sensors with
reference to said supporting means toward the respective
surfaces along first and second paths; and work contacting
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
27
means interposed between said sensors and said surfaces, said
work contacting means comprising first and second portions
movable by the respective sensors toward the corresponding
surfaces of the workpiece and adapted to yieldably abut against
said workpiece, at least said first portion being movable sub-
stantially transversely of the path of movement of the first
sensor when said first portion already engages the first surface
of the workpiece while the second portion continues to ad-
vance toward the second surface of the workpiece.
4,434,560
AIMING AID FOR AN AIMING DEVICE IN A LOW
LIGHT LEVEL ENVIRONMENT
Robert G. Comeyne, Stafford, Va., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 469,671
Int. a.3 F41G 1/32. lJ/00
VS. a. 33—241 9 Gaims
1. An aiming aid for visual orientation of an aiming device in
a very low light level environment without emitting light in
the forward direction to disclose the location of said aiming
device, said aiming aid comprising: \
a switchably energized light source comprised of a light
emitting diode enclosed inside a hollow section of an
aiming device housing;
a front sight fiber optic means having a cavity in an input end
with said cavity in cooperation with said hollow section to
accept transmitted light from said light source and an
output that emits light in a select front sight light pattern
in the rearward direction of said aiming device; and
a rear sight fiber optic means having an input end in coopera-
tion with said light source for receiving light therein
through a light scattering rod partially embedded in the
top of said aiming device to provide a visual orientation of
said aiming device and transmitting the light to an output
for emitting light in a select rear sight light pattern in a
rearward direction wherein alignment of said select front
and rear sight light patterns of emitted light establish a
front to rear sight alignment of said aiming device.
4,434,561
LEVEL INDICATOR
Michael E. Caspar, 115 W. Willow St., Newberry, Mich. 49868
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,615
Int. a.) GOIC 9/06
VS. a. 33—366 5 Claims
said tube is attached and which comprises the following
elements:
i. A transistorised amplifier having a signal input terminal,
a signal output terminal, a power supply terminal and a
ground terminal;
ii. An energy source connected to the power supply and
ground terminals of said transistorized amplifier;
iii. A first electrode, within said tube, connected to the
signal input terminal of said transistorized amplifier;
iv. A second electrode which would contact the fluid
below the first electrode and would be connected to the
ground terminal of said transistorized amplified;
V. An electrically conductive fluid in said tube which
would complete a circuit between the first and second
electrodes when the fluid reaches the level of (the) a
reference point marking;
vi. An exterior surface on said means for detecting a fluid
level;
C. A signaling device connected to said signal output termi-
nal and actuated by said means for detecting a fluid level;
and
D. A reference point marking on the exterior surface of said
means for detecting a fluid level which aligns with the
fluid level at the first electrode where said signaling de-
vice is actuated.
4,434,562
CURING APPARATUS AND METHOD
Henry J. Bubley, Decrfleld; Gene M. Faulkner, Palatine; Alex
laccino, Mt. Prospect, and Giuseppe Rcscio, Berwyn, all of
III., auignors to American Screen Printing Equipment Com-
pany, Chicago, III.
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,575
Int. a.} F26B 3/2S
U.S. a. 34-^ 11 Claims
1. A level indicator which comprises:
A. A tube which is partially filled with fluid (,):
B. A means for detecting a fluid level to which one end of
1. A method of curing ink, or the like, on a moving piece of
work moving through a curing station having an arcuate re-
flecting shield facing downwardly and covering an elongated
curing lamp and a blower means for blowing air for cooling,
and exhaust means for pulling air from the unit, said method
comprising the steps of:
directing cooling fluid from the blower means downwardly
along the upper and outer surface of the arcuate reflector
shield to cool the same,
directing cooling air upwardly and inwardly along the inner
surface of the reflector shield to wipe the same with air to
cool^ the same,
directing radiation from the lamp onto a work moving under
the lamp and reflector shield,
trapping radiation with baffles at the upstream entrance and
downsteam exit of the work on the conveyor, flowing air
through the baffles, and
pulling air downwardly across the work and through the
conveyor and exhausting the same from the unit.
28
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4434563
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DRYING TOBACCX)
Gerhard Graalmann, Wohltorf, and Heiko Niehncs, Hamburg,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Haoni-Werke
Korber A Co. KG, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,172
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 28.
1980, 3007489
Int aj F26B 3/04. 3/24
VS. a. 34—28 1 j Claims
In neuum \ f ^
iamf Of nrtii»i smmiA
1. A metljcxi of drying tobacco, comprising the steps of
transporting a continuous stream of tobacco particles through
a conditioning zone; directly contacting tobacco particles in
the conditioning zone with a hot gaseous fluid; converting
tobacco particles in the conditioning zone into a fluidized bed
during contact with hot gaseous fluid; measuring the moisture
content of the thus dried tobacco particles; comparing the
measured moisture content with a predetermined value; regu-
lating the heat content of the gaseous fluid when the measured
moisture content deviates from said predetermined value,
including regulating a first parameter of such fluid outside of
the conditioning zone; measuring the temperature of dried
tobacco particles; comparing the measured temperature with a
preselected value; and regulating a second parameter of the
gaseous fluid outside of the conditioning zone when the mea-
sured temperature of tobacco particles deviates from said
preselected value.
4434 564
HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM FOR CLOTHES DRYERS
AND THE LIKE
John C. Braggins, Jr., 8521 LoweU Blvd., Westminster, Colo.
80030
FUed Feb. 15, 1977, Ser. No. 768,823
Int a.2 F26B 79/00; BOID 50/00
UAa.34-86 23CIaims
1. Exhaust heat recovery apparatus for clothes dryers and
the like, comprising:
an enclosed chamber having an inlet port for receiving
exhausted air from a clothes dryer, and an indoors exhaust
opening through which the dryer exhaust air is discharged
into the interior environment of the home; and
scrubber means within said chamber for removing lint from
the exhausted dryer air prior to discharging said air
through said indoors exhaust opening, said scrubber
means including a plurality of partitions forming an elon-
gated entry flow passage and an intermediate flow pas-
sage, said entry flow passage having one end in communi-
cation with said inlet port and the opposite end in commu-
nication with said intermediate flbw passage, said interme-
diate flow passage being of larger cross-sectional area than
said entry flow passage, said scrubber means further in-
^ eluding an enlarged plenum for reducing the velocity of
' V^ Oow of the dryer air stream through said chamber, baffle
means substantially dividing said plenum into at least two
sections, and a plurality of flow passage means extending
through said baffle means, said sections being in fluid
communication with one another through said plurality of
flow passage means, said intermediate flow passage com-
municating with one of said sections and said indoors
exhaust opening communicating with the other of said
sections.
4434 565
NON-SLIP OVERSHOE
Robert D. Haley, 2525 Robb Cir., Lakewood, Colo. 80215
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 134,192, Mar. 27, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,096
Int. a.3 A43B I/JO. 3/16, 13/26
U.S. a. 36-7.3 7 Claims
1. An overshoe of the kind to be worn over the normal shoes
of a wearer, comprising:
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
29
a. an upper;
b. a sole connected to the upper around the periphery of the
sole and formed of resilient, flexible material;
c. metal plate means for improving traction on slippery
surfaces removably attached to the lower surface of said
sole, said plate means extending throughout a substantial
portion of the sole and comprising an upper surface and a
lower surface, and having a plurality of projections ex-
tending outwardly therefrom substantially beyond said
lower surface of said plate means; and
d. metal plate attachment means for removably attaching
said metal plate means to said sole;
wherein said metal plate attachment means comprises
resilient flap means fixedly attached to the lower sur-
face of said sole for stretchably receiving said metal
plate means.
being provided with an opening therein, a housing for a sound
emitting device disposed within said opening and a sound
emitting device within said housing which emits sound when
the front cover is in open position, said housing being formed
of top and bottom housing sections adapted for snap fit engage-
ment with each other, said bottom housing section being a
generally flat element of a size larger than the opening in the
front cover and sufficient to conceal said opening and having
4,434,566
LAUNDRY MANGLE WITH ROLL COVERING REEL
Theo Krauss, Aue; Ludwig Herrmann, Bockau, and Konrad
Berger, Schneeberg, all of German Democratic Rep., assignors
to VEB Kombinat Textima, Karl-Marx-Stadt, German Demo-
cratic Rep.
Filed Jun. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 384,320
Claims priority, application German Democratic Rep., Aug. 3,
1981, WPD06F/232327
Int. a.3 D06F 69/01 67/02
U.S. a. 38—8 5 Claims
1. A smoothing and drying apparatus for damp laundry,
comprising
(A) at least one mangle cylinder and corresponding man^e
trough,
(B) a frame on which said mangle cylinder and trough (A)
are arranged,
(C) at least one revolving laundc^ guiding belt extending
around said mangle cylinder t^) for guiding laundry
through said apparatus for smoothing and drying,
(D) at least one shifting device around which said revolving
laundry guiding belt passes, for directing said laundry
guiding belt back to receive more laundry and guide said
laundry to be smoothed and dried, and
(E) a covering adapted to be wound around said mangle
cylinder, wherein the improvement comprises
(F) a device for winding and unwinding said covering
around said cylinder, said device (F) positioned above said
mangle cylinder (A) and below a portion of said revolving
laundry guiding belt (C) passing around said shifting de-
vice (D).
4,434,567
MEMORABILIA REPOSITORY
Robert LeVeau, Overland Park, Kans., assignor to Hallmark
Cards, Inc., Kansas Oty, Mo.
FUed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,982
Int. C\? B42D 3/12
U.S. a. 40—157 6 Claims
1. A repository for memorabilia having a front cover which
is movable between open and closed positions, said front cover
a plurality of upstanding positioning members spaced to hold
the sound emitting device by frictional engagement therewith,
said top housing section being a generally flat or convex ele-
ment of a size larger than the opening in the front cover suffi-
cient to conceal said opening and having a plurality of legs
therefrom adapted for snap fit engagement with said bottom
section to form a unijary structure and to clamp therebetween
said front cover.
4,434,568
GRAPHIC DISPLAY ASSEMBLY FOR DYNAMIC
PROGRAM PRESENTATION
Emilio C. Guerrero Q., Av. Francisco Miranda (California
Norte) Centre Comercial Puerta del Este Local 16-B, Caracas,
Venezuela
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 74,830, Sep. 12, 1979,
abandoned. This application Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,121
Int. a.3 G09F 11/12
U.S. a. 40—518 10 Oaims
1. A graphic representation assembly comprising a panel, a
program carrying member mounted in said panel and present-
ing a fixed representation of a program, multiple movable
coplanar tapes overlying said program carrying member and
the fixed representation of a program, said tapes being trans-
parent for a viewing of said fixed representation therethrough,
said tapes including representations thereon coordinated to the
fixed representation, means for moving kaid tapes relative to
said program carrying member and saia fixed representation
and for varying the relationship between the representations
on the tapes and the fixed representation to accommodate
program changes, said means for moving the tapes relative to
said fixed representation including first means for moving said
tapes simultaneously, And second means for moving said tapes
individually, a pair oHaterally spaced rotatably mounted outer
shafts, a first one of said outer shafts having multiple reels
rotatably mounted thereon, each reel having one of said tapes
extending thereabout, each of said tapes also extending about
^
30
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
the second outer shaft, external control means for rotating said
second outer shaft and the Upes thereon to define said first
means for moving said tapes simultaneously, said reels being
independently manually rotatable to define the second means
for moving said tapes individually, and means for adjusting
said program carrying member relative to the direction of
movement of the tapes.
appendage can be selectively adjusted with respect to a
viewer and said appendage can be replaced as desired;
4,434,569
CX)NNECTOR HOUSING FOR NEON TUBING
Robert W. Minogue, 25200 Carlos Bee Blvd., Hayward, Calif.
94542
FUed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,630
Int a.J G09F 13/22
U A a. 40-545 7 Claims
wherein the movable suspension means includes a spring
loaded cylinder contained within said housing for regulat-
ing the position of said housing.
4434571
DEVICE FOR LUBRICATING MUZZLE-LOADING
BULLETS AND METHOD FOR HANDLING AND
LOADING THE BULLETS
Warren V. Eisenbuth, 113 Dorchester Dr., Vtncentown, N.J.
08088
FUed Aug. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 404,568
Int. a.3 F41C 27/00
U.S. a. 42-90 6 Claims
1. A connector for receiving the paired ends of conductive
neon tubing for mounting to a sign backing, said connector
comprising in combination: a dielectric housing having a side
exposed to said sign backing; said side having a recess therein;
said recess in cooperation with said sign backing defming a
common cavity sufficient to receive and split electrical conduit
into two conductors; paired dielectrically isolated side-by-side
tube receiving chambers extending in spaced-apart parallel
relation to said side of said dielectric housing and opening to
the exterior of said housing; each of said tube receiving cham-
bers having tube connector means disposed interiorly thereof % a ^-.,;^- r» i w • .• i , _.. .^ .. . .
for making an enclosed electrical co^ion to an ins^rt^ #o„t^nra„^«rw,t n "* muzz cloading bullets, having a
neon tube; dielectrically isolated paired paths for threading/^^ finlTwitH T VTT "^"'''^^
each of said conductors between Td colon cavity at on^°(^ [ h^usC l^v ' ""^"""^^
end and one ofsaid neon tubes at the other end; and connection n»\ « o.,ii.,^5„„i u' u j r ^ .^ .
fnMn«in*.r;»../>r<,.;^ ..^ ^. r « v,u.i,.cwuwu (b) a cylmdncal chamber opening one end of the body and
r.rr^'^^'r.rr;''""'"""""'""""''"'"- , .-».«„. ...ch..b.r'^dS, he body,
wherem the depth of the chamber to the end is longer than the
)
4,434,570
ADVERTISING HOLDER
Johannes Roos, Wateringfen, Netherlands, assignor to RoUcz
B.V., The Hague, NetberUuids
FUed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,449
Int a.3 G09F 1/12
MS. CL 40-617 10 Claims
1. An advertising holder comprising
a housing;
movable suspension means for controUably suspend^ said
housing from a surface;
means for releaseably securing an advertising appendage to
said housing whereby the position of said advertising
/
distance from the front ring to the base of the longest bullet to
be inserted into the chamber, and
wherein the diameter of the chamber opening is large enough
to allow the rear ring or rings to push fit into the chamber but
small enough to prevent the front ring from entering the cham-
ber,
(c) a lubrication entrance port means in the body to receive
lubricant
(d) a lubrication charging chamber distribution mechs in the
body in flow communication with the port means and the
groove or grooves in the bullet, when it is placed in the
cylindrical chamber,
(e) a plunger piston means attached in the body located at
the end of the cylindrical chamber, capable of moving
against the base end of the bullet during lubrication and of
pushing and ejecting the lubricated bullet.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
31
4,434,572
RETRIEVAL OF LOBSTERS AND OTHER OBJECTS
WUlian W. Sheldon, R.F.D. #2, Box 292, EUsworth, Me. 04605,
and Theodore G. Axford, MUbridge, Me., assignors to WU-
Uam W. Sheldon, EUsworth, Me.
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,599
Int. a.3 AOIK 80/00
\3S. a. 43—6.5 15 Claims
1. Apparatus for lifting lobsters and similar objects from the
bottom or floor of a lobster pound or other water body to the
surface of the water and for handling the objects above the
water surface for delivery above said surface comprising:
flexible passageway means having a length at least sufficient
to extend from the bottom to the water surface and having
a diameter sufficient to accommodate objects to be lifted,
said passageway means having an open inlet end for
movement adjacent the bottom and an op>en outlet end for
positioning adjacent the water surface;
conveying means for receiving objects adjacent the water
surface and delivering said objects above the surface of
the water;
means for establishing a flow of water upward from the
bottom to the water surface in the flexible passageway
means whereby objects a^e entrained in the water flow
and lifted to the surface; and ~~^--t^ ^
coupling guide means opefatively arranged^for coupling the
outlet end of the flexible passageway means to the convey-
ing means and for guiding and directing objects lifted to
the surface onto said conveying means, said coupling
guide means comprising chamber means having an angled
cover surface, said angled cover surface operatively ar-
ranged and angled for directing objects lifted to the water
surface onto the conveying means, said angled cover
surface formed with openings for passing water away
from the conveying means.
4,434,573
nSHING APPARATUS
Vincent B. Hodshire, 2701 NE. Adams St., Peoria, lU. 61603
FUed Sep. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 418,684
Int a.3 AOIK 91/06, 97/12
U.S. a. 43—15 2 Claims
a main support member;
a first member connected to said main support and movable
between first and second positions;
a trigger member connected to said first member;
an extension connected to said trigger, said extension includ-
ing a pair of spaced apart members having an axle extend-
ing therethrough;
means for retaining said trigger and said first member in said
first position;
means for resiliently urging said trigger and said first mem-
ber toward said second position;
a first guide in said main support;
a wire releasably connected to said axle and extending
through said first guide;
first and second limiting means carried by said wire for
limiting movement of said wire through said guide in
response to said second limiting means engaging said first
limiting means and said first limiting means engaging said
main support member;
a reel mounted on said main support;
a second guide in said main support;
a fishing line extendably connected to said reel and extend-
ing through said second guide;
means connected to said wire for releasably engaging said
second line; and
means for releasably locking said trigger in said first posi-
tion, said means including a lock pin urged through an
aperture formed in said main support member adjacent
said means for retaining said trigger.
i
4,434,574
BIRD ENVIRONMENTAL INSPECTION TRAP
Calfin G. Benito, Rte. 2, Box 168, Paub VaUey, Okla. 73075
FUed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 393,200
Int. a.} AOIM 23/02
U.S. a. 43—63 5 Qaims
1. A fishing apparatus comprising:
1. A wild bird trap, comprising:
a pair of spaced-apart housings;
frame means within each housing;
a pair of net arms extending transversely of the' respective
housing in longitudinally aligned relation and pivotally
connected at one end portion with said frame means for
vertical pivoting movement of the other end portion of
said pairs of net arms in unison from a horizontal unsprung
position to an upright position;
netting extending between said housings and connected with
each pair of arms;
pressure cylinder means within each housing and opera-
tively connected with each net arm of said pairs of net
arms for pivoting each pair of net arms to a sprung posi-
tion; and.
remotely operated control meant for actuating said pressure
cylinder means.
32
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
MARINE TRAP SENSING SYSTEM CAPILLARY DISC ANDSlIPPnirr TUroircnD
An^ W. P«n... 2m SW. ., Or.. D«rtl..d B-cb, F^ Retal,.,, l^ilZL ^~?,S;:';?f45fS.rrS P«l.
„.. . „ Rep. of Germany
?nt a^'Toi^'^O/^*'"''^ ^"^^ ^P- 30' l'*^. Ser. No. 430.964
U S a 43-100 « ^ . '"*• CI.' AOIG 25/00
U.S. a. 43-100 9 Claims U.S. Q. 47-81 7 Qaims
1. A saline water animal sensing system comprising:
a circuit closure means normally open for indicating entry
across said closure means,
an electrical current producing source connected to each
said closure means,
electronic circuit means for annunciating a closed circuit
across said circuit closure means,
said electronic circuit means comprising means for prevent-
ing current flow across said circuit closure means due to
the immersion of the circuit closure means in saline water.
4 434 576
SUPPORT SYSTEM FOR PLANTING TRAYS
Owen D. Sowerwine, Salinas, Calif., assignor to Castle A Cooke
Techniculture, Salinas, Calif.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,796
Int. a.3 A47C 7/00
U.S. a. 47—39 I
SQaims
1. A support rail for use in forming a system for supporting
a planting tray during an initial growing period, said tray
having a matrix of apertures therethrough containing seeded
soil plugs, said support rail comprising:
a horizontally extending, vertically disposed web member;
first and second tray-support members projecting from op-
posite sides of said web member at its lower extremity and
extending the length thereof, each said tray-support mem-
ber being formed to present a sloped planar surface at a
downward angle to the horizontal; and
first and second vertically disposed, spaced-apart standoff
members secured to said tray-support members at the
undersides thereof and extending downward therefrom,
said standoff members terminating at their lower extremi-
ties in parallel edges, whereby said rail engages an under-
lying rail-supporting structure only at the parallel edges of
said standoff members and whereby the bottoms of aper-
tures in said matrix closest to an edge of said planting tray
will be exposed when said planting-tray edge rests along
\ one of said planar surfaces.
1. A plant watering device comprising:
(a) a tray,
(b) support means adapted to rest on the bottom of said tray,
said support means including a support disc and a plurality
of arcuately spaced legs extending downwardly and out-
wardly from said disc so as to elevate said disc from the
bottom of the tray, said disc being formed with an opening
therein,
(c) means for positioning and locking said support means in
said tray so as to prevent relative rotation between said
support means and said tray, said positioning and locking
means comprising water-tight pockets formed in said tray
at arcuately spaced locations therearound corresponding
to the location of said legs, said legs extending into said
pockets for aligning said support means and preventing
relative rotative movement between said support means
and said tray, said pockets extending below the bottom
wall of said tray for supporting the bottom of said tray
above a supporting surface, and
(d) pad means constructed of water absorbent material posi-
tioned on said disc, said pad means having a movable tab
hinged at one end thereof to said pad means and aligned
with and commensurate in size with said opening in said
disc, said tab being adapted to be bent downwardly
through said opening in said disc for submergence in the
water in the tray,
whereby water is transmitted by capillary action from said
tab to and uniformly throughout said pad for providing
water to a pot positioned on said pad.
4,434,578
AUTOMATIC TRAFHC CONTROL GATE
Raphael J. Rumpz, 33863 Comelissen, Sterling Heights, Mich.
48077
Filed Jun. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 389,180
Int. a.J EOIF 13/00; E05F 11/24
U.S. a. 49-49 2 Qaims
1. An automatic traffic control gate, comprising:
support means;
a shaft rotatably mounted on the support means;
an arm carried on the shaft so as to be movable therewith as
the shaft is being routed from a generally horizontal,
lower position toward a raised position;
power means mounted in the support means, the power
means having a rotatable output member;
an outer tube mounted on the support means;
an inner tube telescopically, slideably mounted in the outer
tube;
a pair of trunnions mounted on opposite sides of one of said
tubes, and a pair of elongated hangers having their ends
connected to the shaft and their lower ends joumaling the
trunnions;
lever means connecting one of said tubes to the shaft such
that as the inner tube and the outer tube are moved in a
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
33
relatively slideable motion in a first direction, the shaft is
rotated in a first direction to raise the arm, and as the inner
tube and the outer tube are moved in a relative motion in
the opposite direction, the shaft is rotated in the opposite
direction to lower the arm;
an elongated screw disposed in said inner tube;
a ball nut mounted in the inner tube and connected to the
screw to longitudinally move the inner tube with respect
to the outer tube in either said first direction or said sec-
ond direction depending upon the direction the screw is
being rotated; and
slip clutch means connected between the power means and
the screw to rotate it along its -longitudinal axis but to
permit the power means output member to rotate with
respect to the screw whereby the output member is rotat-
able independently of the motion of said shaft.
4,434,579
INSULATING STRUCTURE
John S. Murphy, 167 Webbers Path, West Yarmouth, Mass.
02673
Continuation of Ser. No. 215,806, Dec. 12, 1980, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 44,355, May 31, 1979. This application
Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,949
Int. a.3 E05B 65/04
U.S. CI. 49—63 4 Qaimi
IB .It ^''*!I\ 13
1. Insulating structure for use with a window which is en-
closed within a rectangular window frame which defines a
rectangular window opening, said insulating structure com-
prising:
(a) a rigid rectangular envelope having an opening along one
side, the envelope being adapted to being fastened in a
wall with the opening facing the window opening, and
located in a plane that is offset from the plane of the
window, the envelope being substantially air-tight except
for the said opening, the envelope consisting of two simi-
lar rigid rectangular sheets held in spaced parallel rela-
tionship by spacer blocks extending around three side
edges, the fourth side edge being free of a spacer block
and constituting the said opening, the side of each sheet
which faces the interior of the pocket having a flat smooth
continuous surface,
(b) a main sheet of insulating material slidable in the enve-
lope from an inoperative position in which it is entirely
enclosed in the envelope to an operative position in which
it is substantially outside the envelope and is co-extensive
with the window opening and in front of the window, and
(c) a groove which extends entirely around the inside of the
window frame except for said opening for receiving the
edges of the main sheet when the main sheet lies within
said window opening to form a tight seal around the edges
of the main sheet.
4,434,580
DOOR, ESPEOALLY FOR MOTOR VEHICLES
Ernst Engelsberger, Glonn, and Ralf-Thilo Schulz, Putzbrunn,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Messerschmitt-
Boelkow'Blohm Gesellschaft mit bescbraenkter Haftung,
Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,641
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 24,
1981, 3102328
Int. CI.} B66j 5/0¥ .
U.S. a. 49—502 7 Oaims
1. A door, especially for a motor vehicle, comprising door
frame means including vertically extending frame members,
hinge means operatively secured to one frame member of said
vertically extending frame members, a lock base plate opera-
tively secured to the other frame member of said vertically
extending frame members, a first substantially horizontally
extending rail (2.1) having a longitudinal axis, first journal bolt
means (5) for journalling said first rail with one end thereof to
a respective one of said hinge means and with the other rail end
to said lock base plate, a second rail (2.2) extending at an angle
to the first rail, second journal bolt means (5') for journalling
said second rail with one end thereof to the respective other
hinge means and with the other rail end also to the lock base
plate, said first and second journal bolt means (5, 5') extending
also substantially horizontally and perpendicularly to the re-
spective rail end for movably mounting the rail ends so that the
first and second rails are substantially free of deformations
under load condition until the brake stress is reached, and
irreversibly expandable cable means secured with their/ends to
said first journal means whereby said cable means extend sub-
stantially in parallel at least tcfaid first rail.
34
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,434^1
APPARATUS ADAPTED FOR AUTOMATIC OR
SEMI-AUTOMATIC FABRICATION OF
ULTRA-PRECISION OPHTHALMIC LENSES, E.Gh
CONTACT LENSES
Robert G. Spriggn, St Petersburg, Ffak, anignor to Automated
Optic, Ibc^ N. Sidnt Petersburg, Fla.
CoBtinuatioB of Ser. No. 180,323, Aug. 22, 1980, abuidoaed,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 928,973, Jul. 28, 1978,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 821,162,
Aug. 2, 1977, abandoned. This application May 11, 1982, Ser.
No. 377,105
lat a.^ B24B 5/00
VS. Q. 51—67 16 Claims
1. An apparatus for generating a microinch optical surface
on an optical lens precursor to yield a lens for proximate
contact with an eyeball, comprisjng
a substantially heavy uble bed;
a fluid bearing work support spindle including an air collet
for holding a lens precursor;
a first air-bearing slide supported on said table bed and
adapted for rectilinear translation along a first horizontal
axis that is in a plane parallel to the axis of rotation of said
spindle;
a circular tipped cutting tool mounted on said first slide;
a second air-bearing slide supported on said table bed and
adapted for rectilinear translation along a second horizon-
tal axis that is in said plane and peri>endicular to said first
axis, said fluid bearing work support spindle being
mounted upon said second slide;
a pair of DC. torque motors respectively coupled to said
first and second slides by means of zero backlash lead
screws to provide translational movement of said slides
along their respective axes;
a computer control system for generating control signals for
said motors to provide predetermined coordinated move-
ment of said cutting tool and said spindle in accordance
with the mathematical function describing the geometry
of the optical surface to be generated only in a rectangular
coordinate system; and
electro-optical encoders for monitoring the positions of said
first and second slides.
4,434,582
GLASS TRIMMING CUTTER WTTH ROLLER
CONVEYOR
GottMed Strauss, Heillgenhaus, and Horst Schumann, Ratln-
gen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Sack Glas-
technik GmbH, Diisseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 967^69, Dec. 8, 1978, abandoned. This
appUcation Not. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 203,970
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 17,
1977, 2756443
Int O? B24B 17/02
VS. a. 51-101 R 1 Claim
1. Apparatus for automatically cutting the edges of generally
planar glass panes, comprising:
a generally circular table including a conveyor track for
transporiing the glass planes in a conveying direction and
for providing a substantially horizontal support for the
glass panes, said conveyor track extending over substan-
tially the entire diameter of said table between a loading
end at which the glass panes are fed onto said track and an
unloading end at which the glass panes are discharged
from said track, said table being arranged for rotation
about a veriical axis which is normal to the surfaces of the
glass panes;
means for rotating said table about said veriical axis at a
desired rate;
gripping means responsive to rotation of said table for releas-
ably gripping the glass panes on said table to fix the glass
panes against movement relative to said table when said
table is rotated and the glass panes are cut;
means for cutting the edges of the glass panes to a desired
contour as said table is rotated from an initial position to
an end position;
a feed conveyor fixed with respect to the rotation axis of said
table and arranged to be aligned in said conveying direc-
tion with the loading end of said conveyor track when
said table is in either of said initial and said end positions
for horizontally supporting and delivering the glass panes
to the loading end of said conveyor track;
means associated with said feed conveyor for loading the
glass panes onto said conveyor track, said loading means
including a first feed carriage including at least one suc-
tion cup for releasably holding the glass panes;
a first track fixed with respect to the rotation axis of said
table and arranged parallel to and above said feed con-
veyor for guiding said first feed carriage between a first
end position whereat said first feed carriage grasps a glass
pane to be cut and a second end position whereat said first
feed carriage release the glass pane when the glass pane is
loaded onto said conveyor track and said gripping means '
is operated, said first track extending above and parallel to
said conveyor track of said table for a distance of about '
one-third the length of said conveyor track;
a discharge conveyor fued with respect to the rotation axis
of said table and arranged to be aligned in said conveying
direction with the unloading end of said conveyor track
when said table is in either of said initial and said end
positions for horizontally supporting and discharging the
glass panes from the unloading end of said conveyor track;
means associated With said discharge conveyor for unload-
ing the glass panes from said conveyor track, said unload-
ing means including a second feed carriage including at
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
33
least one suction cup for releasably holding the glass
panes;
a second track fixed with respect to the roution axis of said
table and arranged parallel to and above said discharge
conveyor for guiding said second feed carriage between a
first end position whereat said second feed carriage grasps
a glass pane which has been cut on said conveyor track
when said gripping means releases the cut glass pane, and
a second end position whereat said second feed carriage
releases the cut glass pane for further processing, said
second track extending above and parallel to said con-
veyor track of said table for a distance of about one-third
the length of said conveyor track;
means including a rope drive arrangement for moving said
first and said second feed carriages along said first and said
second tracks, respectively, in corresponding relationship
' with rotation of said table so that said feed carriage deliv-
ers a first glass pane to be cut to said table while said
second feed carriage simultaneously discharges a second,
cut glass pane from said table, and said first feed carriage
thereafter returns to deliver a third glass pane to be cut to
said table while said second feed carriage simultaneously
returns to discharge the first, then cut glass pane from said
table; and
a cantilever support arm extending over said table, wherein
said gripping means is mounted to said support arm and
includes a number of uniformly distributed, downwardly
projecting suction cups.
4,434,583
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTABLE WORKPIECE GUIDE
AND FEED MECHANISM
Warren C. Burgess, Jr., 31922 Lake Rd., Avon Lake, Ohio
44012
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,904
Int. a.3 B24B 5/18
VS. a. 51—103 TF 9 Claims
^^;^
") i ^-^
>1^ I
1. An adjustable feed mechanism for feeding workpiecesf^
a centerless grinder wherein said grinder includes a work rest
generally intermediate the circumferential grinding surface of
a grinding wheel and a regulating wheel and wherein at least
said work rest and regulating wheel are selectively adjustable
toward and away from said grinding surface to accommodate
variations in the grinding wheel dimensions, said feed mecha-
nism comprising:
means defining a workpiece fiow path for grinding said
workpieces in a desired orientation therein from a first end
toward a second end spaced therefrom, said first end being
cooperably associated with a workpiece supply area and
said second end operably communicating with said work
rest for feeding workpieces thereto;
first mounting means adjacent said first end for supporting
said first end while allowing selective movement of said
workpiece flow path defining means generally laterally of
the flow path defined thereby;
second mounting means adjacent said second end for fixedly
securing said second end for movement with said work
rest, whereby said flow path is automatically moved gen-
erally laterally in response to generally lateral movement
of at least said work rest toward and away from said
grinding wheel grinding surface; and,
wherein said flow path defining means comprises a pair of
elongated spaced apart guide members defining said flow
path therebetween and further includes movable con-
veyor means therebeneath for defining an elongated flow
path bottom at least between said first and second ends,
said conveyor means being generally sutionirily mounted
relative to said workpiece supply area in spaced and un-
connected relationship to said guide members and said
work rest with said guide members being movable gener-
ally laterally of said flow path bottom in response to
generally lateral movement of said work rest.
4,434,584
TURRET BELT GRINDER
Aaron P. Rasmussen, 9606 Candy La., La Mesa, Calif. 92041
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 284,018
Int. a.^ B24B 21/12
VS. CI. 51—135 R 13 Claims
1. A turret belt grinder comprising:
a drive shaft having a longitudinal x-axis;
means for rotating said drive shaft;
a turret frame oriented substantially perpendicular to said
drive shaft;
a ring plate fixedly mounted with respect to said means for
rotating said drive shaft, said drive shaft and said ring
plate sharing a common axis;
means for rotating said turret frame through 360 degrees
which maintains it with 360 degrees rotational concentric-
ity with the X-axis of said drive shaft comprising at least
three flanged bushings each of which is secured to the rear
surface of said turret frame at a predetermined point by a
shoulder bolt, said flanged bushings revolve on said bolts
thereby acting as rollers and track on the radial edge of
said ring plate;
at least three wheels, each of which is rotatably mounted on
its own individual axle;
means for mounting said axles on said turret frame at points
laterally spaced from one another and said axles being
oriented substantially parallel to the axis of said drive
shaft;
a closed loop grinding belt passing around the perimeter of
the geometric configuration formed by said laterally
spaced wheels;
one of said plurality of wheels being a drive wheel; and
means for transmitting the rotational motion of said drive-
shaft to said drive wheel to rotate it, thereby driving said
grinding belt around its closed loop path.
m,iu;-jj.LU»_jui^
MP
36
OmCIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,434585
BED FOR GRINDING MACHINE
Kenichi Munekata; Kunihiko Unno, and Yaiuo Suzuki, all of
Kariya, Japan, asdgnon to Toyoda Koki Kahnfhin Kaisha,
Kariya, Japan
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Scr. No. 270,024
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 6, 1980, 55-79677[U]
Int. a.3 B24B 41/00
MS. a 51-166 R 2 Claims
during turning of said spindle for clamping or for releasing a
tool, said manually operated turning means being movable
between an inactive position and an active position turning said
tool spindle and means cooperating with said manually oper-
ated turning means and said arresting means for moving said
turning means to said active position during movement of said
1. A bed for a grinding machine having a table and a wheel
head and comprising:
a bed body having at an upper surface portion thereof a table
support portion for slidably supporting said table of said
grinding machine, a wheel head support portion for sup-
porting said wheel head of said grinding machine, and a
coolant receiving portion including a peripheral wall of
said bed body, a trough portion surrounding the remain-
der of said bed body inside said peripheral wall and a flat
surface portion formed between said support portions and
recessed from said support portions and said peripheral
wall, said peripheral wall projecting from and surround-
ing said flat surface portion;
a layer of resin mortor formed on at least said flat surface
portion deflning said coolant receiving portion, wherein
said bed body further comprises a peripheral wall and
wherein said coolant receiving portion further comprises
a trough shaped portion and a flat surface portion formed
between said support portions and recessed from said
support portions and said peripheral wall, said peripheral
wall projecting from and surrounding said flat surface and
said coolant receiving portion including an exhaust hole
formed therein for exhausting coolant, said flat surface
portion being sloped downwardly toward said exhaust
hole and wherein said bed body has an air gap formed
therein;
a coolant exhaust conduit communicating with a top surface
portion of said exhaust hole for conducting coolant; and
a coolant shoe mounted in said bed body extending into said
air gap and connected to said coolant exhaust conduit for
exhausting coolant outside said bed body.
»-■*
arresting means to said arresting position and vice versa; a
drive motor operatively connected to said spindle; a switch for
switching said drive motor on sand off; and connecting means
connecting said switch with said manually operable turning
means and said arresting means for switching said drive motor
off when said turning means is moved to the active and said
arresting means to said arresting position.
4,434586
MACHINE TOOL, ESPECIALLY A HAND-HELD POWER
TOOL WITH A TURNABLE CLAMPING ELEMENT FOR
CLAMPING A TOOL ON THE TOOL SPINDLE
Thomas MiiUer, Erlangen; Fritz Schiidlich, and Manfred Stii
bier, both of Leinfelden-Echterdingen, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,681
Int. a.3 B24B 2i/02
U.S. a. 51-170 PT 18 oaims
1. In a machine tool, especially a hand-held power tool, a
combination comprising a housing; a tool spindle mounted in
the housing for rotation about its axis; means on the tool spin-
dle including a clamping element tumably mounted on said
spindle for clamping a tool on the latter for rotation therewith;
manually operated means for turning said spindle about its axis-
arresting means movable between a rest position and an arrest-
ing position for holding said clamping element against roution
4,434,587
DUST SHROUD FOR AN ABRADING TOOL
Robert J. McDougall, Brockville, Canada, assignor to Black A
Decker Inc., Newark, Del.
FUed Sep. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 298,312
Int. a.3 B24B 23/06, 55/06
U.S. a. 51—170 MT 7 Claims
2<a 270 W*
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
37
(a) a one-piece resilient skirt having a wall extending about
the periphery of the housing;
(b) said skirt wall being split into two end portions terminat-
ing in transverse edges in opposing end-to-end abutting
alignment defining a joint;
(c) the wall further having an upper edge; and
(d) the joint including connecting means integrally formed
on said end portions adjacent said transverse edges for
aligning said end portions during their connection and for
enabling rapid disconnection by their counterrotation in a
single plane outwardly from each dther about a point
defined by the intersection of said joint with said wall
upper edge.
1. A dust shroud for a sanding tool having a housing, com-
prising:
1. A honing l^ad for high-speed operation comprising a
hollow holder having a plurality of guide slots angularly
spaced from each other in the circumferential direction
thereof, at least one cone shaft axially slidably mounted in said
hollow holder and having at least one radially outward tapered
portion extending axially thereof, and a plurality of honing
stone supports radially movably disposed respectively in said
guide slots, each of said honing stone supports having at least
one radially inward cam surface held in contact with said
tapered portion of said cone shaft, whereby said honing stone
supports are radially movable in response to axial movement of
said cone shaft, characterized in that each of said honing stone
supports is connected to said cone shaft by at least one connec-
tor having one end connected to said honing stone support and
the other end slidably received in a groove defined in said cone
shaft, said groove being inclined in the same direction and at
the same angle as said tapered portion of said cone shaft, said
at least one cone shaft comprising a rough-finishing cone shaft
and a finishing cone shaft which are independently axially
movable in said hollow holder and have tapered portions, said
honing stone supports comprising rough-finishing honing
stone supports and finishing honing stone supports which are
inserted alternately in said guide slots, said rough-finishing
honing stone supports having cam surfaces held in contact
with said tapered portions of said rough-finishing cone shaft,
and said finishing honing stone supports having cam surfaces
held in contact with said tapered portions of said finishing cone
shaft.
4,434 589
ASPHALT COMPOSITION HIP AND RIDGE COVER
Bennie Freiborg, Champion Roof Company, 11764 Sheldon St.,
Sun Valley, Calif. 91352
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,876
Int. a.i E04B 7/00
U.S. a. 52—57 40 Claims
itr^^^-t^
4434 588
HONING HEAD FOR HIGH-SPEED OPERATION
Minoni Wada; Isao Aral; Takeshi Okubo, all of Saitama, and
Yoshiaki Mori, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Honda Giken
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,207
aaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 10, 1980, 55-125521
Int. a.J B24B 33/08. 33/02
U.S. a. 51—344 4 Oaims
^ao
1. An asphalt composition ridge cover having a longitudinal
centerline and comprising:
a generally rectangular center body portion having a first
end, a second end, a first edge, and a second edge;
a first pair of foldable tabs integrally formed with said first
end, each such tab having a width extending from proxi-
mate said longitudinal centerline to approximately mid-
way between said longitudinal centerline and said respec-
tive first and second edge, each such tab having a length
extending perpendicular to said first end and being sepa-
rated from the other such ub by a notch extending from
the free end of said first pair of foldable tabs to a point just
short of a line coincident with said first end;
a first edge Ub defined by that portion of said central body
portion which lies between said first edge and a first fold
locating means lying parallel to said longitudinal center-
line and lying proximate the midpoint between said first
edge and said longitudinal centerline;
a second edge tab defined by that portion of said central
body portion which lies between said second edge and a
second fold locating means lying parallel to said longitudi-
nal centerline and lying proximate the midpoint between
said second edge and said longitudinal centerline.
4,434,590
FLASHING STRUCTURE FOR GEODESIC DOME
STRUCTURES
Roger B. Wheeler, 2604 N. 4th St., Ginton, Iowa 52732
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,856
Int. a.) E04D J/38
U.S. a. 52—58 7 Gaims
1. A building construction which includes:
a first member having a generally planar first side;
a second member having a generally planar side dimen-
38
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
sioned and configured for engagement with said first side
in abutting planar contact, said first and second members
are generally planar and are disposed in oblique relation-
ship;
a first flashing element disposed on said first member and
extending along said first side, said first flashing element
having a laterally extending step disposed intermediate
first and second generally planar sections, said first gener-
ally planar section being fixed to said first element and said
laterally extending step being disposed in generally paral-
lel relationship to said first side, said first generally planar
section of said first flashing element being disposed in
oblique relationship to at least a part of said step shaped
portion of said first flashing element;
a second flashing element disposed on said second member,
said second flashing element including first and second
generally planar surfaces disposed proximate to a step
shaped section thereof, said step shaped portion thereof
extending in generally parallel relationship to said second
side, said step being disposed spaced away from said sec-
ond side and above a portion of said second member; and
said step shaped surface of said first flashing element is
disposed in substantially nested relationship to said step
shaped surface of said second flashing element.
4,434^2
HEAT AND SOUND INSULATING STRUCTURE FOR
BOARDING OR OTHER NON-LOADBEARING WALL
Patrick Reneaolt, Gardies, and Frands OnMit, Paris, both of
France, assignors to SMAC Acieroid, Paris, France
FUcd Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,923
Oains priority, application France, Dec. 24, 1979, 79 31583
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct 21,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int a.} E04B 1/82
U.S. a. 52-145 9 Claim.
4 434 591
COMPONENT USEFUL IN PRODUCING A COOLING
TOWER
Wolfgang Zema, Hattingen; Wilfried Krabbe, Buchschlag, and
Hans Schjifer, Darmstadt, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Philipp Holzmann AG, Frankfurt am Main, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Dirision of Ser. No. 974,047, Dec. 28, 1978, abandoned. This
appUcation Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,659
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 30.
1977, 2759087
Int. a.3 E04B 1/54
U A CL 52—73 7 claims
1. A pre-cast reinforcing element a cooling tower, in which
a plurality of such reinforcing elements serve as forms for
receiving a suiuble reinforcing material that is bonded to the
reinforcing elements and to the cooling tower at spaced points
on the tower, said reinforcing element comprising a plate-like
element having a middle solid region and trough-like ends each
open at the top and a side thereof, in which an open top eential
channel is provided through said middle solid region commu-
nicating with said trough-like ends for receiving sai^ reinforc-
ing material such as concrete.
1. A heat and sound insulating structure for boarding or
other non-loadbearing wall of a premises, comprising in combi-
nation an inner first metal sheet for facing toward the interior
of said premises and a second metal sheet, a heat insulating
panel, said sheets having ribs projecting into the panel and
intermediate portions between the ribs, the ribs of the first and
second sheets being perpendicular to one another, a substan-
tially 2-4 mm thick core of sound insulating material and a
solid and thin third metal sheet, one of said second and third
meUl sheets being an interposed metal sheet interposed be-
tween the core and the heat insulating panel, the heat insulating
panel, the core and the interposed metal sheet being in adjoin-
ing relation to one another in a sandwich assembly, the heat
insulating panel being in adjoining relation to one of said first
and second metal sheets, the first and second metal sheets, the
core, the third sheet and the heat insulating panel being held
assembled, the heat insulating panel substantially filling any
space between the interposed metal sheet and the adjoining one
of the first and second sheets, the intermediate portions of each
of the first and second sheets having a given width and the ribs
of each of the first and second sheets having a width and a
depth which are each a minor fraction of the given width of
the intermediate portions thereof, the core of sound insulating
mat^al being in fully adjoining relation to at least one of said
metal sheets without empty spaces therebetween, and the heat
insulating panel being in fully adjoining relation to at least one
of said metal sheets without empty spaces therebetween.
^ ' 4,434,593
WINDOW STRUCTURE OF A VEHICLE BODY
Masayoshi Horike; Hanio Yamamoto; Yukio Yamane, all of
Yokosuka; Kazuhiko Yoshiyuki, Yokohama, and Toshiaki
Endo, Chigasaki, all of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor
Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan
FUed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,606
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 6, 1980, 55-58579
Int a.} B60J 1/02
U.S.a.52— 208 5 Claims
1. A window structure of a vehicle body, comprising:
a wall portion forming part of said vehicle body and defining
an opening therein;
a window panel closing said opening and having at least one
edge portion extending along and spaced apart inwardly
from said wall portion for forming a gap between said wall
poriion and the edge portion;
a body of adhesive intervening between said vehicle body
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
adjacent said gap and the edge poriion of said window
panel and securing the window panel to the vehicle body;
a resilient molding having a decorative trim portion bridging
said window panel and said vehicle body for covering said
gap, a stem poriion integral with said decorative trim
poriion and extending in said gap, said edge portion and
said wall poriion forming therebetween said gap, said gap
having an outer end adjacent said decorative trim portion
and an inner end remote from said decorative trim por-
tion, the stem portion of said resilient molding extending
between said outer end and said inner end, the stem por-
tion having adjacent said inner end of the gap a bead
which is generally arrow-shaped in cross section and
which is embedded in said body of adhesive, and a plural-
ity of retrorse fins extending outwardly from both sides of
said stem portion and angled toward said decorative trim
portion for engagement with said edge portion of said
window panel and said wall portion of said vehicle body;
and
retaining means constituted by said edge portion of said
window panel and said wall portion of said vehicle body,
the width of said gap at said outer end being smaller than
that of the gap at said inner end.
4,434,594
WINDOW FRAME OR DOOR FRAME SECHON
Robert H. Bliss, Monroe, La., assignor to Bliss Steel Products
Corp., East Syracuse, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 413,825
Int a? E04C 3/30; E06B 7/14
MS. a. 52—209 4 Claims
5S-
1. A frame section for a window frame or door frame struc-
ture, comprising a first roll-formed frame member of substan-
tially L-shape in cross-section having a flat web portion, first
and second flanges respectively at opposite ends of said web
extending from one side thereof and converging toward one
another at acute angles to the plane of said web, said flanges
defining an open dovetail shape channel capable of receiving a
glass molding means, a first end wall portion extending out-
wardly of the free end of said first flange and lying parallel to
said web portion in spaced relation, a first lip extending from
the free end of said first end wall portion toward and substan-
tially perpendicular to said web poriion and terminating in
spaced relation from an opposite side thereof, a second end
wall portion extending outwardly of the free end of said sec-
on4 flange and lying parallel to said web portion in spaced
relation, a first abutment wall capable of supporting one side of
a window pane and extending from the free end of said second
end wall portion away from and substantially perpendicular to
said web portion, a second lip extending from said abutment
wall toward and substantially perpendicular to said web por-
tion and terminating in spaced relation from said opposite side
thereof, a second roll-formed frame member of substantially
L-shape in cross-section having a flat web portion intercon-
nected with said web portion of said first frame member and
forming together with said first member a body of substantially
T-shape in cross-section, third and fourtji flanges respectively
at opposite ends of said web of said second frame member
extending from one side thereof and converging toward one
another at acute angles to the plane of said another member
web, said third and fourth flanges lying respectively opposite
said first and second flanges and defining a dovetail shape
channel capable of receiving a glass molding means, a third end
wall portion extending outwardly of the free end of said third
flange and lying parallel to said web portion of said second
member in spaced relation, a third lip extending from the free
end of said third end wall portion toward and substantially
perpendicular to said web portion of said second member and
terminating in spaced relation from an opposite side thereof,
said first and third lips extending toward one another and
having terminal ends spaced apart for defining a first groove
therebetween, a first elastomeric sealing member disposed in
said groove and extending outwardly of outer sides of said first
and third lips and abutting against said first and third flanges to
thereby define a combined weather strip and thermal strip, said
first sealing member engaging said terminal ends of said first
and third lips so as to be thereby retained in said first groove,
a fourth end wall poriion extending outwardly of the free end
of said fourth flange and lying parallel to said web portion of
said another member in spaced relation, a second abutment
wall capable of supporting one side of a window pane and
extending from the free end of said fourth end wall portion
away from and substantially perpendicular to said web portion
of said second member, and a fourth lip extending from said
second abutment wall toward and substantially perpendicular
to said web portion of said second member and terminating in
spaced relation from said opposite side thereof, said second and
fourth lips extending toward one another and having terminal
ends spaced apart for defining a second groove, a second
elastomeric sealing member disposed in said second groove
and abutting against said second and fourth flanges to thereby
define a thermal strip, said second sealing member engaging
said terminal ends of said second and fourth flanges so as to be
thereby retained in said second groove.
4,434,595
BUILDING STRUCTURE
Jean de Brabant 465 Saint-Jean, Suite 1005, Montreal, Quebec
H2Y 2R6, Canada
FUed May 21, 1982, Ser. No. 380,879
Claims priority, appUcation Canada, Jul. 23, 1981, 382360
Int a.3 E04H 1/00
U.S. a. 52— 236J 16 Claims
1. A multi-story exterior atrium building comprising:
40
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a multi-story habitable space which in horizontal section
includes at each story,
a central core, and
a plurality of habitable spokes extending radially out-
wardly from said central core,
a substantially transparent peripheral wall means connecting
the outer ends of adjacent habitable spokes to form a
plurality of enclosed exterior atria, each of said exterior
atria being disposed between an associated pair of said
habitable spokes, said plurality of atria being circumferen-
tially disposed around said central core and vertically
extending substantially throughout the height of said
multi-story building, and
an outwardly extending side of each of said habitable spokes
includes a facade bordering on an associated one of said
atria and containing at least one transparent portion
wherein as associated exterior atria and space external to
the building may be viewed from within the spokes and
wherein the exterior surface area of said habitable spokes
substantially exceeds the exterior surface area of said
exterior atrium building.
4,434,597
FASTENING DEVICE
Artur Ftacher, Weinhalde 34, D-7244 Waldachtal 3/TumIlngen,
Fed. Rep. of Gemiany
FUed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,754
ClalBM priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 5,
1980,3041697
Int. a.3 E05C 5/20
U.S. a. 52-681 J Claims
4434 596
PARTITION HEAD ASSEMBLY FOR PARTITION WALL
PANELS
John E. McAteer, Maple Heights; Kenneth E. Bisler, North
Royalton; Jerry Ptacnik, Garfield Heights, and Richard D.
Kish, Lorain, all of Ohio, assignors to Hauserman, Inc., Qeve-
iand, Ohio
Filed Oct. 6, 1978, Ser. No. 949,133
Int. a.3 E04B 2/76
UA a. 52-243.1 29aaims
1. A fastening device for use with brickwork comprising: a
dowel having a dowel front end, a prolonged neck which
projects from said brickwork and anchoring means for fasten-
mg said dowel to said brickwork; a holding device arranged at
said dowel front end for fastening a wire grating serving as a
base for plastering, said holding device being a radially pro-
jecting cam having a slot at right angle to the longitudinal
dowel «Bxis and said slot opening corresponding to the wire
thickness of said wire grating wherein said slot is comprised of
a pair of surfaces, at right angle to the longitudinal dowel axis,
each having a convex shape.
4 434 598
DECORATIVE MOLDINGS
Robert Adell, Novi, Mich., assignor to U.S. Product Develop-
ment Company, Sunnyvale, Tex.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,511
Int. a.3 E04F 19/02: B60R 13/02
U.S. a. 52-716 ,2 a.i,„a
1. The combination of a partition panel, a telescoping head in
the top thereof and strut means at at least one end of the head
adjustably vertically secured to the partition at all vertical
positions thereof, said strut means comprising a strut having an
upper portion connected to said head and a lower channel-
shape portion, clip means slidingly received in said lower
channel-shape portion, said clip means including means for
securing the same to said partition panel, said clip means fur-
ther comprising resilient means for frictionally engaging said
clip means with said lower channel-shape portion of said strut,
said clip means comprising a body and said resilient means
mcluding a pair of resilient wings extending longitudinally
from said body in opposite directions and laterally in the same
direction, said lower channel-shape portion of said strut being
substantially C-shape in transverse section having a web por-
tion, leg portions extending from each vertical edge of said
web portion, and inwardly extending terminal portions at the
ends of said leg portions substantially parallel with said web
portion and spaced apart therefrom, and said wings extending
laterally from said body a distance greater than the spacing
between said web portion and terminal portions whereby
when received in said channel-shape portion of said strut, said
wings resiliently urge said body into frictional engagement
with said web portion of said lower channel-shape portion.
^^c
1. In combination with a vehicle body panel, a decorative
molding disposed against said vehicle body panel comprising a
metal strip containing insulating layer on one side including the
longitudinal margins and being formed into a cross-sectional
shape having a main body between the longitudinal margins
and in which the longitudinal margins are formed into longitu-
dinally extending insulated beads by the margins being turned
onto the side of the metal strip opposite the side containing the
insulating layer and with the insulated beads being set inwardly
in relation to the main body, said insulated beads having insu-
lated faces disposed against said vehicle body panel with said
main body being set outwardly from said vehicle body panel to
provide a void being said main body and said vehicle body
panel, said insulated faces being disposed in a common plane
when viewed in cross-section through the molding, and means
for attaching said molding to said vehicle body panel via said
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
41
beads such that the metal of said strip remains insulated from
said vehicle body panel.
4,434,599
DROP CEILING FRAME CONSTRUCTION
Francis L. McCall, Hacienda Heights, Calif., assignor to Speci-
fied Ceiling Systems, Alhambra, Calif.
Filed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,603
Int. a.3 E04B J/52. E04C 3/iO
U.S. a. 52—729 3 Oaims
footing base of concrete which comprises the steps of position-
ing a steel basket into a first form for castmg the footing base;
pouring concrete into said first form to cast such base with a
portion of the steel basket extending thereabove and a portion
of the steel basket extending therebelow and embedded in the
concrete of said base; positioning the end of the concrete
column into the portion of the steel basket extending above
said base; positioning a second form about said portion of the
steel basket above the base; and pouring concrete into said
second form to cast a concrete sheath around said portion of
the steel basket and end of the column above the base, said
concrete sheath being thereby integrally bonded to the end of
the concrete column and to said base.
4,434,600
METHOD FOR nXING THE ENDS OF CONCRETE
COLUMNS IN CONCRETE BASES AND DEVICE FOR
CARRYING OUT SAID METHOD
Henrik A. Backman, Boviigen 6, S-18143 Lidingo, Sweden
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,318
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Apr. 10, 1980, 8002718
Int. a.5 E02D 27/00
U.S. a. 52—741 6 Oaims
1. A method of fixing the end of a concrete column in a
4,434,601
HEAT INSULATED ROOF STRUCTURE
Hans Zellmer, RyetvKgen 17, Hov&s, Sweden 430 80
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,431
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 26, 1980, 8001473;
Jul. 2, 1980, 8004896
Int. a.) E04G 21/14
U.S. a. 52—745 3 Oaims
1. A rolled sheet metal longitudinal T-frame member for a
drop ceiling to support ceiling tiles or the like comprising:
a web section formed of two sheet metal layers joined along
a longitudinal edge, a channel section having two parallel
side walls joined by a transverse wall, the sheet metal
layers of web section being joined along a longitudinal
edge to the side walls of the channel section by respective
sheet metal sections forming the transverse wall, the side
walls of the channel section extending parallel to and
away from the web section, a pair of flange sections lying
in a common plane extending perpendicular to the plane
of the web section, each flange section being formed of
two layers of sheet metal joined along the outer edge of
the flange section, one layer of each flange section being
joined along one longitudinal edge to the outer edge of a
respective one of the side walls of the channel section, the
flange sections projecting outwardly away from the re-
spective side walls and forming a flat supporting surface
on either side of the channel section for supporting ceiling
tiles, the other layer of each of the flange sections includ-
ing a lip extending into the space between the parallel side
walls of the channel section, each lip terminating in an
edge extending inwardly toward the transverse wall of the
channel, the lips having a gap between the inwardly ex-
tending edges.
'L '? ^10 22
1. A method of erecting a roof structure including a number
of parallel beams carrying hsAt insulating material covered by
a watertight sheeting, each beam having a web portion and at
least one flange, comprising the steps of:
(a) locating a number of rafters in spaced-apart, parallel
relationship upon the flooring to be covered by said roof
structure,
(b) providing spaced-apart holes in the web portions of said
beams,
(c) arranging a group of said beams in spaced-apart, parallel
relationship upon said rafters perpendicularly thereto and
securing them to said rafters,
(d) inserting rods in said holes in the webs of said beams,
(e) fitting rigid channel members df equal length trans-
versely between any two parallel beams upon said rods,
(0 lifting the entity of said rafters, beams and channel mem-
bers to and incorporating the same in its proper positions
in the roof structure, and
(g) flnishing the heat insulation and the watertight sheeting
thereat.
4,434,602
TRAY LOADING MACHINE
Will L. Culpepper. Tucker, Ga., assignor to The Mead Corpora-
tion, Atlanta, C^.
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,020
Int. a.^ B65B VOd
U.S. a. 53—473 16 Claims
1. A tray loading mechanism for moving accumulated
charges of containers from an accumulating position into trays
at a loading position through the unclosed end flaps of the
trays to load the trays comprising:
loading conveyor means including a plurality of pusher
means movable between the accumulating and loading
positions along an endless path, each of said pusher means
adapted to move a charge of containers from the accumu-
lating position into a tray at the loading position as said
i
42
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
pusher means moves in a first direction along the endless
path;
drive means for moving said plurality of pusher means along
the endless path in successive increments of movement so
that all of said pusher means are Tirst simultaneously
moved along the endless path in the first direction for a
first prescribed distance and then simultaneously moved
along the endless path in the opposite direction for a
second prescribed distance less than the first prescribed
distance during each increment of movement so that said
plurality of pusher means moves between the accumulat-
ing and loading positions in the first direction along the
^ ««,
JSr
endless path, said first prescribed distance selected to
cause one of said pusher means to move a charge of con-
tainers out of the accumulating position toward the load-
ing position and to cause one of said pusher means to load
a charge of containers into the tray at the loading position
during each movement of said plurality of pusher means in
the first direction, and said second prescribed distance
selected to cause that pusher means loading a charge of
containers into the tray at the loading position to move out
of interference with the unclosed end flaps on the tray
during movement of said pusher means in the second
direction.
4 434 603
PLANT FOR PRODUONG PALLETLESS STACKS OF
PIECE GOODS, PARTICULARLY SACKS AROUND
WHICH IS SHRUNK A SHEET
Bcmbard Beumer, Beckum, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Bemhard Beumer Maschinenfabrik KG, Beckum/Westfalen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,555
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 21.
1981, 3120215
Int a.i B65B 55/06. 35/50
U.S. a. 53—557 8 Claims
1. A plant for producing pallet-less stacks of bundles, partic-
ularly sacks, around which is shrunk a sheet, with free spaces
formed in the vicinity of the stack base for inserting conveying
and lifting mechanisms, such as the arms of the fork of a fork
lift truck or the like, using a stacking conveyor belt, by the
combination of the following means arranged along the con-
veyor belt:
(a) a first means for forming individual bundles into layered
stacks with a base surface at the top and with free spaces
parallel to the stack feed direction on the conveyor dis-
posed on either side of the bundle layer forming the stack
base surface, said first means including a bundle row
storage means, a horizontally and vertically adjustable
packing table to which are supplied the individual bundle
rows by means of a transfer mechanism for forming bun-
dle layers" on the packing table, and a bundle layer hold-
back ledge in the horizontal movement area of the packing
table for transferring the individual bundle layers from the
packing table to the conveyor belt or onto the uppermost
bundle layer of a partial stack already formed on the
conveyor belt;
(b) a second means for applying a top sheet onto said bundle
layer forming the base surface of the stack;
(c) a third means for covering the stack with a dome-shaped
sheet of heat shrinkable plastic material, said third means
including a welding and cutting means for sealing the top
end of a sheet web portion for forming the dome-shaped
sheet covering and for cutting the in each case necessary
length of a sheet web portion for a stack from a hose-like
sheet web, folded in concertina-like manner in the longitu-
dinal side area, provided by a sheet delivery reel located
above the stack movement path along said conveyor,
wedge plates for opening the sheet web, a gripping device
for gripping the open lower edge of the sheet web and for
covering the stack with the sheet, said gripping device
being movable by means of a drive mechanism from an
upper gripping position to a lower spreading or expanding
position laterally of the stack, and a lateral edge control
device for guiding the sheet web from the reel to the
vicinity of the stack to be wrapped;
(d) a fourth means for shrinking the dome-shaped sheet
covering drawn over the stack;
(e) a fifth means for pressing the portion of the sheet cover-
ing located in the vicinity of said free spaces of the stack
onto the wall surfaces bounding the latter, said fifth means
comprising pressure rollers movable laterally into the area
of the free spaces of the stack;
(0 a sixth means for rotating the stack with the shrunken
sheet covering by 180* in the direction of the stack move-
ment path and having supporting devices engaging the
stack in the free spaces of the stack;
(g) a seventh means for placing a top sheet of shrinkable
plastic material having a larger area than that formed by
the upper bundle layer of the routed stack onto the latter,
said seventh means including a sheet delivery reel and a
cutting device;
(h) a eighth means for shrinking said top sheet by local
heating thereof and having pressing devices for pressing
the laterally projecting portion of the top sheet onto the
shrunken dome-shaped sheet covering the stack and a
following air cooler for the heated top sheet;
(i) supporting means, disposed on the portion of said con-
veyor following said stack rotating sixth means, said sup-
porting means extending into the free spaces of the stack
for engaging and supporting the lower surface of the stack L
extending laterally from said bundle layer forming the
stack base surface; and wherein the end portion of the
conveyor belt is constructed as an accumulation belt.
4,434,604
STRAP
Elizabetii A. Bird, MiU House, MiU La., Wychbold, Droitwich,
West Midlands, England
FUed Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,383
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 19, 1981,
8108618
lat a.J B68C 1/00. 1/14
U.S. a. 54—23 8 Claims
1. A strap, for example, a cinch strap, having:
(a) a first strap portion comprising at least one tensile band or
strip;
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
43
(b) means for fastening said strap to a support, for example,
a saddle, said means being at opposite ends of said strap;
(c) a second strap portion comprising a band or strip ar-
ranged in co-extensive longitudinal overlapping superim-
posed relationship with said first strap portion and at-
tached thereto, said second strap portion being a support
portion for the body of an animal such as a horse and
being resiliently compressible in a direction at right angles
to its length to provide cushioning characteristics for said
strap against the body of an animal such as a horse;
(d) at least one closed loop region disposed intermediate the
ends of said strap and comprising a length of said first
strap poriion, a length of said second strap portion, and
means securing together said lengths at their opposite
extremities to form said at least one loop region and so that
(68) parallel to that of the rotor axis (23), about which the
bearing units (51) and rotor (22) can swing downwards until
said lengths are non-slidable relative to one another longi-
tudinally of said strap;
(e) said length of said second strap portion being less than
said length of said first strap portion when said strap is in
a relaxed condition without longitudinal tensile load, the
arrangement being effective in the relaxed condition to
cause said length of said first strap portion to lie in a slack
bight spanned by said second strap portion loop region
whereby, in use of the strap under an increasing longitudi-
nal tensile load, said load is transmitted through said
length of said second strap portion which stretches and
extends longitudinally until the slack of said bight of said
first strap portion is taken up, any further increase in said
tensil load then being shared between both of said lengths
thereby providing an abrupt increase in resistance to
stretching of said strap when said slack is taken up.
ii (Ml
"•is^-tnr
the rotor (22) contacu the ground, thereby faciliuting removal
and re-attachment of the conditioning rotor (22).
4,434,606
GEAR BOX FOR CORN HARVESTING UNIT
Lawrence G. Rhodes, and John W. Carter, both of Stockton,
Mo., assignors to Superior Gear Box Company, Stockton, Mo.
Filed May 4, 1982, Ser. No. 374,705
Int. a.' ACID 47/00; F16H 37/06
U.S. a. 56-106 12 Claims
*l.*l,**r*ir-^'
4,434,605
MOWER-CONDITIONER
Alfred J. Bailey, Coventry, England, assignor to Massey-Fergu-
son Seryices N.V., Curacao, Netherlands Antilles
per No. PCT/GB81/00069, § 371 Date Dec. 21, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 21, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02966, PCT Pub.
Date Oct 29, 1981
per FUed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 339,458
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 22, 1980,
8013131
Int. a.3 AOID 47/00
MS. a. 56—16.4 10 Claims
1. A mower conditioner having a conditioning rotor which
is supported at its ends in bearing units that are secured to side
suppori walls characterized in that said bearing units (51) are
secured to said side support walls (24) by releasable fastening
means including a pair of coaxial fasteners (56) defining an axis
1. A compact gear box for a com harvesting unit of the type
having a pair of longitudinally extending harvesting rolls and a
pair of gathering chain assemblies, the gear box comprising:
(a) a gear ca^ including front and rear end poriions and
opposed side portions,
(b) a drive shaft having an axis of rotation transversely
disposed to the axes of the harvesting rolls, said drive shaft,
being rotatively mounted in the Ttii end portion of the
gear case and having bevel gear means mounted thereon
for rotation therewith,
(c) a first pair of shafts rotatively mounted in spaced parallel
relation within the gear case, said first shafts having axes
of rotation longitudinally aligned with associated axes of
the harvesting rolls, each of said first shafts including:
1. a rear end provided with bevel gear means drivingly
engageable with the bevel gear means of the drive shaft,
2. a front end, and /
3. an intermediate portion having worm a gear means
mounted thereon for rotation therewith,
, (d) means connecting the harvesting rolls to the first shafts^
and
mm
wr
44
OITICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
(e) a second pair of shafts mounted in spaced parallel relation
within the gear case, said second shafts having axes of
rotation transversely disposed to the axes of rotation of
the harvesting rolls, each of said second shafts being
mounted in one of said gear case side portion and includ-
ing:
1. a lower end supported by the gear case in thrust bearing
relation,
2. an upper end extending outwardly of the gear casing
and connected to the gathering chain assembly, and
3. an intermediate portion having a worm wheel means
mounted thereon and engageable with the associated
worm gear means of one of said first pair of shafts.
4,434608
METHOD AND AN APPARATUS FOR
MANUFACTURING STRANDS FROM WIRES OR ROPES
FROM STRANDS
Helmut Hartmann, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Trefilarbed Drahtwerk Koln GmbH, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,103
Qaims priority, application Luxembourg, Jan. 15, 1981,
oo0o4
Int. a.3 D07B 3/ JO
U.S. a. 57-58.52 g cudms
4,434,607
OVERnLL PROTECTION APPARATUS FOR ROLL
BALING MACHINE
Willis R. Campbell, Ephrata, Pa., assignor to Sperry Corpora-
tion, New Holland, Pa.
Filed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 405,780
Int. a.J AOID 39/00
UA a. 56-341 naaims
» r*» /-'"
1. A roll baling machine comprising:
(a) a frame;
(b) bale forming means movably supported on said frame
defining a bale chamber for forming roll bales of crop
material;
(c) pickup means movably supported on said frame for pick-
ing up crop material and delivering it to said bale cham-
ber;
(d) drive means for driving said pickup means;
(e) a trip lever rotatably supported on said frame;
(0 an actuating lever rotatably supported on said' frame;
(g) said trip lever being movable between a first jwsition
where said actuating lever is prevented from interrupting
the driving of said pickup means and a second position
where said actuating lever is moved to interrupt the driv-
ing of said pickup means; and
(h) said trip lever moving from said first position to said
second position when said bale chamber is filled with crop
material to a predetermined level.
1. A method of laying up a multiplicity of elongate, flexible
elements into a continuous member in a twist formation, com-
prising the steps of:
(a) feeding said elongate elements from respective supplies
thereof at a fixed location to a common assembly point;
(b) passing said elongate elements from said assembly point
through respective passages in a cluster array having a
center point in an outwardly fanning pattern;
(c) passing said elongate elements from said array to a clos-
ing point where said elements are brought together;
(d) rotating said closing point about an axis while swinging
said array around said axis without rotating, thereby form-
ing said member, said points lying substantially along a
straight line including an acute angle with said axis
Whereby said array is displaced along a hollow cycloidal
path about said axis; and
(e) taking up said member.
4. An apparatus for laying up a multiplicity of elongate
flexible elements into an elongated member having a twist
configuration, comprising:
(a) a plurality of supply reels disposed at fixed locations and
carrying respective elongate elements;
(b) an assembly point formed with a perforated plate tra-
i versed by said elements;
(c) a hollow shaft connected at one end to said assembly
point and formed at an opposite end with a distributor
plate having a cluster array of passages traversed by said
elements whereby said elements fan out to said distributor
plate from said assembly -point, said hollow shaft being
connected to said assembly by a hollow universal joint
traversed by said elements and enabling said shaft to swing
while preventing rotation of said shaft, said array having
a center point;
(d) a flyer rotatable about an axis and formed with an eye
receiving said elements from said distributor plate, said
eye being spaced outwardly from said axis and disposed
along a line connecting said center point and said assembly
point and including an acute angle with said axis whereby
said elements are laid up in said eye to form said member
in a twist pattern; and
(e) means rotatable with said flyer for taking up said mem-
ber.
i
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4S
4,434,609
YARN BRAKE AND PROCESS FOR TENSIONING AT
LEAST TWO YARNS IN A TEXTILE YARN PROCESSING
MACHINE
Dieter Schacht, Kempen, Fed. Rep.' of Germany, assignor to
Palitex Project Company GmbH, Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,807
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 23,
1981 3124482
Int. a.5 DOIH 7/86. 13/10: B65H 59/06, 59/36
U.S. a. 57—58.86 5 Qaims
moving yams and until said tips of said teeth engage said
annular shoulder.
1. In a textile yam processing machine including at least two,
separate, cross-wound, supply packages of yarn, and means
mounting said supply packages in said machine for simulta-
neous withdrawal of the yams from said supply packages in a
common circumferential direction of movement with respect
to said supply packages and in a common linear direction of
movement from said supply packages for processing, in said
machine; the combination therewith of a yarn brake mecha-
nism for applying substantially uniform tension to the at least
two yams moving from said supply packages, said yarn brake
mechanism comprising:
a member mounted in said machine and positioned in the
linear path of movement of the at least two yams and
defining ah outer, frusto-conical shaped, yarn braking sur-
face tapered inwardly in the linear direction of movement
of the yams; *
a comb-like, braking, ring member slidably positioned
around said braking surface and dimensioned for receiving
the at least two moving yams in braking engagement
between said braking surface and said ring member, said
ring member having slightly spaced-a^art teeth of pliantly
elastic, springy material positioned therearound and ex-
tending therefrom generally in the linear direction of
movement of the yams, said teeth being inclined with
respect to said ring both inwardly such that at least the
tips of said teeth contact said braking surface and circum-
ferentially in the circumferential direction of movement of
the yams, so that at least two of said teeth overlap each
other along each directrix of said braking surface and
frictionally engage each of the at least two yams regard-
less of the position of the individual yams or the position
of said ring member on said braking surface; and
means including an annular shoulder formed on said member
at a location normally spaced from the tips of said teeth in
the direction of yam movement for limiting sliding move-
ment of said braking ring member along said braking
surface in the linear direction of movement of the yams,
and while permitting limited floating movement of said
ring along the braking surface under the Influence of the
4,434,610
PIPE STORE FOR SZ STRANDING
Ulrich Oestreich, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Ak^engesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Mar. 10, 1983, Ser. No. 474,160
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 23,
1982, 3210611
Int. a.3 D07B 3/00. 7/00
U.S. a. 57—294 14 Claims
.1
1. In stranding apparatus of the type for SZ stranding of
stranding elements in which an elongate pipe store is mounted
and driven for rotation through a fixed input apertured guide
disc which feeds stranding elements onto the pipe store and
with a mutually rotating output apertured stranding disc which
feeds the strandin'g elements in common to an aperture of a
stranding nipple, the improvement wherein:
said pipe store comprises fiber material
and cured, hard resin bonding the fiber material.
4,434,611
PNEUMATIC TWISTING SPINNING APPARATUS
Junzo Hasegawa, Obu; Susumu Kawabata, Aichi, and Hiroshi
Niimi, Nagoya, all of Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha
Toyota Chuo Kenkyusho, Aichi, Japan
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 341,113
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 31, 1981, 56-13319
Int. Cl.3 DOIH 5/28. 5/18
U.S. a. 57—328 11 Qaims
1. A pneumatic twisting spinning apparatus comprising:
a drafting device having a front roller and back roller, each
of said front and back rollers having a peripheral wall fbr
opening fibers and forming bundled fibers having a prede-
termined thickness;
a deflection means, disposed adjacent to ftaid front roller and
spaced from said front roller by a predetermined distance,
for varying the direction of fleece travel and supplying the
fleece along an outer peripheral wall of said front roller,
said deflection means having a contact surface and being
positioned and constructed such that fleece which has
been supplied along said outer peripheral wall of said front
46
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
roller subsequently contacts a predetermined length of
said contact surface;
a pheumatic twisting nozzle for injecting air under pressure
into a twisting tube to form a swirling air stream having an
axial component of force, so that the fleece supplied frqai
said deflection means can be twisted into a yam by the
swirling air stream revolving at a high speed;
a take-up roller for withdrawing the yam from said pneu-
matic twisting nozzle; and
a winding roller for winding the yam as it is withdrawn by
said withdrawal roller,
whereby ends of the peripheral fibers are separated from
said fleece on said outer peripheral wall of said front roller
and said contact surface of said deflection means, said
peripheral fibers being twisted by said pneumatic twisting
nozzle so as to be wound around central main fibers and
forming a bundled yam.
4,434,612
FALSE TWIST DRAFTING DEVICE FOR CONTINUOUS
WORKING OF SLUBBINGS OF TEXTILE MATERIALS
Ida Petracchi, Via Palasaccio 6; Antonietta Assirelli, Via C.
Abba (9, both of Prato, Florence; Carlo Pacini, Via Paisiello
4, Calenzano, Florence, and Cesare Pacini, Borgo Valsugana
28, Prato, Florence, all of Italy
FUed May t4, 1982, Ser. No. 378,325
Clainu priority, appUcation Italy, May 18, 1981, 9420 A/81;
Dec. 9, 1981, 9584 A/81
Int a.3 DOIH 5/28. 5/18; D02Q 1/04
MS. a. 57—331 10 Claims
1. A false twist drafting device for slubbings of textile mate-
rial, comprising:
a frame support;
a first shaft rotatably mounted to said frame support;
at least two spaced apart first rotating members each having
a first radially extending frontal surface and mounted for
rotating with with said first shaft;
at least two second shafts rotatably mounted to said frame
support, being parallel to said shaft and axially offset from
said first shaft, each of said second shafts having a free
end;
a second rotatable member having a second radially extend-
ing frontal surface and mounted for rotation with each of
said second shafts at each free end to expose at least a
portion of each second frontal surface and so that each
second member overhangs each free end;
said first and second frontal surfaces of one of said first and
second members and said first and second frontal surfaces
of the other of said first and second members facing and
partly overlapping each other at a contact area for receiv-
ing textile to be drafted therebetween, each of said first
and second frontal surfaces having a conical annular
shoulder, with said conical annular shoulders of said over-
lapping furst and second frontal surfaces approaching each
other near a center of said contact area and extending
tangentially to each other at said center of said contact
area, each of said frontal surfaces having a toothed crown
area surrounding and extending outwardly of each conical
annular shoulder respectively for drafting textile in said
contact area;
transmission means for transmitting rotation of one of said
first and second shafts to the other of said first and second
shafts so that said first shaft rototes in a direction opposite
to said second shafts; and
biasing means for axially moving one of said first and second
members with respect to the other of said first and second
members to bias said first and second frontal surfaces
together in said contact area.
4,434,613
CLOSED CYCLE GAS TURBINE FOR GASEOUS
PRODUCnON •
Charles R. Stahl, Scotia, N.Y., assignor to General Electric
Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,571
Int. a.3 PD2C 6/18
U.S. a. 60-39.07 6 Claims
1. An apparatus for producing fluids including at least car-
bon dioxide comprising:
a gas turbine having a gas compressor and a load turbine
driven by combustion of gases introduced into a combus-
tor, said combustor receiving gases at least partially from
said compressor;
means for supplying hydrocarbon fuel to said combustor;
means for supplying a stoichiometric excess of oxidant to
said combustor to effect complete combustion;
means for feeding back at least some gaseous exhuast includ-
ing carbon dioxide to said compressor from the output of
said load turbine;
means to at least partially divert from said compressor the
feedback flow thereto; and
means to remove carbon dioxide from said diverted feed-
back flow.
4,434,614
COMBUSTION CHAMBER IN A ROCKET PROPULSION
SYSTEM WITH MULTIPLE DIVERGENT PORTION
George GUI, 4662 Green Canyon Dr., Las V^as, Nev. 89103;
Alain Souchier, Le Chenet de Blani, Bonnieres S/Scine,
France 78270, and Georges DorrUle, Mezieres en Vexin,
Toumy, France 27510
FUed Apr. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 366,985
Claims priority, appUcation France, Apr. 13, 1981, 81 07366
Int a.3 F02K 1/08
U.S. a. 60—271 14 Claims
1. In a combustion chamber in a rocket propulsion system
with multiple divergent nSitions, comprising a combustion
enclosure in which propellants are introduced and a nozzle for
ejection of the gases produced in the combustion enclosure, the
divergent part of the nozzle and at least one inner divergent
portion whose exit section is smaller than that of the outer
divergent portion and which is fitted in the outer divergent
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
47
portion and connected thereto by connecting means associated
with means for selectively destroying said connecting means to
allow separation and ejection of the inner divergent portion at
a predetermined instant of the functioning of the combustion
chamber corresponding to a predetermined altitude of the
rocket propulsion system, the inner divergent portion is re-
tained in position inside the, outer divergent portion by said
u^r]
connecting means which themselves are fixed to the lower part
of the inner divergent portion, on the one hand, and to the
lower part of the outer divergent portion on the other hand,
whilst the upper part of the inner divergent portion is fitted
laterally against the upper part of the outer divergent portion,
at the exit of the nozzle throat, and pressure balancing ports are
arranged in the inner divergent portion.
4,434,615
EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE OF INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Yasuo Ikenoya, Kawagoe, and Yoichi Ishida, Niiza, both of
Japan, assignors to Honda GUien Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,429
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 23, 1981, 56-9378
Int. a.J POIN 3/30
U.S. a. 60—293 10 Qaims
1. An exhaust gas cleaning device for an internal combusion
engine, said engine having intake and exhaust ports, a cylinder
block, a cylinder head and a valve operating mechanism
mounted on an upper portion of said cylinder head, said ex-
haust port opening at the front surface of said cylinder head
and an'exhaust pip< connected to the opening of said exhaust
port and extending downwardly in front of the engine,
said exhaust gas cleaning device comprising:
a secondary-air supply system connected to said exhaust port
for supplying secondary air thereto for purifying the exhaust
gas;
reed valve means connected irKthe secondary-air supply sys-
tem, said reed valve means behjg adapted to be opened and
closed by the pulsation of exhau^t^a&^generated in said
exhaust port during engine operation, wherein said reed
valve means is moonted on the front side surface of said
cylinder block, below said exhaust port and said valve oper-
ating mechanism, said reed valve means having an inlet
passage and an outlet passage;
a secondary-air intake pipe connecting said inlet passage to the
atmosphere; and
a secondary-air supply passage formed in said cylinder block
and in said cylinder head for connecting said outlet passage
to said exhaust port.
4,434,616
HYDRAULIC WINCH SPEED CONTROL WITH
PRESSURE-RESPONSIVE OVERRIDE
Terry M. Christopher, and Randolph J. Nelson, both of Cedar
Rapids, Iowa, assignors to FMC Corporation, Chicago, III.
FUed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,268
Int. a.3 F16H 39/46
U.S. a. 60—451 10 Clahns
1. A system for controlling the speed of a rouuble load and
for preventing the load from stalling when an operator tries to
move the load at too fast a rate, said system comprising:
a variable displacement hydraulic motor coupled to said
load;
a variable displacement hydraulic pump;
means for connecting said pump to said motor;
power means for operating said pump;
a pump control for controlling the displacement of said
pump to control the fluid supplied to said motor;
a motor control for adjusting the displacement of said motor
to control the speed of said motor; and '
an override circuit for sensing the motor operation and for
overriding said motor control in controlling the displace-
ment of said motor to prevent said motor from stalling.
4,434,617
START-UP AND CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS
FOR RESONANT FREE PISTON STIRLING ENGINE
Michael M. Walsh, Schenectady, N.Y., aaaignor to Machaaieal
Technology Incorporated, Latham, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 40233
Int. a.J P02G 1/06
U.S. a. 60—520 10 Claims
1. A resonant free-piston Stirling engine of the type having
a displacer reciprocally movable within an engine housing and
at least partially driven by a working gas pressure wave peri-
odically produced within the engine to drive a working mem-
ber from which work is derived from the engine, the improve-
ment including in combination, displacer linear electrody-
namic machine means operatively associated with said dis-
placer, said displacer linear electrodynamic machine means
being a general purpose machine capable of selective operation
48
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
either as a linear electric motor to partially driven said dis- transformation temperature range and said motion producing
placer in conjunction with the periodic working gas pressure means is autmoatically extended with relatively great force
1 from the compressed position to the shape memory position
* - - when heated by said heating means to or above the upper limit
■ ' of the transformation temperature range.
4,434,619
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
Hideyuki Kobayashi, Toyota, Japan, assignor to Aisen Seiki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,176
aaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 24, 1980, 55-38015
Int. a.3 B60T 13/00
U.S. a. 60—547.1 5 Qaims
a 50
wave or as a linear electric generator providing a load on said *^ " ®/*' *2'20a»9^
displacer.
4434 618
ENGINE CONSTRUCTION
Corbet! L. Dillon, R.R. 4, Box 176, OUve Hill, Ky. 41164
Filed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,663
Int. a.3 F03G 7/06
U.S. a. 60—528 6 Oainu
1. An improved engine with at least two cooperating piston-
cylinder assemblies wherein each of said assemblies comprises
a cylinder formed in an engine block with a cylinder head and
a piston in sliding relationship in said cylinder toward and
away from said head, a piston rod operatively connected to
one side of said piston and to a crankshaft, motion producing
means of shape-memory material having a transformation
temperature range, such as nickel-titanium or the like, secured
to said cylinder head and the side of said piston opposite from
said connecting rod, s^d motion producing means having a
heat treated high temperature extended shape memory position
and a low temperature low energy compressed position, said
motion producing means being of hollow tubular form and
having pressure and return hoses connected to said motion
producing means for supplying and removing temperature
reducing fluid into and from said motion producing means, and
electrical heating means connected to said motion producing
means, whereby said motion producing means is readily com-
pressed with relatively little force from the extended shape
memory position to the compressed position when temperature
f reducing fluid is supplied to said motion producing means
through said pressure hose to redue the temperature of the
motion producing means to or below the lower limit of the
1. A brake master cylinder assembly responsive to motion of
a brake pedal, comprising:
(a) a cylinder body having a stepped axial bore including a
large diameter portion at one end and a small diameter
portion at the other end;
(b) a tubular piston having an axial bore slidably disposed in
said large diameter portion;
(c) a primary piston having axially opposed end portions,
one said end portion being slidably disposed in said small
diameter portion and the other said end portion being
slidably disposed in the bore of said tubular piston for axial
movement relative to said tubular piston in response to an
axial force without transmitting the axial force to said
tubular piston, said primary piston being operatively con-
nected to said brake pedal at the other end portion thereof;
(d) a pressure chamber in said small diameter portion defined
by the one end portion of said primary piston, said pres-
sure chamber being in fluid communication with an outlet
in said cylinder body;
(e) an annular pressure chamber defined by said primary
piston and said tubular piston in restricted fluid communi-
cation with said pressure chamber for supplying fluid at
low pressure in said pressure chamber;
(0 a vacuum brake booster operatively interconnecting said
brake pedal and said primary piston, said brake booster
comprising a power piston operatively connected to said
primary piston, said power piston separating said booster
into first and second chambers normally in fluid communi-
cation with each other, said first chamber being positioned
between said cylinder body and said power piston and
being in fluid communication with a substantial vacuum
and valve means operatively connected to said brake
pedal for selectively interrupting fluid communication
between said chambers and connecting said second cham-
ber to atmospheric pressure;
(g) a vacuum actuator disposed in said brake booster and
comprising a diaphragm piston operatively connected to
said tubular piston, said diaphragm piston separating said
actuator into first and second actuator chambers normally
in fluid communication with each other, said first actuator
chamber being positioned between said cylinder body and
said diaphragm piston and being in fluid communication
with said first chamber, and means for selectively inter-
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
49
rupting fluid communication between said actuator cham-
bers and connecting said second actuator chamber to
atmospheric pressure, said vacuum actuator being respon-
sive to movement of said brake pedal for moving said
tubular piston relative to said primary piston toward the
other end of said cylinder body to create low pressure in
said annular pressure chamber and for preventing said
brake pedal from receiving the reaction force on said
tubular piston generated by said low pressure;
(h) first return spring means for axially urging said primary
piston toward said one end of said cylinder body to nor-
mally hold said primary piston in its return position; and
(i) second return spring means independent of said first
return spring means for axially urging said tubular piston
toward said one end of said cylinder body to normally
hold said tubular piston in its return position.
4,434,621
ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM
Dennis E. Barbeau, Lambertville, Mich., aHignor toh'eledyne
Industries, Inc., Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299^93
Int. a.J P02C 7/232
U.S. a. 60—734 8 Glims
4 434 620
CONDENSATION SYSTEM FOR POWER PLANT
Hitoshi Ishimaru; Yoji Nagai, and Toyohiko Masuda, all of
Hitachi, Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd. and Hitachi Engi-
neering Co., Ltd., both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 393,335
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 8, 1981, 56-105545
Int. a.3 FOIK 19/00
U.S. a. 60—657 12 Qaims
T^BP^^^
ciin
59 ' CoJolite* iL*ITH6»«l
\, 57 '49
!*> Si *^ lLUm » r "W 'n4 5'-4j '^ ^H
- 65 V TTijZT
1. A condensation system for use in a power plant including
a steam generator and a steam turbine, comprising:
at least one side stream condenser defining therein first and
second hot wells, said first hot well receiving therein
condensate produced by condensing steam exhausted
from said steam turbine;
a condensate feed line having one end thereof connected to
said first hot well and the other end communicating with
said second hot well;
condensate pump means provided in said condensate feed
line for forcibly delivering the condensate through said
condensate feed line from said first hot well; •
first purification means provided in said condensate feed line
for removing impurities from the condensate flowing
through said condensate feed line;
a main condensate feed line having one end thereof commu-
nicating with said condensate feed line and the other end
connected to said steam generator;
main condensate pump means provided in said main conden-
sate feed line for forcibly delivering the condensate
through said main condensate feed line; and
second purification means provided in said main condensate
feed line downstream of said main condensate pump
means for removing impurities from the condensate flow-
ing through said main condensate feed line.
1. A fuel system for an engine having a fuel port comprising:
a fuel inlet conduit having one end adapted for connection
with a source of fuel,
a fuel outlet conduit having one end adapted for connection
with the engine fuel port,
a valve means, the other ends of said fuel inlet conduit and
fuel outlet conduit being fluidly connected to said valve
means,
a third conduit having a first and second end fluidly con-
nected to said valve means,
fuel pump means connected in series with and at a midpoint
of said third conduit for pumping fuel through said third
conduit from its first end and towards its second end,
said valve means being actuatable between a bypass position
and an operating position, wherein in said bypass position
said valve means fluidly connects said other ends of said
fuel inlet and fuel outlet conduits and simultaneously
sealingly closes said first and second ends of said third
conduit, and wherein in said operating position said valve
means fluidly connects said fuel inlet conduit with the first
end of the third conduit and simultaneously fluidly cotv
nects said second end of the third conduit with the fuel
outlet conduit. ^
4,434,622
REGENERATIVE CYCLIC PROCESS FOR
REFRIGERATING MACHINES
Otto Winkler, Bilzers, Liechtenstein, auignor to Balzers Ak-
tiengesellschafl, Liechtenstein
Filed Jun. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 384,931
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jun. 5, 1981,
3700/81
Int. a.3 F25B 9/00
U.S. a. 62—6 6 Qaims
1. A regenerative refrigerating machine comprising:
a housing defining a working space;
a displacer movable in said housing for changing the volume
of said working space;
displacer drive means connected to said displacer for mov-
ing said displacer in said housing;
a compressor having a high pressure side and a low pressure
side;
valve means connected between said compressor low and
high pressure sides and said housing;
an intermediate vessel connected to said valve means for
receiving a gaseous coolant at a medium pressure between
a maximum and a minimum pressure of a cyclic cooling
process for said refrigerating machine;
said valve means with compressor operable during an expan-
sion phase of said process to directly pump gaseous cool-
ant out of said working volume, to compress the gaseous
50
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
coolant to a pressure above a pressure thereof in said
working volume and supply the coolant to said intermedi-
ate vessel;
said valve means and compressor comparable during a com-
pression phase of said process to pump coolant out o( said
intermediate vessel to said work^g volume.
4,434,623
HYDRO-COOLING AIR LOCK
George E. Weasel, Jr., Nhy-Temp, Inc., Hwy. 65, McClure,
Ohio 43534
FUed Nov. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 439,919
Int. a.3 F25D n/02
U.S. a. 62—64 14 Qainis
1. The process involving
a. vegetation in a
b. transport container having
(i) an opening in the walls thereof with
(ii) at least one door over the opening,
c. sprinkler means in the container for flushing chilled water
over the vegetation therein,
wherein the improved method comprises:
d. moving the container against an alcove,
e. forming an air-tight seal between the alcove and the con-
tainer,
f. opening the door into the alcove,
g. flushing the vegetation in the container by pumping
chilled water into the sprinkler means within the con-
tainer,
h. draining the water from the container into the alcove,
i. re-chilling the water from the alcove and g^mping it again
through the sprinkler means, then
j. ceasing the pumping of the water,
k. closing the doors within the alcove, and
1. moving the container away from the alcove.
4,434,624
ENERGY-EFnaENT ALL-ELECTRIC ECS FOR
AIRCRAFT
Michael J. Cronin, Sherman Oaks, and Gordon Seid, Los An-
geles, both of Calif., assignors to Lockheed Corporation, Bur-
bank, Calif .
FUed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,603
Int. Ci} F28B 9/00
UJS. a. 62r-n2 34 Claims
•«*▼•*•« •▼«▼«
1. An environmental control system for an aircraft having at
least one engine, at least one generator driven by said at least
one engine, and a cabin, said environmental control system
being adapted for providing conditioned air to said cabin, the
improvement comprising:
an air circuit for providing said conditioned air to said cabin;
an evaporative heat exchanger located within said air cir-
cuit;
a coolant circuit for providing a fluid coolant path through
said environmental control system, said coolant circuit
coupled to said evaporative heat exchanger;
a coolant compressor located within said coolant circuit;
expansion valve means located within said coolant circuit
* for evaporating said fluid coolant;
a cabin compressor located within said air circuit;
electric motor means adapted to be powered by said at least
one generator; and
means associated with said electric motor whereby said
motor is adapted to drive both said coolant compressor
and said cabin compressor.
4,434,625
COMPUTER COOLING SYSTEM
Roger W. Cree, Stillwater, Minn., auignor to Control Data
Corporation, Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed Apr. 20, 1983, Ser. No. 488,320
Int a.i F25B 5/00
U.S. CI. 62—199 6 daims
^^-^
NfARCH 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
31
ature gaseous refrigerant of said cooling system into
higher pressure, higher temperature gaseous refrigerant;
a first sUge condenser for condensing said higher pressure,
higher temperature gaseous refrigerant into lower temper-
ature, partially liquid refrigerant, said first sUge condenser
including a heat exchange conduit which carries liquid
coolant from a building heating system comprised of a
boUer, supply conduiu from said boiler to a plurality of
heat exchangers, return conduits from said heat exchang-
ers to a heating system condenser, and conduits from said
heating system condenser to said boiler, said heat ex-
change conduiu of said condenser being supplied liquid
coolant from said heating system condenser, said coolant
passing through said heat excljange conduits of said first
, stage condenser before returning to said boiler, said higher
pressure, higher temperature gaseous refrigerant of said
cooling system giving up heat to said coolant in said heat
exchange conduiu before leaving said condenser as lower
temperature, partially liquid refrigerant;
a second sUge condenser for condensing said partially liquid
refrigerant to fully condensed liquid refrigerant, compris-
ing a diversion conduit for directing a portion of said
partially liquid refrigerant to an expansion valve of said
second sUge condenser, a heat exchange conduit for car-
rying the nondiverted portion of said partially liquid re-
frigerant through said second stage condenser, the di-
verted portion of said partially liquid refrigerant being
flushed into said second stage condenser through said
expansion valve to reduce the temperature of said nondiv-
erted portion of said partially liquid refrigerant in said
heat exchange conduit so that fully condensed refrigerant
leaves said second sUge condenser from said heat ex-
change conduits; and
cooling coils for cooling said computer, said fully condensed
refrigerant passing through said cooling coils to draw heat
from and cool said computer whereby used refrigerant is
discharged from said cooling coils and returned to said
compressor.
mainte;
!NANC
4,434,626
^CE AND PROTECTION DEVICES FOR
COOUNG PLANTS
Manfred Schmidt, BcrUn, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Erich Schultzc KG, BerUn, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 171,186, Jul. 22, 1980, Pat. No. 4,329,854.
This appUcation Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,787
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 26,
1979, 2930404
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 18,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a? F25B 43/02
VJS. a. 62-470 2 Clainu
located contiguous compartmenu, each being interposed
in said single circuit at a respectively different relative
location as follows:
(a) a first compartment being interposed between the pres-
sure side of the compressor and the condenser;
(b) a second compartment being interposed between the first
compartment and the suction side of the compressor;
there being further provided in said circuit a degassing valve
between the second compartment and the suction side of
the compressor, a non-return valve between the first com-
pariment and the condenser, and a fluid collector between
the condenser and the suction side of the compressor;
there being further provided a gas pressure-operated means
connecting said first compartment with said second com-
partment for delivering pressurized oil separating from
said compressed gas stream in said first compartment to
said second compartment with some gas dissolved therein;
and conduit means for delivering degassified oil collecting
in the second compartment back to the compressor;
the first compartment being axially centrally located and
directly ringed by the second compartment,
so that, in operation;
as the compressed gas stream enters the first compartment
the pressurized oil therein separates therefrom and the
resultingly de-oiled compressed gas stream flows to and
through the condenser, to and through the evaporator, is
combined with the gas that is degassed from the oil in the
second compartment, and the resulting gas stream is re-
turned to the suction side of the compressor, meanwhile,
the oil degassed and collected in the second compartment
is cooled at least in part by indirect heat transfer with the
atmosphere exteriorly of the apparatus and is returned to
the compressor,
so that the two compartmenu serve the following principal
functions:
oil is separated from compressed gas in the fuit compart-
ment and
separated oil is degassed in the second compartment.
4,434,627
STITCH FORMING DEVICE FOR KNITTING MACHINES
Bruno Pfh>ramer, Emraetten, Switzerland, assignor to Tcxtilma
AG, Hergiswil, Switzerland
FUed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,645
Claims priority, application Switzerland, May 14, 1981.
3135/81
Int. a.J D04B 35/04
UA a 66-120 13 ciain,.
*f
J.I
J.J
=JL
1. A cooling system for a computer, comprising:
a compressor for compressing lower pressure, lower temper-
1. In a single circuit refrigeration plant in which a gas
stream, while flowing in the circuit, is compressed by a com-
pressor which injecu oil into the gas stream while compressing
the gas stream, circulated from the pressure side of the com-
pressor and through a condensor, then through an evaporator
and finally back to the suction side of the compressor,
an apparatus improvement, comprising:
a housing having wall means defining two concentrically
1. A stitch forming device for knitting machines or the like,
comprising;
a hook element having a body member and a hook arranged
at one end of the body member and defining a hook open-
ing;
said body member having a bevelled portion forming a
hollow throat with said hook opening;
a closure element cooperating with said hook element;
said closure element being constructed over at least a por-
tion of iu length by a closed hollow body member;
said closed hollow body member slidingly guiding said hook
element;
said closed hollow body member posseuing a nose-shaped
«K-
52
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
portion forming an inner surface and an end surface at the
end thereof confronting said hook opening;
said end surface of said nose-shaped portion being bevelled
in the same direction as said bevelled portion of said body
member of said hook element; and
said closure element and said hook element being displace-
able relative to each other to define a closed position and
an opened position with respect to said hook in which said
nose-shaped portion of said closed hollow body member
bears upon said hook and upon said body member, respec-
tively.
receiving softened water from said metering tank and for
generating brine;
an electrochemical cell for generating chlorine gas;
first means for selectively supplying brine from said brine
tank means to said electrochemical cell;
second means for selectively supplying brine from said brine
tank means to said decalcifying means during a stage of
regeneration thereof;
a discharge extending from a lower portion of said washing
tub;
4 434 628
KNITTING NEEDLE ASSEMBLY
Takashi Ttuzuki, Kodalra, Japan, aaiignor tB Silver Seiko Ltd.,
Kodaira, Japan
Filed Apr. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 367,935
Int. aj D04B 33/04
VS. a. 66—123 9 Oaims
1. A knitting needle assembly comprising:
a knitting needle made of a metal material and having a
laterally extending butt formed thereon, said butt defining
a groove which extends on a side along the length thereof
from a base end near to a free end thereof; and
an attachment made of a plastic material and comprising a
substantially cylindrical outer member and an inner mem-
ber, said outer member defining an inner bore in which
said inner member is retained, wherein said inner and
outer members define a recess for receiving the free end of
said butt therein to allow said members to be mounted on
the free end of said butt, said inner member having formed
on an inside surface thereof, which partially defines said
recess, a projection adapted to fit in said groove of said
butt thereby to prevent said members from being inadver-
tently removed from said butt.
third means connecting said electrochemical cell to said
discharge;
absorption means connected to said decalcifying means to
receive therefrom softened water and connected to said
electrochemical cell to receive therefrom said chlorine
g?8, for absorbing said chlorine gas in said softened water;
and
means for selectively supplying said softened water and
absorbed chlorine gas into said washing tub, thereby to
perform a bleaching operation.
4 434 630
WASHER-DEHYDRATOR
Yoshio Ikeda, Aichi, Japan, asaignor to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaiaha, Kawaaaki, Japan
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,382
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 15, 1981, 56-31744
Int. a.3 D06F 17/06, 23/04
U.S.a.68-18F Taaima
4,434,629
WASHING MACHINE WITH ELECTROCHEMICAL
CELL
Giuseppe Bianchi, Milan, and Roberto Sburlinoi Udine, both of
Italy, assignors to Industrie Zanussi S.p.A., Pordenone, lUly
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,077
Qaims priority, application Italy, Dec. 14, 1981, 45738 A/81
Int. a.3 D06F 35/00
U.S.a.68-13A 9C\»\iM
1. A laundry washing machine comprising:
a washing tub;
water supply means;
decalcifying means for receivinjg water from said water
supply means and for discharging softened water;
a metering tank at an upper position in the machine for
receiving softened water from said decalcifying means;
brine tank means at a lower position in the machine for
1. A washer-dehydrator which comprises:
a water tank;
a rotary tub which is rotatably held in the water tank and
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
53
which has a depression eccentrically positioned therein
and at least one communication hole for communicating
the water tank therewith;
a pulsator rotatably fitted into the depression;
a pulsator shaft concentrically fitted to the pulsator;
a washing shaft concentrically fitted to the rotary tub;
a rotation moment-transmitting mechanism provided be-
tween the washing shaft and pulsator shaft to transmit the
rotation moment of the washing shaft to the pulsator shaft;
a sealed case for covering the rotation moment-transmitting
mechanism in a watertight state which is set below the
pulsator in the depression at a point raised above the base
of the depression at a prescribed distance, said base of the
depression having a penetrated hole therein to let said
depression communicate with a space defined between the
rotary tub and water tank;
a water-circulation path which is provided in the rotary tub,
one end of which is opened to the depression, and the
other end of which is positioned above the highest level of
water received in the rotary tub;
a filter mechanism which includes an inlet connected to said
other end of the water-circulation path and an outlet
opened to the inside of the rotary tub, and which filters
water running therethrough;
a plurality of pumping blades fitted to the underside of the
pulsator around the sealed case, which, when the pulsator
is rotated, draws the water held in the rotary tub into the
depression thrmigh the communication hole and pene-
trated hole, ana sends forth the water held in the depres-
sion to the filter mechanism through the water-circulation
path; and
guide means provided between the sealed case and the base
plate of the depression to conduct the water sucked
through the penetrating hole to the outer peripheral wall
of the sealed case.
so that rotation of said body applies centrifugal force on
the piles so that they extend radially outwardly in said
treatment zone, said container retaining at least one treat-
ing liquid in said treatment zone so that rotation of said
container applies centrifugal force on said treating liquid
to form same into at least one layer on said inner wall
surface in said treatment zone and with at least one inter-
face of said treating liquid contacting the piles on the pile
article or articles; feeding means for feeding treating liquid
into said container and discharging means for discharging
treating liquid from said container.
4,434.632
APPARATUS FOR THE APPLICATION OF LIQUIDS TO
MOVING MATERIALS
John K. McCoUough, Jr., and John H. O'Neill, Jr., both of
Spartanburg, assignor! to Milliken Research Corporation,
Spartanburg, S.C.
Filed Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 324,789
Int. a.3 D06B 1/02
MS. a. 68—205 R 5 Qaims
4,434,631
APPARATUS FOR TREATING PILE ARTICLES
Masao Matsui, Takatsuki; Kazuo Okamoto, and Takao
Osagawa, both of Oiaka, all of Japan, auignors to Kanebo,
Ltd., Tokyo and^Canebo Synthetic Fibers Ltd., Osaka, both
of, Japan
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,557
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 26, 1981, 56-10364
Int. a.' D06B 1/10
U.S. a. 68—171 6 Gaims
1. An apparatus for treating a pile article or articles, com-
prising:
an elongated, rotatable, hollow container, an elongated,
rotatable body substantially coaxially disposed inside said
container, said container and said body being mounted for
rotation at substantially the same speed about a common,
longitudinally extending, axis of rotation, said container
having a longitudinally extending inner wall surface and
said body having longitudinally extending outer wall
surface means opposed to and spaced radially inwardly
from said inner wall surface of said container, said inner
wall surface and said outer wall surface means defining a
treatment zone therebetween, the pile article or articles
being fixed on said outer wall surface means of said body
1. In an apparatus for applying liquids to moving material
having means for conveying the material in a pre-determined
path of travel, liquid applicator means hving a row of outlets
positioned above the path of travel^of the material for continu-
ously discharging a row of genemly parallel streams of liquid
downwardly toward the path of travel of the material, fiuid
discharge means positioned on one si3e of said row of outlets
so that the discharge axes of said fiuid discharge means inter-
sect the discharge axes of said outlets, a liquid collection cham-
ber mounted on the other side of said row of outlets, a thin
liquid defiector blade extending across said path of travel,
mounting means for mounting said liquid defiector blade in the
path of travel of the liquid defiected by said fiuid discharge
means to said liquid collection chamber, said mounting means
including tensioning means associated with the ends of said
blade and including a threaded shaft extending beyond said
blade end to apply outward tension to the ends of said defiec-
tor blade, said teitsioning means further including tension
measuring means for determining the tension applied by said
tensioning means along the axis of said blade, said measuring
means comprising a cylindrical array of at least two spring
washers under compression, arranged in linear fashion along
said shaft, said shaft being aligned generally parallel to the axis
of said blade, and means for supplying fiuid to said fiuid dis-
charge means to direct liquid from said liquid application
means into said liquid collection chamber,
34
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
HIGH EXPRESSION SQUEEZE ROLL UQUOR
EXTRACTION OF NONWOVEN BATTS
AUen R. Winch, Wcttflcid, N J^ and Willlaa A. Rcwfck, Simp-
■outUIc, S.C^ aifigBon to Cotton Incorporated, New York,
N.Y.
DiTiiion of Ser. No. 259,567, May 1, 1981. This application Sep.
30, 1982, Ser. No. 428,802
Int a.} D06B 15/02
VS. CL 68—267 20 Claims
20. A squeeze roll arrangement for extracting liquor from a
nonwovcn textile fiber batt comprising:
high expression, squeeze roll means for providing a nip to
express liquor from a batt including an upper squeeze roll
and a lower squeeze roll;
flrst primary conveyor means for conveying the batt to the
upper squeeze roll means;
second primary converyor means for conveying the batt
away from the squeeze roll means; and
auxiliary conveyor means deflning a nip with said upper
squeeze roll means for progressively conveying and
squeezing said batt through said nip of said auxiliary con-
veyor means and said upper squeeze roll means -and then
through said nip of said squeeze roll means.
4,434,634
LOCK
Gerald F. Dunphy, and Lance E. Best, both of Melbourne,
tralia, assignors to Ogden Industries Pty. Limited, Victoria,
Australia ^ i
FUed Dec. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 327,254
Claims priority, appUcation Australia, Dec. 2, 1980, PE6720
Int a.^ E05B 65/00; EOSC J/04
US. CL 70—89 10 Claims
1. A lock including a six sided body adapted to be secured to
a support, two passages extending completely through said
body, one of said passages extending between an opposite two
of said sides and the other said passage extending between
another two said sides, a locking bar slidably receivable in
either of said passages to be slidable therein for longitudinal
movement relative to said body between an operative position
and an inoperative position, said bar being insertable into either
end of one of said passages and having a locking end portion
which protrudes from an end of a selected said passage at least
in said operative position, a recess in said locking bar interme-
diate the ends thereof, a primary locking member movably
mounted on said body for movement between a locking posi-
tion and an unlocking position, said primary locking member
protruding into said recess and thereby holding said bar against
said longitudinal movement when said bar is located in said one
passage and is in said operative position and said primary
locking member is in said locking position, and an intermediate
locking member movably mounted on said body and being
responsive to movement of said primary locking member into
said locking position to protrude into said recess when said
locking bar is in said other passage and is in said operative
position.
4,434,635
MANUALLY AND ELECIIUCALLY COMMANDED
AUTOMATIC HOOKLOCK
Augusto Borgato, Rorigo, Italy, assignor to F.A.M.A. di Sandra
Borgato A C, S.n.c., Italy
FUed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,507
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Mar. 11, 1980, 64503 A/80;
May 7, 1980, 64504 A/80
Int a.i E05B 47/00
UAQ. 70— 279 4 Claims
J-
e, Aus*
V
1. An electrically and manually operable lock mechanism for
sliding gate comprising:
a casing adapted for attachment to a sliding gate and includ-
ing a bearing flange having an opening therethrough
adapted to be aligned with a simUar opening in a lock plate
on a gate post as a gate having said lock mechanism at-
tached thereto is closed against the gatepost;
a hook member pivotably mounted within said casing and
extending through the bearing flange opening, with an
inclined surface adapted to act upon an edge of the lock
plate opening to pivotably raise said hook member as the
sliding gate is closing against the gate post and to lower
said hook member when the gate is fully closed, with said
hook member then being hooked on the lock plate;
a first lever pivotably mounted within said casing and in-
cluding a portion engaging said hook member to pivot
said flrst lever in a first direction as said hook member is
raised;
means for pivotably biasing said flrst lever in a second direc-
tion opposite the flrst direction to retain said first lever
engaging portion in engagement with said hook member;
a rod member slidably mounted within said casing;
flrst moving means responsive to the closing of said lock
mechanism against the lock plate as the sliding gate is
closing against the gate post for moving said slidably
mounted rod member to a fmt position;
latching means responsive to said slidably mounted rod
assuming iu flrst position for latching said first lever in a
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SS
latched position with said engaging portion acting against
said hook member to prevent raising of said hook member;
a blocking plate member movably mounted within said
casing for movement between a flrst position and a second
position;
means for biasing said blocking plate member to its flrst
position;
electrical actuation means for moving said blocking plate
member to its second position;
key operated manual actuation means for moving said block-
/ing plate member to its second position;
second movihg means responsive to movement of said
blocking plate member to its second position for moving
said latching means to release said flrst lever from the
latched position and for pivotably raising said hook mem-
ber to permit withdrawal of said hook member from the
locking plate opening and sliding opening of the sliding
gate; and
third moving means responsive to movement of said lock
mechanism away from the lock plate as the sliding gate is
opening for moving said slidably mounted rod member to
a second position and for releasing said hook member to
permit said hook member to be freely raised and lowered.
4,434,636
LOCK HAVING A CYLINDER CORE AND A HOUSING
Kurt Prunbauer, Herzogenburg, Austria, assignor to EVVA>
Werk SpezialerzeugunB von Zylinder-und Sicherheitsschlttss*
em GmbH A Co. KG, Vienna, Austris
FUed Nov. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 209,286
Claims priority, appUcation Austria, Nov. 28, 1979, 7553/79
Int q.} E05B J5/J4. 27/06
VS. a. 70—358 4 Claims
1. A cylinder lock comprising a core provided with a key-
way deflning an elongated center plane and being adapted for
receiving and guiding a key, said key having a key bit formed
with a rear bit portion and a front bit portion, at least one side
of respective rear and front bit portions being provided with
control projections and recesses and the at least one side of the
front bit portion being provided with guiding grooves and ribs,
a cylinder housing for said core, flrst tumbler means arranged
in said housing and said core and being controlled by the
control projections and recesses on the front bit portion, auxil-
iary tumbler means arranged in said core at locations which are
spaced apart from said flrst tumbler means and cooperating
with corresponding recesses in said housing, feeler elements
arranged for reciprocating movement in said core between said
auxiliary tumbler means and said keyway, said feeler elements
forming an oblique angle with the center plane of said keyway
and being controllable by the control projections and recesses
on said rear bit portion to control the movement of said auxil-
iary tumbler means, said auxiliary tumbler means including an
axial groove formed in the periphery of said core, a continuous
bar movable in axial direction in said groove, said continuous
bar being formed with inner extensions engageable with said
feeler elements, and with opposite outer extensions projecting
towards said housing, said housing including an axial recess for
accommodating said outer extension and being also formed
with a series of radial groove#for guiding said outer extensions
in one axial position of said continuous bar while the walls of
said axial groove in said housing act as stop surfaces for said
outer extensions in another position of said bar.
4,434,637 /
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FLATTENING
CORRUGATED HEAT EXCHANGER PLATE
John M. BaUey, Dunlap, IU., assignor to CaterpUlar Tractor Co.,
Peoria, IU.
Division of Ser. No.'165,831, fUed as a PCT US80/00082,
Jan. 28, 1980, pubUshed as WO81/02121. Aug. 6. 1981,
f 102(e) dated Jan. 28, 1980. Pat No. 4,346,582
This appUcation Mar. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 354,212
Int. a.J B21D 53/04
VS. a. 72—17 11 Claims
•Ni
yi}_L=,— I
M
r
^u
^»o
^ -40
1. An apparatus (32) for crushing the ridges (12) in a corru-
gated electrically conductive sheet (10) comprising die set
means (34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44) for receiving said sheet (10) and
moving into and away from engagement therewith, control
means (46) for initiating the movement of said die set means
(34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44), and sensing means (52,54) for sensing the
position of said sheet (10) relative to said die set means (34, 36,
38, 40, 42, 44) and operating to cause said control means (46) to
initiate movement of said die set means (34, 36, 38, 40, 42, 44)
into engagement with said sheet (10) when the sheet (10)
reaches predetermined positions, said sensing means (52, 54)
including switch means (52, 54) in contact with said sheet (10),
said switch means (52,54) including a bridging member (104) of
sufficient size to span the distance between two adjacent ridges
(12) in said corrugated electrically conductive sheet (10), said
bridging member (104) including two sections of electrically
conductive material (108, 110) and insulating means (112)
electrically separating said sections (108,110), and electrical
connector means (114,116) extending from each of said electri-
cally conductive sections (108,110) to said control means.
4,434,638
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEVERING
CORRUGATED METAL PRODUCTS
Eugene W. Sivachenko, 6471 Riverside Dr., Redding, CaUf.
96001
Division of Ser. No. 167,942, Jul. 14, 1980, Pat No. 4,346,576.
TMs appUcation Jul. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 403,909
Int a.} B21F lJ/00
VS. CL 72—130 14 Claims
1. A method for producing from flat metal sheet a corru-
gated product having a predetermined length comprising the
steps of: feeding an elongated flat metal sheet in a longitudinal
direction of the sheet towards a corrugator; forming a score
line in the flat metal sheet across a width thereof, the score line
extending from one face towards another, opposite face of the
sheet; thereafter passing the sheet through the corrugator to
transform the sheet into a corrugated plate having longitudi-
nally extending, parallel side-by-side corrugations; and sever-
ing the corrugated project from the corrugated plate by apply-
56
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
ing a force to the plate in a direction transverse to a surface of
the plate, the force being apphed in the vicinity of the score
line; whereby the product snaps off a remainder of the corru-
gated plate along the score line.
4,434,640
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF A BEARING
BUSHING WITHOUT MACHINING
Lothar Walter, Schweinfurt; Manfred Brandenstein, Eussen-
helm, and Armin OUchewski, Schweinfurt, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignor! to SKF Kugellagerfabriken GmbH,
Schweinfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,657
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 17,
1980,3034951
Int. €1.1 B21D 22/00
U.S. a. 72—348 7 Qaims
4,434,639
ARRANGEMENT FOR PRODUONG DRAWN
FORMATIONS ON WORKPIECES, PARTICULARLY IN
A CUTTING AND PRESSING MACHINE
Walter Bredow, Alfeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to C.
Behrens AG, Alfeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,296
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 8,
1980, 3042158
Int. a.3 BUD 45/00 \
U.S. a. 72—344 9 Qaims
^ ^
n
1
^
n\^
^
r7
1. A drawing arrangement, particularly for use in a cutting
and pressing machine having a numerically controlled coordi-
nate table, for producing drawn formations on substantially
sheet-shaped workpieces having respective bottom surfaces
that travel along a predetermined plane during relative move-
ment between the workpieces and the arrangement, compris-
ing a support; a first tool mounted on said support below said
predetermined plane and having an upper supporting surface^
for supporting the workpieces, permanently arranged in the
predetermined plane, and a recess which opens onto said sup-
porting surface; a second tool mounted on said support above
the predetermined plane for movement in opposite directions
toward and away from said first tool upto area contact with the
respective workpiece supported on said supporting surface,
and including a female drawing die aligned in said opposite
directions with said recess of said first tool; and a drawing
punch mounted on said first tool within said recess for move-
ment between an extended position in which it extends beyond
said supporting surface toward said female drawing die to
deform a portion of the workpiece into the latter and a re-
tracted position in which it is fully retracted into said recess of
said first tool and is at most flush with said supporting surface
of said first tool in order not to interfere with the movement of
the workpiece along the predetermined plane.
1. A method for making a bearing bushing for the support of
the trunnion in universal joints comprising a cylindrical sleeve
section, a bottom section at one axial end of the cylindrical
sleeve section, the peripheral edge joining the sleeve section
and bottom section being of small cross-sectional radius,
consisting of the steps of shaping a blank to form the sleeve
section and bottom section which uniformly projects axially
from the juncture of the sleeve section and bottom section to a
central dome-shaped tip and thereafter flattening from the
inside at least in the area of the central dome-shaped tip of the
bottom section while supporting the bottom section, said
dome-shaped tip being spaced from said bottom support prior
to said flattening step and correspondingly forging the outside
surfaces of the bottom section in the area of the peripheral
edge between the surface of the sleeve section and the outside
surface of the bottom section.
4,434,641 '
BUCKLE RESISTANCE FOR METAL CONTAINER
CLOSURES
Tuan A. Nguyen, Broomfield, Colo., assignor to Ball Corpora-
tion, Muncie, Ind.
FUed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,032
Int. a.J B26D 22/00
U.S. a. 72—354 29 Qaims
1. A method of further forming a metal closure having an
initial configuration defined by a circular panel, a sidewall, and
an intermediate section joining the sidewall to the panel, com-
prising restraining the panel against lateral movement, and
while said panel is so restrained flowing metal radially in-
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
57
wtrdly about the periphery of said panel in an amount suffi-
cient to cause compression doming.
4434642
REVERSE FORGING OR REPLACEMENT GROUSER
BARS
Robert Rasrausscn, Rucho Palos Vcrdet, Cdlf., assignor to
Industrial Parts Depot, Torrance, CtUf.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268.906
Int. Q.} B21D 22/00
U.S. Q. 72-356 7 qhj^
position of the plate blank relative to the parts of the preuing
tool by fitting said non-linear aligning groove in the blank to a
complementary contour of the pressing tool thereby aligning
the plate blank lineariy and transversely relative to the preuing
1. A method of making a replacement grouser bar having a
straight upper edge and a curved lower edge with end portions
wider than the center comprising the steps of:
forming a blank having a concavely curved upper edge and
a straight lower edge with the ends wider than the central
portion;
beveling said straight lower edge;
supporting said blank in a die defining a die cavity having a
bottom, said bottom having a straight horizontal central
portion and downwardly curving side portions, said bot-
tom further being V-shaped in width to preserve said
bevel on said lower edge;
applying downward force to said upper concavely curved
edge along a horizontal plane parallel to said straight
lower edge whereby said curved upper edge is substan-
tially straightened and said beveled straight lower edge is
curved to conform to the downward curvature of said die
bottom.
4,434,643
METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR EMBOSSING HEAT
EXCHANGER PLATES
Christer Almqvist, Tlby, and Lm Llndabl, Handen, both of
Sweden, SMignors to ReHeat AB, Taby, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 90,495, Nov. 1, 1979, abuidoned. This
application Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,315
Qaims priority, application Sweden, No?. 8, 1978, 7811539
Int. Q.3 B21D 5i/02
U.S. Q. 72-379 3 Qaims
1. A method of producing a heat exchanger plate of the kind
having opposite end portions each having apertures there-
through for passage of heat exchanger fluids, the plate also
having at least one intermediate portion between the end por-
tions, the intermediate portion and each end portion having a
gasket-receiving groove along each edge extending longitudi-
nally of the plate, said method comprising: pressing the whole
of each portion simultaneously between parts of a pressing tool
and pressing each portion sequentially with respect to other
portions, the step of pressing the intermediate portion includ-
ing simultaneously pressing (a) a non-linear aligning groove
extending generally traversely of the plate at one end of said
intermediate portion to provide for linear and transverse align-
ment of the plate during a subsequent pressing operation, (b) a
plurality of parallel non-linear corrugations over the remainder
of the longitudinal dimension of said intermediate portion with
said non-linear corrugations having a different pattern than
said non-linear aligning groove and (c) a first gasket-receiving
groove extending longitudinally along each edge of said inter-
mediate portion; and thereafter moving the plate blank longitu-
dinally of itself relative to the pressing tool, adjusting the
1040 O.G.— 3
tool; and pressing another portion of the heat exchanger plate
with the pressing tool thereby providing a second gasket-
receiving groove extending longitudinally along each edge of
said intermediate portion connecting with said first gasket-
receiving groove.
4,434644
ROTARY BENDING AND FORMING DEVICES
Robert J. Gargrave, Kettering; John K. Thompson, West Car-
ronton, and James F. Comstock, Kettering, all of Ohio, aasign-
ors to READY Tools, Inc., Dayton, Ohio
Filed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,133
Int. Q.^ B21D i/04
U.S. Q. 72-387 9 claim.
1. A bending and forming device comprising an operating
head and a holder for said head wherein said operating head is
a generally cylindrical body including a longitudinally extend-
ing groove in iu outer peripheral surfacf , said head mounting
for rotation on and relative to said holder and preaenting the
groove therein to the materials to be worked in iU bending and
forming function, said holder including m^ans defining a sad-
S8
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
die for ^eating said head, said saddle comprising a body having
a base, a longitudinally extended substantially hemi-cylindrical
groove in a surface thereof remote from its base, a wall surface
bounding said groove which incorporates two longitudinally
extending bearing portions bounding a strip-like, relatively
recessed, portion of said wall surface therebetween and afford-
ing a load accommodating seat for said cylindrical body, means
defining a retention device mounted on said saddle, in releas-
able connection therewith and to one side of said groove
therein, constructed and arranged to have only a limited sur-
face portion thereof overlie and bear on a portion of said
operating head to hold said head to and for a balanced rocking
or routive movement on said seat, said wall surface bounding
said groove including therein a longitudinally extending recess
partially nesting a cord-like segment of material which is im-
pregnated with lubricant the projected portion of which bears
on said cylindrical body in the course of its rocking or rotative
movement on and with reference to said seat.
4,434,645
APPARATUS FOR THE RADIAL SHAPING OF
TUBULAR ARTICLES
Jotef Svercl, Olomouc; Jan NoTsk, Trebdn, and Zdenek Kalab,
Urcice, all of Czechoslorakia, assignors to SIGMANKoncem,
Olomouc, Czechoslovakia
FUed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,167
Oaims priority, application Czechoslovakia, Aug. 1, 1980.
537^80; Dec. 2, 1980, 8350-80
lot a.3 B21D 41/00
UA a. 72-402 14 Claims
1. Appparatus for the radial shaping of rotors, spindles,
shafts and the like comprising a frame having at least two
guiding segments situated between a left side wall and a right
side wall, said guiding segments being provided with an outer
rolling surface, a freely routable supporting ring encompass-
ing said guiding segments, at least two rollers rototobly sup-
ported on eccentric pins fixed on the supporting ring to engage
respective ones of said segments, rods interposed between said
rollers, sliding shoes bearing forming jaws connected toHhe
inner end of said rods, the outer end of said rods being pivot-
ally connected on supporting pins fixed, to the supporting ring
so that the sliding shoes with the associated forming jaws are
adapted to perform a radial movement between said guiding
segments on movement of said supporting ring, the supporting
ring being provided on its external circumference with at least
one eyelet for a connection with a connecting rod, the other
end of which is supported by an eccentric sleeve, which in turn
is supported by an eccentric pin connected to a driving shaft.
4,434,646
C-FRAME PRESS
N^yosbi Maeda; Hideo Itakura, and TakasU Yagi, all of
^Sasamihara, Japan, assigDors to Aida EngineeriBg, Ltd.,
Sagamihara, Japan
FUed Jon. 21, 1962, Ser. No. 390,625
Claims priority, application Jap«^ Dec. 17, 1961, 56-202535
lat a? B21J 9/1%
U.S. a. 72-451 1 ctaim
<-i
9
P '■ m
,M
l1\
w
fX-
\0t
»\
R^_^
IJ^tH
Wk !1
W\
J
1
w^» \ '
u^
ii
-«
(1 ^
*
.jB-4
: o
i
4—
' '
1. A C-frame press comprising:
a C-shaped frame having a crown part and a bed part defin-
ing an opening therebetween, a slide reciprocal between
said crown part and said bed part, a main shaft having a
flywheel thereon and positioned laterally of said slide
within said frame, eccentric discs rotatobly mounted
within said frame and driven from said main shaft, con-
necting rods extending substantially horizontally from
said eccentric discs towards the upper portion of said slide
and reciprocated by said eccentric discs, and a toggle
mechanism mounted between said slide and said crown
part and having a central shaft portion to which said
connecting rods are connected, said frame having a ma-
chine chamber within said frame adjacent said toggle
mechanism and in which said main shaft, eccentric discs
and connecting rods are located, said space within said
frame adjacent the bed part being clear for receiving part
of the workpiece being acted on by said press; and
spacers positioned in said opening in said C-shaped frame
and being sufficiently long for urging said crown part and
said bed part apart in the vertical direction a distance
sufficient to cause said frame to exert on said spacers a
load which is at least a substantial part of the normal
maximum press load exerted by said press on a workpiece.
4,434,647 •>
DYNAMIC SPOT CALIBRATION FOR AUTOMATIC
PARTICLE COUNTERS
William T. Whitcomb, Gleodale, and Jolw V. Bntler, Newliidl,
both of Calif., assignors to Lockheed Corporatioa, Bnrbuik.
CUif. ^^
FUed JoL 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,238
lot CL^ GOIN 15/02
UA a. 73—1 R 28 Claims
1. A dynamic calibration system for calibrating an automatic
particle counter having a sensor unit including a sensor win-
dow defming a fluid passage, said sensor unit including means
to sense the size of particles contained in a fluid passing
through said window and being adapted to generate signals
representative thereof, comprising:
at least one probe having a portion adapted to be inserted
into and out of said wnsor window fluid passage, said at
least one probe constructed of transparent material;
\
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
59
means associated with said probe portion for simulating
particles of a preselected size, said simulating means com-
prising an opaque spot located along said probe portion;
means for gripping said probe;
means connected to said gripping means for reciprocally
driving said probe portion within said sensor fluid passage;
*l£_]
through the corresponding terminating impedance of the
receive transducer;
measuring said output signal;
mounting in said spaced relationship said second pair of
transducers to be calibrated;
supplying said driving signal to said first transducer through
its corresponding terminating impedance;
measuring through the corresponding terminating impe-
dance of said third transducer the output signal produced
thereby;
mounting in said spaced relationship said third pair of trans-
ducers to be calibrated;
supplying said ^ driving signal to said second transducer
through its corresponding terminating impedance;
measuring through the corresponding terminating impe-
dance of said third transducer the output signal produced
thereby;
measuring the ideal source value of said transducer driving
signal source; and
deriving from said measures of transducer driving signal and
transducer output signals transducer performance calibra-
tion values for at least one of said three transducers.
means associated with said driving means for providing
power to said driving means; and
means connected to said driving means for precisely posi-
tioning said at least one probe portion relative to said
sensor window fluid passage.
^4,434,648
ELECTROACOUSneTRANSDUCER CALIBRATION
METHOD AND APPARATUS
ComeUs J. Drost, and G. Jan MUanowski, both of Ithaca, N.Y.,
assignors to ComeU Research Foundation, Inc., Ithaca, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 238,319, Feb. 26, 1981, Pat. No. 4,391,124.
This application Feb. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 469,861
Int. a.} H04B 11/00: H04R 29/00
U.S. a. 73—1 DV 11 Claims
,,T| 1^ ,
140 r-TD, •= — I C*L i** 172, — 1_,
•TL.** L_J„L.J^M.)L''';„^irtrsAUM
L-Mfm ACOUSTIC ? "* '" "2 148 >
MfY . TESTMTH ^^ H l» in-
OSC -150 ,1(4 .iJioj ^'M
82 it
ACOUSTIC
TEST UTH
|'l(4
4,434,649
GAUGE HAVING A SURFACE FOLLOWER WITH
PERIPHERAL VENT
Paul WUIiams, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to AccuRay Corpora-
tion, Columbus, Ohio
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,424
Int. a.' GOIB U/06, 13/04
U.S. a. 73—37.7 20 Oaims
SEIISITIVin
on
MTEKin
SKWU.
OUT
1. A calibration method for a set of three terminated ultra-
sonic transducers, comprising:
selecting three different pairs of transducers from said set of
three, a first pair including a first and a second transducer,
a second pair including said first and a third transducer,
and a third pair including said second and said third trans-
ducers, said second transducer being reciprocal, said first
transducer being suitable as a transmitter, said third trans-
ducer being suitable as a receiver;
selecting for each of said first, second and third transducers
corresponding terminating impedances;
mounting in a predetermined spaced relationship said fifst
pair of transducers to be calibrated;
continuously supplying from a drive signal source a driving
signal to said firs^ transducer to cause emission of ultra-
sonic waves, said \ driving signal being supplied through
the corresponding terminating impedance of the transmit
transducer;
causing said second transducer to receive said emitted ultra-
sonic waves and to produce a transducer output signal
1. Apparatus to be utilized \n performing a measurement of
traveling sheet or the like, comprising
a surface follower body adapted to be constrained during the
measurement for movement along a surface follower path
intersecting the path of the sheet and urged by a force
toward one surface of the sheet,
the body having a gas confining wall, the wall having at least
an edge portion adapted to be located next to the sheet
surface, the edge portion having thereat uniformly distrib-
uted pressurized gas supply means with an outer periphery
for pressurizing a gas bearing region that is contiguous to
the sheet surface and bounded at the sheet surface substan-
tially by the orthographic projection of the periphery on
the sheet suface,
the pressurization producing sufficient pressure against the
sheet and the wall to leviute the body against the urging
force,
the gas lupply means having gas retaining wall means with
substantially only knife edge thickness next to the periph-
*tTy and the sheet surface so as to minimize the area of the
sheet surface over which high velocity gas flows in escap-
ing from the gas supply means and the gas bearing region,
the body being so shaped that the flow of gas from the gas
supply means is substantially unconfined in the region of
the sheet surface outside the gas retaining wall means in
order to terminate the gas bearing region substantially at
the periphery and so that the pressurization is effective
without producing substantial amounts of high velocity
gas flow over a substantial area of the surface of the sheet
mm
60
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
within the gas bearing region, whereby the body is main-
tained at a distance from the sheet surface that is substan-
tially constant and relatively unaffected by variations in
the roughness of the surface.
4,434,650 I
HYDROCARBON SENSOR FLOAT
Ralph A. Perry, Indianapolis, and Raymond J. Andrejasich,
Carmel, both of Ind., assignors to Emhart Industries, Inc.,
Indianapolis, Ind.
FUed May 5, 1982, Ser. No. 374,999
Int. a.3 GOIN 25/18
VS. a. 73—61.1 R 6 Claims
r
1. A sensor float for use in detecting the presence of foreign
substances in a liquid comprising:
(a) an elongated floatation member having top and bottom
ends, a cavity extending across said elongated member
near said bottom end and opening to sides thereof to
permit the passage of liquid therethrough, and a centrally
disposed elongated passageway extending from said top
end to said cavity, said passageway including an enlarged
section exposed to said cavity,
(b) a sensor carried in said cavity including insulation means
electrically insulating same from said liquid, electrical
conductors extending through said passage>vay, connect-
ing means interconnecting said sensor to said electrical
conductors within^d enlarged portion, and electrically
insulative material carried within said enlarged portion
and sealing said connecting means from the environment,
and
(c) means for attaching a variable amount of weight to said
bottom end of said floatation member.
posed in relation to said straight ridge; the included angle
between said first pair of faces and between said second pair of
4,434,651
HARDNESS TEST INDENTERS
Jill E. G. Wood, Hampton, England, assignor to The Secretary
of State for Industry in Her Britannic M^esty's GoTcmment
of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland,
London, England
FUed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,608
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 6, 1981,
8113740
Int a.3 COIN 3/40
VS. a. 73—85 5 Claims
5. A hardness t^st indenter having a rectangular base and
four operative plane faces, a first pair of said faces meeting
each other in a straight ridge; and a second pair of said faces
making substantially equal angles with said straight ridge and
so disposed in relation to one another and to said ridge that the
first pair of faces have edges substantially symmetrically dis-
0
faces being lir±0.r; and the said straight ridge having a
length not more than about 0.5 millimeter and not less than
about 0.05 millimeter.
' 4,434,652
AUTOMATED TIRE MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES
William C. Christie, Tallmadge, Ohio, assignor to The Goodyear
Tire A Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
FUed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 339,876
Int. a.3 B60C I9/J0
VS. a. 73—146 14 Claims
COMtomrMr
MSStntir
to-
MS"
th'
M9'
oertcr
9. In a tire manufacturing process including assembling and
curing components of the tire and testing the cured tire by
detecting tire data from at least a first sensor means and a
second sensor means and analyzing the data by at least a first
testing algorithm and a second testing algorithm, an improved
method for enabling an operator to select combinations of said
sensor means and said testing algorithms in order to analyze
the tire based pn the selected combination, said method com-
prising the steps of:
generating signals representative of at least one combination
of sensor means and a testing algorithm, each said combi-
nation comprising at least one of said first and second
sensor means and at least one of said first and second
testing algorithms;
storing data obtained from the represented sensor means;
analyzing the data according to the represented testing
algorithm; and
indicating the condition of the tire in response to the analysis
of the data.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
61
4,434,653
APPARATUS FOR TESTING EARTH FORMATIONS
MarshaU N. Montgomery, Houston, Tex., assignor to Dresser
Industries, Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Jul. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,477
Int. a.3 E21B 49/10 ,
VS. a. 73—151 16 Claims
polarization orthogonal to the longitudinal axis of the
housing, the axis polarization of the signal providing a
U
1. Fluid sampling apparatus for obtaining samples of connate
fluids from subsurface earih formations traversed by a bore-
hole comprising:
a body member adapted for suspension in a borehole;
a fluid sampling probe coofwratively arranged on and exten-
sible from said body member;
a sample collection means cooperatively arranged on said
body member for receiving and retaining a sample of
connate fluids;
a fluid passage coupled between said fluid sampling probe
and said sample collection means; and
control means located in said fluid passage intermediate said
fluid sampling probe and said sample collection means for
maintaining the pressure within at least a portion of said
fluid passage at minimum level, said level proportionally
relat^ to formation pressure, and
wherein said pressure cpntrol means comprises:
means for receiving and retaining a sample of said connate
fluids; and
pressure responsive means for restricting said fluid passage
in proportional response to the pressure of said connate
fluids sample retained in said receiving and retaining
means.
measure of the orientation of the housing as a reference for
said inclinometer.
4,434,655
BLACK ^WDER FLAMESPREAD TESTER
Martin Summerfield, Princeton; Nealc A. Meuina, Pennington,
and Larry S. Ingram, Cranbury, all of N.J., assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Army, Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,816
Int. a.5 GOIL 5/14
U.S. a. 73—167 21 Claims
/* M
/tJ
^
^
1. A black powder flamespread tester, said tester compris-
mg:
4,434,654
BOREHOLE ORIENTAtlON DETECnON SYSTEM
EMPLOYING POLARIZED RADIATION
Rand H. Hulsing, II, Redmond; Rex B. Peters, WoodinviUe, and
Kurt E. Steinke, BeUeme, aU of WMh., assignors to Sunds-
trand Data Control, Inc., Redmond, Wash.
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,431
Int. CI.3 E21B 47/022
VS. a. 73—151 11 Claims
5. A borehole survey probe comprising:
a housing to traverse the borehole, the housing having a
longitudinal axis and being randomly rotatable about said
longitudinal axis as the housing traverses the borehole;
an inclinometer in said housing; and
a source of polarized electromagnetic radiation fixed to said
housing generating a polarized signal having an axis of
sample holding means for holding a sample of black powder
to be tested;
ignition means for igniting a sample contained in said sample
holder means, said ignition means including;
an electrically actuated pyrotechnic squib;
an ignition head having a first bore formed therein, said
squib being received in said first bore, a transition cham-
ber defined in said ignition head, said squib emitting hot
gases into said transition chamber upon actuation, and a
void volume operatively disposed in said ignition head,
said gases from said squib passing from said transition
chamber via said void volume into said sample holding
means to ignite a sample contained in said sample holding
means, passage of said gases through said void volume
serving to smooth the flow of said gases;
said ignition means further including an orifice plate dis-
posed between said transition chamber and said void
volume.* said orifice plate having a plurality of orifices
formed therein for metering said gases from said transition
chamber to said void volume; and
said tester further comprising optical monitoring means for
measuring the rate at which a flame front propagates
through a sample contained in said sample holding means
when the sample is ignited by said ignition means.
62
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,434,656
MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR
Chciter J. BlccUoger, Bloomfleld Hills, Mich., assignor to Ford
Motor Company, Dearborn, Mich,
per No. PCr/US82/00434, § 371 Date Apr. 8, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 8, 1982, PCI Pub. No. WO83/03669, PCT Pub.
Date Oct 27, 1983
per FUed Apr. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 380,841
Int. a.J GOIF 1/68
VS. a 73-204 3 ctoin„
for generating a capacitive value, capacitive means arranged
below said liquid level detecting means and dipped always in
the liquid to measure a dielectric constant of the liquid, a
capacitive reference means that is not responsive to the dielec-
tric constant of the liquid, a LC oscillator means converting
each capacitive value measured by said liquid level detecting
means, liquid dielectric constant measuring means and refer-
ence means into a frequency signal, said reference means com-
1. A heated element mass air flow meter for measuring mass
air flow including:
an elongated element means positioned in the air flow hav-
ing a temperature responsive resistance for conducting an
electric current, an electrical parameter of said element
means being indicative of the mass of air flowing past said
element means;
an elongated bluff" body means positioned generally parallel
to and spaced from said element means, said bluff body
means providing sufTicient resistance to air flow so as to
create an area of stagnation upstream of said bluff body
means for separating air bom dirt from the air stream said
bluff" body means having a relatively large cylindrical
cross section area in comparison to the cross section area
of said elongated element means;
said element means being positioned downstream of said
area of stagnation so as to be in a relatively dirt free area
in comparison to the remainder of the stream and said
element means being positioned adjacent said bluff body
means at a distance substantially less than the longest cross
sejrtion dimension of said bluff" body means; and
saitf element means being positioned downstream of an angu-
lar segment on the upstream side of said bluff" body means
and centered about the centerline of said bluff" body
means, the angular segment extending about 40 degrees to
each side of said centerline.
4,434,657
UQUID QUANTITY MEASURING APPARATUS
Hiroshi Matsumura, Kamakura; Yasuto Ohta, Yokohama; Tet-
soo Nozaki, Ziishi; Makoto Shimizu, Chigasaki, and Shigeni
Sugizaki, Hiratsuka, all of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Tatsuno
Co., Ltd^ Tokyo, Japan
FUed Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,509
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 25, 1981, 56-150565
Int. q.J GOIF 23/26
VS. a. 73-304 C 13 claims
1. An apparatus for measuring the quantity of liquid in at
least one tank, which comprises means for detecting a Kquid
level in the tank and having positive and negative electrodes
arranged to allow a flow-in and out of the liquid therebetween
t
pensating a capacitive variation of said LC oscillator means
due to ambient temperature change and aging thereof, said LC
oscillator means being connected to each of said liquid level
detecting means, liquid dielectric constant measuring means
and reference means through a switching means, and a control
box with an indicator means to calculate the quantity of liquid
in the tank based on the frequency information from said LC
oscillator means and indicate the same on the indicator means.
4,434 658
ULTRASONIC WAVE TOMOGRAPHIC IMAGING
SYSTEM
Jn^ji Miyazaki, Yokohama; Hirohide Miwa, Kawasaki, and
Takaki Shimura, Machida, all of Japan, assignors to l^^itsu
Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
per No. Per/JP80/00164, § 371 Date Mar. 25, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 11, 1981, Per Pub. No. WO81/00198, Per Pub.
Date Feb. 5, 1981
per FUed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 253,936
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 25, 1979, 54-94532
lat. CL^ GOIN 29/04
VS. a. 73—618 10 Claims
1. An ultrasonic wave tomographic imaging system wherein
an acoustic image of a desired tomographic plane in an object
is focused on an ultrasonic wave receiving means by an ultra-
sonic wave lens, said system comprising
generating means for generating focused ultrasonic waves
from along a direction that is contained in a plane in space
that includes said tomographic plane in said object, and
for sequentially scanning said tomographic plane in said
object with said focused ultrasonic waves, said direction
being oriented essentially transversely to the axis of said
lens, and
a gate means for allowing said ultrasonic wave receiving
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
63
means to selectively receive the ultrasonic waves of said
acoustic image that are focused by said lens, in correspon-
lUwncaicuT
J^^:^J
dence with said scanning of said tomograhic plane in said
object by said generating means.
riage means for movement of said scanner means in said
X-direction;
drive means for moving said scanneV means across said
surface in said X-direction;
mechanical indexing means for indexing and incremenully
moving said carriage means in said Y-direction in a prede-
termined increment in response to a complete movement
of said scanner means in said X-direction;
said drive means including a shaft rouubly carried by said
carriage means having a closed-loop helix groove formed
therein;
follower means engaging within said groove causing said
scanner means to travel along said shaft as said shaft ro-
tates and reverses said direction of travel when said fol-
lower means reaches the end of said helix;
a drive motor operatively connected for routing said shaft;
and
an actuating means carried by said scanner means which
mechanically engages said mechanical indexing means
and actuates said mechanical indexing means upon said
scanner means traveling said complete movement in said
X-direction for indexing said indexing means and thereby
effecting said predetermined increment m said Y-direc-
tion.
4,434,660
ULTRASONIC INSPECHON AND DEPLOYMENT
APPARATUS
Jennifer E. Michaels; Thomas E. Michaels, both of Ithaca, N.Y.,
and Stephen J. Mech, Jr., Pasco, Waah., auignors to The
United Stetes of America as represented by the United Sutcs
Department of Energy, Wuhington, D.C.
FUed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,304
Int. a.) GOIN 29/04
VS. a. 73—622 4 Claims
4,434,659 ^
TWO-DIMENSIONAL SCANNER APl^RATUS
George W. Kurtz, and Ben F. Bankston, both of HuntSTllle, Ala.,
assignors to The United States of America as represented by
■ the Administrator of the National Aeronautics and Space
Administration, Washington, D.C.
FUed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,474
Int. a.i GOIN 29/04
VS. a. 73—620 6 Claims
1. A twoHlimensional scanner apparatus for scanning a sur-
face in two-dimensions consisting of an X-direction and a
Y-direction, said apparatus comprising:
a frame;
a carriage means slidably carried by said frame for move-
ment in said Y-direction;
scanner meana carried by said carriage means adapted for
carrying a detector probe for detecting a condition on said
surface;
suppori means supporting said scanner means on said car-
1. An ultrasonic deployment apparatus for performing a task
upon a specimen which apparatus compnses:
(A) a scanning head having an ultrasonic proflling element
and task performing means for performing a task on a
specimen,
(B) mechanical support means, for support, positioning and
aligning said scanning head, and
(C) computer means for the control of said mechanical
. suppori means, said computer means adapted to repeata-
bly locate specific locations on said specimen using a
reference system established by said computer means by
observation by said profiling element of surface reference
marks on a surface of said specimen.
2. An ultrasonic deployment apparatus for the inspection of
specimens which comprises:
(A) couplant supply means;
(B) a scanning head having fluid communication with said
couplant supply means, a proflling ultrasonic element for
mapping the surface of the specimen, an acoustical veloc-
ity measuring ultrasonic element for measuring the veloc-
ity of sound in the couplant, at leut one specimen inspec-
tion element for inspection of the specimen, and having a
64
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
bellows for forming a couplant filled volume above a
surface of the specimen thereby providing an acoustical
communication path between the specimen and said scan-
ning head thereby accommodating passage of ultrasonic
waves therebetween;
(C) mechanical support means for supporting, aligning and
positioning said scanning head in proximity to the speci-
men; and
(D) control means for said mechanical support means for
controllably aligning and positioning said scanning head,
which control means comprises a computer system which
is programmed to control a specimen inspection traveling
scan of the scanning head and moreover to automatically
control the position and alignment of the scanning head in
response to, data obtained by previous and concurrent
profiling scans to achieve and maintain desirable position
and alignment of said scanning head with respect to said
specimen and to use specimen surface features to identify
a computer coordinate system and to use said coordinate
system to identify and interpret inspection data, said com-
puter moreover programmed to continuously interpret
data received from specimen inspection scans and profil-
ing scans using concurrently monitored couplant acousti-
cal velocity measurements.
4,434,662
ULTRASONIC IMAGE GENERATING APPARATUS
Philip S. Green, Atherton, Califs anignor to Siemcu Comora-
tlon, Iselln, N J.
FUed Jon. 16, IMl, Ser. No. 274,282
iBt a.J GOIN 29/04
UA a 73-641 gcWnu
iiuMittn
cEiS/
HFLiClW
PICIUI
imuKaissiM
lEas
4,434,661
ULTRASONIC DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
HiroUde Miwa, Kawasaki, and Taludd Shimura, Machida, both
of Japan, anignors to Fi^itsu Limited, Kawaiaki, Japan
PCT No. PCr/JP80/00015, § 371 Date Oct 3, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 22, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01537, PCT Pub.
Date Aug. 7, 1980
per FUed Jan. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 209,403
Clainu priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 3, 1979, 54-11587
Int. a.3 GOIN 29/00
U.S. a. 73-625 20CIaimi
1. An ultrasonic diagnostic system for obtaining an acoustic
image of a measured object comprising:
(a) a plurality of probe units being separated mutually, each
probe unit being selectively and separately positionable in
any direction and having an electric-acoustic transducer
for both transmitting said ultrasonic waves and receiving
said acoustic echo waves;
(b) a transmitting circuit for causing said probe units to
transmit ultrasonic waves having different characteristics
almost simultaneously; and
(c) a receiving circuit containing filters for isolating and
extracting signals received from said transducers, said
signals having properties respectively corresponding to
acoustic echo waves resulting from said transmitted ultra-
sonic waves; whereby said system obtains the acoustic
image of the measured object corresponding to a plurality
of scanning Unes formed by scanning of each of said probe
units.
I
1. In an ultrasound appaOratus comprising focusing means for
focusing ultrasound waves and an ultrasound detector for
receiving said focused ultrasound waves, said detector having
a plurality of elongated piezoelectric electric detector ele-
ments, the improvement
(a) wherein said focusing means are astigmatic focusing
means having a first and a second focal plane,
(b) wherein the longitudinal axes of said elongated detector
elements are curved, and
(c) wherein said ultrasound detector is positioned in one of
said focal planes.
4 434 663
ELECTROMAGNETIC ACOUSTIC TRANSDUCER
William E. Peterson, Thousand Oaks, Calif., and Robert B.
Thompson, Ames, Iowa, assignors to Rockwell International
Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
FUed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,776
Int a.5 GOIN 29/04
VJS. a. 73-643 14 ctainis
1. An electromagnetic acoustic transducer for use with an
electrically conductive object, comprising:
a source of magnetic flux for establishing a sutic magnetic
field in the object and
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
63
a meandor coil for inducing eddy currenu in the object
when an alternating current is applied to the coil, said coil
including: ^
a first serpentine element positioned within said magnetic
field in a first plane perpendicular to said field and
a second serpentine element positioned within said mag-
netic field adjacent to said first element and in a second
plane parallel to said first plane,
said elements being connected in series and so oriented
that the current direction in said first element is opposite
to the current direction in said second element at any
instant,
said source and said coil being so oriented that the vector
product of said field and said eddy currents produces an
instantaneous force field in the object which is periodi-
cally alternately oriented.
4,434,665
INTEGRATED CAPACITIVE TRANSDUCER
Morgan Adolfhson; Sturc Gtfransson, and BcrtU Httk, aU of
VMsteras, Sweden, assignors to ASEA Aktiebolag, VMsteras,
Sweden
FUed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,105
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden, Jan. 29, 1981, 8100638
Int. a.J GOIL 9/12
VJS. a. 73—724 19 Claims
4,434,664
PRESSURE RATIO MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
Frank J. Antonazzi, South Bend, Ind., aMignor to The Bcndiz
Corporation, Southfleld, Mich. N^
FUed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,578
Int. a.3 GOIL 9/12
U.S. a. 73—701 8 Qalms
1. A pressure ratio measuring system comprising:
means for generating first and second alternating reference
signals having a predetermined phase relationship therebe-
tween;
a first pressure sensitive impedance, responsive to a first pres-
sure and driven by said first reference signal, for generating
a first signal proporiional to the change in the first pressure;
a second pressure sensitive Dnpedance, responsive to a second
pressure and driven by an alternating feedback signal for
generating a second signal proporiional to the change in the
second pressure;
means, electrically connected to said first and second imped-
ances, for generating an error signal as the difference be-
tween said first and second signals; and
means for convening said error signal into a digital number
including means for integrating said error signal and gener-
ating a digital output number therefrom representative of the
ratio of said first and second pressures, digital-to-analog
converter means for converting said digital number to an
analog signal, and means for multiplying said analog signal
by said second reference signal to generate said feedback
signal, wherein said feedback signal is fed to said second
impedance means to generate said second signal and null said
error signal.
1. A transducer for indicating the value of a physical quan-
tity to be measured, comprising:
a transducer capacitor having two spaced electrically con-
ducting plates movable relative to one another in response
to a mechanical signal representative of the physical quan-
tity to be measured and for generating an electrical signal
in response thereto;
capacitive means for trimming said transducer capacitor;
means for actuating and de-actuating said transducer capaci-
tor to be respectively responsive and non-responsive to
said mechanical signal in accordance with pre-designated
time intervals;
means for integrating an electrical signal in accordance with
the capacitance of said transducer capacitor and providing
an output signal when the integrated signal exceeds a
reference value; and
means for receiving control signals for controlling said
means for actuating and for transmitting said output signal
4 434 666
ELECTROMAGNETIC FLOWMETERS AND METHODS
FOR MEASURING FLOW
John Hemp, Cranfleld, EngUmd, and Yousif A. H. Al-Khair^i,
Baghdad, Iraq, assignors to National Research Development
Corporation, London, England
FUed Apr. 4, 1960, Ser. No. 137,463
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 5, 1979,
79118^5
Int a.3 GOIF 1/S8
U.S. a. 73^-861.12 18 Claims
17. A magnetic flowmeter for measuring the flow rate of a
fluid conducted through a pipe having a longitudinal axis Z,
the fluid intercepting a magnetic field whose lines of flux are
essentially parallel to a transverse axis X, which is normal both
to axis Z and a diametric axis Y, said flowmeter furiher com-
prising:
A. a pair of electrode assemblies mounted on the pipe on
opposite sides of the X axis in the region of the magnetic
field; and
B. a converter whose input terminals are connected to the
66
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
electrode assemblies to produce a signal which is propor-
tional to flow rate and is substantially immune to the
influence of a non-axisymmetric flow profile, said elec-
trode assemblies being out of contact with the fluid and
to the rate of flow of said medium through said flowmeter,
is transmitted through said terminal means.
4,434,668
DETECTOR FOR USE IN MEASUREMENT OF FLOW
SPEED OR FLOW RATE OF A FLUID
Kazuichi Shinoda, and ManyoaU Katayama, both of Yoko-
hama, Japan, aaaignon to Tokico Ltd^ Kawaaaki, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 284,113, Jul. 16, 1981. Thia application
Apr. 29, 1983, Ser. No. 487,719
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 18, 1980, 55-
Int a.J GOIF 1/32
U.S. a. 73-861.22 . ig ciaimi
being capacitively coupled thereto to detect a potential
present on the fluid surface, the effective coupling capaci-
tance of the assemblies decreasing in a manner substan-
tially proportional to the cosine of an angle defined with
respect to the Y axis.
\ 4,434,667
TCRMANENT MAGNET FLOWMETER HAVING
\ IMPROVED OUTPUT TERMINAL MEANS
Charts August, Darien, and Harry J. Myers, Downers Grove,
both of ni., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the United States Department of Energy,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,917
Int. Q\? GOIF 1/5S
U.S. a. 73-861.12 6 Claims
1. A detector comprising a generator for shedding vortex
streets in a fluid, the generator having a hollow portion, a
member inserted in the hollow portion in close contact -with
the generator and having a recess at a circumferential surface
thereof, a through-hole for the introduction of fluid provided
in the generator and opened to the hollow portion at the posi-
tion of the recess, a through-hole for the exit of fluid provided
in the generator and opened to the hollow portion at the posi-
tion of the recess on the downstream of the through-hole for
the introduction of fluid, an element for detecting the vortex,
the element being provided on the member and disposed in the
recess between the through-hole Ibr the introduction of fluid
and the through-hole for the exit of fluid, and a filter disposed
between the through-hole for the introduction of fluid and the
recess.
1. A magnetic flowmeter for measuring flow of a high tem-
perature, high pressure potentially hazardous electrically con-
ductive medium therethrough, comprising:
an elongated body of nonmagnetic material having a longitu-
dinal passageway extending therethrough, said body de-
fining a wall surrounding said passageway for containing
a longitudinal flow of conductive medium therein, said
wall having a first thickness extending in a first direction
perpendicular to the direction of flow of the medium, said
wall further having a second substantially greater thick-
ness extending in a second direction perpendicular to both
_ the direction of flow of the medium and said first direc-
tion;
magnetic means for passing a magnetic field through said
passageway in said first direction; and
elongated terminal means extending in said second direction
and integrally formed with said wall of said body, said
terminal means formed by trepanning said wall in said
second direction to form an inwardly extending cylindri-
cal channel having a bottom, the bottom of said channel
spaced from said passageway by a distance approximately
equal to said first thickness whereby an electromotive
force, generated in said flowing medium and proportional
4,434,669
APPARATUS FOR TRANSMimNG AND RECEIVING
SOUND
Victor C. Roberts, London, England, and Antonio J. Sainz,
Caracas, Venezuela, assignors to National Research Develop-
meat Corporatioo, London, England
Filed Oct 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,810
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Oct. 8, 1980,
8032438
Int. CL^ GOIF 1/66
U.S. a. 73-861.25 12 Claims
1. Apparatus for transmitting and receiving ultrasound,
comprising:
electrical signal generating means for providing output sig-
nals at predetermined selectable frequencies;
probe means coupled to the generating means for transmit-
ting ultrasound at any said selecuble frequency, and for
receiving ultrasound signals at a frequency relatively close
to the transmitted frequency; and '
frequency controlling means for automatically selecting at
least one of said output signals including:
means for comparing the powers of doppler-shifted ultra-
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
67
sound signals received by said prot>e means at said
predetermined frequencies, and
4t e a M J
[lS^.:-.-.j
m
■« -1
MtS^
I . ■*» r.
!U:
** — autit -i
1
\ nn cmr/UL
4,434,671
TENSION SENSOR
Ichiro Yamaahita, Yawata, and Ynkihiko Isc, Toyonaka, both of
f Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
FUed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,982
Claims priority, appUcation Japui, Aug. 18, 1980, 55-113899
Int. a? GOIL 5/10
U.S. a. 73—862.48 4 Oaias
means for selecting the one of said output signals which
results in most doppler-shifted ultrasound signal power
being received.
> u.
4,434,670
FLUID FLOW METER
Borje O. Rosaen, 4031 Tbomoaks Dr., Ann Arbor, Mich. 48104
FUed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299^4
Int a.J GOIF 1/22
UJS. a. 73— 861.54 14 Claims
1. A fluid flow meter comprising:
a housing having a fluid inlet and a fluid outlet.
an elongated inlet chamber formed in said housing, said inlet
chamber open at one end to said fluid inlet,
an outlet chamber formed in said housing, said outlet cham-
ber open to said fluid outlet,
at least two cross passageways formed in said housing for
fluidly connecting said inlet chamber to said outlet cham-
ber, said cross passageways intersecting said inlet chamber
at longitudinally spaced positions.
means cbntained within the inlet chamber for establishing
direct fluid communication between only one cross pas-
sageways and said inlet chamber when the fluid flow rate
into said housing inlet is within a first flow rate range and
for establishing direct fluid communication between both
of said cross passageways and said inlet chamber when the
fluid flow rate into said housing inlet is within a second
flow rate range.
means for indicating the flow rate range exteriorly of said
housing,
means for varying said flow rate ranges, and
wherein said varying means comprises means for variably
restricting said cross passageways.
1. A tension sensor for measuring the tension of a upe-like or
string-like object and having a magnetic core composed of a
resilient and magnetostrictive amorphous alloy sheet forming a
magnetic circuit and having an exciting coil wound around
said magnetic core, wherein:
said magnetic core is tubular shaped and supported by sup-
porting means at both end portions thereof such that at
least a part of said magnetic core is fixed to said support
means; and
said exciting coil is arranged such that magnetic flux gener-
ated therefrom is passed circumferentially through said
magnetic core and a part of a peripheral surface of said
magnetic core is exposed so that said tape-like or string-
like object is in contact therewith.
4,434,672
SAMPLING DEVICE
Virien R. WUUarason, 3 Colchester Rd., White Colae, Essex,
and Peter C. Deeks, 24 Nunns Meadow, GosfleM, Essex, both
of England
FUed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,276
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Nov. 14, 1980,
8036703 \
Int. a.J GOIN 35/08
U.S. a. 73— 864J2 12 Claims
1. A sampling device comprising a source of suction, a probe
having ^ passage connected to the suction source whereby a
first solution compriyng liquid sample can be aspirated into
said passage by suction from said source, said probe being
ry
i
68
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
movable so that its tip can be located at a first position in which provement comprising a cam follower shaft mounted in th^
said passage can receive said sample and a second position, the base of said cylfnder i.d^nding r^ X outra^y from
,^Th 11 ;'""i' **^"h '°'"''°" '° "^^ ^'°^ ^^'"^ '' '' ^^ '^y""^*^^' « '^"^ f°"ower roller mount«l on Saft^d
m said second position, said means comprising a vertically uiuumcu on saia snaii, ana
arranged tube which is substantially coaxial with said probe
when said probe is in said second position, the upper end of
said tube being beneath but sufficiently close to the tip of said _r
probe in said second position that the tip of said probe extends J-^^
into a meniscus that forms at the top of said tube when said ^^i'.
second solution overflows said tube, solution supply means ^'^-'
connected with the lower end of said tube for supplying solu- '^ij'
tion to the top of the tube, and solution drain means arranged
beneath the top of the tube for collection and removal of excess ^
solution overflowing the top of the tube.
-<«^
4,434,673
CROSS ARM STRUCrVRE FOR USE IN A PUSHBUTTON
TUNER
Takao Chaki, Saitama, Japan, assignor to Clarion Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jan. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,618
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 11, 1980, 55-
80262[U]; Jun. 11, 1980, 55-70265[U]; Jun. 11, 1980, 55-
80266[U]; Jun. 11, 1980, 55-80267[U]; Jua. 11, 1980, 55-
80268[U]
Int. aj H03J 5/12; G05G J/02
UAa74-10J3 J Saaims
.e*
conduit means in said base and said shaft providing communi-
cation between the interior of the cylinder and the inner sur-
face of the cam follower roller contacting said cam follower
shaft.
^C?*^- -1 31
4,434,675
TRANSMISSION RATIO CONTROL ARRANGEMENT
FOR A PRECESS CAM CONTROLLED INnNTTELY
VARIABLE TRACnON ROLLER TRANSMISSION
Charles E. Kraus, Austin, Tex., assignor to Excelermatic Inc..
Austin, Tex.
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,442
Int. a.3 F16H 15/08
U.S. a 74-200 7 a^^
1. A cross arm structure for use in a pushbutton tuner, com-
prising:
a cross arm member;
a frequency setting member pivotally supported on said
cross arm member;
a pushbutton slidably supported on said cross arm member
for movement between locked and unlocked positions;
a movably supported pressing member responsive to move-
ment of said pushbutton and adapted to apply pressure to
said frequency setting member in response to movement
of said pushbutton to said locked position so as to releas-
ably lock said frequency setting member in a predeter-
mined angular position; an^ *~
early lock preventing means \yhich includes an early lock
preventing member cooperable with said pressing mem-
ber for preventing said pressing member from releasably
locking said frequency setting member before said push-
button is substantially in said locked position;
wherein said pressing member has a pedal portion at each
side of an end thereof which can engage said frequency
setting member and has a concave portion between said
pedal portions which receives an end portion of said early
lock preventing member.
4,434,674
PISTON AND CYLINDER MECHANISM
Frands A. Dahms, TariffriUe, Conn., assignor to Emhart Indus-
tries, Inc., Fannington, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 179^1. Aug. 18, 1980, Pat No. 4^9,264.
This appUcation May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 375,846
Int CL^ FOIB 3/00: F16H 25/18
VS. a 74-99 A 2 Claims
1. In a piston and cylinder mechanism wherein said cylinder
moves relative to said piston and said cyUnder has a cam fol-
lower extending outwardly therefrom for engaging a cam
track, said cylinder having some lubricant therein, the im-
1. A transmission ratio control arrangement for an infinitely
variable traction roller transmission comprising: a housing;
coaxial input and output shafts rotatably supported in said
housing; toroidal discs mounted opposite each other on said
input and output shafts such that a toric cavity is formed there-
between; motion transmitting traction rollers disposed in said
toric cavity in radial symmetry with respect to the axis of said
input and output shafts; means for forcing said toric discs and
said traction roller into firm engagement with each other for
transmitting motion therebetween; a pivotal support structure
for each of said traction rollers, each said support structure
being movable in a direction of its pivot axis; at least one
hydraulic operating structure disposed adjacent each traction
roller support structure and operatively associated therewith
for transmitting precess motion thereto; at least one of said
traction roller support structures having a cam disc mounted
thereon for axial and pivotal movement therewith; a master
control valve arranged adjacent the cam surface of said cam
disc, said control valve having a control member and a cam
follower in contact with said cam surface, said cam follower
having a predetermined position with respect to said cam
surface for each transmission ratio of said transmission, said
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
69
master control valve being connected to a pressurized fluid
source and to each of said hydraulic operating structures for
supplying pressurized fluid to said hydraulic operating struc-
tures or, respectively releasing hydraulic fluid therefrom when
said cam follower is not in its respective predetermined posi-
tion.
4,434,676
TRACnON ROLLER TRANSMISSION WFTH
MECHANICAL TRANSMISSION RATIO CONTROL
Paul L. Horton, Austin, Tex., assignor to Excelermatic Inc.,
Austin, Tex.
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,597
Int. a.3 F16H 15/40. 15/08
U.S. a. 74—200 5 Claims
j^^^
t»^^.i^'
1. An infinitely variable traction roller transmission compris-
ing: coaxial input and output shafts; toric traction discs
mounted opposite each other, one on each of said shafts; two
motion transmitting traction rollers arranged between, and in
firm engagement with, said toric discs for the transmission of
motion therebetween; a pivotal support trunnion for each of
said traction rollers each rotatably supporting one of the rollers
and being supported pivotally about an axis which extends
normal to a plane including the axis of said input and output
shafts; and a trunnion operating lever arrangement adapted to
apply axial precess motion to said trunnions, said lever ar-
rangement including two arms of equal length, one being
pivotally connected to one and the other to the other trunnion
and both being linked to each other at a central pivot axis and
a control lever linked to said arms at locations having equal
distances from said central pivot axis and being itself pivotally
supported at the center between its points of linkage to said
arms.
4,434,677
ANTI-BACKLASH SPRING-MOUNTED NUT
Francis M. Unley, Jr., Easton, Conn., assignor to Universal
Thread Grinding Company, Fairfield, Conn. g
FUed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,500 /
Int a.J Fr6H 55/18. 1/18. 27/02
VS. a. 74—409
14 Claims
portion and characterized by a bore aligned with the bore
of the base portion,
(c) said threaded portion having a pair of .longitudinal slots
in it by which it is divided into elements having internal
surfaces at the bore thereof,
(d) said elements having thread formations on said internal
surfaces, adapted for engagement with the external
threads of a screw extending through said bores,
(e) said threaded portion having a cut-out configuration
comprising a pair of circumferential slots characterized by
two pairs of slot ends which are respectively located
adjacent the ends of the said longitudinal slots, said cut-
out configuration facilitating the limited movement of the
said divided elements toward and away from each other,
thereby to enable the thread formations thereof to engage
a screw with no clearance and looseness,
(0 said pairs of slot ends and the respective ends of the said
pair of longitudinal slots of the threaded portion being
triangularly disposed, and the slot ends of said pair of
circumferential slots being separated from each other by
an uninterrupted solid wall of the threaded portion, which
uninterrupted solid wall extends directly and in a straight
line between the slot ends of the pair of circumferential
slots so as to provide increased body strength at such
location, and '
(g) yieldable means carried by said divided elements, biasing
the same in directions toward each other so as to maintain
them closely engaged with the said screw.
4,434,678
CONTROL MECHANISM FOR A WINDOW OR DOOR
JuUus Maus, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Gretsch-Unitas GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 285,933
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 23,
1980, 3027810
Int a.} G05G 9/00
U.S. a. 74-^71 R. ISQaims
51 iC
1. A simplified anti-backlash nut construction having rela-
tively few slots, comprising in combination:
(a) a base portion adapted to be carried by a supporting part
and having a bore through which a screw can pass,
(b) a one-piece threaded portion connected to said base
1. A control device for selectively displacing two drive rod
drivers comprising:
a housing having means defining a guide path therein;
a handle member rotatably mounted to said housing;
two drivers movable in said housing along said guide path;
means engaging said handle member with one of said drivers
for movement of said one driver with rotation of said
handle member;
a clutch in said housing for engaging the other of said drivers
with said handle member for movement of said other
driver with rotation of said handle member; and
said clutch including a coupling element connected to one of
said drivers movable into a first position engaged with the
other of said drivers and into a second position out of
engagement with the other of said drivers.
70
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
M34,679
SPEEIMWANGE OPERATING DEVICE FOR A BICYCLE
Keiio ShimaBo, Sakai, Japan, airigiior to SUniaiio Indastrial
CoBpany Limited, Osaka, Japan
FU«i Jnn. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275^7
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 27, 1980, 55-9l242[U]
Int a.3 G05G 5/16. 13/00
VS. a 74-491 9 aaims
1. A speed-change operating device mounted directly on a
frame of a bicycle comprising a bed fixed directly to said frame
by a fixing means, a lever unit, and a screw member for mount-
ing said lever unit on said frame in cooperation with said bed,
said bed having only a screw thread screwable with said screw
member, said lever unit comprising a lever shaft, a control
lever having a boss, and a holding means for holding said
control lever in position at said lever shaft, said holding means
assembUng said control lever on said lever shaft and including
a restraining means contacting with the lateral surface of said
boss at said control lever and restraining said control lever
from axially moving and a biasing means for biasing said con-
trol lever to said restraining means with a given frictional
force, said screw member being screwable with said bed to
mount said lever unit on said frame.
4,434,680
PLANETARY STEERING DIFFERENTIAL
Craig W. Riediger, Pekia, and James E. Winzeler, East Peoria,
both of DL, assignors to Caterpillar Tractor Co., Peoria, lU.
per No. PCr/US80/01126, § 371 Date Sep. 2, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 2, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00867, PCT Pub.
^ Date Mar. 18, 1982
PCT Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 262,054
Int a.3 F16H 37/06. 1/42
UA CL 74-682 41 ci,i„g
«NXi
L- EngineU pump
1. A planetary steering differential (10) adapted to be driven
in use by a transmission (58) and a steering motor (66), com-
prising:
a first input member (57) adapted to be driven by the trans-
mission (58):
a second input member (63) adapted to be driven by the
steering motor (66);
first and second output members (48,52);
planetary means (12.14,1^ for routing said first and second
output members (48,52) in the same direction and at the
same speed in response to rotation solely of said first input
member (57) and holding said second input member (63)
stationary with the speed of the first and second output
members (48,52) being reduced from the speed of the first
input member (57), and for rotating said first and second
output members (48,52) in opposite directions at the same
speed in response to rotation solely of said second input
member (63) through a single steering input power path
and holding said first input member (57) stationary, said
planetary means (12,14,16) including first, second and
third interconnected planetary mechanisms (12,14,16)
individually having single ring gear, sun gear and planet
carrier elements (20,22,24,30,32. 34,40,42,44), one of said
elements (30,32,34,40,42,44) of said second and third plan-
etary mechanisms (14,16) being connected to said first
input member (57) and another one being connected to
said second input member (63), said planetary mechanisms
(12,14,16) being arranged on and interconnected solely
along a common central axis (18).
4,434,681
HYDROMECHANICAL DRIVE
Ehrlinger Friedrich, Ft^idrichshafen, and Michael Meyerle,
Meckenbeuren, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Zahnradfebrik Friedrichshafen AG, FViedrichshafen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 103,437, Dec. 14, 1979, abandoned.
This appUcation Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,690
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany. Dec. 16.
1978,2854375 J^. •.
Int CL^ F16H 47/04
UAa.74-687 sciatog
1. A hydromechanical transmission comprising:
a power shaft driven by a prime mover;
a hydrostatic unit with a driving element and a driven ele-
ment fluidically coupled to each other for joint rotation at
a speed ratio variable between predetermined negative
and positive limits, said driving element being positively
coupled to said power shaft for rotation thereby;
a planetary-gear train with a first and a second input gear
and one output gear centered on a common axis, a planet
carrier rotatable about said axis, a first pinion on said
planet carrier in mesh with said first input gear and a
second pinion on said planet carrier in mesh with said first
pinion, with said second input gear and with said output
gear, said first input gear being positively coupled with
said power shaft, said second input gear being positively
coupled with said driven element;
an output shaft coupled to a load;
a first clutch operable to couple said output shaft with said
planet carrier in a range of low speeds of said output shaft
relative to said power shiift;
a second clutch operable to couple said output shaft with
said output gear in a range of high speeds of said output
shaft relative to said power shaft; and
control means coupled with said hydrostatic unit and with
said clutehes for varying said speed ratio between said
negative and positive limits in each of said ranges and for
alternately operating said clutches, wiUi a switohover
from one clutoh to the other at a point where said speed
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
^71
ratio is at said positive limit with said planet carrier, said
input gears and said output gear all co-rotating at the same
speed.
power-operated means for moving said pad radially in-
wardly against the periphery of said saw and in a path
4,434,682
PLANETARY GEAR
Kort G. FIckelscher, Frankenthal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Balcke-Doerr AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,124
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 11,
1980, 3034133
lat a.J F16H 1/2%, 55/14
VS. CI. 74—805 14 Claims
1. In a planetary gear having two adjacent identical central
wheels with teeth of different pitch and a planet wheel whose
piteh is equal to that of a virtual tooth row formed by the
central wheel teeth and whose teeth extend into tooth gaps in
the virtual tooth row, the planet wheel being arranged fro
guided slaving by a rotary disk, at least two of said three
mentioned wheels having pivotable teeth, the teeth of both the
central wheels and the planet wheel being of substantially
triangular cross section with plane tooth profiles, the improve-
ment wherein the pivotable teeth of at least one of said central
wheels are arranged on journals.
4,434,683
SAW-ADVANCING MEANS WITH EDGE ENGAGING
PAD
Peter D. Kaye, Monroe, Oreg., assignor to Bell Industries, Inc.,
Los Angeles, Calif.
FUed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,621
Int a.i B23D 63/14
VS. a. 76—37 10 Claims
1. In apparatus for grinding the teeth in a circular saw:
saw-mounted means for mounting the saw with said saw
being rotatable about its axis,
a compressible pad disposed radially outwardly of the pe-
riphery of a saw mounted on said saw-mounting means,
and
extending about the axis of the saw whereby the saw is
rotated about its axis by said pad.
I
> 4,434,684
SELF-CENTERING SAW MOUNT
Keith L. Nixon, Pleasant Hill, Oreg., assignor to Bell Industries,
Inc., Los Angeles, Calif.
FUed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,583
Int a.} B23D 63/14
VS. CI. 76—37 8 Claims
1. In a grinding machine, including a power-driven grinding
wheel,
means for rotatably mounting a circular saw with the edge
of the saw moveable with rotation of the saw to place
successive teeth in a position to be ground by the grinding
wheel comprising: .
a mounting plate,
first, second and third guide mounts mounted on said mount-
ing plate for movement in paths which diverge from each
other extending outwardly from substantially a common
center, each guide mount mounting a guide adapted to
engage the edge in a uw which defmes the eye of the uw,
means for securing a pair of said guide mounts in selected
adjusted positions in their said paths, and
biasing means yieldably urging the third guide mount out-
wardly in its path.
\
72
Official gazette
March 6, 1984
against rotation in said bore when a desired adjustment has
been completed.
4,434,685
APPARATUS FOR CUTTING SAW TEETH INTO SAW
BLADES OR SAW BANDS
Erwin Junker, Talstrasae 78, D 7611 Nordrach-Baden, Fed. Rep.
of Germany 4,434,687
FUed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,120 DAMAGED SCREW REMOVER
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 13, Anthony N. Vickio, Montour Falls, N.Y., assignor to Vi-Tek
1980, 3022292 Designs, Inc., Montour Falls, N.Y.
Int. a.J B23D 63/J2 FUed Noy. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 438474
U.S. CL 76—38 1 Claim Int. Q.^ B25B 15/00
VJS. a. 81-441 10 Claims
y
-^
1. An apparatus for forming a saw blade or a saw band by
forming saw teeth in affclid stock moving continuously in a
longitudinal direction, said apparatus comprising:
grinding wheel means for grinding away portions of the
stock to form saw teeth therein;
said grinding wheel means being mounted for rotation about
an axis which is inclined at an acute angle to and which
diverges from the direction of movement of the stock;
said grinding wheel means having a generally frustoconical
configuration and an outer periphery defined by first and
second axially distinct helical grinding ribs having differ-
ent contours; and
said grinding wheel means comprising first and second sepa-
rate grinding wheels mounted on a common shaft in axi-
ally spaced relationship, and said first and second grinding
ribs being formed on said first and second grinding
wheels, respectively.
1. A damaged screw remover comprising a shank having a
longitudinal axis of rotation, a handle mounted to said shank,
and a blade integral with the shank opposite the handle, the
blade having two generally opposed faces joined together by
sides and a working end, the working end including an axially-
disposed projecting tip for driving into a damaged screw slot
and setting the same therein by cutting into the damaged screw
slot and radially-disposed end surfaces flanking the tip, each
end surface deployed at an acute angle with respect to one of
the opposed faces, wherein the end surfacerjoin the faces at
sharp edges which are the leading edges when the damaged
screw remover is rotated couterclockwise.
4,434,688
SCREWDRIVER
Corwin Bowles, 795 E. 980 South, Salt Lake County, Utah 84107
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,371
Int. a.3 B25B 15/00
U.S. a. 81—451 5 Claims
4,434,686
ADJUSTING APPARATUS
Dennis M. Ryan, San Mateo, Calif., assignor to AMPEX Corpo-
ration, Redwood City, Calif.
FUed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 364,726
Int a.J B25B 25/00
VS. a. 81—3 R 10 Claims
1. Apparatus for the relative positional adjustment of a pair
of elements having freedom of relative motion m a first direc-
tion, characterized in that:
a first of said elements is relieved to define a reference bore
adjacent an edge of the other and second element, said
bore having an axis lying in a plane normal to said first
direction;
an adjusting element is provided fitting for snug rotation in
said bore;
said adjusting element having a portion engaging said sec-
ond element in substantially non-slip engagement for
causing said relative motion of said first and second ele-
ments upon rotation of said adjusting element in said bore;
and
means are provided for securing said adjusting element
1. An improved screwdriver comprising a shank, one end of
said shank having a screw head receiving means including a
screw head receiving cavity adapted to receive at least a por-
tion of the head of a screw to be driven to thereby prevent
lateral motion of the shank with respect to the screw head, the
other end of the shank being adapted to have drive means
secured thereto; a blade means receiving slot in said screw
head receiving means extending beyond the screw head receiv-
ing cavity; blade means adapted to removably slip into the
blade means receiving slot and be held therein against rota-
tional movement relative to the shank and in position so that a
portion of the blade extends across the screw head receiving
cavity to thereby mate with the slot of a screw head inserted
into the cavity; a hole extending through the screw head re-
ceiving means and the blade means perpendicular to the blade
means receiving slot, the ends of such hole being visable on
opposite sides of the screw head receiving means and visable to
a user of the screwdriver so as to show the orientation of the
blade means within the screw head receiving cavity; and pin
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
73
means removably secured in said hole to hold said blade means
in position. .
4,434,689
CUTTER HEAD DRIVE SHAFT FOR PORTABLE TUBE
END PREPARATION TOOL
Lawson H. NaU, Folsom, and Richard MUler, Citrus Heights,
both of CaUf., auignors to Tri Tool Inc., Rancho CordoTa,
CaUf.
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,541
Int. a.J B23B 27/00. 5/16
U.S. a. 82—4 C 3 Clafans
H, n^-, u^-^i ) **; "> "'i *; ') ' "]'*>*'^ "i "^"^ ^' " ")
1. In a portable tube end preparation tool including a hous-
ing extending along a longitudinal axis; a cutter head mounted
at one end of the housing for rotation about said longitudinal
axis; a cutter head drive shaft means connected to said cutter
head for transmitting rotational drive force thereto and includ-
ing a drive shaft means within the housing, the improvement
comprising: said drive shaft means comprising a three-piece
assembly including a first cylindrical shaft portion connected
directly to the cutter head and extending along said longitudi-
nal axis; a second cylindrical shaft portion axially aligned and
concentrically disposed with respect to said first shaft portion,
said first and second shaft portions including external threads
adjacent their adjoining ends; an internally threaded coupling
sleeve bridging the adjoining ends of said first and second shaft
portions and threadedly connected thereto for joining the
assembly together; and axially spaced rolling bearing means
within the housing disposed along said longitudinal axis at
opposite ends of said coupling sleeve, said bearings respec-
tively engaging said first and second shaft portions; said cou-
pling sleeve, in cooperation with said bearings, restraining
longitudinal and radial motion of said first and second drive
shaft portions \vith respect to said housing.
4,434,690
ROTARY PRESS PUNCH RING AND METHOD OF
CHANGING PUNCHES CARRIED THEREBY
Richard L. Mauer, Fort Lee, N J., assignor to Rapid Ring Co.,
Inc., East Hanover, N.J.
FUed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,749
lot. a.3 B26F 1/00
VS. a. 83—13 17 Claims
13. A method of changing punches carried by a rotary press
punch ring which includes a collar mounted on a shah of a
rotary press for rotation therewith, a plurality of punch ring
segments, each punch ring segment having an outer circumfer-
ential surface which forms at least a part of an outer circumfer-
ential surface of said rotary press punch ring, attaching means
provided in said outer circumferential surface of each of said
punch ring segments for removably and interchangeably at-
taching each of said punch ring segments to said collar inde-
pendently of the other punch ring segment or segments, said
attaching means including at least one fastener for each punch
ring segment, each fastener extending through its correspond-
ing punch ring segment into engagement with said collar, and
receiving means provided in said outer circumferential surface
of each of said punch ring segments for releaseably receiving
several punches per punch ring segment, said method compris-
ing the steps of disengaging said fastener or fasteners of one of
said punch ring segments from said collar by moving said
fastener or fasteners away from said outer circumferential
surface of said one punch ring segment in a generally radial
direction relative to said shaft of said press, removing said one
punch ring segment from said collar by moving said one punch
ring segment away from said collar in a generally radial direc-
tion relative to said shaft of said press without removing or
otherwise disturbing the other punch ring segment or seg-
ments, whereby the several punches on said one punch ring
segment may be collectively removed from said press as a
group, and then replacing said one punch ring segment with an
identical punch ring segment equipped with several new
punches.
4,434,691
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEALING CUT SHEET
MATERIAL
Claude W. LeBlond, Enfield, Conn., assignor to Gcrber Garment
Technology, Inc., South Windsor, Conn.
FUed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,429
Int. a.J B26D 3/Oa 7/02
U.S. a. 83—56 16 Claims
1. An automatically controlled cutting machine for cutting
layups of limp sheet material comprising:
a cutting table defining a suppori surface on which a multi-
ply layup of limp sheet material is spread for cutting;
a tool carriage movable back and forth over the cutting table
and having a cutting tool movable with the carriage to
perform cutting operations on the material;
vacuum generating means connectable with the layup of
sheet material on the support surface for generating a
vacuum within the layup and compressing the sheet mate-
rial on the support surface;
a first roller rotatably mounted to the tool carriage for
movement with the carriage and cutting tool relative to
the cutting table and a layup of sheet material on the
support surface;
a second roller rotatably mounted to the cutting table in
parallel and generally aligned relationship with the first
roller;
an elongated strip of air-impermeable overlay material hav-
ing opposite ends wound on the first and second rollers
respectively with a portion of the strip extending between
the rollers for sealing cut sheet material in a layup on the
support surface of the cutting table;
first retracting means connected with the first roUer for
74
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
winding the strip of air-impenneable overlay material
onto the first roller; and
second retracting means connected with the second roller
for winding the strip of air-impermeable overlay material
onto the second roller.
1. A grid-type bread-slicing machine comprising a chain-
driven loaf carriage and a knife grid each driven by an electric
drive motor, wherein the rate of feed of said loaf carriage is
controlled automatically by a control system for the drive
motor thereof according to the cutting effort required by the
knife grid at any particular cutting point in the bread, there
being no movement between the carriage and the bread during
cutting thereof, characterised in that the electrical supply
circuit for the drive motor for the loaf carriage chain drive
system includes a solid state current-limiting element for its
power requirement which limits the current to the drive motor
and progressively reduces the rotary speed thereof as the
power requirement increases as a result of increasing resistance
to the loaf carriage during the slicing operation, and an inter-
rupter, said interrupter being responsive when said current
limiting element is operative to reduce the speed of said drive
motor.
{
4,434,(93
PLATE POSITIONING APPARATUS
Ki4ji HoMi, Machida; Hiroyaki Takeda, Yokohama; Hiiao
Kobayaahi, Yamanaahi, and Da^iro Kooaka, Zama, all of
Japan, aaaigDors to Nihon Early Kabnahiki Kaiaha, Tokyo,
perpendicular to the X axis, having its leading edge per-
pendicular to the axis of motion, and having a cutout
section in its leading edge adequate to allow the passage of
the punch,
(d) a number two motor for moving said number two work-
4,434,692
GRID-TYPE BREAD^LICING MACHINE
Jean-Marie G. Desert, Rue des Chataigniera 32, B 4480 Oupeye,
and Franciakns J. Walrave, Roe Lieutenant Albert Dressen 6,
B 4860 Pepinster, both of Belginm
FUed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,697
Claiou priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 6,
1980, 3021284
Int GL^ B26D J/11
U.S.a.83— 62 7 Claims
FUed Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 359,081
Oaiam priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 14, 1979, 54-111253
Int CL^ B21D 28/04. 26/28. 43/00
VS. CL 83—71 4 Claims
1. A plate positioning apparatus for use with a punch ma-
chine having a punch, comprising:
a number one workpiece stopper movable back and forth
along an X axis and having its leading edge perpendicular
to the axis of motion and further having a cutout space on
the inner comer of its leading edge,
(b) a number one motor for moving said number one work-
piece stopper back and forth along the X axis and control-
ling said number one workpiece stopper so that its leading
edge at its forwardmost position is in front of the punch of
the punch machine,
(c) a number two workpiece stopper movable along a Y axis
piece stopper to and fro along the Y axis and controlling
said number two workpiece stopper so that the cutout
section in its leading edge at its forwardmost position is
directly under the punch, and
(e) a control apparatus for independently operating said
number one and number two motors.
4,434,694
FOOD MATERIAL SUCING MACHINE
Hans-Hermann Scharsig, OfTeabarg, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
aasignor to Hobart Corporation, Troy, Ohio
FUed Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,871
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 4,
1981, 3113638
Int a.} B26D 7/06
VS. a. 83-411 R 7 Claims
1. A food material slicing machine having a housing with an
open bottom, a vertical cutter moimted in the housing for
rotation on a horizontal axis, a stationary cutter cover lying in
a vertical plane parallel to and closely adjacent said cutter and
having an opening therein exposing a portion of said cutter to
enable passage through the opening of food such as fruits and
vegetables to be cut, characterized in that:
a hopper extending horizontally outwardly from the cutter
cover is pivotally mounted on the cover on an axis below
and parallel to the axis of rotation of the cutter, the hopper
having a bottom and side waUs but being open throughout
its length on the top side thereof for receiving food mate-
rial to be cut and further having an open discharge end
adjacent said cutter cover, the pivotal axis for the hopper
enabling the hopper to be moved laterally between a first
position in which the discharge end of the hopper is re-
mote from the opening in the cover and a second position
wherein the discharge end of the hopper aligns with the
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
75
opening so that food material in the hopper can be pushed
through the opening toward the cutter, a cutter cover
plate mounted for movement with the hopper to cover the
opening when the hopper is in the first position, a pusher
plate mounted in the hopper for horizontal movement
between a first position at the end of the hopper remote
from the cutter and a second position at the discharge end
of the hopper to urge food material through the opening,
and a hopper cover plate extending the full length of the
hopper and mounted on the cutter cover in a position to
expose the top open side of the hopper when the hopper is
in the first position and to cover the open side of the
hopper when it is in its second position.
4,434,696
INSTRUMENT FOR COMPARING EQUAL
TEMPERAMENT AND JUST INTONATION
Harry Conriscr, 1335 Woodraff Ave., Los Angeles, CaUf. 90024
FUed Not. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,682
Int G.3 GIOH 5/07
VS. a. 84—1.01 12 Claims
OCTAVI
OCTAVI
-\iV—~ OIVIOfM
^^ Leh msMBSSI
4,434,695
HOLDER FOR A ROLLER SLITTING KNIFE
Peter Wingen, Hauptstrabe, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Dienes Werke ftir MaschinenteUe GmbH A Co. KG, Haupt-
strabe, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,804
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 19,
1980, 3047980
Int a.) B26D 7/26
VS. a. 83—482 12 Claims
8. In an electronic musical instrument having a single master
oscillator for generating frequencies of predetermined scales
through a series of stages, each stage multiplying the input
thereto by a selected numerical ratio M/N, the combination
further having an Exclusive-GR gate with one input connected
to receive a signal whose frequency is multiplied by said M/N
ratio, and the other input connected to receive said signal
through a frequency counter having a dividing factor of n,
where n is an integer, thereby generating an efTective ratio of
n— 1/n at the Exclusive-GR gate output for a frequency ap-
plied to a subsequent stage from the output of said Exclusive-
GR gate, said master oscillator and each subsequent stage
having octave divider means to provide an extended range of
said predetermined scales. *
4,434,697
INDICATOR APPARATUS FOR INDICAHNG NOTES
EMrmiD BY MEANS OF A MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
Haari Robes, 11 rue Mably, 21000-DUon, France
per No. PCT/FR80/00189, § 371 Date Aug. 24, 1981, § 102(c)
Date Aug. 24, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/0189e, PCT Pub.
Date Jul. 9, 1981
per FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 296,413
Int CLJ G04F 5/02: G09B 15/02; GlOG 7/02
U.S. a. 84-454 11 Claims
- 5r_x^_
'0. O^IS ^ 13 KM
1. A holder for a roller slitting knife comprising:
a first selectively-operable piston assembly including a first
piston rod and a first cylinder housing, said first piston rod
having a reduced diameter end portion to which a non-cir-
cular, cross-sectional portion is selectively secured, said
non-circular portion being received in a mating bore of
said housing to prevent rotation of said first piston rod in
said housing;
a second selectively-6perable piston assembly including a
second piston rod and a second piston cylinder housing
mounted to said first assembly and disposed for operation
in a direction transverse to operation of said first piston
assembly; and,
a roUer slitting knife mounted to said second piston assembly
whereby said knife is selectively positioned for operation
upon selective operation of said first and second piston
assemblies wherein said non-circular cross-sectional por-
tion is selectively disassociable from a remainder of said
first piston rod whereby said first piston rod caabe rotated
by approximately 180* to enable said knife to be converted
from a right-handed attack to a left-handed attack.
L^Ji^!33lI
I
I
— I ss
1. Apparatus for indicating the presence of musical notes and
for identifying the musical notes detected comprising:
means for amplifying input signals corresponding to musical
notes to be identified;
filter means connected to said means for amplifying for
eliminating harmonics from said input signals;
energy detecting means connected to said means for ampli-
fying for detecting input signals exceeding a predeter-
mined threshhold;
memory means including at least one memory for storing
items of information representing a Ubie of musical notes;
means for calculating the frequency and octive of said input
i.
76
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
signal, said means for calculating including microproces-
sor means and being connected to said filter means, said
energy detecting means and said memory means, said
means for calculating being responsive to input signals
received from said filter means exceeding said predeter-
mined threshhold determined by said energy detecting
means to calculate the frequency thereof, said frequency
calculated being employed to read from said memory for
storing items of information representing a table of musi-
cal notes items of information representing the closest
corresponding musical note for said frequency calculated;
and
means for displaying, in alphanumeric form, said musical
note read closest to each successive musical note in said
input signals to be indentified and the octive in which said
musical note resides.
4,434,698
TRANSPOSABLE SHEET MUSIC
Charles N. Oberlander, EI Paso, Tex., assignor to Ronald H.
MishkiOf Lake Hopatcong; James T. Pappas, Chatham and W.
Patrick Quast, Waldwick, all of, N J., part interest to each
FUed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 259,808
Int. a.3 GlOG 1/04
U.S. a. 84-483 A 15 aaims
U
1. A system for devising a sheet of music and for transposing
the music from one key to another comprising:
a first layer comprising transparent material having fS^t
indicia disposed thereon including staff lines, a first set of
predetermined music notations, and opaque areas; a sec-
ond layer comprising opaque material having second
indicia disposed thereon including notes, and a second set
of predetermined music notations; sai^ first layer overlay-
ing said second layer, said first and second layers rela-
tively movable to each other; said opaque areas of said
first indicia including a key signature area having win-
dows substantially configured as sharps and flats and
wherein said second indicia on said layer of opaque mate-
rial includes a key signature area having a plurality of
sharps and flats, substantially configured as such, and
means for aligning said first layer and said second layer,
whereby a desired key for the music can be selected, such
that upon alignment of the sharp or flat windows of the
selected key permit corresponding sharps or flats in the
key signature area on said layer of opaque material to be
visible therethrough; and whereby various ones of said
second indicia on said second layer are obscured by corre-
sponding opaque areas on said first layer.
2. A system for devising a sheet of music and for transposing
the music firom one key to another comprising:
first and second overlays of transparent material, having first
mdicia disposed thereon including staff lines, respective
sets of predetermined music notations, and opaque areas;
a layer of opaque material movably interposed between said
first and second overlays, said layer having second indicia
disposed on at least one side thereof, including notes, and
a second set of predetermined music notations; said
opaque areas of said first indicia including a key signature
area having windows substantially configured as sharps
and flats and wherein said second indicia on said layer of
opaque material includes a key signature area having a
plurality of sharps and flats, substantially configured as
such, and
means for aligning said layer of opaque material with at least
one of said overiays having said first and second printings
thereon,
whereby a desired key for the music can be selected, such
that upon alignment of the sharp or flat windows of the
selected key permit corresponding sharps or flats in the
key signature area on said layer of opaque material to be
visible therethrough; and, various ones of said second
indicia on said layer of opaque material are obscured by
corresponding opaque areas on said transparent overlays.
14. A system for devising a sheet of music and for transpos-
ing the music from one key to another comprising:
a first Uyer comprising transparent material having first
indicia disposed thereon including staff lines, a first set of
predetermined music not^ions, and opaque areas; a sec-
ond layer comprising opaque material having second
indicia disposed thereon including notes, and a second set
of predetermined music notations;
said first layer overiaying said second layer, said first and
second layers relatively movable to each other;
said opaque areas of said first indicia, including a key
signature area having a plurality of vertical lines printed
therein at predetermined locations on said staff lines, a
first set of said vertical lines corresponding to the sharps
and a second set of said vertical lines corresponding to
the flats, said key signature area of said opaque area of
said first indicia further including window areas config-
ured to represent the cross members of the sharps and
the remaining body portion of the flats, and wherein
said second indicia on said layer of opaque material
includes a key signature area having a plurality of cross
members of sharps and body portion of flats in predeter-
mined locations, and means for aligning said first layer
and said second layer, whereby a desired key for the
music can be selected and whereby upon alignment the
windows in the key signature area for the selected key
permit corresponding indicia representing sharps and
flats to be visible therethrough, and
whereby the vertical lines associated with the selected key
signature cooperate with the indicia viewed through the
windows to present to the observer the desired notation
for the selected key and whereby various ones of said
second indicia on said second layer are obscured by corre-
sponding opaque areas on said first layer.
4,434,699
ammunition! feeder
Douglas P. Tassie, St George, Vt.,' assignor to General Electric
Company, Burlington, Vt
Continuation of Ser. No. 91,329, No?. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Oct 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,585
Int CV F41D 10/30. 10/32
U.S. a. 89—12 16 Claims
1. A dual feeder for a gun having a housing and a rotor with
a plurality of gun barrels and a like plurality of gun bolts,
comprising:
a source of positive drive;
a first endless conveyor means, adapted to be driven posi-
tively by said positive drive source, for in-feeding a first
train of rounds of ammunition;
a second endless conveyor means, adapted to be driven
March 6. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
77
positively by said positive drive source, for in-feeding a
second train of rounds of ammunition;
a third means including a sprocket having cutouts for receiv-
ing rounds passing towards the gun bolts and for receiving
rounds passing from the gun bolts, driven positively by
said positive drive source, for receiving and for placing
onto the gun bolts rounds of ammunition in sequence;
4,434,701
APPARATUS FOR CONVEYING CYLINDRICAL
OBJECTS SUCH AS AMMUNITION
Her?e Voillot SartrouTillc, France, assignor to Creusot-Loirc,
Paris, France
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,303
Claims priority, application France, May 23, 1980, 80 11622;
Jul. 4, 1980, 80 14977
Int a.3 F41H 7/06: F41F 9/02
U.S. a. 89—36 K 12 Claims
a fourth means for coupling said first conveyor means to said
positive drive source and to said third means for the posi-
tive feeding of rounds to said third means and for concur-
rently decoupling said second endless conveyor means,
and for coupling said second endless conveyor means to
said positive drive source and to said third means for the
positve feeding of rounds to said third means and for
concurrently decoupling said first endless conveyor
means.
4,434,700
AUTOMATED AMMUNTOON MIXER
Anthony J. Aloi, Richmond; George D. Brooks, South Burlington,
and Ronald E. Prince, Colchester, all of Vt., assignors to
General Electric Company, Burlington, Vt.
FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,791
Int a.J F41F 9/02: F42B 39/10: B65G 47/10
U.S. a. 89—34 8 Claims
1. Apparatus for conveying a succession of cylindrical ob-
jects such as ammunition by means of a series of rotary drive
members each constituted by at least two separate seating
plates fixed on a shaft, said shafts being driven to rotate in
synchronism and disposed parallel and equidisunt from each
other along a cylindrical surface parallel to inner and outer
members spaced by a distance at least equal to the diameter of
said objects, the inner guiding member being positioned along
a surface enveloping the bottoms of the seats of said plates, the
whole forming a guideway for advancing objects by successive
displacements, said guideway being constituted by three suc-
cessive parts respectively forming an upstream guideway (1),
an intermediate guideway (2) and a downstream guideway (3),
said intermediate guideway (2) being constituted by one part of
a magazine (20) the other part of which is constituted by an
additional guideway (2') which is closed at its two ends on said
intermediate guideway (2) so as to form a closed guideway
bounded by inner (23') and outer (22) guiding members dis-
posed as extensions of the guiding members (23, 22) of the
intermediate guideway (2) and associated with a series (21) of
seating plates forming a closed chain of seats with the plates of
said intermediate guideway, said outer guiding member (22'^
being interrupted at the entry and exit^of said intermediate
guideway (2), respectively, for the passage of objects coming
from said upstream guideway (1) and going to said down-
stream guideway (3), said magazine being associated with two
switches (6, 7) respectively positioned at the ends of said inter-
mediate guideway (2) and with individual means for orienting
the upstream (6) and d6wnstream (7) switches alternately into
a first position assuring continuity of said intermediate guide-
way (2) respectively with said upstream guideway (1) and with
said downstream guideway (3) and a second position ass#nng
continuity of said intermediate guideway (2) with said addi-
tional guideway (2') forming the other part of said magazine.
1. An ammunition sorting system comprising:
a plurality of storage means, each adapted to releasably store
a different type of ammunition;
a conveyor system including in sequence a plurality of
rungs,
each rung movable between two alternative positions,
one position wherein said rung provides a passageway in
the conveyor adapted to receive therein a round of
ammunition from one of said plurality of storage means,
the other position wherein said rung precludes entry of a
round into said passageway; and
means for selecting the position of each rung as it passes each
of said plurality of storage means.
4,434,702
TELESCOPING PERISCOPE
Manrin J. Rozner, Ventura, and Arthur S. Chapman, Santa
Barbara County, both of CaUf., assignors to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Mar. 8, 1962, S«-. No. 356,002
iBt a.» F41G 1/40 ,
U.S. a. 89—36 L 2 Claims
1. In a military vehicle having a turret routable in the azi-
muth plane, a main gun externally mounted on the roof of the
turret fint power means for moving, the gun bodily between a
lowered prone position adjacent the turret roof and a raised
78
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
prone position remote from the turret roof, and second power
means for swinging the gun around a first horizontal axis to
vary the elevational firing angle of the gun: the improvement
comprising a periscope extending upwardly from the turret in
the space alongside the gun;
said periscope including a first stationary support tube ex-
tending upwardly from the turret roof to a point near the
upper surface of the gun when the gun is in its lowered
prone position, a second tube telescopically slidably ex-
tendable from the stationary support tube, a third tube
slidably telescopically extendable from the second tube, a
first head carried on the upper end of the third tube for
three hundred sixty degree movement in the azimuth
plane, the second and third tubes being movable between
lowered positions wherein the first head is slightly above
the gun in its lowered prone position to raised positions
wherein the first head is slighdy above the gun in its raised
prone position;
said periscope further including a second head carried on the
first head for angular motion around a second horizontal
axis normal to the tube axis, optical elements within the
first and second heads for transmitting an image from the
second head along the second horizontal axis and thence
T^Ol^^
El^
■^ !
A
' I ' ---J J I '
er *t
downwardly along the tube axis, and mirror means at the
lower end of the second tube for receiving the image from
the first head and reflecting said image upward parallel to
the tube axis;
a stationary reflector arranged to receive the upwardly
directed beam from the mirror means;
and power means for simultaneously moving said second
and third tubes at different speeds such that the first head
and mirror means move away from each during the raise
motion of the periscope and toward each other during
lowering motion of the periscope, the movement speed of
the third tube being one half the movement speed of the
inner tube so that the optical path from the second head to
the stationary reflector has a constant length in all ad-
justed positions of the second and third tubes;
said power means comprising a first sprocket mounted on
the second tube near its lower end, a second sprocket
mounted on the second tube near its upper end, a first
chain extending from a fixed anchorage downwardly
around the first sprocket and thence upwardly to an an-
chorage on the third tube, and a second chain extending
from an anchorage on the third tube upwardly around the
second sprocket and thence downwardly to an anchorage
on the stationary support tube.
4,434,703
GUN-MOUNT FOR A MACHINE GUN SUPPORTED BY A
FORK OR FOR A WEAPON OF A SIMILAR KIND WITH
MEANS FOR CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
ADJUSTMENT OF THE ELEVATION OF THE UPPER
SWIVEL ARM
Jorgen L. Fog, SkoTlimdc, aod Jorgen Niclaen, Fanun, both of
Denmark, aadgBon to Diia A/S (Damk Induatri Syndifat
A/S), HerlcT, Denmark
FUed Jon. 4, 1961, Scr. No. 270,331
lot a? F41F 23/00
US. a. 89—37 B 3 Claims
1. Gun mounting apparatus, comprising:
a pair of swivel arms including an upper arm and a lower
arm pivotally connected together at one end thereof for
rotation of the upper arm about an axis, said upper swivel
arm being in the form of a parallelogram including an
upper long side in the shape of a hollow box which sur-
rounds the lower long side and the upper and lower short
sides of said parallelogram;
a gun mount attached to the free end of said upper arm; and
height adjustment means for adjusting the height of said free
end of said upper arm, including a connecting rod means
of variable length connected between two sides of the
parallelogram and geared control means for changing the
length of said connecting rod means.
4,434,704
HYDRAULIC DIGITAL STEPPER ACTUATOR
Jim B. Snijaatmadlia, Dnncan, Okla., aaaignor to Halliburton
Company, Dnncan, Okla.
Filed Apr. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 140,126
Int CL^ F15B 15/22
UJS. a. 91—25 8 Claims
1. An apparatus for converting pressure, exerted by a pres-
surizing substance between a pressure source and a pressure
sink, into increments of displacement, each increment having a
length S, said apparatus comprising:
a housing including a wall having four grooves defined in
spaced relationship to each other on an interior surface of
said wall and said wall further having four holes defined
therethrough so that each hole extends from a respective
one of the grooves to an exterior surface of said wall, said
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
79
grooves and holes thereby defining four ports of said
housing, each of said grooves being O.S S wide and being
spaced from each adjacent groove on centers spaced 1 .0 S;
and
a double-acting piston disposed for movement in said hous-
ing in response to the pressurizing substance, said piston
including:
a side wall having an inner surface and an outer surface
and further having a first plurality of apertures and a ^
second plurality of apertures defined in said side wall so
that each of said apertures extends from the inner sur-
face to the outer surface, each of said apertures having
a diameter of l.S S with each aperture of said first
plurality of apertures being spaced on a center sepa-
rated a distance of 4.0 S from a center of each adjacent
aperture of said first plurality of apertures and with
each aperture of said second plurality of apertures being
spaced on a center separated a distance of 4.0 S from a
center of each adjacent aperture of said second plurality
of apertures, said first plurality of apertures including a
first aperture and a second aperture and said second
plurality of apertures including a third aperture,
wherein:
said third aperture is defined in said side wall so that
said third aperture registers with a first one of said
ports when said first aperture registers with a second
one of said ports and further so that said third aper-
ture registers with said second one of said ports when
said first aperture overshoots in a first direction said
second one of said ports; and '
said second aperture is defined in said side wall so that
said second aperture registers with said first one of
said ports when said first aperture overshoots in said
first direction said second one of said ports, said first,
second and third apertures thereby providing feed-
back means for precisely positioning said piston rela-
tive to said housing;
■ a first end wall closing a first portion of a first end of said
side wall and leaving a second portion of said first end
open;
a second end wall closing a first portion of a second end of
said side wall and leaving a second portion of said
second end open; and
a central wall extending from said first end wall to said
second end wall and from a first region of the inner
surface of said side wall to a second region of the inner
surface of said side wall so that a first chamber extend-
ing from the first end wall to the open portion of the
second end of said side wall and a second chamber
extending from said second end wall to the open portion
of the first end o^«aid side wall are formed, wherein said
first plurality of apertures communicates with said first
chamber and wherein said second plurality of apertures
communicates with said second chamber.
4,434,705
INTRODUCED IN THE HYDRAUUC ACTUATION FOR
THE ALTERNATIVE MOVEMENTS OF THE SWINGING
ARMS OF PETROLEUM EXTRACTOR MACHINES
Pedro Roquet Jorda, Aatonlo Figueras, St. No. 83, Tona (Barce-
lona), Spain
Continnation of Ser. No. 91356, No?. 6, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct 30, 1981, Ser. No. 315,590
Int a.) FOIL 25/06
U.S. CL 91—50 1 Claim
1. A single-stroke hydraulically-powered reciprocating
drive mechanism comprising:
(i) a source of fluid under pressure
(ii) a hydraulic ram including a cylinder, and a piston recip-
rocable in the cylinder and defining therein a a chamber of
variable volume,
(iii) a spool valve having first and second positions
(iv) valve striker means moving with the hydraulic ram and
changing the spool valve from one position to another at
each end of the stroke of the hydraulic ram,
(v) a resiliently-loaded two-way valve having an inlet con-
nected in a first position to a first outiet, said valve being
arranged upon decrease of back pressure in the first outlet
to move to a second position in which the inlet is also
connected to a second outlet •
(vi) a resiliently-loaded braking valve having conditions of
lesser and greater opening,
(vii) first conduit means connecting the source of fluid under
pressure to the inlet of said two-way valve and to said
braking valve,
(viii) second conduit means connecting the second outlet of
said two-way valve and said spool valve to exhaust to said
source of fluid under pressure,
(ix) third conduit means connecting said braking valve to
said chamber of variable volume, and
(x) fourth conduit means connecting the first ouUet of said
two-way valve to said spool valve, the arrangement being
such that in said first position of said spool valve corre-
sponding to a powered stroke of said hydraulic ram, the
spool valve closes the fourth conduit means and the resul-
tant higher differential pressure maintains the two-way
valve in its first position so that fluid under pressure in the
first conduit means maintains the braking valve in its
condition of greater opening so that fluid passes through
the third conduit to the chamber of variable volume to
actuate the ram, whereas at the end of the powered stroke
the spool valve is moved to iu second position in which it
provides a communication between the fourth and second
conduit means and as a result the differential pressure
reduces and permits the two-way valve to move to its
second position to connect the first and second conduit
means, thereby permitting exhausting of fluid from said
chamber of variable volume through said third conduit
means, said braking valve in its condition of lesser open-
ing, and said first and second conduit means.
4,434,706
POWER-ASSISTED STEERING DEVICE FOR A VEHICLE
Patrice Bertin, Paris, France, aaaipMr to Valao, Sodetc Ano-
nyms, Paris, France
FUed Jul. 14, 1981, Scr. No. 283,155
Claims priority, appUcation Franca, JnL 17, 1980, 80 15790;
Jun. 29, 1981, 81 12714
Int a.> n5B 9/08
U.S. a. 91—375 A 7 ClaiaM
1. In a power-assisted steering device for a vehicle, compris-
ing control means operable to act on steering means, said
control means having a transmission element in two parts
which parts are capable of limited relative angular displace-
ment under the action of said control means, and power-assist-
ance means responsive to relative angular displacement of said
parts to act on said steering means in the same sense as the
control means, said power-assistance means comprising a hy-
80
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
draulic unit having fluid-pressure means and a fluid reservoir,
an actuator acting on the steering means, and a hydraulic
distributor interposed between the hydrauUc unit and the
actuator, said distributor comprising a stator having a pressure
orifice connected to the fluid-pressure means, a return oriflce
connected to the fluid reservoir, and two service oriflces con-
nected to the actuator, and two adjacent rotors, located within
the stator and which are respectively operable to rotate inte-
grally with said two parts of the transmission element, a first of
said rotors having distribution passages interacting with said
pressure and return orifices, whilst the second rotor is pro-
vided with distribution passages which interact both with the
distribution passages of the first rotor 40 and with th? service
orifices of the stator the improvement in which the pressure
orifice and return orifice of the stator communicate respec-
tively with two chambers, one of these chambers being a
peripheral chamber and communicating directly with distribu-
tion passages'of the first rotor, which passages comprise aper-
tures located along the outer periphery of the first rotor, whilst
the other chamber is a central chamber and communicates
directly with other distribution passages of the first rotor,
which passages comprise apertures located adjacent the inner
periphery of the first rotor, said first rotor being located within
the axial dimension of both of said chambers.
4,434,707
VACUUM TYPE BRAKE BOOSTER DEVICE FOR
VEHICULAR USE
Hiroo Takeuchi, AsaaUna; Nobuaki Hachiro, and Yoahihisa
Miyazaki, both of Ueda, all of Japan, aaaignors to Nissin
Kogyo Kabnahikl Kaisha, Ueda, Japan
FUed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,011
Claima priority, appUcation Japan, Nov. 19, 1980, 55-162832;
Apr. 4, 1981, 56-50816
iBt CL^ F15B 9/10: F16J i/02
U.S. CL 91—376 R 2 CUdms
1. A vacuum type brake booster device for vehicular use
comprising a booster shell of substantially elliptical shape in
transverse cross-section, a booster piston corresponding in
shape to the booster shell and accommodated therein for axial
reciprocating movement, and a diaphragm having outer and
inner peripheral portions sealingly secured, respectively, to the
booster shell and the booster piston so as to divide the interior
space of the booster shell into a first working chamber in
communication with a vacuum source and a second working
chamber adapted to be selectively placed in communication
with the first working chamber and the external atmosphere by
switching valve means, said diaphragm being of substantially
elliptical shape in transverse cross-section and including a pair
of opposite straight peripheral wall sections and a pair of oppo-
site arcuate peripheral wall sections interconnecting said
straight peripheral wall sections, said arcuate peripheral wall
sections having a greater thickness than that of said straight
peripheral wall sections, said arcuate peripheral wall sections
of said diaphragm each having a rear surface including a raised
arcuate rib for abutting engagement with a rear wall of the
booster shell.
4,434,708
CONTROL VALVE FOR DOUBLE-ACHNG PISTON AND
VALVE ASSEMBLIES
Charles J. Bowden, Battle Creek, Mich., assignor to General
Signal Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,006
lat a.3 F15B nm
U.S. a. 91—436 17 Claims
1. An improved control valve for use with a double-acting
piston and cylinder assembly, said valve comprising:
a valve body having a cylindrical bore therein;
at least one inlet chamber in said body with said cylindrical
bore for receiving fluid from an external supply;
at least one outlet chamber in said body communicating with
said cylindrical bore for discharging fluid to an external
reservoir;
a first cylinder chamber in said body communicating with
said cylindrical bore for delivering fluid to and receiving
fluid from one side of an external double-acting piston and
cylinder assembly;
a second cylinder chamber in said body communicating with
said cylindrical bore for delivering fluid to and receiving
fluid from the other side of the same external double-
acting piston and cylinder assembly;
a valve plunger positioned to slide within said bore, said
plunger comprising in operative association with said inlet
and outlet chambers and with said first and second cylin-
der chambers, first means for selectively delivering fluid
from said inlet chamber to one of said first and second
cylinder chambers, second means for selectively deliver-
ing fluid from the other of said first and second cylinder
chambers to said outlet chamber and third means respon-
sive to a predetermined pressure differential between said
first and second cylinder chambers for directing fluid
from the one of said cylinder chambers receiving high
pressure fluid from the contracting side of the double-
acting piston and cylinder assembly, to the other of said
cylinder chambers delivering relatively lower pressure
fluid to the expanding side of the double-acting piston and
cylinder assembly; and
pressure responsive valve means connected in series with
said second means for controlling the pressure of fluid
flowing from the contracting side of the double-acting
piston and cylinder assembly, via said second means, to
said at least one outlet chamber.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
81
4,434,709
AXIAL PISTON PUMP
Bo L. Grelaaon, KantareUvigen 5, S-860 21 Sundsbmk, Sweden
per No. PCr/SE80/00050, § 371 Date Oct. 23, 1980, § 102te)
Date Oct 10, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01822, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 4, 1980
PCT Filed Feb. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 197,095
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden, Feb. 23, 1979, 7901669
lat a.3 FOIB U/04
\}&. a. 91—506 ' 15 ClaUns
m
1. In/m axial piston pump comprising:
(a) a' drive plate
(b) a rotatable cylinder block tiltable relative to said drive
plate in at least one direction
(c) at least one piston mounted slidably in a cylinder of said
cylinder block, said piston having a reciprocating move-
ment imparted thereto upon rotation of said cylinder
block when said cylinder block is tilted, relative to said
drive plate, out of a neutral position in which no pumping
is effected,
(d) a distribution plate adjustable jointly with said cylinder
block and including two slots which act as inlet and outlet
slots respectively, depending upon the direction of tilting
of the cylinder block,
(e) a stationary port plate comprising exhaust and reflux
ports respectively for the outflow of pumped fluid from
the pump to an hydraulic system and for reflux of the used
fluid from ssiid hydraulic system to a hydraulic reservoir,
one of said slots of said distribution plate, acting as an outlet
slot by the adjustment of the distribution plate, being brought
into gradually increasing communication with that said port of
the said port plate which is serving as an exhaust port as a
consequence of the tilting of said distribution plate out of
neutral position, the improvement which comprises, in combi-
nation:
(i) said port plate has at least one additional and separate feed
opening located in said ]X)rt plate for^ach tilting direction
for supply of fluid to the pump,
(ii) the positioning of said exhaust and reflux ports and said
feed opening of said port plate is such that said outlet and
inlet slots of said distribution plate, as a result of said
tUting of said distribution plate out of neutral position, are
brought into gradually increasing communication with
said feed opening and said exhaust port for outflow of
fluid from the pump,
(iii) the reflux port for reflux of fluid to the hydraulic reser-
voir is gradually opened by said distribution plate, and
(iv) said reflux port and said feed opening are placed in
communication with a housing for the pump serving as a
hydraulic reservoir for the pump.
4,434,710
GRILLE MOUNTING MEANS AND METHOD
Theodore S. Bolton, Liverpool; Brad G. Leech, FayettcvUle, and
Richard D. Lang, Chittcnango, aU of N.Y., aaaignors to Car-
rier Corporation, Syracuse, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 259,869, May 4, 1981, abandoned. This
appUcation Nov. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 437,919
Int a.J F24F 1/02
U.S. a. 98—94 AC 10 Claims
KIUOMO PMITIMI
MItll
^W
1. Apparatus for mounting spaced louvers to cover an open-
ing in a building while allowing air flow therethrough which
comprises:
a wall sleeve defining the opening, said wall sleeve including
inwardly extending sleeve flanges and member support
means associated with at least one sleeve flange; and
a grille assembly adapted to be mounted to the wall sleeve
from the interior of the building to form a portion of the
exterior of the building including
louver support means for maintaining the spaced louvers in
a predetermined position, said louver support means en-
gaging and extending inwardly from the louvers;
a grille frame defining a grille opening across which the
spaced louvers aite m(untained, said frame including in-
wardly extending grille flanges which abut against the
sleeve flanges upon assembly; and
a pair of mounting members rotatably secured to the louver
suppori means and spaced from the louvers, said mounting
members serving as a handle for manually manipulating
the grille assembly from the interior of the building and
further engaging the member support means to secure the
grille assembly to the wall sleeve when rotated to the
appropriate position.
4,434,711
FUME HOOD WfTH DAMPER CONTROLLED BAFFLES
AND METHOD
Jon A. Zboralski, Manitowoc, and Harry N. Grow, Two Rivers,
both of Wis., assignors to HamUtoa Industries, Inc., Two
Rivers, WU.
FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,676
Int a.J F23J U/00
U.S. a. 98—116 LH 10 Claims
1. A fume handling enclosure comprising a housing having
top and rear walls meeting at an upper rear portion of said
housing and having an exhaust opening located at said upper
82
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
rear portion; a top baffle within said housing extending along
and spaced below said top wall to define a generally horizontal
fiim^ passage therebetween; said top baffle having a rear end
spaced forwardly from said rear wall and being provided with
a plurality of openings for receiving lighter-than-air gases into
said horizontal fume passage for directing the same towards
said exhaust opening; a rear baffle within said housing spaced
forwardly from said rear wall for defining a generally vertical
fume passage therebetween; said rear baffle having an upper
end spaced below said top wall and disposed adjacent the rear
end of said top baffle; said rear baffle having at least one open-
ing for receiving gases into said vertical fume passage; a mov-
able damper disposed within said housing adjacent said exhaust
opening; means pivotally supporting said damper for move-
ment about a generally horizontal pivot line disposed adjacent
the rear end of said upper baffle and the upper end of said rear
baffle; said damper being pivotal between first and second
positions for controlling the flow of fumes through said pas-
sages to said exhaust opening; said damper when in said first
position substantially closing said vertical fume passage and
opening said horizontal fume passage to said exhaust opening,
and when in said second position substantially closing said
horizontal fume passage and op|bning said vertical fume pas-
sage to said exhaust opening; Md activating means connected
to said damper and extending externally of said housing for
controlling the position of said damper from the exterior of
said housing.
\
4,434,713
CALENDER
Gcrkard Hartwkh; JomT Pa?, both of Krafcld, and Dieter
Prcui, Kaarat, aU of Fad. Rap. of GcraMay, aarigaon to
KkiBcwefcn GmbH, Krcfeld, Fad. Rep. of Gcrmaay
Filed Not. 19, IMl, Scr. No. 323,095
ClaiiBS priority, appUcatioB Fed. Rep. of Gcnuay, No?. 21,
19M, 3043901
ht a.) B30B i/04
U.S. a. 100—168 17 Claims
4,434,712
SILO BREATHER BAG
Aahley M. Rosa, Highland Park, and James A. McKee, Elm-
hurst, both of IlL, aasignon to Fabrico Maoufactoring Corp.,
Chicago, m.
FUcd Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,788
lat a.3 AOIF 2i/22: B65D 30/10
M&. CL 99 646 S 5 Claims
y9 y7e ^fis
1. A tubluar silo breather bag adapted to be inflated to a
generally partial torus or weiner-Uke configuration; said bag
comprising when inflated a flexible top panel and a flexible
bottom panel sealed together with a seam along overlapping
edges on the outer convex side surface, a flexible transition
panel sealed to said top panel with a seam along overlapping
edges, and a flexible side panel extending from one end of the
bag to the other end along the inner concave curvature of the
bag. said side panelf^eftning at each end of the bag a generally
convex end surface extending from said inner curvature to said
outer convex side surface with only one dart seam in said
convex end surface and being sealed with a seam along its
peripheral edges to said top, bottom and transition panels.
1. A calender comprising a support; a plurality of superja-
cent rolls having first and second end portions, adjacent to said
support and including a lowermost and an uppermost roll; first
and second bearings for the respective end portions of said
rolls; guide means provided for said bearings on said support;
means for normally maintaining the bearings for said lower-
most roll at a predetermined level; first and second displacing
means for moving the respective bearings for said uppermost
roll downwardly through a first range of distances; and first
and second pressure transducer means interposed between the
respective bearings for said uppermost roll and the respective
displacing means and operative to move said uppermost roll
downwardly, while said displacing means is idle, through a
second range of distances which is a small fraction of said fuit
range.
4,434,714
APPARATUS FOR SCREEN PRINTING BOTTLES
Gny Combeau, Le Moulin de la Mic, Saint*Priaat sons Aixe,
87700 Aize sur Vienne, France
Filed Mar. 4, 1982, Scr. No. 354,624
Claims priority, application Fkvnce, Mar. 4, 1981, 81 04370;
Mar. 4, 1981, 81 04371
Int a^ B41F n/22
U.S. CL 101—38 A 16 Claims
1. A container printing assembly comprising:
a frame;
conveyor means movably mounted on said frame for con-
veying a plurality of containers in step-by-step fashion;
a drying station connected to said frame for receiving a rear
portion of said conveyor means and formed of an enclo-
sure having an adjustable selected length adapted to a
speed of said conveyor for permitting drying of ink ap-
plied to the containers, said drying station having an en-
trance and an exit for said conveyor means;
a discharge station associated with said frame adjacent said
drying station enclosure outlet at which containers are
discharge from said conveyor means;
a pick-up sution associated with said frame adjacent said
\
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
13
discharge station at which containers are picked up by
conveyor means;
a treatment station associated with said frame adjacent said
pick-up station for treatment of containers; and
a printing station including a printing head associated with
said frame and positioned adjacent a forward end of said
conveyor means and adjacent said treatment sution and
drying station enclosure entrance;
said conveyor means lying in a vertical plane and adapted to
hold containers with longitudinal axes of the containers
extending substantially horizontally and moving in paral-
lel on said conveyor means;
said conveyor means comprising an endless chain with
clamping members for holding each container by coopera-
tion with a neck of each container during transport from
one station to another, said endless chain moving entirely
in said vertical plane, said conveyor means including a
forward chain winding member around which said end-
less chain is wound at a forward end of said conveyor
means;
each of said clamping members comprising a pair of arms
each pivotally mounted to a base plate forming a link of
said endless chain, a pinion connected to each arm adja-
cent a pivotal mounting thereof to said base plate and
meashed with a pinion of the other arm in each clamping
member, a wheel connected to one of said arms for pivot-
ing said one of said arms for opening said clamping mem-
bers;
a control chain movably mounted on said frame adjacent at
least the forward portion of siid conveyor means and
engageable with each wheel for selectively opening and
closing each of said clamping members; and
driving means engaged with said control chain for esublish-
ing equal and differential movements between said control
chain and said conveyor means for opening and closing
each of said clamping members.
4,434,715
PRINTING APPARATUS INCLUDING SERIAL
PRINTING MEANS
Max D. McHenry, Fremont, Calif., assignor to A. B. Dick
Company, Chicago, III.
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Scr. No. 331,630
Int a? B41L 45/00
U.S. CL 101—76 18 Claims
1. In a printing apparatus for serially printing characters on
print stock being transported through the apparatus including
separate serial printing heads, a movable mounting means for
supporting the respective heads on opposite sides of the mount-
ing means, and means for moving said mounting means be-
tween first and second positions for selectively locating one or
the other of said heads in position for printing on said stock, the
improvement comprising a support for said mounting means,
said support and mounting means being fued in an assembled
relationship, means defined by said support for rotatably sup-
porting said mounting means, means for moving said support
back and forth generally along the path of movement of the
stock, the movement of the support being between an operat-
ing position where one of the printing heads on the mounting
means is in position for printing, and a non-operating position
where neither of the heads is in position for printing, means for
locking the assembly of the support and mounting naeans in
place in the apparatus when said support is moved to the
operating position to thereby locate a printing head in said
position for printing, said mounting means, when the support is
in non-operating position, being rotatable on the support to
reverse the positions of said heads on said support, said mount-
ing means being releasably fixed on said support whereby the
mounting means can be lifted off said support when the sup-
port is in non-operating position and removed from the appara-
tus with a new assembly of mounting means and heads being
substituted into the apparatus, and wherein a printing head not
in the printing position is accessible to an operator of the appa-
ratus when the support is located in operating position so that
the printing head not in printing position can be reset while the
apparatus is operating.
4,434,716
OPERATING LEVER DEVICE FOR PRINTING
MACHINE
Koji Ishii, and Yoahinori Honkawa, both of Hiroshima, Japan,
assignors to Ryobi Ltd., Fuchu, Japan
FUed May 20, 1981. Ser. No. 265,497
Claims priority, application Japan, May 27, 1980, 55-71148
Int a.J B41F 7/06
U.S. a. 101—142 13 Claims
Of ELfWMTS^
— 'OKHATIONAL KOUiNCE
1 1 1 ff T VI V V f 1 1
WIVE UOTOD ON Ml
-^^
-^
■^
— h
PUMP MOTON ON M,
f—
r-f
'—
-t
■—
^
INK DUCT OM (roKHLEI
r
-
T
1
r
*«TE« DUCT ON
s
—
—
\-
z^-
"^^la, ^'^fp-cvi'jffit."^^
— J
—
—
~
1+
FORCItLE CONTACT KTWtCN r\.tn
CTLIN MO DUMfll CYLINOC*
11
.
.,
-
— E
tMUT SUW.Y
— 1
-\
H
J
-^
-y
— '
H
BLANKET CLEANINO
^RH
PtATl UPPLV
|h
t
1
PLATE DIKHAIMt
1 '^
_
__
__
__
,__
L_
1. A printing machine having an operating lever device,
comprising:
a plate cylinder;
means for loading plates onto said plate cylinder;
means for unloading said plates;
a blanket cylinder;
means for cleaning said blanket cylinder;
form rollers;
a form roller control mechanism;
a plate cylinder control mechanism;
a sheet feed;
a sheet feed control mechanism;
84
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6. 1984
a water' duct roller;
a water duct roller control mechanism;
a rubber cylinder;
an ink duct roller;
an ink duct roller control mechanism;
an operating lever device;
said operating lever device comprising an operating lever
adapted to be set at any of a plurality of positions stepwise
and a set cam secured to an operating shaft which is
fuedly secured to said operating lever, said set cam hold-
ing said operating lever in such a manner that said operat-
ing lever can be held at more than one of said plurality of
positions;
a plurality of cams and arms coupled to said operating shaft
for controlling said plate loading means, plate unloading
means, blanket cylinder cleaning means, form roller con-
trol mechanism, plate cylinder control mechanism, sheet
feed control mechanism, water duct roller control mecha-
nism and ink duct roller control mechanism in accordance
with an angular position of said operating lever;
said plate loading means comprising a switch mechanism
having a memory circuit adapted to be set to open and
closed positions in accordance with a plate loading opera-
tion and to store a plate loaded state during an additional
plate loading operation which is carried out upon comple-
tion of a first plate loading operation;
an automatic returning mechanism for returning said operat-
ing lever to at least one of said plurality of positions, said
automatic returning mechanism comprising at least one
solenoid, said automatic returning mechanism being oper-
ated by said solenoid according to a rotational position of
said rubber cylinder, said automatic returning mechanism
being operatively coupled to said operating lever, said
solenoid being coupled to be energized upon completion
of a printing operation to successively return said operat-
ing lever to at least one of said plurality of positions;
at least said water duct roller control mechanism and said
form roller control mechanism being operatively coupled
to said operating lever to be operated before a plate load-
ing operation of said plate loading means by setting said
. operating lever stepwise to cause said form rollers to
contact said plate cylinder; and
said ink duct roller control mechanism being coupled to said
operating shaft in such a manner that ink is supplied in a
step in which said form rollers contact the surface of sai^
plate and the surface of said plate contacts said rubber
cylinder after said plate has been loaded on said plate
cylinder.
an apertured cover for said enclosing means, hermetically
sealed thereto; and
/
•<
V
means for connecting extended electric leads to said wafer
througli said apertured cover, hermetically sealed to said
cover.
4,434,718
SABOT AND PROJECTILE
Paul J. KopKh, 710 Cooper Focter Park Rd., Loraio, Ohio
41053; Donald F. Ward, 48264 Telegraph Rd., South Ambertt,
Ohio 41001; Jay Gnri>er, 7370 Amity Pike, Plain Qty, Ohio
43064, and Omer Nichols, RJ). 8, Box 175, Greensburg, Pa.
15651
FUed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,444
Int a^ F42B 13/16
MS. a. 102—522 2 Claims
4,434,717
HYBRID FUSE TRIGGERING DEVICE
Lawrence F. Erickson, San Jose, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,175
Int. a.J F42C 11/02
U.S. a. 102— 210 12 Claims
1. A fuze triggering device, for fuze detonated weapons,
comprising:
abase;
means for mounting said device attached to said base;
means for insulating the upper surface of said base attached
thereto;
means for generating an electrical signal from "g" Joading,
mounted on said insulating means;
an electronics wafer, having a preprinted circuit therein,
electrically connected to said signal generating means;
means for enclosing said insulating means, said generating
means and said wafer, hermetically sealed to said base;
1. A self-separating sabot for use in combination with a
projectile for firing through a shotgun bore, comprising:
(a) An elongated cylindrical sabot body having a base por-
tion at the aft end thereof and a plurality of longitudinally
extending segments open at the forward end thereof, said
sabot body having a metallic disc positioned on the inside
surface of said base defined by the closed end of said
segments, and wherein said base portion is thicker than
said longitudinally extending segments, and wherein said
longitudinally extending segmente have inscribed thereon,
a plurality of longitudinally extending grooves for reduc-
ing friction between said sabot and said shotgun bore: and
(b) a projectile adapted for insertion in said sabot body, said
projectile having a plurality of eccentrically placed fins at
the aft end thereof, said fins being supported by said metal-
lic disc, said projectile being further deftned in that the
greater portion of its weight is positioned in the forward
third of said projectile; and
(c) means for propelling said sabot body and projectile
through and out said barrel; and
(d) said longitudinally segmented ends being responsive to
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
85
air forces such that said segments open in a radially out-
wardly direction thereby separating from said projectile.
4,434,719
STEERING MOTORIZED TRUCK
George Mekosh, Jr., Warrington, Pa., assignor to The Budd
Company, Troy, Mich.
FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,156
Int. a.3 B61F 3/04. 5/38. 5/52
U.S. a. 105—168 6 Claims
1. A forced steerable truck for a railway car body compris-
ing:
(a) a main frame secured to said car body;
(b) said main frame including a pair of side frames and a
bolster secured to said side frames;
(c) a pair of "C" shaped steerable sub-frames each having
two arm portions extending from a connecting portion;
(d) means for interconnecting the connecting portions of
said sub-frames to each other,
(e) menas for pivoUlly connecting said connecting portions
of said main frame;
(0 said means for pivotally connecting comprising a vertical
hanger member connected between each of said arm
portions and said main frame;
(g) a wheel axle assembly secured between each of said two
arm portions of said sub-frames;
(h) means for connecting the two arm portions of each of
said sub-frames to the ends of said side frames;
(i) a steering link member connected between said main
frame and one of said steering sub-frames;
0) said steering link member being adapted to be connected
at different locations on said main frame to provide under-
steering or oversteering;
(k) a vertical pivot member extending from said bolster;
0) a bracket connected to one of said steering sub-frames;
and
(m) said steering link member being pivotally mounted to
said vertical pivot member at one end and resiliently
mounted to said bracket at the other end;
whereby said steering sub-frames are forced to move in accor-
dance with the movement of said car body with respect to said
sub-frames.
bolster with one of said side bearing assemblies located on
each side of the center plate opening,
each side bearing assembly comprising a base plMe affixed to
the truck bolster and an upper plate, a first resilient device
located between the base plate and the upper plate, and a
4,434,720
MULTI-RATE SIDE BEARING FOR A RAILWAY TRUCK
Harry W. Mulcahy, Griffith, Ind., and Horst T. Kaufbold, Chi-
cago, ni., aasipMrs to AMSTED Industries Incorporated,
Chicago, DL
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,717
Int a.i B61F 5/14
UJ5. a. 105—199 CB 9 Claims
1. A railway truck comprising a truck bolster, a center plate
opening in the truck bolster adapted to receive a center plate
therein,
two side bearing assemblies on the top surface of the truck
second resilieiy device located between the base plate and
the upper plate and outboard in relation to said center
plate opening from the first resilient device, said first
resilient device having a lower compression rate than the
second resilient device, and said first resilient device hav-
ing a lower shear rate than the second resilient device.
4,434,721
ANTI-SNAP DEVICE FOR DRAFIING BOARD TILTING
MECHANISM
Huey G. Shelton, Winnetka, and Leonard N. Zack, Mount
Prospect, both of lU., assignors to Huey Company, Franklin
Park, lU.
FUed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,663
Int. CI.J A47F 5/12; A47B 9/02
U.S. a. 108—4 6 Claims
1. In a spring balancing system for an adjustable drafting
table, said table including first and second horizontally-extend-
ing members fixed respectively to a uble stand and to a uble
surface, said system using a tilt spring means partly wrapped in
first and second directions about said members for sutically
balancing said uble surface at any tilt position in a 90 degree
arc between the horizontal and the vertical, an anti-snap device
for resisting and slowing table surface movement to the verti-
cal, said anti-snap device comprising:
a flexible, non-extensible strap means connected at its ends to
and extending between the first and second horizontally
extending members and wrapped partly about said mem-
bers in directions opposite to said first and second direc-
tions for preventing the table surface from moving beyond
a vertical position; and
86
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6. 1984
connecting means for connecting a center portion of said
flexible strap means to said tilt spring means;
the flexible strap means and the tilt spring means being
normally spaced apart from one another when the flexible
strap means is tightened in the absence of the connection
via the connecting means,
wherein tightening of the flexible strap means between the
horizontally extending members as the toble surface
moves to the vertical is controllably resisted by a partly
sidewards extension of the tilt spring means caused by the
flexible strap means via the connecting means,
whereby such resistance to movement of the table surfisce to
the vertical position slows the table surface movement and
prevents the uble surface from snpping into the fully vertical
upright position.
4,434,723
FLUIDIZED-BED COMBUSTION APPARATUS
Leslie Brealer. John H. Wilaon, aad Niyazi Demlrcan, aU of
Derby, England, asiignon to Northcm Eogineeriag Indus-
tries, Plc^ England
FUed No?. 27, 1981, Scr. No. 325,598
Claimi priority, appUeation United Kingdom, Not. 28, 1980,
8038370
Int a.' F23D 19/02
U.S. a 110-245 , ctotai
4,434,722
TILT SUPPORT FOR OVERBED TABLE TOP AND
VERTICAL LOCK ASSEMBLY THEREFOR
Robert A. Solooon, Kalamazoo, and John J. DelUnger, Portage,
both of Mkh., assignors to Am Fab, Inc., Kalamazoo, Mich.
FUed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 267,092
Int CI.3 A47B 23/00. 27/18
UA a 108-8 18 Claims
10* Y
7. A table, comprising:
abase;
a table top pivotally supported on said base for movement
about a substantially horizontal first pivot axis;
means for releasably securing said table top in a selected
pivotal position with respect to said base, including:
first locking means provided on one of said Uble top and
said base and fixed against movement relative thereto
about said first pivot axis;
an elongate member movably supported on the other of
said table top and said base and having second locking
means thereon, said second locking means being mov-
able in a direction substantially radially of said first
pivot axis between positions spaced from and opera-
tively engaged with said first locking means by moving
said elongate member;
first means for resiliently urging said second locking
means toward one of said engaged and spaced positions;
second means for resisting movement of said elongate
member about said first pivot axis relative to said other
of said table top and said base; and
selectively actuable disabling means cooperable with said
elongate member when said second locking means is in
said engaged position for preventing movement of said
second locking means away from said engaged position.
1. Fluidised bed combustion apparatus comprising:
(a) a horizontal furnace duct, «
(b) bed containment means within said duct,
(c) particulate non-combustable inert fluidisable bed material
forming a fluidisable bed in said containment means,
(d) first means operable to feed particulate solid fuel to said
bed in said containment means through an upstream end of
said duct,
(e) second means operable to feed air into said bed to fluidise
the same,
(0 said containment means comprising at a downstream end
of said bed a bed-retaining wall extending upwardly above
said fluidised bed when slumped and having an upper edge
spaced from the duct thereabove forming an opening,
(g) said first and second means being operable during com-
bustion of fuel in said bed so as to cause generation of flue
gases at velocities leaving said bed which results in inert
bed material being elutriated in said flue gases and being
carried thereby out of the containment toward a down-
stream end of the bed and through the opening between
the duct and the bed-retaining wall,
(h) a combustion chamber into which said duct opens lo-
cated downstream of the bed-retaining wall,
(i) horizontal firetubes located outside of said duct and con-
nected downstream of and to the combustion chamber for
receiving flue gases therefrom.
0) the maximum gas velocity of the flue gases passing
through the opening over the said bed-retaining wall
being considerably higher than the terminal velocity of
elutriated bed materials carried therein with the result
that, in the absence of other means, bed material would be
undesirably conveyed by the flue gases into the said fire-
tubes and thus be unrecoverable,
(k) and means located downstream of the said containment
means and in the flue gas path for reducing the mmimum
velocity of the flue gases downstream of the said contain-
ment means below the terminal velocity of the said bed
materials to cause most of the elutriated bed material to be
removed in the combustion chamber and thus to prevent
substantial deposit of elutriated bed material in the fire-
tubes, said velocity-reducing means comprising baffle
means in said duct intermediate said bed-retaining wall
and said combustion chamber, said baffle means compris-
ing gas impermeable means spaced from said bed-retaining
wall and having plural, spaced gas flow passages therein
sized and distributed over the baffle means so as to reduce
the flue gas flow velocity downstream of the baffle means
beloW^the maximum terminal velocity of the said bed
materials so as to cause most of the elutriated bed materi-
als to deposit in said combustion chamber and thus be
March 6. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
87
recoverable therefrom, said gas flow passages comprising
a plurality of identical flow passages extending through
said baffle means in which each said flow passage diverges
in the direction of gas flow therethrough, and said baffle
means comprising a wall of bricks at least some of which
each defines one said flow passage therethrough.
4,434,724
OVERBED DISTRIBUTOR FOR FEEDING DUAL SOLID
FUELS TO A STOKER FURNACE
Robert C. Kunkel, Jr., Feeding Hills, Mass., assignor to Com-
bustion Engineering, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
FUed Apr. 1, 1983, Ser. No. 481,214
Int a.i F23H 11/00: F23K 3/16
U.S. a. 110—269 4 Claims
4,434,725
MASS BURNING SELF-CLEANING INCINERATOR
SMBod Foresto, 243 WUIIs Ate., Mioeola, N.Y. 11501
DirisioB of Ser. No. 348,977, Feb. 16, 1982, Pat No. 4,366,759.
nis awUeatloB Aig. 13, 1982, S«r. No. 407,813
lat a? P23G 5/04
\}S. CL 110—346 6 Cbdu
1. The method of burning mass amounts of refuse in an
incinerator comprising conveying refuse to a plurality of rotat-
ing refuse burning grates arranged spaced one above the other
while applying a fire to the refuse on the grates to bum and
consume the same,
routing the tiers on which refuse is deposited to subject the
refuse thereon continuously to the fire created at the tiers
to bum the same subsequently evenly, spacing the tiers
relative to each other such that the flames of the refuse on
a lower tier cause ignition of refuse on the next higher tier,
; \
.m
7
1. In combination, a fumace for burning coal and cellulose
fuel therein, a traveling grate in the fumace bottom having an
upper run and a lower run, and also having a first end posi-
tioned adjacent a first wall of the fumace, and a second end
located adjacent a second opposite wall of the fumace, a dis-
charge shute located beneath the second end of the traveling
grate through which ashes fall, means for continuously moving
the uppe: run of the grate towards the second wall, first intro-
duction means for introducing coal onto the grate near the first
end, second introduction means for introducing cellulose fuel
onto the grate at a central location, said second introduction
means incldtling a plate positioned above the second end of the
grate, and a plurality of nozzle means supplied with pressur-
ized air, which nozzle means are positioned such that they
blow cellulose fuel supplied to the plate ofTof it onto the grate,
and adjusuble means for the second introduction means, by
means of which the location at which the cellulose fuel is
introduced onto the grate can be varied, said adjusUble means
including means for pivoting the plate so that it can be made to
lie at a greater or lesser angle to the horizontal, and said adjust-
ble means also including means for pivoting the nozzle means,
so that they direct air jets directly at the ceUulose fuel on the
plate, or slightly above the fuel.
providing openings in the grates to enable the heat and fire
from refuse burning on grates below to ignite and bum
refuse on grates above and permitting the bumed refuse
that is consumed and reduced in size to fall to lower grates
for burning and consumption thereat,
and providing for exhaust of the waste gases of combustion
of the refuse from the incinerator to the atmosphere by a
chimney.
4,434,726
FINE PARTICULATE FEED SYSTEM FOR FLUIDIZED
BED FURNACE
Brian C. Jones, Windsor, Conn., assignor to CombustioB Eagi-
neering, Inc., Windsor, Coon.
FUed Dec. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453,543
iBt Qi? F22B 1/00
U.S. a. llfr-347 14 ClaiBi
1. In a fluidized bed fumace of the type having a fumace
chamber with an air distributor plate extending transversely
acrou the chamber dividing the chamber into a combustion
zone in which the fluidized bed, once established, is confined
above the air distributor plate and an air inlet zone below the
air distributor plate, a method of introducing particulate feed
solids including both a coarse fraction and a fine fraction into
the fluidized bed fumace. comprising the steps of:
88
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
(a) passing the coarse fraction directly to the combustion
zone;
(b) establishing a flow of fluidizing air up through the air
distributor plate and combustion zone;
. (c) passing the fme fraction to the air inlet zone;
^ (d) mixing the fine fraction with the fluidizing air in the air
inlet zone; and
(e) passing the mixture of the flne fraction and fluidizing air
up through the air distributor plate thence up through the
the fluidized bed.
8. In a fluidized bed furnace of the type having a furnace
chamber with an air distributor plate extending transversely
across the chamber dividing the chamber into a combustion
zone in which the fluidized bed, once established, is conflned
above the air distributor plate and an air inlet zone below the
air distributor plate a method of introducing particulate feed
solids into the fluidized bed furnace, comprising the steps of:
(a) separating the feed solids into a fme fraction and a coarse
fraction;
(b) passing the coarse fraction directly to the combustion
zone;
(c) establishing a flow of fluidizing air up through the air
distributor plate and combustion zone;
(d) passing the flne fraction to the air inlet zone;
(e) mixing the fme fraction with the fluidizing air in the air
inlet zone; and
(0 passing the mixture of the flne fraction and fluidizing air
up through the air distributor plate thence up through the
fluidized bed.
furnace in said divergent angular relationship to each
other.
4,434,728
ELECTROMAGNETIC PATTERN SELECTOR FOR AN
EMBROIDERY MACHINE
Georg Comploi, Bludenz, Auatria; Roland Heimgartner, Arbon,
Switzerland; Artur Loacker, Goetzis, Austria; Kurt Huber,
Arbon, and Hani Wallimann, Goldach, both of Switzerland,
asaignora to Alctiengesellachaft Adolf Saurer, Arbon, Switzer-
land
FUed Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 345,080
Clainw priority, appUcation Switzerland, Feb. 4, 1981, 731/81
Int. a.3 D05C 11/06
VS. a. 112—84 9 ciaima
4,4M,727
METHOD FOR LOW LOAD OPERATION OF A
COAL-FIRED FURNACE
Michael S. McCartney, Bloomfleld, Conn., assignor to Combus-
tion Engineering, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 270,687, Jon. 4, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 175,093, Aug. 4, 1980,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 29,605, Apr. 13, 1979,
Pat No. 4,252,069. This appUcation Jun. 13, 1983, Ser. No.
503,079
Int CL^ F23K S/02
U.S. a. 110—347 1 Claim
1. A positioning device for a mechanical switching lever
arrangement, especially for an embroidery machine, compris-
ing:
a mechanical switching lever arrangement;
a pawl lever selectively movable stepwise between a first
end position, an intermediate position and a second end
position;
said pawl lever serving for actuating said switching lever
arrangement;
electromagnetic means for liberating said pawl lever in order
to move between said fu-st end position and said intermedi-
ate position; and
mechanical amplifier means for displacing said pawl lever
between said intermediate position and said second end
position.
1. In a pulverized coal-fu-ed furnace equipped with a plural-
ity of individual burners wherein each of the burners provide
a passageway through which a mixture of pulverized coal and
primary air passes into tb^fumace, a method of operating at
least one of said burners, comprising:
a. during operation of the furnace at normal loads, discharg-
ing the mixture of pulverized coal and primary air passing
through said burner into the furnace as a single stream
coal-air stream;
b. during operation of the furnace at low loads, splitting the
mixture of pulverized coal and primary air discharging
from said burner into a first and second coal-air substream;
c. turning at least one of said substreams away from the other
so as to extabUsh a divergent angukr reUtionship between
said first and second coal-air substreams; and
d. directing said first and second coal-air substreams into the
4,434,729
CONTINUOUS MONOGRAMMER
Donald R. Daiidson, Berkeley Heights, N J., assignor to The
Singer Company, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 221,098
Int a.3 D05B 21/00
VS. a. 112—121.12 5 Claims
1. A work manipulating mechanism for use with a sewing
machine having a frame supporting a presser bar, a needle bar,
a sewing needle supported on the end of said needle bar, means
for supporting said needle bar for endwise reciprocation, actu-
ating means for implementing endwise reciprocation of said
needle bar, said frame including a work supporting bed; and an
electronic control means for storing signals related to posi-
tional coordinates for patterns and monograms, said mecha-
nism comprising:
first means responsive to said signals from said electronic
control means for selectively feeding work material in
unlimited amount along one axis intermittent generation
of stitches; and.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
89
second means responsive to said signals from said electronic
control means for selectively moving said first means
4,434,731
ARRANGEMENT FOR SEWING SEPARATE
SUCCESSIVE SEAMS ALONG DIFFERENT DIRECnONS
IN A FABRIC MATERIAL
Alfons Bcislcr, Goldbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Bcisler GeseUschaft mit beschrtnktcr Haftung, Goldbach,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 190,237, Sep. 24, 1980, Pat No.
4,318,356. This appUcation Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,704
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 27,
1979, 2939238
Int. a.} D05B 3/00
VS. a. 112—121.14 / 30 Claims
along an iixis substantially orthogonal to said one axis
intermittent generation of said stiches.
4,434,730
MACHINE FOR TOP STITCHING
John A. Rose, Knaresborough, and Keith Dyer, Leeds, both of
EngUmd, assignors to AMF Tncorporated, White Plains, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 187^6, Sep. IS, 1980, Pat. No. 4,362,115.
This appUcation Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,568
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Sep. 14, 1979,
7931892
Int a.3 D05B 21/00
VS. a. 112—121.12 6 Claims
A _
1. An arrangement for sewing seams along n successive
edges of a material which extend in different directions, n
being an integer not less than two, the arrangement compris-
ing:
a fixedly positioned sewing table defining an opening for
supporting the material thereon;
sewing means including first means extending below said
table and second means extending above said table, said
second means including a sewing needle;
rotatable support means for supporting said sewing means
and responsive to a rotation command signal for rotating
said sewing means from one selected position to another
about a vertical axis of rotation through which said needle
extends;
drive means for activating said sewing means to sew a seam
in said material with said needle; and
control means for controlling the sewing of said seams along
said n successive edges by deactivating said drive means
when one seam is fmished and thereafter supplying said
rotation command signal to cause said sewing means to be
rotated until a subsequent edge is aligned with respect to
said needle and for reactivating said drive means to cause
said sewing means to sew a subsequent seam.
1. Apparatus for the production in a sheet material of a line
of machine stitching having a change of direction therein
comprising a sewing machine, means for moving the material
through the machine to produce a first portion of stitching line
therein, means for sensing and controlling the production of
the line of stitching, means for reducing the rate of movement
of material through the machine and means for effecting an
action on the underside of the material thereby turning the
material substantially in its own plane and reducing the friction
of the turning material untU it is sensed to have reached the
change of direction of the stitch line, and means for increasing
the rate of movement of material through the machine to the
original rate of movement to produce a second portion of
stitching line along the changed direction.
4,434,732
OPERATION CONTROLLER FOR AN ELECTRONIC
SEWING MACHINE
Edward A. Salge, ParUn, and Leonard I. Horey, West Orange,
both of N J., assignors to The Singer Company, Stamford,
Conn.
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,290
Int a.' D05B 3/02
VS. a. 112—158 E 13 Claims
1. In an electronically controlled sewing machine having
sewing instrumentalities for sewing a plurality of different
stitch patterns, said sewing machine including a rotatable arm-
shaft, signal means associated with said rotatable armshaft for
providing a bight signal and a feed signal in timed relation to
said sewing instrumentalities, panel selection means responsive
to operator influence for selecting a pattern from said plurality
of stitch patterns, and a microcomputer including a memory:
1040 O.G.
90
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
control means including a set of coded instructions that are
stored in said memory and executable by said microcom-
puter for controlling the operation of said sewing ma-
chine, said controlling occurring in a first mode of execu-
tion of said microcomputer and in a second mode of exe-
desired pattern to be produced on the machine; linkage means
operably connected to the pivoted member for imparting side
to side movement to a needle bar; the operable connection
between the linkage means and said pivoted member including
a pin, and including a slot wherein the pin is adjusUble for
changing the amplitude of side to side movement of the needle
bar in response to movement of the pivoted member, the slot
including an enlarged one end portion where the pin may be
disposed to disengage the linkage means and pivoted member;
means for confining the pin in said enlarged one end portion of
the slot to thereby define a particular side position of the nee-
dle bar; and means movable by an operator for positioning the
pin in said slot.
turn aun (••fcjrti .( wMaiM
9^*M IMafcl MTHM ■•«••
•■• "•» a»'M *««C)«in Lit
jj. . jT'
Ktt
4,434734
ANTI-SPILL DEVICE FOR SEWING MACHINE BOBBIN
Angus R. T. RosKll, EogUahtown, N J., iMigiior to The Singer
Company, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,467
Int a.} D05B 57/26
UA a 112-181 4Ctatai«
MM ■••• iiM> I
IL
aranr
r?»r
■ ■Tf W*C TIIIW TW|»T
■•■CI itt CM, w carnvf «•
■ •' IWIIIT
JWiuM' -mnami^*
•(tMrvc Mat nn • gmtmi ,
«catM» ■'•?«■ •• ■^■a ■(•»■•«■
cution of said microcomputer wherein said first mode of
execution is effective continuously except for predeter-
mined interruptions and said second mode of execution is
effective only during said predetermined interruptions,
said interruptions being effected in response to said bight
signal and said feed signal.
4434733
BIGHT AND NEEDLE FOsfnONING CONTROL FOR
SEWING MACHINES
Wflliun Weliz, Tenafly, N J., anigi^r to The Singer Compuiy,
Stanford, Conn.
FUed Jan. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 46M26
Int CL^ D05B i/02
U.S. a 112-158 A 9 Claim.
1. A bobbin case device for a looptaker of a sewing machine,
said sewing machine supporting an endwise reciprocating
needle bar carrying a needle in the end thereof for cooperation
with said looptaker in the formation of stitches, said bobbin
case device comprising a bobbin case for receiving a thread
carrying bobbin with at least one circular flange having a outer
face; means support on said bobbin case for tensioning of bob-
bin thread; means on said bobbin case for establishing a direct
bobbin thread patch extending substantially from said tension-
ing means across said bobbin case device spaced from said
outer face of said circular flange of said thread carrying bob-
bin; said bobbin case further supporting thereon a leaf spring
having a first end connected thereto and a second end disposed
adjacent said bobbin thread path in pressure engagement with
said outer face of said flange of said thread carrying bobbin;
and means carried by said second end of said leaf spring for
receiving said bobbin thread to form with said establishing
means an indirect bobbin thread path responsive to bobbin
thread demand for removing pressure from said pressure en-
gagement of said second end with said outer face of said flange
whereby bobbin rotation is uninhibited and responsive to ab-
sence of bobbin thread demand to release said second end into
pressure engagement with said outer face of said flange to
inhibit rotation of said bobbin.
1. Bight controlling and needle positioning mechanism for a
sewing machine including a pivoted member; means for prede-
tenninmg pivotal movement of said member according to a
4,434,735
MOnON CONVERSION MECHANISM FOR
EFFECTING SEWING MACHINE FEED DOG CONTROL
Nicolo GioUtti, Ima, Italy, anignor to VigoreUi G«iio?a S.pJi^
GcooTa-Settri, Ita^
Filed No?. 12, 1981, Sv. No. 320,658
Ciains priority, appUortiM Italy, Dae. 9, 1980, 68868 A/80
lit CL^ D05B 69/02
VS. CL 112—220 17 n.i—
1. A sewing machine (1) comprising a motion conversion
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
91
mechanism (10) which receives movement signals generated
by a decoder unit (11) situated in said machine (1), and is
provided with a first element (12) arranged to assume a plural-
ity of working positions, and a second element (13) arranged to
assume a first or a second working position, said mechanism
(10) being arranged to convert said movement signals into
movement of a dog (7) for feeding the fabric (130) in such a
manner as to cause said fabric (130) to undergo a movement,
the extent of which depends on which position has been as-
sumed by said first element (12), and which is in either a for-
ward or backward direction depending upon whether said first
or second working position has been assumed by said second
element (13), characterized in that said motion conversion
mechanism (10) comprises:
ing, the washer also including downwardly extending prongs
engageable with the wing nut for limiting the extent to which
MM
a plurality of levers (18) equal in number to the number of
said plurality of working positions which- can be assumed
by said first element (12), each lever (18) being arranged to
assume a rest position or a working position;
a selector unit (23) controlled by said first element (12) and
arranged to select one of said levers (18) and to move said
selected lever (18) into said working position;
a member (50) angularly coupled to a control shaft (9) for
said dog (7) and arranged to be prepositioned in a prede-
termined angular position by said selected lever (18); and
a dragging element (42) controlled by said second element
(13) of said decoder unit (11) and arranged to engage said
member (50) in such a manner as to move this latter from
said predetermined angular position towards an angular
reference position.
4,434,736
STRAIN CONTROLLED SEWING MACHINE MOUNT
Jan Szoftak, Lincroft, and Albert L. Newman, West Orange,
both of N J., aaaignors to The Singer Company, Stamford,
Conn.
FUed Jan. 17, 1983, Ser. No. 458,425
Int a^ D05B 75/00
VS. a 112-258 ^ Ctalma
1. In combination, a sewing nuchine including a frame with
a depending threaded stud attached thereto; a platform with a
top surface upon which the machine is supportable in a sewing
machine cabinet; a second stud detachably secured to the first
mentioned stud and extending through a hole in the platform,
said second stud including a threaded portion which projects
beyond the bottom surface of the platform; a wing nut on the
threaded portion of the second stud; a coil spring on the second
stud compressed by the wing nut; and a washer on the second
stud forced against the bottom surface of the platform by the
spring, the washer including upwardly extending prongs
which dig into the platform to prevent the washer from tum-
the wing nut can be tightened on the second stud as the wing
nut is turned to affix the sewing machine to the platform.
4,434,737
4 DISPLACEMENT, PLANING SAILBOARD
eiia, Weit Babylon, N. Y., aaiignor to Wind Innovatioas,
Inc., Cutchogne, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302^30
lot a.^ B63B 1/16. 1/04
VS. CL 114—39 5 Claina
1. A hull for a sailboard, of a length exceeding 6 times iu
maximum beam, equipped with mast sockets, centerboard slot,
and skeg and having an improved shape for use as a displace-
ment-type hull in light winds and as a planing-type hull in
strong winds, comprising:
a forward portion having a deep forefoot, a fme entry and a
shape suitable for easy forward movement through water
at low speed;
a middle portion of substantially round underwater cross-
section;
an aft portion of flat bottom terminating at a wide stem and
merging into said middle portion;
a longitudinal profile having not more than a small rise
between said middle portion and the forefoot profile
curve and having a substantial rise, between said midpor-
tion and said stem, which is at leut four times the rise
between said middle portion and said forefoot profile
curve, so that a long substantially flat bottom area is pro-
vided for said aft portion which comes closer to the deck
surface towards the stem,
whereby a forward weight shift of the saUor enables selec-
tion of an efficient displacement-type behavior of the hull
and, in the event of sufficient wind force, an aft weight
shift of the sailor enables selection of an efficient planing
behavior.
92
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,434,738
RUDDER FOR WATERCRAFT
Wolfgang K. W. Bvkemeyer, Reinbek, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
aarignor to Jaatram-Werke GmbH A Co. KG, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 338,924
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 15,
1981, 3101042; Nov. 20, 1981, 8133822[U]
Int a.i B63H 25/06
UA a. 114—162 5 Claims
an actuating and control system comprising first control means
operative to effect deflection of said main rudder member
relative to said marine craft and second control means ppera-
tive to effect deflection of said fin member relative to said main
rudder member; said first control means being capable of ef-
fecting deflection of said main rudder member relative to said
marine craft independently of said second control means; said
IHo
1. A rudder for a watercraft comprising a main rudder mem-
ber; a hollow rudder shaft adapted to attach said main rudder
member to a watercraft for pivotal movement of said main
rudder member about a vertical axis with respect to the water-
craft; a fin member; means for attaching said fin member to said
main rudder member for pivotal movement of said fin member
about a vertical axis with respect to said main rudder member;
a pivotal yoke member attached to said hollow rudder shaft;
means for pivoting said yoke member with respect to the
watercraft; a torsion bar passing through said hollow rudder
shaft and having a first end and a second end; means coupling
said torsion bar first end to said fin member for pivoting of said
fm member in response to twisting of said torsion bar; means
coupled to said torsion bar second end for twisting said torsion
bar; a first blocking member adapted for attachment to the
watercraft; a second blocking member attached to said yoke
member; and a locking member movable between a first lock-
ing position, in which said torsion bar is locked to said first
blocking member permitting pivoting of said fin member with
respect to said main rudder member, and a second locking
position, in which said torsion bar is locked to said second
blocking member preventing pivoting of said fin member with
respect to said main rudder member.
second control means being effective to effect deflection of
said fin member relative to said main rudder member indepen-
dently of said first control means, said first and second control
means being operative, respectively, to effect deflection of said
main rudder member and said fm member simultaneously to
enable simultaneous and independent control of said main
rudder member and said fin member during normal operation
of said rudder assembly.
4,434 740
wind-scoopVor small boats
John M. ChUds, 13031 Deva St., Coral Gables, Fla. 33156
FUed May 5, 1983, Ser. No. 491,802
Int. a J B63B 19/06; B63J 2/02
VS. a. 114-211 4 ctoima
4,434 739
FIN Rudder' FOR ships
Joachim Brix, Hamburg, and Friedrich Weiss, Ahrensburg, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Jastram-Werke GmbH
KG, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Gcnnaay
CoDtinnadoa of Ser. No. 100,545, Dec. 5, 1979, Pat No.
4,342,275, which is a contlnwrtloa of Ser. No. 860,605, Dec. 14,
1977, abandoned. This appUcatlon Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No.
363,489
Claims priority, appUcatlon Fed. Rep. of Gcnnany. Dec. 15.
1976, 2656738; Not. 11, 1977, 2750437
Int CL^ B63H 25/06
UA a 114-162 7 Claims
1. A rudder assembly for marine craft comprising: a main
rudder member pivotally coupled to said marine craft for
deflection relative thereto; a fin member pivotally coupled to
said inain rudder member for deflection relative thereto; and
1. A collapsible wind-scoop for releasable attachment over a
through opening in the deck of a small boat comprising, in
combination, a resilient framework of symmetrical dome-
shaped configuration, said framework having an apex at the
upper end thereof and a base portion at the lower end thereof,
a flexible cover member shaped to fit over and confirm with
said resilient framework, between said upper and lower ends
thereof, one half-section of said cover member defined by a
plane including the axis of symmetry of said resilient frame-
work and being not air permeable and the other half-section
being air permeable, and means at the lower end of said dome-
shaped framework for releasable attachment with respect to
marginal edge portions of a boat deck opening, said resiUent
framework comprising a pair of bent wire members substan-
tially symmetrical about an axis of generation and crossing at
their apices, and means for releasably inter-securing said bent
March 6, 1984.
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
93
wire members at their apices, said releasable attachment means
comprising radially outwardly open hook portions bent in the
ends of said wire members.
4,434,741
ARCTIC BARGE DRILLING UNTT
Brian D. Wright; Raymond A. McBeth, both of Calgary, Can-
ada, and Egon Weasels, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Gulf Canada Limited, Toronto
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,252
Int a.3 B63B 35/08; E02B 15/02
VS. a. 114—264 4 Claims
4,434,742
INSTALLATION FOR DEPOSITING THIN LAYERS IN
THE REACTIVE VAPOR PHASE
Louis Henaf^ Michel Morel, both of Pen an Alle, and Jean L.
Favennec 16, cite du Valloa • St Quay Perroi, all of 22700
PemNkGulrec, France
FUed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,434
Int a.J C23C 13/08
VS. a. 118—723 3 Claims
1. In a marine drilling unit of the floating barge type, with
draft no greater than 20 meters for operation in ice-covered
water, having a working deck to accommodate drilling equip-
ment, a marine hull to support said deck, a central moonpool
penetrating the deck and hull to accommodate a marine drill-
pipe, and mooring lines attached at their top to said unit via the
bottom of said hull and at their bottoms to anchors surrounding
said unit at some distance, the improvements which comprise:
(i) a hull having
(a) a substantially circular polygonal perimeter in plan
view,
(b) a matching first polygonal wall substantially in the
form of an apexdown truncated cone extending from
below the deck, at an angle to the horizontal of from
substantially 20 degrees to substantially SS degrees, to a
level at least below the normal bottom level of ice
impinging against the hull,
(c) a second matching polygonal wall substantially in the
form of an apexdown truncated cone extending from
and below said first wall, at an angle to the horizontal
from at least as great as the angle of the first polygonal
wall to substantially 63 degrees, to a level below the
bottom of the first by a distance at least as great as the
thickness of ice impinging against the hull,
(d) a matching third polygonal wall substantially in the
form of a cylinder extending substantially vertically
from and below said second wall for a distance at least
as great as the normal thickness of ice impinging against
the hull.
(e) a matching polygonal deflector wall substantially in
the form of an apex-up truncated cone extending from
and below said third wall, at an angle to the horizontal
of from substantially 20 degrees to substantially 65
degrees, to a level below the bottom of said third wall
by a distance at least as great as the normal thickness of
ice impinging against the hull, and
(0 a substantially flat annular bottom closing said deflec-
tor wall surrounding said moonpool; and
(ii) a substantiaUy circular guard member secured to the flat
bottom of said hull, surrounding the pointt at which the
mooring lines achieve their closest proximity to the bot-
tom of the hull, and extending below the flat bottom of the
hull for a distance to place the lowest edge of said member
at a depth below the water surface at least five times the
normal tliickness of ice impinging against the hull and not
greater than 20 meters.
1. An installation for the deposition of thin layers in reactive
vapour phase, comprising a tightly sealed enclosure, means for
introducing into the enclosure a gas having an appropriate
composition, means for introducing into the same enclosure a
high frequency field able to form a plasma, and a sample
holder, the gas and high frequency introduction means being
brought together in a head comprising a coaxial conductor
able to propagate the high frequency field, said conductor
entering the enclosure by a tight passage and being constituted
by an outer sheath and a hoUow inner core connected to gas
supply means, further comprising a chamber constituted by a
cylinder having openings along one generatrix, said cylinder
being closed by two end covers, the core being linked with the
chamber by a gas distribution tube located within the cylinder,
the outer sheath of the conductor being connected to a meul
skirt surrounding the chamber, whilst the sample holder is
positioned beneath the row of openings, and wherein means
are provided to permit a relative displacement of the sample
holder with respect to the-head in a direction perpendicular to
the row of openings.
4,434,743
SHEIXnSH MARICULTURE APPARATUS
WUUam F. Nickel, R.F.D. 1 Box 262, Melf^ Va. 23410
Continuation-in>part of Ser. No. 208,464, Not. 19, 1980, Pat
No. 4,328,764. This appUcatlon May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,652
Int a.J AOIK 61/00
U.S. a. 119-4 12 ClaiiM
1. A sheUfish mariculture apparatus for nurturing clams,
94
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
oysters, scallops and the like from an infantile seed stage to
commercial maturity, said apparatus comprising:
frame means operable to be positioned within an aquatic
environment;
envelope means positioned upon said frame means and being
generally coextensive therewith for enhousing shellfish
during a narturing period, said envelope means including
a sleeve of open mesh material operable to be laid laterally
upon said frame means and having a lower portion
supported by said frame means,
said sleeve being operably closed at the ends thereof and
the interstices of said open mesh material being smaller
than the infantile shellfish to be nurtured within said
envelope means;
means operably contacting an upper portion of said sleeve
means for elevating the upper portion of said sleeve means
above a lower portion thereof; and
means positionable upon the bed of a body of water and
being operable to receive said frame means and support
said frame means and envelope means above the bed of the
body of water.
(ii) permitting the birds to access the opening in the con-
tainer, and
(iii) providing a perch for the birds accessing the openings
in the container; and
4,434,744
METHODS OF AND/OR APPARATUS FOR MILKING
ANIMALS
Thomas D. Millar, HamUtoo, New Zealand, assignor to AHI
Operations Limited, Manukau, New Zealand
FUed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,570
Int a.^ AOIJ 5/04
UA a 119-14.02 WCialBtt
15. A method for minimizing backflow of fluid in a inilking
claw having a claw body including a common chamber for
receivmg milk from a cluster of teat cups and a plurality of
milk-receiving chambers interposed between said teat cups and
said common chamber for receiving milk from said teat cups
and distributing received milk to said common chamber, said
method comprising creating a vortex in the fluid within said
common chamber sufficient to counteract back pressure on the
fluid within the common chamber exerted by the presence of a
pressure differential between the claw body and at least one of
the teat cups..
4,434,745
BIRD FEEDING DEVICE
NoeJ Perkins, R.FJ). #1, Northwood, NJI. 03261, and nomas
Perkins, 5 Tocker St, Gloucester, Mass. 01930
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,315
Int CL^ AOIK 5/00
UA CL 119-51 R ,1 ciMimM
8. An apparatus for holding bird food, such as seed, which
can be accessed by birds, and not by squirrels, said apparatus
comprising:
(a) a cylindrical container for holding birds food having a
plurality of spaced apart openings therein through which
birds ouy access the bird food;
(b) a wire mesh enclosing said container, said mesh
(i) preventing access of the container by squirrels,
(c) means for supporting said container within said wire
mesh and for spacing said wire mesh away from said
container such that said wire mesh is not directly in
contact with the container whereby squirrels are pre-
vented from accessing the container.
4,434,746
CONTROL OF A SYSTEM FOR SUPPLYING HEAT
WiUlam S. Stewart BartlesriUe, Okla., assignor to Phillips
Petroleum Company, Bartlcsville, Okla.
FUed Mar. 4, 1983, Ser. No. 472,398
Int a.3 F22B 37/42
UA a 122-448 R ,g cialma
k.
I 111
I ill
»-l n-A i I
! Ill
I
^W r,
JHEvr„:--
-^"r^
L^l^
1. Apparatus comprising:
a heater;
means for passing a fluid stream through said heater;
means for supplying a fuel to said heater, wherein the com-
bustion of said fuel in a combustion zone in said heater
supplies heat to said fluid stream;
a first control valve operably located so as to manipulate the
total flow of the effluent stream from said heater;
a second control valve operably located so as to nuuiipulate
the flow of a first portion of said effluent stream to a first
process, wherein said first portion of said effluent stream
flowing through said second control valve supplies heat to
said first process;
a third control valve operably located so as to manipulate
the flow of a second portion of said effluent stream to a
second process, wherein said second portion of said efflu-
ent stream flowing through said third control valve
supplies heat to said second process;
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
95
means for establishing a first signal representative of the
position of said first control valve;
means for establishing a second signal representative of the
position of said second control valve;
means for establishing a third signal representative of the
position of said third control valve;
a first high select means;
means for providing said first signal, said second signal and
said third signal to said first high select means, wherein
said first high select means establishes a fourth signal
representative of the one of said first, second and third
signals which is representative of the most open valve
position;
means for establishing a fifth signal representative of the
maximum desired open position for any one of said first,
second and third control valves;
means for comparing said fourth signal and said fifth signal
and for establishing a sixth signal which is responsive to
the difference between said fourth signal and said fifth
signal;
means for establishing a seventh signal, representative of the
flow rate of said fuel required to maintain the position of
at least one of said first, second and third control valves
substantially equal to the maximum desired valve opening
represented by said fifth signal, in response to said sixth
signal;
means for manipulating the flow rate of said fuel to said
heater in response to said seventh signal;
means for establishing an eighth signal representative of the
total heat required by said first and second processes plus
any desired reserve heat;
means for establishing a ninth signal, representative of the
flow rate of said effluent stream through said first control
valve required to provide the total heat represented by
said eighth signal, in response to said eighth signal; and
means for manipulating said first control valve in response to
said ninth signal.
\
4,434,747
BURNER-TILT DRIVE APPARATUS FOR A
PULVERIZED COAL FIKED STEAM GENERATOR
Roman Chadshay, Windsor, Conn., assignor to Combustion
Engineering, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
FUed Jul. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 393,288
Int. a.3 F22B 37/42; F22D 5/00
VS. Q. 122—449 1 Claim
single nozzle coal buckets; an apparatus for adjusting the verti-
cal orientation of the upper and lower coal nozzles of said low
load fuel-air admission assembly and the single nozzle coal
buckets of the remaining fuel-air admission assemblies compris-
ing:
a. first tilt linkage means interconnecting the upper coal
nozzles of each low load fuel-air admission assembly dis-
posed in said windbox and each single nozzle coal bucket
disposed in said windbox; 4
b. second tilt linkage means interconnecting the lower coal
nozzles of each low load fuel-air admission assembly dis-
posed in said windbox;
c. link bar means interconnected between said first tilt link-
age means and said second tilt linkage means, said link bar
means being of selectively adjustable length;
d. a pneumatic cylinder having an axially movable piston
enclosed in an axially elongated cylindrical housing inter-
disposed in said link bar means between said first and
second tilt linkage means, the piston dividing the interior
of said cylindrical housing into a first chamber on one side
of the piston and a second chamber on the opposite side of
the piston;
e. first conduit means in fluid communication with the first
chamber through which pneumatic fluid may be supplied
to and vented from the first chamber; and
f. second conduit means in fluid communication with, the
second chamber through which pneumatic fluid may be
supplied to and vented from the second chamber;
g. a first tilt actuation means for actuating said first ti|t link-
age means so as to tilt the upper coal nozzle of said low
load fuel-air admission assemblies in unison with the single
nozzle coal buckets of the remaining fuel-air admission
assemblies; and
h. a second tilt actuation means comprising control valve
means operatively associated with said first and second
conduit means for selectively controlling the piston pneu-
matic fluid flow between the first and second chambers so
as to cause the piston to be displaced axially within said
cylindrical housing thereby lengthening or shortening said
link bar means interconnecting said first tilt linkage means
with said second tilt linkage means.
1. In a pulverized coal-fired steam generator having a gener-
ally vertical furnace and a plurality of fuel-air admission assem-
blies arrayed in a vertical windbox in at least one wall of the
furnace for introducing coal and air into the furnace, at least
one of said fiiel-air admission assemblies being a low load
fuel-air admission assembly having a split coal bucket having
vertically adjustable upper and lower coal nozzles, the remain-
ing fiiel-air admission assemblies having vertically adjustable
4.434,748
WATER INJECTION CONTROL VALVE
Bernard C. Smelser, 12812 New Windsor Rd., Union Bridge,
Md. 21791
FUed Apr. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 372,303
Int CLJ P02M 25/02; P02D 79/00
U.S. a. 123—25 L 5 Claims
1. In a water admission system for a combustion engine
having a fuel charge induction passage subject to pretture
variations as a result of engine demand variations, a water
delivery valve means including a driver connected with said
induction passage, and cooperative water delivery means cou-
pled to the valve means and including a connection with the
induction passage and operable to deliver varying amounu of
water from a reservoir to the induction passage is response to
varying engine demand for fuel through the induction passage,
96
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
said valve means further comprising a three-way valve includ-
ing a water inlet passage, a bypass passage, and a water deliv-
ery passage communicating with said water delivery means, a
biased shiftable valve element normally blocking coinmunica-
tion between the water inlet and delivery passages and estab-
lishing communication between the water inlet and bypass
passages, said water delivery means including delivery nozzle
means connected in said induction passage, the water delivery
passage being in communication with said delivery nozzle, and
said driver comprising a pressure responsive element in a
chamber of said valve connected with said induction passage
and acting directly on the shiftable valve element to move it
against a biasing force for such element varying distances as
engine demand varies.
4^434 749
CX)OLING SYSTEM FOR UQUID-COOLED INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Yasuyuki Morita; Katsuhiko Yokooku; Hideo Shiraishi, and
Masahiko Matsnura, aU of Hiroshima, Japan, assignors to
Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd., Hiroshima, Japan
FUed Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 361,340
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 25, 1981, 56-44471:
Mar. 27, 1981, 56-45740
Int. a.3 POIP 7/16
UACL 123-41.02 6 Claims
longitudinal axis of said base member, said intermediate
member further including a second end portion; and
a top stack member including a hollow cylindrical portion
having a port therethrough between the ends thereof and
a cylindrical extension secured thereto about said port,
said top stack member including a first tapered end por-
tion seated within and connected to said second end por-
tion of said intermediate member so that said cylindrical
extension extends from said top stack member at a second
predetermined angle in relation to said axis of said base
member.
4,434,751
ROTARY PISTON ENGINE
Ivan PaTindc, 28 Glenn a.. East Rutherford, N.J. 07073
FUed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,801
lot a.3 F02B 57/06
U.S. a 123-43 B 10 Claims
1. A cooling system for a liquid-cooled internal combustion
engine comprising cooling liquid passage means having cool-
ing hquid jacket means provided in the engine for passing
coohng liquid therethrough, cooling liquid pump means pro-
vided in said passage means for circulating the cooling liquid
through said passage means and said jacket means, electrically
operated driving motor means for driving said pump means so
that the total amount of the cooling liquid circulated through
the passage means and the jacket means is pumped by said
pump means, engine temperature sensing means for sensing
engine temperature and producing an engine temperature
signal, control means adapted to receive the engine tempera-
ture signal and control said driving means so that the operating
speed of the pump means is decreased, when the engine tem-
perature is below a first predetermined value, to a predeter-
mined low speed which is lower than a normal operating
speed.
4,434,750
THERMOSTAT HOUSING ASSEMBLY
K«rl R. Edelmann, 1468 Chestnat L«^ Rochester, Mich. 48063
FUed Aug. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 404,463
Int a.J POIP 7/16
UA a. 123-41.02 13 Claims
1. A thermostat housing assembly comprising:
a base member including a hollow tubular portion having a
longitudinal axis and a first end opening disposed substan-
tially on said axis and a second end opening offset from
said axis at a predetermined angle;
an intermediate member including a body portion and a first
end portion in mating engagement with and connected to
said second opening so that said intermediate member is
disposed at said predetermined angle in relation to said
26 97 103
1. A rotary piston engine comprising:
a rotatable annular cylinder coupled to a first shaft for rota-
tion about the longitudinal axis of the engine, said annular
cylinder having at least two combustion chambers with
inlet and exit ports respectively;
at least two piston elements, each being slidably mounted in
a separate one of said combustion chambers;
a connecting rod mounted upon a second shaft coaxial to
said first shaft for concentric rotation about said longitudi-
nal axis, said connecting rod having opposite ends affixed
to each of said piston elements for rotating the piston
elements conjointly with roution of said second shaft;
a third shaft supported for rotation about a main axis eccen-
trically displaced a predetermined distance from the longi-
tudinal axis of the engine; and
linkage means for controlling oscillatory motion between
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
f7
said piston elements and said rotating annular cylinder,
said linkage means comprising:
a cross connecting arm transversely mounted upon said
third shaft;
a first cross arm integral with said first shaft;
a second cross arm integral with said second shaft, with
said first and second cross arms being mounted in com-
mon on one side of said cross connecting arm; and
means for linking one end of said cross connecting arm to
said first cross arm and the opposite end of said cross
connecting arm to said second cross arms such that said
first and second cross arm will angularly rotate relative
to one another during each revolution of the annular
cylinder with a maximum angular displacement there-
between of less than 1 80 degrees.
4,434,752
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
William V. Bachmann, 22517 Ten Mile Rd., St. Clair Shores,
Mich. 48080
FUed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,340
Int. a.3 F02B 75/ li
U.S. a. 123^50 B 75 Claims
*«~j»^<?
1. An internal combustion engine, comprising an engine
housing, an annular cylinder formed in said housing, said annu-
lar cylinder comprising a first radially inner annular wall and a
second radially outer annular wall, a stationary axial end sur-
face means operatively joined to said first radially inner annu-
lar wall, a ring-like piston received in said annular cylinder for
reciprocating movement therein, motion transmitting means
operatively connected to said ring-like piston for transmitting
the reciprocating movement of said ring-like piston to associ-
ated power output means, work combustion chamber means,
said work combustion chamber means comprising a first ring-
Xt work combustion chamber defined generally and coopera-
tively by said inner and outer annular walls and said piston,
said work combustion chamber means further comprising a
3nd work combustion chamber situated generally axially of
said first ring-like work combustion chamber, said first and
second work combustion chambers being in continuous open
communication with each other and effective for receiving a
combustible mixture therein, said ring-like piston when mov-
ing in a direction toward its top-dead-center position being
effective for simultaneously compressing said combustible
mixture within both of said first and second work combustion
chambers, said second work combustion chamber being of
unexpandable volume and in part defined by said stationary
axial end surface means, means for initiating ignition of said
combustible mixture first within said second work combustion
chamber and only thereafter causing ignition of said combusti-
ble mixture to travel from said second work combustion cham-
ber to Within said first work combustion chamber to thereby
through such combustion and expansion of said combustible
mixture collectively within both said first and second work
combustion chambers produce a work pressure against said
ring-like piston in order to move said ring-like piston toward its
bottom-dead-center, and annular passage means generally
peripherally about said second work combustion chamber for
completing said continuous communication, wherein said an-
nular passage means is peripherally continuous about said
second work combustion chamber, wherein said radially inner
annular wall is fixedly supported by a bearing riser portion to
said engine housing.
4,434,753
IGNITION APPARATUS FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Shinichi Mukainakano; TadasM Hattori; Minoni NUhida, all of
Okazaki; Tom Mizuno, Aichi, and Tukasa Goto, Kariya, aU of
Japan, assignors to Nippon Soken, Inc., Nishio and Nippon-
denso Co., Ltd., Kariya, both of, Japan *
FUed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 378,717
Chdms priority, application Japan, May 18, 1981, 56-75325;
Oct. 29, 1981, 56-173934
Int. a.' F02B 45 /OS, 23/00; F02P 23/04. I/OO
U.S. a. 123—143 B 13 Claims
i>
"22
1. An ignition apparatus for an internal combustion engine
having a combustion chamber, comprising:
means for supplying a mixture of air and fuel into said combus-
tion chamber,
means having an end thereof opening into said combustion
chamber for supplying minute particles of a material which
is not the fuel and has a high light absorption factor, and
means for radiating a light beam toward a suitably selected
position in the internal space of said combustion chamber so
that the light beam can strike said minute particles of high
light absorption factor supplied from said particle supplying
means.
4,434,754
METHOD OF ON SITE CHARGING OF DISTRIBUTOR
MAGNET
Darid H. Fox, Ann Arbor; Charles C. Kostan, Canton Township,
Plymouth County, and Frank B. Casaccli, Mt Clemens, aU of
Mich., assignors to Ford Motor Company, Dearborn, Mich.
PCT No. PCrAJS82/01168, § 371 Date Aug. 27, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 27, 1962
per FUed Aug. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 432,887
Int. a.5 P02P 7/Oa- H02K 11/00
U.S. a. 123—146.5 A 8 Claims
1. A method for orienting a distributor on an internal com-
bustion engine so as to produce an electrical signal in synchro-
nism with the periodic movement of an engine part, said
method comprising the stesp of:
coupling a magnetizable material to the camshaft of the
internal combustion engine;
establishing a sensor reference point on the engine, said
98
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
reference point being stationary with respect to the engine
block;
poutioning the pistons of the engine and the coupled magne-
tizable material in a known position, with respect to said
reference point; and
y">
4,434,755
MOTORCYCLE WITH CLOSEABLE ENGINE INTAKE
AND EXHAUST PASSAGES
Hiaaahi Kazuta, Iwata; Yasunari Kawai, Hamamatsu, and Naoki
Tsuchida, Iwata, all of Japan, assignors to Yamaha Hatsudoki
KabasUki Kaisha, Iwata, Japan
FUed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,634
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 26, 1980, 55-189084
Int. a.3 P02B 77/00
U.S. a 123-195 C 6 Claims
1. In a motorcycle or the like having an internal combustion
engine having a combustion chamber, an induction system for
said engine having a charge forming device for delivering a
fuel air charge to said combustion chamber and an air inlet
upstream of said charge forming device, and an exhaust system
leading from said combustion chamber and terminating in an
outlet that communicates with the atmosphere, the improve-
ment comprising valve means contiguous to said inlet and said
outiet for closing the communication of said induction system
and said exhaust system with the atmosphere.
4*434,756
ARRANGEMENT FOR BEARING OF A CRANKSHAFT
Ralph L. NilMOii, Hindaa, and Bo R. Raogert, Mdlnlycke, both
of Sweden, aMignon to EMAB Elcctrolnx Motor Aktiebolag,
Huakraraa, Sweden
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,737
Claima priority, appUcatkw Sweden, Jon. 16, 1981, 8103766
lat Ct' F16C 27/00
MS. CL 123-195 R 9 claims
1. An engine having a cylinder defining the upper portion of
a crankcase, a piston reciprocably positioneib in the cylinder
and coupled to a crankshaft, a separate plastic crankcase lower
portion, means for mounting said lower portion below said
upper portion, and bearings for the crankshaft held between
the upper and lower portions of the crankcase, and sleeve
members of high temperature resistant plastic material over
said bearings, sandwiched between said bearings and said
inducing magnetic poles in said magnetizable material so
that said magnetic poles have a known routional relation-
ship to said reference point.
upper and lower portions and separating said bearings from
said upper and lower portions, said upper and lower crankcase
portions having bearing seats for receiving said sleeve mem-
bers, said mounting means pressing said sleeve members into
said bearing seats, said sleeve members extending from said
bearings to completely separate said crankcase portions.
4,434,757
ROTARY PISTON INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
HamUton Walker, 46 Whytehead Crescent, KoUmarama, Auck-
land, New Zealand
FUed Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 185,408
Claims priority, appUcation New Zealand, Sep. 12, 1979.
191548
Int C\? PD2B S3/00
U.S. a. 123—241 20 Claims
1. A rotary internal combustion engine comprising a stator
having an enclosed chamber, said chamber being defined by a
pair of opposing side walls and a peripheral wall extending
therebetween, a rotor disposed within the chamber and
mounted for rotation by a shaft extending between said side
walls, said rotor including at least one arm projecting radially
from said shaft and a rotator member pivotally mounted on the
end of said arm by a pivot pin, said rotator member having a
working surface which spans between said side walls and has
leading and trailing surfaces in contact with said peripheral
wall thereby defining a combustion chamber, an air inlet for
introducing air into said chamber, the pivot pin being hollow,
and air ducting means communicating between the interior of
the chamber outside the rotator member, and the hollow inte-
rior of the pivot pin, to permit air supplied to said chamber
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
from said inlet to be ducted to the hollow interior of the pivot
pin.
4,434,758
DIESEL ENGINE
Gerhard Grammes, Meddersheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to General Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Mar. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 480,714
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 6,
1982, 8209819[U]
lat a.3 F02B i/OO
\}&, CI. 123—286 4 Claims
1. A diesel engine having a cylinder with a closed end defm-
ing a plane, a piston in the cylinder having a portion facing the
closed end and defming therewith a main combustion chamber,
a turbulence chamber having a closest side adjacent but spaced
longitudinaUy beyond the cylinder, a transfer port connecting
the main combustion chamber with said closest side of the
turbulence chamber through the cylinder closed end and form-
ing an acute port entry angle with said plane, said transfer port
having a lens-like cross section, as in a plano-convex lens
having opposite convex and flat sides with rounded-ofT edges,
characterized in that the convex side is disposed inwardly
toward the center of the cylinder and the flat side is disposed
outwardly away from the center of the cylinder, the transfer
port has a cross-sectional area of not more than 1% nor less
than 0.7% of the cross-sectional area of the cylinder and said
port entry angle has a value of not less than 37* nor more than
44*.
4,434,759
FUEL SUPPLY CUT CONTROL DEVICE OF AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Isamu lezuka, and Kazuo Nakano, both of Okazaki, Japan,
assignors to Toyota Jidosha K«Wfhiki Kaiaha, Toyota, Japan
FUed Sep. 29. 1982, Ser. No. 427,297
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 24, 1982, 57-45534
Int. a.3 FD2D 5/00
\}&. a. 123—325 5 Claims
Fia2
Fig 2a
Fig 2b
/I4
I7>
AIR FLOW
METER
27i SWITCH
VEHICLE
2&>^SPEE'0
SENSOR
-c^
.38
1 I K39
-^Fi^
.40
— Hbuffer|-
42
^, OXYGEN I , . c_,| '^ u
DETECTo'r "'"'^'^rci^^ XMFWMTOR
SENSOR
4?
_e
BUFFER
v33
T
±
1. A fuel supply cut control device for use in an internal
combustion engine of a vehicle, said engine having an intake
passage, a throttle valve arranged in the intake passage, and
fuel supply means for feeding fuel into the intake passage, said
device comprising:
first means actuated in response to a change in the degree of
opening of the throttle valve and producing an output
signal indicating that the throttle valve is in the idling
position;
second means detecting the engine speed and producing an
output signal indicating the engine speed;
third means detecting the vehicle speed and producing an
output signal indicating the vehicle speed; and
control means actuating said fuel supply means in response
to the output signals of said first means, said second means
and said third means for stopping the supply of fuel from
said fuel supply means when the throttle valve is closed to
the idling position under an operating state where the
engine speed is higher than a predetermined cut speed and
for starting the supply of fuel from said fuel supply means
when the engine speed is reduced below a predetermined
resume speed, said cut speed and said resume speed being
changed in accordance with the vehicle speed.
4,434,760
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE IDLING SPEED
OF AN ENGINE
Nobuyuki Kobayashi, Toyota, and Hiroihi Itoh, Nagoya, both of
Japan, aaslgnors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo KabushUd Kaiiha,
Toyota, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 292,534, Aug. 13, 1981, Pat. No. 4,364,350.
This appUcation Not. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 440,523
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 23, 1981, 56-8142;
Jan. 26, 1981, 56-8143; Jan. 26, 1981, 56-8937
Int a.3 P02D 77/70
U.S. a. 123—339 12 Claims
1. Apparatus for controlling the idling speed of an engine
including a main intake passage and a throttle valve arranged
in said main intake passage, si^^pparatus comprising:
a bypass passage having a first e^ connected to said main
intake passage upstream of said throtUe valve and a sec-
ond end connected to said main intake passage down-
stream of said throttle valve;
a control valve arranged in said bypass passage;
a step motor actuating said control valve for controlling air
flowing within said bypass passage;
means for detecting the speed of said engine during idling;
means for detecting the pressure of lubricating oil in said
engine;
means for detecting the temperature of coolant in said en-
gine; and
control means, responsive to said speed detecting means,
said pressure detecting means and said temperature detect-
ing means, for: (1) controlling the position of said step
motor so that the idling speed of said engine becomes
equal to a predetermined base speed when said lubricating
oil pressure is higher than a predetermined preuure and
when said coolant temperature is lower than a first prede-
termined temperature, (2) rotating said step motor so that
control valve increases the flow area of said bypass pas-
sage to cause the idling speed of said engine to approach
a predetermined pressure control speed which is higher
than said predetermined base speed when said lubricating
oil pressure becomes lower thui said predetermined pres-
sure, and (3) rotating said step motor so thatthe idling
speed of said engine approaches a predetermined tempera-
100
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
ture control speed when said coolant temperature be-
comes higher than said first predetermined temperature.
4.434,761
FUEL FLOW REGULATOR CONTROL FOR A DIESEL
ENGINE WITH EXHAUST GAS DRIVEN
TURBOCHARGER
George C. Ladwig, Marion. S.C., aaaignor to Tom McGuane
Indnitries, Inc., Madiaon Heights, Mich.
FUcd Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,098
Int a.^ P02D 1/06
U.S. a. 123-383 8 Claims
— 'g« =;> "TSRiS"
l4
Z^
Uv
«---
JSSfIS =>E«»{^s,
rj^SJ
^im
eo
mlhr
\*]Ktr»
%
EMUST
KM I FOLD
T7
1. A fud flow regulating device for internal combustion
engines having intake manifold means, turbocharging means,
connected to said intake manifold means, for increasing pres-
sure in said intake manifold means, fuel control means,
mounted adjacent to said intake manifold means and opera-
tively connected to internal combustion engine, for regulating
fuel flow to said internal combustion engine, governor means,
connected to said fuel control means in response to a signal
responsive to engine speed and engine power and operator
actuating means, connected to said fuel control means, for
controlling said fuel control means from first fuel flow rate to
a second fuel flow rate in response to an operator signal and
intake manifold pressure, said fuel flow regulating device
comprising:
a housing having first cylindrical body portion and second
body portion mounted to said first cylindrical body por-
tion, said first cylindrical body portion having one end, an
opposite end and portions defining a cylindrical passage
extending from said one end toward said opposite end,
said opposite end having a web portion extending across
said cylindrical passage, said web portion having a portion
defining an opening centrally disposed with said cylindri-
cal passage for flow communication therebetween, said
second body portion having one end, an opposite end and
portions defining a first passage extending from said one
end towards said opposite end, said first passage including
a first opening through said opposite end, a first counter-
bore adjacent to said first opening and centrally disposed
therewith, a second counterbore adjacent to said first
counterbore and centrally disposed therewith, said first
counterbore further being larger than said first opening
and interposed said first opening and said second counter-
bore, said second counterbore further being larger than
said first counterbore and extending from said one end to
said second counterbore, said housing further having
portions defining a first channel extending from said cylin-
drical passage in said first cylindrical body portion to said
second counterbore in said second body portion for flow
communication therebetween, and a second channel ex-
tending from said cylindrical passage in said first cylindri-
cal body portion to said first counterbore in said second
body portion;
a conduit connecting said intake manifold means to said first
counterbore for flow communication therebetween;
slide valve means, slidably mounted in said passage in said
second body portion, for translating axially in said passage
from a first predetermined axial position to a second pre-
determined axial position in response to increasing intake
manifold pressure such that above a second predetermined
intake manifold pressure, said slide valve means translates
axially to said second predetermined axial position to
connect said first channel with said intake manifold pres-
sure means and such that at and below said second prede-
termined intake manifold pressure, said slide valve meani
translates axially to said first predetermined axial positions
to connect said second channel with said intake manifold
pressure means;
fuel flow controlling means, slidably mounted in said first
cylindrical passage, for controlling the maximum fuel
flow rate from said fuel control means to said internal
combustion engine in response to intake manifold pressure
such that when said slide valve means is in said first prede-
termined axial position, said fuel flow controlling means
increases maximum fuel flow in response to increasing
intake manifold pressure from a first predetermined maxi-
mum fuel flow rate when said intake manifold is at a first
predetermined intake manifold pressure, to a second pre-
determined maximum fuel flow rate when said intake
manifold pressure is at said second predetermined inuke
manifold pressure and such that when said slide valve
means is in said second predetermined axial position, said
fuel flow controlling means decreases the fuel flow to a
third predetermined maximum fuel flow rate in response
to increasing manifold pressure when said intake manifold
pressure above said second predetermined intake manifold
pressure so as to override said governor means and to
override said operator actuating means to protect said
internal combustion engine from overboost of said engine
by said turbocharger means.
4,434,762
APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING THE
AIR.FUEL RATIO SUPPLIED TO A COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Ralph P. McCabe, Troy, Mich., asiignor to Colt Industriei
Operating Corp., New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,585
Int. a.3 F02B 33/00: F02M 7/00
U.S. a. 123-438 10 Claims
1. A fuel metering system for a combustion engine having
engine exhaust conduit means, comprising fuel carbureting
means for supplying metered fuel flow to said engine, said
carbureting means comprising first and second induction pas-
sage means for supplying motive fluid to said engine, a source
of fuel, primary main fuel metering system means communicat-
ing generally between said source of fuel and said first induc-
MaRCH 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
101
tion passage means, idle fuel metering system means communi-
cating generally between said source of fuel and said first
induction passage means, secondary main fuel metering system
means communicating generally between said source of fuel
and said second induction passage means, controlled modulat-
ing valving means effective to controllably increase and de-
crease the rate of metered fuel flow through each of said pri-
mary and secondary main fuel metering system means and said
idle fuel metering system means, oxygen sensor means effec-
tive for sensing the relative amount of oxygen present in engine
exhaust gases flowing through said exhaust conduit means and
producing in accordance therewith a first output, said modu-
lating valving means comprising solenoid winding means for
actuation of said modulating valving means, electrical logic
control means effective for receiving said first output signal
and in response thereto producing a second output and effec-
tively applying said second output to said solenoid winding
means to thereby cause said modulating valve means to alter
said rate of metered fuel flow through each of said primary and
secondary main fuel metering system means and said idle fuel
metering system means as to provide for rates of metered fuel
flow therethrough ranging from a preselected "lean" fuel-air
mixture ratio supplied to said engine to a preselected "rich"
fuel-air mixture ratio supplied to the engine, said modulating
valving means being effective upon occurrence of an electrical
failure in said electrical logic control or said solenoid winding
means to thereafter permit only that rate of metered fuel flow
through each of said primary and secondary main fuel meter-
ing system means and said idle fuel metering system means as
will result in said preselected "lean" fuel-air mixture ratio
being supplied to said engine, wherein said idle fuel metering
system means comprises idle air bleed means, wherein said
primary main fuel metering system means comprises first fuel
flow orifice means, wherein said secondary main fuel metering
system means comprises second fuel flow orifice means,
wherein said idle air bleed means is spaced from both of said
first and second fuel flow orifice means, said modulating valv-
ing means comprising housing means, said housing means
comprising a first end portion, a second end portion, said first
end portion being adapted for operative connection; to said
carbureting means, said second end portion being adapted for
operative connection to said carbureting means, solenoid
motor means, said solenoid motor means comprising axially
extending spool means, said spool means comprising a gener-
ally centrally disposed tubular portion, said solenoid winding
means being carried by said spool means, axially extending
armature means situated in said tubular portion for reciprocat-
ing movement therein, motion transmitting means operatively
connected to a first end of said armature means and generally
axially aligned therewith, a first opening formed through said
first endvportion for permitting the free axial movement of said
armature 1||||u^}iefein, a second opening formed through said
second enoportion for permitting the free movement of said
motion transmitting means therein, a first valve member opera-
tively connected to a second end of said armature means oppo-
site to said first end, said first valve member being effectively
juxtaposed to both of said first and second fuel flow orifice
means, a second valve member operatively connected to said
motion transmitting means, said second valve member being
effectively juxtaposed to said air bleed means, said first and
second valve members moving in unison with said armature
means so that when said first valve member moved toward
both said first and second fuel flow orifice means said second
valve member moves away from said air bleed means and
when said first valve member moves away from both of said
first and second fuel flow orifice means said second valve
member moves toward said air bleed means, and resilient
means effective for continually resiliently urging said armature
means in a direction whereby said first valve member is moved
toward both of said first and second fuel flow orifice means
and said second valve member is moved away from said air
bleed means.
4,434,763
APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING THE
AIR-FUEL RATIO SUPPUED TO A COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Ralph P. McCabc, Troy, and Keith D. Marih, St. Clair Shores,
both of Mich., assignors to Colt Industries Operating Corp.,
New York, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,670
Int. a.' P02M 11/00
U.S. a. 123-440 8 ClaiM
\'
1. A fuel metering system for a combustion engine having
engine exhaust conduit means, comprising fuel carbureting
means for supplying metered fuel flow to said engine, said
carbureting means comprising first and second induction pas-
sage means for supplying motive fluid to said engine, a source
of fuel, primary main fuel metering system means communicat-
ing generally between said source of fuel and said first induc-
tion passage means, idle fuel metering system means communi-
cating generally between said source of fuel and said first
induction passage means, secondary main fuel metering system
means communicating generally between said source of fuel
and said second induction passage means, controlled modulat-
ing valving means effective to controllably increase and de-
crease the rate of metered fuel flow through each of said pri-
mary and secondary main fuel metering system means and said
idle fuel metering system means, oxygen sensor means effec-
tive for sensing the relative amount of oxygen present in engine
exhaust gases flowing through said exhaust conduit means and
producing in accordance therewith a first output, said modu-
lating valving means comprising solenoid winding means for
actuation of said modulating valving means, and electrical
logic control means effective for receiving said first output
signal and in response thereto producing a second output and
effectively applying said second output to said solenoid wind-
ing means to thereby cause said modulating valving means to
alter said rate of metered fuel flow through each of said pri-
mary and secondary main fuel metering system means and said
idle fuel metering system means as to provide for rates of
metered fuel flow therethrough ranging from a preselected
"lean" fuel-air mixture ratio supplied to said engine to a prese-
lected "rich" fuel-air mixture supplied to said engine, wherein
said modulating valving means further comprises first and
second valve means positionable by said solenoid winding
means, wherein said idle fuel metering system means comprises
idle air bleed means, said first valve means being effective to
vary the effective rate of flow of bleed air through said air
bleed means in order to thereby alter said rate of material fuel
flow through said idle fuel metering system means, wherein
said primary main fuel metering system means comprises fint
fuel flow orifice means, wherein said secondary main fuel
metering system means comprises second fuel flow orifice
means, said second valve means being effective to vary the
102
OFFICIAL GAZEJTE
March 6, 1984
effective rate of flow of fuel through both of said first and
second fiiel flow orifice means to thereby alter said rate of
metered fuel flow through each of said primary and secondary
fuel metering system means, said first and second fuel flow
orifice means comprising a valve orifice body, said valve ori-
fice body comprising a first threaded portion for operative
thrcadable engagement with associated support structure, and
pilot diameter means for pilot<like reception of said valve
orifice body by said associated support structure, said idle air
bleed means spaced from both of said first and second fuel flow
orifice means, said modulating valving means comprising hous-
ing means, said housing means comprising a first end portion,
a second end portion, said first end portion being adapted for
operative connection to said carbureting means, said second
end portion being adapted for operative connection to said
carbureting means, solenoid motor means, said solenoid motor
means comprising axially extending spool means, said spool
means comprising a generally centrally disposed tubular por-
tion, said solenoid winding means being carried by s|ud spool
means, axially extending armature means situated in said tubu-
lar portion for reciprocating movement therein, motion trans-
mitting means operatively connected to a first end of said
armature means and generally axially aligned therewith, a first
opening formed through said first end portion for permitting
the free axial movement of said armature means therein, a
second opening formed through said second end portion for
permitting the free movement of said motion transmitting
means therein, said second valve means operatively connected
to said motion transmitting means, said second valve means
being effectively juxtaposed to both of said first and second
fuel flow orifice means, said first valve means being opera-
tively connected to a second end of said armature means oppo-
site to said first end, said first valve means being effectively
juxtaposed to said air bleed means, said first and second valve
means moving in unison with said armature means -so that
when said second valve means moves toward both said first
and second fuel flow orifice means said first valve means
moves away from said air bleed means and when said second
valve means moves away from both of said first and second
fuel flow orifice means said fu^t valve means moves toward
said air bleed means, and resilient means effective for continu-
ally resilienUy urging said armature means in a direction
whereby said second valve means is moved away from both of
said first and second fuel flow orifice means and said first valve
means is moved toward said air bleed means.
2. A valving assembly for variably restricting fluid flow
through first and second spaced flow orifice means, compris-
ing housing means, said housing means comprising a generally
tubular housing portion, solenoid motor means, said solenoid
motor means comprising axially extending spool means, said
spool means comprising a generally centrally disposed spool
tubular portion, a solenoid field winding carried by said spool
means, axially extending armature means reciprocatingly situ-
ated in said spool tubular portion, a first valve member opera-
tively connected to a first axial end of said armature means as
to be effective to be juxtaposed to said first flow orifice means,
a second valve member operatively connected to a second
axial end of said armature means opposite to said first axial end
as to be effective to be juxtaposed to said second flow orifice
means, said second flow orifice means comprising first and
second passage means, said first and second passage means
leading to diverse areas, and valve seat body means, said valve
seat body means having said fust and second passage means
formed therethrough, said valve seat body means fiirther com-
prising an externally threaded portion for threadable engage-
ment with said tubular housing portion, said valve seat body
means when operatively threadably engaged with said tubular
housing portion extending beyond said tiibukr housing portion
to at least in part define annulus means for fluid flow thereinto
from said first passage means, and said first and second valve
members moving in unison with said armature means.
M34«764
AIR/FUEL RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL SYSTEM FOR
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES, HAVING
ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE-DEFENDENT FAIL SAFE
FUNCnON FOR O2 SENSOR
Sbojiipei Haacgawa, Niiia; Shin NarasiUui, Yono, and Kazoo
Otsnka, Higialiikiirame, aU of JuMn, aidgDon to Honda
Motor Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aog. 12, 1W2, Ser. No. 407,658
Claimi priority, appUcation Japui, Aug. 13, IWl, S6-128313
lat a.3 F02M 7/18
UAa 123-440 5cUd^
■i-««tL— ^
1. An air/fuel ratio feedback control system for combination
with an internal combustion engine, comprising: first sensor
means for detecting the concentration of oxygen present in
exhaust gases emitted from said engine; valve means having a
valve body disposed to determine the air/fuel ratio oflST air/f-
uel muture being supplied to said engine; electronic control
means operable in response to an output signal of said first
sensor means to drive said valve means, whereby the air/fuel
ratio of said mixture is controlled to a predetermined value in
a feedback manner responsive to changes in the concentration
of oxygen present in exhaust gases emitted from said engine;
means adapted to generate a first signal as long as a predeter-
mmed condition for effecting said feedback control of the
air/fuel ratio of said mixture is fulfilled; means adapted to
generate a second signal as long as said first sensor means is
activated; means adapted to determine an actual air/fuel ratio
of said mixture from the value of said output signal of said first
sensor means and to generate a third signal having a binary
value invertible depending upon whether the air/fuel ratio thus
determined is larger or smaller than said predetermined value-
safety means arranged to be supplied with said first, second and
third signals for performing a predetermined safety action
when no inversion ocurs in said third signal inputted thereto
for a predetermined period of time while simulumeously said
first and second signals are both inputted thereto; second sen-
sor means for detecting ambient atinospheric pressure ; and
means adapted to render said safety means inoperative when a
value of ambient atinospheric pressure detected by said second
sensor means is lower than a predetermined value.
4,434,765
FUEL INJECnON APPARATUS AND SYSTEM
Philip V. Eahelman, Troy, Mich., aarignor to Colt Indutrlef
Operating Corp., New York, N.Y.
Fitod Oct 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,899
Int a.J P02M 51/02. 51/08
VS. a. 123—472 41 ctataia
1. In combination, a combustion engine, fuel metering appa-
ratus for supplying metered rates of fiiel flow to said engine,
said fuel metering apparatus comprising body means, induction
passage means formed through said body means for supplying
motive fluid to said engine, throttie valve means situated in
said induction passage means for variably controlling the rate
of flow of air through said induction passage means, fiiel-air
mixture discharge means situated in said induction passage
means downsti-eam of said throttle valve means, air passage
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
103
means communicating between a source of air and said fuel-air
mixture discharge means, said air passage means comprising
flow restriction means, said flow restriction means being cali-
brated as to provide for sonic flow therethrough at conditions
of idle engine operation, fuel metering means for metering
liquid fuel in response to engine demands and indicia of engine
operation, said liquid fuel when metered by said fuel metering
means being discharged into said air passage means at an area
thereof downstream of said source of air and upstream of said
flow restriction means, said flow restriction means comprising
sonic venturi type restriction means, said fuel metering means
for metering liquid fuel comprising a duty-cycle type fuel
metering solenoid assembly, said fuel metering solenoid assem-
bly comprising bobbin means, a ball armature means, and a
field winding carried by said bobbin means, said bobbin means
and said field winding being selectively adjustably positionable
with respect to said ball armature means, said field winding
being intermittenUy energizable during metering of said liquid
fuel as to cause said ball armature means to move toward and
away from a closed position with respect to an associated valve
seat member and thereby result in an average rate of flow of
fuel past said ball armature means which constitutes the then
metered rate of liquid fuel flow, unmetered fuel passage means
for supplying unmet6red fuel to said fuel metering means up-
stream of said fuel metering means, pressure regulator meaiu
operatively communicating with said unmetered fuel for regu-
lating the pressure thereof to a preselected superatmospheric
magnitude, said fuel-air mixture discharge means comprising
generally annular means defining generally annular passage
means, said air-passage means in communicating with said
fuel-air mixture discharge means communicates with said gen-
erally annular passage means, and discharge port means com-
municating between said generally annular passage means and
said induction passage means for directing the flow of the
fuel-air mixture within said generally annular passage means to
said induction passage means, said discharge port means com-
prising a plurality of discharge ports spaced from each other
and directed generally radially inwardly of said induction
passage means.
4,434,766
AIR ASSIST DEVICE OF FUEL IN JECnON TYPE
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
HiroU Matsaoka; YnichI Kato, and Minora Iwata, aU of
Soaono, Japu, aaalgnors to Toyota Jidoska KaboaUki Kaiaha,
Toyota, Japan
Fikd Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,843
ClaiiH priority, application Japan, May 7, 1982, 57-76969
Int CL^ FD2M 23/00
UJS. a. 123-472 9 Claims
1. An air assist device of a fuel injection type internal com-
bustion engine, comprising:
an air assisted injector for blowing out assist air together
with fuel to facilitate the atomization of fuel; and
an adapter having an annular peripheral wall containing a
plurality of assist air intake ports constituting an assist air
introducing poriion close to a nozzle of said air aMisted
injector and having at the bottom of said wall an assist air
jet opening.
wherein the diameter of each opening of the assist air intake
ports is smaller than the diameter of the assist air jet open-
ing,
the total opening area of the auist air intake ports being
larger than the area of the assist air jet opening.
4,434,767
OUTPUT CONTROL SYSTEM FOR MULTICYUNDER
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Tokio Kohama, NIahio; Seizi Huzino; HIdeki Obayaahi, both of
Okazaki; Hisaal Kawal, Toyohaabi, and Tsuncyuki Egaml,
AichI, all of Japan, aaaignon to Nippon Soken, Inc., NIabio,
Japan
FUed Dm. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,781
Claims priority, application Japwi, Dm. 24, 1980, 55-183058
Int a.^ F02D 17/02
VS. a. 123—481 6 Claima
nommwi
UWT _
IXt
^
1
' ^^rloooooo -
0 *L_I ['i«Z «} »« '5 ••
U U U U U L
1. An output control system for a multicylinder internal
combustion engine having an intake pipe comprising an engine
speed detector for detecting the speed of the engine, signal
output means for producing a signal corresponding to an out-
put required of the engine, firat control means for receiving
signals of said engine speed detector and said signal output
means, said first control means controlling the number of
combinations during predetermined combustion cycles in all
cylinders by periodically stopping fuel ii^tion to a specific
cylinder to periodically stop the fuel combustion during the
cycles in accordance with the signals of said engine speed
detector and said signal output means and supplying fuel to the
engine intarmittently thereby to subject the engine to a partial
cylinder operation, and second control means including a
constant pressure valve for controlling the pressure in the
intake pipe at a constant level at the time of partial load opera-
tion of the engine. ^
104
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4434 768
AIR-FUEL RATIO CONTROL FOR INTERNAL
CX)MBUSTION ENGINE
Masakazu Ninomiya, Kariya, Japan, assignor to Nippondenso
Co^ Ltd., Kariya, Japan
FUed Jul. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 397,874
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 15, 1981, 56-110386
Int a.3 P02M 51/00. 23/04
VS. a. 123-489 11 Claims
determined that said engine is again at said predetermined
operating condition;
a read/write memory for storing the results of the computa-
tions of said processor means at respective addressable
locations thereof; and
fuel supply means for supplying fuel to be mixed with air
supplied by said air supply means in accordance with the
results of the computations of said processor means.
~ixr
oe
MILMWM — ^
OONTKOL F^
Ot SENSCR
sTum)
SWITCH
AW FUW
SENSOR
s.
SOCTTQ*
SENSOR
7i'
r-
04
_1.
:=3 K*-
1
iaXi
ror
r
T
lOB
_J_
4,434,769 ^ ^
DECELERATION FUEL CUT DEVICE FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Yntaka Otobe, Shild; Akihiro Yamato, Sayama, and Shigeo
Umesaki, Inuna, all of Japan, assignors to Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 379,187
Claims priority, application Japan, May 20, 1981, 56-75847
Int. a.3 PD2B 3/00
UA a 123-493 5 Claims
OUTPUT
OKUIT
svnss
VALVE
OS
N50
OUTPUT
ancuiT
1. A method for controlling an air-fuel ratio comprising the
steps of:
detecting whether a predetermined engine operating condi-
tion exists;
detecting a relationship between an acutal air-fuel ratio and
a predetermined air-fuel ratio different from an air-fuel
ratio providing optimum fuel consumption with an oxy-
gen sensor exposed to exhaust gases;
maintaining, when said predetermined operating condition
of said engine is detected, the air-fuel ratio at said prede-
termined air-fuel ratio at least during said predetermined
operating condition;
changing gradually, during a steady-state operating condi-
tion after the termination of said predetermined operating
condition, the air-fuel ratio from said predetermined air-
fuel ratio to said air-fuel ratio providing an optimum fuel
consumption; and
maintaining said optimum fuel consumption providing air-
fuel ratio until said predetermined operating condition is
detected again.
7. An apparatus for controlling an air-fuel ratio comprising:
air supply means for suppying air to an engine;
sensor means for detecting whether at least a predetermined
engine condition exists;
oxygen sensing means, exposed to exhaust gases, for detect-
ing a relationship between an actual air-fuel ratio and a
predetermined air-fuel ratio different from an air-fuel ratio
providing optimum fuel consumption to generate an out-
put signal corresponding to said detected relationship;
processor means responsive to said sensor means for deter-
mining whether said engine is at said specified operating
condition or a steady-state operating condition and for
performing a computation for maintaining the air-fuel
ratio of the mixture at said predetermined air-fuel ratio in
accordance with the output signal from said oxygen sens-
ing means when it is determined that said engine is at said
predetermined operating condition, a computation for
gradually changing the air-fuel ratio of the mixture from
said predetermined air-fuel ratio to said air-fuel ratio pro-
viding an optimum fuel consumption when it is deter-
mined that said engine is at said steady-state operating
condition and a computation for maintaining said opti-
mum fuel consumption providing air-fuel ratio until it is
®-
'DC SKHAL IS M»UtTCC
:z3
lN»vr,*UOtSTIHIt tUIC
MttOG VtUESIlTltTI*
1. In a fuel supply control system including a fuel injection
device for injecting fuel into an internal combustion engine
having an intake pipe, at least one throttle valve arranged in
the intake pipe, an exhasust pipe, and a catalytic device ar-
ranged in the exhaust pipe for purifying exhaust gases, said
catalytic device being of the type increasing in temperature
with an increase in the amount of exhaust gases flowing into
said catalytic device, said fuel supply control system being
operable to electronically control said fuel injection device for
control of the amount of fuel being supplied to said engine, a
deceleration fuel cut device comprising:
means for detecting operating conditions of said engine, said
detecting means including a first sensor for detecting the
rotational speed of said engine and a second sensor ar-
ranged in the intake pipe of the engine at a location down-
stream of the throttle valve for detecting the pressure in
said intake pipe of said engine;
means responsive to the outputs of said detecting means for
determining a predetermined fuel cut condition, said fuel
cut condition determining means being adapted to deter-
mine that said engine is in a condition requiring interrup-
tion of the supply of fuel to said engine when the engine
rotational sp^ detected by said first sensor has a value
higher than a predetermined value and simultaneously the
intake pipe pressure detected by said second sensor has a
value lower than a predetermined value above which the
temperature of the catalytic device becomes excessively
high, said predetermined intake pipe pressure value being
set to higher values with an increase in the value of the
engine rotational speed detected by said first sensor; and
fuel cut means responsive to the result of said determination
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
105
of said fuel cut condition determining means for causing
said fuel injection device to cut off the supply of fuel to
said engine.
4,434,771
OaSONE PRODUCnON SYSTEM
Israel Slomnicki, Rehovot Hess St. N=14, Rebovot, Israel
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 198,769, Oct 20, 1980,
abandoned. This application Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,364
Int a.' F02M 27/04
U.S. a. 123—539
10 Claim
4434770
FUEL INJECnON TIMING SIGNAL AND CRANK
ANGLE SIGNAL GENERATING APPARATUS
Hiroyuki Nishimura, Konosu; Shumpei Hasegawa, Niiza;
Masahiro Watanabe, Sagamihara, and Hanio Funiya, Yoko-
hama, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co. Ltd., Osaka, Japan and Honda Giken Kabusbiki
Kaisba, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,427
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 17, 1981, 56-22580
Int aXBOlD 5/02; P02B 3/00
US. a. 123-494 t 3 q^^
IMTIM. KTTMB
TctO ''AM MO
Tww RAM
KT T>« NCwy
MUUVOnJLK
iNTEMfeL IN
TiCW "AM
ll
lasagyat
RtM
cnjoiioaaw-
aanitrxi
513
1. A fuel injection timing signal and crank angle signal gen-
erating apparatus for an electronic fuel injection control sys-
tem for vehicle engines comprising:
a rotation sensor for generating a first pulse at every cycle of
fuel injection of an engine and a second series of pulses in
said every cycle of fuel injection, said second series of
pulses having equal intervals at given engine revolutions
each corresponding to a fuel injection interval (^tt) rep-
resented by a crank angle, said first pulse being delayed
from a predetermined one of said second pulses by a
predetermined crank angle ($tc) and satisfying a relation
given by, 0tc=Btt/X said first pulse and said second
series of pulses being substantially of the same pulse width;
and
discriminating means for discriminating between a crank
angle pulse and fuel injection timing pulses as to said first
pulse and said second series of pulses generated by said
rotation sensor,
said discriminating means measuring an interval between an
instant pulse and a previous pulse every time each of said
first and second pulses are received sequentially in the
order of generation and indiscriminately between said first
and second pulses,
said discriminating means comparing a last measured inter-
val (Jnew) with a first previously measured interval
(Told) and determining that an instant pulse is a said
crank angle pulse if a ratio Tnew/Told is less than or
equal to a predetermined value, and otherwise determin-
ing that said instant pulse is one of said fuel injection
timing pulses.
Sfl II II mi I'
1. An ozone production system for use with hydrocarbon
fuel combustion apparatus having an air inlet and an exhaust
outlet, said system comprising:
a plurality of electrode pairs arranged in association with
said air inlet;
radiation absorption sensing means associated with said
exhaust outlet and arranged to detect and indicate the
presence of ozone;
distributor means for sensing the rate of combustion of said
combustion apparatus and providing a plurality of se-
quenced pulsed outputs; and
control means operative in response to said sequenced
pulsed outputs and to an output of said radiation absorp-
tion sensing means for governing the supply of electricity
to said electrode means for producing ozone at a con-
trolled rate so as to limit the ozone emissions at said ex-
haust outlet.
4,434,772
COMBUSTION MIXTURE GENERATOR FOR
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
Giinter Hlirtel; Werner Scbiele, both of Neuss; Armin Scbiirfeld,
Meerbusch; Valerio Biancbi, Neuss-Hoisten, and Anwar Abi-
din, Meerbusch, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Bosch A Pierburg System OHG, Neuss, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Continuation of Ser. No. 178,823, Aug. 18, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Jul. 8, 1983, Ser. No. 512,313
Qainis priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Gcmany, Dec. 6,
1979, 2949096
lat a.i P02M 3J/00 '
VS. a. 123—549 28 CUims
1. In a combustible mixture generator for an internal com-
bustion engine, said generator comprising an axially extending
106
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
upwardly arranged tubular wall having an upper end and a
lower end and defining a mixture chamber therein, means for
heating said tubular wall over at least part of the axial length
thereof between the upper end and lower end, a flap-shaped
throttle member, means mounting said throttle member at the
lower end of said tubular wall and fuel metering means for
directing fuel into said mixture chamber at the upper end
thereof, said tubular wall comprising a double wall heat ex*
changer jacket defining an annular chamber within said double
wall, means for conducting heating fluid through said annular
chamber, the improvement wherein said double wall extending
axially from adjacent said fuel metering means substantially to
said throttle member with the throttle member located be-
tween the upper and lowr ends of said annular chamber, said
fuel metering means is located between upper and lower ends
of said tubular wall and is operative to direct substantially all of
said fuel onto the inner surface of said double wall defining the
mixture chamber between said fuel metering means and said
throttle member, said double wall comprising an inner and an
outer wall and said means for heating said double wall com-
prises electrical resistance heating material located within the
inner wall of said double wall.
4,434,774
VAPORIZER FOR A UQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS
ENGINE
Tomoftm Horinchi, Yokohama, Japan, anignor to Niaaan
Motor Company, limited, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jan. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,791
Claims priority, applicatioa Japan, Sep. 25, 1981, 56-1S1545
Int a.3 P02G S/QO; P02M il/02
U.S. CL 123—557 6 Claims
I WITH
4,434,773
VALVE CONTROLLED FUEL HEATER'
SELF-ADJUSTING VALVE
Dennis C. Granetzke, Racine, Wis., assignor to Modine Manu-
factoring Company, Racine, Wis.
" FUed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296399
Int a.3 F02M iim
MS, a. 123-557 8 Claims
1. A fuel heater, comprising:
a source of fuel passage means for said fuel through said
heater;
heated means;
a temperature responsive valve body movable between a
first extreme position for directing said fuel through a path
in heat receiving relationship to said heated means when
the fuel temperature is cold, and a second extreme position
that directs the fuel to bypass the heat means when the
fuel is hot;
movable temperature responsive means responsive to the
temperature of said fuel in said heater for moving said
temperature responsive valve body between said first and
second extreme positions;
an elongated, laterally distortable valve stem extending
between said temperature responsive means and said valve
body and thereby subjected to varying temperatures in
said fuel heater for thereby moving said valve body; and
hinge means operatively connecting said elongated valve
stem and valve body for permitting relative lateral move-
ment therebetween, thereby tending to prevent binding of
said valve body in misalignment of said stem and valve
body due to said varying temperatures.
1. A vaporizer for a liquefied petroleum gas engine having a
cooling system employing coolant, the vaporizer comprising:
(a) a housing having first, second, third, and fourth cham-
bers;
(b) the housing having a fuel inlet port connected to a lower
portion of the first chamber to supply liquid fuel to the
first chamber;
(c) a first port disposed at an upper portion of the first cham-
ber for communicating with the second chamber to supply
fuel to the latter;
(d) said fuel inlet port having a cross-sectional area smaller
than that of the first chamber whereby fuel flow through
the first chamber will be at a lower speed than that of fuel
flow through the fuel inlet port;
(e) a second pori for communicating between the second
chamber and the fourth chamber;
(0 an outlet for connecting the fourth chamber to the engine
to supply fuel to the latter;
(g) mans for controlling flow through said first port for
regulating pressure in the second chamber to a level
whereby liquid fuel will vaporize; and
(h) means for controlling flow through said second port;
(i) the third chamber being connected to the cooling system
to be supplied with the cbolant, the third chamber being
located adjacent to the first and second chambers and at
least partially surrounding the first chamber so that the
coolant in the third chamber will heat both liquid fuel in
the first chamber and fuel vapor in the second chamber.
4,434,775
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING PRESSURIZED AIR
SUPPLY TO ENGINES
Jnqjiro Yoahimora, Okazaki; KoUi Yamada, Aidii, and
Hamynki Obata, Susono, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon-
dcnso Co., Ltd., Kariya and Toyota Jidosha KabosUki Kaisha,
Toyota, both of, Japan
Filed JoL 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,956
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 21, 1981, 56-112952;
Ang. 5, 1981, 56-116510; Sep. 14, 1981, 56-136601; Sep. 16, 1981,
56-137449; Sep. 16, 1981, 56-137450
Int CL3 F02D 23/00
U.S. CL 123—564 18 Claims
1. An apparatus for controlling pressurized air supply to an
engine, comprising:
an intake passage connected to the engine at a downstream
end thereof;
March 6. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
107
a throttle valve disposed at a downstream side of said intake
passage;
a supercharger control valve disposed at an upstream side of
said throttle valve in said intake passage;
a supercharging passage connected to said intake passage at
both upstream and downstream sides of said supercharger
control valve;
a supercharger disposed in said supercharging passage;
an actuator which has an actuating body provided in said
actuator for dividing said actuator into first and second
pressure chambers and operatively connected to said
supercharger control valve to close said supercharger
control valve when said actuating body is moved in a first
direction to decrease the volume of said first pressure
chamber and to open said supercharger control valve
when said actuating body is moved in a second direction
to increase the volume of said first pressure chamber, and
which has urging means for urging said actuating body in
said second direction;
EOR flow control valve having a vacuum motor includ-
ing a vacuum chamber, said vacuum chamber being flu-
idly communicated with a source of vacuum;
a first vacuum modulation valve for modulating the vacuum
prevailing in said vacuum chamber, said first vacuum
modulation valve being responsive to a venturi vacuum
signal which originates in said venturi portion and a pres-
sure signal which originates in a zone of said EGR conduit
upstream of said EGR flow control valve and down-
stream of a flow restriction disposed in said EOR conduit;
and
a second vacuum modulation valve for modulating the vac-
uum prevailing in said vacuum chamber, said second^
vacuum modulation valve being responsive to said venturi
vacuum signal and an induction vacuum prevailing in said
induction manifold.
a change-over valve which has a first pressure-receiving
chamber communicating with said first pressure chamber,
a second pressure-receiving chamber communicating with
said second pressure chamber and a portion of said intake
passage between said throttle valve and said supercharger
control valve, and a valve body selectively positioned
between a first position where said valve body allows said
first pressure-receiving chamber to communicate with
said second pressure-receiving chamber and also blocks
said second pressure-receiving chamber from said intake
passage and a second position where said valve body
blocks said first pressure-receiving chamber from said
second pressure-receiving chamber and allows said sec-
ond pressure-receiving chamber to communicate with
said intake passage; and
a pressure introducing passage having one end connected to
the downstream of said throttle valve in said intake pas-
sage and the other end communicating with said first
pressure chamber. ,
4,434,776
EGR CONTROL SYSTEM
Haruya Shirase, Kawasaki, and Takchisa Kondo, Kanagawa,
both of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yoko-
hama, Japan
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244^44
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 18, 1980, 55-
35526[U]
Int a.3 F02M 25/06
MS. a. 123—568 4 Claims
1. In an internal combustion engine having an exhaust con-
duit and an induction manifold including a venturi poriion. the
combination of:
an EGR conduit fluidly interconnecting said exhaust con-
duit and said induction manifold;
an EGR flow control valve dispoaed in said EGR conduit
for controlling the flow of exhaust gas therethrough, said
4,434,777
FUEL SUPPLY APPARATUS FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Max Straubel, Stottgart Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Boach GmbH, Stuttgart Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 392,486
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 11,
1981, 3127419
Int a.3 P02B 47/Oi
U.S. a. 123—568 9 Claims
1. A fuel injection apparatus for internal combustion engines
having a fuel injection pump which includes a predetermined
interior pressure for supplying a regulatable fuel injection
quantity, a ventilation apparatus for the fuel injection pump
and an exhaust gas recirculation means controlled by said fuel
quantity, characterized in that a spring-loaded piston-type fuel
quantity meter of a mixture regulator is disposed in an inlet to
the fuel injection pump, said mixture regulator having a piston
the position of which, determined by the fuel quantity at a
particular time, is ascertained by a travel receptor, said travel
receptor arranged to determine the exhaust gas quantity recir-
culated to an intake tube, further that disposed in a discharge of
said injection pump is a pressure-controlled ventilation valve,
which communicates with a heat exchanger, said valve ar-
108
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
ranged to be controlled by pump interior pressure (ppj) and
adjusted such that its pressure effecting |he opening (p©) is
greater than the maximum interior pressure of said injection
pump in an exhaust gas test range.
4,434,778
AIR INDUCTION CONTROL DEVICE FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Hideo Morita, Yokohama, and Yoshio Iwasa, Nagareyama, both
of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 126,099, Feb. 29, 1980. This application
Jan. 13, 1983, Ser. No. 457,560
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 6, 1979, 54-25763;
May 8, 1979, 54-61528
Int. CIJ F02M 7/12
U.S. a. 123—587 ^ 14 Claims
and downstream sides of the throttle valve in said intake
passageway when opened;
a valve member disposed in said air passage and movable
toward the downstream side thereof to open said air pas-
sage in response to pressure difTerential between the up-
stream and downstream sides of the throttle valve in the
intake passageway; and
a diaphragm member mechanically connectable to and sepa-
rable from said valve member and movable to move said
valve member so as to open said air passage in response to
vacuum prevailing in the intake passageway downstream
of the throttle valve.
4 434 779
ORCUIT FOR CONTROLLING THE PRIMARY DWELL
TIME OF IGNITION TRANSFORMER
Norboni Yamamoto, Kariya; Tomoatsu Makino, Okazaki, and
Ryoichi Okuda, Kariya, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon-
denso Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
Filed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,454
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 27, 1981, 56-28901
Int. a.3 P02P I/OO
U.S. a. 123—609 9 Oalms
1. A circuit arrangement for controlling the dwell time of
current flowing in the primary winding of an ignition trans-
former in response to the ignition timing of an internal combus-
tion engine, comprising:
first means responsive to said ignition timing for generating
a ramp voltage having a constant peak value and a vari-
able rate of increase in voltage as a function of the speed
of said engine;
second means for successively generating a pulse having a
pulse height substantially equal to the peak value of said
ramp voltage and a pulse duration variable inversely as a
function of the speed of said engine;
third means coupled to said second means for integrating
said pulses supplied thereto to generate an integrated
output; and
fourth means for comparing the instantaneous value of said
ramp voltage with said integrated output to detect a dif-
ference therebetween and causing an ignition current to
flow in said primary winding for a period corresponding
to said difference.
1. An air induction control device for an internal combustion
engine having an intake passageway in which a throttle valve
is disposed, comprising:
means defining an air passage for communicating upstream
4,434,780
EXTENDIBLE GRILL
Glen L. Hepner, P.O. Box 120, Trenton, Utah 84338
FUed Jan. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 462,709
Int. a.3 F24C 1/16: F24B 3/00
U.S. a. 126—9 B 11 Claims
1. An expandible, portable grill, comprising:
a rigid, annular frame;
a plurality of parallel bars extending across the frame, each
fastened at one end to one side of the frame, and at its
other end to the opposite side of the frame; and
a pair of opposing extension members, each being substan-
tially U-shaped, having two parallel legs, and slidably
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
109
attached at each of its ends to one of a pair of said parallel
bars so that it is capable of being moved inwardly and
outwardly along said bars relative to the center of the
grill, and whereby said frame functions as a stop means for
limiting the movement of the extension members out-
wardly from the center of the grill, said extension mem-
bers being formed for remaining substantially in the plane
of the grill, when a load is impressed on its upper side and
the extension members are resting on other structures, as
in cooking.
4,434,781
THERMALLY EITiaENT BARBECUE GRILL
Walter Koziol, 18845 State Line Rd., Antioch, III. 60002
Filed Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,703
Int. a.3 A47J 37/00
U.S. CI. 126—25 R 15 Qaims
thermally actuated vent means will proportionately limit
the amount of air entering said base member.
4,434,782
HEATING FURNACE
Joseph P. Traeger, 250 S. Oak, Mt. Angel, Oreg. 97362
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,689
Int. a.3 F24C 1/14
U.S. a. 126-77 3 Qainu
10. A fuel efficient gas barbecue grill apparatus comprising:
an insulated base meml^r constructed and arranged to re-
ceive a gas inside intake conduit and a burner element
with a grill member positioned above said burner element
and noncombustible briquettes positioned between said
burner element and said grill member;
an insulated cover member dimensioned to enclose the top
of said base member;
vent means operatively associated with said base and cover
members; and
a thermally actuated vent means operatively positioned in
conjunction with said vent means in said base and cover
member so that upon the temperature in said base member
increasing, said thermally actuated vent means will pro-
poriionately permit more air to enter said base member
through said vent means in said base member and upon
said temperature in said base member decreasing, said
n chamber
ber and the
1. A furnace comprising:
an upstanding casing,
a combustion chamber mounted within and adjacep<^the
base of the casing,
a heat exchanger disposed over said combus
and a duct connecting the combustion c
heat exchanger,
a flue connecting with the exchanger ^tending out of the
casing,
insulation on the inside of the casing^surrounding the com-
bustion chamber and heat exchai^er,
a fresh air supply duct for supplying combustion air extend-
ing into the base of the casing, /
a first duct connection connecting the fresh air supply duct
and the combustion chamber whereby combustion air is
supplied the combustion chamber,
a second duct connection connecting the fresh air supply
duct and the heat exchanger,^
a first damper for said first duCt connection and a second
damper for said second duct connection, and damper
control means for efTectuliting opening of said first
damper with closing of the second and closing of the first
damper with opening of thp second.
4,434,783
CONTROLLED FIREPLACES FOR CONCURRENTLY
VARYING COMBUSTION AIR AND CONVECTED AIR
Michael C. O'Gorman, 16 The Lane, Fritwell nr. Bicester, En-
gland
per No. PCr/GB81/00080, § 371 Date Dec. 16, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 16, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/03218, PCT Pub.
Date Not. 12, 1981
PCT Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 333,864
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 2. 1980,
8014804
iBt a.} F24B 7/00
U.S. a. 126—121 7 Clains
1. A fireplace constructed for concurrently controlling the
flow of combustion air for a fire in the fireplace and convected
air for room heating, comprising:
an open-fronted inner casing, for accommodating a fire,
110
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
having a rear side panel, an open top panel, a bottom
panel, and two lateral side panels;
outer casing means disposed about the inner casing, means
for forming separate first and second air spaces within said
outer casing means and below the inner casing and means
for forming passage means within said outer casing means
communicating with the first air space and disposed for
providing flow of convected air upwardly from the first
air space along at least one of the side panels of the inner
casing, the first and second air spaces being adapted for
communication therebetween;
first air inlet means communicating with the first air space at
the front of the fireplace;
*A
second air inlet means communicating with the second air
space for introducing thereto air external to the room to
be heated;
air outlet means communicating with the passage means at
the front of the fireplace, above the level of the first air
inlet means;
valve means operable to vary the extent of communication
between the first and second air spaces for varying the
flow of air from the second air inlet means, through the
second air space, into the first air space; and
means for providing communication between said second air
space and said inner casing for supplying air from the
second air space into the inner casing and having control
vent means for controlling the supply of air into the inner
casing.
M34,784
VIEWING APPARATUS FOR A CHIMNEY
Frederic D. Van Patten, R.D. 1. Stock Rd., Hannibal, N.Y.
13074
FUed May 23, 1983, Scr. No. 497,038
Int a.J F23J 77/00
U^. a. 126—312 5 Claims
1. Apparatus for visually monitoring the vent chamber of a
chimney while the chimney is drawing exhaust gases through
the flue of a stove that includes
a hollow member sealed in one wall of the chimney below
the flue entrance of the stove, said hollow member having
an inside end face passing into the vent chamber of the
chimney and an outer end face protruding beyond said
one wall of the chimney,
a bracket means angularly disposed within the vent chamber
adjacent to the inside end face of said hollow member,
a mirror means supported upon the said bracket within the
vent chamber to permit the chamber to be viewed through
the hollow member,
an observation door having a transparent window therein,
said door being removably mounted over said outside end
face of said hollow member, and
sealing means acting between said door and said hollow
member to provide an airtight joint therebetween when
the door is in a closed position whereby said hollow mem-
ber provides an airtight passage communicating with the
vent chamber.
4,434,785
HEAT ACCUMULATOR
Nieb K. Knudsen, RoUghedsreJ 13. DK-8722 Hedenited, Den-
mark
Continuation of Ser. No. 261,207, M|iy 6, 1981, abandoned. This
appUcation Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 431,725
Claims priority, application Denmark, Sep. 6, 1979, 3720/79
Int. a.J F24H 7/00: F28D 00/00
U.S. a. 126—400 2 Claims
1. An underground heat accumulator of the low temperature
type for storing solar energy from a solar collector, comprising
a plurality of buried double pipe assemblies, each including an
inner pi;>e and an outer pipe connected in parallel and each
extending at an upper end thereof from a double, annular pipe
connection at the bottom of a central well having a cover,
energy from said collector being passed through the inner pipe
to the bottom of each double pipe assembly and from there to
the outer pipe thereof, the heat stored in the heat accumulator
being given off from the bottom of each outer pipe through the
respective inner pipe and supplied to an evaporator of a heat
pump by means of a pump, wherein the improvement com-
prises that at least the upper ends of the pipes are vertically,
conically inclined with a common geometric vortex near the
surface of the ground and that each outer pipe is formed with
a tubular insulating jacket extending from the bottom of the
central well to a depth where soil is substantially unaffected by
annual thermal fluctuations.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
111
ably mounted adjacent said lens for movement thereabout and
4,434,786
01402
Filed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 421,965
Int a.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—424
4Claims
^a^'.
4,434,787
SOLAR POWERED REACTOR
Ronald R. Young, II, Box 336XA, WoodriUe Cir., Sumter, S.C.
29150
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 87^80, Oct 23, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 870,349, Jan. 18,
1978, abandoned. This appUcation Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No.
301,007
Int a.J F24J 3/02; G02B 5/ 12
U.S. a. 12^-438 5 Claims
1. A solar powered reactor for collecting both direct and
reflected sunlight and converting solar energy contained
therein into heat energy of a heat transfer fluid, comprising a
reactor vessel defining a compartment for containing a heat
transfer fluid, an inlet in said vessel for introducing a heat
transfer fluid into said compartment, and an outlet in said
vessel for discharging heated fluid from said compartment, said
vessel containing an upper light transmitting wall portion for
passage of sunlight into said compartment, at least one heat
conducting metal element located in said compartment adja-
cent said light transmitting wall portion and in communication
with a heat transfer fluid in said compartment for receiving
sunlight thereon, a large concentrating lens positioned in
spaced relation above said vessel and light transmitting wall
portion for receiving and concentrating sunlight through said
light transmitting wall portion and onto said at least one metal
element in said compartment, solar reflector means support-
reflect sunlight onto said concentrating lens for concentrated
direction thereby into said reactor vessel.
1. An adjustable solar heat collector comprising a tank for
holding a fluid, a chain of separate light condensing members
on the tank at the exterior thereof, each member including a
lens, a separate frame holding each lens, a plurality of support
rods for each frame, each rod being adjustably mounted rela-
tive to its frame, a rod base for each rod, means connecting the
rod bases to form the chain,
means to adjust the frames and lenses on the rods to cause
the respective frames to approach or move away from the
tank, said means also being selectively operable to tilt the
frames with respect to the tank.
4434 788
ENHANCER OF ANTI-TUMOR EFFECT
Shigekazu Nakatsugawa, Kyoto, Japan, assignor to Yamasa
Shoyu Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,753
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 11, 1980, 55-109320
Int a.3 A61K 31/505
\i&, a 1»— 1.1 12 Claims
1. A method of enhancement of anti-tumor effect which
comprises administering to a tumor-bearing animal under an
anti-tumor treatment an enhancer or the anti-tumor effect
selected from the group consisting of 3'-deoxyguanosine and
3'-deoxyuridine.
4,434,789
APPARATUS FOR TREATING CARONOMA OF THE
UTERINE CERVIX
PulhitU(urthi P. Kumar, Omaha, Nebr., assignor to The Board of
Regents of the University of Nebraska, Uncobi, Nebr.
DiTision of Ser. No. 104,358, Dec. 17, 1979, Pat No. 4^31,131.
This appUcation Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278.738
Int a.J A61N 5/00
MS. a. 128—1.2 21 Claims
1. Applicator apparatus for radioactive therapy of uterine
cervix carcinoma and comprising:
A. a tubular tandem having a longitudinally extending finite
tandem-length defined by a closed lead-end for insertion
through the uterine cervix and a closeable trail-end per-
mitting charging of radioactive material into the tandem
leadward portion, the tandem trailward length portion
lying substantially parallel to a sagittal-plane;
an adapter member slidably surrounding the tandem
trailward portion and including releasable arresting means
for establishing the adapter member at an empirically
selected position between the tandem lead-end and the
trail-end;
two ovoidal assemblies each comprising an elongate
tubular arm having a directionally longitudinal fmite arm-
length less than said tandem-length and defined by a
closed leading-end and a closeable trailing-end permitting
charging of radioactive material into the arm lead-length
portion, each ovoidal assembly also comprising an ovoid
type spacer means removably surrounding the arm lead-
B.
C.
112
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
length substantially at its leading-end. each ovoidal assem-
bly at the arm trail-length portion being removably pivot-
ably attachable to the adapter member whereby the lead-
ing-end of the respective arms is free to move laterally
away from the tandem leadward length portion;
D. septa protection means for restraining the laterally mov-
able arms leading-ends within a mid-plane p>erpendicular
to the sagittal-plane and located substantially midway the
vasicovaginal and rectovaginal anatomical septa; and
E. the septa protection means comprising arm trail-length
portions spaced on opposite transverse sides from the
tandem trail-length portion and lying substantially parallel
to the sagittal-plane and further comprising pivot means
extending directionally transversely between the adapter
member and arm trail-length portions of the two ovoidal
assemblies.
4,434,790
VAPORIZER SUBSYSTEM FOR AN ANESTHESIA
MACHINE
Rnasell Olesen, Huntington, N.Y., assignor to Puritan>Bennett
Corporation, Kansas City, Mo.
FUed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,994
Int a.3 A61M U/00
U.S. a. 128—200.14 11 Claims
I. A vaporizer subsystem for use with a gas anesthesia ma-
chine providing a diluent flow of oxygen and anesthesia gas for
selective diversion through one of a plurality of direct reading
vaporizers, and providing an independent oxygen flow for
selective diversion through at least one universal type vapor-
izer, said vaporizer subsystem comprising:
at least three isolation valves, operable independently of
controls on the vaporizers, and each movable between an
I on position in which gas flow is diverted through a corre-
sponding vaporizer and an\)fr position in which the corre-
sponding vaporizer is isolated; and
interlock means for preventing more than one of said isola-
tion valves from being switched to the one position at any
particular time, wherein only a selected one of the vapor-
izers, whether of the direct-reading or the universal type,
may be coupled to the anesthesia system at any time, and
wherein said interlock means functions automatically to
move a previously selected isolation value from its on
position to its off position by selecting and actuating a
different one of said isolation valves.
4,434,791
SURGICAL RETRACTOR ARRAY SYSTEM
W. Dale Darnell, Caledonia, Miss., assignor to Humboldt Prod-
nets Corp., Columbus, Miss.
FUed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,082
Int. a.J A61B n/02
U.S. a. 128—20 21 Claims
1. A universal, surgical retractor frame array system assem-
blable into a plurality of annular, hinged retractor frame units
of various diflerent annular shapes adaptable to conform to the
surface contours of different body portions of surgical patients
for retaining elastic tubing stay members inserted into notches
spaced apart around each retractor frame unit periphery, said
system comprising a plurality of rigid, planar frame sections of
various outline shapes in the plane of the frame section, each
frame section having a flrst straight end portion with a hole
therethrough and a second straight end portion with a
threaded hole therethrough, each frame section having a uni-
form transverse cross-section with contoured notches spaced
apart and extending inwardly from a common side forming
each retractor unit outer periphery when hingedly joined to
other frame sections of said array system; and threaded con-
necting means for insertion through said end portion holes to
releasably and hingedly connect the two end portions of each
said frame section to the end portions of other frame sections of
said array system to permit said frame sections to be releasably
connected together to alternatively form any of various differ-
ently shaped, annular retractor frame units.
4,434,792
ADJUSTABLE ABDUCnON DEVICE FOR TREATMENT
OF METATARSUS ADDUCTUS
Steven L. Rosenberg, 2901 WUsliire Blvd., Ste. 345, Santa
Monica, Calif. 90403
FUed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,724
Int. Q\? A61F 3/00
U.S. a. 128—80 R 4 Claims
1. A therapeutic device for treatment of metatarsus adductus
comprising:
a shoe with a sole, an innersole, a heel end, a toe end, a
medial side, a lateral side and a medial vamp/quarter last
seam;
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
113
a support bracket rigidly secured to said medial side;
means attached to said support bracket at a position anterior
of said last seam, adjacent said toe end, and laterally of
said medial side, for abducting a foot at the flrst metaUr-
sal-phalangeal joint, said abducting means being laterally
adjustable from the external medial sidjc of said shoe,
wherein said abducting means comprises a rigid resilient
plate and an adjusting screw, said plate being secured to
said bracket at a position posterior of said last seam, said
adjusting screw being threadably attached to said bracket
whereby, the orienution of the worker is adjusubly secur-
able by said worker with respect to said structure.
4,434,794
DISPOSABLE EAR PLUG
Howard S. Lcight, 3945 Ridgemont Dr., Malibu, CaUf. 90265
FUed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,367
Int. a.' A61F U/02
U.S. a. 128—152 6 Claims
anterior of said last seam, said plate abutting to said screw
and being laterally movable at its unsecured end in re-
sponse to advancement of said adjusting screw; and
means disposed to said heel end for supporting a heel of said
foot in a manner to prevent the metatarsal foot joint from
collapsing as the forefoot is abducted, wherein said heel
supporting means comprises a pad, said pad having a top
face, said top face having a region of maximum thickness
closest to anterior and medial edges of said pad and having
regions of minimum thickness along lateral and posterior
edges of said pad thereby to form a varus wedge.
4,434,793
PELVIC STABILIZER
Charles A. WiUits, 9791 U Cresta Cir., Huntington Beach,
Calif. 92646
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 294,906
Int. a.J A61F n/00; A61B 79/00
U.S. a. 128—134 12 Qaims
1. A device usable in diverse environments for positioning a
worker adjacent to a structure in such a fashion that said
worker can perform useful tasks, said device comprising:
a shaped, rigid reaction surface adapted to generally con-
form to the back of said worker; said surface having exten-
sions adapted to overlie the hip areas of said worker;
fastening means for securing said surface to said worker;
a single stabilizer arm having a proximal end, a proximal
portion, and a distal end;
at least one of said extensions having an adjustable connector
attached thereto which is releasably connectable to said
proximal portion;
clamp means at said distal end for providing attachment to
said adjacent structure.
Ife *'l?A
3. An ear plug comprising:
a resilient plug body which is hollow to form a cavity, said
plug body having a closed front end and an open rear end
opening to said cavity enabling its reception in the ear and
having outside walls adapted to directly contact the sur-
face of the ear canal;
said plug body is constructed of dip-molded closed cell foam
material, with said outside walls of the body deflning a
multiplicity of small bumps formed solely by closed cells
of said form material which lie at the surface of said body;
a stem lying in said hollow body, said stem having a front
end lying at the front of said cavity, and said stem having
a rearward end extending rearwardly substantially no
further than the rear of said plug body;
said stem being freely slideable within at least the rearward
portion of said cavity.
4,434,795
INSTRUMENT FOR APPLYING LIGATING CLIPS
Robert W. Mericle, Bridgewater, N.J., assignor to Ethicon, Inc.,
Somerrille, N.J.
DivUion of Ser. No. 49,379, Jun. 18, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,180
Int. a.3 A61B / 7/00. 17/12
U.S. a. 128—303 R «. 3 Claims
1. An instrument for applying a ligating cUp, said clip having
flrst and second leg members joined at their proximal ends by
a resilient hinge means and terminating at their distal ends in
latch means, said instrument comprising a pair of handles
pivoted about a hinge point, said handles crossing at said hinge
point and extending beyond the hinge point to form a pair of
clip closing jaws having opposed inner faces, each of said jaws
having a recessed clip receiving channel in the substantially
planar inner face thereof, each said channel having a base
composed of two stepped substantially planar segmenu, which
segmenu are generally parallel to the hinge line of said hinge
point and a pair of side walls extending perpendicularly from
said base segments, said channel extending from the tip of said
114
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
jaw furtherest from said hinge point rearwardly towards said
hinge point, said channel having a length at least equal to the
length of the clip to be applied by said instrument, each chan-
nel having an opposed cylindrical recess disposed at the step in
the base of the channel and extending between said side walls
and being spaced from the tip of said jaw, the said walls ex-
tending from the base segment in each channel furtherest from
said hinge point being greater than those on the other side of
said step whereby the jaws do not interfere with the closing
and latching of the clip.
duct after becoming swollen therein and act thereby to
retain said shell within said duct.
4,434,796
SURGICAL STAPLE, A METHOD OF AND FORCEPS
FOR ITS REMOVAL
Igor S. Karapetian; Ivan A. Korolkov; Nikolai N. Kapitanov;
Boris A. SmimoT, and Tatyana L. Ivanova, all of Moacow,
U,S^.R., aasignon to Vsesojozny Nauchno-Issledovatelsky I
Ispytateloy Institut Meditiiiukoi Tekhniki, Moscow,
U^^.R.
FUed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,398
Claims priority, appUcation U.S.S.R., Apr. 7, 1981, 3275314
Int a.3 A61B 17/08
MS. a. 128—335 4 Claims
1. A surgical staple, comprising two legs, a web intercon-
necting said two legs, pointed-end rods adapted to be fitted on
each of the staple legs, each of said rods having a head with a
slot for said web to pass, a through hole or passage in said rod
for the respective staple leg to pass, said hole being open at said
slot in said head and at the side surface of said rod, while the
rigidity of said staple legs decreases from the zone of their
interconnection with the web towards their end.
4,434,797
CATHETER
Tonten Silander, Stockholm, Sweden, aaaignor to AB Tesi,
Stockholm, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 202,439, Aug. 19, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Not. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 443,753
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden, Jan. 12, 1979, 7900282
Int a.3 A61M 29/00
U.S. a. 128—343 7 Claims
4,434,798
CONTROL aRCUrr of a functional AND
THERAPEUTIC STIMULATOR
AmMkJ Tmkoczy; Miha Stopar; Duaan FUipic, aU of LJabUana,
and Joze Opcka, Vrhika, aU of Yugoslavia, asaignors to Go*
reiUc To?anui Goapodiqjske Opremc N,Sol.O. VelaU. Ve-
leiUc, Yugoalaria
FUed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,463
Clafans priority, appUcation Yugoskria, Oct. 23, 1980,
2724/80
Int a? A61N 1/30
U.S. a. 128—421 3 Claims
1. A control circuit for a functional and therapeutic stimula-
tor that produces output pulses, which control circuit com-
prises a battery, switching means for connecting said battery to
the circuit and for selecting between proportional and cyclic
modes of operation of the stimulator, a first control means for
adjusting the relative amplitude of the output pulse of the
stimulator, a second control means for adjusting th^ absolute
amplitude of the output pulse of the stimulator, a pulse group
generator for defining the length of pulse groups of the stimu-
lator in the cyclic mode of operation, and an electronic switch-
ing means for switching on the stimulator.
4,434,799
ULTRASOUND APPARATUS FOR MEDICAL
EXAMINATIONS
Jon C. Taenzer, Palo Alto, Calif., assignor to Siemens AG,
BerUn A Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 354,011
Int CV A61B 10/00
U.S. a. 128—460 22 Claims
1. A catheter, intended to be inserted into a body duct to
maintain the passageway therethrough, comprising:
a tubular shell of a plastic material which is provided with
retaining means in the form of multiple noncontiguous
beads on the outer surface of said shell; said beads being
constrained to encircle and at least partially cover said
sheU and being characterized by consisting of a dehy-
drated hydrophUic plastic substance which swells upon
absorbing body fluids such that said beads are of a substan-
tially greater diameter when in the swoUen state and
thereby fimction to enlarge adjacent portions of said body
[JTIICM«WZ«II0«
1. An ultrasound apparatus for medical examinations of a
patient, comprising in combination:
(a) an ultrasonic wave-generating transducer for providing
ultrasonic waves;
(b) a first ultrasound window;
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
lis
(c) first guiding means containing a fluid medium for guiding
said ultrasonic waves to said first ultrasound window;
(d) a second ultrasound window;
(e) said first and said second ultrasound windows defining an
examination gap for introducing and insonifying a portion
of a patient positioned therein, said gap having a main
insonification direction;
(0 an ultrasonic receiving transducer for converting at least
a portion of an acoustic image field received from said gap
into electrical signals;
(g) second guiding means containing a fluid medium for
guiding ultrasound transmitted through said gap from said
second ultrasound window to said ultrasound receiving
transducer;
(h) mirror means associated with said second guiding means
and having a curved surface for focusing ultrasound
waves passing through said gap at said ultrasonic receiv-
ing transducer, thereby forming said acoustic image field
and forming an image of said organ of the patient on said
receiving transducer; and
(i) means for oscillating said curved mirror means, said
curved mirror means thereby sweeping said acoustic
image field across said receiving transducer; ^
wherein said mirror means comprise a single concave mirror,
having an ellipsoidal surface for reflecting said ultrasound
waves passing through said gap, and wherein said ellipsoidal
surface is a portion of an ellipsoid having a first and a second
focus, and wherein said mirror is positioned such that said first
focus is located within said gap and said second focus is located
on said ultrasonic receiving transducer.
4,434,800
TYMPANOMETRIC APPARATUS
Michael Anson, London; Andrew C. Pinder, Bamet and Alan R.
Palmer, St. Albans, all of England, assignors to National
Research Development Corporation; London, England
Filed Jun. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 385,265
CUdms priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jun. 10, 1981,
8117847
Int. a.3 A61B 6/00
U.S. a. 128—665 10 Claims
1. Tympanometric apparatus comprising a housing including
first and second mutually transversely communicated portions
of generally tubular form, said first housing portion having a
speculum at one end thereof, viewing means at the other end
thereof, first optical means located between said speculum and
viewing means, and a light source and a sound source both
located between said speculum and first optical means and
respectively operable to project a light beam and sound
through said speculum, and said second housing portion com-
municating with said first housing portion adjacent to said first
optical means, having a photodetector extending across a small
area thereof spaced from said first optical means, and second
optical means located between said photodetector and said first
optica] means, said speculum affording application of said
beam and sound towards the tympanum of a subject to be
examined with the apparatus, said first optical means partially
transmitting and reflecting reflection of said beam from said
tympanum respectively towards said viewing means and pho-
todetector, said viewing means faciliuting direction of said
speculum relative to said tympanum, said second optical means
focusing said beam of reflection in the plane of said photode-
tector, and said sound causing oscillation of said tympanum
with consequent variation in the optical path of said reflection
and the output of said photodetector.
4,434,801
APPARATUS FOR TESTING PHYSICAL CONDITION OF
A SELF-PROPELLED VEHICLE RIDER„
Oscar Jiminez, Miami, and Frank J. Bianco, Pembroke Pines,
both of Fla., assignors to Biotechnology, Inc., Miami, Fla.
Continuation-in-pari of Ser. No. 145,765, Apr. 30, 1980, Pat. No.
4,367,752. This appUcation Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,329
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 11,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61B 5/02
U.S. a. 128—689 30 CUims
5. Apparatus for testing the physical condition of a cyclist
comprising means adapted to be mounted on the subject for
monitoring and deriving a first signal indicative of heart activ-
ity of the subject, means adapted to be mounted on a cycle for
deriving a second signal indicative of distance traversed by the
cycle during testing, input means for deriving at least one
signal indicative of a predetermined physiological parameter of
the subject, a clock source for deriving a timing signal during
testing of the cyclist, computer means responsive to the first,
second, predetermined physiological parameter and timing
signals for calculating deriving a signal indicative of physical
activity of the cyclist being tested, and indicator means respon-
sive to the physical activity signal.
4,434,802
BLOOD COLLECTION UNIT
^FraBcois RilUet Geneva, Switscrland, aaaignor to Deautex
Development k Investment Establishment Vaduz, Liechten-
stein
Continuation-in-pari of Ser. No. 233,168, Feb. 10, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation Jul. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 400,711
Claims priority, appUcation European Pat Off., Jan. 21, 1982,
82200074
Int a? A61B 5/14
U.S. a. 128—764 17 Claims
1. A blood-collection unit for use in connection with a tubu-
lar needle-holder carrying a double-ended hollow needle ex-
tending coaxially within the holder, the unit comprising:
a transparent primary tube having first and second open ends
and a narrow bore having a diameter larger than the
outside diameter of the needle, said needle extending into
said bore;
116
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a transparent secondary tube of considerably larger diameter
than the primary tube and considerably greater volumet-
ric capacity than the primary tube, the secondary tube
having at least one open end;
the narrow bore of the primary tube having, a diameter
which is significantly closer to the diameter of the needle
bore than to the inner diameter of the secondary tube, the
. difference of the primary tube narrow bore diameter and
the needle bore diameter being such that when blood
enters the primary tube from the needle a peripheral lat-
eral attraction is produced on the blood flux which comes
to fully occupy the primary tube narrow bore, the length
\—v.
-12
U
of the primary tube being at least 2D-I-1 where D is the
inner diameter of the secondary tube and 1 is the length of
the needle which is penetrable in the primary tube;
a stopper having a skirt sealably fitting over and around an
open end of one of the two tubes and sealing membrane
closing the end of the tube;
means concentrically connecting the primary and secondary
tubes whereby at least one open end of the primary tube is
enclosed in the secondary tube, the unit forming a closed
communicating space for the collection of blood and said
open end of the primary tube having a free passageway
such that a complete blood suspension including liquid
and solid phases can pass from one tube to the other.
4,434,803
DEVICE FOR FOETAL BLOOD SAMPLING IN UTERO
Philippe Jeanty, Ecaussinnes, Belgium, assignor to Laboratoires
Biotrol S.A., Paris, France
FUed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,321
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 6, 1980, 80 17416
Int. a.3 A61B 6/00. 10/00
VJS. a. 128—770 4 Claims
^
10
:i.
1. A device for sampling blood from the umbilical cord of a
foetus in utero, said device comprising:
(a) two cannula-forming tubes fixed to each other along their
lengths, said cannula-forming tubes having outer dimen-
I sions suitable for passing through a mother's uterus to
reach a foetus in the uterus and having proximal ends
which, in use, are adjacent to the user and distal ends
which, in use, are adjacent the umbilical cord;
(b) a stem sized and shaped to fit slidably in one of said
cannula-forming tubes, said stem having a distal end termi-
nating in a resilient hook which is sized and shaped to
catch the umbilical cord of a foetus in utero, said stem
being sized and shaped so that, when it is inseried in said
one of said cannula-forming tubes in use, the proximal end
of said stem extends outwardly of the proximal end of said
one of said cannula-forming tubes for manipulation by the
user and the distal end of said stem extends outwardly of
the distal end of said one of said cannula-forming tubes in
position to hold the umbilical cord in position for sam-
pling;
(c) a hollow needle sized and shaped to fit slidably in the
other of said cannula-forming tubes, said hollow needle
having a sharp distal end and being sized and shaped so
that, when it is inserted in said other of said cannula-form-
ing tubes in use, the proximal end of said hollow needle
extends outwardly of the proximal end of said other of
said cannula-forming tubes for manipulation by the user
and the distal end of said hollow needle extends outwardly
from the distal end of said other of said cannula-forming
tubes in position to puncture an umbilical cord being held
by the resilient hook at the distal end of said stem;
(d) a trocar sized and shaped to fit slidably in said one of said
cannula-forming tubes, said trocar having a sharp distal
end; and
(e) means to secure said trocar in said one of said cannula-
forming tubes with the distal end of said trocar extending
forwardly of the distal end of said one of said cannula-
forming tubes.
4,434,804
SMOKING ARTICLE
Anthony J. N. Bolt, and Brian C. Chard, both of Bristol, En-
gland, assignors to Imperial Group Limited, Bristol, England
Filed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,986
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 21, 1980,
8020405
Int. a.J A24B 3/12
U.S. a. 131—309 6 Claims
/?
3-
JUL
-'^^£.
T
u
1. A method of introducing a quantity of solid particulate
flavor material having a particle size in the range 3-2S micron
into the tobacco rod of a ready-made cigarette or cigar, the
method comprising entraining the paniculate material in a
stream of air to form a cloud of the particulate material, and
causing the cloud of particles to enter and pass along the to-
bacco rod from the light-up end to the mouth end so as to
provide a concentration of particulate material in the tobacco
rod that is greater at either end of said rod than between its
ends.
4,434,805
APPUCATOR FOR APPLYING GLUE TO A
TRAVELLING STREAM OF TIPPING PAPER
Floyd V. Hall, Durham, N.C., assignor to Liggett Group Inc.,
Montvale, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 163,065, Jun. 26, 1980, Pat. No. 4,361,156.
This application Jun. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,537
Int. a.3 A24D 1/04. 3/00. 3/04
U.S. a. 131—362 7 Claims
1. A filter cigarette construction comprising
a tobacco column;
a filter at one end of said tobacco column; and
a strip of tipping paper circumferentially disposed about said
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
117
tobacco column and said filter, said strip having a layer of
glue thereon for securing said strip to said tobacco column
and said filter and auxiliary means within said layer for
securing said strip to said tobacco column.
4,434,806
DENTAL FLOSS HOLDER
James M. Givens, 4929 Collwood Blvd., C.5, San Diego, Calif.
92115
Filed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,988
Int. a.3 A61C 15/00
U.S. a. 132-91 1 Qaim
1. A dental floss holder comprising:
(a) a crossbar defining a pair of oppositely directed lateral
arms;
(b) a central stem extending generally orthogonally from
generally centrally of said crossbar to a terminus;
(c) a corridor defined in the end of each of said arms and
another corridor defined in said terminus for entraining a
length of dental floss therethrough such that two lengths
span between respective lateral arms and said terminus;
(d) a tie-down integral with and proximate to said crossbar
to tie the ends of length of floss the intermediate portions
of which are passed tautly through said corridors;
(e) said lateral arms extending out well beyond the lateral
extent of said terminus such that said two lengths of floss
converge together in one direction such that when said
strands are engaged between teeth and the respective
upper and lower jaws and said holder is reciprocated in a
direction axial of said stem, said two strands saw up and
down between the teeth;
(0 said lateral arms, stem, terminus, and tiedown being uni-
tary such that said holder is a one-piece unit;
(g) said tie-down comprising an apertured spindle extended
from the crossbar opposite the direction of said stem to
permit tying down floss through the aperture in said spin-
dle, such that said apertured spindle defines said tie-down;
(h) said spindle being tapered to a point to define a tooth-
pick-projection, and
(i) said entire holder being symmetrically extended about the
axis of said spindle whereby said holder is easily spinnable
to encourage the nervous twiddling thereof by the owner;
and,
0) said lateral arms being resilient and bowed toward said
terminal to impart a positive elasticity into said holder and
positively tension said two lengths.
4,434 807
DENTAL FLOSSING AID
Joseph E. Huskey, P.O. Box 476, Coppcrhill, Tenn. 37317
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,116
Int. a.3 A61C 75/00
U.S. a. 132-92 R 7 claims
1. A dental flossing device, comprising:
a floss mounting assembly including means for holding a
supply of dental floss;
an elongated extension member attached to and protruding
from said mounting assembly;
tensioning means associated with said extension member for
developing tension in a length of dental floss drawn from
the floss supply held at said mounting assembly when the
floss is drawn along a floss path from the floss supply
through said tensioning means along the length of said
extension member toward the outermost end of said exten-
sion member, said tensioning means including a plurality
of floss accepting bores formed in said extension member
and spaced apart from one another along said extension
member, each said floss accepting bore extending through
said extension member at an angle to the longitudinal axis
of the extension member;
floss advancing means for overcoming the tension of said
tensioning means to facilitate withdrawing additional
lengths of dental floss from the supply of dental floss held
at said floss mounting assembly, said floss advancing
means including a first floss engaging member movably
mounted on said extension member to engage the length
of floss at a point in the floss path between adjacent one of
said floss accepting bores, whereby movement of said
floss engaging member increases the length of the floss
path to be followed by the length of floss.
4,434,808
ANTI-SKID DEVICE FOR A CANE, CRUTCH, OR THE
LIKE
Mark G. Burak, 6045 Fifth Ave. South, MinneapolU, Minn.
55419
Filed Jun. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 389,646
Int. a.J A45B 9/04; A61H 3/02
U.S. a. 135—80 13 Oaims
I. Anti-skid device for a cane, crutch, or the like having a
bottom end and a hand hold member, comprising, in combina-
tion: a non-skid member; means for movably mounting the
non-skid member between a first, raised non-engaged position
and a second, lowered surface engaging position and allowing
the non-skid member to rotate about a vertical axis generally
parallel to but spaced from the cane, with the non-skid member
having a removed portion for partially surrounding the lower
portion of the cane and defining a first abutment portion and a
second abutment poriion located on opposite sides of the lower
end portion of the cane; means formed on the non-skid member
for contacting the surface in a non-skid manner, with the non-
skid member being rotatable about the vertical axis between a
first position wherein the first abutment portion abuts with a
side of the lower end portion of the cane and a second position
wherein the second abutment portion abuts with the opposite
118
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
side of the lower end portion of the cane to insure that the
surface contacting means engages with the surface even
though the cane is at an angle to the surface and to aid in
knocking off any surface residue such as snow or ice from the
^'^-^
non-skid member; means for biasing the non-skid member in
one of the first or second raised or lowered positions; and
means for moving the non-skid member against the bias of the
biasing means to the other of its first and second raised or
lowered positions.
4,434,809
PIPE COUPLING
John I. F. Rogstadius, Sidenivansviigen 6, Alvijo, Sweden
per No. PCr/SE80/00308, § 371 Date Jul. 15, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 15, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01737, PCT Pub.
Date Jun. 25, 1981
PCT FUed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 285,103
Claims priority, application Sweden, Dec. 6, 1979, 7910060
Int. a.i F16K 43/00
UJS. a. 137—318 7 Claims
1. A pipe coupling for connecting a branch pipe to a feed-
pipe, comprising coupling parts sealingly embracing the feed-
pipe, a cylindrical guide passageway in one of the coupling
parts having an axis radial to said feed-pipe, a piston sealingly
inserted in the guide passageway for rotation about said axis
and provided at its inner end with a knife-shaped cutting-up
member and formed with a passageway for flow connection
between the feed-pipe and the branch pipe connected to the
coupling part, so that in assembled position of the coupling
parts a portion of the feed-pipe radially intersects the guide
passageway, characterized in that the knife-shaped member of
the piston is offset to one side of the axis and is located within
said passageway alongside said intersecting portion of the
feed-pipe, and the cutting edge of the knife-shaped member
extends in one direction longitudinally of said piston from a
point alongside said pipe to at least to the same level as the shell
surface of said feed-pipe portion located fartherest inwardly in
the guide passageway, so that upon rotation of the piston
without any axial translation, said knife-shaped member passes
from one side of the feed-pipe to the other and cuts up at least
a first hole in the feed pipe.
4,434,810
BI-DIRECnONAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
Gordon E. Atkinson, Yellow Springs, Ohio, assignor to Vemay
Laboratories, Inc., Yellow Springs, Ohio
Continuation-in-put of Scr. No. 168,981, Jul. 14, 1980, Pat. No.
4,341,239. This application May 24, 1982, Scr. No. 380,971
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 27,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. 0.^¥16K 17/18
U.S. a. 137—493 14 Claims
1. A bi-directional pressure relief valve comprising:
a substantially cylindrical main body portion having a cen-
tral longitudinal axis and defining a flow path through said
valve;
said cylindrical main body portion terminating at one end
thereof in a lip portion;
said lip portion having a curved contour about an axis of
.curvature extending substantially perpendicularly to and
intersecting said central longitudinal axis;
said lip portion having a linear contour perpendicular to said
central longitudinal axis such that said lip portion is radi-
ally asymmetrical about said central longitudinal axis;
at least one normally closed slit formed in said lip poriion;
and
said main body and lip poriions being formed of elastomeric
material such that said slit opens to permit flow through
said lip poriion in a forward direction at or above a first
predetermined pressure level, closes to check flow
through said lip poriion at pressures between said first
pressure level and a second predetermined pressure level,
and said lip portion collapses, thereby opening said slit and
permitting reverse flow through said lip poriion at reverse
flow pressures greater than said second pressure level. ,
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
119
4,434,811
COUPLING SEAL AND METHOD OF ASSEMBLY
Ian G. Murdoch, Longview, Tex., assignor to The Oilgear Com-
pany, Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Jul. 28, 1982, Scr. No. 402,561
Int. a.^ F16J 9/12
U.S. a. 137—515 6 Gains
*, ""i
1. An assembly of operatively flow-through members de-
tachably secured together comprising a body member having a
bore and a pin member having a cylindrical shaped lead end
fitted in said bore;
said pin member having an annular slot in the cylindrical
surface of said lead end, a spiral groove in the cylindrical
surface of said lead end that extends from an end of said
lead end to said annular slot, said spiral groove having a
depth approximating but not greater than the depth of said
annular slot; and said spiral groove makes an angle of not
more than 10 degrees with said annular slot;
sealing means between said body member and said pin dis-
posed in said annular slot, said sealing means comprising a
pair of back up rings and an O-ring, one of said backup
rings is made of very rigid material, said one of said back
up rings is cut through transversely thereof to provide an
end for introducing said one of said back up rings into said
spiral groove and threading it into said annular slot, said
other of said back up rings abutting said one of said back
up rings and said O-ring.
4,434,812
FLUIDIC GAIN CHANGER
Robert L. Woods, Arlington, Tex., assignor to The United States
of America u represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Apr. 18, 1983, Ser. No. 486,134
Int. a.3 F15C 3/00. 1/08
MS, a. 137—829 6 Claims
menury fluidic receivers being offset symmetrically
above and below said plane; and
means for deflecting the fluidic jet from said planar fluidic
amplifier in a direction perpendicular to said plane to
linearly vary the gain between said pair of complemenury
fluidic receivers in a complemenury manner.
4.434,813
LAMINAR PROPORTIONAL AMPLIHER AND
LAMINAR JET ANGULAR RATE SENSOR WITH
ROTAHNG SPLITTER FOR NULL ADJUSTMENT
George Mon, Silver Spring, Md., assignor to The United States
of America u represented by the Secretary of the Army,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 323,146
Int. a.3 F15C 3/00
U.S. a. 137-829 g Claims
1. An apparatus comprising: f
input means having a fluid supply means;
a fluid supply nozzle to supply fluid to a laminar flow pro-
portional amplifier;
a plurality of fluid outputs;
control nozzle means to control fluid flow through said
amplifier from said fluid supply nozzle to said fluid out-
puts, wherein said control nozzle means acts directly on
said fluid to proportionally control said fluid output;
a flow splitter meant to proportionally divide the fluid flow
flowing from said fluid supply nozzle to said fluid outputs,
said flow splitter being positioned routable and externally
adjusuble to split the flow between saiQ outputs in order
to apportion the fluid flow between the outputs; and
means to externally route said flow splitter means to efliect
a null offset.
1. A fluidic gain changer comprising:
a planar fluidic amplifier, having a power jet and means for
deflecting within a plane the fluidic jet from said power
jet:
a pair of complementary fluidic receivers downstream from
s&id planar fluidic amplifier, each of said pair of comple-
4,434,814
THROUGH FAULT PRESSURE HLTER FOR FAULT
PRESSURE RELAY
Gerald O. Usry, Rome, Ga., assignor to Genend Electric Com-
pany, N.Y.
Division of Scr. No. 858,966, Dec. 9, 1977, Pat No. 4^38,969.
This appUcatioa Mar. 8, 1982, S». No. 355,940
Int. CV F15D 1/02
U.S. CL 138—44 4 Clidms
1. A through-fault pressure filter for attenuating sinusoidal
pressure variations in liquid-filled electrical apparatus compris-
ing:
a disc-shaped member of liquid impervious material having a
pair of first and second opposing surfaces and a plurality
of periodic pressure attenuating pasuges through said
120
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
disc, said passages having a cumulative cross-sectional
area and cumulative length corresponding to a single
4,434,815
PIPEWORK
Thomas Flaherty, Altrincham, and Richard H. Price, Sale, both
of England, assignors to John Kennedy (Ovil Engineering)
Limited, Manchester, England
Filed Apr. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 370,750
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 23, 1981,
8112547; Jul. 1, 1981, 8120319
Int. a.J F16L 55/18
VJS. a. 138—97 6 Qaims
ters of said adapter and said boss and facing away from said
boss,
(c) a first sealing gasket mounted on said adapter adjacent to
said shoulder,
(d) a hollow compression head having one end of a diameter
equal to said adapter and internally threaded so as to be
threaded upon said boss to radially expand the same about
said shoulder,
(e) said compression head having its opposite end provided
theoretical passage having a ratio of length to diameter of
from 10 to 1 to 40 to 1.
I fj^ / / 'is
111 ' "* «C ' 4S
«a» isft
with an externally threaded boss of a diameter equal to said
threaded boss provided by said adapter,
(0 said compression head providing a second annular shoulder
extending between the different diameters of its ends,
(g) a second gasket mounted on said annular shoulder provided
by said compression head, and
(h) a compression nut internally threaded so as to be threaded
upon said threaded boss of said compression head to radially
expand the same about said shoulder provided by said com-
pression head.
1. A cutting apparatus for insertion into a branch pipe to cut
an aperture in a liner located within a main pipe with which the
branch pipe communicates, the apparatus comprising:
a body;
a cutting device supported by the body;
rotating means for rotating said cutting device, said rotating
means being mounted with said body thereby preventing
relative axial motion between said rotating means and said
body;
a clamping member mounted with said body, said clamping
member substantially surrounding said body and extend-
ing over the substantial length of said body;
means for actuating said clamping member so that it presses
against the inside of the branch pipe in order to hold said
body and said rotating means locked with respect to such
branch pipe;
means for advancing said cutting device relative to said
body; and
said rotating means including a motor which is articulated to
said body.
4,434,817
EDGE YARN CLAMP FOR A WEAVING MACHINE
Walter Gruber, Constance, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Sulzer Brothers Ltd., Winterthur, Switzerland
Filed Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,453
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 12, 1981,
149/81
Int. Q.^ D03D 47/00
U.S. a. 139—429 4 Claims
4,434,816
SERVICE LINE INTERIOR BY-PASS FITTING
Bernard A. Di Giovanni, 96 Davis Ave., Hauppauge, N.Y. 11787,
and Francisco J. Ciminiello, 21 Victor La., Woodbury, L.L,
N.Y. 11797
Division of Ser. No. 955,990, Oct. 30, 1978, abandoned. This
appUcation Aug. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 181,671
Int. a.J F16L 55/18
VS. a. 138—109 6 Claims
1. A fitting for a blind liner assembly for service pipes, with
the fitting having fixed attachment to one end of the liner
wherein the improvement comprises:
(a) a hollow adapter having an externally threaded boss ex-
tending axially from one side thereof and of a diameter less
than said adapter,
(b) an annular shoulder extending between the different diame-
1. An edge yam clamp for a weaving machine comprising
at least one spring-biased reciprocally mounted clamping
jaw having a foot, and
a push-on resilient shoe slidably mounted on said foot and
having a clamping cap engaged against a rearward part of
said foot.
4,434,818
WIRE FEEDING AND WIRE FORMING DEVICE FOR
PAPER CLIP MAKING MACHINE
Jaw S. Yeh, Taipei, Taiwan, assignor to Shu-Chang Chen, Taipei
Hsieng, Taiwan
FUed Aug. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 412,181
iBt a.J B21F 45/16
VS. a. 140—82 5 Claims
5. An apparatus used for making paper clips downstream of
a cutting machine, comprising, continuous belt means for
receiving and advancing cut wires provided with pieces of
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
121
magnet at regular intervals for attracting and arraying cut
wires, continuous chain means provided downstream of said
belt means with one end of the conveying path thereof over-
lapping said belt means, said chain means including regularly
spaced apart catching projections thereon for taking the cut
wires from said belt means, first wheel means overlappingly
provided downstream of said chain means and having regu-
larly spaced catching teeth and first grooves at the same spaced
apart intervals as said catching teeth, idler wheel means coop-
erative with said chain means to provide elevation in the path
of said chain means to allow the cut wires to coincide with said
catching teeth and said first grooves, said chain means leaving
the cut wires with said first grooves after passing over said
idler wheel means, second wheel means in contact with said
first means, having second grooves at the same spaced apart
intervals as said first grooves and a piece of second magnet in
each said second groove, said first and second grooves coincid-
ing each other and said second magnet elements attracting the
cut wires from said first wheel at the points of coinciding, said
second wheel means feeding the cut wires with a proper orien-
4,434,819
COIL FORMING MACHINE
Tadashi Kubota, Kataao; Tokuhito Hamane, Hirakata, and
Masaaki Tasai, Kadoma, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,119
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 3, 1960, 55-171228
Int. a.3 B21F 3/00
VS. a. 140—92.1 3 Claims
tation of the cut wires, three annular members which are
spaced apart and mounted for rotation on the same axis pro-
vided downstream of said second wheel means, each of said
annular members having a plurality of forming die member on
the rim thereof for receiving cut wires from said second wheel
means, each of said die member having magnet elements for
attracting the cut wires, each of said die members of each said
annular member being axially aligned with each of said die
members of other said annular members for simultaneously
receiving a cut wire, three segmented ring members of difTer-
ent lengths provided, in a fixed position relative to said annular
member, along the circumferences of corresonding said annu-
lar members with clearances provided therebetween similar to
the diameter of the cut wire, ramming means provided at two
sides of said annular member assembly adapted to exert bend-
ing forces on cut wires in the direction parallel to the axis of
said annular member, said die members intermittently rising
from the rim of said annular member to cooperate with said
ramming means to bend the cut wires about said segmented
ring members.
1. A coil forming machine which comprises:
a carrier means;
a high frequency energy generator means mounted on said
carrier means for generating a high frequency vibration;
an amplitude transducer means connected to said generator
for increasing the mechanical vibrations generated by the
high frequency energy generator means;
a former assembly connected to said transducer means and
around which a wire is to be wound to form a coil;
a fiier mounted adjacent said former assembly for winding
the wire around the former assembly to form the coil
thereon; and
a coil receiving jig located adjacent said former assembly for
supporting the coil thereon after such coil has been trans-
ferred from the former assembly.
1040 O.G — 5
122
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,43M20
SYRINGE LOADER AND METHOD
Joho P. GiMt, Cun iBdactrics, 79 La Grange Ave., Eisington,
Pa. 19029
FUed May 5, 1982, Ser. No. 374,946
Int. a.} B65B 3/12
UJS. a. 141—2 11 Claims
10. A method of loading a syringe with a correct dosage,
comprising
opening the forward end of a bottle cradle by turning a
forward bottle retainer into vertical position on a bottle
cradle having left and right-hand seats for two bottles,
opening the top of a bottle cradle by turning an upper bottle
retainer into a position parallel to a separator between the
two bottle seats,
inserting a bottle into the left-hand seat and inserting another
bottle into the right-hand seat,
closing the forward end of the bottle cradle by turning the
forward bottle retainer into horizontal position in contact
>with the bottom of the bottles,
closing the top of the bottle cradle by turning the upper
bottle retainer transversely into contact with the side wall
of the bottles,
taking a syringe having a barrel with a collar at its rear end
and a needle extending from its front end and having a
plunger inside the barrel with a flange at the rear end of
the plunger,
placing the syringe in a syringe groove in a syringe carriage
and seating the syringe barrel collar in a collar slot in the
syringe carriage,
holding the syringe in the groove by rotating a syringe
retainer across the top of the groove,
filling the syringe with an amount of air equal to a desired
total dosage by pulling the syringe plunger back to
contact the dosage stop,
inserting the syringe needle into the left-hand bottle by
turning the syringe carriage counterclockwise and mov-
ing the carriage forwardly as far as it will go into contact
with a needle spacer mounted on the bottom cradle and
inserting a carriage aligner pin in a right-hand aligner hole
of the bottle cradle,
rotating the dosage gage across the syringe plunger, inject-
ing into the left-hand bottle an amount of air equal to the
required left-hand bottle ingredient dosage by pushing the
syringe plunger forwardly to bring the bottom flange of
the syringe plunger into contact with the dosage gage,
withdrawing the syringe needle from the left-hand bottle by
pulling the carriage back into contact with the carriage
stop,
inserting the needle into the right-hand bottle by turning the
carriage clockwise and moving it forwardly as far as it
will go into contact with the bottle cradle needle spacer
and inserting the carriage aligner pin into the left-hand
aligner hole of the bottle cradle,
freeing the syringe plunger to move forwardly by removing
the dosage gage from across the plunger by rotating the
dosage gage clockwise,
injecting into the right-hand bottle an amount of air equal to
the required dosage of right-hand bottle ingredients by
pushing the plunger forwardly as far as it will go,
loading the syringe with slightly more right-hand bottle
ingredients than required by holding the carriage against
the cradle and pulling the plunger back so that its bottom
flange clears the dosage gage.
moving the dosage gage across the plunger by routing it
counterclockwise,
obtaining the correct dosage of right-hand bottle ingredienu
by injecting back into the right-hand bottle the overdos-
age amount of right-hand bottle ingredients by pushing
the plunger forwardly so that iu bottom flange contacts
the dosage gage,
withdrawing the needle from the right-hand bottle by pulf^
ing the carriage back away from the bottle cradle until the
carriage contacts the carriage stop,
inserting the needle into the left-hand bottle by turning the
carriage counterclockwise and moving the carriage for-
wardly as far as it will go into contact with the needle
spacer and inserting the syringe carrier aligner pin in the
right-hand aligner hole of the bottle cradle,
removing the dosage gage from across the plunger by rotat-
ing the dosage gage clockwise,
loading the syringe with the correct dosage of left-hand
bottle ingredients by holding the syringe carriage in place
and pulling the plunger back into contact with the dosage
stop,
removing the needle from the left-hand bottle by pulling the
syringe carriage back to the carriage stop,
whereby the syringe has been loaded with the proper dos-
ages of left and right-hand bottle ingredients,
freeing the syringe from the carriage by moving the syringe
retainer from across the syringe barrel,
and carefully removing the syringe from the carriage witl\-
out changing the setting of the plunger or touching the
needle,
whereby the syringe is ready for injecting the correct dos-
age.
4,434,821
DEVICE FOR THE AUTOMATIC HLUNG OF BOTTLES
AND INSTALLATION CONTAINING SAME
Marcel A. Bacroix, Chalon sur Saone, France, aMignor to Ser-
vice de Propriete Indust. Centre de Recherches de Pont a
Mousaon, Paris, France
FUed Nov. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,731
Claims Priority, application France, Nov. 6, 1980, 8023699
Int. a.^ B65B 3/04
U.S. a. 141—44 11 Qaims
.i^
1. A device for automatically fllling bottles, comprising:
A. a vat for holding a supply of a liquid to be filled into said
bottles;
B. a l^uid reservoir:
C. a vacuum source; and
D. at least one filling device, each said filling device com-
prising:
(I) a filling tube having an upper eUd in communication
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
123
with the interior of said vat, said tube filling being
vertically movable with respect to said vat;
(2) a vent tube axially traversing said filling tube and
having a lower end below a lower end of said fillina
tube; •
(3) a valve for opening and closing said filling tube in
response to a position of a bottle to be filled;
(4) an air-liquid separator reservoir disposed below said
vat and above said liquid reservoir, an upper end of said
separator reservoir being communicated with an upper
end of said vent tube and with said vacuum source; and
(5) a pipe connecting a lower end of said separator reser-
voir to said liquid reservoir, wherein:
a lowered pressure created by said vacuum source in
said air-liquid separator reservoir pulls liquid from
said liquid teservoir into said pipe for a predeter-
mined heighhv
other in response to thermal conduction, to open a fluid
path between said fluid conduits.
4,434,822
SYSTEM FOR THE STERILE MIXING OF MATERIALS
David Bellamy, Kenilworth, and Dale A. Smith, Barrington, both
of 111., assignors to Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc., Deer>
field. 111.
Continuation of Ser. No. 91,688, Nov. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,399
Int. a.3 B65B 3/04
U.S. a. 141—98 3 Claims
1. In a fluid transfer assembly usable to interconnect and
establish a fluid path between two locations,
the transfer assembly being of the type having a first fluid
conduit including at one end thereof a first connector
member having first meluble wall means for normally
sealing said first connector member, and thus said associ-
ated conduit end, from the exterior,
a second fluid conduit including at one end thereof a second
connector member having second meltable wall means for
normally sealing said second connector, and thus said
associated conduit end from the exterior, and
means for coupling said first and second connector means
together with said first wall means held in facing contact
with said second wall means while the coupled assembly is
exposed to a source of radiant energy, the improvement
comprising
one of said wall means includes a material which absorbs a
sufficient quantity of the radiant energy so that, solely in
response to its exposure to the radiant energy source, said
one wall means is heated to its melting point to open said
associated connector member, and
the other one of said wall means consists essentially of a
material which, while said one wall means is being heated
to its melting point by exposure to the radiant energy
source, does not absorb a sufficient quantity of the radiant
energy to melt said other wall means but which does
conduct a sufficient quantity of heat energy from said one
wall means during melting thereof to concurrently heat
said other wall means to its melting point to also open said
associated connector member.
whereby, during exposure of the coupled assembly to the
radiant energy source, both of said wall means are opened
by melting, one in response to thermal radiation and the
4,434,823
LIQUID TRANSFER DEVICE
Sydney Hndspith, U Crcscenta, Calif., assignor to American
Hospital Supply Corporation, Evaaston, IU.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,549
Int. aj B65B 3/04
U.S. a 141-329 16aaims
"^
44
•""A
F 1
Jj^^
d
^^"^
H
V
pJ=L
« J
A
10. A liquid transfer device comprising:
a body having a wall defining and enclosing a cavity within
the body;
two hollow conduits extending from the cavity through the
wall with at least a poriion of each conduit projecting
outwardly from the body;
two lengths of resilient tubing wherein the proximal end of
each tubing extends through the body and it attached in
fluid flow communication to one of the hollow conduits
within the cavity of the body;
two inclined planes commonly inclined, spaced apart and
fastened within the cavity of the body;
two compression blocks secured to the body within the
cavity, spaced apart and spaced from the inclined planes;
a roller clamp having at least a portion thereof extending
through the wall of the body, which roller clamp is
adapted to travel between the inclined planes and com-
pression blocks having two cams which engage the in-
clined planes and the two resilient tubes extending
through the body such that travel of the roller along the
inclined planes exerts a compressive force simultaneously
against the resilient tubes; and
a double lumen needle releasably attached to the body and
engaging the outwardly projecting portions of the two
hollow conduits such that each lumen within the needle is
in fluid flow communication with a resilient tube extend-
ing through the body.
4,434,824
ROUTER GUIDE
Patrick D. Buaaey, R.R. 2, Fremont, Nebr. 68025
FUed Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 369,147
Int. a.J B27C 5/10
U.S. a. 144—134 D 1 Claim
1. A router guide for a router including a flat base portion^
having a power shaft extending downwardly therefrom, com-
prising,
first and second spaced-apart elongated supports adapted to
be removably positioned on spaced-apart supporting sur-
faces, said supports having opposite ends, each of said
supporu having upstanding posu at the opposite ends
thereof,
a collar selectively vertically adjusUbly mounted on each of
said posts and having horizontally disposed openings
formed therein adjacent the upper ends thereof,
a first elongated support member having its opposite ends
/
124
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
selectively longitudinally adjustably received in the open-
ings in the collars at one end of said first support and one
end of said second support and extending therebetween,
a second elongated support member having its opposite ends
selectively longitudinally adjustably received in the open-
ings in the collars at the other end of said flrst support and
the other end of said second support and extending there-
between,
means for removably maintaining said support members in
said collars,
an elongated router track slidably mounted on said first and
second support members and extending therebetween
whereby said track may be selectively moved between
said first and second supports,
said outer track comprising elongated spaced-apart angle
members having a horizontal portion and a vertical por-
tion,
said horizontal portions of said angle members being spaced
from each other to define an elongated opening therebe-
tween adapted to receive the router power shaft extending
downwardly therethrough,
said vertical portions of said angle members being spaced
apart approximately the width of the router base to limit
lateral movement of the router with respect to the router
track,
said angle members adapted to receive and support the
router base thereon whereby the router may be slidably
supported thereon for movement between the ends
thereof.
4,434,825
HREWOOD CLEAVING APPARATUS
Thomas H. Blomqyist, SiUgviigen 5, S-59300 Vastervik, and
Thorbjom G. Lidstom, Ramnegarde PL 521, S-59400 Ga-
mleby, both of Sweden
FUed Dec. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 326,394
Claims priority, application Sweden, Dec. 12, 1980, 8008770
Int. a.i B27L 7/00
\}&. a. 144—193 A 5 Claims
1. In a firewood cleaving apparatus having a number of
cleaving irons and a ram for pushing a wood block against the
cleaving irons in order to divide the block into billets, the
cleaving irons being arranged with their sharp edges in a num-
ber of axially spaced planes disposed at right angles to the
direction of motion of the ram, a first cleaving iron having its
sharp edge disposed in a first plane to begin the division of the
block into two parts or halves and a second cleaving iron
having its sharp edge disposed in a second plane to begin the
division of the respective part of the two parts into further two
parts or quarter parts so as to obtain four parts of the block; the
improvement in which there is disposed in a third plane the
sharp edge of an annular cleaving iron concentric with the
central axis of the apparatus and adapted to begin the division
of each quarter part into a radially inner part and a radially
outer part, and there are disposed in a fourth plane the sharp
edges of four radially directed cleaving irons adapted to begin
division of each of only the radially outer parts but not the
radially inner parts, into two further halves, whereby the block
of wood thus is subdivided into twelve billets during its pas-
sage through the apparatus.
4,434,826
WOOD WHEEL CUTTER
Floyd J. Whitaker, 310 Arbolado Dr., Franlcfort, Ky. 40601
Filed Mar. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 358,716
Int. a.3 B27G li/00
U.S. a. 144—219 6 Claims
1. A tool for cutting a wheel from a thick panel of stock
material, said tool including a head having structure for sup-
port of said head from a driven rotary support assembly for
rotation therewith about an axis in predetermined position
relative to said head, said head including an outwardly opening
bit receiving bore formed therein coaxial with said axis, a slot
formed through said head and opening laterally outwardly
thereof in the direction in which said bore opens with the slot
intersecting said bore and one side of said slot disposed sub-
stantially on a diameter of said bore, a drill bit having opposite
base and work engaging ends and its base end snugley receiv-
able in said bore, said base end including a flat thereon posi-
tionable substantially coplanar with said one side of said slot
and with the remaining portion of said base end disposed to
said one side of said slot, an elongated cutting plate snugly
lengthwise slidably received in said slot with one end portion
of said plate projecting outwardly of a corresponding end of
said slot, one longitudinal edge of said plate being substantially
seated in said slot and the other longitudinal edge portion of
said one end portion of said plate including a beveled cutting
edge extending therealong and contoured according to the
desired radial cross-sectional shape of one side of the wheel to
be cut and also the outer peripheral contour of said wheel, and
clamp means clamping the portions of said head disposed on
opposite sides of said slot against said plate and the flat
equipped base end of said drill bit between the opposing side
surface of said plate and the remote portions of said bore, the
end portion of said beveled cutting edge remote from said slot
including a terminal end portion generally paralleling said axis
9nd extending outwardly of said other longitudinal edge por-
tion of said plate.
4,434,827
TREE FELLER-BUNCHER
Gordon S. Franklin, 88 17tb Ave., Deux Montagues, Quebec,
Canada J7R 3Z2
FUed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,724
Int. C\? AOIG 23m: B27B 5/02
U.S. a. 144—336 5 Claims
1. A tree feller-buncher comprising a support means, means
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
123
to mount said support means on a vehicle, a carriage mounted
on said support means for movement back and forth on said
support means in a substantially horizontal direction substan-
tially perpendicular to the direction of movement of said vehi-
cle to and from one end of said support means, means to fell a
tree moveably mounted on said carriage for movement be-
tween an inactive position and a cutoff position, an arm sup-
port means pivotally mounted on said carriage, grapple means
mounted on said arm support means, for movement of said
grapple means between a flrst engaging and clamping position
for receiving a tree in said direction of movement of said
vehicle, said tree being in its normally vertical attitude, and for
clamping said tree to be cut by said means to fell, and a second
position for depositing outwardly of said carriage to release a
cut tree in a substantially horizontal attitude and at about a
right angle to the side of a path along which said vehicle
moves, and thereby to lay said cut tree on said side of said path
and at about right angle thereof
5. A method of felling and bunching trees with a vehicle
having mounted on its front end a support means extending
substantially horizontally, and substantially perpendicular to
the direction of advance of said vehicle and a carriage mounted
on said support means for movement back and forth along said
support means perpendicular to said direction, said carriage
m
J
having means to fell a tree, moveably mounted thereon for
movement between an inactive and a cutoff position as well as
an arm support means pivotally mounted thereon, grapple
means mounted on said arm support means for movement of
said grapple means for engaging in said direction of advance of
said vehicle, a tree in its normally vertical attitude position to
a depositing position, to release a cut tree in a substantially
horizontal attitude, said method comprising laterally position-
ing said carriage means on said support means and advancing
said vehicle into a position wherein said means to fell can cut
a tree and said grapple means by said direction of advance of
said vehicle can engage said tree, clamping said tree in its
normally vertical attitude, with said grapple means, and cut-
ting said tree, maintaining said clamping of said cut tree in said
grapple means while moving said carriage to one end of said
support means and moving said arm support means and
thereby displacing said grapple means outwardly of said car-
riage in the direction of said one end, supporting said tree, to
said depositing position and thereby displacing said cut tree
from its normally vertical attitude to a substantially horizontal
attitude, and when said carriage is at said one end and said
support means is outwardly of said carriage releasing said
grapple means to deposit said tree, at about a right angle to the
side of a path along which said vehicle moves and repeating
said operations to fell furiher trees.
4,434,828
SCREWDRIVER WITH HANDLE FOR STORING BITS
Richard Trincia, 149 Dunsinane Rd., New Castle, Del. 19720
FUed Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 450,985
Int. a.3 B25G I /OB
U.S. a. 145—62 5 Claims
1. A screwdriver having a shaft and a handle and magnetic
holding means mounted at the work end of said shaft for re-
movably holding metal screwdriver bits, and storage means in
said handle for storing a plurality of bits, said storage means
comprising:
a plurality of through-going bores in said handle trans-
versely oriented with respect to the longitudinal axis of
said screwdriver, in which bores resilient sleeves are
affixed which, when affixed in said handle bores, have
internal diameters slightly smaller than the bits stored
therein, said bits being stored within said sleeves such that
the longitudinal axes of the bits are also transversely ori-
ented with respect to the longitudinal axis of the screw-
driver, i.e. the long axes of the stored bits correspond to
the long axes of the through-going bores and sleeves,
JO JO^J2
the handle of said screwdriver having a width substantially
equal to the length of said bits,
whereby, when one of the stored bits is desired for use, the
user removes the bit previously used from said magnetic
holding means and presses said bit into the opening of the
sleeve holding the desired bit, thereby freeing the desired
bit and, at the same time, storing the bit previously used,
following which the desired bit is affixed to said magnetic
means.
4,434,829
COLLAPSIBLE YARD PAN
Robert L. Barnard, 8924 Cheltonhara PI., Anaandalc, Va. 22003
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,567
Int. a.' B65B 67/12: B65D 77/00
U.S. a. 150—49 4 Claims
£U^P
1. A collapsible, poriable yard pan container comprising a
fllling end and a closed end opposite and spaced apart from the
filling end; a filling side extending from the filling end to the
closed end and a closed side opposite and spaced apart from
the filling side; pliable sheet enclosure means secured to frame
means, the sheet enclosure means of a strength sufficient for
holding material to be conuined and extending about the
closed end and about the closed side and adapted to form a
pocket-like enclosure, the frame means comprising a plurality
of elongated, relatively rigid, rod-like primary fllling side
frame means extending along the fllling side and defining a
fllling side opening, the primary side frame means being of
sufficient rigidity to prevent unwanted casual closing of the
container; the primary side frame means converging at a mu-
tual hinge point at the closed end and adapted to allow the
container to open completely along the fllling side and to close
along the fllling side and to open and to close along the fllling
end, and adapted to allow the container to be held in a vertical
position with the fllling side closed and the fllling end open for
loading or emptying material therein; the fllling end, when in
an open position with the fllling side also open, lying in a
substantially flat plane to facilitate loading and when in a
126
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
127
closed position securably containing any material therein and
additionally comprising a plurality of elongated open end
frame means converging at a second hinge point and adapted
to facilitate filling of the yard pan and at least one elongated
bottom frame member extending between the second hinge
point and a third hinge point at the closed end.
4,434330
PNEUMATIC TIRE
Samuel P. Landers, Uniontown, and William E. Egan, Tall-
madge, both of Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear Tire A Rub-
ber Company, Akron, Ohio
FUed Mar. 9, 1983, Ser. No. 473,840
Int CL^ B60C 11/00. 13/00, 15/00
U.S. a 152—209 R 15 cudms
1. A pneumatic tire that is mountable upon a correspond-
ingly sized rim having retaining flanges at each axial end
thereof, said tire comprising a circumferentially extending
tread portion with a sidewall extending radially inwardly from
each axial edge of the tread portion to an annular bead portion
that is disposed adjacent to a retaining flange when the tire is
mounted upon said rim; a radial cross section of said tire hav-
ing an external contour on each side of its mid-circumferential
plane, when the tire is mounted upon said rim and inflated to its
design inflation pressure but not subjected to a load, exclusive
of indicia on the sidewalls or traction elements of the tread,
that extends continuously axially outwardly and radially in-
wardly from said mid-circumferential plane to the point of
intersection of an external surface of each sidewall with a
radially extending line that is tangent to the axially outer edge
of the respective retaining flange of said rim, said tread portion
having a first radius of curvature and a poriion of the external
contour of each sidewall at least approximating the curvature
of an ellipse, and no point on the external surface of either
sidewall is disposed axially outwardly of the axially outer edge
of the respective retaining flange of said rim a distance greater
than two percent of the axial distance between the axially outer
edges of the retaining flanges of said rim.
2. A pneumatic tire suiuble for mounting upon a rim having
a pair of axially spaced apart annular mounting surfaces, with
a predetermined nominal diameter, and a retaining flange
adjacent to each mounting surface, said tire comprising a cir-
cumferentially extending tread portion having a maximum
outside diameter at the mid-circumferential plane of the tire
and a sidewall extending radially inwardly from each axial
edge of the tread portion, a radial cross-section of the portion
of said tire that is disposed radially outwardly of the retaining
flanges of said rim when said tire is mounted upon said rim and
inflated to its design inflation pressure, but not subjected to a
load, having an external contour on each side of said mid-cir-
cumferential plane, exclusive of indicia on the sidewalls or
traction elements of said tread portion, from said maximum
outside diameter to the intersection of an external surface of
each sidewall with a radially extending line that is tangent to
the axially outer edge of the respective retaining flange that is
substantially determined by the steps of:
(a) drawing a first pair of straight lines, A and A', both of
which are perpendicular to the axis of rotation of said tire,
line A being tangent to the axially outer extent of one of
the retaining flanges of said rim and line A' being tangent
to the axially outer extent of the other retaining flange of
said rim;
(b) drawing a straight line B which is perpendicular to the
axis of rotation of said tire and is located midway between
lines A and A';
(c) striking a circle arc having a predetermined radius r with
its center located on line B radially inwardly of the mount-
ing surfaces of said rim, said circle arc being symmetrical
with respect to line B and intersecting line B at a point
located radially outwardly of said mounting surfaces a
distance equal to one-half of the difference between the
maximum outside diameter of the tread portion of the tire
and the nominal diameter of said mounting surfaces, the
end of said circle are located on the same side of line B as
line A being point c, and the end of said circle are located
on the same side of line B as line A • being point c', the
axial distance between points c and c' being no more than
one-half of the axial distance between lines A and A'; and
(d) locating a pair of points e,e', one of the points e of said
pair being located on line A and the other point e' of said
pair being located on line A', said pair of points e.e' being
located radially outwardly of the radially outermost ex-
tent of said retaining flanges a distance no greater than
one-half of the difference between the maximum outside
diameter of the tread portion of the tire and the nominal
diameter of mounting surfaces of the rim; and
(e) drawing a pair of curved lines each of which at least
approximates the curvature of an ellipse, one of said
curved lines being tangent to the circle arc at point c and
intersecting line A at point e, and the other curved line
being tangent to the circle arc at point c' and intersecting
line A' at point e';
and no point on the external surface of either sidewall is dis-
posed axially outwardly of the axially outer extent of the re-
spective retaining flange of said rim a distance greater than two
percent of the axial distance between the axially outer extents
of the retaining flanges of said rim.
4,434331
TUBELESS nRES FOR TRUCKS AND BUSES
Yuklhisa Uemura, Nani, Japan, assignor to The Toyo Rubber
Industry Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 170^73, JuL 21, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 344,075
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 19, 1979, 54-91941
Int a.3 B60C 9/08, 15/00, 15/06
VJS. a 152-356 R 3 Claims
1. A tubeless tire for mounting on a wheel rim of a large
vehicle such as a truck or a bus, said tire comprising:
a carcass structure including a plurality of radial carcass
plies of polyester cords having a fineness of no less than
4500 denier and rubber material surrounding said plies;
said carcass structure including circumferentially extending
beads adapted to abut a wheel rim to mount thereon said
carcass structure;
each said bead including a radially inner bead base for seal-
ingly contacting the wheel rim when said carcass struc-
ture is mounted thereon, a bead core at a position radially
outwardly of said bead base, and an inner-bead portion
extending radially from said bead core to said bead base;
i
all of said plies except one said ply having end portions
turned up around said bead core and extending through
said inner-bead portion, and said one ply having an end
portion terminating adjacent said bead core without being
turned up around said bead core and without extending
through said inner-bead portion; and
said inner-bead portion having a compressibility, between an
unmounted condition and a condition mounted on a wheel
rim, of 15 to 20% of the total thickness of said inner-bead
portion including said ply end portions and rubber mate-
rial therearound and of 30 to 35% of the thickness of said
rubber material only.
4,434,832
ROOM TEMPERATURE CURABLE TIRE PATCH
RusseU W. Koch, Hartrille, and William W. Barbin, Massillon,
both of Ohio, assignors to The Firestone Tire A Rubber Com*
pany, Akron, Ohio
FUed Mar. 21, 1983, Ser. No. 477,452
Int. a.3 BMC 21/00
U.S. a. 152—370 19 Gaims
1. A repaired elastomer article, comprising:
the elastomer article, said article having a hollow therein;
a cured gum rubber disposed within the said hollow and
filling it thereby;
a treating agent applied to the inner surface of said article
immediately surrounding said filled hollow, said treating
agent selected from the group consisting of: N-halohydan-
toins, N-haloamides, N-haloimides, and combinations
thereof;
an amine curable polymer or prepolymer applied over the
treated surface of said article; and
an elastomeric patch positioned over said polymer or pre-
polymer;
wherein said polymer of prepolymer is cured in situ at room
temperature wherein said patch has a coating of the treat-
ing agent on its inner surface; and
wherein said elastomer article is cured and unsaturated.
10. A process for repairing an elastomer article having a
hollow therein, comprising: ;,
filling the hollow with a gum rubber;
curing said gum rubber;
applying a treating agent to the inner surface of the article
immediately surrounding the filled hollow;
applying a quantity of amine curable polymer or prepolymer
over the treated surface of said article;
applying a treating agent to the surface of an elastomeric
patch and positioning said patch over said polymer or
prepolymer; and
curing said polymer or prepolymer at room temperature;
wherein said treating agent is selected from the group con-
sisting of: N-halohydantoins, N-haloamines, N-haloi-
mides, and combinations thereof.
4,434,833
AXLE WHEEL END ASSEMBLY
Glen E. Swanson, EucUd, and Larry A. Garstick, Chardoa, both
of Ohio, aasigBors to Eaton Corporation, Clcfeland, Ohio
FUed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,656
Int a.^ B60C 29/00
VS. a. 152—417 10 Claims
1. An axle wheel end assembly for vehicles having an on-
board tire inflation system, said wheel end assembly compris-
ing:
an axle housing having an outboard generally annular spin-
dle end,
a wheel hub surrounding said spindle end and rotaubly
supported thereon by bearing means, said hub including a
radially outwardly extending flange portion adapted to
mount a wheel assembly including a tire rim, said hub
including an annular sleeve poriion extending axially
inboardly from said bearing means and having an annular
inner diameter surface concentric with and spaced radi-
ally from the axially aligned outer diameter surface of said
spindle to define an inboardly opening annular space
therebetween.
a rotary seal assembly received entirely in said inboardly
opening annular space, said roury seal assembly defining
a sealed annular fluid chamber located entirely in said
annular space,
inlet means to said chamber for fluidly connecting said
chamber to said inflation system,
outlet means from said chamber for connection to a fluid
conduit,
fluid conduit means connected at one end to said outlet
means and at the other end thereof to an aperture in said
tire rim located outboard of said hub flange portion, said
conduit extending generally axially through said hub
flange poriion, and
a manually operable open/close valve located in said con-
duit outboard of said hub flange portion for selectively
isolating the interior of said tire rim from said chamber.
4,434,834
VERTICAL LOUVER SYSTEM
John P. Ennes, 43761 Mandarin Dr., Hemet, Calif. 92343
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,447
Int. a.} E06B 9/26
VS. a. 160—166 A 9 Claims
1. A vertical louver system comprising:
a plurality of vertical louvers;
means for mounting said vertical Ipuvers on said vertical
louver supporting system;
at least one of said vertical louvers including a channel and
a panel-like insert;
said channel including first and second flanges and a web
128
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
joining said flanges, said first flange and said web defining
a first elongated receiving zone anrfsaid second flange and
said web defining a second elongated receiving zone;
said insert being curved in transverse cross section when the
insert is in an unrestrained condition;
said insert being resilient and having sufficient rigidity such
that it has a tendency to bend into a relatively sharp curve
about a transverse axis with snap action in response to
bending loads about such axis and said channel tending to
bend about a tranverse axis into a more gradual curve in
response to bending loads about such axis whereby said
insert and said channel have different bending characteris-
tics when bent separately about a transverse axis;
said insert being received in said first and second receiving
zones; and
means for attaching s^iid insert to said channel.
4 434 836
CONTINUOUS CASTING APPARATUS
Eisiike NUyama, and Hideyo Kodama, both of Katsuta, Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,916
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 4, 1980, 55-74347
Int. a.3 B22D U/00
U A a. 164-429 23 Oaims
4434 835
METHOD OF MAKING ABLADE AEROFOIL FOR A GAS
TURBINE ENGINE
Kenneth Willgoose, Findem, England, assignor to Rolls-Royce
Limited, London, England
Filed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,506
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 25, 1981,
8109314
Int. a.^ B22C 7/02, 9/04
U.S. a. 164-34 7 aaims
1. A method of making a blade aerofoil for a gas turbine
engine, the aerofoil having cooling air exit passages therein,
including the steps of forming a disposable piece having holes
therein of the same form as the exit passages, locating the
disposable piece in a die having a first internal cavity portion of
the shape of the cavity within the blade aerofoil with which the
passages will communicate, a second cavity portion in which
fits the disposable piece, and a third cavity portion providing a
channel interconnecting the free ends of the holes in the dis-
posable piece, injecting ceramic slurry to fill the three cavity
portions, hardening or allowing the ceramic to harden, separat-
ing the parts of the die, removing the ceramic core thus formed
from the die, removing the disposable piece from the ceramic,
placing the ceramic core thus formed in a further multi-part die
having a main cavity whose form is substantially that of the
external surface of the blade aerofoil and a secondary cavity
within which the ceramic form from said channel portions fits,
injecting wax to fill the main cavity within the die, allowing
the wax to solidify, removing the wax pattern thus formed
from the die, forming a shell of ceramic on the outer surface of
the pattern, the ceramic shell engaging with the channel por-
tion of the ceramic core, removing the wax from the ceramic
shell, pouring molten metol into the shell mould thus formed,
allowing the meul to solidify and removing the ceramic mould
and the core from the cast blade aerofoil.
1. Continuous casting apparatus for the production of cast
metal strip comprising:
a pair of casting wheels mounted for coaxially rotating
around a horizontal axis with a certain distance between
respective opposing faces of said wheels;
an endless metallic belt which is trained semi-annularly
around circumferential surfaces of respective wheels and
mounted for moving synchronously with said wheels to
define a mold space therebetween;
cooling means for spraying cooling fluid around said belt
from a side opposite to said wheels; and
nozzle means arranged to inject molten metal upwardly into
an upper portion of the mold space, thereby the molten
metal injected is continuously solidified while radially
pressed against the bottom of the mold space by centrifu-
gal force and withdrawn from the mold space as a cast
metal strip with the rotational movement of said wheels
and belt.
4434837
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING
THIXOTROPIC METAL SLURRIES
Joseph Winter, New Haven; Jonathan A. Dantzig, Hamden, and
Derek E. Tyler, Cheshire, all of Conn., assignors to Interna-
tional Telephone and Telegraph Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 15,250, Feb. 26, 1979, abandoned. This
application Feb. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 469,486
Int. aj B22D 27/02
U.S. a. 164-468 23 Oaims
1. In an apparatus for continuously or semi-continuously
forming a semi-solid thixotropic alloy slurry, said slurry com-
prising throughout its cross section degenerate dendrite pri-
mary solid particles in a surrounding matrix of molten metal,
said apparatus comprising:
means for containing molten metal, said containing means
having a desired cross section;
means for controllably cooling said molten metal in said
containing means; and
means for mixing said molten metal for shearing dendrites
formed in a solidification zone as said molten metal is
cooled for forming said slurry;
the improvement wherein said mixing means comprises:
a single two pole stator for generating a non-zero rotating
magnetic field which moves transversely of a longitudinal
axis of said containing means across the entirety of said
cross section of said containing means and over said entire
solidification zone, said moving magnetic field providing a
magnetomotive stirring force directed tangentially of said
containing means for causing said molten metal and slurry
to rotate in said containing means, said magnetomotive
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
129
force being of sufficient magnitude to provide said shear-
ing of said dendrites, said magnetomotive force providing
a shear rate of at least 500 sec. - '.
14. In a process for continuously or semi-continuously form-
ing a semi-solid thixotropic alloy slurry, said slurry comprising
throughout its cross section degenerate dendrite primary solid
pariicles in a surrounding matrix of molten metal, said process
comprising:
providing a means for containing molten metal having a
desired cross section;
controllably cooling said molten metal in said conuining
means; and
mixing said contained molten metal for shearing dendrites
enhancing a flow of said fluidized bed pariicles toward said
casting zone, said flow enhancing step comprising gener-
formed in a solidification zone as said molten metal is
cooled for forming said slurry;
the improvement wherein said mixing step comprises:
generating solely with a two pole stator a non-zero rotating
magnetic field which moves transversely of a longitudinal
axis of said containing means across the entirety of said
cross section of said containing means and over said entire
solidification zone, said moving magnetic field providing a
magnetomotive stirring force directed tangentially of said
containing means for causing said molten metal and slurry
to rotate in said containing means, said magnetomotive
force being of sufficient magnitude to provide said shear-
ing of said dendrites, said magnetomotive force providing
a shear rate of at least 500 sec. ~ '.
r-Jg
V ' > — / ' se
ating sound waves moving toward said casting zone
which act on said particles to enhance said flow.
4 434839
PROCESS FOR PRODUaNG METALLIC SLURRIES
Alfredo Vogel, Malvern, England, auignor to Secretary of State
in her Brtannic Majesty's Government of the United King-
dom, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 96,414, Nov. 21, 1979, abandoned. This
application Aug. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 407,481
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 27, 1978,
46197/78
Int. a.J B22D 11/124. 11/10. 1/00
U.S. O. 164—485 5 Qaims
^^r L''->'^ ^
4,434,838
APPARATUS AND PROCESS FOR COOLING AND
SOLIDIFYING CONTINUOUS OR
SEMI-CONTINUOUSLY CAST MATERIAL
Peter E. Sevier, Woodbridge, Conn., assignor to Olin Corpora-
tion, New Haven, Conn.
FUed Jua. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,132
Int. a.3 B22D 11/124
U.S. Q. 164—485 26 Qaims
1. A process for casting material comprising: pouring said
material into a casting means defining a casting zone, and
applying a fluidized bed of particles to cool said material; the
improvement comprising:
1. A process for forming shaped ariicles from a metallic
material comprising flowing molten metallic material as a
confined stream; heat insulating the external surface of the
confined stream; abstracting heat evenly from within and
across the body of the heat insulated stream by interrupting the
flow of the stream by a plurality of static stirring elements
positioned transverse to the stream to produce turbulent flow
within the stream, at least one of said stirring elements being a
thermal conductor for cooling the interrupted flow such that a
solid phase is precipitated from said stream in the form of
particles having a fine equiaxed gram structure; and casting the
stream outflowing from said static stirring elements such that it
solidifies with a substantially non-dendritic microstructure.
130
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,434340
EXPANSION JOINT FOR REACTOR OR HEAT
EXCHANGER
Janck S. Porowski, Pittsburgh; William J. O'DonncU, Bethel
Parley and Ray G. Fasiczka, Mckecsport, all of Pa., assignors
to O'Donnell A Associates Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,687
Int. a.3 F28F 7/00
U.S. CL 165—82 2 Claims
1. Apparatus for use as a heat exchanger, reactor, or steam
boiler, comprising a substantially cylindrical metallic shell, a
metallic tube sheet inside of and at right angles to said shell and
supporting the end portion of a plurality of tubes extending in
pandlel with the axis of said shell, and a multi-ply expansion
joint of thin straight metallic layers extending entirely within
said shell and in the plane of said tube sheet at right angles to
said shell in closely spaced parallel relationship and connecting
the perimeter of said tube sheet to said shell by welds, whereby
the layers of said joint may bend only substantially parallel to
accommodate only axial displacements between the shell and
tubes without excessive stresses in the tube sheet.
4,434,841
VARIABLY SPACED WRAPPED FIN HEAT
EXCHANGER
Dale Jackson, Gay, and John R. McManus, Marcellus, both of
N.Y., assignors to Carrier Corporation, Syracuse, N.Y.
FUed Not. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,378
Int. a.3 F24B 1/06
U.S. a. 165—125 11 Claims
1. A wrapped fin heat exchanger made from wrapped fin
tubing including a tubular fluid conducting portion and a fin
portion wrapped about the tubular portion to promote heat
transfer to a gas flowing thereover, said heat exchanger having
the gas forced through the heat exchanger by a fan mounted
adjacent one end of the heat exchanger, said fan acting to draw
varying volumes of air through the heat exchanger at different
locations depending upon the distance between the location
and the fan, which comprises a plurality of loops of tubing
arranged to form the heat exchanger, a first portion of said
loops being spaced closely to impede the flow of the gas there-
through and a second portion of said loops being speed less
closely than the first portion, said portions being located with
the first portion being in a higher gas volume location and the
second portion being in a lower gas volume location.
4,434,842
PLATETHN heat EXCHANGER
Edward J. Gregory, Wolverhampton, England, assignor to IMI
Marston Limited, Wolverhampton, England
FUed Not. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,568
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 2, 1980,
8038639
Int. a.J F28F 3/06. 13/00
U.S. a. 165—133 16 Qaims
1. A plate fin heat exchanger for boiling a liquid, the heat
exchanger having a plurality of stacked spaced plates of fluid
impervious material adapted and arranged to be heated in use
on the first side and to have a liquid to be vaporized on the
second side, the second sides of adjacent plates facing each
other, there being located between adjacent second sides at
least one fin extending, in use, into the liquid to be vaporized,
the fin being a separate item formed separately from the plates,
wherein the improvement comprises the fin being of at least
two layers at least in part having a small gap therebetween, one
at least of the outer layers having a plurality of holes therein.
4,434,843
HEAT EXCHANGER APPARATUS
Arthur L. Alford, Oklahoma City, Okla., aasignor to Interna-
tional EuTironmental Manufacturing Co., Oklahoma City,
Okla.
FUed Apr. 17, 1978, Ser. No. 896,708
Int. a? F28F 1/32
U.S. a. 165—150 3 Claims
\{?'"
"^'"^ w^ ^-"
■It
K
-K
1. In a heat pump apparatus in which a refrigerant is selec-
tively passed in one direction and in an opposite direction
through a heat exchanger having air passed therethrough, an
improved heat exchanger comprising:
a frame having an air flow channel through which the air is
passed; and
a heat exchange coil supported by the frame and forming a
first coil row and at least one other coil row subsequent to
the first coil row, the coil rows disposed in the air flow
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
131
channel such that entering air first contacts the first coil
row and then the subsequent coil row, the coil character-
ized as having a first end portion, a medial portion, and a
second end portion, the first end portion and the second
end portion substantially disposed in the first coil row
such that the first end portion and the second end portion
are each in a heat exchange relationship with air entering
the air flow channel, and the medial portion subsuntially
disposed in at least one coil row subsequent to the first coil
row, one of the first and second end portions serving as
the entering portion for the refrigerant flow, and the other
one of the first and second end portions serving as a final
heat conditioning stage for the exiting refrigerant.
4,434,844
CROSS-FIN COIL TYPE HEAT EXCHANGER
Katsumi Sakitani, Kawachinagano; Shigehlro Uemura, and
( Ryuzaburo Y^Jima, both of Sakai, all of Japan, assignors to
Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 289,978
Claims priority, application Japan, May 15, 1981, 56-
70724[U]; May 29. 1981, 56-82986; Jul. 16, 1981, 56-1 1 1770; Jul.
16, 1981,56-111771
Int. a.3 F28F 1/32
U.S. a. 165—151 7 Claims
»1S
■ /
1. A heat exchanger comprising:
fin units (6) each comprising a convoluted fin base plate (1)
which is formed with a multiplicity of apertures (3) ar-
ranged parallel to the ridges of the convolutions in a
plurality of rows with the apertures (3) of the adjacent
rows being suggered, a multiplicity of slits (4) of a small
width arranged parallel to a straight line 1 interconnecting
the centers of the apertures (3) of the same row and sub-
stantially parallel to one another in a manner to surround
the aperture (3) with no slits being formed in the vicinity
of each aperture (3). and a multiplicity of louver type
raised fins (5) formed by raising the material adjacent to
one slit in such a manner that in each raised fin (5) two
shorter sides (5a and Sb) on the side of the apertures (3) are
connected to the fin base plate (1) and one of longer sides
(5c and Sd) is held on the surface of the fin base plate (1);
and
a multiplicity of heat exchange medium tubes (2) each in-
serted in the surfaces of apertures (3) of a plurality of said
fin units (6) to provide a cross-fin coil;
wherein said raised fins (5) are successively formed without
a base plate portion between the adjacent raised fins (5)
and with each fin having a planar surface inclined with
respect to the surface of the fin base plate (1);
wherein a current of air (w) is caused to flow between the fin
units (6) of the cross-fin coil (7) in a direction substantially
perpendicular to the slits (4), and the convolutions of each
said fin base plate (1) are inclined with respect to the
direction of flow of the air current (w) while said raised
fins (5) are raised and inclined in a direction opposite to
the direction of inclination of the convolutions of the fin
base plate (1); and
wherein said raised fins (5) except the raised fins (5) formed
in each portion between the adjacent apertures (3) of each
said row are each split into two raised fin members
through a fin base plate portion (la) in a direction perpen-
dicular to the direction of flow of the air current (w), and
no slits (4) are formed in the side portion (\b) of the adja-
cent heat exchanger medium tube (2) juxuposed against
the fin base plate portion (la).
4,434,845
STACKED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER
Dieter C. Steeb, Im SchttnenbiUU, CH-9050 Steinegg-Appenaell,
Switzerland
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 347,068
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 25,
1981, 3107010
Int. a? F28D 9/02; F28F 3/06
U.S. a. 165—153 7 aaims
3. A heat-exchanger sandwich construction for accommo-
dating two fluids separately flowing in different directions,
said construction comprising a plurality of like flat rectangular
metal plates providing heat-exchange surfaces, and spacer
means between adjacent plates and retaining said plates in
spaced parallel relation; the spacer means between first and
second successive plates of said plurality comprising a pair of
parallel rail members along a first pair of opposed parallel
edges of said first and second plates, thereby establishing a
first-passage flow direction through said construction; the
spacer means between said second and the third successive
plates of said plurality comprising a longitudinally extruded
meul plate that is characterized on both sides by spaced paral-
lel grooves between longitudinal ridges, the longitudinal direc-
tion of the grooves and ridges being orthogonal to the first-pas-
sage flow direction, thereby establishing a second direction of
flow orthogonal to said first direction and through said con-
struction; the spacer means between similarly successive plates
comprising further of said parallel rail members and further of
said extruded metal plates in alternating succession, thereby
establishing flows in said first and second directions in inter-
laced layers through said construction, so that each plate
serves the respective fluid flows in their orthogonally related
directions, and all rail members and ridges having bonded
direct supporting contact with both of the adjacent plates
which they space.
4,434,846
PATTERNED HEAT EXCHANGER ¥W
James W. B. Lu, Grecndalc, Wis., assignor to McQuay Inc.,
MinneapoUs, Minn.
FUed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,382
Int. a.i F28D 7/00; F28F 9/22
U.S. a. 165—161 6 Claims
1. A heat exchanger, comprising:
132
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a plurality of heat exchange tubes having a generally circular
cross-section;
a shell;
means supporting the tubes in generally parallel relationship
to one another within the shell to form a heat exchanger
with a flow path for a first fluid within the tubes and a
flow path for a second fluid within t^ie shell around the
tubes;
a plurality of fins positioned on the tubes to define flow paths
therebetween for the second fluid, each fin comprising a
member having a generally planar surface, the member
extending transversely of a plurality of tubes and having
apertures through which the tubes pass, and having a
plurality of patterns between a^acent tube apertures; and
said patterns each having a crest portion raised from the
planar surface, a first pair of surfaces that slope from the
crest portion, on opposite sides thereof, to the planar
surface, said first pair of surfaces having arcuately shaped
edges with an arc conforming to the arc of adjacent tube
apertures, and a second pair of surfaces arcuately sloping
downward from the crest portion and the edges of the first
pair of surfaces to the planar surface adjacent tube aper-
tures on either side of the pattern.
4 434847
FLOW CONTROLLING APPARATUS
Gonzalo Vazquez, and Neil H. Akkerman, both of Houston,
Tex., iMignors to AVA Internationa] Corporation, Houston,
Tex.
Filed Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 358,127
Int. a.^E2\B 23/03. 34.14
VS. a. 166—117.5 ' 25 Claims
1. Apparatus for use in controlling flow within a well bore,
comprising a mandrel having a first bore therethrough adapted
to be connected as part of a well tubing string, whereby it may
be lowered with the string into the well bore, and a second
bore therethrough parallel to the first bore for connection at its
upper and lower ends with the space within the well bore
about the tubing string, a closure member mounted on the
mandrel for movement between positions opening and closing
the second bore, means yieldably urging said closure member
to closed position, said mandrel having a pocket therein to one
side of the first bore and having one end opening to the first
bore, a tool adapted to be run on a wire line through said
tubing string and first bore into and out of the pocket, and
means including fluid responsive means within said tool for
moving the closure member from closed to open position.
4,434,848
MAXIMIZING FRACTURE EXTENSION IN MASSIVE
HYDRAULIC FRACTURING
Michael B. Smith, Tulsa, Okla., assignor to Standard Oil Com-
pany, Chicago, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 168,829, Jul. 10, 1980, abandoned. This
application Dec. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 332,026
Int. a.3 E21B 43/26. 47/06
U.S. a. 166—250 9 Qaims
l.QLHWmilWI aOTTOWHOU TWEWTIHO PHE3SUBE
• "-'r : :
oivnwcc nan ycixBanE
1. A method for fracturing a subterranean formation, com-
prising:
(a) injecting a fracturing fluid into said formation under
fracture extending conditions until the bottomhole treat-
ing pressure approaches a maximum bottomhole treating
pressure for said formation;
(b) discontinuing said injection of said fracturing fluid for a
period of time (t) to allow the bottomhole treating pres-
sure and the pressure along the created fracture to equal-
ize; and
(c) sequentially repeating steps (a) and (b) until the bottom-
hole treating pressure very nearly equals the maximum
bottomhole treating pressure.
r
4,434,849
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING HIGH
VISCOSTTY OILS
Joseph C. Allen, Bellaire, Tex., assignor to Heavy Oil Process,
Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 108,815, Dec. 31, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 940,390,
Sep., 1978, Pat. No. 4,257,650. This application Feb. 9, 1981,
Ser. No. 232,987
Int. a.3 E21B 43/24. 47/00
U.S. a. 166—252 15 Claims
1. A method of recovering oil from a subsurface earth for-
mation in which formation a steam cap can form comprising:
establishing a shaft hole extending from the surface to said
subsurface earth formation;
drilling a first plurality of boreholes radially from said shaft
hole in a substantially horizontal plane within a lower
portion of said formation, said first plurality of boreholes
defining a blanketed zone;
drilling a second plurality of boreholes within the blanketed
zone substantially vertically from said surface into said
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
133
formation, said second plurality of boreholes extending to
a depth above said first plurality of boreholes;
heating oil in said formatipn by injecting a heating fluid into
one of said plurality of boreholes;
injecting steam into said second plurality of boreholes to
form a gas cap; and
thereafter discontinuing injection of steam through said
plurality of boreholes and injecting water such that said
water is converted to steam to further provide for drive of
oil by said gas cap towards said first plurality of boreholes.
4434850
METHOD FOR DEMULSIFICATION OF BITUMEN
EMULSIONS USING POLYALKYLENE POLY AMINE
SALTS
David R. McCoy, Austin, Tex., assignor to Texaco Inc., White
Plains, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,456
Int. a.3 ClOG 33/04; E21B 43/24. 43/40
U.S. a. 166—267 4 Claims
1. A process for recovering petroleum from O/W bitumen
emulsions by demulsifying said emulsions by adding thereto
demulsifiers comprising water soluble polyamine salts pre-
pared by contacting poly(ethyleneimines) with organic or
inorganic acids wherein the polyamine salts have a molecular
weight from at least about 1,000 to the water solubility limit.
4. A process for recovering bitumen from a tar sand forma-
tion comprising
injecting into the tar sand a fluid containing hot water and-
/pr steam in order to emulsify the bitumen in the tar sand,
recovering the emulsified bitumen,
demulsifying said emulsion by adding thereto demulsifiers
comprising water soluble polyamine salts prepared by
contacting polyamines with organic or inorganic acids
wherein the polyamine salts have a molecular weight of at
least 1,000,
converting the salts of the water soluble polyamines into
inactive materials by adjustment of the pH of the aqueous
phase of the broken emulsion,
reinjecting the aqeuous phase into a bitumen containing
formation to recover additional bitumen.
vapor into a steam injection zone in the lower portion of
the reservoir through a thermal recovery fluid injection
well;
(b) injection cold water whose temperature is at least 75* P.
(41.8* C.) below the temperature at which steam vapor
condenses to water liquid at formation pressure into a
zone within the reservoir immediately adjacent the updip
limit of the reservoir via a fluid injection well; and
(c) recovering petroleum from the formation via a produc-
tion well located in a zone intermediate the wells of steps
(a) and (b).
4,434,852
METHOD OF ENHANCED OIL RECOVERY
EMPLOYING NITROGEN INJECTION
Thomas J. Morel; Stewart Haynes, Jr., and Jack H. Park, all of
Houston, Tex., auignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,805
Int. a.} E21B 43/22
U.S. a. 166—273 8 Claims
1. A method for the recovery of oil from a subterranean oil
reservoir having a dip of at least 10 degrees and penetrated by
spaced injection and production systems, comprising:
(a) injecting into said reservoir via said injection system at a
location up dip from said production system, a first fluid
comprising a mixture of nitrogen and from 2.0 to 20.0
percent by volume light hydrocarbon at rate sufficient to
produce a flow velocity in said reservoir which is less than
a critical velocity, V^, as defined by the relationship:
Vc =
2.741 xAp Sing
4,434,151
METHOD FOR STEAM INJECnON IN STEEPLY
DIPPING FORMATIONS
Stewart Haynes, Jr., and Donald S. Mims, both of Houston,
Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
CoBtinuation-iB-part of Ser. No. 166,658, Jul. 7, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,515
Int. a.} E21B 43/24
U.S. a. 166— m 6 Claims
1. A method for recovering petroleum from an inclined
reservoir containing high viscosity petroleum comprising:
(a) injecting a thermal recovery fluid comprising steam
wherein:
Vc is the critical velocity in feet per day,
K is the permeability of the reservoir in darcies,
<t> is the fractional porosity of the re8ervpir=<j>r(l-S»,r
Sor)i
4>T is the porosity of the reservoir,
Sifr is the residual water saturation,
$or is the residual oil saturation,
a is the dip angle of the reservoir in degrees,
Ap is the density difTerential between the displaced, fluid
and the displacing fluid in grams per cubic centimeter,
and
Afi is the viscosity differential between the displaced fluid
and the displacing fluid in centipoises;
(b) thereafter, injecting into said reservoir via said injection
system a predominantly nitrogen conuining gas at a rate
to produce a flow velocity which is also less than said
critical velocity defined above and in an amount sufficient
to strip previously injected light hydrocarbon from said
reservoir oil to form a transition zone of conditional misci-
bility; and thereafter
(c) injecting a driving fluid into said reservoir via said injec-
tion system to drive said transition zone through said
reservoir and displace oil to said production system and,
(d) recovering oil from said production system.
\
134
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,434^53
OIL WELL BLOW OUT CONTROL VALVE
Dale M. Bourgeoii, HouiA, La., aaiignor to Wayne Bourgeoif
and LeRoy Hebert, both of Houma, La., part interest to each
FUed Jun. 11, 1982, Scr. No. 387,510
Int. a.3 E21B 33/068
VS. a. 166—285 13 Clainu
10. The method of forming a fluid-tight seal between the
upper end of a production tubing and the inner surfaces of a
blow out control valve assembly cylindrical housing portion
downwardly loosely telescoped over the upper end portion of
the production tubing and wherein the cylindrical housing
portion includes three axially spaced circumferential and radi-
ally inwardly projecting annular abutments sealingly and rig-
idly mounted therein, providing an annular axially compress-
ible and radially expandable seal assembly between each pair of
adjacent annular abutments, and introducing a fluent harden-
able seal material under pressure into said cylindrical housing
portion in an area thereof disposed intermmliate said seal as-
semblies, whereby to pressurize said seal assemblies from adja-
cent sides thereof.
4,434,854
PRESSURE ACTUATED VENT ASSEMBLY FOR
SLANTED WELLBORES
Roy R. Vaao; George W. RfbUe, and Flint R. George, aU of
Houston, Tex., assignors to Geo Vana, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 166,547, Jul. 7, 1980, Pat No.
4,330,039. This appUcation May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,155
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 18,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int aj E21B 34/10. 43/117. 43/12
MS. a 166—386 10 Claims
I. A vent assembly in combination with a packer and perfo-
rating gun suspended on a tubing string into a cased borehole
with an open axial passageway extending from the perforating
gun to the surface for the lowering of a bar to detonate the
perforating gun and for the flow of production fluids through
the vent assembly to the surface, comprising:
a tubular body series connected in the tubing string and
having a portion of the axial passageway extending there-
through;
a sleeve disposed on said body forming an annular chamber;
piston means received within said annular chamber;
ports through said body and piston means,
said piston means being movable between an open position
where said ports allow fluid flow between said axial pas-
sageway and borehole and a closed position where fluid
flow is prevented;
guide means disposed on said piston means for bringing said
ports into registry in said open position; and
means communicating one portion of said piston means with
said axial passageway and another portion of said piston
means with the borehole whereby a sufficient pressure
diflerential between said axial passageway and borehole
will cause said piston means to move from said closed
position to said open position.
7. In a cased borehole having a tubing string suspended
therein, a packer located along the tubing string for closing the
casing annulus. and a vent assembly series connected in the
tubing string below the packer, the method comprising the
steps of:
(1) providing the vent assembly with a ported tubular body,
forming an annular chamber within the said body and
slidably mounting a ported sleeve within the annular
chamber;
(2) closing the port through the'body and thus the axial
passageway of the tubular string to the flow of fluids from
the casing annulus by sliding the ported sleeve to a closed
position where the ports are nonaligned;
(3) lowering the tubing string, packer and vent assembly into
the cased borehole in the closed position;
(4) effecting a pressure differential between the axial pas-
sageway of the tubing string and the casing annulus by
elevating the pressure within the axial passageway; and
(5) using the pressure differential of step (4) to force the
sleeve to slide into the open position where the ports are
aligned to immediately open a flow path allowing the flow
of fluids from the casing annulus, through the ports and
axial passageway, and up to the surface.
4,434355
SPRINKLER VALVE
George R. Given, Jr., Fredericksburg, Va., aasignor to The
United States of AoMrica u represented by the Secretary of
the NsTy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,692
Int. a.3 A62C 37/08
MS. a. 169—37 3 Claims
1. A sensor controlled valve for a pressurized sprinkler
system which allows the valve to be tested for flow without
activating the sprinkler system, comprising:
a valve body;
an inlet in the body, said inlet introducing pressurized fluid
to the valve;
an outlet in the body;
a flow passage connecting the inlet and the outlet;
a cylinder mounted in the flow passage;
a piston mounted in the cylinder so as to form a fluid pres-
sure chamber with the cylinder, the chamber adapted to
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
135
receive a control fluid, and the pressure within said cham-
ber being sensor controlled to allow the piston to open and
close the inlet;
a stem mounted in the outlet extending through the cylinder
and pressure chamber and connected to the piston for
withdrawing the piston from the inlet;
a stem extension provided to the stem such that the stem
extension projects from the outlet outside of the valve
body to allow the piston to be withdrawn from the inlet
from a position external to the valve.
4,434,856
GARDEN PLOW WITH SUPPORT MEANS OPERATIVE
TO INVERSELY ANGULARLY DISPLACE
EARTHWORKING TOOL
John H. Crane, deceased, late of Heflin, Ala., and Foy Aline
Crane, executrix, Rte. 3, Heflin, Ala. 36264
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,492
Int. a.3 AOIB 3/50: B62D 51/04
MS. a. 172—256 2 Claims
2. A garden plow including a longitudinal main frame and a
longitudinal motor and drive frame, mounting means mounting
said main frame from said motor and drive frame for oscillation
about an upstanding axis spaced intermediate the opposite ends
of said main frame, said motor and drive frame including motor
driven ground-engageable support and drive means mounted
thereon, means operative to releasably retain said main frame
in predetermined angularly displaced position about said up-
standing axis relative to said motor and drive frame, said main
frame including support means for supporting earthworking
tool means therefrom, said mounting means also including
means for supporting said main frame from said motor and
drive frame for oscillation about a horizontal central axis ex-
tenduig longitudinally of said motor and drive frame and angu-
larly displaceable about said upstanding axis with said main
frame relative to said motor and drive frame, said motor and
drive frame including means operative to releasably retain said
main frame in predetermined adjusted angularly displaced
positions about said horizontal axis relative to said motor and
drive frame, said support means for supporting earthworking
tool means from said main frame including means fof mounting
said tool means from said main frame for angular displacement
about a horizontal axis extending longitudinally of said main
frame, and means operatively connected between said motor
and drive frame and said earthworking tool means support
means operative to inversely angularly displace said earth-
working tool means support means relative to said main frame
in response to angular displacement of said main frame relative
to said motor and drive frame.
4,434387
TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT COUPLED THERETO
WITH HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEM INCLUDING
PHASING VALVE
Habil S. Basrai, Port Huron, Mich., assignor to Ford Motor
Company, Dearborn, Mich.
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317^53
Int. a.J AOIB 63/22
MS. a. 172—328 4 Claims
2. In combination, a tractor and a soil working implement
coupled thereto;
the tractor having at its rear end an implement hitch and a
lift means including lift arm means carried on the tractor
and operatively connected for raising and lowering said
hitch;
the implement being coupled at one end to said hitch and at
its other end being supported on height adjusting means;
the lift means and the height controlling means each includ-
ing a hydraulic cylinder means to raise or lower, respec-
tively, the hitch and the rear end of the implement;
a source of fluid under pressure;
a valve system comprising a plurality of valve means in
communication with one another;
one of said valve means including an auxiliary services valve
having a valve spool positionable in a first position for
directing fluid from a fluid input passageway connected to
the source of fluid to a flrst output passageway connected
to a lift valve for controlling fluid flow to the lift means
hydraulic cylinder;
a second one of said valve means including a phasing valve
having a valve body and a valve spool including an actuat-
ing stem portion extending out of said valve body for
automatically causing both cylinders to be restored to a
predetermined initial position upon a full raise signal to the
hydraulic lift means being initiated by the tractor opera-
tor; and
a lever member mounted adjacent the phasing valve spool
for engagement therewith and operatively connect^] to
linkage means mounted for engagement with a portion of
said lift arm, movement of said lift arm to said full raise
position causing said fift arm to engage said linkage means,
which causes said lever member to engage said phasing
valve spool stem portion, thus effecting movement of said
phasing valve spool to a position permitting said cylmder
restoration.
4,434358
AIR TOOL WITH STALL TORQUE REGULATOR AND
AIR BIASING MECHANISM
Hugh L. Whitehouac, Lyndhurst, Ohio, aadgBor to The Stanley
Works, New Britain, Coon.
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Scr. No. 340J66
Int a.J B25B 23/14. 21/00: B23P 19/06
MS. a. 173—12 13 Claims
1. An air tool comprising a housing having an air supply line
136
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
including a motor inlet passage and a valve chamber formed in
the motor inlet passage, an air operated rotary motor in the
housing having a normal free running no-load speed at a prede-
termined line pressure which decreases in speed as torque
loading on the motor increases, a shut-off valve movable in the
valve chamber between a normally open position and a closed
position for shutting off air to the motor, a compartment being
formed in the chamber at one end of the valve and directly
communicating with an inlet to the motor for directing air
under motor operating pressure against the valve for moving it
toward said closed position, an air bias compartment being
formed in th chamber at the opposite end of the shut-off valve
and communicating with the air supply line upstream of the
extending retainer sleeve arranged to hold a tool shank, said
retainer sleeve includes locking members engageable in axially
extendmg closed ended recesses in the tool shank for holding
the tool shank with axial play, wherein the improvement com-
pnses centering means on the front end of said housing and on
the rear end of said retainer sleeve for centering said tool
holder with the rear end thereof disposed in supported contact
with the front end of said housing, said locking members being
uniformly angularly spaced apart around the axis of said re-
tamer sleeve, stop means located within said tool holder for
engagement with said locking members for holding said lock-
ing members against axial displacement in the recesses in the
tool shank, said stop means being axially displaceable relative
to said locking member and including a first stop and a second
stop with said first stop being formed on said retainer sleeve,
said second stop is axially displaceable relative to said retainer
sleeve and can be fixed in position for securing one of said
locking members between said first stop and the end of one of
the recesses in the tool shank and another of said locking
members between said second stop and the end of another one
of the recesses in the tool shank.
shut-off valve chamber, the air bias compartment being con-
nected to an air bleed passage to atmosphere, and adjustable
valve means in the air bleed passage for selectively reducing
the pressure in the air bias compartment, relative to a predeter-
mined line pressure of the air supplied, for selective shut-off of
air now to the motor at a predetermined level of motor output
as determined by the air pressure acting on the motor, and stall
torqure regulator means in the air supply line upstream of the
shut-off valve chamber, the stall torque regulator means being
operable in response to fluid pressure acting on the motor for
establishing said predetermined line pressure of the air supplied
to the motor and to the air bias compartment of the shut-off
valve chamber.
4 434859
HAMMER DRILL FOR PERFORMING ROTARY
DRILLING OR PERCUSSIVE DRILLING
Gerhard Rumpp, Inning; Dieter Schoiz, Unterpfafrenhofen, and
Manfred Spieth, Martinsried, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Hiiti Aktiengesellschaft, Schaan, Liechtenstein
Filed Jun. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 392,121
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Jun. 29.
1981, 3125454
Int. a.3 E02D 7/02
UA a. 173-48 9 Claims
4,434,860
HOIST PULL DOWN SYSTEM FOR BLAST HOLE DRILL
Bruce Deyo, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to Dresser Industries.
Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,470
Int. a.3 E21B 15/00, 19/08
U.S. a. 173-147 12aaims
1. Hammer drill for performing percussion' drilling or rotary
drilling comprising a housing having a front end, a tool holder
axially displaceably mounted relative to the front end of said
housing and said tool holder having a front end and a rear end
with the rear end disposed in supported contact with the front
end of said housing when the hammer drill is arranged to
perform rotary drilling, said tool holder including an axially
1. A chain-type hoist pull down system for a blast hole drill
having a mast extending angularly upward from an integral
drill table and a drill pipe engaging head mounted for travel
along the mast, said system comprising:
a continuous chain connected at one end to the drill head to
pull upward thereon and connected at its other end to the
^ drill head to pull downward thereon, said chain being
reeved intermediate its ends around idler sprockets and a
drive sprocket connected to said mast, at least one of said
idler sprockets being resiliently connected to said mast
and effective to provide tension in said chain;
means suspended between said one idler sprocket and its
resilient mounting which is selectively actuable to in-
crease the tension in said chain; and
means mounted on said drill for rotating said drive sprocket
in either direction.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
137
4,434,861 4,434,862
DUST CONVEYING AND COLLECHNG SYSTEM AND DOWNHOLE TURBINE ROTARY DRILLING DEVICE
METHOD William C. Lyons, P.O. Box 2457, Santa Fe, N. Mex. 87501
D. Franklin Howeth, 233 Chuck Wagon Trail, Fort Worth, Tex. FUed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,584
76108 Int. a.3 E21B 4/02
Filed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,036 U.S. a. 175—103 5 Claims
Int. CI.5 E^B 21/06; E21C 7/02
U.S.a. 175— 66 54 Claims
32. A method for separating particulate material from an air
flow stream emanating from a drillhole comprising:
providing means for receiving said flow stream and conduct-
ing said flow stream to a point removed from the vicinity
of said drillhole,
providing mechanical conveying means in said receiving
means;
providing means for collecting finer material from said flow
stream and being in flow communication with said receiv-
ing means;
passing said flow stream through said receiving means and
separating relatively coarse material from said flow
stream at a point removed from the vicinity of said drill-
hole utilizing the inertia of said coarse material as pro-
vided by said flow stream emanating from said drillhole;
and
mechanically conveying said coarse material away from said
drillhole after separation from said flow stream.
33. Apparatus for conveying and collecting particulate ma-
terial entrained in a moving air stream emanating from a drill-
hole comprising:
means for receiving said air stream and for separating rela-
tively coarse material from finer material at a point re-
moved from the vicinity of said drillhole utilizing the
inertia of said coarse material and the velocity of said air
stream entering said receiving means, said receiving
means including a head member adapted to be disposed
around the mouth of said drillhole and forming passage
and means for directing the flow of said air stream and
said particulate material without materially reducing the
momentum of said coarse material;
means for collecting said finer material from said air stream
without materially interfering with the separation of said
coarse material; and
means forming an enclosure ii) flow receiving communica-
tion with said passage means in said head member and
defining a chamber for separating said coarse material
from said air stream by at least partially utilizing gravita-
tional forces acting on said coarse material, said chamber
including a material receiving hopper portion and a flow
stream discharge portion, and means for discharging said
material from said hopper portion in response to a change
in the pressure within said hopper portion with respect to
ambient atmospheric pressure.
I. In a gas turbine drilling device for use in a borehole form-
ing operation wherein means are provided for compressing and
injecting gas into a drill string with drill collars attached to the
downhole portion thereof, the improvement comprising:
a heat exchanger comprising an oil reservoir, said heat ex-
changer is housed in a collar and adapted to be removably
attached to the downhole portion of the drill collars;
a gas turbine connected in underlying relationship respective
to said heat exchanger;
a reduction gear means operably connected to the gas actu-
ated turbine to thereby achieve a reduction in revolutions
per minute between the'output of the gas turbine and the
final output of the gear reduction system, said gear reduc-
tion system being housed within a drill collar configura-
tion and adapted to be attached to the output portion of
the gas turbine;
a bit sub means removably attached to the output of said
gear reduction system for operably connecting the oujput
of said gear reduction system to a standard drill bit;
a gas passage means provided through said oil reservoir in
said heat exchanger, said gas turbine engine, said gear
reduction system, and said bit sub means to provide pas-
sage for gases through the system when all parts are oper-
ably connected together;
said oil reservoir in said heat exchanger contains lubricating
oil and includes means for urging lubricating oil retained
within said oil reservoir to flow to the working parts of
the gas turbine engine and the reduction gearing system
when the drilling system is operably connected;
means for returning the lubricating oil from the gas turbine
and the reduction gearing system to the oil reservoir so as
to provide continuous circulation of lubricating oil
throughout the gas turbine and reduction gearing system;
and
valve means responsive to gas pressure for precluding flow
of oil until the pressure at said gas passage means reaches
a predetermined magnitude.
138
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,434363
DRILL STRING SPUNED RESIUENT TUBULAR
TELESCOPIC JOINT FOR BALANCED LOAD DRILLING
OF DEEP HOLES
William R. Garrett, Houston, Tex., aaaignor to Smith Interna-
tional. Inc., Newport Beach, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 38,674, May 14, 1979, Pat. No.
4J81,726. This appUcation Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,832
Int. a.J E21B 77/00
U.S. a. 175-321 57 OMims
4,434,864
ROOF BOLTER VEHICLE AND WHEELS THEREFOR
Frtnk V. Lopo, 790 W. Price River Dr., Price, Utah 84501
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,747
Int. a.J B60B 15/00; B60C 7/24; B62D lJ/00
UAa.l80-6J 7 Claims
/^
/s
1. Well tool comprising
a tubular barrel,
a tubular mandrel axially slideably disposed in the barrel,
spline means to transfer torque between the barrel and man-
drel,
means on the barrel at one end of the tool adapted for con-
nection to a rotary drilling member,
means on the mandrel at the other end of the tool adapted
for connection to a rotary drilling member,
stop means on the barrel and mandrel limiting relative axial
movement thereof,
first double anchored seal means between the barrel and
mandrel sealing against flow of fluid between the interior
of the tool and the annular clearance between the barrel
and mandrel, while allowing relative axial motion be-
tween said barrel and mandrel,
second double anchored seal means between the barrel and
mandrel sealing against the flow of fluid between the
exterior of the tool and said annular clearance between the
barrel and mandrel while allowing relative axial motion
between said barrel and mandrel, and
sliding pressure seal means between said first and second
double anchored seal means sealing against the flow of
fluid axially through said annular clearance between the
barrel and mandrel while allowing relative axial motion
between said barrel and mandrel,
said double anchored seal means each being annular and
including a first annular periphery coaxial with and af-
fixed to the barrel preventing relative axial and rototional
movement between said first periphery and barrel, and a
second annular periphery coaxial with and affixed to the
mandrel preventing relative axial and rotational move-
ment between said second periphery and mandrel, and an
annular flexible portion coaxial with said first and second
peripheries and flexibly interconnecting said peripheries
and flexing upon relative axial motion of said peripheries
while sealing therebetween,
said double anchored seal means isolating said sliding pres-
sure seal means and preventing contamination of the slid-
ing seal means by fluid outside the barrel and preventing
contamination of the sliding seal means by fluid inside the
barrel.
1. In combination with a roof-bolter vehicle for use in under-
ground mines, which vehicle has an elongate chassis frame,
front and rear sets of stub axles extending transversely of and
substantially amidships the frame and providing wheel-mount-
ing hubs laterally of the frame, and sprocket wheel and chain
drive means for said axles, whereby steering of the vehicle is
accomplished by driving one of the front wheels faster than the
other, the features of unusually wide, rubber-tired wheels
mounted on the axle hubs, respectively, each of said wheels
comprising a wider than normal, circular, tire-mounting rim
having overall width of substantially twelve inches and an
integral peripheral flange at one side thereof; means securing a
removable mounting ring as a peripheral flange at the other
side thereof; a circular groove for receiving an O-ring adjacent
to the mounting-ring-securing-means so as to be directly cov-
ered by the corresponding bead of a mounted, oversize tire; an
axle-hub-attachment plate secured within the rim off-center
inwardly thereof toward the inside peripheral flange of the
rim, so as to be at substantially the normal spacing from the
inside, peripheral flange of the rim; an O-ring positioned in said
groove; a 14.50x15 tubeless tire, oversize for said rim,
mounted on said rim and bearing unusually tightly against said
rim flanges, with the bead thereof that corresponds to the
O-ring directly covering and bearing against said O-ring; a
plastic foam inflating said tires; and fastening means fixedly
securing the axle-hub-attachment plate of each wheel to the
hub of its corresponding axle of the vehicle.
4,434,^
POWER TRANSMISSION FOR A CLEANER
Donald B. Tschudy, Canton, and Charles R. Morrow, Alliance,
both of Ohio, assignors to The Hoover Company, North Can-
ton, Ohio
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,190
lat a.3 B62D 51/04
VJS. a 180-19 H 11 Claims
11. A cooling system for a clutching arrangement including;
(a) a hubbed ^ear,
(b) a plurality \of clutch disks in said hubbed gear.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
139
circulate air to said clutch disks.
(c) cooling vanes in said hubbed gear, drive means for driving said drive belt, and suspension means
^'^Ifil'l'?"*.*! !!!^ !f.*LE*!;!?!'-""« ■*'** '=°°""« ^»"« *° f°' supporting said drive belt for suspension movement relative
to said frame, said suspension means comprising a lever sup-
ported for pivotal movement about a first pivot axis on said
^ ^o»» frame, a suspension element, means including a pivotal connec-
*" '^"^ ^„» ^^ ^,'>»* ^ :f,^g^^ ,i« t'on between said lever and said suspension element for loading
^"^^
ii*
(e) said cooling vanes disposed toully within said hubbed
gear, and
(0 said cooling vanes disposed adjacent said slots.
4,434,866
SPEED-SENSITIVE POWER STEERING SYSTEM
James J. Duffy, Livonia, Mich., assignor to Ford Motor Com-
pany, Dearborn, Mich.
Filed May 19, 1982, Ser. No. 396,982
Int. a.3 B62D 5/08
U.S. a. 180—143 3 Claims
said suspension element by the pivotal movement of said lever,
a link, means providing a relative pivotal connection by the
one end of said link and said drive belt, and means pivoully
connecting the other end of said link to said lever for pivoting
said lever upon movement of said drive belt relative to said
frame for loading the suspension element upon such relative
movement.
4,434,868
REAR WHEEL CONTROL UNIT FOR TWO-WHEELED
VEHICLES WITH UNIVERSAL DRIVE MECHANISM
Horst Brenner, Gunding, and Rene Hinsberg, Munich, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, auignors to Bayerische Motoren
Werke A.G., Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,067
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 3,
1980, 8017869[U]
Int. a.3 B62K 25/20; B62M J 7/00
U.S. a. 180—226 6 Claims
1. A power steering gear mechanism for a vehicle for pro-
viding a power assist as steering torque is delivered to a steer-
able member from a steering shaft;
a valve mechanism having a first valve element connected to
the steering shaft and a second valve element connected
drivably to the steerable member;
a yieldable torsion element for transferring torque directly to
the steerable member from the steering shaft;
a power steering pressure source including a pump that is
adapted to be driven at a speed proportional to vehicle
speed and having a pressure delivery passage and a flow
return passage;
reaction pressure chambers in proximity to said valve mech-
anism;
pressure responsive pistons in said reaction chambers; and
valve means responsive to the pressure in said pressure
delivery passage for distributing pressure from said pres-
sure delivery passage to said reaction cylinders at high
pump speeds and for connecting the flow return passage
of said pump to said reaction chambers at lower pump
speeds.
4,434,867
DRIVE BELT FOR SNOW VEHICLE AND SUSPENSION
THEREFOR
James E. Grinde, Anoka, Minn., assignor to Yamaha Hatsudoki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Iwata, Japan
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 347,005
Int. a.3 B62M 27/02
VS. CI. 180—190 11 Claims
1. A snow vehicle having a frame, front ski means supported
by said frame for steering movement, an endless drive belt,
1. A rear-wheel control for two-wheel vehicles, especially a
motorcycle, comprising
a driven wheel controlled by a one-armed oscillating lever
pivoted at the frame and connected to a gear wheel and
pinion of a ring/gear pinion gearing so that the driven
wheel is fixed with respect to rotation,
the gear wheel and the pinion being disposed in an axle
housing relative to the one-armed oscillating lever by
means of an arm and a moment support flexibly connected
to said arm and the frame,
said housing adapted to be pivoted,
the pinion being disposed so that said pinion is aligned with
the one-armed oscillating lever at the connecting member
of the housing,
, said pinion being connected to a universal shaft arranged in
said lever,
said universal shaft, in the area of the pivot point of said
140
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
lever at the frame, being provided universal joint means tions of each lateral margin of said panel, said rail means being
and the lever is also flexibly connected to the housing. raised from said flexible panel along the slide and contoured
4,434,869
RESCUE APPARATUS
Michael R. Roop, 4525 Tartan Dr., Baton Rouge, La. 70816, and
Rusaell P. Cook, Sr., 2918 Little Farms Dr., Zachary, La.
70791
Filed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 386,206
Int. a.i A62B 1/08
U.S. a. 182-10 18 aaim«
1. An apparatus for transporting personnel or other cargo
between higher and lower elevations comprising:
(1) a support frame anchorable at the higher elevation in
which frame is mounted: a right guideline means spool to
which are attached the proximal ends of a right guideline
means and a left guideline means and respectively, the
distal ends of said guideline means being anchorable to the
lower elevation, said guideline means spools having a
means for tensioning said guideline means; a towline spool
means having a right towline and a left towline which
towlines are wound around said towline spool means in
opposite directions, and
(2) carrier means suspendable from each guideline means by
a pulley means, said carrier means being attachable to the distal
end of each towline and positioned such that the carrier means
suspended from one guideline means is near or at the higher
elevation while the carrier means suspended from the other
guideline means is near or at the lower elevation, said carrier
means comprising a transverse member whose ends can fit on
inclined anti-sag guides attached to the right and left sides of
the support frame, said guides being placed such thar they
support the carrier means as it traverses the length of the
guides, said guides extending downward and beyond the front
of said support frame.
for being raised even higher from the slide panel adjacent the
head end of the slide device.
4,434,871
EMERGENCY ESCAPE LADDER
Johannes F. Niedworok, Rte. 4, Box 300, Sanford, N.C. 27330
Filed Mar. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 471,878
Int. a.J E06C 1/36. 1/56. 1/58
U.S. a. 182-198 17 Qaims
4,434,870
EVACUATION SLIDE DEVICE
John M. Fisher, Cuyahoga Falls, Ohio, assignor to The B. F.
Goodrich Company, New York, N.Y.
FUed Nov. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 443,424
iBt d? A62B 1/20: B65G 11/10
U.S. a. 182-48 9 Claims
1. An inflatable slide device for emergency evacuation hav-
ing a flexible panel defining a slide surface extending from a
head end of the inflatable slide device to a foot end of the
inflatable side device and a first plurality of interconnected
tubular members defining a first inflatable chamber, a second
plurality of interconnected tubular members defining a second
inflatable chamber fluidly independent of said first chamber,
each of said chambers including tubular rail means along por-
1. An emergency escape ladder adapted to assume a folded
inoperative position and a rigid operative position wherein in
said operative rigid position the ladder is functional to allow an
individual to escape from a multi-story building structure by
descending downwardly a selected distance and then reposi-
tioning the emergency escape ladder in order that the individ-
ual may further descend from the structure, and so forth and so
on until the individual has moved to an area of safety, said
emergency escape ladder comprising in combination: a plural-
ity of treads; flexible tie means operatively interconnected
between respective treads for maintaining said treads together
in a ladder assembly even when said ladder assumes said folded
inoperative position; retaining means formed about an upper
end of said ladder for attaching the same to a structure for
supporting the emergency escape ladder while an individual is
descending downwardly thereon; and a plurality of rigid stabi-
lizing bar means for operatively interconnecting respective
treads together to form an elongated rigid ladder structure for
enabling the emergency escape ladder to be raised, lowered, or
repositioned by an individual escaping from said multi-story
structure.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
141
4,434,872
VEHICLE LIFT
Llewellyn R. Daniels, Jr., 437 W. 5th Ave., Apache Junction,
Ariz. 85220
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,179
Int. G.^ B60S 13/00
U.S. a. 187—8.74 18 Qaims
1. In an apparatus for hydraulically lifting a motor vehicle
having:
a hydraulically operated, generally vertical ram;
axle fork means operatively coupled to said ram proximate
the top distal end portion thereof;
a pair of spaced apart wheel saddle means for operatively
engaging two parallel opposing tires of a motor vehicle at
a time;
a yoke mechanism operatively secured to the lower surface
of said wheel saddle means for lifting same to selectively
permit the hydraulically operated ram to lift both the axle
fork means and the wheel saddle means; and
the improvement comprising: yoke tang means for raising
the lifting point in the vertically upward stroke of said
hydraulically operated ram so that operative lifting en-
gagement with the yoke mechanism of said wheel saddle
means occurs earlier in said vertically upward stroke so
that said ax|p fork means avoids the underside of said
vehicle and the damage resulting therefrom.
4,434,873
ELECTRIC ELEVATOR CAR DRIVING DEVICE
Kazutoshi Ohta, Nagoya, and Eiki Watanabe, Inazawa, both of
Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, To-
kyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 353,969
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 9, 1981, 56-53535
Int. a? B66B 1/00
U.S. a. 187—28 10 Claims
7. An electric elevator car driving means for driving an
elevator car, which is suspended from a cable, between floors
in a building structure, said driving means comprising:
a metal sheave having at least one circular groove in the
peripheral surface thereof and having a plurality of metal-
lic projections projecting into said groove;
a layer of material disposed in said groove and covering said
projections and forming a cable race;
said cable reeved along said cable race, the material of said
layer having a coefficient of friction relative to said cable
which is greater than that between said cable and the
metal of said sheave, said projections have dimensions for
causing them to come into secure engagement with said
cable;
driving means connected to said sheave for driving said
sheave for driving said cable;
detector means for detecting the occurrence of damage to
said layer; and
controller means to which said detector means is connected
and which is in turn connected to said drive means, said
controller means being responsive to said detector means
for controlling said drive means for stopping the elevator
car before it reaches the floor at the limit of movement of
the elevator car in the vertical direction;
wherein said controller means comprises means for control-
ling the drive means for causing the elevator car to stop at
the nearest floor at which the elevator car can be stopped
when the deceleration and jerking of the elevator car are
kept at the respective normal maximal values of decelera-
tion and jerking capable of being withstood by the eleva-
tor car.
4,434,874
ELEVATOR SYSTEM
William R. Caputo, Wyckoff, N.J., assignor to Westinghousc
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,684
Int. a.3 B66B 1/30
U.S. a. 187—29 R 12 Qaims
I
-|-
„^s.-
■^^^^^ I "
Ml
1^
nmilLilitK»H
Mieatw r
1. An elevator system, comprising:
an elevator car,
motive means for moving said elevator car in a predeter-
mined travel path having upper and lower terminal zones
and an intermediate zone,
car position means providing a car position signal responsive
to the absolute position of said elevator car, at least in the
upper and lower terminal zones,
means providing a reference signal responsive to said car
position signal,
speed pattern means providing a speed pattern signal indica-
tive of the desired speed of said elevator car,
limit means for providing a limiting signal responsive to said
reference signal, at least when said elevator car is in one of
said terminal zones,
means having inputs responsive to said speed pattern signal
and to said limiting signal for providing an auxiliary speed
pattern signal which is responsive to the input signal of
lesser magnitude at any instant,
■v.
142
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
means providing a velocity signal responsive to the actual
speed of said elevator car,
and means for controlling said motive means in response to
said velocity signal and said auxiliary speed pattern signal.
4,434^5
EMERGENCY LEVELLING DEVICE FOR A UPT CAR
Sergio ScarzcUa, Cone Taranto 130/ A, Torino, Italy
FUed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,980
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, May 12, 1981, 6763S A/81
lot a.^ B66B 5/02
VS. a. 187—29 R 16 Claims
1. Emergency levelling device for a lift car (10) operated by
a winch (20) driven by an electric motor (24) and having an
associated emergency brake (28), including an auxiliary motor
having an output shaft, means for coupling the output shaft of
the auxiliary motor to the winch (20), means for releasing the
brake (28), and means for controlling the operation of the
release means of the brake (28) and the auxiliary motor in the
event of an unwanted stoppage of the lift car (10) in a position
different from the normal stop levels (L„), to bring the lift car
(10) to one of said levels (L,),
characterised in that the auxiliary motor is a hydraulic motor
(30) having a shaft (34) with a reversible sense of rotaion
and the means for controlling the operation of hydraulic
motor (30) include:
an hydraulic control circuit (32) including a hydraulic
accumulator (38) for operating the hydraulic motor
(30), valve means (54) for controlling the communica-
tion between the hydraulic accumulator (38) and the
hydraulic motor (30), and selector means (69) inter-
posed between the valve means (54) and the hydraulic
motor (30) for controlling the sense of rotation of the
shaft (34) of the hydraulic motor (30);
actuator means (56, 152; 184) for controlling the opening
of the valve means, and
means (85; 164) for indicating of the position of the lift car
(10) and position sensor means (128; 176) cooperating
with each other and displaceable relative to each other
in synchronism with the movement of the lift car (10),
the position sensor means (128; 176) being operatively
connected to the selector means (69) to control auto-
matically the sense of rotation of the shaft (34) of the
hydraulic motor (32) and the resulting movement of the
lift car in the more convenient direction to reach one of
said normal stop positions (L«r)-
4,434,876
GUIDE ROLLER FOR SKIP OR CAGE
Ronald M. K. McKechnie, Vaal Reeb, South Africa, assignor to
Vaal Reeft Exploration and Mining Company Limited, Jofaan*
nesborg, Soath Africa
Continuation of Ser. No. 221,449, Dec. 30, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Jul. 11, 1983, Ser. No. 512,572
Claims priority, application South Africa, Jan. 4, 1980,
80/0058
Int a.) B66B 7/02
VS. a. 187—95 23 Claims
1. A guide roller assembly suitable for a skip, cage, lift or the
like, comprising:
guide engaging roller means for engaging a guide of said
skip, cage, lift or the like;
first and second biasing means operatively connected to said
roller means for urging said roller means into rolling
contact with said guide;
said first biasing means having a lower load bearing capacity
than said second biasing means, said first and second
biasing means cooperating such that when the guide roller
assembly moves towards said guide, said roller means is
deflected against the action of said first biasing means by
a predetermined distance, whereupon said first biasing
means is rendered Inoperative and said second biasing
means is simultaneously brought into action to resist said
load, and when said guide roller assembly moves away
from said guide, said first biasing means undergoes exten-
sion to maintain said roller means in contact with said
guide, there being no coupling of said first and second
biasing means and no extension of said second biasing
means during said extension of said first biasing means.
<
4,434,877
TRUCK-MOUNTED BRAKE SYSTEM FOR RAILWAY
CARS
Kenneth D. Swander, Lansing, 111., assignor to Hadady Corp.,
Lansing, 111.
Continuation of Ser. No. 236,139, Feb. 20, 1981, abandoned.
This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,122
Int. a.i B61H 13/28: F16J 15/16
VS. a 188—52 9 Claims
1. A single-acting power cylinder unit adapted for use in
truck-mounted, self-aligning railway freight car tread brakes
adapted to be used with brake levers pivotally suspended from
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
143
a railway car bolster, which levers move brake beams toward
respective wheel and axle assemblies, said power cylinder unit
adapted to be pivotally connected to the lower ends of said
brake levers, said power cylinders comprising:
a one-piece housing, which includes a cylinder with one
closed end;
a bulkhead sealing the other end of said housing;
a rigid but movable piston head positioned within the cylin-
der of said housing, said piston head rigidly affixed to a
piston rod;
spring means, within said housing, adapted to urge said
piston head toward said bulkhead;
an annular bearing mounted in the closed end of said housing
adapted to provide lateral suppori for said piston rod, the
combination of said housing, said bulkhead and said piston
head defining a gas-tight space;
said piston head comprising a skiri having three circumfer-
ential grooves on the exterior surface, said grooves
adapted to receive a bearing ring, a fluid sealing ring and
a lubricating ring, in that order sequentially starting from
said gas-tight space; and
a compressed gas port adapted to pass compressed gas into
said gas-tight space.
1. A clutch mechanism for a power transmission system
having one drive member and two driven members, compris-
ing:
at least one pair of roller clutch members interposed be-
tween said drive member and said two driven members so
as to transmit the rotational power of said drive member
to said driven members independently of each other when
said drive member rotates;
said pair of roller clutch members operatively cooperating
with said drive member and said driven members such
that one of said driven members, which is rotating at a
higher speed than said drive member due to external
force, is set free from said drive member while said power
from said drive member is transmitted to the other driven
member;
said drive member being rotatably fitted on outer circumfer-
ential poriions of said two driven members;
said drive member including an inner circumferential por-
tion provided with recessed cam surface means for loosely
receiving said rollers and for locking said rollers at a front
position and a rear position in the rotational direction of
said drive member to thereby connect said drive member
and said two driven members;
said roller clutch members being loosely held by retaining
means so as to be movable in the rotational direction of
said drive member;
said drive member having an inner circumferential poriion
formed with a recessed portion;
at least one cam member having said recessed cam surface
means provided thereon being disposed in said recessed
portion; and
elastic members disposed in said recessed portion at the front
and rear of said cam member in the rotational direction of
said drive member.
4,434,878
CLUTCH MECHANISM FOR POWER TRANSMISSION
SYSTEM
Kiyokazu Okubo, Saltama, Japan, assignor to Honda Giken
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 208,416, Nov. 19, 1980, Pat. No. 4,373,407.
This application May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 373^56
Int. a.' F16D 47/04. 41/06; F16H 35/04
VS. a. 192—48.92 5 ChUms
»• '7Ja f77 Ids 173
4,434379
SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATIC ACTUATION OF A MOTOR
VEHICLE CLUTCH
Dieter Lutz, Scbweinfurt; Franz Nagler, Gochsbcim; Wolfgang
Thieler, Hassfuri-Uchenhofca, and Rudy Telleri, Scbweinfuri,
all of Fed. Rep. of Gemiaay, assignors to Sachs-Systemtech-
nik GmbH, Schweinftirt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 20, 1981. Ser. No. 285,011
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Gcmany, Jul. 25,
1980, 3028251
Int. a.} B60K 41/28
VS. a. 192—0.052 8 Claims
y
1. A system for automatic actuation of the clutch means of a
motor vehicle provided with a multiple gear transmission and
with means for shifting said transmission including a motor
comprising pneum^c cylinder means for eftecting engage-
ment and disengagement of said clutch means in accordance
with fluid pressure in said cylinder means; connectmg means
operatively joining said pneumatic cylinder means with said
clutch means; fluid pressure source means from which fluid
pressure may be supplied to said cylinder means; vent means
through which fluid preuure may be vented from said cylinder
means; valve means for controlling delivery of fluid preuure to
said cylinder means from said fluid pressure source means and
for venting of fluid pressure from said cylinder means through
said vent means; and control means for controlling operation
of said valve means in dependence upon the position of said
connecting means and the speed of said motor, said control
means including switching contact means responsive to the
operating condition of-said transmission to effect engagement
or disengagement of said clutch; said switching contact means
including a first switching contact operable at initiation of gear
change of said transmission, a second switching contact opera-
ble when said transmission is engaged in one of a first gear or
a reverse gear, a third switching contact operable when higher
gears of said transmission are engaged and a fourth switching
contact operable in an undepressed position of an accelerator
pedal of said motor vehicle, with a manually operable fifth
switching contact being provided, said control means includ-
ing means for switching said valve means into a position as-
signed to disengagement operation when either of said first
switching contact or said second switching contact and said
fourih switching contact are operated together or when said
fourih switching contact and said fifth switching contact are
c<~
144
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
operated together or when said third switching contact and
said fourth switching contact are together and at the same time
the rotational speed of said motor is below a set value.
4,434,880
HANDWHEEL CLUTCH FOR SEWING MACHINES
Boletlaw Komatowski, Elizabeth, N J., SHignor to The Singer
Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,637
Int. a.J F16D 11/00; D05B ^9/00
U.S. a. 192—67 R 4 ciainu
1. In a sewing machine having an arm shaft, a handwheel,
and a drive means for rotating said handwheel, a clutch means
for drivingly coupling said handwheel to said arm shaft com-
prising a drive notch formed in said handwheel and a driving
element supported on said arm shaft for rotation therewith and
arranged to tilt between each of two bistable positions, a first of
said bistable positions in which said driving element is in driv-
ing engagement with said drive notch and a second of said
bistable positions in which said driving element is out of driv-
ing engagement with said drive notch, wherein said driving
element comprises:
a. a substantially planar yoke having a pair of flexible mem-
bers each joined at one extremity to said yoke and ar-
ranged with their free extremities facing each other and
spaced apart a predetermined distance;
b. diametrically opposed reception seat surfaces formed on
said arm shaft spaced apart a distance which is greater
than said predetermined distance between said free ex-
tremities of said flexible members;
c. said yoke being assembled on said arm shaft with said free
extremities of said flexible members arranged each in
engagement with a respective one of the diametrically
opposed reception seat surfaces on said arm shaft and with
said flexible members being flexed each to a position on an
opposite side of the plane of said yoke; and
d. means for interlocking said yoke with said arm shaft for
roution therewith when said free extremities of said flexi-
ble members are in engagement with said reception seat
surfaces.
rotation and axial movement therewith, said cam means
having axially spiraling groove means thereon; and
(b) cam follower means, selectively movable generally radi-
ally into said groove means during rotation of said cam
means for interacting with a surface of said groove means
to axially drive at least a portion of the shaft means rela-
te*.
ENGME
TJ —
4,434 881
HIGH SPEED ACCESSORY DISCONNECT APPARATUS
AND METHODS
Jpieph Denk, Manhattan Beach, and William B. Martin,
Redoodo Beach, hoth of Calif., aaaignors to The Garrett Cor-
poration, Lot Angelea, Calif.
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,419
Int. a.3 F16D 43/25, 11/04
U.S. a. 192—89 A 27 Claims
1. High speed apparatus for disconnecting a driving mecha-
nism from a driven mechanism rotationally coupled thereto by
shaft means, at least a portion of the shaft means being axially
movable out of coupling engagement with one of the mecha-
nisms, said apparatus comprising:
(a) cam means mounted coaxially on the shaft means for
« 1
SENSOR
^
^ i
MECHANOM {
GENERATOR
^ir^
tiye to said cam follower means and out of engagement
with one of the mechanisms, said groove means being
configured to permit unimpeded entry of said cam fol-
lower means thereinto regardless of the rotational orienta-
tion of said cam means relative to said cam follower
means.
4,434,882
CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING
Armin Olschewski; Lothar Walter, both of Schweinfurt; Man-
fred Brandenstein, Eussenheim, and Leo MUiler, Eaaleben, ail
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, anignon to SKF Kugellagerfab-
riken GmbH, Schweinftirt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 280,120
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 3.
1980, 8017878[U]
Int. C\? F16D 23/14
U.S. a. 192—98 5 Claims
11 12
1. In a release bearing, particularly for automotive-vehicle
clutches, with a sliding sleeve made of a vibration damping and
noise-insulating material, the sleeve being mounted with small
clearance on a guiding element, in a manner that allows axial
back and forth movement; the improvement wherein the slid-
ifig sleeve is provided with recesses that extend in an axial"
direction and are distributed around the circumference and has
slits in the regions thereof adjacent its axial ends that originate
at its axial ends.
4434883
DEVICE FOR SHAFT ALIGNMENT IN A CLUTCH OR
BRAKE ASSEMBLY
Charles D. Raines, Bethel, Minn., auignor to Horton Manufac-
turing Co., Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 141,965, Apr. 21, 1980, abandoned.
This application Feb. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 352,914
Int a.J F16D 1/08. 25/063
UA a. 192—110 R 1 Claim
1. Device for centering and aligning a shaft in a clutch or
brake assembly having an assembly housing, comprising, in
combination: a quick demount bushing having a collar portion
including an axial bore, with the diameter of the axial bore of
the quick demount bushing being generally equal to the diame-
ter of and for receipt onto the shaft; means for locking the
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
145
quick demount bushing from relative rotation with the shaft;
the quick demount bushing furthei* including a tapered outer
surface; the assembly housing including a hub having an axial
bore being of greater diameter than the diameter of the shaft;
the hub including an inner tapered bore having a shape com-
plementary to and for receipt of the Upered outer surface of
the quick demount bushing to form a wedge flt therebetween;
means for holding the quick demount bushing in the inner
tapered bore of the hub; and a shaft mount in the assembly
housing in the form of a one piece bushing having a flxed
thickness dimension in a radial direction and in the axial direc-
tion and having an outside diameter substantially euqal to the
diameter of and for receipt into the axial bore of the hub and
having an inside diameter substantially equal to the diameter of
and for receipt onto the shaft for holding the shaft in axial
alignment with the hub as the quick demount bushing is being
inserted and drawn into the inner tapered bore of the hub, with
the shaft mount being removable from the axial bore of the hub
and from the shaft after the quick demount bushing is held by
the holding means in the inner tapered bore of the hub with the
shaft in axial alignment with the hub, the bushing allowing use
of the same assembly housing with differing size shafts.
4,434,884
SPIRAL ESCALATOR
John L. Kettle, Vernon, Conn., auignor to Otis Elevator Com-
pany, Farmington, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 294,087, Aug. 19, 1981, abandoned.
This application Jul. 1, 1983, Ser. No. 509,982
Int. C\? B65B 9/12
U.S. a. 198—328 1 Gaim
1. A system for moving people between two or more floors,
characterized by:
coupled steps that move in a closed pattern, having inner and
.outer perimeters between the floors,
a biaxis linkage for coupling adjacent steps to enable them to
pivot about a rotation axis that is perpendicular to either
the inner or outer perimeter,
a track system for guiding the steps in the pattern,
a pair of vertical supports that extend between the floors for
supporting the tracks,
means for propelling the steps along the tracks,
said closed pattern having sections that spiral around the
supports between the floors, in which the steps- form a
staircase, and substantially straight, horizontal sections
which extend between the spiral sections and which are
located below each floor,
said track system comprising a single track along the inner
perimeter of the pattern and two tracks along the outer
perimeter, said two tracks being vertically disposed in the
staircase and the higher of the two being horizontally
disposed outward from the outer perimeter relative to the
other, each step having a guide roller riding ^n said higher
track, which roller is on an arm which extends over the
lower track.
a biaxis linkage for connecting said steps along the outer
perimeter, said linkage being the only connection between
adjacent steps and comprising a vertical pin on each step,
the pins being located between the corners of adjacent
steps at the outer perimeter, and an arm connected to the
pins of adjacent steps which can rotate about and slide
vertically on said pins, and
each step having a generally triangular shape like a pie slice
to provide a generally triangular space between adjacent
steps in said horizontal sections of the pattern.
4,434,885
OVERCAP ORIENTING APPARATUS
Martin Brugman, and Herman Van Schaik, both of Amsterdam,
Netherlands, assignors to S. C. Johnson k Sons, Inc., Racine,
WU.
Filed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,160
Int. a.3 B65G 47/24
U.S. a. 198—388 1 Claim
1. Apparatus for arranging in like orientation overcaps of the
type having open bottoms, comprising;
a bin for holding jumbled overcaps, said bin having a cylin-
drical wall with an openmg on one side;
a chute beside said bin, having a horizontal upper edge along
said opening;
a cylindrical array of horizontal flight bars within said bin,
each of said bars pivotable about a horizontal axis and
having a multiplicity of pickup sites spaced therealong;
means to rotate said array such that said bars pass said edge
seriatim along a downward arc;
each pickup site having an overcap support surface parallel
to and spaced from said axis, lateral walls extending from
said support surface toward said axis and forming with
said support surface an overcap-receiving cavity, and a
pickup pin extending from said support surface toward
said axis; and
means to pivot said bars to different orientations at different
positions within said bin, thereby to: (1) capture overcaps
in said cavities with their bottoms spaced from said sup-
port surfaces and facing said pins, (2) invert said overcaps
146
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
Buch that they slide over said pins, (3) deposit said over-
caps bottom down onto said chute, and (4) withdraw said
pins to free said overcaps to slide down said chute in like
orientation.
4,434386
APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR POSITIONING
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
John F^t, Wynnewood, Okla., aigignor to XeneU Corporation,
Wynocwood, Okla.
FUed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,446
iBt a.J B65G 39/10. 47/24
U.S. a. 198-389 1 Ctain,
4,434387
ISOLATED STOP FOR VIBRATING FEEDERS
Glco E. Yager, Binghamtoo, N.Y., aarignor to UaiTcnal loitni-
meati Corporation, Binghantoii, N.Y.
Cootiniution of Ser. No. 222,677, Jan. 5, 1981, abuidoiMd. This
appUcation Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,061
Int. C\} B65G 47/24
U.S. a. 198-391 2 Claims
1. An automated method of handling electrical components,
comprising:
mechanically positioning in sequence at a predetermined
position a plurality of electrical components of the type
including:
a body; I
a lower body portion extending from said body in a direc-
tion parallel to a first axis of said body, said lower body
portion having a width in a direction parallel to a sec-
ond axis of said body, and a thickness less than said
width in a direction parallel to a third axis of said body,
said first, second and third body axes being mutually
perpendicular; and
first and second lead wires extending from said lower
body portion substantially parallel to said first body axis
and spaced apart in a direction parallel to said second
axis;
said positioning step including the steps of:
placing each of said electrical components between a pair
of routing rollers so that said body of each of said
electrical components is engaged by both of said rollers
and thereby orienting each of said electrical compo-
nents so that said first body axis thereof is vertical, with
said lead wires extending downward from said body,
and so that said second body axis is parallel to a prede-
termined horizontal line, said rollers rotating in oppo-
site directions and inwardly from above toward each
other; and
gravity feeding said oriented electrical components se-
quentially along a predetermined path between said
rotating rollers toward small ends of said rotating rol-
lers to a predetermined location in space, said rotating
rollers being continuously conically tapered between a
location^thereon where said electrical components are
initially placed and said small ends; and
releasably retaining each of said electrical components at
said predetermined position;
said predetermined position of said electrical components
being defined by said predetermined location in space,
said vertical orienUtion of said fjrst body axes, and said
orientation of said second body axes parallel to said prede-
termined horizontal line.
1. In an apparatus for vibratory feed of electrical compo-
nents along a guide shelf of a vibrating feeder and into engage-
ment with a stop means for halting said components at an
unload station of said feeder and for pick-up of said parts on
said feeder at said unload station by a pick-up head which is
isolated from the vibrations of said feeder, said vibrating feeder
comprising means for recirculating components which are
misoriented and improperiy positioned on said guide shelf, the
improvement comprising:
support means for supporting said stop means, said support
means being isolated from the vibrations of said feeder,
whereby the vibrations of components at said unload station
are minimized such that precise pick-up of said compo-
nents on said feeder by said pick-up head is facilitated;
means for limiting the back-up of componente on said guide
shelf behind a component abutting said stop edge; and
said stop means being configured to extend into said feeder
such that an edge of said stop is adjacent and aligned with
said guide shelf at said unload station and is pivotal away
from said feeder for repair and adjustment access to said
feeder.
4,434388
APPARATUS FOR SUPPLYING AN ARTICLE SORTING
MACHINE CONVEYOR, A METHOD FOR USING THIS
APPARATUS
Michel DiToux; Hubert Bonansea, and Bernard Constant, all of
Paris, France, assignors to Hotchkiss-Brandt Scnieme H.B.S.,
Paris, France
FUed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,289
Clainu priority, appUcation France, Jul. 22, 1980, 80 16125
Int a.3 B65G 37/00
U.S. a. 198-466 8 Claims
nlfPi
.<5
^±3K"-^ J. J ,_ J
If *^'\
1. Apparatus for supplying articles to a conveyor, said appa-
ratus comprising:
(a) a storage system comprising a plurality of endless belts in
March 6. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
147
series, all but the last in the series being arranged to feed
articles thereon to the next endless belt in the series;
(b) first means for independently driving each of said endless
belU;
(c) a tilting support in the form of a notched plate having a
plurality of teeth located at the downstream end of said
series of endless belts, said tilting support being variable
between a raised position in which it is in position to
receive an article from the last in the series of endless belts
and a lowered position in which it is in position to transfer
an article to the conveyor;
(d) second means for moving said tilting suppori from its
raised position to its lowered position;
(e) third means for detecting whether an article is carried by
each of said endless belts;
(0 fourth means for detecting whether said tilting support is
in its raised or lowered position; and
(g) a control device for actuating said first means associated
with each of said endless belts prior to the last in the series
when said third means associated with the next endless
belt in the series detects that the next endless belt in the
series is vacant, for actuating said first means associated
with the last in the series of said endless belts when said
third means associated with the preceding endless belt
detects that said preceding endless belt is carrying an
article and said fourth means detects that said tilting sup-
port is in its raised position, and for actuating said second
means after an article has been desposited on said tilting
support by the last in the series of said endless belts.
4,434390
PACKAGING CONTAINER FOR SENSFTIVE PRODUCTS
ReUihard Sieck, Cologne, and Gerhard Brttscwits, Barg.'Glad-
bnch, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aasignors to Dr. Madaus
A Co., Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,343
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 16,
1980, 8033376[U]
Int. a.3 B65D 81/30 85/62: GOIN 1/10
U.S. a. 206—443 15 Claims
1. A temperature-stabilizing packaging container for con-
densation-sensitive, water-contaimrfg products in closed tubes,
especially semi-solid test media such as immersion nutrient
substrate carriers for the determination of micro-organisms or
the like, comprising: a strip-like, heat-insulating material form-
ing the packaging container; and metallic covering means on at
least one of the surfaces of the packaging container for repel-
ling heat-producing radiation.
4,434,889
GREETING CARD CONSTRUCnON
Guy A. Fery, 117 E. 57th St., New York, N.Y. 10022
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,441
Int a.i B65D 69/00. 27/06. 27/08
US. a. 206—216
1. A greeting card construction comprising a first panel
joined to a second panel by a first fold line, a third panel joined
to said second panel by a second fold line, said first and second
panels being adapted for the display of printed indicia thereon,
and a collapsable receptacle having a base and upwardly pro-
jecting sides, said base being removably affixed to said third
panel, said sides being foldable upon said base such that said
third panel may be folded along said second fold line into a
position overlying said second panel with said receptacle in its
folded configuration lying therebetween.
4,434,891
DISC PACKAGE
James R. Skinner, Saratoga, and Robert G. Atwood, Redwood
aty, both of CaUf., assignors to M.U. Engineering A Mffe.,
Inc., Mountain View, CaUf.
Filed Mar. 18, 1983, Ser. No. 476,475
Int. a.3 GllB 1/02; B65D 85/57. 81/18. 53/02
U.S. a. 206 444 18 Claims
11 Claims
1. A disc package (10) for storing a plurality of discs
(12a-12z) having central openings (16a-16z), comprising:
a generally circular base (18) having a bottom surface (20)
adapted to be supported above a support surface and a top
surface (22) having a peripheral portion (24) having a
peripheral wall (26) extending generally upwardly a
spaced distance from the top surface (22) and a central
portion (30) having a core accepting structure (32);
a core (34) having a lower end portion (36) supported by said
core accepting structure (32) and an upper end portion
(38) extending generally upwardly away from said top
surface (22);
a cover (44) having a generally circular top (46) and a pe-
ripheral skirt (48) extending downwardly therefrom to a
lower rim portion (SO) adjacent said wall (26);
148
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
means (68) for fastening said circular top (46) to said upper
end portion (38); and
a resilient gasket (80) removably attached to a respective one
of said lower rim portion (50) and said wall (26) and slid-
ably sealingly bearing against a respective other of said
lower rim portion (50) and said wall (26).
4,434,892
HOLDING DEVICE FOR NESTED PIPES
Tatsuo Kanazawa, Kamagaya, and Tsuneo Suyama, Narita, both
of Japan, assignors to Kubota, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 392,212
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 30, 1981, 56-120387
Int. a.3 B65D 85/20
U.S. a. 206-446 11 Claims
\
:^
ct .
m
-(
■T^f*-^
1. A device for holding nested pipes including at least two
adjacent pipes differing greatly in diameter, each nested pipe
having a socket formed with an annular groove in its inner
periphery and an annular shoulder on its outer periphery, the
device comprising an abutting member adapted to contact the
socket end faces of all the pipes, and at least one radial-axial
retainer means removably mountable on the abutting member
and adapted to be positioned between said two adjacent pipes,
said radial-axial retainer means comprising a mount member
having a bolt hole and removably mountable on the abutting
member by a bolt insertable through the bolt hole thereof and
through a slot formed in the abutting member and by a nut
adapted to be screwed on the bolt, a first engaging member
attached to one end of the mount member close to the diametri-
cally larger of said two adjacent pipes and pre- -ded with an
engaging projection adapted to engage in the annular groove
of the diametrically larger of said two adjacent pipes, and a
second engaging member disposed close to the diametrically
smaller of said two adjacent pipes and provided with stepped
engaging means adapted to engage with the annular shoulder
of the diametrically smaller of said two pipes.
the inner container having at least one flexible wall,
the outer container having at least one flexible wall.
4,434,893
TAMPER EVIDENT PACKAGING
Gordon A. Barlow, Glenview, III., assignor to Gordon Barlow
Design, Skokie, lU.
FUed Jan. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 457^38
Int. aj B65D 8J/20. 77/04
VS. a. 206—522 8 ctaimg
1. A tamper evident packaging for contaminateable products
including:
inner and outer gas tight containers.
the inner and outer containers each being pressurized with
gas above atmospheric pressure to inflate their flexible
walls.
4,434,894
DUAL PURPOSE PALLET SHEET
Chong H. Lee, Lake Forest, 111., assignor to Suh Won America,
Inc., Waukegan, 111.
FUed Nov. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 439,311
Int. a.J B65D 19/20, 57/00; A45C 13/02
VS. a. 206-526 5 Claims
1. A specialty package for shipping bags made of flexible
material, which package comprises
an outer box having top, bottom and two side panels and
havng end closure means for closing both ends thereof,
a plurality of flexible material bags having flexible handles
for carrying same, said bags being each designed to have
a generally cylindrical shape with a circular cross section
and being each provided with quick opening means for
gaining entry to the interior thereof,
said bags each being folded into a flattened condition and
a plurality of pieces of sheet material each having a shape
that is substantially the same as the shape of said box top
panel,
said folded flexible material bags being arranged in layers in
stacked relationship between said top and bottom panels
with at least one of said sheet material pieces being inter-
posed between adjacent layers of folded bags,
whereby upon removal of said bags and sheet material pieces
from said outer box, each of said sheet material pieces^
rolled into the shape of a tube and inserted through sai2
quick-opening means into one of said bags so that the]
natural resiliency of said sheet material maintains said bag
in unfolded expanded condition suitable for display for
sale.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
149
4,434,895
STRAPPED WICKETED BAGS PACKET
Philip T. Voso, Tryon, N.C.; Billy B. Hallmark, Duncan, S.C;
Richard D. Thomas, Mauldin, S.C, and Benjamin G. Wof-
ford, Spartanburg, S.C, assignors to W. R. Grace A Co.,
Cryovac Division, Duncan, S.C.
Filed Aug. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 408,093
Int. a.J A45C 13/26. 13/30
VS. a. 206—554 17 Oaims
panel^an be torn or damaged while maintaining the structural
integrity of said second closure end panel, said first closure end
panel having near its first end a generally longitudinally dis-
posed line of weakness substantially extending the length
thereof and substantially parallel to said first end which to-
gether with said hingedly connected and removably engagable
first end defines a potential tear path therein; said first closure
end panel also containing behind said weakening line, at least
one cut or weakening score on a surface of said end closure
panel adjacent to said second end, and which together with
said second end defines a distortable bridge; and (b) tamper-
resistant closure means for said bottom portion.
1. A wicketed bags packet, comprising:
(a) a stack of flattened, flexible packaging bags having two
wicket holes therethrough;
(b) wicket shanks extending through said wicket holes,
respectively; and
(c) elongate, flexible binding members crossed in an under-
to-over pattern between said shanks and forming a hand-
grip for said packet, each said binding member being
affixed to a shank, respectively, at the rear of said stack
and extending to and being removably and reclosably
affixed to the other of said shanks at the front of said stack,
said binding members being adapted to be reclosed over
said stack thereby to reform said handgrip during inter-
ruption in dispensing said bags from said stack.
4,434,896
TAMPER-RESISTANT RECLOSABLE PACKAGE
Mickey R. Beloate, Memphis; Harley E. Erb, Germantown, and
Charles W. Shelton, Memphis, all of Tenn., assignors to
Plough, Inc., Memphis, Tenn.
FUed May 2, 1983, Ser. No. 490,618
Int. a.J B65D 5/54. 55/02
V.S. a. 206—621 8 Qaims
1. A package blank having top and bottom portions which is
suitably cut and scored, comprising: (a) a series of generally
rectangular package walls hinged at lateral edges by substan-
tially parallel score lines, said package walls including front
and rear panel walls, a pair of side panel walls, and a glue panel
hinged to a lateral edge of one of said side walls, a first closure
and panel at said top portion having first and second ends, said
second end hinged to said rear panel wall and said first end
removably engagable from said front panel wall; a second
closure end panel at said top portion also having first and
second ends, said first end hinged to said rear panel wall, a flap
hinged to the second end of said second closure and end panel,
said second closure end panel closing in an opposite direction
to said first closure end panel, whereby said first closure end
4,434,897
CLOTHES DRYING RACK
Ralph B. Gelhaus, 4293 Minster-Ft. Recovery Rd., St. Henry,
Ohio 45883
Filed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 322,735
Int. a.' A47B 53/00
VS. a. 211—1.3 6 Qaims
1. A clothes drying rack comprising two vertical side walls
and top and bottom walls forming a cabinet, a door pivoted to
one of said side walls and being spaced downwardly from said
top wall and upwardly from said bottom wall, an upper rack
set disposed in said cabinet in the upper part thereof and having
a fixture pivoted between said side walls adjacent the upper
edge of said door, said rack set having a plurality of clothes
hanging arms extending radially outwardly from said fixture
and pivoted at their inner ends to said fixture for moving
angularly outwardly and inwardly with respect to one another,
pivot means for pivoting said fixture and said arms from a
vertical position in said cabinet to a horizontal position project-
ing outwardly from said cabinet with said rack set being sup-
ported by said door when said door is closed^fter said arms are
lifted to horizontal position, a lower rack set disposed in said
cabinet in the lower pari thereof and having a fixture pivoted
between said side walls, said lower rack set having a plurality
of clothes hanging arms extending radially outwardly from
said fixture and pivoted at their inner ends to said fixture for
moving angularly outwardly and inwardly with respect to one
another, and a pivot means for pivoting said fixture and said
arms of said lower rack set from a vertical position in said
cabinet to a horizontal position projecting outwardly from said
cabinet with the lower side of said lower rack fixture being on
substantially the same plane as the upper surface of said bottom
wall when said lower rack set is in horizontal position, said
pivot means of said lower rack set being spaced inwardly
further from said door than said pivot means of said upper rack
set so that said lower rack set is disposed behind said upper
rack set when said rack sets are folded into said cabinet.
ISO
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
M34,896
CLOTHESLINE MAST
Patrick J. McCarthy, P.O. Box 5053, Hamilton, New Zealand
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,918
Claims priority, application New Zealand, Dec. 9, 1980,
195779
Int a.i A47F 5/00
U.S. a. 211— U 1 Claim
1. A clothes line system including a pair of spaced apart
clothes line supports on one of which a plurality of clothes
lines are storable and extendable therefrom in substantially
parallel relationship for anchoring to the other of said supports,
wherein at least one of the supports includes a clothes line mast
having a column telescopically mounted within a casing, said
casing being adapted to be sunken in situ, sealing means being
mounted on the column adjacent the lower end thereof, a
pressurized fluid connection means being located at the lower
end of the casing, a hollow box member being attached to the
upper end of said casing, said box member having an open top
and an aperture in its base through which said column can
protrude, a cover plate being attached to said column and
capable of covering said box member, said mast furiher includ-
ing means mounting a clothes line cross head to said column
whereby said mounting means and/or said clothes line cross
head can be contained within said box member when said
column is retracted into said casing, said column being sunken
into the ground so that when the mast is in its retracted posi-
tion, it will be hidden by said cover plate.
4,434,899
ADJUSTABLE WIRE TOTE FOR PRINTED aRCUTT
BOARDS
Eric M. Rl^kin, Minnetonka, Minn., aaiignor to Liberty Carton
Co., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed No?. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,223
Int a.J B05C U/02
\}&. CL 211—41 9 Claims
1. A wire frame tote for printed circuit boards, said tote
comprising:
a frame comprising:
first and second sides;
first and second ends; and
at least first and second board holding means, each
said board holding means being continuously adjustably
attached to said first and second sides, each said board
holding means having a plurality of spaced parallel
grooves for receiving the edge of a printed circuit
board, each said groove comprising first and second
opposing walls, said first and second walls being non-
parallel, each said groove furiher comprising a bottom
wall, said bottom wall connecting said first and second
walls, said first and second walls diverging away from
each other and away from said bottom wall, said board
holding means being adjustable so as to vary the dis-
tance between said grooves on said first board holding
means and said grooves on said second board holding
means and accommodate opposite sides of a board.
4,434,900
FREE STANDING ARTICLE DISPLAY APPARATUS
MeMn W. Cook, Dover, Ohio, assignor to Masonite Corpora-
tion, Chicago, 111.
FUed Jan. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 460,887
Int. a.J A47B 47/00
U.S. CL 211—189 20 Claims
1. A free standing article display apparatus, comprising:
a display panel having an edge and means for securing an
ariicle for display adjacent a face of said panel;
an edge channel mounted along said edge of said panel
including a web spaced outwardly apari from said panel
edge and a pair of flanges engagable with opposite faces of
said panel; '^
spacer means for providing an open space between said
panel edge and said channel web, said web including at
least one aperiure therein for receiving a fastener;
an upstanding post having a longitudinally extending recess
in one face thereof for receiving said edge channel on said
display panel; and
at least one fastener extending between said recess of said
post and said web of said channel for securing said post
along said edge of said panel, said fastener including head
means adapted to fit within said space and engage said
channel web in interlocking relation.
4,434,901
SAFETY APPARATUS FOR CRANES
Pan! O. Gchl, P.O. Box 303, Hilbert, Wis. 54129
Filed Jol. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,495
Int a? B66C 15/00
U.S. CL 212—153 19 ClaiM
1. In a crane having a body defining opposite sides, a front
end from which a crane boom is supported and extends for-
wardly, and a back end, the body being constructed for rota-
tional swinging movement about a predetermined axis to posi-
tion the crane boom in a desired location, the improvement
which comprises:
cable means of predetermined length;
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
151
support means for supporting the cable means so that it
extends around the opposite sides and back end of said
crane body for movement therewith and in spaced rela-
tion thereto, said support means being constructed and
arranged to resiliently support the cable means in a normal
position under tension in such a way that the cable means
may be deflected from its normal position to alter its
effective length as it engages or is engaged by an object
and is returned to its normal position after engagement
with the object ceases;
control means operatively connected to the cable means for
generating an alarm signal when the cable means is de-
flected and its effective length is altered;
and alarm means operably connected to the control means
for generating an alarm in response to the alarm signal.
4,434,902
APPARATUS FOR EXTENDING AND RETRACTING A
MANUAL BOOM SECTION
Frederick R. Goode, Lexington; John D. E?ans, Nicholasrille,
and James W. Cox, Jr., Lexington, all of Ky., assignors to
FMC Corporation, Chicago, III.
FUed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,727
Int Q\? B66C 2i/04
U.S. a. 212—268 9 Claims
1. In a multi-section extensible telescopic boom having at
least three boom sections mounted for telescopic movement
within each other, a multi-piece extensible and retractable
power means having one piece connected to one of said tele-
scopic sections; the improvement comprising first selectively
operable coupling means solely supporied by and disposed
within a second boom section for selectively connecting and
disconnecting another piece of said power means to the second
boom section, second selectively operable coupling means
operatively connecting said another piece of said power means
to said third boom section for extending and retracting said
third boom section relative to said second boom section in
response to extension and retraction of said power means when
said first coupling means is released, means for releasably
locking said third boom section to said second section in ex-
tended position, and removable crank means engageable with
said first coupling means for moving said first coupling means
between said position connecting said another piece of said
power means to said second boom section and said released
position by operating said crank means in opposite directions.
4,434,903
SAFETY CLOSURE AND CONTAINER
Carl W. Cooke, 8146 Lt Willian Clark Rd., Parker, Colo. 80134
Filed Not. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 443,486
Int a.> B65D 55/02
U.S. a. 215—222 6 Claim
1. In the combination of a container having an open neck
portion, a closure for said container comprising a top wall for
sealing the mouth of said open neck portion and a cylindrical
skirt portion adapted to receive the open neck portion of said
container, resilient means carried on the inner wall of the top
portion of said closure to urge said closure axially upwardly
when said closure is drawn down into sealing position on the
neck portion of said container and cooperating locking ele-
ments carried on the neck portion of said container and the
inner wall of the skirt portion said portion, the improvement
comprising:
the locking elements of said closure comprismg lugs spaced
about the periphery of the inner wall of the skirt portion;
bayonet lugs disposed about the open neck portion of said
container, said bayonet lugs comprising an elongated
portion adjacent the rim of the mouth of said container
and extending axially dn the neck portion and a leading
end member extending normally to the elongated portion,
the leading end member having an enlarged area spaced
from the elongated portion of the bayonet lug to define an
indented portion on the bayonet lug for receiving a lug of
said closure when said closure is in the sealing position
over the mouth of the open neck portion of said container.
4,434,904
BOTTLE CLOSURE
Richard D'Amico, Guraee; Thomas A. Fowlcs, McHenry, both
of lU., and David A. WiacheU, Twin Lakes, Wis., assignors to
Baxter TraTcnol Laboratories, Inc., Decrfleld, 111.
Continuation of Ser. No. 157,438, Jun. 9, 1900, abandoned. This
appUcation Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 383,486
Int a? B65D 41 /n
U.S. a. 215—232 5 ClaiOM
1. A three-piece quick-opening and reclosable container and
closure system comprising:
a one-piece plastic container including an externally
threaded neck portion defining a dispensing outlet and an
annular outwardly extending sealing surface above said
threaded portion:
a separately formed plastic closure member covering said
dispensing outlet and peripherally heat sealed to said neck
portion along said sealing surface to define a frangible
section therebetween, said closure member having a pe-
ripheral recess defined by a reduced diameter portion; and
a separately formed internally threaded jacking ring thread-
edly engaged on said neck, said jacking ring having a
plurality of radially inwardly directed flexible fingers
adapted to snap into said receu upon screw attachment of
-\
152
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
said jacking ring to said container neck portion, and to 4,434,906
break said frangible section by prying said closure member CONTAINER HAVING RESEALABLE OPENING MEANS
ofT when said jacking ring is removed by unscrewing from Rolf Florczyk, Pflngstmaniutrasse 18, IM350 Recklinghausen,
said container neck portion, the extension of said Angers x>d Reintaoid Krischik, Granger Strane 200, D4660 Gelsen-
kirchen-Buer, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Oct. 27, 1982, Scr. No. 436,961
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 29,
1981, 3142837
U.S. a. 220—268
Int. a.J B65D 17/ 32
22 Claims
mto said recess retammg said closure member m associa- i. a wall structure for a container, comprising a container
tion with said jacking ring whereby upon reattachment of wall, an opening region in said wall surrounded by a break
said jacking rini to said container, said closure member edge defined by a score line and connecting the opening region
closes said dispensing outlet.
4,434,905
RUPTURABLE LOW PRESSURE RELIEF APPARATUS
Sam A. Ou, Bixby, and Charles E. Beair, Tulsa, both of Okla.,
assignors to BSAB Safety Systems, Inc., Tulsa, Okla.
Filed Mar. 31, 1982, Scr. No. 363,820
Int. a.J B65B 25/00
U.S. a. 220—89 A 19 Oaims
/ %
f
^
10 —
tpi -'* ^ se
t^^^^...^-
6 r
*,X-
\
j'^
-10
^
to a remaining portion of the wall, said opening region can be
ruptured along said score line and separated from said remain-
ing portion by external pressure applied toward an interior of
the container to form in said wall an opening deflned by said
break edge; and an operating member connected to said open-
ing region and located above said opening region so as to
overlap said break edge, said opening region after being rup-
tured remaining in the interior of the container and being
slidably displaced by said operating member relative to said
opening, said operating member being a plug member formed
with a peripheral closing edge region adapted to fluid-tightly
close said opening when displaced to be positioned against said
opening, said edge region having a configuration similar to the
configuration of said break edge and that of said opening, said
closing edge region including a form-and force-locking closing
edge having a configuration similar to that of said breaking
edge and extending parallel to said score line, and a pressure
edge directed towards said opening region.
4,434,907
CONTAINER HAVING AN ORIGINALLY SEALED
CONDITION WHICH CAN BE OPENED AND
THEREAFTER CLOSED
Ole Ingemann, RysUnge, Denmark, assignor to A/S Haustrup
1. A rupturable pressure relief apparatus which ruptures at a Plastic, Langeskov, Denmark
low pressure differential adapted to be sealingly clamped be- PUed Dec. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 446,879
tween inlet and outlet annular support members comprising: Claims priority, application Sweden, Dec. 7, 1981, 8107310
a first circular rupturable member formed of solid flexible '■*• ^-^ B65D 17/40
material adapted to be positioned adjacent said inlet annu- ^•^* ^' 220—276 64 Claims
lar support member;
a second circular rupturable member formed of flexible
material positioned adjacent said first rupturable member
on the opposite side thereof from said inlet support mem-
ber, said second rupturable member being of a size corre-
sponding with said first rupturable member and including
a solid annular flange portion and a plurality of arcuate
slots circumscribing a substantially circular central por-
tion with rupture tabs between said arcuate slots; >j
knife means having a cutting edge forming at least a portion \
of a circle positioned adjacent said second rupturable V
member on the side thereof opposite from said first ruptur-
able member; and
an annular metal protection ring attached to the side of said y ^he combination of a container member and lid member
second rupturable member facing said knife means, said i„ ^hich the lid member is initially sealingly engaged with the
protection nng being of a size such that when said second container member and is removable from the container mem-
nipturable member flexes into contact with said cutting ber to open the latter and is replaceable to close the container
edge ofsaid knife means, said protection ring prevents said member, said container member including a body having a
second rupturable member from being cut by said cutting mouth, said mouth including a strip of annular extent secured
edge but when said second rupturable member ruptures, to said lid member, a first ofsaid members being provided with
said protection ring passes through said knife means. an annular weakening notch in the vicinity of said strip where
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
153
the mouth of the container member is secqred to the fid mem-
ber, said combination being separable at ^ia notch to separate
a part of said mouth and the lid member together with said
strip from said body, to provide two separated parts which can
be reengaged by replacement of said lid member with the
separated strip secured thereto onto said container member,
said notch being positioned radially inwards of said strip and
upon rupture of the notch forming a locating surface for re-
placement of the lid member on said container member, one of
said members including a U-shaped portion extending at least
partially around the periphery ofsaid one member for insertion
of a portion of the other of said members thereinto in the
reengaged position of replacement of the lid member on said
container member, the insertion of said poriion of the other of
said members into the U-shaped portion causing engagement
of said members at respective surfaces one of which is said
locating surface and the other of which includes means for
providing snap engagement with said locating surface.
4434908
CONTAINER HAVING INTEGRAL OPENING MEANS
William L. French, Hillsboro, Ohio, anignor to Buckeye Mold-
ing Company, New Vienna, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 273,333, Jun. 15, 1981, abandoned.
This application Apr. 29, 1983, Scr. No. 487,599
Int. a.3 B65D 17/40, 17/34
U.S. a. 220—276
15aaims
1. A one piece plastic container comprising a tubular con-
tainer body, an easy-open end closure closing one end of said
body, and a first weakened line of plastic extending completely
around said end closure and connecting said end closure to said
body, said end closure being removable by completely tearing
said first weakened line, said end closure comprising a center
panel, a sloping side wall surrounding said center panel and
spanning the distance axially and diametrically of said body
between said center panel and said first weakened line, a sec-
ond arcuate weakened line of plastic located entirely within
the boundry of said end closure and spaced from said first
weakened line, said second weakened line having ends termi-
nating in said end closure, a straight third weakened line ex-
tending perpendicularly from said first weakened line partway
along said sloping side wall in the axial direction of said body,
said third line having one end joining said first weakened line,
a fourth weakened line extending between the other end ofsaid
third weakened line and one end of said second weakened line,
said fourth weakened line joining to said other end ofsaid third
weakened line at an obtuse included angle, a pull tab connected
to said side wall in spaced relation to said center panel said pull
tab comprising a plate-like body having a bottom surface con-
fronting a substantially parallel to said center panel and a top
surface spaced from said bottom surface, said pull tab having a
side edge surface extending along a diameter of said container
aligned with said third line and having a height substantially
equal to the length of said third line, an adjacent outer edge
surface of said pull tab being integrally connected to said
sloping wall so that one comer joining said edge surfaces is
substantially diametrically aligned with the point of intersec-
tion of said third line and said fourth line.
4,434.909
PRESSURE COOKER INTERLOCK
Richrd B. Ott, Eau Claire, Wis., assignor to National Presto
Industries, Inc., Eau Claire, Wis.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 233,842, Feb. 12, 1981,
abandoned. This application Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,934
Int. a? B65P 45/00 t
U.S. a. 220—316 17 Claims
1. In a pressure cooker including a receptacle and a cover,
safety interlock apparatus comprising:
(a) said receptacle and said cover having annular sealing
surfaces disposed in juxtaposition;
(b) interlocking lugs on said cover and receptacle, said cover
being rotatable with respect to said receptacle in a first
direction between a first position in which said lugs are
disengaged and a second, fully locked position;
(c) a resilient gasket disposed between said sealing surfaces,
said gasket having upper and lower faces and comprising
upper and lower inwardly extending, diverging leg por-
tions with inner peripheral sealing lip portions, and said
gasket further having space, radially extending ribs
formed on at least one of said upper and lower faces;
(d) said interlocking lugs being so constructed and arranged
that in the second position of said cover, a first distance
between said sealing surfaces is established such that pres-
sure within said pressure cooker can force the leg portions
apart with said sealing lip poriions pressed into sealing
engagement with said sealing surfaces to thereby permit
pressure to build up within said cooker; and
(e) means associated with at least selected ones of said lugs
for reducing the distance between said sealing surfaces
with the cover located between said first and second
positions to a second disunce at which at least one of said
sealing surfaces engage said ribs ofsaid gasket to compress
said leg portions together and prevent a seal from forming
between said lip portions and said sealing surfaces, and for
preventing rotation ofsaid cover toward said first position
from said second position so long as the distance between
said sealing surfaces is greater than said second distance.
4,434,910
SEALING DEVICE AND PROCESS FOR A METAL PACK
Jacques Groult, Vemeuil, France, assignor to Safet-Embamet
Lethias, ViUeneuve-la-Garennc, France
Filed Dec. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 451,933
Qaims priority, application France, Dec. 14, 1981, 81 23266
Int. a.i B6SD 53/00
U.S. a. 220—358 9 Oaims
iz: '-*
1. A sealing device for a cylindrical metal pack having a
1040 O.G.
154
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
total opening and comprising a recipient, a pressed-out cover,
the recipient having an inner peripheral surface devoid of an
inner radial flange and defining the opening of the recipient,
and the cover having an outer cylindrical surface which di-
rectly cooperates with the inner peripheral surface of the
recipient when the cover is inserted in the recipient, said de-
vice comprising at least one annular groove formed in one of
two elements consisting of the cover and the recipient, at least
one sealing element of a partly O-section shape and composed
of a copolymer resin formed and adhered in situ in said groove,
said groove being located in a region of the recipient and cover
in which region occurs a rubbing between cooperating por-
tions of said outer surface of the cover and said inner surface of
the recipient when the cover is placed in position in and re-
moved from the opening of the recipient.
stack of veneer sheets and having a set of opposite sides
substantially paralleling the pinch roll mechanism, multi-
ple elongate hoist bars extending in the direction of said
sides of the platform means and spaced laterally over the
expanse of said platform means, means mounting said hoist
bars on said platform means, said mounting means for said
bars including means for shifting under power each bar
between a lowered position which is no higher than said
support plane and a raised position disposed above said
4,434^11
LABEL FEED CONTROL SYSTEM
Yainhlro Sakura, Shizuoka, Japan, anignor to Tokyo Electric
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,307
Claims priority, appUcation Japui, Aug. 14, 1980, 55-111980;
Aug. 14, 1980, 55-111981; Aug. 15, 1980, 55-112441
Int a.3 B65H 5/28. 7/02
VS. a. 221—2
9Claiins
zzz u
9. A label feed control system comprising:
a driver means for driving a feed means which transports a
paper base ribbon with labels stuck thereon;
a separator means for peeling said label ofTsaid base ribbon;
a label detector disposed in the vicinity of said separator
means for detecting the front edge of said peeled-ofF label;
an incremental feed means for controlling the operation of
said driver means such that said base ribbon is fed for a
certain amount after said label detector has detected the
front edge of said peeled-off label;
an excessive feed detection means provided with a setting of
an excess detection feed amount which is larger than a
length which said base ribbon travels after the ribbon fee^
has started until the front edge of said label is detected in
normal operation, and adapted to count said excess detec-
tion feed amount on starting the ribbon transportation;
and
a gate means for activating said incremental feed means on
completion of the count operation if a front edge detection
signal has not been issued by said label detector during the
count operation of said excessive feed detection means.
4,434,912
ACCUMULATOR FOR VENEER FEEDER
Charles L. Lanon, deceaicd, late of Jackson Coaoty, Oreg., and
by Rocket L. Larson, ezecotor, 606 Benning Dr., Tampa, Fla.
32541
Filed Aag. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,716
Irt. a.J B65H 1/04. 1/14
US. CL 221-227 10 Claims
5. Apparatus for feeding veneer sheets to a dryer compris-
ing:
an elevated power-driven substantially horizontal pinch roll
mechanism for feeding veneer sheets into the dryer,
an elevatable platform means on the feed side of such pinch
roll mechanism having a support plane for supporting a
support plane, the hoist bars collectively in said raised
position defining a plane located above said support plane,
a pair of holding bars disposed laterally outwardly of said
opposite sides of said platform means, and means mount-
ing said holding bars independently of said platform
means, the mounting for said holding bars including means
for shifting them from an inoperative position disposed
remotely from the sides of the platform means to an opera-
tive position disposed closely adjacent the sides of said
platform with the platform means in an elevated position.
4,434,913
CYCLICAL MECHANICAL DISPENSING MECHANISM
Laden J. Wroblewski, 8438 N. Kedvale Ave., Skokie, lU. 60076
FUed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,486
Int a.3 B65G 59/00
MS. a. 221-267 18 Claims
1. Apparatus for cyclically dispensing elements individually
from a serial feed path comprising:
a finger means having a leading edge for engaging a lead ele-
ment in said feed path,
a resiliently biased latch means having a gate edge for extend-
ing into said feed path to halt passage of said lead element
from said feed path,
a drive means for cyclically stroking said finger means though
a motion path, and
a cam means associated with said finger means, said cam means
comprising a cam follower slidable over a fixed cam surface
in one stroke direction of said finger means for passing said
finger means whereby said leading edge passes from an
initial position to engage said lead element and draw it past
said gate edge agi^t the bias of said latch means, and then
said cam follower is rotatable relative to said cam surface
and said finger means in another stroke direction of said
finger means such that said leading edge releases said lead
element and returns to said initial position during each stroke
cycle.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
155
4,434,914
PERSONAL DEFENSE ACTUATOR
Philip Meshbcrg, 2500 S. Oceui Blvd., Palm B«Mh, Fla. 33480
FUed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,202
Int a.i B67D 5/32: B65D 83/00
MS. a. 222—153 4 Claims
1. A directional applicator for a self-defense product com-
prising:
a. a container having a bottom, side walls and a top;
b. a valve mounted to the top of said container, an actuating
stem, having an axial dispensing bore, for said valve, project-
ing outwardly from said container;
c. an actuator comprising a first part having therein a spray
nozzle disposed on the stem of said valve with said nozzle in
communication with said bore and a second actuator part
fixedly mounted to said container; and
d. a key-ring mounted to said second part, which is fixed to said
container, for axial sliding movement along the applicator
between a position where it is adjacent to said actuator and
a position where it is spaced from said actuator sufficiently
to permit a thumb or finger to be inserted between said
key-ring and actuator to operate said actuator thereby pro-
viding a safety feature to prevent accidental actuation.
4,434,915
CHILD-RESISTANT HNGER PUMP DISPENSER
Donald C. Kirk, Jr., Midlothian, Va., assignor to Ethyl Products
Company, Richmond, Va.
FUed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,340
Int. a.} B65D 83/41
MS. a. 222—153 ^ ^ 2 Claims
1. An assembly for dispensing fluids comprising:
(a) a generally elliptical container having a neck portion
with at least two opposed thread members having under-
cut portions adjacent their terminal ends;
(b) a reciprocating pump including a pump housing having
an annular flange at its upper end received in said con-
tainer; p>r
(c) a stem extending out of the upper end of said pump
housing;
(d) a dispensing actuator member received on the upper end
of said stem and having a spray nozzle projecting from the
side thereof;
(e) a closure-guide member having a transverse wall portion
which abuts said flange and a central opening receiving
said stem, and a lower skirt portion provided with at least
two thread members having harpoon-shaped portions at
their leading ends on its inner wall which are received in
said undercut portions of said conuiner thread members,
and an integrally formed upper guide collar portion which
extends over the lower portion of said dispensing actuator
member when said actuator member is i«i the uppermost
position;
(0 said dispensing actuator member and said upper guide
collar portion having opposed slidable, guiding surfaces
that prevents roution of said dispensing actuator member
in said upper guide collar portion throughout the full
reciprocating limits of said actuator member;
(g) said container thread members being so positioned on
said neck and said closure guide member thread members
being so positioned on said lower skirt portion that when
they are interlocked said spray nozzle cannot be rotated
and is oriented parallel with respect to the mi^or axis of
said elliptical container.
4,434,916
MANUALLY OPERATED UQUID DISPENSING PUMP
Tomaso Ruscitti; Giovanni Albiai; Roberto Torretta, and Andrea
Incerti Baldi, aU of MUan, Italy, assignors to S.A.R. S.p.A.,
Teatino, Italy
FUed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,189
Claims priority, application Italy, Jan. 7, 1981, 19026 A/81
Int. a.3 GOIF 11/36
MS. a. 222—321 1 Claim
1. A manually operated pump for the delivery of viscous
liquid stored within a container upon which said pump is
mounted, said pump comprising:
a ring nut mounted on a mouth of said container, said ring
nut including a first annular shoulder and an annular seal
extending into said container;
a pump body comprising a hollow cylinder having an axis
and a ring at one end, said ring resting upon said first
shoulder of said ring nut for supporting said pump body in
the axial direction, said ring having a preuure equalization
opening, said hollow cylinder having a second end ex-
tending into said container and including an annular inter-
nal valve seat and a product drawing tube coaxial with
said cylinder and communicating with said cylinder via
said valve seat;
156
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a ball valve in said second end and engageable with said
valve seat;
a closure ring mounted on said ring nut and having a center
circular opening coaxial with said pump body;
a hollow delivery stem extending through said central open-
ing of said closure ring, said hollow stem having a lower
end positioned inside said pump body, said lower end of
said stem including a first annular projection having a first
annular downwardly extending lip, said lower end of said
stem and said first lip together defining walls of a first
annular concave seat;
a shaped body in said pump body, said shaped body having
a cylindrical mid-portion and an upper end extending into
said hollow stem, said upper end of said shaped body
mcluding a delivery passage whereby said liquid may be
introduced into said hollow stem at said lower end
thereof, said shaped body having a lower end including an
annular guide portion having an outer diameter substan-
tially equal to an inner diameter of said hollow cylinder of
said pump body, whereby said hollow stem and shaped
body are guided in the axial direction, said mid-portion of
said shaped body including a second annular projection
havmg a second annular upwardly extending lip, said
cylindrical mid-portion and said second lip together defin-
ing walls of a second annular concave seat spaced from
said first seat by a first distance;
conical spring means extendmg between said ball valve and
said lower end of said shaped body for biasing said ball
valve into engagement with said valve seat and for biasing
said shaped body and said hollow stem in a direction away
from said valve seat; and
, a soft elastic seal positioned in said pump body between said
first and second annular concave seats, said seal compris-
ing:
(a) an inner cylindrical portion closely surrounding said
mid-portion of said shaped body in a slidable manner,
the axial height of said inner portion being less than said
first distance, whereby said seal is axially movable be-
tween a first position in which an upper end of said
mner portion is inserted into said first concave seat so as
to open said delivery passage of said shaped body, and
a second position in which a lower end of said inner
portion is inserted into said second concave seat so as to
seal said delivery passage of said shaped body,
(b) an outer cylindrical portion adjacent the inner cylin-
dncal walls of said hollow cylinder of said pump body,
said outer portion having axial ends bent into engage-
ment with said inner cylindrical walls of said hollow
cyhnder of said pump body so as to form annular seals
therewith, and
(c) an annular connecting portion connecting said inner
and outer cylindrical portions.
such that said pump body is oriented in a predetermined
position with respect to said container body and for pre-
venting relative rotation between said pump body and said
container body, said projection being positioned to abut
against an operator's hand when gripped about said con-
tainer body to operate said trigger.
4,434 918
BOARDING APPARATUS AND METHOD
Michael J. Hodges, High Wycombe, England, assignor to Detex-
omat Machinery Limited, England
FUed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,638
Int. a.J D06C 5/00
U.S. a. 223-75 23 Claim.
4,434,917
TRIGGER-ACTUATED ATOMIZER
Tadao Saito; Taluunitsu Nozawa; Shuzo Endo; Yoshiyuki
Kaicuta; Riichi Ogawa, and Tetsuro Kaneuchi, aU of Tokyo,
Japan, assignors to Yoshino Kogyosho Co., Ltd., Tokyo.
Japan
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,049
Int. a.J B67D 5/40
U.S. a. 222-383 g Oaim.
1. A trigger-actuated liquid dispenser comprising:
a liquid receiving container having a body and a neck ex-
tending from said body;
means received about said neck and coupled to said body in
a predetermined position for forming an engagement
member which includes a projection extending outwardly
from said body; and
atomizer pump including a pump body, a means for coupling
said pump body to said neck, means including a trigger for
dehvenng fluid through said pump body from said con-
tainer and producing an atomized fluid, and means formed
m said pump body for receiving said engagement member
1. Hosiery boarding apparatus comprising a pair of flat,
elongated boarding forms onto which hosiery legs are to be
stretched, said forms extending lengthwise parallel to one
another, hinge means located remote from free, hose-receiving
ends of said forms interconnecting said forms, means for effect-
ing a hinging movement about an axis parallel to said forms
whereby said forms can be selectively brought into and out of
a contiguous, superposed hose-discharge relationship, and said
forms at their free ends including outwardly ejectable tongues,
said ejectable tongues being telescopically mounted at the said
free ends and operable when said forms are superposed for
advancing toe ends of hosiery mounted on said forms for-
wardly, said apparatus further including hosiery dispensing
means operable when said toe ends are introduced into a nip
thereof to draw said hosiery from the forms with the hosiery
legs lying one on the other.
4,434J)19
MULTIPLE-POSITION SPARE TIRE MOUNT
Allan L. Flowers, Del Mm-, Calif., assignor to Nissan Design
International, Inc., La Jolla, Calif.
FUed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 422,708
Int. a.} B62D 43/02
U.S. a 224-42J1 6 Claims
1. In an automotive vehicle having a rear door, a multiple-
poAjon mount for a spare tire, comprising:
al^ support member secured alongside one edge of the rear
door frame to swing on a generally vertical axis from an
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
157
inside-stored position generally parallel with a tire well,
the tire well being of the type for holding a tire in its
upright position parallel and adjacent to a sidewall of a
vehicle and inside said vehicle, a tire-removing position
exterior of the vehicle and to one side of the door opening,
and an outside-stored position outwardly of the closed
rear door and generally parallel thereto;
4,434,921 ^
HANDBAG AND BELT CARRIER
Rose G. SanthofT, 8144 Jefferson, Kansas Qty, Mo. 64114
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,709
Int. a.J A45C 11/10
U.S. a. 224-253 6 Qaims
anchoring means for retaining said tire in its inside-stored
position; and
lock means interposed between said tire support and said
vehicle for retaining said tire in its outside-stored position
whereby said tire may be selectively retained in either its
inside-stored or outside-stored position.
4,434,920
SOFT ORTHOPEDIC POUCH-TYPE INFANT CARRIER
Ann A. Moore, Evergr^n, Colo., assignor to Snugli, Inc., Ever-
green, Colo.
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,877
Int. C1.3 A47D U/02
U.S. a. 224—160 9 Qaims
1. In an infant carrier of the type having front and rear soft
fabric panels connected along the bottom and at spaced points
on both sides to define an open-topped pouch with a seat in the
bottom, leg openings at the sides of the seat and armholes
above the leg openings; and, supporting means connected to
one of the panels for carrying said pouch on the chest or back,
the improvement which comprises: adjustment means ar-
ranged transversely of the seat operative upon actuation to
narrow the distance separating the leg openings, and belt-form-
ing means connectable alongside each leg opening operative
upon actuation to maintain the maximum spread relation there-
between permitted by said seat width adjustment means.
1. A receptacle comprising a combined handbag and belt
pouch having concealed support means attached to an inner
surface and located within said receptacle, said support means
being adapted to the insertion of a carrying strap and being
located at a position, measured from the uppermost portion of
said receptacle, which is between one-half and one-quarter of
the vertical distance between the uppermost portion of said
receptacle and the lowest portion of said receptacle.
4,434 922
FLEXIBLY-SUPPORTED,' PIVOTABLE LOAD CARRIER
FOR VEHICLES
Donald H. Brandsen, 11401 Culver Blvd., Los Angeles, Calif.
90066, and Griffith L. Hoemer, 2211 Montana Ave., Santa
Monica, Calif. 90403
Filed May 18, 1983, Ser. No. 495,748
Int. a.3 B60R 9/06
U.S. a. 224—314 24 Claims
12. A load carrier for use with a vehicle having a cavity
defined by vehicle interior surfaces, said load carrier compris-
ing:
a frame for supporting a load thereon when in a load-sup-
porting position, said frame comprising
a pair of legs having first and second ends,
a cross-member, and
means for pivotally connecting said second end of each
said leg to a different end of said cross-member to per-
mit said legs to pivot into a folded position in juxtaposi-
tion with said cross-member for storage and to permit
said legs to pivot into position to support said cross-
member in said load-carrying position;
a pair of cams, each said cam being attached to a diflerent
frame leg adjacent to said first end thereof;
a pair of straps;
adjustable connector means associated with each of said
straps for varying the eflective length of said straps, for
connecting one end of each said strap to a different one of
said legs adjacent its first end or of said cams and for
connecting the other end of each said strap to at least one
158
OITICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
of said cavity-defining, interior surfaces, said straps being
in contact and aligned with said cams to permit rotation of
said cams along said straps, each member of each associ-
ated leg, cam and strap lying in a plane substantially per-
pendicular to that of said frame.
4,434^23
APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING CASTINGS INTO
NECESSARY AND UNNECESSARY PIECES
Kazao Nasata, and Sasamii bhjj, both of ToyMna, JaiMiL assisn.
or» to Yodiida Kogyo K. K^ Tokyo, JapaiT^ *^
Filed Job. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 383,985
Claims priority, appUcatioa Japu, Jun. 20, 1981, 56-95756
lat a.J B26F 3/00
UA a 225-97 4 0^
said first feed roll to oscUhite said first feed roll through
said preselected angle of roution.
pivot means for supporting said second feed roll in said
frame for movement toward and away from said first feed
roll,
couplin»4neans for drivingly connecting said rotation trans-
mission means to said second feed roll to oscillate said
112-
:'^A^ 53^. (..•—.
101 '02 >,o^l06
•103
1. An apparatus for separating castings into necessary and
unnecessary portions, which comprises:
a conveyance frame providing a conveyance mechanism
includmg a plurality of bar members juxtaposed in parallel
and extending m the direction in which the castings are
conveyed; *
at l^t one downwardly open cover member disposed
above said conveyance mechanism and spaced away
therefrom by a distance great enough to permit the pas-
sage of the castmgs conveyed along said conveyance
mechamsm;
a plurality of freely movable masses confined between said
conveyance mechanism and said cover mechanism; and
vibration means for vibrating said conveyance frame-
said castings being separated into necessary and unnecessary
portions by impacting against said freely movable masses.
4,434,924
DUAL DRIVEN FEED ROLLS FOR A PUNCH PRESS
Mario Vari«co,AJllaon Park, Pa., assignor to Vamco Machine A
Tool, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa. — ^--c »
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,079
. , o ^ '"*• ^-^ ^^H ^ 7/22, / 7/26
UA CL 226-lM ,0 Claim.
1. Apparatus for mtermittentiy feeding a workpiece com-
pnsmg,
an input shaft supported for rotation at a continuous prese-
lected speed,
an output shaft having a first end portion and a second end
portion,
cam drive means drivingly connecting said output shaft first
end portion to said input shaft for generating oscillating
rotational movement of said output shaft through a prese-
lected angle of rotation,
feed means for intermittenUy feeding a preselected length of
the workpiece in a selected direction,
said feed means including a first feed roll and a second feed
roll,
a frame for supporting said first and second feed rolls in
overlying relation to engage the workpiece therebetween
rotation transmission means drivingly connected at one end
to said output shaft second end portion and at an opposite
end to said first feed roll,
said roution transmission means being operable to transmit
the oscillating routional movement of said output shaft to
second feed roll through an angle of rotation correspond-
ing to the angle of rotation of said first feed roll and
thereby drive both said first and second feed rolls, and
said couphng means drivingly connected to said second feed
roll to facilitate movement of sftid second feed roll toward
and away from said first feed roll as rotation is transmitted
to said second feed roll.
, 4,434,925
STRIP SOLDER FEEDING AND RE-WINDING DEVICE
°2^S,^' ''"~'*' ^*2 ^** LaCircuta, Redono Beach, Calif.
90277 ' *'~"*
FUed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,602
Int. a.3 B23K 3/02: B65H 17/26, 75/00
UA a 226-127 g Claims
1. Apparatus for feeding strip solder to the heated tip of a
soldering iron comprising:
a spool carrying a coUed supply of strip solder defining an
opemng along its longitudinal axis and having a front wall
defining an aperture; a motor having a shaft extending
through the spool opening and supporting said spool for
free-wheeling rotation about said shaft;
stop means secured to said shaft adjacent to the front wall
and definmg an aperture alignable with the spool wall
aperture whereby a length of strip solder inserted through
said aligned apertures mechanically connects the motor
and the spool to wind a fresh coUed solder supply on to
the spool.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
159
4,434,926
TRANSPORTATION DEVICE, IN PARTICULAR FOR
SHAPED, FLEXIBLE MATERIAL
Bmno Paoli, Fomacette-Pisa, Italy, assignor to Internationa]
Paper Compuy, New York, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,394
Int a.iB65H; 7/i¥
U.S. a. 226—172 3 Claims
clamping that functions to secure the shock absorber
means to the housing and is adapted to hold the /shock
1. A device for transporting along its length a continuous
web, including rotary means for clamping, the rotary means
having two separate, opposing clamp groups being substan-
tially equal and symmetrical, the clamp groups grasping the
opposite longitudinal edges of the web to be transported and
wherein said rotary means for clamping comprises, for each
one of said two groups of clamps, an endless chain, supported
on a carrying reel and on a drive reel, the two carrying reels
being powered by a motor system, and wherein each one of
said clamps in said groups comprises two opposing and sym-
metrical levers, pivoting at one of their ends on strip elements
carried by said endless chain, the other free end of each one of
said levers carrying a roller, each one of said levers having a
head between its ends the two heads of the two levers of each
clamp forming a clamp for grasping the web material to be
transported, cam guide, elements which engage said roller
which cause the rotation of the respective lever around said
lever pivoting end, to thereby actuate said clamps.
4,434,927
PENETRATOR INTERFACE ADAPTER CONCEPT
John R. Butler, Gerald D. Shock, both of White Plains, and
Norman J. Saunders, Nai^emoy, all of Md., assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the NaTy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,856
Int. a.3 B21J 15/18
U.S. a. 227—9 5 Claims
1. An assembly for use with a conventional percussion gun
for guiding a driven hollow sampling penetrating needle to
drive the needle a predetermined distance through the wall of
a container to allow a sample to be extracted from the con-
tainer comprising:
(1) a housing including a chamber adapted to be connected
and firmly attached to the gun;
(2) guide carrier means to center the needle in the housing
and
(3) shock absorber means adapted to be positioned at the
forward end of the said housing, having an opening there-
through, and where the opening is aligned with the said
needle and said opening is smaller than the diameter of the
needle so that the outer wall of the needle engages the
opening in the shock absorber so that the shock absorber
determines the depth of penetration of the needle into the
container,
where the housing is fitted with multiple pivoted means for
absorber means in position against the target piece during
the shooting operation.
4,434,928
TAPE FEEDING DEVICE FOR STAPLING MACHINES
Fumio Scki, Toyama, Japan, assignor to Yoshida Kogyo K K,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,613
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 9, 1980, 55-
176346[U]
Int. a.J B27F 7/19
U.S. a. 227—16 3 Claims
1. In a stapling machine for applying a fastener part with
projecting prongs with a fastener backing plate to a fabric,
having means for applying a fastener part with a backing plate
to the fabric a work station, and means for feeding a reinforc-
ing tape into the work station in overlying relation to the
backing plate, the improvement wherein the tape feed means
comprises a roller means having means on its circumference
for continuously engaging the tape, and means for rotating said
roller means in one direction, said roller means, upon rotation,
feeding a predetermined length of the reinforcing tape into the
work station and wherein said rotating means comprises an air
cylinder, a rack operatively connected to said air cylinder for
reciprocating movement when said air cylinder is operated to
rotate a bell crank connected to said rack, a pinion rotatable in
its own axis and drivingly meshing with said rack, a drive gear
coaxial with said pinion, a one-way clutch means in said pinion
for transmitting motion of said pinion to said drive gear, a
driven gear rotatable in its own axis and drivingly meshing
with said drive gear, said roller means comprises a pair of feed
160
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
rollers coaxially connected to and disposed one on each side of
said driven gear, and said means on said roller means comprises
a pair of axially spaced rows of pointed projections extending
radially outwardly from the respective circumferences of said
feed rollers and spaced circumferentially apart from each
other. ,
4,434,929
HAMMER WITH MAGAZINE NAIL FEED
Neil F. Keener, P.O. Box 573, Jemez Springs, N. Mex. 87025
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 221,911, Dec. 31, 1980. This
application No?. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,184
Int. a.J B25C 1/02. 3/00
U.S. a. 227-115 14 Qaims
1. A hammer comprising an elongated handle including an
elongated transverse head on one end defining an outwardly
facing terminal end impact face on one end portion of said
head, elongated generally straight magazine means carried by
said hammer and inclined relative to said handle and head, said
magazine means, head and handle being disposed in generally
the same plan with said magazine means extending through the
junction of said head and handle intermediate the opposite
sides of said head and handle and with said magazine means
including one discharge end opening outwardly of the side of
said head remote from said handle, said magazine means slid-
ingly receiving a row of side-by-side longitudinally staggered
and transversely extending nails therein for successive lateral
movement of said nails longitudinally of said magazine means
to a first feed position at said discharge end wherein each nail
in the feed position is oriented generally parallel with said head
and with its tip end spaced from a plane normal to said nail and
containing said impact fact and preparatory to subsequent
longitudinal movement of said nail to a set position wherein the
nail is oriented with its tip end extending through said plane
normal to said nail and containing said impact face, feed means
mounted on said hammer for movement between a first posi-
tion behind and engaged with the head of a nail in the feed
position and a second position displaced in the direction in
which the feed position nail tip end faces for displacing the
feed position nail from the feed position to the set position.
4 434 930
PROCESS FOR PRODUaNG REINFORCED
STRUCTURAL ARTICLES
George Trenkler, East Providence, R.I., and Richard G. Delagi,
Sharon, Mass., assignors to Texas Instruments Incorporated,
Dallas, Tex.
FUed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311^74
Int a.3 B23K 79/00
U.S. a. 228—118 10 Claims
1. A process for producing a reinforced structural member
comprising the steps of
providing at least two flat sheets of malleable metal, the
sheets of metal having a sintering temperature, disposing a
selected pattern of stop-off material between at least two
adjacent sheets, the stop-off material being thermally
decomposable to generate a gas when raised above a given
' temperature, the stop-off material comprising first and
second portions, the first portion generates gas at the
sintering temperature and the second portion generates
gas above a predetermined temperature higher than the
sintering temperature,
squeezing and solid sute green bonding the sheets one to
another,
ae
ae
heating the sheets to a sintering temperature to improve the
metallurgical bond therebetween and generate gas from
decomposition of the first portion, and
heating the sheets above the predetermined temperature to
cause gas generation from decomposition of the second
portion and concomitant separation and deformation of
the sheets contiguous to the stop-off material.
4,434,931
CASH BOX FOR PAPER CURRENCY
James W. Hunt, and Raymond A. Johnson, both of Hot Springs,
Ark., assignors to UMC Industries, Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,767
Int. a.3 G07F 9/06
U.S. a. 232—15 7 Claims
1. Bill handling apparatus comprising a bill-accepting unit;
a bill-receiving container removably secured to the bottom
of the bill-accepting unit having an opening at the top
through which a bill entered in the bill-accepting unit may
be pushed down for flatwise stacking of bills in the con-
tainer,
the bill-accepting unit having means for pushing a bill en-
tered in the unit down into the container,
the container having a closure for its top opening movable
between a closed position in which it may be locked for
precluding unauthorized access to the container and an
open position for allowing bills to be pushed down into
the container;
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
161
the closure in its open position extending outwardly from
the container;
and means for releasably locking the container to the bill-
accepting unit and precludng its removal from the bill-
accepting unit unless the closure is closed including retain-
ing means on the unit engageable by the opened closure
where it extends outwardly from the container,
the container being applicable to the bottom of the bill-
accepting unit with the closure closed, the closure then
being adapted to be opened for delivery of bills to the
container and for interlocking of the closure where it
extends from the container with said retaining means on
the bill-accepting unit for locking the container to the
bottom of the bill-accepting unit, the container being
removable from the bottom of the bill-accepting unit on
closing the closure with attendant disengagement of the
closure from said retaining means.
4,434,932
AIR-CONDITIONER CONTROL SYSTEM FOR
AUTOMOBILES
Kiyoshi Hara, Oobu; Yasufumi Kojima, Gifu, and Teiichi
Nabeta, Okazaki, all of Japan, assignors to Nippondenso Co.,
Ltd., Kariya and Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota,
both of, Japan
Filed Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,340
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 7, 1981, 56-106571
Int. a.3 F24F 7/00; B60H 7/00
U.S. a. 236-49 12 Qaims
P2^
lOc
Ob
MtcnOOCWUTlF
ZJTC"
S^S^^^Ji-" ^
>
^
1. An air-conditioner control system for an automobile
which supplies a strea^n of air conditioned by an air-condi-
tioner to a vehicle compartment of the automobile such that
the temperature in the vehicle compartment approaches a
desired temperature, said system comprising:
shifting means whereby the direction of flow of said condi-
tioned air stream supplied to said vehicle compartment is
gradually shifted continuously or, progressively between
a first flow direction including the direction of at least one
object occupant and a second flow direction excluding the
direction of said object occupant; "
compartment temperature sensor means for generating an
electric signal indicative of an actual air temperature in
said vehicle compartment;
temperature setting means for generating an electric signal
to adjust a desired temperature of a vehicle compartment
air temperature to be controlled;
signal generating means operable by said occupant to gener-
ate an electric signal indicative of a given control com-
mand; and
control means responsive to said electric signals from said
compartment temperature sensor means, said temperature
setting means and said signal generating means for deter-
mining a shift position of said shifting means in accordance
with a control amount related to said compartment tem-
perature and said desired temperature and said control
command and applying an electric control signal indica-
tive of said shift position to said shifting means thereby
selecting the flow direction of said conditioned air stream
between said first and second flow directions said control
means maintaining said shift position at a given position in
response to said control command irrespective of said
control amount and determining said shift position in
accordance with said control amount when said control
command ceases to exist.
4,434,933
GAS FLOW RATE CONTROL SYSTEM
Akira Tamura, Aichi, Japan, assignor to CKD Controls Limited,
Aichi, Japan
per No. PCT/JP81/00049, § 371 Date Nov. 2, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Nov. 2, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/0261S, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 17, 1981
per Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 320,975
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 8, 1980, 55-29631
Int. Q.' G05D 75/00. F16K 57/00
U.S. Q. 236-75 i ciaim
. /
V^^
~Z2^
'L
t
ooa'nn
1. A gas flow rate control system comprising:
a temperature sensing means for monitoring an environment
to be controlled;
an electromagnetic-type flow rate control valve means in-
cluding a return spring for urging a valve stem to its
closing position, a plunger for driving the valve stem, and
a pair of energizing coils for generating magnetic attrac-
tive forces so as to move the plunger against the force of
the return spring;
an energizing-current control circuit means for applying
energizing currents to said pair of energizing coils, said
currents being in the form of pulse signals which arc
increased or decreased in response to temperature changes
detected by said temperature sensing means, said currents
controlling the opening and closing of said flow rate
control valve;
said pulse signals being alternately applied to said pair of
energizing coils so as to repeatedly reverse the directions
of magnetization caused by said pair of energizing coils,
wherein magnetic hysteresis is eliminated from said flow
rate control valve; and
said pulse signals alternately applied to said pair of energiz-
ing coils being different in duration so as to unbalance said
magnetic attractive forces generated by said respective
energizing coils, and thereby causing said plunger to oscil-
late at the zero point of magnetic force which occurs at
the moment of shifting from the magnetic force generated
by one of said pair of energizing coils to the magnetic
force generated by the other of said pair of energizing
coils, wherein static friction of the plunger of said flow
rate control valve is eliminated.
162
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
SYCTEM FOR HFAXnurrS^oppo axooc r^ a dwi^ ^17 a *'°"8*' »"** "°2^'« 'o'" nuu-king the workpiece to comprise the
^IISSS^SJS^Sy^S^RN^i'^^'^'^ '^'^ P"^***^^ '""'^"^ "^^^ °f «^^ ^^^^h. and «ud coarse
^MbT^N EN^dS^'^^ P°"^" »^"« °^ » «^ *"d ^"ght to be unaffected by the
Gottfried Mowr, GbuflMch; Walter Nau, Cologne, and Emst-
Dicter Neumann, Aachen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Klbckner-Humboldt-Deutz AG, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jon. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,372
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 15.
1981, 3123633
Int a.3 F22B 3/06
VS. a. 237-12J R 12 Claims
1. A system for heating the operator's cabin of a machine
powered by an internal combustion engine, comprising a first
oil conduit system operating at a predetermined high pressure,
the engine including an engine compartment having an en-
closed oil pan, said oil conduit system being located wholly
within said enclosed oil pan and including a high pressure
hydraulic pump for feeding oil under heat and high pressure
from the reservoir of oil in said pan and back into said oil
reservoir, said oil conduit system further including a throttling
element at the discharge side of said pump for heating the oil
passing therethrough, and there being provided a closed, sec-
ond oil conduit system operating at a pressure lower than said
predetermined high pressure, said second oil conduit system
including a first heat exchanger disposed within said enclosed
oil pan in the engine compartment in heat exchange relation-
ship with the oil heated by said first oil conduit system, a
second heat exchanger located in the operator's cabin and a
circulating pump for circulating oil through said closed oil
conduit system, whereby the oil passing through said closed oil
system is heated via said first heat exchanger for supplying heat
to the operator's cabin via said second heat exchanger, and
whereby any leakage of oil from said first oil conduit system
operating at said predetermined high pressure, and any leakage
of oil from said first heat exchanger, is completely confined
within said oil pan to thereby avoid exposure of the engine to
danger due to an uncontrolled loss of oil.
carrier gas and to remain in said container without being con-
veyed to said nozzle to function solely as a means for prevent-
ing agglomeration.
4,434,936
IRRIGATION SYSTEM
John A. Chapman, Wahoo, Nebr., and Owen W. Sherwin, Fort
Wayne, Ind., assignors to Valmont Industries, Inc., Valley,
Nebr.
FUed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,577
Int. a.3 B05B 3/J8
U.S. a. 239-178 20 Claims
4,434,935
POWDER, ESPECIALLY METALUC POWDER FOR
MARKING WORKPIECES
Gcorg Rocden Helmut Sachs, both of FkwkAirt am Main, and
Dieter I^jok, Hattersheim, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Messer Griesheim GmbH, Frankftirt, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Apr. 11, 1979, Ser. No. 29357 ,
Oaims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 29,
1978, 2819091
Int a.} B05B 7/32
VS. a. 239—85 7 ctain„
1. In combination therewith a marking torch, said marking
torch having a nozzle, a container, powder in said container, a
tube connecting said nozzle to said container, agitating means
in said container, carrier gas means commimicating with said
container, said powder consisting of a blend of fine powder
and of coarse powder, said coane powder functioning to pre-
vent said fine powder from agglomerating, said coarse powder
having a particle size of 30-80^ said fine powder having a
particle size of 1-10^ said fine powder being of a size and
weight to be carried by the carrier gas from said container and
16. A coupling for joining conduit sections of an irrigation
system for irrigating a field, said system having a conduit for
extending over the field to be irrigated, said conduit including
conduit sections joined end-to-end by said coupling, and said
irrigation system further including support towers spaced
along the length of the conduit for supporting and moving the
conduit over the field to be irrigated, the conduit having a
series of dispensers along iu length for dispensing liquid fed
through the conduit onto the field: said coupling comprising
means responsive to a relative movement of said adjacent
ccmduit sections under load for sensing said load within the
system, said sensing means including a pair of pivotaly
mounted yoke members, af least one of said yokes having an
end extending substantially perpendicular to the conduit, and
means responsive to said sensing means to initiate corrective
action in the system to relieve said load, said yoke outer end
having means to actuate said corrective means.
March 6. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
163
4,434,937
REACnON DRIVE SPRINKLER
Edward J. Pitchford, Glendora, CaUf., assignor to Rain Bird
* Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, Calif.
FUed May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,552
Int a.3 B05B 3/08
VS. a. 239—230 36 Claims
1. A rotatable water sprinkler, comprising:
a range tube having a flow path therethrough for receiving
water from a water supply pipe and for discharge projec-
tion of the water generally in a lateral direction with
respect to the supply pipe, said range tube further defining
a relatively small bleed opening for bleed passage of a
relatively small stream of the water from said flow path;
means for mounting said range tube at the end of a water
supply pipe for rotation with respect thereto and for re-
ception of water from the pipe into said flow path;
a drive nozzle mounted on said range tube in communication
with the bleed passage and movable between first and
second positions for discharge projection of the relatively
small stream respectively in first and second generally
lateral directions with respect to the supply pipe;
drive means pivoted with respect to said range tube and
including a pair of oppositely oriented deflector spoons
for respective interruption of the relatively small stream
when said drive nozzle is in said first and second positions;
and
a reversing mechanism responsive to the rotational position
of said range tube for moving said drive nozzle between
said first and second positions.
4,434,938
AROMA SYSTEM
Evelyn S. Rosenkrantz, and Edward Rosenkrantz, both of 4915
Tyrone Ave., Sherman Oaks, CaUf. 91403
FUed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,214
Int a.} B05B J5/00
VS. a. 239—274 1 Claim
a cover detachably fastened to said reservoir, said cover
having >
a pump means depending from said cover and communi-
cating with said fluid reservoir for generating
a mist proximate said cover;
activating means extending from said cover and having
a handle attached thereto for engagement with said toilet
handle so as to generate said mist when said toilet han-
dle is activated;
said housing having
a support bracket attached to said refillable reservoir
portion thereof for adjustable engagement with
a hanger bracket attached to
a toilet tank wall and proximate said toilet handle, said
support bracket being slidably detachably affixed to said
hanger bracket by
a lock mechanism, said pump means comprised of
a valve member affixed to
a pump body, said valve member being remote from said
cover and extending below the level of said fluid reser-
voir, said pump body having
a longitudinal bore there through and said bore having
a first diameter portion and a second diameter portion,
said first diameter portion abating said valve chamber
and said second diameter portion abuting said cover,
said longitudinal bore further having
a shoulder at the mid portion of said pump body, con-
tained within said longitudinal bore is said activating
means comprised of
a plunger having
a collar at its mid portion,
a third diameter portion extend from said cover, and
a fourth diameter housed within said longitudinal bore,
and having
a pump seal attached to said fourth diameter, said pump
seal being larger in diameter than said first diameter
portion and slidingly engaged with said first diameter;
a spring coaxial with said fourth diameter and housed
within said second diameter, abutting said shoulder and
said collar so that when said activating means is oper-
ated said spring is compressed, a said valve chamber
having
a first ball valve, and
a second, non biased ball valve,
an intake port in communication with said fluid reservoir,
and
a common port in communication with said first diameter
portion of said longitudinal bore said intake port having
a filter element therein for the removal of particulate
matter from said fluid entering said pump means;
a first passageway serves to connect said intake port with
said first ball valve, and
a second passageway serves to connect said first ball valve
with said common port;
a third passageway serves to connect said second ball
valve with said common port;
a fourth passageway in said pump body serves to connect
said second ball valve with
a fifth passageway in said cover which commmunicates
with
a spray nozzle affixed to said cover whereby activation of
said toilet handle causes said fluid to be expelled from
said spray nozzle.
1. An improved aroma emitting device for cooperative use
with a toilet handle, comprising in combination:
a housing consisting of,
a refillable fluid reservoir having
4,434,939
APPLICATOR GUN
James L. Stankowitz, 6946 Exlinc Rd., Jacksonrillc, Fla. 32222
Dirisioa of Ser. No. 174,591, Aug. 1, 1980, Pat. No. 4,364,521.
This application Dec. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 450^89
Int a.} B05B 7/04
VS. a. 239—345 2 Claims
1. An applicator gun for the application of a fluent material
to a surface and comprising a gun housing having a pressurized
164
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
fluid inlet connected to a supply tube, a rigid discharge tube
extending longitudinally of the gun housing and connected to
the inlet and having a free distal end with a pressurized fluid
discharge nozzle connected thereto, trigger means for displac-
ing the discharge tube longitudinally of the gun housing, a tip
on the gun housing, said tip having a discharge oriflce receiv-
ing the nozzle which forms a closure for the oriflce, said gun
housing including a fluent material discharge chamber sur-
rounding a portion of said free end of said discharge tube and
communicating with the orifice in the tip, the discharge cham-
that its nozzle spray hole temperature can be maintained at a
reduced level during use, said device comprising
an injection nozzle body which includes at least one spray
hole,
a hood which is disposed in a generally surrounding relation-
ship with respect to said injection nozzle body, said hood
being constructed to provide an annular gap between it
and said injection nozzle body in the vicinity of each said
spray hole, said hood including a separate spray orifice
extending therethrough for alignment with a respective
spray hole of said injection nozzle body, and
a quantity of solid heat insulating material in said annular
gap adjacent each aligned spray hole and spray orifice, the
solid heat insulating material providing an enclosed chan-
nel communicating between each spray hole and each
spray orifice.
;
ber adapted to receive fluent material to be dispensed, said
displacing means moving the discharge tube and nozzle away
from the orifice to enable discharge of fluent material from the
chamber through the orifice with the pressurized fluid dis-
charging from the nozzle entraining said fluent material for
depositing it onto a surface, said gun housing including a lat-
eral recess removably mounting the tip, said tip including a
plate having an opening therein forming said orifice and re-
ceiving a portion of said nozzle, said plate being slidably re-
ceived in said recess, and spring clip means retaining the plate
in said recess.
4434941
SEALING SYSTEM FOR THE AIR FEED OF A
ROTATABLE AIR NOZZLE SYSTEM
Gerhard Wohlfeil, Monheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Jagenberg Werke AG, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,874
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 19.
1980,3048134
Int. aj B05B 15/08
U.S. a. 239-587 7 cudms
4434 940
INSULATED FUEL INJECTION NOZZLE DEVICE AND
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING SAME
Heinz Kupper, Troisdorf-Sicglar, and Helmut Busch, Lohmar,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Klockner-Hum-
boldt-Deutz AG, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,673
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 5,
1980,3004033
Int. a.3 P02M 53/04
U.S. a. 239-397.5 9 Qaims
1. A fuel injection nozzle device which is constructed such
1. In combination; a system for sealing and axially feeding air
to an air nozzle system for the removal of excess liquid coating
material from a moving web of material and for smoothing the
coating, the air nozzle system comprising a housing rotatable
about its longitudinal center including a pair of air slot nozzles
disposed diametrically opposite one another and comprising
two stationary air feed ducts sealed from one another by gas-
kets of resiliently compressible material with rectangular cross
section and which are seated on thrusting surfaces perpendicu-
lar to the longitudinal center axis of the air nozzle system at Ihe
end of the stationary air feed ducts, the gaskets are overlapped
with radial clearance by gasket retaining and pressing means,
and the gasket retaining and pressing means are pressed against
the gaskets of resiliently compressible material by pressure
surfaces provided on a rotatable hollow journal of the air
nozzle system perpendicular to the longitudinal center axis of
the air nozzle system, the journal having two separate air ducts
each leading to a slot nozzle and serving to connect one of the
air feed ducts to one nozzle through one air channel, rotation
of the journal connecting said one nozzle and its channel to the
other nozzle.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
165
4,434,942
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR ATTRITION CARRIED
OUT IN A HUMID MEDIUM
Jean-Louis Cardini, Paris, France, assignor to Societe Metallur-
gique Le Nickels-S.L.N., Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 94,085, Nov. 14, 1979, abandoned. This
application Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,751
Claims priority, application France, Nov. 15, 1978, 78 32217
Int. a.3B02C 77/76
U.S. a. 241-21 18 Oaims
passage inlets in shear relation with the structure defining said
passages and passages' inlets, said bar being located in the
1. A process of wet attrition of ore comprising:
(a) grinding the ores to a pulp having a particle size distribu-
tion such that 80% by weight of the particles have a
diameter from about 30 to about 0.4 mm; and
(b) subjecting the pulp to wet attrition by agitating the pulp
in a slightly turbulent medium, said agitation being con-
ducted at an impeller Reynolds number of from about
1,000 to about 5,000, the impeller Reynolds number being
defined as:
NRtimp=iVxdXp)/\i
wherein
U= rotational speed of the impeller, rpm;
p= density of the pulp being pumped, gm/cm^; -
d= diameter of the impeller, cm; and
;t= viscosity of the pulp being pumped, centipoise;
the agitation of step (b) being carried out by stirring the
pulp with at least two impellers mounted at a distance
apart on a shaft, each of the impellers comprising at least
two horizontally disposed blades, the blades having equal
length and being so arranged that the impellers pump the
preground ore towards the spaced defined between the
impellers, the impellers having a carrying coefficient
substantially constant throughout their length such that
the voluminal flow rate per area element is constant what-
ever the position of this area element within the area
produced by the rotation of each impeller.
4,434,943
PUMP INTAKE CUTTER HEAD
Troy M. Deal, 277 Trismen Ter., Winter Park, Ha. 32789
Continuation of Ser. No. 168,145, Jul. 14, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 18,105, Mar. 7, 1979,
abandoned. This application Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,432
Int. a.3 B02C 19/12, 23/36
U.S. a. 241—46.08 1 Claim
1. In combination with a centrifugal liquid pump for trans-
ferring and comminuting a slurry including aquatic growths
wherein the pump includes a rotatable impeller having struc-
ture defining radial passages and radial passage inlets, a suction
pipe having a passage having upper and lower internal por-
tions, connection means releasably attaching said suction pipe
to said pump, said pump having its axis of impeller rotation
aligned with said pipe, a cylindrical intake chamber defined by
the radial passages of said pump aligned with said pipe passage,
a static shear element in the form of an elongated cantilevered
bar mounted at one end upon said pipe with its other end
projecting substantially into said chamber adjacent the pump
lower interior portion of said pipe and chamber wherein the
density of said slurry due to the effect of gravity is the greatest.
4,434,944
MASS (INDUCnVE) REACTANCE VIBRATORY MILL
OR CRUSHER EMPLOYING MECHANICAL DRIVE
FORCE
Albert G. Bodine, 7877 Woodley Ave., Vah Nuys, Calif. 91406
FUed Oct. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 316,045
Int. a.' B02C 2/06. 19/00
U.S. a. 241—258 13 Claims
1. A vibratory mill for grinding material comprising
a driving member,
eccentrically weighted drive shaft means for supporting said
driving member for freedom of motion rotationally about
the longitudinal axis of the drive shaft means,
means for suspending said drive shaft means for freedom of
motion laterally with respect to said longitudinal axis,
a slave member having an inside wall,
means for supporting said slave member in proximity to said
driving member and said slave member,
means for rotatably driving said drive shaft means to gener-
ate cycloidal quadrature related vibratory force compo-
nents therein, said force components causing said driving
member to both roll around on and vibrate against the
inside wall of said slave member, and
means for feeding said material into the gap formed between
the driving and slave member,
166
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
both shear and radial vibratory forces being applied to said
material to effect the grinding thereof.
4,434,945
WINDING APPARATUS
Tokuhito Haraane, Hirakata, and Maaaaki Taaai, Kadoma, both
of Japan, aaaignora to Matmahita Electric Industrial Co.,
Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
FUed Feb. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 347,268
Clainu priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 19, 1981, 56-24110
Int a.3 B65H 59/00; DOIH 7/24
VS. a 242-7.14 3 cialnu
aOc 27
1. A winding apparatus for winding wires and the like
around a winding form, said apparatus comprising:
a flyer member having a wire passage for passing a wire
therethrough onto the winding form, rotatable about a
routional axis, said flyer member including a boss portion;
and
means for applying tension to the wire by a centrifugal force
during rotation of said flying member, said tension apply-
ing means including:
a slider member slidably supported on said flyer member
for sliding movement in a radial direction with respect
to said rotational axis,
a roller member, rotatably mounted on said slider for
rotative contact with the wire and for radial movement
with said slider,
a bracket member having radially extending openings
therein,
a pin fixing said bracket member to said slider member for
radial movement therewith,
bolt members fued at one end to said boss portion, extend-
ing through said openings in said bracket member and
having head portions opposite said one end, and
coil springs surrounding said bolts between said bracket
member and said head portions so as to urge said roller
member through said bracket member and slider mem-
ber toward said routional axis against said centrifugal
force.
portion having a generally vertically extending slot opening to
said face, and the multifilament strand being wound into a
package on the winding collet being received in said slot.
4,434,946
STRAND GUIDE FOR PACKAGING APPARATUS
David F. Lewin, Newark, Ohio; Louie J. Haynca, Amarillo,
Tex., and Lyane B. Beach, Newark, Ohio, aaaignora to Owena-
Coming Flbcrglas Corporation, Toledo, Ohio
FUed Apr. 1, 1983, Ser. No. 481,531
Int. a.5 B65H 54/08. 54/28. 57/04
VS. a. 242—18 G 4 ciaima
1. A strand guide movable back and forth longitudinally of
a winding collet as part of a package builder, said strand guide
comprising a block member having a face normally engaging a
package being wound from a multifilament strand guided by
•the block member, said block member having a recess in said
face whereby it is provided with a lower squeegee or strand-
flattening portion below the recess and an upper strand-recip-
rocating portion above the recess, the strand-reciprocating
transversely moved back and forth along the winding collet by
the strand-reciprocating portion, and flattened due to trans-
verse displacement of the filaments by said strand-flattening
portion as it is wound onto the package.
4,434,947
AXIALLY DISPLACEABLE REEL HOLDER FOR
PACKING MACHINE WEBS
Heinz H. Focke, Verden, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Focke A Co., Verden, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 184,445, Sep. 5, 1980, Pat. No.
4,366,932. This appUcation Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 403,207
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 18,
1979,2937661
Int a.3 B65H J9/12. 25/26
VS. a. 242-57.1 6 Claims
I -
1. A reel holder mounting arrangement for a packaging
apparatus, especially for wrapping groups of cigarettes into
cigarette packs, comprising:
(a) a machine base (10),
(b) a reel holder (11) for receiving a replaceable web roll of
packaging material,
(c) an axle (16) embodying means for removably mounting
the reel holder at one end thereof,
(d) a hollow elongated bearing section (23) coaxial with and
extending from the other end of the axle,
(e) fluid piston and cylinder means (30, 31) disposed within
the bearing section and coupled between the axle and the
machine base for implementing coarse axial extensions and
retractions of the axle and a web roll carrying reel holder
mounted thereon to enable safe web roll replacement,
(0 means including tubular outer housing (24) surrounding
the bearing section for mounting the bearing section to the
machine base, and
(g) precision gear drive means mounted directly between the
outer housing and the machine base for bidirectionally
axially displacing the outer housing to implement the
fine-adjusting of the operating position of the reel holder
relative to the machine base to ensure proper web feed.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
167
4,434,948
APPARATUS FOR PRODUONG OVERLAPPING BAND
ROLLS FROM SUPERPOSED OVERLAPPING FLAT
WORKPIECES
Richard FeldkMmper, Lengerich of WestphaUa, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, aasignor to WindmoUer A Holscher, Lengerich,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,689
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 17,
1981, 3035114
Int. a.J B65B 63/04: B65H 17/02. 5/02
VS. a. 242—59
i£
I
1
and second shaft portions with the base portions rouubly
interconnected by variable pressurizable air bags, the air bags
including a first set which undergoes compression during a
relative roution of the first shaft portion with respect to the
second shaft portion in the first direction and including a sec-
ond set which undergoes compression during a relative rota-
tion of the first shaft portion with respect to the second shaft
portion in a second direction opposite the first direction and
including means for varying the pressurization of at least one
of the first and second sets, the means for varying pressuriza-
tion including conduits connecting a pressure gas source to the
first and second sets with variable pressure setting valves
associated with the conduits whereby pressure transmitted
from the pressure gas source to the first and second sets can be
individually controlled and wherein the conduits include rout-
able couplings and the sete can be variably pressurized during
operation of the assembly.
1. Apparatus for producing overlapping band rolls from
superposed overlapping flat sacks, bags or like flat workpieces,
comprising: a freely roUUble winding core, a conveyor means,
a pivouble frame which carries rollers at least at opposite ends
and is disposed downstream of the conveyor means for deliver-
ing the workpieces, and a driven endless conveyor belt which
passes over the rollers and lies against the freely roUUble
winding core or the overlapping band roll being formed
thereon, characterised in that the frame is mounted on a pivot
shaft that divides the frame into a longer and a shorter lever
arm, and in that the ends of the winding core are held in paral-
lel guides extending substantially along lines drawn through
the axes of the winding core and the roller which is mounted
at the end of the shorter lever arm and which supports the
winding core or the overlapping band roll being formed.
4,434,949
WINDER RIDER ROLL CONTROL
Gerald W. Karr, South Beloit, Dl., assignor to Beloit Corpora-
tion, Beloit, Wis.
FUed Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,633
Int. a.3B65H 77/72
U.S. a. 242—66 11 Claims
y^
1. In a rider roll assembly including an elongated rider roll,
flexible elongated support means for each end of the rider roll,
and torsion cross shaft means with the support means engaging
the cross shaft means and effective to route the cross shaft
means in response to movement of the rider roll, the improve-
ment of the cross shaft means comprising first and second
roUUble shaft portions interconnected by torque transmitting
means having means for adjusting the torque transmitted per
unit of relative routional displacement of the shaft portions,
the torque transmitting means including variable pressurizable
air bags, and first and second base portions affixed to the first
4434950
WINDING-ON DEVICE FOR PAPER SHEETS AND
LENGTHS OF TEXTILE
WUhelm Niinnerich, 33, KSIner Grenzweg, D-4780 Lippstadt,
and Peter Schmidt, 41, Ziethenweg, D-4790 Paderbom, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,173
Qainu priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 30,
1981, 8109362[U]
Int. a.3 B65H 17/04. 17/22
VS. a. 242— 67 J 7 Claims
1. Apparatus for winding-up of a continuous sheet material
such as paper on a take-up roll comprising:
a supply of sheet material;
a take-up roll upon which the sheet material is to be discon-
tinuously wound in relatively large incremenU;
a drive means comprising a rouuble drive element which
routes incrementally and discontinuously in relatively
small increments;
an axially elastically stretchable belt connecting the drive
element to the take-up roll to transfer routional motion
from the drive element to the take-up roll when the take-
up roll routes freely but to store energy in the form of
elastic tension when the take-up roll is locked against
roution; and
locking means interconnecting the drive element and the
take-up roll to normally lock the take-up roll against
roution but to release the take-up roll after the drive
element has routed a predetermined number of said small
increments.
168
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4434 951
nSHING REEL HAVING A MAGNETIC BRAKE AND
NON-MAGNETIZABLE BEARING
Hideki Nak^ima, Sakai, Japan, assignor to Shimano Industrial
Company Limited, Osalu^ Japan
FUed Not. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 413,690
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 26, 1981. 56-
176133[U]
Int. a.3 AOIK S9/02
UA a. 242-84.52 B 6 Claims
with the housing in which said cartridge is placed to lock
said hub against rotation therewithin, said tabs having lips
extending along the inner surface of said end walls about
said central aperture and thereby retaining said hub rela-
tive to said spool, said hub being freely rotatable within
said spool;
1. A fishing reel comprising,
a reel body comprising a pair of first and second separated
and opposing side frames which are provided with bear-
ing housings each having a bearing,
a spool shaft having a spool disposed between said side
frames at said reel body, said spool shaft being supported
rotatably by said bearings to said reel body,
a drive mechanism for driving said spool shaft,
a clutch mechanism for enabling said spool shaft to become
freely rotatable with respect to said drive mechanism, and
a brake mechanism for imparting a rotational resistance
agamst free rotation of said spool shaft, said brake mecha-
nism comprising a magnet ring having a plurality of mag-
nets and an electric conductor which is cylindrical and
rotatable together with said spool shaft, said magnet ring
being fixed to said bearing housing at said second side
frame, said electric conductor being disposed opposite to
said magnet ring and rotatably within the magnetic field of
said magnets, so that the magnetic force by said magnets
exerts a braking action on said spool and spool shaft, said
bearing at said second side frame being disposed within
the magnetic field of said magnets at said brake mecha-
nism and being formed of a metallic bearing comprising a
non-magnetic material not magnetizable by said magnets.
4 434 952
POWER RETURNABLE COILABLE RULE CARTRIDGE
AND COIL RULE ASSEMBLY EMPLOYING SAME
Frank G. Czerwinski, East Berlin, and Edward C. Rutty,
Portland, both of Conn., assignors to The Stanley Works, New
Britain, Conn.
Filed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,521
Int. Q\? B65H 75/48; GOIB 3/10
U.S. a. 242-107 „ Claims
1. A cartridge for a coilable rule comprising:
A. a form-sustaining spool having a cylindrical core portion
with an axially extending aperture therethrough and annu-
lar end walls of greater diameter than said core portion to
provide an annular chamber thereabout, the central aper-
tures of said end walls being aligned and of lesser diameter
than said core portion;
B. a hub having an elongate post extending axially of said
spool and a multiplicity of locking tobs extending out-
wardly from each end thereof and perpendicularly to the
axis of said post, said tabs being adapted for interlocking
C. a recoil spring coiled within said core portion having one
end attached to said post; and
D. a measuring blade coiled about said core portion having
its inner end secured to the outer end of said spring.
4,434,953
DUAL SPOOL PRETENSIONER
Charles Gemar, Mound, and Robert L. Meisch, Minneapolis,
both of Minn., assignors to The Firestone Tire A Rubber
Company, Akron, Ohio
FUed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 238,070
Int. a.3 A62B 35/02: B65H 75/48
U.S. a. 242-107 4a^^
40 ^i ^1 gf zr ]fs
1. A pretensioner for turning the spools to tighten webbing
thereon for dual spool safety belt retractors comprising:
a pair of shafts in spaced-apart parallel offset relation, each
of said shafts each driving a webbing spool connected
thereto and each having a knuried section intermediate the
ends thereof;
a case supporting said shafts for operative joumalling and
location therein of said knurled sections, said case attach-
able to a dual spool retractor frame;
a chamber in said case;
a pyrotechnic means removably inserted in said chamber;
and
deformable piston means operably engaged against said
chamber and alignably joumalled between said shafts and
having an interference fit with said knurled sections
whereby, upon linear movement of said piston, said piston
means is deformed and said shafts are rotated, turning said
spools and tensioning said webbing.
4,434,954
TAPE TENSIONING APPARATUS
Deuils M. Ryan, San Mateo, Calif., assignor to Ampex Corpora-
tion, Redwood Qty, Calif.
FUed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 364,732
lot a^ B65H 59/38. 63/02: G03B 1/04: GllB 15/32
U.S. a. 242-189 9ctaiB„
1. A tope tensioning apparatus for a magnetic tope transport
including a tope element; a pair of spaced tope moving and
anchoring means engaging and anchoring said tope at spaced
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
169
pomts thereon defining a tope segment of variable length, and
tension loading means coupled to said tope moving and an-
choring means and to said tope segment between said spaced
points in first and second operating modes to alter the length of
said segment between corresponding first and second predeter-
mined length values and to apply corresponding first and
second tensioning forces laterally to said segment, character-
ized in that:
said tension loading means is arranged to apply at least one
of said tensioning forces at substantially the full value
two rototable reel hubs (6, 7) arranged adjacent each other
between the major walls,
a magnetic tape (8) attached to the reel hubs (6, 7), a span (9)
of said tope extending along said front opening in the
magnetic-tope cassette for cooperation with parts of a
magnetic-tape apparatus, said major walls having at least
one opening permitting access by elements of the mag-
netic tape apparatus behind the tape, the span (9) of said
magnetic tope which extends along the front opening of
the magnetic-tape cassette being movable from an active
position, in which it is disposed outside the housing of the
magnetic-tape cassette, to an inactive position, in which it
is disposed between the major walls (1, 2) of the housing,
at least one front cover (W, 15) near a comer point (12, 13)
near the front of the magnetic-tape cassette, and
means for pivoting said cover about a pivotal axis perpendic-
ular to the major walls (1, 2) between an open position and
a closed position, in which closed position said cover at
least partly covers the front opening of the magnetic-tope
■ cassette, characterized in that
the front cover (14, 15) comprises a thrust portion (16, 17)
which during the pivotal movement of the open position
to the closed position presses against the span (9) of mag-
netic tape which extends along the front side and moves
the tape from the active position to the inactive position,
and
said major walls are arranged such that in the inactive posi-
tion of said tape the tape is disposed interiorly of said at
least one opening,
whereby the edges of said tape are fully covered when the
tope is in the inactive position.
thereof whenever the actual length value of said segment
falls within a predetermined operating range of the corre-
sponding predetermined median length value of the seg-
ment; and
said tension loading means includes a set including at least
one force-transmitting element, said one thereof engaging
said tape element and each element of said set engaging at
least one other element of said set, each pair of engaged
elements being arranged to move only conjointly and in
substantially the same direction, so as to avoid frictional
shearing motion therebetween.
4 434 956
FLEXIBLE HELICOPTER ROTOR AND PITCH
CONTROL MECHANISM
Gilbert R. Gonzales, 1314 N. Winstel Blvd., Tucson, Ariz. 85^16
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,497
Int. a.5 B64C 27/38
U.S. a. 244-17.25 13 Qalms
4,434,955
MAGNETIC-TAPE CASSETTE
Johannes J. M. Schoenmakers, Eindhoven, Netherlands, as-
signor to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
v FUed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 386,144
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Jun. 18, 1981.
8102932
Int. a.3 G03B 1/04: GllB 15/32
U.S. a. 242-199 1 Qaim
1. A magnetic-tape cassette, comprising
a housing having first and second flat parallel major walls (1,
2), two side walls (3, 4), a rear wall (5), and a front side
with a front opening between the major walls,
1. A flexible helicopter rotor comprising in combination:
a. a vertical rotor axle;
b. means for rotating said vertical rotor axle in a first roto-
tional direction; and
c. a plurality of flexible airfoils secured to and extending
radially from said vertical rotor axle, each of said airfoils
including a plurality of segments, each of said segments
having a trailing edge relative to said first rotational direc-
tion, the trailing edge of each of said segments being
capable of billowing upward to form an arc for allowing
each segment of said airfoils to form a billowing, canopy-
shaped surface as said vertical rotor axle is rotated in said
first rototional direction, the amount by which any partic-
ular segment of an airfoil is allowed to billow being less
than the amount by which segments located closer to said
vertical rotor axle are allowed to billow.
170
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
M34^7
LOW DRAG SURFACE
Robert R. Moritz, Conyeri, Ga^ assignor to Rolls-Royce Incor-
porated, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,449
Int a.J B64C 3/14. 23/06
VS. a 244-35 R 4 Claims
1. A low drag surface having an upstream edge and a down-
stream edge and having a flow of fluid across the same in a
direction from the upstream edge toward the downstream
edge, said low drag surface comprising an intermittent linear
vortex producing means spaced downstream of the upstream
edge and extending transverse to the direction of said flow of
fluid across the surface for producing a succession of rolling
vortices extending transverse to the flow of fluid, said intermit-
tent linear vortex producing means including a re-entrant
discontinuity in the surface, the discontinuity extending trans-
verse to said flow and providing a sheltered leeward face
against which each of said vortices may be successively
formed; and
means spaced downstream from said discontinuity and defin-
ing a ramp parallel therewith, said ramp being inclined
outwardly from the surface and causing each of said vorti-
ces, when formed against said sheltered leeward face, to
be dislodged from the sheltered leeward face to permit
another vortex to be formed, the successively formed
vortices being allowed to roll in a downstream direction
across the surface in succession to reduce the drag on the
surface.
4,434 958
METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION FOR A CONTAINER
WITH A SYMMETRICAL LOBED STRUCTURE AND
CONTAINER CONSTRUCTED ACCORDING TO THE
SAID PROCESS
Michel Rougeron, Toulouse, and Jacques Simon, Vigoulet-Auzil,
both of France, assignors to Centre National d'Etudes Spa-
tiales, Paris, France
Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,448
Claims priority, appUcation France, Sep. 6, 1979, 79 22303
Int. a.^ B64B 1/58
U A a. 244—126 10 Claims
^
1. A container with an axially symmetrical sturcture adapted
to support an overpressure, said container comprising:
(a) an airtight skin having two poles and being formed from
gores assembled at connecting lines extending along me-
ridians of the structure, and
(b) meridional unidirectional reinforcement means disposed
along the meridian connecting lines and interconnected at
either pole,
(c) the gores being made of a material with a low elastic
modulus and a large capacity for the plastic elongation at
least in the meridional direction thereof,
(d) the reinforcement means being made of a material with a
high elastic modulus adapted to be plastically deformed
outwrdly while maintaining their initial length,
(e) the combination of the materials used to form the gores
and reinforcements being effective that, when an over-
pressure is created inside the structure, the gore material,
plastically deforms to cause bulging along the length of
the connecting lines and the container is inflated in a
lobed, symmetrical spheroid form along the length of the
connecting lines and is flattened at either pole.
4,434,959
AIRFOIL FLAP ASSEMBLY WTTH FLAP TRACK
MEMBER
Peter K. C. Rudolph, Scatde, Wash., assignor to The Boeing
Company, Seattle, Wash.
FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,743
Int. a.J B64C 3/5a 9/20
VS. a. 244-215 25 Claims
1. A flap assembly for an airfoil having a forward end, a rear
end, a longitudinal axis and a transverse axis, said flap assembly
comprising:
(a) a mounting structure located at the rear end of the airfoil,
said mounting structure having a track mounting portion
at a track mounting location,
(b) a first flap member having a stowed first position at the
rear end of the airfoil, and movable rearwardly through an
intermediate second position to a fully extended third
position, .
(c) said flap member having mounted thereto a substantially
longitudinally aligned track member operatively con-
nected to said track mounting portion for longitudinal and
routional movement relative thereto, said track member
having a forward end and a rear end, said track member
being characterized in that with the flap member in the
first position, the rear end of the track member is at the
track mounting location, and with the flap member in its
third position, the forward end of the track member is at
the track mounting position,
(d) actuating means operatively connected to said flap mem-
ber at a connecting location spaced forwardly of the
forward end of the track member and having a fixed
location relative to the flap member, said actuating means
being arranged to move said connecting location substan-
tially longitudinally along a first path component gener-
ally aligned with the lengthwise axis of the track to move
said flap between the stowed position and the intermediate
position so as to cause substantial Fowler motion of the
flap with relatively little roution of the lengthwise axis of
the track member relative to the mounting structure at the
track mounting location, and to move the connecting
location along a second path portion, having a substantial
upward path component to move the flap between the
intermediate position and the third position so as to cause
relatively less Fowler motion with relatively greater rota-
tion of the legthwise axis of the track member relative to
the mounting structure at the track mounting location.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
171
4,434,960
APERTURED DISPLAY BOARD AND HOOK
Buford E. Berry, 403 Carol Rd., Morgan Qty, La. 70380
FUed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,771
Int. a.i E04G 3/00
VS. a. 248-220.4 ,« cw^
support bracket means pivotally secured to the holder ring
means remote from the support ring means; and
platform means for receiving the element to be held and
disposed beneath the holder ring means and pivoully
secured to the support bracket means remote from the
holder ring means.
4434 962
FLANGE HAVING AN OUTER AND AN INNER
ORCUMFERENTIAL SEALING FACE AND
APPARATUS, COMPRISING SUCH FLANGE, FOR
PRODUHNG ENVELOPING CASTS ABOUT
ELONGATED BODIES
Felix Bleuel, Basel, and Christian Bosshard, Frenkendorf. both
of Switierland, assignors to Oba-Geigy Corporation, Ardslcy,
N.Y.
Filed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,838
Claims priority, application Switierland, Feb. 27, 1981.
1334/81; Jan. 5, 1982, 26/82
Int. a.J B29C 1/00; B29D 3/00
U.S. a. 249-65 MQaims
1. An article supporting apparatus comprising, in combina-
tion:
(A) a board having a plurality of apertures therein, said
apertures being defined by a vertical portion and a trans-
verse portion, said apertures being aligned in a series of
rows and columns, the centeriine of said vertical portions
of said apertures in said rows being in alignment, said
transverse portions of vertically adjacent apertures in said
columns of apertures being on opposite sides of said verti-
cal portions of said vertically adjacent apertures, and
(B) a hook member comprising
(a) a shank portion having a top end and a bottom end,
said shank portion having stop means connected
thereto, and
(b) a leg portion connected to said shank portion for re-
ceipt of articles to be suspended from said board.
4,434,961
UNIVERSAL PIVOTING AND FOLDING BEVERAGE
HOLDER APPARATUS
ThomM M. Hoye, 6850 N. 86th St., Scottsdale, Ariz. 85253
Filed Apr. 25, 1983, Ser. Nq. 488,030
Int. a.3 A47K 1/09
U.S. a 248-311.2 20 Claims
1. An annular flange of elastomeric material for mounting
between two concentric tubular members to define a mold
chamber therebetween, said flange having an annular recess
near the outer perimeter thereof for receiving an end of the
outer of said tubular members, said flange having a through
aperture between radially separated inner and outer surfaces
and having a radially relieved surface such as to define with ao
outer surface of the inner of said tubular members a flow gap
therebetween, said gap communicating with said through
aperture.
1. Holder apparatus for holding an element, comprising, in
combination:
base means for securing the holder apparatus at a fixed
location;
hinge plate means pivotally secured to the base means;
support ring means secured to the hinge plate means and
pivotal therewith;
holder ring means, through which the element extends.
pivotally secured to the support ring means;
4,434,963
SLIDE CLAMP INCLUDING ELEVATION STABILIZER
Pat Russell, McHenry, lU., assignor to Baxter Travenol Ubora-
tories, Inc., Deerfleld, III.
Filed Dec. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 452,258
Int. a.i F16L 55/14
U.S.a251-7 7 Claims
1. A slide clamp comprising:
(a) a platform including first and second ends;
(b) a defined slot through said platform, extending generally
between said first and second ends of said platform, said
slot including a defined tubing receiving portion near said
first end, dimensioned so as not to significantly restrict the
lumen of tubing disposed therein, thereby forming an on
mode, said receiving portion narrowing to a defined tub-
ing crimping portion dimensioned to severely restrict the
lumen of tubing disposed therem, thereby formmg an off
172
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
mode, wherein said clamp is manually adjustable on the
tubing between said receiving and crimping portions; and
(c) a clamp stabilizer projecting from said platform into said
receiving portion of said slot at a first end side of said
receiving portion, said stabilizer including a base at said
first end side and narrowing to a tip at its distal end, oppo-
site said base;
(d) wherein the distance between said first and second ends
is substantially greater than the thickness of said platform
and further wherein the distance between said first end
and said stabilizer tip is not greater than about one third
the distance between said first and second ends;
(e) such that said slide clamp is selectively positionable and
maintainable at any elevation along the length of the
tubing while said slide clamp is in the on mode.
4 434 964
SELF-CLOSING CYLINDRICAL GATE FOR HYDRAULIC
TURBO-MACHINE
Paul Hudon, 9100 de Charente, Tracy, Quebec, Canada
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,316
QaiiiM priority, application Canada, Mar. 12, 1981, 372837
Int. a.5 F16K 3J/145
U.S. a. 251-62 12 Qaims
thrust bearings being used to control the translation of the
piston in the chamber, and to change said translation into a
motion of rotation; said synchronizing device including me-
chanical transmission means allowing synchronization of said
motion of rotation.
4 434 965
LOW FLOW CONTROL VALVE
Leo I. St. Martin, Jr., N. Hampton, N.H., assignor to H. D.
Baumann Assoc., Ltd., Portsmouth, N.H.
Filed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 342,511
Int. a.J F16K 47/00; F16L 55/02
U.S. a. 251-121 4 Claim,
r^cD
1. An operating device for a cylindrical gate as used to
protect and seal a hydro-electric installation including hydrau-
lic turbo-machines, comprising: a set of hydraulic servomotors
installed above the circumference of the cylindrical gate; oper-
ating rods, each with one end connected to the gate and the
other end associated with a servomotor; each servomotor
including a closed chamber to conUin a pressurized fluid, a
piston capable of moving in translation in said chamber, and
dividing said chamber into two compartments, the piston being
moved by the operating rod; a minimum of three servomotors
being interconnected; those of said servomotors, that are con-
nectd to the synchronizing device, including a nut, thrust
bearings and a threaded rod going through the nut and the
vs
c.
Low flow control valve comprising:
a housing having fluid communicating inlet and outlet
ports and a central vertical passage interconnecting said
inlet and outlet ports;
an orifice member suitably retained within said veriical
passage of said housing and having a central longitudinal
bore, sleeve-type sealing means tightly retained within
said orifice member;
a valve plug slidingly engaged within said longitudinal
bore of the orifice member and within said sleeve-type
sealing means, said valve plug having a fluid conducting
profile at its lower extremity extending exterior of said
sealing means to conduct fluid flow when in the upper
travel position and an upper solid cylindrical portion
disposed to tightly fit within the sleeve-type sealing means
when in the lower travel position to effect closure of said
orifice member;
d. said sleeve-type sealing means having a reduced exterior
diameter portion and a straight cylindrical central bore
shdingly engaging said valve plug, one or more passages
disposed perpendicularly to said central bore to provide
fluid communication between said central bore and said
reduced exterior diameter portion to enable fluid pressure
to urge said sealing means against the valve plug when in
the lowest travel position in order to enhance the sealing
capabilities.
e. operating means attached to said valve plug.
4 434 966
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC PROPORTIONAL CONTROL
VALVE
Theodore S. Zi^ac, Bay Village, Ohio, assignor to Parker-Han-
nifln Corporation, Oeveland, Ohio
FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,538
Int. a.3 F16K 3/26; F15B 13/043
U.S. a. 251-205 6 Claims
6. A control valve comprising a housing, said housing hav-
ing a first port and a second port, a bore intersecting said first
and second ports, a valve spool slidably disposed in said bore,
said spool including a smooth cylindrical outer peripheral
surface, said spool being axially movable in said bore between
first and second positions, said spool having land means hy-
draulically isolating said first and second ports when said spool
is in said first position, said spool having groove means estab-
lishing metered fluid pressure communication between said
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
173
first and second ports through a metering area when said spool
is in said second position, said groove means including an
axially extending groove in said spool, the juncture of said
groove and said outer peripheral surface defining metering
edges on said spool, said metering edges on said spool defining
said metering area, adjustment means adjustably changing said
means for permitting the fluid preuure to move said clo-
sure member to said closed position; and
seal means for providing sealing engagement between said
seat and said valve body and between said seat and said
closure member, said seal means including leak means for
permitting flow of fluid only in the direction from said
inlet to said chamber between said closure member and
said seat when said closure member is positioned near said
closed position, whereby the fluid pressure urges said
closure member to said closed position,
4,434.968
MAGNETIC JACK
Raymond H. Smith, Rtc. 2 • SAAA, Lamed, Kans. 67550
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,250
Int. a.' B66F 3/00
U.S. a. 254-1 , Claim
metering area independently of axial movement of said spool
relative to said sleeve, said adjustment means including link
means for routably adjusting said spool, and connector means
between said link means and said spool restraining relative
rotational movement between said spool and said link means
and permitting relative axial movement between said spool and
said link means.
4,434,967
VALVE SELF-RELIEVING SEATS
Ralph W. Vanderburg, Longriew, Tex., assignor to Axelson,
Inc., Longview, Tex.
Filed Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,304
Int. a.3 F16K 3/00
U.S. a. 251-328 16 Qaims
/
1. A magnetic jack comprising:
a. a body member consisting of a series of sections connected
together for limited telescopic extension in a direction
parallel to the lift axis of the jack,
b. A pair of electromagnets carried between each successive
pair of body sections, the magnets of said pair being af-
fixed respectively to said related pair of body sections,
being coaxial and having a magnetic axis parallel to the
jack lift axis, and having confronting poles which are of
like polarity when electric current is supplied thereto,
c. means for furnishing electric current to said electromag-
nets, whereby the like polarity of said confronting poles
generates a repulsion force tending to extend said related
body sections telescopically, and
d. a dashpot device interconnecting each successive pair of
body sections, whereby to cushion and retard the exten-
sion and retraction movements of that pair of body sec-
tions.
4434 969
ROD AND PIPE PUSHER^ULLER APPARATUS
Dennis Von Ruden, Owatonna, Minn., assignor to General
Equipment Co., Owatonna, Minn.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,428
Int. a.3 E21B 19/00
U.S. a. 254-29 R 6 Qaims
/I M
1. A valve for use with fluids under pressure, comprising:
a valve body having an inlet and an outlet with a chamber
therebetween;
a seat located in said valve body;
a closure member in said chamber having flow means for
cooperating with said seat for preventing fluid flow in the
closed position and for permitting fluid flow in the open
position;
moving means for moving said closure member from said
closed position of preventing fluid flow to said open posi-
tion of permitting fluid flow, said moving means including
1. A rod and pipe pulling and pushing apparatus, comprising:
(a) an elongated frame having a front end and a back end;
(b) a carriage assembly moveably mounted to said frame;
174
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
(c) means for reversibly moving said carriage assembly
relative to said frame;
(d) means mounted on said carriage assembly, for gripping
said pipe, said pipe being movable in a longitudinal direc-
tion with respect to said frame; and
(e) means for guiding said pipe, said guide means including a
longitudinally yieldable front guide plate attached near
said front end, whereby said front guide plate yields
thereby signaling impact by a bore enlarging cup com-
monly attached to a pipe being pulled to allow stopping of
said moving means to prevent damage to said apparatus.
1. In an adjustable load bracing bar adapted to be supported
between spaced partitions, in combination, an elongated bar
having outer ends, said bar comprising first and second elon-
gated portions each having inner ends telescopingly intercon-
nected, a plurality of teeth defined on said first portion forming
a tooth track substantially parallel to the length of said first
portion, a lever support defined on said second portion adja-
cent the inner end thereof, a hand operated lever pivotally
mounted upon said lever support pivotal between retract,
engage and extend positions, a slot defined on said lever sup-
port extending parallel to said positions, a dog, a first pivot
pivotally mounting said dog upon said lever, said dog having a
second pivot slidably received within said slot, biasing means
mounted on said lever biasing said dog toward said tooth track,
said dog engaging said track at and between said lever engage
and extend positions, and partition engaging means defined"
upon said bar outer ends, pivoting of said lever from said
engage to said extend positions translating said second dog
pivot within said slot and translating said dog in a direction
telescopingly extending said first portion relative to said sec-
ond portion.
4,434^1
DRILLING RIG DRAWWORKS HOOK LOAD
OVERSPEED PREVENTING SYSTEM
Richard N. Cordrey, Raaclio Paloa Verdcs, Calif., assignor to
Armco Inc., Middlctown, Ohio
FUed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,561
Int a.3 B66D 1/48: E21B 19/00
VS. a. 254—273 21 Claims
1. In an oil drilling rig of the type having a traveling hook
block mounted for vertical movement and means for raising
and lowering said block, the improvement in combination
therewith comprising means for preventing runaway lowering
of said block including:
means producing a signal representative of the load carried
by said block;
means producing a signal representative of the vertical posi-
tion of said block;
brake means for slowing downward travel of said block; and
processor means including means for calculating from said
position signal a signal representative of the downward
speed of said block, and means utilizing said speed and
load signals to produce an electrical signal for insuring
safe stopping of block travel within the braking capability
of said brake means, said processor means including means
for continually calculating from said speed and load sig-
nals an energy value which must be dissipated during a
4,434,970
ADJUSTABLE LOAD BRAONG BAR
John D. Bolaad, Jackson, and Fred C. Kresky, Richland, both of
Mich., assignors to Aeroqoip Corporation, Jackson, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 255,650, Apr. 20, 1981, abandoned.
This application Mar. 7, 1983, Ser. No. 471,069
Int. a.3 B66F 1/04
VJS. a. 254—108 8 Qains
-[^ ass SL.
braking stop for that speed and load and means responsive
to said electrical signal for activating said brake means for
slowing downward travel of said block when the calcu-
lated energy value reaches a predetermined value repre-
sentative of the maximum energy absorbing capability of
said brake means.
4,434,972
HOISTING WINCH
Georges M. Charles, Saint Vallier, France, assignor to Potain
Poclain Materiel (P.P.M.), France
FUed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 309,111
Claims priority, appUcation France, Oct. 8, 1980, 80 21502
Int. a.J B66D 1/08. 1/22. 1/44
U.S. a. 254—340 2 Claims
1. A hoisting winch comprising:
a drum mounted for rotation in two directions on a drum
shaft for winding and unwinding a flexible cable on said
drum;
a high-torque, low-speed hoisting motor having a hoisting
shaft rotatable by said hoisting motor in two directions for
rotating said drum in said winding and said imwinding
directions;
a low-torque, high-speed compensation motor having a
compensation shaft rotatable by said compensation motor
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
175
in two directions for routing said drum in said winding
and said unwinding directions;
•n epicycloidal gear train including a ring gear mounted to
said drum in driving relation therewith, at least one planet
gear on a planet carrier mounted in driving relation to said
compensation shaft and a sun gear mounted in driving
relation to said hoisting shaft;
first uni-directional free wheel means mounted to said hoist-
ing shaft between said gear train and said hoisting motor
and including a first driving element mounted in driving
relation to said hoisting shaft and a first driven element for
driving by said first driving element only in the direction
of roution corresponding to the unwinding direction of
rotation of said drum;
first brake means selectively appliable for resKting rotation
of said first driven element by said first driving element;
second uni-directional free wheel means mounted to said
compensation shaft between said gear train and said com-
pensation motor and including a second driving element
mounted in driving relation to said compensation shaft
and a second driven element for driving by said second
driving element only in the direction of roution corre-
sponding to the winding direction of roution of said
drum; and
second brake means selectively appliable for resisting rou-
tion of said second driven element by said second driving
element.
provided within the case, between said motor and said
reduction gear, and being carried by a reinforced element
coaxially with the motor output shaft,
flanges extending upwardly from said case and presenting
openings for securing an anchoring pin, and
an upper handle rigid with said anchoring pin.
4,434,974
PNEUTMATIC HOIST BRAKE AND CONTROL
Kenneth H. LaCount, Grwn Bay, Wis., assignor to Cooper
Industries, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,239
Int. a.3 B66D 1/08. 3/20, 5/12. 5/26
U.S. a. 254-360 11 Claims
4,434,973
ELECTRIC HOIST
Andre Desplats, Boulogne BiUancourt, France, assignor to Trac*
tel, S.A., France
FUed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,363
Clainu priority, appUcation France, Oct. 9, 1980, 80 21593
Int. a.3 B66D 1/22. 1/12. 5/14
U.S. a. 254-344 5 Claims
1. An electric hoist comprising:
a case within which an electric motor is disposed, said motor
presenting an output shaft passing through said case,
a reduction gear providing a high speed reduction ratio with
a reduced overall axial length, which comprises:
a sun wheel carried by said motor output shaft,
a planet gears carrying cage disposed within an extension
of the case,
planet gears carried on bearings on said cage and meshing
with said sun wheel,
a fixed first annulus rigid with the case and coaxial with
the motor output shaft, said first annulus presenting
internal teeth meshing with said planet gears,
a second annulus coaxial with the motor output shaft,
meshing with said planet gears and of which the number
of teeth is slightly different from the tooth number of
said first annulus,
a wedging groove pulley for actuating a free-end traction or
hoisting wire rope, said pulley being disposed in a space
1. A pneumatic hoist comprising, in combination, a vane
motor having a pair of inlet ports and and output shaft, a speed
reduction mechanism driven by said output shaft of said vane
motor, and a chain engaging sprocket operably coupled to said
speed reducing mechanism, pneumatic brake means for selec-
tively inhibiting roution of said vane motor, said pneumatic
brake means including a planar brake disk secured for roution
with said output shaft, a friction surface disposed generally
parallel and adjacent said disk, means for biasing said brake
disk into contact with said friction surface, valve means for
controlling a flow of compressed air to said vane motor and
said pneumatic brake means, and port plate means for directing
compressed air to said vane motor and said brake means and
exhaust air from said vane motor, said port plate means having
a first pathway providing communication between said valve
means and one of said inlet ports, a second pathway providing
communication between said valve means and the other of said
inlet pons, a pair of check valves providing unidirectional flow
from a respective one of said first and said second pathways to
a third pathway providing communication between said check
valves and a region between said disk and said surface of said
pneumatic brake means, whereby activation of said controlling
means directs parallel flows of air to said vane motor to cause
roution thereof and to said pneumatic brake means to translate
said brake disk away from said surface.
4,434,975
ARMORED CATTLE GUARD
John W. Tompkins, P.O. Box 8186, Phoenix, Arix. 85066
FUad Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 428,938
Int. a.) AOIK 3/00
U.S. a. 256—17 7 Claims
1. A cattle guard comprising:
(a) a plurality of pre-cast longitudinally extending rails;
(b) a plurality of pre-cast concrete beams at longitudinally
spaced-apart locations and extending transversely be-
tween said rails thereby forming an integral pre-cut unit
of rails and beams;
176
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
(c) a meul cap extending longitudinally along the top sur-
face of one or more of said rails; and
(d) anchor means extending from said cap and embedded
within said rails to secure said cap in place, said beams and
rails being pre-cast in an inverted position in a mold with
said cap and anchor in first position in said mold.
4,434,976
CONCENTRIC MULTI-TUBE-SYSTEM NOZZLE
SITUATED BENEATH THE SURFACE OF THE MELT IN
A REHNING VESSEL
Shozo Murakami; Hiroyuki Aoki; Saburo Matouo; Eiji Ikezaki,
and Kei^i Yamaura, all of Kitakyushu, Japan, assignors to
Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 448,325
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 11, 1981, 56-199615
Int. a.J C21B 7/16
U.S. a. 266—268 6 Oaims
1. A concentric multi-tube-system nozzle situated beneath
the surface of the melt in a reflning vessel, comprising:
an inner tube;
an outer tube positioned concentrically with respect to the
inner tube and forming an annular clearance between the
inner tube and the outer tube;
spacers for circumferentially dividing the annular clearance;
and
a section deflned by two adjacent spacers, said section com-
prising a contraction portion which is positioned essen-
tially at the bottom of said section in the flow direction of
cooling gas which is introduced into the section.
4,434,977
STRUT TYPE SUSPENSION FOR A VEHICLE
Kazuo Chiba, Tokyo, and Iwao Nakamura, Yokohama, both of
Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Limited, Yoko-
hama, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 140,944, Apr. 16, 1980, abandoned.
This application Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,712
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 18, 1979, 54-48142
Int. a.J F16F im, 9/54
U.S. a. 267—33 8 Claims
1. A strut type suspension for a vehicle body, comprising:
a shock absorber having an outer casing;
said shock absorber having a piston rod extending from said
outer casing;
a lower spring seat fued to said outer casing;
an upper spring seat loosely and movably fitted about the
periphery of said piston rod above and facing said lower
spring seat;
a coil spring positioned between said upper and lower spring
seats and encircling said piston rod;
a bumper rubber fitted on said piston rod between the upper
end of said outer casing and the lower side of said upper
spring seat;
an upwardly opening cup-shaped first bracket fixed adjacent
its outer peripheral portion thereof to the vehicle body,
said first bracket positioned between said upper spring
seat and said vehicle body, said cup-shaped first bracket
having an aperture in its bottom through which said piston
rod extends;
a first insulator rubber positioned at least partially within and
generally between said cup-shaped first bracket and said
vehicle body, an upper end portion of said piston rod
including means for attaching said piston rod to said first
insulator rubber such that said piston rod is resiliently
supported relative to the vehicle body by said first insula-
tor rubber; and
a second insulator rubber generally spaced from and coaxial
with said piston rod and positioned between and in
contact with the lower side of said first bracket and the
upper side of said upper spring seat, said second insulator
rubber having a greater rigidity than that of said first
insulator rubber.
4,434,978
VISE
Kenneth D. Kloster, 6649 Millridge, Maumee, Ohio 43537
Continuation of Ser. No. 242,379, Mar. 10, 1981, abandoned.
This application Jun. 16, 1983, Ser. No. 504,083
Int. a.3 B25B 1/04
U.S. a. 269—69 7 Oaims
1. An apparatus for securely supporting a generally cylindri-
cal workpiece relative to a fixed support comprising:
a base member;
means for securing said base member to the fixed support;
clamps means rotatably mounted on said base member in-
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
177
eluding a pair of jaw members pivotally interconnected,
each of said jaw members including a pair of spaced apart,
generally parallel plates and means for maintaining said
plates in a generally parallel spaced apart relationship,
each of said plates having a workpiece engaging surface
thereon with said engaging surfaces of one of said jaw
members in facing relation to said engagirig surfaces of the
other one of said jaw members, each of said workpiece
engaging surfaces having a generally arcuate portion
interrupted at an intermediate area by a notched portion
extending generally radially outwardly from said arcuate
portion;
means for releasably securing said rotatable clamp means
relative to said base member to militate against any rela-
tive rotative movement therebetween; and
means mounted on said clamp means for effecting pivotal
movement of said jaw members relative to one another to
move said workpiece engaging surfaces toward and away
from one another whereby a workpiece positioned be-
tween said surfaces may be securely supported relative to
the fixed support.
4434 979
PRINTED GOODS REMOVAL APPARATUS
Ingo KSbler, Anhausen, and Hans-JUrgen Mische, Aupburg,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to M.A.N.-Roland
Druckmaschinen Aktiengesellschaft, Augsburg, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,234
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 7,
1981, 3108681
Int. O.} B65H 29/00
U.S. O. 271-307 11 Oaims
respect to thtf distribution wheel such that printed goods
(8) introduced in the space between said vanes or blades
first engage an abutment (6) of the abutment wheel (4) and
then, upon contmued rotation of the distribution wheel, as
well as continued roution of the abutment wheel at said
slower speed, the abutment wheel will push the printed
goods (8") out from between said space at the predeter-
mined distance (x) from preceding printed goods (8, 8') in
a preceding space for imbricated removal on the removal
means with said predetermined spacing (x).
4,434 980
BOXING DEVICE THAT HGHTS BACK
Bernard J. Babineaux, 139 A. B. Dugas Rd., Lafayette, La.
TUMItf
Filed Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 348,089
Int. O.^ A63B 69/34
U.S. O. 272-78 5 q^^
?^^\
1. Printed goods removal and staggered, imbricated distribu-
tion apparatus having
at least one distribution wheel (1, 1') having circumferen-
tially located distribution vanes or blades (9, 9'. 9", 9fl)
between which printed goods (8) to be distributed are
inserted, and
a rotating shaft (2) to which said at least one distribution
wheel (1, 1') is secured, and
comprising, in accordance with the invention,
at least one disc (3) secured in fixed position and located
eccentrically with respect to the shaft (2) of the distribu-
tion wheel to permit rotation of the shaft, and hence of the
distribution wheel with respect to at least one disc;
an abutment wheel (4) rotatable about the fixed disc (3) and
having abutment surfaces (6, 6', 6") on a circumference
thereof uniformly spaced from each other by a predeter-
mined distance (x);
means (5) rotating the abutment wheel (4) in the same direc-
tion as the distribution wheel (1, 1') and at a speed which
is slower than the speed of the distribution wheel; and
removal means (7, 15) operating at a linear speed corre-
six)nding to the circumferential speed of the abutments (6)
of the abutment wheel (4);
the eccentric position of the disc (3) being adjusted with
1. A boxing device, comprising:
a coupling suspendable from a substantially fixed supporting
structure;
a resilient boxing bag having on its surface an upper hook
suspended from the coupling and also having a lower
hook on its surface opposite the upper hook, the lower
hook being attachable to a substantially fixed lower sup-
porting structure; and
a pair of elongated, padded arms, each having a blunt, pad-
ded lower end and each arm being connected to the cou-
pling and hanging from the coupling adjacent opposite
sides of the boxing bag, so that each arm may move arcu-
ately forward in response to an impact force applied to the
boxing bag, each arm thereby thrusting its blunt, padded
lower end forward and upward towards a source of the
impact force.
4,434,981
CROSS COUNTRY SKIING SIMULATING EXERHSER
Desmond H. Norton, 1122 Patterson St., Ogden, Utah 84403
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,837
Int. O.^ A63B 69/18
U.S.O. 272-97 14 Oaims
1. An exercising apparatus adapted to simulate cross country
skiing, comprising:
a base member, the upwardly facing surface thereof being
generally planar;
a pair of foot supporting platforms each having rolling
means for support thereof upon the upward facing surface
of the base member;
means for guiding each of the foot platforms along generally
parallel paths upon said surface;
means for restraining the foot platforms to oppositely di-
rected reciprocatory movements;
a pair of simulated ski pole means;
means for guiding the lowermost end of each pole in recipro-
catory motion generally parallel to the motion of the foot
platforms; and
178
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
means for yiddably resisting motion of each one of the pair 4,434,983
of poles directed backwardly with respect to the user of GOLFER'S STANCE MAT
Frukiin K. Tagiart, P.O. Box 246, HydeflUe, Vt. 057S0
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430^11
Int a.3 A63B 69/36
VJS. a. 273—187 R 2 Claims
the apparatus, said means being functionally independent
of the motions of the foot platforms.
Ml. , » « > »
.. \T^\ ', p •. i \ :. I *^j lit.. ,T J^Wy^
• •H III
4,434,982
PUZZU^GAME UTILIZING MOVABLE DISCS TO
ATTAIN SPEOnED ARRANGEMENT
Beryl I. Bearint, 802 No. Delaware St.-No. 406, San Mateo,
Calif. 94401
Filed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 416,913
Int a.3 A63F 9/08
VS. CL 273—153 S 7 Claimi
1. A puzzle-game comprising a flat board;
first and second pluralities of parallel slots through said
board;
a first end of each of said parallel slots terminating in a
closed end in said board;
second ends of said slots terminating in a central common
connecting slot positioned across said parallel slots;
a plurality of movable spool-shaped discs having cylindrical
ends joined by smaller cylindrical connecting members;
said connecting members being disposed to move in said
slots;
said cylindrical ends being larger in diameter than the width
of said slots;
one of the cylinders of each of said discs being of one of five
different colors and having numbers I to S imprinted
thereon;
said central connecting slot terminating in a Y-shaped slot
termed a crib closed at its ends;
said parallel slots having an enlarged section at each end to
accommodate said connecting members of said discs and a
restricted section adjacent thereto to impede the motion of
said discs in said slots;
whereby starting from a predetermined relative position of
said discs in said slots a specified arrangement of said discs
may be attained in a given number of moves.
1. A golf teaching device for driving ranges and the like, said
device comprising in combination:
a rectangular base mat having front and rear edges generally
at right angles to the flight path of a golf ball to be driven
in conjunction therewith;
a tee bar mounted to the upper surface of the base mat and
including a base strip defming the swing path for the head
of a golf club being swung by a driver standing on said
base mat and generally facing the base strip;
said tee bar further including an integral center strip extend-
ing at right angles to said base strip and outwardly to one
side thereof from the center thereof generally parallel to
the front and rear edges of the base mat;
a first scale carried by said base strip for indicating specific
tee positions for tee placement on the base strip to the
right and left of the center strip;
said center strip including a second scale extending the
length of the same;
a feet placement guide adjustably mounted to the center
strip at a longitudinal position therealong to effect a
proper placement for the golfer's feet to opposite sides of
the center strip and bearing a third scale along an edge
thereof at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the center
strip;
a tee position instruction strip reversibiy face mounted to the
upper surface of said base mat positioned adjacent to said
base strip and to the side opposite the center strip and
bearing indicia on each face thereof representing the de-
sired proper tee positions for a set of golf clubs; and
wherein said center strip comprises a series of pin placement
holes, said feet placement guide comprises a triangular
planar member including a base edge remote from the base
strip of the tee bar and bearing indicia to the right and left
of a center line through the apex of the triangular planar
member along said base edge to identify golfer's foot
positions to the right and left of said center strip and
behind the base edge on said rectangular base mat, and
wherein said triangular planar member is detachably
mounted to the tee bar strip by means of aligned pins
projecting from the bottom surface for the foot placement
guide at the center thereof and receivable within given pin
placement holes formed within said center strip;
whereby, a golfer may readily take identical stance positions
from time to time by way of said scales and tee placement
positions for a given golf club, and wherein the assembly
may be utilized both by right handed and left handed
golfers by the simple expedient of assuming a position
either fore or aft on the mat and face reversal of the in-
struction strip whose iron and wood tee positions are
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
179
reversed relative to the base strip with respect to the
direction of flight of the golf ball.
tion of movement of saiOv^orrespgi/ding movement pieces
on said gameboard playingareaT^
4434 984
SAILBOAT RACE BOARD GAME APPARATUS
Carl D. Bergrtroffl, 506 Bread and Chceae Hollow Rd., Fort
Salonga, N.Y. 11768
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, S«r. No. 348,983
Int. a.» A63F 3/00
U.S. a. 273-246 UCMm
1. Sailboat race board game apparatus comprising:
a game board having a playing area on a major area of which
a plurality of movement spaces are designated, said major
area constituting a water area, said movement spaces
being arranged in a plurality of rows, the movement
spaces in each row being equally spaced from one another
by a certain distance, and wheren adjacent rows are
spaced from each other by one-half of said certain dis-
tance, and wherein the movement spaces of one row are
displaced with respect to the movement spaces of an
adjacent row by one-half of said certain distance, so that
the movement spaces in alternate rows are aligned with
each other to form a plurality of columns of said move-
ment spaces, the movement spaces in each column being
equally spaced from one another by said certain distance,
whereby each row of movement spaces defines an east-
west movement direction, each column of movement
spaces defines a north-south movemet direction, and said
rows and columns of movement spaces together define a
plurality of northwest-southeast movement directions and
a plurality of northeast-southwest movement directions,
said game board having a movement direction indicator
provided thereon, said movement direction indicator
defining eight areas for designatng, respectivly, northeriy,
southeriy, easteriy, westeriy, northwesteriy, northeast-
eriy, southwesteriy and southeasterly movement direc-
tions of a movement piece;
a plurality of movement pieces adapted to be moved over
said game board playing area on said movement spaces in
said movement directions, each of said movement pieces
being provided with distinguishing indicia;
means adapted to cooperate with said movement direction
indicator provided on said game board for indicating the
direction of movement of each of said plurality of move-
ment pieces; and
wherein said means for indicating the direction of movement
of each of said movement pieces are constituted by a
plurality of control markers, each of said control markers
being provided with indicia corresonding to said indicia
provided on a respective movement piece, said control
markers being selectively situatable on any one of said
movement direction indicator areas to designate the direc-
4,434,985
GASKET WITH METAL MOUNTING ARMATURE
ROTATING BETWEEN COAXIAL PARTS
Claude Sonnerat, Annecy>le<Vicux, France, aaalgnor to Societc
Nouvelle dc Roulements, Annccy, France
FUed May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,838
Clalnu priority, application France, May 13, 1981, 81 09476
Int. a.3 F16J 15/32. 15/34
UA a. 277-37 1 Qalm
— i
1. A gasket for sealing between two relatively routing parts,
comprising:
a first ring having an axis and being connected to one of said
rotating parts, said first ring having an L-shaped cross
section including a first radial leg and a first axial leg;
a second ring coaxial with said first ring and being connected
to the other of said rotating parts, said second ring having
an L-shaped cross section including a second radial leg
extending towards said first axial leg and a second axial leg
extending axially towards said first radial leg, said second
radial leg having a slanted distal end portion which devi-
ates from the radial direction toward said first radial leg,
said first and second rings enclosing a chamber;
a lining molded to the surface of said first ring which faces
said second ring;
a first watertight lip extending from said lining and into
contact with a first surface of said second axikl leg;
a second watertight lip extending from said lining and into
contact with a first surface of said second radial leg;
a third watertight lip extending from said lining and into
contact with said slanted end portion at a second opposing
surface of said second radial leg, whereby said third lip
retains said second ring relative to said first ring and
wherein said first, second and third lips, said lining and
said rings together define two isolated sub-chambers of
said chamber; and
a lubricant filling each of said sub^hambers.
4,434,986
SHAFT SEAL
Dale J. Warner, Paloa Helghti, Ul., aiaignor to Gits Brotben
Mfg. Co., Bedford Park, lU.
FUed Oct. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 433,838
Int. a.J F16J 15/34
U.S. a. 277—42 13 ciaima
1. A shaft seal for a roUUble shaft which extends through a
wall of a machine, said shaft seal comprising:
a hollow housing for receiving the shaft therethrough and
adapted for fluid-sealed connection to the machine wall,
including an inner surface and a ledge;
a drive sleeve for connection to and receiving the shaft
^
180
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
therethrough for rotation therewith in a fluid-sealed rela-
tionship within said housing;
a ring-shaped first seal member about and coupled to said
drive sleeve for rotation therewith and comprising first
and second radially-extending seal faces on axially oppo-
site sides thereof;
first sealing means for receiving the shaft therethrough, said
first sealing means being fluid sealed to. axially movable
within and fixed against rotation with respect to said
housing,
said first sealing means comprising a second seal member
including a radially-extending third seal face;
first bias means in said housing ledge urging said first sealing
means axially towards said ring-shaped seal member to
engage said first and third seal faces;
second sealing means receiving said drive sleeve there-
through, said second sealing means being fluid sealed to,
axially movable within and fixed against rotation with
respect to said housing, said second sealing means com-
prising a third seal member including a radially extending
fourth seal face; and
second bias means connected to said housing and fluid sealed
to said housing and to said second seal means, said second
bias means urging said second seal means axially towards
said ring-shaped first seal member to engage said second
and fourth seal faces,
said first sealing means comprising a first radially-extend-
ing surface, a second radially-extending surface, and an
annular surface and an O-ring bearing against said sec-
ond radially-extending surface and said annular surface,
and
said housing ledge comprising an annular surface bearing
against said O-ring and a radially-extending surface
bearing against said O-ring and sealing said first sealing
means to said housing.
4434 987
SHAFT SEAL WITH MAGNETICALLY CONTROLLED
GAP BETWEEN ROTATING RING AND SURROUNDING
NON.ROTATING RING
Rolf Albers, Oberhaiuen; Emil Aschenbnick, Duisburg; Giinter
Neuhaus, and Joachim Kotzur, both of Oberhausen, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to M.A.N. Maschinenfabrik
Augsburg-Niimberg Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jun. 21, 1983, Ser. No. 506,349
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 25,
1982, 3223744
Int. a.J F16J 15/54
VS. a. 277—80 7 Oaims
1. A seal device for a shaft routing with respect to a hous-
ing, comprising:
a rotating seal ring having opposite radially extending side
surfaces and a circumferentially extending end surface,
said rotating seal ring connected to the shaft for co-rota-
tion therewith;
a non-rotating seal ring non-rotatably associated with the
housing, surrounding at least a portion of said rotating seal
ring and defining a pair of radial plane sealing gaps with
said side surfaces of said rotating seal ring and a circumfer-
ential gap with said end surface of said rotating seal ring.
said non-rotating seal ring having a radially extending
portion with magnetically attractable material connected
thereto;
a packing element which is elastically yieldable in all direc-
tions, connected between said housing and said non-rotat-
ing seal ring for permitting relative motion therebetween
to vary a width of each gap;
sealing fluid means for supplying a sealing fluid to the gaps,
said sealing fluid means supplying sealing fluid over at
least one supply bore communicating with each radial
plane gap;
an electromagnet connected to the housing on a side of said
radially extending portion and adjacent said magnetically
attractable material for exerting a magnetic force on said
non-rotating seal ring through said magnetically attract-
able material;
a sensor connected to said non-rotating seal ring for sensing
a width of each radial plane gap; and
control means connected to each sensor and said electro-
magnet for activating said electromagnet in response to
each sensor for applying a selected magnetic force to
maintain a selected width for each radial plane gap.
4,434,988
SHAFT SEAL
Dale J. Warner, Palos Heights, III., assignor to Gits Brothers
Mfg. Co., Bedford Park, III.
Filed Oct. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 437,294
Int. a.3 FldJ 15/34
U.S. a. 277—81 R 11 Ctaims
1. In a shaft seal for a rotatable shaft which extends through
the end wall of a machine, of the type in which a drive sleeve
assembly is fixed to the shaft for roution therewith and fluid
sealed to the shaft, in which a ring seal assembly rotates against
a fixed seal ring and is urged thereagainst in a fluid sealed
manner via spring means between the drive sleeve assembly
and the ring seal assembly and by internal fluid pressure and is
thereby fluid sealed to the drive sleeve assembly, and in which
a drive coupling is provided between the drive sleeve assembly
and the ring seal assembly, the improvement comprising:
at least one drive lug fixed to the drive sleeve assembly and
extending parallel to the axis of roution of the shaft; and
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
181
at least one recess in the ring seal assembly receiving said at
least one drive lug for axial movement therein.
4,434,989
SEALING GASKET
Horst Beyer, Klaus Ltfnne, both of Burscheid, and Klaus-Peter
Mi^ewski, Odenthal-Erberich, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Goetie AG, Burscheid, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,514
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 22,
1981, 3101921
Int. a.J F16J 15/06
U.S. a. 277-235 B 9 Qaims
secured to said large outer diameter front part of said
chuck body and a rearward pari spaced radially from said
small outer diameter rear pari of said chuck body, said
chuck body and said cylinder body defining an annular
cylinder chamber therebetween around the outer surface
of said rear part of said chuck body;
an annular piston in said annular cylinder chamber and
having an axial piston sleeve integral with and extending
from the rear thereof and slidably and sealingly fitted
between the rearward part of said chuck body and said
cylinder body and projecting rearwardly of said cylinder
body;
power transmitting means operatively connecting saic^ pis-
ton to said jaws for operating said jaws in response to axial
movement of said piston; and
detection means provided at a position rearward of said
cylinder body for detecting axial displacement of the end
of said piston sleeve which is outside of said cylinder body
which is indirectly indicative of radial displacement of
said jaws.
1. In a flat sealing gasket having sealing faces on reverse
sides thereof; an opening defined in the sealing gasket; a cross-
sectionally generally U-shaped armor framing the opening;
said armor having legs straddling marginal edge zones of said
gasket defining said opening; each armor leg having an inner U.S. CI. 280—5 R
face in engagement with the gasket and an outer face oriented
away from said gasket; the improvement comprising a low-
friction coating provided on the outer face of at least one of
said armor legs; and wherein said sealing faces externally of
said armor are substantially free from said low-friction coating.
4,434,991
TANK CARRIER
Dean A. Winterton, R.R. 1, Paw Paw, III. 61353
Filed Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,306
Int. a.J B60P 3/22
22 Qaims
4,434,990
FLUID-ACTUATED HOLLOW POWER CHUCK
Takeo Kobayashi, Nagoya, Japan, assignor to Howa Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Nagoya, Japan
Filed Nov. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 322,251
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 26, 1980, 55-166131
Int. Q.5 B23B 31/30. 5/34
U.S. Q. 279—4 6 Qaims
37.131
28 28a 34 296
44
370
«a(4eb)4i 32
1. A fluid actuated type hollow power chuck comprising:
a chuck body having a central through bore therethrough of
uniform diameter and adapted to be mounted on a hollow
spindle of a machine tool, said chuck body having a large
outer diameter front pari facing away from the spindle
and a small outer diameter rear pari facing toward the
hollow spindle, and having means extending through said
front and rear paris for mounting the chuck body directly
on the spindle;
chuck jaws mounted on a radial face of the large outer
diameter front pari of said chuck body for radial move-
ment thereon;
a generally hollow cylinder body having a forward part
w
w
^
•<t/
ID n
It
it
1. A tank carrier including a wheel frame and a tank frame,
said tank frame being pivoully secured to said wheel frame, a
Unk for holding liquid agricultural material secured to said
tank frame, wherein:
(a) a first castor wheel and a second castor wheel are secured
to said wheel frame;
(b) said first castor wheel and said second castor wheel are
oppositely disposed;
(c) a pivot means for pivoully connecting said wheel frame
to said tank frame is situated between said first castor
wheel and said second castor wheel;
(d) said Unk frame has a pivot side connected to said wheel
frame below said wheel frame;
(e) said Unk frame has a tractor side oppositely disposed
from said pivot side; and
(0 said tractor side includes means for connecting said unk
carrier to a vehicle capable of pulling said Unk carrier.
4,434,992
TROLLEY FOR USE IN TRANSPORTING A BOAT
Anthony W. Beach-Thomas, Ross-on-Wye, England, assignor to
John Rhys Hughes, Surrey, England
FUed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256^31
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 28, 1980,
8038228
Int. Q.} B62B 1/26
U.S. Q. 280—47.13 B 3 Cldms
1. A trolley for use in transporiing a boat, comprising a body
element formed from a uniury block of resilient material
shaped to engage a pari of the boat at the bottom thereof, a
182
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
metal retaining element projecting from the block of resilient 4,4344MM
material and adapted for releasable engagement with said part BOOM AXLE
of the boat, so as to secure the trolley to the boat, a spindle JuUen H. Pepin, 460 Matthew St., Briitol, Conn. 06010
extending through the block of resilient material so as to PUed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,619
project from opposite sides thereof, and a pair of wheels rotat- Int. Q.' B62D 53/06
ably mounted on the spindle on opposite sides of the block of ^•®' ^' 280—404 n Oainu
resilient material, the block being T-shaped and having a hori-
zontal cross piece that overlies said wheels and a vertical stem
through which said spindle extends, said metal retaining ele-
ment being of inverted U-shape having two upright legs whose
upper ends are interconnected and whose lower ends are em-
bedded in opposite ends of said horizontal cross piece said
U-shaped element being disposed in a plane parallel to the axes
of said wheels.
1. Apparatus for providing support for an elongated crane
boom during over-terrain movement thereof, the boom being
attached at a first end to a vehicle, said apparatus comprising:
frame means, said frame means including a main body f>or-
tion and an extendable forward portion;
at least a first wheel set, said wheel set being mounted from
said frame means main body portion and including an axle,
said first wheel set further including means resiliently
coupling said axle to said frame means;
means affixed to said frame mean forward portion and defin-
ing a pivot axis which is parallel to and displaced from
said wheel set axle; and
means for detachably and rotatably coupling the boom to
said pivot axis defining means intermediate the length of
said boom whereby relative motion between a portion of
said boom and said axle may occur.
4,434,995
RETRIEVABLE BOAT TRAILER
4,434,993 Stanley A. Toy, 49 CyprcM Dr., Palm Hu-bor, Fla. 33563
ASSEMBLY FOR ATTACHMENT TO A VEHICLE FOR FUed Jul. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 400,897
PERFORMING A WORK OPERATION Int. Q.^ B60P 3/10
Stanley F. Curtis, Exeter, Calif., assignor to Pollution Controls U.S. G. 280—414.1 6 Claims
Industries, Inc., Tulare, Calif. m
FUed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,170
Int. a.3 B60P 3/12
U.S. a. 280—402
4Clalms
1. An assembly for adjusting the relationship of first and
second portions of a vehicle relative to each other for trans-
port, the first portion of the vehicle including a pair of ground
engaging wheels, the assembly comprising a main frame;
means mounted on the main frame for attachment to the first
portion of the vehicle at a first point of reference, said attach-
ment means including a pair of receptacles and members borne
by the main frame individually to receive the wheels of said
pair of wheels of the vehicle and being adjustable toward and
from each other laterally of the frame in opposite directions to
match the distance between said wheels, each member engage-
able with its respective wheel when received in the receptacle
to capture said wheel therein; a subframe borne by the main
frame extending to a second point of reference spaced from
said first point of reference; and means mounted on the frame
and extending to the second point of reference for engaging the
second portion of the vehicle between said points of reference
to adjust the first and second portions of the vehicle relative to
each other.
1. A boat trailer, comprising,
a frame portion of generally rectangular configuration,
said frame portion having wheel members rotatably
mounted thereto for transporting said frame portion,
said frame portion having a hitch means provided as a pari
thereof so that said frame poriion can be towed by a motor
driven vehicle,
a ramp means secured to said frame portion just forwardly of
said wheel members,
said ramp means having a leading edge,
said leading edge forming a feather edge with said frame
portion so that an obstacle will slide from said frame
portion onto said ramp means unobstructed by said feather
edge when said boat trailer is retrieved from a position
where its wheel members have fallen from a precipice,
said frame portion further comprising a pair of longitudi-
nally aligned, transversely interconnected side rail mem-
bers disposed in parallellism with one another,
and wherein said ramp means are mounted in depending
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
183
relation to said side rail members, in transverse alignment
to one another.
4434996
TOWING HTTCH CONSTRUCHON
Dean L. Wallace, 2899 Chaucer Dr., NE., North Canton, Stark
County, Ohio 44721
FUed Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,240
Int. a.J B60D 1/04. 1/06
U.S. a. 280-504 8 Ctaims
1. A hitch construction including:
(a) a1)ody having a mounting end an an outwardly project-
ing hook;
(b) a ball mounted on an extended end of the hook and
projecting upwardly therefrom;
(c) a closure latch pivotally mounted on the mounting end of
the body spaced from the ball; and
(d) lock means movably mounted on the closure latch and
engageable with the mounting end of the body for locking
the latch in a first closed position spaced above the ball a
distance sufficient to engage a hood of a hooded-type
coupler when mounted on the ball to prevent disengage-
ment of the hood from the ball, and alternately for locking
the latch in a second closed position against the ball to
prevent disengagement of a lunette coupler from the ball,
said lock means including first and second locking pawls
alternately engageable with a projection formed on the
body to lock the closure latch in the first and second
closed positions, respectively.
second leg, said first legs each being arranged to engage the
sole of said ski boot and said second legs projecting inwardly
toward each other; resilient means cooperable with said second
legs of said centering levers for yieldably urging pivotal move-
ment of each said centering lever in a first direction in which
said first leg thereon moves toward said ski boot; and a sole
hold-down supported on a generally vertical bolt; the im-
provement comprising: means supporting said bolt for substan-
tially vertical movement with respect to said support member;
stop means for limiting upward movement of said bolt relative
to said support member; and a compensating lever which is
supported on said support member for pivotal movement about
a generally horizontal axis and is operatively coupled to said
bolt; said compensating lever being respectively pivoted in
second and third directions in response to upward and down-
ward movement of said bolt and being operatively coupled to
said second leg of each said centering lever; upward movement
of said sole hold-down and said bolt pivoting said compensat-
ing lever in said second direction and said compensating lever
thereby pivoting said centering levers in a fourth direction
opposite said first direction against the urging of said resilient
means so that said first legs of said centering levers move away
from said ski boot; wherein said stop means includes said sup-
port member having a support plate with an opening there-
through, said bolt extending through said opening; and
wherein said stop means includes a disk which is supported on
said bolt below said support plate and has a diameter which is
larger than said opening which is provided in said support
plate.
4,434,998
REAR AXLE FOR VEHICLES ESPEQALLY MOTOR
VEHICLES
Helmut Kaltwasscr, EltyUlc, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
General Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 253.030
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 26.
1980,3016248
Int. G.} B60G 11/20
U.S. G. 280-721 4 Claims
4,434,997
SKI BINDING JAW
Theodor Nitschko, Vienna, Austria, assignor to TMC Corpora-
tion, Baar, Switaerland
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,766
Claims priority, appUcation Amtria, Jul. 24, 1980, 3822/80
Int G.3 A63C 9/08
U.S. G. 280—625 g Claims
1. In a safety ski binding jaw which can releasably secure a
ski boot on a ski and includes: a support member; two centering
levers which are respectively supported on said support mem-
ber for pivotal movement about generally vertical first and
second axes, said first and second axes being spaced from each
other and each said centering lever having a first leg and a
1. Rear wheel suspension for automotive vehicles of the type
including a pair of longitudinal control arms pivoted at their
foward ends on the vehicle body and rotaubly mounting
adjacent their rearward ends the respective vehicle wheels,
and a transverse member adapted for connection at each end
thereof to a respective control arm intermediate the ends of the
latter in a substantially rigid fashion in the vehicle end view
whereby such member controls wheel camber, the improve-
ment which comprises constructing said transverse member
with straight end portions and a midportion offset longitudi-
nally of the vehicle body from the transverse plane through the
points of connection between said member and the control
arms, the axis of each end portion of said member being ori-
ented at said points of connection with the respective control
arm at an oblique angle, and means connecting each end of said
member with a respective control arm for relative rotation on
said axes.
184
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,434,999 4,435,001
LEG PROTECTOR OF AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLE ENVELOPE ASSEMBLY
Yof himi Sato, Yokohaina, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor Co., Larry E. Mills, Lynchburg, and Thomas D. Dove, Cincinnati,
Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan both of Ohio, assignors to American Standard Inc., New York,
FUed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,121 N.Y.
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 12, 1980, 55- Filed Mar. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 357,378
12998«[U]; Sep. 19, 1980, 55-133502[U]
Int. a.3 B60R 21/02
U.S. a. 280—752
23 0ainis
23. A driver and passenger leg protector for use in an auto-
motive vehicle having a steering column, comprising:
(a) first and second side plate members securely connected
to a vehicle body and located between a steering column
and legs of a driver, said first and second side plate mem-
bers being in lateral alignment with and spaced apart from
each other;
(b) a central plate member located facing the steering col-
umn and disposed contacting said first ans second side
plate members, said central plate member having lateral
side edges engaging corresponding inner edges of the first
and second plates, said central plate being a rigid member;
and
(c) means for fastening the side edges of said central plate
member to the inner edges of each said first and second
side plate member.
4,435,000
SEATBELT TIGHTENING DEVICE
Masakazu Chiba, and Fumio Matsuoka, both of Susono, Japan,
assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota,
Japan
Filed Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,714
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 31, 1981, 56-
129422[U]
Int. a.3 B60R 21/10
U.S. a. 280— 806 6aainis
•fe
°i '"
=^— — Wr'2
XB
1. A seatbelt tightening device for tightening a seatbelt and
removing a sag therefrom in a collision of a motor vehicle,
characterized by a rod connected thereto with one end of a
seatbelt, a spring for bi\sing said rod in a direction of tighten-
ing said seatbelt, a locking wire for drawing and restraining
said rod or spring to a stand-by position against the biasing
force of said spring, and means including an electric power
source and a collision sensor, for heating and fusion-cutting
said locking wire by a current passage from said power source
when said collision sensor is turned "ON".
Int. a.' B41L 1/00, 1/04; B42B 5/00
U.S. a. 282—11.5 A 7 Qalms
1. An envelope assembly comprising:
an outside envelope including a rear ply and a front ply and
each ply having a body poriion and detachable inner and
outer marginal edge portions;
the inner edge poriion including a first pari and a second
pari, the second pari being between the first and the body
poriion of the outside envelope;
said rear and front plies of said outside envelope being inter-
connected along a line adjacent substantially the entire
peripheral edge thereof;
a first line of weakening between the first part and . the
second part of the inner marginal edge poriion of each ply
of the outside envelope;
a second line of weakening between the second pari and the
body poriion of the inner peripheral edge poriion of each
ply of the outside envelope;
a third line of weakening between the outer marginal edge
poriion and the body poriion of each ply of the outer
envelope;
a section of the line interconnection being located on the
second part of the inner marginal edge poriion so that
detachment of the second pari will open one end of the
outside envelope to permit access to the interior thereof;
a return envelope smaller than the outside envelope enabling
it to be positioned in the outside envelope and including a
back ply and a forward ply each having a body poriion
and said forward ply having detachable inner and outer
marginal edge poriion and said back ply having an inner
marginal edge poriion;
said back and forward plies of said return envelope being
interconnected along a line adjacent the peripheral edge
thereof and interrupted at the outer edge to provide an
access opening;
the outer marginal edge poriion of the forward ply including
a first pari, a second pari and a third pari, the second pari
being between the first pari and the third pari of the
forward ply, the third pari being between the second pari
and the body;
a fourih line of weakening between the inner edge poriion of
the back ply and the forward ply and the body poriion of
the back and forward plies;
a fifth line of weakening between the first and second paris
of the outer marginal edge of the forward ply of the return
envelope;
a sixth line of weakening between the second pari of the
outer marginal edge poriion of the forward ply and the
third poriion of the forward ply;
a seventh line of weakening between the third pari of the
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
18S
outer marginal edge portion of the forward ply and the
body portion of the forward ply;
the outer marginal edge portion of the forward ply being
held to the outside envelope at the line of interconnection
between the rear and front plies of the outside envelope
adjacent the outer edge of the outside envelope;
the third part of the outer marginal edge portion of the
forward ply adapted to be bent around the seventh line of
weakening into overiying position with respect to the
back ply and attachment means for fastening the folded
third part to the back ply;
an information ply smaller than the outside envelope and
having a body portion and an inner marginal edge portion
connected to the return envelope at the line of intercon-
nection between the inner marginal edge portion of the
rear ply and the inner marginal edge portion of the front
ply of the outside envelope;
the information ply having an outer marginal edge portion
connected to the return envelope at a line of interconnec-
tion on the outer marginal edge portion of the forward
ply;
the interconnected outside envelope, return envelope and
information ply being maintained in registration during
formation including placing of indicia thereon;
an eighth line of weakening between the inner marginal edge
portion and the body portion of the information ply;
a ninth line of weakening between the outer marginal edge
portion and the body portion of the information ply;
the fifth line of weakening weaker than the sixth, seventh
and ninth lines of weakening; and
detachment of inner marginal edge portions of the rear and
front plies of the outside envelope, the inner marginal
edge portions of the back and forward plies of the return
envelope, and the inner marginal edge portion of the
information ply along the second, fourth and eighth lines
of weakening provides access to the interior of the outside
envelope through the inner end thereof permitting the
return envelope and attached information ply to be with-
drawn through the open inner end of the outside envelope
by deUchment along the fifth line of weakening, and
separation of the information ply from the return envelope
is accomplished by removing the outer marginal edge
portion of the information ply and the second part of the
outer marginal edge portion of the forward ply of the
return envelope along the sixth and ninth lines of weaken-
ing which also enables the third part of the outer marginal
edge portion to be bent about the seventh line of weaken-
ing to close the return envelope.
(C2H5)2N-/ \-CH-/ \-N(CjH5)2
?
N
!
/ \
R R'
wherein R and R' are alkyl groups of 1 to 4 carbon atoms
which forms a colored marking when brought into contact
with an electron acceptor, and a material normally insulating
said color reactant compound in said coating to prevent
contact with said absorbent sheet but being rupturable upon
the application of localized pressure on said transfer sheet
whereby said color reactant material is released and contacts
said absorbent sheet; said absorbent sheet having a coating on
one surface thereof in contact with said transfer sheet, said
coating containing an said electron acceptor.
4,435,003
CHROMOGENIC QUINAZOLINES
Ian J. Fletcher, Magdcn, Switierland, assignor to Ciba-Gcigy
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 227,294, Jan. 22, 1981. This application S«p.
22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,205
Oaims priority, application Switierland, Jan. 31, 1980,
780/80; Jul. 15, 1980, 5411/80
Int. a.3 B41M 5/16. 5/18. 5/22
U.S. a. 282-27.5 6 Claims
1. A Vcssure-sensitive or heat-sensitive recording sheet
material which contains in its color retictive system, as color
former, a quinazoline of the formula
K
4,435,002
OXIME ETTHERS OF
4,4'-BIS(N,N-DIETHYLAMINO)BENZHYDROL AND
PRESSURE-SENSITIVE RECORDING SYSTEMS
CONTAINING THEM
Frank F. Cesark, and Daniel W. Thomu, both of Bridgewater,
N.J., assignors to American Cyanamid Company, Sumford,
Conn.
DivUion of Ser. No. 297,802, Aug. 31, 1982, Pat. No. 4,351,956.
This application Jun. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 386,561
Int. a.) B41M 5/22
U.S. a. 282—27.5 5 Qalms
1. In a pressure-sensitive transfer copy set comprising a
transfer sheet superimposed on an absorbent sheet, the transfer
sheet having a coating on one surface thereof in contact with
absorbent sheet, said coating comprising a aolor reactant com-
pound represented by the formula:
wherein Z is hydrogen. Ri, — ORT, — SRT or — NR2R3; Ri'
but not R| is halo-C2-C6-alkyl or each of Rf and Ri is Cl-Cl2•
alkyl, cyano-Ci-Ci2-alkyl, lower alkoxy-C|-Ci2-alkyl, cyclo-
pentyl, cyclohexyl, phenyl, halophenyl. nitrophenyl,
cyanophenyl, lower alkylphenyl, lower alkoxyphenyl, lower
alkoxycarbonylphenyl, lower alkylcarbonyllphenyl, diphenyl,
halodiphenyl, nitrodiphenyl, cyanodiphenyl, lower alkyl-
diphenyl, lower alkoxydiphenyl, lower alkoxycarbonyldiphe-
nyl, lower alkylcarbonyldiphenyl, naphthyl, halonaphthyl,
nitronaphthyl, cyanonaphthyl, lower alkylnaphthyl, lower
alkoxynaphthyl, lower alkoxycarbonylnaphthyl, lower alkyl-
carbonylnaphthyl, benzyl, halobenzyl, nitrobenzyl, cyanoben-
zyl, lower alkylbenzyl, lower alkoxybenzyl, lower alkoxycar-
bonylbenzyl, lower alkylcarbonylbenzyl. phenylethyl, halo-
phenylethyl, nitrophenylethyl, cyanophenylethyl, lower alkyl-
phenylethyl, loweer alkoxyphenylethyl, lower alkoxy car-
bonylphenylethyl, lower alkylcarbonylphenylethyl, thienyl,
halothienyl, cyanothienyl, nitrothienyl, lower alkylthienyl,
lower alkoxythienyl, lower alkoxycarbonylthienyl, furyl,
halofuryl, cyanofuryl, nitrofuryl, lower alkylfuryl, lower al-
koxyfuryl, lower alkoxycarbonylfuryl, pyrrolyi, haiopyrrolyl,
cyanopyrrolyl, nitropyrrolyl, lower alkylpyrrolyl, lower al-
koxypyrrolyl, lower alkoxycarbonylpyrrolyl, pyrazolyl,
halopyrazoiyl, cyanopyrazolyl. nitropyrazolyl, lower alkyl-
pyrazolyl, lower alkoxypyrazolyl, lower alkoxycarbionyl-
. 1040 O.G.— 7
186
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
pyrazolyl, imidazolyl, haloimidazolyl, cyanoimidazolyl, ni-
troimidazoiyl, lower alkylimidazolyl, lower alkoxyimidazolyl,
lower alkoxycarbonylimidazolyl, pyridyl, halopyridyl,
cyanopyridyl, nitropyridyl, lower alkylpyridyl, lower alkox-
ypyridyl or lower alkoxycarbonylpyridyl; R2 is formyl, lower
alkylcarbonyl, lower alkylsulfonyl, benzoyl or phenylsulfonyl
or each of R2, R3. Xi and X2 independently is hydrogen,
C|-Ci2-alkyl. halo-Ci-Ci2-alkyl. hydroxy-Ci-Ci2-alkyl,
cyano-C|-Ci2-alkyl, lower alkoxy-C|-Ci2-alkyl, cyclohexyl,
phenyl, halophenyl, nitrophenyl, cyanophenyl, lower alkyl-
phenyl, lower alkoxyphenyl, lower alkoxycarbonylphenyl,
benzyl, halobenzyl, nitrobenzyl, cyanobenzyl, lower alkylben-
zyl, lower alkoxybenzyl, lower alkoxycarbonylbenzyl, or
— NR2R3 and — NX 1X2 independently is pyrrolidino, piperi-
dino, pipecolino, morpholino, thiomorpholino or piperazino;
X3 is hydrogen, halogen, nitro, lower alkyl or lower alkoxy;
and ring A is unsubstituted or substituted by cyano, nitro,
halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or lower alkoxycarbonyl.
4,435,004
RECORD MATERIAL CARRYING A COLOR
DEVELOPER COMPOSITION
Kenneth J. Shanton, Beaconsfleld, England, assignor to The
Wiggins Teape Group Limited, Hampshire, England
Division of Ser. No. 272,719, Jan. 11, 1981, Pat. No. 431,850.
This applicaHon Apr. 1, 1983, Ser. No. 481,472
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 13, 1980,
8019369
Int. aJ B41M 5/16. 5/18, 5/22
II.S. a. 282—27.5 4 Claims
1. Record material carrying a colour developer composition
comprising a particulate amorphous hydrated silica/hydrated
alumina composite in which the hydrated silica and hydrated
alumina are chemically bound in which hydrated silica pre-
dominates, and in which the mean alumina content of the
composite on a dried weight basis is at least 7.5%, based on the
total dry weight of silica and alumina wherein the hydrated
alumina is proportionately greater in the surface region of the
composite and wherein the surface area of the composite is less
than 300 m2g-i.
4,435,005
JOINT FOR CONDUIT WITH SINGLE THREADED END
Sidney Berger, Great Neck; Salvatore Buda, East Hills, and
Burton Weintraub, Old Bethpage,, all of N.Y., assignors to
Berger Industries, Inc., Maspeth, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 612,030, Sep. 10, 1975, •
abandoned, and Ser. No. 559,019, Mar. 17, 1975, Pat. No.
3,984,130. This application May 28, 1980, Ser. No. 153,893
The portioAf the term of this patent subsequent to Oct 5, 1993,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.^F16L77/0i
U.S. CL 285—31 16 Claims
1. In combination, first and second two-ended metal conduit
sections of 10 foot or 20 foot lengths and of weights and diame-
ters ranging from 23.0 lbs. per section to S33.S lbs. per section
and from 2" to 8". and adapted to be connected end-to-end to
each other in the field:
(a) said first conduit section having a circular cylindrical
outer wall surface and an axial passage of constant cross-
sectional dimensions and configuration, one end of said
first conduit section having external thread means thereon
and a flat substantially perpendicular end face and said
other end of said first conduit section being non-threaded
and having a flat substantially perpendicular end face;
(b) said second conduit section being identical to said first
conduit section and having a circular cylindrical outer
wall surface equal in diameter to said outer wall surface of
said first conduit section and an axial passage of constant
cross-sectional dimensions and configurations equal to
said axial passage through said first conduit section, one
end of said second conduit section having external thread
means thereon with a flat substantially perpendicular end
face matching and abutting said adjacent flat substantially
perpendicular end face of said other non-threaded end of
said first conduit section and said other end of said second
conduit section being non-threaded and having a flat
substantially perpendicular end face;
(c) a metal coupling sleeve having an end face, said coupling
sleeve including female thread means extending from
adjacent said end face and constructed and dimensioned to
engage said external thread means on said one end of said
conduit section;
(d) each of said conduit sections including in one piece
therewith a length of reduced outside diameter extending
axially inwardly from said flat substantially perpendicular
end face at said other end of said conduit section to form
a stop shoulder in said outer wall surface at said non-
threaded end said shoulder being substantially perpendic-
ular to the length of the conduit section;
(e) each of said conduit sections having means providing an
annular lock ring groove in said outer wall surface near
and spaced axially inwardly from said stop shoulder;
(0 resilient constrictable lock ring means of spring metal
partly in said annular lock ring groove and projecting
partially out of said groove; and
(g) abutment means extending radially inwardly on said
metal coupling sleeve to define a periphery spaced from
the outer diameter of the associated conduit section by a
slight clearance adapted to cooperate with said stop shoul-
der and said projecting part of said lock ring means to
permit free rotation of said coupling sleeve on said first
conduit section and limited axially inward and axially
outward movement of said coupling sleeve along said
non-threaded end of said first conduit section so that said
coupling sleeve can be threaded onto said externally
threaded end of said second conduit section so as to force
said end faces of said first and second conduit sections
together without rotation of either section and may be
backed off said externally threaded end of said second
conduit section after said first and second conduit sections
are assembled whereby said end face of said coupling
sleeve is at least flush with said flat substantially perpen-
dicular end face of said first conduit section to permit said
first conduit section to be laterally displaced from said
second conduit section without longitudinal movement of
either conduit section, said abutment means and said lock
ring means being constructed to prevent said lock ring
means from being forced inwardly entirely into said annu-
lar lock ring groove when said end faces of said first and
second conduit sections are forced together;
(h) the clearance between said periphery defined by said
abutment means and the outer diameter of the associated
conduit section, being in the order of 0.020" to 0.040" on
the diameter sufficient to prevent sections connected by
the metal coupling sleeve to be slightly out of axial align-
ment up to about J* without interfering with the engage-
ment between the female^ thread means and the coupling
sleeve of the internal thread means engageable thereby
with one end of a conduit section.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
187
4,435,006
AUTOMATIC PRESSURIZED CONNECHNG DEVICE
Katsumi Ishigaki; Kazuo Sasaki, and Takumi Fukumura, all of
Osaka, Japan, assignors to Kabushiki KaUha Yamamoto
Suiatsu Kogyosho, Osaka, Japan
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,779
Claims priority, application Japan, May 12, 1980, 55-
65268[U]; May 27. 1980, 55-71224
Int. a.3 F16L 55/00
U.S. a. 285—119 4 Qaims
1. An automatic pressurized connecting device comprising:
a main frame with wheels adapted to run on rails;
a roury shaft fitted in said main frame;
a first bracket mounted on said rotary shaft;
a body rockably coupled to said first bracket for balancing
weights of front and rear parts of said bracket;
a main shaft inserted into a central portion of said body;
a high pressure water supplying rotary universal joint cou-
pled to a front end portion of said main shaft;
a seal plug adapted to be screwed into a test pipe coupled to
a front end portion of said high pressure water supplying
rotary universal joint;
a motor mounted on a second bracket secured to said body,
said motor being coupled through a coupling to a rear end
portion of said main shaft;
said body having a high pressure water supplying port com-
municating with a water supplying port formed in a front
portion of said main shaft;
a third bracket and at least a pair of fourth brackets mounted
on said main frame, said third bracket being secured to a
support holding said rotary universal joint; and
supporting cylinders secured to said fourth brackets and to
said support.
4,435,007
LOCKING DEVICE FOR PIVOTING WINDOW
Jacques Bascou, Boulogne-Billancourt, France, aMignor to
Regie Nationale des Usines Renault, Boulogne-Billancourt,
France
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,735
Qaims priority, application France, May 8, 1980, 80 10260
Int. a.3 E05C 17/12
U.S. a. 292—268 8 Qaims
a strap fixed to said window; PI a static body connected to
said motor vehicle;
an embeddable link; and
means for slidably and pivoubly interconnecting said link to
said strap and said static body, wherein the sutic body
includes a curvilinear ramp portion and a locking groove
portion formed therein and wherein the link further com-
prises a cross rib engageable with said curvilinear ramp
and said locking groove.
4,435,008
POLICE GRIPPER
William R. Black, Rte. 2, Halderson Rd., Bangor, Wis. 54614
Filed May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 383,000
Int. a? A47G 35/00
U.S. a. 294—25 2 Gaims
1. A device for improving the grip of a law enforcement
officer to facilitate the handling of captives comprising a flexi-
ble strap which conforms to the hand of the officer, said strap
having a loop at one end thereof to be received by the finger of
the officer to anchor one end of said strap and a gripping
portion containing a plurality of spaced gripping elements and
a wrist band portion adapted to be trained around the wrist of
the officer, and means for coupling tjie wrist band portion to
said grip portion when said portions intersect over the palm of
said user to secure the device in the officer's hand with the grip
portion juxtaposed over the palm of the officer's hand, and the
gripping elements projecting outwardly from the palm and
with the gripping elements exposed for engagement and
wherein said gripping elements comprise snap fasteners having
protruding male members on one side of said strap and exposed
female members on the opposite side of said strap, with said
male members forming the gripping elements and the female
counterparis of said male members joinable at said intersection
with the protruding male members on said wrist band portion
when said wrist portion and said grip portion are in intersect-
ing and in overiapping relation on the palm of the user to form
a strap loop around the wrist of the user to hold the strap in
place.
1. A device for locking a pivoting window of a motor vehi-
cle in closed or ajar positions, comprising:
4,435,009
SUN VISORS OF THE TYPE HAVING A CELL
STRUCTURE PARTICULARLY FOR AUTOMOBILE
VEHICLES
Giovanni Foggini, Turin, Italy, assignor to Lear Sjix. di Foggini
A C, Orbassano, Italy
Filed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,816
Qaims priority, application Italy, Jan. 27, 1981, 67098 A/81
Int. G.^ B60J 3/00
U.S. G. 296—97 H 6 Claims
1. A sun visor of the type having a plate-like member made
at least in part of a channel-like cell structure, particularly for
motor vehicles, comprising a suspension and pivot rod for the
plate-like member and driven into one of the channel-like cells
of said structure, characterized in that said plate-like member
has a load bearing portion and a movable portion resiliently
yieldable with respect to said load bearing portion, said suspen-
188
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
sion and pivot rod having at least one length thereof having an
eccentric crank-like configuration in engagement with said
movable portion, said movable portion and said load bearing
portion of the plate-like member being devided along bound-
ary lines allowing relative movement between said movable
portion and said load bearing portion.
4,435,011
SEAT WITH A DUAL-ADJUSTABLE ARMREST
Hitoshi Hakamata, Yokohama, Japan, aisignor to Niisan Motor
Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,168
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 26, 1981, 56-44477
Int. a.3 A47C 7/54
VS. a. 297—113 8 Claims
4,435,010
OVERHEAD ACCESS ASSEMBLY
Richard M. Mandel, 606 Glencoe Rd., Glencoe, III. 60022
Filed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,520
Int. a.3 B60P 7/02
VJS. a. 296—100 23 Claims
1. In a load carrying vehicle having a freight compartment
formed cooperatively by a floor, laterally spaced sidewalls,
opposed endwalls, and a-^oof member, the improvement com-
prising: ^
a framed opening in the roof member through which access
may be gained to said compartment to accomplish loading
and unloading of freight;
a plurality of hinged door panels for sealing said framed
opening, each said door panel being selectively pivotable
between an ojjen and closed position;
at least one cross-brace spanning the framed opening and
serving as a seat for said door panels, said cross-brace
being hingedly secured adjacent one edge to said roof
member so as to be pivotable substantially away from said
roof opening; and
means for rigidly tying the ends of said cross-brace with said
roof member, said means preventing shifting of the ends of
the cross-brace relative to the roof member such that the
cross-brace positively maintains the dimension of the roof
opening as well as provides overall stability to the freight
compartment;
said door panels and cross-brace being selectively pivotable
away from the opening to create a desired opening size
and to gain access to different regions of the freight com-
partment.
1. A seat having an arm rest and a seat back, comprising:
(a) a first member fixedly attached to said seatback, said first
member having a first stopper and a second stopper verti-
cally spaced from said first stopper;
(b) a second member rotatably supported at an upper end
thereof by said first member, said second member being
rotatably connected at the lower end thereof with said
arm rest;
(c) a projection protruding from said arm rest and being
engaged with said first stopper when said arm rest is tilted
to a first set position, said projection being engaged with
said second stopper when said arm rest is placed in a
second set position while said second member is rotated,
said second set position being vertically spaced from being
said first set position.
4,435,012
SEAT ASSEMBLY FOR BABY CARRIAGES
Kenzou Kassai, Osaka, Japan, assignor to Kassai Kabushikikai-
sha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,447
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 2, 1980, 55-170452
Int. a.3 B60N 1/02
U.S. a. 297—355 5 aaims
1. A seat assembly for baby carriages comprising:
a seat,
a backrest foldably connected to rear end edge of said seat
and constructed with a hard core material incorporated
therein,
a hed guard holdably connected to the upper end edge of
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
189
said backrest and constructed with a hard core material
incorporated therein,
a pair of backrest retaining members whose angle of inclina-
tion with a fixed member of the baby carriage main body
can be changed,
angle fixing means for fixing changed angles of inclination of
said backrest retaining members at a plurality of adjusted
positions,
foldable lateral surface portions which, in cooperation with
said head guard, define the lateral surfaces of a bag with
the bottom surface thereof defined by said backrest, said
lateral surface portions being connected to said backrest
retaining members and formed of a foldable sheet mate-
rial,
a head guard retaining member extending widthwise and
serving to connect the upper end of said head guard above
said backrest retaining members,
a seat shaping member including a portion extending in a
U-shape, rotatably supported with respect to said backrest
retaining members at opposite end of the U-shaped por-
tion, with the widthwise extending portion of the U-
shaped portion abutting against the back surface of said
backrest, and
operative connecting means operatively connected to said
seat shaping member to change the attitude of the seat
^haping member in operative association with changes in
the angle of inclination of said backrest retaining mem-
bers, whereby when said backrest retaining members are
in their raised state, the widthwise extending portion of
said seat shaping member is brought into abutment against
the back surface of said backrest to align said backrest and
said head guard substantially in a plane while involving
the folding of said foldable lateral surface portions and
when said backrest retaining members are in their rela-
tively lowered state, the widthwise extending portion of
said seat shaping member is displaced to be positioned on
the back surface of the backrest forming the bottom of
said bag in such a manner as to form said bag, with said
foldable lateral surface portions being stretched, with said
backrest and said head guard crossing each other and with
said backrest forming the bottom and said head guard and
said foldable lateral surface portions forming the lateral
surfaces of said bag.
4,435,013
RECLINER-BACK TILTING MECHANISM
Takumi Arihara, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Ikeda Bussan
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,281
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 21, 1980, 55-84239
Int. a.3 A47C 1/026
U.S. a. 297—364 14 Oaims
29A ,7
1. A mechanism for a recliner, comprising:
(A) a base plate secured to a seat of the recliner;
(B) an arm with one end pivotally mounted on said base
plate and another end affixed to the recliner, said arm
having a substantially circular opening concentric with
the pivotal center of the arm;
(C) a first set of teeth formed along a section of said opening;
(D) a second set of teeth formed along a section of said
opening substantially opposite said first set of teeth and
substantially identical in pitch;
(E) a first reuining member having a first set of outer teeth
adapted to be forced toward said first set of teeth (C) to be
in mesh with said first set of teeth (C);
(F) a second retaining member having a second set of outer
teeth for engaging at least a portion of said second set of
teeth (D) to secure said arm (B) at a desired position; and
(G) means for moving said sedbnd retaining member (E) to
engage said respective second sets of teeth to prevent
angular movement of said arm (B), and to release engage-
ment between said respective second sets of teeth to per-
mit angular movement of said arm (B), at least a portion of
said means disposed within said substantially circular
opening in said arm (B);
said first and second retaining members (E) and (F) disposed
in said substantially circular opening and adjustably sup-
ported in a plane including said opening; and
said first retaining member (E) adjustably supported in a
plane including said opening with said first respective sets
of teeth remaining slidingly meshed, even when said sec-
ond respective sets of teeth are disengaged, allowing said
arm (B) to pivot.
4,435,014
ELASTIC INSERT FOR SEATS, IN PARTICULAR FOR
MOTOR VEHICLE SEATS
Enrico Gilardi, Robbio, Italy, assignor to Gestioni Riunite
Toscana Gomma S.p.A., Robbio, Italy
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,081
Oaims priority, application Italy, Jul. 18, 1980, 23561 A/80
Int. 0.3 A47C 7/02
U.S. O. 297-452 12 Oaims
1. A flexible insert for cushions of seats, the seats having a
support frame, the insert comprising:
a flexible plate (12) having an aperture (14) therein; a cross-
bar (18) located at one end of said flexible plate and having
an insertion slot (20,30) therein; and an elastic annular
element (22) connected to said cross-bar of said flexible
plate.
4,435,015
UNDERBODY CUSHIONING AND VENTILATING
STRUCTURE AND GENERAL UTILITY FORMED
PLASTIC SHEET
Helen H. Trotman, and Herbert H. Trotman, both of P.O. Box
807, Virginia Beach, Va. 23451
Continu^on-in-part of Ser. No. 138,929, Apr. 10, 1980,
abandoned] TUs appUcation Aug. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 181,466
' Int. a.3 A47C 7/02
U.S. O. 297—453 9 Claims
1. Underbody cushioning and ventilating structure compris-
ing
a resilient first sheet member originally of uniform thickness
throughout having an outside surface and an inside sur-
face,
a foraminous second sheet member having an outside surface
and an inside surface,
means attaching the marginal portions of the first and second
sheet members to one another with their inside surfaces
190
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
opposed to form an enclosed space between the sheet
members,
protuberances integrally formed from the material of the
first sheet member and spaced from one another along all
dimensions of the first sheet member, each protuberance
projecting inwardly from the inside surface of the first
sheet member toward the inside surface of the second
sheet member,
the protuberances being formed in the first sheet member by
the application of heat and pressure to a planar piece of
the material of the first sheet member,
the material of the first sheet member extending between the
protuberances being formed by the application of heat and
pressure so as to form on the outside surface a continuous
pattern of minor cavities and contiguous raised surfaces,
the thickness dimension of the portions of the formed sheet
between protuberances being non-uniform and shaped to
cause turbulence in air currents flowing in contact with
the outside surface thereof,
the protuberances having a height and projecting toward the
inside surface of the second sheet a distance such that the
first and second sheet members are maintained in spaced
ventilating relation by coaction of the protuberances and
the inside surface of the second sheet member when the
structure is supported by a supporting surface on the
outside surface of one sheet member and is supporting a
body on the outside surface of the other sheet member.
4,435,016
IN SITU RETORTING WITH FLAME
FRONT-STABILIZING LAYER OF LEAN OIL SHALE
PARTICLES
Herman Wissenberg, Wheatland Township, Willa County, 111^
Earl D. York, and Darrell D. Porter, both of Englewood,
Colo., assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana) and Gulf
Oil Corp., both of Chicago, 111.
FUed Jun. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 388,610
Int. a.3 E21B 43/247: E21C 41/10
U.S. a. 299—2 19 Claims
1. A process for retorting oil shale, comprising the steps of:
forming an underground retort of oil shale having at least
one flame front-stabilizing layer of lean oil shale particles;
and
moving a flame front substantially through said retort to
liberate shale oil from said oil shale, including passing said
flame front through said flame front-stabilizing layer to
generally stabilize and enhance uniformity of said flame
front and substantially minimize burning of said shale oil.
18. An underground retort, comprising:
an overburden defining a roof;
an elongated generally upright rubblized mass of oil shale
particles in a subterranean formation spaced below said
roof, said rubblized mass including alternate layers of rich
oil shale particles and lean oil shale particles;
a flame front-stabilizing region of lean oil shale particles
ranging in size from 0.01 inch to 0.1 inch extending gener-
ally across one of said layers;
burner means extending downwardly through said roof for
igniting a flame front; and
-^rrTTTTTTT^
'^^^^WV^yTrT777T777rr77Tr777rrrrr777r/
*U
feed gas means for feeding an oxygen-containing gas into
said flame front.
4,435,017
IN SITU OIL SHALE RETORT WITH DIFFERING UPPER
AND LOWER VOID FRACTIONS
Thomas E. Ricketts, Grand Junction, Colo., assignor to Occi-
dental Oil Shale, Inc., Grand Junction, Colo.
Division of Ser. No. 133,409, Mar. 24, 1980, Pat. No. 4,326,752.
This application Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,441
Int. a.3 E21C 41/10
U.S. a. 299—19 4 Claims
1. An in situ oil shale retort in a subterranean formation
containing oil shale, the retori having a top boundary, bottom
boundary, and vertically extending side boundaries of unfrag-
mented formation and containing a fragmented permeable
mass of formation particles containing oil shale having an
average void fraction up to 25%, the lower half of the frag-
mented mass having an average void fraction greater than 23%
and the upper half of the fragmented mass having an average
void fraction of at least 20% but less than 25% thereby result-
ing in the lower half of the fragmented mass having a higher
average permeability than the average permeability of the
upper half of the fragmented mass.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
191
4,435,018
MINERAL WINNING MACHINE FOR "IN WEB"
MINING SYSTEM
George A. Parrott, Wakefield, England, assignor to Dresser
Europe S.A.
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,532
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 13, 1980.
8026378
Int. a.J E21C 29/22
U.S. a. 299-43 12 Qaims
1. An "in-web" mineral winning machine for reciprocation
along a mineral face, comprising an elongate machine body
adapted, in use, to be located beyond a face side sidewall of an
armoured conveyor extending in a predetermined direction
along a mineral face, said machine body having a longitudinal
axis extending in the predetermined direction, said conveyor
also having a goaf side sidewall, a pick-carrying rotating cut-
ting head carried by said machine body and rotauble about an
axis extending transverse to the longitudinal axis of the ma-
chine body, power means housed within said machine body for
rotating said pick-carrying cutting head, at least one bridge
extending rearwardly from said machine body and adapted, in
use, to overlie said conveyor, a trapping means located at said
goaf side of said conveyor and being slidingly engaged by said
at least one bridge, a machine haulage unit associated with said
at least one bridge, and said at least one bridge being connected
to said machine body by at least one joint providing for articu-
lation of the machine body relative to said at least one bridge
along an axis extending parallel to the longitudinal axis of said
machine body.
4,435,019
BRAKE PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE
Yoshihiro Hayashida, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Tokico
Ltd., Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,446
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 15, 1980,
55/115790[U]; Aug. 15, 1980, 55/ll5791[U]
Int. a.J B60T 8/00
U.S. a. 303—6 A 1 a«im
from a source of pressure to wheel brake cylinders, compris-
ing:
a housing;
a pair of control valve units side by side in said housing, each
valve unit having means to connect it to a respective
source of pressure and to a respective wheel brake cylin-
der, and each having a piston valve member and a spnng
urging the piston valve member in the valve opening
direction, each said valve unit transmitting pressure from
the corresponding source of pressure directly to the wheel
brake cylinder when the corresponding pressure is below
a predetermined split pressure which is determined by the
force of the respective spring and. when the pressure in
the corresponding source of pressure exceeds the split
pressure, the pressure transmitted to the respective wheel
brake cylinder increases at a reduced rate as compared
with the increase of pressure in the corresponding source
of pressure;
a lever within said housing and extending across the ends of
said pistons and being pivotally engaged only with said
pistons, said springs being between said housing and the
opposite side of said lever from the respective pivotal
engagement points of said lever and said pistons;
stop means at each end of said lever between said lever and
said housing for limiting the rocking movement of said
lever relative to said pistons to a predetermined amount;
and
adjustment means engaged with at least one of said springs
for adjustment of the spring force for adjusting the split
pressure in said control valve unit corresponding to said
one spring, m
4,435,020
DECELERATION DETECTING VALVE RESPONSIVE TO
FAILURE IN FRONT BRAKE CTRCUIT
Masami Aono, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Tokico Ltd., Ka-
wasaki, Japan
Filed May 19, 1982, Ser. No. 379,990
Claims priority, application Japan, May 20, 1981, 56-
72841 [U]
Int. C\? B60T 8/26
U.S. a. 303-6 C 2 Qaims
. ^^=^tH
RWC
RWC
1. A pressure control valve for limiting pressure supplied
1. A deceleration detecting valve for use in a vehicle hydrau-
lic braking system including a master cylinder, a fiVst circuit
connecting the master cylinder with front wheel brakes, and a
second circuit connecting the master cylinder with rear wheel
brakes, said decelerating detecting valve comprising:
a valve body having a chamber with an inlet and an outlet
for connecting said chamber in the second circuit;
a decelerating detecting ball received in said chamber, said
valve body having a bore therein having one end opening
out of said chamber and the other end adapted to be
connected to the first circuit for receiving the hydraulic
pressure of the first circuit;
a slidable member having a generally cup-shaped end lo-
cated in and opening toward the interior of said chamber
and a cylindrical end slidably and sealingly received in
said bore, and said slidable member being slidable between
a first position in which said cup-shaped end is remote
193-
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
from said bore and a second position in which said cup-
shaped end is adjacent said bore, the wall of said valve
body defining said chamber having a ball guiding surface
thereon for guiding movement of said ball to a position in
said chamber for interrupting communication between
said inlet and said outlet, and the inner circumferential
surface of said cup-shaped end of said slidable member
having a ball guiding surface thereon which, when said
cup-shaped end is in said first position, forms a continua-
tion of said ball guiding surface of said chamber and in said
second position is spaced from said ball guiding surface of
said chamber to leave a gap sufficient to prevent said ball
from rolling from said cup-shaped end to said chamber
wall guiding surface, and means for normally urging said
slidable member toward said first position with a force less
than the pressure produced on said slidable member by the
hydraulic pressure in said second circuit, said ball nor-
mally abutting the bottom of the cup-shaped end of said
slidable member and when the deceleration of the vehicle
exceeds a predetermined amount, said ball rolls along the
ball guiding surfaces to interrupt communication between
the inlet and outlet, and when the pressure in the first
circuit decreases relative to the pressure in the second
circuit, said slidable member retracts to said second posi-
tion and the gap is formed between the ball guiding sur-
face on said cup-shaped member and the guiding surface
on said chamber which prevents the movement of said ball
from said guiding surface on said slidable member to the
guiding surface on said chamber.
4,435,021
VEHICLE BRAKE ACTUATOR AND BRAKING SYSTEM
Hermann H. Hoenick, Immendorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Lucas Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
per No. PCr/GB80/00142, § 371 Date May 15, 1981, § 102(e)
Date May 5, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00697, PCT Pub.
Date Mar. 19, 1981
PCT FUed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 261,183
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 15, 1979,
7932066
Int. a.5 B60T 8/04. 13/14: F16D 55/224. 65/16
U.S. a. 303—10 18 Oaims
4,435,022
TRACK BLOCK
Brett A. Whitelaw, 2575 NE. Kathryn, Unit 28, HilUboro. Orea.
97123
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,082
Int. a.J B62D 55/20
U.S. a. 305—53 2 Qaims
1. A track block for a track-laying vehicle coupleable with
other like blocks to form an endless track strand, said block
comprising
a straddled-connection portion in the form of a unitary beam
extending transversely relative to the block's intended
travel axis,
a pair of straddling-connection link portions integral with
and joined to opposite ends of said beam and extending
therefrom in a common direction generally paralleling
saidtravel axis, said link portions being adapted to receive
and straddle such a beam in an adjacent block, and
platform-like road-wheel bearing means integral with and
joined only to said beam, and extending therefrom in a
cantilevered fashion generally in the same direction as said
link portions, said bearing means being adapted to transmit
received road-wheel bearing forces directly to said link
portions solely through said beam.
£r%
^7
1. A vehicle brake actuator for urging at least one friction
element into braking engagement with a cooperating element
fixed to a member to be braked comprising pressure-applying
means including a pressure cylinder and a piston slidable
within the cylinder and operably associated with at least one
said friction element to urge at least one said friction element
into braking engagement with said cooperating element, a
pressure accumulator, a supply of pressure fluid, a pump posi-
tioned within said cylinder operably connected to said supply
of pressure fluid and said accumulator to charge the accumula-
tor with said pressure fluid, valve means operably connected to
said supply of pressure fluid and said accumulator to control
the supply of pressure fluid from said accumulator to said
pressure-applying means, brake control means, and an electri-
cally-operated solenoid operably connected to said valve
means and said brake control means to operate said valve
means to control said pressure fluid supply in response to the
action of said brake control means.
4,435,023
INTERNALLY ACTUATED SPERICAL BEARING
Thomas E. Bolner, Fayetterille, Tenn., assignor to Thiokol
Corporation, Chicago, III.
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 260,941
Int. a.3 F16C 11/06
U.S. a. 308—2 R 13 Claims
1. An internally actuated spherical bearing comprising
an outer race,
an inner race positioned for rotation, about an axis, within
said outer race,
means for providing an annular chamber around said inner
race, said chamber having opposed relatively movable
edge walls which are fixedly attached, respectively, to
said outer race and said inner race, and
first and second elongated expansible loop seal actuators,
each of said actuators having a pair of ends and arranged
in end-to-end relation within said chamber, with each
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
193
actuator wrapped around approximately 180* of the inner
race in each semi-circle, and with each of the pairs of
' re
u»
adjacent ends of said actuators being positioned proximate
the axis of said inner race.
4,435,024
BEARING CAGES FOR SUPPORTING AND RETAINING
ROLLER ELEMENTS IN CYLINDRICAL ROLLER
BEARINGS
Kenichi Tagawa, and Takao Iguchi, both of Fi^iiawa, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Seiko Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 392,539
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 24, 1981, 56-116141
Int. a.3 F16C 33/46
U.S. a. 308—217 9 Claims
1. A cage assembly for retaining and supporiing cylindrical,
bearing rollers comprising:
(a) an annular cage member, the cage member including:
(1) a straight cylindrical poriion having a plurality of
pockets formed therein for receiving a plurality of
bearing rollers,
(2) at least one flange provided on one axial end of the
cylindrical portion, the flange having an axial outer side
face, a radial inside edge face and a radial outer edge,
(b) at least one plastic retaining member, the roller retaining
member comprising:
(1) an annular ring poriion having an annular side face
adapted to be contacted by the axial outer side face of
the flange,
(2) an annular fitting face contiguous with the annular side
face,
(3) a plurality of teeth having a radial outer face and a
radial inner face, the teeth extending axially inwardly
from the ring portion and positioned between adjacent
rollers for preventing slipping down or out of any bear-
ing roller, and
(4) a plurality of lips integrally formed with the ring por-
tion for locking the roller retaining member to the
flange,
each of the teeth having a face extending axially inward
from a radial outer tip end and inclining radially inward
such that the roller retaining member is coupled to the
cage member by pushing the retaining member axially
inward from outside the flange of cage member.
4,435,025
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
Steven A. Weintraub, 200 W. 86th St., New York, N.Y. 10024
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,164
Int. a.3 BOIF 3/06
U.S. a. 312—31 14 Qaims
1. A system for controlling the climate of a volume within
which an art object or the like is situated, comprising, in com-
bination: a general housing defining a first control volume and
a second display volume, said second volume being contiguous
to or a part of said first volume,
at least one smaller housing of predetermined size and shape
disposed within said first control volume for housing a
first control substance capable of removing moisture from
or adding moisture to the confines of said general housing,
a container disposed within said first control volume for
holding a second control substance capable of holding and
giving up moisture to the confines of said general housing,
means for providing a fluid to said container, and
means for supporting said smaller housing, said container
further comprising a trough disposed within said first
control volume, said trough being positioned directly
above the length of said container, said trough being
capable of being rotated and transferring said fluid in said
trough into the length of said container,
a tube for transferring said fluid from a source of fluid out-
side said general housing to said trough,
means for controlling the flow of said fluid in said tube, and
means for rotating said trough.
4,435.026
MODULAR STACKING TRAYS
Michael R. Johnson, 2725 Foxfire Ct., Qearwatcr, Fla. 33519
Filed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,694
Int. Q.J A47F 1/00. 1/14, 1/12
U.S. Q. 312—45 4 Claims
1. A dispensing device, comprising,
a plurality of tray members having a common configuration
and dimenstion so as to be interchangeable with one an-
other.
194
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
said tray members having a pair of substantially parallel,
transversely spaced, upstanding, sidewalls,
a first and second ramp means disposed in interconnecting
relation to said sidewalls,
said first and second ramp means having a common length,
said common length equal to the length of said sidewalls
less a length slightly greater than the outside diametr of a
beverage can to be dispensed by said device,
said flrst and second ramp means extending from opposite
ends of said sidewalls,
said tray members being open-ended,
a plurality of detachably secured end plate members for
capping the open ends of said tray members,
g^. .v^^nn TTrrr-u
each of said end plate members of sufficient dimension to cap
a pair of vertically adjacent open ends of said tray mem-
bers when said tray members are stacked one atop the
other,
opposing ones of said end plate members being disposed in
overlapping relation relative to one another so that oppo-
site ends of the uppermost and lowermost tray members
are disposed in open communication to the space around
said device so that items to be dispensed are lotuled into
the uppermost one of said plurality of tray members and
unloaded from the lowermost one of said plurality of tray
members, said charging and discharging accomplished at
longitudinally opposite ends of said device.
4,435,027
SELF-LOCKING HINGED DOOR CABINET AND LATCH
FOR THE SAME
JoMph E. Prattaer, BcmardsviUr, Ramzl A. KhaUfa, Rutherford,
and Peter B. Wenzler, Long Valley, all of N J., assignors to
Edson Tool A Manufacturing Co., Inc., BeUeviUe, N J.
FUed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,601
Int. a.' E05C 7/06
U.S. a. 312—222 11 Claims
1. An apparatus cabinet having a frame comprising parallel
first and second side members each providing a portion of the
outside surface of the cabinet, at least one spacing member
between the side members, a cover member, base housing
pieces attached to the side members to enclose the lower por-
tion of the cabinet, and at least one door having lateral lips
extending around cabinet comers to overlap said side mem-
bers, being hinged to said first side member and further com-
prising:
a latch on the interior side of said second side member, said
latch having an access slot for forcing said door and hav-
ing an inclined surface guide at the bottom thereof and
a tongue on said door positioned for engagement in said
latch through said access slot thereof;
said door having its middle bowed inwardly in the un-
stressed condition of the door with respect to said lips
about a vertical axis of curvature, for facilitating clearance
of the outer lip from the cabinet comer in closing the
door,
said tongue having teeth on an edge thereof for engaging
said latch and projecting upward at a small angle to the
horizontal whereby the bottom edge of said tongue may
automatically find said inclined surface guide of said ac-
cess slot as said door is normally closed and the further
sliding contact of said tongue on said guide will raise the
door in further closing to the extent necessary for correct-
ing sag,
said latch having a pivoted detent for catching said teeth of
said tongue and spring means for pressing said detent
against said tongue, said pivoted detent having an actuat-
ing arm,
said latch also having a freely rotatable cam finger, routably
mounted in said latch, for engaging said actuating arm of
said pivoted detent of said cam for release of said tongue,
said cam finger having a shaft for rotating said cam, said
shaft extending from said latch to the exterior of said
cabinet through said second i side member and having a
shaped extremity for actuation by a suitable tool,
said door being made of sheet metal of such gauge and
flexibility that the closing and locking of said door with
insertion of said tongue in said latch substantially straight-
ens out the bow of the middle portion of said door against
adjacent portions of the cabinet overlapped respectively
by the top and bottom edges of said door.
4,435,028
HINGED CONTAINER FOR RELAY RACKS
Eric M. Rivkin, Minnetonka, Minn., assignor to Liberty Carton
Co., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,575
Int. a.J A47B 43/00: A47G 19/OS
U.S. a. 312—258 3 Claims
1. A hinged conuiner for a relay rack, said relay rack com-
prising first and second end walls, each said end wall compris-
ing an inner surface and further comprising at least one hole
therein, said container in combination with said rack compris-
ing:
a base, said base comprising:
a platform member having first and second ends and first and
second sides; and
pallet means for lifting said pallet above a surface, said pallet
means comprising at least one opening therein for inser-
tion of a lifting device, each said opening extending be-
tween said ends and parallel to said sides;
a first end panel;
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
195
a second end panel, said end panels being slightly longer
than said end walls;
first and second hinges, each said hinge comprising:
a hinge base portion fixedly attached to said base at one of
said ends;
a hinge side portion fixedly attached to one of said end
panels, said hinge side portion being hinged to said
hinge base portion, and wherein said hinge base portion
is L-shaped in cross-section with a horizontal panel
parallel and attached to said platform member and a
vertical panel, said vertical panel being hinged to said
hinge side portion, said vertical panel extending sub-
stantially above said platform member; and
means for securing said end panels to said rack end walls,
the distance between said end panels being substantially
equal to the distance between said rack end walls, said
securing means cooperating with said inner surfaces and
holes.
4,435,029
SLIDE LOCK HANDLE
Robert W. McKenzie, Lewisyille, Tex., assignor to Rockwell
International Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,036
Int. a.3 A47B %8/00
U.S. a. 312—320 7 Qaims
1. A locking handle for mounting a circuit card module to a
card cage, comprising an elongated flexible member secured at
its distal ends to the front facing edge of said module, with one
end of said handle engaging said cage in a locked position and
being pivoted and translated to an unlocked position in re-
sponse to removal pulling force applied to said handle, flexing
and bowing the latter, and wherein said handle is pivoted back
to an unbowed position flat against said module edge in re-
sponse to insertion pushing force applied against said handle,
said member including means for causing said one end of said
handle to remain in said unlocked position during insertion,
and wherein after insertion said handle is translated to said
locked position with one end thereof engaging said cage, said
handle laying flat against said front edge of said module during
said insertion such tht insertion force is applied against said
handle, obviating user engagement of a raw circuit card mod-
ule edge.
4,435,030
BAR SOAP HOLDER AND DISPENSER
James T. Haven, 537 N. Clark St., Orange, Calif. 92667
Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,206
Int. a.J A47K 5/0%
\}&. a. 312—351 10 Claims
1. A soap bar holding and dispensing device which com-
prises:
(a) a housing having a closed top, sidewalls and an open
bottom;
(b) a soap bar rack within said housing having at least one
vertical leg with a distal, lateral projecting foot to receive
a bar of soap, pivotably mounted at its upper end to the
upper portion of said housing contained completely
within said sidewalls and projecting through said open
bottom;
(c) at least one rib on a first inside sidewall of said housing in
juxtaposition to said leg and projecting substantially to the
leading edge of said foot when said rack is pivoted into an
open position, towards said first wall to dislodge a bar of
soap received on said foot for fall from said housing; and
It .•■
(d) biasing means urging said soap bar rack to a closed posi-
tion away from said rib; whereby said rack can be swung
open to dispense a received soap bar or to receive a soap
bar, and released to close with said foot beneath said soap
bar, securing said bar in said device.
4,435,031
CONNECTOR BLOCK WITH SNAP LATCH
Richard W. Black; Erol M. Kirayoglu; Harold E. Uiter, and
Richard C. Smith, all of Spartanburg, S.C., assignors to Holm-
berg Electronics Corporation, Inman, S.C.
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,667
Int. a.i HOIR 9/09
U.S. a. 339—17 C 5 Claims
1. The combination of a circuit board having a first mount-
ing hole and a plurality of circuit board holes adjacent to the
mounting hole; and a connector block having an insulating
body with a mounting surface engaging one side of the circuit
board at the mounting hole, a first flexible snap latch uniury
with and projecting outwardly of the body, and a series of
contact terminals within the body with each terminal including
a terminal tail extending outwardly of the body, past the
mounting surface and into one of the circuit board holes, the
snap latch being formed from a heat-shrink plastic material and
including a pair of elongate and longitudinally shrunk tensile
prongs and radially outwardly facing latches on the ends of the
prongs, the prongs extending through the first mounting hole
and the latches engaging the other side of the circuit board,
whereby the snap latch secures the block tightly against the
circuit board.
196
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,43S,032
TERMINAL CONNECTOR WITH SAFETY DEVICE
Allen P. Abrarason, Essex, and Theodore R. Stiles, Somerset,
both of N J., assignors to Challenger Circle F, Inc., Trenton,
NJ.
FUed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,295
Int. a.J HOIR 13/447
U.S. a. 339—36 12 Oaims
1. A terminal connector for electrical extension cords com-
prised of:
(a) a connector body, of electrically insulating material,
including a pair of prong receiving contacts internal to
said connector body; and a pair of prong receiving pas-
sageways commtanicating with said contacts; and
(b) a safety cover, of electrically insulating material, at-
tached on said connector body, said safety cover includ-
ing: two blocking plates, each blocking plate covering one
of said passageways and having a prong receiving hole;
biasing means for resiliently separating said blocking
plates, normally causing corresponding prong receiving
holes and passageways to be misaligned thereby prevent-
ing access to said prong receiving contacts; and gripping
means for manually urging said blocking plates together
thereby aligning corresponding prong receiving holes and
passageways allowing access to said prong receiving
contacts.
4,435,033
TWO-PART SEPARABLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
ARRANGEMENT
Willi Gansert, Komwestheim; Gert Jakob, Stuttgart; Lothar
Ruttkowski, Ludwigsburg-Ossweil; Siegfried Goetzke, Bie-
ti^eim-Bissingen, and Kurt Stammler, Schwieberdingen, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH,
Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 283,357, Jul. 14, 1981, abandoned. This
application Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,389
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 19,
1980, 3031261
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/635
U.S. a. 339—45 M 6 Claims
26iM2 '2 12J'26
1. A two-part elongated separable electrical connection
arrangement comprising
a first elongated molded plastic part (1) including two
spaced longitudinal flrst-part sheet-like first side walls (8,
9) molded on said first part;
a second elongated molded plastic part (2) including a base,
and two spaced resilient projecting longitudinal second-
part second side walls (18, 19) molded on said second part,
fitting over said first side walls, whereby said first side
walls will form inner side walls of the connection arrange-
ment, and said second side walls will form outer side
walls, when the connection arrangement is in connected
position;
end walls extending transversely to the side walls,
means (5, 7) separably, releasably connecting and locking
said parts comprising
separable hinge means (5, 7) located transversely to the
longitudinal direction of the side walls of said parts at an
end portion adjacent tljp end walls, and separably, piv-
otally connecting said parts together to provide, upon
engagement of the hinge means, a pivotal connection of
said first and second parts (1,2) in advance of complete
engagement of the parts, while permitting complete
separation of said first and second parts about a hinge
axis transverse to the longitudinal side walls (8, 9; 18,
19);
interengaging projection-and-recess means (10, 11; 20)
formed on said first longitudinal side walls and on the
second longitudinal side walls, respectively, at aligned
locations remote from said hinge means including
a first projection (10) extending outwardly from one of the
inner walls of said first part (1) and having a flat engage-
ment surface (13) extending at approximately right
angles with respect to engagement, or disengagement
movement of said respective parts;
a second projection (11) formed on the other side wall (9)
comprising a ridge or bump (11) having obtuse angles
with respect to the other side wall of said one part;
an elongated opening in each of the outer walls of the
second part having engagement surfaces (20) parallel to
the flat engagement surface (13) on said projection,
whereby, upon hinging, pivotal movement about said
transversely located hinge means (5, 7) and engagement
of the first and second parts, with the side wall of the
first part within the second part, said projection and said
opening will lock said parts together;
an integral unlocking or release means including
a release cam or fulcrum projection (27) integral with the
inner wall of said first part and located adjacent to, and
upwardly— in removing direction of the second part —
from the engagement surface (13) formed by the first
projection (10) of the interengaging projection-and-
recess means and extending outwardly from the inner
wall of said first part;
and an integral extension flap (29) formed on the immedi-
ately adjacent outer side wall (18) of the second part,
extending upwardly and beyond said release cam or
fulcrum projection (27) to provide a lever and gripping
and operating surface for resilient outward deflection of
the region or zone of the outer wall immediately adja-
cent the release cam or fulcrum upon compression of
the outer side wall at a point upwardly from, and re-
mote from the fulcrum projection towards the adjacent
inner side wall, resulting in tilting movement of the
portion of the outer side wall adjacent the projection
with respect to the inner side wall and cause release of
the projection-and-recess means and, outward bending
of the portion of the outer wall adjacent the flat engage-
ment surface (13) of the first projection releases the
engagement of surface (20) in the outer wall from the
engagement surface (13) of the projection on the inner
wall by outward deflection of the zone of the outer wall
adjacent said projection from the inner wall, and per-
mits release of said second part by pivoting about said
separable hinge means.
c
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
197
4435 034
CONNECTORS WITH INSULATION-DISPLAQNG
TERMINALS
SharaiUit S. Ai^la, Kanata, and John D. Lee, Manotick, both of
Canada, assignors to Northern Telecom Limited, Montreal,
Canada
Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,606
Int. a.} HOIR 13/39
VS. a. 339—98 17 Qaims
clear of said apertures in said body, and also adopted to
interengage to retain said cap and said body in a second,
fully insertta position with said terminals extending across
said apertures in said body and in electrical connection
with the conductive cores of conductors positioned in said
apertures in said body.
19 'so 46
4,435,035
MASS TERMINATABLE SINGLE ROW CONNECTOR
ASSEMBLY
Donald A. Berry, Elizabethtown; David J. Fabian, Harrisburg,
and John E. Lucius, Enola, all of Pa., auignors to AMP
Incorporated, Harrisburg, Pa.
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,541
Int. a.J HOIR 13/514
U.S. a. 339—99 R 8 Qaims
40 25 19
1. A connector for connecting at least two conductors,
comprising a body and a cap each of hollow box-like structure,
the cap fitting into or over the body;
the body comprising;
a bottom web;
front and back walls and opposite end walls extending up
from said bottom web;
a central body portion having front, central and rear ribs, the
rear rib integral with the back wall;
four apertures extending through said front wall and said
front, central and rear ribs, the apertures extending in
spaced parallel array to form first, second, third and
fourth apertures;
the front and central ribs connected by first spaced sections
to define a first two aligned spaced apart channels one
channel connecting with the first aperture and the other
channel connecting with the third aperture;
the central and rear ribs connected by second spaced sec-
tions, to define a second two aligned spaced apart chan-
nels, one channel connecting with the second aperture and
the other channel connecting with the fourth aperture;
the cap comprising;
a top web;
front and back walls and opposite side walls, extending
down from said top web;
the front wall being of reduced height for at least a major
part of its length, relative to said side walls, to define an
open sided aperture in the front wall;
front and rear ribs extending down from said top web,
spaced from and parallel to the front and back walls, and
a central rib extending down from said top web intermedi-
ate the front and rear ribs, parallel to and spaced from the
front and rear ribs, to define four parallel channels, the
channels between said central rib and said front and rear
ribs adapted to receive insulation displacing terminals;
a further channel extending along inside each side wall;
interengaging formations on the side walls of the cap and the
end walls of the body, said formations interengaging to
retain said cap and said body in a first initial assembled
position with said terminals entered in the channels but
1. An electrical connector assembly comprising:
an elongated housing of rigid insulative material having a
plurality of terminal passages extending in a single row
from a rear end through said housing to open on a front
mating face, each said passage being fully enclosed at the
mating face and outwardly open channel shaped at the
rear end remote from said mating face, said rear end hav-
ing a stepped profile;
a plurality of terminals each mounted in a respective one of
said passages, each said terminal having a forwardly di-
rected mating portion lying in said fully enwiosed portion
of said passage and an insulation displacing rear portion
lying in and accessible from said rear channel-shaped
portion; and
a cover having a forward end profiled to be received in said
fully enclosed portions of said passages to hold said cover
in assembly therewith and a plurality of depending rear
legs each engageable with a respective portion of said rear
stepped profile between each said passage and at both
ends of said housing to hold said cover thereagainst while
separating individual conductors leading thereto into
alignment with respective passages, whereby terminals
pre-loaded in said housing can be terminated by a low
force insulation displacing movement and enclosed by
application of said cover member.
4,435,036
OPTICAL HBER CONNECTOR WTTH MUTUALLY
ENGAGING, OPPOSFTELY TAPERED SURFACES
Tomio Sasakawa, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Anritsu Electric
Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267.966
Claims priority, application Japan, May 30, 1980, 55-71454
Int. a.3 G02B 7/26
U.S. a. 350—96.20 3 Claims
1. A fiber optic cable connecting device for connecting a
198
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
fiber optic cable to a connector having a receptacle, compris-
ing:
a Tiber optic cable guide member including a fiber insertion
portion having a first insertion bore for receiving said
fiber optic cable, a fitting portion integral with said fiber
insertion portion for being plugged into said receptacle,
said fitting portion having a tip portion formed with a
second insertion bore communicating with said first inser-
tion bore for receiving a bare fiser of said fiber optic cable
and a fiber fixing portion integraN^h said fiber insertion
portion for fixing said fiber optic cable, said fiber fixing
portion including a locking portion, with the outer surface
of said locking portion being tapered along the direction
of the axis of said fiber insertion guide member; and
J6a 46 46r; 50
able post containing a plane surface extending from said
rod,
said diode permanently mounted on said plane surface,
at least one aligning port through said connector body ex-
posing said deformable mounting post,
an optical fiber firmly mounted within a second housing,
said second housing connected to said first housing so that
an end of said optical fiber is in juxtaposition to said diode,
means for moving said post until maximum light from said
diode is coupled into said optical fiber and means for
plastically deforming said post to a permanent position
once said maximum light coupling is achieved.
^ 4,435,038
CONNECTER FOR USE IN BUTT SPLIONG TWO
OPTICAL nBRES
Lucas Soes, Rosmalen, and Eduardus F. A. Ten Berge, Dninen,
both of Netherlands, assignors to AMP Incorporated, Harris-
burg, Pa.
Filed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,209
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 14, 1981,
8101105
Int. a.} G02B 7/26
U.S. a. 350— 96J1 4 Claims
a pressuring member slidably disposed on said fiber insertion
portion for movement within a restricted range in said
axial direction, said pressuring member being provided
with a locking portion having an aperture formed therein
to receive said locking portion of said fiber insertion por-
tion, said aperture having the inner surface thereof ta-
pered in the opposite direction to that of said locking
portion of said fiber insertion portion, said locking por-
tions of said fiber insertion portion and pressuring member
being disposed to mutually abut such as to cooperate in
fixing said fiber optic cable within said locking portion of
said fiber insertion portion when said pressuring member
is moved to one end of said range of axial movement and
to release said fiber optic cable when said pressuring
member is moved to the other end of said range.
4,435,037
HBER OPTIC CONNECTOR WITH DEFORMABLE
MOUNTING POST
Edward A. Abramson, Newark, Del., and Peter K. Townsend,
Camp Hill, Pa., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and
Company, Wilmington, Del.
FUed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,944
Int. a.3 G02B 7/26
U.S. a. 350—96.20 8 Claims
1. An apf>aratus for coupling an optical fiber to a light emit-
ting or injection laser diode comprising
a light source connector body at least partially retained
within a first dielectric housing, said connector body
containing an electrically conducting rod and a deform-
1. A connector for use in butt splicing two optical fibres,
comprising a tubular member of deformable material, and
three elongate members receivable in the tubular member to
define a central passage to receive end portions of the two
optical fibres to be spliced, in which the tubular member is a
right-circular cylindrical member, and the three elongate
members are of similar transverse cross-section and are inte-
grally formed in side-by-side relationship joined by two webs,
tne transverse cross-section of each elongate member being
such that the three elongate members can be folded together
by bending of the webs, to define a substantially circular over-
all cross-section support body receivable in the tubular mem-
ber, the innermost parts of the three elongate members to-
gether defining the central passage, and such that there are
radial spaces between the three elongate members throughout
the length of the support body.
4,435,039
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING IMAGE
QUAUTY OF A REDUCnON/ENLARGEMENT
GRADIENT INDEX LENS ARRAY
William L. Lama, Webster, and James D. Rees, Pittsford, both
of N.Y., assignors to Xerox Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Not. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,694
lot a.} G02B 5/16
U.S. a. 350— 96 J5 5 Claims
1. An optical system for transmitting an image of an object
lying in an object plane onto an image plane at magnification
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
199
other than unity, said system including a lens array comprising
a plurality of gradient index optical fibers bound together in
side by side relationship, the fibers arranged so that those in the
center of the array have their axes substantially perpendicular
to the object and image plane while adjoining fibers are pro-
third index, with the first index being larger than the third
index,
(e) the difference between the third and the second index is
between about I times and about 3 times the difference
between the first and the third index, with the third index
being larger than the second index,
(0 the effective core radius is between about 0.5 times and
about 0.8 times the effective outer radius of the inner
cladding region, and
(g) the effective outer radius of the inner cladding region is
at least about S ^m.
4,435,041
CHROMATIC ABERRATION CORRECTION IN A
MULTIWAVELENGTH LIGHT BEAM DEFLECTION
SYSTEM
Ernest J. Torok, and William A. Harvey, both of MinneapolU,
Minn., assignors to Sperry Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 382,857
Int. a.} G02B 5/1&
U.S. a. 350-162.24 7 Oaims
gressively tilted in fan-like fashion towards the ends of the
array so that their axes increasingly depart from said substan-
tially perpendicular orientation, the array further including
masking means adapted to permit maximum light transmittal
through central areas of said array but to transmit increasingly
less light through fibers extending in the array direction.
4,435,040
DOUBLE-CLAD OPHCAL HBERGUIDE
Leonard G. Cohen, and Wanda L. Mammel, both of Holmdel,
N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated,
Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,213
Int. a.3 G02B 5/172
U.S. a. 350— 96 J3 18 Claims
1. An optical communication system comprising a light
source and a detector, further comprising silica-based single-
mode optical fiberguide comprising
(a) a core region having an effective radius and a first effec-
tive refractive index,
(b) an inner cladding region concentrically surrounding the
core, the inner cladding having an effective outer radius
and a second effective refractive index, and
(c) an outer cladding region concentrically surrounding the
inner cladding, having an effective thickness and a third
effective refractive index,
. CHARACTERIZED IN THAT
(d) the difference between the first and the third index is
between about 0.1% and about 0.4% of the value of the
1. A light deflection system including chromatic correction
comprising:
an alterable diffraction grating;
a source of a multiwavelength input light beam that is di-
rected along an input optical axis that intersects said grat-
ing;
said diffraction grating generating a plurality of first order
light beams from said input light beam, each different
wavelength of said input light beam being deflected a
correspondingly different angle from said optical axis for
generating a corresponding first order light beam;
first and second lenses oriented with their optical axes coax-
ial with said input optical axis, said first lens spaced a focal
length from said grating, said second lens spaced a dis-
tance from said first lens that is the sum of focal lengths of
said first and second lenses;
first and second correction plates oriented with their optical
axes coaxial with said input optical axis and intermediate
said first and second lenses, said first plate positive, said
second plate negative and spaced a distance apart such
that their focal points coincide for at least three wave-
lengths of interest.
4,435,042
VEHICLE MIRROR AND SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
Denis Wood, Dublin, Ireland; John F. Thomas, Jr., Holland,
Mich.; Barry Dipper, Cardiff, Wales; Philip D. Stcgenga;
John H. Veltkarap, both of West Olive; WiUiam L. Katsma,
Jenison, Mich., and Robert L. Norton, Holland, Mich., as-
signors to Donnelly Mirrors, Inc., Holland, Mich.
FUed Jua. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,838
Int. a.J G02B/ 7/00
U.S. a. 350—281 71 Claims
1. A breakaway rearview mirror assembly adapted to be
slidably mounted on a button secured to a vehicle windshield,
said mirror assembly comprising:
a breakaway rearview mirror bracket, said bracket includ-
ing:
el
200
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a one-piece body defining a front surface, a rear surface, a
top end and a buttom end;
a pair of resilient, opposed, elongated clips which define
grooves dimensioned to receive the button in a tongue and
groove fashion;
a pivot and tension member positioned on said rear surface in
between said clips, said pivot and tension member dimen-
sioned to tension the clips after receipt of the button by
engaging the button and urging it against said clips to
securely locate the bracket on the button, said member
including means forming a breakaway pivot positioned
closer to one end of said clips than the other for pivoting
said bracket about the button when the mirror assembly
sustains a predetermined impact;
a mirror head assembly including a mirror case having a rear
surface and a mirror carried by said mirror case; and
mirror mounting means forming a part of said bracket and
said head assembly for adjustably mounting said mirror
case to said bracket.
4,435,043
COMPOSITE MIRROR PANELS
Guy Mertens, Namur, and Pierre Laroche, Ham-sur-Heure,
both of Belgjum, assignors to Glaverbel, Brussels, Belgium
Filed May 4, 1982, Ser. No. 374,908
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 21, 1981.
8125665
Int. a.3 G02B 5/10; B32B 3/28
U.S. a. 350-288 18 claims
4 435 044
REAR VIEW MIRROR ASSEMBLY
Elliott Hanin, Potomac, Md., assignor to IRV Hanin, Miami
Beach, Fla.
FUed Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 359,063
Int. a.J G02B 5/08. 5/10
U.S. a. 350-302 8 claims
1. A composite mirror panel comprising a front flexible
vitreous sheet whose rear face is provided with a reflective
coating to form a mirror, a flexible waterproof first backing
sheet water-tightly bonded to the rear of said mirror so as to
form a flexible laminate, and a corrugated backing sheet which
is bonded to said first backing sheet along crests of the corruga-
tions to form a said composite panel which is flexible about
axes parallel to said corrugations.
1. An assembly of mirrors for viewing an area extending
longitudinally rearwardly from a central portion of the back of
a vehicle, said mirror assembly comprising:
a first mirror positioned on a forward side portion of the
vehicle so as to be directly viewable by a vehicle occu-
pant;
a second mirror positioned on an upper rear side portion of
the vehicle, the first and second mirrors cooperating with
each other to define a first optical axis extending upwardly
and rearwardly along the side of the vehicle; and
a third mirror positioned on the top of the vehicle and
spaced forwardly of the second mirror, said third mirror
being positioned such that said first optical axis is reflected
from said second mirror onto said third mirror to thereby
define a second optical axis, said second optical axis being
reflected downwardly and rearwardly by said third mir-
ror so as to permit viewing of an area extending longitudi-
nally rearwardly from a central portion of the back of the
vehicle.
8. A method of mounting mirrors so as to provide viewing of
an area extending longitudinally rearwardly from a central
portion of the rear of the vehicle, said method comprising:
positioning a first mirror on a forward side of the vehicle so
as to be directly viewable by an occupant of the vehicle;
positioning a second mirror on an upper rear side of the
vehicle so that the reflecting surfaces of the first and the
second mirrors define a first axis extending upwardly and
rearwardly along the side of the vehicle; and
positioning a third mirror on the top of the vehicle for-
wardly of the second mirror so that the first axis is re-
flected onto the reflecting surface of the third mirror
thereby defining a second axis, the reflecting surface of
the third mirror being positioned so as to reflect the sec-
ond axis rearwardly from the back of the vehicle to
thereby provide viewing of an area directly behind and
extending rearwardly from the rear of the vehicle.
4,435,045
BUILT-UP MIRROR WITH REDUCED TEMPERATURE
GRADIENT
Lawrence Fried, Palo Alto, Calif., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 372,877
Int. a.3 G02B 5/08. 522. 5/24: B32B 3/00
U.S. a. 350—310 9 Claims
1. A frit bonded, built-up glass mirror for use in orbital
space, said miror comprising:
a glass front wall;
a glass rear wall disposed in predetermined spaced relation
to said front wall;
a plurality of glass spacer walls interconnecting said front
and rear walls and arranged in a pattern defining a plural-
ity of cells the cell ends of which are defined by the inner
surfaces of said front and rear walls and the cell sides of
whieh are defined by the surfaces of said spacer walls;
^
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
201
a reflective coating on the outer surface of said front wall;
said inner surfaces of said front and rear walls being charac-
terized as relatively highly emissive and absorptive of
radiant energy; and
said surfaces of said spacer walls being coated with a reflec-
tive layer of highly specular material, whereby radiant
energy emitted from one of said end walls of a cell is
reflected to and absorbed by the other of said end walls of
said cell.
^-^mmm^zm
second transparent substrate, each of said common elec-
trodes comprising a plurality of electrically intercon-
nected common electrode portions, with the common
electrode portions of said first and second common elec-
trodes being arranged in a successively alternating manner
around said second transparent substrate, said common
electrodes being operable in conjunction with a first set of
said segment electrodes for defining said plurality of dis-
play elements arranged in an annular configuration.
6. In a mirror built-up of frit bonded glass wall components
to comprise a plurality of cells having front, back and side
walls, the front walls of which carry an outwardly facing
reflective surface adapted to be cyclically directed toward and
from the sun, the improvement comprising a reflective coating
on the surfaces of said side walls, so that energy radiated from
the inner surface of said front walls of said cells is reflected by
said reflective coating on said side walls and absorbed by the
rear walls, whereby maximum temperature differences be-
tween said front and rear walls are reduced.
4,435,046
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY DEVICE
Katsuo Nishimura, Tokorozawa, Japan, assignor to Citizen
Watch Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,452
Oaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 8, 1980, 55-45240;
Oct. 28, 1980, 55-151224
Int. a? G02F 1/13
U.S. a. 350—334 10 Oaims
MOOe DISPLAY
SECTION 22
ANNULAI
LlOUlb
CRVSTAl
DISPLAY
CELL IS
r CRVSfAL
^ '"ISPLAY
ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY
SECTION 24
1. A liquid crystal display device for an electronic timepiece
provided with time indicating hands, said liquid crystal display
device having an annular configuration and comprising a plu-
rality of display elements arranged in an annular arrangement,
with said time indicating hands to be disposed within a central
aperture of said liquid crystal display device, said liquid crystal
display device comprising:
first and second annular transparent substrates;
an outer layer-of sealant material disposed between said first
and second transparent substrates adjacent to the outer
periphery thereof, and an inner layer of sealant material
disposed between said first and second transparent sub-
strates adjacent to the inner periphery thereof to thereby
form an annular chamber between said first and second
transparent substrates; a layer of liquid crystal material
provided within said annular chamber between said first
and second transparent substrates;
a plurality of segment electrodes formed on an inner surface
of said first transparent substrate; and first and second
conhmon electrodes formed on an inner surface of said
4,435,047
ENCAPSULATED LIQUID CRYSTAL AND METHOD
James L. Fergason, Kent, Ohio, assignor to Manchester RAD
Partnership, Pepper Pike, Ohio
Filed Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,780
Int. a.3 G02F 1/13
U.S. a. 350—334 1 1 1 Oaims
1. A liquid crystal apparatus, comprising liquid crystal mate-
rial having positive dielectric anisotropy, and surface means
for affecting the natural structure of said liquid crystal material
to induce a distorted alignment thereof in the absence of an
electric field to reduce optical transmission independent of
polarization, said liquid crystal material being responsive to the
presence of an electric field to increase such optical transmis-
sion.
12. A method of making encapsulated nematic liquid crys-
tals, comprising mixing at least an encapsulating medium and a
nematic liquid crystal material, and further comprising select-
ing such liquid crystal material and such encapsulating medium
such that the liquid crystal material has an ordinary index of
refraction substantially the same as the index of refraction of
the encapsulating medium.
29. Liquid crystal apparatus, comprising liquid crystal mate-
rial, and containment means for inducing a distorted ahgnmert
of said liquid crystal material which in response to such align-
ment at least one of scatters and absorbs light and which in
response to a prescribed input reduces the amount of such
scattering or absorption.
60. Liquid crystal material and a medium for containing
discrete quantities of said liquid crystal material, said liquid
crystal material having positive dielectric anisotropy, and
wherein when exposed to an electric field the electrical impe-
dance of said medium and liquid crystal material exposed to
such field along an electrical path through both said medium
and liquid crystal material are related such that the electrical
impedance of said medium is less than the electrical impedance
of said liquid crystal material exposed to such field.
62. Liquid crystal material and a medium for containing
discrete quantities of such liquid crystal material, said material
having positive dielectric anisotropy, and mixed with the liq-
uid crysul material a pleochroic dye that is sdluble in the liquid
crystal material.
202
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4.435,048
ELECTRO-OmCAL DEVICE AND ELECTRO-OPTICAL
LIGHT CONTROLLING DEVICE
Tadatoshi Kamimori, Tokyo; Mamoni Mizuhathi, and Junichi
Nagai, both of Yokohama, all of Japan, astignora to Asahi
Glaii Company Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 14, 1981, Scr. No. 254,104
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 15, 1980, 55-48657;
Apr. 18, 1980, 55-50324; Nov. 6, 1980, 55-155213
Int. CL' HOIG 9/00; G02F 1/17
MS. a. 350—357 9 Claims
1. An electro-optical device comprising non-solid electro-
lyte layer held between a pair of electrodes and a solid electro-
chromic material placed on at least one of said electrodes, said
electrolyte layer comprising an organic material and a chelat-
ing agent, wherein said electrolyte layer further comprises
iodine or an iodine compound selected from the group consist-
ing of metal or ammonium iodides, C1-C4 iodine-containing
carboxylic acids, C1-C4 alkyl iodides and chromatic iodo
compounds, in an amount of from 5x 10"' mole/liter up to
saturation level.
4,435,049
TELEPHOTO LENS SYSTEM
Yoshiaki Horikawa, and Toshihiro Imai, both of Hachioi^i,
Japan, assignors to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 32833
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 8, 1980, 55-172099
Int. Q\? G02B 9/62, 13/02
VS. a. 350—454 8 Claims
(j, ^dii
1. A telephoto lens system comprising: first, second and
third positive meniscus lens components, each having the
convex surface on the object side; a fourth negative meniscus
lens component having the convex surface on the object side;
a fifth positive cemented meniscus lens component having the
convex surface on the image side; and, a sixth positive lens
component; said lens system satisfying the following condi-
tions
1 6</-|234//<2.3 (1)
Rl>1.6. rt3>1.6
V2<60
0.6</Bm/r6<l.O
0.08/«/5<O.I2/
0.09/«/9-l-rflO<0.15/
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
wherein the reference symbol f represents the focal length of
the entire lens system, the reference symbol fj 234 represents the
composite focal length of the first lens component to the fourth
lens component, the reference symbol f5i23 represents the back
focus of the first lens component to the third lens component,
the reference symbols ni and n3 respectively represent refrac-
tive indices of the first lens component and the third lens
component, the reference symbol ^2 represents the Abbe's
number of the second lens component, the reference symbol re
represents the radius of curvature of the third lens component,
and the reference symbols ds, d9 and djo respectively represent
thicknesses of respective lenses forming the third lens compo-
nent and the fifth lens component.
4,435,050
CONTACT LENS ASSEMBLY WITH HAPTIC AND
METHOD FOR MAKING THE SAME
Stanley Poler, 78 E. Second St., New York, N.Y. 10003
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 124,941, Feb. 26, 1980, Pat. No.
4.377,329. This application Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,349
Int a.3 A61F 1/16; G02C 7/04
VS. a. 351—160 R 31 Claims
1. A contact lens assembly adapted for removable mounting
to the cornea of an eye, comprising an optically finished lens
element having a circular periphery characterized by a convex
outer surface having a circumferentially continuous peripher-
al-edge rabbet formation in the outer-surface side of said ele-
ment, and a single-piece haptic of flexible sheet material having
a central circular opening at the rim of which said haptic has
circumferentially continuous seated engagement with said
rabbet formation and thereby mounts said lens element, said
haptic being so axially compliant as to conform to the curva-
ture of the cornea and to be self-adherent thereto via surface
moisture of the cornea, whereby the self-adherent force upon
haptic contact with the cornea is operative at the periphery of
said lens element to axially inwardly retain the inner surface of
the lens element in contact with the cornea.
4,435,051
WORKING DISTANCE DETECTING DEVICE FOR
OPHTHALMIC APPARATUS
Kazuo Nunokawa, Itabashi, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Kogaku
Kikai Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,670
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 10, 1980, 55-77935
Int. a.J A61B 3/14; G03B 29/00
VS. CI. 351—208 5 Qaims
,22
20
12 II 10 9 8 76
1. An ophthlamic apparatus which comprises objective lens
means adapted to be located opposite an eye to be examined
with a working distance therebetween, an illuminating optical
system having a ring-shaped aperture located substantially
conjugate to the cornea of the eye with respect to the objective
lens means so that a beam of illuminating light is projected on
the eye through said aperture and said objective lens means, a
working distance detecting device which comprises at least
one light-shading opaque portion provided in said aperture and
having a width in a circumferential direction and light-receiv-
ing means provided outside the perimeter of said objective lens
means at a position capable of receiving a projection of said
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
203
light-shading opaque portion of the ring-shaped aperture by
the illuminating beam reflected at the cornea of the eye to be
examined, whereby the working distance between the objec-
tive lens means and the cornea of the eye is detected based on
the width of the projection of the light-shading opaque portion
onto said light-receiving means.
4,435,052
OPHTHALMIC TEST APPARATUS HAVING
MAGNinCATION COMPENSATION
David L. Guyton, 307 Somerset Rd., Baltimore, Md. 21210
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,521
Int. a.i A61B 3/02
V.S. a. 351—239 1 Qaim
1. Ophthalmic test apparatus comprising a plurality of simi-
lar test targets presented simultaneously to a patient's eye, with
at least one of said test targets having associated optical means
for varying the trial refractive correction through which said
one test target is viewed by ^aid eye, whereby said patient may
choose from a plurality of trial refractive corrections, wherein
the improvement comprises two test targets simultaneously
presented, each of said test targets having associated optical
means to vary the respective trial refractive correction to
produce opposite cross-cylinder effect for said two test targets,
said test targets having meridional magnification difference
which compensates for the astigmatic magnification difference
produced by said optical means.
4,435,053
THREE-DIMENSIONAL PLURAL DISPLAY
APPARATUS
Edward A. Woloshuk, New York, N.Y., and Gregory J. Walz,
Pittsburgh, Pa., auignors to The Zyntrax Corporation, Mon-
tauk, N.Y.
per No. PCT/US82/01370, § 371 Date Jun. 16, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 16, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/01259. PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 15, 1982
PCT Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 437,101
Int. a.J G03B 21/32
VS. a. 352—86 14 Claims
same space at least two different three-dimensional images,
comprising;
a. intermittently operable illuminating means;
b. an optical system defining an optical path extending from
said illuminating means;
c. means supporting an array of photographs and operable to
move said photographs successively through said optical
path at a rate sufficiently greater than the human persis-
tence of vision so that the array moves through the path
within the period of perisistence of vision;
d. means for operating said illuminating means only when
one of the photographs is aligned with said path;
e. a projection screen circumscribing an axis about which the
screen is rotatable, said screen being curved eccentrically
with respect to the axis and intercepting said optical path,
the curvature of the screen being effective to move the
screen along the optical path toward and away from the
photographs as the screen rotates;
f means synchronizing the rotation of the screen with the
operation of the illuminating means and the movement of
the photograph supporting means to project on the screen
a series of images which appear to an observer having
persistence of vision to be a three-dimensional image;
wherein the improvement comprises:
g. at least two series of two-dimensional photographs in said
array, each series showing successive sections of one of
said images, the photographs of each series being arranged
in said array in a predetermined order corresponding to
the relationship that said successive sections bear to each
other, the photographs of each series being located in said
array in positions different from the locations of the pho-
tographs of the other series; and
h. selection means for controlling said illuminating means to
illuminate the photographs of only one of said series dur-
ing one movement of said array through said optical path,
and to illuminate the photographs of only another of said
series during a subsequent movement of said array
through said optical path.
4,435,054
nLM GUIDE ASSEMBLY
Hellmut Schrader, Am Hiittenkrug 12, D-30S7 Neustadt 1, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 25, 1982, Scr. No. 361,972
Int. a.^ G03B 21/16
U.S. a. 353—95 8 Gaims
1. Apparatus for forming and sequentially displaying in the
1. In a film guide assembly for a film viewing device which
projects an image provided on a film having parallel edges, the
assembly comprising means for defining a film transporting
path having a window disposed therein for the delimitation of
the edges of the image on the film and for defining the position
of the film, the width of the opening of the window transverse
to the direction of the film transporting path being smaller than
the width of the film transporting path, and means disposed in
the viewing device for directing light through the window, the
improvement wherein said film guide assembly further com-
prises first and second frame members which are arranged one
behind the other in the direction of the travel of light through
said window and enclose between them said film transporting
204
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
path, said first frame member being located to contact the
edges of the film and defining a contact plane which comprises
the window plane determinative for the sharpness of the pro-
jected image, said second frame member having first and sec-
ond projecting parts each disposed to extend along a respective
one of the edges of the film, delimiting the corresponding
edges of said second frame member, projecting in the direction
of said contact plane defined by said first frame member and
located for pushing the film toward said contact plane across
the entire extent of said window in the direction of said trans-
porting path, said first and second frame members defining an
opening having at least one dimension at least equal to the
corresponding dimension of the film area utilized for projec-
tion of the image, and the opening width transverse to the
direction of film transporting of said first frame member being
greater than the corresponding opening width of said second
frame member.
4435 056
nLM FEEDING DEVICE
Kowji Tuiluiwa, Tokyo, Japan, auignor to Olynpiu Optical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 2, 1981. Ser. No. 326,515
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1980, 55-185947
Int. O.^ G03B 7/00
U.S. a. 354-21 12 Clalnif
4,435,055
MULTIPLE FREQUENCY RANGING APPARATUS FOR
FOCUS CONTROL
Henry F. Berdat, Manchester, and Kerry D. Baines, Vernon,
both of Conn., assignors to The Gerber Scientific Instrument
Company, South Windsor, Conn.
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,220
Int. C\} G03B 13/20
U.S. a. 354-4 25 Gaims
1. A multiple frequency ranging apparatus for measuring the
distance between an object and a reference plane comprising:
oscillator means for generating signals at first and second
frequencies, the second frequency being higher than the
first frequency;
wave generating means connected with the oscillator means
and associated with the objects and reference plane for
producing energy waves characterized by the first and
second frequencies and transmitting the waves between
the object and the reference plane;
wave receiving means associated with generating means for
receiving the waves transmitted by the generating means
between the object and the reference plane;
detecting means having an input connected with the receiv-
ing means for detecting from the waves the distance be-
tween the object and the plane at the first frequency and
the second frequency; and
control means associated with the detecting means for
switching the detection of the distance between the object
and the plane from the first frequency for coarse detection
to the second frequency for fine detection.
1. A film feeding device comprising:
film wind driving means engaging a film wind shaft and
rotating said film wind shaft to wind a film on said film
wind shaft;
shaft diameter information producing means for producing
information representing the diameter of said film wind
shaft with said film wound thereon;
means for updating the shaft diameter information from said
shaft diameter information producing means every time a
given length of the film is wound on said film wind shaft;
means for deciding the rotation angle of said film wind shaft
and producing a rotation angle information in accordance
with the shaft diameter information from said shaft diame-
ter information producing means; and
means for driving said film wind driving means in accor-
dance with the rotation angle information from said rota-
tion angle information producing means, whereby said
film wind shaft is rotated through an angle corresponding
to said rotation angle information.
4,435,057
EXPOSURE CONTROL DEVICE FOft CAMERAS
Masaaki Nakai, Osaka, and Masayoshi Sahara, Sennan, both of
Japan, auignors to MinolU Camera Kabushiki Kaisha,
Osaka, Japan
per No. PCr/JP81/00275, § 371 Date Jun. 14, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 14, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/01424, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 29, 1982
per Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 395,079
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 13, 1980, 55-142565
Int. Q\? G03B 7/08i
U.S. a. 354-426 5 Qaims
1. An exposure control device for a camera comprising:
a light measuring circuit for measuring the brightness of an
object to be photographed and producing an output signal
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
205
for the exposure control in accordance with the measured
value;
an AE-lock switch manually operable independently of the
camera release operation;
a first storage capacitor connected through the AE-lock
switch to the light measuring circuit;
a buffer circuit activated for a given period in conjunction
with a camera shutter release operation and having high
input and output impedances when the buffer circuit is
deactivated;
a second storage capacitor connected through the buffer
circuit to the first storage capacitor; and
a control circuit for controlling camera exposure in accor-
dance with the charged voltage of the second storage
capacitor, said buffer circuit charging the second storage
capacitor to a potential equal to that of the first storage
capacitor.
4,435,059
CAMERA WITH AUTOMATIC APERTURE SETTING
AND PARTIALLY COLOR DELETED VIEWHNDER
SELECTION
Jeremy Gerber, 7 Frog Rock Rd., Armonk, N.Y. 10504
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,053
Int. a.J G03B 7/095. U/02
U.S. G. 354—453 6 Claims
COLOR FILTER
SWITCH
.20
MOVES filter]
-H CAMERA CPU^3l
STOP
STOP UP f
STOP
DEPTH OF
FIELD MEANS
32
-3J
COLOR DELETED
PREVIEW
4,435,058
AUTO-FOCUS CONTROL CAMERA
Fumio Yoshida, Osaka; Yukio Miki, Sakai; Takeshi Egawa, and
Akira Yoshizaki, both of Osaka, all of Japan, assignors to
Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,469
Gaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 27, 1981, 56-29110;
Mar. 5, 1981, 56-32262; Mar. 5, 1981, 56-32263; Mar. 5, 1981,
56-32264; Mar. 5, 1981, 56-32265
Int. G.3 G03B 3/10. 1/00
U.S. G. 354—403 30 Gaims
SB M
6S 64
J— H^H^
n
1. Auto-focus control camera comprising;
means for photoelectrically obtaining information for auto-
fcjcus adjustment, said obtaining means being of a type in
which the time taken to complete the information depends
on the scene brightness;
means for adjusting the focus of the camerii in accordance
with said information;
means for effecting the film winding-up operation;
means for detecting that the time taken for said obtaining
means to complete the information is greater than a prede-
termined period, to disable the focus adjustment by said
adjusting means; and
means for causing the camera exposure in response to the
completion of the focus adjustment and the completion of
the film winding-up operation when the time greater than
the predetermined period is not detected by said detecting
means, and in response to the detection by said detecting
means and the completion of the film winding-up opera-
tion when the time greater than the predetermined period
is detected by said detecting means.
1. In a camera having a variable diaphragm and a shutter,
means to automatically determine the proper taking aperture
of said diaphrogm for photographing a scene, means to close
down the diaphragm to the determined aperture without oper-
ation of the shutter, a taking lens and an eyepiece viewfinder
viewing the scene through an optical path through the taking
lens and the diaphragm; characterized in having a system to
provide a partially color deleted view of the scene through the
eyepiece viewfinder, said system including means, selectively
under operator control, to position a color filter in the optical
path of the viewfinder, means automatically upon said selec-
tion to determine the said taking aperature and compensate for
said filter, the compensation permitting sufficient light to com-
pensate for said filter, and means to close down said variable
diaphragm to said compensated aperture without operating the
shutter, to thereby present a partially color-deleted view to
said viewfinder.
4,435,060
AUTOMATIC nLM WIND-UP CAMERA
Takumi Kobayashi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Asahi Kogaku
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,768
Gaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 6, 1981, 56-15619
Int. G.3 G03B 1/12
U.S. G. 354—173.1 5 Claims
1. An automatic film wind-up having a camera body pro-
vided with a film wind-up mechanism, a shutter charging
mechanism, a shutter front curtain and a shutter back curtain
interlocked with the shutter charging mechanism to travel
when the shutter is released, a wind-up signalling member
which is actuated upon completion of travel of the shutter back
curtain, a film frame indexing mechanism, a counter for count-
206
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
ing the number of exposed frames and an automatic fllm wind-
up drive motor for driving said film wind-up mechanism and
said shutter charging mechanism and capable of attaching
removably three types of film backs formed with a means for
signalling attachment of the respective films of roll film No,
120, roll film No. 220 and 70 mm film, characterized in that said
camera body is provided with
a film take-up control member for controlling automatic
leading end feed and automatic take-up corresponding to
the number of respective exposed frames of said three
types of films,
a ratchet wheel pivoting integrally with the take-up control
member,
a first film controlling member interlocked with said take-up
control member to control the roll film No. 120,
a second film controlling member interlocked with said
take-up control member to control the roll film No. 220,
a holder member interlocked with said first and second film
controlling members to maintain said automatic wind-up
drive motor at wind-up condition,
a wind-up operative member regulated by the holder mem-
ber and said film frame indexing mechanism,
a wind-up switch interlocked with the wind-up operative
member to start and stop said automatic wind-up drive
motor,
a film start signalling member which is actuated when the
wind-up switch is turned on to start the wind-up of film,
a reset switch interlocked with the film start signalling mem-
ber for allowing the exposure counter to count the ex-
posed frames when the reset switch is held in a prescribed
state,
a feed member interlocked with said film indexing mecha-
hism to move intermittently said take-up control member,
first and second stop members interlocked with said feed
member to block return of said take-up control member,
first, second and third signalling members for detecting the
type of film from the film back when any one of said three
types of film backs is attached to said camera body and
first, second and third releasing members interlocked with
the signalling members to release said stop members.
stopping means arranged to bring the driving action to a stop
after completion of photographing of all film frames;
detection means for detecting completion of film rewinding,
said detection means being arranged to generate a detec-
tion signal when completion of film rewinding is detected;
and
release means which releases said stopping means from the
stopping action thereof in response to the detection signal
from said detection means, said release means being ar-
ranged to operate the driving means until completion of
winding by releasing the stopping means from the stop-
ping action thereof.
4,435,061
ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE DEVICE FOR CAMERA
Hidehiko Fukahori, Kanagawa; Tothikazu Ichiyanagi; Tomonori
Iwashita, both of Tokyo; Yukio Mashimo, Kanagawa; Akio
Sunouchi, and Masahisa Fqjino, both of Tokyo, all of Japan,
assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kalsha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 384,339
Qaims priority, appUcation Japui, Jun. 11, 1981, 56-90031
lot. a.^ G03B 1/18
U.S. a. 354—173.11 8 Claims
1. An electric motor driven camera comprising:
driving means for winding film inserted in the camera;
control means arranged to stop said driving means upon
completion of winding and to allow the driving means to
perform a driving action upon completion of an exposure
action;
4,435,062
nLM PROCESSING APPARATUS
Vincent L. Cocco, Wakefield, Mass., assignor to Polaroid Cor-
poration, Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Dec. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453,801
Int. a.3 G03D 5/06
VS. a. 354—303 18 Qaims
1. A film processing apparatus for use with a liquid applica-
tor packaging web of the type including an elongated flexible
carrier sheet, a plurality of liquid applicator pads secured to
one side of the carrier sheet in spaced-apart relation along its
length and each yieldably holding a supply of a low viscosity
processing liquid adapted to be applied to an outer surface of a
sheet-like photosensitive film unit to initiate processing
thereof, and an elongated flexible cover sheet superposed with
the carrier sheet in covering relation to the applicator pads, the
carrier and cover sheets being selectively releasably sealed
together in facing areas thereof surrounding each of the appli-
cator pads to form a plurality of serially connected containers
on the web, each enclosing a corresponding one of the applica-
tor pads therein, said film processing apparatus comprising:
means for supporting such a film unit;
means for supporting such a liquid applicator packaging
web;
means for advancing the web relative to said web support
means in predetermined increments to separate the cover
sheet from the carrier sheet and successively unseal and
open each of the containers and locate the corresponding
uncovered applicator pad therein at a processing position;
and
means for bringing an uncovered applicator pad located at
said processing position into liquid-yielding contact with
the outer surface of the film unit to apply the liquid
thereto to initiate processing of the film unit.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
207
4,435,063
AUTORADIOGRAPHY METHOD USING A SLIDE RACK
Niirten N. Gunduz, and Dincer H. Gunduz, both of Pittsburgh,
Pa., auignors to University of Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,295
Int. a.J G03D 13/08
U.S. a. 354—315 ^ 7 Qaims
opposed relationships with the other ends of the light-
beam transmission-and-convergence means; and
means for displacing at least one of said first and second
assemblies toward or away from the surface of said photo-
sensitive medium by an extremely small distance, said
displacing means comprising at least one piezoelectric
element interposed between a stationary assembly sup-
porting means and said second assembly or between said
second assembly and said first assembly.
1. A method of processing specimens comprising
securing said specimens to a plurality of slide members,
providing rack means having separators defining a plurality
of slide-receiving slots,
introducing said slides into said slots,
immersing said slides while in said rack in a bath of photo-
graphic emulsion,
removing said rack from said bath,
exposing said emulsion-covered slides to radiation while said
slides are in said rack,
developing said exjjosed slides, and
removing said developed slides from said rack, whereby said
specimen-bearing slides will be coated with emulsion,
exposed and developed without the need for individual
handling of said slides after iniual introduction of said
slides into said rack.
4,435,064
OPTICAL EXPOSURE UNIT FOR
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC PRINTING DEVICE
ToshUi Tsukada, and Kazuo Morinaga, both of Kanagawa, Ja-
pan, auignors to Ricoh Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 277,040
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 28, 1980, 55-88371
Int. Q.3 G03B 27/00; G03G 15/00
U.S. Q. 355—1 8 Qaims
fghij
8. In an electrophotographic printing device of the type in
which electrostatic latent images of characters and the like are
formed on the surface of a photosensitive medium, an exposure
unit comprising:
a first assembly of a plurality of light-beam transmission-and-
convergence means whose one ends are disposed in op-
posed relationships with said surface of said photosensi-
tive medium;
a second assembly of a corresponding plurality of light-emit-
ting diodes whose light-emitting apertures are disposed in
4,435,065
ELECTROGRAPHIC DEVELOPING APPARATUS WITH
TONER FLOW DIRECTOR
Kenichi Wada, Osaka, Japan, assignor to Minolta Camera
Kabushiki Kalsha. Osaka, Japan
Filed Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,646
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1981, 56-48683
Int. Q.J G03G 15/08. 15/09
U.S. Q. 355—3 DD 8 Qaims
H
1. An electrographic developing apparatus which com-
prises:
a developer container having means dividing it into a toner
supply section and a developing section and adapted to be
normally substantially filled with a powder developer in
the form of a mixture of a carrier and a toner;
means adjacent the developing section for developing latent
electrostatic images on an image bearing member by the
use of the developer contained in the developing section
of the container;
a toner tank above said toner supply section and adapted to
contain a supply of toner therein and having a bottom
adapted to be contacted by the developer contained in the
toner supply section of the container, said bottom having
a toner passing aperture therein;
a movable member movable along said bottom for opening
and closing the toner passing aperture;
means connected to said movable member for moving said
movable member to open the toner passing aperture when
toner is to be supplied and for holding the movable mem-
ber in an aperture closing position when no toner is to be
supplied; and
developer moving means for, when the level of said devel-
oper is sufficiently high, physically contacting and forci-
bly moving a portion of the developer from the develop-
ing section of the container into the toner supply section
during a time at least when said movable member is
moved to the position where the toner passing aperture is
open and the toner is being supplied for raising the level of
the top of the developer contained in the supply section of
the container relative to the level of the top of the devel-
oper in the developing section.
208
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,066
ION MODULATING ELECTRODE WITH IMPROVED
TRANSMISSION FACTOR
Noriyothi Tarumi, Hachioji; Hanio Iwahashi, Fussa; Masahiko
Matsunawa, and Hirothi Tokunaga, both of Hachioji, all of
Japan, aasignora to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,878
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 16, 1981, 56-36489;
Mar. 16, 1981, 56-36490; Mar. 16, 1981, 56-36491
Int. a.' G03G 15/00
\iS. a. 355—3 SC 4 Oalms
r
^
I — 1 — 1
Is 4a 4a I T
w . : \., ..V -1-
VI
1. An electrostatic reproducing apparatus comprising an ion
generator, an ion modulating electrode constructed of a con-
tinuous layer of conductive material and a segmented layer of
conductive materia! with an insulating layer sandwiched in
between, and having a plurality of apertures so that the flow
rate of the ions which are generated by said ion generator and
allowed to pass through said apertures may be controlled by a
picture image signal to be recorded, recording means for re-
ceiving the ions which have passed through said apertures, and
means for enhancing the ion transmission factor of said aper-
tures, said enhancing means generating an electric field of at
least 0.5 KV/mm between the segmented layer of conductive
material of said ion modulating electrode and said recording
means.
4,435,067
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING AND
nXING POWDER IMAGES
Willem T. Draai, Blerick; Jozef J. A. Pleyers, Baarlo, and
Nicolaas P. J. Kuin, Grubbenvorst, all of Netherlands, assign-
ors to Oc^Nederland B.V., Venlo, Netherlands
Filed Aug. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 407,127
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Aug. 19, 1981,
8103867
Int. CL' G03G 15/16. 15/20
U.S. a. 355—3 TR 8 Oaims
thereon; and thereafter contacting the moistened powder
image on the support surface with a said receiving support
under pressure, thereby transferring and fixing the powder
image in moist and softened state onto the receiving support.
4,435,068
APPARATUS FOR ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY
Benzion Landa, Edmonton, Canada, assignor to Savin Corpora-
tion, Stamford, Conn.
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,261
Int. a.3 G03G 15/14
U.S. CI. 355—3 R 10 Qaims
1. Electrophotographic apparatus for producing a copy of a
document on a sheet from a sheet supply location and for
delivering said copy at a location remote from said supply
location including in combination, means for moving a sheet
from said supply location to said delivery location, and electro-
photographic means for producing the initial portion of said
copy in the course of movement of said sheet from said supply
location to said delivery location and the terminal portion of
said copy with the leading edge of said sheet stopped at said
delivery location.
4,435,069
nXING APPARATUS FOR ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY
Masamichi Sato, Saitama, Japan, assignor to Fi^i Photo Film
Co., Ltd., Asaka, Japan
Filed Sep. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 414,723
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 4, 1981, 56-138378
Int. a.3 G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355—3 FU 8 Claims
1. A method of transferring and fixing powder images onto
receiving supports such as of paper, which comprises trans-
porting through a treatment zone, on a moving, resiliaitly
deformable, hydrophobic support surface, a powder iimge
formed of water-absorbent particles that soften on absorttng
water; in said zone covering the hydrophobic support surface
and the powder image on said surface with water and directly
afterward squeegeeing water from said surface and the image
1. A fixing apparatus for use in electrophotography compris-
ing; a fixing drum including an infrared radiation heat source in
the interior thereof, said fixing drum being made of a transpar-
ent material permeable to infrared radiation and having an
outer layer of a material which absorbs part of the infrared
radiation.
March 6. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
209
4,435,070
VARIABLE MAGNinCATION COPYING APPARATUS
Tadayuki Kiti^ima, Yokohama, Japan, ajMignor to Canon Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 318,986, Nov. 6, 1981, abandoned. This
application Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 428,271
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 10, 1980, 55-157953
Int. a.J G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355—8 23 Claims
4,435,071
METHOD AND MEANS FOR REDUCING FRAME
EFFECT IN ELECTROGRAPHIC IMAGES ON
MICROFICHE
MaafM R. Kuehnle, 6 Linmoor Ter., Lexington, Mass. 02173
Continuation of Ser. No. 941,658, Sep. 11, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 716,591, Aug. 23, 1976,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 646,004,
Jan. 2, 1976, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No.
481,133, Jun. 20, 1974, abandoned. This application Mar. 23,
1981, Ser. No. 246,811
Int. a.' G03G 15/10
U.S. a. 355—10 13 Oaims
■^ "i^ 'xi-
1. A variable magnification copying apparatus capable of
copying originals at least first and second different copying
magnifications, including:
original scanning means for scanning an original to be cop-
ied;
a photosensitive medium on which is formed the optical
image of the original scanned by said original scanning
means;
means for changing the magnification of the optical image of
the original formed on said photosensitive medium corre-
spondingly to a selected copying magnification;
velocity ratio changing means for changing the ratio of the
original scanning velocity of said scanning means to the
movement velocity of said photosensitive medium corre-
spondingly to the selected copying magnification, said
velocity ratio changing means including:
a first shaft connected to a drive source;
a second shaft connected to one of said original scanning
means and said photosensitive medium;
first and second gear means provided on said first shaft;
third and fourth gear means provided on said second shaft;
displaceable fifth gear means adapted, correspondingly to
said first copying magnification, to mesh with both said
first gear means and said third gear means to transmit the
rotational force of said first shaft to said second shaft, and
adapted, correspondingly to said second copying magnifi-
cation, to be disengaged from at least one of said first gear
means and said third gear means; and
displaceable sixth gear means adapted, correspondingly to
said second copying magnification, to mesh with both said
second gear means and said fourth gear means to transmit
the rotational force of said first shaft to said second shaft,
and adapted, during the copying at said first copying
magnification, to be disengaged from at least one of said
second gear means and said fourth gear means.
18 22v
1. An electrographic recording system comprising:
A. means for impressing an electrostatic charge on the frame
area of an electrographic storage medium;
B. means for exposing an image area within said frame area
to a light image of an original so that the image area is
smaller than the frame area, thereby forming a non-
illuminated, charged boundary around the image area,
said exposing means comprising a non-electrically con-
ductive ring extending opposite said boundary, said ring
(1.) establishing the focal plane of the exposing means,
(2.) providing a seal against toner particles around the edge
of the frame area, and
(3.) masking the storage medium along said boundary
from incident light; and
C. means for directing toner particles along the surface of
the medium with an appreciable velocity to that their
momentums across the medium surface inhibit their ten-
dency to be captured by the residual charge on fully
exposed portions of the medium whereby they collect at
the unexposed or only partially exposed portions of the
image area and at said charged boundary so as to improve
the quality of the image on the medium while simulta-
neously forming a sharp, distinct, uniform dark border
around and touching the image area on the medium.
4,435,072
IMAGE RECORDING APPARATUS WITH LEAKAGE
PREVENTING MICROWAVE nXING DEVICE
Hiroyuki Adachi, Tokyo, and Nagao Hosono, Chofu, both of
Tokyo, Japan, assignors to Canon KabushikJ Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327.686
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 11, 1980, 55-174898;
Dec. 11, 1980, 55-174899; Dec. 11, 1980. 55-174902
Int. a.J G03G 15/20
U.S. O. 355—3 FU 48 Qaims
1. An image recording apparatus comprising
an outer casing;
an image formation station for causing a recording medium
to bear a visualized image;
a fixing station for applying high-frequency waves to
thereby fix the visualized image on the recording medium
thereby to record the image;
means for conveying the recording medium along a convey-
ance path from said image formation station until the
recording medium passes through said fixing station;
first means for preventing the high-frequency waves from
210
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
leaking out of said casing of said image recording appara-
tus; and
second means provided in said casing for preventing the
high-frequency waves from leaking out of the fixing sta-
tion into said image recording apparatus.
4,435,073
TONER REMOVAL APPARATUS
Richard L. Miller, Bumsville, Minn., assignor to Xerox Corpo-
ration, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,341
Int. a.3 G03G 15/00
UA a. 355—15 11 Clainu
VACUUVI
SOUBCE
PHOnSRECEPTOP
1. Apparatus for removing toner particles from a charge
retentive surface, said apparatus comprising:
a cylindrical brush adapted for rotation in contact with said
surface;
first means for interfering with the rotation of said brush to
thereby cause fibers of said brush to flex and simulta-
neously electrostatically charge said brush to a first polar-
ity;
second means for interfering with the rotation of said brush
to thereby cause fibers of said brush to flex and simulta-
neously electrostatically charge said brush to a second
polarity; and
means for creating an airstream across said first and second
means whereby said the charge on said fibers is reversed
while said fibers are in the airstream.
4,435,074
CLEANING APPARATUS FOR
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY COMPRISING LUBRICANT
nLM APPLICATOR MEANS
Akira Midorikawa; Kei^i Kojini^ and Kazuo Uchinura, all of
Tokyo, Japan, assignors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,190
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 23, 1980, 55-53790
Int. a.i G03G 27/00
MS. a. 355—15 11 Qaims
600
626
1. A cleaning apparatus for an electrophotographic copying
machine including a photosensitive member, the cleaning ap-
paratus removing residual toner particles from the photosensi-
tive member and comprising;
scraper blade means engaging with the photosensitive mem-
ber to scrapingly remove residual toner particles there-
from:
applicator means for applying a film-forming material onto
the circumference of the photosensitive member; and
drive means for moving the applicator means into and out of
contact with the photosensitive member in dependence on
a parameter indicating a varying operating condition of
the photosensitive member;
whereby a proper amount of the film-forming material is
applied onto the circumference of the photosensitive
member under a varying operating condition of the photo-
sensitive member; and
sensor means for sensing a coefficient of friction of the cir-
cumference of the photosensitive member, the parameter
comprising the sensed coefficient of friction of the circum-
ference of the photosensitive member.
4,435,075
COLOR COPIER
Bemd Payrhammer, Munich, and Volker Weinert, Taufkirchen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to AGFA-Gevaert
Aktiengesellschaft, Lcverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 350,111
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 19,
1981, 3106124
Int. a.3 G03B 27/72. 27/76
U.S. a. 355—35 14 Claims
1. A color copier, particularly a photographic color copier,
comprising:
(a) a plurality of overlapping color filters for adjusting the
color composition of the copying light, each of said filters
including a plurality of filter sections, and the sections of
each filter being rotatable to and from predetermined
positions in which said sections project into the path of the
copying light;
(b) connecting means for each filter connecting the sections
thereof for rotation in unison; and
(c) drive means for each filter operative to rotate said sec-
tions to and from said predetermined positions, each of
said drive means including a rotatable shaft, and one of the
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
211
sections of one of said filters being mounted on the corre-
sponding shaft for rotation therewith, said one filter hav-
ing another section which is mounted on the shaft of
another filter and is rotatable relative to such shaft.
4,435,076
PROJECTED IMAGE POSITIONING METHOD AND
APPARATUS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC ENLARGER
Masuda Tatsunosuke, Kyoto, Japan, assignor to Dainippon
Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd., Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 142,220, Apr. 21, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,674
Claims priority, application Japan, May 10, 1979, 54-58305
Int. a.J G03B 27/52
U.S. a. 355—41 1 Claim
1. Positioning apparatus for a photographic enlarger includ-
ing a film holder, means for adjustably supporting said film
holder in a selected position with respect to a sensitized mate-
rial surface, said apparatus usable with a film containing at least
one frame and having two register marks located at selected
positions adjacent opposite sides of said frame and outside the
image area of said frame, said enlarger having means for pro-
jecting said frame and said register marks toward said surface,
comprising:
at least two mirrors, each one positioned in the path of the
projected image of one said mark, for diverting the pro-
jected image of said mark away from said surface;
at least two sensors, one associated with each mirror, each
comprising a receiver element having at least two electri-
cally independent sections arranged symmetrically, and
arranged to receive the respective diverted image of a
register mark;
means for mounting said sensors at the optical equivalent of
the focal plane of the projected image of said register
mark on said sensitized material surface when said film is
in a position to project the image of said frame onto a
desired frame location on said surface;
means associated with said sensors for developing signals
representative of the position of said projected register
marks on said sensors and therefore of the position and
orientation, relative to said sensitized material surface, of
said enlarged projected image of said register marks; and
means for adjusting the position and orientation of said
holder comprising a feedback circuit connected to the
sensors and adapted to activate at least one pulse motor
for causing movement of the film holder routionally
about its (Renter and rectilinearly in two perpendicular
directions(in the plane of the holder in response to said
signals from said sensors to move said projected image to
said desired frame location.
4,435,077
OPTICAL MAGNinCATION ENLARGEMENT TYPE
COPYING MACHINE
Kazuhiro Suzuki, and Toshikatsu Takahashi, both of Ebina,
Japan, assignors to FiOi Xerox Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 394,961
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 8, 1981, 56-106398 \
Int. Q.3 G03B 27/48. 27/50. 27/70
U.S. Q. 355—51 9 Claims
1. A magnification enlargement copying wherein an image
of a picture on a film projected from observation and copying
comprising:
control means having an input section for receiving data on
the size of said film, the size of a sheet on which an en-
larged image will be copied and the amount of magnifica-
tion of said image;
positioning means receiving said film and moving it from an
observation position to a film scanning start position;
optical means for magnifying said film or a portion thereof
and projecting it for observation and copying;
arithmetic means associated with said control means for
determining a distance between said observation position
and a scanning start position from a size of a picture on
said film and calculating film scanning speed from a mag-
nification from said optical means to control said position-
ing means; and
copying means responsive to an image projected by said
optical means and controlled by said control means.
4,435,078
ELECTRONIC LIGHT BEAM TESTER
Louis F. dc Brabander, Wezembeek-Oppem, and Luc K. Van
Linthout, Leuven, both of Belgium, assignors to Fonds d'E*
tudes pour la Securitc Routierc A.s.b.1., Brussels, Belgium
Filed JuB. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,183
Claims priority, application Belgium, Jun. 27, 1980, 201.209
Int. Q.J GOIV 1/42
U.S. Q. 356—121 10 Claiou
1. A device for checking the orientation and luminous inten-
sities of a light beam comprising, in combination:
a screen having a set of photocell transducers spaced apart
from each other in selected lateral directions, the trans-
ducers arranged to produce individual output electrical
signals representative of the intensity of light striking the
212
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
respective transucers, and including means for orienting
the screen relative to a reference direction;
means for processing at least selected ones of said transducer
signals to obtain a product signal representative of said
selected transducer signals multiplied by a calibrated
(constant) proportionality factor;
means for combining and processing at least selected sets of
said transducer signals to produce sub-set signals;
e X
means for comparing at least some of said product signals
with said sub-set signals to produce comparator signals
representative of the relative strength ratio (i.e., greater or
lesser) between certain ones or sets of said product signals
and certain ones or sets of said sub-set signals;
means for directing said comparator signals to an output
utilization means; i.e., a visual display.
4,435,079
APPARATUS FOR TESTING LENSES BY DETERMINING
BEST FOCUS
Robert P. Hennick, Dudley, Mass., assignor to American Opti-
cal Corporation, Southbridge, Mass.
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,183
Int. a.3 GOIB 9/00; GOIJ 7/00
U.S. a. 356—123 11 Oalms
•rcma
MOTM
THKSMOiO
J~=5~l.
J — \ — T^
'■.'..:|Ti1itii.|.iiimili[:,.iitfc|"jL.-
pwit eotwTtfl-
im I mini I
coiwT«0| eouiir*4| coumtstI count
LOCATtoii I LoeariOM
iT*B COUMTaO
iTO»
LOcanoM
1. A signal processing system for determining an optimum
point in an operational cycle consisting of a plurality of sequen-
tial periods, comprising:
a signal source;
means responsive to said signal source for producing pulses
during said plurality of sequential periods;
selecting means for selecting said pulses which are above a
minimum threshold, and producing selected pulses;
counter logic means for counting said selected pulses during
said plurality of sequential periods, and producing a pulse
count for each respective period;
pulse count com[>arison means responsive to the pulse count
for each respective period for detecting at least two data
points at which the pulse count of said counter logic
means reaches a predetermined level; and
data computing means for providing an output correspond-
ing to the optimum point located equally spaced between
said two data points. -
4,435,080
ARRANGEMENT FOR MEASUREMENT OF DYNAMIC
PROPERTIES OF MICROPARTICLES
Zdenek Maly, NationaUtrasse 7, Kreuzlingen CH-8280, Swit-
zerland, and VladislaT Blazek, Konradlnstr. 2, Munich D-
8000, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,983
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, May 23, 1980,
4084/80
Int. a.s GOIN 21/85. 21/53
U.S. a. 356—426 g Claims
1. A device for measuring the dynamic properties of mi-
croparticles which comprises: at least two flat measuring bod-
ies spaced from each other, with the disunce therebetween
being adjustable and the space therebetween being filled with
a suspension of microparticles to be measured, wherein at least
one of said bodies is movable so that a defined magnitude of
fluid shear stress is generated in the suspension; means for
passing a light beam through both bodies and said suspension
so that during rotation and when rotation is stopped different
diffraction patterns are generated; and means for measuring
said diffraction patterns, thereby extracting useful data con-
cerning the dynamic properties of the microparticles.
4,435,081
CONCRETE MIXING PLANTS WITH ELEVATOR
WHEEL
Dino Del Fabbro, Basaldella di Campoformido, Italy, assignor to
Officine Riunite Udine Spa, Italy
FUed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,371
Claims priority, application Italy, Mar. 20, 1981, 83345 A/81
Int. a.J BOIF 15/02
U.S. a. 366—18 6 Qaims
1. Concrete mixing plant for dosing and mixing aggregate
materials and cement inside a concrete mixer or mixing ma-
chine, comprising a container to collect aggregate, a conveyor
and chute means for delivering cement to said mixer, weighing
and/or dosing means supporting said aggregate container and
cement conveyor and chute means, a concrete mixer having a
charging inlet, a plurality of legs and/or supports to uphold
said aggregate container, cement conveyor and chute means
and weighing means, and an elevator wheel for receiving and
premixing the aggregates, said wheel being located between
the container and the concrete mixer and connected frontally
to the charging inlet, said cement chute means passing through
March 6. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
213
the interior space of said elevator wheel, a portion of said
container positioned within the interior space of said elevator
wheel said elevator wheel delivering aggregate onto cement
being delivered to said mixer.
4,435,082
ROTARY DRUM MIXING DEVICE
Robert J. Bishop, 1083 Bloomfleld Ave., West Caldwell, N.J.
07006
Filed May 21, 1982, Ser. No. 380,530
Int. a.J B28C 5/18. 5/20 7/16
U.S. a. 366—47 26 Oalms
1. A mixing device comprising a unitary frame extending
front to rear of the device, said frame having a base portion
with a transverse member forming the front end of said frame
and providing a pivot fulcrum at said front end, a short con-
necting portion joined to said transverse member, said con-
necting portion terminating in an angularly, forwardly and
upwardly extending portion providing a bearing portion at the
rear end of said frame, the angularity of said bearing portion
being about 33 -h with respect to the plane of said base portion,
a generally pear shaped mixing drum providing large and small
ends, said drum being closed and substantially flat at the large
end and open at the small end, said closed end having an elon-
gated axial socket, said axial socket slidably engaging said
bearing end of the frame to rotatably support said drum with
its axis at said angle of approximately 33*, axially extending rib
means on the inner surface of said drum for lifting'bf^tents in
the rotation thereof, external means of said drum facilitating
application of circumferential force to rotate the drum, the
length of the connecting portion of said frame being sucn as to
dispose said pivot fulcrum slightly forwardly of the center of
gravity of the drum, readily engageable and disengageable
means on said bearing portion and socket to support the drum
against axial movement when the assemblage is tilted around
said fulcrum to discharge drum contents, said bearing portion
being the only support for said drum, and said drum being
readily removable from said frame upon disengagement of said
last named means.
4,435,083
SELF-CLAMPING ROTARY VIBRATOR AND MOUNT
THEREFOR
Carl G. Matson, Little Rock, Ark., assignor to Hamilton Equip-
ment Co., Inc., Fort Worth, Tex.
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,500
Int. a.J BOIF 11/00
U.S. a. 366—114 11 aairas
1. A rotary vibrator energized by driving means coupled
thereto and mounting assembly therefor comprising:
a rotor coupled to said driving means and displaced about an
axis in response thereto;
a cylindrical housing having a circular cross-section encom-
passing and coupled to said rotor so as to rotate in a migra-
tory manner about said axis in a direction opposite to that
of said orbiting rotor, said housing including a first clamp-
ing strip thereon; and
a cylindrical casing having a circular cross-section and
adapted to be affixed to a structure to be vibrated and
axially positioned with respect to said housing and in close
proximity thereto, said casing including a second clamp-
ing strip wherein the migratory rotation of said housing
causes the wedging engagement of said first and second
clamping strips with the adjacent inner surface of said
casing and adjacent outer surface of said housing, respec-
tively, so as to form first and second points of contact
defined by said first clamping strip and the inner surface of
said casing and said second clamping strip and the outer
surface of said housing, respectively, and a third point of
contact distally located with respect to said first and sec-
ond points of contact between said housing and said cas-
ing.
4,435,084
AUTOMATIC STIRRER FOR CUP
Tom L. Calhoun, and Bill L. Calhoun, both of P. O. Box 447,
Buttonwillow, Calif. 93206
Filed Dec. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 452,019
Int. a.J BOIF 7/18
U.S. Q. 366—130 6 Claims
1. A beverage cup defining an upwardly opening receptacle
including upstanding peripherally extending sides and closed
at its lower end portion by a false bottom wall extending be-
tween and sealed relative to said sides above the lower ends
thereof, said receptacle sides extending downwardly below
said false bottom wall and defining a downwardly opening
recess therebelow bound by the lower end portions of said
sides, said false bottom wall having a central upstanding bore
formed therethrough, an upstanding shaft sealingly joumaled
through said bore and including blade means carried by the
upper end thereof and closely overlying said false bottom wall,
bearing means supported from the lower end portions of said
sides below said false bottom wall and with which the lower
portion of said shaft spaced below said false bottom wall is
guidingly engaged, said lower portion of said shaft including
means operative to allow rotary torque input to said shaft, said
bearing meant including a bottom wall secured between the
lower end portions of said sides below said false bottom wall,
a central portion of said bottom wall including a bearing jour-
nal in which said lower portion of said shaft is joumaled, said
means operative to allow rotary torque input to said shaft
214
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
' March 6, 1984
comprising a worm wheel mounted on said shaft, a miniature
electric motor mounted on one of said walls between the latter
and having a rotary output shaft equipped with a worm gear
meshed with said worm wheel, a battery supported between
said false bottom wall and said bottom wall and electrically
connected to said motor by circuitry having a manually opera-
ble control switch serially connected therein, a laterally offset
upstanding tubular handle having an upper end directed in-
wardly toward, formed integrally with and closed by one
peripheral portion of an upper portion of the side wall of said
cup and its lower end opening through a lower portion of said
cup side wall between said bottom wall and said false bottom
wall, said switch being recessed in said upper end of said han-
dle and said circuitry including portions thereof electrically
connecting said battery to said motor and extending through
the hollow interior of said handle.
4,435,086
UQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY DEVICE FOR WORLD
TIME WRISTWATCH
YotUaki Kato, Higashimurayama, Japan, auignor to Otizen
Watch Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 22,496, Mar. 21, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,985
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 25, 1978, 53-034563
Int. a.' G04B 19/22
U.S. a. 368-22 12 Claim.
JOb
4,435,085
MIXER FOR USE IN PULP PROCESSES
Oscar Luthi, Nashua, and Lawrence A. Carlsmith, Amherst,
both of N.H., assignors to IngersoU-Rand Company, Wood-
cliff Lake, N J.
FUed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 406,112
Int. C\? BOIF 15/02. 5/14
VJS. a. 366—155 10 Claims
1. A mixer for mixing pulp with a bleaching agent compris-
ing: a generally cylindrical housing; a pulp inlet adapted to
feed pulp into the housing; a pulp outlet; a rotor coaxially
mounted within the housing, said rotor having a wheel having
radially extending grooves which are located in the pulp flow
path between the pulp inlet and the pulp outlet, at least a part
of the radial portion of the wheel with the radial grooves
defining with a part of the housing an annular high intensity
mixing zone; and at least one bleaching agent inlet located so
that intensive mixing of the bleaching agent and pulp will
occur in the high intensity mixing zone, whereby the pulp
flows from the pulp inlet, through the annular high intensity
mixing zone, and out the pulp outlet.
1. A liquid crystal display device for a worid time display
electronic wristwatch, comprising:
an upper glass substrate;
a plurality of time zone indicating segment electrodes
formed on an inner surface of said upper glass substrate in
such a manner that said plurality of time zone indicating
segment electrodes provide a shape of a world map, each
of said plurality of time zone indicating segment elec-
trodes having an external electrode terminal to selectively
turn on and off said each of said plurality of time zone
indicating segment electrodes;
a lower glass substrate spaced from said upper glass sub-
strate;
a common electrode formed on an inner surface of said
lower glass substrate and having a shape corresponding to
said world map, said common electrode facing said plural-
ity of time zone indicating segment electrodes; and
a sealing member disposed between said upper and lower
glass substrates to provide a hermetic sealing;
a liquid crystal material disposed in a space between said
upper and lower glass substrate, by a partition member
made of a sealing material;
a time display section; and
a location display section composed of a plurality of alpha-
betic letters indicating segment electrodes and a common
electrode facing thereto, said location display section
displaying the name of said selected location whose cur-
rent time is displayed by said time display section.
4,435,087
MOTOR-DRIVEN MOVEMENT FOR TIMEPIECE
Akio Matsumoto, Neyagawa, and Kazuhiro Araki, Hirakata,
both of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
FUed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,056
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 14, 1981, 56-6230
Int. a.3 G04B 19/00
VJS. a. 368—76 4 Claims
1. A motor-driven movement for time-pieces comprising a
stator block in which a coil is wound on a core of a ring shape
and formed of a round-sectioned and bar-shaped magnetic
material and magnetic poles formed of respective end portions
of said core are opposed in the radial direction of said ring
shape of the core, one of said end portions of said core being
positioned in the peripheral direction and the other end portion
being bent to an L-shape, a rotor arranged between respective
said njagnetic poles, an output gear train including a minute
hand wheel disposed as displaced in the radial direction from
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
21S
the center of the ring shape, and a circuit block for controlling
power supply to said coil to operate said output gear train
stepwise, said stator block, rotor, output gear train and circuit
block being arranged within a pair of mutually fltting lower
127
4,435,088
BATTERY SWITCH PLATE FOR A TIMEPIECE
Leonard M. Dorftnan, Campbell, Calif., auignor to Timcx Cor-
poration, Waterbury, Conn.
Filed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,656
Int. a.3 G04C 23/02
U.S. a. 368—88 8 Gaims
»/
««' M/
1. A timepiece module assembly including a rear pod having
an aperture, a battery having first and second terminals, battery
contact means electrically connected to said first battery termi-
nal, a lead frame having a plurality of conducting members a
number of which are electrically connected on one side to an
integrated circuit chip and on the other side to an electroopti-
cal display, at least two spaced resilient switch contacts con-
nected to said conducting members, and a battery switch plate,
said battery switch plate comprising:
(a) a substantially U-shaped electrically conductive frame
removably received by said aperture and supported by
said rear pod and removably electrically connected to at
least one of said lead frame conducting members, said
frame providing support for the battery and making elec-
trical contact with said second battery terminal, and
(b) at least two switch plate members extending oppositely
outward from the end portions of said subsuntially U-
shaped frame in spaced apart underlying relation to said
switch contacts for providing for correction and change
of the timekeeping function of the timepiece when a pre-
determined switch contact is independently forced into
electrical contact with a corresponding underlying switch
plate member.
4,435,089
POWER aRCUIT FOR AN ELECTRONIC TIMEPIECE
Hiroyuki ChUiara, Suwa, and Masuo Kitaao, Matsumoto, both
of Japan, aMignors to KabushUd Kaisha Suwa Saikoaha,
Tokyo and Shimauchi Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha, Nagano, both
of, Japan
Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 378,947
Oaims priority, appUcation Japan, May 18, 1981, 56-74535
Int. a.} G04C 10/00
U.S. a. 368—204 10 Gaims
and upper casings slightly larger than said sutor block, a sector
base having an arcuate part disposed along one end portion of
said core and two radial sides disposed along the other end
portion is provided in one of said casings and a circular recess
for receiving said rotor is formed in said sector base.
1. A power circuit for an electronic timepiece, comprising:
a power supply providing a voltage output;
a first load in series with first switch means, said first load
and first switch means being connected in series across
said power supply, said first load drawing a heavy current
from said power supply when said first switch means is
closed;
means for placing said first load in an ON state;
a second load and second switch means being connected in
series across said power supply, said second load drawing
a low current;
a circuit means for periodically opening and closing said first
switch means while said first load is in said ON sute;
circuit means for periodically opening and closing said sec-
ond switch means, said second switch means being
adapted to open when said first switch means is closed and
vice versa;
a power capacitor connected in parallel with said second
load, said power capacitor discharging through said sec-
ond load when said second switch means is open and
charging from said power supply through said second
switch means when said second switch means is closed,
said second load being isolated from said power supply
when said first load is activated by closing said first switch
means.
4,435,090
STATIC PICK-UP FOR TIMEPIECE
Pierre-Ernest Jaccard, Bieane, Switzerland, assignor to Societc
Suisse pour I'lndustrie Horlogerc Management Serricas S.A.,
Bicnne, Switzerland
FUed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,291
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 7, 1980,
1796/80
Int. a.i G04B 29/00
VJS. a. 368—320 13 Claims
1. A static pick-up for a timepiece comprising at least two
juxtaposed touch sensitive capacitive electrodes arranged to be
manually actuated and electronic means arranged and adapted
to detect each position of a finger which corresponds to at least
216
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
one symbol in the form of a digit, a letter or special sign, the
arrangement being fashioned as a compact unit including an
electrically insulating shock resistant substrate bearing on its
upper surface a first metallization serving as electrodes and on
its lower surface a second metallization serving as conductors
arranged to bear said electronic means and input and output
}e ">'
■»-'.
terminals of the pick-up, said first and second metallizations
being intercoupled by electric coupling means, said electric
coupling means between said first and second metallizations
being comprised by metallized passages, said electrodes being
covered by a dielectric, said dielectric in turn being covered by
at least one abrasion resistant decorative layer.
4,435,091
DEW POINT SENSOR
Robert J. Nedreski, 5073 Wiltsie Rd., Erie, Pa. 16510
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,656
Int. a.3 GOIN 25/12
U.S. a. 374—20 6 Claims
different from either the gas whose dew point is being
measured or the condensed vapor of said gas but not
necessarily different than both,
said insulation means being a relatively good electrical insu-
lator,
said cooling means being disposed in heat transfer relation
with said insulation means whereby when no condensa-
tion is formed on said reflecting surface a portion of emit-
ted radiation is refracted and a substantial portion of said
radiation from said radiation means is reflected onto said
radiation sensing means allowing current to flow through
said radiation sensing means and said electronic circuit
thereby cooling said insulation means and causing conden-
sation to form on said reflecting surface thereby changing
the ratio of reflectio"n"at said surface whereby said re-
flected radiation to said radiation sensing means is de-
creased and current flow through said circuit is decreased,
reversing the cooling effect of said circuit and providing
an indication of dew point temperature from said tempera-
ture sensing means.
4,435,092
SURFACE TEMPERATURE MEASURING APPARATUS
FOR OBJECT WITHIN FURNACE
Tohni luchi, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Nippon Steel Corpo-
ration, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,192
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 25, 1980, 55-102114;
Jun. 2, 1981, 56-84856
Int. a.3 GOl J 5/06. 5/14
U.S. a. 374—129 8 Claims
OETECTOR
i4-£l_Q-
A/D
CONVERIW
/wm«ETC
UMT
26 H
30-
r
4/0
CONVERTDR
if^
^
5 32
f DETECTOR
Eb(Ti)
y//.'^'''.'.
^T=
16-
"f4=
v^-^-^^-^i
I (
!»=*
26
6
3'
Is
I2^^l
t^
/
/
/
Tz€t
2ZZZZZZZZ2ZZZZZZZZJ
r-"*
/// \y\\\
(-^
.13
1. A dew point sensor comprising,
an insulation means having a first side and a second side,
said first side of said insulation means having a reflecting
surface on said first side,
radiation-emitting means on said sensor on said second side
of said insulation means,
electronic circuit means including radiation sensing means
and cooling means and temperature sensing means on the
second side of said insulation means,
output means connected to said circuit means,
said insulation means being relatively transparent to the
radiation emitted by said radiation-emitting means,
said reflecting surface being adapted to be exposed to a gas
containing vapor and adapted to condense said vapor at a
temperature at the dew point of said gas,
said insulation means having a refractive index substantially
1. An apparatus for measuring the surface temperature of an
object being heated in a furnace, said apparatus comprising:
a shielding cylinder having a substantidly closed end and an
open end, said shielding cylinder being adapted to be
disposed with said open end facing toward the object
within a furnace; and a shield plate fixed to said shielding
cylinder and formed at its portion facing toward the ob-
ject with an opening communicating the exterior of said
shielding cylinder with the interior thereof, so as to allow
a first radiation emitted depending on the surface tempera-
. ture of the object to enter said shielding cylinder and pass
toward said outer end;
said shielding cylinder being configured and adapted to be
positioned relative to the object to block a second radia-
tion emitted depending on the high temperature atmo-
sphere within the furnace from entering said shielding
cylinder, and said shield plate being configured to serve as
a reference radiation source means for emitting from its
inner wall portion disposed within said cylinder and from
its outer wall portion facing toward the object, a third
radiation which, on the one hand, is directed from said
inner wall portion toward said closed end and, on the
other hand, is directed from said outer wall portion and
combined with said first radiation entering said shielding
cylinder means, whereby the combined effects of said first
and third radiations enter said shielding cylinder through
said opening;
radiation detecting means provided at said closed end of said
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
217
shielding cylinder for separately detecting said combined arm connected to the rear portion of the base block and trans-
effect of said first and third radiations and a sole effect of versely overlying said groove and being resiliently engageabie
said third radiation; and with such instrument to retain the instrument in the groove and
means for determining the surface temperature of said object to ijmj, angular displacement of the instrument relative to the
from the values of said combined effect and said sole effect
detected by said detecting means.
4,435,093
PYROMETER WITH SIGHTING WINDOW
CLEANLINESS MONITOR
Richard H. Krause; Thomas J. Pfeiffer, and Vincent V. Horvath,
all of Bethlehem, Pa., assignors to Bethlehem Steel Corpora-
tion, Bethlehem, Pa.
Filed Dec. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,769
Int. a.J GOIJ 5/04, 5/26
U.S. a. 374—129 9 Claims
1. Apparatus for measuring temperature of a high tempera-
ture irradiant mass, said apparatus comprising:
(a) pyrometer means for measuring temperature of said
irradiant mass including:
(i) a first housing closed at one end and having a sighting
window at an opposite end, said sighting window hav-
ing an outside surface subject to environmental matter;
(ii) pyrometer detector means within said first housing for
producing a signal which varies proportional to the
irradiant mass temperature and an optical error induced
by the environmental matter on said outside surface of
said sighting window;
(iii) lens means within said first housing for focusing an
irradiant image of said irradiant mass on said pyrometer
detector means; and
(iv) said first housing fitted within an adjustable mount in
a second housing,
(b) sighting window cleanliness monitor means for detecting
sighting window cleanliness including:
(i) monitor light assembly means for generating a stable
source of light;
(ii) first light conducting fibre optic means within said
second housing and outside said sighting window for
transmitting light from said monitor light assembly
means first through the environmental matter on said
outside surface and thereafter through said sighting
window into said pyrometer detector means; and
(c) circuit means with means for indicating the need for
correcting the irradiant mass temperature signals from
said pyrometer detector means due to optical error in-
duced by the environmental matter on said outside surface
of said sighting window.
lens, wherein said spring arm comprises a generally U-shaped
wire spring member having anchoring elements, said base
block having bores adjacent one side of the groove lockingly
receiving said anchoring elements.
4,435,095
HOT TUB THERMOMETER
James B. Jones, 913 Howard St., Venice, Calif. 90291, and Ron
B. Soyka, Woodland Hills, Calif., assignors to James B.
Jones, Woodland HilU, Calif.
Filed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,913
Int. C1.3 F21V 33/00: F21K 1/14
U.S. a. 374-194 4 Claims
1. In a thermometer for a hot tub or the like, the combination
of:
4,435,094
THERMOMETER SCALE MAGNIHER
Justin J. Shapiro, 620 Hearst Ave., Berkeley, Calif. 94710
Filed Jun. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 391,453
Int. a.3 GOIK 7/06
U.S. CI. 374—191 11 Claims
1. A magnifying indicator for an elongated tubular instru-
ment of the type having a linearly extending scale, said indica-
tor comprising a main body including a base block and an
upstanding lens rigidly secured on the base block, the rear
portion of the base block being formed with a vertical groove
in which the elongated instrument is receivable, and a spring
a housing;
means for supporting said housing in a hot tub or the like in
a first orientation, with said housing being manually
moveable to a second opposite orientation;
a temperature sensor and indicator positioned within said
housing;
a light bulb carried in said housing for directing light onto
said temperature indicator;
an orientation sensitive power supply for said bulb for ener-
gizing said bulb when said housing is in said second orien-
tation, said power supply including a battery and a mer-
cury switch connected in series with said bulb;
a cap on said housing adjacent said power supply; and
a pair of electrical conducting plates with an insulating
spacer therebetween, and an electrical conducting pin
positioned at said plate,
with said plates connected in series with said bulb, battery
and switch, and
with said cap moveable from a first position with said pin out
of engagement with said pair of plates, to a second posi-
tion with said pin punched through said plates and spacer
electrically bridging said plates.
1040 O.G.-
218
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,096
SEAUNG ARRANGEMENT FOR A ROTATABLE
MEMBER
Aodrew J. Petrot, Oakdale, Pa., awignor to MesU Machine
Conpany, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,374
Int. a.3 F16C ii/74: F16J 15/32
U.S. a. 384-147 11 ciaima
made of a first material and said third portions being made of
a second material, and the respective widths of said portions
being such that the effective moduli of elasticity of said at least
some layers differ inversely with the distance between said at
least some layers and said common center.
1. A sealing arrangement for sealing a stationary bearing
chock to a rotatable roll member neck, said arrangement com-
prising a stationary bearing chock, a rotatable roll member
having a roll member neck coaxially received in a sleeve se-
cured for rotation therewith, said sleeve joumaled for rotation
in said bearing chock, an extension ring annularly secured to
one end of said sleeve, a normally flat washer type annular
thrower seal of elastomeric material annularly engaged be-
tween said extension ring and said one end of said sleeve to
provide a seal therebetween with inner and outer annular
peripheral portions of said thrower seal radially protruding,
said inner peripheral portion of said thrower seal annularly
engaging and stretched over said roll member neck under
elastic deformation of said seal for annular static seal engage-
ment therebetween, a peripheral side face of said outer periph-
eral portion of said thrower seal annularly engaging an annular
seal rubbing surface of said bearing chock under elastic defor-
mation of said seal to provide an annular rubbing seal therebe-
tween.
4,435,097
LAMINATED BEARING STRUCTURES
Robert R. Peterson, Hudson, Mass., assignor to Barry Wright
Corporation, Newton Lower Falls, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 806,811, Jun. 15, 1977, abandoned.
This application Mar. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 17,823
Int. a.^ F16C 27/06. 27/08
VJS. a.^84-221 10 Clainu
1. A compressive load carrying laminated bearing compris-
ing a plurality of alternating resilient layers and non-extensible
layers generally concentrically disposed about a common
center, at least some of said resilient layers each comprising at
least first and second end portions at opposite ends of said
bearing and a third portion between said first and second end
poriions, said first and second end portions having a modulus
of elasticity which is different from the modulus of elasticity of
said third portion, said first and second end portions being
4,435,098
OFnCE MACHINE ESCAPEMENT DISENGAGEMENT
AND AUTOMATIC ENGAGEMENT MECHANISM
William E. Oeveland, Homer, N.Y., assignor to SCM Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,156
Int. a.3 B41J 29/56
U.S. a. 400—674 4 ciaima
1. A mechanism for disengaging and engaging an escape-
ment mechanism for use in office machines such as typewriters
and the like wherein the escapement mechanism selectively
engages a carriage rack of a movable carriage to enable incre-
mental carriage advancement, the disengaging and engaging
mechanism comprising:
a pivotal arm connected to the carriage rack for causing
pivotal movement of the carriage rack therewith;
a carriage release lever connected to the carriage rack by a
spring means for maintaining the carriage rack in engage-
ment with the escapement mechanism, said carriage re-
lease lever having an opening therein;
separator means insertable between the opening in the car-
riage release lever and the pivotal arm for pivoting the
arm and causing pivotal movement of the carriage rack
therewith out of engagement with the escapement mecha-
nism; and, means including the separator means abutting a
portion of the typewriter in response to carriage advance-
ment for automatically ejecting the separator means from
between the opening in the carriage release lever and the
pivotal arm, whereby the spring means connected to the
carriage release lever causes the carriage rack to be piv-
oted into engagement with the escapement mechanism.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
219
4,435,099
FOUNTAIN PEN WITH MOTOR FEED
Koichi Murahara, Isehara, Japan, assignor to Piolt, Man-Nen-
Hitsu Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 128,788
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 13, 1979, 54-28970
Int. a.J B43K 5/06. 5/18
U.S. a. 401—145 20 Claims
1. A hand-held fountain pen comprising:
a pen tip having a slit formation region and a slit formed
therein;
an ink holder covering said slit formation region in said pen
tip and shaped so as to form a discrete ink pool formed by
capillary action and/or surface tension between said ink
holder and said pen tip and said ink pool held in place in
any functional position of said pen, said ink pool commu-
nicating with said slit;
a detector provided in said ink pool for detecting the
quantity of ink therein;
a pen holder coupled to said pen tip, said pen holder having
an ink storing section with conduit means opening into
said ink pool, an ink delivery device coupled to said ink
storing section for delivering ink under pressure, an
electric power source for operating said ink delivery
device, and a power delivery circuit connecting said
electric source to said ink delivery device; and
a switch circuit connecting said detector to said power
delivery circuit whereby in response to a detection of the
absence of ink, [the detector] said power delivery circuit
operates said ink delivery device to supply ink to said ink
holder from said ink storing section.
secondary support member and nut and the combined
primary sleeve and nut said secondary support member
and secondary nut being of such a size that upon failure of
the primary sleeve and nut combination said secondary
support member and nut maintain the linkage members in
juxtaposition and hold the primary sleeve and nut combi-
nation in their relative position.
<*
4,435,100
fail-safe ZERO-LOAD HINGE/PIVOT
Ronald L. Cox, Long Beach, Calif., assignor to McDonnell
Douglas Corporation, Long Beach, Calif.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,114
Int. a? B25G 3/00: F16D 1/00: F16G U/OO
U.S. a. 403—27 7 Claims
^435,101
BALL JOINT
Minoru Suglyama, and Shii^i Kaneko, both of Kanagawa, Japan,
assignors to Tokico Ltd., Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,615
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 29, 1980, 55-
191263[U]
Int. CI.' F16C 11/06
U.S. a. 403—122 5 Qaims
1. A ball joint including:
a ball member having a ball end;
a socket member comprising two components formed of
synthetic resin material, having a recess therein for receiv-
ing said ball end of said ball member, said recess having a
ring receiving portion at the upper end thereof; and
an annular metal retaining ring having a split therein of
normally zero gap received in said ring receiving portion
of said recess, said ring being resiliently radially expand-
able, said gap widening during expansion of said ring, said
ring in its unexpanded state having an inner diameter less
than the diameter of said ball end;
said two components being supersonically welded together
so as to irremovably hold said ring in said ring receiving
portion, said ring receiving portion being shaped to permit
said ring to radially expand to receive said ball end there-
through into said recess when said ball end is pushed
downward thereon, and to block said ring from expanding
when said ball end is pulled outward against said ring from
within said recess, so as to block removal of said ball end
from said recess.
1. A fail-safe hinge for joining linkage members comprising:
a primary sleeve inserted through the linkage members
having a flange on one end and threads on the opposite
end and an axial bore;
a primary nut threaded on the sleeve that captures and holds
the linkage members in juxtaposition;
a secondary support member axially inserted inside the
primary sleeve, and having a diameter with a predeter-
mined clearance therein and having a head on one end and
threads on its opposite end; and
a secondary nut in threaded engagement with said secondary
support member, limited travel of said nut limited on said
support member to provide axial clearance between said
4,435,102
TIE DOWN CONNECTOR
Robert G. Smitii, 2707- i Rockefeller La., Redondo Beach, Calif.
90278
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340^63
Int. a.' F16G U/OO
U.S. a. 403—206 7 Claims
1. A tie down connector for releasably securing the end of a
bungee cord comprising the combination of:
a bungee cord;
an elongated body terminated at one end in a holder section
provided with a pair of registered and coaxially disposed
semi-circular U-shaped recessed portions axially spaced a
distance substantially equal to twice the depth of a recess
and terminated at iu other end in a conical, open-ended
receptacle;
said holder semi-circular U-shaped portions characterized as
a retainer arrangement having spaced apart recesses open-
ing from opposite directions;
a connection element integrally disposed and joined between
said pair of semi-circular U-shaped portions to separate
and mainuin said recesses in substantially fixed and spaced
apart relationship;
said bungee cord extending from the small end of the conical
receptacle;
220
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a knot carried on the end of said bungee cord having a
physical size greater than the opening in said conical
4,435,103
CONNECTION FOR FURNITURE FRAME PARTS,
PARTICULARLY OFHCE FURNITURE
Norbert Becker, Weringhauser Strasse 15, IM782 Erwitte 2,
and Norbert Hildebrandt, Griiner WInkel 32, D-4782 Erwitte
1, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,119
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 18.
1980, 3039389
Int. a.3 F16B 7/00. 12/36. 13/00
U.S. a. 403-292 8 claims
U 9 11 16 ,13 8 I
I. A furniture frame comprising first and second frame
members connected to one another, said first frame member
having a dowel extending outwardly thereof, said second
frame member having an elongated opening therein, said
dowel extending into said opening, said dowel having a pair of
spaced exterior planar surfaces which are disposed on opposite
sides of the longitudinal central plane of said dowel and which
are inclined at angles to said longitudinal central plane of said
dowel, said opening having a pair of spaced interior planar
surfaces which are disposed on opposite sides of the longitudi-
nal central plane of said opening and which are inclined at
angles to said longitudinal central plane of said opening, said
inclined exterior dowel surfaces being in abutment with said
inclined interior surfaces of said opening respectively, the
angles of inclination of said exterior dowel surfaces being
slightly greater than the angles of inclination of said interior
opening surfaces, and a screw member in thread engagement
with said second frame member and extending into said open-
ing at right angles to the longitudinal axis of said dowel, said
screw member being positioned to engage an exterior side of
said dowel and to apply a force thereto in a direction trans-
verse to said axis of said dowel to press said inclined exterior
surfaces of said dowel into forceable engagement with said
differently inclined interior surfaces of said opening thereby to
securely connect said first and second furniture frame members
to one another.
4,435 104
RING WEDGE JOINT FOR SOLID OR LAMINATED
WOOD SECTIONS
Kurt Held, Alte Str. 1, D.7218 Trossingen 2, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Aug. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 409,190
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 4.
1981, 3135030 "^ '
Int. a.3 F16B 12/00
U.S. a. 403-332 7a,i„s
receptacle of said body and secured therein so that said
bungee card is retained thereon.
B^
1. Ring wedge joint for solid or laminated wood sections,
such as rod-shaped or bar-shaped wood sections used as chair
parts, tool shanks, window frame members and the like, com-
prising an axially extending first wood section having a first
end surface extending transversely of the axis thereof, an axi-
ally extending second wood section having a second end sur-
face extending transversely of the axis thereof, each of said first
and second end surfaces being axially aligned and lying in a
comma plane substantially normal to said axes and havng
extending therefrom alternating, co-extensive concentric ring
wedges and ring wedge grooves extending around the aligned
axes of said first and second wood sections, said first wood
section having a frusto-conically shaped dowel centered on the
axis thereof spaced radially inwardly from the adjacent said
ring wedge on said first wood section by one said concentric
ring wedge groove, said second wood section having a frusto-
conically shaped wedge groove corresponding to said frusto-
conically shaped dowel encircled by the innermost said ring
wedge on said second wood section, and said ring wedges on
said first end surface and said ring wedge grooves on said
second end surface and said ring wedge grooves on said first
end surface and said ring wedges on said second end surface
are aligned so that said ring wedges on said first and second
ends interfit in surface contacting engagement with said ring
wedge grooves on the other one of said first and second ends,
said ring wedges and said ring wedge grooves are equidistantly
spaced apart on said first and second wood sections and the
axially extending surfaces of the interfitting said ring wedges
and said ring wedge grooves afford a snug meshing of said first
and second wood sections.
4,435,105
ADJUSTABLE LOCK ARRANGEMENT AND METHOD
FOR MAKING SAME
Neil Rampley, La Porte, Ind., assignor to Heath Manufacturing
Company, Coopersville, Mich.
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,735
Int. a.J F16B 7/10
U.S. a. 403-109 41 Claims
1. An adjustable lock arrangement for rods and the like,
comprising:
a rigid collar having a central opening and a central, longitu-
dinal axis;
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
221
a rod having an exterior surface shaped for close, telescop-
ing reception in the central opening of said collar;
said collar having an interior surface defining said central
opening, with an elongate keyway extending along at least
a portion of said interior surface in a direction generally
parallel with the longitudinal axis of said collar; said key-
way opening into said central opening, and having a cen-
tral, longitudinal axis;
a key rotatably mounted in said keyway for rotation about an
. axis disposed generally parallel with the longitudinal axis
of said keyway; said key having an eccentric transverse
cross-seotional shape, with first and second circumferen-
tially spaced apart surfaces; said key being rotatable in said
keyway between locked and unlocked positions;
surface and includes a first portion which is adjacent said
lateral edge of said roadway surface and rises gently, and
wherein said saftey barrier has a guide portion spaced verti-
cally above and overhanging at least part of said driving sur-
face, the improvement comprising wherein said driving sur-
face includes second and third portions in addition to said first
portion, said second portion being between and contiguous
with said first and third portions and merging smoothly there-
with, wherein said second portion of said driving surface rises
steeply and includes a generally concave region followed by a
generally convex region, wherein said third portion of said
driving surface is approximately fiat and rises gently, and
wherein said guide portion overhangs said third portion of said
driving surface.
4,435,107
TRAFFIC DELINEATOR
Lawrence J. Sweeney, Seneca, Pa., auignor to Franklin Steel
Company, Franklin, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 101,439, Dec. 10, 1979. This application
Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,249
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 3, 1998,
has been disclaimed. ^
Int. Cl.^ EOIF 9/01
U.S. CI. 404—10 2 Claims
said first key surface being disposed sufficiently close to the
rotational axis of said key that when said first key surface
is located in the unlocked position, said first key surface is
in a non-abutting relationship with the exterior surface of
said rod and permits relative longitudinal translation be-
tween said collar and said rod;
said second key surface being spaced sufficiently apart from
the rotational axis of said key that when said second key
surface is located in the locked position, said second key
surface abuttingly engages the exterior surface of said rod
and frictionally locks said collar to said rod, whereby said
key rotates to frictionally engage and lock said collar and
rod.
4,435,106
DIRECTING-BARRIER FOR A ROADWAY
GUnther Forster, Neuen Biue 27, D-6300 Giessen, and German
Gresser, Schonleinstrasse 3, D-8700 WUrzburg, both of Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,558
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 19,
1981, 3106047
Int. a.J EOIF 15/00
U.S. a. 404-6 10 Claims
1. In a safety barrier adapted to be placed adjacent a road-
way having an upper surface, said safety barrier having means
defining a driving surface thereon which extends generally
upwardly and outwardly from a lateral edge of said roadway
to^
1. A traffic delineator assembly comprising:
an elongated rigid anchor post having an upper end to re-
ceive blows and to be driven into a support surface such as
the ground or roadway surface or the like with its upper
end to be located below ground;
an elongated rigid pilot means mounted on said anchor
means and adapted to be driven into the ground or road-
way surface with said anchor means;
said rigid pilot means being located in a parallel vertical
relationship with said anchor post and being located
below the upper edge of the anchor post so as to be driven
into the ground with the anchor post;
flexible delineator means mounted on said anchor means and
defining a lower edge, said delineator means being located
so that said lower edge follows said pilot plate means into
the ground or roadway surface and being adapted to
extend above the ground or roadway surface when said
anchor means and pilot plate means are driven into the
ground or roadway surface, said delineator means being
sufficiently rigid to be unaffected by static conditions yet
resiliently deformable to bend upon impact and spring
back subsuntially to its pre-bend position
and fastener means connecting the flexible delineator means
222
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
to the rigid anchor post and to the rigid pilot means and to
be located below ground.
4,435,108
METHOD OF INSTALLING SUB-SEA TEMPLATES
James E. Hampton, Petercolter, Scotland, assignor to SEDCO,
Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Ang. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 292,014
Int. a J E02B 17/02
VS. a. 405-209 15 cudms
central body to provide spring biased axial movement
between said spring housing and said central body, and
adjustment means attached to said exterior housing to limit
the stroke of the cutter spindle where the central body and
the spring housing are disposed between said cutter spin-
dle and said adjustment means.
4,435,110
DRIVE TRAIN FOR GEAR HOBBING MACHINE
Ernst J. Hunkeler, Fairport, N.Y., assignor to The Gleason
Works, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed No?. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,775
Int. a.J B23F 5/22
U.S. a. 409-11 3 ciMim»
1. A method of installing a subsea template at a predeter-
mined site on a seabed comprising the steps of:
providing a semi-submersible drilling vessel having a pair of
spaced apart submersible hulls, a deck supported above
said hulls and connected to said hulls by frame means of
said vessel, and hoisting apparatus on said vessel extending
through an opening in said deck between said hulls;
providing at least one subsea template having a fixed area
greater than said opening in said deck;
positioning said template with respect to said vessel beneath
said deck and between said hulls and lifting said template
with said hoisting apparatus to a transport position be-
neath said deck and between said hulls;
securing said template to said vessel;
moving said vessel and said template to said site; and
lowering said template from said vessel to said seabed.
4 435 109
DWELL ASSEMBLY BACK SPOTFACE
Vernon H. Wilder, Murfreesboro, Tenn., assignor to McDonnell
Douglas Corporation, Long Beach, Calif.
FUed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 406,055
Int. a.3 B23B iVOO
UA a. 408-14 5 daioM
1. In a bobbing machine having a drive train for imparting
rotation to a work spindle while feeding and rotating a bobbing
tool in timed relationship therewith, the improvement charac-
terized by
a final drive system for said work spindle comprising a
hypoid pinion mounted to be rotated by a main drive train
of the machine, said hypoid pinion being in meshing en-
gagement with a hypoid gear,
a spur pinion carried for rotation with said hypoid gear, said
spur pinion being in meshing engagement with a spur gear
which is operatively connected to said work spindle to
thereby impart rotational movements to the work spindle,
a supplemental driving system having a motor operatively
connected to said work spindle for imparting rotation to
said work spindle while said hypoid pinion and said hy-
poid gear maintain accurate positioning of said work
spindle relative to said bobbing tool.
4,435,111
NUT
Akira Mizusawa, FiUisawa, Japan, assignor to Nifco Inc., Yoko-
hama, Japan
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,837
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 15, 1980, 55-98744[U1
Int. a. J F16B 37/16
UA a. 411-437 3 ctaiaM
1. A Dwell Assembly Back Spotface for use with a reverse
feed drill having a drill housing and a drill spindle having an
axis, which spotface limits the movement of a cutter spindle
comprising:
an exterior housing to be attached to the drill housing;
a first spindle attached to the drill spindle;
a spring housing attached to said first spindle;
a central body with means engaging said spring housing to
transmit rotational drive and permit relative axial move-
ment between said central body and said spring housing;
a forward housing surrounds said spring housing and is
attached to the central body;
a cutter spindle attached to said forward housing;
spring means engaged by said spring housing and by said
^Ct^ ^
1. A nut molded integrally of a plastic material and adapted
March 6. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
223
for engagement with a bolt rod, which nut comprises a cylin-
drical body possessing a receiving hole for admitting the bolt
rod in the axial direction and having circumferentially continu-
ous cylindrical end portions at both ends of said body, at least
one resilient Ub formed in one portion of sayd cylindrical body
in such a manner that said at least one resilient Ub is integral on
one side thereof with said cylindrical body adjacent the receiv-
ing end of said body and is flexible in the radial direction of the
nut, and partial screw threads formed on the inner surfaces of
said at least one resilient Ub bordering on said receiving hole
and adapted to be meshed with the screw threads on said bolt
rod.
4,435,112
FASTENER ASSEMBLY
Philip D. Becker, Southbury, Conn., anignor to Buell Indus-
tries, Inc., Waterbury, Conn.
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252^85
Int. a.5 F16B 4i/Q0
U.S. a. 411—368 28 Qalms
1. An improved fastener assembly for securing a workpiece
to a support, the workpiece having known thickness, a hole
therethrough and being subject to plastic deformation; said
assembly comprising:
a threaded fastener including a head having a load bearing
surface; and a shank projecting from said head generally
perpendicularly from said surface and having an un-
threaded portion adjacent said head, a radially outwardly
protruding annular rib spaced from said surface, and a
threaded portion projecting coaxially from said un-
threaded portion beyond said rib, said rib having a larger
diameter than either the diameter of the crests on the
threads of said threaded portion or the diameter of said
unthreaded portion;
a sleeve including a generally cylindrical side wall having a
split discontinuity therein and circular edges at opposing
axial extremes thereof; said sleeve, with said side wall
normally collapsed at said discontinuity, defining a normal
inside diameter larger than the diameter of said rib and a
normal outside diameter smaller than the diameter of the
hole in said workpiece; said sleeve further including
means forming a radially inwardly projecting constriction
adjacent at least one of said edges, confined between said
rib and said bearing surface, having a normal diametrical
dimension, with said side wall normally collapsed at said
discontinuity, less than the diameter of said rib; and
washer means having a hole therein with a diameter greater
than the diameter of said rib and less than said normal
outside diameter of said sleeve; said washer means being
received about said unthreaded portion of said shank and
formed on one face thereof with an annular rabbet about
said washer hole having a base and a radially inwardly
facing cylindrical side wall with a diameter greater than
said normal outside diameter of said sleeve, said one edge
being received in said rabbet to assemble said sleeve and
said washer means together and confine said side wall of
said sleeve against spreading, the axial distance between at
least a portion of said one face of said washer means and
the edge of said sleeve opposite said one edge, when said
washer means and sleeve are assembled, being slightly less
than the thickness of said workpiece, and the axial dis-
tance between the face of said washer means opposite said
one face and said contriction forming means when said
washer means and sleeve are assembled being less than the
axial disUnce between said load bearing surface and said
rib.
24. A method of assembling an improved fastener device
that comprises a fastener including a head having a load bear-
ing surface; and a shank projecting from said head generally
perpendicularly from said surface and having an upper portion
adjacent said head, a radially outwardly protruding annular rib
spaced from said head, and an operative portion for securing
said assembly to a support projecting coaxially from said upper
portion beyond said rib, said rib having a larger diameter than
either the diameter of said operative portion or said upper
portion; a sleeve including a generallv cylindrical side wall
having a split discontinuity, circular cofC^ at opposing axial
extremes thereof and, with said side wall normally collapsed at
said discontinuity, defining a normal inside diameter larger
than the diameter of said rib, said sleeve further including
means forming a radially inwardly projecting constriction
adjacent at least one of said edges having a normal diametrical
dimension, with said side wall collapsed at said discontinuity,
less than the diameter of said rib; and washer means having a
hole therein with a diameter greater than the diameter of said
rib and less than said normal outside diameter of said sleeve,
said washer means being receivable about said upper portion of
said shank and formed on one face thereof with an annular
rabbet about said hole having a base and a radially inwardly
facing cylindrical side wall with a diameter greater than said
normal oi|tside diameter of said sleeve, said one edge being
receivable in said rabbet to confine said side wall of said sleeve
against spreading, the axial distance between the face of said
washer means opposite said one face and said constriction
forming means, when said washer means and said sleeve are
assembled, being less than the axial disunce between said load
bearing surface and said rib; said method comprising the steps
of:
mounting said washer means on said fastener by placing said
shank through said hole in said washer means with said
opposite surface of said washer means confronting and
adjacent said bearing surface; and
mounting said sleeve in its normal configuration on said
fastener and assembling it with said one edge received in
said rabbet of said washer means and with said constric-
tion forming means located between said rib and said load
bearing surface.
4,435,113
SELF-PROPELLED FREIGHT HANDLING TRUCK
John F. Mosely, Ormond Beach, Fla., and Stephen R. Austin,
Winnetka, III., assignors to Superior Handling Equipment,
Inc., Ormond Beach, Fla.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,783
Int. a.' B66F 9/0%
U.S. a. 414-347 18 Clal""
9. A self-propelled, collapsible, forklift truck comprising a
frame including a pair of parallel vertical rails, wheels mounted
on said frame for transporting said truck, lifting forks mounted
224
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
on said rails to move upwards and downwards and selectively
to be collapsible against said rails, internal combustion power
means for generating power to propel said truck and to raise,
lower, and tilt said lifting forks, at lAst one of said wheels
being a driving wheel rotated by said p^er means, two hori-
zontally pivoted legs with a freely rotating wheel at the for-
ward end of each leg telescopically attached to extend or
retract longitudinally from each leg, hydraulic power means to
pivot said legs and to extend or retract said wheels, and a tiller
guiding means attached to said driving wheel for manually
guiding said truck, said tiller being selectively collapsible by
folding against said frame.
14. A beverage transport system comprising a highway
transport truck for transporting interiorly thereof a driver, a
plurality of cases of beverage, and a self-propelled beverage
handling forklift truck for transporting said cases from said
highway transport truck to a delivery destination, said high-
way transport truck including an interior bay enclosing said
self-propelled forklift truck in a collapsed condition, said bay
having a pivotable ramp which in its closed position is folded
against the side of said highway transport truck and in its open
position extends from the floor of said bay to the ground, said
self-propelled forklift truck including foldable lifting forks
mounted on a wheeled frame supporting a foldable tiller for
guiding said forklift truck, and power means for propelling said
forklift truck, for raising, lowering, and tilting said lifting forks, '
and for expanding and narrowing the spacing between the
wheels adjacent said lifting forks.
4 435 1 14
CONTAINER LID SEPARATING ASSEMBLY
Carlos Fardin, Paterson, N.J., assignor to Van Dam Machine
Corporation of America, West Paterson, N J.
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,064
Int. a.3 B65G 59/00
UA a 414-330 naaims
said chute, cooperating with said chute to urge said con-
tainer lids downwardly therethrough;
wherein the vertical attitude of said chute and said lid ad-
vancing means is incrementally adjustable to accommo-
date variations in container lid design.
4,435,115
DOLLY FOR LIITING AND CARRYING DEAD SOWS
AND THE LIKE
Russell D. Orstad, and Durwood D. Orstad, both of Rte. 2.
Villisca, Iowa 50864
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,271
Int. a.3 B62B J/06
U.S. a. 414-490 9ci^^
1. A separator assembly for the continuous translational
movement of container lids, comprising:
(A) an assembly housing pivotally mounted on a base, said
housing comprising parallel vertical walls with their
planes in line with the direction of travel of said container
lids, and a connecting cross member extending trans-
versely therebetween;
(B) a downwardly extending rigid chute for the reception
and passage therethrough of said container lids, said chute
mounted between said walls and having a generally verti-
cal infeed end, a generally horizontal discharge end, and a
plane rotating, arcuately directed channel disposed there-
between;
(C) said chute having stationary walls comprising at least
one broad, partially curvilinear outer wall, and at least one
broad, partially curvilinear inner wall parallel and spaced
part therefrom, said outer wall and said inner wall cooper-
ating to define, at their respective ends, said infeed end
and said discharge end, and defining between their broad
surfaces, said arcuately-directed channel; and
(D) movable lid advancing means supported by said walls
and said cross member, having a portion thereof extending
into said chute and traveling through the entire length of
1. A dolly for lifting and carrying dead sows and the like in
a confined space, comprising:
a substantially square platform supported by ground engag-
ing wheels;
a rectangular vertical back attached at one of its narrow
edges to an edge of the platform;
a means affixed to the vertical back for pulling a cable
towards the upper end of the vertical back;
a cable attached at one end to a means for temporary attach-
ment to a leg of a dead sow and at its second end to the
cable pulling means; and
an operably removable means affixed to the dolly near the
adjoinment of the platform and the vertical back for tem-
porarily directing the path of the cable in a horizontal
direction along the platform towards the adjoinment of
the platform and the vertical back and then in a vertical
direction along the vertical back, whereby a dead sow can
be pulled onto the platform substantially to the point of
adjoinment and then lifted upwards along the vertical
back.
4,435,116
ROBOTIC MANIPULATOR
Walter H. Van Deberg, 1829 Kipling Ave., Berkley, Mich. 48072
FUed May 27, 1982, Ser. No. 382,706
Int. a.J B06C 23/00
U.S. a. 414-728 22 Claims
1. A robotic manipulator comprising a support frame, a pair
of laterally spaced, parallel screws rigidly interconnected at
their front ends; a rigid support bracket joumalled on said
frame for rotation about a generally horizontal first axis; a pair
of laterally spaced nuts rotatably supported on said bracket in
threaded engagement with said screws; drive means on said
bracket for routing said nuts simultaneously at the same rate
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
22S
and in either direction so as to extend and retract the intercon-
nected screws as a unit; a second support bracket journalled on
said frame for rotation about a second axis spaced from and
parallel to said first axis; a third screw; means pivotally con-
necting the front end of the third screw with the connected
front ends of the first-mentioned screws; a nut journalled on
the second bracket in threaded engagement with the third
screw; drive means on the second bracket for rotating the
last-mentioned nut in either direction to extend and retract the
third screw, said two drive means being operable to rotate
their respective nuts in relation to each other to displace the
interconnected ends of the three screws along a programmed
path in a vertical plane, and a work member supported adja-
cent the connected forward ends of said screws, said frame and
said screws defining a vertically disposed, rigid triangular truss
having one side of fixed length corresponding to the distance
on said frame between said two axes and the two remaining
sides being of variable length and connected adjacent said
work member.
13. A robotic manipulator comprising a support frame; a pair
of laterally spaced, parallel screws rigidly interconnected at
their front and rear ends in laterally spaced parallel relation; a
rigid support bracket journalled on said frame for rotation
about a generally horizontal first axis; a pair of laterally spaced
nuts rotatably supported on said bracket in threaded engage-
ment with said screws, drive means on said bracket for rotating
said nuts simultaneously at the same rate and in either direction
so as to extend and retract the interconnected screws as a unit;
a work member supported at the connected forward ends of
said screws; a flexible tension member anchored at one end to
and extending rearwardly and upwardly from the connected
forward ends of said screws, a circular member journalled on
said frame at a second axis above and parallel to said first axis,
said flexible member extending around said circular member;
and motor means on said frame connected with said flexible
member for lengthening and shortening the portion thereof
extending between the circular member and said anchored end.
4,435,117
LIFT TRUCK PAPER ROLL CLAMP HAVING
AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTABLE ROLL OF
DIFFERENT DIAMETERS
Marshall K. House, Portland, Oreg., auignor to Cascade Corpo-
ration, Portland, Oreg.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,796
Int. a.5 B66F 9/18
U.S. a. 414—620 13 Claims
1. A load-handling clamp adapted to be mounted upon the
lifting apparatus at the forward end of a lift truck for engaging
a cylindrical load such as a roll of paper and the like, compris-
ing:
(a) a frame adapted to be mounted upon said liftmg appara-
tus so as to be selectively movable vertically by said lifting
apparatus;
(b) a pair of selectively openable and closable opposing
clamp arms mounted upon said frame projecting there-
from in a forward direction, each of said clamp arms
having a forward tip for engaging a load;
(c) means movably connecting each of said clamp arms to
said frame for permitting each of said clamp arms to move
with respect to said frame selectively toward and away
from the other of said clamp arms;
(d) clamp arm power means connecting said clamp arms
with said frame for selectively moving each of said clamp
arms with respect to said frame toward and away from the
other of said clamp arms;
(e) a load positioner comprising an elongate member extend-
ing between said clamp arms generally transversely to said
forward direction and having a pair of extremities, each of
said extremities being located adjacent a respective one of
said clamp arms; and
(0 respective means adjacent each of said extremities for
^^.,r-
selectively moving each respective extremity forwardly
with respect to said frame automatically in response to
movement of the respective adjacent clamp arm toward
the other one of said clamp arms, and for moving each
respective extremity rearwardly with respect to said
frame automatically in response to movement of the re-
spective adjacent clamp arm away from the other one of
said clamp arms, said respective means including means
for moving said elongate member to different positions,
automatically variably dependent upon the relative posi-
tions of said clamp arms with respect to each other, for
forcibly abutting a cylindrical load located between the
forward tips of said clamp arms prior to the engagement
of said load by said tips and. by such abutment, ensuring
that said tips are in substantially diametrically opposed
relation to said load when said tips are separated by a
distance substantially equal to the diameter of said load.
4,435,118
METHOD OF CONTROLLING HORIZONTAL MOTION
OF A LOAD APPLICATION POINT ON AN
ARTICULATED CRANE
Volkmar Behrend, Bad SchwarUu, and Eckhard Riider, Liibeck,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, auignors to O A K Orenstein
A Koppel Aktiengescllschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 5, 1983, Ser. No. 482,001
Qainu priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 6,
1982, 3213332
Int. a? B66C 23/00. 23/52
U.S. a. 414—744 R IS Claims
1. A method of controlling horizontal motion of a load
application point on an articulated crane having a base mem-
ber, a head member of substantially equal length L as the base
member, the base member being connected at one of its ends to
a crane post through a sluing gear for rotation on an axis A and
226
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
at another end thereof to one end of the head member through
another sluing gear rotating on a common axis of rotation B of
the base and head members, the head member carrying the
load application point on another end thereof, comprising:
determining an angle fi formed between the base member
and a longitudinal axis of the head member;
presetting a desired moving direction value v for the load
application point by means of a drive direction selector of
a drive direction indicator provided on the head member;
readjusting the desired moving direction value by small
increments toward a desired target for the load applica-
tion point;
4^5,119
UFT TRUCK LOAD CLAMP HAVING
POWER-ACrUATED PIVOTAL SUBFRAME FOR
HANDLING PAPER ROLLS
Marahall K. House, Portland, Oreg., assigiior to Cascade Corpo-
ration, Portland, Oreg.
FUed No?. 16, I98I, Ser. No. 321,921
Int a.3 B66F 9//«
U.S. a. 414-420 17 Claims
forming from the desired moving direction value a head axis
component value m\ which equals v cos a and a perpen-
dicular axis component value V2 which equals v sin a, with
a being an angle of misalignment'between the longitudinal
axis of the head member and the drive direction selector;
determining the pivotal speed n^ of the base member about
the axis of rotation A on the crane post in accordance with
the equation n^ = vi/2L7r sin /3; and
determining the pivotal speed n^ of the head member about
the common axis of rotation B in accordance with the
equation
nB= — 2«^sin2 ^
2irL
8. A device for controlling horizonul motion of a load
application point on an articulated crane having a crane post, a
base member pivotally mounted on the crane post about a first
axis A, and a head member pivotally mounted to an end of the
base member about a second axis B between an angle /3 of from
0* to 360* with respect to the base member and of a length L
substantially the same as that of the base member, the head
member carrying the load application point at an outer end
thereof, comprising:
a direction indicator on the base member for indicating
directions toward which the load application point can be
moved;
a direction selector movably mounted on the direction indi-
cator for movement toward a desired direction v for the
load application point;
an angle sensor associated with the second axis B for detect-
ing the angle /3;
direction component calculation means associated with said
direction indicator and direction selector for calculating a
first component vi of the desired direction along a major
axis of the head member, which first component equal v
cos a, and a second direction component V2 perpendicular
to the first component which is equal to v sin a, where a
is equal to a misalignment angle between the longitudinal
axis of the head member and the desired direction v of the
direction indicator; "^'^--^,.^
first pivotal speed calculating means for calculating the
pivotal speed n^ of the base member about the first axis A
which is equal to vi/2L7r sm /3; and
second pivotal speed calculation means for calculating the
pivotal speed ns of relative rotation between the head
member and base member about the second axis B which
is equal to -2 n^ sin^ /3/2±v2/2»rL.
10. A load-handling clamp adapted to be mounted upon the
lifting apparatus at the forward end of a lift truck for engaging
a cylindrical roll of paper and the like, comprising:
(a) a frame adapted to be mounted upon said lifting appara-
tus so as to be selectively movable vertically by said lifting
apparatus;
(b) rotating means for rotating said frame with respect to
said lifting apparatus about a generally forwardly-extend-
ing axis of rotation;
(c) a subframe and first pivotal connection means connecting
said subframe to said frame for permitting said subframe to
pivot with respect to said frame about a first pivot axis
extending transverse to said forwardly-extending axis of
rotation;
(d) first and second selectively openable and closeable op-
posing clamp arms mounted upon said subframe project-
ing therefrom in a forward direction;
(e) second pivotal connection means connecting said first
clamp arm to said subframe for permitting said first clamp
arm to pivot with respect to said subframe about a second
pivot axis transverse to said forwardly-extending axis of
rotation, and third pivotal connection means connecting
said second clamp arm to said subframe for permitting said
second clamp arm to pivot with respect to said subframe
about a third pivot axis extending transverse to said for-
wardly-extending axis of rotation;
(0 said second and third pivot axes being spaced apart in a
direction transverse to said forwardly-extending axis of
rotation and said first pivot axis being located between
said second and third pivot axes; and
(g) power means connected to said frame at a first location
and connected to said subframe at a second location for
selectively pivoting said subframe with respect to said
frame about said first pivot axis, said second location being
positioned at least as far forwardly as said first pivot axis.
4,435,120
ARM FOR A PROGRAMME CONTROLLED
MANIPULATOR
Junlchi Ikeda, Tokyo; Iwao Ohtani, Inagi; Noriyuki Utsumi,
Yokohama, and Shinichi Nojima, Tokyo, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Tokico Ltd., Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 354,048
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 17, 1981, 56>
38093[U]
Int a.3 Bti6C 23/00
U.S. a. 414—735 9 Claims
1. A manipulator arm comprising:
a base member,
a stationary gear secured to the base member,
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
227
a first movable gear meshing with the stationary gear, 4,435,122
a connecting member secured at one end thereof with the METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PUMPING HBER
first movable gear, SUSPENSIONS
a first rotational shaft roUUbly mounted on the other end of Toi?o Niskanen, Hamina; Frey Sundman, and Jorma Tuomaala,
the connecting member,
a second movable gear secured to the rotational shaft.
3 18
I —
'iOi" V'o.2.0
a third movable gear meshing with the second movable gear,
a second rotational shaft secured with the third movable
gear and passing through the first movable gear,
a working tool attached to the second movable gear, and
a driving means for causing the first movable gear to move
while meshing it with the sutionary gear.
both of Karhula, all of Finland, assignors to A. Ahlstrom
Osakeyhtio, Noormarkku, Finland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 903,494, May 8, 1978,
abandoned. ThU application Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,427
Claims priority, application Finland, May 16, 1977, 771541
Int. a.J F04D 1/04
U.S. a. 415—121 B 2 Qaims
4,435,121
TURBINES
Leon R. Wosika, El Paso, Tex., assignor to Solar Turbines
Incorporated, San Diego, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 79,584, Sep. 27, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,394
Int. C1.3 FOID 1/16
U.S. a. 415—56 7 Qaims
1. A method of fluidizing and pumping a fiber suspension
with a centrifugal pump in the fiuidized state; said pump hav-
ing an inlet which has a conduit; a housmg, an impeller with
vames, an outlet and a non-round rotor which is located in the
inlet of the pump, the inlet having recesses on its surface,
which comprises feeding said fiber suspension into the conduit
of the inlet; causing the rotor to rotate, bringing the fiber
suspension into rotating motion in the inlet of the pump, said
rotating motion having alternate flow components towards
and away from the rotation axis of the rotor whereby shear
forces are generated in the inlet of the pump which disrupt the
fiber-to-fiber bonds whereby the fiber suspension is fludized,
becomes pumpable anH flows to the impeller in a fiuidized
state.
4,435,123
COOLING SYSTEM FOR TURBINES
Richard Levine, Bloomfleld, Conn., assignor to United Technol-
ogies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,700
Int. a.3 FOID 5/18
U.S.a.416— 95 6 Qaims
2. A full admission radial impulse turbine comprising: a
wheel having buckets formed around and opening onto the
periphery thereof, means mounting said wheel for rotation
about an axis corresponding to the axial centerline of the tur-
bine, and means for introducing a working fluid into said buck-
ets which comprises nozzles spaced around the periphery of
said wheel and oriented to discharge the working fluid there-
from into said buckets, the means for introducing working
fluid into said buckets also including vanes alternating with
and determining the contours of said nozzles, said vanes having
surfaces facing the axial centerline of the turbine which are
continuously curved from a first location corresponding to the
exit from each nozzle to a second location corresponding to
the trailing edge of the adjacent nozzle and the angle of diver-
gence at those edges of the vanes corresponding to the exits of
the nozzles being a maximum of ca. 3*, said turbine also having
a discharge plenum on the downstream side of said wheel and
the buckets formed in said wheel being so configured as to
dump the working fluid into said discharge plenum after that
fluid has passed through a single bucket.
1. A cooling structure for supplying cooling air to a chamber
at a face of a turbine disk the structure being a single uniury
case article including:
spaced annular walls defining an air flow chamber and ter-
228
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
minating at one end in an axially positioned discharge
nozzle having vanes therein extending between the walls
and integral therewith;
an annular connecting element integral with and connecting
said walls at the ends remote from the nozzle, said element
extending from said walls and having mounting means on
the end remote from the wall;
radially extending partitions integral with extending be-
tween and connecting the spaced walls and defining cir-
cumferentially spaced flow passages for air from said
connecting element to the nozzle, the element having air
inlet holes therein;
an interrupted substantially cylindrical partition integral
with and between said walls at a point spaced from said
connecting element, said cylindrical partition being inter-
rupted to form openings therein at points in alignment
with the holes in the connecting element for a flow of air
from said holes to said openings between selected parti-
,tions and one of said annular walls having first access
openings therein out of alignment with the holes in the
connecting walls and the openings in the cylindrical parti-
tion, the other of said annular walls having attachment
means therein for access through the openings in said one
of said annular walls.
4,435,124
VERTICAL AXIS WINDMILL
Yea K. Zheng, Nanking, China, assignor to Nianbilla Company
Limited, Hong Kong, China
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,785
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 20, 1980,
8027111
Int. a.3 P03D 7/06
U.S. a. 416—119 7 Qalms
1. A vertical axis windmill having at least one blade of airfoil
form with a leading edge and a trailing edge, each said blade
being freely pivotally connected about a vertical axis passing
through the center of gravity of said blade to support means
rotatable about an axis by the action of the wind on said blades,
each said blade being constructed so that said vertical axis lies
closer to said leading edge than does the aerodynamic center of
said blade whereby said leading edge automatically swings
radially outwardly when moving upstream of, and radially
inwardly when moving downstream of, said axis of rotation of
said support means, said windmill including regulator means
for adjustably defining the limits of an angle through which
each said blade can freely swing about said vertical axis, said
regulator means being constructed such that said angle de-
creases with increasing speed of rotation of said support means
and so controls the speed of rotation of the windmill, said
windmill further including means for releasing said blades from
the control of said regulator means and allowing said blades to
feather ifj the event of excessive wind speeds.
4,435,125
WIND TURBINE SPINDLE ASSEMBLY WITH SPINDLE
CONSTRAINT
Gregory E. Cook, Warrenrille, 111., assignor to Windpowered
Machines Ltd., LiTingston, Mont.
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,617
Int. a.3 P03D 11/04
U.S. a. 416—132 B 38 Qalms
1. An anti-bowing spindle constraint assembly for a wind
turbine having a wheel with an axle suspended from a rim, said
axle having a hub, an elongate spindle mounted radially be-
tween said hub and said rim in a manner minimizing force
loading thereof along its elongate axis, said spindle carrying a
soft airfoil furled thereabout and mounted for rotation about its
elongate axis to permit furling and unfurling of said soft airfoil,
an elongate boom assembly pivotally mounted adjacent said
rim for supporting at a point along the length thereof the
unfurled clew portion of said airfoil spaced from said spindle
and for changing the angle of attack of said airfoil with respect
to the wind, and an elongate support member mounted in
tension between said hub and said rim adjacent said spindle,
comprising in operative combination:
(a) means for constraining the spindle against excessive
lateral bowing in response to wind pressure on said airfoil
when at least a portion thereof is unfurled, including:
(b) means for receiving said airfoil furled on said spindle
disposed intermediate said rim and said hub,
(i) said receiving means defining a space permitting freely
winding or unwinding said airfoil from said spindle
upon rotation of said*spindle about its elongate axis, and
(ii) said receiving means providing a slot communicating
with said space for passage therethrough of said airfoil
upon furling or unfurling of said airfoil;
(c) means for transmitting lateral pressure from said spindle
to said receiving means mounted to said receiving means
adjacent said slot;
(d) means for reducing friction on said airfoil as it passes
through said slot mounted in engagement with said airfoil
and in association with said pressure-transmitting means;
(e) means for mounting said receiving means to said support
means at a position radially outwardly from the hub end of
said spindle to transfer at least a portion of said lateral
bowing pressure on said spindle to said support means
while permitting free axial rotation of said spindle for
furling and unfuriing of said airfoil, and permitting pivot-
ing of said boom through an angle for change of said angle
of attack of said airfoil.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
229
4,435,126
CENTRIFUGAL PUMP IMPELLER WITH
REPLACEABLE WEAR RING
Wolfgang Schneider, Weisenheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Klein, Schanzlin & Becker Aktiengesellschaft,
Frankenthal, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 245,190
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 26,
1980, 3011675
Int. a.3 P04D 29/22
U^. a. 416—186 R 10 Qaims
sudden pressure increase said second pressure switch is
switched from its second condition to its first condition
1. An impeller for use in centrifugal pumps, particularly in
pumps for effecting forced circulation of fluids in primary
circuits of nuclear power plants, comprising an impeller body
having a peripheral surface; and a wear ring adapted to be
readily removed from said impeller body, said ring surround-
ing said surface and having an exposed end face, a second end
face, a plurality of elongated axially parallel sockets provided
in said second end face and extending toward said first end
face, and indices provided on said first end face in axial align-
ment with said sockets so that a material removing tool, such as
a drill, can be caused to penetrate into said sockets by placing
it into register with such sockets with the aid from the respec-
tive indices for ready removal of said wear ring from said
impeller body.
4,435,127
APPARATUS WITH LATCHING EFFECT FOR LIMITING
PRESSURE IN LIQUID FEEDING SYSTEMS
Josef Kriinzle, Auerstrasse 42, 7918 Illertissen, and Lutz
Droitsch, Bussardweg 25, 4800 Bielefeld, both of Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,125
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct 2,
1980, 3037259
Int. a.5 F04B 49/08
U.S. a. 417—26 9 Qaims
1. A valve system for use in a liquid feeding system in which
in operation liquid is fed by an electric pump to a delivery
means, said valve system comprising:
a main outlet, a check valve, and an inlet connectable via a
said valve to said main outlet,
a bypass valve and a bypass outlet connectable to said inlet
via said bypass valve which opens in response to a sudden
increase in pressure at said main outlet,
a first pressure switch in communication with said main
outlet and settable to either a first condition or to a second
condition when the pressure applied to said first pressure
switch is less than or exceeds a predetermined threshold
value respectively,
a second pressure switch in communication with said inlet
and settable to either a first condition or to a second condi-
tion when the pressure applied to said second switch is less
than or exceeds a predetermined threshold value respec-
tively,
said first and second pressure switches being connected
together in such a manner than when the pressure
switches are both in said first condition or are both in said
second condition a switch on path for said pump is closed
enabling operation of the pump, the arrangement further
being such that when said bypass valve is opened by said
ep
>
^
PO^^P
^
A^OTOM
y
for switching off said pump by opening the associated
switch on path.
4,435,128
APPARATUS FOR ASCERTAINING A
PREDETERMINED ROTARY POSITION OF A
ROTATIONAL BODY
Han«jorg Frey; Heinrich Hampel; Rolf Miiller; Ernst Ritter,
and Reinhard Schwartz, all of Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Jun. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,399
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 9,
1981, 3127048
Int. a.3 F04B 21/00. 51/00
U.S. a. 417—63 12 Qaims
1. An apparatus for ascertaining a predetermined rotary
position of a rotational body mounted to a housing, such as the
supply onset position of the drive shaft of a fuel injection pump
for an internal combustion engine, comprising:
angle indication marking means fixedly connected to the
rotational body for rotation therewith; and
signal transducer means, including: a transducer housing
fixedly secured to the rotational body housing; a rough
indication circuit having a first contact switch; a precise
indication circuit having a second contact switch and a
rotary position signal means; and a transducer body dis-
placeably guided in the transducer housing in a direction
approximately radial with respect to the axis of rotation of
the rotational body, wherein:
230
(Jf FICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
231
(i) the transducer body partly defines the second contact
switch;
(ii) at a predetermined rotary position of the rotational
body, the angle indication marking means trigger the
first contact switch to energize the rough indication
circuit; and
4,435,130
HYDRAULIC PLANETARY PISTON ENGINE HAVING
FREE WHEELING VALVE
Carl V. Ohrberg, and Gunnar L. Haiuen, both of Nordborg,
Denmark, asrignors to Danfoss A/S, Nordborg, Dennuu-k
Filed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,039
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 8.
1980,3029997
Int. a.3 F04B 49/08; P04C 1/06
U.S. a 417-310 4ci,i™
(iii) at a subsequent predetermined rotary position of the
rotational body, the angle indication marking means
and the transducer body complete the second contact
switch to energize the rotary position signal means of
the precise indication circuit.
4,435,129
VORTEX INJECTOR
Gyorgy Mika, 9/A, Szi^ko utca, 1021 Budapest; Denes Csako, 6
Budakeszj ut, 1121 Budapest; Laszlo Paczuk, 93, Beke ut,
6131 Szank; Laszlo Beres-Deak, Tallya u. 8-10, 1121 Buda-
pest, and Laszlo Novotny, Bimbo u. 3, 1022 Budapest, all of
Hungary
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 22,046, Mar. 19, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,634
Int. a.3 P04F 5/00
U.S. a. 417-151 8 cMms
1. A vortex injector comprising a cylindrical casing, means
for introducing a high pressure gas into the cylindrical casing,
means for introducing a low pressure gas into the casing paral-
lel but eccentrically to the axis of the casing, means for mixing
together the low and high pressure gases, means for discharg-
ing from the casing the mixed low and high pressure gases at an
intermediate pressure, said discharge means being disposed
tangentially of the casing, and a partially cylindrical plate
forming with said discharge means a helical scroll for gases
leaving said chamber.
1. A hydraulic planetary piston engine, comprising, an exter-
nally serrated pinion gear with a splined bore and an internally
serrated ring gear in mesh therewith, drive side and valve side
housing means attached to opposite sides of said ring gear, said
housing means defining inlet and outlet ports, drive means
rotatably mounted in said drive side housing means, first
cardan shaft means connecting said drive means to said pinion
gear, valve means in said valve side housing means including a
fixed annulariy shaped plate valve member attached to said
ring gear and a rotatable annulariy shaped plate valve member
in sealing engagement therewith, second cardan shaft means
connecting said rotatable valve member to said pinion gear, a
confined interior chamber defined by said drive side housing
and said valve means in conjunction with said pinion gear bore,
piston means having inner and outer pressure areas on oppo-
site inner and outer axial sides thereof having respective fiuid
communication with said inlet and outlet ports, said piston
means being in bisable engagement with said rotatable valve
member, said piston means having inner and outer pressure
faces with said inner face being (face thereoO in fluid commu-
nication with said confined interior chamber, passage means
externally of said housing means for connecting said confined
interior chamber to said outer pressure face of said pressure
piston means, changeover valve means in said passage means
having a first position placing said confined interior chamber
and said outer pressure face in fluid communication to bias
said rotatable valve member into sealing engagement with said
fixed valve member and a second position connecting said
outer pressure face to atmosphere to effect a releasing of said
sealing engagement between said valve members.
4,435,131
LINEAR FLUID HANDLING, ROTARY DRIVE,
MECHANISM
Zorro Ruben, 8923 Bronx, Skokie, lU. 60077
FUed Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,030
Int. a.3 F04B 19/00
U.S. a. 417-334 23 Claims
1. In a fluid energy machine including at least one fluid
"%
engaging vane having substantially parallel side edges, said
vane and side edges extending generally in a longitudinal direc-
tion while executing an alternating pivoul motion about said
vane's longitudinal ends, and receiving or imparting motion to
a fluid, the improvement in support means for each vane com-
V
prising means cohstraining one end portion of each vane to
substantially rotary motion and means constraining the other
end portion of each vane to substantially reciprocation motion
along lines of reciprocation which cross said longitudinal
direction obliquely.
/
4,435,132
SUBMERSIBLE PUMPING SYSTEM
William G. Haesloop, Dana Point; Melvin S. Mann, Newport
Beach, and James W. Jones, Pico Rivera, all of Calif., assign-
ors to International Telephone A Telegraph Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 195,514, Oct. 9, 1980. This application
Mar. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 475,463
Int. a.3 F04B 35/00; B67D 5/40
U.S. a. 417—360 12 Claims
"f^T'^^^fff^fTyffi
1. A group of interrelated pumping system components
especially adapted to be assembled together for use in a pump-
ing system including a fluid transmitting casing passing
through the roof of a reservoir comprising:
a pump and motor unit adapted to be lowered through said
casing to the lower end thereof for pumping fluid up-
wardly through said casing;
valve means adapted to be installed on an upper portion of
said casing for opening and closing said casing, said valve
means having an opening therein of such a size that when
the valve is open, said pump and motor unit may be passed
through said opening;
a head plate adapted to be mountecton the top of said casing,
said head plate having a hole thereip;
a vertical pipe mounted on said head plate aligned with said
hole;
a flexible lift cable and flexible electrical conductors adapted
to be connected to said pump and motor unit and to pass
upwardly through said valve opening, said hole in said
head plate and said pipe;
a plurality of combined clamping and sealing elements con-
nected to said lift cable and conductors at spaced inter-
vals, said elements having a close substantially sealing fit
with said pipe when passed therethrough; and
said elements being spaced apart a distance less than the
length of said pipe whereby when said valve means is
open and said lift cable is raised to lift said pump and
motor unit through said casing above said valve means,
one element will enter the lower end of said pipe before
the next adjacent upper element exits from the upper end
of said pipe so that the pipe, and hence the casing, will be
continuously blocked to minimize venting of the casing to
atmosphere when said valve means is open.
4,435,133
FREE PISTON ENGINE PUMP WITH ENERGY RATE
SMOOTHING
John W. Meulendyk, Kalamazoo, Mich., auignor to Pneumo
Corporation, Boston, Mass.
Filed Oct. 17, 1977, Ser. No. 842,494
Int. a.JP04B7 7/00
U.S. a. 417—364 32 Claims
MCCM OR (kCC
COMMANO
men _os itit
cSmmano
TO IMM Mtt*
Htn ACCUM
•NO bOM
/jfVYeo«TndLVr*o
'<>^»LWII6 /^ JM *»t
Hte. ACCUM
ANOlOAD
1. A free piston engine pump comprising hydraulic pump
means including plural piston and cylinder areas of different
effective areas adapted to be simultaneously linearly driven by
such engine to generate different hydraulic work rates during
the engine power stroke, means for phasing such different
hydraulic work rates at different points during the power
stroke to provide plural levels of hydraulic output work in
order to smooth out the hydraulic energy or work rate of said
free piston engine, and means for supplying hydraulic energy
to said plural piston and cylinder areas at different points
during the return stroke to achieve optimum return stroke
timing to accelerate the return movement of said hydraulic
pump means during the return stroke.
4,435,134
FLOW CONTROL VALVE
Akio Okada, 11-19, Tsudanuma 2<chome, Narashino*shi, Cbiba-
ken; Tokifbmi Nakata, 14>8, Niihltsuga 3-cbomc, Chiba-shi,
Chiba-ken, and Kiyoshi Nemoto, 2290-2, Kikuma, Ichihara-
shi, Chiba-ken, all of Japan
Filed Jun. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 390,833
Int. a.J FtHB 23/06. 41/06
U.S. a. 417-428 5 Claims
1. A flow rate control valve for a multiple cylinder type
reciprocating pump, said control valve comprising, in combi-
nation, a body member of the control valve including a first
duct communicating with a first passage on the discharge side
of one cylinder, a second duct communicating with a second
passage on the discharge side of another cylinder, said first and
second passages being distinct from discharge ports for said
cylinders, a double stepped cylinder chamber extending
through the length of said body member with the forward
opening end of the chamber defining said first duct, said cylin-
der chamber communicating with said second duct at back of
a second rearward step, and a bypass passage communicating
with said cylinder chamber at back of said first step and with
232
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a suction port of the pump; a needle valve extending into said
cylinder chamber adjustably and reciprocably into a position
normally abutting on said first step to interrupt fiuid communi-
cation between said first duct and said bypass passage; and a
valving member slidably fitted on said needle valve and spring-
biased to normally abut on said second step to interrupt fluid
communication between said second duct and said bypass
piston downwardly into said valve body to expose said
passageway to communication with said pressure cham-
ber, whereby when said deflectable portion is deflected,
said clamped portion remains clamped between said con-
fronting surfaces of said stem and said adapter.
passage; wherein said first step is first freed from the needle
valve upon rearward displacement of said needle valve to
establish fluid communication between said first duct and said
bypass passage and thereafter said valving member is acted
upon by a projection secured to said needle valve to free said
second step from said valving member to establish fluid com-
munication between said second duct and said bypass passage.
. 4,435,135
PUMP ASSEMBLY WITH IMPROVED SEAL
Michael G. Knickerbocker, Crystal Lake, III., auignor to Sea-
quist Valve Company, Cary, III.
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Scr. No. 250,573
Int. a.' F04B 21/04, 39/10
U.S. a. 417-511 9 Qaims
<8v » 22
1. A hand-actuatable pump assembly adapted to be sealingly
secured to the mouth of a container for dispensing material in
the container, comprising:
a generally tubular adapter defining a discharge passageway,
a spray member seated on said adapter and defining a dis-
charge opening in communication with said passageway,
a stem defining a portion secured to said adapter,
a valve body defining a pressure chamber, and
a piston having flat top and bottom surfaces sealingly and
slidably engaging the wall of said valve body,
spring means biasing said stem upwardly,
said piston comprising a first portion clamped between con-
fronting spaces of said stem and said adapter, and a
second deflecuble poriion in sealing engagement with
said stem in a position of rest and being out of sealing
engagement in a second position of actuation, said deflect-
able portion confronting a relieved portion of said adapter
accommodating flexure of said deflectable portion of said
piston,
said deflectable portion of said piston being deflecuble in
response to hydraulic pressure upon movement of said
4435 136
ORBITING PISTON TYPE FLUID DISPLACEMENT
APPARATUS WITH SHAFT BEARING AND SEAL
MECHANISMS
Klyoshi Terauchi, Isesaki, and Seiichi Sakamoto, Gunma, both
of Japan, assignors to Sanden Corporation, Gunma, Japan
Filed May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260,756
Gaims priority, application Japan, May 7, 1980, 55-59460
Int. a.3 FOIC 1/02. 19/12, 21/02
U.S. a. 418-55 8 Qaims
1. In an orbiting piston type fluid displacement apparatus
including a housing having a front end plate member, a fixed
member fixedly disposed relative to said housing, an orbiting
piston member disposed within said housing and interfitting
with said fixed member to make it least one line contact to
define a sealed off fluid pocket, and a drive shaft which pene-
trates said front end plate member and is rotatably supported
by said front end plate member through two bearings, said
drive shaft being connected to said orbiting piston member to
effect the orbital motion of said orbiting piston member, the
improvement comprising said front end plate member includ-
ing a front end plate portion and a separately formed annular
sleeve portion, said front end plate portion being formed with
an opening through which said drive shaft extends, and said
annular sleeve portion being fixed to and extending from a
front end surface of said front end plate portion for surround-
ing said drive shaft, said front end plate portion having a major
dimension transverse to the axis of said drive shaft and a minor
dimension along the axis of said drive shaft with said major
dimension being substantially greater than said minor dimen-
sion, said annular sleeve portion having a hollow space which
forms a continuation of the opening formed in said front end
plate portion, a shaft seal assembly assembled on said drive
shaft within said opening in said front end plate portion, said
drive shaft being rotatably supported by said two bearings,
which are disposed within said housing, and one of said bear-
ings being disposed axially outward of said shaft seal assembly
in said separate annular sleeve portion and the other of said
bearings being disposed inward of said shaft seal assembly in
said front end plate portion.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
233
4,435,137
SCROLL-TYPE FLUID COMPRESSOR WITH SCROLL
STABILIZING MECHANISM
Kiyoshi Terauchi, Isetaki, Japan, aHignor to Sanden Corpora-
tion, Japan
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,657
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 5, 1980, 55-44073
Int. a.3 F04C 18/02; F16D 3/04
U.S. a. 418-55 ,0 aaims
axis parallel to said first axis, said rotor being provided with
circumferentially spaced vane receiving slots therein and vanes
received respectively in said slots, said vanes being movable in
said sIotHand extending outwardly therefrom, wherein the
improvement comprises:
(a) a pair of opposed sealing plates disposed respectively
between one of said end plates and the end of said rotor.
W//^//^/r'.
1. In a scroll-type fluid compressor including a housing
havibng a fluid inlet port and a fluid outlet port, a fixed scroll
member fixedly disposed within said housing and having first
end plate means from which first wrap means extend, an orbit-
ing scroll member having second end plate means from which
second wrap means extend and said first and second wrap
means interfitting at an angular offset to make a plurality of line
contacts to define at least one pair of sealed ofT fluid pockets,
a drive shaft rotatably supported by said housing, a drive pin
eccentrically disposed with respect to the axis of the drive
shaft at an iner end of said drive shaft and connected to said
orbiting scroll member for transmitting orbiting movement,
and a rotation preventing means for preventing the rotation of
said orbiting scroll member during the orbital motion of said
orbiting scroll member, whereby said fluid pockets change
volume by the orbital motion of said orbiting scroll member
and merge with a central high pressure fluid space, the im-
provement comprising thrust supporting means engaged with
the side of said second end plate means opposite to the side
thereof from which said second wrap means extend, for pro-
viding axial thrust support to said orbiting scroll member, and
axial pushing means including a separate pushing member,
located generally centrally of said scroll members in said high
pressure fluid space, in engagement with said orbiting scroll
member generally at the center thereof for mechanically push-
ing said orbiting scroll member against said thrust supporting
means from the side of said orbiting scroll member which faces
said fixed scroll member, to minimize axial slant of sai orbiting
scroll member.
4,435,138
ROTARY VANE MACHINE WITH ROTATING END
SEALING PLATES
Howard B. Johnson, Rte. 2, Box 172C, Adairsville, Ga. 30103
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 196,853
Int. a.3 POIC 1/00. 19/00, 19/08
U.S. a. 418-131 ,0 Qaims
1. A rotary vane machine of the type having a housing with
end plates and a body therebetween having a peripheral inner
surface concentric about a transverse axis and defining an
interior, an inlet means communicating with said interior for
conducting fluid into said interior, an outlet means communi-
cating with said interior at a point spaced circumferentially
from said inlet means with respect to said inner surface for
conducting fluid from said interior, a rotor eccentrically
mounted in said interior for rotation about a second transverse
each of said sealing plates having a larger radial dimension
than said rotor for seating with fluid pressure against the
inner surface of said one of said end plates to retard leak-
age of fluid therebetween; and
(b) circumferentially spaced wiper bars connected to and
extending between said plates and riding against said
peripheral inner surface and connected to the outer ends
of said vanes.
4,435,139
SCREW ROTOR MACHINE AND ROTOR PROHLE
THEREFOR
Ake Astberg, Nacka, Sweden, assignor to Svenska Rotor Mas-
kiner Aktiebolag, Nacka, Sweden
Filed Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 345,230
Qalms priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 6, 1981,
Int. a.J FOIC 1/16
U.S. G. 418—201
51 Gaims
1. Screw rotor machine for a working fluid comprising a
casing with a working space provided with spaced apart low
pressure and high pressure ports for communication with low
pressure and high pressure channels, respectively, and includ-
ing at least two intersecting bores with parallel axes, a number
of rotors disposed in said bores and intermeshing in pairs, each
rotor having helical lands and intervening grooves, whereby a
pair of communicating groove portions form a chevron-shaped
chamber having its base end disposed in a plane transverse to
the axes of the rotors and adjacent to the high pressure port of
the machine, one rotor of each pair being of female rotor type
formed such that at least the major portion of each land and
groove is located inside the pitch circle of the rotor, the other
234
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6. 1984
rotor of the pair being of male rotor type formed such that at
least the major portion of each land and groove is located
ouuide the pitch circle of the rotor, the lands of one rotor
following the envelopes developed by the grooves of the other
rotor to form a continuous sealing line between the rotors,
each rotor groove being provided with a primary flank form-
ing the peripherally outer wall of the leg of said chamber
comprised of a female rotor groove and the peripherally inner
wall of the leg of said chamber comprised of a male rotor
groove, respectively, and a secondary flank forming the other,
wall of the related leg of the chamber, characterized in that in
a plane perpendicular to the rotor axes at least the primary
flank of each male rotor groove comprises a flrst flank portion
adjacent to the pitch circle and extending outwardly there-
from, that the tangent to said flrst flank portion in its pitch
point, where it intersects with the pitch circle, and a radial line
from the centre of the rotor through the pitch point form an
angle therebetween falling within the range of 0.2S rad to 0.7S
rad, when measured outside the pitch circle from the tangent
towards the groove, and that the radius of curvature of said
flrst flank portion in its pitch point has a length exceeding the
product of the pitch radius and the sine function of said pitch
point angle between the tangent and the radial line.
4,435,140
CX>MPRESSOR HAVING ROTOR ROTATING WITHOUT
CONTRACTING SIDE PLATES
Mitouo Inagaki, and Hideaki Saaaya, both of Okazaki, Japan,
asfignors to Nippon Soken, Inc., NUhio, Japan
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,581
Qainu priority, application Japan, Dec. 16, 1980, 55-178358
Int. a.' FOIC 1/00; P04C 2/00
U.S. a. 418—259 1 Claim
1. In a rotary compressor comprising:
a cylindrical housing,
side plates secured on axial opposite ends of said housing,
a rotor rotatably mounted in said housing and formed with a
plurality of slots extending radially of said rotor, and
a plurality of vanes each slidably received in one of said
slots;
said housing, said side plates, said rotor and said vanes coop-
erating with one another to deflne a working space of a
variable volume;
the improvement wherein:
said rotor has an increased diameter portion substantially in
a central position of said rotor as viewed in an axial direc-
tion of the latter and diameters smaller than said increased
diameter on opposite axial sides thereof;
said slots extend through said increased and smaller diameter
portions; and
said increased diameter portion, said vanes, said slots, and
said housing having the dimensional relationships ex-
pressed by the following formulae,
L|>Z,3>^
Li>L4+Li. and
in which
L|= an axial length of said housing,
L2= an axial length of said slots,
L3=an axial length of said vanes,
L4= an Axial length of said increased diameter poriion,
Ls= distance between a forward end of said slots and a
forward end of said increased diameter poriion, and
L6=^istance between a rear end of said slot and a rear end
- — —of said increased diameter poriion.
4,435,141
MULTICOMPONENT CONTINUOUS HLM DIE
Carl S. WeUner, Pleaaant Hill, and David W. Raynolds, Fair-
field, both of Calif., aasignora to Polyloom Corporation of
America, Dayton, Tenn.
Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,238
Int. a.J B29F 3/12
U.S. a. 425—131.1 15 Clainu
1. Die apparatus for extruding a multicomponent polymer
fllm between 1 and 10 mils in thickness comprising:
a body member including a body block and at least one body
section, removably attached to said body block, said body
member having one manifold through which a feedstock
of one molten polymer is flowed and at least one other
manifold through which at least another feedstock of
molten polymer is flowed, said body member having an
elongated lip passage through which a sheet of polymer
fllm formed of said feedstocks is extruded under pressure;
and
an inseri, which, together with surfaces of said body mem-
ber, forms separate, longitudinally alternating passages
communicating between said manifolds and said lip pas-
sage for interspersing, in alternating arrangement, the
feedstocks, said inseri including a replaceable bar having a
longitudinal axis parallel to a plane of the extruded fllm
and having a planar, longitudinally extending face with a
plurality of slots formed therein, wherein the planar face
of the bar is abutted with a planar face of the body section
when the body section is attached to the body block to
deflne a flrst plurality of said passages which open into one
of said manifolds and longitudinally narrow downstream
of said one manifold to facilitate a sweeping flow of feed-
stock through the die apparatus.
March 6. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
233
«^ 4,435,142
^^^ ^^'^^^^ ^P^ INJECTION MOLDING
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOW-PRESSURE
INJECTION MOLDING
AkiyothI Morita, and Mitsuyoahi Sato, both of Toyou, Japan
fv!f" '"°7i° ^°^°^ •""»•••■ K«»>utWki Kalaha, Toyoti, Japw
DiHaion of Ser. No. 136,083, Mar. 31, 1980, Pat. No. 4.3^6,^
Thia application Jun. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 386.518
Clainu priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1979, 54-38810
,,„ _ Int. a^ B29F y706
U.S. a. 425-145 , ciMim
^^
p p
1. A screw m-lme type injection molding machine for inject-
Jng a urea mixed resin powder into a mold, comprising:
hopper means for tecfilving an urea mixed resin powder-
an injection cylinder coupled to said hopper means, skid
cylinder including a nozzle at one end and a hydraulic
chamber at the other end. said nozzle facing said mold;
a screw inserted into said injection cylinder, said screw
being rotatably and axially free to move within said cylin-
der; '
a hydraulic motor coupled to said screw to rotatably drive
said screw;
an injection piston which slidably moves within said hydrau-
lic chamber to divide said chamber into a flrst and a sec-
ond pressure chamber, said piston being coupled to said
screw and movable together with said screw in said hy-
draulic chamber;
a first limit switch installed at a position where it is contacted
by said injection piston when said screw is withdrawn to
a distance where a space equivalent to a desired charge of
one of a molten and plasticized urea mixed resin powder in
said cylinder is secured;
a second limit switch installed at a position where it is con-
tacted by said piston when said screw has moved a dis-
Unce at which the charge of one of a molten and plasti-
cized urea mixed resin powder into said mold is 85 to 95%
completed;
a first hydraulic circuit including means for selectively sup-
plying a working hydraulic oil to said first pressure cham-
ber at high and low injection pressures, so that a first
injection may be performed under said high injection
pressure at a specified first injection velocity and a second
injection may be effected under said lower injection pres-
sure;
means for moving said cylinder in the direction of the cylin-
der axis; and
a second hydraulic circuit for actuating said means for mov-
ing whereby said nozzle can contact said mold,
wherein said first hydraulic circuit is constructed to supply
hydraulic oil so that said high injection pressure lies
within the range of 400-700 Kg/cm2 in converted injec-
tion pressure and said first injection velocity lies within
the range of 40-50 mm/sec, while said lower pressure lies
within the range of 50-150 Kg/cm^ in converted injection
pressure,
Wherein said first hydraulic circuit is constructed such that
said hydraulic motor stops the roution of said screw when
Mid first limit switch is contacted by said injection piston,
wherein said f.rst hydraulic circuit is constructed such that
the change of the pressure of the pressurized hydraulic oil
supplied to the first pressure chamber from high to low is
effected when the injection piston contacts said second
limit switch.
4,435,143
1... ^'^tf'L BLANK FEEDER AND TRAY FORMER
uf^^^'^:r'^'"'^*'' '^■''""' '"*•' ■»'«"<>' to Peerieaa Ma-
chine A Tool Corporation, Marion, Ind.
Filed May 27, 1982, Ser. No. 382,716
. , o ^ '"*• ^'^ ^^•C ^ 7/00, 1/00
U.S. a 425-150 3,c^„,
1. A press, comprising
a frame,
a first die and a base for supporting the first die with respect
to the frame,
a second die and a reciprocally movable head for recipro-
cally moving the second die with respect to the first die
a shaft rotatably mounted within the frame and an eccenitic
drive means for connecting the shaft to the head,
a flywheel rotatably mounted to the frame, drive means for
rotatably driving the flywheel, a selectively actuable
clutch for engaging the flywheel to the shaft, and
control means for controlling dwell time of the press by the
selective actuation of the clutch at a preselected rotation
position of the shaft, the control means including means
for sensing the position of the shaft and means for actuat-
ing the clutch in response to a sensed position of the shaft.
4,435,144
APPARATUS FOR SHAPING DOUGH
Kate Kemper. Furthatr. 10, CH 8700 Kusnacht-Ziirich, Switxer-
land
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,800
,S!i*^^ f'^^^^' •pplication Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 6,
1980, 3021329; Mar. 13, 1981, 3109683
Int. a.^ A21C 7/01. 7/02
U.S. a. 425—332 ,3 q^j^
1. An apparatus for shaping dough comprising:
a pair of endless band units, each of said band units having a
molding surface fonning a V-shaped gap for the dough lo
be shaped;
rotary means for imparting oscillatory motion to one of said
endless band units in the direction normal to the molding
surface and said means including a molding band arranged
on an adjusting slide displaceable in said direction and a
236
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
motor driven eccentric device for actuating said molding
band and
r--^
^
\j
^
4^4J.y
4,435,146
APPARATUS FOR HIGH RATE PRODUCTION OF
BIAXIALLY ORIENTED THERMOPLASTIC ARTICLES
James G. Wiatt; James W. Calvert; Samuel L. Belcher, all of
Cincinnati, and Roger D. Smith, Bethel, all of Ohio, assignors
to Cincinnati Milacron Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 257,468, Apr. 24, 1981, Pat. No. 4,382,760.
This application Jan. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 460,827
Int. a.J B29C 17/07; B65G 47/06
U.S. a. 425—534 2 Qaims
.1. II.- ij, Mw-'il iltS'll ijf'i:
-,l l|JI u:il\j ilJIm Igj. \ !i
a molding strip abutting the molding surface of said endless
band unit adapted for said oscillatory motion.
4,435,145
ROLLING PIN WITH GAUGE WHEELS
Gerald Abrams, P.O. Box 351, Pinetops, N.C. 21JB64
Filed Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,566
Int. a.5 A21C J/08. 3/02
U.S. a. 425—458
2Galms
1. A rolling pin for rolling a mass of resilient material to a
constant uniform thickness comprising an elongated cylindri-
cal body having a predetermined diameter and having opposite
ends, rod means extending axially outwardly from each end of
said body, each of said rod means having an outer end, gauge
wheel means mounted adjacent said outer end of each of said
rod means, said gauge wheel means both having the same
diameters and being of a diameter which is greater than the
predetermined diameter of said body, handle means carried by
each of said rod means, said handle means being disposed
between said gauge wheel means and said ends of said cylindri-
cal body, and locking means for obstructing the removal of
each of said gauge wheel means for said rod means, said gauge
wheel means having a central opening therethrough of a size to
slidably receive said outer ends of said rod means, stop means
on each of said rod means between said outer ends thereof and
said handle means for obstructing the movement of said gauge
wheel means along said rod means toward said cylindrical
body whereby said handle means are spaced inwardly of said
gauge wheel means so that downward pressure applied to
either of said handle means will be directed to said gauge
wheel means and said cylindrical body even if no downward
pressure is being applied to the other of said handle means.
1. An apparatus for high rate production of biaxially ori-
ented articles from thermoplastic article preforms, the articles
having a neck portion and a formable portion, the apparatus
biaxially expanding the formable portion when its temperature
is at or near the molecular orientation temperature of the
thermoplastic and while the preform is suspended by a carrier
for transporting the article, the carrier including grippers for
releasably retaining the article by the neck portion, the appara-
tus comprising
(a) a machine frame; and
(b) an article preform loading apparatus for loading article
preforms into the carriers, the preform loading apparatus
comprising
(1) a mounting plate attached to the machine frame and
spaced apart from a carrier,
(2) staging means attached to the mounting plate for re-
leasably retaining an article preform by a neck portion
thereof,
(3) transfer means movably connected to the mounting
plate to move between the staging means and the car-
rier, for transferring the preform from the staging
means to the carrier, the transfer means releasably
grasping the preform by the formable portion, and
(4) gripper operating means movably connected to the
transfer means for
(a) forcing the gripper into its article release condition
prior to advancement of the article preform thereinto,
and
(b) allowing the gripper to return to its article retention
condition subsequent to advancement of the article
preform thereinto.
4 435 147
SPLIT INJECTION MOLD
William H. Myers, Raytown, and Dennis L. Dundas, Lee's
Summit, both of Mo., assignors to Hoover Universal, Inc.,
Ann Arbor, Mich.
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,653
Int. a.3 B29F 7/00
U.S. a. 425—577 5 Qaims
1. An improved injection molding apparatus having two
opposed platens which are powered for movement towards
and away from one another and a core pin reciprocally mov-
able from a position outside of an injection mold cavity to a
position inside of such mold cavity, said injection mold cavity
being defmed by a pair of injection mold halves carried on said
platens, the improvement comprising:
a. a split carrier means, one-half of said split carrier means
March 6. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
237
being affixed to one of said platens and the other of said
split carrier means being affixed to said other platen, each
of said split carrier halves having,
i. a pocket into which one of said injection mold halves
nest, said pocket having (a) a rear planar wall lying in a
plane substantially perpendicular to the long axis of said
core pin movement, and (b) two outwardly angled side
walls, one of said side walls emanating from one latitu-
dinal extent of said rear planar wall and the other of said
side walls emanating from the other latitudinal extent;
and,
ii. a split alignment means for aligning said core pin with
a line of reference when said core pin is positioned
inside of said injection mold cavity, one of said split
alignment means halves being affixed to one of said split
(d) burning the combustible gas in a flame at the burner with
a combustion-supporting gas to which has been added a
carrier halves and the other of said split alignment
means halves being affixed to the other of said split
carrier means halves; and,
iii. a core pin alignment means carried at the upper extent
of said core pin, said core pin alignment cooperating
with said split alignment means to effect said core pin
alignment with said line of reference; and
b. said injection mold halves each having a planar rear wall
and two opposed outwardly angled side walls, said planar
wall and said side walls being dimensioned and configured
to achieve aligned nesting of each injection mold half in its
respective pocket whereby said injection mold cavity will
be in alignment with said line of reference; and
c. means for removably affixing each of said injection mold
halves to its respective pocket.
4,435,148
LOW POLLUTION METHOD OF BURNING PVELS
Gerald Moss, WanUge, England, awignor to Exxon Research
and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,413
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 24, 1981.
8109214
Int. Q.J F23D 19/02
U.S.Q. 431-7 15 Claims
1. A low pollution method of burning a fuel, comprising the
steps of:
(a) passing the fuel into a dense phase fluidized bed of parti-
cles which are fluidized by a fluidizing gas substantially
free of non-combustible inert components;
(b) partially oxidizing the fuel within the dense phase bed at
an elevated partial oxidation temperature to produce a
combustible gas which has a low content of non-combusti-
ble inert components.
(c) passing at least some of the combustible gas to a burner;
and
non-combustible ineri gas to suppress or reduce the forma-
tion of pollutants in the resulting flue gas.
4,435,149
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING THE
BURNING EFnCTENCY OF A FURNACE
Robert W. Astheimer, Westport, Conn., assignor to Barnes
Engineering Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,010
Int. Q.J F23N 1/02
U.S.a. 431-12 6 Qaims
4i!
1. The method of monitoring the burning efficiency of a
furnace having variable burning rates comprising the steps of;
viewing the flame of said furnace with an infrared detector
in a manner such that the thickness of the section of the
flame viewed by the detector varies with the burner feed-
ing rate,
measuring the infrared radiation emitted by said flame in at
least three diflerent wavelengths, having a first wave-
length representing a strong emission band of carbon
dioxide, a second wavelenth representing a weak emission
band of water and carbon dioxide, and a third wavelength
reprsenting a band where none of the furnace gases ab-
sorb,
deriving a control parameter based on the ratio of the mea-
surements of the third to the first wavelengths corrected
by the measurement of said second wavelength.
and applying said control parameter to said furnace for
varying the fuel to air mixture for maximizing the burning
efficiency of said furnace.
238
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6. 1984
4,435,150
GAS BURNER CONTROL SYSTEM
V Dennis M. Rippelmeyer, Waterloo, III., assignor to Emerson
Electric Co., St. Louis, Mo.
FUed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,299
Int. a.J F23Q 9/14
U.S. a. 431—46 12 Claims
1. In a gas burner control system wherein a main burner is
ignited by a pilot burner, wherein the pilot burner is ignited
upon a call for heat, and wherein gas flow to the main burner
is prevented until a pilot burner flame exists, the improvement
comprising:
an oscillator having an input connected to a power source so
as to be energized thereby upon a call for heat and main*
tained energized thereby as long as said call for heat exists,
and an output having a high frequency signal appreciably
higher than 60 Hz;
solid-state switch means connected to said output of said
oscillator;
capacitor means connected to said switch means and opera-
tive, when sufficiently charged, for effecting on-off opera-
tion of said switch means at the frequency of said high
frequency output signal of said oscillator;
coupling circuit means including a transformer having a
primary winding connected in circuit with said switch
means and a secondary winding connected in circuit with
means for controlling the gas flow to the main burner,
said coupling circuit means being effective to enable suffi-
cient energizing of said means for controlling the gas flow
to the main burner only when said frequency of said on-off
operation of said switch means is within a predetermined
frequency span; and
flame responsive means connected to said capacitor means
for effecting said sufficient charging of said capacitor
means only when the pilot burner flame exists.
_a
4,435,151
FUEL SUPPLY CONTROL SYSTEM
Mlchiaki Matumoto, Tolcyo; Hironori Eton, Kashiwa, and
Hidekazo Nakamoto, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Hita-
chi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,138
Claims priority, application Japan, May 26, 1980, 55-68976
Int C\? F23N 1/02
U.S. CI. 431—90 3 Claims
1. A fuel supply control system comprising:
a first diaphragm;
a first chamber located adjacent to said diaphragm on one
side thereof;
a valve port of a liquid fuel passage connected to a liquid fuel
source on an upstream side thereof and to said chamber on
a downstream side thereof;
a liquid fuel supply pipe connected to said chamber for
supplying the liquid fuel from said chamber to a combus-
tor;
a second diaphragm of a larger effective area than that of
said first diaphragm and located on a side of said first
diaphragm opposite to said first chamber;
a valve connected to said diaphragms for regulating the
opening of said valve port;
a second chamber locatod between said diaphragms;
a riser pipe connected to said second chamber at one end and
to a portion of an air supply and exhaust passage system at
the other end;
a third chamber located adjacent to said second diaphragm
on a side thereof opposite to said second chamber and
connected to a combustion air supply passage system in
which the pressure is higher than that in said air supply
and exhaust passage system; and
the vertical distance H between an end of said liquid fuel
supply pipe from which the liquid fuel is directed to said
combustor and said chamber has a value commensurate
with the weight or the like of said diaphragm and other
movable parts in accordance with the relationship:
H-i =
Az + Aor\
where */= specific gravity of the liquid; Ao=area of the
valve port; ri =a valve constant ^ 1; Pi = pressure of said
end of the liquid fuel supply pipe; A2= effective pressure
receiving area of said diaphragm; and Wo= weight of
movable parts.
4,435,152
APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING THE FLOW OF GASES
TO A COMBUSTION CHAMBER OF A COKE OVEN OR
THE LIKE
Carl-Heinz Struck, Bochum, and Ralf Schumacher, Hagen, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Dr. C. Otto A Comp.
GmbH, Bochum, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,151
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 8,
1980, 3037956
Int. a.^ F23D 27/00
VJS. a. 431—170 7 Claims
Apparatus for conducting a flow of combustion gases
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
239
from ducts into a heating flue of an industrial gas-fired system,
such as a coke oven, which system includes recuperative
waste-gas heat recovery means for preheating sand combus-
tion gases which comprise air when heating by combustion of
rich gas and comprise air and lean gas when heating by com-
bustion of lean gas; said heating flue having a lower end, a
bottom wall, and an upper end; at least a portion of said com-
bustion gases being introduced through said ducts from the
outlet of said waste-gas heat recovery means into said lower end
of said heating flue; said apparatus including the combination
therewith of a flow plate mounted in said lower end of said
heating flue and spaced from said bottom wall to form a cham-
ber therebelow, and a central refractory web to divide said
chamber into two halves in a gas-tight manner; each of the
chamber halves communicating with one of said ducts; the
height of said chamber to the thickness of said flow plate being
in a ratio of within 0.3 to 0.7.
abutment, a plurality of air knife structures abutting and ex-
tending along the outer surface of the side and end walls,
means for feeding each air knife structure with air indepen-
4,435,153
LOW BTU GAS BURNER
Takashi Hashimoto, Ibaraki, and Shigeyuki Yamazaki, Abiko,
both of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,792
aaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 21, 1980, 55-98752:
Jul. 21, 1980, 55-98753
Int. a.J F23D 11/44
U.S. O. 431—208
dently of the others to be able to esublish in each air knife
independent exit velocities, each air knife structure forming a
narrow elongated air discharge slot.
^lOo
4,435,155
INFRA-RED RADIANT BURNER
David L. Vigneau, 12 Payan St., West Warwick, R.I. 02893
,- ^ . F»wl Apr. 13, 1983, Ser. No. 484,523
10 aaims lat. ci,3 f23D 13/12
U.S. a. 431—328
SGaims
1. A low Btu gas burner comprising:
a combustor means;
means for defining a primary passage;
means for defining a secondary passage separated from the
primary passage;
at least one set of fine ducts located in at least the primary
passage;
at least one combustion chamber located on a downstream
side of the at least one set of fine ducts;
at least one heater located in a wall of the combustor means;
means for communicating the primary and secondary pas-
sages with each other at first ends thereof;
means for connecting a second end of the primary passage to
an inlet port for a low Btu gas; and
means for connecting a second end of the secondary passage
to an exhaust port for combustion gas, whereby the com-
bustion gas heats the at least one set of fine ducts and the
at least one combustion chamber through the wall of the
combustor means.
1. An infra-red radiant burner comprising a rectangular
permeable matrix, a first frame member part extending along
two opposite sides and a second frame member part extendmg
along the other two opposite sides, said frame members having
a ledge upon which the matrix lies and a peripheral lip with
means protruding therefrom inwardly to grip the edge of the
matrix, said frame members having grooves facing each other,
a flat sheet received in said grooves, said sheet forming a wall,
said sheet with said frame members forming a gas combustion
mixture chamber with said matrix, said frame members being
hollow, means supplying non-combustible gas to and from each
of said frame members independently of the other, said frame
members each having a narrow slot exit means adjacent said
peripheral lip and on the outer side of said lip.
4,435,154
HEAT TRANSFER DEVICE
Darid L. Vigneau, 12 Payan St., West Warwick, R.I. 02893
FUed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,293
Int. a.J F23D 13/12
U.S. a. 431—328 4 Claims
1. A heat transfer device comprising a convective radiant
burner having a gas permeable matrix, a combustible gas ple-
num chamber having top, side, and end walls with an open
bottom, the side and end walls having abutment means, said
matrix received in the open bottom and seated against said
4,435,156
SUBMINIATURE ARRAY WITH NORMALLY CLOSED
AND NORMALLY OPEN SWITCHES
Boyd G. Brower, WiUiamsport, Pa., assignor to GTE Products
Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 365,053
Int a.J F21K 5/00
U.S. a. 431—359 10 Claims
1. In a miniaturized photoflash array having a circuit board
with a printed circuit including common and energizing con-
ductors on the inner surface thereof and a plurality of flash-
lamps each having a pair of electrically conductive leads con-
nected to said printed circuit, the improvement comprising a
plurality of normally closed (N/C) switches formed from at
least one continuous strip of switching material and connecting
a plurality of flashlamps to said common conductor of said
printed circuit, a plurality of normally open (N/O) switches
240
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
parallel coupling all except one of said plurality of flashlamps
to said energizing conductor of said printed circuit and circuit
means electrically coupling all except one of said flashlamps to
said rear end wall being mounted to provide an annular gap
with respect to inner surface of said furnace tube, and at least
a sequentially following flashlamp whereby parallel paths for
energizing a sequentially following flashlamp by said energiz-
ing conductor are provided.
4,435,157
HEAT EXCHANGER CONSTRUCTION
AND METHOD OF OPERATION
Hans-Eugen Biihler, Konigstein, and Horst Kalfa, Frankfurt,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Brohltal-Deumag
AG fur feuerfeste Erzeugnisse, Urmitz b. Koblenz, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,506
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 16,
1981, 3101174
Int. a.3 F24H 7/00: C22C ii/OO; C21B 7/02. 9/00
U.S. a. 432—30 17 Claims
1. A heat exchanger having an inner refractory lining, an
intermediate insulating layer and an outer metal shell, said
insulating layer being disposed to maintain the temperature of
said metal shell in the range of from 20' -60* C. during the
operation of said heat exchanger, said metal sheet comprising
an essentially chromium-free structural steel having a molyb-
denum content in the range of from 0.01 to 2% by weight.
4,435,158
HEATED CHAMBER WALLS
Maurice Harman, Milton Keynes, England, assignor to The
Energy Equipment Company Limited, Bedfordshire, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 43^25, May 29, 1979, Pat. No.
4,299,562. This application Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,383
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 30, 1978,
24517/78
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 10,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.J F27B 15/00: F23G 5/00: F23M 5/00: F27D 1/00
MS. a. 432—58 9 Claims
4. A combustor or furnace of the fluidized bed shell type
boiler comprising a furnace tube, a front end wall, a rear end
wall and a plurality of fluidizing sparge tubes extending be-
t\yeen said front and rear end walls, said front end wall and
w^
one sparge pipe provided within said gap between said front
end wall and said furnace tube.
4,435,159
APPARATUS FOR THERMALLY TREATING
PULVEROUS MATERIALS SUCH AS CEMENT RAW
MATERIAL
Hans B. Knudsen, Kolding, Denmark, assignor to F. L. Smidth ft
Co., Cresskill, N.J.
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,725
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 17, 1980,
8036837
Int. a.5 F27B 7/02: C04B 7/02
U.S. a. 432—106 22 Qaims
1. Apparatus for thermally treating pulverous materials
which comprises:
(a) preheating means having inlet and outlet means for heat-
ing gas and raw materials;
(b) suspension calcining means having inlet means for fuel,
combustion air and preheated raw materials, combustion
gas outlet means communicating with said heating gas
inlet means of said preheating means;
(c) sintering furnace means having inlet means for fuel and
combustion air, and combustion gas outlet means commu-
nicating with said heating gas inlet meani of said preheat-
ing means, and outlet means for the sintered product, said
calcined material outlet means of said suspension calcining
means communicating with said material inlet means of
said sintering furnace means;
(d) air cooling means for cooling the sintered product, said
air cooling means having air outlet means communicating
with said air inlet means of said sintering furnace means
and with said air inlet means of said suspension calcining
means, and material inlet means communicating with said
sintering furnace means;
(e) said sintering furnace means comprising at least one
sintering drum rotatable about an axis inclined with re-
spect to the horizontal and suspension inlet duct means
provided with material inlet means and having at least a
first end poriion communicating with said air outlet means
of said material cooling means and at least a second end
portion communicating with said upper end poriion of
said sintering furnace means substantially tangentially to
the inner surface poriion of said sintenng furnace means;
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
241
(0 fuel inlet means projecting into at least one of said mate-
rial mlet means of said sintering furnace means and said
suspension inlet duct means;
(g) combustion gas outlet duct means communicating with at
least one end portion of said sintering furnace means; and
(h) material outlet means for the sintered product at the
lower end portion of said sintering furnace means.
4,435,160
METHOD AND MANUFACTURE FOR APPLYING AND
REMOVAL OF ORTHODONTIC BRACKET
Ronald M. Randklev, White Bear Uke, Minn., assignor to
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul
Minn. '
Continuation of Ser. No. 172,218, Jul. 25, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 137,631, Apr. 7, 1980,
abandoned. This application Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,500 '
Int. a.^ A61K 6/08
U.S. a. 433—9 ,3 Qg,„g
1. A manufacture for orthodontic bracket application and
removal without abrading tooth enamel, comprising:
(1) an orthodontic bracket adhesive composition which
contacts said tooth enamel, comprising a flnely divided
first inorganic material admixed with a polymerizable
resin, said first inorganic material being non-toxic, essen-
tially insoluble in mouth fluids, and having a Mohs hard-
ness less than about 4.S;
(2) a solid abrasive tool which abrasively contacts said or-
thodontic bracket adhesive composition to effect removal
thereof, comprising a second inorganic material, said
second inorganic material being non-toxic and having a
Mohs hardness which is greater than the Mohs hardness of
said first inorganic material and less than about 5.
11. A method for applying an orthodontic bracket to a tooth
surface and for removing said bracket therefrom, comprising
the steps of:
A. cleaning said tooth surface using dental prophylactic
paste and an etchant;
B. applying a thin layer of sealant resin to said tooth surface;
C. coating said thin layer of sealant resin with a layer of
orthodontic bracket adhesive composition comprising a
^ finely divided first inorganic material admixed with a
polymerizable resin, said first inorganic material being
non-toxic, essentially insoluble in mouth fluids, and having
a Mohs hardness less than about 4.5;
D. applying an orthodontic bracket to said layer of ortho-
dontic bracket adhesive composition and curing said ad-
hesive composition;
E. removing said orthodontic bracket at the completion of
orthodontic treatment; and
F. removing any residual adhesive which may remain on
said tooth surface by grinding said residual adhesive away
with a solid abrasive tool comprising a finely divided
second inorganic material admixed with a solid binder,
said second inorganic material being non-toxic and having
a Mohs hardness which is greater than the Mohs hardness
of said first inorganic material and less than about 5.
facing bore surface, and a rotor assembly laterally displaceably
received in the head and including a turbine sftaft mounted for
rotation m bearing means, such bearing means being positioned
for lateral displacement relative to the head and including a
correspondingly laterally displaceable bearing adjacent to the
bore and having a rotatable inner bearing part connected to the
shaft for movement therewith and a cooperating non-rotatable
outer bearing part laterally displaceably positioned in the head,
and such shaft having a forward portion forwardly of the
bearing and extending through the bore in inwardly spaced
relation to the bore surface and thereby defining a clearance
space between the shaft and the bore surface for accommodat-
ing lateral displacement of the shaft relative to the head
thereat, and a non-rotatable and correspondingly laterally
displaceable protective sleeve fitted to the outer bearing part
for lateral displacement therewith and extending therealong to
the forward portion of the shaft and into the annular space and
maintained in outwardly spaced relation to the forward por-
tion of the shaft to permit unhindered rotation of the shaft and
to provide a relatively minute clearance gap between the for-
ward portion of the shaft and the adjacent portion of the sleeve
in the clearance space for protecting against entry of external
waste material thereat, and correspondingly maintained in
inwardly spaced relation to the bore surface to provide a resul-
tant reduced clearance space between the adjacent portion of
the sleeve and the bore surface for similar protection against
entry of such waste material thereat yet sufficient for accom-
modating lateral displacement of the forward portion of the
shaft and the sleeve upon lateral displacement of the rotor
assembly relative to the head.
4,435,161
DENTAL TURBINE
David Mosimann, Ch. des Grillons 13-15, CH-2504 Bienne 6,
Switzerland
per No. PCr/CH81/00113, § 371 Date Jun. 10, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 10, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/01309, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 29, 1982
PCT Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 395,084
Galms priority, application Switzerland, Oct. 10, 1980.
7576/80
Int. a.3 A61C 1/05
U.S. a. 433-132 5 a„„,
1. A dental turbine comprising a rotor assembly receiving
turbine head forwardly terminating in a nose containing a
turbine shaft accommodating bore which forms an inwardly
4,435,162
TRIGONOMETRY VISUALIZERS AND METHOD OF
MAKING SAME
Justin P. Scboenwaid, 876 Burrow Rd., Ontario, N.Y. 14519
Filed Dec. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 452,128
Int. a.5 G09B 23/04
U.S. a. 434-215 ,0 a.lm.
1. A trigonometric visualizer, comprising
a pair of plane members connected together for rotation
relative to each other about a common axis,
means defining a first circle on one of said members coaxi-
ally of said axis,
means defining on said one member a pair of radial extending
zones which intersect at right angles at said axis and which
define therebetween at least one quadrant of said circle,
a plurality of spaced graduations arranged along each of said
zones and denoting the decimal values of one of two
trigonometric functions for a ninety degree interval about
said axis,
a plane geometric figure formed on the other of said mem-
bers and having a periphery viewable through said zones
during relative rotation between said members, and
means for indicating the degree to which said members are
rotated relative to each other,
said periphery being operative, at the point where it inter-
242
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
sects one of said zones, to indicate the decimal value of the
associated trigonometric function corresponding to the
indicated degree of relative rotation between said mem-
bers.
4,435,163
DENTAL TECHNIQUE TRAINING DEVICE
Oscar A. Schmitt, 4218 SUte St., Erie, Pa. 16509; Robert J.
Nedreiki, 5073 WUtsie Rd., Erie, Pa. 16510, and Eskil Karl-
son, 4634 SUte St., Erie, Pa. 16509
Filed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,207
Int. a.} G09B 23/28
VS. a. 434—263 23 Clainu
1. A dental teaching device comprising,
a manikin head having a mouth with moveable jaw and
teeth,
each said tooth having at least one electrical sensing element
imbedded therein,
a microprocessor,
at least some of said electrical sensing elements being dis-
posed in said teeth, being connected to said microproces-
sor, and actuating counting devices contained in the mani-
kin,
said electrical elements include a special sensing element
connected to said microprocessor by means of an elon-
gated electrical conducting means connected to a said
microprocessor,
said special sensing element being adapted to be brought into
close proximity to a said tooth and adapted to sense the
' electrical elements in said teeth whereby the effect on said
teeth is indicated.
4,435,164
DIDACnC APPARATUS PROVIDING FOR TUTELAGE
OF RESPONSES THROUGH INCULCATION
Harold J. Weber, 20 Whitney Dr., Sherbom, Mass. 01770
Filed Sep. 17, 1979, Ser. No. 76,480
Int a.i G09B 7/02
U.S. a. 434—337 19 Claims
JIT"
wn
^v a
0'"
-ea-
ttalnu
nociutNO
iOOK UNIT
;5!*s
nOUlM MMT HWOI *
Wffi
V M«uT MMioa I ««ut mnem
6600
3x
H=-
«0
mooi \
f^
-A
14TCH ^-/
5=7
. 1 Yi<" '
1. Didactic means adapted for providing essentially a dis-
junctive problem entry and answer response entry effect
thereby providing a student directed learning experience,
comprising in operative combination:
i. a set of substantially planar interrogative elements with
each element therewith provided individually having
thereon at least a first symbolic stimuli which is presented
as an effectively visible problem to the student for tutorial
consideration, together with a first cryptogrammic code
identity corresponding to the said first symbolic stimuli
which is machine readable by noncontiguous means and
results in an effective indication of the requisite student
response;
ii. a set of substantially planar responser elements with at
least one element selectable therefrom having second
symbolic stimuli presented thereon which substantially
serves as an effectively visible answer component which is
correlative with the said individual interrogative element
problem put to the student, together with a second crypto-
grammic code identity corresponding to the said second
symbolic stimuli which is machine readable by noncontig-
uous means and results in an effective indication of the
response selection;
iii. an interrogative element sensor station means comprising
a substantially separate stationary sensing element means
for each cryptogrammic code element which is effectively
recipient for the purpose of converting the said first cryp-
togrammic code identity representations on the said inter-
rogative element into a plurality of effectively parallel
first functional electical signals;
iv. a responser element sensor station means comprising a
substantially separate stationary sensing element means
for each cryptogrammic code element wbjeh is effectively
recipient for the purpose of converting the said second
cryptogrammic code identity representations on at least
one said resfMnser element into a plurality of effectively
parallel second functional electrical signals;
V. processing logic means arranged as an effectual combina-
tion of electrical devices suited for the correlative manipu-
lation and comparison of the said first and said second
functional electical signals effectively coupled thereto as
provided by the said sensor station means; and,
vi. indication means coupled with the said processing logic
unit to signal and thereby score the student as to the
exactitude of his/her selected responser element answer.
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
243
4,435,165
FLOTATION DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING A PERSON IN
WATER
Janes E. Johnson, Cheltenham, England, awignor to J. E. John-
son A Sons (Engineers) Limited, Cheltenham, England
FUed Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,755
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 31, 1979,
7926682
Int. a.3 B63C 9/08
UA a 441-130 13 Claims
covering the shaft and engaging in said seat, said sheath
having a plurality of slou (13);
at least some of said appendixes (15) having click detents
(15A) for engagement into said slots (15) of said tubular
sheath;
an inner main funnel (39) mounted on and covering said
inner ring nut (7) holding said nut and preventing its radial
expansion, said inner main funnel having a tongue seat (41)
for each of said resilient tongues (27) for a spring-engage-
ment of said inner main funnel (39) on said inner ring nut
. (7) and for preventing relative roution between said nut
and said inner main funnel; and
an outer funnel-shaped band (69) spring-fitted on said main
funnel to form an extension thereof in an axial direction of
said guard and axially fixed with respect to said inner main
funnel.
1. A flotation device for supporting a person in water com-
prising an elongate frame including at least one body-support
member, and front and rear float assemblies mounted on the
frame, at least one of said float assemblies comprising two float
elements spaced apart transversely of the elongate frame, and
locating means on the frame providing a push-fit connection
between the float elements and the frame, whereby the float
elements are easily attachable and detachable to and from the
frame by hand, each float element comprising a body of buoy-
ant material connected to the elongate frame by a respective
mounting element, each mounting element being shaped to
define an aperture into which said body of buoyant material is
received, each mounting element being round aluminum tub-
ing bent into a loop to define said aperture, each body of buoy-
ant material including notches between two portions of greater
cross-sectional area, the buoyant material being retained in the
aperture by forcing it through the loop of bent aluminum
tubing until the tubing snaps into the notches.
4,435,167
CENTRIFUGE
Reinhard Stfiwer, Au in der Halleriau. Fed. Rep. of Germany,
aMignor to Compur-Electronic GmbH, Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,409
Qalms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 27,
1980, 3036538
Int. a.J B04B 5/02
U.S. a. 494-16 15 cui^
^
y
4,435,166
GUARD MADE UP OF SECHONAL UNITS FOR
CARDAN SHAFTS
Edi Bondioli, Via Gina Bianchi 18, Suzzara, Mantova, Italy
Filed May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 381,747
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Jun. 5, 1981, 9437 A/81
Int. C\? F16D 3/84
U.S. a. 464-172 9 ciaiott
70 77 89
1. In a centrifuge having a rotor and at least one sample
vessel swingingly supported in said rotor for swinging into a
horizontal position on running the centrifuge, the invention
residing in that said centrifuge has a rolling system for support-
ing said vessel on said rotor, said system being made up of at
least two cooperating rolling structures of which at least one is
convexly curved, one structure being on the rotor and the
other on the vessel, said convexly curved structure being
arranged normal to a plane of roution of said rotor, said struc-
tures being adapted to permit said sample vessel to swingingly
turn into and out of a horizonul centrifuging position.
4,435,168
CENTRIFUGE ROTOR APPARATUS WITH SLING ARMS
A. Terence Kennedy, Walpolc, Mass., assignor to Danon Corpo-
ration, Necdhan Heights, Mass.
Filed Jun. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 384,899
Int. a.^ B04B 3/02
U.S. a. 494-20 10 Claims
7369 8t 75 X
1. A guard for a cardan shaft having at least one universal
joint with a base, and a shaft connected to the base, comprising:
a collar (21) having an annular throat (23) and mounted on
the base;
an inner radially expandable open ring nut (7) having an
inner annular projection (25) rotaUbly engaged in said
annular throat (23), a plurality of resilient tongues (27)
extending on one side of said ring nut, and a plurality of
appendixes (15. 33) extending on an opposite side of said
ring nut and forming a seat on the inner surface thereof;
a telescopic guard part (9, 11) having a tubular sheath (9) for
1. In a centrifuge rotor having plural arms extending radially
244
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
from a hub, said rotor being arranged for supportingly receiv-
ing on said arms pivoting support means for centrifuge carrier
means, the improvement in which each rotor arm comprises
sling means formed by vertically-spaced upper and lower arm
segments joined at a sling seat distal from the rotor hub, said
segments of each rotor arm being vertically-separated for
removably and replaceably receiving therebetween receptacle-
supporting pivot structure, and said sling seat forming bearing
means for receiving the receptacle-supporting pivot structure.
4,435,169
CENTRIFUGE ROTOR HAVING A CXOSABLE
WINDSHIELD
Williani A. Romanaiuluu, Southbury, Conn., assignor to E. I.
Du Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Dei.
FUed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,907
Int. a.3 B04B 5/02
U.S. a. 494—20 14 Gaims
1. A rotor for a swinging bucket centrifuge comprising:
a shaft;
a plurality of rotor buckets pivotally mounted to the shaft,
the buckets being pivotable from a rest position to an
operating position;
an upper windshield portion attached to the shaft for rota-
tion therewith, the outer boundary of the upper wind-
shield portion terminating in a mating edge; and f
a lower windshield portion movably mounted with respect
to the shaft, the lower windshield portion having a mating
edge thereon, the lower windshield portion being mov-
able in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation of the
rotor in response to a closing force generated by the
rotation of the rotor to displace the lower windshield
portion along the shaft and dispose the mating edges
thereof into closed engagement with the mating edges on
the upper windshield portion.
4,435,170
ASSEMBLY FOR RECEIVING AND DISCHARGING A
COLLECTION OF BLOOD
Max Laszczower, Basel, Switzerland, assignor to Solco Basel
AG, Switzerland
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,711
Int. a.^ A61M 37/00; A61B 19/00
U.S. a. 604-^ 20 Claims
1. An assembly operable by a single person for receiving by
aspiration, storing and discharging a collection of blood to the
same patient, said assembly comprising:
(a) a single vessel means for collection and dispensing having
a structural configuration effective to be held in one hand
of an operator and further effective for receiving and
storing blood, said vessel means having a plurality of
chamber means for alternate collection and dispensing of
the aspirated blood and having inlet and outlet means
disposed at op]x>site ends thereof, one of said chamber
means having a lesser diameter than the other chamber
means,
(b) a flexible tube removably connected to one of the inlet or
outlet means,
(c) fluid flow aspirating regulating means removably dis-
posed on the said flexible tube at a location spaced from
said collection vessel means, said flow regulating means
including coupling means rigidly mounted to one end of a
support element means to support the flexible tube and
handle means disposed at the other end of said element
means, said handle means having a structural conflgura-
tion effective to be held simultaneously in the other hand
of the operator while said lesser diameter chamber means
of the vessel means is being held in said one hand of the
operator while the flow of blood is simultaneously regu-
lated by the fluid flow regulating means.
(d) said flexible tube being removably connected to one end
of said coupling means and the other end of said coupling
means including an opening for directing liquid there-
through into and out of said flexible tubing,
(e) said fluid flow regulating means including a pair of walls
upwardly extending from the support element at a loca-
tion between the handle means and the coupling means,
roller means movably mounted with respect to the pair of
walls and being effective to control the amount of fluid
flowing in a flexible hose disposed between said roller and
the support element.
4,435,171
APPARATUS TO BE WORN AND METHOD FOR
REMOVING FLUID FROM A LIVING SUBJECT
Edward M. Goldberg, 225 Maple HiU Rd., Glencoe, lU. 60022,
and Seymour Bazell, 9235 N. Latrobe, Skokle, III. 60077
Continuation of Ser. No. 45,294, Jun. 4, 1979, abandoned. This
application Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,188
Int. a.3 A61M 31/00
U.S. a. 604—49 13 Claims
1. A method for collecting body liquids comprising the steps
of:
(a) connecting a sterile, liquid receiving, device to a source
of draining body liquids, said device including a manifold
means for connection to the source of draining body
liquids and a plurality of sterile containers connected to
and below said manifold, each of said containers having a
valve associated therewith which is selectively manually
operable to either open gravity flow of liquids from the
manifold to the container or to isolate the container from
the manifold;
(b) positioning the valves to cause the body liquids to flow
by gravity from the manifold into a preselected container;
(c) repositioning the valves to isolate said preselected con-
tainer from the manifold;
(d) removing said preselected container with liquids therein
from the manifold so as to leave the associated valve
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
245
coupled to the manifold, thereby separating the prese-
lected container and the body liquids conuined therein
from the manifold without opening the manifold during
said transfer of liquids to atmosphere or contamination;
and
(e) repeating steps (b) through (d) with a second preselected
container included in the drainage receiving device'.
4,435,172
ABSORBENT ARTICLE HAVING ENHANCED BLOOD
ABSORPTION
James R. Gross, Lake Jackson, Tex., assignor to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,680
Int. a.J D02G 3/00: A61S 13/16
U.S. a. 604—368 13 cig|„,
1. A water-swellable hydrophilic polymer article containing
an effective amount of a water soluble amido compound hav-
ing the formula
H2N-X-NH2
where X is -CO-, -CS-, -SO- or -SO2-, and an
effective amount of a non-ionic surfactant which are effective
to improve the blood absorption rate of said article.
4,435,173
VARIABLE RATE SYRINGE PUMP FOR INSULIN
DELIVERY
George G. Siposs, Costa Mesa, Calif., and Jerry B. Christian, St.
Louis, Mo., assignors to Delta Medical Industries, Costa
Mesa, Calif.
Filed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,102
Int. a.3 A61M 5/20
U.S. a. 609-155 12 Qaims
90 10
of medication to a patient, said piston pump having a
piston therein;
electrical motor drive means connected to said piston to
move said piston in said pump to dispense medication
from said pump, said electric motor means comprismg a
pulse-driven electric motor having an output shaft, said
output shaft being connected to a lead screw, a nut on said
lead screw to move axially of said lead screw when said
lead screw rotates, said nut being in engagement with said
plunger to move said plunger as said motor rotates, a
wheel connected to rotate with said lead screw, a plurality
of magnetic poles on said wheel, said motor drive means
mcluding a pulse switch, said pulse switch being a magnet-
ically controlled switch mounted directly adjacent said
wheel and controlled by said wheel to produce signal
pulses as said motor moves said plunger;
control means for controlling said motor, said control means
having pulse interval selection means for producing a base
command pulse rate which is proportional to the desired
medication dispensing command rate, said pulse switch
being connected to said motor control means so that the
pulses produced as said motor moves said piston are
counted by said control means and are compared to the
command pulses delivered for controlling said motor, said
base rate selection means being manually selectable, said
control means also including a bolus control means con-
nected to deliver a preselected number of bolus command
pulses to said motor drive means for the delivery of a
preselected amount of medication.
i
4.435,174
CATHETER GUIDE
Russell J. Redmond, Santa Barbara, and Donald L. Hannula,
Goleta, both of Calif., assignors to American Hospital Supply
Corporation, Evanston, III.
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,816
Int. a.J A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604-174 ,3 Qaims
1. A variable rate pump for insulin delivery comprising:
a piston pump having an output for connection for delivery
1. A catheter guide comprising:
a base having a channel with a flrst portion of the channel
which extends across the base for receiving a catheter;
an outwardly and arcuately extending member on the base
having a second portion of the channel which extends
along such member;
a first retaining means on the base for retaining a catheter
within the first portion of the channel; and
a second retaining means on the arcuately extending member
for retaining such catheter within the second portion of
the channel.
246
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,175
INFUSION NEEDLE CARRIER
G. Burton Friden, 2200 Broad St, Colmar, Pa. 18915
FUed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,190
Int. a.^ A61M 5/00
VJS. a. €04— m
21 Claims
I
1. An infusion needle carrier comprising:
a body member, said body member including at least one
body hinge block means;
an infusion needle firmly affixed to said body member;
a laterally extending support base portion affixed to said
body member for selective movement with respect to said
body member;
a control member affixed to said body member, said control
member having two opposed sides and having a manually
squeezed condition in which said opposed sides are forced
towards each other and an unsqueezed condition;
camming means on said control member, said camming
means being selectively operatively associated with said
support base portion, the engagement condition of said
camming means being operatively responsive to said
squeezed and unsqueezed conditions of said control mem-
ber;
whereby, when said control member is in said squeezed
condition, said camming means are adapted to release said
body member and said support base portion from mutual
locked engagement thereby disposing them in an unset
non-locked condition with respect to each other, and,
when said control member is in said unsqueezed condition,
said support base portion and said body member are in a
set locked condition with respect to each other, said en-
gagement condition of said camming means thereby deter-
mining said set and unset condition.
4,435,176
NEEDLE ASSEMBLY
Soji Ishikawa, No. 6-22, Miyazaki 6<home, Takatou-ku,
Kawaaaki-shi, Kanagawa-ken, Japan
FUed Feb. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 347,160
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 22, 1981, 56-
156380[U]
Int. a.3 A61M 5/32
U.S. a. 604—190 3 Claims
504846 14b "^^ J' y.,,
36 36 34 32
1. A needle assembly for use with a hypodermic syringe
including a syringe barrel with a snout formed at its leading
end, said snout being tapered towards its tip end and having a
hole therein, which comprises:
a needle having a longitudinal bore extending throughout its
length;
a needle holder receiving the needle at its one end and hav-
ing a flared bore therein at its other end, said flared bore
being shaped and sized to be press fitted over the tapered
snout of the syringe barrel, said needle holder having a
narrow hole in the needle receiving section which com-
municates with the flared bore;
a hollow pipe fixed in the flared bore at the innermost area
thereof by means of a bulged portion formed at a base
thereof, said pipe being shaped and sized to be inseried in
the snout hold and having a passage which communicates
with the needle bore through the narrow hole in the
needle holder; and
a plate-like filter provided at the area in the needle holder
which communicates with the needle and the pipe, the
filter being carried by annular projections formed on the
end walls of the pipe and the flared bore of the needle
holder.
4,435,177
NEEDLE ASSEMBLY
Bruce N. Kuhlemann, Hayward; Kalman Horvath, Concord, and
Prentice C. Wharff, Oakley, all of Calif., assignors to Cutter
Laboratories, Inc., Berkeley, Calif.
FUed Jun. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 386,549
Int. a? A61M 5/32
U.S. a. 604—263 14 Claims
20t
1. A needle assembly comprising a needle, a needle-retaining
portion, a removable needle protector portion, and a resilient
member for removing liquid from the surface of said needle,
said liquid-removing member being contained within and re-
movable with said needle protector portion and being posi-
tioned around a portion of, and disposed rearward of the point
of, said needle, said liquid-removing member further having a
needle-accommodating opening with an inner diameter ap-
proximately that of the outside diameter of the needle and
outer cross sectional dimensions such that at least one of the
dimensions is less than the internal cross sectional dimension of
the protector, thereby providing a passageway for facilitating
steam sterilization rearward of the liquid-removing member.
4,435,178
DISPOSABLE ABSORBENT PRODUCT HAVING AN
EMBOSSED PAD CONTAINING A GEL FORMING
COMPOUND
Harry G. Fitzgerald, Green Bay, Wis., assignor to Colgate-Pal-
moUve Company, New York, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 27, 1978, Ser. No. 890,155
Int. a.J A61F 13/16
\}&. a. 604—365 1 Claim
1. A disposable product comprising an absorbent core hav-
ing a corrugated tissue sandwiched between two layers of
fluffed pulp, upper and lower layers of wadding above and
March 6, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
247
below said absorbent core, a fluid impervious sheet wrapped
about said upper wadding layer and said absorbent core and
having edges bonded to said lower wadding layer, and a non-
woven sheet material wrapped about said wadding, core, and
fluid impervious sheet, the lower layer of said layers of fluff^ed
pulp facing the wearer and being provided with embossed
recesses therein, said recesses extending about four-fifths the
thickness of said lower layer of fluff-ed pulp and the material of
said lower layer of fluffed pulp above said re-esses being highly
compressed, said recesses being coated with a subilizing bind-
ing material selected from polymers derived from poly acrylo
nitnle, poly acrylamide and starches grafted therewith, said
lower layer of fluff^ed pulp having grooves in the lower layer
interconnecting said recesses.
composed of a connecting portion, a break-off portion and a
fracture line located within the recess, the connecting portion
being joined directly to said first bag so that it is situated di-
rectly at the upper edge of said first bag and terminating sub-
stantially evenly therewith, the break-off portion within said
recess upon breaking off falling into the inside of the bag and
leaving the connecting portion open for free passage of liquid
across its full cross-sectioned area.
4 435 179
BLOOD BAGS WITH INTERCONNECTING SYSTEM
Wolfram H. Walker, R5dermark, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Biotest-Serum-Institut GmbH, Frankftirt-Niederrad
Fed. Rep. of Germany '
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,769
Int. Q\? A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604-410 5 ci.,^
4,435,180
ELASTOMERIC ACHVE AGENT DELIVERY SYSTEM
AND METHOD OF USE
Harold M. Leeper, Mountain View, Calif., assignor to ALZA
Corporation, Palo Alto, Calif.
FUed May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 381,994
Int. a.J A61K 9/00
U.S. a 604-896 14 cw^
1. A blood bag assembly comprising at least first and second
bags and tubular means connecting the interiors of the bags
the first bag having a sealed flattened edge, the interior of said
first bag projecting upwardly into the region of the sealed edge
to form a recess, the connecting means including a coupling
1. A transdermal therapeutic system for delivering active
agent to the skin comprising body member surrounding means,
at least a portion of said means being formed from an elasto-
meric matrix having active agent dispersed therethrough at a
concentration greater than the saturation concentration of said
agent in said elastomer, the skin proximal surface area of said
matrix being smaller in its relaxed condition than in its condi-
tion of use when applied around a body member whereby the
elastomeric matrix creates a compressive force on said body
member sufficient to esublish and maintain active agent trans-
ferring conuct between said transdermal therapeutic system
and the skin of said body member.
CHEMICAL
V
4,435,181
CONCENTRATED FLOWABLE STORAGE STABLE
AQUEOUS FORMULATIONS OF COLD DYEING FIBER
REACTIVE DYESTUFFS
Robert G. Hoguet; Dietmar Kalz; Thomas J. Thomas; Henry T.
Whetsell, all of SummerviUe, S.C; Joachim Wolff, Cologne,
Fed. Rep. of Germany; Konrad Nonn, and Karl-Heinz Wolf,
both of Leverkiuen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Mobay Chemical Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa. and Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft, Bayerwerk, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,426
Int. a.' D06P 67/00
U.S. a. 8—527 14 Qalms
1. A storage stable concentrated fluid aqueous dispersion of
at least one water soluble cold dyeing fiber reactive dyestuff
having superior kinetic solubility comprising
(A) between about 10 and 50 wt. % of at least one dyestufT
having an average particle size less than about 100 mi-
crons of the formula:
(M03S)„— Z-N— R
Rl
(I)
wherein
M=the cation of Li, Na, K, NH3 or an organic amine
n=an integer of 1 to 5
Z=a dyestufT chromophore system
R' = H or a Ci to C4 alkyl, and
R=a fiber reactive group of one of the following struc-
tures:
(2)
(3)
O
II
— c
oroi
(4)
N X4
N ' ^Xs
wherein
Xi =C1, F. but F if X2 not F or CI
X2=C1, F, NH2, NHR2, OR2, SR2, -CH2R2
X3 = C1, F, CH3
X4=C1, F
X5 = C1, F. CH3X6=C1, F
with the proviso that one of X3 and Xa is F,
and wherein
R2=alkyl substituted by OH, SO3H, COOH, or C1-C4-
alkoxy,
aryl substituted by SO3H, Ci-C4-alkyl, or C1-C4-
alkoxy,
aralkyl substituted by SO3H, Ci-C4-alkyl, or C1-C4-
alkoxy;
^ (B) between about 2 and 15 wt. % of dispersant selected
from the group consisting of anionic dispersing agents and
vinyl polymers synthesized from monomers of the for-
mula
1040 O.G.— 9
(5)
I
CH««CH2
in which m is an integer from 3 to 5; and
(C) between about 4 and 25 wt. % of water soluble electro-
lyte said dispersion having a viscosity at 20* C. of less than
5,000 cps at 20 rpm.
4,435,182
PROCESS FOR THE EXTRACHON OF SOLID
MATERIAL FROM SOLUTION BY CRYSTALLIZATION
Zoltan Banos; Endre Vereczkey; Gybrgy Kerey; Peter Rudolf;
Istvan Takacs; Jozsef Felmeri, and Gyula Bosits, all of Buda-
pest, Hungary, assignors to Gedeon Vegyeszeti Gyar Rt.,
Budapest, Hungary
Division of Ser. No. 131,826, Mar. 19, 1980, Pat. No. 4,357,306.
This application Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,509
Qaims priority, application Hungary, Mar. 21, 1979, RI 704
Int. Q.^ BOID 9/02
U.S. a. 23—295 R 6 Claims
1. In a process for the extraction of dissolved solid material
from a solution by crystallization in which a mother phase in a
metastable range in which crystallization begins is formed, said
mother phase is cooled to increase crystal growth and form a
crystal slurry, and crystals are separated from said slurry, the
improvement which comprises the steps of:
(a) separating said crystals from said crystal slurry by contin-
uous filtration of said slurry to form a fraction containing
a required grain size of crystals and a fraction of mother
liquor containing crystals of a grain size less than said
required size;
(b) continuously mixing the mother liquor from step (a) with
fresh solution containing dissolved solids;
(c) allowing the crystals from the mother liquor and the
fresh solution to settle and form said mother phase and a
further mother liquor free from crystals, and discharging
said further mother liquor;
(d) cooling and simultaneously moving the mother phase
formed in step (c) to increase crystallization thereof and
form said crystal slurry, the cooling and simultaneous
moving of said mother phase formed in step (c) being
effected by passing it along cooled surfaces from one end
to another of an elongated body while swinging said body
around an axis; and
(e) feeding the crystal slurry formed in step (d) to filtration
in step (a).
249
250
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,183
PROCESS FOR RAPID DEWATERING AND DRYING OF
CALCIUM SULFATE HEMIHYDRATE
Donald O. Baehr, Arlington Heights, 111., assignor to United
States Gypsum Company, Chicago, 111.
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,231
Int. a.3 BOID 1/14: COIF 11/46; C04B 11/02
U.S. a. 23-293 R 6 Qainu
taking the precipitated boric acid into solution in hot water;
and
4,435 184
METHOD OF RECOVERING BORIC AOD FROM
WASTE- WATER CONCENTRATES OF NUCLEAR
PLANTS
Heinrich J. Schroeder, Biblis; Rainer Ambros, Biblis-Watten-
heim; Gottfried Paffrath, Hohen Siilzen, and Norbert Bren-
ner, Biirstadt, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Rhei-
nisch-Westfalisches Elektrizitiitswerk AG, Essen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 215,151, Dec. 11, 1980,
abandoned. This application Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,094
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 15,
1979, 2950601
Int a.J BOID 9/02; COIB 35/10
VJS. CL 23—300 3 Claims
1. A method of recovering boric acid from a nuclear power
plant waste-water concentrate containing boric acid, radionu-
clides and chemical residues, comprising the steps of:
removing solids from said nuclear power plant waste-water
concentrate by filtration;
acidifying the concentrate to a pH of about 2 with at least
one acid selected from the group which consists of sulfu-
ric acid, hydrochloric acid, nitric acid and acetic acid,
adding a boric-acid-solubility reducing salt thereto, and
lowering the temperature as the resulting solution to pre-
cipitate boric acid;
recovering the precipitated boric acid by filtering upon a
filter of a pore sizejaf 10 to 25 microns;
•o«-c »c.o
lioaic *c'0*
w
M«<t MMn>ao«c AfO.MooMCL.on
CO*M.OinMtiON
^'
. ', .., 1
1,^
—■caNcrs
•A1
13
•fC*CLt
IMT(
/
■DMc ACiO
•■•MAVT
..V
_^coNcr«.
' COMCCM^Mrc
20 c»iK)v^
ACiDir.c*t<OM
Hjsq,(-ci/HNO,i
^15
)
I, q
„/
-6/
-~ kuS#CM1
•Oh
.17
ri»o«ic
riLTHI CAM
AC<0>
*Eca*^t*t.v'j*TiOi«
— 1»
1
cooling the solution to recrystallize the boric acid out of the
latter solution.
1. A process for rapid mechanical dewatering and thermal
drying of a calcium sulfate hemihydrate slurry in a centrifug-
ing and flash drying operation comprising:
enclosing the discharge end of a centrifuge bowl within a
high velocity, high volume, heated air stream of a flash
dryer;
passing high velocity, high volume heated air through the
dryer;
ejecting damp hemihydrate solids directly from the centri-
fuge bowl lip into the high velocity, high volume heated
air stream of the flash dryer;
and suspending the hemihydrate solids in the high velocity,
high volume heated air stream until dry.
4,435,185
FURNACE FUEL
Thomas C. Kenny, Syosset, and John P. Plunkett, Smithtown,
both of N.Y., assignors to Horizon Chemical, Inc., Freeport.
N.Y.
Filed Oct. 1, 1979, Ser. No. 81,017
Int. a.3 ClOL 1/22
U.S.a.44— 68 16aaims
1. A liquid hydrocarbon furnace fuel having improved com-
bustion properties by the addition thereto as a combustion
catalyst of from about l.Ox 10"^ to about l.Ox IQ-^ parts by
weight of at least one isomer of dinitrotoluene.
4,435,186
ALCOHOL FUELS CONTAINING WEAR-INHIBITING
AMOUNTS OF REACnON PRODUCTS OF AMINES AND
PHOSPHATE ESTERS OF PHOSPHONIC AODS
Rodney L. Sung, Fishkill; Beigamin J. Kaufiman, and William
M. Sweeney, both of Wappingers Falls, all of N.Y., assignors
to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,572
Int a.3 ClOL 1/26
U.S. a. 44—53 40 Qalms
1. A fuel composition for internal combustion engines com-
prising
(a) a major poriion of a fuel containing (i) at least one alcohol
selected from the group consisting of ethanol and metha-
nol and (ii) gasoline in amount of 0-50 volumes per vol-
ume of alcohol; and
(b) a minor wear-inhibiting amount 0.2-10 w % of, as a
wear-inhibiting additive, a reaction product of
(i) an amine
R<,-N[(R"0)^]f
H3-(a+c)
wherein R contains 1-30 carbon atoms and is selected
from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkaryl,
aralkyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl hydrocarbon groups, R" is
a divalent hydrocarbon group containing 1-30 carbon
atoms and is selected from the group consisting of alkyl-
ene, alkenylene, alkarylene, aralkylene. cycloalkylene,
and arylene hydrocarbon groups, a and c are each
integers 1-2, a plus c is 2-3, and b is an integer 1-5 with
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
251
(ii) a phosphate ester
t
(R'OhP
OH
or a phosphonic acid
P
/ \
HO OH
4,435,187
FUEL AND LUBRICANT COMPOSITIONS FOR OCTANE
REQUIREMENT REDUCnON
L. B. Graiff, and T. E. Kiovsky, both of Houston, Tex., assignors
to Shell Oil Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,221
Int. a.3 ClOL 1/18. 1/22. 1/24
U.S. a. 44—63 10 Qalms
1. A fuel composition wherein a major portion of the fuel
comprises hydrocarbons boiling in the gasoline range and
incorporating a minor amount of an additive composition
which exhibits octane requirement reduction properties, said
additive composition comprising a substituted urea selected
from 4-[N-(2,4-xylyl)carbamoyl] morpholine, l-[N-(2,4-xylyl)-
carbamoyl] piperidine and l-(2-pyridyl)-3-(2,4-xylyl)-2-thi-
ourea.
7. A method of operating a spark ignition internal combus-
tion engine which comprises burning in said engine a motor
fuel comprising a gasoline boiling range hydrocarbon mixture
containing an additive composition comprising a minor
amount of substituted urea represented by the formula:
^R2
R|— ^ \-NH-C-R3
in which X is an oxygen or sulfur atom, R| and R2 are hydro-
carbyl radicals having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and R3 is
selected from the group consisting of
— N
I (
. -N \and -NH— / \
4,435 188
INSTALLATION FOR PREPARING COMBUSTIBLE
GASES THROUGH FERMENTATION
Jean-Marie Dedenon, 10 Rue du 8 Mai, 77370 Nangis, France,
and Denis Rassak, 15 Rue Georges Blandon, 78430 Louve-
ciennes, France
PCT No. PCT/FR81/00053, § 371 Date Dec. 17. 1981, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 17, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/03030, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 29, 1981
PCT Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 333,875
Oaims priority, application France, Apr. 21, 1980, 80 08855
Int. a.5 C02F 3/28
U.S. a 48-111 4ci^^
wherein R' contains 1-30 carbon atoms and is selected
from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkaryl,
aralkyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl.
1. Installation for the preparation of fuel gases by anaerobic
fermentation, comprising
a first tank (1) for the treatment of fermentable solids or
concentrated liquids containing fermentable solids and
having a solid content greater than 16%, said first tank
being provided with a perforated partition means to per-
mit drainage of liquid therethrough over almost the entire
height of said first tank and allowing gases and liquids to
circulate therethrough while holding solids from passing
therethrough;
a second tank (2) for the treatment of dilute fermentatabie
liquids the dry content of which is less than 10%, said
second tank having a heating coil (13) therein;
fermentable solids feeding means connected to the top of
said first tank for feeding fermentable solids to said first
tank, said fermentable solids feeding means comprising a
chopper (7), a recirculation intake pipe (8) connected
between said second tank and said feeding means for
recycling liquor from said second tank to said fermentable
solids feed device, and a conveyor means (25) for convey-
ing a mixture of the recycling liquor from said intake pipe
and fermentable solids from said chopper to said first tank;
means (6) for introducing fermenuble liquid to said second
tank;
means (14, 15) for collecting fermentation residue coming
from said first tank;
connecting pipes (16fl, I6b) extending between said first unk
and said second tank for passing liquids from said first tank
to said second tank from several different levels of said
first tank; and
a collector pipe (12) extending from the upper portion of
said first tank and said second tank for collecting gases
produced by fermentation.
252
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,189
METHOD OF PREPARING ROUGH TEXTURED METAL
COATED ABRASIVES AND PRODUCT RESULTING
THEREFROM
Harold P. Bovenkerk, Worthington, Ohio, assignor to General
Electric Company, Worthington, Ohio
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,575
Int. a.J C23C 3/02
U.S. a. 51—295 7 Qalms
1. An improved nickel coated crystal of diamond or cubic
boron nitride which is made by the steps of:
(a) treating said crystals with an acidic solution of palladium
chloride; and
(b) stirring said treated crystals in an aqueous solution con-
taining coating nickel ions and hypophosphite ions capa-
ble of reducing said nickel ions to the free metal for coat-
ing said crystals;
the improvement which comprises the additional steps of:
(i) interrupting step (b) by forming a passivated coating on
the nickel-coated crystals of step (b);
(ii) reactivating said passivated coated crystals with addi-
tional acidic solution of palladium chloride whereby an
array of preferential sites for nickel coating deposition is
obtained; and
(iii) resuming the coating process of step (b) whereby a
rough nickel surface is obtained.
4,435,191
PROCESS FOR SEPARATING AGGRESSIVE GASES
FROM GAS MIXTURES
Tommy E. Graham, Raleigh, N.C., assignor to Monsanto Com-
pany, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Jun. 30, 1983, Ser. No. 509,823
Int. a.3 BOID 53/22
U.S. a. 55—16 9 Qaims
16
IT
4,435,190
METHOD FOR SEPARATING PARTICLES IN
SUSPENSION IN A GAS
Joseph Taillet, Boulogne, and Serge Larigaldie, Chatenay
Malabry, both of France, assignors to Office National d'E-
tudes et de Recherches Aerospatiales, France
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,587
Oaims priority, application France, Mar. 14, 1981, 81 09646
Int. a.3 B03C 3/00
U.S. CI. 55 — 5 5 Claims
19 K
1. A method for separating particles suspended in a gas,
which comprises:
producing ions trapped by microscopic ice crystals by super-
sonic expansion of a moist gas stream in a supersonic
nozzle including a corona discharge in a separate cham-
ber;
injecting the ions trapped by the ice crystals into an enclo-
sure from the nozzle causing the ice crystals to change
their state in said enclosure freeing the trapped ions to
create a space charge;
passing a gas containing suspended particles through the
space charge thereby transferring a charge to the parti-
cles; and,
collecting the charged particles by electrostatic deposition.
'" ri-CI~I 'f X
le
20
TREATMENT
ZONE A
21
22
treatment
zoneB
treatment
zoneC
1. A process for separating an aggressive gas from a mixture
of said aggressive gas and at least one other gas, comprising
(a) passing the gas mixture through a plurality of treatment
zones connected in series,
(b) in each zone first compressing the gas mixture,
(c) then in each zone bringing the compres^d gas mixture
into contact with a feed side of a membrane having a
critical partial pressure 'for the aggressive gas and being
more permeable to the aggressive gas than said other gas
such that the aggressive gas permeates the membrane to
the other side thereof to thereby decrease the partial
pressure of the aggressive gas on the feed side of the
membrane, said gas mixture being compressed at a tem-
perature and to such a pressure prior to contact with the
membrane that the partial pressure of the aggressive gas is
a least 75 percent of said critical partial pressure and the
partial pressure of the aggressive gas is not above the
critical partial pressure of the aggressive gas,
(d) maintaining the gas mixture in contact with said feed side
of said membrane a sufficient time to decrease the partial
pressure of the aggressive gas on the feed side of the
membrane to less than 40 percent of said critical partial
pressure, and
(e) passing the gas mixture through a sufficient number of
treatment zones that the non-permeated gas mixture leav-
ing the last treatment zone in said series contains less than
20 percent of said aggressive gas.
4 435 192
CONTROL OF A H2S ABSORBER
William S. Stewart, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips
Petroleum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Not. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 444,140
Int. a.3 BOID 53/14
U.S. a. 55—19 8 Claims
1. A method for controlling an absorption process wherein a
feed gas containing H2S is contacted with a lean absorption
medium, suitable for removing said H2S from said feed gas, in
an absorption column, wherein a product gas stream having a
substantially reduced concentration of H2S with respect to said
feed gas is removed from an upper portion of said absorption
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
253
column and wherein a rich absorption medium containing the
H2S removed from said feed gas is removed from a lower
portion of said absorption column, said method comprising the
steps of:
establishing a first signal representative of the fiow rate of
said lean absorption medium to said absorption column
required to maintain the actual concentration of H2S in
said product gas stream substantially equal to a desired
concentration;
establishing a second signal representative of the flow rate of
said lean absorption medium to said absorption column
required to maintain the actual H2S concentration in said
rich absorption medium at or below a high limit for the
actual concentration of H2S in the rich absorption me-
dium;
establishing a third signal which is equal to the one of said
first and second signals which is representative of the
highest flow rate of said lean absorption medium; and
manipulating the flow rate of said lean absorption medium to
said absorption column in response to said third signal.
4,435,193 ^
CONTROLLING OPERATION OF A CENTRIFUGAL
PUMP
Johan E. Gullicbsen, Siuntio, Finland; Esko Harkonen, Karl-
stad, Sweden; Toivo Niskanen, Hamina, Finland; Jaakko
Ki^ala, and Voitto Reppnen, both of Karhula, Finland, assign-
ors to Kamyr AB, KarUltad, Sweden
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 139,162, Apr. 7, 1980, Pat. No.
4,410337. ThU application Nov. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 439,600
Int. a.5 BOID 79/00
U.S. a. 55-21 25 Oaims
^=tUJ
1. A method for controlling the operation of a centrifugal
pump pumping a suspension having a consistency of about
8-12 percent and containing gas, the pump having an inlet
suspension pressure, a pressure head, and a suspension dis-
charge flow rate, comprising the steps of:
(a) efl"ecting rotation of the suspension within the pump so
that a gas bubble is created in a central pari of the pump;
(b) discharging gas from the gas bubble in the pump central
pari, at a gas discharge pressure;
(c) rotating the pump impeller at a speed sufficient to effect
fluidization of the suspension, and eflecting discharge of
the fluidized suspension at a flow rate;
(d) determining the differential pressure between the suspen-
sion inlet pressure and the gas discharge pressure; and
(e) controlling the head and/or discharge flow rate of the
pump by controlling the differential pressure determined
in step (d).
18. A method for controlling the operation of a centrifugal
pump pumping a liquid or suspension containing gas, the pump
having an inlet liquid or suspension pressure, a pressure head,
and a liquid or suspension discharge flow rate, comprising the
steps of:
(a) effecting rotation of the liquid or suspension within the
pump so that a gas bubble is created in a central pari of the
pump;
(b) discharging gas from the gas bubble in the pump central
pari, at a gas discharge pressure, to an air vessel;
(c) determining the differential pressure between the liquid
or suspension inlet pressure and the gas discharge pres-
sure, the gas discharge pressure measured in the air vessel;
(d) controlling the head and/or discharge flow rate of the
pump by controlling the differential pressure determined
in step (c); and
(e) at pump start up, or when a rapid differential pressure
change is desired, feeding air at a controlled pressure and
flow rate— from a source independent of the pump gas
discharge— to the air vessel.
4,435,194
aRCUIT FOR VENTILATING AND HLTERING THE
MEDIUM CONTAINED IN A CONHNEMENT
ENCLOSURE
Gaude Picard, Nanterrc, and Bernard Saint Martin, Paris, both
of France, auignors to La Calhene, Beions, France
Continuation-in-pari of Ser. No. 230,624, Feb. 2, 1981,
abandoned. This application Apr. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 372,327
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 12, 1980, 80 03067
Int. a.) BOID 46/04
U.S. a. 55—96 21 Claims
1. A process for establishing and maintaining a vacuum
within a ventilated and filtered air tight enclosure, said process
comprising:
introducing a filtered medium into the enclosure through a
supply pipe having a first filtering means in the supply
pipe;
establishing a vacuum in the enclosure by employing an
enclosure discharge pipe which discharges the medium
from the enclosure in a normal flow direction and which
is connected to a means for establishmg the vacuum, the
discharge pipe having a second filtering means, and by
regulating the flow rate in the supply pipe; and
maintaining the vacuum in the enclosure m the event of a
failure by sensing the pressure within the enclosure and
actuating a means for maintaining the vacuum upon a
predetermined rise in pressure within the enclosure; the
means for maintaining the vacuum being connected to the
supply pipe upstream of the first filtering means and oper-
able to reverse the flow of the medium in the supply pipe.
4,435,195
nLTER UNIT AND IONIZING UNIT COMBINATION
Anthony Q. Testone, Lee, Mass., assignor to Sutic, Inc., Skip-
pack, Pa.
Filed Jul. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 400,900
Int. C\? B03C 3/01
U.S. a. 55—126 11 Claims
1. Apparatus for introducing filtered, ionized air into a room
comprising:
(a) a filter unit including an air impervious housing having an
air inlet on one face, an air discharge face opposite the air
inlet, and filter material in the housing between the air
inlet and the air discharge face,
(b) an ionizing unit comprising a plurality of ionizing points,
means supporting said ionizing points in positions distrib-
254
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
uted across the discharge face of the filter unit comprising
insulated conductor means, means capacitively coupling
said ionizing points to said conductor means, and conduc-
tive tubular means having said conductor means extending
therethrough,
(c) conductive frame means extending around said ionizing
unit and including means for supporting said ionizing unit
jo3^
layer on the liquid between said baffles being provided
above said separator, said baffles extending sufficiently
above said normal level for restraining said floating layer
between said baffles;
additional overflow means being provided in said inlet space
for removing a floating layer of said lighter liquid phase
separated from said liquid in said inlet space;
discharge means being provided for discharging a heaviest
phase separated from said liquid in said passages and
collected in the space below said separator; and
additional discharge means being provided for discharging
said heaviest phase separated in the space between the
downstream baffle and said overflow weir.
therein, said frame means conforming in size and shape to
the air discharge face of the filter unit, and means for
electrically connecting said frame means to said conduc-
tive tubular means,
(d) means for securing said frame means to said filter unit
housing at the discharge face thereof, and
(e) sealing means for preventing the passage of air between
said filter unit housing and said frame means.
4,435,196
MULTIPHASE SEPARATOR
Jacob Pielkenrood, Krommenie, Netherlands, assignor to PieN
kenrood-Vinitex Beheer B.V., Assendelft, Netherlands
Filed Teb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,293
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Feb. 27, 1981,
8100955
Int. a.3 BOID 19/00
MS. a. 55—174 22 Claims
4,435,197
BAGHOUSE nLTER
Pramodh Nyhawan, and William W. Avera, both of Winston-
Salem, N.C., assignors to The Bahnson Company, Winston-
Salem, N.C.
Filed Apr. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 367,046
Int. a.^ BOID 46/02
U.S. a. 55-r341 R 19 Qalras
(
^«»
1. A multiphase separation device, comprising a gas-tight
tank with a substantially horizontal axis, which tank is pro-
vided with a supply connection for the liquid to be treated
opening near one extremity of said tank into an inlet space
thereof, a plurality of discharge connections for the different
gaseous, liquid or solid phases, a plate separator arranged
within said tank with inclined parallel corrugated plates
adapted for cross-flow separation, an overflow weir arranged
at the other side of said separator for determining the normal
liquid level in said Unk, above which a gas phase collecting
space is present, extending over substantially the whole length
of the tank, the discharge connections being situated so that the
different components separated in the tank and in the cross-
flow separator can be discharged separately from one another,
in which;
said overflow weir is designed to determine the normal level
of a heavier liquid phase of the liquid to be treated, dis-
charge means for said heavier liquid phase being provided
at the downstream side of said overflow weir;
said plate separator being confined between two transverse
baffles extending upwards into said gas space, said baffles
being provided with an inlet and an outlet window respec-
tively;
the plates of said separator being substantially submerged
below said normal level, said windows defining a substan-
tially horizontal liquid flow through the passages between
said plates, overflow means for collecting a lighter liquid
phase separated in said passages and floating as a floating
1. In a bag filter comprising a housing having a dirty-gas
inlet, a clean gas outlet, a partition having an operative position
in the interior of said housing separating said inlet and outlet,
said partition having a plurality of filter openings therein af-
fording passage of gaseous medium from said inlet to said
outlet, each of said filter openings having a filter unit mounted
therein, said filter units comprising elongated bags of filter
material, said partition and said units comprising a filtering
assembly separating particulate matter from the gaseous me-
dium flowing from the inlet to the outlet, said filtering assem-
bly being mounted for displacement from said operative posi-
tion into a second position aflbrding ready removal and re-
placement of the filter units in said filter openings; the im-
provement wherein
said housing has an access opening in a front wall thereof,
said access opening being coextensive with an outline of
said filtering assembly to enable at least a substantial part
of said filtering assembly to pass through said access open-
ing upon displacement between said operative and said
second positions,
a door closing said access opening when said filtering assem-
bly is in said operative position,
said filtering assembly having one end mounted on said door
so as to effect displacement of said assembly with the door
between said operative and second positions, and a free
end opposite said one end, and
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
255
f5
door sealing elements disposed between said door and the
housing around the periphery of said opening, and end
sealing elements disposed between the opposite free end of
the filtering assembly and a rear wall of the housing oppo-
site said opening, said elements being positioned in sealing
engagement by displacement of said door and filtering
assembly from said second position into said operative
position.
18. In a bag filter comprising a housing having a dirty-gas
inlet, a clean gas outlet, a partition having an operative position
in the interior of said housing separating said inlet and outlet,
said partition having a plurality of generally circular filter
openings therein aflbrding passage of gaseous medium from
said inlet to said outlet, each of said filter openings having a
filter unit mounted therein, said partition and said units com-
prising a filtering assembly separating particulate matter from
the gaseous medium flowing from the inlet to the outlet, said
filtering assembly being mounted for displacement from said
operative position into a second position aflbrding ready re-
moval and replacement of the filter units in said filter openings;
the improvement wherein
each of said filter openings has recess means along its periph-
ery;
each of said filter units includes means mounting said filter
unit in said filter opening for removal and replacement
from the inlet side of the partition when said assembly is in
said second position;
said mounting means for each of said filter units comprises a
collar encircling said unit at one end, said collar having a
cylindrical portion with an outer diameter corresponding
to the diameter of said filter opening, at least two locking
tabs projecting outwardly from said cylindrical portion a
distance to overlap the circular outline of said opening,
the projection and circumferential width of said tabs being
less than the depth and circumferential width of the recess
means to enable passage of said tabs through said recess
means upon axial displacement of said filter unit in said
opening and to enable engagement of the tabs with the
outlet side of said partition upon rotary displacement of
said filter unit about the axis of said opening; and sealing
means comprising a circlet of resilient elastomeric mate-
rial anchored to said cylindrical portion and projecting
outwardly from said cylindrical portion at a distance from
said Ubs to seal against the inlet side of said partition, said
sealing means having a flared lip projecting radially and
axially in the direction of said tabs circumscribing said
opening and said recess means to sealingly engage the
surface of said partition on the inlet side thereof; and
each filter unit further includes a filter bag open at one end
and having the open end encircling said collar, circumfer-
ential means projecting radially outward from said collar
between the end of said filter bag and the tabs, said circlet
having its flared lip disposed between said circumferential
means and said tabs with a portion below said flared lip
sealing against said circumferential means and an extended
portion beyond said circumferential means mounted be-
tween the open end of said filter bag and said collar to
provide a seal therebetween.
4,435,198
SEPARATION OF NITROGEN FROM NATURAL GAS
Michael L. Gray, BartlesTiUe, Okla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, BartlesTiUe, Okla.
FUed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,727
Int. a.3 F25J 3/02
MS. a. 62—28 17 Qaims
1. A process for liquifying and reducing the nitrogen content
of a normally gaseous natural gas feed comprising predomi-
nantly methane with significant amounts of nitrogen and in its
vapor phase at an elevated pressure, comprising:
(a) cooling said natural gas feed, in a first cooling step com-
prising at least one cooling stage, to liquify the same;
(b) separating the thus liquified natural gas feed, in a first
separation step, into a first vapor phase, containing a
migor portion of said nitrogen, and an unvaporized first
liquid phase, comprising liquified natural gas;
(c) further cooling at least a part of the thus separated first
vapor phase, in a second cooling step;
(d) separating the thus cooled first vapor phase, in a second
separation step, into a second vapor phase, further en-
riched in nitrogen, and an unvaporized second liquid
phase, comprising liquified natural gas;
(e) recovering the thus separated second vapor phase as a
product of the proceu;
(0 expanding the thus separated first liquid phase and the
thus separated second liquid phase, in at least one expan-
%^:k:
4 ^
'^ » : nt^ -*
I :!)
sion step, to produce a single vapor-liquid mixture there-
from;
(g) passing the thus separated first vapor phase in indirect
heat exchange with the thus produced vapor-liquid mix-
ture, in said second cooling step, prior to said second
separation step, to provide at least part of the cooling of
said first vapor phase in said second cooling step;
(h) separating said vapor-liquid mixture, in a third separation
step, into a third vapor phase, comprising methane con-
taining additional nitrogen, and a third liquid phase, com-
prising liquified natural gas; and
(i) recovering the thus separated third liquid phase as the
liquified natural gas product of the process.
4,435,199
EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR A VAPOR DEPOSITION
CHAMBER
Eugene Potkay, Hamilton Township, Mercer County, NJ.,
assignor to Western Electric Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,630
Int. a.J C03C 25/02
VS. a. 65—3.12 4 Claims
1. A method of fabricating a lightguide soot-boule in a va-
por-phase axial deposition chamber, comprising the steps of:
directing a stream of glassy soot, from a soot deposition
torch, towards a growing soot-boule, to deposit at least a
portion of the soot stream thereon;
exhausting undeposited soot from the chamber through a
256
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
hollow, substantially cylindrical exhaust tube having a
constricted central portion with a flared intake and a
gradually turned back end projecting into the chamber
and an output end connected to an exhaust line; and
removing the soot with an extracting means, connected to
the exhaust line, having a plurality of tubular members
mounted concentrically to provide a circuitous path to
exhaust soot to extract particles therefrom while isolating
the deposition chamber from downstream pressure fluctu-
ations.
4,435^00
METHOD OF PREPARING PREOSION PRESSED
GLASS OBJECT
Hendrik J. M. Joormann; Hendrik VerweU, and Jan Haisma, all
dr Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corpora*
tion. New York, N.Y.
Diyision of Ser. No. 161,196, Jun. 19, 1980, Pat. No. 4,348,484,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 119,324, Feb. 7, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 396,533
Clainu priority, application Netherlands, May 18, 1979,
7903914
Int. a.3 C03B 19/00, 23/00. 29/00; C03C 3/16
U.S. a. 65—64 6 Qaims
-^^
oxidizing between 12.5 pounds and 146 pounds of nitrogen
each hour in a continuous process by burning ammonia;
bringing the nitrogen oxides in contact with a surface cata-
lyst and with flowing water at a rate in the range of five
gallons per minute to twenty gallons per minute in a con-
ril*MSPO«T MHVOMOUt
AHMONia Off SVNTHCSIZC
ON r*RM PNOM aiff
AND WaTCH
L —
0KI0I2C AKtHVOffOUS
aM««OMia TO HITROGCN
OMIOCf AT fAHM IN
•MOUNTS NCCOCD *T T»C TiMf
r ■
c<2
MAKf NITROGCN
OXIDES FROM AIR
WITH ARC SrSTEM
MtX NITROGCN OXIOCS
WITH IRRIGATION WATER
TO MAKE NITRIC ACID
SOLUTION
X
MIX NITROGCN OXIDES INTO
AOUCOUS SOU/TON cnCULATWG
TO FCRTILIZCR STORACC TANK
ANO tACX TO UWC aSNCENTRATCO
NITRIC AOO SOLUTION
TO CMCULATMC
FLOW M
AMOUNTS TQ
MAINTAIN
SLIGHTLY ACIO
SOLUTKN
IIA ADD FERTIIIZCR CONCCNTRCTE
CATIONS OTHER
TO MAKE
DESIRED
FERTILIZER
SOLUTION
:t^
WTRIC ACIO-
SOLUnON
USE
NITRK
ACIO-
SOLUTION
ASA
FERTILIZER
^
D .
MIX WITH
TO FORM
FERTIUZCR
SOLUTION
^
MIX WITH
OTMCR
FERTILIZER
CATIONS
TO FORM
FERTILIZER
SOJJTKM
:^ —
3:
-cs
u«c AS rcnriLizen
WITH CONVKNTIOMAt
VPUCATION TCCNNIOUCt
5=7'
tinuous process on a surface catalyst as the nitrogen oxides
are being formed to form a dilute solution of nitric acid as
the nitrogen oxides are formed; and
using the dilute solution of nitric acid in a process leading to
and including the application of nitrogenous fertilizer on a
farm.
1. A method of forming a precision pressed object of glass
comprising the steps of
precisely grinding a cube of glass having a composition
consisting essentially of 45-55 mol.% P2O5, 15-40 mol.%
BaO, 5-35 mol.% PbO, 5-15 mol.% U2O, 0-2 mol.%
AI2O3, and 0-6 mol.% F in the form of fluoride wherein
up to 25% of BaO may be replaced by an equimolar quan-
tity of at least ane of CaO, MgO and SrO, and up to 25%
of LiaO may be replaced by an equimolar quantity of at
least one other alkali metal oxide;
positioning said cube on a carrier;
preheating said cube to a temperature 20'-60° C. above the
American softening point to obtain a polishing effect;
preheating dies of a glass forming device to a temperature
10* -40° C. above the American softening point of said
glass;
inserting said preheated cube and carrier into said dies; and
closing said dies to form a precision pressed object of said
glass.
4. A method according to claim 1, wherein said precision
pressed object of said glass is an optical lens.
4,435,201
MANUFACTURING AND USING NTTROGEN
FERTILIZER SOLUTIONS ON A FARM
John A. Eastin, P.O. Box 389, Lincoln, Nebr. 69140
Continiuition-in-part of Ser. No. 100,825, Dec. 6, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 824,289, Aug. 15,
1977, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 728,788,
Oct 1, 1976, abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 581,050,
May 27, 1975, abandoned. This application May 18, 1982, Ser.
No. 379,466
Int a.3 C05C 3/00
U.S. a. 71-54 6 Claims
1. A method of nitrogenous fertilizing of a farm comprising
the steps of:
4,435,202
PLANT GROWTH REGULATOR
Masuo Koizumi, Tokyo; Norio Shirakawa, Saitama; Hiromi
Tomioka, Tokyo; Masaki Takeuchi; Masanori Okada, both of
Saitama; Masahiro Yoshimoto; Yasushi Murakami, both of
Tokyo, and Yoshitaka Iwane, Kanagawa, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Chugai Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 137,894, Apr. 7, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,023
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 19, 1979, 54-47299
Int. a.J AOIN 43/40
U.S. a. 71—76 6 Claims
1. A method of stunting growth of a grassy plant, without
causing phytotoxicity, which comprises applying to its foliage,
or to soil containing pre-emergent seeds thereof, a compound
of the formula
.^ll7
wherein R is hydrogen or lower alkyl, X is hydrogen or a
halogen, Y is hydrogen, a halogen, methyl or nitro, and Z is
benzoyl, in an amount of from 50 to 2,000 g per 10 ares.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
257
4,435,203
OPTICAL ISOMER OF TRIAZOLYLPENTENOLS, AND
THEIR PRODUCTION AND USE AS FUNGICIDE,
HERBiaDE AND/OR PLANT GROWTH REGULANT
YiUi Funaki, Toyonaka; Yukio Yoneyoshi, Otsu; Yukio Ishiguri,
and Kazuo Izumi, both of Takarazuka, all of Japan, assignors
to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited, Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,191
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 15, 1980, 55-177704;
Dec. 22, 1980, 55-182407
Int. C1.3 AOIN 43/64; C07D 249/08
U.S. a. 71—76 10 Oaims
1. A substantially pure triazolyl alcohol derivative repre-
sented by the general formula:
the asterisk indicates an asymmetric carbon atom and having
an optical activity of (-I-).
wherein X represents a hydrogen atom or a chlorine atom and
the asterisk indicates an asymmetric carbon atom and having
an optical activity of (— ).
7. A plant growth regulatory or herbicidal composition
comprising an inert carrier and as an active ingredient, a plant
growth regulatory effective or a herbicidally effective amount
of a substantially pure triazolyl alcohol derivative represented
by the general formula:
^
CH3
OH
I
CH— C— CH3
/• I
C«C CH3
/ \
H ^N
N
1
^
N
wherein X represents a hydrogen atom or a chlorine atom and
the asterisk indicates an asymmetric carbon atom, and having
an optical activity of ( — ) or (-H).
6. A fungicidal composition comprising an inert carrier and
as an active ingredient, a fungicidally effective amount of a
substantially pure triazolyl alcohol derivative represented by
the general formula:
4435 204
N-ORGANO-PHOSPHONOMETHYLGLYCINE-N-
OXIDES AND THE USE THEREOF TO INCREASE THE
SUCROSE CONTENT OF SUGARCANE
John E. Franz, Crestwood, Mc, assignor to Monsanto Com-
pany, St. Louis, Mo.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 613,707, Sep. 15, 1975,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 313,706, Dec. 11,
1972, abandoned. This application Mar. 24, 1980, Ser. No.
133,379
Int. a.3 AOIN 57/00
U.S. a. 71—86 11 Oaims
1. A method of increasing the sucrose content of sugarcane
which comprises applying to the sugarcane plants, from about
2 to about 10 weeks prior to harvest, an effective amount of a
compound of the formula
O /^ O OY
XO— C— CH2— N— CH2— P
R OZ
wherein X, Y and Z are each independently selected from the
group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms,
alkali metal, ammonium and alkyl ammonium in which the
alkyl groups contain from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R is se-
lected from the group consisting of alkyl of 1 to 12 carbon
atoms, phenylalkyl and chlorinated phenylalkyl of 7 to 8 car-
bon atoms, phenoxyalkyl of 7 or 8 carbon atoms.
O O OY
II 11/
— CH2— C— OX and — CH2— P
OZ
4,435,205
HERBICIDAL O-ALKYLSULFONYLOXY- AND
O-ALKYLSULFONYLAMINOBENZENESULFONA-
MIDES
James J. Reap, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 262,813, May 19, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 168,344,
Jul. 11, 1980, abandoned. This application Apr. 15, 1982, Ser.
No. 368,809
Int. a.' AOIN 9/22; C07D 239/42
U.S. a. 71—92 32 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
QSO2R1
w
II
SO2NHCNA
lU
where
W is O or S;
Q is O or NR5;
Rl is C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkyl substituted with 1-3 atoms of
wherein X represents a hydrogen atom or a chlorine atom and F, CI or Br, CH2CH2OCH3, CH2CH2CH2OCH3 or
258
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
W.
Kl is H. F, CI, Br, OCH3. NO2, CF3 or C1-C2 alkyl;
R3 is H, F, CI. Br or CH3;
R4 is H, CH3 or OCH3;
R5 is C1-C4 alkyl;
R6and R7 are independently H, F, CI, Br, CH3, CF3, NO2 or
OCH3;
A is
Z or
X is NH2, N(CH3)2, NHCH3, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkyl
substituted with 1-3 atoms of F, CI or Br, CH2OCH3,
CH2OCH2CH3, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C2 alkylthio, C3-C4
alkenyloxy, C3-C4 alkynyloxy, OCH2CH2OCH3 or
C2-C4 alkoxy substituted with 1-3 atoms of F, CI or Br;
Y is H, CH3, OCH3 or CI;
X2 and Y2 are independently CH3 or OCH3; and
Z is CH, CCH3, CBr, CCl, CF, CI, CC2H5, CCH2CH2CI or
CCH2CH=CH2;
provided that
(1) when Y is CI, then X is NH2, NHCH3, N(CH3)2, CH3 or
OCH3;
(2) when Y is H, then X is OCHs, CH3 or CH2C)CH3,
(3) when W is S, then R4 is H; and
(4) when R* is OCHs, then Q is O.
24. A method for controlling the growth of undesired vege-
tation which comprises applying to the locus to be protected
an effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
Ri is H, CI, Br, F. C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C1-C4 alkyl-
thio, NO2. CF3, CCX)R5 or SO2NR6R7;
R2 is H, CI, Br or CH3;
R3 and R4 are independently H or CH3;
R5 is C1-C6 alkyl, C3-C6 alkenyl, CH2CH2OCH3,
CH2CH2OCH2CH3, CH2CH2CH2OCH3 or CH2CH2CI;
R6 and R7 are independently CH3 or CH3CH2;
W is oxygen or sulfur;
X is CH3, — OCHs or — OCH2CH3;
Y is H, CI, CH3, CF3, — NHCH3, -N(CH3)2— , — CH-
2OR8, — CH2CH2OR8, — OCH2CF3 or VR9;
Z is CH;
V is oxygen or sulfur;
Rg is CH3 or CH3CH2;
R9 is CH3, CH3CH2— , CH2CO2R8, — CH2CH2OR8,
C(CH3)HC02R8 or CH2CH2CO2R8;
and agricultural salts thereof
4,435,207
QUINYLOXY.PHENYLOXY-OXIME ESTER
COMPOUNDS HAVING HERBIODAL ACnVITY
Georg Prater, Greifensee; Milos Suchy, Pfaffhauseii; Jean
Wenger, Uster, and Paul Wintemitz, Greifensee, all of Swit«
zerland, assignors to HofAnann-La Roche Inc., Nutley, SJ.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,784
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 26, 1980,
8750/80; Oct. 1, 1981, 6328/81
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/40; C07D 215/22
U.S. a. 71—94 20 Qaims
1. An oxime ester of the formula
.-0-^0
T
CORi
wherein A is
4,435,206
AGRICULTURAL PYRIDINESULFONAMIDES
George Levitt, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 83,753, Oct. 22, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 966,258,
Dec. 4, 1978, abandoned. This application Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No.
227,242
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/54; C07D 239/28. 239/30
U.S. a. 71—92 31 Oaims
1. A compound of the formula:
^ N SO
W
SO2N— C— NR
R3 R4
wherein
R is
(R3)/
■o;>
lb
in which R3 is hydrogen, halogen or trifluoromethyl, m is 1
or 2, B is — CH:=, and wherein R| is a group of the for-
mula
— 0(CH2)„0N=C
\
M
Id
R7
wherein R6 and R7 are lower alkyl, cycloalkyl with 3 to 6
carbon atoms, lower alkylcarbonyloxy-lower alkyl, lower
alkoxy or lower alkylthio or R* and R7 together with the
carbon atom to which they are attached are a cycloalkyl
group with 3 to 7 carbon atoms, and wherein n is 1 or 2,
and wherein R6 can also be hydrogen.
March 6. 1984
CHEMICAL
239
4,435,208
HERBICIDALLY ACHVE SUBSTITUTED
PHENOXYaNNAMIC ACID DERIVATIVES
Heinz Fbrster, Wuppertal; Ludwig Eue, Lcverkusen, and Robert
Schmidt, Bergisch-Gladbach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,899
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 28,
1980, 3044810
Int. a.i AOIN 37/34. 37/10; C07C 69/6J8. 121/75
U.S. a. 71—105 8 Qaims
1. A substituted phenoxycinnamic acid derivative of the
formula
R2
/
CI CH=C
CF3— ^ / ° \ 7— NO2
C!
in which
R2 represents a hydrogen atom, a cyano, Ci to C4 alkyl,
acetyl or Ci to C4 alkoxycarbonyl radical and R^ repre-
sents a cyano (Tr ^1 to C4 alkoxy )-carbonyl radical or a
radical of the general formula — COOM
wherein
M represents a hydrogen, sodium or potassium cation or one
equivalent of a magnesium or calcium cation.
7. A method of combating weeds comprising applying to the
weeds, or to a habitat thereof, a herbicidally effective amount
of a compound according to claim 1.
4,435,209
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF SILICON OR
FERROSILICON
Thomas Johansson, IJungaverk, Sweden, assignor to Kemanord
AB, Stockholm, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 195,498, Oct. 9, 1980, abandoned. This
application Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 363,812
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Oct. 24, 1979, 7908821
Int. a.3 C21C 5/52; COIB 33/02
U,S. a. 75—11 9 Oaims
quent reaction zone are brought to the reentry supply
zone,
while elementary silicon and a gas phase are leaving the
energy supply zone, and
whereby
at least the carbonaceous reducing agent and the gas phase
leaving the energy supply zone are brought to the zone of
subsequent reaction,
while a gas leaves the zone of subsequent reaction, and
condensed phases enter the energy supply zone,
whereby
at least 33% of the silicon oxide material is fed directly into
the energy supply zone,
so that the supply rate of the silicon oxide to the energy
supply zone can be controlled independent of the charg-
ing of energy to the energy supply zone,
so that the temperature in the energy supply zone can be
influenced, and
regulating the supply rates of silicon oxide and energy to
give a low content of silicon monoxide in the gas leaving
the zone of subsequent reaction,
the improvement comprising
(a) awaiting and securing a carbon reduction mode in the
reaction zone
to obtain a greater difference in temperature between the-
gases leaving the zone of subsequent reaction and the
silicon product than at carbide reduction,
by filling reducing agent in the energy supply zone before
start up and directly applying an energy to silicon oxide
charging ratio within the interval stated in (b), or
by altering a carbide reduction mode into a carbon reduction
mode by use of an energy to silicon oxide charging ratio
above the interval stated in (b), and
(b) after securing carbon reduction according to step (a)
supplying the energy and the silicon oxide in a ratio within
an interval,
the lower limit of said interval being defmed by the lowest
v.ilue permitting a constant carbon reduction, and
the upper limit of said interval being defined by the high-
est value permitting a constant carbide reduction,
whereby the gas leaving the zone of subsequent reaction has
a silicon monoxide content below l.S mole percent.
EkJ/ml(S<02
1. A process for the preparation of silicon or ferrosilicon by
reduction of silicon oxide in the form of silicas or cation con-
taining silicates and oxides, optionally in the presence of iron
or iron oxide, using a carbonaceous reducing agent in a reac-
tion zone which reaction zone comprises
an energy supply zone and,
a subsequent reaction zone,
whereby
at least heat energy and condensed phases from the subse-
4,435,210
REHNING AGENT OF MOLTEN METAL AND
METHODS FOR PRODUCING THE SAME
Norio Hirokawa; Tsuneo Kawachi, both of Chichibu; Hiroshi
Saito, Abiko, and Ryoichi Yoshimura, Koganei, all of Japan,
assignors to Showa Denko Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 466,188
Gaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 12, 1982, 57-19696;
Feb. 12, 1982, 57-19697; May 14, 1982, 57-80089
Int. a.3 C21C 7/02
U.S. a. 75—53 22 Qaims
1. A refining agent for metal, consisting essentially of:
(1) a Ca alloy consisting essentially of Ca and at least one
element selected from the group consisting of Al and Si,
and
(2) a flux mainly comprising CaO and AI2O3,
wherein the Ca-alloy and the flux are integrally bonded to one
another.
260
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,211
PROCESS OF BLOWING HIGH-OXYGEN GASES INTO A
MOLTEN BATH WHICH CONTAINS NONFERROUS
METALS
Weraer Schwartz, Buchholz, and Peter Fischer, Bad Vilbel, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Metallgesellschaft
Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Dec. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 326^7
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 5.
1980, 3045992
Int. a.J C22B 13/00
U.S. a. 75-62 . 18 Qaims
1. In a process of blowing high-oxygen gases into a reactor
comprising a reactor wall and containing within said wall a
molten bath which contains non-ferrous metals, said blowing
through double-tube nozzles, each of said nozzles terminating
in a tip, said nozzles extend through the reactor wall into the
molten bath, wherein a protective cooling fluid consisting
essentially of a gas or liquid is injected through one tube of
each double-tube nozzle, the improvement which comprises
employing a flow rate of the protective fluid relative to the
composition of the slag and the difference between the temper-
ature of the slag and its solidification point, such that a gas
permeable conical porous crust forms over the tip of the noz-
zles and regulating such flow rate so that the size of the crust
does not exceed a predetermined size.
4,435,213
METHOD FOR PRODUONG ALUMINUM POWDER
ALLOY PRODUCTS HAVING IMPROVED STRENGTH
PROPERTIES
Gregory J. Hildeman, MurrysviUe; John C. Kuli, Jr., Saxon-
burg, and Leo A. Vivola, New Kensington, all of Pa., assignors
to Aluminum Company of America, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 417,796
Int. a.3 C21D 1/02
U.S. a. 75-249 43 Qaims
1. A method of prodj|cing an improved metal article having
improved mechanical properties comprising the steps:
(a) providing metal alloy particulate, said alloy being se-
lected to provide strength enhancing dispersed particles
capable of degradation at elevated temperatures; and
(b) heating said metal to elevated temperature at a rapid
heat-up rate and compacting said metal at elevated tem-
perature to a substantially full density compact, said heat-
up rate being such that said heating of said metal to ele-
vated temperature is effected in not more than 0.2 hour for
each inch of thickness of said compact, thereby improving
said compact such that products made therefrom exhibit
an improvement of at least 5% in one or more mechanical
properties over a product likewise produced except for
said heating occurring over a substantially longer time.
4,435,214
CONDUCnVE COMPOSITIONS
John E. Ehrreich, Wayland, Mass., assignor to Ercon, Inc.,
Waltham, Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 308,242, Oct. 2, 1981, Pat. No.
4,407,674, which is a division of Ser. No. 126,681, Mar. 3, 1981,
Pat. No. 4,319,920. This application Jun. 6, 1983, Ser. No.
501,602
Int. a.3 B22F 1/00. 1/02
U.S. a. 75—251 12 Oaims
4,435,212
HIGH PERMEABILITY ALLOY
Norio Ueshima, Yokohama; Nobuo Okawa, Tokyo, and Kiyostai
Takayanagi, Kawasaki, all of Japan, assignors to The
Furukawa Electric Company Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 446,974
Oaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 15, 1982, 57-62983;
Jul. 30, 1982, 57-132002; Aug. 3, 1982, 57-135566; Aug. 12, 1982,
57-140352; Aug. 23, 1982, 57-146022
Int. a.3 F16H 29/10
U.S. a. 75-124 10 Oaims
1. A high permeability alloy having an excellent wear resis-
unce, consisting essentially of 3 to 10 wt% Al, 4 to 1 1 wt% si,
2. 1 to 20.0 wt% Ru and the balance Fe.
6. A magnetic head of a high permeability alloy having
excellent wear resistance, which consists essentially of 3 to 10
wt% Al, 4 to 1 1 wt% Si, 2.1 to 20.0 wt% Ru, and the balance
Fe.
1. A metal powder product formed of (A) up to 50% by
volume of a precipitated non-planar, essentially flake-shaped
particles wherein silver particles are characterized by an aver-
age thickness of less than about 0.2 microns and characterized
by a bulk density up to 0.85 gram per cc and (B) at least 50%
by volume of a relatively-planar, mechanically-formed, con-
ductive flake powder of at least about 1 gram per cc in bulk
density.
4,435,215
HEAT-RESISTANT INORGANIC COMPOSITIONS
Shigeo Yoshino; Tadashi Zenbutsu; HiOime Asami, all of Bizen,
and Michiyuki Irie, Oku, all of Japan, assignors to Shlnagawa
Refractories Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,555
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 17, 1981, 56-92384
Int. O.J C04B 19/04
U.S. O. 106-84 6 Oaims
1. A heat-resistant inorganic composition which consists
essentially of a metal powder, a powder of an inorganic com-
pound having cation-exchangeability and layered structure
and a binder of an alkali metal silicate or an alkali metal alumi-
nate, the largest particle diameter of the inorganic compound
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
261
having a layered structure is smaller than the average particle
diameter of the metal powder,
wherein the weight ratio of the metal powder to the inor-
ganic compound having a layered structure is in the range
from 10:90 to 90:10, and substantially all the inorganic
comfxjund having a layered structure has a particle diame-
ter not exceeding 30 ^m.
wherein n is a whole integer from 1 to S.
4,435,216
PROCESS FOR THE ACCELERATED SOLIDinCATION
OF HYDRAULIC CEMENT MIXTURE
Manfred Diehl, Frankfurt, and Roland Bergmann, Hanau, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Degussa Aktiengesell-
schaft, Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,524
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 20,
1981, 3132928
Int. a.5 C04B 7/35
U.S. 0. 106—97 14 Oaims
1. A hydraulic cement mixture having an accelerated solidi-
fication time containing 0.2 to 10 weight % of powdery, crys-
talline zeolite based on the entire mixture, the zeolite being
Type A, zeolite Type X or zeolite Type P.
4,435,219
STABLE INORGANIC COATING COMPOSITION FOR
ADHERENT, INORGANIC COATINGS
Paul P. Greigger, Allison Park, Pa., assignor to PPG Industries,
Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jun. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 384,368
Int. O.' C09K 3/O0; C08G 77/06
U.S. O. 106—287.16 12 Oaims
1. A composition comprising:
I. a vehicle comprising,
A. a dispersion of colloidal silica,
B. a hydrolyzable alkoxysilane,
C. an alcohol,
D. water, and
E. a soluble acidifying agent in an amount sufficient to pro-
vide a pH of said vehicle ranging from about 2.8 to about
6.0 wherein said acidifying agent is a soluble metal acid
phosphate, and
II. optionally a pigment.
4,435,217
CONCENTRATED HYDROPHILIC POLYMER
SUSPENSIONS
Roy F. House, Houston, Tex., assignor to Venture Innovations,
Inc., Lafayette, La.
Filed Apr. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 370,865
Int. 0.3 C08L 1/Oi, 1/96
U.S. 0. 106—171 12 Oaims
1. A liquid polymer composition consisting essentially of
from about 40% to about 55% of a liquid hydrocarbon, from
about 35% to about 55% of a hydrophilic, water soluble poly-
mer, from about 2.0% to about 4.5% of an organophilic clay,
from about 0% to about 2% of a dispersant for said organo-
philic clay, from about 0.5% to about 2.5% of a non-ionic
surfactant selected from the group consisting of octyl phenol
reacted with from 0 to about 9 moles per mole of ethylene
oxide, nonyl phenol reacted with from 0 to about 15 moles per
mole of ethylene oxide, dodecyl phenol reacted with from 0 to
about 15 moles per mole of ethylene oxide, C|6-Cig fatty acids
reacted with about 3 to about 15 moles per mole of ethylene
oxide, Ce-Cig aliphatic alcohols reacted with 2 to about 8
moles per mole of ethylene oxide, 2, 4, 7, 9-tetramethyl-4,
7-dihydroxy-5-decyne reacted with from 0 to about 12 moles
of ethylene oxide, and mixtures thereof, and from about 1.25%
to about 5.0%, based on the weight of said polymer, of a liquid
fatty acid, wherein said liquid fatty acid and said surfactant
synergistically interact to decrease the viscosity and increase
the thermal aging stability of said composition.
4,435,218
VISCOSITY INCREASING ADDITIVE FOR
NON-AQUEOUS FLUID SYSTEMS
Louis J. Jubanowsky, 310 Indian Trail, Mountainside, N.J.
07092
FUed Nov. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 441,428
Int. 0.3 C08L 97/00, 91/06; C08K 5/17
U.S. O. 106—266 10 Claims
1. A self-activating organoclay rheological composition
useful as an additive for non-aqueous fluid systems, comprising
a mixture of an organo modified clay and an alcohol having the
formula
CH3
HO-(CH2),-C-(CH2),-OH
CH3
4,435,220
TRANSPARENT COLORED PIGMENTS
Taki^i Watanabe, Ohmiya, and Tamio Noguchi, Atsugi, both of
Japan, assignors to Merck Patent Gesellschaft mit beschrank-
ter Haftung, Darmstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 436,861
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 26, 1981, 56-170148
Int. 0.5 C04B 31/00: C09C 1/00
U.S. O. 106—291 12 Oaims
1. A transparent, colored pigment comprising a platelet-
shaped, transparent substrate, which is coated with a layer of
colored metal oxides or metal hydroxides, and which layer
contains 0.1-5% by weight of an alkaline earth metal oxide or
hydroxide. *
4,435,221
PROCESS FOR CLEANING METAL SURFACES OF
POLY(ARYLENE SULHDE) DEPOSITS
Ronald D. Mathis, and Jerry O. Reed, both of Bartlesville,
Okla., assignors to Phillips Petroleum Company, Bartlesville,
Okla.
Filed Jul. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 403,434
Int. O.^ C23G 5/02
U.S. O. 134—2 10 Oaims
1. A process for the removal of poly(arylene sulfide) depos-
its from metal surfaces comprising contacting said deposits
with a cleaning solution, consisting essentially of at least one
alkali metal hydrosulfide in a lactam of the general formula
^CH:),^
where R is hydrogen or an alkyl radical having from 1 to 5
carbon atoms and n is an integer from 5 to 7 at a temperature
and for a time sufficient to remove said deposits.
262
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
f!
March 6, 1984
4,435^22
PROCESS FOR CLEANING METAL SURFACES OF
POLY(ARYLENE SULHDE) DEPOSITS
Jerry O. Reed, and Timothy W. Johnson, both of Bartlesville,
Okla., assignors to Phillips Petroleum Company, Bartlesville,
Okla.
Filed Jul. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 403,435
Int. a.J C23G 5/02
U.S. a. 134—2 21 Qaims
1. A process for removing poly(arylene sulfide) deposits
from metal surfaces comprising:
(a) contacting said poly(arylene sulfide) deposits with at
least one halogenated aromatic cleaning agent under con-
ditions of temperature and time sufficient to remove said
deposits; and
(b) thereafter contacting the remaining deposits with a solu-
tion comprising at least one aluminum halide in an aro-
matic hydrocarbon having from about 6 to about 12 car-
^ bon atoms per molecule at a time and for a temperature
sufficient to remove said deposits.
4,435,223
NON-FLUORIDE ACID COMPOSITIONS FOR
CLEANING ALUMINUM SURFACES
David Y. DoUman, Doylestown, Pa., assignor to Amchem Prod-
ucts, Inc., Ambler, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 277,560, Jun. 24, 1981,
abandoned. This application May 18, 1982, Ser. No. 378,749
Int. a.3 CUD ]/66, 3/04. 7/08: C23G 1/12
U.S. a. 134—3 14 Claims
1. A process for cleaning an aluminum based surface com-
prising the steps of
(a) contacting said surface with an aqueous cleaning solution
which is free of hydrofluoric acid and other fluorides and
which comprises from about 4 to about 24 grams/liter of
sulfuric acid, from about 9 to about 22 grams/liter of
orthophosphoric acid, and from about 0.1 to about 7.5
grams/liter of a surfactant at a temperature in the range of
from about 90° F. to about 140° F. and a treatment time of
from about 10 seconds to about 1 minute, and
(b) rinsing the aluminum based surface to remove the clean-
ing solution therefrom.
Hgi _;t<,Cdjt<,Te, wherein X<,<X, by epitaxial growth on
the CdTe substrate;
melting said layer by subjecting it to heating to a tempera-
ture above the liquids point of the layer; and
cooling said melted layer rapidly.
4,435,225
METHOD OF FORMING SELF-ALIGNED LATERAL
BIPOLAR TRANSISTOR
Jay A. Shideler, San Mateo, and Robert L. Berry, Cupertino,
both of Calif., assignors to Fairchild Camera ft Instrument
Corporation, Mountain View, Calif.
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,568
Int. a.J HOIL 29/72. 21/225. 21/22
U.S. a. 148—1.5 20 Gaims
I24J90
4,435,224
PROCESS FOR PREPARING HOMOGENEOUS LAYERS
OF COMPOSITION HGi_;,CD;tTE
Alain Durand, Paris, France, assignor to Societe Anonyme de
Telecommunications, Paris, France
FUed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,753
aaims priority, application France, Feb. 22, 1980, 80 04015
Int. C\? HOIL 21/205. 21/324
U.S. G. 148—1.5 4 Gaims
1. In a process for preparing a wafer comprising an epitaxial
layer of Hgi_xCdj(Te on a substrate of CdTe by isothermal
evaporation-diffusion in vacuo characterized by said epitaxial
layer having mediocre internal homogeneity and a gradual
compositional transition with the CdTe substrate, the improve-
ment comprising:
depositing a layer of an intermediate composition
20p,g2M8,2,202|jg f leZjo^lW- 206,
»4
1. A method for manufacturing bipolar a transistor having a
base, an emitter, and a collector comprising the steps of:
providing a body of semiconductor material having an impu-
rity region of a first conductivity type therein adjacent to
an electrically insulating layer along an upper surface of
the body;
forming a protective layer over the insulating layer;
forming an open space through the protective layer above a
first region in the body intended for a first doped region of
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
263
a second conductivity type opposite to the first conductiv-
ity type, at least a portion of the first region being coinci-
dent with a portion of the impurity region, the open space
defining an edge of the remainder of the protective layer
nearest to a second region in the body spaced apart from
the first region and intended for a second doped region of
the second conductivity type, at least a portion of the
second region being coincident with a portion of the
impurity region;
introducing a first semiconductor dopant of the second
conductivity type through the open space into the body to
form the first doped region;
etching the insulating layer through the open space back
under the remainder of the protective layer laterally at
least toward the second region to define an open space
through the insulating layer;
oxidizing adjacent portions, along the insulating layer, of the
first doped region and the impurity region outside the first
doped region to create an electrically insulating region
which )includes therein the insulating layer, thereby to
leave a remaining impurity region comprising the non-oxi-
< , dized portion of the impurity region still of the first con-
ductivity type and likewise to leave a remaining first
doped region comprising the non-oxidized portion of the
first doped region, the insulating region having a mini-
mum thickness at a point above the second region;
removing at least a portion of the remainder of the protec-
tive layer above the second region;
forming an open space through the insulating region above
the second region; and
introducing a second semiconductor dopant of the second
conductivity type through the open space in the insulating
region into the body to form the second doped region;
whereby the base comprises the remaining impurity region
excluding the second doped region, the emitter comprises
one of the second doped region and the remaining first
doped region, and the collector comprises the other of the
second doped region and the remaining first doped region.
4,435,226
WEAR RESISTANT CAST IRON ALLOY WITH
SPHEROIDAL GRAPHITE SEPARATION AND
MANUFACTURING METHOD THEREFOR
Hans J. Neuhiiuser, Bergish-Gladbach, and Hans-Jiirgen Veut-
gen, Burscheid, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Goetze AG, Burscheid, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Nov. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 444,962
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 1.
1981, 3147461
Int. G.J C21D 5/06, 5/14
U.S. G. 148-3 19 a,i„,
1. Wear resistant cast iron alloy of high strength and contain-
ing spheroidal graphite precipitates for the manufacture of
machine parts subject to wear, comprising a cast iron alloy
having the following composition:
1.5 to 3.0% carbon
3.0 to 6.0% silicon
0. 1 to 2.0% manganese
0.05 to 0.5% phosphorus
up to 0.15% sulfur
0.1 to 1.0% chromium
0 to 3.5% vanadium
0.1 to 2.5% molybdenum
0.1 to 3.0% total of at least one element from the group
nickel and cobalt
0.1 to 3.5% copper
0.1 to 2.5% tungsten
0.1 to 1.0% total of at least one element from the group
titanium, niobium and tantalum
up to 0.15% magnesium
up to 0.15% nitrogen,
remainder iron including impurities inherent in the manufac-
turing process,
said cast iron alloy having a tempered structure in which the
graphite is formed by a heat treatment process in which
ledeburite decomposes, the graphite being present in an
extremely fine form and with a high number of spheroid'
of about 300,00 to 900,000 per cm^.
9. Method for producing a cast piece of a cast iron alloy of
high strength and containing spheroidal graphite precipitates
for the manufacture of machine parts subject to wear, the cast
iron alloy having the following composition:
1.5 to 3.0% carbon
3.0 to 6.0% silicon
0.1 to 2.0% manganese
0.05 to 0.5% phosphorus
up toO.lSsulfur
0.1 to 1.0% chromium
0 to 3.5% vanadium
0.1 to 2.5% molybdenum
0.1 to 3.0% total of at least one element from the group
nickel and cobalt
0.1 to 3.5% copper
0.1 to 2.5% tungsten
0.1 to 1.0% total of at least one element from the group
titanium, niobium and tanulum
up to 0.15% magnesium
up to 0.15% nitrogen,
remainder iron including impurities inherent in the manufac-
turing process,
said cast iron alloy having a tempered structure in which the
graphite is formed by a heat treatment process in which
ledeburite decomposes, the graphite being present in an
extremely fine form and with a high number of spheroids
of about 300.00 to 900,000 per cm^,
comprising inoculating a cast iron melt with 0.1 to 1.0%
ferrosilicon containing 0.5 to 2.0% magnesium, casting the
cast iron melt to harden ledeburitically to form a cast
piece, and then subjecting the cast piece to a graphitiza-
tion annealing, subsequently quenching from a tempera-
ture above 700* C, and then tempering above 300* C.
4,435,227
METHOD OF TREATING STEEL SURFACES TO
PREVENT WEAR, AND COATING OBTAINED THEREBY
Guy R. Nicolas, 22 Gos Nollet, 91200 AthU-Mons, France
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 428,661
Gaims priority, application France, Oct. 6, 1981, 81 18780
Int. G.J C23C 11/04: C23F 7/24
U.S. G. 148-6.24 15 Qalms
1. A method for treating steel parts having a carbon content
of at least 0.15%, said treatment providing said steel parts with
protection against surface wear, comprising:
a three-stage process comprising,
a first stage wherein iron-molybdenum is deposited on the
surface of the steel,
a second stage wherein a sulfur containing compound is
introduced to the surface of said steel part and thereaf-
ter adheres to said surface; and
a third stage wherein said steel part with said sulfur con-
taining compound adhering thereto is subjected to
vapor phase chromizing thereby forming an outer sur-
face layer comprising chromium-molybdenum sulfide
and an inner layer under lying the outer surface layer
comprising chromium carbides M23C6 and M7C3.
264
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,228
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG NB3SN
SUPERCONDUCTING WIRES
Kyoji Tachikawa, Tokyo, and Yi^i Yoshida, Sakura, both of
Japan, assignors to National Research Institute for Metals,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 15, 1983, Ser. No. 466,518
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 22, 1982, 57-25981
Int. a.3 HOIL 39/24
U.S. a. 148—11.5 Q 8 Qaims
1. A process for producing a NbjSn superconducting wire,
which comprises preparing a composite from a tin material, a
niobium material and a matrix of copper alloy material which
is tin-free containing 0. 1 to 5 atomic percent in total of at least
one element of Group IV of the periodic table selected from
the group consisting of titanium, zirconium, and hafnium;
processing the composite into a wire, tape or tube; and heat-
treating the processed composite at a temperature of 400° to
900° C. to form a NbsSn compound.
4,435,229
METHOD OF PREPARING A TWO-WAY SHAPE
MEMORY ALLOY
Alfred D. Johnson, 5383 Bancroft Ave., Oakland, Calif. 94601
Continuation of Ser. No. 78,891, Sep. 25, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 308,127
Int. a.J C22F 7/00. 1/10
U.S. a. 148—11.5 R 28 Claims
1. A method of training a shape memory alloy so that the
alloy has a two-way shape memory when the alloy is operated
in a working cycle for converting heat into mechanical work
with the conditions of the cycle including an upper operating
temperature T of the alloy and a stress a-w at which the alloy is
operated in the working cycle, the method comprising itera-
tively performing the steps of heating the alloy under a first
training stress <t\ to a temperature T// which is above said
temperature T, cooling the alloy to a temperature Tc which is
below the zero-force transition temperature of the alloy, de-
forming the alloy at Tc while applying to the alloy a second
training stress o-2where cr2^ar\ and 0-2 = ctw, heating the alloy
back to T//, and changing stress on the alloy to the first train-
ing stress.
4435 230
ALUMINUM ALLOY PRINTING PLATE AND METHOD
FOR MANUFACTURING SAME
Chozo Fujikura, Nikko, Japan, assignor to Furukawa Aluminum
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 410,053
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 3, 1981, 56-139148
Int. a.3 C22C 21/08
U.S. a. 148—11.5 A 3 Claims
1. An aluminum alloy printing plate comprising a printing
plate of an aluminum alloy consisting essentially of 0.05-0.30%
Mg, 0.05-0.30% Si, 0.15-0.30% Fe and the remainder Al and
ordinary impurities said plate having a uniformed grained
surface and a photosensitive layer thereon.
4,435,231
COLD WORKED FERRITIC ALLOYS AND
COMPONENTS
Michael K. Korenko, Wexford, Pa., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the United States Depart-
ment of Energy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 364,050
Int. a.3 C21D 8/04
VJS. a. 148—12 EA 16 Claims
1. A process for treating a precipitation hardening ferritic
alloy comprising the steps of:
solution treating said alloy;
followed by a final cold working of said alloy;
I TtW 1 MIHl I
I ?i%al.DMiL I
I TtPt 1 »Ht»r~i
tPWTIW
ipotriw
I M%COlllWU~l
I \m I '>iw»T~l
I Ui, tL HULL 1
I Tree 111 mUL 1
I ^t I
TtPt 111 >nt»n
;i% COLD WK.L n
and then placing said alloy in said alloy intended application,
wherein the first significant precipitation hardening of
said alloy after said final cold working step is induced.
4,435,232
EXPLOSIVE COMPOSITION
David A. Ciaramitaro, and Jack M. Moore, both of Benson,
Ariz., assignors to Apache Powder Company, Benson, Ariz.
Filed Dec. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 448,874
Int. a.} C06B 45/00
U.S. a. 149—2 9 Qaims
1. An explosive composition comprising:
a low density carbonaceous absorbent formed at least in part
from comminuted, processed cellulose;
a liquid explosive absorbed onto the low-density, carbona-
ceous absorbent, said carbonaceous absorbent remaining
substantially chemically unchanged after absorption of the
liquid explosive; and
an oxygen-supplying salt.
4,435,233
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF A SMOKE
COMPOSITION
Peter Rayer, Miillheim; Hartmut Krone, Auggen; Alois Schiessl,
MarzoU; Wolfgang Steinicke, Bad Reichenhall, and Wolfgang
Trede, Weil am Rhein, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Buck Chemisch-Technische Werke GmbH A Co., Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,839
Qalms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 9,
1981, 3104464
Int. Q.J C06B 33/02
VS. Q. 149—44 5 Claims
1. Process for the preparation of a smoke composition, par-
MaRCH 6. 1984
CHEMICAL
26S
ticularly for extremely heavy-duty projectiles, preferably mor-
tar shells, from a mixture that includes hexachloroethane and
metal powder, with the mixture being compressed by high
pressure into a self-supporting solid, wherein the improvement
comprises the steps of
providing powdered zinc oxide,
highly compressing said powdered zinc oxide,
crushing said high compressed zinc oxide powder to form a
granular zinc oxide, and
mixing said granulated zinc oxide with said hexachloroeth-
ane and said metal powder to form said mixture.
(5) introducing a second charge of graphite particles into the
channel, followed by
' 4,4
^,435,234
METHOD OF PRODUCING HIGH PRESSURE
DECORATIVE LAMINATES CONTAINING AN AIR-LAID
WEB
James E. B. Hunt, Middlesex, England, auignor to Formict
Corp., Del.
DIvUion of Ser. No. 233,418, Feb. 11, 1981, Pat. No. 4,379,193.
This application Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,671
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 12, 1980,
8007002
Int. Q.3 B32B 23/04
U.S. Q. 156—62.4 3 Qalms
1. A method of producing a heat and pressure consolidated,
high pressure decorative laminate which comprises,
(1) defibrating cellulosic fibers to produce fibers of an aver-
age length of about 0.5 to 2.5 mm in the presence of air to
thereby form an air-fiber stream,
(2) incorporating into said air-fiber stream from about
20%-35% of particles of a thermosetting resin to thereby
form an air-fiber-resin stream,
(3) depositing the fibers and resin from said air-fiber-resin
stream, under conditions of 40-80% relative humidity,
onto a foraminous belt at a thickness ranging from about
5-100 mm to form a layer of uniform composition and
basis weight,
(4) pre-consolidating the deposited fibers and resin to a
thickness of from about 0.5-10.0 mm,
(5) forming a laminate assembly comprising, in superim-
posed relationship,
(A) a monostichous layer of said preconsolidated fibers
and resin and
(B) a thermosetting resin impregnated decorative sheet,
and
(6) heat and pressure consolidating said laminate assembly.
4,435,235
GASKET MANUFACTURE
Alan W. Atkinson, Rochdale, and Janet M. Lancaster, Deamley,
both of England, assignors to TAN Materials Research Lim-
ited, Manchester, England
Filed Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 321,231
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 15, 1980,
8036727
Int. Q.3 B32B 77/00; B29C 79/00/ D04H 7/7^- P02F 77/00
U.S. Q. 156—62.2 6 Qalms
1. A method of making a flat qasket directly from expanded
graphite particles, the method comprising the steps of:
(1) providing co-operating male and female mould members,
the female mould member being in the form of a channel
extending through a block from one face to a directly
opposite face, the channel as seen in plan having a width
and configuration corresponding to a desired gasket
shape,
(2) placing a flat, rigid back-up tool in contact with one of
said faces,
(3) introducing a charge of graphite pariicles into said chan-
nel,
(4) placing a gasket substrate into said channel,
JOS
JOS
(6) applying the male mould member and pressing both
charges and the substrate against the back-up tool to form
a graphite gasket in situ on both sides of the substrate.
4,435,236
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A FOLDABLE
BICYCLE TIRE HAVING FLEXIBLE BEADS
Shoji Inae, and Harunori Okamoto, both of Kagawa, Japan,
auignors to Mitsuboshi Belting Ltd., Kobe, Japan
DivUion of Ser. No. 269,097, Jun. 2, 1981, Pat. No. 4,378,042.
This application Jul. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 400,202
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 11, 1980, 55-79390
Int. a.J B29H 17/22. 17/32; B60C 7J/0^
U.S. Q. 156—132 9 Claims
fcLr'Lls^
mm.
1. A method of manufacturing a tire comprising: the steps of;
twisting two untwisted linear members having a low elonga-
tion ratio and high strength supplied from corresponding
bobbins at I to 2 turns/ 10 cm to form a cord tensile mem-
ber.
adhesion treating said cord tensile member;
drying said cord tensile member;
covering said cord tensile member with rubber; accumulat-
ing the rubber covered cord tensile member in an accumu-
lator;
winding a bias tire fabric having a predetermined width and
length on a former in the outer wall of which bead
grooves spaced a predetermined distance from each other
are formed;
joining both ends of said bias tire fabric to form an endless
tire fabric;
winding said cord tensile member accumulated in said accu-
mulator on said endless tire fabric on a drum of said for-
mer along each of said bead grooves to three to five turns;
overlapping stari and finish ends of said cord tensile member
wound along each bead groove 60 to 1 50 mm;
bonding together said stari and finish ends with bead rubber
to form a bead core having a cut elongation of 5% or less
and a strength of 300 kg/core;
266
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
folding both sides of said endless tire fabric inwardly along
said bead cores to form a tire fabric member with beads;
bonding a tread rubber member having predetermined width
and length to said tire fabric member with beads to form
an unvulcanized tire; and
vulcanizing said unvulcanized tire under predetermined
conditions.
4,435^7
METHOD FOR FORMING MULTI-FLUTE-LAYER
CORRUGATED BOARD
Walther J. Hoelzinger, Vienna, Austria, assignor to Boise Cas-
cade Corporation, Boise, Id.
Division of Ser. No. 889,387, Mar. 23, 1978, Pat. No. 4,128,677,
which is a division of Ser. No. 722,699, Sep. 13, 1976, Pat. No.
4,126,508. This application Aug. 18, 1978, Ser. No. 934,859
Int. a.3 B31F 5/00
VS. a. 156—157 12 Claims
M 30o
/ _
1 "^"Z
PO
mM^'/:^^^,^^^
30b
^ZOb
1. The method of forming a continuous web having a planar
flbrous layer superimposed upon a corrugated layer the flutes
of which extend longitudinally of the web, which comprises
the steps of
(a) adhesively bonding a continuous planar flbrous facer
layer (22a) upon a corrugated fibrous layer (22/>) having
parallel flutes, said planar and corrugated layers having
the same dimension in the direction of the flutes and being
laterally displaced relative to each other a given distance
in the direction of said flutes, thereby to define a prelimi-
nary web (22) at one longitudinal edge of which the facer
layer projects a given distance laterally beyond the corru-
gated layer, and at the other longitudinal edge of which
the corrugated layer projects said given distance laterally
beyond the facer layer;
(b) transversely severing said preliminary web in the direc-
tion of said flutes to define a plurality of sections (30) of
equal length;
(c) arranging said sections in corresponding succession in a
common plane with their flutes extending colinearly in
longitudinal relation, each section having
(1) at one end a corrugated layer portion extending above,
and in flute-enmeshing engagement with the projecting
corrugated layer portion of a second section, and a
projecting facer layer portion that extends in overlap-
ping relation at least partially above the adjacent por-
tion of the facer layer of said second section; and
(2) at the other end, a projecting corrugated layer portion
that extends beneath the projecting facer layer of a third
section and at least partially in flute-enmeshing engage-
ment with the adjacent corrugated layer portion of said
third section;
(d) adhesively bonding the corrugated and projecting facer
layer portions at said one end of the section with the
corresponding portions of the second section; and
(e) adhesively bonding the projecting corrugated layer por-
tion of said section with the adjacent portion of said third
section, thereby to form a continuous first web (20) the
flutes of which extend longitudinally thereof.
4,435,238
MANUFACTURING PROCESS FOR A LOW LOSS
OPTICAL nBER CABLE
John C. Smith, Roanoke, Va., assignor to International Tele-
phone and Telegraph Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 437,392
Int. C\? B65H %l/02; G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 156—171 r 11 Qaims
1. A method of manufacturing an optical fiber cable unit
comprising the steps of:
paying off an axial strength member such that said strength
member rotates;
paying off a corrugated tape; applying said tape to said
rotating strength member so that said Upe is helically
wrapped about said strength member and so that the
corrugations form helical grooves;
paying off" an optical fiber and laying said fiber in a helical
groove formed by the corrugations; and
winding the cable on a reel.
4,435,239
PNEUMATIC TOW BLOOMING PROCESS
James E. Harris, Bristol, Tenn., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,968
Int. a.3 DOID 11/02
U.S. a. 156—180 5 Claims
1. A process for treatment of tow in preparation for forming
tobacco smoke cigarette filter rods comprising the steps of
withdrawing a continuous multifilament crimped tow from a
supply source;
banding the crimped tow to a predetermined width wider
than the tow at the supply source by removing false twist
from the tow, spreading the tow and partially breaking up
bundles of crimped filaments;
feeding said bandeid tow to a first zone and applying tension
axially to the filaments across the width of said banded
crimped tow to extend the crimp in and to partially dereg-
ister the crimped filaments within said tow and to partially
bloom the tow;
feeding the partially bloomed banded crimped tow to an
enclosed second zone and further spreading the width of
the tow within said second zone into a wide flat bundle of
filaments by impelling a flat gaseous compressed stream in
impingement against opposite sides of and across the
width of said bundle of filaments at an angle less than 90*
to the longitudinal axis of said bundle sufficient to pene-
trate the bundle, to encompass the filaments with said
gaseous compressed stream and to propel the bundle
toward and through a tapering exit of said second zone;
feeding said bundle of filaments into a partially enclosed,
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
267
wide rectangular third zone and therein momentarily
confining and rapidly decelerating the linear speed of said
bundle, applying compression against the mass of said
bundle and allowing said bundle to be momentarily stored
under conditions of low longitudinal tension, simulta-
neously allowing the compressed gaseous streams to ex-
pand and escape from said third zone at a location prior to
the exit for said bundle from said wide rectangular third
zone and thereby separate and bloom said filaments and
cause said filaments to fill said wide rectangular third zone
and to relax and recover a portion of their crimp, thereby
forming a flat wide low density bloomed tow;
feeding the bloomed filaments of the wide flat low density
tow to a fourth zone and uniformly applying plasticizer at
a consistent rate to both sides of and through said tow
across the width thereof;
feeding said tow to a fifth zone through and between two
rolls to squeeze and to spread the plasticizer more uni-
formly on said filaments, and then
feeding said tow onward for subsequent processing into
filter rods.
4,435,240
FABRIC-REINFORCED, FLEXIBLE-WALLED
CONTAINER AND METHOD OF MAKING SAID
CONTAINER
Ernest Knaus; Raymond J. Namsick, and Herbert D. Smith, all
of Akron, Ohio, assignors to Goodyear Aerospace Corpora-
tion, Akron, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 194,173, Oct. 6, 1980, Pat. No. 4,360,124.
ThU application Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,697
Int. a.J B29C U/00
U.S. 0. 156—242 7 Oalms
1. A method of making a flexible, fabric-reinforced, com-
plex-shaped container for holding a volume of a volatile liquid
hydrocarbon fuel comprising the steps of:
providing a fabric reinforcement material comprised of
yams exhibiting a change-in-efTective length characteris-
tic so as to stretch and be shaped to conform to a complex
configuration;
coating one face surface of the fabric with an elastomeric
gum;
coating the opposite face surface with an elastomeric adhe-
sive gum;
applying an air-impervious nylon plastic film to the adhesive
gum to form a complete composite material structure, said
film exhibiting a resistance to the deleterious affects of
volatile fuels to provide a barrier against penetration of
such fuels into the fabric and to aid in vacuum drawing of
the composite structure;
placing composite material in a first concave mold forming
the upper portion of the complex-shaped container, the
elastomeric gum facing inwardly into the mold while the
nylon film faces outwardly of the mojd;
placing composite material in a second doncave mold form-
ing the lower portion of the complex-shaped container,
the elastomeric gum facing inwardly into the mold while
the nylon film faces outwardly of the mold;
clamping the first and second molds together about periph-
eral edges to secure the composite material about the
peripheral edges in a manner to form an external flange;
applying a differential pressure to the upper and lower molds
to draw the composite material into the confines of the
respective upper and lower mold cavities to effect shaping
of the composite to the mold configurations, said elasto-
meric gum penetrating the interstices of the fabric to
adhere to the adhesive gum on the opposite side of the
fabric upon stretching of the fabric; and
curing the composite while holding the differential pressure
such that the composite is set and the yarns of the fabric
are maintained to the shaped container configuration as
established by the molds.
4,435,241
METHOD OF EXTRUDING LAMINATED RLM
Herbert O. Corbett, Bridgeport, Conn., assignor to National
Distillers and Chemical Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 26, 1967, Ser. No. 654,941
Int. a.3 B29C 79/00
U.S. a 156-244.11 llQaims
r^3^
•-Q
1. A method for the extrusion of a composite stream of
heat-plastified synthetic resinous material in a sheet-like con-
figuration wherein the composite stream comprises at least
three layers of diverse synthetic resinous material, the method
comprising:
providing a first stream of heat-plastified synthetic resinous
material to a restraining configuration, the restraining
configuration having a generally slot-like extrusion ori-
fice,
dividing the first stream of heat-plastified synthetic resinous
material into a first substream and a second substream
having a generally planar configuration,
providing a second stream of heat-plastified synthetic resin-
ous material, the second stream having a generally planar
configuration and a width substantially less than the first
and second substreams, positioning the first and second
substreams on either side of the second stream, subse-
quently,
passing the first and second substreams and the second
stream through an elongate slot-like extrusion orifice, the
second stream being encapsulated within the first and
second substreams in the composite stream, the second
stream being generally coextensive with the resultant
extruded sheet, the improvement which comprises re-
stricting the flow of the first stream generally at the point
where it is divided into the first and second substreams
and introducing between the first and second substreams
the second stream in a generally planar configuration
generally parallel to the first and second substreams and
having a dimension substantially less in width than the
first and second substreams, and passing the first and
second substreams and the second stream to the extrusion
orifice by means of a tapering configuration which con-
verges toward the orifice. ^y-^
268
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,242
ELONGATE STRUCTURE
John P. McNulty, Cotham, England, assignor to Bristol Com-
posite Materials Engineering Limited, Bristol, England
FUed Nov. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 442,255
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Nov. 26, 1981,
8135717
Int. a.5 B32B il/04. 31/30
U.S. a. 156—264 6 Claims
i
1. A method of fabricating a tapered elongate structure
comprising the steps of (a) producing a longitudinal member in
the form of a tube of even number sided polygonal uniform
cross section or of a circular cross-section, or a channel cross
section member, (b) cutting the member lengthwise and at an
angle to the longitudinal axis so as to produce a plurality of
similar segments of tapered shape, (c) arranging the segments
in an abutting or overlapping relationship so as to form a
tapered configuration and (d) bonding the segments at the
abutment or overlap areas to form the tapered elongate struc-
ture.
4,435,243
DEPOSIT INFORMATION LABELING MECHANISM
FOR ATM ENVELOPE DEPOSITING EQUIPMENT
Syed A. Azeez, North Canton; Paul A. Leipelt, and Herbert
Morello, both of Canton, all of Ohio, assignors to Diebold,
Incorporated, Canton, Ohio
FUed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 422,835
Int. a.3 B32B 3/00
U.S. a. 156-361 26 Claims
1. Mechanism for labeling on a deposit-containing envelope
deposit information about a deposit in said envelope, in which
said deposit information is derived in part from a customer
credit card entered by said customer into and read by a card
reader in a credit card activated ATM-type envelope deposi-
tory which verifies said customer's identity, in which said
deposit information also is derived in part from indicia includ-
ing said customer's personal identification number and the
amount of the deposit entered by said customer into the deposi-
tory keyboard, in which the depository has a control system
that translates said entered information and indicia into signals
transmitted to and from system computer-based control cir-
cuitry, in which said depository has conveyor means having
conveyor drive means within a safelike compartment having
an exit gate movable between closed and open positions at the
discharge end of said conveyor means, and in which first
sensor means is located adjacent the conveyor discharge end
which senses arrival of the leading end of a deposit envelope
being deposited and enables opening of said exit gate and
continued conveyor means movement; wherein the improve-
ment comprises depositor mechanism mounted at the dis-
charge end of said conveyor means adjacent said exit gate,
including,
(a) conveyor roll means having upper and lower pinch rolls
driven by said conveyor drive means and located in said
depositor mechanism at a labeling station communicating
with said depository conveyor means when said exit gate
is opened by said first sensor means upon sensing the
arrival at said first sensor means of the leading end of a
deposit-containing envelope to be labeled;
(b) delivering said deposit containing envelope by said con-
tinued conveyor means movement when said exit gate is
open to said driven conveyor roll means at said labeling
station to engage the leading end of said deposit-contain-
ing envelope with said conveyor roll means to continue
envelope movement through said conveyor roll means to
adjacent second sensor means;
(c) dot matrix impact printer mechanism mounted at a print-
ing station location adjacent said labeling station;
(d) pressure-sensitive-label carrying strip means movable in
a path of travel from a pay-out spool through said printing
and labeling stations to a take-up spool;
(e) peeler means engaging said carrying strip at said labeling
station;
(0 said carrying strip normally being at rest with a label
thereon in printing receiving position at said printing
station; and
(g) means enabled when said second sensor means senses the
arrival of the leading end of said deposit-containing enve-
lope at said second sensor means to energize the printer
mechanism to print deposit information entered into the
depository and transmitted to the printer mechanism, onto
said label located at said printing station, to move said
carrying strip in its path of travel, and to peel the printed
label from the carrying strip at the labeling station by said
peeler means onto its related deposit envelope during
continued movement of said carrying strip.
4,435,244
REOPROCATING CLAMP APPARATUS FOR
THERMOFORMING PLASTIC CONTAINERS
Martin H. Beck, Brookllne; Suppayan M. Krishnakumar, and
leuan L. Harry, both of Nashua, all of N.H., assignors to The
Continental Group, Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 315,842, Oct. 28, 1981, Pat. No. 4,427,476.
This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,446
Int. a? B29C 17/04: B32B 1/10
MS. a. 156—379.8 15 Claims
1. Apparatus for forming containers, said apparatus compris-
ing two sets of mold units each including a first platen having
a plurality of mold cavities formed therein and a second platen
carrying plungers cooperable with said mold cavities to form
from sheet material containers within said mold cavity, means
mounting a platen of each mold unit set in spaced relation,
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
269
means joining together and mounting the others of said platens
between said spaced platens for movement between a first
position wherein one of said mold unit sets is closed and the
other of said mold unit sets is open and a second position
wherein said other mold unit set is closed and said one mold
unit set is open, and means for sequentially advancing separate
and continuous sheet material along two paths relative to a
respective mold unit set when that mold unit set is open to
displace newly formed containers and to align new sheet por-
tion between platens of the open mold unit set.
position so that the brake actuating member is immediately
returned to said tape clamping position by said spring.
1. In an apparatus for imprinting and dispensing pressure-
sensitive labels adhering to a carrier tape comprising an operat-
ing lever which is pivotal from a rest position in which it holds
a printing mechanism raised from a platen into an operating
position in which it holds the printing mechanism bearing
against the platen, a feed means for stepwise drawing of the
carrier tape over the platen and a peel edge at which the pres-
sure-sensitive labels detach from the carrier tape and move into
a dispensing position, and a braking means for clamping the
carrier tape with the pressure-sensitive labels adhering thereto
on the path to the peel edge in the rest position of the operating
lever, the improvement comprising the braking means includ-
ing (a) a brake actuating member, (b) a spring which normally
biases the brake actuating member into a carrier tape clamping
position out of which said member is pivotal into a carrier tape
release position, and (c) a cam gearing disposed between the
brake actuating member and the operating lever, said cam
gearing pivoting the brake actuating member out of the carrier
tape clamping position against the bias of said spring into the
carrier tape release position in response to the operating lever
moving through a part of its travel from the rest position into
the operating position, an arresting member which arrests the
brake actuating member in the carrier tape release position
against the bias of said spring and means for releasing the
arresting member when the operating lever reaches its rest
4,435,245
APPARATUS FOR IMPRINTING AND DISPENSING
PRESSURE-SENSITIVE LABELS ADHERING TO A
CARRIER TAPE
Giinter HoUand-Letz, Hirschhom, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Esselte Pendaflex Corporation, Hirschhorn, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 254,296, Apr. 15, 1981, abandoned.
This application Feb. 2, 1983, Ser. No. 463,312
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 9,
1980, 3017843
Int. a.3 B41F 21/00. 1/08; B32B 31/00
U.S. a. 156—384 7 aaims
4,435,246
LABEL DISPENSING AND APPLYING APPARATUS
Ronald J. Green, Baraboo, Wis., assignor to Franchise Mailing
Systems, Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Oct. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 432,646
Int. a.3 B32B 1/00
U.S. a. 156-542 16 Claims
1. An apparatus for simultaneously removing a plurality of
pressure-sensitive labels from a backing sheet and applying the
labels to parcels moving in sequence on & conveyor,
said apparatus comprising
a label stripping assembly for stripping a substantial portion
of the labels from the backing sheet to expose the pressure-
sensitive adhesive surface of the labels,
conveyor means for transporting parcels in sequence from a
loading station to a dispensing station,
an elastic belt conveyor for transferring labels in sequence
from said stripping assembly to said parcels,
means operatively connected to move a portion of said belt
conveyor through a cycle of motion which intersects the
non-adhesive surface of the label on the initial movement
of the conveyor and the pressure-sensitive adhesive sur-
face on the return motion of the conveyor whereby said
labels will adhere to the belt conveyor on the return mo-
tion.
4,435,247
METHOD FOR POLISHING TITANIUM CARBIDE
Jagtar S. Basi, Fishkill, and Eric Mendel, Poughkeepsie, both of
N.Y., assignors to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 10, 1983, Ser. No. 473,938
Int. a.3 B44C 1/22: C03C 15/00. 25/06
U.S. a. 156—636 9 Qaims
1. A method for the chemical-mechanical polishing of a
titanium carbide surface to a high degree of perfection com-
prising:
maintaining said titanium carbide surface continuously wet-
ted with a water slurry containing a soft abrasive matenal;
continuously wiping the titanium carbide surface with a firm
surface using pressure while mainuining a relative move-
ment between the titanium carbide surface and the firm
surface to remove the water reacted tiunium carbide
270
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
product from the high points of the titanium carbide sur-
face.
4435,248
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING PHOTOGRAPHIC PAPER
Shun Arakawa, Shizuoka, Japan, assignor to Fi^i Photo Film
Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Dec. 1, 1980, Set. No. 212,008
Clainu priority, application Japan, Nov. 30, 1979, 54-155115
Int. a.3 D21D 3/00
U.S. a. 162—12 8 Claims
.90*
i
u 05
~0 50
mTER CONTENT AT BLEACHING l«l
1. A process for producing photographic paper comprising
bleaching a paper web containing from 0 to 65% by weight
water, using a size press and drying said web at a temperature
of from 50° C. to 80' C. for 30 seconds to 3 minutes, wherein
the bleaching agent is H2O2 used in an amount of from about
0.1% to 5.0% by weight, based on the weight of the pulp
forming the paper web.
4,435,249
PROCESS FOR THE OXYGEN DELIGNinCATION OF
PULP MILL REJECTS
Larry D. Markham, Pierrefonds, Canada; Andrew C. Martin,
Middletown, Ohio; Edward F. Elton, Bethlehem; Vincent L.
Magnotta, Coopersburg, both of Pa., and Scott A. Wallick,
Seattle, Wash., assignors to The Black Clawson Co., Middle-
town, Ohio and Air Products A Chemicals, Inc., Allentown,
Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 72,796, Sep. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 325,084
Int. a.3 D21B 1/04; D21C 9/10; D21D 5/02
U.S. a. 162—24 9 Oaims
■MJceTi
H
-V-
« SCHCOIt
MdCCTt
t«
CONtltTINCY
eCNTIIIFU«AL
"CLEANCIt
V**
1. A process for the treatment of pulp mill fine screen rejects
and knotter rejects to produce a bleachable grade pulp com-
prising the steps of:
(a) treating a pulp stream from an initial cooking or digestion
stage to separate knotter rejects from said pulp,
(b) passing said pulp from step (a) to a fine screen to separate
fine screen rejects,
(c) dewatering said knotter rejects to a consistency of about
20% while removing black liquor and free fiber;
(d) mixing fine screen rejects from step (b) having a consis-
tency of from about 0.5-5.0% with said knotter rejects;
(e) dewatering the mixture of knotter and fine screen rejects
to a consistency of about 10-15%;
(0 mechanically fiberizing said mixture at the same 10-15%
consistency;
(g) delignifying the fiberized mixture with mixing at the
same 10-15% consistency in the presence of oxygen and
alkaline chemicals for a period of from about 5 to about
120 minutes at 80'- 140* C, in a reactor separate from any
reactor used to delignify said pulp, and
(h) sending said fiberized materials to a bleaching stage.
4435 250
DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF A TRACK
MOUNTED CAR
Carl Lindgren, Glenshaw, Pa., assignor to Koppers Company.
Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,445
Int. a.3 B61B 12/00; B61L 3/02. 27/04; ClOB 45/00
U.S. a. 202-239 26 Oaims
1. A track mounted car, track and a device for moving the
track mounted car from an initial spotted position on said track
to a second predetermined position on said track comprising:
(a) an arm member having a terminal feeler means and being
pivotally mounted on said car so as to be oscillatory in a
vertical arc generally parallel to said track;
(b) sensing means for providing an electrical output signal
related in polarity and proportional in amplitude to angu-
lar displacements of the arm member in its vertical arc
from a gravity based reference position of the arm mem-
ber in said vertical arc;
(c) a protrusion engageable with said feeler means and posi-
tioned remotely from the car and in fixed relation to the
track so that when the feeler means and the protrusion are
engaged and the car has reached its second predetermined
position, the arm member will be positioned in its gravity
based reference position;
(d) a dual directional, variable speed drive means for moving
the car on the track; and
(e) control means for operating said drive means in a direc-
tion dependent on the polarity of said signal and at a speed
proportional to the amplitude of said signal, such that the
car will move to said second predetermined position at an
instantaneous velocity which is approximately propor-
tional to its remaining distance from said second position.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
27!
4,435,251
METHOD FOR PURinCATION OF
^METHYLENEGLUTARONITRILE
Makoto Takeda; Kazuhito MIyoshi, both of Ami; Mitsumasa
Kaitoh, Kashiwa, and Hiroyuki Omori, Yokkaichi, aU of
Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Petrochemical Company Lim-
ited, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,815
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 27, 1980, 55-185497
Int. a.J BOID 3/34
U.S. a. 203-50 3 Claims
1. In a method for purification of crude 2-methyleneg-
lutaronitrile product containing as impurities a metal halide, a
trialkylamine, and a trimer or higher polymer of acrylonitrile,
which crude product is a reaction product obtained by dimer-
izing acrylonitrile in the presence of a catalyst comprising a
metal halide and a trialkylamine, wherein the purification
comprises treating said crude 2-methy!eneglutaronitri!e prod-
uct with an acid and then subjecting the treated product to
distillation, the improvement comprising effecting said purifi-
cation by the following sequential steps:
(1) subjecting said reaction product to predistiilation at a
temperature of 120* C. or lower under a pressure of 10 to
200 mm Hg to distill off therefrom at least portions of
unreacted acrylonitrile and trialkylamine;
(2) treating said crude 2-methyIeneglutaronitrile product
with an acid selected from the group consisting of hydro-
chloric acid, sulfuric acid and nitric acid of a concentra-
tion of 1 to 30% by weight at a temperature of 10* to 50*
C. in the presence of an aromatic hydrocarbon selected
from the group consisting of benzene, toluene, ethylben-
zene and xylene in a quantity of 0. 1 to 2 volumes relative
to that of the crude 2-methyleneglutaronitrile;
(3) separating the acid-treated crude product from the aque-
ous layer, and washing the remaining organic layer with a
dilute aqueous alkaline solution; and
(4) subjecting the washed crude product to distillation under
a reduced pressure.
4,435,253
GOLD SULPHITE ELECTROPLATING SOLUTIONS AND
METHODS
Kenneth D. Baker, Bridgewater, and Hans Scheider, Bloomfleld,
both of N J., assignors to OMI International Corporation,
Warren, Mich.
FUed Jan. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 461,341
Int. a.J C25D 3/48. 3/62
U.S. a. 204-43 G 19 Claims
1. In an aqueous electrolyte sulphite gold electroplating
solution comprising an alkali metal or ammonium gold sul-
phite, and at least a grain refining amount of thallium metal, the
improvement where said solution also contains a non-hydroxy,
non-amino carboxylic acid to maintain the hardness of the gold
deposited therefrom below about 90 Knoop.
4435 254
BRIGHT NICKEL ELECTROPLATING
Kenneth W. Lemke, EnglUhtown, N.J., assignor to MAT Chem-
icals Inc., Woodbridge, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 88,610, Oct. 26, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 956,741, Nov. 1, 1978,
abandoned. This appUcation Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,850
Int. a.3 C25D 3/14 3/16. 3/18
U.S. a. 204—49 46 Claims
1. An aqueous acidic electroplating solution for use in elec-
trodepositing nickel from a nickel compound containing solu-
tion, wherein said solution comprises:
(a) a nickel compound; ^
(b) 0.005 gram per liter to 0.1 gram per liter of an acetyleiiic
amine or substituted amine, aliphatic or aromatic; and
(c) 0.01 gram per liter to 0. 10 gram per liter of a sulfonated
acetylenic and salts thereof where the acetylenic bond and
the sulfonate radical are connected by a carbon chain
where C=l-6.
4,435,252
METHOD FOR PRODUaNG A RETICULATE
ELECTRODE FOR ELECTROLYTIC CELLS
Igor V. Kad^a, Oeveland, Tenn., assignor to OUn Corporation,
New Haven, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 143,970, Apr. 25, 1980, Pat. No. 4,370,214.
This appUcation Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 422,799
Int. a.3 C25B 1/08
U.S. a. 204—11 16 Qaims
1. A method for producing a reticulate electrode for use in
the electrolysis of aqueous solutions of ionizable compounds
which comprises:
(a) affixing filaments to a support fabric to form a network of
filaments, said filaments being comprised of a metal or
metal sensitized plastic,
(b) depositing an electroconductive metal on said filaments
to form metal coated filaments, said deposition providing
interfilament bonding at contact sites between adjacent
filaments, and
(c) removing said support fabrics from said metal coated
filament network to produce a reticulate electrode having
a porosity of at least 80 percent.
4,435,255
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLED FEED
OF ALUMINA AND HALOGEN ADDITIVES INTO
ELECTROLYSIS VATS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
ALUMINUM
Spyridon Casdas, Paralia Distomon, Greece, assignor to Alumin-
ium de Grece, Athens, Greece
FUed Apr. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 366,990
Qaims priority, appUcation France, Apr. 15, 1981, 81 07855;
Dec. 8, 1981, 81 23328
Int. a.3 C25C 3/06. 3/14 3/20
U.S. a. 204—67 16 Claims
1. Process for feeding alumina and halogen additives into an
electrolytic cell for production of aluminum by electrolysis of
alumina dissolved in the molten cryolite according to the
Hall-Heroult technique, wherein the alumina or halogen addi-
tive is in a storage means having a bottom discharge fiow
orifice, cutoff means for controlling flow from said flow ori-
fice, and a feed regulator for receiving and dispatching succes-
sive regulated dose quantities through a system of pipes and
into at least one orifice in the crust of solidified electrolyte
which covers the cell during normal operation; the process
comprising, opening the cutoff means and allowing the alu-
mina or halogen additive to flow into and fill the feed regulator
by gravity, closing the cutofl* means, and injecting compressed
air at the base of the feed regulator through the feed regulator
272
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
and into the system of pipes until all alumina or halogen addi-
tive contained in the feed regulator has been dispatched,
through said system of pipes, to the orifice in the electrolysis
crust.
4,435^56
PROCESS FOR MAKING POTASSIUM FERRATE
[FECVD] BY THE ELECTROCHEMICAL FORMAHON OF
SODIUM FERRATE
J. Paul Deininger, Qeveland, Tenn., assignor to Olin Corpora-
tion, New Haven, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 246,790, Mar. 23, 1981, and a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 246,794, Mar. 23, 1981. This
application Jul. 1, 1983, Ser. No. 510,115
Int. a.3 C25B 1/00
U.S. a. 204-86 28 Oaims
1. A process for preparing potassium ferrate which com-
prises:
(a) admixing sodium hydroxide containing less than about
0.02% by weight of sodium halide with sufficient sodium
halide to increase the sodium halide concentration of the
resulting mixture to between about 0.02% and about 4.0%
by weight;
(b) carrying out an electrolysis process with an anolyte
comprising said resulting mixture and ferric ions whereby
sodium ferrate is formed in the anolyte;
(c) reacting said sodium ferrate with a potassium compound
capable of reacting with said anolyte to form a potassium
ferrate precipitate; and
(d) recovering said potassium ferrate therefrom.
4,435,257
PROCESS FOR THE ELECTROCHEMICAL
PRODUCnON OF SODIUM FERRATE [FE(VI)]
J. Paul Deininger, and Ronald L. Dotson, both of Oeveland,
Tenn., assignors to Olin Corporation, New Haven, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 246,790, Mar. 23, 1981. This
application Jul. 1, 1983, Ser. No. 510,114
Int. C\? C25B 1/00
MS. a. 204—86 23 Claims
1. A process for preparing sodium ferrate which comprises:
(a) admixing sodium hydroxide containing less than about
0.02% by weight of sodium halide with sufficient sodium
halide to increase the sodium halide concentration of the
resulting mixture to between about 0.02% to about 4.0%
by weight;
(b) carrying out an electrolysis process with an anolyte
comprising said resulting mixture and ferric ions whereby
sodium ferrate is formed in the anolyte; and
(c) recovering said sodium ferrate therefrom.
4,435,258
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE RECOVERY OF
PALLADIUM FROM SPENT ELECTROLESS CATALYTIC
BATHS
James P. Melka, Jr., Henrico County, and John F. Barnes, Glen
Allen, both of Va., assignors to Western Electric Co., Inc.,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 426,054
Int. a.J C25C 1/20
U.S. a. 204—109 11 Claims
ILICTDOLTTIC CILL
1. A method for recovering palladium from a tin-containing
acidic colloidal palladium bath comprising the steps of:
(a) dissolving the colloidal palladium by the addition of an
oxidizing agent to the bath;
(b) heating the solution containing the dissolved palladium;
(c) placing the solution in an electrolytic cell having a nickel
anode and a cathode of nickel or copper; and
(d) electrowinning palladium from the solution at a voluge
and current density which tends to preferably plate palla-
dium as opposed to any tin in the solution.
4,435,259
RADIATION CURABLE COMPOSITION OF VINYL
POLYSILOXANE AND HYDROGEN POLYSILOXANE
WITH PHOTOSENSITIZER
Mike S. H. Chang, Danbury, Conn., assignor to Pitney Bowes
Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 230,789, Feb. 2, 1981, Pat. No. 4,376,210.
This application Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 413,645
Int. a.3 C08F 2/50. 2/54; C08G 77/12. 77/20
U.S. a. 204—159.13 7 Claims
1. Radiation curable composition comprising a liquid vinyl
polysiloxane polymer having the moiety formula:
Si— O
wherein X is a number greater than 1, Y is a number greater
than 0 to about 10, R's are the same or different monovalent
hydrocarbon radicals selected from the group consisting of C|
to C4 alkyl groups, cyclohexyl groups and phenyl groups and
R' is a R group an oxygen radical; a liquid polymethylhydro
siloxane and at least one photosensitizer.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
273
4,435,260
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DESULFURIZATION
and dentfrincation of waste gas by
Multi-stage electron beam irradiation
Yamada Koichi, Tokyo; Kawamura Keita, Fi^isawa, and Aoki
Shiigi, Tokyo, aU of Japan, assignors to Ebara Corporation.
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,511
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 16, 1980, 55-81088
Int. a.3 COIB 17/60
U.S. a. 204-164 2Ci^WM
ATMOSPhCRE
L
'4a
BY-PRODUCT
'4b
mer into a polymer within said chamber, said means in-
cluding at least a first electrode and a second electrode
disposed in said chamber, said first and second electrodes
being in liquid contact with said monomer within said
chamber, said first and said second electrodes being of
different voltages;
(c) ejecting said charged thermoplastic polymer through
said discharge spray means in the form of a stream or
charged droplets; and
1. An improved method of treating waste gas conuining
sulfur dioxide (SO2) and nitrogen oxides (NOx) to remove said
oxides wherein ammonia is added to the waste gas and the
waste gas is irradiated and SO2 and NOx are then removed
from the waste gas, the improvement comprising carrying out
said irradiation by multiple steps comprising
(1) the first irradiation step comprising introducing waste
gas into the first irradiation unit and irradiating the same
gas in an irradiation vessel of said unit with electron beams
to give a dose which is determined by the concentrations
of NOx and S02of the non-irradiated waste gas to thereby
reduce concentrations of NOx and SO2 to the certain
predetermined levels, respectively;
(2) the second irradiation step, the third irradiation step, the
fourth irradiation step,— and the n th irradiation step in
sequence each comprising substantially the same proce-
dure as that mentioned in the first irradiation step;
(3) the n th irradiation step comprising introducing the irra-
diated gas discharged from the (n- 1) irradiation step into
the n th irradiation unit and irradiating the same gas in an
irradiation vessel of the n th irradiation unit with electron
beams to give a dose which is determined by the concen-
trations of NOx and/or SO2 of the waste gas discharged
from the (n-l)th irradiation unit to thereby reduce the
concentrations of both NOx and SO2 to the intended final
levels, respectively; and
(4) an aerosol collection step comprising introducing the
waste gas discharged form the n th irradiation step into an
aerosol collector to thereby separate aerosol particles
from the waste gas.
4,435,261
POLYMERIZATION REACnON BY CHARGE
INJECnON
Donald J. Mintz, Fort Lee; Arnold J. Kelly, Princeton Junction,
and Anthony M. Gleason, Westfleld, all of N.J., assignors to
Exxon Research and En^eering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,411
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 10,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C25B 3/00
U.S. a. 204-168 6 aalms
1. A process for the free radical polymerization of liquid
monomers into thermoplastic polymers, which comprises:
(a) introducing at least one monomer into a chamber of a cell
of an electrostatic atomizing device, said electrostatic
having a discharge spray means;
(b) means for injecting an electrical charge through said
liquid monomer in said chamber, said electrical charge
being sufficient to generate free excess charge in said
liquid monomer to initiate polymerization of said mono-
(d) directing said formed stream or charged droplets
towards a third electrode at a different potential and dis-
posed externally to said housing for producing a high
electric field in said thermoplastic polymer at said dis-
charge spray means, said field being produced by a volt-
age differential between said thermoplastic polymer and
said external electrode.
4,435,262
ELECTRICALLY NEUTRAL NONPERMSELECTIVE
POROUS MEMBRANE
Edward L. Phillips, Medford Lakes, N.J., auignor to Sybron
Corporation, Rochester, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 299,574, Sep. 4, 1981, Pat. No. 4,397,908,
and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 99,338, Dec. 3, 1979,
abandoned. This application Dec. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453,225
Int. a.^ C25D 13/00
U.S. a. 204-181 C 1 ci,,„
1. A method of transporting anions or cations through a
membrane barrier which comprises:
(a) providing a painting bath which contains both anions and
cations;
(b) placing in said bath at a selected location an electrically
neutral nonpermselective porous membrane which com-
promises a woven fabric substrate having coated thereon
a mixture of a binder material and an inert porous filler
material, with the porosity of said filler material forming a
plurality of random paths which pass through the thick-
ness of said membrane:
(c) providing an electrodepostion system which includes an
electrical potential which is imposed within said bath and
across said membrane whereby ions of a given polarity are
transported through the membrane via said porous paths,
while paint which has become electrically charged an
opposite polarity is deposited on a workpiece conuined
within said painting bath.
4,435.263
BACKHLL FOR MAGNESIUM GALVANIC ANODES
Philip Y. Lau, Houston, Tex., assignor to The Dow Chemical
Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Mar. 1, 1982. Ser. No. 353,460
Int. C1.J C23F 13/00; C04B 33/13
UA a. 204-197 17 cUims
1. A backfill composition for use with underground place-
ment of magnesium galvanic anodes, said composition consist-
ing essentially of
a mixture of calcium sulfite and bentonite, and a positive
274
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
amount of up to about 25% of totol solids of at least one a spray chamber immediately over said at least one cell open
compound selected from the group consisting of sodium end having pipe means for directing liquid sprays at opposed
alkylates and sodium dialkyldithiocarbamates in which sides ofsaid goods carriers, a condensing chamber immediately
the alkyl groups contam 1 -4 carbons, q^„ ^^^ chamber having means for cooling the interior
wherem said bentonite contams a substantial amount of
alkaline earth metal bentonite
and,
wherein the ratio of calcium sulfite/bentonite is in the range
of about 0.2 to about S.
4,435,264
MAGNESIUM ANODE BACKHLLS
Philip Y. Lau, Houston, Tex., assignor to The Dow Chemical
Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,461
Int. a? C23F 13/00; C04B 33/13
U.S. a. 204—197 16 Oaims
1. A backfill composition for use with underground place-
ment of magnesium galvanic anodes, said composition consist-
ing essentially of
a mixture of calcium sulfite, B(OH)3, and bentonite, wherein
said bentonite contains a substantial amount of alkaline
earth metal bentonite, wherein the B(OH)3 is present in a
positive amount up to about 16% by weight of the solids
in the backfill composition, and
wherein the ratio of calcium sulfite/bentonite is in the range
of about 0.2 to about S.
8. A packaged galvanic anode for underground placement
for the cathodic protection of ferrous metal structures, said
package comprising
a magnesium anode surrounded by a backfill composition
which is contained in a water-permeable material, with
means for providing electrical wiring between anode and
ferrous metal structure,
wherein said backfill composition consisting essentially of a
mixture of calcium sulfite, B(OH)3, and bentonite,
wherein said bentonite contains a substantial amount of
alkaline earth metal bentonite,
wherein the B(OH)3 is present in a positive amount up to
about 16% by weight of the solids in the backfill composi-
tion, and
wherein the ratio of calcium sulfite/bentonite is in the range
of about 0.2 to about S.
4,435,265
DEVICE FOR ELECTRO-DEPOSITION OF ALUMINUM
Siegfried Birkle, Hochstadt; Johann Gehring, Spardorf, and
Klaus Stiiger, Nuremberg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 11, 1983, Ser. No. 522,019
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 26,
1982, 3231855
Int. a.3 C25D 17/06. 17/18. 21/02
U.S. a. 204—198 6 Qalms
1. In an assembly for the electro-deposit of aluminum onto
core goods having a plating tank including at least one open-
ended cell containhig aprotic, oxygen-free and water-free,
organic aluminum electrolyte, a hood means, having inlet and
outlet portals, defining an interior space over said at least one
cell open end closed to ambient and containing an inert gas,
and truck means movable in said interior space for sequentially
drawing goods carriers through said inlet portal, passing said
goods carriers into and out of said at least one cell, and dis-
charging said goods carriers through said outlet portal, a
charging liquid lock means connected to said inlet portal for
inputing goods carriers to said plating tank, a discharging
liquid lock means connected to said outlet portal for removal
of goods carriers from said plating tank, apparatus for prevent-
ing smoke formation in said interior space and contamination
of said charging and discharging liquid lock means comprising
thereof, and a cover plate defining a slot correspondingly
aligned with the open^nd ofsaid at least one cell for passage
of said goods carriers between said interior space of said hood
means and said at least one cell.
4,435,266
ELECTROPLATING ARRANGEMENTS
Samuel J. B. Johnston, Ashford, England, assignor to EMI
Limited, Hayes, England
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 428,525
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 1, 1981,
8129625
Int. Q\? C25D 21/12
U.S. a. 204—276 12 Claims
I nt.Ttm~^
1. An electroplating apparatus, for forming a disc record
stamper plate, comprising a bath capable of holding an electro-
lyte, a filter screen dividing said bath into a cathode region and
an anode region, a cathode, at which said stamper plate is
formed, in said cathode region, an anode in said anode region,
said anode facing and lying substantially parallel to said cath-
ode, said anode comprising anode material in the form of
pellets contained in an open mesh container, an electrolyte
inlet pipe entering said cathode region through said anode with
an open end protruding through said filter screen to face said
cathode, and an electrolyte outlet in said anode region, circu-
lating means operative in use of the apparatus to continuously
circulate electrolyte through said bath, said circulating means
including pump means connected between said outlet and said
inlet pipe to create a high pressure region between said filter
screen and said cathode thereby continuously flushing the
cathode with fresh electrolyte and creating a major return flow
path to said outlet directly through said screen and through
said anode which substantially purges said anode of contami-
nating material.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
27S
4,435,267
GAS PERCOLATION BARRIER FOR GAS FED
ELECTRODE
John S. Batzold, Union, and Judith C. Savas, Qark, both of
N J., assignors to Exxon Research and Engineering Co., Flor-
ham Park, N J.
Filed Oct. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 433,753
Int. CI.J C25B 11/03. 11/04, 13/08; HOIM 4/86
U.S. a. 204-284 , 8 q^^
1. A gas fed porous electrode adapted for vertical use in an
electrolytic cell of the type wherein a first side of said elec-
trode is positioned to be in contact with aqueous electrolyte
and the second and opposite side is positioned to face a source
of gas being fed to said electrode, said electrode comprising:
a porous electroconductive body of hydrophobic polymeric
material selected from the group consisting of polymers
and copolymers and vinylchloride, polyethylene, polybu-
tylene, polypropylene, polytrifluorethylene, and polytet-
rafluoroethylene, said body including a carbon cloth sup-
port for said hydrophobic polymeric material and an
electrochemical catalyst, said porous electroconductive
body having on the surface in contact with the electrolyte
a thin porous hydrophilic layer selected from the group
consisting of asbestos, alumina and silica gel, said hydro-
philic material being bonded to said hydrophobic polymer
with a hydrophobic polymer in an amount sufficient to
bond the hydrophilic material while maintaining the hy-
drophilic nature of such material.
4,435,268
OXYGEN SENSING CELL
Gordon W. Martin, Ronceverte, and John Strohl, Morgantown,
both of W. Va., assignors to The Bendix Corporation, South*
field, Mich.
FUed Aug. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 411,765
Int. a.3 GOIN 27/50
U.S. a. 204-408 6 Gaims
inner porous electrode bonded to the inner surface ofsaid sense
membrane, a guard electrode between the second opening and
the cathode, said guard electrode being substantially coexten-
sive with and overlying said inner porous electrode, a thin
layer of insulating material which is pervious to said electro-
lyte interposed between said guard electrode and said porous
electrode, the opposite sides of said insulating layer being in
intimate contact with the adjacent surfaces of said guard elec-
trode and said porous electrode so that said guard electrode is
spaced from said porous electrode only by said insulating
layer, the guard electrode operating continuously, whereby
oxygen molecules dissolved in the electrolyte and diffusing
towards the cathode will be scavenged by the guard electrode,
thereby substantially increasing the dynamic range of the
sensing cell, and means within the body for respectively esub-
lishing electrical connections to the anode, cathode and guard
electrode.
4,435,269
CONVERSION OF LIGNITE TO HIGHER QUALITY
FUELS
Paul L. Gomory, Bcthesda, Md., assignor to Phillips Petroleum
Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,775
Int. a.J ClOG 1/06. 1/00
U.S. a. 208-8 R 18 ciMim
LIMII
limn K-i
"law. I „u Houet i
•ru'iaeo »
u-JaiTu k >» to flu
1. A process for the beneficiation of a low grade particulate
carbonaceous fuel source which comprises:
retorting in a solids/vapor first retort reactor means a first
portion ofsaid particulate carbonaceous fuel source under
elevated temperatures with a fuel gas comprising hydro-
gen and CO, thereby producing products comprising a
residue char, a first stream of ofl^-gases comprising first
gaseous hydrocarbons, and a first oil. and
contacting in a second retort reactor means a second portion
of said particulate carbonaceous fuel source with said oil
under reaction conditions of elevated temperatures with
CO and H: effective to convert at least in part said second
portion of said particulate carbonaceous fuel source to
products comprising further oil, hydrocarbon gases, CO,
water, ash, and particulate carbon.
1. An oxygen sensing cell, comprising a body having a pair
of end portions provided with respective first and second
openings therein, the body further having a central bore form-
ing a main cavity communicating with the openings, an elec-
trolyte within the cavity, a compensation membrane mounted
over the first opening in the body, an anode within the cavity
in the body, a cathode across the second opening in the body
and including an outer permeation sense membrane and an
4,435,270
RE-REHNING LUBRICATING OIL IN A BED OF OIL
SHALE
Costandl A. Audch, Princeton, NJ., assignor to Mobil Oil Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 20, 1983, Ser. No. 515,717
Int. a.} ClOB 53/06
U.S. a. 208—11 R 12 Qalms
1. A method of reclaiming usable stock from used lubricat-
ing oil comprising:
passing said used lubricating oil through a bed of oil shale
containing kerogen;
collecting the treated oil passed through said bed; and
heating the oil shale in said bed to convert said kerogens to
276
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
shale oil in the presence of hydrogen donor compounds
contained in the lubricating oil remaining in said shale and
OIL SHALE
PtWOOCT
/e'Z ^"'^'"■^^^,
n
1. A process for treating hydrocarbon-bearing particulates
recovered from a retort, said process comprising:
(a) passing said particulates from said retort maintained at a
higher pressure as a moving solids bed in series flow
successively through a surge chamber, a gas injection
chamber, a seal leg chamber, and a gas disengaging cham-
ber to a location at a lower pressure than said retort, the
configuration of the surge chamber being such that said
flow of the solids bed is continuous and the configuration
of said seal leg chamber being such as to provide a sub-
stantial resistance to gas flow therethrough when said seal
leg chamber is traversed by said moving solids bed;
(b) injecting a stream of sealing gas into said moving solids
bed in said gas injection chamber, which stream divides, a
first portion flowing countercurrently to said moving
solids bed through said surge chamber and into said retort
at a pressure greater than said retort, and a second portion
flowing co-currently with said moving solids bed through
said seal leg chamber wherein a substantial pressure drop
is incurred and thence into said gas disengaging chamber
wherein at least some of said second portion of the sealing
gas is separated and withdrawn from the moving solids
bed and said solids bed is withdrawn from said gas disen-
gaging chamber at a pressure lower than that of said
retort;
(c) crushing particulates withdrawn from step (b) in a crush-
ing zone to a size suitable for combustion under fluidizing
conditions in step (e) hereinafter;
(d) transporting crushed particulates from step (c) to a fluid-
ized combustion zone using a carrier gas stream; and
(e) burning a substantial proportion of the combustible mate-
rials in the crushed particulates in said fluidized combus-
tion zone, the crushed particulates being maintained in a
fluidizing condition by a gas stream comprising oxygen
introduced into the combustion zone.
which enhance hydrogen transfer during shale oil produc-
tion.
4,435^1
OIL SHALE RETORTING PROCESS WITH A MOVING
BED PRESSURE LETDOWN STAGE
Roland F. Deering, Brea, and John H. Duir, Yorba Linda, both
of Calif., assignors to Union Oil Company of California, Brea,
Calif.
Filed Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 451,597
Int. a.3 ClOG 1/00
U.S. a. 208—11 R 34 Claims
4,435,272
PROCESS FOR UPGRADING CRUDE OIL AND
RESIDUAL FRACTIONS THEREOF BY VAPORIZING
THE CHARGE IN A FALLING CURTAIN OF CONTACT
PARTICLES
David B. Bartholic, Watchung, N J., and Robert L. Flanders,
San Anselmo, Calif., assignors to Engelhard Corporation,
Edison, N.J.
Filed Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 369,056
Int. a.3 ClOG 9/iO, 9/42
U.S. a. 208—127 16 Claims
©
1. A process for upgrading a petroleum charge of a crude oil
or a residual fraction thereof to provide a product with re-
duced heavy metal and Conradson Carbon content comprising
the steps of:
(a) contacting said charge with a substantially inert heated
contact material for a period of time less than three sec-
onds and less than that which induces substantial thermal
cracking of said charge by dispersing said charge into a
curtain of descending contact material to vaporize the
charge;
(b) removing immediately the vaporized hydrocarbon prod-
uct generated thereby through means on the opposite side
of said curtain of contact material from which said charge
is dispersed without subjecting said product vapor to
additional contact with said inert heated contact material
before said removal; and
(c) reducing the temperature of said vapors below that at
which substantial thermal cracking of the product occurs.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
277
4,435,273
HEAT EXCHANGER ANTIFOULANT
Richard L. Fenn, Lafayette, and Louis R. Kray, Novato, both of
Calif., assignors to Cbevron Research Company, San Fran-
Cisco, Calif.
Filed Jul. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 401,438
Int. a.3 ClOG 9/16
U.S. CI. 208-48 AA ,o Qalm.
1. A process for reducing heat exchanger fouling in which a
liquid hydrocarbon stream is passed through a heat exchanger
at a temperature from 0* to 1500* F. wherein from 1 to 500
parts per million of an antifouling additive is added to said
hydrocarbon stream, said additive comprising an alkylamino
alkylphenol of the formulae:
OH
(I)
R} Ri R3
I I I
CH— N— CH
wherein: R and Ri are independently alkyl groups of 1 to 20
carbon atoms; R2 is H, or an alkyl group of 1 to 20 carbon
atoms; R3 is H, or an alkyl group of 1 to 6 carbon atoms; and
n is 1 to 10.
4,435,274
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING GASOLINE WITH
UPGRADING OF HYDROCARBON OILS
Bernard Juguin, Rueil-Malmaison; Jean-Pierre Franck, Bougi-
val; Yves Jacquin, Sevres; Christian Marcilly, Houilles, and
Germain Martino, Poissy, all of France, assignors to Institut
Francais du Petrole, Rueil-Malmaison, France
Filed Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 425,348
Oaims priority, application France, Sep. 28, 1981, 81 18372
Int. a.3 ClOG 45/02. 35/04. 65/00
U.S. a. 208—80 9 Claims
-tl^
1."
J4-
35
tJ
tor
80— 63-1 H r*
between 25* and 200* C. and containing at least 40% by
weight of naphthenic hydrocarbons and at least 300 ppm
of sulfur, 300 ppm of nitrogen and 300 ppm of oxygen, and
a middle distillate comprising at least 50% of constituents
distilling between about 200* and 360* C, and process
being characterized by the steps of:
(a) admixing said naphtha with a gasoline cut "E" defined
below, contacting the resultant mixture with a hydro-
treatment catalyst, under hydrotreatmcnt conditions,
and recovering a hydrotreated naphtha,
(b) contacting the hydrotreated naphtha with a dehydro-
genation catalyst under dehydrogeilation conditions
and fractionating the dehydrogenation product to ob-
tain a gasoline fraction,
(c) contacting said middle distillate with a hydrotreatmcnt
catalyst, under hydrotreatmcnt conditions, and frac-
tionating the hydrotreatmcnt product to separately
obtain a gasoline fraction and a heavier fraction,
(d) contacting the heavier fraction, obtained in step (c),
with a hydrocracking catalyst, under hydrocracking
conditions, and fractionating the hydropracking prod-
uct to obtain a gasoline cut called "E", and
(e) feeding the gasoline cut "E" to step (a) to be admixed
with said naphtha.
4,435,275
HYDROCRACKING PROCESS FOR AROMATICS
PRODUCTION
Walter R. Derr, Voorhees, and Michael S. Sarii, Haddonfleld,
both of N.J., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York,
Filed May 5, 1982, Ser. No. 375,075
Int. a.3 ClOG 47/16. 65/02
U.S. a 208-89 14 Claims
t«^Ht
1. A process for manufacturing gasoline from a feed charge
selected from residual oils of the steam-cracking and catalytic
cracking units, oils obtained by hydroliquefaction of coal and
oils recovered from bituminous sands and shales, in which
process and the feed charge is fractionated and at least the two
following fractions are recovered separately:
a naphtha comprising at least 50% of constituents distilling
1. A hydrocracking process of improved distillate selectivity
which comprises:
(i) passing a hydrocarbon feedstock comprising a heavy gas
oil having an initial boiling point of at least 340* C. con-
taining nitrogenous and sulfurous impurities over a hydro-
treating catalyst in the presence of hydrogen at elevated
temperature and at a pressure of not more than 7000 kPa
to hydrotreat the feedstock,
(ii) passing the hydrotreated feedstock without intermediate
separation or liquid recycle over a hydrocracking caulyst
in the presence of hydrogen at elevated temperature and
at a pressure of not more than 7000 kPa to hydrocrack the
feedstock at a volume conversion of less than 50 percent
to produce a distillate boiling range product.
278
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435^6
METHOD OF TREATING HEAVY OIL
Saboro Mattuiniya, Chiba; Koichi Washimi, Tokorozawa, and
Tsuneo Tai^i, Chiba, all of Japan, assignors to Toyo Engineer-
ing Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 416,394
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 9, 1982, 57-57993
Int. a.3 ClOG 55/04
U.S. a. 208—96 10 Claims
4,435,278
HYDROPROCESSING WITH A CATALYST HAVING
BIMODAL PORE DISTRIBUTION
Hong C. Chen, No?ato, Calif., assignor to Chezon Research Co.,
San Francisco, Calif.
FUed Jan. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 158,017
Int. a.J ClOG 45/06. 47/20
VJS. Q. 208—251 H 15 Claims
1. In a process of treating heavy oil, in which a gas and a
volatile oil fraction produced by thermal decomposition of
petroleum heavy oil are distilled therefrom, the residue of the
thermal decomposition is withdrawn in a liquid state and then
is brought into contact with an extraction solvent comprising a
part of said volatile oil fraction to extract the component of
said thermal decomposition residue that is soluble in said ex-
traction solvent, and then an extraction residue is separated as
solid particles from said extraction solvent, the improvement
which comprises: fractionating said volatile oil fraction used as
said solvent into two or more sub-fractions having different
boiling point ranges from each other on condensing the vola-
tile oil fraction in a fractionating column, and contacting said
sub-fractions with said thermal decomposition residue in suc-
cession according to the boiling point ranges thereof, begin-
ning with the fraction having the highest boiling point range
and proceeding with the remaining fractions in descending
order of boiling point ranges, to thereby extract the component
soluble in said extraction solvent.
4,435,277
PROCESS FOR THE HYDROTREATMENT OF HEAVY
HYDROCARBONS IN THE PRESENCE OF REDUCED
METALS
Chan T. Dinh, Le Vesinet; Alain Desvard, La Celle Saint Qoud;
Yves Jacquin, Sevres, and Germain Martino, Poissy, all of
France, assignors to Institut Francais du Petrole, Rueil-Mal-
maison, France
FUed Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368,531
Claims priority, appUcation France, Apr. 15, 1981, 81 07750
Int. a.3 ClOG 45/08. 47/02. 47/12
UA a. 208—108 15 Claims
1. A process for hydrotreating a heavy hydrocarbon charge
containing sulfur and asphaltenes, in the liquid phase, compris-
ing contacting said charge with hydrogen, at a temperature of
250'-500' C. and a pressure of 20-350 bars, in the presence of
a preformed catalyst prepared by reacting at least one transi-
tion metal organic compound with at least one organic alumi-
num compound, in a hydrocarbon solvent which is substan-
tially free of asphaltenes, said transition metal being titanium,
zirconium, vanadium, chromium, molybdenum, tungsten, man-
ganese, rhenium, iron, ruthenium, cobalt, nickel, copper, zinc
or tin.
8-
"i w
ti
\\*
.- <-
5 -
t
0
0 c
CATALTST DESKitUTlON
1. A process for hydroprocessing a hydrocarbonaceous
feedstock containing constitutents boiling above 350* C. com-
prising contacting said feedstock with hydrogen under hydro-
processing conditions with a catalyst composition comprising
a rigidly interconnected pack containing inorganic matrix
oxide which consists essentially of silica, alumina, or mixtures
thereof, and about 10-95% fluid catalytic cracking catalyst
microspheroids, based upon the total weight of said matrix
oxide and said microspheroids, said microspheroids compris-
ing fresh or used fluid catalytic cracking catalyst having a
mean diameter within the range of 50-70 microns, said pack
characterized by a pore volume of at least 0.15 cc per cc, at
least about 30% of said pore volume present as pores having
diameters within the range of 50-250 Angstroms and at least
about 5% of said pore volume present as pores having diame-
ters greater than 1000 Angstroms, said pack containing 0.5-20
weight percent as metal of a Group VIE metal, metal oxide, or
metal sulfide.
4,435,279
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONVERTING OIL
FEEDS
Lloyd E. Busch; Charles W. Palmeter; Gerald O. Henderson,
and William M. Rice, aU of Ashland, Ky., assignors to Ash-
land OU, Inc., Ashland, Ky.
FUed Aug. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 411,719
Int. a.3 ClOG U/05. 47/16
U.S. a. 208—111 14 Claims
1. A method for upgrading crude oils and residual portions
of crude oils comprising carbometallic impurities to produce
gasoline and lower boiling components which
A. passing a suspension of hot regenerated catalyst particles
at a temperature in the range of 1300° to 1600* F. in a wet
gaseous product of catalytic conversion comprising Cs
and lower boiling components upwardly from the bottom
portion of a riser contact zone;
B. contacting the suspension thus formed in a downstream
portion of the riser with a residual portion of crude oil to
provide the residual oil with a residence time in the riser
reaction zone in the range of 0.5 or less up to about 6
seconds and sufficient to obtain vaporous products of
catalytic conversion comprising substantial yields of gaso-
line boiling range components;
C. initially separating said suspension of catalyst particles
and vaporous products by imparting a greater momentum
to said catalyst particles than said hydrocarbon vapors
prior to discharge from the riser open upper end;
D. substantially enhancing the separation of hydrocarbon
vapors from catalyst particles of greater momentum dis-
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
279
charged from the risir open end by establishing a zone of
reduced pressure ad/acent the riser open end comprising
hydrocarbon vaport separated from catalyst particles by
momentum difTerential; and
E. withdrawing hydrocarbon vapors from said zone of re-
duced pressure in the substantial absence of catalyst parti-
cle entrainment.
4 435 280
HYDROCRACKING OF HEAVY HYDROCARBON OILS
WITH HIGH PITCH CONVERSION
Ramaswami Ranganathan, Regina; David J. Patmore, Ottawa,
and Adolfo E. Silva, Calgary, all of Canada, assignors to Her
Migesty the Queen in right of Canada, as represented by the
Minister of Energy, Ottawa, Canada
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,683
Qaims priority, application Canada, Oct. 7, 1981, 387463
Int. a.3 ClOG 47/02
U.S. a. 208—112 11 Qaims
1. A process for hydrocracking a heavy hydrocarbon oil
containing a substantial portion of pitch which boils above
524' C, which comprises:
(a) passing a slurry feed of said heavy hydrocarbon oil and
from about 0.01-60 wt.% of carbonaceous additive parti-
cles in the presence of hydrogen upwardly through a
confmed vertical hydrocracking zone, said hydrocracking
zone being maintained at a temperature between about
350° and 500* C, a pressure of at least 3.5 MPa and a space
velocity of up to 4 volumes of hydrocarbon oil per hour
per volume of hydrocracking zone capacity,
(b) removing from the top of said hydrocracking zone a
vaporous eflluent comprising hydrogen and vaporous
hydrocarbons and being substantially free of pitch and
metals, and
(c) removing from the remaining liquid in the hydrocracking
zone a drag stream comprising carbonaceous additive,
metals and any unconverted pitch, the products coming
off at the top of the reactor conuining substantially only
vaporous hydrocarbons and the drag stream containing
substantially all of the liquid material produced during the
hydrocracking whereby a pitch conversion of over 90% is
achieved.
4,435,281
CATALYTIC CRACKING WITH REDUCED EMISSION
OF NOXIOUS GAS
lacovos A. Vasalos, Thessaloniki, Greece, assignor to Standard
Oil Company (Indiana), Chicago, lU.
Filed Sep. IS, 1980, Ser. No. 187,613
Int. a.3 ClOG 11/ 18: BOIJ i7/14
U.S. a. 208—113 20 Qaims
1. A process for the fluidized catalytic cracking of a hydro-
carbon feedstock cont%iping organic sulfur compounds which
comprises:
(a) cracking said feedstock in a reaction zone through
contact with a particulate cracking catalyst;
(b) separating cracking products from cracking catalyst
which is deactivated by sulfur-containing coke deposits
and passing said deactivated cracking catalyst to a strip-
ping zone;
(c) contacting the deactivated cracking catalyst with an
oxygen-containing gas in said stripping zone at a tempera-
ture in the range from about 550* to about 700* C. and
reacting the oxygen with said sulfur-conuining coke de-
posits to form products which include sulfur-containing
gases, wherein the amount of oxygen introduced into said
stripping zone is effective to remove at least about 10
weight percent of the sulfur content and less than about 30
weight percent of the carbon content of said sulfur-con-
taining coke deposits, and wherein said weight percent of
the sulfur content removed is greater than said weight
percent of the carbon content removed;
(d) withdrawing from the stripping zone cracking catalyst
which is deactivated by modified coke deposits having a
reduced sulfur content and passing said catalyst from the
stripping zone to a regeneration zone;
(e) removing said modified coke deposits from the deacti-
vated cracking catalyst in said regeneration zone by burn-
ing with an oxygen-conuining regeneration gas, thereby
regenerating and heating the cracking catalyst;
(0 recycling a stream of hot regenerated cracking caulyst
from the regeneration zone to said stripping zone in an
amount which is effective to maintain the temperature in
said stripping zone within the range from about 550* to
about 700* C. and to provide a recycle ratio of hot regen-
erated cracking catalyst to deactivated cracking catalyst
within the range from about 0.05 to about 1.0; and
(g) withdrawing regenerated cracking caulyst from the
regeneration zone and passing a stream of said regenerated
cracking catalyst to the reaction zone.
280
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435^2
CATALYTIC CRACKING USING A CRACKING
CATALYST IN ADMIXTURE WITH PARTICLES OF
PLATINUM GROUP METAL OR RHENIUM ON A
SUBSTRATE REGENERATED TO UP TO ABOUT 0.1%
COKE
Ralph J. Bertolacini, Lisle Township, DuPage County, 111., and
William L. Forsythe, Jr., Munster, Ind., assignors to Standard
Oil Company, (Indiana), Chicago, 111.
Division of Ser. No. 225,712, Jan. 16, 1981, Pat. No. 4,341,660,
which is a division of Ser. No. 158,613, Jun. 11, 1980, Pat. No.
4,341,623, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 963,991, Nov. 27,
1978, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 664,057,
Mar. 4, 1976, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 447,753, Mar. 4, 1974, abandoned. This application Apr. 19,
1982, Ser. No. 369,500
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 27,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 ClOG 11/18. 11/05: BOIJ 23/96. 29/38
U.S. a. 208—113 7 Qaims
1. A process for the fluidized catalytic cracking of higher
molecular weight hydrocarbon to produce gasoline or distil-
late fuel range hydrocarbon comprising:
(a) contacting in a cracking zone said higher molecular
weight hydrocarbon with a cracking catalyst which be-
comes deactivated with coke deposits while being em-
ployed in said cracking, and thereby producing gasoline
or distillate fuel range hydrocarbon;
(b) withdrawing coked cracking catalyst particles from said
cracking zone, said catalyst particles being in admixture
with particles containing platinum group metal or rhe-
nium oxidation promoter supported on a substrate;
(c) contacting said mixed particles in a regeneration zone
with an oxygen-containing regeneration gas stream in
excess of that required for substantially complete combus-
tion of carbon monoxide formed and substantially com-
plete burning of coke from said particles to provide efflu-
ent gas containing up to about 1 volume % carbon monox-
ide and regenerated catalyst particles having up to about
0. 1 % coke, the amount of said oxidation promoter being
effective to enhance the oxidation of carbon monoxide at
regeneration temperature, said amount being up to about
10 ppm based on said cracking catalyst, and the amount of
said admixture of particles being sufficient to absorb the
major amount of the heat from the combustion of said
Jarbon monoxide and burning of said coke;
(d) withdrawing from said regeneration zone oxidation pro-
moter-containing particles admixed with cracking catalyst
particles; and
(e) returning said mixture to said cracking zone wherein
cracking catalyst and said platinum group metal or rhe-
nium oxidation promoter are contacted with said higher
molecular weight hydrocarbon and said cracking is
thereby obtained.
2. The process of claim 1 wherein the substrate for said
oxidation promoter is selected from the group consisting of
silica, alumina and silica
6. The process of claim 1 whereih the substrate for said
oxidation promoter is selected from^he group consisting of
silica and alumina.
4,435,283
METHOD OF DEHYDROCYCLIZING ALKANEiS
Waldeen C. Buss, Kensington, and Thomas R. Hughes, Orinda,
both of Calif., assignors to Chevron Research Company, San
Francisco, Calif.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,572
Int. a.3 C07C 2/52: ClOG 35/06
U.S. a. 208—138 27 Qaims
1. A method of reforming hydrocarbons comprising contact-
ing said hydrocarbons with a catalyst comprising a }arge-pore
zeolite containing:
(a) at least one Group VIII metal; and
(b) an alkaline earth metal selected from the group consisting
of barium, strontium and calcium, wherein the process
conditions are adjusted so that the selectivity for n-hexane
dehydrocyclization is greater than 60%.
4,435,284
RECOVERY OF MERCURY FROM SCRAP GLASS
Herman R. Heytmeljer, Hanover, N.J., assignor to North Amer-
ican Philips Electric Corp., New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 405,478
Int. C\? B03B 1/00
U.S. a. 209—3 8 Gaims
»D0 FIIIELt OIVIDfO
POf KR TO KflCUIir
COaTtNIWTED SCRAP CltSS
tCITATE HIITWE FOR
PREKTERNIIIED TINE
KCUT MIXTURE TMOtlCK
SCtCEII TO REMOVE GLASS
REMOVE POfOER FROM
MERCURT IT SUITAUE SOIVART
1. A method for removing mercury from lamp exhaust tub-
ing or similar scrap glass comprising the steps of:
placing the mercury contaminated scrap glass in a suitable
container;
adding a predetermined amount of flnely divided sub-micron
size powder to the mercury contaminated scrap glass;
agitating the mixture of scrap glass and flnely divided pow-
der for a predetermined time to strip the mercury from the
glass;
decanting the mixture through a screen of suitable mesh to
remove the separated mercury from the glass; and
rinsing the mercury with a suitable solvent to remove the
powder from the mercury.
4,435,285
SORTING APPARATUS
Isao Okouchi; Sankichi Takahashi; Yasuteru Mukai; Katsumoto
Otake; Takuya Sasaki, all of Hitachi, and Masahiko Miyai,
Mito, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 278,994
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 30, 1980, 55-89717
Int. Q.J B03B 7/00: B07B 1/06: F28G 7/00
U.S. Q. 209—250 13 Qaims
1. A sorting apparatus for sorting bodies suspended in a
liquid according to the size of said bodies, the apparatus com-
prising: a casing having a circular cross-section and provided
with and inlet pipe through which said bodies are introduced
together with said liquid; a separation sleeve disposed at a
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
281
cent^of said casing and cooperating with an inner peripheral
surfact of said casing and deflning therebetween a swirling
passage for imparting a swirl to said liquid, said separation
sleeve having a peripheral wall in which are formed a plurality
of apertures sized and shaped to permit only the bodies smaller
than a predetermined size to pass therethrough, a discharge
pipe connected to said casing and adapted for discharging the
bodies of small sizes which have passed through said apertures
into said separation sleeve, and an outlet pipe also connected to
said casing and adapted for taking out the bodies greater than
said predetermined size.
4,435,286
LIQUID nLTER DEVICE
Robert Louboutin, Crespieres, and Michel Riotte, Garches, both
of France, assignors to Degremont, Malmaison, France
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,623
Qaims priority, application France, Jun. 25, 1981, 81 12462
Int. Q.3 BOID 23/20
U.S. Q. 210—116 8 Qaims
1. A liquid fliter device for use in nitriflcation of the liquid,
said device comprising:
an upwardly open structure having a bottom and a floor
positioned above said bottom, said bottom and said floor
deflning a chamber;
a fliter element comprising granular material supported by
said floor within said structure, liquid to be treated passing
downwardly through said granular material in contact
with a gas passing upwardly through said granular mate-
rial during normal operation, and water and gas passing
upwardly through said granular material during a washing
operation thereof;
a plurality of nozzles opening into said granular material and
having stems extending into said chamber;
said plurality of nozzles including flrst nozzles having open-
ing means for, during said normal operation, passing said
liquid from said granular material into said chamber, and
for, during said washing operation, distributing said water
and gas from said chamber into said granular material, said
opening means of each said flrst nozzle comprising an
upper oriflce and a lower slit; and
said plurality of nozzles further including second nozzles
having opening means for, during said normal operation,
distributing said gas from said chamber into said granular
material, and for, during said washing operation, distribut-
ing said water and gas from said chamber into said granu-
lar material, said opening means of each said second noz-
zle comprising an upper orifice and lower orifice means
positioned at a level above the level of said upper orifice
of said flrst nozzle.
4,435,287
APPARATUS FOR HLTRATION OF LUBRICATING OIL
FOR AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Morio Sumimoto, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki
Kaisha Sumimoto Kagaku Kenkyusho, Kanagawa, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 343,907, Jan. 29, 1982, abandoned. This
application Apr. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 486,454
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 6, 1981, 56-17166
Int. Q.3 BOID 27/10. 35/14
U.S. Q. 210-131 7 Qaims
to 17
•l *^Sw
>
1
^f
y
ki
1
^
5. An apparatus for the filtration of lubricating oil for an
internal combustion engine, comprising:
a filter element having horizontal and vertical axes, upper
and lower surfaces, and made of paper accumulated in
horizontal layers between which filtrate passes and having
a filtrate outlet passageway vertically through the center
thereof;
a body casing provided with said filter element therein;
an inlet pipe for liquid to be filtered;
an outlet pipe for filtrate, said inlet pipe and said outlet pipe
being connected to said body casing, said outlet pipe being
in communication with the flltrate outlet passageway of
said fliter element;
a pressure-receiving plate located on the upper surface of the
said fliter element such that the pressure of the liquid is
exerted thereon to compress said filter element and pro-
vided with an air and oil release hole therein, said air and
oil release hole being in communication with said filtrate
outlet passageway and smaller in area than said inlet hole
of said inlet pipe;
a replaceable cartridge case, said filter element and said
pressure-receiving plate being positioned inside said re-
placeable cartridge case, said replaceable cartridge case
having upper and lower surfaces provided with an inlet
aperture for liquid to be filtered and an outlet aperture in
communication with said filtrate outlet passageway of said
filter element, respectively, and being prefiiled with lubri-
cating oil and additive;
a supporting plate abutting the lower surface of said filter
element;
a connecting rod abutting the lower surface of said support-
ing plate and passing through the filtrate outlet passage
way of said filter element and through the air and oil
release hole in said pressure receiving plate; and
a stopper attached to the upper end of said connecting rod,
holding said pressure receiving plate against said filter
element, and allowing air to pass from and oil to pass into
the filtrate outlet passage way when said filter element is
compressed.
1040 O.G.— 10
282
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,288
EXPRESSING PLATE ASSEMBLY FOR HLTER PRESS
Muneyukj Miyano, Saluu, Japan, assignor to Kurita Machinery
Manufacturing Company Limited, Osaka, Japan
FUed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 392,768
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1981, 56-161779
Int. a.3 BOID 25/12
U.S. a. 210-227 4 Claims
mum allowable transmembrane pressure difTerence for
said membrane;
(d) repeating steps (b) and (c) in at least each intermediate
unit;
1. In an expressing plate for a plate-type filter press wherein
flexible expressing sheets cover the opposite surfaces of a rigid
core plate, the core plate has a peripheral frame portion, ex-
pressing fluid being fed between the core plate and expressing
sheets, and aligned filtrate discharge openings are provided in
the peripheral portions of the core plate and expressing sheets,
the improvement comprising, fitting recesses in the opposite
surfaces of said core plate around each said opening therein, a
raised portion around each said opening in each expressing
sheet on the inner face thereof facing said core plate and hav-
ing a peripheral shape substantially conforming to that of said
adjacent fitting recess to interfit therein, a seating ring recess
around each said opening in each expressing sheet on the outer
side thereof and smaller than said adjacent fitting recess, seat-
ing rings each having an opening therethrough and a periph-
eral shape substantially conforming to that of the adjacent
seating ring recess and interfitting therein so that a pair of
seating rings is disposed at each core plate opening one on each
side of said core plate with said seating ring openings aligned
with said core plate openings, means to clamp each said pair of
seating rings together to clamp said expressing sheets to said
core plate and maintain alignment of said openings, a plurality
of ridges defining grooves therebetween which serve as filtrate
passages on the outer face of each expressing sheet, and filtrate
passage grooves on a part of the outer face of each seating ring
substantially aligned with said grooves on said expressing
sheets to be substantially continuous therewith.
^(e) withdrawing permeate from each unit; and
(0 recovering concentrate containing solutes, colloidal par-
ticles or suspended matter from the last serially connected
unit.
4 435 290
PROCESS FOR THE TEMPORARY STORAGE OF
RECYCLABLE LIQUID WASTES IN UNDERGROUND
SALT CAVERNS
Walter Lindorfer, Kassel, and Wilhelm Jan-Held, Staufenberg,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Wintershall AG,
Kassel, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 425,900
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 22.
1981, 3141885
Int. a.3 C02F 1/66
U.S. a. 210-708 21 Qaims
1. A process for temporary storage of recyclable pumpable
liquid waste in an underground salt-enclosed cavern, which is
provided with pipelines for filling and emptying, comprising
the steps of:
(a) introducing said liquid waste into said cavern;
(b) neutralizing acid components in said liquid waste before,
during or after step (a);
(c) allowing said neutralized liquid waste to stand in said
cavern in order to separate into two liquid phases of differ-
ing specific gravities; and
(d) pumping out the phase having the lower specific gravity
leaving the phase with the higher specific gravity.
4,435 289
SERIES ULTRAnLTRATION WITH PRESSURIZED
PERMEATE
Barry R. Breslau, Action, Mass., assignor to Romicon, Inc.,
Wobum, Mass.
FUed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,743
Int. a.3 BOID n/00, 13/00
U.S. a. 210-637 14 Qaims
1. A method for separating solutes, colloidal particles or
suspended matter from a solution or suspension of such matter
by ultrafiltration which comprises:
(a) connecting multiple ultrafiltration membrane containing
separatory units in series flow configuration, thereby
providing, at least, a first unit, a last unit and optionally
intermediate units;
(b) introducing a solution or suspension to be separated into
the first unit at a pressure exceeding the maximum allow-
able transmembrane pressure difference for said mem-
brane;
(c) concurrently applying a back pressure on the permeate
side of said membrane to produce a transmembrane pres-
sure difference m said first unit not exceeding the maxi-
4,435 291
BREAKPOINT CHLORINATION CONTROL SYSTEM
Theodore N. Matsko, Richmond Heights, Ohio, assignor to The
Babcock A Wilcox Company, New Orleans, La.
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360^60
Int. a.5 C02F 1/76
U.S. a. 210—739 7 ciainw
1. A method for the breakpoint chlorination of waste water
containing an amount of ammonia to be oxidized comprising:
supplying the waste water at a selected flow rate to a mixer
tank;
measuring the amount of ammonia in the supplied waste
water;
initially dosing the waste water in the mixing tank with a
first amount of chlorine which is a selected multiple of the
measured ammonia amount by weight;
supplying the dosed waste water from the mixing tank to a
reaction tank where chlorine and ammonia react;
supplying the waste water out of the reaction tank;
measuring the residual chlorine in the waste water coming
from the reaction tank;
calculating the derivative of the residual chlorine with re-
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
283
spect to the amount of chlorine added to the waste water;
and
!!ir^hH->' ^li^rTnu lilfgr-^^
4,435,292
PORTABLE METHOD FOR DECONTAMINATING
EARTH
James L. Kirk, Findlay, Ohio, and Robert J. Ohneck, Lambert-
ville, Mich., assignors to KBI Corp., Findlay, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 115,992, Jan. 28, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,345
Int. a.3 C02F 1/74
U.S. a. 210-747 17 Qaims
imiTaaLi i
/>\ HANT lbrii«iwt.i y
riLTf Rl I ,
(VSf.) ("•■»'•-)
-J
. MHOTI
1. A method for decontaminating the soil below an area of
earth which has been contaminated by a spill by means of a
flexible portable reversible closed fluid circulating system,
comprising the steps of
(A) testing the area for determining the boundaries of the
contamination,
(B) inseriing a plurality of relatively closely spaced perfo-
rated pipes around and into said soil below said area,
(C) circulating a flushing fluid under positive pressure into
said pipes around the determined contaminated area,
(D) simultaneously under negative pressure removing said
circulating flushing fluid which contains contaminants
from said pipe in said determined contaminated area,
(E) from at least a portion of the removed circulating fluid
which contains contaminants, and
(F) injecting the decontaminated flushing fluid back into said
soil under said positive pressure to maintain said closed
fluid circulating system.
4,435,293
PARTICLE WASHING SYSTEM AND METHOD OF USE
Henry A. Graham, Jr., Annandale; Johnna B. Hawk, Rocky
HUl, and Rosemary K. ChachowskI, Manville, all of N.J.,
assignors to Ortho Diagnostic Systems Inc., Raritan, NJ.
Filed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,267
Int. Q.J BOID 21/26: BOIL 11/00
U.S. a. 210—772 14 Qaims
with the derivative being negative dosing the mixing tank
with a second amount of chlorine according to an induced
signal which adds chlorine until the derivative becomes
positive.
1. A method for washing and collecting particles contained
in a first fluid for use with a system comprising (1) an outer
zone for containing a wash solution and (2) an inner zone
insertable into said outer zone and having a chamber to which
the first fluid may be added, said chamber having a bottom
wall with an orifice for providing communication between the
first fluid placed in said inner zone chamber and the wash
solution contained in said outer zone, said method comprising
the steps of:
placing in said outer zone a wash solution having a density at
the minimum substantially equal to that of the first fluid,
and at the maximum no greater than that of the particles;
adding to said inner zone the first fluid containing the parti-
cles to be washed and collected;
inserting said inner zone into said outer zone containing the
wash solution whereby an air bubble is trapped at the
orifice;
applying force for displacing said air bubble and for moving
the particles from the first fluid through the orifice and the
wash solution to substantially the bottom of the outer
zone; and
removing said first fluid, said inner zone, and said wash
solution.
4,435,294
POLYCYCLIC PYROMELLITATES AND USE THEREOF
ON POLYESTERS AND POLYAMIDES
Bryce C. Oxenrider, Florham Park, and David J. Long, Stan-
hopo both of N.J., assignors to Allied Corporation, Morris
Township, Morris County, N.J.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,945
Int. a.5 C07C 153/07; D06M 13/20
U.S. Q. 252—8.6 18 Claims
1. A composition comprising a polycyclic compound of the
formula:
284
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
-continued
wherein X is independently at each occurrence — O— , — S— ,
— N(CH3)— or — NH— ; wherein A is alkyl of 2-24 carbons or
— R"— (CF2)pCF3 with R" being alkylene of 1-6 carbons and
p being an integer of 3-13, wherein R' is a monovalent radical
selected from the group consisting of — CH2CH(OH)CH2Cl,
-CH2CH(OH)CH2Br, -CH(CH20H)(CH2C1), — CH(C-
H20H)(CH2Br). -(CH2);„C1, -(CH2)mBr, -CH(CH2C1)2,
— CH(CH2Br)2,
O
— CH2CH— CH2
and — (CH2)^— Si(OR"')3, with m being an integer of 1-8, q
being an integer of 1-8, and R'" being alkyl of 1-3 carbons;
wherein R is a divalent radical selected from the group consist-
ing of alkylene of 2-6 carbons, — CH2CH(CH2C1),
-CH2C(CH2C1)2CH2-, -CH2CH=3CHCH2-, 1,3-pheny-
lene and 1,4-phenylene; n is an integer of 0-20; or mixtures of
such polycyclic compounds with different values of n or of
such polycyclic compounds with different values of n and with
the monocyclic compound:
XA
I
OssC
R'X— C
11
o
XA
I
c«o
C— XR'
II
o
4,435,295
SULFONATE FOR WATERFLOODING
Olaf M, Stokke, and Roy C. Sias, both of Ponca City, Okla.,
assignors to Conoco Inc., Ponca City, Okla.
Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 379,210
Int. a.3 C09K 7/02: E21B 43/16
U.S. a. 252—8.55 D 6 Oaims
1. An improved sulfonate composition for use in aqueous
phase stable waterflooding systems comprising
(a) from about 80 to about 20 parts per weight of monoalkyl
benzene having an average molecular weight of from
about 400 to about 490, together with
(b) from about 20 to about 80 parts by weight of n-alkyl
aromatic compounds having an average molecular weight
of from about 325 to about 385, wherein the mixture is
sulfonated to a nonsulfonate/sulfonate ratio of about 0. 10
to about 0.25.
from 2 to 20%, by weight of total composition of a clay
thickener;
from 2 to 12% wt., by weight of total composition of an
alkali metal borate as extreme pressure additive; and
a combination of an olefin polymer selected from the group
consisting of atactic polypropylene and polyisobutylene
and a light coloured particulate mineral which is zinc
oxide, as tackifier and filler, the polymer and particulate
material each being present in an amount of from 3 to 12%
wt. by weight of total composition and the polymer; par-
ticulate mineral ratio being from 1.5:1 to 1:1.5 by weight.
4 435 297
CARBOXYLIC AOD DERIVATIVES OF ALKANOL
TERTIARY MONOAMINES
John W. Forsberg, Mentor-on-the-Lake, Ohio, assignor to The
Lubrizol Corporation, Wickliffe, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 946,294, Sep. 27, 1978, Pat. No.
4,329,249. This application Mar. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 352,695
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 11,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q\? ClOM 1/32. 3/26
U.S. a. 252-34.7 171 Oaims
1. A composition comprising: water; and dispersed in said
water nitrogen-containing, phosphorus-free carboxylic acid
derivative made by reaction, at a temperature in the range of
about 30* to the decomposition temperature of one or more of
the reaction components, of (A) at least one carboxylic acid
acylating ageant with (B) at least one alkanol tertiary mono-
amine, said acylating agent having at least one hydrocarbyl-
based substituent of about 20 to about 500 carbon atoms and
said monoamine (B) having one hydroxyl group and a total of
up to about 40 carbon atoms, said water being provided in an
effective amount to disperse said derivative in said water.
4,435,296
LUBRICATING GREASE
Christopher P. Brooks, Addlestone; Stanley C. Dodson, Leather-
head, and Robert H. Newman, Weybridge, all of England,
assignors to The British Petroleum Company Limited, Lon-
don, England
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,607
Int. a.3 ClOM 7/30. 1/10
U.S. a. 252-28 4 Claims
I. A lubricating grease, suitable for use as an open gear
lubricant, comprising:
a lubricating base oil;
4,435,298
AMMONIUM SALTS OF POLYMALEIC AODS, AND
THEIR USE AS CORROSION INHIBITORS IN MINERAL
OILS
Knut Oppenlaender, Ludwigshafen; Karl Stork, Lampertheim;
Hans-Henning Vogel, Frankenthal; Erich Schwartz, Ludwigs-
hafen, and Claus P. Jakob, Viernheim, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigsha-
fen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,765
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 23,
1980, 3039977
Int. a.J ClOM 1/32: COIC 87/00: ClOG 9/12
U.S. a. 252—34 6 Qaims
1. An ammonium salt having an equivalents ratio of 1:1 of a
polymaleic acid having a molecular weight of from 200 to
1,500 and an amine component, of the formula
R'— N— r3
where Rl and R^ are identical or different and are hydrogen,
C9-C20-alkyl or C9-C2o-alkenyl and R^ is C9-C20-alkyl or
C9-C2o-alkenyl.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
28S
4,435,299
PREPARATION OF HIGH DROPPING POINT LITHIUM
COMPLEX SOAP GREASE
Don A. Carley, Houston; Arnold C. Witte, Jr., Port Neches;
William B. Green, Nederland, and Kermit W. Doerr, Katy, all
of Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,744
Int. a.J ClOM 5/14
U.S. O. 252—41 20 Oaims
1. A process for preparing a lithium soap grease having a
dropping point above 500* F. which comprises the steps of:
(a) dissolving a C12 to C24 hydroxy fatty acid and a C4 to
C|2 aliphatic dicarboxylic acid in approximately a 3:1 to
0.5:1 mole ratio range in a lubricating oil to form an oil-
acid mixture in which the amount of oil employed com-
prises about 30 to 50 weight percent of the total amount of
oil employed in the finished composition;
(b) adjusting the oil and acid mixture to a temperature below
about the boiling temperature of water;
(c) adding slowly at a controlled rate of below about 0.30
Ibs./minute a concentrated aqueous solution of approxi-
mately 8 to 10 weight percent of lithium hydroxide in an
amount slightly in excess of that required to neutralize the
acids;
(d) maintaining the reaction conditions for a period of time
sufficient to obtain substantially complete saponification
between the fatty acids and lithium hydroxide;
(e) dehydrating the mixture of lubricating oil and lithium
complex soap;
(0 heating the mixture until it is uniformly at a temperature
of from about 390* F. to about 430* F.;
(g) rapidly cooling the mixture to about 375* F. or below by
quenching it with approximately 5 to 25 weight percent of
the total amount of lubricating oil employed in the fin-
ished composition;
(h) incorporating the remainder of the lubricating oil into the
grease composition.
4 435 300
DETERGENT COMPOSITIONS
Jacob J. Guth, Upper Black Eddy, Pa.; Diane L. Spilatro, Pis-
cataway, and Robert J. Verdicchio, Succasunna, both of N.J.,
assignors to Johnson ft Johnson Baby Products Company,
New Brunswick, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 241,874, Mar. 9, 1981,
abandoned. This application May 5, 1982, Ser. No. 375,074
Int. 0.5 CUD 1/10. 1/65. 1/88. 1/94
U.S. O. 252—117 9 Oaims
1. A low irritating detergent and cleansing composition
wherein the active ingredients consist essentially of
(a) from about 1 to 50% by weight of an amphoteric-fatty
acid complex of the formula
r ? f'
R,-C-0
H A2
wherein R| is alkyl or substituted alkyl containing from
about 5 to 17 carbon atoms and mixtures thereof; R2 is
alkyl containing from about 6 to 18 carbon atoms and
mixtures thereof or alkyl amido of the formula
o z
II I I
R3— C— N— Y-|—
atoms; and Y is alkylene containing from 2 to 4 carbon
atoms;«
Ai and A2 are the same or different and at least one of Ai and
A2 are selected from the group of anionic salt moieties
consisting of the following:
— CH2CH2— COOX],
— CH2— CCX)X),
— CH2CHOH— CH2-SO3X],
-CH2-CHOH-CH2-OPO3X],
wherein X is a water soluble cation and n is an integer of
1 or 2 with the proviso that if only one of A| and A2 are
selected from the anionic salt moieties above the other is
lower alkyl or lower hydroxyalkyl conuining from 1 to 4
carbon atoms; and
(b) from about 2 to 50% by weight of an anionic surfactant
selected from the group consisting of alkyl sulfosuccinates
of the formula
O
II
R— B— C— CHCH2COOX'
OSO3X'
alkyl ether carboxylates, a-sulfo fatty acids of the formula
O
N
R— CH— C— OX'
I
SO3X'
alkyl succinates, acyl sarcosinates and fatty acid protein
condensates; wherein R is alkyl from 8 to 17 carbon
atoms, X' is hydrogen or a water soluble cation and B is O,
N or O — C2 — CH20)m wherein m is an integer of from 1
to 5; and wherein the amphoteric-fatty acid complex and
the anionic surfactant are in the ratio of from about 1 :4 to
4:1.
wherein R3 is alkyl containing from about 5 to 17 carbon
atoms, Z is H or lower alkyl containing from 1 to 4 carbon
4,435,301
PREPARATION OF OVERBASED MAGNESIUM
PHENATES
Cecil G. Brannen, Wayne Township, DuPage County, and Mack
W. Hunt, Naperville, both of III., assignors to Standard Oil
Company, (Indiana), Chicago, III.
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,823
Int. 0.5 ClOM 1/40
U.S. O. 252—33.2 12 Oaims
1. A process for the preparation of an overbased magnesium
phenate composition which comprises:
(a) reacting magnesium oxide in a substantially inert liquid
diluent with: (i) at least one phenolic material selected
from the group consisting of oil-soluble hydrocarbyl-sub-
stituted phenols and oil-soluble sulfurized hydrocarbyl-
substituted phenols, (ii) an oil-soluble ammonium sulfo-
nate, (iii) a monohydric alcohol of from 1 to 4 carbon
atoms, and (iv) water, wherein the amount of magnesium
oxide is in excess of the stoichiometric amount required
for conversion of said sulfonate and phenolic material to
neutral magnesium salts, and the ratio of equivalents of
phenolic material to equivalents of ammonium sulfonate is
from about 5 to about 30;
(b) removing substantially all of said alcohol from the prod-
uct of (a); and
(c) contacting the product of (b) with carbon dioxide at a
temperature in the range from about 0* to about 120* C.
286
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,302
CONCENTRATING AND RECLAIMING MAGNETIC
FLUIDS
George W. Reimere, Bunuville, and Sanaa E. Khalafalla, Min-
neapolis, both of Minn., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Interior,
Washington, D.C.
Filed May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 383,060
Int. a.3 HOIF 1/25. 1/00: ClOM 3/00; C09D 11/00
U.S. a. 252-62.51 5 Qaims
1. A method for concentrating a dilute dispersion of mag-
netic particles in water, said dispersion having a concentration
of magnetic particles of about 0. 1 to 5 grams per liter and
having been formed by dilution of a saturated fatty acid-stabil-
ized magnetic fluid, consisting essentially of:
(a) adding hydrochloric acid to the dilute dispersion in an
amount sufficient to flocculate the magnetic particles,
(b) separating the flocculated magnetic particles from the
supernatant liquid, and
(c) admixing the flocculated magnetic particles with an
aqueous ammonia solution of a concentration, and in an
amount, sufficient to redisperse the magnetic particles and
form a magnetic fluid having the desired concentration of
magnetic particles.
4,435,303
DESCALING COMPOSITION
Khodabandeh Abadi, 5719 N. Camino Del Conde, Tucson, Ariz.
85718
Filed Jan. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 455,298
Int. a.3 C02F 5/08. 5/10; C23F 11/00
U.S. CI. 252-80 33 Qaims
CONCENTRATION (%)
0 I 10 1 15 120 1 25 1 50 hOO
TIME ELAPSED IKt..)
SCALE CHIP WEIGHT iftm,)
1
0
J.5
T.B
7.5
7.6
8.3
3.2
5.2
'
3.5
T.5
'.0
7.2
8.2
-
2
3.S
M
6.7
7.0
7.9
-
J 3.4
«.9
6.6
6.9
7.8
4.9
5.0
4
3.4
S.9
6.6
6.7
7.6
4.7
4.6
e
3.4
6.3
•.5
6.7
7.3
4.7
4.6
9 3.4
6.3
6.4
6.8
7.3
4.6
4.6
wherein R is hydrogen or an alkyl group of 1-4 carbon
atoms and x is an integer of from 1 to 3;
(d) zinc;
(e) hydroxyacetic acid; wherein the ratio by weight of (d) to
(a)+(b) is between about 9:1 and 10:1, the ratio by weight
of (a):(b):(c) is about 1:1:1 and the ratio by weight of (e) to
(a) + (b)+(c) is about 1:2.
29. A method for perparing a descaling composition com-
prising the steps of:
(a) mixing a nonionic, substituted-polyethylene oxide surfac-
tant with a mixture of zinc and an anionic fatty alcohol
metal sulfate surfactant;
(b) adding an ethanolamine of the formula
NR3_^CH2CH20H)^;
wherein R is hydrogen or an alkyl group of 1-4 carbon
atoms and x is an integer of 1-3; and
(c) adding hydroyacetic acid;
wherein the ratio by weight of zinc to the nonionic surfactant
plus the anionic surfactant is between about 9:1 and 10:1, the
ratio by weight of the nonionic surfactant to the ethanolamine
is about 1:1:1, and the ratio by weight of hydroxyacetic acid to
the nonionic surfactant plus the anionic surfactant plus the
ethanol amine is about 1:2.
4 435 304
SULFUR BASED METAL CLEANERS
Merlin R. Lindstrom; Robert M. Parlman, and James B. Kim-
ble, all of Bartiesville, Okla., assignors to Phillips Petroleum
Company, Bartiesville, Okla.
Filed Nov. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 441,586
Int. C1.3 CUD 7/06
U.S. a. 252-156 Saaims
1. An aqueous composition useful for cleaning metal surfaces
consisting essentially of a Group lA or IIA metal hydroxide
present in an amount from about 0. 1 to about 5.0 weight per-
cent of the composition and at least one active metal cleaning
ingredient of the formula
r « 1
X— R— S— C— S-h-M
^ 10-.
6 7 8 9
CONTACT TIME (HOUSS)
wherein R can be any hydrocarbylene radical having 1 to 6
carbon atoms, X is H or OH, M is any group lA or IIA metal
and n is the valence of M present in an amount from about 0.25
to about 10.0 weight percent of the composition.
1. A composition comprising
(a) an anionic fatty alcohol metal sulfate surfactant;
(b) a nonionic, substituted poly(ethylene oxide) surfactant;
(c) an ethanol amine of the formula
MR3.x(CH2CH20H),;
4,435,305
CHEMICAL FORMULATION FOR RECLAIMING SILK
SCREENS
Skevos N. Tsoukalas, 1426 Womack Rd., Dunwoody, Ga. 30338,
and John H. Andros, 3018-D Spring Hill Rd., Smyrna, Ga.
30080
Filed Jan. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 460,669
Int. a J CUD 7/06
U.S. a. 252-158 9 Claims
1. A method for removing hardened stencil emulsion and ink
from the surface of a silk screen comprising the steps of: con-
tacting said silk screen at ambient temperatures for a period of
time sufficient to loosen said stencil and ink from said silk
screen surface with a solution of a non-aqueous formulation
consisting essentially of approximately 20-60% by weight of a
Ci-C 12 alcohol, 2-10% by weight of an alkali metal hydroxide
and 20-60% by weight of a hydrocarbon solvent and separat-
ing said loosened stencil and ink from said silk screen surface
by a high pressure water jet stream.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
287
4,435,306
STABLE COAL-WATER SUSPENSIONS AND THEIR
PREPARATION
Geza L. Kovacs, Baltimore, Md., assignor to Koal, Inc.,
Baltimore, Md.
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,545
Int. a.J ClOL 1/32
U.S. a. 252—173 17 Qalms
1. A non-settling fuel composition consisting essentially of a
particulate suspension of coal, water and a fatty acid soap, the
coal concentration in said composition being at least 50% by
weight and the soap concentration in the water phase of said
composition being above about 5% by weight, said soap fur-
ther characterized in having sufTicient free base to neutralize
all acid associated with or released by said coal.
4,435,307
DETERGENT CELLULASE
Peder O. Barbesgaard, Farum; Georg W. Jensen, Bagsvaerd, and
Poul Holm, Bronshoj, all of Denmark, assignors to Novo
Industri A/S, Denmark
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,275
Claims priority, application Denmark, Apr. 30, 1980, 1872/80
Int. a.3 D06M 15/02
U.S. a. 252—174.12 14 Oaims
' ' ' ' I I t 1 1 > r 1 : 1 T I t I 1 1 1 1 r-^
10 20 3010 SO (0 % to •Oa0 1IOi2O1IIUO1SOC0T?0ia0l9O2OO?10220;3O2t0
FHACTICN NUMBER
4,435,309
METHOD OF LIQUIFYING WAXY MATERIALS
Roy F. House, Houston, Tex., assignor to Venture Innovations,
Inc., Lafayette, La.
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,703
Int. a.J BOIJ 13/00
U.S. a. 252—314 9 Qaims
1. A method of liquifying an organic material which is a
waxy solid at ambient temperature, which comprises:
(a) admixing a solvent with said organic material at a tem-
perature such that a solution is formed;
(b) cooling the solution to a temperature such that a solid or
semi-solid, viscous material is formed; and
(c) shearing said solid or semi-solid material to produce
particles of said organic material suspended in said sol-
vent; wherein the concentration of said solvent is suffi-
cient to produce a liquid as a result of step (c) and to
produce a solid or semi-solid, viscous material as a result
of step (b); wherein said organic material is selected from
the group consisting of amines, amine salts, quaternary
ammonium salts, and mixtures thereof; and wherein said
solvent is selected from the group consisting of water,
alcohols having from one to five carbon atoms, and mix-
tures thereof.
4,435,310
MANUFACTURE OF MULTICOLORED DETERGENT
BARS HAVING SINUSOIDAL STRIPING
Michael R. Lowry, Chester, England, assignor to Lever Brothers
Company, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 195,209, Oct. 17, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 12,619, Feb. 16, 1979,
abandoned. This application Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,854
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 20, 1978,
6653/78
Int. Cl.^ CUD 9/44, 13/08. 13/18. 17/00
U.S. a. 252—370 4 Qaims
1. A harshness reducing detergent additive for a main wash
detergent composition, comprising
a non-dusting granulate containing a fungal cellulase pro-
ducible by a strain of Humicola insolens or Humicola grisea
var. thermoidea.
4,435,308
COMPOSITIONS BASED ON ALUMINUM
HYDROXYCHLORIDES
Maryvonne Thomas, Boulogne Billancourt, and Jean Grosbois,
L'Isle Adam, both of France, assignors to Rhone-Poulenc
Industries, Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 709,178, Jul. 27, 1976, abandoned. This
application Jun. 8, 1978, Ser. No. 913,853
Qaims priority, application France, Jul. 31, 1975, 75 23926
Int. a.3 C02F 5/10
U.S. O. 252—181 4 Qaims
1. A composition of matter comprising (i) aluminum hydrox-
ychloride, (ii) S04~^ anions in an amount of from about 0.05 to
0.3 M/gram-atom of aluminum present, and (iii) at least one
anion of an organic acid selected from the group consisting of
citric acid, sulfosalicyclic acid, pyrocatechol-3,5-disulfonic
acid, chromotropic acid and mixtures thereof, said anion form-
ing anionic or uncharged complexes with aluminum in a neu-
tral or nonacidic medium and said anion being present in an
amount of at least about 0.01 M/gram-atom of aluminum pres-
ent, and (iv) said composition exhibiting a basicity, expressed
as the ratio OH/Al, of from about 1.2:1 to 1.7:1.
1. A method of manufacturing detergent bars having curved
surface striping wherein a continuous log of a longitudinally
striped detergent mass is extruded from a nozzle and the log is
subjected to torque about the longitudinal axis at a station
spaced from the nozzle with subsequent cutting into billets and
stamping to form bars, characterized in that the torque is re-
versed to provide a reversing spiral striping on the log and at
least a half of a cycle of striping of substantially sinusoidal form
along the longitudinal axis of the bar.
4,435,311
CONTINUOUS REACnVATION OF
AMS-IB-CONTAINING CATALYST SYSTEMS
David L. Sikkenga, Wheaton, III., assignor to Standard Oil
Company (Indiana), Chicago, III.
Filed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 422,745
Int. Q.^ BOIJ 37/10
U.S. Q. 502—22 18 Qaims
1. A process to reactivate a noble metal-containing AMS-IB
crystalline borosilicate comprising contacting such catalyst
288
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
with water at reactivation conditions comprising a tempera-
ture of about 100* to about 750° C, a pressure of about 0.1 to
n-
•T Siva. x»m
WSTNTT WTEX ACOrnON
J'
TIM <M SnUM (MOIM)
about 100 atmospheres and a weight hourly space velocity of
about 0. 1 to about 40 hr- '.
4,435312
ASSOOATIONS OF BASES, RESULTING FROM THE
COMBINATION OF A LITHIUM ALKYL OR ARYL WITH
AN ALKALI METAL AMIDE OR HYDRIDE,
POLYMERIZATION PROCESS IN WHICH THEY ARE
USED, AND PRODUCT OBTAINED
Serge Lecolier, Janville sur Juine, and Serge Raynal, Draveil,
both of France, assignors to Societe Nationale des Poudres et
Explosifs, Paris, France
FUed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser, No. 340,078
Qain^ priority, application France, Jan. 19, 1981, 81 00854
Int. a.i C08F 4/48
U.S. a. 502-157 8 Claims
1. An association of bases, of the general formula:
n'RLi— n MZ
in which: n and n' are the numbers of mols of each compound,
R is an alkyl or aryl radical, M is an alkali metal which is,
sodium or potassium and Z is a hydride or an inorganic amide,
the ratio n/n' being between 0.2 and 50.
4,435,313
ELECTRODE WFTH OUTER COATING FOR EFFECTING
AN ELECTROLYTIC PROCESS AND PROTECTIVE
INTERMEDIATE COATING ON A CONDUCTIVE BASE,
AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME
Michael Katz, Geneva; Jean M. Hinden, Chambesy, and Jiirgen
F. Ganger, Le Lignon, all of Switzerland, assignors to
Diamond Shamrock Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,381
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 18, 1980,
8026830; Apr. 9, 1981, 8111257
Int. a.3 C25B Jl/16. 11/08
U.S. a. 502-101 8 Claims
1. A method of manufacturing an anode comprising a stable
outer coating effective for carrying out an electrolytic process
and a protective intermediate coating formed on an anode base
consisting essentially of titanium, characterized by the steps of:
(a) forming said protective intermediate coating by: applying
to said anode base successive layers of a homogeneous
solution
of at least one thermally decomposable compound of a
platinum group metal and an organic precursor com-
pound selected from the group consisting of polyacryl-
onitrile, polybenzoxazole and poly-p-phenylene; drying
each of said layers; and subjecting the dried layers to
heat treatment in an oxidizing atmosphere, in such a
manner as to thermally convert said organic precursor
compound into a conducting insoluble polymer net-
work adhering to the anode base, while said metal
compound is thermally converted to a platinum group
metal oxide finely dispersed throughout said conduct-
ing insoluble network formed in situ on the anode base,
and so as to thereby provide said protective intermedi-
ate coating adhering to said anode base; and
(b) forming on the protective intermediate coating thus
formed said stable outer coating effective for carrying out
an electrolytic process.
4,435,314
PROCESS OF PREPARING A POLYMERIZATION
CATALYST AND PREPARATION OF ETHYLENE
POLYMERS WITH THIS CATALYST
Lambertus J. M. A. van de Leemput, Echt, and Godefridus A. H.
NooUen, Helden-Panningen, both of Netheriands, assignors to
Stamicarbon B.V., Geieen, Netherlands
Filed Aug. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 405,374
Claims priority, application Netheriands, Aug. 6, 1981.
8103703
Int. C\? C08F 4/64, 4/70. 4/62
U.S. a. 502-154 7 Qaims
1. Process of preparing a chromium-containing catalyst
component, which upon activation with heat at a temperature
of from 200* to 1200' C. will effect the polymerization of
alpha-olefins, comprising depositing jointly or subsequently
from solution onto an inert, particulate, inorganic support the
following components:
(a) a first component which is a chromium complex comprising
the reaction product of:
(1) a chromium compound, and
(2) a group II or III element hydrocarbyl compound
wherein the hydrocarbyl group contains 1-20 carbon
atoms; and
(b) at least one second component selected from the group
consisting of
(1) a transition metal complex which is the reaction product
of:
(a) a transition metal compound wherein the metal is
selected from the group consisting of nickel, molybde-
num, and titanium, and
(b) a group II or III metal hydrocarbyl compound
wherein the hydrocarbyl groups contain 1-20 carbon
atoms, and
(2) a transition metal alkoxide or carboxylic acid salt
wherein the metal is selected from the group consisting of
nickel, molybdenum, and titanium.
4,435,315
USE OF ALKYL-SUBSTITUTED 1,3-DIOXOLANES AS
PERFUMING AGENTS
Jens Conrad, Hilden; Ulf-Armin Schaper, Diisseldorf, and Klaus
Bruns, Krefeld-Traar, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft auf Atkien, Diisseldorf-
Holthausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 226,201, Jan. 19, 1981, abandoned. This
application Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,374
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 8,
1980, 3004661
Int. a.3 CUB 9/00
U.S. a. 252—522 R 29 Qalms
1. A perfumery composition consisting essentially of from
about I to 50 percent by weight of at least one alkyl-substituted
1,3-dioxolane of the formula
Ri
r
o o
R2>^R3
(I)
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
289
wherein Ri represents an alkyl of from 4 to 12 carbon atoms;
R: represents a cycloalkyi or cycloalkenyl of from 5 to 8
carbon atoms, an optionally alkyl-substituted aryl, or a furyl
group; and R3 represents hydrogen or an alkyl of from I to 3
carbon atoms, and the remainder of customary constituents of
perfumery compositions.
composition contains magnesium ion in a molar amount corre-
sponding to 0.45-0. 55X where X is the number of moles of
C10-C16 alkyl sulphate present.
4,435,316
NORBORNYL ESTERS AND USES THEREOF IN
AUGMENTING OR ENHANCING THE ORGANOLEPTIC
PROPERTIES OF A CONSUMABLE MATERIAL AND
PROCESS FOR PREPARING SAME
Mark A. Sprecker, Sea Bright, N.J., assignor to International
Flavors A Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 396,288
Int. a.3 C07C 69/533; A61K 7/46
U.S. a. 252—522 R 10 Claims
1. At least one compound defined according to the structure:
wherein one of the dashed lines represents a carbon-carbon
bond and the other of the dashed lines represents no bond;
wherein the wavy lines represent a "cis" or a "trans" juxtaposi-
tion of the R|, R2, R3 and carboalkoxy moieties around the
carbon-carbon double bond; wherein Ri, R2 and R3 each rep-
resent methyl or hydrogen with the proviso that at least one of
R], R2 and R3 is hydrogen.
10. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of a
consumable material selected from the group consisting of
perfume compositions and colognes comprising the step of
adding to a perfume composition or cologne an aroma aug-
menting or enhancing quantity of at least one compound de-
fined according to claim 1.
4,435,317
DISHWASHING LIQUID INCLUDING ALKYL SULFATE,
ALKYL ETHER SULFATE, ALKYLBENZENE
SULFONATE AND MAGNESIUM
Jan Gerritsen, Strombeek-Bever, Belgium; Ronald E. Atkinson,
Hexham, Anthony F. Martin, BIyth, Mark R. Atkins,
Gosforth, all of England, assignors to The Procter A
Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 255,405, Apr. 20, 1981, abandoned.
This application Jan. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 460,967
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 24, 1980,
8013627; Oct. 20, 1980, 8033730
Int. a.^ CUD 1/37. 1/831
U.S. a. 252—547 17 Oaims
1. A physically stable aqueous liquid detergent composition
consisting essentially of
(a) from about 6% to about 16% by weight of the composi-
tion of a primary C10-C16 alkyl sulphate salt;
(b) from about 0.5% to about 20% by weight of the composi-
tion of a water-soluble C10-C16 primary alkyl ethoxy
sulphate salt containing an average of from about 2 to
about 6 ethylene oxide groups per alkyl group in the alkyl
ether sulphate, and
(c) from about 10% to about 28% by weight of the composi-
tion of a water-soluble substantially linear Cio-Cie alkyl
benzene sulphonate salt;
provided that the ratio of the total weight of components (a)
and (c) to the weight of component (b) is ^33:1, and that the
4,435,318
ELECTRODIALYSIS PREPARATION OF PURIHED AHF
CONCENTRATE
Patrea L. Pabst, Jamaica Plain, and David H. Bing, Brookline,
both of Mass., assignors to Ionics, Incorporated, Watertown,
Mass.
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,400
Int. a.J C07G 7/00
U.S. CI. 260—112 B 10 Qairas
1. A process for the separation and recovery of Factor VIII,
von Willebrand's factor, and Factor V from plasma and plasma
derivative streams having a pH normally between about 6 to
8.5 comprising removing from said blood stream when present
substantially all initial turbidity therein, subsequently passing
said blood plasma into and out of an apparatus containing one
or more semi-permeable membranes which separate said
plasma stream from a salt receiving stream thereby decreasing
the salt content of said plasma stream between about 45 to 80%
to cause the formation of a protein turbidity enriched in Factor
VIII, von Willebrand's factor and Factor V, subsequently
removing substantially all of said turbidity and maintaining the
temperature of said plasma stream during said separation and
recovery process in the range of between about 4*-40° C, and
at substantially its original starting pH level.
4,435,319
PREPARATION OF PROTEIN ISOLATE FROM
SUNFLOWER SEED
Robert J. Pearce, Beaumaris, Australia, assignor to Common-
wealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization,
Campbell, Australia
Filed Jul. 15, 1983, Ser. No. 514,341
Claims priority, application Australia, Jul. 15, 1982, PF4882
Int. a.3 A23J 1/14
U.S. a. 260—123.5 9 Oaims
1. A process for the production of a protein isolate from
sunfiower seed meal, which process comprises the sequential
steps of:
(1) treating a suspension of sunflower seed meal with an acid
at a pH of between 4.0 and 7.0;
(2) separating the insoluble residue from the protein extract;
(3) resuspending the insoluble residue and repeating steps (1)
and (2) sequentially on the residue until the desired deple-
tion of colour has been achieved;
(4) resuspending and treating the insoluble residue with an
acid other than sulphuric acid at a pH <4.0;
(5) separating the insoluble residue from the protein extract;
(6) repeating steps (4) and (5) until the desired amount of
protein has been extracted;
(7) combining the protein extract from steps (2), (3), (5) and
(6) and recovering the protein therefrom by either precipi-
tation with an acid or by ultrafiltration.
4,435,320
DISPERSE AZO DYES FROM
2-AMINO-3,5-BISFLUOROSULPHONYLTHIOPHENE
AND ANILINE, TETRAHYDROQUINOLINE, AND
BENZOMORPHOLINE COUPLERS
Robert N. Gourley, Liverpool, England, assignor to Eastman
Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,831
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 4, 1981,
8133251
Int. a.3 C09B 29/033. 29/09. 29/36. 29/44
U.S. O. 260—152 11 Oaims
1. A compound having the formula
290
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
R^^^ ^S02F
FSO2— ll^ Ji-NsN-C'
wherein R is hydrogen, alkyl, or alkyl substituted with aryl or
cycloalkyl; and C is a coupler selected from those of the
formulae:
\
4,435^21
AZETIDINONE 4-DISULnDES
Takashi Kamiya, Suita; Yoshihisa Saito, Takarazuka; Tsutomu
Teniji, Hirakata; Osamu Nakaguti, Osaka, and Tenio Oku,
Kyoto, all of Japan, assignors to Fi^isawa Pharmaceutical
Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 852,053, No?. 16, 1967, Pat. No. 4,367340,
which is a division of Ser. No. 711,980, Aug. 5, 1976, Pat. No.
4,071,527, which is a division of Ser. No. 430,688, Jan. 4, 1974,
Pat. No. 3,993,646, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
266,470, Jun. 26, 1972, abandoned. This application Dec. 1,
1980, Ser. No. 211,911
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 24, 1971, 46-46158;
Aug. 14, 1971, 46-61776; Aug. 14, 1971, 46-61777; Aug. 18, 1971,
46-62687; Aug. 21, 1971, 46-63885; Aug. 21, 1971, 46-63886; Sep.
9, 1971, 46-70018; Dec. 23, 1971, 46-2516
Int. a.3 C07D 205/08. 401/12, 409/12. 417/12
U.S. a. 260-239 A 8 aaims
1. An oxoazetidine compound of the formula:
wherein:
R' and R2 are each selected from hydrogen, fluorine, chlo-
rine, bromine, alkyl, alkoxy, phenoxy, alkylthio, arylthio,
and radicals having the formula — NH— X— R^ in which
X is —CO—, —COO—, or — SO2— and R' is selected
from alkyl and alkyl substituted with halogen, hydroxy,
phenoxy, aryl, cyano, cycloalkyl, alkylsulphonyl, alkyl-
thio, alkanoyloxy, and alkoxy, and when X is —CO—, R'
is also selected from hydrogen, amino, alkenyl, alkyl-
amino, dialkylamino, arylamino, aryl, or furyl;
R3 and R* are selected from hydrogen; cycloalkyl; cycloal-
kyl substituted with one or two groups selected from
alkyl, —OH, alkoxy, halogen and hydroxy substituted
alkyl; phenyl or phenyl substituted with alkyl, alkoxy,
halogen, alkanoylamino, cyano or alkoxycarbonyl;
straight or branched alkenyl; straight or branched alkyl
and such alkyl substituted with one to three of the follow-
ing: hydroxy; halogen; cyano; alkoxy; alkoxy-alkoxy;
alkanoyloxy; phenoxy; phenylcarbamoyloxy; cyclohexyl;
phenyl or phenyl substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, halogen,
alkanoylamino, cyano or alkoxycarbonyl; alkamoylamino;
carbamoyl; sulphamoyl; alkylsulphamoyl; alkylsul-
phonamido; phenylsulphonamido; alkoxycarbonylamino;
alkylcarbamoyloxy; alkoxycarbonyl; alkoxycarbonyloxy;
alkenylcarbonylamino; or R3 and R* combined is penta-
methylene, ethyleneoxyethylene or ethylenesul-
phonylethylene; and
R5, R*, R^ and R^ are each selected from hydrogen and
alkyl.
S-S— R2
N— CH— R3
I
C— CH2
I
CH3
wherein
Ri represents amino or amino substituted with a pharmaceu-
tically acceptable carboxylic acyl protective group for the
amino substituents in penicillin compounds,
R3 represents a pharmaceutically acceptable carboxy, esteri-
fied carboxy which is esterified with lower alkyl, l-cyclo-
propylethyl or trihalo(lower)alkyl, or salt of said carboxy
J group employed in penicillin compounds, and
•* R2 represents a pharmaceutically acceptable group selected
from the group consisting of quinolyl, lower alkanoyl and
thiadiazolyl substituted by lower alkyl.
4,435,322
HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING AN
ALKOXYCARBONYL AND A SUBSTITUTED METHYL
GROUP
Karoly Lempert; Kalman Harsanyi; Gabor Doleschall; Gyula
Hornyak; Jozsef Nyitrai, all of Budapest; Karoly Zauer,
Szentendre; Jozsef Fetter, Budapest; Gyula Simig, Budapest;
Zsuzsanna Visky nee Gombos, Budapest, and Gizella BarU
nee Szalai, Vecses, all of Hungary, assignors to Richter
Gedeon Vegyeszeti Gyar Rt., Budapest, Hungary
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,191
aaims priority, application Hungary, Sep. 15, 1980, 2264/80
Int. a.3 C07D 205/08. 487/04
U.S. a. 260-239 A 7 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula (IV)
wherein
R is benzyl or benzhydryl;
Y is a group of the formula — COOZ or — CH2M, in which
Z is lower alkyl and
M is hydroxyl, halogen, cyano, or a group of the formula
— O— SO2— R2 in which R^ is lower alkyl or tolyl.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
291
4,435,323
VINYLACETYLENE-TERMINATED POLYMIDE
DERIVAnVES
Gaetano F. D'Alelio, deceased, late of South Bend, Ind. (by
Daniel L. Curry, Vice-President of St. Joseph Bank and Trust
Company, executor), and Phillip A. Waitkus, Sheboygan,
Wis., assignors to Plastics Engineering Company, Sheboygan,
Wis.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 199,616, Oct. 22, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 353,871
Int. a.J C07D 209/34. 471/00: C08F 22/40
U.S. a. 548—473 27 Qaims
1. A polyimide of the formula:
oc
/ \ /
R— Z— ArN Ar'
\ / \
OC
CO oc CO
/ \ / \ /
N— ArN Ar' N— Ar— Z— R
\ / \ / \ A
CO OC CO
wherein:
Ar' is a tetravalent aromatic radical, the four carbonyl
groups being attached directly to separate carbon atoms of
said aromatic radical and each pair of carbonyl groups
being attached to adjacent carbon atoms in Ar' except that
in the case of Ar' being a naphthalene radical, one or both
pairs of the carbonyl groups may be attached to peri-car-
bon atoms;
Ar is a divalent aromatic radical;
n is an integer having a value of one to 20;
R is hydrogen or an organic moiety containing one to 21
carbon atoms; and
Z is the structure — CH=CH— C«C— or — C=C— CH=-
CH— .
and adding water to the solution to crystallize the monohy-
drate.
4,435,324
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
1-ALKYLAMINOANTHRAQUINONES
Karl-Julius Reubke, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,692
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 16,
1981, 3115548
Int. a? C07C 97/24
U.S. Q. 260—378 8 Qaims
1. In the process for the preparation of 1-alkyiaminoan-
thraquinones, wherein l-nitroanthraquinones are aminolysed
with alkylamines at elevated temperature in water and organic
water-immiscible solvents, in the presence of acid-binding
agents, the improvement comprising using calcium hydroxide
as the acid-binding agent.
4,435,325
la,25a-DIHYDROXY-CHOLECALCIFEROL AND
METHODS FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF
Jean Jolly, Fontenay-sous-Bois; Primo Rizzi, Villemomble, and
Jean Taillardat, Domont, all of France, assignors to Roussel
Uclaf, Paris, France
FUed May 5, 1980, Ser. No. 146,497
Qaims priority, application France, May 23, 1979, 79 13118
Int. Q.3 C07J 71/00. 5/00
MS. Q. 260—397.2 4 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of the product of claim 1
comprising dissolving a chloroform solvate of la,25-dihy-
droxy-cholecaliferol in an organic solvent to effect desolvation
4,435,326
INTERMEDIATES USEFUL IN THE PREPARATION OF
17,17-BIS(SUBSTITUTEDTHIO)ANDROSTENES
Ravi K. Varma, Belle Mead, N.J., assignor to E. R. Squibb A
Sons, Inc., Princeton, N.J.
Filed Sep. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 416,181
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 30,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.3 C07J 7/00
U.S. Q. 260—397.3 6 Qaims
1. A steroid having the formula
or the 1,2-dehydro derivative thereof wherein
R| is hydrogen;
R2 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, alk-
oxyalkyl, alkanoyloxyalkyl, aroyloxyalkyl, alkoxycar-
bonylalkyl, carboxyalkyl, or arylalkyl;
R3 is hydrogen, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryloxy, 0x0, methylene,
alkylthio, arylthio, alkanoyl, alkanoyloxy, or halogen;
R4 is carbonyl, /3-hydroxymethylene or /3-acetyloxymethy-
lene;
Rj is hydrogen or halogen; and
R6 is hydrogen, methyl, hydroxy, ^Ikanoyl or halogen.
4,435,327
3/3,7/3,15a-TRIHYDROXY-5-ANDROSTEN-17-ONE, ITS
3,15-DIPIVALATE, AND THEIR PREPARATION
Karl Petzoldt; Henry Laurent, and Rudolf Wiechert, all of
Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Schering, Aktien-
gesellschaft, Berlin and Bergkamen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 420,674
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 21,
1981, 3137919
Int. Q.^ C07J 1/00
U.S. Q. 260—397.5 14 Qaims
1. A process for preparing 3/3,7/3, 15a-trihydroxy-5-andros-
ten-17-one, comprising acidifying 3/3,7/3, 1 5o-trihydroxy-5-
androsten-17-one with a dilute mineral acid or dilute strong
organic acid in the presence of a ketone, and, then, reacting the
resultant product with and organic base.
12. 3/3,7/3, 1 5a-Trihydroxy-5-androsten- 1 7-one.
14. In a process for preparing 6/3, 7/3; 15/3,1 6/3-dimethylene-3-
oxo-17a-pregn-4-ene-21,I7-carbolactone from 7/3-hydroxy-
1 5/3, 16/3-methylene-3/3-pivaloyloxy-5-androsten-l 7-one, the
improvement wherein the latter compound is prepared by,
carrying out the process of claim 7 in order to prepare the
3,15-dipivalate of 3/3,7/3, 1 5a-trihydroxy-5-androstcn-
1 7-one, and
methylenating the 15/3,16/3-position in the resultant com-
pound to form 7/3-hydroxy- 15/3,1 6/3-methylene-3/3-
pivaloyloxy-S-androsten- 1 7-one.
292
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435328
PREPARATION AND USE OF ALKAL^ METAL
ISETHIONATES FROM ETHIONIC ACID
Vincent Lamberti, Upper Saddle Rjyer, and Wilder F. Pease,
Norwood, both of N. J., assignors to Lever Brothers Company,
New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 270,318, Jun. 4, 1981, Pat. No. 4,369,144.
This application Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 423,912
Int. a.J C07C 143/90
U.S. a. 260—400 9 Oaims
1. A process for the preparation of a fatty acid ester of an
alkali metal isethionate wherein said isethionate is prepared
from ethionic acid, comprising the steps of:
(a) heating an aqueous solution containing about 20% to
about 50% of ethionic acid at a temperature of about 80°
C. to about 160° C. for a sufficient time to produce a
solution of isethionic acid and sulfuric acid;
(b) neutralizing said aqueous solution with a mixture of
calcium hydroxide and an alkali metal hydroxide, the
amount of said hydroxides in said mixture being sufficient
to substantially completely convert the sulfuric acid into
hydrated calcium sulfate and the isethionic acid into an
alkali metal isethionate;
(c) separating the alkali metal isethionate from said neutral-
ized solution; and
(d) reacting a fatty acid with said alkali metal isethionate in
the presence of an esterification catalyst and a sufficient
amount of an alkali or an alkali metal salt of a carboxylic
acid to form said fatty acid ester of said isethionate,
wherein said fatty acid ester has a yellowness index less
than about 10.
4,435,329
SUBSTITUTED N-(oj-AROYLPROPIONYL)
DERIVATIVES OF a-AMINO AODS AND ESTERS
THEREOF
Francis J. McEvoy, Pearl River, and Jay D. Albright, Nanuet,
both of N.Y., assignors to American Cyanamid Company,
Stamford, Conn.
Filed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,119
Int. C\? C07C 149/40. 149/43, 153/023
U.S. a. 260—455 R 21 Qaims
1. Compounds represented by the formula
O O Ri R2
II II I I
ARYL-C— Z— C— N— CHCO2R3
wherein Z is a divalent moiety selected from the class consist-
ing essentially of
R5
R5
— CH— CH— and — CH— CH— :
I I
SR4 SR4
Rl is selected from the class consisting essentially of hydrogen
and lower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms but excluding
tertiary butyl; R2 is selected from the class consisting essen-
tially of hydrogen, lower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon
atoms but excluding tertiary butyl; hydroxy— Rg—, lower
alkyl— Rg—, mercapto— Rg- , cyclohexyl, cyclopentyl,
phenyl, phenyl— Rg—, carboxy— Rg— , amino— Rg— and
carbamoyl— Rg—, wherein Rg— is a divalent straight chain
parafinic moiety having 1 to 6 carbon atoms; R3 is selected
from the class consisting essentially of hydrogen and lower
alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R4 is selected from the
class consisting essentially of hydrogen, tower alkanoyl, ben-
zoyl and phenyl-substituted-lower alkanoyl; R5 is selected
from the class consisting essentially of hydrogen and a lower
alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms but excluding tertiary
butyl; ARYL is selected from the class consisting essentially of
1-naphthyl, 2-naphthyl. 4-chloro-l-naphthyl, 4-methoxy-l-
naphthyl, 5,6,7,8-tetrahydro- 1-naphthyl, 5,6,7,8-tetrahydro-2-
naphthyl, 4-biphenylyl, 5-indanyI, 4-indanyl, phenyl, and sub-
stituted phenyl moieties having the formula
(R7)«
wherein R6 is selected from the class consisting essentially of
fluoro, chloro, bromo, trifluoromethyl, cyano, phenoxy, halo-
phenoxy, phenylthio, halophenylthio, lower alkyl having from
1 to 4 carbon atoms, and lower alkoxy having from 1 to 4
carbon atoms, and R7 is selected from the group consisting of
chloro, fluoro, bromo, lower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon
atoms and lower alkoxy having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms; and
where m is an integer of zero, one or two; including individual
optically active isomers; racemic mixtures thereof; non-toxic
pharmacologically-acceptable salts of the foregoing; and mix-
tures of the foregoing.
4 435 330
PERFLUOROALKYL-ALKYLENE BRANCHED
AMPHOTERIC SULFATO BETAINES
Robert A. Falk, New City, N.Y., assignor to Ciba-Geigy Corpo-
ration, Ardsley, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 457,609
Int. a.3 C07C 141/00. 141/02
U.S. a. 260—458 F 6 Oaims
1. A compound of the formula
R2 R3
V
(I)
R/-R1-C C N®-R6
O R4 R7
SO3©
wherein
R/is straight or branched chain perfluoroalkyi of 3 to 18
carbon atoms, or perfluoroalkoxyperfluoroalkyl of 3 to 18
carbon atoms;
Rl is a direct bond, alkylene of up to 6 carbon atoms, al-
kyleneoxyalkylene of up to 6 carbon atoms, alkylenethi-
oalkylene of up to 6 carbon atoms, alkyleneoxy of up to 6
carbon atoms, alkenyleneoxyalkylene of up to 6 carbon
atoms, alkylenethioalkyleneoxyalkylene of up to 9 carbon
atoms, carbonamidoalkylene wherein the alkylene moiety
contains up to 6 carbon atoms and the amido nitrogen is
further unsubstituted or substituted by lower alkyl, sul-
fonamidoalkylene wherein the alkylene moiety contains
up to 6 carbon atoms and the amido nitrogen is further
unsubstituted or substituted by lower alkyl, caronami-
doalkylenethioalkylene wherein the carbonamidoalkylene
moiety is as defined hereinabove and the thioalkylene
moiety contains up to 6 carbon atoms, or sulfonamidoalk-
ylenethioalkylene wherein the sulfonamidoalkylene moi-
ety is as defined hereinabove and the thioalkylene moiety
contains up to 6 carbon atoms;
R2, R3 and R4 are independently hydrogen or lower alkyl;
R5, R6 and R7 are independently lower alkyl, and may addi-
tionally represent aralkyl, and Ra and R7 taken together
with the nitrogen to which they are attached may also
represent piperidino or morpholino, or R5, K(, and R7
taken together with the nitrogen to which they are at-
tached represent pyridyl, acridyl or quinolyl, and salts
thereof.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
Z93
4,435,331
METHYL CARBONATE OF o,33-TRIMETHYL
CYCLOHEXANE METHANOL, ORGANOLEPTIC USES
THEREOF AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING SAME
Michael Licciardello, Little Silver, and Richard M. Boden,
Ocean, both of N.J., assignors to International Flavors A
Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 10, 1983, Ser. No. 474,158
Int. a.3 C07C 69/96
U.S. O. 260—463 1 Qaim
1. The methyl carbonate of o,3,3-trimethyl cyclohexane
methanol having the structure;
4,435,333
ACETONITRILE SOLVATE OF AN a-AMINOACYL
CHLORIDE HYDROCHLORIDE
Rodolfo Maggi; Gian P. Maggi, both of Milan, and Giuliano
Marcon, Bulciago, all of Italy, assignors to Chimica Bulciago
S.r.l., Bulciago, Italy
Division of Ser. No. 261,516, May 7, 1981, Pat. No. 4,369,146,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 120,357, Feb. 11, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 401,357
Claims priority, application Italy, May 3, 1979, 22323 A/79
Int. a.^ C07C 121/80
U.S. CI. 260—465 D V 1 Qaim
1. The hemisolvate consisting of the acetonifnle hemisolvate
of D(-)2-(p-hydroxyphenyl)glycyl chloride hydrochloride.
4,05,334
NAPHTHOLSULPHONIC AQD COMPOUNDS, THEIR
PREPARATION AND USE AS COUPLING
COMPONENTS
Frank-Michael StShr, Burscheid; Peter Wild, Alten-Buseck, and
Horst Nickel, Leverkusen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,613
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 15,
1981, 3100978
Int. a.3 C07C 143/38. 143/53
U.S. CI. 260—501.12 4 Qaims
1. A naphtholsulphonic acid substituted with an ammonium
group and, in the betaine form, corresponding to the formula
4,435,332
M-PHENOXYBENZAMIDE DERIVATIVES
Hiroshi Noguchi, Toyonaka; Shunichi Hashimoto, Takarazuka;
Shigeyoshi Kitamura, Toyonaka; Takashi Matsuo, Iruma;
Akihiko Mine, Kawanishi, and Katsuzo Kamoshita,
Toyonaka, all of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Chemical
Company, Limited, Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 44,249, May 31, 1979, Pat. No. 4,263,039,
which is a division of Ser. No. 792,221, Apr. 29, 1977, Pat. No.
4,173,464. This application Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,637
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 7, 1976, 51-52430;
May 13, 1976, 51-54989; Jun. 10, 1976, 51-120754; Dec. 28,
1976, 51-160388
Int. a.3 C07C 103/76
U.S. a. 260—465 D 4 Qaims
1. A m-phenoxybenzamide compound of the formula:
[
COR
wherein X, which may be the same or different, is a halogen
atom or a lower alkyl or lower alkoxy group, n is zero or an
integer of 1 to S and R is a group of the formula:
— N
/
J
\
R'l
R'2
wherein Ri' is a hydrogen atom or a lower alkyl group and R2'
is a lower cyanoalkyl or benzyl group.
® /
Rs >^ ^(CH2),-N-R3
R4
wherein
X is —CO— or — SO2— ,
R| is hydrogen or alkyl,
R2 and R3 each independently is alkyl, alkenyl or phenylal-
kyl,
R4 is alkyl, alkenyl, phenylalkyi or
-Y-N-(CH2),,
R3
R
Y is alkylene or xylylene,
m is 1 or 2,
n is 0 or 1,
R$ and Rb each independently is hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy or
halogen, «
and in addition, if n = 1,
R2 or R4 may be amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, cycloal-
kyl, phenyl, or phenyl substituted by halogen, Ci-4-alkyl,
Ci-4-alkoxy or cyano,
R2 and R3, together with the nitrogen atom to which they
are bonded may form optionally Ci-C4-alkyl-substituted
pyrrolidine, piperidine, morpholine, piperazine or N-
hydroxyethyl-piperazine,
R2, R3 and R4, together with the nitrogen atom to which
they are bonded may form a pyridinium ring, or a group of
the formula
.294
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
— N N. or
R2, R3 and R4 may be hydrogen,
Y is phenylene, which is optionally substituted by hydroxyl,
halogen, cyano, Ci-4-alkyI or C|-C4-alkoxy, benzylene or
a radical of the formula
R?
:0
Rt
Z is a direct bond, —(CHzip—, — O— , — O— (CH2);;— O,
-SO2-, -NHCO— , -NHCONH-, -NHCO— (CH2
)^^CONH- or -CONH— (CH2);^NHCO— .
p is 1, 2 or 3, and
R7 is hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy or halogen.
4,435,337
PROCESS FOR EXTRACTING RUBBER AND
BY-PRODUCTS FROM GUAYULE AND GUAYULE-LIKE
SHRUBS
Edward L. Kay, Akron, and Richard Gutierrez, Canal Fulton,
both of Ohio, assignors to The Firestone Tire A Rubber Com-
pany, Akron, Ohio
ContinuaHon-in-part of Ser. No. 263,387, May 13, 1981,
abandoned, and Ser. No. 149,862, May 14, 1980, abandoned.
This application Sep. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 298,447
Int. a.3 C08C 4/00
U.S. a. 528-493 7 Qalms
1. A process for isolating rubber, resins, water-solubles, and
bagasse from comminuted guayuie and guayule-like fibrous
plant material which comprises the steps of:
(a) drying the plant material to a moisture content of about
5 to about 25%; and then
(b) deresinating with essentially anhydrous oxygenated or-
ganic solvent which is resin miscella comprising acetone
and at least about 4% resin;
(c) recovering rubber, water-solubles and by-product ba-
gasse by water flotation.
4,435,335
SUBSTITUTED-BUTANEDIPEROXOIC ACIDS AND
PROCESS FOR BLEACHING
James M. Mayer, Maryland Heights, Mo., assignor to Mon-
santo Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,542
Int. a.J C07C 179/10
U.S. a. 260-502 R 7 claims
1. A compound represented by the formula:
4,435,338
DITHIOPHOSPHATES
Klaus-Peter Michaelis, Lindenfels. and Ralner Schneider, Zwln-
genberg, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Ciba-
Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,748
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 29, 1980.
7277/80
Int. a.3 C07F 9/17
U.S. CI. 260—929
1. A compound of the formula
4 Qaims
CH2CO3H
RCHCO3H
wherein
R is alkyl of 6 to 18 carbon atoms or phenyl.
4 435 336
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF AROMATIC
AMINOSULPHONIC ACIDS
Herbert Emde, Cologne; Heinz U. Blank, and Peter Schnegg,
both of Odenthal, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 364,082
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 11.
1981,3114829
Int. a.J C07C 143/58. 143/60
U.S. a. 260-508 17 Claims
1. In a process for the preparation of an aminoarylsulphonic
acid by heating a reaction mixture comprising an arylamine
and sulphuric acid or an arylammonium hydrogen sulphate by
the baking process, the improvement which comprises carry-
ing out the process under pressure at a temperature of at least
140* C. and, at least partially, in the presence of water, sul-
phuric acid where present being present in an amount of 0.5 to
1.1 mols per mol of arylamine, said water being present in the
reaction mixture in an amount of 0.02 to 2 mols per mol of
arylamine or arylammonium hydrogen sulphate originally
introduced into the reaction mixture.
(RO)2.P-S-CH2-CH-CH2— A-
(I)
in which
n is 2, 3 or 4 and is the valency of Q,
R is a hydrocarbon radical having I to 22 carbon atoms, or
said radical having an — O— or — S— group in the chain,
or said radical substituted by hydroxy or by halogen,
A is the group — OCO— and Q is a group
or A is the group — O— and Q is one of the radicals
-CH2 CH2-
\ / \ \
C , — PO or —PS.
/ \ / /
— CH2 CH2—
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
295
4,435,339
FALLING nLM HEAT EXCHANGER
Loren G. Kragh, Federal Way, Wuh., assignor to Tower Sys-
tems, Inc., Tacoma, Wash.
Filed Aug. 6, 1979, Ser. No. 63,797
Int. a.J BOIF 3/04
U.S. Q. 261—153 5 Claims
1. A falling film heat exchanger for establishing thermal
contact between two fluids of different temperatures compris-
ing:
a plurality of spaced apart and juxtaposed cells each having:
substantially vertically disposed parallel side walls; and
first fluid collector means disposed at the bottom of the
side walls along the length thereof;
first fluid distributing means disposed at the top of the cell
side walls along the length thereof for dispensing a first
fluid in a substantially uniform film over the inside of each
of the cell side walls;
second fluid distributing means disposed above the inter-
space between each of said cells along the length thereof
for dispensing a second fluid in a substantially uniform
fllm over the outside and confronting side wall surfaces of
two juxtaposed cells; and
second fluid collector means disposed beneath the said inter-
spaces for collecting the said second fluid.
4,435,340
PROCESS FOR PREPARING MICROCAPSULES FOR
PRESSURE SENSITIVE MANIFOLD PAPER
Tetsuro Horiike; Takio Kuroda, both of Sakai, and Tomoharu
Shiozaki, Amagasaki, all of Japan, assignors to Kanzaki Paper
Manufacturing Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,972
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 27, 1981, 56-11374;
Jun. 30, 1981, 56-102518
Int. a.J BOIJ 13/02
U.S. a. 264—4.7 5 Qaims
1. A process for preparing microcapsules for pressure sensi-
tive manifold paper characterized by emulsifying in a hydro-
philic liquid a hydrophobic liquid containing an aromatic iso-
cyanate repesented by the formula
NCO f NCO
Q^CH2-^^CH2
(I)
wherein n is an integer of 1 to 10, an aliphatic isocyanate and
an electron donated organic chromogenic material, and form-
ing a polymer at the interface to cover hydrophobic liquid
droplets with the polymer, the aromatic isocyanate and the
aliphatic isocyanate being used in the ratio of 1:0.05-20 by
weight.
4,435,341
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING AMMONIUM
SULFATE GRANULES
Horst Bechthold, ErftsUdt^eshelm, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to BuckpiKt^ther AG, Grevenbroich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany ^
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,533
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 10,
1981, 3108986
Int. Q.} BOIJ 2/00
U.S. Q. 264—7 5 Claims
1. A method of manufacturing ammonium sulfate granules,
having useful properties of increased resistance to applied
pressure and abrasion, comprising
(a) spraying a solution of ammonium sulfate to form it into
finely divided droplets,
(b) drying said droplets to form fine particles of ammonium
sulfate,
(c) spraying onto said fine particles an aqueous solution con-
taining 30-50% ammonium sulfate, and
(d) drying said particles to form ammonium sulfate granules
having improved resistance to pressure and abrasion.
4,435,342
METHODS FOR PRODUCING VERY HNE PARTICLE
SIZE METAL POWDERS
Jospeh M. Wentzell, Ty Careg, Remsen, N.Y. 13438
Filed Nov. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 318,261
Int. Q.' BOIJ 2/02
U.S. Q. 264—8 12 Qaims
1. A method of producing ultra fine solid metal particles
comprising the steps of:
(a) discharging droplets of molten metal from a rotating
primary member having a substantially circular periphery
in a generally radial path from said rotating member tan-
gentially against a spaced secondary annular planar sur-
face surrounding and spaced from the periphery of the
rotating primary member, said annular planar surface
being inclined to the path of the droplets of molten metal
from the rotating member at an angle such that the drop-
lets are free from any tendency for the metal to stick to
said annular planar surface and such that the molten drop-
lets are further atomized into finer droplets which con-
tinue tangentially beyond said secondary annular surface
into a cooling environment;
(b) cooling said finer droplets in said cooling environment to
solidi^ the droplets to solid particles; and
(c) collecting said cooled particles as ultra fine solid metal
. panicles.
296
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4435J43
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING AN INFORMATION
MEMORY DISK
Hideo Ando, and Isao Suzuki, botli of Tokyo, Japan, assignors to
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jul. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 396,594
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 20, 198 J, 56-113244
Int. Cl.i B29D 77/00
U.S. a 264-22 12 Claims
4,435,345
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF A CONTINUOUS
SHEET OF FOAMED SYNTHETIC, THERMOPLASTIC
POLYMER BY EXTRUSION
Uoberto Colombo, Turin, Italy, assignor to Lavorazione Materie
Plasriche L.M.P. S.p.A., Turin, Italy
Filed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,383
CJalms priority, application Italy, Nov. 5, 1980, 68689 A/80
Int. a.' B29D 27/00
VS. O. 264-53 4 ci„„.
1. A method for manufacturing an information memory disk
comprising the steps of:
(a) preparing a die having one surface on which are formed
an annular first rugged pattern corresponding to tracks,
and an annular second rugged pattern corresponding to a
positioning mark and concentrically located against the
tracks;
(b) manufacturing by the use of the die a blank having one
surface on which are formed an annular rugged track
corresponding to the first rugged pattern and an annular
rugged positioning mark corresponding to the second
rugged pattern;
(c) detecting the position of the center of the blank on the
basis of the positioning mark;
(d) boring a hole through the blank centered upon the center
of the positioning mark; and
(d) forming a light reflecting layer on the annular rugged
track.
4,435,344
METHOD FOR PRODUaNG A HEAT-INSULATING
PAPER CONTAINER FROM A PAPER COATED OR
LAMINATED WITH A THERMOPLASTIC SYNTHETIC
RESIN HLM
Akira lioka, Inzaimachi, Japan, assignor to Nihon Dixie Com-
pany, Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,346
Gaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 29, 1980, 55-187575
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 264-45.1 ,1 aaims
1. A method for producing an insulating composite paper
container which comprises heating a fabricated container
having a container body member and a bottom panel membei*
wherein the container body member is formed of paper coated
or laminated with a thermoplastic synthetic resin film on one
surface thereof and coated or laminated with the same or
different thermoplastic synthetic resin film or aluminum foil on
the other surface thereof, wherein the bottom panel member is
formed of paper which may or may not be coated or laminated
with a thermoplastic synthetic resin film or aluminum foil and
wherein the paper has a moisture content of at least about 2%
and wherein the heating is performed at a temperature and for
a time sufficient to form a heat-insulating layer on at least one
surface of the container body member by a foaming action on
at least one of the thermoplastic resin films of the container
body member through the action of the moisture in the paper
of the container body member.
I In a process of producing a continuous sheet of foamed
synthetic thermoplastic polymer comprising extruding a foam-
able melt of the polymer through a slit and guiding the shct-i
during foaming with the opposite faces thereof in contact with
respective cold surfaces thereby to cool said faces to below the
gelling point of the polymer, the improvement further com-
prising the steps of:
(a) passing the so foamed sheet through a heating zone
before the temperature at the core of the sheet has fallen
substantially below the incipient softening point of the
polymer, thereby to raise the temperature of the sheet to a
value which is at least substantially constant throughout
the thickness of the sheet and is between said incipient
softening point and the critical viscosity point of the poly-
mer,
(b) applying sub-atmospheric pressure to the opposite faces
of the shetl exiting from said heating zone of step (a),
through a pair of mutually diverging moving walls which
are permeable to gas while advancing said walls in syn-
chronism with the sheet thereby to temporarily adhere the
said faces of the sheet to the respective walls and progres-
sively increase the thickness of the sheet during its ad-
vance,
(c) continuing to apply sub-«tmosphenc pressure to the
opposite faces of the sheet exitir. . from step (b) through a
pair of mutually parallel moving vails which are permea-
ble to gas and are advanced in synchronism with the sheet
while cooling the sheet, thereby to keep the faces of the
sheet adhering to the respective walls and maintaining the
thickness of the sheet constant until the foam is consoli-
dated.
4,435,346
METHOD OF PRODUCING OPEN-CELL FOAMED
ARTICLES OF CROSS-LINKED POLYOLEnNS
Hiroo Ito; Takeo Kasanami, both of Joyo, and Sbuji Miura, Ujl,
all of Japan, assignors to Sanwa Kako Company, Limited,
Kyoto, Japan
Filed Mar. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 357,682
Gaims priority, application Japan, May 22, 1981, 56-76700
Int. G.3 B29D 27/00
U.S. G. 264-54 13 Qaims
1. A method for the production of open-cell foamed articles
of cross-linked polyolefins comprising the steps of:
blending with heating a polyolefin, a chemical blowing
agent and a cross-linking agent to obtain a foamable and
cross-linkable composition,
forming the foamable and cross-linkable composition into a
desired shape under pressure and at a temperature of from
115* to 155* C. and which is lower than the foaming
temperature of said composition while maintaining its gel
percent at zero,
heating the shaped composition at a suitable foaming tem-
perature under atmospheric pressure to decompose the
cross-linking agent and the blowing agent concurrently,
the peak of the ratio of the degree of cross-linking to the
degree of decomposition of the blowing agent being not
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAI
297
more than 20, thereby givii<p hm t.» a fiuimcd piolUki of
cross-linked polyolefin ho.;-.i,' ..elK tivJored with vvry
thin membranes capable < 1 Kinji f^-.jjy ruptuad hy iht-
action of mechanical forco. anc
mechanically deforming mui fou.i.sd pr. if.cJ 10 ousc ihv
membranes of the cells fr ruj.»i-rj-,
wherein the gel percent is the •;:t!u o;' the U.ixtnMc ani
cross-linkable composi'iun Jiu-i r^tra-.tion tn ih:»t bcj. )..■
><!.«.«/- II I • A- .
I *UN4«4 v-v»* M« ' •' I r >w|»
' ^•■'^f n r t*.%Mk,- I*' -* .«»
: .■« vt.» fi»r.A«ni»i . Mi* • •' . :
J •-» .^i- . Mr li «/ t '
r- . . - - »-.. ..
I w^ ..tr "^^'.n' .-•. --wi .• .. .^..,,
I * i'i^^ mm 1 y •• »•-•. j
! **-f* ITWwIWK. .-*■ i.ia -«• '
' aT *iA. iM. -K^ . . ^w*. . wMt ■ I'JU '
■ 'IIM ttAt .« I.l-A :l *k »■•
f *-*'. fW^ nV<i'-: 1 nv atrv hatr * ,
-— -r — -—
I
I V'^^tflnt. MtanAM «..}M-- I
!i *Jt»' ■-■«». rJ** '* 'lvA•l■l^»r^ ,,
eAiiaciion. fh«: c^xtvKMon l«?;ti^: i\.,rud 00'. nodci tqAux oI
trichiorvieihvioue .is ,i .,o!v,n„ u-r 24 hoa<> by mi.an.s f.fa
soxhi«rt ejitractoT iKing a giar,« fiijc; ...\ ft.m -ii) 10 50m; the
dcjirec (i» crow litikjng t$ the ^k{ p^tceiit of the compcs).
lion a; a Kiveii hvHiwy; tsnu- and ;l.'o dc^.c;' ot <iecnni(>o-»i-
tur. of the blovvmg agent i.s ihc ir.^io of the degree ot
expansio!'. ..i f.iid given heating time i«. iHc final degree of
cxpan^u-o of ihi; foam-.d composition.
4,435,347
FRCK'ESS FOR THE PRODtCDON OI MOLDED
MF.MBERS FROM EU)NGATED IHRIICLFS OF WOOD
Plwrre Sorbler, P«-mw.|(«s Ki.r>t«lR(>, rrmv^. assignor to Agence
N'aflonale de ValonisaHon dc in Rech*TvKr <A.N\'AR). Ntu«ly.
surSeiike, I ntucc
CootiDuatJon of Str. No. 52,266, ,Un. 26. 1*79. abandoned. 1hi%
■pplk-atlnn Jun. 14, 1W|, Scr. No. 274,267
l«t-Cl.' U2V.I5A'A''
U.S. a. 264-^ 118 ,oci«,„..
Mdf wall as a comir.uyuon of said base, but extending at an
«njJ!le rclrjfive to HaiJ ba.'«, comprising
forr.iinF a layer c,l hinder . oatcd u o«.d jwrticic* into a gener-
ally (\a\ sfitjon,
h-.vn^' a fust rmv^n n> be the b..ie of said iirtjcle, and at
Itiiti ,M\e other j. >r(,on to b«.' 11 least ont- side wall of said
urucio.
pn-vompreising .s;.ij :.,de w all portion to a irotkness less than
the !hK.kat!is of sf.id ha,-.- (urtinr. ilun M.ding said side
wall irHVvn ai ihc junction of >aid bas<- purtion and said
Mdf wall jx?rii()|. of said section 10 fon.i an angle with said
basi. pi.Tticn.
[■I •<»?}' the bent Mxrion tnio n muld.
i 'nri,)ri-s*ii.g and heuKng said bent section in said mold to
inulj saiil sectioj., v\J io bond wid cjttd wood particles
to foifii Mtjc* molded article, and
opening said mold, and removed said r.aolded article.
4,435,.VM
APP SHAH'S ANU Mt niOD FOR MAKING FLEXIBLE
I.OAl>.fARRMMi roRD
Faiil M. Standiey. SpnnptJeJd. Mo.. asviR„or to Dayco Corpora-
tiiih, lHy\»ti, Ohio
DJvislon ,.f Ser. 'V«. 244.5 JO. Mar. 17. J',81, Pat. No. 4,355.069.
This appiication .Sep. 20. \9V Ser. No. 419 862
Int. G,' B29l^ ;i0
aS.Cl.264-,74 ,,(^„„,
1 in a method for i*)Mj..Mg a flexible load-carrying cord
which IS Adapted to bt «-mbv-dded in a polymeric product; said
nteth.)d comprionig the steps of twisting a plurality, of elernents
•n otu- diiifction and wherein said elements normally have a
f<:prifiw> 10 untwist; and moving said twisted elements in a
Tcei:lmear path; the improvement in said method comprising
'he steps of, forming a fiowable polymeric matrix material
which has a plurality of discrete randomly arranged fibers
embedded therein to define a polymeric sleeve having said
fibers disposed in a helical pattern which extends in a direction
opposite from said one direction, and bonding said sleeve
concentrically around and against said elements during said
moving step so that upon curing said sleeve said fibers serve to
substantially eliminate said tendency of said elements to un-
twist.
1. A process for producing, from binder-coated wood parti-
cles, a one piece molded article having a base, and at least one
4435 349
METHOD FOR MAKING A REINFORCED RIM
ELASTOMER
Richard J. G. Dominquez, and Doris M. Rice, both of Austlo,
Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,750
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 3,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. G.3 B29C 5/00. 3/02
U,S. G. 264-257 ic\^^
1. A method for making a high strength composite compris-
ing a reinforcing mat impregnated with reaction injection
molded polyurcthane elastomer resin, the method comprising
298
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
placing a reinforcing mat in a mold cavity and injecting into
the mold cavity a polyol of about 5500 molecular weight based
on a trihydric initiator, ethylene glycol, a stannic diester of a
thiol acid and a polyisocyanate.
and shorten in length by movement of its second end
toward its first end.
4,435^50
METHOD FOR THE ORIENTATION OF
THERMOPLASTIC POLYETHER ETHER KETONE
nLMS
Nobuo Fukushlma; Tenio Saitou, both of Shiga, and Haruo
Hayashida, Osaka, all of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Chem>
ical Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,940
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 19, 1981, 56-23706
Int. a.3 B29C n/02
U.S. a. 264—280 1 Qaim
1. A method for the orientation of a film or sheet consisting
essentially of a crystalline thermoplastic polyether ether ke-
tone containing therein a repeating unit represented by the
formula:
singly or in combination with one or more different repeating
units, which comprises rolling the film or sheet of crystalline
thermoplastic polyether ether ketone at a linear pressure of at
least 100 kg/cm by the use of at least one pair of pressure rolls
maintained within a temperature range of from 80° C. to 320*
C. while applying a backward tension of at least 80 kg/cm^.
4,435,351
METHOD OF BREAKING LOOSE VULCANIZED HOSE
FROM A RIGID MANDREL
Brian J. Gilmore, Belfast, Northern Ireland, assignor to The
Goodyear Tire A Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Sep. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 418,917
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 18, 1982,
8207869
Int. a? B29C 7/00; B29H 7/14
U.S. a. 264—335 3 Claims
APPLY FIXED CLAMP TO ONE END OF HOSE
TO SEAL AND SECURE HOSE TO MANDREL
APPLY MOVABLE CLAMP TO OPPOSITE END
OF HOSE
INTRODUCE FLUID PRESSURE BETWEEN THE
CLAMPED ENDS OF THE HOSE AND THE
MANDREL
1. A method of breaking loose a vulcanized hose having first
and second ends from a rigid mandrel on which the hose has
been vulcanized copiprising:
(a) applying a fixed clamp to the first end of the hose so as to
prevent movement of said first end relative to the mandrel
and to form a fluid-tight seal of said first end relative to the
mandrel;
(b) applying a movable clamp to the second end of the hose
less securely than said fixed clamp so as to permit move-
ment of said second hose end relative to the mandrel but
restrict the passage of fluid between said second end of the
hose and the mandrel; and
(c) introducing fluid pressure between the hose and the
mandrel thereby causing the hose to increase in diameter
4,435,352
METHOD FOR MAKING A HOSE HAVING AN INDEX
MARK
Roy W. Olsen, and Curtis H. Bell, both of Lincoln, Nebr., as-
signors to The Goodyear Tire A Rubber Company, Akron,
Ohio
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,286
Int. Q\? B29C 17 /OH; B29H i/06
U.S. a. 264—504 4 Qaims
1. A method of manufacturing elastomeric hose having an
index mark at or adjacent the end of the hose comprising the
following sequence of steps:
(a) providing a mandrel including:
(i) a poriion having an exterior hose-bearing surface
which is cylindrical, and
(ii) an interior cavity that is in communication with said
exterior surface of the mandrel via a hole in said poriion
at a location corresponding in location to that of the
index mark to be formed on the hose;
(b) placing a sleeve having a wall of uncured elastomer
material on the mandrel, the sleeve having an inside diam-
eter corresponding approximately to the outside diameter
of the mandrel, the sleeve covering the hole in the man-
drel, the size of the hole being selected to permit forcing
of uncured elastomer material through the hole by fluid
pressure;
(c) subjecting the sleeve while mounted on the mandrel to a
fluid pressure differential to form a poriion of the elasto-
mer material of the sleeve wall through the hole and into
the cavity of the mandrel and thereby form a hole in the
sleeve wall corresponding in location to that of the man-
drel;
(d) curing the sleeve having a hole through its wall into a
hose having a hole through its wall; and
(e) removing the cured sleeve from the mandrel.
4,435,353
PROCESSES FOR FORMING BUILDING MATERIALS
COMPRISING NON-WOVEN WEBS
John S. Forty, Manor Township, Lancaster County, and John R.
Garrick, Lancaster, both of Pa., assignors to Armstrong
World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, Pa.
Filed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,060
Int. a.J B29C 5/00
U.S. a. 264—518 20 Oaims
1. A process for forming a non-woven web, said process
comprising the steps of
preparing a mixture comprising a binder and principally
inorganic fibrous material;
introducing said mixture into the upper regions of a mat-
forming zone comprising a first moveable foraminous
wire disposed in the lower region thereof and, optionally,
a second moveable foraminous wire disposed so as to
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
299
converge with said first foraminous wire at a nip opening
disposed therebetween, said mixture being introduced
through a first aperture such that it falls into and is en-
tramed in a horizontally or upwardly directed air stream
which is introduced through a second aperture into said
mat-forming zone, said second aperture having means
associated therewith for controlling the direction of the
air which passes therethrough;
4.435,355
POWER WHEEL WITH DOUBLE ACHON VALVE IN
CONJUNCTION WITH A DRILL BIT
Friederich Welnert, 219-19 131st Ave., Jamaica, N.Y. 11413
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 182,104, Aug. 28. 1980, Pat
No. 4,340,970. This application Aug. 4. 1982. Ser. No. 405,310
Int. a.3 G21C OO/OO
U.S. a 376-208 ,3 c,^„.
u
MM .
■tTL
l~i-i
»'
■ O
b___.
adjustably exhausting the entraining air through said wire or
wires to selectively deposit said mixture thereupon, said
second aperture and said optional second foraminous wire
being disposed relative to said first foraminous wire such
that the mixture which is deposited on said wire or wires
is deposited essentially uniformly;
consolidating said deposited mixture to yield a non-woven
web of material; and
compressing and curing said material.
4 435 354
METHOD FOR THE RELEASE OF THERMONUCLEAR
ENERGY COMBINING IMPACT, MAGNETIC AND
INERTIAL CONHNEMENT FUSION
F. Winterberg, 5395 Goldenrod Dr., Reno, Nev. 89511
Filed Oct. 14, 1980. Ser. No. 196,928
Int. a.3 G21B 1/00
U.S. a. 376-108 5 Claim,
1. A power wheel with double action valves comprising a
vertical axis mounted on a frame means shaft having first and
second ends, said both ends fixed to a side gear whereby both
gears confronting each other and connecting each other by a
plurality of pinion gears intermeshing with both side gears,
a wheel fixedly mounted between the first and second end of
said shaft, said wheel having an outer perimeter,
a plurality of expansion valves mounted on said outer perim-
eter on radial axis,
each of said expansion valves including a hollow T shaped
piston,
a pressurized fluid, a pair of push rods connecting:
A. a pair of valve control bars,
B. a pair of duplex inlet and outlet valves,
C. a pinion gear intermeshing with said stationary side
gear and a satellite gear,
D. a drive gear for delivering useful work output wherein
a plurality of expansion valves are activated,
E. said pressurized fluid supplied from
F. a fluid vessel through valve controls separating high
pressurized fluid from low pressurized fluid whereby
relaxed fluid is channeled through
G. a radiator via a hollow shaft,
H. said Shaft containing an interior pressure pump extract-
ing relaxed fluid out of said radiator to be pumped back
into a pressure cell,
I. said Pressure cell including
J. a plurality of heating elements, heat elements selected to
be conventional or nuclear and said satellite gear
mounted in center of a drill bit,
K. said drill bit consisting of a solid tapered disc with a
plurality of exchangeable cutting edges.
1. A method for the release of nuclear energy comprising:
(a) at least one means accelerating a mass weighing at least
one hectogram to at least 10 km/sec,
(b) directing the mass to impact a target structure compris-
ing a body having a cavity therein, an indentation adjacent
the cavity, a sealed target chamber containing a first
amount of fusion fuel therein positioned in the indentation
and the cavity containing a second amount of fusion fuel,
(c) creating a multi-kilogauss field about said target chamber
whereby upon impact of the mass upon the target cham-
ber a magnetized plasma is created which in turn creates a
plasma in the cavity by ablatively driven implosion from
either black body radiation or shock waves from the
magnetized plasma.
4,435,356
METHOD AND AN APPARATUS FOR MONITORING
THE PERIOD OF A NUCLEAR REACTOR
Lars O. Johansson, Nykoping, Sweden, assignor to Studsvik
Energiteknik AB, Nykoping, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 17,267. Mar. 5. 1979. abandoned. This
application May 8. 1981. Ser. No. 261,696
Int. a.' G21C 7/36
U.S. a. 376-216 2 Qaims
1. A method of monitoring the period of a nuclear reactor,
wherein a power signal representing the power of the reactor
is measured and is continuously compared with a reference
signal, and a warning signal is generated in response to the
result of said comparison, characterized in that when a differ-
ence between the power signal and the reference signal is
detected, the value of the reference signal is multiplied by a
300
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 198*
fixed constant, the polarity of which is dependent upon the
difference between the power signal and the reference signal to
reduce said difference, whereby the multiplied reference signal
is fed back to generate a new reference signal describing an
exponential function of the time to be compared with the
power signal, that the reference signal is brought to follow the
power signal as long as the latter does not change faster than a
predetermined rate of change for the reference signal, that at
1—
—
»-^
-4
I /
t
**",
i>Ai
Kl
i
i.-A(
3-
y
^
1>»I
Sv.
iii.
least one warning signal is generated, the value of which being
equal to the instant level of the reference signal multiplied by
a predetermined factor greater than one, and that the power
signal is compared also with this warning signal, said warning
signal being generated when the value of the power signal
becomes equal to or exceeds the value of said warning signal to
provide a short response time to a rapid increase of the power
signal.
4,435^57
SUPPORT FOR USED FUEL RODS IN NUOJEAR
INSTALLATIONS -^_
Friedrich Krieger, Wiirzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Gg. Noell GmbH, Wiirzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,441
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 6,
1980, 3004239
Int. C\? G21C 79/00
U.S. a. 376—272 11 Qaims
1. A structure for storing a plurality of spent fuel elements of
nuclear power plants comprising a plurality of chambers
wherein the wall separating one chamber from a plurality of
other chambers comprises only two elements in the form of
strips which strips also form all of the wall separating addi-
tional individual chambers from a plurality of other additional
chambers, and wherein said pair of strips for separating one
chamber from a plurality of other chambers are all of the same
arched shape having large concave cylindrical surfaces on one
side and large corresponding convex cylindrical surfaces on
the other side of the strip such that the spacing between the
fuel elements from each other is provided by the curved
arched strips of the structure and where the separation distance
for neighboring fuel elements is provided by one of the neigh-
boring fuel elements contacting the strip tangentially at the
convex cylindrical side surface part of the arched strip while
the other neighboring fuel element contacts the strip about
near the outer edge of the concave cylindrical side surface part
and where the distance of the neighboring fuel elements from
each other depends on the size of the curvature of the arched
strip along the neighboring sides of the adjacent fuel elements.
4,435,358
MEANS FOR nXATION OF SPENT NUCLEAR
ELEMENTS
Friedrich Krieger, Wiirzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Gg. Noell GmbH, Wiirzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,638
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 6,
1980, 3004274
Int. a.3 G21F 7/O0
U.S. a. 376—272 5 Gaims
1. In a nuclear fuel storage device for receiving and storing
in nuclear power plants a four sided spent fuel element, a
structure including at least one chamber square in cross-sec-
tion, said structure also including means for preventing relative
movements between the walls of the chamber and the fuel
element therein wherein the novel feature comprises at least
two guided surfaces inside the chamber engaging the bottom of
the fuel element at opposite sides thereof, each of the guide
surfaces being oblique in regard to the longitudinal axis of the
chamber and adapted to cause engagement between each of
the four edges of a fuel element and one of the walls of the
chamber by imparting a rotary motion to the fuel element
around the longitudinal axis of the chamber.
4,435,359
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR FABRICATING TUBES
FROM POWDER
Herbert L. Eiselstein; Darrell F. Smith, Jr., and Edward F.
Gatworthy, all of Huntington, W. Va., assignors to
Huntington Alloys, Inc., Huntington, W. Va.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,277
Int. G.3 B22F 3/02; B28B 21/42. 3/08: B29D 23/04
U.S. G. 419—3 9 Gaims
P^JO
1. An apparatus for fabricating tubes from metal powders,
the apparatus comprising a powder hopper, means for rotating
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
301
and withdrawing the mandrel from the hopper, a plurality of
arcuate tube forming dies spatially circumscribing the mandrel,
means for expanding and contracting the dies about the man-
drel, the dies and the mandrel defining a tube compaction zone
therebetween, flexible means disposed between the hopper and
the dies for preventing the powder from escaping from the
hopper, and an aperture for withdrawing the mandrel and
resultant tube through the aperture disposed after the compac-
tion zone.
7. A method for fabricating tubes from metal powders, the
method comprising:
a. introducing the powder into a hopper;
b. rotating a mandrel disposed within the hopper, the pow-
der in communication with the mandrel;
c. contracting a plurality of arcuate dies spatially disposed
about the mandrel to compact the powder in a compaction
zone formed between the mandrel and the dies to form a
tube section;
d. withdrawing the mandrel and resultant tube section;
e. expanding the dies to permit additional powder to enter
the compaction zone;
g. flexing flexible means disposed between the hopper and
the die, to prevent the powder from escaping from the
hopper; and
h. repeating steps (a) through (g) until a continuous tube of
desired length is fabricated.
4435 360
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING METAL PIECES BY
CASTING AND SINTERING OF A MEl AL ALLOY
POWDER
Jean-Pierre Trottler, Bagneux, and Michel Jeandin, Paris, both
of France, assignors to A.R.M.I.N.E.S. and S.N.E.C.M.A.,
both of Paris, France
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,110
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 27, 1981, 81 03904
Int. G.J B22F 3/00
UA G. 419-49 9 ci^^
1. A method for preparing a metal piece utilizing a formal
casting and an nonconforming airtight casing of metal soldered
ribbon of a predetermined thickness which comprises:
introducting a metal load of predetermined composition
inside said formal casting;
heating said casting under predetermined temperature and
time conditions so as to obtain a porous preform with a
plurality of open pores;
decasting said preform;
introducing said preform inside said nonconforming airtight
casing; and
heating said preform under isostatic pressure so as to execute
a formal metal piece via compactification and sintering
such that said airtight casing is distorted under the action
of said isostatic pressure and intimately contacts said
preform to transmit said isostatic pressure to said preform.
4,435,361
CORROSION INHIBITION SYSTEM CONTAINING
DICYCLOPENTADIENE SULFONATE SALTS
Michael G. DaGue, and Frederick W. Valone, both of Houston,
Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,163
Int. G.3 C23F 11/04; C09K 7/00; C04B 9/02; C07F 143/00
U.S. G. 422-12 26 Gaims
1. An oil-dispersible corrosion inhibiting solution comprising
about 0.25% to about 10% by weight of a compound repre-
sented by the formula
DHx(S03M);,{S02M)j,
«
wherein D is a dicyclopentadiene moiety, M is an alkali metal,
alkaline earth metal or ammonium cation, x is I or 2 and y is o!
I or 2, provided that y is less than or equal to x.
23. A method of protecting metals from corrosive agents in
hydrocarbon and aqueous fluids which comprises contacting
the metal with an effective amount of a compound represented
by the formula
DH;^S03M)x(S02M)^.
wherein D is a dicyclopentadiene moiety, M is an alkali metal,
alkalme earth metal or ammonium cation, x is I or 2 and y is 0,
I or 2, provided that y is less than or equal to x.
4,435,362
INTEGRAL MULTILAYER ANALYTICAL ELEMENT
FOR THE ASSAY OF TOTAL PROTEIN
Harumi Katsuyama, and Masaaki Terashima, both of Asaka,
Japan, assignors to FiOi Shashin Film Kabushiki Kaisha,
Japan
Filed Nov. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 441,062
Gaims priority, application Japan, No*. 17, 1981, 56-184080
Int. G.5 GOIN 21/78. 33/68
U.S.G. 422-56 7 Oaim,
1. An mtegral multilayer analytical element for the assay of
total protein contained in liquid sample using a biuret reaction,
said element comprising a transparent support on whichr a
reagent layer and a spreading layer are superposed, said *a-
gent layer being positioned between said spreading layer and
said transparent support;
said reagent layer containing potassium sodium tartarate, a
cupric salt, a basic compound providing a pH in excess of
about 12.0 in said element under conditions of use thereof,
an alkali-proof polymer and an alkali metal ion complex-
ing agent.
4,435,363
CONTINUOUS COUNTERCURRENT LIQUID-SOLIDS
CONTACTOR
Allyn L. Boldt, Kennewick, Wash., assignor to Exxon Nuclear
Company, Inc., Bellevue, Wash.
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 280,113
Int. G,^ BOID 11/02
U.S. G. 422-270 64 Gaims
1. An apparatus for providing countercurrent liquid-solid
contact comprising:
(a) an Archimedes' screw having a bottom end and a top end
for conveying solids uphill from said bottom end to said
top end; «
(b) a distribution system including a first housing containing
a plurality of first weirs and a plurality of first means for
maintaining open communications between said housing
and said Archimedes' screw so that liquid may pass be-
tween said screw and said housing;
(c) means for injecting solid material into said bottom end of
said Archimedes' screw;
(d) means for injecting liquid into said distribution system;
(e) means for rotatably supporting said Archimedes' screw
with its longitudinal axis at an acute angle with respect to
the horizontal;
302
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
(0 means for rotating said Archimedes' screw about said
longitudinal axis to convey said solids uphill;
(g) means for withdrawing liquid and dissolved solids after
contact with said solids from said apparatus; and
opening for increasing the rate of solid agglomerate discharge
from said fluidized bed.>
(h) means for withdrawing undissolved solid material after
contact with said liquid from said Archimedes' screw.
4 435 364
FLUIDIZED BED GASIHER OR SIMILAR DEVICE FOR
SIMULTANEOUS CLASSinCATION OF ASH AND
UNREACTED COAL
Karl S. Vorres, Western Springs, III., assignor to Institute of Gas
Technology, Chicago, III.
Division of Ser. No. 288,158, Jul. 29, 1981, Pat. No. 4,369,045.
This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 428,785
Int. a.3 ClOJ 3/56; F27B 15/00
U.S. a. 422—145 15 Oaims
^,_-
—
fiirooucr
^
vfl
U
\
c^
-y\
■■^^
ri.wDiz£o
Mi^fMt
aeo
a»
ojrnae-A/
-
STfMt ^^
c-
/ "V J* JL
VH^
iO ^'^
-<t//>/sre^AM
iv-a
Of
y^^y^A^
...^
V
1. In an apparatus for withdrawing agglomerated solids,
from a fluidized bed of solid hydrocarbonaceous particles, said
apparatus having an upright vessel containing a fluidized bed
of hydrocarbonaceous particles, said vessel having a bottom,
means defining a passage positioned at the bottom of said
vessel for withdrawal of agglomerated solids from the fluid-
ized bed, said passage having a top end, a bottom end and a
constricted opening therebetween, and an upwardly extending
portion wherein said agglomerated solids are formed, and
means for passing a gas stream upwardly into the bottom of the
vessel through said passage, the improvement which comprises
means deflned on the interior surface of said passage for guid-
ing said agglomerated solids in a helical motion during flow of
said solids through said passage from said top end of said
constricted opening to said bottom end of said constricted
opening, said guiding means comprising at least one spiral
ridge positioned on the interior surface of said constricted
4,435,365
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING TITANIUM
TETRACHLORIDE
Alan J. Morris, Oklahoma City, Okla., assignor to Kerr-McGee
Chemical Corporation, Oklahoma City, Okla.
Filed May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,334
Int. a.J COIG 2i/02
U.S. a. 423—76 8 Qaims
^■re T.C4, ceufcnot/
tOUKfOff
MCOuvrtrto i/ifi.
1. In a process for producing titanium tetrachloride from an
iron-titanium ore wherein said ore is subjected to a leaching
step where, in a digestion zone, said ore is leached, at elevated
temperatures, with a leach liquor containing hydrochloric acid
to produce a solid phase of upgraded titanium-containing
material and a spent liquid phase containing dissolved metal
chlorides; a first separation step wherein said solid phase and
said spent liquid phase are separated; an acid regeneration step
where, in an acid regeneration zone, the metal chlorides dis-
solved in the spent liquid phase are reacted at elevated temper-
atures in the presence of air and water to produce hydrochloric
acid; a chlorination step where, in a chlorination zone, said
separated solid phase is chlorinated in the presence of a carbo-
naceous reducing agent at elevated temperatures to produce a
product stream containing a titanium tetrachloride phase and
an entrained solids phase, said entrained solids phase contain-
ing metal chlorides, unreacted upgraded titanium-containing
material and unreacted reducing agent and a second separation
step wherein said titanium tetrachloride phase is separated
from said entrained solids phase, the improvements which
comprise:
combining said entrained solids phase with a liquid mdium
consisting of water or leach liquor containing hydrochlo-
ric acid and additional iron-titanium ore to dissolve said
metal chlorides in said medium and to suspend said unre-
acted titanium-containing material and unreacted reduc-
ing agent in said medium;
separating said liquid medium into a liquid phase containing
dissolved metal chlorides and a solid phase containing
unreacted titanium-containing material and unreacted
reducing agent from the chlorination product stream;
recovering chlorine values from said dissolved metal chlo-
rides in said liquid phase as hydrochloric acid by reaction
of said metal chlorides in said acid regeneration zone; and
recovering titanium values from said unreacted titanium-
containing material and unreacted reducing agent in said
solids phase as titanium tetrachloride by chlorinating said
unreacted titanium-containing material in said chlorina-
tion zone.
March 6. 1984
CHEMICAL
303
4,435,366
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONCENTRATION
OF TRACE MATERIAL FROM LARGE WATER
VOLUMES
Dieter Heitkamp, and Klaus Wagener, both of Jttlich, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Kemforschungsanlage Jiilich Gcsell-
schaft mit beschrMnkter Haftung, Jiilich, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Continuation of Set. No. 104,811, Dec. 18, 1979, abandoned.
This application May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,828
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Genn«iy, Apr. 7,
1979, 2914203
Int. a.J BOID 15/02
U.S. a. 423—6 12 Claims
phosphoric acid, where, in the first cycle of the process, wet
process phosphoric acid feed solution is passed through an
extraction means to provide a uranium rich organic solvent
stream containing di-alkyl phosphoric acid and trialkylphos-
phine oxide extractants and an oxidized, aqueous raffinate acid
stream, and wherein the uranium rich solvent stream is passed
through a reductive stripper means, to provide a barren, or-
ganic solvent stream which contains entrained, reduced iron
containing phosphoric acid, and a product acid stream which is
oxidized and passed to the second cycle of the uranium recov-
ery process; the improvement comprising, in the first cycle of
the process, contacting the barren, organic solvent stream
which contains entrained, reduced iron containing phosphoric
acid exiting the stripper means, and before extraction, with an
acid wash of oxidized raffinate acid, in an amount effective to
remove about 70% to 98% of the entrained phosphoric acid.
6. A method of concentrating a trace material dissolved in a
body of water having a layer with a natural current by accu-
mulation of the trace material on the surface areas of carrier
bodies having a density less than that of water, the method
comprising the steps of:
discharging the carrier bodies into the body of water at a
discharge station positioned at a selected depth in the
layer, said body of water being sea water;
allowing the carrier bodies to rise vertically through the
layer while being transported horizontally by the current;
accumulating the trace material on the exposed surface areas
of the carrier bodies by adsorption as the carrier bodies
rise and are transported, said trace material being uranium;
collecting the carrier bodies downstream of the discharging
station after the carrier bodies have risen through the
layer and have accumulated trace materials thereon;
removing trace material from the carrier bodies after the
carrier bodies have been collected; and
returning the carrier bodies with the trace material removed
therefrom upstream to the discharge station for subse-
quent discharge to again adsorb trace material in the layer
of the body of water as the current brings additional trace
material into proximity with the carrier bodies.
c>eic I
OlUd --OIIMW
EITIUTOI
CTCLES
UFFIItU
4,435,368
HYDROMETALLURGICAL PROCESS FOR SELECTIVE
DISSOLUTION OF MIXTURES OF OXY COMPOUNDS
Jean-Michel Demarthe, Viroflay; Paolo Fossi, Elancourt, and
Louis Gandon, Rambouillet, all of France, assignors to Mit-
subishi Rayon Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 950,446, Oct. 11, 1978, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 904,306, May 9, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 765,813, Feb. 4, 1977,
abandoned. ThU application Oct. 22, 1979, Ser. No. 86,791
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 6. 1976, 76 03266
Int. CI.' COIG 5/00. 51/00. 53/00. 21/00
U.S. a. 423—40 1 aaim
4,435,367
BARREN SOLVENT WASH BY OXIDIZED RAFRNATE
AaD IN THE PROCESS OF URANIUM EXTRACTION
FROM PHOSPHORIC ACID
Edward J. Steck, Lakeland, Fla., assignor to Wyoming Mineral
Corporation, Lakewood, Colo.
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,666
Int. a.i COIG 43/00
U.S. a. 423—10 9 Qaims
'"^FHO MID
STt^
t;
kiz
TT
1. In the method of recovering uranium from wet process
1. A process for the selective dissolution of oxygenated
compounds containing at least a nickel compound selected
from the group consisting of nickel oxide, nickel carbonate and
mixtures thereof, present in a mixture of oxygenated com-
pounds containing said nickel compound and at least cobalt,
copper and lead, comprising suspending the mixture of the
oxygenated compounds in an aqueous phase, treating the re-
sulting aqueous suspension at a pH exceeding about 1 and at a
temperature of from about 60* to 100* C. with chlorine to
selectively solubilize said nickel compound while said cobalt,
copper and lead remain in an essentially insoluble residue, and
separating the aqueous solution conuining the dissolved said
nickel compound from the msoluble residue.
304
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,369
HYDROMETALLURGICAL PROCESS FOR
EXTRACTION OF NICKEL
Charles H. Simpson, 7749 E. Chaparrel Rd., Scottsdale, Ariz.
85253
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 275,763, Jun. 22, 1981. This
application Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 402,977
Int. a.3 COIG 53/09
U.S. a. 423—147 4 Qaims
con dioxide values contained in the clarifled solution with
resultant precipitation of said alkali metal fluosilicate;
(e) removing the solid alkali metal fluosilicate and monocal-
cium phosphate and hydrolyzing the alkali metal fluosili-
cate in an aqueous medium in the presence of the calcium
ion provided by the monocalcium phosphate to convert
the alkali metal fluosilicate and form calcium fluoride and
silicon dioxide;
^'
^,
onow
cwiimnD
cm
„J '
a!
'""SSSI
:XC
WCVGLC
Mi>04
lCACm
KMIHTION
90L<0
LEacH
IVSOUE
I. A hydrometallurgical process for extracting nickel from
raw nickel oxide-laterite ore comprising the steps of
(a) contacting said comminuted nickel bearing minerals in an
extraction zone with an aqueous solution containing stoi-
chiometric amounts of metal and chloride ions necessary
to displace nickel contained in the ore and including
(i) at least one oxidizing agent selected from the class of
sodium hypochlorite, calcium hypochlorite and potas-
sium hypochlorite;
(ii) at least one metal chloride selected from the group
consisting of aluminum chloride, cupric chloride, cop-
per chloride and tin chloride,
(iii) sodium chloride,
(iv) sulfuric acid, and
(v) magnesium
at an elevated temperature and continuing said contact to
form an extraction mixture slurry including
(vi) a liquid component comprising an aqueous solution
containing extracted nickel from said comminuted min-
erals dissolved therein, and
(vii) a solid tailing component, and
(b) separating said liquid and components of said extraction
mixture slurry.
4,435,370
PREPARATION OF MONOCALOUM PHOSPHATE
AND/OR PHOSPHORIC ACID FROM PHOSPHATE
ROCK
Dysart E. Holcomb, Shreveport, La.; Erhart K. Drechsel, Mont-
gomery, Tex., and John B. Sardisco, Shreveport, La., assign-
ors to Pennzoil Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,856
Int. a.J COIB 25/22. 25/32
U.S. a. 423—158 10 Oaims
1. A process for the production of monocalcium phosphate
and phosphoric acid, and calcium fluoride, which comprises:
(a) acidulating phosphate rock with an excess of phosphoric
acid in the presence of silicon dioxide to produce an acidu-
lation reaction product mixture containing monocalcium
phosphate, phosphoric acid, and insoluble solids;
(b) separating insoluble solids from the mixture to recover a
clarifled solution of mohocalcium phosphate in phos-
phoric acid;
(c) cooling the clarifled solution to precipitate at least a
portion of the monocalcium phosphate;
(d) recovering a jjortion of the monocalcium phosphate solid
and passing the resulting solution to a defluorination stage
wherein sufficient alkali metal ion is added to cause forma-
tion of alkali metal fluosilicate with the fluoride and sili-
Jl.
•CIOULATION
RCACTOA
— r;~
I «H«tTOI» I ) • SAND, SLUOOC
DCfUJORMATION
AND
> WCP PRODUCT
«^.. ^„-""&asT""'*
'^"' ,.'"" i_£^« «.S0.
G
OYPSUM
ntcion ]«>
eiTPSUM
MACTOa
^ 76
SCPASATWJ7— » OtPiUM
A.
~n
D-"
ltH,PCI,*H,P04
-jir
(0 removing the solid calcium fluoride and silicon dioxide
from the mixture;
(g) recycling the alkali metal ion and excess monocalcium
phosphate hydrolysis solution to the defluorination stage;
and
(h) removing the phosphoric acid and monocalcium phos-
phate process liquids from the defluorination reactor.
4,435,371
SULFUR REMOVAL FROM A GAS STREAM
Kenneth J. Freeh, Tallmadge, and James J. Tazuma, Stow, both
of Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear Tire A Rubber Company,
Akron, Ohio
Filed Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,812
Int. a.J BOID 53/34
U.S. a. 423—228 11 Claims
1. A process for removing hydrogen sulflde, sulfldes and
mercaptans from a gas stream which comprises the steps in
combination of:
(a) contacting the gas stream with an oxide of a metal se-
lected from the group consisting of iron, chromium, co-
balt, lead, manganese, molybdenum, nickel, copper, vana-
dium, zinc, tungsten, and antimony;
(b) introducing ammonia onto the metal oxide; and
(c) subsequently or concurrently introducing hydrogen
peroxide onto the metal oxide while continuing to contact
the gas stream with the metal oxide.
4,435,372
PRODUCTION OF PURinED STRONG WET-PROCESS
PHOSPHORIC ACID
Alva W. Frazier, and Ewell F. Dillard, both of Florence, Ala.,
assignors to Tennessee Valley Authority, Muscle Shoals, Ala.
Continuation of Ser. No. 417,804, Sep. 13, 1982, now Defensive
Publication No. T103,202. This application Jan. 17, 1983, Ser.
No. 458,403
Int. CV COIB 25/J6
U.S. a. 423—321 R 26 Qaims
1. In an improved process for the preparation of purifled
strong phosphoric acid containing greater than about 40
weight percent P2O5 by the wet process wherein:
A. phosphate rock and phosphoric acid are added to a flrst
reaction zone, said flrst reaction zone containing a flrst
slurry containing the congeneric impurities comprising
Fe203. AI2O3, MgO, and F, and said first slurry compris-
ing calcium sulfate, monocalcium phosphate, phosphoric
acid, and dissolved calcium, wherein said added phos-
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
303
phate rock is converted to monocalcium phosphate, cal-
cium sulfate, and phosphoric acid, and wherein said flrst
slurry is maintained at a soluble sulfate concentration less
than the stoichiometric amount required for the formation
of calcium sulfate;
B. sulfuric acid is added to a second reaction zone which
contains a second slurry containing said congeneric impu-
rities as said first slurry, supra, and said second slurry
comprising calcium sulfate, monocalcium phosphate,
phosphate rock, and sulfuric acid, wherein said sulfuric
acid is reacted with monocalcium phosphate and said
phosphate rock to effect the formation of calcium sulfate
and phosphoric acid, and second slurry being maintained
at a temperature in the range from about 80* C. to about
130* C. for a period of time ranging from about 1 to about
6 hours, and said second slurry being maintained at a
soluble sulfate concentration greater than the stoichiomet-
ric amount required for the formation of calcium sulfate
with the dissolved calcium;
C. a portion of said first slurry is caused to be in intimate
contact with at least a portion of said second slurry and
simultaneously therewith a portion of said second slurry is
caused to be in intimate contact with at least a portion of
said first slurry; and
D. a portion of said second slurry, separate from $4id portion
thereof in intimate contact with said first slujfry, is intro-
duced into separating means wherefrom is recovered as
the liquid product, wet-process phosphoric acid, and as
the solid byproduct, calcium sulfate hemihydrate, to wit,
CaSO4.0.5H2O;
the improvement in combination therewith for both effecting
desirable environmental fluorine evolution abatement and for
eminently improving on the wet acid product purification as it
relates to certain congeneric impurities originally present
therein, which improvement comprises the steps of:
(1) adjusting the Al203:MgO weight ratio of said first slurry
to the range of between about 2 and about 10;
(2) adjusting the Fe203 concentration of said first slurry to a
range of between about 2.5 and about 5.0 percent by
weight to effect the precipitotion therein of the two crys-
talline compounds (Na,K)2SiF6 and (Ca,Mg)Al2F8.2H20,
said Fe203 functioning as a catalyst;
(3) adjusting the fluorine concentration of said second slurry
to the range of between about 1.5xwt % AI2O3+O.7 to
about 1.5xwt % AI2O3-1- 1.3 percent by weight to subse-
quently prevent precipitation therein of (Fe,Al)3KHi4.
(P04)8.4H20 and to effect the precipitation therein of the
crystalline compounds (Ca,Mg)Al2F8.2H20 and (Na,K)-
2SiF6;
(4) maintaining the temperature of said second slurry in the
range between about 80° C. to about 130* C. for a period
of time ranging from about 1 hour to about 6 hours; and
(5) subsequently introducing at least a portion of said second
slurry into separating means to effect removal therefrom
of CaSO4.0.5H2O and said precipitated compounds
(Na,K)2SiF6 and {Ca,Mg)Al2F8.2H20;
said improved process characterized by the fact that the con-
centration of the wet-process phosphoric acid congeneric
impurities comprising AI2O3 and MgO are reduced therein in
the range from about 30 to about 90 percent.
including an agglomeration or assemblage of randomly ori-
ented melt-extracted or melt-spun fibres made by melt extract-
ing or melt spinning a platinum group metal or ah alloy con-
taining at least one platinum group metal and passing a gas
stream containing ammonia and oxygen through said assembly.
4,435.374
METHOD OF PRODUCING CARBON MONOXIDE AND
HYDROGEN BY GASinCATION OF SOLID
CARBONACEOUS MATERIAL INVOLVING
MICROWAVE IRRADIATION
John L. Helm, Jr., 171 E. 89th St., New York, N.Y. 10028
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,846
Int. CV COIB 31/18
U.S. a. 423-415 A 9 a„„,
fib dr
70' fi
1
■fl
CO. Hf , HiO
nACTOH
T
1
\
S7dA*f
A ft>7/
1
ISKW M
fl.lCT»Kirr Ml
,
OS /* 4r
»-4»
1. A method for gasifying carbon of solid carbonaceous
material to produce carbon monoxide and hydrogen, which
comprises providing a bed of solid carbonaceous material with
interstices in the bed, infiltrating superheated steam through
said interstices thereby contacting said solid carbonaceous
material with said superheated steam, and during said infiltra-
tion irradiating the contact product of said solid carbonaceous
material and superheated steam with an amount of microwave
energy sufficient to effect gasification of the carbon.
4,435,373
nBRE PACKS FOR AMMONIA OXIDATION
Arthur G. Knapton, Henley on Thames, and Gordon L. Selman,
Sonning Common, Near Reading, both of England, assignors
to Johnson, Matthey A Co., Limited, London, England
Division of Ser. No. 197,683, Oct. 16, 1980, Pat. No. 4,375,426.
This application Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 413,163
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 18, 1979.
7936209
Int. a.s COIB 21/26
U.S. a. 423—403 13 Qalms
1. A process for the production of nitric oxide by the oxida-
tion of ammonia comprising providing a catalyst assembly
4,435,375
METHOD FOR PRODUCING A CARBON HLAMENT
AND DERIVATIVES THEREOF
Shohei Tamura, c/o Tohdai-shokuln-shukusha, 8, Komaba 4-
chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo; Mizuka Sano, Koganei; Hiroo
Inokuchi, Okazaki; Koshiro Toriumi, Okazaki, and Naokl
Sato, Okazaki, all of Japan, assignors to Shohei Tamura,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,604
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1981, 56^956
Int. Q.J COIB 31/3a 31/04: DOIF 9/12
U.S. Q. 423-439 7 Qaims
1. A method for producing a graphite filament which com-
prises purifying a graphite material, heating the resulting puri-
fied graphite material in a plasma having an electron tempera-
306
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
ture of at least 3,400* C. under a pressure of about 1 atm. to
form a carbon filament, then subjecting the carbon filament to
10
heat treatment at a temperature of at least 2,500° C. to effect
graphitization thereof.
surface into carbon black which has a polar surface and
thereby to improve the compatibility of the carbon black with
polar binders for lacquers and printing inks, comprising intro-
ducing the powdery carbon black into a reaction zone, said
reaction zone having an upper and a lower portion, introduc-
ing into the lower reaction zone an oxidation agent whereby
said oxidation agent flows from the lowest part of the reaction
zone up through the carbon black in said reaction zone, contin-
uously agitating said carbon black in said reaction zone, said
reaction zone being a vertical, cylindrical reactor, containing a
shaft in the middle axis of said reactor, said shaft being
equipped with stirrer arms brushing the entire cylinder cross
section in an overwhelmingly horizontal position, said arms
being displaced in the manner of tiers over the height of the
reactor and rotating with a speed such that the stirrer arm
points move between 0.2 and 2.0 m/sec, whereby the volume
of the oxidation agent stream is dimensioned so that the reac-
tion temperature in the reactor remains below about ISO* C,
after the carbon black reaches the desired degree of oxidation,
removing the surplus of oxidation agent by flushing air while
maintaining the above-mentioned stirring movement and re-
covering the treated carbon black product in a powdery form
without compression or agglomeration of the carbon black.
4,435^76
HBROUS CARBON PRODUCTION
Randall A. Porter, and Larry E. Reed, both of Bartlesville,
Okla., assignors to Phillips Petroleum Company, Bartlesville,
Okla.
Filed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,349
Int. a.3 DOIF 9/12; COIB 31/02. 3/24
U.S. a. 423—447.3 13 Qalms
1. A process of decreasing the amount of externally-supplied
carrier gas required in a pyrolysis operation for producing
carbon particles from a carbonaceous feed comprising alkanes
having from about 4 to about 10 carbon atoms comprising the
steps of: (1) pyrolyzing the feed in a pyrolysis zone at a temper-
ature ranging from about SOO* C. to about 800* C, (2) remov-
ing hydrocarbon-containing effluent from the pyrolysis zone,
(3) treating the effluent to remove hydrogen therefrom, and (4)
employing the treated effluent as a carrier for carbonaceous
feed to the pyrolysis zone.
4,435,377
OXIDATIVE AFTER-TREATMENT OF CARBON BLACK
Lothar Rottabiihr, Hiirth, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Degussa Aktiengesellsciiaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of
Gcmaay
Continuation of Ser. No. 313,028, Oct. 19, 1981, abandoned.
This application Oct. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 433,072
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 30,
1980 3041188
Int. a.i C09C 1/56. 1/48; COIB 31/02
U.S. a. 423—460 9 Claims
1. A process for the after-treatment of powdery carbon
black with an oxidation agent which is gaseous, va[>orous or
aerosol-like in order to convert carbon black with a non-polar
4,435,378
PROCESS FOR REMOVING EXTRACTABLE
SUBSTANCES FROM CARBON BLACK
Reinhold Reck, Maintal; Gerhard Kiihner, Hanau; Manfred
VoU, Erlensee, and Peter Kleinschmit, Hanau, all of Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft, Frank-
furt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 376,051
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 13,
1981 3118907
Int. a.3 COIB 31/02. 31/00; C09C 1/56
U.S. a. 423—461 7 Qaims
1. A process for removing toluene extractable substances
from powdery carbon blacks by treatment with a stream of gas
at an elevated temperature comprising treating powdery car-
bon black containing 0.15 to 1.5% by weight of toluene ex-
tractable substances with an oxygen containing gas in a fluid-
ized bed at a temperature from 200* to 320° C.
4,435,379
PROCESS FOR TREATING CHLORINATED
HYDROCARBONS
Robert S. Olson, Lafayette; Joseph P. Surls, Jr., Walnut Creek,
and Ben F. West, Concord, all of Calif., assignors to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Aug. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 409,383
Int. a.^ COIB 9/02; COIG 27/00. 41/00, 25/00
U.S. a. 423—472 11 Claims
1. A process for using a chlorinated hydrocarbon to convert
a metal oxide to a metal chloride or metal oxychloride, said
process consisting essentially of:
contacting at reactive conditions at least one gaseous chlori-
nated hydrocarbon of the formula CjH^lc. wherein "a"
is an integer greater than 1, "c" is an integer greater than
0 and "b" is an integer equal to at least 0, with a sufflcient
quantity of a suitable refractory metal oxide and a suffl-
cient quantity of chlorine to convert substantially all of
the carbon atoms of the chlorinated hydrocarbon to car-
bon monoxide or carbon dioxide and to convert any hy-
drogen moieties present on the chlorinated hydrocarbon
to hydrogen chloride, wherein the ratio of carbon atoms
present to oxygen atoms available for reaction is in the
range from about 1:1 to about 1:2 and the metal oxide is
chlorinated contemporaneously with the oxidation of the
chlorinated hydrocarbon.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
307
4,435 380
HUMECTANTS FOr'cLEAR GEL DENTIFRICE
COMPOSITIONS
Morton Pader, Teaneck, N J., assignor to Lever Brothers Com-
pany, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 344,238, Jan. 29, 1982,
abandoned. This application Apr. 18, 1983, Ser. No. 485,913
Int. a.3 A61K 7/16
U.S. a. 424-49 23 Qaims
1. A visually clear dentifrice composition comprising about
20 to 70% by weight of humectant solids, about 5 to 50% by
weight of an abrasive, and water,
(a) the humectant solids comprising a hydrogenated hydro-
lyzed polysaccharide wherein said hydrogenated hydro-
lyzed polysaccharide contains 25% or less maltitol and at
least about 20 to 30% by weight DPio oligosaccharides or
higher;
(b) said abrasive being capable of:
(i) cleaning and polishing human teeth without damaging
said teeth, and of
(ii) forming a clear gel when combined with the humec-
tant system,
(c) the amount of water and the distribution of the molecular
weights of said hydrogenated hydrolyzed polysaccharide
being such as to render the dentifrice composition translu-
cent or transparent.
4,435,38>
THIOURONIUM PHOSPHONATES FOR USE IN
DENTAL TREATMENTS
Edward E. nagg. Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow Chemi-
cal Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Jul. 18, 1983, Ser. No. 514,999
Int. a.5 A61K 7/16. 7/22
U.S. a. 424-54 9 Qaims
1. A method for treating the teeth and gums of animals
which comprises applying to the dental surfaces an effective
amount of a compound corresponding to the formula
,HN o
C«H2,+ iSC .(HO)2P
NH2 R
in which n is an integer of from about 10 to about 14, and R is
hydrogen, methyl or phenyl.
4,435,382
ANHYDROUS ALCOHOLIC ANTIPERSPIRANT
SUSPENSION COMPOSITION CONTAINING CERTAIN
ALUMINUM OR ALUMINUM/ZIRCONIUM SALT
GLYONE COMPLEXES
Chung T. Shin, Livingston, and Navin Geria, Elizabeth, both of
N.J., assignors to Bristol-Myers Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 168,925
Int. a.3 A61K 7/34. 7/38
U.S. a 424-66 21 Qaims
1. A roll-on antiperspirant suspension composition adapted
to be dispensed from a roll-on dispenser comprising an anhy-
drous ethyl alcohol vehicle containing an effective amount of
a suspending agent and an antiperspirant effective amount of
an astringent salt glycine complex suspended in said alcoholic
vehicle, said complex being selected from the group consisting
of aluminum/zirconium/tetrachlorohydrate glycine com-
plexes; aluminum/zirconium/trichlorohydrate glycine com-
plexes; aluminum/zirconium/pentachlorohydrate glycine
complexes; aluminum/zirconium/octachlorohydrate glycine
complexes; and aluminum/sesquichlorohydrate glycine com-
plexes and mixtures of said complexes; said composition con-
taining from about 20% to about 65% by weight of anhydrous
ethyl alcohol.
4,435383
SLOW RELEASE PESTICIDE FORMULATIONS
Robert D. Wysong, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 184,209, Sep. 5, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 284,700
Int. Q.^ AOIN 25/10; A61K 31/74
U.S. Q. 424-78 30 Q»inu
1. A solid one-phase pesticidal composition containing no
solvent and consisting essentially of about 5 to 75 weight %
pesticide in homogeneous combination with a cross-linked
copolymer prepared from
(a) about 40 to 80% by weight of a hydrophobic barrier
monomer selected from styrene and a-methyl styrene, and
(b) about 20 to 60% by weight of one or more unsaturated
mono- or di-carboxylic acids in which all or part of the
carboxyl groups may be in the anhydride form,
where 5 to 95% of the available carboxyl groups in said co-
polymer are cross-linked with a cross-linking agent selected
from (i) one or more aromatic polyfunctions! amines, option-
ally in combination with one or more aromatic polyfunctional
isocyanates, aliphatic polyfunctional amines, polyols or poly-
functional epoxides.
4 435 384
TRANSFER FACTOR COMPOSITION AND SKIN
TREATMENT
Stanley L. Warren, Hallendale, Fla., assignor to Viragcn, Inc.,
Hasbrouck HeighU, N.J.
Filed Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,816
Int. CV A61K 35/14. 39/00
U.S. Q. 424-101 17 Qtlm,
I. A topical composition for dermatological treatment com-
prising an ointment-type vehicle and an effective amount of
transfer factor dispersed therein.
II. A method of dermatological treatment comprising ap-
plying to the affected skin a topical composition comprising a
vehicle including transfer factor dispersed therein.
4,435,385
N-ACYL-POLYPEPTIDES AND PROCESSES FOR THE
PRODUCTION THEREOF
Wilfried Bauer, Lampenberg, and Janos Pless, Basel, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Sandoz Ltd., Basel, Switzerland
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 353,900
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 6, 1981,
1531/81; Sep. 4, 1981, 5723/81
Int. Q.' A61K 37/00; C07C 103/52
U.S. Q. 424-177 20 Qaims
1. An N-acyl-polypeptide of formula I,
AZ
I I
CH2S.Y1
Y2-SCH2
(I)
Acyl-N-CH-CO-NH-CH-CO-B-C-D-E-NH-CH-F
1 2 3 4 3 6 7
where
"Acyl" is
(a) R'CO— wherein R' is Ci.2oalkyl. C3.2oalkenyl. C3.
20alkinyl, phenyl, naphthyl or C7.io(phenylalkyI);
(b) R''S02— wherein R^' is Ci.ioalkyl. phenyl or C7.
I0(phenylalkyl);
(c) R'^'O— CO— wherein K"' m Cj-ioalkyl or C7.io(phe-
nylalkyl); and
\
(d) N-CO-.
wherein
\ \
N— C— or N— SO2—
308
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
R'^'is hydrogen, Ci.ioalkyl, phenyl or C7.io(phenylal-
kyl) and
R'^is hydrogen or Ci-ioalkyl,
A is hydrogen or C|.3alkyl,
>N— CH(Z)— CO— is
(a) an (L)- or (D)-phenylalanine residue optionally ring-
substituted by halogen, NO2, NH2, OH, Ci-jalkyl and-
/or Cioalkoxy, or
(b) the residue of a natural a-amino acid in which Z is
alkyl of 3 to 4 carbon atoms,
B is — Phe — optionally ring-substituted by halogen, NO2,
NH2, OH, Ci.jalkyl and/or Ci.jalkoxy,
C is — Trp — or (D)-Trp- optionally a-N-methylated and
optionally benzene-ring-substituted by halogen, NO2,
NH2, OH, Cioalkyl and/or Cioalkoxy,
D is — Lys — optionally a-N-methylated and optionally
«-N-Ci.3alkylated,
E is — Thr— or —(D) — Thr— optionally a-N-methylated,
F is a group of formula — COORi, — CH2OR2,
— CO— N
/
\
R3
nmoles/mg of fatty acids prepared by the method which
comprises:
(i) hydrolyzing an endotoxin extract derived from En-
terobacteriaciae with an acid capable of hydrolyzing
the same;
(ii) lyophilizing the hydrolyzed product to obtain crude
lipid A;
(iii) treating crude lipid A with a first solvent capable of
dissolving fatty acids contained therein to remove said
fatty acids from a resulting insoluble product
(iv) dissolving the resulting insoluble product in a second
solvent capable of dissolving the same; and
(v) passing the resulting solution through a chromato-
graphic column of a type which will allow elution of
the desired product to obtain the refined detoxified
endotoxin;
(b) an acetone precipitated by-product of endotoxic glyco-
lipids extracted with a mixture of chloroform and metha-
nol;
(c) trehalose dimycolate; and
(d) a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
R4
or
O
— CO— N — ^J
wherein
Rl is hydrogen or Ci-salkyl,
R2 is hydrogen or the residue of a physiologically accept-
able, physiologically hydrolysable ester,
R3 is hydrogen or methyl,
R4 is — CH(R5)— X,
R5 is hydrogen, — (CH2)2— OH, — (CH2)3— OH, — CH-
2— OH, — CH(CH3)— OH or isobutyl, and
X is a group of formula — COORi, — CH2OR2 or
4,435,387
POLY-CATION SALTS OF BIS (OR TRIS)
4.0.P0LYHEX0SE-THI0-ARYLENE SULFATE
DERIVATIVES
Robert E. Schaub, Upper Saddle River, N.J.; Janis Upeslacis,
Pomona, and Seymour Bernstein, New City, both of N.Y.,
assignors to American Cyananiid Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Oct. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 436,750
Int. a.3 A61K 31/70: C07H 15/22
U.S. a. 424—180 42 Oaims
19. A method of modulating the complement system in a
body fluid which comprises subjecting said body fluid to the
action of an effective complement modulating amount of a
pharmaceutically acceptable compound selected from those of
the formula:
— CO— N
/
\
R6
R7
wherein
Rl and R2 are as defined above,
R6 is hydrogen or Cioalkyl and
R7 is hydrogen, Ci^alkyl, phenyl or CT-iophenylalkyl,
the group — CH(R5) — X having the (D)- or (L)-configura-
tion, and Y] and Y2 are each hydrogen or together repre-
sent a direct bond, whereby the residues in the 2- and
7-position each independently have the (L)- or (D)-con-
figuration, and with the proviso that (L)- and/or (D)-cys-
teine residues are present at the 2- and 7-positions only, or
a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or complex thereof.
4435386
REFINED DETOXinED ENDOTOXIN PRODUCT
Edgar E. Ribi, and Cantrell John L., both of Hamilton, Mont.,
assignors to Ribi ImmunoChem Research, Inc., Hamilton,
Mont.
FUed May 26, 1982, Ser. No. 382,406
lat. a.3 A61K 37/00: AOIN 65/00: C07G 7/00
U.S. a. 424—177 11 Claims
1. A therapeutic composition for imparting immunotherapy
comprising an effective amount of each of:
(a) refined detoxified endotoxin having no detectable 2-keto-
3-deoxyoctanoate and having between 350 and 473 nmo-
les/mg of phosphorus and between about 17(X) and 2(XX)
XO
( = a or /J)
CH2OX CH2OX ^_
OX OX
0
B-
J«
wherein X is — SO3M and M is a nontoxic pharmaceutically
acceptable cation salt, wherein the salt forming moiety is se-
lected from the group consisting of alkali metal, alkaline earth
metal, aluminum, ammonia, zinc and substituted ammonia
selected from the group consisting of trialkylamine (C1-C6),
piperidine, pyrazine, alkanolamine (C2-C6) and cycloalkyla-
mine (C3-C6); B is selected from the group consisting of
— NHCO— and — NHSO2— ; n is an integer 2 or 1; and Z is an
arylene selected from the group consisting of: ^
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
309
-continued
CH3-/ ^and ^ y-o-I \^
V
CH3
HQ
O
0CH3 0CH3
17
TT-OR2
wherein
Rl is hydrogen or an acyl group selected from alkanoyl of 2
to 5 carbon atoms, palmityl, stearyl, lauryl, oleyl, chloro-
acetyl, benzoyl, adamantanecarbonyl, cyclopropanecar-
bonyl, cyclohexanecarbonyl, /3-cyclohexylpropionyl,
phenylacetyl, phenoxyacetyl, mandelyl, 2-thi6nylacetyl,
alkyl-, aryl- and aralkylsulfonyl, substituted aryl- and
aralkylsulfonyl, wherein the substituents on the aryl por-
tions are halogen, nitro and alkoxy groups, succinyl, mal-
eyl, fumaryl, malonyl and phthalyl;
R2 is acyl, wherein acyl is as defined in Ri;
R3 is hydrogen or acyl, wherein acyl is as defined in Ri; or
R2 and R3 are together a carbonyl group linking the
3"-and 4"-hydroxyl groups;
R4 is hydrogen or acyl, wherein acyl is as defined in Ri;
Rs is selected from the group consisting of
N— N
/— (CH2)„
^ \
Q
wherein I
n is 0-2, and
Q is selected from the gorup consisting of CH2. CR6R7,
CHR6. CHR7. NH,NR6, O. S. SO2. CHOH, CHOR6.
CHOR7.
O— CHj
CR6— O— C— R6
O— CH2
4,435,388
TYLOSIN 20-IMINO.20-DEOXO-4"-ACYL DERIVATIVES,
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS AND METHOD
OF USE
Ashit K. Ganguly, Upper Montclain Alan K. Mallams, West
Orange, and Yi-Tsung Liu, Parsippany, all of N.J., assignors
to Scbering Corporation, Kenilworth, N.J.
Filed Jun. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 386,834
Int. C1.5 A61K 31/71: C07H 17/08
U.S. a. 424—180 45 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
CHCOOH. CHCOOR6, CHCONH2. and CHCONR6R7.
wherein Re and R7 may be the same or different each
being a member of the group consisting of (Ci-«)alkyl,
(C7-cio)aralkyl and (C6-cio)aryl including X-substituted
aryl and aralkyl, wherein X is halogen, trifluoromethyl,
(C1-C6) alkoxy, or (Ci-c*) alkylcarbonyl; N—NH— aral-
kyl, and
iT N-NH-C-NH2;
II
and the non-toxic pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition
salts thereof.
20. A method of eliciting an antibactrial response in a mam-
mal having a gram positive bacterial infection which comprises
administering to the mammal a therapeutically effective quan-
tity of a compound according to claim 1.
4,435,389
COMPOSITION FOR PROMOTING GROWTH OF
BinDOBACTERIA
Masahiko Mutai, Higashi Yamato; Tsuneo Terashima, Musashi
Murayama; Tokutaro Takahashi, Tokyo; Ryuichiro Tanaka,
Tachikawa; Akio Kuroda, Nishinomiya; Sadao Ueyama, Kobe,
and Keisuke Matsumoto, FHJiidera, all of Japan, assignors to
Kabushiki Kaisha Yakult Honsha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,463
Int. a.3 A61K 31/71: C12P 19/04
U.S. a. 424—181 1 Gaim
1. A composition for promoting growth of bifidobacteria
consisting essentially of a mixture of oligosaccharides repre-
sented by the general formula Gal-(Gal)«-Glc, wherein Gal
denotes a galactose residue, Glc a glucose residue and n an
integer of 1 to 4, and in which the galactose-galactose linkage
is ;3-l,3, /3-l,4 or fi-\,b with the /3-l,6 linkage being predomi-
nant and the galactose-glucose linkage is /3-l,3, /3-l,4 or /3-l,6
with the ;3-l,4 linkage being predominant; said oligosaccha-
rides being produced by reacting lactose or a lactose-contain-
ing material with /3-galactosidase produced by Aspergillus
oryzae at a temperature and time sufficient to produce said
composition.
4,435,390
HYDROCORTISONE DERIVATIVES, THE
PREPARATION AND USE THEREOF
Klaus Annen; Henry Laurent; Helmut Hoftneister, and Rudolf
Wiechert, all of Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Sobering Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and Bergkamen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Aug. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 409,263
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 18,
1981 3133082
Int. a.' C07J 5/00: A61K 31/56
U.S. a. 424—243 27 Claims
1. A hydrocortisone derivative of the formula
O
310
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
OCO(CH2)«OR2
Ri
wherein
is a single bond or a double bond,
n is 1 or 2,
Rl is hydrogen or methyl,
R2 is alkyl of 1-6 carbon atoms, and
R3 is hydrogen or alkanoyl of 2-6 carbon atoms.
27. A method of treating inflammation in a patient in need of
such treatment comprising administering an amount of a com-
pound of claim 1 effective for such treatment.
4,435,391
DIBENZOXAZEPINE DERIVATIVE, AND
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION COMPRISING
THE SAME
Kazuo Sasahara, Omiya; Masamitsu Honda, Tokyo; Masuo
Koizumi, Tokyo; Yasushi Murakami, Tokyo; Tomohiro Nei-
chi, Tokorozawa; Hiroshi Nakakimura, Kamakura; Yukifumi
Noda; Hiroshi Matsushita, both of Tokyo, and Shun-ichi
Hata, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Chugai Seiyaku
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 263,184, May 13, 1981,
abandoned. This application Mar. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 354,651
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 28, 1980, 55-70176
Int. a.3 C07D 273/06; A61K i7/55
U.S. a. 424—244 20 Claims
1. A dibenzoxazepine derivative of the formula:
(D
wherein R| is phenyl or p-methoxyphenyl, R2 is hydrogen or
methyl, and R3 is methoxyphenethyl, 3-(p-fluorobenzoyl)-pro-
pyl, cyclopropylmethyl or
— (CH2)2— phenyl-NHCOCH
CHCOOC2H5
or a salt thereof.
3. A pharmaceutical agent which comprises as an effective
component at least one 2,S-benzodiazocine derivative repre-
sented by the formula
f
(I)
I
R3
wherein R| is phenyl or p-methoxyphenyl, R2 is hydrogen or
methyl, and R3 is methoxyphenethyl, 3-(p-fluorobenzoyl)-pro-
pyl, cyclopropylmethyl radical or
—(CH2)2— phenyl-NHCOCH
CHCOOC2H5
(Ri)«
(I) or salts of said derivatives.
COOR2
wherein the carboxy substituent is in the 6- or 8-position; Ri is
a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a lower alkyl group or a
lower alkoxy group; n is an integer of 1 or 2 provided that each
Rl is the same or different when n is 2; R2 is a hydrogen atom
or a lower alkyl group; R3 is a lower alkyl group, a phenyl
group which may have a m-CH3 group substituent or a styryl
group; or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
4,43532
2,5-BENZODIAZOaNE DERIVATIVES AND SALTS
THEREOF, AS WELL AS PHARMACEUTICAL AGENT
COMPRISING AS EFFECHVE COMPONENT AT LEAST
ONE OF THE DERIVATIVES AND SALTS
Masatoshi Ban, Gifii; Ke^ji Miura, Kasugai; Yutaka Baba,
Bisal; Noriyuki Iwata; Akira Fukul, both of Kasugai; Mikio
Hori, Gifu; Hi^lnie FiOlmura, Kyoto, and Eiichi Suenaga,
Kunitachi, all of Japan, assignors to Sanwa Kagaku Kenkyu-
sho Co. Ltd., Aichi, Japan
FUed Jan. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 460,649
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 24, 1982, 57-45716
Int. a.3 A61K il/33: C07D 245/06
U.S. p. 42A—2U 4 Claims
1. A 2,S-benzodiazocine derivative represented by a formula
V
4,435,393
DERIVATIVES OF
10-(l-AZABICYCLO[2.2.2]OCT-3-YL)-N,N
DIMETHYL-lOH-PHENOTHIAZINE-2-SULFONAMIDE
AS MEDICAMENTS
Marie-Christine Dubroeucq, Enghien-les-Bains, and Jean E. M.
A. Rataud, Paris, both of France, assignors to Pharmindustrie,
Gennevilliers, France
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,150
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 3, 1981, 81 06713
Int. a.J A61K 31/54
U.S. CI. 424—246 4 Qaims
1. A process for treating a human suffering from duodenal
and gastric ulcers which comprises orally administering to said
human 50 to 500 mg per day of a compound of the formula
1^^ ^ X^^S02-N
/
\
CH3
CH3
in which either X represents an atom of sulfur and Y represents
the N-oxide group, or X represents the sulfmyl group or the
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
311
sulfonyl group and Y represents an atom of nitrogen or the
N-oxide group, or its salt of addition with a pharmaceutically
acceptable acid.
4,43^,394
3-sulfonamido'benzophenonimine
derivatives useful for treating virus
infections
Masani Ogata, and Kotaburo Sato, both of Hyogo, Japan, as-
signors to Shionogi A Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 332,099
Int. a.J C07C 143/79. 143/75; A61K 31/18
U.S. a. 424-248.5 20 Claims
1. 3-Sulfonamido-benzophenonimine derivatives of the for-
mula:
NHSO2R Y'
Y2
1 ti-^iO
wherein | |
R is C1-C5 alkyl, amino, C1-C5 alkylamino, C2-C8 dialkyl-
amino, or 5- or 6-membered heterocycle;
R' is hydroxy, C1-C5 alkoxy, Ci-Cio acyloxy, benzyloxy,
amino, C2-C5 alkoxycarbonylamino, or ureido;
X is hydrogen, Ci-Cj alkyl, C1-C5 alkoxy, or halogen;
Y' and Y^ each is hydrogen, C1-C5 alkyl, C1-C5 alkoxy,
C1-C5 alkylthio, C2-C5 alkoxymethyl, C2-C5 alkoxycar-
bonyl, C1-C5 alkylamino, C2-C8 dialkylamino, C1-C5
alkanesulfonamido, Ci-Cio acylamino, C2-C8 dialk-
ylaminosulfonylamino, amino, nitro, cyano, hydroxy, or
halogen, or
Y' and Y^, taken together, form C1-C3 alkylenedioxy; and A
ring optionally has a condensed benzene ring or a pharma-
ceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
19. A method for treating viral infections comprising admin-
istering to a host an effective antiviral amount of a compound
according to claim 1.
4,435,395
N-SUBSTTTUTED 1,4-DiHYDROPYRIDAZINES AND
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
Bernard Loev, Scarsdale; Howard Jones, Ossining, both of N.Y.,
and James R. Shroff, Riverside, Conn., assignors to USV
Pharmaceutical Corporation, Tarrytown, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 471,958
Int. a.3 A61K 31/535; C07D 413/06
U.S. a. 424-248.5 23 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
Rs
R?
wherein each of R5, R6 and R7 is H, alkyl, aryl, halo, lower
alkoxy, nitro, amino, alkylmercapto, cyano, carboxy, carbalk-
oxy, sulfamyl, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, acyloxy, methanesul-
fonyl, alkylamino or acylamino; and R5 and R6, when taken
together, form a methylenedioxy; Z is alkylene containing 1 to
about 5 carbon atoms°in the principal chain; R3 and R^arc each
H or alkyl; and each R] and R2 is alkyl; and acid addition salts
thereof
8. An anti-hypertensive composition comprising a com-
pound according to claim 1 and a carrier.
4,435,396
ANTIULCER
2-GUANIDIN0.4.(2-SUBSTITUTED-AMINO-4.
IMIDAZOLYDTHIAZOLES AND PROCESS THEREFOR
John L. LaMattina, Ledyard, and Christopher A. Lipinskl,
Waterford, both of Conn., assignors to Pfizer Inc., New York.
N.Y.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,486
Int. a.J C07G 417/04; A61K 31/425
U.S. a. 424-248.51 36 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
NH
II
X
."f-
H2N— C— NH
wherein
R is NHRi or NR2r3;
R' is (C7-Ci2)alkyl, (C6-Cii)pyridylalkyl or (Cii-Ci2)phe-
nylalkyl, optionally monosubstituted or disubstituted on
the phenyl group with chloro, bromo, fluoro, (Ci-C3)al-
koxy or trifluoromethyl; and
R2 and R3 are each independently (C|-Ci2)alkyl or
(C7-Ci2)phenylalkyl, optionally monosubstituted or di-
substituted on the phenyl group with chloro, bromo,
fluoro, (Ci-C3)alkyl, (Ci-C3)alkoxy or trifluoromethyl;
or
R2 and R3 are Uken together with the nitrogen to which
they are attached to form a pyrrolidone, piperidine, per-
hydro-lH-azepine, or morpholine ring;
or a pharmaceutically-accepuble acid addition salt thereof
13. A method of inhibiting gastric ulcers in a mammal which
comprises administering to said mammal a gastric ulcer inhibit-
ing amount of a compound of claim 1.
R1O2C
CO2R1
wherein Ar is heteroaryl, cycloalkyl or
4,435,397
CARBAMYLPIPERAZINE COMPOUNDS
Shiogo Matsumura, Kyoto; Hiroshi Enomoto, Nagaokakyo;
Yoshiakl Aoyagi, Kyoto, and Hanio Tanaka, Hikonc, aU of
Japan, assignors to Nippon Shinyaku Co., Ltd., Japan
FUed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,881
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 8, 1980, 55-46443
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 26,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int a.J C07D 241/04; A61K 31/495; C07D 295/00 ,
U.S. a. 424—250 8 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
312
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
(Hi
I
R— OCH2CHCH2N
' ^ II
NCNH2
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, wherein R is
Rl (a)
if
in which
R' is alkyl of up to 6 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to 7
carbon atoms or alkanoyl of up to 6 carbon atoms
R^ is hydrogen or alkyl of up to 6 carbon atoms, and
Z is — CH2CH2NHC02R^ — NHS02R3 or
— CH2CON
/
\
R*
R5
in which
R^ is alkyl of up to 4 carbon atoms and each of R'^ and R'
indep>endently of the other is alkyl of up to 4 carbon
atoms, or
(b) a bicyclic group of the formula:
in which
Z is a chain of 3 or 4 atoms, said chain being selected from
the group consisting of — (CH2)2(CH2)/j— ; — CH=-
CH-(CH2)„-;
OH O
I II
— CasCH— CH=CH— ; and — C— CH2(CH2)«— ;
N=!C
\
NHCCX)R2
NR^R*
wherein
R is Ci to C6 alkyl;
R' is hydrogen, halo, nitro, NHCOR' or NHSO2R';
R2 is Ci to C6 alkyl or C| to C6 alkyl substituted with Ci to
C6 alkoxy, hydroxy or amino;
R3 and R* are independently selected from hydrogen, N-
alkyl piperidyl, wherein the alkyl group has 1 to 4 carbon
atoms, tetrahydropyranyl, morpholinyl, piperidyl, and C|
to C6 alkyl substituted with hydroxy, — SCH3, piperazi-
nyl, pyridyl, — COR^ — COOR'', amino, and substituted
amino wherein the substituents in the substituted amino
are selected from C I to C6 alkyl,
N— CN N— CN
11. " .
— C— SR*. and — C— NHR*;
R' is C 1 to C6 alkyl, C 1 to C6 alkyl substituted with phenyl or
with halo, phenyl, or phenyl substituted with C| to Ce
alkyl or with halo;
R^ is Ci to C6 alkyl, Ci to Ce acyl, or a peptide residue
having up to three amino acids;
R^ and R^ are C\ to Ce alkyl; and the pharmaceutically
acceptable acid addition salts thereof.
4435 399
2-ARYL-l-(IMIDAZOL-l-YL)-8-(4-PIPERAZIN-l-
YLPHENOXY) OCTAN-l-OL ANTIFUNGAL AGENTS
Kenneth Richardson, and Geoffrey E. Gymer, both of Canter-
bury, England, assignors to Pfizer Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 392,394
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 18, 1981,
8122246
Int. Q\? C07D 403/06; A61K 31/495
U.S. a. 424—250 28 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
N
OH
I
r\
N— CH2-C— (CH2)6-0
Ar
^w
N— R
n has a value of 1 or 2 and
R^ is as herein deflned.
4,435,398
GUANIDINE COMPOUNDS
M. Mehdl Naflssi-Varchei, North Caldwell, N.J., assignor to
Schering Corporation, Kenilworth, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 198,424, Oct. 20, 1980, Pat. No.
4,348,406. This appUcation Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,445
Claims priority, application European Pat. Off., Oct. 12, 1981,
81108212
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 7, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/60, 47/44; C07C 129/12
U.S. a. 424—250 13 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts
thereof, wherein
R is hydrogen, alkyl of 1-4 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3-7
carbon atoms, carbamoyl, N,N-dialkylcarbamoyl having
1-4 carbon atoms in each alkyl group, N,N-dialk-
ylaminoalkyl having 1-4 carbon atoms in each alkyl group
and 1-4 carbon atoms in the alkyl chain, monohydroxyal-
kyl having 1-4 carbon atoms, dihydroxyalkyl having 1-4
carbon atoms, cycloalkylalkyl having 3-7 carbon atoms in
the cycloalkyl group and 1-4 carbon atoms in the open
alkyl chain, carbamoylalkyl having 1-4 carbon atoms in
the alkyl chain or N,N-dialkylcarbamoylalkyl having 1-4
carbon atoms in each alkyl group and 1-4 carbon atoms in
the alkyl chain; and
Ar is phenyl, monosubstituted phenyl or disubstituted
phenyl wherein each substituent group is halogen, alkyl of
1-4 carbon atoms or alkoxy of 1-4 carbon atoms.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
313
4,435,400
AMINO AND ALKYLAMINOALKENOATE ESTER
DERIVATIVES OF AMINOCHLORONITROPYRAZINE
George D. Hartman, Lansdale, Pa., assignor to Merck A Co.,
Inc., Rahway, N.J.
Filed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,615
Int. a.3 C07D 241/16. 241/20; AOIK 31/495
U.S. a. 424—250 8 Claims
1. An aminoalkenoate ester of 2-amino(or alkanoylamino)-S-
chloro-3-nitropyrazine compound having the formula:
need of such treatment an antihypertensive ^ective amount of
a compound according to claim 1.
i
N
NHR3
X
N02
N
where
R, R' and R^ may be the same or different and are each
selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Ci.6alkyl,
C1.6 mono-to tetrahydroxyalkyl, or Ci.6aminoalkyl;
R^ is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and
lower Ci.6alkanoyl;
and acid addition salts thereof.
CH3O
CHjO
>^,,^>- ^ ^^N N-I
\—/
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof,
wherein R is of the formula
N
wherein R' is hydrogen and R^ is 6,7-dimethoxy-l,2,3,4-tet-
rahydroisoquinolin-2-yl, or R' and R^ are each a member
selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hydroxy, F,
CI, Br. I, (alk)R3, 0(alk)R3. S(alk)R^ NR-^R'. C6H4R*' and
OC6H4R*, where (alk) is (C1-C4) alkylene, R^ is hydrogen or
C6H4R^, when taken separately, R* is hydrogen or (C1-C4)
alkyl and R' is hydrogen, phenyl, (alk)R3 or (C3-C7) cycloal-
kyl, or R* and R' taken together with the nitrogen atom to
which they are attached form a pyrrolo, piperidino, 4-methyl-
piperazino, morpholino or thiomorpholino group and R* is
hydrogen, F, CI, Br, 1, (C1-C4) alkyl or (C1-C4) alkoxy.
8. A method for treating mammalian hypertension which
comprises orally or parenterally administering to a mammal in
4,435,402
AMINOPYRIMIDINE DERIVATIVES, PROCESSES FOR
THEIR PREPARATION, AND FUNGICIDAL,
INSECTICIDAL AND ACARICIDAL COMPOSITIONS
CONTAINING THEM
Hideakira TsitJi; Shinjiro Yamamoto; Kazuto Nakagami, all of
Shiga; Takeo Honda, Ube; Katsutoshi Fujii, Ube; Takashi
Kobayashi, Ube; Tokio Obata, Ube; Mikio Kojima, Ube, and
Yuji Akiyoshi, Ube, all of Japan, assignors to Sankyo Com-
pany, Limited, Tokyo and Ube Industries, Limited, Ube, both
of, Japan
Filed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,776
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 29, 1981, 56-11979;
Apr. 21, 1981, 56-60178
Int. a.' C07D 239/42: AOIN 43/54
U.S. CI. 424—251 53 Qaims
1. A fungicidal, insecticidal or acaricidal composition com-
prising an effective amount of a compound having the formula
(I)
4,435,401
4-AMINO-6,7-DIMETHOXY-2-(4-HETEROARYL-
PIPERAZINO)QUINAZOLINE ANTIHYPERTENSIVES
Simon F. Campbell, Deal, and Rhona M. Plews, Canterbury,
both of England, assignors to Pfizer Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,672
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 29, 1980,
8041411
Int. CI.3 A61K 31/505, 31/38; C07D 403/14. 417/14
U.S. Q. 424—251 9 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
N-^-'
(I)
U JL...A-R^
N N
R3
wherein:
R' and R^ are the same or different and are each selected
from the group consisting of alkyl groups having from 1 to
6 carbon atoms and halogen atoms, or R' and R^ jointly
represent a trimethylene or tetramethylene group;
R^ is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom
and alkyl groups having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
A is an alkylene group; and
R^ is selected from the group consisting of:
an unsubstituted phenyloxy group,
a substituted phenyloxy group substituted with at least one
substituent selected from the group consisting of alkyl
groups, halogen atoms, alkoxy groups having from I to
6 carbon atoms, alkylthio groups having from I to 6
carbon atoms, alkenyl groups having from 2 to 6 carbon
atoms, a trifluoromethyl group and a nitro group,
an unsubstituted benzyloxy group,
a substituted benzyloxy group substituted in the phenyl
ring with at least one substituent selected from the
group consisting of alkyl groups, halogen atoms, alkoxy
groups having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, alkylthio
groups having from I to 6 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups
having from 2 to 6 carbon atoms, a trifluoromethyl
group and a nitro group,
an unsubstituted phenyl group,
a substituted phenyl group substituted with one or two
substituents selected from the group consisting of halo-
gen atoms, alkyl groups having from 1 to 6 carbon
atoms and alkoxy groups having from 1 to 6 carbon
atoms,
a furyl group, and
a thienyl group
or a salt thereof, together with a carrier.
37. A compound having the formula (1)
urn) o.G.— II
314
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
(O
,A-R<
wherein
R' and R2 are each methyl;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom
and alkyl groups having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
A is an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms;
R* is the group — OR', and R' is selected from the group
consisting of an unsubstituted phenyl group, and a substi-
tuted phenyl group substituted with one, two or three
substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl
groups having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, halogen atoms,
alkoxy groups having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthio
groups having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups
having from 3 to 4 carbon atoms, a trifluoromethyl group
and a nitro group; and acid addition salts thereof.
38. A compound having the formula (I)
wherein
R'^ is OR'8 wherein R«8 is aryl or aralkyi each of up to 12
C-atoms and wherein each compound may contain 1-4
identical or different non-H R-^ groups;
R^^is hydrogen, lower alkyl, alkoxyalkyl of up to 6 C-atoms,
cycloalkyi of 3-6 C-atoms, or (CH2)„OR20
wherein R20 jg alkyl of up to 6 C-atoms, or cycloalkyi of
3-6 C-atoms and n is an integer of 1 to 3;
Y is oxygen;
Z is alkoxy or aralkoxy each of up to 10 C-atoms.
7. A method of achieving a tranquilizing effect in a patient in
need of such treatment which comprises administering to the
patient an amount of a compound of claim 1 effective as a
tranquilizer.
s,^-
(I)
•^ 3 ^ ^A-R4
R3
wherein
R' is an alkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
R2 is chlorine or bromine;
A is an alkylene group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms;
R" is the group —OR', and R* is selected from the group
consisting of an unsubstituted phenyl group, and a substi-
tuted phenyl group substituted with one. two or three
substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl
groups having from I to 10 carbon atoms, halogen atoms,
alkoxy groups having from I to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthio
groups having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkenyl groups
havmg from 3 to 4 carbon atoms, a trifluoromethyl group
and a nitro group; and acid addition salts thereof.
4435 404
CARBOSTYRIL DERIVATIVES
Takao NIshi; TatsuyosU Tanaka, and Kazuyuki Nakagawa, all
of Tokiuhima, Japan, assignors to Otsuka Phamuureutical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
per No. PCr/JP80/00122, § 371 Date Apr. 30, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 30, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02421, PCT Pub
Date Sep. 3, 1981
PCT Filed Jun. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 261,177
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 29, 1980, S5-25658
Int. a.3 A61K 31/47; C07D 215/22
U.S. a. 424-258 „ cuu^
1. A carbostyril derivative or its salt represented by the
general formula (1),
O— A— CON
/
R3
\
4435 403
PHARMACOLOGICALLY ACOVE 3.SUBSTrnjTED
BETA-CARBOLINES
Claus T. Braestrup, Gentofte; Jogen A. Christensen, Vinim;
Mogens Engelstoft, Vaerloese, all of Dennuu-k; Giinter Neef,
Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany; Ulrieh Eder, Berlin, Fed. Rep.
of Germany; Ralph Schmiechen, Beriin, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many; Andreas Huth, Beriin, Fed. Rep. of Germany; Dieter
Rahtz, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany; Dieter Seidelmann,
Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany; Wolfgang Kehr, Berlin, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, and Dieter Palenschat, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Schering Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin
and Bergkamen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,740
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 17.
1980,3048318 "-y, iw. i/.
Int. a.3 C07D 487/14; A61K 31/44
VS. a. 424-256 7 cwms
I. A beta-carboline of the formula
wherem R' is a hydrogen atom; R2 is a hydrogen atom or a
Ci.6-alkyl group; A is a Ci.6-alkylene group; R3 is a hydroxy
Ci.6-alkyl group having one to three hydroxy groups as the
substituent, a Ci-6-alkoxy-C|.6-alkyl^roup, a Ci^-
alkanoyloxy-Ci.6-alkyl group, or a b3fzoyloxy-C|.6-alkyI
group; R* is a Cs-io-cycloalkyl group which may have 1 to 3
hydroxy groups as the subsitituent in the cycloalkyi ring, or a
C3.ioK:ycloalkyl-Ci.6-alkyl group; further R3, R4and the adja-
cent nitrogen atom, as well as with another nitrogen atom, may
form a group of the formula
-N N-RS
wherein R' is a phenyl group, a Cj-Kxycloalkyl group or a
phenyl-C|-6-alkyl group; the carbon-carbon bond between the
three and four positions in the carbostyril skeleton is a single or
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
315
double bond; and the substituted position of the group of the to such animals an effective amount of a compound according
formula to claim 1.
— O— A— CON— R5
A^ ;
is either the S- or 6-position in the carbostyril skeleton.
27. A pharmaceutical composition used for the prevention
and treatment of thrombosis containing an effective amount of
the carbostyril derivative represented by the general formula
(1) or its salt of claim 1.
4,435,405 ^
QUINOLINE DERIVATIVES WHICH ARE
5-HYDROXYTRYPTAMINE ANTAGONISTS
Thomas P. Blackburn, Congleton; Barry Cox, Chorltonville;
Allen J. Guildford, Sandbach; David J. Le Count, Congleton;
Robert J. Pearce, Wilmslow, and Craig W. Thornber, Mac-
clesfield, all of England, assignors to Imperial Chemical
Industries PLC, London, England
Filed May 26, 1982, Ser. No. 382,116
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 9, 1981,
8117642
Int. a.J A61K 31/47; C07D 215/36
U.S. a. 424—258 7 Qaims
1. A quinoline derivative of the formula:
4,435,406
IMIDAZOLE DERIVATIVES
Anna Krasso, Basel, and Henri Ramuz, Birsfelden, both of
Switzeriand, auignors to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc., Nutley,
NJ.
Filed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,032
Gaims priority, application Switzerland, Aug. 21, 1980,
6321/80
Int. a.J C07D 491/14; A61K 31/44
U.S. a. 424—263 H Claims
1. A tricyclic imidazole of the formula
I
RJ'^"'^*^^^^ j^ ^^s-a-nr2r3
I
wherein:
A is a member selected from the group consisting of the
radical — (CH:):— . the radical — (CH:):— which is sub-
stituted by not more than two (l-2C)alkyl radicals, and the
radical — (CH:):— which is substituted by an alkylene
radical so as to form, together with the residue of the
— (CH:):— radical, a cycloalkylene radical of not more
than 6 carbon atoms;
R' is a member selected from the group consisting of n-, iso-
and 8-(3-4C)alkyl, cyclopropyl and phenyl; and phenyl
which bears not more than two substituents selected from
the group consisting of halogen, hydroxy, (l-4C)alkyl,
(l-4C)alkoxy, (l-4C)alkylthio, (l-ZOperfluoroalkyl, cy-
ano, carboxy, (l-2C)alkoxy-carbonyl, carbamoyl, N-((l-
3C)alkyl]carbamoyl and N,N-di-[(l-3C)alkyl]carbamoyl;
and furyl, thienyl, pyridyl, thiazolyl or oxazolyl, any of
^ which may optionally be substituted by (l-2C)alkyl;
R2 is a member selected from the group consisting of hydro-
gen, methyl and ethyl, and dimethylene, trimethylene
or tetramethylene which is linked to one or other of the carbon
atoms forming the two-carbon-atom-backbone of radical A so
as to form, together with the adjacent nitrogen atom, a pyr-
rolidinyl or piperidyl radical;
R3 is a member selected from the group consisting of hydro-
gen, methyl and ethyl; and
one or R* and R' stands for hydrogen, and the other is a
member selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
halogen atoms, (l-3C)alkyl and (l-3C)alkoxy;
or a pharmaceutically-acceptable acid-addition salt thereof.
6. A pharmaceutical composition for use as a 5-hydroxytryp-
tamine antagonist comprising an effective amount of a quino-
line derivative of the formula I, wherein A, R', R2, R^ R*and
R5 have the meanings stoted in claim 1, or a pharmaceutically-
acceptoble acid-addition salt thereof, and an inert pharmaceuti-
cally-acceptable diluent or carrier.
7. The method of inhibiting the activity of 5-hydroxytrypU-
mine in warm-blooded animals which comprises administering
wherein R' is 2-pyridyl optionally substituted by lower alkyl
or lower alkoxy, n is the integer 0 or 1. R2 is hydrogen or
lower alkyl, R^ and R*. independently, are hydrogen or
lower alkyl, A is a group of the formula
R»
I
— O— CH— O— ;
and R' is hydrogen or lower alkyl,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof
11. A method of preventing gastric ulcers which comprises
administering orally or parenterally to a mammal in need of
such treatment an effective amount of a compound of the
formula
wherein R' is 2-pyridyl optionally substituted by lower alkyl
^ or lower alkoxy, n is the integer 0 or 1. R2 is hydrogen or
lower alkyl, R' and R*. independently, are hydrogen or
lower alkyl, A is a group of the formula
R5
I
— O— CH— O— ;
and R' is hydrogen or lower alkyl or a pharmaceutically
acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
4,435,407
CERTAIN SUBSTITUTED
/S-OXO-a-CARBAMOYLPYRROLEPROPIONITRILES
Gordon N. Walker, Morristown, N J., assignor to aba-Gcigy
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,897
Int. a.J C07D 401/12; A61K 31/44
VJS. a. 424—263 8 Cl«lms
1. A compound of the formula
(.
316
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
R3
administering to said mammal an efTective amount of nifedi-
^jj pine to stimulate production of IgM antibodies.
N
I
CN
I
C-CH-CONH(CH2)„Het
II r
O
or a tautomer thereof wherein Ri, R2 and R3 independently
represent hydrogen or lower alkyl; n represents 0 or I; Het
represents pyridyl, unsubstituted or mono or disubstituted by
lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, halogen, hydroxy or trifluoro-
methyl; a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
4435 408
DOPAMINERGIC STIMULATING AND ANTIANOXIC
4-SUBSTITUTED 2H-INDOLE-2-ONES
Lucien Nedelec, Le Raincy; Jacques Guillaume, Le Pre Saint
Gervals, and Claude Dumont, Nogent sur Marne, all of
France, assignors to Roussel Udaf, Paris, France
Filed Jul. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,576
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 24, 1981, 81 14429
Int. a.^ A61K il/44. 31/445; C07D 401/04
U.S. a. 424-263 15 Qaims
1. A compound selected from the group consisting of 2H-
indoIe-2-ones of the formula
4,435,410
3-[2-(3-ALKYL AND
ALKENYL^PIPERIDYD-ETHYLJ-INDOLESFOR
INHIBITING SEROTONIN UPTAKE AND FOR
RELEASING SEROTONIN
Gerard R. Le Fur, Plessis Robinson, and Christian L. A. Re-
nault, Tavemy, both of France, assignors to Pharmindustrie,
Gennevilliers, France
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,366
Claims priority, application France, May 22, 1981, 81 10219
Int. a.3 A61K 31/445; C07D 401/06
US. a. 424-267 7 ci„„,
1. A compound of the formula: •
(ID
N— Z
I
1=0
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms and aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbon
atoms, a and b are both hydrogen or together form a carbon-
carbon bond, Z is selected from the group consisting of hydro-
gen, alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, hydroxyalkyi of 2 to 8 carbon
atoms, aryloxyalkyl of 7 to 12 carbon atoms, cycloalkylalkyi of
4 to 12 carbon atoms, alkenyl and alkynyl of 3 to 8 carbon
atoms and aralkyl of 7 to 12 carbon atoms optionally substi-
tuted with at least one member of the group consisting of
halogen, alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon
atoms, —OH. — CF3, — OCF3, — NO2 and — NH2 and their
non-toxic, pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts.
11. A method of inducing dopaminergic stimulating and
antianoxic activity in warm-blooded animals comprising ad-
ministering to warm-blooded animals a dopaminergic stimulat-
ing and antianoxically effective amount of at least one com-
pound of claim 1.
in which X represents hydrogen or halogen, and R represents
alkyl having I to 3 carbon atoms or alkenyl having 2 to 3
carbon atoms.
7. A method of treating a mammal afflicted with depression
or migraine conditions or to prevent the formation of arterial
thrombi, which comprises administering to said mammal a
therapeutically effective amount of a composition containing a
compound according to claim 1 or a pharmaceutically accept-
able salt thereof in a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier there-
for.
4 435 409
METHOD OF STIMULATING PRODUCTION OF IGM
ANTIBODIES
Mitchell J. Uibowitz, West Nyack, N.Y.; Ah S. Kong, West-
field, NJ.; Paula Sonnino-Goldman, Stamford, Conn., and
Peter Wolf, Granite Springs, N.Y., assignors to USV Phamui-
ceutical Corporation, Tarrytown, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,160
Int. aj A61K 31/455
U.S. a. 424-266 6 Claims
1. A method of stimulating production of IgM antibodies in
a mammal in need of such IgM antibodies comprising: the
4,435,411
COMBATING FUNGI WITH
l-PHENYL-2.(l,2,4-TRIAZOL.l.YL).PROP.2.EN.1.0NES
Wolf Reiser; Hans-Ludwig Elbe, both of Wuppertal; Karl
Biichel, Burscheid; Paul-Ernst Frohberger, Leverkusen, and
Wilhelm Brandes, Uichlingen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,304
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 19.
1980, 3019045
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/64; C07D 249/08; C07F 1/08
U.S. a. 424-269 10 Qaims
1. A l-phenyl-2(l,2,4.triazol-l-yl)-prop-2-en-l-one of the
formula
CO— C=CH— R
I
r :
N II
in which
R is phenylacetylene,
X is halogen, or phenyl or phenoxy either of which may
optionally carry one or more substituents selected from
halogen, alkyl with I to 4 carbon atoms and halogenoalkyl
with I to 4 carbon atoms and 1 to 5 halogen atoms, and
n is 0, 1, 2 or 3,
or an addition product thereof with a physiologically accept-
able acid or a metal salt.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
317
5. A fungicidal composition comprising a fungicidally effec-
tive amount of a compound of addition product thereof ac-
cording to claim 1 in admixture with a diluent.
8. 1 -(2,4-Dichlorophenyl)-4,4-dimethyl-2-( 1 ,2,4-triazol- 1 -
yl)-pent-2-en-l-one of the formula
CI
CH3
— / (~^ N— CO— CasCH— C-CH3
r
CH3
N
'N
Jl
4 435 415
N-ARYL OXAZOLIDINONES, OXAZOLIDINETHIONES,
PYRROLIDINONES, PYRROLIDINES AND
THIAZOLIDINONES
Guy R. Bourgery, Colombes; Colette A. Douzon, Paris; Jean-
Francois R. Ancher, Rueil-Malmaison; Alain P. Lacour, La
Varenne; Patrick G. Guerret, Rueil-Malmaison; Michel Lan-
glois, Buc, and Philippe L. Dostert, Le Vesinet, all of France,
assignors to Delalande S.A., Courbevoie, France
Division of Ser. No. 45,143. Jun. 4, 1979, Pat. No. 4,348,393.
This application Jun. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 389,136
Qaims priority, application France, Jun. 9, 1978, 78 17388;
Aug. 17, 1978, 78 24024
Int. a.5 A61K 31/42; C07D 263/14. 263/24
U.S. a. 424—272 8 Qaims
1. A compound having the formula
or an addition product thereof with a physiologically accept-
able acid or a metal salt.
9. A fungicidal composition comprising a fungicidally effec-
tive amount of a compound or addition product thereof ac-
cording to claim 8 in admixture with a diluent.
4,435,412
5R,6S,8R-2.(l-METHYL-2-IMIDAZOLYLMETHYLTHIO)-
6-(l-HYDROXYETHYL)PENEM-3-CARBOXYLIC ACID
Viyyoor M. Girijavallabhan, Parsippany; Ashit K. Ganguly,
Upper Montclair; Patrick A. Pinto, Mine Hill, and Richard
W. Versace, Ringwood, all of N.J., assignors to Schering
Corporation, Kenilworth, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 445,295, Nov. 29, 1982. This
application Jan. 17, 1983, Ser. No. 458,511
Int. Q.^ C07D 501/36; A61K 31/425
U.S. Q. 424—270 15 Qaims
1. 5R,6S,8R-2-(l-methyl-2-imidazolylmethyIthio)-6-(l-
hydroxyethyI)penem-3-carboxylic acid and the pharmaceuti-
cally acceptable salts and esters thereof
'^'
T
o
•CH2OCOR3
in which R3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl
having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, cyclohexyl, phenyl, methox-
ymethyl and phenoxymethyl, and R is selected from the group
consisting of n-butoxy, 3-methylbutoxy. cyclopentylmethoxy,
cyclohexylmethoxy, 2-cyanoethoxy, cyanomethoxy,
— O
R4
in which R4 is hydrogen, m-
m— NO2, and
-CI, m— F. p— F, m— CN or
4,435,413
(5R-6S,8R).6.(l.HYDROXYETHYL).2.(2-GLYCYLAMINO.
ETHYLTHIO)-PENEM-3-CARBOXYLIC ACID
Stuart W. McCombie, West Orange, N.J., assignor to Schering
Corporation, Kenilworth, N.J.
Filed Jan. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 461,845
Int. a? A61K 31/425; C07D 499/00
U.S. Q. 424—270 12 Qaims
1. (5R,6S,8R)-2-6-(l-hydroxyethyl)-2-(2-glycylaminoethyl-
thio)penem-3-carboxylic acid and the pharmaceutically ac-
ceptable salts and esters thereof
8. An antibacterially effective pharmaceutical composition
comprising an antibacterial effective amount of a compound of
claim 1 in admixture with a pharmaceutically acceptable car-
rier therefor.
— O
4,435,414
INJECTABLE PENICILLIN COMPOSITION
Michael J. Greenway, Worthing, England, assignor to Beecham
Group Limited, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 210,603, Nov. 26, 1980. This
application Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,328
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 27, 1979,
7940833
Int. Q.' A61K 31/43. 31/74
U.S. Q. 424—271 7 Qaims
1. A pharmaceutical composition, which on reconstitution
with water yields an injectable solution, of enhanced solubility
at higher injection strengths and lower temperatures, which
comprises, in the respective weight ratio range of 10:1 to 1:5,
(a) sodium dicloxacillin, and
(b) polyethylene glycol or propylene glycol having a molec-
ular weight in the range of 180-7000.
'^
NO2
Rj
in which R5 is CI or CN.
4,435,416
FUNGICIDAL AND ALGICIDAL
l.METHYL-3,4-DIHALO-5-SUBSTITUTEDTHIO-,
SULFOXYL-, OR SULFONYL-PYRAZOLES
Edward I. Aoyagi, Petaluma, Calif., assignor to Chevron Re-
search Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Filed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 393,213
Int. CI.' AOIN 43/56: C07D 231/18
U.S. Q. 424—273 P 18 Qainu
1. A compound of the formula:
N.
'N
I
CH3
I
X-CH2CH2-O-CNR1R2
wherein Y is chloro or bromo; X is — S— , —SO—, or
— SO2— ; and Ri and R2 are independently hydrogen,
alkyl having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl having
up to 6 carbon atoms, lower alkenyl of 3 to 6 carbon
atoms, alkylene carbalkoxy having a total of 3 to 4 carbon
atoms, or aryl or aralkyl having from 6 to 10 carbon atoms
318
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
optionally substituted with one or two substituents, each
independently selected from the group consisting of halo-
gen, nitro, cyano, lower alkyl having from 1 to 6 carbon
atoms, lower alkoxy having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms,
trihalo-substituted methyl and phenoxy.
7. A method for controlling fungi which comprises contact-
mg said fungi or their growth environment with a fungicidally
effective amount of a compound of the formula defined in
claim 1.
4,435,418
S-PHENYLETHENYLBENZIMIDAZOLES
Alfred W. Chow, Radnor, P«., auignor to SmithKline Beckman
Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa. x
Filed Dec. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 449,350
Int. a.J AOIN 43/52; C07D 235/30. 235/32
U.S. CI. 424-273 B ,4 ciuim»
1. A chemical compound of the formula:
4,435,417
ANTIINFLAMMATORY
3H.NAPHTHO[l,2-D]IMIDAZOLES
Emilio Toja, Milan; Amedeo Omodei-Sale', Voghera, and
Domenica Selva, Milan, all of Italy, assignors to Gruppo
Upetit S.P.A., Milan, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 236,473, Feb. 20, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 104,490, Dec. 17,
1979, abandoned. This application Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. '
391,653
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 20,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61K 31/4J5; C07D 235/18
U.S. a. 424-273 B ,5 a^i^s
1. A 3H-naphtho[l,2-d]imidazole derivative having the fol-
lowing formula
in which:
R is hydrogen, halo, methyl, methoxy or methylthio; and
R' IS lower alkyl of 1-4 carbons, cycloalkyi of 3-4 ring
members or lower alkoxy of 1-4 carbons.
10. The method of producing anthelmintic activity in hosts
mfected with, or susceptible to, helminthic infections compris-
mg admmistering orally to said hosts an anthelmintic, but
non-toxic, quantity of a compound of the formula:
ifl which:
R is hydrogen, halo, methyl, methoxy or methylthio; and
R' is lower alkyl of 1-4 carbons, cycloalkyi of 3-4 ring
members or lower alkoxy of 1-4 carbons.
wherem R stands for (Ci.6)alkyl, (C3.6)alkenyl, (C3.6)alkynyl
or (C3.7)cycloalkyl. Ri and R2 each independently may repre-
sent hydrogen, halogen (CM)alkyl, (CM)alkylthio, (CM)al-
koxy or halo(CM)alkoxy, R3 stands for hydrogen, methoxy,
ethoxy or mono- or di-methylamino. and R4 represents hydro-
gen or (CM)alkyl with the proviso that when simultaneously R
stands for an ethyl radical, one of R| and R2 is hydrogen and
the other one is a methoxy group and R4 is hydrogen. R3
cannot be a dimethylamino group; or a non-toxic pharmaceutic
cally acceptable acid addition salt thereof
13. A method for relieving antiinflammatory diseases in
ammals which comprises administering to an animal in need
thereof an amount comprised between about 0.05 to about
10.00 g per day of a compound of formula I
4,435 419
METHOD OF TREATING DEPRESSION USING
AZABICYCLOHEXANES
Joseph W. Epstein, Monroe; Arnold C. Osterberg, Pearl River,
and Herbert J. Brabander, Nanuet, all of N.Y., assignors to
American Cyanamid Company, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 279,366, Jul. 1, 1981,
abandoned. This application May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,131
Int. a.J A61K 31/40; C07D 209/52
U.S. a. 424-274 24 Qaims
1. A compound selected from the group consisting of an
optically, active compound of the formula:
"Vj^^^v*^^
N
I
Ri
the mirror image isomer thereof, the racemic mixture of the
optical isomers and the pharmacologically acceptable acid
addition salts thereof wherein R] is hydrogen or a moiety of
the formula:
-CH-C-NH— ^ J
r.^r,h';?^v"..™.cr.xxt;if i:r ' °" "\"tx
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
319
<y-
wherein R4 is chloro, bromo, alkanoyl(C2-C4), alkylamino
(C1-C3), dialkylamino(Ci-C3), hydroxymethyl, benzyl or
benzoyl with the proviso that when R| is hydrogen then R4
may not be halogen.
4,435,420
ANTI-INFLAMMATORY AGENTS AND
ANTIASTHMATIC AGENTS
Boyd L. Harrison, and Niall S. Doherty, both of Cincinnati,
Ohio, assignors to Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals, Cincinnati,
Ohio
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,510
Int. a.3 A61K 31/385; C07C 339/06
U.S. CI. 424—277 12 Oainis
1. A method of treating asthma which comprises administer-
ing to a patient in need thereof an effective antiasthmatic
amount of a compound of the formula:
C V-O'
wherein R is alkyl of 1-10 carbon atoms or cycloalkyi of S-7
carbon atoms; and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addi-
tion salts thereof
9. A compound of the formula:
C>-"^'
nitro. alkoxy. trifluoromethyl, alkylthio. alkylsulfinyl,
alkylsulfonyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyi, alkylsulfiny-
lalkyl. alkylsulfonylalkyl or dialkylamino groups; or
(c) a group of the formula:
O R— C«N— O— R|
•N— C— O— N»C
I \
R' CN— R2— R3
il
O
— N— C
I \
R' F. or
•N— C— O— Rj
R'
wherein:
Rsis:
(1) an alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, or phenylalkyi group; or
(2) a phenyl group which may be unsubstituted or substi
tuted with one or more C1-C12 alkyl. chloro, fluoro,
alkoxy. alkylthio, alkylthioalkyi, alkylsulfinyl, alkylsul
finylalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, al
kynyloxy, dialkylamino, alkoxyamino, formamidino
cyano. dioxolanyl or dithiolanyl groups in any combina
tion; or
(3) a naphthyl or tetrahydronaphthyl, group all of which
may be unsubstituted or substituted with one or more
alkyl groups; or
(4) a group of the formula:
-N— C
\
.R6
wherein R' is alkyl of 6-8 carbon atoms; and the pharmaceuti-
cally acceptable acid addition salts thereof
R7
4 435 421
BIOODAL SULFUR-CONTAINING BIS-IMINO
CARBAMATE COMPOUNDS
Themistocles D. J. D'Silva, South Charleston, W. Va., assignor
to Union Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Nov. 3, 1978, Ser. No. 957,561
Int. a.J A61K 31/385. 31/21. 31/335; C07C 83/10
U.S. a. 424—277 56 Gaims
1. A compound of the formula:
RlON O
II II
R C— C— CNR2R3
II
N
\
0-C-N-(S),-R4
I O R*
wherein:
n = 1 or 2;
R. R', R|, R2, and R3 are individually alkyl groups of one to
four carbon atoms;
R4is:
(a) C1-C18 alkyl, C3-C8 cycloalkyi, or dialkylamino
group; or
(b) a phenyl group which may be unsubstituted or substi-
tuted with one or more alkyl, chloro, fluoro. cyano,
wherein:
K(, is a chloro. alkyl, alkylthio, cyanoalkylthio, amidoal-
kylthio or cyano group; or R6 is hydrogen provided R? is
not hydrogen;
R7 is an alkyl, alkylthio, alkoxycarbonyl aminocarbonyl,
alkylaminocarbonyl, dialkylaminocarbonyl, alkylthioal-
kyi, cyanoalkyl. alkylsulfinylalkyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl,
alkoxyalkyl, nitroalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, or phenyl group,
said phenyl group may be unsubstituted or substituted
with one or more alkyl, chloro, or fluoro groups in any
combination; or R? is hydrogen, provided R6 is not hydro-
gen;
provided that except when R4 is an alkyl group or when Rj
is a phenyl group substituted with an a]kyl group, no
single alkyl or alkylene moiety in any R4, Rj, Rt,, or R7
group may include more than eight carbon atoms.
4,435,422
5-SUBSTITUTED
2,3-DIHYDROBENZOFURAN-2-CARBOXYLIC ACIDS
AND THEIR USE IN DIURETIC COMPOSITIONS
Cheuk M. Lee, Libertyville, and James A. Parks, North Chi-
cago, both of III., assignors to Abbott Laboratories, North
Chicago, III.
Filed Sep. 15. 1982, Ser. No. 418.321
Int. a.J A61K 31/34: C07D 307/85
U.S. G. 424—285 31 Gaims
1. A compound of the formula
320
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
HO
wherein Ri and R2 independently of one another denote hy-
drogen or loweralkyl; A is CO, CH2. O, S, SO or CHOH; X is
hydrogen, halo, loweralkyl, or — CH2NR1R2 wherein Ri and
R2 are as defined above; W is COOR wherein R is hydrogen or
alkyl of 1-10 carbon atoms, CH2OH, CONR1R2 or
CH2NR1R2 wherein R| and R2 are as defined above; and Z\
and Z2 independently of one another denote hydrogen, halo or
loweralkyl; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof
22. A method of increasing the urinary excretion of a patient
comprising administering to a patient in need of such treatment
a therapeutically effective amount of a diuretic agent of the
formula
4,435,424
PROCESS FOR IMPROVING VIGOR AND MOOD IN
NORMAL HUMAN PATIENTS
Richard J. Wurtman, Boston, Mass., assignor to Massachusetts
Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 169,001, Jul. 15, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 66,158, Aug. 13, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 898,740,
Apr. 24, 1978, abandoned. This application Aug. 31, 1981, Ser'
No. 297,623
Int. a.i A61K 31/195
Uf^-*24-3l9 ,c,^„
1. The process for improving vigor in a human patient who
lacks vigor associated with a deficiency of catecholamines in
synapses which comprises administering to the patient a neu-
tral amino acid containing tyrosine in an amount effective to
regulate blood plasma levels of tyrosine to form corresponding
amounts of catecholamines released in synapses in the brain.
4,435,425
FLUORINATED DIAMINOBUTANE DERIVATIVES
Albert Sjoerdsma, Cincinnati, Ohio; Philippe Bey, Strasbourg;
Michel Jung, Illkirch-Graffenstaden, both of France; Fritz
Gerhart, Kehl-Uutesheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Daniel
Schirlin, Hoenhein, France, assignors to Merrell Toraude et
Compagnie, Strasbourg, France
per No. PCr/US81/01130, § 371 Date Apr. 9, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 9, 1982
per Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 373,600
Int. a.J A61K 31/13; C07C 87/22
U.S. CI. 424-325 ,3 claims
1. A compound of the formula:
wherein Ri and R2 independently of one another denote hy-
drogen or loweralkyl; A is CO, CH2, O, S, SO or CHOH; X is
hydrogen, halo, loweralkyl, or — CH2NR1R2 wherein Ri and
R2 are as defined above; W is COOR wherein R is hydrogen or
alkyl of 1-10 carbon atoms, CH2OH, CONR1R2 or
CH2NR1R2 wherein Ri and R2 are as defined above; and Z\
and Z2 independently of one another denote hydrogen, halo or
loweralkyl; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof
V
CFpH3-p
4,435 423
ANTI-ULCER COMPOSITION COMPRISING
TERPENOID CONTAINING TWO FUNCTIONAL
GROUPS AND METHOD OF TREATING ULCERS
Akio Sato, Yatabe; Kenji Nak^jima, Sakuramura; Yoshimasa
Takahara, Narashino; Shizumasa Kijima, Niiza; Noriaki
Kuwana, Aichi; Shinya Abe, Kawagoe, and Kouzi Yamada,
Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Eisai Co., Ltd. and General
Director of the Agency of Industrial Science and Technology,
Seiichi Ishizaka, both of Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 221,163, Dec. 29, 1980, Pat. No. 4^38,251.
This application Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,722
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 12, f980, 55-2395
Int. aj A61K 31/20. 31/11. 31/045
U.S. a. 424-318 9 Claims
1. A method for treatment of ulcers comprising administer-
ing to a subject requiring such treatment a therapeutically
effective amount of a pharmaceutical composition containing
an effective anti-ulcer amount of a compound having the for-
mula: :
CH3
I
CH3
R-C=CH-CH2i-CH2-C=CH-CH2^0H
in which n is an integer of from 1 to 5, and R is hydroxymethyl,
formyl or carboxyl, and a pharmacologically acceptable car-
rier.
N-CH2-CH2-CH .
R2 NHRj
wherein:
Rl is hydrogen, Ci-Cealkyl or phenyl-(Ci-C4alkyl);
R2 is hydrogen, Ci-Cealkyl, phenyl-(Ci-C4alkyl), or R4,
where R4 is as defined below;
R3 is hydrogen or, except when R2 is R4, R4, where R4 is as
defined below;
each R4, independently, is C2-C5alkylcarbonyl, phenylcar-
bonyl, phenyl-(Ci-C4alkyl)carbonyl, or an aminocar-
boxylic acid residue derived by removal of an hydroxy
group from the carboxy moiety of glycine or an L-
aminocarboxylic acid of the formula HOCOCH(R9)NH2
or HO-CO(CH2)„CH(NH2)C02H wherein R9 is Ci-C-
4alkyl, aminopropyl, aminobutyl, benzyl, or p-hydroxy-
behzyl and n is 1 or 2; and
p is 1 or 2,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof
12. A pharmaceutical composition for inhibiting GABA-T
comprising a GABA-T inhibiting effective amount of a com-
pound as defined in claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable
carrier.
4,435,426
ETHERS OF PHENOL ACTIVE ON THE
CARDIOVASCULAR SYSTEM, PROCESS FOR
PREPARING SAME AND USE THEREOF IN DRUGS
Henri Demarne, and Jean Wagnon, both of Montpellier, France,
assignors to Societe Anonyme dite: Sanofi, France
Filed May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 381,796
Oaims priority, application France, Jun. 5, 1981, 81 11242
Int. a.3 C07C 97/10: A61K 31/165
U.S. a. 424-324 22 Oaims
1. Novel products, responding to general formula:
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
321
'^'^ y^^ O-CH2-CH-CH2-N
j^^ >w ^,^^*^ OH
(CH2)«
R3
R4
about 30 parts per million based on the total composition of the
(I) compound having the structure:
in which:
Rl and R2 taken together represent an atom of oxygen =0
or Rl represents hydrogen and R2 represents an OH radi-
cal,
R3 designates an atom of hydrogen or a straight or branched
alkyl radical having from 1 to 6 atoms of carbon,
R4 represents a straight or branched alkyl radical having
from 1 to 6 atoms of carbon, or an alkynyl group having
2 to 6 atoms of qarbon,
R5 designates an atom of hydrogen, an alkyl group having
from 1 to 4 atoms of carbon or an acylamine group,
n = 3 or 4;
as well as the mineral acid or organic acid addition salts of said
products.
4,435,427
STABLE INJECTABLE /S-CAROTENE MICELLAR
SOLUTIONS AND THEIR PREPARATION
Peter P. Hoppe, Wachenheim; Joachim U. Schneider, Weisen-
beim; Bernhard Schulz, Scbwetzingen, and Hubert Tiefen-
bacher, Leinfelden-Echterdingen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 329,124
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 19,
1980, 3048000
Int. 0.3 A61K 31/015
U.S. O. 424—356 10 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a /3-carotene micellar
solution, which comprises: forming a melt having a tempera-
ture of from 160° to 180° C. of a mixture of /3-carotene, an
antioxidant for /3-carotene and a non-ionic and water-soluble
emulsifier having an HLB value of from 12 to 16 and which is
capable of forming a homogeneous melt with said /3-carotene,
the amount of /3-carotene in the melt being from 20 to 30% by
weight, based on the weight of the emulsifier;
adding water to the mixture to cool the melt rapidly to a
temperature below 100° C; and thereafter,
adding additional water to the chilled mixture to form a
clear micellar solution having a concentration of /3-caro-
tene of from 3 to 6% by weight.
4 435 428
USE IN AUGMENTING OR ENHANCING THE AROMA
OR TASTE OF FOODSTUFF OR CHEWING GUM WITH
THE METHYL CARBONATE OF
l-HYDROXYMETHYL-2-HEPTANOYL
CYCLOPROPANE
Richard M. Boden, Ocean; Marie R. Hanna, Hazlet, and Theo-
dore J. Tyszkiewicz, Sayreville, all of N.J., assignors to Inter-
national Flavors & Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 422,486
Int. a.3 A23L 1/226, 1/235
U.S. O. 426—3 1 Oaim
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma or taste
of a consumable material selected from the group consisting of
foodstuffs and chewing gums comprising the step of adding to
a foodstuff or chewing gum from 0.02 parts per million up to
4,435,429
PROCESSING AQUEOUS TREATED CEREALS
Vernon D. Burrows; Royce G. Fulcher, both of Ottawa, and
David Paton, Orleans, all of Canada, assignors to Canadian
Patents and Development Limited, Ottawa, Canada
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,424
Int. CV A23B 9/00; A23L 1/10
U.S. O. 426-18 14 Claims
-oajkiN •wMiB-
t
DOUD PODOUCT
1. A process for treating cereal grains to separate endosper-
mic from non-endospermic tissues thereof, said process com-
prising:
(a) soaking the grains in an aqueous medium having a pH in
the range 3.0-7.0 at a temperature in the range 40.0°-70.0*
C. until the grains have absorbed said liquid medium in an
amount at least equivalent to the weight of the grain, to
substantially liquefy said endosperm portion by the action
of indigenous cell wall degrading enzymes;
(b) applying pressure on the soaked grains so as to split each
grain and release substantially all of the liquified endo-
sperm; and
(c) separating liquified endosperm from non-endospermic
tissues.
4,435 430
ENZYME-SACCHARIFIED ALL NATURAL,
READY-TO-EAT CEREAL FROM WHOLE CEREAL
GRAIN
Charles V. Fulger, Millwood, and Ernest K. Gum, Granit
Springs, both of N.Y., assignors to General Foods Corpora-
tion, White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 20, 1983, Ser. No. 459,422
Int. 0.3 A23L 1/164
U.S. O. 426—18 28 Oaims
1. A process for preparing an enzyme-saccharified, ready-to-
eat cereal derived from a whole cereal grain comprising:
(a) milling and separating a whole cereal grain to produce a
germ fraction, a bran fraction and an endosperm fraction;
(b) processing the germ fraction by:
(i^toasting the germ fraction, and
(ii) grinding the toasted germ to a particle size of from 0.25
to 2.0 millimeters;
(c) treating the bran fraction to improve its functionality by
322
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
milling said bran fraction to a particle size of from 5 to 100
microns;
(d) processing the endosperm fraction by:
(i) milling to a practicle size less than 2 millimeters,
(ii) forming a slurry containing from 15 to 60% by weight
of said milled endosperm,
(iii) cooking the milled endosperm until substantially all
the starch is gelatinized, and
(iv) enzymatically hydrolyzing from 15 to 75% by weight
of said endosperm to form soluble saccharides such that
the ready-to-eat cereal contains from 7.5 parts sucrose-
equivalent sweetness up to SO parts sucrose-equivalent
sweetness;
(e) recombing the ground, toasted germ of step (bXii), the
milled bran of step (c) and the enzymatically hydrolyzed
endosperm of step (dXiv) to form a cereal dough contain-
ing whole grain levels of protein, fiber and digestible
carbohydrates;
(0 obtaining a ready-to-eat cereal from said cereal dough.
* 4 435 431
ELIMINATION OF RANCID ODOR IN FERMENTED
MILK PRODUCTS
Sbin-ichiro Akatsuka, Saitama, Japan, assignor to Eisai Com-
pany, Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,871
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 6, 1981, 56-31204
Int. a.3 A23C 9/12. 19/00
U.S. a. 426—36 4 Claims
1. A process for preventing fermented milk products from
becoming rancid, which comprises adding an effective amount
of a mixture of a yeast decomposed product and an albumen
decomposed product to a fermented milk product, wherein the
decomposed yeast and albumin are each present in the mixture
in amounts sufficient to substantially eliminate the rancid odor
ordinarily generated in said fermented product.
4,435 432
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF STABLE
CURDLED MILK PRODUCTS
Hans J. Klupsch, Hamm, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
EVOG - Etablissement fur Verwaltung und Organisation,
Liechtenstein
FUed May 19, 1982, Ser. No. 379,894
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 22,
1981, 3120505
Int. a.3 A23C 9/12. 21/06; C12N 1/20; C12R 1/01
U.S. a. 426-13 8 Claims
1. A process for the production of semi-solid curdled milk
products, comprising inoculating and fermenting raw milk
material with a bacterial strain oi Bifidobacterium longum CKl
1979 (DSM 2054) under conditions suitable for the formation
of said semi-solid curdled milk product.
4,435,434
PACKAGING SYSTEM FOR FULLY BAKED, UNHLLED
PASTRY SHELLS
John A. Caporaso, Ringwood, N.J., assignor to Nabisco Brands,
Inc., Parsippany, NJ.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 344,290, Feb. 1, 1982, Pat. No.
439,157. This application Aug. 15, 1983, Ser. No. 523,627
Int. a.3 B65D 85/36
VS. a. 426—108 8 Qalms
4,435,433
METHOD FOR INHIBITING NITROSAMINE
FORMATION AND ELIMINATING SURFACE
CHARRING DURING MEAT COOKING
Richard F. Tbciler, Scottsdale, Ariz., assignor to Armour Food
Coapaay, Phoenix, Ariz.
FUed Jun. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 389,736
lat a.J A23B 4/02. 4/14
UjS. a. 426—266 23 Claims
1. A method for inhibiting the formation of nitrosamines and
substantially eliminating surface charring when cooking a
nitrite-impregnated meat product, comprising the step of intro-
ducing a reducing sugar alkylated at the C-1 position into said
meat product prior to said step of cooking.
I. A packaging system for protecting the freshness and
structural integrity of a plurality of fully-baked unfilled pastry
shells during shipping and storage, the system comprising:
at least one vertical stack of said fully-baked unfilled pastry
shells, each individual shell being held in a conforming
baking pan which is of frusto-conical construction having
a supporting base member and an upper open surface,
each individual shell and pan wrapped with a continuous,
substantially moisture-impermeable high polymer film
substantially conforming to the outer surface dimensions
of said baking pan and stretched a^oss the upper, open
surface of the pastry shell so as to provide an enclosed air
space substantially equal to the filling volume of the pastry
shell; -
said stack being arranged such that the wrapped base mem-
ber of individual baking pans in the stack rests entirely
upon said high polymer film stretched across the upper
open surface of a shell and pan therebelow;
said high polymer film possessing sufficient strength and
resiliency so as to resist breakage when the wrapped shells
are stacked in said vertical stacked arrangement and such
that the arrangement of wrapped shells in said vertical
stack and conditions encountered in handling and ship-
ping will not result in the portion of the film stretched
across the upper open surface of any of the pastry shells
being deformed or depressed to the point such that any of
the individual shell and pan combinations in the vertical
stack rest together in a manner whereby the wrapped base
member of a baking pan actually rests against the inner
surface of a film-wrapped pastry shell below it;
a high polymer film bag surrounding the stack of pastry
shells; and
a corrugated shipping container enclosing the high polymer
film and the stack of pastry shells.
4,435,435
RICE PASTA COMPOSITION
Jau Y. Hsu, Brookfield, Conn., assignor to Soclete d' Assistance
Technique pour Produits Nestle S.A., Lausanne, Switzerland
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,913
Int. a? A23L 1/16
U.S. a. 426—557 12 Cteims
1. A composition comprising uncooked rice flour and, based
on the weight of the uncooked rice flour, from 0 to 40% by
weight of precooked rice flour, from 0.1 to 4% by weight of
sodium or potassium alginate or mixture thereof and from 0. 1
to 4% by weight of propylene glycol alginate wherein when
the composition contains less than 5% by weight of precooked
rice flour, each of the said alginates are present in an amount of
at least 1% by weight.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
323
4,435,436
ALKALIZED COCOA POWDERS AND FOODSTUFFS
CONTAINING SUCH POWDERS
Johannes L. Terink, and Maurits J. Brandon, both of Zaandam,
Netherlands, assignors to Cacaofabrik DeZaan B.V., Koog
aan de Zaan, Netherlands
Filed Mar. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 358,763
Gaims priority, application Netherlands, May 14, 1981,
8102377
Int. a.J A23G 7/00. 1/02
U.S. a. 426—631 25 Oalms
1. An alkalized cocoa powder having a pH of 7.5 or less; a
ratio pH: alkalinity of the ash below 0.046; color coordinates L
between 9.0 and 14.0, a between 4.0 and 8.0, and b between 2.0
and 6.0; in which neither more nor other acid radicals are
present than those by nature present in fermented cocoa.
65° C. for a period of time sufficient to impart a melt value
of at least 25 cm^ to the protein; and
(i) recovering t^e soy protein isolate from the solution.
4,435,437
AROMATIC CITRUS OIL CONCENTRATE WHICH IS
STABLE IN STORAGE
Erich Ziegler, Draisendorfer Strasse 143, D-8551 Aufsess, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,893
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 28,
1981, 3112380
Int. CI.' A23L 1/221. 1/28
U.S. CI. 426—651 6 Claims
1. Concentrate of natural citrus oil which retains its aroma
and is stable in storage, comprising:
(a) 10 to 90 percent by weight citrus peel oil concentrate
produced from cold-pressed citrus peel oil, the peel oil
concentrate being obtained by subjecting the cold-pressed
citrus peel oil to adsorption at a solid separating agent
which adsorbs polar organic substances to thereby form
an adsorbed fraction at the solid separating agent, eluting
the adsorbed fraction with a polar organic eluant to form
an eluate containing the adsorbed fraction, recovering the
eluate, and separating the adsorbed fraction from the
eluate and
(b) the remainder essence oil concentrate.
4,435,439
FROZEN DESSERT
John D. Morris, 203 Buckingham Rd., Pittsburgh, Pa. 15215
Filed Jul. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 395,999
Int. CI.J A23G 9/02
U.S. a. 426—565 17 Oaims
1. A method for the preparation of a frozen dessert which
comprises:
(a) preparing an initial mix containing the following compo-
nents:
Component
Amount in Weight %
4,435,438
SOY ISOLATE SUITABLE FOR USE IN IMITATION
CHEESE
William F. Lehnhardt; Charles E. Streaty, Jr., both of Decatur;
Walter C. Yackel, Jr., Oreana; Ho S. Yang, and Daniel K.
Tang, both of Decatur, all of III., assignors to A. E. Staley
Manufacturing Company, Decatur, III.
Division of Ser. No. 388,864, Dec. 29, 1980, Pat. No. 4,349,576.
This application Jun. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 388,864
Int. a.5 A23J 1/14: A23C 20/00
U.S. CI. 426—656 9 Claims
1. A method for preparing a soy protein isolate suitable for
use as a replacement of caseinate in imitation cheese which
comprises:
(a) preparing a slurry of a defatted soybean material in wa-
ter;
(b) extracting the water-soluble protein from the slurry in
the presence of sulfurous ions at a temperature of about
25° to 35* C. and a pH of about 7.0 to 7.5;
(c) clarifying the extract to remove insolubles;
(d) adding acid to the clarified extract to adjust its pH to
about 4.2 to 4.6 to precipitate the protein;
(e) separating the precipitated protein from the other com-
ponents of the clarified extract to recover at least a major
weight portion of the water-soluble proteiv in the clarified
extract;
(0 washing the separated protein to remove Substantially all
of the pH 4.2 to 4.6 water-soluble components therefrom;
(g) dissolving and washed protein in water at a pH of about
7.0 to 7.5;
(h) heating the protein solution at a temperature of at least
Non Fat Milk Solids 10tol3.S
Sweetening Agent lO.S to 13
Casein 0 to 1.10
Other solid components selected ' 1.5 to 2.2S
from the group consisting of
stabilizers, emulsifiers, corn
syrup solids, calcium salts,
magnesium salts and
microcrystalline cellulose
Water to 100%
(b) pasteurizing the initial mix at a minimum temperature of
165* F. for a minimum time period of 30 minutes to obtain
an initial mix having a viscosity at a temperature of 165* F.
immediately after pasteurization in the range of about 18
to 31 seconds as measured by a Zahn cup viscosity meter
with B tip;
(c) cooling the pasteurized initial mix to a temperature of not
greater than 40° P.;
(d) blending the pasteurized initial mix with fruit juice con-
centrate to obtain a final blended composition having a
viscosity at a composition temperature of 50* P. in the
range of about 700 to 1400 cps as measured by a Brook-
field viscometer with spindle No. 3 at 60 rpm; and
(e) freezing the final blended composition to obtain a frozen
dessert.
4,435,440
SWEETENERS
Leslie Hough, Wimbledon; Shashikant P. Phadnis, Talbot
Square, Riaz A. Khan, Sonning, all of England, assignors to
Tate A Lyie Limited, England
Filed Dec. 30. 1976, Ser. No. 755,661
Claims priority, application United l^ingdom, Jan. 8, 1976,
616/76; May 12, 1976, 19570/76
Int. CI.' A23L 1/09
U.S. CI. 426—658 40 Claims
1. A method of sweetening an ingestibie product or oral
composition, comprising incorporating therein a compound of
the general formula (I)
»3 .R«
(I)
in which *
R' represents a hydroxy group or a chlorine atom;
R2 and R^ respectively represent a hydroxy group and a
324
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
hydrogen atom, a chlorine atom and a hydrogen atom, or
a hydrogen atom and a chlorine atom, the 4-position being
in the D-configuration;
R* represents a hydroxy group; or, if at least two of R'. R2,
R^ and R' represent chlorine atoms, R^ represents a hy-
droxy group or a chlorine atom; and
R' represents a hydroxy group or a chlorine atom;
provided that at least one of R', R2, and R^ and represents a
chlorine atom; in a sweetening amount.
4,435 441
METHOD OF FREQUENCY TRIMMING SURFACE
ACOUSTIC WAVE DEVICES
Elio Mariani, Hamilton Square, and Arthur Ballato, Long
Branch, both of N,J., assignors to The United States of Amer-
ica as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Dec. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 454,806
Int. C1.3 B05D 3/06
U.S. a. 427-10 . 9 Oaims
ing the dispersion paste is carried out with a plurality of
cuttings positioned to form a stack in a heated chamber at
90' to 140* C.
4,435 443
METHOD FOR FORMING A PROTECTING FILM ON
SIDE WALLS OF A SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE
Hi^ime Imai, Tokyo; Masahiro Morimoto, Yokohama, and
Takao Fujiwara, Kawasaki, all of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu
Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 223,152, Jan. 7, 1981, Pat. No.
4,356,210, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 62,415, Jul. 30,
1979, abandoned. This application Jun. 18, 1982, Ser. No.
389,916
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 29, 1978, 53-92777;
Dec. 1, 1978, 53-148838
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 26,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B05D 3/06; C23C 17/00
U.S. CI. 427-38 23 Claim.
w/i ///U ////////-
©;
1. A method of adjusting the frequency of a piezoelectric
device, having a substrate containing an active resonator ele-
ment with an acoustic path, comprising the steps of:
applying a low out-gassing polymer to the substrate of the
device;
partially curing the device;
sealing the device; and
energizing the polymer.
4,435 442
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REINFORCING FACE
FABRIC MATERIALS FOR GARMENTS
Josef Hefele, Grafeinng, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Kufner Textilwerke KG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,656
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 16,
1980, 3014656
Int. a.^ B05D 1/06, 1/14
U.S. a. 427-14.1 24 Claims
n'
1. A method of reinforcing a face fabric material for a gar-
ment by a layer of flocking on the rear side of the face fabric
to eliminate the need for a fixing lining for the garment, com-
prising the steps of imprinting the back of the material with an
aqueous cross-linkable dispersion paste in a grid-like manner
by an intaglio printing process, applying flock to the dispersion
paste and curing by heat treatment, characterized in that:
(a) the printing step is performed with a flock binding disper-
sion paste on fabric cuttings:
(b) the flock is applied to the dispersion paste electrostati-
cally;
(c) the aqueous dispersion paste is pre-stabilized by at least
one technique selected from thermal coagulation and
pre-drying: and
(d) a further operating stage in which the step of cross-link-
1. A method for forming a protecting film on the side walls
of a semiconductor device comprising the steps of:
forming a plurality of electrodes on at least one surface of a
semiconductor substrate;
cleaving said substrate into a plurality of portions, each said
portion having at least one of said electrodes;
placing said substrate portions on the surface of a substrate
target made of a protecting film material so that said side
walls are oriented essentially perpendicularly to said sub-
strate target;
placing said substrate target with each said substrate portion
in an atmosphere including energetic particles; and
impinging said energetic particles against said substrate
target, so that particles of said protecting film material are
sputtered from said substrate target and deposited on said
side walls of each said substrate portion to form said
protecting film, while simultaneously, said energetic parti-
cles sputter-etch the exposed ones of said electrodes and
the exposed portions of said semiconductor substrate
surface.
4 435 444
METHOD OF MAKING ULTRA-MICROCRYSTALLITE
SILICON CARBIDE PRODUCT
William Goldberger, and A. K. Reed, both of Chicago, III., as-
signors to Superior Graphite Co., Chicago, III.
Division of Ser. No. 319,976, Nov. iD, 1981. This application
Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 413,613
Int. CI.3 B05D 3/14
U.S. CI. 427-49 22 Claims
1. A method of producing a silicon carbide and carbon
product comprising the steps of:
mixing a substantially greater percentage of additional car-
bonaceous material in particulate form with a substantially
lesser percentage of silicon dioxide to form a first reaction
mixture;
fiuidizing in an inert gaseous medium and providing electri-
cal current to the mixture, with the electrical current
sufficient to render a temperature sufficient to react the
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
325
silicon dioxide with the carbonaceous material but insuffi-
cient to decompose the formed silicon carbide and for a
time sufficient to react substantially all of the silicon diox-
ide; and
EFFECT OF SILICON CARBIDE CONTENT
ON FURNACE RESISTANCE
successively repeating the above steps until the electrical
resistance of the reacted mixture rises asymptotically.
4,435,445
PHOTO-ASSISTED CVD
David D. Allred, Troy; Lee Walter, Bloomneld Hills; Jaime M.
Reyes, Birmingham, and Stanford R. Ovshinsky, Bloomfield
Hills, all of Mich., assignors to Energy Conversion Devices,
Inc., Troy, Mich.
Filed May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,738
Int. CV C23C 13/00
U.S. CI. 427—54.1 7 Claims
1. A process for making an amorphous silicon and germa-
nium alloy film comprising:
providing a gas comprising silane and germane in a deposi-
tion environment containing the substrate;
heating the substrate below the temperature required for
pyrolysis of the silane and germane;
irradiating the silane and germane with radiation below an
energy level required to photochemically decompose the
gas; and
the combination of heat and radiation causing deposition of
an amorphous silicon and germanium alloy film on the
substrate.
4 435 446
EDGE SEAL WITH POLYSILICON IN LOCOS PROCESS
Alan D. Marston, Lot Altos, and Lenin Anne, Cupertino, both of
Calif., assignors to Hewlett-Packard Company, Palo Alto,
Calif.
Filed Nov. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 441,593
Int. a.^ HOIL 21/76
U.S. CI. 427—93 5 Claims
1. In a method for producing a semiconductor structure, the
steps comprising:
forming a covering layer over a semiconductor substrate;
removing portions of the covering layer to expose desired
areas on the substrate;
depositing a layer of polysilicon over the entire preceding
structure;
anisotropicaP' etching the polysilicon layer to remove the
polysilicon in the plane parallel to the semiconductor
substrate; and
oxidizing the remaining polysilicon and the exposed areas of
the semiconductor substrate forming a field oxide layer
whereby a bird's beak free structure is produced.
4 435 447
METHOD FOR FORMING AN INSULATING FILM ON A
SEMICONDUCTOR SUBSTRATE SURFACE
Takashi Ito, Kawasaki, and Takao Nozaki, Yokohama, both of
Japan, assignors to Fujitsu Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 105,094, Dec. 19, 1979, abandoned.
This application Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,718
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1978, 53-163155
Int. Cl.^ B05D 5/12
U.S. CI. 427-94 9 Claims
3 A
^m^^m.
1. A method for forming an insulating film having stable
electrical properties and high density and which is suitable for
a gate insulating film, by direct thermal nitridation of a surface
portion of a silicon semiconductor substrate, comprising
selecting said substrate to have a concentration of oxygen of
not more than 10'*/cm^ at least in a surface layer of said
substrate of at least 10 microns depth at the top of which
said direct nitridation is to occur, and
subjecting said substrate to a nitridizing gas atmosphere
comprising nitrogen or a nitrogen compound, so as to
convert the top portion of said substrate to said insulating
film by direct thermal nitridation.
4,435,448
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING BABBITTED
BEARINGS
James R. Nolt, Jr., York, Pa., assignor to Allis-Chalmers Corpo-
ration, Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Apr. 21, 1983, Ser. No. 487,253
Int. CV B05D 1/36. 3/12; C23C 1/04
U.S. CI. 427-234 10 Claims
1. A method for lining an inner surface of a bearing shell
with a babbitt metal comprising:
covering said surface with a fiux;
placing a solid babbitt metal on said covered surface;
rotating said shell about an axis coaxial with a cylindrical
axis of said inner surface;
heating said babbitt metal and said fiux to a temperature
sufficient to melt said metal and fiux and routing said shell
\
326
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6. 1984
at a rotational velocity sufTicient to urge any impurities at 4,435,451
said surface to migrate toward said axis of rotation; FLOOR MATS OF THE WASHABLE, DIRT ADSORBING
TYPE
Robert Neubert, Hornslet, Denmark, assignor to Clean-Tex
A/S, Morke, Denmark
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,088
Int. a.' A47G 27/04
U.S. CI. 428-15 2 aaims
-?4
cooling said shell until said babbitt metal solidifies with said
migrated impurities at a radially inner surface of said
babbitt metal.
4,435,449
TREATMENT OF MINIMAL BRAIN DYSFUNCTION
(MBD)
Warren C. Stern, Raleigh, N.C, assignor to Burroughs Well-
come Co., Research Triangle Park, N.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 263,717, May 14, 1981, abandoned.
This application Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,147
Int. CI.^ A61K il/liS
U.S. a. 424-330 10 Claims
1. A method of treating minimal brain dysfunction in a
human suffering from same, which comprises administering to
said human an effective non-toxic minimal brain dysfunction
amount of a compound of the formula (I)
(I)
CO— CH— CH3
I
NH{CH3)3
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
4 435 450
METHOD FOR APPLYING ABRASION RESISTANT
THIN POLYURETHANE COATINGS
Charles R. Coleman, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to PPG Indus-
tries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jul. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 394,556
Int. a.5 B05D i/02
U.S. a. 427—385.5 10 Qaims
1. A method for applying an abrasion resistant polyurethane
coating onto a surface of a substrate while minimizing volatili-
zation of free isocyanate comprising the steps of:
a. reacting an aliphatic diisocyanate with excess hydroxy-
terminated diol to form a linear hydroxy-terminated pre-
polymer;
b. adding to said prepolymer a triisocyanate crosslinking
agent having a molecular weight greater than 500;
c. applying said prepolymer and triisocyanate mixture in a
solvent to the surface of the substrate by contacting said
surface with said solution in a continuous liquid phase;
d. evaporating said solvent; and
e. reacting said prepolymer and triisocyanate to form a
crosslinked polyurethane coating.
1. A method of producing a washable, dust absorbing mat
having a rubber backing, a nap of a soft yarn material on a top
side of said rubber backing and a nap-free frame area along the
edges of the mat, comprising the steps of preparing a pre-
assembly consisting of a backing member of a "black" non-col-
orable rubber, a frame portion of a colored rubber or rubber-
like material placed in contact with at least a top side edge area
of the backing member, and an uppermost nap sheet extending
outwardly to beyond the inner edge of the frame portion on a
top side thereof, and subjecting this pre-assembly to heat and
pressure in a vulcanization press so as to form said pre-assem-
bly into a single unitary mat structure.
4,435 452
LIL GOLDEN PINE NOVELTY DISPLAY DEVICE
Ruben R. Hernandez, and Freda M. Hernandez, both of 156
McKinney Ave., Pacifica, Calif. 94044
Filed Jan. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 433,289
Int. a.3 A47G 3i/06: B44C 5/04
U.S. CI. 428-17 1 a.im
1. A novelty display device, comprising, in combination, a
plurality of flat, variously-shaped panels glued one flat side
upon another, forming a three dimensional contoured base, and
a plurality of pine cone scales glued to the front side of said
base; a gold paint coating being applied on the front of said
pine cone scales; a flat sheet of Lucite being adhered to the rear
side of said base, said Lucite sheet being contoured smaller
than said base, and a plurality of holes drilled from the front
side of said device, through said base and into the front side of
said Lucite forming a roughened surface in said Lucite drilled-
out portions of said holes, whereby exterior light rays upon an
edge of said Lucite sheet illuminate said drilled-out, roughened
Lucite surface.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
327
4,435,453
SATURATED PREFORM AND METHOD FOR
PREPARATION THEREOF
Wolf R. Vl«th, 19 Partridge Run, Belle Meade, N.J. 08502, and
Leonard B. Ryder, 5 Sharon Dr., Whippany, N.J. 07981
Filed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,824
Int. a.J B65D il/OO, 89/00; B32B 9/04
U.S. a. 428-35 9 Qaimi
1. Biaxially oriented hollow thermoplastic article having
walls which are saturated with a dissolved presaturant gas
selected from the group consisting of carbon dioxide, dichloro-
difluoromethane, and oxygen.
4,435,454
RECOVERABLE ARTICLE
Regis Plot, Eragny, and Michel Zoppi, Creteil, both of France,
assignors to Raychem Pontoiie S. A., France
Filed Apr. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 364,267
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 8, 1981,
8111059
.3 B32B 7/14
18 Gaims
Int. a.3
U.S. a. 428—36 y
1. A recoverable article in which spaced-apart portions
thereof are temporarily secured together to form at least one
compartment in the article, the article being recoverable by
heat and being arranged such that forces produced therein on
recovery about a substrate overcome forces securing said
portions together.
4 435 455
COMPLIANT COMPOSITE TUBULAR LINERS OF
nBER REINFORCED GLASS/GLASS-CERAMIC
HAVING UTILITY AS GUN BARREL LINERS
Karl M. Prewo, Vernon, and John J. Brennan, Portland, both of
Conn., assignors to United Technologies Corporation, Hart-
ford, Conn.
Filed Jan. 10, 1983, Ser. No. 456,884
Int. a.3 B32B 1/08, 17/12; F41C 21/02; F41F 17/08
U.S. a. 428—36 5 Qaims
sleeve, the liner having an elastic modulus less than 15x 10*
psi, a fracture toughness exemplifled by a critical stress inten-
sity factor greater than 5 X 10^ psi (inch)*, and being capable of
withstanding brisant forces.
4,435,456
APPLICATION OF AMBIENT TEMPERATURE CURED
POLYMERS OR PREPOLYMERS TO A CURED
ELASTOMER
Walter R. Hausch, Akron, Ohio, assignor to The Firestone Tire
A Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Continuation-in-pari of Ser. No. 316,023, Oct. 28, 1981, Pat, No.
4,399,852, which is a division of Ser. No, 164,127, Jun. 30, 1980,
Pat. No. 4,327,138, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
73,760, Sep. 10, 1979, abandoned. This application Mar. 21,
1983, Ser. No. 477,451
Int. a.J F16L 11/12; B32B 25/04
U.S. a 428-36 9a.lms
1. A rubber substrate having an amine curable polymer or
prepolymer adhered thereto, comprising:
(a) a cured rubber substrate containing unsaturated groups
therein;
(b) a treating agent bonded to said substrate, said treating
agent selected from the group consisting of N-halohydan-
toins, N-haloamides, N-haloimides, and combinations
thereof;
(c) a polyisocyanate layer, said polyisocyanate layer residing
on said treating agent, said polyisocyanate being a com-
pound having the formula R(N = C = X)fl where R is an
alkyl having from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl
having from 4 to 20 carbon atoms, an aromatic or an alkyl
substituted aromatic having from 6 to 20 carbon atoms,
where n is 2 or 3, and where X is oxygen or sulfur;
the amine curable polymer or prepolymer bonded to said
polyisocyanate layer at ambient temperature.
4,435,457
THERMOPLASTIC NON- WOVEN FABRIC SEAMED BY
MELT-SEAMING AND A METHOD OF MAKING SUCH A
FABRIC
Matti Servo, and Matti Vainio, both of Tampere, Finland, as-
signors to Tamfelt Oy AB, Tampere, Finland
per No. PCr/n82/00001, § 371 Date Sep. 13, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 13, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/02412, PCT Pub.
.Date Jul. 22, 1982
PCT Filed Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 417,135
Oaims priority, application Finland, Jan. 15, 1981, 810104
Int. C1.J C09J 5/10; D06H 5/00
U.S. a. 428—58 6 Oaims
1. A compliant tubular liner particularly adapted to with-
stand brisant forces comprising a fiber reinforced glass or
glass-ceramic matrix having an elastic modulus less than
I5x 10* psi and high fracture toughness exemplified by a criti-
cal stress intensity factor greater than 5x 10^ psi (inch)i.
2. A composite gun barrel comprising a fiber reinforced
glass or glass/ceramic matrix liner surrounded by a metal outer
) 3 ib^^
lb
1. A non- woven fabric made of a thermopltistic material and
328
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
seamed by means of melt-seaming, the said fabric consisting of
at least two strips of fabric (1, 2; 11, 12; 21. 22) positioned ^de
by side in the same plane and joined to each other at their
opposite overlapping edges by means of a melt seam (4; 14; 24),
characterized in that the strips of fabric (1. 2; 11, 12; 21, 22) to
be joined together are, at least at the edges (lb. 2b: lib. I2b;
lib. 22b) to be joined together, provided with reinforcement
yarns (3; 23) parallel to said edges and having a melting point
higher than the melting point of the rest of the material of the
fabric strips and that said edges to be joined together have by
means of melting been shrunk into such a thickness that the
thickness of the seam formed by said edges is substantially
equal to the thickness of the strips of fabric.
4 435 458
LAMINATE FOR WEARING APPAREL AND METHODS
FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF THE LAMINATE
Charles E. Hill, Coshocton, Ohio, assignor to Becton, Dickinson
and Company, Paramus, N.J.
Filed Dec. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 452,222
Int. CI.' B32B 3/26. 33/00
U.S. CI. 428-91 32 Claims
18. A laminate for use in wearing apparel, characterized by
(a) a fibrous web;
(b) a synthetic foamed resin web joined to said non-woven
fibrous web to form a prelaminate;
(c) the exposed surface of said non-woven fibrous web on
said pre-laminate being napped to form the internal sur-
face of wearing apparel formed therefrom.
(d) a resin film web adhered to the exposed foam surface of
said pre-laminate; and
(e) the exposed surface of said film web being creped.
4,435,459
CARPET BACKED WITH FIRE SUPPRESSANT
POLYURETHANE COMPOSITION
Linda D. McKinney. and Randall C. Jenkines, both of Lake
Jackson, Tex., assignors to The Dow Chemical Co., Midland,
Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 372,584, Apr. 28, 1982, Pat. No. 4,397,978.
This application Mar. 18, 1983, Ser. No. 476,679
Int. CI.' B32B 3/02. 33/00
U.S. CI. 428-95 12 Claims
1. A carpet comprising (I) a primary backing; (II) a yarn
tufted or woven through said primary backing thereby creat-
ing a yarn bundle on the underside of the resultant tufted or
woven greige good and (III) a polyurethane composition
applied to the underside thereby encapsulating the yarn bun-
dles and adhering the yarn bundles to the primary backing; said
polyurethane composition comprising a catalyzed reaction
product of a mixture comprising
(A) a relatively high molecular weight polyether polyol
having an average of from 2 to about 8 hydroxyl groups
per molecule and an average hydroxyl equivalent weight
of from about 500 to about 2200 or a mixture of such
polyols;
(B) a relatively low molecular weight polyol having an
average of from about 2 to about 8 hydroxyl groups per
molecule and an average equivalent weight of from about
31 to about 230 or a mixture of such polyols;
(C) an organic polyisocyanate or polyisothiocyanate having
an average of from about 2 to about 4 NCX (each X being
independently O or S) groups per molecule or^jntxture of
such isocyanates or isothiocyanates; and
(D) a filler component comprising
(1) an inorganic filler component comprising
(a) hydrated alumina,
(b) lead-containing compound,
(c) antimony compound, and
wherein component (a) is present in quantities of from
about 10 to about 55 percent by weight of the combined
weight of the components of (D-1); component (b) is
present in quantities of from about 0.01 to about 2 per-
cent by weight of the combined weight of the compo-
nents of (D-l); component (c) is present in quantities of
from about 46 to about 90 percent by weight of the
combined weight of the components (D-l); and such
compounds have an average particle size of from about
0.02 to about 22 microns, and an average surface area of
from about 0.7 to about 75 m^/gram;
(2) a halogen-containing resin containing at least about
85% halogen by weight and an average particle size of
from about 9 to about 60 microns; and
with the proviso that (a) if it is desired that the urethane backed
carpet passes the Vertical Flammability Test employing a
flame temperature of greater than about 1550° F. (843° C),
then component (D-l) also contains a hydrated zinc compound
in an amount of from about 12 to about 40 percent by weight
of the combined weight of the components of (D-l), and (b) if
the carpet substrate is woven and has a stitch rate of at least 50
tufts per square inch (7.55 tufts per square centimeter) then a
sufficient quantity of
(E) an organometallic viscosity reducing agent is employed
to provide a mixture of components (A), (B), (D) and (E)
with a viscosity of less than about 14,000 centipoise (14
Pas) at 33° C. and wherein
(1) components (A) and (B) are present in quantities such
that the ratio of the number of hydroxyl equivalents
contributed by component (B) to the number of hy-
droxyl equivalents contributed by component (A) is
from about 0.8:1 to about 5.5:1;
(2) components (A), (B) and (C) are present in quantities
so as to provide an NCX to OH ratio of from about
0.95:1 to about 1.5:1;
(3) component (D-l) is present in quantities of from about
20 to about 60 percent by weight based upon the com-
bined weight of components A, B and D; and
(4) component (D-2) is present in quantities of from about
10 to about 35 percent by weight based on the combined
weight of components A, B and D.
4,435,460
PLASTIC TUBULAR OBJECTS
Julian M. Menzei, Sempahore Park, Australia, assignor ||e Rib
Loc (Hong Kong) Ltd., Hong Kong, Hong Kong
Division of Ser. No. 950,085, Oct. 10, 1978, Pat. No. 4,209,043.
This application Jun. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 160,586
Claims priority, application Australia, Oct. 18, 1977, PD2100;
Feb. 15, 1978, PD3384
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 24,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. CV B23B 3/04: F16L 9/16
U.S. CI. 428—129 8 Claims
1. An elongated strip whjjph can be formed into a tubular
article by helically winding said strip to overlap at least its two
longitudinal edges, said strip including:
a series of longitudinally extending spaced apart reinforce-
ments, said strip further including connecting means com-
prising a longitudinally extending joining rib near one of
said longitudinal edges and a longitudinally extending
engaging rib spaced from said joining rib and adapted to
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
329
engage said joining rib when the strip is wound to form
the tubular article, said reinforcements being between said
engaging rib and said joining rib; and
extension means attached to and extending laterally out-
wardly from said engaging rib for engaging and interlock-
i
4,435 461
METHOD OF PROVIDING A SURFACE EFFECT IN A
RELEASE PAPER PRODUCT
Lorin S. Gray, III, Portland, and Jeffrey S. Doody, Yarmouth,
both of Me., assignors to Scott Paper Company, Philadelphia,
Pa.
Filed Oct. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 435,209
Int. Cl.^ B05D 3/06
U.S. a. 428-141 10 Claims
i^
L-
} 10 '" Y^ /
1. In a method of providing a desired surface effect in a
release coating on a substrate, comprising the steps of:
A. applying a coating of an electron beam radiation curable
composition or material to a side of a substrate;
B. pressing the coated side of the substrate against a replica-
tive surface having a desired surface effect to cause the
surface of the coating to conform to the replicative sur-
face;
C. irradiating the coating with electron beam radiation di-
rected first through the substrate to partially cure the
coating sufficiently to enable it to be removed from the
replicative surface securely attached to the substrate and
with the replicated surface effect in the coating being
maintained; and
D. stripping the substrate from the replicative surface with
"^the partially cured coating adhered to the substrate;
The improvement including the further step of
E. irradiating the partially cured coating out of contact with
the replicative surface a second time with electron beam
radiation without first applying additional coating compo-
sition or material over the first coating.
4,435,462
INFRA-RED DETECTOR ELEMENTS
Richard B. Withers, Romsey, England, assignor to U.S. Philips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 179,339, Aug. 18, 1980, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 59,831, Jul. 23, 1979, Pat. No.
4,301,591. This application Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,776
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 31, 1978.
31750/78
Int. Cl.^ B32B 3/00
U.S. a. 428-156 7 Oaims
ing with at least said longitudinally extending reinforce-
ment which is adjacent said joining rib when said strip is
helically wound to form said tubular article, said extension
means having a length at least equal to the spacing be-
tween said joining rib and said last mentioned reinforce-
ment.
1. An infra-red detector device having at least one detector
element and comprising;
a substrate having a major surface;
a body of cadmium mercury telluride which is sensitive i
infra-red radiation mounted on the major surface of iht
substrate, at least a portion of the body being in the form
of a mesa on a major surface of the body which is remote
from the substrate which mesa includes an active area of
the detector element and has a top surface and at least two
side walls; and
a plurality of separate, metal layer electrodes which are
disposed on the body in contact with the mercury cad-
mium telluride to define, between the electrodes, a current
carrying path through the active area of the mesa and
which extend onto a part of the major surface of the
substrate beyond the body to provide connections to the
detector element;
wherein each of the electrodes contacts the body at a side
wall of the mesa without contacting the top surface of the
mesa and the contacted side walls of the mesa are suffi-
ciently steep so that said current carrying path passes
through the bulk of the mesa between its side walls.
4,435,463
SUPPORTING AND SPACING MEMBER FOR WEB
MATERIAL ROLLS
Thomas A. Roellchen, Almena Township, Van Buren County,
Mich., assignor to Ace Polymers, Inc., Kalamazoo, .Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 235,827, Feb. 19, 1981, Pat. No.
4,385,091. This application Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,360
Int. CI.' B32B 3/26: B65D 85/67. 85/62
U.S. CI. 428—158 4 Claims
1. In a structure for protectively supporting and spacing
rolls of web material in a multi-layer stack, comprising an
elongated member of expanded polystyrene material having a
pair of opposed surfaces, a first of said surfaces having a plural-
ity of spaced, parallel, generally semi-cylindrical indentations
disposed to receive rolls of web material, said indentations
being separated by separating walls, the endmost indentations
being oriented between a separating wall and an end wall, the
radius of each of said semi-cylindrical indentations being
330
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
greater than the depth of said indentation, whereby the rolls textiles contained in a polymer matrix with additives for in-
will be snugly retained within the indentations in a pair of creasing at least one of the ohmic, electrical and magnetic
members and the members will be out of contact with each
other, the improvement comprising wherein at least one up-
right and spaced wall segment is provided in each said indenta-
tion along one lateral edge of said elongated member and
between said separating walls and associated end walls, each
said wall segment having an arcuate edge with a radius oppo-
site the radius of said semi-cylindrical indentation and con-
forming to the radius of a respective indentation in an adjacent
member thereby enabling, upon a lengthwise shifting of one
member relative to said adjacent member, said wall segment in
one indentation to be received in the indentation of said adja-
cent member upon a nesting thereof and without any lateral
offset of said one member relative to said adjacent member.
losses uniformly present in the polymer or on the sheet-form
textiles.
4,435,464
HINGE FOR THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL
Loren J. Hulber, Naperville, and Raymond W. Fluckiger, Chi-
cago, both of III., assignors to Jostens, Inc., Minneapolis,
Minn.
Division of Ser. No. 253,245, Apr. 13, 1981, Pat. No. 4,397,904.
This application May 2, 1983, Ser. No. 490,383
Int. aj B32B 3/30
U.S. a. 428—167 2 Oaims
4,435,466
MULTI-LAYERED SEALING SHEET OF ELASTOMERIC
SYNTHETIC RESIN
Werner Kuhnel, Neunkirchen-Schoneshof; Peter Piitz, St.
Augustin-Menden; Manfred Simm, Troisdorf, and Paul Spie-
lay, Troisdorf-Eschmar, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft, Troisdorf, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,400
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 17,
1981, 3150021
Int. a.i B32B 5/08, 17/04
U.S. a. 428—215 11 Qaims
1. A hinge for devices composed of thermoplastic sheet
material comprising: a plurality of grooves in said sheet mate-
rial extending along the desired dimension of said sheet and
defining a longitudinal orientation for the hinge, each of said
grooves oriented transversely to the longitudinal orientation of
the hinge and spaced apart from each other by planar regions
of said sheet material which are integral with the sheet material
on either side of said hinge, each of said grooves being more
narrow in the longitudinal direction than each of said regions
separating them, such that the hinge lacks a substantially con-
tinuous longitudinally oriented line of indentation where tear-
ing would most likely occur.
4,435 465
COMPOSITE MATERIAL FOR SHIELDING AGAINST
ELECTROMAGNETIC RADIATION
Harold Ebneth, Leverkusen; Hans G. Fitzky, Odenthal, and
Wolfgang Oberkirch, Cologne, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,803
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 1,
1980,3024888
Int. a.} B32B 3/00
U.S. a. 428—195 20 Oaims
1. A composite material comprising: metallized sheet-form
1. A multi-layered sealing sheet for the building industry
which comprises a textile reinforcing insert embedded between
layers of elastomeric synthetic resin containing additives to
enhance the weatherability and fillers to enhance the mechani-
cal properties of said sealing sheet, the outer layers of said
sealing sheet being weldable thermally and/or by use of sol-
vents or swelling agents, all layers which contain elastomeric
synthetic resin being free of vulcanization accelerator and
containing synthetic resin consisting essentially of an ethylene-
propylene-diene terpolymer and/or ethylene-propylene co-
polymer, and the reinforcing insert embedded in between the
layers with the use of heat being a fabric, mat, knitted fabric, or
similar textile material formed of synthetic resin fibers and/or
glass fibers with a weight per unit area of 20-70 g/m^ and with
interstices having a spacing of at least 2.0 mm through which
the elastomeric synthetic resin penetrates; said multi-layered
sealing sheet, due to the penetration of the elastomeric syn-
thetic resin through the interspaces of the reinforcing insert,
exhibiting a parting force of the layers which is larger than 100
N/5 cm.
4,435,467
ATHLETIC SUPPORT FABRIC
Jack S. Rogers, Spartanburg, S.C, assignor to Milliken Re-
search Corporation, Spartanburg, S.C.
Filed May 9, 1983, Ser. No. 492,820
Int. O.^ B32B 7/00
U.S. O. 428—254 8 Oaims
1. An athletic support fabric having a substrate comprising:
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
331
a warp knit fabric having a face and a rear side, a plurality of
rows of weft continuous filament weft yarn laid in on the face
side of said knit fabric, a layer of non-woven fabric on the rear
side of side of said knit fabric, a plurality of wales of a chain
-continued
4,435,468
SEAMLESS CERAMIC HBER COMPOSITE ARTICLES
AND METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THEIR
PRODUCTION
John D. TenEyck, Lewiston, N.Y., assignor to Kennecott Corp.,
Cleveland, Ohio/
Filed J^eb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,482
Int. CI.' B32B S/22: E04B 1/00
U.S. O. 428—285
9 Claims
1. A planar seamless composite fiber insulating mat compris-
ing at least one planar lower temperature resistant portion
having planar faces and edge faces, the lower temperature
resistant portion comprising lower temperature resistant insu-
lating fibers and at least one planar high temperature resistant
portion having planar faces and edge faces, the higher temper-
ature resistant portion comprising higher temperature resistant
fibers, wherein an edge face of said lower temperature resistant
portion is joined to an edge face of said higher temperature
resistant portion by a transition zone of commingled fibers of
said lower temperature resistant fiber and said higher tempera-
ture resistant fibers.
4,435,469
HOT MELT ADHESIVE FOR BONDING PAPER TO
GLASS nBER
Ralph M. Fay, Lakewood, Colo., assignor to Manville Service
Corporation, Denver, Colo.
Filed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,605
Int. 0.3 C08K S/01. 3/26. 7/10: C09J 3/14
U.S. O. 428—285 18 Claims
1. A hot melt adhesive composition consiting essentially of
by weight:
Microcrystalline Wax
8-12%
Synthetic Polyethylene Wax
8-12%
Hydrocarbon Resin
13-17%
Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate
6-12%
Copolymer
Filler and
Balance
Antioxidant.
16. A fiber glass mat adhered to a Kraft paper facing
wherein the paper and the fiber glass are intimately contacted
at temperatures exceeding 140 degrees F. and the composition
adhering the fiber glass mat to the Kraft paper facing consists
essentially of by weight:
stitch spaced along the course direction of said fabric being
knit through said non-woven fabric and holding said non-
woven fabric and said weft yarn in position and a layer of
rubber base adhesive coated to the face side of said fabric.
Microcrystalline Wax
Synthetic Polyethylene Wax
Hydrocarbon Resin
Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate
Copolymer
Filler and
Antioxidant.
8-12%
8-12%
13-17%
6-12%
Balance
4,435,470
REPAIR MATERIAL FOR TUBELESS TIRES
Alec W. Niconchuk, Peabody, .Mass., assignor to North Shore
Laboratories Corporation, Peabody, Mass.
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,462
Int. CV B32B 31/00
U.S. O. 428-294 8 Claims
1. Cord repair material for repairing tubeless tires from the
outside comprising:
(a) a multiplicity of individually twisted, parallel fibrous
cords,
(b) an elastomeric adhesive adhering to, fully coating, and at
least partially impregnating each said cord in quantity
over 175% by weight of fiber,
(c) said adhesive comprising a highly plasticized, vulcanized,
essentially weak elastomer, and
(d) said cords lying substantially contiguous with the elasto-
mer which coats adjacent cords vulcanized together, at
least in places, whereby adjacent cords are joined by
permanently set elastomer but can be peeled apart by
rupturing the weak elastomeric connection therebetween.
4,435,471
TRANSFER-ONTO-PLAIN PAPER TYPE OF
PRESSURE-SENSITIVE COPYING PAPER
Toshihiko Matsushita, Funabashi; Shigetoshi Hiraishi, Tokyo,
and Sadao Morishita, Ibaraki, all of Japan, assignors to Mit-
subishi Paper Mills, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 387,145
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 17, 1981, 56-93219
Int. O.J B41M 5/16
U.S. O. 428—320.8 5 Oaims
1. A transfer-onto-plain paper type of pressure-sensitive
copying paper prepared by coating the back of a substrate with
a single layer containing a chelate color forming reaction
system comprising a chelate forming metal compound and
ligand and further containing a wax, both of said metal com-
pound and ligand being microencapsulated.
332
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,472
ADHERENT, ACID CURED RESIN PROTECTIVE
COATINGS FOR CONCRETE AND STEEL
George R. Leah, New Kensington, Pa., assignor to Pennwalt
Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Aug. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 412,329
Int. a.i B32B 9/06: B05D J/36
U.S. a. 428—333 11 Qaims
6. A corrosion resistant coated structure comprising a sub-
strate having an acid soluble surface, a primer layer coated on
the surface of the substrate, which layer comprises an acid
stable, thermoplastic elastomer selected from the group con-
sisting of styrene-polybutadiene block copolymers, styrene-
polyisoprene block polymers, chlorosulfonated polyethylene,
styrene-butadiene copolymers, and neoprene, and a corrosion
resistant layer coated on the primer layer, which layer com-
prises an acid cured, corrosion resistant furan or phenolic
polymer.
9. The article of claim 6 wherein the primer layer has a
thickness of at least about 0.2 mil and the corrosion resistant
layer has a thickness of at least about ^ inch.
range of about I to about 25 weight percent of the sizing
composition.
4,435,473
AQUEOUS PEROXIDE EMULSION FOR USE WITH
GLASS FIBERS
Albert E. Tamosauskas, Pittsburgh, and Chester S. Temple,
McKees Rocks, both of Pa., assignors to PPG Industries, Inc.,
Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 136,645, Apr. 2, 1980, Pat. No.
4,391,876. This application Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,501
Int. a.3 B32B 9/00: C08K 3/40
U.S. a. 428—378 20 Claims
1. An aqueous sizing composition for treating glass fibers,
wherein the sizing composition, comprises:
(1) an aqueous emulsion of an organic peroxide that is a
liquid at about 20° C. and that is insoluble or has limited
solubility in water present in an effective amount to give
an amount of active peroxide in the sizing composition in
the range of greater than 0.6 to about 10 weight percent
and, wherein the emulsion has improved stability and
dilutability and has an average particle size of around l.S
microns or less, comprising:
(a) at least I to about 60 percent by weight based on the
weight of the emulsion of said liquid organic peroxide
selected from the group consisting of hydroperoxides,
a-oxy and a-peroxy hydroperoxides, dialkyl peroxides,
aldehyde and ketone peroxides, diacyl peroxides, perox-
yesters, peroxy acids, peroxydicarbonates, perox-
ymonocarbonates and perketals,
(b) about 1 to about 15 weight percent of the emulsion of
a nonionic emulsifier blend having three emulsifiers
selected from the group consisting of polyalkylene
glycol ethers, dialkylarylpolyether alcohols, and po-
lyoxypropylene-polyoxyethylene condensates, phenoxy
polyethoxyethanols, polyethylene derivatives of fatty
acids, partial esters of sorbitol anhydrides; ethoxylated
alcohols, fatty acids, fatty esters and oils, alkylphenols;
glycerol esters, sucrose esters and derivatives, mono-
glycerides and derivatives, and*sorbitan derivatives
polyethoxy phenols, alkyl poly^her alcohols, ethylene
oxide alkylated phenol condensation products, and
mixtures thereof, wherein one emulsifier has an HLB in
the range of about 6 to about 12 and one emulsifier has
an HLB in the range of about 9 to 15 and one emulsifier
has an HLB in the range of about 12 to about 20 each in
proportions to give an overall HLB level for the emulsi-
fler system in the range of about 9 to about 20, and
(c) the remaining weight percent of the emulsion is water,
(2) about 0.2 to about 10 weight percent of ai/inyl-contain-
ing organic silane,
(3) about 0.001 to about I weight percent of a lubricant,
(4) an amount of water to give a total solids content in the
4,435,474
AQUEOUS SIZING COMPOSITION AND SIZED GLASS
HBERS AND METHOD
Balbhadra Das, and L. Dow Moore, both of Allison Park, Pa.,
assignors to PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 273,791, Jun. 15, 1981, Pat. No. 4,338,233.
This application Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,197
Int. a.J D02G 3/00
U.S. a. 428—391 21 Oaims
1. One or more glass fiber strands where the glass fibers have
the dried residue of an aqueous sizing composition for use in
reinforcing polymeric materials, wherein the aqueous sizing
composition comprises:
(a) a major amount of the solids of the sizing composition
being one or more cross-linkable film forming polymers
compatible with the polymeric matrix to be reinforced
with glass fibers,
(b) one or more organo-silane coupling agents in an amount
up to about 20 weight percent of the solids of the sizing
composition,
(c) an interaction product of an epoxidized polar thermo-
plastic copolymer and an unhydrolyzed or partially hy-
drolyzed amino-containing organo-silane coupling agent
in an amount of about 10 weight percent up to about 50
weight percent of the solids of the sizing composition,
wherein the interaction product is formed by contacting
the epoxidized copolymer which has about 2 to about 12
parts of epoxidized monomer per 100 parts of copolymer
and which has a glass transition temperature from about
— 10° C. to about 70° C. with the amino-containing or-
gano-silane coupling agent wherein the amount of the
amino silane coupling agent is in the range of about 0. 1 to
about 1.2 weight percent of an aqueous mixture having at
least 20 weight percent of the epoxidized copolymer, and
(d) an amount of water sufficient to make the percent solids
of the sizing composition in the range of about 2 to about
30 weight percent.
4 435 475
DIELECTRIC nLM
Tohru Sasaki; Syuuzi Terasaki; Hideo Munakata, and Mitsuru
Ohta, all of Iwaki, Japan, assignors to Kureha Kagaku Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,900
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 24, 1980, 55-54998
Int. a.3 B32B 27/30 27/36: NOIG 4/08
U.S. CI. 428—409 7 Claims
1. A dielectric film having minutely rough surfaces and
prepared by (a) molding a resin composition comprising (i)
99.5 to 70 parts by weight of a polyvinylidene fiuoride and (ii)
0.5 to 30 parts by weight of a resin selected from the group
consisting of a polycarbonate, a thermoplastic polyester, and
mixtures thereof into a continuous sheet and (b) stretching the
continuous sheet of (a) in at least one direction to give a dielec-
tric film with minutely rough surfaces.
4,435,476
METHOD OF MAKING AN ABRASION RESISTANT x
COATING ON A SOLID SUBSTRATE AND ARTICLES
PRODUCED THEREBY
Richard A. Phillips, Acton, and Theodore A. Haddad, Leomin-
ster, both of Mass., assignors to Foster Grant Corporation,
Leominster, Mass.
Filed Aug. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 409,272
Int. a.J B32B 27/12. 27/30. 15/08: B05D 3/06
U.S. CI. 428—412 23 Claims
1. A method of improving the abrasion resistance of cross-
linked organosiloxane coating, said coating having been pre-
pared by applying to a solid substrate an organosiloxane coat-
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
333
ing liquid comprising organosilanol molecules of the formula
R'/nSi(OH)4 - m or a precursor of said organosilanol or a partial
hydrolysis product thereof, where m is 1 or 2 and R' is each
independently a hydrocarbon radical and by curing the resul-
tant coating to obtain an abrasion resistant, cross-linked or-
ganosiloxane coating, which method comprises a glow dis-
charge treatment of said cross-linked organosiloxane coating
under a pressure range of from about 5 to about 1 50 microns.
17. The solid substrate as defined in claim 16, wherein the
solid substrate is a plastic material.
4,435,479
PACKAGING FOR FRAGILE, HEAVY AND/OR
DEFORMABLE PRODUCTS
Jean Pivoteau, Le Viviers Du Lac, and Jean-Pierre Durot,
Montmelian, both of France, assignors to Vetrotex Saint-
Gobain, France
Filed Dec. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 446,259
Claims priority, application France, Dec. 4, 1981, 81 22721
Int. CI.' B65b 57/00; G09F 1/06
U.S. CI. 428— 542.8 • 10 Claims
tSB
4,435,477
RUBBER COMPOSITIONS AND ARTICLES THEREOF
HAVING IMPROVED METAL ADHESION AND METAL
ADHESION RETENTION
James A. Davis, Uniontown, Ohio, assignor to The Firestone
Tire & Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Jul. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 517,093
Int. Cl.^ B32B 15/06: C08L 93/04: B60C 9/16
U.S. CI. 428—462 27 Claims
19. A metal-reinforced rubber ply to be used as an element in
a manufactured rubber article, said ply having a rubber compo-
sition and a brass-plated element bonded thereto wherein. said
rubber composition is made by curing a composition compris-
ing:
a vulcanizable rubber;
from about 0.5 to about 12.5 parts by weight of an organic
salt of nickel per 100 parts of the rubber component in said
rubber composition; and
at least about 3,0 parts by weight of a thermoplastic resin
derived from crude wood rosin and containing carboxylic
acid groups or carboxylic acid ester groups per 100 parts
of the rubber component in said rubber composition.
4,435,478
VINYLIDENE CHLORIDE CO-POLYMER
COMPOSITIONS
Anthony J. Burgess, and David L. Gardner, both of Runcorn,
England, assignors to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC,
London, England
Division of Ser. No. 860,312, Dec. 12, 1977, Pat. No. 4,341,679.
This application Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,695
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 20, 1976,
53021/76
Int. CV B32B 15/08
U.S. CI. 428—463 12 Claims
4. A method of applying a protective coating to a metal
substrate wherein there is employed an aqueous latex which
comprises applying to a metal substrate an aqueous latex of a
copolymer capable of forming stable films which have excel-
lent protective properties on metallic substrates, said films
having good chemical resistance and low permeability to
water vapour, said copolymer consisting essentially of (i) vi-
nylidene chloride, (ii) vinyl chloride, (iii) one or more alkyl
acrylates having from I to 12 carbon atoms in the alkyl group
and/or one or more alky! methacrylates having from 2 to 12
carbon atoms in the alkyl group and (iv) one or more aliphatic
alpha-beta-unsaturated carboxylic acids, the proportion of
vinylidene chloride being from 65 to 90 parts by weight, the
proportion of the said alkyl acrylates and/or methacrylates
being from 2 to 15 parts by weight and the proportion of the
said carboxylic acids being from 0.2 to 8 parts by weight, per
hundred parts by weight of the total vinylidene chloride and
vinyl chloride. ^
^
1. An article of manufacture formed from a single blank of
sheet material for support of a product such as a length of a
yarn reeled in a manner to provide an open cavity, said blank
including a central zone providing a substantially continuous
surface of rectangular outline, a /lap extending from each side
of said central zone, each flap being foldable in a first direction
about a fold line comprising a line of demarcation between said
central zone and a respective flap to form a fiange having a
make up of three coextensive, superposed sheet material layers,
a tab extending from each fiap, each tab being foldable in a
second, opposite direction about individual second fold lines
each comprising a line of demarcation between a fiap and a tab,
and a slot formed at least within a portion of each tab extending
coaxially toward a slot in an opposite tab permitting locking
interengagement of said tab to form a spindle extending out-
wardly of said central zone for receipt in said cavity.
4,435,480
PRESSED AND SINTERED COMPOSITE BODY
COMPRISING A THIN TAPE CAST LAYER AND A
THICK BASE LAYER
Howard Mizuhara, Hillsborough, Calif., assignor to GTE Prod-
ucts Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,654
Int. CI,' B22F 7/02: B32B 15/16. 9/00. 9/04
U.S. CI. 428—548 6 Claims
1. A composite body comprising
a first layer of an alumina ceramic made by tape casting, and
a second layer of
an alumina ceramic having a composition substanj^ially iden-
tical to said first layer, second layer being formed from a
compressed powdered alumina,
the thickness of said first layer being uniform and substan-
tially less than the thickness of said second layer,
said first and second layers being permanently bonded to-
gether by simultaneously compressing said first layer
against and compacting the powder comprising said sec-
334
V
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
ond layer to form a compressed composite body and
sintering.
3. A composite body comprising
a first layer composed of a first substance made by tape
casting, and
a second layer composed of a second substance, said second
substance being a compressed powder,
the thickness of said first layer being uniform and substan-
tially less than the thickness of said second layer,
said first and second layers being permanently bonded to-
gether by simultaneously compressing said first layer
against and compacting the powder comprising said sec-
ond layer to form a compressed composite body and
sintering,
wherein said first and second layers are different composi-
tions.
4,435,481
PYROPHORIC FOIL AND ARTICLE, AND
PYROPHORIC TECHNIQUE
Alfonso L. Baldi, Wynnewood, Pa., assignor to Alloy Surfaces
Company, Inc., Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 25,456, Mar. 30, 1979, Pat. No.
4,349,612, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 963,313,
Nov. 24, 1978, abandoned. This application Jul. 28, 1980, Ser.
No. 172,671
Int. a.3 B32B 15/02. 15/18
U.S. a. 428—550 7 aaims
1. A pyrophoric foil that develops a temperature of at least
about 500° F. upon exposure to air, and made by pyrophori-
cally activating a foil of low carbon steel not over about 1.5
mils thick, the activating leaving an unactivated stratum about
0.3 mil thick.
4,435,483
LOOSE SINTERING OF SPHERICAL
FERRITIC-AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL POWDER
AND POROUS BODY
Christer Ahslund, Torshalla; Karl H. T. Andersson, Eslcilstuna,
and Sven S. Bergh, Taby, all of Sweden, assignors to Nyby
Uddeholm Powder Aktiebolag, Torshalla, Sweden
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,869
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 6, 1981, 8100842
Int. a.J B22F 3/10: C22C 38/44
U.S. a. 428—566 10 Oaims
1. A porous sintered body, with good resistance to corrosion
and with a pore volume which can be predetermined within
given narrow limits, produced by loose sintering of a spherical
powder of stainless steel at a sintering temperature between
1200' C. and 1600° C, wherein said stainless steel has a ferritic-
austenitic structure at room temperature and a ferritic struc-
ture at the sintering temperature.
2. The sintered body as claimed in claim 1, wherein said
sintered body is a filter material.
4,435,482
SLIDING MEMBER AND PROCESS FOR PRODUONG
THE SAME
Kenichiro Futamura, Toyota; Fiji Asada, Okazaki, and Tat-
suhiko Fukuoka, Aichi, ail of Japan, assignors to Taiho Kogyo
Co., Ltd., Aichi, Japan
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,105
Int. Cl.^ B22F 7/04: B32B 15/16
U.S. a. 428-553 15 Qaims
4,435,484
DEVICE FOR PROPAGATING MAGNETIC DOMAINS
Dirk J. Breed; Bernardus A. H. Van Bakel; Antonius B. Voer-
mans, and John M. Robertson, all of Eindhoven, Netherlands,
assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,974
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jul. 22, 1980,
8004201
Int. C\? GllC 11/02: C04B 35/50
U.S. CI. 428—693 7 Claims
(XlOO)
1. A composite sliding member comprising:
a base comprised of an iron-based alloy; and
a bearing layer, consolidated with said base and formed by
applying on said base a powder coating having a thickness
of not more than 0.5 mm and baking said powder coating
to consolidate it with said base, said powder comprising
an iron family element and from 3% to 30% by weight of
boron and from 0.5% to 15% by weight of lead.
10. A composite sliding member comprising:
a base comprising an iron-based alloy; and
a bearing layer, consolidated with said base and formed by
applying on said base a powder coating having a thickness
of not more than 0.5 mm and baking said powder coating
to consolidate it with said base, said powder comprising
an iron family element, from 15% to 30% by weight of
boron and from 0.5 to 8% by weight of phosphorus.
1. A device for propagating magnetic domains comprising:
a monocrystalline, nonmagnetic substrate having a deposition
face; and
a monocrystalline layer of an iron garnet, capable of support-
ing localized, enclosed magnetic domains, grown in com-
pression on the deposition face of the substrate, said iron
garnet layer having a positive magnetostriction constant and
having a mechanical stress-induced uniaxial magnetic anisot-
ropy component;
characterized in that:
the iron garnet has iron lattice sites and dodecahedral lattice
sites, the iron garnet comprises manganese at a portion of the
iron lattice sites and the iron garnet consists essentially of
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
ions which contribute little to damping at the dodecahedral
lattice sites;
the nonmagnetic substrate is a rare earth-gallium garnet; and
the iron garnet layer has been grown on a (100) deposition face
of the substrate.
4,435,485
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM
Kaoru NakiOi>na< Izumi; Masashi Somezawa, Sendai; Minoru
Takamizawa, Annaka; Yoshio Inoue, Annaka, and Hiroshi
Yoshioka, Annaka, all of Japan, assignors to Sony Corpora*
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,306
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 23, 1980, 55-116166
Int. CI.' HOIF 10/02
U.S. CI. 428—694 7 Claims
1. A magnetic recording medium having a magnetic layer
comprising magnetic or magnetizable powders or particles and
a binder comprising a composition containing (A) a compound
having components represented by recurring units having the
following formulas:
Unit (I):
Unit (II):
■(-CH2-CH")-;
CI
•t-CH2— CH1-;
OCOR
(wherein R is methyl or ethyl group);
Unit (III):
•<-CH2— CH-h;
X
(wherein X is a group consisting an acrylic or methacrylic
double bond); and,
Unit (IV):
-eCH2-CH-)-,
OH
in which the number of recurring units represented as Unit (I)
ranges from approximately 200 to 800; the number of recurring
units represented by Unit (II) ranges from approximately 10 to
200; the number of recurring units represented by Unit (III)
ranges from approximately 3 to 100; and the number of recur-
ring units represented by Unit (IV) is optionally in the range up
approximately 200; and (B) a compound having at least two
acrylic and/or methacrylic double bonds in the molecule
thereof and having a molecular weight ranging from approxi-
mately 1,000 to 6,000 in which the molecular weight in the
molecule thereof per one double bond is in the range from
approximately 80 to 3,000; and said composition used as the
binder is cured by irradiation and wherein the composition
comprises the compound (A) in the amount ranging from
approximately 20 to 80% and the compound (B) in the amount
ranging from approximately 80 to 20%.
4,435,486
QUICK DISCONNECT BATTERY INSTALLATION AND
CHARGING SYSTEM
Nicholas T. Pomaro, 514 W. Burr Oak Dr., Arlington HeighU, III.
60004; Russell Pomaro, 5114 Central Ave., Western Springs,
III. 60558, and Louis H. Stauffer, 2150Cargill Dr., Northbrook,
III. 60062
Filed Jun. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 384,797
Int. a.' HOIM 2/00
U.S. a. 429—1 15 Gaims
1. In a vehicle having positive and negative electrical leads,
means for facilitating the installation therein, removal there-
from, and charging of a storage battery having threaded posi-
335
portion
tive and negative electrical terminals on a lateral
thereof, said means comprising:
a first housing rigidly mounted to said vehicle and having an
open upper portion for receiving said storage battery and
including a bottom panel and a plurality of lateral, walls
for securely engaging said storage battery in tight-fitting
relation;
first and second threaded conductive pins securely engaging
and electrically coupled to respective electrical terminals
of said storage battery and extending outward from said
lateral portion thereof; and
first and second engaging electrical clamp means coupled to
respective positive and negative leads of said vehicle and
secured to an upper edge portion of a lateral wall of said
first housing for securely engaging respective first and
second conductive pins when said storage battery is posi-
tioned in said first housing in electrically coupling said
vehicle to said storage battery.
4,435,487
PRIMARY BATTERY SYSTEM
Lawrence S. Supelak, Rocky River; Steven J. Specht, Mentor,
and Richard C. Hills, Chardon, all of Ohio, assignors to Gould
Inc., Rolling Meadows, III.
Filed Dec. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 449,485
Int. CI.' HOIM 6/34
U.S. CI. 429—70 16 Claims
10. A primary battery system comprising:
a primary battery cartridge producing as an incident of
electrochemical operation thereof a gaseous by-product
and a solute by-product in a circulated electrolyte liquid;
means for replacing a portion of the fiuid with fresh electro-
lyte solvent;
pressurizing means for placing the fluid including the elec-
trolyte, the replacement solvent and said by-products
therein under a pressure preselected to cause the volume
336
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
ratio of the gaseous component to liquid component of the
mixture to be reduced; and
recirculating the fluid to the battery cartridge for further
operation thereof
4,435,488
GELLING AGENT FOR ALKALINE CELLS
William S. Bahary, Pearl River, and Rowland A. Griffin, Ossi-
ning, both of N.Y., assignors to Duracell Inc., Bethel, Conn.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,784
Int. a.^ HOIM 4/62
U.S. a. 429—212 22 Claims
9. An anode blend for an electrochemical cell comprising an
anode active powder and cross-linked carboxymethyl cellu-
lose.
4,435,491
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESS FOR THE
PRODUCTION OF LITHOGRAPHIC PRINTING PLATES
AND LIGHT-SENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR USE
THEREIN
Takashi Kitamura, Chiba, and Hiroshi Kokadd, Tokyo, both of
Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa,
Japan
Filed Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 324,940
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 27, 1980, 55-165938
Int. ci.^ G03G nm
U.S. CI. 430—49 13 Claims
f^\
4,435,489
CATIONIC HYDRAZONE DERIVATIVES, PROCESSES
FOR THEIR PREPARATION AND THEIR USE
Beat Miiller, and Martin Roth, both of Marly, Switzerland,
assignors to Ciba-Geigy AG, Basel, Switzerland
Division of Ser. No. 264.929, May 18, 1981, Pat. No. 4,383,948.
This application Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,221
Claims priority, application Switzerland, May 21, 1980,
3962/80
Int. CI.' G03C 1/84: C08K 5/16: G02B 5/20: G02C 7/10
U.S. CI. 430—17 9 Claims
3. A photocrosslinked polymer coating which is coloured by
a hydrazone derivative having the formula
l'
Ai — N— N=CH— (CH=CH);„— fl— N— R2
Bi R3
(I)
xe
)
(b)
jcl
jftttVfr'flWW^
a >
Id)
(i!Turftfe<«'i5
(ii '
, IK M M
in which Ai is a substituted or unsubstituted aromatic radical,
Bi is hydrogen, substituted or unsubstituted alkyl having 1 to 8
carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl having 5
to 6 carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl having
I to 4 carbon atoms in the alkyl moiety or substituted or unsub-
stituted aryl, Ri, R2 and R3 independently of one another are
substituted or unsubstituted alkyl having in each case 1 to 8
carbon atoms, substituted or unsubstituted cycloalkyl having 5
or 6 carbon atoms«substituted or unsubstituted aralkyl having
I to 4 carbon atoms in the alkyl moiety or polyoxyalkylene, Zi
is substituted or unsubstituted arylene, X© is an anion and m is
0, 1, 2 or 3.
4,435,490
ELECTRICALLY ACTIVATABLE RECORDING
ELEMENT AND PROCESS
Mark LeIenUl, and David J. Steklenski, both of Rochester,
N.Y., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 454,572
Int. a.5 G03G li/01
U.S. CI. 430—45 27 Qaims
1. In an electrically activatable recording element compris-
ing an electrically conductive support having thereon an elec-
trically activatable recording layer capable of producing a
positive image, the improvement wherein said recording layer
comprises a transition metal complex selected from the group
consisting of Group VIIIB and Group IB metal complexes and
a film forming ionic polymer that is capable of undergoing an
imagewise reorientation upon exposure to electric current and
as a result of said exposure, development of said metal complex
in the exposed areas of said recording layer is restricted.
1. A process for producing a lithographic printing plate
using a light-sensitive material comprising an electrically con-
ductive support having a hydrophilic surface, and a positive
working light-sensitive layer and a photoconductive insulative
layer containing an alkali-soluble resin on the support, said
process comprising the steps of:
(A) forming an electrophotographic latent image on the
photoconductive layer of the light-sensitive material;
(B) developing the latent image with a liquid developer
containing developer particles which are opaque to light
having a wavelength to which the positive working light-
sensitive layer is sensitive;
(C) exposing to light the positive working light-sensitive
layer through the developed image obtained in step (B);
and
(D) selectively removing with an alkali solution the area of
the positive working light-sensitive layer not bearing the
developed image together with areas corresponding to
said areas of the positive working light-sensitive layer not
bearing the developed image of the photoconductive
layer; wherein:
the positive working light-sensitive layer and the photocon-
ductive insulative layer are provided on the support as a
unit layer, or are individually provided in that order; and
the photoconductive insulative layer is substantially char-
gable either positively or negatively, and contains said
alkali-soluble resin in such an amount as to not inhibit the
selective removal of the positive working light-sensitive
layer in step (D).
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
337
4435 492
COMPLEX TYPE ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC PLATE
AND ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC METHOD USING THE
SAME
Shigeo Suzuki, Hitachi; AUushi Kakuta, HiUchiota; YasukI
Mori, and Hirosada Morishlta, both of Hitachi, all of Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 87,820, Oct. 24, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 383,957
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 27, 1978, 53-131523:
Nov. 8, 1978, 53-136695
Int. C\? G03G 5/06, 5/14
U.S. a. 430—58 20 Claims
1. A complex type electrophotographic plate comprising an
electroconductive support; a first layer, adhered to the sup-
port, of a charge generating material, said first layer having a
thickness of 0.1 to 3 ^m; and a second layer, superposed on the
first layer, of a homogeneous mixture of a charge transport
material and an insulating resinous binder therefor, said second
layer having a thickness of 5 to 100 ^m being substantially
transparent to light of a wavelength of 4200 to 8000 A, and said
charge transport material being at least one member selected
from the group consisting of nonionic compounds represented
by the general formula:
X-(CH=CH)„-CH=Y
wherein X is a heterocyclic group of the formula:
— CH»CH
N(CH3)2
4,435 493
POROUS REUSABLE ZNO ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC
ELEMENT
Jan A. de Putter, and Paul J. H. Tummers, both of Velden,
Netherlands, assignors to Oce-Nederland B.V., Venio, Neth-
erlands
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,407
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jan. 15, I98I.
8100163
Int. CV G03G 5/0S7 ,
U.S. CI. 430-87 6 claims
I h^
N
Y is a heterocyclic group of the formula:
these heterocyclic groups may be substituted by one or more
lower alkyl groups, halogen atoms, or phenyl groups; Z is an
oxygen, sulfur or selenium atom; R is an alkyl group having 1
to 7 carbon atoms; n is an integer of 1 or 2; and one hydrogen
atom in the group of the formula — (CH=CH)„— may be
substituted by an alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a
halogen atom, a phenyl group, a styryl group, a group of the
formula — N(CH3)2. — N(C2H5)2 or — N(C3H7)2. an alkoxy
group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a group of the formula:
1. A reusable electrophotographic element comprising a
substrate suited for use in electrophotography and a photocon-
ductive layer containing sensitized zinc oxide particles in ad-
mixture with binding agents that are mutually incompatible,
including a first binding agent that has a higher affinity to zinc
oxide than a second of said binding agents and is largely depos-
ited on said zinc oxide particles, said first binding agent being
a macromolecular compound having an average molecular
weight of at least 12,4^ and being present in said layer in an
amount of 1.5 to 9% by weight calculated on the zinc oxide
particles, and the amount of said second binding agent in said
layer being substantially larger than that of said first binding
agent, said layer being substantially porous and having a nega-
tive charge density of at most 1 m Coulomb per m^and consist-
ing essentially of agglomerates formed in situ in a matrix con-
sisting essentially of said second binding agent, said agglomer-
ates being of between 2.5 and 6 /xm in diameter and being stuck
together by portions of said second binding agent and each
consisting essentially of a collection of said zinc oxide particles
enveloped in a body of said first binding agent.
4,435,494
PROCESS FOR DEPOSITING MAGNETIC TONER
MATERIAL ON ELECTROSTATIC LATENT IMAGES
Ryuji Goto, Kumagaya; Keitaro Yamashita, Kodama, and Koji
Noguchi, Saitama, all of Japan, assignors to HiUchi Metals,
Ltd., Japan
Filed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,255
Int. CI.' G03G 13/09
U.S. a. 430-122 6 Claims
1. A process for depositing single component magnetic toner
material on electrostatic latent images formed on an image
bearing member and characterized by a dark voltage, compris-
ing the steps of:
Providing a magnet roll adjacent the image bearing member,
the magnet roll including a cylindrical rotatable shell of
non-magnetic material and a rotatable permanent magnet
member positioned coaxially' within the shell, the rotat-
338
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
able permanent magnet member having on its outer pe-
riphery a plurality of magnetic poles of alternating polar-
ity;
supplying magnetic toner material onto the surface of the
shell of the magnet roll;
rotationally advancing the image bearing member in relation
to the magnet roll;
rotating both the shell and the permanent magnet in the same
direction to form an A.C. magnetic field for advancing the
magnetic toner material to a contacting area with the
image bearing member, the AC. magnetic field having a
frequency of greater than one per millimeter of the ad-
I lAcsouwai
4,435,496
PHOTOPOLYMER CLEAVAGE IMAGING SYSTEM
John E. Walls, Wiesbaden Biebrich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and
Tulay Duyal, Englishtown, N.J., assignors to American Ho*
echst Corporation, Somerville, N.J.
Filed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,685
Int. a.^ G03C i/m
U.S. a. 430—285 9 Qaims
1. A photosensitive composition comprising
(a) a polymer of the formula
Rl— M— (E^— G— M— R2
Wherein:
E is selected from the group consisting of one or more of:
-(Y-M)-(X-M)m-
I
R4
vancing of the image bearing member in relation to the
magnet roll;
subjecting the magnetic toner material in the contacting area
to the A.C. magnetic field; and
subjecting the magnetic toner material in the contacting area
to an AC. electrical field to render the toner substantially
conductive, said A.C. electrical field having a peak volt-
age which is greater than the dark voltage of the latent
images but less than 3,200 volts and having a frequency
which is greater than v/0.3 where v is the advancing
speed in millimeter/second of the image bearing member
in relation to the magnet roll.
4,435,495
RELEASE OF PHOTOGRAPHIC REAGENTS WITH
3-PYRAZOLIDONE DEVELOPING AGENTS
Philip T. S. Lau, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 207,812, Nov. 17, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,713
Int. CI,' G03C 5/54
U.S. CI. 430—218 21 Claims
1. A photographic assemblage for producing a dye image
wherein an imagewise pattern of diffusible dye and an image-
wise pattern of photographic reagent are formed by means of
an oxidized 3-pyrazolidone developing agent, the assemblage
comprising
(a) a support bearing at least one silver halide emulsion layer
having associated therewith a dye image-providing mate-
rial which is capable of providing an imagewise pattern of
diffusible dye as a function of silver halide development;
(b) a photographic reagent releasing compound comprising
an acyclic or cyclic compound in which the photographic
reagent is linked, through a hetero atom, to a carbon atom
which is adjacent to or in conjugation with a carbonyl
group or an imino group;
(c) a dye image receiving layer;
(d) an alkaline processing composition and means for dis-
charging same within the assemblage; and
(e) a 3-pyrazolidone developing agent which in its oxidized
form is capable of oxidizing, under alkaline conditions, the
photographic reagent releasing compound to cleave the
hetero atom from the carbpn atom to which it is linked
and thereby release the photographic reagent;
the assemblage being free of color developing agent.
-(Y-M)-(X-M);„-
I
R4
-(X-M)m-(Y-Vl)-
I
R4
-{X-M)m-(Y-M)-
Rl, R2is
R) H
I I
— CH2— W— CZ— C=C— Rft;
RsisHiorCHs
R(, is H, aryl, alkyl, aralkyi or phenoxy phenyl
W is — O— when Z is =0 or is absent when Z is H2
Z is H2 or =0
R3 is selected from the group consisting of
OH
I
CH3— C— CH3. — CH2OH, — CH20(CH2)^H3.
— CH2— O— C— CH3,
— CH2I. — CH2CI. — CH2Br or Rj.
where q = 0 to 3; and
M is an aromatic radical selected from the group consist-
ing diaryl aliphatic hydrocarbon, diaryl ethers, diaryl
sulfides, diaryl sulfones, diaryl amines, diaryl ketones
and diaryl diketones; and
R4 = R3
G = Xor Y
R7 = R4 when S = X or is absent when S = Y
m = 1 to 3
p=l to 8
Y-— CH2OCH2—
X = — CH2— ; and
(b) a free radical generating photosensitizer in an amount
effective to cause the cleavage of said part (a) polymer
upon exposure to actinic radiation.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
339
4 435 497
CARBOXYL-CONTAINING COMPOSITIONS AND
THEIR POLYMERIZATION
Edward Irving, Burwell, England, assignor to Clba-Geigy Corpo-
ration, Ardsley, N.Y. •
Filed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,601
Qalms priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 19. 1981
8119036; Mar. 24, 1982, 8208667
Int. a.3 G03C 1/68: C08F 2/46. 4/00: C08G 75/04
U.S. CI. 430-288 ^ claims
1. A polymenzable composition comprising
(a) a compound containing in the molecule
(i) at least one group selected from acryloyloxy and metha-
cryloyloxy groups,
(ii) at least one group selected from allyl, methallyl, and
1-propenyl groups each of which is attached, either di-
rectly or through an oxygen atom or an oxycarbonyl
group (— OCO— ), to a carbon atom which forms part of
an aromatic or cycloaliphatic nucleus, and
(iii) at least one carboxylic acid (— COOH) group,
(b) a compound containing, per molecule, at least two mercap-
tan groups directly attached to an aliphatic carbon atom or
atoms, in a proportion as to supply at least 0.8 such mercap-
tan group per group selected from allyl, methallyl and 1-
propenyl groups in (a) but less than 1.0 such mercaptan
group per group selected from acryloyl, methacryloyl, allyl,
methallyl, and 1-propenyl groups in (a).
4 435 498
MANUFACTURE OF WAFER-SCALE INTEGRATED
CIRCUITS
Alan G. Baillie, Stirling, Scotland, assignor to Burroughs Corpo-
ration, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,339
Int. CV G03C 5/00
U.S. CI. 430-318 , ci.,„
1. A method of metalizmg a wafer scale integrated circuit
havmg a plurality of integrated circuit areas on a common
substrate with interconnection between said plurality of circuit
areas, said method using a wafer scale integrated circuit ini-
tially having a layer of metalization and a layer of photoresist,
the method comprising:
irradiating said photoresist layer through a step and repeat
optical mask which will allow the through passage of
radiation to only those areas of metalization for each of
said plurality of integrated circuit areas, each said area of
metalization having conductors, said photoresist being a
negative photoresist
irradiating said photoresist layer through a reticle optical
mask which allows the through passage of radiation to
define only global line areas of metalization for providing
connection between said plurality of integrated circuit
areas, said global lines connecting to said conductors, said
reticle mask opaque in said plurality of integrated circuit
areas; and,
etching said irradiated wafer scale integrated circuit to leave
a pattern of metal providing electrical connection for both
said plurality of integrated circuit areas and the electrical
connection between said integrated circuit areas.
4 435 499
PHOTOTHERMOGRAPHIC SILVER HALIDE
MATERIAL AND PROCESS
John W. Reeves, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 462,506
Int. CI.J G03C 5/16. 1/02
U.S. CI. 430-350 49 Claims
1. In a photothermographic element comprising a support
bearing in reactive association, photosensitive silver halide
grains and a photosensitive silver halide processing agent, the
improvement wherein;
at least 50% of the projected area of the photosensitive silver
halide grains is provided by thin tabular grains having an
average grain thickness of less than 0.3 microns.
4 435 500
METHOD FOR DEVELOPING SILVER HALIDE
PHOTOGRAPHIC LIGHT-SENSITIVE MATERIAL
Eiichi Okutsu; Nobuyuki Iwasaki, and Shuigi Takada, all of
Kanagawa, Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.,
Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Aug. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 413,315
Qalms priority, application Japan, Aug. 31, 1981, 56-136267
Int. CV G03C 5/38
^•f • ^' *30-4« 7 Claim.
1. A method for processing a silver halide photographic
light-sensitive material, comprising the steps of:
(a) providing a silver halide photographic light-sensitive
material comprising a support having thereon a surface
latent image type silver halide emulsion and a silver halide
emulsion containing fogged nuclei inside the grains;
(b) exposing the photographic material to light; and
(c) developing the exposed photographic material in a devel-
oping solution comprising:
(i) a silver halide solvent, wherein said silver halide sol-
vent is an imidazole derivative represented by the for-
mula:
Z4^^N
I
Z|
wherein Z\, Zi, Z3 and Z4 independently represent
hydrogen, an alkyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms,
a hydroxyalkyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms or
an alkenyl group having 5 or less carbon atoms; and
(ii) a compound represented by the following general
formula (I) or (II):
0)
"XX>
(U)
H
wherein R 1 is hydrogen, a nitro group, a cyano group or
a halogen atom; and R2 is hydrogen, a halogen atom or
an alkyl group.
4,435,501
CONTROLLED SITE EPITAXIAL SENSITIZATION
Joe E. Maskasky, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 320,920, Nov. 12, 1981,
abandoned. This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,855
Int. CV G03C 1/02
U.S. CI. 430-434 111 Claims
1. A tabular grain silver halide emulsion comprised of
a dispersing medium and
silver halide grains, wherein at least 50 percent of the total
projected area of said silver halide grains is provided by
tabular silver halide grains having a thickness of less than
340
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
0.3 micron, a diameter of a least 0.6 micron, and an aver-
age aspect ratio of greater than 8:1,
said tabular silver halide grains being bounded by opposed,
substantially parallel {ill} major crystal faces, and
silver salt epitaxially located on and substantially confined to
selected surface sites of said tabular grains.
4,435,502
USE OF KETAL BLOCKED QUINONES TO REDUCE
POST-PROCESS D-MIN INCREASE IN POSITIVE
REDOX DYE-RELEASING IMAGE TRANSFER SYSTEMS
Noel R. Vanier, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. .392,502, Jun. 28, 1982. This application
May 2, 1983, Ser. No. 490,600
Int. Cl.^ G03C 1/40. 5/30
U.S. a. 430—489 5 Qaims
1. In a photographic processing composition comprising an
aqueous alkaline solution and a silver halide developing agent,
the improvement wherein said composition also contains a
ketal blocked quinone which is soluble therein.
4,435,503
SILVER HALIDE COLOR PHOTOGRAPHIC
LIGHT-SENSITIVE MATERIAL
Keiji Mihayashi; Tadashi Ogawa, and Morio Yagihara, all of
Kanagawa, Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.,
Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Jul. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 397,746
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 13, 1981, 56-109056
Int. CV G03C 5/24
U.S. a. 430—548 21 Claims
1. A silver halide color photographic light-sensitive mate-
rial, comprising:
a support base;
a silver halide emulsion layer on the base;
a 4-equivalent magenta color image forming polymer cou-
pler latex being a polymer or copolymer having a repeat-
ing unit derived from a monomer coupler represented by
formula (III)
V
CH2=C
(HI)
(YV-(A),-X
>
N.
J.
N ^O
I
Ar
wherein R represents a hydrogen atom, a lower alkyl
group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or a chlorine
atom; X represents — CONH— , — NH— , — NHCONH—
or — NHCOO— ; Y represents —CONH— or —COO—;
A represents an unsubstituted or substituted alkylene
group containing from 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the alkyl-
ene moiety or an unsubstituted or substituted phenyl
group; Ar represents an unsubstituted or substituted
phenyl group; p represents 0 to 1; and q represents 0 or 1;
and
a compound capable of reacting with and fixing formalde-
hyde gas, and being represented by the following general
formulae (1) or (II):
H
I
Rl— X— R2
(I)
(II)
(OH)„
wherein Ri and R2, which may be the same or different,
each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a substi-
tuted alkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted aryl group,
an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl
group or an amino group, or Ri and R2 may be bonded
each other to form a ring and at least one of Ri and R2 is
an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, a carbamoyl
group or an amino group; and X represents — CH — or
— N— ; R3 represents an alkyl group, a substituted alkyl
group, an aryl group or a substituted aryl group or an
atomic group necessary to form a monocyclic ring fused
to the benzene ring; and n represents an integer of not less
than 2, and has not more than 300 of an equivalent molecu-
lar weight per unit of an active hydrogen atom as defined
below:
Equivalent Molecular Weight =
Molecular Weight
Number of Active
Hydrogen Atoms
in Molecule
4,435,504
IMMUNOCHROMATOGRAPHIC ASSAY WITH
SUPPORT HAVING BOUND "MIP " AND SECOND
ENZYME
Robert F. Zuk, Menio Park, and David J. Litman, Mountain
View, both of Calif., assignors to Syva Company, Palo Alto,
Calif.
Filed Jul. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,505
Int. Cl.^ GOIN 33/54. 33/52. 31/08. 33/58
U.S. CI. 435—7 12 Claims
1. A method for determining the presence of an analyte in a
sample suspected of containing said analyte,
said method employing:
(A) an immunochromatograph having a porous support
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
341
permitting solvent travel and a plurality of a specific
binding pair member ("mip") and a second enzyme, which
mip and second enzyme are non-diffusively and uniformly
bound to said support and extend a distance away from a
hrst end of said support to define an immunosorbing zone;
(B) a labeled mip, where said labeled mip is chosen to bind to
said immunosorbing zone in relation to the portion of said
immunosorbing zone in which said analyte is bound to
define a border related to the amount of analyte present in
said sample, said label being an enzyme which is part of a
signal producing system including a first enzyme, wherein
said first and second enzymes are related by the substrate
of one being the product of the other, and which system
produces a detectable signal of electromagnetic radiation
defining said border;
said method comprising:
contacting said immunochromatograph: (1) at said first end
with sample containing solvent for a time sufficient for at
least a portion of said solvent to traverse said im-
munosorbing zone; and (2) with labeled mip containing
solvent, where said labeled mip binds in said immunosorb-
ing zone in relation to the analyte bound in said im-
munosorbing zone, and where steps ( 1) and (2) are concur-
rent or consecutive; and
determining the border defined by said labeled mip by means
of said signal producing system, by contacting said im-
munosorbing zone with the remaining members of said
signal producing system, where the position of the border
relates to the amount of analyte present in said sample.
receiving vacuum pressure, selectively providing a blood sam-
pie to said upper chamber, selectively providing lysing solu-
tion to said upper chamber, providing filter means in said upper
chamber at the interface between said upper chamber and said
bottom chamber, providing a removable mounting of said
upper chamber on said lower chamber, mixing the blood sam-
ple and the lysing solution in said upper chamber, incubating
said mixture for a predetermined period of time to permit
complete blood lysis, applying vacuum pressure to said lower
chamber while said upper and lower chambers are sealingly
fitted together to thereby cause filtration through said filTer
means, separating said upper and lower chambers after com-
pletion of said filtration step, sealig said upper chamber con-
taining the portions of said blood sample not filtered through
to said lower chamber on said filter member, sealing said upper
chamber, providing culture medium to said upper chamber
and performing normal blood culture analysis on said sealed
upper chamber.
4,435,505
LYSIS FILTRATION CULTURE CHAMBER
Charles H. Zierdt, Rockville, Md., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Department of Health and
Human Services, Washington, D.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 330,020, Dec. 11, 1981, Pat. No
4,410,630. This application Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 426,141
Int. Cl.^ C12Q 1/04
U.S. CI. 435-34 ,5 Claims
4,435,506
ISOLATION OF SUPEROXIDE DISMUTASE
David E. Jackson, Bourbonnais. and Frank J. Mannuzza Peo-
tone, both of III., assignors to Miles Laboratories, Inc.. Elk-
hart, Ind.
Filed Aug. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 408,038
Int. CI.' C12N 9/02. 9/08
^t^'*3^-»«' 7 Claims
1. A method of isolating superoxide dismutase from red
blood cells in the presence of proteinaceous impurities, which
comprises contacting said red blood cells with a water-miscible
organic solvent, at a pH in the range of 5 to 8. and a tempera-
ture of from 1 5^ 50» C. to denature said impurities, removing
said impuritie/^and obtaining therefrom purified superoxide
dismutase. (
njeiNc IS CUT omw
UtCtmCD AFTl' us
- II rusMC IS cur or mo
" DIKiKlO UTm uii
1
100 mL iniNC
sauriok
SbuCCMdC
4,435,507
PROCESS AND DEVICE FOR PREPARATION OF CELL
SAMPLES FOR CYTOLOGICAL TESTS
Bjorn G. Stenkvlst, Dobelnsgatan 13, S.752 37 Uppsala, Sweden
PCT No. PCr/SE81/00199, § 371 Date Feb. 18, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 18, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00200, PCT Pub
Date Jan. 21, 1982
PCT Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 355,588
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jul. 8, 1980, 8005023
Int. CV C12Q ]/36. J/42: AOIN J/02
U.S. CI. 435-262 . g claims
I 3 mmL CULTUH I
I { n maun I
I I I saueczttLi I
•J Wrm-rm 1 1 1 liiA ^. J
1. An apparatus for blood sample treatment involving lysis,
filtration and culture, said apparatus comprising an upper
chamber for receiving a blood sample, a first flexible bag con-
taining lysing solution, a first flexible severable conduit con-
necting said first flexible bag to the upper chamber, a first
removable clamp on said first flexible conduit, a second flexible
bag containing culture medium, a second flexible severable
conduit connecting said second flexible bag to said upper
chamber, a second removable clamp on said second flexible
conduit, said upper chamber having a bottom wall provided
with a depending discharge spout, a filter member mounted in
said upper chamber above said bottom wall, a lower chamber
below said upper chamber and having a top wall provided
with a tube member telescopically engaged on said discharge
spout, and vacuum conduit means connected to said lower
chamber.
14. A method of treating blood samples involving lysis filtra-
tion and culture comprising the steps of providing an upper
chamber for receiving a blood sample, a lower chamber for
1. Process for preparation of cell samples for cytological
tests of exfoliated cells, in which the cell sample is in the form
of a slurry in solution, characterized in that the slurry is intro-
duced into a first chamber provided with a wall with a large
number of holes with a cross section of IO-)00 ^m and in
communication with a second chamber, and that said solution
under the influence of a pressure differential between the first
and the second chambers is made to pass through the wall
342
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6. 1984
provided with holes one or more times, and that the materia]
from the second chamber is used for the preparation of smears
on a sUde.
4,435,508
TISSUE CULTURE VESSEL
Michael G. Gabridge, Trudeau Rd., Saranac Lake, N.Y. 12983
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,653
Int. a.J C12M 3/00
U.S. a. 435—284 . 5 Qaims
3 6 5 7 9 10 8 16 12
4,435,510
PROTECnON OF GRAPHITE ELECTRODES
Dennis Greensmith, Tamworth; Roderic H. Hammerton, Bed-
nail; Colin J. Wall, Birmingham, all of England; Dietger
Dunkelmann, Bocholt, Fed. Rep. of Germany; Helmut Jau-
nich, Raesfeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Josef Schiffarth,
Bocholt-Barlo, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Foseco
Trading A.G., Chur, Switzerland
Filed Aug. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 404,906
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 20, 1982,
8208226
Int. C\? C03C S/00
U.S. a. 501—90 11 Claims
1. Particulate matter for the protection of a graphite elec-
trode of an electric arc furnace to reduce loss of graphite by
oxidation from the side of the electrode, said matter compris-
ing particles each containing both a graphite-wetting fusible
matrix material having a melting point below 1000° C. and a
refractory filler, said particles comprising 30 to 80% by weight
of refractory filler and 20 to 70% by weight of graphite-wet-
ting fusible matrix material, the maximum particle size of the
particles of the particulate matter being 0.5 mm and not more
than 10% by weight of the matter comprising particles having
a particle size of 0. 1 mm or less.
1. A tissue culture vessel for the growth of cellular material
comprising:
a. rigid upper plate of autoclavable, nontoxic material hav-
ing a first aperture therethrough, a circular channel con-
centric with and remote from the first aperture and being
accessible from the top surface of the upper plate, and a
groove concentric with and adjacent to the first aperture
and accessible from the bottom surface of the upper plate;
b. a rigid base plate of autoclavable material affixed to the
upper plate and having a second aperture therethrough
being substantially mutually aligned with the first aper-
ture, the bottom surface of the base plate having an inset
concentric with the second aperture and being accessible
from the bottom surface of the base plate;
c. an interchangeable nontoxic growth substrate situated
between the bottom surface of the upper plate and the top
surface of the bottom plate and extending at least across
the second aperture, providing an optically nondistorting
surface for the use of high magnification microscopy
visualization of the cellular material contained therein;
d. a nontoxic gasket located in the groove and in an abutting
relationship with the interchangeable growth substrate
and the upper plate; and
e. removeable cover situated in the circular channel and
extending over and enclosing the first aperture.
4,435,511
GLASSES SUITABLE FOR SEALING FERRITES
Edward A. Weaver, Toledo, Ohio, assignor to Owens-Illinois,
Inc., Toledo, Ohio
Filed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 416,821
Int. CI.5 C03C 3/08. 3/10
U.S. CI. 501—22 1 Claim
1. A glass suitable for sealing to ferrites such as manganese-
zinc ferrites and consisting essentially of a composition which
would result by mixing from 20 to 80 weight percent of glass
A with 80 to 20 weight percent of glass B and melting the
mixture to form a homogeneous glass:
Glass A
Glass B
Weight
Percent
Weight
Percent
Si02
B203
PbO
ZnO
BaO
1.8-2.2
14-16.5
69-72
8.2-9.2
2.7-3.5
Si02
Li20
AI2O3
CaO
67-70
14-17
4-5.5
9-12
said glass having a coefficient of thermal contraction from 15°
C. below the annealing point to room temperature offrom 106
to 115X10-VC.
4,435,509
ASSAYS, INCLUDING IMMUNOASSAYS WITH HTC
LABEL ACTIVATED BY SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE
Fritz Berthold, Pforzheim, and Helmut Kubisiak, Wildbad, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Laboratorium Prof. Dr.
Rudolf Berthold, Wildbad, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,563
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 22,
1980 8027422
Int. a.3 GOIN 33/52. 33/54. 33/58. 33/68
VS. CI. 436—518 14 Claims
1. Process for carrying out an analytical determination of the
presence of a substance by means of chemiluminescence, com-
prising employing fluorescein isothiocyanate (FITC) as a label-
ling agent, triggering a chemiluminescence reaction by adding
an aqueous solution of sodium hypochlorite, and measuring the
emission of light. ^
4,435,512
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING CORDIERITE CERAMIC
PRODUCTS
Kazuyuki Ito, Nishio; Masami Ouki, Nagoya; Naoto Miwa,
Tsushima; Osami Kamigaito, Nagoya; Haruo Doi, Nagoya,
and Yoshiharu Hirose, Nagoya, all of Japan, assignors to
Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya and Kabushiki Kaisha Toyota
Chuo Kenkyusho, Nagakute, both of, Japan
Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,571
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 28, 1980, 55-166643
Int. CV C04B 35/04. 35/10
U.S. a. 501—32 3 Claims
1. In a process for producing a cordierite ceramic product
comprising the steps of blending the starting cordierite compo-
sition, molding the blended composition, and drying and sin-
tering the molded composition, the improvement comprising
using as the starting cordierite composition a composition
comprising:
(a) a clay formulation having a cordierite composition com-
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
343
prising kaolin, talc, and aluminum oxide and/or an alumi-
num compound which is convertible into aluminum oxide
(b) a glass having a cordierite composition present in an
amout of from about 10% to about 90% by weight, based
on the total weight of said components (a) and (b)
(c) from about 3% to about 8% by weight of an organic
binder based upon the total weight of the starting cordier-
ite composition; and
(d) from about 18% to about 23% by weight of water based
on the total weight of the starting cordierite composition.
4,435.515
CATALYST FOR THE CONVERSION OF
CARBO-METALLIC CONTAINING OILS
ZlL ^""r* '^•"f? ^"""" ^ »'ttingtr, Jr.. Russell;
Stephen M. Kovach. Ashland, and Hubert W. Beck, Russell
all of Ky.. assignors to Ashland Oil, Inc., Ashland. Ky
Filed Aug. 27. 1981. Ser. No. 296.679
Int. CU BOl J 29/0»
U.S. a. 502-65 2 Claims
1. A catalyst composition for cracking hydrocarbons boiling
above 650 F. and comprising carbo-metallic impurities of
naphthenes and asphaltenes comprising at least about 35 wt %
of a calcined rare earth exchanged "V" crystalline faujasite
dispersed in a clay containing matrix material, said catalyst
composition providing a pore volume of at least 0 35 cc/g a
matrix material providing a substantial amount of pore 5w
openings within the range of 500 to 2000 A. said catalyst com-
position comprising a residual sodium content of less than 0 30
wt % and said catalyst composition being rare earth exchanged
during preparation to provide a lanthanum to cerium ratio
greater than 1.3:1.
4,435,513
SINTERED BODIES OF ALUMINUM NITRIDE
Katsutoshi Komeya, Oiso; Akihiko Tsuge, Yokohama, and Hiro-
shi Inoue, Kawaguchi, all of Japan, assignors to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 420,842
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 28, 1981, 56-152141
.,0^. int. CU C04B 35/52. 35/58
U.S. CI. 501-96 7 Claims
1. A Sintered body of aluminum nitride obtained by sintering
a powder mixture consisting essentially of
(b) from about 0.047 to about 5.66 parts by weight (calcu-
lated in terms of calcium oxide, barium oxide, strontium
oxide or mixtures thereoO of a powder of at least one
compound selected from the group consisting of calcium
oxide, barium oxide, strontium oxide and a compound
capable of being converted into one of these oxides by
sintering,
(c) an amount more than 0 and up to about 6.54 parts by
weight (calculated in terms of carbon) of carbon powder
or powder of a compound capable of being converted into
carbon by sintering, sufficient in combination with ingre-
dient (b) to increase the density and thermal conductivity
of the body; and
(a) aluminum nitride powder being the balance,
the total amount of ingredients (a), (b) and (c) being 100 parts
by weight.
4.435.516
ACTIVITY ENHANCEMENT OF HIGH SILICA
ZEOLITFS
Clarence D Chang. Princeton, and Joseph N. Mlale. Uwrence-
York N Y° ""'S"®" •" J^oWl Oil Corporation. New
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,037
Int. CI.' BOIJ 29/28
U.S. CI. 502-71 g Claims
1. A method for enhancing the activity of a high silica-con-
taining crystalline zeolite having a silica-to-alumina ratio
greater than 500 which comprises contacting said material
with an ammoniacal solution of an alkali metal aluminate for a
period of time ranging from i hour to 5 days at a temperature
of from 20° to 50° C. and at a pH of at least 10.
3. A method of enhancing the activity of a high silica zeolite
c<vl I. ^^^ *"*^'"* * silica-to-alumina ratio of at least
500 which comprises contacting said zeolite with an ammonia-
cal solution of an alkali metal aluminate at a temperature of
from 20° to 50° C. for a period of time ranging from i day to
5 days and at a pH of at least 10.
4,435,514
CHROMIA MAGNESIA REFRACTORY
Stephen D. Hartline, Millbury, Mass., assignor to Norton Com-
pany, Worcester, Mass.
Filed Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,550
Int. CV C04B 35/04. 35/12
U.S. CI. 501-117 5 Claims
1. A refractory product consisting essentially of grains of
cofused chromia and magnesia, bonded with an in situ formed
microcrystalline bond selected from the group consisting of
chromia and chromia-magnesia.
4,435,517
COBALT HYDROFORMYLATION CATALYSTS
Uslle H. Simons, and David C. Alexander, both of Austin, Tex
assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,194
Int. CV BOIJ 29/14. 29/24
U.S. CI 502-74 ,0 Qaims
1. A hydroformylation catalyst which is prepared by:
(a) vaporizing metallic cobalt(O);
(b) cocondensing the metallic cobalt(O) with a solvent to
form a metallic cobalt(0).solvent matrix;
(c) melting the metallic cobalt(O) and solvent matrix and
thereby forming a metallic cobalt(0)-solvent slurry;
(d) absorbing the metallic cobalt(0)-solvent slurry on dry.
oxygen free porous catalyst support;
(e) removing the solvent and thereby producing a catalyst
which has from about 0.1 wt % to about 5 wt % of metal-
lic cobalt(O) deposited thereon.
5. A process for the preparation of hydroformylation cata-
lyst containing metallic cobalt(O) which comprises:
(a) vaporizing metallic cobalt(O);
(b) cocondensing the metallic cobalt(O) with a solvent to
form a metallic cobalt(0)-solvent matrix;
(c) melting the metallic cobalt(O) and solvent matrix and
thereby forming a metallic cobalt(0)-solvent slurry;
(d) absorbing the metallic cobalt(0)-solvent slurry on dry,
oxygen-free porous catalyst support.
(e) removing the solvent and thereby producing a catalyst
344
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
which has from about 0. 1 wt % to about 5 wt % of metal-
Uc cobalt(O) deposited thereon.
8. The process of claim 5 wherein the porous catalyst sup-
port is a metallic alumino-silicate zeolite having pore diameters
in the range of about 3 angstroms to about 1 5 angstroms.
4,435,518
POLYMERIZATION CATALYST
B. Timothy Pennington, Sulphur, La.; Paul V. Roling, Spring,
Tex., and John T. T. Hsieh, Warren, N.J., assignors to Cities
Service Co., Tulsa, Okla.
Filed Nov. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 444,287
Int. CV C08F 4/68
U.S. a. 502—107 22 Claims
1. A catalyst composition consisting essentially of the prod-
uct obtained by:
(1) drying an inorganic oxide having surface hydroxyl
groups to form a support that is substantially free of ad-
sorbed water,
(2) reacting the surface hydroxyl groups of the support with
at least a substantially stoichiometric amount of at least
one organometallic compound corresponding to the for-
mula RjtMR'^R"z, wherein M is a metal of Group III of
the periodic table, R is an alkyl group containing 1 to 12
carbon atoms, R' and R" are independently selected from
the group consisting of H, CI. and alkyl and alkoxy groups
containing 1 to 12 carbon atoms, x has a value of 1 to 3,
and y and z both represent values of 0 to 2, the sum of
which is not greater than 3 — x,
(3) reacting the thus-treated support with at least about 0.001
mol, per mol of organometallic compound, of at least one
vanadium compound corresponding to a formula selected
from (RO)„VOX3-/,and (RO)mVX4-m. in which formu-
las R represents a Ci-Cig monovalent hydrocarbon radi-
cal that is free of aliphatic unsaturation, X is CI or Br, n
has a value of 0 to 3, and m has a value of 0 to 4, and
(4) reacting the product of step 3 with at least about 0. 1 mol,
per mol of organometallic compound, of an alcohol con-
taining 1 to 18 carbon atoms.
4,435,520
^ CATALYST COMPOSITION
David E. Aylward, Madison, N.J., assignor to Cities Service Co.,
Tulsa, Okla.
Filed Nov. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 444,296
Int. CV C08F 4/68
U.S. CI. 502—107 17 Claims
1. A catalyst composition consisting essentially of the prod-
uct obtained by:
(1) drying an inorganic oxide having surface hydroxyl groups
to form a support that is substantially free of adsorbed water,
(2) reacting the surface hydroxyl groups of the support with at
least about 0.5 mol, per mol of surface hydroxyl groups, of at
least one organometallic compound corresponding to the
formula R;tMR'^R"i, wherein M is a metal of Group III of
the periodic table. R is an alkyl group containing 1 to 12
carbon atoms, R' and R" are independently selected from
the group consisting of H, CI, and alkyl and alkoxy groups
containing 1 to 12 carbon atoms, x has a value of 1 to 3, and
y and z both represent values of 0 to 2, the sum of which is
not greater than 3-x, and
(3) reacting the thus-treated support with at least about 0.001
molar proportion, per mol of organometallic compound, of a
vanadium component consisting essentially of a mixture of
about 10-90 mol percent of VOCI3 and, correspondingly,
about 90-10 mol percent of VCU-
4,435,519
NOVEL CATALYST COMPOSITION
Richard L. Veazey, East Windsor, N.J., and B. Timothy Pen-
nington, Sulphur, La., assignors to Cities Service Co., Tulsa,
Okla.
Filed Nov. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 444,289
Int. a.i C08F 4/68
U.S. a. 502—107 15 Qaims
1. A catalyst composition consisting essentially of the prod-
uct obtained by:
(1) drying an inorganic oxide having surface hydroxyl
groups to form a support that is substantially free of ad-
sorbed water,
(2) reacting the surface hydroxyl groups of the support with
at least a substantially stoichiometric amount of at least
one organometallic compound corresponding to the for-
mula R^MR'^R ";, wherein M is a metal of Group III of
the periodic table, R is an alkyl group containing 1 to 12
carbon atoms, R' and R" are independently selected from
the group consisting of H, CI, and alkyl and alkoxy groups
containing 1 to 12 carbon atoms, x has a value of 1 to 3,
and y and z both represent values of 0 to 2, the sum of
which is not greater than 3-x. and
(3) reacting the thus-treated support with at least about 0.001
mol. per mol of organometallic compound, of at least one
vanadium compound prepared by reacting one molar
proportion of VOCI3 and/or VOBrj with about 0.5 to 1
molar proportion of a diol corresponding to the formula
HO-R-OH, wherein R is a divalent hydrocarbon radical
having a chain length of 2 to 16 carbon atoms.
4,435,521
HETEROGENEOUS PROCESS FOR PREPARING
VANADIUM PHOSPHORUS OXYGEN CONTAINING
CATALYST COMPOSITION
Tai-Cheng Yang, Mahwah; Krishna K. Rao, Paterson, and I-der
Huang, Upper Saddle River, all of N.J., assignors to Exxon
Research & Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,206
Int. a.3 BOIJ 27/14
U.S. CI. 502—209 9 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a catalyst composition comprising
vanadium, phosphorus and oxygen capable of catalyzing the
oxidation of hydrocarbons which comprises:
(a) admixing to form a heterogeneous suspension at least one
pentavalent vanadium compound with at least one organic
alcohol in a manner and under conditions sufficient to
condition said vanadium compound and reduce at least a
portion of the pentavalent vanadium to a +4 valence
state;
(b) admixing at least one organic alcohol, said conditioned
vanadium compound, and at least one phosphorus con-
taining compound, in a manner and under conditions
sufficient to form a heterogeneous suspension of a vanadi-
um-phosphorus-oxygen containing catalyst precursor
composition having a vanadium valence of from about 3.9
to about 4.7, and a phosphorus to vanadium atomic ratio
of from about 0.5:1 to about 2:1;
(c) separating said catalyst precursor composition from said
admixture; and
(d) activating said catalyst precursor composition in the
absence of air alone by contacting it with an atmosphere
comprising a mixture of air and at least one hydrocarbon.
4,435,522
METHOD OF PRODUCING A CATALYST FOR
LIQUEFACTION OF COAL
Tsuneo Yoshii, 284-banchi, Jonboji-cho, Kashihara-shi, Nara;
Toshitaka Ueda, 5-23, Yagi-cho 3-chome, Kashihara-shi,
Nara, and Tsukasa Kuroda, 3-2, Yuzato 1-chome, Higa-
shisumiyoshi-ku. Osaka, all of Japan
Filed Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,422
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 3, 1981, 56-122211
Int. CV BOIJ 23/26
U.S. CI. 502—319 1 Claim
1. A method of producing a catalyst for liquefaction of coal
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
345
comprising heat-treating a salt or oxide of molybdenum or an
alloy steel containing at least 0.3 weight percent of molybde-
num in the presence of an alkali and water in a carbon monox-
ide atmosphere at a temperature of 220° to 450' C, and after
water rinse and drying, reducing the same in the presence of
tetralin and/or a phenol compound in a hydrogen atmosphere
at a temperature of 400' to 450° C.
oxyethylene sorbitan ester, conducting the polymerization at a
temperature in the range of about 0* C. to about 150* C. with
vigorous agitation in said aqueous medium throughout the
entire polymerization reaction.
4,435,523
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING ARTICLES OF
FOAMED THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL AND ARTICLE
PRODUCED THEREBY
Giuseppe Ponzielli, Milan, Italy, assignor to Coulson Heel Inc.,
Hanover, Pa.
Filed Aug. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 410,952
Oaims priority, application luly, Sep. 25, 1981, 24159 A/81
Int. a.J B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 521—51 11 Gaims
1. A process for producing injection molded articles of
foamed thermoplastic material comprising the steps of:
(A) injecting a molten mass of thermoplastic material con-
taining a foaming agent into at least one mold cavity of an
injection mold;
(B) after the elapse of a relatively brief period of time from
step (A), introducing a refrigerated compressed gas into
the mold cavity internally of the injected mass of material,
while it is still at least internally molten;
(C) cooling said mass of material into an article utilizing said
internally introduced gas;
(D) terminating step (B) and shortly thereafter opening the
mold for removal of said article.
4,435,524
PROCESS FOR PREPARING SPHERICAL AND POROUS
VINYL RESIN PARTICLES
Kornelius Dinbergs, Broadview Heights, Ohio, assignor to The
B. F. Goodrich Company, Akron, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 299,741, Sep. 8, 1981, Pat. No.
4,360,651, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 258,854,
Apr. 29, 1981, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No.
150,841, May 19, 1980, abandoned. This application Nov. 18,
1982, Ser. No. 442,701
Int. aj C08V 9/28
U.S. a. 521—65 24 Gaims
1. A process for producing spherical particles of polymer
having a high porosity which comprises polymerizing in an
aqueous medium, in a reaction vessel having an agitator posi-
tion therein, one or more ethylenically unsaturated monomers
having a terminal CH2=C< grouping in the form of discrete
particles having a diameter in the range of about 30 microns to
about 1000 microns, said aqueous medium containing a mo-
nomer-soluble free radical yielding catalyst, a dispersant com-
prising a substantially unneutralized, water-insoluble, cross-
linked polymer of one or more carboxylic acid monomers with
a polyunsaturated crosslinking monomer havng a plurality of
terminally unsaturated polymerizable groups, at least one non-
polyethylene oxide containing surfactant selected from the
group consisting of the sorbitan ester family, glycerol ester
family, and polyglycerol ester family, and at least one polyeth-
ylene oxide containing surfactant selected from the group
consisting of polyoxyethylene alkylphenols, polyoxyethylene
alcohols, polyoxyethylene esters of fatty acids, polyoxyethyl-
ene alkylamines, and polyoxyethylene alkylamides and poly-
4,435,525
REACTION OF CARBONYLHYDRAZINES AND
ORGANIC PEROXIDES TO FOAM UNSATURATED
POLYESTER RESINS
Ernest R. Kamens, Tonawanda, N.Y., assignor to Pennwalt
Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa. f
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 431,545, Sep. 30, 1982, Pat. No.
4,393,148. This application Mar. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 479,300
Int. Cl.^ C08V 9/08. 9/10
U.S. G. 521—92 14 Gaims
1. A foamable and curable composition consisting essentially
of an admixture of a medium selected from the class consisting
of (i) an unsaturated polyester and at least one polymerizable
unsaturated monomer, (ii) polymethylmethyacrylate and at
least one polymerizable unsaturated monomer, (iii) polyethers
that are terminated by polymerizable unsaturated ester func-
tions and at least one polymerizable monomer, and (iv) -poly-
merizable monomers, said polymers having been dissolved or
dispersed in said polymerizable monomers, a peroxide, at least
one transition metal salt promoter wherein at least one of the
metals is selected from the group consisting of iron and copper,
and a carbonylhydrazine blowing agent.
4,435,526
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
UREA-FORMALDEHYDE/POLYURETHANE
POLYMERS
Alan M. Wooler, Old Trafford, England, assignor to Abelard
Management Services Limited, Manchester, England
Filed Sep. 29. 1982, Ser. No. 427,815
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 6, 1981,
8133940; Sep. 13, 1982, 8226000
Int. G.J C08G 18/14. 18/18. 18/54
U.S. CI. 521—107 6 Claims
1. A process for the manufacture of flame-resistant polymer
materials which comprises reacting together a stoichiometric
excess of an organic polyisocyanate comprising di(isocyanato-
phenyOmethane or a mixture of di(isocyanatophenyl)methane
with poly(isocyanatophenyl) poly methylenes, and an isocya-
nate-reactive polyether containing 4 to 6 hydroxyl groups to
form a prepolymer and subsequently reacting the prepoiymer
with an aqueous solution of a urea-formaldehyde preconden-
sate in the presence of a pofyChaloalkyl) phosphate of a catalyst
selected from the class consisting of di-N-morpholinodialkyI
ethers, bis(dialkylamino)dialkyl ethers and letraalkylalk-
ylenediamines.
4,435,527
POLYESTER POLYMER POLYOLS MADE WITH
POLYESTER POLYCARBONATES AND
POLYURETHANES THEREFROM
Michael Cuscurida, Austin, Tex., assignor to Texaco Inc., White
Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 460,506
Int. CV C08G 18/14
U.S. CI. 521—173 6 Claims
1. A polyester polymer polyol made by the reaction of a
polyester polycarbonate, a polyether polyol and an organic
polyisocyanate wherein the combined portion of polyester
polycarbonate and polyisocyanate is 10 to 40 wt. % of the
polyether polyol portion, and the ratio of equivalents of poly-
ester groups to equivalents of isocyanate groups ranges from
0.5 to 2.0.
1040 O.G.— 12
346
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,528
CONCENTRATED EMULSIONS OF WATER-SOLUBLE
POLYMERS
Williani G. Domina, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,139
Int. a.^ C08L 33/02. 33/26
U.S. a. 523-332 14 Claims
1. A method for preparing a concentrated stable water-in-oil
emulsion containing at least 40 weight percent of a water-solu-
ble polymer which method comprises concentrating a stable
preconcentrate water-in-oil emulsion containing a water-solu-
ble polymer in an aqueous phase which is dispersed in a contin-
uous oil phase, said preconcentrate emulsion containing (1) a
smaller weight percent of water-soluble polymer than the
weight percent thereof in the concentrated emulsion, (2) an
emulsifying amount of a water-in-oil emulsifier and (3) an
amount of an inverting surfactant sufiicient to reduce the bulk
viscosity of the preconcentrate emulsion, thereby forming the
stable concentrated emulsion.
4,435,531
EMULSION COMPOSITION CONTAINING CELLULOSE
DERIVATIVE
Yasuharu Nakayama; Kenji Yamamoto; Toshiki Komatsuzawa;
Hiyime Sukejima, and Kazuo Nomoto, all of Hiratsuka, Ja-
pan, assignors to Kansai Paint Co., Ltd., Hyogo, Japan
Filed Aug. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 404,053
Gaims priqrity, application Japan, Aug. 4. 1981, 56-121360
Int. a.J C08L l/IO
U.S. Ci. 524-37 22 Claims
1. A cellulose derivative-containing emulsion composition
which is the product of emulsion polymerization of (A) at least
one ethylenically unsaturated monomer in the presence of (B)
a water-solubilized product of a cellulose derivative-modified
vinyl copolymer having an acid value of from about 3 to about
150, said vinyl copolymer being obtained by graft-copolymer-
izing (1) an ethylenically unsaturated monomeric component
composed of an ethylenically unsaturated acid (1-a) and an-
other ethylenically unsaturated monomer (1-b) onto (2) a cellu-
lose derivative.
4,435,529
TANNIN-EPOXY REACTION PRODUCTS AND
COMPOSITIONS THEREOF
Alan J. Kaylo, Glenshaw, and Nicholas T. Castellucci, Pitts-
burgh, both of Pa., assignors to PPG Industries, Inc., Pitts-
burgh, Pa.
Filed Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347,845
Int. a.3 C08L 63/02
U.S. a. 523—426 14 Claims
1. A composition of matter comprising an ungelled reaction
product obtained by the heating of:
(A) a 1,2-epoxy material, and
(B) a tannin in an amount sufficient to provide an ungelled
reaction product.
4,435,530
HEAT RESISTANT RESIN COMPOSITION
Robert E. Hefner, Jr., Lake Jackson, Tex., assignor to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 354,829, Mar. 4, 1982,
abandoned. This application Oct. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 436,165
Int. a.3 C08L 67/06. 77/12
U.S. a. 523-512 17 Claims
1. A curable resinous composition comprising
(A) about 5 to 95 weight percent of an unsaturated polyester
resin or an unsaturated polyesteramide resin, wherein said
resins are terminated with a norbornene functional mate-
rial so that substantially all the norbornene functional
moieties are esterified
(B) about 95 to 5 weight percent of an unsaturated mixture
consisting of 20 to 80 weight percent of an ethylenically
unsaturated compound and 80 to 20 weight percent of a
dicyclopentadiene or polycyclopentadiene bis or tris ester
of a unsaturated polycarboxylic acid having one of the
formulae
4,435,532
USE OF ZINC SALTS OF MERCAPTOBENZIMIDAZOLE
AND DITHIOPHOSPHORIC ACID ESTERS FOR THE
PREPARATION OF NITRILE RUBBER/POLYVINYL
CHLORIDE MIXTURES
Joachim Thormer, Leverkusen; Hans H. Bertram, Leichlingen;
Otto Benn, Bergisch Gladbach, and Helmut Hurnik, Leverku-
sen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 392,529
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 4,
1981, 3126402
Int. a.3 C08K 5/04. 5/34
U.S. CI. 524-92 7 Claims
1. A process for stabilizing a mixture of (A) a copolymer of
butadiene and acrylonitrile and (B) polyvinyl chloride or a
copolymer of vinyl chloride and vinylidine chloride, vinyl
acetate, ethylene, propylene, isobutylene or vinylidine fluoride
which comprises adding to said mixture a stabilizing amount of
(I) a zinc salt of a mercaptobenzimidazole of the formula
wherein
R is hydrogen or alkyl having I to 4 carbon atoms, (11) a zinc
salt of di-C|-C9-alkyldithiophosphate or (III) a mixture
thereof.
(I) CH2— COOH
Rl— C— COOH
(2) R2-C-R3
CH— COOH
where
Rl is =CH2 or =C(CH3)— CH3
R2 is hydrogen or — CH2— COOH
R3 is hydrogen when R2 is a — CH2 — COOH group, or
—COOH.
4,435,533
4-HYDROXY-5^SUBSTITUTED
PHOSPHINYDETHYLENEUREAS
Alexandros K. Tsolis, 171 Old National Rd., Arachovitika, and
loannis A. Mikroyannidis, Navmahias Elis 48-52, both of
Patra, Greece
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,473
Int. a.3 C07F 9/65
U.S. a. 524—106 9 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
347
f.
NH-CH-P
I I
o=c
I '
NH— CHOH
/
\
Rl
R2
wherein Ri and R2 are selected from the group consisting of
alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, cyclohexyloxy, phenoxy, alkoxy
containing chlorine, alkoxy containing bromine and hydroxy.
5. A method of fire-proofing a polymeric material selected
from the group consisting, of cellulose, cellulose containing
material, polyamides, polyurethanes, polyesters and polya-
crylonitriles, which comprises incorporating into the poly-
meric material the compounds of claim 1 or 2.
4 435 534
COALESCENT-CONTAIn'iNG COATING COMPOSITION
Glenn C. Jonesj. and Larry J. Culver, both of Kingsport, Tenn.,
assignors to &utman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
FilU Jul. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 394,557
Int. a.3 C08K 5/10
U.S. CI. 524-292\ 12 Claims
1. A coating comoosition comprising a latex of a normally
solid organic additioVyDolymer and a coalescing amount of at
least one ether-ester sonant having the formula
O
O
C-O— (CH2CH20)„— R'
where R represents hydrogen or an alkyl group of 1 to 4
carbon atoms, R' represents a C1-C3 alkyl group, and n is 1 or
2.
4,435,535
ADIPIC ACID AS A SCORCH INHIBITOR FOR
CARBOXYLATED RUBBERS
Donald C. Grimm, Tallmadge, Ohio, assignor to The Goodyear
Tire & Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 379,242
Int. a.J C08K 5/09
U.S. O. 524—321 6 Gaims
1. An improved scofch resistant dried carboxylated nitrile
rubber composition comprising: a dried carboxylated nitrile
rubber and adipic acid which is distributed throughout said
dried carboxylated nitrile rubber as a scorch inhibitor.
6. A process for improving the scorch resistance of a dried
carboxylated nitrile rubber comprising, distributing through-
out said dried carboxylated nitrile rubber adipic acid as a
scorch inhibitor.
4,435,536
ONE-PACK COMPOSITION
Yasushi Kato, and Hisao Furukawa, both of Kobe, Japan, assign-
ors to Kanegafiichi Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka,
Japan
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,274
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 17, 1981, 56-59002
Int. a.3 C08K 5/07. 5/05
U.S. a. 524—378 3 Oaims
1. A one-pack curable composition comprising a mixture
consisting essentially of (A) 100 parts by weight of a silyl group
containing resin having a backbone substantially comprising a
vinyl polymer chain and containing at least one silicon atom
attached to a hydrolyzable group at a terminal or in a side
chain of its molecule; (B) 0.1 to 10 parts by weight of a curing
catalyst; and (C) a solvent;
wherein said curing catalyst is selected from the group
consisting of a carboxylic acid type organic tin compound,
a mercaptide type organic tin compound having a Sn-S
bond, and a sulfide type organic tin compound having a
Sn=S bond;
wherein said solvent comprises hydrolyzable ester and/or
alkyl alcohol; and
wherein said silyl group containing resin has a molecular
weight of between 1,000 and 30,000 and contains an ethyl-
enically unsaturated organic monomer containing active
hydrogen as a copolymerization component.
4,435,537
STORAGE STABLE DISPERSIONS OF AROMATIC
POLYESTERS IN POLYHYDROXYL COMPOUNDS AND
THEIR PREPARATION
Peter Horn, Heidelberg; Anton Hesse; Walter Heckmann, both
of Weinheim; Ulrich Lebert, Hettenleidelheim; Alfred Guth-
mann. Worms, and Matthias Marx, Bad Durkheim, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft,
Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,763
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 27,
1981, 3112123
Int. a.J C08G 18/14
U.S. CI. 524-391 11 Claims
1. A storage stable dispersion comprising
(a) a disperse phase comprising from 5 to 35 percent by
weight relative to the overall dispersion of a crystallizable
polyester of (i) an acid selected from the group consisting
of isophthalic acid, terephthalic acid, a mixture of tereph-
thalic acid and an aliphatic dicarboxylic acid, a mixture of
terephthalic acid and an aromatic dicarboxylic acids, and
a mixture of terephthalic acid, an aliphatic dicarboxylic
acid, and an aromatic dicarboxylic acid, and (ii) an alcohol
having 1 to 6 carbon atoms wherein said polyester has a
melting viscosity at 150' C. of 15 mPas to 3000 mPas; and
(b) a continuous phase consisting of from 65 to 95 percen| by
weight relative to the overall dispersion of a polyhydroxyl
compound having a melting point below 30° C. such that
the disperse phase is soluble at temperatures above 35' C.
and such that more than 50 percent of the dispersed phase
has particle sizes of 10.5 to 100 microns.
4,435,538
COMPOSITION FOR THE PREPARATION OF
CARBONACEOUS BASE USE IN THE MANUFACTURE
OF SILICONIZED ANTIFRICTION MATERIALS
Valery I. Kostikov, ulitsa Marii Ulyanovoi, 9, korpus 2, kv, 12,
Moscow; Jury I. Koshelev, Oktyabrsky prospekt, 365, kv. 8;
Vasily D. Tele^n, Oktyabrsky prospekt, 306, kv. 71, both of
Ljubertsy Moskovskoi oblasti; Alexandr S. Tarabanov, ulitsa
Sayanskaya, 6, kv. 123, Moscow; Elena M. Tatievskaya,
Strastnoi bulvar, 13a, kv. 32, Moscow, and Lyana 1. Kosova,
Zeleny prospekt, 11a, kv. 18, Moscow, all of U.S.S.R.
PCT No. PCT/SU80/00102, § 371 Uate Jan. 26, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 26, 1982, PCT Pub. No. W08 1/03486, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 10, 1981
PCT Filed Jun. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 346,035
Int. a.^ C08K 3/34
U.S. O. 524—492 4 Oaims
1. A composition for the preparation of a carbonaceous base
for use in the manufacture of siliconized antifriction materials
comprising a carbonaceous filler and phenolformaldehyde
resin, characterized in that it also incorporates a sital of the
following composition (percent by weight): AI2O3— 10-12.
CaO— 12-14, MgO— 9-1 1, Na20— 5-6, Si02— the balance, the
components being present in the following proportions, per-
cent by weight:
c7
348
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
carbonaceous filler
phenolformaldehyde resin
iital
65 to 85
12 to 30
3 to 5.
4,435,539
STABILIZED POLYMER COMPOSITIONS
David Witiak, Yardley, Pa., assignor to Rohm and Haas Com-
pany, Philadelphia, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 218,909, Dec. 22, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 403,240
Int. a.^ C08L 33/00
U.S. a. 524—558 17 Claims
1. A polymer composition comprising a copolymer of
(a) an alpha, beta-monoethylenically unsaturated monocar-
boxylic acid, and
(b) a hydroxy alkyl (C2-C6) ester of an alpha, beta-monoe-
thylenically unsaturated monocarboxylic acid,
said copolymer characterized by a monomer ratio (a:b) ranging
from 95:5 to 50:50; a weight average molecular weight of about
100,000-500,000. partial neutralization to an extent of at least
25%, and wherein aqueous solutions containing 5-20 weight %
of the neutralized copolymer exhibit resistance to gelation
while producing a Brookfield viscosity of not greater than
20,000 cps measured at 20° C.±2° C. using spindle No. 3 at 3
rpm.
4,435,540
NOVEL POLYMER COMPOSITION
Kazuo Kishida, Otake; Isao Sasaki, Hiroshima, and Nobuhiro
Mukai, Otake, all of Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Rayon
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser, No. 336,460
. Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 6, 1981, 56/937; Mar.
12, 1981, 56/35549
Int. a.J C08K 3/04. 3/08. 3/26. 3/00
U.S. a. 524—780 6 Claims
1. A method of preparing a polymeric composition in which
an inorganic substance is firmly consolidiated in an organic
polymer, comprising: heterogeneously polymerizing methyl-
methacrylate or a vinyl monomer mixture comprising methyl-
methacrylate as the major component without initiating the
reaction with a radical polymerization initiator at a tempera-
ture such that substantially no thermal polymerization occurs
in a polymerization system containing said inorganic substance
dispersed in an aqueous medium in the presence of at least one
monomer selected from the group consisting of sulfonic acid
monomers and sulfonate monomers of formula [I]
V
H2C=C— X— SO3Y
wherem R\ is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 20 carbon atoms, phenyl,
a derivative of a phenyl group, or a halogen atom; X is CONH,
CONH— C— R4.
R3
4,435,541
ANTISTATIC THERMOPLASTIC MOLDING MASSES
CONTAINING STYRENE-ACRYLONITRILE GRAFTED
POLYETHER
Franz Brandstetter, Neustadt; Juergen Hambrecht, Heidelberg;
Bernhard Scharf, Schriesheim; Gerhard Lindenschmidt, Lei-
men; Josef Schwaab, Maikammer, and Rudolf H. Jung,
Worms, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Dr. Beck &
Co. AG, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,862
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 28,
1981, 3112428
Int. CI.J C08L 25/12. 55/02. 71/02
U.S. a. 525-64 7 Claims
1. An antistatic thermoplastic molding material comprising a
copolymer of styrene and/or a-methylstyrene and acryloni-
trile and, as an antistatic agent, from 0.pi percent by weight to
1.5 percent by weight of a graft polyol prepared by polymeri-
zation of a styrene-acrylonitrile mixture in a polyhydroxy
polyalkylene polyether said polyether having a molecular
weight of 500 to 10,000 and being obtained by the addition
reaction of an alkylene oxide having 2 to 3 carbon atoms with
a di- or trifunctional initiator molecule.
4,435,542
POLYOL RESIN
Shoji Watanabe, and Takuya Miho, both of Ohtake, Japan,
assignors to Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd., Sakai, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 354,003
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 23, 1981, 56-42035
Int. CV C08F 8/28
U.S. CI. 525-118 13 Claims
1. A polyol resin obtained by reacting 95-40% by weight of
an aromatic vinyl monomer-allyl alcohol copolymer with
5-60% by weight of c-caprolactone, or c-hydroxycaproic acid.
4,435,543
PHENOLIC RESIN COMPOSITIONS
Kenji Ema; Junji Hara; Shuhei Ikado; Hideo Kawashima, and
Tomohide Yokoo, all of Kanagawa, Japan, assignors to Mitsui
Toatsu Chemicals, Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 130,277, Mar. 14, 1980, Pat. No.
4,378,450. This application Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,514
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 15, 1979, 54-29349;
Mar. 3, 1980, 55-25270
Int. Cl.^ C08L 37/00. 61/04
U.S. CI. 525-143 . 6 Claims
100 ISO
COO(CH2)m or (CH2)n , phenolic resin compositions for molding comprising 100
wherem R2 and Rj are each hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 15 parts by weight of a polymeric substance having a phenolic
carbon atoms. R4 is an alkylene group of] to 1 5 carbon atoms. OH group selected from the group consisting a phenolic resin
m IS an integer of 1 to 20, and n is 0 or an integer of 1 to 20; and and a phenolic polymer and 1 to 100 parts by weight of a
U IS a hydrogen atom, ammonium radical or an alkali metal rubber containing an epoxy group in its molecule and having
^'""^ an epoxy equivalent of 500 to 30,000 said rubber containing an
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
349
epoxy group being an acrylic polymer and having a glass
transition temperature of 25* C. or lower.
4,435,544
MIXTURES OF POLYCARBONATE ELASTOMERS,
CONTAINING HYDROGENATED DIMERIC FATTY
ACID ESTERS AS CONDENSED UNITS, AND
POLYOLEFINES AND, OPTIONALLY, OTHER
POLYCARBONATES
Manfred Schreckenberg; Werner Nouvertne; Harald Medem;
Rolf Dhein, and Peter R. Muller, all of Krefeld-Uerdingen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany,* assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft,
Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,329
Claims priority, application European Pat. Off., Oct. 21, 1981,
81108608.1
Int. CV C08L 69/00, 23/04. 23/06
U.S. a. 525—146 11 Claims
1. A mixture comprising
(a) a high-molecular weight, segmented, thermoplastically
processable, aromatic polycarbonate containing 5 to 70%
by weight of hydrogenated dimeric fatty acid esters as
condensed units, alone or with,
(b) another high-molecular weight, aromatic, thermoplastic
polycarbonate,
and further comprising
(c) a thermoplastic polyolefine,
the sum of the components (a) + (b) being between 98% by
weight and 90% by weight and the amount by weight of com-
ponent (c) being between 2% and 10%, relative to the total
amount by weight of (a)-|-(b)-t-(c) (which amounts to 100% by
weight), in each case, and the amount by weight of hydroge-
nated dimeric fatty acid ester as condensed units, being from 3
to 30% by weight, relative to the amount by weight of (a)-i-(b).
4,435,545
METHOD OF PREPARING COSMETOLOGICAL
POLYMERS
Claude Favie, and Michel Mercadier, both of Pau, France,
assignors to Societe Nationale Elf Aquitaine (Production),
France
Continuation of Ser. No. 93,511, Nov. 13, 1979, abandoned. This
application Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,532
Claims priority, application France, Nov. 21, 1978, 78 32742;
Nov. 21, 1978, 78 34743
Int. CV C08F 8/34. 8/12, 8/18. 8/00
U.S. CI. 525—344 18 Claims
1. A process of preparing an organic polymer having a chain
carrying at least one active group attached to a chain carbon
atom by chemical bonds comprising reacting a polymer having
at least two epoxy bridges selected from the group consisting
of polyolefin and a polymer or copolymer of an acrylate or
methacrylate with an active group containing cosmetological
compound selected from the group consisting of cinnamic
acid, methoxycinnamic acid and salicylic acid such that
16-90% of the epoxy bridges are opened and one of each pair
of the resulting epoxy carbon atoms has the active group cos-
metological moiety bonded thereto and the other of the result-
ing carbon atoms carries a hydroxyl group, and thereafter
opening the remaining epoxy bridges such that one of each pair
of the newly opened epoxy carbon atoms carries a hydroxyl
group and the other carries a halogen, hydroxy, amine or
mercaptan group.
4,435,546
POLYESTERS COMPOSITIONS WHICH CRYSTALLIZE
RAPIDLY
Peter Bier, New Martinsville, W. Va., and Rudolf Binsack,
Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 960,976, Nov. 15, 1978,
abandoned, and Ser. No. 875,015, Feb. 3, 1978, abandoned, Ser.
No. 960,976, , which is a continuation of Ser. No. 852,894, Nov.
18, 1977, abandoned. This application May 18, 1979, Ser. No.
40,385
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Nov. 2, 1977,
1712080; Italy, Nov. 21, 1977, 51875-77; Japan, Nov. 21, 1977,
53-139036; United Kingdom, Nov. 22, 1977, 4860577; France,
Nov. 23, 1977, 77 35259; Netherlands, Nov. 23, 1977, 7712914;
Switzeriand, Nov. 23, 1977, 14348-77
Int. Cl.^ C08F 283/00: C08G 63/76; C08L 67/00
U.S. a. 525-418 23 Oaims
1. A thermoplastic composition which crystallizes rapidly,
comprising
a. a high molecular weight polyalkylene terephthalate which
has an intrinsic viscosity of at least about 0.4 dl/g (mea-
sured as a 0.5% strength by weight solution in a phenol/-
tetrachloroethane mixture in a weight ratio of 1:1 at 25*
C.) and
b. about 0.5 to 30% by weight based on the weight of a. and
b. of an esterification product of aliphatic carboxylic acids
with 1 to 25 carbon atoms and alcohols selected from
aliphatic, cycloaliphatic and araliphatic alcohols with 1 to
20 carbon atoms, said esterification product being mono-
meric and free of groups substantially reactive with said
high molecular weight polyalkylene terephthalate under
injection molding conditions and having a carbon atom to
ester bond ratio of between 4 and 14 inclusive of the
carbonyl carbon atom.
4,435,547
STABILIZED POLYPYRROLIDONE END CAPPED
WITH ALKANOLAMINE AND PROCESS FOR
PREPARING
Gar L. Woo, Tiburon, and Phillip H. Parker, San Rafael, both of
Calif., assignors to Chevron Research Company, San Fran-
cisco, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 220,483, Dec. 29, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 220,575,
Dec. 29, 1980, Pat. No. 4,383,065. This application Feb. 9. 1983,
Ser. No. 465,226
Int. CI.J C08G 69/48
U.S. a. 525—420 25 Claims
1. A poly-2-pyrrolidone polymer composition, capable of
being formed into filaments or other shaped articles, having a
weight average molecular weight in the range of about from
35,000 to 100.000 and in which at least about 50% of the mole-
cules of said poly-2-pyrrolidone are capped polymer molecules
having the formula
YHN-(CH2)j-C
C— |-NH—
O'
O
(CH2)3-C-|— NH— (CH2)J-CNHR
wherein R is a radical having 2 through 12 carbon atoms and
having the formula — R'R^Z, wherein Z is hydroxy, R' and
R2 are independently selected from the group of lower alkyl-
ene or substituted lower alkylene having I through 3 substitu-
ents independently selected from the group of amino or hy-
droxy and wherein the total of the sum of the substituents in
R' plus R2 is from 0 through 3 and wherein each carbon atom
in said radical has a maximum of one hydroxy or one amino
substituent including the Z hydroxy substituent; Y is hydrogen
or formyl; and m is a whole integer of at least about 200; and
wherein said weight average molecular weight is determined
by solution viscosity using a solution containing 0.50 to 1.0
\
350
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
grams of the dried extracted polymer in 10 ml of 88% aqueous
formic acid, and applying a Gardner viscosity molecular
weight type relationship developed from speciHc viscosities of
0. 1 g of known weight average molecular weight poly-2-pyr-
rolidone polymers in 100 ml of m-cresol at 25° C.
4,435,548
BRANCHED POLYAMIDOAMINES
Donald A, Tomalia; Larry R, Wilson, and Jerry R. Conklin, all
of Midland, Mich., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company,
Midland, Mich.
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,158
Int. a.3 C08G 69/26
U.S. a. 525—451 7 Qaims
1. A branched polyamidoamine having a weight average
molecular weight of at least about 550 and consisting essen-
tially of units corresponding to the formula I
-eCH2— CH— C— N— Ai-
I II I
R O H
I
wherein R at each occurrence is independently — H or 13 CH3;
A is
•M-CHi-im-Niii;
D
m is an integer from 2 to about 10 and n is an integer from 1 to
about 6; D at each occurrence is independently — H or corre-
sponds to formula II
-CH2— CH— C— N— B— R',
I II I
R O H
II
with the proviso that at least about 10 percent of the groups
represented by D correspond to formula II; B is CHa^NR'^or
CH2— CH2
/ \
-CH2CH2-N N— ,
CH2— CH2
X is an integer from 2 to about 10 and y is an integer from 1 to
about 6; R' at each occurrence is independently — H, a Ci to
C4 alkyl, or a C| to C4 hydroxyalkyl.
4,435,549
N-CYANO AMIDE COMPOSITIONS AND ADDUCTS
THEREOF
Shiow-Ching Lin, Columbia, Md., assignor to W. R. Grace A
Co., New York, N.Y.
nied Jan. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 460,187
Int. a.3 C08G 59/44 i
VJS. a. 525—504 7 Oaims
1. N-cyano amide compositions and adducts thereof of the
formula:
O
II
R— (C— NHCN)„
wherein R is an aromatic moiety or a polymeric adduct with
the valence of n and n is 2 or 3.
4,435,550
METHOD FOR POLYMERIZING a-OLEHN
Haruo Ueno, Chiba; Takefumi Yano, Ichihara; Tokiyi Inoue,
Ichihara; Shigeru Ikai, Ichihara; Yoshiyuki Kai, Ichihara, and
Michimasa Shimizu, Ichihara, all of Japan, assignors to UBE
Industries, Ltd., Chiba, Japan
Filed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,475
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 19, 1981, 56-38643
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 27,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C08F 4/02. 10/04
U.S. a. 526-73 29 Oaims
1. A method for polymerizing an a-oleHn which comprises:
(1) a preliminary polymerization step wherein a feed con-
taining at least one a-olefin having 3 or more carbon
atoms is brought, at a temperature of 40' C. or less, into
contact with a catalyst comprising (A) a first solid cata-
lytic ingredient which has been prepared in such a manner
that (a) a Grignard compound of the formula (I):
R^MgX
a)
wherein R^ represents an alkyl radical having I to 8 car-
bon atoms and X represents a halogen atom, is reacted
with a reaction product of an aluminium halide with an
organic silicon compound of the formula (II):
R„'Si(OR2)4
(II)
wherein R' represents a member selected from the group
consisting of alkyl radicals having 1 to 8 carbon atoms and
a phenyl radical, R2 represents an alkyl radical having 1 to
8 carbon atoms and n represents an integer of 0, 1, 2 or 3,
(b) the resultant solid carrier is brought into a first contact
with a titanium tetrahalide, (c) the resultant titanium-con-
taining solid product is treated with an organic acid ester
and, finally, (d) the treated solid product is brought into a
second contact with a titanium tetrahalide; (B) a second
catalytic ingredient consisting of at least one trialkyi alu-
minium of the formula (III):
AIR3*
(III)
wherein R* represents alkyl radical having 2 to 6 carbon
atoms; and (C) a third catalytic ingredient consisting of at
least one organic acid ester, whereby at least a portion of
said a-olefin is preliminarily polymerized; and, thereafter,
(2) a final polymerization step wherein a polymerization
mixture consisting of said catalyst, the resultant prelimi-
nary a-olefin polymer and a-olefin to be polymerized is
heated at a temperature above 40° C, whereby the entire
amount of a-olefin in said feed is polymerized.
4,435,551
PROCESS FOR THE POLYMERIZATION OR
COPOLYMERIZATION OF ETHYLENE WITH AN
IMPROVED SUPPORTED CHROMIUM OXIDE TYPE
CATALYST
Lambertus J. M. A. van de Leemput, Echt; Godefridus A. H.
Noogen, Helden-Panningen, and Hendrikus W. van der Loo,
Munstergeleen, all of Netherlands, assignors to Stamicarbon
B.V., Geleen, Netherlands
Division of Ser. No. 261,738, May 7, 1981, Pat. No. 4,382,020.
This application Sep. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 418,020
Claims priority, application Netherlands, May 7, 1980,
8002599
Int. a.J C08F 4/78
U.S. a. 526-101 3 Qaims
1. An improved process for the polymerization of ethylene,
or the copolymerization of ethylene with at most 15 mole
percent of one or more alkenes having 3 to 15 carbon atoms, in
the prsence of a supported chromium oxide type of catalyst,
said improvement comprising carrying out said polymerization
in the presence of a catalyst prepared by the steps of:
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
351
reacting in the presence of a solvent which is inert with respect
to compounds (1), (2), and (3) hereinafter referenced,
(1) a chromium chelate of a 1,3-diketo compound, and
(2) a vanadium chelate or a vanadyl chelate of a 1,3-diketo
compound,
separately or jointly with
(3) an organo-metallic compound of an element from Group
II or !II of the periodic system in which hydrocarbyl
groups with 1-20 carbon atoms are bound, via a carbon
atom, to the element;
jointly contacting the resulting solution containing the reaction
j}Feducts of (1) and (2) with (3) with, and depositing such
reaction products on, an inert inorganic supporting material;
and
heating said supporting material having such reaction products
deposited thereon in a non-reducing atmosphere at a temper-
ature between about 200° and 1200° C;
wherein said 1,3-diketo compounds of (1) and (2) are the same
or different and have the formula
OHO
II I II
Rl— C— C— C— R3
O
II
C— OH
O
II
— C— OR
O
II
-C-0-(CH2)«-0R
2.
3.
4.
o
o
9 / — N.
1
-C— X
1
— C— NRR
-"^
s.
6.
7. \—/
-^"-°" -^
o
It
C— OR
9.
R2
wherein R and R ' represent hydrocarbon groups of from 1 to
8 carbon atoms, and wherein A, X, Y, and Z are chosen such
that said halogen compound contains a total of at most two
halogen atoms.
in which formula R|, R2, and R3 are the same or different, R|
and R3 being an alkyl group with 1-10 carbon atoms, and R2
being selected from the group consisting of an alkyl group with
1-10 carbon atoms, and a hydrogen atom.
4,435,552
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF COPOLYMERS
OF ETHYLENE WITH AT LEAST ONE OTHER
1-ALKENE
Georges G. Evens, Maasmechelen, Belgium, assignor to Stami*
carbon B.V., Geleen, Netherlands
Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,011
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jul. 11, 1980,
8003997; Jun. 5, 1981, 8102724
Int. a.5 C08F 4/68. 210/16. 210/18
U.S. O. 526—140 15 Claims
1. A process for copolymerization to form copolymers con-
taining
from 25-85 Wt. % of ethylene units,
from 15-75 Wt. % of units of at least one other l-alkene,
and up to 20% of units of aliphatic or alicyclic polyunsatu-
rated monomer of from 3 to 20 carbon atoms and having
at least two non-conjugated carbon-carbon double bonds
wherein the catalyst system employed contains
(a) a compound of vanadium which is soluble in the poly-
merization medium,
(b) a compound of metal from Periodic Table Groups I-III
in which at least one hydrocarbon group is bound directly
to the metal atom through a carbon atom
in the presence of a halogen compound of the general formula:
A— C— Y
I
Z .
wherein
A represents a phenyl group having at most one substituent
halogen atom or up to two alkyl groups, or a thienyl,
furyl, pyrollyl, N-alkylpyrollyl, or pyridyl group bonded
to the carbon atom directly or through a carbonyl group
X is chlorine or bromine
Y is chlorine, bromine, hydrogen, or a hydrocarbon group
of from 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and
Z represents one of the radicals represented by the following
formulae:
4,435,553
PROCESS FOR NONAQUEOUS DISPERSION
POLYMERIZATION OF BUTADIENE IN THE
PRESENCE OF CARBONYLATED POLYMERIC
DISPERSING AGENTS
Morford C. Throckmorton, and Joginder Lai, both of Akron,
Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company,
Akron, Ohio
Filed Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,066
Int. CV C08F 2/08
U.S. G. 526—201 10 Qaims
1. A process for the nonaqueous dispersion polymerization
of butadiene monomer in a reaction mixture containmg a liquid
nonaqueous dispersion medium, the improvement which com-
prises carrying out the polymerization of the butadiene mono-
mer in the presence of at least one carbonylated polymer se-
lected from the group consisting of (1) carbonylated copoly-
mers of alpha-olefins and conjugated diolefins, (2) car-
bonylated terpolymers of alpha-olefins and conjugated diole-
fins, (3) carbonylated copolymers of alpha-olefins and noncon-
jugated diolefins, (4) carbonylated terpolymers of alpha-olefins
and nonconjugated diolefins, (5) terpolymers of alpha-olefins,
conjugated diolefins, and nonconjugated diolefins, (6) car-
bonylated homopolymers of conjugated diolefins, (7) car-
bonylated homopolymers of nonconjugated diolefins, (8) car-
bonylated copolymers of conjugated diolefins and nonconju-
gated diolefins, and (9) carbonylated terpolymers of conju-
gated diolefins and nonconjugated diolefins.
4,435,554
EMULSION POLYMERIZATION PROCESS USING
MONOBASIC ALKALI PHOSPHATE
Anthony J. Bell, Stow, and Leiand E. Beyersdorff, North Can-
ton, both of Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear Tire & Rubber
Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 412,697
Int. a.3 C08F 236/12. 4/08
U.S. O. 526—229 8 Oaims
1. A process for the preparation of acrylonitrile-butadiene
rubber wherein an anionic surfactant and potassium persulfate
is used, the improvement which comprises the addition of a
monobasic alkali phosphate to an emulsion polymerization
formulation
said monobasic alkali phosphate being of the general struc-
tural formula
MH2PO4
352
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
wherein M is selected from the group consisting of so-
dium, potassium or lithium;
said monobasic alkali phosphate being present in amounts
from 0.4 to 1 part per hundred parts of total monomers
present in the emulsion polymerization formulation.
R2
H
^K
"^
^^V
pH
^y
^ ^
I^R^
R4^
N
\4
Y and Y', which may be the same, or different, represent oxy,
or
4,435,555 R'
NOVEL POLYMERIC LIGHT STABILIZERS FOR _i,_
POLYMERS •
Frank F. Loffelman, Brideewater, and Thomas E Bradv Whit<>. v ^ ^ .. .
house Station, both of N.J., as;ignors to American c;^^^^^^^^ bemterul r '' '"''T' "'""" ''' ^'"^'^"^ '^'"" "^^
Company, Stamford, Conn. ^^ mterrputed by an oxo, thio, or
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 285,239, Jul. 20, 1981,
abandoned. This application Feb. 16, 1983, Ser. No. 467,106
Int. CV C08F 26/06
U.S. CI. 526-261 6 Claims
1. A polymer prepared by polymerizing, optionally with a
comonomer, a compound of the formula (I) radical. Cj-Co cycloalkylene.
R*
- I
— N—
N
N
(I)
N N N N
T T
R' . R«
wherein R represents C3-C6 alkenyloxy, C3-C6 alkenylamino,
or di(C3-C6 alkenyOamino; R' represents Ci-Cg alkyl, Ci-Cg
alkoxy, halo. Ci-Cg alkylthio, C3-C6 alkenyloxy, amino,
C3-C6 alkenylamino, di(C3-C6 alkenyl)amino, the groups
I
O
H ]/ r2
R*"^ y ^R4
R'
or
N— r6
H U r2
/ N ^„A
R3
R*
h
C1-C18 alkylamino, di(Ci-Ci8)alkylamino, morpholino, pyr-
rolidyl, piperidino, a substituted Ci-Cig alkylamino, or a sub-
stituted di(Ci-Ci8)alkylamino, wherein the subslituents are
selected from amino, cyano, carboxy, wherein the alkoxy
moiety has 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and the group
H
H JL/ r2
R* I r4
R5
wherein R2 represents hydrogen, Ci-Cg alkyl, or benzyl; R3
and R* independently represent Ci-Cg alkyl, benzyl, or phen-
ethyl, or together with the carbon to which they are attached
form a Cs-Ciocycloalkyl; and R' represents hydrogen, C2-C3
hydroxyalkyl, Ci-Cg alkyl, hydroxyl, or oxyl; R* represents
hydrogen, Ci-Cs alkyl, or the group
-/ s Vh2-/ s \-.-ch2-/ s VcH:-,
-CH2CH2— / S \— CH2CH2-«-.
CH2CH2-/ s \— ,
-CH2-Y S \-CH2— / S \-CH2-.
.-/TV.
-CH2CH2-^ S V-CH2CH2— / S \-CH2CH2-.
-CH2CH2-/ S \_CH2-/ S \-CH2.
C6-C12 arylene, or Cg-Cuaralkylene; with the proviso that at
least one substituent in said compound is, or contains.
H
H JL/ r2
I R4
R5
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
353
4,435,556
METHOD OF MAKING AND USING NOVEL SCALE
INHIBITING TERPOLYMER
William F. Masler, III, 1026 Mattingly Rd., Hinckley, Ohio
44233
Filed Mar. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 480,182
Int. CI.J C08F 20m
U.S. a. 526—317 13 Qaims
6. A composition for treating process water in a recirculat-
ing water system, said composition comprising an effective
amount for the purpose, of a water-soluble essentially non-
crosslinked random copolymer consisting essentially of a ter-
polymer of acrylic acid or methacrylic acid and esters of 2-
hydroxyalkyl-(meth)acrylate, the terpolymer having the struc-
tural formula
R' R' R'
I I I
i-CH2-Ci5— f-CH2-C^jr-f-CH2-CHy-
CasO C=0 C=0
OX I O— R2— OH O— [R2— 01„H
wherein,
X represents H, or NH4, or an alkali metal selected from the
group consisting of sodium and potassium;
R' represents H, or methyl;
R2 represents lower alkyl having from 2 to about 4 carbon
atoms;
n is an integer in the range from 2 to about 6;
m is an integer in the range from about 3 to about 1 80; and,
for each y (that is, y= 1) x is an integer in the range from
about 2 to S, and z is an integer in the range from 0.02 to
about 0.3; and x, y and z are present in relative heteroge-
neous order.
4,435,557
Patent Not Issued For This Number
4,435,559
/3-HYDROXY URETHANE LOW TEMPERATURE
CURING AGENTS
Joseph T. Vaiko, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to PPG Industries,
Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Aug. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 409,273
Int. a.5 C08G 18/2S, 18/81. 59/40
U.S. a. 528—73 11 Qaims
1. A curable composition comprising:
(i) an active hydrogen-containing material,
(ii) a beta-hydroxy urethane, and
(iii) a cure catalyst.
4,435,560
MALEIMIDE: ARYLOXY DIAMINE RESIN
COMPOSITION AND PROCESS FOR PRODUCING
SAME
Akio Takahashi, Hitachiohta; Moloyo W^ima, HiUchi; Akio
Nishikawa, HiUchi, and Hirosada Morishita, Hitachi, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,624
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 9, 1980, 55-124044
Int. a.5 C08G 73/10
U.S. a. 528— 17Q 16 Claims
1. A maleimide resin com|X)sition comprising a maleimide-
diamine adduct having the recurring units:
•TCH— CO \ CO— CH
^ 1 ^
n4a— N
CHr-CO CO— CH2
— ^^— O— ^^— NH— CH— CO
-NH-{}-O^Q-C-
/ Rft
R2
CH2-CO
/ CO— CH
N— A-fN
\
CO— CH2
\ /
4,435,558
HARDENABLE URETHANE-EPOXY RESIN MIXTURES
Christian Burba; Hermann-Josef Lucas, both of Ascheberg-
Herbern, and Bernd Neffgen, Cappenberg, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Schering AG, Berlin and Bergkamen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 450,015
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 28,
1981, 3151592
Int. a.3 C08G 18/80
U.S. a. 528—45 12 Qaims
1. The method of hardening a glycidyl compound having
more than one epoxy group per molecule, which method
comprises admixing with said glycidyl compound an approxi-
mately stoichiometric amount of an amino hardener which is a
polyether urethane urea amine prepared by the reaction of
(1) a prepolymer having blocked isocyanate groups, pre-
pared by reacting a phenol or alkylphenol with the reac-
tion product of a polyether polyol or polythioether polyol
with an excess of a polyisocyanate, with
(2) a poly functional amino compound having
(a) at least two reactive amino hydrogen atoms per mole-
cule or
(b) at least one reactive amino hydrogen atom and at least
one azomethine group per molecule, the amine then
being liberated from the reaction product formed be-
tween (1) and 2(b) by hydrolysis of the azomethine
group.
wherein A represents a mono- , di-, tri-or tetravalent organic
group containing at least two carbon atoms, m represents an
integer of 0 ro 4, R| through R4 which are the same or difTerent
represent hydrogen atom, a lo^er alkyl group, a lower alkoxy
group, chlorine atom or bromine atom, and Rj and R6 which
are the same or different represent hydrogen atom, methyl
group, ethyl group, trifluoromethyl group or trichloromethyl
group, said adduct being soluble in an organic solvent having
a boiling point of 130* C. or lower to form a solution of a
concentration of 50% or more.
4,435,561
TEMPERATURE STABLE THERMOTROPIC
POLYCESTER CARBONATE) CONTAINING HIGH
AMOUNTS OF READILY AVAILABLE DIOLS
Yu-Chin Lai; Bruce T. DeBona; Dusan C. Prevorsek, and Murali
K. Akkapeddi, all of Morris County, N.J., assignors to Allied
Corporation, Morris Township, Morris County, N J.
Filed Jun. 30, 1983, Ser. No. 509,471
Int. a.3 C08G 63/64
U.S. a. 528—193 10 Qaims
1. In a thermotropic poly(ester carbonate) having diacyl
moieties which are primarily terephthalate moieties, carbonate
moieties and dihydroxy-derived moieties, the improvement
wherein the dihydroxy-derived moieties comprise a mixture of,
by moles:
(a) about 60-20% benzene- 1,4-dioxy,
(b) about 20-40% benzene 1,3-dioxy,
354
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
(c) about 30-5% methyIbenzene-2,5-dioxy, and
(d) about 10-30% t-butylbenzene-2,5-dioxy.
4,435,562 >
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF POLYESTER
COPOLYMERS
Carl M. Sullivan, and MeUis M. KeUey, both of Akron, Ohio,
anignora to The Goodyear Tire A Rubber Company, Akron,
Ohio
Filed May 6, 1983, Ser. No. 492,109
Int. a.3 C08G 63/22
U.S. a. 528—272 7 Claims
1. A process to improve randomization of copolyesters
comprising;
(a) esterifying a dicarboxylic acid and a diol, said dicarbox-
ylic acid selected from the group comprising alkyl dicar-
boxylic acids having a total of 2 to 16 carbons atoms or an
aryl dicarbocxylic acid having a total of from 8 to 16
carbon atoms; said diol having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms,
said diol is in a mole ratio to dicarboxylic acid from 2.5:1
to 1.15:1; thereafter,
^) transesterifying the esterification product in the presence
of a diol and a diester, said diol having from 2 to 10 carbon
atoms, said diester being selected from the group of alkyl
diesters having a total of from 2 to 20 carbon atoms, and
alkyl substituted aryl diesters having a total of from 10 to
20 carbon atoms; thereafter
(c) polymerizing the transesterification product in a conden-
sation stage to form a polycondensed copolyester having
an intrinsic viscosity from 0.2 to 0.9.
of HEC in the mixture, said amino compound containing at
least two polar groups per molecule selected from the group
consisting of primary amino, secondary amino, tertiary amino,
hydroxyl and mixtures thereof, having an atomic ratio of car-
bon atoms to the total number of primary amino plus hydroxyl
groups not exceeding five.
19. A process of increasing the viscosity of a heavy brine
having a density greater than about 13.5 pounds per gallon
containing one or more salts selected from the group consisting
of calcium chloride, calcium bromide, zinc chloride, and zinc
bromide, which comprises adding to said brine a viscosifying
amount of an activated hydroxyethyl cellulose composition
obtained from the process of claim 1, 2, 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, 12, 14,
15 or 16.
4435 563
PROCESS FOR THE RECOVERY OF PURE HELLEBRIN
Gerhard Oepen, Maintal; Karl-Heinz Mangartz, Kahl; Norbert
Seifiied, Hanau; JUrgen Engel, Alzenua, and Otto Isaac,
Hanau, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Degussa
Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 11, 1982, Ser. No. 377,251
Int. a.J C07J 79/00
U.S. a. 536-18.1 10 Qaims
1. A process for the recovery of pure hellebrin by extraction
of a defatted hellebrin extract and deposition of the pure helle-
brin by heating the extraction residue in the presence of etha-
nol comprising multistep countercurrent extracting a defatted
hellebrin containing extract in a solvent which is a water
-Ci-C3-alkano] mixture or a water-acetone mixture with a
solvent mixture consisting of a Ci-Cj-alkanol or acetone and a
chlorohydrocarbon which is dichloromethane, trichlorometh-
ane, tetrachloromethane or dichloroethane and subsequently
concentrating the hellebrin containing chloromethane or chlo-
roethane phase in a vacuum and heating the thus obtained
syrupy residue in ethanol under reflux until the residue is
dissolved completely and the first hellebrin crystals begin to
deposit.
4435 565
9.DEOXY.9.AMINO.CLAVULANATE ANTIBACTERIAL
AGENTS
Irene Stirling, Reigate, and Brian P. Qarke, Kingswood, both of
England, assignors to Beecham Group Limited, England
Division of Ser. No. 95,799, Nov. 19, 1979, which U a
continuation of Ser. No. 896,441, Apr. 14, 1978, abandoned. This
application Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,098
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 22, 1977,
16764/77; Sep. 6, 1977, 37072/77; Dec. 2, 1977, 50229/77; Dec.
23, 1977, 53866/77
Int. a.3 C07D 487/04; A61K 31/42
U.S. a. 542-416 8 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula (XI):
H /
O CH2— N
CO— O— CH2R7
(XI)
F^J-'
CH2— Ri
CO2N
a salt or a pharmaceutically acceptable ester thereof wherein
Ri is hydrogen, alkyl of up to 5 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 5
or 6 carbon atoms, hydroxyalkyl of up to 6 carbon atoms or a
moiety of the sub-formula (a):
R2
4,435,564
COMPOSITIONS AND PROCESSES FOR USING
HYDROXYETHYL CELLULOSE IN HEAVY BRINES
Roy F. House, Houston, Tex., assignor to Venture Innovations,
IoCm Lafiiyette, La.
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,572
Int a.J C08B 11/20; C09K 3/00. 7/00
VS. a. 536—87 19 claims
1. A process for activating hydroxyethyl cellulose (HEC)
such that said HEC will be at least 80% hydrated within about
one hour at 22* C. when added to a compatible brine having a
density greater than about 13.5 Ib./gal. containing one or more
salts selected from the group consisting of calcium chloride,
calcium bromide, zinc chloride, and zinc bromide, which com-
prises admixing with said HEC a solution of an amino com-
pound in a water soluble organic liquid in an amount sufficient
to provide at least 40% of said amino compound, based on the
weight of HEC, and from about 15% to about 30% by weight
R4
wherein R2 is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, alkyl of
1-3 carbon atoms, alkoxyl of 1-3 carbon atoms, acyloxyl of 1-3
carbon atoms and no additional heteroatoms, hydroxyf, alk-
oxycarbonyl containing 1-3 carbon atoms in the alkoxy moi-
ety or — N(R5)CO.R6— N(R5)S02R6 or — CO— NR5R6
wherein R5 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1-3 carbon atoms, phenyl or
benzyl and R6 is alkyl of 1-3 carbon atoms, phenyl or benzyl;
R3 is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, alkyl of 1-3 carbon atoms,
alkoxyl of 1-3 carbon atoms or acyloxyl of 1-3 carbon atoms
and no additional heteroatoms; and R4 is hydrogen, fluorine,
chlorine, alkyl of 1-3 carbon atoms or alkoxyl of 1-3 carbon
atoms and R7 is a moiety of the sub-formula (a):
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
355
R2
R4
wherein R2, R3 and R4 are as above defined.
4 435 566
. THIOPYRANOPYRIMIDINE COMPOUNDS AND ACID
ADDITION SALTS THEREOF
Sachio Ohno; Kiyoshi Mizukoshi; Osamu Komatsu; Hi^imu
Yamamoto, and Yasuo Kunou, all of Aichi, Japan, assignors to
Maniko Seiyaku Co., Ltd., Nagoya, Japan
Filed Feb. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 469,657
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 25, 1982, 57<29594;
Feb. 1, 1983, 58-15097
Int. a.J C07D 495/04
VS. a. 544—117 9 Qaims
1. A thiopyranopyrimidine compound represented by the
formula (I)
0)
wherein R' represents an amino group, a methylamino group,
a hydroxyethylamino group, a pyrrolidino group, a morpho-
lino group, a piperazino group or an N-substituted piperazino
group, and R^ represents an amino group, a methylamino
group, a dimethylamino group, a piperazino group, an N-sub-
stituted piperazino group, a pyrrolidino group, a piperidino
group or a morpholino group, and the pharmaceutically ac-
ceptable acid addition salt thereof
4,435,567
PROCESS FOR PREPARING SUBSTITUTED UREA
DERIVATIVES
GySrgy Lugosi, Gbd-felso; Antal Simay, Budapest; Janos Bod-
nar, Budapest; Laszlo Simandi, Budapest, and Eva Somfai,
Budapest, all of Hungary, assignors to Chinoin Gyogyszer es
Vesgyeszeti Tennekek Gyara R. T., Budapest, Hungary
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,470
Oaims priority, application Hungary, Dec. 29, 1980, 3135/80
Int. CI.J C07C 127/00. 127/15. 127/17. 127/19
VS. a. 544—165 1 aaim
1. A process for the preparation of a urea derivative of
formula (I)
R— NH— C— N
/
I
\
R>
R2
R'
R2
\
/
NH
with an N-carbamoyl-benzoic acid sulfimide in a composition
consisting essentially of 3 to 60% by weight of a sulfimide of
formula (III)
O O
W//
o s
II /
R— NH— C— N
II
O
O
wherein R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl or aralkyl, as an
N-acylating agent and of from 97 to 40% by weight, preferably
of from 95 to 50% by weight solvent as an additive, and 0.01 to
30% by weight organic or inorganic base.
4,435,568
THIOL METHYLATION PROCESS-REACHON,
RECYCLE AND REGENERATION OF METHYL
BROMIDE
Kenneth L. Barbour, Newark; William L. Geigle, New Castle,
both of Del., and Frank R. Haglid, deceased, late of Wilming-
ton, Del. (by Britt I. Haglid, executrix), assignors to E. I. Du
Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
FUed Jul. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 400,756
Int. a.J C07D 253/06
U.S. CI. 544—182 8 Qaims
1. In the process of contacting and reacting butylthion with
methyl bromide in aqueous alkaline solution to form a reaction
mixture from which metribuzin precipitates and is recovered
leaving a reaction supernatant containing methyl bromide,
butylthion, and alkali metal bromide, the improvement com-
prising carrying out the reaction with a temperature profile in
which methyl bromide addition and initial reaction occur at
one temperature, followed by increasing the temperature and
maintaining it for additional reaction.
4,435,569
5-[SUBSTITUTED AMINO
METHYL]PYRROLO(23-D]PYRIMIDINE.4.0NE
Susumu Nishimora, Ichihara, and Hiroaki Nomura, Takstsuki,
both of Japan, assignors to Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423.243
Halms priority, application Japan, Nov. 18, 1981, 56-184653
Int. a.J C07D 487/04; A61K 31/505
U.S. a. 544—280 10 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
CH2N
wherein
R is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl or aralkyl,
Rl and R^ are hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkinyl, alkoxy,
oxyalkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, alkoxycarbonylalkyl, aryl or
heteroaryl, or R' and R^ together with the adjacent nitro-
gen atom may form a saturated or unsaturated heterocy-
cle, or a condensed and/or substituted ring system, and
said heterocycle or said condensed and/or substituted ring
system may contain also a sulfo group,
which comprises reacting an amine of formula (II)
/
\
R2
wherein
R> is C|.|g alkyl which may be substituted with di-Ci-j
alkylamino; C).|g alkenyl; C3.8 cycloalkyl; C$.g cycloalke-
nyl; C7.13 aralkyl which may be substituted with Cm
^
356
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
alkoxy. Cm alkanoyl, Cia alkoxycarbonyl, hydroxy,
amino, nitro, trifluoromethyl or Cm alkanoylamino; or
C6.10 aryl and R2 is hydrogen or C7.13 aralkyl or,
R' and R2, taken together with adjacent nitrogen atom, form
a piperidine ring,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
4,435,570
5-(PHENYL OR BENZYL
AMINO)METHYL-PYRROLO[2,3.d]PYRIMIDIN-4.0NE
Susumu Nishimura, Ichihara, and Hiroshi Akimoto, Kobe, both
of Japan, assignors to Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423,249
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 26, 1981, 56-152646
Int. a.3 C07D 487/04; A61K 31/503. 43/00
VS. a. 544-280 9 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
i^— ^ XI
O CH2-Z-(CH2)«-/ A
HN ^i,^ ^ ^=^
Ym
wherein X is halogen, Y is hydroxyl or di-Ci.3 alkylamino, Z is
a — NH— or — NHC(=NH)— group, 1 is an integer of 1 to 5,
m is an integer of 0 to 2, and n is 1 when Z is a — NH— group
or n is 0 or 1 when Z is a — NHC(=NH)— group, or a pharma-
ceutically acceptable salt thereof.
4,435,571
5^SUBSTITUTEDBENZYL)-6.0XO-2-PIPERAZINE
CARBOXYLIC AODS AND ESTERS
Albert A. Carr, Robert A. Farr, and John M. Kane, all of Oncin-
nati, Ohio, assignors to Richardson Merrell Inc., Cincinnati,
Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 130,431, Mar. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,341,698,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 50,950, Jun. 21, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,553
Int. a.3 C07D 241/08; A61K 31/495
U.S. a. 544-384 4 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
H
CH2^ N
Y
N ^^COOR'
J
wherein R' is hydrogen, straight or branched chain lower alkyl
having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms or benzyl, Z is hydrogen or
straight chain lower alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, Y
is hydrogen or a nitrogen blocking group selected from the
group consisting of tertiary C4-C5 alkoxycarbonyl, benzylox-
ycarbonyl, and vinyloxycarbonyl. Re is hydrogen, halogen or
benzyloxy and R</is hydrogen, or Re and R^are benzyloxy; or
an individual diastereromer thereof
4,435,572
SYNTHESIS OF
ETHYL-4(3'.METHOXYPHENYL).l-METHYL
PIPERIDINE-3-CARBOXYLATE
Henry Rapoport, Berkeley, Calif.; Dwight D. Weller, Cham-
paigne. 111., and Richard D. Qess, Oakland, Calif., assignors
to The United States of America as represented by the Depart-
ment of Health and Human Services, Washington, D.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 31,749, Apr. 20, 1979, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 900,275, Apr. 26, 1978, Pat. No.
4,189,583. This application Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,775
Int. aj C07D 211/76. 295/14
U.S. a. 546-228 3 Qalms
1. In a process for the production of 4a-aryldecahy-
droisoquinolines, the steps consisting of commencing with
3-methoxybenzaldehyde and producing and isolating as inter-
mediates ethyl 3-methoxycinnamate (19), diethyl 2-cyano-3-
(3'-methoxyphenyl)pentanedioate (20), and ethyl 4-(3'-methox-
yphenyl)-2-piperidone-5-carboxylate (21) and reducing the
amide function of ethyl 4-(3'-methoxyphenyl)-2-piperidone-5-
carboxylate (21) and isolating same while retaining the ester
function by trimethyl oxonium fluoroborate followed by
NaBH4 in ethanol to yield the amino ester ethyl 4-(3'-methoxy-
phenyl)piperidine-3-carboxylate (22) and subsequently methyl-
ating said ester by a reductive methylation to produce ethyl
4-(3'-methoxyphenyl)-l-methylpiperidine-3-carboxylate (23)
and isolating same according to the following schemat:
.OCH3
,OCH3
9^ -f -%
CO2C2H5 C2H5O2C CN
CHO
OCH3
CO2C2H5
18
19
20
.OCH3
OCH3
CH3 ^pd/c
23
CH2O
&H2 H
tnmetfiyl
I J oxonium
fluoro-
'borate
22
'NaBH4
in
C2H5OH
21
4,435,573
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARAHON OF SUBSTITUTED
PYRIDINES
Zenon Lysenko, and Richard G. Pews, both of Midland, Mich.,
assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Oct. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 436,231
Int. C1.3 C07D 213/09
U.S. a. 546—250 8 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a compound having the formula
N R2
wherein R| is C1-C4 alkyl, phenyl, hydrogen or halogen, R2 is
CI or Br and R3 is CI, Br or F which comprises cyclizing a
compound having the formula
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
357
R2 R3
I I
Rl— C— CH2— C-H
atoms, by reacting with carbon monoxide the corresponding
halides of formula (II)
I
CHO
CN
wherein R|, R2 and R3 are as above-defmed, in the presence of
a catalytic amount of at least one organic amine base and/or an
organometallic transition metal catalyst.
SCHF:
H3COOC
H3C
COOCH3
R-X
(ID
4,435,574
2,6-DIMETHYL-3,5-DICARBOMETHOXY-4-(ORTHO-DI-
FLUOROMETHYLTHIOPHENYL).l,4-DIHYDROPYRI-
DINE
Valeria V. Kastron, ulitsa Avo tu, 33, kv. 2; Rasma O. Vitolin,
ulitsa Suvorova, 117, kv. 13; Gunar Y. Dubur, ulitsa lerikju,
43, kv. 2, all of Riga; Marita Y. Selga, ulitsa Kurtas, 1,
Rizhsky raion, selo Garkalne; Guntis V. SLarinsh, ulitsa La-
chu, 5, kv. 1, Riga; Natalya V. Kondratenko, Rusanovskaya
naberezbnaya, 6, kv. 171, Kiev; Vladimir I. Popov, ulitsa
Bratislavskaya, 2, kv. 86, Kiev; Alexandr A. Kolomeitsev,
prospekt 40 let Oktyabrya, 21, kv. 204, Kiev, and Lev M.
Yagupolsky, ulitsa Ivana Kudri, 41, kv. 48, Kiev, all of
U.S.S.R.
Filed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 398,910
Qaims priority, application U.S.S.R., Jul. 20, 1981, 3353822
Int. Q.^ C07D 213/55
U.S. Q. 546—321 1 Claim
1. 2,6-dimethyl-3,5-dicarbomethoxy-4-(o-dinuoromethyIthi-
ophenyl)-l,4-dihydropyridine having the formula
wherein R has the same meaning as in formula (1) and X is a
halogen bound to a primary or secondary carbon atom, and
selected from the group consisting of CI, Br and 1, in the pres-
ence of a salt of cobalt hydrocarbonyl in an alcoholic or aque-
ous alcoholic solvent and of bases, characterized in that the
catalyst is a salt of cobalt hydrocarbonyl having the formula:
Me" + lCo{CO)4],
in which Me is a cation of a metal having a valence n, selected
from the group consisting of Na, K, Li, Co, Fe, and Mn, said
catalyst being supported on an anion exchange resin.
4,435,575
PROCESS FOR PREPARING CARBOXYLATED
ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
Glanfranco CalnelU, Bologna; Marco Foa', Novara; Achllle U.
Ronchl, Ancona, and Andrea Gardano, Trlno Vercellese •
Vercelli, all of Italy, assignors to Montedison S.p.A., Milan,
Italy
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,090
Calms priority, application Italy, Jul. 1, 1980, 23163 A/80
Int. Q.5 C07C 51/10
U.S. Q. 546—341 19 Qaims
1. A catalytic process for preparing carboxylated organic
compounds, acids and/or esters and/or alkaline salts having
the formula (I)
R— C— O— R'
II
O
(I)
wherein R is a hydrocarbyl group having up to U carbon
atoms, selected from the aliphatic alicyclic, aryl- and heteroa-
rylalkyl groups, and said groups substituted by substituents
selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, etheric, thio-
etheric, halogen, nitrile, ester, amide and ketonic groups, and
R' is a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having up to 8 carbon
4.435,576
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
2.AMINO-4.METHYL.BENZOTHIAZOLE
Armand Squaratti, Brig, Switzerland, assignor to Lonza Ltd.,
Gampel, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 103,540, Dec. 13, 1979, abandoned.
This application Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,455
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 20, 1978,
12931/78
Int. Q.' C07P 277/82
U.S. CI. 548—164 20 Claims
1. Process for the production of 2-amino-methylbenzo-
thiazole comprising the steps of:
(a) reacting o-toiylthiourca with chlorine, a ring closure
reactant, in the presence of methylene chloride and in the
absence of a catalyst, there being no chlorination of the
benzene ring in the o-tolylthiourea, 2-amino-4-methylben-
zothiazole hydrochloride resulting, one weight unit of
o-tolylthiourea being used per 3 to 40 volume units of
methylene chloride, 1 to 2 moles of chlorine being used
per mole of o-tolylthiourea, step (a) being conducted at a
temperature between -20* and +15* C, the methylene
chloride being a suspending liquid and a solvent for the
o-tolylthiourea, being a suspending agent for the 2-amino-
4-methyl-benzothiazole hydrochloride and being a solvent
for the chlorine; and
(b) reacting the 2-amino-4-methylbenzothiazole hydrochlo-
ride with a sufficient amount of a base, 2-amino-4-methyl-
benzothiazole resulting, said base being selected from the
group consisting of an alkali metal hydroxide, an alkaline
earth meul hydroxide, hydrazine, hydroxylamine, sodium
oxide, ammonium hydroxide and zinc hydroxide.
4,435,577
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF CHLORINATED
DERIVATIVES OF BENZOXAZOLONES
Noel Rouy, Yerres, and Francois Dewilde, Thiais, both of
France, assignors to Rbone-Poulenc Agrochimic, Lyons,
France
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,538
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 27. 1980, 80 07262
Int. Q.3 C07D 498/04
U.S. Q. 548—221 W Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a chlorinated derivative
of benzoxazolone, which comprises the step of reacting ben-
zoxazolone with tnolecular chlorine in the presence of water
and dioxane to thereby form 6-chlorobenzoxazolone.
358
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,578
SORBINIL BY OPTICAL RESOLUTION OF PRECURSOR
6.FLUORO-4-UREIDOCHROMAN^CARBOXYLICACID
Berkeley W. Cue, Jr., Gales Ferry, and Bernard S. Moore,
Waterford, both of Conn., assignors to Pfizer Inc., New York,
N.Y.
Filed Nov. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 440,641
Int. a.3'C07D 491/107. 311/68
U.S. a. 548-309 8 c^ax^
1. A prcKcss for the preparation of a crystalline S-6-nuoro-4-
ureidochroman-4-carboxylic acid salt with D-( + )-(|-phene-
thyOamine or L-{-)-ephedrine which comprises combining a
racemic compound of the formula
aqueous acid to produce (-K7 or SVnuorodibenzoIb.fJ-
thiepin-3-carboxylic acid-S-oxide.
3. The d- or l-ephedrine salt of racemic (7 or 8)-nuorodiben-
zo[b,f|thiepin-3-carboxylicacid-5-oxide.
"N ^ ^CCX)H
with at least a half molar quantity of D-( + )-(|.phenethyl)a-
mine or L-(-)-ephedrine in a reaction-inert organic solvent
and recovering said crystalline salt.
2. A process of claim 1 which further comprises cyclization
of said recovered crystalline salt in glacial acetic acid to form
sorbinil and recovering said sorbinil or a pharmaceutically-
acceptable cationic salt thereof.
4,435 579
RESOLUTION OF SUBSTITUTED
DIBENZO[B.F]THIEPIN.3.CARBOXYLIC
ACID.5-OXIDES WITH EPHEDRINE
Patrice C. Belanger; Haydn W. R. Williams, both of Dollard des
Ormeaux, and Joshua Rokach, Chomedey-Laval, all of Can-
ada, assignors to .Merck & Co., Inc., Rahway, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 351,708, Feb. 24, 1982, Pat. No.
4,424,355, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 229,222, Jan. 28,
1981, abandoned. This application Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No.
397,253
Int. a.3 C07D 337/14
U.S. CI. 549-12 7 Claims
1. An improved process for the preparation of (-)(7 or
8)-nuorodibenzo[b,f]thiepin-3-carboxyIic acid-5-oxide of the
Formula I:
o
A
COOH
which comprises:
(1) Heating a solution of equimolar amounts of racemic (7 or
8)-nuorodibenzo(b,flthiepin-3-carboxylic acid-5-oxide and
(d or l)-ephedrine in a lower alcohol to form a dtastereo-
isomeric mixture of (d or l)-ephedrine salts of (-X? or
8)-nuorodibenzo[b,f|thiepin-3-carboxylic acid-5-oxide and
( + K7 or 8)-fluorodibenzo[b,f|thiepin-3-carboxylic acid-S-
oxide;
(2) Recovering the crystalline (d or l)-ephedrine (-) acid
salt;
(3) Recycling the (d or l)-ephedrine (-(-) acid salt by first
hydrolysis with aqueous acid followed by racemization
with trifluoroacetic anhydride to regenerate the racemic
(7 or 8)-nuorodibenzo[b,flthiepin-3-carboxylic acid-S-
oxide; and
(4) Acidifying said (d or i)-ephedrine (-) acid salt with
4,435 580
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF PHTHALIC
ANHYDRIDE
Constantine D. Miserlis, Arlington, Mass., assignor to The
Badger Company, Inc., Cambridge, Mass.
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,284
Int. a.^ C07D 307/89
U.S. a. 549-248 jO Claims
1. A process for producing an acid anhydride, said process
comprising the steps of:
(a) reacting an aromatic hydrocarbon or an unsaturated
aliphatic hydrocarbon with oxygen in a reactor in the
presence of a catalyst so as to produce a gas stream which
comprises an anhydride of a carboxylic or discarboxylic
acid;
(b) passing said gas stream from said reactor to a partial
condenser where a portion of said anhydride is condensed
out of said gas stream as a liquid and is recovered;
(c) passing said gas stream from said partial condenser to a
venturi scrubber stage and scrubbing said gas stream so as
to purge it of substantially all entrained catalyst dust parti-
cles;
(d) passing said gas stream from said scrubber stage to at
least one switch condenser;
(e) sublimating substantially all of said anhydride remaining
in said gas stream so as to form a solid in said at least one
condenser; and
(0 recovering said solid from said at least one condenser.
4 435 581
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF PHTHALIC
ANHYDRIDE
Constantine D. Miserlis, Arlington, Mass., assignor to The
Badger Company, Inc., Cambridge, Mass.
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,385
Int. a.3 C07D 307/89
U.S. CI. 549-248 jg Oaims
L A process for producing an anhydride of a carboxylic or
dicarboxylic acid, said process comprising the steps of:
(a) reacting an aromatic hydrocarbon or an unsaturated
aliphatic hydrocarbon with oxygen in a reactor in the
presence of a catalyst under selected conditions so as to
produce a gas stream which comprises an anhydride of a
carboxylic or dicarboxylic acid;
(b) passing said gas stream from said reactor to a gas cooler
where said gas stream is cooled to & temperature above the
auto-ignition temperature of said anhydride;
(c) passing said gas stream from said gas cooler to at least
one cyclone in order that said at least one cyclone may
purge catalyst particles from said gas stream;
(d) passing said gas stream from said at least one cyclone to
a temperature which is below the autoignition tempera-
ture of said anhydride yet is above the dew point of said
anhydride;
(e) passing said gas stream from said desuperheater to a
venturi scrubber stage and scrubbing said gas stream so as
to purge it of substantially all entrained catalyst dust parti-
cles;
(0 passing said gas stream from said scrubber stage to at least
one switch condenser;
(g) sublimating substantially all of said anhydride out of said
gas stream so as to cause said anhydride to deposit as a
solid in said at least one condenser; and
(h) recovering said solid from said at least one condenser.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
339
4,435,582
MANUFACTURE OF MACROCYCLIC POLYETHERS
Wilhelmus J. KriJnen, and Paulus A. M. Grotenhuis, both of
Amsterdam, Netherlands, assignors to Shell Oil Company,
Houston, Tex.
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,648
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 11, 1980,
8019112
Int. a.J C07D 323/00. 319/12
U.S. a. 549—352 8 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of macrocyclic polyethers
according to the formula:
/R R
RN
I
^1
1
1 1
1 1 1
R R R
X
R
1
C-
1
-
<R R>
1 1
-c— o— c-
1 1
R R"
1 1
— c— o— c-
1 1
1
R
1 1
R R
1
R
X
1
R
K
LRf/R R\ R R"|
I I I I I
r- - -c— o— c- — r— o— r- —i
where x is an integer from 1 to 9, K is 0 or 1, and each R, which
may be the same or different, represents a hydrogen atom or a
lower alkyl group which process comprises reacting a com-
pound according to the formula:
II
R
1
(K R>
1 1
R
1
1
1
1 1
-c— o— c-
1 1
— C— OH
1
1
R
1 1
R R
1
R
X
4,435,584
PREPARATION OF GAMMA-PYRONES
Thomas M. Brennan, Old Lyme; Daniel P. Brannegan, Paw-
catuck; Paul D. Weeks, and Donald E. Kuhia, both of Gales
Ferry, all of Conn., assignors to Pfizer Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 311,252, Oct. 14, 1981, Pat. No. 4,387,235,
which is a division of Ser. No. 72,057, Sep. 4, 1979, Pat. No.
4,323,506, which Is a division of Ser. No. 971,897, Dec. 21, 1978,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 869,493, Jan. 16, 1978,
Pat. No. 4,147,705, which is a division of Ser. No. 721,885, Sep.
9, 1976, Pat. No. 4,082,717, which is a continuation-in-part of
Ser. No. 710,901, Aug. 2, 1976, abandoned. This application Jul.
19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,342
Int. a.^ C07D 309/22
U.S. G. 549—415 8 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
wherein R is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, phenyl or
benzyl; and X is chlorine or bromine.
5. A process for preparing a gamma-pyrone of the formula
11
a
OH
which comprises heating in aqueous solution until hydrolysis is
substantially complete a compound of the formula
where x and R have the meaning as defined herein before, with
a sulphonyl halide in the presence of a base and a chloroben-
zene solvent.
wherein R is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, phenyl or
benzyl; X is chlorine or bromine.
4,435,583
2.HALO-SUBSTITUTED MONIC ACID A USEFUL AS
ANTIBACTERIAL COMPOUNDS
Norman H. Rogers, and Michael J. Crimmin, both of Horsham,
England, assignors to Beecham Group p.l.c., England
Filed Dec. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 447,516
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 9, 1981,
8137147
Int. a.3 C07D 309/06: A61K 31/35
U.S. a. 549—414 3 Claims
1. A compound of formula (I):
OH
CH3
IPO
OH Y
(1)
f4">^^J^9.
CO2R'
16
wherein
Y is halogen,
Ri is hydrogen, a salt forming radical, alkyl or aralkyl.
4,435,585
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
DIHYDROCINNAMALDEHYDE DERIVATIVES
Yvo Crameri, Oberwil; Paul A. Ochsner, Geneva, and Peter
Schudel, Griit-W'etzikon, all of Switzerland, assignors to
Givaudan Corporation, Clifton, N.J.
Filed Nov. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 322,135
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 21, 1980,
8621/80
Int. CI.' C07D 317/54: C07C 45/50
U.S. CI. 549—446 8 Oaims
1. A process for the manufacture of a compound of the
formula
CH«C
\
CHO
wherein:
360
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
R' represents isopropyl, n-butyl, sec. butyl, isobutyl, tert.
butyl, methoxy or. together with R2, represents methylene
dioxy;
R2 represents hydrogen or, together with R', represents meth-
ylenedioxy; and
R^ represents hydrogen or methyl which comprises:
(a) converting a ketone of the formula
to the corresponding ketal
R^O^ ^OR*
wherein R* is methyl or ethyl;
(b) converting said ketal by means of an alcohol cleavage, to
the corresponding enol ether
(c) converting said enol ethers to the corresponding /3-alkoxy
aldehyde
OR*
CHO
by means of a hydroformylation reaction, and
(d) subjecting said /3-alkoxy aldehyde to an alcohol cleavage,
wherein the hydroformylation is carried out by reacting said
enol ether with carbon monoxide and hydrogen in the presence
of a rhodium catalyst wherein:
(a) the ratio of carbon monoxide to hydrogen is between 1 to
4 and 4 to 1;
(b) the temperature is between 50° C. and 150° C; and
(c) the pressure is between 150 and 700 atmospheres.
4,435,586
ETHERinCATION PROCESS FOR HEXITOLS AND
ANHYDROHEXITOLS
Walter M. Knise, 1 Woodbury Ct., Wilmington, Del. 19805, and
John F. Stephen, 200 William Penn Blvd., West Chester, Pa.
19380
Filed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,623
Int. a.3 C07D 493/04. 307/20
U.S. a. 549-464 9 claims
1. An improved high yield process for the polyalkylation of
hexitols and inner ether derivatives thereof to form polyalkyl
ether derivatives of said hexitols which comprises the steps of:
(a) forming an aqueous solution of hexitol or hexitol inner
ether dispersed in an organic solvent selected from the
group consisting of dimethyl sulfoxide, dimethyl acetam-
ide, dimethyl formamide, toluene, xylene, bis(2-methoxye-
thyOether, and ethyleneglycoldiethyl ether to form an
aqueous dispersion,
(b) forming a monoalkali metal alkoxide of said hexitol or
hexitol inner ether by the addition of sodium or potassium
alkali to said dispersion,
(c) forming a monoalkyi ether and the halide salt of sodium
or potassium from said monoalkali metal alkoxide by the
addition of an alkyl monohalide having 1-4 carbon atoms
to said dispersion,
(d) continuing the alkylation of said formed monoalkyi ether
by the addition to said dispersion of substantially stoichio-
metric amounts of said alkyl monohalide and substantially
stoichiometric amounts of said alkali such that no more
than a monoalkali metal alkoxide derivative is present in
said dispersion until a completely polyalkylated hexitol or
hexitol inner ether is produced, and
(e) separating said produced polyalkylated hexitol or hexitol
inner ether from said aqueous dispersion.
4,435,587
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING SILICON ISOCYANATE
COMPOUNDS
Iwakichi Sugiyama, Narashino; Kiyoshi Endo, Inba, and
Yukihisa Takaoka, Inashiki, all of Japan, assignors to Matsu-
moto Seiyaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed Aug. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 406,961
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 19, 1981, 56-128734
Int. C1.3 C07F 7/10
U.S. a. 556-410 10 Claims
1. A process for producing a silicon isocyanate compound
which comprises reacting a silicon halide compound selected
from the group consisting of silicon chloride compounds,
silicon bromide compounds and silicon iodide compounds with
an isocyanate of the formula [I] M(NCO)^ or a cyanate of the
formula [I] M(OCN);„ wherein M represents a member se-
lected from the group consisting of alkali metals and alkaline
earth metals, and m is 1 or 2, in the presence of one or more
reaction accelerators selected from the group consisting of
alkylene glycols, polyalkylene glycols, ether and ester deriva-
tives thereof and halogen-substituted derivatives thereof,
thereby to prepare a silicon isocyanate containing at least one
Si— NCO linkage.
4,435,588
HERBICIDAL COMPOUNDS, COMPOSITIONS, AND
METHOD OF USE
Kou-chang Liu, Wayne, N.J., assignor to GAF Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,402
Int. C\? C07C 69/76
U.S. CI. 500-21 32 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
-'-^°^)^'
o o
H II
C— XRiX'CZRa
N02
where:
X and X' are independently oxygen, sulfur, disulfur, or
-NR5;
Ri is a saturated or unsaturated, straight or branched chain
aliphatic diradical C|-C|8 wherein one or more of the
methylene group may be replaced by oxygen, sulfur,
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
361
~SO— , — SO2 -, or — NRft; where the aliphatic diradi-
cal may be optionally substituted with halogen, trihalo-
methyl, cyano, hydroxy, alkoxy, aryl, cyano or a cyclic
alkyl C3-C6;
Z is oxygen, sulfur, NR7, or a direct bond;
R2 is a saturated straight or branched chain aliphatic hydro-
carbon radical Ci-Cg substituted with halogen, trihalo-
methyl, cyano, nitro, hydroxy, alkoxy, thioalkoxy or aryl;
an aryl radical optionally substituted with halogen, trihal-
omethyl, cyano, nitro, alkyl, alkoxy or hydroxy; a cyclic
alkylene or alkenylene ring C3-C6 optionally substituted
with halogen, trihaiomethyl, hydroxy, alkyl, alkoxy or
cyano; or R2 can be isopropyl when Ri is
— CH2CH(CH2C1)CH2— ; ethenyl or acetoxy when X is
— NH— ; ethyl when X is _N(CH3)— or methyl when
Rl is — C2H3=C2H3— , — C2H4SSC2H4— , or when X is
— N(CH3)— , — NH— or — S— or when X' is — NH— ,
-S- or -N(CH3)-;
R3, R4, Rj, Rft, and R7, and are independently hydrogen, a
saturated or unsaturated, straight or branched chain ali-
phatic radical Ci-Cg optionally substituted with halogen,
hydroxy, alkoxy, cyano or nitro.
4 435 589
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF DIMETHYL
SUCCINYLOSUCCINATE, THE DISODIUM SALT
THEREOF, DIANILINODIHYDROTEREPHTHALIC
ACIDS, THE DIMETHYL ESTERS AND SALTS
THEREOF, AND DIANILINOTEREPHTHALIC ACIDS,
AND THE DIMETHYL ESTERS AND SALTS THEREOF
Meinhard Rolf, Leverkusen; Detlef-Ingo Schiitze, Bergisch-
Gladbach; Riitger Neeff, Leverkusen, and Hans-Volker Runz-
heimer, Odenthal-Gloebusch, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,047
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 10,
1981, 3104644
Int. C1.3 C07C 101/38. 101/68. 103/76
U.S. CI. 560-48 14 Claims
1. Process for the preparation of dimethyl succinylosucci-
nate or the disodium salt thereof, characterized in that di-
methyl succinate is condensed in a 35-45 percent by weight
solution of 120-180 percent of theory sodium methylate in
methanol and the disodium salt is isolated or dimethyl suc-
cinylosuccinate is liberated by means of an acid and is isolated.
2. Process for the preparation of dimethyl dianilinodihy-
droterephthalates of the formula (I),
Rl,
C00CH3 "
„ C00CH3
(I)
in which
condensation of dimethyl succinate in a 35-45 percent by
weight solution of 120-180 percent of theory of sodium meth-
ylate in methanol, is acidified, the liberated dimethyl suc-
cinylosuccinate is condensed with at least two mols of a com-
pound of the formula
H
Rl
= R2 = — / A ^ or R, = — / A \ and
the rings A and B optionally being substituted by I to 4 substit-
uents from the group comprising Ci-C4-alkyl, chlorine, fluo-
rine, Ci-C4-aIkoxy, carbamoyl which is optionally monosub-
stituted or disubstituted by Ci-C4-alkyl, trifluoromethyl, car-
boxyl or nitro, or optionally an aromatic ring is fused thereto,
characterized in that the suspension of the disodium salt of
dimethyl succinylosuccinate, which suspension is obtamed by
NH2
(ID
in which
A has the meaning given under formula (1), or with, alto-
gether, at least 2 mols of a mixture of a compound of the
formula (11) and a compound, which differs therefom. of
the formula (111)
(III)
in which B has the meaning given under formula (I), or
with salts of the amines (III) and/or (II), and the dimethyl
esters are isolated.
4,435,590
RADIATION STERILIZABLE ABSORBABLE
POLYMERIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR
MANUFACTURING THE SAME
Shalaby W. Shalaby, .Mountainville, and Dennis D. Jamiolkow-
ski, Long Valley, both of N.J., assignors to Ethicon, Inc.,
Somerville, N.J.
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,641
Int. Cl.^ C07C 69/76
U.S. CI. 560-61 6 Claims
1. A relatively pure cystalline monomer of the following
general formula:
O— CH2— CO2CH3
O— CH2— CO2CH3
where the benzene ring is 1,2-, 1,3-, or 1,4-substituted.
4,435,591
COMPOUND WITH ANALGESIC,
ANTIINFLAMMATORY AND ANTIPYRETIC ACTIVITY,
AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
THEREFROM
Leonardo De Vincentiis, Rome, Italy, assignor to Ausonia Far-
maceutici s.r.l., Pomezia, Italy
Filed Jun. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 390,979
Qaims priority, application Italy, Mar. 10, 1982, 20074 A/82
Int. CV C07C 69/76
U.S. a. 560—73 2 Qaims
1. The compound 2-(4-isobutylphenyl)]-propanol 3,4,5-
trimethoxybenzoate of formula 1:
362
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
0CH3
CH3O— ^_^ C—0—CH2—CH—f^—CH2—
I O CH3
0CH3
(I)
separating said unreacted methacrylic acid and said meth-
acrylic acid ester by distillation.
CH(CH3)2
4,435,592
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
POLYETHER-ESTER POLYOLS
Curtis J. Reichel, Wyandotte, Mich., assignor to BASF Wyan-
dotte Corporation, Wyandotte, Mich.
Filed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 426,312
Int. Q\} COrJC 67/08. 67/26
U.S. a. 560—91 10 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of a poiyether-ester polyol
comprising (a) reacting an alkaline catalyst, selected from the
group consisting of hydroxides and alkoxides of sodium, potas-
sium, lithium, rubidium and cesium, containing polyoxyalkyl-
ene polyether polyol with tetrahydrophthalic anhydride to
form a half acid ester, (b) reacting the product of (a) with an
alkylene oxide and (c) removing the catalyst.
4,435,595
REACnVE DISTILLATION PROCESS FOR THE
PRODUCTION OF METHYL ACETATE
Victor H. Agreda, and Lee R. Partin, both of Kingsport, Tenn.,
assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,626
Int. a.3 BOID 3/36
U.S. a. 560—234 28 Qaims
4,435,593
ADDUCTS OF l.CYCLOHEXENE-l,2.DICARBOXYLIC
ANHYDRIDE WITH OLEHNS
Ellis K. Fields, River Forest, and Tayseer S. Nimry, Wheaton,
both of 111., assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana),
Chicago, III.
Division of Ser. No. 330,154, Dec. 14, 1981, Pat. No. 4,371,701.
This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,340
Int. a.J C07C 69/753
U.S. CI. 560—119 3 Claims
1. A composition of the structural formula
CC-OR
^T-' C4H9
C— o- +
II
o
NH4R
wherein R is an alkyl moiety of from S to 18 carbon atoms and
R' is an alkyl moiety of from 8 to 18 carbon atoms.
4,435,594
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF METHACRYLIC
AOD ESTERS
Hiroshi Matsumura; Fumiki Murakami, and Hiroshi Sonobe, all
of Otake, Japan, assignors to Minemet Recherche, Trappes,
France
Filed Oct. 30, 1979, Ser. No. 89,497
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 31, 1978, 53-133858
Int. a.5 C07C 67/48
US. a. 560—205 6 Qaims
1. In a process for preparing a methacrylic acid ester by
reacting methacrylic acid with a lower aliphatic alcohol in the
liquid phase using a solid acidic catalyst at a molar ratio of
alcohol to methacrylic acid of 1.2-3.0:1 and a reaction temper-
ature of 70*- 100° C, the improvement comprising: (1) extract-
ing substantially only the unreacted alcohol from the reaction
mixture containing unreacted alcohol, unreacted methacrylic
acid, ester product and impurities with an aqueous solvent at a
temperature of 40* to 60* C; (2) removing the low boiling
substances and water from the extraction-residual mixture by
distillation whereby an organic residue is generated containing
methacrylic acid ester and unreacted methacrylic acid; and (3)
27. A process for the production from methanol and glacial
acetic acid of methyl acetate which is at least about 99.5%
pure, wherein said acetic acid functions both as reactant and as
extractive agent, said process comprising the steps of
(a) selecting a design for a single reactive distillation column
and a residence time thereof to provide intimate contact
sufficient to enable said acetic acid to be used both as a
reactant and as an extractive agent within said column,
(b) countercurrently flowing approximately stoichiometric
quantities of glacial acetic acid and methanol through said
single reactive distillation column in the presence of sulfu-
ric acid, which is fed to the column at a rate of about 1 kg
of sulfuric acid per 100 kg of acetic acid, so as to provide
intimate contact in said column between said acetic acid
and methanol, between said acetic acid and methyl aceta-
te/water azeotrope, and between said acetic acid and
methyl acetate/methanol azeotrope, the residence time in
said column being at least about 2,4 hours and the reflux
ratio being about l.S to 1.7;
(c) removing intermediate boiling compounds comprising
methyl propionate, methyl butyrate, isopropyl acetate,
and mixtures thereof from a vapor sidedraw stream which
is continuously removed from and returned to the middle
to upper part of the reaction section of said column;
(d) controlling the methanol feed rate within about ±10%
of the target flow rate so as to maintain at a preselected
constant level the temperature of a point located in the
column below the methanol feed and controlling the
methyl acetate distillate flow rate within about ±5% of
the target flow rate so as to maintain at a preselected
constant level the temperature of a point located in the
middle to upper part of the reaction section of said col-
umn; and
(e) continuously removing said high purity methyl acetate
from the top of said column and continuously removing
water from the bottom of said column.
4,435,596
PROCESS OF PRODUCING TEREPHTHALIC ACID
Yulin Wu, and Ernest A. Zuech, both of Bartlesville, Okla.,
assignors to Phillips Petroleum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Division of Ser. No. 894,069, Apr. 6, 1978, Pat. No. 4,357,257.
This application Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,766
Int. Q.3 C07C 51/347
U.S. Q. 562—481 3 Qaims
1. In a method of producing terephthalic acid wherein potas-
MarCH 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
363
slum benzoate is disproportionated to form dipotassium terph-
thalate which is converted to terephthalic acid, the improve-
ment comprising:
(a) charging an aqueous solution of potassium benzoate to a
dryer so as to produce a sheet of crystals of said potassium
benzoate;
(b) subjecting said sheet of crystals to a powder-forming
apparatus so as to form a powder of said crystals, the size
of said powder being within the range from about 50 mesh
to about 140 mesh and the shape of said powder being
granular;
(c) mixing said powder with terphenyl so as to form a low
viscosity slurry; and then
(d) transporting said low viscosity slurry to a disproportion-
ation reactor.
H-C
CH3 CH3
C
/ \
CH CH
\
\
COR
conducting the process in the presence of an effective amount
of hydroquinone.
4,435,597
PREPARATION OF CARONALDEHYDE ACID AND
DERIVATIVES THEREOF
Dieter Arit, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,034
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 26,
1981, 3111849
Int. CV C07C 51/04
U.S. CI. 562—506 5 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of caronaldehyde acid or a
derivative thereof of the formula
in which
R isO-Me + , and
Mc** is an equivalent of an alkali metal, alkaline earth metal
or ammonium cation, comprising reacting a 2-halogeno-
3,3-dimethyl-5,5-dichloropentanoic acid halide of the
formula
CH3 CH3
CI2CH C o
\ / \ II
CH2 CH— C— Y
■ i
wherein X and Y each independently is a halogen atom,
with a base selected from the group consisting of an alkali
metal hydroxide, alkaline earth metal hydroxide, tertiary
amine, alkali metal carbonate and alkaline earth metal
carbonate in the presence of water.
4,435,599
PARA-NITRODIPHENYLAMINE SYNTHESIS
Budd H. Sturm, Hartville, Ohio, assignor to The Goodyear Tire
A Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Nov. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 444.633
Int. CV C07C 85/18. 85/24
U.S. CI. 564—433 15 Claims
1. A process wherein (1) a para-halonitrobenzene conform-
ing to the following structural formula:
NO2
(II)
wherein R and R| are selected from the group consisting of
hydrogen and alkyl radicals of 1 to 9 carbon atoms and
wherein X is a halogen selected from the group consisting of
chlorine and bromine is reacted with (2) a primary aromatic
amine of the following structural formula:
NH:
Rj
(111)
R2
wherein R2 and R3 are radicals selected from the group consist-
ing of hydrogen, alkyl radicals of 1 to 9 carbon atoms, alkoxy
radicals of 1 to 9 carbon atoms and cycloalkyi radicals of 5 to
6 carbon atoms; (3) in the presence of a neutralizing agent
selected from the group consisting of alkaline metal salts,
oxides of alkali metal salts and alkali metal hydroxides; (4) a
copper catalyst system at a concentration of at least 0.1 parts
by weight per 100 parts by weight of the para-halonitroben-
zene; (5) at a temperature of 100* to 250* C. (6) at a pressure
from atmospheric to about 300 kPa and (7) with an excess of
primary aromatic amine wherein the improvement is charac-
terized in that the copper catalyst system has added thereto at
least one zinc (11) compound selected from a group consisting
of zinc (II) salts, zinc (II) oxides, zinc (II) sulfides and organo-
metallic zinc (II) compounds.
4,435,598
PROCESS FOR THE CATALYTIC OXIDATION OF
PROPYLENE TO ACRYLIC ACID
James A. Hinnenkamp, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to National
Distillers and Chemical Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 28, 1977, Ser. No. 846,470
Int. CI.' C07C 51/25. 51/50. 57/045. 57/075
U.S. CI. 562—546 8 Claims
1. In a process for preparing acrylic acid by the liquid phase
catalytic oxidation of propylene, the improvement for increas-
ing the selectivity to acrylic acid, decreasing the production of
the combustible side product carbon dioxide, enhancing the
catalyst utility and providing a reaction mixture having a
higher final concentration of acrylic acid which comprises
4,435.600
PROCESS FOR PREPARATION OF TERTIARY BUTYL
HYDRAZINE
Yoichi Hasegawa, Marugame; Mineo Nakagawa. TakamaUu,
and Syuji Hara, Zentsuji, all of Japan, assignors to Japan
Hydrazine Co., Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 10, 1983, Ser. No. 474,000
Int. CI.' C07C 109/02
U.S. CI. 564—464 8 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a tertiary butyl hydrazme
hydrohalogenide. which comprises reacting a hydrazine salt of
a hydrohalugenic acid with tertiary butanol in the presence of
a hydrazine dihydrohalogenide or a hydrogen halide.
364
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6. 1984
4,435,601
PREPARATION OF POLYPHENOLS BY OXIDATION OF
HYDROXYBENZALDEHYDES
Karel Formanek, Serezin Du Rhone; Daniel Michelet, Tassin La
Demi-Lune, and Dominique Petre, Lyons, all of France, as-
signors to Rhone-Poulenc Industries, Paris, France
Filed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281,248
Qaims priority, application France, Jul. 11, 1980, 80 15753
Int. a.^ C07C 45/64
U.S. a. 568—430 36 Claims
1. In a process for the preparation of optionally aldehyde
substituted polyphenols by oxidizing, with hydrogen peroxide,
a hydroxybenzaldehyde bearing at least one aldehyde substitu-
ent ortho- and/or para- to the nuclear hydroxyl group, in an
aqueous reaction medium and in the presence of an alkali or
alkaline earth metal base, the improvement comprising main-
taining the pH of the said reaction medium in the range of from
about 2 to 7 throughout the course of the oxidation reaction,
with rhe hydrogen peroxide and an alkali metal base or alkaline
earth metal base being added gradually to the reaction me-
dium, whereby at least one formyl of the hydroxybenzalde-
hyde is oxidized to a hydroxyl.
polyol which is crystalline under normal conditions and a
tertiary amine containing at least two identical organic substit-
uents, each having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, said tertiary amine
being present in said polyol composition in a concentration of
O.OOS to 0.2S percent by weight, based upon the weight of said
polyol:
4,435,602
CONVERSION OF DIMETHYL ETHER TO
FORMALDEHYDE
Robert M. Lewis, Sugarland, and Lynn H. Slaugh, Cypress, both
of Tex., assignors to Shell Oil Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 402,017
Int. a.J C07C 47/04
U.S. CI. 568—470 6 Gaims
0 nxjoaxeoTctoKioo
OmCTHYL CTHCH COmCRSlOt PCKCNT
—
^r~
N.
"
^
\
/t"
\
\
s,
1
1
\
V
~i
\
-
V
i
1
\
S
'
0 loxxiosounaoaoioo
Diuertm ernen coHveas/on pepceur —
1. A process for converting dimethyl ether to formaldehyde
which comprises contacting the dimethyl ether with oxygen at
a temperature ranging from about 250° C. to about 500° C.
with a catalyst comprising naturally occurring manganese
nodules.
4,435,604
METHOD FOR THE RECOVERY OF
PENTAERYTHRITOL FROM THE RESIDUAL
MIXTURES OF THE SYNTHESIS FROM
ACETALDEHYDE AND FORMALDEHYDE
Gianalvise Carazzolo, Castellanza; Giancarlo Colombo, Milan;
Giulio Gavelia, Imola; Silvano Giacomuzzo, Cassano Mag-
nago, and Franco Gianetti, Gallarate, all of Italy, assignors to
Montedison S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed May 19, 1982, Ser. No. 379,778
Gaims priority, application Italy, May 22, 1981, 21891 A/81
Int. G.3 C07C 31/24. 29/88
U.S. CI. 568—854 14 Claims
1. A method for recovering pentaerythritol from a residual
mixture of the synthesis of pentaerythritol from acetaldehyde
and formaldehyde containing, besides other by-products, at
least 20% by weight of formals, which method is characterized
in that said formals are transacetalized by contacting the resid-
ual mixture containing them, in a liquid medium and in the
presence of an acid selected from the group consisting of
sulphuric, phosphoric paratoluene-sulphonic acids and the
cation-exchange resins, with a saturated aliphatic alcohol se-
lected from the group consisting of methanol, ethylene glycol
and 1,3-propylene glycol, the amount of water in the transacet-
alization reacting mixture being equal to or lower than 10% by
weight.
4,435,605
PROCESS FOR PREPARATION OF 2-PHENYLETHYL
ALCOHOLS FROM AROMATIC ALDEHYDES
Susan B. Butts, and George E. Hartwell, both of Midland,
Mich., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
Mich.
Filed Aug. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 412,333
Int. CV C07C 27/22
U.S. G. 568—878 7 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a 2-phenylethyl alcohol
which comprises contacting a aromatic aldehyde with carbon
monoxide and hydrogen in a solvent comprising an oxygen-
ated polar hydrocarbon and water, in the presence of a cata-
lytic amount of a catalyst comprising a cobalt compound, a
ruthenium salt and an iodine salt, at elevated temperatures and
a pressure of between about 600 and 45,000 psi, wherein the
aromatic aldehyde is represented by the formula
4,435,603
METHOD FOR PREVENTING CAKING OF POLYOLS
Boy Cornils, Dinslaken; Hanswilhelm Bach, Duisburg; Roderich
Gartner, Dinslaken, and Wilhelm Gick, Duisburg, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Ruhrchemie Aktiengeseil-
schaft, Oberhausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,772
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 15,
1980, 3010138
Int. G.3 C07C 27/26. 29/94
U.S. G. 568—701 17 Claims
1. A polyol composition consisting essentially of a solid
O .
II
CH
1
and the 2-phenylethyl alcohol is represented by the formula
^V])\-CH2CH20H
II
wherein X is a hydrogen, halogen, alkyl, alkoxy or nitro group.
March 6, 1984
CHEMICAL
365
4,435,606
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF LINEAR
OLEFINS FROM TRIETHYLALUMINUM AND
TRIPROPYLALUMINUM VIA GROWTH,
ISOMERIZATION AND METATHESIS
Kaye L. Motz; Paul H. Washecheck; Ronald L. Poe, and James
E. Yates, all of Ponca City, Okla., assignors^to Conoco Inc.,
Ponca City, Okla.
Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,406
Int. Cl.^ C07C 3/21. 3/02
U.S. G. 585—324 27 Claims
wfixrwfa/nw
1. A process for extending catalyst life during the alteration
of the carbon atom distribution of internal olefins to obtain
internal olefin products containing a majority of mid-range
homologues wherein air or oxygen is excluded from the olefins
throughout the process from growth through metathesis, the
process comprising
(1) reacting ethylene with aluminum trialkyi in the presence
of an internal olefin solvent in a growth step to form
aluminum alkyls and linear thermal alpha olefins;
(2) removing the inert internal olefin solvent comprising
from 10 to 14 carbon atoms and thermal linear alpha
olefins formed containing up to about 14 carbon atoms as
overhead in a fractional distillation, and passing these
olefins to isomerization in step 5(a);
(3) passing the remaining products of (2) into a vessel con-
taining a transition metal catalyst and adding ethylene or
ethylene and propylene wherein aluminum alkyl and
alpha olefins are formed in a displacement reaction;
(4) passing the product of (3) through an isomerization reac-
tor containing a transition metal catalyst to transform
alpha olefins present into internal olefins, then
(5) subjecting the product of (4) to separation to obtain
internal olefins containing up to about 10 carbon atoms, a
stream containing from 15 to 30 carbon atom internal
olefins and a stream having internal olefins containing
from about 10 to about 14 carbon atoms and aluminum
trialkyls prepared by displacement in (3) and returning
these 10 to 14 carbon atom materials to the growth reactor
as solvent and recovered aluminum alkyl as a reactant,
while the overhead containing internal olefins up to about
10 carbon atoms together with the overhead stream from
step 2 are combined and wherein the carbon atom distri-
bution of both the alpha-olefins and internal olefins is
altered to obtain internal olefins controlled with respect to
proportions by (a) passing a feedstream of internal olefins
containing up to about 10 carbon atoms and from about
15-30 carbon atoms together with the mixture of 10-14
carbon atom internal olefins and up to 14 carbon atom
alpha-olefins from the separator following growth
through a vessel containing an isomerization catalyst to
randomize the internal olefinic double bond, and (b) pass-
ing the randomized internal olefin product of (a) through
a closely coupled metathesis reactor to alter the carbon
atom distribution of linear carbon chains, said distribution
having an average molecular weight substantially equal to
the feed internal olefins, then (c) separating product car-
j- bon atom range internal olefins from the product, while
T (d) recycling non-product carbon atom range internal
olefins to (a), (b), or both.
4,435,607
DEHYDROGENATION OF DEHYDROGENATABLE
HYDROCARBONS
Tamotsu Imai, Mount Prospect, III., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 258,358, Apr. 28, 1981,
abandoned. This application Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,628
Int. CU C07C 5/40. 5/48
U.S. CI. 585—443 11 Claims
1. A process for the dehydrogenation of a dehydrogenatable
hydrocarbon with separate and intermediate selective oxida-
tion of hydrogen which compises:
(a) contacting said hydrocarbon with a dehydrogenation
catalyst comprising an alkaline metal-promoted iron com-
pound in a first reaction-dehydrogenation zone in the
presence of steam to produce a first reaction-dehy-
drogenation zone effluent stream comprising a mixture of
uncoverted hydrocarbons, dehydrogenated hydrocar-
bons, hydrogen and steam;
(b) removing said first-reaction dehydrogenation zone efflu-
ent from said first reaction-dehydrogenation zone;
(c) passing said removed first-reaction dehydrogenation
zone effiuent of step (b) to a second-reaction oxidation
zone, which is separate and discrete from said-reaction
dehydrogenation zone;
(d) contacting said first-reaction dehydrogenation zone ef-
fiuent in said second-reaction oxidation zone with an
oxygen-containing gas to selectively oxidize said hydro-
gen within said first-reaction dehydrogenation zone efflu-
ent to the substantial exclusion of oxidation of said uncon-
verted and dehydrogenated hydrocarbons in the presence
of an oxidation catalyst consisting essentially of about 0.01
to about 5 wt% of a Group VIII noble metal, about 0.01
to about 5wt% of a Group IVA metal, and from about
0.01 to about 10% by weight of a metal of Group lA or
IIA composited on a highly porous alumina support at
oxidation conditions, wherein said exothermic selective
oxidation of said hydrogen provides additional heat and
thereby raises the temperature of said 'unconverted and
dehydrogenated hydrocarbons;
(e) withdrawing said unconverted and dehydrogenated
hydrocarbons from said second-reaction oxidation zone
having an increased temperature with respect to the tem-
perature of said first-reaction dehydrogenation effiuent
zone;
(0 passing said removed second reaction-oxidation zone
product stream of step (e) to a third-reaction dehydrogen-
ation zone, containing a dehydrogenation catalyst com-
prising an alkaline metal promoted iron compound at
dehydrogenation conditions to produce dehydrogenated
hydrocarbons; and
(g) withdrawing and recovering said dehydrogenated hy-
drocarbons.
4,435,608
XYLENE ISOMERIZATION
Wicher T. Koetsier, Mijnsheerenland, and Johannes P. Ver-
duijn, Spijkenisse, both of Netherlands, assignors to Exxon
Research & Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,176
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 12, 1980,
8039961
Int. Cl.^ C07C 5/22
U.S. CI. 585—480 6 Gaims
1. A process for obtaining ethylbenzene and para-xylcne
and/or ortho-xylene from a mixed Cg feed, which process
comprises recovering ethylbenzene from the mixed Cg feed to
leave an ethylbenzene-depleted feed containing mixed xylenes
and less than 5 wt.% ethylbenzene, thereafter contacting the
ethylbenzene-depleted feed under isomerization conditions
with a catalyst comprising a gallosilicate zeolite having a mole
ratio of Si02:Ga203 greater than 5 and a consistent index of
from 1 to 12, said gallosilicate zeolite overlying a silica core,
366
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
the silica core and the zeohte having substantially the same
crystalline structure, to give an isomerate enriched in para-
C|Fei4
^
.-^
tt.
''I
'> *x
.1^
■^0
p
h ^
\
u
^
p-
xylene and ortho-xylene, and recovering para-xylene and/or
ortho-xylene from the isomerate which is thereafter recycled
to the ethylbenzene recovery step.
4,435,609
ISOMERIZATION OF BUTENE-1 TO BUTENE-2 IN
ISOBUTYLENE
Wolfgang W. J. Gschwendtner, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Exxon Research & Engineering Co., Florham
Park, N.J.
Filed May 31, 1983, Ser. No. 499,351
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 8, 1982,
8216535
Int. CI.3 C07C 5/iO, 7/01
II.S. a. 585—670 13 Claims
1. A method of treating an isobutylene feed which contains
0.05 to 0.5 wt% of n-butene-1 to convert n-butene-1 to n-
butene-2 with at least 65% conversion and at most 0.3% hy-
drogenation, which method comprises passing the isobutylene
feed and hydrogen, in the gas phase, over a catalyst system
comprising a Group VIII metal, under isomerisation condi-
tions defined by a pressure of from 3 to 5 bar gauge, a tempera-
ture of from 40° to 50° C, a space velocity of from 150 to 300
vol/vol/hr at operating temperature and pressure, a mass
velocity of from 1.1 to 1.5 metric tons/mVhour and a hy-
drogen/isobutylene feed volume ratio of at most 2.5% at oper-
ating temperature and pressure.
ELECTRICAL
4,435,610
ELECTRET SEMICONDUCTOR SOLAR CELL
Martin M. Perlman, Montreal, and Andre Y. Filion, Greenfield
Park, both of Canada, assignors to Her Majesty the Queen in
right of Canada, as represented by the Minister of National
Defence, Ottawa, Canada
Filed Jan. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 458,019
Claims priority, application Canada, Sep. 7, 1982, 410894
Int. C\? HOIL 31/06, 31/18
U.S. a. 136-255 g Claim
CMMCOnLnCR
■Hi
1. An induced junction solar cell comprising a p-type semi-
conductor substrate; a thin oxide layer on a front surface of
said substrate; a grid-type rectifying contact on said oxide
layer; a charged polymer coating on said front surface and
rectifying contact; and an ohmic contact layer on the other
surface of said substrate.
4,435,611
CONDUCnVE PASTE
KenJi Ohsawa, Yokohama; Takao Ito; Shimetomo Fueki, both pt
Tokyo; Masayuki Osawa, and Kelji KuraU, both of Ataugi, all
of Japan, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 246,902, Mar. 23, 1981, abandoned. This
application Dec. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 452,611
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 24, 1980, 55-37152
Int. CI.3 H05K 1/09
U.S. a. 174-68.5 6 Claims
100
■^ We>jht 'A
1. A printed circuit board comprising:
an insulating substrate,
a first conductive pattern located on one surface of said
substrate,
a second conductive pattern insulated from said first conduc-
tive pattern, and
a conductive material electrically connecting said two con-
ductive patterns together, said conductive material being
formed of a conductive paste comprising a melt of gallium
and a metal element which forms a eutectic mixture with
gallium, said melt containing at least 20 weight parts of
said metal element for 100 weight parts of said melt, and a
metal powder which alloys with gallium uniformly dis-
persed in said melt, said metal powder being present in an
amount of between 10 and 50 weight parts for 100 weight
parts of said melt, the amount of said metal element and
said metal powder providing a solids content in said con-
ductive paste between 30 to 50% by weight at a predeter-
mined temperature, said conductive paste being alloyed
and hardened.
4,435,612
CABLE SPLICE HOUSING
Donald J. Smith, Woodland HilU, Calif., assignor to Communi-
cation Technology Corporation, Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,374
Int. a.' H02G 15/113
U.S. a. 174-92 7 oaim
1. A housing for an electrical cable splice, comprising:
a first shell of generally rectangular cross-section having
. parallel sides and a bottom defining a first central section
and opposed first end sections, with each of said first end
sections having a wall defining at least one channel lead-
ing to said first central section and defining an open slot
for receiving an electrical cable; and
a second shell of generally rectangular cross-section having
parallel sides and a bottom defining a second central sec-
tion and opposed second end sections, with each of said
second end sections having channel closure means for
sliding in said channels;
with the end sections of one of said shells having projecting
tabs and with the end sections of the other of said shells
having means defining abutments for said tabs;
with one said shells sliding over the other of said shells with
said parallel sides overlying each other bringing said cen-
tral sections together to form an open main compartment
defined by said overlying parallel sides, top and bottom,
and
with said channel closure means sliding part way in said
channels to form entrance passages for electrical cable and
with said tabs sliding in said end sections of said other shell
against said abutments closing said entrance passages for
blocking liquid flow from said main compartment,
with said tabs selectively breakable to provide open entrance
passages through said channels into said main compart-
ment.
4,435,613
SEMICONDUCTOR PACKING COMPOSITION FOR AN
UNDERSEA CABLE, A CABLE CONTAINING SAID
SUBSTANCE AND A METHOD OF MANUFACTURING
SUCH A CABLE
Jean Gaubert, St-Andre de Corey, France, assignor to Les Ca-
bles de Lyon, Qichy, France
Filed Apr, 20, 1982, Ser. No. 370,222
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 30, 1981, 81 08653
Int. a.J HOIB 7/14. 1/24. 13/22
U.S. a. 174-102 SC 7 Qaims
1. A semiconductor packing composition for packing a cable
core made of conductors disposed axially, with said conduc-
tors being surrounded by a polyethylene layer which includes
semiconductive material, then by a layer of insulating polyeth-
ylene, said packing composition comprising reticulated nitrile
367
368
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
rubber with carboxylic bonds, an epoxy resin, carbon black
with a specific surface area of at least 100 m^/g, an anti-oxidiz-
ing agent and a reticulation accelerator.
4. An undersea cable for transporting electric power, said
cable comprising a core made of conductors disposed axially, a
polyethylene layer surrounding said conductors, said layer
including a semiconductive material, a layer of insulating poly-
ethylene surrounding said polyethylene layer including said
semiconductive material and a packing composition disposed
between said conductors of the core and within said polyethyl-
ene layer including said semiconductive material, and wherein
said packing composition comprises reticulated nitrile rubber
with carboxylic bonds, an epoxy resin an anti-oxidizing agent,
carbon black with a specific surface area of at least 100 m^/g,
and a reticulation Accelerator.
6. A method of manufacturing an undersea cable for trans-
porting electrical power, said method comprising, in order, the
steps of:
(a) forming a core by disposing conductors axially;
(b) injecting between the conductors of the core a packing
composition made of a mixture of liquid nitrile rubber
with carboxylic bonds, an epoxy resin, carbon black
whose specific surface area is at least equal to 100 m^/g, an
anti-oxidizing agent, and a reticulation accelerator;
(c) surrounding the axially disposed conductors with a layer
of polyethylene including semiconductive material; and
(d) surrounding said layer of polyethylene including semi-
conductive material with a layer of insulating polyethyl-
ene, and wherein the step of forming the core by disposing
conductors axially comprises assembling the conductors
of the core to form a cord in a die, and wherein said
method further comprises the steps of applying a metal
screen around the layer of insulating polyethylene and
depositing said packing composition additionally within
said longitudinal corrugations between said metal screen
and said layer of insulating polyethylene.
4,435,614
ELONGATED PRINTED CIRCUIT FLEXIBLE CABLES
AND METHOD OF MAKING THE SAME
Robert R. McAusland, Seattle, Wash., assignor to Advanced
Technology Laboratories, Bellevue, Wash.
Filed Feb. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 470,692
Int. CV HOIB 7/04. 7/08. 13/00
U.S. CI. 174—117 PC 8 Claims
1. A long, flexible printed circuit board cable comprising:
(a) A pattern of cables on a flexible substrate, said pattern
comprising at least two substantially parallel, elongated
sections joined by a perpendicular connecting section and
separated by a slit;
(b) A fold through one of said elongated sections on a fold
line substantially perpendicular to said slit; and
(c) A fold through said connecting section along a second
fold line substantially perpendicular to satd first fold line
and substantially aligned with said slit.
6. The method of making a long, flexible printed circuit
board cable comprising:
(a) Forming a pattern of cables on a flexible substrate, said
pattern comprising at least two substantially parallel,
elongated sections joined by a perpendicular connecting
section;
(b) Forming a slit between said elongated sections by slitting
said pattern up to said connecting section;
(c) Folding one of said elongated sections on a fold line
substantially perpendicular to said slit; and
(d) Folding said connecting section along a second fold line
substantially perpendicular to said first fold line and sub-
stantially aligned with said slit.
4,435,615
SEALED END CAP MOUNTING FOR LAMINATED
INSULATOR CORE
Alexandre Kaczerginski, Bellerive sur Allier, and Michel Wil-
lem, Vichy, both of France, assignors to Societe Anonyme dite:
CERAVER, Paris, France
Filed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,343
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 5, 1981, 81 02205
Int. Cl.i-yOlB 17/02. 17/38
U.S. CI. 174—189 1 8 Claims
WTl-AOMESIVE
coniNO 27-
1. An insulator having an elongated core including a fiber
reinforced rod of organic material, a mass of hardened organic
substance formed on one end of the rod, a thimble encasing the
mass of organic substance, the thimble having a side wall of
corrugated profile in longitudinal cross section and a rim, and
a protective insulating sheath covering the rod and sealed to
the rim of the thimble, and a fixing cap having an internal
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
369
surface defining a core-receiving recess, an embedding sub-
stance fixed to the internal surface of the cap defining the
core-receiving recess, the thimble being slidably embedded in
said embedding substance, wherein the improvement com-
prises:
the mass of hardened organic substance dirpctly contacts the
inner surface of the corrugated side wall of the thimble to
form a rigid connection therewith, and
the outer surface of the corrugated side wall of the thimble
is coated with an anti-adhesive layer that does not adhere
to the embedding substance, so that the thimble, the mass
of hardened organic substance, and the one end of the rod
form a rigid assembly completely sealed to the insulating
sheath and resistant to large tensile forces applied between
the fixing cap and the other end of the core.
4,435,616
GRAPHICAL DATA ENTRY APPARATUS
Victor B. Kley, 1119 Park Hills Rd., Berkeley, Calif. 94708
Filed Aug. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 296,238
Int. Cl.^ G08C 21/00
U.S. CI. 178-18 ,3 Claims
55 45
2. A graphical entry device comprising an electrically in-
slated substrate; and a patterned layer on the substrate wherein
the patterned layer includes
a generally rectangular resistive graphic area with four
edges and four corners, each of the four edges defining a
midportion separating a pair of spaced joining portions
extending from the midportion to the respective corners,
four pairs conductor strips spaced from and extending along
the respective pairs of joining portions,
four pairs of resistive edge connecting means joining the
respective pairs of conductor strips to the respective pairs
of joining portions, said resistive edge connecting means
each having an effective resistance parallel to the respec-
tive joining portions substantially greater than that of the
graphic area and the respective conductor strips, and
four conductors connected to the respective midportions for
providing analog-to-digital converter reference voltages.
4,435,617
SPEECH-CONTROLLED PHONETIC TYPEWRITER OR
DISPLAY DEVICE USING TWO-TIER APPROACH
David T. Griggs, 5128 S. Rolling Rd., Baltimore, Md. 21227
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,717
Int. CI.^ GIOL 1/00
U.S. CI. 381-44 28 Claims
1. A two-tier method of converting an audio input, compris-
ing words maade up of various sounds in a spoken sequence,
into a visible form, comprising a sequence of corresponding
phonemes, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) breaking down the spoken sequence of sounds into syl-
labits, each syllabit comprising a group of classes of
sounds;
(b) grouping the syllabits into syllabit groups, each syllabit
group defining corresponding possible words;
(c) providing, for each of said possible words corresponding
to each syllabit group, a respective skeletal sequence of
phonemes comprising a corresponding grouping of pho-
nemes;
(d) determining, for each distinctive syllabit group, the pho-
nemes occurring therein so as to develop an input se-
quence of phonemes for each syllabit group;
(e) comparing the input sequence of phonemes for each
syllabit group with the respective skeletal sequence of
phonemes of each of the corresponding possible words so
as to determine, with reference to the phonemes in each
grouping of phonemes, which possible word has a skeletal
sequence of phonemes which contains, in a given se-
quence, phonemes all of which are found, in said given
sequence, in the input sequence of phonemes, thereby
identifying each of said words of said audio input; and
(0 providing said identified words of said audio input in said
visible form.
4,435,618
ADJACENT STATION INTERFERENCE REJECTING
CIRCUIT
Masakazu Fujishima, Hamamatsu, Japan, assignor to Nippon
Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha, Shizuoka, Japan
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 341,080
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 28, 1981, 56-11142
Int. CI.' H04H 5/00
U.S. CI. 381-7 6 Claims
y
— loouriu
-7t)-
^
r
-tBClgQV^ : ..
WEM^
1. An adjacent station interference rejecting circuit of a
receiver comprising:
a cancel signal forming circuit coupled to an AM detector
and, responsive to a beat signal resulting from interference
between a receiving station signal and an adjacent station
signal and contained in an AM detected signal to produce
a cancel signal which is synchronized with the beat signal;
and
a mixing circuit connected to receive the AM detected
signal of said AM detector and the cancel signal to com-
bine the detected output signal and the cancel signal to
remove the beat signal contained in the AM detected
signal.
2. An FM/AM radio receiver comprising:
370
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6. 1984
reception band switching means for switching the reception
band of said radio receiver between FM and AM bands;
FM receiving circuit means which is enabled to demodulate
an FM broadcast signal when said reception band switch-
ing means is switched to the FM band;
AM receiving circuit means which is enabled to demodulate
an AM broadcast signal when said reception band switch-
ing means is switched to the AM band;
first circuit means coupled to outputs of said FM receiving
circuit means and AM receiving circuit means for passing
a pilot signal contained in a detected output signal of said
FM receiving circuit means when said reception band
switching means is switched to the FM band and passing
a beat signal resulting from interference between a receiv-
ing station signal and an adjacent station signal when said
reception band switching means is switched to the AM
band;
PLL circuit means coupled to the output of said first circuit
means and including a voltage-controlled oscillator hav-
ing its free running frequency selected under the control
of said reception band switching means;
cancel signal forming circuit means coupled to the output of
said first circuit means and responsive to output signals
from said PLL circuit means to form, when receiving an
FM stereo broadcast signal, a pilot signal cancellation
signal having a frequency, a phase and an amplitude neces-
sary for calcelling a pilot signal contained in an FM de-
tected output signal from said FM receiving circuit means
and produce, when receiving an AM broadcast signal, a
beat signal cancellation signal having a frequency, a phase
and an amplitude necessary for cancelling the beat signal
contained in an AM detected output signal of said AM
receiving circuit means;
a mixing circuit coupled to said AM receiving circuit means,
FM receiving circuit means and cancel signal forming
circuit, for combining, when receiving the FM stereo
broadcast signal, the detected output signal of said FM
receiving circuit means and an output signal of said cancel
signal forming circuit means to cancel the pilot signal
contained in the FM detected output signal and combin-
ing, when receiving the AM broadcast signal, the detected
output signal of said AM receiving circuit means and the
output signal from said cancel signal forming circuit
means to cancel the beat signal contained in the AM
detected output signal.
4,435,619
SWITCHING NETWORK INTERFAONG
TELEPHONE-EXCHANGE EQUIPMENT WITH
TWO-SUBSCRIBER PARTY LINE
Ennio Bonaparte, Seregno, and Virgilio Mosca, Milan, both of
Italy, assignors to Italtel Societa Italiana Telecomunicazioni
S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,479
Claims priority, application Italy, Oct. 9, 1980, 25213 A/80
Int. a.^ H04M 3/14. 3/16
U.S. a. 179—17 R 14 Qaims
1. In a telephone system wherein an electronic exchange
communicates with two subscriber sets via a line loop with a
first and a second conductor respectively including a first and
a second line relay, each conductor being normally connected
to an associated set via contacts closed in the unoperated state
of the line relay in the other conductor, each set including a
hook switch operable by the subscriber to ground the associ-
ated conductor, each line relay in an operated state connecting
the associated set across said line loop to the exclusion of the
opposite set,
the combination therewith of a switching network interfac-
ing said line loop with call-control circuitry at the ex-
change, said switching network comprising:
a line transformer having first and second subscriber-side
windings respectively in series with said second conduc-
tors and further having an exchange-side winding con-
nected across a voice path;
first and second high-ohmic resistors and first and second
low-ohmic resistors in said first and second conductors in
series with said first and second subscriber-side windings,
respectively;
first and second line-monitoring means respectively con-
nected across said first and second low-ohmic resistors;
first and second selection relays respectively connecting said
first and second conductors to a source of operating po-
tential in a normal unoperated condition thereof whereby
a grounding of either of said conductors by the hook
switch of the associated set causes a current flow insuffi-
cient to operate the respective line relay but sufficient to
be detected by the respective line-monitoring means for
the emission of a respective engagement signal;
first and second gating means responsive to first and second
scanning pulses from said circuitry, respectively ad-
dressed to said first and second conductors, for alterna-
tively passing a first engagement signal from said first
line-monitoring means and a second engagement signal
from said second line-monitoring means to said circuitry
as an indication of an off-hook condition of the respective
subscriber set, said scanning pulses being normally gener-
ated at a relatively slow recurrence rate but being acceler-
ated by said circuitry to a relatively fast recurrence rate in
response to said off-hook condition, such acceleration
being accompanied by an assignment of a time slot for
communication with said voice path to the set found to be
in off-hook condition;
first and second holding means respectively connected be-
tween said first and second gating means and said first and
second selection relays for respectively operating said
selection relays in response to a scanning of the respective
engagement signal at said relatively fast rate, operation of
said first and second selection relays respectively short-
circuiting said first and second high-ohmic resistors with
resulting intensification of current flov^ and operation of
said first and second line relays, respectively;
first inhibiting means responsive to an isolation command
emitted by said circuitry coiicurrently with a first scan-
ning pulse for blocking said first gating means in the pres-
ence of said first engagement signal and in the absence of
activity in a time slot assigned to said first conductor,
thereby restoring said first selection relay to its unoper-
ated condition with resulting release of said first line relay;
and
second inhibiting means responsive to an isolation command
emitted by said circuitry concurrently with a second
scanning pulse for blocking said second gating means in
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
371
liL^/.T«T^ ?^ ?''' *^u°"'* engagement signal and in the ances from the telephone line will pass through the same refer-
c^duCor Thlr k' '" '^.' '""' """i *''■«"? '° '^•'^ "^'^""^ ^"'^^ '<^^«' «» 'he same instants .n t.me, means fo generating m
conductor, thereby restorine said second select nn relav - . , . ■"»•»"» ■"« Kciiciauiit;, m
to its unoperated condition trreSingrdearof^^^^ esponse to excursions of said signals across the reference
second linVrelay. rcsuiung release oi said level, trains of pulses having a duration less than the period of
4,435,620
DIAL PULSE DELAY CIRCUIT
Wmiam A. Fechalos, Naperville, and Carl J. Stehman, La-
Grange, both oflM, assignors to Rockwell International Cor-
poration, Dowifers Grove, 111.
Filed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,909
Int. a.3 H04M 3/22; H04Q 1/32
U.S. CI. 179-18 EB 12 Claims
CLOCK
LOW
ONDER
BITS
-/rffll^T WHITE
READ/
k WRITE
)CONTR(.
'TIMING
/
TO DIAL PULSE
REGISTER
VIA NETWORK
REM
4,435,621
SPEECH DIRECTION DETECTION CIRCUITS FOR
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION DEVICES
BloomHeld J. Warman, 67, King Harold's Way, Bexleyheath,
Kent, England
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,273
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 30, 1980,
8014263
Int. CV H04M 9/08
U.S. a. 179-81 B 11 Claims
1. A speech direction detecting circuit for a telephone com-
munication device, comprising means for detecting a.c. speech
signals across two impedances of an impedance network lo-
cated in a speech transmission path between the output of an
amplifier and a telephone line, said impedance network having
a configuration such that the said two impedances of said
network are effectively connected to present a load both to
signals transmitted from the output of said amplifier towards
said telephone line and to signals received from said telephone
line, in such a manner that voice frequency signals developed
across said impedances from the output of said amplifier will be
phase displaced relatively to one another so that the respective
signals pass through a corresponding reference level of the
signal waveform at instants relatively displaced in time
whereas voice frequency signals developed across said imped-
I — — 1 J T — *"^~'*~r
0«,
Mi
0*1
-II I <
-2-
"■'^
12
J
7r7n
:i f ^M I*'
1. A dial pulse delay circuit for use in combination with a
common control telephone switching system having a plurality
of trunks, a plurality of registers, and a switching network for
providing selective connections between said trunks and regis-
ters, one register of which is assigned to receive dial pulse
information received by way of one of said plurality of trunks,
comprising:
means for delaying dial pulse information for a period during
which one of said registers is assigned and connected to
receive said dial pulse information, a different one of said
means for delaying associated with each one of said plurality
of trunks;
means for storing said dial pulse information;
means for transferring said stored dial pulse information to the
assigned register after its connection to receive said informa-
tion is effected; and
means for sampling for cyclically producing dial pulse infor-
mation amplitude data at a rate of at least twice the expected
dial pulse information rate.
JTT-
^
'i
\'Jin
wr
\ IK
C3 .
r
<"«
J
P3-I
iJ4*^
«IS
^^
tH^
n.
h"
^ I WW
r I
Ir
n«
^i^.-^^^=i
n
relative time displacement of said phase displaced signals, and
a comparator arranged to compare said respective trains of
pulses and to provide an output signal when the pulses of said
respective trains overlap in time.
4,435,622
LATCHING RELAY HOLD CIRCUIT FOR A
TELEPHONE INSTRUMENT
Gary Grantland, Hartselle, and Eduard F. B. Boeckmann,
Huntsville, both of Ala., assignors to GTE Automatic Electric
Inc., Northlake, III.
Filed Nov. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 437,932
Int. a.} H04M 1/00
U.S. a. 179—81 R 9 Claims
1. A hold circuit for use with a telephone instrument, said
telephone instrument connected to a subscriber line and a
source of line voltage, said hold circuit comprising:
subscriber line seizing means, including first and second
leads arranged to connect across said subscriber line, said
first lead including a normally open contact rendering said
seizing means normally disconnected from said subscriber
line;
line voltage storage means connected across said subscriber
line through a normally open hold switch, said hold
switch manually closed charging said line voltage storage
means to said line voltage; and,
contact activating means connected between said line volt-
age storage means and said seizing means second lead,
372
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
whereby said line voltage storage means discharges
through said contact activating means latching said
handle being adapted for reciprocation about a partial arcuate
path between "on" and "ofT' positions, said handle bein^^
adapted to have an opening therethrough in a direction per-
pendicular to said path, said lock ofT lock on comprising a
unitary member formed from a metallic sheet comprising
a first handle engaging portion adapted to be inserted into
said opening of said handle;
a second handle engaging portion, joined to said Hrst portion
by a bight to form a U-shaped structure, for engagement
with a surface of said handle which is in exposed adja-
cency to said dependent arcuate portion;
contact closed, connecting said subscriber line seizing
means across said subscriber line and placing said sub-
scriber line into a hold condition.
4,435,623
TELEPHONE GUARD DEVICE
Michael J. Valentine, 37 Hillside Rd., Penfield, N.Y. 14526
Filed Nov. 16, 1979, Ser. No. 95,012
Int. a.3 H04M 1/66
U.S. a. 179—189 R 11 Claims
1. A device for selectively maintaining a telephone set hav-
ing at least one switch hook button which is released when a
handset is lifted off its cradle in a first condition to go off hook
when the handset is lifted and in a second condition to remain
on hook even though the handset is lifted, said device compris-
ing a body having mounting means for retaining said body in
fixed position on said telephone adjacent to said cradles, at
least one blade slidably mounted in said body and movable
laterally between retracted and extended positions out of and
into blocking relationship with said switch hook button, and
means including a manually actuable slide movably mounted in
said body and coupled to said blade for selectively extending
and retracting said blade to selectively provide said second and
first conditions, respectively.
flat spring means coupled to a part of one side of said second
portion by an angular bend so that said flat spring means
is engageable with said dependent arcuate portion and in
abutting relation with said case at one of said edges of said
slot; and
a flange, coupled to said flat spring means proximal to said
bight, bent outwardly away from said housing so as to
facilitate manual removal of said lock off-lock on from
said handle.
4,435,625
PNEUMATICALLY OPERABLE SWITCH UNIT f6r
MONITORING TIRE PRESSURE
Emil Buchschmid, Rosstal, Fed. Rep. of Germany; Rainer Bur-
kel, Le Chesnay; Jean Danamps, Asnieres, both of France;
Anton Frenznick, Nuremberg, and Giinther Stradtmann, Ans-
bach, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert
Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 353,966
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany) Mar. 10,
1981, 3108998 '
Int. CV HOIH 35/00
U.S. a. 200—61.22 7 Claims
30a 16 20 I9,2LI7,I8
4,435,624
LOCK OFF-LOCK ON
Luis F. Sepulveda, Fajardo, P.R., assignor to Challenger Carib-
bean Corporation, Canovanas; Challenger Products Corpora-
tion, Rio Piedras, both of, P.R. and Commander Electrical
Equipment, Inc., Scarborough, Canada
Filed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 421,754
Int. a.3 HOIH 9/24
U.S. a. 200—42 T 10 Claims
1. A lock off-lock on for a handle of an electrical circuit
breaker, the circuit breaker including a housing comprising a
case of suitable insulating material having a slot formed therein
including defined opposing edges and an insulative cover for
engaging said case, said handle being manually movable and
pivotally mounted within said case and extending outwardly
from said slot with a dependent arcuate portion of said handle
in proximal relationship with the interior of said slot, said
28 35
1. A pneumatically operated switch unit for monitoring
vehicle tire pressure comprising a metallic conducting switch
housing (16) capable of being inserted into a bore in a vehicle
tire rim, an electrically conducting membrane (17) with the
periphery thereof fastened to said switch housing on the side of
said switch housing facing into the tire interior, said membrane
closing off a gas-fllled reference pressure chamber of said
switch housing into which chamber there extends a switch
contact insulatedly mounted in said switch housing, by pass-
through insulation means, in such a position that it makes
contact with said membrane when gas pressure in said chamber
is at a reference pressure value and the air pressure in said tire
exceeds a predetermined threshold value and is put out of
contact with said membrane when the pressure in said tire falls
below said threshold value, and circuit elements constituting a
resonant circuit with said switch contact when the latter is in
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
373
contact with said membrane, said switch unit also incorporat-
ing the improvement which comprises the provision of:
a cup-shaped shell (29) of insulating material capable of
withstanding temperature changes and gradients, exter-
nally threaded for being screwed into said bore in said lire
rim with its open end facing the interior space of said lire,
and within which said metallic switch housing (16) and
said resonant circuit (22,23) are firmly secured, said metal-
lic switch housing (16) electrically connecting said con-
ducting membrane (17) with said resonant circuit elements
and being held within said cup-shaped shell (29) in a posi-
tion in which said metallic switch housing (16) and said
conducting membrane (17) do not project beyond said
bore into said tire interior.
ment into abutment with said movable stop at said other loca-
tion to actuate said switch.
4,435,626
PRESSURE RESPONSIVE SWITCH ACTUATING
MECHANISM
Christopher J. Coffin, Milton, England, assignor to Alan
Cobham Engineering Limited. London, England
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,796
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 21, 1980,
8009626; Jan. 27, 1981, 8102443
Int. CI.' HOIH 35/40
U.S. CI. 200-81.9 R 17 Claims
1. A pressure responsive switch actuating mechanism includ-
ing a movable actuating element which is movable between an
inoperative location and an operative location to actuate the
switch, and a pressure responsive system including a movable
stop against which the movable actuating element is normally
urged, the pressure responsive system being operable to con-
trol movement of said movable actuating element by control-
ling location of the movable stop in accordance with the fluid
pressure to which said movable stop is subjected, there being a
time delay mechanism which operates to delay movement of
said movable actuating element following movement of said
movable stop in response to certain pressure changes, wherein
the improvement comprises a bistable mechanism responsive
to pressure of a flow of fluid, said bistable mechanism compris-
ing a movable wall having one side to which the fluid pressure
is subjected is subjected, and a plurality of links movable by
said movable wall which causes movement of the stop, said
mechanism having only two stable conditions and which
moves rapidly to either of those stable conditions when dis-
placed from one to the other one, the bistable mechanism
including a compression spring which bias said bistable mecha-
nism to one of its two stable conditions so that the pressure
responsive system is set in one condition in which it locates
said movable stop in one location when the working fluid
pressure is within a range bounded by ambient pressure and a
predetermined switching pressure even when the fluid pres-
sure ij .hanging and is convertible rapidly to another condition
so as to move said movable stop rapidly to another location
when the fluid pressure reaches said predetermined switching
pressure at which said yieldable biassing means yields whereby
said movable actuating element is released for delayed move-
4,435,627
HIGH TENSION CIRCUIT BREAKER
Not-Duri Barth, Oberehrendingen, and Osvin Gaupp, Wettin-
gen, both of Switzerland, assignors to BBC Brown, Boveri A
Company, Limited, Baden, Switzerland
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,597
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 18, 1980.
5512/80
Int. CV HOIH 33/59
U.S. CI. 200-148 R 7 Qaims
1. A high tension circuit breaker comprising:
a stationary first switching mechanism;
a second switching mechanism axially. movable in a first
axial direction;
a first and second arcing contact operatively connected to
said movable switching mechanism and said stationary
switching mechanism, respectively, and wherein said first
contact normally pressingly engages said second contact;
means for supplying gas under pressure;
nozzle means communicating with said gas supply means
formed in said movable switch mechanism and terminat-
ing adjacent said first and second contacts for communi-
cating expanded gas from said supply gas to the point of
pressing engagement of said first and second contact upon
cutting out of said gas supply means wherein said nozzle
means comprises insulation material; and
means for shifting said second contact in a second axial
direction opposite said first axial direction of movement of
said movable switching mechanism upon cutting out of
said gas supply means.
\
4,435,628
SEED HEATING MICROWAVE APPLIANCE
Robert F. Bowen, Burlington; George Freedman; Wesley W.
Teich, both of Wayland; Thomas J. Martel, North Reading,
and E. Eugene Eves, II, Nabnasset, all of .Mass., assignors to
Raytheon Company, Lexington, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 865,824. Dec. 30. 1977. Pat. No. 4,158,760.
This application Apr. 11, 1979, Ser. No. 29,227
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 19,
1996, has been disclaimed.
Int. C\? H05B 6/80
U.S. a. 219—10.55 M 15 Qaims
1. The method of popping kernels using microwave energy,
comprising the steps of:
bunching said kernels together in a clump;
radiating said clump with microwave energy; and
374
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
directing unpopped kernels displaced from said clump back portion forming a stud delivery passage disengageably con-
to the region of said clump while continuing to radiate nected to a tube in a space in the housing adjacent the stud feed
c^ZZ^^^^2ZZZZ^
n n t» n I f n
> " } i u a
said microwave energy until a substantial portion of said means, and means for feeding a succession of studs through the
kernels are popped. stud delivery passage.
4,435,629
COMBINATION HEATING APPARATUS
Kimio Ishimaru, Osaka, and Kenichi Abe, Omiya, both of Japan,
assignors to Osaka Gas Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,310
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 22, 1980, 55-114819
Int. Cl.^ F26B i/i4: H05B 6/64
U.S. CI. 219—10.55 A 5 Qaims
1. A heating apparatus comprising a microwave heating
means having microwave leakage-type waveguides, each
waveguide having a plurality of microwave emitting openings
extending along the advancing direction of microwave radia-
tion, said waveguides being disposed in parallel with one an-
other; radiation heating means having heat conducting mem-
bers disposed along upper and lower surfaces of the micro-
wave leakage-type waveguides; and high frequency heating
means utilizing said microwave leakage-type waveguides as
electrodes.
4,435,630
STUD WELDING APPARATUS
Ernst G. Jordan, Menden, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Firma Obo Bettermann OHG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,065
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 16,
1980, 3014583
Int. a? B23K 9/20
U.S. a. 219—98 22 Oaims
1. A stud welding apparatus comprising an elongated hous-
ing, tubular member extending axially therethrough to form a
stud inlet having a bore and which tubular member is fastened
at one end in the housing at which end is fastened a stud feed
means, tongues fastened at the other end of the tubular member
and tapering toward each other under spring tension, a stud
clamping sleeve behind the tongues and having a tubular shank
4,435,631
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING THE
LENGTH OF \N ELECTRICAL ARC IN AN ARC
GENERATING MACHINE
Michel G. Drouet, St-Bruno, and Francois Nadeau, Montreal,
both of Canada, assignors to Hydro Quebec, Montreal, Can*
ada
Filed Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 331,242
Claims priority, application Canada, May 19, 1981, 377808
Int. a? B23K 9/10
U.S. a. 219—124.02 14 Qaims
1. A method for controlling the length of an electrical arc
generated in an arc generating machine, comprising the step>s
of:
a. detecting an acoustical signal generated by the electrical
arc of said arc generating machine, said acoustical signal
being directly proportional to the actual length of the arc
and generating an electrical output signal in response to
said detected signal:
b. subtracting from the amplitude of said electrical output
signal a reference amplitude corresponding to the level of
sound of a desired arc length, thereby producing an elec-
trical difference signal proportional to the difference be-
tween the actual length and the desired length of the arc,
said difference signal being positive if the arc is too long
and negative if the arc is too short; and
c. adjusting the length of said electrical arc by increasing
said length if the difference signal is negative and reducing
said length if the difference signal is positive until the
difference signal is zero.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
375
4,435,632
THREE PHASE SQUARE WAVE WELDING POWER
SUPPLY
Robert L. Risberg, New Beriin, Wis., assignor to Hobart Broth-
ers Company, Troy, Ohio
Filed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,531
Int. a.i B23K 9/09
U.S. a. 219-130.51 15 Ctaims
/"
^J!^
./I
./H
W^U'*
CONOUCTION MTH
ACTrVKTON CMCUIT
r
n
104
1. A controllable current supply for generating an alternat-
ing polarity square wave current for a welding arc comprising:
a power input for receiving three phase alternating current
power;
a power control circuit connected in series with said power
input and said welding arc, said power control circuit
comprising:
three straight polarity conducting paths each comprising a
phase related unidirectional input switching device
connected to the corresponding phase of said power
input, a common unidirectional output switching device
connected to said arc and common inductor means
connected between said input switching device and said
output switching device of each of said straight polarity
paths; and
three reverse polarity conducting paths each comprising a
phase related unidirectional input switching device
connected to the corresponding phase of said power
input and a common unidirectional output switching
device connected to said arc, said inductor means also
being common to said reverse polarity conducting paths
and connected between said input switching device and
said output switching device of each of said reverse
polarity paths such that current flow is in the same
direction through said inductor means whether a
straight polarity conducting path is active or a reverse
polarity conducting path is active;
path switching means synchronized with three phase power
received on said power input for controlling said power
control circuit to activate said conducting paths at defined
non-zero voltage points of said three phase power; and
timing means synchronized with three phase power received
on said power input for enabling said path switching
meai^to activate said conducting paths to conduct repeti-
tive se^HgiTces of independent numbers of half cycles of
each polarity of said three phase power.
parent to the energy of said source, the improvement compris-
ing:
means, effective during radiation of energy by said source,
for simultaneously pressing the entire image-bearing sur-
4,435,633
FLASH FUSING APPARATUS
Walter A. Stryjewskl, Hilton, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,961
Int. a.J H05B 3/02. 1/00
U.S. a. 219—216 8 Claims
1. In apparatus for fusing images formed of pigmented ther-
moplastic resin marking particles to a receiver member, such
apparatus including a hollow member for contacting on its
peripheral surface a marking particle image on the surface of
such receiver member and a source of radiant energy, capable
of at least partially melting such particles, mounted within said
hollow member, said hollow member being substantially trans-
face of a receiver member into full and intimate contact
with said peripheral surface of said hollow member to
lower the particle/receiver member boundary thermal
resistance and enhance particle How during fusing of the
image to said receiver member.
4,435,634
THERMAL PRINTER EDGE COMPENSATION
Frank J. Horiander, Lexington, Ky., assignor to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 452,347
Int. a.3 B41J 3/20: H05B 3/00
U.S. a. 219-216 24 Claims
1. Circuitry for driving electrodes in selected combinations
comprising:
a plurality of said electrodes positioned side-by-side;
separate, current-drive circuits, each connected to drive one
of said electrodes, each said current-drive circuit having
one point connected to carry a first voltage, a first resis-
tance element, and a second point, said resistance clement
being connected across said first point and said second
point, said second point being driven to a second voltage
and being connected to drive a first electrode when said
current-drive circuit is selected and being isolated from
voltages other than said first voluge and disconnected
from said first electrode when said current-drive circuit is
not selected, and
a second resistance element connected across the second
point of one of said current-drive circuits and the second
point of a second current-drive circuit which drives an
electrode contiguous to the electrode driven by said one
current-drive circuit.
376
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,635
HEAT BARRIER FOR DESOLDERER AND HEATER
ASSEMBLY
Oscar E. Parker, Glen Bumie, Md., assignor to Pace Incorpo-
rated, Laurel, Md.
Filed Apr. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 366,002
Int. aj B23K 3/02: H05B 3/06
U.S. a. 219—227 5 Qaims
1. An improved thermal barrier for rigidly connecting an
elongate heater assembly with an elongate handle assembly,
each assembly having a longitudinal axis which is substantially
coincident with the axis of the other assembly, said heater
assembly including a generally circular mounting plate and
said handle assembly including spacers thereon, said thermal
barrier comprising:
a plurality of slotted spacer portions, equiangularly disposed
around said longitudinal axis, comprising a means for con-
necting said thermal barrier to said mounting plate;
a plurality of generally arcuate, coplanar mounting sections,
equiangularly disposed around said longitudinal axis and
axially displaced from said mounting plate comprising a
means for connecting said thermal barrier to said handle
assembly spacers; and
means, connecting each of said spacer portions to an adjacent
mounting section, for defining an indirect conduction path
between each of said connecting means.
4,435,636
DESOLDERING TOOL
Alan L. Royston, Canterbury, Australia, assignor to Royel Inter-
national Pty. Ltd., Victoria, Australia
Filed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No, 351,305
Claims priority, application Australia, Feb. 23, 1981, PE7718
Int. a.3 B23K 3/04; B25G 1/10; H05B 1/00
U.S. a. 219—230 12 Claims
!:- t'~t « -« 0 (6
F—
1. A desoldering tool having an elongate handle; an elongate
housing defining a bore therethrough, and extending from one
end of the handle; a collecting chamber having at least an inlet
portion thereof within the handle, which portion defines an
inlet to the chamber; a heating bit assembly having a hollow
heating bit, and a bit holder; and a connector associated with
said chamber for connecting the tool to means for developing
suction in the chamber; the holder having a body portion,
around which is provided an electric heating element connect-
able to a source of electric current for heating the body portion
and bit, and an elongate tubular portion; the holder being
mounted longitudinally in the bore of the housing with its body
portion adjacent the end of said bore remote from the handle
and with the tubular portion terminating in the chamber inlet,
and the holder defining a longitudinal passage therethrough
with the bit received in the end of the passage at said remote
end of the housing so that the bit is in communication with the
chamber; the tubular portion of the bit holder being of lesser
wall thickness than the body portion, and the holder further
including an imperforate sleeve through which the tubular
portion extends and which has one end mounted on the body
portion and its other end extending into the chamber inlet so as
to enclose, and to define around the tubular portion, an insulat-
ing air space extending along the length of the tubular portion;
said lesser wall thickness of the tubular portion and the air
space enabling substantially the full length of the tubular por-
tion to be maintained at a temperature above the liquidus
temperature for solder melted by the bit during a desoldering
operation, which heat loss from the body portion to the tubular
portion such as to impair desoldering, so that the melted solder
can be drawn through the tubular portion and into the cham-
ber prior to solidification.
4,435,637
APPARATUS FOR HEATING A SHEET- OR WEB-LIKE
MATERIAL
Jacob de Vries, Insulindeweg 10, 1462 MJ Middenbeemster,
Netherlands
Continuation of Ser. No. 244,510, Mar. 16, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 210,382, Nov. 26,
1980. This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 428,551
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Apr. 2, 1980,
8001944
Int. C1.3 H05B 1/02
U.S. CI. 219—358 7 Claims
1. Apparatus for heating a sheet- or web-like material during
its transport through a processing machme, comprising at least
one infrared heating panel facing the path of transport of the
material and connected to an ac -source through a semiconduc-
tor switching means, a controlling circuit for delivering igni-
tion impulses to the semiconductor switching means, wherein
the ignition time within each half period of the supply voltage
is determined by a control signal provided by a control means
to the controlling circuit, which can be switched on and off by
a monitoring circuit coupled to a detector means reacting to
the transport speed, wherein said monitoring circuit comprises
two or more zone detector means reacting to the presence of
the material within a given zone extending transversely to the
transport direction of the material on either side of the desired
path of transport, and an AND-input circuit and/or an OR-
input circuit, said input circuits controlling a switching means
through a time-delay means for switching the controlling
circuit on and off, wherein the controlling circuit is switched
off if the material leaves said zone.
4,435,638
ELECTRIC RANGE SURFACE ELEMENT
Donald J. Simon, Indianapolis, and Thomas R. Field, Nobles-
ville, both of Ind., assignors to Jenn-Air Corporation, Indian-
apolis, Ind.
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,582
Int. a.3 F27D 11/02
U.S. a. 219—460 7 Qaims
1. In an electric range or the like having a top cooking
surface defining an opening having ledge means therein, an
electric surface unit for heating a utensil having a large convex
bottom surface by conduction comprising:
\
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
377
support means supported by said ledge means and having an
elevated support surface disposed substantially above said
top surface and including a generally spherical portion;
heating element means formed in a spiral pattern to a gener-
ally spherical radius and adapted to be supported in a
generally predetermined non-deformable posture on said
elevated support surface, said support means positioning
the underside of said heating element means spaced verti-
cally above said top surface for permitting a cooling cross
flow of air therebetween, said heating element means
being operable for providing a heat conducting relation-
ship with a complementary configured utensil when in an
operative condition and for being supported by said sup-
port means with the large convex bottom surface extend-
ing radially beyond the limits of said heating element
means; and
a perforate element generally enclosing said heating element
means and the vertical space between said heating element
means and said top surface, said perforate element permit-
ting airflow into and out of said air space while effectively
shielding the adjacent top surfaces from radiation heating
whereby when said heating element means is in an opera-
tive condition heat is provided for said utensil while heat-
ing of the subjacent top surface is inhibited.
4,435,639
ELECTRICAL DEVICES WITH WATER-BLOCKING
INSULATION
Boris Gurevich, Mountain View, Calif., assignor to Raychem
Corporation, Menlo Park, Calif.
Filed Sep. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 418,354
Int. a.3 H05B 3/56
U.S. a. 219—544 7 Oaims
(^^H:Jrzk
1. An elongated heater which comprises:
(a) an elongate electrical heating element;
(b) an inner waterproof electrically insulating jacket sur-
rounding the electrical element; and
(c) an outer waterproof electrically insulating jacket sur-
rounding but spaced apart from the inner jacket so that
water entering the space between the jackets can wick
along the heater between the jackets,
the heater comprising, at at least one intermediate point along
its length, a water-blocking section through which the electri-
cal element and the inner jacket pass without interruption but
in which the outer jacket has been removed to provide an
exposed length of the inner jacket, said water-blocking section
further comprising
(d) a waterproof electrically insulating sleeve which sur-
rounds the exposed length of the inner jacket and the ends
of the outer insulating jacket, and
(e) a sealing material which secures the sleeve around the
inner and outer jackets and provides a waterproof seal
between the sleeve and around part only of the exposed
length of the inner jacket.
4,435,640
MULTIFUNCTIONAL INSTRUMENT FOR
DETERMINING THE POSITION AND COURSE OF THE
SUN, THE INCLINATION FOR MAXIMAL INSOLATION
OF A PLANE AND THE CORRESPONDENCE FROM
SOLAR AND CONVENTIONAL TIME
Renato Micheletto, Via Asiago 34, Conegliano, luly
Filed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,962
Qaims priority, application Italy, Apr. 21, 1981, 35763/81[U]
Int. a? G06C 3/00
U.S. a. 235—78 M 7 Qaims
1. An instrument for determining the position and course of
the sun, the inclination for maximum insolation of a planar
surface, and the relationship between solar time and conven-
tional time, said instrument comprising:
a fixed first planar member having a center and a surface
having thereon, concentrically with respect to said center:
a circle;
a straight line passing through said center and dividing
said circle into first and second semicircles, said straight
line being representative of the horizon;
said first semicircle having therein plural straight lines
parallel to said horizon and representative of angular
altitude therefrom, and plural elliptical lines intersect-
ing said plural straight lines and representative of angu-
lar azimuth along said horizon;
said second semicircle having therein an orthogonal pro-
jection of said plural straight lines and said plural ellipti-
cal lines;
along a semicircumference outwardly of said second semi-
circle, indicia representative of south and north latitude
values;
along a ring outwardly of said circle, indicia representa-
tive of conventional daily time; and
along a segment of said ring, indicia representative of
east-west longitude values;
a pivotable, transparent second planar member having a
center and a surface having thereon:
1040 O.G.— 1.^
378
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a straight line passing through said center of said second
planar member and forming a median line representa-
tive of the 6AM-6PM time period;
plural straight lines parallel to said median line and repre-
sentative of the equinoxes, the solstices and days of the
year therebetween; and
plural curved lines concentric to said center of said second
planar member and intersecting said plural straight lines
thereof, said plural curved lines being representative of
solar times of the day;
a pivotable, transparent third planar member having a center
and a surface having thereon:
a ring having therearound indicia the same as said indicia
along said ring on said surface of said first planar mem-
ber and representative of solar time; and
at a position outwardly of said ring, a curve representative
of the time egation during the course of the year; and
said first, second and third planar members being assembled
for relative coaxial rotation about said respective centers,
with said second planar member being positioned between
and in contact with said first and third planar surfaces.
4,435,642
ION MASS SPECTROMETER
Marcia M. Neugebauer, Altadena; Douglas R. Clay, La Cre-
scenta; Bruce E. Goldstein, Pasadena, and Raymond Gold-
stein, Monrovia, all of Calif., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the United SUtes National Aero-
nautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 361,216
Int. a.J BOID 59/48; HOIJ 49/26
VS. a. 250—296 6 Oaims
4,435,641
INSPECTION APPARATUS FOR INSPECHNG AN
OBJECT TO DETERMINE WHETHER OR NOT IT
CONTAINS AN ABNORMALTTY, DEFECT OR THE LIKE
Yoshida HiOime, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Hiyime Industries
Ltd., Japan
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,652
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 15, 1980, 55-144046
Int. a.3 HOIJ 40/14
UJS. a. 250—223 B 8 Qaims
4i-W
1. An inspection apparatus for inspecting an object to deter-
mine whether or not it contains an abnormality, defect or the
like, comprising:
(a) a photo-sensor having a target screen, receiving an image
of a portion of the object to be inspected and producing a
corresponding electrical signal; and
(b) a detector section receiving the electrical signal from said
photo-sensor to determine whether or not said object
contains abnormalities defects or the like, said photo-sen-
sor having an optical lens arrangement which can simulta-
neously focus images of at least two different portions of
said object disposed at different distances from said optical
lens arrangement on first and second separate portions of
said target screen of said photo-sensor.
1. An ion mass spectrometer apparatus comprising;
a magnetic analyzer which includes entrance and exit open-
ings, and a sector magnet that passes ions of selected
momentum characteristics along a wide range of paths
that extend between the openings while preserving the
angle of their velocity vector with respect to a centerline
of said path, at said openings; and
an electrostatic analyzer located downpath of said magnetic
analyzer exit opening and positioned to receive ions leav-
ing therefrom, said analyzer including walls forming a
chamber having width, length, and height dimensions,
said analyzer also having means for applying an electrical
potential that deflects ions moving largely lengthwise of
the chamber, along the height dimension in accordance
with at least the mass to charge ratio of the ion;
said electrostatic analyzer also including an ion sensor which
senses ions along a wall of said chamber, said sensor con-
structed to detect the position of an ion along the width
dimension of the chamber as well as along another dimen-
sion.
4,435,643
GAMMANETRIC THICKNESS MEASURING
APPARATUS
Guy Junck, Esch, Luxembourg, assignor to Arbed S. A., Luxem-
bourg, Luxembourg
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,231
Claims priority, application Luxembourg, Jan. 23, 1981,
83083
Int. a.3 GOIM 23/00
U.S. a. 250—358.1 6 Oaims
1. An apparatus for the gammametric measurement of an
ariicle, comprising:
a block rotatable about an axis and having a center of gravity
offset therefrom while being provided along its periphery
with a plurality of spaced apart radiation sources;
a radiation-absorbing body formed with a trough adapted to
receive said block;
means connected to said block for swinging same from an
inoperative position wherein said radiation sources are
disposed within said trough into an operative position
wherein said radiation sources are disposed at a location
remote from the bottom of said trough;
}
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
379
a cover mounted on said body and enclosing said block in 4,435,645
the operative position thereof, said cover having at least INFRARED RADIATION SIGNATURE GENERATION
one window alignable with said radiation sources selec- SYSTEM
tively; and
a radiation detector spaced from said cover and aligned with
said window for detecting radiation traversing said win-
dow and passing through an ariicle disposed between said
cover and said detector.
Richard S. Bartle, Andover, Man., assignor to Avco Corpora-
tion, Wilmington, Mass.
Filed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,061
Int. Q.} G21G 4/00
U.S. a. 250—493.1 12 Qaims
^J.u
1. Infrared radiaUon signature generation system compris-
ing:
4,435,644
RADIOACnVE EFFLUENT GAS MONITORING
APPARATUS
Hideaki Heki, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 283,105
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/01
U.S. a. 250—435 11 Qaims
1. A radioactive effluent gas monitoring apparatus for detet-
ing radioactive nuclides contained in radioactive efRuent gas
from a nuclear facility, comprising:
a guide line for discharging efHuent gas from the nuclear
facility;
a water recovery section for recovering 'H in the effluent
gas in the form of H2O;
carbon dioxide recovery section connected parallel to said
water recovery section and recovering '^C in the effluent
gas in the form of CO2;
branch lines for separately feeding the effluent gas from said
guide line to said water recovery section and said carbon
dioxide recovery section;
a line for joining output gases from said water recovery
section and said carbon dioxide recovery section to return
the joined gas to the nuclear facility; and
detecting means for detecting radioactivities in the recov-
ered H2O and CO2.
means defining an enclosed chamber,
means for generating a hot vapor at selected rates, the tem-
perature of the vapor being greater than the ambient
temperature surrounding said chamber,
means for distributing said hot vapor to the interior of said
chamber at a pressure higher than ambient pressure,
the wall of said chamber being formed of material which
allows percolation of vapor therethrough, said percolat-
ing vapor transferring heat to said chamber wall and
causing a temperature rise therein whereby said chamber
wall emits an infrared radiation signature in response to
such temperature rise,
temperature transducer feedback means interrelated with
the wall of said chamber and responsive to the tempera-
ture thereof for generating a signal whose amplitude var-
ies in relation to such temperature, and
rate controller means responsive to said signal for control-
ling the generation rate of hot vapor to maintain said
chamber wall at a steady state temperature whereby a
continuous infrared radiation signature is generated.
4,435,646
WIND TURBINE ROTOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Qint Coleman, Warren, Vt., and Hugh D. Currin, Klamath
Falls, Oreg., auignors to North Wind Power Company, Inc.,
Waitsfield, Vt
Filed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,896
Int. Q.5 F03D 7/04
U.S. Q. 290—44 16 Qaims
1. A constant speed wind turbine of the type comprising
380
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a tower-mounted free yawing carriage having vane means
for aligning said carriage with the wind,
a drive shaft defming a substantially horizontal rotor axis
mounted for rotation in said carriage, and
a wind-powered electrical generator operatively coupled to
one end of said drive shaft having electrical terminals
adapted to be connected to an electrical power grid,
wherein the improvement comprises
a rotor with variable pitch blades drivingly coupled coaxi-
ally to the other end of said drive shaft, and
mechanical control means connected between said rotor and
said carriage for establishing the pitch angle of said rotor
blades collectively as a direct predetermined function of
the blade pitch moment.
4,435,647
PREDICTED MOTION WIND TURBINE TOWER
DAMPING
Kermit I. Hamer, Windsor; John P. Patrick, South Windsor,
both of Conn., and Joseph M. Kos, Holyoke, Mass., assignors
to United Technologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 364,707
Int. a,3 F03D 9/00, 7/04
U.S. a. 290—44 3 Claims
SHIT DOUN
CUWTBOLS
"i^ COMTROL *-*—. — 1"
•fSff i
■UIDE PITCH .Jtf "'^ lf»-li--. - r.s 4.1»1.0n5
QFF^OW List
wiper means, electrical window defogger means and instru-
ment panel lighting means, comprising:
first relay means for energizing said exterior lighting means;
second relay means for energizing said windshield wiper
means;
third relay means for energizing said electrical window
defogger means;
semiconductor switch means for determining the amount of
electrical energy coupled to said instrument panel lighting
means;
light detector means for monitoring ambient light conditions
around said vehicle;
first switch means for selecting automatic activation and
deactivation of said exterior lighting means in response to
said light detector means;
second switch means for selecting a delay period for said
automatic activation and deactivation of said exterior
lighting means;
third switch means for selecting intermittent operation of
said windshield wiper means;
fourth switch means for selecting operation of said window
defogger means;
7 I
■V
-^H^„. O
-:,^^T<^
.»>■'»
/« I '<f
50 M
-o-^„
J.J— 0
1. A wind turbine system for generating electric power,
comprising:
a tower;
a rotor disposed on said tower including blades disposed for
rotation about an axis and a blade pitch angle change
mechanism;
means for providing an actual torque/power signal indica-
tive of actual torque/power generated by said wind tur-
bine system; and
signal processing means for providing a reference torque/-
power signal indicative of desired generated torque/-
power, and for providing a blade pitch angle reference
signal as a function of the difference between said actual
torque/power signal and said reference torque/power
signal;
characterized by:
said signal processing comprising means for providing said
blade pitch angle reference signal as a combination of a
damping signal component related to a filtered function of
said blade pitch angle reference signal and a torque/power
control signal component which is said function of the
difference between said actual torque/power signal and
said reference torque/power signal.
4,435,648
AUTOMOTIVE ACCESSORY CONTROL SYSTEM
Joseph W. Goode, III, Carmel, Ind., assignor to Emhart Indus-
tries. Inc., Indianapolis, Ind.
Filed Dec. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 452,071
Int. a.3 H02J 7/00
U.S. a. 307—10 R 5 Claims
1. An automotive accessory control system for a vehicle
having an on-off switch, exterior lighting means, windshield
fifth switch means for selecting a brightness level for said
instrument panel lighting means; and
microcomputer control means for activating and deactivat-
ing said first relay means in response to the ambient light
conditions monitored by said light detector means and in
response to said first and second switch means, and said
on-off switch, for momentarily activating said second
relay means in response to a first activation of said third
switch means, for determining a period for intermittent
operation of said windshield wiper means in response to
said first and a second activation of said third switch
means, for momentarily activating said second relay
means periodically in accordance with said period for
intermittent operation, for activating said third relay
means for a predetermined period of time in response to
activation of said fourih switch means, and for activating
said s^iconductor switch means to determine the amount
of electrical energy coupled to said instrument panel light-
ing means in response to the brightness level selected by
said fifth switch means.
4 435 649
AUTOMOTIVE CONTROL ORCUIT
John F. Vandigriff, Box 179, Mansfield, Tex. 76063
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,031
Int. C\} B60R 25/04
U.S. a. 307—10 AT 4 Oaims
1. An antitheft circuit for detecting nonstandard connections
to an automobile electrical system comprising, means includ-
ing a key circuit for supplying power and control signals to the
electrical system, a logic circuit, said logic circuit upon receipt
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
381
of said control signals enabling the electrical system of the
automobile, and a circuit for disabling the electrical system
ILLEGAL INPUT
r/ —
^
e
START
FUEL
PUMP
upon detecting nonstandard connections to the electrical sys-
tem when the logic circuit is not in receipt of control signals.
4,435,651
aSERO VOLTAGE SWITCH
Karl-Diether Nutz, Oedheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Telefunken electronic GmbH, Heilbronn, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,516
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germaay, Oct. 7,
1980, 3037794
Int. a.3 H03K 17/72, 17/ B, 5/153
U.S. a. 307—252 UA 11 Gaims
4,435,650
LOAD CONTROL FOR ENERGY CONVERTERS
Donald J. Dziubakowski, Seven Hills; Azmi Kaya, Akron; Mar-
ion A. Keyes, Chagrin Falls; Theodore N. Matsko, Chefter-
, land; William H. Moss, Willoughby, and Thomas J. Scheib,
Chesterland, all of Ohio, assignors to The Babcock & Wilcox
Company, New Orleans, La.
Filed Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 331,060
Int. a.3 H02J 3/00
U.S. a. 307—32 3 Qaims
liitil-S
FQCW '
OMR VAPOR
GEUUroeiSi
1. A load control for a system comprised of a plurality of
energy converters, comprising, means generating a system
control signal corresponding to the system load for adjusting in
parallel the energy output of each of said converters in accor-
dance with changes in the system control signal, means pro-
ducing an individual incremental cost signal for each of said
plurality of converters, means responsive to all of said incre-
mental cost signals generating a system incremental cost signal,
means generating a third signal for each of said generators
corresponding to the difference between the system incremen-
tal cost signal and the individual incremental cost signal for
each generator, means under the control of the third signal
biasing the energy output of each converter as required to
maintain a predetermined relationship between the system
incremental cost signal and the individual incremental cost
signal and means inhibiting said third signal from biasing the
output of a converter, if during predetermined periods of time,
the rate of energy output of said one converter fluctuates
beyond predetermined limits.
1. A zero voltage switch connected to an AC voltage source
which produces an AC voltage, said switch comprising a DC
current source producing a DC current, first and second paral-
lel connected current branches connected to said DC current
source and the AC voltage source for taking over the DC
current from said DC current source in half cycles of the AC
voltage, a third current branch connected to said first and
second parallel connected branches and said DC current
source for blocking said first and second current branches in
zero axis crossing phases of the AC voltage to produce control
pulses and a logic unit connected to said DC current source for
controlling said DC current source to provide an extremely
small current up to the beginning of a first control pulse, an
increased current during said control pulses and a current
between said extremely small current and said increased cur-
rent between the control pulses.
4,435,652
THRESHOLD VOLTAGE CONTROL NETWORK FOR
INTEGRATED aRCUIT FIELD-EFFECT
TRRANSISTORS
Emsley H. Stevens, Plymouth, Minn., assignor to Honeywell,
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,213
Int. C1.J H03K 17/693, 17/30
U.S. a. 307—297
6 Claims
1. A threshold voltage control circuit for controlling thresh-
old voltages of selected field-effect transistors formed as part
of an integrated circuit and having respective drains, sources
and gates thereof electrically interconnected in said integrated
382
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
circuit in any desired manner including a first field-effect tran-
sistor, said threshold voltage control circuit comprising:
a reference field-effect transistor formed as part of said
integrated circuit having a drain, a source and a first gate
with said first g;ate and source electrically connected
together, with said reference field-effect transistor being
electrically connected to said first field-effect transistor
such that said reference field-effect transistor has a thresh-
old voltage which determines that threshold voltage asso-
ciated with said first field-effect transistor, said reference
field-effect transistor drain being electrically connected to
a first terminal means characterized as being connectible
to a first voltage source;
an impedance means electrically connected to a second
terminal means characterized as being connectible to a
second voltage source and electrically connected to said
reference field-effect transistor source wherein said impe-
dance means has a first or a second impedance value
depending on values of a control signal; and
means for providing threshold voltage control to said refer-
ence field-effect transistor depending on impedance values
taken by said impedance means to cause said threshold
voltage of said reference field-effect transistor to attaint
value which maintains current flowing between source
and drain of said reference field-effect transistor substan-
tially equal to that flowing through said impedance means,
said threshold voltage of said reference field-effect transis-
tor having a first value when said impedance means has
said first impedance value and having a second value
when said impedance means has said second impedance
value.
4,435,653
IN-PHASE VOLTAGE ELIMINATION ORCUIT FOR
HALL ELEMENT
Kunihiko Matui, Komukainishi, and Shikei Tanaka, Chigasaki,
both of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,852
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 26, 1980, 55-166409;
Apr. 15, 1981, 56-56714
Int. a.3 H03K 17/60, 7/10
U.S. a. 307—309 11 Qaims
/a
-^
//f
F
//* I
p^^
/S
^
//>
y^
^
/4
/7
/S
QJ
1. An in-phase voltage elimination circuit comprising:
a Hall element having first and second control current input
terminals and first and second output terminals, said sec-
ond control current input terminal being connected to
neither of said first and second output terminals;
means for supplying a control current to said first control
current input terminal of said Hall element; and
an operational amplifier having a first input terminal con-
nected to reference potential, a second input terminal
connected to said first input terminal of said Hall element,
and an output terminal connected to second control cur-
rent input terminal of said Hall element; wherein said Hall
element produces a Hall output at said second output
terminal of said Hall element.
4,435,654
OUTPUT LEVEL ADJUSTMENT MEANS FOR LOW
FANOUT ECL LACKING EMITTER FOLLOWER
OUTPUT
Kazuo Koide, Fuchu, Japan, assignor to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,470
Claims priority, application Japan, May 2, 1980, 55-57814
Int. a.3 H03K 19/086, 19/092
VS. CI. 307—455 7 Qaims
INi--
4Tj
-vk
1. A complex logic circuit comprising a plurality of emitter
coupled logic circuits commonly connected to a reference
potential for comparing with input signals respectively re-
ceived by said emitter coupled logic circuits, said complex
logic circuit comprising:
a first emitter coupled logic circuit having first and second
load resistors, a first current source, a first current switch
transistor having its base electrode connected to a signal
input terminal, its emitter electrode connected to said first
current source and its collector electrode connected to a
point of operation potential through said first load resistor,
a second current switch transistor having its base elec-
trode connected to a reference potential point which is
supplied with said reference potential, its emitter elec-
trode connected to said first current source and its collec-
tor electrode connected to said point of operation poten-
tial through said second load resistor, and an emitter
follower output circuit having its input connected to an
electrode selected from said collector electrodes of said
first and second current switch transistors and its output
coupled to an output terminal of said first emitter coupled
logic circuit, and
a second emitter coupled logic circuit having third and forih
load resistors, a second current source, a third current
switch transistor having its base electrode connected to a
. signal input terminal, its emitter electrode connected to
said second current source and its collector electrode
connected to a node through said third load resistor, a
fourth current switch transistor having its base electrode
connected to a reference potential point which is supplied
with the same reference potential as that supplied to the
reference potential point of said second current switch
transistor, its emitter electrode connected to said second
current source and its collector electrode connected to
said node through said fourth load resistor and a level shift
element which is connected between said point of opera-
tion potential and said node, wherein at least one collector
electrode of said third and fourth current switch transis-
tors is connected to an output terminal of said second
emitter coupled logic circuit, and wherein the voltage
drop across said level shift element is set to be substan-
tially equal to a voltage across the base and emitter of an
emitter follower output transistor of said emitter follower
output circuit so that said first and second emitter coupled
logic circuits can operate using the saihe reference poten-
tial for comparison with their respective input signals and
so that said output signals at said output terminals of said
first and second emitter coupled logic circuits have sub-
stantially identical voltage levels for high and low level
output signals provided at said respective output termi-
nals.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
383
4,435,655
LOG-CONFORMANCE ERROR CORRECnON CIRCUIT
FOR SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
Max W. Hauser, Cambridge, Mass., assignor to Tektronix, Inc.,
Beaverton, Oreg.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,366
Int. a.3 G06G 7/12
U.S. O. 307—490 4 Claims
4,435,657
PHASE ©ETECTOR ORCUIT
Shinichiro Taguchi; Nobuya Nagao, and Yutaka Ogihara, all of
Fukaya, Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,951
Int. a.' H03D 13/00; GOIR 25/00
U.S. a. 307—516 3 Qaims
1. A circuit for correcting log-conformance error in a proto-
type circuit which includes semiconductor junctions, compris-
ing:
a first pair of semiconductor devices; and
a second pair of semiconductor devices operatively associ-
ated with said first pair of semiconductor devices such
that the current densities of said second pair are cross-pro-
portional with the current densities of said first pair and of
a different magnitude;
wherein signal-dependent current derived from said proto-
type circuit flows through said first and second pairs of
semiconductor devices and a correction voltage is gener-
ated thereby for correcting said log-conformance error.
4,435,656
PHASE INVERTER ORCUIT
Yasuta Tomuro, Hyogo, Japan, assignor to Mitsubishi Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,874
Qaims priority^ application Japan, Mar. 23, 1981, 56-42788
Int. Q.3 H03L 7/00; H03F 3/45
U.S. Q. 307—513 5 Qaims
i^«
-^^*^
kK
fe^^vj^!^
$-.
Solas'
4J^x
Jbalmkxd
r*^n>
p-^inj
I FILTtB K ;
1. A phase detector circuit comprising:
a phase detector including a first differential amplifier and a
second differential amplifier, a reference pulse signal and a
comparison pulse signal being applied to first input termi-
nals of said respective first and second differential amplifi-
ers, preset bias voltages of first and second DC bias volt-
age sources being applied to second input terminals of said
respective first and second differential amplifiers, said
second differential amplifier providing from an output
terminal thereof a phase detection pulse of a pulse width
proportional to the phase difference between the refer-
ence pulse and comparison pulse,
a buffer circuit connected to the output terminal of said
second differential amplifier, for extracting said phase
detection pulse output,
a gate circuit connected to an output terminal of said buffer
circuit, a current path of said buffer circuit between a
phase detection pulse input terminal and an output termi-
nal being controlled to on or off by said reference pulse
signal, said buffer circuit providing an output pulse while
said current path is in the "on" state, the pulse duty of said
output pulse varying according to the pulse width of said
phase detection pulse, and
a filter for receiving the output of said gate circuit.
1. A phase inverter circuit, comprising:
a first differential current gate including first, second and
third active elements and a first constant current source;
a second differential current gate including fourth, fifth and
sixth active elements and a second constant current
source;
a first output terminal connected to the output terminals of
said first and fourth active elements;
a second output terminal connected to the output terminals
of said second and fifth active elements; *
a first input terminal connected to the input terminals of said
first and fifth active elements; and
a second input terminal connected to the input terminals of
said second and fourth active elements, an input signal
being applied across said first and second input terminals,
and a phase switching signal being applied across input
terminals of said third and sixth active elements.
4,435,658
TWO-LEVEL THRESHOLD aRCUITRY FOR LARGE
SCALE INTEGRATED ORCUIT MEMORIES
Lance R. Murray, and Ta-Ming Wu, both of San Diego, Calif.,
assignors to Burroughs Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,040
Int. Q.' GOIR 19/165; H03K 5/24, 19/017
U.S. Q. 307—530 8 Qidms
1. A threshold detector circuit coupled to a sense line for
sensing a signal on said line, said detector circuit comprising:
384
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a low threshold detector means having an input terminal
coupled to said sense line and having an output terminal;
a high threshold detector means having an input terminal
coupled to said sense line and having an output terminal,
said high threshold detector means being formed of an
inverter circuit with a high threshold driving transistor
and said low threshold detector means being formed of an
inverter circuit with a driving transistor which is formed
by an implantation technique so as to have a low thresh-
gld; and.
an output means having input terminals coupled to said
respective output terminals of said low threshold detector
means and high threshold detector means and having an
output terminal without any feedback circuitry coupled
thereto for providing a first level output signal on an
output terminal of said detector circuit when said signal
on said sense line rises above said low threshold, said first
level output signal remaining until said signal on said sense
line rises above and then declines below said high thresh-
old whereupon said output means provides a second level
output signal on said detector circuit output terminal.
4,435,659
SPEED SENSOR FOR AN ELECTROMAGNETIC
MACHINE
Arnold D. Peterson, Sidney, N.Y., assignor to The Bendix Cor-1'
potation, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,863
Int. a.3 H02K 11/00
U.S. a. 310—68 R 28 Claims
4-!^
^^4e
1. In a speed sensor for an electromagnetic machine of the
type including the combination of a stator having a plurality of
stator 9oils, a plurality of stator teeth, and a plurality of stator
slots respectively between said teeth, and a rotor separated
from said stator by an air gap, said rotor being adapted to
rotate relative to said stator and generating a magnetic field
inducing magnetic flux in said stator, the improvement com-
prising:
a magnetic core having at least one leg extending into one of
said stator slots and adapted to be magnetically coupled
with the magnetic field generated by said rotor upon
rotation of said rotor;
a winding magnetically coupled with said core and within
which there is induced an alternating electrical signal
having a frequency proportional to the speed of said rotor
relative to said stator; and
means for mounting said one leg within said one stator slot,
said mounting means including an insulative medium
substantially fllling said one stator slot and surrounding
said one leg.
4,435,660
MAGNETO GENERATOR FOR A CONTACTLESS
IGNITION SYSTEM
Armin Wilier, Heilsbronn, and Herbert Roderer, Nuremberg,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch
GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 213,646, Dec. 5, 1980, abandoned. This
application Nov. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 439,313
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 20,
1979, 2951326
Int. a.J H02K 39/00
U.S. a. 310—70 R 6 Qaims
1. In an internal combustion engine having a contactless
ignition system and an electrical load, a magneto generator
comprising:
a rotor (11) for operation in a single predetermined direction
of rotation;
a first and second (22,26) permanent magnet set in said rotor,
spaced apart circumferentially from each other, each
having a polarity perpendicular to a radius of said rotor
passing through the magnet and each having a magnetic
system comprising a first and second pole piece respec-
tively abutting opposite poles of the magnet, said first and
second magnets being mounted with opjMJsite polarity
with reference to direction of rotation of said rotor;
a first armature (15) fixedly mounted relative to the path of
said first and second permanent magnets for magnetic
interaction therewith, and having a winding connected to
said ignition system so that a spark is generated only upon
said interaction with said first permanent magnet when
said rotor is rotating in said single predetermined direction
of rotation;
a third permanent magnet set in said rotor, spaced apart
. circumferentially from said first and second magnets,
^ having a polarity perpendicular to a radius of said rotor
passing through said third magnet, which polarity is the
same as that of said second magnet with reference to
direction of rotation, said third magnet also having a
magnetic system comprising first and second pole pieces
respectively abutting opposite poles of said third magnet;
and second and third armatures (15', 15") spaced apart from
said first armature and fixedly mounted relative to the
path of said first, second and third permanent magnets for
magnetic interaction therewith and for generating electri-
cal energy in response to said magnetic interaction with
said first, second and third magnets.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
385
4,435,661
SUBMERSIBLE PUMP MOTOR FLEXIBLE BEARING
Raymond L. Witten, Claremore, Okla., assignor to Hughes Tool
Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,791
Int. a.5 H02K 7/08
U.S. a. 310—90 5 Galms
1. In a submersible pump electrical motor having a rotor
shaft with laminations placed in sections and rotated within a
stator, an improved bearing means between the sections for
supporting the shaft, comprising in combination:
a symmetrical bearing member including at least one sleeve
having a cylindrical bore containing the sleeve through
which the shaft passes and a plurality of fingers engaging
inner periphery of the stator, each finger inclining consid-
ering the direction of rotation of the shaft.
4,435,663
THERMOCHEMICAL MAGNETIC GENERATOR
Richard J. Gambino, Thalwil, Switzerland, and Ralph R. Ruf,
New York, N.Y., assignors to International Business Ma*
chines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,655
Int. a? HOIJ 4S/00
U.S. a. 310—306 15 Qaims
^^^9-M
4,435,662
AXIAL AIR GAP ALTERNATORS/GENERATORS OF
MODULAR CONSTRUCTION
Ian S. Tawse, Weston, Canada, assignor to Gen*Tech, Inc.,
Miami, Fla.
Division of Ser. No. 38,251, May 11, 1979, Pat. No. 4^97,605.
This application Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,122
Int. a.5 H02K 21/38
U.S. a. 310—168 6 Oaims
1. In a thermomagnetic generator employing a magnetic
material in a predetermined environment cycled between a
state of high magnetization and a state of low magnetization
positioned in a magnetic circuit, with solenoid coils wound
about said circuit, for generating an electrical voltage in re-
sponse to a variation in the magnetization of said magnetic
material, the improvement comprising varying said magnetiza-
tion by means of a thermochemical reaction.
4,435,664
MAGNETIC INTERPOLE APPARATUS FOR
IMPROVING COMMUTATION CHARACTERISTICS OF
A DYNAMOELECTRIC MACHINE
Walter F. Boesel, Palos Verdes EsUtes, Calif., assignor to The
Garrett Corporation, Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,450
Int. a. J H02K 27/22
U.S. a. 310—186 34 Qaims
1. An electric generator comprising:
(a) a rotatable shaft,
(b) a rotor mounted on said shaft for rotation therewith and
carrying a plurality of magnets on at least one face of said
rotor, said magnets being arranged around the axis of said
rotor,
(c) a pair of stator plates spaced from said rotor, said plates
being so positioned as to place one on each side of the
rotor and in a plane parallel to the plane of said rotor,
(d) an annular casing serving to maintain said stator plates in
spaced apart relationship and to support said rotatable
shaft and rotor,
(e) a ring of magnetic material incorporating a plurality of
projecting poles, said ring comprising a continuously
wound spiral of magnetic material and being carried by at
least one side of at least one stator plate, and said ring
being arranged around the axis of said shaft for cooperat-
ing with said magnets of said rotor,
whereby a linkage of magnetic flux is established between
said poles and said magnets, and
(0 a plurality of induction coils would about and affixed to
said poles for cooperation with said poles,
whereby as said shaft and rotor rotate, the cooperation
between said magnets, said poles, and said induction coils
combine to generate electric current in said induction
coils.
1. Magnetic interpole apparatus for improving commutation
characteristics of a dynamoelectric machine comprising:
(a) magnetizable interpole means having one end arranged
for coupling to the yoke of said dynamoelectric machine
and the other end providing a pole tip extending radially
toward the axis of said machine, said pole tip having a first
pole tip portion including a leading edge and a second
pole tip portion including a trailing edge and winding slot
means traversing in an axial direction from one side to
another of said pole tip between said first and second pole
tip portions;
(b) magnetizable force means associated with said magnetiz-
able interpole means and arranged to establish therein a
first magnetic flux defining a magnetic pole on said pole
tip;
(c) flux shift winding means disposed in said winding slot
means and encompassing one of said first and second pole
tip portions; and
(d) means for coupling said flux shift winding means to an
electric current source to generate in said one of said first
and second pole tip portions a second magnetic flux for
altering the flux distribution therein of said magnetic
386
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
interpole means established by said magnetizing force
means.
4,435,665
THERMAL LINEAR ACTUATOR
Kent Farrell, ^ Churchill Rd., Bale D'Urfe, Quebec, Canada
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,269
Int. a.J H02N 70/00
U.S. a. 310—307 4 Claims
1. A thermal linear actuator assembly comprising;
(a) a plurality of primary linear expansion members,
(b) a plurality of secondary linear expansion members having
a substantially different coefficient of expansion to that of
said primary members,
(c) said primary and secondary members being alternately
arranged in a side-by-side array and serially connected at
opposite ends thereof, said array including first and last
members each having a free end for attachment to oppo-
site actuator attachment points whereby the thermal linear
motion of the free ends in use is equal to the total linear
expansion/contraction of the primary members less the
total linear expansion/contraction of the secondary mem-
bers of the array.
4,435,666
LEVER ACTUATOR COMPRISING A
LONGITUDINAL-EFFECT ELECTROEXPANSIVE
TRANSDUCER AND DESIGNED TO PREVENT
ACTUATION FROM DEGRADING THE ACTUATOR
Izumu Fukui; Takeshi Yano, and Takeshige Hamatsuki, all of
Tokyo, Japan, assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo*^^
Japan
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,479
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 26, 1981, 56-79531;
May 26, 1981, 56-79532; Jul. 17, 1981, 56-111975; Jul. 17, 1981,
56-111976; Mar. 25, 1982, 57-46210; Mar. 25, 1982, 57-46211;
Apr. 13, 1982, 57-61218; Apr. 30, 1982, 57-73119
Int. a.3 HOIV im
U.S. a. 310—328 9 Claims
said first end surface relative to said second end surface in a
direction parallel to said axis, said frame member comprising a
base portion, a lever portion having fulcrum, power, and
weight points with said fulcrum and said power points dis-
posed on a median plane including said axis, a resilient portion
connecting said fulcrum point to said base portion, coupling
means for operatively coupling said first end surfce to said
power point, and connecting means for connecting said second
end surface to said base portion to make said displacement
actuate said lever portion and thereby to move said weight
point, the improvement characterized in that:
said coupling means comprises a substantially plate-shaped
primary portion which is lengthwise rigid and thickness-
wise resilient and which operatively couples said first end
surface to said power point and has a pair of primary
principal surfaces disposed perpendicular to said plane
and substantially parallel to said axis;
and ^ J
said frame member further comprises a first arm portion
having first, second, and third predetermined points with
said first and said second predetermined points disposed
on said plane, a second arm portion having fourth and fifth
predetermined points, a springy portion connecting said
first predetermined point to said base portion, a substan-
tially plate-shaped secondary portion which has a pair of
secondary principal surfaces disposed substantially paral-
lel to said primary principal surfaces and operatively
couples said first end surface to said predetermined point
with said primary principal surface pair and said second-
ary principal surface pair disposed on both sides of said
axis, a first additional portion which has a first portion axis
and connects said weight point to said fourth predeter-
mined point with said first portion axis interposed between
said weight point and said fourth predetermined point,
' and a second additional portion which has a second por-
tioti axis and connects said third and said fifth predeter-
mined points with said second portion axis interposed
between said third and said fifth predetermined points,
said translational displacement moving said third prede-
termined point substantially in a direction of movement of
said weight point with a different sense.
4,435,667
SPIRAL PIEZOELECTRIC ROTARY ACTUATOR
Henry H. Kolm, Wayland, and Eric A. Kolm, Brookline, both of
Mass., assignors to Peizo Electric Products, Inc., Cambridge,
Mass.
FUed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,636
Int. C\? H04R 77/00
U.S. a. 310—367 12 Claims
1. In a lever actuator comprising a frame member, an elon-
gated longitudinal-effect electroexpansive transducer block
having a block axis and first and second end surfaces orthogo-
nally of said axis, and field generating means for generating an
electric field having a direction in said transducer block paral-
lel to said axis to produce a reversible strain in said transducer
block and thereby to give rise to a translational displacement of
1. A piezoelectric rotary actuator comprising: a rotatable
member; a fixed member; a spiral leaf spring attached at one
end to said rotatable member and at the other end to said fixed
member; a piezoelectric layer attached on one side to said
spiral leaf spring; and electrode means for applying a voltage
across said piezoelectric layer to bend said spiral leaf spring
and rotate said rotatable member.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
387
4 435 668
METHOD OF MAKING RUGGED VIDICON
Ferdinand C. Petito, Alexandria, and Gerald Klauber, Frede-
ricksburg, both of Va., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,927
Int. a.J HOIJ n/49
U.S. a. 313—388 2 Qaims
IS
14
said end cap and said arc tube body and between the
portion of said tubulation extending through said circular
of:
1. A method of making a rugged vidicon including the steps
apertures and the interior surfaces of said circular aper-
tures.
preparing an envelope for such vidicon;
inserting grids and a rugged electron gun in said envelope;
making a retina for said vidicon wherein this step includes
the steps of:
preparing a transparent faceplate;
depositing an annular electrode on one side of said face-
plate;
depositing an annular bead of adhesive on said annular
electrode;
placing a thin annular conductive washer on said bead;
depositing an annulus of liquid electrode material on said
washer;
placing a pyroelectric retina on said liquid electrode;
placing a thin annular conductive washer on said retina;
depositing an adhesive to join said washers to each other
and to said annular electrode;
mounting the faceplate to the front of said envelope with
said retina inside;
pumping a vacuum in said envelope, degassing, getting and
tipping off said envelope.
4,435,670
ENERGY CONSERVING INSTANT-START
SERIES-SEQUENCE FLUORESCENT LAMP SYSTEM
WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
George S. Evans, Caldwell; John F. Gilmore, Verona, and Ed-
ward W. Morton, Teaneck, all of N.J., assignors to North
American Philips Electric Corp., Bloomfleld, N.J.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,319
Int. a.J HOIJ 7/44
U.S. G. 315—58 2 Claims
4,435,669
ARC TUBE CONSTRUCTION
Vernon L. Plagge, East Orange, and Ranbir S. Bhalla, Pine
Brook, both of N.J., assignors to North American Philips
Electric Corp., New York, N.Y.
Filed May 7, 1979, Ser. No. 36,949
Int. a.3 HOIJ 77/76
U.S. a. 313—634 6 Qaims
1. A sealed high pressure sodium discharge lamp arc tube,
said arc tube comprising:
an elongated monolithic alumina arc tube body having cir-
cular apertures in the ends thereof of a diameter substan-
tially less than the diameter of the arc tube body;
a refractory metal end cap including a flat disc portion and
a cylindrical skirt portion having refractory metal tubula-
tion extending through the center thereof, said tubulation
extending through said circular apertures in the ends of
said arc tube body and said skirt portion of said end cap
surrounding the end portions of the side wall of said arc
tube body; and
a glassy sealing frit disposed between the interior surface of
1. In combination with an instant-start series-sequence fluo-
rescent lamp system including a pair of input terminal means
for connecting said system to a power source, a pair of fluores-
cent lamp means each comprising a elongated tubular vitreous
envelope enclosing a discharge-sustaining filling and carrying
phosphor means on the inner surface thereof, substantially
hollow vitreous re-entrant stem presses sealed to each end
portion of said envelope, and having lead-in means sealed
therethrough and operatively supporting electrodes within
said envelope proximate each end portion thereof, transformer
means including a primary winding, a secondary winding and
an auxiliary winding, a first of said lamp means having one of
said electrodes in circuit between one of said input terminal
means and one end of said primary winding, the other of said
electrodes of said first lamp means in circuit with a point com-
mon to one end of said secondary winding and one end of said
auxiliary winding, the second of said lamp means having one of
said electrodes in circuit between the other of said input termi-
nals and the other end of said primary winding, the other of
said electrodes of said second lamp means in circuit with the
other end of said secondary winding, the other end of said
auxiliary winding in circuit with said one end of said primary
winding, intermediate capacitor means in circuit between said
common point and said other electrode of said first lamp
means, the improvement which comprises:
a power reducing capacitor means of predetermined capaci-
tance in series circuit with said first lamp means and a
388
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
protective device comprising one of (1) a current-respon-
sive fusible member which is in series circuit with said
power-reducing capacitor means and is responsive to a
current overload to render said lamp inoperative, and (2)
a voltage-responsive switch means which is connected in
parallel with said power-reducing capacitor means and
which normally displays a high impedance, said high
voltage-responsive switch means is responsive to a prede-
termined voltage developed across said power-reducing
capacitor to switch to a low-impedance state and effec-
tively remove said power-reducing capacitor means from
circuit, whereby said lamp system is protected from over-
load conditions encountered upon failure of either said
first or second lamp means.
being in direct and substantially complete electrical engage-
ment with said outer portion of said second electrical contact.
\
\
1. A device for prolonging the life of an incandescent lamp,
comprising a rectifier unit sized and shaped for insertion into a
lamp socket, said rectifier unit including a housing having a
first opening provided in one side of said housing and a second
opening provided in an opposite side of said housing, said
second opening being in general alignment with said first open-
ing, a first electrical contact positioned within said housing,
said first electrical contact having an outer portion and an
inner portion recessed relative to said outer portion of said first
electrical contact and arranged in general alignment with said
first opening in said housing, said inner portion of said first
electrical contact being sized and shaped so as to engage a
bottom contact of a lamp extending into said housing through
said first opening therein, a second electrical contact posi-
tioned within said housing, said second electrical contact hav-
ing an outer portion arranged in general alignment with said
outer portion of said first electrical contact and an inner por-
tion recessed relative to said outer portion of said second
electrical contact and projecting outwardly from said housing
through said second opening therein, said inner portion of said
second electrical contact being sized and shaped so as to en-
gage a spring leaf contact of a lamp socket, an electrical insula-
tor positioned within said housing between said first and sec-
ond electrical contacts, and a leadless diode chip positioned off
center within said housing, said diode chip having a first
contact surface arranged at one end of said diode chip, said
first contact surface being in direct and substantially complete
electrical engagement with said outer portion of said first
electrical contact, and a second contact surface arranged at an
opposite end of said diode chip, said second contact surface
4,435,672
FLAT PICTURE TUBE
Hinrich Heynisch, Grafelfing, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Siemens Aktiengeseilschafl, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,386
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 27,
1981, 3112200
Int. a.3 HOIJ 29/70, 29/72
U.S. a. 315—366 12 Qaims
4,435,671
DEVICE FOR PROLONGING THE LIFE OF AN
INCANDESCENT LAMP
Victor Wouk, New York, N.Y., assignor to Eli, Inc., Cedar
Grove, N J.
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,827
Int. a.3 H05B 37/00
U.S. a. 315—200 R 12 Oaims
^^ 25?\ 24 ^[ 11 '^} 1 ^} J
^^ 28 /t31
20 8 34
1. Flat picture tube, comprising a front plate and a back plate
vacuum-tightly connected to said front plate defining an evac-
uated envelope, a control matrix of line conductors and col-
umn conductors respectively extended in planes parallel to said
front plate dividing the evacuated envelope into a forward post
acceleration space and a rear electron storage space having
electrically conducting rear and side walls, said control matrix
of conductors having crossings with electron passage openings
formed in the vicinity thereof, at least one thermal cathode in
said rear electron storage space having an emission surface, at
least one grid-shaped pulling anode each being associated with
a respective one of said at least one thermal cathode and each
covering said emission surface of said respective at least one
thermal cathode at a substantially constant spacing, at least one
other anode disposed in said forward post acceleration space, a
fluorescent-material layer disposed on said other anode beihg
excitable by electrons and being at a positive potential of sev-
eral kV relative to the cathode potential in operation of the
tube, at least some of said conductors of said control matrix
being disposed so as to face said rear electron storage space and
being addressed sequentially, information for an addressed line
conductor being simultaneously given to all of said column
conductors, and in operation of the tube said rear and side
walls of said rear electron storage space and unaddressed line
conductors being at potentials preventing electrons emitted
into said rear electron storage space from reaching or passing
said read and side walls and unaddressed line conductors.
4,435,673
DC BRUSHLESS MOTOR AND ITS DRIVING CONTROL
SYSTEM
Hiroshi Hagino, Omiya; Kuniyoshi Nakamura, and Eiichi
Kotake, both of Yono, all of Japan, assignors to Japan Servo
Co., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240,225
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 11, 1980, 55-78520
Int. 0.3 H02K 29/00
U.S. O. 318—254 A 4 Oaims
1. A drive system for a D.C. brushless motor comprising:
a motor base;
a rotor shaft pivotally mounted in said motor base;
rotor magnets operatively connected to said rotor shaft for
rotation therewith and equiangularly spaced thereabout;
stator windings insulatively mounted to said motor base and
equiangularly arranged about said rotor shaft, said stator
windings being spaced from said rotor magnets by an air
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
389
gap, said stator windings numbering 3N where N is an
integer and being wired into first, second and third wind-
ing groups connected in a delta configuration;
first, second and third magnetic induction means for moni-
toring the magnetic field produced by the rotation of said
rotor shaft and magnets and producing respective outputs
upon the detection of positive values, each of said first.
generally perpendicular to the recording medium and being
responsive to the presence or absence of marks on the record-
ing medium at the locus of points where the axis of the mov-
able sensing means and the recording medium intersect, means
for moving the axis of the sensing means in tracking relation-
ship to the actual plot on the recording medium while the
sensing means detects the presence and absence of marks on
the medium, comparator means connected with the sensing
means and responsive to the instrument command signals in the
plot program for comparing the sensed presence and absence
of marks in the actual plot on the recording medium with the
plot defined in the program and producing an error signal
when the actual plot and the programmed plot are not consis-
tent with one another.
4,435,675 - '
BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM
Derek S. Adams, Solihull, England, assignor to Lucas Industries
pic, Birmingham, England
Filed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,258
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 30, 1981,
8116598
Int. CI.3 HOIM 10/44
U.S. O. 320—22 6 Oaims
second and third magnetic induction means being
mounted to said motor base in a position ir/b radians
advanced in the direction of motor rotation from the
center of a winding of a respective first, second or third
winding group;
amplifier means connected to said first, second and third
magnetic induction means for amplifying said detected
outputs to apply current to said stator windings groups.
4,435,674
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING A
VERinED PLOT
Charles M. Hevenor, Bolton, Conn., and David L. Wilson,
Bowie, Md., assignors to The Gerber Scientific Instrument
Company, South Windsor, Conn.
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,667
Int. 0.3 G05B 1/06
U.S. O. 318— 640 19 Oaims
C
PLOT
M2>
Retrace
icontrol
HCOITrJxI -lORIVE
PLOT 1.-' I COMPARATOR
COMPARATOR
1. In a plotting apparatus having a plotting instrument, a
programmable controller, and means for moving the plotting
instrument in line marking relationship to a recording medium
in response to plotting commands received from the controller
to produce an actual plot on the recording medium corre-
sponding to a plot program in the controller, the instrument
being in the form of a marking instrument moved into contact
with a recording medium where line marks are programmed
for generation of marks and moved out of contact with the
recording medium where no marks are programmed, the plot
program including instrument command signals for moving
the instrument into and out of contact with the medium, the
improvement comprising plot verifying means including a
sensing means movable relative to the recording medium for
detecting the presence and absence of marks on the recording
medium, the sensing means having a sensing axis extending
k' J
J
1. A battery charging system comprising a battery, means
for determining the state of charge of the battery at the com-
mencement of charging, means for supplying current to the
battery, and means for controlling the current supply means,
said control means being responsive to the state of charge
determining means and being programmed so that during at
least the last part of a pariicular charging cycle the charging
current follows a schedule which is selected from a set of
charging schedules each of which corresponds to a particular
state of charge at the commencement of the charging cycle and
each of which is is arranged so that the duration of the entire
charging cycle is equal to a desired period of time.
4,435,676
REGULATOR FOR CONTROLLING OUTPUT FROM
GENERATOR HAVING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
OVERRIDE
MiUuhani Morishita, Himeji, Japan, assignor to MiUubishi
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 7, 1983, Ser. No. 472,474
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 16, 1982, 57-43582
Int. 0.3 H02J 7/14: H02P 9/30
U.S. O. 322—33 2 Oaims
1. A control device for controlling an output from an AC
generator, comprising an AC generator including a field coil, a
full-wave rectifier co^nnected to said AC generator and includ-
ing a first, a second, and a third output terminal, a field current
control circuit for controlling a field current through said field
coil of said AC generator to maintain an output from said AC
generator to a predetermined magnitude, a voltage sensing
circuit connected between said second and third output termi-
nals of said full-wave rectifier to sense rectified output between
said second and third output terminals to apply a first control
signal to said field current control circuit in accordance with
390
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
the sensed rectified output, and a temperature sensing circuit
connected between said second and third output terminals of
said full-wave rectifier to sense an ambient temperature for said
AC generator, said temperature sensing circuit being respon-
sive to the ambient temperature in excess of a predetermined
magnitude to apply a second control signal for interupting said
field current to said field current control circuit in parallel
AC.«¥
^-201 ■
VOlT REG
o
02 "^»3
1 -
303
304
>3oe'5
312
13
-t
500
>.307
•^ I 311
M^ •" I 31
310- • 3,3
3fiC
109
200
circuit relationship with said voltage sensing circuit, said field
current control circuit including an input terminal connected
only to said voltage sensing circuit, said temperature sensing
circuit being connected to said voltage sensing circuit so that
said temperature sensing circuit is responsive to the ambient
temperature in excess of said predetermined magnitude set
therefor to cause said voltage sensing circuit to apply said
second control signal to said field current control circuit.
4,435,677
RMS VOLTAGE CONTROLLER
Dale C. Thomas, Ontario, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corporation,
Stamford, Conn.
Filed Not. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,533
Int. a.3 G05F 1/45
VS. a. 323—235 ) 8 Claims
at or is being integrated away from the predetermined
value;
(g) control means for receiving the on-state or off-state
signals from the comparing means and for concurrently
receiving an input signal indicating when the applied
alternating load voltage is at a zero crossing point, the
control means producing an output signal for interrupting
half cycles of the alternating voltage to the load for a fixed
number of zero crossings or half cycles and then automati-
cally producing an output signal for re-applying the load
voltage in response to receipt of an off-state signal at a
zero crossing point; and
(h) means for interrupting and re-applying the application of
voltage to said load in response to the output signal from
the control means.
4,435,678
LOW VOLTAGE PREOSION CURRENT SOURCE
Eric D. Joseph, Mesa, and Robert B. Davies, Tempe, both of
Ariz., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg, 111.
Filed Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,901
Int. a.3 G05F J/56
U.S. a. 323—273
4aainis
'IN
< L/ 1 UTILIZATION
lOUT
V,2
CIRCUIT
~a
-40
•TCOUn __J0BW««IO«
null III
«T Will
COITWl
'^T
°"«
1. A circuit for monitoring and controlling voltage across a
load, the voltage being applied from an alternating source and
having a zero crossing point for each half cycle of its alternat-
ing waveform, said circuit comprising:
(a) means for sampling the voltage across the load;
(b) means coupled to said sampling means for providing a
load square signal representing the square of the sampled
load voltage;
(c) means for providing a set point signal representing the
square of a desired control voltage;
(d) means for continuously combining said load square signal
and said set point signal to provide a third signal repre-
senting the difference therebietween;
(e) means for continuously integrating said third signal to
produce an integrated third signal, the third signal being
integrated either toward or away from a predetermined
value, so that any voltage errors generated because the
load voltage is interrupted only at a one of the zero cross-
ing points are automatically corrected during subsequent
load voltage interruption;
(0 means for comparing said integrated third signal with a
predetermined reference signal and generating either an
on-state or an off-state signal; the on-state signal being
generated while the integrated third signal is being inte-
grated toward the predetermined value and the off-state
signal being generated when the integrated third signal is
1. A precision current source, comprising:
first and second power supply conductors adapted to receive
a supply voltage thereacross;
first and second complementary current mirror circuits
interconnected to each other between said first and sec-
ond power supply conductors, said first current mirror
circuit sourcing currents to said second current mirror
circuit;
feedback circuit means for sensing a difference current be-
tween said first and second complementary current mirror
circuits caused by variations in said supply voltage to
provide a feedback signal to inhibit said difference cur-
rent, said feedback circuit means including a first transis-
tor of a first conductive type having an emitter, a collector
and a base, said emitter being coupled to said second
. power supply conductor, said collector being coupled to
said first current mirror circuit to sink current sourced
thereto, said base being coupled both to said first and
second complementary current mirror circuits at a first
circuit node; and
output circuit means coupled with said first current mirror
circuit having an output adapted to be coupled to an
utilization means for sourcing a predetermined and sub-
stantially constant current thereto.
4,435,679
PROGRAMMABLE SIGNAL AMPLITUDE CONTROL
CIRCUITS
James F. Bedard; Charles W. Eichelberger, both of Schenectady,
and Salvatore F. Natl, Jr., Syracuse, all of N.Y., assignors to
General Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 267,274, May 26, 1981, Pat. No. 4,414,501.
This appUcation May 12, 1983, Ser. No. 479,048
Int. a.^ G05B 24/02
U.S. a. 323—350 19 Claims
1. A circuit for providing an output signal of controllable
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
391
amplitude responsive to the data conUined in at least one
externally-provided digital control signal, comprising:
feedback oscillator means for providing a periodic output
waveform having a selected frequency and a variable
amplitude responsive to the magnitude of a first voltage
applied to a control input of said oscillator means; ^
a circuit output terminal at which appears the circuit output
signal with said oscillator means output waveform fre-
quency and said controllable amplitude;
first and second sources of circuit operating potential;
a plurality of resistance elements each having a first terminal
^
3L
^==^---'-
I
V
V"
J -%«
A^
Tl^-.
H
-t Hj4%l C Tz^T^'
thereof connected in parallel to the first terminals of all
other resistance elements, and each having a second termi-
nal; said resistance element second terminal being individ-
ually connectable.to one of said first and second sources of
circuit operating potential responsive to said digital con-
trol signal data; and
means connected between said resistance element first termi-
nals and said oscillator means control input for supplying
to said oscillator means control input said first voltage at
an amplitude established by the pariicular combination of
said resistance element second terminals connected re-
spectively to said first and second operating potentials.
4,435,680
MICROWAVE RESONATOR STRUCTURE
Wojciech Froncisz, Krakow, Poland, and James S. Hyde, Dous-
man, Wis., assignors to Medical College of Wisconsin, Mil-
waukee, Wis.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 310,231, Oct. 9, 1981. This
application Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,595
Int. a.3 GOIR 33/08
U.S. a. 324—316 1 Claim
spectrometer which resonates when high frequency electro-
magnetic energy is applied thereto, and which comprises:
a loop formed from an electrically insulating base material
which is disposed around a central longitudinal axis, said
loop having a gap formed along its entire length which is
dimensioned to provide a desired resonant frequency,
an electrically conductive layer deposited on the surface of
the loop, including the surfaces formed by said gap to
shield the base material from the applied high frequency
electromagnetic energy, and in which a dielectric rod
having a very low thermal coefficient of expansion is
inserted in the gap to maintain the dimensions of the gap
relatively constant.
4,435,681
BIPOLAR IONIC CURRENT PROBE UNIT AND
METHOD FOR MEASURING POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE
CURRENT DENSITIES BY MEANS OF THE SAME
PROBE UNIT
Senichi Masuda, No. 605, Nishigahara 1-40-10, Kita-ku, Tokyo-
to, and Yutaka Nonogaki, 2-61-1-702, Denenchofu, Ohta-ku,
Tokyo-to, both of Japan
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,515
Int. a.3 GOIN 27/62
U.S. a. 324—459 4 Claims
6 9
S 3
1. A lumped circuit resonator for a gyromagnetic resonance
1. A bipolar ionic current probe unit comprising:
a tri-electrode probe, which includes
a narrow elongated central electrode insulatively disposed
on an imaginary surface of a small shape having a plane
of symmetry along a line of intersection between said
imaginary surface and said plane of symmetry, and
a pair of measuring electrodes insulatively disposed on
said imaginary surface portions on the opposite sides of
said central electrode in a symmetric manner with re-
spect to said line of intersection so as to cover substan-
tially the entire imaginary surface portions on the oppo-
site sides with a small fixed gap clearance spaced from
said central electrode;
a hollow metallic suppori post for insulatively supporiing
said tri-electrode probe; and
a measuring system which includes
individual electric conductors respectively connected to
said said central electrode and said measuring elec-
trodes and extending through the hollo^ space in said
hollow metallic suppori post as insulated from said
hollow metallic support post and from each other,
means for measuring minute electric currents with one
end connected to said individual electric conductors
and the other end connected through a common electric
conductor to said hollow metallic support post, and
a variable D.C. voltage source connected between said
common electric conductor and a reference potential
point.
392
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,682
FREQUENCY DEMODULATOR EMPLOYING A
ORCUIT HAVING A DELAY VARYING WITH THE
RECEIVED FREQUENCY
Robert Boudault, Limours, and Gerard Pouzoullic, Gif sur
Yvette, both of France, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,600
Qaims priority, application France, Jun. 23, 1980, 80 13866
Int. a.3 H03K 9/06: H03D 3/02
U.S. a. 329—107 5 Qaims
1. A frequency demodulator comprising a first gate circuit
having an "exclusive-OR" function and receiving at its two
inputs square-wave signals each having a frequency corre-
sponding to a frequency modulated signal, delay means for
delaying one of said square-wave signals relative to the other
before application to said first gate circuit, and a low-pass filter
connected to the output of the first gate circuit, said delay
means producing a delay varying with frequency in an in-
versely proportional sense such that the phase difference be-
tween said square-wave signals varies at most from 0° to 180°,
characterized in that said delay means comprises an integrating
circuit receiving the non-delayed signal and producing an
output signal, and a comparator for comparing said output
signal of the integrating circuit with a threshold signal and
producing a comparator output signal, the delayed signal being
derived from said comparator output. signal.
4,435,683
RF IMBALANCE DETECTOR
Alan R. Erickson, Marion, Iowa, assignor to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation, El Segundo, CaJif.
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,522
Int. a.3 GOIR 79/00
U.S. a. 330-2 11 Qaims
1. A radio frequency imbalance detection system for detect-
ing degradation in the performance of a plurality of radio
frequency amplifiers comprising:
means for monitoring a first radio frequency output signal
from a first radio frequency amplifier, and a second radio
frequency output signal from a second radio frequency
amplifier;
means for comparing said first radio frequency output signal
with said second radio frequency output signal to obtain a
difference signal; and
means for detecting said difference signal for providing an
imbalance indication signal when said different signal
exceeds a reference signal.
4,435,684
VIDEO AMPLIHER MUTE CTRCUIT
Ronald W. Page, Sunnyvale, Calif., assignor to National Semi-
conductor Corporation, Santa Clara, Calif.
Filed Apr. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 366,944
Int. a.J H03F i/45
U.S. a. 330—51 4 Qaims
1. A wide bandwidth amplifier circuit which includes a high
gain amplifier capable of being muted in response to a muting
signal without changing its d-c output level, said circuit com-
prising:
a differential amplifier having a source of tail current, an
inverting input terminal, a noninverting input terminal,
and an output;
means for returning said noninverting input to a source of
constant bias potential;
means for coupling said inverting input to a source of signal
to be amplified;
means for shunting said tail current around said differential
amplifier in response to said muting signal; and
means for clamping said output to a d-c level, equal to the
normal output level of said differential amplifier in its
active state, in response to said muting signal.
4,435,685
AMPLinER ARRANGEMENT
Wolfgang Eckert, Reinfeld; Bernd Holtkamp, and Ernst A.
Kilian, both of Hamburg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,921
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 12,
1980, 3026551
Int. a.3 H03F 3/45, J/26
U.S. a. 330—261 16 Qaims
*i.UB
F^
■fl •{] '"^Q 4
u\,
1. An amplifier arrangement comprising at least one pair of
transistors having their emitters connected to each other and to
a signal source that supplies an input signal to said intercon-
nected emitters, an output signal being derived from the collec-
tor current of at least one transistor, at least one compensation
circuit which derives a compensation signal from at least one
of the two signals comprising the input signal supplied by the
signal source and the output signal, and means for applying the
compensation signal to the base of at least one of the transistors
of the pair and with a phase and an amplitude such that the
second harmonic of the signal wave in the output signal is at
least partly compensated.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
393
4,435,686 4 435 fgg *
Wllll«n F CHmth'^o^,? ?1f ^°°«/'i'^","n "u . ^ MICROWAVE OSCILLATOR BEING FREQUENCY
:}!^. *^' ^"'"*''' '20 Jefferson St., Apt. 3, Rochester, Ind. STABILIZED BY CAPACITIVE REACTANCE
46975
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,341
Int. a.5 H03F 1/00
U.S. a. 330—311
MICRO-STRIP STUB LINE
Keiro Shinkawa; Masaki Noda, and ChuichI Sodeyama, all of
Yokohama, Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
2 Claims Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,511
Qaims priority, application Japan. Jul. 25, 1980, 55-101309
Int. a.J H03B 5/18
10-^^ J^
13
- Bf
22
U.S. a. 331—99
1. An extended cascode amplifier circuit comprising a driver
transistor having a base, emitter and collector, the emitter
being connected to ground, the base being connectable to a
signal source and the collector being connected to one end of
a primary winding of a transformer, the other end of the pri-
mary winding being connected to the collector of an output
transistor, said output transistor having a base and an emitter,
the base being connected to ground and, through a secondary
winding of the transformer, to the emitter of said output tran-
sistor, the transformer windings being phased such that a large
driver current is forced through a high impedance of the pri-
mary winding which is a multiple of the common base input
impedance of the driver transistor.
15 Oaims
1. A microwave oscillator comprising:
a PET having source, drain and gate terminals;
a micro-strip line connected to said drain terminal, said
micro-strip line being grounded at microwave frequen-
cies;
an output line made of a micro-strip line, said output line
being connected to the source terminal of said PET;
a gate line made of a micro-strip line, said gate line being
connected to the gate terminal of said PET;
a dielectric resonator disposed adjacent to said gate line and
electrically coupled therewith and;
a capacitive stub disposed adjacent to said PET and formed
by
a micro-strip line of which one end is connected to the
source terminal of said PET and the other end is opened,
said capacitive stub being a source terminal ground at
microwave frequencies.
4,435,687
CLOCK SIGNAL RECOVERY CIRCUIT
Joseph S. Nadan, Ossining, N.Y.; George C. Kenney, II, Stam-
ford, Conn., and Marino G. Carasso, Son, Netherlands, assign-
ors to North American Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 30,259, Apr. 16, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,527
Int. a.J H03L 7/06
U.S. a. 331—23 7 Oaims
MOOULtTEP
AtSOLUTE
aiFFtWNTIATOW
1. A method of recovering a clock signal from a self-clock-
ing digital signal comprising absolute differentiating said digi-
tal signal; time delaying said differentiated signal through a
pluralityyf serially coupled delay elements, and providing an
output clock signal upon an output from the combined outputs
of each of said delay elements and said absolute differentiated
signal.
4 435 689
BROADBAND SLOW WAVE STRUCTURE ATTENUATOR
Hunter L. McDowell, Concord, Mass., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the
Army, Washington, D.C.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,314
■^ Int. O.^ HOIP 1/22
U.S. O. 333—81 A 18 Qaims
• a
r-
n
r.
— [
r-^
r-
2«
a
a
^^
11
«
M
M
(4
«4
M
14
-
J i
^^
mrm-mm
nurc
K
nsic luic euc muc
1. A broadband slow wave structure for propagating electri-
cal energy including an attenuator section, comprising in com-
bination:
394
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
dielectric substrate means having an upper conductive sur-
face;
meander line circuit means including a serpentine electrical
conductor pattern supported on said substrate means; and
support means in the region of said attenuator section con-
sisting of a plurality of attenuator elements intermediate
said conductor pattern and said substrate means.
4,435,690
PRIMARY ORCUIT BREAKER
Edwin A. Link, Waukesha, and Harvey W. Mikulecky,
Oconomowoc, both of Wis., assignors to RTE Corporation,
Waukesha, Wis.
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,776
Int. a.3 HOIH 75/12
U.S. a. 335—37 16 Gaims
>. * *• *
J!L
jf
1. In a fluid distribution transformer, a circuit breaker con-
nected in series with the primary winding of the transformer
and adapted to be immersed in the transformer dielectric fluid,
said breaker including a frame, a housing mounted on said
frame and including a fixed contact, a movable contact
mounted on said frame for movement into said housing to
engage said fixed contact, first means for biasing said movable
contact away from said fixed contact, second means for biasing
said movable contact toward said fixed contact, latch means
connecting said second biasing means to said first biasing
means whereby said contact is held in engagement with said
fixed contact by said second biasing means and temperature
controlled trip means mounted on said frame in a position to
disengage said latch means from said first biasing means when
predetermined electrical and temperature conditions exist in
the transformer whereby said first biasing means will be re-
leased from said second biasing means allowing said first bias-
ing means to move the movable contact away from the fixed
contact to open the circuit breaker.
4,435,691
DUAL TRACK RESISTOR ELEMENT HAVING
NONLINEAR OUTPUT
Steven N. Ginn, Misbawaka, Ind., assignor to CTS Corporation,
Elkhart, Ind.
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,373
Int. a.i HOIC 10/16
U.S. a. 338—125 17 Claims
1. A process for producing a variable voltage output, com-
prising the steps of disposing two resistance layers electrically
insulated one from another on an electrically insulated sub-
strate and each resistance layer having a different resistivity,
positioning a selectively movable contactor for engagement
with the respective surfaces of said layers, and selectively
d'O
d'iOO%
positioning said slidable contactor to develop a nonlinear
voltage output.
4,435,692
LOW ELECTROSTATIC CAPACITY WIRE-WOUND
TYPE IGNITION CABLE
Yoshimi Miyamoto; Naotaka Nakamura, both of Aichi; Fumiyo>
shi Akaku, Mie; Katsumi Koto, Mie, and Tsutomu Kosaka,
Mie, all of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Electric Industries,
Ltd., Osaka and Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Aichi, both of, Japan
Filed Dec. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 453,976
Qainu priority, application Japan, Dec. 31, 1981, 56-
197606[U]
Int. C\? HOIC 3/06
U.S. O. 338—214 12 Claims
^^~:CT^r~^^
1. A low electrostatic capacity wire-wound type ignition
cable, comprising:
a central reinforcing string;
a ferrite core having a diameter of 1.3 mm or less formed on
said central reinforcing string;
a resistance wire, said wire being wound on said ferrite core
to form a coil having 8,000 to 14,000 tums/m, said coil
having an inductance of about 800 ^H/m; and
an insulating layer formed on said coil, said insulating layer
comprising a first material having a ]pw dielectric con-
stant.
4,435,693
ELECTRICAL INSULAHNG REFRACTORY
COMPOSITION
Walter R. Johnson, Cbuckey, Tenn., assignor to Combustion
Engineering, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
Filed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385^43
Int. a.J HOIC 1/03
U.S. a. 338—238 3 Qaims
1. A MgO heat conductive electrical insulating embedding
composition for sheathing electrical heating elements and
having a density of at least 2.385 g/cm^, a static flow at least
45.0 g, and an electrical resistivity of at least 5.85 Megohm-
inches measured after two hours at 885* C. consisting essen-
tially of in admixture:
a. from 97.0 to 99.97 weight % MgO, said MgO being minus
40 mesh and having been calcined at a temperature in
excess of 1200* C;
b. from 0.025 to 2.0 weight % of a clay having a soluble salt
content less than 0.5% by weight; and
c. from 0.005 to I.O weight % fumed silica having a particle
size of from 0.2 to 0.7 microns.
2. A sheathed electrical heating element comprising an elec-
trical resistance element, a metal sheath surrounding said elec-
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
395
trical resistance element and an improved heat conductive
electrical insulating composition embedding said electrical
resistance element within said sheath consisting of the compo-
sition of claim 1. ,
4 435 694
AIR TERMINAL GUIDANCE SYSTEM
Elbert M. Riebold, P.O. Box 479, Columbus, Mont. 59019
Filed Jul. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 287,708
Int. a.3 G08G 5/00; B64F 1/18
U.S. a. 340-953 3 ch\j^
4,435,695
METHOD OF PREDICTING THE APPROACHING
STALL OF AN AIRCRAFT WING
John M. Maris, E.R.A.U. Box 2188, Daytona Beach. Regional
Airport, Daytona Beach, Fla. 32014
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,188
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 24, 1979.
7944397
Int. a.J G08G 5/00
U.S. a. 340-966 ,4 a,lm.
»,»
-V,
1. In combination with an airport area including various
relatively angled runways disposed within said area and sub-
ject to use by different aircraft with various sophistication
levels of guidance equipment and piloted by persons having
various levels of experience, a guidance lighting system includ-
ing a plurality of generally radially arranged base paths spaced
and extending outward from said airport area at substantially
ground level and having first approach light means spaced
therealong for guidance of aircraft along said base paths when
aproaching said airport, said approach light means spaced
along each base path emitting the same color distinctive light,
the light means of each of said base paths being distinctly
different in light emitting color from the color light emitted
from the light means spaced along the other base paths, each
path of distinctive color light emitting lights means extending
outward from said airport area in a predetermined compass
direction from said airport area, said base paths equalling four
in number and being equally angularly displaced about said
airport area, said system also including intermediate radial
paths of spaced additional light means, said intermediate paths
being equally angularly spaced between adjacent base paths
and extending generally radially of said airport area, the light
means of each of said base paths includes pairs of lights spaced
therealong and disposed in side-by-side rows of lights extend-
ing along the corresponding base path, a first row of each pair
of rows of lights comprising said first approach light means,
the second rows of each pair of rows of lights emitting the
same color light distinctively different from colors of the first
rows of lights, each row of one set of corresponding rows of
lights being disposed to the right of the corresponding other
row when viewed while moving along side-by-side rows of
lights radially inwardly along the corresponding radial base
path, the light means of each intermediate path emitting the
same color light corresponding in color to the color light
emitted from the distinctive color light emitted from the adja-
cent base path row of distinctive color lights.
1. A method of predicting the approaching stall of an aircraft
wing, comprising:
sensing air speed over the wing at a predetermined location
spaced above the top surface of the wing to thereby pro-
duce input signals representative of air speed fluctuations
at said location, said fluctuations being caused by air
turbulence over the wing;
using said input signals to produce a signal represensative of
a ratio of the air speed fluctuations to an average air speed;
and
using said ratio signal to produce a signal indicative of immi-
nent stalling.
4,435,696
VISOR ASSEMBLY FOR PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC
SIGNAL
Samuel Gould, San Pedro, and James S. Gould, Los Alamitos,
both of Calif., auignors to Indicator Controls Corporation.
Gardena, Calif.
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,452
Int. a.J EOIF 9/00: F21V 77/00
U.S. a. 340-119 5 Claims
1. In combination with a pedestrian traffic signal having a
housing, and having legends selectively illuminated by light
sources within the housing; a frame mounted on the housing in
front of the legends, said frame having a forward end and
having a rim portion extending inwardly in coplanar relation-
ship with the forward end of the frame; and a visor mounted in *
the frame composed of a set of straight strips extending across
the frame in mutually spaced and parallel relationship, said
straight strips having ends extending under said rim portion,
and a plurality of zigzag strips extending across said frame
between corresponding ones of said straight strips and between
the top and bottom of said frame and said straight strips, said
396
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
zigzag strips having ends and apexes, the ends of said zigzag
strips extending under said rim portions of said frame, and the
apexes of certain ones of said zigzag strips extending under said
rim portion at the top and bottom of said frame, said zigzag
strips and said straight strips being attached to one another.
44
U/0
COUNTER
Vh-
Vl-
«6f-
42
; (-
: , V- F
"'"' CONVERTER
VM --'■ "I M
48^ r
u/0
COUNTER
' SEQUENCE
CON'SOLLER
1. An analog-to-digital conversion method using a voltage-
to-frequency converter comprising the steps of:
counting for a first time period in a first counting device set
to a first counting mode first pulse signals having a fre-
quency corresponding to a voltage level of a first refer-
ence input signal to generate a first count defining a refer-
ence point on a voltage-to-frequency characteristic curve
of the voltage-to-frequency converter;
setting a second counting device to the first count at the end
of the first time period;
counting for a second time period in the second counting
device set to a second counting mode second pulse signals
having a frequency corresponding to a voltage level of a
second reference input signal to generate a second count
defining a graduation point of the voltage-to-frequency
characteristic curve;
counting for a third time period in the first counting device
set to the first count and to the second counting mode
third pulse signals having a frequency corresponding to an
analog input signal to generate a third count; and
determining the voluge level of the analog input signal from
the second count and the third count.
means connected to said channel for detecting the monitor-
ing and alarm signals,
4,435,697
ANALOG-DIGITAL CONVERTER
Yukjhani Takahashi, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo
Shibaura Electric, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 135,662, Mar. 31, 1980, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 855,785, Mar. 10, 1978. This application
Aug. 11, 1982, S«r. No. 407,101
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 12, 1977, 52-27470;
Mar. 12, 1977, 52^27471
Int. a.3 H03K 13/20
U.S. a. 340—347 AD 3 Oaims
508 i' "^
4,435,698
aRcurr arrangement for the transmission
OF measurements to a central, espeoally in
A HRE ALARM SYSTEM
Werner Klett, Ehrenkirchen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Hekatron GmbH, Salzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,258
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 11,
1980, 3021920
Int. a.3 G08B 29/00. 17/06
U.S. a. 340—512 8 Claims
1. Apparatus for the transmission of alarm signals to a detec-
tor, comprising
a signaling channel,
means for energizing said signaling channel,
means for applying monitoring signals to said channel at a
first frequency,
'means for applying alarm signals to said channel at a second
frequency greater than that of said first frequency, and
wherein the duration of said monitoring signals is no longer
than the interval between said alarm signals.
4 435 699
PROCESS AND INSTALLATION FOR THE REMOTE
CONTROL OF A PREMISES WATCH RADAR
APPARATUS
Maurice Tacussel, 105 bis, rue de Point de Jour, 92100 Bou-
logne-Billancourt, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 739,022, Nov. 4, 1976, abandoned. ThU
application Aug. 7, 1978, Ser. No. 931,433
Oaims priority, application France, Nov. 7, 1975, 75 34214
Int. a.3 G08B 1/08, 13/26
U.S. a. 340—539 16 Oaims
U.± 1 w
'-'-?^ 'O. If"
6. A premises watch radar controlled by a portable transmit-
ting device, said radar comprising:
radar means for detecting intrusions including means for
transmitting and receiving radiations of energy;
alarm means coupled to said radar means for producing a
warning in response to said radar means detecting an
intrusion, and having two stable states: an operative sjtate
wherein said alarm means is capable of providing a warn-
ing in response to intrusions detected by said radar appara-
tus and an inoperative state wherein said alarm means is
inhibited from providing such a warning; said alarm
means including means responsive to a switching signal
produced by the actuation of a portable transmitting de-
vice by an operator for alternatively switching said alarm
means from said inoperative state to said operative state
and from said operative state to said inoperative state; and
means for temporarily inhibiting said switching means from
responding to the switching signal upon a first change of
state of said alarm means in response to said switching
means, to prevent repeated actuations of said transmitting
device by an operator from causing repeated changes of
state of said alarm means during a predetermined time
period following such first change of state.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
397
4,435,700
EVENT DETECTION AND INDICATION SYSTEM
Patrick H. Alley, Squirrel Uap, Hagley Rd., Reet, Hampshire,
GU13 8LH, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 197,773, flied as PCT/GB79/00204
Nov. 30, 1979, published as WO80/01214, Jun. 12, 1980,
§ 102(e) date Jul. 29, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,594
Int. 0.3 G08B 1/08; H04Q 7/00
U.S. O. 340-539 15 Qaims
fP
1^ L
1. An event detection and indication system, comprising a
loop circuit incorporating a series of event-responsive
switches, each such switch having associated therewith means
for maintaining electrical continuity within the loop circuit
whenever its associated switch is operated to interrupt the loop
circuit, the means producing an electrical signal pulse of prede-
termined characteristic in the loop circuit upon operation of an
associated event-responsive switch, remote indication means
for indicating a switch has been operated, and a control means
for controlling operation of the indication means operationally
interposed between the loop circuit and the indication means
and ex'i^usively responsive to the operation of an event-respon-
sive switch to produce a control signal which initiates a prede-
termined operational cycle of the indication means, the indica-
tion means responding to such a control signal by completing
the predetermined operational cycle irrespective of the resto-
ration of the event-responsive switch which gave rise to the
signal to its initial non-operated condition, the control means
remaining responsive after completion of the predetermined
operational cycle of the indication means to subsequent opera-
tion of any other event-responsive switch even though any
previously operated event-responsive switch is in its operated
condition.
4,435,701
PORTABLE INTRUSION ALARM
Carlos P. Baon, 1763 Geneva Ave., San Francisco, Calif. 94134
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 288,606, Jul. 30, 1981,
abandoned. This application Oct. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 435,421
Int. O.^ G08B 13/14
U.S. O. 340—546 9 Qaims
first, second and third switches; and
operating means, operably coupled to said actuators, for
closing said second and third switches and opening said
first switch when in a first position and for opening said
second and third switches and closing said first switch
when in a second position;
a position sensitive switch;
first conductor means for electrically connecting said first
switch, said position sensitive switch and said first actua-
tor in series with one another and in parallel with said
electrical source;
second conductor means for electrically connecting said
second switch and said second actuator in series with one
another and in parallel with said electrical source;
a normally open silencing switch connected in series along
said second conductor means;
third conductor means for electrically connecting said third
switch and said warning device in series with each other
and in parallel with said electrical source; and
housing means for housing said warning device, said latch
relay, said first, second and third conductor means and
said position sensitive switch, said position sensitive
switch being mounted in said housing means so when said
housing means is upright said position sensitive switch is
open and when said housing means is displaced substan-
tially from being upright said position sensitive switch is
closed. w
4,435,702
CAPAaTIVELY COUPLED ROTATIONAL SPEED
DETECTOR
Youg Imai, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical Com-
pany Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293.944
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 19, 1980, 55-
116942[U]
Int. O.' GOIP 3/54
U.S. O. 340-671 4 Qaims
OUTPUT
L—iJ^ CIRCUIT
DETECTING
CIRCUIT
4B
'36
3*l|lF
40— y
44 —
^\
%^
rlZ ^34^13
22
■^J^^T^
24'
i^
^28
26
^/O ^« ^/O
1. A portable, tippable alarm comprising:
an electrical source having first and second terminals;
an electric warning device;
a latch relay comprising:
first and second latching actuators;
1. A rotational speed detector comprising: a rotating body of
a rotating machine having an axis so that said body rotates
about the axis, a light-weight rotating member secured to said
rotating body and having a first surface encircling said rotating
body with a plurality of electrodes arranged on said first sur-
face at a predetermined pitch and forming a continuous circle
of alternating electrodes and spaces between said electrodes
around said rotating body; a light-weight stationary member
having a second surface extending around said rotating body
and disposed in opposed facing relation to said first surface of
said rotating member, and said second surface having a plural-
ity of electrodes extending around said rotating body at the
same pitch as that of the said electrodes of said rotating mem-
ber with said electrodes on said second surface forming a
continuous circle of alternating electrodes and spaces between
said electrodes with said electrodes on said rotating member
being simultaneously alignable with said electrodes on said
stationary member during rotation; and means for detecting a
variation in electrosutic capacity between said electrodes of
said rotating member and said electrodes of saTd sUtionary
member, and for producing an output corresponding to a
rotational speed of said rotating body in accordance with the
variation in electrostatic capacity.
398
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,703
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SIMULTANEOUS
DISPLAY OF CHARACTERS OF VARIABLE SIZE AND
DENSITY
Glenn E. Hunt; Michael C. Alexander, Gerald L. Lozano, and
Gerald O. Manktelow, all of Austin, Tex., assignors to Data
General Corporation, Westboro, Mass.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,613
Int. a.3 G09G 1/16
U.S. a. 340—723 3 Oaims
=> sss t^^a£:f
WWM
■ JSJ',
m^tHVaXn
HIMWimiM-
XXXT
r>
-r.-.
I
1. In a raster scan CRT display terminal, the method of
providing a dot clock signal and character clock signal of
variable frequency to the display logic of said terminal
whereby multiple character sizes and densities may be dis-
played during the same frame, said method comprising the
steps of:
providing a first dot clock signal;
providing a second dot clock signal having a frequency
different from said first dot clock signal;
providing a character rate signal indicating which of said dot
clock signals is to be pi^vided to said display logic during
the character row;
if said character rate signal is in a first state, generating said
character clock signal responsive to a first plurality of
pulses of said first dot clock signal and providing said
character clock signal and said first dot clock signal to said
display logic during display of said character row;
if said character rate signal is in a second state, generating
said character clock signal responsive to a second plural-
ity of pulses of said second dot clock signal and providing
said second dot clock signal and said character clock
signal to said display logic during display of said character
row; and
repeating the above steps for each character row.
4,435,704
LOOP TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Toyokazu Hashimoto, Kanagawa; Hiroyuki Wada, Hadano;
Masahiko Kida, Hadano; Hisashi Matsumura, Hadano, and
Susumu Nakayashiki, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to
Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 354,918
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 13, 1981, 56/35337;
Sep. 7, 1981, 56/139715
Int. a.3 H04Q 9/00: G06F 11/00
VJS. a. 340—825.01 14 Oaims
1. A loop transmission system including a plurality of sta-
tions connected in series in a pair of looped transmission lines,
wherein said plurality of stations include a supervising station
and at least one terminal station,
said supervising station comprising specific signal sending
means for sending out a speciflc signal selected one of said
pair of transmission lines which is to be operated as a spare
line not used for data transmission, and
said terminal station comprising specific signal detection
means capable of detecting said specific signal from said
specific signal sending means through either one of said
pair of transmission lines, and discrimination means for
controlling the transmission line through which said spe-
cific signal is detected by said detection means to Of>erate
as a spare transmission line which is not used for data
vssr
^^?*#rn'
transmission and for controlling the transmission line
through which said specific signal is not detected to oper-
ate as a currently used transmission line for data transmis-
sion.
4,435,705
DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEMS
Reginald W. Stevens, Stockport, England, assignor to Interna-
tional Computers Limited, Stevenage, England
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,942
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 18, 1981,
8105133
Int. a.3 H04Q 9/00
U.S. O. 340—825.05 7 Oaims
mKESSOU
mrgnee
. UNIT .
BaaOEP{--2a
DECOOCfl .
6 5
1. A data transmission system comprising a plurality of
encoder/decoders and a plurality of transmission links each for
the transmission of a signal combining a carrier and a data
signal, each encoder/decoder being connected between an
incoming one and an outgoing one of the said transmission
links and the said transmission links connecting the en-
coder/decoders in a closed ring;
each encoder/decoder comprising means for recovering an
input data signal and the carrier from the signal received
from its incoming transmission link and means connected
to receive the recovered carrier and an output data signal
for combining the carrier and the output data signal for
output onto its outgoing transmission link, the en-
coder/decoder thereby providing a path for the carrier
from its incoming to its outgoing transmission link;
each such path together with the transmission links provid-
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
399
ing a single closed path for circulation of the carrier which
path is subject to variation in its length; and
the ring as a whole forming a single oscillatory system which
sustains the carrier once initiated without the simulta-
neous injection of carrier into the said closed path from a
source outside the said closed path at a frequency constant
around the ring but free to vary with time in dependence
of the length of the closed path and such as to give an
integral number of carrier cycles around the ring.
4,435,706
SWITCH NETWORK
John E. Callan, Milwaukee, Wis., assignor to Allen-Bradley
Company, Milwaukee, Wis.
. Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,474
I Int. O.J H04Q 9/00
U.S. O.
340—825.08
3 Oaims
'n^
1. A network for ascertaining the state of a plurality of
sensing devices, which comprises:
a communications line;
a master controller connected to the communications line
for generating address signals thereon, the master control-
ler including,
(a) address generator means for establishing a sequence of
station numbers,
(b) oscillator means for generating sinusoidal waveforms,
(c) analog switch means for coupling the oscillator means
to the communications line, the analog switch means
being operated by the address generator means to se-
quentially generate series of sinusoidal waveforms on
the communications line, the number of such wave-
forms in each series being determined by the station
number established by the address generator means, and
(d) a receiver circuit coupled to the communications line
and being operable to read the voltage level of the
communications line a predetermined time interval after
each series of sinusoidal waveforms is generated; and a
remote station connected to the communications line
and connected to an associated sensing device, the
remote station including:
(e) counter means for counting the number of sinusoidal
waveforms in each series,
(0 comparator means coupled to the counter means and
being operable to generate an enabling signal when the
counted number of sinusoidal waveforms corresponds
to a preset station number, and
(g) response means coupled to the comparator means and
the station's associated sensing device for generating a
preselected voltage level on the communications hne
during the predetermined time interval after the series
of sinusoidal V'aveforms is generated when the enabling
signal is present, the voltage level being indicative of
the state of the station's associated sensing device.
4,435,707
WEATHER RADAR WITH SIGNAL COMPENSATION
FOR PREOPITATION
John F. Clark, Princeton, N.J., assignor to Sperry Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,782
Int. 0.3 GOIS 13/95
U.S. O. 343-5 W 3 claims
1. In a weather radar of the type including a sensitivity time
control (STC) circuit coupled to an IF amplifier in a receiver
which in turn is coupled to an antenna for receiving pulses
reflected from precipitation in the path of pulses radiated from
the antenna, the STC for providing a signal as a function of
time to vary the gain of the IF amplifier and an analog-to-digi-
tal (A/D) converter coupled between the IF amplifier and an
addressable memory having an output coupled to a display
device, the improvement comprising:
means coupled to receive amplified siganis from said IF
amplifier for integrating said amplified signals over a
preselected time interval to obtain an integrated signal
value and provide a signal representative of said inte-
grated signal value after said time interval has expired;
summing means coupled to receive said signal representative
of said integrated signal at said expiration of said time
interval and to receive said STC signal at a time subsun-
tially in coincidence with said expiration time for provid-
ing a signal at an output terminal representative of a sum
of said integrated signal value and said STC signal, said
400
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
sum representative signal coupled to cause said IF ampli-
fier to exhibit a variable gain in accordance therewith; and
means coupled between said summing means output termi-
nal and said IF ampHfier for limiting variable gain control
signals coupled to said IF amplifier to levels that insure
that said IF amplifier operates at gains that are no greater
than a preselected maximum.
4,435,709
RADAR RANGING SYSTEM FOR USE WITH SLOPING
TARGET
Ronald W. Kipp, Croydon, Pa., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,983 .
Int. a.3 GOIS U/32
U.S. a. 343—14 14 Claims
-»•■'>« -*<(i}
4,435,708
MEANS FOR ELIMINATING STEP ERROR IN FM/CW
RADIO ALTIMETERS
Constantinos S. Kyriakos, Deerfield Beach, Fla., assignor to The
Bendix Corporation, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,854
Int. a.3 GOIS 9/04
U.S. a. 343—12 A 6 Oaims
ee
.■■.C'.-> t'" ■:■/•■■[ * »' I *
le LI 17
IS
1. In a radio altimeter of the FM/CW type having a radio
transmitter modulated in frequency by a cyclic modulating
wave, portions of which vary linearly with time, a receiver for
receiving refiections from an object of signals transmitted by
said transmitter and a mixer to which signals received by said
receiver and a poriion of the signal transmitted by said trans-
mitter is applied to produce a frequency difference signal the
frequency of which is indicative of the distance between said
transmitter and the object reflecting signals from said transmit-
ter,
means for eliminating step error in the output indication of
the altimeter, comprising,
means for generating a first gate signal having a logic "1|'
level during times said modulating wave varies linearly
with time and a logic "0" level at other times;
logic means to which said first said gate signal and said
frequency difference signal are applied, said logic means
being responsive to said logic "1" level of said first gate
signal and said frequency difference signal to produce a
second gate signal having a logic "1" level of duration
beginning with the coincident appearance of said logic
"1" level of said first gate signal and the beginning of a
cycle of said difference frequency signal and extending for
an integral number of cycles of said frequency difference
signal while said first gate signal remains at said logic "1"
level;
means controlled by said logic "1" level of second gate
signal for determining the frequency of said difference
frequency signal during the period of said logic "1" level
of said second gate signal; and
means for numerically processing said frequency of said
difference frequency signal to provide a distance indica-
tion as the output of said altimeter.
TTTT
>: III )) li
1. A signal processing system for use with a radar range
measuring system which transmits a radio frequency beam of
known finite angle toward a target which is at not greater than
a known non-normal angle to the beam to illuminate a portion
thereof and receives a return reflected signal therefrom and
produces therefrom a beat frequency signal having various
frequency components corresponding to various ranges be-
tween said target and said range measuring system, said signal
processing system comprising in combination:
means responsive to said beat frequency signal for determin-
ing the lowest frequency value F^, thereof;
means responsive to frequency F/, and to a knowledge of the
maximum angle said target can attain and to said angle of
said transmitted beam for determining the maximum fre-
quency Vx associated with the maximum distance to said
target; and
means responsive to frequency Fjfand to said beat frequency
signal for determining the actual maximum frequency F^
contained in said beat frequency signal.
4,435,710
SYSTEM FOR OBSCURING ANTENNA SIDELOBE
SIGNALS
Norman F. Powell, Howard, Md., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 253,322
Int. a.J GOIS 7/36
U.S. a. 343—18 E 4 Claims
/iiiiiLiinifux
»o«i Misiti \
/nfwiiMtuiEjudro
/mrdXISITIOrSlllELOIES
1. A radar system comprising:
(a) first means for producing a first pulsed radar signal which
is coupled to an antenna to transmit a radar beam having
a predominant main beam and sidelobes;
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
401
(b) a receiver coupled to an antenna to receive signals, hav-
ing a frequency spectrum substantially equal to the fre-
quency spectrum of said main beam;
(c) second means for producing and transmitting a second
pulsed radar signal having a power density which is at
least substantially equal to the power density of said side-
lobes of said radar beam and a frequency spectrum which
at least includes the frequency spectrum of said first
pulsed radar signal.
4,435,711
RADIO TELEPHONE WITH POSITION TRANSMISSION
CAPABILITY
Cecil C. Ho, Irving; Oaude A. Sharpe, Piano; Bruce A. Butcher,
Dallas, and Alexander G. Bell, Piano, all of Tex., assignors to
Texas Instruments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,253
Int. Q\? GOIS 1/24
U.S. a. 343-389 4 Qaims
■ EMOTt STATION IQ.
LOAAN
99 00
20.
VHP T1IANSMITTCII 1^
FSK MOO
18
26
L
2i
POCITION
ENABLE
* »-»0»5 -l—i! ,
J^-tJ— T- ' I5_^^ \
I TIMING I I I
& 1 1— • »VNTM .
1 * CONTHOL I I I -j
(\38 ^24
I— J ^____^^ F«K OEMOO I
I rreOoTI I M-I270L I 1 I
■^.^ COMP «— .-1070 *—\ "*="* r I
36^ ^34 ^51 \
1. A communication data link system comprising:
(a) a base radio transceiver station including a receiver for
receiving incoming messages, a polling generator means
for generating a carrier identification code signal, a trans-
mitter operatively connected to the polling generator
means for transmitting the code signal and a display means
for displaying the messages; and
(b) a remote radio transceiver for a carrier including a LO-
RAN-C navigation system for outputting signals represen-
tative of the carrier's position, a transmitter of the trans-
ceiver connected to the navigation system output for
transmitting the carrier position signals, a receiver means
for receiving the carrier identification code signal trans-
mitted by the base radio transceiver station and a switch-
ing means for controlling selectively the automatic and
manual transmittal of the carrier position whereby the
carrier position may be transmitted in response to receipt
of the carrier identification code signal or to manual actua-
tion of the switching means for single transmission or
continuous transmission.
tion means delayed in accordance with the simulated
range thereof;
means for mixing the transmission signal and return signal
from said real target to produce a real target beat fre-
quency signal, the frequency of which is indicative of
range to said target;
means for mixing the transmission signal and return signal
from said calibration means to produce a calibration beat
frequency signal, the frequency of which is indicative of
range simulated by said calibration means;
means responsive to the real target beat frequency signal
representative of said real target range for producing a
control signal only when said real target beat signal is of at
least a given quality;
J^XV
5ial5>>lj
k^'^.TR .....
itwru li-^ ^-^-^ ^~
^ 0* UiOAiTofi CMP
means responsive to said control signal and to a given cycle
of said real target beat frequency signal for determining a
signal of value Pr indicative of the period of said real
target beat frequency signal only when said control signal
is present;
means responsive to at least a selected cycle of said calibra-
tion beat frequency signal occurring during the same time
said given cycle of real target beat frequency occurs for
determining a signal of value Pc indicative of a period of
the calibration beat frequency signal; and
means responsive to said signal of value Pr, signal of value
Pc and calibrated range Re for determining said target
range Rf.
4,435,712
FM-CW RADAR RANGING SYSTEM WITH SIGNAL
DRIFT COMPENSATION
Ronald W. Kipp, Croydon, Pa., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,573
Int. a.3 GOIS 7/40
U.S. a. 343-17.7 10 Qaims
1. A frequency modulated-continuous wave (FM-CW) rang-
ing system including a calibration means for simulating a target
of known electrical length Re, said system determining range
Rrto a real target comprising in combination:
means for producing an FM-CW radio frequency signal;
means for transmitting said^M-CW signal to said real target
and for receiving reti/rn signals therefrom delayed in
accordance with the target range;
means for transmitting said FM-CW signal to said calibra-
tion means concurrently with its transmission to said
target and for receiving return signals from said calibra-
4,435,713
WHIP ANTENNA CONSTRUCnON
Bernard Gasparaitis, Tamarac; Thomas W. Long, Jc, and
Charles P. Richardson, both of Coral Springs, all of Fla.,
assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg, III.
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,220
Int. C\? HOIQ 1/36
U.S. a. 343—702 4 Gaims
1. A whip antenna assembly for attachment to a receptacle in
a communications device comprising:
a highly flexible conductive antenna cable having a first and
second end,
a conductive metal base section injection cast onto said
antenna cable first end,
a knob injection cast onto said cable second end, and
402
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
an environmental cover injection molded over said antenna
cable and base sectiori to provide protection and support
can pass through said opening between said first and
second segments.
L
for said whip antenna assembly without substantially
reducing the flexibility of said assembly.
4,435,714
GRATING LOBE ELIMINATOR
Howard H. Luh, Sunnyvale, Calif., assignor to Ford Aerospace
& Communications Corp., Dearborn, Mich.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,633
Int. a.3 HOIQ 15/02. 19/19
4,435,715
ROD-EXaTED WAVEGUIDE SLOT ANTENNA
James S. Ajioka, FuUerton, and Dick M. Joe, Anaheim, both of
Calif., assignors to Hughes Aircraft Company, El Segundo,
Calif.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,880
Int. a.3 HOIQ 13/18
U.S. a. 343—771 3 Oaims
U.S. a. 343—753
^acsiPomr
1. In a power-radiating slotted waveguide having a rectan-
gular waveguide which has first and second broad walls and
first and second narrow walls, the first one of said narrow
walls having a substantially non-inclined slot formed therein,
6 Claims '^e improvement comprising:
(a) a first substantially linear conducting rod having one end
rigidly connected to said first narrow wall adjacent to one
long edge of said slot and having the second end rigidly
connected to the first broad wall; and
(b) a second substantially linear conducting rod having one
end rigidly connected to said first narrow wall adjacent to
the opposite long edge of said slot as said first rod and
having the second end rigidly connected to the second
broad wall. ,
foCMi ^^-•yw
1. An antenna system for radiating energy having a radiating
array, a secondary energy convergence aperture means, and a
main energy convergence aperture means, said antenna system
including:
orthogonally linearly polarized feed elements;
a grid of parallel conducting strips placed in the focal plane
tof said antenna system, said strips being oriented in the
direction of the uplink wave polarizati jn thereby eliminat-
ing the grating lobes at the uplink frequency band by
reflecting the energy of the particular spatial harmonic
components which give rise to the grating lobes;
said grid of conducting strips being positioned between said
secondary energy convergence aperture means and said
main convergence aperture means, and the spacing be-
tween adjacent parallel conducting strips being greater
than zero and less than one-tenth of the wavelength of the
radiated energy; and
said grid of parallel conducting strips having a first segment
and a second segment spaced from one another by an
opening and centered about said main energy conver-
gence aperture means so that a substantial portion of the
beam from said secondary energy convergence aperture
means to said main energy convergence aperture means
4,435,716
METHOD OF MAKING A CONICAL SPIRAL ANTENNA
Adrian Zandbergen, 28 Camano La., Port Ludlow, Wash. 98365
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,925
Int. a.3 HOIQ 1/36
U.S. a. 343—895 3 Oaims
1. The method of making a freestanding antenna which
comprises placing a conductor wire coil tapered from a base
end portion thereof to a tip end portion thereof in substantially
axial alignment with the interior of a preformed elongated
casing having an interior tapered in the same direction as the
taper of the coil, with the major portion of the casing interior
length of a cross section larger than the external cross section
of the tip end portion of the coil but smaller than the external
cross section of the base end portion coil, and the interior of
the casing having a smaller degree of lengthwise taper than the
degree of taper of the coil, elongating the coil within the casing
and simultaneously thereby decreasing its degree of tap>er to
/
/
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
match the degree of taper of the casing interior and to lodge
convolutions of the coil against the interior of the casing in
4
403
■^:
4,435,718
INK DROP PRINTING SYSTEM
Frederic L. Qark, Piano; Orville A. Kaffenberger, Jr.; Suresh C.
ParaiOpe, both of Dallas; David W. Smith, Richardson, and
Jack D. Ames, Irving, all of Tex., assignors to The Mead
Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,424
Int. Q\? GOID 15/18: B65H i/30
U.S. a 346-75 ^ jci^„.
-^i:^
spaced relationship lengthwise of the casing, and bonding the
elongated coil to the interior of the casing.
4,435,717
LIQUID JET RECORDING PROCESS AND RECORDING
LIQUID THEREFOR
Tsuyoshi Eida, Chiba, and Masatsune Kobayashi, Yokohama,
both of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,645
Oaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 10, 1981, 56-54562
Int. 0.3 GOID 9/O0. 15/16
U.S. O. 346-1.1 12 Oaims
Hi
1. An ink drop printing system comprising:
a pair of storage trays for storing separate supplies of print-
ing sheets,
feed means for feeding said printing sheets from said storage
trays,
sheet delivery means for receiving said sheets from said feed
means and delivering said sheets along generally converg-
ing delivery paths toward a common reception point,
transport means for transporting said printing sheets along a
printing path which is folded backwardly and upwardly
from said common reception point,
at least one inclined and angularly extending jet drop print-
ing head supported adjacent said transport means for
progressively printing said sheets as they are transported
therepast,
sheet registraton means for registering the edges of said
sheets prior to passage beneath said printing head, and
inverting means for receiving printed sheets from said trans-
port means, inverting said sheets, and delivering said
sheets to said sheet delivery means for redelivery to said
transport means and printing on the reverse sides thereof
4 435 719
FLUIDIC MATRIX PRINTER
Alvin A. Snaper, 2800 Cameo Cir„ Las Vegas, Nev. 89107
Filed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,461
Int. O.J GOID 15/18
U.S. O. 346—75 9 Qaims
OS
112
MJ
III
1. A liquid jet recording process comprising exerting ther-
mal energy to a recording liquid to form liquid droplets and
performing recording with these liquid droplets, which is
characterized in that said recording liquid comprises at least a
dye having in the molecule 1 to 6 hydroxyl groups and no
amino group and 1 to 3 members selected from the group
consisting of a sulfo group and a carboxyl group, I to 4 azo
groups, and 0 to 2 imino groups, and a thermal decomposition
point of 250* C. or more and a liquid medium therefor.
1. A fluidic printing apparatus comprising;
a plurality of fluidic printing elements arranged in an array;
said fluidic printing elements being biased beam deflecting
type fluidic flip-flop elements;
404
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a fluid circulating means for circulating printing fluid
through said array of fluidic printing elements;
paper transport means for transporting paper past said array
of fluidic elements; and
electronic means for selective electronic activation of said
beam deflecting fluidic printing elements to discharge said
pqpting fluid unto said paper in a predetermined pattern.
4,435,720
DEFLECTION CONTROL TYPE INK JET PRINTING
APPARATUS
Masanori Horike, and Yutaka Ebi, both of Tokyo, Japan, as-
signors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,450
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 21, 1981, 56-76926;
May 21, 1981, 56-76925
Int. a.3 GOID 15/18
VJS. a. 346—75 9 Oaims
iio-fErorrssri
l-=*;»>„6 -^
.^0
1. A deflection control type ink jet printing apparatus com-
prising:
an ink ejection head for ejecting a jet of ink;
charging means for electrostatically and selectively charg-
ing ink droplets separated from the jet of ink;
deflection means for electrostatically deflecting the charged
ink droplets to a plurality of predetermined steps in accor-
dance with the electrostatic charges on the ink droplets;
deflection detecting means for detecting a deviation from a
reference deflection of a deflection of the charged ink
droplets which are deflected to predetermined one of the
plurality of steps;
ink supply means for supplying an ink under a predeter-
mined variable pressure to the head; and
control means for controlling the ink supply means to vary
the pressure to be applied to the ink in accordance with a
deviation detected by said deflection detecting means;
the deflection detecting means comprising electrode means
for sensing an amount of charge on each deflected ink
droplet, and computing means for computing the devia-
tion in response to the sensed amount of the charge on the
deflected ink droplet;
the electrode means comprising first and second electrodes
disposed parallel to each other and downstream of the
deflection means, an ink deflection path through which
the ink droplets of the reference deflection are to pass
being defined intermediate between the first and second
electrodes, the electrodes being constructed to sense volt-
ages induced by the deflected ink droplets passing through
said ink deflection path.
4,435,721
PRINT HEAD FOR AN ON-DEMAND TYPE INK-JET
PRINTER
Mitsuo Tsuzuki, and Michihisa Suga, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 5, 1982, Ser. No. 375,147
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 6, 1981, 56-67966
Int. O.J GOID 15/18
U.S. O. 346—140 R n Claims
I ORivmc
HEtNS
, 1. A print head for an on-demand type ink-jet printer for
jetting ink droplets on a printing medium, said print head
comprising:
a plurality of pressure chambers filled with ink;
a plurality of pressure exertion means for exerting pressures
on said ink filled in said pressure chambers in response to
driving signals;
• a nozzle for jetting said ink droplets;
means for communicating said pressure chambers with said
nozzle; and
a plurality of first fluid control means disposed in ink pas-
sages between said pressure chambers and said nozzle for
controlling the flow of ink in response to the ink pressure.
4,435,722
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING APPARATUS
Hideaki Kato, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Konishiroku Photo
Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 254,464
Oaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 15, 1980, 55-
51535[U]
Int. 0.3 GOID 15/06
U.S. O. 346—153.1 5 Oaims
flClOOV
1. In an electrophotographic recording apparatus including
a housing, a rotatable charge carrying drum in the housing, an
electrostatic recording head disposed in closely spaced gap-
defining proximity to the surface of the drum for impressing an
electrostatic latent image thereon, a door of the housing mov-
able between closed and open conditions to enable access to
the interior of the housing, and means for effecting operative
rotation of the drum and for normally disabling drum rotation
when the housing door is open, the improvement comprising:
light means in the housing,
means for illuminating said light means when the housing
door is in its open condition,
said light means being so disposed adjacent the closely
spaced proximity of the drum and recording head and at a
location remote from the housing door that, when the
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
405
;l;^;ruS^c!SS;S iS;tdy lle^^^r Jf;r '/'T^'^"^ of sa.d f^ame openmg. each bar means
open housing door, and ^'"^ rotatable about its longitudmal dimension for pivotally
manually operable means for enabling selective rotation of '"°\'"« "* connected arm between an open position wherein
the drum only when the housing door is in its open condi- ^'"^ '^^^"^* ^^" ^ located within said frame
tion so that, when the housing door is open and the gap I
between the drum and recording head is illuminated by |
said light means, operation of said manual means to selec-
tively rotate the drum enables ready viewing of the gap
throughout the full rotative circumference of the drum to '* .
thereby facilitate servicing of the recording apparatus.
4,435,723
RECORDING APPARATUS WITH EDITING
CAPABILITY
Ryubun Seimiya; Shigeru Inowa, both of Hino; Noriyoshi
Tarumi, Hachioji; Masahiko Matsunawa, Hachioji, and Hiro-
shi Tokunaga, Hachioji, all of Japan, assignors to Konishiroku
Photo Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,865
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 8, 1980, 55-123525;
Sep. 8, 1980, 55-123523
Int. a.J GOID 15/06
U.S. CI. 346—154 6 Claims
grooves and a closed position wherein said device can be
engaged by said connected arm to secure the device with its
leads in said frame grooves to the carrier, each bar means being
biased to urge its connected arm into its said closed position.
•>--:
M
I CLOOlf ■
• II
,m>-m»| awiTiiil
1 ^11
^
k
H
1. A document editing apparatus comprising means deter-
mining the spatial coordinates of that portion of a document
image to be extracted or erased, means translating said coordi-
nates into electrical signals, means storing such coordinate
signals, means scanning a document to be edited, means con-
verting the optical image of said document into electric image
signals, means recording the edited document, means produc-
ing coiJtrol signals from said stored coordinate signals, includ-
ing switching means determining whether the selected por-
tions of the document image should be extracted or erased,
image signal switching means for actuating said recording
means, and means applying said electric image signals and said
control signals to said image signal switching means.
4,435,725
COLOR SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUIT TO REDUCE
CROSS-COLOR DISTURBANCE AND COLOR FRINGING
Nobuya Nagao, and Teturou Sakai, both of Fukaya, Japan,
assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawa-
saki, Japan
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,725
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 16, 1980, 55-143619
Int. O.^ H04N 9/535
U.S.0. 358-36 I 3 Oaims
4,435,724
SINGLE PIECE CARRIER FOR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
DEVICES
Donald E. Ralstin, South Bend, Ind., assignor to Wells Electron-
ics, Inc., South Bend, Ind.
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 301,001
Int. 0.3 HOIL 23/42. 39/02; H02G 13/08
U.S. O. 357-79 5 Oaims
1. A single piece carrier for an integrated circuit device
having a body with leads extending therefrom, said carrier
comprising a frame having upper and lower faces, said frame
having a device-receiving opening extending from said upper
face to said lower face, said upper face including spaced
grooves, said frame opening for accommodating the body of
said device and said frame grooves for receiving the leads of
said device, at least two spaced apart arms projecing above
said frame upper face, the lower end of each arm connected to
a bar means extending between spaced sections of said frame
1. A color signal processing circuit comprising:
a signal separating circuit means for separating a composite
video signal including a luminance signal and a carrier
chrominance signal multiplexed with the luminance signal
to the carrier chrominance signal and the luminance sig-
nal;
a clipping circuit means coupled to receive the luminance
signal from said signal separating circuit means for clip-
ping the luminance signal at levels near its black and white
peak levels to produce a signal containing level transitions
indicative of large luminance signal transitions;
a control pulse generating circuit means coupled to said
clipping circuit means for generating control pulses corre-
sponding to said level transitions;
a signal transmission path coupled to receive the carrier
chrominance signal from said signal separating circuit
means, and including a signal attentuating circuit means
for attenuating the carrier chrominance signal applied
thereto in response to application of control pulses from
said control pulse generating circuit means.
406
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,726
ONE SHOT PREDICTOR FOR MIXED MODE
DOCUMENTS
Henry H. Liao, RoMmoor, Calif., assignor to Xerox Corpora-
tion, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 161,474, Jun. 20, 1980. This
application Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,902
Int. a.3 H04N 7/12
U.S. a. 358—135 4 Claims
FKM IIT ■
TO 101
//
//
PtCDlCTM
ENCODED
COUyUNOTION
CHMNEL
OH
OAT<
0C-P«OICI0«
DECODER
STODAGE
a'
on any one of said bundles at said input plane end will
produce at the output plane end of said bundle a plurality
of light pulses of equal intensity each delayed uniformly in
time in proportion to the difference in length of the fibers.
4,435,728
nELD FREQUENCY-DOUBLING ORCUIT FOR A
TELEVISION SIGNAL
Johannes G. Raven, and Marcellinus J. J. C. Annegam, both of
Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,545
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Feb. 9, 1981,
8100603 '
Int. a.3 H04N 5/02
U.S. a. 358—140 6 Claims
1. The method of using an m bit pattern of video data of the
previous and current scan lines to predict each current bit in
each n bit nibble of data of a raster input scanner bit stream,
and to produce an n bit nibble of predicted output per clock
comprising the steps of:
first, during a first clock period, using all m bits of video
except the z bits immediately preceding each current bit to
produce all possible predicter outputs for each of the n bits
in the current nibble,
second during a second clock period using said n bit data
nibble and the z bits immediately preceding each of said n
bits to produce the final n predicted output bits, and
concurrently performing said first step on the current nibble
and said second step on the preceding nibble so that n bits
of predicted data are produced for each clock.
CMMioe-uvt* Device
4,435,727
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR USE IN
CALIBRATING THE TIME AXIS AND INTENSITY
LINEARITY OF A STREAK CAMERA
Norman H. Schiller, Queens, and Robert R. Alfano, Bronx, both
of N.Y., assignors to Hamamatsu Corporation, Middlesex,
NJ.
Filed May 27, 1982, Ser. No. 382,803
Int. a.3 H04N 7/18
U.S. a. 358—139
V
9aalnis
1. Apparatus for use in calibrating the time axis and intensity
linearity of a streak camera over at least one time scale, said
streak camera having an input slit, said apparatus comprising:
a. light means for producing a pulse of light,
b. at least one bundle of optical fibers, each bundle of optical
fibers comprising a plurality of optical fibers of different
lengths with the difference in lengths of the fibers in each
bundle being uniform, the difference in length of the fibers
in one bundle being different from the difference in length
of the fibers in each other bundle, the fibers in each bundle
being arranged so that one end thereof terminates in an
input plane adapted to be positioned to receive said light
pulse and the other end thereof terminates in an output
plane adapted to be positioned at the input slit of the streak
camera, and
m^ans for supporting said bundles of fibers,
whereby a pulse of light from said light means impinging
:s!^=
1. A field frequency-doubling circuit for a television signal
having an input for the television signal whose field frequency
must be doubled, a first and a second field memory, respec-
tively, a change-over device switching at half the field fre-
quency for writing information into the first and the second
field memory, respectively, at a predetermined rate and read-
ing the second and the first field memory, respectively, at a
rate of substantially twice the write rate, and an output for the
field frequency-doubled television signal, characterized in that
the change-over device comprises a portion for supplying to a
picture memory output of the circuit a signal which has been
alternately delayed two field periods by the first and the sec-
ond field memory, respectively.
c.
d.
4,435,729
TELEVISION RECEIVER WITH SELECnVELY
DISABLED ON-SCREEN CHARACTER DISPLAY
SYSTEM
Leopold A. Harwood, Bridgewater, N.J., and Robert L. Shanley,
II, Indianapolis, Ind., assignors to RCA Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,884
Int. a.3 H04N 5/22
U.S. a. 358—183 5 Claims
1. In a system for processing image representative video
signals comprising an image component occurring during
periodic image intervals and a blanking component occurring
during periodic blanking intervals, said system including a
kinescope for providing an image display in response to sig-
nals, including said video signals, applied thereto; apparatus
comprising
a source of periodic switching signals occurring during said
blanking intervals;
a character generator for providing auxiliary character
representative signals to said kinescope during said video
signal image intervals, said character generator being
undesirably subject to producing false character signals
during said blanking intervals; and
control means coupled to said character generator and re-
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
407
sponsive to said switching signals for automatically ren-
dering said character generator inoperative to produce
latch for maintaining said disabling means energized when
said latch is set;
means for providing user activated receiver on and off com-
mand signals;
1. Apparatus for processing first and second video signals
from first and second signal sources, said signals having oppo-
site noise versus frequency characteristics, said apparatus com-
prising filtering means for filtering each of said signals with
complementary low and high pass filters, respectively, to
produce filtered signals having reduced noise, combining
means for combining said filtered signals together; and
a pair of circuit means for clamping and blanking each of
said video signals respectively.
4,435,731
TELEVISION RECEIVER DISABLING ORCUIT
Ravadee Kliebphipat; Ronald E. Femsler, both of Indianapolis,
and James E. Hicks, New Palestine, all of Ind., assignors to
RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 298,389
Int. a.3 H04N 5/44: HOIJ 29/70
U.S. a. 358—243 13 Qaims
1. A television receiver disabling means comprising:
means for disabling a television receiver when said disabling
means is energized;
means for detecting a receiver fault condition;
first means coupled to said fault detecting means for energiz-
ing said disabling means in the presence of a detected
receiver fault condition, said first means incorporating a
~ JO ,
character signals including said false character signals
during said blanking intervals.
4,435,730
LOW NOISE CCD OUTPUT
Sidney L. Bendell, Riverton, and Peter A. Levine, Trenton, both
of N.J., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,212
Int. a.3 H04N 3/14
U.S. a. 358—213 8 Claims
second means coupled to said disabling means and respon-
sive to said receiver off command signals for energizing
said disabling means in order to disable said television
receiver, said second means incorporating means coupled
to said first means for resetting said latch Ih response to
one of said command signals when said latch is set.
4,435,732
ELECTRO-OPTICAL ILLUMINATION CONTROL
SYSTEM
Gilbert P. Hyatt, P.O. Box 4584, Anaheim, Calif. 92803
Filed Jul. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 169,257
Int. CI.} H04J 5/64
U.S. a. 358—254 37 Qaims
rj»
1. An illumination control system comprising:
an illumination source for generating source illumination;
an illumination filter for generating filtered illumination in
response to the source illumination from said illumination
source;
an electrical control circuit for generating an electrical
control signal;-
an illumination control device for controlling the filtered
illumination from said illumination filter in response to the
electrical control signal from said electrical control cir-
cuit; and
cooling means for conducting heat away from said illumina-
tion control device.
408
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,733
FLYING SPOT SCANNER FOR LASER PRINTER
Takao Tagawa, Kashihara, and Toshio Urakawa,
Yainatokoriyaina, both of Japan, assignors to Sharp Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. Nu 352,151
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 27, 1981, 56-29033
Int. a.i H04N J/24
U.S. a. 358—302 11 Oaims
1. Apparatus for recording the information content of an
electrical signal on the surface of a light-sensitive medium by
means of a plurality of scan traces across said medium, said
apparatus consisting essentially of:
a semiconductor laser diode for providing a light beam of
high intensity modulated in accordance with the electrical
signal supplied thereto, said semiconductor laser diode
comprising a junction plane oriented in a first direction
and emitting a beam having an elliptical cross section;
reflector means comprising a plurality of contiguous reflect-
ing facets rotatable about a central axis;
means for rotating said reflector means about said central
axis;
focusing lens means disposed between said semiconductor
laser diode and said reflector means for focusing said
elliptical beam and passing said elliptical beam to said
reflector means;
wherein said reflector means reflects said elliptical beam
toward said medium, and rotation of said reflector means
causes said beam to scan across said medium in a second
direction orthogonal to said first direction; and
cylindrical lens means disposed between said reflector means
and said medium and having a longitudinal axis parallel to
said second direction for receiving said elliptical beam, for
modifying the cross section of said elliptical beam into
substantially a focused circular beam, and for directing
said circular beam to a selected scan line on said medium.
4,435,734
FM VIDEO RECORDING AND REPRODUCING SYSTEM
David J. Hedberg, Ranchos PaJos Verdes, and C. Gary Nilsson,
Redondo Beach, both of Calif., assignors to VAS Corporation,
Torrance, Calif.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,620
Int. a.3 H04N 5/91. 9/491. 5/76; GllB 5/04
U.S. Q. 358—335 4 Claims
/
*";
JHframet
o
0 tntif
XfJVMS'S 1.
medium, a discriminator for receiving the signal from said
medium and converting it into a video signal corresponding to
the original comprising a wideband balanced pulse discrimina-
tor including means forming a wideband balanced limiter
amplifier to convert signals into a current square wave a bal-
anced transformer coupled to the output of said limiting ampli-
fier and connected in a double-ended, balanced configuration
to also form a high pass filter for differentiating said current
square wave signal to produce a wideband FM demodulated
signal, a full wave rectifier connected to the output of said
transformer to derive a video signal therefrom, a balanced
voltage follower circuit for driving said rectifier, and a base-
band filter for eliminating frequencies above the video base-
band from the output of said rectifier.
4,435,735
MAGNETIC RECORDING-REPRODUONG APPARATUS
WITH CONSTANT LENGTH CUE SIGNAL
Kenji Funita, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 171,533, Jul. 23, 1980,
abandoned. This application Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,187
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 1, 1979, 54-106677
Int. Q\? GllB 15/52. 27/28
U.S. a. 360—74.4 4 Qaims
10
18.;: :;-«
PLAYBACK I t
CIRCUIT I B^i^ PJS5
FILTER
N -^N
VIBRATOR
22
.54
,^27
.'-26
■ • FREoClENCY 1
- -» . DIVIDER • ■ OSOLLATOB |
■ — -r
-<.M
30
*>.?:;
»>?.
A*
80 ~
DRIVER
' r — ^
§1
. COMMRATOR
.FLIP-FUJP .
CIRCUIT
=-87
84 _
K\
1. A magnetic recording-reproducing apparatus which com-
prises:
means for driving a magnetic tape at one of a plurality of
speeds during the recording or reproducing mode, and,
during the fast forward or rewind mode, driving the mag-
netic tape at a higher speed than during the recording or
reproducing mode;
means for recording a cue signal having a lower frequency
than that of a sound signal on the magnetic tape during the
recording mode with the sound signal, the cue signal
having a frequency proportionate to the running speed of
the magnetic tape and being recorded in a length of time
inversely proportionate to the running speed of the mag-
netic tape; and
means for the reproducing the cue signal recorded on the
magnetic tape during the fast forward or rewind mode.
4. In a video reproducing system in which a video signal is
converted into a wideband FM signal and impressed upon a
4,435,736
ISOLATED MULTIPLE CORE MAGNETIC
TRANSDUCER ASSEMBLY
Robert W. Herman, Laguna Beach, Calif., assignor to New
World Computer Company, Inc., Irvine, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 44,534, Jun. 1, W19,
abandoned. This application Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,105
Int. a.3 GllB 5/60. 5/20
U.S. a. 360—103 26 Gaims
1. A magnetic transducer assembly adapted for recording or
retrieving information from a moving magnetic surface, com-
prising:
a slider of non-magnetic material having a slider bearing
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
409
surface adapted to be disposed adjacent to said moving
magnetic surface, said slider bearing surface adapted to
cooperate with said moving magnetic surface and a fluid
within which said moving magnetic surface moves to
form a fluid bearing between said slider bearing surface
and said moving magnetic surface, said fluid bearing
adapted to support said magnetic transducer assembly,
and said slider having mounting surface means opposite
said slider bearing surface for mounting said slider to
suspension means; and
a plurality of magnetic cores each individually supported by
said slider to substantially magnetically isolate each of said
/£
1
'^)
,^
=3
—
/Umbrae
^L
at/ve
MfM/S
.--//
1
"S-^
magnetic cores from the other of the magnetic cores, each
of said magnetic cores including a core bearing surface
adjoining said slider bearing surface and adapted to be
disposed adjacent said moving magnetic surface, said core
bearing surface adapted to cooperate with said moving
magnetic surface and said fluid to form a fluid bearing
between said core bearing surface of each of said plurality
of cores and said moving magnetic surface, each of said
core bearing surfaces further including a gap adapted to
be proximate said moving magnetic surface when said
magnetic transducer assembly is supported by said fluid
bearing with respect to said moving magnetic surface.
4,435,737
LOW COST CAPAOTIVE ACCELEROMETER
Russell F. Colton, Cedar Rapids, Iowa, assignor to Rockwell
International Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,416
Int. a.3 GOIP 15/125: HOIG 5/16
U.S. a. 361—280 12 Qaims
\A 26
1. A semiconductor acceleration transducer comprising:
at least one first substrate means having an electrically con-
ductive portion for forming a first capacitor plate; and
an acceleration-responsive semiconductor means coupled to
said substrate means and spaced adjacent said electrically
conductive portion for forming a second capacitor plate
and being movable in response to acceleration to cause a
change in capacitance between said first and second
plates, said semiconductor means comprising a semicon-
ductor element including a central post portion attached
to said first substrate means, an elastic diaphragm portion
circumferentially extending from said post portion and an
acceleration-responsive mass ring portion circumferen-
tially extending from said diaphragm portion.
1040 O.G.— 14
4,435,738
MULTILAYER CERAMIC CAPACITORS
Elavil Barber, Jr., Simpsonville; Emmanuel E. Karam, Green-
ville; Richard Dunaway, Mauldin, and Ray L. Rogers, Wil-
liamston, all of S.C, assignors to Union Carbide Corporation,
Danbury, Conn.
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,443
Int. a.' HOIG 4/12. 13/00
U.S. a. 361—321 2 Qaims
2. An unfired green ceramic capacitor body comprising a
stack of separate green ceramic plates of the same thickness,
alternate plates having opposing electrodes thereon and said
alternate plates being separated by a plate of non-electroded
green ceramic.
4,435,739
HOLD-DOWN BRACKET FOR PLUG-IN CIRCUIT
BREAKER
Bertrum S. Shelvik, Milwaukee, Wis., assignor to Eaton Corpo-
ration, Oeveland, Ohio
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 373,913
Int. Q.^ H02B 1/04
U.S. CI. 361—346 I 13 Claims
lW*
-^ ^tec '
1. In an electrical panelboard having a plurality of plug-in
circuit breakers, the combination comprising:
a panel;
a mounting rail on said panel for mounting one end of said
circuit breakers;
insulating means mounted on said panel;
a plurality of bus bars supported by said insulating means,
said bus bars being transversely spaced with respect to
410
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
said mounting rail extending along said panel parallel to
said mounting rail and said bus bars having first plug-in
connector means spaced at intervals along their length;
a multi-pole main circuit breaker having a plurality of sec-
ond plug-in connector means cooperably engagable with
respective ones of said first plug-in connector means, one
end of said multi-pole main circuit breaker being mounted
to said mounting rail and said second plug-in connector
means being engaged with respective ones of said first
plug-in connector means, said main circuit breaker having
wire receiving terminals for connecting said main circuit
breaker to a source of electrical power; and
hold-down means secured to said panel, said hold-down
means having a first portion overlying said mounting rail
and a second portion overlying a forward portion of said
main circuit breaker, said second portion being positioned
with respect to said first portion such that force exerted on
said second portion by movement of said main circuit
breaker in a direction to effect separation of said first and
second plug-in connector means causes said first portion
to be compressed against said mounting rail, (hereby re-
sisting said movement of said circuit breaker.
^"
4,435,740
ELECTRIC ORCUIT PACKAGING MEMBER
Bill F. Huckabee, Santa Cruz, and William L. Wright, Saratoga,
both of Calif., assignors to International Business Machines
Corporation, Arnionk, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,573
Int. a.i H05K 1/18 'r
U.S. a. 361—398 4 Qaims
/\
M.«^
'30-
s^&szm_
V.
)4-.^
V ^'<
^
1. A thin, fiat compliant member for selectively intercon-
necting a first plurality of electrical pretinned connecting pads
arranged in a first predetermined pattern on the surface of a
ceramic substrate to a second plurality of pretinned electrical
connecting pins arranged in a second predetermined pattern
adjacent said ceramic substrate, said member comprising:
(a) a first fiat compliant film having a third plurality of
apertures corresponding substantially to said first plurality
and arranged in said first predetermined pattern to permit
registering each of said apertures with one of said electri-
cal connecting pads, and a fourth plurality of other aper-
tures corresponding to said second plurality and arranged
in said second predetermined pattern to permit registering
each of said other apertures concentric with one of said
electrical connecting pms;
(b) a plurality of conductors affixed to said film, each of
which extends from one of said apertures of said third
plurality to one of said other apertures of said fourth
plurality, each conductor having a first end portion in-
cluding an opening therein concentric with a different said
other aperture of said fourth plurality and a second end
portion which extends over a different one of said aper-
tures of said third plurality, each of said apertures of said
first plurality having a dimension which corresponds
substantially to the widest dimension of one of said pre-
tinned connecting pads, the portion of each of said con-
ductors that extends over said aperture having a width
which is less than the width of said pad and substantially
half the diameter of said aperture, said portion of said
conductor which extends over said aperture being formed
to present a bottom surface of said conductor below the
bottom surface of said member to permit precise intimate
contact with a predetermined one of said pretinned pads
when said member is positioned accurately on said sub-
strate to control the flow of solder from each pretinned
connecting pad to only its associated conductor during
gang soldering of said member to said substrate; and
(c) a compliant protective layer disposed over said conduc-
tors on said first fiat compliant film to allow at least two
spaced-apart apertures which are located at different
corners of said first predetermined pattern to be visually
aligned with associated pads so that the respective edges
of each said aligned apertures are equidistant from the
sides of said associated pads whereby each of said aper-
tures of said first and second predetermined patterns are
accurately aligned respectively with their associated con-
necting pads and connecting pins.
4,435,741
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT ELEMENTS COMBINATION
Masami Shimizu, Tokyo, and Masanori Uchidoi, Kanagawa,
both of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,571
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 3, 1980, 55-122174;
Nov. 13, 1980, 55-162244[U]
Int. Q\? H05K 1/1%
U.S. a. 361—401 6 Qaims
19
i — 1
13b *
11
19
14b
15
a3=c:
14a
1. A combination of an integrated circuit element and a
printed circuit board which provides an electrical connection,
comprising:
(a) an integrated circuit element having a plurality of exter-
nal leads extended from sides thereof, wherein holes for
positioning are provided at said external leads;
(b) a printed circuit board having an opening to embed said
integrated circuit element and conductor patterns to be
connected to said external leads, wherein the conductor
patterns to be connected to said external leads having said
holes provided therein have holes having the same diame-
ters as those of said external leads; and
(c) whereby a positioning of said integrated circuit element
and said printed circuit board is made based on the holes
provided respectively on the external leads and on the
conductor patterns.
4,435,742
ELECTROCHEMICAL TRANSISTOR STRUCTURE WITH
TWO SPACED ELECTROCHEMICAL CELLS
Robert E. Hetrick, Dearborn Heights, Mich., assignor to Ford
Motor Company, Dearborn, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 117,176, Jan. 31, 1980, Pat. No.
4,332,003. This appUcation Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,891
Int. Q.3 HOIG 9/00: BOIJ 77/00, HOIG 9/ IS
U.S. Q. 361—433 5 Qaims
1. An electrochemical structure having a collector region,
an emitter region and a base region which are arranged with
respect to one another so as to facilitate transistor action and
each of said collector emitter and base regions having elec-
trodes in communication with reservoirs of an appropriate
active species in electrically neutral form so that said electro-
chemical structures exhibits electrical characteristics and fea-
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
411
tures commonly known as transistor action and can be used to
provide alternating current voltage, current and power gain;
said collector and emitter regions each containing liquid
electrolyte with two coupled electrodes to form a collec-
tor and an emitter electrochemical cells, respectively,
suitable to conduct said appropriate active species avail-
able from the reservoirs adjacent to said collector and
emitter electrochemical cells;
said base region being an enclosed region which can take up
the electrically active species in neutral form;
said emitter and collector electrochemical cells each having
one electrode exposed to the active species in neutral form
in said base region;
the other electrode of each of said emitter and collector
electrochemical cells being exposed to the reservoir of the
active species in neutral form;
said electrochemical cells being adapted so that transistor
action can occur when there is electrochemical with-
drawal of the active species from the reservoir adjacent to
said emitter electrochemical cell and there is injection of
the active species into said base region, while simulta-
neously the action of said collector electrochemical cell
will be to withdraw the active species injected into said
base region and deliver it to the reservoir adjacent to said
collector electrochemical cell; and
said reservoir adjacent to one electrode of each of said
collector and emitter electrochemical cells shall, when the
neutral form of the active species is a gas, be a space or a
region for containing the gas.
onto which light can be projected for transmission into
said plate for viewing from said viewing side,
a plurality of sub-miniature incandescent light bulbs located
close to said edge of said plate along its length at spaced
apart positions for producing light when energized for
projection onto said edge of said plate for transmission
into said plate for viewing from said viewing side,
each of said bulbs being rated at a given voltage level,
power means for normally applying an operating voltage to
said plurality of sub-miniature incandescent light bulbs at
a voltage level significantly less than said given voltage
level for normally energizing said bulbs at said operating
voltage level significantly less than said given voltage
level thereby increasing the lifetime of said bulbs over that
obtainable if said bulbs were normally energized at said
given voltage level,
emergency power means for applying an emergency voltage
to said plurality of sub-miniature incandescent light bulbs
in the event that said operating voltage fails,
said emergency voltage being at a level significantly greater
than said given voltage level thereby increasing the
brightness of said bulbs in the event of an emergency.
4,435,744
EXPLOSION-PROOF FLUORESCENT LIGHT nXTURE
Salvatore V. Russo, Pearland, Tex., assignor to Pauluhn Electric
Manufacturing Co., Inc., Pearland, Tex.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,259
Int. a.3 F21S i/00
U.S. Q. 362—219 i 8 Qaimi
so
wsT^r
\j
60 ti
«¥ If
=2
; 96
\2
c, ta io 90
6i " 94 t6
4,435,743
EDGE LIGHTED SIGN
George W. Plumly, 1601 Dakar Rd. W., Fort Worth, Tex. 76116
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,613
Int. Q.3 F21V 19/04
U.S. Q. 362—20
39 Qaims
1. A panel to be illuminated comprising:
a light transmitting plate having a viewing side and an edge
1. An explosion-proof lighting assembly comprising a termi-
nal block and wire raceways for supplying power to a plurality
of tubular lamps, first and second yoke members each for being
supported to opposite ends of said raceways respectively and
having a lower portion including means for supporting a plu-
rality of lamps thereto, said yoke portion defining a first por-
tion for engaging a raceway in explosion-proof sealing rela-
tionship and an area for engaging lamp support means in seal-
ing relationship, the interior of each said yoke means compris-
ing a wire channel communicating one said raceway to each
portion of said yoke to which one said globe is to be supported,
a plurality of end supports, each end support having an upper
portion for mating with a yoke and a fiange portion for receiv-
ing an end of a globe, each globe for surrounding a lamp, and
for alignment in axial registration with another end support for
receiving an opposite end of the globe said end support com-
prising a portion rearwardly disposed with respect to the said
globe defining a compartment having a first wall including an
end cap in releaseable, explosion-proof sealing relationship and
in axial registration with said globe and to provide for access
into said fixture, electrical connection means for coupling to
conductor means in said raceway and for bearing against an
end of lamp, said electrical connection means being removea-
bly supported to said fiange means and covering an aperture
between said compartment and said fiange means and in regis-
tration with said end cap through which a lamp is removeable
when said electrical connection means is removed, said upper
portion further having an opening for communicating said
compartment with one said wire channel.
412
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,745
DEVICE FOR GENERATING SPECTHC ELECTRICAL
VOLTAGE VALUES FOR CONSUMERS ASSOOATED
WITH AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Hermann Eisele, Vaihingen; Martin Hill, Stuttgart, and Hart-
mut Schweizer, Komtal, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,637
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 19,
1981, 3110685
Int. a.J H02M 3/335
MS. a. 363—21 5 Claims
-'+
1. A device for generating specific electrical voltage values
for electrical consumers of an internal combustion engine
having means to detect predetermined minimum voltages and
having a voltage source and a voltage elevating circuit com-
prising,
an input and output voltage and includes a regulating means
which has a threshold value and is connected such that the
regulating means closes the switch to activate the voltage
elevating circuit when the input voltage is below the
threshold value, and such that th; output voltage is regu-
lated to a specific set-point value,
wherein the regulating means has a current limiting circuit
with an output connected to the switch to limit current in
the switch and a first comparator connected to receive the
current limiting circuit output and connected to activate
the switch according to the current limiting circuit output,
wherein the switch is connected to and controlled by an
AND gate with an input side connected to the voltage
source and the first comparator, wherein the voltage
elevating circuit also includes: a second comparator con-
nected to receive and compare the input voltage to a
reference voltage, and a third comparator connected to
receive and compare the output voltage to a reference
voltage, and wherein the input side of the AND gate is
also connected to the second and third comparators such
that the switch is controlled via the AND gate by the
voltage source and the first, second and third compara-
tors, and
wherein the voltage elevating circuit is connected to the
means to detect predetermined minimum voltages to be
switched on at a predetermined minimum voltage.
4,435,746
INDUCTIVE REACTIVE VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Ralph M. Bamett, Brownsville, Tex., assignor to Atari, Inc.,
Sunnyvale, Calif.
Filed Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 369,292
Int. a.3 H02M 3/335; H02P 13/10
U.S. a. 363—21 13 Qaims
1. In a pulse-charged direct-current power supply apparatus,
said apparatus comprising a secondary circuit, a primary cir-
cuit and a transformer having a secondary winding coupled to
said secondary circuit and a primary winding coupled to said
primary circuit, said secondary circuit comprising rectifying
means coupled in series to said secondary winding, first charge
storing means coupled across said secondary winding, and a
direct current load subject to variable current draw, said load
being coupled across said first charge storing means, said pri-
mary circuit comprising second charge storing means, switch-
ing means and third charge storing means, said second charge
storing means and said third charge storing means being cou-
pled in series with said primary winding, and said switching
means being coupled across said third charge storing means
and in series with said second charge storing means, said
switching means including means for driving said switching
means at a predetermined duty cycle and frequency to gener-
ate a reversal in current through said primary circuit, said
reversal in current causing a voltage pulse to appear across said
transformer, an apparatus for regulating secondary voltage
comprising a saturable reactor means coupled in series with
said primary winding for buckin^^^aid voltage pulse in accor-
dance with the current loading of said primary circuit.
4,435,747
HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY SYSTEM FOR MEDICAL
EQUIPMENT
Shuhei Fifruichi, Shiga; Toshiaki Ikeda, and Masakazu Suzuki,
both of Kyoto, all of Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha
Moritu Seisakusho, Kyoto, Japan
Conrlnuation-in-part of Ser. No. 276,696, Jun. 23, 1981,
abandoned. This application Dec. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 452,392
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 27, 1980, 55-88057
Int. a.3 H02M 3/335
UjS. O. 363—25 i Qaim
1. A DC high voltage generation system for medical equip-
ment comprising:
a variable magnetic leakage transformer including primary,
secondary and control windings;
a capacitor type multiple boosting circuit comprising a plu-
rality of capacitors cascaded through diodes to each
other, said capacitor type multiple boosting circuit being
coupled to said secondary of said variable magnetic leak-
age transformer and forming a resonant circuit with said
variable magnetic leakage transformer;
a driving circuit coupled to said primary winding of said
variable magnetic leakage transformer for driving said
system at a resonant frequency of the resonant circuit
formed by said capacitor type multiple boosting circuit
and said variable magnetic leakage transformer; and
a pulse-amplitude feedback control circuit coupled to said
control winding and a load of said DC high voltage gener-
ation system for pulse-amplitude controlling an output
voltage of said DC high voltage generation system, said
pulse-amplitude feedback control circuit comprising:
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
413
a means for detecting a magnitude of said output voltage to
said load;
a means for presetting a reference voltage;
a means for comparing said detected voltage with said refer-
ence voltage to produce a deviation voltage; and
control transistors coupled to said control winding to act as
a constant current source which in response to said devia-
tion voltage pulse-amplitude control said output voltage.
4,435,748
METHOD OF PULSED CONTROL OF HIGH-TENSION
THYRISTOR RECTIFYING ARRANGEMENT AND
SYSTEM FOR EFFECTING SAME
Rem A. Lytaev; Khristofor F. Barakaev; Igor P. Taratuta, and
Sergei V. Krainov, all of Moscow, U.S.S.R., assignors to
Vsesojuzny Elektrotekhnickesky Institut Imeni V.I. Lenina,
Moscow, U.S.S.R.
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 375,717
Int. a.3 H02M 1/08
U.S. a. 363—54 4 Qaims
1. A method of pulsed control of a high-tension rectifying
arrangement including thyristors and working as part of an
n-phase converter, comprising the steps as follows:
a. applying at the beginning of the conduction interval of
said arrangement a narrow pulse to said thyristors of said
arrangement;
b. selecting a given number of monitored thyristors from
said thyristors of said arrangement to measure on them the
value of positive voltage in the forward direction or se-
lecting a given number of monitored thyristor groups
from said thyristors of said arrangement to measure on
them the value of positive voltage in the forward direc-
tion;
c. selecting a present level exceeded by said value of positive
voltage in the forward direction on said monitored thy-
ristors or said monitored thyristor groups;
d. determining the points in time when said value of positive
voltage in the forward direction on each of said monitored
thyristors or on eacnof said monitored thyristor groups
exceeds said preset level;
e. forming monitor signals at said points in time;
f. counting the number of said monitoring signals and select-
ing a given number of said monitor signals;
g. applying additional narrow control pulses to said thy-
ristors of said arrangement at the point in time when said
number of said monitor signals reaches said given number.
4,435,749
HIGH FREQUENCY INVERTER FAULT PROTECTION
SYSTEM
Calvin E. Grubbs, Garland, Tex., assignor to Thomas Industries
Inc., Louisville, Ky.
Filed Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,955
Int. Q.^ H02H 7/122
U.S. Q. 363—58 7 Qaims
UINC VOLTMSC
M 24 M M
.Hi
" " ::W"
«0
_L_
1. In an inverter circuit including first and second control
switching means connected in separate branches of a bridge
circuit and energized by a line source and driven by gating
signals from control logic means to conduct respectively in
alternate half cycles to sustain oscillation and provide an in-
verter signal, said control logic means providing said gating
signals to said first and second control switching means in
timed relation with said inverter signal, said bridge circuit
further including first and second balanced capacitors con-
nected in separate branches of said bridge circuit and power
transformer means connected in the diagonal branch of said
bridge circuit and including a plurality of secondary windings,
each coupled to an output device with at least one of said
secondary windings coupled to a direct current power supply
for energizing said control logic means, the frequency of oscil-
lation of said inverter signal being determined by the capaci-
tance of said first and second capacitors, the inductance of said
power transformer means and a time delay provided by said
control logic means, a fault protection system comprising:
detector circuit means including a resistor coupled to said
control switching means and responsive to the current
therein for disabling said control logic means when said
control switching means current exceeds a predetermined
value;
first resonant circuit means including first and second induc-
tances and a capacitor connected in circuit with said first
and second control switching means and said line source
wherein the discharging and charging of said capacitor
across said inverter circuit commutates said first and sec-
ond control switching means to a non-conducting state
following the disabling of said control logic means by said
detector circuit means and wherein said first inductance is
coupled to said first control switching means and said
second inductance couples said second control switching
means to said detector circuit means; and
conducting means coupling said line source to said control
switching means and said first resonant circuit means for
providing circuit isolation therebetween such that the
resonant frequency of said first resonant circuit means is
much greater than the charging rate of said capacitor by
said line source and wherein said direct current power
supply is coupled to the junction of said line source and
said conducting means for continuously providing at least
a predetermined minimum voltage across said first and
second control switching means for turning ofT said first
and second control switching means following the dis-
abling of said control logic means.
414
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,750
RECnnED AC FREQUENCY CONVERTER
Herman P. Schutten; Robert W. Sackett, both of Milwaukee;
Jan K. Sedivy, Elm Grove, and Michael E. Taken, Cedarburg,
all of Wis., assignors to Eaton Corporation, Qeveland, Ohio
Filed Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 403,249
Int. a.' H02M 5/34
VS. a. 363^177 7 Oaims
1. A frequency convefSion technique for an AC signal,
comprising rectifying said AC signal to a positively rectified
AC signal and to a negatively rectified AC signal, and chop-
ping said positively and negatively rectified AC signals by
alternating switching therebetween to yield a switched output
waveform of jgiven frequency having a positive half cycle
following a given segment of said positively rectified AC
signal, and having a negative half cycle following a given
segment of said negatively rectified AC signal.
4,435,751
VIBRATION/NOISE REDUCHON DEVICE FOR
ELECTRICAL APPARATUS
Yasuro Hon, Katsuta; Minoru Kanoi, Ibaraki; Kazuyuki Seino,
and Syuya Hagiwara, both of Hitachi, all of Japan, assignors
to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,814
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 3, 1980, 55-89979
Iqt. a.} H04B 15/00
U.S. a. 364—574 33 Oaims
JO
,12
16 18 [
JL
3B ^34
(20
D
FOURIER
TWNSFCRUerOi
22
I
ji^
CONTROL
ffff\ WWV
IIWERSE
FOJRCR
TTWNSR3R»«Tt^
28
-«
SYN SIGNAL
GENERATOR
10
-m
1. A device for reducing vibrations of an electrical apparatus
comprising;
sensor means for sensing said vibrations generated by said
electrical apparatus to produce a first analog time-domain
signal,
analog-to-digital converter means for converting said first
analog time-domain signal to a corresponding first digital
time-domain signal,
Fourier transformation means, for Fourier-transforming said
digital time-domain signal to produce a first digital fre-
quency-domain signal,
control means responsive to said first digital frequency-
domain signal to produce a vibration-reducing second
digital frequency-domain signal, said control means in-
cluding first, second and third memory means, comparing
means and control signal generating means, wherein a
portion of said first digital frequency-domain signal be-
longing to a (m-i-l)th time section of a unit time interval
T is applied to said first memory means and stored therein
while a portion of said first digital frequency-domain
signal belonging to a m-th time section of the unit time
period T is stored in said second memory means, wherein
said comparing means compares the contents of said first,
and second memory means and said control signal gener-
ating means responds to the compare result of said com-
paring means to modify a portion of said second digital
frequency-domain signal previously produced based on
the previous compare result and stored in said third mem-
ory to produce a next portion of said second digital fre-
quency-domain signal, and wherein the contents of said
first, second and third memory means are updated each
time when said control signal generating means produces
said modified second digital frequency-domain signal
portion,
inverse Fourier transformation means for inverse-Fourier-
transforming said second digital frequency-domain signal
to produce a second digital time-domain signal,
digital-to-analog converter means for converting said sec-
ond digital time-domain signal to a corresponding second
analog time-domain signal,
means for amplifying said second analog time-domain signal,
and applying vibrations corresponding to said amplified
second analog time-domain signal to said electrical appa-
ratus.
4,435,752
ALLOCATION OF ROTATING MEMORY DEVICE
STORAGE LOCATIONS
Wayne Winkelman, Leander, Tex., assignor to Texas Instru-
ments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 413,461, Nov. 7, 1973, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 252,708, May 12, 1972,
abandoned. This application Apr. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 138,783
Int. a.3 G06F 3/06. 13/04. 13/08
U.S. a. 364—200 8 Qaims
TAMI
COMTaOLLCH
NUCl.CU>
mONOCISHM
COMMAMO
TO \
■ T«aK /
r'
'~\
a.
u..rr 5
M>, J / O
Ot»C HAMDWAMf
1. A digital computer system having a control means for
allocating memory space for storing a data file in at least one
cyclic memory wherein said cyclic memory includes at least
one data storage device comprising contiguous storage^ele-
ments, said cyclic memory being partitioned into a plurality of
data storage regions and wherein each of said data storage
regions is also partitioned into a plurality of data storage subre-
gions with all subregions within a given region being assigned
equal storage capacity of contiguous storage elements and with
subregions of different regions being assigned different storage
capacities of said contiguous storage elements comprising:
(a) means for generating a list for all data storage subregions
of said storage device including a beginning absolute
address of each subregion; -
(b) means for ordering the list of subregions in order of
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
415
decreasing memory capacity, said subregions being
grouped in their respective regions;
(c) means for indicating the storage capacity and availability
of rach said subregion group;
(d) first storage means for storing said ordered list as a table,
wherein said table includes with each subregion entry, the
indicia of the storage capacity and availability of the
respective subregions;
(e) means for' sequentially searching said table including
comparison means for comparing the storage capacity of
each available subregion with the memory space required
for the data field to be stored in said cyclic memory sys-
tem;
(0 means for assigning and storing the data file to be stored
in the first available subregion having the smallest avail-
able storage capacity which will completely contain the
data file to be stored, and when no such subregion is
available, including means for assigning and storing at
least part of the data file to be stored in the first available
subregion whose storage capacity is less than or equal to
the memory space required for the part of the data file in
accordance with the result of the comparison by said
comparison means; and
(g) means for reinitiating operation of said searching means
until the comparison means indicates an absence of any
portion of a data file that has not been stored.
to the set of register quantities awaiting assignment to a
register with a control count indicative of the total num-
ber of registers for which the first quantity is not a candi-
date;
(3) upon identifying during step (1) a second quantity either
assigned to a register or logged to the set of register quan-
tities awaiting assignment to a register,
incrementing the control counts of quantities in the set of
register quantities awaiting assignment to a register
which are candidates for the same registers as the sec-
ond quantity, and .
testing for complete sets; and ^
(4) assigning a register to those quantities for which a com-
plete set is detected.
4,435 754
METHOD OF SELECTING PROM DATA FOR
SELECTIVE MAPPING SYSTEM
Ylu T. Chow, Kowioon, Hong Kong, and Thomas J. Gilligan,
Rolling Hills EsUtes, Calif., assignors to Ampex Corporation,
Redwood City, Calif. I
Filed Jun. 301 1981, Ser. No. 279,234
U.S. O. 364—200
Int. C\? G06F 11/00
13 Gaims
4,435,753
REGISTER ALLOCATION SYSTEM USING RECURSIVE
QUEUING DURING SOURCE CODE COMPILATION
John R. Rizzi, San Jose, Calif., assignor to International Busi-
ness Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 202,900
Int. a.3 G06F 9/00. 9/30, 9/44
U.S. a. 364-200 6 Claims
ioOMS^ 'atHSiAtmn
M-^ftlOr.TtO HtSUiuTlJi IHgut"]
1. A method of operating a computing system having a main
storage and a plurality of different classes of registers to assign
registers to requests serially referenced in an input instruction
stream for quantities to be in a register, so as to improve utiliza-
tion of the registers during execution of a compiled instruction
stream, comprising the steps of:
(1) during a serial scan of the input instruction stream, identi-
fying register usage for quantities, including (a) quantitlts
referenced in the input instruction stream which need to
be assigned to a register and (b) quantities referenced m
the input instruction stream which are either assigned to a
register or logged to a set of register quantities awaiting
assignment to a register;
(2) upon identifying during step (1) a first quantity which
needs to be assigned to a register, loggmg the first quantity
1. A computer program for assigning data states to stores
defining mapping relationships in a mapping system mapping
input states to output states and which assigns each input state
to an A superstate within an A group of superstates and to a B
superstate within a B group of superstates, each superstate
including a plurality of input states, the computer program
comprising the steps of;
assigning in succession a plurality of B supersutes, each
having at least one input state which is to be mapped
included therein, to a BK by BT B map having a plurality
of BK states and a plurality of BT states orthogonal to and
intersecting each of the BK sutes with not more than a
predetermined maximum number of input states to be
mapped being assignable to any given BT state, the B
superstates being assigned to the B map with at most one
B superstate assigned to any given Bk, BT intersection and
being preferentially assigned to a BT state having a great-
est number of vacancies available to receive input states to
be mapped; and
assigning in succession a plurality of A superstates, each
having at least ,one input state which is to be mapped
included therein^ to an AK by AT A map having a plural-
ity of AK states pnd a plurality of AT states orthogonal to
and intersecting feach of the AK states with not more than
a predetermined maximum number of input states to be
mapped being assignable to any given AT state, the A
supersutes being assigned to the A map with at most one
416
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
A superstate assigned to any given Ak, AT intersection
and with each successive A superstate being preferentially
assigned to an AT state having the smallest number of
vacancies available to receive input states which are to be
mapp>ed.
1
II
IKII
»--
T
lii c c» i'«ei«i ••'•ot 'm w'iis Ml
^
»iM>ii5 '5:i '» '.],' iiiari»i
J.
A pint! Ml ecMic'ir
I
<;• c.wfC'Eu ."ici
«','«t nOH •
"•"^
< WQ [«'tiPT >II0II
IKSVCCESSUI $13/(101 K
l«iC«ll C» Cj 1«
rfiici IC louo mil i
'M C" C CalUK :
u^
<> iNtS C
t
ElEtT C
lOECIEIEtTOtCr
rot fHr^ CM rt >
f
IIIIIkTiCI 'Ithu ICH C^
1. A method in a data processing system for quickly flnding
a data path for a requested I/O device, the data path including
a channel path and a control unit, the data path being provided
between the requested I/O device and a main storage under
the control of an I/O request from a central processing unit
(CPU) to a channel processor, the method comprising:
generating an outstanding request (CAT) count for each
channel path useable by the system,
obtaining a set of channel path identifiers (CH IDs) for all
channel paths capable of connecting to the requested I/O
device,
flnding a candidate channel path identifier (CH ID) for aft
available CH ID having the lowest CAT count in the set
provided by the obtaining step,
attempting to connect the requested I/O device with the
candidate channel path CH ID found by the finding step
to obtain a data path,
repeating the finding step if the attempting step is unsuccess-
ful in connecting the candidate channel path to a data path
by finding another candidate channel path.
ing multiple encodings which predict the state of the condition
to be tested; and a control means for detecting when said
prefetch means has fetched one of said conditional branch
^ 4,435,756
BRANCH PREDICTING COMPUTER
Hanan Potash, La JoUa, Calif., assignor to Burroughs Corpora-
tion, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 326,837
Int. a.3 G06F 9/42
VJS. a. 364—200 9 Claims
1. An improved digital device including a memory means for
storing a plurality of instructions arranged as a program with
conditional branch instructions at respective locations in said
program specifying conditions to be tested; an instruction
prefetch means and an instruction execute means for respec-
tively fetching and executing different instructions of said
program at the same time in a pipelined fashion; said condi-
tional branch instruction at each of said locations further hav-
4,435,755
BALANCED CHANNEL RNDING METHOD
Allan S. Meritt, Poughkeepsie, N.Y., assignor to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y. '
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,991
Int. a.^ G06F 3/00
U.S. a. 364—200 20 Oaims
31 I
30C
o/tVnirT--i^;>
11
^
mi'
■» 34 1 ♦,«
• ■^■
Pf -35 T"^
IPF'
30
3oe
instructions and for fetching the next instruction based on the
predicted state of the condition to be tested and encoded in said
fetched conditional branch instruction.
4,435,757
CLOCK CONTROL FOR DIGITAL COMPUTER
John W. Pross, Jr., Newfoundland, N.J., assignor to The Singer
Company, Little Falls, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 60,259, Jul. 25, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,053
Int. a.3 G06F 9/00
U.S. a. 364—200 1 Qaim
OP£it*TtrH cox
1. In a digital computer including: a central processor; a
main memory; and a micro memory, said micro memory con-
taining a number of micro instructions for specifying program
steps, a master clock for controlling the timing of the digital
computer comprising:
a. an oscillator providing, as an output, a pulse train having
pulses spaced at a basic fixed incremental time period;
b. a master clock output stage having a data input and a
clock input and an output providing pulses, said clock
input coupled to the output of said oscillator, said output
stage responsive to provide the data at its input to its
output in response to the input at its clock input;
c. timing means having said output of said oscillator as an
input and providing a data input to said master clock
output stage, the output of said timing means being a pulse
train having pulses spread at a multiple of said basic fixed
integral incremental time period which is equal to a mini-
March 6. 1984
ELECTRICAL
417
mum interval corresponding to the shortest time needed
to perform a program step;
d. adding means having as input signals forming part of a
micro instruction and responsive thereto to add, to said
minimum interval, increments equal to said basic fixed
incremental time period when another part of said micro
instruction calls for a program step requiring more than
said minimum interval, the interval established after addi-
tion being approximately equal to the time required to
perform said program step;
c. means associated with said main memory for providing a
first signal indicating that the memory is ready to be read
and a second signal indicating that data from the memory
is available; and
f. means associated with said timing means having said sig-
nals as inputs and responsive to said first signal to interrupt
said master clock output stage and prevent further output
pulses from said master clock output stage and to said
second signal to re-initiate generation of clock pulses by
said master clock output stage.
4,435,758
METHOD FOR CONDITIONAL BRANCH EXECUTION
IN SIMD VECTOR PROCESSORS
Raymond A. Lorie, and Hovey R. Strong, Jr., both of San Jose,
Calif., assignors (o International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Armonk, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 129,148, Mar. 10, 1980,
abandoned. This application Aug. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 407,842
Int. CI.' G06F 15/16
U.S. CI. 364— 200 3 Claims
noal EM NKEUM
«t
TT
wuuel iisi nocfssa
iii( <i
i"
L
•U
piTifim fim
auISi
E3SZ1 [13!
■;[ffeir»Ti.-.fTmi
'DO] CO --rFiiii
•I'MEIt
UllMEIlC
•I mi
1. A two-phase method for controlling the execution of a
program consisting of a single entrance, single exit (SESE)
program instruction sequences on a single instruction, multiple
datastream (SIMD) machine during a second phase, which
SESE instruction sequences were previously conditioned from
an ordinary program instruction sequence on a single instruc-
tion, single datastream (SISD) machine during a first phase,
said SIMD machine includes an array of parallel processors;
means for applying independent datastreams to counter-
part processors, each processor having an activity mask
(active, inactive); and a control unit for applying the
program to the processors to interact with the data and for
regulating the activity state of each processor by altering
Its activity mask contents, wherein:
during the first phase, the steps of:
(a) compiling an ordinary program and decomposing it
into SESE instruction sequences, the last instruction in
each sequence being either an unconditional or condi-
tional branch;
(b) priority ordering the sequences according to a depth
ordering convention and assigning sequence label num-
bers thereto linearly; and
(c) inserting either a ELSE or JOIN instruction at the
beginning of sequences selected according to^ a first
predetermined convention; and
during the second phase, the steps of:
(d) causing a SESE sequence processed during the first
phase to be executed on one or more processors of an
SIMD machine in parallel; and causing the designation
of the next executable SESE sequence as a function of
the matching or mismatching of the SESE sequence
targets of the branches of the sequence currently being
executed on one or more processors according to a
second predetermined convention;
(e) upon occurrence of a branch instruction, ascertaining
the targets and, if there does not exist a target to a
successful conditional branch, transferring control to
the unique target, otherwise transferring control to the
target of the successful conditional branch and masking
off as inactive the processors corresponding to the
target of the unsuccessful conditional branch;
(0 upon the occurrence of an ELSE instruction in said
current SESE sequence as applied to the SIMD ma-
chine, ascertaining the next SESE target sequence hav-
ing the lowest priority order number; maskmg on into
an active state each inactive processor awaiting execu-
tion of the ascertained target SESE sequence; and mask-
ing off into an inactive state all other processors waiting
to execute other SESE sequences; or
(g) upon the occurrence of a JOIN instruction in said current
SESE sequence as applied to the SIMD machine, masking
on into an active state those inactive processors waiting to
execute SESE sequences having a priority order number
the same as that of the SESE sequence currently being
executed by the SIMD machine. *
4 435 759
HARDWARE MONITOR FOR OBTAINING PROCESSOR
SOFTWARE/HARDWARE INTERRELATIONSHIPS
Richard 1. Baum, La Grange, and Frederick E. Sakalay, Pough-
keepsie, both of N.Y., assignors to International Business
Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,530
Int. Cl.^ G06F 7/00
U.S. CI. 364-200 , 22 Oaims
\'i» ti' CHi.juC
il ' MC ,
■ I tl
i.iin
111 I
....l' III I
'Hi E'. '.6111
'■■""' r\, Kit'i
tllK^fLS \ 1^ CIPIllS
till
no Hull I
"•
WH'lUi , I
r ii «•
tlfUHt* "
mi I '"
'' 1 CI* UK"
( :
r I 1 i-m .,iiit\( I
1,1, / , , Hi I ,-i
I .coaiiu |_
I ji'Cwiinn ^'
I fill H'liiH
tlitlili
.J
1. A monitor for obtaining measurement data on the soft-
ware/hardware operation of a data processing system having a
processor and a main storage, the processor having an instruc-
tion unit with an instruction address register for indicating the
address of each instruction being executed by the processor,
the processor having latches for registering the occurrence of
events in th,e processor resulting from its execution of an in-
struction; the monitor comprising:
an event capture switch having a plurality of inputs con-
nected to a set of latches of the processor to be monitored,
some of the latches being activated aperiodically in time,
means for presetting the event capture switch to select one
of its inputs (representing a preset type of event) as its
output, the occurrence of an output signal from the event
capture switch being a trigger signal,
capture register means,
means for capturing current input signals by connecting an
output of the instruction address register to the capture
418
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
register means upon an occurrence of the trigger signal to
store an instruction address then being provided by the
instruction address register as the address of the instruc-
tion causing the trigger signal,
whereby a software operation in the system is related to a
hardware operation in the system by the mbnitor selecting
only the addresses of instructions in executing software
causing the occurrence of predetermined types of hard-
ware event to provide a required set of captured ad-
dresses.
4,435,761
DATA PROCESSING APPARATUS CAPABLE OF
TRANSFERRING SERIAL DATA WITH SMALL POWER
CONSUMPTION
Manabu Kimoto, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 194,874
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 8, 1979, 54-129714
Int. a.3 G06F 1/04. 13/00; GllC 7/00
U.S. a. 364—200 10 Qaims
TB«NSMITT»(G l#i7
NECCMM6 UNIT
4,435,760
RUNNING POSITION INDICATOR APPARATUS
Akira Kuno, Oobu; Muneaki Matsumoto, Okazaki; Koji
Numata, Toyokawa, and Susumu Urano, Oobu, all of Japan,
assignors to>Iippon Soken, Inc., Nishio and Nippondenso Co.,
Ltd., Kariya, both of, Japan
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,441
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 8, 1980, 55-15172
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 4, 2000,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.^ G06F 15/50: G09B 29/10
U.S. a. 364—444 * 9 Oaims
1. A running position indicator apparatus comprising:
distance detector means for generating a distance signal
representing the distance covered by an automobile;
direction detector means for generating a direction signal
representing the running direction of the automobile;
destination setting means for generating a destination direc-
tion signal representing the angle of the direction from the
starting f)oint to the destination and a destination distance
signal representing the linear distance from the starting
point to the destination;
operation means for calculating the vectorial value from the
starting point to the destination in response to said destina-
tion direction signal and said destination distance signal,
calculating the vectorial value from the starting point to
the present position from said distance signal and said
direction signal, subtracting the vectorial value from the
starting point to the present position from the vectorial
value from the starting point to the destination thereby to
determine a vectorial value from the present position to
the destination, and producing a signal representing the
direction from the present position to the destination and
a signal representing a linear distance from the present
position to the destination; and
indicator means for indicating data on the linear distance
from the present position to the destination and data on
the direction from the present position to the destination
in the same indication section in response to the output
signal from said operation means.
aus
i
TMNG
PULSE GCN
^
Dtn riuNSurrM;
4M) RECSVMG SECTION
DATA TRANSUTTlW;
ANORECEIVNC SECTION
4. Data processing apparatus comprising:
a data processing means which executes a programmed
process and generates a data transfer initiating signal and
a signal for halting execution of said programmed process,
a data transfer means coupled to said data processing means
for transferring data processed by said data processing
means to a receiving unit,
a clock pulse generator for generating a clock pulse,
means for sending said clock pulse to said data processing
means,
a first control means coupled to said sending means for
inhibiting the sending of said clock pulse to said data
processing means in response to said signal for halting
execution,
a second control means coupled to said data transfer means
and said clock pulse generator for sending said clock pulse
to said data transfer means in response to said data transfer
initiating signal, and
a third control means coupled to said first control means for
sending said clock pulse to said data processing means in
response to data transfer termination.
4,435,762
BUFFERED PERIPHERAL SUBSYSTEMS
Charles A. Milligan, St. David; Edwin R. Videki, II, and Win-
ston F. Yates, both of Tucson, all of Ariz., assignors to Inter-
national Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,274
Int. a.3 G06F 9/18
U.S. a. 364—200 22 Claims
1. The machine-implemented method of buffering data sig-
nals between data signal records and a data source-sink, the
machine-implemented steps of:
receiving data signal sets (records) by a volatile data buffer
having plural data storage registers for later recording on
a record member in a given one of said signal recorders;
initially operating the data source-sink as if the received
signal sets were in fact recorded by said given one data
signal recorder while in fact said received signal sets
remain in the said volatile buffer; and
detecting the number of signals contained in a first received
signal set (length) and if less than a predetermined length,
storing all signals in said buffer before recording said
received signal set and each of any ensuing received signal
sets having less than said predetermined length on said
record member in said one data signal recorder and upon
detecting any received signal set having a number of
signals greater than said predetermined number, actuating
said given one data signal recorder and said volatile data
buffer to receive signal sets and to begin recording all of
the ensuing received signal sets on said record member in
said given one data signal recorder before the entire signal
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
419
set has been completely received by said volatile data
buffer such that said volatile data buffer acts as a rate
'•^rll;vJv::l
r-f^!
IV.
in
lit-'
Hi
E>-r-
I: "
'It,
j^
m>
•1"'rrT
I'
fi:
[J=
CPU.
■i
Jl£.-
kMTSV PO«NV
'Xi
^^ir
3"
1. An electronic digital processor system including a single
integrated circuit having input/output circuitry comprising:
a plurality of input/output data ports each having a plurality
of bit pads and each having a separate address, at least two
of said ports containing: receiving means to receive bit
data from a bit pad; transmitting means to transmit bit data
to said bit pad; control and interconnect circuitry con-
nected to said receiving and said transmitting means of
each of such poris to define a configuration that permits
one pori to transmit input data and to receive output data
from said bit pads of another of such ports and respond to
said address of said another pori to send input data to and
receive output data from within said intergrated circuit
thereby allowing said control and interconnect circuitry
of said another port to be used to transmit and receive
control signals;
a data bus within said integrated circuit connected to said
control and interconnected circuitry, to said receiving
means and to said transmitting means of each of said ports.
4 435 764
COMPUTER NETWORK HAVING A SINGLE
ELECTRICALLY CONTINUOUS BI-DIRECTIONAL BUS
Hussein T. El-Gohary, Harvard, Mass., auignor to DaU Gen-
eral Corp., Westboro, Mass.
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,588
Int. a.J G06F 3/00
U.S. a. 364—200 9 Qaims
changing buffer whereby for signal sets longer than said
predetermined number the data source-sink does not oper-
ate in the manner set forth in said initial operating step.
=r
j'^-rn , I *; Ji
r' ' ' ^
I -KlLATOa I
Sid "Sm.
«««»H tarn..
MOCIUavG I
■ ■ T^
4,435,763
MULTIPROGRAMMABLE INPUT/OUTPUT CIRCUITRY
Jeffrey D. Bellay; Robert C. Thaden; John W. Hayn, and Kevin
C. McDonough, all of Houston, Tex., assignors to Texas
Instruments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,957
Int. a.3 G06F 3/00
U.S. a. 364—200 25 Qaims
tNIIA Mr-.tlkWt I
""■■-' » I
■OM tiM>u«
1. A computer network comprising:
(a) an electrically continous communications bus,
(b) a plurality of spatially separated computer work stations
distributed along said bus, each computer work station
including:
(i) a transceiver connected to said bus, said transceiver
including a transmitter for transmitting a signal onto
said bus and a receiver for receiving a signal communi-
cated onto said bus,
(ii) a data processing device,
(iii) first optical isolation means for coupling said receiver
to said data processing device,
(iv) second optical isolation means for coupling said trans-
mitter to said data processing device,
(v) a first power supply for supplying operating power to
said data processing device and said first optical isola-
tion means, and
(vi) a second power supply for supplying operating power
to said transceiver and said second optical isolation
means, said second power supply means being coupled
to said communications bus and being fioating.
4,435,765
BANK INTERLEAVED VECTOR PROCESSOR HAVING A
nXED RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN START TIMING
SIGNALS
Keiicbiro Uchida, Yokohama; Hiroshi Tamura, Kawasaki; Tet-
suro Okamoto, Machida, and Shigeaki Okutani, Yokohama,
all of Japan, assignors to Fi^itsu Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,717
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 21, 1980, 55-164100;
Nov. 26, 1980, 55-166164
Int. O.} G06F 9/18
U.S. O. 364—200 9 Claims
1. A data processing system, having a plurality of processing
classes specified by vector processing instructions, where a
plurality of vector registers each comprising a plurality of
elements are provided between a main memory unit and an
operational unit, required data is transferred to said vector
registers from the main memory unit and then held therein, and
420
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
in the operational unit various processings, such as logical
operations, are carried out by sequentially accessing the ele-
ments within said vector registers, said data processing system
comprising:
a plurality of memory banks to which access can be made
independently, respectively, and which include said vec-
tor registers, the comprised elements of each vector regis-
ter, respectively, are interleaved and thus located in differ-
ent memory banks, each element of each vector register is
respectively associated with a number representing that
element's position within its comprising vector register,
and the elements of different vector registers but having
the same associated number are arranged in the same
memory bank; and '
decrementing a use counter from the initial process lock,
during execution of a program, and calling up other pro-
1- ' ' ' • : ' :
timing generation means, operatively connected to said
vector registers, for starting the access by the operation
unit to a series of elements of said vector registers with a
start ready timing signal which is specified for and depen-
dent on each of the classes of processing, respectively, the
processing classes being divided into an add/multiply
class and a load/store class, the start ready timing signals
comprise a plurality of first common timing signals which
are assigned as vector register start timing signals for the
add/multiply class, and a plurality of second common
timing signals different from said first common timing
signals and which are assigned as vector register access
start timng signals for the Idad/store class, so that each of
said vector registers operates at timing dependent on the
class associated with the start ready timing signal.
'i»lI«Pi|)s)>.UO
i
STIRT pcm
-IH
i
t
lOCHiOS
ul9<
i
^l»t
J
191
'oa reus
'sum «•)]
i
IKMil 1
700
i
USI IID !
i""
i ■
UHLOCI OiD ^
^!0<
(
^.>,
M '"> 5
^.0.
*
\
1*
L?io
Km
imoo «IB i
Tiiii pc«i^
grams within said process until said use counter is restored
to its initial state prior to releasing said initial process lock.
4,435,767
ERROR ALARM SYSTEM FOR DETECTING AN
ABNORMAL CONDITION IN A PERIPHERAL SYSTEM
OF AN ELECTRONIC CASH REGISTER
Hiroshi Nakatani; Masahide Ishida, both of Yamatokoriyama,
and Hachizou Yamamoto, Nara, all of Japan, assignors to
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 147,271, May 6, 1980, Pat. No. 4,325,441.
This application Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,687
Claims priority, application Japan, May 7, 1979, 54«56125
Int. a.3 G06F 3/16
U.S. a. 364—405 2 Qalms
4,435,766
NESTED RESOURCE CONTROL USING LOCKING AND
UNLOCKING ROUTINES WITH USE COUNTER FOR
PLURAL PROCESSES
Judith G. Haben Kenneth L. Jeffries, and Paul J. Kilpatrick, all
of Austin, Tex., assignors to International Business Machines
Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,113
Int. a.3 G06F 9/18
U.S. a. 364—300 8 Oaims
1. A method of controlling a process lock on a resource, said
method comprising:
nesting lock requests within a number of programs compris-
ing a process;
maintaining said process lock through incrementing and
1. A combined electronic cash register and peripheral sys-
tem comprising:
an electronic cash register; and
peripheral means electrically interconnected to said cash
register via a cable for monitoring a desired external con-
March,6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
421
dition as well as abnormal conditions of said peripheral
means;
said electronic cash register including,
interface means res[>onsive to the output of said peripheral
means on said cable for decoding said information pro-
vided thereon and supplying said information to a plu-
rality of outputs, one of said plurality of outputs being
an external condition value output, the remainder of
said outputs being abnormal conditions monitor out-
puts,
abnormal condition evaluation means connected to at least
one of said abnormal condition monitor outputs for
determining whether an abnormal condition exists and
producing an abnormal condition detection output
associated with the abnormal condition detected,
abnormal condition display signal generator means re-
sponsive to said associated abnormal condition detec-
tion output for developing a display signal indicative of
said abnormal condition,
means responsive to the display signal produced by said
display signal generator means for visually displaying
said display signal,
a plurality of audible condition memories, each said mem-
ory being associated with one of said abnormal condi-
tion monitor outputs and having a speech synthesized
representation of the associated abnoi'mal condition
stored therein,
means for decoding the speech synthesized representation
stored in a selected said memory into an analog audio
waveform,
means responsive to a said associated abnormal condition
detection output for enabling the passage of the speech
synthesized representation stored in a selected said
memory to said means for decoding, and
transducer means responsive to said means for decoding
for producing an audible speech representation of said
abnormal condition.
4,435,768
SKID CONTROL SYSTEM
Tetsuro Arikawa, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Nippon Air
Brake Co., Ltd., Kobe, Japan
Filed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,095
Int. a.3 B60T 8/08
U.S. a. 364—426 11 Qalms
f~>- SPEED f OIK
unoiiiuiE
:bi£i( sur"
tEHW'Jt
; / 4
1
1. A skid control system for a vehicle having at least one
wheel and a brake for the wheel comprising:
(a) wheel speed detecting means for providing an output
signal representative of the rotational speed of said wheel
with respect to the vehicle;
(b) differentiating means f6r differentiating said output signal
of the wheel speed detecting means and providing an
output signal representative of acceleration or decelera-
tion of said wheel;
(c) a deceleration signal generator connected to said differ-
entiating means, said deceleration signal generator gener-
ating a deceleration signal when the output signal of said
differentiating means exceeds predetermined threshold
deceleration;
(d) an acceleration signal generator connected to said differ-
entiating means, said acceleration signal generator gener-
ating an acceleration signal when the output signal of said
differentiating means exceeds a predetermined threshold
acceleration;
(e) brake relieving means for decreasing the brake pressure
to the brake for said wheel in response to the deceleration
signal of said deceleration signal generator;
(0 first brake control means for maintaining the brake pres-
sure to the brake for said wheel constant, or gradually
increasing the brake pressure to the brake for said wheel,
in response to the acceleration signal of said acceleration
signal generator; and
(g) second brake control means for rapidly increasing the
brake pressure to the brake for said wheel for a predeter-
mined time in accordance with the slope of the output
signal of said differentiating means within the time when
said acceleration signal generator generates the accelera-
tion signal. I
4,435,769
PORTABLE TYPE AUTOMOBILE REPAIR ESTIMATE
ISSUING DEVICE
Susumu Nagano, Tokyo; Selichi Iruya, Saitama; Yoshinori Ya-
suda, and Tomoaki Makino, both of Kanagawa, all of Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi DenkI Kabushiki Kaisha and Japan
Audatex Co., Ltd., both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,475
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 15, 1980, 55-34939
Int. a.3 G06F 3/12. 15/06; GllC 15/02
U.S. Q. 364—464 9 Qalms
ts''Mtn
:Tai*^
1. A portable type automobile repair issuing device compris-
ing: memory means in which at least name coded data corre-
sponding to automobile part names, name data corresponding
to said automobile part names, data representing automobile
types, and part data corresponding to automobile parts are
stored; input means for inputting selected name coded data
entries corresponding to said automobile part names and data
representing an automobile type; central processing means;
printing means for printing an automobile repair estimate in
which the part data stored in said memory means is extracted
selectively according to name coded data entries and said data
representing said automobile type applied to said central pro-
cessing means to provide estimatibn data, said printing means
printing an estimate according to said estimation data; said
memory means being provided with a first file for storing said
part data other than said name data and a second file for storing
said name data corresponding to said automobile part names;
said central processing means, according to each name
coded data entry applied to said central processing means
and said data representing said automobile type, combin-
422
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
MARdH 6, 1984
ing corresponding part data stored in said first file and
corresponding name data stored in said second file to
provide estimation data,
said printing means printing an estihiate according to said
estimation data.
according to a selected one of the predetermined unbal-
anced vibration patterns which is the most similar to the
abnormal vibration pattern.
4,435,770
VIBRATION DIAGNOSING METHOD AND APPARATUS
FOR A ROTARY MACHINE
Koki Shiohata, Ibarald; Fumio Fujisawa, Mito; Motohiro Shiga,
Hitachi; Kazuo Sato, Kitaibaraki; Motoji Ohmori, Hitachi,
and Masakazu Takasumi, Ibaraki, all of Japan, assignors to
Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,517
Gaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 19, 1980, 55-34032
Int. a.3 G06F J5/46; GOIN 29/00
U.S. a. 364-508 14 Qairas
J2 £
'4-^'
L6I
1 1 1 1 r
CETECTOR
VlflRATlOi
4N4LTZEI1
JU0GM5 OCVlCt
1 1*IT
IS J BITTEIW.
kCMOKT
, L! li
n:
HEOcmaB
-lS-
"OuflNTrrv
opymicn UNIT
i«
r
-15
DIS»L»» UWT Ll6
4,435,771
SYSTEM FOR NUMERICALLY CONTROLLING A
MACHINE TOOL
Ryoichiro Nozawa, Tokyo, and Nobuyuki Klya, Hachioji, both
of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu Fanuc Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,596
Gaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 4, 1980, 55-43446
Int. G.J H02M J/06
U.S. G. 364-474 5 Qaim.
1. An apparatus for diagnosing a vibration in a rotor of a
rotary machine comprising:
means for sensing the number of rotations of the rotor and
providing an output indicative thereof;
vibration detecting means for detecting vibration at a plural-
ity of measuring points disposed at intervals along a direc-
tion of the rotor shaft when the rotor is rotating and
providing outputs representative thereof;
vibration analyzer means responsive to the outputs of the
vibration detector means and the rotation sensor means
for extracting vibration components synchronized with
the number of rotations of the rotor at the plurality of
measuring points;
comparing means for comparing the extracted vibration
9omponents with reference values therefor corresponding
to normal vibration of the rotor for determining that the
detected vibration is abnormal when at least one of the
extracted vibration components exceeds the correspond-
ing one of the reference values therefor and that the de-
tected vibration is normal when all of the extracted vibra-
tion components do not exceed the corresponding refer-
ence value therefor, the comparing means providing an
output of the extracted vibration components when the
detected vibration is abnormal;
calculating means for calculating abnbrmal vibration com-
ponents in accordance with the output of the extracted
vibration components and predetermined values represen-
tative of respective rotor vibration components in a nor-
mal state of the rotor and providing an output of abnormal
vibration components; and
pattern comparing means for comparing a pattern of ampli-
tude values of the abnormal vibration components with
patterns of previously determined vibration amplitude
values at the respective measuring points when an unbal-
ance is provided at different positions of the rotor for
determining an unbalance originating position in the rotor
1. A method for numerically controlling a plurality of ma-
chine tools by means of a computer connected in common to a
plurality of numerical control circuits, each of which is con-
nected to a different one of said machine tools and each of
which has a manual data panel, the operation of said method
comprising the steps of:
transmitting from the computer to a numerical control cir-
cuit a program editing mode signal;
deciding first whether or not the mode is suitable;
under the condition that the result of the first decision is
affirmative, transmitting a manual input data (Ma) from
the computer to the numerical control circuit;
transmitting a program input awaiting signal from the nu-
merical control circuit to the computer;
transmitting a numerical control program from the com-
puter to the numerical control circuit;
deciding second whether or not the transmission of the
numerical control program is completed;
under the condition that the result of the second decision is
affirmative, transmitting a signal for switching the mode
into the automatic operation mode from the computer to
the numerical control circuit;
deciding third whether or not the mode is suitable;
under the condition that the result of the third decision is
affirmative, transmitting a cycle start button signal from
the computer to the numerical control circuit;
starting an automatic operation of the machine tool;
transmitting operation sute signals from the numerical con-
trol circuit to the computer;
monitoring the transmitted operation state signals by the
computer;
deciding fourth whether or not the operation of the machine
tool is completed; and
terminating the operation of the machine tool when the
affirmative result of the fourth decision is obtained.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
423
4,435,772
INTERACnVE GRAPHIC SYSTEM
Yothihiro Suzuki; Shuichi Nakagawa; Nobuhisa Kawamura;
Shuichi Kurihara; Otamu Sakuma, and Masahiro Ito, all of
Tokyo, Japan, assignors to Yokogawa Hokushin Electric
Corp., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273.424
Gaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 11, 1981, 56-33984
Int. G.i G06K 15/22
U.S. G. 364—520 6 Gaims
1. An interactive graphic system comprising:
an X-Y plotter having a recording pen supported on a re-
cording head drivable in response to an input signal for
recording lines, symbols or marks on a plotting surface;
a keyboard having a plurality of function keys allotted to a
variety of functions related to plotting, full keys bearing
characters, numerals and symbols, and control keys for
controlling said X-Y plotter;-
a memory for storing an operating system with a program
required for controlling the execution of a drawing pro-
gram and a program required for plotting graphic patterns
on an interactive basis, said memory including an ex-
changeable storage medium for storing various forms of
fundamental graphic information accessible as desired by
a command entered through said keyboard;
a display having a character display function for displaying
characters as a guide for the inputting of graphic pattern
drawing information via said keyboard and a graphic
display function for displaying graphic patterns plotted;
a processor for executing the program stored in said memory
for plotting graphic patterns in response to information
entered through said keyboard; and
said X-Y plotter, said keyboard, said memory, said display,
and said processor being a unitary structure for enabling
said X-Y plotter to plot graphic patterns in response to
information entered through said keyboard through inter-
action with said display.
4,435,773
RECEIVER FOR EFFECHNG SYNCHRONOUS
DEMODULATION
Heinz Gtickler, Reinhard Till, both of Backnang, and Heinrich
Schenk, Munich, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH, Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of
ermany
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,823 *
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 23,
^1980, 3006801
Int. G.J G06F 15/31
J.S. G. 364—724 5 Gaims
1. In a receiver for synchronously demodulating received
sampled real bandpass signals composed of successive signal
elem&its, said receiver containing a singal conduction path and
incluaing equalizing means connected in the path for equaliz-
ing the received signals, a pair of converiing means connected
in the path and operatively associated with the equalizing
means for converiing the signals provided by the equalizing
means to analytical signals consisting of a pair of signals, a pair
of sampling means connected in the path for sampling the
analytical signals at time intervals corresponding to the time
between successive signal elements, phase shifting means con-
nected in the path and to the pair of sampling means for shift-
ing the sampled signals in phase, and a decider connected in the
tlPUl
SKUl
HiD-
T
otu-
UIIS
.-iJniI ,
path for interrogating the pairs of phase-shifted sampled sig-
nals, the improvement comprising a single pair of filters consti-
tuting and pair of converting means, said single pair of filters
further constituting said equalizing means.
4,435,774
MKmOD OF AND ARRANGEMENT FOR
CALCULATING THE DISCRETE FOURIER
TRANSFORM BY MEANS OF TWO aRCULAR
CONVOLUTIONS
Theodoor A. C. M. Gaasen, and Wolfgang F. G. Mecklen-
briiuker, both of Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S.
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,228
Gaims priority, application Netherlands, Mar. 17, 1980,
8001559
Int. G.5 G06F 15/332
U.S. G. 364—726 3 Gaims
1. A method of performing the discrete Fourier transform on
an input array of N input signal values a(k), k = 0, 1, 2, . . .
N - 1, wherein N is a prime, the metod comprising the steps of:
separating the input signal value a(0) from said input array of
N input signal values to generate a modified input prray of
N— 1 input signal values consisting of the input signal
values a(l), a(2) a(N-l); '
permuting said modified input array of N— 1 input signal
values to generate a permuted array of N- I permutation
signal values b(i), i=l, 2, . . . N-1, such permutation
signal value b(i) being equal to input signal value a(g'^~'
mod N), wherein g is a positive integer which is equal to
a primitive root of a field consisting of the numbers 1, 2, 3,
...,N-1;
processing said permuted array by adding and substracting
first and second signal values selected from said permuted
array to produce first and second intermediate arrays of M
intermediate first and second signal values b|(q) and b2(q)
respectively, wherein:
m=(N-\)/2
.q=l, 2, 3, .... M
^ b2(<l) = b(g)-HM+q)
converting the first intermediate array of M intermediate first
signal values b|(q) into a first auxiliary array of M auxiliary
first signal values yi(p), p= 1, 2, 3, . . . M, wherein
yiQ>) = a 1 bi(g) cos T-^ «' +{(J>-9)mod V} j ,
in which a represents a constant;
converting the second intermediate array of M intermediate
second signal values b2(q) into a second auxiliary array of
M auxiliary second signal values y2(p). wherein:
424
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
nip) =j0 i.
biiq) sin
(^
gl+{(p-q)mod M}
I
M
-7)3 2 bi(q) sin
q=p+\
:in(jj-
gl+{(p-q)mod M)
)■
in which /3 represents a constant and wherein y=V'- 1;
processing said first and second auxiliary arrays of M auxil-
iary first and second signal values to generate an output
array of N- 1 output signal values z(n)- Aa(0), n- 1. 2, 3,
. . . N-1 which are each proportional to the discrete
Fourier transform of the array of N input signal values and
which are defined by the relation
2(n)-Aa{0)=y](p) + (-\}Sy2{p)
wherein
S= + l, for n = gPmod N.
S=0, for n = gM + p mod N.
A being a constant.
4,435,776
WORD PROCESSING SYSTEM
David J. RatclifTe, deceased, late of Mendham, N J. (by Madli-
Ann RatclifTe, executrix); Richard E. Jones, Holmdel, N.J.;
Philip Shevrin, Ocean Township, Monmouth County, N.J.,
and Charles B. Haley, Watchung, N.J., assignors to Syntrex
Incorporated, Eatontown, N.J.
Filed Jan. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 228,904
Int. a.3 G06F 3/02
U.S. a. 364-900 23aaims
4,435,775
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM HAVING INTERLINKED
SLOW AND FAST MEMORY MEANS
George L. Brantingham, Tourrettes sur Loup, France, and
Ashok H. Someshwar, Austin, Tex., assignors to Texas Instru-
ments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 221,416
Int. a.3 G06F 13/00
U.S. a. 364-900 3 Qaims
no* Tt
moM H
f«M »« fBIlK-' CONI
FROM 1? VJI llM*!
FROM 2« r^Ry^rfy* ^
1. A data processing system comprising:
first means for providing first address signals,
main memory means coupled to said first means, said main
memory means selectively producing data signals respon-
sive to said first address signals,
second means for providing second address signals,
fast memory means coupled to said second means, said fast
memory means selectively producing data signals respon-
sive to said second address signals and having a faster
response output than said main memory means, said fast
memory means being located on the same integrated cir-
cuit chip as the main memory means;
means coupled to said main and fast memory means for
selectively deactivating said main memory means and for
selectively activating said fast memory means in response
to particular data signals output from said main memory
means; and
means coupled to said main and fast memory means for
selectively deactivating said fast memory means and for
selectively activating said main memory means in re-
sponse to predefined data signals output from said fast
memory means.
1. A word processing system comprising
storage means for storing a plurality of words, each word
having character line data and a scroll value,
character generating means for converting said character
line data into a sequence of adjacent physical raster line
data,
control means for addressinag said character generating
means and responsive to said scroll value for varying the
sequence of said physical raster line data in said character
generator means producing a sequence of vertical raster
line data, and
monitor means for displaying the sequence of said vertical
raster line data received from said character generating
means.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
425
4,435,777
INTERACTIVELY REARRANGING SPATIALLY
RELATED DATA
Rex A. McCasklll; John W. Mclnroy, and Paul D. Waldo, all of
Austin, Tex., assignors to Internatkuial Business Machines
Corporation, Armonk, N.Y. \ /
Filed May 18, 1981, S^. No. 264,387
Int. CI.' G06F 3/14
U.S. CI. 364-900 7 Oalms
c
c-^ T
oiSPi«»
14
DlSPltl
DfriESN
eurrci
I?
c
■CfNAiin
lO
PHIIIft* t~f r •-«Kf5MII~l
JLJ I > I
1. An improved method for assisting an operator of an inter-
active text processing system in interactively entering instruc-
tional data into said system which defines to said system de-
sired changes to be made to each spatially related vector for-
matted data record stored in an existing file which includes a
header record having a plurality of named fields, the location
of which in said header record establishes the spatial relation-
ship of data in each said record, comprising the steps of:
(a) displaying to said operator said header record as a hori-
zontal row of said named fields, each of which is disposed
at a location in said row determined in accordance with
said vector format;
(b) displaying to said operator a cursor disposed at a prede-
termined position in said horizontal row;
(c) moving said cursor to a position in said horizontal row
which corresponds to a field location involved in one of
said changes;
(d) initiating an edit operation corresponding to said one of
• said changes after the cursor is moved to said position in
said horizontal row which corresponds to said one of said
changes; i
(e) storing in said system sailnnstructional data defining said
edit operation performed in step (d) by said operator and
said position in said header of said cursor when said edit
operation was initiated; and
(0 repeating steps (c), (d) and (e) for each desired said
change to permit said system to subsequently edit each of
said data records in said existing file in accordance with
said stored instructional data.
4,435,778
METHOD FOR EDITING SPATIALLY RELATED DATA
IN AN INTERACTIVE TEXT PROCESSING SYSTEM
William C. Cason; Rex A. McCasklll, both of Austin, and Fran*
Cisco A. Karner, Round Rock, all of Tex., asslgn(frs to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,368
Int. CI.' G06F 3/153
U.S. a. 364—900 8 Gaims
C c-
•— 1
ClOCI
c .
SIO«Mf
OlSfL«l
(4
r"
• -1
1
-c
1
1
1
"^r|r
c
f-nDCESSOii
KTMARD
—
V
—
ZJ —
a keyboard and a microprocessor including a memory for
storing (1) programs; (2) conventional text data in one format;
and (3) spatially related text type data in a second format, said
spatially related text type data being stored in said memory in
said second format as a plurality of vector formatted records to
permit data processing type operations to be performed by said
system on said records in either an int^active or non-interac-
tive mode, said method including the step of displaying on said
screen at least one line of text data stored in said system in said
one format to permit the operator of said system to interac-
tively edit said one line of displayed text data in accordance
with a prescribed set of interactions of said operator with said,
screen and said keyboard, the improvement characterized by
the steps of:
(A) converting with said microprocessor at least one portion
of one of said vector formatted records of spatially related
text type data stored in said memory from said second
format to said one format;
(B) displaying to said operator said converted one portion on
said display screen; and
(C) editing said displayed converted one portion interac-
tively by said prescribed set of operator interactions in-
volvmg said operator, said keyboard and said display
screen.
4 435 779
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH PROGRAMMABLE
GRAPHICS GENERATOR
Steven T. Mayer, Auburn; Jay G. Miner, Sunnyvale: Douglas G.
Neubauer, Santa Clara, and Joseph C. Decuir, Mountain
View, all of Calif., assignors to Atari, Inc., Sunnyvale, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 1,497, Jan. 8, 1979, Pat. No. 4,296,476. This
application Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,324
Int. CI.' G06F 3/153
U.S. CI. 364—900 13 aaimi
1. In a method of interactively editing text data displayed on
a display screen of an interactive test processing system having
1. A raster graphics generator circuit having two modes of
operation, a map mode and a character mode, the circuit com-
prising:
a digital memory for storing a sequence of display instruc-
tions, including map and character instructions, and for
storing sequential graphics information, sequential charac-
ter names, and character blocks of graphics information,
each character block comprising a number of bytes,
a display list circuit coupled to the digital memory for ad-
dresing a sequent display instruction in response to a start
signal; and
logic circuitry coupled to the digital memory and responsive
to an addressed display instruction for operating in one of
two modes; a map mode in response to a map instruction
and a character mode in response to a character instruc-
tion, the logic circuitry including map means operable in
426
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
the map mode for sequentially addressing the sequential
graphics information and for providing raster graphics
signals in response to the addressed sequential graphics
information; the logic circuitry further including charac-
ter means operable in the character mode for addressing
the sequential character names, for storing the addressed
character names, : for addressing character blocks of
graphics information in response to the stored character
names, and for providing raster graphics signals in re-
sponse to the addressed character blocks of graphics infor-
mation.
4,435,780
SEPARATE STACK AREAS FOR PLURAL PROCESSES
Kenneth M. Herrington, and Kenneth L. Jeffries, both of Austin,
Tex., assignors to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,114
Int. a.} G06F 1/00
U.S. a. 364—900 6 Oaims
SIS
tEll
ClOCI
CLOCI
ClOC«-^ DlSlfllt
ODltE IS)
IIIEI)-
tiiei-
MOCESSOU
lltEMuPT
lETIOMO
'?-<^^^'ll^^
PtllTEII
j"» H '-19
DTHEt PIO
DEVICE (SI
1. A method of efficiently handling priority ordered, inter-
rupt driven processor allocation in a multiprocess environment
including the step of:
defining an independently indentified and addressable stack
storage area for each process to be performed, each stack
so defined having a process control block, the beginning
of which is coincident with the beginning of the stack
storage area.
4,435,781
MEMORY-BASED PARALLEL DATA OUTPUT
CONTROLLER
Raymond J. Stattel, Lanham, and James K. Niswander, Silver
Spring, both of Md., assignors to The United States of Amer-
ica as represented by the Administrator of the National Aero-
nautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 128,230, Mar. 7, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jan. 9, 1983, Ser. No. 501,060
Int. a.3 G06F 3/00
VS. a. 364—900 3 Claims
fr .«
^V^s'
Smbc
yl
tftiOO-
5
9»'»IOT»
uWKcaTniiic
snac
V
1. A memory -based parallel data output controller for the
extraction of predetermined bits from an inputted bit serial
digital data stream for use with a frame synchronizer of the
type having a word counter, a bit counter, a link synchroniza-
tion status signal and a reference clock, said output controller
receiving said inputted bit serial digital data stream and decom-
mutating said predetermined extracted bits into multiple chan-
nels of predetermined parallel telemetry data to a plurality of
peripheral devices, comprising:
a first random access memory having address lines and at
least as many memory address locations as there are chan-
nels, said word counter being connected to said address
lines of said first random access memory which provides
as its output an encoded peripheral device number and a
first flag denoting either most significant bit or least signif-
icant bit first operation,
a second random access memory having address lines and
for outputting second and third flags to pick out the stari
and stop of said predetermined extracted bits, said en-
coded peripheral device number output from said first
random access memory and said bit counter being con-
nected to the address lines of said second random access
memory,
a serial-in parallel-out shift register for outputting said pre-
determined extracted bits in a parallel format representing
said parallel telemetry data,
shift register control means for receiving said bit serial digi-
tal data stream, said first, second and third flags, said link
synchronization status signal and said reference clock and,
therefrom, for developing and outputting a strobe pulse, a
mode pulse, a shift pulse, and serial data pulse stream all of
which output pulses being inputted into said shift register,
decoding means connected to receive said encoded periph-
eral device number output from said first random access
memory and receiving and being enabled by said output
strobe pulse for selecting one of said plurality of periph-
eral devices to receive said parallel telemetry data from
said shift register.
4,435,782
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH HIGH DENSITY
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC UNIT
Dan R. Kauftni^, Kingston, and Gerhard R. Thompson, Wap*
pingers Falls, both of N.Y., assignors to International Busi-
ness Machines Corp., Annonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,794
Int. a.' G06F 7/48. 7/50
U.S. a. 364—716 6 Claims
•j ^— 1 '"*«' ,« 0.*,-.
SIC
tr
■,„<'*■<
,''
i.tiUa,.!
cIT^.-J
1. A processor chip having means for supplying two multi-
bit data words on which arithmetic and logic operations are to
be performed and having means supplying control signals
defining an operation to be performed, a multi-stage arithmetic
and logic unit having for each stage a sum output and a carry
output, two inputs for receiving the corresponding bits of the
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
427
two multi-bit data words and an input for receiving a carry
output from a preceeding stage, comprising,
means responsive to the data inputs and to control signals
defining a predetermined logic function to form at the
carry output of the stage a logic function of the data input
bits to the stage and to form at the sum output of the stage
a logic function of the carry input to the stage, the two
functions combining in two adjacent stages to produce
said predetermined function, and
means for shifting the sum outputs of the arithmetic and
logic unit one bit position to the right to realign the output
bits.
1. An apparatus for propagation of magnetic bubbles com-
prising:
an input stage including inuts for receiving one or more
bubbles;
a strip-former stage adjacent the input stage and including a
plurality of propagating elements vertically spaced so as
to selectively form bubbles or strips of variable height
dependent upon the combination of bubbles provided to
the first stage, at least one of said propagating elements
being an idler element and at least one of said combina-
tions producing a strip extending the full-height of said
strip-former stage, and
a decoding stage having a first output propagating element
spaced apart from said strip former a distance sufficient to
prevent propagation of all but said full-height strip onto
said first output element.
4,435,784
MULTI-REPLICATOR STRETCHER DETECTOR
Isoris S. Gergis, Yorba Linda, and Wai-Tak P. Lee, Santa Ana,
both of Calif., assignors to Rockwell International Corpora-
tion, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,816
Int. a. J GllC 19/08
U.S. a. 365-8 12 Qaims
1. A detector for magnetic bubble domain devices compris-
ing:
a propagation path comprising a dual conductor propaga-
tion track for magnetic bubble domains;
first and second current means connected to said dual con-
ductor propagation track for applying a time varying
current thereto;
the current applied to said first conductor track being differ-
ent in phase than the current applied to said second con-
ductor track so that a magnetic bubble domain is propa-
gated along the dual conductor;
expander means disposed adjacent said propagation path and
functioning to expand a bubble domain on said path in a
first direction, said expander means comprises a hairpin
loop intersecting said propagation path at a substantially
right angle;
replication means disposed adjacent said expander means
and functioning to cut said expanded bubble into a plural-
ity of magnetic bubble domains and to expand the bubble
domains in a second direction different from said first
direction;
said replication means comprises a multi-loop conductor
track intersecting said expander means at approximately a
right angle; and
ySCNSOD ClOCNT
4,435,783
MAGNETIC BUBBLE LOGIC APPARATUS
Richard P. Williams, Columbia, Md., assignor to The United
Sutes of America as represented by the Director of the Na-
tional Security Agency, Washington, D.C.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,664
Int. a.3 GllC 19/08
U.S. a. 365—5 2 Claims
370
37S
* A
fSBT*
I f
' I
r-: ! I
/,
>..,
.;r...:
32:
=b
I I
U^
detection means disposed along said second direction and
functioning to detect said plurality of magnetic bubble
domains, said detection means being formed by elongated
strips of a magnetoresistive sensor element expending
essentially parallel to and between the turns of said multi-
loop conductor track.
4,435,785
UNIPOLAR VOLTAGE NON-VOLATILE JRAM CELL
Richard A. Chapman, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Texas Instru-
ments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,201 '
Int. a.^ GllC 11/24; HOIL 29/80
U.S. a. 365-147 9 cuUms
MfUT r- — ,
i I f « ' « T
*~*^ t ! »Ti.ii« . ' "V-
■ -1 1 j ' 1 1, auTftjT
I
10 \ IC
•T'
I
j_ — " I
1. A non-volatile data storage cell having a P-channel JFET
as the addressing element for the non-volatile storage element
of said cell, said P-channel JFET having a source region of a
higher level of impurity concentration for changing voltage
breakdown threshold, wherein writing and erasing data in said
cell is accomplished by voltages of the same polarit^'.
5. A non-volatile data storage cell comprising:
a semiconductor substrate of one conductivity type;
a first region of conductivity opposite that of the substrate,
extending to the surface of said substrate, wherein said
first region surrounds an enclosed region of said substrate,
said enclosed region of substrate having a higher level of
428
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
impurity concentration of the same conductivity type as
said substrate for changing the breakdown voltage be-
tween said substrate and said first region of opposite con-
ductivity;
an insulating layer covering the surface of said substrate, said
first region of opposite conductivity, and said enclosed
region of substrate;
a multidielectric structure overlying said enclosed substrate
region and recessed into said insulating layer such that a
reduced thickness of said insulating layer is present be-
tween said dielectric structure and said enclosed substrate
region, than is present between said substrate and subse-
quent structure parts;
a conductor arranged on the surface of said insulating layer
to be in contact with said multilayer dielectric structure.
4,435,787 )
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY CIRCUIT
Nobuyuki Yasuoka, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,106
Gaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 21, 1980, 55-147142
Int. Cl.^ GllC J 1/40
U.S. a. 365—174 6 Oaims
4,435,786
SELF-REFRESHING MEMORY CELL
Andrew C. Tickle, Los Altos, Calif., assignor to Fairchiid Cam-
era and Instrument Corporation, Mountain View, Calif.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,344
Int. a.3 GllC J J/40
U.S. a. 365—154 4 Claims
»
)
1. A memory cell comprising:
a first MOS transistor and a second MOS transistor, each of
said first and second MOS transistors possessing a source,
a drain, and a control gate;
a third MOS transistor and a fourth MOS transistor, each of
said third and fourth MOS transistors possessing a source,
a drain, and a control gate;
a pair of resistive elements, one lead of each resistive element
being connected to a corresponding drain of one of said
third and fourth MOS transistors, the other lead of each
resistive element being connected to a voltage source;
a first floating gate positioned between the gate and the
channel of said third MOS transistor but insulated there-
from and having a portion extending above but separated
by dielectric from the drain of said third MOS transistor,
said dielectric having a portion thereof sufficiently thin to
allow electrons to tunnel therethrough between the drain
of said third MOS transistor and said first floating gate;
a second floating gate positioned between the gate and the
channel of said fourth MOS transistor but insulated there-
from and having a portion extending above but separated
by dielectric from the drain of said fourth MOS transistor,
said dielectric having a portion thereof sufficiently thin to
allow electrons to tunnel therethrough between the drain
of said fourth MOS transistor and said second floating
gate;
means connecting the control gates of said third and fourth
MOS transistors to a source of gate potential;
means connecting the control gate of said first MOS transis-
tor to the drain of said second MOS transistor; and
means connecting the control gate of said second MOS
transistor to the drain of said first MOS transistor.
6. A semiconductor memory array having a plurality of
memory circuits wherein each said memory circuit comprises:
a memory cell;
a first word line coupled to said memory cell;
a first digit line coupled to said memory cell for receiving
data from said memory cell when a signal of a first poten-
tial is coupled to said first word line;
a second word line coupled to said memory cell and extend-
ing from said memory cell in a direction perpendicular to
said first word line; and
a second digit line coupled to said memory cell and extend-
ing from said memory cell in a direction perpendicular to
said first digit line, for receiving data when a signal of a
second potential is coupled to said second word line;
whereby an array of memory circuits is realized having
first word lines crossing second word lines at right angles,
and first digit lines crossing second digit lines at right
angles.
4,435,788
NONVOLATILE SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY DEVICE
Norihisa Kitagawa, Tokyo, and Hiroji Asahi, Zama, both of
Japan, assignors to Texas Instruments Incorporated, Dallas,
Tex.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,162
Int. Cl.^ GllC 11/40. 7/00
U.S. CI. 365—185 3 Claims
1. A non- volatile semiconductor memory device comprising
a plurality of memory cells arranged in a matrix pattern of
rows and columns and row address means including separate
row lines for read and write for each row and separate true and
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
429
complement column lines for each column, sense amplifier
means connected to the column lines for sensing data stored in
said memory cells, characterized in that each of said memory
cells comprises a pair of symmetrical submemory cells, each
submemory cell containing a floating gate and injector means,
and the pair of said submemory cells can store logic states
opposite to each other on said floating gates.
4 435 789
CIRCUIT FOR A READ-ONLY MEMORY ORGANIZED
IN ROWS AND COLUMNS TO PREVENT BIT LINE
POTENTIALS FROM DROPPING
Burkhard Giebel, Munich; Hans Moormann, Haar, and Lothar
Schrader, Munich, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Siemens Aktiengescllschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,515
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 14,
1980, 3030867
Int. CI.^ GllC 7/00
U.S. CI. 365-203 7 Claims
ffUKHlxr-nto WMucj '^
.11
T„4y-
_J«f!*J.t
1. Circuit arrangement for a read-only memory organized in
rows and columns, including bit lines having potentials applied
thereto, and selection circuits being connected to the bit lines,
being addressed^Jj*r|^ bit line decoder and containing at least
one selection transistor having a cut-off voltage and a gate
potential, for preventing bit line potentials from dropping
below a given value at which the selection circuits become
conducting without having been selected by the bit line de-
coder, comprising current-feed lines each being connected to a
different one of the bit lines for feeding current to the bit lines
and for ensuring that for each of the selection circuits not
selected by the bit line decoder the difference between at least
one gate potential of the participating selection transistors and
the respective bit line potential is smaller that the cut-off volt-
age of the respective section transistors, and including first and
second potential sources, said current-feed lines each including
an MOS transistor having a source-drain path connected be-
tween a different respective bit line and said first potential
source and a gate connected to said second potential source,
said potential sources being chosen so as to prevent current
from flowing in non-selected selection circuits.
4 435 790
HIGH SPEED, NONVOLATILE, ELECTRICALLY
ERASABLE MEMORY CELL AND SYSTEM
Andrew C. Tickle, Los Altos, and Madhukar B. Vora, Los Gatos,
both of Calif., assignors to Fairchiid Camera and Instrument
Corporation, Mountain View, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 219,784, Dec. 24, 1980. This application
Mar. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 474,929
Int. C1.3 GllC 11/40
U.S. a. 365—218 7 Oaims
1. A method for encoding binary data into an electrically
erasable memory, said memory comprising a matrix of memory
cells formed as a plurality of rows and a plurality of columns of
said cells each of said cells comprising a floating gate field
effect pMOS transistor for storage of binary data and an npn
bipolar transistor for selective access to stored data, a plurality
of X write lines the control gate of each said storage transistor
in a row of said memory cells being connected to an X write
line corresponding to said row, a plurality of X sense lines the
emitter of each said bipolar transistor in a row of said memory
cells being connected to an X sense line corresponding to said
row, a plurality of source lines the source of each said bipolar
transistor in a row of said memory cells being connected to a
source line corresponding to said row, and a plurality of Y
sense lines the collector of each said bipolar transistor in a
column of said memory cells being connected to a Y sense line
corresponding to said column, the method comprising:
(a) applying an erase voltage to each of said Y sense lines
and, simultaneously, maintaining each of said X sense lines
at said erase voltage, maintaining each of said X write
lines at ground and applying said erase voltage to each of
said source lines such that each of said storage transistors
assumes a relatively negative threshold state; and
(b) applying a write voltage to selected X write lines while
maintaining unselected X write lines at ground and, simul-
taneously, maintaining selected Y sense lines at ground
and unselected Y sense lines at aii inhibit voltage which is
less than said write voltage and maintaining each of said X
sense lines at an intermediate voltage which is equal to or
less than the base/emitter breakdown voltage of said
bipolar transistors such that the storage transistors of
memory cells located at the intersections of said selected '
X write lines and said selected Y sense lines assume a
relat'vely positive threshold state.
4,435,791
CMOS ADDRESS BUFFER FOR A SEMICONDUCTOR
MEMORY
Benjamirt L. Gingerich, Palm Bay, Fla., assignor to Harris
Corporation, Melbourne, Fla.
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,616
Int. CV GllC 7/00
365—230
30C
/
M "to
"to fg
r- "
Dm' \[f
JO
Jto
ai
a
"ir *°
*
I?
PSECn/usf
^o
*'j
« ' pnecHAitu
PKCM
><i&f»
«;
ie
1. In a buffer circuit for an address input of a semiconductor
memory comprising regenerative latch means having first and
second input/output voltage nodes, said regenerative latch
means connected to a ttpply voltage and including a pair of
cross-coupled inverter circuits for providing output signals in
response to a data input signal, the improvement comprising an
input circuit including:
a write transistor having a gate for receiving a write signal,
a source connected to said supply voltage, and a drain;
430
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a data mput transistor having a gate for receiving said data
input signal, a source connected to said drain of said write
transistor and a drain connected to said First input/output
voltage node;
said input circuit applying said supply voltage to said first
input/output voltage node in response to said data input
and said write signals.
4,435,792
RASTER MEMORY MANIPULATION APPARATUS
Andreas Bechtolsheim, Stanford, Calif., assignor to Sun Mi-
crosystems, Inc., Mountain View, Calif.
Filed Jun. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,599
Int. a.3 GllC 13/00
U.S. a. 365—230 21 Qaims
18. A Boolean modifiable memory apparatus in which data
stored within memory are modified in accordance with input
data and function data, comprising
memory means for supplying stored data from a specified
location during a memory read cycle and responsive to
modified data for storing modified data at a specified
location during a memory write cycle; and
multiplexer means, responsive to the modified data supplied
from the memory means, to the input data, and to the
function data, for supplying the modified data to the mem-
ory means for storage,
wherein the multiplexer means have a plurality of data lines
and a plurality of control lines and are operable to supply,
as an output, data which are present on one of the plurality
of data lines, in accordance with the combination of data
present on the plurality of control lines, and
furtherwherein the function data are supplied to the data
lines of the multiplexer means, the stored data are applied
to ones of the plurality of control lines, and the input data
are supplied to different ones of the plurality of control
lines, so that the output of the multiplexer means corre-
sponds to a Boolean function of the stored data and the
input data, the Boolean function being specified by the
function data;
whereby the stored data and the input data are supplied to
the control lines and the function data are supplied to the
I data lines all during the memory read cycle, and the modi-
fied data, which is the result of the specified Boolean
operation upon the stored data and input data, are sup-
plied to the memory means for storage during the memory
write cycle.
4 435 793
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY DEVICE WITH DUMMY
WORD LINE/SENSE AMPLIHER ACTIVATION
Kiyofumi Ochii, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denkj Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 171,264, Jul. 22, 1980,
abandoned. This application Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,624
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 26, 1979, 54-95527;
European Pat. Off., Jul. 18, 1980, 80104251.6
Int. a.J GllC 7/00. 8/00
U.S. a. 365—233 27 Claims
poecHARGC cmcmT
(3.
a.
:fifi
-g- -p
iiie:i
1. A semiconductor memory device comprising:
a plurality of semiconductor memory cells;
at least one word line coupled to said plurality of semicon-
ductor memory cells for selectively transmitting an access
signal thereto;
at least one pair of data lines coupled to said plurality of
semiconductor memory cells for transferring data with
respect thereto;
sense amplifier means coupled to said at least one pair of data
lines for amplifying a data signal transferred therethrough;
a dummy word line having a signal transfer property corre-
sponding to that of said at least one word line;
a dummy selection signal generating means coupfed to said
dummy word line for supplying a dummy selection signal
to said dummy word line every time an addressing opera-
tion is effected; and
energizing signal generating means coupled to said dummy
word line for generating a first energizing signal for a
preset period of time in each operation cycle to activate
said sense amplifier means in res[)onse to a dummy selec-
tion signal transmitted through said dummy word line.
4,435,794
WALL-DRIVEN OVAL RING TRANSDUCER
William J. Marshall, Jr., and Gerald A. Brigham, both of
Nashua, N.H., assignors to Sanders Associates, Inc., Nashua,
N.H.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,749
Int. a.3 H04R 77/00
U.S. O. 367—155 10 Oaims
1. A wall-driven oval ring transducer comprising:
(a) an oval cylindrical shell comprised of walls having a
thickness with inner and outer side walls and having
major and miner axes in cross-section and being symmetri-
cal about said axes, the thickness of said walls in two
opposed regions having said major axis passing there-
through being sized in relationship to the thickness of said
walls in two opposed regions having said minor axis pass-
ing therethrough so as to place the fundamental frequency
of the transducer at a preselected level; and,
(b) extension means disposed circumferentially within a pair
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
431
of cut out sections in opposed portions of said walls and
connectable to a source of a driving signal for simulta-
neously applying an outward flexing force to said walls in
said regions having said minor axis passing therethrough.
4,435,796
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION CONSTRUCTION FOR
ELECTRONIC TIMEPIECE
Motoyuki Saito, and Hideo Hatanaka, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Citizen Watch Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 159,446, Jun. 13, 1980, Pat. No. 4,403^15.
This application Jul. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 396,440
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 23, 1979, 54-100605
Int. Q.3 G04B 29/00
U.S. Q. 368-321 5 Claims
4,435,795
CELESTIAL CLOCK
John Frank, Anchorage, Ak., assignor to A.I.M. Services, An-
chorage, Ak.
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,880
Int. d? G04B 19/26
U.S. Q. 368—16
27 Qaims
1. A clock for indicating daily time and the relative positions
of at least two celestial bodies of the earth's solar system with
respect to the earth, comprising:
an axis;
a center hub represenUtive of the earth centered on said axis;
hour indicator means rotatable about said axis one revolu-
tion per day;
sun indicator means representative of the sun rotatable about
said axis one revolution per day, said sun indicator means
and said hour indicator means superimposed with respect
to each other, ai^ said sun indicator means rotatable
relative to said hour indicator means;
planet indicator means representative of a planet rotatable
about said sun indicator means at a rate substantially equal
to the planet's natural period of revolution about the sun;
and
drive means for automatically rotating said indicator means
at their prescribed rates.
1. An electronic timepiece assembly comprising a switch
upper plate having a contact pattern formed on the lower
surface thereof, said contact pattern including a plurality of
spaced terminals, a connector having a plurality of spaced
electrical conductors engaging said terminals at the upper ends
of said conductors and adapted to engage a module at the
lower ends of said conductors, said switch upper plate conuct
pattern further including a plurality of spaced terminal por-
tions, a switch lower base having a plurality of spaced electri-
cally conductive elements on the upper surface thereof, each of
said conductive elements being disposed in alignment with a
corresponding pair of said terminal portions on said switch
upper plate, and a plurality of projections operable from the
outside so as to be resiliently deformed and bring a selected
pair of said spaced terminal portions and a corresponding one
of said conductive elements in^ engagement to complete a
selected circuit, said electronic timepiece assembly further
including a case within which said switch upper plate and said
switch lower plate are disposed, a plurality of actuating mem-
bers extending externally of said case for effecting deformation
of said projections, one of said actuating members being ar-
ranged to move generally parallel to said switch upper plate.
4,435,797
OPTICAL MEMORY SYSTEM HAVING TRACK
FOLLOWING AND SEEKING CAPABILITIES
Der-Chang Hsieh, Thousand Oaks, and Edward V. LaBudde,
Newbury Park, both of Calif., assignors to Burroughs Corpo-
ration, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,535
Int. Q.3 GllB 7/00
U.S. Q. 369—32 U Qaims
1. In a high density storage system including a recording
medium having a large plurality of closely spaced tracks, the
combination comprising:
means including a radiation beam for reading data recorded
in a track;
means providing for relative movement of said radiation
beam along said track;
means for deriving a track following signal indicative of the
deviation of said radiation beam from a track being fol- ,
lowed;
first position control means coupled to said track following
signal for moving said radiation beam to provide track
following operation such that said radiation beam follows
said track;
detecting means for detecting the movement of said first
432
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
position control means during said track following opera-
tion;
second position control means coupled to said detecting
means and operating concurrently with said first position
control means during said track following operation, said
second position control means being responsive to said
detecting means for providing movement of said first
position control means so as to reduce the movement
required thereby for maintaining said radiation beam fol-
lowing said track; and
track seeking control means for causing movement of said
beam from a current track being followed to a new track,
said track seeking control means including short seek
control means and long seek control means, said short
seek control means being operative to control movement
of said beam when the number of tracks to be moved is
equal to or less than a predetermined value and said long
seek control means being operative to control movement
of said beam when the number of tracks to be moved is
greater than said predetermined value;
said short seek control means being operative to temporarily
disable said track following operation during which time
said first position control means is used for performing a
short seek operation; and
said long seek control means being operative to temporarily
disable said track following operation for a temporary
time period during which said second position control
means is used for performing a long seek operation.
4,435,798
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CLEANING DISKS
CONTAINING ENCODED INFORMATION
Stanley Taub, 465 W. Broadway, New York, N.Y. 10012
Filed Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 361,140
Int. CV GllB 3/58; A47L 13/40
U.S. a. 369—72 22 Qaims
'33^
1. The method of cleaning disks containing encoded infor-
mation, such as phonorecords and videodiscs, comprising-
mechanically charging in a charging area to a voltage suffi-
cient to remove dust particles from the surface of a disk to
be cleaned, an electrostatically activatable elongate body
of soft flexible material by pressing it against a surface
coated with a pressure sensitive adhesive, and then sepa-
rating the body from said adhesive coated surface thereby
simultaneously cleaning and charging said body, said
voltage being substantially uniform along the longitudinal
axis of the body, the body being capable of retaining a
voltage of said level at least long enough to permit passing
said body over one entire side of the disk before recharg-
ing;
moving said body from the charging area to the surface of
the disk to be cleaned; and
passing the body over at least a portion of the surface of the
disk to be cleaned to remove dust particles therefrom.
4,435,799
DISC RECORD PLAYER HAVING SHUTOFF SWITCH
ACTUATING APPARATUS
Thomas F. Kirschner, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Cor*
poration. New York, N.Y.
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,463
Int. CI.' GllB 19/10, 17/00. 1/00
U.S. CI. 369—77.2 5 Claims
*•.-
226
■•.291
josfc' V
iM ,'
1. In a record player for use with a record enclosed in a
protective caddy; said caddy consisting of a record retaining
spine removably located within an outer sleeve; said retaining
spine having an opening in which said record is received form-
ing a record/spine assembly; said player having an input slot
near the front end thereof through which said caddy is inserted
to load a record therein; said player having a record extraction
mechanism for removing said record/spine assembly from said
sleeve and retaining it in said player on a set of front and rear
receiving pads when said sleeve is extracted from said player
after the insertion of a full caddy therein; said player including
a turntable for rotatably supporting a retained record during
playback; an empty sleeve being reinserted into said player to
recapture said record/spine assembly; a shutoff switch actuat-
ing apparatus comprising:
a shutoff switch;
a cam member movably mounted in said player for motion
between a first location and a second location;
means coupled to said shutoff switch for driving said cam
member between said first location and said second loca-
tion;
a shutoff switch actuating member movably mounted in said
player for motion between a first position and a second
position, respectively, in response to the absence of and
the presence of a record/spine assembly in said player;
the location of said actuating member being such that said
actuating member is disposed in and out of the path of a
portion arranged on said cam member when said actuating
member respectively occupies said first position and said
second position during said motion of said cam member
between said locations; and
said portion on said cam member engaging and deflecting
said actuating member to activate said shutoff switch to
turn off said cam member driving means when said actuat-
ing member is occupying said first position in response to
the absence of said record/spine assembly in said player
luring ^id motion of said cam member away from said
first location.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
433
4,435,800
AUTOMATIC RECORD PLAYER
James T. Dennis, P.O. Box 15100, Oklahoma City, Okla. 73155,
and George Kolomayets, Chicago, III., assignors to James T.
Dennis, Oklahoma City, Okla.
Division of Ser. No. 211,837, Dec. 1, 1980, Pat. No. 4,352,177,
Division of Ser. No. 9,254, Feb. 5, 1979, Pat. No. 4,291,886,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 813,225, Jul. 5, 1977,
abandoned. This application May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,150
Int. O.} GllB 17/08
U.S. a. 369-225 „ a„„s
1. In an automatic record player, the combination of, a
turntable, a tone arm, means for mounting said tone arm for
rotation about a fixed point beyond said turntable, a main
cycling gear, cam means carried by said gear, means for rotat-
ing said gear one revolution during an automatic cycle, a rest
post for said tone arm, tone arm retaining means positioned to
be engaged by said tone arm, means controlled by movement
of said gear during the first half of an automatic cycle for
moving said tone arm outwardly into engagement with said
rest post, means controlled by movement of said gear during
the last half of an automatic cycle for moving said tone arm
inwardly to a point over the lead-in groove of a record posi-
tioned on said turntable, means responsive to movement of said
cam means during an automatic cycle for raising and lowering
said tone arm, and means operable independently of said cam
means during an automatic shutoff cycle for lowering said tone
arm into engagement with said tone arm retaining means while
said tone arm is in engagement with said rest post, said tone
arm retaining means being effective to restrain said tone arm
from inward movement during the remaining portion of said
automatic shutoff cycle.
4,435,801
INFORMATION.RECORD WITH A THICK OVERCOAT
Leonard J. Levin, Levittown, Pa., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 108,030, Dec. 28, 1979, Pat. No. 4,340,959.
This application Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 363,790
Int. a.3 GllB 7/24
U.S. a. 369-275 g aai„.
an overcoat layer, which is substantially transmissivc of light
at said wavelength, overlying said light absorptive layer;
wherein said information track comprises a sequence of
openings in said absorptive layer with variations in either
or both the length of the openings along the track and the
spacing between successive openings being representative
of the recorded information;
the improvement which comprises a substrate having a
major surface which has a center portion and a portion
extending about said substrate periphery raised a distance
above said major surface,
wherein said light refiective layer, and said light absorptive
layer overlie at least a portion of the major surface which
is not raised and said overcoat layer overlies said major
surface which is not raised.
4,435,802
SYNTHETIC RESIN MATERIAL, PARTICULARLY
SURFACE MATERIAL FOR PHONOGRAPH RECORDS
WITH A PHOTOGRAPH OR PICTURE
Masahisa Sakamoto, 1-1-7, Nijo-cho, Nara-shi, Nara; Yoshio
Tamura, 1370, Ohsawa, Mutaka-shi, Tokyo, and Tadashi
Sakamoto, 1-1-3, SaidaijI-Nogami, Nara-shi, Nara, all of
Japan, assignors to Masahisa Sakamoto, Nara; Yoshio
Tamura, Tokyo; Tadashi Sakamoto, Nara and Hiroji
Kawamura, Shizuoka, all of, Japan
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,772
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 17, 1981, 56-22464
Int. Cl.^ C08J 3/12
U.S. CI. 369-286 2 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a non-recorded phonograph
record disc, comprising:
subjecting a copolymeric vinyl chloride powder incorpo-
rated with a small amount of a stabilizer to a hot blending
treatment;
melt-kneading the product under heating;
cooling the same to ambient temperature to form a mass;
granulating the mass;
freezing the resulting granules;
grinding the frozen granules into powders;
applying said powders to a core sheet having a photograph
or picture thereon, by means of an adhesive; and
pressing the resin material under heating to form a transpar-
ent surface film of a uniform thickness.
30
26 ,?4 ^,8 ('V'* (« ,26
1. In an information record, having an information track
therein, for use in an optical recording and readout system
employing a light beam of a certain wavelength which com-
prises:
a substrate having a major surface;
a light reflective layer, which reflects a substantial portion of
light incident thereon at said wavelength, overlying at
least a portion of said major surface;
a light absorptive layer, which absorbs light at said wave-
length, overlying said light reflective layer;
4,435,803
ANALOG SUBSCRIBER/TRUNK MODULE WITH
SHARED RINGING SOURCE AND RING-TRIP
Santanu Das, Huntington; Ramon C. W. Chea, Jr., Monroe, and
Russ C. Casterline, Trumbul, all of Conn., assignors to Inter-
national Telephone and Telegraph Corporation, New York.
N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 135,756, Mar. 31, 1980, abandoned.
This application Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,606
Int. a.3 H04J 3/12; H04M 19/02; H04Q 1/22
U.S. CI. 370-16 21 Claims
1. A telephone signaling; system comprising:
means for providing line termination for a plurality of analog
telephone subscriber lines or trunks carrying bidirectional
analog communication signals, said means including mul-
tiplex means for digitally multiplexing analog information
from said analog lines or trunks into multi-channel frames
of time division multiplexed data on digital transmission
links; _
digital signal pressing means for deriving ringing control
signals; |
a source of ringing signals including a plurality of different
frequency generators, selected in accordance with said
ringing control signals for application to one or more of
said plurality of subscriber lines to provide multifrequency
ringing, said ringing signals having an active and a silent
period during each ringing cycle;
434
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
shared ring-trip circuit means coupled to said line termina-
tion means for sensing an OFF-HOOK condition during
the active period of the ringing interval pro>Mding shared
ringing for a plurality of said lines or trunks and that plural
lines or trunks can be rung simultaneously during the
active period of a ringing cycle by coupling said selected
Uwrmtt
" f.
r f.
aim
St
titr
P]
-=^
rntin
ie*
9mi -|
Dims
emeuir -/
:i
ro SO
iMft
U^
mi/a
cmcuir- i
♦1
4,435,805
TESTING OF LOGIC ARRAYS
John C. Hsieh, and Wei-Wha Wu, both of Poughkeepsie, N.Y.,
assignors to Interaational Business Machines Corporation,
Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,435
Int. a.3 G06F 11/00
U.^. a. 371—25 8 Claims
oiuia will lid a y
V
rMI LIIMS ;
-r:"^.
NiTiTn MQiit/gKan •
Lli_
<is' II* n
j^'^4m — m^..^^,
ringing signals to said analog lines or trunks in response to
said ringing control signals; and
logic means responsive to said control signals for enabling
said ringing signals to be coupled from said source of
ringing signals to selected ones of said plurality of sub-
scriber lines or trunks to provide immediate ringing to said
selected lines or trunks.
4,435,804
SUB-SIGNAL TRANSMITTING SYSTEM
Yoichi Tan, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Fii^i Xerox Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 357,449
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 13, 1981, 56-35243
Int. a.3 H04J 1/14
U.S. a. 370—69.1 7 Claims
zSSSS^
1. A data transmission system wherein data is transmitted in
packet form between multiple stations, comprising:
main signal transmitting means for a main signal to be trans-
mitted in the form of a packet, said main signal being
directed along a transmission path including an encoder,
said encoder converting said main signal into a transmis-
sion waveform having a power spectrum with signifi-
cantly attenuated low frequency components;
sub-signal transmitting means for a sub-signal to be transmit-
ted, said sub-signal being independent of said main signal
and being in the low frequency region of said encoder;
means for superimposing said main signal and sub-signal and
transmitting the combined signals.
1. A programmable logic array comprising:
a plurality of input columns for accepting digital input sig-
nals;
a plurality of output columns for providing digital output
signals which are a predetermined logical function of said
input signals;
a plurality of rows intersecting said input columns and said
output columns;
a matrix of logic performing elements located at the intersec-
tion of at least some of said input and output columns and
said rows for generating said predetermined logical func-
tion;
a deletion control line intersecting said rows;
means for connecting said deletion control line to selected
rows to thereby prevent the logic performing elements
connected to said selected rows from contributing to said
predetermined logical function upon activation of the
logic performing elements connected to said selected rows
by an appropriate digital input signal at said input col-
umns, and thereby permit testing of a row which is not
connected to said deletion control line without interfer-
ence from said selected rows; and
means for disabling said deletion control line to thereby
permit the logic performing elements connected to said
selected rows to contribute to said predetermined logical
function, notwithstanding the connection of said selected
rows to said deletion control line;
whereby the proper operation of the logic performing ele-
ments in a row which is not connected to said deletion
control line may be verified without interference from the
logic performing elements connected to said selected
rows.
4,435,806
DEVICE FOR TESTING A ORCUIT COMPRISING
SEQUENTIAL AND COMBINATORIAL LOGIC
ELEMENTS
Marinus T. M. Segers; Cornells Niessen, and Krijn Kuiper, all of
Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,625
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jul. 21, 1980,
8004176
Int. a.3 GOIR 31/28
VJS. a. 371—25 4 Claims
1. A digital signal processing device comprising a plurality
of binary storage elements provided with control means to
constitute a first shift register; said shift register having a first
series input for receiving a test pattern, a first parallel output
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
435
connected to signal processing elements in the device for
presenting thereto said test pattern, a first parallel input con-
nected to said signal processing elements for receiving there-
from a result pattern, and a first series output for outputting
said result pattern; said digital signal processing device com-
prising a second shift register, said second shift register having
a second serial output feeding said first serial input and feed-
SHIFT
riEGISTER
VERIFICATION PITTERN
SCNe»l«TOB
I ^'
COMMRISOM ' ' I
BilSTER — w~.,. .,1,1 11 ., ~
back means; said feedback means comprising a retrocoupled
connection for effecting an EXCLUSIVE-Or-function with at
least one stage input of said second shift register; said second
shift register having a verification output for feeding a verifica-
tion means; and wherein said first and second shift registers
have initializing means for receiving an initial signal pattern
before the start of a test.
4435 807
ORCHARD ERRORXORRECriON SYSTEM
Edward W. Scott, 1843 Lake St., Glendale, Calif. 91201, and
Daniel B. Goetschel, 2106 Massachusetts Ave., #3C, Troy.
N.Y. 12180
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 163,322, Jun. 26, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,109
Int. a.3 G06F 11/10
U.S. a. 371-50 ,4 a„„.
-rL^^i
TIUIlSWSS'tM
1. A system for the transmission or processing of digital
information with the correction of errors comprising:
a source of digital information;
a digital data handling system subject to the introduction of
errors into the transmitted data;
means for arranging the information from said source of
digital information in a series of parallel words;
means for forming one or more parity correction bits, associ-
ated with each word, with each correction bit being
chosen to make the entire sum of the bits along at least two
different vectors through the digital information, either
odd or even, with every data bit being included in at least
two such vectors;
means for transmitting the digital information including the
correction bits over the data handling system, wherein
occasional bits are reversed, thereby introducing errors
into the digital information;
means for subsequently forming the sum along said vectors
through the information and said parity correction bits
and fo^- forming an error flag bit pattern identifying vector
Slims including parity correction bits which do not con-
form to the established parity;
first error correction circuit meaps for correcting single
errors within the digital information and correction bit
pattern covered by said vectors, in accordance with said
error fiag bit pattern;
second error correction circuit means for correcting multi-
ple errors within the digital information and correction bit
pattern covered by said vectors in accordance with error
Hag bit patterns representing such multiple errors; and
a data utilization circuit connected to receive and utilize the
corrected digital information.
4 435 808
PRpDUCnON OF RADIATION AT FREQUENCTES OF
PRESELECTED ABSORBING RESONANCES AND
METHODS USING SAME
All Javan, 12 Hawthorn St., Cambridge, Mass. 02139 '
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,156
Int. a.3 HOIS 3/113
U.S. a. 372-11 ,4ci„„,
1. An apparatus for producing radiation at a narrow fre-
quency corresponding to a prescribed absorbing resonance,
comprising,
a laser including a resonator cavity, an active laser medium
within said cavity, laser pumping means and means to
extract energy from said cavity,
an optical assembly having interfering optical paths, said
assembly including beam splitting and recombining means
for splitting a beam and for subsequently recombining the
split beam thereby to provide transmitted and reflected
rays, and
an absorption medium located in one of said interfering
optical paths,
molecules of said absorption medium having at least one
absorption resonance with a characteristically narrow
absorption profile in a region of desired laser oscillation,
said optical paths being of substantially equal length
whereby near white light interference occurs except for
radiation in another of said optical paths lying at frequen-
cies within said narrow profile of said absorption reso-
nance because of the presence of said absorption medium,
said laser together with said optical assembly being arranged
to introduce said radiation within said narrow profil"; into
said resonator cavity of said laser during initial oscillation
build up time and to cause laser oscillation to occur in a
mode lying within said narrow profile while modes lying
outside of said profile are inhibited.
4435 809
PASSIVELY MODE LOCKED LASER HAVING A
SATURABLE ABSORBER
Won-Tien Tsang, New Providence, and Jan P. van der Ziel,
Short Hills, both of N J., assignors to Bell Telephone Labora-
tories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, NJ.
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,028
Int. a.} HOIS 3/19
U.S. a. 372-49 9 claims
1. A semiconductor laser having an active layer, first and
436
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
second cladding layers on opposed surfaces of said active
layer,
characterized in that
^-
100
said active layer further comprises a saturable absorption
region, said saturable absorber region being a proton
bombarded region.
4,435,810
SELF-SUPPORTING LASER DIFFXJSER FLOW
ENERGIZER
Siegfried H. Hasinger, Dayton, Ohio; James M. Howard, Wales,
Wis., and David K. Miller, Camp Springs, Md., assignors to
The United States of America as represented by the Secretary
of the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,763
Int. a.^ HOIS 3/22
U.S. a. 372—58 4 Claims
1. In a radial flow g^ laser having means defining a laser
cavity and means adjacent said cavity for supplying gaseous
laser medium to said cavity at supersonic velocity directed
radially outward and transverse of said cavity and means defm-
ing a diffuser chamber adjacent said laser cavity for diffusing
said supersonic flow to an exhaust, said chamber defming
means including a pair of spaced end walls defming a space
therebetween for conflning said radially outward flow therebe-
tween, an improvement, comprising, means, adjacent each said
end wall, defming a plurality of radially outwardly directed
channels through which said cavity communicates directly
with said exhaust.
to flow between said arrays of electrodes through said
glass to cause heating thereof;
(e) means for causing the flow of a substantially equal
amount of current within each of said n electrodes within
each array, said means comprising a first array of n — 1
center tapped magnetic inductors, wherein n is an integer
greater than two, each having two ends, the ends of each
of the inductors within the first array being coupled to a
different one of said n electrodes directly or indirectly
through cascaded inductors within said first array of
electrodes and the center tap of each inductor within the
first array of inductors being coupled to a first output of
said means for supplying electrical current and a second
array of n— 1 center tapped magnetic inductors, each
having two ends, the ends of each of the inductors within
the second array being coupled to a different one of said n
electrodes directly or indirectly through cascaded induc-
tors within the second array of inductors and the center
tap of each inductor within the second array of inductors
being coupled to a second output of said means for apply-
ing electrical current;
(0 a current splitting inductor having a center tap and two
ends, the ends of the current splitting inductor being
respectively coupled to the first and second arrays ofji— 1
center tapped inductors; A
(g) an arc electrode disposed above said glass for the puilpose
of causing electrical current to flow through the batch for
melting the batch and heating the glass;
(h) second means for supplying electrical current to cause
current to flow between said arc electrode and said arrays
of electrodes through said glass, the center tap of said
current splitting inductor being coupled to said second
means for supplying electrical current; and
i means disposed in the bottom of said chamber for forming
fibers from said molten glass.
4,435,811
CURRENT DISTRIBUTION FOR GLASS-MELTING
FURNACES
Eugene C. Varrasso, Heath, Ohio, assignor to Owens-Corning
Fiberglas Corporation, Toledo, Ohio
Filed Jan. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 342,869
Int. a.J C03B 5/027
U.S. a. 373—39 17 Claims
1. An electrical furnace comprising:
(a) a chamber adapted for holding a body of molten glass,
said chamber having a bottom and a plurality of sides
which contain said molten glass, and an opening in the top
for supplying batch thereto to be melted into said glass;
(b) a first array of n spaced apart electrodes, wherein n is an
integer greater than two, disposed within said chamber in
electrical contact with said glass;
(c) a second array of n spaced apart electrodes disposed
within said chamber in electrical contact with said glass,
said second array being opposed to said first array,
(d) first means for supplying electrical current to said first
and second arrays of electrodes to cause electrical current
4,435,812
ELECTRIC FURNACE CONSTRUCTION
Heinz Guido, Duisburg, and Hubert Wolfgarten, Oberhausen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to M.A.N. Mas-
chinenfabrik Augsburg-Niimberg Aktiengesellschaft, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 347,329
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 24,
1981, 3106741
Int. a.3 F27D 1/00
U.S. a. 373—72 7 Qaims
1. An electric arc furnace comprising a housing, refractory
within said housing defining a furnace hearth in said housing,
a plurality of electrodes extending through said refractory into
said hearth and having ends extending out of said housing,
plate means including a plate spaced away from said housing
and connected to the ends of said electrodes and defining a
cooling space outside of said housing surrounding said elec-
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
437
trodes, means for circulating a cooling fluid into said space to
cool the electrodes, and a plurality of air baffles disposed in
said cooling space for the directing air in a plurality of paths
over said electrodes.
^' 11 11 11 11
1. A DC arc furnace hearth at least partly comprising a
brickwork formed by partially metal-cased bricks each having
a metal casing covering only a part of the brick's surface, the
surface having a recess formed in it and in which the casing is
positioned flush with the surface so as to leave the balance of
the brick's surface uncased, the bricks being laid so that
throughout the brickwork the metal casings intercontact so as
to cause the brickwork to be electrically conductive from its
top to its bottom, and so that the bricks' uncased surfaces also
intercontact so as to support the bricks in their layed positions
in the event the metal casings become molten.
4,435,814
ELECTRIC FURNACE HAVING LIQUID COOLED
VESSEL WALLS
Karl Biihler, Nussbaumen, Switzerland, assignor to BBC Brown,
Boveri A Company, Limited, Baden, Switzerland
Filed Jan. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 460,302
Oalms priority, application Switzerland, Jan.
552/82
Int. a.3 F27D 1/12
U.S. a. 373—76
1. An electric furnace comprising:
a furnace vessel having wall parts;
liquid cooling means for cooling said wall parts, comprising,
cooling conduits extending substantially vertically in said
wall parts, said cooling conduits connected in series in
groups and having a cooling liquid flowing therein,
said cooling conduits arranged in two layers including an
29, 1982,
9 Oalms
inner layer facing said furnace vessel and an outer layer
disposed behind said inner layer relative to said vessel,
said conduits of said inner layer having U-shaped upper and
lower ends to which the conduits of the outer layer are
connected.
!• 25 n II n?ji3X2s;i
4,435,813
DC ARC FURNACE COMPONENT
Sven-Einar Stenkvist, Visterks, Sweden, assignor to ASEA
Aktiebolag, Vaster&s, Sweden
Filed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,442
Claims priority, application Sweden, May 25, 1981, 8103268
Int. CV F27D 1/08
U.S. a. 373-72 4 cj^.
a distributing chamber communicating with the conduits of
said outer layer and including at least one bypass opening
for at least partially bypassing cooling fluid from at least
one outer layer conduit to another outer layer conduit-
and
said conduits of said inner layer emj^dded in and supported
by a fireproof construction matenaT^
4,435,815
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHARGING A
FURNACE
Knut Evensen, Oslo, Norway, assignor to Elkem a/s, Oslo,
Norway
Filed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,396
Qaims priority, application Norway, Apr. 27, 1981, 811425
Int. CV F27D 3/10
U.S. Q. 373-81 ,3 cuims
11. A method for batchwise charging a furnace pot through
a cover comprising the steps of:
(a) accumulating charge material in a charging tube having*^
an opening therein, said charging tube being withdrawn
from said furnace pot for receiving said charge material,
said opening being sealed when said charge tube is in said
withdrawn position;
(b) lowering at least a lower section of the charging tube
through the cover and into the furnace pot, said opening
being unsealed by the lowering of said tube thereby allow-
438
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
ing the accumulated material to flow into the furnace pot
through said opening; and
(c) drawing said charge tube upwardly to its withdrawn
position for receiving a subsequent batch of charge mate-
rial.
A
1. A method for joining two electrode sections to form or
extend a carbon or graphite electrode column wherein each of
said electrode sections is provided with a mating male nipple at
one end and a female recess at the end opposite said nipple,
which method comprises providing one of said electrode sec-
tions with a consumable centering pin axially disposed along
the center line of said electrode section and providing the
second electrode section which is to be joined to the first
electrode section in a male to female engagement with a hole
axially disposed along the center line of said second electrode
section with the overall length of the centering pin being equal
to or less than the depth of the hole and which hole is adapted
to engage said centering pin when said electrode sections
which are to be threaded together are brought together but
prior to actual engagement of said threaded portions of said
electrode sections.
tive material, said sleeve being adapted for receiving at each
end thereof end portions of pipes to be joined; a hydraulically
C^^^f^ '*
: Jin
4,435,816
METHOD AND ARTICLE FOR PROTECTING TAPERED
THREADED ELECTRODE JOINTS BY USE OF AN
ALIGNMENT MECHANISM
Herman M. Belz, and Harry C. Stieber, both of Berea, Ohio,
assignors to Union Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Jun. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,989
Int. a.3 HOSE 7/]4
VJS. a. 373—91 13 Oaims
activated cylindrical hose surrounding said sleeve; and an
external casing disposed around said cylindrical hose.
4,435,818
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONITORING THE
MELTING PROCESS IN VACUUM ARC FURNACES
Otto Stenzel, Grundau, and Pierre Flecker, Alzenau, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Leybold-Heraeus GmbH,
Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 381,983
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 26,
1981, 3120856
Int. a.5 H05B 7/144
U.S. a. 373—104 10 Claims
r-f-
9
4,435,817
CONTACT ASSEMBLY
Harald Krogsnid, Gjettum, Norway, assignor to Elkem a/s,
Oslo, Norway
y FUed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,689
Claims priority, application Norway, Jul. 25, 1980, 802266
Int. a.3 H05B 7/1 J
U.S. a. 373—103 8 Claims
1. In combination with an electrode holder assembly in
which contact clamps are suspended by electrically-conduct-
ing pipes which are also adapted for transport of fluid there-
through; connection means for joining corresponding ends of
said electrically-conducting pijses for continuity of electrical
current conduction and fluid transport therethrough, said
connection means comprising a sleeve of electrically-conduc-
/4. In a vacuum arc furnace having a vacuum housing, a
crucible and an electrode in the vacuum housing, and means
producing at least one arc between the electrode and a melt of
the electrode material in the crucible for melting the electrode
into melt, apparatus for monitoring radiation from the arc for
melting the electrode to prevent breaking the crucible with the
arc if it flashes over from the melt to the crucible, comprising:
analyzing means detecting at least one line in the spectrum of
the radiation from the arc which is characteristic of the
material of the crucible and not the melt for indicating
vaporization of the crucible from the arc flashing over to
the crucible; and
means responsive to the indicated vaporization of the cruci-
ble for quenching the arc to the crucible.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
439
4 435 819
ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE FURNACES
Alan W. Plume, Weybridge, England, assignor to A. W. Plume
Limited, England
Filed Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,580
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 18, 1981,
Int. a.J H05B 3/06
U.S. a. 373-119 3 ciiums
1. An electrical resistance furnace comprising:
(a) an outer casing having four removable corner covers,
(b) corner fire-brick supports located in the casing adjacent
its corners and having support apertures,
(c) a plurality of electrical resistance heating elements, each
comprising a conductor wound upon a ceramic tube and
having plates welded to both ends of the conductor,
(d) the heating elements extending horizontally between
adjacent corner supports with the ends of the lubes sup-
ported in said support apertures in the corner supports and
the plates located outside the corner supports,
(e) electrical connections between the plates,
(0 a crucible surrounded on all four sides by the heating
elements,
(g) heat insulation located between the outer casing and the
heating elements so as to surround the heating elements,
(h) said heat insulation having removable corner portions,
and
(i) the arrangement being such that by removal of the appro-
priate comer covers of the casing and the corner portions
of the insulation access may be gained from the exterior of
C the furnace to the said electrical connections and to both
ends of any element to permit removal of the element.
4,435,820
CHANNEL INDUCTION FURNACES
Christopher J. Edgerley, Northwich, England, auignor to The
Electricity Council, London, England
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,408
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 24, 1980.
8030813
Int. a.J H05B 5/02
UA a 373-161 16 Claims
•-*t.:
molten metal with a channel forming a loop extending down-
wardly from the bath, a ferromagnetic core forming a closed
magnetic circuit linked with the channel and an alternating-
current energized coil on the core, wherein the channel is
shaped so as to extend in an arcuate path around the coil and
core at least in the region below the plane of the axis of the
core, the channel having a radial width, measured outwardly
from the axis of the core, which is several times the penetration
depth in the molten metal for a current of the energizing fre-
quency and wherein the width of the channel measured paral-
lel to the axis of the core is tapered in the region where the
channel is below the plane of the axis of the core, the tapering
bemg such that the channel is wider near the core and nar-
rower away from the core.
4,435,821
RECEIVER IN A FREQUENCY HOPPING
COMMUNICATION^YSTEM
Satoaki Ito, and Hiroshi Harada, both of Tokyo, Japan, auign-
ors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,536
Qalms priority, application Japan, Mar. 24, 1981, 56^2952;
Mar. 24, 1981, 56^2953; Dec. 15, 1981, 56-202160; Dec. 15.
1981, 56-202161
Int. CI.3 H04K 1/Oa- H04L 9/00
U.S. a. 375-1 ,3 c,^„.
'o«_^iJ^ III*
1. A channel induction furnace having a bath for containing
1. A receiver in a frequency hopping communication system
comprising:
filter means having a broad band-pass filter with a band
characteristic including a spread spectrum bandwidth, a
narrow band-pass filter having selecuble band character-
istics including bandwidths into which said spread spec-
trum bandwidth is divided, a band characteristic of said
narrow band-pass filter being selected in response to a
selection signal applied thereto, and means for making
switch-over from said broad band-pass filter to said nar-
row band-pass filter in response to a synchronization
detected signal applied thereto;
a code generator for generating code patterns to determine a
time-sequential pattern of predetermined hopping fre-
quencies;
a clock source for generating clock pulses for driving said
code generator;
a frequency synthesizer for producing a signal of a fre-
quency determined by an output signal from said code
generator;
synchronization acquisition means for synchronizing the
output signal from said frequency synthesizer and the
output signal from said filter means to produce said syn-
chronization detected signal when synchronization is set
up;
selection signal generating means for generating said selec-
tion signal in response to the output signal from said code
generator;
correlating means for correlating the output signals from
s
440
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
said filter means and said frequency synthesizer to remove
the modulation of said frequency hopping; and
demodulating means for extracting an information signal
from the output of said correlating means.
4,435,823
ADAPTIVE EQUALIZER CAPABLE OF LINEAR AND
NONLINEAR WEIGHTING
Robert C. Davis, Indialantic, and Gautam H. Thaker, MeN
bourae, both of Fla., assignors to Harris Corporation, Mel-
bourne, Fla.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 221,020
Int. O.^ H04B 3/J8
U.S. a. 375—14 23 Claims
N- STAGE SHIFT HEOISTER IS
4,435,822
COHERENT SPREAD SPECTRUM RECEIVING
APPARATUS
Billie M. Spencer; William S. Cady, both of Bountiful, and John
W. Zscheile, Jr., Farmington, all of Utah, assignors to Sperry
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 19, 1982, Ser. No. 379,595
Int. a.3 H04B 12/00
U.S. a. 375—1 9 Qaims
1. A coherent direct sequence spread spectrum receiver of
the type adapted to receive a carrier signal that has been modu-
lated by data and a pseudonoise code, comprising:
signal receiving means
carrier tracking loop means connected to said receiver
means for coherently tracking the carrier signal,
said carrier tracking loop means comprising a pseudonoise
demodulator at the input and a coherent detector at the
output,
said pseudonoise demodulator having an input connected to
said signal receiving means and having an output coupled
to said coherent detector of said carrier tracking loop,
an output line coupled to said coherent detector for provid-
ing thereon detected pseudonoise code signals and data
signals,
a code tracking branch coupled to said output line for coher-
ently tracking the received pseudonoise code and for
generating a clock signal and a replica signal of said re-
ceived pseudonoise code,
a continuous running pseudonoise generator in said code
tracking branch for generating said replica signals coupled
to said pseudonoise demodulator,
first gating means in said carrier tracking loop means,
second gating means in said code tracking branch, and
gate control means coupled to said code tracking branch for
enabling said first gating means when said carrier tracking
loop is tracking said carrier signal and for enabling said
second gating means when said pseudonoise generator is
tracking said received pseudonoiswe generated code on said
output line.
1. An equalizer for reducing intersymbol interference in a
signal received over a transmission channel comprising:
delay means for receiving said transmission channel signal
and providing sequential Q-bit samples of said received
transmission channel signal;
weighting means comprising a memory coupled to receive
. the Q-bit samples from said delay means, said memory
having stored therein adaptive equalizing weighting val-
ues which are accessed in accordance with the. Q-bit
samples to provide weighted memory output words in
response to the received Q-bit sample; and
combining means for combining said weighted memory
output words accessed from said memory, so as to equal-
ize the received transmission channel signal.
4435 824
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING IMPROVED
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE SHIFT KEYING MODULATION
Brian W. Dellande, Austin, and Henry Wurzburg, Round Rock,
both of Tex., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg, 111.
Filed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,322
Int. a.3 H04L 27/10. 27/18
U.S. a. 375—46 9 Qaims
10-
DATA
IN
-12
CONTROLLER
FIRST
CONTROL
SIGNAL
SECOND
CONTROL
SIGNAL
1 SECONDARY i
I FREQUENCY •■-
-H GENERATOR \
16
y
PRIMARY
FREQUENCY
GENERATOR
OUTPUT
14
\
1. A communication system for generating an output signal
of a selected primary frequency and having a plurality of bursts
of digital data bits serially modulated thereon at said primary
frequency during respective predetermined bit periods in order
to provide differential phase encoding of an input signal while
frequency modulating the output signal, comprising:
first control means for receiving the serial digital data bits
and providing a start control signal and for providing a
stop control sjgnal in resp>onse to the failure to receive a
digital data bit within the first half of any of the bit peri-
ods;
second control means for providing, during a control period
corresponding to a respective one of said bit periods but
preceding said one bit period by at least one-half said one
bit period, a data control signal for each control period in
resp>onse to each received digital datum having a first
predetermined value or no data control signal in response
to each received digital datum having a second predeter-
mined value; and
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
441
frequency generator means coupled to the control means,
for generating a half cycle of the output signal having the
same frequency as a last half bit of an immediately preced-
ing burst of data bits in response to the sUrt control signal,
for generating a full cycle of said output signal at said
primary frequency and in phase with the preceding half
cycle of said output signal in response to the presence of
each of said data control signals, for generating a half
cycle of said output signal at a secondary frequency one-
half said primary frequency and in phase with the preced-
ing half cycle of said output signal in response to the
absence of a data control signal during a control period,
and for generating a stop control signal in response to the
failure to receive a digital datum within a first half of any
of the bit periods, wherein the output signal has a zero
direct current component bit by bit.
4,435,825
CLOCK SIGNAL EXTRACHNG CTRCUIT
Keiji Tomooka, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,379
Qaims priority, application Japan. Feb. 27, 1981, 56-26956
Int. a.3 H04L 7/04
U.S. a. 375-113 6 Qaims
PCM
HIGNW4Y
,6o
|MU.TH£)gBt<
^^V^K^^
7b
eouAuSf
EOUftUZCT M •»»' CABLE t^MmjnfXwF
1. A clock signal extracting cirflyit comprising:
means for sampling and holding an input data signal in ac-
cordance with a predetermined sampling frequency to
produce a train of sampled values;
means for supplying a signal at said sampling frequency to
said sampling and holding means to control the timing of
said sampling and holding operation;
means for subjecting the train of sampled values from said
sampling and holding means to equalization and amplifica-
tion;
means connected to receive the equalized and amplified train
of sampled values from said equalization and amplification
means for extracting and reproducing a clock signal there-
from;
means connected between said equalization and amplifica-
tion means and said extracting and reproducing means for
detecting a difference in voltage amplitude between a pair
of those values of the equalized and amplified train of
sampled values which appear immediately before and
after the time when the sampled-value train has a peak
value;
means for controlling said sampling frequency supplied from
said sampling frequency supplying means to said sampling
and holding means in accordance with the output of said
difference voltage detecting means so that said difference
voltage is made zero, thereby providing a clock signal
frequency-synchronized with said input data signal as said
clock signal from said extracting and reproducing means;
and
means connected to receive an output of said sampling fre-
quency supplying means varying in accordance with the
output of said difference voltoge detecting means for
determining the phase of said input data signal at which a
peak of said input data signal is to appear, said phase
determining means including means for applying informa-
tion of the phase of said peak to said extracting and repro-
ducing means so that said clock signal from said extracting
and reproducing means is produced as a signal phase-syn-
chronized with the peak of said input dau signal.
4,435,826
FRAME SYNCHRONIZER
Yasuo Matoui, Yokosuka, Japan, asdgnor to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,509
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 5, 1980, 55-122257
Int. a.3 H04L 7/08
U.S. Q. 375-115 6 Qaims
(o«rA>>
WuT"
— SiTTOT
<PN COOe QEJCRATOR)
-ICLOOC IWnjT
|E0R-B
—C^DeCOOtOOATA
1. A frame synchronizer comprising:
a PN code generator having a feedback path for ci^ulating
the output of the generator therethrough to thereby gen-
erate a PN code cyclically in response to a data input to
the frame synchronizer, said data input containing a PN
code, said feedback path including switch means for en-
abling said PN code generator to alternately receive said
data input and the output of said PN code generator;
a comparator for comparing said daU input and said cycli-
cally generated PN code from said PN code generator and
generating an equal signal when the PN code in said dau
input is identical with said cyclically generated PN code;
a counter responsive to the output of said comparator for
determining whether the time of continuation of said
equal signal is as long as a predetermined time period and
for generating a control signal when said equal signal is
determined to continue for said predetermined time per-
iod, said switch means being responsive to said control
signal from said counter for enabling said PN code genera-
tor to receive the output thereof for said cyclic generation
of the PN code by said PN code generator; and
a coincidence circuit for comparing said data input and the
output of said PN code generator and for producing a
decoded data when said data input and the output of said
PN code generator are coincident with each other.
4,435,827
READ CLOCK PULSE CONTROLLER
Yoshikazu Kuze, 31-3, Higashimagome 1-chome, Ohta-ku, To-
kyo, Japan (143)
PCT No. PCT/JP79/00277, § 371 Date Jun. 26, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 26, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01339, PCT Pub.
Date May 14, 1981
PCT Filed Oct. 30, 1979, Ser. No. 279,979
Int. a.3 H03K 21/30
U.S. Q. 377-44 2 Qaims
1. A read clock pulse controller for a read only sequence
controller for a read-only memory comprising: a read clock
pulse generating circuit (30); a select switch (6) for selecting
the frequency of the read clock pulse; a presettoble counter (33,
34) for counting the read clock pulse; a preset code switch (4,
5) for selecting the number of the read clock pulses counted by
said presettable counter; a binary counter (29) connected to the
output of said presettable counter; said presettable counter
increments said binary counter by one whenever the presetted
number of read clock pulses have been counted and the output
of said binary counter is connected to the address lines of said
read-only memory; a start switch (7) to initiate counting by
applying a signal to a gate circuit (2^; said gate circuit generat-
ing a signal to reset said binary counter to the zero state, to
1040 O.G.— 15
442
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
reset said clock pulse generating circuit to the zero state, and to
preset the value in said presettable counter; a circuit means
connected to an outer abnormality detecting circuit for gener-
ITi^
^1-
l^^mW'
ating a signal for inhibiting the counting operation of said
presettable counter when an abnormality is detected by said
outer abnormality detecting circuit.
4,435329
APPARATUS FOR RADIOGRAPHIC EXAMINATION OF
PIPE WELDS
Dan R. SUer, Clioton, and Harold D. Trimble, Riverdale, both of
Utah, assignors to Johnson Senrice Company, Milwaukee,
Wis.
Continuation of Ser. No. 265,419, May 19, 1981, abandoned.
This appUcation May 12, 1983, Ser. No. 492,692
Int a.3 B62B 13/16; COIN 23/02
VJS. a. 378—60 5 Claims
•r^'
4,435,828
FLUORESCENCE LASER EXAFS
Harold M. Epstein; Robert E. Schwerzel, both of Columbus, and
Paul G. Andnis, Powell, all of Ohio, assignors to Battelle
Development Corporation, Columbus, Ohio
Filed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,256
Int. a.J GOIN 23/22
U.S. a. 378—49 28 Qaims
SAMPLE AND
UOHT EMITTING QIIIO
lAUII
mOTOONAPHIC
FIIM
/
1. Apparatus for obtaining EXAFS data of a material, com-
pHsing:
means for directing radiant energy f^om a laser onto a target
in such manner as to produce X-rays at said target of a
selected spectrum and intensity suitable for obtaining a
fluorescence EXAFS spectrum of a material;
means for directing said X-rays from the target onto spec-
tral-dispersive means so located as to direct spectrally-
resolved X-rays therefrom onto a sample of material;
means for absorbing fluorescence X-rays emitted from said
sample of material and for emitting light that is resolved
spatially so as to correspond to the wavelength of the
spectrally-resolved X-rays striking said sample and whose
intensity at any point along the spatial light distribution
corresponds to the intensity of said fluorescence X-rays
produced by a particular wavelength of said incoming
X-rays;
means for directing said emitted light onto recording means
so as to obtain a spectrum of the emitted light; and
means for obtaining a reference spectrum of said spectrally-
resolved X-rays.
1. An apparatus for transporting and locating a probe for
examination of a circumferential weld joining two sections of
cylindrical pipe comprising:
a. a carriage for supporting the examination probe;
b. a pair of ball transfers attached to the underside and adja-
cent each lateral edge of the carriage, with the line deflned
by each pair of ball transfers lying parallel to the pipe
centerline, to support the carriage for longitudinal move-
ment along the bottom inside surface of a pipe section;
c. a probe flxture centrally mounted on the carriage and
having a probe holder adjustably attached thereto; and,
d. probe height adjustment means attached to and extending
downwardly from the probe holder into the probe flxture,
the height adjustment means being manually operable for
vertical movement with respect to the probe flxture for
selective positioning in a plane through the pipe centerline
equidistant from the ball transfers.
4,435,830
X-RAY APPARATUS
Hirotsugu Sttzuld, Ootawara; Sigeru Urata, and Kanichi Okabe,
both of Nasu, all of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushikl Kaifha, Japan
FUed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,499
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 21, 1980, 55-164325
Int. a.3 A61B 6/02
U.S. a. 378—197 15 Claims
' < < ' '\' '1" ' 1'
^'^"'"^'''^'"''^'y^^;^;^'''^^^
«t^fe^
1. An X-ray apparatus, comprising:
an X-ray source;
an X-ray imaging device in confronting relation to said
X-ray source;
a flrst longitudinally movable support, said X-ray source
being coupled with and supported by said flrst support;
a second longitudinally movable support, said X-ray imaging
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
443
device being coupled with and supported by said second
support;
a flrst movable base on which said flrst support is mounted;
a second movable base independent of said flrst movable
base on which said second support is mounted, each of
said flrst and second movable bases having a mounting
base for mounting each of said flrst and second supports,
a plurality of wheels and a guide for moving said mount-
ing base by said wheels; and
a connector releasably interconnecting said supports at a
predetermined distance apart for allowing said supports to
be operated in unison when interconnected.
4,435,831
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TIME DOMAIN
COMPRESSION AND SYNTHESIS OF UNVOICED
AUDIBLE SIGNALS
Forrest S. Mozer, 38 Somerset PL, Berkeley, Calif. 94707
FUed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,310
Int. a.3 GIOL 7/00
U.S. a. 381-30 12 Claims
on the basis of the linear predictive coeflicients to synthe-
size and provide speech in accordance with the speech
parameters delivered from speech parameter providing
means;
(c) interpolating means provided between said speech recon-
struction means and said speech parameter providing
means, for interpolating the linear predictive coefficients
inputted at given intervals, at a time interval of at least 10
ms or less and for supplying the interpolated linear predic-
tive coefficients to said speech reconstruction means; and
(d) timing control means for producing a synthesizing timing
signal responsive to a signal for setting a speech reproduc-
tion speed and supplying the synthesizing timing signal to
said speech parameter providing means and said interpo-
lating means for changing the time interval of interpola-
tion of the interpolating means;
whereby the speech outputting time is stretchable and com-
pressible without changing the pitch information pro-
vided by said speech parameter providing means while
ensuring reconstruction of a smooth speech.*^
4
, ^
4«
\n
«•
HCMOttV
Of Vice
mtTEinicixATc
MWCESSOIl
L,
OtOlTiL TO
ANALOG
CMvr*TEII
co«tT«h.
CiWuiTay
— 1 — '
iTA»T COMHMOf
1
--M
HH'
1. A method for synthesizing a unit o9 time domain infor-
mation signal substantially lacking periodic characteristics and
having a power spectrum substantially invariant over the dura-
tion of said unit, said method comprising the steps of:
storing in memory means a representative small segment of
said information signal unit; and
repetitively reproducing at least a portion of said segment a
sufficient number of times to reconstruct said information
signal unit from said small segment, said reproducing step
commencing and terminating with diflierent points in said
segment at each repetition thereby to provide a unit sub-
stantially free of noticeable periodicity.
4 435 832
SPEECH SYNTHESIZER HAVING SPEECH TIME
STRETCH AND COMPRESSION FUNCTIONS
Akihiro Asada; Kazuhiro Umemura; Tadashi Saito, and Tohru
Sampei, all of Yokohama, Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,222
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct. 1, 1979, 54-125416
Int. a.J GIOL 7/00
U.S. a. 381-34 14 Claims
4435 833
FADE CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR AUXILIARY
AMPLinER
Narendra C. Thakkar, Roselle, lU., assignor to International
Jensen Incorporated, SchiUer Park, lU.
Filed Jun. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 384,404
Int. a.3 H03G 3/02
U.S. a. 381—109 9 Claims
SPEECH
PMAMETER
MEtaORY
i^
- «BISTD»
'jINTERPOUrOR -
SYNTHESZIN6
OreiATON
SVNDCSIZING
TIMING
CONTIWL -12
ll,»Mll!J(ON . CQMRCSSK
CMTA
coMncssioN
COUNTER
-15
1. A speech synthesizer comprising:
(a) speech parameter providing means for providing n-linear
predictive coefficients sampled from segmental wave-
forms truncated from natural speech at a given time inter-
val, voice/unvoice judging information, pitch informa-
tion, and volume information;
(b) speech reconstruction means including a speech synthe-
sizing Alter whose coef^cienu change at given intervals
1. In a second reproduction system comprising a signal
source, a main amplifler coupled to the signal source, flrst and
second main speakers, an auxiliary amplifler, and an auxiliary
speaker coupled to and driven by the auxiliary amplifler, the
improvement comprising:
a fader control variable resistor having a flrst terminal cou-
, pled to the main amplifler, a second terminal coupled to
the first main speaker, and a third terminal coupled to the
second main speaker, said fader control variable resistor
comprising means for selectively varying the resistance
between the first and second terminals and between the
flrst and third terminals in order to control the power
distribution between the flrst and second main speakers;
a voluge divider coupled to the second terminal of the fader
control variable resistor, said voluge divider having an
intermediate node coupled to an input terminal of the
auxiliary amplifier such that power distribution to the
auxiliary speaker is proportional to power distribution to
the flrst main speaker.
444
44
r«
pr
CO
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4435 g34
METHOD AND MEANS FOR J>ETERMINING THE
STATE AND/OR GENUINENESS OF FLAT ARTICLES
canter Pauli, Eichenau; Giinter Kraiue, and Enrln Lob, both of
Munich, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, auignora to Gao Gesell-
achaft fUr Automation and Organisation mbH, Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser.No. 45,802, Jun. 5, 1979, abandoned. ThU
application Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,425
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 6.
1978, 2824849 " '
Int. aj G06K 9/00
U.S;a382-7 36aaims
scanned pickup region with positional information of the
whole region stored in advance of the scanning of the
object to determine which part of the whole region the
fOB««T OAT* /
stLtcToa '
ImemorvL — ,
'-sa
-^
-^
MOD -B AC
fPBMAT
ukii—
-A
COOO 00 U[
STATt
said pickup region lies in and to detect the position of the
object from positional relationship of said scanned pickup
region within the whole region.
\
i — ^
-A
1. Apparatus for determining the characteristics of a gener-
ally rectangular bank note or the like having a pair of end
edges and a pair of side edges, scanning means including a
plurality of sensor means, said scanning means being operable
for sensing the characteristics of a bank note at a plurality of
points within a segmentol surface area thereof arranged in
rows parallel to one of said pair of edges and columns parallel
to the other of said pair of edges, reference means for establish-
mg threshold signal levels corresponding to thresholds be-
tween acceptable and unacceptable characteristics at points
withm a certain segmental rectangular surface area of the bank
npte, comparison means for comparing signals produced by
said scanning means with signal levels established by said
reference means to generate an output signal when an unaccept-
able bank note is scanned, and means for controlling said refer-
ence means and said scanning means to select for scanning a
predetermined segmental area of the bank note.
4,435,835
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETECHNG THE
POSITION OF AN OBJECT
Hiroshi Sakow, and Seiji Kashioka, both of Hachiouji, Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,073
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 24, 1980, 55-36070
Int a.3 G06k 9/i2
U.S. a. 382—8 4 Q,!^
1. A position detecting method for detecting the position of
an object by scanning of the object with an image pickup
device comprising:
storing in advance of scanning of the object positional infor-
mation of at least one type of standard pattern which exists
in a whole region including all pickup regions scanned by
the image pickup device at respective supply deviations of
the object, said whole region being composed of a plural-
* ity of said pickup regions;
scanning a pickup region by the image pickup device at a
supply position of the object;
extracting positional infopiation of the at least one standard
pattern from the image obtained by the scanning of said
pickup region; and
comparing the positional information extracted from the
4435 836
TECHNIQUE FOR EXTTUCTING FEATURES FROM
IMAGES
Steven M. Rubin, Los Altos, Calif., assignor to Bell Telephone
Uboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
FUed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,791
Int. a.J G06K 9/12
U.S. a 382-27 ,5 claim.
(ini,tw»Bw^
1. A method of representing the features of a portion of a
picture by one or more strokes, said picture including a recti-
linear array of picture elements, each of said strokes including
a contiguous group of picture elements having similar attri-
butes, including the steps of:
(a) hypothesizing the existence of a stroke including a begin-
ning pel and at least one additional pel;
(b) simultaneously testing a group of at least two pels con-
tained in the hypothesized stroke defined in step (a) to
generate a success indication if all of the pels in said group
possess simUar attributes; and
(c) repeating step (a) for other hypothesized strokes.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
445,
4,435,837
PATTERN RECOGNITION AND ORIENTATION
SYSTEM
Frederick H. Abemathy, Aubumdale, Mass., assignor to Presi-
dent and Fellows of Harvard College, Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,878
Int. Q\? G06K 9/i2
U.S. a 382-41 4cui,„
selected planes of said object to be imaged in such a man-
ner that the ratio D/d is a constant, where D is the dis-
tance from said selected plane to the plane of said detec-
tor, and d is the distance from said selected plane to the
plane of said mask; and
means for decoding, using a fixed decoding process, each of
said selected planes of said object.
:^
M
-^
1. A method for recognizing a flat piece of cloth comprising
placing said piece on a viewing surface within a field of
interest having perpendicular coordinate axes,
generating image signals corresponding to the existence or
nonexistence of said piece in discrete areas of said field,
said discrete areas being arranged in rows and columns
along said axes,
processing said image signals to obtain observed moment
signals representative of the first (area) and the second
(sum of the products of inertia !«, I^^) moments of said
piece, -^
generating desired signals for the corresponding first and
second moments of a desired piece,
identifying said piece by comparing said observed moment
signals with said desired moment signals, and
generating a default signal when a difference between said
observed and desired signals exceeds a certain limit.
4,435,839
FOIL BEARING RUBBING SURFACE COATING
APPLICATION METHODS
Alston L. Gu, Huntington Beach, and Alexander Silver, Tar-
zana, both of Calif., assignors to The Garrett Corporation, bos
Angeles, Calif.
Filed Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 420,663
Int. a.' F16C 1/24. J3/00; B05D 3/02. 3/12
U.S. a. 384-103 29aaim«
4 435 838
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TOMOGRAPHICAL
IMAGING
Alexander R. Gourlay, Winchester, England, assignor to Inter-
national Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.V.
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,349
Claims priority, appUcation European Pat. Off., Mar. 30,
1981, 81301382.8
Int. a.3 GOIT 7/00, G03B 41/16
U.S. a. 382—68 10 Oaims
6. In an apparatus for tomographically imaging different
selected planes of a three-dimensional object by detecting
radiation from said object after the passage of the radiation
through a coded aperture mask, wherein an image of the radia-
tion of a selected plane sensed by a detector over a period of
time is stored, and the decoding of said selected plane is by a
correlation process appropriate to the size of the shadow of
said mask cast on said detector by points in said selected plane,
the improvement comprises:
means for adjusting the position of at least one of said object,
said mask, or said detector to select each of said different
1. A method of applying a dry lubricant coating to a rubbing
contact surface of a bearing, said method comprising the steps
of:
(a) providing a coating mixture comprising a dry lubricant
material and a liquid binder;
(b) applying a multiplicity of subcoats of said mixture to the
rubbing contact surface to form a multilayered lubricant
coating thereon;
(c) curing each successive subcoat at a first temperature to
individually solidify the subcoats;
(d) deroughening the surfaces of selected ones of the sub-
coats positioned at predetermined thickness intervals of
said multilayered coating; and
(e) curing the multilayered coating at a second temperature
substantially higher than said first temperature.
2. The method of claim 1 further comprising the step of (0
applying a dry lubricant material upon the surface of the cured
multilayered coating.
3. The method of claim 2 wherein said step (d) includes
deroughening the surface of the last-applied subcoat, and
wherein said step (0 is performed by burnishing a dry lubricant
powder into said last-applied subcoat prior to the deroughen-
ing of its surface.
4. The method of claim 1 wherein said step (a) is performed
by providing a coating mixture comprising graphite fluoride
(CFx) powder and polyimide varnish.
5. The method of claim 1 wherein said step (a) is performed
by providing a coating mixture comprising graphite fluoride
(CFx) powder, polyimide varnish, an N-methylpyrrolidone
and xylene thinning liquid, and a fluorocarbon solution wetting
agent.
444
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4,435,834
METHOD AND MEANS FOR DETERMINING THE
STATE AND/OR GENUINENESS OF FLAT ARTICLES
Giinter Pauli, Eichenau; Giinter Krause, and Erwin Lob, both of
Munich, all of Fed. Rep. of Gennany, assignors to Gao Gesell-
schaft fUr Automation and Organisation mbH, Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Gennany
Continuation of Ser. No. 45,802, Jun. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,425
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 6,
1978, 2824849
Int. a.3 G06K 9/00
U.S. a. 382—7 36 Claims
SELECTOB j
, ^ 1D£*L »o<m*i__^
-^
-^
-A
COOC 0« MI
ST»ri
IMiUlAIQa
-A
CBITtCAL VALUE
INi L
1. Apparatus for determining the characteristics of a gener-
ally rectangular bank note or the like having a pair of end
edges and a pair of side edges, scanning means including a
plurality of sensor means, said scanning means being operable
for sensing the characteristics of a bank note at a plurality of
points within a segmental surface area thereof arranged in
rows parallel to one of said pair of edges and columns parallel
to the other of said pair of edges, reference means for establish-
ing threshold signal levels corresponding to thresholds be-
tween acceptable and unacceptable characteristics at points
within a certain segmental rectangular surface area of the bank
note, comparison means for comparing signals produced by
said scanning means with signal levels established by said
reference means to generate an output signal when an unaccept-
able bank note is scanned, and means for controlling said refer-
ence means and said scanning means to select for scanning a
predetermined segmental area of the bank note.
4,435,835
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR DETECnNG THE
POSITION OF AN OBJECT
Hiroshi Sakow, and Seyi Kashioka, both of Hachiouji, Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,073
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 24, 1980, 55-36070
Int a.3 G06K 9/32
U.S. a. 382—8 4 Claims
1. A position detecting method for detecting the position of
an object by scanning of the object with an image pickup
device comprising:
storing in advance of scanning of the object positional infor-
mation of at least one type of standard pattern which exists
in a whole region including all pickup regions scanned by
the image pickup device at respective supply deviations of
the object, said whole region being composed of a plural-
ity of said pickup legions;
scanning a pickup region by the image pickup device at a
supply position of the object;
extracting positional information of the at least one standard
pattern from the image obtained by the scanning of said
pickup region; and
comparing the positional information extracted from the
scanned pickup region with positional information of the
whole region stored in advance of the scanning of the
object to determine which part of the whole region the
^
JTMHESKXOW
C«CU1T
CUXK
GCNEIUroi)
SYNCHRONOUS
SISNIL
GOCMTOA
fVTTEKN
r
SCAKCH MEA
avoNG cMcurr
|Mao»»|. — .
"o»TT^
^
•h
said pickup region lies in and to detect the position of the
object from positional relationship of said scanned pickup
region within the whole region.
4,435,836
TECHNIQUE FOR EXTRACTING FEATURES FROM
IMAGES
Steven M. Rubin, Los Altos, Calif., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
FUed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,791
Int. Q\? Q06K 9/12
U.S. a. 382—27 15 Qaims
(sn M TO scaiD
sann
T HTTOI
1. A method of representing the features of a portion of a
picture by one or more strokes, said picture including a recti-
linear array of picture elements, each of said strokes including
a contiguous group of picture elements having similar attri-
butes, including the steps of:
(a) hypothesizing the existence of a stroke including a begin-
ning pel and at least one additional pel;
(b) simultaneously testing a group of at least two pels con-
tained in the hypothesized stroke defined in step (a) to
generate a success indication if all of the pels in said group
possess similar attributes; and
(c) repeating step (a) for other hypothesized strokes.
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
443
4,435,837
PATTERN RECOGNITION AND ORIENTATION
SYSTEM
Frederick H. Abemathy, Aubumdale, Mass., assignor to Presi-
dent and Fellows of Harvard College, Cambridge, Mau.
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,878
Int. a? G06K 9/32
U.S. a 382-41 4a^^
selected planes of said object to be imaged in such a man-
ner that the ratio D/d is a constant, where D is the dis-
tance from said selected plane to the plane of said detec-
tor, and d is the distance from said selected plane to the
plane of said mask; and
means for decoding, using a fixed decoding process, each of
said selected planes of said object.
1. A method for recognizing a flat piece of cloth comprising
placing said piece on a viewing surface within a field of
interest having perpendicular coordinate axes,
generating image signals corresponding to the existence or
nonexistence of said piece in discrete areas of said field,
said discrete areas being arranged in rows and columns
along said axes,
processing said image signals to obtain observed moment
signals representative of the first (area) and the second
(sum of the products of inertia I*,, I^^) moments of said
piece,
generating desired signals for the corresponding first and
second moments of a desired piece,
identifying said piece by comparing said observed moment
signals with said desired moment signals, and
generating a default signal when a difference between said
observed and desired signals exceeds a certain limit.
4 435 838
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TOMOGRAPHICAL
IMAGING
Alexander R. Gouriay, Winchester, England, assignor to Inter-
national Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,349
Claims priority, application European Pat. Off., Mar. 30.
1981, 81301382.8
Int. a.J GOIT 1/00: G03B 41/16
U.S. a. 382—68 10 Claims
'>
^8)
MEMORY
f
DECODE
19-^
DISPLAY
4,435,839
FOIL BEARING RUBBING SURFACE COATING
APPLICATION METHODS
Alston L. Gu, Huntington Beach, and Alexander Silver, Tar-
zana, both of Calif., assignors to The Garrett Corporation, Los
Angeles, Calif.
Filed Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 420,663
Int. CI.' F16C 1/24, 33/00: B05D 3/02. 3/12
U.S. a 384-103 29aalms
6. In an apparatus for tomographically imaging different
selected planes of a three-dimensional object by detecting
radiation from said object after the passage of the radiation
through a coded aperture mask, wherein an image of the radia-
tion of a selected plane sensed by a detector over a period of
time is stored, and the decoding of said selected plane is by a
correlation process appropriate to the size of the shadow of
said mask cast on said detector by points in said selected plane,
the improvement comprises:
means for adjusting the position of at least one of said object,
said mask, or said detector to select each of said different
1. A method of applying a dry lubricant coating to a rubbing
contact surface of a bearing, said method comprising the steps
of:
(a) providing a coating mixture comprising a dry lubricant
material and a liquid binder;
(b) applying a multiplicity of subcoats of said mixture to the
rubbing contact surface to form a multilayered lubricant
coating thereon;
(c) curing each successive subcoat at a first temperature to
individually solidify the subcoats;
(d) deroughening the surfaces of selected ones of the sub-
coats positioned at predetermined thickness intervals of
said multilayered coating; and
(e) curing the multilayered coating at a second temperature
substantially higher than said first temperature.
2. The method of claim 1 further comprising the step of (0
applying a dry lubricant material upon the surface of the-cured
multilayered coating.
3. The method of claim 2 wherein said step (d) includes
deroughening the surface of the last-applied subcoat, and
wherein said step (0 is performed by burnishing a dry lubricant
powder into said last-applied subcoat prior to the deroughen-
ing of its surface.
4. The method of claim 1 wherein said step (a) is performed
by providing a coating mixture comprising graphite fluoride
(CFx) powder and polyimide varnish.
5. The method of claim 1 wherein said step (a) is performed
by providing a coating mixture comprising graphite fluoride
(CFx) powder, polyimide varnish, an N-methylpyrrolidone
and xylene thinning liquid, and a fluorocarbon solution wetting
agent.
446
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
4 435 840
RADIO MOBILE CX)MMUNICATION SYSTEM
WHEREIN PROBABILITY OF LOSS OF CALLS IS
REDUCED WITHOUT A SURPLUS OF BASE STATION
EQUIPMENT
Jimichiroh Kojima, and Keigi Mizoe, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,367
/Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 22, 1981, 56-95196;
Mar. 19, 1982, 57-44897; Apr. 5, 1982, 57-57071
Int. a.} H04B 1/00
MS. a. 455—33 5 Claims
CO«'»Ol k
r
1. In a mobile radio communication system comprising a
control station and a plurality of base stations controlled by
said control station and having service areas, respectively,
each service area partly overlapping at least one of the other
service areas, each base station being allotted with a plurality
of channels for use in radio communication with a plurality of
mobile stations which are present in the service area of said
each base station and each of which has a communicable dis-
tance, the number of channels currently used in the radio
communication deflning a current traffic for said each base
station, the improvement wherein:
said control station comprises:
threshold means for generating a threshold signal represen-
tative of a threshold traffic predetermined for each base
station;
measuring means coupled to said base stations for measuring
the current traffics for the respective base stations to
produce a plurality of traffic signals representative of the
measured current traffics, respectively; and
monitoring means coupled to said base stations and respon-
sive to said threshold signal and said traffic signals for
monitoring the measured current traffics with at least one
threshold traffic predetermined for said base stations to
supply a traffic adjusting signal to a particular one of said
base stations when the current traffic defined for said
particular base station exceeds the threshold traffic prede-
termined therefor and furthermore when the current traf-
fic defined for an adjacent one of said base stations, the
service area of whichpartly overlaps the service area of
said particular base station, does not exceed the threshold
traffic for said adjacent base station;
said system further comprising varying means operable in at
least a predetermined one of first and second modes of
operation in response to said traffic adjusting signal, said
varying means varying the service area of said particular
base station in said first mode of operation, said service
area being defined by each base station's transmission
output power, said varying means varying, in said second
mode of operation, the communicable distance of each
mobile station present in the service area of said particular
base station.
4,435341
COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER HAVING A
SWrrCHABLE nLTER INPUT STAGE
Pierre Dobrovolny, North RJTerside, 111., assignor to Zenith
Radio Corporation, Glenview, 111.
FUed Mar. 1, 1982, Scr. No. 353,694
Int. a.3 H04B 1/26: H03H 7/00
U.S. a. 459—180 17 Claims
n • 10 I M
\) • If
1. A multichannel communications receiver characterized
by a reduced level of nonlinear distortion comprising:
an input terminal for receiving signals broadcast over a
plurality of communication channels;
channel selection means developing a first control signal
representing a selected one of said plurality of channels
and a second control signal representing a band of chan-
nels encompassing said selected channel, said band of
channels having a bandwidth less than said plurality of
channels;
an input stage coupled to said input terminal comprising a
plurality of non-tunable circuit components including
switchable filter means responsive to said second control
signal for assuming a highpass filter characteristic or a
lowpass filter characteristic, said filter means comprising
an arrangement of inductors and capacitors, a first switch-
ing means and a second switching means being responsive
to said second control signal for causing said inductors
and capacitors to assume said highpass filter characteristic
or said lowpass filter characteristic, at least one of said
switching means being characterized by a parasitic reac-
tance coupled across said filter means, said receiver com-
prising compensating means coupled across said filter
means for reducing the effect of said parasitic reactance;
and
frequency conversion means coupled to the output of said
input stage and responsive to said first control signal for
processing the passed band of channels so as to develop an
output signal having a predetermined frequency repre-
senting only said selected channel.
4,435,842
PROGRAMMABLE CHANNEL SELECTING
APPARATUS
Kuzuaki Mayumi, Joyo; Yoshihiro FiUiwara, Hlrakata; Toshio
Tokuda, Hlrakata, and Todiiaki Suzuki, Hlrakata, aU of
Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Scr. No. 192,489, Oct 1, 1980, abandoned,
which is a contiBuation of Ser. No. 5,178, Jan. 22, 1979,
abandoned. This application Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,092
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 26, 1978, 53-8157;
Jul. 7, 1978, 53-83385; Jul. 7, 1978, 53-83392
Int. a.3 H04N 5/76; H04B 1/16
VS. a. 455—181 2 Claims
1. A programmable channel selecting apparatus for enabling
a channel preselecting and an instant channel selecting opera-
tion for an electronic tuner, comprising:
a plurality of manually-operable channel-selecting switches
and a channel indicator means corresponding respectively
to a plurality of channels to be selected;
a channel selection circuit;
a channel preselecting means;
an inhibit means for preventing disturbance of a selected
channel;
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
447
common signal lines connecting said channel-selecting
switches, said channel selection circuit and said channel
indicator means respectively, and said channel-selecting
switches, said channel preselecting means and said chan-
nel indicator means respectively and,
clock means for providing dau representing current time;
said channel selection circuit including means for generating
and holding a channel selecting signal corresponding to
any one of said switches which is manually operated, said
channel selecting signal being immediately applied to said
electronic tuner when generated;
said channel preselecting means including a manually-opera-
ble input switch means for inputting a channel preselect-
ing time, and microcomputer means including memory
means for storing data representing a channel preselecting
time inputted by said input switch means together with a
_ 4,435,843
FM RECEIVER FOR GENERAL PROGRAMS AND
SPECTAL ANNOUNCEMENTS
Norbert Eilcrs, HUdeaheim, and Peter Briigas, Itzum, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Blaupunkt-Werke GmbH,
Hildesheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed No?. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319.654
Oaims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 27.
1981,3121088 .
Int. a.' H04B 1/16
U.S. a 455-205 31 Claims
'SbS^Mx
aoo-
oaiwTiit
■W DOS
- — * — * I — I 4.
OOF
7TO3
Ibjctwhb ,,,
tonot
signal indicative of a channel preselected by any one of
said channel-selecting switches, said microcomputer
means detecting when a current time from said clock
means is coincident with data representing a channel
preselecting time stored in said memory means and for
causing said channel selection circuit to generate and hold
a channel selecting signal corresponding to the prese-
lected channel;
said inhibit means being responsive to said microcomputer
means for preventing said channel selection circuit from
being influenced by the channel preselecting operation;
and,
said channel indicator means difTerentially indicating at least
one channel corresponding to and according to at least
one of the channel selecting signals held by said channel
selection circuit and the preselected channel indicating
signal stored by said memory means.
■•MNMLOOMmO.
aaECTKM
SMOE
26. For use in an FM radio receiver having a tuner, an RF
stage, an output audio stage including switching means switch-
able among various audio signal sources in addition to the FM
receiver, the improvement comprising meansjor dcteaing
total amplitude modulation of an auxiliary/^subcarrier of a
preselected frequency value by at least two distinct recogni-
tion signals at two distinct frequencies and for producing an
output when the modulation by the two recognition signals
exceeds a predetermined value, and means responsive to the
output from said means for detecting for controlling said
switching means to connect the receiver to its audio stage
when said modulation above a predetermined value is de-
tected.
4,435,844
REMOTE CONTROL ORCUIT
Jerome D. Meyerhoff, Buffalo Grove, III., and Steven E. For-
shay, Ardmore, Pa., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg,
All*
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,868
Int. a.3 H04B 1/ia 1/16
U.S. a. 455—218
SOaims
ur^SSu
asr«
tMnorvl
1. A control system forysontrolling the operation of a remote
unit by detecting a change of operational mode of a control
unit, the system comprising:
a control unit;
a power supply line for supplying power from an external
source to the control unit; and
a remote unit including;
a free-running oscillator having a tuned circuit, said control
unit power line being coupled through the tuned circuit to
the control unit, the operational mode of the control unit
as indicated by the operative condition of the power sup-
ply line affecting the function of the oscillator;
448
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
a detection circuit coupled to the tuned circuit for detecting
changes in oscillator functioning and providing a control
signal in response to said changes; a controlled power
supply coupled to the external power source; and
a control stage responsive'to said control signal and coupled
to the controlled power supply for controlling the provi-
sion of power to a portion of the remote unit.
4,435,845
AUTOMOBILE RADIO AND TAPE CASSETTE
SWITCHING APPARATUS
Horst Timm, Hildesheim, and H. Eckard Kniger, Hildesheim-
Soraum, both of Fed. Rep. of Gemiany, assignors, to Blau-
punkt-Werke GmbH, Hildesheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 29, 1982, Set. No. 393,417
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 2,
1981, 3126117
Jnt. a.3 H04B 1/20
U.S. a. 455—228
8 Claims
MNOUMXHCNT
lirSDeMO0U.*TOK
1. Automobile radio-tape reproducing equipment combina-
tion having
a radio frequency and demodulation stage (10) providing'
radio audio signals;
a magnetic Upe system (16) providing tape audio signals;
an announcement information decoder (18) coupled to said
radio frequency and demodulation stage for decoding
special announcement code signals and providing an an-
nouncement recognition (AR) signal;
an audio stage (12);
a loudspeaker (14) coupled to said audio stage;
and a multiple switching network (20) coupled to said radio
frequency and demodulation stage and said magnetic tape
system and connected to and controlled by the announce-
ment information decoder and coupled to the audio stage
for providing output signals controlling audio reproduc-
tion of special announcement upon decoding of the an-
nouncement recognition code, and comprising, in accor-
dance with the invention,
an accessory stage (24) having at least one earphone con-
necting plug (KHl, KH2);
and a switching network (20//) forming part of the multiple
switching network, and a selector switch (44), the switch-
ing network being controlled by selectively enabled
switching signals from the selector switch and the special
announcement information decoder (18) to control, selec-
tively, circuit paths for application of radio audio signals,
or tape audio signals, to the at least one earphone plug,
independently of reproduction of special announcements
by said Ioudsp>eaker upon recognition of an announce-
ment recognition (AR) signal.
4,435,846
AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL OF A SINGLE GATE
GAAS FET AMPUnER
Volker B. Weise, Redwood Qty, Calif., assignor to GTE Auto-
matic Electric Incorporated, Northlake, 111.
FUed Apr. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 366,495
Int. a.3 H04B 1/16: H03G 3/20
U.S. a. 455—253 4 Claims
1. In a radio receiver operating in the GHz radio frequency
(RF) range, and adapted to receive a modulated RF input
signal, an automatic gain control (AGC) circuit comprising;
a controllable power source having a control input and
including means for supplying direct current (DC) operat-
ing voltage between a supply line and a ground plane, said
DC operating voltage having a magnitude;
an RF preamplifier which includes a single GaAs FET
having gate, drain and source electrodes, and biasing
means connected to said DC operating voltage, said gate
electrode being adapted to receive said RF input signal,
said drain electrode being AC isolated and DC connected
to said ground plane, and said source electrode being
connected to said biasing means, said FET providing an
amplified RF signal at the drain electrode, the RF pream-
plified gain varying in response to variations in the magni-
HX;* la I 40 44
-J i^^ .A
tude of the DC operating voltage supplied by said control-
lable power source;
circuit means having an input adapted to receive said ampli-
fied RF signal, said circuit means including a fixed gain
amplifier, and providing an amplified IF signal at an out-
put;
a level control circuit having an input adapted for connec-
tion to the output of said circuit means, said level control
circuit being responsive to the amplitude of said amplified
IF signal so as to provide a variable DC control signal to
the control input of said controllable power source,
whereby the gain of the RF preamplifier is varied in-
versely to the amplitude of said amplified IF signal, so as
to substantially maintain the amplitude of said amplified
IF signal constant over a predetermined range of RF input
signal amplitudes.
4,435,847
AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY CONTROL aRCUTTRY
James Williamson, Franklin, and Paul G. Crete, Chelmsford,
both of Mass., assignors to Raytheon Company, Lexington,
Mass.
Filed Jan. 16, 1976, Ser. No. 650,521
Int. a.' H04B 1/16
U.S. a. 455—260 5 Claims
fef - ^ii^srzt^r^
1. In a heterodyne receiver wherein the frequency of a
tunable first local oscillator is to be maintained at a frequency
offset by a predetermined amount from the frequency of a
March 6, 1984
ELECTRICAL
449
received signal, improved frequency control circuitry for such
oscillator comprising:
(a) quadrature detection means, responsive to an intermedi-
ate frequency signal corresponding to a received signal
and to the output of a reference oscillator, for producing
a first and a second difference signal, each one being
indicative of a difference in phase between the intermedi-
ate frequency signal and the output of the reference oscil-
lator;
(b) filter means, responsive to the first and the second differ-
ence signals out of the quadrature detection means, for
converting the first and the second difference signals to,
respectively, a control signal and an error signal having
the same sense as the control signal;
(c) correction signal generating means, responsive to the
control signal and to the error signal out of the filter
means, for producing a correction signal having an ampli-
tude and sense determined by the error signal; and,
(d) means, responsive to the correction signal out of the
correction signal generating means, for changing the
phase of the tunable first local oscillator until the second
difference signal is indicative of a difference in phase of
90* between the intermediate frequency signal and the
output of the reference oscillator.
4,435348
STRIPLINE MICROWAVE BALANCED MIXER QRCUIT
Siegfried Sedlmair, Groebenzell, Fed. Rep. of Germany, auignor
to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,515
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 29,
1981, 3117080
Int. a.3 H04B 1/26
U.S. a. 455— 327 16 Qaims
1. A microwave balanced or push-pull mixer circuit for an
operating frequency formed in stripline technology having
first and second input terminals and an intermediate frequency
signal terminal each having an impedance Zo comprising, a
differential transformer which for applying two input voltages
to be mixed through said first and second input terminals with
said first one connected through two quarter wave length
striplines to first and second transformer output terminals and
said second input terminal connected to said second trans-
former output terminal through the inner conductor of an
arcuate-shaped coaxial line, an arcuate-shaped stripline con-
nected to the second transformer output terminal and with one
end connected by a through-contact to a ground plate, and the
other outer end connected to the first transformer output
terminal, first and second semi-conductor diodes connected
together with a common terminal, with said first one mounted
between the first transformer output terminal and an interme-
diate frequency signal output terminal and said second diode
mounted between the second transformer output terminal and
the intermediate frequency signal output terminal and poled
differently than said first diode relative to the intermediate
frequency signal output, means for blocking the frequency
range of the two input voltages connected ahead of said diodes
and for matching to the impedance Zo, two symmetrical strip-
lines (17, 18) connected between said first and second trans-
former output terminals (4, 5) and the non-common terminals
(19, 20) of said first and second diodes , and said striplines being
enlarged near the noncommon terminals so that parallel capac-
itances are formed in the area of said diode terminals (19, 20),
and the arcuate-shaped coaxial line (10) and the stripline (7)
extending symmetrically relative thereto and which extend
from said first and second differential transformer output ter-
minals (4, 5) are designed to be shorter than a quarter wave
length at the operating frequency so that parallel inducunces
are formed, and tuned such that the impedances of said first
and second diodes at the differential transformer output termi-
nals (4, 5) are respectively transformed to the impedance Zo,
the width of said two quarter wave length striplines (11, 12) is
selected such that they have an impedance of Zq. Vl, another
stripline (14) mounted between said inner conductor (13) of the
coaxial line (10) on the end away from the differential trans-
former output terminals (4, 5) and the second input terminal
(1), so that the overall length of the coaxial line (10) and of said
another strip-line (14) equals a quarter wave length and the
impedance of these two lines is equal to Zo V2, and blocking
the frequency range of the two input signals, a blocking circuit
composed of a stripline coil (26) mounted between said com-
mon diode terminal (23) adjacent the intermediate frequency
signal output terminal (3), said blocking circuit selected such
that, at the desired intermediate frequency, the impedance Zo
occurs at the intermediate frequency signal output terminal (3).
4,435,849
OPTICAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
Herwig Ilgner, Rosbach, and Utz W. Barth, Frankfurt, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hartmann A Braun AG,
Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,987
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 1,
1980, 3007958
Int. CI.J G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 455—601 14 Qaims
1. In an optical transmission system, having a plurality of
signal-regenerating units, at least one of said units including:
an optical branching unit having a first portion in order to
provide attenuated through-transmission of a portion of an
optical signal received, this through-transmission continu-
ing irrespective of failure of said unit; a second portion
extracting a component from the received optical signal;
and a third portion for reintroducing an optical signal and
combining it with the through-transmitted signal, there
being first circuit means for convertinng the extracted
portion into an electrical signal, there further being a
450
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
source for producing radiation, the radiation being a re-
constituted signal, the improvement comprising:
second circuit means connected to the first circuit means and
responsive to the contour of the electrical signal repre-
senting a three-level-per-bit code, the middle level corre-
sponding to nonzero light, but also to a zero data flow
condition when persisting, and producing multi-bit logic
signals wherein a particular bit combination represents
said middle level, the second circuit means including
threshold means providing two threshold levels against
which said electrical signal is referenced and having val-
ues respectively larger and smaller than an average of said
electrical signal which average corresponds to a signal
produced in the absence of data, in order to distinguish
between three ranges for the electrical signals, resulting in
three distinct logic states, the second circuit means further
including circuit means (i) responsive to the average of
said signal, and circuit means (ii) for shifting the threshold
values up or down, corresponding to changes in the aver-
age; and
third circuit means connected to be responsive to the logic
signals as sequentially provided and
producing a three-level control for the radiation as produced
by the said source, the middle level when persisting repre-
«
senting absence of reconstituted data.
4,435,850
SECURE HBER OPTIC DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
James H. Bowen, WiUianuburg; David L. Baldwin, and Philip
R. Couch, both of Roanoke, all of Va., assignors to Interna-
tional Telephone and Telegraph Corporation, New Yorl(, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,147
Int. a.3 H04B 9/00
U.S. a. 455—606 14 Claims
AWWA attftw*
s^m0si^s^*tt \
—J 1_J JMli — I
vftic L I iot^mth 1. ' ctocM re */
y»^*^
o^r/fMi r^tmsmnf*
1. A secure fiber optic data transmission system comprising:
an optical fiber means to provide two way optical communica-
tion between two spaced terminals;
each of said two terminals including
first means coupled to an adjacent end of said optical fiber
means to receive optical energy modulated by data trans-
mitted from the other of said two terminals;
second means coupled to said adjacent end of said optical
fiber means to transmit modulated optical energy to said
other of said two terminals, said transmitted optical en-
ergy having a predetermined average optical power and
data modulated thereon with a modulation index; and
third means coupled to said first and second means resonsive
to said received optical energy to activate an alarm means
and to deactivate said second meahs when said received
optical energy has an amplitude outside of a given ampli-
tude region,
said third means including
a threshold comparator coupled to said first and second
means having two spaced threshold values to define
said given amplitude region.
DESIGNS
MARCH 6, 1984
272,864
MULTIHEM-HEIGHT SKIRT
WUliam A. Skewis, 171 W. Spruce, Sequim, Wash. 98382
FUed Nov. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 445,007
U.S. a. D2— 223
272,866
SPORT SHOE
Gino Casetta, Pontelongo, Italy, assignor to Simod Patents
N.A.N.V., Curacao, Netherlands Antilles
Filed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,166
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 16, 1980,
619338/80[U]
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2— M
U.S. CI. D2— 309
272,865
COMBINED SWEAT BAND AND EYE SHIELD
Paul H. Edelmann, 10461 SW. 132nd St., Miami, Fla. 33176
Continuation-iB-part of Ser. No. 161,852, Jun. 23, 1980. This
application Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,870
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D02— Oi
U.S. a. D2— 241
272,867 K
HIDDEN MOUNTABLE STRAP FOR BILLFOLD OR THE
LIKE
Madison W. Gwaltney, P.O. Box 12D, and Goodrich W. Long-
serre, P.O. Box 8, both of Thompsons, Tex. 77481
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265.505
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D02— 99
U.S. a. D2— 400
^
272,868
LUGGAGE COVER /
Max Jaffee, 1240 Homan Ave., Chicago, III. 60651
Filed Jun. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 159,178
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— 02
U.S. CI. D3— 41
451
452
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
272^ 272^1
CARRYING CASE FOR CASH CHILD'S CLOTHES RACK
Paul DtTls, Kettering, England, assignor to LoMh Manufactur- Gerald M. Rapaport, 5933 N. Lincoln Ave., Chicago, lU. 60659
ing Co. Ltd., Lye, England FUed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,524
FUed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225^46 Term of patent 14 years *
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 16, 1980, lot. Q D6— 99
W5754 U.S.a.D6— 5
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3—02
VS. a. D3— 73
272 872
COMBINED CRIB AND STORAGE UNIT
Norberto Moreno, 1404 Queen Summit Dr., West Covina, Calif.
91791
FUed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,972
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 05
U.S.a. D6— 16
272,870
LUGGAGE CASE
Richard Miles, Guilford, and Adrian D. Stokes, Colbrook, both
of England, assignors to Samsonite Corporation, Denver,
Colo.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,722 ma-j*
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, May 26, 1981, rJiAio
811000672 *-riAiK
Hans C. Menphoel, Bygddy AUe 12, Oslo 2, and Oddvin Ryk-
U.S. a. D3-.76
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— 0/
^r=%
ken, 5610 Oystese, dystese, both of Norway
FUed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,247
Claims priority, appUcation Norway, Apr. 29, 1981, 61.946
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6—01
U.S.a.D6— 26
March 6, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
453
"^^"^^ 272 876
Piet <SIi^"Ai!Sl^r2S* ii^S ?T T ^'"''-^ ^'^''^"^ ''O" "^ING FURNITURE OR THE LIKE
Pi^I.TTiS!./^'.J^*2*''""*f' ""'«"*" *° '^■**'*" ^"'*^ A- ""*»• 3161 SuUlvant Ave.. Columbus. Ohio 43204
' wTi??' Ti^'S"^^ Filed Jan. 19. 1981. Ser. No. 226,42i
Filed Nov. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 204,028 T«nB nt nmtmnt %a »....
Claims priority, application Portugal, May 9, 1980. 15080 Int. CI D6-- JO
\, Term of patent 14 years u.S. a. D6— 205
Int. a. D4— 0/, D6— 04 '
U.S. a. D6— 86
272,875
SOAP STAND
Brian M. Johnston, 114 W. 42 Ave., Vancouver, B.C., Canada
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 50,775, Jun. 12, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,508
Claims priority, application Canada, Apr. 23, 1979, 14•0^79•2
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23—02; D6— 06
VJS. a. D6— 89
272,877
DOOR MAT BASE PLATE OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Yosuke Yamamoto; Takehisa Kinoyama, and KUiichi Sasagawa,
aU of Osaka, Japan, assignors to Duskin Franchise Kabushlki
Kaisha (Duskin Franchise Co., Ltd.), Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 8. 1980. Ser. No. 147,718
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 11, 1979, 54-51723
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— /;
U.S. a. Dfr-209
454
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
272,878 272,880
CUP HORS-D'OEUVRE DISH
Joseph Kanoui, Geneva, Switzerland, assignor to Interdica S.A., Ambrogio Pozzi, Gallarate, Italy, assignor to F. LLI Guzzini
Villars-sur-Glane, Switzerland S.p.A., Recanati, Italy
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,920 Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,888
Claims priority, application Switzerland, May 29, 1981, 71465 Qainu priority, application Itely, Sep. 29, 1980, 22951
Term of patent 14 years B/80[U]
Int a. D07— 0/ Term of patent 14 years
U.S.a. D7— « Int.a. D07— 0/
U.S. a. D7— 21
272,879
SERVING PLATTER
Ambrogio Pozzi, Gallarate, Italy, assignor to F. LLI Guzzini
S.p.A., Recanati, Italy
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,889
Claims priority, application Italy, Sep. 29, 1980, 22951
B/80[U]
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— 99
U.S. a. D7— 21
■^llinnnmiujium
J
m;
mE
-|IWIIHHIBIHIHIill=
-'■^t'
|L
272,881
nNGER-BOWL
Joseph Kanoui, Geneva, Switzerland, assignor to Interdica S.A.,
Villars-sur-Glane, Switzerland
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,919
Qaims priority, application Hague, May 29, 1981, 71465
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— 0/
U.S. a. D7— 28
March 6, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
455
272,882 272 884
SERVER FOR A WINE BOTTLE OR THE LIKE TEA KETTLE OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
James H. Gardner, and Noel H. de Nevers, both of Salt Lake Ben Selbel, New York, N.Y., assignor to S.F.C. Associates, Inc.,
City, Utah, assignors to Aurora Design Associates, Inc., Salt New York, N.Y.
Lake aty, Utah Filed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 337,810
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,952 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years int. Q. D07— OA 02
Jnt.a.D07— 06 U.S.a. D7— 321
U.S. a. D7— 70
f
272,885
■^ BARBECUE STOVE
Angelo Famiglietti, 26 Monroe Rd., Enfleld, Conn. 06082
Filed Jan. 8. 1981, Ser. No. 223,363
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D7—04
U.S. CI. D7— 333
y
272,883
SPOON
Fred S. Steiner, 154 Combs Ave., Woodmere, N.Y. 11598
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,831
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D07— M, 03
U.S. a. D7— 104
272 886
INSULATION SUPPORT
J. L. Holcombe, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Emerson H. Mizell,
Atlanta, Ga.
Division of Ser. No. 146,288, May 5, 1980. This application Aug.
26, 1982, Ser. No. 411,980
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. US— 08
VJS. a. D8— 380
:3Z?c
!
456
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
March 6, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
457
272^87
CUP FOR GAME GOAL NETS
Denis Parton, 5 Enfield Grove, Leigh, County of
England
FUed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,655
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DS— 08
VS. a. D8— 395
272390
BUTTON
, Kathleen A. Stratton, 9640 Wells Pkwy., Norfolk, Va. 23503
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,834
Term of patent 14 years
Int. Q. DU—OJ
VS. a. Dll— 55
^
^
272,888
BOTTLE
" ™t!oVSo'\lf'^' "'•' ""'*"" *" ''"""■^ "^ "^^ ^^^^^ PEND5:'^^ OR THE LIKE
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 289,081 ^!^ ^' ^™«*' ^^ ^"'^ ^- Newport Beach, Calif.
Term of natent 14 years 92660
iZaW-Ol FUed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,056
U.S. a. D9— 352 Term of patent 14 years
V Int. a. Dll— o;
> U.S.a. Dll— 78
272,889
BOTTLE OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Benn C. Walton, Stone Mountain, Ga., assignor to SeweU Plas-
tics, Inc., Atlanta, Ga.
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,184
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— 07
U.S. a. D9— 370
. 272,892
* ORNAMENT
George C. Sun, 530 Rhode Island Ave., Cherry HiU, N J. 08002
FUed Not. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,560
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dll— 05
U.S. a. Dll— 125
272,893 272,896
SCORPION nGURE NOVELTY PIG HGURE
Tatsuya Kodaka, 25-6, Wakamiya 1-chome, Nakano-ku, Tokyo, Dana P. H. Kobashigawa, 475 Atkinson Dr., #1707, Honolulu,
J»P" Hi. 96814
FUed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,726 Filed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,296
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int.a.Dll-02 Int.aDll-02
U.S. a Dll-158 _ U.S. a Dll-158
272,894 ^
TARANTULA nGURE
Tatouya Kodaka, 25-6, Wakamiya 1-chome, Nakanu-ku, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,727
Term of patent 14 years
Int. Q. Dll— 02
U^. a. Dll— 158
272,895
TABLE ORNAMENT 272,897
Jean W. Heap, PwllheU, Wales, assignor to Pendelfin Studios VEHICLE WHEEL COVER ^
Limited, Lancashire, England Leif H. Chapman, Sylvan Lake, Mich., assignor to General
FUed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,768 Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Mar. 13, 1982, FUed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,175
1005603 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. CI. D12— 76
Int a. Dll— 02 VS. a. D12— 211
U.S. a. Dll— 158
458
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
272,898 272,900
TOY CAR WITH PEDAL DRIVE WIND VANE STEERING CONTROL FOR BOATS
Heinz Kuchenbecker, Parkstr. 17; Hans J. L. Kuchenbecker, Charles J. Obst, West Barrington, R.I., auignor to Joseph J.
Parkstr. 15, and Rolf Kuchenbecker, Parkstr. 17, aU of, D- Vastano, Warwick, R.I., a part interest
5657 Haan 2, Fed, Rep. of Germany Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,289
Filed Jul. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 173,663 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. a. D12— 16
Int. a. D12— 77 U.S. Q. D12— 317
U.S. a. D12— 108
272,901
MODEL HOBBY GLOWPLUG POWER SOURCE WITH
NEGATIVE TERMINAL HEADLOCK
Robert E. McDaniel, 2303 Victoria Ave., Bellevue, Nebr. 68005
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,764
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— Oi
U.S. a. D13— 8
272,899
TIRE FOR A VEHICLE WHEEL
Hiroshi Tomoda, Ashiya, Japan, assignor to Dunlop Limited,
London, England
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,898
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 18, 1980, 55-29250
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D12— 75
U.S. a. D12— 141
272,902
SELF-FASTENED HEAT SINK
Philip A. Johnson, Kingston, and Alfred F. McCarthy, Bel-
mount, both of N.H., assignors to Aavid Engineering, Inc.,
Laconia, N.H.
Filed Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 328,947
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— Oi
U.S. a. D13— 23
March 6, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
459
272,903 272 905
MACHINE CONTROL CONSOLE TELEPHONE INSTRUMENT
Ludwig Friedrich, Dresden; Hans Johne, Radebeul; Karl-Heinz Knut H. Blomberg, Lokattsvagen 39, S 161 37 Bromma, Sweden
Forster, Dresden; Alfred Schott, Radebeul; Peter Reinhardt, Division of Ser. No. 900,278, Apr. 26, 1978, Pat. No. Des.
UipzlK Dieter Simon, Leipzig, and Amo Stockmann, Uipzig, 259,260. This application Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,506
all of German Democratic Rep., assignors to Veb Kombinat
Polygraph "Werner Lamberz", Leipzig, German Democratic
Rep.
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,511
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— Oi
U.S. a. D13— 40
U.S. CI. D14— S3
Tfm of patent 14 years
D14— Oi
lerm of pal
^nt. a.
r
272,904 272,906
EARPHONE TELEPHONE CONSOLE
Takeyoshi Kawano, Kunitachi, Japan, assignor to Sony Corpora- Bert D. Heinzelman, North Bergen, N.J.; Malcolm J. Brookes,
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,609
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 17, 1981, 56-6077
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— Oi
U.S. a. D14— 30
and Douglas M. Spranger, both of New York, N.Y., assignors
to International Telephone and Telegraph Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 294,938
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 03
U.S. a. D14— 58
"•■^aUUsJULKAA^JfcJUUUUUUkJUUty
460
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
272,907 272,909
TELEPHONE BASE STATION FAIRLEAD MOUNTING FOR A SKIDDER VEHICXE
John C. Coons, and Jean M. Beirise, both of Cincinnati, Ohio, Stanley Witczak, St. Thomas, Canada, assignor to Qarlc Equip-
assignors to Masco Corporation of Indiana, Taylor, Mich. ment Company, Buchanan, Mich.
FUed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,619 FUed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,177
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int.a.D14— Oi Int.a. D15— Oi
U.S.a. D14— 58 U.S.a. D15— 28
BC
n
272,910
FEEDHORN FOR PARABOLIC ANTENNAE
Robert B. Taggart, Portola Valley, and Howard H. Taylor, San
Andreas, both of Calif., assignors to Chaparral Communica-
tions, Inc., San Jose, Calif.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,815
U.S. a. D14— 90
272,908
TELEVISION RECEIVER ,
Toshiyuki Matsuo, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Sony Corpora-
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 309,025 ,
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 7, 1981, 56-14639 „, ...
Term of patent 14 years _ . „i f , i]L„„
InL CI niii nj TArt SLliTER
James C. Bolton, OJai, Calif., assignor to Industrial Tools, Inc.,
Ojai, Calif. ^
' ^ FUed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,195
Term of patent 14 years
Int.a. D15— 09
VJS. a. D15— 127
U.S. a. D14— 77
March 6, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
461
272,912 272,914
PROPELLER COUNTERWEIGHT BEARING ASSEMBLY WIDE FIELD ILLUMINATOR
Kerry G. Dawes, Palo Cedro, Calif., assignor to Dennis A. Prae- Ronald E. Sheets, Santa Ana, Calif., assignor to Tamarack
gitzer, Palo Cedro, Calif. Scientific Co., Inc., Anaheim, Calif.
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,452 Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,443
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int.aD15-99 Int.a. D16-0J
U.S. a. D15— 143 U.S. a. D16-32
272,913
COMBINED HANDLING, TESTING, AND SORTING
MACHINE FOR INTEGRATED QRCUITS
Claude M. Boissicat, Cupertino, Calif., assignor to Contrel,
Sunnyvale, Calif.
Filed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,673
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 99
U.S. a. D15— 147
272,915
OPTICAL COUPLER PHOTOGRAPHIC ACCESSORY
Richard E. Feinbloom, New York; Richard Lepczynski, Brook-
lyn, and Wladyslaw Oleksy, New York, all of N.Y., assignors
to Designs for Vision, Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,392
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D\6— 05. OS
U.S. a. D16— 130
n
462
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
272,916 272,918
MONOCULAR VENDING MACHINE
Masakazu Tomatsuri, Nak«, and Chiyoji Takahaihi, Yokohama, Robert L. Glaser, Deerfield, lU., assignor to L. M. Becker ft Co.,
both of Japan, assignors to Nippon Kogakn K.K., Tokyo, Inc., Appleton, Wis.
J«P«n FUed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,757
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,609 Term of patent 14 years
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 29, 1980, 55-45216 Int. O. D20— 07
Term of patent 14 years U.S. Q. D20— 1
Int. a. D16— 06
U.S. a. D16— 132
272,917
COMBINED PAPER AND PENOL CADDY
Joseph M. Micucci, Longmeadow, Mass., assignor to Olympic
Sales Club, Inc., Enfield, Conn.
FUed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 285,994
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D19— 02
U.S. a. D19— 78
March 6, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
463
272,919 272,921
ELECTRONIC GAME BOARD CONTROL FOR A VIDEO GAME OR THE LIKE
Jeffrey M. Chambers, Wilbraham, Mass., and Joseph Kata, Syng N. Kim, Hofhnan EsUtes, 111., assignor to Wico Corpora*
Meriden, Conn., assignors to Milton Bradley International, tion, Niles, III.
Inc., Springfield, Mass. Filed Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,934
FUed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,598 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. Q. 021—07
Int. a. D21— 07 U.S. a. D21— 48
U.S. a. D21— 24
ijiiiiinniiiifiinnnniifrifffiiiirt
I
J. — J — _^^__^
J -- * * '
i *v
M
If i 1 ° °
O 0 1;
■^ j
J !0 0
. 6 (S I
il
T^r. ; a 0 ■
0 0
it
_ N'c a
a ii/
|L
^ 1 2 0
^ ij fl i -
J '
' !' 2 2
'an.
L
•-! 1' 2 a !
< .j_ " ^'i' "'
'1
1
1 IJ^a^^^^^^ijJ
r
272,920
GAMING MACHINE 272,922
Michael Wichinsky, and Leroy Gutkneht, both of 2607 S. High- CHESS SET
land, Las Vegas, Nev. 89109 Peter R. Rewald, 45575 Spring U. BIdg. #4 Apt. 207, Utica,
FUed Nov. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 208,048 Mich. 48087
Term of patent 14 years Filed Aug. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 177,520
Int. a. D21— 07 Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. D21-37 Int. Q. D21-07
U.S. a. D21— 52
464
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
272,923 272,926
BINGO EQUIPMENT CONTAINER FLYABLE TOY ROTOR FOR KITE
Ronald B. Qiiinn; Mark Hudson, and Sharon Belson, aU of 5450 Kenneth F. Guinn, 7513 Briley Dr., Forth Worth, Tex. 76118
Ethel Ave., Van Nuys, Calif. 91401 FUed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,316
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,364 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. Q. D21— 07
Into. D21— 07 U.S.a.Dil— 91
VS. a. D21— 55
272,927
272 924 PUSH TOY
TOY PERISCOPE Martin J. Dropik, Cheektowaga, N.Y., assignor to The Quaker
John T. Sahler, East Aurora, N.Y., assignor to The Quaker Oats °"** ^"^^ S*'"??' J!!:, . ^ ,„ ,„
Company, Chicago, III. ™«* ^°^- 12, 1981, Ser No. 320,705
Filed Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,743 ^*"" °' «*"**"* ** ^^^
U.S.a.D21-59 V U.S.a.D21-92
Int. a. D21— 07
272,925
SIMULATIVE TOY VEHICLE
Lawrence T. Jones, Playa Del Rey; Anson Sims, Granada Hills;
Ashley G. Howden; Mark S. Knighton, both of Los Angeles, 272,928
and L. C. James Kingsbury, Fountain Valley, all of Calif., TOY TRUCK
assignors to CaUfomia RAD, Culver Qty, Calif. Robert C. Fisher, East Aurora, N.Y., assignor to The Quaker
FUed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,302 Oats Company, Chicago, lU.
Term of patent 14 years Filed Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,627
Int a. D21— 07 Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. D21— 74
Int. a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21— 133
March 6, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
465
272,929 272,932
TOY TRUCK TOY ALLIGATOR
Steven E. Hiiko, East Aurora, N.Y., assignor to The Quaker John J. Sassak, 36855 Schoolcraft, Livonia, Mich. 48150
Oato Company, Chicago, III. Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,225
Filed Feb. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 346,183 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent ,14 years int Q. DZlr-Ol
Int. a. D21M77 U.S. a. D21— 157
U.S. a. D21— 139
• 272,930
TOY CLOCK
Kenneth J. Anderson, Barrington Hills, III., assignor to Milton
Bradley International, Inc., Springfield, Mass.
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,616
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21— 144
272,933
TOY ROBOT
KatSHJi Murakami, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Bandai, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 272,073
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 29, 1980, 55/55337
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21— 166
272,931
TOY WORM OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
William Burgi, 42 Male Rd., Qifton Park, N.Y. 12065, and
Thomas DePartout, 2273 Connell Ter., Baldwinsville, N.Y.
13027
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,863
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21— 148
I
1
lii.
ri n
466
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
272^34 272,937
SHUTTLECOCK BINDING FOR A SNOWSHOE '
Frank W. PoppleweU, Saffron Walden, England, assignor to Barney J. Klecker, 1144 S. Landmark Trail, Hopkins, Minn.
Dunlop Limited, London, England 55343
Filed Nov. 16, 1979, Ser. No. 95,075 Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,744
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 18, 1979, Term of patent 14 years
'S^'S^ lat, a. D21— 02
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 16, U.S. O. D21— 230
1994, has been disclaimed.
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 02
U.S. a. D21— 207
272,935
MARINE RESCUE AND RECREATIONAL BOARD
Charles D. Corey, 5 Jones La., Huntington, N.Y. 11743, and
Francesco A. Pia, 3 Boulder Brae La., Larchmont, N.Y. 10538
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 309,995
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D21— 02
U.S. a. D21— 228
272,938
PISTOL GRIP PART
Herman W. Mueschke, Jr., 1003 Columbia St., Houston, Tex.
77008
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,564
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D22— 0/
U.S. a. D22— 1
272,936
SNOWSHOE
Barney J. Klecker, 1144 S. Landmark Trail, Hopkins, Minn.
55343 272 939
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,743 pigji j^ HANDLE
Term of patent 14 years pguj j, R^^y^ 315 webster St., Ranshaw, Pa. 17866
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,330
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D22— 05
U.S. a. D22— 22
Int. a. D21— 02
U.S. a. D21— 228
March 6, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
. 467
272,940 272 942
T An . .u "'GH PRESSURE COVER SANITARY FITTING FOR A BIDET
Tord G. I. Johansson, HeimdaUgatan 35, S-261 62 GlumslSv, Wolfgang Fabian, Mannheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, Assignor
Sweden
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,149
aaims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 2, 1981, 1981-222
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 99
U.S. a. D23— 01
to American Standard, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 92,874, Nov. 9, 1979. This application May
14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,365
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 13.
1979, 79/3
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 07
U.S. a. D23— 23
272,943
ELECTRODE FOR BIOMEDICAL SIGNALS
Robert D. Stone, 23641 Cremona St., Laguna Hills, Calif. 92653,
and Kenneth L. Dufour, 440 Desoia Ter., Corona Del Mar,
Calif. 92625
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,808
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 02
U.S. a. D24— 29
272,941
DUAL LIQUID ICE PROBE
Daniel E. Bums, 1805 Onda, Camarillo, Calif. 93010
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,530
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 07
U.S. a. D23— 1
272,944
BACTERIOLOGICAL LOOP HOLDER
Vincent D. Coughlin, 108 High St., P.O. Box 428, Hacketts-
town, N.J. 07840
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,065
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 02
U.S. a. D24— ^1
468
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
272,945 272,947
DEVICE FOR THE STIMULATION OF VAGINAL BUILDING
MUSCLES Rex W. Beasley, III, 32 Springwood, Iryine, Calif. 92714
Peter Suhel; Bozo Kralj. both of Igubljana; Danijel Kner, Celje, Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,176
and Janez Povse, Recica ob Paid, all of Yugoslavia, assignors Term of patent 14 years
to Goreqje Tgo N.S0I.O, Veleqje, Veleqje, Yugoslavia int. Q. D25— Oi
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,188 U.S. Q. D25— 1
Claims priority, application Yugoslavia, Sep. 29, 1980, 361/80
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— Oi. 01
\3S. a. D24— 36
272,948
COMMUNION RAIL
LaVera R. Bull, 3804 - 6th St., East Moline, III. 61244
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 113,712, Jan. 21, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,393
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D25— 02
U.S. a. D25— 38
272,946
EAR PROTECTOR 272,949
Thomas A. Scanlon, Barrington, R.I., assignor to Tasco Corp., ONE PIECE DOME CEILING
East Providence, R.I. john £. Beaty, Sr., 107 Miami Gardens Rd., Hollywood, Ra.
FUed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,911 33023
Term of patent 14 years ^ FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,448
Int. a. D24— (M Xerm of patent 14 years
Inta. D25— 07
U.S. a. D25— 92
U.S. a. D24— 67
r*-:>.
March 6, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
469
272,950 272,953
COMBINED LIGHTER AND OGAR/CIGARETTE DISHWASHER
nLTER PERFORATOR Frank Taylor, 2000 W. Ocean Front, Newport Beach, Calif.
Rafael T. Cervantes, Malaga, Spain, assignor to The Westbury 92663
Foundation, Andorra and Sociedad de Dispositivos Reduc- Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,178
tores de Tabaco, S.A., Spain Term of patent 14 years
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,573 Int. Q. DIS— 05
Term of patent 14 years U.S. Q. D32— 2
Int.a. D27— OJ
U.S.a. D27— 38
272,951
COMBINED LIGHTER AND aGAR/CIGARETTE
HLTER PERFORATOR
Rafael T. Cervantes, Malaga, Spain, assignor to The Westbury
Foundation, Andorra and Sociedad de Dispositivos Reduc-
tores de Tabaco, S.A., Spain
^ Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,380
'^ Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D27— 05
U.S.a. D27— 38
272,954
MOBILE RACK FOR HOLDING WIRE
James Sparks, Fitchburg, Mass., assignor to Electronic Assem-
blies, Inc., N. Billerica, Mass.
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,876
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D06— 99
U.S. a. D34— 21
272,952
COSMETIC CONTAINER
Thomas F. HoUoway, Southbury, Conn., assignor to Risdon
Corporation, Naugatuck, Conn.
Filed Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 348,100
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— 05
U.S. a. D28— 89
470
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 6, 1984
272,955
MOBILE CRANE
David C. Dowrick, Cedar Rapids, and John M. Lanning, Solon,
both of Iowa, assignors to Harnischfeger Corporation, West
Milwaukee, Wis.
FUed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,755
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 05
U.S. a. D34— 34
272,957
FOUNDATION WALL OUTER MOISTURE BAR SHEET
OR BASEMENT INNER WALL OR FLOOR HUMIDITY
CONTROLLING LINING SHEET OR THE LIKE
Jon Bergsland, Charlotte Andersens vei 11 B, Oslo 3, Norway
FUed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,018
Claims priority, application Norway, Mar. 11, 1981, 61,801
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D25— 0/
U.S. a. D92— 31
272,956
LIFT TRUCK BODY
Robert L. Kirby; Warner K. Brown, both of Battle Creek, Mich.,
and Dennis M. Lanci, Renton, Wash., assignors to Clark
Equipment Company, Buchanan, Mich.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,438
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12—05
U.S. a. D34— 37
272,958
FONT OR THE LIKE
C. Esteban Valencia, 495 Mariposa Dr., Ventura, Calif. 93001
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,292
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D99— 2J
U.S. a. D99— 25
LIST OF PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 6TH DAY OF MARCH, 1984
Note.— Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
r
A. Ahlstrom Osakeyhtio: See—
Niskanen, Toivo; Sundman, Frey; and Tuomaala. Jorma, 4,435,122,
CI. 415-121.00B.
A. B. Dick Company: See—
McHenry, Max D., 4,434,715, CI. 101-76.000.
A. E. Staley Manufacturing Company: See —
Lehnhardt, William P.; Streaty, Charles E.. Jr.; Yackel, Walter C.
Jr.; Yang, Ho S.; and Tang. Daniel K., 4.435,438, CI. 426-656.000.
A.I.M. Services: Sec-
Frank, John, 4,435,795, CI. 368-16.000.
A.R.M.I.N.E.S.: See—
Trottier, Jean-Pierre; and Jeandin, Michel, 4,435,360, CI.
419-49.000.
A/S Haustnip Plastic: See—
Ingemann, Olc, 4,434,907, CI. 220-276.000.
A. W. Plume Limited: Sec-
Plume, Alan W., 4,435,819, CI. 373-119.000.
AS Tesi: See—
Silander, Torsten, 4,434,797, CI. 128-343.000.
Abadi, Khodabandeh. Descaling composition. 4,435,303, CI.
252-80.000.
Abbott Laboratories: See —
Lee. Cheuk M.; and Parks, James A., 4,435,422, CI. 424-285.000.
Abe, Kenichi: See—
Ishimaru, Kimio; and Abe, Kenichi, 4,435,629, CI. 219-10.55A.
Abe, Mitsuo: See —
Dohya, Akihiro; Hino, Yasuhiko; and Abe, Mitsuo. 4.434.544, CI.
29-578.000.
Abe, Shinya: See —
Sato, Akio; Nakajima, Kenji; Takahara, Yoshimasa; Kijima,
Shizumasa; Kuwana, Noriaki; Abe, Shinya; and Yamada, Kouri,
4,435.423. CI. 424-318.000.
Abelard Management Services Limited: See—
Wooler. Alan M.. 4.435.526. CI. 521-107.000.
Abemathy. Frederick H.. to President and Fellows of Harvard College.
Pattern recognition and orienUtion system. 4,435,837, CI. 382-41.000.
Abidin, Anwar: See —
Hartel, Gunter; Schiele, Werner; Schurfeld, Armin; Bianchi, Val-
erio; and Abidin, Anwar, 4,434,772, CI. 123-549.000.
Abrams. Gerald. Rolling pin with gauge wheels. 4,435,145, CI.
425-458.000.
Abramson. Allen P.; and Stiles, Theodore R.. to Challenger Circle F,
Inc. Terminal connector with safety device. 4,435.032. CI. 339-36.000.
Abramson, Edward A.; and Townsend, Peter K.. to Du Pont de Ne-
mours, E. I., and Company. Fiber optic connector with deformable
mounting post. 4,435,037, CI. 350-96.200.
AccuRay Corporation: Sec-
Williams, Paul, 4.434.649, CI. 73-37.700.
Ace Polymers, Inc.: See —
Roellchen. Thomas A.. 4.435,463, CI. 428-158.000.
Acorn Engineering Company: See —
Morris, Earl L ; and Hafner, V. Walter, 4,434,516, CI. 4-252.00R.
Adachi, Hiroyuki; and Hosono. Nagao. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Image recording apparatus with leakage preventing microwave
fixing device. 4,435,072, CI. 355-3.0FU.
Adams, Derek S., to Lucas Industries pic. Battery charging system.
4.435,675, CI. 320-22.000.
Adell, Robert, to U.S. Product Development Company. Decorative
moldings. 4,434,598, CI. 52-716.000.
Adolfsson, Morgan; Goransson, Sture; and Hok, Bertil, to ASEA
Aktiebolag. Integrated capacitive transducer. 4,434,665, CI.
73-724.000.
Advanced Technology Laboratories: See—
McAusland, Robert R.. 4.435.614, CI. 174-1 17.0PC.
Aeroquip Corporation: See—
Boland, John D.; and Kresky. Fred C, 4,434,970, CI. 254-108.000.
Agence Nationale de Valorisation de la Recherche (ANVAR): See—
Sorbier, Pierre, 4,435,347, CI. 264-118.000.
AGFA-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Payrhammer, Bemd; and Weinert. Volker. 4,435,075. CI.
355-35.000.
Agreda, Victor H.; and Partin, Lee R., to Eastman Kodak Company.
Reactive distillation process for the production of methyl aceute.
4.435,595, CI. 560-234.000.
AHI Operations Limited: See-
Millar, Thomas D., 4,434,744, CI. 119-14.020.
Ahslund, Christer; Andersson, Karl H. T.; and Bergh, Sven S., to Nyby
Uddeholffl Powder Aktiebolag. Loose sintering of spherical ferritic-
austenitic stainless steel powder and porous body. 4,435,483, CI.
428-566.000.
Aida Engineering, Ltd.: See—
Maeda, Nobuyoshi; Itakura, Hideo; and Yagi, Takashi, 4,434,646,
CI. 72-451.000.
Air ProducU &. Chemicals. Inc.: See—
Markham, Larry D.; Martin, Andrew C; Elton, Edward F.; Mag-
notta. Vincent L.; and Wallick, Scott A.. 4.435.249, CI.
162-24.000.
Aisen Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kobayashi, Hidcyuki, 4,434,619, CI. 60-547.100.
Ajioka, James S.; and Joe, Dick M., to Hughes Aircraft Company.
Rod-excited waveguide slot antenna. 4,435,715. CI. 343-771.000.
Akaku. Fumiyoshi: See-
Miyamoto, Yoshimi; Nakamura, Naotaka; Akaku. Fumiyoshi;
Koto. Katsumi; and Kosaka. Tsutomu, 4,435,692, CI.
338-214.000.
Akatsuka, Shin-ichiro, to Eisai Company, Limited. Elimination of
rancid odor in fermented milk products. 4,435,431, CI. 426-36.000.
Akimoto, Hiroshi: See—
Nishimura, Susumu; and Akimoto, Hiroshi, 4,435,570, CI.
544-280.000.
Akiyoshi, Yuji: See—
Tsuji, Hideakira; Yamamoto, Shinjiro; Nakagami, Kazuto; Honda,
Takeo; Fujii, Katsutoshi; Kobayashi, Takashi; Obata, Tokio;
Kojima. Mikio; and Akiyoshi. Yuji, 4.435.402, CI. 424-251.000.
Akkapeddi, Murali K.: See-
Lai, Yu-Chin; DeBona. Bruce T.; Prevorsek. Dusan C; and Ak-
kapeddi, Murali K., 4,435,561, CI. 528-193.000.
Akkerman, Neil H.: See-
Vazquez, Gonzalo; and Akkerman, Neil H., 4,434,847, CI.
166-117.500.
Aktiengesellschaft Adolf Saurer: See—
Comploi, Georg; Heimgartner, Roland; Loacker, Artur; Huber,
Kurt; and Wallimann, Hans, 4,434,728, CI. 112-84.000.
Al-Khazraji, Yousif A. H.: Sec-
Hemp, John; and Al-Khazraji, Yousif A. H., 4,434,666, Q.
73-861.120.
Alan Cobham Engineering Limited: See —
Cofpn, Christopher J., 4,435,626, CI. 200-8 1.90R.
Albers, Rolf; Aschenbruck, Emil; Neuhaus, Gunter; and Kotzur, Jo-
achim, to M.A.N. Maschinenfabrik Augsburg-Numberg Aktien-
gesellschaft. Shaft seal with magnetically controlled gap between
routing ring and surrounding non-routing ring. 4,434,987, CI.
277-80.000.
Albert Handtmann GmbH & Co.: See—
Suudenrausch, Georg; and Weerth, Hans-Ernst, 4,434,527, Q.
17-33.000.
Albini, Giovanni: See —
Ruscitti, Tomaso; Albini, Giovanni; Torretta. Roberto; and Incerti
Baldi. Andrea, 4,434.916, CI. 222-321.000.
Albright, Jay D.: See—
McEvoy, Francis J.; and Albright, Jay D., 4,435,329, CI. 260-
455.00R. ,
Alexander, David C: See —
Simons, Leslie H.; and Alexander, David C, 4,435,517, CI.
502-74.000.
Alexander, Michael C: Sec-
Hunt, Glenn E.; Alexander, Michael C; Lozano, Gerald L.; and
Manktelow, Gerald O., 4,435,703, CI. 340-723.000.
Alfano, Robert R.: Sec-
Schiller, Norman H.; and Alfano, Robert R., 4,435,727, d.
358-139.000.
Alford, Arthur L., to International Environmental Manufacturing Co.
Heat exchanger apparatus. 4,434,843, CI. 165-150.000.
Allen-Bradley Company: See—
Callan, John E.. 4.435.706. CI. 340-825.080.
Allen. Joseph C. to Heavy Oil Process, Inc. Method and apparatus for
recovering high viscosity oils. 4,434,849, CI. 166-252.000.
Alley, Patrick H. Event detection and indication system. 4,435,700, Q.
340-539.000.
Allied Corporation: See-
Holt, Harley R., 4.434,551, CI. 29-861.000.
Lai. Yu-Chin; DeBona, Bruce T.; Prevorsek, Dusan C; and Ak-
kapeddi, Murali K., 4,435,561, CI. 528-193.000.
Oxenrider, Bryce C; and Long, David J., 4,435,294, CI. 252-8.600.
Allis-Chalmers Corporation: See —
Nolt, James R., Jr.. 4,435.448. CI. 427-234.000.
Alloy Surfaces Company, Inc.: See—
Baldi, Alfonso L., 4,435,481, CI. 428-550.000.
Allred, David D.; Walter, Lee; Reyes, Jaime M.; and Ovshinsky, Stan-
ford R., to Energy Conversion Devices, Inc. Photo-assisted CVD.
4.435,445.0.427-54.100.
PI I
PI 2
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Almqvist, Christer; and Lindahl, Lars, to ReHeat AB. Method and a
device for embossing heat exchanger plates. 4,434,643, CI. 72-379.000.
Aloi, Anthony J.; Brooks, George D.; and Prince, Ronald E., to Gen-
eral Electric Company. Automated ammunition mijier. 4.434,700, CI.
89-34.000.
Aluminium de Grece: See —
Casdas, Spyridon. 4,435,255, CI. 204-67.000.
Aluminum Company of America: See —
Hildeman, Gregory J.; Kuli, John C, Jr.; and Vivola, Leo A.,
4,435,213, CI. 75-249.000.
ALZA Corporation: See —
Leeper, Harold M., 4,435,180, CI. 604-8%.000.
Am Fab, Inc.: See —
Solomon, Robert A.; and Dellinger, John J., 4,434,722, CI.
108-8.000.
Ambros, Rainer: See —
Schroeder, Heinrich J.; Ambros, Rainer; Paffrath, Gottfried; and
Brenner. Norbert, 4,435,184, CI. 23-300.000.
Amchem Products, Inc.: See —
Dollman, David Y., 4,435,223, CI. 134-3.000.
American Cyanamid Company: See —
Cesark, Frank F.; and Thomas, Daniel W., 4,435,002, CI.
282-27.500.
Epstein, Joseph W.; Osterberg, Arnold C; and Brabander, Herbert
J., 4,435,419, CI. 424-274.000.
Loffelman, Frank F.; and Brady, Thomas E., 4,435,555, CI.
526-261.000.
McEvoy, Francis J.; and Albright, Jay D., 4,435.329, CI. 260-
455.00R.
Schaub, Robert E.; Upeslacis, Janis; and Bernstein, Seymour,
4,435,387, CI. 424-180.000.
American Hoechst Corporation: See —
Walls, John E.; and Duyal, Tulay, 4,435,496, CI. 430-285.000.
American Hospital Supply Corporation: See —
Hudspith. Sydney, 4,434,823, CI. 141-329.000.
Redmond, Russell J.; and Hannula, Donald L.. 4,435,174. CI.
604-174.000.
American Optical Corporation: See —
Hennick, Robert P., 4.435,079, CI. 356-123.000.
American Screen Printing Equipment Company: See —
Bubley, Henry J.; Faulkner, Gene M.; laccino, Alex; an^ Rescio,
Giuseppe, 4,434,562. CI. 34-4.000.
American Standiard Inc.: See —
Milk, Larry E.; and Dove. Thomas D., 4,435,001, d. 282-1 1.50A.
Ames, Jack D.: See —
Clark, Frederic L.; Kaffenberger, Orville A., Jr.; Paranjpe, Suresh
C; Smith. David W.; and Ames, Jack D., 4.435,718. CI.
346-75.000.
AMF Incorporated: See —
Rose, John A.; and Dyer. Keith. 4.434.730, CI. 112-121.120.
AMP Incorporated: See —
Berry, Etonald A.; Fabian, David J.; and Lucius. John E.. 4.435.035.
CI. 339-99.00R.
Soes. Lucas; and Ten Berge, Eduardus F. A.. 4.435.038. CI.
350-96.210.
Ampex Corporation: See-
Chow, Yiu T.; and Gilligan. Thomas J., 4,435,754, CI. 364-200.000.
Ryan, Dennis M., 4,434.686, CI. 81-3.00R.
Ryan, Dennis M.. 4,434,954, CI. 242-189.000.
AMSTED Industries Incorporated: See —
Mulcahy, Harry W.; and Kaufhold, Horst T., 4,434,720. CI. 105-
I99.0CB.
Ancher, Jean-Francois R.: See —
Bourgery, Guy R.; Douzon, Colette A.; Ancher, Jean-Francois R.;
Lacour, Alain P.; Guerret, Patrick G.; Langlois. Michel; and
Dostcrt. Philippe L.. 4.435.415. CI. 424-272.000.
Andersson, Karl H. T.: See —
Ahslund, Christer; Andersson, Karl H. T.; and Bergh, Sven S.,
4,435,483, CI. 428-566.000.
Ando, Hideo; and Suzuki, Isao, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha. Method for manufacturing an information memory disk.
4,435,343, CI. 264-22.000.
Andrejasich, Raymond J.: See —
Perry, Ralph A.; and Andrejasich. Raymond J.. 4.434.650. CI.
73-61. lOR.
Andros. John H.: See —
Tsoukalas, Skevos N.; and Andrea, John H., 4,435,305. CI.
252-158.000.
Andrus. Paul G.: See —
Epstein, Harold M.; Schwerzel, Robert E.; and Andrus, Paul G.,
4,435,828. CI. 378-49.000.
Anne, Lenin: See —
Marston, Alan D.; and Anne. Lenin. 4.435.446. CI. 427-93.000.
Annegam. Marcellinus J. J. C: See —
Raven. Johannes G.; and Annegam. Marcellinus J. J. C. 4,435.728.
CI. 358-140.000.
Annen. Klaus; Laurent. Henry; Hofmeister, Helmut; and Wiecheri,
Rudolf, to Schering Aktiengesellschaft. Hydrocortisone derivatives,
the preparation and use thereof 4.435,390, CI. 424-243.000.
Anritsu Electric Company Limited: See—
Sasakawa, Tomio, 4,435,036. CI. 350-96.200.
Anson, Michael; Pinder, Andrew C; and Palmer, Alan R., to National
Research Development Corporation. Tympanometric apparatus.
4,434,800, CI. 128-665.000.
Antonazzi. Frank J., to Bendix Corporation. The. Pressure ratio mea-
surement system. 4.434.664. CI. 73-701.000.
Aoki. Hiroyuki: See —
Murakami. Shozo; Aoki, Hiroyuki; Matsuo, Saburo; Ikezaki. Eiji;
and Yamaura. Kenji. 4.434.976. CI. 266-268.000.
Aono. Masami. to Tokico Ltd. Deceleration detecting valve responsive
to failure in front brake circuit. 4.435.020. CI. 303-6.00C.
Aoyagi, Edward I., to Chevron Research Company. Fungicidal and
algicidal l-methyl-3,4-dihalo-5-substituted thio-, sulfoxyl-, or sulfo-
nyl-pyrazoles. 4,435,416, CI. 424-273.00P.
Aoyagi, Yoshiaki: See —
Matsumura, Shingo; Enomoto. Hiroshi; Aoyagi. Yoshiaki; and
Tanaka, Haruo, 4,435.397. CI. 424-250.000.
Apache Powder Company: See —
Ciaramitaro, David A.; and Moore, Jack M., 4,435,232, CI.
149-2.000.
Arai, Isao: See —
Wada. Minoru; Arai. Isao; Okubo, Takeshi; and Mori. Yoshiaki.
4,434,588, CI. 51-344.000.
Arakawa, Shun, to Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd. Process for producing
photographic paper. 4.435.248. CI. 162-12.000.
Araki. Kazuhiro: See —
Mateumoto. Akio; and Araki. Kazuhiro. 4.435.087. CI. 368-76.000.
Arbed S. A.: 5ee—
Junck. Guy. 4.435.643, CI. 250-358.100.
Arihara. Takumi. to Ikeda Bussan Co.. Ltd. Recliner-back tilting mech-
anism. 4.435.013. CI. 297-364.000.
Arikawa. TeUuro. to Nippon Air Brake Co.. Ltd. Skid control system.
4.435.768. CI. 364-426.000.
Arlt, Dieter, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Preparation of caronaldehyde
acid and derivatives thereof. 4.435.597. CI. 562-506.000.
Armco Inc.: See —
Cordrey, Richard N., 4.434.971. CI. 254-273.000.
Armour Food Company: See —
Theiler. RichaM F., 4,435,433, CI. 426-266.000.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: See— .
Forry, John S.; and Garrick, John R., 4,435,353, CI. 264-518.000.
Asada. Akihiro; Umemura. Kazuhiro; Saito. Tadashi; and Sampei.
Tohru. to Hitachi, Ltd. Speech synthesizer having speech time
stretch and compression functions. 4.435,832. CI. 381-34.000.
Asada, Eiji: See —
Futamura. Kenichiro; Asada, Eiji; and Fukuoka. Tattuhiko.
4.435,482, CI. 428-553.000.
Asahi Glass Company Ltd.: See—
Kamimori, Tadatoshi; Mizuhashi, Mamoru; and Nagai, Junichi,
4,435,048, CI. 350-357.000.
Asahi. Hiroji: See—
Kitagawa, Norihisa; and Asahi, Hiroji, 4,435.788. CI. 365-185.000.
Asahi Kogaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kobayashi. Takumi. 4.435.060. CI. 354-173.100.
Asami. Hajime: See —
Yoshino, Shigeo; Zenbutsu, Tadashi; Asami, Hajime; and trie,
Michiyuki, 4,435,215, CI. 106-84.000.
Aschenbruck, Emil: See —
Albers, Rolf; Aschenbruck, Emil; Neuhaus, Gunter; and Kotzur.
Joachim, 4,434,987, CI. 277-80.000.
ASEA Aktiebolag: See—
Adolfsson, Morgan; Goransson, Sture; and Hok. Bertil, 4,434.665.
CI. 73-724.000.
Stenkvist, Sven-Einar, 4,435.813. CI. 373-72.000.
Ashland Oil, Inc.: See —
Busch, Lloyd E.; Palmeter, Charles W.; Henderson, Gerald O.; and
Rice, William M., 4,435,279, CI. 208-111.000.
Zandona, Oliver J.; Hettinger, William P., Jr.; Kovach, Stephen
M.; and Beck, Hubert W.. 4.435.515. CI. 502-65.000.
Assirelli. Antonietta: See —
Petracchi. Ida; Assirelli. Antonietta; Pacini. Carlo; and Pacini,
Cesare, 4,434,612, CI. 57-331.000.
Astberg, Ake, to Svenska Rotor Maskiner Aktiebolag. Screw rotor
machine and rotor profile therefor. 4,435,139, CI. 418-201.000.
Astheimer, Robert W., to Barnes Engineering Company. Method and
apparatus for monitoring the burning efficiency of a furnace.
4,435,149, CI. 431-12.000.
Atari, Inc.: See —
Bamett. Ralph M.. 4.435.746. CI. 363-21.000.
Mayer, Steven T.; Miner. Jay G.; Neubauer. Douglas G.; and
Decuir. Joseph C. 4.435,779, CI. 364-900.000.
Atkinson, Alan W.; and Lancaster, Janet M., to TAN Materials Re-
search Limited. Gasket manufacture. 4,435,235, CI. 156-62.200.
Atkinson, Gordon E., to Vemay Laboratories, Inc. Bi-directional
pressure relief valve. 4,434.810. CI. 137-493.000.
Atkinson, Ronald E.: See —
Gerritsen. Jan; Atkinson, Ronald E.; and Martin. Anthony P..
4.435.317. CI. 252-547.000.
Atwood. Robert G.: See-
Skinner, James R.; and Atwood. Robert G.. 4.434.891. CI.
206-444.000.
Audeh. Costandi A., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Re-refining lubricating
oU in a bed of oU shale. 4.435,270, CI. 208-1 l.OOR.
August. Charles; and Myers, Harry J., to United States of America,
Energy. Permanent magnet flowmeter having improved output
terminal means. 4.434.667. CI. 73-861.120.
Aujia, Sharanjit S.; and Lee. John D.. to Northern Telecom Limited.
Coimectors with insulation-displacing terminals. 4.435.034. CI.
339-98.000.
Ausonia Farmaceutici s.r.l.: See —
De Vincentiis. Leonardo, 4.435.591. CI. 560-73.000.
March 6. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 3
Austin. Stephen R.: See—
Mosely. John F.; and Austin. Stephen R., 4.435.113. CI.
414-347.000.
Automated Optic, Inc.: See—
Spriggs, Robert G., 4.434.581. CI. 51-67.000.
AVA International Corporation: See-
Vazquez, Gonzalo; and Akkerman, Neil f H., 4.434.847. CI.
166-117.500.
Avco Corporation: See—
Bartle. Richard S.. 4.435.645. CI. 250-493.100.
A vera. William W.: See—
Nijhawan. Pramodh; and Avera. William W.. 4.435.197. CI. 55-
341. OOR.
Axelson. Inc.: See—
Vanderburg, Ralph W., 4,434,967, CI. 251-328.000.
Axford, Theodore G.: See-
Sheldon, William W.; and Axford. Theodore G., 4,434,572, CI.
43-6.500.
Aylward, David E., to Cities Service Co. Catalyst composition.
4,435,520, CI. 502-107.000.
Azeez, Syed A.; Leipelt, Paul A.; and Morello, Herbert, to Diebold,
Incorporated. Deposit information labeling mechanism for ATM
envelope depositing equipment. 4,435,243, CI. 156-361.000.
B. F. Goodrich Company, The: See —
Dinbergs, Komeiius, 4,435,524, CI. 521-65.000.
Fisher, John M., 4.434.870. CI. 182-48.000.
Baba. Yutaka: See-
Ban, Masatoshi; Miura, Kenji; Baba, Yutaka; Iwata. Noriyuki;
Fukui. Akira; Hori. Mikio; Fujimura, Hajime; and Suenaga,
Eiichi, 4,435,392, CI. 424-244.000.
Babcock & Wilcox Company, The: See-
Bean, Thomas R.; Stockmaster, Edward P.; and Whaley, George
S., 4,434,537, CI. 24-380.000.
Dziubakowski, Donald J.; Kaya, Azmi; Kcyes, Marion A.; MaUko,
Theodore N.; Moss, William H.; and Scheib, Thomas J..
4.435.650. CI. 307-32.000.
Matsko, Theodore N., 4,435.291. CI. 210-739.000.
Babineaux, Bernard J. Boxing device that fighu back. 4.434,980. CI.
272-78.000.
Bach, Hanswilhelm: See —
Comils, Boy; Bach, Hanswilhelm; Gartner, Roderich; and Gick.
. Wilhelm, 4,435,603, CI. 568-701.000.
Bachmann, William V. Internal combustion engine. 4,434,752, CI.
123-50.00B.
Backman, Henrik A. Method for fixing the ends of concrete columns in
concrete bases and device for carrying out said method. 4,434,600, CI.
52-741.000.
Bacroix, Marcel A., to Service de Propriete Indust. Centre de Recher-
ches de Pont a Nfousson. Device for the automatic filling of tx>ttles
and installation containing same. 4,434.821. CI. 141-44.000.
Badger Company, Inc., The: See —
Miseriis, Constantine D., 4,435,580, CI. 549-248.000.
Miserlis, Constantine D., 4,435,581, CI. 549-248.000.
Baehr, Donald O., to United Sutes Gypsum Company. Process for
rapid dewatering and drying of calcium sulfate hemihydrate.
4,435,183, CI. 23-293.00R.
Bahary, William S.; and Griffin, Rowland A., to Duracell Inc. Gelling
agent for alkaline cells. 4,435,488, CI. 429-212.000.
Bahnson Company, The: See —
Nijhawan, Pramodh; and Avera. William W.. 4.435,197, CI. 53-
34 l.OOR.
Bailey. Alfred J., to Massey-Ferguson Services N.V. Mower-condi-
tioner. 4,434,605, CI. 56-16.400.
Bailey, John M., to Caterpillar Tractor Co. Method and apparatus for
flattening corrugated heat exchanger plate. 4,434,637, CI. 72-17.000.
Baillie, Alan G., to Burroughs Corporation. Manufacture of wafer-scale
integrated circuite. 4,435,498. Ci. 430-318.000.
Baines, Kerry D.: See —
Berdat. Henry F.; and Baines. Kerry D.. 4,435,055. CI. 354-4.000.
Baker. Kenneth D.; and Scheider. Hans, to OMI International Corpora-
tion. Gold sulphite electroplating solutions and methods. 4.433,253,
CI. 204-43.00G.
Balcke-Duerr AG: See— '
Fickelscher. Kurt G.. 4.434,682. CI. 74-805.000.
Baldi, Alfonso L.. to Alloy Surfaces Company, Inc. Pyrophoric foil and
article, and pyrophoric technique. 4,435,481. CI. 428-550.000.
Baldwin. David L.: See —
Bowen, James H.; Baldwin, David L.; and Couch, Philip R.,
4,435,850, CI. 455-606.000.
Ball Corporation: See —
Nguyen, Tuan A., 4.434.641, CI. 72-354.000.
Ballato, Arthur: See—
Mariani. Elio; and Ballato. Arthur. 4.435.441. CI. 427-10.000.
Balzers Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Winkler. Otto. 4.434.622, CI. 62-6.000.
Ban, Masatoshi; Miura, Kenji; Baba, Yutaka; Iwata, Noriyuki; Fukui,
Akira; Hori, Mikio; Fujimura. Hajime; and Suenaga. Eiichi, to Sanwa
Kagaku Kenkyusho Co. Ltd. 2.5-Benzodiazocine derivatives and
salts thereof, as well as pharmaceutical agent comprising as effective
component at least one of the derivatives and salu. 4.433,392. CI.
424-244.000.
Bankston, Ben P.: See-
Kurtz. Georse W.; and Bankston, Ben P., 4,434,639, CI. 73-620.000.
Banos. Zoltan; Vereczkey. Endre; Kerey, Gyorgy; Rudolf, Peter;
Takacs, Istvan; Pelmeri. Jozaef; and Bosits. Gyula, to Gedeon Ve-
gyeszeti Gyar Rt. Process for the extraction of solid material from
solution by crystallization. 4,435,182, CI. 23-295.00R.
Baon, Carlos P. Poruble intrusion alarm. 4,435,701, CI. 340-546.000.
Barakaev, Khristofor P.: See—
Lytaev, Rem A.; Barakaev, Khristofor P.; TaratuU, Igor P.; and
Krainov, Sergei V., 4.435.748, CI. 363-54.000.
Barbeau, Dennis E., to Teledyne Industries, Inc. Engine fuel system.
4,434,621,0.60-734.000.
Barber, Flavil, Jr.; Karam, Emmanuel E ; Dunaway, Richard; and
Rogers, Ray L., to Union Carbide Corporation. Multilayer ceramic
capacitors. 4,435,738, CI. 361-321.000.
Barbesgaard, Pedcr O.; Jensen, Georg W.; and Holm, Poul, to Novo
Industri A/S. Detergent cellulase. 4,435,307, CI. 252-174.120.
Barbin, William W.: See-
Koch, Russell W.; and Barbin. William W.. 4.434.832. CI.
152-370.000.
Barbour, Kenneth L.; Geigle, William L.; and Haglid. Frank R., de-
ceased (by Haglid, Britt 1., executrix), to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I.,
and Company. Thiol mcthylation process-reaction, recycle and re-
generation of methyl bromide. 4,435,568, CI. 544-182.000.
Barch, Herbert W : See-
Martin, Emil; Barch. Herbert W.; and Greer, S. Thomas, 4.434,521,
CI. 15-230.110.
Barkemeyer, Wolfgang K. W., to Jastram-Werke GmbH & Co. KG.
Rudder for watcrcraft. 4,434,738, CI. 114-162.000.
Barlow, Gordon A., to Gordon Barlow Design. Tamper evident pack-
aging. 4,434,893, CI. 206-522.000.
Barnard, Robert L. Collapsible yard pan. 4,434,829, CI. 150-49.000.
Barnes Engineering Company: See —
Astheimer, Robert W., 4,435.149. CI. 431-12.000.
Barnes, John P.: See —
Melka. James P., Jr.; and Barnes. John P., 4.433.238. CI.
204-109.000.
Bamett, Ralph M.. to Atari. Inc. Inductive reactive voltage regulator.
4,435,746, CI. 363-21.000.
Barry Wright Corporation: See-
Peterson, Robert R., 4,435,097, CI. 384-221.000.
Barta nee Szalai, Gizella: See—
Lempert, Karoly; Harsanyi, Kalman; Doleschall, Gabor; Homyak,
Gyula; Nyitrai, Jozsef; Zauer. Karoly; Fetter, Jozsef; Simig,
Gyula; Visky nee Gombos, Zsuztanna; and Barta nee Szalai,
Oizella, 4,435,322, CI. 26O-239,00A.
Barth, Not-Duri; and Gaupp, Osvin, to BBC Brown, Boveri & Com-
pany, Limited. High tension circuit breaker. 4,435,627, CI. 200-
148.00R.
Barth, Vu W.: See—
Ilgner, Herwig; and Barth, Utz W., 4,435,849, CI. 455-601.000.
Bartholic, David B.; and Flanders. Robert L.. to Engelhard Corpora-
tion. Process for upgrading crude oil and residual fractions thereof by
vaporizing the charge in a falling curtain of contact particles.
4,435,272, CI. 208-127.000.
Bartle, Richard S., to Avco Corporation. Infrared radiation signature
generation system. 4,435,645. CI. 250-493.100.
Bascou, Jacques, to Regie Nationale des Usines Renault. Locking
device for pivoting window. 4,435,007, CI. 292-268.000.
BASF Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Hqppe, Peter P.; Schneider, Joachim U.; Schulz, Bemhard; and
Tiefenbacher, Hubert, 4,435,427, CI. 424-356.000.
Hom, Peter; Hesse, Anton; Heckmann, Walter; Lebert, Ulrich;
Guthmann, Alfred; and Marx, Matthias, 4,435,537, CI.
524-391.000.
Oppenlaender, Knut; Stork, Karl; Vogel, Hans-Henning; Schwartz,
Erich; and Jakob, Claus P., 4,435,298, CI. 252-34.000.
BASF Wyandotte Corporation: See—
Reichel, Curtu J., 4,435,592. CI. 560-91.000.
Basi, Jagtar S.; and Mendel, Eric, to International Business Machines
Corporation. Method for polishing titanium carbide. 4,435,247, CI.
156-636.000.
Basrai. Habil S., to Ford Motor Company. Tractor and implement
coupled thereto with hydraulic lift system including phasing valve.
4.434.857. CI. 172-328.000.
Battelle Development Corporation: See-
Epstein, Harold M.; Schwerzel. Robert E.; and Andrus, Paul G.,
4,415,828, Ci. 378-49.000.
Batzold, John S.; and Savas, Judith C, to Exxon Research and Engi-
neering Co. Gas percolation barrier for gas fed electrode. 4,435,267,
CI. 204-284.000.
Bauer, Wilfried; and Pleu, Janos, to Sandoz Ltd. N-Acyl-polypeptides
and processes for the production thereof 4.435.385, CI. 424-177.000.
Baum, Richard I.; and Sakalay, Frederick E., to Intemational Business
Machines Corporation. Hardware monitor for obtaining processor
software/hardware interrelationships. 4,435,759, CI. 364-200.000.
Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Bellamy, David; and Smith, Dale A., 4.434.822. CI. 141-98.000.
D'Amico, Richard; Fowles, Thomas A.; and Winchell, David A.,
4,434,904, CI. 215-232.000.
Russell, Pat. 4,434,963, CI. 231-7.000.
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Arlt. Dieter. 4.435.597. CI. 562-506.000.
Bier, Peter; and Binsack, Rudolf, 4,435,546, CI. 525-418.000.
Ebneth, Harold; Pitzky, Hans O.; and Oberkirch, Wolfgang,
4,435,465. CI. 428-195.000.
Emde. Herbert; Blank, Heinz U.; and Schnegg, Peter, 4,435.336, CI.
260-508.000.
Forster, Heinz; Eue, Ludwig; and Schmidt. Robert. 4.435,208, CI.
71-105.000.
1040 O.G.— 16
PI 4
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Hoguet, Robert G.; Kalz, Dietmar; Thomas, Thomas J.; Whetsell,
Henry T.; Wolff. Joachim; Nonn. Konrad; and Wolf. Karl-Heinz,
4,435.181. CI. 8-527.000.
Miessen. Ralf; Wilsing. Hans; and Schultze-Gebhardt, Fritz.
4.434.530. CI. 19-0.460.
Reiser. Wolf; Elbe. Hans-Ludwig; Buchel. Karl; Frohberger. Paul-
Ernst; and Brandes, Wilhelm, 4,435.411. CI. 424-269.000.
Reubke. Karl-Julius, 4,435,324, CI. 260-378.000.
Rolf, Meinhard; Schutze, Oetlef-Ingo; Neeff, Rutger; and Runz-
heimer, Hans-Volker, 4,435,589, CI. 560-48.000.
Schreckenberg, Manfred; Nouvertne, Werner; Medem, Harald-
Dhein, Rolf; and Muller, Peter R., 4,435,544, CI. 525-146.000.
Stohr, Frank-Michacl: Wild, Peter; and Nickel, Horst, 4,435.334.
CI. 260-501.120.
Thormer, Joachim; Bertram. Hans H.; Benn, Otto; and Humik.
Helmut. 4,435,532. CI. 524-92.000.
Bayerische Motoren Werke A.G.: See-
Brenner, Horst; and Hinsberg, Rene, 4,434,868, CI. 180-226.000.
Bazell, Seymour: See —
Goldberg. Edward M.; and Bazell, Seymour, 4,435.171. CI.
604-49.000.
BBC Brown, Boveri & Company, Limited: See—
Barth. Not-Duri; and Gaiipp. Osvin. 4.435,627, CI. 200-148.00R.
Buhler, Karl, 4,435,814, CI. 373-76.000.
Beach, Lynne B.: See—
Lewin, David F.; Haynes, Louie J.; and Beach, Lynne B.,
4,434,946, CI. 242-18.00G.
Beach-Thomas, Anthony W., to Hughes, John Rhys. Trolley for use in
transporting a boat. 4,434,992, CI. 280-47. 13B.
Beair, Charles E.: See—
Ou, Sam A.; and Beair, Charles E., 4,434.905, CI 22O-89.00A.
Bean, Thomas R.; Stockmaster, Edward F.; and Whaley, George S., to
Babcock & Wilcox Company, The. Integral latching mechanism for
module front plate. 4,434,537, CI. 24-380.000.
Beahnt, Beryl I. Puzzle-game utilizing movable discs to attain specified
arrangement. 4,434,982. CI. 273-153.0OS.
Bechthoid, Horst, to Buckau-Walther AG. Method of manufacturing
ammonium sulfate granules. 4,435,341, CI. 264-7.000.
Bechtolsheim, Andreas, to Sun Microsystems, Inc. Raster memory
manipulation apparatus. 4,435,792, CI. 365-230.000.
Beck. Hubert W.: See—
Zandona, Oliver J.; Hettinger, William P., Jr.; Kovach, Stephen
M.; and Beck. Hubert W.. 4,435.515, CI. 502-65.000.
Beck, Martin H.; Krishnakumar, Suppayan M.; and Harry, leuan L., to
Continental Group, Inc., The. Reciprocating clamp apparatus for
thermoforming plastic containers. 4,435,244, CI. 156-379.800.
Becker, Norbert; and Hildebrandt, Norbert. Connection for furniture
frame parts, particularly office furniture. 4,435,103, CI. 403-292.000.
Becker, Philip D., to Buell Industries, Inc. Fastener assembly. 4,435.1 12,
CI. 411-368.000.
Becton, Dickinson and Company: See —
Hill, Charles E., 4,435,458, CI. 428-91.000.
Bedard. James F.; Eichelberger, Charles W.; and Nati, Salvatore F., Jr.,
to General Electric Company. Programmable signal amplitude con-
trol circuits. 4,435,679, CI. 323-350.000.
Beecham Group Limited: See—
Greenway, Michael J., 4,435,414, CI. 424-271.000.
Stirling, Irene; and Clarke, Brian P., 4.435,565. CI. 542-416.000.
Beecham Group p.l.c: See —
Rogers. Norman H.; and Crimmin. Michael J.. 4,435.583, CI.
549-414.000.
Behrend, Volkmar; and Roder, Eckhard, to O & K Orenstein &. Koppel
Aktiengesellschaft. Method of controlling horizontal motion of a load
application point on an articulated crane. 4,435,118, CI. 414-744.00R.
Beisler, Alfons, to Beisler Gesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung.
Arrangement for sewing separate successive seams along different
directions in a fabric material. 4.434,731, CI. 112-121.140.
Beisler Gesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung: See—
Beisler, Alfons, 4,434,731, CI. 112-121.140.
Belanger, Patrice C; Williams, Haydn W. R.; and Rokach, Joshua, to
Merck & Co., Inc. Resolution of substituted dibenzo[b,f]thiepin-3-car-
boxylic acid-5-oxides with ephedrine. 4,435,579, CI. 549-12.000.
Belcher, Samuel L.: See—
Wiatt, James G.; Calvert, James W.; Belcher, Samuel L.; and
Smith, Roger D., 4,435.146, CI. 425-534.000.
Bell, Alexander G.: See—
Ho, Cecil C; Sharpe, Claude A.; Butcher, Bruce A.; and Bell,
Alexander G., 4,435,711, CI. 343-389.000.
Bell, Anthony J.; and Beyersdorff, Leland E., to Goodyear Tire &
Rubber Company, The. Emulsion polymerization process using
monobasic alkali phosphate. 4,435,554, CI. 526-229.000.
Bell, Curtis H.: See—
Olsen, Roy W.; and Bell, Curtis H., 4.435,352, CI. 264-504.000.
Bell Helmets Inc.: See—
Sundahl, James G.; and Broersma, Lester V., 4,434,514, CI.
2-425.000.
Bell Industries, Inc.: See—
Kaye, Peter D., 4,434,683, CI. 76-37.000.
Nixon, Keith L., 4,434,684, CI. 76-37.000.
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated: See-
Cohen, Leonard G.; and Mammel, Wanda L., 4,435,040, CI.
350-96.330.
Rubin, Steven M., 4,435,836, CI. 382-27.000.
Tsang, Won-Tien; and van der Ziel, Jan P., 4,435,809, CI.
372-49.000.
Bellamy, David; and Smith, Dale A., to Baxter Travenol Laboratories,
Inc. System for the sterile mixing of materials. 4,434,822, CI.
141-98.000.
Bellay, Jeffrey D.; Thaden, Robert C; Hayn. John W.; and McDon-
ough. Kevin C. to Texas Instruments Incorporated. Multiprogramm-
able input/output circuitry. 4.435,763. CI. 364-200.000.
Beloate. Mickey R.; Erb. Harley E.; and Shelton. Charles W., to
Plough, Inc. Tamper-resistant reclosable package. 4,434,896, CI.
206-621.000.
Beloit Corporation: See—
Karr, Gerald W.. 4.434.949. CI. 242-66.000.
Belz. Herman M.; and Stieber. Harry C. to Union Carbide Corporation.
Method and article for protecting tapered threaded electrode joints
by use of an alignment mechanism. 4.435.816. CI. 373-91.000.
Bendell. Sidney L.; and Levine. Peter A., to RCA Corporation. Low
noise CCD output. 4.435.730, CI. 358-213.000.
Bendix Corporation, The: See—
Antonazzi, Frank J., 4,434,664, CI. 73-701.000.
Brush, Robert W., Sr.; and Piscitelli, R. Amelia, 4,434,552, CI.
29-876.000.
Kyriakos, Constantinos S., 4,435,708, CI. J43-12.00A.
Martin, Gordon W.; and Strohl, John, 4,435,268, CI. 204-408 000
Petenon, Arnold D., 4,435,659, CI. 310-68.00R.
Benito, Calvin G. Bird environmental inspection trap. 4,434,574, CI.
43-63.000.
Benn, Otto: See—
Thormer, Joachim; Bertram, Hans H.; Benn, Otto; and Humik,
Helmut, 4,435,532, CI. 524-92.000.
Berdat, Henry F.; and Baines, Kerry D., to Gerber Scientific Instru-
ment Company, The. Multiple frequency ranging apparatus for focus
control. 4,435,055, CI. 354-4.000.
Beres-Deak, Laszlo: See—
Mika, Gyorgy; Csako. Denes; Paczuk. Laszlo; Beres-Deak, Laszlo;
and Novotny, Laszlo, 4,435,129, CI. 417-151.000.
Berger Industries, Inc.: See—
Berger, Sidney; Buda, Salvatore; and Weintraub, Burton, 4,435,005,
CI. 285-31.000. <•
Berger, Konrad: See—
Krauss, Theo; Herrmann, Ludwig; and Berger, Konrad, 4,434,566,
CI. 38-8.000.
Berger, Sidney; Buda, Salvatore; and Weintraub, Burton, to Berger
Industries, Inc. Joint for conduit with single threaded end. 4,435,005.
CI. 285-31.000.
Bergh, Sven S.: See—
Ahslund. Christer; Andersson, Karl H. T.; and Bergh. Sven S..
4.435.483, CI. 428-566.000.
Bergmann, Roland: See—
Diehl, Manfred; and Bergmann, Roland, 4,435,216, CI. 106-97.000.
Bergstrom, Carl D. Sailboat race board game apparatus. 4,434,984. CI.
273-246.000.
Bemhard Beumer Maschinenfabrik KG: See—
Bcumer, Bemhard. 4.434.603, CI. 53-557.000.
Bernstein, Seymour: See —
Schaub, Robert E.; Upeslacis, Janis; and Bemstein, Seymour,
4,435,387, CI. 424-180.000.
Berry, Buford E. Apertured display board and hook. 4,434,960, CI.
248-220.400.
Berry, Donald A.; Fabian, David J.; and Lucius, John E., to AMP
Incorporated. Mass terminatable single row connector assembly.
4,435.035, CI. 339-99.0OR.
Berry. Robert L.: See —
Shideler, Jay A.; and Berry, Robert L., 4,435,225, CI. 148-1.500.
Berthold, Fritz; and Kubisiak, Helmut, to Laboratorium Prof Dr.
Rudolf Berthold. Assays, including immunoassays with FITC label
activated by sodium hypochlorite. 4,435,509, CI. 436-518.000.
Bertin, Patrice, to Valeo. Societe Anonyme. Power-assisted steering
device for a vehicle. 4.434,706. CI. 91-375.0OA.
Bertolacini. Ralph J.; and Forsythe. William L.. Jr.. to Standard Oil
Company. (Indiana). Catalytic cracking using a cracking catalyst in
admixture with particles of platinum group metal or rhenium on a
substrate regenerated to up to about 0.1% coke. 4,435,282, CI.
208-113.000.
Bertram, Hans H.: See —
Thormer, Joachim; Bertram, Hans H.; Benn, Otto; and Humik,
Helmut, 4,435,532, CI. 524-92.000.
Best, Lance E.: See —
Dunphy, Gerald F.; and Best, Lance E., 4,434,634, CI. 70-89.000.
Beswick, David G. E., to Kenneth E. Beswick Limited. Method of
manufacturing plug-in electrical fuses. 4,434,548, CI. 29-623.000.
Bethlehem Steel Corporation: See —
Krause, Richard H.; Pfeiffer, Thomas J.; and Horvath, Vincent V.,
4,435,093, CI. 374-129.000.
Beumer, Bemhard, to Bemhard Beumer Maschinenfabrik KG. Plant for
producing palletless stacks of piece goods, particularly sacks around
which is shrunk a sheet. 4,434,603, CI. 53-557.000.
Bey, Philippe: See —
Sjoerdsma, Albert; Bey, Philippe; Jung, Michel; Gerhart, Fritz; and
Schirlin, Daniel, 4,435.425. CI. 424-325.000.
Beyer. Horst; Lonne. Klaus; and Majewski, Klaus-Peter, to Goetze AG.
Sealing gasket. 4,434,989, CI. 277-235.0OB.
Beyersdorff, Leland E.: See-
Bell, Anthony J.; and Beyersdorff, Leland E.. 4,435,554, Q.
526-229.000.
Bhalla, Ranbir S.: See—
Plagge, Vernon L.; and Bhalla. Ranbir S., 4,433,669, a.
311^34.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PIS
Bianchi. Giuseppe; and Sburlino. Roberto, to Industrie 2Unussi S.p A
Washing machine with electrochemical cell. 4,434,629, CI. 68-
I3.uOA.
Bianchi, Valerio: See—
Hartel, Guntcr; Schiele, Wemer; Schurfeld, Armin; Bianchi, Val-
eno; and Abidin, Anwar, 4,434,772, CI. 123-549 000
Bianco, Frank J.: See—
Jiminez. Oscar; and Bianco, Frank J., 4,434,801, CI. 128-689 000
Bier, Peter; and Binsack. Rudolf, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Polyes-
52"-418°000°*'"°"* **'''^'' crystallize rapidly. 4,435.546. CI.
Bing, David H.: See—
Pabst. Patrea L.; and Bing, David H., 4,435,318, CI. 260-1 12.00B
Binsack. Rudolf: See —
Bier. Peter; and Binsack. Rudolf. 4.435.546, CI. 525-418.000
Biotechnology, Inc.: See—
Jiminez, Oscar; and Bianco, Frank J., 4,434,801, CI. 128-689.000
Biotest-Serum-Institut GmbH: See-
Walker, Wolfram H., 4,435,179, CI. 604-410.000.
Bird, Elizabeth A. Strap. 4,434,604, CI. 54-23.000.
Birkle. Siegfried; Oehring, Johann; and Stoger, Klaus, to Siemens
^ktiengesellschaft Device for electro-deposition of aluminum.
Bishop, Robert J. Roury drum mixing device. 4,435,082, CI. 366-47 000
Bisler, Kenneth E.: See—
McAteer, John E.; Bisler. Kenneth E.; Ptacnik. Jerry; and Kish.
Richard D., 4,434,596, CI. 52-243.100.
Black Clawson Co., The: See—
Markham, Larry D.; Martin, Andrew C; Elton, Edward F.; Mag-
notu, Vincent L.; and Wallick, Scott A., 4,435,249, cfl.
162-24.000.
Black & Decker Inc.: See—
McDougall, Robert J., 4,434,587, CI. 51-170.0MT.
Black Richard W.; Kirayoglu, Erol M.; Uiter, Harold E.; and Smith,
Richard C, to Holmberg Electronics Corporation. Connector block
with snap latch. 4,435,031, CI. 339-17.00C.
Black, William R. Police gripper. 4,435,008, CI. 294-25.000.
Blackbum, Thomas P.; Cox, Barry; Guildford, Allen J.; Le Count,
David J.; Pearce, Robert J.; and Thomber. Craig W.. to Imperial
Chemical Industries PLC. Quinoline derivatives which are 5-hydrox-
ytrypumine antagonists. 4,435,405, CI. 424-258.000.
Blackshaw, Andrew L.: See—
Sanbom, David M.; and Blackshaw, Andrew L., 4,434,539, CI.
Blank. Heinz U.: See—
Emde. Herbert; Blank. Heinz U.; and Schncgg, Peter. 4.435,336, CI.
260-508.000.
Blaupunkt-Werke GmbH: See—
tilers, Norbert; and Bragas, Peter, 4,435,843, CI. 455-205.000
Timm, Horst; and Krugcr, H. Eckard, 4,435,845, CI. 455-228.000.
Wilke, Heinz; and Fonck, Klaus-Uwe, 4,434,550, CI. 29-837.000.
Blazek, Vladislav: See—
Maly, Zdenek; and Blazek, Vladislav, 4,435,080, CI. 356-426.000.
Blechinger, Chester J., to Ford Motor Company Mass air flow sensor
4,434,656, CI. 73-204.000.
Bleuel, Felix; and Bosshard, Christian, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation.
Flange having an outer and an inner circumferential sealing face and
apparatus, comprising such Hangc, for producing enveloping casts
about elongated bodies. 4,434,962, CI. 249-65.000.
Bliss, Robert H., to Bliss Steel Products Corp. Window frame or door
frame section. 4,434,594, CI. 52-209.000.
Bliss Steel Products Corp.: See-
Bliss, Robert H., 4,434,594, CI. 52-209.000.
Blomqvist, Thomas H.; and Lidstom, Thorbjom G. Firewood cleaving
apparatus. 4,434,825, CI. 144-193.00A.
Boden, Richard M.; Hanna, Marie R.; and Tyszkiewicz, Theodore J., to
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Use in augmenting or en-
hancing the aroma or taste of foodstuff or chewing gum with the
methyl carbonate of l-hydroxymethyl-2-heptanoyr cyclopropane.
4,435,428, CI. 426-3.000.
Boden, Richard M.: See—
Licciardello, Michael; and Boden, Richard M., 4,435,331, CI.
Bodine, Albert G. Mass (inductive) reactance vibratory mill or crusher
employing mechanical drive force. 4,434,944, CI. 241-258.000.
Bodnar, Janos: See—
Lugosi, Gyorgy; Simay, Antal; Bodnar, Janos; Simandi, Laszlo;
and Somfai, Eva, 4,435,567, CI. 544-165.000.
Boeckmann, Eduard F. B.: See —
Grantland, Gary; and Boeckmann, Eduard F. B., 4,435,622. CI
179-81.00R.
Boeing Company. The: See-
Rudolph, Peter K. C, 4,434,959, CI. 244-215.000.
Boesel, Walter F., to Garrett Corporation, The. Magnetic interpole
apparatus for improving commuution characteristics of a dynamo-
electric machine. 4,435,664, CI. 310-186.000.
Boise Cascade Corporation: See—
Hoelzinger, Walther J., 4,435,237, CI. 156-157.000.
Boland, John D.; and Kresky, Fred C, to Aeroquip Corporation.
Adjusuble load bracing bar. 4,434,970, CI. 254-108.000.
Boldt, Allyn L., to Exxon Nuclear Company, Inc. Continuous counter-
current liquid-solids contactor. 4,435,363, CI. 422-270.000.
Bolner, Thomas E., to Thiokol Corporation. Intemally actuated speri-
cal bearing. 4,435,023, CI. 308-2.00R.
Bolt, Anthony J. N.; and Chard, Brian C, to Imperial Group Limited.
Smoking article. 4,434,804, CI. 131-309.000.
Bolton, Theodore S.; Leech, Brad G.; and Lang, Richard D., to Carrier
08 25°nA^" °""' mounting means and method. 4,434,710, CI.
Bonansea, Hubert: See—
^'.J'^UJ-oo^'^'l*'; ^n*n»"- Hubert; and Constant, Bernard.
4,434.888. CI. 198-466.000.
Bonaparte. Ennio; and Mosca. Virgilio. to Italtel SocieU Italiana
lelecomunicazioni S.p.A. Switching network interfacing telephone-
?5o , ,"8^ equipment with two-subscriber party line. 4,435,619, CI.
I '9-I7.00R.
^°"^ioli, Edi. Guard made up of sectional uniu for cardan thafti.
Borgato. Augusto, toV.A.M.A. di Sandra Borgato & C, S.n.c. Manu-
»"y ""^cc'ncally commanded automatic hooklock. 4,434,635, CI.
Bosch & Picrburg System OHG: See—
Hartel, Gunter; Schiele. Wemer; Schurfeld, Annin; Bianchi, Val-
eno; and Abidm, Anwar, 4,434,772, CI. 123-549.000.
BosiU, Gyula: See—
Banos. Zoltan; Vereczkey, Endre; Kerey, Gyorgy; Hudolf, Peter;
5V7M*ftnD^'"' '^*''"'^"' •'°"«'": "«1 Bo"»». Gyul*. 4,435.182. CI.
Bosshard, Christian: See—
Bleuel, Felix; and Bosshard, Christian, 4,434,962, CI. 249-65.000.
Boudault, Robert; and Pouzoullic, Gerard, to U.S. Philips Corporation
Frequency demodulator employing a circuit having a delay varying
with the received frequency. 4,435,682, CI. 329-107 000
Bourgeois, Dale M., to Bourgeois. Wayne; and Hebert. URoy, part
',"Jr«i z^"'^'' °'' ^*" '''°* °"' conlro' valve. 4.434,853. CI.
Bourgeois, Wayne: See—
Bourgeois, Dale M., 4,434,853, CI. 166-285.000.
Bourgery, Guy R.; Douzon, Colette A.; Ancher, Jean-FrancoU R.
Ucour, Alain P.; Guerret, Patrick G.; Langlois, Michel; and Dostert.
FhUippe L., to Delalande S.A. N-Aryl oxazolidinones. oxazolidineth-
424^72 ono'"*'""""' Py''°'''^'"" *"'^ thiazolidinones. 4,435.415, CI.
Bovenkerk, Harold P., to General Electric Company. Method of pre-
panng rough textured meul coated abrasives and product resultina
therefrom. 4,435,189. CI. 51-295.000. -v* rciuuuig
Bowden, Charles J., to General Signal Corporation. Control valve for
doublc-actina piston and valve assemblies. 4,434,708. CI 91-436 000
Bowen. James H.; Baldwin. David L.; and Couch. Philip R.. to Interna-
tional Telephone and Telegraph Corporation. Secure fiber optic dau
transmission system. 4.435.850. CI. 455-606.000.
^^*"' Robert F; Freedman. George; Teich. Wesley W.; Martel
pomas J.; and Eves, E. Eugene, II, to Raytheon Company. Seed
heating microwave appliance. 4,435,628, CI. 219.10.55M.
Bowles, Corwin Screwdriver. 4,434,688, CI. 81-451 000
Brabander, Herbert J.: See—
^rM35'yi'9!'a. 4?4!27a.^™°'' "^ ' ""' ^™'^'"' "^^'^^
Brady, Thomas E.: See—
KIl'T^Ti.^'"*"'' ^' ""* ^'■"'y- Thomas E.. 4,435,555, CI.
526-261.000.
Braestrup, Claus T.; Christensen, Jogen A.; Engelstoft, Mogens; Neef,
Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen, Ralph; Huth, Andreas; Rahu,
Dieter; Seidelmann, Dieter; Kehr, Wolfgang; and Palenschat, Dieter,
to Schenng AktiengesellschaA. Pharmacologically active 3-sub-
stituted beU-carboline». 4,435,403, CI. 424-256.000.
Bragas, Peter: See—
Eilers, Norbert; and Bragas, Peter, 4,435,843, CI. 455-205.000,
Braggins, John C, Jr. Heat recovery system for clothes dryers and the
like. 4,434,564, CI. 34-86.000.
Brandenstein, Manfred: See—
Olschewski, Armin; Walter. Lothar; Brandenstein, Manfred: and
Muller, Leo, 4,434,882, CI. 192-98.000.
Walter, Lothar; Brandenstein, Manfred; and Olschewski, Armin,
Brandes, wilhel'm: See-
Reiser, Wolf; Elbe, Hans-Ludwig; Buchel, Karl; Frohberger, Paul-
Emst; and Brandes, WUhelm, 4,435.411, CI. 424-269.()(X).
Brandon, Maurits J.: See—
Terink. Johannes L.; and Brandon, Mauritt J., 4,435,436, CI.
426-63 1 .QOO.
Brandsen, Donald H.; and Hoemer, Griffith L Flexibly-supported,
pivouble load carrier for vehicles. 4,434,922, CI. 224-314.000
Brandstetter, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Scharf. Bemhard; Lin-
denschmidt, Gerhard; Schwaab, Josef; and Jung, Rudolf H . to Dr
Beck &. Co. AG. Antisutic thermoplastic molding masses contaimns
styrene-acrylonitrile grafted polyether. 4,435,541, CI. 525-64.000
Brannegan, Daniel P.: See—
Brennan, Thomas M.; Brannegan, Daniel P.; Weeks, Paul D • and
Kuhla, Donald E.. 4,435.584rCl. 549-415.000.
Brannen, Cecil G.; and Hunt, Mack W., to Standard Oil Company,
(Indiana). Preparation of overbased magnesium phenates. 4,435loi,
CI. 252-33.200.
Brantingham, George L.; and Someshwar, Ashok H., to Texas Initni-
ments Incorporated. Dau processing system having interlinked slow
and fast memory means. 4,435,775, CI. 364-900.000.
Bi^ey, Leslie; Wilson, John H.; and Demircan, Niyazi, to Northern
Engineering Industries, Pic. Fluidized-bed combustion apparatus
4,454,723, CI. 1 10-245.000. *^
Bredow, Walter, to C. Behrens AG. Arrangement for producing drawn
formations on workpieces, particularly in a cuttmg and Dressing
machine. 4.434.639, Cl. 72-344!000. » P B
PI 6
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Breed, Dirk J.; Van Bakel, Benurdus A. H.; Voemums, Antonius B.;
and Robertson. John M., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Device for
propagating magnetic domains. 4,43S,484, CI. 428^3.000.
Brennan, John J.: See —
Prewo, Karl M.; and Brennan, John J., 4,435,455, Q. 428-36.000.
Brennan, Thomas M.; Brannegan, Daniel P.; Weeks, Paul D.; and
Kuhla, Donald E., to Pfizer Inc. Preparation of gamma-pyrones.
4,435.584, CI. 549-415.000.
Brenner, Horst; and Hinsberg, Rene, to Bayerische Motoren Werke
A.G. Rear wheel control unit for two-wheeled vehicles with univer-
sal drive mechanism. 4,434,868, CI. 180-226.000.
Brenner, Norbert: See—
Schroeder, Heinrich J.; Ambros, Rainer; PafTrath, Gottfried; and
Brenner, Norbert. 4,435,184, CI. 23-300.000.
Breslau, Barry R., to Romicon, Inc. Series ultrafiltration with pressur-
ized permeate. 4,435,289, CI. 210-637.000.
Brigham, Gerald A.: See —
Marshall, William J., Jr.; and Brigham, Gerald A., 4,435,794, CI.
367-155.000.
Bristol Composite Materials Engineering Limited: See—
McNulty, John P.. 4,435,242, CI. 156-264.000.
Bristol-Myers Company: See —
Shin, Chung T.; and Geria, Navin, 4,435,382, CI. 424-66.000.
British Petroleum Company Limited, The: See-
Brooks, Christopher P.; Dodson, Stanley C; and Newman, Robert
H., 4,435,296, CI. 252-28.000.
Brix, Joachim; and Weiss, Friedrich, to Jastram- Werke GmbH KG. Fin
rudder for ships. 4,434,739, CI. 114-162.000.
Broersma. Lester V.: See—
Sundahl, James G.; and Broersma. Lester V., 4,434,514, CI.
2-425.000.
Brohltal-Deumag AG fur feuerfeste Erzeugnisse: See —
Buhler, Hans-Eugen; and Kalfa, Horst, 4,435,157, CI. 432-30.000.
Brooks. Christopher P.; Dodson, Stanley C; and Newman, Robert H.,
to British Petroleum Company Limited, The. Lubricating erease.
4,435,296, CI. 252-28.000.
Brooks, George D.i See—
Aloi. Anthony J.; Brooks, George D.; and Prince, Ronald E..
4,434,700, CI. 89-34.000.
Brower, Boyd G., to GTE Products Corporation. Subminiature array
with normally closed and normally open switches. 4,435,156, CI.
431-359.000.
Brugman, Martin; and Van Schaik, Herman, to S. C. Johnson &. Sons,
Inc. Overcap orienting apparatus. 4,434,885, CI. 198-388.000.
Bruns, Klaus: See —
Conrad, Jens; Schaper, Ulf-Armin; and Bruns, Klaus. 4,435,315, CI.
252-522.00R.
Bnisewitz, Gerhard: See—
Sieck, Reinhard; and Bnisewitz, Gerhard, 4,434,890. Q.
206-443.000.
Brush, Robert W., Sr.; and Piscitclli, R. Amelia, to Bendix Corporation,
The. Method of making a pin type electrical connector contact.
4,434,552, CI. 29-876.000.
BS&B Safety Systems. Inc.: See— *
Ou. Sam A.; and Beair, Charles E., 4,434,905. CI. 22O-89.0OA.
Bubley, Henry J.; Faulkner, Gene M.; laccinp, Alex; and Rescio, Gi-
useppe, to American Screen Printing Equipment Company. Curing
apparatus and method. 4,434,562, CI. 34-4.000.
Buchel, Karl: See-
Reiser, Wolf; Elbe, Hans-Ludwig; Buchel, Karl; Frohberger, Paul-
Ernst; and Brandes, Wilhelm, 4,435,411, CI. 424-269.000.
Buchschmid, Emil; Burkel, Rainer; Danamps, Jean; Frenznick, Anton;
and Stradtmann, Gunther, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Pneumatically
operable switch unit for monitoring tire pressure. 4,435,625, CI.
200-61.220. ,>
Buck Chemisch-Technische Werke GmbH ft Co.: See—
Rayer. Peter; Krone, Hartmut; SchiessI, Alois; Steinicke, Wolf-
gang; and Trede, Wolfgang, 4,435,233, CI. 149-44.000.
Buckau-Walther AG: See—
Bechthold, Horst, 4,435,341, CI. 264-7.000.
Buckeye Molding Company: See-
French, William L., 4,434,908, CI. 220-276.000.
Buda, Salvatore: See—
Berger, Sidney; Buda, Salvatore; and Weintraub. Burton, 4,435,005,
CI. 285-31.000.
Budd Company, The: See—
Mekosh, George, Jr., 4,434,719, CI. 105-168.000.
Buell Industries, Inc.: See-
Becker, Philip D., 4,435,112, CI. 411-368.000.
Buhler, Hans-Eugen; and Kalfa, Horst, to Brohltal-Deumag AG fur
feuerfeste Erzeugnisse. Heat exchanger, especially blast preheater (or
cowper) for blast furnaces, process for the temperature regulation of
gas and blast for the blast furnace, as well as use of the orocess.
4;435,157, CI. 432-30.000. *^
Buhler, Karl, to BBC Brown, Boveri ft Company, Limited. Liquid-
cooled vessel walls for arc furnaces. 4.435,814, Q. 373-76.000.
Burak, Mark G. Anti-skid device for a cane, crutch, or the like.
4,434,808, CI. 135-80.000.
Burba, Christian; Lucas, Hermann-Josef; and Neffgen, Bemd, to Scher-
ing AG. Hardenable urethane-epoxy resin mixtures. 4,435,558, CI.
528-45.000.
Burgess, Anthony J.; and Gardner, David L.. to Imperial Chemical
Industries PLC. Vinylidene chloride co-polymer compositions.
4,435,478, Q. 428-463.000.
Burgess, Warren C, Jr. Automatically adjustable workpiece guide and
feed mechanism. 4,434,583. CI. 51-103.0TF.
Burkel, Rainer: See—
Buchschmid, Emil; Burkel, Rainer; Danamps, Jean; Frenznick,
Anton; and Stradtmann, Gunther, 4,435,625, CI. 200-61.220.
Burroughs Corporation: See—
Baillie, Alan G., 4,435,498, CI. 430-318.000.
Hsieh, Der-Chang; and LaBudde, Edward V., 4,435,797, CI.
369-32.000.
Murray, Lance R.; and Wu, Ta-Ming, 4,435,658, CI. 307-530.000.
Potash, Hanan, 4,435,756, CI. 364-200.000.
Burroughs Wellcome Co.: See-
Stem, Warren C, 4,435,449, CI. 424-330.000.
Burrows. Vernon D.; Fulcher, Royce G.; and Paton, David, to Cana-
dian Patents and Development Limited. Processing aqueous treated
cereals. 4,435,429, CI. 426-18.000.
Busch, Helmut: See—
Kupper, Heinz; and Busch, Helmut, 4,434,940, Q. 239-397.500.
Busch, Lloyd E.; Palmeter, Charles W.; Henderson, Gerald O.; and
Rice, William M., to Ashland Oil, Inc. Method and apparatus for
converting oil feeds. 4,435,279, CI. 208-111.000.
Buss, Waldeen C; and Hughes, Thomas R., to Chevron Research
Company. Method of dehydrocyclizing alkanes. 4,435,283, CI.
208-138.000.
Bussey, Patrick D. Router guide. 4,434,824, CI. 144-134.00D.
Butcher, Bruce A.: See—
Ho, Cecil C; Sharpe, CUude A.; Butcher, Bruce A.; and Bell.
Alexander G., 4,435,711, CI. 343-389.000.
Butler, John R.; Shock, Gerald D.; and Saunders, Norman J., to United
States of America, Navy. Penetrator interface adapter concept.
4,434,927, CI. 227-9.000. ^
Butler, John V.: See—
Whitcomb, WUIiam T.; and Butler, John V., 4,434,647, CI. 73-
l.OOR.
Butts, Susan B.; and Hartwell, George E., to Dow Chemical Company,
The. Process for preparation of 2-phenylethyl alcohols from aromatic
aldehydes. 4,435,605, CI. 568-878.000.
C. Behrens AG: See—
Bredow, Walter, 4,434,639, CI; 72-344.000.
Cacaofabrik DeZaan B.V.: See—
Terink, Johannes L.; and Brandon, Maurits J., 4,435,436, Q.
426-631.000.
Cady, William S.: See-
Spencer, Billie M.; Cady, William S.; and Zscheile, John W., Jr.,
4,435.822, CI. 375-1.000.
Cainelli, Gianfranco; Foa', Marco; Ronchi, Achille U.; and Gardano,
Andrea, to Montedison S.p.A. Process for preparing carboxylated
organic compounds. 4,435,575, CI. 546-341.000.
Calhoun, Bill L.: See—
Calhoun, Tom L.; and Calhoun, Bill L., 4,435,084, CI. 366-130.000.
Calhoun, Tom L.; and Calhoun, Bill L. Automatic stirrer for cup.
4,435.084. CI. 366-130.000.
Callan, John E., to Allen-Bradley Company. Switch network.
4,435,706, CI. 340-825.080.
Calvert, James W.: See—
Wiatt. James G.; Calvert. James W.; Belcher, Samuel L.; and
Smith, Roger D., 4,435,146, CI. 425-534.000.
Campbell, Simon F.; and Plews, Rhona M., to Pfizer Inc. 4-Amino-6,7-
dimethoxy-2-<4-heteroaryl-piperazino)quinazoline antihypertensives.
4,435.401, CI. 424-251.000.
Campbell, Willis R., to Sperry Corporation. Overfill protection appara-
tus for roll baling machine. 4,434,607, CI. 56-341.000.
Canada, Her Majesty the Queen in right of, as represented by the
Minister of Energy: See—
Ranganathan, Ramaswami; Patmore, David J.; and Silva, Adolfo
E., 4,435,280, CI. 208-112.000.
Canada, Her Majesty the Queen in rightof, as represented by the
Minister of National Defence: See—
Perlman, Martin M.; and Filion, Andre Y., 4.435,610, Q.
136-255.000.
Canadian Patenu and Development Limited: See-
Burrows, Vernon D.; Fulcher, Royce G.; and Paton, David,
4,435,429, CI. 426-18.000.
Caniglia, Joseph E. Eyeglass wiping device. 4,434,520, CI. 15-214.000.
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Adachi, Hiroyuki; and Hosono, Nagao, 4,435,072, CI. 355-3.0FU.
Eida, Tsuyoshi; and Kobayashi, Masatsune, 4,435,717, CI.
346-1.100.
Fukahori, Hidehiko; Ichiyanan, Toshikazu; Iwashita, Tomonori;
Mashimo, Yukio; Sunouchi, Akio; and Fujino, Masahisa,
4,435,061, CI. 354-173.110.
KiUjima, Tadayuki, 4,435,070, CI. 355-8.000.
Shimizu, Masami; and Uchidoi, Masanori, 4,435,741, CI.
361-401.000.
Cantrell John L.: See—
Ribi, Edgar E.; and Cantrell John L., 4,435,386, CI. 424-177.000.
Caporaso, John A., to Nabisco Brands, Inc. Packaging system for fully ,
baked, unfilled pastry shells. 4,435,434, CI. 426-108.000.
Cappelli, Romano, to USS Engineers and Consultants, Inc. Process for
repairing or modifying refractory plates of ladle casting cassettes.
4,434,540, CI. 29-402.110.
Caputo, William R., to Westinghouae Electric Corp. Elevator system.
4.434,874, CI. I87-29.00R.
Carasso, Marino G.: See—
Nadan, Joseph S.; Kenney, George C, II; and Carasso, Marino G.,
4,435,687, CI. 331-23.000.
Carazzolo, Gianalviae; Colombo, Giancarlo; Gavella, Giulio; Giaco-
muzzo, Silvano; and Gianetti, Franco, to Montedison S.p.A. Method
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 7
for the recovery of pentaerythritol from the residual mixtures of the
i^o of!'*^™"" acetaldehyde and formaldehyde. 4,435,604, CI
368-854.000.
Cardini, Jean-Louis, to Societe Metallurgique Le Nickels-S L N Pro-
4!S4!w*a "'I'll 000'""''°" "'""* °'" '" " *"""'** ""**'"'"
Carley, Don A.; Witte, Arnold C, Jr.; Green, William B.; and Doerr,
Kermit W., to Texaco Inc. Preparation of high dropping point lith-
ium complex soap grease. 4,435,299, CI. 252-41.000.
Carlsmith, Lawrence A.: See—
^",'^•..9^' "*** Carlsmith, Uwrence A., 4.435,085, CI.
366-135.000.
Cm, Albert A.; Farr, Robert A.; and Kane, John M., to Richardson
Merrell Inc. 5-(Substituted benzyl)-6K)xo-2.piperazine carboxylic
acids and esters. 4,435,571, CI. 544-384.000.
Carrier Corporation: See—
Jackson, Dale; and McManus, John R., 4,434.841, CI. 165-125.000
Carter, John W.: See—
Rhal«. Uwrence G.; and Carter, John W., 4,434,606. CI.
56-106.000.
Casaceli, Frank B.: See—
^%3?75il!a.•=l2^7r50A.'"''" ""■'' "" '^^«' """^ «•■
Cascade Corporation: See-
House, Marshall K., 4,435,117, CI. 414-620.000.
House, Marshall K., 4,435,119, CI, 414-620.000.
Casdas, Spyridon, to Aluminium de Grece. Process and apparatus for
controlled feed of alumina and halogen additives into electrolysis vats
for the production of aluminum. 4,435,255, CI. 204-67 000
CMon, William C; McCaskill, Rex A.; and Kamer, Francisco A., to
International Business Machines Corporation. Method for editing
spatially related dau in an interactive text processing system
4,435,778, CI. 364-900.000. b y «m
Castellucci, Nicholas T.: See—
Kaylo, Alan J.; and Castellucci, Nicholas T., 4,435,529, CI.
523-426.000.
Casterline, Russ C: See-
Das, Sanunu; Chea, Ramon C. W., Jr.; and Casterline, Russ C,
4,435,803, CI. 370-16.000.
Castle ft Cooke Techniculture: See—
Sowerwine, Owen D., 4,434,576, CI. 47-39.000.
Caterpillar Tractor Co.: See-
Bailey, John M., 4,434,637, CI. 72-17.000.
Riediger, Craig W.; and Winzeler, James E., 4,434.680, CI.
74-682.000.
Centre National d'Etudes Spatiales: See—
Rougeron, Michel; and Simon, Jacques, 4,434,958, CI. 244-126.000
C«ark, Frank F.; and Thomas, Daniel W., to American Cyanamid
Company. Oxime ethers of 4,4'.bis{N,N-diethylamino)benzhydroI
and pressure-sensitive recording systems containing them. 4,435,002,
CI. 282-27.500.
Chachowski, Rosemary K.: See-
Graham, Henry A., Jr.; Hawk, Johnna B.; and Chachowski, Rose-
mary K., 4,435,293, CI. 210-772.000.
Chadshay, Roman, to Combustion Engineering, Inc. Burner-tilt drive
apparatus for a pulverized coal fired steam generator. 4,434.747. CI
122-449.000. . . •
Chaki, Takao, to Clarion Co., Ltd. Cross arm structure for use in a
pushbutton tuner. 4,434,673, CI. 74-10.330.
Challenger Caribbean Corporation: See—
Sepulveda, Luis F., 4,435,624, CI. 20042.00T.
Challenger Circle F, Inc.: See—
Abramson, Allen P.; and Stiles, Theodore R., 4,435,032, CI.
339-36.000.
Challenger Producte Corporation: See—
Sepulveda, Luis F., 4,435,624, CI. 200-42.00T.
Chang, Clarence D.; and Miale, Joseph N., to Mobil Oil Corporation.
Activity enhancement of high silica zeolites. 4,435,516, CI.
502-7 1 .000.
ChMig, Mike S. H., to Pitney Bowes Inc. Radiation curable composition
of vinyl polysiloxane and hydrogen polysiloxane with photosensi-
tizer. 4,435,259,0.204-159.130. ^^
Chapman, Arthur S.: See—
Rozner, Marvin J.; and Chapman, Arthur S., 4,434,702, CI. 89-
36.00L.
Chapman, John A.; and Sherwin, Owen W., to Valmont Industries, Inc.
Irrigation system. 4,434,936, CI. 239-178.000.
Chapman, Richard A., to Texas Instruments Incorporated. Unipolar
voluge non-volatile JRAM cell. 4,435,785, CI. 365-147.000.
Chard, Brian C: See-
Bolt, Anthony J. N.; and Chard, Brian C, 4,434,804, CI.
131:309.000.
Charles, Georges M., to Potain Poclain Materiel (P.P.M.). Houting
winch. 4,434,972, CI. 254-340.000.
Chea, Ramon C. W., Jr.: See—
°^.,^'""' Chea. Ramon C. W., Jr.; and Casterline, Russ C,
4,435,803, CI. 370-16.000.
Chen, Hong C, to Chezon Research Co. Hydroprocessing with a
catalyst havmg bimodal pore distribution. 4,435,278, CI. 208-25 l.OOH.
Chen, Shu-Chang: See—
Yeh, Jaw S., 4,434,818, CI. 140-82.000.
Chevron Research Company: See—
Aoyagi, Edward I.. 4,435,416, CI. 424.273.00P.
Fenn, Richard L.; and Kray, Louis R., 4,435,373, CI. 208-48.0\A.
Woo, Gar L.; and Parker. Phillip H., 4,435,547, CI. 525-420.000.
Chezon Research Co.: See—
Chen, Hong C, 4,435,278, CI. 208-25 l.OOH.
Chiba, Kazuo; and Nakamura, Iwao. to Nissan Motor Company, Lim-
ited. Strut type suspension for a vehicle. 4,434,977, CI. 267-33.000
^T^ *?!*^"i ^^ Mauuoka, Fumio, to ToyoU Jidosha Kogyo
Sf 806*000 ^''*" ''**"*"'"» ***^'*^ 4.435,000, CI.
Chihara. Hiroyuki; and Kitano, Muuo, to Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa
Seikosha; and Shimauchi Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha. Power circuit for
an electronic timepiece. 4,435,089. CI. 368-204.000.
Childs, John M. Wind-scoop for small boau. 4,434,740, CI. 1 14-21 1 000
Chimica Bulciago S.r.l.: See—
'^^*i*'4-S°Si'!Si.5*'««'' *^^ P = ■"«* Marcon, Giuliano, 4,435,333.
V.I. 2OO-46S.00D.
Chinoin Gyogyszer es Vesgyeszeti Termekek Gyara R. T. See—
Lugosi Gyorgy; Simay, Antal; Bodnar. Janos; Simandi, Laszio;
and Somfai, Eva, 4,435.567, CI. 544-165.000.
Chomerics, Inc.: See—
Powers. Donald H., Jr., 4,434,541, CI. 29-526.00R.
Chow, Alfred W., to SmithKline Beckman Corporation. 5-PhenyIe-
thenylbenzimidazoles. 4,435.418, CI. 424-273.00B.
Chow, Yiu T.; and Gilligan, Thomas J., to Ampex Corporation. Method
364oJoo'ooO wective mapping system. 4.435.754, CI.
Christensen, Jogen A.: See—
Bracstrup, Claus T.; Christensen, Jogen A.; Engelstoft, Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen, Ralph; Huth. Andreas
Rahtz. Dieter; Seidelmann, Dieter; Kehr, Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat. Dieter, 4,435.403, CI. 424-256.000.
Christian, Jerry B.: See—
^'5^',.?)SI[*' °^ ""* Christian, Jerry B., 4,435,173, CI.
609-155.000.
Christie, William C, to Goodyear Tire ft Rubber Company, The
Automated tire measurement techniques. 4,434,652, CI. 73-146 000
Christopher, Terry M.; and Nelson. Randolph J., to FMC Corporation.
Hydraulic winch speed control with pressure-responsive override
4,434,616, CI. 60-451.000.
Chugai Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Koizumi. Masuo; Shirakawa, Norio; Tomioka, Hiromi; Takeuchi
Masalu; Okada, Masanori; Yoshimoto, Masahiro; Murakami,
Yasushi; and Iwane, Yoshitaka, 4,435,202, CI. 71-76.000.
Sasahara, Kazuo; Honda, MasamiUu; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami
Yasushi; Neichi, Tomohiro; Nakakimura, Hiroshi; Noda,
Yukifumi; MaUushiu, Hiroshi; and Hata, Shun-ichi, 4,435,391
CI. 424-244.000.
Ciaramitaro, David A.; and Moore, Jack M., to Apache Powder Com-
pany. Explosive composition. 4,435,232. CI. 149-2.000.
Ciba-Geigy AG: See—
Muller, Beat; and Roth. Martin, 4,435,489, CI. 430-17.000.
Ciba-Geigy Corporation: See—
Bleuel, Felix; and Bouhard, Christian, 4,434,962, CI. 249-65.000
Falk, Robert A., 4,435,330, CI. 260-458.00F.
Fletcher. Ian J.. 4,435,003, CI. 282-27.500.
Irving, Edward, 4,435,497, CI. 430-288.000.
Michaelis, Klaus-Peter; and Schneider, Rainer, 4,435,338, Q.
Walker, Gordon N., 4,435,407, CI. 424-263.000.
Ciminiello, Francisco J.: See—
Di Giovanni, Bernard A.; and Ciminiello, Francisco J.. 4 434 816
CI. 138-109.000. ."^.019,
Cincinnati Milacron Inc.: See—
Wiatt, James G.; Calvert, James W.; Belcher, Samuel L and
Smith, Roger D., 4,435,146, CI. 425-534.000.
Cities Service Co.: See—
Aylward, David E.. 4,435.520. CI. 502-107.000.
Pennington, B. Timothy; Roling, Paul V.; and Hsieh, John T T
4.435.518, CI. 502-107.000.
Veazey, Richard L.; and Pennington, B. Timothy. 4,435,519, CI
502-107.000.
Citizen Watch Company Limited: See—
Kato, Yoshiaki, 4,435,086, CI. 368-22.000.
Nishimura, Katsuo. 4,435,046, CI. 350-334.000.
Saito, Motoyuki; and Hitanaka, Hideo, 4,435,796, CI. 368-321 000
CKD Controls Limited: See4-
Tamura, Akira, 4,434,933, CI. 236-75.000.
Claaaen, Theodoor A. C. M.; and Mecklcnbrauker, Wolfgang F. O., to
U.S. Philips Corporation. Method of and arrangement tor calculating
the discrete Fourier transform by means of two circular convolutions
4,435,774, CI. 364-726000.
Clarion Co., Ltd.: See—
Chaki. Takao, 4,434,673, CI. 74-10.330.
Clark, Frederic L.; Kaffenberger, Orville A., Jr.; Paraqjpe, Suresh C.
Smith, David W.; and Ames. Jack D., to Mead Corporation, The. Ink
drop printing system. 4,435,718, CI. 346-75.000.
Clark, John R, to Sperry Corporation. Weather radar with signal
compensation for precipiution. 4,435,707, CI. 343-5.00W
Clarke, Brian P.: See-
Stirling, Irene; and Clarke, Brian P., 4,435,565, CI. 542-416.000.
Clatworthy. Edward F.: See—
Eiselstein, Herbert L.; Smith, Darrell P., Jr.; and CUtworthv.
Edward F., 4,435,359, CI. 419-3.000.
PI 8
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Clay. Douglas R.: See—
Neugebauer, Marcia M.; Clay, Douglas R.; Goldstein, Bruce E.;
and Goldstein, Raymond, 4.433,642, CI. 250-296.000.
Clean-Tex A/S: See—
Neubert. Robert, 4,435,451. CI. 428-15.000.
Cless, Richard D.: See—
Rapoport, Henry; Weller. Dwight D.; and Cless, Richard D.,
4,435,572, CI. 546-228.000.
Cleveland, William E.. to SCM Corporation. Office machine escape-
ment disengagement and automatic engagement mechanism.
4,435.098, CI. 400-674.000.
Cocco, Vincent L., to Polaroid Corporation. Film processing appara-
tus. 4,435,062, CI. 354-303.000.
Coffin, Christopher J., to Alan Cobham Engineering Limited. Pressure
responsive switch actuating mechanism. 4,435,626, CI. 200-81. 90R.
Cohen, Leonard G.; and Mammel, Wanda L., to Bell Telephone Labo-
ratories, Incorporated. Double-clad optical fiberguide. 4,435,040, CI
350-96.330.
Coleman, Charles: See —
Smith. Peter R.; and Coleman, Charles. 4,434,549, CI. 29-832.000
Coleman. Charles R., to PPG Industries. Inc. Method for applying
abrasion resistant thin polyurethane coatings. 4.435,450, CI.
427-385.500.
Coleman, Clint; and Currin. Hugh D.. to North Wind Power Company,
Inc. Wind turbine rotor control system. 4,435.646. CI. 290-44.000.
Colgate-Palmolive Company: See —
Fitzgerald. Harry G.. 4.435,178, CI. 604-365.000.
Colombo, Giancarlo: See —
Carazzolo, Gianalvise; Colombo, Giancarlo; Gavella. Giulio;
Giacomuzzo. Silvano; and Gianetti. Franco. 4.435.604, CI.
568-854.000.
Colombo, Roberto, to Lavorazione Matcrie Plastiche L.M.P. S.p.A
Process for the production of a continuous sheet of foamed synthetic,
thermoplastic polymer by extrusion. 4,435,345, CI. 264-53.000.
Colt Industries Operating Corp.: See —
Eshelman, Philip V.. 4,434,765, CI. 123-472.000.
McCabe, Ralph P., 4,434,762, CI. 123-438.000.
McCabe. Ralph P.; and Marsh. Keith D., 4.434.763. CI.
123-440.000
Colton, Russell F., to Rockwell International Corporation. Low cost
capacitive accelerometer. 4.435,737, CI. 361-280.000
Combeau. Guy. Apparatus for screen printing bottles. 4.434,714, CI.
101-38.0OA.
Combustion Engineering, Inc.: See —
Chadshay, Roman, 4,434,747, CI. 122-449.000.
Johnson, Walter R , 4.435,693. CI. 338-238 000.
Jones, Brian C. 4.434,726, CI. 1 10-347.000.
Kunkel. Robert C, Jr.. 4,434,724, CI. 110-269.000.
McCartney, Michael S., 4.434,727, CI. 110-347.000.
Comeyne, Robert G.. to United Sutes of America, Army. Aiming aid
for an aiming device in a low light level environment. 4,434,560, CI.
33-241.000.
Commander Electrical Equipment, Inc.: See—
Sepulveda, Luis F., 4,435,624. CI. 200-42.00T.
Commissariat a I'Energie Atomique: See —
Pascal, Daniel, and Duret, Denis, 4,434,547, CI. 29-599.000.
Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research Organization: See—
Pearce. Robert J., 4,435,319, CI. 260-123 500.
Communication Technology Corporation: See —
Smith, Donald J., 4.435,612, CI. 174-92.000. -
Comploi, Georg, Heimgartner, Roland; Loacker, Artur; Huber, Kurt;
and Wallimann, Hans, to Aktiengesellschaft Adolf Saurer. Electro-
magnetic pattern selector for an embroidery machine. 4.434.728, CI.
112-84.000.
Compur-Electronic GmbH: See—
Stower, Reinhard, 4.435.167. CI. 494-16.000.
Comstock, James F.: See —
Gargrave, Robert J.; Thompson, John K.; and Comstock, James F.,
4,434,644, CI. 72-387.000.
Conklin, Jerry R.: See—
Tomalia, Donald A ; Wilson, Larry R.; and Conklin, Jerry R.,
4.435.548. CI. 525-451.000.
Conoco Inc.: See —
Motz. Kaye L.; Washecheck, Paul H.; Poc, Ronald L.; and Yates,
James E.. 4,435,606, CI. 585-324.000.
Stokke, Olaf M.; and Sias. Roy C, 4.435.295. CI. 252-8.55D.
Conrad. Jens; Schaper, Ulf-Armin; and Bruns. Klaus, to Henkel Kom-
manditgesellschart auf Atkien. Useofalkyl-substituted 1,3-dioxolanes
as perfuming agents. 4.435,315. CI. 252-522.0OR.
Constant, Bernard: See —
Divoux. Michel; Bonansea, Hubert; and Constant, Bernard,
4,434,888, CI. 198-466.000.
ContinenUl Group. Inc.. The: See-
Beck. Martin H.; Krishnakumar, Suppayan M.; and Harry, leuan
L., 4.435.244. CI. 156-379.800.
Control Data Corporation: See —
Cree, Roger W , 4,434,625. CI. 62-199.000.
Conviser, Harry Instrument for comparing equal temperament and just
intonation. 4.434.696. CI. 84-1.010.
Cook. Gregory E., to Windpowered Machines Ltd. Wind turbine
spindle assembly with spindle constraint. 4,435,125. CI. 416-132.00B.
Cook, Melvin W., to Masonite Corporation. Free standing article
display apparatus. 4,434,900, CI. 211-189.000.
Cook, Russell P., Sr.: See—
Roop, Michael R.; and Cook, Russell P., Sr., 4,434,869, CI.
182-10000.
Cooke. Carl W. Safety closure and conUiner. 4,434,903, CI.
215-222.000.
Cooper Industries. Inc.: See—
LaCount, Kenneth H.. 4,434,974, CI. 254-360.000.
Corbett, Herbert O.. to National Distillers and Chemical Corporation.
Method of extruding laminated film. 4,435,241, CI. 156-244.110.
Cordrey, Richard N., to Armco Inc. Drilling rig drawworks hook load
overspeed preventing system. 4,434,971, CI. 254-273.000
Cornell Research Foundation, Inc.: See —
Drost, Cornelis J.; and Milanowski. G. Jan, 4.434,648. CI. 73-
l.ODV.
Comils, Boy; Bach, Hanswilhelm; Gartner, Roderich; and Gick, Wil-
helm. to Ruhrchemie Aktiengesellschaft. Method for preventing
caking of polyols. 4.435.603. CI. 568-701.000.
Cotton Incorporated: See —
Winch. Allen R.; and Rearick. William A.. 4.434.633. CI.
68-267.000.
Couch, Philip R.: See—
Bowen, James H ; Baldwin, David L.; and Couch, Philip R.,
4,435,850, CI. 455-606.000.
Coulson Heel Inc.: See—
Ponzielli. Giuseppe, 4,435,523, CI. 521-51.000.
Cox. Barry: See-
Blackburn. Thomas P.; Cox, Barry; Guildford^Allen J.; Le Count.
David J.; Pearce. Robert J.; and Thomber, Craig W.. 4,435.405,
CI. 424-258.000.
Cox. James W., Jr.: See—
Goode, Frederick R.; Evans, John D.; and Cox, James W., Jr.,
4,434,902, CI. 212-268.000.
Cox, Ronald L., to McDonnell Douglas Corporation. Fail-safe zero-
load hinge/pivot. 4,435,100, CI. 403-27.000.
Crameri, Yvo; Ochsner, Paul A.; and Schudel, Peter, to Givaudan
Corporation. Process for the preparation of dihydrocinnamaldehyde
derivatives. 4,435,585, CI. 549-446.000.
Crane. Foy Aline, executrix: See —
Crane. John H.. deceased; and Crane. Foy Aline, executrix.
4.434.856. CI. 172-256.000.
Crane. John H.. deceased; and Crane. Foy Aline, executrix. Garden
plow with support means operative to inversely angularly displace
earthworking tool, 4,434,856, CI. 172-256.000.
Cree, Roger W., to Control Data Corporation. Computer cooling
system. 4.434.625, CI. 62-199.000.
Crete, Paul G.: See-
Williamson. James; and Crete. Paul G.. 4.435,847, CI. 455-260.000.
Creusot-Loire: See—
Voillot. Herve, 4.434,701, CI. 89-36.0OK.
Crimmin, Michael J.: See —
Rogers, Norman H.; and Crimmin, Michael J., 4,435,583, CI.
549-414.000. "^
Cronin, Michael J.; and Seid, Gordon, to Lockheed Corporation.
Energy-efficient all-electric ECS for aircraft. 4,434,624, CI.
62-172.000.
Csako, Denes: See—
Mika, Gyorgy; Csako, Denes; Paczuk, Laszlo; Beres-Deak, Laszlo;
and Novotny, Laszlo, 4,435,129. CI. 417-151.000.
CTS Corporation: See —
Ginn. Steven N.. 4.435,691, CI. 338-125.000.
Cue, Berkeley W., Jr.; and Moore, Bernard S., to Pfizer Inc. Sorbinil by
optical resolution of precursor 6-nuoro-4-ureidochroman-4-carboxy-
lic acid. 4,435,578, CI. 548-309.000.
Culpepper, Will L., to Mead Corporation, The. Tray loading machine.
4,434,602, CI. 53-473.000.
Culver, Larry J.: See-
Jones, Glenn C; and Culver, Larry J., 4,435,534, CI. 524-292.000.
Currin, Hugh D.: See —
Coleman, Clint; and Currin, Hugh D., 4,435,646, CI. 290-44.000.
Curry, Daniel L., Vice-President of St. Joseph Bank and Trust Com-
pany, executor: See—
D'Alelio, GaeUno F., deceased; and Waitkus, Phillip A., 4,435,323,
CI. 548-473.000.
Curtis. Stanley F.. to Pollution Controls Industries, Inc. Assembly for
attachment to a vehicle for performing a work operation. 4,434.993.
CI. 280-402.000.
Cuscurida. Michael, to Texaco Inc. Polyester polymer polyols made
with polyester polycarbonates and polyurethanes therefrom.
4.435.527. CI. 521-173.000.
Cutter Laboratories. Inc.: See—
Kuhlemann, Bruce N.; Horvath. Kalman; and Wharff, Prentice C.
4,435,177, CI. 604-263.000.
Czerwinski, Frank G.; and Rutty. Edward C. to SUnley Works, The.
Power returnable coilable rule cartridge and coil rule assembly
employing same. 4.434.952. CI. 242-107.000.
DaGue, Michael G.; and Valone, Frederick W., to Texaco Inc. Corro-
sion inhibition system containing dicyclopentadiene sulfonate salts.
4,435,361, CI. 422-12.000.
Dahms, Francis A., to Emhari Industries, Inc. Piston and cylinder
mechanism. 4,434,674, CI. 74-99.00A.
Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See—
Watanabe, Morio, 4,434,518, CI. 12-142.0RS.
Waunabe, Shoji; and Miho, Takuya, 4,435,542, CI. 523-118.000.
Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Sakitani, Katsumi; Uemura, Shigehiro; and Yajima, Ryuzaburo,
4,434,844, CI. 165-151.000.
Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd.: See—
Tatsunosuke, Masuda, 4,435,076, CI. 355-41.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 9
D Aleho, Gaetano F., deceased (by Curry, Daniel L., Vice-President of
St. Joseph Bank and Trust Company, executor); and Waitkus. Phillip
A., to Plastics Engineering Company. Vinylacetylene-terminated
polymide derivatives. 4.435.323. CI. 548-473.000.
D'Amico, Richard; Fowles, Thomas A.; and Winchell, David A., to
Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Bottle closure 4,434 904 CI
215-232.000.
Damon Corporation: See —
Kennedy, A. Terence, 4,435,168, CI. 494-20.000.
Danamps, Jean: See—
Buchschmid, Emil; Burkel, Rainer; Danamps, Jean; Frenznick,
Anton; and Stradtmann, Gunther, 4,435,625, CI. 200-61.220
Danfoss A/S: See—
Ohrberg, Carl V.; and Hansen, Gunnar L., 4.435.130. CI
417-310.000
Daniels, Llewellyn R.. Jr. Vehicle Ijft. 4,434,872. CI. 187-8.740.
Dantzig, Jonathan A.: See-
Winter, Joseph; Dantzig, Jonathan A.; and Tyler, Derek E ,
4,434,837, CI. 164-468 000.
Darnell, W. Dale, to Humboldt Products Corp. Surgical retractor arr*v
system 4,434,791, CI. 128-20.000.
Das, Balbhadra; and Moore, L. Dow, to PPG Industries, Inc. Aqueous
sizing composition and sized glass fibers and method. 4,435,474. CI
428-391.000.
Das, Santanu; Chea, Ramon C. W., Jr.; and Casterline. Russ C, to
International Telephone and Telegraph Corporation. Analog sub-
scriber/trunk module with shared ringing source and rins-trip
4.435.803. CI. 370-16.000.
Data General Corp.: See—
El-Gohary. Hussein T., 4.435.764. CI. 364-200.000.
Hunt, Glenn E.; Alexander, Michael C; Lozano, Gerald L.; and
Manktelow, Gerald O.. 4,435.703. CI. 340-723.000.
Davidson, Donald R.. to Singer Company, The. Continuous mono-
grammer. 4,434,729. CI. 112-121.120.
Davies. Robert B.: See-
Joseph. Eric D.; and Davies, Robert B., 4,435,678, CI. 323-273.000.
Davis, James A., to Firestone Tire &. Rubber Company, The. Rubber
compositions and articles thereof having improved metal adhesion
and metal adhesion retention. 4,435.477. CI. 428-462.000.
Davis, Robert C; and Thaker, Gautam H., to Harris Corporation.
Adaptive equalizer capable of linear and nonlinear weiahtinc.
4,435,823, CI. 375-14.000. "
Dayco Corporation: See—
Standley, Paul M., 4,435,348, CI. 264-174.000.
Deal, Troy M. Pump intake cutter head. 4.434.943. CI. 241-46.080.
DeBona, Bruce T.: See-
Lai. Yu-Chin; DeBona. Bruce T.; Prevorsek. Dusan C; and Ak-
kapeddi. Murali K., 4,435.361. CI. 328-193.000.
de Brabander, Louis F.; and Van Linthout. Luc K.. to Fonds d'Etudes
pour la Securite Routiere A.s.b.l. Electronic light beam tester.
4.435,078, CI. 356-121.000.
de Brabant. Jean. Building structure. 4.434.595. CI. 52-236.200.
Decuir, Joseph C: See-
Mayer, Steven T.; Miner, Jay G.; Neubauer, Douglas G. and
Decuir, Joseph C, 4,435,779, CI. 364-900.000.
Dedenon. Jean-Marie; and Rassak. Denis. Installation for preparing
combustible gases through fermentation. 4,433,188, CI. 48-111.000.
Deeks. Peter C : See-
Williamson. Vivien R.; and Deeks, Peter C, 4.434.672. CI.
73-864.220
Deering. Roland F.; and Duir, John H.. to Union Oil Company of
California. Oil shale retorting process with a moving bed pressure
letdown stage. 4,433.27 1 . CI. 208- 1 1 OOR.
Degremont: See —
Louboutin. Robert; and Riotte. Michel. 4,435.286, CI. 210-1 16.000.
Degussa Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Diehl, Manfred; and Bergmann, Roland, 4,435,216, CI. 106-97.000.
Oepen. Gerhard; Mangartz, Karl-Heinz; Seifried, Norbert; Engel,
Jurgen; and Isaac, Otto, 4,435,563. CI. 536-18.100.
Reck, Reinhold; Kuhner, Gerhard; Voll, Manfred; and Kleinsch-
mit, Peter, 4.435.378, CI. 423-461.000.
Rothbuhr, Lothar, 4,435.377, CI. 423-460.000.
Deininger, J. Paul, to Olin Corporation. Process for making potassium
ferrate [Fe(VI)] by the electrochemical formation of sodium ferrate.
4.435.256. CI. 204-86.000.
Deininger, J. Paul; and Dotson, Ronald L., to Olin Corporation. Pro-
cess for the electrochemical production of sodium ferrate fFe{VI)l.
4.435.257. CI. 204-86.000.
Delagi, Richard G.: See—
frenkler, George; and Delagi, Richard G., 4,434.930, CI.
228-118.000.
Delalande S.A.: See—
Bourgery, Guy R.; Douzon, Colette A.; Ancher, Jean-Francois R.;
Lacour, Alain P.; Guerret, Patrick G.; Langlois, Michel; and
Dostert, Philippe L., 4,435,415. CI. 424-272.000.
Del Fabbro, Dino, to Officine Riunite Udine Spa. Concrete mixing
plants with elevator wheel. 4,435.081. CI. 366-18 000.
Dellande. Brian W.; and Wurzburg, Henry, to Motorola, Inc. Commu-
nication system having improved differential phase shift keying
modulation. 4,435,824, CI. 373-46.000.
Dellinger, John J.: See —
Solomon, Robert A.; and Dellinger, John J., 4,434,722. CI.
108-8.000.
Delta Medical Industries: See—
Siposs, George G.; and Christian, Jerry B., 4,433,173, CI.
609-133.000.
Demame. Henu; and Wagnon, Jean, to Societe Anonyme dite: Sanofi.
Ethers of phenol active on the cardiovascular system, process for
preparing same and use thereof in drugs 4,435,426. CI 424-324 000
Demarthe, Jean-Michel; Fossi, Paolo; and Oandon, Louis, to Mitsubishi
Rayon Co., Ltd. Hydrometallurgical process for selective dissolution
of mixtures of oxy compounds 4,435,368. CI 423-40 000.
Dematex Development & Investment Establishment: See—
Rilliet, Francois, 4,434,802, CI. 128-764.000
Demircan, Niyazi: See—
Brealcy, Leslie; Wilson, John H.; and Demircan. Niyazi. 4,434.723,
CI. 110-245.000.
Dempsey, Edmond N.. to Peerless Machine A. Tool Corporation. Small
blank feeder and tray former 4,435,143, CI. 425-150.000.
Denk, Jpseph; and Martin, William B., to Garrett Corporation, The
High speed accessory disconnect apparatus and methods. 4,434,881.
CI. 192-89.00A.
Dennis, James T.; and Kolomayets, George, to Dennis, James T. Auto-
matic record player. 4,435,800, CI. 369-225.000.
de Putter, Jan A.; and Tummers, Paul J. H., to Oce-Nederiand B V
Porous reusable ZnO electrophotographic element. 4,435,493, CI.
430-87.000.
Derr, Walter R.; and Sarli, Michael S., to Mobil Oil Corporation
Hydrocracking process for aromalics production. 4,435.275, CI
208-89.000.
Desert, Jean-Marie G.; and Walrave, Franciskus J. Grid-type bread-
slicing machine. 4,434,692, CI. 83-62.000.
Desplats, Andre, to Tractel, S.A. Electnc hoitt. 4,434,973, CI.
254-344.000.
Desvard, Alain: See—
Dinh, Chan T.; Desvard, Alain; Jacquin, Yves; and Martino. Ger-
main, 4,435,277, CI. 208-108.000.
Detexomat Machinery Limited: See-
Hodges, Michael J., 4,434,918, CI. 223-75.000.
De Vincentiis, Leonardo, to Ausonia Farmaceutici s.r.l. Compound
with analgesic, antiinflammatory and antipyretic activity, and phar-
maceutical compositions therefrom. 4.435,591. CI. 560-73.000
de Vries. Jacob. Apparatus for heating a sheet- or web-like material
4,435,637, CI. 219-358.000
Dewilde, Francois: See—
Rouy, Noel; and Dewilde, Francois, 4,435,577, CI. 548-221.000.
Deyo, Bruce, to Dresser Industries. Inc. Hoist pull down system for
blast hole drill. 4,434,860. CI. 173-147.000.
Dhein, Rolf: See—
Schreckenberg, Manfred; Nouvertne, Werner; Medem. Harald
Dhem. Rolf and MuIIer, Peter R., 4,435,544, CI. 525-146.000.
Diamond Shamrock Corporation: See—
Katz, Michael; Hinden, Jean M.; and Gauger, Jurgen F., 4,435.313,
CI. 502-101.000.
Diebold. Incorporated: See—
Azeez, Syed A.; Leipelt, Paul A.; and Morello, Herbert, 4,433,243,
CI. 136-361.000.
Diehl, Manfred; and Bergmann, Roland, to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft
Process for the accelerated solidification of hydraulic cement mix-
ture. 4,435,216, CI. 106-97.000.
Dienes Werke fur Maschinenteilc GmbH & Co. KG: See—
Wingen, Peter, 4,434,695, CI. 83-482.000.
Di Giovanni, Bernard A.; and Ciminiello, Francisco J. Service line
interior by-pass fitting. 4,434,816. CI. 138-109.000.
Dillard, Ewell F.: See—
Frazier, Alva W.; and Dillard, Ewell F., 4.435,372. CI. 423-
321. OOR.
Dillon. Corbett L. Engine construction 4,434.618, CI 60-528.000.
Dinbergs. Komelius. to B. F. Goodrich Company. Tlie Process for
preparing spherical and porous vinyl resin particles. 4,435,524, CI.
521-65.000.
Dinh, Chan T.; Desvard, Alain; Jacquin, Yves; and Martino, Germain,
to Institut Francais du Petrole. Process for the hydrotreatment ^of
heavy hydrocarbons in the presence of reduced metals. 4,435,277. CI.
208-108.000.
Dipper, Barry: See-
Wood, Denis; Thomas, John F., Jr.; Dipper, Barry; Stegenga,
Philip D.; Veltkamp, John H.; Katsma, William L.; and Norton,
Robert L., 4,435,042, CI. 350-281.000.
Disa A/S (Dansk Industri Syndifat A/S): See-
Fog, Jorgen L ; and Nielsen, Jorgen, 4,434,703, CI. 89-37.O0B.
Divoux, Michel; Bonansea, Hubert; and Constant, Bernard, to Hotch-
kiss-Brandt Sogeme H.B.S. Apparatus for supplying an article sorting
machine conveyor, a method for using this apparatus 4,434,888, CI
198-466.000.
Dobrovolny, Pierre, to Zenith Radio Corporation. Communications
receiver having a switchable filter input suge. 4,435,841, CI.
455-180 000.
Dr. Beck A Co. AG: See—
Brandstetter, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Scharf, Bemhard; Lin-
denschmidt, Gerhard; Schwaab, Josef; and Jung, Rudolf H.,
4,435,541, CI. 525-64.000.
Dr. C. Otto A Comp. GmbH: See-
Struck, Carl-Heinz; and Schumacher, Ralf, 4,433,132. CI.
431-170.000.
Dr. Madaus A Co.: See—
Sieck, Reinhard; and Bruiewitz, Gerhard, 4,434,890, CI.
206-443.000.
Dodson, Stanley C: See-
Brooks, Christopher P.; Dodson, Stanley C; and Newman, Robert
H., 4,433,296. CI. 232-28.000.
PI 10
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Doerr, Kermit W.: See—
Carley, Don A.; Witte, Arnold C, Jr.; Green, William B.; and
Doerr, Kermit W., 4,435,299, CI. 252-41.000.
Doheny. Niall S.: &«—
Harrison, Boyd L.; and Doherty, Niall S., 4.435,420, CI.
424-277.000.
Dohya, Akihiro; Hino, Yasuhiko; and Abe, Mitsuo, to Nippon Electric
Co., Ltd. Multilayer circuit and process for manufacturing the same.
4,434.544, CI. 29-578.000.
Doi, Haruo: See — *
Ito, Kazuyuki; Ouki, Masami; Miwa, Naoto; Kamigaito, Osami;
Doi, Haruo; and Hirose, Yoshiharu. 4,435,512. CI. 501-32.000.
Doleschall, Gabor: 5^—
Lempert, Kajply; Harsanyi, Kalman; Doleschall, Gabor; Hornyak,
Gyula; Nyitrai, Jozsef; Zauer, Karoly; Fetter, Jozsef; Simig,
Gyula; Visky nee Gombos, Zsuzsanna; and Baru nee Szalai,
Gizella, 4.435.322, CI. 260-239.00A.
Dollman, David Y., to Amchem Products, Inc. Non-fluoride acid
compositions for cleaning aluminum surfaces. 4,435,223, CI.
134-3.000.
Domina, William G., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Concentrated
emulsions of water-soluble polymers. 4,435,528, CI. 523-332.000.
Dominquez, Richard J. G.; and Rice. Doris M., to Texaco Inc. Method
for making a reinforced rim elastomer. 4,435,349, CI. 264-257.000.
Donnelly Mirrors, Inc.: See —
Wood, Denis; Thomas, John F., Jr.; Dipper, Barry; Stegenga,
Philip D.; Veltkamp, John H.; Katsma. William L.; and Norton,
Robert L., 4.435,042, CI. 350-281.000.
Doody, Jeffrey S.: See-
Gray, Lorin S., Ill; and Doody, Jeffrey S.. 4,435.461. CI.
428-141.000.
Dorfman, Leonard M., to Timex Corporation. Battery switch plate for
a timepiece. 4,435,088, CI. 368-88.000.
Dorris, Gordon L. Invalid's bathtub. 4,434,517, CI. 4-585.000.
Dorville, Georges: See —
Gill, George; Souchier, Alain; and Dorville, Georges, 4.434.614.
CI. 60-271.000.
Dostert, Philippe L.: See—
Bourgery, Guy R.; Douzon, Colette A.; Ancher, Jean-Francois R.;
Lacour, Alain P.; Guerret, Patrick G.; Langlois, Michel; and
Dostert, Philippe L., 4,435,415, CI. 424-272.000.
Dotson, Ronald L.: See—
Deininger, J. Paul; and Dotson, Ronald L., 4,435.257, CI.
204-86.000.
Douzon, Colette A.: See—
Bourgery, Guy R.; Douzon, Colette A.; Ancher, Jean-Francois R.;
Lacour, Alain P.; Guerret, Patrick G.; Langlois, Michel; and
Dostert, Philippe L., 4,435,415, CI. 424-272.000.
Dove, Thomas D.: See —
Mills, Larry E.; and Dove. Thomas D.. 4.435.001. CI. 282-1 1.50A.
Dow Chemical Company, The: See-
Butts, Susan B.; and Hartwell, George E.. 4.435,605. CI.
568-878.000.
Domina. William G.. 4,435,528, CI. 523-332.000.
Flagg, Edward E., 4,435,381, CI. 424-54.000.
Gross, James R., 4,435,172, CI. 604-368.000.
Hefner, Robert E., Jr., 4,435,530, CI. 523-512.000.
Uu, Philip Y., 4,435,263, CI. 204-197.000.
Uu, Philip Y., 4,435.264. CI. 204-197.000.
Lysenko, Zenon; and Pews. Richard G.. 4,435,573, CI. 546-250.000.
McKinney, Linda D.; and Jenkines, Randall C, 4,435.459, CI.
428-95.000.
Olson, Robert S.; Surls, Joseph P., Jr.; and West, Ben F., 4,435,379,
CI. 423-472.000.
Tomalia, Donald A.; Wilson, Larry R.; and Conklin. Jerry R.,
4,435,548, CI. 525-451.000.
Draai, Willem T.; Pleyers, Jozef J. A.; and Kuin, Nicolaas P. J., to
Oce-Nederland B.V. Method and apparatus for transferring and
fixing powder images. 4.435.067. CI. 355-3.0TR.
Drechsel, Erhart K.: See—
Holcomb. Dysart E.; Drechsel. Erhart K.; and Sardisco. John B..
4.435.370, CI. 423-158.000.
Dresser Europe S.A.: See—
Pan-ott. George A.. 4.435.018. CI. 299-43.000.
Dresser Industries. Inc.: See —
Deyo, Bruce, 4,434.860, CI. 173-147.000.
Montgomery, Marshall N., 4,434.653, CI. 73-151.000.
Droitsch, Lutz: See—
Kranzle, Josef; and Droitsch, Lutz, 4.435.127, CI. 417-26.000.
Drost, Cornells J.; and Milanowski, G. Jan. to Cornell Research Foun-
dation. Inc. Electroacoustic transducer calibration method and appa-
ratus. 4,434,648. CI. 73-l.ODV.
Drouet. Michel G.; and Nadeau. Francois, to Hydro Quebec. Method
and device for controlling the length of an electrical arc in an arc
generating machine. 4.435.631, CI. 219-124.020.
D'Silva, Themistocles D. J., to Union Carbide Corporation. Biocidal
sulfur-conuining bis-imino carbamate compounds. 4.435.421, CI.
424-277.000.
Dubroeucq, Marie-Christine; and RaUud, Jean E. M. A., to Pharmin-
dustrie. Derivatives of 10-(l-azabicyclo[2.2.2]oct-3-yl)-N,N dimeth-
yl-lOH-phenothiazine-2-sulfonamide as medicamenu. 4,435,393, CI.
424-246.000.
Dubur, Gunar Y.: See—
Kastron, Valeria V.; Vitolin, Rasma O.; Dubur, Gunar Y.; Selga,
Mariu Y.; ZMinsh, Guntis V.; Kondratenko, NaUlya V.; Popov,
Vladimir I.; Kolomeitsev, Alexandr A.; and Yagupolsky, Lev M.,
4,435,574, CI. 546-321.000.
Duffy, James J., to Ford Motor Company. Speed-sensitive power
steering system. 4,434,866, CI. 180-143.000.
Duir, John H.: See—
Deering, Roland F.; and Duir, John H., 4,435.271. CI. 208-1 1.OOR.
Dumont. Claude: See—
Nedelec. Lucien; Guillaume, Jacques; and Dumont. Claude.
4.435.408. CI. 424-263.000.
Dunaway. Richard: See-
Barber, Flavil, Jr.; Karam, Emmanuel E.; Dunaway, Richard; and
Rogers, Ray L., 4,435,738, CI. 361-321.000.
Dundas, Dennis L.: See-
Myers, William H.; and Dundas, Dennis L., 4.435,147, CI.
425-577.000.
Dunkelmann, Dietger: See —
Greensmith, Dennis; Hammerton. Roderic H.; Wall. Colin J.;
Dunkelmann. Dietger; Jaunich, Helmut; and Schiffarth. Josef.
4,435.510. CI. 501-90.000.
Dunphy, Gerald F.; and Best, Lance E., to Ogden Industries Pty.
Limited. Lock. 4.434.634, CI. 70-89.000.
Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company: See—
Abramson, Edwaft A.; and Townsend, Peter K., 4,435,037. CI.
350-96.200.
Barbour. Kenneth L.; Geigle. William L.; and Haglid. Frank R..
deceased, 4,435,568, CI. 544-182.000.
Levitt, George, 4,435,206, CI. 71-92.000.
Reap, James J., 4,435,205, CI. 71-92.000.
Romanauskas, William A., 4,435,169, CI. 494-20.000.
Wysong, Robert D., 4.435.383. CI. 424-78.000.
Duracell Inc.: See—
Bahary. William S.; and Griffin. Rowland A., 4,435,488, CI.
429-212.000.
Durand, Alain, to Societe Anonyme de Telecommunications. Process
for preparing homogeneous layers of composition HHi_xCd,Te.
4,435,224, CI. 148-1.500.
Duret, Denis: See —
Pascal, Daniel; and Duret, Denis, 4,434.547. CI. 29-599.000.
Durot. Jean-Pierre: See—
Pivoteau, Jean; and Durot, Jean-Pierre, 4,435,479, CI. 428-542.800.
Duyal, Tulay: See-
Walls, John E.; and Duyal, Tulay, 4,435,496. CI. 430-285.000.
Dyer. Keith: See-
Rose. John A.; and Dyer. Keith. 4.434.730. CI. 112-121.120.
Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Kuhnel. Werner; Putz. Peter; Simm, Manfred; and Spielau, Paul.
4.435.466. CI. 428-215.000.
Dziubakowski. Donald J.; Kaya, Azmi; Keyes, Marion A.; Matsko,
Theodore N.; Moss, William H.; and Scheib, Thomas J., to Babcock
& Wilcox Company, The. Load control for energy converters.
4.435.650. CI. 307-32.000.
E. R. Squibb & Sons. Inc.: See —
Vanna. Ravi K.. 4.435.326. CI. 260-397.300.
E-Tech. Inc.: See —
Sanborn. David M.; and Blackshaw. Andrew L.. 4.434.539. CI.
29- 157. 30V.
Eastin, John A. Manufacturing and using nitrogen fertilizer solutions on
a fann. 4.435.201. CI. 71-54.000.
Eastman Kodak Company: See—
Agreda. Victor H.; and Partin. Lee R.. 4.435.595. CI. 560-234.000.
Gourley. Robert N., 4,435.320. CI. 260-152.000.
Harris. James E.. 4.435.239, CI. 156-180.000.
Jones, Glenn C; and Culver, Larry J., 4.435,534, CI. 524-292.000.
Uu, Philip T. S., 4,435,495, CI. 430-218.000.
Leiental, Mark; and Steklenski, David J., 4,435,490, CI. 430-45.000.
Maskasky, Joe E., 4,435,501, CI. 430-434.000.
Reeves, John W., 4,435,499, CI. 430-350.000.
Stryjewski, Walter A., 4,435,633, CI. 219-216.000.
Vanier, Noel R., 4,435,502, CI. 430-489.000.
Eaton Corpoj-^ion: See —
SchuttenrTlerman P.; Sackett, Robert W.; Sedivy, Jan K.; and
Taken, Michael E., 4,435,750, CI. 363-177.000.
Shelvik, Bertrum S., 4,435,739, CI. 361-346.000.
Swanson, Glen E.; and Garstick, Larry A.. 4.434.833, CI.
152-417.000.
Ebara Corporation: See— I ^
Koichi, Yamada; Keiu. Kawamura; and Shinji. Aoki, 4,435,260, CI.
204-164.000.
Ebi, YuUka: See—
Horikc. Masanori; and Ebi, Yutaka, 4,435,720, CI. 346-75.000.
Ebneth. Harold; Fitzky. Hans G.; and Oberkirch. Wolfgang, to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft. Composite material for shielding against electro-
magnetic radiation. 4.435.465. CI. 428-195.000.
Eckel Industries, Inc.: See —
Gilchrist, Henry R., 4,434,524, CI. 16-250.000.
Eckert, Wolfgang; Holtkamp, Bemd; and Kilian, Ernst A., to U.S.
Philips Corporation. Amplifier arrangement. 4,435,685, CI.
330-261.000.
Edelmann, Karl R. Thermosut housing assembly. 4.434,750, CI.
123-41.020.
Eder, Ulrich: See—
Braestrup, Claus T.; Christensen, Jogen A.; Engelstoft, Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen. Ralph; Huth. Andreas;
Rahtz. Dieter; Seidelmann. Dieter; Kehr. Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat, Dieter. 4,435,403. CI. 424-256.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 11
Edgerley. Christopher J., to Electricity Council. The. Channel induc-
tion furnaces. 4,435.820. CI. 373-161.000.
Edson Tool & Manufacturing Co.. Inc.: See —
Prather, Joseph E.; Khalifa, Ramzl A.; and Wenzler, Peter B.,
4.435,027, CI. 312-222.000.
Egami, Tsuneyuki: See—
Kohama, Tokio; Huzino, Seizi; Obayashi, Hideki; Kawai, Hisasi
and Egami, Tsuneyuki, 4,434,767, CI. 123-481.000.
Egan, William E.: See-
Landers, Samuel P.; and Egan, William E., 4,434,830. CI. 152-
209.00R.
Egawa. Takeshi: See —
Yoshida. Fumio; Miki. Yukio; Egawa. Takeshi; and Yoshizaki.
Akira. 4.435.058. CI. 354-403.000.
Ehrreich. John E.. to Ercon. Inc. Conductive compositions. 4.435.214,
CI. 75-251.000.
Eichelberger. Charles W.: See—
Bedard. James F.; Eichelberger. Charles W.; and Nati, Salvatore
F.. Jr.. 4.435,679. CI. 323-350.000.
Eida, Tsuyoshi; and Kobayashi, Masatsune, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Liquid jet recording process and recording liquid therefor. 4,435,717,
CI. 346-1.100.
Eilers, Norbert; and Bragas, Peter, to Blaupunkt-Werke GmbH. FM
Receiver for general programs and special announcements. 4,435,843,
CI. 455-205.000.
Eisai Company, Limited: See—
Akatsuka, Shin-ichiro, 4,435,431, CI. 426-36.000.
Sato, Akio; Nakajima, Kcnji; Takahara, Yoshimasa; Kijima,
Shizumasa; Kuwana, Noriaki; Abe, Shinya; and Yamada, Kouzi.
4,435,423, CI. 424-318.000.
Eisele, Hermann; Hill, Martin; and Schweizer, Hartmut, to Robert
Bosch GmbH. Device for generating specific electrical voltage
values for consumers associated with an internal combustion engine.
4,435,745, CI. 363-21.000.
Eiselstein, Herbert L.; Smith, Darrell F., Jr.; and Clalworthy, Edward
F., to Huntington Alloys, Inc. Apparatus and method for fabricating
tubes from powder. 4,435,359. CI. 419-3.000.
Eisenhuth. Warren V. Device for lubricating muzzle-loading bullets
and method for handling and loading the bullets. 4,434.571. CI.
42-90.000.
Elbe, Hans-Ludwig: See-
Reiser, Wolf; Elbe, Hans-Ludwig; Buchel, Karl; Frohberger, Paul-
Ernst; and Brandes, Wilhelm, 4,435,411, CI. 424-269.000.
Electricity Council, The: See—
Edgeriey, Christopher J., 4,435,820, CI. 373-161.000.
El-Gohary, Hussein T., to Dau General Cdrp. Computer network
having a single electrically continuous bi-directional bus. 4,435,764.
CI. 364-200.000.
Eli, Inc.: See—
Wouk, Victor, 4,435,671, CI. 315-200.00R.
Elkem a/s: See —
Evensen, Knut, 4.435,815, CI. 373-81.000.
Krogsrud, Harald, 4.435,817, CI. 373-103.000.
Elton, Edward F.: See—
Markham, Larry D.; Martin, Andrew C; Elton, Edward F.; Mag-
notta, Vincent L.; and Wallick, Scott A., 4,435.249, CI.
162-24.000.
Ema, Kenji; Hara, Junji; Ikado, Shuhei; Kawashima, Hideo; and Yokoo,
Tomohide, to Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals, Inc. Phenolic resin composi-
tions. 4,435,543. CI. 525-143.000.
EMAB Electrolux Motor Aktiebolag: See—
Nilsson. Ralph L.; and Rangert, Bo R., 4,434,756, CI. 123-195.00R.
Emde, Herbert; Blank, Heinz U.; and Schnegg, Peter, to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft. Process for the preparation of aromatic aminosulphonic
acids. 4,435,336, CI. 260-508.000.
Emerson Electric Co.: See—
Rippelmeyer, Dennis M., 4,435,150, CI. 431-46.000.
Emhart Industries, Inc.: See —
Dahms, Francis A., 4,434,674, CI. 74-99,00A.
Goode, Joseph W., Ill, 4,435.648, CI. 307-lO.OOR.
Perry, Ralph A.; and Andrejasich, Raymond J., 4,434,650, CI.
73-61. lOR.
EMI Limited: See —
Johnston, Samuel J. B., 4,435,266, CI. 204-276.000.
Emmrich, Bodo: See —
Nitschmann, Karl; Weyda, Gunther; Emmrich, Bodo; and Stimp-
fig, Karl O., 4,434,556. CI. 30-123.400.
Endo, Kiyoshi: See—
Sugiyama, Iwakichi; Endo, Kiyoshi; and Takaoka, Yukihisa,
4,435,587, CI. 556-410.000.
Endo, Shuzo: See —
Saito, Tadao; Nozawa, Takamitsu; Endo, Shuzo; Kakuu, Yo-
shiyuki; Ogawa, Riichi; and Kaneuchi, Tetsuro, 4.434,917. CI.
222-383.000.
Endo, Toshiaki: See —
Horike, Masayoshi; Yamamoto, Haruo; Yamane, Yukio; Yoshiyuki,
Kazuhiko; and Endo, Toshiaki, 4,434,593, CI. 52-208.000.
Energy Conversion Devices, Inc.: See—
Allred. David D.; Walter. Lee; Reyes. Jaime M.; and Ovshinsky.
SUnford R.. 4.435,445. CI. 427-54.100.
Energy Equipment Company Limited. The: See—
Harmao, Maurice. 4,435.158. CI. 432-58.000.
Engel. Jurgen: See —
Gepen, Gerhard; Mangartz. Karl-Heinz; Seifried. Norbert; Engel.
Jurgen; and Isaac. Otto. 4.435.563. CI. 536-18.100.
Engelhard Corporation: See—
Bartholic. David B.; and Flanders, Robert L., 4,435,272, CI.
208-127.000.
Engelsberger, Ernst; and Schulz, Ralf-Thilo, to Messerschmitt-Boel-
kow-Blohm Gesellschaft mil beschraenkter Haftung Door, espe-
cially for motor vehicles. 4,434.580. CI. 49-502.000
Engelstoft. Mogens: See—
Braestrup. Claus T.; Christensen. Jogen A.; Engelstoft, Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen, Ralph; Huih, Andreas;
Rahtz, Dieter; Seidelmann, Dieter; Kehr, Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat. Dieter, 4,435,403, CI 424-256.000
Ennes, John P. Vertical louver system. 4,434,834, CI. 160-166.00A.
Enomoto, Hiroshi: See—
Matsumura, Shingo; Enomoto, Hiroshi; Aoyagi, Yoshiaki and
Tanaka, Haruo, 4,435,397, CI. 424-250.000.
Epstein, Harold M.; Schwerzel, Robert E.; and Andrus, Paul G., to
Batielle Development Corporation. Fluorescence laser EXAFS
4,435,828, CI. 378-49.000.
Epstein, Joseph W.; Osterberg, Arnold C; and Brabander, Herbert J.,
to American Cyanamid Company. Method of treating depression
using azabicyclohexanes. 4,435.419. CI. 424-274.000
Erb. Harley E.: See—
Beloate. Mickey R.; Erb. Harley E.; and Shelton. Charles W..
4.434.896, CI. 206-621.000.
Ercon, Inc.: See—
Ehrreich, John E., 4,435,214, CI. 75-251.000.
Erich Schultze KG: See— '
Schmidt. Manfred, 4,434,626. CI. 62-470000,
Erickson. Alan R.. to Rockwell International Corporation. RF Imbal-
ance detector. 4.435.683. CI. 330-2.000.
Erickson, Lawrence F.. to United States of America. Navy. Hybrid fuse
triggering device. 4.434.717. CI. 102-21O000.
Eshelman. Philip V.. to Colt Industries Operating Corp. Fuel injection
apparatus and system. 4.434.765. CI. 123-472.000
Esselte Pendafiex Corporation: See—
Holland-Letz, Gunter. 4.435,245. CI. 156-384.000.
Ethicon. Inc.: See—
Mericle. Robert W.. 4.434,795, CI 128-303.00R.
Shalaby, Shalaby W.; and Jamiolkowski, Dennis D., 4,435,590, CI.
560-61.000.
Ethyl Products Company: See— /^
Kirk, Donald C, Jr., 4,434,915, CI. 222-153.000.
Etou, Hironori: See—
Matumoto, Michiaki; Etou, Hironori; and Nakamoto, Hidekazu,
4,435,151, CI. 431-90.000.
Eue, Ludwig: See—
Forstcr. Heinz; Eue, Ludwig; and Schmidt, Robert, 4,435,208, CI.
71-105.000.
Evans, George S.; Gilmore, John F.; and Morton, Edward W , to North
American Philips Electric Corp. Energy conserving instant-start
series-sequence fluorescent lamp system with overcurrenl protection
4,435,670, CI. 315-58.000.
Evans, John D.: See—
Goode, Frederick R.; Evans, John D.; and Cox, James W., Jr ,
4,434,902, CI. 212-268.000.
Evens, Georges G , to Stamicarbon B V Process for the preparation of
copolymers of ethylene with at least one other l-alkene 4,435,552, C!
526-140.000.
Evensen, Knut, to Elkem a/s. Method and apparatus for charging a
furnace. 4,435,815, CI. 373-81.000.
Eves, E. Eugene, II: See—
Bowen, Robert F.; Freedman, George; Teich, Wesley W.; Martel,
Thomas J.; and Eves, E. Eugene, II. 4,435,628, CI. 219-1055M.
EVOG - Etablissement fur Verwaltung und Organisation: See—
Klupsch, Hans J.. 4.435.432, CI. 426-43.000.
FVVA-Werk Spezialerzeugung von Zylinder-und Sicherheitsschloss-
ern GmbH & Co. KG: See—
Prunbauer, Kurt, 4,434,636. CI. 70-358.000.
Excelermatic Inc.: See—
Horton. Paul L., 4.434,676. CI. 74-200.000.
Kraus, Charles E., 4,434,675, CI. 74-200.000.
Exxon Nuclear Company, Inc.: See—
Boldt, Allyn L , 4,435.363, CI. 422-27O000.
Exxon Research and Engineering Co.: See—
Batzold, John S.; and Savas, Judith C, 4,435,267, CI. 204-284.000
Gschwendtner, Wolfgang W. J , 4,435,609, CI. 585-670.000.
Koetsier, Wicher T.; and Verduijn, Johannes P.. 4,435,608, CI.
585-480.000.
Mintz, Donald J.; Kelly, Arnold J.; and Gleason, Anthony M ,
4,435,261, CI. 204-168.000.
Moss, Gerald, 4,435,148, CI. 431-7.000.
Yang, Tai-Cheng; Rao, Krishna K.; and Huang. I-der. 4,435,521,
a. 502-209.000.
FA. MA. di Sandra Borgato A C, S.nc.: See—
Borgato, Augusto, 4,434,635, CI. 70-279.000.
F. L. Smidth & Co.: See—
Knudsen, Hans B.. 4,435,159, CI. 432-106.000.
Fabian, David J.: See-
Berry, Donald A.; Fabian, David J.; and Lucius, John E., 4,435,035,
CI. 339-99 OOR
Fabrico Manufacturing Corp.: See — >
Ross, Ashley M ; and McKee, James A., 4,434,712, CI 99-646 OOS
Face, Samuel A., Jr.; and Face, Samuel A., Ill Surface profile measur-
ing apparatus and method 4,434,558, CI. 33-174.00P.
PI 12
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Face, Samuel A.. Ill: See-
Face. Samuel A.. Jr.; and Face. Samuel A.. III. 4.434.558. CI.
33-174.00P.
Fairchild Camera A Instrument Corporation: See —
Shideler, Jay A.; and Berry. Robert L.. 4,435.225. CI. 148-1.500.
Tickle. Andrew C. 4.435.786. CI. 365-154.000.
Tickle, Andrew C; and Vora. Madhukar B.. 4,435.790, CI.
365-218.000.
Fajt, John, to Xenell Corporation. Apparatus and methods for position-
ing electrical components. 4,434,886, CI. 198-389.000.
Falk, Robert A., to Ciba-Gcigy Corporation. Perfluoroalkyl-alkylene
branched amphoteric sulfate betaines. 4.435.330, CI. 260-458.00F.
Fardin. Carlos, to Van Dam Machine Corporation of America. Con-
Uiner lid separating assembly. 4.435,114, CI. 414-330.000.
Farr, Robert A.: See—
Carr, Albert A.; Farr, Robert A.; and Kane, John M., 4,435,571, CI.
544-384.000.
Farrell, Kent. Thermal linear actuator. 4,435,665, CI. 310-307.000.
Fasiczka, Ray G.: See —
Porowski, Janek S.; O'Donnell, William J.; and Fasiczka, Ray G.,
4,434,840, CI. 165-82.000.
Faulkner, Gene M.: See — ^
Bubley, Henry J.; Faulkner. Gene M.; laccino, Alex; and Rescio,
Giuseppe, 4,434,562. CI. 34-4.000.
Favennec. Jean L.: See —
Henaff, Louis; Morel. Michel; and Favennec, Jean L., 4.434,742. CI.
118-723.000.
Favie. Claude; and Mercadier. Michel, to Societe Nationale Elf Aqui-
taine (Production). Method of preparing cosmetological polymers.
4,435,545. CI. 525-344.000.
Fay, Ralph M., to Manville Service Corporation. Hot melt adhesive for
bonding paper to glass fiber. 4,435,469, CI. 428-285.000.
Fechalos, William A.; and Stehman, Carl J., to Rockwell International
Corporation. Dial pulse delay circuit. 4,435,620, CI. 179-18.0EB.
Feldkamper, Richard, to Windmoller & Holscher. Apparatus for pro-
ducing overlapping band rolls from superposed overlapping flat
workpieces. 4.434,948. CI. 242-59.000.
Felmeri, Jozsef: See —
Banos, Zoltan; Vereczkey. Endre; Kercy. Gyorgy; Rudolf. Peter;
Takacs, Istvan; Felmeri. Jozsef; and Bosits. Gyula. 4.435.182. CI.
23-295.00R.
Fergason, James L., to Manchester R&D Partnership. Encapsulated
liquid crystal and method. 4.435,047, CI. 350-334,000.
Ferm, Richard L.; and Kray, Louis R.. to Chevron Research Company.
Heat exchanger antifoulant. 4.435.273. CI. 208-48.0AA.
Femsler, Ronald E.: See—
Kliebphipat, Ravadee; Femsler. Ronald E.; and Hicks. James E.,
4.435,731, CI. 358-243.000.
Fery, Guy A. Greeting card construction. 4,434,889, CI. 206-216.000.
Fetter, Jozsef: See —
Lempert, Karoly; Harsanyi, Kalman; Doleschall, Gabor; Homyak,
Gyula; Nyitrai, Jozsef; Zauer, Karoly; Fetter, Jozsef; Simig.
Gyula; Visky nee Gombos, Zsuzsanna; and Barta nee Szalai,
Gizella, 4,435,322, CI. 260-239.00A.
Fickelscher. Kurt G.. to Balcke-Ducrr AG. Planetary gear. 4.434.682,
CI. 74-805.000.
Field. Thomas R.: See-
Simon. Donald J.; and Field, Thomas R., 4.435,638, CI.
219-460.000.
Fields: Ellis K.; and Nimry, Tayseer S., to Standard Oil Company
(Indiana). Adducts of I-cyclohexene-l,2-dicarboxylic anhydride with
olefins. 4.435,593, CI. 560-119.000.
Filion, Andre Y.: See —
Periman, Martin M.; and Filion, Andre Y., 4,435,610. CI.
136-255.000.
Filipic. Dusan: See—
Tmkoczy. Amadej; Stopar, Miha; Filipic. Dusan; and Opeka. Joze,
4,434,798. CI. 128-421.000.
Firestone Tire & Rubber Company, The: See-
Davis, James A., 4,435,477. CI. 428-462.000.
Gemar, Charles; and Meisch, Robert L., 4,434,953, CI. 242-107.000.
Hausch, Walter R., 4,435,456, CI. 428-36.000.
Kay, Edward L.; and Gutierrez, Richard, 4,435,337, CI.
528-493.000.
Koch, Russell W.; and Barbin, William W., 4,434,832, CI.
152-370.000.
Fischer, Artur. Fastening device. 4,434,597, CI. 52-681.000.
Fischer, Peter: See —
Schwartz, Werner; and Fischer, Peter, 4,435,211, CI. 75-62.000.
Fisher, John M., to B. F. Goodrich Company, The. Evacuation slide
device. 4,434,870, CI. 182-48.000.
Fitzgerald, Harry G., to Colgate-Palmolive Company. Disposable
absorbent product having an embossed pad containing a gel forming
compound. 4,435,178, CI. 604-365.000.
Fitzky, Hans G.: See—
Ebneth, Harold; Fitzky, Hans G.; and Oberkirch. Wolfgang,
4.435.465, CI. 428-195.000.
Flagg, Edward E., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Thiouronium
phosphonates for use in dental treattnents. 4,435,381, CI. 424-54.000.
Flaherty. Thomas; and Price. Richard H.. to John Kennedy (Civil
Engineering) Limited. Pipework. 4.434,815. CI. 138-97.000.
Flanders, Robert L.: See—
Bartholic, David B.; and Flanders, Robert L.. 4,435,272, CI.
208-127.000.
Flecker, Pierre: See —
Stenzel, Otto; and Flecker, Pierre, 4,435,818, CI. 373-104.000.
Fletcher, Ian J., to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Chromogenic quinazo-
lines. 4,435,003. CI. 282-27.500.
Florczyk, Rolf; and Krischik, Reinhold. Container having resealable
opening means. 4,434,906, CI. 220-268.000.
Flot, Regis; and Zoppi, Michel, to Raychem Ponloise S. A. Recover-
able article. 4,435,454, CI. 428-36.000.
Flowers, Allan L., to Nissan Design International, Inc. Multiple-posi-
tion spare tire mount. 4,434,919, CI. 224-42.210.
Fluckiger, Raymond W.: See—
Hulber, Loren J.; and Fluckiger. Raymond W., 4,435,464, CI.
428-167.000.
FMC Corporation: See —
Christopher, Terry M.; and Nelson, Randolph J., 4.434,616, CI.
60-451.000.
Goode, Frederick R.; Evans, John D.; and Cox, James W., Jr.,
4,434,902, CI. 212-268.000.
Foa', Marco: See —
Cainelli, Gianfranco; Foa', Marco; Ronchi, Achille U.; and Gar-
dano. Andrea, 4,435,575, CI. 546-341.000.
Focke & Co.: See—
Focke. Heinz H., 4,434,947, CI. 242-57.100.
Focke, Heinz H., to Focke & Co. Axially displaceable reel holder for
packing machine webs. 4,434,947, CI. 242-57.100.
Fog, Jorgen L.; and Nielsen, Jorgen, to Disa A/S (Dansk Industri
Syndifat A/S). Gun-mount for a machine gun supported by a fork or
for a weapon of a similar kind with means for continuously variable
adjustment of the elevation of the upper swivel arm. 4,434,703. CI.
89-37.0OB.
Foggini, Giovanni, to Lear S.n.c. di Foggini & C. Sun visors of the type
having a cell structure particularly for automobile vehicles. 4,435,009,
CI. 296-97.00H.
Fonck, Klaus-Uwe: See—
Wilkc. Heinz; and Fonck. Klaus-Uwe. 4.434,550, CI. 29-837.000,
Fonds d'Etudes pour la Securite Routiere A.s.b.l.: See—
de Brabandcr, Louis F.; and Van Linthout, Luc K.. 4.435,078. CI.
356-121.000.
Forberg, Horst; Herfort. Hermann; Hegner. Gunter; and Muller. Man-
fred, to Krone GmbH. Tool for electrically connecting insulated
wires. 4.434,542, CI. 29-566.400.
Ford Aerospace & Communications Corp.: See —
Luh. Howard H., 4.435.714. CI. 343-753.000.
Ford Motor Company: See —
Basrai, Habil S., 4,434,857, CI. 172-328.000,
BIcchinger, Chester J., 4,434,656, CI. 73-204.000.
Duffy, James J., 4,434,866, CI. 180-143.000.
Fox, David H.; Kosun, Charles C; and Casaceli, Frank B.,
4,434,754, CI. I23-I46.50A.
Hctrick, Robert E., 4,435,742, CI. 361-433.000.
Foresto, Samuel. Mass burning self-cleaning incinerator. 4,434,725, CI.
110-346.000.
Formanek, Karel; Michelet, Daniel; and Petre, Dominique, to Rhone-
Poulenc Industries. Preparation of polyphenols by oxidation of hy-
droxybenzaldehydes. 4,435,601. CI, 568-430.000.
Formica Corp.: See —
Hunt. James E. B.. 4,435.234. CI. 156-62.400.
Forry. John S,; and Garrick. John R.. to Armstrong World Industries,
Inc. Processes for forming building materials comprising non-woven
webs. 4.435.353, CI. 264-518.000.
Forsberg, John W., to Lubrizol Corporation, The. Carboxylic acid
derivatives of alkanol tertiary monoamines. 4,435,297, CI. 252-34.700.
Forshay, Steven E.: See—
Meyerhoff, Jerome D.; and Forshay, Steven E., 4,435,844, CI.
455-218.000.
Forster, Gunther; and Gresser, German. Directing-barrier for a road-
way. 4,435,106, CI. 404-6.000.
Forster. Heinz; Eue, Ludwig; and Schmidt, Robert, to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft. Herbicidally active substituted phenoxycinnamic acid
derivatives. 4,435,208, CI. 71-105.000.
Forsythe, William L., Jr.: See—
Bertolacini, Ralph J.; and Forsythe, William L., Jr., 4,435,282, CI.
208-113.000.
Foseco Trading A.G.: See —
Greensmith, Dennis; Hammerton, Roderic H.; Wall, Colin J.;
Dunkelmann, Dietger; Jaunich, Helmut; and Schiffarth, Josef,
4,435.510, CI. 501-90.000.
Fossi, Paolo: See —
Demartbe, Jean-Michel; Fossi, Paolo; and Gandon, Louis,
4,4^68, CI. 423-40.000.
Foster Grant Corporation: See —
Phillips, Richard A.; and Haddad, Theodore A., 4,435,476, CI.
428-412.000.
Fowles, Thomas A.: See —
D'Amico, Richard; Fowles, Thomas A.; and Winchell, David A.,
4,434,904, CI. 215-232,000,
Fox, David H,; Kostan, Charies C; and Casaceli, Frank B., to Ford
Motor Company, Method of on site charging of distributor magnet.
4,434,754, CI. 123-1 46. 50A.
Franchise Mailing Systems: See — '
Green, Ronald J., 4,435,246, CI. 156-542.000.
Franck, Jean-Pierre: See—
Juguin, Bernard; Franck, Jean-Pierre; Jacquin, Yves; Marcilly,
Christian; and Martino, Germain, 4,435,274, CI. 208-80.000.
Frank, John, to A.I.M. Services. Celestial clock. 4,435,795. CI.
368-16.000.
Franklin, Gordon S. Tree feller-buncher. 4,434,827, CI. 144-336.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 13
Franklin Steel Company: See-
Sweeney. Uwrence J., 4,435,107, CI. 404-10.000.
Franz, John E., to Monsanto Company. N-Organo-phosphonomethylg-
lycine-N-oxides and the use thereof to increase the sucrose content of
sugarcane. 4,435,204, CI. 71-86.000,
Frater, Georg; Suchy, Milos; Wenger, Jean; and Wintemitz, Paul, to
HofTnuum-La Roche Inc. Quinyloxy-phenyloxy-oxime ester com-
pounds having herbicidal activity. 4,435,207, CI. 71-94.000.
Frazier, Alva W.; and Dillard, Ewell F., to Tennessee Valley Author-
ity. Production of purified strong wet-process phosphoric acid.
4,435,372, CI. 423-32 1. OOR.
Freeh, Kenneth J.; and Tazuma, James J., to Goodyear Tire k Rubber
Company, The. Sulfur removal from a gu stream. 4,435,371, CI.
423-228.000.
Freedman, George: See—
Bowen, Robert F.; Freedman, George; Teich, Wesley W.; Martel,
Thomas J.; and Eves. E. Eugene, II, 4,435,628. CI. 219-10.55M.
Freiborg, Bennie. Asphalt composition hip and ridge cover. 4,434,589,
CI. 52-57.000.
French, William L., to Buckeye Molding Company. Container having
integral opening means. 4,434,908, CI. 220-276.000.
Frenznick, Anton; See—
Buchschmid, Emil; Burkel. Rainer; Danamps, Jean; Frenznick,
Anton; and Stradtmann, Gunther, 4,435,625, CI. 200-61.220.
Frey, Hansjorg; Hampel, Heinrich; Muller, Rolf; Ritter, Ernst; and
Schwaru, Reinhard, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Apparatus for ascer-
taining a predetermined rotary position of a rotational body.
4,435,128, CI. 417-63.000.
Friden, O. Burton. Infusion needle carrier. 4,435,175, CI. 604-177.000,
Fried, Lawrence, to United Sutes of America, Navy. Built-up mirror
with reduced temperature gradient. 4,435,045, CI, 350-310.000.
Friedrich, Ehrlinger; and Meyerle, Michael, to Zahnradfabrik Erie-
drichshafen AG. Hydromcchanical drive. 4,434,681. CI. 74-687.000.
Frohberger, Paul-Ernst: See-
Reiser, Wolf; Elbe, Hans-Ludwig; Buchel. Karl; Frohberger, Paul-
EnJSt; and Brandes, Wilhelm, 4.435,411, CI. 424-269.000.
Froncisz, Wojciech; and Hyde, James S., to Medical College of Wis-
consin. Microwave resonator structure. 4,435,680, CI. 324-316.000.
Fueki, Shimetomo: See —
Ohsawa, Kenji; Ito, Takao; Fueki. Shimetomo; Osawa. Masayuki;
and KuraU, Keiji, 4,435,611. CI. 174-68,500.
Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd.: See—
Arakawa. Shun, 4,435,248, CI. 162-12.000.
Kitamura, Takashi; and Kokado, Hiroshi, 4,435,491, CI. 430-49.000.
Mihayashi, Keiji; Ogawa, Tadashi; and Yagihara, Morio, 4,435,503.
CI. 430-548.000,
Okutsu, Eiichi; Iwasaki, Nobuyuki; and Takada, Shuiyi, 4,435,500,
CI. 430-419,000,
Sato, Masamichi, 4,435,069, CI. 355-3.0FU.
Fuji Shashin Film Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Katsuyama, Harumi; and Terashima, Masaaki, 4,433,362, CI.
422-56.000.
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.: See-
Suzuki, Kazuhiro; and Takahashi, Toshikatsu, 4,435,077, CI.
355-51.000.
Tan, Yoichi, 4,435,804, CI. 370-69.100.
Fujii, Katsutoshi: See—
Tsuji, Hideakira; Yamamoto, Shinjiro; Nakagami, Kazuto; Honda,
Takeo; Fujii, KaUutoshi; Kobayashi, Takashi; ObaU, Tokio;
Kojima, Mikio; and Akiyoshi, Yuji, 4,435,402, CI. 424-251.000.
Fujikura, Chozo, to Furukawa Aluminum Co., Ltd. Aluminum alloy
printing plate and method for manufacturing same. 4,435,230, CI,
148-1 1.50A.
Fujimura, Htuime: See-
Ban, Masatoshi; Miura, Kenji; Baba, Yutaka; IwaU, Noriyuki;
Fukui, Akira; Hori, Mikio; Fujimura, H^ime; and Suenaga,
Eiichi, 4,435,392, CI. 424-244.000.
Fiyino, Masahisa: See—
Fukahori, Hidehiko; Ichiyanagi, Toshikazu; IwashiU, Tomonori;
Mashimo, Yukio; Sunoucni, Akio; and Fujino, Masahisa,
4.435,061, CI. 354-173.110.
Fujisawa, Fumio: See—
Shiohau, Koki; Fujisawa, Fumio; Shiga, Motohiro; Sato, Kazuo;
Ohmori, Motoji; and Takasumi, Masakazu, 4,435,770, CI.
364-508.000.
Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See—
Kamiya, Takashi; Saito, Yoshihisa; Teriyi, Tsutomu; Nakaguti,
Osamu; and Oku. Teruo. 4,435,321, CI. 260-239.00A.
Fujishiina, Masakazu, to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha. Adja-
cent sution interference rejecting circuit. 4,435,618, CI. 381-7.000.
Fujitsu Fanuc Limited: See —
Nozawa, Ryoichiro; and Kiya, Nobuyuki, 4,435,771, CI.
364^74.000.
Fujitsu Limited: See—
Imai, Hajime; Morimoto, Masahiro; and Fioiwara. Takao,
4,435,443, CI. 427-38.000.
Ito, Takashi; and Nozaki, Takao, 4,435,447, CI. 427-94.000.
Miwa. Hirohide; and Shimura, Takaki. 4,434,661. CI. 73-625.000.
Miyazaki, Junji; Miwa. Hirohide: and Shimura. Takaki, 4,434,658,
CI. 73-618.000.
Uchida. Keiichiro; Tamura, Hiroshi; Okamoto, TeUuro; and
Okutani, Shigeaki, 4,435,765, CI. 364-200.000.
Fi^jiwara, Takao: See—
Imai, Hajine; Morimoto, Masahiro; and Fujiwara, Takao,
4,435,443, CI. 427-38.000.
Fujiwara. Yoshihiro: See —
Mayumi, Kuzuaki; Fujiwara, Yoshihiro; Tokuda, Toshio; and
Suzuki, Toshiaki. 4,435,842, CI, 455-181,000,
Fukahori, Hidehiko; Ichiyanagi, Toshikazu; IwashiU, Tomonori; Ma-
shimo, Yukio; Sunouchi, Akio; and Fujino, Masahisa, to Canon
Kabushiki Kaisha. Electric motor drive device for camera. 4,435,061,
CI. 354-173,110,
Fukui, Akira: See-
Ban, Masatoshi; Miura, Kei\ji; Baba, Yutaka; IwaU, Noriyuki;
Fukui, Akira; Hori, Mikio; Fujimura, Hajime; and Suenaga,
Eiichi, 4,435.392, CI, 424-244.000,
Fukui, Izumu; Yano, Takeshi; and Hamat&uki, Takeshige, to Nippon
Electric Co., Ltd. Lever actuator comprising a longitudinal-effect
electroexpansive transducer and designed to prevent actuation from
degrading the actuator. 4,435,666, CI, 310-328.000.
Fukumura, Takumi: See—
Ishigaki, Katsumi; Sasaki, Kazuo; and Fukumura, Takumi,
4,435,006, CI, 285-119,000.
Fukuoka, Tatsuhiko: See—
Futamura, Kenichiro; Asada, Eiji; and Fukuoka, Tatsuhiko,
4,435,482, CI, 428-553,000,
Fukushima, Nobuo; Saitou, Teruo; and Hayashida, Haruo, to Sumitomo
Chemical Co,, Ltd, Method for the orienution of thermoplutic
polyether ether ketone films, 4,435,350, CI. 264-280,000.
Fulchcr. Royce G,: See-
Burrows, Vernon D,; Fulcher, Royce G.; and Paton, David,
4,435,429, CI. 426-18.000.
Fulger, Charles V.; and Gum, Ernest K,, (o General Foods Corpora-
tion. Enzyme-saccharified all natural, ready-to-eat cereal from whole
cereal grain, 4,435,430, CI, 426-18,000.
Funaki, Yuji; Yoneyoshi, Yukio; Uhiguri, Yukio; and Izumi, Kazuo, to
Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited. Optical isomer of tnazolyl-
pentenols, and their production and use as fungicide, herbicide and-
/or plant gfowlh «gulant. 4,435,203, CI. 71-76:000.
Furuichi, Sh^hei; Ikeda, Toshiaki; and Suzuki, Masakazu, to Kabushiki
Kaisha Moriu Seisakusho, High voltage supply system for medical
equipment. 4,435,747, CI. 363-25.000.
Furukawa Aluminum Co., Ltd.: See—
Fujikura, Chozo, 4.435,230. CI. 148-1 1,50A.
Furukawa Electric Company Ltd., The: See—
Ueshima, Norio; Okawa, Nobuo; and Takayanagi, Kiyoshi,
4,435,212, CI. 75-124.000.
Furukawa, Hisao: See—
Kato, Yasushi; and Furukawa, Hisao, 4,435,536, CI, 524-378,000,
Furuu, Kenji, to Olympus Optical Co,, Ltd, Magnetic recording-repro-
ducing apparatus with consunt length cue signal, 4,435.735, CI.
360-74,400.
Furuya, Haruo: See—
Nishimura, Hiroyuki; Hasegawa, Shumpei; WaUnabe, Masahiro;
and Funjya, Hanio, 4.434.770, CI, 123-494,000
Futamura, Kenichiro; Asada, Eiji; and Fukuoka, Tauuhiko, to Taiho
Kogyo Co,, Ltd. Sliding member and process for producing the same
4,435,482, CI, 428-553,0(30.
Gabridge, Michael G, Tissue culture vessel. 4,435,508. CI. 435-284.000.
GAF Corporation: See-
Liu, Kou-chang, 4,435,588. CI. 500-21,000,
Gambino, Richard J ; and Ruf, Ralph R., to International Business
Machines Corporation. Thermochemical magnetic generator,
4,435,663, CI, 310-306.000.
Gandon, Louis: See —
Demarthe, Jean-Michel; Fossi, Paolo; and Gandon, Louis,
4,435,368, CI. 423-40.000.
Ganguly, Ashit K.; Mallams, Allan K.; and Liu, Yi-Tsung, to Schering
Corporation. Tylosin 20-imino-20-deoxo-4 "-acyl derivatives, phar-
maceutical compositions and method of use. 4.435.388, CI.
424-180.000.
Ganguly, Ashit K.: See—
Girijavallabhan, Viyyoor M.; Ganguly, Ashit K.; Pinto, Patrick A.;
and Versace. Richard W.. 4,435,412, CI, 424-270.000.
Gansert, Willi; Jakob, Gert; Ruttkowski, Lothar; Goetzke, Siegfried;
and Stammler. Kurt, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Two-part separable
electrical connection arrangement, 4,435,033, CI 33945 OOM,
Gao Gesellschaft fur Automation and Organisation mbH; See—
Pauli, Gunter; Krause, Gunter; and Lob, Erwin, 4,435,834. C\.
382-7.000.
Gardano, Andrea: See—
Cainelli, Gianfranco; Foa', Marco; Ronchi, Achille U.; and Gar-
dano, Andrea, 4,435.575. CI. 546-341.000.
Gardner, David L.: See-^
Burgess, Anthony J.; and Gardner, David L., 4,435,478, CI.
428-463,000.
Gargrave, Robert J.; Thompson, John K.; and Comstock, James F., to
READY Tools, Inc. Rotary bending and forming devices. 4,434,644,
CI. 72-387.000.
Garrett Corporation, The: See—
Boesel, Walter F.. 4.435,664, CI. 310-186.000.
Denk, Jpseph; and Martin, William B,, 4,434,881, CI. I92-89.00A.
Gu, Alston L,; and Silver, Alexander, 4,435,839, CI. 384-103.000.
Garrett, William R., to Smith International, Inc. Drill string splined
resilient tubular telescopic joint for balanced load drilling of deep
holes. 4,434,863. CI. 175-321.000.
Garrick, John R.: See—
Fon>. John S.; and Garrick, John R., 4.435.353, CI. 264-5 18.(XM.
Garstick, Larry A.: See—
Swanson, Glen £.; and Garstick, Larry A., 4,434,833, CI.
152-417.000.
PI 14
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
'J
Gartner, Roderich: See— ^
Comils, Boy; Bach. Hanswilhelm; Gartner, Roderich; and Gick,
Wilhelm. 4,435,603. CI. 568-701.000.
Caspar, Michael E. Level indicator. 4,434,561, CI. 33-366.000.
Gasparaitis, Bernard; Long, Thomas W., Jr.; and Richardson, Charles
P., to Motorola, Inc. Whip antenna construction. 4,435,713, CI.
343-702.000.
Gaubert, Jean, to Les Cables de Lyon. Semiconductor packing compo-
sition for an undersea cable, a cable containing said substance and a
method of manufacturing such a cable. 4,435,613, CI. 174-102.0SC.
Gauger, Jurgen F.; See —
Kau, Michael; Hinden, Jean M.; and Gauger, Jurgen F., 4,435,313,
CI. 502-101.000.
Gaupp, Osvin: See —
Barth, Not-Duri; and Gaupp, Osvin. 4.435,627, CI. 20O-I48.0OR.
Gavella, Giulio: See —
Carazzolo, Gianalvise; Colombo. Giancarlo; Gavella, Giulio;
Giacomuzzo, Silvano; and Gianetti. Franco, 4.435,604, CI.
568-854.000.
Gebruder Buhler AG: See—
Linzberger, Robert, 4,434,522, CI. 15-256.510.
Gedeon Vegyeszeti Gyar Rt.: See—
Banos, Zoltan; Vereczkey, Endre; Kerey, Gyorgy; Rudolf, Peter;
Takacs, Istvan; Felmeri, Jozsef; and Bosiu, Gyula, 4,435,182, CI.
23-295.00R.
Gehl. Paul O. Safety apparatus for cranes. 4.434,901. CI. 212-153.000.
Gehring. Johann: See —
Birkle, Siegfried; Gehring. Johann; and Stoger. Klaus, 4,435,265,
CI. 204-198.000.
Geigle, William L.: See—
Barbour, Kenneth L.; Geigle, William L.; and Haglid. Frank R.,
deceased, 4,435,568. CI. 544-182.000.
Gelhaus. Ralph B. Clothes drying rack. 4,434.897, CI. 211-1.300.
Gemar, Charles; and Meisch, Robert L., to Firestone Tire & Rubber
Company, The. Dual spool pretensioner. 4,434,953, CI. 242-107.000.
Gen-Tech, Inc.: See —
Tawse. Ian S.. 4.435.662, CI. 310-168.000.
General Director of the Agency of Industrial Science and Technology,
Seiichi Ishizaka: See —
Sato, Akio; Nakajima, Kenji; Takahara, Yoshimasa; Kijima,
Shizumasa; Kuwana. Noriaki; Abe, Shinya; and Yamada, Kouzi,
4,435,423, CI. 424-318.000.
General Electric Company: See—
Aloi, Anthony J.; Brooks, George D.; and Prince, Ronald E.,
4,434,700. CI. 89-34.000.
Bedard. James F.; Eichelberger, Charles W.; and Nati. Salvatore
F.. Jr., 4.435,679, CI. 323-350.000.
Bovenkerk, Harold P., 4,435.189, CI. 51-295.000.
Hershberger. Doran D., 4,434,546. CI. 29-598.000.
Stahl, Charles R., 4,434,613, CI. 60-39.070.
Tassie, Douglas P., 4,434,699, CI. 89-12.000.
Tomson, James M., 4,434,545, CI. 29-596.000.
Usry, Gerald O., 4,434,814, CI. 138-44.000.
General Equipment Co.: See —
Von Ruden, Dennis, 4.434,969, CI. 254.29.00R.
General Foods Corporation: See—
Fulger. Charles V.; and Gum, Ernest K., 4,435.430. CI. 426-18.000.
General Motors Corporation; See —
Grammes, Gerhard. 4,434.758, CI. 123-286.000.
Kaltwasser, Helmut, 4,434,998, CI. 280-721.000.
General Signal Corporation: See—
Bowden, Charles J., 4,434.708. CI. 91-436.000.
Geo Vann. Inc.: See—
Vann. Roy R.; Ribble, George W.; and George, R. Flint, 4.434,854,
CI. 166-386.000.
George, R. Flint: See—
Vann, Roy R.; Ribble, George W.; and George, R. Flint, 4.434,854.
CI. 166-386.000.
Gerber Garment Technology, Inc.: See—
LeBlond, Claude W., 4,434,691, CI. 83-56.000.
Gerber, Jeremy. Camera with automatic aperture setting and partially
color deleted viewfmder selection. 4,435,059, CI. 354-453.000.
Gerber Scientific Instrument Company, The: See —
Berdat, Henry F.; and Baines, Kerry D., 4,435.055. CI. 354-4.000.
Hevenor, Charles M.; and Wilson, David L.. 4.435,674. CI.
318-640.000.
Gergis, Isoris S.; and Lee. Wai-Tak P., to Rockwell International
Corporation. Multi-replicator stretcher detector. 4,435.784, CI.
365-8.000.
Gerhart. Fritz: See—
Sjoerdsma, Albert; Bey, PhiUppe; Jung, Michel; Gerhart. FriU; and
Schirlin, Daniel. 4,435.425. CI. 424-325.000.
Geria, Navin: See-
Shin. Chung T.; and Geria, Navin, 4,435,382, CI. 424-66.000.
Gerritsen, Jan; Atkinson, Ronald E.; and Martin, Anthony F., to
Procter &, Gamble Company, The. Dishwashing liquid including
alkyl sulfate, alkyl ether sulfate, alkylbenzene sulfonate and magne-
sium. 4,435,317, CI. 252-547.000.
Gestioni Riunite Toscana Gomma S.p.A.: See—
Gilardi, Enrico, 4,435.014, CI. 297-452.000.
Gg. Noell GmbH: See—
Krieger, Friedrich, 4,435,357. CI. 376-272.000.
Krieger, Friedrich, 4,435,358, CI. 376-272.000.
Giacomuzzo, Silvano: See —
Carazzolo, Gianalvise; Colombo, Giancarlo; Gavella, Giulio;
Giacomuzzo, Silvano; and Gianetti, Franco, 4,435,604. CI.
568-854.000.
Gianetti. Franco: See—
Carazzolo. Gianalvise; Colombo. Giancarlo; Gavella, Giulio;
Giacomuzzo, Silvano; and Gianetti, Franco, 4,435,604, CI.
568-854.000.
Gick, Wilhelm; See—
Comils, Boy; Bach, Hanswilhelm; Gartner, Roderich; and Gick,
Wilhelm, 4,435,603, CI. 568-701.000.
Giebel, Burkhard; Moormann, Hans; and Schrader, Lothar, to Siemens
Aktiengesellschaft. Circuit for a read-only memory organized in rows '
and columns to prevent bit line potentials from dropping. 4,435,789.
CI. 365-203.000. ff b . . .
Gilardi, Enrico, to Gestioni Riunite Toscana Gomma S.p.A. Elastic
insert for seats, in particular for motor vehicle seate. 4,435,014. CI.
297-452.000.
Gilchrist, Henry R., to Eckel Industries, Inc. Magnetic door hardware.
4.434,524, CI. 16-250.000.
Gill, George; Souchier, Alain; and Dorville, Georges. Combustion
chamber in a rocket propulsion system with multiple divergent por-
tion. 4,434,614. CI. 60-271.000. e »~
Gilligan, Thomas J.: See-
Chow, Yiu T.; and Gilligan, Thomas J., 4,435,754, CI. 364-200.000.
Gilmore, Brian J., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The. Method
of breaking loose vulcanized hose from a rigid mandrel. 4,435,351, CI.
264-335.000.
Gilmore, John F.: See-
Evans, George S.; Gilmore, John F.; and Morton, Edward W.,
4,435,670. CI. 315-58.000.
Gingerich, Benjamin L., to Harris Corporation. CMOS Address buffer
for a semiconductor memory. 4,435,791, CI. 365-230.000.
Ginn, Steven N., to CTS Corporation. Dual track resistor element
having nonlinear output. 4,435,691. CI. 338-125.000.
Giolitti, Nicolo, to Vigorelli Genova S.p.A. Motion conversion mecha-
nism for effecting sewing machine feed dog control. 4,434,735, CI.
112-220.000.
Girijavallabhan, Viyyoor M.; Ganguly. Ashit K.; Pinto, Patrick A.; and
Versace, Richard W., to Schering Corporation. 5R,6S,8R-2-<l-Meth-
yl-2-imidazol y Imeth y lthio)-6-( 1 -hydroxyethy l)penem-3-carboxy lie
acid. 4,435,412, CI. 424-270.000.
GiU Brothers Mfg. Co.: See-
Warner, Dale J., 4,434,986, CI. 277-42.000.
Warner, Dale J., 4,434,988, CI. 277-8 l.OOR.
Givaudan Corporation: See—
Crameri, Yvo; Ochsner, Paul A.; and Schudel, Peter, 4,435,585, CI.
549-446.000.
Given. George R., Jr., to United States of America, Navy. Sprinkler
valve. 4,434,855, CI. 169-37.000.
Givens, James M. Dental floss holder. 4,434,806, CI. 132-91.000.
GK Technologies, Incorporated: See—
Korbelak, Kenneth N., 4,434,554, CI. 30-90.800.
Glass, John P. Syringe loader and method. 4,434,820, CI. 141-2.000.
Glaverbel: See—
Mertens, Guy; and Laroche, Pierre, 4,435,043. CI. 350-288.000.
Gleason, Anthony M.: See—
Mintz, Donald J.; Kelly, Arnold J.; and Gleason, Anthony M.,
4,435,261, CI. 204-168.000.
Gleason Works, The: See—
Hunkeler, Ernst J., 4,435,110, CI. 409-11.000.
Gockler, Heinz; Till, Reinhard; and Schenk, Heinrich, to Licentia
Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH. Receiver for effecting synchronous
demodulation. 4,435,773, CI. 364-724.000.
Goetschel, Daniel B.: See-
Scott, Edward W.; and Goetschel, Daniel B., 4,435,807, CI.
371-50.000.
Goetze AG: See-
Beyer, Horst; Lonne, Klaus; and Majewski, Klaus-Peter, 4,434,989,
CI. 277-235.00B.
Neuhauser, Hans J.; and Veutgen, Hans-Jurgen, 4,435,226, CI.
148-3.000.
Goetzke, Siegfried: See —
Gansen, Willi; Jakob, Gert; Ruttkowski, Lothar; Goetzke, Sieg-
fried; and Stammler, Kurt. 4,435.033, CI. 339-45.00M.
Gold, Inc.: See-
Welch, Marilyn L., 4,434,513, Q. 2-410.000.
Goldberg, Edward M.; and Bazell, Seymour. Apparatus to be worn and
method for removing fluid from a living subject. 4,435,171, Ci.
604-49.000.
Goldberger, William; and Reed, A. K., to Superior Graphite Co.
Method of making ultra-microcrystalUte silicon carbide product.
4,435,444, CI. 427-49.000.
Goldstein, Bruce E.: See—
Neugebauer, Marcia M.; Clay, Douglas R.; Goldstein, Bruce E.;
and Goldstein, Raymond, 4,435,642, CI. 250-296.000.
Goldstein, Raymond: See —
Neugebauer, Marcia M.; Clay, Douglas R.; Goldstein, Bruce E.;
and Goldstein, Raymond, 4,435,642, CI. 250-296.000.
Gomory. PaflLjU. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Conversion of
lignite tofugfier quality fuels. 4,435,269. CI. 208-8.00R.
Gonzales. Gilbert R. Flexible helicopter rotor and pitch control mecha-
nism. 4.434,956. CI. 244-17.250.
Goode, Frederick R.; Evans. John D.; and Cox. James W.. Jr.. to FMC
Corporation. Apparatus for extending and retracting a manual boom
secuon. 4.434.902, CI. 212-268.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 15
Ooode. Joseph W.. III. to Emhart Industries, Inc. Automotive acces-
sory control system. 4.435.648. CI. 307-10,OOR.
Goodyear Aerospace Corporation: See—
Knaus, Ernest; Namsick, Raymond J.; and Smith. Herbert D..
4.435.240. CI. 156-242.000.
Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The: See-
Bell, Anthony J.; and BeyersdorfT, Leiand £., 4,435.334, CI.
526-229.000.
Christie, William C, 4,434,652, CI. 73-146.000.
Freeh, Kenneth J.; and Tazuma, James J., 4,433,371, CI.
423-228.000.
Gilmore. Brian J.. 4,435,331, CI. 264-333.000.
Grimm, Donald C, 4,433,333, CI. 324-321.000.
Landers. Samuel P.; and Egan, William E., 4,434,830, CI. 132-
2O9.0OR.
Olsen, Roy W.; and Bell, Curtu H., 4,433.352, CI. 264-504.000.
Stunn, Budd H., 4,435,599. CI. 564-433.000.
Sullivan, Carl M.; and Kelley, Mellis M., 4,435,562, CI. 528-272.000.
Throckmorton, Morford C; and Lai, Joginder, 4,433,333, CI.
326-201.000.
Goransson, Sture: See—
Adolfsson, Morgan; Goransson, Sture; and Hok. Bertil, 4.434,663,
CI. 73-724.000.
Gordon Barlow Design: See —
Barlow, Gordon A., 4,434,893, CI. 206-522.000.
Gorenje Tovama Gospodinjske Opreme N.Sol.O. Velenj: See—
Tmkoczy, Anudej; Stopar, Miha; Filipic. Dusan; and Opeka, Joze,
4,434,798, CI. 128-421.000.
Goto, Ryuji; Yamashiu, Keitaro; and Noguchi, Koji. to Hitachi Metals,
Ltd. Process for depositing magnetic toner material on electrostatic
latent images. 4,435,494, CI. 430-122.000.
Goto, Tukasa: See—
Mukainakano, Shinichi; Hattori, Tadashi; Nishida, Minoru;
Mizuno, Tom; and Goto, Tukasa. 4,434,753, CI. 123-143.00B.
Gould Inc.: See—
Supelak, Lawrence S.; Specht. Steven J.; and Hills, Richard C,
4,435.487, CI. 429-70.000.
Gould. James S.: See-
Gould. Samuel; and Gould. James S., 4,435.696. CI. 340-119.000.
Gould. Samuel; and Gould. James S., to Indicator Controls Corpora-
tion. Visor assembly for pedestrian traffic signal. 4,435,696, CI.
340-1 19.000.
Gourlay, Alexander R.. to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion. Method and apparatus for tomographical imaging. 4,435.838. CI.
382-68.000.
Gourley. Robert N., to Eastman Kodak Company. Disperse azo dves
from 2-amino-3,S-bisfluorosulphonyl thiophene and aniline, tetrahy-
droquinoline. and benzomorpholine couplers. 4.435.320. CI.
260-152.000.
Graalmann, Gerhard; and Niehues, Heiko, to Hauni-Werke Korber &
.- Co. KG. Method and apparatus for drying tobacco. 4,434,563, CI.
- 34-28.000.
Graber, Jay: See—
Kopsch, Paul J.; Ward, Donald F.; Graber, Jay; and Nichols,
Omer, 4,434,718, CI. 102-522.000.
Graham, Henry A., Jr.; Hawk, Johnna B.; and Chachowski, Rosemary
K., to Ortho Diagnostic Systems Inc. Particle washing system and
method of use. 4,435,293, CI. 210-772.000.
Graham, Tommy E., to Monsanto Company. Process for separating
aggressive gases from gas mixtures. 4,435,191, CI. 55-16.000.
Gr^, L. B.; and Kiovsky, T. E., to Shell Oil Company. Fuel and
lubricant compositions for octane requirement reduction. 4,435,187,
CI. 44-63.000.
Grammes, Gerhard, to General Motors Corporation. Diesel engine.
4,434,758, CI. 123-286.000.
Graneuke, Dennis C, to Modine Manufacturina Company. Valve
controlled fuel heater with self-adjusting valve. 4,434.773. CI.
123-557.000.
Grantland. Gary; and Boeckmann. Eduard F. B.. to GTE Automatic
Electric Inc. Latching relay hold circuit for a telephone instrument.
4.435.622, CI. 1 79-8 l.OOR.
Grass, Alfred. Door hinge for furniture doors or the like. 4,434,523, CI.
16-242.000.
Gray, Lorin S., Ill; and Doodv. Jeffrey S., to Scott Paper Company.
Method of providing a surface effect in a release paper product.
4,433.461, Cl. 428-141.000.
Gray, Michael L., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Separation of nitro-
gen from natural gas. 4.435,198, Cl. 62-28.000.
Green, Philip S., to Siemens Corporation. Ultrasonic image generating
apparatus. 4,434,662, Cl. 73-641.000.
Green, Ronald J., to Franchise Mailing Systems. Label dispensing and
applying apparatus. 4,435.246. Cl. 156-542.000.
Green. WUliam B.: See—
Carley. Don A.; Witte, Arnold C, Jr.; Green, William B.; and
Doerr, Kennit W., 4,435.299, Cl. 252-41.000.
Greensmith, Dennis; Hammerton. Roderic H.; Wall. Colin J.; Dunkel-
mann, Dietger; Jaunich. Helmut; and Schiffarth. Josef, to Foseco
Trading A.G. Protection of graphite electrodes. 4,435,510, Cl.
501-90.000.
Green way, Michael J., to Beecham Group Limited. Injectable pemciUm
composition. 4,435,414, Cl. 424-271.000.
Greer. S. Thomas: See— .....
Martin, EmU; Barch, Herbert W.; and Greer, S. Thomas, 4.434.521.
a. 15-230.110.
Gregory. Edward J., to IMI Marston Limited. Plate fin heat exchanger.
4,434,842. Cl. 165-133.000.
Greigger, Paul P., to PPG Industries, Inc. Suble inorganic coating
composition for adherent, inorganic coatings. 4,435,219, Cl
106-287.160.
Grelsson, Bo L. Axial piston pump. 4,434,709, Cl. 91-306.000.
Oresser, German: See—
Forster, Gunther; and Oresser, German, 4,433,106, Cl. 404-6.000.
Gretsch-Unitas GmbH: See—
Maus, Julius, 4,434.678, Cl. 74-47 l.OOR.
OrifTm, Rowland A.: See—
Bahary, William S.; and Griffin, Rowland A., 4,433.488. Cl.
429-212.000.
Griffith. William F. Extended cascode amplifier. 4.433,686. Cl.
330-311.000.
Griggs, David T. Speech-controlled phonetic typewriter or display
device usina two-tier approach. 4,433,617, Cl. 381-44.000.
Grimm. Donald C. to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company. The. Adipic
acid as a scorch inhibitor for carboxylated rubbers. 4.435,535. Cl.
324-321.000.
Orinde. James E., to Yamaha Hatsudoki Kabushiki Kaisha. Drive belt
for snow vehicle and suspension therefor. 4.434,867, Cl. 180-190.000.
Grosbois, Jean: See-
Thomas, Maryvonne; and Grosbois, Jean, 4,435,308, Cl.
252-181.000.
Gross, James R., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Absorbent article
having enhanced blood absorption. 4,435,172, Cl. 604-368.000.
Grotenhuis, Paulus A. M.: See—
Krijnen, Wilhelmus J.; and Grotenhuis, Paulus A. M., 4,433,382, Cl.
549-352.000.
Groult, Jacques, to Safet-Embamet Lethias. Sealing device and process
for a metal pack. 4,434,910, Cl. 220-358.000.
Grow, Harry N.: See—
Zboralski, Jon A.; and Grow. Han^ N.. 4.434.71 1, Cl. 98-1 16.0LH.
Grubbs, Calvin E., to Thomas Industries Inc. High frequency inverter
fault protection system. 4,435,749, Cl. 363-58.000.
Gruber, Walter, to Sulzer Brothers Ltd. Edge yam clamp for a weaving
machine. 4,434.817. Cl. 139-429.000.
Gruppo Lepetit S.p.A.: See—
Toja, Emilio; Omodei-Sale', Amedeo; and Selva, Domenica,
4.435,417, Cl. 424-273.00B.
Gschwendtner, Wolfgang W. J., to Exxon Research A. Engineering Co.
Isomerization of butene-1 to butene-2 in isobutylene. 4,435,609, Cl.
585-670.000.
GTE Automatic Electric Inc.: See—
Grantland, Gary; and Boeckmann, Eduard F. B., 4,433,622, Cl.
1 79-8 l.OOR.
Weise, Volker B., 4.433.846. Cl. 435-253.000.
GTE Products Corporation: See—
Brower. Boyd G., 4,435,156, Cl. 431-359.000.
Mizuhara, Howard, 4,435,480, Cl. 428-548.000.
Gu, Alston L.; and Silver, Alexander, to Garrett Corporation, The. Foil
bearing rubbing surface coating application methods. 4,435.839. Cl.
384-103.000.
Guertero Q.. Emilio C. Graphic display assembly for dynamic program
presenution. 4,434,568. Cl. 40-518.000.
Guerret. Patrick G.: See—
Bourgery, Guy R.; Douzon, Colette A.; Ancher. Jean-Francois R.;
Lacour. Alain P.; Guerret, Patrick G.; Langlois. Michel; and
Dostert. PhUippe L., 4,435.415, CI. 424-272.000.
Guido, Heinz; and Wolfgarten, Hubert, to M.A.N. Maschinenfabrik
Augsburg-Numberg Aktiengesellschaft. Electric furnace construe- *^
tion. '4,435,812, Cl. 373-72.000.
Guildford, Allen J.: See—
Blackbum, Thomas P.; Cox, Barry; Guildford, Allen J.; Le Count,
David J.; Pearce, Robert J.; and Thoraber. Craig W.. 4.435.405.
Cl. 424-258.000.
Guillaume. Jacques: See—
Nedelec, Lucien; Guillaume, Jacques; and Dumont, Claude,
4,435.408, Cl. 424-263.000.
Gulf Canada Limited: See-
Wright. Brian D.; McBeth. Raymond A.; and Wessels, Egon,
4,434,741. Cl. 114-264.000.
Gulf Oil Corp.: See—
Wissenberg, Herman; York. Earl D.; and Porter. Darrell D.,
4.435.016, Cl. 299-2.000.
Gullichsen. Johan E.; Harkonen, Esko; Niskanen, Toivo; Kujala,
Jaakko; and Reponen, Voitto, to Kamyr AB. Controlling operation of
a centrifugal pump. 4,433,193, Cl. 35-21.000. v.
Gum. Emest K.: See —
Fulger, Charles V.; and Gum. Emest K.. 4,435.430, Cl. 426-18.000.
Gunduz, Dincer H.: Sar—
Gunduz, Nurten N.; and Gunduz, Dincer H., 4,435,063, G.
354-315.000.
Gunduz, Nurten N.; and Gunduz, Dincer H., to University of Pitts-
burgh. Autoradiography method using a slide rack. 4,433,063, Cl.
334-315.000.
Gurevich, Boris, to Raychem Corporation. Electrical devices with
water-blocking insuUtion. 4,435.639, Cl. 219-544.000.
Guth, Jacob J.; Spilatro, Diane L.; and Vcrdicchio, Robert J., to John-
son & Johnson Baby Producu Company. Detergent compositions.
4,435,300, Cl. 252-117.000.
Guthmann, Alfred: See—
Hom, Peter; Hesse, Anton; Heckmann. Walter; Lebert, Urich;
Guthmann, Alfred; and Marx, Matthias, 4,433,337, Cl.
324-391.000.
PI 16
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Gutierrez, Richard: See-
Kay. Edward L.; and Gutierrez. Richard, 4,435,337. Q.
528-493.000.
Guyton, David L. Ophthalmic test apparatus having nugnification
compensation. 4,435,052, CI. 351-239.000.
Gymer, Geoffrey E.: See-
Richardson, Kenneth; and Gymer. Geoffrey E., 4,435,399. CI.
424-250.000.
H. D. Baumann Assoc.. Ltd.: See—
St. Martin, Leo I., Jr.. 4.434.965, CI. 251-121.000.
Haber, Judith G.; Jeffries. Kenneth L.; and Kilpatrick. Paul J., to
International Business Machines Corporation. Nested resource con-
trol using locking and unlocking routines with use counter for plural
processes. 4,435,766, CI. 364-300.000.
Hachiro. Nobuaki: See —
Takeuchi. Hiroo; Hachiro, Nobuaki: and Miyazaki, Yoshihisa.
4,434.707. CI. 91-376.00R.
Hadady Corp.: See —
Swander. Kenneth D.. 4,434.877, CI. 188-52.000.
Haddad. Theodore A.: See-
Phillips. Richard A.; and Haddad, Theodore A., 4,435,476, CI.
428-412.000.
Haesloop, William G.; Mann. Melvin S.; and Jones. James W., to Inter-
national Telephone A. Telegraph Corporation. Submersible pumping
system. 4.435.132, CI. 417-360.000.
Hafner, V. Walter: See-
Morris. Earl L.; and Hafner. V. Walter, 4,434,516, CI. 4.252.00R.
Hagino, Hiroshi; Nakamura, Kuniyoshi; and Kotake, Eiichi. to Japan
Servo Co. DC Bnishless motor and its driving control system.
4.435.673, Q. 318-254.00A.
Hagiwara, Syuya: See—
Hori. Yasuro; Kanoi, Minoni; Seino. Kazuyuki; and Hagiwara,
Syuya, 4,435.751. CI. 364-574.000.
Haglid. Britt I., executrix: See—
Barbour. Kenneth L.; Geigle, William L.; and Haglid, Frank R.,
deceased, 4,435.568, CI. 544-182.000.
Haglid. Frank R., deceased: See—
Barbour, Kenneth L ; Geigle, William L.; and Haglid, Frank R.,
deceased, 4,435,568, CI. 544-182.000.
Haisma. Jan: See —
Joormann, Hendrik J. M.; Verweij, Henrik; and Haisma, Jan,
4.435.200. CI. 65-64.000.
Hajime Industries Ltd.: See—
Hajime. Yoshida, 4.435,641. CI. 25O-223.00B.
Hajime, Yoshida, to Hajime Industries Ltd. Inspection apparatus for
inspecting an object to determine whether or not it contains an
abnormality, defect or the like. 4.435.641, CI. 25O-223.00B.
Hajok. Dieter: See—
Roeder, Georg; Sachs, Helmut; and Hajok, Dieter. 4.434,935, CI.
239-85.000.
Hakamata, Hitoshi. to Nissan Motor Company, Limited. Seat with a
dual-adjusuble armrest. 4,435.011, CI. 297-113.000.
Haley. Charles B.: See—
Ratcliffe. David J., deceased; Jones, Richard E.; Shevrin, Philip;
and Haley, Charles B., 4,435,776, CI. 364-900.000.
Haley, Robert D. Non-slip overshoe. 4,434,565. CI. 36-7.300.
Hall. Floyd V.. to Liggett Group Inc. Applicator for applying glue to
a travelling stream of tipping paper. 4,434,805, CI. 131-362.000.
Halliburton Company: See —
Surjaatmadja, Jim B.. 4,434.704, CI. 91-25.000.
Hallmark, BUly B.: See—
Voso. Philip T.; Hallmark. Billy B.; Thomas. Richard D.; and
Wofford, Benjamin G., 4,434,895, CI. 206-554.000.
Hallmark Cards, Inc.: See—
LeVeau, Robert, 4,434.567, CI. 40-157.000.
Hamamatsu Corporation: See-
Schiller. Norman H.; and Alfano. Robert R., 4,435,727, CI.
358-139.000.
Hamane, Tokuhito; and Tasai, Masaaki, to Matsushiu Electric Indus-
trial Co., Ltd. Winding apparatus. 4,434,945, CI. 242-7.140.
Hamane, Tokuhito: See —
Kubota, Tadashi; Hamane, Tokuhito; and Tasai, Masaaki,
4.434.819. CI. 140-92.100.
HamaUuki. Takeshige: See—
Fukui, Izumu; Yano. Takeshi; and Hamatsuki. Takeshige,
4.435,666.0.310-328.000.
Hambrecht. Juergen: See—
Brandstetter. Franz; Hambrecht. Juergen; Scharf, Bemhard; Lin-
denschmidt, Gerhard; Schwaab, Josef; and Jung, Rudolf H.,
4,435,541, CI. 525-64.000.
Hamilton Equipment Co., Inc.: See —
Mataon, Carl G.. 4,435.083, CI. 366-114.000.
Hamilton Industries, Inc.: See —
Zboralski. Jon A.; and Grow. Harry N., 4,434,71 1, Q. 98-1 16.0LH.
Hammerton, Roderic H.: See—
Greensmith, Deimis; Hammerton, Roderic H.; Wall, Colin J.;
Dunkelmann, Dietger; Jaunich, Helmut; and Schiffarth, Josef,
4,435,510, a. 501-90.000.
Hampel, Heinrich: See—
Frey, Hansjorg; Hampel, Heinrich; Muller, Rolf; Ritter, Ernst; and
Schwartz, Reinhard, 4,435,128, CI. 417-63.000.
Hampton, James E., to SEDCO, Inc. Method of instalUng sub-sea
templates. 4,435,108, CI. 405-209.000.
Handler, Anthony. Holding-down and clamping device for shackle
mechanisms. 4,434,534, cT. 24-67.100.
Hanin, Elliott, to IRV Hanin. Rear view mirror assembly. 4.435,044. Q.
350-302.000.
Hanna, Marie R.: See—
Boden, Richard M.; Hanna, Marie R.; and Tyszkiewicz, Theodore
J., 4,435,428, CI. 426-3.000.
Hannula, Donald L.: See-
Redmond, Russell J.; and Hannula, Donald L., 4,435,174, C\.
604-174.000.
Hansen, Gunnar L.: See—
Ohrberg, Carl V.; and Hansen, Gunnar L., 4.435,130, a.
417-310.000.
Hansen, Vagn A., to Wamaco of Canada Limited. Stayless shirt collar.
4,434,512, CI. 2-129.000.
Hara, Junji: See —
Ema, Kenji; Hara, Junji; Ikado, Shuhei; Kawashima, Hideo; and
Yokoo. Tomohide, 4,435.543, CI. 525-143.000.
Hara, Kiyoshi; Kojima, Yasufumi; and Nabeta, Teiichi, to Nippondenso
Co., Ltd.; and Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha. Air-conditioner
control system for automobiles. 4,434,932, CI. 236-49.000.
Hara, Syuji: See—
Hasegawa, Yoichi; Nakagawa. Mineo; and Hara, Syuji, 4,435,600,
CI. 564-464.000.
Harada, Hiroshi: See—
Ito, Satoaki; and Harada, Hiroshi, 4,435,821, CI. 375-1.000.
Harkonen, Esko: See—
GuUichsen, Johan E.; Harkonen, Esko; Niskanen, Toivo; Kujala,
Jaakko; and Reponen, Voitto, 4,435,193, CI. 55-21.000.
Harman, Maurice, to Energy Equipment Company Limited, The.
Heated chamber walls. 4,435,158. CI. 432-58.000.
Hamer. Kennit I.; Patrick, John P.; and Kos, Joseph M., to United
Technologies Corporation. Predicted motion wind turbine tower
damping. 4,435.647. CI. 290-44.000.
Harris Corporation: See-
Davis, Robert C; and Thaker. Gautam H., 4,435,823. O.
375-14.000.
Gingerich. Benjamin L., 4.435.791. CI. 365-230.000.
Harris. James E.. to Eastman, Kodak Company. Pneumatic tow bloom-
ing process. 4,435,239. CI. 156-180.000.
Harrison, Boyd L.; and Doherty, Niall S., to Men-ell Dow Pharmaceu-
ticals. Anti-inflammatory agente and antiasthmatic agente. 4,435,420.
CI. 424-277.000.
Harry, leuan L.: See-
Beck, Martin H.; Krishnakumar, Suppayan M.; and Harry, leuan
L., 4,435.244. CI. 156-379.800.
Harsanyi. Kalman: See—
Lempert. Karoly; Harsanvi, Kalman; Doleschall. Gabor; Homyak.
Gyula; Nyitrai. Jozsef; Zauer. Karoly; Fetter. Jozsef; Simig,
Gyula; Visky nee Gombos, Zsuzsanna; and Barta nee Szalu.
Gizella, 4.435,322. CI. 260-239.00A.
Hartel. Gunter; Schiele. Werner; Schurfeld. Armin; Bianchi. Valeric;
and Abidin, Anwar, to Bosch & Pierburg System OHG. Combustion
mixture generator for internal combustion engines. 4,434,772. CI.
123-549.000.
Hartline, Stephen D., to Norton Company. Chromia magnesia refrac-
tory. 4,435,514. CI. 501-1 17.000.
Hartman. George D.. to Merck & Co.. Inc. Amino and alkylaminoalk-
enoate ester derivatives of aminochloronitropyrazine. 4.435.400. CI.
424-250.000.
Hartmann & Braun AG: See—
Ilgner. Herwig; and Barth, Uu W., 4,435.849. CI. 455-601.000.
Hartmann. Helmut, to Trefilarbed Drahtwerk Koln GmbH. Method
and an apparatus for manufacturing strands from wires or ropes from
strands. 4.434.608. CI. 57-58.520.
Hartwell, George E.: See-
Butts. Susan B.; and Hartwell, George E., 4,435,605, Q.
568-878.000.
Hariwich, Gerhard; Pav, Josef; and Preuss, Dieter, to Kleinewefers
GmbH. Calender. 4,434,713, CI. 100-168.000.
Harvey, William A.: See—
Torok, Ernest J.; and Harvey. William A., 4.435.041, CI.
350-162.240.
Harwood, Leopold A.; and Shanley, Robert L., II, to RCA Corpora-
tion. Television receiver with selectively disabled on-screen charac-
ter display system. 4,435.729. CI. 358-183.000.
Hase^wa, Junzo; Kawabata. Susumu; and Niimi. Hiroshi, to Kabushiki
Kauha Toyota Chuo Kenkyusho. Pneumatic twisting spiimins appa-
ratus. 4,434.611, CI. 57-328.000.
Hasegawa, Shumpei; Narasaka, Shin; and Oteuka, Kazuo, to Honda
Motor Co., Ltd. Air/fuel ratio feedback control system for internal
combustion engines, having atmospheric pressurenjependent fail safe
function for O2 sensor. 4.434, 764^ CI. 123-440.000.
Hasegawa, Shumpei: See— \
Nishimura, Hiroyuki; Hasegawki Shumpei; Watanabe, Maaahiro;
and Furuya, Haruo, 4.434.770, XH. 123-494.000.
Hasegawa, Yoichi; Nakagawa, Mineo; and Hara, Syuji, to Japan Hydra-
zine Co., Inc. Process for preparation of tertiary butyl hydrazine.
4.435.600, CI. 564-464.000.
Hashimoto, Shunichi: See—
Noguchi, Hiroshi; Hashimoto, Shunichi; Kitamura. Shigeyoshi;
Mattuo, Takashi; Mine, Akihiko; and Kamoshita. KaUuzo.
4,435,332, CI. 260-465.00D.
Hashimoto. Takashi; and Yamazaki. Shigeyuki, to Hitachi. Ltd. Low
Btu gas burner. 4.435.153, CI. 431-208.000.
Hashimoto, Toyokazu; Wada, Hiroyuki; Kida, Maaahiko; Mattumura,
Hiaashi; and Nakayashiki, Susumu, to Hitachi, Ltd. Loop transmis-
sion system. 4,435,704, a. 340-825.010.
: O
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 17
Hasmger, Siegfried H.; Howard, James M.; and Miller, David K., to
United Sutes of America, Air Force. Self-supporting laser diffuser
flow enerpzer. 4,435.810. CI. 372-58.000.
Hata, Shun-ichi: See—
Sasahara, Kazuo; Honda, MasamiUu; Koizumi. Masuo; Murakami.
Yasushi; Neichi. Tomohiro; Nakakimura, Hiroshi; Noda,
Yukifumi; Matsushita, Hiroshi; and Hata, Shun-ichi, 4,435,391,
CI. 424-244.000.
Hatanaka, Hideo: See—
Saito. Motoyuki; and Hatanaka. Hideo. 4,435.796, CI. 368-321.000.
Hattori, Tadashi: See—
Mukainakano, Shinichi; Hattori, Tadashi; Nishida, Minoru;
Mizuno, Toru; and Goto, Tukasa, 4,434,753, CI. 123-143.00B.
Hauni-Werke Korber St. Co. KG: See—
Graalmann, Gerhard; and Niehues, Heiko, 4,434,563. CI. 34-28.000.
Hausch, Walter R., to Firestone Tire & Rubber Company, The. Appli-
cation of ambient temperature cured polymers or prepolymers to a
cured elastomer. 4,435,456, CI. 428-36.000.
Hauser, Max W., to Tektronix. Inc. Log-conformance error correction
circuit for semiconductor devices. 4.435,655. CI. 307-490.000.
Hauserman. Inc.: See—
McAteer. John E.; Bisler, Kenneth E.; Ptacnik, Jerry; and Kish,
Richard D., 4,434,596, CI. 52-243.100.
Haven, James T. Bar soap holder and dispenser. 4.435.030, CI.
312-351.000.
Hawk, Johnna B.: See-
Graham, Henry A., Jr.; Hawk, Johnna B.; and Chachowski, Rose-
mary K.. 4.435.293, CI. 210-772.000.
Hayashida, Haruo: See—
Fukushima. Nobuo; Saitou, Teruo; and Hayashida, Haruo,
4,435,350. CI. 264-280.000.
Hayashida, Yoshihiro, to Tokico Ltd. Brake pressure control valve.
4,435,019, CI. 303-6.00A.
Hayn, John W.: See—
Bellay, Jeffrey D.; Thaden, Robert C; Hayn, John W.; and Mc-
Donough, Kevin C, 4,435,763, CI. 364-200.000.
Haynes, Louie J.: See—
Lewin, David F.; Haynes, Louie J.; and Beach. Lynnc B.,
4.434,946, CI. 242-18.00G.
Haynes, Stewart, Jr.; and Mims, Donald S.. to Texaco Inc. Method for
steam injection in steeply dipping formations. 4,434.851. CI.
166-272.000.
Haynes, Stewari, Jr.: See-
Morel, Thomas J.; Haynes. Stewart. Jr.; and Park. Jack H..
4,434.852, CI. 166-273,000.
Heath Manufacturing Company: See—
Rampley, Neil, 4,435.105. CI. 403-109.000.
Heavy Oil Process, Inc.: See-
Allen, Joseph C. 4,434.849, CI. 166-252.000.
Hebert, LeRoy: See-
Bourgeois, Dale M., 4,434,853, CI. 166-285.000.
Heckmann, Walter: See —
Horn, Peter; Hesse. Anton; Heckmann. Walter; Lebert. Ulrich;
Guthmann, Alfred; and Marx. Matthias, 4.435,537. CI.
524-391.000.
Hedberg. David J.; and Nilsson, C. Gary, to VAS Corporation. FM
Video recording and reproducing system. 4.435,734. CI, 358-335 000.
Hefelc. Josef, to Kufner Textilwerke KG. Method and apparatus for
reinforcing face fabric materials for garmente. 4,435,442, CI.
427-14.100.
Hefner, Roberi E.. Jr., to Dow Chemical Company. The. Heat resistant
resin composition. 4,435.530, CI. 523-512.000.
Hegner, Gunter: See—
Forberg, Horst; Herfort, Hermann; Hegner, Gunter; and Muller,
Manfred. 4.434.542. CI. 29-566.400.
Heimgartner. Roland: See—
Comploi. Georg; Heimganner. Roland; Loacker, Artur; Huber,
Kurt; and Wallimann. Hans, 4,434.728. CI. 112-84,000.
Heitkamp, Dieter; and Wagener, Klaus, to Kemforschungsanlage
Julich Gesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung. Method and apparatus
for concentration of trace material from large water volumes.
4.435.366. CI. 423-6.000.
Hekatron GmbH: See—
Klett. Werner. 4.435,698. CI. 340-512.000.
Heki. Hideaki, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Radioac-
tive effluent gas monitoring apparatus. 4.435.644, CI. 250-435.000.
Held. Kuri. Ring wedge joint for solid or laminated wood sections.
4.435,104, CI. 403-332.000.
Helm, John L., Jr. Method of producing carbon monoxide and hydro-
gen by gasification of solid carbonaceous material involving micro-
wave irradiation. 4,435,374. CI. 423-4 15.00A.
Hemp, John; and Al-Khazraji, Yousif A. H., to National Research
Development Corporation. Electromagnetic flowmeters and meth-
ods for measuring flow. 4,434.666. CI. 73-861.120.
HenafT. Louis; Morel. Michel; and Favennec. Jean L. Installation for
draositing thin layers in the reactive vapor phase. 4,434,742, CI.
Henderson, Gerald O.: See—
Busch, Lloyd E.; Palmeter, Charles W.; Henderson, Gerald O.; and
Rice, WUliam M., 4.435,279, CI. 208-111.000.
Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft auf Atkien: See-
Conrad. Jens; Schaper, Ulf-Armin; and Bruns, Klaus, 4,435,315, CI.
252-522.00R.
Hennick, Robert P., to American Optical Corporation. Apparatus for
testing lenses by determining best focus. 4,435,079. CI. 356-123.000.
Hepner, Olen L. Extendible griU. 4,434,780, CI. 126-9.00B.
Herfort, Hermann: See—
Forberg. Horst; Herfort, Hermann; Hegner. Gunter; and Muller.
Manfred. 4,434.542, CI. 29-566.400.
Herman, Rfobert W., to New World Computer Company, Inc. Isolated
multiple core magnetic transducer assembly. 4.435.736, CI.
360-103.000.
Hernandez. Freda M.: See-
Hernandez, Ruben R,; and Hernandez. Freda M.. 4,435,452. CI.
428-17.000,
Hernandez, Ruben R.; and Hernandez. Freda M. Lil golden pine nov-
elty display device. 4.435,452, CI. 428-17,000.
Herrington. Kenneth M.; and Jeffries. Kenneth L.. to International
Business Machines Corporation. Separate stack areas for plural pro-
cesses, 4,435,780, CI, 364-900.000.
Herrmann. Ludwig: See —
Krauss. Theo; Herrmann. Ludwig; and Berger, Konrad, 4.434.566.
CI. 38-8.000.
Hershberger. Doran D., to General Electric Company. Method of
making a core. 4,434,546, CI. 29-598.000.
Hesse. Anton: See-
Horn. Peter; Hesse. Anton; Heckmann. Walter; Leberi, Ulrich;
Guthmann. Alfred; and Marx. Matthias. 4,435.537. CI.
524-391.000.
Hetrick. Robert E.. to Ford Motor Company. Electrochemical transis-
tor structure with two spaced electrochemical cells. 4.435.742. CI.
361-433.000.
Hettinger. William P.. Jr.: See—
Zandona, Oliver J.; Hettinger, William P.. Jr,; Kovach. Stephen
M.; and Beck, Hubert W., 4.435,515, CI, 502-65,000.
Hevenor, Charles M.; and Wilson, David L,, to Gerbcr Scientific
Instrument Company, The. Method and apparatus for generating a
verified plot, 4,435,674. CI. 318-640.000.
Hewlett-Packard Company: See—
Marston, Alan D.; and Anne, Lenin, 4,435.446. CI. 427-93.000.
Heynisch, Hinnch, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Flat picture tube.
4.435.672, CI. 315-366.000.
Heytmeijer. Herman R.. to North American Philips Electric Corp.
Recovery of mercury from scrap glass. 4.435.284. CI. 209-3.000.
Hicks. James E.: See—
Kliebphipat. Ravadee; Femsler. Ronald E.; and Hicks. James E.,
4,435.731. CI. 358-243.000.
Hildebrandt. Norberi: See-
Becker, Norbert; and Hildebrandt, Norbert, 4,435.103, CI.
403-292.000. *
Hildeman, Gregory J.; Kuli, John C. Jr.; and Vivola, Leo A., to Alumi-
num Company of America. Method for producing aluminum powder
alloy products having improved strength properties. 4.435.fl3. CI.
75-249.000.
Hill. Charles E., to Becton, Dickinson and Company Laminate for
weanng apparel and methods for the manufacture of the laminate.
4.435.458, CI. 428-91.000.
Hill, Manin: See—
Eisele, Hermann; Hill, Martin; and Schweizer, Hartmut. 4,435,745,
CI. 363-21.000.
Hills, Richard C: See—
Supelak. Lawrence S,; Specht, Steven J.; and Hills. Richard C,
4.435,487. CI. 429-70.000.
Hiiti Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Rumpp, Gerhard; Scholz. Dieter; and Spieth, Manfred. 4.434.859,
CI. 173-48.000.
Hinden, Jean M.: See—
Katz. Michael; Hinden, Jean M.; and Gauger, Jurgen F.. 4,435.313.
CI. 502-101,000,
Hinnenkamp. James A,, to National Distillers and Chemical Corpora-
tion, Process for the caulytic oxidation of propylene to acrylic acid.
4.435.598, CI. 562-546.000,
Hino, Yasuhiko: See —
Dohya, Akihiro; Hino. Yasuhiko; and Abe. Mittuo, 4.434.544, CI.
29-578.000.
Hinsberg, Rene: See-
Brenner. Horst; and Hinsberg, Rene, 4.434.868, CI. 180-226.000.
Hiraishi, Shipetoshi: See—
Mauushita, Toshihiko; Hiraishi, Shigetoshi; and Morishita, Sadao.
4.435,471. CI. 428-320.800,
Hirokawa. Norio; Kawachi. Tsuneo; Saito. Hiroshi; and Yoshimura,
Ryoichi, to Showa Denko Kabushiki Kaisha. Refining agent of
molten metal and methods for producing the same. 4.435,210, CI.
75-53.000.
Hirose, Yoshiharu: See —
Ito. Kazuyuki; Ouki, Masami; Miwa. Naoto; Kamigaito, Osami;
Doi, Haruo; and Hirosc, Yoshiharu, 4,435,512, CI 501-32000
Hitachi Engineering Co.. Ltd.: See—
Ishimaru. Hitoshi; Nagai, Yoji; and Masuda, Toyohiko, 4,434,620,
CI. 60-657.000.
Hitachi, Ltd.: See—
Asada, Akihiro; Umemura. Kazuhiro; Saito. Taduhi; and Sampei.
Tohru. 4,435,832, CI. 381-34.000.
Hashimoto, Takashi; and Yamazaki, Shigeyuki, 4,435,153, CI.
431-208.000.
Hiuhimoto, Toyokazu; Wada. Hiroyuki; Kida. Maaahiko; Mat-
sumura, Hisashi; and Nakayashiki, Susumu, 4.435.704, CI,
340-825.010.
Hori. Yasuro; Kanoi. Minoru; Seino. Kazuyuki; and Hagiwara.
Syuya, 4,435,751, CI. 364-574.000.
Ishimaru, Hitoshi; Nagai, Yoji; and Masuda, Toyohiko, 4,434,620,
CI. 60-657.000.
PI 18
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Koide. Kazuo, 4,433,654, CI. 3O7-4SS.0OO.
Mauui, Yatuo, 4.433,826. Q. 373-113.000.
Matumoto, Michiaki; Etou, Hironori; and Nakamoto, Hidekazu,
4.435,151. CI. 431-90.000.
Niiyama. Eisuke; and Kodama, Hideyo. 4.434.836. CI. 164-429.000.
Okouchi, Isao; Takahashi. Sankichi; Mukai. Yasuteni; Otake, Kat-
sumoto; Sasaki. Takuya; and Miyai. Masahiko. 4.433,283. CI.
209-230.000.
Sakow. Hirothi; and Kashioka. Seiji. 4.433.835. CI. 382-8.000.
Shinkawa. Keiro; Noda. Maaaki; and Sodeyama. Chuichi,
4,435.688, CI. 331-99.000.
Shiohata, Koki; Fujisawa, Fumio; Shiga, Motohiro; Sato. Kazuo;
Ohmori, Motoji; and Takasumi. Masakazu. 4.435.770. CI.
364-508.000.
Suzuki, Shigeo; Kakuta, Atsushi; Mori. Yasuki; and Morishita,
Hirosada, 4,435,492, CI. 430-58.000.
Takahashi, Akio; Wajima, Moloyo; Nishikawa. Akio; and Mori-
shita, Hirosada, 4.435,560, CI. 528-170.000.
Tomooka, Keiji, 4,435,825. CI. 375-113.000.
Hitachi Metals, Ltd.: See—
Goto, Ryuji; Yalnashita, Keitaro; and Noguchi, Koji, 4.435.494, CI.
430-122.000.
Ho. Cecil C; Sharpe, Claude A.; Butcher, Bruce A.; and Bell, Alexan-
der G., to Texas Instruments Incorporated. Radio telephone with
position transmission capability. 4,435,711, CI. 343-389.000.
Hobart Brothers Company: See —
Risberg, Robert L., 4,435,632. CI. 219-130.510.
Hobart Corporation: See —
Scharsig, Hans-Hermann, 4,434,694, CI. 83-41 l.OOR.
Hodges, Michael J., to Detexomat Machinery Limited. Boarding appa-
ratus and method. 4,434,918, CI. 223-75.000.
Hodshire. Vincent B. Fishing apparatus. 4,434,573, CI. 43-15.000.
Hoelzinger, Walther J., to Boise Cascade Corporation. Method for
forming multi-flute-layer corrugated board. 4,435,237, CI.
156-157.000.
Hoenick, Hermann H., to Lucas Industries Limited. Vehicle brake
actuator and braking system. 4,435.021, CI. 303-10.000.
Hoemer, Griffith L.: See—
Brandsen, Donald H.; and Hoemer, Griffith L., 4,434,922, CI.
224-314.000.
Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.: See —
Frater, Georg; Suchy, Milos; Wenger, Jean; and Wintemitz, Paul,
4,435,207, CI. 71-94.000.
Krasso, Anna; and Ramuz. Henri. 4.435,406. CI. 424-263.000.
Hofmeister, Helmut: See —
Annen, Klaus; Laurent, Henry; Hofmeister, Helmut; and Wiechert,
Rudolf, 4,435,390, CI. 424-243.000.
Hoguet, Robert G.; Kalz, Dietmar; Thomas, Thomas J.; Whetsell,
Henry T.; Wolff, Joachim; Nonn, Konrad; and Wolf. Karl-Heinz. to
Mobay Chemical Corporation; and Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Con-
centrated flowable storage suble aqueous formulations of cold dye-
ing fiber reactive dyestuffs. 4.435,181. CI. 8-527.000.
Hok, Bertil: See—
Adolfsson, Morgan; Goransson, Sture; and Hok, Bertil, 4.434,665.
CI. 73-724.000.
Holcomb, Dysart E.; Drechsel, Erhart K.; and Sardisco, John B.. to
Pennzoil Company. Preparation of monocalcium phosphate and/or
phosphoric aad from phosphate rock. 4,435,370, CI. 423-158.000.
Holland-Letz, Gunter, to Esselte Pendaflex Corporation. Apparatus for
imprinting and dispensing pressure-sensitive labels adhering to a
carrier tape. 4,435,245, CI. 156-384.000.
Holm, Poul: See—
Barbesgaard, Peder O.; Jensen, Georg W.; and Holm, Poul.
4.435,307,0.252-174.120.
Holmberg Electronics Corporation: See —
Black, Richard W.; Kirayoglu, Erol M.; Leiter, Harold E.; and
Smith, Richard C, 4,435,031, CI. 339-17.00C.
Holt, Harley R., to Allied Corporation. Conductor termination appara-
tus. 4,434,551, CI. 29-861.000.
Holtkamp, Bemd: See—
Eckert, Wolfgang; Holtkamp, Bemd; and Kilian, Emst A.,
4,435,685, CT. 330-261.000.
Holtkamp, Reinhold. Capillary disc and support therefor. 4,434,577, CI.
47-81.000.
Honda Giken Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Nishimura, Hiroyuki; Hasegawa, Shumpei; Watanabe. Maaahiro;
and Funiya. Haruo, 4,434,770, CI. 123-494.000.
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Ikenoya, Yasuo; and Ishida, Yoichi, 4,434,615, CI. 60-293.000.
Okubo. Kiyokazu, 4.434.878. CI. 192-48.920.
Wada. Minoru; Arai. Isao; Okubo. Takeshi; and Mori. Yoshiaki.
4.434.588. CI. 51-344.000.
Honda, Masamitsu: See—
Sasahara. Kazuo; Honda. Masamitsu; Koizumi. Masuo; Murakami.
Yasushi; Neichi, Tomohiro; Nakakimura, Hiroshi; Noda.
Yukifumi; Matsushita. Hiroshi; and Hata. Shun-ichi. 4,435.391.
CI. 424-244.000.
Honda Motor Co.. Ltd.: See—
Hasegawa, Shumpei; Narasaka, Shin; and Ottuka, Kazuo.
4.434.764. Q. 123-440.000.
Otobe, Yutaka; Yamato, Akihiro; and Umesaki. Shigeo. 4.434.769,
CI. 123-493.000.
Honda, Takeo: See—
Tsuji. Hideakira; Yamamoto. Shinjiro; Nakagami. Kazuto; Honda.
Takeo; Fuiii. Kauutoshi; Kobayashi. Takaahi; Obata, Tokio;
Kojima, Mikio; and Akiyoshi. Yuji. 4.435.402. Q. 424-231.000.
Honeywell. Inc.: See —
Stevens, Emsley H., 4,435.632. Q. 307-297.000.
Honkawa, Yoshinori: See—
Ishii, Koji; and Honkawa. Yoshinori. 4,434.716. CI. 101-142.000.
Hoover Company. The: See—
Tschudy, Donald B.; and Morrow, Charles R., 4,434,863. CI.
180-I9.00H.
Hoover Universal. Inc.: See-
Myers. William H.; and Dundas, Dennis L.. 4,433.147. Q.
425-577.000.
Hoppe. Peter P.; Schneider. Joachim U.; Schulz. Bemhard; and Tiefen-
bacher, Hubert, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Suble injecUble JS-
carotene micellar solutions and their preparation. 4,435.427, CI.
424-356.000.
Horey, Leonard I.: See—
Salge, Edward A.; and Horey, Leonard I., 4.434.732, Q. 112-
158.00E.
Hori, Mikio: See-
Ban, Masatoshi; Miura, Kenji; Baba, Yutaka; Iwata, Noriyuki;
Fukui, Akira; Hori. Mikio; Fujimura. Hajime; and Suenasa.
Eiichi. 4,435,392, CI. 424-244.000.
Hori, Yasuro; Kanoi, Minoru; Setno, Kazuyuki; and Hagiwara, Syuya,
to Hitachi, Ltd. Vibration/noise reduction device for electrical appa-
ratus. 4,435,751, CI. 364-574.000.
Horiike, Tetsuro; Kuroda, Takio; and Shiozaki, Tomoharu, to Kanzaki
Paper Manufacturing Company Limited. Process for preparing mi-
crocapsules for pressure sensitive manifold paper. 4,435,340, CI.
264-4.700.
Horikawa, Yoshiaki; and Imai, Toshihiro, to Olympus Optical Co.. Ltd.
Telephoto lens system. 4,435,049, CI. 350454.000.
Horike, Masanori; and Ebi, Yutaka, to Ricoh Company, Ltd. Deflection
control type ink jet printing apparatus. 4.435,720, CI. 346-75.000.
Horike, Masayoshi; Yamamoto, Haruo; Yamane, Yukio; Yoshiyuki,
Kazuhiko; and Endo. Toshiaki, to Nissan Motor Company, Limited.
Window structure of a vehicle body. 4,434,593, CI. 52-208.000.
Horiuchi, Tomofusa, to Nissan Motor Company, Limited. Vaporizer
for a liquefied petroleum gas engine. 4,434,774, CI. 123-557.000.
Horizon Chemical, Inc.: See —
Kenny, Thomas C; and Plunkett, John P., 4,435,185, CI. 44-68.000.
Horlander, Frank J., to International Business Machines Corporation.
Thermal printer edge compensation. 4.435.634, CI. 219-216.000.
Hom, Peter; Hesse, Anton; Heckmann, Walter; Lebert, Ulrich; Outh-
mann, Alfred; and Marx, Matthias, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft.
Storage suble dispersions of aromatic polyesters in polyhydroxyl
compounds and their preparation. 4,435,537, CI. 524-391.000.
Horayak, Gyula: See—
Lempert, Karoly; Harsanyi, Kalman; Doleschall, Gabor; Homyak.
Gyula; Nyitrai. Jozsef; Zauer, Karoly; Fetter, Jozsef; Simig,
Gyula; Visky nee Gombos, Zsuzsanna; and BarU nee Szalai.
Gizella. 4,435,322, CI. 260-239.00A.
Horton Manufacturing Co., Inc.: See-
Raines, Charles D., 4,434,883, CI. 192-1 lO.OOR.
Horton, Paul L., to Excelermatic Inc. Traction roller transmission with
mechanical transmission ratio control. 4,434,676. CI. 74-200.000.
Horvath, Kalman: See—
Kuhlemann. Bruce N.; Horvath. Kalman; and Wharff. Prentice C.
4,435.177, CI. 604-263.000.
Horvath, Vincent V.: See—
Krause, Richard H.; Pfeiffer, Thomas J.; and Horvath, Vincent V.,
4,435,093, CI. 374-129.000.
Hosoi, Kinji; Takeda. Hiroyuki; Kobayashi, Hisao; and Konaka,
Daijiro, to Nihon Early Kabushiki Kaisha. Plate positioning appara-
tus. 4,434,693. CI. 83-71.000.
Hosono, Nagao: See —
Adachi, Hiroyuki; and Hosono, Nagao, 4,435,072, O. 355-3.0FU.
Hotchkiss-Brandt Sogeme H.B.S.: See—
Divoux, Michel; Bonansea, Hubert; and Constant, Bernard,
4,434,888, CI. 198-466.000.
Houph, Leslie; Phadnis, Shashikant P.; Khan, Riaz A.; and Jenner,
Michael R., to Tate & Lyle Limited. Sweeteners. 4,435,440, CI.
426-658.000.
House, Marshall K., to Cascade Corporation. Lift truck paper roll
clamp having automatically adjustable roil of different diameters.
4,435,117, CI. 414-620.000.
House, Marshall K., to Cascade Corporation. Lift truck load clamp
having power-actuated pivotal subframe for handling paper rolls.
4.435,119,0.414-620.000.
House, Roy F., to Venture Innovations, Inc. Concentrated hydrophilic
polymer suspensions. 4,435,217, CI. 106-171.000.
House, Roy F., to Venture Innovations, Inc. Method of liquifying waxy
materials. 4,435,309, CI. 252-314.000.
House, Roy F., to Venture Innovations, Inc. Compositions and pro-
cesses for using hydroxyethyl cellulose in heavy bnnes. 4,435,564. CI.
536-87.000.
Howa Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kobayashi. Takeo. 4.434.990. CI. 279-4.000.
Howard, James M.: See—
Hasinger. Siegfried H.; Howard. James M.; and Miller. David K.,
4.435.810. CI. 372-58.000.
Howeth. D. Franklin. Dust conveying and collecting system and
method. 4,434.861. CI. 175-66.000.
Hoye, Thomas M. Universal pivoting and folding beverage holder
apparatus. 4,434,961, CI. 248-311.200.
Hsieh, Der-Chang; and LaBudde. Edward V.. to Burroughs Corpora-
tion. Optical memory system having track following and seeking
capabUities. 4,435,797. CI. 369-32.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 19
Hsieh. John C; and Wu. Wei-Wha, to International Busineu Machines
Corporation. Testing of logic arrays. 4,435,805, CI. 371-25.000.
Hsieh, John T. T.: See—
Pennington, B. Timothy; Roling. Paul V.; and Hsieh, John T. T.,
4.435.518, CI. 502-107.000.
Hsu, Jau Y., to Societe d' Assistance Technique pour ProduiU Nestle
S.A. Rice pasu composition. 4.435.435, CI. 426-557.000.
Huang, I-der: See-
Yang, Tai-Cheng; Rao, Krishna K.; and Huang, I-der, 4,433,321,
CI. 502-209.000.
Huber. Kurt: See—
Comploi. Georg; Heimgartner. Roland; Loacker, Artur; Huber.
Kurt; and Wallimann, Hans. 4.434.728. CI. 112-84.000.
Huckabee. Bill F.; and Wright, William L., to International Busineu
Machines Corporation. Electric circuit packasinK member.
4,435,740, CI. 361-398.000. i— •• •
Hudon, Paul. Self-closing cylindrical gate for hydraulic turbo-machine.
4,434,964, CI. 251-62.000.
Hudspith, Sydney, to American Hospital Supply Corporation. Liquid
transfer device. 4,434,823, CI. 141-329.000.
Huey Company; See —
Shelton, Huey G.; and Zack, Leonard N., 4,434,721, Q. 108-4.000.
Hughes Aircraft Company: See—
Ajioka, James S.; and Joe. Dick M., 4,435,715, CI. 343-771.000.
Hughes, John Rhys: See—
Beach-Thomas, Anthony W., 4,434,992, CI. 280-47.138.
Hughes, Thomas R.: See—
Bum, Waldeen C; and Hughes, Thomas R., 4,435,283, CI.
208-138.000.
Hughes Tool Company: See—
Witten, Raymond L., 4,435,661, CI. 310-90.000.
Hulber, Loren J.; and Fluckiger, Raymond W., to Jostens, Inc. Hinge
for thermoplastic material. 4,435,464, CI. 428-167.000.
Hulsing, Rand H., II; Peters, Rex B.; and Steinke, Kurt E., to Sunds-
trand DaU Control, Inc. Borehole orienution detection system
employing polarized radiation. 4,434,634, CI. 73-131.000.
Humboldt Products Corp.: See-
Darnell, W. Dale, 4,434,791, CI. 128-20.000.
Hunkeler, Emst J., to Gleason Works, The. Drive train for gear bob-
bing machine. 4,435,110, CI. 409-11.000.
Hunt, Glenn E.; Alexander, Michael C.; Lozano, Gerald L.; and
Manktelow, Gerald O., to DaU General Corporation. Apparatus and
method for simultaneous display of characters of variable size and
density. 4,435,703, CI. 340-723.000.
Hunt, James E. B., to Formica Corp. Method of producing high pres-
sure decorative laminates conuining an air-laid web. 4,435,234, CI.
156-62.400.
Hunt, James W.; and Johnson. Raymond A., to UMC Industries, Inc.
Cash box for paper currency. 4,434,931, CI. 232-15.000.
Hunt, Mack W.: See—
Brannen, Cecil G.; and Hunt, Mack W., 4,433,301. CI. 232-33.200.
Huntington Alloys, Inc.: See—
Eiselstein, Herbert L.; Smith, Darrell F., Jr.; and Clatworthy,
Edward F., 4,435,359. CI. 419-3.000.
Humik, Helmut: See—
Thormer, Joachim; Bertram, Hans H.; Benn, Otto; and Humik,
Helmut. 4.435.532, CI. 524-92.000.
Huskey, Joseph E. Dental flossing aid. 4,434.807, CI. 132-92.00R.
Huth, Andreas: See—
Braestrup, Claus T.; Christensen, Jogen A.; Engelstoft, Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen, Ralph; Huth, Andreas;
Rahtz, Dieter; Seidelmann, Dieter; Kehr, Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat, Dieter, 4,435,403, CI. 424-236.000.
Huzino, Seizi: See—
Kohama, Tokio; Huzino, Seizi; Obayashi, Hideki; Kawai, Hisasi;
and Egami, Tsuneyuki, 4,434,767, CI. 123-481.000.
Hyatt, Gilbert P. Electro-optical illumination control system. 4,433.732,
CI. 358-254.000.
Hyde. James S.: See—
Froncisz. Wojciech; and Hyde. James S.. 4,435,680. CI.
324-316.000.
Hydro Quebec: See—
Drouet, Michel G.; and Nadeau, Francois, 4,435,631, CI,
219-124.020.
laccino, Alex: See—
Bubley, Henry J.; Faulkner, Gene M.; laccino, Alex; and Rescio,
Giuseppe, 4,434,562, CI. 34-4.000.
Ichiyanagi, Toshikazu: See—
Fukahori, Hidehiko; Ichiyanara, Toshikazu; Iwashita. Tomonori;
Mashimo, Yukio; Sunouchi, Akio; and Fujino, Masahisa,
4,435,061,0.354-173.110.
lezuka, Isamu; and Nakano, Kazuo, to Toyou Jidotha Kabushiki Kai-
sha. Fuel supply cut control device of an internal combustion engine.
4,434,759, CI. 123-325.000.
Iguchi, Takao: See—
Tagawa, Kenichi; and Iguchi, Takao, 4.435.024, O. 308-217.000.
lioka, Akira, to Nihon Dixie Company, Limited. Method for producing
a heat-insulating paper container from a paper coated or laminated
with a thermoplastic synthetic resin film. 4,435,344, O. 26445.100.
Ikado, Shuhei: See—
Ema, Kenji; Hara, Junji; Ikado, Shuhei; Kawashima, Hideo; and
Yokoo, Tomohide, 4,435,543, O. 525-143.000.
Ikai, Shigeru: See —
Ueno, Haruo; Yano, Takefumi; Inoue, Toki^i; Ikai, Shigeru; Kai.
Yoshiyuki; and Shimizu. Michimasa. 4.435,330, CI. 326-73.000.
Ikeda Bussan Co., Ltd.: See—
Arihara, Takumi, 4,435,013, O. 297-364.000.
Ikeda, Junichi; Ohtani, Iwao; Uuumi, Noriyuki; and Nojima. Shinichi,
to Tokico Ltd. Arm for a programme controlled manipulator.
4,435,120. CI. 414-735.000.
Ikeda, Toshiaki: See—
Furuichi, Shuhei; Ikeda, Toshiaki; and Suzuki, Masakazu,
4,435,747, O. 363-25.000.
Ikeda, Yoshio, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Washer-
dehydrator. 4,434,630. O. 68.I8.00F.
Ikenoya, Yasuo; and Ishida. Yoichi, to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Exhaust gu cleaning device of internal combustion engines.
4,434,615,0.60-293.000. *
Ikezaki, Eiji: See-
Murakami, Shozo; Aoki, Hiroyuki; MaUuo, Saburo; Ikezaki, Eiii;
and Yamaura, Kenji, 4,434,976, O. 266-268.000.
Ilgner, Herwig; and Barth, Uu W., to Hartmann ft Braun AG. Optical
transmission system. 4,433,849, O. 455-601.000.
Imai, H^ime; Morimoto, Masahiro; and Fujiwara, Takao, to Fujiuu
Limited. Method for forming a protecting film on side walls of a
semiconductor device. 4,435,443, CI. 427-38.000.
Imai, Tamouu, to UOP Inc. Dehydrogenation of dehydrogenatable
hydrocarbons. 4.435,607, CI. 585-443.0O0.
Imai, Toshihiro: See—
Horikawa, Yoshiaki; and Imai, Toshihiro, 4,435,049, CI.
350-454.000.
Imai, Youg, to Olympus Optical Company Limited. Capacitively cou-
pled routional speed detector. 4,435,702, O. 340-671.000.
IMI Marston Limited: See-
Gregory, Edward J., 4,434,842, CI. 165-133.000.
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC: See—
Blackbum, Thomas P.; Cox, Barry; Guildford, Allen J.; Le Count,
David J.; Pearce. Robert J.; and Thomber. Craig W.. 4,435,405,
O. 424-238.000.
Burgess, Anthony J.; and Gardner, David L., 4,433,478, O.
428-463.000.
Imperial Group Limited: See-
Bolt, Anthony J. N.; and Chard, Brian C, 4,434,804, CI.
131-309.000.
Inae, Shoji; and Okamoto, Harunori, to Mitsuboshi Beltina Ltd.
Method of manufacturing a foldable bicycle tire having flexible
beads. 4,435,236, CI. 156-132.000.
Inagaki, Miuuo; and Sasaya, Hideaki, to Nippon Sokcn, Inc Compres-
sor having rotor routing without contracting side plates. 4,435,140,
CI. 418-259.000.
Incerti Baldi, Andrea: See—
Ruscitti, Tomaso; Albini, Giovanni; Torretu. Roberto; and Incerti
Baldi, Andrea, 4,434,916, CI. 222-321.000.
Indicator Controls Corporation: See-
Gould, Samuel; and Gould, James S., 4,435,696, O. 340-119.000.
Industrial Parts Depot: See—
Rasmussen, Robert, 4,434,642, CI. 72-356.000.
Industrie Zanussi S.p.A.: See—
Bianchi, Giuseppe; and Sburlino, Roberto, 4,434,629, CI. 68-
13.00A.
Ingemann, Ole, to A/S Haustrup Plutic. Container having an originally
sealed condition which can be opened and thereafter closed.
4,434,907, O. 220-276.000.
Ingersoll-Rand Company: See—
Luthi, Oscar; and Carlsmith, Lawrence A., 4,435,085, O.
366-155.000.
Ingram, Larry S.: See —
Summerfield, Martin; Meuina, Neale A.; and Ingram. Larry S..
4.434,655, CI. 73-167.000. '^
Inokuchi. Hiroo: See—
Tamura. Shohei; Sano, Mizuka; Inokuchi, Hiroo; Toriumi, Ko-
shiro; and Sato, Naoki, 4,435,375, CI 423-439.000.
Inoue, Hiroshi: See—
Komeya, Kauutoshi; Tsuge. Akihiko; and Inoue. Hiroshi,
4,435,513, CI. 501-96.000.
Inoue, Tokuji: See—
Ueno, Haruo; Yano, Takefumi; Inoue, Tokuji; Ikai, Shigeru; Kai,
Yoshiyuki; and Shimizu, Michimasa, 4,435,550, CI. 526-73.000.
Inoue, Yoshio: See—
Sak»iia», Kaoru; Somezawa, Masuhi; Takamizawa, Minoru;
Inoue, Yoshio; and Yoshioka, Hiroshi, 4,435,485, CI 428-694.000
Inowa, Shigeru: See—
Seimiya, Ryubun; Inowa. Shigeru; Tarumi, Norijoshi; Mauunawa,
Masahiko; and Tokunaga, Hiroshi, 4,435,723, O. 346-154.000.
Institut Francais du Petrole: Me—
Dinh, Chan T.; Desvard, Alain; Jacquin, Yves; and Martino, Ger-
main. 4,435,277. CI. 208-108.000.
Juguin, Bernard; Franck, Jean-Pierre; Jacquin, Yves; Marcilly,
Christian; and Martino, Germain, 4,435,274. CI. 208-80.000.
Institute of Gu Technology: See—
Vorres, Karl S., 4,435,364, O. 422-145.000.
International Busineu Machines Corporation: See—
Basi, Jagtar S.; and Mendel, Eric, 4,435,247, CI. 156-636.000.
Baum, Richard I.; and Sakalay, Frdilerick E., 4,435,759, CI.
364-200.000.
Cason, William C; McCaskill, Rex A.; and Kamer, Francisco A.,
4,435,778, O. 364-900.000.
Oambino, Richard J.; and Ruf. Ralph R., 4,435,663, CI.
310-306.000.
Gourlay, Alexander R., 4,435,838, CI. 382-68.000.
PI 20
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Haber. Judith G.; JefTries, Kenneth L.; and Kilpatrick. Paul J.,
4.435.766. CI. 364-300.000.
Herrington. Kenneth M.; and JefTries, Kenneth L., 4,435,780, CI.
364-900.000.
Horlander, Frank J., 4.435.634, CI. 219-216.000.
Hsieh. John C; and Wu. Wei-Wha, 4,435.805. CI. 371-25.000.
Huckabee. Bill F.; and Wright, William L., 4,435,740, CI.
Kaufman, Dan R.; and Thompson. Gerhard R., 4,435,782, CI.
364-716.000.
Lone. Raymond A.; and Strong, Hovey R., Jr., 4,435,758, CI.
McCaskill. Rex A.; Mclnroy. John W.; and Waldo, Paul D
4,435.777, CI. 364-900.000.
Meritt, Allan S.. 4.435.755, CI. 364-200.000.
Milligan, Charles A.; Videki. Edwin R., II; and Yates. Winston F..
4,435,762, CI. 364-200.000.
Rizzi. John R.. 4.435,753. CI. 364-200.000.
International Computers Limited: See —
Stevens, Reginald W., 4,435,705. CI. 340-825.050.
International EnvironmentaJ Manufacturing Co.: See
Alford, Arthur L., 4,434,843. CI. 165-150.000.
International Flavors A Fragrances Inc.: See —
Boden. Richard M.; Hanna. Marie R.; and Tyszkiewicz, Theodore
J., 4.435,428, CI. 426-3.000.
Licciardello, Michael; and Boden, Richard M., 4,435,331, CI.
Sprecker, Mark A., 4,435,316, CI. 252-522.00R.
International Jensen Incorporated: See —
Thakkar, Narendra C, 4.435,833. CI. 381-109.000.
International Paper Company: See—
Paoli, Bruno, 4.434,926. CI. 226-172.000.
International Telephone and Telegraph Corporation: See—
Bowen, James H.; Baldwin, David L.; and Couch, Philip R
4,435,850, CI. 455-606.000. "
Das, Santanu; Chea, Ramon C. W.. Jr.; and Casterline. Russ C.
4.435,803. CI. 370-16.000.
Haesloop, William G.; Mann, Melvin S.; and Jones, James W.,
4,435,132, CI. 417-360.000.
Smith, John C. 4,435,238, CI. 156-171.000.
Winter, Joseph; Dantzig, Jonathan A.; and Tyler, Derek E.,
4,434,837,0.164-468.000.
Ionics, Incorporated: See —
Pabst. Patrea L.; and Bing. David H., 4,435.318, CI. 260-1 12.00B
Irie, Michiyuki: See—
Yoshino, Shigeo; Zenbutsu, Tadashi; Asami. Hajime; and Irie,
Michiyuki, 4,435,215, CI. 106-84.000.
Iniya, Seiichi: See-
Nagano, Susumu; Iruya, Seiichi; Yasuda, Yoshinori; and Makino,
Tomoaki, 4,435,769, CI. 364-464.000.
IRV Hanin; See—
Hanin, Elliott, 4.435,044, CI. 350-302.000.
Irving. Edward, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Carboxyl-containing
compositions and their polymenzation. 4,435,497, CI. 430-288 000
Isaac, Otto: See—
Oepen, Gerhard; Mangartz. Karl-Heinz; Seifried, Norbert; Engel,
Jurgen; and Isaac, Otto, 4.435.563, CI. 536-18.100.
Ise, Yukihiko: See—
Yamashita, Ichiro; and Ise, Yukihiko, 4,434,671, CI. 73-862.480
Ishida, Masahide: See —
Nakatani. Hiroshi; Ishida. Masahide; and Yamamoto, Hachizou.
4,435,767, CI. 364-405.000.
Ishida, Yoichi: See—
Ikenoya, Yasuo; and Ishida, Yoichi, 4,434,615, CI. 60-293.000.
Ishigaki, Katsumi; Sasaki, Kazuo; and Fukumura, Takumi, to Kabushiki
Kaisha Yamamoto Suiatsu Kogyosho. Automatic pressurized con-
necting device. 4,435,006, CI. 285-119.000.
Ishiguri, Yukio: See —
Funakj, Yuji; Yoneyoshi, Yukio; Ishiguri, Yukio; and Izumi, Kazuo,
4,435.203, CI. 71-76.000.
Ishii, Koji; and Honkawa, Yoshinori, to Ryobi Ltd. Operating lever
device for printing machine. 4,434,716, CI. 101-142.000.
Ishii. Susumu: See —
Nagata, Kazuo; and Ishfi, Susumu, 4,434,923, CI. 225-97 000
Ishikawa, Soji. Needle assembly. 4,435,176, CI. 604-190.000.
Ishimaru, Hitoshi; Nagai, Yoji; and Masuda, Toyohiko, to Hitachi, Ltd.;
and Hitachi Engmeering Co., Ltd. Condensation system for power
plant. 4,434,620, CI. 60-657.000.
Ishimaru, Kimio; and Abe, Kenichi, to Osaka Gas Co., Ltd. Combina-
tion heating apparatus. 4,435,629, CI. 219-10.55A.
Itakura, Hideo: See—
Maeda, Nobuyoshi; Itakura, Hideo; and Yagi, Takashi, 4,434.646.
CI. 72-451.000.
Italtel Societa Italiana Telecomunicazioni S.p.A.: See-
Bonaparte, Ennio; and Mosca, Virgilio, 4,435,619, CI. 179-17.00R.
Ito, Hiroo; Kasanami, Takeo; and Miura, Shuji, to Sanwa Kako Com-
pany, Limited. Method of producing open-cell foamed articles of
cross-linked polyolefms. 4,435,346, CL 264-54.000.
Ito, Kazuyuki; Oukj, Masami; Miwa, Naoto; Kamigaito, Osami; Doi,
Haruo; and Hirose, Yoshiharu, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd.; and Kabu-
shiki Kaisha Toyou Chuo Kenkyusho. Process for producing cordi-
ente ceramic products. 4,435.512, CI. 501-32.000.
Ito, Masahiro: See —
Suzuki, Yoshihiro; Nakagawa, Shuichi; Kawamura, Nobuhisa;
Kurihara, Shuichi; Sakuma, Osamu; and Ito, Masahiro, 4,435.772
CI. 364-520.000.
Ito, Satoaki; and Harada. Hiroshi, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd. Re-
ceiver m a frequency hopping communication system. 4,435,821, CI.
Ito, Takao: See—
Ohsawa, Kenji; Ito, Takao; Fueki, Shimetomo; Osawa, Masayuki:
and Kurata, Keiji, 4,435,611, CI. 174-68.500.
Ito, Takashi; and Nozaki, Takao, to Fujiuu Limited. Method for form-
ing an insulating film on a semiconductor substrate surface. 4,435,447.
CI. 427-94.000.
Itoh, Hiroshi: See—
Kobayashi, Nobuyuki; and Itoh, Hiroshi, 4,434.760, CI.
123-339.000.
luchi, Tohru. to Nippon Steel Corporation. Surface temperature mea-
suring apparatus for object within furnace. 4,435,092, CI. 374-129.000.
Ivanova, Tatyana L.: See—
Karapetian, Igor S.; Korolkov, Ivan A.; Kapitanov, Nikolai N.;
Smimov, Boris A.; and Ivanova, Tatyana L., 4,434,796. CI.
128-335.000.
Iwahashi. Haruo: See—
Tarumi, Noriyoshi; Iwahashi, Haruo; Matsunawa. Masahiko; and
Tokunaga. Hiroshi, 4,435,066, CI. 355-3.0SC.
Iwane, Yoshitaka: See-
Koizumi, Masuo; Shirakawa, Norio; Tomioka, Hiromi; Takeuchi,
Masaki; Okada, Masanori; Yoshimoto, Masahiro; Murakami,
Yasushi; and Iwane, Yoshitaka, 4,435,202, CI. 71-76.000.
Iwasa, Yoshio: See—
Merita, Hideo; and Iwasa, Yoshio, 4,434,778, CI. 123-587.000.
Iwasaki, Nobuyuki: See—
Okutsu, Eiichi; Iwasaki, Nobuyuki; and Takada, Shunji, 4,435,500,
CI. 430-419.000.
Iwashita, Tomonori: See —
Fulwhori, Hidehiko; Ichiyanagi, Toshikazu; Iwashita, Tomonori;
Mashimo, Yukio; Sunouchi, Akio; and Fujino, Masahisa.
4,435,061, CI. 354-173.110.
Iwata, Minoru: See —
Matsuoka, Hiroki; Kato, Yuichi; and Iwata, Minoru, 4,434,766, CI.
123-472.000.
Iwata, Noriyuki: See-
Ban, Masatoshi; Miura. Kenji; Baba. Yutaka; Iwata. Noriyuki;
Fukui, Akira; Hori, Mikio; FBjimura, Hajime; and Suenaga.
Eiichi, 4,435,392, CI. 424-244.000.
Izumi, Kazuo: See—
Funaki, Yuji; Yoneyoshi, Yukio; Ishiguri, Yukio; and Izumi. Kazuo.
4,435,203, CI. 71-76.000. .iva*uo.
J. E. Johnson & Sons (Engineers) Limited: See-
Johnson, James E., 4,435,165, CI. 441-130.000.
Jaccard, Pierre-Ernest, to Societe Suisse pour I'lndustrie Horlogere
Management Services S.A. Sutic pick-up for timepiece. 4,435,090,
CI. 368-320.000.
Jackson, Dale; and McManus, John R., to Carrier Corporation. Vari-
ably spaced wrapped fin heat exchanger. 4,434,841. CI. 165-125.000.
Jackson, David E.; and Mannuzza, Frank J., to Miles Laboratories, Inc.
Isolation of superoxide dismutase. 4,435,506, CI. 435-189.000.
Jacobs, Erwin: See —
Schwabe, Ulrich; and Jacobs, Erwin, 4,434,543, CI. 29-576.0OB.
Jacobs, Joseph M. Strip solder feeding and re-winding device.
4,434,925, CI. 226-127.000.
Jacquin, Yves: See—
Dinh, Chan T.; Desvard, Alain; Jacquin. Yves; and Martino. Ger-
main. 4.435,277, CI. 208-108.000.
Juguin, Bernard; Franck, Jean-Pierre; Jacquin, Yves; Marcilly,
Christian; and Martino, Germain, 4,435,274, CI. 208-80.000.
Jagenbers Werke AG: See—
Wohlfeil, Gerhard, 4,434,941, CI. 239-587.000.
Jakob, Claus P.: See—
Oppenlaender, Knut; Stork, Karl; Vogel, Hans-Henning; Schwartz,
Ench; and Jakob, Claus P., 4,435,298, CI. 252-34.000.
Jakob, Gert: See—
Gansert, Willi; Jakob, Gert; Ruttkowski, Lothar; Goetzke, Sieg-
fried; and Stammler, Kurt, 4,435.033, CI. 339.45.00M.
Jamiolkowski, Dennis D.: See—
Shalaby, Shalaby W.; and Jamiolkowski, E>ennis D., 4.435.590. CI.
560-61.000.
Jan-Held, Wilhelm: See—
Lindorfer, Walter; and Jan-Held, WUhelm. 4.435,290, Q.
210-708.000.
Japan Audatex Co., Ltd.: See-
Nagano, Susumu; Iruya, Seiichi; Yasuda. Yoshinori; and Makino.
Tomoaki, 4.435,769, CI. 364-464.000.
Japan Hydrazine Co., Inc.: See—
Hasegawa, Yoichi; Nakagawa. Mineo; and Hara. Syuji, 4,435.600,
CI. 564-464.000.
Japan Servo Co.: See—
Hagino, Hiroshi; Nakamura, Kuniyoshi; and Kotake, Eiichi.
4,435,673, CI. 318-254.00A.
Jastram- Werke GmbH & Co. KG: See—
Barkemeyer. Wolfgang K. W., 4,434,738, CI. 114-162.000.
Jastram- Werke GmbH KG: See—
Brix, Joachim; and Weiss. Friedrich, 4,434,739, CI. 114-162.000.
Jaunich, Helmut: See—
Greensmith, Dennis; Hammerton, Roderic H.; Wall, Colin J.;
Dunkelmann, Dietger; Jaunich, Helmut; and Schiffarth, Joief,
4,435,510, CI. 501-90.000.
Javan, Ali. Production of radiation at frequencies of preselected absorb-
ing resonances and methods using same. 4,435,808, CI. 372-11.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 21
Jeandin, Michel: See—
Trottier, Jean-Pierre; and Jeandin, Michel, 4,435.360, CI.
419-49.000.
Jeanty, Philippe, to Laboratoires Biotrol S.A. Device for foetal blood
sampling in utero. 4.434,803, CI. 128-770.000.
Jeffries, Kenneth L.: See—
Haber, Judith G.; Jeffries, Kenneth L., and Kilpatrick, Paul J.,
4.435,766, CI. 364-300.000.
Herrington. Kenneth M.; and Jeffries, Kenneth L.. 4.435.780. CI.
364-900.000.
Jenkines. Randall C; See—
McKinney, Linda D.; and Jenkines. Randall C, 4,435.459. CI.
428-95.000.
Jenn-Air Corporation: See —
Simon. Donald J.; and Field, Thomas R., 4,435,638, CI.
219-460.000.
Jenner, Michael R.: See-
Hough, Leslie; Phadnis, Shashikant P.; Khan, Riaz A.; and Jenner,
Michael R., 4,435,440, CI. 426-658.000.
Jensen, Georg W.: See—
Barbesgaard, Peder O.; Jensen, Georg W.; and Holm, Poul,
4,435,307. CI. 252-174.120.
Jensen, Ronald W, to Oscar Mayer Foods Corporation. Sausage diame-
ter monitoring apparatus and method. 4,434,529, CI. 17-49.000.
Jiminez, Oscar; and Bianco. Frank J., to Biotechnology, Inc. Apparatus
for testing physical condition of a self-propelled vehicle rider.
4,434,801, CI. 128-689.000.
Joe, Dick M.: See—
Ajioka, James S.; and Joe, Dick M., 4,435,715, CI. 343-771.000.
Johansson, Lars O., to Studsvik Energiteknik AB. Method and an
apparatus for monitoring the period of a nuclear reactor. 4,435,356,
CI. 376-216.000.
Johansson, Thomas, to Kemanord AB. Process for the preparation of
silicon or ferrosilicon. 4.435,209, CI. 75-11.000.
John Kennedy (Civil Engineering) Limited: See —
Flaherty, Thomas; and Pnce, Richard H., 4,434,815, CI. 138-97.000.
Johnson, Alfred D. Method of preparing a two-way shape memory
alloy. 4,435.229. CI. 148-1 1.50R.
Johnson. Howard B. Rotary vane machine with rotating end sealing
plates. 4.435.138, CI. 418-131.000.
Johnson, James E.. to J. E. Johnson & Sons (Engineers) Limited. Flota-
tion device for supporting a person in water. 4,435,165, CI.
441-130.000.
Johnson & Johnson Baby Products Company: See —
Guth, Jacob J.; Spilatro, Diane L.; and Verdicchio, Robert J.,
4,435,300. CI. 252-117.000.
Johnson, Matthey & Co., Limited: See—
Knapton, Arthur G.; and Selman, Gordon L., 4,435,373, CI.
423-403.000.
Johnson, Michael R. Modular sucking trays. 4,435,026, CI. 312-45.000.
Johnson, Raymond A.: See-
Hunt. James W.; and Johnson. Raymond A., 4,434,931, CI.
232-15.000.
Johnson Service Company: See —
Siler, Dan R.; and Trimble, Harold D., 4,435,829, CI. 378-60.000.
Johnson, Timothy W.: See —
Reed, Jerry O.; and Johnson, Timothy W., 4,435,222, CI. 134-2.000.
Johnson, Walter R.. to Combustion Engineering. Inc. Electrical insulat-
ing refractory composition. 4,435.693, CI. 338-238.000.
Johnston, Samuel J. B.. to EMI Limited. Electroplating arrangements.
4,435,266. CI. 204-276.000.
Jolly, Jean; Rizzi, Primo; and Taillardat, Jean, to Roussel Uclaf. la,25a-
Dihydroxy-cholecalciferol and methods for the production thereof
4,435,325, CI. 260-397.200.
Jones, Brian C, to Combustion Engineering, Inc. Fine particulate feed
system for fiuidized bed furnace. 4,434,726, CI. 110-347.000.
Jones, Glenn C; and Culver, Larry J., to Eastman Kodak Company.
Coalescent-containing coating composition. 4,435,534, CI.
524-292.000.
Jones, Howard: See—
Loev, Bernard; Jones, Howard; and Shroff, James R., 4,435,395, CI.
424-248.500.
Jones, James B.; and Soyka, Ron B., to Jones, James B. Hot tub ther-
mometer. 4,435.095, CI. 374-194.000.
Jones. James W.: See—
Haesloop, William G.; Mann, Melvin S.; and Jones, James W.,
4,435,132, CI. 417-360.000.
Jones, Richard E.: See—
RatclifTe, David J., deceased; Jones, Richard E.; Shevrin, Philip;
and Haley, Charles B., 4,435,776, CI. 364-900.000.
Joormann, Hendrik J. M.; Verweij, Henrik; and Haisma, Jan, to U.S.
Philips Corporation. Method of preparing precision pressed glass
object. 4,435,200, CI. 65-64.000.
Jordan, Ernst G., to Obo Bettermann OHG, Firma. Stud welding
apparatus. 4,435,630, CI. 219-98.000.
Joseph, Eric D.; and Davies, Robert B., to Motorola, Inc. Low voltage
precision current source. 4,435,678, CI. 323-273.000.
Jostens, Inc.: See —
Hulber, Loren J.; and Fluckiger, Raymond W., 4,435,464, CI.
428-167.000.
Jubanowsky, Louis J. Viscosity increasing additive for non-aqueous
fluid systems. 4,435,218, CI. 106-266.000.
Juguin, Bernard; Franck. Jean-Pierre; Jacquin, Yves; Marcilly. Chris-
tian; and Martino. Germain, to Institut Francais du Petrole. Process
for manufacturing gasoline with upgrading of hydrocarbon oils.
4,435.274. CI. 208-80.000.
Junck, Guy, to Arbed S. A. Gammanetric thickness measuring appara-
tus. 4,435,643, CI. 250-358.100
Jung, Michel: See—
Sjoerdsma. Albert; Bey, Philippe; Jung. Michel; Gerhart. Fritz; and
Schirlin. Daniel, 4,435,425. CI. 424-325.000.
Jung. Rudolf H.: See—
Brandstctter, Franz; Hambrecht. Juergen; Scharf, Bemhard; Lin-
denschmidt, Gerhard; Schwaab, Josef; and Jung, Rudolf H.,
4,435,541. CI. 525-64.000.
Junker, Erwin. Apparatus for cutting saw teeth into saw blades or saw
bands. 4,434,685, CI. 76-38 000
Kabushiki Kaisha Moriu Seisakusho: See—
Furuichi, Shuhci; Ikcda, Toshiaki; and Suzuki, Masakazu,
4,435,747, CI. 363-25.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Sumimoio Kagaku Kenkyusho: See —
Sumimoto, Mono, 4,435,287, CI 210-131 000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha: See—
Chihara, Hiroyuki; and KiUno, Masuo, 4,435.089, CI 368-204.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Toyou Chuo Kenkyusho: See—
Hasegawa. Junzo; Kawabau. Susumu; and Niimi, Hiroshi,
4.434,611. CI. 57-328.000
Ito, Kazuyuki; Ouki, Masami; Miwa, Naoto; Kamigaito, Osami;
Doi, Haruo; and Hirose, Yoshiharu, 4,435,512, CI. 501-32.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Yakult Honsha; See—
Mutai, Masahiko; Tcrashima, Tsuneo; Takahashi, TokuUro; Ta-
naka, Ryuichiro; Kuroda. Akio; Ueyama, Sadao; and Matsu-
moto, Keisuke. 4,435,389, CI. 424-181.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Yamamoto Suiatsu Kogyosho: See—
Ishigaki, Katsumi; Sasaki, Kazuo; and Fukumura, Takumi,
4,435.006, CI. 285-119.000.
Kaczerginski, Alexandre; and Willem, Michel, to Societe Anonyme
dite: CERAVER. Sealed end cap mounting for laminated insulator
core. 4,435,615, CI. 174-189.000.
Kadija, Igor V., to Olin Corporation. Method for producing a reticulate
electrode for electrolytic cells. 4,435,252. CI. 204-11.000.
Kafrenbergcr, Orville A., Jr.; See-
Clark. Frederic L ; KafTenberger. Orville A., Jr.; Paranjpe. Suresh
C; Smith, David W,; and Ames, Jack D.. 4,435,718, CI.
346-75.000.
Kai, Yoshiyuki: See—
Ueno, Haruo; Yano, Takefumi; Inoue, Tokuji; Ikai, Shigeru; Kai,
Yoshiyuki; and Shimizu, Michimasa, 4,435,550, CI. 526-73.000.
Kaitoh, Mitsuma.sa: See—
Takeda, Makoto; Miyoshi, Kazuhiio; Kaitoh, Mitsumasa; and
Omori. Hiroyuki, 4.435,251, CI. 203-50.000.
KakuU, Alsushi: See-
Suzuki. Shigeo; KakuU, Atsushi; Mori. Yasuki; and Monshita.
Hirosada. 4,435,492, CI. 430-58.000.
KakuU, Yoshiyuki: See—
Saito, Tadao; Nozawa, Takamitsu; Endo, Shuzo; KakuU, Yo-
shiyuki; Ogawa, Riichi; and Kaneuchi, TeUuro, 4.434.917, CI.
222-383.000.
Kalab, Zdenek: See—
Svercl, Josef; Novak, Jan; and Kalab, Zdenek, 4,434,645, CI.
72-402.000.
Kalfa, Horst: See—
Buhler. Hans-Eugen; and Kalfa, Horst. 4,435,157. CI. 432-30.000.
Kaltwasser, Helmut, to General Motors Corporation. Rear axle for
vehicles especially motor vehicles. 4,434.998. CI. 280-721.000.
Kalz, Dietmar: See—
Hoguet. Roben G.; Kalz, Dietmar; Thomas. Thomas J.; Whetsell.
Henry T.; Wolff. Joachim; Nonn, Konrad; and Wolf. Karl-Heinz,
4,435.181, CI. 8-527.000
Kamens. Ernest R.. to Pennwalt Corporation. Reaction of carbonylhy-
drazines and organic peroxides to foam unsaturated polyester resins.
4.435,525, CI. 521-92.000.
Kamigaito, Osami: See —
Ito, Kazuyuki; Ouki. Masami; Miwa. Naoto; Kamigaito, Osami;
Doi, Haruo; and Hirose, Yoshiharu. 4.435.512, CI 501-32.000.
Kamimori. Tadatoshi; Mizuhashi, Mamoru; and Nagai, Junichi. to
Asahi Glass Company Ltd. Electro-optical device and electro-optical
light controlling device. 4,435,048, CI. 350-357.000
Kamiya, Takashi; Saito, Yoshihisa; Teraji, Tsutomu; Nakaguti, Osamu:
and Oku, Teruo. to Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Azetidinone
4-disuirides. 4,435.321, CI. 260-239.00A.
Kamoshiu, Katsuzo: See—
Noguchi, Hiroshi; Hashimoto, Shunichi; Kitamura, Shigeyoshi;
Mauuo, Takashi; Mine, Akihiko; and KamoshiU, Kauuzo,
4,435,332, CI. 260-465.00D.
Kamyr AB: See—
Gullichsen, Johan E.; Harkonen, Esko; Niskanen, Toivo; Kujala,
Jaakko; and Reponen, Voitto, 4,435.193. CI. 55-21.000.
Kanazawa. Tateuo; and Suyama. Tsuneo, to Kubou, Ltd. Holding
device for nested pipes. 4,434,892, CI. 206-446.000.
Kane, John M.: See—
Carr. Albert A.; Farr, Robert A.; and Kane, John M., 4,435,571, CI.
544-384.000.
Kanebo, Ltd.: See—
MaUui, Masao; Okamoto, Kazuo: and Osagawa, Takao, 4,434,631,
CI. 68-171.000.
Kanebo Synthetic Fibers Ltd.: See —
Matsui, Masao; Okamoto, Kazuo; and Ougawa, Takao. 4,434.631,
CI. 68-171.000.
Kanegafuchi Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kato, Yasushi; and Furukawa. Hisao, 4,435.536. CI. 524-378.000.
PI 22
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Kaneko, Shinji: See—
Sugiyanu, Minoni; and lUneko, Shinji, 4,433.101, CI. 403-122.000.
Kaneuchi, Tetsuro: See—
Saito, Tadao; Nozawa, Takamitsu; Endo, Shuzo; Kakuta, Yo-
shiyuki; Ogawa. Riichi; and Kaneuchi. TeUuro, 4.434.917, CI.
222-383.000.
Kanoi, Minora: See—
Hon, Yasuro; Kanoi, Minora; Seino, Kazuyuki: and Hasiwara.
Syuya. 4,435,751, CI. 364-574.000.
Kansai Paint Co., Ltd.: See—
Nakayama, Yasuhara; Yamamoto, Kenji; KomaUuzawa, Toshiki;
Sukejima, Hajime; and Nomoto, Kazuo, 4,435,531, CI.
524-37.000.
Kanzaki Paper Manufacturing Company Limited: See—
Horiike, Tetsuro; Kuroda. Takio; and Shiozaki. Tomohara,
4,435,340, CI. 264-4.700.
Kapitanov, Nikolai N.: See—
Karapetian, Igor S.; Korolkov, Ivan A.; Kapitanov, Nikolai N.;
Smirnov. Boris A.; and Ivanova, Tatyana L., 4,434,796, CI.
128-335.000.
Kaiym, Emmanuel E.; See —
Barber, Flavil, Jr.; Karam, Emmanuel E.; Dunaway, Richard; and
Rogers, Ray L.. 4,435,738, CI. 361-321.000.
Karapetian, Igor S.; Korolkov, Ivan A.; Kapitanov, Nikolai N.; Smir-
nov, Boris A.; and Ivanova. Tatyana L., to Vsesojuzny Nauchno-
Issledovatelsky I Ispytatelny Institut Mediteinskoi Tekhniki. Surgical
suple, a method of and forceps for its removal. 4,434.796. CI.
128-335.000.
Karlson, Eskil: See—
Schmitt, Oscar A.; Nedreski, Robert J.; and Karlson, Eskil.
4,435.163,0.434-263.000.
Karner, Francisco A.: See—
Cason, William C; McCaskill, Rex A.; and Karner, Francisco A..
4,435,778, CI. 364-900.000.
Karr, Gerald W., to Beloit Corporation. Winder rider roll control.
4,434,949, CI. 242-66.000.
Kasanami, Takeo: See—
Ito, Hiroo; Kasanami, Takeo; and Miura, Shuji, 4,435,346, CI.
264-54.000. J . . .
Kashioka, Seiji: See—
Sakow. Hiroshi; and Kashioka, Seiji, 4,435,835, CI. 382-8.000.
Kassai Kabushikikaisha: See—
Kassai, Kenzou. 4,435,012. CI. 297-355.000.
Kassai, Kenzou, to Kassai Kabushikikaisha. Seat assembly for baby
carriages. 4,435,012, CI. 297-355.000.
Kastron, Valeria V.; Vitolin, Rasma O.; Dubur, Gunar Y.; Selga, MariU
Y.; Zarinsh, Guntis V.; Kondratenko, Natalya V.; Popov, Vladimir I.;
Kolomeitsev, Alexandr A.; and Yagupolsky, Lev M. 2,6-Dimethyl-
3,5-dicarbomethoxy-4-<ortho-di-fluoromethylthiophenyl)- 1 ,4-dihy-
dropyridine. 4,435,574, CI. 546-321.000.
Kauyama, Masayoshi: See—
Shinoda, Kazuichi; and KaUyama. Masayoshi. 4,434,668, CI.
73-861.220.
Kato, Hideaki, to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd. Electrophoto-
graphic recording apparatus. 4,435,722, CI. 346-153.100.
Kato, Yasushi; and Furakawa, Hisao, to Kanegafuchi Kagaku Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha. One-pack composition. 4,435,536, CI. 524-378.000.
Kato, Yoshiaki, to Citizen Watch Company Limited. Liquid crystal
display device for world time wristwatch. 4,435,086, CI. 368-22.000.
Kato, Yuichi: See—
Matsuoka, Hiroki; Kato, Yuichi; and Iwata. Minora, 4,434,766, CI.
Katsma, William L.: See-
Wood, Denis; Thomas, John F., Jr.; Dipper, Barry; Stegenga,
Philip D.; Veltkamp, John H.; Katsma. William L.; and Norton.
Robert L.. 4,435,042, CI. 350-281.000.
Katsuyama. Harami; and Terashima, Masaaki, to Fuji Shashin Film
Kabushiki Kaisha. Integral multilayer analytical element for the assay
of total protein. 4,435,362, CI. 422-56.000.
Katz, Michael; Hinden. Jean M.; and Gauger, Jurgen F., to Diamond
Shamrock Corporation. Electrode with outer coating for effecting an
electrolytic process and protective intermediate coating on a conduc-
tive base, and method of making same. 4,435,313, Q. 502-101.000.
Kaufhold, Hont T.: See—
Mulcahy, Harry W.; and Kaufhold, Horst T., 4,434,720, CI. 105-
199.0CB.
Kauiinan. Benjamin J.: See-
Sung, Rodney L.; Kaufman, Benjamin J.; and Sweeney, William
M.,4,435,186, CI. 44-53.000.
Kaufman, Dan R.; and Thompson, Gerhard R., to International Busi-
ness Machines Corp. DaU processing system with high density
anthmetic and logic unit. 4,435,782, CI. 364-716.000.
Kawabata, Susumu: See—
Haaegawa, Junzo; Kawabata, Susumu; and Niimi, Hiroshi,
4,434,611,0.57-328.000.
Kawachi. Tsuneo: See—
Hirokawa. Norio; Kawachi. Tsuneo; Saito. Hiroshi; and Yo-
shimura, Ryoichi. 4,435.210. CI. 75-53.000.
Kawai. Hisasi: See—
Kohama, Tokio; Huzino. Seizi; Obayashi. Hideki; Kawai, Hisasi-
and Egami, Tsuneyuki, 4,434,767, CI. 123-481.000.
Kawai. Yasunari: See—
Kazuta, Hiaashi: Kawai, Yasunari; and Tsuchida. Naoki. 4.434.755,
CI. 123-I95.00C.
Kawamura, Hiroji: See-
Sakamoto, Maaahisa; Tamura. Yoshio; and Sakamoto. Tadashi.
4.435.802. CI. 369-286.000. ^^^
Kawamura, Nobuhiaa: See-
Suzuki, Yoshihiro; Nakagawa. Shuichi; Kawamura. Nobuhiaa:
Kunhara. Shuichi; Sakuma, Osamu; and Ito, Maaahiro, 4,435,7lt
Kawashima, Hideo: See— r
Ema, Kenji; Hara, Junji; Ikado, Shuhei; Kawashima, Hideo; and
Yokoo, Tomohide, 4,435,543i.Cl. 525-143.000.
Kay, Edward L.; and Gutierrez, Richard, to Firestone Tire A. Rubber
Company, The. Process for extracting rabber and by-productt from
guayule and guayule-like shrabs. 4,435,337, CI. 528-493.000.
Kaya, Azmi: See—
Dziubakowski, Donald J.; Kaya, Azmi; Keyes, Marion A.; MaUko,
Theodore N.; Moss. William H.; and Scheib, Thomas J..
4.435,650, CI. 307-32.000.
Kaye, Peter D., to Bell Industries, Inc. Saw-advancing means with edae
engaging pad. 4,434,683, CI. 76-37.000.
Kaylo, Alan J.; and Castellucci, Nicholas T., to PPG Industries, Inc.
Tannin-epoxy reaction products and compositions thereof 4,435,529,
CI. 523-426.000.
Kuuta. Hisashi; Kawai. Yasunari; and Tsuchida. Naoki. to Yamaha
Hauudoki Kabushiki Kaisha. Motorcycle with closeable engine
mtake and exhaust passages. 4,434,755, CI. 123-195.00C
KBI Corp.: See—
Kirk, James L.; and Ohneck, Robert J., 4.435,292, CI. 210-747.000.
Keener. Neil F. Hammer with magazine nail feed. 4.434,929, CI.
227- 1 1 5.000.
Kehr. Wolfgang: See—
Braestrap, Claus T.; Christensen, Jogen A.; Engelstoft. Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen, Ralph; Huth, Andreas;
Rahtz, Dieter; Seidelmann, Dieter; Kehr, Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat. Dieter. 4,435,403, CI. 424-256.000.
Keita, Kawamura: See—
Koichi, Yamada; Keita. Kawamura; and Shinji. Aoki. 4,435.260. CI.
204-164.000.
Kelley, Mellis M.: See—
Sullivan. Carl M.; and Kelley. Mellis M.. 4.435.562, CI. 528-272.000.
Kelly, Arnold J.: See—
Mintz, Donald J.; Kelly, Arnold J.; an() Gleason, Anthony M.,
4,435,261. CI. 204-168.000.
Kemanord AB: See-
Johansson, Thomas, 4,435,209, CI. 75-11.000.
Kemper, Kate. Apparatus for shaping dough. 4,435,144, Q.
425-332.000.
Kennecott Corp.: See—
TenEyck, John D., 4.435,468, CI. 428-285.000.
Kennedy, A. Terence, to Damon Corporation. Centrifuge rotor appara-
tus with sling arms. 4.435.168. Q. 494-20.000.
Kenneth E. Beswick Limited: See—
Beswick. David G. E., 4,434,548, Q. 29-623.000.
Kenney, George C, II: See—
Nadan, Joseph S.; Kenney. George C, II; and Carasso, Marino O.,
4,435,687, CI. 331-23.000.
Kenny, Thomas C; and Plunkett, John P., to Horizon Chemical, Inc.
Furnace fuel. 4,435,185, CI. 44-68.000.
Kerey, Gyorgy: See—
Banos, Zoltan; Vereczkey, Endre; Kerey, Gyorgy; Rudolf, Peter;
Takacs, Istvan; Felmeri, Jozaef; and Bosits. Gyula. 4.435.182, CI.
23-295.00R.
Kernforschungsanlage Julich Gesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung:
Heitkamp. Dieter; and Wagener, Klaus, 4,435,366, CI. 423-6.000.
Kerr-McGee Chemical Corporation: See-
Morris, Alan J., 4,435,365, CI. 423-76.000.
Kettle, John L., to Otis Elevator Company. Spiral escalator. 4.434.884.
CI. 198-328.000. • ' •
Keyes, Marion A.: See—
Dziubakowski, Donald J.; Kaya. Azmi; Keyes, Marion A.; MaUko,
Theodore N.; Moss, William H.; and Scheib, Thomas J.,
4,435,650, CI. 307-32.000.
Khalafalla, Sanaa E.: See—
Reimers. George W.; and Khalafalla. Sanaa E., 4,435,302, d.
252-62.510.
Khalifa, Ramzl A.: See—
Prather, Joseph E.; Khalifa. Ramzl A.^^and Wenzler. Peter B..
4.435.027, CI. 312-222.000.
Khan, Riaz A.: See-
Hough, Leslie; Phadnis, Shashikant P.; Khan, Riaz A.; and Jenner.
Michael R., 4,435,440, CI. 426-658.000.
Kida, Masahiko: See-
Hashimoto, Toyokazu; Wada, Hiroyuki; Kida, Masahiko; Mat-
sumura, Hisashi; and Nakayashiki, Susumu, 4,435,704. CI.
340-825.010.
Kijima, Shizumasa: Sar—
Sato, Akio; Nakajima, Kenji; Takahara, Yoshimasa; Kijima.
Shizumasa; Kuwana. Noriaki; Abe. Shinya; and Yamada. Kouzi.
4.435.423. CI. 424-318.000.
Kilian, Ernst A.: See—
Eckert, Wolfgang; Holtkamp. Bernd; and Kilian. Ernst A..
4.435.685. Cr330.26 1.000.
Kilpatrick. Paul J.: See—
Haber. Judith G.; Jeffries. Kenneth L.; and Kilpatrick, Paul J..
4,435,766.0.364-300.000.
/
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 23
Kimble, James B.: See—
Lindstrom, Meriin R.; Parlman, Robert M.; and Kimble, James B.,
4,435,304,0.252-156.000.
Kimoto, Manabu, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd. Data proceuing appara-
tus capable of transferring serial data with small power consumption,
4,435,761, O. 364-200.000.
Kiovsky, T. E.: See—
Graiff, L. B.; and Kiovsky, T. E., 4,435,187, CI. 44-63.000.
Kipp, Ronald W., to RCA Corporation. Radar ranging system for use
with sloping target. 4,435,709, CI. 343-14.000.
Kipp, Ronald W., to RCA Corporation. FM-CW Radar ranging system
with signal drift compensation. 4,435,712, CI. 343-17.700.
Kirayoglu, Erol M.: See-
Black, Richard W.; Kirayoglu, Erol M.; Leiter, Harold E.; and
Smith, Richard C, 4,435,031, CI. 339-17.00C.
Kirk, Donald C, Jr., to Ethyl ProducU Company. Child-resisUnt finger
pump dispenser. 4,434,915, O. 222-153.000.
Kirk, James L.; and Ohneck, Robert J., to KBI Corp. Portable method
for decontaminating earth. 4,435,292, CI. 210-747.000.
Kirschner, Thomas F., to RCA Corporation. Disc record player having
shutofT switch actuating apparatus. 4,435,799, O. 369-77.200.
Kish, Richard D.: See—
McAteer, John E.; Bisler, Kenneth E.; Ptacnik, Jerry; and Kish,
Richard D., 4,434,596, O. 52-243.100.
Kishida, Kazuo; Sasaki, Isao; and Mukai, Nobuhiro, to Mitsubishi
Rayon Co., Ltd. Novel polymer composition. 4,435,540, CI.
524-780.000.
Kitagawa, Norihisa; and Asahi, Hiroji, to Texas Instraments Incorpo-
rated. Nonvolatile semiconductor memory device. 4,435,788, CI.
365-185.000.
Kitajima, Tadayuki, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Variable magnifica-
tion copying apparatus. 4,435,070, O. 355-8.000.
Kitamura, Shigeyoshi: See —
Noguchi, Hiroshi; Hashimoto, Shunichi; Kitamura. Shigeyoshi;
Matsuo, Takashi; Mine. Akihiko; and Kamoshita. Katsuzo,
4.435,332, O. 260-465.00D.
Kitamura, Takashi; and Kokado, Hiroshi, to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
Electrophotographic process for the production of lithographic
printing plates and light-sensitive materials for use therein. 4,435,491,
O. 430-49.00a
Kitano, Masuo: See—
Chihara, Hiroyuki; and Kitano, Masuo, 4,435,089, O. 368-204.000.
Kiya, Nobuyuki: See—
Nozawa, Ryoichiro; and Kiya, Nobuyuki, 4,435,771, O.
364-474.000.
Klauber, Gerald: See—
Petito, Ferdinand C; and Klauber, Gerald, 4,435,668, CI.
313-388.000.
Klein, Schanzlin & Becker Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Schneider, Wolfgang, 4,435,126, CI. 416-186.00R.
Kleinewefers GmbH: See-
Hart wich, Gerhard; Pav, Josef; and Preuss, Dieter, 4.434,713, O.
100-168.000.
Kleinschmit, Peter: See-
Reck, Reinhold; Kuhner, Gerhard; Voll, Manfred; and Kleinsch-
mit, Peter. 4,435.378, CI. 423-461.000.
Klett, Werner, to Hekatron GmbH. Circuit arrangement for the trans-
mission of measurements to a central, especially in a fire alarm system.
4,435,698, CI. 340-512.000.
Kley, Victor B. Graphical daU entry apparatus. 4,435,616, CI.
178-18.000.
Kliebphipat, Ravadee; Fernsler, Ronald E.; and Hicks, James E., to
RCA Corporation. Television receiver disabling circuit. 4,435,731,
O. 358-243.000.
Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz AG: See—
Kupper, Heinz; and Busch, Helmut, 4,434,940, O. 239-397.500.
Moser, Gottfried; Nau, Walter; and Neumann, Ernst-Dieter,
4,434,934, O. 237-12.30R.
Kloster, Kenneth D. Vise. 4,434,978, O. 269-69.000.
Klupich, Hans J., to EVOG • Eublissement fur Verwaltung und Or-
ganisation. Process for the production of stable curdled milk prod-
ucte. 4,435,432, O. 426-43.000.
Knapton, Arthur G.; and Selman, Gordon L., to Johnson, Matthey ft
Co., Limited. Fibre packs for ammonia oxidation. 4,435,373, CI.
423-403.000.
Knaus, Ernest; Namsick, Raymond J.; and Smith, Herbert D., to Good-
year Aerospace Corporation. Fabric-reinforced, flexible-wallnl
container and method of making said container. 4,435,240, O.
156-242.000.
Kness, Werner, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Dry-shaving apparatus
having a trimmer. 4,434,553, O. 30-34.100.
Knickerbocker, Michael G., to Seaquist Valve Company. Pump assem-
bly with improved seal. 4,435,135, O. 417-511.000.
Knudsen, Hans B., to F. L. Smidth ft Co. Apparatus for thermally
treating pulverous materials such as cement raw material. 4,435,159,
O. 432-106.000.
Knudsen, Niels K. Heat accumulator. 4,434,785, O. 126-400.000.
Koal, Inc.: See—
Kovacs, Geza L., 4,435,306, O. 252-173.000.
Kobayashi, Hideyuki, to Aisen Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha. Brake master
cylinder assembly. 4,434,619, O. 60-547.100.
Kobayashi, Hisao: See—
Hosoi, Kinji; Takeda, Hiroyuki; Kobayashi, Hisao; and Konaka,
Daijiro, 4,434,693. CI. 83-7 1 .000.
Kobayuhi, Masatsune: ,
Eida, Tsuyoshi; and Kobayashi, Masatsune, 4,435,717, O.
346-1.100.
Kobayashi, Nobuyuki; and Itoh, Hiroshi, to ToyoU Jidosha Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha. Apparatus for controlling the idling speed of an
engine. 4,434,760, O. 123.339.000.
Kobayashi, Takashi: See—
Tsuji, Hideakira; Yamamoto, Shii\jiro; Nakagami, Kazuto; Honda,
Takeo; Fuiii, KaUutoshi; Kobayashi, Takashi; Obata, Tokio;
Kojima. Mikio; and Akiyoshi. Ymi. 4,433,402, O. 424-251.000.
Kobayashi, Takeo, to Howa Kogyo Kwushiki Kaisha. Fluid-actuated
hollow power chuck. 4,434,990, O. 279-4.000.
Kobayuhi, Takumi, to Asahi Kogaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Auto-
matic film wind-up camera. 4,435,060, CI. 354-173.100.
Kobler, Ingo; and Mische, Hans-Jurgen, to M.A.N.-Roland Drackmas-
chinen Aktiengesellschaft. Printed goods removal apparatus.
4,434,979, CI. 271-307.000.
Koch, Russell W.; and Barbin, William W., to Firestone Tire ft Rubber
Company, The. Room temperature curable tire patch. 4,434,832, O.
152-370.000.
Kodama, Hideyo: See—
Niiyama, Eisuke; and Kodama, Hideyo, 4,434,836, O. 164-429.000.
Koetsier, Wicher T.; and Verduijn, Johannes P., to Exxon Research ft
Engineering Co. Xylene isomerization. 4,435,608, CI. 585-480.000.
Kohama, Tokio; Huzino, Seizi; Obayashi, Hideki; Kawai, Hisasi; and
Egami, Tsuneyuki, to Nippon Soken, Inc. Output control system for
multicyhnder internal combustion engine. 4,434,767, O. 123-481.000.
Koichi, Yamada; Keita, Kawamura; and Shinji, Aoki, to Ebara Corpo-
ration. Method and apparatus for desulfurization and denitrification
of waste gas by multi-suge electron beam irradiation. 4,435,260, CI.
204-164.00a
Koide, Kazuo, to Hitachi, Ltd. Output level adjustment means for low
fanout ECL lacking emitter follower output. 4,435,654, CI.
307-455.000.
Koizumi, Masuo; Shirakawa. Norio; Tomioka. Hiromi; Takeuchi.
Masaki; Okada. Masanori; Yoshimoto. Masahiro; Murakami, Yuushi;
and Iwane, Yoshitaka. to Chugai Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha. Plant
growth regulator. 4,435,202, cH 1-76.000.
Koizumi, Masuo: See—
Sasahara, Kazuo; Honda, Masamitsu; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami,
Yuushi; Neichi, Tomohiro; Nakakimura, Hiroshi; Noda,
Yukifumi; Matsushita, Hiroshi; and Hata, Shun-ichi, 4,435,391,
O. 424-244.000.
Koiima, Junichiroh; and Mizoe, Kenji, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.
Radio mobile communication system wherein probability of lou of
calls is reduced without a surplus of base station equipment.
4,435,840, O, 455-33.000.
Kojima, Keivji: See—
Midorikawa, Akira; Kojima, Keiui; *nd Uchimura, Kazuo,
4.435,074, O. 355-15.000.
Kojima, Mikio: See—
Tsuji, Hideakira; Yamamoto, Shit^iro; Nakagami, Kazuto; Honda,
Takeo; Fujii, KaUutoshi; Kobayuhi, Takuhi; Obata, Tokio;
Kojima, Mikio; and Akiyoshi, Yuji, 4,435,402, CI. 424-251.000.
Kojima, Yuufumi: See—
Hara, Kiyoshi; Kojima, Yuufumi; and Nabeta, Teiichi, 4,434,932,
CI. 23M9.000.
Kokado, Hiroshi: See—
Kitamura, Takashi; and Kokado, Hiroshi, 4,435,491, 0. 430-49.000.
Kolm, Eric A.: See—
Koim, Henry H.; and Kolm, Eric A., 4,435,667. O. 310-367.000.
Kolm, Henry H.; and Kolm, Eric A., to Peizo Electric Products, Inc.
Spiral piezoelectric rotary actuator. 4,435,667, O. 310-367.000.
Kolomayets, George: See-
Dennis, James T.; and Kolomayets, George, 4,435,800, O.
369-225.000.
Kolomeitsev, Alexandr A.: See—
Kutron, Valeria V.; Vitolin, Rasma O.; Dubur, Gunar Y.; Selga,
MariU Y.; Zarinsh, Guntis V.; Kondratenko, Natalya V.; Popov,
Vladimir I.; Kolomeitsev, Alexandr A.; and Yagupolsky, Lev M.,
4,435,574, O. 546-321.000.
Komatsu, Osamu: See—
Ohno, Sachio; Mizukoshi, Kiyoshi; Komatsu, Osamu; Yamamoto,
HiUimu; and Kunou, Yuuo, 4,435,566. O. 544-117.000.
Komatsuzawa. Toshiki: See—
Nakayama. Yuuhara; Yamamoto, Kei^i; Komatsuzawa, Toshiki;
Sukejima, Hjuime; and Nomoto, Kazuo, 4,435,531, O.
524-37.000.
Komeya, Katsutoshi; Tsuge, Akihiko; and Inoue, Hiroshi, to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Sintered bodies^of aluminum
nitride. 4,435,513, O. 501-96.000.
Konaka, Daiiiro: See—
Hosoi, Kinji; Takeda, Hiroyuki; Kobayashi, Hisao; and Konaka.
Daijiro. 4,434.693. CI. 83-71.000.
Kondo, Takehisa: Sar—
Shiraae, Haraya; and Kondo, Takehisa, 4,434,776, O. 123-568.000.
Kondratenko, Natalya V.: See—
Kutron, Valeria V.; Vitolin, Ruma O.; Dubur, Gunar Y.; Selga,
MariU Y.; Zarinsh, Guntis V.; Kondratenko, Natalya V.; Popov,
Vladimir I.; Kolomeitsev, Alexandr A.; and Yagupolsky, Lev M.,
4,435,574, O. 546-321.000.
Kong, Ah S.: See—
Leibowitz. Mitchell J.; Kong, Ah S.; Sonnino-Ooldman, Paula; and
Wolf, Peter, 4.435.409, CL 424-266.000.
Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd.: See—
Kato, Hideaki, 4,435,722, O. 346-153.100.
PI 24
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Seimiya, Ryubun; Inowa. Shigeni; Tarumi, Noriyoshi; Matsunawa,
Masahiko; and Tokunaga, Hiroshi. 4.435,723, CI. 346-154.000.
Tarumi, Noriyoshi; Iwahashi, Haruo; Matsunawa, Masahiko- and
Tokunaga, Hiroshi, 4,435,066, CI. 355-3.0SC.
Koppers Company Inc.: See —
Lmdgren. Carl, 4,435.250, CI. 202-239.000.
Kopsch, Paul J.; Ward. Donald F.; Graber, Jay; and Nichols. Omer.
Sabot and projectile. 4,434,718, CI. 102-522.000.
Korbelak, Kenneth N., to GK Technologies, Incorporated. Optical
fiber stripping device. 4,434,554, CI. 30-90.800.
Korenko, Michael K., to United States of America. Energy. Cold
worked ferritic alloys and components. 4,435,231, CI. I48-12.0EA.
Komatowski, Boleslaw, to Singer Company, The. Handwheel clutch
for sewing machines. 4.434.880, CI. 192-67.00R.
Korolkov. Ivan A.: See —
Karapetian, Igor S.; Korolkov, Ivan A.; Kapitanov, Nikolai N.;
Smimov, Boris A.; and Ivanova, Tatyana L., 4,434.796, CI
128-335.000.
Kos, Joseph M.: See —
Hamer, Kennit I.; Patrick, John P.; and Kos, Joseph M., 4.435.647.
CI. 290-44.000.
Kosaka. Tsutomu: See—
Miyamoto. Yoshimi; Nakamura, Naotaka; Akaku, Fumiyoshi;
Koto. Katsumi; and Kosaka, Tsutomu, 4,435,692. Cl!
338-214.000.
Koshelev, Jury I.: See —
Kostikov, Valery I.; Koshelev, Jury I.; Telegin, Vasily D.; Taraba-
nov, Alexandr S.; Tatievskaya. Elena M.; and Kosova. Lyana I
4,435,538, Cl. 524-492.000.
Kosova, Lyana I.: See —
Kostikov, Valery I.; Koshelev. Jury I.; Telegin, Vasily D.; Taraba-
nov. Alexandr S.; Tatievskaya, Elena M.; and Kosova, Lyana I..
4.435.538. Cl. 524-492.000. • y » • .
Kostan. Charles C. See-
Fox, David H.; Kostan, Charles C; and Casaceli. Frank B .
4.434.754, Cl. 123-1 46. 50A.
Kostikov. Valery I.; Koshelev. Jury I.; Telegin. Vasily D.; Tarabanov.
Alexandr S.; Tatievskaya, Elena M.; and Kosova, Lyana I. Composi-
tion for the preparation of carbonaceous base use in the manufacture
of siliconized antifriction materials. 4.435.538, Cl. 524-492.000
Kotake. Eiichi: See —
Hagino. Hiroshi; Nakamura. Kuniyoshi; and Kotake. Eiichi
4,435,673. Cl. 318-254.0OA.
Koto, Katsumi: See —
Miyamoto, Yoshimi; Nakamura. Naotaka; Akaku, Fumiyoshi;
Koto, Katsumi; and Kosaka, Tsutomu, 4,435,692, Cl
338-214.000.
Kotzur, Joachim: See—
Albers. Rolf; Aschenbruck, Emil; Neuhaus, Gunter; and Kotzur.
Joachim. 4.434,987. Cl. 277-80.000.
Kovach. Stephen M.: See—
Zandona, Ohver J.; Hettinger, William P., Jr.; Kovach, Stephen
M.; and Beck, Hubert W., 4,435,515, Cl. 502-65.000.
Kovacs, Geza L., to Koal, Inc. Stable coal-water suspensions and their
preparation. 4,435.306, Cl. 252-173.000.
Koziol, Walter. Thermally efficient barbecue grill. 4,434,781, Cl. 126-
Krabbe, Wilfried: See—
Zema. Wolfgang; Krabbe, Wilfried; and Schafer, Hans, 4,434,591.
Cl. 52-73.000.
'^?§!?; V?'''" ^ • *° Tower Systems. Inc. Falling film heat exchanger.
4,435.339, Cl. 261-153.000. *
Krainov, Sergei V.: See—
Lyuev, Rem A.; Barakaev, Khristofor F.; Taratuta, Igor P. and
Krainov. Sergei V.. 4.435.748. Cl. 363-54.000.
Kranzle, Josef; and Droitsch. Lutz. Apparatus with latching effect for
hmitmg pressure in liquid feeding systems. 4.435,127, Cl. 417-26.000.
Krasso, Anna; and Ramuz, Henri, to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Imidaz-
ole derivatives. 4,435,406, Cl. 424-263.000.
Kraus, Charles E., to Excelermatic Inc. Transmission ratio control
arrangement for a precess cam controlled infinitely variable traction
roller transmission. 4,434,675, Cl. 74-200.000.
Krause, Gunter: See—
Pauh. Gunter; Krause, Gunter; and Lob, Erwin, 4,435,834. Q
382-7.000.
Krause, Richard H.; Pfeiffer, Thomas J.; and Horvath, Vincent V., to
Bethlehem Steel Corporation. Pyrometer with sighting window
cleanliness monitor. 4,435,093. Cl. 374-129.000.
Krauss, Theo; Herrmann, Ludwig; and Berger, Konrad, to VEB Kom-
binat Textima. Laundry mangle with roll covering reel. 4,434,566, Cl.
Jo'O.lXX).
Kray, Louis R.: See—
Ferm, Richard L.; and Kray, Louis R., 4,435,273, Cl. 208-48.0AA.
Kresky, Fred C: See—
Boland. John D.; and Kresky. Fred C. 4,434,970, Cl. 254-108.000
Kneger. Friedrich, to Gg. Noell GmbH. Support for used fuel rods in
nuclear installations. 4,435,357, Cl. 376-272.000.
Kneger, Friedrich, to Gg. Noell GmbH. Means for fixation of spent
nuclear elements. 4,435,358, Cl. 376-272.000.
Krijnen, Wilhelmus J.; and Grotenhuis, Paulus A. M., to Shell Oil
Company. Manufacture of macrocyclic polyethers. 4,435,582, Cl.
Krischik, Reinhold: See—
Florczyk, Rolf; and Krischik, Reinhold, 4,434.906. Cl. 220-268.000.
Krishnakumar, Suppayan M.: See
Beck, Martin H.; Krishnakumar, Suppayan M.; and Harry, leuan
L., 4,435,244. Cl. 156-379.800.
Kro^rud, Harald, to Elkem a/s. Contact assembly. 4,433,817, Cl.
Krone GmbH: See—
Forberg, Horst; Herfort, Hermann; Hegner, Gunter; and Muller.
Manfred, 4,434,542. Cl. 29-566.400.
Krone, Hartmut: See—
Rayer, Peter; Krone, Hartmut; SchiessI, Alois; Steinicke, Wolf-
gang; and Trede, Wolfgang, 4,435,233, Cl. 149-44.000.
Kniger, H. Eckard: See—
Timm, Horst; and Kniger, H. Eckard, 4,435,845. Cl. 455-228.000.
Kruse, Walter M.; and Stephen, John F. Etherification process for
hexitols and anhydrohexitols. 4,435.586. Cl. 549-464.000.
Kubisiak. Helmut: See—
Berthoid. Fritz; and Kubisiak. Helmut, 4.435.509. Cl. 436-518.000.
Kubota, Ltd.: See—
Kanazawa, Tatsuo; and Suyama. Tsuneo. 4.434,892. Cl.
206-446.000.
Kubota, Tadashi; Hamane, Tokuhito; and Tasai, Masaaki, to Matsushiu
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Coil forming machine. 4,434,819, Cl.
140-92.100.
Kuehnle, Manfred R. Method and means for reducing frame effect in
electrographic images on microfiche. 4,435,071, Cl. 355-10000
Kufner Textilwerke KG: See—
Hefele, Josef, 4,435,442, Cl. 427-14.100.
Kuhla, Donald E.: See—
Brennan, Thomas M.; Brannegan, Daniel P.; Weeks. Paul D.- and
Kuhla. Donald E., 4,435,584, Cl. 549-415.000.
Kuhlemann, Bruce N.; Horvath, Kalman; and Wharff. Prentice C. to
Cutter Laboratories, Inc. Needle assembly. 4,435,177, Cl.
Kuhnel. Werner; Putz, Peter; Simm, Manfred; and Spielau, Paul, to
Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft. Multi-layered sealing sheet of
elastomeric synthetic resin. 4.435,466, Cl. 428-215.000.
Kuhner, Gerhard: See-
Reck, Reinhold; Kuhner, Gerhard; Voll, Manfred; and Kleinsch-
mit, Peter, 4,435,378. C\. 423-461.000.
Kuin, Nicolaas P. J.: See—
Draai, Willem T; Pleyers, Jozef J. A.; and Kuin. Nicolaas P. J..
4.435,067. Cl. 355-3.0TR.
Kuiper. Krijn: See—
Segers. Marinus T. M.; Niessen, Comelis; and Kuiper. Krijn.
4,435,806, Cl. 371-25.000. P^ . >v jn,
Kujala, Jaakko: See—
Gullichsen, Johan E.; Harkonen, Esko; Niskanen. Toivo; Kujala,
Jaakko; and Reponen, Voitto, 4,435,193. Cl. 55-21.000.
Kuli, John C, Jr.: See—
Hildeman. Gregory J.; Kuk, John C, Jr.; and Vivola, Leo A..
4,435,213, Cl. 75-249.000.
Kumar, Pullatikurthi P.. to University of Nebraska, The Board of
Regents of the. Apparatus for treating carcinoma of the uterine
cervix. 4,434.789, Cl. 128-1.200.
Kunkel, Roben C, Jr., to Combustion Engineering, Inc. Overbed
distributor for feeding dual solid fuels to a stoker furnace. 4,434.724.
Cl. 110-269.000.
Kuno. Akira; Matsumoto, Muneaki; Numata, Koji; and Urano, Susumu,
to Nippon Soken, Inc.; and Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Running position
indicator apparatus. 4,435,760, Cl. 364-444.000.
Kunou, Yasuo: See —
Ohno, Sachio; Mizukoshi, Kiyoshi; Komatsu, Osamu; Yamamoto.
Hajimu; and Kunou, Yasuo, 4.435,566, Cl. 544-117.000.
Kupper, Heinz; and Busch, Helmut, to Klockner-Humboldt-DeuU AG.
Insulated fuel injection nozzle device and method for manufacturing
same. 4,434,940, Cl. 239-397.500.
Kurata, Keiji: See—
Ohsawa, Kenji; Ito, Takao; Fueki, Shimetomo; Osawa, Masayuki:
and KuraU, Keiji, 4.435,611, Cl. 174-68.500.
Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Sasaki, Tohni; Terasaki, Syuuzi; Munakata, Hideo; and Ohta,
Mitsuni, 4,435,475, Cl. 428-409.000.
Kurihara, Shuichi: See-
Suzuki, Yoshihiro; Nakagawa, Shuichi; Kawamura, Nobuhisa;
Kurihara, Shuichi; Sakuma, Osamu; and Ito, Masahiro, 4,435,772.
Cl. 364-520.000.
Kurita Machinery Manufacturing Company Limited: See—
Miyano, Muneyuki, 4,435.288, Cl. 210-227.000.
Kuroda. Akio: See—
Mutai. Masahiko; Terashima. Tsuneo; Takahashi. Tokutaro; Ta-
naka, Ryuichiro; Kuroda, Akio; Ueyama, Sadao; and Matsu-
moto, Keisuke, 4,435,389. Cl. 424-181.000.
Kuroda. Takio: See—
Horiike, Tetsuro; Kuroda. Takio; and Shiozaki. Tomoharu.
4.435,340. Cl. 264-4.700.
Kuroda, Tsukasa: See —
Yoshii, Tsuneo; Ueda, Toshitaka; and Kuroda, Tsukasa. 4.435.522.
Cl. 502-319.000.
Kurtz. George W,; and Bankston. Ben F.. to United Sutes of America.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration. Two-dimensional
scanner apparatus. 4,434,659, Cl. 73-620.000.
Kuwana. Noriaki: See —
Sato, Akio; Nakajima, Kenji; Takahara, Yoshimaaa; Kijima,
Shizumasa; Kuwana, Noriaki; Abe, Shinya; and Yamada, Kouzi,
4,435,423, Cl. 424-318.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 25
Kuze, Yoshikazu. Read clock pulse controller. 4,435,827, Cl.
377-44.000.
Kyriakos, Constantinos S., to Bendix Corporation. The. Means for
eliminating step error in FM/CW radio altimeters. 4,435,708, Cl.
343-12.00A.
La Calhene: See—
Picard, Claude; and Saint Martin. Bernard, 4,435,194, Cl. 55-96.000.
Labelle, Henri M. R., to Martinray Industries Ltd. Hinge having open
curved portions. 4,434.525, Cl. 16-355.000.
Laboratoires Biotrol S.A.: See —
Jeanty. Philippe. 4.434.803. Cl. 128-770.000.
Laboratorium Prof Dr. Rudolf Berthoid: See—
Berthoid, Fritz; and Kubisiak, Helmut, 4,435,509, Cl. 436-518.000.
LaBudde, Edward V.: See—
Hsieh, Der-Chang; and UBudde, Edward V., 4.435,797, Cl.
369-32.000.
LaCount, Kenneth H.. to Cooper Industries. Inc. Pneutmatic hoist
brake and control. 4,434,974, Cl. 254-360.000.
Lacour, Alain P.: See—
Bourgery, Guy R.; Douzon, Colette A.; Ancher, Jean-Francois R.;
Lacour, Alain P.; Guerret, Patrick G.; Langlois. Michel; and
Dostert, Philippe L., 4,435.415, Cl. 424-272.000.
Lai. Yu-Chin; DeBona, Bruce T.; Prevorsek, Dusan C; and Akkapeddi.
Murali K.. to Allied Corporation. Temperature stable thermotropic
poly(ester carbonate) containing high amounts of readily available
diols. 4.435,561, Cl. 528-193.000.
Lai. Joginder: See —
Throckmonon, Morford C; and Lai, Joginder, 4,435,553, Cl.
526-201.000.
Lama, William L.; and Rees. James D.. to Xerox Corporation. Method
and apparatus for improving image quality of a reduction/enlarge-
ment gradient index lens array. 4.435,039, Cl. 350-96.250.
LaMattina, John L.; and Lipinski, Christopher A., to Pfizer Inc. Anti-
ulcer 2-guanidino-4-(2-substituted-amino-4-imidazolyl)thiazoles and
process therefor. 4,435,396. Cl. 424-248.510.
Lamberti. Vincent; and Pease. Wilder F.. to Lever Brothers Company.
Preparation and use of alkali metal isethionates from ethionic acid.
4,435.328, Cl. 260-400.000.
Lancaster, Janet M.: See —
Atkinson, Alan W.; and Lancaster, Janet M., 4,435,235, Cl.
156-62.200.
Lanciault, Joseph A. Adjustable solar heat collector. 4,434.786. Cl.
126-424.000.
Landa, Benzion, tc Savin Corporation. Apparatus for electrophotogra-
phy. 4,435,068. Cl. 355-3.00R.
Landers, Samuel P.; and Egan, William E., to Goodyear Tire k Rubber
Company, The. Pneumatic tire. 4,434,830, Cl. 152-209.00R.
Lang, Richard D.: See —
Bolton, Theodore S.; Leech, Brad G.; and Lang, Richard D.,
4,434,710, Cl. 98-94.0AC.
Langlois, Michel: See —
Bourgery, Guy R.; Douzon, Colette A.; Ancher, Jean-Francois R.;
Lacour, Alain P.; Guerret, Patrick G.; Langlois, Michel; and
Dostert, Philippe L., 4.435,415, Cl. 424-272.000.
Larigaldie, Serge: See —
Taillet, Joseph; and Larigaldie, Serge, 4,435.190, Cl. 55-5.000.
Laroche, Pierre: See—
Mertens. Guy; and Laroche, Pierre, 4,435,043, Cl. 350-288.000.
Larson. Charles L., deceased; and by Larson, Rocket L.. executor.
Accumulator for veneer feeder. 4,434,912, Cl. 221-227.000.
Larson, Rocket L., executor: See —
Larson, Charles L., deceased; and Larson, Rocket L., executor,
4,434,912, Cl. 221-227.000.
Laszczower, Max, to Solco Basel AG. Assembly for receiving and
discharging a collection of blood. 4,435,170, Cl. 604-4.000.
Lau, Philip T. S., to Eastman Kodak Company. Release of photo-
graphic reagents with 3-pyrazolidone developing agents. 4,435,495,
Cl. 430-218.000.
Lau, Philip Y., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Backfill for magne-
sium galvanic anodes. 4,435,263, Cl. 204-197.000.
Lau, Philip Y., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Magnesium anode
backfills. 4.435,264. Cl. 204-197.000.
Lauer, Gerhard; Morawiez, Alfred; and Wild, Jurgen. Tool for gauging
the comers of workpieces of sheet metal or the like. 4,434,559, Cl.
33-174.00L.
Laurent, Henry: See —
Annen, Klaus; Laurent, Henry; Hofmeister, Helmut; and Wiechert,
Rudolf, 4.435.390. Cl. 424-243.000.
PeUoldt. Karl; Laurent. Henry; and Wiechert. Rudolf, 4,435,327,
Cl. 260-397.500.
Lavorazione Materie Plastiche L.M.P. S.p.A.: See —
Colombo, Roberto, 4,435,345, Cl. 264-53.000.
Leah. George R., to Pennwalt Corporation. Adherent, acid cured resin
protective coatings for concrete and steel. 4,435,472, Cl. 428-333.000.
Leu S.n.c. di Foggini & C: See—
Foggini. Giovanni, 4,435,009, Cl. 296-97.00H.
Lebert. Ulrich: See-
Horn, Peter; Hesse, Anton; Heckmann, Walter; Lebert, Ulrich;
Guthmann. Alfred; and Marx, Matthias. 4,435,537, Cl.
524-391.000.
LeBlond. Claude W.. to Gerber Garment Technology, Inc. Method and
apparatus for sealing out sheet material. 4,434,691, Cl. 83-56.000.
Lecolier. Serge; and Raynal, Serge, to Societe Nationale des Poudres et
Explosifs. Associations of bases, resulting from the combination of a
littuum alkyl or aryl with an alkali metal amide or hydride, polymeri-
zation process in which they are used, and product obtained.
4.435.312, Cl. 502-157.000.
Le Count, David J.; See-
Blackburn, Thomas P.; Cox, Barry; Guildford. Allen J.; Le Count.
D«yid J.; Pearce, Robert J.; and Thoraber, Craig W., 4,435.405.
Cl. 424-258.000.
Lee, Cheuk M.; and Parks. James A., to Abbott Laboratories. 5-Sub-
stituted 2,3-dihydrobenzofuran-2-carboxylic acids and their use in
diuretic compositions. 4,435.422. Cl. 424-285.000
Lee. Chong H.. to Suh Won America, Inc. Dual purpose pallet sheet.
4.434,894, Cl. 206-526.000.
Lee, John D.: See—
Aujla. Sharanjit S.; arid Lee. John D.. 4.435.034. Cl. 339-98 000.
Lee, Wai-Tak P.: See—
Gergis, Isons S.; and Lee, Wai-Tak P., 4.435.784. Cl. 365-8.000.
Leech. Brad G.; See—
Bolton. Theodore S.; Leech. Brad G.; and Lang. Richard D..
4.434.710. Cl. 98-94.0AC.
Leeper, Harold M.. to ALZA Corporation. Elastomeric active agent
delivery system and method of use. 4.435.180. Cl. 604-896.000
Le Fur. Gerard R.; and Renault. Chnstian L. A., to Pharmindustne.
3-[2-(3-Alkyl and alkenyl-4-piperidyl)-ethyl]-indoles for inhibiting
serotonin upuke and for releasing serotonin. 4.435.410. cf
424-267.000.
Lehnhardt. William F.; Streaty. Charles E., Jr.; Yackel. Walter C. Jr.;
Yang. Ho S.; and Tang. Daniel K.. to A. E. Suley Manufaoluring
Company. Soy isolate suiuble for use in imiution cheese. 4.435.438,
Cl. 426-656.000.
Leibowitz, Mitchell J.; Kong, Ah S.; Sonnino-Goldman, Paula; and
Wolf. Peter, to USV Pharmaceutical Corporation. Method of stimu-
lating production of IgM antibodies. 4.435.409. Cl. 424-266.000.
Leight, Howard S. Disposable ear plug. 4.434.794. Cl. 128-152.000.
Leipelt. Paul A.: See—
Azeez. Syed A.; Leipelt. Paul A.; and Morello. Herbert. 4,435.243.
Cl. 156-361.000.
Leiter. Harold E.: See-
Black. Richard W.; Kirayoglu. Erol M.; Leiter. Harold E.; and
Smith. Richard C. 4,435.031. Cl. 339-17.00C
Leiental. Mark; and Steklenski. David J., to Eastman Kodak Company.
Electrically activatable recording element and process. 4.435.490. Cl.
430-45.000.
Lemke. Kenneth W.. to MAT Chemicals Inc. Bnght nickel electroplat-
ing. 4,435,254, Cl. 204-49.000.
Lempert, Karoly; Harsanyi, Kalman; Doleschall, Gabor; Homyak.
Gyula; Nyitrai. Jozsef; Zauer. Karoly; Fetter. Jozsef; Simig. Gyula;
Visky nee Gombos, Zsuzsanna; and Barta nee Szalai, Gizella, to
Richter Gedeon Vegyeszeti Gyar Rt. Heterocyclic compounds
containing an alkoxycarbonyl and a substituted methyl group
4,435,322, Cl. 260-239.00A.
Les Cables de Lyon: See—
Gaubcrt, Jean, 4,435,613. Cl. 174-102.0SC.
LeVeau. Robert, to Hallmark Cards. Inc. Memorabilia repository
4.434.567. Cl. 40-157.000.
Lever Brothers Company: See—
Lamberti. Vincent; and Pease. Wilder F., 4.435.328, Cl.
260-400.000.
Lowry, Michael R.. 4.435.310. Cl. 252-370.000.
Pader. Morton. 4.435.380. Cl. 424-49.000.
Levin, Leonard J., to RCA Corporation. Information record with a
thick overcoat. 4,435.801, Cl. 369-275.000.
Levine, Peter A.: See —
Bendell, Sidney L.; and Levine, Peter A., 4.435,730, Cl
358-213.000.
Levine, Richard, to United Technologies Corporation. Cooling system
for turbines. 4,435,123, Cl. 416-95.000.
Levitt, George, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. 1., and Company. Agricul-
tural pyridinesulfonamides. 4,435,206. Cl. 71-92.000.
Lewin. David F.; Haynes. Louie J.; and Beach, Lynne B., to Owens-
Coming Fiberglas Corporation. Strand guide for packaging appara-
tus. 4,434,946. Cl. 242-18.0OG.
Lewis, Robert M.; and Slaugh, Lynn H, to Shell Oil Company. Con-
version of dimethyl ether to formaldehyde. 4,435,602, Cl.
568-470.000.
Leybold-Heraeui GmbH: See—
Stenzel. Otto; and Flecker. Pierre, 4.435.818. Cl. 373-104.000.
Liao. Henry H.. to Xerox Corporation. One shot predictor for mixed
mode documents. 4.435.726. Cl. 358-135.000.
Liberty Carton Co.: See —
Rivkin. Eric M.. 4.434.899. Cl. 211-41 000.
Rivkin. Eric M.. 4.435.028, Cl. 312-258.000.
Licciardello, Michael; and Boden, Richard M., to Intemational Ravors
& Fragrances Inc. Methyl carbonate of a,3.3-trimethyl cyclohexane
methanol, organoleptic uses thereof and process for preparing same.
4.435.331. Cl. 260-463.000
Licentia Patent'-Verwaltungs-GmbH: See —
Gockler. Heinz; Till, Reinhard; and Schenk. Heinrich, 4,435,773,
Cl. 364-724.000.
Lidstom, Thorbjom G.: See —
Blomqvist, Thomas H.; and Lidstom, Thorbjom G., 4,434,825, Cl.
144-193.00A.
Liggett Group Inc.: See —
Hall. Floyd V.. 4,434,805, Cl. 131-362.000.
Lin, Shiow-Ching. to W. R. Grace & Co N-Cyano amide compositions
and adducts thereof. 4.435,549, Cl. 525-504.000.
Lindahl. Lars: See —
Almqvist. Christer; and Lindahl. Lars. 4.434.643. Cl. 72-379.000.
u-
PI 26
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Lindenachmidt, Gerhard: See —
Brandstetter, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Scharf, Bemhard; Lin-
deiuchmidt, Gerhard; Schwaab, Josef; and Jung, Rudolf H.,
4,435.541. CI. 525-64.000.
Lindgren. Carl, to Koppers Company, Inc. Device for adjusting the
position of a track mounted car. 4,435,250, CI. 202-239.000.
Lindorfcr. Walter; and Jan-Held, Wilhelm, to Wintershall AG. Process
for the temporary storage of recyclable liquid wastes in underground
salt caverns. 4.435,290, CI. 210-708.000.
Lindstrom, Merlin R.; Parlman, Robert M.; and Kimble, James B.. to
Phillips Petroleum Company. Sulfur based metal cleaners. 4,435,304.
CI. 252-156.000.
Link. Edwin A.; and Mikulecky. Harvey W.. to RTE Corporation.
Primary circuit breaker. 4,435.690. CI. 335-37,000.
Linley. Francis M., Jr.. to Universal Thread Grinding Company. Anti-
backlash spring-mounted nut. 4.434,677, CI. 74-409.000.
Linzberger, Robert, to Gebruder Buhler AG. Knife scraper for drums,
particularly the drums of a cylinder mill. 4.434.522. CI. 15-256.510.
Lipinski, Christopher A.: See—
LaMattina. John L.; and Lipinski. Christopher A., 4.435.396, CI.
424-248.510. \
Litman, David J.: See— i
Zuk, Robert F.; and Litman, David J., 4,435,504. CI. 435-7.000.
Liu, Kou-chang, to GAF Corporation. Herbicidal compounds, compo-
sitions, and method of use. 4,435,588, CI. 500-21.000.
Liu, Yi-Tsung: See-
Ganguly, Ashit K.; Mallams, Allan K.; and Liu. Yi-Tsuna,
4.435.388. CI. 424-180.000. ' *
Loacker. Artur: See—
Comploi. Georg; Heimgartner. Roland; Loacker. Artur; Huber.
Kurt; and Wallimann. Hans. 4.434.728. CI. 112-84.000.
Lob, Erwin: See—
Pauli. Gunter; Krause, Gunter; and Lob. Erwin, 4,435,834. CI.
Lockheed Corporation: See—
Cronin, Michael J.; and Seid, Gordon, 4,434,624, CI. 62-172.000.
Whitcomb. William T.; and Butler. John V.. 4.434.647. CI 73-
l.OOR.
Loev, Bernard; Jones, Howard; and Shroff. James R., to USV Pharma-
ceutical Corporation. N-Substituted 1.4-dihydropyridazines and
pharmaceutical compositions. 4,435,395, CI. 424-248.500.
LofTeiman. Frank F.; and Brady. Thomas £., to American Cyanamid
Company. Novel polymeric light stabilizers for polymers. 4.435.555.
Long, David J.: See—
Oxenrider. Bryce C; and Long, David J., 4,435.294. CI. 252-8.600.
Long, Thomas W., Jr.: See—
Gasparaitis, Bernard; Long. Thomas W.. Jr.; and Richardson.
Charles P.. 4.435.713. CI. 343-702.000.
Lonne. Klaus: See-
Beyer. Horst; Lonne. Klaus; and Majewski. Klaus-Peter. 4,434,989,
CI. 277-235.00B.
Lonza Ltd.: See—
Squarattj, Armand, 4,435,576, CI. 548-164.000.
Lorie, Raymond A.; and Strong. Hovey R.. Jr.. to International Busi-
ness Machines Corporation. Method for conditional branch execution
in SIMD vector.prbcessors. 4,435,758, CI. 364-200.000.
Louboutin. Robert; and Riotte. Michel, to Degremont. Liquid filter
device. 4.435,286, CI. 210-116.000.
Lowry, Michael R., to Lever Brothers Company. Manufacture of
multicolored detergent bars having sinusoidal striping. 4.435.310. CI
252-370.000.
Lozano. Gerald L.: See-
Hunt, Glenn E.; Alexander, Michael C; Lozano, Gerald L • and
Manktelow, Gerald O., 4,435.703, CI. 340-723.000.
^"; /,^?, ^ ^ • '° McQuay Inc. Patterned heat exchanger fin.
4,434,846, CI. 165-161.000.
Lubrizol Corporation, The: See— <
Forsbcrg, John W.. 4.435,297. CI. 252-34.700.
Lucas. Hermann- Josef: See-
Burba. Christian; Lucas. Hermann-Josef; and Neffgen. Bemd.
4,435.558. CI. 528-45.000.
Lucas Industries Limited: See—
Hoenick. Hermann H., 4,435,021, CI. 303-10.000.
Lucas Industries plc: See-
Adams. Derek S.. 4.435,675, Q. 320-22.000.
Lucius, John E.: See-
Berry, Donald A.; Fabian, David J.; and Lucius, John E.. 4,435,035,
CI. 339-99.00R.
Ludwig. George C. to Tom McGuane Industries, Inc. Fuel flow
regulator control for a diesel engine with exhaust gas driven turbo-
charger. 4,434,761, CI. 123-383.000.
Lugosi, Gyorgy; Simay, Antal; Bodnar, Janos; Simandi, Laszlo; and
Somfai, Eva, to Chinoin Gyogyszer es Vesgyeszeti Termekek Gyara
R. T. Process for preparing substituted urea derivatives. 4,435,567,
CI. 544-165.000.
Luh, Howard H., to Ford Aerospace A. Communications Corp. Gratins
lobe eliminator. 4,435,714, CI. 343-753.000.
Lupo, Frank V. Roof bolter vehicle and wheels therefor. 4,434,864, CI.
Luthi, Oscar, and Carlsmith, Lawrence A., to Ingersoll-Rand Com-
pany. Mixer for use in pulp processes. 4,435,085, CI. 366.155.000.
Lutz. Dieter; Nagler. Franz; Thieler, Wolfgang; and Tellert. Rudy, to
Sachs-Systemtechnik GmbH. System for automatic actuation of a
motor vehicle clutch. 4.434,879, CI. 192-0.052.
Lynell Medical Technology Inc.: See—
Poler, Stanley. 4,434,515. CI. 3-13.000.
^'^i"^,^ 'lli?^ Downhole turbine rotary drilling device. 4.434,862,
C-l. 1 75-103.000.
^ T?''' n ^"°"; ""** Pc^S' Richard G., to Dow Chemical Company,
JI";.^''SSfSi?'^ '''' preparation of substituted pyridines. 4,435,573,
CI. 546-250.000.
Lytaev, Rem A.; Barakaev. Khristofor F.; Taratuta, Igor P.; and Krai-
nov, Sergei V to Vsesojuzny Elektrotekhnickesky Institut Imeni
V.I. Lenina. Method of pulsed control of high-tension thyristor
recufymg arrangement and system for effecting same. 4,435,748. CI.
363-54.000.
M.A.N. Maschinenfabrik Augsburg-Numberg Aktiengesellschaft:
Albers, Rolf; Aschenbruck, Emil; Neuhaus, Gunter; and KoUur.
Joachmi, 4,434,987, CI. 277-80.000.
XM **i^t°'."''"^' *"'' Wolfgarten, Hubert, 4,435,812, CI. 373-72.000.
M.A.N.-Roland Druckmaschinen Aktiengesellschaft: See—
..^i^^''J"' '"8°= *"'' Mische, Hans-Jurgen, 4,434,979, CI. 271-307.000,
M&T Chemicals Inc.: See —
Umke, Kenneth W., 4,435,254, CI. 204-49.000.
M.U. Engineering St Mfg., Inc.: See-
Skinner. James R.; and Atwood, Robert G., 4,434.891, Q.
206-444.000.
Maeda, Nobuyoshi; Itakura, Hideo; and Yagi, Takashi. to Aida Engi-
neenng. Ltd. C-Frame press. 4,434.646. CI. 72-451.000
Maggi. Gian P.: See—
Maggi, Rodolfo; Maggi. Gian P.; and Marcon, Giuliano, 4,435,333.
CI. 26O-465.00D.
Maggi, Rodolfo; Maggi, Gian P.; and Marcon, Giuliano. to Chimica
Bulciago S.r.l. Acetonitrile solvate of an a-aminoacyl chloride hydro-
chlonde. 4,435.333. CI. 26O-465.0OD.
MagnotU, Vincent L.: See—
Markham, Larry D.; Martin. Andrew C; Elton. Edward F.; Mag-
no'ta- Vincent L.; and Wallick, Scott A., 4,435,249. CI.
Majewski, Klaus-Peter: See-
Beyer, Horst; Lonne, Klaus; and Majewski, Klaus-Peter, 4,434,989.
CI. 277-235. OOB.
Makino, Tomoaki: See-
Nagano, Susumu; Iruya, Seiichi; Yasuda, Yoshinori; and Makino.
Tomoaki. 4.435,769. CI. 364-464.000.
Makino, Tomoatsu: See—
Yamamoto. Norboru; Makino. Tomoatsu; and Okuda. Rvoichi.
4.434,779, CI. 123-609.000.
Mallams, AHan K.: See-
Ganguly, Ashit K.; Mallams, Allan K.; and Liu, Yi-Tsung.
4,435,388.0.424-180.000. *
Maly. Zdenek; and Blazek, Vladislav. Arrangement for measurement of
dynamic properties of microparticles. 4,435.080, CI. 356-426.000.
Mammel, Wanda L.: See —
Cohen, Leonard G.; and Mammel, Wanda L., 4,435,040, Q.
350-96.330.
Manchester R&D Partnership: See—
Fergason, James L., 4,435.047. CI. 35O-334.00O.
Mandel. Richard M. Overhead access assembly. 4,435,010, CI.
296-100.000. 7 . . , v,i
Mangartz, Karl-Heinz: See—
Oepen, Gerhard; Mangaru, Karl-Heinz; Seifried. Norbert; Engel,
Jurgen; and Isaac, Otto. 4.435,563, CI. 536-18.100.
Manktelow, Gerald O.: See —
Hunt, Glenn E.; Alexander, Michael C; Lozano, Gerald L.- and
Manktelow, Gerald O., 4,435,703, CI. 340-723.000.
Mann, Melvin S.: See—
Haesloop, WUliam G.; Mann, Melvin S.; and Jones, James W.,
4.435,132, CI. 417-360.000.
Mannuzza, Frank J.: See-
Jackson, David E.; and Mannuzza, Frank J., 4,435,506, Q.
435-189.000.
Manville Service Corporation: See-
Fay, Ralph M., 4,435,469, CI. 428-285.000.
Marcilly, Christian: See—
Juguin, Bernard; Franck, Jean-Pierre; Jacquin, Yves; Marcilly,
Christian; and Martino, Germain, 4,435.274. CI. 208-80.000.
Marcon. Giuliano: See—
Maggi. Rodolfo; Maggi. Gian P.; and Marcon. Giuliano. 4.435,333,
CI. 26O-465.00D.
Mariani, Elio; and Ballato, Arthur, to United Sutes of America, Army.
Method of frequency trimming surface acoustic wave devices
4,435,441, CI. 427-10.000.
Maris, John M. Method of predicting the approaching stall of an aircraft
wing. 4,435,695, CI. 340-966.000.
Markham, Larry D.; Martin, Andrew C; Elton, Edward F.; Magnotta,
Vincent L.; and Wallick, Scott A., to Black Clawson Co., The; and
Air ProducU ft Chemicals. Inc. Process for the oxygen delignifica-
tion of pulp mill rejecte. 4.435.249, CI. 162-24.000.
Marsh, Keith D.: See—
McCabe, Ralph P.; and Marsh. Keith D.. 4.434,763. CI.
123-440.000.
Marshall, William J., Jr.; and Brigham, Gerald A., to Sanders Associ-
ates, Inc. Wall-driven oval ring transducer. 4,435,794, CI.
367-155.000.
Marston, Alan D.; and Anne, Lenin, to Hewlett-Packard Company.
Edge seal with polysilicon in LOCOS process. 4,435,446, CI.
427-93.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 27
Martel, Thomas J.: See—
Bowen, Robert F.; Freedman. George; Teich, Wesley W.; Martel.
Thomas J.; and Eves. E. Eugene, 11, 4,435.628, CI. 2I9-10.55M.
Martin. Andrew C: See—
Markham. Larry D.; Martin. Andrew C; Elton, Edward F.; Mag-
notta, Vincent L.; and Wallick, Scott A., 4,435,249, CI.
162-24.000.
Martin, Anthony F.: See—
Gerritsen, Jan; Atkinson, Ronald E.; and Martin, Anthony F.,
4,435,317, CI. 252-547.000.
Martin, Emil; Barch, Herbert W.; and Greer, S. Thomas, to PPG
Industries, Inc. Applicator for applying a coating to a surface.
4,434.521. CI. 15-230.110.
Martin. Gordon W.; and Strohl. John, to Bendix Corporation. The.
Oxygen sensing cell. 4.435.268. CI. 204-408.000.
Martin. William B.: See—
Denk. Jpseph; and Martin, William B., 4,434,881, CI. 192-89.00A.
Martino, Germain: See—
Dinh, Chan T.; Desvard. Alain; Jacquin. Yves; and Martino. Ger-
main, 4,435,277, CI. 208-108.000.
Juguin, Bernard; Franck, Jean-Pierre; Jacquin, Yves; Marcilly,
Christian; and Martino, Germain, 4,435,274, CI. 208-80.000.
Martinray Industries Ltd.: See—
Ubelle. Henri M. R.. 4.434,525, CI. 16-355.000.
Maruko Seiyaku Co., Ltd.: See—
Ohno, Sachio; Mizukoshi, Kiyoshi; KomaUu, Osamu; Yamamoto,
Hajimu; and Kunou, Yasuo. 4.435,566. CI. 544-117.000.
Marx. Matthias: See —
Horn, Peter; Hesse, Anton; Heckmann, Walter; Lebert. Ulrich;
Guthmann, Alfred; and Marx, Matthias, 4,435,537, CI.
524-391.000.
Mashimo, Yukio: See —
Fukahori, Hidehiko; Ichiyanagi, Toshikazu; Iwashita, Tomonori;
Mashimo, Yukio; Sunouchi, Akio; and Fujino, Masahisa,
4,435,061,0.354-173.110.
Maskasky, Joe E., to Eastman Kodak Company. Controlled site epitax-
ial sensitization. 4,435,501, CI. 430-434.000.
Masler, William F., III. Method of making and using novel scale inhibit-
ing terpolymer. 4.435,556. CI. 526-317.000.
Masonite Corporation: See —
Cook, Melvin W., 4,434,900, CI. 211-189.000.
Massachusetts Institute of Technology: See—
Wurtman, Richard J., 4,435,424, CI. 424-319.000.
Massey-Ferguson Services N.V.: See—
BaUey, Alfred J., 4,434,605, CI. 56-16.400.
Masuda, Senichi; and Nonogaki, YuUka. Bipolar ionic current probe
unit and method for measuring positive and negative current densities
by means of the same probe unit. 4,435,681, CI. 324-459.000.
Masuda, Toyohiko: See—
Ishimaru, Hitoshi; Nagai, Yoji; and Masuda, Toyohiko, 4,434,620,
CI. 60-657.000.
Mathis, Ronald D.; and Reed, Jerry O., to Phillips Petroleum Company.
Process for cleaning metal surfaces of poly(arylene sulfide) deposits.
4,435,221, CI. 134-2.000.
Mateko, Theodore N.. to Babcock ft Wilcox Company. The. Break-
point chlorination control system. 4,435,291, CI. 210-739.000.
Matsko, Theodore N.: See—
Dziubakowski, Donald J.; Kaya, Azmi; Keyes, Marion A.; Matsko,
Theodore N.; Moss, William H.; and Scheib, Thomas J.,
4,435,650, CI. 307-32.000.
Matson, Carl G., to Hamilton Equipment Co., Inc. Self-clamping rotary
vibrator and mount therefor, 4,435,083, CI. 366-114.000.
Mauui. Masao; Okamoto, Kazuo; and Osagawa, Takao, to Kanebo,
Ltd.; and Kanebo Synthetic Fiben Ltd. Apparatus for treating pile
articles. 4,434,63 1 , CI. 68- 1 7 1 .000.
Matsui, Yasuo, to Hitachi, Ltd. Frame synchronizer. 4,435,826, CI.
375-115.000.
Matsumiya, Saburo; Washimi, Koichi; and Tanji, Tsuneo. to Toyo
Engineering Corporation. Method of treating heavy oil. 4,435.276.
CI. 208-96.0)0.
MaUumoto. Akio; and Araki. Kazuhiro, to MaUushiu Electric Works,
Ltd. Motor-driven movement for timepiece. 4,435,087, CI.
368-76.000.
Matsumoto, Keisuke: See—
Mutai, Masahiko; Terashima, Tsuneo; Takahashi, Tokutaro; Ta-
naka, Ryuichiro; Kuroda, Akio; Ueyama, Sadao; and Matsu-
moto, Keisuke, 4,435,389, CI. 424-181.000.
Matsumoto, Muneaki: See—
Kuno, Akira; MaUumoto, Muneaki; Numata. Koji; and Urano.
Susumu. 4.435,760. CI. 364-444.000.
MaUumoto Seiyaku Ko^yo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Sugiyama, Iwakichi; Endo, Kiyoshi; and Takaoka, Yukihisa,
4.435.587. CI. 556-410.000.
MaUumura, Hiroshi; Ohta, Yasuto; Nozaki, TeUuo; Shimizu, Makoto;
and Sugizaki, Shigeru, to Tokyo TaUuno Co., Ltd. Liquid quantity
measunng apparatus, 4,434,657, CI. 73-304.00C.
MaUumura, Hiroshi; Murakami, Fumiki; and Sonobe, Hiroshi, to Mine-
met Recherche. Process for the preparation of methacrylic acid
esters. 4,435,594, CI. 560-205.000.
MaUumura, Hisashi: See-
Hashimoto, Toyokazu; Wada, Hiroyuki; Kida, Masahiko; Mat-
sumura, Hisashi; and Nakayashiki, Susumu, 4,435,704, CI.
340-825.010.
MaUumura, Shingo; Enomoto, Hiroshi; Aoyagi, Yoshiaki; and Tanaka,
Haruo, to Nippon Shinyaku Co., Ltd. Carbamylpiperazine com-
pounds. 4,433,397, CI. 424-2S0.000.
Mauunawa, Masahiko: See—
Seimiya, Ryubun; Inowa, Shigeru; Tarumi, Noriyoshi; Matsunawa,
Masahiko; and Tokunaga, Hiroshi, 4,435.723, CI. 346-154.000.
Tkumi, Noriyoshi; Iwahashi, Haruo; Mauunawa, Masahiko; and
Tokunaga, Hiroshi. 4.435.066, CI. 355.3.0SC.
MaUuo, Saburo: See —
Murakami. Shozo; Aoki, Hiroyuki; MaUuo. Saburo; Ikezaki. Eiji;
and Yamaura. Kenji. 4.434,976, CI. 266-268.000.
MaUuo, Takashi: See—
Noguchi. Hiroshi; Hashimoto. Shunichi; Kitamura, Shigeyoshi;
MaUuo, Takashi; Mine, Akihiko; and Kamoshita, KaUuzo.
4,435,332, CI. 260-465.00D.
MaUuoka, Fumio: See—
Chiba, Masakazu; and MaUuoka, Fumio, 4,435,000, CI.
280-806.000.
MaUuoka, Hiroki; Kato, Yuichi; and Iwata, Minoru, to Toyou Jidosha
Kabushiki Kaisha. Air assist device of fuel injection type internal
combustion engine. 4.434,766. CI. 123-472.000.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd.: See—
Hamane. Tokuhito; and Tasai. Masaaki. 4.434.945. CI. 242-7.140.
Kubota, Tadashi; Hamane, Tokuhito; and Tasai, Masaaki,
4,434.819.0. 140-92.100.
Mayumi, Kuzuaki; Fujiwara, Yoshihiro; Tokuda, Toshio; and
Suzuki, Toshiaki. 4.435,842, CI. 455-181.000.
Nishimura, Hiroyuki; Hasegawa, Shumpei; WaUnabe, Masahiro;
and Furuya. Haruo, 4,434.770, CI. 123-494,000.
Yamashiu, Ichiro; and Ise. Yukihiko. 4.434.671, O. 73-862.480,
Mauushiu Electric Works. Ltd.: See—
MaUumoto, Akio; and Araki. Kazuhiro. 4,435.087. CI, 368-76,000.
Mauushita, Hiroshi: See —
Sasahara, Kazuo; Honda. MasamiUu; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami.
Yasushi; Neichi, Tomohiro; Nakakimura, Hiroshi; Noda,
Yukifumi; Matsushiu. Hiroshi; and HaU. Shun-ichi, 4.435,391,
CI, 424-244.000.
Matsushita, Toshihiko; Hiraishi. Shigetoshi; and Morishita, Sadao, to
Mitsubishi Paper Mills, Ltd. Transfer-onto-plain paper type of pres-
sure-sensitive copying paper, 4,435,471. CI, 428-320.800,
MaUuura. Masahiko: See—
Morita, Yasuyuki; Yokooku, KaUuhiko; Shiraishi, Hideo; and
MaUuura, Masahiko, 4,434,749, O. 123-41,020.
Matui, Kunihiko; and Tanaka, Shikei. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. In-phase voluge elimination circuit for Hall element.
4.435.653. O. 307-309.000,
Matumoto. Michiaki; Etou, Hironori; and Nakamoto, Hidckazu, to
Hitachi. Ltd, Fuel supply control system. 4,435.151, CI, 431-90.000,
Mauer. Richard L.. to Rapid Ring Co., Inc Roury press punch ring
and method of changing punches carried thereby. 4,434,690, CL
83-13.000.
Maus. Julius, to Gretsch-Unitas GmbH. Control mechanism for a
window or door. 4.434.678. CI. 74-47 l.OOR.
Mayer, James M., to Monsanto Company. Substituted-butanediperox-
oic acids and process for bleaching. 4,435,335, CI. 260-502.00R,
Mayer, Steven T.; Miner, Jay G,; Neubauer, Douglas G,; and Decuir,
Joseph C, to Atari, Inc. Dau processing system with programmable
graphics generator, 4,435.779, CI. 364-900.000.
Mayumi, Kuzuaki; Fujiwara, Yoshihiro; Tokuda, Toshio; and Suzuki,
Toshiaki, to Mauushiu Electric Industrial Co., Ltd, Programmable
channel selecting apparatus, 4,435,842, CI, 455-181.000.
McAteer. John E.; Bisler. Kenneth E.; Pucnik. Jerry; and Kish. Rich-
ard D.. to Hauserman. Inc. Partition head assembly for partition wall
panels. 4,434,596. CI, 52-243,100.
McAusIand, Robert R.. to Advanced Technology Laboratories. Elon-
fated printed circuit flexible cables and method of making the same.
.435.614. O. 174-1 17.0PC,
McBeth. Raymond A,: See-
Wright. Brian D,; McBeth. Raymond A.; and Weasels. Egon.
4.434.741,0. 114-264.000.
McCabe. Ralph P.. to Colt Industries Operating Corp. Apparatus and
system for controlling the air-fuel ratio supplied to a combustion
engine. 4.434.762, CI. 123-438.000.
McCabe, Ralph P.; and Marsh, Keith D., to Colt Industries Operating
Corp. Apparatus and system for controlling the air-fuel ratio supplied
to a combustion engine. 4.434.763. O. 123-440.000.
McCall, Francis L.. to Specified Ceiling Systems, Drop ceiling frame
construction, 4,434.599. CI, 52-729,000.
McCarthy, Patrick J. Clothesline mast. 4,434,898. O. 211-1.300.
McCartney. Michael S.. to Combustion Engineering. Inc. Method for
low load operation of a coal-fired furnace. 4,434.727. CI. 1 10-347.000.
McCaskill, Rex A.; Mclnroy. John W.; and Waldo. Paul D.. to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation. Interactively rearranging
spatially relaUd dau. 4.435.777. CI. 364-900.000.
McCaskill. Rex A.: See—
Cason. William C; McCaskill. Rex A.; and Kamer, Francisco A..
4.435.778. CI. 364-900.000.
McCollouKh, John K., Jr.; and O'Neill. John H.. Jr., to Milliken Re-
search Corporation. Apparatus for the application of liquids to mov
ing materials. 4,434,632. CI. 68-205.00R.
McCombie, Stuart W.. to Schering Corporation. (5R-6S.8R>-6-(l
Hydroxyethyl)-2-(2-gIycyIaminoethylthio>-penem-3-carboxylic acid
4.435.413. O. 424-2mO0O.
McCoy. David R., to Texaco Inc. Method for demulsification of bitu
men emulsions using polyalkylene polyamine salu. 4.434,850. CI.
166-267.000.
McDonnell Douglas Corporation: See-
Cox, Ronald L.. 4,435,100, CI. 403-27.000.
WUder, Vemon H., 4,435,109, O. 408-14.000.
PI 28
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
McDonough, Kevin C: See—
Bellay. Jeffrey D.; Thaden, Robert C; Hayn. John W.; and Mc-
Donough. Kevin C, 4,435,763, CI. 364-200.000.
McDougaJl, Robert J., to Black ft Decker Inc. Dust shroud for an
abrading tool. 4,434,587, CI. 51-170.0MT.
McDowell, Hunter L., to United States of America, Army. Broadband
slow wave structure attenuator. 4,435,689, CI. 333-8 l.OOA.
McEvoy. Francis J.; and Albright, Jay D., to American Cyanamid
Company. Substituted N-<(i>-aroyIpropionyl) derivatives of a-amino
acids and esters thereof 4,435,329, CI. 26(M55.00R.
McHenry, Max D., to A. B. Dick Company. Printing apparatus includ-
ing serial printing means. 4,434,715, CI. 101-76.000.
Mclnroy, John W.: See—
McCaskill. Rex A.; Mclnroy, John W.; and Waldo, Paul D.,
4,435,777, CI. 364-900.000.
McKechnie, Ronald M. K., to Vaal Reefs Exploration and Mining
Company Limited. Guide roller for skip or cage. 4,434,876, CI.
187-95.000.
McKee, James A.: See —
Ross. Ashley M.; and McKee, James A., 4,434,712. CI. 99-646.00S.
McKenzie. Robert W., to Rockwell International Corporation. Slide
lock handle. 4,435,029, CI. 312-320.000.
McKinney, Linda D.; and Jenkines. Randall C. to Dow Chemical Co.,
The. Carpet backed with fire suppressant polyurethane composition.
4,435,459. CI. 428-95.000.
McManus, John R.-: See-
Jackson, Dale; and McManus. John R., 4,434,841, CI. 165-125.000.
McNulty, John P., to Bristol Composite Materials Engineering Limited.
Elongate structure. 4,435,242, CI. 156-264.000.
McQuay Inc.: See —
Lu, James W. B., 4,434,846, CI. 165-161.000.
Mead Corporation, The: See-
Clark, Frederic L.; Kaffenberger, Orville A.. Jr.; Paranjpe, Suresh
C; Smith, David W.; and Ames, Jack D., 4.435.718, CI.
346-75.000.
Culpepper, Will L., 4.434.602. CI. 53-473.000.
Mech, Stephen J., Jr.: See-
Michaels, Jennifer E.; Michaels, Thomas E.; and Mech, Stephen J.,
Jr., 4.434,660, CI. 73-622.000.
Mechanical Technology Incorporated: See-
Walsh, Michael M., 4,434,617, CI. 60-520.000.
Mecklenbrauker, Wolfgang F. G.: See—
Claasen, Theodoor A. C. M.; and Mecklenbrauker, Wolfgang F.
G., 4,435,774, CI. 364-726.000.
Medem, Harald: See—
Schreckenberg. Manfred; Nouvertne. Werner; Medem, Harald;
Dhem. Rolf; and Muller, Peter R., 4,435,544, CI. 525-146.000.
Medical College of Wi^onsin: See—
Froncisz, Wojcie(ch; and Hyde, James S., 4.435,680. CI.
324-316.000. 7
Meisch, Robert L.: See—
Gemar, Charles; and Meisch, Robert L.. 4,434,953. CI. 242-107.000.
Mekosh. George. Jr., to Budd Company, The. Steering motorized
truck. 4,434,719, CI. 105-168.000.
Melka, James P., Jr.; and Bames, John F., to Western Electric Co., Inc.
Method and apparatus for the recovery of palladium from spent
electroless catalytic baths. 4,435,258, CI. 204-109.000.
Mendel, Eric: See —
Basi, Jagtar S.; and Mendel. Eric. 4,435,247, CI. 156-636.000.
Menzel. Julian M., to Rib Loc (Hong Kong) Ltd. Plastic tubular ob-
jects. 4,435,460, CI. 428-129.000.
Mercadier, Michel: See—
Favie, Claude; and Mercadier. Michel, 4,435.545. CI. 525-344.000.
Merck ft Co., Inc.: See—
Belanger, Patrice C; Williams, Haydn W. R.; and Rokach, Joshua,
4,435,579, CI. 549-12.000.
Hartman, George D.. 4,435,400, CI. 424-250.000.
Merck Patent Gesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung: See—
Watanabe, Takaji; and Noguchi, Tamio. 4.435.220. CI. 106-291.000.
Mericle, Robert W.. to Ethicon, Inc. Instrument for applying lijtatine
chps. 4,434,795, CI. 128-303.00R. kk 7 e b- b
Meritt, Allan S., to International Business Machines Corporation.
Balanced channel finding method. 4,435,755, CI. 364-200.000.
Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals: See-
Harrison, Boyd L.; and Doherty, Niall S., 4,435.420, CI.
424-277.000.
Merrell Toraude et Compagnie: See —
Sjoerdsma. Albert; Bey. Philippe; Jung. Michel; Gerhart. Fritz; and
Schirlin. Daniel. 4,435,425. CI. 424-325.000.
Mertens, Guy; and Laroche, Pierre, to Glaverbel. Composite mirror
panels. 4,435,043, CI. 350-288.000.
Meshberg, Philip. Personal defense actuator. 4,434,914, CI. 222-153.000.
Messer Griesheim GmbH: See—
Roeder, Georg; Sachs, Helmut; and Hajok. Dieter. 4,434,935, CI.
239-85.000.
Measerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit beschraenkter Haft-
ung: See—
Engelsberger. Ernst; and Schulz. Ralf-Thilo, 4,434,580. CI.
49-502.000.
Messina, Neale A.: See—
Summerfield. Martin; Messina, Neale A.; and Ingram. Larry S..
4.434,655, Q. 73-167.000.
Mesta Machine Company: See —
PeUos, Andrew J., 4,435,096, CI. 384-147.000.
Metallgesellschaft Aktiengesellschaft: See-
Schwartz. Werner; and Fischer. Peter. 4.435.211, CI. 75-62.000.
Meulendyk, John W.. to Pneumo Corporation. Free piston engine pump
with energy rate smoothing. 4.435.133, CI. 417-364.000.
Meyer, Franklin, Jr. Indicator snap gage assemblies. 4,434,557, CI.
33-14o.UUIx.
Meyerhoff, Jerome D.; and Forshay, Steven E., to Motorola, Inc.
Remote control circuit. 4,435,844, CI. 455-218.000.
Meyerle, Michael: See—
Friedrich, Ehrlinger; and Meyerle, Michael, 4.434,681. CI.
74-687.000.
Miale. Joseph N.: See-
Chang, Clarence D.; and Miale. Joseph N.. 4,435,516, CI.
Michaelis, Klaus-Peter; and Schneider, Rainer, to Ciba-Geigy Corpora-
tion. Dithiophosphates. 4,435,338, CI. 260-929.000.
Michaels, Jennifer E.; Michaels, Thomas E.; and Mech, Stephen J., Jr.,
to United Sutes of America, Energy. Ultrasonic inspection and
deployment apparatus. 4,434,660, CI. 73-622.000.
Michaels, Thomas E.: See-
Michaels, Jennifer E.; Michaels, Thomas E.; and Mech, Stephen J..
Jr.. 4.434.660. CI. 73-622.000.
Michelet. Daniel: See—
Formanek. Karel; Michelet. Daniel; and Petre. Dominique.
4,435,601, CI. 568-430.000. ^
Micheletto, Renato. Multifunctional instrument for determining the
position and course of the sun, the inclination for maximal insolation
of a plane and the correspondence from solar and conventional time
4,435,640, CI. 235-78.00M. *
Midorikawa, Akira; Kojima, Kenji; and Uchimura, Kazuo, to Ricoh
Company, Ltd. Cleaning apparatus for electrophotography compris-
ing lubricant film applicator means. 4,435,074, CI. 355-15.000.
Miessen, Ralf; Wilsing, Hans; and Schultze-Gebhardt, Fritz, to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the production of highly shrinkable
split tows of acrylonitrile polymers. 4,434,530, CI. 19-0.460.
Mihayashi, Keiji; Ogawa, Tadashi; and Yagihara, Morio, to Fuji Photo
Film Co., Ltd. Silver halide color photographic light-sensitive mate-
rial. 4,435,503, CI. 430-548.000.
Miho, Takuya: See—
Watanabe, Shoji; and Miho, Takuya, 4,435,542, CI. 525-118.000.
Mika, Gyorgy; Csako. Denes; Paczuk, Laszlo; Beres-Deak, Laszio and
Novotny, Laszlo. Vortex injector. 4,435,129, CI. 417-151.000.
Miki, Yukio: See—
YoshJda, Fumio; Miki, Yukio; Egawa, Takeshi; and Yoshizaki.
Akira, 4,435,058, CI. 354-403.000.
Mikroyannidis. loannis A.: See —
Tsolis. Alexandros K.; and Mikroyannidis, loannis A., 4,435,533,
CI. 524-106.000.
Mikulecky, Harvey W.: See-
Link, Edwin A.; and Mikulecky, Harvey W.. 4.435.690. CI.
335-37.000.
Milanowski. G. Jan: See —
Drost. Comelis J.; and Milanowski. G. Jan, 4,434,648. CI. 73-
l.ODV.
Miles Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Jackson, David E.; and Mannuzza, Frank J., 4,435,506, CI.
435-189.000.
Millar, Thomas D., to AHI Operations Limited. Methods of and/or
apparatus for milking animals. 4,434,744, CI. 119-14.020.
Miller, David K.: See—
Hasinger, Siegfried H.; Howard, James M.; and Miller, David K.,
4,435,810, CI. 372-58.000.
Miller, Richard: See-
Nail, Lawson H.; and Miller, Richard, 4,434,689, CI. 82-4.00C.
Miller, Richard L., to Xerox Corporation. Toner removal aoDaratus.
4,435.073, CI. 355-15.000.
Milligan, Charles A.; Vidcki, Edwin R., II; and Yates, Winston F., to
International Business Machines Corporation. Buffered peripheral
subsystems. 4,435,762, CI. 364-200.000.
Milliken Research Corporation: See—
McCollough, John K., Jr.; and O'Neill, John H., Jr., 4,434,632, CI.
68-205.00R.
Rogers, Jack S., 4,435,467, CI. 428-254.000.
Mills, Larry E.; and Dove, Thomas D., to American Standard Inc.
Envelope assembly. 4,435,001, CI. 282-1 1.50A.
Mims, Donald S.: See—
Haynes, Stewart, Jr.; and Mims, Donald S., 4,434,851, Cl.
166-272.000.
Mine, Akihiko: See—
Noguchi, Hiroshi; Hashimoto, Shunichi; Kitamura. Shigeyoshi;
Mateuo, Takashi; Mine, Akihiko; and Kamoshita, KaUuzo.
4,435,332, CI. 260-465.00D.
Minemet Recherche: See —
Matsumura, Hiroshi; Murakami, Fumiki; and Sonobe, Hiroshi,
4,435.594, CI. 560-205.000.
Miner, Jay G.: See-
Mayer, Steven T.; Miner, Jay O.; Neubauer, Douglas G.: and
Decuir. Joseph C, 4,435,779, CI. 364-900.000.
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company: See —
RandUev, Ronald M., 4,435,160, CI. 433-9.000.
Minogue, Robert W. Connector housing for neon tubing. 4.434.569, CI.
40-545.000.
MinolU Camera Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Nakai, Masaaki; and Sahara, Masayoshi, 4,435,057, Q. 354-426.000.
Wada. Kenichi, 4,435,065, CI. 355-3.0DD.
Yoshida, Fumio; Miki, Yukio; Egawa. Takeshi; and Yoshizaki,
Akira, 4,435,058, CI. 354-4O3.O0O.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENT^ES
PI 29
Mintz, Donald J.; Kelly, Arnold J.; and Gleason, Anthony M., to Exxon
Research and Engineering Co. Polymerization reaction by charge
injection. 4,435,261, CI. 204-168.000.
Mische, Hans-Jurgen: See —
Kobler, Ingo; and Mische, Hans-Jurgen, 4,434,979, CI. 271-307.000.
Miserlis, Constantine D., to Badger Company, Inc., The. Process for
the production of phthalic anhydride. 4,435,580, CI. 549-248.000.
Miserlis, ConsUntine D., to Badger Company, Inc., The. Process for
the production of phthalic anhydride. 4,435,581, CI. 549-248.000.
Mishkin, Ronald H.: See—
Oberlander, Charles N., 4,434,698, CI. 84-483.00A.
Miuubishi E>enki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Morishita, Mitsuharu, 4,435,676. CI. 322-33.000.
Nagano, Susumu; Iruya. Seiichi; Yasuda, Yoshinori; and Makino,
Tomoaki, 4,435.769, CI. 364-464.000.
Ohta. Kazutoshi; and Watanabe. Eiki, 4,434.873, CI. 187-28.000.
Tomuro, YasuU. 4.435.656, CI. 307-513.000.
Mitsubishi Paper Mills, Ltd.: See—
MaUushita. Toshihiko; Hiraishi, Shigetoshi; and Morishiu, Sadao,
4,435,471, CI. 428-320.800.
Miuubishi Petrochemical Company Limited: See—
Takeda, Makoto; Miyoshi, Kazuhito; Kaitoh, Miuumasa; and
Omori, Hiroyuki, 4,435,251, CI. 203-50.000.
Mitsubishi Rayon Co., Ltd.: See—
Demarthe, Jean-Michel; Fossi, Paolo; and Gandon, Louis,
4,435,368, CI. 423-40.000.
Kishida, Kazuo; Sasaki, Isao; and Mukai, Nobuhiro, 4,435,540, CI.
524-780.000.
Mitsuboshi Belting Ltd.: See—
Inae, Shoji; and Okamoto, Harunori, 4,435,236, CI. 156-132.000.
Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals, Inc.: See —
Ema. Kenji; Hara. Junji; Ikado. Shuhei; Kawashima, Hideo; and
Yokoo. Tomohide. 4.435.543, CI. 525-143.000.
Miura, Kenji: See-
Ban, Masatoshi; Miura, Kenji; Baba, Yutaka; Iwata, Noriyuki;
Fukui. Akira; Hon, Mikio; Fujimura, Hajime; and Suenaga,
Eiichi, 4,435,392, CI. 424-244.000.
Miura, Shuji: See—
Ito, Hiroo; Kasanami, Takeo; and Miura, Shuji, 4.435,346, CI.
264-54.000.
Miwa, Hirohide; and Shimura, Takaki, to Fujiteu Limited. Ultrasonic
diagnostic system. 4,434,661, CI. 73-625.000.
Miwa, Hirohide: See —
Miyazaki, Junji; Miwa, Hirohide; and Shimura, Takaki, 4,434,658,
CI. 73-618.000.
Miwa, Naoto: See—
Ito, Kazuyuki; Ouki, Masami; Miwa, Naoto; Kamigaito, Osami;
Doi, Haruo; and Hirose, Yoshiharu, 4,435,512, CI. 501-32.000.
Miyai, Masahiko: See—
Okouchi, Isao; Takahashi, Sankichi; Mukai, Yasuteru; Otake, Kat-
sumoto; Sasaki, Takuya; and Miyai, Masahiko, 4,435,285, CI.
209-250.000.
Miyamoto, Yoshimi; Nakamura, NaoUka; Akaku, Fumiyoshi; Koto,
Katsumi; and Kosaka, Tsutomu, to Sumitomo Electric Industries,
Ltd.; and Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Low electrostatic capacity wire-
wound type ignition cable. 4,435,692, CI. 338-214.000.
Miyano, Muneyuki, to Kuriu Machinery Manufacturing Company
Limited. Expressing plate assembly for filter press. 4,435,288, CI.
210-227.000.
Miyazaki, Junji; Miwa, Hirohide; and Shimura, Takaki, to Fujitsu
Limited. Ultrasonic wave tomographic imaging system. 4,434,658,
CI. 73-618.000.
Miyazaki, Yoshihisa: See—
Takeuchi, Hiroo; Hachiro, Nobuaki; and Miyazaki, Yoshihisa,
4,434,707, CI. 91-376.00R.
Miyoshi, Kazuhito: See—
Takeda, Makoto; Miyoshi, Kazuhito; Kaitoh, Mitsumasa; and
Omori. Hiroyuki. 4.435.251. CI. 203-50.000.
Mizoe, Kenji: See—
Kojima, Junichiroh; and Mizoe, Kenji, 4,435,840, CI. 455-33.000.
Mizuhara, Howard, to GTE Products Corporation. Pressed and sin-
tered composite body comprising a thin tape cast layer and a thick
base layer. 4,435,480, CI. 428-548.000.
Mizuhashi, Mamoru: See —
Kamimori, Tadatoshi; Mizuhashi, Mamoru; and Nagai, Junichi,
4,435,048, CI. 350-357.000.
Mizukoshi, Kiyoshi: See —
Ohno, Sachio; Mizukoshi, Kiyoshi; Komatsu, Osamu; Yamamoto,
Hajimu; and Kunou, Yasuo, 4,435,566, CI. 544-117.000.
Mizuno, Toru: See —
Mukainakano, Shinichi; Hattori, Tadashi; Nishida, Minoni;
Mizuno, Tom; and Goto, Tukasa, 4,434,753, CI. 123-143.00B.
Mizusawa, Akira. to Nifco Inc. Nut. 4,435,111, CI. 411-437.000.
Mobay Chemical Corporation: See —
Hoguet, Robert G.; Kalz, Dietmar; Thomas, Thomas J.; Whetsell,
Henry T.; Wolff, Joachim; Nonn, Konrad; and Wolf, Karl-Heinz,
4,435,181, CI. 8-527.000.
Mobil Oil Corporation: See—
Audeh. Costandi A., 4,435,270, CI. 208-1 l.OOR.
Chang, Clarence D.; and Miale, Joseph N., 4,435,516, CI.
502-71.000.
Derr, Walter R.; and Sarli, Michael S.. 4,435.275, CI. 208-89.000.
Modine Manufacturing Company: See —
Granetzkc, Dennis C, 4.434,773, CI. 123-557.000.
Mon, George, to United States of America, Army. Laminar propor-
tional amplifier and laminar jet angular rate sensor with rotating
splitter for null adjustment 4,434,813. CI. 137-829.000.
Mondini, Giancarlo, to Rieter Machine Works, Ltd. Apparatus for
controlling the working conditions in a processing machine of the
suple fiber spinning plant. 4,434,531, CI. 19-99.000.
Monsanto Company: See —
Franz, John E., 4,435.204. CI. 71-86.000.
Graham, Tommy E.. 4.435.191. CI. 55-16.000.
Mayer. James M.. 4.435.335, CI. 260-502,OOR.
Montedison S.p.A.: See—
CaineUi, Gianfranco; Foa', Marco; Ronchi, Achille U.; and Gar-
dano. Andrea, 4,435.575, CI. 546-341.000.
Carazzolo, Gianalvise; Colombo, Giancarlo; Gavella, Giulio;
Giacomuzzo, Silvano; and Gianetti, Franco, 4,435,604, CI.
568-854.000.
Montgomery, Marshall N., to Dresser Industries, Inc. Apparatus for
testing earth formations. 4,434,653, CI. 73-151.000.
Moore, Ann A., to Snugli, Inc. Soft orthopedic pouch-type infant
carrier. 4,434.920. CI. 224-160.000.
Moore, Bernard S.: See-
Cue. Berkeley W.. Jr.; and Moore. Bernard S.. 4.435.578. CI.
548-309.000.
Moore, Jack M.: See—
Ciaramiuro. David A.; and Moore. Jack M., 4,435.232, CI.
149-2.000.
Moore, L. Dow: See-
Das, Balbhadra; and Moore, L. Dow. 4.435,474, CI. 428-391.000.
Moormann, Hans: See—
Giebel, Burkhard; Moormann, Hans; and Schrader, Lothar,
4,435,789, CI. 365-203.000.
Morawiez, Alfred: See—
Laucr, Gerhard; Morawiez, Alfred; and Wild, Jurgen, 4,434,559,
CI. 33.174.00L.
Morel, Michel: See—
Hcnaff, Louis; Morel, Michel; and Favennec, Jean L.. 4,434,742, CI.
118-723.000.
Morel. Thomas J.; Haynes. Stewart. Jr.; and Park. Jack H., to Texaco
Inc. Method of enhanced oil recovery employing nitrogen injection.
4,434,852, CI. 166-273.000.
Morello, Herbert: See—
Azeez, Syed A.; Leipelt, Paul A.; and Morello, Herbert, 4,435,243,
CI. 156-361.000.
Mori, Yasuki: See —
Suzuki, Shigeo; Kakuta, Auushi; Mori, Yuuki; and Morishita,
Hirosada, 4,435,492, CI. 430-58,000.
Mori, Yoshiaki: See —
Wada, Minoru; Aral, Isao; Okubo, Takeshi; and Mori, Yoshiaki,
4,434,588, CI. 51-344.000.
Morimoto, Masahiro: See—
Imai, Hajime; Morimoto, Masahiro; and Fujiwara, Takao,
4,435,443, CI. 427-38.000. •
Morinaga, Kazuo: See —
Tsukada, Toshiji; and Morinaga, Kazuo, 4.435.064. CI. 355-1.000.
Morishita, Hirosada: See —
Suzuki, Shigeo; Kakuta, Atsushi; Mori, Yasuki; and Morishita,
Hirosada. 4,435,492, CI. 430-58.000.
Takahashi, Akio; Wajima, Moloyo; Nishikawa, Akio; and Mori-
shita, Hirosada. 4,435,560, CI. 528-170.000.
Morishita, Mitsuharu, to Miuubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Regulator
for controlling output from generato;: .having ambient temperature
ovenide. 4.435.676, CI. 322-33.000. /
Morishita. Sadao: See —
Matsushiu, Toshihiko; Hiraishi. Shigetoshi; and Morishita, Sadao,
4.435,471, CI. 428-320.800.
Morita, Akiyoshi; and Sato, Miuuyoshi, R> Toyou Jidosha Kabushiki
Kaisha. Screw in-line type injection molding method and apparatus
for low-pressure injection molding. 4,435,142, CI. 425-145.000.
Morita, Hideo; and Iwasa, Yoshio, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Air
induction control device for internal combustion engine. 4,434,778,
CI. 123-587.000.
Morita, Yasuyuki; Yokooku, KaUuhiko; Shiraishi, Hideo; and Mauu-
ura, Masahiko, to Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd. Cooling system for liquid-
cooled internal combustion engines. 4,434,749, C\. 123-41.020
Moritz, Robert R., to Rolls-Royce Incorporated. Low drag surface.
4,434,957, CI. 244-35.00R.
Morris, Alan J., to Kerr-McGee Chemical Corporation. Process for
producing titanium tetrachloride. 4,435.365, CI. 423-76.000.
Morris, Earl L.; and Hafner, V. Walter, to Acorn Engineering Com-
pany. Wall sleeve and installation jig for multiple adjacent future
mounting. 4.434,516, CI. 4-252.00R.
Monis, John D. Frozen dessert. 4,435,439, CI. 426-565.000.
Morrow, Charles R.: See —
. Tschudy, Donald B.; and Morrow, Charles R., 4,434,863, CI.
180-19.00H.
Morton, Edward W.: See-
Evans, George S.; Gilmore. John F.; and Morton. Edward W.,
4.435.670, CI. 315-58.000.
Mosca, Virgilio: See —
Bonaparte. Ennio; and Mosca. Virgilio. 4,435.619. CI. 179-17.00R.
Mosely. John F.; and Austin, Stephen R., to Superior Handling Equip-
ment, Inc. Self-propelled freight handling truck. 4,435,113, CI.
414-347.000.
Moser, Gottfried; Nau, Walter; and Neumann, Ernst-Dieter, to Klockn-
er-Humboldt-Deutz AG. System for heating the operators cabin of a
PI 30
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
machine powered by an internal combustion engine. 4,434,934, CI.
237-12.30R. *
Mosimann, David. Dental ftirbine. 4,435,161, CI. 433-132.000.
Moss, Gerald, to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Low pollution
method of burning fuels. 4,435,148, CI. 431-7.000.
Moss, William H.: See—
Dziubakowski, Donald J.; Kaya, Azmi; Keyes, Marion A.; Matsko,
Theodore N.; Moss, William H.; and Scheib, Thomas J.,
4,435,650, CI. 307-32.000.
Motorola, Inc.: See —
Dellande, Brian W.; and Wurzburg, Henry, 4,435,824, CI.
375-46.000.
Gasparaitis, Bernard; Long, Thomas W., Jr.; and Richardson,
Charles P., 4,435,713, CI. 343-702.000.
Joseph, Eric D.; and Davies. Roberi B., 4,435,678, CI. 323-273.000.
Meyerhoff, Jerome D.; and Forshay, Steven E., 4,435,844, CI.
455-218.000.
Motz, Kaye L.; Washechecic, Paul H.; Poe, Ronald L.; and Yates, James
E., to Conoco Inc. Process for the preparation of linear oleflns from
triethylaluminum and tripropylaluminum via growth, isomerization
and meuthesis. 4,435,606, CI. 585-324.000.
Mozer, Forrest S. Method and apparatus for time domain compression
and synthesis of unvoiced audible signals. 4,435,831, CI. 381-30.000.
Mukai, Nobuhiro: See—
Kishida, Kazuo; Sasaki, Isao; and Mukai, Nobuhiro, 4,435,540, CI.
524-780.000.
Mukai, Yasuteru: See —
Okouchi, Isao; Takahashi, Sankichi; Mukai, Yasuteru; Otake, Kat-
sumoto; Sasaki, Takuya; and Miyai, Masahiko, 4,435,285, CI.
209-250.000.
Mukainakano, Shinichi; Hattori, Tadashi; Nishida, Minora; Mizuno,
Torn; and Goto, Tukasa, to Nippon Soken, Inc.; and Nippondenso
Co., Ltd. Ignition apparatus for internal combustion engine.
4,434,753. CI. 123-143.00B.
Mulcahy, Harry W.; and Kaufhold, Horst T., to AMSTED Industries
Incorporated. Multi-rate side bearing for a railway truck. 4,434.720.
CI. 105-199.0CB.
Muller, Beat; and Roth, Martin, to Ciba-Geigy AG. Cationic hydrazone
derivatives, processes for their preparation and their use. 4,435,489,
CI. 430-17.000.
Muller, Leo: See —
Olschewski, Armin; Walter, Lothar; Brandenstein, Manfred; and
Muller, Leo, 4,434,882, CI. 192-98.000.
Muller, Manfred: See—
Forberg, Horst; Herfort, Hermann; Hegner, Gunter; and Muller,
Manfred, 4.434,542, CI. 29-566.400.
Muller, Peter R.: See—
Schreckenberg, Manfred; Nouvertne, Werner; Medem, Harald
Dhem, Rolf; an* Muller, Peter R.. 4,435.544, CI. 525-146.000.
Muller, Rolf: See—
Frey, Hansjorg; Hampel, Heinrich; Muller, Rolf; Ri'tter. Ernst; and
Schwartz, Reinhard. 4,435,128, CI. 417-63.000.
Muller, Thomas; Schadlich, Fritz; and Subler, Manfred, to Robert
Bosch GmbH. Machine tool, especially a hand-held power tool with
a tumable clamping element for clamping a tool on the tool spindle.
4,434,586, CI. 51-170.0PT.
Munakata. Hideo: See-
Sasaki. Tohru; Terasaki. Syuuzi; Munakata. Hideo; and Ohu.
Mitsuru. 4,435,475, CI. 428-409.000.
Munekau, Kenichi; Unno, Kunihiko; and Suzuki, Yasuo, to Toyoda
Koki Kabushiki Kaisha. Bed for grinding machine. 4,434,585, CI.
5I-166.00R.
Murahara, Koichi, to Piolt, Man-Nen-Hitsu Kabushiki Kaisha. Fountain
pen with motor feed. 4.435,099, CI. 401-145.000.
Murakami, Fumiki: See—
Matsumura, Hiroshi; Murakami, Fumiki; and Sonobc. Hiroshi,
4,435,594, CI. 560-205.000.
Murakami, Shozo; Aoki, Hiroyuki; Matsuo, Saburo; Ikezaki, Eiji; and
Yamaura, Kenji. to Nippon Steel Corporation. Concentric multi-
tube-system nozzle situated beneath the surface of the melt in a
refining vessel. 4.434.976, CI. 266-268.000.
Murakami, Yasushi: See-
Koizumi, Masuo; Shirakawa, Norio; Tomioka, Hiromi; Takeuchi,
Masaki; Okada, Masanori; Yoshimoto, Masahiro; Murakami,
Yasushi; and Iwane, Yoshitaka. 4,435,202, CI. 71-76.000.
Sasahara, Kazuo; Honda, Masamitsu; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami,
Yasushi; Neichi, Tomohiro; Nakakimura, Hiroshi; Noda,
Yukifumi; MaUushita, Hiroshi; and Hata. Shun-ichi. 4.435.391.
CI. 424-244.000.
Murdoch. Ian G., to Oilgear Company, The. Coupling seal and method
of assembly. 4,434,811. CI. 137-515.000.
Murphy, John S. Insulating structure. 4,434,579, CI. 49-63.000.
Murray, Lance R.; and Wu. Ta-Ming, to Burroughs Corporation.
Two-level threshold circuitry for large scale integrated circuit mem-
ories. 4,435.658. CI. 307-530.000.
Mutai, Masahiko; Terashima, Tsuneo; Takahashi, Tokutaro; Tanaka,
Ryuichiro; Kuroda, Akio; Ueyama, Sadao; and Matsumoto, Keisuke.
to Kabushiki Kaisha Yakult Honsha. Composition for promoting
growth of bifidobacteria. 4.435.389, CI. 424-181.000.
Myers, Harry J.: See —
August. Charles; and Myers, Harry J.. 4.434.667, CI. 73-861.120.
Myers, William H.; and Dundas, Dennis L.. to Hoover Universal, Inc.
Split igjecUon mold. 4,435,147, CI. 425-577.000.
Nabeta, Teiichi: See—
Kara, Kiyoshi; Kojima, Yasufiimi; akd Nabeta. Teiichi, 4,434,932,
a. 23M9.000. ^^
>i:akd
Nabisco Brands. Inc.: See —
Caporaso. John A., 4,435.434, CI. 426-108.000.
Nadan. Jweph S.; Kenney. George C. II; and Carasso. Marino O., to
A ArA^,"??*1?,'^'^^'P°"''°"- C'~'' "«n^ recovery circuit.
^,^3D,oo7, t.1. 331-23.000.
Nadeau, Francois: See —
^^°i^iS^mft''*' °' ■"** Nadeau, Francois, 4.435,631, a.
Nafissi-Varchei, M. Mehdi, to Schering Corporation. Guanidine com-
pounds. 4,435,398, CI. 424-250.000. u«ncw,in
Nagai, Junichi: See—
*^«°,GoT?f^i2S'VU^'*"*"' Mamoru; and Nagai, Junichi,
4.435.048. CI. 350-357.000.
Nagai, Yoji: See—
Ishimwoi Hitoshi; Nagai, Yoji; and Masuda, Toyohiko, 4,434.620,
CI. 60-657.000.
Nagano, Susumu; Iruya, Seiichi; Yasuda, Yoshinori; and Makino,
Tomoaki, to Miteubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha; and Japan Audatex
Co., Ltd. Portable type automobile repair estimate issuing device
4,435,769, CI. 364-464.000. » »*
Nag^. Nobuya; and Sakai, Teturou. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Color signal processing circuit to reduce cross-color
disturbance and color fringing. 4.435.725. CI. 358-36.000
Nagao. Nobuya: See—
Taguchi. Shinichiro; Nagao, Nobuya; and Ogihara, Yutaka.
4,435,657, CI. 307-5 16.0(»^ * ^^^
Nagau, Kazuo; and Ishii, Susumu, to Yoshida Kogyo K. K. Apparatus
!ilii^^'"*<^r*->i^i!?^ '"'° "^^^•■O' and unnecessary pieces.
Nagler, Franz: See—
Nakagami, Kazuto: See—
Tsuji, Hideakira; Yamamoto, Shinjiro; Nakagami, Kazuto; Honda,
Takeo; Fujii. KaUutoshi; Kobayashi, Takashi; Obata, Tokio;
Kojima. Mikio; and Akiyoshi. Yuji, 4.435,402, CI. 424-251.000.
Nakagawa, Kazuyuki: See—
Nishi, Takao; Tanaka. Tatsuyoshi; and Nakagawa. KazuvukL
4.435.404, CI. 424-258.000. '
Nakagawa, Mineo: See—
Hasegawa, Yoichi; Nakagawa, Mineo; and Hara, Syuji. 4,435,600,
CI. 564-464.000.
Nakagawa, Seisakusho Co., Ltd.: See—
Ogawa, Goro, 4,434,533, CI. 19-247.000.
Nakagawa, Shuichi: See-
Suzuki, Yoshihiro; Nakagawa, Shuichi; Kawamura, Nobuhisa;
Kurihara, Shuichi; Sakuma, Osamu; and Ito, Masahiro, 4,435,772.
CI. 364-520.000.
Nakaguti. Osamu: See—
Kamiya. Takashi; Saito, Yoshihisa; Teraji, Tsutomu; Nakaguti,
Osamu; and Oku, Teruo, 4,435,321, CI. 260-239.00A.
Nakai, Masaaki; and Sahara, Masayoshi, to Minolta Camera Kabushiki
Kaisha. Exposure control device for cameras. 4,435,057. CI.
Nakajima. Hideki. to Shimano Industrial Company Limited. Fishing
reel having a magnetic brake and non-magnetizable bearins.
4.434.951, CI. 242-84.52B. *
Nakajima, Kaoru; Somezawa. Masashi; Takamizawa. Minora; Inoue.
Yoshio; and Yoshioka. Hiroshi. to Sony Corporation. Magnetic
recording medium. 4.435.485, CI. 428-694.000.
Nakajima, Kenji: See-
Sato, Akio; Nakajima. Kenji; Takahara, Yoshimasa; Kijima,
Shizumasa; Kuwana. Noriaki; Abe. Shinya; and Yamada, Kouzi.
4.435.423. CI. 424-318.000.
Nakakimura. Hiroshi: See—
Sasahara. Kazuo; Honda. Masamitsu; Koizumi. Masuo; Murakami,
Yasushi; Neichi, Tomohiro; Nakakimura, Hiroshi; Noda,
Yukifumi; Matsushita, Hiroshi; and Hata, Shun-ichi, 4,435,391,
CI. 424-244.000.
Nakamoto, Hidekazu: See—
Matumoto. Michiaki; Etou, Hironori; and Nakamoto, Hidekazu.
4.435.151. CI. 431-90.000.
Nakamura, Iwao: See —
Chiba, Kazuo; and Nakamura. Iwao. 4.434,977. CI. 267-33.000.
Nakamura. Kuniyoshi: See—
Hagino, Hiroshi; Nakamura. Kuniyoshi; and Kotake, Eiichi.
4,435.673, CI. 3I8-254.00A.
Nakamura, Naotaka: See-
Miyamoto, Yoshimi; Nakamura, Naotaka; Akaku, Fumiyoshi;
Koto, Kateumi; and Kosaka, Tsutomu, 4,435,692, CI.
338-214.000.
Nakano, Kazuo: See —
lezuka, Isamu; and Nakano, Kazuo, 4,434,759, CI. 123-325.000.
Nakata. Tokifumi: See—
Okada, Akio; Nakata, Tokifumi; and Nemoto, Kiyoshi. 4,435,134.
CI. 417-428.000.
Nakatani. Hiroshi; Ishida. Masahide; and Yamamoto. Hachizou. to
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha. Error alarm system for detecting an abnor-
mal condition in a peripheral system of an electronic cash register.
4,435,767, CI. 364-405.000.
NakaUugawa, Shigeka^u, to Yamasa Shoyu Kabushiki Kaisha. En-
hancer of anti-tumor effect. 4,434,788, CI. 128-1.100.
Nakayama, Yasuhara; Yamamoto, Kenji; Komatsuzawa, Toshiki;
Sukeiima, Hajime; and Nomoto, Kazuo, to Kanaai Paiot Co.. Ltd.
Emulsion composition containing cellulose derivative. 4,435,331, CI.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 31
Nakayashiki, Susumu: See-
Hashimoto, Toyokazu; Wada, Hiroyuki; Kida, Masahiko; Mat-
sumura, Hisashi; and Nakayashiki, Susumu, 4,435,704, CI.
340-825.010.
Nail, Lawson H.; and Miller, Richard, to Tri Tool Inc. Cutter head
drive shaft for portable tube end preparation tool. 4,434,689, CI.
82-4. OOC.
Namsick, Raymond J.: See—
Knaus, Ernest; Namsick, Raymond J.; and Smith, Herbert D.,
4.435,240, CI. 156-242.000.
Narasaka. Shin: See—
Hasegawa. Shumpei; Narasaka, Shin; and Oteuka, Kazuo.
4.434.764. CI. 123-440.000.
Nati. Salvatore F.. Jr.: See—
Bcdard. James F.; Eichelberger. Charles W.; and Nati. Salvatore
F., Jr.. 4.435.679, CI. 323-350.000.
National Distillers and Chemical Corporation: See—
Corbett, Herbert O., 4,435,241. CI. 156-244.110.
Hinnenkamp. James A., 4,435,598, CI. 562-546.000.
National Presto Industries, Inc.: See—
Ott. Richrd B.. 4.434,909, CI. 220-316.000.
National Research Development Corporation: See—
Anson, Michael; Pinder, Andrew C; and Palmer, Alan R.,
4,434,800, CI. 128-665.000.
Hemp, John; and Al-Khazraji, Yousif A. H., 4,434,666, CI.
Roberts, Victor C; and Sainz, Antonio J., 4,434,669, CI. 73-861.250.
National Research Institute for Metals: See—
Tachikawa, Kyoji; and Yoshida, Yuji, 4,435.228, CI. 148-1 1.50Q.
National Semiconductor Corporation: See-
Page, Ronald W., 4,435,684, CI. 330-51.000.
Nau, Walter: See—
Moser, Gottfried; Nau, Walter; and Neumann, Ernst-Dieter,
4.434.934. CI. 237-12.30R.
Nedelec. Lucien; Guillaumc. Jacques; and Dumont. Claude, to Roussel
Uclaf Dopaminergic stimulating and antianoxic 4-sub8tituted 2H-
indole-2-one8. 4.435,408, CI. 424-263.000.
Nedreski, Robert J. Dew point sensor. 4,435.091. CI. 374-20.000.
Nedreski, Robert J.: See—
Schmitt, Oscar A.; Nedreski. Robert J.; and Karlson. Eskil.
4,435,163,0.434-263.000.
Neef, Gunter: See—
Braestrap, Claus T.; Christensen, Jogen A.; Engelstoft, Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen, Ralph; Huth, Andreas-
Rahtz, Dieter; Seidelmann. IDieter; Kehr. Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat. Dieter. 4.435.403. CI. 424-256.000.
Neefr. Rutger: See-
Rolf, Meinhard; Schutze, Detlef-Ingo; Neeff, Rutger; and Runz-
heimer. Hans-Volker, 4.435,589, CI. 560-48.000.
NefTgen. Bernd: See-
Burba. Christian; Lucas. Hermann-Josef; and Neffgen. Bernd.
4.435.558. CI. 528-45.000.
Neichi. Tomohiro: See—
Sasahara, Kazuo; Honda, MasamiUu; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami,
Yasushi; Neichi, Tomohiro; Nakakimura, Hiroshi; Noda,
Yukifumi; Matsushiu, Hiroshi; and Hau, Shun-ichi, 4,435,391,
CI. 424-244.000.
Nelson, Randolph J.: See-
Christopher, Terry M.; and Nelson, Randolph J., 4,434,616, CI.
60451.000.
Nemoto, Kiyoshi: See—
Okada, Akio; Nakata, Tokifumi; and Nemoto, Kiyoshi, 4,435,134,
CI. 417-428.000.
Neubauer, Douglas G.: See-
Mayer, Steven T.; Miner, Jay G.; Neubauer, Douglas G.; and
Decuir, Joseph C, 4,435,779. CI. 364-900.000.
Neubert. Robert, to Clean-Tex A/S. Floor mats of the washable, dirt
adsorbing type. 4,435,451, CI. 428-15.000.
Neugebauer, Marcia M.; Clay, Douglas R.; Goldstein, Brace E.; and
Goldstein. Raymond, to United Sutes of America, National Aero-
nautics and Space Administration. Ion mass spectrometer. 4.435.642.
CI. 250-296.000.
Neuhaus. Gunter: See —
Albers, Rolf; Aschenbrack. Emil; Neuhaus. Gunter; and Kotzur.
Joachim. 4.434.987. CI. 277-80.000.
Neuhauser. Hans J.; and Veutgen. Hans-Jurgen, to Goetze AG. Wear
resistant cast iron alloy with spheroidal graphite separation and
manufacturing method therefor. 4,435,226. CI. 148-3.000.
Neumann, Ernst-Dieter: See—
Moser, Gottfried; Nau, Walter; and Neumann, Ernst-Dieter,
4,434,934, CI. 237-12.30R.
New World Computer Company, Inc.: See—
Hennan, Robert W., 4,435,736. CI. 360-103.000.
Newman. Albert L.: See—
Szostak. Jan; and Newman, Albert L., 4.434,736, CI. 112-258.000.
Newman, Robert H.: See-
Brooks, Christopher P.; Dodson, Stanley C; and Newman, Robert
H., 4,435,296, CI. 252-28.000.
Nguyen, Tuan A., to Ball Corporation. Buckle resistance for metal
container closures. 4.434.641, CI. 72-354.000.
Nianbilla Company Limited: See-
Zheng, Yea K., 4,435.124, CI. 416-119.000.
Nichols, Omer: See—
Kopsch, Paul J.; Ward, Donald F.; Oraber, Jay; and Nichols,
Omer, 4.434,718. CI. 102-322.000.
Nickel, Horst: See— r
Stohr, Frank-Michael; Wild, Peter; and Nickel, Horst, 4.435,334,
CI. 260-501.120.
Nickel, William F. Shellfish mariculture apparatus. 4,434,743, CI.
Nicolas, Guy R. Method of treating steel surfaces to prevent wear, and
coating obtained thereby. 4.435,227, CI. 148-6 240
Niconchuk, Alec W., to North Shore Laboratones Corporation. Repair
material for tubeless tires. 4,435,470, CI. 428-294.000.
Niedecker, Herbert. Process and apparatus for making partially filled
air-free sausage casings. 4,434,528. CI. 17-49.000
'*^'f^i^m?!^^°*'*""" ^ Emergency escape ladder. 4.434.871. d.
182- 1 98.000.
Niehues. Heiko: See—
Graalmann. Gerhard; and Niehues. Heiko. 4.434.563. CI. 34-28 000
Nielsen, Jorgen: See—i^
Fog, Jorgen L.^and Nielsen, Jorgen, 4,434.703, CI. 89.37.00B
Niessen. Cornelis: See—
%',4?5,i25"cr37Mlixr'"""' "^""''"^ "' ''"''*'• ''"J"'
Nifco Inc.: See—
Mizusawa, Akira, 4,435,111, CI. 41M37.000.
Nihon Dixie Company, Limited: See—
lioka, Akira, 4,435,344, CI. 264-45.100.
Nihon Early Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Hosoi. Kinji; Takeda, Hiroyuki; Kobayashi, Hisao; and Konaka,
Daijiro, 4.434.693, CI. 83-71.000.
Niimi, Hiroshi: See—
"^S'^^. i^^^\J^^^^ Susumu; and Niimi. Hiroshi.
♦.^34.611. CI. 57-328.000.
Niiyama, Eisuke; and Kodama. Hideyo. to Hitachi. Ltd. Continuous
casting apparatus. 4.434,836. CI. 164-429.000.
Nijhawan. Pramodh; and Avera. William W., to Bahnson Coini>anv
The. Baghouse filter. 4.435,197, CI. 55-341.00R. --»•»— 7.
Nilsson, C. Gary: See—
"•^I^SV ^•^''* ^' •"** Nilsson, C. Gary. 4.433.734. Q.
358-335,000.
Nilsson, Ralph L.; and Rangert, Bo R., to EMAB Electrolux Motor
Aktiebolag. Arrangement for bearing of a crankshaft. 4,434,756, CI.
123-195.00R.
Nimry, Tayseer S.: See—
Fields: Ellis K.; and Nimry. Tayseer S.. 4.435.593. CI. 560-1 19.000.
Nmomiya. Masakazu. to Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Air-fuel ratio control
for internal combustion engine. 4,434,768, CI. 123-489.000
Nippon Air Brake Co., Ltd.: See—
Arikawa, Tetsuro, 4,435,768, CI. 364-426.000.
Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Dohya, Akihiro; Hino, Yasuhiko; and Abe, MiUuo, 4,434,544, Q.
29-578.000.
Fukui, Izumu; Yano, Takeshi; and HamaUuki, Takeshiae,
4,435,666, CI. 310-328.000. *
Ito, Satoaki; and Harada, Hiroshi, 4,435,821, CI. 375-1.000.
Kimoto, Manabu, 4,435,761, CI. 364-200.000.
Kojima, Junichiroh; and Mizoe, Kenji, 4,435,840, CI. 455-33.000
Tsuzuki, MiUuo; and Suga, Michihisa, 4,435,721, CI. 346-140.00R.
Yasuoka, Nobuyuki, 4,435,787, CI. 365-174.000.
Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Fujishima, Masakazu, 4,435,618, CI. 381-7.000.
Nippon Seiko Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Tagawa, Kenichi; and Iguchi, Takao, 4,435,024, CI. 308-217.000.
Nippon Shinyaku Co., Ltd.: See—
MaUumura. Shingo; Enomoto, Hiroshi; Aoyagi, Yoshiaki; and
Tanaka, Haruo, 4,435,397, CI. 424-250.000.
Nippon Soken, Inc.: See—
Inagaki, MiUuo; and Sasaya, Hideaki, 4,435,140, CI. 418-259.000.
Kohama, Tokio; Huzino, Seizi; Obayashi, Hideki; Kawai, Hisasi;
and Egami, Tsuneyuki. 4,434,767, CI. 123-481.000.
Kuno, Akira; MaUumoto, Muneaki; Numata, Koji; and Urano,
Susumu, 4,435,760, CI. 364-444.000.
Mukainakano, Shinichi; Hattori, Tadashi; Nishida, Minora-
Mizuno, Tora; and Goto, Tukasa, 4.434,753, CI. 123-143.00B.
Nippon Steel Corporation: See—
luchi, Tohra, 4,435,092, CI. 374-129.000.
Murakami, Shozo; Aoki, Hiroyuki; Mauuo, Saburo; Ikezaki, Eiji-
and Yamaura, Kenji, 4.434,976. CI. 266-268.000.
Nippondenso Co.. Ltd.: See—
Hara, Kiyoshi; Kojima, Yasufumi; and Nabeta. Teiichi. 4.434.932.
CI. 23649.000.
Ito. Kazuyuki; Ouki, Masami; Miwa, Naoto; Kamigaito, Osami;
Doi, Harao; and Hirose, Yoshihara, 4,435,512, CI. 501-32.000.
Kuno, Akira; Matsumoto. Muneaki; Numata, Koji; and Urano,
Susumu. 4,435,760, CI. 364-444.000.
Miyamoto, Yoshimi; Nakamura, Naotaka; Akaku, Fumiyoshi;
Koto, Kauumi; and Kosaka, Tsutomu. 4.435.692. CI.
338-214.000.
Mukainakano, Shinichi; Hattori, Tadashi; Nishida, Minora;
Mizuno. Tora; and Goto, Tukasa. 4.434.753. CI. 123-143.00B.
Ninomiya, Masakazu. 4.434.768. CI. 123-489.000.
Yamamoto, Norbora; Makino, Tomoatsu; and Okuda, Ryoichi.
4,4H779, CI. 123-609.000.
Yoshimura, Junjiro; Yamada. Kenji; and Obata. Harayuki.
4.434.775. CI. 123-564.000. '
Nishi. Takao; Tanaka, Tatsuyoshi; and Nakagawa. Kazuyuki. to Ouuka
Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Carbostyril iterivatives. 4,435.404. CI.
424-258.000.
PI 32
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Nishida, Minoni: See —
Mukainakano, Shinichi; Hattori, Tadashi; Nishida, Minoni;
Mizuno, Tom; and Goto, Tukasa, 4,434,7S3, CI. i23-143.00B.
Nishikawa, Akio: See —
Takahashi, Akio; Wajima, Moloyo; Nishikawa, Akio; and Mori-
shita, Hirosada, 4,435.S60. CI. 528-170.000.
Nishimura, Hiroyuki; Hasegawa, Shumpei; Watanabe, Masahiro; and
Furuya, Hanio, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Company, Limited;
and Honda Giken Kabushiki Kaisha. Fuel injection timing signal and
crank angle signal generating apparatus. 4,434,770, CI. 123-494.000.
Nishimura, Katsuo, to Citizen Watch Company Limited. Liquid crystal
display device. 4,435.046, CI. 350-334.000.
Nishimura, Susumu; and Nomura, Hiroaki, to Takeda Chemical Indus-
tries, Ltd. 5-[Substituted amino methyl]pyrrolo[2,3-d]pyrimidine-
4.one. 4,435,569, CI. 544-280.000.
Nishimura, Susumu; and Akimoto, Hiroshi, to Takeda Chemical Indus-
tries, Ltd. 5-<Phcnyl or benzyl amino)methyl-pyrroIo[2,3-d]pyrimi-
din-4-one. 4,435.570, CI. 544-280.000.
Niskanen, Toivo; Sundman, Frey; and Tuomaala, Jorma, to A. Ahl-
strom Osakeyhtio. Method and apparatus for pumping fiber suspen-
sions. 4.435,122. CI. 415-121.00B.
Niskanen. Toivo: See —
Gullichsen. Johan E.; Harkonen, Esko; Niskanen, Toivo; Kujala,
Jaakko; and Reponen, Voitto, 4,435,193. CI. 55-21.000.
Nissan Design International, Inc.: See —
Flowers, Allan L.. 4,434.919. CI. 224-42.210.
Nissan Motor Company, Limited: Sec —
Chiba, Kazuo; and Nakamura. Iwao, 4,434,977, CI. 267-33.000.
Hakamata, Hitoshi, 4,435.011. CI. 297-113.000.
Horike. Masayoshi; Yamamoto. Haruo; Yamane. Yukio; Yoshiyuki.
Kazuhiko; and Endo, Toshiaki. 4,434.593, CI. 52-208.000.
Horiuchi, Tomofusa, 4.434.774. CI. 123-557.000.
Morita, Hideo; and Iwasa, Yoshio, 4,434,778, CI. 123-587.000.
Sato, Yoshimi. 4,434,999, CI. 280-752.000.
Shirase. Haruya; and Kondo. Takehisa. 4,434.776, CI. 123-568.000.
Nissin Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Takeuchi. Hiroo; Hachiro. Nobuaki; and Miyazaki. Yoshihisa,
4.434,707. CI. 91-376.00R.
Niswander, James K.: See —
Suttel, Raymond J.; and Niswander. James K.. 4,435,781, CI.
364-900.000.
Nitschko, Theodor, to TMC Corporation. Ski binding jaw. 4.434,997,
CI. 280-625.000.
Nitschmann, Karl; Weyda, Gunther; Emmrich, Bodo; and Stimpfig,
Karl O., to Stihl, Andreas. Arrangement for lubricating saw chains of
power saws. 4,434,556. CI. 30-123.400.
Nixon. Keith L., to Bell Industries, Inc. Self-centering saw mount.
4,434,684. CI. 76-37.000.
Noda, Masaki: See —
Shinkawa, Keiro; Noda, Masaki; and Sodeyama, Chuichi,
4.435,688, CI. 331-99.000.
Noda, Yukifumi: See—
Sasahara, Kazuo; Honda. Masamitsu; Koizumi, Masuo; Murakami,
Yasushi; Neichi, Tomohiro; Nakakimura, Hiroshi; Noda,
Yukifumi; Matsushita. Hiroshi; and Hata, Shun-ichi, 4,435,391,
CI. 424-244.000.
Noguchi. Hiroshi; Hashimoto, Shunichi; Kitamura. Shigeyoshi; Mat-
suo, Takashi; Mine, Akihiko; and Kamoshita, KaUuzo, to Sumitomo
Chemical Company. Limited. M-Phenoxybenzamide derivatives.
4,435,332, CI. 260-465.00D.
Noguchi, Koji: See —
Goto, Ryuji; Yamashita. Keitaro; and Noguchi, Koji, 4,435,494, CI.
430-122.000.
Noguchi. Tamio: See —
Watanabe. Takaji; and Noguchi. Tamio, 4,435,220, CI. 106-291.000.
Nojima, Shinichi: See—
Ikeda, Junichi; Ohtani, Iwao; Utsumi, Noriyuki; and Nojima. Shini-
chi, 4,435,120. CI. 414-735.000.
Nolt. James R., Jr., to Allis-Chalmers Corporation. Method for manu-
facturing babbitted bearings. 4,435,448, CI. 427-234.000.
Nomoto. Kazuo: See —
Nakayama, Yasuhani; Yamamoto, Kenji; Komatsuzawa. Toshiki;
Sukejima, Hajime; and Nomoto, Kazuo, 4,435,531, CI.
524-37.000.
Nomura. Hiroaki: See —
Nishimura. Susumu; and Nomura, Hiroaki, 4,435,569, CI.
544-280.000.
Nonn, Konrad: See —
Hoguet, Robert G.; Kalz. Dietmar; Thomas, Thomas J.; Whetsell.
Henry T.; Wolff. Joachim; Nonn, Konrad; and Wolf, Karl-Heinz,
4,435,181, CI. 8-527.000.
Nonogaki, Yutaka: See —
Masuda, Senichi; and Nonogaki, Yutaka. 4,435.681, CI.
324-459.000.
-Nooijen, Godefridus A. H.; See —
van de Leemput, Lambertus J. M. A.; and Nooijen, Godefridus A.
H., 4,435,314. CI. 502-154.000.
van de Leemput, Lambertus J. M. A.; Nooijen, Godefridus A. H.;
and van der Loo, Hendrikus W., 4,435,551, CI. 526-101.000.
North American Philips Corporation: See —
Nadan, Joseph S.; Kenney, George C, II; and Carisso, Marino G.,
4.435,687, CI. 331-23.000.
North American Philips Electric Corp.: See —
Evans, George S.; Gilmore, John F.; and Morton, Edward W.,
4,435,670, CI. 315-58.000.
Heytmeijer. Herman R., 4.435,284, CI. 209-3.000.
Plagge, Vernon L.; and Bhalla. Ranbir S., 4,435,669, a.
313-634.000.
North Shore Laboratories Corporation: See —
Niconchuk, Alec W., 4,435.470, CI. 428-294.000.
North Wind Power Company, Inc.: See—
Coleman, Clint; and Currin, Hugh D.. 4,435,646, CI. 290-44.000.
Northern Engineering Industries, Plc: See —
Brealey, Leslie; Wilson, John H.; and Demircan, Niyazi, 4,434,723,
CI. 110-245.000.
Northern Telecom Limited: See—
Aujla, Sharanjit S.; and Lee, John D., 4,435.034, CI. 339-98.000.
Norton Company: See — ,
Hartline. Stephen D., 4,435,514. CI. 501-117.000.
Norton, Desmond H. Cross country skiing simulating exerciser.
4,434.981. CI. 272-97.000.
Norton. Robert L.: See —
Wood. Denis; Thomas, John F., Jr.; Dipper, Barry; Stegenga,
Philip D.; Veltkamp, John H.; Katsma. William L.; and Norton,
Robert L., 4,435.042, CI. 350-281.000.
Nouvertne, Werner: See —
Schreckenberg, Manfred; Nouvertne, Werner; Medem, Harald;
Dhein. Rolf; and Muller, Peter R.. 4,435,544, CI. 525-146.000.
Novak, Jan: See —
Svercl, Josef; Novak, Jan; and Kalab, Zdenek, 4,434.645. CI.
72-402.tXX).
Novo Industri A/S: See —
Barbesgaard, Peder O.; Jensen, Georg W.; and Holm, Poul,
4.435.307, CI. 252-174.120.
Novotny, Laszlo: See —
Mika, Gyorgy; Csako. Denes; Paczuk, Laszlo; Beres-Deak, Laszlo;
and Novotny, Laszlo, 4,435.129, CI. 417-151.000.
Nozaki, Takao: See —
Ito, Takashi; and Nozaki, Takao, 4,435,447, CI. 427-94.000.
Nozaki, Tetsuo: See —
Matsumura, Hiroshi; Ohta, Yasuto; Nozaki, Tetsuo; Shimizu,
Makoto; and Sugizaki. Shigeru, 4,434,657, CI. 73-304.00C.
Nozawa, Ryoichiro; and Kiya, Nobuyuki, to Fujitsu Fanuc Limited.
System for numerically controlling a machine tool. 4,435,771, CI.
364-474.000.
Nozawa, Takamitsu: See —
Saito, Tadao; Nozawa, Takamitsu; Endo, Shuzo; Kakuta, Yo-
shiyuki; Ogawa, Riichi; and Kaneuchi, Tetsuro, 4,434,917, CI.
222-383.000.
Numata, Koji: See —
Kuno, Akira; Mauumoto, Muneaki; Numata. Koji; and Urano,
Susumu, 4,435,760, CI. 364-444.000.
Nunnerich, Wilhelm; and Schmidt, Peter. Winding-on device for paper
sheets and lengths of textile. 4,434,950. CI. 242-67.200.
Nunokawa, Kazuo, to Tokyo Kogaku Kikai Kabushiki Kaisha. Work-
ing distance detecting device for ophthalmic apparatus. 4,435,051, CI.
351-208.000.
Nutz, Karl-Diether, to Telefunken electronic GmbH. Zero voltage
switch. 4,435,651, CI. 307-252.0UA.
Nyby Uddeholm Powder Aktiebolag: See—
Ahslund, Christer; Andersson, Karl H. T.; and Bergh, Sven S.,
4,435,483, CI. 428-566.000.
Nyitrai, Jozsef: See —
Lempert, Karoly; Harsanyi, Kalman; Doleschall, Gabor; Homyak,
Gyula; Nyitrai, Jozsef; Zauer, Karoly; Fetter, Jozsef; Simig,
Gyula; Visky nee Gombos, Zsuzsanna; and Barta nee Szalai,
Gizella, 4.435,322, CI. 260-239.00A.
O & K Orenstein & Koppel Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Behrend, Volkmar; and Roder, Eckhard, 4,435,118, CI. 414-
744.00R.
Obata, Haniyuki: See —
Yoshimura, Junjiro; Yamada, Kenji; and Obata. Haniyuki,
4,434,775, CI. 123-564.000.
Obata, Tokio: See —
Tsuji, Hideakira; Yamamoto, Shinjiro; Nakagami, Kazuto; Honda.
Takeo; Fujii, Katsutoshi; Kobayashi, Takashi; Obata, Tokio;
Kojima. Mikio; and Akiyoshi, Yuji, 4,435,402, CI. 424-251.000.
Obayashi, Hideki: See —
Kohama, Tokio; Huzino, Seizi; Obayashi, Hideki; Kawai, Hisasi;
and Egami, Tsuneyuki, 4,434,767, CI. 123-481.000.
Oberkirch, Wolfgang: See—
Ebneth, Harold; Fitzky, Hans G.; and Oberkirch, Wolfgang,
4.435.465, CI. 428-195.000.
Oberlander. Charles N.. to Mishkin, Ronald H.; Pappas. James T.; and
Quast, W. Patrick, part interest to each. Transposable sheet music.
4,434,698, CI. 84-483.00A.
Obo Bettermann OHG, Firma: See-
Jordan, Ernst G., 4,435,630, CI. 219-98.000.
Occidental Oil Shale, Inc.: See—
Ricketu, Thomas E., 4,435,017, CI. 299-19.000.
Oce-Nederiand B.V.: See—
de Putter, Jan A.; and Tummers, Paul J. H., 4.43S,49t, CI.
430-87.000.
Draai, Willem T.; Pleyers, Jozef J. A.; and Kuin, Nicolaas P. J..
4,435,067, CI. 355-3.0TR.
Ochii, Kiyofumi, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Semicon-
ductor memory device with dummy word line/sense amplifier activa-
tion. 4,435.793, CI. 365-233.000.
Ochsner, Paul A.: See—
Crameri, Yvo; Ochsner, Paul A.; and Schudel, Peter, 4,433,583, CI.
549-446.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 33
O'Donnell & Associates Inc.: See—
Porowski, Janek S.; O'Donnell, William J.; and Fasiczka, Ray G.,
4,434.840. CI. 165-82.000.
O'Donnell. William J.: See—
Porowski. Janek S.; O'Donnell, William J.; and Fasiczka, Ray G.,
4,434.840. CI. 165-82.000.
Oehy. Peter, to Rieter Machine Works, Ltd. Apparatus and method for
depositing textile fiber sliver. 4,434.532, CI. 19-159.00R.
Oepen, Gerhard; Mangartz, Karl-Heinz; Seifried, Norbert; Engel,
Jurgen; and Isaac, Otto, to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft. Process for
the recovery of pure hellebrin. 4,435,563. CI. 536-18.100.
Oestreich. Ulrich. to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Pipe store for SZ
stranding. 4,434,610, CI. 57-294.000.
Office National d'Etudes et de Recherches Aerospatiales: See—
Taillet, Joseph; and Larigaldie. Serge, 4,435,190, CI. 55-5.000.
Officine Riunite Udine Spa: See-
Del Fabbro, Dino, 4.435,081, CI. 366-18.000.
OgaU, Masaru; and Sato, Kosaburo. to Shionogi & Co., Ltd. 3-Sul-
fonamido-benzophenonimine derivatives use^l for treating virus
infections. 4,435,394, CI. 424-248.500.
Ogawa, Goro, to Nakagawa, Seisakusho Co., Ltd. High draft apparatus
for worsted spinning process. 4,434,533, CI. 19-247.000.
Ogawa, Riichi: See—
Saito, Tadao; Nozawa, Takamitsu; Endo, Shuzo; Kakuta. Yo-
shiyuki; Ogawa, Riichi; and Kaneuchi, TeUuro, 4,434,917, CI.
222-383.000.
Ogawa, Tadashi: See—
Mihayashi. Keiji; Ogawa, Tadashi; and Yagihara, Morio, 4,435,303,
CI. 430-548.000.
Ogden Industries Pty. Limited: See—
Dunphy, Gerald F.; and Best, Lance E., 4,434,634, CI. 70-89.000.
Ogihara, Yutaka: See—
Taguchi, Shinichiro; Nagao, Nobuya; and Ogihara, Yutaka,
4,435,657. CI. 307-516.000.
O'Gorman, Michael C. Controlled fireplaces for concurrently varying
combustion air and convected air. 4,434,783, CI. 126-121.000.
Ohmori, Motoji: See —
Shiohata, Koki; Fujisawa, Fumio; Shiga, Motohiro; Sato, Kazuo;
Ohmori, Motoji; and Takasumi, Masakazu, 4,435,770, CI.
364-508.000.
Ohneck, Roben J.: See-
Kirk, James L.; and Ohneck, Robert J., 4,435.292, CI. 210-747.000.
Ohno, Sachio; Mizukoshi, Kiyoshi; Komatsu, Osamu; Yamamoto,
Hajimu; and Kunou, Yasuo. to Maruko Seiyaku Co., Ltd. Thi-
opyranopyrimidine compounds and acid addition salts thereof
4,435,566, CI. 544-117.000.
Ohrberg, Cari V.; and Hansen. Gunnar L., to Danfoss A/S. Hydraulic
planetary piston engine having free wheeling valve. 4,435,130. CI.
417-310.000.
Ohsawa, Kenji; Ito, Takao; Fueki, Shimetomo; Osawa. Masayuki; and
KuraU, Keiji, to Sony Corporation. Conductive paste. 4,435,61 1, CI.
174-68.500.
Ohta, Kazutoshi; and Watanabe, Eiki, to MiUubishi Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha. Electric elevator car driving device. 4,434,873, CI.
187-28.000.
Ohta. Mitsuru: See—
Sasaki. Tohni; Terasaki, Syuuzi; Munakata, Hideo; and Ohta,
Mitsuru, 4,435,475, CI. 428-409.000.
Ohta, Yasuto: See—
MaUumun, Hiroshi; OhU, Yasuto; Nozaki, Tetsuo; Shimizu,
Makoto; and Sugizaki, Shigeru. 4.434,657. CI. 73-304.00C.
Ohtani. Iwao: See —
Ikeda, Junichi; Ohtani, Iwao; Utsumi, Noriyuki; and Nojima. Shini-
chi, 4,435,120, CI. 414-735.000.
Oilgear Company, The: See-
Murdoch, Ian G., 4.434,811. CI. 137-513.000.
Okabe, Kanichi: See—
Suzuki, Hirouugu; UraU, Sigeru; and Okabe, Kanichi, 4,433,830,
CI. 378-197.000.
Okada. Akio; NakaU, Tokifumi; and Nemoto, Kiyoshi. Flow control
valve. 4,435,134, CI. 417-428.000.
Okada, Masanori: See —
Koizumi, Masuo; Shirakawa. Norio; Tomioka, Hiromi; Takeuchi,
Masaki; Okada, Masanori; Yoshimoto, Masahiro; Murakami,
Yasushi; and Iwane, Yoshitaka. 4,433,202, CI. 71-76.000.
Okamoto, Haninori: See—
Inae, Shoji; and Okamoto, Haninori, 4,435,236, CI. 156-132.000.
Okamoto, Kazuo: See—
• Mauui. Masao; Okamoto, Kazuo; and Osagawa, Takao, 4,434,631,
CI. 68-171.000.
Okamoto, Tetsuro: See —
Uchida, Keiichiro; Tamura, Hiroshi; Okamoto, Tetsuro; and
Okutani, Shigeaki, 4,435,763, CI. 364-200.000.
Okawa. Nobuo: See—
Ueshima, Norio; Okawa, Nobuo; and Takayanagi, Kiyoshi,
4,433,212, CI. 75-124.000.
Okouchi, Isao; Takahashi, Sankichi; Mukai, Yasuteru; Otake, Kat-
sumoto; Sasaki, Takuya; and Miyai, Maaahiko, to Hitachi, Ltd. Sort-
ing apparatus. 4,435,285, CI. 209-250.000.
Oku, Teruo: See —
Kamiya, Takashi; Saito, Yoahihita; Tenji, Tsutomu; Nakaguti.
Oiamu; and Oku. Tenio. 4,433,321, CI. 260-239.00A.
Okubo, Kiyokazu, to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Clutch
mechanism for power trtnsmiition system. 4,434,878, CI. 192-48.920.
Okubo. Takeshi: See—
Wada, Minoni; Arai, Isao; Okubo, Takeshi; and Mori, Yoahiaki,
4,434,588. CI. 51-344.000.
Okuda, Ryoichi: See —
Yamamoto, Norboru; Makino, Tomoatsu; and Okuda, Ryoichi,
4.434,779, CI. 123-609.000.
Okutani, Shigeaki: See—
Uchida, Keiichiro; Tamura, Hiroshi; Okamoto. Tetturo; and
Okutani, Shigeaki, 4,435,765, CI. 364-200 000.
Okutsu. Eiichi; Iwasaki, Nobuyuki; and Takada, Shunji, to Fuji Photo
Film Co., Ltd. Method for developing silver halide photographic
light-sensitive material. 4,435,500. CI. 430-419.000.
Olesen, Russell, to Puritan-Bennett Corporation. Vaporizer subsystem
for an anesthesia machine. 4,434,790. CI. 128-200.140.
Olin Corporation: See—
Deininger. J. Paul. 4.435,256, CI. 204-86.000.
Deininger, J. Paul; and Dotson, Ronald L.. 4.435,257, CI.
204-86.000.
Kadija, Igor V.. 4.435.252. CI. 204-11.000.
Sevier. Peter E., 4.434,838, CI. 164-485.000.
Olschewski, Armin; Walter, Lothar; Brandenstein, Manfred; and
Muller, Leo, to SKF Kugellagerfabriken GmbH. Clutch release
bearing. 4,434,882, CI. 192-98.000.
Olschewski, Armin: See-
Walter, Lothar; Brandenstein. M^ifred; and Olschewski. Armin,
4.434,640, CI. 72-348.000.
Olsen. Roy W.; and Bell, Curtis H.. to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Com-
pany, The. Method for making a hose having an index mark.
4,435.352. CI. 264-504.000.
Olson, Robert S.; Suris, Joseph P., Jr.; and West. Ben F., to Dow
Chemical Company, The. Process for treating chlorinated hydrocar-
bons. 4.435,379. CI. 423-472.000.
Olson, Wayne L.: See—
Schmidt, Terrance L.; and Olson, Wayne L., 4.434,536, CI. 24-
241.0PP.
Olympus Optical Co., Ltd.: See—
FuniU, Kenji, 4,435,735. CI. 360-74.400.
Horikawa, Yoshiaki; and Imai, Toshihiro, 4,435,049, CI.
350-454.000.
Imai, Youg, 4.435,702, CI. 340-671.000.
Tanikawa, Kowji. 4,435,056, CI. 354-21.000.
OMI International Corporation: See —
Baker, Kenneth D.; and Scheider, Hans. 4,435.253. C/204-43.00G.
Omodei-Sale', Amedeo: See— f
Toja. Emilio; Omodei-Sale', Amedeo; and Selv^. Domenica,
4,435,417, CI. 424-273.00B.
Omori, Hiroyuki: See —
Takeda, Makoto; Miyoshi, Kazuhito; Kaitoh. Miuumasa; and
Omori, Hiroyuki, 4,435,251. CI. 203-50.000.
O'Neill, John H., Jr.: See—
McCollough, John K., Jr.; and O'NeUI, John H.. Jr., 4,434.632, CI.
68-205.00R.
Opeka, Joze: See —
Tmkoczy, Amadej; Stopar, Miha; Filipic, Dusan; and Opeka, Joze,
4,434,798, CI. 128-421.000.
Oppenlaender, Knut; Stork, Karl; Vogel, Hans-Henning; Schwartz.
Ench; and Jakob, Claus P., to BASF Aktiengesellschaft Ammonium
salts of polymaleic acids, and their use as corrosion inhibitors in
mineral oils. 4,435.298, CI. 252-34.000
Orstad. Durwood D.: See—
Orstad, Russell D.; and Orstad. Durwood D., 4.435,113, CI.
414-490.000.
Orstad, Russell D.; and Orstad, Durwood D. Dolly for lifting and
carrying dead sows and the like. 4,433,113, CI. 414-490.000.
Ortho Diagnostic Systems Inc.: See-
Graham, Henry A.. Jr.; Hawk. Johnna B.; and Chachowski, Rose-
mary K., 4.433,293, CI. 210-772.000.
Osagawa, Takao: See —
Mauui, Masao; Okamoto. Kazuo; and Osagawa, Takao, 4,434,631.
CI. 68-171.000.
Osaka Gas Co., Ltd.: See—
Ishimaru, Kimio; and Abe, Kenichi, 4,435,629, CI. 219-I0.55A.
Osaki, TaUuo, to Yoshida Kogyo K.K. Bottom stop applying and
gapping apparatus for a slide ^tener chain. 4,434,538, CI. 29-33.200.
Osawa, Masayuki: See —
Ohsawa, Kenji; Ito, Takao; Fueki, Shimetomo; Osawa, Masayuki;
and KuraU, Keiji, 4,435,61 1, CI. 174-68.500.
Oscar Mayer Foods Corporation: See-
Jensen, Ronald W., 4,434,329, CI. 17-49.000.
Osterberg, Arnold C: See —
Epstein, Joseph W.; Osterberg, Arnold C; and Brabander, Herbert
J., 4,433,419, CI. 424-274.000.
Otake, Katsumoto: See—
Okouchi, Isao; Takahashi, Sankichi; Mukai. Yasuteru; Otake, Kat-
sumoto; Sasaki, Takuya; and Miyai, Masahiko. 4,435,285, CI.
209-250.000.
Otis Elevator Company: See —
KetUe, John L., 4,434,884, CI. 198-328.000.
Otobe, Yutaka; Yamato, Akihiro; and Umesaki, Shigeo. to Honda
Motor Co., Ltd. Deceleration fuel cut device for internal combustion
engines. 4,434,769, CI. 123-493.000.
Ouuka, Kazuo: See —
Hasegawa. Shumpei; Narasaka, Shin; and Ouuka. Kazuo,
4,434,764, CI. 123-440.000.
PI 34
LIST OF PATENTEES V
March 6, 1984
Otsuka Phannaceutical Co., Ltd.: See—
Nishi, Taiuo; Taiuka, Tatsuyoshi; and Nakagawa, Kazuyuki,
4.435,404. CI. 424-258.000.
Ott. Richrd B.. to National Presto Industries, Inc. Pressure cooker
interlock. 4.434,909, CI. 220-316.000.
Ou. Sam A.; and Beair, Charles E., to BS&B Safety Systems, Inc.
Rupturable low pressure relief apparatus. 4,434,905, CI. 220-89.00A.
Ouki. Masami: See —
Ito. Kazuyuki; Ouki, Masami; Miwa, Naoto; Kamigaito. Osami;
Doi. Haruo; and Hirose. Yoshihani, 4,435,512, CI. 501-32.000.
Ovaert, Francis: See —
Reneault, Patrick; and Ovaert. Francis, 4,434,592, CI. 52-145.000.
Ovshinsky, Stanford R.: See—
Allr«l, David D.; Walter. Lee; Reyes. Jaime M.; and Ovshinsky,
Stanford R., 4,435,445. CI. 427-54.100.
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation: See —
Lewin, David F.; Haynes, Louie J.; and Beach, Lynne B.,
4,434.946. CI. 242-18.00G. *
Varrasso. Eugene C, 4.435,81 1, CI. 373-39.000.
Owens-Illinois, Inc.: See —
Weaver, Edward A., 4,435,511, Q. 501-22.000.
Oxenrider, Bryce C; and Long, David J., to Allied Corporation. Poly-
cyclic pyromellitates and use thereof on polyesters and polyamides.
4,435,294. CI. 252-8.600.
Pabst. Patrea L.; and Bing, David H., to Ionics, Incorporated. Electro-
dialysis preparation of purified AHF concentrate. 4,435,318, CI.
260-1 12.00B.
Pace Incorporated: See —
Parker, Oscar E., 4,435,635, C\. 219-227.000.
Pacini, Carlo: See —
Petracchi, Ida; Assirelli, Antonietta; Pacini, Carlo; and Pacini,
Cesare, 4,434,612. CI. 57-331.000.
Pacini, Cesare: See —
Petracchi, Ida; Assirelli, Antonietta; Pacini, Carlo; and Pacini,
Cesare, 4,434,612, CI. 57-331.000.
Paczuk, Laszio: See — '"^N
Mika, Gyorgy; Csako, Denes; Paczuk, Laszlo^Beres-Deak, Laszio;
and Novotny, Laszio. 4.435,129. Cl. 417-151^.
Pader, Morton, to Lever Brothers Company. Humectants for clear gel
dentifrice compositions. 4.435.380, Cl. 424-49.000.
Paffrath, Gottfried: See—
Schroeder, Heinrich J.; Ambros, Rainer; Paffrath, Gottfried; and
Brenner, Norbert, 4,435,184, Cl. 23-300.000.
Page, Ronald W., to National Semiconductor Corporation. Video
amplifier mute circuit. 4.435,684, Cl. 330-51.000.
Palenschat, Dieter: See —
Braestrup, Claus T.; Christensen, Jogen A.; Engelstoft, Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen, Ralph; Huth, Andreas;
Rahtz, Dieter; Seidelmann, Dieter; Kehr, Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat, Dieter. 4.435,403. Cl. 424-256.000.
Palitex Project Company GmbH: See —
Schacht. Dieter. 4.434,609, Q. 57-58.860.
Palmer, Alan R.: See —
Anson, Michael; Pinder, Andrew C; and Palmer, Alan R.,
4,434,800, Cl. 128-665.000.
Palmeter, Charles W.: See—
Busch, Lloyd E.; Palmeter, Charles W.; Henderson, Gerald O.; and
Rice, Waiiam M.. 4,435,279, Cl. 208-111.000.
Paoli, Bruno, to International Paper Company. Transportation device,
in particular for shaped, flexible material. 4,434,926, Cl. 226-172.000.
Pappas, James T.: See —
Oberlander, Charles N., 4,434,698, Cl. 84-483.00A.
Paranjpe, Suresh C: See —
Qark, Frederic L.; Kaffenberger, Orville A., Jr.; Paranjpe, Suresh
C; Smith, David W.; and Ames, Jack D., 4.435,718, Cl.
346-75.000.
Park, Jack H.: See-
Morel, Thomas J.; Haynes, Stewart, Jr.; and Park, Jack H.,
4,434,852, Cl. 166-273.000.
Parker-Hannifm Corporation: See —
Zajac, Theodore S.. 4.434.966. Cl. 251-205.000.
Parker. Oscar E., to Pace Incorporated. Heat barrier for desolderer and
heater assembly. 4,435,635, Cl. 219-227.000.
Parker, Phillip H.: See-
Woo, Gar L.; and Parker, PhUlip H., 4,435,547, Cl. 525-420.000.
Parks, James A.: See —
Lee, Cheuk M.; and Parks. James A.. 4,435.422, Cl. 424-285.000.
Parlman, Robert M.: See—
Lindstrom. Merlin R.; Parlman. Robert M.; and Kimble, James B.,
4,435,304, Cl. 252-156.000.
Parrott, George A., to Dresser Europe S.A. Mineral winning machine
for "in web" mining system. 4.435,018, Cl. 299-43.000.
Partin, Lee R.: See—
Agreda, Victor H.; and Partin, Lee R., 4,435,595, Cl. 560-234.000.
Pascal, Daniel; and Duret, Denis, to Commissariat a I'Energie Ato-
mique. Process for the manufacture and adjustment of a Josephson
effect magnetic flux pick-up. 4,434,547, Cl. 29-599.000.
Patmore, David J.: See—
Ranganathan, Ramaswami; Patmore, David J.; and Silva, Adolfo
E.. 4,435,280, Cl. 208-112.000.
Paton, David: See—
Burrows, Vernon D.; Fulcher, Royce G.; and Paton, David,
4,435,429, Cl. 426-18.000.
Patrick, John P.: See—
Hamer, Kermit I.; Patrick, John P.; and Kos, Joseph M., 4,435,647,
a. 290-44.000.
Pauli, Gunter; Krause, Gunter; and Lob, Erwin, to Gao Gesellschaft fur
Automation and Organisation mbH. Method and means for determin-
ing the sute and/or genuineness of flat articles. 4,435,834, Cl.
382-7.000.
Pauluhn Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.: See—
Russo, Salvatore V., 4,435,744, Q. 362-219.000.
Pav, Josef: See —
Hartwich, Gerhard; Pav. Josef; and Preuss, Dieter, 4,434,713, Cl.
100-168.000.
Pavincic, Ivan. Rotary piston engine. 4,434,751, Cl. 123-43.00B.
Payrhammer, Bemd; and Weinert, Volker, to AGFA-Gevaert Aktien-
gesellschaft. Color copier. 4,435,075, Cl. 355-35.000.
Peacock Investments (Proprietary) Limited: See—
Raubenheimer, Johann N., 4,434,519, Cl. 15-1.700.
Pearce, Robert J., to Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Research
Organization. Preparation of protein isolate from sunflower seed.
4.435.319. Cl. 260-123.500.
Pearce, Robert J.: See-
Blackburn, Thomas P.; Cox, Barry; Guildford, Allen J.; Le Count,
David J.; Pearce, Robert J.; and Thomber, Craig W., 4,435,405,
Cl. 424-258.000.
Pearson, Arthur W. Marine trap sensing system. 4,434,575, Cl.
43-100.000.
Pease, WUder F.: See—
Lamberti, Vincent; and Pease, Wilder F., 4.435,328, Cl.
260-400.000.
Peerless Machine St. Tool Corporation: See —
Dempsey, Edmond N., 4,435,143, Cl. 425-150.000.
Peizo Electric Products, Inc.: See —
Kolm, Henry H.; and Kolm. Eric A., 4,435,667, Cl. 310-367.000.
Pennington, B. Timothy; Roling, Paul V.; and Hsieh, John T. T., to
Cities Service Co. Polymerization catalyst. 4,435,518, Cl.
502-107.000.
Pennington, B. Timothy: See —
Veazey, Richard L.; and Pennington, B. Timothy, 4,435,519, CI.
502-107.000.
Peimwalt Corporation: See —
Kamens, Ernest R., 4.435,525, Cl. 521-92.000.
Leah, George R., 4,435,472, Cl. 428-333.000.
Pennzoil Company: See —
Holcomb, Dysart E.; Drechsel, Erhart K.; and Sardisco, John B.,
4,435,370, Cl. 423-158.000.
Pepin, Julien H. Boom axle. 4,434,994, Cl. 280-404.000.
Perkins, Noel; and Perkins, Thomas. Bird feeding device. 4,434,745, Cl.
119-51.00R.
Perkins, Thomas: See-
Perkins, Noel; and Perkins, Thomas. 4,434,745, Cl. 119-51.00R.
Perlman, Martin M.; and Filion, Andre Y., to Canada, Her Majesty the
Queen in right of, as represented by the Minister of National Defence.
Electret semiconductor solar cell. 4,435.610. Cl. 136-255.000.
Perry, Ralph A.; and Andrejasich. Raymond J., to Emhart Industries,
Inc. Hydrocarbon sensor float. 4.434.650, Cl. 73-61. lOR.
Peters, Rex B.: See—
Hulsing, Rand H., II; Peters, Rex B.; and Steinke, Kurt E.,
4,434,654, Cl. 73-151.000.
Peterson, Arnold D.. to Bendix Corporation. The. Speed sensor for an
electromagnetic machine. 4,435.659. Cl. 310-68.00K.
Peterson, Robert R.. to Barry Wright Corporation. Laminated bearing
structures. 4.435.097. Cl. 384-221.000.
Peterson, William E.; and Thompson, Robert B., to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation. Electromagnetic acoustic transducer. 4,434,663,
Cl. 73-643.000.
Petito, Ferdinand C; and Klauber, Gerald, to United States of America,
Army. Method of making rugged vidicon. 4,435,668, Cl. 313-388.000.
Petracchi, Ida; Assirelli, Antonietta; Pacini, Carlo; and Pacini, Cesare.
False twist drafting device for continuous working of slubbings of
texUle materials. 4,434,612, Cl. 57-331.000.
Petre, Dominique: See —
Formanek, Karel; Michelet, Daniel; and Petre, Dominique,
4,435,601. Cl. 568-430.000.
Petros. Andrew J., to MesU Machine Company. Sealing arrangement
for a routable member. 4.435.096. Cl. 384-147.000.
Petzoldt, Karl; Laurent, Henry; and Wiechert, Rudolf, to Schering,
Aktiengesellschaft. 3/3,7^, 15a-Trihydroxy-5-andro8ten-17-one, ito
3,15-dipivalate, and their preparation. 4,435,327, Cl. 260-397.500.
Pews, Richard G.: See—
Lysenko, Zenon; and Pews, Richard G., 4,435,573, Cl. 546-250.000.
Pfeiffer, Thomas J.: See —
Krause, Richard H.; Pfeiffer, Thomas J.; and Horvath, Vincent V.,
4,435,093, Cl. 374-129.000.
Pfizer Inc.: See —
Brennan, Thomas M.; Brannegan, Daniel P.; Weeks, Paul D.; and
Kuhla, Donald E., 4,435,584, Cl. 549-415.000.
Campbell, Simon F.; and Plews, Rhona M., 4,435,401, Cl.
424-251.000.
Cue, Berkeley W., Jr.; and Moore, Bernard S., 4,435,578, Cl.
548-309.000.
LaMattina, John L.; and Lipinski, Christopher A., 4,435,396, Cl.
424-248.510
Richardson, Kenneth; and Gymer, Geoffrey E., 4,435.399. Cl.
424-250.000.
Pfrommer, Bruno, to Textilma AG. Stitch forming device for knitting
machines. 4,434,627, Cl. 66-120.000.
Phadnis, Shashikant P.: See—
Houfl^, Leslie; Phadnis, Shashikant P.; Khan, Riaz A.; and Jenner,
Michael R., 4,435,440, Cl. 426-658.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 35
Pharmindustrie: See—
^r/?-}!^^^,^'"^*'""'"*' ""* R'taud- Je«n E. M. A., 4,435,393,
K,'l"i'^™''* ^' '"'* Re™*"''. Christian L. A., 4,435,410. Cl.
4*4-207.000.
Philipp Holzmann AG: See—
^Pl\^i°i^^^'' ^^''^^' Wilfried: and Schafer, Hans, 4,434.591.
Phillips, Edward L., to Sybron Corporation. Electrically neutral non-
permselective porous membrane 4.435.262. Cl. 204-181.00C
Phillips Petroleum Company: See—
Gomory. Paul L., 4,435.269. Cl. 208-8.00R.
Gray, Michael L.. 4.435.198. Cl. 62-28.000.
Lindstrom, Merlin R.; Pariman. Robert M.; and Kimble, James B.,
4,435,304, Cl. 252-156.000.
Mathis. Ronald D.; and Reed, Jerry O., 4.435.221. Cl. 134-2 000
Porter Randall A.; and Reed, Larry E., 4,435,376, Cl. 423-447.300.
Reed, Jerry O.; and Johnson, Timothy W., 4,435,222, Cl. 134-2 000
Stewart, William S., 4,434,746, Cl. 122-448.00R.
Stewart, William S., 4,435,192, Cl. 55-19.000.
nv..^"' J"'''''^ '"** ^^^^^' ^™"' A., 4,435,596, Cl. 562-481.000.
Phillips, Richard A.; and Haddad, Theodore A , to Foster Grant Corpo-
ration. Method of making an abrasion resistant coating on a solid
substrate and articles produced thereby. 4,435.476. CI. 428-412 000
Picard. Claude; and Saint Martin, Bernard, to La Calhene. Circuit for
ventilating and filtering the medium contained in a confinement
enclosure. 4,435.194, Cl. 55-96.000.
Pielkenrood, Jacob, to Pielkenrood-Vinitex Beheer B.V. Multiphase
separator. 4,435,196, Cl. 55-174.000. ^
Pielkenrood-Vinitex Beheer B.V.: See—
Pielkenrood, Jacob, 4,435,196, Cl. 55-174.000.
Pinder, Andrew C.: See—
Anson, Michael; Pinder, Andrew C; and Palmer, Alan R.,
4,434,800, Cl. 128-665.000.
Pinto, Patrick A.: See—
Girijavallabhan, Viyyoor M.; Ganguly, Ashit K.; Pinto. Patrick A.;
and Versace, Richard W.. 4,435.412. Cl. 424-270.000.
Piolt, Man-Nen-Hittu Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Murahara. Koichi, 4.435.099. Cl. 401-145.000.
Piscitelli. R. Amelia: See—
B™«»»' Robert W., Sr.; and Piscitelli, R. Amelia, 4,434,552, Cl.
29-876.000.
Pitchford, Edward J., to Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp. Reaction drive
sprinkler. 4,434,937, Cl. 239-230.000.
Pitney Bowes Inc.: See—
Chang, Mike S. H., 4,435,259, Cl. 204-159.130
Pivoteau, Jean; and Durot, Jean-Pien-e, to Vetrotex Saint-Gobain.
Packaging for fragile, heavy and/or deformable producto. 4,435.479.
a. 428-542.800
Plagge, Vernon L.; and Bhalla, Ranbir S., to North American Philips
Electnc Corp. Arc tube construction. 4,435,669, Cl. 313-634.000.
Plastics Engineering Company: See—
D'Alelio. Gaetano F., deceased; and Waitkus, Phillip A., 4,435,323,
Cl. 548-473.000.
Pless, Janos: See—
Bauer, Wilfried; and Pless, Janos, 4,435,385, Cl. 424-177.000.
Plews, Rhona M.: See-
Campbell, Simon F.; and Plews, Rhona M., 4,435,401, Cl.
424-251.000.
Pleyers, Jozef J. A.; See—
°?^.:,^i!!*'" '^•' P'eyers, Jozef J. A.; and Kuin, Nicolaas P. J.,
4,435,067, Cl. 355-3.0TR.
Plough, Inc.: See—
^i°A'!'oJJf ■''if y i^- ^'^' ""'ey E.; and Shelton, Charles W.,
4,434,896, Cl. 206-621.000.
Plume, Alan W., to A. W. Plume Limited. Electrical resistance fur-
naces. 4,435,819, Cl. 373-119.000.
Plumly, George W. Edge lighted sign. 4,435,743, Cl. 362-20000.
Plunkett, John P.: See—
Kenny, Thomas C; and Plunkett, John P., 4,435,185, Cl. 44-68.000
Pneumo Corporation: See—
Meulendyk, John W., 4,435,133, Cl. 417-364.000
Poe, Ronald L.: See—
Mou, Kaye L.; Washecheck, Paul H.; Poe, Ronald L.; and Yates,
James E., 4,435,606, Cl. 585-324.000.
Polaroid Corporation: See—
Cocco, Vincent L., 4,435,062, Cl. 354-303.000.
''°!*f;.*i!5'*y' ^ ^y"*" Medical Technology Inc. Intraocular lens.
4,434,515, Cl. 3-13.000.
Poler, Stanley. Contact lens assembly with haptic and method for
making the same. 4,435,050, Cl. 351-160.00R.
Pollution Controls Industries, Inc.: See-
Curtis, Stanley F., 4,434,993, Cl. 280-402.000,
Polyloom Corporation of America: See—
WeUner, Carl S.; and Raynolds, David W., 4,435,141. Cl.
425-131.100.
Pomaro. Nicholas; Pomaro, Russell; and StoufTer, Louis. Quick discon-
IfSSS JSS^^'y installation and charging system. 4,435.486, Cl.
429- 1 .000.
Pomaro, Russell: See—
Pomaro, Nicholas; Pomaro, Russell; and Suuffer, Louis, 4,435,486,
Cl. 429-1.000.
Ponzielli, Giuseppe, to Coulson Heel Inc. Process for manufacturing
articles of foamed thermoplastic material and article produced
thereby. 4,435,523, Cl. 521-51.000.
Popov, Vladimir I.: See—
Kastron, Valeria V,; Vitolin, Rasma O.; Dubur, Ounar Y. Selga,
Manu Y.; Zarinsh, Guntis V.; Kondratenko, Natalya V.; Popov,
Vladimir I.; KolomeiUev, Alexandr A.; and Yagupolsky, Uv M.,
4,435,574, Cl. 546-321.000. • i~ '
''°A?J5;!'"' '''"''' ^ • O'^""'"' William J.; and Fasiczka. Ray G., to
O Donnell A. Associates Inc. Expansion joint for reactor or heat
exchanger. 4,434,840, Cl. 165-82.000. ,
Porter. Darrcll D.: See—
Wissenberg, Hennan; York, Earl D.; and Porter. Darrell D..
4,435,016, Cl. 299-2.000.
Porter, Randall A.; and Reed, Larry E., to Phillips Petroleum Com-
pany. Fibrous carbon production. 4,435,376, C! 423-447 300
Potain Poclain Materiel (P.P.M.): See-
Charles, Georges M., 4,434,972, Cl. 254-340.000.
Potash, Hanan, to Burroughs Corporation. Branch predicting com-
puter. 4,435,756, Cl. 364-200.000.
Potkay, Eugene, to Western Electnc Co., Inc. Exhaust system for a
vapor deposition chamber. 4,435,199, Cl. 65-3 120
Pouzoullic, Gerard: See—
Boudault, Robert; and Pouzoullic, Gerard, 4,435,682, Cl.
329-107.000.
Powell, Norman F., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. System for obscur-
ing antenna sidelobe signals. 4,435.710. Cl. 343-18.00E
7A'!'.9.°"A'.'^,';( vi^A°»^''°'"*''"' '"<= Electromagnetic shielding.
4.434,541, Cl. 29-526.0OR. *
PPG Industries, Inc.: See—
Coleman, Charles R., 4,435,450, Cl. 427-385.500.
Das, Balbhadra; and Moore, L. Dow, 4,435.474, Cl. 428-391.000
Greigger. Paul P., 4,435,219, Cl. 106-287.160.
'^'.^'?' ,'^!S1 ■' • *"** Castellucci, Nicholu T., 4.435,529, Cl.
523-426.000.
^??'"M^'.'?n' ^"^^' ^"^^ ^■' *"<! Greer, S. Thomu, 4,434,521,
^T?^«''^ ^"*" ^ = ""* Temple. Chester S., 4,435,473, Cl.
428-378.000.
Valko, Joseph T., 4,435,559, Cl. 528-73.000.
Prather. Joseph E.; Khalifa, Ramzl A.; and Wcnzler, Peter B., to Edson
Tool & Manufactunng Co., Inc. Self-locking hinged door cabinet and
latch for the same. 4,435,027, Cl. 312-222.000.
President and Fellows of Harvard College: See—
Abemathy, Fredenck H., 4,435,837, Cl. 382-41.000.
Preuss, Dieter: See—
"'i^i'i'l'/S^'^*'*"*' ^*^' ^°^^' *"** Preuu, Dieter, 4,434,713, Cl.
100-168.000.
Prevorsek, Dusan C: See-
Lai, Yu-Chin; DeBona, Bruce T.; Prevorsek, Dusan C; and Ak-
kaneddi, Murali K.. 4,435,561, Cl. 528-193.000.
Prewo, Karl M.; and Brennan, John J., to United Technologies Corpo-
ration. Compliant composite tubular liners of fiber reinforced glass/-
glass-cer-^mic having utility as gun barrel liners. 4.435,435, Cl.
428-36.000.
Price, Richard H.: See—
Flaherty, Thomas; and Price, Richard H., 4,434,815, Q. 138-97.000
Prince, Ronald E.: See—
Aloi, Anthony J.; Brooks, George D.; and Prince, Ronald E.,
4,434,700. Cl. 89-34.000.
Procter A Gamble Company, The: See—
Gerritsen, Jan; Atkinson, Ronald E.; and Martin, Anthony F..
4,435,317, Cl. 252-547.000.
ProM, John W., Jr., to Singer Company, The. Clock control for digital
computer. 4,435,757, Cl. 364-200 000.
Prunbauer, Kurt, to EVVA-Werk Spezialerzeugung von Zylinder-und
Sicherheitsschlofcivem GmbH & Co. KG. Lock having a cylinder core
and a housing. 4,434,636, Cl. 70-358.000,
Ptacnik, Jerry: See—
McAteer, John E.; Bisler, Kenneth E.; Ptacnik. Jerry; and Kish.
Richard D.. 4.434.596, CI. 52-243.100.
Puritan-Bennett Corporation: See—
Olesen, Russell, 4,434,790, Cl. 128-200.140.
Puu, Peter: See—
Kuhnel. Werner; Putr, Peter; Simm, Manfred; and Spielau, Paul,
4,435,466, Cl. 428-215.000.
Quast, W. Patrick; See—
Oberiander, Charles N., 4,434,698, CI. 84.483.00A.
Rahtz, Dieter: See—
Braestrup, Claus T.; Christensen, Jogen A,; Engelstoft, Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen, Ralph; Huth, Andreas
Rahtz, Dieter; Seidelmann, Dieter; Kehr, Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat, Dieter, 4,435,403, CI, 424-256,000,
Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg Corp.: See—
Pitchford, Edward J., 4,434,937, CI. 239-230.000.
Raines, Charles D., to Horton Manufacturing Co., Inc. Device for shafi
ali^ment in a clutch or brake assembly. 4,434,883. Cl. 192-1 lOOOR.
Ralstin, Donald E., to Wells Electronics, Inc Single piece carrier for
integrated circuit devices. 4,435,724, Cl. 357-79.500.
Rampley, Neil,^o Heath Manufacturing Company, AdjusUble lock
arrangement ^d method for making same, 4,435,105, Cl, 403-109.000,
Ramuz, Henri: See—
Krasso, Anna; and Ramuz, Henri, 4,435,406, Cl, 424-263,000,
Randklev, Ronald M,, to Minnesota Mining and Manufactunng Com-
pany, Method and manufacture for applying and removal or ortho-
dontic bracket, 4,435,160, Cl, 433-9,000.
Ranganathan, Ramaswami; Patmore, David J.; and Silva, Adolfo E,, to
Canada. Her M^esty the Queen in right of, as represented by the
1040 O.G.— 17
PI 36
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Minister of Energy. Hydrocracking of heavy hydrocarbon oils with
high pitch conversion. 4.431(280, CI. 208-112.000.
Rangert, Bo R.: See—
NUsson, Ralph L.; and Rangert, Bo R., 4.434.756, CI. 123-195.00R.
Rao, Krishna K.: See-
Yang, Tai-Cheng; Rao, Krishna K.; and Huang. I-der, 4,435,521,
CI. 502-209.000.
Rapid Ring Co., Inc.: See—
Mauer, Richard L., 4,434,690, CI. 83-13.000.
Rapoport, Henry; Wcllcr, Dwight D.; and Cless, Richard D., to United
^ Sutes of America, Health and Human Services. Synthesis of ethyl-
4{3'-methoxyphenyl)-l -methyl piperidine-3-carboxylate. 4,435,572,
CI. 546-228.000.
Rasmussen, Aaron P. Turret belt grinder. 4,434,584, CI. 51-135.00R.
Rasmussen, Robert, to Industrial Parts Depot. Reverse forging or
replacement grouser bars. 4,434,642, CI. 72-356.000.
Rassak, Denis: See—
Dedenon, Jean-Marie; and Rassak, Denis, 4,435,188, CI. 48-1 1 1.000.
Rataud, Jean E. M. A.: See—
Dubroeucq, Marie-Christine; and Rataud, Jean E. M. A., 4,435,393,
CI. 424-246.000.
Ratcliffe, David J., deceased (by Ratcliffe, Madli-Ann, executrix);
Jones, Richard E.; Shevrin, Philip; and Haley, Charles B., to Syntrex
Incorporated. Word processmg system. 4,435,776, CI. 364-900.000.
RatclifTc, Madli-Ann, executrix: See—
Ratcliffe, David J , deceased; Jones, Richard E.; Shevrin, Philip;
and Haley, Charles B., 4.435,776, CI. 364-900.000.
Raubenheimer, Johann N., to Peacock Investments (Proprietary) Lim-
ited. Apparatus for cleaning submerged surfaces. 4,434,519. CI
15-1.700.
Raven, Johannes G.; and Annegam, Marcellinus J. J. C, to U.S. Philips
Corporation. Field frequency-doubling circuit for a television signal.
4.435.728. CI. 358-140.000.
Raychem Corporation: See—
Gurevich. Boris. 4.435,639, CI. 219-544.000.
Raychem Pontoise S. A.: See—
Plot, Regis; and Zoppi, Michel, 4,435,454, CI. 428-36.000.
Rayer, Peter; Krone, Hartmut; SchiessI, Alois; Steinicke, Wolfgang;
and Trede, Wolfgang, to Buck Chemisch-Technische Werke GmbH
& Co. Process for the preparation of a smoke composition. 4,435,233,
CI. 149-44.000.
Raynal, Serge: See—
Lecolier, Serge; and Raynal, Serge, 4.435,312, CI. 502-157.000.
Raynolds, David W.: See—
Weisner, Carl S.; and Raynolds, David W., 4,435,141, CI.
425-131.100.
Raytheon Company: See—
Bowen, Robert F.; Freedman, George; Teich, Wesley W.; Martel,
Thomas J.; and Eves, E. Eugene, II, 4,435,628, CI. 219-10.55M.
Williamson, James; and Crete, Paul G., 4,435,847, CI. 455-260.000.
RCA Corporation: See—
Bendell, Sidney L.; and Levine, Peter A., 4,435,730, CI.
358-213.000.
Harwood, Leopold A.; and Shanley, Robert L., II, 4,435,729, CI.
358-183.000.
Kipp, Ronald W., 4,435,709, CI. 343-14.000.
Kipp, Ronald W., 4,435,712, CI. 343-17.700.
Kirschner, Thomas F., 4,435,799, CI. 369-77.200.
Kliebphipat, Ravadee; Femsler, Ronald E.; and Hicks, James E.,
4,435,731, CI. 358-243.000.
Levin, Leonard J., 4,435,801, CI. 369-275.000.
READY Tools, Inc.: See—
Gargrave, Robert J.; Thompson, John K.; and Comstock, James F.,
4,434,644, CI. 72-387.000.
Reap, James J., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Herbi-
cidal o-alkylsulfonyloxy- and o-alkylsulfonylaminobenzenesulfona-
mides. 4,435,205. CI. 71-92.000.
Rearick. William A.: See-
Winch. Allen R.; and Rearick, William A., 4,434,633, CI.
68-267.000.
Reck, Reinhold; Kuhner, Gerhard; Voll, Manfred; and Kleinschmit,
Peter, to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft. Process for removing extract-
able substances from carbon black. 4,435,378, CI. 423-461.000.
Redmond, Russell J.; and Hannula, IDonald L., to American Hospital
Supply Corporation. Catheter guide. 4,435,174, CI. 604-174.000.
Reed, A. K.: See—
Goldberger, WUliam; and Reed, A. K., 4,435,444, CI. 427-49.000.
Reed, Jerry O.; and Johnson, Timothy W., to Phillips Petroleum Com-
pany. Process for cleaning metal surfaces of poly(arylene sulfide)
deposits. 4,435,222, CI. 134-2.000.
Reed, Jerry O.: See—
Mathis, Ronald D.; and Reed, Jerry O., 4,435,221, CI. 134-2.000.
Reed, Larry E.; See-
Porter, Randall A.; and Reed, Larry E., 4,435,376, CI. 423-447.300.
Rees, James D.: See —
Lama, William L.; and Rees, James D., 4,435,039, CI. 350-96.250.
Reeves, John W., to Eastman Kodak Company. Photothermographic
silver halide material and process. 4,435,499, CI. 430-350.000.
Regie Nationale des Usines Renault: See—
Bascou. Jacques. 4,435,007, CI. 292-268.000.
ReHeat AB; See—
Almqvist, Christer; and Lindahl, Lars, 4,434,643, CI. 72-379.000.
Reichel, Curtis J., to BASF Wyandotte Corporation. Process for the
preparation of polyether-ester polyols. 4,435,592, CI. 560-91.000.
Reimers, George W.; and Khalafalla. Sanaa £., to United Sutes of
America. Interior. Concentrating and reclaiming magnetic fluids.
4,435,302, CI. 252-62.510.
Reiser, Wolf; Elbe, Hans-Ludwig; Buchel, Karl; Frohberger, Paul-
Ernst; and Brandes, Wilhelm, to Bayer AkUengesellschaft. Combat-
M^5.IirCl.«2269'.^™'''-'-''''''-''^'-'-^'>-P"^'-"-'-°"~-
Renault, Christian L. A.: See—
Le Fur, Gerard R.; and Renault, Christian L. A., 4.43S.410, Q.
424-267.000.
Reneault, Patrick; and Ovaert. Francis, to SMAC Acieroid. Heat and
sound insulating structure for boarding or other non-loadbearins
wall. 4,434,592, CI. 52-145.000. *
Reponen, Voitto: See—
Gullichsen, Johan E.; Harkonen, Esko; Niskanen, Toivo; Kujala.
Jaakko; and Reponen, Voitto, 4,435,193, CI. 55-21.000.
Rescio, Giuseppe: See—
Bubley. Henry J.; Faulkner, Gene M.; laccino, Alex; and Rescio.
Giuseppe, 4.434,562. CI. 34-4.000.
Reubke, Karl-Julius, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the prepa-
ration of 1-alkylaminoanthraquinones. 4,435,324, CI. 26O-378.000.
Reyes, Jaime M.: See—
Allred, David D.; Walter, Lee; Reyes, Jaime M.; and Ovshinsky.
Stanford R., 4,435,445, CI. 427-54.100.
Rheinisch-Westfalisches Elektriziutswerk AG: See—
Schroeder, Heinrich J.; Ambros, Rainer; Paffrath, Gottfried; and
Brenner, Norbert, 4,435,184, CI. 23-300.000.
Rhodes. Lawrence G.; and Carter, John W., to Superior Gear Box
Company. Gear box for com harvesting unit. 4,434,606, CI.
56-106.000.
Rhone-Poulenc Agrochimie: See—
Rouy, Noel; and Dewilde, Francois, 4,435,577, CI. 548-221.000.
Rhone-Poulenc Industries: See —
Formanek, Karel; Michelet, Daniel; and Petre, Dominique.
4,435,601, CI. 568-430.000. ^
Thomas, Maryvonne; and Grosbois, Jean, 4,435,308, a.
252-181.000.
Rib Loc (Hong Kong) Ltd.: See—
Menzel, Julian M., 4,435,460, CI. 428-129.000.
Ribble, George W.: See—
Vann, Roy R.; Ribble, George W.; and George, R. Flint, 4,434,854,
CI. 166-386.000.
Ribi, Edgar E.; and Cantrell John L., to Ribi ImmunoChem Research,
Inc. Refined detoxified endotoxin product. 4,435,386, CI.
424-177.000.
Ribi ImmunoChem Research, Inc.: See —
Ribi, Edgar Ea and Cantrell John L., 4,435,386, CI. 424-177.000.
Rice, Doris M.: See—
Dominquez, Richard J. G.; and Rice, Doris M., 4,435,349, CI.
264-257.000.
Rice, William M.: See—
Busch, Lloyd E.; Palmeter, Charles W.; Henderson, Gerald O.; and
Rice, WUliam M., 4,435,279, CI. 208-111.000.
Richardson, Charles P.: See—
Gasparaitis, Bernard; Long, Thomas, W., Jr.; and Richardson,
Charles P., 4,435,713, CI. 343-702.000.
Richardson, Kenneth; and Gymer, Geoffrey E., to Pfizer Inc. 2-Aryl-l-
(imidazol-l-yl)-8-(4-piperazin-l-ylphenoxy) octan-2-ol antifiingal
agents. 4,435,399, CI. 424-250.000.
Richardson Merrell Inc.: See—
Carr, Albert A.; Farr, Robert A.; and Kane, John M., 4,435,571, Q.
544-384.000.
Richter Gedeon Vegyeszeti Gyar Rt.: See—
Lempert, Karoly; Harsanyi, Kalman; Doleschall, Gabor; Homyak,
Gyula; Nyitrai, Jozsef; Zauer, Karoly; Fetter, Jozsef; Simig.
Gyula; Visky nee Gombos. Zsuzsanna; and Barta nee Szalai,
Gizella, 4,435,322, CI. 26O-239.O0A.
Ricketts, Thomas E., to Occidental Oil Shale, Inc. In situ oil shale retort
with differing upper and lower void fractions. 4,435,017, CI.
299-19.000.
Ricoh Company, Ltd.: See—
Horike, Masanori; and Ebi, Yutaka, 4,435,720, CI. 346-75.000.
Midorikawa, Akira; Kojima, Kenji; and Uchimura, Kazuo.
4,435,074, CI. 355-15.000.
Tsukada, Toshiji; and Morinaga. Kazuo. 4.435,064, CI. 355-1.000.
Riebold, Elbert M. Air terminal guidance system. 4,435,694, CI.
340-953.000.
Riediger, Craig W.; and Winzeler, James E., to Caterpillar Tractor Co.
Planeury steering differential. 4,434,680, CI. 74-682.000.
Rieter Machine Works, Ltd.: See—
Mondini, Giancarlo, 4,434,531, C!. 19-99.000.
Oehy, Peter, 4,434,532, CI. 19-159.00R.
Rilliet, Francois, to Diematex Development & Investment Establish-
ment. Blood collection unit. 4,434.802. CI. 128-764.000.
Riotte, Michel: See—
Louboutin, Robert; and Riotte, Michel, 4,435,286, CI. 210-1 16.000.
Rippelmeyer, Dennis M., to Emerson Electric Co. Gas burner control
system. 4,435,150, CI. 431-46.000.
Risberg, Robert L., to Hobart Brothers Company. Three phase square
wave welding power supply. 4,435,632, CI. 219-130.510.
Ritter, Ernst: See—
Frey, Hansjorg; Hampel. Heinrich; Muller. Rolf; Ritter, Ernst; and
Schwartz, Reinhard, 4,435,128, CI. 417-63.000.
Rivkin, Eric M., to Liberty Carton Co. Adjustable wire tote lor printed
circuit boards. 4,434.899, CI. 21 1-41.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 37
Rivkin. Eric M., to Liberty Carton Co. Hinged container for relay
racks. 4.435.028. CI. 312-258.000.
Rizzi. John R.. to International Business Machines Corporation. Regis-
ter allocation system using recursive queuing during source code
compilation. 4.435.753. CI. 364-200.000.
Rizzi, Primo: See —
Jolly. Jean; Rizzi. Primo; and Taillardat. Jean. 4.435.325. CI.
260-397.200.
Robert Bosch GmbH: See—
Buchschmid, Emil; Burkel, Rainer; Danamps, Jean; Frenznick,
Anton; and Stradtmann, Gunther, 4,435,625, CI. 200-61.220.
Eisele, Hermann; Hill, Mariin; and Schweizer, Hartmut, 4,435,745,
CI. 363-21.000.
Frey, Hansjorg; Hampel, Heinrich; Muller, Rolf; Ritter, Ernst; and
Schwartz, Reinhard, 4,435,128, CI. 417-63.000.
Oansert, Willi; Jakob, Gert; Ruttkowski, Lothar; Goetzke, Sieg-
fried; and Stammler, Kurt, 4,435,033. CI. 339-45.00M.
Muller, Thomas; Schadlich, Fritz; and Subler, Manfred, 4.434.586,
CI. 51-170.0PT.
Straubel, Max, 4,434,777, CI. 123-568.000.
WUler, Armin; and Roderer, Herbert, 4,435,660, CI. 310-70.00R.
Roberts, Victor C; and Sainz, Antonio J., to National Research Devel-
opment Corporation. Apparatus for transmitting and receiving
sound. 4,434,669, CI. 73-861.250.
Robertson, John M.: See-
Breed, Dirk J.; Van Bakel, Bemardus A. H.; Voermans, Antonius
B.; and Robertson, John M., 4,435,484, CI. 428-693.000.
Rockwell International Corporation: See —
Colton, Russell F., 4,435.737, CI. 361-280.000.
Erickson, Alan R., 4,435,683, CI. 330-2.000. .
Fechalos, William A.; and Stehman, Carl J., 4,435,620. CI. 179-
1 8 OEB
Gergis. Isoris S.; and Lee. Wai-Tak P., 4,435,784, CI. 365-8.000.
McKenzie, Robert W., 4,435,029, CI. 312-320.000.
Peterson, William E.; and Thompson, Robert B., 4,434,663, CI.
73-643.000.
Roder, Eckhard: See—
Behrend, Volkmar; and Roder, Eckhard, 4,435,118, CI. 414-
744.00R.
Roderer, Herbert: See—
Wilier, Armin; and Roderer, Herbert, 4,435,660, CI. 310-70.00R.
Roeder, Georg; Sachs, Helmut; and Hajok, Dieter, to Messer Griesheim
GmbH. Powder, especially metallic powder for marking workpieces.
4,434,935, CI. 239-85.000.
Roellchen, Thomas A., to Ace Polymers, Inc. Supporting and spacing
member for web material rolls. 4,435.463, CI. 428-158.000.
Rogers. Jack S., to Milliken Research Corporation. Athletic suppori
fabric. 4,435,467, CI. 428-254.000.
Rogers, Norman H.; and Crimmin, Michael J., to Beecham Group p.l.c.
2-Halo-substituted monic acid A useful as antibacterial compounds.
4,435.583, CI. 549-414.000.
Rogers. Ray L.: See-
Barber, Elavil, Jr.; Karam, Emmanuel E.; Dunaway, Richard; and
Rogers, Ray L., 4,435,738, CI. 361-321.000.
Roptadius, John I. F. Pipe coupling. 4,434,809, CI. 137-318.000.
Rohm and Haas Company: See —
Witiak, David, 4,435,539, CI. 524-558.000.
Rokach, Joshua: See—
Belanger, Patrice C; Williams, Haydn W. R.; and Rokach, Joshua.
4.435,579, CI. 549-12.000.
Rolf, Meinhard; Schutze, Detlef-Ingo; Neeff, Rutger; and Ruiuheimer,
Hans-Volker, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the prepara-
tion of dimethyl succinylosuccinate, the disodium salt thereof,
dianilinodihydroterephthalic acids, the dimethyl esters and salts
thereof, and dianilinoterephthalic acids, and the dimethyl esters and
salte thereof 4,435,589, CI. 560-48.000.
Roling, Paul V.: See—
Pennington, B. Timothy; Roling, Paul V.; and Hsieh, John T. T..
4.435,518, CI. 502-107.000.
Rollex B.V.: See—
Roos, Johannes, 4,434,570, CI. 40-617.000.
Rolls-Royce Incorporated: See—
MoriU, Robert R., 4,434,957, CI. 244.35.00R.
Rolls-Royce Limited: See—
WUIgoose, Kenneth, 4,434,835, CI. 164-34.000.
Romanauskas, William A., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Com-
pany. Centrifuge rotor having a closable windshield. 4,435,169, CI.
494-20.000.
Romicon, Inc.: See—
Breslau, Barry R., 4,435,289, CI. 210-637.000.
Ronchi, Achille U.: See—
Cainelli, Gianfranco; Foa', Marco; Ronchi, Achille U.; and Oar-
dano, Andrea, 4,435,575, CI. 546-341.000.
Roop, Michael R.; and Cook, Russell P.. Sr. Rescue apparatus.
4.434.869. Q. 182-10.000.
Roos, Johannes, to RoUex B.V. Advertising holder. 4.434.570. CI.
40-617.000.
Roquet Jorda, Pedro. Introduced in the hydraulic actuation for the
altemative movements of the swinging arms of petroleum extractor
machines. 4,434,705, CI. 91-50.000.
Rosaen, Borje O. Fluid flow meter. 4,434,670, CI. 73-861.540.
Rose. John A.; and Dyer, Keith, to AMF Incorporated. Machine for
top stitching. 4,434,730, CI. 112-121.120.
Rose Manufacturing Company: See —
Schmidt, Terrance L.; and Olson. Wayne L., 4,434.536, CI. 24-
24I.0FP.
Rosenberg, Steven L. Adjustable abduction device for treatment of
meutarsus adductus. 4,434,792, CI. 128-80.00R.
Rosenkrantz, Edward: See—
Rosenkrantz, Evelyn S.; and Rosenkrantz, Edward, 4,434,938, CI.
239-274.000.
Rosenkrantz, Evelyn S.; and Rosenkrantz, Edward. Aroma system.
4.434.938. CI. 239-274.000.
Roses. Henri. Indicator apparatus for indicating notes emitted by means
of a musical instrument. 4.434,697, CI. 84-454.000.
Ross, Ashley M.; and McKee. James A., to Fabrico Manufacturing
Corp Silo breather bag. 4,434,712, CI. 99-646.00S.
Roth. Martin: See—
Muller. Beat; and Roth, Martin, 4,435,489, CI. 430-17.000.
Rothbuhr, Lothar, to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft. Oxidative after-treat-
ment of carbon black. 4.435,377, CI 423-460.000.
Rougeron, Michel; and Simon, Jacques, to Centre National d'Etudes
Spatiales. Method of construction for a container with a symmetrical
lobed structure and container constructed according to the said
process. 4,434,958, CI. 244-126.000.
Roussel Uclaf: See-
Jolly, Jean; Rizzi, Primo; and Taillardat, Jean, 4,435,325, CI.
260-397.200.
Nedelec, Lucien; Guillaume, Jacques; and Dumont, Claude,
4,435,408, CI. 424-263.000.
Rouy, Noel; and Dewilde, Francois, to Rhone-Poulenc Agrochimie.
Process for the preparation of chlorinated derivatives of benzoxazo-
lones. 4,435,577, CI. 548-221.000.
Royel International Pty. Ltd.: See—
Royston. Alan L., 4,435,636. CI. 219-230.000.
Royston, Alan L., to Royel International Pty. Ltd. Desoldering tool.
4,435.636, CI. 219-230.000.
Rozner. Marvin J.; and Chapman. Arthur S.. to United Sutes of Amer-
ica. Army. Telescoping periscope. 4.434,702, CI. 89-36.00L.
RTE Corporation: See—
Link, Edwin A.; and Mikulecky, Harvey W., 4,435,690, CI.
335-37.000.
Ruben, Zorro. Linear fluid handling, rotary drive, mechanism.
4,435,131, CI. 417-334.000.
Rubin, Steven M., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Tech-
nique for extracting features from images. 4,435,836, CI. 382-27.000.
Rudolf, Peter: See—
Banos, Zoltan; Vereczkey, Endre; Kerey, Gyorgy; Rudolf, Peter;
Takacs, Istvan; Felmeri, Jozsef; and BosiU, Gyula, 4,435,182, CI.
23-295.00R.
Rudolph, Peter K. C, to Boeing Company, The. Airfoil flap assembly
with flap track member. 4,434,959, CI. 244-215.000.
Ruf, Ralph R.: See—
Gambino, Richard J.; and Ruf, Ralph R., 4,435,663, CI,
310-306.000.
Ruhrchemie Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Comils, Boy; Bach. Hanswilhelm; Gartner, Roderich; and Oick,
Wilhelm, 4,435,603, CI. 568-701.000.
Rumpp, Gerhard; Scholz, Dieter; and Spieth, Manfred, to Hilti Aktien-
gesellschaft. Hammer drill for performing rotary drilling or percus-
sive drillins. 4,434,859, CI. 173-48.000.
Rumpz, Raphael J. Automatic traffic control gate. 4,434,578, CI.
49-49.000.
Runzheimer, Hans-Volker: See — *
Rolf, Meinhard; Schutze, Detlef-Ingo; NeefT, Rutger; and Runz-
heimer, Hans-Volker, 4,435,589, cfl. 560-48.000.
Ruscitti, Tomaso; Albini, Giovanni; Torretta, Roberto; and Incerti
Baldi, Andrea, to S.A.R. S.p.A. Manually operated liquid dispensing
pump. 4,434,916, CI. 222-321. 000.
Russell, Angus R. T., to Singer Company, The. Anti-spill device for
sewing machine bobbin. 4,434,734. CI. 112-181.000.
Russell, Pat, to Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Slide clamp includ-
ing elevation subilizer. 4,434,963, CI. 251-7.000.
Russo, Salvatore V., to Pauluhn Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Explosion-proof fluorescent light fixture. 4,435,744, CI. 362-219.000.
Ruttkowski, Lothar: See—
Gansert, Willi; Jakob, Gert; Ruttkowski, Lothar; Goeuke, Sieg-
fried; and Stammler, Kurt, 4,435,033, CI. 339-45.00M.
Rutty, Edward C. See—
Czerwinski, Frank G.; and Rutty, Edward C, 4,434,952, CI.
242-107.000.
Ryan, Dennis M., to AMPEX Corporation. Adjusting apparatus.
4,434,686, CI. 81-3.00R.
Ryan, Dennis M., to Ampex Corporation. Tape tensioning apparatus.
4,434,954, CI. 242-189.000.
Ryder, Leonard B.: See —
Vieth, Wolf R.; and Ryder, Leonard B., 4,435,453, CI. 428-35.000.
Ryobi Ltd.: See—
Ishii, Koji; and Honkawa. Yodiinori, 4,434,716, CI. 101-142.000.
S.A.R. S.p.A.: See—
Ruscitti, Tomaso; Albini, Giovanni; Torretta, Roberto; and Incerti
Baldi, Andrea, 4,434,916, CI. 222-321.000.
S. C. Johnson ft Sons, Inc.: See —
Brugman, Martin; and Van Schaik, Herman, 4,434,885, CI.
198-388.000.
S.N.E.C.M.A.: See—
Trottier, Jean-Pierre; and Jeandin, Michel, 4,435,360, CI.
419-49.000.
Sachs, Helmut: See—
Roeder, Georg; Sachs, Helmut; and Hi^ok, Dieter, 4,434.935, CI.
239-85.000.
PI 38
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Sachs-Systemtechnik GmbH: See—
Lutz, Dieter; Nagler, Franz; Thieler, Wolfgang; and Tellert, Rudy,
4.434,879. CI. 192-0.052.
Sack Glastechnik GmbH: See—
Strauss, Gottfried; and Schumann, Horst. 4,434,582, CI. Sl-
101. OCR.
Sackett, Robert W.: See—
Schutten, Herman P.; Sackett. Robert W.; Sedivy. Jan K.; and
Taken. Michael E.. 4,435,750, CI. 363-177.000.
Safet-Embamet Lethias: See—
Groult, Jacques, 4.434.910, CI. 220-358.000.
Sahara, Masayoshi: See—
Nakai. Masaaki; and Sahara, Masayoshi, 4,435,057, CI. 354-426.000.
Saint Martin. Bernard: See —
Picard, Claude; and Saint Martin, Bernard, 4,435,194, CI. 55-96.000.
St. Martin, Leo I., Jr., to H. D. Baumann Assoc., Ltd. Low flow control
valve. 4,434,965, CI. 251-121.000.
Sainz, Antonio J.: See —
Roberts, Victor C; and Sainz, Antonio J., 4,434,669, CI. 73-861 .250.
Saito, Hiroshi: See —
Hirokawa, Norio; Kawachi, Tsuneo; Saito, Hiroshi; and Yo-
shimura, Ryoichi, 4,435,210, CI. 75-53.000.
Saito, Motoyuki; and Hatanaka, Hideo, to Citizen Watch Co., Ltd.
Electrical connection construction for electronic timepiece.
4,435,796, CI. 368-321.000.
Saito, Tadao; Nozawa, Takamiteu; Endo, Shuzo; Kakuta, Yoshiyuki;
Ogawa, Riichi; and Kaneuchi, Tetsuro, to Yoshino Kogyosho Co.,
Ltd. Trigger-actuated atomizer. 4,434,917, CI. 222-383.000.
Saito, Tadashi: See—
Asada, Akihiro; Umemura, Kazuhiro; Saito, Tadashi; and Sampei,
Tohru, 4.435,832, CI. 381-34.000.
Saito, Yoshihisa: See—
Kamiya, Takashi; Saito, Yoshihisa; Teraji, Tsutomu; Nakaguti,
Osamu; and Oku, Teruo, 4,435,321, CI. 260-239.00A.
Saitou, Teruo: See —
Fukushima, Nobuo; Saitou, Teruo; and Hayashida, Haruo,
4,435,350, CI. 264-280.000.
Sakai, Teturou: See—
Nagao, Nobuya; and Sakai, Teturou, 4,435,725, CI. 358-36.000.
Sakalay, Frederick E.: See—
Baum, Richard I.; and Sakalay, Frederick E., 4,435,759, CI.
364-200.000.
Sakamoto, Masahisa; Tamura, Yoshio; and Sakamoto, Tadashi, to
Sakamoto, Masahisa; Tamura, Yoshio; Sakamoto, Tadashi; and
Kawamura, Hiroji. Synthetic resin material, particularly surface
material for phonograph records with a photograph or picture.
4,435,802. CI. 369-286.000.
Sakamoto, Seiichi: See—
Tcrauchi. Kiyoshi; and Sakamoto, Seiichi, 4.435,136. CI.
418-55.000.
Sakamoto, Tadashi: See—
Sakamoto, Masahisa; Tamura, Yoshio; and Sakamoto, Tadashi.
4,435.802, CI. 369-286.000.
Sakitani, KaUumi; Uemura, Shigehiro; and Yajima, Ryuzaburo, to
• Daikin Kogyo Co.. Ltd. Cross-fin coil type heat exchanger.
4,434.844. CI. 165-151.000.
Sakow. Hiroshi; and Kashioka. Seiji. to HiUchi, Ltd. Method and
device for detecting the position of an object. 4.435.835, CI.
382-8.000.
Sakuma, Osamu: See —
Suzuki, Yoshihiro; Nakagawa, Shuichi; Kawamura, Nobuhisa;
Kurihara. Shuichi; Sakuma, Osamu; and Ito. Masahiro. 4,435,772,
CI. 364-520.000.
Sakura, Yasuhiro, to Tokyo Electric Co., Ltd. Label feed control
system. 4,434.911. CI. 221-2.000.
Salge. Edward A.; and Horey. Leonard I., to Singer Company, The.
Operation controller for an electronic sewing machine. 4,434,732, CI.
112-158.00E.
Sampei, Tohru: See—
Asada, Akihiro; Umemura, Kazuhiro; Saito, Tadashi; and Sampei,
Tohru, 4,435,832, CI. 381-34.000. x
Sanborn, David M.; and Blackshaw, Andrew L., to E-Tech, Inc.
Method of manufacturing a heat exchanger. 4,434,539, CI. 29-
Sanden Corporation: See—
Terauchi. Kiyoshi; and Sakamoto, Seiichi, 4,435,136, CI.
418-55.000.
Terauchi, Kiyoshi, 4,435,137, CI. 418-55.000.
Sanders Associates, Inc.: See-
Marshall, William J., Jr.; and Brigham, Gerald A., 4,435.794, CI.
367-155.000.
Sandoz Ltd.: See-
Bauer, Wilfried; and Pless, Janos, 4,435.385, CI. 424-177.000.
Sankyo Company, Limited: See—
Tsuji, Hideakira; Yamamoto, Shinjiro; Nakagami, Kazuto; Honda,
Takeo; Fujii, Katsutoshi; Kobayashi. Takashi; Obata, Tokio-
Kojima. Mikio; and Akiyoshi. Yuji, 4.435,402, CI. 424-251.000.
Sano, Mizuka: See —
Tamura. Shohei; Sano. Mizuka; Inokuchi, Hiroo; Toriumi. Ko-
shiro; and Sato. Naoki. 4.435,375, CI. 423-439.000.
SanthofT. Rose G. Handbag and belt carrier. 4,434,921, CI. 224-253.000.
Sanwa Kagaku Kenkyusho Co. Ltd.: See-
Ban, Masatoshi; Miura. Kenji; Baba, Yutaka; Iwata. Noriyuki-
Fukui. Akira; Hori, Mikio; Fujimura. Hajime; and Suenasa.
Eiichi. 4.435,392. CI. 424-244.000. "^
Sanwa Kako Company. Limited: See—
Ito. Hiroo; Kasanami. Takeo; and Miura, Shuji. 4.435.346. CI.
264-54.000.
Sardisco, John B.: See —
Holcomb, Dysart E.; Drechsel. Erhart K.; and Sardisco. John B..
4,435,370, a. 423-158.000.
Sarli, Michael S.: See—
Derr, Walter R.; and Sarli, Michael S., 4,435,275. CI. 208-89.000.
Sasahara, Kazuo; Honda, MasamiUu; Koizumi. Masuo; Murakami.
Yasushi; Neichi, Tomohiro; Nakakimura, Hiroshi; Noda, Yukifumi;
Matsushita, Hiroshi; and Hata, Shun-ichi, to Chugai Seiyaku Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Dibenzoxazepine derivative, and pharmaceutical com-
position comprising the same. 4,435,391, CI. 424-244.000.
Sasakawa, Tomio, to Anriteu Electric Company Limited. Optical fiber
connector with mutually engaging, oppositely tapered surfaces.
4,435,036, CI. 350-%.200.
Sasaki, Isao: See —
Kishida. Kazuo; Sasaki, Isao; and Mukai. Nobuhiro, 4.435.540. CI.
524-780.000.
Sasaki, Kazuo: See —
Ishigaki, Katsumi; Sasaki. Kazuo; and Fukumura, Takumi.
4,435,006, CI. 285-119.000.
Sasaki, Takuya: See—
Okouchi. Isao; Takahashi, Sankichi; Mukai, Yasuteni; Otake, Kat-
sumoto; Sasaki, Takuya; and Miyai. Masahiko, 4.435.285, Q.
209-250.000.
Sasaki, Tohru; Terasaki, Syuuzi; Munakata, Hideo; and Ohta, Miteuru,
to Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Dielectric film.
4,435,475, CI. 428-409.000.
Sasaya, Hideaki: See—
Inagaki, Miteuo; and Sasaya, Hideaki, 4,435,140, CI. 418-259.000.
Sato, Akio; Nakajima, Kenji; Takahara, Yoshimasa; Kijima, Shizumasa;
Kuwana, Noriaki; Abe, Shinya; and Yamada, Kouzi, to Eisai Co..
Ltd.; and General Director of the Agency of Industrial Science and
Technology, Seiichi Ishizaka. Anti-ulcer composition comprising
terpenoid containing two functional groups and method of treatins
ulcers. 4.435.423, CI. 424-318.000.
Sato, Kazuo: See —
Shiohata, Koki; Fujisawa, Fumio; Shiga, Motohiro; Sato, Kazuo;
Ohmori, Motoji; and Takasumi, Masakazu, 4,435,770, CI.
364-508.000.
Sato, Kosaburo: See-
Ogata, Masaru; and Sato, Kosaburo, 4,435,394, CI. 424-248.500.
Sato, Masamichi, to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Fixing apparatus for
electrophotography. 4,435,069, CI. 355-3.0FU.
Sato, Mitsuyoshi: See —
Morita, Akiyoshi; and Sato, Mitsuyoshi, 4,435,142, CI. 425-145.000.
Sato, Naoki: See—
Tamura. Shohei; Sano, Mizuka; Inokuchi. Hiroo; Toriumi. Ko-
shiro; and Sato, Naoki, 4,435,375, CI. 423-439.000.
Sato, Yoshimi, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Leg protector of automotive
vehicle. 4,434,999, CI. 280-752.000.
Saunders, Norman J.: See —
Butler, John R.; Shock, Gerald D.; and Saunders, Norman J..
4.434,927, CI. 227-9.000.
Savas, Judith C: See—
Batzold, John S.; and Savas, Judith C, 4,435,267, CI. 204-284.000.
Savin Corporation: See—
Landa, Benzion, 4,435,068, CI. 355-3.00R.
Sburlino, Roberto: See —
Bianchi, Giuseppe; and Sburlino, Roberto, 4,434,629. O. 68-
13.00A.
Scarzella, Sergio. Emergency levelling device for a lift car. 4.434.875.
CI. 187-29.00R.
Schacht, Dieter, to Palitex Project Company GmbH. Yam brake and
process for tensioning at least two yams in a textile yam processing
machine. 4,434,609, Q. 57-58.860.
Schadlich, FriU: See—
Muller, Thomas; Schadlich, Fritz; and Stabler, Manfred, 4,434,586.
CI. 51-170.0PT.
Schafer, Hans: See—
Zema. Wolfgang; Krabbe, WUfried; and Schafer, Hans, 4,434,591,
CI. 52-73.000.
Schaper, Ulf-Armin: See-
Conrad, Jens; Schaper, Ulf-Armin; and Bruns, Klaus. 4.435.315. CI.
252-522.00R.
Scharf, Bemhard: See—
Brandstetter, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Scharf, Bemhard; Lin-
denschmidt, Gerhard; Schwaab, Josef; and Jung, Rudolf H.,
4,435,541, CI. 525-64.000.
Scharsig, Hans-Hermann, to Hobart Corporation. Food material slicing
machine. 4,434,694, CI. 83-41 1.OOR.
Schaub, Robert E.; Upeslacis, Janis; and Bernstein, Seymour, to Ameri-
can Cyanamid Company. Poly-cation salts of bis (or tris) 4-0-
polyhexose-thio-arylene sulfate derivatives. 4,435.387, CI.
424-180.000.
Scheib, Thomas J.: See —
Dziubakowski. Donald J.; Kaya. Azmi; Keyes. Marion A.; Matsko,
Theodore N.; Moss, William H.; and Scheib, Thomas J..
4.435.650. CI. 307-32.000.
Scheider, Hans: See-
Baker, Kenneth D.; and Scheider, Hans. 4.435.253, CI. 2O4-43.00G.
Schenk. Heinrich: See—
Gockler, Heinz; Till. Reinhard; and Schenk. Heinrich, 4,435,773.
CI. 364-724.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 39
Schering AG: See-
Burba. Christian; Lucas, Hermann-Josef; and NefTgen, Bemd,
4,435.558, CI. 528-45.000.
Schering Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Annen, Klaus; Laurent, Henry; Hofmeister. Helmut; and Wiechert,
Rudolf, 4,435,390, CI. 424-243.000.
Braestrap, Claus T.; Christensen, Jogen A.; Engelstoft, Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder. olrich; Schmiechen, Ralph; Huth, Andreas;
Rahtz, Dieter; Seidelmann, Dieter; Kehr, Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat, Dieter, 4,435,403, CI. 424-256.000.
Petzoldt. Karl; Uurent, Henry; and Wiechert, Rudolf, 4,435,327,
CI. 260-397.500.
Schering Corporation: See-
Ganguly, Ashit K.; Mallams, Allan K.; and Liu, Yi-Tsung,
4,435,388, CI. 424-180.000.
Girijavallabhan, Viyyoor M.; Ganguly, Ashit K.; Pinto, Patrick A.;
and Versace, Richard W., 4,435,412, CI, 424-270.000.
McCombie, Stuart W., 4,435,413, CI. 424-270.000.
Nafissi-Varchei, M. Mehdi, 4,435,398, CI. 424-250.000.
Schiele, Werner; See—
Hartel, Gunter; Schiele, Wemer; Schurfeld, Armin; Bianchi, Val-
erio; and Abidin, Anwar, 4,434,772, CI. 123-549.000.
Schiessl, Alois: See —
Rayer, Peter; Krone, Hartmut; Schiessl, Alois; Steinicke, Wolf-
gang; and Trede. Wolfgang, 4,435,233, CI. 149-44.000.
Schiffarth, Josef: See—
Greensmith, Dennis; Hammerton, Roderic H.; Wall, Colin J.;
Dunkelmann, Dietger; Jaunich, Helmut; and Schiffarth, Josef,
4,435,510. CI. 501-90.000.
Schiller, Norman H.; and Alfano, Robert R., to Hamamatsu Corpora-
tion. Apparatus and method for use in calibrating the time axis and
intensity linearity of a streak camera. 4,435,727, CI. 358-139.000.
Schirlin, Daniel: See —
Sjoerdsma, Albert; Bey, Philippe; Jung, Michel; Gerhart, Fritz; and
Schirlin, Daniel, 4,435,425, CI. 424-325.000.
Schmidt, Manfred, to Erich Schultze KG. Maintenance and protection
devices for cooling plants. 4,434,626, CI. 62-470.000.
Schmidt, Peter: See—
Nunnerich, Wilhelm; and Schmidt, Peter, 4,434,950, CI. 242-67.200.
Schmidt, Robert: See—
Forster, Heinz; Eue, Ludwig; and Schmidt, Robert, 4,435,208, CI.
71-105.000.
Schmidt, Terrance L.; and Olson, Wayne L., to Rose Manufacturing
Company. Locking snap hook. 4,434,536, CI. 24-24 l.OPP.
Schmiechen, Ralph: See—
Braestnip, Claus T.; Christensen, Jogen A.; Engelstoft, Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen, Ralph; Huth, Andreas;
Rahtz, Dieter; Seidelmann, Dieter; Kehr, Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat. Dieter, 4,435,403, CI. 424-256.000.
Schmitt, Oscar A.; Nedreski, Robert J.; and Karlson, Eskil. Dental
technique training device. 4,435,163, CI. 434-263.000.
Schnegg, Peter: See—
Emde, Herbert; Blank, Heinz U.; and Schnegg, Peter, 4,435,336, CI.
260-508.000.
Schneider, Joachim tJ.: See—
Hoppe, Peter P.; Schneider, Joachim U.; Schulz, Bemhard; and
Tiefenbacher, Hubert, 4,435,427, CI. 424-356.000.
Schneider, Rainer: See—
Michaelis, Klaus-Peter; and Schneider, Rainer, 4,435,338, CI.
260-929.000.
Schneider, Wolfgang, to Klein, Schanzlin k Becker Aktiengesellschaft.
Centrifugal pump impeller with replaceable wear ring. 4,435,126, CI.
4I6-186.00R.
Schoenmakers, Johannes J. M., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Magnetic-
Upe cassette. 4,434,955, CI. 242-199.000.
Schoenwald, Justin P. Trigonometry visualizers and method of making
same. 4,435,162, CI. 434-215.000.
Scholz, Dieter: See —
Rumpp, Gerhard; Scholz, Dieter; and Spieth, Manfred, 4,434,859,
CI. 173-48.000.
Schrader, Hellmut. Film guide assembly. 4,435,054, CI. 353-95.000.
Schrader, Lothar: See—
Giebel, Burkhard; Moormann, Hans; and Schrader, Lothar,
4,435,789, CI. 365-203.000.
Schreckenberg, Manfred; Nouvertne, Werner; Medem, Harald; Dhein,
Rolf; and Nluller, Peter R., to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Mixtures of
polycarbonate elastomers, containing hydrogenated dimeric fatty
acid esters as condensed units, and po^olefines and, optionally, other
polycarbonates. 4,435,544, CI. 525-146.000.
Schroeder, Heinrich J.; Ambros, Rainer; PafTrath, Gottfried; and Bren-
ner, Norbert, to Rheinisch-Westfalisches Elektriziutswerk AG.
Method of recovering boric acid from waste-water concentrates of
nuclear planU. 4,435,184, CI. 23-300.000.
Schudel, Peter: See—
Crameri, Yvo; Ochsner, Paul A.; and Schudel, Peter, 4,435,585, CI.
549-446.000.
Schultze-Gebhardt, Fritz: See—
Miessen. Ralf; Wilsing, Hans; and Schultze-Gebhardt, Fritz,
4,434,530, CI. 19-0.460.
Schulz, Bemhard: See—
Hoppe, Peter P.; Schneider, Joachim U.; Schulz, Bemhard; and
Tiefenbacher, Hubert, 4,435,427, CI. 424-356.000.
Schulz, Ralf-Thilo: See—
Engelsberger, Ernst; and Schulz. Ralf-Thilo, 4,434,580, CI.
49-502.000.
Schumacher, Ralf: See-
Struck, Carl-Heinz; and Schumacher. Ralf, 4,435,152, Q.
431-170.000.
Schumann, Horst: See-
Strauss, Gottfried; and Schumann, Horst, 4,434,582, CI. 51-
101. OOR.
Schurfeld, Armin: See—
Hartel, Gunter; Schiele, Wemer; Schurfeld, Armin; Bianchi, Val-
erio; and Abidin, Anwar, 4,434,772, CI. 123-549.000.
Schutten, Herman P.; Sackett, Robert W.; Sedivy, Jan K.; and Taken,
Michael E., to Eaton Corporation. Rectified AC frequency con-
verter. 4,435,750, CI. 363-177.000.
Schutze, Detlef-Ingo: See-
Rolf, Meinhard; Schutze, Detlef-Ingo; Neeff, Rutger; and Runz-
heimer, Hans-Volker, 4,435,589, CI. 56048.000.
Schwaab, Josef See —
Brandstetter, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Schar*r Bemhard; Lin-
denschmidt, Gerhard; Schwaab, Josef; and Jung, Rudolf H.,
4,435,541, CI. 525-64.000.
Schwabe, Ulrich; and Jacobs, Erwin, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft.
Process for producing adjacent tubs implanted with dopant ions in
the manufacture of LSI complementary VfOS field effect transistors.
4,434,543, CI. 29.576.00B.
Schwartz, Erich: See —
Oppenlaender, Knut; Stork, Karl; Vogel, Hans-Henning; Schwartz.
Erich; and Jakob, Claus P., 4,435,298, CI. 252-34.000.
Schw^z, Reinhard: See—
Frey, Hansjorg; Hampel. Heinrich; Muller, Rolf; Ritter, Ernst; and
Schwartz, Reinhard, 4,435,128. CI. 417-63.000.
Schwartz, Werner; and Fischer, Peter, to Metallgesellschaft Aktien-
gesellschaft. Process of blowing high-oxygen gases into a molten bath
which conuins non-ferrous metals. 4,435,211, CI. 75-62.000.
Schwcizer, Hartmut: See —
Eisele, Hermann; Hill, Martin; and Schweizer, Hartmut, 4,435,745,
CI. 363-21.000.
Schwerzel, Robert E.: See-
Epstein, Harold M.; Schwerzel, Robert E,; and Andrus, Paul G.,
4,435,828. CI. 378-49.000.
SCM Corporation: See-
Cleveland. William E., 4,435,098. CI. 400-674.000.
Scott. Edward W.; and Goetschel. Daniel B. Orchard error correction
system. 4.435,807, CI. 371-50.000.
Scott Paper Company: See-
Gray, Lorin S., Ill; and Doody. Jeffrey S.. 4,435,461, CI.
428-141.000.
Seaquist Valve Company: See —
Knickerbocker, Michael G., 4.435,135. CI. 417-511.000.
Secretary of Sutein her Brtannic Majesty's Govemment of the United
Kingdom: See —
Vogel, Alfredo, 4,434,839, CI. 164-485.000.
SEDCO, Inc.: See-
Hampton, James E., 4,435,108, CI. 405-209.000.
Sedivy, Jan K.: See—
Schutten, Herman P.; Sackett, Robert W.; Sedivy, Jan K.; and
Taken, Michael E., 4,435,750, CI. 363-177.000.
Sedlmair, Siegfried, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Stripline micro-
wave balanced mixer circuit. 4,435,848, CI. 455-327.000.
Segers, Marinus T. M.; Niessen, Cornells; and Kuiper, Krijn. to U.S.
Philips Corporation. Device for testing a circuit comprising sequen-
tial and combinatorial logic elements. 4,435,806, CI. 371-25.000.
Seid, Gordon: See —
Cronin, Michael J.; and Seid, Gordon, 4.434,624, CI. 62-172.000.
Seidelmann, Dieter: See —
Braestrup. Claus T.; Christensen. Jogen A.; Engelstoft. Mogens;
Neef, Gunter; Eder, Ulrich; Schmiechen. Ralph; Huth. Andreas;
Rahtz. Dieter; Seidelmann, Dieter; Kehr, Wolfgang; and Palen-
schat. Dieter, 4,435,403, CI. 424-256.000.
Seifried, Norbert; See—
Oepen, Gerhard; Mangartz, Karl-Heinz; Seifried, Norbert; Engel,
Jurgen; and Isaac, Otto, 4,435,563. CI 536-18.100.
Seimiya, Ryubun; Inowa, Shigeni; Tarumi, Noriyoshi; Matsunawa,
Masahiko; and Tokunaga, mroshi, to Konishiroku Photo Industrv
Co., Ltd. Recording apparatus with editing capability. 4,435,723. CI.
346-154.000.
Seino, Kazuyuki; See —
Hori, Yasuro; Kanoi, Minom; Seino, Kazuyuki; and Hagiwara,
Syuya, 4,435,751, CI. 364-574.000.
Seki, Fumio, to Yoshida Kogyo K K. Tape feeding device for stapling
machines. 4,434.928. CI. 227-16.000.
Selga, Mariu Y.: See—
Kastron. Valeria V.; Vitolin, Rasma O.; Dubur. Gunar Y.; Selga,
Mariu Y.; Zarinsh, Guntis V.; Kondratenko. Natalya V.; Popov.
Vladimir I.; Kolomeitsev. Alexandr A.; and Yagupolsky, Lev M.,
4,435,574. CI. 546-321.000.
Selman. Gordon L.; See—
Knapton. Arthur G.; and Selman, Gordon L.. 4.435,373, CI.
423-403.000.
Selva, Domenica; See —
Toja, Emilio; Omodei-Sale', Amedeo; and Selva, Domenica,
4,435,417, CI. 424-273.00B.
Sepulveida. Luis P., to Challenger Caribbean Corporation; Challenger
Products Corporation; and Commander Electncal Equipment, Inc.
Lock off-lock on. 4,435,624. CI. 20(M2.00T.
Service de Propriete Indust. Centre de Recherches de Pont a Mousson;
See—
Bacroix, Marcel A., 4,434,821, CI. 141-44.000.
r
PI 40
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Servo, Matti; and Vainio, Matti, to Tamfelt Oy AB. Thermoplastic
non-woven fabric seamed by melt-seaming and a method of making
such a fabric. 4,435,457, CI. 428-58.000.
Sevier, Peter E., to Olin Corporation. Apparatus and process for cool-
ing and solidifying continuous or semi-continuously cast material.
4,434.838. CI. 164-485.000.
Shalaby. Shalaby W.; and Jamiolkowski, Dennis D., to Ethicon, Inc.
Radiation sterilizable absorbable polymeric materials and methods for
manufacturing the same. 4,435,590, CI. 560-61.000.
Shanley, Robert L., II: See—
Harwood, Leopold A.; and Shanley, Robert L., II, 4.435,729, CI.
358-183.000.
Shanton, Kenneth J., to Wiggins Teape Group Limited, The. Record
material carrying a color developer composition. 4,435,004, CI.
282-27.500.
Shapiro, Justin J. Thermometer scale magnifier. 4,433,094, CI.
374-191.000.
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Nakatani, Hiroshi; Ishida, Masahide; and Yamamoto, Hachizou,
4,435,767, CI. 364-405.000.
Tagawa. Takao; and Urakawa, Toshio, 4,435,733. CI. 358-302.000.
Sharpe. Claude A.: See—
Ho, Cecil C; Sharpe, Claude A.; Butcher, Bruce A.; and Bell,
Alexander G.. 4,435,711, CI. 343-389.000.
Sheldon, William W.; and Axford, Theodore G., to Sheldon, William
W RetrievaJ^of lobsters and other objects. 4,434,572, CI. 43-6.500.
Shell Oil Company: See-
Gruff, L. B.; and Kiovsky, T. E., 4,435,187, CI. 44-63.000.
Krijnen, Wilhelmus J.; and Grotenhuis, Paulus A. M., 4,435,582, CI.
549-352.000.
Lewis, Robert M.; and Slaugh, Lynn H., 4,435,602, CI. 568-470.000.
Shelton, Charles W.: See—
Beloatc, Mickey R.; Erb, Harley E.; and Shelton, Charles W.,
4,434,896, CI. 206-621.000.
Shelton, Huey G.; and Zack, Leonard N., to Huey Company. Anti-snap
device for drafting board tilting mechanism. 4,434,721, CI. 108-4.000.
Shelvik, Bertrum S.. to Eaton Corporation. Hold-down bracket for
plug-in circuit breaker. 4,435,739, CI. 361-346.000.
Sherwin, Owen W.; See—
Chapman, John A.; and Sherwin, Owen W., 4,434,936, CI.
239-178.000.
Shevrin, Philip: See —
Ratcliffe, David J., deceased; Jones, Richard E.; Shevrin, Philip;
and Haley, Charles B., 4.435.776. CI. 364-900.000.
Shideler. Jay A.; and Berry. Robert L., to Fairchild Camera A Instru-
ment Corporation. Method of forming self-aligned lateral bipolar
transistor. 4,435,225, CI. 148-1.500.
Shiga, Motohiro: See —
Shiohau, Koki; Fujisawa, Fumio; Shiga, Motohiro; Sato, Kazuo;
Ohmori, Motoji; and Takasumi, Masakazu, 4,435,770, CI.
364-508.000.
Shimano Industrial Company Limited: See —
Nakajima, Hideki, 4,434.951, CI. 242-84. 52B.
Shimano, Keizo, 4,434,679, CI. 74-491.000.
Shimano, Keizo, to Shimano Industrial Company Limited. Speed-
change operating device for a bicycle. 4,434,679, CI. 74-491.000.
Shimauchi Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Chihara, Hiroyuki; and Kitano, Masuo, 4,435,089. CI. 368-204.000.
Shimizu. Makoto: See —
Matsumura, Hiroshi; Ohta, Yasuto; Nozaki, Teteuo; Shimizu,
Makoto; and Sugizaki, Shigeru, 4,434,657, CI. 73-304.00C.
Shimizu, Masami; and Uchidoi, Masanori, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Electrical circuit elements combination. 4,435,741. CI. 361-401.000.
Shimizu, Michimasa: See —
Ueno, Haruo; Yano, Takefumi; Inoue. Tokuji; Ikai, Shigeru; Kai,
Yoshiyuki; and Shimizu, Michimasa, 4,435,550, CI. 526-73.000.
Shimura, Takaki: See-
Mi wa, Hirohide; and Shimura, Takaki, 4,434.661, CI. 73-625.000.
Miyazaki. Junji; Miwa, Hirohide; and Shimura. Takaki, 4.434.658,
CI. 73-618.000.
Shin. Chung T.; and Geria, Navin, to Bristol-Myers Company. Anhy-
drous alcoholic antiperspirant suspension composition containing
certain aluminum or aluminum/zirconium salt glycine complexes.
4,435,382, CI. 424-66.000.
Shinagawa Refractories Co., Ltd.: See—
Yoshino, Shigeo; Zenbutsu, Tadashi; Asami, Hajime; and Irie,
Michiyuki, 4,435,215. CI. 106-84.000.
Shinji, Aoki: See —
Koichi, Yamada; Keita, Kawamura; and Shinji, Aoki, 4,435,260, CI.
204-164.000.
Shinkawa, Keiro; Noda, Masaki; and Sodeyama, Chuichi. to Hitachi.
Ltd. FET Microwave oscillator being frequency stabilized by capaci-
tive reactance micro-strip stub line. 4.435.688, CI. 331-99.000.
Shinoda, Kazuichi; and Katayama, Masayoshi, to Tokico Ltd. Detector
for use in measurement of flow speed or flow rate of a fluid. 4,434,668.
CI. 73-861.220.
Shiohata, Koki; Fujisawa. Fumio; Shiga. Motohiro; Sato. Kazuo; Oh-
mori. Motoji; and Takasumi, Masakazu, to Hitachi, Ltd. Vibration
diagnosing method and apparatus for a rotary machine. 4,435,770, CI.
364-508.000.
Shionogi ft Co., Ltd.: See-
Ogata. Maaaru; and Sato, Kosaburo, 4,435,394, CI. 424-248.500.
Shiozaki, Tomohani: See —
Horiike, Tetturo; Kuroda, Takio; and Shiozaki, Tomoharu.
4.435,340, CI. 264-4.700.
Shiraishi, Hideo: See —
Morita, Yasuyuki; Yokooku, KaUuhiko; Shiraishi, Hideo; and
Matsuura, Masahiko, 4,434,749, CI. 123-41.020.
Shirakawa, Norio: See —
Koizumi, Masuo; Shirakawa, Norio; Tomioka. Hiromi; Takeuchi,
Masaki; Okada, Masanori; Yoshimoto. Masahiro; Murakami.
Yasushi; and I wane, Yoshitaka, 4,435,202, CI. 71-76.000.
Shirase, Haruya; and Kondo, Takehisa, to Nissan Motor Co.. Ltd. EGR
Control system. 4,434.776, CI. 123-568.000.
Shock. Gerald D.: See-
Butler, John R.; Shock, Gerald D.; and Saunders. Norman J.,
4.434,927, CI. 227-9.000.
Showa Denko Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Hirokawa, Norio; Kawachi, Tsuneo; Saito, Hirothi; and Yo-
shimura, Ryoichi, 4,435,210, CI. 75-53.000.
Shroff, James R.: See—
Loev, Bernard; Jones, Howard; and Shroff, James R., 4,435,395, CI.
424-248.500.
Sias, Roy C: See—
Stokke, Olaf M.; and Sias, Roy C, 4,435,295, CI. 252-8.55D.
Sieck, Reinhard; and Brusewiu, Gerhard, to Dr. Madaus & Co. Packag-
ing container for sensitive producU. 4,434,890, CI. 206-443.000.
Siemens AG: See —
Taenzer, Jon C, 4,434,799, CI. 128-660.000.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Birkle, Siegfried; Gehring, Johann; and Stoger, Klaus, 4,435,265,
CI. 204-198.000.
Giebel, Burkhard; Moormann, Hans; and Schrader, Lothar,
4,435,789, CI. 365-203.000.
Heynisch, Hinrich, 4,435,672, CI. 315-366.000.
Oestreich, Ulrich, 4,434,610, CI. 57-294.000.
Schwabe. Ulrich; and Jacobs. Erwin. 4.434.543. CI. 29-S76.00B.
Sedtoiair, Siegfried, 4,435,848, CI. 455-327.000.
Siemens Corporation: See-
Green, Philip S., 4,434,662, CI. 73-641.000.
SIGMANKoncem: See—
Svercl, Josef; Novak, Jan; and Kalab, Zdenek. 4,434,645, CI.
72-402.000.
Sikkenga, David L., to Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Continuous
reactivation of AMS- IB-containing catalyst systems. 4,435,311, CI.
502-22.000.
Silander. Torsten, to AB Tesi. Catheter. 4,434,797, CI. 128-343.000.
Siler, Dan R.; and Trimble, Harold D., to Johnson Service Company.
Apparatus for radiographic examination of pipe welds. 4,435,829, CI.
378-60.000.
Silva. Adolfo E.: See—
Ranganathan. Ramaswami; Patmore. David J.; and Silva, Adolfo
E., 4,435,280, CI. 208-112.000.
Silver, Alexander: See—
Gu, Alston L.; and Silver, Alexander, 4,435,839, CI. 384-103.000.
Silver Seiko Ltd.: See—
Tsuzuki, Takashi, 4,434,628, CI. 66-123.000.
Simandi, Laszlo: See —
Lugosi, Gyorgy; Simay, Antal; Bodnar, Janos; Simandi, Laszlo:
and Somfai, Eva, 4,435,567, CI. 544-165.000.
Simay, Antal: See—
Lugosi, Gyorgy; Simay, Antal; Bodnar, Janos; Simandi, Laszlo;
and Somfai, Eva, 4,435,567, CI. 544-165.000.
Simig, Gyula: See—
Lempert, Karoly; Harsanvi, Kalman; Doleschall, Gabor; Homyak,
Gyula; Nyitrai, Jozsef; Zauer, Karoly; Fetter, Jozs^f; Simig,
Gyula; Visky nee Gombos, Zsuzsanna; and BarU nee Szalai,
Gizella, 4,435,322, CI. 260-239.00A.
Simm, Manfred: See—
Kuhnel, Werner; Putz, Peter; Simm, Manfred; and Spielau, Paul,
4,435,466, CI. 428-215.000.
Simon, Donald J.; and Field, Thomas R., to Jenn-Air Corporation.
Electric range surface element. 4,435,638, CI. 219-460.000.
Simon, Jacques: See —
Rougeron, Michel; and Simon, Jacques, 4,434,958, CI. 244-126.000.
Simons, Leslie H.; and Alexander, David C, to Texaco Inc. Cobalt
hydroformylation catalysts. 4,435,517, CI. 502-74.000.
Simpson, Charles H. Hydrometallurgical process for extraction of
nickel. 4,435,369, CI. 423-147.000.
Singer Company, The: See —
Davidson. Donald R.. 4.434,729, CI. 112-121.120.
Komatowski, Boleslaw. 4.434.880. CI. 192-67.00R.
Pross. John W.. Jr.. 4,435,757, CI. 364-200.000.
Russell, Angus R. T., 4,434,734, CI. 112-181.000.
Salge, Edward A.; and Horey, Leonard I., 4,434.732, CI. 112-
I58.00E.
Szostak. Jan; and Newman, Albert L., 4,434,736, CI. 112-258.000.
Weisz, Waiiam, 4,434,733, CI. 1I2.158.00A.
Siposs, George G.; and Christian, Jerry B., to DelU Medical Industries.
Variable rate syringe pump for insulin delivery. 4,435,173, CI.
609-155.000.
Sivachenko, Eugene W. Method and apparatus for severing corrugated
metal products. 4,434,638, CI. 72-130.000.
Sjoerdsma. Albert; Bey, Philippe; Juns, Michel; Gerhart. Fritz; and
Schirlin, Daniel, to Merrell Tonude et Compagnie. Fluorinated
diaminobutane derivatives. 4.435,425, CI. 424-325.000.
SKF Kugellagerfabriken GmbH: See—
Olachewski, Armin; Walter, Lothar; Brandenstein. Manfred; and
Muller, Leo. 4.434.882. CI. 192-98.000.
Walter. Lothar; Brandenstein, Manfred; and Olachewski, Armin,
4,434,640, CI. 72-348.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 41
Skinner, James R.; and Atwood, Robert G., to M.U. Engineering &
Mfg., Inc. Disc package. 4,434,891, CI. 206-444.000.
Slaugh, Lynn H.: See-
Lewis, Robert M.; and Slaugh, Lynn H.. 4.435.602, CI. 568-470.000
Slomnicki, Israel. Ozone production system. 4,434,771, CI. 123-539.000.
SMAC Acieroid: See—
Rcneault, Patrick; and Ovaert, Francis, 4,434,592, CI. 52-145.000.
Smelser, Bernard C. Water injection control valve. 4,434,748, CI. 123-
25.00L.
Smimov, Boris A.: See—
Karapetian, Igor S.; Korolkov. Ivan A.; Kapitanov, Nikolai N.;
Smimov, Boris A.; and Ivanova, Tatyana L., 4,434.796. CI.
128-335.000.
Smith, Dale A.: See-
Bellamy, David; and Smith, Dale A., 4,434,822, CI. 141-98.000.
Smith, Darrell F., Jr.: See—
Eiselstein, Herbert L.; Smith, Darrell F.. Jr.; and Clatworthy.
Edward F.. 4.435,359, CI. 419-3.000.
Smith, David W.: See-
Clark. Frederic L.; Kaflenberger. Orville A., Jr.; Paranjpe, Suresh
C; Smith, David W.; and Ames, Jack D., 4,435,718, CI.
346-75.000.
Smith, Donald J., to Communication Technology Corporation. Cable
splice housing. 4,435,612, CI. 174-92.000.
Smith, Herbert D.: See—
Knaus, Ernest; Namsick, Raymond J.; and Smith, Herbert D..
4,435,240, CI. 156-242.000.
Smith International, Inc.: See—
Garrett, William R., 4,434,863, CI. 175-321.000.
Smith. John C, to International Telephone and Telegraph Corporation
Manufacturing process for a low loss optical fiber cable. 4.435.238,
CI. 156-171.000.
Smith, Michael B., to'lStandard Oil Company. Maximizing fracture
extension in massive hydraulic fracturing. 4.434,848, CI. 166-250.000.
Smith, Peter R.; and Coleman. Charles, to Sutitrol, Inc. Method of
making an improved pyroelectric sensor. 4,434.549. CI. 29-832.000.
Smith, Raymond H. Magnetic jack. 4,434,968, CI. 254-1.000.
Smith, Richard C See-
Black, Richard W.; Kirayoglu, Erol M.; Leiter, Harold E.; and
Smith, Richard C, 4,435,031, CI. 339-17.00C.
Smith, Robert G. Tie down connector. 4,435.102, CI. 403-206.000.
Smith. Roger D.: See—
Wiatt, James G.; Calvert, James W.; Belcher, Samuel L.; and
Smith, Roger D., 4,435,146, CI. 425-534.000.
SmithKIine BeckJrnan Corporation: See —
Chow, Alfred W., 4,435,418, CI. 424-273.00B.
Snaper. Alvin A. Fluidic matrix printer. 4,435,719, CI. 346-75.000.
Snugli. Inc.: See-
Moore. Ann A., 4,434,920. CI. 224-160.000.
Societe Anonymc de Telecommunications: See —
Durand. Alain. 4.435.224. CI. 148-1.500.
Societe Anonyme dite: CERAVER: See—
Kaczerginski, Alexandre; and Willem, Michel, 4,435,615, CI.
174-189.000.
Societe Anonyme dite: Sanofl: See —
Demame, Henri; and Wagnon, Jean, 4,435,426, CI. 424-324.000.
Societe d'Assistance Technique pour Produiu Nestle S.A.: See-
Hsu, Jau Y., 4,435,435, CI. 426-557.000.
Societe Metallurgique Le Nickels-S.L.N.: See—
Cardini, Jean-Louis, 4,434.942. CI. 241-21.000.
Societe Nationale des Poudres et Explosifs: See —
Lecolier, Serge; and Raynal, Serge. 4.435,312, CI. 502-157.000.
Societe Nationale Elf Aquitaine (Production): See —
Favie, Claude; and Mercadier, Michel, 4,435,545, CI. 525-344.000.
Societe Nouvelle de Roulements: See—
Sonnerat, Claude, 4,434,985, CI. 277-37.000.
Societe Suisse pour I'lndustrie Horlogere Management Services S.A.:
See—
Jaccard, Pierre-Ernest, 4,435,090, CI. 368-320.000.
Sodeyama, Chuichi: See —
Shinkawa, Keiro; Noda, Masaki; and Sodeyama, Chuichi,
4,435,688, CI. 331-99.000.
Soes, Lucas; and Ten Berge, Eduardus F. A., to AMP Incorporated.
Connector for use in butt splicing two optical fibres. 4,435,038, CI.
350-96.210.
Solar Turbines Incorporated: See —
Wosika, Leon R., 4,435,121, CI. 413-56.000.
Soico Basel AG: See—
Laszczower, Max, 4,435,170, CI. 604-4.000.
Solomon, Robert A.; and Dellinger, John J., to Am Fab, Inc. Tilt
support for overbed table top and vertical lock assembly therefor.
4,434,722, CI. 108-8.000.
Someshwar, Ashok H.: See—
Brantingham, George L.; and Someshwar, Ashok H., 4,435,773, CI.
364-900.000.
Somezawa, Maaashi: See—
Nakajima, Kaoru; Somezawa, Masashi; Takamizawa. Minoru;
Inoue. Yoshio; and Yoshioka, Hiroshi. 4.433.485. CI. 428-694.000.
Somfai, Eva: See—
Lugosi. Gyorgy; Simay, Antal; Bodnar. Janos; Simandi, Laszlo;
and Somfai, Eva, 4,435,567, CI. 544-165.000.
Sonnerat, Claude, to Societe Nouvelle de Roulements. Gasket with
metal mounting armature rotating between coaxial parts. 4,434,985,
CI. 277-37.000.
Sonnino-Goldman, Paula: See—
Leibowitz. Mitchell J.; Kong. Ah S.; Sonnino-Goldman. Paula; and
Wolf. Peter. 4.435.409, C\. 424-266.000.
Sonobe. Hiroshi: See —
Mauumura. Hiroshi; Murakami. Fumiki; and Sonobe, Hiroshi,
4,433,594. CI. 560-205.000.
Sony Corporation: See—
Nakajima. Kaoru; Somezawa, Masashi; Takamizawa, Minoru;
Inoue, Yoshio; and Yoshioka, Hiroshi. 4.435.485, CI. 428-694,000.
Ohsawa, Kenji; Ito. Takao; Fueki. Shimetomo; Osawa, Masayuki
and Kurau, Keiji, 4,435,611, CI. 174-68.500,
Sorbier. Pierre, to Agence Nationale de Valorisation de la Recherche
(ANVAR). Process for the production of molded members from
elongated particles of wood. 4.435.347. CI, 264-1 18.000.
Souchier, Alain: See-
Gill, George; Souchier, Alain; and Dorville. Georges. 4,434,614.
CI. 60-271.000. s . . .
Sowerwine, Owen D., to Castle A Cooke Techniculture. Support
system for planting trays. 4,434,576, CI. 47-39.000.
Soyka, Ron B.: See-
Jones, James B.; and Soyka, Ron B., 4,435,095, CI. 374-194.000.
Specht, Steven J.: See—
Supelak. Lawrence S.; Specht. Steven J,; and Hills. Richard C,
4,435.487. CI. 429-70.000.
Specified Ceiling Systems: See—
McCall, Francis L., 4,434,599, CI. 52-729.000.
Spencer. Billie M.; Cady. William S.; and Zscheile, John W., Jr., to
Sperry Corporation. Coherent spread spectrum receiving apparatus.
4,435,822, CI. 375-1.000.
Sperry Corporation: See-
Campbell. Willis R,. 4.434.607. CI, 56-341,000.
Clark, John F., 4,435,707, CI. 343-5.00W.
Spencer, Billie M.; Cady, William S.; and Zscheile, John W.. Jr..
4,435,822, CI. 375-1.000.
Torok, Ernest J.; and Harvey. William A.. 4.435.041, Q.
350-162.240.
Spielau, Paul; See—
Kuhnel, Werner; Putz, Peter; Simm. Manfred; and Spielau. Paul.
4,435.466. CI. 428-215.000.
Spieth. Manfred: See—
Rumpp. Gerhard; Scholz, Dieter; and Spieth, Manfred, 4,434,859,
CI. 173-48.000.
Spilatro. Diane L.: See —
Guth. Jacob J.; Spilatro. Diane L,; and Verdicchio. Robert J..
4.435.300, CI. 252-117 000.
Sprecker, Mark A., to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Norbor-
iiyl esters and uses thereof in augmenting or enhancing the organolep-
tic properties of a consumable material and process for preparing /
same. 4,435,316, CI. 252-522.00R. >- *■ y
Spriggs, Robert G., to Automated Optic, Inc. Apparatus adapted fot
automatic or semi-automatic fabrication of ultra-precision ophthalmia
lenses, e.g.. contact lenses. 4,434.581. CI. 51-67.000.
Squaratti, Armand, to Lonza Ltd. Process for the production of 2-
amino-4-methyl-benzothiazole. 4,435,576, CI. 548-164.000,
Subler, Manfred: See—
Muller, Thomas; Schadlich, Fritz; and Subler, Manfred, 4,434.586,
CI. 51-170.0PT.
Stahl, Charles R., to General Electric Company. Closed cycle gas
turbine for gaseous production. 4,434,613, CI. 60-39.070.
Stamicarbon B.V.: See-
Evens, Georges O,, 4.435.552, CI, 526-140.000.
van de Leemput, Lambertus J. M. A.; and Nooijen, Godefridus A.
H., 4,435,314, CI. 502-154.000.
van de Leemput, Lambenus J. M. A.; Nooijen, Godefridus A. H.;
and van dcr Loo, Hendrikus W., 4,435,551, CI. 526-101.000.
Stammler, Kurt: See—
Gansert, Willi; Jakob, Gert; Ruttkowski, Lothar; Goetzke, Sieg-
fried; and Summler. Kurt, 4.435.033, CI. 339-45.00M.
Standard Oil Company: See —
Smith. Michael B.. 4.434.848. CI. 166-250 000
Standard Oil Company, (Indiana): See—
Bertolacini, Ralph J ; and Forsythe. William L., Jr.. 4,435,282, CI.
208-113.000.
Brannen. Cecil G.; and Hunt, Mack W., 4,435,301, CI. 252-33.200,
Fields: Ellis K.; and Nimry, Tayseer S., 4,435,593, CI. 560-1 19 000
Sikkenga. David L., 4.435.311. CI, 502-22.000.
Vasalos, lacovos A,. 4.435.281, CI. 208-113.000.
Wissenberg. Herman; York, Earl D.; and Porter, Darrell D.,
4,435,016, CI. 299-2.000.
Standley. Paul M., to Dayco Corporation Apparatus and method for
making flexible load-carrying cord. 4.43S.348. CI 264-174 000.
Sunkowitz. James L. Applicator gun. 4,434.939, CI. 239-345.000.
Stanley Works, The: See—
Czerwinski, Frank G.; and Rutty, Edward C. 4,434,952, CI.
242-107.000.
Whitehouse, Hugh L., 4,434,858, CI. 173-12.000.
Static, Inc.: See —
Testone, Anthony Q., 4,435,193, CI. 33-126.000.
Sutitrol, Inc.: See-
Smith. Peter R.; and Coleman. Charles, 4,434,549, CI. 29-832.000
Suttel, Raymond J.; and Niswander. James K., to United Sutes of
America, National Aeronautics and Space Administration Memory-
based parallel dau output conlroller, 4,435.781, CI 364-900,000,
SUudenrausch, Georg; and Weerth, Hans-Ernst, to Albert Handtmann
GmbH A Co, Sausage skin storage and feeder apparatus for a sausage
stufling machine. 4,434,527, CI. 17-33.000
PI 42
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6. 1984
SUufTer, Louis: See —
Ponuro, Nicholas; Pomaro, Russell; and SUufTer, Louis. 4,433,486,
CI. 429-1.000.
Steck. Edward J., to Wyoming Mineral Corporation. Barren solvent
wuh by oxidized rafTinate acid in the process of uranium extraction
from phosphoric acid. 4,435.367, CI. 423-10.000.
Steeb, Dieter C. Stacked-plate heat exchanger. 4,434,g4S, CI.
165-153.000.
Stegenga. Philip D.: See-
Wood, Denis; Thomas, John F., Jr.; Dipper, Barry; Stegenga,
Philip D.; Veltkamp, John H.; Katsma, William L.; and Norton,
Robert L., 4,435,042, CI. 350-281.000.
Stehman. Carl J.: 5w—
Fechalos, William A.; and Stehman, Carl J., 4,435,620, CI. 179-
I8.0EB.
Steinicke, Wolfgang: See —
Rayer, Peter; Krone, Hartmut; SchiessI, Alois; Steinicke, Wolf-
gang; and Trede, Wolfgang, 4.435,233, CI. 149-44.000.
Steinke, Kurt E.: See—
Hulling, Rand H., II; Peters, Rex B.; and Steinke, Kurt E.,
4.434.654. CI. 73-151.000.
Steklenski. David J.: See—
Lelental, Mark; and Steklenski, David J.. 4.435.490, CI. 430-45.000.
Stenkvist. Bjom G. Process and device for preparation of cell samples
for cytological tests. 4,435,507, CI. 435-262.000.
Stenkvist, Sven-Einar, to ASEA Aktiebolag. DC Arc furnace compo-
nent. 4,435,813. CI. 373-72.000.
Stenzel, Otto; and Flecker, Pierre, to Leybold-Heraeus GmbH. Method
and apparatus for monitoring the melting process in vacuum arc
furnaces. 4.435.818. CI. 373-104.000.
Stephen. John F.: See —
Kruse. Walter M.; and Stephen. John F., 4,435,586, CI. 549-464.000.
Stem. Warren C, to Burroughs Wellcome Co. Treatment of minimal
brain dysfunction (MBD). 4.435.449, CI. 424-330.000.
Stevens, Emsley H., to Honeywell, Inc. Threshold voluge control
network for integrated circuit field-effect trransistors. 4,435,652, CI.
307-297.000.
Stevens, Reginald W., to International Computers Limited. DaU trans-
mission systems. 4,435,705, CI. 340-825.050.
Stewan. William S.. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Control of a
system for supplying heat. 4.434,746. CI. 122-448.00R.
Stewart. William S.. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Control of a H2S
absorber. 4,435.192, CI. 55-19.000.
Sticber, Harry C: See—
Belz, Herman M.; and Stieber, Harry C, 4,435,816, CI. 373-91.000.
Stihl, Andreas: See—
Nitsehmann, Karl; Weyda, Gunther; Emmrich, Bodo; and Stimp-
fig, Karl O., 4,434,556, CI. 30-123.400.
Stiles, Theodore R.: See—
Abramson, Allen P.; and Stiles, Theodore R., 4,435.032, CI.
339-36.000.
Stimpfig, Karl O.: See—
Nitsehmann, Karl; Weyda, Gunther; Enunrich, Bodo; and Stimp-
fig, Karl O.. 4.434,556. CI. 30-123.400.
Stirling, Irene; and Clarke, Brian P., to Beecham Group Limited.
9-Deoxy-9-amino-clavulanate antibacterial agenu. 4,435,565, CI.
542-416.000.
Stockmaster, Edward F.: See-
Bean, Thomas R.; Stockmaster, Edward F.; and Whaley, George
S., 4,434,537, CI. 24-380.000.
Stoger, Klaus: See—
Birkle. Siegfried; Gehring, Johann; and Strfger, Klaus, 4,435,265,
CI. 204-198.000.
Stohr, Frank-Michael; Wild, Peter; and Nickel, Hont, to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft. Naphtholsulphonic acid compounds, their preparation
and use as coupling componenu. 4,435,334, CI. 260-501.120.
Stokke, Olaf M.; and Sias, Roy C, to Conoco Inc. Sulfonate for water-
flooding. 4.435,295. CI. 252-8.55D.
Stoll, Kurt. Cutter for flexible pipes. 4,434,555, CI. 30-92.000.
Stopar, Miha: See —
Tmkoczy. Amadej; Stopar, Miha; Filipic, Dusan; and Opeka, Joze,
4,434,798, CI. 128-421.000.
Stork, Karl: See—
Oppenlaender, Knut; Stork, Karl; Vogel, Hans-Henning; Schwartz,
Erich; and Jakob, Claus P., 4,435,298, CI. 252-34.000.
Stork PMT BV: See-
van MU, Martinus P. G., 4,434,526, CI. 17-11.000.
Stower, Reinhard, to Compur-Electronic GmbH. Centrifuge.
4,435,167, CI. 494-16.000.
Stradtmann, Gunther: See —
Buchschmid, Emil; Burkel. Rainer; Danamps, Jean; Frenznick,
Anton; and Stradtmann, Gunther, 4,435,625, CI. 200-61.220.
Straubel, Max, to Robert B<Mch GmbH. Fuel supply apparatus for
internal combustion engines. 4,434.777, CI. 123-568.000.
Strauss, Gottfried; and Schumann. Horst. to Sack Glastechnik GmbH.
Glass trimming cutter with roller conveyor. 4,434,582, CI. 51-
lOl.OOR.
Streaty, Charles E., Jr.: See—
Lehnhardt, William F.; Streaty, Charles E., Jr.; Yackel, Walter C,
Jr.; Yang, Ho S.; and Tang, Daniel K., 4,435,438, Q. 426-656.000.
Strohi, John: See-
Martin, Gordon W.; and Strohi, John, 4,435,268, CI. 204-408.000.
Strong, Hovey R., Jr.: See—
Lone, Raymond A.; and Strong, Hovey R., Jr., 4,435,758, CI.
364-200.000.
Struck, Carl-Heinz; and Schumacher, Ralf, to Dr. C. Otto A. Comp.
GmbH. Apparatus for improving the flow of gases to a combustion
chamber of a coke oven or the like. 4,435,152, Cl. 431-170.000.
Stryjewski, Walter A., to Eastman Kodak Company. Flash fusins
apparatus. 4.435,633, CI. 219-216.000.
Studsvik Energiteknik AB: See-
Johansson, Lars O., 4,435,356, CI. 376-216.000.
Sturm, Budd H., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The. Para-
nitrodiphcnylamine synthesis. 4,435,599, CI. 564-433.000.
Suchy, Milos: See—
Frater, Georg; Suchy, Milos; Wenger, Jean; and Wintemitz, Paul,
4,435,207, Cl. 71-94.000.
Suenaga, Eiichi: See —
Ban, Masatoshi; Miura. Kenji; Baba. Yutaka; Iwata. Noriyuki;
Fukui, Akira; Hori, Mikio; Fujimura, Hajime; and Suenaga,
Eiichi, 4,435,392, Cl. 424-244.000.
Suga, Michihisa: See—
Tsuzuki, Mitsuo; and Suga, Michihisa, 4,435,721, Cl. 346-14O.00R.
Sugiyama, Iwakichi; Endo, Kiyoshi; and Takaoka, Yukihisa, to MaUu-
moto Seiyaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Process for producing sili-
con isocyanate compounds. 4,435.587, CI. 156-410.000.
Sugiyama, Minoru; and Kaneko, Shinji, to Tokico Ltd. Ball joint.
4,435.101, Cl. 403-122.000. ■•
Sugizaki, Shigeru: See—
Matsumura, Hiroshi; OhU, Yasuto; Nozaki, Tctsuo; Shimizu.
Makoto; and Sugizaki, Shigeru, 4,434,657, Cl. 73-304.00C.
Suh Won America, Inc.: See —
Lee, Chong H., 4,434,894, CI. 206-526.000.
Sukejima, Hajime: See—
Nakayama, Yasuhani; Yamamoto, Kenji; KomaUuzawa, Toshiki;
Sukejima, Hajime; and Nomoto, Kazuo, 4,435,531, Cl.
524-37.000.
Sullivan, Carl M.; and Kelley, Mellis M., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber
Company, The. Process for the production of polyester copolymers.
4,435,562, CI. 528-272.000.
Sulzer Brothers Ltd.: See—
Gruber, Walter, 4,434,817, Cl. 139-429.000.
Sumimoto, Morio, to Kabushiki Kaisha Sumimoto Kagaku Kenkyusho.
Apparatus for filtration of lubricating oil for an internal combustion
engine. 4,435.287. CI. 210-131.000.
Sumitomo Chemical Co.. Ltd.: See—
Fukushima, Nobuo; Saitou, Tenio; and Hayashida, Haruo.
4,435,350, CI. 264-280.000.
Funaki, Yuji; Yoneyoshi, Yukio; Ishiguri.'Yukio; and Izumi. Kazuo,
4,435,203, CI. 71-76.000.
Noguchi, Hiroshi; Hashimoto, Shunichi; Kitamura, Shigeyoshi;
MaUuo, Takashi; Mine, Akihiko; and Kamoshita, KaUuzo,
4,435,332, Cl. 260-465.00D.
Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.: See-
Miyamoto, Yoshimi; Nakamura, Naotaka; Akaku, Fumiyoshi;
Koto, Katsumi; and Kosaka, Tsutomu, 4,435,692, Cl.
338-214.000.
Summerfield, Martin; Messina, Neale A.; and Ingram, Larry S.. to
United Sutes of America, Army. Black powder fiamespread tester.
4,434,655, Cl. 73-167.000.
Sun Microsystems, Inc.: See —
Bechtolsheim, Andreas, 4,435,792, CI. 365-230.000.
Sundahl, James G.; and Broersma, Lester V., to Bell Helmets Inc.
Bicycliste helmet with air flow and perspiration control. 4,434,514,
Cl. 2-425.000.
Sundman, Frey: See —
Niskanen, Toivo; Sundman, Frey; and Tuomaala. Jorma. 4.433.122,
Cl. 4I5-I21.00B.
Sundstrand Data Control, Inc.: See—
Hulsing, Rand H.. II; Peters, Rex B.; and Steinke, Kurt E.,
4,434.654, Cl. 73-151.000.
Sung, Rodney L.; Kaufman, Benjamin J.; and Sweeney, William M., to
Texaco Inc. Alcohol fuels containing wear-inhibiting amounts of
reaction products of amines and phosphate esters of phosphonic
acids. 4,435,186, Cl. 44.53.000.
Sunouchi, Akio: See —
Fukahori, Hidehiko; Ichiyanagi, Toshikazu; Iwashita, Tomonori;
Mashimo, Yukio; Sunouchi, Akio; and Fujino, Masahisa,
4.435,061, CI. 354-173.110.
Supelak, Lawrence S.; Specht, Steven J.; and Hills, Richard C, to
Gould Inc. Primary battery system. 4,435,487, Cl. 429-70.000.
Superior Gear Box Company: See-
Rhodes, Lawrence G.; and Carter, John W., 4.434,606, Cl.
56-106.000.
Superior Graphite Co.: See—
Goldberger, WUIiam; and Reed, A. K., 4,435,444. Cl. 427-49.000.
Superior Handling Equipment, Inc.: See—
Mosely, John F.; and Austin, Stephen R., 4,433.113. Cl.
414-347.000.
Surjaatmadja, Jim B., to Halliburton Company. Hydraulic digital step-
per actuator. 4,434,704, Cl. 91-23.000.
Surls, Joseph P., Jr.: See-
Olson, Robert S.; Surls, Joseph P., Jr.; and West, Ben F., 4,435,379,
Cl. 423-472.000.
Suyama, Tsuneo: See—
Kanazawa, TaUuo; and Suyania, Tsuneo, 4,434,892, Cl.
206-446.000.
Suzuki, Hirotsugu; Urata, Sigeru; and Okabe, Kanichi, to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. X-Ray apparatus. 4.433,830, Q.
378-197.000.
MARCH 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 43
Suzuki, Isao: See—
Ando, Hideo; and Suzuki, Isao, 4,433,343, CI. 264-22.000.
Suzuki, Kazuhiro; and Takahashi, Toshikatsu. to Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
Optical magnification enlargement type copying machine. 4,433,077,
Suzuki, Masakazu: See—
Furuichi, Shuhei; Ikeda, Toshiaki; and Suzuki, Masakazu,
4,433,747, Cl. 363-25.000.
Suzuki, Shigeo; KakuU, Atsushi; Mori, Yasuki; and Morishiu,
Hirosada, to Hitachi, Ltd. Complex type electrophotographic plate
and electrophotographic method using the same. 4,435,492, Cl.
430-58.000.
Suzuki, Toshiaki: See—
Mayumi, Kuzuaki; Fujiwara, Yoshihiro; Tokuda, Toshio; and
Suzuki, Toshiaki, 4,435,842. CI. 455-181.000.
Suzuki, Yasuo: See—
Munekau, Kenichi; Unno, Kunihiko; and Suzuki, Yasuo, 4,434,585,
Cl. 5I-166.00R.
Suzuki, Yoshihiro; Nakagawa, Shuichi; Kawamura, Nobuhisa;
Kurihara, Shuichi; Sakuma, Osamu; and Ito, Masahiro, to Yokogawa
Hokushin Electric Corp. Interactive graphic system. 4.435,772, Cl.
364-520.000.
Svenska Rotor Maskiner Aktiebolag: See—
Astberg, Ake, 4,435.139, CI. 418-201 000.
Svercl, Josef; Novak, Jan; and Kalab, Zdenek, to SIGMANKoncem.
Apparatus for the radial shaping of tubular articles. 4,434,645, Cl.
72-402.000.
Swander, Kenneth D.. to Hadady Corp. Truck-mounted brake system
for railway cars. 4,434,877, Cl. 188-52.000.
Swanson, Glen E.: and Oarstick, Larry A., to Eaton Corporation. Axle
wheel end assembly. 4,434,833, CI. 152-417.000.
Sweeney, Lawrence J, to Franklin Steel Company. Traffic delineator.
4,435,107, CI. 404-10.000.
Sweeney, William M.: See-
Sung, Rodney L.; Kaufman, Benjamin J.; and Sweeney, William
^f, 4,435,186, Cl. 44-53.000.
Sybron Corporation: See —
Phillips, Edward L., 4,435,262, Cl. 204-I8I.00C.
Syntrex Incorporated: See—
Ratcliffe, David J., deceased; Jones, Richard E.; Shevrin, Philip;
and Haley, Charles B., 4,433,776, Cl. 364-900.000.
Syva Company: See—
Zuk, Robert F.; and Litman, David J.. 4,435,504. Cl. 435-7,000.
Szosuk, Jan; and Newman, Albert L., to Singer Company, The. Strain
controlled sewing machine mount. 4,434,736, Cl. 112-258.000.
TAN Materials Research Limited: See-
Atkinson, Alan W.; and Lancaster, Janet M., 4,435,235, Cl.
156-62.200.
Tachikawa, Kyoji; and Yoshida, Yuji, to National Research Institute for
Metals. Process for producing NB3SN superconducting wires.
4,435,228, CI. 148-1 1.50Q.
Tacussel, Maurice. Process and installation for the remote control of a
premises watch radar apparatus. 4,435.699, CI. 340-539.000.
Taenzer, Jon C, to Siemens AG. Ultrasound apparatus for medical
examinations. 4,434,799, CI. 128-660.000.
Tagawa, Kenichi; and Iguchi, Takao. to Nippon Seiko Kabushiki Kai-
sha. Bearing cages for supporting and retaining roller elements in
cylindrical roller bearings. 4,435,024, Cl. 308-217.000.
Tagawa, Takao; and Urakawa, Toshio, to Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha.
Flying spot scanner for laser printer. 4,435.733, CI. 358-302.000.
Taggart, Franklin K. Golfer's stance mat. 4,434,983, CI. 273-187.00R.
Taguchi, Shinichiro; Nagao, Nobuya; and Ogihara. YuUka, to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabusniki Kaisha. Phase detector circuit. 4,433,657,
CI. 307-516.000.
Taiho Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Futamura, Kenichiro; Asada, Eiji; and Fukuoka, Tatsuhiko,
4,435,482, Cl. 428-553.000.
Taillardat, Jean: See-
Jolly, Jean; Rizzi, Primo; and Taillardat, Jean, 4,435,325, Cl.
260-397.200.
Taillet, Joseph; and Larigaldie, Serge, to Office National d'Etudes et de
Recherches Aerospatiales. Method for separating particles in suspen-
sion in a gas. 4,433,190, CI. 33-3.000.
Takacs, Istvan: See —
Banos, Zolun; Vereczkey, Endre; Kerey, Gyorgy; Rudolf, Peter;
Takacs, Istvan; Felmeri, Jozsef; and Bosiu, Gyula, 4,433,182, Cl.
23-295.00R.
Takada, Shunji: See—
OkuUu, Eiichi; Iwasaki, Nobuyuki; and Takada, Shunji, 4,433,300,
Cl. 430-419.000.
Takahara, Yoshimasa: See —
Sato, Akio; Nakajima, Kenji; Takahara, Yoshimasa; Kjima,
Shizumasa; Kuwana, Noriaki; Abe, Shinya; and Yamada, Kouzi,
4,433,423, Cl. 424-318.000,
Takahashi, Akio; Wajima, Moloyo; Nishikawa. Akio; and Morishiu,
Hirosada, to Hitachi, Ltd. Maleimide: aryloxy diamine resin composi-
tion and process for producing same. 4,433,560, Cl, 328-170.000.
Takahashi, Sankichi: See—
Okouchi, Isao; Takahashi, Sankichi; Mukai, Yasuteru; Otake, Kat-
sumoto; Sasaki, Takuya; and Miyai, Maaahiko, 4,433,285, CI.
209-250.000.
Takahashi, Tokutaro: See—
Mutai, Maaahiko; Terashima, Tsuneo; Takahuhi. Tokutaro; Ta-
naka, Ryuichiro; Kuroda, Akio; Ueyama, Sadao; and MaUu-
moto, Keuuke, 4,435,389, Cl. 424-181.000.
Takahashi, Toshikatsu: See—
Suzuki, Kazuhiro; and Takahashi, ToshikaUu, 4,433,077, Cl.
335-51.000.
Takahashi, Yukiharu, to Tokyo Shibaura Electric. Analog-digital con-
verter. 4,435,697, Cl. 340-347.0AD.
Takamizawa, Minoru: See— ,
NakiUima, Kaoru; Somezawa, Masashi; Takamizawa, Minoru;
Inoue, Yoshio; and Yoshioka, Hiroshi, 4,435,485, CI. 428-694.000.
Takaoka, Yukihisa: See—
Sugiyama, Iwakichi; Endo, Kiyoshi; and Takaoka, Yukihisa,
4,435,587, CI. 556-410.000.
Takasumi, Masakazu: See—
Shiohau, Koki; Fujisawa. Fumio; Shiga, Motohiro; Sato, Kazuo;
Ohmon, Motoji; and Takasumi, Masakazu, 4,435,770, CI.
364-508.000.
Takayanagi, Kiyoshi: See—
Ueshima, Norio; Okawa. Nobuo; and Takayanagi, Kiyoshi,
4,435,212, Cl. 75-124.000.
Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See—
Nishimura, Susumu; and Nomura, Hiroaki, 4,433,569, O.
544-280.000.
Nishimura, Susumu; and Akimoto, Hiroshi, 4,435,570, Cl.
544-280.000.
Takeda, Hiroyuki: See—
Hosoi, Kinji; Takeda, Hiroyuki; Kobayashi, Hisao; and Konaka,
Daijiro, 4,434,693, Cl. 83-71.000.
Takeda, Makoto; Miyoshi, Kazuhito; Kaitoh, Mitsumasa; and Omori,
Hiroyuki, to Mitsubishi Petrochemical Company Limited. Method
for purification of 2-methyIenegluuronitriIe. 4,435,251, CI.
203-56.000.
Taken, Michael E.: See—
Schutten. Herman P.; Sackett, Robert W.; Sedivy, Jan K.; and
Taken, Michael E.. 4.435,750, CI. 363-177.000.
Takeuchi, Hiroo; Hachiro, Nobuaki; and Miyazaki, Yoshihisa, to Nissin
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Vacuum type brake booster device for
vehicular use. 4,434,707, Cl. 9I-376.00R.
Takeuchi, Masaki: See-
Koizumi, Masuo; Shirakawa, Norio; Tomioka. Hiromi; Takeuchi,
Masaki; Okada, Masanori; Yoshimoto, Masahiro; Murakami.
Yasushi; and Iwane. Yoshiuka, 4,435.202. Cl. 71-76.000.
Tamfelt Oy AB: See-
Servo. Matti; and Vainio. Matti. 4.435.437, Cl. 428-38.000.
Tamosausku. Albert E.; and Temple, Chester S., to PPG Industries,
Inc. Aqueous peroxide emulsion for use with glass fibers. 4,435,473,
CI. 428-378.000.
Tamura, Akira, to CKD Controls Limited, Gat flow rate control
system. 4,434.933, Cl. 236-75000.
Tamura. Hiroshi: See—
Uchida, Keiichiro; Tamura, Hiroshi; Okamoto, TeUuro; and
Okutani, Shigeaki, 4,435,765, Cl 364-200.000.
Tamura, Shohei; Sano, Mizuka; Inokuchi, Hiroo; Toriumi, Koshiro; and
Sato, Naoki, to Tamura, Shohei. Method for producing a carbon
filament and derivatives thereof. 4,435,375, CI. 423-439.000.
Tamura, Yojbio: See —
SakamMnMasahisa; Tamura, Yoshio; and Sakamoto, Tadashi,
4,43^^ Cl. 369-286.000.
Tan, Yoichi, to Fuji Xerox Co„ Ltd. Sub-signal transmitting system.
4,435,804,0. 370-69.100.
Tanaka, Haruo: See —
Matsumura, Shingo; Enomoto, Hiroshi; Aoyagi, Yoshiaki; and
Tanaka, Haruo, 4,435,397, Cl. 424-250.000,
Tanaka, Ryuichiro: See —
MuUi, Masahiko; Teruhima, Tsuneo; Takahashi, Tokutaro; Ta-
naka, Ryuichiro; Kuroda, Akio; Ueyama, Sadao; and Mauu-
moto, Keisuke. 4,435,389, Cl. 424-181.000.
Tanaka, Shikei: See—
Matui. Kunihiko; and Tanaka, Shikei, 4,435,653, CI. 307-309.000,
Tanaka, Tatsuyoshi: See—
Nishi, Takao; Tanaka, Tauuypshi; and Nakagawa, Kazuyuki,
4,435,404, Cl. 424-258.000.
Tang, Daniel K.: See —
Lehnhardt, William F.; Streaty, Charles E., Jr.; Yackel, Walter C,
Jr.; Yang, Ho S.; and Tang, Daniel K., 4,435,438. Cl 426-656.000.
Tanikawa. Kowji, to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Film feeding device.
4,433,056, Cl. 354-21.000.
Tanji, Tsuneo: See—
Mauumiya. Saburo; Wuhimi, Koichi; and Tinii, Tsuneo,
4,435,276, Cl. 208-96.000.
Tarabanov, Alexandr S.: See-
Kostikov, Valery I.; Koshelcv, Jury I.; Telcgin, Vaaily D.; Taraba-
nov, Alexandr S.; Taticvskaya, Elena M.; and Kosova, Lyana I.,
4,435,538, Cl. 524-492.000.
Taratuta, Igor P.: See—
Lytaev, Rem A.; Barakaev, Khristofor F.; Taratuta, Igor P.; and
Krainov, Sergei V., 4,435,748, Cl. 363-54,000,
Tarumi, Noriyoshi; Iwahashi, Haruo; Matsunawa, Masahiko: and
Tokuna^a, Hiroshi, to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd. Ion
modulating electrode with improved transmiuion factor. 4,433,066,
Cl. 355-3.0SC.
Tarumi, Noriyoshi: See —
Scimiya, Ryubun; Inowa, Shigeru; Tarumi, Noriyothi; Matsunawa,
Masahiko; and Tokunaga, Hiroshi, 4,435,723, Cl. 346-154.000.
Tasai, Masaaki: See—
Hamane, Tokuhito; and Tasai, Maaaaki, 4,434,943, Cl. 242-7.140.
Kubota, Taduhi; Hamane, Tokuhito; and Tasai, Masaaki,
4,434,819, Cl. 140-92.100.
/
PI 44
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
^ T434S99 ^T 89-12 a» ""^ ^'*^'™ Company. AniinuniUon feeder.
Tate ft Lyie Limited: See—
Hough Leslie; Phadnis, Shashikant P.; Khan. Riaz A.; and Jenner,
Michael R., 4.435.440, CI. 426-658.000:
Tatievskaya, Elena M.; See—
Kostikov, VaJery I.; Koshelev, Jury I.; Telegin, Vastly D.; Taraba-
MSsli?^? ?2 JlS'"''^ ^'"" ^■'' ""* '^°~""' ^^"" ' •
Tatsunosuke, Masuda, to Dainippon Screen Mfg. Co., Ltd. Projected
I.'"/,'^'n5^'ii?"i-§ '"'"'*^ ""<^ apparatus for photographic enlarger.
4,435,076, CI. 355-41.000.
Taub. Stanley. Method and apparatus for cleaning disks containina
encoded mformation. 4,435,798, CI. 369-72.000.
Tawse, Ian S., to Gen-Tech, Inc. Axial air gap alternators/generators of
modular construction. 4,435,662, CI. 310-168.000.
Tazuma, James J.: See—
^''!?^-.,^SIJ!"'' ^' ■"** Tazuma, James J.. 4.435,371, d.
4ij-228.000.
Teich, Wesley W.: See—
Bowen. Robert F.; Freedman, George; Teich, Wesley W.; Martel
Thomas J.; and Eves, E. Eugene, II, 4.435,628, CI. 219-10.55M.
Tektronix, Inc.: See—
Hauler, Max W., 4,435,655, CI. 307-490.000.
Teledyne Industries, Inc.: See—
Barbeau, Dennis E., 4,434,621, CI. 60-734.000.
Telefunken electronic GmbH: See—
Nutz, Karl-Diether, 4,435,651, CI. 307-252.0UA.
Telegin, Vasily D.: See-
Kostikov, Valery I.; Koshelev, Jury I.; Telegin, VasUy D. Taraba-
^^X'^^f'^^r S.; Tatievskaya, Elena M.; and Kosova, Lyana I.,
4,435,538, CI. 524-492.000.
Tellert, Rudy: See—
^ 4 4M S^'ni^^'Y' ^^""' ^'*'*''' ^°""8a"«; "nd Tellert, Rudy,
Temple, Chester S.: See—
Tamosaial^ Albert E.; and Temple, Chester S., 4.435.473, CI.
Ten Berge, Eduardus F. A.: See—
So«. Lucas; and Ten Berge, Eduardus F. A., 4,435,038, CI.
TenEyck. John D.. to Kennecott Corp. Seamless ceramic fiber compos-
rM *i5a^ i1<*Jl^'"^'*'°*^ ^"'^ apparatus for their production. 4,435,468.
Tennessee Valley Authority: See—
P'^iejjj Alva W.; and DiUard. Ewell, F., 4,435,372, CI. 423-
Teraji, Tsutomu: See—
Kamiya, Takashi; Saito, Yoshihisa; Teraji, Tsutomu; Nakaeuti
Osamu; and Oku, Teruo. 4,435,321, CI. 260-239.00A.
Terasaki, Syuuzi: See—
Sasaki, Tohni; Terasaki, Syuuzi; Munakata, Hideo; and Ohta,
Mitsuru, 4,435,475. CI. 428-409.000.
Terashima, Masaaki: See—
'^*?!J^.^^ ***"""'• ""** Terashima, Masaaki, 4,435,362, CI.
422-56.000.
Terashima, Tsuneo: See—
Mutai, Masahiko; Terashima, Tsuneo; Takahashi, Tokutaro- Ta-
naka, Ryuichiro; Kuroda. Akio; Ueyama, Sadao; and Matsu-
moto, Keisuke, 4,435,389, CI. 424-181.000.
Terauchi, Kiyoshi; and Sakamoto, Seiichi. to Sanden Corporation
Orbiting piston type rtuid displacement apparatus with shaft bearing
and seal mechanisms. 4.435,136. CI. 418-55.000.
Terauchi. Kiyoshi. to Sanden Corporation. Scroll-type fluid compres-
sor with scroll subilizing mechanism. 4.435.137. CI. 418-55 000
Tennk. Johannes L.; and Brandon. Maurite J., to Cacaofabrik DeZaan
B.V. All^ized cocoa powders and foodstuffs containing such pow-
ders. 4.435.436. CI. 426-631.000.
Testone, Anthony Q., to Static, Inc. Filter unit and ionizing unit combi-
nation. 4,435,195, CI. 55-126.000.
Texaco Inc.: See— •
Carley. Eton A.; Witte, Arnold C, Jr.; Green, WUliam B.; and
Doerr. Kermit W,, 4.435.299. CI. 252-41.000.
Cuscurida, Michael. 4.435,527. CI. 521-173.000
^>Gue Michael G.; and Valone, Frederick W., 4,435,361, CI.
^^^^'iJfZ' Richard J. G.; and Rice, Doris M., 4,435,349, CI.
"'.^I^'-,,^^""' ^^' *"<* ^'"S' Donald S., 4,434,851, CI.
100-272.000.
McCoy, David R., 4.434,850, CI. 166-267.000
''4,454,8?2°a'li6-273.'oSS' "'^""^ ''' "^ ^"''' "''' »•
^"2^'^^ib^'* "' *"** Alexander, David C. 4.435,517. CI.
^"vf ' f 4?5"!86^ci'm^'''^' ^"J*™" ^' ■™* Sweeney, WUliam
Texas Instruments Incorporated: See—
Bellay, Jeffrey D.; Thaden, Robert C; Hayn, John W.; and Mc-
Donough, Kevm C, 4,435,763, CI. 364-200.000.
^i'^SJl^^^'*^ ^ ' *"** Someshwar, Ashok H., 4,435.775. CI.
3o4- 900.000.
Chapman, Richard A., 4,435,785, CI. 365-147.000.
Ho, Cecil C; Sharpe. Claude A.; Butcher, Bruce A.; and Bell
Alexander G., 4,435,71 1, d. 343-389.000.
KiUgawa, Norihisa; and Asahi, Hiroji, 4.435,788, CI. 365-185.000.
^'^^M^^'**' *"** ^''«'' R»ch"d G., 4.4H930. CI.
22o-l 1 6.000.
Winkelman, Wayne, 4.435.752. CI. 364-200.000.
Textilma AG: See—
Pfrommer, Bruno, 4.434,627, CI. 66-120.000.
Thaden, Robert C: See—
Bellay, Jeffrey D.; Thaden, Robert C; Hayn, John W.; and Mc-
Donough, Kevm C, 4,435,763, CI. 364-200.000.
Thaker, Gautam H.: See—
^'iX!?',.'^" ^■'' *"<* Tljaker, Gautam H., 4.435.823. CI.
375-14.000.
Thakkar, Narendra C, to International Jensen Incorporated Fade
control circuit for auxiliary amplifier. 4,435,833, CI. 381-109 000
Theiler, Richard F., to Armour Food Company. Method for inhibiting
nitrosamine formation and eliminating surface charring during meat
cooking. 4,435,433, CI. 426-266.000.
Thieler, Wolfgang: See—
^ 4.4M 8^T a'f Mi'ST' ™*'*'' ^°"^^* *"** '^*"*"' '^"**>''
Thiokol Corporation: See—
Bolner, Thomas E., 4.435.023, CI. 308-2.00R.
"^4^67? a.?23-?35'SS" Corporation. Rms voluge controller.
Thomas. Daniel W.: See—
^^2%^^ P; «nd Thomas, Daniel W., 4,435,002. a.
Thomas Industries Inc.: See —
Gnibbs. Calvin E., 4,435,749, Q. 363-58.000.
Thomas, John F., Jr.: See
Wood. Denis; Thomas, John F., Jr.; Dipper, Barry; Stegenga,
Phihp D.; Veltkamp, John H.; Katsma, William L.; and Norton^
RobertL., 4,435,042, CI. 350-281.000.
Thomas, Maryvonne; and Grosbois, Jean, to Rhone-Poulenc Industries.
Cpm^'^ns based on aluminum hydroxychlorides. 4,435,308. CI.
Thomas, Richard D.: See—
^*???'J'*'"'P "^'^ HaJlmark, Billy B.; Thomas, Richard D.; and
Wofford, Benjamin G., 4,434.895. CI. 206-554.000.
Thomas, Thomas J.: See—
Hoguet, Robert G.; Kalz, Dietmar; Thomas, Thomas J.; Whetsell,
Henry T.; Wolff, Joachim; Nonn, Konrad; and Wolf, Karl-Heinz,
4,435,181, CI. 8-527.000.
Thompson, Gerhard R.: See—
Kaufman, Dan R.; and Thompson. Gerhard R., 4.435.782, CI.
364-716.000.
Thompson, John K.: See—
Gargrave, Robert J.; Thompson, John K.; and Comstock, James F..
4,434.644. CI. 72-387.000.
Thompson, Robert B.: See-
Peterson, William E.; and Thompson, Robert B., 4,434,663, CI.
73-643.000.
Thormer, Joachim; Bertram, Hans H.; Benn, Otto; and Humik, Helmut,
to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Use of zinc salu of mercaptoben-
zimidazole and dithiophosphoric acid esters for the preparation of
nitnle rubber/polyvinyl chloride mixtures. 4,435,532, CI. 524-92.000.
Thomber, Craig W.: See-
Blackburn, Thomas P.; Cox, Barry; Guildford, Allen J.; Le Count.
David J.; Pearce, Robert J.; and Thomber. Craig W., 4,435,405,
CI. 424-258.000.
Throckmorton. Morford C; and Lai, Joginder, to Goodyear Tire ft
Rubber Company, The. Process for nonaqueous dispersion polymeri-
zation of butadiene in the presence of carbonylated polymeric dis-
persing agents. 4.435.553. CI. 526-201.000.
Tickle. Andrew C. to Fairchild Camera and Instrument Corporation.
Self-refreshing memory cell. 4,435,786, CI. 365-154.000.
Tickle. Andrew C; and Vora. Madhukar B., to Fairchild Camera and
Instrument Corporation. High speed, nonvolatile, electrically eras-
able memory cell and system. 4,435,790, CI. 365-218.000.
Tiefenbacher, Hubert: See—
Hoppe, Peter P.; Schneider, Joachim U.; Schulz, Bemhard; and
Tiefenbacher, Hubert, 4,435,427, CI. 424-356.000.
Till, Reinhard: See—
Gockler, Heinz; TUI, Reinhard; and Schenk, Heinrich, 4,435,773,
CI. 364-724.000.
Timex Corporation: See—
Dorfman, Leonard M., 4,435,088, CI. 368-88.000.
Tmim, Horst; and Kruger, H. Eckard, to Blaupunkt-Werke GmbH.
Automobile radio and Upe cassette switching apparatus. 4,435.845.
CI. 455-228.000. e kk- . . ^,
TMC Corporation: See —
Nitschko, Theodor, 4,434,997, CI. 280-625.000.
Toja. Emilio; Omodei-Sale', Amedeo; and Selva, Domenica, to Gruppo
Lepetit S.p.A. Antiinflammatory 3H-naphtho[l,2-d]iniidazoles.
4.435,417, CI. 424-273.00B. h i . j u««,ic»
Tokico Ltd.: See—
Aono, Masami, 4,435,020, CI. 303-6.00C.
Hayashida, Yoshihiro, 4,435,019, CI. 303-6.00A.
Ikeda, Junichi; Ohtani, Iwao; Utsumi, Noriyuki; and Nojima, Shini-
chi, 4,435,120, CI. 414-735.000.
Shinoda, fKazuichi; and KaUyama. Masayothi. 4.434.668. Q.
73-861.220.
Sugiyama, Minoru; and Kaneko. Shinji. 4.435.101. Q. 403-122.000.
Tokuda, Toshio: See—
Mayumi, Kuzuaki; Fujiwara, Yoshihiro; Tokuda, Toshio; and
Suzuki, Toshiaki, 4,435,842, CI. 455-181.000.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 45
Tokunaga, Hiroshi: See—
Seimiya, Ryubun; Inowa, Shigeni; Tarumi, Noriyoshi; MaUunawa,
Masahiko; and Tokunaga, Hiroshi, 4,435,723, CI. 346-154.000.
Tarumi, Noriyoshi; Iwahashi, Haruo; Mateunawa, Masahiko; and
Tokunaga, Hiroshi, 4,435,066, CI. 355-3.0SC.
Tokyo Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Sakura, Yasuhiro, 4,434,9 1 1 , CI. 22 1 -2.000.
Tokyo Kogaku Kikai Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Nunokawa. Kazuo. 4.435.051, CI. 351-208.000.
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Ando, Hideo; and Suzuki, Isao, 4,435.343, CI. 264-22.000.
Heki, Hideaki, 4,435,644, CI. 250-435.000.
Ikeda, Yoshio, 4.434.630. CI. 68-18.00F.
Komeya, KaUutoshi; Tsuge, Akihiko; and Inoue, Hiroshi,
4,435,513, CI. 501-96.000.
Matui. Kunihiko; and Tanaka, Shikei, 4,435,653, CI. 307-309.000
Nagao, Nobuya; and Sakai, Teturou, 4,435,725, CI. 358-36.000.
Ochii. Kiyofumi, 4,435,793, CI. 365-233.000.
Suzuki. Hirotsugu; UraU, Sigeni; and Okabe, Kanichi. 4,435,830,
CI. 378-197.000.
Taguchi, Shinichiro; Nagao, Nobuya; and Oeihara, Yutaka.
4.435,657, CI. 307-516.000.
Tokyo Shibaura Electric: See—
Takahashi, Yukiharu, 4,435,697, CI. 340-347.0AD.
Tokyo Tatsuno Co., Ltd.: See—
Mattumura, Hiroshi; Ohta, Yasuto; Nozaki, TeUuo; Shimizu,
Makoto; and Sugizaki, Shigeni, 4,434,657, CI. 73-304.00C.
Tom McGuane Industries, Inc.: See—
Ludwig. George C, 4,434,761, CI. 123-383.000.
Tomalia, Donald A.; Wilson, Larry R.; and Conklin, Jerry R., to Dow
Chemical Company, The. Branched polyamidoamines. 4.435,548, CI.
525-451.000.
Tomioka, Hiromi: See —
Koizumi. Masuo; Shirakawa, Norio; Tomioka, Hiromi; Takeuchi.
Masaki; Okada. Masanori; Yoshimoto, Masahiro; Murakami,
Yasushi; and Iwane, Yoshiuka, 4,435,202, CI. 71-76.000.
Tomooka, Keiji, to Hitachi, Ltd. Clock signal extracting circuit.
4.435.825, CI. 375-113.000.
Tompkins, John W. Armored cattle guard. 4,434.975, CI. 256-17.000.
Tomson, James M., to General Electric Company. Method for assem-
bling dynamoelectric machine end shield parts. 4,434,545, CI.
29-596.000.
Tomuro, Yasuta, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Phase inverter
circuit. 4,435,656, CI. 307-513.000.
Toriumi, Koshiro: See—
Tamura, Shohei; Sano, Mizuka; Inokuchi, Hiroo; Toriumi, Ko-
shiro; and Sato, Naoki, 4,435,375, CI. 423-439.000.
Torek, Ernest J.; and Harvey, William A., to Sperry Corporation.
Chromatic aberration correction in a multiwavelength light beam
deflection system. 4,435,041, CI. 350-162.240.
TorretU, Roberto: See—
Ruscitti, Tomaso; Albini. Giovanni; TorretU, Roberto; and Incerti
Baldi, Andrea, 4,434.916, CI. 222-321.000.
Tower Systems, Inc.: See—
Kragh, Loren G., 4,435,339, CI. 261-153.000.
Townsend, Peter K.: See—
Abramson, Edward A.; and Townsend, Peter K., 4,435,037, CI.
350-96.200.
Toy, Stanley A. Retrievable boat trailer. 4,434,995, CI. 280-414.100.
Toyo Engineering Corporation: See—
Matsumiya, Saburo; Washimi, Koichi; and Tanji, Tsuneo,
4,435,276, CI. 208-96.000.
Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Morita, Yasuyuki; Yokooku, Katsuhiko; Shiraishi, Hideo; and
Mateuura, Masahiko, 4,434,749, CI. 123-41.020.
Toyo Rubber Industry Co., Ltd., TherSee^
Uemura, Yukihisa, 4,434,831, CI. 1 52-356^0ORr-.
Toyoda Koki Kabushiki Kaisha: See— ^ j
Munekata, Kenichi; Unno, Kunihiko; and Suzuki, YaWo, 4,434,585,
CI. 51-166.00R.
Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Hara, Kiyoshi; Kojima. Yasufumi; and Nabeta, Teiichi. 4,434,932,
CI. 236-49.000.
lezuka, Isamu; and Nakano, Kazuo, 4,434,759, CI. 123-325.000.
MaUuoka, Hiroki; Kato, Yuichi; and IwaU, Minoru, 4,434,766, CI.
123-472.000.
Morita, Akiyoshi; and Sato, Mitsuyoshi, 4.435,142. CI. 425-145.000.
Yoshimura, Junjiro; Yamada, Kenji; and Obata, Haruyuki,
4,434,775. CI. 123-564.000.
Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Chiba, Masakazu; and Matsuoka, Fumio, 4,435,000, CI.
280-806.000.
Kobayashi,^ Nobuyuki; and Itoh, Hiroshi, 4,434,760, CI.
123-339.006.
Tractel. S.A.: See—
Desplats. Andre, 4,434,973, CI. 254-344.000.
Traeger, Joseph P. Heating furnace. 4,434,782, CI. 126-77.000.
Trede, Wolfgang: See—
Rayer, Peter; Krone, Hartmut; Schiessl, Alois; Steinicke, Wolf-
gang; and Trede, Wolfgang, 4,435,233, CI. 149-44.000.
Trefilarbed Drahtwerk Koln GmbH: See—
Hartmann, Helmut, 4,434,608, CI. 57-58.520.
Trenkler, George; and Delagi, Richard G., to Texas InstrumenU Incor-
porated. Process for producing reinforced structural articles and
articles produced thereby. 4,434,930, CI. 228-118.000.
Tri Tool Inc.: See-
Nail, Uwson H.; and Miller, Richard, 4,434,689, CI. 82-4.00C.
Trimble, Harold D.: See—
Siler, Dan R.; and Trimble, Harold D., 4,435,829, CI. 378-60.000.
Trincia, Richard. Screwdriver with handle for storing biu. 4.434.828,
CI. 145-62.000.
Tmkoczy. Amadej; Stopar. Miha; Filipic, Dusan; and Opeka, Joze, to
Oorenje Tovama Gospodinjske Opreme N.Sol.O Velenj. Control
circuit of a functional and therapeutic stimulator. 4,434,798, CI.
128-421.000.
Trotman, Helen H.; and Trotman, Herbert H. Underbody cushioning
and ventilating structure and general utility formed plastic sheet.
4,435,015, CI. 297-453.000.
Trotman, Herbert H.: See—
Trotman, Helen H.; and Trotman, Herbert H., 4,435,015, CI.
297-453.000.
Trottier, Jean-Pierre; and Jeandin, Michel, to A.R MINES.; and
S.N.E.C.M. A. Method of manufacturing metal pieces by casting and
sintering of a metal alloy powder. 4,435,360. CI. 419-49.000.
Tsan^, Won-Tien; and van der Ziel, Jan P.. to Bell Telephone Ubora-
tones. Incorporated. Passively mode locked laser having a uturable
absorber. 4,435.809, CI. 372-49.000.
Tschudy, Donald B ; and Morrow, Charles R., to Hoover Company,
The. Power transmission for a cleaner 4,434,865, CI. 18O-19.00H.
Tsolis. Alexandres K.; and Mikroyannidis. loannis A. 4-Hydroxy.5.
(substituted phosphinyl)ethyleneureas. 4,435.533iCl. 524-106.000.
Tsoukalas. Skevos N.; and Andros. John H. Chemical formulation for
reclaiming silk screens. 4,435.305. CI. 252-158.000.
Tsuchida, Naoki: See—
Kazuu. Hisashi; Kawai. Yasunari; and Tsuchida, Naoki, 4,434,755,
CI. 123-195.00C.
Tsuge, Akihiko: See—
Komeya, KaUutoshi; Tsuge, Akihiko; and Inoue, Hiroshi,
4,435,513, CI. 501-96.000.
Tsuji, Hideakira; Yamamoto. Shinjiro; Nakagami, Kazuto; Honda,
Takeo; Fujii. Katsutoshi; Kobayashi, Takashi; Obau. Tokio; Kojima.
Mikio; and Akiyoshi, Yuji, to Sankyo Company. Limited; and Ube
Industries, Limited. Aminopyrimidinc derivatives, processes for their
preparation, and fungicidal, insecticidai and acaricidal compositions
containing them. 4,435.402, CI. 424-251.000.
Tsukada, Toshiji; and Morinaga, Kazuo, to Ricoh Co., Ltd. Optical
exposure unit for electrophotographic printing device. 4.435,064, CI.
Tsuzuki. Mitsuo; and Suga, Michihisa, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.
Print head for an on-demand type ink-jet printer. 4,435,721, CI.
Tsuzuki, Takashi, to Stiver Seiko Ltd. Knitting needle niembly.
4,434,628, CI. 66-123.000.
Tummers, Paul J. H.: See—
de Putter, Jan A.; and Tummers, Paul J. H„ 4,435,493, CI.
430-87.000.
Tuomaala, Jorma: See—
Niskanen, Toivo; Sundman, Frey; and Tuomaala, Jorma, 4,435.122,
CI. 415-121.00B.
Tyler, Derek E.: See-
Winter, Joseph; Dantzig. Jonathan A.; and Tyler, Derek E..
4,434,837, CI. 164-468.000.
Tyszkiewicz, Theodore J.: See—
Boden. Richard M.; Hanna, Marie R.; and Tyszkiewicz. Theodore
J.. 4,435.428, CI. 426-3.000.
Ube Industries. Limited: See—
Tsuji. Hideakira; Yamamoto, Shinjiro; Nakagami, Kazuto; Honda,
Takeo; Fujii, KaUutoshi; Kobayashi. Takashi; Obata. Tokio;
Kojima, Mikio; and Akiyoshi, Yuji, 4,435,402, CI. 424-251.000.
Ueno, Haruo; Yano, Takcfumi; Inoue. Tokuji; Ikai. Shigeni; Kai,
Yoshiyuki; and Shimizu. Michimasa, 4,435,550, CI. 526-73.000.
Uchida, Keiichiro; Tamura, Hiroshi; Okamoto, TeUuro; and Okutani,
Shigeaki, to FujiUu Limited. Bank interleaved vector processor
having a fixed relationship between start timing signals. 4.435.765, CI.
364-200.000.
Uchidoi. Masanori: See—
Shimizu, Masami; and Uchidoi, Masanori, 4,435,741, CI.
361-401.000.
Uchimura, Kazuo: See — f
Midorikawa, Akira; Kojima, Kenji; Aid Uchimura, Kazuo,
4,435,074, CI. 355-15.000.
Ueda, Toshitaka: See—
Yoshii, Tsuneo; Ueda. Toshitaka; and Kuroda. Tsukasa, 4,435,522,
CI. 502-319.000.
Uemura, Shigehiro: See—
Sakitani, KaUumi; Uemura, Shigehiro; and Yajima, Ryuzaburo,
4,434,844, CI. 165- 151. flbO.
Uemura, Yukihisa, to Toyo Rubber Industry Co., Ltd., The. Tubeleu
tires for trucks and buses. 4,434,831, CI. 152-356.00R.
Ueno, Haruo; Yano, Takefumi; Inoue, Tokuji; Ikai, Shigeni; Kai, Yo-
shiyuki; and Shimizu, Michimasa, to UBE Industries, Ltd. Method
for polymerizing a-olefin. 4,435,550, CI. 526-73.000.
Ueshima, Norio; Okawa, Nobuo; and Takayanagi, Kiyoahi, to
Furukawa Electric Company Ltd., The. High permeability alloy.
4,435,212. CI. 75-124.000.
Ueyama, Sadao: See—
Mutai, Masahiko; Terashima, Tsuneo; Takahashi, Tokutaro; Ta-
naka, Ryuichiro; Kuroda, Akio; Ueyama, Sadiao; and MaUu-
moto, Keisuke, 4,435,389, CI. 424-181.000.
PI 46
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
(
UMC Industries, Inc.: See-
Hunt, James W.; and Johnson, Raymond A., 4,434,931, CI.
232-15.000.
Umemura, Kazuhiro: See —
Asada, Akihiro; Umemura, Kazuhiro; Saito, Tadashi; and Sampei,
Tohru, 4.435,832, CI. 381-34.000.
Umesaici, Shigeo: See —
Otobe. Yutaka; Yamato, Akihiro; and Umesaki, Shigeo, 4,434.769,
CI. 123^93.000.
Union Carbide Corporation: See —
Barber, Flavil, Jr.; Karam, Emmanuel E.; Dunaway, Richard- and
Rogers, Ray L.. 4.435,738. CI. 361-321.000.
Belz, Herman M.; and Stieber, Harry C. 4.435.816, CI. 373-91.000.
D'Silva, Themistocles D. J., 4.435.421, CI. 424-277.000.
Union Oil Company of California: See—
Deering. Roland F.; and Duir. John H.. 4,435,271, CI. 208-1 1. OOR.
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland. The Secretary
of Sute for Industry in Her Britanitic Majesty's Government of the:
See—
Wood. Jill E. G.. 4.434.651. CI. 73-85.000.
United Sutes Gypsum Company: See—
Baehr. Donald O., 4,435,183, CI. 23-293.00R.
United Sutes of America
Air Force: See —
Hasinger, Siegfried H.; Howard, James M.; and Miller, David K.,
4,435.810, CI. 372-58.000.
Army: See —
Comeyne. Robert G.. 4.434,560. CI. 33-241.000.
Mariani, Elio; and Ballato. Arthur. 4.435.441, CI. 427-10.000.
McDowell, Hunter L., 4.435.689. CI. 333-8 l.OOA.
Mon, George, 4.434.813. CI. 137-829.000.
Fetito. Ferdinand C; and Klauber. Gerald, 4,435,6^, CI.
313-388.000.
Rozner. Marvin J.; and Chapman, Arthur S., 4,434,702, CI.
89.36.00L.
Summerfield, Martin; Messina, Neale A.; and Ingram, Larry S..
4,434.655. CI. 73-167.000.
Energy: See —
August, Charles; «nd Myers, Harry J., 4,434,667, CI. 73-861.120.
Korenko, Michael K., 4,435,231, CI. I48-12.0EA.
Michaels, Jennifer E.; Michaels, Thomas E.; and Mech, Stephen
J., Jr., 4.434,660, CI. 73-622.000.
Health and Human Services: See—
Rapoport, Henry; Weller. Dwight D.; and Cless, Richard D..
4,435,572, CI. 546-228.000.
Zierdt. Charles H., 4,435.505. CI. 435-34.000.
Interior: See —
Reimers. George W.; and Khalafalla, Sanaa E., 4,435,302, CI.
252-62.510.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration: See—
Kurtz, George W.; and Bankston, Ben F., 4,434,659, CI.
73-620.000.
Neugebauer. Marcia M.; Clay, Douglas R.; Goldstein, Bruce E.;
and Goldstein. Raymond. 4.435.642, CI. 250-296.000.
Suttel. Raymond J.; and Niswander, James K., 4,435,781, CI.
364-900.000.
National Security Agency: See—
Williams, Richard P.. 4.435.783, CI. 365-5.000.
Navy: See —
Butler, John R.; Shock, Gerald D.; and Saunders, Norman J.,
4,434,927, CI. 227-9.000.
Erickson, Lawrence F., 4,434,717, CI. 102-210.000.
Fried. Lawrence, 4,435,045, CI. 350-310.000.
Given. George R.. Jr.. 4.434,855, CI. 169-37.000.
Woods, Robert L., 4,434,812, CI. 137-829.000.
U.S. Philips Corporation: See—
Boudault, Robert; and Pouzoullic. Gerard, 4,435,682, CI.
329-107.000.
Breed, Dirk J.; Van Bakel, B*mardus A. H.; Voermans, Antonius
B.; and Robertson. John M., 4.435,484, CI. 428-693.000.
Claasen, Theodoor A. C. M.; and Mecklenbrauker, Wolfgang F.
G., 4.435.774, CI. 364-726.000.
Eckert, Wolfgang; Holtkamp, Bemd; and Kilian, Ernst A.,
4,435,685. CI. 330-261.000.
Joormann, Hendrik J. M.; Verweii, Henrik: and Haisma. Jan.
4,435,200, CI. 65-64.000.
Kness, Werner, 4.434,553. CI. 30-34.100.
Raven, Johannes G.; and Annegam, Marcellinus J. J. C. 4,435,728,
CI. 358-140.000.
Schoenmakers, Johannes J. M., 4,434,955. CI. 242-199.000.
Segers, Marinus T. M.; Niessen. Comelis; and Kuiper, Krijn,
4,435,806. CI. 371-25.000.
Withers, Richard B., 4,435,462, CI. 428-156.000.
U.S. Product Development Company: Ser-^^
Adell, Robert, 4,434.598. CI. 52-716.000.
United Technologies Corporation: See —
Hamer. Kermit I.; Patrick, John P.; and Kos. Joseph M., 4.435,647,
CI. 290^.000.
Levine, Richard, 4,435,123, CI. 416-95.000.
Prewo, Karl M.; and Brennan, John J., 4,435,455, CI. 428-36.000.
Universal Instruments Corporation: See—
Yager. Glen E., 4,434.887, CI. 198-391.000.
Universal Thread Grinding Company: See—
Linley. Francis M.. Jr.. 4,434,677, CI. 74-409.000.
University of Nebraska, The Board of Regents of the: See-
Kumar. Pullatikurthi P.. 4,434,789. CI. 128-1.200.
University of Pittsburgh: See—
Gunduz. Nurten N.; and Gunduz, Dincer H., 4,435,063, Q.
354-315.000.
Unno. Kunihiko: See—
Munekata, Kenichi; Unno. Kunihiko; and Suzuki. Yasuo. 4.434,585,
CI. 51-166.00R.
UOP Inc.: See—
Imai, Tamoteu, 4,435,607. CI. 585-443.000.
Upeslacis, Janis: See —
Schaub, Robert E.; Upeslacis, Janis; and Bernstein. Seymour.
4.435.387. CI. 424-180.000.
Urakawa. Toshio: See—
Tagawa. Takao; and Urakawa, Toshio. 4.435.733, CI. 358-302.000.
Urano, Susumu: See —
Kuno, Akira; Mateumoto, Muneaki; Numata, Koji; and Urano.
Susumu. 4.435,760, CI. 364-444.000.
Urata, Sigeru: See—
Suzuki. Hirotsugu; Urata, Sigeru; and Okabe. Kanichi, 4.435,830,
Usry, Gerald O., to General Electric Company. Through fault pressure
filter for fault pressure relay. 4.434.814, CI. 138-44.000.
USS Engineers and ConsultanU, Inc.: See—
Cappelli, Romano, 4.434,540. CI. 29-402.110.
USV Pharmaceutical Corporation: See —
Leibowitz. Mitchell J.; Kong. Ah S.; Sonnino-Goldman, Paula and
Wolf, Peter, 4,435,409, CI. 424-266.000.
Loev, Bernard; Jones, Howard; and Shroff, James R., 4,435.395. CI.
424-248.500.
Uteumi. Noriyuki: See—
Ikeda. Junichi; Ohtani, Iwao; Utsumi, Noriyuki; and Nojima, Shini-
chi, 4,435,120, CI. 414-735.000.
Vaal Reefs Exploration and Mining Company Limited: See—
McKechnie, Ronald M. K., 4,434,876, CI. 187-95.000.
Vainio, Matti: See-
Servo, Matti; and Vainio, Matti, 4,435,457. CI. 428-58.000.
Valentine. Michael J. Telephone guard device. 4.435.623. CI. 179-
189.00R.
Valeo, Societe Anonyme: See—
Bertin, Patrice, 4,434,706, CI. 9I-375.00A.
Valko, Joseph T., to PPG Industries, Inc. /3-Hydroxy urethane low
temperature curing agents. 4,435,559, CI. 528-73.000.
Valmont Industries, Inc.: See-
Chapman, John A.; and Sherwin, Owen W.. 4,434,936, Q.
239-178.000.
Valone. Frederick W.: See—
DaGue. Michael G.; and Valone, Frederick W., 4,435,361, CI.
422-12.000.
Vamco Machine & Tool, Inc.: See—
Varisco, Mario, 4.434.924. CI. 226-120.000.
Van Dam Machine Corporation of America: See —
Fardin. Carlos, 4,435,114, CI. 414-330.000.
Van Bakel, Bemardus A. H.: See-
Breed, Dirk J.; Van Bakel, Bemardus A. H.; Voermans, Antonius
B.; and Robertson, John M., 4,435,484, CI. 428-693.000.
Van Deberg, Walter H. Robotic manipulator. 4,435.116. CI.
414-728.000.
van de Leemput. Lambertus J. M. A.; and Nooijen, Godefridus A. H.,
to Stamicarbon B.V. Process of preparing a polymerization catalyst
and preparation of ethylene polymers with this catalyst. 4,435.3 14, CI.
502-154.000.
van de Leemput, Lambertus J. M. A.; Nooijen, Godefridus A. H.; and
van der Loo. Hendrikus W.. to Stamicarbon B.V. Process for the
polymerization or copolymerization of ethylene with an improved
supported chromium oxide type catalyst. 4,435,551, CI. 526-101.000.
Vanderburg, Ralph W., to Axelson, Inc. Valve self-relieving seate.
4.434.967. CI. 251-328.000.
van der Loo. Hendrikus W.: See-
van de Leemput. Lambertus J. M. A.; Nooijen. Godefridus A. H.;
and van der Loo. Hendrikus W.. 4.435.551. CI. 526-101.000.
van der Ziel, Jan P.: See—
Tsang. Won-Tien; and van der Ziel, Jan P., 4,435,809, CI.
372-49.000.
Vandigriff, John F. Automotive control circuit. 4,435,649, CI. 307-
lO.OAT.
Vanier. Noel R.. to Eastman Kodak Company. Use of ketal blocked
quinones to reduce post-process D-min increase in positive redox
dye-releasing image transfer systems. 4.435.502. CI. 430-489.000.
Van Linthout. Luc K.: See—
de Brabander. Louis F.; and Van Linthout. Luc K.. 4,435,078, CI.
356-121.000.
van Mil, Martinus P. G., to Stork PMT BV. Device for separating and
processing the gizzards of slaughtered poultry. 4,434,526, CI.
17-11.000.
Vann, Roy R.; Ribble, George W.; and George, R. Flint, to Geo Vann,
Inc. Pressure actuated vent assembly for slanted wellbores. 4,434,854,
CI. 166-386.000.
Van Patten, Frederic D. Viewing apparatus for a chimney. 4,434,784,
CI. 126-312.000.
Van Schaik, Herman: See—
Brugman, Martin; and Van Schaik, Herman, 4,434,885, Q.
198-388.000.
Varisco, Mario, to Vamco Machine & Tool, Inc. Dual driven feed rolls
for a punch press. 4.434.924. CI. 226-120.000.
Varma, Ravi K., to E. R. Squibb A Sons, Inc. Intermediates useful in the
preparation of 17,17-bis(substituted thio)andro8tenes. 4,435,326, CI.
260-397.300.
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 47
Varrasso, Eugene C, to Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation. Cur-
rent distribution for glass-melting furnaces. 4,435,81 1, CI. 373-39.000.
VAS Corporation: See—
Hedberg, David J.; and Nilsson, C. Gary, 4,435,734, CI.
358-335.000.
Vasalos, lacovos A., to Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Catalytic
cracking with reduced emission of noxious gas. 4,435,281, CI.
208-113.000.
Vazquez, Gonzalo; and Akkerman, Neil H., to AVA International
Corporation. Flow controlling apparatus. 4,434.847, CI. 166-1 17.500.
Veazey, Richard L.; and Pennington, B. Timothy, to Cities Service Co.
Novel catalyst composition. 4,435,519. CI. 502-107.000.
VEB Kombinat Textima: See—
Krauss, Theo; Herrmann, Ludwig; and Berger. Konrad, 4,434,566,
CI. 38-8.000.
Veltkamp, John H.: See-
Wood, Denis; Thomas, John F., Jr.; Dipper, Barry; Stegenga,
Philip D.; Veltkamp, John H.; Katsma, William L.; and Norton,
Robert L., 4,435,042, CI. 350-281.000.
Venture Innovations, Inc.: See-
House, Roy F., 4,435,217, CI. 106-171.000.
House, Roy F., 4,435,309, CI. 252-314.000.
House, Roy F., 4,435,564, CI. 536-87.000.
Verdicchio, Robert J.: See —
Guth, Jacob J.; Spilatro, Diane L.; and Verdicchio, Robert J.,
4,435,300. CI. 252-117.000.
Verduijn, Johannes P.: See—
Koetsier, Wicher T.; and Verduijn, Johannes P., 4,435,608. CI.
585-480.000.
Vereczkey, Endre: See—
Banos, Zoltan; Vereczkey, Endre; Kcrey, Gyorgy; Rudolf, Peter;
Takacs, Istvan; Felmeri, Jozsef; and Bosiu, Gyula, 4,435,182, CI.
23-295.00R.
Vemay Laboratories, Inc.: See-
Atkinson, Gordon E., 4,434,810, CI. 137-493.000.
Versace, Richard W.: See—
Girijavailabhan, Viyyoor M.; Ganguly, Ashit K.; Pinto. Patrick A.;
and Versace, Richard W., 4,435,412, CI. 424-270.000.
Verweij, Henrik: See—
Joormann, Hendrik J. M.; Verweij, Henrik; and Haisma, Jan,
4,435,200, CI. 65-64.000.
Vetrotex Saint-Gobain: See—
Pivoteau, Jean; and Durot, Jean-Pierre, 4,435,479, CI. 428-542.800.
Veutgen, Hans-Jurgen: See—
Neuhauser, Hans J.; and Veutgen, Hans-Jurgen, 4,435,226, CI.
148-3.000.
Vi-Tek Designs, Inc.: See —
Vickio. Anthony N., 4,434,687, CI. 81-441.000.
Vickio. Anthony N.. to Vi-Tek Designs. Inc. Damaged screw remover.
4,434,687, CI. 81-441.000.
Videki. Edwin R., II: See—
Milligan, Charles A.; Videki, Edwin R., II; and Yates, Winston F..
4,435,762, CI. 364-200.000.
Vieth, Wolf R.; and Ryder, Leonard B. Saturated preform and method
for preparation thereof 4.435.453. CI. 428-35.000.
Vigneau, David L. Heat transfer device. 4.435,154, CI. 431-328.000.
Vigneau, David L. Infra-red radiant burner. 4,435,155, CI. 431-328.000.
Vigorelli Genova S.p.A.: See—
Giolitti, Nicolo, 4,434.735, CI. 112-220.000.
Viragen, Inc.: See-
Warren. Stanley L., 4,435.384, CI. 424-101.000.
Visky nee Gombos, Zsuzsanna: See—
Lempert, Karoly; Harsanyi, Kalman; Doleschall, Gabor; Homyak.
Gyula; Nyitrai, Jozsef; Zauer, Karoly; Fetter, Jozsef; Simig,
Gyula; Visky nee Gombos, Zsuzsanna; and Baru nee Szalai,
Gtzella, 4,435,322, CI. 260-239.00A.
Vitolin, Rasma O.: See—
Kastron, Valeria V.; Vitolin, Rasma O.; Dubur, Gunar Y.; Selga,
MariU Y.; Zarinsh, Guntis V.; Kondratenko, Natalya V.; Popov,
Vladimir I.; Kolomeitsev, Alexandr A.; and Yagupolsky. Lev M.,
4.435.574. CI. 546-321.000.
Vivola, Leo A.: See—
Hildeman, Gregory J.; Kuli, John C, Jr.; and Vivola, Leo A..
4,435.213, CI. 75-249.000.
Voermans, Antonius B.: See —
Breed, Dirk J.; Van Bakel, Bemardus A. H.; Voermans, Antonius
B.; and Robertson, John M., 4,435,484, CI. 428-693.000.
Vogel, Alfredo, to Secretary of State in her Brtannic Majesty's Govem-
ment of the United Kingdom. Process for producing metallic slurries.
4.434,839, CI. 164-485.aX).
Vogel, Hans-Henning: See—
Oppenlaender, Knut; Stork, Karl; Vogel, Hans-Henning; Schwartz.
Erich; and Jakob, Claus P., 4,435,298, CI. 252-34.000.
Voillot, Herve, to Creusot-Loire. Apparatus for conveying cylindrical
objects such as ammunition. 4,434,701, CI. 89-36.00K..
Voll, Manfred: See-
Reck, Reinhold; Kuhner, Gerhard Voll, Manfred; and Kleinsch-
mit, Peter, 4,435,378, CI. 423-461.000.
Von Ruden, Dennis, to General Equipment Co. Rod and pipe pusher-
puller apparatus. 4,434,969, CI. 2S4-29.00R.
Vora, Madhukar B.: See-
Tickle, Andrew C; and Vora, Madhukar B., 4,435,790, CI.
365-218.000.
Vorres, Karl S., to Institute of Gas Technology. Fluidized bed gasifier
or similar device for simultaneous classification of ash and unreacted
cod. 4.433,364, CI. 422-l't5.000.
Voso, Philip T.; Hallmark, Billy B.; Thomas. Richard D.; and Wofford.
Benjamin G., to W. R. Grace & Co.. Cryovac Division. Strapped
wicketed bags packet. 4.434.895. CI. 206-554.000.
Vsesojuzny Elektrotekhnickesky Institut Imeni V.I. Lenina: See—
Lytaev, Rem A.; Barakaev, Khristofor F.; Taratuta, Igor P.; and
Krainov, Sergei V., 4.435,748, CI 363-54.000.
Vsesojuzny Nauchno-Issledovatclsky 1 Ispyutelny Institut Meditsin-
skoi Tekhniki: See—
Karapetian. Igor S.; Korolkov. Ivan A.; Kapitanov, Nikolai N.;
Smimov, Boris A.; and Ivanova, Tatyana L.. 4,434,796, CI.
128-335.000.
W. R. Grace & Co.: See-
Lin, Shiow-Ching, 4,435.549. CI. 525-504.000.
W. R. Grace k Co., Cryovac Division: See—
Voso, Philip T.; Hallmark, Billy B.; Thomas. Richard D.; and
Wofford. Benjamin G., 4,434.895. CI. 206-554.000.
Wada. Hiroyuki: See-
Hashimoto. Toyokazu; Wada, Hiroyuki; Kida, Masahiko; Mat-
sumura, Hisashi; and Nakayashiki. Susumu. 4.435.704, CI.
340-825.010.
Wada, Kenichi, to Minolu Camera Kabushiki Kaisha Electrographic
developing apparatus with toner flow director. 4,435,065, CI. 355-
3.0DD.
Wada, Minora; Arai, Isao; Okubo, Takeshi; and Mori, Yoshiaki. to
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Honing head for high-speed
operation. 4,434.588, CI 51-344.000.
Wagener. Klaus: See—
Hcitkamp. Dieter; and Wagener, Klaus, 4,435,366, CI. 423-6.000.
Wagnon, Jean: See—
Demamc. Henri; and Wagnon, Jean. 4.435,426, CI. 424-324.000.
Waitkus, Phillip A.: See—
D'Alelio. GaetonoF.. deceased; and Waitkus. Phillip A., 4,435,323,
CI. 548-473.000.
Wajima, Moloyo: See—
Takahashi. Akio; W^ima, Moloyo; Nishikawa. Akio; and Mori-
shiu. Hirosada, 4.435.560, CI. 528-170.000.
Waldo. Paul D.: See—
McCaskill. Rex A.; Mclnroy. John W.; and Waldo. Paul D.,
4,435,777, CI. 364-900.000.
Walker, Gordon N., to Ciba-Gcigy Corporation. Certain substituted
/3-oxo-a-carbamoyIpyrroIcpropionitrile8. 4,435,407, CI. 424-263.000.
Walker, Hamilton. Rotary piston internal combustion engine. 4,434,757.
CI. 123-241.000.
Walker, Wolfram H., to Biotest-Seram-Institut GmbH. Blood bags with
interconnecting system. 4,435,179, CI. 604-410.000.
Wall, Colin J.: See—
Greensmith, Dennis; Hammerton. Roderic H.; Wall. Colin J.;
Dunkelmann, Dietger; Jaunich, Helmut; and Schiffarth. Josef.
4.435.510. CI. 501-90.000.
Wallace. Dean L. Towing hitch construction. 4,434,996, 01.
280-504.000.
Wallick, Scott A.: See—
Markham. Larry D.; Martin, Andrew C; Elton. Edward F.; Mag-
notta, Vincent L.; and Wallick, Scott A., 4.435,249, CI.
162-24.000.
Wallimann. Hans: See —
Comploi, Georg; Heimgartner. Roland; Loacker, Artur; Huber.
Kurt; and Wallimann. Hans. 4.434.728. CI. 112-84.000.
Walls, John E.; and Duyal, Tulay, to American Hoechst Corporation.
Photopolymer cleavage imaging system. 4,435.496. CI. 430-285.000.
Walrave, Franciskus J.: See-
Desert. Jean-Marie G.; and Walrave. Franciskus J., 4,434,692, CI.
83-62.000.
Walsh, Michael M., to Mechanical Technology Incorporated. Start-up
and control method and apparatus for resonant free piston Stirling
engine. 4,434,617, CI. 60-520.000.
Walter. Lee: See—
Allred, David D.; Walter, Lee; Reyes, Jaime M.; and Ovshinsky,
Stanford R.. 4.435.445. CI. 427-54.100.
Walter, Lothar; Brandenstein, Manfred; and Olschcwski. Armin, to
SKF Kugellagcrfabrikcn GmbH. Process for the production of a
bearing bushing without machining. 4,434,640, CI. 72-348.000.
Walter, Lothar; See—
Olschewski. Armin; Walter. Lothar; Brandenstein, Manfred; and
Muller. Leo, 4.434,882. CI. 192-98.000.
Walz. Gregory J.: See—
Woloshuk. Edward A.; and Walz, Gregory J., 4,435,053, CI.
352-86.000.
Ward, Donald F.: See—
Kopsch, Paul J.; Ward, Donald F.; Graber, Jay; and Nichols,
Omer, 4.434,718, CI. K)2-522.000.
Warman, Bloomfield J. Speech direction detection circuits for tele-
phone communication devices. 4,435,621, CI. 179-81.00B. .
Wamaco of Canada Limited: See—
Hansen, Vagn A., 4,434.512, CI. 2-129.000.
Warner, Dale J., to GiU Brothers Mfg. Co. Shaft seal. 4.434.986, Q.
277-42.000.
Wamer, Dale J., to GiU Brothers Mfg. Co. Shaft seal. 4,434,988, Q.
277-81. OOR.
Warren, Stanley L., to Viragen, Inc. Transfer factor compoaition and
skin treatment. 4,435,384. CI. 424-101.000.
Washecheck. Paul H.: See—
Mou. Kaye L.; Washecheck, Paul H.; Poe, Ronald L.; and Yatet,
James E., 4.435,606, CI. 585-324.000.
PI 48
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Washimi, Koichi: See—
Watanabe. Eiki: See—
Ohta. Kazutoshi; and Watanabe. Eiki. 4,434.873, CI. 187-28.000.
Waunabe, Masahiro: See—
Nishimura, Hiroyuki; Hasegawa. Shumpei; Watanabe. Masahiro:
and Funiya. Haruo. 4,434,770, CI. 123-494.000.
!'J5ff;«'^'l"?; 1^,%^' Chemical Industries. Ltd. Sport shoes.
^»^j^»5io, C.I. 12*142. ORS.
Watanabe. Shoji; and Miho. Takuya, to Daicel Chemical Industries.
Ltd. Poiyol resin. 4,435.542, CI. 525-1 18.000.
WataiMbe, Takaji; and Noguchi, Tamio, to Merck Patent Oesellschaft
5?i" i^^f^' Haftung. Transparent colored pigmente. 4,435,220,
CI. 106-291.000.
Weasel. George E., Jr. Hydro-cooling air lock. 4,434,623. CI. 62-64 000
Weaver. Edward A., to Owens-Illinois, Inc. Glasses suiuble for sealins
femtes. 4,435,51 1, CI. 501-22.000. *
Weber. Harold J. Oidactic apparatus pA>viding for tutelage of re-
sponses through inculcation. 4,435,164, CI. 434-337.000
Weeks, Paul D.: See—
Brennan, Thomas M.; Brannegan, Daniel P.; Weeks, Paiil D and
Kuhla. Donald E., 4,435,584, CI. 549-415.000.
Wecrth. Hans-Ernst: See—
Staudenrausch. Georg; and Weerth. Hans-Ernst. 4.4H527, CI.
17-33.000.
Weinert, Friederich. Power wheel with double action valve in conjunc-
tion with a drill bit. 4,435,355, CI. 376-208.000.
Weinert, Volker: See—
Payrhammer, Bemd; and Weinert, Volker, 4.435,075, CI.
Weintraub, Burton: 5m—
B«Lger. Sidney; Buda, Salvatore; and Weintraub, Burton, 4,435,005,
wl. 285-3 1.000.
Weintraub, Steven A. Climate control system. 4,435.025, CI. 312-31.000
Weise, Volker B,, to GTE Automatic Electric Incorporated. Automatic
??l",S?'Jir?' °^ " *'"8le gate GaAs FET amplifier. 4,435,846, CI.
455-253.000.
Weiser Designs, Ltd.: See—
Weiscr, Georgiann, 4,434,511, CI. 2r 1 14.000.
^f^i' .9!°^*""' '° ^"**^ Designs, Ltd. Hospital gown. 4,434,511,
CI. 2-114.000.
Wttsner, Carl S.; and Reynolds, David W., to Polyloom Corporation of
Amenca. Multicomponent continuous film die. 4,435,141, CI
425-131.100.
Weiss, Friedrich: See—
Brix, Joachim; and Weiss, Friedrich, 4,434,739, CI. 114-162.000.
Weiss, John, to Wmd Innovations, Inc. Displacement, planing sail-
board. 4.434,737, CI. 1 14-39.000. f »
Weisz, WUliam, to Singer Company, The. Bight and needle positioning
control for sewmg machines. 4,434.733. CI., 1 12-158.00A.
2-410 oio''^" L • »o Gold, Inc. Infant head protector. 4,434,513, CI.
Weller. Dwight D.: See—
4,435,572, CI. 546-228.000.
Wells Electronics, Inc.: See—
Ralstin. Donald E., 4,435,724, Q. 357-79.000.
Wenger, Jean: See—
^^?*fi'.9,S'^?J,^i'f n'!'^'"*' ^eng". Jean; and Wintemitz, Paul,
4,435,207, CI. 71-94.000.
Wentzell. Jospeh<M. Methods for producing very fine particle size
metal powders. 4,435,342, CI. 264-8.000. h c ««
Wenzler, Peter B.: See—
^'43":o2^?;^^2•2nSS^ ^^ ^= ""■ ^""'"- ^^^ «•
Wessels, Egon: See—
West, Ben F.: See—
^^•a^^^^""^ ^^^'P*' *'•■ "''•: ■"<* ^"t> Ben F., 4,435,379,
CI. 423-472.000.
Western Electric Co., Inc.: See—
^20^1090? **' ■''' '™* ^*™* ■'°'" ^' *'*^''25«. CI.
Potkay, Eugene, 4,435,199, Q. 65-3.120.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See—
Caputo, Wilham R., 4.434,874, CI. 187-29.00R.
Powell. Norman F.. 4.435.710. Q. 343-18.00E.
Weyda. Gunther: See—
Nitachmann. Karl; Weyda. Gunther; Emmrich, Bodo; and Stimp-
fig, Karl O., 4,434,556, Q. 30-123.400. *^
Whaley, George S.: See—
WharfT, Prentice C: See—
Kuhlenunn. Bni«N : Horvath, Kalman; and WharfT. Prentice C,
*>*J J. Ill, *-l. 004-263.000.
^*4?34'590°cr52-5800o"* ""^*"" ^°' geodesic dome stnictures.
Wlitaeil. Henry T.: See—
"?f^ ^°*^.2 ^"^ Dietmar; Thomas, Thomas J.; Whetsell,
A^Ji' ^°^hi?^' ^°^' *^°"^: ■"*' ^o'f' Karl-Heinz.
't*^jflol» tfl. O-327.000.
Whitaker, Royd J. Wood wheel cutter. 4,434,826. CI. 144-219.000.
WWtcomb, William T.; and Butler, John V.. to Lockheed Corporation.
Cl^'n^y 0OR°' calibration for automatic particle counters. 4.434,647.
Whitehouse, Hugh L.. to Stanley Works, The. Air tool with stall torque
...regulator and air biasmg mechanism. 4,434,858, CI. 173-12 000
Whitelaw, Brett A. Track block. 4,435,022, CI. 305-53.000.
Wiatt, James G.; Calvert, James W.; Belcher, Samuel L.; and Smith,
Koger D, to Cincinnati Milacron Inc. Apparatus for high rate pro-
425^534 a»'*"^ oriented thermoplastic articles. 4,435,146, CI.
Wiechert, Rudolf: See—
'^ d"*!?' .'^'^"?i™*"'' "*"'^: Hofmeister, Helmut; and Wiechert,
Rudolf, 4,435,390, CI. 424-243.000.
'' oT'S^S^'ioo'"""'' "*"'^' "^ ^'«=hert. Rudolf. 4.435,327.
Wiggins Teape Group Limited, The: See—
«, . ?*^'°"' Kenneth J., 4,435,004. CI. 282-27.500.
Wild, Jurgen: See—
^a'33°r74 00L^°""*^"' ^^^'^'' ""* ^"**' ■'"«"• *'*H559,
WUd, Peter: See—
*'a''2S)-'5oi''i2o*^'' ^'''*' ^^'' "** ^"'^^^' "°"*' '♦•'♦"•"*•
^uf*'L' \f raon H- 'o McDonnell Douglas Corporation. Dwell assem-
bly back spotface. 4,435.109, CI. 408-14.000.
^K]":*u"j""^i. ■"** ^°"*=''' Klaus-Uwe. to Blaupunkt-Werke GmbH.
Method and apparatus for insertion of electrical components into a
circuit board. 4.434.550. CI. 29-837.000.
Willem. Michel: See—
^■^\'?^J^ Alexandre; and Willem. Michel. 4,435.615. CI.
174-189.000.
Wilier. Annin; and Roderer. Herbert, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Mag-
Ijeio generator for a contactless ignition system. 4.435,660, CI. 310-
Willgoose, Kenneth, to Rolls-Royce Limited. Method of making a
bade aerofoil for a gas turbine engine. 4.434.835. CI. 164-34.000
Williams, Haydn W. R.: See —
^M3?579*a"5S:ii3!a™' "'^'*" ^- ^' ""* ^°^^' ■'"''"'
Williams, Paul, to AccuRay Corporation. Gauge having a surface -,
„,f°!lo^er with penpheral vent. 4,434,649, CI. 73-37.700.
WUliams, Richard P., to United Sutes of America, National Security
,.,^,?*"*^y- Magnetic bubble logic apparatus. 4,435,783, CI. 365-5.000
WiUiamson, James; and Crete, Paul G., to Raytheon Company. Auto-
„"■"*= '""equency control circuitry. 4,435.847, CI. 455-260.000
^jlV*?Ji"' Xi^'e" ^' and Decks, Peter C. Sampling device. 4,4H672,
d. 7J-864.220.
Wijlits, Charles A. Pelvic subilizer. 4,434,793, CI. 128-134.000
Wilsm^, Hans: See—
^If^fTv-^'; ^''«'ng. Hans; and Schultze-Gebhardt, Fritz,
4,434,530, CI. 19-0.460.
Wilson, David L.: See—
^^^^V^lk!^^'^ ^' *"** ^•••O"' D'vid L. 4.435.674. CI.
J I o-o4U.CXa).
Wilson. John H.: See—
^'^7;i^l'^''^"' ^°^ "•: «"<! Demircan. Niyazi. 4.434.723.
Cl. 1 10-245.000.
Wilson. Larry R.: See—
^°4'S5%?°^l2?-^5lX"' "^ ""• "' ^"""' ''"" ""•
Wmch. Allen R.; and Rearick. WUliam A., to Cotton Incorporated.
.\^. expression saueeze roll liquor extraction of nonwoven batte.
4,434,633. CI. 68-267.000.
Winchell. David A.: See—
^4l434^'^cS'5-S2'0OT ^°'"" ^'' "** ^*"«=''«"' ^•^'<' ^■'
Wind Innovations. Inc.: See —
Weiss. John. 4.434.737. CI. 1 14-39.000.
Windmoller & Holscher: See—
Feldkamper, Richard. 4.434.948, CI. 242-59.000.
Windpowered Machines Ltd.: See—
Cook, Gregory E., 4,435,125, CI. 416-132.00B.
Wingen, Peter, to Dienes Werke fur MaschinenteUe GmbH A Co. KG.
Holder for a roller slitting knife. 4,434,695, CI. 83-482.000.
Wuikelman, Wayne, to Texas Instruments Incorporated. Allocation of
rotatmg memory device storage locations. 4,435,752, CI. 364-200.000
Wmkler, Otto, to Balzers Aktiengesellschaft. Regenerative cyclic pro-
cess for refrigerating machines. 4,434,622, CI. 62-6.000.
Winter, Joseph; Dantzig, Jonathan A.; and Tyler, Derek E., to Interna-
tional Telephone and Telegraph Corporation. Process and apparatus
for making thixotropic metal slurries. 4,434,837, CI. 164-468.000.
Wmterberg, F. Method for the release of thermonuclear energy com-
wjung impact, magnetic and inertial confinement fusion. 4.43S.3S4.
CI. 376-108.000.
Wintemitz, Paul: See—
'''?f?'.?,S"^5i,^if'll^'^"°^ Wenger, Jean; and Wintemiti. Pwil.
4,435,207, CI. 71-94.000.
Winterehall AG: See—
Lindoifer, Walter; and Jan-Held, Wilhelm. 4,435.290, a.
Winterton. Dean A. Tank carrier. 4.434.991. CI. 28O-5.00R
Wuizeler. James E.: See—
•^ed^er. Craig W.; and Winzeler. James E.. 4.434.680. a.
Wissenberg. Herman; York. Earl D.; and Porter. Darrell D.. to Stan-
dard Oil Company Ondiana); and Gulf Oil Corp. In situ retorting
March 6, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 49
with flame front-stabilizing layer of lean oil shale particles. 4.435.016.
CI. 299-2.000.
Withers. Richard B., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Infra-red detector
elemento. 4,435,462, CI. 428-156.000.
Witiak, David, to Rohm and Haas Company. Stabilized polymer com-
positions. 4.435.539. CI. 524-558.000.
Witte, Arnold C, Jr.: See—
Carley. Don A.; Witte, Arnold C, Jr.; Green, William B.; and
Doerr, Kennit W., 4,435,299, CI. 252-41.000.
Witten, Raymond L., to Hughes Tool Company, Submersible pump
motor ncxible bearing. 4,435,661. CI. 310-90.000.
Wofford. Benjamin G.: See—
Voso. PhiHp T.; Hallmark. Billy B.; Thomas. Richard D.; and
Wofford, Benjamin G., 4,434,895, CI. 206-554.000.
Wohlfeil, Gerhard, to Jagenberg Werke AG. Sealing system for the air
feed of a rotatable air nozzle system. 4.434,941. CI. 239-587.000.
Wolf, Karl-Heinz: See— ^-.^
Hoguet, Robert G.; Kalz, Dietmar; Thomas, Thomas J.; Whetsell.
Henry T.; Wolff. Joachim; Nonn. Konrad; and Wolf. Karl-Heinz,
4,435.181, CI. 8-527.000.
Wolf, Peter: See—
Leibowitz, Mitchell J.; Kong, Ah S.; Sonnino-Goldman, Paula; and
Wolf, Peter, 4,435,409, cf 424-266.000.
WolfT, Joachim: See—
Hoguet, Robert G.; Kalz, Dietmar; Thomas, Thomas J.; Whetsell,
Henry T.; Wolff, Joachim; Nonn, Konrad; and Wolf, Karl-Heinz,
4,435,181, CI. 8-527.000.
Wolfgarten, Hubert: See—
Guido, Heinz; and Wolfgarten, Hubert, 4,435,812, CI. 373-72.000.
Woloshuk. Edward A.; and Walz, Gregory J., to Zyntrax Corporation.
The. Three-dimensional plural display apparatus. 4.435.053. CI.
352-86.000. ♦
Woo, Gar L.; and Parker, Phillip H., to Chevron Research Company.
Stabilized polypyrrolidone end capped with alkanolamine and pro-
cess for prepanng. 4,435,547, CI. 525-420.000.
Wood, Denis; Thomas, John F., Jr.; Dipper, Barry; Stegenga, Philip D.;
Veltkamp, John H.; Katsma, William L.; and Norton, Robert L., to
Donnelly Mirrors, Inc. Vehicle mirtor and support assembly.
4,435,042, CI. 350-281,000.
Wood, Jill E. G., to United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland, The Secretary of State for Industry in Her Britannic Majes-
ty's Government of the. Hardness test indenters. 4,434,651, CI.
73-85.000.
Woodley, Raymond L. Clothes peg. 4,434,535, CI. 24-562,00R.
Woods, Robert L., to United States of America, Navy. Fluidic sain
changer. 4,434,812, CI. 137-829.000.
Wooler, Alan M., to Abelard Management Services Limited. Process
for the manufacture of urea-formaldehyde/polyurethane polymers.
4,435,526, CI. 521-107.000.
Wosika, Leon R., to Solar Turbines Incorporated. Turbines. 4,435,121,
CI. 415-56.000.
Wouk, Victor, to Eh, Inc. Device for prolonging the life of an incandes-
cent lamp. 4,435,671. CI. 3I5-200.00R.
Wright, Brian D.; McBeth, Raymond A.; and Wessels, Egon, to Gulf
Canada Limited. .Arctic bargi: drilling unit. 4,434,741, CI.
114-264.000.
Wright, William L.: See—
Huckabee, Bill F.; and Wright, William L., 4,435.740, CI.
361-398.000.
Wroblewski, Lucien J. Cyclical mechanical dispensing mechanism.
4,434,913, CI. 221-267.000.
Wu, Ta-Ming: See-
Murray, Lance R.; and Wu, Ta-Ming, 4,435,658, CI. 307-530.000.
Wu, Wei-Wha: See—
Hsieh, John C; and Wu. Wei-Wha. 4,435,805. CI. 371-25.000,
Wu, Yulin; and Zuech, Ernest A., to Phillips Petroleum Company,
Process of producing terephthalic acid. 4,435.596, CI. 562-481,000,
Wurtman, Richard J,, to Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Pro-
cess for improving vigor and mood in normal human patients.
4.435,424, Cl. 424-319.000.
Wurzburg, Henry: See—
Dellande. Brian W.; and Wurzburg, Henry, 4,435,824. Cl.
375-46.000,
Wyoming Mineral Corporation: See—
Steck. Edward J.. 4.435.367. Cl. 423-10.000.
Wysong. Robert D.. to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company. Slow
release pesticide formulations. 4.435.383. Cl. 424-78.000.
Xenell Corporation: See—
Fajt. John, 4,434,886. Cl. 198-389.000.
Xerox Corporation: See —
Lama. William L.; and Rees. James D.. 4.435.039, Cl. 350-96.250.
Liao, Henry H., 4,435,726, Cl. 358-135.000.
Miller, Richard L., 4,435,073, Cl. 355-15.000.
Thomas. Dale C, 4,435,677, Cl. 323-235.000.
Yackel, Walter C, Jr.: See—
Lehnhardt, William F.; Streaty, Charles E., Jr.; Yackel, Walter C,
Jr.; Yang, Ho S,; and Tang, Daniel K., 4,435,438, CI. 426-656.000.
Yager, Glen E., to Universal Instrumente Corporation. Isolated stop for
vibrating feeders. 4,434,887. CI. 198-391.000.
Yagi. Takashi: See—
Maeda. Nobuyoshi; Itakura. Hideo; and Yagi. Takashi. 4,434.646.
Cl. 72-451.000.
Yagihara. Morio: See—
Mihayashi. Keiji; Ogawa. Tadashi; and Yagihara. Morio, 4,435,503,
Cl. 430-548.000.
Yagupolsky, Lev M.: See—
Kastron, Valeria V.; Vitolin, Rasma O,; Dubur, Gunar Y.; Selga,
Marita Y.; Zarinsh. Guntis V,; Kondratenko. Natalya V.; Popov,
Vladimir I,; Kolomcitscv. Alexandr A,; and Yagupolsky. Lev M.,
4,435.574.0.546-321.000. •
Yajima. Ryuzaburo: See—
Sakitani, KaUumi; Uemura, Shigehiro; and Yajima. Ryuzaburo.
4,434.844, Cl. 165-151.000.
Yamada, Kenji: See—
Yoshimura. Junjiro; Yamada. Kenji; and Obata, Haruyuki.
4,434,775, Cl. 123-564.000.
Yamada, Kouzi: See-
Sato, Akio; Nakajima, Kenji; Takahara, Yoshimasa; Kijima,
Shizumasa; Kuwana, Noriaki; Abe, Shinya; and Yamada. Kouzi,
4,435,423. Cl. 424-318.000,
Yamaha Hatsudoki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Grinde, James E,, 4,434,867, CI, 180-190,000,
Kazuta, Hisashi; Kawai, Yasunari; and Tsuchida, Naoki, 4,434,755,
Cl. 123-195,00C.
Yamamoto, Hachizou: See—
Nakatani, Hiroshi; Ishida, Masahide; and Yamamoto, Hachizou,
4,435,767, CI. 364-405.000.
Yamamoto, H^imu: See—
Ohno, Sachio; Mizukoshi, Kiyoshi; Komatsu, Osamu; Yamamoto,
Hajimu; and Kunou, Yasuo, 4,435,566, Cl, 544-117.000,
Yamamoto, Haruo: See—
Horike. Masayoshi; Yamamoto, Haruo; Yamane, Yukio; Yoshiyuki,
Kazuhiko; and Endo, Toshiaki, 4,434,593, CI. 52-208,000.
Yamamoto, Kenji: See—
Nakayama, Yasuhani; Yamamoto, Kenji; Komatsuzawa, Toshiki;
Sukejima, Hajime; and Nomoto, Kazuo, 4,435,531, Cl,
524-37,000.
Yamamoto, Norboru; Makino, TomoaUu; and Okuda, Ryoichi, to
Nippondenso Co., Ltd, Circuit for controlling the primary dwell time
of ignition transformer, 4,434,779, CI. 123-609.000.
Yamamoto, Shinjiro: See—
Tsuji. Hideakira; Yamamoto, Shinjiro; Nakagami, Kazuto; Honda,
Takeo; Fujii, Katsutoshi; Kobayashi. Takashi; Obata, Tokio
Kojima, Mikio; and Akiyoshi, Yuji, 4,435,402, CI. 424-251,000.
Yamane, Yukio: See—
Horike, Masayoshi; Yamamoto, Haruo; Yamane, Yukio; Yoshiyuki,
Kazuhiko; and Endo, Toshiaki, 4,434,593, Cl. 52-208.000.
Yamasa Shoyu Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Nakatsugawa, Shigekazu, 4,434,788, CI. 1 28- 1. 100.
Yamashita, Ichiro; and Ise, Yukihiko, to Matsushita Electric Industrial
Co., Ltd. Tension sensor, 4,434,671, CI. 73-862.480
Yamashita, Keitaro: See—
Goto, Ryuji; Yamashita, Keitaro; and Noguchi, Koji, 4,435.494. Cl.
430-122.000.
Yamato, Akihiro: See—
Otobe, Yutaka; Yamato, Akihiro; and Umesaki, Shigeo, 4,434,769,
Cl, 123-493.000,
Yamaura, Kenji: See-
Murakami, Shozo; Aoki, Hiroyuki; Mauuo, Saburo; Ikezaki, Eiji;
and Yamaura, Kenji, 4,434,976, Cl. 266-268.000,
Yamazaki, Shigcyuki: See-
Hashimoto. Takashi; and Yamazaki, Shigeyuki, 4,435.153, Cl.
431-208.000.
Yang, Ho S.: See—
Lehnhardt, William F.; Streaty, Charles E,, Jr,; Yackel, Walter C ,
Jr,; Yang, Ho S.; and Tang, Daniel K,, 4,435,438, CI, 426-656 000
Yang, Tai-Cheng; Rao, Krishna K.; and Huang, I-dcr, to Exxon Re-
search & Engineering Co, Heterogeneous process for prepanng
vanadium phosphorus oxygen containing catalyst composition.
4,435,521, Cl, 502-209.000,
Yano, Takefumi: See—
Ueno, Haruo; Yano, Takefumi; Inoue, Tokuji; Ikai, Shigeru; Kai,
Yoshiyuki; and Shimizu, Michimasa, 4,435,550, CI. 526-73,000.
Yano, Takeshi: See—
Fukui, Izumu; Yano, Takeshi; and Hamauuki, Takeshige,
4,435,666, Cl. 310-328.000.
Yasuda, Yoshinori: See-
Nagano, Susumu; Iruya, Seiichi; Yasuda, Yoshinori; and Makino,
Tomoaki, 4,435,769, Cl. 364-464.000,
Yasuoka, Nobuyuki, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd. Semiconductor
memory circuit. 4,435,787, Cl. 365-174.000.
Yates, James E.: See—
Motz, Kaye L.; Wuhecheck, Paul H.; Poe, Ronald L.; and Yates,
James E., 4,435,606, Cl. 585-324.000.
Yates, Winston F.: See—
Milligan, Charles A,; Videki, Edwin R., II; and Yates, Winston F.,
4,435,762, CI. 364-20O«X).
Yeh, Jaw S., to Chen, Shu-Chang. Wire feeding and wire forming
device for paper clip making machine, 4,434,818, Cl. 140-82.000.
Yokogawa Hokushin Electric Corp.: See-
Suzuki, Yoshihiro; Nakagawa, Shuichi; Kawamura, Nobuhisa;
Kurihara, Shuichi; Sakuma, Osamu; and Ito, Masahiro. 4.435.772.
CI, 364-520.000.
Yokoo. Tomohide: See —
Ema. Kenji; Hara. Junji; Ikado. Shuhei; Kawaihima. Hideo; and
Yokoo. Tomohide. 4,435,543, Cl. 525-143.000.
Yokooku, Kauuhiko: See—
Morita. Yasuyuki; Yokooku. KaUuhiko; Shiraishi. Hideo; and
MaUuura. Maaahiko. 4.434,749, Cl. 123-41.020.
PI 50
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 6, 1984
Yoneyoshi, Yukio: See —
Funaki, Yuji; Yoneyoshi, Yukio; Ishiguri, Yukio; and Izumi, Kazuo,
4,435,203. CI. 71-76.000.
York, Earl D.: See—
Wissenberg, Herman; York, Earl D.; and Porter, Darrell D.,
4,435.016, CI. 299-2.000.
Yoshida, Fumio; Miki, Yukio; Egawa. Takeshi; and Yoshizaki, Akira, to
Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha. Auto-focus control camera.
4,435,058, CI. 354-403.000.
Yoshida Kogyo K. K.: See—
Nagata, Kazuo; and Ishii, Susumu. 4,434,923, CI. 225-97.000.
Seki. Fumio, 4,434,928, CI. 227-16.000.
Yoshida Kogyo K.K.: See—
Osaki. Tatsuo, 4.434.538, CI. 29-33.200.
Yoshida. Yuji: See —
Tachikawa, Kyoji; and Yoshida, Yuji. 4,435,228, CI. 148-1 1.50Q.
Yoshii, Tsuneo; Ueda, Toshitaka; and Kuroda, Tsukasa. Method of
producing a catalyst for liquefaction of coal. 4,435,522, CI.
502-319.000.
Yoshimoto, Masahiro: See —
Koizumi, Masuo; Shirakawa, Norio; Tomioka, Hiromi; Takeuchi,
Masaki; Okada, Masanori; Yoshimoto, Masahiro; Murakami,
Yasushi; and I wane, Yoshitaka, 4,435.202. CI. 71-76.000.
Yoshimura, Junjiro; Yamada, Kenji; and Obata, Haruyuki, to Nippon-
denso Co., Ltd.; and ToyoU Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha. Apparatus for
controlling pressurized air supply to engines. 4,434,775, CI.
123-564.000.
Yoshimura, Ryoichi: See—
Hirokawa, Norio; Kawachi, Tsuneo; Saito, Hiroshi; and Yo-
shimura, Ryoichi, 4.435.210. CI. 75-53.000.
Yoshino Kogyosho Co.. Ltd.: See —
Saito, Tadao; Nozawa, Takamitsu; Endo, Shuzo; Kakuta, Yo-
shiyuki; Ogawa, Riichi; and Kaneuchi, Teteuro, 4,434,917, CI.
222-383.000.
Yoshino. Shigeo; Zenbutsu, Tadashi; Asami. Hajime; and Irie, Mi-
chiyuki, to Shinagawa Refractories Co., Ltd. Heat-resistant inorganic
compositions. 4.435.215. CI. 106-84.000.
Yoshioka, Hiroshi: See —
Nakajima, Kaoru; Somezawa, Masashi; Takamizawa, Minoni;
Inoue, Yoshio; and Yoshioka, Hiroshi, 4,435,485, CI. 428-694.000.
Yoshiyuki, Kazuhiko: See—
Horike, Masayoshi; Yamamoto, Haruo; Yamane, Yukio; Yoshiyuki,
Kazuhiko; and Endo, Toshiaki, 4,434,593, CI. 52-208.000.
Yoshizaki, Akira: See—
Yoshida, Fumio; Miki, Yukio; Egawa, Takeshi; and Yoshizaki,
Akira, 4,435,058, CI. 354-403.000.
Young, Ronald R., II. Solar powered reactor. 4,434,787, CI.
126-438.000.
Zack, Leonard N.: See—
Shelton, Huey G.; and Zack, Leonard N., 4,434,721, CI. 108-4.000.
Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen AO: See—
Friedrich. Ehrlinger; and Meyerle, Michael, 4,434,681, CI.
74-687.000.
Zajac, Theodore S., to Parker-Hannifin Corporation. Electro-hydraulic
proportional control valve. 4,434,966, CI. 251-205.000.
Zandbergen, Adrian. Method of making a conical spiral antenna.
4.435.716, CI. 343-895.000.
Zandona. Oliver J.; Hettinger. William P., Jr.; Kovach, Stephen M.; and
Beck, Hubert W., to Ashland Oil, Inc. Catalyst for the conversion of
carbo-metallic containing oils. 4,435,515, CI. 502-65.000.
Zannsh, Guntis V.: See—
Kastron, Valeria V.; Vitolin, Rasma O.; Dubur, Gunar Y.; Selga,
Marita Y.; Zannsh, Guntis V.; Kondratenko. Natalya V.; Popov,
Vladimir I.; Kolomeitsev, Alexandr A.; and Yagupolsky, Lev M..
4,435,574, CI. 546-321.000. ^ *~ ^
Zauer, Karoly: See—
Lempert, Karoly; Harsanyi, Kalman; Doleschall, Gabor; Homyak,
Gyula; Nyitrai, Jozsef; Zauer, Karoly; Fetter, Jozsef; Simig,
Gyula; Visky nee Gombos. Zsuzsanna; and Barta nee Szalai,
Gizella, 4,435,322, CI. 260-239.00A.
Zboralski, Jon A.; and Grow, Harry N., to Hamilton Industries, Inc.
Fume hood with damper controlled baffles and method. 4,434,711,
CI. 98-116.0LH.
Zellmer, Hans. Heat insulated roof structure. 4,434,601, CI. 52-745.000.
Zenbutsu, Tadashi: See—
Yoshino, Shigeo; Zenbutsu, Tadashi; Asami, Hajime; and Irie,
Michiyuki, 4,435,215, CI. 106-84.000.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See—
Dobrovolny, Pierre. 4.435,841, CI. 455-180.000.
Zerna. Wolfgang; Krabbe, Wilfried; and Schafer, Hans, to Philipp
Holzmann AG. Component useful in producing a coolins tower.
4,434,591. CI. 52-73.000. »- e »
Zheng, Yea K., to Nianbilla Company Limited. Vertical axis windmill. ■
4.435.124. CI. 416-119.000.
Ziegler, Erich. Aromatic citrus oil concentrate which is stoble in stor-
age. 4,435,437, CI. 426-651.000.
Zierdt, Charles H., to United States of America, Health and Human
Services. Lysis filtration culture chamber. 4,435,505, CI. 435-34.000.
Zoppi, Michel: See—
Flot, Regis; and Zoppi, Michel, 4,435,454, CI. 428-36.000.
Z&cheile, John W., Jr.: See-
Spencer, BUlie M.; Cady, William S.; and Zscheile, John W., Jr.,
4,435,822, CI. 375-1.000.
Zuech, Ernest A.: See—
Wu, Yulin; and Zuech, Ernest A., 4,435,596. CI. 562-481.000.
Zuk, Robert F.; and Litman, David J., to Syva Company. Immuno-
chromatographic assay with support having bound "MIP" and sec-
ond enzyme. 4,435.504. CI. 435-7.000.
Zyntrax Corporation. The: See—
Woloshuk. Edward A.; and Walz, Gregory J., 4,435,053, CI.
352-86.000.
LIST OF REISSUE PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 6th DAY OF MARCH. 1984
Note.— Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
Ball Corporation: See—
Lowe. Earl L., Re. 31,529, CI. 137-884.000.
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated: See—
Fenton, Francis M.; Van Omum, James H.; Wang, Tie L.; and
Weiss, Carl D., Re. 31,534, CI. 179-99.00R.
Catalyst Research Corporation: See—
Schneider, Alan A.; and Moser, James R., Re. 31,532, CI.
429-191.000.
Donn Incorporated: See—
Mieyal, David F., Re. 31.528, CI. 52-730.000.
Fenton, Francis M.; Van Omum, James H.; Wang, Tse L.; and Weiss,
Carl D., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Communica-
tion system conferencing arrangement. Re. 31,534, CI. 179-99.00R.
Lambert, William R. Method and apparatus for eviscerating scallops.
Re. 31,527, CI. 17-51.000.
Lewis, Terry W., to Minnesou Mining and Manufacturing Company.
Information carrying discs. Re. 31,533, CI. 428-65.000.
Lowe, Earl L., to Ball Corporation. Electronic valve assembly for
glassware forming machinery. Re. 31,529, CI. 137-884.000.
Matson, Crawford A.: See—
Ragard, Phillip A.; and Matson, Crawford A., Re. 31,530, CI.
140-105.000.
Mieyal, David F., to Donn Incorporated. Grid tee for suspension
ceilings or the like. Re. 31,528, CI. 52-730.000.
Mmnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company: See—
Uwis, Terry W., Re. 31,533, CI. 428-65.000.
Moser, James R.: See—
Schneider, Alan A.; and Moser, James R., Re. 31,532, CI.
429-191.000.
Ragard, Phillip A.; and Matson, Crawford A., to Universal Instruments
Corporation. Multiple lead cut and clinch mechanism. Re. 31,530, CI.
Rockwell International Corporation: 5m—
NViUiams, William J., Re. 31,531. CI. 188-341.000.
Schneider, Alan A.; and Moser, James R., to Catalyst Research Corpo-
ration. Primary cells and iodine containing cathodes therefcr.
Universal Instrumenu Corporation: See—
Ragard, Phillip A.; and Matson, Crawford A., Re. 31,530, CI.
140-105.000.
Van Omum, James H.: See—
Fenton, Francis M.; Van Omum, James H.; Wang, Tie L.; and
Weiu, Carl D.. Re. 31.534, CI. 179-99.00R.
Wang, Tse L.: See—
Fenton, Francis M.; Van Omum, James H.; Wang, Tie L.; and
Weiss, Carl D., Re. 31,534, CI. 179-99.00R.
Weiss, Carl D.: $ee—
Fenton, Francis M.; Van Omum, James H.; Wang, Tie L.; and
Weiss, Carl D., Re. 31,534, CI. 179-99.00R.
Williams, William J., to Rockwell Intemational Corporation. Brake
asKmbly. Re. 31,531, CI. 188-341.000.
LIST OF REEXAMINATION PATENTEES
TO WHOM
CERTIFICATES WERE ISSUED
Namboodri, Chettoor O.: 5m—
Gregorian, Razmic S.; and Namboodri, Chettoor G.. to United Mer- ° cf "iSi OOo'"'*^ ^ ' *"** Namboodri, Chettoor O., Bl 4,266,976,
United Merchanu and Manufacturers, Inc.: See—
chants and Manufacturers, Inc. Fabric treating compositions. Gregorian, Razmic S.; and Namboodri, Chettoor O, B I 4,266,976,
CI. 106-2.000.
Bl 4.2<i«,»76, l^U. a. 106.2.00O. "cTm.ul.Md"""'"'""^ ""°" ^'^ "' '•°'^"'' '*"'
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Aavid Engineering, Inc.: See-
Johnson, Philip A.; and McCarthy, Alfred P., 272,902, CI. D13-
23.000.
Anderson, Kenneth J., to Milton Bradley Intemational, Inc. Toy clock.
272,930, 3-6-84, CI. D21-144.000.
Aurora Design Associates, Inc.: See-
Gardner, James H.; and de Nevers, Noel H., 272,882, CI. 07-
70.000.
Beasley, Rex W., III. Building. 272,947, 3-6-84, CI. D25-I.000.
Beaty, John E., Sr. One piece dome ceiling. 272,949, 3-6-84, CI. D25-
92.000.
Beirise, Jean M.: See-
Coons, John C; and Beirise, Jean M., 272,907, CI. DI4-58.000.
Belson, Sharon: See—
Quinn, Ronald B.; Hudson, Mark; and Belson, Sharon, 272,923, CI.
D2 1-55.000.
Bergsland, Jon. Foundation wall outer moisture bar sheet or basement
inner wall or floor humidity controlling lining sheet or the like.
272,957, 3-6-84, CI. D92-3 1.000.
Blomberg, Knut H. Telephone instrument. 272,905, 3-6-84. CI. D14-
S3.000.
Boissicat, Claude M.;'' to Contrel. Combined handling, testing, and
sorting machine for integrated circuitt. 272,913, 3-6-84, CI. DI5-
Bolton, James C, to Industrial Tools, Inc. Tape slitter. 272,91 1, 3-6-84,
CI. DI5-I27.000.
Brookes, Malcolm J.: See—
Heinzelman, Bert D.; Brookes, Malcolm J.; and Spranger, Douglas
M., 272,906, CI. DI4.58.000.
Brown, Warner K.: See—
Kirby, Robert L.; Brown, Warner K.; and Lanci, Dennis M.,
272,956, CI. D34-37.000.
Bruce, Marilyn M. Jewelry pendant or the like. 272,891, 3-6-84, a.
Dl 1-78.000.
Bull, LaVera R. Communion rail. 272,948, 3-6-84, CI. D25-38.O0O.
Bursi, William; and DePartout, Thomas. Toy worm or similar article.
272,931. 3-6-84. CI. D21-I48.000.
Bums, Daniel E. Dual liquid ice probe. 272,941, 3-6-84, CI. D23-I.O0O.
California RAD: See-
Jones, Lawrence T.; Sims, Anson; Howden. Ashley G.; Knighton,
Mark S.; and Kingsbury, L. C. Janes. 272,925, CI. D2 1-74.000.
Casetta, Gino, to Sirood Patenu N.A.N. V. Sport shoe. 272,866, 3-6-84,
CI. D2-309.000.
PI 51
PI 52
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Cervintes, Rafael T., to Westbury Foundation, The; and Sociedad de
Dispositivos Reductores de Tabaco, S.A. Combined lighter and
cigar/cigarette filter perforator. 272,950, 3-6-84, CI. D27-38.000.
Cervantes, Rafael T., to Westbury Foundation, The; and Sociedad de
Dispositivos Reductores de Tabaco, S.A. Combined lighter and
cigar/cigarette filter perforator. 272,951, 3-6-84, CI. D27-38.000.
Chambers, Jeffrey M; and Kata, Joseph, to Milton Bradley Interna-
tional, Inc. Electronic game board. 272,919, 3-6-84. CI. D21-24.000.
Chaparral Communications, Inc.: See—
Taggart, Robert B.; and Taylor, Howard H-, 272,910. CI. D14-
90.000.
Chapman, Leif H., to General Motors Corporation. Vehicle wheel
cover. 272,897, 3-6-84, CI. D 12-2 11.000.
Clark Equipment Company: 5w—
Kirby, Robert L.; Brown, Warner K.; and Land, Dennis M..
272,956, CI. D34.37.000.
Witciak, Stanley, 272,909, CI. D 15-28.000.
Cohen. Piet, to Materias Flasticas, Limitada. Brush holder and brush for
toilet. 272,874. 3-6-84. CI. D6-86.000.
Contrel:See—
Boissicat, Claude M., 272,913, CI. D15-147.000.
Coons, John C; and Beirise, Jean M., to Masco Corporation of Indiana.
Telephone base station. 272,907, 3-6-84, CI. D 14-58.000.
Corey. Charles D.; and Pia, Francesco A. Marine rescue and recre-
ational board. 272,935, 3-6-84. CI. D2 1-228.000.
Coughlin. Vincent D. Bacteriological loop holder. 272.944. 3-6-84. CI.
Davis, Paul, to Loach Manufacturing Co. Ltd. Carryins case for cash
272,869, 3-6-84, CI. D3-73.000.
Dawes, Kerry G., to Praegitzer. Dennis A. Propeller counterweight
bearing assembly. 272,912. 3-6-84. CI. D15-143.000.
de Nevers. Noel H.: See—
Gardner, James H.; and de Nevers, Noel H., 272,882. CI. D7-
70.000.
DePartout, Thomas: See—
Burgi, William; and DePartout, Thomas, 272.931, CI. D21-148.000.
Designs for Vision, Inc.: See—
Feinbloom, Richard E.; Lepczynski, Richard; and Oleksy, Wladvs-
law, 272,915. CI. D16-130.000.
Dowrick, David C; and Lanning, John M., to Hamischfeger Corpora-
tion. Mobile crane. 272.955, 3-6-84, CI. D34-34.000.
Dropik, Martin J., to Quaker OaU Company, The. Push toy. 272,927.
3-6-84, CI. D2 1-92.000.
Dufour, Kenneth L.: See-
Stone, Robert D.; and Dufour, Kenneth L., 272,943, CI. D24-
Dunlop Limited: See—
Popplewell. Frank W., 272,934, CI. D2 1-207.000.
Tomoda, Hiroshi. 272,899, CI. D12-141.000.
Duskin Franchise Kabushiki Kaisha (Duskin Franchise Co., Ltd.):
See —
Yamamoto, Yosuke; Kinoyama, Takehisa; and Sasagawa, Kinichi.
272.877. CI. D6-209.000.
Edelmann. Paul H. Combined sweat band and eye shield. 272,865,
3-6-84. CI. D2-241.000.
Electronic Assemblies, Inc.: See-
Sparks, James, 272,954, CI. D34-2 1.000.
F. LLI Guzzini S.p.A.: See—
Pozzi, Ambrogio. 272.879. CI. D7-2 1.000.
Pozzi. Ambrogio. 272.880, CI. D7-2 1.000.
P^>«?. Wolfgang. Sanitary fitting for a bidet. 272,942, 3-6-84, CI.
Famiglietti, Angelo. Barbecue stove. 272,885, 3-6-84, CI. D7-333.000.
Fembloom, Richard E.; Lepczynski, Richard; and Oleksy, Wladyslaw,
to Designs for Vision, Inc. Optical coupler photographic accessory.
272,915. 3-6-84. CI. D 1 6- 130.000. r o r j
Fisher, Robert C, to Quaker Oats Company. The. Toy truck. 272.928.
3-6-84, CI. D21-I33.000. "^ ' .
Forster. Karl-Heinz: See—
Friedrich, Ludwig; Johne, Hans; Forster, Karl-Heinz; Schott.
Alfred; Remhardt, Peter; Simon, Dieter; and Stockmann, Amo,
272,903, CI. D 13-40.000.
Frwdrich, Ludwig; Johne, Hans; Forster, Karl-Heinz; Schott, Alfred;
Remhardt, Peter; Sunon, Dieter; and Stockmann, Amo, to Veb
Kombmat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz". Machine control console.
272,903, 3-6-84, CI. D 13-40.000.
Gardner, James H.; and de Nevers, Noel H., to Aurora Design Associ-
ates, Inc. Server for a wine bottle or the like. 272.882, 3-6-84. CI.
D7.70.000.
General Motors Corporation: See-
Chapman. Leif H.. 272.897, CI. DI2-21 1.000.
°^k}t°^a}-J°Jl ^ ^^^ * Co.. Inc. Vending machine.
272,9 1 8, 3-6-84, CI. D20- 1 .000.
Gorei^e Tgo N.Sol.O, Velenje: See—
"^2:94';!a' mSkSS^^ "^ '^^'' ^ *'°^' '«*'•
Ouinn. Kenneth F. FlyaMe toy rotor for kite. 272,926, 3-6-84. CI.
D2 1-9 1.000.
Gutkneht. Leroy: See—
Wichinsky, Michael; and Gutkneht, Leroy. 272,920, Q. D21-
37.000.
Gwaltney, Madison W.; and Longserre, Goodrich W. Hidden mount-
able strap for billfold or the like. 272,867, 3-6-84. CI. D2-400.000.
Hand, Wiliiam A. Drapery for framing furniture or the like. 272,876.
3-6-84, a. D6-205.000.
Hamischfeger Corporation: See— '
Dowrick, David C; and Lanning. John M.. 272.955, Q. D34.
Heap, Jean W., to Pendelfin Studios Limited. Table ornament. 272,895.
3-6-84, CI. Dl 1-158.000.
Heinzelman, Bert D.; Brookes, Malcolm J.; and Spranger, Douglas M..
to International Telephone and Telegraph Corporation. Telephone
console. 272.906. 3-6-84. CI. D14-58.000.
Hilko. Steven E., to Quaker Oats Company. The. Toy truck. 272,929,
Holcombe, J. L., to Mizell, Emerson H. Insulation support. 272,886.
3-6-84. CI. D8-380.000.
HoUoway. Thomas F.. to Risdon Corporation. Cosmetic container
272.952. 3-6-84. CI. D28-89.000.
Howden. Ashley G.: See-
Jones, Lawrence T.; Sims, Anson; Howden. Ashley G.; Knighton,
Mark S.; and Kingsbury, L. C. James, 272,925, CI. D2 1-74.000.
Hudson, Mark: See—
Qu^, Ronald B.; Hudson. Mark; and Belson. Sharon. 272.923. CI.
D2 1-55.000.
Industrial Tools, Inc.: See—
Bolton. James C. 272,911, CI. D15-127.000.
Interdica S.A.: See—
Kanoui, Joseph, 272,878, CI. D7-6.000.
Kanoui. Joseph, 272.881. CI. D7-28.000.
International Telephone and Telegraph Corporation: See—
Heinzelman. Bert D.; Brookes, Klalcolm J.; and Spranger, Douglas
M, 272,906, CI. D14-58.000. f » • »«
Jaffee, Max. Luggage cover. 272,868. 3-6-84, CI. D3-41.000.
Johansson. Tord G. I. High pressure cover. 272,940. 3-6-84. CI. D23-
Johne. Hans: See—
Friedrich. Ludwig; Johne. Hans; Forster. Karl-Heinz; Schott,
^Y& *cil^?' *****'■ ^''"°"' ^*'*'' *™* Stockmann, Amo,
Johnson. Philip A.; and McCarthy, Alfred F., to Aavid Engineering,
Inc. Self-fastened heat sink. 272,902. 3-6-84, CI. D 13-23.000.
Johnston, Brian M. Soap stand. 272,875, 3-6-84, CI. D6-89.000.
Jones, Lawrence T.; Sims. Anson; Howden, Ashley G.; Knighton,
Mark S.; and Kmgsbury. L. C. James, to California R&D. Simulative
toy vehicle. 272.925. 3-6-84. CI. D21-74.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Bandai: See-
Murakami. Kauuji. 272.933, CI. D2I-166.000.
Kanoui. Joseph, to Interdica S.A. Cup. 272.878, 3-6-84, a. D7-6.000.
Kmjow. Joseph, to Interdica S.A. Finger-bowl. 272,881, 3-6-84, CI.
D7-28.000.
Kata. Joseph: See-
Chambers. Jeffrey M.; and Kata. Joseph. 272.919, CI. D21-24.000.
Kawano, Takeyoshi, to Sony Corporation. Earphone. 272,904, 3-6-84,
CI. D 14-30.000.
Kim, Syng N., to Wico Corporation. Control for a video game or the
like. 272.921, 3-6-84, CI. D21-48.000.
Kingsbury, L. C. James: See-
Jones, Lawrence T.; Sims, Anson; Howden. Ashley G.; Knighton,
Mark S.; and Kingsbury. L. C. James. 272,925. CI. D21-7r000.
Kmoyama, Takehisa: See—
Yamamoto, Yosuke; Kinoyama, Takehisa; and Sasagawa. Kinichi.
272.877, CI. D6-209.000.
Kirby, Robert L.; Brown. Wamer K.; and Lanci. Dennis M., to Clark
Equipment Company. Lift truck body. 272.956, 3-6-84, CI. D34-
Klecker, Barney J. Snowshoe. 272,936, 3-6-84, CI. D21-228.000.
Klecker, Barney J. Binding for a snowshoe. 272,937, 3-6-84, CI. D2I-
230.000.
Knez, Danijel: See—
Suhel, Peter; Kralj, Bozo; Knez, Danijel; and Povse, Janez.
272,945, CI. D24.36.000.
Knighton, Mark S.: See-
Jones, Lawrence T.; Sims, Anson; Howden, Ashley G.; Knighton,
Mark S.; and Kingsbury. L. C. James. 272.925. CI. D21-74000.
Kobashigawa. Dana P. H. Novelty pig figure. 272.896, 3-6-84, CI.
Kodaka, TaUuya. Scorpion figure. 272,893, 3-6-84, CI. Dn-158.000.
Kodaka, Tatsuya. Tarantula figure. 272,894, 3-6-84, CI. Dl 1-158.000.
Kralj, Bozo: See—
Suhel, Peter; Kralj, Bozo; Knez, Danijel; and Povse, Janez,
272,945, CI. D24-36.000.
Kuchenbecker, Hans J. L.: See—
Kuchenbecker, Heinz; Kuchenbecker, Hans J. L.: and Kuchen-
becker, Rolf, 272,898, CI. D 1 2- 108.000.
Kuchenbecker, Heinz; Kuchenbecker, Hans J. L.; and Kuchenbecker,
Rolf Toy car with pedal drive. 272,898, 3-6-84, Q. D12-108.000.
Kuchenbecker, Rolf: See—
Kuchenbecker. Heinz; Kuchenbecker, Hans J. L.; and Kuchen-
becker. Rolf. 272.898. CI. D 12- 108.000.
L. M. Becker A Co.. Inc.: See—
Glaser. Robert L.. 272.918. Q. D2O-I.O0O.
Lanci, Dennis M.: See—
Kirby, Robert L.; Brown, Wamer K.; and Land, Dennis M.,
272,956. a. D34-37.000.
Lanning. John M.: See—
Dowrick, David C; and Lanning, John M., 272.955. Q. D34-
34.000.
Lepczynski, Richard: See—
Feinbloom, Richard E.; Lepczynski, Richard; and Oleksy. WIadys>
law, 272,915, CI. D16-130.0(M.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
PI 53
Loach Manufacturing Co. Ltd.: See-
Davis, Paul, 272,869, CI. D3-73.000.
Longserre, Goodrich W.: See—
Gwdtney, Madison W.; and Longsen-e, Goodrich W., 272,867, CI.
Masco Corporation of Indiana: See-
Coons, John C; and Beirise, Jean M., 272,907, CI. DI4-58.000.
Materias Plasticas, Limitada: See-
Cohen, Piet, 272,874, CI. D6-86.000.
MaUuo, Toshiyuki, to Sony Corporation. Television receiver. 272,908,
3-6-84, CI. D14-77.000.
McCarthy, Alfred F.: See-
Johnson, Philip A.; and McCarthy, Alfred F., 272,902, CI. D13-
23.000.
McDaniel, Robert E. Model hobby glowplug power source with nega-
tive terminal headlock. 272,901, 3-6-84, cT. D13-8.000.
Mengshoel, Hans C; and Rykken, Oddvin. Chair. 272,873, 3-6-84, CI.
D6-26.000.
Micucci. Joseph M.. to Olympic Sales Club, Inc. Combined paper and
pencil caddy. 272.917, 3-6-84, CI. D19-78.000.
Miles, Richard; and Stokes. Adrian D., to Samsonite Corporation.
Luggage case. 272.870. 3-6-84. CI. D3-76.000.
Milton Bradley International. Inc.: See-
Anderson. Kenneth J.. 272.930, CI. D2I-144.000.
Chambers. Jeffrey M.; and Kata. Joseph. 272.919, CI. D21-24.000.
Mizell, Emerson H.: See—
Holcombe, J. L., 272,886, CI. D8-38O.O0O. •
Moreno. Norberto. Combined crib and storage unit. 272.872. 3-6-84. CI.
D6-I6.000.
Mueschke. Hennan W., Jr. Pistol grip part. 272,938. 3-6-84. CI. D22-
Murakami, Katsuji, to Kabushiki Kaisha Bandai. Toy robot. 272,933,
3-6-84, CI. D2 1-166.000.
National Can Corporation: See-
Wells, Harold T., 272.888, CI. D9-352.000.
Nippon Kogaku K.K.: See—
Tomauuri, Masakazu; and Takahashi. Chiyoji. 272.916, CI. Dl6-
132.000.
Obst, Charles J., to Vastano, Joseph J., a part interest. Wind vane
steering control for boau. 272,900, 3-6-84, CI. D 1 2-3 1 7.000.
Oleksy, Wladyslaw: See—
Feinbloom, Richard E.; Lepczynski, Richard; and Oleksy, Wladys-
law. 272,915. CI. D 16- 1 30.000.
Olympic Sales Club, Inc.: See—
Micucci, Joseph M., 272,917, CI. D19-78.000.
Parton, Denis. Clip for game goal neU. 272,887, 3-6-84, CI. D8-395.000.
Pendelfin Studios Limited: See-
Heap, Jean W., 272,895. CI. Dl 1-158.000.
Pia. Francesco A.: See-
Corey, Charles D.; and Pia. Francesco A., 272,935, CI. D21-
228.000.
Popplewell, Frank W., to Dunlop Limited. Shuttlecock. 272,934.
3-6-84, CI. D21-207.000.
Povse. Janez: See—
Suhel. Peter; Kralj. Bozo; Knez, Danijel; and Povse. Janez,
272.945. CI. D24-36.000.
Pozzi. Ambrogio, to F. LLI Guzzini S.p.A. Serving platter. 272,879,
3-6-84. CI. D7-2 1.000.
Pozzi. Ambrogio. to F. LLI Guzzini S.p.A. Hors-d'oeuvre dish.
272,880, 3-6-84. CI. D7-2 1.000.
Praeratzer. Dennis A.: See—
Dawes. Kerry G., 272,912. CI. D15-143.000.
Quaker OaU Company. The: See—
Dropik, Martm J.. 272.927, CI. D2 1 -92.000.
Fisher. Robert C, 272,928, CI. D2I-133.000.
HUko, Steven E., 272.929, CI. D2 1- 1 39.000.
Sahler, John T., 272,924, CI. D21-59.000.
Quinn, Ronald B.; Hudson, Mark; and Belson, Sharon. Bingo equipment
container. 272,923. 3-6-84. CI. D2 1-55.000. • -^ k
Rapaport, Gerald M. Child's clothes rack. 272,871, 3-6-84, CI. D6-5.000.
Readly, Paul J. Fish net handle. 272,939, 3-6-84, CI. D22-22.000.
Reinhardt, Peter: See—
Friedrich, Ludwig; Johne. Hans; Forster, Karl-Heinz; Schott.
Alfred; Reinhardt, Peter; Simon. Dieter; and Stockmann. Amo.
272.903. CI. D 13-40.000.
Rewald. Peter R. Chess set. 272,922, 3-6-84. CI. D2 1 -52.000.
Risdon Corporation: See—
HoUoway. Thomas F.. 272.952, CI. D28-89.000.
Rykken. Oddvin: See—
Mengshoel, Hans C; and Rykken, Oddvin, 272,873. CI. D6-26.000.
S.F.C. Associates. Inc.: See—
Sdbel. Ben, 272,884. CI. D7-32 1.000.
Sahler, John T.. to Quaker Oats Company. The. Toy periscope.
272.924. 3-6-84. CI. D21-59.000.
Samsonite Corporation: See—
MUes, Richard; and Stokes, Adrian D., 272,870. CI. D3-76.000.
Sasagawa. Kinichi: See—
Yamamoto, Yosuke; Kinoyama, Takehisa; and Sasagawa, Kinichi,
272,877, CI. D6-209.000.
Saiuk, John J. Toy alligator. 272,932, 3-6-84, CI. D21-IS7.000.
Scanlon, Thomas A., to Tasco Corp. Ear protector. 272,946, 3-6-84, CI.
D24-67.000.
Schott. Alfred: See—
Friedrich, Ludwig; Johne, Hans; Forster, Karl-Heinz; Schott,
M''*?' Re">h««lt. Peter; Simon, Dieter; and Stockmann, Anw,
272.903. CI. 013-40.000.
^1^''„^"' ^ S.F.C. Associates, Inc. Tea kettle or similar article.
272,884, 3-6-84. CI. D7-32I.OOO.
Sewell Plastics. Inc.: See-
Walton. Benn C. 272.889. CI. D9-370.000.
Sheett, Ronald E., to Tamarack Scientific Co., Inc. Wide field illumina-
tor. 272^14, 3-6-84, CI. DI6-32.000.
Simod PatenU N.A.N. V.: See—
Casetta, Oino, 272,866, CI. D2-309.000,
Simon, Dieter: See—
Friedrich, Ludwig; Johne, Hans; Forster, Karl-Heinz; Schott,
.JU^i Bernhardt, Peter; Simon. Dieter; and Stockmann. Amo.
272.903. CI. D 1 3-40.000.
Sims, Anson: See-
Jones. Lawrence T.; Sims. Anson; Howden, Ashley G.; Knighton,
o, . ^ff,'^..'^-: *™* '^npbury. L. C. James, 272.925. CI. D21-74.000.
Skewis. WUliam A. Multihem-height skirt. 272,864. 3-6-84. CI. D2-
Sociedad de Dispositivos Reductores de Tabaco, S.A.: See-
Cervantes. Rafael T.. 272,950, CI. 027-38.000.
Cervantes. Rafael T.. 272.951, CI. D27-38.000.
Sony Corporation: See—
Kawano. Takeyoshi, 272,904, CI. 014-30.000.
Mattuo, Toshiyuki. 272,908, CI. 014-77.000.
Sparks, James, to Electronic Assemblies, Inc. Mobile rack for holding
wire. 272.954, 3-6-84, CI. D34-2I.000.
Spranger, Douglas M.: See—
Heinzelman, Bert D.; Brookes, Malcolm J.; and Spranger, Douglas
M., 272,906, CI. D 14-58.000. ^ » . »
Steiner, Fred S. Spoon. 272.883. 3-6-84. CI. D7- 104.000.
Stockmann. Amo: See—
Friedrich. Ludwig; Johne. Hans; Forster. Karl-Heinz; Schott.
Alfred; Remhardt. Peter; Simon, Dieter; and Stockmann. Amo.
272.903, CI. D 1 3-40.000.
- Stokes. Adrian D.: See-
Miles, Richard; and Stokes, Adrian D., 272.870. CI. D3-76.000.
Stone. Robert D.; and Dufour, Kenneth L. Electrode for biomedical
. signals. 272,943, 3-6-84, CI. D24-29.000.
Stratton, Kathleen A. Button. 272.890, 3-6-84. CI. Dl 1-55.000.
Suhel. Peter; Krali, Bozo; Knez. Daniiel; and Povse. Janez. to Gorenje
Tgo N.Sol.O. Velenje. Device for the stimulation of vaginal muscles.
272.945, 3-6-84, CI. 024-36.000.
Sun, George C. Ornament. 272,892, 3-6-84, CI. Dl 1-125.000.
Taggart, Robert B.; and Taylor, Howard H., to Chaparral Communica-
tions, Inc. Feedhom for parabolic antennae. 272,910, 3-6-84, CI.
D 14-90.000.
Takahashi, Chiyoii: See—
Tomauuri, Masakazu; and Takahashi, Chiyoji. 272,916, CI. D16-
Tamarack Scientific Co.. Inc.: See—
Sheeu. Ronald E.. 272.914. CI. DI6-32.000.
Tasco Corp.: See —
Scanlon. Thomas A.. 272.946, CI. D24-67.000.
Taylor, Frank. Dishwasher. 272.953, 3-6-84. CI. D32-2.000.
Taylor. Howard H.: See—
Taggart. Robert B.; and Taylor. Howard H.. 272.910. CI. D14-
Tomauuri. Masakazu; and Takahashi. Chiyoji. to Nippon Kogaku K.K.
Monocular. 272.9 1 6. 3-6-84. CI. D 1 6- 1 32.000.
Tomoda. Hiroshi, to Dunlop Limited. Tire for a vehicle wheel. 272.899.
3-6-84. CI. D12-I4I.000.
Valencia, C. Esteban. Font or the like. 272,958, 3-6-84, CI. D99-2S.000.
Vutano, Joseph J.: See—
Obst, Charles J., 272,900, CI. D 1 2-3 1 7.000.
Veb Kombinat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz": See—
Friedrich. Ludwig; Johne. Hans; Forster. Karl-Heinz; Schott,
Alfred; Reinhardt. Peter; Simon. Dieter; and Stockmann, Amo,
272.903. CI. D 1 3-40.000.
Walton. Benn C. to Sewell Plastics. Inc. Bottle or similar artide.
272.889. 3-6-84. a. D9-370.0O0.
Wells. Harold T.. to National Can Corporation. Bottle. 272.888. 3-6-84/
CI. 09-352.000. ■
Westbury Foundation, The: See-
Cervantes. Rafael T.. 272.950. a. D27-38.O0O.
Cervantes. Rafael T.. 272.951. CI. D27-38.000.
Wichinsky, Michael; and Gutkneht. Leroy. Gaming machine. 272.920.
3-6-84. CI. 021-37.000.
Wico Corporation: See-
Kim. Syn£ N.. 272,921, CI. D2 1-48.000.
Witczak, Stanley, to Clark Equipment Company. Fairlead mounting for
a skidder vehicle. 272,909, 3-6-84, CI. 015-28.000.
Yamamoto, Yosuke; Kinoyama, Takehisa; and Sasagawa, Kinichi, to
Duskin Franchise Kabushiki Kaisha (Duskin Franchise Co., Ltd.).
Door mat base plate or similar article. 272,877, 3-6-84. Q. D6-
209.000.
LIST OF PLANT PATENTEES
DufTett, William E., to Yoder Brothers, Inc. Chrysanthemum plant(- Kinch, Ted T., to Sun Valley Bulb Farms, Inc. Lily named Pink Sensa-
Kirsch, Ted T., to Sun Valley Bulb Farms, Inc. Lily named Rosario. Kirsch, Ted T., 5,199, CI. 68 000
5,199, 3-6-84, CI. 68.000. - Kinch, Ted T., 5.200, CI. 68.000.
Kirsch, Ted T., to Sun Valley Bulb Farms, Inc. Lily named White YodJ?B?5thIS Jic^'SU-^'' ^^'^
Dream. 5.200, 3-6-84. CI. 68.000. Duffett, WUliamE., 5,202. CI. 74.000.
LIST OF DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS
APPLICANTS TO WHOM
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS WERE ISSUED ON THE 6th DAY OF
MARCH, 1984
Published at the request of tlje applicant or owner in accordance with the Notice of Dec. 16. 1969. 869 O. G. 687.
Eveland, Richard E.: See-
Hall. Lon E.; and Eveland. Richard E.. TI04.003. CI. 364-200.000.
Code. Donald F.: See-
Morrison. John F.; Jensen. Harold E.; and Code. Donald F..
T104.002. CI. 312-214.000.
Hall, Lon E.; and Eveland. Richard E. Synchronous dau link slow-poll
protocol. T104.003. 3-6-84. CI. 364-200.000.
Jensen, Harold E.: See-
Morrison, John F.; Jensen. Harold E.: and Gode. Donald F..
T104,002. CI. 312-214.000.
PI 54
Kunter, Richard S.; and Tumey, John R. Method for recovering gold
from refractory ores. T104.001, 3-6-84. CI. 75-1 18.00R.
Morrison. John F.; Jensen, Harold E.; and Gode. Donald F. Modular
insulated cabinet construction. T104,002. 3-6-84. CI. 312-214.000
Tumey. John R.: See—
Kunter. Richard S.; and Tumey, John R., T104,001, CI. 75-
118.00R.
von Rymon Lipinski, Gert-Wolfhard. Taste improvement of table top
preparations containing Acesulfame K. T104.004, 3-6-84. CL
426-548.000.
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
ISSUED MARCH 6, 1984
Note.— First number, class; second number, subclass; third number, patent number
CLASS2
114 4.434.511
129 4.434,512
410 4,434.513
42S 4.434.514
CLASS3
13 4.434.515
CLASS4
252 R 4.434.516
585 4,434,517
CLASS*
527 4.435.181
CLASS 12
142 RS 4,434,518
CLASS 15
1.7 4.434.519
214 4,434,520
230.11 4,434,521
256.51 4,434,522
CLASS 16
4,434,523
4.434.524
4.434.525
CLASS 17
4.434.526
4.434.527
4.434.528
4.434.529
Re.31.527
242
250
355
11
33
31
CLASS 19
0.46 4,434,530
99 4.434.531
IS9 R 4,434.532
247 4,434,533
CLASS 23
293 R 4,435.183
295 R 4.435.182
300 4.435.184
CLASS 24
67.1 4,434.534
241 PP 4.434,536
380 4,434,537
562 R 4,434,535
CLASS 29
33.2
157.3 V
402.11
526 R
566.4
576 B
578
596
598
599
623
832
837
861
876
4,434.538
4.434,539
4.434.540
4,434.541
4,434.542
4.434,543
4.434.544
4,434.545
4.434,546
4.434.547
4.434.548
4.434.549
4.434.550
4.434.551
4.434.552
34.1
90.8
92
123.4
148 R
174 L
174 P
241
366
4
28
86
7.3
CLASS 30
4.434.553
4.434.554
4.434.555
4.434.556
CLASS 33
4.434.557
4.434.559
4.434.558
4.434.560
4.434.561
CLASS 34
4.434,562
4,434.563
4.434.564
CLASS 36
4.434.565
CLASS 38
4.434.566
157
518
545
617
90
6.5
IS
63
100
CLASS 40
4.434.567
4.434,568
4,434.569
4.434.570
CLASS 42
4,434,571
CLASS 43
4,434.572
4,434,573
4,434,574
4.434.575
CLASS 44
53 4.435.186
63 4.435,187
68 4,435,185
CLASS 47
39 4,434.576
81 4.434.577
CLASS 48
111 4,435.188
CLASS 49
49 4,434,578
63 4.434,579
502 4.434.580
CLASS SI
67
101 R
103 TF
135 R
166 R
170 MT
170 PT
295
344
4.434.581
4.434.582
4.434.583
4,434.584
4.434.585
4.434,587
4,434.586
4.435,189
4.434,588
CLASS 52
57
58
73
145
208
209
236.2
243.1
681
716
729
730
741
745
4,434,589
4,434.590
4.434,591
4,434,592
4,434.593
4,434.594
4,434.595
4.434.596
4,434,597
4,434,598
4,434,599
Re.3 1,528
4,434,600
4,434,601
473
557
23
5
16
19
21
96
126
174
341 R
CLASS S3
4.434,602
4,434.603
CLASS S4
4,434,604
CLASS S5
4.435,190
4,435,191
4,435,192
4.435.193
4,435.194
4.435.195
4,435.196
4,435.197
CLASS S6
16.4 4,434.605
106 4.434,606
341 4,434,607
CLASS S7
58.52 4.434.608
58.86 4.434.609
294 4.434.610
328 4.434.611
331 4,434.612
CLASS 60
39.07 4.434.613
271 4,434,614
293 4.434.615
451 4.434.616
520 4.434.617
528 4.434.618
547.1
657
734
6
28
64
172
199
470
4,434,619
4,434,620
4,434,621
CLASS 62
4.434.622
4,435,198
4,434,623
4,434.624
4.434.625
4,434.626
CLASS 6S
3.12 4,435,199
64 4,435,200
CLASS 66
120 4.434,627
123 4,434.628
CLASS 68
13 A 4,434,629
18 F 4,434,630
171 4,434,631
205 R 4,434.632
267 4.434,633
CLASS 70
89 4,434,634
279 4,434,635
358 4,434,636
54
76
86
92
94
105
17
130
344
348
354
356
379
387
402
451
CLASS 71
4,435,201
4.435,202
4,435,203
4,435,204
4,435,205
4,435,206
4,435,207
4,435,208
CLASS 72
4,434,637
4,434,638
4,434,639
4,434,640
4,434,641
4.434,642
4.434.643
4.434.644
4.434.645
4.434,646
CLASS 73
1 DV
1 R
37.7
61.1 R
85
146
151
167
204
304C
618
620
622
625
641
643
701
724
861.12
861.22
861.25
861.54
862.48
864.22
4.434,648
4.434.647
4,434.649
4,434,650
4,434,651
4,434,652
4,434,653
4,434,654
4.434.655
4.434.656
4.434.657
4,434,658
4.434.659
4.434.660
4.434,661
4.434.662
4.434.663
4,434.664
4.434.665
4.434.666
4.434,667
4.434.668
4.434.669
4.434.670
4.434.671
4,434,672
CLASS 74
10.33
99A
200
409
47] R
491
682
687
805
4,434,673
4,434.674
4.434,675
4.434.676
4.434.677
4.434.678
4.434.679
4,434.680
4.434.681
4.434.682
11
53
62
124
249
251
37
38
441
451
CLASS 7S
4.435.209
4.435.210
4.435.211
4,435.212
4,435.213
4.435.214
CLASS 76
4.434,683
4,434,684
4,434,685
CLASS 81
4,434,686
4.434.687
4.434.688
CLASS 82
4 C 4,434,689
3R
CLASS 83
13
56
62
71
411 R
482
4.434.690
4,434.691
4,434,692
4,434,693
4,434.694
4.434.695
CLASS 84
1.01 4,434.696
454 4,434,697
483 A 4,434,698
CLASS 89
12 4,434.699
34 4,434,700
36 K 4,434,701
36 L 4.434,702
37 B 4,434,703
CLASS 91
25 4,434,704
50 4,434.705
375 A 4.434.706
376 R 4,434.707
436 4,434,708
506 4,434,709
CLASS 98
94 AC 4,434,710
116 LH 4,434,711
CLASS 99
646 S 4,434,712
CLASS 100
168 4.434.713
CLASS 101
38 A 4.434.714
76 4.434.715
142 4.434,716
CLASS 102
4.434,717
4.434.718
CLASS lOS
4.434.719
4.434.720
Bl 4.266.976
4.435.215
4.435,216
4,435.217
4.435.218
4.435.219
4,435,220
210
522
168
199 CB
I0«-
84
97
171
266
287.16
291
CLASS 108
4 4,434,721
8 4,434,722
CLASS 110
245 4,434,723
269 4.434.724
346 4,434,725
347 4.434.726
4.434.727
CLASS 113
84 4.434.728
121.12 4.434.729
4.434.730
121.14 4.434.731
158 A
158 E
181
220
258
39
162
211
264
4,434,733
4,434,732
4.434.734
4.434.735
4.434.736
CLASS 114
4.434,737
4,434,738
4,434,739
4,434,740
4.434,741
CLASS 118
723 4,434,742
CLASS 119
4 4.434,743
14.02 4,434,744
51 R
4,434,745
CLASS 122
448 R
449
4,434,746
4,434.747
CLASS 123
25 L
41.02
43 B
50B
143 B
146.5 A
195 C
195 R
241
286
325
339
383
438
440
472
481
489
493
494
539
549
557
564
568
587
609
4.434,748
4.434,749
4.434,750
4,434.751
4.434,752
4.434.753
4.434,754
4.434,755
4.434.756
4,434.757
4.434.758
4,434.759
4.434.760
4.434,761
4,434,762
4,434,763
4.434.764
4,434.765
4,434.766
4.434.767
4,434,768
4,434,769
4,434,770
4,434.771
4.434,772
4,434,773
4,434,774
4,434.775
4.434.776
4,434,777
4,434.778
4,434,779
CLASS 136
9B
25 R
77
121
312
400
424
438
4,434,780
4.434.781
4.434.782
4,434,783
4,434,784
4,434,785
4,434,786
4,434,787
CLASS 128
1.1 4,434,788
1.2 4,434,789
20 4,434,791
80 R 4,434,792
134 4,434,793
152 4,434,794
200.14 4,434,790
303 R 4,434,795
335 4,434,796
343 4,434,797
421 4,434,798
660 4,434,799
665 4,434,800
689 4.434.801
764 4,434,802
770 4,434,803
CLASS 131
309 4,434,804
362 4,434,805
CLASS 132
91 4,434,806
92 R
4,434,807
CLASS 134
■ 2 4,435.221
4.435,222
3 4,435,223
CLASS 13S
80 4.434.808
CLASS 136
255 4,435.610
CLASS 137
318
4,434,809
493
4,434,810
515
4.434,811
829
4,434,812
4,434.813
884
Re.3 1,529
97
109
429
CLASS 138
4,434,814
4,434,815
4,434,816
CLASS 139
4,434,817
CLASS 140
82 4,434,818
92.1 4,434,819
105 Re.31,530
CLASS 141
2 4,434,820
44 4,434,821
98 4,434,822
329 4,434,823
CLASS 144
134 D 4,4K824
193 A 4,434,825
219 4,434,826
336 4,434,827
CLASS 14S
62 4,434,828
CLASS 148
1.5
3
6.24
11.5 A
11.5Q
11.5 R
12 EA
4,435.224
4.435.225
4,435,226
4,435,227
4,435,230
4,435,228
4,435,229
4,435.231
370
417
CLASS 149
2 4.435,232
44 4,435.233
CLASS ISO
49 4,434,829
CLASS 1S2
209 R 4,434.830
356 R 4.434,831
4,434,832
4,434,833
CLASS 1S6
62.2 4,435.235
62.4 4.435.234
132 4,435.236
157 4,435.237
171 4,435,238
180 4,435.239
242 4.435.240
244.11 4,435,241
264 4,435.242
361 4,435,243
379.8 4,435,244
384 4,435,245
542 4,435,246
636 4,435,247
CLASS 160
166 A 4,434,834
CLASS 163
12 4,435.248
24 4,435,249
PI 55
y
PI 56
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
CLASS 164
34
4.434.835
429
4,434,836
468
4,434,837
483
4.434.838
4,434,839
CLASS 16S
82
4.434,840
123
4,434,841
133
4,434,842
150
4,434,843
151
4,434.844
133
4,434,845
161
4,434.846
CLASS 166
117.5
4,434.847
250
4.434,848
252
4.434,849
267
4,434,830
272
4,434,851
273
4,434,852
285
4.434,853
386
4,434,854
CLASS 169
37
4.434.855
CLASS 172
256
328
4.434,856
4.434,857
CLASS 173
12 4.434.858
48 4.434,859
147 4,434,860
CLASS 174
68.5 4,435.611
92 4,435,612
102 SC 4,435,613
117 PC 4.435.614
189 4.435.615
CLASS 175
66 4,434.861
103 4.434.862
321 4.434.863
CLASS ITS
18 4.435.616
CLASS 179
17 R
18 EB
81 B
81 R
99R
189 R
4.435,619
4,435,620
4,435,621
4.435,622
Re.31,S34
4,435,623
CLASS IM
6.2 4,434,864
19 H 4.434,865
143 4.434.866
190 4.434.867
226 4.434.868
CLASS 182
10
48
198
4.434,869
4.434.870
4.434.871
CLASS ir7
8.74 4.434.872
28 4.434.873
29 R 4.434.874
4.434.875
95 4.434.876
CLASS m
52 4.434.877
341 Re.31.531
CLASS 192
0.032
48.92
67 R
89 A
98
llOR
4.434.879
4,434.878
4.434.880
4.434,881
4,434.882
4.434.883
CLASS 19t
328 4.434.884
388 4.434.885
389 4,434.886
391 4.434.887
466 4.434.888
CLASS 300
42 T 4.435.624
61.22 4,435.625
81.9 R 4.435,626
148 R 4.435,627
CLASS 302
239 4,435.230
CLASS 203
50 4.435.251
CLASS 304
11
43 G
49
67
86
109
159.13
164
168
181 C
197
198
276
284
408
216
443
444
446
522
526
554
621
4.435.232
4.433.233
4,433.234
4,433.255
4.435,236
4.433.257
4,435.258
4.435.239
4.433.260
4.435.261
: 4.435,262
4,435.263
4.433.264
4.433.265
4.435.266
4.435.267
4.435.268
CLASS 306
4.434.889
4.434,890
4.434.891
4.434.892
4.434.893
4,434.894
4.434,895
4.434,896
CLASS 200
8R
11 R
48 AA
80
89
96
108
111
112
113
127
138
251 H
3
250
116
131
227
637
708
739
747
772
4.435,269
4.435.270
4.435.271
4.435.273
4.435.274
4.435.275
4.435.276
4,435.277
4.435.279
4.435.280
4.435.281
4.435.282
4,435,272
4,435,283
4.435.278
CLASS 309
4,435,284
4.435,285
CLASS 310
4,435,286
4.435,287
4.435.288
4.435.289
4,435,290
4,435.291
4.435.292
4.435.293
CLASS 311
1.3 4.434.897
4.434.898
41 4.434.899
189 4,434.900
CLA»313
153 4,434.901
268 4,434.902
CLASS 21S
222 4,434,903
232 4.434,904
CLASS 219
10.55 A 4.435.629
10.55 M 4,435.628
98 4;435.630
124.02 4.435.631
130.51 4.435.632
216 4,435.633
4.435,634
227 4.435.635
230 4.435.636
358 4.435.637
460 4,435,638
544 4,435,639
CLASS 230
89 A 4.434.905
268 4.434.906
276 4.434.907
4,434.908
316 4.434.909
358 4.434.910
CLASS 331
2 4.434.911
227 4.434.912
267 4.434.913
CLASS 232
133 4.434.914
4.434.913
321 4.434.916
383 4.434.917
CLASS 323
73 4.434.918
CLASS 334
42.21 4.434.919
160 4.434.920
233 4,434.921
314 4.434.922
CLASS 235
4.434.923
CLASS 236
4.434.924
4.434.925
4.434.926
CLASS 337
4.434.927
4.434.928
4.434,929
CLASS 220
4,434.930
CLASS 333
4,434.931
CLASS 335
78 M 4.435.640
CLASS 336
4.434.932
4.434.933
CLASS 237
R 4.434.934
CLASS 339
4.434,935
4.434.936
4.434.937
4.434.938
4.434.939
4.434.940
4,434.941
CLASS 341
4.434.942
4.434.943
4,434.944
CLASS 343
97
120
127
172
9
16
115
118
15
49
75
12.3
85
178
230
274
345
397.3
587
21
46.08
258
7.14
18 G
57.1
59
66
67.2
84.52 B
107
189
199
4.434.945
4.434.946
4.434.947
4.434.948
4.434.949
4.434.950
4.434.951
4.434.952
4.434.953
4.434.954
4.434.955
CLASS 244
17.25 4.434.956
35 R 4.434.957
126 4.434,958
215 4.434.959
CLASS 248
4.434.960
4,434.961
CLASS 249
4.434.962
CLASS 250
223 B 4,435.641
220.4
311.2
65
296
358.1
435
493.1
7
62
121
203
328
4,435.642
4.435,643
4.435.644
4,435.645
CLASS 351
4,434.963
4.434.964
4.434.965
4.434.966
4.434.967
CLASS 353
8.55 D
8.6
28
33.2
34
34.7
41
62.51
80
117
156
158
173
174.12
4.435.295
4.435.294
4.435.296
4.435.301
4.435.298
4.435.297
4.435.299
4.435.302
4.435.303
4,435.300
4.435.304
4.435.305
4.435.306
4.435.307
181
314
370
522 R
547
4.435,308
4.435.309
4.435,310
4.435.315
4,435.316
4.435.317
CLASS 254
1 4.434,968
29 R 4.434.969
108 4.434.970
273 4,434.971
340 4.434.972
344 4,434.973
360 4.434.974
CLASS 256
17 4.434.975
CLASS 360
112 B
123.5
152
239 A
378
397.2
397.3
397.5
400
455 R
458 F
463
465 D
501.12
502R
508
929
153
4,435.318
4.435.319
4.435.320
4.435.321
4.435.322
4.435.324
4.435.325
4.435.326
4.435.327
4.433.328
4.435.329
4.435.330
4.435.331
4.435.332
4.435.333
4.435.334
4.435,335
4.435.336
4.435.338
CLASS 261
4.435.339
CLASS 264
4.7 4.435,340
7 4.435.341
8 4.435.342
22 4.435.343
45.1 4.435.344
53 4.435.345
54 4.435.346
118 4.435.347
174 4.435.348
257 4.435.349
280 4.435.350
333 4.435.351
504 4.435.332
518 4.435.353
CLASS 266
268 4.434,976
CLASS 367
33 4.434.977
CLASS 369
69 4.434.978
CLASS 371
307 4,434,979
CLASS 373
4,434,980
78
97
136
4.434.981
Bl 4.072.309
CLASS 273
153 S 4.434.982
187 R 4.434.983
246 4.434.984
CLASS 277
37 4.434.985
42 4.434,986
80 4.434.987
81 R 4,434.988
235 B 4,434.989
CLASS 379
4 4.434.990
CLASS 380
5R
47.13 B
402
404
414.1
504
625
721
752
806
4.434.991
4.434.992
4.434.993
4.434.994
4.434.995
4,434.996
4.434.997
4.434.998
4.434.999
4.435.000
CLASS 282
11.5 A 4.435.001
27.5 4.435.002
4.435.003
TS
•
4.435.004
261 4,435,685
CLASS 385
311 4.435.686
31 4.435.005
CLASS 331
119 4.435.006
23 4.435.687
CLASS 390
99 4.435.688
44 4.435.646
CLASS 333
4.435,647
81 A 4.435.689
CLASS 393
CLASS 335
268 4.435.007
37 4.435.690
CLASS 294
CLASS 338
25 4.435.008
125 4.435.691
CLASS 296
214 4.435.692
97 H 4.435.009
238 4.435.693
100 4.435.010
CLASS 339
CLASS 397
17 C 4.435.031
113 4.433.011
36 4.435.032
355 4.435.012
45 M 4.435,033
364 4.435.013
98 4.435.034
452 4.435.014
99 R 4.435.035
453 4.435.015
CLASS 340
CLASS 399
119 4.435.696
2 4.433.016
347 AD 4.435.697
19 4.435,017
512 4.435.698
43 4.435.018
539 4.435.699
CLASS 303
4.435.700
546 4.435.701
6 A 4.435,019
671 4.435.702
6 C 4.435.020
723 4.435.703
10 4.435.021
825.01 4.435.704
CLASS 305
825.05 4,435.705
825.08 4.435,706
53 4.435.022
953 4,435.694
CLASS 307
966 4.435.695
10 AT 4.435.649
CLASS343
10 R 4.435.648
5 W 4,435.707
32 4.435.650
12 A 4,435,708
252 UA 4.435.651
14 4,435,709
297 4,433.632
17.7 4.435.712
309 4.433.653
18 E 4,435.710
455 4.435.654
389 4,435.711
490 4,435.655
702 4.435.713
513 4.435.656
753 4.435.714
516 4.435.657
771 4.435.715
330 4.435.658
895 4,435.716
CLASS 308
CLASS 346
2 R 4.435.023
1.1 4.435.717
217 4.435.024
75 4.435.718
CLASS 310
4,435.719
68 R 4.435.659
70 R 4.435.660
90 4.435.661
168 4.435.662
4.435,720
140 R 4,435,721
153.1 4,435.722
154 4.435.723
186 4.435.664
CLASS 350
306 4,435.663
96.20 4.435.036
307 4.435.665
4.435,037
328 4.435.666
96.21 4.435.038
367 4.435.667
96.25 4.435.039
CLASS 313
96.33 4.435.040
31 4,435.025
45 4.435,026
222 4.435.027
258 4.435.028
320 4.435.029
351 4.435.030
162.24 4.435,041
281 4.435.042
288 4.435.043
302 4.435.044
310 4.435.045
334 4.435.046
4.435.047
CLASS 313
357 4,435.048
388 4.435.668
454 4.435.049
634 4,435.669
CLASS 351
CLASS 315
160 R 4.435.050
58 4.435.670
200 R 4.435.671
208 4.435.051
239 4.435.052
366 ^ 4.435.672
CLASS 352
CLASS 318
86 4.435.053
254 A 4.435.673
CLASS 353
640 4.435.674
95 4.435.054
CLASS 320
CLASS 354
22 4.433.673
4 4.435.033
CLASS 322
21 4,435.036
33 4.433.676
173.1 4.435.060
173.11 4.435.061
CLASS 323
303 4,435.062
235 4.435.677
315 4.435.063
273 4.435.678
403 4.435.058
350 4.435.679
426 4,435.037
433 4.435,059
CLASS 334
316 4.435.680
CLASS 355
459 4.435.681
1 4.435,064
3 DD 4.435.065
CLASS 339
3 FU 4.433.069
107 4.435.682
4,433.072
CLASS 330
3 R 4.433.068
3 SC 4.435.066
2 4.435.683
3 TR 4.435.067
51 4.435.684
8 4.435.070
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
10 4.435.071
13 4.433.073
4.433,074
35 4.435.075
41 4.435.076
51 4.433.077
CLASS 356
121 4.433.078
123 4.433.079
426 4.433.080
CLASS 357
79 4.433.724
CLASS 358
4.435.725
4.435.726
4.435.727
4.435.728
4.435.729
4.435.730
4.435.731
4.435.732
4.435.733
4.435.734
36
135
139
140
183
213
243
234
302
333
CLASS 360
74.4 4.433.735
103 4.435.736
CLASS 361
280 4.435.737
321 4.433.738
346 4.435.739
398 4.435.740
401 4.435.741
433 4.435.742
CLASS 362
20
219
21
2S
S4
SS
177
4.435.743
4.435.744
CLASS 363
4.435.745
4.435.746
4.435.747
4.435,748
4.435.749
4.435.750
CLASS 364
200 4.435.752
4,435.753
4,435,754
4,435,755
4.435.756
4.435.757
4.435.758
4.435.759
4.435.761
4.435,762
4,435.763
4,435,764
4.435,765
300 4.435,766
« 4.435.767
426 4.435.768
444 4.43S.7A)
464 4.433,769
474 4.435.771
«• 4.435.770
SaO 4.433,772
574 4.435.751
716 4.435.782
784 4.435.773
726 4.435.774
900 4.435.775
4.435.776
4.435.777
4.435.778
4.435.779
4.435.780
4.435.781
CLASS 365
5 4.435.783
8 4.435.784
147 4.435.785
154 4.435.786
174 4.435.787
155 4,435,788
203 4.435.789
218 4.433.790
230 4,433,791
4.435.792
233 4,435.793
CLASS 366
18 4.435.081
47 4.435.082
114 4.435,083
130 4.435.084
133 4.435.085
CLASS 367
4.435.794
CLASS 368
16 4.435,795
22 4.435.086
76 4.435.087
88 4.435.088
204 4.435.089
320 4.435.090
321 4.435.796
CLASS 369
32 4.435.797
72 4.435.798
77.2 4.435.799
225 4.435,800
275 4.435.801
286 4,435,802
CLASS 370
16 4,435,803
69.1 4.435.804
CLASS 371
4.435.805
4.435.806
4.435.807
CLASS 372
4.435.808
4.435.809
4.433.810
CLASS 373
4.433.811
4.433.812
4.433.813
4.435,814
4.435.815
4.435.816
4.435,817
4,435.818
4.435.819
4.435.820
25
50
11
49
58
39
72
76
81
91
103
104
119
161
CLASS 374
20 4,433.091
129 4.435.092
4.435.093
191 4.435.094
194 4,435.095
CLASS 375
1 4,435.821
4.435.822
14 4,435.823
46 4.435.824
113 4.435.825
115 4,435.826
CLASS 376
108 4,435.354
208 4.435.355
216 4.435.356
272 4.435.357
4.435.358
CLASS 377
44 4.435.827
CLASS 378
49 4.433.828
60 4.435.829
197 4.435.830
CLASS 381
7 4,435.618
30 4.435.831
34 4.433.832
44 4.433.617
109 4,433,833
CLASS 383
7 4,433,834
8 4.433.835
27 4.435.836
41 4.435.837
68 4.435.838
CLASS 384
103 4.435.839
147 4.435.096
221 4.435.097
CLASS 400
674 4.433.098
CLASS 401
143 4.435.099
CLASS 403
27 4.435.100
109 4.433.105
122 4,435,101
206 4.435.102
292 4.435.103
332 4.435.104
CLASS 404
6 4.435.106
10 4.435.107
CLASS405
209 4.435.108
14
CLASS 408
4.435.109
CLASS 409
II 4.435.110
CLASS 411
4.435.112
4,435.111
368
437
CLASS 414
330 4,435,114
347 4.435.113
490 4.435.115
620 4.435.117
4.435.119
728 4.435.116
735 4.433,120
744 R 4.435.118
CLASS 415
56 4.435.121
121 B 4.435.122
CLASS 416
95
119
132 B
186 R
4.435.123
4.435.124
4.435.125
4.433.126
CLASS 417
26
4.435.127
63
4.435.128
151
4.435,129
310
4.435.130
334
4.435.131
360
4.435.132
364
4.435.133
428
4.435,134
511
4.435.135
CLASS 418
55 4.435.136
4.435.137
131 4,435.138
201 4.435.139
259 4.435,140
CLASS 419
3 4,435,359
49 4.435.360
CLASS 423
12 4.435.361
56 4.435.362
145 4.435.364
270 4.435.363
CLASS 423
6
10
40
76
147
158
228
321 R
403
415 A
439
447.3
460
461
472
4.435.366
4.435.367
4.435,368
4.433.363
4.433.369
4.435.370
4.435.371
4.435.372
4.435.373
4.435.374
4.433.375
4.435.376
4.433.377
4.435.378
4.435.379
CLASS 424
49
54
66
78
101
177
180
181
243
244
246
248.3
248.31
250
251
256
258
263
266
267
269
270
4.435.380
4.433.381
4,433.382
4.435.383
4.435,384
4,435.385
4.435,386
4.435.387
4,435.388
4.435.389
4.435.390
4.435.391
4.435.392
4.433.393
4,433.394
4.435.395
4.435.396
4.435.397
4.435.398
4.435.399
4.435,400
4.433.401
4.433.402
4.435.403
4.435.404
4.435.405
4.435.406
4,435.407
4.435.408
4,433.409
4,435,410
4,435,41 1
4.435.412
4.435.413
271
272
273 B
273 P
274
277
283
318
319
324
323
330
356
131.1
145
130
332
438
534
577
3
18
36
43
108
266
557
565
631
651
656
658
10
14.1
38
49
54.1
93
94
234
385.5
4.435.414
4.433.415
4.435.417
4,433.418
4,435.416
4.435.419
4.435.420
4.433.421
4.435.422
4.435.423
4.435.424
4.435.426
4,435.425
4,435.449
4.433.427
CLASS 425
4.433.141
4.433,142
4.435.143
4,435.144
4.435.145
4.433.146
4.435.147
CLASS 436
4.435.428
4.435.429
4,435.430
4.435,431
4.435.432
4.435.434
4.435.433
4.435.435
4.435.439
4.433.436
4.435.437
4.435.438
4.435.440
CLASS 427
4,435.441
4,435.442
4.435,443
4,435.444
4.435.445
4.435.446
4.435.447
4,435,448
4,435,450
CLASS 428
15
17
35
36
58
65
91
95
129
141
156
158
167
195
215
234
283
294
320.8
333
378
391
409
412
462
463
342.8
348
550
333
366
693
694
4,433.451
4.435.452
4.435.433
4.433.454
4.435.455
4.435.456
4.433.457
Re.31.333
4.435.458
4.435.459
4.435,460
4.435.461
4,435.462
4.435.463
4,435.464
4,435.465
4.433,466
4.435.467
4.433,468
4.435.469
4.435.470
4.433.471
4.433.472
4.433.473
4.433^474
4.433.473
4.433.476
4.433.477
4.433,478
4.433.479
4,435.480
4.435.481
4,435.482
4.435.483
4.435.484
4.433.483
CLASS 429
1
70
191
212
17
43
49
58
87
122
218
285
288
318
350
419
434
4.435.486
4.433.487
Re.31.332
4.433.488
CLASS 430
4.433.489
4.433.490
4.433.491
4.433.492
4.435.493
4.435.494
4.435.495
4.435.496
4.435.497
4.435,498
4.435,499
4,435.500
4,4351301
489 4,435,302
548 4.435.503
CLASS 431
7 4.435.148
12 4,435,149
46 4.435.150
90 4.435.151
170 4,433.152
208 4,435,153
328 4,435,134
4,435,155
359 4,435.156
CLASS 433
30 4.435.157
38 4.435.158
106 4.435.159
CLASS 433
9 4.435.160
132 4,435,161
CLASS 434
215 4.435.162
263 4.435.163
337 4.435.164
CLASS 435
7 4.435.504
34 4.435,505
189 4.435.506
262 4.435.507
284 4.435.508
CLASS 436
518 4,435,509
CLASS 441
130 4,435,165
CLASS 455
4,435,840
4,435.841
4.435,842
4.435.843
4.435.844
4.433.845
4.433.846
4.435.847
4.435.848
4.435.849
4.435.850
33
180
181
205
218
228
253
260
327
601
606
CLASS 464
172 4.435,166
CLASS 494
16 4,435.167
20 4.435,168
4.435.169
CLASS 500
21
22
32
90
96
117
22
65
71
74
101
107
134
157
209
319
51
63
92
107
173
4.435.588
CLASS 501
4.435.511
4,433.312
4,433.510
4.433.513
4.435.514
CLASS 502
4.435.311
4.435.313
4.433.516
4.435.517
4.433.313
4.435.318
4,435.519
4,433.320
4.433.314
4.433.312
4.435.521
4.435.522
CLASS 521
4.435.523
4.435.524
4.435.525
4.435.526
4.433.327
CLASS 523
332
426
312
37
92
106
292
321
378
391
492
558
780
4,435.528
4.435.329
4.435,530
CLASS 534
4.435.531
4.435.532
4.435,533
4,435.534
4.433.333
4.433.536
4.435.537
4.435.538
4.435.539
4.435.540
PI 57
CLASS 535
64 4,435,341
118 4.435.542
143 4.435.343
146 4.433.544
344 4.435.343
418 4.433.546
420 4.435.347
431 4.433.548
504 4.435.549
CLASS 536
73 4.435.530
101 4,433.331
140 4.433.552
201 4.435.353
229 4.435.354
261 4.433.335
317 4.435.536
CLASS 528
45 4,435.558
73 4.433.359
170 4.435.560
193 4.435.561
272 4.435.562
493 4,433.337
CLASS 536
18.1 4,435.563
87 4.435.564
CLASS 543
416 4,435.365
CLASS 544
4.435,566
4,435,567
4,433.568
4.435.569
4.435.570
4.435,571
CLASS 546
4.435.572
4,435.573
4,435.574
4.435.575
CLASS 548
4,435.576
4.435.577
4.433.578
4.435.323
117
165
182
280
384
228
250
321
341
164
221
309
473
12
248
352
414
415
446
464
410
CLASS 549
4.435.379
4.435.580
4.435.581
4.435.582
4,433.383
4.435.384
4.433.385
4,433.386
CLASS 556
4.433.587
CLASS 560
48 4.435.589
61 4.435.390
73 4.433.591
91 4.435.592
119 4.435.593
205 4.435.594
234 4.435,593
CLASS 562
481 4,433,596
306 4.435.597
346 4.435,598
CLASS 564
433 4.433.399
464 4.435.600
430
470
701
854
878
324
443
480
670
4
49
174
177
190
263
365
368
410
896
153
CLASS 568
4.433.601
4.433.602
4,433.603
4.433.604
4.435.603
CLASS 5U
4,435,606
4.435.607
4,435.608
4.433.609
CLASS 604
4.433,170
4,433.171
4.435,174
•4.435.173
4.433.176
4.433.177
, 4.435.178
i 4,435,172
4,435,179
4,435.180
CLASS 609
4,435.173
PI 58
CLASSIFICATION OF DESIGNS
D2-
D3-
D6—
D7-
P —
223
241
309
400
41
73
76
5
16
26
86
89
205
209
6
21
272.864
272.865
272.866
272,867
272,868
272.869
272.870
272.871
272.872
272.873
272.874
272,875
272.876
272.877
272,878
272.879
D8—
D9—
Dll-
28
70
104
321
333
380
395
352
370
55
78
125
158
272.880
272.881
272.882
272.883
272.884
272.885
272.886
272.887
272.888
272.889
272.890
272.891
272,892
272.893
272.894
272,895
D12—
D13-
D14—
108
141
211
317
8
23
40
30
53
58
77
90
D15- 28
127
272.896
272.898
272.899
272.897
272.900
272.901
272.902
272,903
272,904
272,905
272,906
272,907
272,908
272.910
272.909
272,91 1
DU
D19—
D20-
D21-
143
147
32
130
132
78
1
24
37
48
52
55
59
74
91
92
272,912
272.913
272,914
272.915
272.916
272.917
272.918
272,919
272,920
272,921
272,922
272,923
272,924
272,925
272.926
272.927
D22-
D23-
D24-
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS
133
272.928
31
272,944
139
272,929
36
272,945
144
272,930
67
272,946
148
157
166
207
228
272,931
272,932
272.933
272.934
272.935
272,936
D25-
D27-
1
38
92
38
272,947
272,948
272,949
272.950
272,951
230
272,937
D28—
89
272.952
1
272,938
D32—
2
272.953
22
272,939
D34-
21
272.954
1
272,941
34
272.955
01
272.940
37
272.956
23
272,942
D92-
31
272.957
29
272,943
D99-
25
272.958
68
5.199
5.200
5.201
74 5.202
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS APPLICATIONS
[Notice of Dec. 16, 1969, 869 O.G. 6877]
75— 118 R T104.001
312-
214 T104.002
364— 200 T104.003
426— 548 T104.004
-£>
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX
OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
(U.S. States, Territories and Armed Forces, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and the Canal Zone)
Alabama 1
Alaska 2
American Samoa 3
Arizona 4
Arkansas 5
California 6
Canal Zone 7
Colorado 8
Connecticut 9
Delaware 10
District of Columbia 11
Florida 12
Georgia 13
Guam 14
Hawaii 15
Idaho 16
Illinois 17
Indiana 18
Iowa 19
Kansas 20
Kentucky
Louisiana
Maine
Maryland
Massachusetts ....
Michigan
Minnesota
Mississippi
Missouri
Montana
Nebraska
Nevada
New Hampshire
New Jersey
New Mexico
New York
North Carolina .
North Dakota ...
Ohio
Oklahoma
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Oregon 41
Pennsylvania 42
Puerto Rico 43
Rhode Island 44
South Carolina 45
South Dakota 46
Tennessee 47
Texas 48
Utah 49
Vermont 50
Virginia 51
Virgin Islands 52
Washington 53
Wesf'Virginia 54
Wisconsin 55
Wyoming 56
U.S. Air Force 57
U.S. Army 58
U.S. Navy 59
(First number in listing denotes location according to above key. Refer to patent number in body of the OfTicial Gazette to obtain details
as to inventor name, location, etc.)
PATENTS
1 :
4.434.856
4,435,416
4,434,834
4,434,914
4.435.364
4,434.927
4,435,372
4.435.446
4,434,881
4,434.939
4.435.422
4.435.044
4,435,622
4.435.452
4.434.891
4.434,943
4.435,438
4.435.052
2 :
4,435,795
4,435,480
4,434,922
4.434.995
4.435,444
4.435.269
4 :
4,434,872
4,435,547
4.434.993
4.435.026
4,435,464
4.435.306
4,434,956
4,435,572
4,435,030
4.435.113
4,435,486
4.435.505
4,434,961
4,435,612
4,435,088
4,435.367
4,435,506
4.435.549
4,434,975
4,435.639
4,435,095
4,435,384
4.435.593
4,435.617
4,435.232
4,435,715
4,435,177
4.435,695
4,435,607
4,435,635
4,435,303
4,435,726
4,435,180
4,435,708
4,435.620
4,435,710
4,435,369
4,435,732
4.435.229
4,435,713
4.435.833
4,435.781
4,435,433
4,435.74)
4,435.278
4,435,791
4.435.841
4.435.783
. «—'
4,435,762
4,435.753
4,435.283
4,435,823
4.435,844
25 : 4.434.524
5 :
4,434,931
4.435.758
4.435.379
13 : 4,434.539
18 : Re.31.529
4.434.541
4,435,083
4,435,779
4.435.504
4.434.602
4.434.545
4.434.579
6 :
4.434,514
4,435,784
4.435.616
4.434.814
4.434.650
4.434.724
4,434,516
4,435,792
4.435.642
4.434.957
4,434,664
4.434,786
4,434,576
4,435,797
4,435.658
4.435.138
4,434,720
4.435.062
4,434,584
4,435,807
4.435.664
4.435.305
4,435.105
4.435.071
4,434,589
4,435,839
4.435,684
16 : 4.434.517
4.435.143
4.435.079
4,434,599
4,435,846
4,435,696
17 : 4.434.529
4.435.323
4.435.097
4,434,624
8 : 4,434,513
4,435,701
4,434,546
4.435,638
4,435.164
4,434,638
4,434,536
4,435.714
4,434.551
4,435.648
4,435,168
4,434,647
4,434,549
4.435.734
4,434,562
4.435.686
4.435.195
4.434.662
4,434,565
4.435.736
4.434.573
4.435.691
4.435.214
4.434.686
4,434,641
4.435.756
4.434.637
4.435.724
4.435.289
4,434,689
4,434,903
4,435,786
4.434,667
4.435.731
4.435.318
4,434,696
4.434,920
4,435,790
4,434,680
4.435.799
4.435.424
4,434,702
4,435,017
4,435,831
4,434,712
19 : 4,434,590
4.435.470
4,434.717
9 : 4,434,674
4.435.836
4,434,721
4,4K616
4.435.476
4.434.793
4,434,691
08 : 4,434,564
4,434,781
4,435,115
4.435.514
4.434,794
4,434,726
4.435.469
4,434,822
4,435,683
4.435.580
4,434,806
4,434,747
09 : 4.434.677
4,434.877
4.435,737
4.435.581
4,434,919
4.434.837
4.434.727
4.434,893
20 : 4,434,567
4,435.628
4,434,925
4.434.952
4.434.838
4,434,894
4,434,968
4.435.645
4,434.937
4.434.994
4,434.884
4,434,904
21 : 4.434,618
4.435.655
4,434,938
4.435.123
4,435,055
4,434,913
4,434,826
4.435.667
4,434.944
4,435,149
4,435,112
4,434,949
4,434,902
4.435.689
4.434.954
4,435,169
4,435,435
4,434,963
4,435,279
4.435.764
4,434,971
4,435,241
4,435,455
4,434,986
4,435.515
4,435.808
4,434,982
4.435.259
4,435,578
4,434,988
4.435.634
4.435.837
4,435,045
4,435,396
4,435,674
4,434,991
22 : 4.434.594
4.435.847
4.435,084
4.435.584
10 : 4,434,828
4,435,010
4.434.853
26 : Re.3 1.531
4,435.094
4.435.647
4,435,037
4,435,016
7 4.434.869
■^ 4,434,960
4.434.561
4.435.100
4,435,803
4.435.205
4,435,125
4,434.578
4.435.102
01 : 4,434,659
4.435.206
4,435,131
4,434.980
4,434,598
4.435,132
04 : 4,435,678
4.435.383
4,435,135
4.435.370
4,434,621
4.435,141
06 : 4,434,569
4.435.568
4.435,150
4,435.518
4,434,656
4.435,173
4,434,642
4.435.586
4,435,171
23 : 4.434.572
4,434,670
4,435,174
4.434.663
12 : 4.434,575
4,435.183
4,435,461
4,434,708
4,435.225
4,4H7I5
4,434,581
4,435.282
24 : Re.31,532
4,434,722
4,435.271
4,434,799
4,434.740
4,435,301
4.434.748
4,434,750
4,435.273
4,434,823
4.434,801
4,435,311
4,434.813
4.434.752
PI 59
PI 60
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
06
06
4,434,754
4,435.032
4,434,762
4.435.040
4,434,763
4.435.082
4,434,765
4.435.114
4,434.857
4.435.199
4,434.866
4.435.218
4.434.970
4,435.253
4.435.116
4,435,254
4.435.133
4,435,261
4.435.381
4,435,262
4.435.445
4,435,267
4.435.463
4.435,270
4.435.528
4,435.272
4,435.548
4.435.275
4.435,573
4.435.284
4,435,592
4.435.293
4,435.605
4.435.294
4.435.742
4.435.316
27 :
Re.31,S33
4.435.326
4.4H625
4.435.328
4.434,808
4.435.331
4.434,867
4,435.380
4,434.883
4.435.382
4.4H899
4.435.387
4.434.953
4.435.388
4,434.969
4.435.398
4,435,028
4.435.407
4,435.041
4.435.412
4.435,073
4.435.413
4,435.160
4.435,428
4,435,302
4,435,434
4,435,652
4,435,441
28 .
4,434,791
4,435,453
29 :
4,434,606
4,435,516
4,434,921
4.435.519
4,435,147
4,435.520
4,435,204
4,435,521
4,435,335
4,435,555
4,435,348
4,435,561
30 :
4,435,386
4,435,588
4,435,694
4,435,590
11 :
4,434.789
4,435,669
4.434.824
4,435,670
4.434.936
4,435,707
4.435.201
4,435,729
4.435,352
4,435,730
32 :
4,434,614
4,435,757
4.435.354
4,435,776
4.435.719
4,435,809
33 :
4.434.745
35 : 4,434,862
4.434.965
4,434,929
4.435,085
36 : Re.3 1,530
4,435,244
4,434,515
4.435.794
4,434,552
34 :
■ Re.31,534
4,434,613
4,434,554
4,434,617
4,434.571
4,434,648
4.434.633
4,434,660
4.434.655
4,434,687
4.434.690
4,434,710
.
4.434,729
4,434,725
4,434,732
4,434,737
4,434,733
4,434,784
4.434,734
4,434,790
4,434,736
4,434,816
4,434,751
4,434,841
4,434,792
4.434.887
4,434,795
4.434.889
4,434,874
4.434.984
4,434,880
4.435.005
4.435.002
4.435.025
4,435,027
4.435.039
272.872
272.891
272.910
272.91 1
272.912
272.913
272.914
272.923
272.925
272.941
272.943
09
12
13
15
17
5,202
41
272,947
272.953
272.958
272.885
272.952
272.865
272.949
272.889
272.8%
272.868
272.871
5.199
37
39
4,435.050
4,435.053
4.435,059
4,435,098
4,435,110
4.435,162
4,435,185
4,435.186
4.435.247
4.435.329
4,435.330
4.435.342
4.435.355
4.435.374
4.435.395
4.435.409
4.435.419
4.435.430
4.435,468
4,435,488
4,435.490
4.435.495
4.435.499
4.435.501
4.435.502
4.435.508
4.435.525
4.435,623
4,435,633
4,435,659
4,435,671
4,435,677
4,435,679
4,435,687
4.435,727
4.435.755
4.435.759
4.435.782
4.435.798
4.435.805
Re.3 1.527
4.434.805
4.434.871
4.434.895
4.435,145
4,435,191
4,435,197
4.435,449
Re.3 1,528
4,434,520
4,434,537
4,434,583
4,434,596
4,434,623
4,434,644
4.434.649
4.434.652
4.434.718
4,434.810
4,434,830
4,434,832
4,434,833
4,434,858
4,434,860
4,434,865
4,434,870
4,434,897
4,434,900
4,434,908
4,434,946
4,434,966
4,434,978
40
41
42
DESIGN PATENTS
19 :
25 :
26
272,888
272.918
272.921
272.930
272.948
272.955
272.917
272.919
272.954
272,897
272,922
27
31
32
33
34
36
272,932
272.956
272.936
272.937
272.901
272.920
272,902
272.892
272.906
272.944
272.883
4.434.996
4.435,156
4.435.001
4,435,163
4.435.047
4.435.175
4,435,146
4,435,213
4,435.189
4.435.219
4.435.240
4,435,223
4.435.243
4.435.231
4.435.291
4.435.250
4.435.292
4.435.300
4.435.297
4.435.353
4,435.337
4.435.400
4.435.371
4.435.418
4.435.420
4.435.439
4.435.425
4.435.448
4.435.456
4.435,450
4.435.458
4.435.472
4.435.477
4.435.473
4.435.487
4.435.474
4.435.511
4.435.481
4.435,524
4.435.529
4,435.535
4.435.539
4.435.553
4.435.559
4,435.554
4.435,709
4,435,556
4,435,712
4,435,562
4.435,801
4.435.571
43 : 4,435.624
4.435.598
44 : 4.4H557
4.435.599
4.434.930
4.435.650
4.435.154
4,435.810
4.435.155
4.435.811
45 : 4.434.632
4.435.816
4.434.761
4.435.828
4.434.787
4.434.574
4.435.031
4.434.704
4.435.181
4.434.746
4.435.467
4.434.843
4.435.738
4.434,848
4.266.976
4,434.886
47 : 4.434.807
4.434.905
4.434.896
4.435.192
4.435.023
4.435,198
4.435.109
4,435.221
4.435.239
4.435,222
4.435.256
4,435.295
4.435.257
4,435,304
4.435.534
4,435.365
4.435,595
4.435.376
4,435,693
4.435.596
48 : 4,434,653
4.435,606
4,434,675
4,435.661
4,434,676
4,435,800
4.434.698
4,434,511
4.434.811
4.434,683
4.434.812
4,434,684
4.434.847
4.434.782
4.434.849
4.434.912
4.434.850
4.435.022
4.434.851
4,435.117
4.434.852
4.435,119
4.434.854
4,434,521
4.434.861
4,434,607
4.434.863
4.434,719
4.434.967
4.4H820
4.435.029
4.434.840
4.435.121
4.434.924
4.435.172
4.435.035
4.435.187
4.435,063
4.435.217
4,435,091
4.435.252
4,435,093
4.435.263
4,435,096
4.435.264
4,435,107
4.435.299
PLANT PATENTS
5.200
5.201
49
SO
51
53
54
55
08
T104.001
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS APPLICATIONS
[Notice of Dec. 16, 19«9, M9 O.G. 6877]
4.435.309
4.435.349
4,435.361
4.435.459
4.435.517
4.435.527
4.435.530
4.435.564
4.435.602
4.435.649
4,435.703
4.435.711
4,435,718
4.435.743
4.435,744
4,435,746
4,435,749
4,435,752
4,435,763
4,435,766
4.435.777
4.435.778
4.435.780
4.435.785
4.435,824
4,072.309
4.434.688
4.434.780
4.434.864
4,434.981
4.435.822
4.435.829
4,434,699
4,434.700
4,434,983
4.435.646
4,434.558
4.434.560
4.434,743
4,434,829
4,434,855
4.434.915
4.435.015
4.435.238
4.435.258
4.435.668
4.435.850
4.434.654
4.434.959
4.435.339
4.435.363
4.435.614
4.435.716
4.435.268
4,435,359
4,435,421
4,435,546
4,434,711
4,434,773
4.434.846
4.434.901
4.434.909
4.434.974
4.435.008
4.435.178
4.435.246
.4.435.632
4.435.690
4.435.706
4.435.739
4.435,750
272.884
42 :
272,939
272.915
44 :
272,900
272.924
272,946
272.927
48 :
272,867
272.928
272,886
272.929
272,926
272.931
272,938
272.935
49 :
272,882
39 :
272.876
51 :
272,890
272.907
53 :
272,864
27
T104,002
48
T104,003
CHANGE OF ADDRESS FORM
NAME— FIRST. LAST
11
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
STREET ADDRESS
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
ciTr
STATE
Zl^ CODE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
Mail this form to: NEW ADDRESS
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office SSOM
Washington, D.C. 20A02
(or) COUNTRY
Attach last subscription
label here.
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
SUBSCRIPTION ORDCR FORM
ENTER MY SUBSCRIPTION TO:
Domestic; @ $
Fortign.
NAME— FIRST, LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
.uJ
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
ZIP CODE
(or) COUNTRY
\^ I
ill
□ Rtmittanct Ertclottd (Makt
checks payabi* to Suparin-
tandant of Documantt)
Q Charga to my Dapoiit
Account No
MAIL ORDER FORM TO:
Suptrintandtnt of Documantt
Govarnmani Printing Offica
Washington. D.C. 20402
a-M
e
/
Route to:
Vol. 1040 Number 2
OFFICIAL
eAZETTE
Of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
PATENTS
March 13, 1984
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
Malcolm Baldrige, Secretary;
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE >; ;
Gerald J. Mossinghoff, Commissioned I
U.S.
DEPARTMENT
OF COMMERCE
Patent
and
Trademark
Office
PUBLISHED WEEKLY BY AUTHORITY OF CONGRESS
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
March 13, 1984 Volume 1040 Number 2
• CONTENTS
Pige
Patent and Trademark Office Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information I040OG 8
Reissue Applications Filed . |040 OG 8
Requests for Reexaminations Filed 1040 OG 8
Notice of Availability for Licensing 1040 OG 8
Adverse Decisions in Interference . 1040 OG 9
Patent Suits |040 OG 10
Notice of Restructuring and Move of Patent Examining Corps .... 1040 OG 14
Patent Certificates of Correction 1040 OG 19
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries 1040 OG 20
Condition of Patent Applications 1040 OG 21
Reissue Patents Granted (31,535) 47|
Plant Patents Granted (5,203) 473
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,435,851) 475
Chemical (4,436,521) 709
Electrical (4,436,950) .829
Design Patents Granted (272,959) , .* 913
Index of Patentees pi |
Indices of Reissue, Design and Plant Patentees P| 49
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues) PI 53
Designs and Plants PI 56
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors
Patents (Including Reissues) PI 57
Designs p| 58
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form Back Page
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing OfTice, Washington, D.C., 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weekly.
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at $1.00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color, S8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at SI. 00 each. Address
orders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Washington, D.C., 20231.
Printing authorized by Section 1 l(a)3 of Title 33, U.S. Code PT.O.
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent Cooperation Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
^^^'JllVZ*!^*^ '**' "°"*^* appearing in the Omcial Gazette
at 1037 O.G. 12 on Dec. 13, 1983. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent OfTice as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United Sutes Receiving Office,
see the notice appearing in the Official Gazette at 1022
O.G. 52 on Sept. 28, 1982.
Domestic PCT fees were increased on Oct. 1, 1982 by
a rule change to 37 CFR 1.445 that was published at
1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. International PCT fees
were changed by the PCT Assembly effective Jan. 1,
1984 and were announced at 1037 O.G. 12 on Dec. 13,
1983. The search fee for the European Patent Office was
changed as of Feb. 14, 1984 and was announced at 1039
O.G. 142 on Feb. 21, 1984.
The current schedule of PCT fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee $ 125.00
Search fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
• Prior corresponding U.S. national
application filed 250.00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
• All cases 620.00
International Fees
Basic fee (first 30 pages) 295.00
Basic Supplemental fee (for each
page over 30) g.oO
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) lO.OQ
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Jan. 30, 1984. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
REISSUE APPUCAnONS HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
3,640^50, Re. S.N. 569,713, Filed Jan. 10, 1984, CI.
524/181, HALOGEN ATED RESINS STABILIZED
WITH NOVEL COMPOSITIONS, Uwis B. Weisfeld,
Owner of Record: Carstab Corp.. Reading. Ohio. Attor-
ney or Agent: Alvin Guttag, Ex. Gp.: 143
3,645^5, Re. S.N. 569,981. Filed Jan. 11, 1984, CI.
428/195, MOISTURE-VAPOR-PERMEABLE PRES-
SURE SENSITIVE ADHESIVE MATERIALS. Mar-
tm E. Hodgson, Owner of Record: T. J. Smith A Neph-
ew Ltd. Kingston-Upon-Huli. England. Attorney or
Agent: Albert L. Jacobs, Jr., Ex. Gp.: 164
4^7,125, Re. S.N. 571,918, Filed Jan. 19, 1984. CI.
339/1 13R. ENHANCED DETENT GUIDE TRACK
WITH DOG-LEG. David J. Ball. Owner of Record:
Automation Industries. Inc. Greenwich. Conn.. Attorney
or Agent: Thomas L. Flattery, et al.. Ex. Gp.: 322
.A^^^ ^^ S.N. 542.460, FUed Oct. 17. 1983. CI.
424/153. THERAPEUTIC DIMETHYL SULFOXIDE
COMPOSITION AND METHODS OF USE, Robert
J. Herschler. Owner of Record: Inventor. Attorney or
Agent: H. Ross Workman, et al.. Ex. Gp.: 125
I040OG8
.,f'S7,'^'.^*- ^-N- ^^•'55. Filed Dec. 28. 1983, CI.
123/647, DISTRIBUTOR FOR CONTACTLESS IG-
NITION APPARATUS FOR INTERNAL COMBUS-
TION ENGINE. Takashi Yoshinari, Owner of Record:
Hitachi. Ltd.. Tokyo. Japan. Attorney or Agent: Donald
R. Antonelli, et al., Ex. Gp.: 342
4^10,889, Re. S.N. 568,426, Filed Jan. 5, 1984, CI.
i^{SL' APPARATUS FOR ELECTRONICALLY
CONTROLLING INTERNAL COMBUSTION EN-
GINE, Masumi Imai, et al.. Owner of Record: Hitachi.
Ltd.. Tokyo. Japan. Attorney or Agent: Donald R.
Antonelli, et al., Ex. Gp.: 236
..!'?,y^^??l,^*- S-N- 571.914, Filed Jan. 18, 1984, CI.
166/120, HYDRAULICALLY SET WELL PACKER,
Albert A. Mullins, II, et al.. Owner of Record: Baker In-
ternational Corp.. Orange. Calif.. Attorney or Agent:
William C. Norvell, Jr., et al., Ex. Gp.: 356
^-^H^i^^iJia.^-N- ^^''323. Filed Jan. 16. 1984. CI.
528/206. METHOD FOR MAKING POLYIMIDES.
Tohru Takekoshi, Owner of Record: General Electric
Co.. Schenectady. N.Y.. Attorney or Agent: William A.
Teoli, et al., Ex. Gp.: 143
4,366,872, Re. S.N. 568,916, Filed Jan. 6, 1984, CI.
177/1, WEIGHING CONTROLLING FLOW RATE
WITH TARING BETWEEN WEIGHINGS, David
Brunnschweiler, et al.. Owner of Record: Inventor. At-
torney or Agent: Norman F- Obion, Ex. Gp.: 211
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requesu and related papers may be obtained by paying the
fee therefor esublished in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR 1.248(aX5) and 1.525(b)).
3,826,364, Reexam. No. 90/000,502, Requested: Feb.
10, 1984. CI. 209/3.1, PARTICLE SORTTNG METH-
OD AND APPARATUS. William A. Bonner, et al..
Owner of Record: Board of Trustees of the Leland
Stanford Junior University, Stanford. Calif. Attorney or
Agent: Flehr, Hohbach. et al.. Ex. Gp.: 312. Requester
Niels J. Reimers. Stanford. Calif.
3,934,652, Reexam. No. 90/000,498, Requested: Feb.
6, 1984, CI. 166/285, APPARATUS AND METHOD
FOR CEMENTING WELL LINERS. Chudleigh B.
Cochran, Owner of Record: Hughes Tool Co.. Houston.
Tex.. Attorney or Agent: Robert A. Felfman. Ex. Gp.:
356, Requester: Thomas R. Felger, Dallas, Tex.
4,190,602, Reexam. No. 90/000,500, Requested: Peb.
13, 1984. CI. 560/053. MONOACETALS OR ARa
MATIC 1,2-DIKETONES, Jean Brunisholz. et al.,
Owner of Record: Ciba-Geigy Corp.. Ardsley. N. Y.. At-
torney or Agent: Karl F. Jorda. Ex. Gp.: 126. Request-
er: Denis A. Firth. North Haven. Conn.
U.S. GOVERNMENT-OwPiED INVE^f^ONS
Notice of Availability for Licensing
The inventions listed below are owned by agencies of
the U.S. Government and are available for licensing in
the U.S. in accordance with 35 U.S.C. 207 to achieve ex-
March 13, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG 9
peditious commercialization of results of federally
funded research and development. Foreign patents are
filed on selected inventions to extend market coverage
for U.S. companies and may also be available for licens-
ing.
Technical and licensing information on speciflc inven-
tions may be obtained by writing to:
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
U.S. Department of Commerce
P.O. Box 1423
Springfield, Va. 22151
Please cite the number and titlr of inventions of inter-
est.
DOUGLAS J. CAMPION.
Patent Licensing.
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
National Technical Information Service
U.S. Department of Commerce.
Administration of Veterans Affairs
SN '6—288.197 (4,422,515). MOTORIZED WHEEL
CHAIR.
Department of Agriculture
SN 6—248.371 (4.417,839). AUTOMATIC HATCH-
ERY TRAY DUMPER.
SN 6—251.667 (4.421.682). HEATING OF PROTEIN-
ACEOUS LIQUIDS.
PROCESS FOR THE DE-
PULP MILL BLEACH
SN 6-352.426 (4.420,369).
COLORIZAtlON OF
PLANT EF?FLUENT.
SN 6-356.864 (4.419.120). CONTROL OF PRICKLY
SIDA. VELVETLEAF, AND SPURRED ANODA
WITH FUNGAL PATHOGENS.
SN 6—356,865 (4.424.059). PROCESS AND COMPO-
SITIONS. FOR PRESERVING FRESH HIDES
AND SKINS.
SN 6—380,375 (4,418,647). ARTIFICIAL HOST EGG
FOR REARING TRICHOGRAMMA.
SN 6—385.172 (4.421.775). METHOD FOR REMOV-
ING THE OUTER WAXY CUTIN-CONTAINING
LAYER FROM PAPAYA.
SN 6—426,439 (4.418,064), CHEMOTHER APEUTI-
CALLY ACTIVE MAYTANSINOIDS: TREFLO-
RINE, TRENUDINE, AND N-METHYLTRE-
NUDONE.
SN 6—519,783. WOOD BEAM.
SN 6—546,220. MONCOLONAL ANTIBODIES TO
PORCINE IMMUNOGLOBULINS.
SN 6—555.749. MULTI-PHASE AGRICULTURAL
HERBICIDE GRANULE METHOD.
Department of Health a Human Services
SN 6—209.305 (4.421.986). NUCLEAR PULSE DIS-
CRIMINATOR.
SN 6—221,565 (4,419,446). RECOMBINANT DNA
PROCESS UTILIZING A PAPILLOMA VIRUS
DNA AS A VECTOR.
SN 6—329,869 (4,421,913). SEPARATION OF
TRIPHENYLPHOSPHINE OXIDE FROM METH-
OTREXATE ESTER AND PURIFICATION OF
SAID ESTER.
SN 6—563,369. HEPATITIS B CORE ANTIGEN
VACCINE.
SN 6-564,515. A SHORT TOTAL SYNTHESIS OF
MORPHINAN COMPOUNDS WHICH USES CY-
CLIZATION OF A CYCLOALKYLCARBONYL
COMPOUND SELECTED FROM CYCLO-
PROPYLCARBONYL AND CYCLOBUTYLCAR-
BONYL.
SN 6—817,016 (4.419.089). BLOOD CELL SEPARA-
TOR.
Department of the Air Force
SN 6—256,362 (4.409.661). AIMPOINT SELECTION
PROCESSOR
SN 6—270,051 (4,411,715). METHOD OF ENHANC-
ING ROTOR BORE CYCLIC LIFE.
SN 6—286.819 (4.409.899). ACOUSTIC AMPLITUDE-
DOPPLER TARGET RANGING SYSTEM.
SN 6—286.820 (4.408.533). ACOUSTIC AMPLITUDE-
THRESHOLD TARGET RANGING SYSTEM.
SN 6-293.780 (4,410,293). MECHANICAL PRE-
LOAD NUT ASSEMBLY.
SN 6—339.260 (4,408.833). HOT PRESSED AND DIF-
FUSION BONDED LASER MIRROR HEAT EX-
CHANGER.
SN 6—343.031 (4.409,587). ALTIMETER CODE
CONVERTER
SN 6—343.034 (4.411,022). INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
MIXER APPARATUS.
SN 6—356,574 (4,409.423). HOLE MATRIX VERTI-
CAL JUNCTION SOLAR CELL.
SN 6—357.444 (4.408.481). PORE PRESSURE PROBE
ASSEMBLY AND TWO-STAGE EMPLACE-
MENT THEREOF
SN 6—361.020 (4.408.464). DEWAR COOLING
CHAMBER FOR SEMICONDUCTOR PLATE-
LETS.
SN 6—393.170 (4.410.376). BONDING AGENT FOR
POLYURETHANES.
SN 6—463.190 (4,411.717). SOLID ROCKET PRO-
PELLANTS COMPRISING GUIGNETS GREEN
PIGMENT.
Department of the Army
SN 6-533,611. MILLIMETER WAVE DIELECTRIC
RESONATOR AND METHOD OF MAKING.
SN 6—544.764. EVANESCENT RESONATOR FRE-
QUENCY MULTIPLIER
SN 6-550,853. CODE GENERATOR FOR MULTI-
LEVEL INTERLEAVED MULTIPLEXED
NOISE CODES.
SN 6—551.431. MULTILEVEL MATE PAIR CODE
COMPRESSOR FOR CODES EXPANDED BY
THE PROCESS OF BUTTING.
SN 6—555.774. CODE COMPRESSOR FOR MULTI-
LEVEL INTERLEAVED MULTIPLEXED
NOISE CODES.
SN 6—556,661. PSEUDO-RANDOM CONVOLU-
TIONAL INTERLEAVING.
SN 6—557.014. DUAL SPACE FED PARALLEL
PLATE LENS ANTENNA BEAMFORMING SYS-
TEM.
SN 6—558,000. WIDE FIELD OF VIEW REMOTE
POSITION SENSOR.
SN 6—559,546. METHOD OF MAKING MINIA-
TURE HIGH FREQUENCY SC - CUT QUARTZ
CRYSTAL RESONATORS.
SN 6—564,619. DETONATION PRODUCTS
CATCHER.
SN 6—565,806. MULTICHANNEL TIME DIVISION
MULTIPLEXED TRUNK TRANSMISSION
LINK.
SN 6—566,622. OPTICAL COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS.
SN 6—566,767. TIME DIVISION MULTIPLE AC-
CESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM.
Department of the Interior
SN 6—435,535 (4,423.011). SELECTIVE RECOVERY
OF BASE METALS AND PRECIOUS METALS
FROM ORES.
Adverse Dcciaiona in Interference
In the designated interference involving the indicated
claims of the following patenu, final decision having
been rendered that the respective patentees were not the
first inventors with respect to the claims listed.
Patent No. 3,737,513, Tadeusz K. Wiewiorowski and
David J. Miller, RECOVERY OF URANIUM FROM
AN ORGANIC EXTRACTANT BY BACK EX-
TRACTION WITH H3PO4 OR HF, Interference No.
101,079, decided Jan. 27, 1984, claims 2 and 3.
1040 00 10
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
Patent No. 3.926,822, Emile N. Habiby, NOVEL
^^^^^'CO!:i'rAWWG COMPOSITIONS, Interfer
ence No. 99,871. decided Jan. 6, 1984, claims 1, 3, 8 and
ewi?l^"i^°- 3,953,347, Emile N. Habiby, NOVEL
SULFUR-CONTAINING COMPOSITIONS. InterfeJ:
ence No. 100,000. decided Jan. 6. 1984, claims 1 and 3.
Patent No. 4,008.614, Robert B. Turner and Paul E
Brefka, REMOVABLE PROBE UNIT FOR ELEC-
TRONIC MEASURING SYSTEM, Interference No.
00,619. decided Sept. 27. 1983, claims 1-3. 6. 7. 9 and
^4E¥uA^^^^^.'*•25?J^^' ^'""^""^ "• Zimmerman.
METHOD OF FORMING COMPLEX SHAPED
METAL-PLASTIC COMPOSITE LEAD FRAMES
FOR IC PACKAGING. Interference No. 100,454, de-
cided Oct. 21, 1983, claims 1-5.
Patent No. 4,165,440, Leo Kim, CATALYTIC HY-
DRATION OF ETHYLENE OXIDE TO ETHYL-
ENE GLYCOL. Interference No. 100,927, decided Jan
20, 1984, claims 1 and 3.
Patent No. 4,185.529. Hiroshi Kitagawa, ELEC-
TRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT. Interference No
100.712. decided Sept. 12, 1983, claim 8.
orS*iS?' ^°- ^.194.314. John P. Foote. EJECTOR AS-
SEMBLY FOR A FIREARM ADAPTER. Interfer-
ence No. 100.932. decided Oct. 12, 1983, claims 4 and 5.
Patent No. 4,224,330, Clive A. Henrick, Jeffrey N.
Labovitz, Michael M. Leippe and Sam L. Woo, ES-
TERS AND THIOLESTERS OF BENZOTHIENYL
ACIDS, Interference No. 100,910, decided Jan. 4. 1984
claims 1-10 and 28.
Patent No. 4.235.806. Kishor A. Desai. CATIONIC
;^tfflA"Sy^,^2-P-<N-^^NZYL-N-ETHYLAMINO)
CINNAMOYL DYES. Interference No. 100.750. decid-
ed Feb. 10. 1983. claims 1 and 2.
Patent No. 4,237,222. Hideo Misaki. Yoshifumi
Honuchi. Kazuo Matsuura and Saburo Harada. LAC-
^l^ %l^R^^J^J^^^^^ POR THE MANUFAC-
TVt?^^J5^^^°'^ and analytical METHOD
AND KIT FOR THE USE OF THE SAME, Interfer-
ence No. 100,995, decided Jan. 17, 1984, claim 1.
NANNIE B. HENRY,
Deputy Clerk.
Board of Patent Interferences.
Patent Suits
Notices under 35 U.S.C. 290; Patent Act of 1952
3,703,073, Riegel Textile Corp., ANTISTATIC
YARN PRODUCTION, filed Nov. 30 1983, DC
N.D. Ill (Chicago), Doc. 83 C 8726, Brunswick Corp. v.
Riegel Textile Corp.
3,815,099, Digital Equipment Corp., DATA PRO-
^ISSJP^/S^E^; 4,229,791. Mine; DISTRIBUTED
ARBITRATION CIRCUITRY FOR DATA PRO-
CESSING SYSTEM; 4,232,3<6, same, BUS FOR
A DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH
OVERLAPPED SEQUENCES, filed Nov. 13, 1980,
D.C. Mass. (Boston), Doc. 80-255 l-K, Digital Equipment
Corp. V. System Industries, Inc
4,046,324, Joseph W. Chambers, SOLID WASTE
Sr^^^i^?*^'- *'^''"^' ^>"i«» M. Chambers,
MACERATOR, filed Feb. 9, 1979, D.C, CD. Calif!
Oos Angeles), Doc. 79-0560-MML (Px), Joseph W.
Chambers, Sr. v. William M. Chambers.
4,102,655, Cobe Laboratories, Inc., BUBBLE TRAP
filed Nov. 1, 1983. D.C, N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 83 C
7774, Cobe Laboratories, Inc. v. Gambro, Inc.
4,103,361, Evin Industries, Ltd., OUTERWEAR, filed
Sept. 29 1983. D.C, S.D.N. Y., Doc. 83-Civ-7159 SWK,
Enn Industries, Ltd v. Eagle Clothes, Inc.. et aL
4,107,292, Akzona, Inc., STABLE WATER DISPER-
SIONS OF ENCAPSULATED PARATHION, filed
Mar. 26, 1979, D.C. Del. (Wilmington), Doc. 79-157,
Pennwalt Corp v. Akzona. Inc.. et al. Judgment is hereby
entered declaring Pat. No. 4,107.292 invalid. Judgment is
hereby entered in favor of plaintifT and against defendants.
Final Judgment dated Aug. 22, 1983.
^4:iy»^^' ^°^' ^«^' International, Inc., EXTENDED
IF'^o^f^F*^^ RANGE VALVE SEAL, filed Apr.
30, 1982, D.C, S.D. Ohio (Cincinnati). Doc. C-1-82-450,
Post Seal International. Inc. v. Xomox Corp.
ii,yiM^' Comm/Scope Co.. COAXIAL DROP
S^'*^^^ J?**** A"« 3- ^'79' D.C. W.D.N.C (Statesville),
Doc. ST-C-79-21. Belden Corp. v. Comm/Scope Co. Or-
der of Dismissal filed Apr. 10, 1980.
ijy^cditv9i?'"f.^n'. ROTARY WHEEL PRINT-
ING SYSTEM, filed Apr. 27, 1983, DC. N.D. Calif.
(San Francisco). Doc. 83-2147 SC. Tokyo Electric Co..
Ltd. V. Qume Corp. Plaintiff dismisses complaint without
prejudice on Aug. 2, 1983.
wS'iS^Jf' ^i^°"« ^°^P' APPARATUS FOR AND
METHOD OF FILLING FLEXIBLE CONTAIN-
ERS, filed June 22, 1982, D.C, CD. Calif (Los
Angeles), Doc. 82-3116. Scholle Corp. v. Robert Ellert. et
al
4jl32,335, Four Star Corp.. SLIDABLE BRACKET
FOR ARTICLE CARRIER, filed Nov. 16, 1983. D.C .
E.D. Mich. (Detroit), Doc. 83CV5001DT, Four Star
Corp. V. John A. Bott. et al
4,136359, Apple Computer, Inc., MICRO-
?2i*EFJ^^ f'^k USE wfTH VIDEO DISPLAY;
4,278,972, same, DIGITALLY-CONTROLLED COL-
OR SIGNAL GENERATION MEANS FOR USE
WITH DISPLAY, filed May 17. 1983, DC, CD. Calif
(Los Angeles), Doc. 83 3213, Apple Computer, Inc. v.
Michael P. AfcCaul and Sheila Ann McCaul. doing busi-
ness as Cosmic Computers. Unlimited. Final Judgment
and injunction filed restraining defendants from
importing, distributing, selling, etc. any computer prod-
ucts copying Apple products. Dated Nov. 4, 1983.
4,136,767, The Sardee Corp., VACUUM OPERAT-
ED CAN-CONVEYING AND CAN-UPRIGHTING
APPARATUS, filed Oct. 1, 1981, D.C.N.J. (Trenton).
Doc. 81-3112, The Sardee Corp. v. Kaiser Aluminum A
Chemical Corp. Same, filed Oct. 28, 1981, D.C, N.D. 111.
(Chicago), Doc. 81 C 6063, United Systems. Inc. v. The
Sardee Corp.
4,138,108, Charles H. Robinson. ATHLETIC
HAND/WRIST POSITIONER, filed May 18, 1981,
D.C, M.D. Fla. (Jacksonville). Doc. 81-431-Civ-J.WC,
Charles H. Robinson v. Gene Patton.
4,139,166, Menzel, Inc., SURFACE WIND BATCH-
^h.?*^ ^^^ '2, 1982, D.C.S.C (Columbia), Doc.
82-2575-3, Menzel, Inc. v. Bond Textile Machinery, Inc,
et aL Consent Stipulation of Settlement under 41(a) (1)
FRCP filed Aug. 23, 1983.
4,144,461, Victoreen, Inc., METHOD AND APPA-
RATUS FOR ASSAY AND STORAGE OF RADIO-
ACTIVE SOLUTIONS, filed Nov. 29, 1982, D.C.N.J
O^ewark). Doc. 82-3999. Victoreen, Inc. v. Capintec, Inc.
Stipulation and Order dismissing action without costs,
filed Nov. 17, 1983.
4,145,300, Sublistatic Holding S.A., DEVELOPERS
CONTAINING MAGNETIC PARTICLES AND A
SUBLIMABLE DYESTUFF; 4,246,331, same, ELEC-
TROPHOTOGRAPHIC DEVELOPERS CONTAIN-
ING SUBLIMABLE DYES; 4,251,611, same, PRO-
CESS FOR FORMATION OF PERMANENT
IMAGE, filed May 27, 1981, DC, E.D. Va. (Norfolk),
Doc. 81-470-N, Spectra Corp. and Sublistatic Holding
SA. V. Edward W. O'Brien, doing business as Powerband
Products of Va. Final Judgment filed Jan. 5, 1984.
4,148,410, Ermal C Fraze, TAB FOR EASY-OPEN
ECOLOGY END, filed Mar. 11, 1981. DC. S.D. Ohio
(Dayton), Doc. C-3-81-183, Ermal C. Fraze v. The Con-
tinental Group, Inc, et aL Case closed pn Jan. 8, 1982.
March 13, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG II
4,150,768, Walter P. Maynard. Jr.. CONTAINER
OPENING AND POURING ATTACHMENT, filed
Dec. 14, 1981. D.C. N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 81 C
6953, Walter P. Maynard. Jr. v. Custom Accessories, Inc.
4,153,998, Rolls-Royce Ltd., PROBES, filed Apr. 21.
1983. D.C. E.D. Mich. (Detroit). Doc. 83 cv 1497 DT,
Rolls-Royce Ltd.. et al v. The Valeron Corp
4,161,436, Gordon Gould, METHOD OF ENER-
GIZING A MATERIAL, filed Nov. 1. 1979, DC.
N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 79 C 4594, Gordon Gould v.
Lumonics Research, Ltd.
4,165,717, Metallgesellschaft AG, PROCESS FOR
BURNING CARBONACIOUS MATERIALS, filed
Feb. 14. 1983. D.C. S.D. Calif (San Diego). Doc.
83-0356-GT(H). Metallgesellschaft AG v. Pyropower Corp.
Same, filed Feb. 14. 1983. DC. E.D. Calif (Fresno),
Doc. CV F-83-57-EDP, Metallgesellschaft AG v. Gulf
Oil Corp., et al Same, filed June 8, 1983, D.C,
N.D.N. Y., (Utica). Doc. 83-CV-715, Metallgesellschaft
AG V. Ahlstrom Machinery, Inc. Same, filed Sept. 12,
1983, D.C, N.D.N. Y. (Utica), Doc. 83-CV-1193.
Metallgesellschaft AG v. A. Ahlstrom Osakeyhtio. Stipula-
tion of dismissal filed Nov. 17, 1983.
4,166,018, Airco, Inc., SPUTTERING PROCESS
AND APPARATUS, filed Apr. 11, 1980. DC, ED.
Mich. (Detroit), Doc. 80-71477, Airco, Inc v. Shatter-
proof Glass Corp Same, filed May 30, 1980. D.C.N.J.
(Newark). Doc. 80-1568. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. v.
Airco. Inc Same, filed June 3, 1980, D.C, N.D. Ohio
(Toledo). Doc. 80-341. Airco, Inc. v. Libbey-Owens-Ford
Co.
4,173,973, David J. Hendricks. HYPEREXTENSION
BACK BRACE, filed Apr. 4, 1983, DC, N.D. 111. (Chi-
cago). Doc. 83 C 2395. David J Hendricks, et aL v. Sur-
gical Appliances Industries, Inc.
4,175,902, Herzog Contracting Corp., APPARATUS
FOR LOADING AND UNLOADING RAILROAD
CARS; 4,190,394, same, METHOD FOR LOADING
AND UNLOADING RAILROAD CARS, filed Nov.
15, 1983, D.C, S.D. 111. (Benton), Doc. 83-4299, Stanley
M. Herzog, Randy L. Poggemiller, and Herzog Contracting
Corp. V. Gary Parks, doing business as "Mid South Rail-
road Services".
4,178,843, Wear-Ever Aluminum, Inc.. PORTABLE
CORN POPPER, filed June 23, 1981, DC, E.D. Wis.
(Milwaukee), Doc. 81-730, Dart Industries, Inc, doing
business as The West Bend Co. v. Wear-Ever Aluminum,
Inc
4,179,018, John H. Miller, METHOD AND APPA-
RATUS FOR SELECTIVE RECOVERY OF MET-
AL CONTAINERS; 4,257,511, same, filed Nov. 10.
1983, D.C Ariz. (Phoenix), Doc. CIV-83-2201-PHX-
CLH. Shirley L. Miller, et aL v. Adolph Coors Co., et aL
4,181,955, Mathematical Applications Group, Inc.,
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING PHOTOGRAPH-
IC SLIDES, filed May 3, 1983, DC. S.D.N.Y.. Doc.
83-Civ-1921 ADS, Mathematical Applications Group, Inc
V. Autographix, Inc., et ana
4,182,494, Anthony Mfg. Corp., ANTI SIDE
SPLASH DRIVE ARM FOR AN IMPACT DRIVE
SPRINKLER, filed Nov. 27, 1981, D.C. S.D. Fla. (Ft.
Lauderdale), Doc. 8 1-6661 -Civ- J AG, Safe-T-Lawn, Inc
V. Anthony Mfg. Corp.
4,186,982, AMP, Inc., CONTACT WITH SPLIT
PORTION FOR ENGAGEMENT WITH SUB-
STRATE, filed Oct. 7, 1983, D.C, M.D. Pa. (Scranton),
Doc. CV-83-1456, AMP, Inc \. R I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Co.
4,188,189, University Patents, Inc., QUANTITATIVE
TESTING FOR VITAMIN B12, filed Mar. 16, 1981,
D.C, Colo. (Denver), Doc. 81-A-341, University Patents,
Inc. V. Colorado Pathologists Regional Laboratory, Inc.
Order of Dismissal without prejudice filed Nov. 19,
1981. Same, filed Jan. 8. 1982. D.C. N.D. Calif (San
Francisco). Doc. C82-0180 WHO, University Patents. Inc
V. Western Laboratories, Inc. et aL Same, filed Mar. 23.
1982. D.C. Del. (Wilmington). Doc. 82-146. Becton
Dickinson and Co. v. University Patents, Inc Saine, filed
Apr. 28. 1982. D.C. Del. (Wilmington), Doc. 82-213,
University Patents, Inc.. et aL v. Bio-Rad Laboratories,
Inc
4,188,762, Champion International Corp.. TRIPLE
LAP HARDBOARD SIDING, filed Dec. 6. 1983.
D.C, N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 83 C 8933, Champion
International Corp. v. Masonite Corp.
4,190,394. (See 4,175,902.)
4,193,284, Nathan O. McCrary, CANE CUTTING
AND MOLDING TOOL AND METHOD OF US-
ING SAME, filed Oct. 29. 1982. DC. S.D. Iowa (Des
Moines). Doc. 82-6 14-E, Nathan O. McCrary v. C. T.
Corp. Systems. Action dismissed with prejudice per Stip-
ulation of Dismissal under Rule 41(a). Filed Aug. IS,
1983.
4,194,814, Bausch & Lomb, Inc.. TRANSPARENT
OPTHALMIC LENS HAVING ENGRAVED SUR-
FACE INDICIA, filed Oct. 5. 1983. DC. N.D. Calif
(San Jose). Doc. C 83 20283, Bausch d Lomb, Inc v.
Barnes-Hind /Hydrocurve, Inc., et aL
4.204.225, Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation.
REAL-TIME DIGITAL X-RAY SUBTRACTION
IMAGING; 4,204,226, same, REAL-TIME DIGITAL
X-RAY TIME INTERVAL DIFFERENCE IMAG-
ING, filed May 4. 1982. D.C. N.D. Calif (San
Francisco). Doc. 82 2010 EFL, Adac Laboratories v.
Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation. Defendant's Mo-
tion for an Order dismissing cause granted on Aug. 27,
1982.
4.204.226. (See 4,204,225.)
4,208,747, The Procter k Gamble Co.. PASSIVE
DOSING DISPENSER EMPLOYING TRAPPED
AIR BUBBLE TO PROVIDE AIR-LOCK; 4,305,162,
same, PASSIVE DOSING DISPENSER EM-
PLOYING CAPTIVE AIR BUBBLE TO PROVIDE
PRODUCT ISOLATION, filed Oct. 13, 1982. DC
Del. (Wilmington). Doc. 82-671, The Procter A Gamble
Ca V, Boyle-Midway, Inc
4,208,831, Shelcore, Inc., DRIVING SIMULATOR
TOY, filed Oct. 13, 1982. D.C, ED. Pa. (Philadelphia),
Doc. 82-4493. Shelcore, Inc. v. Durham Industries, Inc.
Pat. No. 4,208,831 is found to be invalid due to obvious-
ness. Judgment entered in favor of defendant and against
plaintiff on Jan. 6, 1984.
4,209,261, NCR Corp., RIBBON CASSETTE FOR
OBLIQUE RIBBON FEEDING, filed Sept. 19. 1980,
D.C, M.D. Tenn. (Nashville). Doc. 80-3507. NCR Corp
V. Graphic Ribbon, Inc PlaintifT is the owner of Pat. No.
4.209.261 which is good and valid in law. Defendant is
enjoined and permanently restrained from further in-
fringing Plaintiff's patent. Filed Sept. 15. 1981.
4,210,207, Baker International Corp.. VALVE APPA-
RATUS, filed AuH. 23, 1983. DC, S.D. Tex. (Houston),
Doc. H-83-5145, Baker International Corp. v. Dresser In-
dustries, Inc.
4,211,426, Everest & Jennings, Inc.. WEIGHT RE-
LIEVING AMBULATOR, filed Dec. 13. 1983. DC,
CD. Calif (Los Anaeles). Doc. 83 7934. Everest A Jen-
nings, Inc. V. L Mulnolland Corp
4,214,600, Cameron Iron Works, Inc., VALVE, filed
Aug. 23, 1983. D.C. S.D. Tex. (Houston), Doc.
H-83-5138, Cameron Iron Works, Inc v. Axelson, Inc.
4,215,431, John Nady. WIRELESS TRANSMIS-
SION SYSTEM, filed Apr. 28, 1982, DC. N.D. Calif
(San Francisco), Doc. C82-1842SC, Sam Ash Music
Corp. V. John Nady. Stipulation of Dismissal filed Mar.
IS. 1983.
KMOCXj 12
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
r.Jb?i^»^^ Synthetic Surfaces, Inc.. HIGH GREEN
STRENGTH CURABLE URETHANE ADHESIVE,
JUed Ctet. 7, 1983, DC. N.D. Tex. (Dallas), Doc.
CA3-83-1726-G, Superturf. Inc. v. Synthetic Surfaces, Inc.
42^18,090, Neal D. HofTacker and Bemhard J.
Hoffacker. BICYCLE SEAT, filed Dec. 9, 1980. D.C.
Colo. (Denver), Doc. 81-K-907, Neal D. Hoffacker.
Bemhard J. Hoffacker, et al. v. Bike House, et aL Pat.
No. 4.218,090 is valid and owned by Plaintiffs. Defen-
dants shall not further infringe Plaintiff's patent. Con-
sent Judgment filed Nov. 6, 1982.
4^19,289, Trutzschler GmbH & Co. KG, AR-
RANGEMENT FOR LOADING A CARD, filed Aua
31. 1981. D.C. W.D.N.C. (Charlotte). Doc. C-
C-8 1-0381, Trutzschler GmbH A Ca KG. et al v. Auto-
matic Material Handling. Inc.
4,224,018, Thomas M. Smith. INFRA-RED APPA-
RATUS; 4,272,238, same, INFRA-RED HEATING
»SP^.v?i^'^N^^S' 4,290,746, uune, RADIANT
HEATING; 4,326,843, sane, GAS-FIRED INFRA-
RED GENERATORS AND USE THEREOF. fUed
Sept. 1. 1982. D.C. Conn. (Hartford). Doc. H-82-835,
Hunt Associates. Inc. and Thomas M. Smith v. North
American Technology, Inc., et aL
4,227,126, Henry M. Denecke. SHAFT ROTATION
INTERLOCK SYSTEM FOR FILM EDITING TA-
BLES AND THE LIKE, filed Aug. 1, 1983, DC, CD
Calif. (Los Anaeles), Doc. 83 4945 TJH (Tx), Michael
Denecke v. Eagle Eye Film Co., Inc. Pat. No. 4.227.126 is
owned by Plaintiff and is good and valid in law. Defen-
dant is permanently enjoined from infringing Plaintiff's
patent. Consent Judgment filed Oct. 7. 1983.
4,227,829, Kossuth J. Landry. Jr., SOIL EROSION
PREVENTION BLOCKS, filed Aug. 3, 1981, DC,
N.D. Ga. (Atlanta), Doc. C81-1450A, Petra. Inc., and
Kossuth J. Landry. Jr. v. Nicolon Corp., et al
4,229,025, Perfection Corp., STAB-TYPE COU-
PLING, filed Nov. 30. 1983. DC. WD. Pa. <Erie). Doc.
83-335 Erie. Perfection Corp. v. Dresser Industries. Inc.
4,229,791. (See 3,815,099.)
4,231,105, UMC Industries. Inc.. VENDOR CON-
TROL CIRCUIT, filed Oct. 4. 1983. DC Minn. (Min-
neapolis). Doc. 4-83 Civil 867. UMC Industries. Inc. v.
Automatic Products Co., Inc., et al
4,232,366. (See 3,815,099.)
4,232,899, August. Inc.. SEATING UNIT AND
METHOD OF CONSTRUCTION, filed Sept. 14, 1983.
D.C.. N.D. 111. (Chicago). Doc. 83 C 6415. August, Inc.
V. Steelcase, Inc., et al
4,242,035, Robert L. Homstein. APPARATUS FOR
CONVERTING A LOADER BUCKET TO A PAL-
LET LOADER, filed Nov. 11, 1981, DC, S.D. 111. (E.
St. Louis), Doc. 81-3422, Robert L Homstein, et al v.
Tri-Star Corp. ^
4,243364, Vieau and Vieau, MULTIPLE WIR^
ELECTRODE FEED MECHANISM FOR
ELECTROEROSION MACHINE, filed Oct. 27, 1982,
D.C, E.D. Mich. (Detroit), Doc. 82-74026, Richard A.
Vieau v. McWilliam Machinery Sales. Inc.
4,246,331. (See 4,145,300.)
4,251,611. (See 4,145,300.)
4,257,511. (See 4,179,018.)
4,261,598, Kenneth R. Cornwall, CONCRETE
FLOOR EMBEDDED COUPLING FOR PLASTIC
PIPE, filed Dec. 8. 1983, D.C, S.D. Fla. (Ft
Uuderdale), Doc. 83.6860-Civ-JAG, Kenneth R. Corn-
wall V. U.S Construction Mfjg.,^c.
4,263,879, State Industries, Inc., WATER HEATER,
filed May 20, 1981. D.C, M.D. Tenn. (Nashville), Doc.
81-3319, State Industries. Inc. v. A. O. Smith Corp.
^^i^S^' Custom Accessories, Inc., SPLASH
GUARD, filed Oct. 18. 1983. D.C. N.D. 111. (Chicago),
Doc. 83 C 7280, Custom Accessories. Inc. v. Globe Distri-
bution. Bames Group, Inc.
4,266,700, Vari-O-Matic Machine Corp., A FREELY
ADJUSTABLE PIN-TUCKING DEVICE FOR USE
IN A PIN TUCKING MACHINE, filed Sept. 8, 1982.
DC, S.D.N.Y., Doc. 82-Civ-5982 RLC, Vari-O-Matic
Machme Corp. v. N. Y. Sewing Machine Attachment Corp.
4,272,238. (See 4,224,018.)
4,275,849. (See 4,046,324.)
4,278,972. (See 4,136,359.)
r-t^r^^' """"y S. Peterson Co., Inc., ROADWAY
EXPANSION JOINT, filed Dec. 16, 1981, D.C. Minn.
(Mmneapolis), Doc. 4-81 Civil 893, Harry S Peterson
Co.. Inc. V. American Inland Corp.
o^^l:^^' ^^«C' '"c., VEHICLE PLATFORM
SCALE, filed Sept. 20, 1983, D.C, W.D. Wash. (Seat-
tle), Doc. C83-1320M, Lodec. Inc. v. World Wide
Weighing. Inc.
4,290,746. (See 4,224,018.)
4,293,140, Pretty Products, Inc., AUTOMOBILE
SPLASH GUARD AND ATTACHMENT MEANS
THEREFOR, filed Mar. 26. 1982, DC. S.D. Ohio (Co-
lumbus). Doc. C-2-82-311. Pretty Products. Inc. v.
Powerflow Products Ltd Same, filed Aug. 30, 1983, D.C,
N.D. Ohio (Akron), Doc. C83-3575A, Pretty Products.
Inc. V. Powerflow. Inc.
4,296,152, Idacon, Inc., METHOD AND COMPOSI-
TION FOR TREATING W(X)D WITH PENTA-
-CHLOROPHENOL, filed Apr. 13, 1982, D.C, E.D.
Okla. (Muskogee), Doc. 82-158-C, Idacon. Inc. v. Cen-
tral Forest Products. Inc.. et al
4,296,744, P. M. Palumbo. DYNAMIC PATELLAR
BRACE, filed Feb. 4. 1982. DC. S.D. Calif (San
Diego). Doc. 82-01 19-K-H, R M. Palumbo. et al v. Doy-
Joy Ca. et al
435,162. (See 4,208,747.)
4,308,713, Terrain King Corp.. HYDRAULICALLY
DRIVEN MOWER, filed Jan. 6, 1982, D.C, N.D. Fla
(Tallahassee). Doc. TCA 82-0704. Terrain King Corp. v.
John D. Williams. Jr.. et al
439,639, Herbert T. Thrower, Jr.. LIGHT MODU-
LATOR SYSTEM AND METHOD, filed Mar. 31.
1982, D.C, W.D.N.C. (Charlotte), Doc. C-C-82-0188-P.
Dotech. Inc. and Herbert T. Thrower. Jr. v. Allied Corp..
et al
4,310,988, George D. Porter. Jr., APPARATUS FOR
SELECTIVE FIELD APPLICATION OF HERBI-
CIDES TO WEEDS, filed May 27, 1982, D.C, N.D.
Iowa (Cedar Rapids), Doc. IC 82-3041, George D. Por-
ter, Jr. V. Buckley d Bush. Inc. Defendant permanently
enjoined from manufacturing and/or selling herbicide
applicator equipment for the life of said patent per Final
Order, Judgment and Decree filed on Aug. 11, 1982.
4,320,988, James C Seal, SPREADER/GRADER,
filed Oct. 20, 1983. D.C. E.D. La. (New Orleans). Doc.
83-5189 "J". Ivy J Foret Associates. Inc. v. / C. Seal etal
4,326,348, Esco Corp.. EXCAVATING TOOTH AS-
SEMBLY. filed May 11. 1983, D.C. Ariz. (Phoenix),
Doc. 83-863 Phx, Esco Corp. v. Construction and Mining
Supply Co.
4,326,843. (See 4,224,018.)
4,327,753, Icomag Trust Reg., HAIR-CURLING IM-
PLEMENT. filed Dec. 6. 1983. D.C. S.D. Fla. (Miami).
Doc. 83-2965-Cov.EBD. Icomag Trust Reg. v. Windmere
Corp.
4432,008, ZUog, Inc., MICROPROCESSOR APPA-
RATUS AND METHOD; Reg. No. 1,083,256 (Z-80),
March 13, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG 13
Zilog, Inc.. filed Mar. 14. 1983. D.C. N.D. Calif (San
Francisco), Doc. C83- 1241 WHO. Zilog. Inc. v. Nippon
Electric Co., Ltd., et al
4,332,537, ENCAPSULATION MOLD WITH RE-
MOVABLE CAVITY PLATES. Dusan Slepcevic. filed
Aug. 19, 1982, D.C, N.D. Calif. (San Francisco). Doc.
C82 4403 WAI. Dusan Slepcevic v. Kras/West Corp.. et
al
4,336,427, Vacu-Maid. Inc.. OUTLET ASSEMBLY
FOR A VACUUM CLEANING SYSTEM, filed Dec.
14. 1983, D.C. W.D. Okla. (Oklahoma City). Doc.
CIV-83-3069-T, Vacu-Maid Inc. v. Hayden Mfg Co.,
Ltd. ^
4,341,470, Varian Associates. Inc.. ATOMIC AB-
SORPTION SPECTROSCOPY, filed Jan. 6, 1984, DC
Conn. (Bridgeport), Doc. B-84-10 TFGD, Perkin-Elmer
Corp. V. Varian Associates, Inc.
4,342,450, Borg-Warner Corp.. COMPOSITE
CHAIN LINK ASSEMBLY, filed Oct. 20. 1983. DC.
N.D. 111. (Chicago). Doc. 83 C 7350. Borg-Warner Corp
V. PT Components, Inc.
4,343,032, Cable Electric Products, Inc.. LIGHT
SENSITIVE ELECTRICAL DEVICE, filed Mar. 7.
1983, DC, CD. Calif (Los Angeles), Doc. 83 1357.
Cable Electric Products, Inc. v. Home Equipment Mfg.
Co. Action dismissed without prejudice on Aug. 24.
1983.
4,346,958, Augat. Inc.. CONNECTOR FOR CO-AX-
lAL CABLE, filed Dec. 29. 1982. DC. N.D.N.Y. (Uti-
ca), Doc. 82-CV-1465. Augat. Inc. v. John Mezzalingua
Associates. Inc.
4,350,240, Equipment Systems & Devices. Inc.. COIN
SLIDE WITH INTERCHANGEABLE CORES, filed
Aug. 11, 1983. D.C. E.D. Pa. (Philadelphia). Doc.
83-3893, Equipment Systems A Devices, Inc. v. Kidde. Inc.
4,353,329, Osborne Industries. Inc.. ROTARY SELF-
FEEDER, filed Oct. 17. 1983. D.C. M.D. Pa. (Scran-
ton), Doc. CV-83-1494, Osborne Industries, Inc. v. Farm-
er Boy AC, Inc.
4,354,613, Trafalgar Industries, Inc., MICRO-
PROCESSOR BASED VENDING APPARATUS,
filed Jan. 31, 1983, D.C. Minn. (St. Paul). Doc. 3-83-111.
Trafalgar Industries. Inc. v. Automatic Products Ca, Inc..
et al
4,357,028, Chicago Roller Skate Co.. ROLLER
SKATE WITH IMPROVED SOLE PLATE, filed
Nov. 12. 1982. D.C. N.D. 111. (Chicago). Doc. 82 C
6957. Chicago Roller Skate Ca v. Zayre Corp.
4,361,509, Scripps Clinic & Research Foundation, UL-
TRA PURIFICATION OF FACTOR VIII USING
MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES, filed Nov. 8. 1983.
D.C. N.D. Calif. (San Francisco). Doc. C-83-5424-RPA.
Scripps Clinic A Research Foundation, et al v. Chiron
Corp.
4,372,624, Smith International. Inc., DYNAMIC O-
RING SEAL, filed Nov. 23, 1983, D.C, CD. Calif.
(Los Angeles), Doc. 83-7613 PAR (Mcx), Smith Interna-
tional Inc. v. Hughes Tool Co.
4,373,123, Wico Corp., STUDDED MOUNTING
STRUCTURE FOR SWITCH, filed June 13, 1983,
D.C, N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 83 C 4050, Wico Corp
\.Suzo Trading CY BV
4,374,404, Innovative Computer Products Corp.,
NON-ABRASIVE MAGNETIC HEAD CLEANING
SYSTEM; 4^77,831, same, filed Feb. 15, 1983. DC.
CD. Calif (Los Anaeles), Doc. 83-0966 CHH (Jrx). In-
novative Computer Products Corp. v. Head Computer
Products. Inc.. et al
4,377,130, Lonny D. Schwieger, ANIMAL ACTU-
ATED FEED AND WATER DISPENSING APPA-
RATUS. filed Dec. 30. 1983, DC, N.D. Iowa (Sioux
City). Doc. C83-4218. Lonny D. Schwieger v. Glen Kruse.
doing business as Kruse Mfg. A Eastern Iowa Pork, Inc.
4,377,831. (See 4,374,404.)
4,379,594, Barry A. Willey. MOTORCYCLE SAFE-
TY WINDSHIELDS, filed Aug. 29. 1983. DC. CD.
111. (Danville). Doc. 83-2365. Barry A. Willey v. Vetter
Products. Inc.
4,379,696, Color Communications. Inc.. LATEX
MYLAR CHIP, filed Jan. 4. 1984. DC. W.D.N.Y.
(Buffalo), Doc. Civ-84-0009C, Color Communications,
Inc. V. La Clede Mfg. Ca, Inc., doing business as La
Clede Color Cards.
4,388,671, Yamato Scale Co., Ltd., COMBINATION
WEIGHING SYSTEM, filed Dec. 8. 1983. DC. N.D.
Calif (San Francisco). Doc. C-83-5830 TEH. Yamato
Scale Ca, Ltd. v. Package Machinery Ca
435,724, Ramco Mfg., Inc., APPARATUS FOR
CONTROLLING THE WATER TEMPERATURE
OF A SPA, filed Aug. 4, 1983, DC, CD. Calif (Los
Angeles), Doc. 83 5049 MML (Mcx), Ramco Mfg.. Inc.
V. Sundance Spas, et al
4,40M35, Byron L. Godbersen, BOAT HOIST, filed
Nov. 3, 1983, DC, E.D. Mich. (Bay City), Doc.
83CV7374BC, Byron L Godbersen v. Michigan Docks.
Inc. Same, filed Nov. 17, 1983, DC, W.D. Mich.
(Grand Rapids), Doc. G83-1352CA1, Byron L
Godbersen v. Michigan Marine Distributing Ca Same,
filed Nov. 17, 1983, DC, W.D. Mich. (Grand Rapids),
Doc. G83-1353CA6, Byron L Godbersen v. Stevens De-
sign A Fabrication. Inc. Same, filed Nov. 17, 1983, D.C,
W.D. Mich. (Grand Rapids), Doc. G83-1354CA1, Byron
L. Godbersen v. Harbor Master, Ltd.
4,403,775, Joseph R. Chaput, RANDOM INDICIA
SELECTOR, filed Sept. 13, 1983, DC, W.D. Pa. (Pitu-
burgh). Doc. 83-2294, Joseph R. Chaput. et al v. J and
R. Sales, Inc.. et al
4,404,687, Markus Hager, CONVERTIBLE OUT-
ERWEAR AND CARRYING BAG. filed Nov. 14,
1983, D.C, S.D.N.Y., Doc. 83-Civ-8247. pMinconia
Sportswear. Inc. (Markus Hager) v. Anchas America, Ltd.
4,406,615, Nova Patents of North America, Inc., IG-
NITER FOR A GAS DISCHARGE PIPE, filed Dec.
29, 1983, D.C, S.D. Tex. (Houston). Doc. H-83-7369,
Nova Patents of North America. Inc. v. Standby Flare Ig-
nition Systems. Inc.
4,413,737, Bigelow-Sanford. Inc.. SHIPPING PAL-
LET AND A PACKAGE FORMED THEREFROM,
filed Dec. 21, 1983, D.C.S.C (Greenville). Doc.
83-3224-14, Bigelow-Sanford. Inc. v. Modular Packaging.
Inc., et al
1040 OG 14
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
NOTICE OP RESTRUCTURING AND MOVE OF PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
IoL!*«f L^**"v?.^"* ^"'^P* ^* ^^^^ restructured and moved to meet the
neeas of the public, changing technology and workload requirements.
The restructuring and move Include three major aspects. The first major
nf^ttl i°^°J''f* ^i'^'^g * ia'^Se number of new examiners and a rebalancing
!L K .. '*.^°'^* '° "*°" accurately reflect anticipated workloads
and better associate related arts. To this end, the five existing
chemical groups will be rearranged Into four chemical groups, I.e.,
Groups 110, 120, 130, and 150. In addition, a new electrical Group 260
will be assembled from components drawn from the other electrical groups.
noN*^^??'* **^®''^ °^ current efforts Involves the creation of twelve
1 ^^yl^°^^^ ^^^ "»»^t8 to provide appropriate supervision for the
enlarged Examining Corps. These new art units have been distributed
throughout the Groups as dictated by anticipated supervisory workloads.
The third aspect Involves the physical relocation of many persons and
search files as Examining Group 150 moves Into additional space on two
floors In Building 2 In Crystal Plaza.
It Is expected that the relocation and other changes will begin about
March 19, 1984, and end by May 1, 1984. The Groups will then be located
as shown In the table at the end of this notice.
The efforts described above will result In many examiners being moved to
new rooms and some reassigned to different groups and art units. Many
pending applications will be assigned to new groups and art units. The
Office will do everything practical to minimize the adverse Impact of
all this change. However, problems and a certain amount oi confusion
will undoubtedly occur. To help the public cope with these changes, the
following guidance is offered:
1.
2.
3.
Examining Corps personnel can be reached on the telephone by
calling their last known number (e.g., the number shown on the
last Office action) . The answering receptionist will be
provided with a directory of phone numbers which will be
updated dally. The caller will be informed of or transferred,
if possible, to the new number.
Persons who are not successful in reaching an Office employee
by telephone should call our information number (703)557-3080
for the latest telephone number of the employee. .
To determine the current Group or art unit assignment or other
pertinent information concerning a patent application (for
those entitled to such information) call any telephone associated
with the Group to which the application was assigned.. The
answering receptionist - once assured of the caller's identity
and/or entitlement - will provide the current art unit assignment
or the other pertinent information concerning the application
as shown on the PALM system.
/
March 13. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 CXj 15
4. Once the new art unit assignment of an application is known,
all correspondence involving that application should identify
the new art unit. However, all correspondence addressed to
the art unit shown on the most recent communication from the
Office will be routed to the correct destination.
5. A current directory will be posted periodically in or near the
Public Search Room.
6. After the relocations and other changes are completed, new
Group and art unit telephone and room numbers will be published
in the Official Gazette.
7. Persons delivering papers, arriving for interviews or visiting
the Examining Corps after March 19, 1984, should consult the
directory posted near the Public Search Room for the current
location of the organization and person they are visiting.
1040 OG 16
OFHCIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
Group Director LocaUnn
110 D. Talbert CP3-9
120 C.E. Van Horn CP2-9
130 R. White
CP3-8
150 J.O. Thomas CP2-11
210 S. Engle
CPA-9
220 K. Cage CPA-10
New
Art
Unit
New Art Unit
Comprlbes
Examiners
Primarily From
Following
Original Art
Unites)
111 111
112 112
113 113
114 114
116 116
118 113,124
121 121
122 122
123 123
124 124
125 125
126 126
127 174
128 174
129 121,122,126
131 161
132 172
133 173.
134 172,173
135 177
136 176
137 147
138 147
151 142
152 162
153 143
154 164
155 144
156 166
157 144,147
166
211 211
212 212
213 213
214 216
215 217
216 212,216
217 217
221 221
222 222
223 223
New Art Unit
Responsible For All Or Parts
Of The Following Classes
75,148,266,420,428
204,252
252,423
29,148,136,429
208.252,260,585
44.71.106.252.501
260,542.544,546,548,549
260,542,544,546,548.568
260,424,536.549
44,252,260.556.564.568.570
8.260.424
260,518,560,562.564,568
424,435
424,426.435.436
71,260.544.546,548.549
156.252
127.426
62.65.134.159.202,203 ,
23,156.210.422.436
55.209,261
210
264
48, 156, 196, 201 , 202, 249 ,425
204,260,521,523,524.525,527,528
118,148.427
260,521,523,524,527,528
282,428
260,520,521,523.524,525,526,528,536
428,430
8,51,106,252.433.585
84,181,235,352,354,355,350,361
310,320,322,323,363
219,338
200,307,314,361,373
174,336,355,361
177,335,337.346
84,187,290,318,368
42,89,102,114,184,244.362,367,376
178,179,181,310,315,330,332,340,
343, 356,358, 367. 375, 376, 434, 435
44,60,75,86,136,148,149,204,252,
260,264,362,419,422,423,424,427,
428,436,568
y
March 13. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFRCE
1040 OG 17
Group Director Location
New
Art
Unit
New Art Unit
Comprises
Examiners
Primarily From
Following
Original Art
Unit(s)
New Art ITnit
Responsible For All Or Parts
Of The Following Classes
230 -E. Levy
240 G. Forlenza
250 S. Matthews
260 S. Kunin
290 K. Cage
310 B. Gray
320 S. Zaharna
CP4-11 232 232,236
233 235
234 232,237
235 235
236 236
237 237
CP4-7 241 241
242 242
243 243
245 245
246 246
247 353
CP4-8 251 251,254,255
252 252,254,256
253 253
254 254
255 355
256 256
257 257
CP4-5 261 214
262 231
263 233
264 234
265 244
266 251
267 252
268 234.244
CP4-11 291 291
292 292
CP3-5 311 311
312 312
313 313
314 314
315 315
316 316
317 317
CP3-6 321 321
322 322
323 323
324 324
325 325
326 326
327 327
340.364
235.360
235.340,364
179,358.360.369
364
364,381
150,190,206,215,217,220,229,383
8,15,68,99,100,226,366,494
134,138,141,200,224
57,87,242,254,308,384,464 -
33,73,116,277,353,374,369
2, 12, 19, 26. 28. 36, 38, 66, 69, 112f
128,139,223,289
343,350,356,372
329.330,331.332,333,334
357
307,328,377
250,356
250,378
350,351
178,179,358,381
358
370.375.455
340,367
73
313,315,328,382
324
73,340.367
Design
Design
133,186,187,194,221,222,258,278
104,105,152,191,209,213,238,246,
291,293,295,296,301,305,410
169,193.239,294,406
188,267,271,303
114,212,244,440,441
180,280
198,298,414
10,29,59,72,82,140,142,144,407,413
29,279,339,408,409
7,29,51,76,81,125,145,157,254,269
16,30,83,173,225,234
43,164,228,445
29,79,147,163,241,300
17,53,227,281,282,282,402,412,493
1040 OG 18
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
New Art Unit
,
Comprises
•
Examiners
Primarily From
New
Following
New Art Unit
Director
Art
Original Art
Responsible For All Or Parts
Qroup
Location
Unit
Unlt(s)
Of The Following Classes
27,46,47,63,111,124,135,168,171,
330
R. Aegercer
CP3-4
331
331
"S
172,231,272
•
332
332
3,124,128,131,132,272,401
,
333
333
6.40,54,56,109,119,130,232,433
334
334
273,434
335
335
128
336
336
128
337
337
37,101,199,276,400
340
D. Stocking
CP4-3
341
341
60,91,92,415,416
342
342
123
,
343
343
60,91,417,418
344
344
34,62,98,110,122,236,237,432
345
.345
126,431
346
346
60,123,160
•-
347
347
137,251
350
A. Smith
CP3-3
351
351
256,285,403,405
352
171,352
74,185,192
354
354
52
355
355
160,182,211,248
356
356
14,166,175,299,404,474
,
357
357
24,49,108,297,312
358
358
5.70.74.109.292.411
PATENT NOTICES
Certiflcatct of CorrectloB for the Week of Mar. 13, 1984
Any questions concerning the Corps restructuring should be addressed to
Edward E. Kubaslewlcz at (703)557-4281.
D. 247,221
D. 265,550
D. 265,936
3,576,673
4,117,118
4.157,759
4,205,964
4,232,723
4,238,531
4,267,111
4,290,154
4,308,213
4,313,909
4,320,119
4,327,133
4,337,079
4,350,275
4,351,466
4,353,306
4,353,450
4,358,511
4,360,573
4,367,082
4,369,516
4,372,248
4,375.426
4,375,541
4,376,664
4,377,785
4,380,484
4,380,741
4.381.335
4,382.739
4,383,158
4,384,199
4,384,298
4,384,348
4,386,127
4,386,966
4,390.797
4,393,262
4,394,177
4,394,330
4,394,517
4.394,542
4,395,459
4,395,546
4,396,424
4,396,953
4,399,913
4,400,083
4,401,151
4,401,185
4,401,724
4,402,289
4,402,448
4,402,682
4,403,076
4,403,233
4.403,552
4,404,717
4,405,521
4,406,623
4,407,203
4,407,813
4,408,002
4,408,404
4,408,452
4,408,607
4,409,048
4,409,990
4,410,003
4,410,956
4,411,761
4,412,080
4,412,086
4,412,281
4,413,423
4,413,685
4,414,429
4,414,539
4,414,704
4,414,829
4,415,014
4,415,279
4,415,286
4,415,486
4.415,758
4.415.886
4.417.141
4.417.920
4,418,462
4,418,768
4,419,249
4,419,721
4,419,796
4,420,220
4,421,314
4,421.386
4,421,678
4,421,782
4,422,031
4,422,180
4,422,443
PLEASE NOTE: PERSONS WHO ARE NOT SUCCESSFUL IN REACHING AN OFFICE
EMPLOYEE BY TELEPHONE SHOULD CALL OUR INFORMATION NUMBER (703)557-3080
,F0R THE LATEST TELEPHONE NUMBER OF THAT EMPLOYEE.
^6^.^
Patenl^
1040 OG 19
««
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
Wn-'^Sn ^oSTr^. 'iSr.o"'Ji''oTLrS %«=Uto"2tr3Srp.per copi„ from ^^ „Uc«.
ehipatenuissuS 7a^ll90 '^ " '™" °' "'■","' ««l«fP™ttrs or from the bound volumes in p.-
U.S. PateSt ClaM^Hcation cSSi ?on Mn SJL« ?i,.?f ^^^"^ ** !i P^^icular library is advised to contact
^^'f ^ame of Library t , l r^
Alabama Auburn Univenuty Libraries (li^RilI^Vrf .1
Birmingham Public Library SS^J JJMSOO Ext.21
c3Z;!i« 7*"?'' Science Library. Arizona State Universiiy ' .' ." [ 602 W^TlS
California Los Angeles Public L ibrary ' . . . . J^Vt} gjlZlJ? p„ „,
Sacramento: California Sute Library Jn 2 SfJJJJ ^**- ^73
San Diego Public Library g S> g2-4572
r«i« ^ Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse* um litlVm
Co orado Denver Public Library * )^^ IIH^,^
Delaware Newark: University of Delaware S? lAi^l
Georgia -fShnolo" ^"^^"^ Memorial Library. Georgia Institute of * "
{J!*'»9 Moscow: Univerait'y' of Idaho Library ".'.'.'.'.'.'. JSr? 8«J1o?<
lUmois Chicago Public Library ^ . St?? ?5J-$235
Springfield: Illinois State Library S S Tsillin
ndiana Indianapolis-Marion County pJblic Library 3 5 S" I7n2
Louisiana ®*ulliveref ' "^^^ "" ^****''**°" Library/Louisiana State ^ ^ °^
Maryland ColkgelSk: Engineering iind Physical ■s<;i<;ncei Library, ^^^ ^"'^"°
Massachusetts B^l^'&'l^^' ---■,: l g?^ St^JS e t 2«
Michigan '^'S'V^'^ Engineering Transportation Library". Universiiy of ' * ^ ^ ^ ^**- ^"
De'SoXiicLibrary. :;::::::::;:: Jall^^'^tJl?^
Minnesota Minneapolis Public Library & Information Center ." (lul liiMin
Missoun Kansas City: Linda Hall library JS S jIJI^S
St. Louis Pubuc Library..."^ .::::::;:: (S'lS L'il^ Ext. 390.
» ^. kir'-uJ^Stfo^N^e^^^^^ ^^^js^^ii'"'"'
Buffalo and Erie County Public Library .' ! .' ." ! {76) 856^7525 Fxt 7^7
M^^K r^ r ?r \°i ^"'*^ Library (The Research Libraries " " i ? 930^850
North Carolina Raleigh: D H Hill Library. N.C. State University^ . ; 9 5 7370280
°™o Cmcinnati & Hamilton County, Public Library of f? ni 369 6936
Cleveland Public Library .. ^ o 6^ 6?? $«7n
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries . .' '. ':'.'.."" (tu) 42^6286
^. , . Toledo/Lucas County Public Library S 9? 255 70« F.t 70
Oklahoma Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library Jiis 624165^^
Pemisylvania C^bridge Springs: Alliance College Libra?/ . {JtS SfSoJJ
Philadelphia: Franklin Institute LibTary ....:;. ? 5 Ss iS?
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Libra/y of Pittsburgh (4 n) 622-3138
Rhode Island ^r'SS^'Jitlic'Sa'^'^^: ^^""^^^^"^^^ ^^^^ "^^^ ' ' ^ 5^^ F t ,,6
South Carolina Charleston: Medical University of Souih Carolina ." ." ! jSl tqI'S? wi,??^
Tennessee M^pWs & Shelby County Public Library andlflfomiation 725-8876 ^ ^^
Texas Austin: Mckinney Engineering Library. University of Texas. ;.' " ^^^^^^^^'^^^^
Unfve ^^'°"' Steriing C. Evans Library. Texas A & M (409) 845-2551
DallTffic Liorary' ! l! ::::.: ! 81t) o?11m p . ,<«,
w«K- ^ ?°"«,^°"= The Fondren Library. Rice University' ." .' .' .' .' ." ! 2O6 543^0740
WMlungton Seattle: Engineering Library. University of Washington . ! ' ' ^ ^ ^
WBconsm Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library, Uni?ersity of ' (608) 262-6845
Miwrpubiic Library :::::: : (414)278-3043
pro^d^el :?^eS:oT!SrL!!SSt ^aT^^^^^^^^
*CoUectioii organized by subject nutter.
1040 OG 20
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Aisistant Comraissioiier
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Aiaiatant CoramlMioBcr
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF February 4, 1984
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual Filing Date of Oldest
New Case Awaiting Action
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY, GROUP 1 10-D. E. TALBERT. Director 5-20-82
Inorganic Compounds; Inorganic Compositions; Organo-Metal and Organo-Metalloid Chemistry; Met^lurgy; Metal-
lurgical Apparatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices.
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, GROUP 120— C. E. VAN HORN, Director 7-16-73
Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Cosmetics;
Steroids; Oxo and Oxy; Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides.
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY, PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP 140-J. O. THOMAS. JR., Director 9-13-82
Synthetic Resins; Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions; Synthetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Part) e.g.. Coating; Molding;
Ink; Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding, Shapmp, Treating Proccn, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and Textile Treatmg Compositions.
COATING, LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY, GROUP 160-S. N. ZAHARNA, Edrector 7-26-82
Coating: Processes, Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; StockMaterials; Adhesive
Bonding; Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; and Photography. ^
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING. cTrOUP 170-i
R. F. WHITE, Director 1-16.76
Fertilizers; Foods; Fermentation; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and Starch; Paper Making; GlaM Manufac-
ture; Gas; Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation; Preserving; Li()uid, Gas,
and Solid Separation; Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS, GROUP 210-8. W. ENGLE, Director 1-03-82
Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors;
Switches; Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION, GROUP 225-KENNETH L. CAGE, Director 601-81
Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, Communications, Op-
tics; Radar; Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser
Devices; Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special, Fuel, Explosive and Tnermic Composi-
tions; Thermal and Photoelectric Batteries.
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION, STORAGE, AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230-EARL LEVY, Director 7-06-81
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; DaU Proceuing, Compuution and Conversion;
Storage Devices and Related Arts.
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING, AND MEASURING, GROUP 240-
G. M. FORLENZA, Director 3-17-82
Receptacles; Bearings; Joint Packing; ConduiU; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures; Textile Spinning; Cleaning;
Food Treating; Agiuting; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical InstrumenU; Sound Recording; Image Projectors;
Web Feeding; Winding and Reeling; Cable HoisU; Measuring and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Material Handling;
Shaft; Impellers; Rotary Fluid Motors.
ELECTRONIC COMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES, GROUP 250-S. S MATTHEWS, Director 9-30-80
Semi-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component CircuiU; Wave Transmiuion
Lines and Networks; ^tics; Radiant Energy; Measuring.
DESIGN. GROUP 290-KENNETH L. CAGE. Director M4-71
Industrial ArU; Household, Personal and Fine ArU.
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA, GROUP 310-B. R. GRAY, Director 604-8I
Conveyors; HoisU; Elevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding; Dispensing; Fluid Sprin-
kling; Fire Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Claiaifying and Assorting Solids; BoaU;
Ships; Aeronautics; Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment.
MATERIAL SHAPING, ARTICLE MANUFACTURING. TOOLS, GROUP 320-STEPHEN G. KUNIN. Director 6-18-82
Manufacturing Processes. Assembling, CombinetilAchines, Special Article Making; Metal Deforming; Sheet Metal
and Wire working; Metal Fusion-Bonding, Meul Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividmg; Work and
Tool Holders, Woodworking; Tools; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchering; and Books and Printed Matter.
AMUSEMENT, HUSBANDRY, PERSONAL TREATMENT, INFORMATION, GROUP 330-
R. E. AEGERTER, Director 11-04-76
Amusement and Exercising Devices; Projectors; Animal and Plant Husbandry: PlanU; Harvesting; Earth Workina and
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Printing; Typewriters; Infor-
mation Dissemination. . ., ..
HEAT, POWER, AND FLUID ENGINEERING, GROUP 340— D. J. STOCKING, Director 5-26-81
Power PlanU; Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumpt; Heat Gener-
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Gearing;
Fluid Handling and Control; Lubrication.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS, TEXTILES, MINING AND GEARING. GROUP 350-
A. L. SMITH. Director : ■■^- ' :^ • • :r • ■ v : ■ ' •^' ' \ '"^"
Building Structures; Racks; CabineU; Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Couphncs; Joints; Miscel-
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineenng; Earth Drilling; Mining;
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches.
EzairatkM of patcats: The patenU within the range of numbers indicated below expire during February 1984, except those which
may have had their terms curtailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, issued after the dates of the
range of numbers indicated below, may have expired before the ftill term of 17 yean for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the
Kjvisionsof 35 use. 151. ^, ^ ,,«-«,,.,,«., ,««i •
tenu Numbers 3,302.213 to 3,307,199, utclusive
Plant PatenU !.!!!!!!!! Numbers 2,707 to 2,722 inclusive
1040 OG 21
REISSUES
MARCH 13, 1984
Matter encloMd in heavy brackeU £ J appears in the original patent but fomu no part of this reiuue specification; matter printed in italics
indicates additions made by reiuue. '
€,w»r^ ^ ,^,^ , ?t'.?y?' ^" ^^ '^''^ ^'* o/sfl/V/ power stroke, and said cam means being
J^i r ^^7.^^^^.i^l^^^ AND METHOD actuated to control moZent of said die and die retainer from
IXH^. Schleicher. 1917 MvcMtle Ct. RochMter. Mich, said second to said first position by the continued mo^ment of said
Origtiul No. 3,900.937. dated Aug. 26. 1975. St. No. 494.982. ~'" '" '""' '^'"' and final part of said retract stroke.
Aug. 5. 1974. Application for reiuue Mar. 7. 1977. Ser. No.
774.851
U.S. a. 29—432.2
Int. a.i B23P 19/00
Re. 31.536
8 Claims METAL CLADDED WINDOW PRODUCTS
Joseph W. Holdlman, 1095 Arrowhead Dr., Dubuque, Iowa
52001, and Douglas E. Justice, 1103 EUen, Cedar Falls, Iowa
50613
Original No. 4,207,707, dated Jun. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 925,162,
Jul. 17. 1978. Application for reissue Jun. 1, 1962, Ser. No.
383.461 9
Int a? E06B 3/00 \
U.S. a. 49—501
•
llClains
1. Spot clinch tool for forming a spot clinch joint by lancing
and swaging two or more materials together using one com:
plete stroke of a ram driven by a power source in a single
station, [said power source having a power stroke and a re-
tract stroke,] said tool having a tool body and utilizing an anvil,
die, and punch ram moving means [for movingj connecting
said ram to said power source so that said ram is driven in a power
stroke and a retract stroke, means joining one of said punch and
anvil to said ram and the other to said tool body, whereby one is
made moveable while [maintaining] the other is maintained
stationary in respect to said tool body during said complete
stroke of said [power source] ram, [means for moving] and
cam means coupled to said ram moving means responsive to the
stroking movement of said ram for controlling positioning of said
die relative to said anvil and punch during said complete stroke of
said ram, said one of said punch and anvil being moved toward
the other during a first put of said power stroke, [means for
piercing] said materials being pierced with said punch and die
to lance them during a second part of said power stroke,
[means for holding the] said cam means controlling positioning'
of said die in a first position [spaced from the] stationary in
respect to said anvil during both said first and second parts of
said power stroke, [means for moving the] said cam means
controlling movement of said die from said first position to a
second position stationary in respect to said anvil during a third
part of said power stroke, [means for swaging] the lanced
portions of said materials being swaged with said punch and
anvil during a fourth and final part of said power stroke,
[means for maintaining the] said cam means controlling posi-
tioning of said die [and the anvil] in said second position
stationary in respect to said anvil during said fourth and final part
of said power stroke and during a first part of said retract
stroke, and [means for moving] said cam means controlling
movement of said die relative to said anvil from said second
position to said first position during a second and final part of
said retract stroke; means for holding said die including a move-
able die retainer for holding the die, said cam means being actu-
ated to control movement of said die and die retainer from said
first to said second position by the continued movement of said ram
8. A metal clad window product comprising:
a plurality of elongated members interconnected to form the
cor^figuration of a window frame or sash, each of said elon-
gated members having front and rear surfaces and first and
second sides located between said front and rear surfaces and
a rabbet extending in each of said first and second sides for
the length of said elongated member;
a metal cladding member coupled to each of said elongated
members to form a metal cladding surface over the front
surface of each elongated member, said metal cladding mem-
ber including a metal member having a width and length
stifficient to cover said front surface wherein said cladding
member is in full contact with said front surface, first and
second fianges integrally formed on said metal member so
that said fianges are spaced from one another and each
extend the length of said metal member, and a metal exten-
sion integrally formed with said metal member adjacent one
of said fianges and extending the length of said metal mem-
ber adjacent to the first side of said elongated member;
each metal cladding member being coupled to one of said
elongated members prior to their interconnection to form said
configuration solely by slidably engaging said fianges in said
rabbets from one end of the elongated member until the
metal member is positioned over the front surface of said
elongated member along the entire length and width of the
elongated member;
each metal cladding member being formed to have mitered ends
which fit to form a mitered joint with adjacent metal cladding
471
472
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
members on the elongated members forming said configura-
tion: and /
sealing material positioned between said metal member and
said elongated member along each mitered joint to seal said
mitered joints.
Re. 31^7
DENTAL HANDPIECE CONNECTOR
Uoyd P. Flatlaod, IS Quiiisaiu Dr., Kentfleld, Cdif. 94904
Origiaal No. 4,177,564, dated Dec. 11, 1979, Ser. No. 887,864,
Mar. 20, 1978. AppUcatioa for reisste Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No.
327,289
Int a.J A61C 1/10
U.S. a. 433-82 11 Claimt
A A dental handpiece and fluid supply tube connector, compris-
ing:
a first base:
a second base:
pin means connecting the bases fi)r rotating the bases relative to
each other transversely to the longitudinal axis of the first
base:
means defining at least two fluid passageways through the first
base, the pin means and the second base: onefiuid passage-
way passing radially through the pin means and the other
fiuid passageway passing axially through the pin means: and
means for rotating the bases relative to each other about the
longitudinal axis of the first base.
V
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED MARCH 13, 1984
Illustrations for plant patents are usually in color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,203
EXACUM AFFINE POT PLANT
Erik RoMDdal, Amcbs, Dcnniark, aasignor to NunerymeB's
Exchange, San Fraodsco, Calif.
FUed Feb. 16, 1983, Ser. No. 467,076
Int d} AOIH 5/00
U.S. CL Pit— 68 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct variety of Exacum plant as shown and
described, characterized by its double flowers, its floriferous-
ness, its blooming habits and the sterility of the flower. Plants
can be propagated by asexual processes true to type and the
rooting ability is excellent. The size of the single flower sur-
passes the known single cultivars.
5,204
CARNATION NAMED MINTOP
Siegfried Klemm, HanAudter 9, 7000 Stuttgart 50, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jid. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,562
Int C\? AOIH 5/00
MS. a. PH.— 70 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct varity of carnation plant, substantially
as herein shown and descried, characterized by its high pro-
ductivity of bright pink flowers borne singly on rigid, gener-
ally upright pedicels carried in spray arrangement on a sturdy
upright peduncle, the flowers being characterized by having
petals which have ruffled margins of clear white.
5,205
CARNATION NAMED KLEMORAC
Siegfried Klemm, Hanfuker 9, 7000 Stuttgart 50, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,563
Int a.' AOIH 5/00
MS. a. Pit— 70 1 Claim
1. A new and distinctive carnation cultivar, substantially as
herein shown and described, characterized by its high produc-
tivity of bright orange colored flowers borne singly on rigid,
erect pedicels carried in spray arrangement by a sturdy upright
peduncle.
5,206
CARNATION NAMED KLERONSTAR
Siegfried Klemm, Hanfacker 9, 7000 Stuttgart 50, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,963
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
MS. a. Pit.— 70 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct carnation cultivar, substantially as
herein shown and described, characterized by its high produc-
tivity of bright orange colored flowers having fan-shaped
f>etals with few short red stripes extending longitudinally in-
ward from the petal tips, the flowers being borne singly on
rigid and erect pedicels carried in spray arrangement on a
sturdy, upright peduncle.
473
>
y
r^
•r
J
PATENTS
GRANTED MAR. 13, 1984
ERRATA
For s«e
CLASS PATENT NO.
428-595 4.436,518
562-519 4.436.889
156-332 4,436.896
544-238 4.436.921
PATENTS
GRANTED MARCH 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
M3S3S1
FLAP HINGE FOR A SHOULDER PAD
Hal D. MitcheU, and Donald R. Walker, both of RoUa, Mo^
aisignori to FIggic iBtematioiial Inc., WlUougbby, Ohio
Filed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,140
lot a.i A41D n/00
M&. a. 2—2 19 ClaiiBi
4,435^52
GOGGLE
Todd G. Nesler, 2480 Doris, Brighton, Mich. 48116
FUed Not. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 444^21
Int a^ A61F 9/02
U.S. a. 2—436
SCaalmi
1. A goggle comprising:
a frame having a front side and a rear side,
a transparent lens secured across the first side of said frame,
means for detachably securing said frame to a head of a user
so that said rear side of said frame abuts against the head
of the user and thus forming a chamber between said
frame, lens and the head of the user.
at leut one ventilation port formed through said frame and
open to said chamber,
at least one elongated ventilation channel, said channel open
at each end and only each such end and defining a fluid
pasugeway between its ends, said channel secured to and
extending rearwardly from said frame,
wherein one end of said channel is open to said chamber and,
wherein the other end of said channel faces rearwardly from
the rear side of said frame and is open at a position spaced
rearwardly from the rear side of said frame.
4,435393
VOICE PROSTHESIS DEVICE AND PLACEMENT TOOL
THEREFOR
Eric D. Blom, and Mark I. Singer, both of Indianapolis, Ind.,
assignors to Hanaa Medical Products, Inc., Indianapolis, Ind.
FUed Apr. 30; 1982, Ser. No. 373,639
Int. a.i A61F inO; A61B IT/OO
UJS. Q. 3—1.3 8 Claims
1. In a shoulder pad of the type comprising a pair of arches
adapted to overlie the inner parts of the shoulders of the
wearer, the arches having laterally-spaced inner edges provid-
ing an opening for the neck of the wearer, and a pair of flaps
adapted to extend in front-to-back direction over the shoulders
for protecting the outer parts of the shoulders, an improvement
comprising a flap hinge for hinging each flap to a respective
arch for enabling the flap to swing upwardly about the hinge
upon upward movement of the outer part of a respective shoul-
der, said flap hinge comprising a first strap secured at one end
to a respective flap generally adjacent the front of the flap and
extending from the flap under the arch to the inner edge of the
arch, up around the inner edge of the arch, and thence over the
arch back to the flap for securement at its other end to the flap,
and a second strap secured at one end to the flap generally
adjacent the back of the flap and extending from the flap under
the arch to the inner edge of the arch, up around the inner edge
of the arch, and thence over the arch back to the flap for
securement at its other end to the flap.
1. A voice prosthesis device for placement in a futula to
channel air from a tracheostoma to the esophagus including in
combination:
a cylindrical housing having a proximal end with strap
means extending outwardly therefrom, a distal end, a port
therein operatively cooperating with the tracheostoma,
with said distal end having a beveled extension integral
therewith,
one-way valve means including an annular sealing rim posi-
tioned perpendicularly within said housing adjacent said
distal end and a valve membrane hingedly mounted to said
housing on the side thereof adjacent said distal end of said
housing to cooperate with said annular sealing nm, and^
an annular collar means extending outwardly from saK^
housing, said annular collar means adapted to abut against
the esophagus tissue when the device has been positioned
in the futula. to retain and hold the device in proper
position, such that upon covering the tracheostoma open-
ing, said valve membrane is moved by the channeled air
from the closed position against said annular sealing rim
to an open position wherein the channeled air enters the
esophagus to produce alaryngeal speech by the patient.
4,419,894
HIP JOINT PROSTHESIS WITH A SHAFT TO BE FITTED
INTO THE MEDULLARY CANAL OF THE FEMUR
Arnold Keller, Kalhndc, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aast^or to
Watdenar Link GnhH Jk Co., Haauiberg, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Mar. 26, 1981, S«-. No. 247,776
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 24,
1980, 3019690
Int a.} A61F 1/04
U.S. CL 3—1.913 2 OaiiM
1. In a hip joint prosthetic device comprising a rigkl shank to
be fitted into the medullary canal of the femur, a head, a end
flange at the proximal end of the shank, a head and a neck
475
476
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
section extending from the end flange to the head, the head
being anteverted relative to the shank in the LM (lateral-
medial) plane, the improvement wherein the shank has, in the
proximal region thereof, a section extending a distance between
approximately 4-8 cm from the end flange which is curved in
the AP (anterior-posterior) plane with a center of curvature in
implanting a lens having tangentially resilient strands on op-
posed sides of an intraocular lens attached to the body of said
lens; wherein the free end is connected to a snag resistant ring,
adding the diameter sizes of said ring and said lens to the
distance between the edge of said ring and the edge of said lens
in mm. to determine the size of said eye chamber in mm,
4,435356
BIFOCAL INTRAOCULAR LENS STRUCTURE AND
SPECTACLE ACTUATION FRAME
Francis A. L'Esperance, 255 Oakwood Rd., Englewood, NJ.
Filed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,409
Int a.» A61F 1/16. 1/24
U.S. a. 3—13 24 Clainu
the AP plane anterior of the proximal region of the shank,
wherein the axis of the shank at its proximal end extends, in the
AP plane, approximately in the direction of the longitudinal
axis of the neck section and wherein the shank has, in the distal
region thereof, a section curved in the AP plane in the opposite
direction to said proximal section.
4,435,855
UNIVERSAL INTRAOCULAR LENS AND A METHOD OF
MEASURING AN EYE CHAMBER SIZE
Jaswant S. Pannu, 6120 Almond Ter., Plantation, Fla. 33317
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 136,243, Apr. 1, 1980,
abandoned. This application May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,953
Int. a.3 A61F 1/16. 1/24: A61B 5/00
U.S. a. 3—13 10 Claims
1. Iiitraocular lens structure, comprising a first lens element
including haptic means for stabilized mounting of the lens in
one of the chambers of an eye and substantially on the pupil-
lary axis of the eye, a second lens element, means coacting
between off-axis locations of said lens elements for pivotally
stopending said second lens element at axial offset with respect
to said first lens element, means coacting between said lens
elements for selective retention of (1) a pivoted position of said
second lens element wherein the optical axes of said lens ele-
ments are in substantial registration and (2) a pivoted position
of said second lens element wherein said second lens element is
substantially offset from the axis of said first lens element, and
means associated with said second lens element and adapted to
facilitate selective pivoted displacement from one to the other
of said positions.
1. An intraocular lens comprising:
a lens body;
at least two spaced flexible positioning and supporting ele-
ments integrally formed with said lens body as a one-piece
construction and extending radially, outwardly from the
periphery of said lens body;
said elements defining a continuous, substantially circular
arc having a diameter greater than the diameter of said
lens body, said arc curved toward said lens circumference
and terminating in a free end spaced from said periphery;
and
snag-resistant means integrally formed on the free end of
said elements for smoothly guiding and positioning the
lens across contacted eye tissue when implanting the lens,
said snag resistant means having an uninterrupted, contin-
uously, smoothly curved outer periphery which merges
with said free end and is substantially greater in size than
the width of said flexible elements.
10. A method of measuring the size of an eye chamber by
4,435,857
APPARATUS FOR CLEANSING AND DISINFECTING
TOILET TANKS AND BOWLS
Gilbert K. Meloy, EarlTillc, 111., aasignor to Twinoak Producti,
Inc., Piano, 111.
FUed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 364,786
Int. d? E03D 9/02
19 Claims
U.S. a. 4—228
1. An apparatus for automatically cleansing and disinfecting
a toilet tank and toilet bowl by treating the water discharged
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
477
from the toilet tank each time the toilet is flushed, said appara-
tus comprising means for placing the apparatus in a toilet tank,
a reservoir, a source of disinfectant soluble in water located in
said reservoir, a volume control chamber communicating with
said reservoir, a delivery tube vented to the atmosphere, a
dispensing orifice defined by the delivery tube, and a passage
defined between said delivery tube and said reservoir, said
orifice being located beneath the normal level of water in the
tank when the apparatus is placed in the tank whereby water is
introduced through said orifice, the water than passing into
said reservoir and into said volume control chamber and rising
to the level of water in the tank, said delivery tube then being
in dynamic fluid communication with water in the toilet tank,
and wherein flushing of the toilet results in dropping of the
water level in said tank whereby the head of water in said
volume control chamber forces a dose of aqueous disinfectant
solution into said tank.
4,435358 *"' '
AUTOMATIC TOILET BOWL CLEANING DEVICE
John E. Dolan, 15 New Main St., Haverstraw, N.Y. 10927
FUed Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,123
Int. a.^ E03D 9/02
U.S. a. 4—228 5 Qaims
1. An automatic toilet bowl cleaning device adapted to
dispense water-soluble disinfectant into the flushing water of a
toilet tank comprising:
(a) a container for the disinfectant;
(b) a cover, consisting of a single shell, fitted on the con-
tainer, said cover having a top wall and a side, or periph-
eral, wall; a first series of at least three spaced holes ex-
tending through the top wall of said cover and a second
series of at least three spaced holes extending through the
side, or peripheral, wall of said cover;
(c) the total area of all of the spaced holes of the second
series being less then the total area of all of the spaced
holes of the first series, all of the spaced holes of the
second series being arranged solely in one-half of the
cover, while all of the spaced holes of the first series are
arranged solely in the diametrically opposite half of the
cover;
(d) whereby the disinfectant solution formed within the
container is consistently dispensed due to the increased
mixing action of the solvent with the solid disinfectant.
4,435359
TOILET FLUSH TANK
Reinhard Bamowski, HauptftriMe 252, 5163 Langerwehe, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 350,026
Claimi priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 24,
1981, 3106764
Int CV E03D 1/14. 3/12
MS. a. 4—324 3 Claims
1. A toilet flush tank apparatus having a water reservoir, said
apparatus being selectively actuable to fully empty said reser-
voir or to automatically interrupt emptying of said reservoir at
an intermediate level, a float activated water feed valve in said
reservoir, a drain closure part, movable means reacting against
said closure part in the filled condition of said reservoir to
close the latter, an actuator device to shift said movable means
away from said closure part, said actuator device being shift-
able between first and second positions, said actuator device in
its first position releasing said movable means and in said sec-
ond position lifting said movable means clear of said drain part,
the combination including automatic means for returning said
movable means to closing position of said drain when said
actuator device is shifted from said first to said second position
and thereafter released to said first position, said automatic
means being responsive to the water level in said tank reaching
an intermediate level between full and empty to efiect said
return movement to said movable means.
4,435,860
SPRING SUSPENSION FOR SOFA-BED
Thomas H. Talley, Downers Grove, lU.; Lee W. Sheets, Money
Valley, Pa., and Alvin F. Wiley, Rushilllc, Ind., assignors to
Schnadig Corporation, Chicago, 111.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 145,356, Apr. 30, 1980,
abandoned. This application Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,619
\nX,CV KAIC 17/04
U.S. a. 5—13 13 Claims
1. In a sofa-bed having a sofa frame and a folding bed frame,
the sofa frame having a front, a pair of sides, and a back, the
bed frame being foldable between a sitting position in which
the bed frame is confined within the sofa frame and a sleeping
position in which the bed frame extends forwardly from the
sofa frame, the improvement comprising spring suspension
means for resiliently supporting the bed frame on each of the
sides of the sofa frame, each of the spring suspension means
comprising a fuit mounting bracket attached to the sofa frame,
a second mounting bracket attached to the bed frame, and
resilient connecting means extending between the first and
second brackets for movably and resilientiy supporting the
second mounting bracket relative to the first mounting bracket.
478
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
the sofa-bed including a seat cushion supported by the bed
frame when the bed frame is in the sitting position and includ-
ing four of said spring suspension means for resiliently support-
ing the bed frame generally below the front and rear of the seat
cushion on each side of the sofa frame, the resUient connecting
means of each of the spring suspension means including a tube
attached to one of the mounting brackets and slidably con-
nected to the other mounting bracket and a compressible coil
spring surrounding the tube between the two mounting brack-
ets.
4,435361
LEDGE BED
WilUam L. Lindley, P.O. Box 1292, Conroe, Tex. 77301
FUed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,348
Int Cl.3 A61G 7/00
U.S. a. 5—65 10 Claim*
1. A ledge bed for positioning a bedpan or bathtub beneath
a patient on the ledge bed without having to physically lift or
move the patient, comprising:
a main frame;
floor engaging support legs telescopically connected to said
main frame;
a foot mattress support adjustably connected to said main
frame;
an head mattress support pivotally connected to said main
frame;
elevation means with said main frame for raising and lower-
ing said main frame on said telescopically connected sup-
port legs; and,
a stiff leg assembly pivotally connected to said head mattress
support whereby when said stiff leg assembly is vertically
positioned and said main frame is lowered, said stiff leg
assembly will engage the floor surface whereupon said
head mattress support will form a ledge vertically dis-
placed above said foot mattress support.
4,435,862
CX)NTROL ARRANGEMENT AND METHOD FOR AN
ADJUSTABLE BED
Frank R. King, Glen Mills, and Donald J. Engier, Upland, both
• of Pa^ anignors to Sinunoni Univeraal Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Oct 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,528
Int a.3 A61G 7/06
UA a. 5—66 15 ciaima
2. In a motor driven adjustable bed having mattress support-
ing portions for supporting a mattress for an occupant in a
variety of positions and including a head portion at a head end
of the bed, a foot portion at a foot end of the bed, and a thigh
portion between the head and foot portions,
frame means for supporting the mattress supporting por-
tions, and
position controlling mechanism operatively interconnecting
the mattress supporting portions and the frame means and
including a plurality of motors operatively connected
with the frame means for moving the frame means and
thereby for positioning the mattress supporting portions in
desired positions,
an improvement in said position controlling mechanism
which faciliutes control over movement of the bed into a
variety of positions and comprising:
oommand means actuable by an operator of said bed for
generating command signals indicative of selected bed
positions,
programmable memory means for receiving and storing
control signals indicative of allowed and disallowed
movements, and
CH^
NuRse-
Station
— 1
lOOO
Patient
STATION
—
WO'
I4I'
MoVPflOCEbSOR
TRIAC
DRIVERS
^
MOUAMMABLE
MEMORY
LIMIT
SWITCH
SENSORS
46T,
Motor
LIMIT
Switches
55T.
Motor
Ml
limit
Sk/ITCHES
MOTOR L""'"" I— •
S0LEN0ib^>:4ui1CW
145-^
LIMIT
SWITCH
■ggr
LIMIT
Switch
processor means operatively communicating with said com-
mand means and with said programmable memory means
and with said motors and responsive to said command
signals and to said control signals for actuating at least one
of said motors for moving said frame means toward an
allowed, selected bed position.
4,435,863
PATIENT TRANSPORTING DEVICE
Joel Lerich, 1418 W. Oak St, Ft. Collins, Colo. 80521
Filed Ang. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,226
Int a.J A61G 7/10
MS. a. 5-81 B 21 Claims
1. A patient transporting device comprising:
a support projecting upwardly from a base;
a chest pad shaped and oriented to fit against the upper torso
of the user when the lower torso of the user m positioned
beneath said chest pad;
and a Unkage assembly coupUng said chest pad to said sup-
port and including means for enabling swinging of said
chest pad effectively about a horizontal axis, with said
upper torso secured to said chest pad, from a fuvt position
in which said chest pad is swung outwardly away from
said support to permit engagement of said chest pad with
said upper torso when said lower torso is positioned be-
neath said cheat pad and a second position in which said
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
479
chest pad has been swung by said linkage assembly to a
stable location above said linkage assembly to have moved
4,435,865
FRAME FOR COMB HONEY
John A. Hogg, 2225 S. 36th St^ Gaksborg. Mich. 49053
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 120,951, Feb. 13, 19W. This
appUcation Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,273
The portion of the tern of this patent subaeqaeat to May 18,
1999, hat been diaclaimed.
Int. a.J AOIK 47/02. 47/04
MS. a. 6—2 R 16 Clains
upwardly said upper torso with said lower torso remain-
ing beneath said chest pad.
4,435,864
AIR BED ARRANGEMENT
Milton A. Callaway, Jackson, Oreg., assignor to Simons U^.A.
Corporation, Atlanta, Ga.
FUed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,958
Int a.5 A47C 27/70
U.S. a. 5—453 15 Qaims
1. A mattress foundation designed to be used in combination
with an accompanying inflatable mattress, comprising a pri-
mary support structure for supporting a mattress and any loads
imposed thereon; a compartment defmed with said support
structure; and an air compressor positioned within said com-
partment, said primary support structure including a flrst area
of support structure extending for substantially the full height
of the mattress foundation and a second area of support struc-
ture extending from the top surface of the foundation to only a
portion of the full height of the mattress foundation, said com-
partment being positioned below said second area of said sup-
port structure, said fu^t area including a flrst inflatable support
structure extending for substantially the full height of the
mattress foundation, and said second area including a second
inflatable support structure extending from the top surface of
the foundation to only a portion of the full height of the mat-
tress foundation.
1. In a device for producing comb honey in a hive having a
hive body, the combination comprising:
a super for superposing on the hive body and having ends
and sides;
a plurality of separate comb sections positioned within said
super, each of said sections having perimeter components
with top and bottom edges;
means for inducing bees to build comb only in one direction
within a said section and to a predetermined depth therein,
wherein each of said sections has a bottom wall connect-
ing the bottom edges of said perimeter components, said
bottom wall has a foundation surface facing into its said
section, the top of one section is adjacent the bottom wall
of the next section, and means project from the top of said
one section in cooperative relation with the bottom wall
of the next section for permitting bee access and efTecting
comb depth control in said one section.
4,435,866
PELLEN TRAP FOR BEEHIVES WITH DUAL
ENTRANCEWAYS
Royden Brown, 4343 E. Kein Dr., Phoenix, Ariz. 85253
FUed Mar. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 354,882
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 6, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int a.i AOIK 47/06
U.S. a. 6—4 R 10 Chdms
1. A pollen trap for collecting pollen from bees as they enter
a beehive comprising:
a frame having an open top and dimensioned to fit as one of
the axially positioned parts of a vertically stacked beehive,
a drawer slidably arranged in said frame to assume a substan-
tiaUy horizontal position in the hive,
said drawer having a bottom surface comprising a first
screen, the mesh size of which is smaller than the pollen
dropped thereon by the bees,
a second screen mounted in said frame above said drawer
and having a mesh size smaller than the size of the pollen
carrying bees for prohibiting them from entering the
drawer,
a pair of parallel and spacedly arranged third and fourth
480
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
screens mounted on said frame, but offset above said
second screen and forming an elongated space between
said second screen and said pair of screens,
said third and fourth screens having mesh openings offset
from each other causing bees crawling through said pair
of screens to be forced to follow a circuitous path, divest-
ing their legs of a substantial portion of the pollen carried
thereon,
a first entranceway for the pollen carrying bees into the
pollen trap positioned adjacent the front and above said
drawer and connected with one end of said space between
said second screen and said pair of screens, and
a second entranceway for the pollen carrying bees into the
pollen trap positioned adjacent the front and below said
drawer and connected with another end of said space
between said second screen and said pair of screens,
whereby the bees may move through said pair of screens at
points all along their lengths.
4,435,867
DEVICE FOR GATHERING THE POLLEN FROM A BEE
Tae S. Jeong, 1184, Hwanghak-dong, Jung-ku, Seoul, Rep. of
Korea
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,663
Int. a.^ AOIK 47/06; B32B 3/10
U.S. a. 6-4 R 9 ci^^
1. A device for gathering pollen from bees entering a bee-
hive comprising a pollen collecting screen having a plurality of
entrances for passage of said bees therethrough each of said
entrances having a wider upper section through which the
body of the bee is to pass and a substantially square narrow
lower section through which the legs of the bees pass to be
contacted by the portion of the screen forming said narrow
section to remove the pollen from the legs of the bee.
4,435,868
HIKER'S HATCHET
Sidney J. McQueen, 414 Coors Blvd. SW., Albuquerque, N.
Mex. 87105
Continnation-in-|Mrt of Ser. No. 189,579, Sep. 23, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 365,035
Int. Q\? B26B 11/00
U.S. a. 7-158 2 Claims
1. A combination tool comprising: a hatchet having a left
side, a right side, a hammer spacer and an edge spacer, wherein
the left side and the right side, each are flat plates shaped to a
hatchet head and having integrally formed therewith a hatchet
handle, being straight, the extremity of each of the hatchet
handles being rounded: and wherein the hatchet head has a
blade and a hammer end: and wherein the hammer spacer is a
flat plate shaped to the contour of the hammer end, but extends
from the hammer end toward the blade edge only to an exten-
sion of the line deflning the nearest edge of the handle; and
wherein the edge spacer is shaped to the contour of the blade
but extends from the blade toward the hammer and only to an
extension of the line defining the nearest edge of the handle;
and wherein the left side handle has a plurality of stop holes
along its length; and wherein the right side hndle has a longitu-
dinal slot running from the vicinity of the hatchet head toward
the extremity of the handle; and wherein the edge spacer and
hammer spacer are the same thickness; and wherein the ham-
mer spacer and edge spacer are placed between the left hand
side and right hand side during assembly and rigidly and per-
manently assembled as by welding; and
a knife having a blade and handle; the blade being a flat
member whose thickness is the same as the hammer spacer
and edge spacer: one edge of the blade sharpened to a
knife edge and the other edge of the blade sharpened to a
saw tooth edge, both the saw tooth and knife edges ex-
tending approximately one-half the length of the blade,
the remainder of the blade being the shank, wherein the
shank has two ears one on each edge adjacent to the knife
edge and saw tooth edge, and two ears adjacent end of the
shank, each of the said ears having a hole therein; and
wherein the handle consists of two half handles, a right
half and a left half, and the handle shaped to a comforUble
grip; and the half handles having ears near the blade edge
and saw tooth edge and having ears near the end of the
shank said ears on the handle mating with the ears on the
shank; and each said half handle having a flat wide groove
on its inner faces, and a button hole from the inner surface
to the outer surface; and each said half handle having a
spring depression longitudinally aligned with the button
hole, and a screw hole axially aligned and between the
button hole and screw hole, and a cross shaped recess in
the vicinity of the button hole, screw hole, and spring
depression, said cross shaped recess having a pivot crown
tranverse to the half handle, and the right half handle
having pivotally installed in the flat wide groove on its
inner surface in the recess, a pivot latch; said pivot latch
having an oblong attaching hole, a lock stud sized to fit
easily into the stop holes, and a button which protrudes
through the button hole, said pivot latch being pivotally
installed by a screw which slideably passes through the
oblong attaching hole and threadably engages the screw
hole; said pivot latch being biased such that the lock stud
engages the stop holes; and a biasing means installed in the
right half handle between the lock stud and the spring
depression; and the left half handle having pivotally in-
stalled in the flat wide groove on its inner surface in the
recess another pivot latch; said pivot latch installed on the
left half handle having an oblong attaching hole, a lock
stud sized to fit easily into the longitudinal slot, and a
button which protrudes slightly less than flush with the
outside of the left half handle, said pivot latch installed in
the left half handles by a screw which slideably passes
through the oblong attaching hole and threadably engages
the screw hole; and said pivot latch being biased such that
the lock stud engages the longitudinal slot; and a brasing
means installed in the left half handle between the lock
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
481
stud and the spring depression; and wherein the two half
handles are assembled to the shank, by bolts passing
through the holes in the ears on the half handles and the
shank,
and a means for sheathing the combination tool for safety
and carrying.
4,435,869
SHOE LASTING MACHINES
WUliam H. Berrill, Leicesten Herbert W. Boot, Thurraaston,
and Frank Hartshorn, Wigiton, all of England, assignors to
USM Corporation, Farmington, Conn.
FUed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,210
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Mar. 22, 1980,
8009771
Int. a.i A43D 21/00
U,S. a. 12—12 18 Claims
1. A machine for lasting side portions of shoes comprising:
a shoe support arrangement by which a last carrying a shoe
upper and an insole can be positioned and which includes
means serving to position the shoe in a desired relationship
with the longitudinal center line of the machine;
instrumentalities for operating on side portions of a shoe
supported by the shoe support arrangement;
means for effecting relative movement between the shoe
support arrangement and said instrumentalities in a direc-
tion extending lengthwise of a shoe supported by the shoe
support arrangement, whereby the instrumentalities are
caused to operate progressively along opposite side por-
tions of such shoe, wherein the instrumentalities are
mounted on a support which is movable between a first
position, in which the instrumentalities can be positioned
symmetrically at opposite sides of the longitudinal center
line of the machine, and a second position, in which said
instrumentalities can be positioned offset from said line;
a support moving means is provided for moving the support
between its first and second {>ositions, the arrangement
being such that the support is positioned in a selected one
of its first and second positions at the start of an operating
cycle of the machine and is moved by the 8upix>rt-moving
means to the other of said positions during said operating
cycle;
said support being movable between its first position and a
selected one of two second positions, in which said instru-
mentalities can be positioneid offset from the longitudinal
center line of the machine, said two second positions of
the support being arranged symmetrically at opposite
sides of the first position thereof, and the arrangement
being such that the support is caused to be moved as
aforesaid during an operating cycle of the machine be-
tween its first position and one of its second positions
selected according to whether the shoe being operated
upon is a left or a right;
said instrumentalities comprising side lasting instrumentali-
ties;
said support-moving means for the support for the side
lasting instrumentalities as they are moved between ito
first and second positions comprises cam means; and
wherein said cam means comprises a cam member having
two cam faces and means for moving said member so as to
enable one or other of said faces to be engaged by an
abutment member, the arrangement being such that, in an
operating cycle of the machine, relative movement is
caused to take place over a predetermined distance be-
tween the cam member and the abutment member be-
tween a first operative position in which they are out of
engagement with one another, in which position the sup-
port for the side lasting instnmientalities is in its first
position, and a second operative position in which the
abutment is located in engagement with one or other of
the cam faces, and further that, with cam member and
abutment member in such second operative position,
when one of said cam faces is engaged by the abutment
member said support is in one of its second positions, and
when the other cam face is so engaged, said support is in
the other of its seco'^d positions.
4,435370
FLOOR MACHINE
JefTery R. Tucker, 6831 Cabernet Atc., Newark, Calif. 94560;
Dennis W. Ross, 1746 Carpentier St., San Leandro, Calif.
94577, and HartweU F. Tucker, 1300 HoUy Ave., Los Altos,
Calif. 94022
Division of Ser. No. 129,902, Mar. 13, 1980, Pat. No. 4,330,897.
This appUcation Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 361,427
Int a.J A47L 11/14
UJS. a. 15—98 6 Claims
1. In a floor machine of the type having a power unit com-
prising a rotatable shaft driven through a transmission, a drive
unit connected to the rotatable shaft for rotation thereby, a
floor processing pad or the like connected to the drive unit, a
drive guard enclosing at least a portion of the drive unit, a
cover enclosing the transmission, a motor connected to the
rotatable shaft through the transmission, means for connecting
said motor to a source of electric power, said motor being a
series universal motor arranged to develop 1.9 horsepower and
torque sufficient to rotate said pad at a speed of from 800-900
rpm when the full weight of the power unit, said motor, and
the handle rests on said pad and said motor is connected to a
source of 120 volt power, the handle being an elongated mem-
ber carrying a control box at its upper end and being mounted
482
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
on and extending upwardly from the transmission extension,
said control box comprising spaced side walls, the improve-
ment comprising a switch in the control box connected in the
electrical circuit of the power unit, an elongate rigid lever with
longitudinal edges, means mounting said lever for pivotal
movement about one longitudinal edge thereof on one of said
side walls of the control box, said lever having an abutment
portion adapted to engage and actuate said switch, and spring
positioned adjacent the lever and arranged to be flexed when
said lever is gripped and moved away from said switch and to
move said abutment portion into contact with said switch
when said lever is released.
4,435.871
CLEANER FOR A TUBULAR WICK
OiTille O. JohnaoB, 4011 S. Shady Uu, E?eleth, Minn. 55734
FUed Jan. 21, 1982, Scr. No. 341,510
Int a.3 B08B l/OO
MS. a. 15—104 R 5 Claims
1. A cleaner for loosening accumulated carbon on the top
edge of a tubular wick, with the tubular wick having a diame-
ter, comprising, in combination: a circular support having a
circular periphery and an annular area adjacent to the periph-
ery, means extending from the annular area adjacent the pe-
riphery of the support for at least partial insertion into the
carbonized top edge of the tubular wick at a multiplicity of
equally spaced locations around the tubular wick and for loos-
ening the carbon when the support is routed slightly, with the
insertion and loosening means comprising: a multiplicity of
pointed elements including a pointed shank portion, and means
for connecting said pointed elements to said support in an
equally spaced relation and in a single circular formation in the
annular area of the circular support for engagement into the
top edge of the tubular wick, with the annular area of the
circular support having a diameter substantially equal to the
diameter of the tubular wick, and with the annular area of the
support defining an inner, central circular area of the circular
support having a diameter slightly less than the diameter of the
tubular wick, with the inner, central circular area of the circu-
lar support being free of any pointed elements or other protru-
sions.
4,435,872
SPHEROID PIG LAUNCHER
VcTMHi Leiluun, P.O. Box 20(9, Pooca Qty, OUa. 74602
Flkd May 10, 1962, Scr. No. 376,732
lot a.3 BQ8B 9/04
MS. a. 15—104.06 A 5 Claims
1. In a launcher for launching spheroid pigs one at a time
into a pipeline comprising:
a downward sloping barrel magazine for holding a multiplic-
ity of spheroid pigs, the magazine having a closable fluid
tight opening for loading the pigs on the breech end and a
foil bore opening valve on the muzzle end in fluid commu-
nication with a pipeline the magazine characterized by
having a generally downwardly sloping lower surface
such that the pigs will pass from the breech end to the
muzzle end of the magazine in response to the force of
gravity;
the improvement comprising:
apparatus situated in connection with the magazine up-
stream of the full bore valve for releasing the pigs one at
a time into the pipeline from the magazine;
said apparatus having:
(a) a shaft means passing sealably through the wall of the
magazine,
(b) on the exterior of the magazine, a means affixed to the
shaft for turning the shaft, and
(c) affixed to the shaft on the interior of the magazine, a
catcher-releaser affixed to the end of the shaft having a
convexoid surface and a concavoid surface opposite the
convexoid surface, the concavoid surface generally
adapted to mate with a portion of the surface of one of
the pigs, the catcher-releaser having a truncation gener-
ally parallel to the long axis of the shaft, and a trunca-
tion generally perpendicular to the long axis of the
shaft, such that rotation of the shaft will catch and
release a single spheroid pig.
4,435,873
BATTERY POST AND TERMINAL CLEANER
James L. Pool, Clarinda, Iowa, assignor to Lisle Corporation,
Clariada, Iowa
Filed Not. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 444,969
lot CL^ B23D 79/06; A47L 13/06
U.S. CL 15—105 7 Claims
6. An apparatus for cleaning posts and terminals comprising
in combination:
(a) a plurality of blades, said blades having an outside scrap-
ing surface at one end and an inside scraping surface at the
opposite end;
(b) a body member, said body member having a frustoconi-
cal inside cavity, said cavity having a converging array of
slots extending uniformly toward a longitudinal axis of the
cavity, each of said slots being adapted to slidingly receive
one of said blades to adjust the spacing between said
blades at said ends;
(c) a guide, said guide having a plurality of notches therein
for receiving said blades and retaining said blades in a
converging relationship in said body member slots; and
(d) a blade connecting member connected simultaneously to
all of the blades and longitudinally slidable therewith to
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
483
maintain sliding movement in unison of the blades relative
to the body member.
4,435374
BUND CLEANING DEVICE
Jeff A. JacobsoB, 22 WoodgroTC, Irrlnc, Calif. 92714
FUed Aug. 1. 1983. Ser. No. 519.075
Int. a.J A47L 4/02
\}&. a. 15—210 A
14 Claims
4.435,875
PARALLEL ARM WINDSHIELD WIPER ASSEMBLY
Klaus Hauk, Altrip, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Deere A
Company. Moline, HI.
Filed May 5, 1982. Scr. No. 375,070
Claims priority. applicatioB European Pat Off.. May 13.
1981, 81302130
Int a.> B60S 1/16
U.S. a. 15— 250J3 1 Claim
1. An improved parallel arm windshield wiper assembly
comprising:
(a) a drive motor attached to a stationary support plate, said
support plate having an aperture formed therein with a set
of notches arranged about the periphery of said aperture;
(b) a drive spindle passing through both said aperture
formed in said support plate and through an aperture
formed in a windiJiield, said drive spindle connected at
one end to said motor and having a wiper arm attached to
a second end;
(c) a spacer tube coaxially aligned about said drive spindle
and extending through said aperture formed in said wind-
shield, said spacer tube having a pair of outwardly extend-
ing tabs formed on first and second ends thereof, said tabs
on said first end engaging in said set of notches formed in
said support plate;
(d) a sleeve coaxially arranged between said drive spindle
and said spacer tube, said sleeve having an externally
threaded end surface;
(e) a bracket having an opening formed therein approximate
a first end and having a set of notches formed about the
periphery of said opening, said bracket being positioned
about both said drive spindle and said sleeve with said set
of notches mating with said Ubs formed on said second
end of said spacer tube, said bracket further being retained
at said first end by a nut futened on said threaded end
surface of said sleeve;
(0 a stud secured to a second end of said bracket;
(g) a control arm aligned parallel to said wiper arm and
being pivotally attached at one end to said stud; and
1. In a blind cleaning device having a handle and a plurality
of vertically spaced rigid fingers with cleaning elements ex-
tending from a vertical support interconnected to the handle,
the improvement which comprises:
said fingers includes a first finger fixedly mounted to said
vertical support at generally the midpoint thereof, said
first finger having its central longitudinal axis perpendicu-
lar to the central longitudinal axis of said vertical support,
a pair of second and third fingers fixedly mounted to said
vertical support on opposite sides of said first finger, each
of said second and third fingers having their central longi-
tudinal axes making an angle of about l.S* with respect to
a line extending from the midpoint of each of said second
and third ffngers at its respective point of connection to
said vertical support along its respective central longitudi-
nal axis outwardly normal to the central longitudinal axis
of said vertical support whereby insertion of the fingers
between slats of a blind is adapted to progressively clamp
the slats between adjacent fingers until the slats abut
against the vertical support.
(h) a wiper blade support member pivotally connected to
distal ends of both said wiper arm and said control arm, a
line drawn between the centers of said drive spindle and
said stud combines with said wiper arm, said control arm
and said wiper blade support member to form a parallelo-
gram which permits said wiper blade to maintain a con-
stant orientation throughout its oscillatory sweep of said
windshield.
4,435376
FIBER WASTE DISPOSAL SYSTEM FOR TRAVELING
PNEUMATIC CLEANERS
William L. Mulligan, Charlotte. N.C., assignor to Parks-Cnuacr
Company. Fitchburg. Mass.
FUed Oct 13, 1982, Scr. No. 434,115
lot a^ A47L i/i6
U.S. a. 15—312 R 5 Claims
1. In a fiber waste disposal system for a texile room contain-
ing a plurality of groups of fiber waste generating textile ma-
chines and having a plurality of traveling pneumatic cleaners
each movable in a predetermined path of travel adjacent a
respective group of textile machines for removing fiber wute
from the textile machines, each traveling cleaner having at
least one collection chamber thereon for collecting fiber waste
therein, a plurality of unloading station means corresponding
in number to the number of traveling pneumatic cleaners with
an unloading station means being mounted adjacent the path of
travel of each respective traveling cleaner for removing fiber
waste from the collection chamber of the respective traveling
484
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
cleaner during a portion of its travel along said path, a fiber
waste collection unit connected to said plurality of unloading
station means for receiving fiber waste therefrom, suction
producing means connected to said plurality of unloading
station means and said collection unit for removing fiber waste
from the collection chambers of respective traveling cleaners
and for transporting such fiber waste from the unloading sta-
tion means to said collection unit, control means operatively
associated with said traveling cleaners and said unloading
station means for controlling the operation of said traveling
cleaners to provide a fiber waste collecting cycle and a fiber
waste unloading cycle, said control means including cooperat-
ing means carried by each unloading station means and its
associated traveling cleaner for effecting fiber waste unloading
of each traveling cleaner during each unloading cycle, the
improvement therein comprising said control means further
including deactivating means operatively associated with each
of said cooperating means for deactivating said cooperating
means upon unloading of the associated traveling cleaner to
ensure that said traveling cleaners are unloaded only once
during each unloading cycle.
symmetrica] interconnected halves which lie on opposite sides
of a central plane,
each of said halves of the loop including an upper portion, an
intermediate portion, a lower portion and a bottom, each
said upper portion extending downwardly from the shaft
in a direction which diverges from the central plane, each
said intermediate portion extending downwardly from the
4,435,877
NOISE REDUCING MEANS FOR VACUUM CLEANER
Robert C. Berfield, Jersey Shore, Pa., assignor to Shop- Vac
Corporation, WUliamsport, Pa.
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,446
Int. a.3 A47L 9/00
U.S. a. 15—326
SClaims
1. A vacuum cleaner including a bypass-type blower motor,
a main blower fan connected to said motor and driven thereby
to create a stream of working air, a dust filter located in said
stream and upstream of said fan, said stream also extending
through first and second plenums disposed downstream of said
fan with said second plenum being downstream of said first
plenum, partition means defining said plenums and including a
first partition separating said plenums, said first partition hav-
ing an opening through which said working air flows from said
first plenum to said second plenum, sound muffler means in-
cluding a section extending across said opening and through
which said working air flows in leaving said first plenum and
entering said second plenum, said section being constructed of
foam material and having a plurality of relatively large perfo-
rations aligned with said opening.
upper portion in a direction which converges toward the
central plane, each said lower portion extending down-
wardly from the intermediate portion towards the central
plane, and each said bottom extending from the lower
portion to the central plane and having a center of curva-
ture located in said central plane and a radius which is less
than the distance from the central plane to the lower end
of the upper portion.
4 435 879
MODELLING OR PACKING DEVICE FOR FOWL
Komelis ran 't Slot, Uddel, Netherlands, assignor to Moba
Holding Bameyeld B.V., Bameveld, Netherlands
Filed Jnn. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 388,658
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, Jun. 17, 1981,
8102913
Int. a.3 A22C 21/00
U.S. a. 17-11 4 a.i,„s
4,435378
POULTRY EVISCERATING TOOL
Rudolf J. Tielemaii, Broekhoizerweg 6, 6983 BM Doesbors,
Netbcriands
Filed Jan. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 460,432
Int a.3 A22C 21/06
M&. Ct 17—11 8 CSaiiM
1. A tool for eviscerating a poultry carcass by entering the
body cavity of the carcass from a rear access opening, said tool
comprising a shaft and a loop member mounted on said shaft,
said loop being vertically elongated and being formed of two
1. Device for dressing a poultry, provided with a first push-
ing member (6) adapted to push the body of the poultry in a
fixed direction and a second pushing member (18) adapted to
push the ends of the legs of the poultry in nearly the same
direction to lay the said legs against the said body, provided
with a driving mechanism (15, 12, 16, 14, 4, 2, 5) for both
pushing members which causes these members to carry out a
forward and backward stroke, wherewith the second pushing
member (18) moves faster than the first one (6) at the end of the
forward stroke, in which each pushing member is coupled to a
different one of two pivotable arms (2, 12) having different
pivots (1, 11) wherewith a member (3) having a control slit (4)
is connected to one (2) of the said arms and a control member
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
483
(14) fitting in said slit (4) is connected to the other of said arms,
said slit having a first portion (4o) which is directed mainly
radially with respect to the pivot of the arm connected to the
member having the control slit and a second portion (4c) that
is mainly tangentially directed with respect to said pivot, one
(12) of the said arms being connected to a driving means (15) to
be pivoted about its pivot (11).
4,435,880
COLLAR CLASP
Irving Gardner, P.O. Box 294, Hunter, N.Y. 12442
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 312,378, Oct. 19, 1981,
abandoned. This application Dec. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453,275
Int. a.J A41D 25/04. 25/10
U.S. a. 24-49 KC 15 Qaims
1. A collar clasp comprising:
a backing bar including an elongated member, said backing
bar having a central opening and two side openings
therein, said central opening being centrally located along
the major axis of said backing bar and the two side open-
ings located substantially equally distant along said major
axis on opposite sides of said central opening, both the
central opening and the two side openings being grouped
together;
a clasp bar including an elongated member> said clasp bar
having a central opening and two side openings therein,
said Central opening being centrally located along the
major axis of said clasp bar and the two side openings
being located substantially equally distant along said
major axis on opposite sides of said centrally located
opening, both the central opening and the two side open-
ings being grouped together;
a thread means including a knob aligned with and located
through both the central opening in said backing bar and
the central opening in said clasp bar, said thread means
being adapted to draw said backing bar and said clasp bar
together; and
a pair of guide rods aligned with and located through the
two side openings in said backing bar and the two side
openings in said clasp bar to keep the clasp bar and back-
ing bar aligned in both the open and in the closed position.
4,435,881
HARNESS CLIP
Noboru Yamaguchi, and Seiichi Satoh, both of Yokohama, Ja-
pan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
FUed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,108
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 28, 1980, 55-
170639[U1
Int. a.3 B65D 63/10
VS. a. 24—16 PB 7 Claims
1. A harness clip comprising:
(a) an engaging member having a hole therethrough and a
stepped portion within said hole,
(b) a leg portion integrally connected to said engaging mem-
ber and extending from one side of said engaging member,
said leg portion having an engaging portion extending to
one side of said leg portion,
(c) a flexible strap integrally connected to said engaging
member and extending from the other side of said engag-
ing member, said strap having a plurality of teeth on one
side thereof and being flat on the other side thereof,
(d) said strap adapted to wrap around a harness for contact-
ing said harness with said flat side of said strap and for
subsequent passage through said hole of said engaging
member, one of said plurality of teeth of said strap engag-
ing said stepped portion of said engaging member for
securing said harness to said engaging member,
(e) said leg portion and said strap adapted to be extended
within a hole of a panel for securing said clip thereto, said
engaging portion of said leg portion flexibly bent by said
panel and passing through said panel hole, said engaging
member contacting one side of said panel upon insertion of
said leg portion and said strap through said panel hole, and
(0 said teeth of said strap positioned apart from one another
such that one of said plurality of teeth resiliently contacts
the other side of said panel upon contact of said engaging
member with said one side of said panel for biasing said
clip in secure engagement with said panel.
4,435,882
ASSEMBLY FOR HOLDING AND TENSIONING A
WEBBING
Gotz W. Unger, East Greenville, Pa., auignor to Knoll Interna-
tional, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 311,637, Oct. 15, 1981, abandoned.
This application Jun. 13, 1983, Ser. No. 503,075
Int. a.3 A44C 5/18; A44B 21/00. 17/00
VJS. a. 24—265 R 7 Claims
1. An assembly for holding and tensioning a webbing end to
a framework comprising: a female member having opposed
side walls; first and second abutment surfaces generally per-
pendicular to each other and disposed between said opposed
side walls, said opposed side walls each havmg an edge por-
tion; said female member being adapted to be fastened to a
framework, in which said edge portions of the opposed side
walls register with the frainework; and a male member having
opposed side walls and first and second abutment surfaces
generally perpendicular to each other and disposed between
the opposed side walls of said male member; said male member
cooperating with said female member such that the first and
second abutment surfaces of the male member are positioned
respectively against the first and second abutment surfaces of
the female member, and the opposed side walls of the male
member are positioned between the opposed side walls of the
female member; said male member including a portion thereof
with a webbing attachment surface, opposed to and forming an
acute angle with said second abutment surface of said male
member.
1040 O.G.— 20
486
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4«435,883
STRETCH RATIO CONTROL QRCUIT FOR MULTIPLE
STATION WEB STRETCHING APPARATUS
Jerome D. Miiuyuki, Cudaliy. Wta., wignor to Litton Indus-
trial Products, Inc., Beverly HilU, Csllf.
FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,463
Int. a.^ D06C J/00: H02P 7/00
VS. a. 26-71 g ciai^
4,435,884
CLIP<WAIN TRACK FOR TENTER CLIPS
Alfred B<isch, Lustenau, Austria, assignor to Undauer Domier
Gcsellschaft nbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 280,017, Jun. 30, 1981,
abandoned. This application Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,416
I9S 302489o'**^' '"'""**"" ^*^ "•"• *»' Germany, Jul. 1,
Int. a.J D06C 3/04
U.S. a. 26-93 7 Claims
m
1. A control circuit for apparatus stretching a web between
pulling stations of the type having pull rolls in driving engage-
ment with the web whereby the speed of the web in contact
with the pull rolls is equal to the surface speed of the pull rolls
and wherein each pulling sution is powered by an electroni-
cally controllable variable speed drive responsive to provide
pull roll speed which is proportional to an electronic signal, the
apparatus having an intake sUtion receiving the web to be
stretched, a discharge station for discharging the stretched
web, and at least one intermediate sution, the overall stretch-
ing of the web extending between the intake and discharge
sutions with intermediate stretching occurring in intermediate
zones between adjacent stations, said control circuit compris-
ing:
first signal generating means (32) for providing a first signal
to one of the intake and discharge sutions corresponding
to the desired speed of the web tk\ the one sution;
multiplier means (40) coupled to said first signal generating
means for altering the first signal in accordance with the
amount of overall stretching desired in the apparatus and
for providing a second signal having an equivalent speed
offset to the other of the intake and discharge sutions
corresponding to the speed of the web at the other sution
and having an equivalent difference in speed from the fim
signal to obtain the desired overall stretching; and
second signal generating means (50-68) coupled to said first
signal generating means and to said multiplier means for
deriving a signal indicative of the overall stretching and
for reducing the discharge sution signal by a selected
amount of the signal indicative of the overall stretching to
^ provide a third signal to the intermediate sution distribut-
ing the overall stretching in the apparatus Wween the
intermediate zones, wherein said third signal is obtained
by subtracting a selected amount of the difference be-
tween said first and second signals from the discharge
station signal.
— — — .^
—\--h-
\:j
...J
1. In a clip-chain track for tenter clips, with roller guidance
m tenter frames for sheet material, composed of a clip-chain
support with rod-like, endless and jointless guide rails of small
cross-section mounted pairwise to the clip-chain support on
both sides of the tensioning plane of the tenter chain, and with
tenter clip rollers resting by their running surfaces against said
guide rails,
the improvement comprising a pair of vertical spindle means
connected to a clip body of each said tenter clip and
mounting separate support rollers and running rollers on
both sides of a tensioning plane of a sheet material in two
separate transverse planes on each of said spindle means,
with the support rollers absorbing vertical forces and
having slanted running surfaces of opposite inclinations,
and
separate support rails mounted on one side of their associ-
ated support rollers and running rails mounted on the
other side of their associated running rollers iq the said
transverse planes at the clip-chain support.
4,435,885
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING
STORAGE BATTERY PLATES
Yulchi Suzuki, and Ichiro Sano, both of Yokohama, Japan,
auignors to Furukawa Deachi Kabushlki Kaisha and
Furukawa Denki Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, both of Tokyo,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 239 J83, Mar. 2, 1981, ahiuidoaed. This
appUcation Aug. 19, 1983, Ser, No. 524,471
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 28, 1980, 55-23436
. Int. a.3 B23P 19/Oa 25/00; B26D 7/00, 7/06
UAa.29-2 g Claims
1. Apparatus for use in the manufacture of plates of an elec-
trical storage battery in a continuous operation, comprising:
a punch press for punching grids of openings in a continuous
strip of stock material and for partially severing plates
from said stock strip material around the periphery of said
plates to define the perimeter of said plates while leaving
relatively weak and easUy rupturable bridges intercon-
necting said plates with surrounding stock strip matorial,
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
487
said press including means for form finishing said plates
simultaneously with the partial severing and cutting die
means for the partial severing;
a filling mechanism operative to fill corrosive paste material
into the openings of said grids;
an ejector mechanism for removing said plates from said
surrounding stock strip material by rupturing said bridges;
and
a drive mechanism for feeding said stock material from a
source thereof sequentially through said punch press, said
filling mechanism, and said ejector mechanism.
5. In a process for the manufacture of plates of an electrical
storage battery which includes the steps of punching a grid of
openings in stock strip material, filling said openings with a
corrosive paste material, and subsequently punching said bat-
tery plates out of said stock strip material, the improvement
comprising:
partially severing said stock strip material at positions defin-
ing the perimeter of said plates along frame-shaped cut
lines each comprising a plurality of longitudinally spaced
cut lines which define said perimeter while simultaneously
form finishing said plates, the adjacent ends of the respec-
tive cut lines being spaced from each other by a distance
defining relatively weak and easily rupturable bridges
interconnecting said plate with said stock strip matorial,
said bridges supporting said plato within said stock strip
matorial to form a plurdity of plato blanks each defined by
a frame-shape cut line and connected through the bridges
to the stock strip matorial surrounding the perimeter of
each plato blank;
subsequently filling said openings with said corrosive pasto
matorial, each plato blank being supported through the
bridges by the surrounding stock strip matorial; and
subsequently ejecting said plates from the surrounding stock
strip matorial by rupturing said bridges.
direction of movement of the pipe, said coiling arrangement
including bending rollers a receiving arrangement including
receiving rollers; common drive means for driving both said
bending and receiving rollers; and a cutting arrangement, the
improvement comprising:
said receiving arrangement includes a platform mounted for
tilting movement with respect to the axes of said bending
rollers; means for tilting said platform; said receiving
rollers of said receiving arrangement being mounted for
roution on said tiltable platform; universal joint means for
coupling said receiving rollers to said common drive
means of the bending rollers so that said receiving rollers
tilt together with said platform; and wherein said cutting
arrangement is installed behind said bending rollers in the
path of a turn of the pipe being received in said receiving
arrangement.
4^5,886
PIPE-WELDING MILL FOR PRODUCnON OF COILED
PIPES
Jnry F. She?akin; Igor I. Dobkin, both of Moscow; Eflm M.
Donskoi, Zhelezaodorozhny; Grlgory L. Manov, Moacow;
Vasily V. ZhdanoT, Moscow; Elena S. Bcrger, Moscow; Va-
lery M. PopoT, S?erdloTskoi; Alexei A. Patio?, Sfcrdlofakol,
and Rashid Z. Akchnrin, SvardloTskoi, all of UJS.S.R., assign-
ors to Gosodarstrenny Naachnoissledo?atalsky, Proektny I
Konstmktorsky Inatitnt SplavoT I Obrabotki Tsretnykh
MctalloT "Giprotsretmetobrabotka", U.SJS.R.
Filed Oct 29, 1981, Str. No. 316,123
Int a.J B21C 37/00. 47/00
U.S. CL 29:-33 D 2 Claims
1. In a pipe-welding mill for the production of coiled pipes
firom coiled strips including a coil preparation section; an
arrangement for unwinding coils prepared in said section;
means for displacing said arrangement in a direction perpen-
dkrolar to the direction of movement of the pipe in said mill; a
magazine including a reel containing said coils, said magazine
being mounted on said unwinding arrangement; a strip coupler
instiled behind said coil preparation section in the direction of
movement of the pipe; a shaping stand installed behind said
strip coupler; a welding stand installed behind said shaping
stand; a drawing stand installed behind said wdding stand; a
coiling arrangement installed behind said drawing stand in the
^
4,435387
METHOD OF MAKING PROJECHLE
Kaare R. Strandll, and Ame M. ^stlle, both of Raufosa, Nor-
way, assignors to A/S Raufoas Ammnai^onsfabrikker,
Raufoas, Norway
Dirision of Ser. No. 248,539, Mar. 27, 1981. This application
Dec. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 452,067
Int a? B21K 21/06
U.S. a. 29—123 2 Claims
»>
sr~n
/
R
'V'
/
/
II '
/
/ ,
/
nk '
/
j| '
rm^o
1. In the manufacture of a multi-capability projectile of the
type having a heavy armour piercing primary penetration
element surrounded over iu full length by a secondary armour
piercing penetration element which extonds forward of the
primary penetration element to form a cavity having a bursting
charge therein, the secondary penetration element being con-
structed to splinter and fragment upon ignition of the bursting
charge, and a nose portion ahead of the secondary penetration
element and having an impact ignition charge therein, the
improvement comprising attaching the primary penetration
element to the secondary penetration element by the following
stops:
taking the secondary penetration element, which has s large
intomal diametor front portion, a smaller intomal diameter
rearward portion and a radially extending, axially facing
shoulder between the front and rear portions, and arrang-
ing said secondary penetration element in s position to
receive the back end of the primary penetration element in
the smaller intomal diametor rearward portion,
inserting the back of the primary penetration element, which
back is cylindrically shaped, into the said smaller intomal
diametor rearward portion of the secondary penetration
element, and
forcing an annular tool down into the said shoulder to form
an annular groove defining a rim radially inwardly thereof
and forcing that rim into rimmed contact with the primary
penetration element on the cylindrically shaped side
thereof to positively secure the primary penetration ele-
ment in said smaller internal diameter portion.
488
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,435 888
APPARATUS FOR INSTTALLING A SEALING RING
WUhdmus F. T. C. Oldenun, Hardenberg, Netherlands, as-
signor to Wa?ln B.V., Zwolle, Netherlands
DiTision of Ser. No. 134,341, Mar. 26, 1980, Pat. No. 4,304,037.
This appUcation Not. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,822
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Mar. 29, 1979
7902473
Int. a.3 B23P 19/02
UA a. 29-235 4cwnis
•v
distributed about the bottom of the hollow thereon, whereby
the cage part is formed to its final shape ana the material of the
ring flows into said recess to form rivet pins simultaneously
with the forming of the cage part, said pressing step forming
the cage part with a substantially rectangular cross-section.
4,435,890
METHOD FOR PRODUCTION OF PLASTIC
EXTRUSION-COATED BEARING RACES TOR ROLLING
BEARINGS AND BEARING RACES PRODUCED
THEREBY
Horst M. Ept!, Eltingshausen; ManfM Brandenstein, Eussen-
heim; I^tfliar Walter, and Armin Olschewski, both of Schwein-
fiirt, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to SKF Kugel-
lagerfabriken GmbH, Schweinfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 372,197
.-?^ priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 30,
1981, 3117162
Int. a.J B21D 53/10: B23P 77/00
U.S. a 29-148.4 R 3 q^^
1. Apparatus for installing a sealing ring in an annular
groove chamber of a socket end of a pipe part, comprising a
sealing ring retaining member, a sealing ring impression mem-
ber and retaining means so as to keep a sealing ring in its im-
pressed position, as well as means for moving the retaining
means from an inactive position into an active position and
reverse, in which the retaining means comprises two elements
being movable with respect to one another, and the impression
member being movable in between said elements, said retaining
means comprising a first mandrel portion being connected with
a mandrel, said first mandrel portion adjoining said mandrel
through an abutment edge, and a second mandrel portion,
which expandable parts form a tapering surface when ex-
panded, whereby the periphery of the tapering plane formed
by said parts at least equals the periphery of a supporting ring.
4 435 889
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE PRODUCnON
OF A ROLLING BEARING CAGE
Peter Horling, Mainberg; Hermann Hetterich, Heidenfeld;
Herbert Dobhan, Bergrtaeinfeld, and Norbert Klupfel, Ham-
bach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to SKF Kugel-
lagerfabriken GmbH, SchweinAirt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 287,898
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany. Aus. 9.
1980, 3030247 /•''••.
Int a.J B21D 53/12
MS. a. 29-148.4 C 3 Qalms
^^.«^'
m
IN.
■
t
1. A method for making complementary pairs of race rings
for rolling bearing assemblies from a unitary metallic base
component formed with the raceways for the rings consisting
of the steps of:
a. forming at least one annular separation seam in the metal-
lic base component defining a bridge which can be sev-
ered to form the paired bearing race rings;
b. hardening the metallic base component;
c. machining the raceways of the rings simultaneously or
successively;
d. plastic coating the base component to form housing sec-
tions adjacent the bearing and side surfaces of the race
rings exposing the raceways and separation seam; and
e. separating the base component at the bridge to form the
finished race rings.
11 ^9
1. A process for the production of a cage part for the cage of
a rolling bearing, wherein the cage part is generally annular
with alternate recesses for receiving rolling element and flat
sections adapted to engage other cage parts, whereby the cage
parts may be held together by riveting; and said method com-
prising forming a ring of a material of round or rectangular
cross-section, and thereafter pressing said ring in a press hav-
ing a hollow die with a rectangular cross-section and recesses
4,435,891
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A SANITARY FAN
SPRAY NOZZLE
Charles B. Nicholson, Glens FaUs, N.Y., assignor to Albany
International Corporation, Memuds, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 235,895, Feb. 19, 1981, abandoned. TTiis
appUcation Oct. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 435,360
Int. a.3 B23P 15/00. 13/00
VJS. a. 29-157 C 2 Claims
1. A method for manufacturing a fan spray nozzle compris-
ing the steps of:
providing a substantially cylindrical tube having interior and
exterior surfaces;
drilling a first pair of coaxial, diametrically opposed holes of
relatively small diameter through the walls of said tube;
enlarging the diameter of one of said diametrically opposed
holes by driUing coaxiaUy therethrough with a drill bit
having a larger diameter than the diameter of said diamet-
rically opposed holes;
enlarging the diameter of a portion of the other of said
diametrically opposed holes by passing said drill bit
through said one hole and the interior of said tube until it
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
489
contacts the interior surface defining an interior opening
of said other hole, drilling along the axis of said other hole,
and stopping said drilling before said bit fully penetrates
the exterior surface of said tube such that said other hole
includes a first cylindrical hole portion extending within
the walls of said tube from the interior surface thereof to
a point between said interior surface and said exterior
surface and a second hole portion of lesser diameter than
said first hole portion extending from said point to said
exterior surface;
grinding an arcuate groove within the walls of said tube, said
groove extending below the exterior surface of said tube
and intersecting said other hole at a depth which is be-
tween the exterior surface of said tube and said point, said
groove being ground to have a length dimension substan-
tially parallel to the longitudinal axis of said tube; and
plugging said one of said diametrically opposed holes after
the enlarging thereof, whereby water provided under
pressure to the cylindrical tube is dispersed in a predeter-
mined pattern.
4,435,892
METHOD OF DISASSEMBLING WOODEN PALLETS
Lonnie M. Williams, Greene County, 111., auignor to WillUuns
Panel Board Company, Roodhouse, 111.
Division of Ser. No. 91,517, Nov. 5, 1979, Pat. No. 4,320,570.
This appUcation Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,246
Int. a.' B23P 19/04
U.S. a. 29—239 4 Qairas
M/A,/*/a,
/Off
tracted to their cutting positions so as to shear the nails
holding said slats to said one stringer at said one interface
thereby freeing the slats from said one stringer.
4,435.893
METHOD OF MANUFACTURE OF HYDRAULIC
CYLINDERS UTILIZING BRONZE OVERLAYS FOR
ENGAGING SURFACES
James O. Sims, Rte. #2 Box 246, Hartselle, Ala. 35640
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,630
Int. a.' B23P 17/00. 15/00
U.S. a. 29—412 9 Claims
1. The process of manufacturing components of a fluid-
operated cylinder, which cylinder comprises a pair of circular
members, an outer, hollow, bearing member and an inner
piston member, including the following steps:
rotating an elongated steel member about its longitudinal
axis;
fusing onto the rotating steel member a continuous layer of
bronze, said bronze being applied by deposition from a
bronze wire;
monitoring the thickness of said bronze layer and controlling
the depth of said layer, including the deposition to a mini-
mum thickness of 0.03 1 inch;
machining the surface of said bronze layer to a selected
diameter and finish;
cutting a series of spaced grooves through said bronze layers
into the steel of said steel member, said grooves being cut
to selected depths and widths; and
severing a discrete length from said steel member, whereby
said length includes at least a series of said spaced grooves,
and whereby a discrete one of said circular members of a
said cylinder is fabricated.
4435 894
DUCHLE CAST IRON PIPE HAVING CONSTRICTED
END CASING
Gaude Fuminier, and Michel Pierrel, both of Pont-a-Mousson,
France, auignors to Pont-A-Mousson S.A., Nancy, France
DivUion of Ser. No. 146,736, May 2. 1980, Pat. No. 4,330,015.
This appUcation Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,580
Qaims priority, appUcation France, May 17, 1979, 79 12559
Int. a.5 B22D 11/126
U.S. a. 29—527.5 3 Qalms
1. Method of disassembling a nailed together wood struc-
ture, such as a wood pallet or the like, having a plurality of
longitudinal stringers and a plurality of slats extending trans-
versely of the stringers and nailed to at least one face of the
stringers, said method comprising the steps of:
moving a wood structure from a loading position to a cutting
position, said wood structure being moved in the longitu-
dinal direction of its above-said stringers;
positioning a pair of shear blades on opposite sides of one
stringer at a respective interface of said one stringer and
the slats nailed thereto, said shear blades being movable
toward and away from one another between a retracted
position in which said shear blades are clear of said wood
structure and a cutting position in which the shear blades
cooperate with one another so as to shear said nails; and
actuating said shear blades for movement from their re-
1. A method of making a pipe or similar tubular member of
ductile cast iron having an end casing, comprising the steps of:
making by centrifugal casting a pipe with a casing preform
using an end casing shell and a corresponding casing mandrel,
the shell and mandrel forming between them an annular space
490
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
having, starting from the entrance of the casing, a flrst con-
verging rectilinear profile followed by a second convex curved
profile; and, subsequently, after removing the centrifuged from
the mold, progressively deforming the rectilinear profile so as
to curve it towards the axis of the pipe by exerting a force on
the end of the preform which has an axial component and a
radial component directed towards the axis of the pipe.
4,435,895
PROCESS FOR FORMING COMPLEMENTARY
INTEGRATED aRCUIT DEVICES
Louis C. Parrillo, Warren; George W. Reutlin^r, Floriuun
Park, and Li-Kong Wang, Martinsville, all of NJ., assignors
to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill,
NJ.
Filed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,396
Int. aj HOIL 21/22. 29/78
U.S. a. 29—571 13 Claims
the wafer where chanstops are to be formed in both the
p-type and n-type regions,
implanting donor ions selectively only into the n-type re-
gions where the n-type chanstops are to be formed, the
acceptor ions being chosen to have a greater tendency to
segregate in a growing oxide than the donor ions and the
dosages being substantially similar, and
heating the wafer in an oxidizing atmosphere while the
portions of the wafer in which chanstops are to be formed
are selectively exposed for oxidizing the surface regions
where chanstops are to be formed, whereby as a result of
the difference in segregation characteristics, underlying
the oxide there are formed in the p-type surface regions
localized p-type chanstops where acceptor ions are in
excess and in the n-type surface regions localized n-type
chanstops where the donor ions are in excess.
t t > > t » t t t
^M(i^iiWM^^m<^
I I t t i I t t t t ( ) j
4,435,896
METHOD FOR FABRICATING COMPLEMENTARY
HELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR DEVICES
Louis C. Parrillo, Warren, N J., and Richard S. Payne, Andover,
Mass., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorpo*
rated, Murray Hill, NJ.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 328,150, Dec. 7, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jun. 29, 1983, Ser. No. 508,923
Int. a.3 HOIL 2J/26S
U.S. a. 29—571 14 Qaims
Aj^-^-^.
7 f ?T T T » T flVVtLf
1. In the manufacture of complementary integrated circuits
in a silicon wafer, the process for forming complementary
chanstops at the surface of the water between regions where
transistors are to be formed comprising the steps of,
providing a silicon wafer whose surface includes p-type and
n-type regions in which transistors are to be formed,
implanting acceptor ions selectively in the surface regions of
8. A method for manufacturing a complementary MOS
device which is characterized by the method for forming
source/drain regions in each of two contiguous tub regions of
opposite conductivity type of a silicon body comprising the
steps of:
forming a thin oxide layer over the areas of each of the two
tub regions where transistors are to be formed and a rela-
tively thicker layer silicon oxide layer over the p-n junc-
tion region between the two regions;
depositing a polysilicon layer over the body and patterning
it to form gate conductors over the central portion of the
two transistor areas; and
subjecting the body to donor and acceptor ion implantations,
the acceptor implantation being unmasked to permit pene-
tration in both the n-type and p-type tub regions, and the
donor implantation being masked to permit penetration
into only the p-type tub region whereby p-type source/-
drain regions are formed in the n-type tub regions and
n-type source/drain regions are formed in the p-type tub
regions, each aligned with the gate conductors.
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
491
4,435,897
METHOD FOR FABRICATING SOLID-STATE IMAGE
SENSOR
Takao Kuroda, Osaka, and KeiUu Horii, Shiga, both of Japan,
assignors to Matsushita Electronics Corporation, Osaka,
Japan
FUcd Not. 12, 1981, S«r. No. 320,845
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, No?. 19, 1980, 55-163654
Int dJ HOIL 3J/W
VJS. CL 29—572 1 Claim
9 74
1. A method for the fabrication of a solid-state image sensor
of the charge-coupled type having a plurality of photoelectric
transducer means on a semiconductor substrate of one conduc-
tivity type, a corresponding plurality of excessive charge drain
regions coupled to respective ones of said transducer means,
and a plurality of first electrodes and second electrodes which
function as gate electrodes overlying corresponding channels
coupled between said transducer means and said excessive
charge drain regions for controlling the discharge of excessive
charge from each of said transducer means to the correspond-
ing excessive charge drain region, said method comprising the
steps of:
forming channel stopper regions by introducing impurities
of the same conductivity type as the substrate into each
zone where a channel is situated and into each zone where
a corresponding excessive charge drain region is situated,
said impurities being introduced from the zones where
each first electrode and each second electrode are situ-
ated, and introducing impurities with conductivity type
opposite to that of the substrate into the excessive charge
drain region of the zone where each first electrode is
formed;
forming said first electrodes and said second electrodes on a
surface of said substrate overlying corresponding chan-
nels; and
introducing conductivity-type-determining impurities info
the surface of said substrate upon which said first and
second electrodes are formed, using said electrodes as a
diffusion mask, to form said excessive charge drain re-
gions and said photoelectric transducer means in said
substrate.
4,435,898
METHOD FOR MAKING A BASE ETCHED TRANSISTOR
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT
Santoah P. Gann John S. Lecliaton, both of Wappingers Falls,
and Gnnunakonda R. SriniTasan, Pooghkeepslc all of N.Y.,
assignors to International Bosincas Machines Corporation,
Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 22, 1962, Ser. No. 360,731
Int CI? HOIL 21/302. 21/22
VJS. CL 29—577 C 12 Caaims
1. A method of making a high performance bipolar transistor
in an integrated circuit comprising:
providing a monocrystalline silicon substrate having a pat-
tern of regions of said silicon isolated from one another by
a dielectric isolation pattern on one m^r surface of said
substrate;
providing a subcollector region within said silicon and
spaced from said m^or surface;
forming a base region in at least certain of said regions of
silicon down to said subcollector region wherein said base
region hu a surface concentration of more than about
1 X 10" atoms/cc;
forming a surface mask opening down to the surface of the
said silicon over the area in which a depression is planned
to be formed;
reactive ion etching to form said depreuion having a depth
between about 70 to 100 nanometen in the poriion of said
base region wherein an emitter region is planned to be
formed;
the sides of said depression are substantially vertical without
undercutting and the bottom of said depression is substan-
tially planar from one vertical side to another vertical side;
forming an emitter region in said etched portion of said base
region and heating said emitter region wherein a narrow
intrinsic base region is formed; and
making contacU to each of the elemenu of the said bipolar
transistor.
4,435399
METHOD OF PRODUCING LATERAL TRANSISTOR
SEPARATED FROM SUBSTRATE BY INTERSECTING
SLOTS nLLED WTTH SUBSTRATE OXIDE
Sidney I. Soclof, San Gabriel, Calif., assignor to RockweU Inter-
national Corporation, El Segando, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 239,750, Mar. 2, 1981. This appUcation Dec.
16, 1982, Ser. No. 450,310
Int a? HOIL 21/265. 21/302
VJS. CL 29—577 R 11 Claims
1. A method for producing an array of sub-micron dimen-
492
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
sioned NPN type lateral transistors formed in a silicon sub-
strate doped P-type, comprising the steps of:
forming a plurality of first sidewalls of pairs of intersecting
slots in spaced apart relation across the substrate defining
semi-arrays of V shaped intermediate regions which will
become transistors;
oxidizing the substrate and intermediate regions to fill said
slots and cover the surface of the substrate through which
they were made;
forming a plurality of second sidewalls of orthogonal slots
relative to said pairs of slots dividing the semi-arrays of
regions into individual transistor active regions;
N-i- doping each of said active regions through the inner
opposed second sidewalls;
driving in said doping to comprise emitter and collector
regions on respective sides of original P substrate compris-
ing the base regions;
further oxidizing said substrate to fill in said orthogonal slots
and insure total peripheral oxide isolation of each transis-
tor active region; and
forming metallization patterns in electrical connection with
the respective emitter, base and collector regions.
4,435,901
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING SaSSORS AND
SCISSORS
Maiatoshi Nishikawa, No. 56, Aa-Chin, SaiUoh, Bisai Qty,
Aichj Prefecture, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 29,700, Apr. 3, 1979, Pat. No.
4,250,620. This appUcation Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,325
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 2, 1978, 53-135352
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 17,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B26B 13/02: B21K 11/06
UA a. 30-254 2 Claims
4,435 900
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A MAGNETIC HEAD
UNIT
Johannes de Wilde, Eindhoven, Netiierlands, assignor to U.S.
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 200,820, Oct. 27, 1980. This appUcation
Jun, 25, 1982, Ser. No. 392,116
Claims priority, application Netiierlands, Nov. 28. 1979.
7908611
Int CL^ GllB 5/42
VS. a. 29-603 4Claims
1. Safety scissors that include two elongated scissor mem-
bers that are pivotally joined together at a point intermediate
their ends by a pivot pin so as to divide each scissor member
into a gripping section and a cutting section, the improvement
being that the cutting section of each scissor member is com-
posed of a generally dish-shaped metallic member partially
embedded in a plastic matrix, said generally dish-shaped metal-
lic member consisting of an elongated and generally flat piece
of metal that includes a large recessed central portion that
extends on both sides of said pivot pin for substantially the full
length of said cutting section and which is surrounded by a
narrow outwardly extending generally oblong rim portion,
one portion of said narrow rim portion serving as the sharp
cutting edge for each scissor member, said large recessed
central portion having a plurality of holes therein, said holes
being located on both sides of said pivot pin, plastics material
both filling said large recessed central portion to a level
slightly below the level of said narrow rim portion and extend-
ing through said plurality of holes to the area behind said large
recessed portion so as to form a sturdy support for the entire
metallic member, whereby when said scissor members are
moved back and forth relative to each other the only portions
which come into direct sliding contact are the generally
oblong narrow rim portions.
1. A method of manufacturing a magnetic head unit having
a plurality of transducing elements arranged in a housing,
comprising:
providing a substrate having a plurality of transducing ele-
ments and associated bonding pads arranged in a row;
covering the transducing elements with a silicon cover plate
having a surface facing the transducing elements and also
having a groove arranged through the surface so that the
groove is disposed above the bonding pads, and further
arranging the cover plate to be in a good thermally-con-
ducting relationship with the transducing elements;
removing material above the groove in the cover plate to
expose the bonding pads; and
arranging the resulting assembly in a housing such that the
cover plate is in a good thermally-conducting relationship
with the housing.
4,435,902
ARTICULATED BOOM WATER JET CUTTING
APPARATUS
John E. Mercen John H. Oisen, and Stephen Elkins, all of King
County, Wash., assignors to Flow Industries, Inc., Kent,
Wash.
FUed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,910
Int a.3 B26F 3/00
VJS. a. 30-296 R 11 Claims
1. A fluid jet cutting apparatus comprising:
a cutting head including a nozzle for forming a cutting jet for
cutting a workpiece with a jet of high velocity fluid and a
jet catching means for catching any cutting jet formed by
said nozzle and support means for connecting said cutting
jet to said jet cutting means; and,
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
493
translation means for supporting said cutting head while
allowing movement in two directions; and.
4,435,904
AUTOMATED MEASURING SCALE
David J. Logan, Glastonbury; Ronald B. Webster, Ellington, and
Daniel J. Sullivan, Hartford, all of Conn., auignors to Gcrbcr
Scientific Products, Inc., Manchester, Conn.
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,998
Int. a.J GOIB 3/20. 5/02
U.S. a. 33—143 K IS Qaims
T—
r^l
\. f. , '. "^
rotational translation means connecting said translation
means to said cutting head for allowing rotation in three
perpendicular axes.
4,435,903
LEFT-HANDED LETTERER
Philip E. Warner, 56 Hilton Rd., Mount Holly, N.J. 08060
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,707
Int. a.3 B43I 13/10
U.S. a. 33—23 D 5 Claims
1. A lettering device for drawing characters for use in con-
nection with a lettering template having character grooves and
a horizontal guide pin groove, comprising:
a body;
a guide pin;
a tracer pin; and
writing instrument holding means for holding a writing
instrument; said guide pin, said tracer pin and said writing
instrument holding means being located at three spaced
positions on said body at vertices of a right triangle, said
tracer pin being located at the right angle vertex; and
knob means on said body for providing an element to be held
with the hand of the user for manipulation of the lettering
device on the lettering template, said knob means being
located outside of said right triangle adjacent and closest
to that leg of the right triangle which interconnects said
writing instrument holding means and said tracer pin;
whereby the lettering device can be easily manipulated by
the left hand of the user.
1. An automated measuring scale for making measurements
of linear extent in a selected measuring direction comprising:
a base having a linear guide for aligning the scale in a mea-
suring position aligned with a selected measuring direc-
tion, and including means defining a reference position;
an index marker slidably mounted on the base and movable
relative thereto toward and away from said reference
position to identify linear measurements of various extent
along the base in the measuring direction, said index
marker including a marking guide for enabling a mark to
be made on a sheet placed beneath said base;
motor means also mounted on the base and connected in
driving relationship with the movable index marker for
moving the marker back and forth relative to the base in
the measuring direction; and
control means connected with the motor means and includ-
ing a command entry means having a keyboard mounted
on the base for manually entering measurement com-
mands, and processing means responsive to the measure-
ment commands entered through the keyboard for caus-
ing the motor means to move the index marker relative to
the base by commanded amounts whereby measurements
of specified linear extent may be produced by movement
of the index marker.
4,435,905
TELESCOPING MAGNETIC BALL BAR TEST GAGE
James B. Bryan, Pleasanton, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by The United States De-
partment of Energy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,084
Int. a.3 GOIB 7/31
U.S. a. 33—181 R 10 Claims
1. A test gage for determining the accuracy of an associated
machine having a servo drive, which comprises:
a first gage ball;
a second gage ball;
telescoping holding means for maintaining said first gage
ball and said second gage ball in a relationship allowing
relative radial motional freedom while not allowing rela-
tive lateral motional freedom;
a first means for securing said first gage ball so that the
center of said first gage ball is maintained at a fixed loca-
tion with respect to an associated machine;
a second means for securing said second gage ball so that the
center of said second gage ball is directed by an associated
machine to execute a prescribed trajectory, all points of
which are equidistant from the center of said first gage
ball; and
means for determining changes in the radial distance be-
494
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
tween the center of said Hrst gage ball and the center of
said second gage ball, whereby error in the execution of
said liquid and having horizontal longitudinally extending
spaces therein communicating with the liquid in said con-
tainer through holes extending between said spaces and at
least one surface of said float and
means for detecting the inclination of said float.
the directed trajectory is detected and the accuracy of an
associated machine is determined.
4435 908
OFFSET, EXTENDABLE, QUICK-RELEASE PLUMBNESS
INDICATING APPARATUS
Paul M. Scmler, Jr., 3045 N. Dodge Blvd., Tucson, Ariz. 85716
Filed Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 451,726
Int. a.3 GOIC 9/O0
U.S. a. 33-376 ,3 q,,^
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
493
/
along said fint surface and thereby allow extension of said
first extension member to effectively lengthen said appara-
tus if said first quick release means is actuated and to lock
said first extension member relative to said main body
member if said first quick release means is not actuated;
and
(h) second quick release means connected to said main body
member and actuatable for releasably engaging said sec-
ond extension member to allow sliding of raid fifth surface
along said second surface and thereby allow extension of
said second extension member to affectively lengthen said
apparatus if said second quick release means is actuated
and to lock said second extension member to said main
body member if said second quick release means is not
actuated.
4,435,909
AUTOMATIC UNT SCREEN
John G. Williamson, Jr., GrecB?Ulc, S.C., aisigBor to Marshall
ud Williams Company, Proridence, R.I.
FUed No?. 30, 1981, Scr. No. 325,991
Int. a.i F26B li/02
U.S. a. 34—82 5 Claims
and intermediate layers and having a top surface adapted
to be in direct contact with the foot,
said resilient intermediate layer being formed thicker at the
cupped back to absorb maximum impact usually concen-
trated thereat than at the side crown where there is pro-
vided improved flexibility so as to not interfere with a low
arch foot,
said intermediate layer having a plurality of substantially
radially disposed ribs with each rib extending down-
wardly with the top surface of the intermediate layer
having a smooth but contoured surface,
said ribs being spaced along the periphery of the intermedi-
ate layer with each rib being arcuate extending from a top
peripheral edge of the intermediate layer to a central thin
portion thereof,
said ribs being wider at the cupped back and at the side
crown so u to provide enhanced impact absorption.
4,435,906
PERFORATING JIG
Chuzo Mori, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Carl Manufacturing Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser, No. 343,168
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 26, 1981, 56-95020rU]
Int. Q\} B26D 5/00; B27B S/OO
U.S. a. 33-185 R 5 q^.
1. A perforating jig comprising two superimposed plates,
one edge thereof being openably and closably joined, for sand-
wiching a sheet therebetween, said plates having in and along
the joined edge at least one recess in each plate so formed as to
allow insertion and positioning therein of a perforating end of
a punch to fully perforate an edge portion of the sheet.
4,435,907
MACHINE BODY INCUNATION DETECTOR DEVICE
SUgeaki Okuyama, Kawachinagano; Norimi Nakamura, and
Otami Hashimoto, both of Sakai, aU of Japan, assignors to
Kubota, Ltd^ Osaka, Japan
FUed Jan. 11, 1982, Scr. No. 338,511
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 13, 1981, 56-3647[U1
Int a.J GOIC 9/06, 9/18
VS. a 33-366 9 cudnu
1. A machine body inclination detector device comprising:
a container adapted to be fixed to said machine body for
containing a liquid;
a float in said container for floating substantially sunken in
1. An apparatus for measuring plumbness of an elongated,
warped vertical member, said apparatus comprising in combi-
nation:
(a) an elongated main body member having parallel opposed
flat first and second surfaces;
(b) a bubble vial attached to said main body member for
indicating when said first and second surfaces are pre-
cisely vertical;
(c) an elongated first extension member having an elongated
flat third surface slidably engaging said first surface and an
elongated fourth surface opposed to said third surface;
(d) an elongated second extension member having an elon-
gated flat fifth surface slidably engaging said second sur-
face and an elongated sixth surface opposed to said fifth
surface;
(e) first offset means attached to the upper end of said first
extension member and extending beyond said sixth surface
to an imaginary plane that is parallel to said first surface;
(0 second offset means attachable to the lower end of said
second extension member and extending beyond said sixth
surface to said imaginary plane;
(g) first quick release means connected to said main body
member and actuatable for releasably engaging said first
extension member to allow sliding of said third surface
1. A lint screen assembly for use in an elongatd oven having
ducts with nozzles for directing heated air against a web car-
ried therethrough, said oven also having a heater and fans with
an air passageway between the web and the heater extending
substantially across said oven, the improvement comprising:
a transverse filter media serving as an elongated lint screen;
a trackway extending transversely of said oven entirely
across said air passageway; said trackway having an im-
perforate flange covering the edges of said lint screen
media;
power-operated means for rolling up a single width of said
lint screen on one side of the oven;
an edge of said lint screen on each side thereof in sealing
engagement with said imperforate flange;
means intermittently actuating said power-operated means
for rolling up a length of lint screen;
means feeding said length of lint screen from the other side
of the oven; and
means removing lint from said lint screen during rolling up
of the lint screen.
4,435,911
INJECnON-MOLDED GAMING TOKEN AND PROCESS
THEREFOR
Bernard B. Jones, 3672 S. Highland, Las Vegas, Nev. 89103
Continuation of Ser. No. 15,334, Feb. 26, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,638
Int. a.i G09F 3/02
VJS. a. 40—27.5 4 Claims
4,435,910
SHOE INSOLE
Michel Marc, 48 Ridge HUl Farm Rd., WeUedcy, Mass. 02181
FUed Mar. U, 1982, Scr. No. 357,784
Int a» A43B 13/38. 13/40, 21/32
\}&. CL 36-44 10 Claims
1. A shoe insole comprising:
a substantially flat base layer,
a resUient intermediate layer affixed to and overlying the
rear portion of the base layer and adapted to conform to
the foot having a cupped back for accommodating the
heel and a side crown for accommodating the arch,
and a top cushioning layer affixed to and overlying the base
1. A gaming token comprising:
(a) a flat non-metallic annular ring having a central opening
therein, said ring comprising:
an annular rib member; and
a plurality of selectively spaced color regions therein
sharply defined in geometry by a molding compound of
a selected color, in intimate contact with said annular
rib member,
(b) a disc-support annulus integral with said annular ring and
extending radially into said central opening to a predeter-
mined radial distance,
(c) flat metal discs mounted face-to-face on each side of said
disc-support annulus and positioned substantially flush
respectively with the outer surfaces of said annular ring,
and
(d) a fused junction for joining said metal discs together at a
portion of their adjacent faces, whereby said metal discs
are difficult to remove from said gaming token.
496
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,435,912
CARD CARRYING MICROnLM A^a) ASSOOATED
READnVG LENS
DtTid L. Adrian, AbUene, and Sam H. Young, Fort Worth, both
of Tex., assignors to Franii J. King, AbUene, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 888,407, Mar. 20, 1978, abandoned.
This application Feb. 21, 1979, Ser. No. 13,158
Int. a.J G02B 27/04
UA a. 40-365 , Claim
member having a shaft, said shaft carrying a head, said shaft
being disposed through said top and bottom shells, said shaft,
top shell and bottom shell having cooperating securement
means for securing said shaft with said top and bottom shells,
and for maintaining said top and bottom shells joined together,
said stake keel being imbedded in the ground for land use of
said decoy, and said stake keel having a counterbalancing
weight below the water line of said decoy to maintain said
decoy stable in the water.
1. An emergency medical data card comprising:
(a) an information portion upon which information appears
that can be read in the normal manner with the naked eye,
said information portion consisting of a thickness of flexi-
ble paper stock having a generally rectangular shape and
billfold size, with portions removed at opposite end re-
gions;
(b) a plastic lens disposed at one of said end regions;
(c) a microfilm portion upon which information is recorded
and which is disposed at the other of said end regions
opposite said one end region;
(d) a pair of juxtaposed flexible clear plastic sheets laminat-
ing at least said information portion and said microfilm
portion to provide a one-piece, unitary, generally planar
card structure;
(e) said lens being a molded integral part of a clear plastic
sheet portion of said card;
whereby a reader may bend the card to align and focus the
lens on the microfilm for the reading of same without the
need for any special auxiliary apparatus.
4,435,914
FISH LURE
BiU K. Norman, Greenwood, Ark., assignor to Norman Manu-
fiwtiiring Co., Inc., Greenwood, Ark.
FUed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,348
Int. C\? AOIK 85/00
U.S. a. 43-42.12 3 ciataw
4,435,913
DECOY
Samuel E. Messina, 2 Snowden Ave., Delmar, N.Y. 12054
FUed May 19, 1983, Ser. No. 496,008
Int a.3 AOIM il/06
U.S. a. 43—3 20 Claims
1. A full-bodied decoy for use on land or water, said decoy
comprising a top shell, a bottom shell and a shaft-stake keel
meQiber; said top and bottom shells having interfitting joint
means to join together said top and bottom shells to afford
buoyancy for water use of said decoy, said shaft-stake keel
1. A surface retrieve or trolling lure comprising an elongated
generally planar body being slightly elongated, egg-shaped in
plan including small and large radius front and rear ends, said
front end including means for attaching the free end of a fish-
ing line thereto, said body including upper and lower sides and
a central upstanding opening formed therethrough including a
rear upstanding transverse wall, a spinner joumaled in said
opening, forwardly opening hook means anchored relative to
and trailed behind the large radius end of said body, said lower
side being both longitudinally and transversely downwardly
convexed substantially throughout the plan area thereof, the
portion of said lower side defining the rear marginal edge of
said opening including a transversely rounded downward
projection terminating downwardly at a level slightly below
the portion of said lower side defining the forward marginal
portion of the opening, the lower margin of said rear trans-
verse wall defining the forward extremity of said projection,
said spinner being generally S-shaped in axial elevation and
being joumaled for rotation about a horizontal axis extending
transversely of said body, said rear marginal edge defining the
lower extremity of said rear transverse wall, the upper surface
of said body being generally flat and horizontal, said upper
surface and said rear transverse wall being devoid of inclined
portions thereof operative, responsive to said body being for-
wardly advanced over the surface of a body of water, to cause
water incident thereupon to develop a downward reaction
force on said body sufficient to overcome the inherent planing
effect developed on the body as a result of the downwardly
convex lower side of said body moving over the surface of a
body of water, said hook means including an elongated shank
terminating at one end in a reverse turned hook portion, the
other end of said shank being anchored to said body with said
one shank end projecting rearwardly of said body.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
497
4,435,915
HANGING DOLL HOUSE STRUCTURE
John V. Zaruba, and Roubcn T. Terzian, both of Chicago, lU.,
assignors to Marvin Glass k Associates, Chicago, III.
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,969
Int. a.> A63H ii/00
U.S. a. 46—12 6 Claims
1. A case for storing and displaying a plurality of toy dolls
and the like, comprising:
a housing including a roof, a front wall a first side wall and
a second side wall;
a plurality of vertically spaced floors mounted in said hous-
ing;
means for displaying the dolls including a plurality of open-
ings in said roof and said front wall, said openings being
related to said floors in a manner whereby a floor can
support a doll in position for display through an opening;
a plurality of elastic members secured to said first and sec-
ond side walls for holding dolls and the like; and
means for hanging said housing on a wall or the like.
4,435,916
TOY VEHICLE CAPABLE OF CHANGING SIZE AND
SHAPE
Noriaki Iwao, and Akira Abe, both of Tokyo, Japan, assignors to
Tomy Kogyo Co., Inc., Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 170,260, Jul. 18, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 324,734
Int. a.J A63H 11/10, 17/08. 33/30
U.S. a. 46—201 7 CUdms
1. A toy vehicle which comprises:
a compound vehicle chassis having a first chassis member
and a second chassis member, said first and said second
chassis members being movable with respect to each
other;
connecting means operatively associated with both said first
chassis member and said second chassis member movably
connecting said first and said second chassis members such
that said first and said second chassis members can move
reversibly between a first stable position wherein said first
and said second chassis members are located in a first
chassis configuration with respect to one another and a
second stable position wherein said first and said second
chassis members are located in a second chassis configura-
tion with respect to one another, said compound vehicular
chassis being a greater first length when said first and said
second chassis members are in said first chassis configura-
tion and said compound vehicular chassis being a second
length when said first and said second chassis members are
in said second chassis configuration, said first length
greater than said second length;
a first spring member attaching between said first and said
second chassis member, said first spring member biasing
said first and said second chassis members to said first
chassis configuration;
a retaining member movably located on one of said first and
said second chassis members and connectable to the other
of said first and said second chassis members, said retain-
ing member movable on said one of said first and said
second chassis members between a locking and a releasing
position, said retaining member including detent means
located thereon, said detent means connecting to said
other of said first and said second chassis members when
said retaining member is is said locking position to retain
said first and second chassis members in said second chas-
sis configuration against the bias of said first spring mem-
ber;
a second spring member associated with said retaining mem-
ber, said second spring member biasing said retainmg
member from said releasing position to said locking posi-
tion;
a vehicle body having a plurality of body elements forming the
outside surface of said vehicle, at least one of said body
elements fixedly located on said first chassis member, at least
a second of said body elements fixedly located on said sec-
ond chassis member, a least a third of said body elements
pivotably located on said first chassis member, at least a
fourth of said body elements pivotably located on said sec-
ond body chassis;
said first body element and said second body element
located adjacent of one another when said first and said
second chassis members are in said second chassis con-
figuration, said first and second body elements spaced
apart from each other so as to form a space between
each other when said first and second chassis members
are in said first chassis configuration, said third body
element located adjacent to said first body element
when said first and second chassis members are in said
second chassis configuration and pivotable on said first
chassis member whep said first and said second chassis
members are in said first chassis configuration so as to
become located in said space when said first and second
body members are in said first chassis configuration,
a third spring element attaching to said third body elements,
said third spring element biasing said third body element
towards said space when said first and second chauis
members are in said first chassis configuration;
said third and said fourth body elements each including a
first and second surface, said first surface of both said third
and said fourth body elements exposed and forming a
portion of the outside surface of said vehicle when said
first and said second chassis members are in said first
chassis configuration and said second surface of both said
third and said fourth body elements exposed and forming
a portion of the outside surface of said vehicle when said
first and said second chassis members are in said second
chassis configuration;
said fourth body element including a first body section piv-
otably attaching to said second chassis member, a second
body section pivotably attaching to said first body section
and a fourth spring member connecting between said first
and said second body sections and biasing said second
'»—
498
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
body section from a folded position with respect to the
first body section to an extended position with respect to
the first body section, a portion of said first body section
abutting against and held by said first chassis member
when said first and said second chassis members are in said
second chassis configuration pivoting said first body sec-
tion on said second chassis member and said second body
section on said first body section to position said second
body section in said folded position against the bias of said
fourth spring member, said portion of said first body
section releasing from said first chassis member when said
first and said second chassis members are in said first
chassis configuration and said fourth spring member bias-
ing said second body section to said releasing position
with respect to said first body section;
the shape of said vehicle as determined by the spatial rela-
tionship between said plurality of body elements being
different when said first and said second chassis members
are in said first chassis configuration and when said first
and said second chassis members are in said second chassis
configuration.
lower part of said upper pot there being externally and
peripherally provided a plurality of radially distributed,
hollow structures to define first reservoir means for re-
ceiving water, and conduit means intercommunicating
adjacent ones of said first reservoir means;
a drainage hole cover which closes said drainage hole;
a plurality of hollow columns supporting said first reservoir
means and said upper pot; the lower end of each said
4,435,917
LIGHTING SYSTEM FOR ROTATABLE TOY
WiUiam B. Lee, 252 South 800 East, Salt Lake Qty, Utah 84102
Filed Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,427
Int. a.J A63H 33/26
U.S. a. 46-228 6 ctaima
1. In a toy of the type having a body rotatable about a central
axis and at least one lamp, a battery and associated circuit to
light said lamp, the improved lighting system which comprises
a solid state astable multivibrator circuit adapted to generate
pulses to light said lamp for a predetermined on-time at prede-
termined intervals said circuit including a first resistor, a sec-
ond resistor and a capacitor arranged in series so that said
second resistor and capacitor determine said on-time of said
lamp and said first resistor, said second resistor and said capaci-
tor in series determine said interval; a resistive switch inter-
posed in said circuit in parallel with said first resistor, said
resistive switch including a third resistor and a normally open
switch arranged so that when said normally open switch is
closed said first resistor and said third resistor arc in parallel to
each other and are each in series with said second resistor and
said capacitor, and said normally open switch includes means
to close said switch in response to rotation of said toy about its
central axis faster than a predetermined rate.
column having an opening through said drainage hole
cover and open to the outside, the upper end of each said
column being blind; the side wall of each said column
being densely provided with tiny perforations to commu-
nicate the interior of said column to the interior of said
lower pot; at least part of the bottom of said first reservoir
means being water-pervious; the top side of said reservoirs
being substantially at the same level to define a platform.
4,435,919
INTEGRATED WINDOW AND THERMAL SHUTTER
ASSEMBLY
Leandre Poisson, P.O. Box 275, Htrriiville, N.H. 03450
FUed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300^21
Int. a.} E05B 65/04
U.S. a. 49-« , ctaiHM
4,435,918
DECORATIVE FLOWER POT
Guey^II Shain, 113, Yu Miao LI, Miao LI Cbeii, Taiwan
Pllwl Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,730
iBt a.J AOIG 25/00
VS. a. 47-79 2 Claim.
1. A horticultural pot comprising:
two coaxially positioned pots including a bottomless upper
pot having smaller diametrical dimension and a lower pot
having larger diametrical dimension with a drainage hole;
the said upper pot being at a level where iu lower edge is
slightly below the top edge of said lower pot; around the
1. An integrated window and thermal shutter assembly for
closing a rectangular opening within a building wall or the like
to permit controlled passive solar heating of a building interior,
said assembly comprising:
a closed end elongated cylinder mounted for rotation about
its axis within said window opening and in the plane of
said rectangular opening, said cylinder being sized to said
rectangular opening and said cylinder being formed of a
sheet of light transmissive material, and
an opaque, relatively thick rectangular panel of thermal
insulation nuterial mounted internally of said cylinder and
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
499
spanning diametrically across said cylinder to separate the
interior of said cylinder into two dead air spaces;
whereby, rotation of said cylinder to a position with the
thermal insulation material panel parallel to the plane of
said rectangular opening results in complete blockage of
light and thermal energy from the building exterior to the
building interior and vice versa while, rotation to an angu-
larly displaced position therefrom permits selectively light
and thermal radiation to enter the interior of the building,
or leave the same.
4,438,921
GA vv'i'y DOOR
Maaoel Marin, 6777 Pic IX Blvd., Apt 14, Montreal, Qnabac,
Canada HIX 2C7
FUad Apr. 5. 1982, Ser. No. 365,489
Int. a.) E05C 9/00
U.S. a. 49—395 2 Claims
4,435,920
SHUTTER CONSTRUCTION
Susumu Osaka, and Minoni Toda, both of Machida, Japan,
assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,740
Int. a.J E05F 17/00; E06B 7/08
U.S. a. 49—82 11 aaims
so ii« ioi
40 so_JL JLd^i. "^l3Pya \^
1. A shutter construction comprising:
a plurality of slats, each slat having first and second opposite
ends, two relatively long, parallel opposite edges, and a
central axis parallel to and between these edges;
a pair of support brackete for each slat, one bracket secured
to one end of each slat and the other bracket secured to
the opposite end of each slat, each bracket including two
pivot means permitting rotation of the bracket about two
spaced points, respectively, one point on one side of the
central axis and the other point spaced from the one point
on the other side of the central axis;
first and second parallel support links, the first of said links
adjacent to one end of the slats and the second of said links
adjacent to the other end of the slats, the slats being per-
pendicular to said links and being spaced from one another
along the length of links, each support bracket at one end
of the slats being supported by said first link at one end of
its pivot means and each support bracket at the other end
of the slats being supported by said second link at the
corresponding one of its pivot means;
first and second support means, said first support means
adjacent to one end of the slau and said second support
means adjacent to the other end of the slats, each support
bracket at one end of the slaU being supported by said first
support means at the other of iu pivot means along a line
parallel to said first link and each support bracket at the
other end of the slau being supported by said second
support means at the other of iU pivot means along a line
parallel to said second support link; and
drive means for concurrently driving said first and second
support links in the same direction along the length dimen-
sion of said links relative to said first and second support
means for concurrently routing the slau about axes paral-
lel to their central axes.
1. In a door and associated door frame, the door including a
lock operating a bolt by use of a key, the bolt then operatively
projecting from the free edge of the door and engaging in an
opening of the door frame, said free edge being provided with
a series of spaced-apart cavities along said edge, a lever piv-
oted in the door frame and operated by said bolt, and a series
of auxiliary bolts installed in the door frame and operated by
said lever to move from a withdrawn unlocking position to a
projecting locking position, wherein their free ends project
from the door frame and engage into said cavities of the door,
said auxiliary bolts being substantially parallel, horizontal and
fixed at their opposite ends to a generally vertical common bar
located within said door rame, at least two lever arms of equal
length pivotally connected to the bar and to the door frame
and equally inclined in upward direction away from said auxil-
iary bolts, said lever pivotally connected to said common bar
and, upon being pivoted by said bolt, moving said common bar
from a lower position in which the auxiliary bolts are in their
withdrawn position, to a higher position in which the auxiliary
bolts are in their projecting position, whereby said auxiliary
bolts tend to move to their withdrawn position under gravity.
4,435,922
APPARATUS FOR GRINDING THE BACK SURFACES OF
RECORD MOLDING STAMPERS
John J. Pmiak, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,128
Int a.) B24B 7/04
U.S. a. 51—58 7 Claims
1. An apparatus for grinding the back surface of record
molding stampers, said apparatus comprising in combination: a
stamper holder means and a grinding means; said stamper
holding means including a disc-shaped member having a diam-
eter at leut as large as the stamper to be ground by said appara-
tus, a drive means for routing said disc-shaped member about
the center thereof, and means associated with said disc-shaped
member for securing a stamper to be ground to a surface of the
disc-shaped member; said grinding means including an elon-
gated arm member having first and second terminal end por-
tions, said arm member being pivotally mounted at a point
intermediate between said first and second terminal end por-
tions, said first terminal end portion having positioned thereon
abrasive means for grinding said stamper, said grinding means
further including pressure applying means positioned to apply
preuure to said second terminal end portion and thereby pivot-
ally move said arm member from a first position to a second
position and to apply a given amount of pressure at the first
500
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
terminal end portion, said grinding means further including
oscillating means for continuously reciprocating said arm in a
uniform manner radially back and forth across the back surface
of the stamper in a plane approximately parallel to the plane of
roution of the disc-shaped member, said grinding means being
spacially positioned relative to the stamper holding means so
that when the arm is moved from said first position to said
second position the abrasive means is brought into grinding
contact at a said given amount of pressure with a stamper
shaft operatively coupled to said holder to reciprocate the
latter in response to rotation of the shaft;
said handle being attached to the base at the front end of the
abrading tool; and
a mounting structure carrying the motor and releasably
attached to the handle and the base at the opposite end of
the abrading tool.
4,435,923
ABRADING TOOL
Ralph Regina, 5471 SW. 16th St., Plantation, Fla, 33317
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,736
lat a.3 B24B 23/04; A47L 13/00
VS. a. 51-170 TL 12 Claims
1. In an abrading too! having a base and a handle attached to
said base and extending on one side of the base, said base
having a longitudinal recess therein which is open at the oppo-
site side of the bue from said handle, the improvement which
comprises:
a pair of rigid clamping members extending lengthwise in
m confhmting relalionshin to one aimther. ■•
\r\
4,435,924
METHOD OF GRINDING WORKPIECES
Jack L. Gamett, Beloit, Wis., assignor to The Bendix Corpora-
tion, Oeveland, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 206,122, Nov. 12, 1980, Pat. No. 4,368,595.
This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,513
Int. a.3 B24B 7/00
U.S. a 51-327 goaim
mounted on said stamper holding means; whereby when said
stamper is mounted back surface out on the disc-shaped mem-
ber of the stamper holding means, and said disc-shaped mem-
ber is rotated by said drive means, and said grinding means is
activated by the pressure applying means and oscillating
means, the abrasive means on the arm member is moved from
said first position to said second position into oscillating pres-
sure contact with the back surface of said stamper, causing the
back surface of the stamper to be ground, removing surface
defects.
1. A method of grinding a workpiece using a grinding appa-
ratus of the type having a frame, a movable grinding member
coupled to the frame for grinding a surface of workpiece at a
grinding station, a carrier movably coupled to said frame hav-
ing a loading station and an unloading station and a workpiece-
handling apparatus coupled to the frame adjacent to the carrier
and having at least two workpiece receiving apertures for
receiving a workpiece at the unloading station and for loading
workpieces into and discharging workpieces from the carrier,
the steps of the method comprising:
positioning a workpiece adjacent one of the workpiece-
receiving apertures of the workpiece-handling apparatus;
loading the workpiece from the carrier into the adjacent
aperture;
rotating the workpiece-handling apparatus through a partial
revolution to move the one aperture adjacent to a loading
Station of the carrier;
moving the workpiece from the apparatus to the carrier;
moving the carrier to bring a first surface of yc workpiece
adjacent the grinding member at the grinding station
grinding the workpiece with the grinding member;
moving the carrier to bring the workpiece to the unloadng
station;
....'i.^
':Ml£kM.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SOI
4,435,925
SHIELD FOR EAVES DRAIN GUTTER
Henry J. JcfTerys, P. O. Box 6029, Norfolk, Va. 23508
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 668,324, Mar. 18, 1976,
abandoned. This application Oct. 30, 1978, Ser. No. 955,862
Int. a.} E04D 13/06
U.S. a. 52—12 8 Oaims
1. A gutter shield of integral construction adapted to be
mounted under the eaves of a building and above a conven-
tional drain gutter comprising a flat mounting portion, a down-
wardly sloped collector portion which tangentially merges
with a curved nose portion, a re-entrant portion emerging
tangentially from below said nose portion as a continuation
thereof and downwardly sloped in a direction substantially
opposite to the direction of slope of said collector portion, a leg
poriion pendant from said re-entrant portion as a continuation
thereof and comprised of a multitude of uniformly spaced
parallel teeth extending downward and terminating adjacent
the outer lip of said drain gutter, the spaces between said teeth
having a length to width ratio between 3:1 and 9:1 and the area
of said spaces comprising between 30% and 60% of the total
area of said leg portion, said teeth originating at a sharply
defined angle of between 90* and 140* with resjject to said
re-entrant portion, and a conductor surface beginning at the
locus of origination of said leg portion as a continuation of said
re-entrant portion and extending inwardly in the general direc-
tion of said mounting portion, the outermost extremity of said
nose portion projecting i" to li" beyond said leg portion.
4,435,926
RIDGE ROOF
Francis L. Struben, 3870 JarrettsTille Pike, Jarrettsville, Md.
21062
Filed Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 413,712
Int. Q.3 E04D 13/00
U.S. a. 52—3 12 Oaims
1. A roof structure, comprising:
a center support component, said center support component
being vertically adjustable to a plurality of heights, said
center support component being suitably affixed to a
structure requiring a new roof structure;
a first pair of roof panel support members, said roof panel
each other and being suitably affixed to said structure
requiring a roof structure, said second pair of roof panel
support members being angle-like in configuration;
a plurality of interiocking roof panels, said plurality of roof
panels being of a corrugated configuration, each roof
panel of said plurality of roof panels having a first end and
a second end, said first end of each said roof panel being
slideably and removably inserted into and suitably affixed
to one of said first pair of roof panel support membeY^, said
second end of each said roof panel being set upon and
suitably affixed to one of said second pair of roof panel
support members;
a plurality of locking bars, each locking bar of said plurality
of locking bars being slideably and removably set so as to
lock one of said roof panels to one of said first pair of roof
panel support members;
a ridge cap member, said ridge cap member being suitably
affixed to said plurality of roof panel members, said ridge
cap member being located and affixed to said plurality of
roof panel members at said first end thereof where said
first end inserts into and is affixed to said first pair of roof
panel support members.
4,435,927
MODULAR BUILDING STRUCTURE AND MODULE
FOR IT
Hiroaki Umezu; Akira Kishi, both of Tokyo, and Hiroshi
Yamagami, Hachioji, all of Japan, assignors to Misawa
Homes K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,152
Int. a.i E04B 1/343
U.S. a. 52—79.13 1 Qaim
^^^^tf^\^3r-W-
1. A modular building structure which comprises an upper
and lower structure, each having:
(a) a frame including a horizontal base member of a rectan-
gular shape and four vertical comer posts of the same
length secured at their lower ends to the four comers of
said base member and having a tubular construction;
(b) a first wall member attached to two adjacent ones of said
four comer posts, said first wall member being vertically
coextensive with said u>mer posts; and
(c) a second wall member attached to one of said two adja-
cent comer posts and the comer post disposed in diagonal
relation to the other of said two adjacent comer posts, said
second wall member being vertically coextensive with
500
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
terminal end portion, said grinding means further including
oscillating means for continuously reciprocating said arm in a
uniform manner radially back and forth across the back surface
of the stamper in a plane approximately parallel to the plane of
rotation of the disc-shaped member, said grinding means being
spacially positioned relative to the stamper holding means so
that when the arm is moved from said first position to said
second position the abrasive means is brought into grinding
contact at a said given amount of pressure with a stamper
shaft operatively coupled to said holder to reciprocate the
latter in response to rotation of the shaft;
said handle being attached to the base at the front end of the
abrading tool; and
a mounting structure carrying the motor and releasably
attached to the handle and the base at the opposite end of
the abrading tool.
4,435^23
ABRADING TOOL
Ralph Regina, 5471 SW. 16th St., Plantation, Fla. 33317
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,736
Int. a.3 B24B 23/04: A47L 13/00
U.S. a. 51—170 TL 12 Claims
1. In an abrading tool having a base and a handle attached to
said base and extending on one side of the base, said base
having a longitudinal recess therein which is open at the oppo-
site side of the base from said handle, the improvement which
comprises:
a pair of rigid clamping members extending lengthwise in
said recess in confronting relationship to one another, at
least one of said clamping members being retractable
away from the other clamping member;
and an abrasive pad sandwiched between said clamping
members in said recess and projecting beyond said oppo-
site side of the base for engagement with grout exposed
between neighboring tiles in a tiled wall or floor;
a holder in said recess carrying said clamping members;
an electric motor mounted on said base and having a rotary
4,435,924
METHOD OF GRINDING WORKPIECES
Jack L. Gamett, Beloit, Wis., assignor to The Bendix Corpora*
tion, Oeveland, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 206,122, Nov. 12, 1980, Pat. No. 438,595.
This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,513
Int. C\? B24B 1/00
U.S. CI. 51—327 8 Claims
mounted on said stamper holding means; whereby when said
stamper is mounted back surface out on the disc-shaped mem-
ber of the stamper holding means, and said disc-shaf>ed mem-
ber is rotated by said drive means, and said grinding means is
activated by the pressure applying means and oscillating
means, the abrasive means on the arm member is moved from
said first position to said second position into oscillating pres-
sure contact with the back surface of said stamper, causing the
back surface of the stamper to be ground, removing surface
defects.
1. A method of grinding a workpiece using a grinding appa-
ratus of the type having a frame, a movable grinding member
coupled to the frame for grinding a surface of workpiece at a
grinding station, a carrier movably coupled to said frame hav-
ing a loading station and an unloading station and a workpiece-
handling apparatus coupled to the frame adjacent to the carrier
and having at least two workpiece receiving apertures for
receiving a workpiece at the unloading station and for loading
workpieces into and discharging workpieces from the carrier,
the steps of the method comprising:
positioning a workpiece adjacent one of the workpiece-
receiving apertures of the workpiece-handling apparatus;
loading the workpiece from the carrier into the adjacent
aperture;
rotating the workpiece-handling apparatus through a partial
revolution to move the one aperture adjacent to a loading
station of the carrier;
moving the workpiece from the apparatus to the carrier;
moving the carrier to bring a first surface of the workpiece
adjacent the grinding member at the grinding station
grinding the workpiece with the grinding member;
moving the carrier to bring the workpiece to the unloadng
station;
moving the workpiece from the carrier of the unloading
station to an aperture of the workpiece-handling appara-
tus;
rotating the workpiece-handling apparatus through a partial
revolution in a plane to an unload station adjacent the
carrier to expose another surface;
reloading the workpiece into the carrier;
grinding the other surface; and
unloading and discharging the workpiece.
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
501
4,435,925
SHIELD FOR EAVES DRAIN GUTTER
Henry J. Jcfferys, P. O. Box 6029, Norfolk, Va. 23508
ContinuatiOB-in-part of Ser. No. 668,324, Mar. 18, 1976,
abandoned. This application Oct. 30, 1978, Ser. No. 955,862
lat a.} E04D 13/06
U.S. a. 52—12 8 Qaims
1. A gutter shield of integral construction adapted to be
mounted under the eaves of a building and above a conven-
tional drain gutter comprising a flat mounting portion, a down-
wardly sloped collector portion which tangentially merges
with a curved nose portion, a re-entrant portion emerging
tangentially from below said nose portion as a continuation
thereof and downwardly sloped in a direction substantially
opposite to the direction of slope of said collector portion, a leg
portion pendant from said re-entrant portion as a continuation
thereof and comprised of a multitude of uniformly spaced
parallel teeth extending downward and terminating adjacent
the outer lip of said drain gutter, the spaces between said teeth
having a length to width ratio between 3:1 and 9:1 and the area
of said spaces comprising between 30% and 60% of the total
area of said leg portion, said teeth originating at a sharply
defined angle of between 90* and 140' with respect to said
re-entrant portion, and a conductor surface beginning at the
locus of origination of said leg portion as a continuation of said
re-entrant portion and extending inwardly in the general direc-
tion of said mounting portion, the outermost extremity of said
nose portion projecting \" to li" beyond said leg portion.
4,435,926
RIDGE ROOF
Francis L. Strubcn, 3870 Jarrettsville Pike, Jarrettsville, Md.
21062
FUed Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 413,712
Int. a? E04D 13/00
\}&. a. 52—3 12 Qaims
1. A roof structure, comprising:
a center support component, said center support component
being vertically adjustable to a plurality of heights, said
center support component being suitably affixed to a
structure requiring a new roof structure;
a first pair of roof panel support members, said roof panel
support members being spaced apart and suitable affixed
to said center support component, said roof panel support
members being longitudinally parallel to said center sup-
port component to which affixed, said first pair of roof
panel support members being channel-like in configura-
tion;
a second pair of roof panel support members, said second
pair of roof panel support members being spaced from said
first pair of roof panel support members, said second pair
of roof panel support members being spaced apart from
each other and being suitably affixed to said structure
requiring a roof structure, said second pair of roof panel
support members being angle-like in configuration;
a plurality of interlocking roof panels, said plurality of roof
panels being of a corrugated configuration, each roof
panel of said plurality of roof panels having a first end and
a second end, said first end of each said roof panel being
slideably and removably inserted into and suitably afllxed
to one of said first pair of roof panel support members, said
second end of each said roof panel being set upon and
suitably affixed to one of said second pair of roof panel
support members;
a plurality of locking bars, each locking bar of said plurality
of locking bars being slideably and removably set so as to
lock one of said roof panels to one of said first pair of roof
panel support members;
a ridge cap member, said ridge cap member being suitably
affixed to said plurality of roof panel members, said ridge
cap member being located and affixed to said plurality of
roof panel members at said first end thereof where said
first end inserts into and is affixed to said first pair of roof
panel support members.
4,435,927
MODULAR BUILDING STRUCTURE AND MODULE
FOR IT
Hiroaki Umezu; Akira Kishi, both of Tokyo, and Hiroshi
Yamagami, Hachioji, all of Japan, assignors to Misawa
Homes K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 19, 1981. Ser. No. 275,152
Int. a.^ E04B 1/343
U.S. a. 52—79.13 1 Qaim
1. A modular building structure which comprises an upper
and lower structure, each having:
(a) a frame including a horizontal base member of a rectan-
gular shape and four vertical corner posts of the same
length secured at their lower ends to the four comers of
said base member and having a tubular construction;
(b) a first wall member attached to two adjacent ones of said
four comer posu, said first wall member being vertically
coextensive with said torner posts; and
(c) a second wall member attached to one of said two adja-
cent comer posts and the comer post disposed in diagonal
relation to the other of said two adjacent comer posts, said
second wall member being vertically coextensive with
said comer posts; each of the comer posts of said lower
module having an upper end member fixedly secured to its
upper end, a bolt receiving hole being formed through
said upper end member, a guide pin being fixedly secured
to said upper end member and extending upwardly there-
from in parallel relation to the longitudinal axis of said
comer post, each of the comer posts of said upper module
having a lower end member fixedly secured to its lower
end, a bolt receiving portion being formed on said lower
502
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
end member, a guide pin receiving hole being formed
through said lower end member, the corresponding cor-
ner posts of said upper and lower modules being con-
nected in end to end relation, said guide pin of each corner
post of said lower module passing through said guide pin
receiving hole of the corresponding corner post of said
upper module, and a bolt passing through said bolt receiv-
ing hold of each corner post of said lower module and
being threaded into said bolt receiving portion of the
corresponding corner post of said upper module; the
corner posts of the lower module, except for the corner
post adjacent to said first and second wall members, being
attached slightly swingingly movable about their lower
end; said upper module including a pair of connecting
plates attached to the upper end members of the two
comer posts which are disposed in diagonal relation and
to which said first and second wall members are attached,
said connecting plates extending outwardly from said
corner posts to be laid over the upper surfaces of said first
and second wall members, respectively, each of said con-
necting plates having a pair of first slots extending parallel
to the plane of a respective one of said first and second
wall members, and having a pair of second slots extending
perpendicular to the plane of the respective wall member,
said guide pin and said bolt passing through said pair of
first slots, respectively, and a pair of bolts passing through
said pair of second slots into the upper portion of a respec-
tive one of said first and second wall members.
finish material connected to the other side of said core by
a layer of adnesive.
4,435.929
MODinED A-FRAME STRUCTURE
Hugh M. Buicell, 251 S. Willow, Cookevllle, Tenn. 38501
Filed Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,327
Int. a.J E04C i/02; E04D 3/iS
U.S. a. 52-93 ,0 Claim,
4,435,928
LOW ENERGY BUILDING
Edwin Huling, Houghton Hill Rd., Thetford Hill, Vt. 05074
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,149
Int. a.^ E04B 7/02
U.S. a. 52-90 ,7 ciai^
1. A low energy building having one or more stories adapted
to be erected one story at a time on an existing foundation from
prefabricated components comprising:
a modular post and beam framing system including:
short, integral beams of at least two modules length having
vertical rectangular joist notches cut therein at modular
increments along their length,
floor joists having their ends seated in said notches,
a plurality of boards laid on top of said beams and said joists
forming a floor at each story of the building,
posts upstanding from said floors at suitable spacing and
height to provide modular openings for the side and end
walls of the building
roof rafters supported at one of their ends on said beams and
meeting at another of their ends at the roof ridge,
a plurality of prefabricated laminated panels secured to said
framing system and covering said openings;
said panels having a central core member of insulating mate-
rial, an outer layer of siding material connected to one side
of said core by a layer of adhesive, and an inner layer of
1. A floor truss-wall truss assembly comprising a wooden
floor truss joined to a wooden wall truss at an angle such that
said floor truss is an A cross-bar member and said wall truss is
an A upright member, said wall truss having a single bearing
block adjacent the inside of an inner chord member thereof
occupying the whole space between upper and lower chords,
said floor truss having two end blocks separated by a spacer
member extending between said upper and lower chords of
said floor truss with said upper and lower chords protruding
beyond an outer end of each of said two end blocks so as to fit
respectively over and under the upper and lower ends of said
single bearing block and means holding said two end blocks in
position and fastening said end blocks and said upper and lower
chords of said floor truss to said inner chord member of said
wall truss.
4,435,930
TRAFnC SAFE POLE
Oscar W. Plym, Gcneralsviigen 133, 180 21 dsterskir, Sweden
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,570
Int. a.3 E04H 12/02: E04B 1/54
U.S. a. 52-98 7 Qgi^
1. A traffic safe pole for supporting traffic signs, road light-
ing and the like, characterized in that the pole is divided sub-
suntially perpendicularly to its longitudinal direction to
thereby comprise a first pole portion to which a traffic sign and
the like may be atuched; and a second pole portion jointed to
said first portion adapted to be anchored in a suitable manner;
said joint substantially consisting of a sleeve secured to and
arranged relative to the two pole portions so that its tensile
strength in substantially its longitudinal direction which is
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S03
coextensive with the pole portions considerably exceeds the
tensile strength in its circumferential direction; said pole por-
tions being structurally coextensive with coextensive surfaces;
said sleeve consisting of reinforced plastic with its reinforce-
ment provision directed in the longitudinal direction of the
sleeve; the means for securing said sleeve to said pole portions
consisting of glue which glues the sleeve to coextensive sur-
faces of said pole portions to thereby provide a homogenous
pole; said sleeve being located on the inner shell surface of said
pole portions; a ring, preferably of steel, located and glued on
the outside of each of said pole portions at the joint, where
each ring projects in longitudinal direction of the pole portion
beyond the end surface of the associated pole portion, and
where the inner diameter of the projecting portion of the ring
substantially agrees with that of the pole portion, each ring
constituting a cylindric cup located on the end of the associ-
ated pole portion with an axial hole in the cup bottom, and the
end surfaces of the projecting portions of the rings arranged so
as to abut each other; a first inner ring and a second inner ring,
preferably of steel, located within said sleeve and glued to its
inner shell surface in such a manner, that said first inner ring is
located within said first pole portion and projects in the longi-
tudinal direction beyond the end surface of the pole portion a
distance substantially equal to but no greater than said end
surfaces of said cup-shape ring, and said second inner ring is
located in corresponding manner within said other pole por-
tion; said traffic safe pole being further characterized in that in
the inner shell surface of the projecting portion of each of said
cup-shaped rings a circumferential groove is provided in con-
nection to the end surface of the projecting portion, which
groove is arranged so that the flank of the groove which is
closest to said projecting end surface and the projecting end
surface together form a sharp edge about the inner edge of said
projecting end surface, and that the outer shell surface of the
projecting portion of said first inner ring and said second inner
ring includes a groove which is located in the circumferential
direction in connection to the end surface of the projecting
portion in a manner corresponding to the cup-shaped rings so
that a sharp edge is formed about the outer edge of said pro-
jecting end surface.
4,435,931
GUY WIRE PROTECTOR DEVICE
James A. Newbanks, 205 W. AUen St., Apt. 318, Springfleld, HI.
62704
FUed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,465
Int. a.} E04H 12/20
\}&. a. 52—147 18 Claims
1. A device mountable on guy wires and like supports for
deflecting and splitting ice sheaths that form on the guy wires
and subsequently slide therealong, each guy wire having op-
posed ends, one of which opposed ends is anchored to a fixed
member and the opposite of which is connected to a structure
to be supported thereby, said device comprising a pair of
substantially alike interconnectable members, each member
having spaced first and second ends of substantially semi-circu-
lar cross-section, the radius of said first end being smaller than
the radius of the second end, an outer surface, and a substan-
tially planar mating surface opposite the outer surface, said
spaced first and second ends of each of said members defining
a respective semi-frusto-conical shaped body envelope for
each member, said outer surface of each member being dis-
posed within said respective body envelope for such member,
said mating surfaces having a longitudinal channel formed
therein including a channel wall extending between said first
and second ends, said outer surface of each of said intercon-
nectable members tapering from said second end towards said
first end to adjacent said channel wall at said first end, said
members adapted to complementarily engage a guy wire when
positioned therearound in a mating condition with said mating
surfaces positioned adjacent to one another, said channels
being registrable with one another when said members are so
disposed in a mating condition to engage opposite sides of the
guy wire about which said members are positioned, and means
for connecting said members to one another about the guy wire
at a fixed location therealong spaced from the opposed ends
thereof, whereby said device facilitates the deflection and
splitting of ice sheaths impacting said device at the first end
thereof.
4,435,932
ALTERNATING V-TRUSS ROOF SYSTEM AND
^i--Ml
biu^anc
lETHOD OF ERECTION
Paul A. Seabiu^and Richard W. Lautensleger, both of Middle-
town, Ohio, anignors to Armco Inc., MIddletown, Ohio
Filed Oet. 19, 1981. Ser. No. 312,711
Int. a.i E04B 7/00
U.S. a. 52—263 26 Claims
1. A roof supporting structure comprising a series of spaced
apart rafters lying in parallel relation, a series of elongated
V-truss units extending between the rafters in parallel relation
at spaced apart intervals to define rows of V-truss units, said
elongated V-truss units each comprising a spaced apart pair of
top chords and at least one bottom chord defining the apex of
the V-truss unit, and diagonally disposed web members inter-
connecting said top and bottom chords, said top chords being
supported at their opposite ends on said rafters, the V-tnus
units in at least one given row lying in alternating relation with
respect to the V-tr\iss units in the next adjacent row, and means
interconnecting the ends of the top chords of the V-tnus uniu
in one row with the adjoining ends of the top chords of the
V-truss units in the next adjacent row.
504
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,435^33
VINYL SIDING ATTACHMENT
Thomas R. Krowl, N. Tonawanda, N.Y., assignor to National
Gypsiun Company, Dallas, Tex.
FUed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,639
Int. a.3 E04D 1/34. 3/362. 3/363
U.S. a. 52—309.1 10 Qaims
1. In combination, an elongate section of siding and a siding
clip for supporting said siding, said clip comprising a back for
disposition against a supporting surface, an upper hanger por-
tion suiuble for attachment to such a supporting surface, and a
lower channel portion, said channel portion having a channel
formed extending therethrough from side to side, said channel
having internally raised portions disposed for engaging and
restricting removal from said channel of non-uniform thickness
elements extending along the top portion of said elongate
siding section, said siding having a face portion, a top con-
cealed portion, a bottom rearwardly extending spacer flange,
and, at the rearward end of said spacer flange, a short interlock
flange, said siding concealed portion including an attachment
portion having a plurality of spaced apart, longitudinally
aligned nailing slots, said slots being disposed between two
spaced parallel guide ribs, said attachment portion being dis-
posed within said clip channel and said guide ribs being re-
stricted from removal from said channel by said internally
raised portion.
4,435,934
PREFABRICATED PANEL CONSTRUCnON SYSTEM
Kwon S. Kim, Oklahoma Gty, Okla., assignor to Star Manufac>
turing Co., Oklahoma City, Okla.
Continuation of Ser. No. 47,132, Jun. 11, 1979, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 893,435, May 4, 1978, Pat. No.
4,295,304. This application Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,574
Int. a.3 E04C 7/00
U.S. a. 52—309.7 6 Claims
M»
1. A prefabricated wall panel for use with like panels in
constructing the walls of a building, comprising:
a body of insulating material having opposed top and bottom
ends;
interior and exterior corrugated metal sheets disposed on
opposite major faces of said insulating body, and
at least one fastener strip disposed between said interior
metal sheet and said insulating body to provide strength at
a selected point of attachment of the panel to support
members, said fastener strip being disposed between
spaced apart corrugated grooves in said interior metal
sheet for holding said fastener strip in a predetermined
position during fabrication of the panel whereby the loca-
tion of said fastener strip can be identified from the exte-
rior of the panel, and said fastener strip and said interior
metal sheet extend beyond said exterior metal sheet and
said insulating body at one of said ends of said insulating
body to permit installation of a fastener through only said
fastener strip and said interior metal sheet into a support
member for said panel from the outside of the building.
4,435,935
PANEL JOINING SYSTEM
D. Juan Larrea, Pamplona, Spain, assignor to Perfll En Frio,
S.A. (PERFRISA), Pamplona, Spain
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 294,922
Oaims priority, application Spain, Oct. 8, 1980, 253296; Oct.
8, 1980, 253397
Int. a.3 E04B 5/52
U.S. a. 52—461 8 Claims
1. A panel-joining system for panels, said panels being of the
type which include an exterior and an interior rigid sheet
having an insulating fill therebetween, said panels having ends
to be joined, the ends being arranged flush with one another,
said system comprising:
(a) an exterior rigid sheet of a panel which sheet includes:
(i) a first exterior shaped section near one end of the sheet,
said shaped section being a groove with respect to the
exterior plane of the panel;
(ii) a second exterior shaped section, said second shaped
section being a groove arranged between the first
shaped section and said one end of the sheet; and
(iii) said end including an exterior flange perpendicular to
the outer plane of the panel;
(b) an interior rigid sheet of the panel which includes:
(i) an interior shaped section near one end, said interior
shaped section being a groove with respect to the plane
of the panel; and
(ii) said end including an interior flange perpendicular to
the plane of the panel;
(c) the panel having a seal disposed at the end thereof, said
seal being sealingly situated between the exterior and
interior flanges, and wherein said seal, upon abutment
with a corresponding seal of a panel to be joined, cooper-
ates to provide a space between midportions of the seals;
(d) at least two elastic covers, said elastic covers being in-
sertable into the corresponding exterior and interior first
shaped sections of the panels to be joined;
(e) a load spreader plate for insertion into corresponding
second shaped sections of the panels to be joined, said load
spreader plate being operative for holding the panels in
abutment; and
(0 means for holding said load spreader plate in position
between the abutting panels for supporting said panels.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
505
4,435,936
METAL STUD
Edward J. Rutkowski, Kenmore, N.Y., assignor to National
Gypaum Company, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,402
Int. a.} E04B 1/00
VS. a. 52—481 10 Claims
1. A fire-resistant metal stud for supporting a vertical wall
comprising an elongate formed sheet metal body having an
elongate first side and, opposite thereto, an elongate second
side, elongate means central thereof adjoining said first side
and said second side, means on said second side for affixing
wallboard thereto, a pair of flanges on said first side adapted to
have the edges of a pair of wallboards affixed against the inner
side thereof, whereby said flanges would be disposed on the
surface of a wall formed by said wallboards, said pair of flanges
including at least one flange which is formed from an inner
layer sheet of metal extending from the inner edge of the flange
to the outer edge of the flange whereat the metal is reversely
folded and extends back to said inner edge forming an outer
layer, said inner layer having means for retarding the increase
in temperature of said inner layer and the wallboard surface
adjacent thereto when said wall is subjected to a fire on the
wall second side, said means for retarding comprising structure
which directs cooler gases to the interface of said inner layer
and said wallboard, said structure comprising a plurality of
outwardly projecting dimples, said stud further comprising an
internal gap formed between said flange inner layer and outer
layer, whereby air within said internal gap that becomes heated
will tend to move vertically upward, within said gap.
member to said purlin, each said concealed fastener having a
foot extending from the lower end thereof for anchoring pairs
of rigid interlocked metal panels at said rib joints, the foot of
each said concealed fastener being contiguous with said lower
« « «i
portion, said recess of said bearing support member being
tightly pulled into said rigid insulation an amount about equal
to the depth of said recess such that the lower surfaces of said
coplanar portions are substantially contiguous with the upper
surface of said rigid insulation.
4,435,938
VINYL SIDING ATTACHMENT
Edward J. Rutkowski, Kenmore, and Thomas R. Krowl, North
Tonawanda, both of N.Y., assignors to National Gypsum
Company, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,613
Int. a.^ E04D J/00
U.S. a. 52—521 5 Claims
4,435,937
CONCEALED FASTENER SUPPORT FOR
INTERLOCKED CHANNEL SECTION PANELS
Lester W. Stone, Germantown, Ohio, assignor to Armco Inc.,
Middletown, Ohio
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,126
Int. a.' E04D 3/24. 3/36
U.S. a. 52—520 11 Claims
1. In a roof structure, a series of interlocked roof panels
having adjacent margins forming rib joints and being of self-
supporting capacity and closing the space between said purlins,
rigid insulation sandwiched between said panels and said pur-
lins, an integral, one-piece bearing support member overlying
said rigid insulation of each said rib joint, said bearing support
member comprising a pair of upper coplanar portions and an
intermediate lower planai portion lying in a plane parallel to
that of said coplanar portions, said coplanar portions and said
intermediate lower portion being joined by a pair of down-
wardly extending portions to form a recess extending fully
between opposite edges of said bearing support, said panels
being connected to said bearing support, and a concealed
fastener and associated through fastener means positioned
along said rib joint in said recess to anchor said bearing support
1. In an exterior wall structure, a plurality of sections of
elongate vinyl lap siding, said vinyl siding comprising an elon-
gate thin face section of potentially deformable vinyl exposed
and forming the exterior surface of said wall structure and an
elongate concealed top portion along the top edge, said top
portion having a plurality of holes for the reception of fasten-
ers at spaced positions therealong, and a plurality of pre-
formed, relatively rigid, individual clips, said clips supporting
solely a thin section of vinyl siding, said clips each having a top
portion and a bottom poriion, said clip top portions being
affixed to the structure sheathing or frammg members, said clip
bottom portions having outwardly directed portions extending
from behind the siding through said holes terminating in a
preformed relatively rigid upwardly extending means for re-
taining the siding on said clip bottom portions, said clip bottom
portions fitting loosely through said holes, whereby the vinyl
siding top portion is free to expand and contract relative to said
clips when said siding is subjected to temperature changes.
506
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,435,939
PANEL LOCKING MEANS
Richard E. Hird, Catiin, III., iMignor to Ectad Product!, Inc..
Danville, III.
Filed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 178,539
Int. a.J E04C 1/10
U.S. a. 52-582 9 Qainu
1. A panel locking supporting means for each of a pair of
adjacent panels to be joined together, each panel including a
pair of relatively rigid wall members with heat insulating mate-
rial disposed therebetween, said locking supporting means
comprising a rigid housing having spaced sides and means for
joining the edge portions of the wall members together, said
housing further comprising extensions respectively extending
from opposite ends of the spaced sides and having at least one
slot for receiving retaining means therein, and elongated re-
taining means substantially perpendicular to said housing ex-
tending through said slot and having its ends positioned within
said joined edge portions to positively position said housing
with respect to said wall members.
4,435,940
METAL BUILDING TRUSS
Jeanne A. Darenport, Long Beach; Robert L. Campbell, Irvine,
and James F. Gailaway, Tustin, all of Calif., assignors to
Angeles Metal Trim Co., Los Angeles, Calif.
FUed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,527
Int. a? E04B 7/08
U.S. a. 52-641 7 Claim.
trusses are used to cover said area deHned by said vertical walls
the improvement including:
said bottom chord member being of lightweight material and
havmg a generally U shaped cross section formed by a
web and two legs extending from said web and said web
forms a base with said legs projecting upwardly forming a
channel;
said top chord members each being of lightweight metal and
in cross section possessing a hat shaped configuration and
of an interior dimension greater than the exterior width
dimension of said bottom chord member to overlie and
encompass a portion of the legs of the end of said bottom
chord;
fastening means to directly secure the ends of said bottom
chord to portions of said top chords and the abutting ends
of said top chords;
diagonal members each being of lightweight metal having
ends, and one end of said diagonal member adapting to
interfit within the legs of said bottom chord member and
extend upwardly at an angle to a vertical plane and the
other end interfitted within the legs of one of said top
chord members; and
fastening means to secure the endrof said diagonal members
to said bottom chord member and one of said top chord
members.
4 435 941
PACKAGING MACHINE
John L. Booth, Richton Park, and Peter A. Rittmaster, Chicago,
both of III., assignors to Booth Manufacturing Company. Vero
Beach, Fla.
Continuation of Ser. No. 6,085, Jan. 25, 1979, Pat. No.
4,233,802, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 876,841, Feb.
10, 1978, abandoned. This application Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No.
207,690
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 18,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B65B 5/08. 5/06
U.S. a. 53-475 14 ciiUn„
1. A uniury metal building truss of lightweight meUl
adapted to span an area defined by vertical walls having outer
edges, said truss including bottom chord member resting upon
said vertical walls and having ends extending to at least the
outer edges of said vertical walls, a pair of top chord members
each having an outer end and an inner end, each of said top
chord members extending from at least the ends of said bottom
chord member and secured thereto angled upward and inward
toward each other and each inner end abutting the other and
secured to each other forming a crown wherein the bottom
and top chord members form a triangle, and a plurality of
diagonal members extend between the bottom and top chord
members and are secured thereto, wherein a plurality of said
1. A machine for automatically packaging articles into ex-
panded honeycomb and into a container comprising means for
locating a container at a loading station of the packaging ma-
chine to be filled and moving the container out of the loading
station after it has been filled, means for providing a separator
sheet into the container at the loading sution, means for dis-
posing a prescribed number of articles to be packaged as a
layer in the container in a nested relationship in an article
loading position, an article controlling housing assembly,
means for automatically providing above said loading station a
honeycomb expander tray on which is located an open honey-
comb section for receiving articles and for removing the tray
after the honeycomb section has been removed therefrom,
means for moving the housing assembly and for lifting said
articles from their article loading position, depositing them in
said open honeycomb and subsequently lifting the filled honey-
comb from said tray and then depositing the same in a con-
tainer.
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
907
4,435,942 4,435,943
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STOPPERING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FOLDING CARTON
MODinED BOTTLES WITH A ONE-PIECE CORKING FLANGES
MEANS Sigurd J. Hoynip, Monta Vista, CaUf., assignor to Kliklok
Eflm Zaltsman, Brooklyn, N.Y., assignor to Monarch Wine Co., Corporation, Redwood Gty, Calif.
Inc., Brooklyn, N.Y. Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283^53
Division of Ser. No. 223,894, Jan. 9, 1981, abandoned. This Int. a.> B65B 7/20
application Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 368,990 U.S. 0. 53—491 12 Claims'
Int. a.3 B67B 1/04. 3/22: B6SB 7/28
U.S.a. 53-489 2 Claims ["1 1
I i J
1. A method for stoppering a bottle with pressurized, car-
bonated, water-based liquid contents; said method comprising
the steps of:
(a) providing a bottle having a body portion; an elongated
neck portion; and, a mouth portion; said neck portion
having two relatively axially proximate, circumferential,
squat, annular flanges spaced apart longitudinally of the
neck and adjacent to the mouth;
(b) providing a corking means having:
(i) an elongated, generally circularly cylindrical stopper,
insertable with frictional engagement into the mouth
portion of the bottle;
(ii) a head connected to the stopper;
(iii) an annular, circumferential ring, dimensioned and
shaped for reception between the two annular flanges of
the bottle neck; said annular ring being positioned and
spaced below the head as molded and being concentric
with the stopper, said ring being below the head;
(iv) a flexible, elongated tether having one end connected
to the ring and the other end connected to the head; said
tether being in a folded state as molded and having a
length substantially greater than the distance between
said one end and said other end; and
(v) a plurality of short frangible bridges, circumferentially
spaced apart of each other; said frangible bridges con-
necting the head to the ring;
(vi) the stopper, head, ring, tether and bridges being inte-
grally molded in one piece of elastomeric plastic;
(c) inserting the stopper portion of the corking means into
the mouth portion of the bottle with a die; and
(d) thereafter forcing the annular ring portion of the corking
means downwardly with a second die over the upper of
the two annular flanges to a position between the two
annular flanges of the bottle;
whereby the frangible bridges hold the stopper and annular
ring in proper position with respect to one another for
insertion and reception respectively in and around the
bottle neck; said frangible bridges breaking when the
annular ring is forced into place between the flanges.
1. A folding apparatus for prebreaking and folding relatively
short upstanding flanges formed on the upper sides of a carton
or the like, comprising:
(a) conveying means for moving the carton along a predeter-
mined guide path at a substantially uniform velocity, said
carton positioned on the conveying means to define up-
wardly directed side, leading and trailing end flanges;
(b) first folding means including a grooved trap and inclined
edge surface positioned above the guide path for engaging
and partially folding down the upwardly directed side
flanges of the carton, said grooved trap being positioned
adjacent the inclined edge surface to engage and trap the
upwardly directed free edge of said side flanges; and
(c) second folding means for contacting and completing the
folding down of said prebroken flanges, said second fold-
ing means being further operable to contact and prebreak
the leading end and trailing end flanges.
4,435,944
APPARATUS FOR ORDERLY TRANSPORT AND
STORAGE OF FLAT OBJECTS
Alfons Meyer, DonauMhwabenstrasse 40, D-7050 Waiblingcn,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 276,949, Jun. 24, 1981, Pat. No. 4,354,335,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 34,756, Apr. 30, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jun. 18, 1982. Ser. No. 389,584
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. May 6,
1978, 2819887
Int. a.3 B65B 35/32
U.S. Q. 53—531 8 Claims
1. An apparatus for ordering, transporting and storing flat
empty bags (4) closed at three sides and having an opening (6)
at the fourth side and an extending flap (11) located adjacent
said bag opening and projecting therefrom,
said bags being aligned seriatim and in overlapping position
in shingled arrangement on a carrier web (15) in which the
508
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
carrier web provides for storage and delivery of the bags
to a subsequent processing station,
comprising means for providing a tear or servering or frac-
ture line (13) between the extending flap (11) and the
remainder of the bag;
means for transporting the bags seriatim in a first direction
(0) with their flaps extended at right angles to said first
direction;
means for fixing the carrier web (15) in a direction (44)
which is perpendicular to said first direction (0);
means for forwarding the bags, one after another, in prede-
termined time intervals in said first direction (0) at a level
above said carrier web (15) from a first side of the carrier
web and across the carrier web into an abutment or stop
means (27) located at the second side of the carrier web;
means for dropping said bags over and on the carrier web in
mutually overlapping position while guiding the drop of
the then dropping bag on the web and forming a shingled
arrangement of bags on the web;
means for aligning each side of the bag on the carrier web
and exactly positioning the bags on the carrier web with
their flaps at defined distances (A) from one another;
means for permanently and irremovably attaching said flaps
of bags, as positioned and aligned onto said carrier web,
seriatim at said defined distances (A) from one another to
insure separation of the bag from the flap at said tear,
severing or fracture line upon application of a severing
force to the bag while leaving the flap attached to the
web;
and means for storing said carrier web and said bags for
subsequent separation of said bags from said flaps to per-
mit subsequent filling, and separation and removal of said
bags (4) from the web (15) while leaving the flaps (11)
attached to the web (15).
4,435,945
APPARATUS FOR GIRDING PACKAGE WITH BONDED
SYNTHETIC-RESIN STRIP
Klaus Rohrig, Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Beming & Sohne, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,661
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 24,
1980, 3023526
Int a.J B65B 13/32
U.S. a. 53—589 14 Oalms
1. An apparatus for girding a package with a bonded syn-
thetic-resin web, comprising:
a frame;
support means on said frame for holding said package at a
bonding station;
feed means on said frame for automatically encircling said
package at said station with a leading poriion of an elon-
gate synthetic-resin web;
clamping means on said frame for temporarily constraining
said web uf)on an encircling of said package by said lead-
ing poriion;
cutting means on said frame at said station for severing said
leading portion upon a securing of said web by said clamp-
ing means, thereby forming a web segment having a lead-
ing end and a trailing end overlappable therewith and
engaging said package along at least a substantial part of a
perimeter thereof, said clamping means functioning to
secure at least one of said ends;
melting means on said frame at said station insertable be-
tween said ends for heating at least one of said ends on a
surface facing the other end;
sealing means on said frame at said station for pressing said
ends together along a clamping surface upon a heating of
at least one of said ends by said melting means, said sealing
means including a drum rotatably mounted on said frame,
means to undirectionally rotate said drum on said frame
about an axis parallel to said clamping surface, a first press
element mounted on said drum, said sealing means further
including a second press element disposed in the rotation
path of said first press element for coacting therewith to
squeeze said ends together during a bonding phase of an
operating cycle, said first press element being provided
with means shiftably mounting it for moving away from
the other press element during said bonding phase upon
contact of said elements, said sealing means further includ-
ing contact-ensuring means acting on at least the shiftably
mounted press element for exerting a restoring force
thereon to yieldably urge such element towards the other
press element during said bonding phase; and
a programmer means operatively connected to said feed
means, said clamping means, said cutting means, said
melting means and said sealing means for controlling and
timing the operations thereof, said clamping surface being
a plane defined by a face of said second press element, said
second press element being mounted on said frame at a
fixed distance from said axis, said contact-ensuring means
comprising a restoring spring acting on said first press
element, said first press element being shiftably mounted
for reciprocation perpendicular to said axis, said first press
element being in the form of a bar shiftably mounted along
a diameter of said drum, said drum having a passage wall
for said web along i longitudinal plane parallel to said axis
and at an angle with respect to said bar; said cutting means
including a blade attached to said drum on said passage
wall, passage ahead of said first press element in the direc-
tion of rotation of said drum and traversed by said web
formed between said first press bar and said blade.
4,435,946
MULTI-ROW CROP HARVESTING ATTACHMENT
Leiand E. Erickson, Forman, N. Dak. 58032
Division of Ser. No. 311,459, Oct. 14, 1981. This application Jan.
3, 1983, Ser. No. 455,218
Int. a.3 AOID 4J/06. 41/12. 47/00
U.S. CL 56—15.6 7 Claims
1. A crop harvesting attachment for use in combination with
a combine having a cross auger trough and sickles and guards
protruding forward of the trough, comprising:
(1) means for presenting crops to said combines sickles;
(2) frame means for supporting the weight of such crop
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
509
presenting means; said crop presenting means attached to
said frame means;
(3) one or more mounting brackets, each comprising an
upper section and a lower section, each mounting bracket
rigidly attached to the frame means at the mounting
bracket's lower section;
(4) one or more locking cams, each comprising a lower
pivot section and an upper section, each of said locking
cams pivotally connected to a said mounting bracket at
their respective upper sections; and
(5) means for attaching each said locking cam's upper sec-
tion to the upper rear portion of said combine's cross
auger trough and for fixing the distance therebetween,
said upper attaching means attached to the locking cam's
upper section, said distance fixed so that the point, at
which each said mounting bracket is pivotally connected
to each said locking cam, is approximately above the
locking cam's pivot section, but slightly longitudinally
forward of a vertical line running through the locking
cam's lower pivot section, when said lower pivot section
is in contact with and being supported by the upper front
portion of said cross auger trough.
,4,435,947
TOWED COTTON RETRIEVING BELT ASSEMBLY
William E. Rood, Jr., 3134 E. Fargo Cir., Mesa, Ariz. 85203
Filed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 311,984
Int. a.3 AOID 45/18
U.S. a. 56—28 17 Qaims
1. A cotton retrieving device comprising in combination:
(a) a retrieving belt, said retrieving belt being transversely
slotted;
(b) upper pulley means for supporting said retrieving belt,
said upper pulley means having a first axis;
(c) a lower pulley means for supporting said retrieving belt,
said lower pulley means having a second axis parallel to
said first axis;
(d) pulley support means for supporting said upper pulley
means and said lower pulley means; and
(e) towing means connected to said pulley support means for
effecting towing of said pulley support means along a
ground surface, said towing means having a forward
portion for connection to a pulling means at a point out-
side of the area circumscribed by said retrieving belt and
substantially in front of said retrieving belt, said towing
means also having a rear portion connected to said pulley
support means for towing said pulley support means and
for holding said first axis and said second axis in a plane
which remains approximately at a predetermined non-par-
allel angle with respect to said ground surface as said
cotton retrieving device is towed along said ground sur-
face.
4,435,948
MECHANISM FOR PIVOTING WINDROW SHIELDS
INTO A VERTICAL TRANSPORT POSITION
Richard E. Jennings, New Holland, Pa., assignor to Sperry
Corporation, New Holland, Pa.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,520
Int. a.5 AOIB 73/00
U.S. a. 56—228 10 Qaims
1. In a crop harvesting machine convertable between a
longitudinally movable operating position and a laterally mov-
able transport position and having a draft means for connection
to a prime mover for a source of motive power, said draft
means including a hitch base member and a tongue pivoully
connected to said hitch base member; a frame pivotally con-
nected to said hitch base member for rotation about a pivot
axis; windrow shields pivotally mounted on said frame for
movement between a generally horizontally extending opera-
tive position and a generally vertically extending transport
position; and power means for pivotally moving said frame and
said tongue, the improvement comprising:
windrow shield pivot means interconnecting said hitch base
member and said frame to automatically pivotally rotate
said windrow forming shield from said operative position
to said transport position as said frame is pivotally moved
about said pivot axis.
4,435,949
MULCHING ADAPTER FOR ROTARY LAWN MOWER
Richard A. Heismann, Knoxvillc, III., assignor to Outboard
Marine Corporation, Waukegui, III.
Filed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,102
Int. G.} AOID 53/08
U.S. a. 56—320.2 14 Qaims
6^
1. A lawn mower comprising a blade housing having a
generally circular interior surface and having a grass discharge
chute includng a discharge outlet through which cut grass is
adapted to be dischargea, at least one wheel for supportmg said
blade housing for movement along the ground, a cutting blade
supported in said blade housing, a prime mover supported by
said blade housing and connected to said blade for causing
rotation of said blade about a generally vertical axis, and a
grass mulcher insertable through said discharge outlet into said
discharge chute for blocking said discharge chute to prevent
cut grass from passing through said discharge chute, said
mulcher comprising an inner portion including a substantially
vertical surface curved about said generally vertical axis,
spaced from but adjacent the path of said cutting blade, and
forming a generally continuous surface with said blade housing
interior surface, said inner portion of said mulcher also includ-
ing an upper surface sloping upwardly and inwardly with
510
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
respect to said generally vertical axis so as to deflect down-
wardly and toward said cutting blade moving pieces of grass,
cut by said cutting blade and striking said upper surface.
4,435,950
FRUIT OR BERRY HARVESTING DEVICE FOR IN-LINE
CROPS
Alain Deux, Angers, and Jean C. Meruit, Doue La Fontaine,
both of France, assignors to Braud, Societe Anonyme Fran-
caise. Angers, France
Filed Aug. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 408,889
Gaims priority, application France, Aug. 31, 1981, 81 16564
Int. a.J AOID 46/00
U.S. C 56—330 4 Gaims
passing through the axis of the handle and the normal
movement direction of the handle, said linear tongue faces
«v w ''
also being generally arranged at an angle to a plane pass-
ing through said handle axis and said support portion axis.
1. A machine for harvesting fruits and berries by dislodg-
ment for in-line crops, by vibration of the vegetation, compris-
ing pairs of "hedgehog" drums with vertical axes, arms sup-
porting said axes free to pivot with resilient return about fixed U.S. G. 57—18
axes of the machine, angularly adjustable hubs fixed on said
axes of the drums inclined by at an angle with respect to said
axes of the drums, sleeves mounted freely rotatable about said
hubs and inclined by the same angle, flexible fingers fixed
radially to said sleeves, eccentric fly-weights free to rotate
about axes carried by arms extending radially from the sleeves,
means for controlling the speed of rotation of the axes of the
drums and of a chain and gear wheel transmission coupling the
axes of the drums to the axes of the fly-weights, the rotation of
the axes of the drums causing a sinusoidal vibration of the
fingers in a vertical plane passing through said axes of the
drums, which vibration is adjustable from zero to its maximum
by variation of the speed of rotation of said axes and by varia-
tion of the angle of inclination of the hubs, which vertical
vibration is compounded by the adjustable horizontal vibration
due to the fly-weights, the horizontal vibration being adjust-
able by varying at least one of the weight, eccentricity and
speed of the fly-weights.
4,435,952
SPINNING ASSEMBLY FOR A WRAPPED YARN
SPINNING MACHINE
Fritz Stahlecker, Josef-Neidhart-Str. 18, 7347 Bad Cberkingen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany; Kurt Lang, Lauterstein, and Rolf
Erhardt, Wijschenbeuren, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Fritz Stahlecker and Hans Stahlecker, both of.
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,760
Gaims priority, application Fed. Re^of Germany, Jan. 16,
1981, 3101146
Int. G.3 D02G 3/36; DOIH 7/18, 11/00
20 Gaims
4,435,951
GARDENING DEVICE
Jiirgen Dambroth, Barsingbausen, Fed. Hep. of Germany, as-
signor to Firma Rux GmbH, Barsingbausen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,903
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 2,
1980, 3025029
Int. G.3 AOIB 1/24
VJS. G. 56—400.05 14 Gaims
1. A multi-purpose gardening tool for operating on grass
faces which is securable to an elongated handle, comprising:
an operating device having an elongated support portion
which is securable to an elongated handle and which has
a longitudinal axis oriented in a generally perpendicular
disposition relative to the axis of said handle and a tool
portion composed of a plurality of tongues separated by
channel-like cut-outs, the free ends of which define cut-
ting-like linear faces all of which faces are parallel to each
other and are directed to the grass face to be worked on
and are disposed at an angle (a) with respect to a plane
1. A spinning assembly for a wrapped yam spinning machine
comprising a hollow spindle carrying a co-rotating binding
thread and disposed between delivery means for a sliver to be
wrapped and a take-off means for the wrapped yam, said
binding thread moving toward the sliver to be wrapped
thereby during rotation of said spindle, said spindle being
surrounded in the vicinity of the binding thread with a station-
ary balloon limiter means, a relatively stationary screen plate
means located between the delivery means and the balloon
limiter means, said screen plate means being provided with a
passage for sliver and being disposed at an axial distance from
the balloon limiter means so that an airflow is able to take place
in the balloon limiter means which airflow leaves the balloon
limiter means in a generally radially outward direction and
thus generally opposite the direction of movement of the bind-
ing thread to thereby prevent fly accumulation on the binding
thread-
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
Sll
4,435,953
OPENING ROLLER UNIT FOR OPEN-END SPINNING
INSTALLATIONS
Friedbert Schmid, Bad Cberkingen, and Hans Raasch, Moac-
hen-Gladbacb, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Fritz Stahlecker, Uberklngen and Haas Stahlecker, Susscn,
both of, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,219
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 13,
1981, 3123480
Int. G.^ DOIH 7/895. 7/892; DOIG 15/28
U.S. G. 57—408 18 Claims
.Ayyjjlp
4,435,955
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING
OPEN-END-SPUN NOVELTY YARNS
John H. Sumner, Greensboro, N.C., assignor to Burlington
Industries, Inc., Greensboro, N.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 127,446, Mar. 5, 1980, Pat No.
4,361,007. This appUcation Sep. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 414,576
Int. G.3 DOIH 1/12. 7/882. 7/892; D02G 3/34
VS. G. 57—409 15 Claims
1. Opening roller unit for open-end spinning installations
having a shaft supported in a bearing box, and an opening
roller being arranged on an end of the shaft which projects
from the bearing box for rotation with said shaft, the opening
roller extending over the bearing box in a manner forming a
cavity that is sealed toward the outside with an annular sealing
gap, wherein the opening roller comprises a base member and
a ring detachably secured thereto, the outer periphery of said
ring being provided with a fitting, and wherein external access
to said cavity is blocked by said ring.
4,435,954
nBER OPENING DEVICE IN OPEN-END SPINNING
UNIT
Kazuo SeikI, Kariya; Kozo Motobayashl, Alchi; Toahio Yo-
shizawa, Chiryu; YoshiakI Yoshlda, and KeUi Onoue, both of
Toyota, all of Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Toyoda
Jidoihokki Scisakusho, Aichi, Japan
FUed Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,443
Gaims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 27, 1980, 55-185105
Int. G.3 DOIH 7/882. 7/892
US. G. 57—408 6 Claims
1. A fiber opening device for use in an open-end spinning
unit, comprising a generally hollow cylindrical casing hisving a
rotatable combing roller mounted therein, said casing having a
fiber inlet pori, a trash exit pori, and a fiber feeding channel
pori through which a stream of opened fibers is discharged
from said casing responsive to rotation of said combing roller,
said ports being disposed in tandem spaced-apart relation along
the interior periphery of said casing, and each of said ports
providing an upstream edge and a downstream edge of the port
respectively extending substantially across said interior periph-
ery, and an elongated edging member of wear-resistant mate-
rial attached to at least one of said port edges and substantially
extending only along the length thereof.
1. A method of open-end spinning a novelty yarn in an
open-end spinning apparatus having a fiber separating device,
a twisting device, an elongated thin member, and a fiber trans-
pori section interconnecting the separating and twisting de-
vices, said method comprising the steps of: effecting controlled
formation of effects in the fiber transport section by effecting
controlled reciprocating introduction of the elongated member
into the fiber flow within the transport section so that it at all
times makes an angle of less than about 43* with respect to the
direction of fiber flow; and intermittently passing those effects
to the twisting device by reciprocally withdrawing the elon-
gated member from the fiber flow so that it at all times makes
an angle of less than about 43'.
5. Apparatus for spinning novelty yam comprising an open-
end spinning device including:
a fiber separating device;
a twisting device;
a fiber transpori section disposed between said separating
and twisting devices, said fiber transport section compris-
ing a tubular member defined by a wall, and through
which the fiber flows in a predetermined direction from
the fiber separating device to the twisting device; and
means for effecting controlled formation of effects in the
transport section and for occasionally passing the formed
effects to the twisting device, said means comprising: an
elongated member having a length long enough to extend
from one side of said tubular member wall to another
portion of said tubular member wall; and means for pivot-
ally mounting, for pivotal movement about an axis, said
elongated member at a first side of said tubular member
wall so that said elongated member has a free end extend-
ing angularly from said first side of said tubular member
wall generally in the predetermined direction of fiber
flow, and so that it is moveable from a collecting position
wherein said free end thereof engages, or substantially
engages, another side of said tubular member wall to
coUect effects between said free end and said waU, to a
512
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
release position wherein said free end is spaced from said
tubular member wall.
4,435,956
BRACELET
Usher Meynuu, 230 Ocean Pkwy., E3, BrooUyn, N.Y. 11218
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,420
Int. a.3 F16G 13/00
U.S. a. 59—79.1 6 Claims
1. A bracelet, comprising
two spring elements arranged in two rows extending in
direction of elongation; and
a plurality of connecting elements arranged in overlapping
relationship and connecting said spring elements in a
direction which is transverse to said direction of elonga-
tion and fixedly connected with said spring elements.
enclosure opposite the fuel outlet orifice, its interior being
in communication with the supply line downstream from
the principal regulator and carrying on its free end a valve
tending to close the fuel outlet orifice when said bellows
expands;
a second bellows, longitudinally deformable and containing
no air, located in the second chamber wherein it is at-
tached by one of its ends to the same wall of the enclosure
as the first bellows; and,
a lever passing through the partition to which it is attached
by means of a tight articulated joint and having its free
ends attached to the two bellows by articulated joints such
that the auxiliary regulator maintains the value of the
pressure drop of the fuel at the passage of the principal
regulator essentially proportional to the value of the pres-
sure of the air discharged by the compressor through the
connecting means, as the principal regulator varies within
predetermined limits.
4,435,958
TURBINE BYPASS TURBOFAN WITH MID-TURBINE
REINGESTION AND METHOD OF OPERATING THE
SAME
Garry W. Klees, Mercer Island, Wash., assignor to The Boeing
Company, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,650
Int. a.3 F02K 3/06
U.S. a. 60—204 24 Claims
4,435,957
DEVICE TO REGULATE THE FLOW RATE OF A LIQUID
FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM OF A GAS TURBINE ENGINE
Jean-Luc Fondacci, Montgeron, France, assignor to Societe
Nationale d' Etude et de Construction de Moteurs d' Aviation
(S.N.E.C.M.A.), France
Filed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 338,093
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 19, 1981, 81 00853
Int. a.3 F02C 9/28
MS. a. 60— 39J81 3 Qaims
1. Flow control device for a liquid fuel supply system of a
gas turbine engine equipped with an air compressor, said fuel
supply system being of the type comprising a volumetric fuel
pump, an intake line delivering the fuel from a reservoir to the
pump, a supply line directing the fuel discharged by the pump
to the combustion chamber of the engine, a principal flow
regulator element in the supply line, means to assign specific
values to the passage cross section of said principal regulator
element and a fuel return circuit connecting the supply line
upstream from the principal regulator with the intake line,
wherein said flow control device is an auxiliary regulator
comprising:
a tight enclosure divided into a first chamber and a second
chamber by a tight, transverse separating partition, the
first chamber being in the return circuit of the fuel and
also containing a fuel inlet orifice and a fuel outlet orifice;
means connecting the second chamber with a selected
stage of the compressor;
a first bellows longitudinally deformable and located in the
first chamber, fastened by one of its ends to a wall of the
14. In a supersonic jet engine adapted to cruise at supersonic
speeds at a relatively high efficiency, to operate with high
turbine inlet temperatures for high power operation, and to
cruise subsonically with a relatively low sr>ecific fuel consump-
tion, said engine comprising:
a. a housing structure having an upstream inlet end to re-
ceive intake air, and a downstream exhaust end to dis-
charge jet exhaust,
b. an air inlet arranged to receive intake air at subsonic
velocity and also to receive intake air at supersonic veloci-
ties and reduce said air to subsonic velocity,
c. a compressor mounted in said housing rearwardly of said
inlet and arranged to compress air flowing into said inlet,
said compressor having a first compressor fan section and
a second compressor section, each having an inlet end and
an outlet end arranged to operate between a maximum
compression ratio and a minimum compression ratio,
d. means defining a fan duct positioned rearwardly of said
fan section,
e. means defining a combustion chamber mounted in said
housing downstream of said compressor to receive com-
pressed air therefrom,
f. fuel injection and ignition means in said combustion cham-
ber arranged to bum fuel in airflow from the compressor
and provide a gaseous flow from said combustion cham-
ber,
g. a turbine mounted in said housing rearwardly of said
combustion chamber and arranged to receive said gaseous
flow from the combustion chamber, said turbine having a
flrst stage operatively connected to the compressor sec-
ond section, and a second stage operatively connected to
the compressor first section adapted to receive gaseous
flow from said first stage, each of said first and second
turbine stage having a predetermined cross-sectional noz-
1
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
513
zle area through which said gaseous flow passes to pass
rearwardly through a primary exhaust passageway,
h. an exhaust nozzle to receive gaseous flow from said tur-
bine and exhaust said flow to produce a thrust,
i. turbine bypass means to receive flow from a location
downstream of said compressor as bypass flow, to direct
said bypass flow along a path bypassing said turbine first
stage and exhaust said bypass flow to pass through said
turbine second stage,
j. bypass valve means to control the amount of flow by-
passed through said turbine bypass means,
k. engine control means operatively connected to said fuel
injection and ignition means and to said bypass valve
means, in a manner to control the amount of fuel directed
to said fuel injection and ignition means and to control
said bypass valve means in a manner to control the amount
of bypass flow through said turbine bypass means,
a method of operating said jet engine, said method comprising:
controlling the amount of fuel directed to said fuel injection
and ignition means and controlling said bypass valve means in
a manner to control the amount of bypass flow through said
turbine bypass means so that said bypass valve means is at a
more open position at higher engine thrust settings where
higher temperatures are created in said combustion chamber,
and at a more closed position at lower engine thrust settings
where lower temperatures are created in said combustion
chamber, in a manner that there is substantially constant cor-
rected gaseous flow into said turbine, and said bypass flow is
directed through said turbine second suge, said corrected flow
being measured according to the formula:
corrected gaseous now= >fVfl,/6,
where:
W = Total Mass Flow Rate in lbs. per second
d/=Observed temperature (absolute) divided by standard
temperature (518.67* R)
5, = Observed pressure divided by standard pressure (21 16.22
Ibs./sq. ft.) whereby during subsonic cruise said engine can
operate at a relatively low specific fuel consumption with high
compression ratio and low combustion exit temperature, in a
condition where said valve bypass means is at a substantially
closed position, during high power acceleration mode, said
engine can operate at high combustion exit temperatures in a
condition where said valve bypass means is in a more open
position to maintain constant corrected flow through said
turbine to satisfy the turbine requirements, and during superson-
ic cruise mode the engine can operate efficiently at relatively
high combustion exit temperatures.
compression space and said second wall portion of said
cylinder, said second compression space being empty
during operation of the engine except for the presence of
compressible fluid communicated into said second com-
pression space from said first compression space.
4 435 960
HYDRAULIC POWER BOOSTERS FOR VEHICLE
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
Glyn P. R. Fair, Warwickshire, England, assignor to Lucas
Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,260
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 3, 1980,
8000200; Feb. 20, 1980, 8005727
Int. a.J B60T 13/00
U.S. a. 60-547.1 6 Qaims
4,435 959
HOT-GAS PISTON-TYPE ENGINE AND USE THEREOF
IN HEATING, COOLING AND POWER PLANTS
Ernst Mohr, Murten, Switzerland, assignor to Fides Treuhand
GmbH, Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jim. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,787
Qaims priority, application European Pat. Off., Jul. 1, 1980,
80810217
Int. Q.^ FOIB 29/08
U.S. Q. 60—512 28 Qaims
1. A hot-gas piston-type engine comprising
at least one cylinder having a first wall portion defining a
first compression space and a second wall portion defining
a second compression space, said second compression
space being in fluid communication with said first com-
pression space;
a reciprocable piston disposed in said first compression space
for reciprocating movement therein and for contact with
compressible fluid in said first compression space;
crank means connected to said piston for converting recipro-
cating piston motion to rotational motion;
inlet means for intake of fluid into said cylinder;
outlet means for exhaust of fluid from said cylinder; and
heat exchanger means for contact with a heat transfer me-
dium, said heat exchanger means comprising said second
1. A pedal-operated hydraulic power booster for a vehicle
hydraulic system comprising a pedal, a housing having an inlet
port for connection to a source of hydraulic fluid under pres-
sure, an exhaust port for connection to a reservoir for hydrau-
lic fluid, a stepped bore having axially spaced first, second and
third portions, said first and second portions being of different
diameter, a boost piston of stepped outline for actuating a
master cylinder assembly, said boost piston having first, second
and third portions of at last two different diameters working in
said first, second and third portions of said bore respectively,
said second portion of said piston being of smallest diameter,
and said first and third portions of said piston being arranged at
opposite ends of said second portion of said piston, a seal
carried by said first portion of said piston for slidable sealing
engagement with said first portion of said bore, a seal in said
housing located in said second portion of said bore and in
which said second portion of said piston has a slidable sealing
engagement, a seal carried by said third portion of said piston
for slidable sealing engagement in said third portion of said
bore, said first portions being disposed closer than said second
portions to said pedal, means defining in said housing a first
high pressure chamber through which hydraulic fluid is ap-
plied to said boost piston, means defining in said housing a
second high pressure chamber communicating with said inlet
port, means defining in said housing a reservoir chamber com-
municating with said exhaust port, and a control valve opera-
514
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
ble in response to an efTort applied to said pedal for controlling
communication between said first and second high pressure
chambers and between said first high pressure chamber and
said reservoir chamber, said first high pressure chamber being
defined at least in part between said first portion of said piston
and a shoulder at a first step between said first portion of said
bore and said second portion of said bore, said reservoir cham-
ber being defined at last in part between said third portion of
said piston and a shoulder at a second step between said second
portion of said bore and said third portion of said bore in which
the said third portion of said piston works, and said second
high pressure chamber being defined between said second
portion of said piston and the end of said bore which is remote
from said master cylinder.
4,435,961
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY
SYNCHRONIZING MULTIPLE ENGINES
Glenn D. Stewart, 210 Bay view Ave., Masiapequa, N.Y. 11758
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,063
Int. a.J F02B 73/00
U.S. a. 60—719 16 Cbdnu
4,435,962
REFRIGERATING APPARATUS
TaketMhi Mochizuki, Shiniizu; Kazuya Matiuo, 11>araki; Mituo
Kudo, Shiniizu; Akin Aral, Ibarakl; Junichi Yunada, Itami;
Keizi Shone, Toyonaka; Masaaki Aoki, Amagaiaki; Maiaichi
Ohmori, Hachioji, and Gcnichiro Niihi, Saganihara, all of
Japan, auignora to Shin Meiwa Industry Co., Ltd. and Hita-
chi, Ltd., both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,192
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 20, 1980, 55-82871
Int. C\? F25B 7/00. 41/00
UJS. a. 62—175 4 aaims
1. A refrigerating apparatus comprising a closed refrigerant
circuit including a first compressor, a condenser, a first pres-
sure reducing means, a first evaporator, a second pressure
reducing means and a second evaporator connected together
through lines in the indicated order, said first evaporator is
located in a cooling air passage on an upstream side thereof
with respect to a direction of an air current flowing through
said air passage, said second evaporator is located in the cool-
ing air passage on a downstream side thereof, and
a second compressor connected to said refrigerant circuit so
that gaseous components of refrigerant in the line between
an outlet of the first evaporator and the second pressure
reducing means is lead to a suction side of the second
compressor, a discharge line of the second compressor is
in communication with a discharge line of said first com-
pressor.
1. In an apparatus for synchronizing the operation of at least
a slave engine with that of a master engine,
manual and engine throttles movably connected with and
for adjusting the operation of each of said engines,
servo means operable to adjust said slave engine throttle to
synchronize it with the operation of said master engine
throttle when the master and slave engines operate asyn-
chronously,
and means connecting said slave engine throttle with its
respective manual throttle including operable means con-
necting said slave engine manual throttle with said slave
engine throttle for operation of said slave engine throttle
directly in response to the operation of said respective
manual throttle and moving means releasably moving said
operable means and connected with and between said
servo means and said operable means to move to adjust
said operable means and said slave engine throttle in re-
sponse to the operation of said servo means,
and resiliently yieldable means connected between said
moving means and said servo means and applying a prede-
termined resistance to the movement of said moving
means in response to the operation of said slave engine
manual throttle until the force applied by said slave engine
manual throttle exceeds said predetermined force thereby
enabling said slave engine and its throttle to be indepen-
dently manually overcontrolled and adjusted by the
movement of its respective manual throttle without the
application of anything more.
4,435,963
MEANS FOR RETAINING JEWELERY FOR
INTERLOCKING WITH PREOSE PREFORMS
Jhono Shigeru, Loa Angeles, Calif., assignor to Tempo G, Los
Angeles, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 146,488, May 5, 1980, Pat. No.
4,283,831. This appUcation Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,287
Int. a.J A44C 15/00: B65D 45/32
U.S. a. 63—18 49 Qalms
1. A cast frame characterized by an upper face having a
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SIS
large central hole for exposing an object, a lower face having
a large central hole, an inner transverse circumferential wall
containing a transverse critical dimension inner wall portion
adjacent the upper face, the circumference of the critical di-
mension inner wall being only slightly larger than the corre-
sponding circumference of the object to be retained within it,
and an annular groove in the inner transverse circumferential
wall and beneath the critical dimension inner wall, whereby
the improvement is an anti-rotation means for preventing
rotational movement of different objects of a circular configu-
ration and approximately the same size in the cast frame, the
anti-rotation means comprising:
a. a notch in said inner transverse circumferential wall and
extending into said critical dimension inner wall;
b. an anti-rotation pin placed into said notch such that the
pin extends into the area of the critical dimension inner
wall but does not extend into said annular groove; and
c. said anti-roution pin having a press fit between the object
and said notch.
4,435,964
AUTOMATIC WASHING MACHINE FOR SHOES
Nobuo Misawa, 2749 Kawi^iri, Shlroyamacho Tsukuigun
Kanagawaken, Japan
FUad Aug. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 405.150
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 27, 1981. 56-134701;
Feb. 19, 1982. 57-25765; May 24. 1982. 57-86668
Int. a.J D06F 9/00, 25/00
U.S. a. 68—19.2 13 Claims
dehydrating tub, the driving means for said brushing
sections, the driving means for said head section and said
water supplying and discharging means,
wherein an automatic wuhing operation for shoes is carried
out in sequence through a first suge for covering and closing
said water tub by moving down said head section by said
control means after shoes have been mounted on said inner
brushes of the brushing sections, a second sUge for supplying
water for washing into said water tub, a third sUge for brush-
ing the shoes by said brushing sections, a fourth sUge for
discharging water for washing from said water tub and supply-
ing water for cleansing into the water tub, a fifth sUge for
discharging water for cleansing, a sixth sUge for centrifugally
dehydrating water from the shoes by routing said dehydrating
tub and said brushing sections, a seventh suge for supplying air
for drying from said drying means into said dehydrating tub
after dehydration, and an eighth stage for moving up said head
section to expose said brushing sections.
4,435.965
APPARATUS FOR TREATING A POROUS, ABSORBENT
MATERIAL WITH A FOAMABLE CHEMICAL
COMPOSITION
SasscviUe, Roland E.; Joseph S. Chappell, and Daniel J. Corco-
ran, Jr., all of Greensboro. N.C., assignors to Qba-Gcigy
Corporation, Ardsley. N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 246.320, Mar. 23, 1981,
abandonad. ThU appUcation Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337.856
Int. a.i D06B 1/06
U.S. CL 68—205 R 3 Claims
1. An automatic washing machine for shoes comprising
(a) a water tub having an open upper side,
(b) a dehydrating tub which is roUUbly disposed in said
water tub,
(c) an external shell which houses said water tub,
(d) a head section which is provided above said external
shell and vertically moves to open and close the opening
of said water tub,
(e) a water supplying and discharging means which supplies
water into and discharges it from said water tub,
(0 at least two brushing sections which are arranged adja-
cent each other in said dehydrating tub, each brushing
section having an inner brush which is made so that a shoe
may be mounted thereon and an outer brush which is
arranged to surround said inner brush so that said outer
brush comes in contact with the external surface of said
shoe mounted on said inner brush,
(g) a drying means which is provided on said head section to
supply air for drying into said water tub,
(h) a driving means for routing said dehydrating tub at a
high speed,
(i) a driving means for alternately moving up and down the
inner and outer brushes of said brushing section in two
different directions,
(j) a driving means for vertically moving said head section,
and
(k) a control means for controlling the driving means for said
1. An apparatus for treating a porous, absorbent material
with a liquid, foamable chemical composition containing a
modifying compound with which it is desired to treat the
material, which chemical composition is capable of being
formed by forcing a gu through the chemical composition,
said apparatus comprising:
a container for containing the foamable chemical composi-
tion;
rouuble roll means positioned at least partially in said con-
tainer for transferring the foamable chemical composition
out of said container;
a doctor blade having a receiving end adjacent the periphery
of said roll means for receiving the foamable chemic^
composition from said roll means, a discharge end below
said receiving end for discharging foam onto the material
to be treated, and an intermediate porous portion between
said receiving and discharge ends and extending acrou the
doctor blade;
a gas chamber having an inlet for introducing the gas into
said gas chamber, said gu chamber being positioned be-
neath said doctor blade and having an opening therein
opening against said porous portion for directing the gu
from said gu chamber through said porous portion; and
material feed means for feeding the material to be treated
put said discharge end of said doctor blade;
whereby the foamable chemical composition is transported
by gravity over said receiving end of said doctor blade,
thence over said porous portion to cause foaming of the
S16
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
foamable chemical composition by means of gas being
expelled from said gas chamber through said porous por-
tion, and thence over said discharge end of said doctor
blade and onto the material to be treated.
within itself an unsymmetrical opening adapted to remov-
ably receive a key-operable lock core,
4,435,966
MOTORCYCLE SADDLE BAG LOCK
Clark E. Craig, Rockford, 111., assignor to Keystone Consoli-
dated Industries, Inc., Peoria, 111.
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 376,182
Int. a.3 B65D 55/14: E05C 5/00
U.S. a. 70—161 5 Claims
1. A latch and lock mechanism for use in combination with
an open container of the type having a lid cooperating with the
open container, said lock mechanism comprising:
a fixed cylinder for projecting through a container wall
adjacent an edge cooperative with the lid;
a housing cooperative with the fixed cylinder on the inside
of the wall to retain the Fixed cylinder in position in the
wall;
a shutter mounted in the housing and retained by the housing
for limited movement transverse to the axis of the fixed
cylinder and pivotal movement about an axis parallel to
the edge of the container;
a key actuated rotatable plug in the cylinder, said plug
mounted for rotatable movement and axial movement
along the axis of the cylinder, said plug including means
engaging the shutter for driving the shutter transversely in
response to rotatable movement and pivotally in response
to axial movement;
biasing means for biasing the shutter about the pivotal axis;
a strike on the lid for receiving the shutter and retaining the
shutter; and
said housing including a land cooperative with the shutter
only when the shutter is shifted to a maximum trans-
versely position toward the edge to thereby prevent piv-
otal movement of the shutter and release of the shutter
from the strike.
4,435,967
DOORKNOB
Walter E. Best, and William R. Foshee, both of Indianapolis,
Ind., assignors to Best Lock Corporation, Indianapolis, Ind.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 270,825, Jnn. 5, 1981, Pat No.
434,821, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 136,746,
Apr. 2, 1980, abandoned. This application Mar. 25, 1982, Ser.
No. 361,989
Int. a? E05B 63/10
VJS. a. 70—224 10 Claims
1. A doorknob, comprising
a body having a hand-hold portion and a neck, and mount-
ableln a predetermined orientation on a knob sleeve or the
like,
said hand-hold portion being hollow and having a large
circular end face opening,
a face plate rotatably mounted in said opening and defming
said knob being formed axially inward of said face plate with
a notch in position to be engaged by an eccentric portion
of a lock core mounted in said face plate so as to key the
face plate and knob against relative rotation.
4,435,968
APPARATUS FOR CORRUGATING PIPES
Harald Roderburg, Langenhagen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Kabel-und Metallwerke GutehofThungshiitte Aktien-
gesellschaft, Hanover, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,619
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 2,
1980, 3029447; Aug. 2, 1980, 3029448
Int. a.3 B21D 15/04
U.S. a. 72—77 18 Qaims
1. In an apparatus for the corrugation of tube of plastically
deformable material through which the tube is continuously
passed in a direction of passage, comprising a comigator roll-
ing bushing having an inside surface formed with a deforma-
tion rib which is helical (when annular parallel corrugations
are to be produced on the tube) of more than one thread, or,
respectively, with at least one deformation rib acting on suc-
cessive points viewed in the longitudinal direction of the tube
(when helical corrugations are to be produced in the tube), said
corrugator rolling bushing being supported for free rotation in
a rotatable corrugator head, the inside diameter of the corruga-
tor rolling bushing being larger than the diameter of the tube to
be corrugated and the comigator rolling bushing being sup-
ported eccentrically to the tube, the improvement wherein
the ratio of the inner diameter of the inside diameter defuied
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
517
by the deformation rib to the outside diameter of the
corrugated tube in the region of a corrugation valley
thereof is n:l where n is an even integer, with a maximum
deviation of 3%.
4,435,969
SPIN-FLANGER FOR BEVERAGE CONTAINERS
C. Rou Nichols, Golden, and Edward C. Miller, Broomfleld,
both of Colo., auignors to Ball Corporation, Muncie, Ind.
FUed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,446
Int. a.) B21D 19/12
VJS. a. 72—126 11 ClalBU
1. A roller for flanging canbodies comprising:
an annular arcuate forming surface;
a first frustoconical slack-removing and supporting surface
integrally connected to said arcuate forming surface and
forming an outside angle of from about 60* to about 70*
with respect to the central axis of the rotor; and
an annular curved surface with a radius of less than about
0.300 inches and greater than about 0.060 inches for pro-
viding clearance of the canbody, said annular curved
surface being integrally connected to said first frustoconi-
cal surface.
4,435,970
ROLL CHANGING DEVICE FOR ROLLING MILL
Teruo Sekiya, Takahagi, Japan, assignor to Hitachi, Ltd., To*
kyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,283
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 18, 1980, 55-81423
Int. a.i B21B Sl/10
U.S. a. 72—239 8 Claims
41 MA
1. A roll changing device for rolling mills, comprising:
a mill stand having a housing, and upper and lower roll sets
constituting a pair, each including a work roll, an interme-
diate roll and a back up roll with said intermediate roll
disposed between said work roll and said back up roll;
work roll changing rails and intermediate roll changing rails
spaced vertically from said work roll changing rails, re-
spectively, and adapted for mounting said work rolls and
said intermediate rolls during the roll change;
said roll changing rails being disposed in said housing;
a stationary floor being provided at the front side of said
rolling mill at a fixed distance from said rolling mill and
having rails mounted thereon;
delivery rails di:>posed between said rolling mill and said
stationary floor, and adapted to deliver and receive said
rolls to and from said roll changing rails;
a vertically movable floor device provided between said
rolling mill and said stationary floor, said floor device
having rails;
a roll changing truck carrying said delivery rails mounted
thereon and movably mounted on said rails of said verti-
cally movable floor device; said work and intermediate
roll changing rails being common in size with and parallel
to said delivery rails, and said rails on said stationary floor
being common in size with and parallel to said floor de-
vice rails; and
said vertically movable floor device being vertically mov-
able respectively to a first position where said delivery
rails on said roll changing truck join and align with said
work roll changing rails, to a second position where said
delivery rails join and align with said intermediate roll
changing rails, and to a third position where said floor
device rails join and align with said rails on said stationary
floor.
4,435,971
CONTROLLED DEFLECnON ROLL WITH CONTROL
ARRANGEMENT
Wolfgang Schuwerk, KIsslegg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaslgnor
to Eacher Wyss AktiengeaellMhaft, Zurich, Switxarland
FUed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334.644
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 15,
1981, 3101115
Int. a.} B21B 29/00
U.S. a. 72—243 3 Claims
M SO n
1. A controlled deflection roll intended to cooperate with a
counter roll, comprising:
a roll shell having opposed end regions;
a roll support having opposed end regions;
a plurality of support elements interposed between said roll
shell and said roll support for supporting said roll shell
upon said roll support;
predetermined ones of said support elements being arranged
in respective commonly controlled groups;
at least one of said commonly controlled groups of support
elements containing at least two support elements effec-
tive in opposite directions;
said at least two support elements which are effective in
opposite directions of said one commonly controlled
group of support elements being arranged at one of the
end regions of said roll support and said roll shell;
said at least two support elements which are effective in
opposite directions being spaced from one another in
order to exert a bending moment at said one end region of
said roll shell in order to counteract edge compression
between the controlled deflection roll and the counter
roll;
one of said at least two oppositely effective support elements
being located closer to an outer edge of said one end
region of the roll shell than the other support element; and
1040 O.G.— 21
318
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
" "^^r^r^t ii?H iT 'ff'^"* ewcntijdly the-*^ blank, so that the punch second extension is aligned with
pre«ure force to said at least two support elements whfclo^ but spaced from the die throat, and the third punch exten-
are effective in opposite directions, so that the forces
applied by said two support elements essentially compen-
sate one another, but by virtue of the different mutual
spacing of said two oppositely effective support elements
from said outer end of the roll shell there is applied a
bending moment to the roll shell counteracting edge com-
pression.
4,435,972
PROCESS FOR FORMING INTEGRAL SPINDLE-AXLE
TUBES
Joacph A. Simon, 17755 Masonic BlTd^ Fhuer, Mich. 48026
FUed Jon. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 393,032
Int a. J B21C 25/08. 37/16
VS. a. 72—256 6 Oaimi
1. A process for extruding an integral spindle and axle tube,
comprising the steps of:
positioning a relatively short, tubular blank within an open
ended, tubular die having an inlet end through which the
blank is inserted and an opposite extrusion end formed by
an annular, inwardly extending, continuous shoulder
forming a die extrusion throat through which the blank is
extruded, and with the throat diameter being larger than
the inner diameter of the blank;
inserting a punch into the die inlet end, with the punch
closely fitted within the die and having an annular shoul-
der engaged against the free end of the blank, and having
a first punch extension closely fitted within the interior
wall of the blank, and having a second punch extension of
a smaller diameter than the blank interior diameter ex-
tended through part of the blank and die throat, and hav-
ing a third punch extension, which is formed on the punch
co-axial with and extending from the second punch exten-
sion, but of a smaller diameter than the second punch
extension, with the punch shoulder and punch extensions
being located co-axially with each other and also with the
blank and die throat, and with the second punch extension
being located between the first and third punch exten-
sions;
next moving the punch towards the die throat so that the
punch shoulder rams the blank towards the die throat, and
simultaneously aligns its second punch extension within
the die throat to thereby extrude the lead end of the blank
through the annular space between said second punch
extension and the die throat to thereby form one thickened
end of the metal tube;
continuing moving the punch so that the first punch exten-
sion aligns with the die throat to thereby extrude the blank
through the annular space between the first punch exten-
sion and the throat to form a relatively thin wall metal
tube middle portion;
then removing the punch from the die, and inserting a sec-
ond tubular blank within the die in full end to end contact
with the trailing end of the partially extruded blank;
reinserting the punch in the die with its punch shoulder
engaging the trailing end of the second blank, and with the
punch first extension closely fitted within the second
sion is positioned within the die throat;
moving the punch in the direction of the die throat to ex-
trude a portion of the first, partially extruded, blank
through the annular space between the die throat and
third punch extension to form a relatively thick ring sec-
tion adjacent the trailing end of the partially extruded
blank, and thereafter proceeding with the step of moving
the punch so that the second punch extension moves
within the die throat and the second blank pushes the
remainder of the first, partially extruded, blank through
the annular space between the second punch extension
and the die throat to form an inwardly thickened end
portion on the trailing end of the first blank, and also,
simultaneously extrudes an inwardly thickened end por-
tion on the leading end of the second blank;
then removing the extruded first blank and continuing and
repeating the cycle on the second and successive blanks;
on each removed extruded blank, swaging radially inwardly,
to a uniform outside diameter which is less than the ex-
truded tube external diameter, both the thick ring section
and the tube trailing end portion, i.e.. the portion located
between the thick ring section and the trailing end of the
tube;
then swaging radially inwardly only said tube trailing end
portion until its internal diameter is about the same as the
thick ring section internal diameter and its outside diame-
ter is less than the thick ring section outside diameter, to
thereby form an integral spindle and axle tube.
4,435,973
METHOD OF PRODUCING RING<«HAPED METAL
PARTS
Shigeo Nakazawa, Yokohama, and Shintaro Sato, Fi^iiawa, both
of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama,
Japan
FUed No?. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 325,052
Int. a.3 B21D 28/00. 28/14. 28/24
VS. a. 72—327 8 Claims
1. A method of producing a plundity of identical ring-
shaped or ring-like metal parts having inner and outer periph-
eries, comprising the steps of:
(a) applying a compression force to a blank of a metal mate-
rial, which is in the shape of a solid rod having an outer
periphery corresponding to the inner periphery of the
metal parts to be produced, in a longitudinal direction of
said blank so as to upset an end portion of said blank until
said end portion transforms into a laterally expanded
portion having a side periphery corresponding to the
outer periphery of said metal parts and a length corre-
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
519
sponding to the thickness of said metal parts, said applying
step including the sub-steps of inserting said blank into a
fitting through-hole formed in a first die which has a flat
die face and is formed with a recess in said die face, said
recess bieng coaxial with said through-hole and having a
depth corresponding to the thickness of said metal parts
and an outer periphery corresponding to the outer periph-
ery of said metal parts, such that said end portion of said
blank longitudinally protrudes into said recess and comes
into contact with a flat die face of a second die which is
arranged opposite to said first die and held stationary with
said die face thereof in close contact with said die face of
said first die such that the second die face, recess of the
first die, punch and through-hole form a^losed cavity,
said first die being provided with a punch which is slid-
ably fitted in said through-hole to come into contact with
the other end of said blank, and moving said punch toward
said second die to longitudinally compress said end por-
tion of said blank within said closed cavity against said die
face of said second die until a space provided by a periph-
eral region of said recess and defmed between the bottom
of said recess and said die face of said second die is com-
pletely filled with a laterally expanded portion of said end
portion of said blank;
(b) subjecting said laterally expanded portion to shearing
along a plane defining the outer periphery of said blank
thereby parting said laterally expanded portion into a
peripheral portion, which is one of said metal parts, and a
central portion which remains as an end portion of the
blank shortened by the step (a); and
(c) repeating the steps (a) and (b) by using the shortened
blank remaining after the step (b) in place of said blank in
the initial step (a),
wherein said second die is formed with a through-hole
which is coaxial with and identical in cross-sectional shape
with said through-hole in said first die and is provided
with a plunger slideably fitted into said through-hole
thereof, the step (a) being performed by keeping an end
face of said plunger flush with said die face of said second
die to serve as part of said die face of said second die so
that the end face of said plunger and the die face of the
second die present a substantially planar surface to the
recess of the first die, the step (b) being performed by
forcing said punch to move toward said second die while
said first and second dies are kept in the state at the end of
the step (a) thereby thrusting the blank except said later-
ally expanded portion and simultaneously moving said
plunger in compliance with the movement of said punch
until the end face of said punch which is in contact with
said blank enters said through-hole in said second die.
fluid, said second position being spaced from said first
position a predetermined distance;
(c) supplying the signal produced by said sound sensor into
a signal analyzer;
(d) making an autocorrelation analysis of said signal in said
signal analyzer;
(e) determining a characteristic propagation time difference
from a characteristic maximum of such autocorrelation
function which has been determined by said autocorrelf •
tion analysis and which propagation time difference corre-
sponds to the difference of the propagation time of the
sound wave which has passed directly between said leak
and said sound sensor and the propagation time of the
sound wave which is has passed from said leak via said
sound reflector to said sound sensor;
(0 determining the distance between the positions of said
leak and said sound reflector from said obtained propaga-
tion time difference.
4,435,975
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CUTTING A FLAT
SURFACE ON A METALLIC MEMBER
Robert M. Edwyd, Jr., The Woodlands, Tex., assignor to J B
Development Corporation, The Woodlands, Tex.
FUed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,746
Int. a^ GOIN 3/40
VS. a. 73—81 18 Otims
4,435,974
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LOCATING
LEAKAGES IN PIPES AND SIMILAR CONDUITS
Helmut V. Fuchs, WeU; Gerold Schupp, and CarNAlexander
Voigtsberger, both of Stuttgart, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Frannhofer-GcscUschaft zur Foerderung dcr
Angewandten Forschung E.V., Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Not. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,298
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 4,
1980,3045660
Int a^ GOIM 3/24
VS. a. 73— 40 J A 12 Claims
1. A method for finding the position of leaks in a fluid con-
veying pipe-line such as in a water supply networks, compris-
ing the steps of:
(a) attaching a sound sensor at a first position in said pipe-line
such that said sound sensor is in direct contact with said
fluid;
(b) attaching a sound reflector at a second position in said
pipe-line such that said sound reflector is in direct contact
with said fluid and such that said sound sensor and said
sound reflector are coupled acousticaUy through said
1. Apparatus for cutting a flat surface on and testing the
hardness of a metallic member comprising:
frame means including clamping means on which said metal-
lic member may be placed for clamping said metallic
member in a firmly fixed positon;
tester head means mounted on said frame means in a fixed
position directly above said clamping means;
a broach frame mounted on said frame means for movement
between a first position below said tester head means,
above said metallic member and engageable by said metal-
lic member and against which said metallic member may
be firmly clamped by said clamping means and a second
position away from said tester head means and not engage-
able by said metallic member when on said clamping
means, allowing said metallic member to be firmly
520
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
clamped against said tester head means by said clamping
means;
a broach blade having cutting means thereon carried by said
broach frame for reciprocal movement, when said broach
frame is in said first position, between a first terminal
position and a second terminal position for cutting a flat
surface on said metallic member when clamped against
said broach frame; and
power means mounted on said frame means and attached to
said broach blade for moving said broach blade between
said first and second terminal positions.
4,435,977
METHOD FOR LOCATING LOW RESISTIVITY PAY
SANDS USING WELL LOGS
Luke S. Gounuy, RockwaU, Tex., aasignor to MobU OU Corpo-
ratloii. New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 339,963
Int a.} E21B 49/00
U.S. a. 73—152 13 aaims
4,435,976
APPARATUS FOR MEASURING THE HARDNESS
PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS
Robert M. Edward, Jr., The Woodlands, Tex., assignor to J B
Deyeiopment Corporation, The Woodlands, Tex.
FUed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,747
Int a.3 GOIN 3/44
U A a 73-83 12 Claims
1. Improved apparatus for measuring the hardness properties
of materials comprising a frame for supporting said apparatus
and the material to be tested; a tester head assembly mounted
on said frame for applying predetermined measuring forces to
said material and a clamp assembly mounted on said frame for
supporting said material and for applying a clamping force to
clamp said material against said tester head assembly prior to
said apphcation of said predetermined measuring forces; said,
tester head assembly including housing means attached to said
frame; a penetrator assembly carried by said housing, including
an axially reciprocal penetrator shaft at the lower end of which
is a penetrator member for contact with said material; operat-
ing means for applying a first predetermined force and a sec-
ond and greater predetermined force to said penetrator shaft
for indentation of said material by said penetrator member and
means for measuring the difference of indentation of said mate-
rial by said first and second predetermined forces; wherein the
improvement comprises:
an electronic load cell for measuring said first and second
predetermined forces attached between and connecting a
first shaft portion, being the lower end of said penetrator
shaft, and a second shaft portion, being the upper end of
said penetrator shaft; said housing means comprising a
lower housing portion in which said penetrator shaft is
carried, an intermediate housing portion and an upper
housing portion, said operating means including first and
second piston members carried in said upper and interme-
diate bousing portions, respectively, and responsive to
fluid pressures applied thereto for applying said first and
second predetermined forces to said penetrator shaft.
11. A method of locating potential low water cut hydrocar*
bon producing regions of a sand formation comprising the
steps of:
producing a first log containing permeability values for the
formation along the length of a borehole extending into
the formation;
producing a second log containing porosity values for the
formation along said length;
producing a third log of specific surface area values of the
formation along said length from said first and second log;
and
identifying potential low water cut hydrocarbon producing
regions along said length of the formation using said third
log.
4,435,978
HOT WIRE ANEMOMETER FLOW METER
John J. Glatz, 24351 Spartan, Miaaion Vicjo, Calif. 92691
FUed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,261
Int a.J E21B 47/00; GOIF 1/68
U.S. a. 73—155 14 ciaima
s^
1. An improved flow meter device for measuring flow
through a conduit comprising:
an elongate member sized to be received within a flow
conduit;
plural struts pivotaUy mounted to said elongate member
extensible radially outward from said elongate member to
contact said flow conduit and anchor said elongate mem-
ber at a desired location within said flow conduit;
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
32 1
means for selectively radially extending and retracting said
plural struts from said elongate member; and
plural anemometers mounted along the length of struts for
generating a variable electrical signal in response to the
amount of flow medium passing across said anemometers.
4,435,979 '
APPARATUS FOR TESTING VALVE ACTUATORS
WUUam H. GUgore, York, Pa., aaaignor to AUis-Chalmera Cor-
poration, MUwaukee, Wii.
FUed Jul. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 394,855
Int a.3 GOIM 79/00
U.S.a.73— 168 4 Claims
4,435,980
PIPE-MOUNTED VALVE-TYPE FLOW METER
Ulrich Schmidt Lahn-Steindorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaaignor
to Firma Rdtelmann A Co., Werdohl, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jon. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 389,971
Ciaima priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 12,
1982, 3200587
lot a.^ GOIF W02
U.S. a. 73-198 20 Claims
i^.v
asC^ ijorr*'
*L ^
:^Mi^<^^
14m.— ^fh^
^ A»
-
"■>»
^A ^* ,
til^
fM-
^isj^^l^
vt^
M
\ 4^
rvW^i ^s^f
^10
V.^J
'**- /B^
■*'•* ^
! 1-
■t7
"=«..
m
-»*,
1. An apparatus for subjecting a test actuator to torque loads
which simulate torque loads experienced by an actuator while
operating a butterfly-type valve between a valve fully opened
position and a valve fully closed position in a fluid conduit
where the torque loads to be simulated include a dynamic
torque load experienced by the actuator by reason of fluid flow
against the valve within the conduit as the valve moves be-
tween fully opened position and fully closed position, and a
seating torque load experienced by the actuator as the valve
moves from a |x>sition at which the valve begins to contact a
valve seat to said fully closed position; the apparatus compris-
ing:
a first mass supported away from a horizontal axis for rota-
tion about said axis; said first mass being of a preselected
weight and displacement from said axis to generate a first
cyclic torque load at said axis proportional to said dy-
namic torque load as said first mass rotates from a first
position corresponding to said valve fully opened position
to a final position corresponding to said valve fully closed
position;
a second mass supported away from a horizontal axis for
rotation about said axis operable to rotate from a rest
position to an end position as said first mass rotates from a
valve seating position corresponding with said position at
which a valve begins to contact a valve seat to said final
position; said second mass being of a preselected weight
and displacement from said axis to generate a second
cyclic torque load such that a sum of said first cyclic
torque load and said second cyclic torque load is propor-
tional to said seating torque load as said first mass rotates
from said valve seating position to said final position;
means for transmitting said first cyclic torque load to said
test actuator with said first cyclic torque load proportion-
ally translated to approximate said dynamic torque load;
and,
means for transmitting said second cyclic torque load to said
test actuator as said first mass rotates from said valve
seating position to said final position with said first cyclic
torque load and said second cyclic torque load summed
and the sum of said loads proportionally translated to
approximate said seating torque load.
1. An apparatus for measuing at least one parameter of a
fluid flowing between two conduit sections, said apparatus
comprising:
a housing connected between said sections and having a
throughgoing main passage communicating therebetween
and an externally open branch passsage extending from
said main passage between said sections, said housing
being formed at the junction of said main branch passages
with a valve seat;
a valve body on said seat formed with a throughgoing and at
least generally T-shaped valve passage having a pair of
arm sections alignable with said main passage and a leg
section aligned with said branch passage,
means for displacing said body relative to said main passage
at said seat between a flow position in which said valve
passage is aligned with said main passage and said fluid
can flow through said main passage between said sections
and a blocking position in which said valve passage is not
aligned with said main passage and fluid cannot flow
through said main passage between said sections, said
valve seat sealing said valve passage from said main pas-
sage in said blocking position
a sensor for said one parameter extending through said
branch passage into said valve passage; and
means for releasably securing said sensor to said housing and
for externally sealing said branch passage.
4,435,981
AIRBORNE GRAVITY SURVEYING
Franklin D. Carton, HiUtowo Townahip, Bucks County, and
WUUam R. Gomert East RocUiiU Townahip, Bucks County,
both of Pa., assignors to Carson HeUcopters, Inc., Perkasie,
Pa.
FUed Oct 9, 1981, Ser. No. 309,906
Int a.' GOIV 7/76
U.S. a. 73—382 R 17 Claims
1. Apparatus for airborne gravity surveying which com-
prises
an airborne vehicle,
means on said vehicle for controlling the flight of said vehi-
cle along a preplotted path at a preselected level respond-
ing to vertical movement including means to move the
vehicle vertically without changing its piteh,
said controlling means comprising a plurality of altimeters
for determining the preselected level for correction of the
S22
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
path of the vehicle and providing signals for recording on
• tape.
said controlling means comprising navigating means provid-
ing signals for recording on a Upe for indicating deviation
of the flight of the vehicle from the preplotted path verti-
cally and horizontally and for correction of the path of the
vehicle,
signal means including gravity meter and magnetic means
providing signals for recording on a tape,
urmmau)
i
•OLL.nnx.ri
I«I.TII1ITC«I
•««nTT
WTIR
coiniioi.
vamonrucii—
niCL UMCITT
UitCR
•■■DMCcroui.
MMTM MomunM
rriniMW
J MIV
1«t«TMl|
0001 aoin
•CMITIVITT
MIlTI
lUHKMUTIOII
OUHMTm
WTtUJTC WMUTm
±z
out
cna
when said angular velocity is equal to said predetermined
second angular velocity after said driving means has been
drcoupled from said shaft, said unbalance measuring means
being adapted to measure unbalance during the first full revo-
lution of said shaft after said shaft reaches said predetermined
second angular velocity, and means for displayi ig the value of
unbalance so measured, said first angular velocity being se-
lected from two or more velocities in response to said angular
velocity measuring means so as to provide the lowest velocity
of said two or more velocities that wUl permit a 2 to 20 second
settling period between decoupling said drivinf means and
activating said unbalance measuring means.
4,435,963
HANDLE STEM FOR A BICYCXE
Keizo Shimano, Sakai, Japan, asiignor to Shlmano Induftrial
Company Limited, Osaka, Japan
FUed Not. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 320,10S
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Not. 22, 1980, 55-168009:
Not. 22, 1980, 55-168010
iBt a.J GOIP 1/02
U.S. a. 73-493 4ci.in.
' ^'*/*V,^*
MO WrTCM
I
mcrn
uM iftaitnmn
means for digitalizing the signals from said gravity meter
means at a predetermined sample rate and at a high order
of sensitivity,
recording means including a Upe for recording signals from
said altimeter means, said navigation means, said signal
means and said digitalizing means, and
computer means for indicating the departure of the vehicle
from the preplotted path.
4,435,982
MACHINE AND METHOD FOR BALANCING WHEELS
WUly Bonier, Cupertino, and Bemie F. Jackson, Los Gatos,
both of Calif., assignors to Balco, Inc., San Jose, Calif.
FUed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,558
Int a.3 GOIM 1/22
UACL 73-462 22 dafau
1. A handle stem for a bicycle, which carries a handle bar,
said handle stem comprising
a stem body,
a projecting portion extending from a top of said stem body
radially outwardly thereof, said projecting portion con-
taining an opening in an upper surface thereof and
a holding portion provided at a foremost end of said project-
ing portion and having an insertion bore for said handle
bar,
said projecting portion being provided with an indicator
comprising: a display unit which electrically displays
running condition of the bicycle; electronic components;
and a power source; said projecting portion containing a
first hollow area located below said upper surface and
opening therein, said first hollow area housing therein said
electronic components of said indicator, said display unit
of said indicator being mounted above said first hollow
area and over said opening, electronically connected to
said electronic components through said opening, and
exposed to view on a top surface of said projecting por-
tion.
1. A wheel balancing machine which comprises a chassis, a
routable shaft, means on one end of said shaft for removably
mounting the wheel to be balanced, carrier means for support-
ing said shaft on said chassis, driving means for rotating said
shaft to a first angular velocity greater than a predetermined
second angular velocity, clutch means for decoupling said
driving means from said shaft when said first angular velocity
has been attained thereby allowing said shaft and wheel to
route freely and decelerate, means for measuring the angular
velocity of the shaft and activating unbalance measuring means
4,435,984
ULTRASONIC MULTIPLE-BEAM TECHNIQUE FOR
DETECTING CRACKS IN BIMETALUC OR
COARSE-GRAINED MATERIALS
George J. Gruber, Saa Antonio, Tex., asstgnor to Southwest
Research lostitnte, San Antonio, Tex.
ContiBaation-iB-put of Ser. No. 142,216, Apr. 21, 1980, Pat No.
4,299,128. Tliis appUcation May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,145
Int CL^ GOIN 29/04
VJS. a. 73-628 33 ctaimg
1. An ultrasonic test method of detecting and confirming
defects in a test specimen comprising:
(a) detecting suspect defects by:
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S23
(1) transmitting at least two detection beams of a same
wave mode from a first set of multiple detection probe
positions so that said two detection beams overlap in a
region of interest in said test specimen;
(2) receiving echoes of said two detection beams from said
region of interest at a second set of multiple detection
probe positions;
(3) directionally averaging said echoes by means of a
summing device to at least partially cancel at least some
interference echoes and to reinforce at least some defect
reflected echoes if a defect is present in said region of
interest;
(4) recording by means of a recording device substantial
directionally averaged echoes as called echoes, said
called echo indicating one or more suspect defects in
said region of interest;
(b) confirming suspect defects by:
ity of sound in the acoustic lens and the velocity of sound
in the liquid is greater than 3.
LUCITE WtOOC
MODULE
^SJ"F*CC'CONNCCTC0 CRACK
(1) transmitting at least two confirmation beitms of differ-
ent wave modes from at least one first confirmation
probe position so at least two of said confirmation
beams of said different wave modes overlap in said
region of interest in said test specimen;
(2) receiving echoes of said confirmation beams of said
different wave modes from said region of interest at at
least one second confirmation probe position;
(3) moving said first confirmation probe position to move
at least some of said confirmation beams of said different
wave modes with respect to said region of interest to
produce echoes having an associated reflected-pulse
pattern if a defect is present in said region of interest;
(4) recording by means of a recording device an associated
reflected pulse pattern as confirming a suspect defect in
said region of interest.
9Clainis
4,435,985
ACOUSTIC COUPLING DEVICE
Hemantha K. Wickramasioghe, London, England, assignor to
National Research DeTelopment Corporation, London, En-
gland
FUed Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368,811
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 16, 1981,
8112014
Int a.J GOIN 29/00
VJS. a. 73—642
1. An acoustic coupling device comprising:
an acoustic lens arranged to provide a convergent beam of
acoustic radiation; and
an acoustic coupler having adjacent and spaced from the
acoustic lens a convex surface over which the convergent
beam of radiation is incident in an approximately normal
direction,
the coupler having opposite the convex surface a coupling
surface which conforms to the surface of an object to be
investigated and the beam converging beyond said cou-
pling surface;
there being between the acoustic lens and the acoustic cou-
pler a first coupling liquid such that the ratio of the veloc-
the device also having between the acoustic coupler and the
object a layer of a second, low acoustic loss, coupling
liquid.
4,435,986
PRESSURE TRANSDUCER OF THE VIBRATING
ELEMENT TYPE
Hubert Chofht Bole, Switzcrhuid, auignor to Centre Elec-
tronique Horloger S.A., Neuchatel, Switzerland
Filed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,286
Claims priority, appUcation Switicrland, Not. 12, 1980,
8387/80
Int a.i GOIL 9/08
U.S. a. 73—702 14 Claims
1. A pressure transducer comprising a vibrating membrane
which comprises a reduced-thickness bottom of a cavity in a
first member which is fixed on and closed by a support member
forming a first cavity, the vibrating membrane at least partially
comprising a piezoelectric material and having a curvature
therein, and means for exciting the membrane and maintaining
oscillations of the membrane at its resonance frequency and for
producing an electrical signal at that resonance frequency.
4,435,987
DEVICE FOR CORRECTING TORQUE DETECTED BY
AN ELECTRIC DYNAMOMETER
Hiroshi Sugimoto, Hyogo, Japan, assignor to Mitsubishi Deaki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,895
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 25, 1981, 56-27240
Int a? GOIL 3/22
VS. a. 73—862.17 5 CUUu
1. A device for correcting torque detected by an electric
dynamometer comprising:
(a) detection means for detecting at least an armature cur-
rent, an armature voltage and a rotation speed of the
electric dynamometer and generating outputs comprising
detection signals;
(b) an operation circuit calculating the torque that acu be-
tween the yoke and the armature of the electric dyna-
mometer, upon receipt of detection signals from said
detection means, and providing an output;
524
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
(c) a windage-loss torque correction signal generator gener-
ating an output comprising a windage-loss torque correc-
tion signal upon receipt of an output related to the rotation
speed sent from said detection means, an output compris-
ing a detection signal sent from an atmospheric pressure
detector and an output comprising a detection signal sent
from an atmospheric temperature detector;
(d) a friction torque correction signal generator generating
an output comprising a friction torque correction signal of
the bearings of the electric dynamometer;
■' -•
_5_
* * ^
TV
(e) an eddy-current-loss torque correction signal generator
generating an output comprising an eddy-current-loss
torque correction signal; and
(f) a signal correction circuit subtracting the sum of said
correction signals from the output of said operation cir-
cuit, upon receipt of the output from said operation cir-
cuit, said windage-loss torque correction signal, said fric-
tion torque correction signal, and said eddy-current-loss
torque correction signal.
4,435,988
APPARATUS FOR INDICAnNG CRITICAL TORQUE
LOAD
Stiuurt E. Corry, Hallett, and Lanny V. Grade, Oklahoma City,
both of Okla., assignors to The Geolograph Company, Okla-
homa aty, Okbu
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,966
Int. a.J GOIL 3/14
VS. a. 73—862.19 i claim
1. Apparatus for indicating torque load in a drill string of a
shaft driven drilling machine of the type having a rotory table
for rotating the drill string and wherein a shaft routes the
rotary table from an external rotary drive; comprising a torque
mdicating device having an input section adapted to be rotat-
ably connected to the external rotary drive and an output
section adapted to be rouubly connected to the rotary table,
said input and output sections being disposed in axial alignment
and being drivingly connected to each other so as to rotate
conjointly, said input section having an input shaft adapted to
be connected at a first longitudinal end thereof to the rotary
drive and having a first coupling means mounted on a second
longitudinal end of said input shaft; said output section having
a second coupling means and an output shaft, said second
coupling means being mounted on a first longitudinal end of
said output shaft and said output shaft being adapted to be
connected at a second longitudinal end to the rotary table, said
first coupling means having a first spiral spline means thereon,
said second coupling means having a second spiral spline
means thereon complementary to said first spiral spline means,
said first and second coupling means being connected to each
other so as to be in driving relationship with each other
through said spiral spline means, an input bearing being re-
ceived in an input housing and rotatably supporting said input
shaft, said input bearing allowing for axial movement of said
input shaft toward said output section under increased torque
load conditions, said second coupling means being axially
immovable, resilient means preventing axial movement of said
input shaft toward said output section under normal rotary
driving conditions, and a sensing means for measuring the
degree of axial movement of said input shaft, wherein said
sensing means comprises a collar received in an annular groove
recessed into said input shaft at a point adjacent said first
coupling means, a pair of pins extending radially outwardly in
opposite directions from said collar, a yoke for preventing said
collar from rotating with said input shaft, said yoke being
attached at its upper end to said pins and being pivotally at-
tached at its lower end to a suitable base, and a pair of slide
links being adapted to be received over the ends of said pins
and extending rearwardly therefrom so as to be received in
suitable holes in said input housing wherein said collar moves
axially with said input shaft under increased torque load condi-
tions thus causing said slide links to move a corresponding
distance parallel to said input shaft.
4435,989
PLUNGER OPERATED PIPET
Richard C. Meyer, U Habra, and Edward L. CarroU, Garden
Grove, both of Calif., assignors to Beckman Instnunenta, Inc..
FuUerton, CaUf.
Continuation of Ser. No. 165,909, Jul. 3, 1980, abandoned. Thli
application Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 32733
Int. a.3 GOIF 13/00; BOIL 3/02
yjJS. a. 73—864.14 2 Claims
1. Pipetting apparatus comprising:
a generally tubular body having an open forward end for
receiving and expelling fluid and adapted to receive a
replaceable open tip thereon;
a plunger supported for axial movement in the body to draw
fluid into and expel fluid from the open tip on the body
with axial movement away from and toward the open end;
stop means movable between first and second locations in
the body to halt movement of the plunger in one direction
at first and second axial positions thereby establishing
different stroke lengths of plunger movement in the body;
spring means for driving the stop means in one direction
between the first and second locations;
arming means for energizing the spring means in response to
the positioning of the replaceable tip on the body;
means for retaining the stop means in one of the first and
second locations against action of the spring means; and
release means responsive to plunger movement away from
the forward end during a first plunger stroke following
energizing of the spring means for disabling the retaining
means and allowing the spring means to drive the stop
means to the other of the first and second locations
whereby the first plunger stroke and the succeeding
plunger stroke are of the different stroke lengths.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
525
4,435,990
POWER TAKE OFF GEAR BOX
Samuel A. Chalmers, 8141 E. 48th, Tulsa, Okla. 74145
FUed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,127
Int. a.5 F16H 37/Oa- F16D 25/04
VS. a. 74—15.63
6Claims
\
1. A power take off gear box assembly for transmitting
power between a drive source and a driven source and com-
prising rotatable input shaft means, clutch means operably
connected between the drive source and input shaft means for
transmitting rotation to the input shaft means, rotatable perma-
nent output shaft means having the longitudinal axis thereof
disposed in substantial vertical planar alignment with the longi-
tudinal axis of the input shaft means, gear train means inter-
posed between the input shaft means and output shaft means
for transmitting rotation to the output shaft means, the relative
position between the input shaft means and output shaft means
providing for ease of forward and reverse directions of rota-
tion for the output shaft means, housing means encasing the
gear train means, independent self-contained lubricating means
operably secured to the output shaft means and in communica-
tion with the interior of the housing means for providing inter-
nal lubrication surrounding the gear train means for facilitating
maintenance of the gear box assembly, and wherein the hous-
ing means encasing the gear train means includes drop box
means having mounting pad means carried thereby and dis-
posed in substantial horizontal planar alignment with the longi-
tudinal axis cf the output shaft means to compensate for side
loading forces during operation of the power take off gear box
assembly.
4,435,991
POTENTIOMETER DRIVE FOR DISPLACEMENT
TRANSDUCER OF REOPROCATING UNIT
Karl Hehl, Arthur-HeU-Strasac 32, 7298 Lossburg 1, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,730
CUdms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 18,
1980, 3014903
iBt a^ F16H 27/02
VS. a. 74— 89J 14 Claims
B
1. A backlash-free drive connection between a rouuble
control disc and a rotary potentiometer comprising in combi-
nation:
a mounting wall extending substantially perpendicularly to
the rotational axis of the control disc;
a journal support rotably supporting the control disc in the
mounting wall;
means for releasably clamping the potentiometer drive shaft
to the control disc in such a way that they form a rigid
rotatable assembly; and
means for blocking the potentiometer housing against rota-
tion relative to the mounting wall in such a way that only
circuniferentially oriented antirotation forces are trans-
mittable from the mounting wall to the potentiometer
housing and the weight of the potentiometer is carried
entirely by the potentiometer shaft and the connected
control disc.
4,435,992
ADJUSTING DEVICE FOR AXIAL AND RADIAL PISTON
MACHINES
Heinz Bertbold, Bildechlgen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Brueningbaus Hydraulik GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,258
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Fab. 12,
1980, 3005168
lot a.i F16H 25/20
U.S. a. 74-89.15 3 Claims
( i
J-,
-I
1. A motorized adjusting device for an axial and radial piston
machine wherein a cylinder block is reciprocated by a setting
element to control a charge delivered by the machine, said
adjusting device comprising;
(a) a housing having a threaded output shaft joumaled for
rotation therein, said output shaft being substantially par-
allel to the reciprocating axis of a cylinder block to be
adjusted; said housing and said axial and radial piston
machine providing a defined enclosure surrounding said
output shaft and a setting means;
(b) said setting means mounted on said threaded shaft to be
reciprocated along said shaft as said shaft is rotated, said
setting means engaging a cylinder block to be adjusted;
(c) a servo motor removably mounted outside said housing
and said enclosure at one end of said output shaft to pro-
vide for replacement of only the servo motor without
disturbing the setting of said setting means in said shaft;
(d) an input shaft joumaled for coaxial rotation within said
output shaft, said input shaft being connected to said servo
motor at one end thereof;
(e) a planetary transmission and overload protection means
removably mounted outside said housing and said enclo-
sure at the other end of said output shaft, opposite said
servo motor, said overload coupling means connected
between said output shaft and a cage member for said
planetary transmiuion, said planeury transmiuion also
having a sun gear connected to said input shaft, said trans-
mission mounted to provide for a replacement of only the
transmission and overload coupling without disturbing the
setting means on said shaft; wherein rotation of the servo
motor routes said input shaft, said transmission and said
overload protection device to power the roution of said
output shaft and thereby reciprocate said setting means
mounted on said output shaft;
326
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
whereby either the servo motor or the transmission means may
be separately removed from the housing without disturbing the
enclosure surrounding said shaft and said setting element.
4,435,993
CONTROL KNOB TO SHAFT ASSEMBLY
Alien W. Scott, Looisrille, Ky., anignor to General Electric
Company, Louiarille, Ky.
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,587
lot CL^ G05G 1/10
VS. a 74-553 5 ciaimg
4,435,994
AUTOMOBILE TRANSMISSION CASING HAVING
REINFORCEMENT
ShiUi Hata; Todiio Yamada, and Katam Mnrakawa, aU of
HiTOMliM, Japan, aailgBort to Toyo Kogyo Co- Ltd., Hiro-
■BUia, Japan
Filed Jon. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,603
Claims priority, application Japan, Jon. 27, 1980, 55-90857rui
Int a.3 F16H J7/02
U-S. a 74-606 R 30,^
1. A control knob to shaft assembly comprising:
a rototoble, bifurcated shaft, the bifurcation spanning the
diameter of the shaft and having a central cylindrical bore
interconnecting two open slots, one of which has a width
larger than the other,
an escutcheon plate in a plane that intersects the longitudinal
axis of the shaft at an acute angle, said escutcheon plate
having an opening therethrough,
a knob received in the escutcheon plate opening having,
a first portion larger in diameter than the escutcheon plate
opening;
a second portion having two projecting spaced parallel
legs with a yoke connecting and spanning the legs, said
yoke having a central ball-shaped portion with a diame-
ter slighUy smaUer than the cylindrical bore in the shaft
and received in said cylindrical bore, and two cross
elements between the ball-shaped portion and each of
said legs, one cross element having a diameter shghtly
smaller than the width of one of said open slots in the
shaft and receivable therein and the other cross element
having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the
other open slot in the shaft and received therein, and
a third portion interconnecting the first and second por-
tions, said third portion having means to rotatably se-
cure the knob to the escutcheon plate.
1. A transmission casing for automobiles which comprises a
casmg body having a wall formed at an upper portion with an
openmg which is adapted to be closed by a top cover provided
with gear changing motion transmitting means, said casing
bemg adapted for receiving a main shaft, a countershaft and a
reverse idle gear shaft which extend longitudinally of the
casing body for carrying transmission gears, said wall of the
casing body having an inner surface which is of a cross-section
comprised of a plurality of outwardly curved portions con-
nected with each other at node portions projecting inwardly
with respect to the curved portions, at least one of said curved
portions having a curvature which is not coaxial with one of
said shafts, said wall being of a substantially uniform thickness
and formed with reverse idle gear support bracket means in the
vicinity of one of the node portions for supporting the reverse
idle gear shaft, one of said node portions being located in the
vicinity of the point of intersection between the inner surface
of the wall of the casing body and a line passing through the
center of said main shaft and the center of the reverse idle Bear
shaft. *
4,435,995
POSITIVE DRIVE DIFFERENTIAL FOR VEHICLE
INCLUDING TRACTORS
Walter E. Welandcr, Box 449, Virginia, Minn. 55792
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 129,034, Mar. 10, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcatlon Jul. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 168,439
Int a.3 F16H 1/44. 1/40
U.S. a. 74-711 2 Claims
1. A positive drive differential apparatus for a wheeled
vehicle including drive wheels comprising, an axle housing,
right and left coaxially aligned axles, a drive shaft, a pinion
gear fixedly attached to and driven by the drive shaft, a differ-
ential housing having right and left hubs on opposite sides
each joumaled for rotation in the axle housing by the means of
ball-bearings, a ring gear fixedly attached to the differential
housing, said ring gear engaging and being driven by the pin-
ion gear on the drive shaft, said right axle being fixedly at-
tached to said right hub of the differential housing, said left
axle being fixedly attached to a left side differential gear jour-
naled by the means of ball-bearings for rotation within the
differential housing adjacent to the left hub of said differential
housing, a plurality of spaced apart planetary gears joumaled
for rotation by the means of a bushing upon the inside of the
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
527
differential housing, said planetary gears being in engagement
with the left side differential gear for transmitting power from
the differential housing to the left side differential gear and the
axle connected thereto, said left side differential gear is as large
as constructionally possible relative to the size of each of said
planetary gears which are as small as constructionally possible,
and because the relatively high rotational speed needed by the
planetary gears compared to the housing speed cannot be
attained when power or speed is applied to the differential
housing the small differential gears lock instead thereby pass-
ing the power to the left axle and wheel, but allowing the axles
and wheels to turn at different speeds when power is applied
gradually as a result of uneven road conditions or turns.
4,435,996
DIFFERENTUL ASSEMBLY FOR VEHICLES
OU?er L. Gorby, Fargo, N. Dak., assignor to Agri-Tech Ltd.,
Inc., Bamesfille, Minn.
FUed Dec. 17, 1979, Ser. No. 104,515
Int. C\? F16H 1/40
U A a. 74—713 3 Claims
and all portions thereof being completely contained inside
of the walled enclosure of said differential carrier within
said central cavity;
a ring gear mounted on said differential carrier for rotation
therewith;
a pinion gear in meshing engagement with said ring gear,
said pinion gear being affixed to a power input shaft; and
bearing means comprising a pair of bearings positioned at
longitudinally spaced locations in each of said axle tubes
and directly, rotatably supporting said axles therein, one
of said bearings of each pair of bearings being located
adjacent to a side wall of said housing in laterally spaced
relation to said differential carrier enclosure and said
differential gears to directly rotatably support said inner
ends of said axles, whereby said axle inner ends are able to
provide proper bearing support for said differential car-
rier;
one of said axle tubes is laterally adjusted so that iu inner end
projects a predetermined distance inside of said housing;
thrust bearing means positioned between the inner end of
said one axle tube and one side of said differential carrier,
whereby said one axle tube serves to position said differen-
tial carrier within said housing and to take the ring gear
thrust load imparted thereto by said pinion gear;
one side wall of said differential carrier enclosure terminates
laterally inwardly from one of said side walls of said
housing, defining an open space therebetween having no
bearings or support members therein;
the opposite side wall of said differential carrier enclosure is
affixed to said ring gear for rotation therewith; and
said opposite side wall of said differential carrier enclosure
bears against said thrust bearing and is laterally positioned
by said inner end of said one axle tube, whereby no close
machine tolerances are required on said differentia] carrier
enclosure or on said housing for the accurate lateral posi-
tioning of said carrier enclosure within said housing.
4,435,997
AUTOMATIC CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION
Hubertus J. ran Dooms, deccasod, late of Deume, Netherlands
(by Martiaus P. J. H. ran Doomc, executor), assignor to
Erven Dr. Hubertus Josephus tsb Doome, ElndhoTcn, Neth-
erlands
FUed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,378
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Mar. 12, 1980,
8001480
Int a.J F16H 15/50
UA a. 74—796 10 Claims
1. A differential for vehicleSvComprising:
a differential housing;
a pair of axle tubes affixed to opposite sides of said housing;
a pair of axles positioned longitudinally within said axle
tubes with their inner ends extending into said housing;
a differential carrier in the form of a walled enclosure defin-
ing a central cavity, said carrier being positioned within
said housing and directly and completely supported on the
inner ends of said axles at axially aligned apertures in
opposite side walls of said carrier enclosure through
which the inner ends of said axles extend into said central
cavity, the portions of said inner ends of said axles extend-
ing through said apertures being bearing surfaces on
which said differential carrier is directly rotatably sup-
ported;
intermeshing, differential gears mounted on said carrier and
said axles within said central cavity, two side gears of said
intermeshing gears being affixed to said inner ends of said
axles entirely within said central cavity, said side gears
1. An automatic, continuously variable transmission com-
prising a speed-dependent clutch, s section cooperating with
said clutch for steplessly controlling the transmission ratio
between an input shaft and an output shaft, said section com-
prising a central shaft having a first longitudinal axis carrying
at least one radially extending shaft with a conical body having
a second longitudinal axis transverse to said first longitudinal
axis routable about said second longitudinal axis thereof, said
528
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
conical body having an outer circumferential surface of con-
cave curvature in the direction of said second longitudinal axis
said conical body being longitudinally movable over said radial
shaft, and being arranged to be driven for rotation about said
shaft, a spring-loaded annular body cooperating with said
conical body, depending on the desired torqde-speed ratio, via
an axial pressure exerted by the speed dependent clutch, along
a direction substantially parallel to said first longitudinal axis,
with said spring-loaded annular body further having a conical
inner circumferential surface of convex curvature in the axial
direction of said second longitudinal axis, and means for re-
versing the direction of rotation of the output shaft relative to
the input shaft.
the blade when moved in respective opposite directions along
said path, and resilient means urging said locking element to
4,435,998
ROLLER TYPE PLANETARY GEAR HAVING A
PRELOADING ARRANGEMENT
Keyiro Kinoshita, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
FUed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,279
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 7, 1980, 55-44588
Int. a.J F16H 13/06
U.S. a. 74-798 7aaims
B 26
move along the path in the direction towards the saw blade
whereby the blade may be gripped between the dependent
portion and the locking element.
1. Planetary gearing comprising:
a first shaft and a sun roller threadably mounted on said first
shaft, said sun roller tending to unscrew in a first axial
direction along said first shaft when said first shaft is
rotated in a first rotational direction;
a second shaft and a ring roller threadably mounted on said
second shaft, said ring roller tending to unscrew in a
second axial direction along said second shaft when said
nng roller is rotated in said first rotational direction; and
planet roller shafts, planet rollers mounted on said planet
roller shafts, and means for permitting said planet rollers
to move in the axial direction of said planet roller shafts,
said planet rollers being operatively interposed between
and arranged to interconnect said sun roller and said ring
roller, said ring roller rotating in a second rotational direc-
tion when said sun roller rotates in said first rotational
direction.
4,435,999
SAW SHARPENING GUIDE
Comelis J. M. Beerens, 40-42 Berkshire Rd., North Sunshine,
Victoria, Australia
FUed May 11, 1982, Ser. No. 377,020
Claims priority, application Australia, May 11, 1981,
Int. C\? B23D 63/10
U.S. a. 76—36 9 Claims
1. A saw sharpening guide including a member adapted to be
located on the blade of the saw in a straddling relationship to
the toothed edge and carrying two grooved rollers arranged to
guide a file for the sharpening of the teeth of the saw; said
member having a dependent portion arranged to engage one
side of the blade when the member is in said straddling rela-
tionship thereto, a locking element supported by the member
for sliding movement relative thereto along a path inclined to
the plane of the saw blade so as to move towards or away from
4,436,000
SHARPENING MACHINE FOR SAWS
Peter Lenard, Biberach, and Ernst Beck, Maselheim, botii of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Vollmer Werke Mas-
chinenfabrik GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,195
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 22,
Int. a.^ B23D 63/14
U.S. a. 76-41 ,5 cjji^
(►IK
1. A sharpening machine for sharpening toothed saws, com-
prising:
mounting means for supporting a saw blade;
a carrier mounted for rotation about a tilting axis oriented
perpendicular relative to the plane of said saw blade;
a support mounted on the carrier, said support being ar-
ranged so as to selectively swivel relative to the carrier
through at least 180° about a first swivel axis lying in the
plane of the saw blade, and said support being arranged so
as to selectively reciprocate along the first swivel axis;
a grinding head mounted on the support, the grinding head
being reciprocable relative to the support between two
operating positions;
a first grinding wheel mounted on the grinding head, the first
grinding wheel having a first operating position in which
an active face of the first grinding wheel is contiguous
with the first swivel axis;
a second grinding wheel mounted on the grinding head and
arranged in offset relationship with respect to the first
grinding wheel, the second grinding wheel having a sec-
ond operating position in which an active face of
the second grinding wheel is contiguous with the first swivel
axis; and
means for driving said first and second grinding wheels.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
529
4,436,001 4,436,002
CENTRIPETAL CUTTER AND STRIPPER APPARATUS REVERSAL MECHANISM FOR POWER TONG
James M. Ergler, Friendsville, Pa.; Harold Kohn, Endwell, and Kerry S. Kennlngton, and Ronald Baker, both of Austin, Tez^
Michael Smetana, Johnson City, both of N.Y., assignors to assignors to Hughes Tool Company, Houston, Tex.
International Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y. Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,971
FUed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 387,992 Int d? B25B 17/00
Int. Q\? H02G 1/12 U.S. G. 81— S7J 6 Claims
U.S. a. 81—9.51
10 Claims
1. Apparatus for cutting a piece from an elongated object
having an inner core member and a concentric outer member
and a predetermined portion of said outer member from said
piece, said apparatus comprising:
a head rotatable about a predetermined first axis, said head
having an opening concentric with said first axis,
first and second disc cutters mounted on a common shaft
with a predetermined spacing therebetween, said shaft
being rotatable about a second axis, and said shaft being
pivotably mounted to said head a predetermined distance
from said first axis, said first disc cutter being positioned
between said opening and said second cutter,
means for positioning said object for advancement through
said opening coincidentally along said first axis in a direc-
tion towards said cutters, and
variable speed drive means for continuously rotating said
head about said first axis, said head being rotated at a first
speed by said drive means to pivot said shaft to an inner
first radial position to place said first disc cutter in contact-
ing and obstructing relationship with the leading end of
said object and prevent the advancement thereof, said
head being rotated by said drive means at an increased
second speed relative to said first speed to pivot said shaft
centrifugally to an outer second radial position to displace
said first cutter from said contacting and obstructing rela-
tionship with said leading end of said object to allow
further advancement of said object in said direction along
said first axis to a predetermined axial position along said
first axis beyond said second cutter, and said head being
rotated by said drive means when said object is in said
predetermined axial position at a predetermined reduced
third speed relative to said second speed to pivot said shaft
centripetally radially inward towards said first axis to
place at least one of said first and second cutters in a
predetermined lateral contacting relationship with said
object to effect in coaction with said rotation of said head
about said first axis the rotation of said shaft and said first
and second cutters about said second axis, said rotation of
said head about said first axis in coaction with said rotation
of said first and second cutters about said second axis
thereby effecting concurrent cutting of said piece from
said object and of said portion from said outer member of
said piece by said first and second cutters, respectively.
1. In a pipe gripping tong of the type having a stationary
housing with a central opening for receiving pipe to be
gripped, a ring gear rotatably mounted in said housing for
movement about said central opening, a plurality of jaws sup-
ported by said housing and movable between an extended
position for gripping pipe in said central opening and retracted
position, said jaws being rotatably engaged by said ring gear,
and drive means for transmitting rotary motion to said ring
gear, wherein the improvement comprises:
a carrier assembly supported by said housing for rotation
about said central opening, said assembly comprising
upper and lower plates spaced apart by a plurality of pins,
said jaws being mounted on said pins between said plates;
and
said jaws being rotatable to said extended pipe gripping
position in either of opposite directions from a single
retracted position;
reversal means for controlling the direction of rotation of
said jaws; and
wherein said reversal means comprises a detent pin mounted
on said lower plate at a right angle with respect thereto,
one end of said pin being received within a transverse
opening in said ring gear, said opening on said nng gear
being located at the approximate mid point of two, off-set,
longitudinal slots in said ring gear.
4,436,003
TOOL FOR SUPPORTING AND TURNING THREADED
MEMBERS
Raymond G. Cox, 733 Cumberland Dr., St. Louis, Mo. 63125
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,583
Int. C\> B25B 13/00
U.S. a. 81—57.43 11 Claims
1. A tool having particular utility for supporting for rotation
threaded members to be installed or removed from relatively
inaccessible locations comprising an elongated body member
having first and second opposite end portions and a passage-
way extending therebetween, each of said first and second end
portions having an opening therethrough communicating with
the passageway extending through said body member, a fiange
member extending endwardly from said first end portion, said
•t^i
the input shaft.
M35,99t
ROLLER TYPE PLANETARY GEAR HAVING A
PRELOADING ARRANGEMENT
KeUiro KiwMUta, Yokohama, Japan, aMignor to Nlmn Motor
Co^ LtiL, Yokohama, Japan
FUed Mar. 10, IWl, Ser. No. 242,279
Claimi priority, appUcation Japmi, Apr. 7, 19M, 55-44588
Int. a.3 F16H 13/06
UA a. 74-798 7aaim8
move along the path in the direction towards the saw blade
whereby the blade may be gripped between the dependent
portion and the locking element.
1. Planetary gearing comprising:
a first shaft and a sun roller threadably mounted on said first
shaft, said sun roller tending to unscrew in a first axial
direction along said first shaft when said first shaft is
rotated in a first rotational direction;
a second shaft and a ring roller threadably mounted on said
second shaft, said ring roller tending to unscrew in a
second axial direction along said second shaft when said
ring roller is rotated in said first rotational direction; and
planet roller shafts, planet rollers mounted on said planet
roller shafts, and means for permitting said planet rollers
to move in the axial direction of said planet roller shafts,
said planet rollers being operatively interposed between
and arranged to interconnect said sun roller and said ring
roller, said ring roller rotating in a second rotational direc-
tion when said sun roller rotates in said first rotational
direction.
4,435,999
SAW SHARPENING GUIDE
Comelis J. M. Beerens, 40-42 Berkshire Rd,, North Sunshine,
Victoria, Australia
Filed May 11, 1982, Ser. No. 377,020
Claims priority, application Australia, May 11. 1981
PE8799/81 J , oi.
Int. a.3 B23D 63/10
UA a. 76-36 9CUdntt
1. A saw sharpening guide including a member adapted to be
located on the blade of the saw in a straddling relationship to
the toothed edge and carrying two grooved rollers arranged to
guide a file for the sharpening of the teeth of the saw; said
member having a dependent portion arranged to engage one
side of the blade when the member is in said straddling rela-
tionship thereto, a locking element supported by the member
for sliding movement relative thereto along a path inclined to
the plane of the saw blade so as to move towards or away from
4,436,000
SHARPENING MACHINE FOR SAWS
Peter Unard, Biberach, and Ernst Beck, Maselhcim, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to VoUncr Werke Mas-
chinenfabrik GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,195
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 22,
19B1, 3120465
Int a.} B23D 63/14
U.S.a.76-41 15 Claims
1. A sharpening machine for sharpening toothed saws, com-
prising:
mounting means for supporting a saw blade;
a carrier mounted for rotation about a tilting axis oriented
perpendicular relative to the plane of said saw blade;
a suppori mounted on the carrier, said support being ar-
ranged so as to selectively swivel relative to the carrier
through at least 180* about a first swivel axis lying in the
plane of the saw blade, and said support being arranged so
as to selectively reciprocate along the first swivel axis;
a grinding head mounted on the suppori, the grinding head
being reciprocable relative to the suppori between two
operating positions;
a first grinding wheel mounted on the grinding head, the first
grinding wheel having a first operating position in which
an active face of the first grinding wheel is contiguous
with the first swivel axis;
a second grinding wheel mounted on the grinding head and
arranged in offset relationship with respect to the first
grinding wheel, the second grinding wheel having a sec-
ond operating position in which an active face of
the second grinding wheel is contiguous with the first swivel
axis; and
means for driving said first and second grinding wheels.
■. W
mn
IftMMMMMM
W^-
s ' _' - I f ■■ i**^ ""'»'»" -^^t ■'*,»§
■ ■» - . .jr.-. II .
hi A
1. Apparatus for cutting a piece from an elongated object
having an inner core member and a concentric outer member
and a predetermined portion of said outer member from said
piece, said apparatus comprising:
a head rotatable about a predetermined first axis, said head
having an opening concentric with said first axis,
first and second disc cutters mounted on a common shaft
with a predetermined spacing therebetween, said shaft
being rotatable about a second axis, and said shaft being
pivotably mounted to said head a predetermined distance
from said first axis, said first disc cutter being positioned
between said opening and said second cutter,
means for positioning said object for advancement through
said opening coincidentally along said first axis in a direc-
tion towards said cutters, and
variable speed drive means for continuously rotating said
head about said first axis, said head being rotated at a first
speed by said drive means to pivot said shaft to an inner
first radial position to place said first disc cutter in contact-
ing and obstructing relationship with the leading end of
said object and prevent the advancement thereof, said
head being rotated by said drive means at an increased
second speed relative to said first speed to pivot said shaft
centrifugally to an outer second radial position to displace
said first cutter from said contacting and obstructing rela-
tionship with said leading end of said object to allow
furiher advancement of said object in said direction along
said first axis to a predetermined axial position along said
first axis beyond said second cutter, and said head being
rotated by said drive means when said object is in said
predetermined axial position at a predetermined reduced
third speed relative to said second speed to pivot said shaft
centripetally radially inward towards said first axis to
place at least one of said first and second cutters in a
predetermined lateral contacting relationship with said
object to effect in coaction with said rotation of said head
about said first axis the rotation of said shaft and said first
and second cutters about said second axis, said rotation of
said head about said first axis in coaction with said rotation
of said first and second cutters about said second axis
thereby effecting concurrent cutting of said piece from
said object and of said poriion from said outer member of
said piece by said first and second cutters, respectively.
1. In a pipe gripping tong of the type having a stationary
housing with a central opening for receiving pipe to be
gripped, a ring gear rotatably mounted in said housing for
movement about said central opening, a plurality of jaws sup-
ported by said housing and movable between an extended
position for gripping pipe in said central opening and retracted
position, said jaws being rotatably engaged by said ring gear,
and drive means for transmitting rotary motion to said ring
gear, wherein the improvement comprises:
a carrier assembly supported by said housing for rotation
about said central opening, said assembly comprising
upper and lower plates spaced apart by a plurality of pins,
said jaws being mounted on said pins between said plates;
and
said jaws being rotatable to said extended pipe gripping
position in either of opposite directions from a single
retracted position;
reversal means for controlling the direction of rotation of
said jaws; and
wherein said reversal means comprises a detent pin mounted
on said lower plate at a right angle with respect thereto,
one end of said pin being received within a transverse
opening in said ring gear, said opening on said ring gear
being located at the approximate mid point of two, off-set,
longitudinal slots in said ring gear.
4,436,003
TOOL FOR SUPPORTING AND TURNING THREADED
MEMBERS
Raymond G. Cox, 733 Cumberland Dr., St. Louis, Mo. 63125
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,583
Int. a.' B25B 13/00
U.S. a. 81—57.43 11 Claims
1. A tool having particular utility for supporting for roution
threaded members to be installed or removed from relatively
inaccessible locations comprising an elongated body member
having first and second opposite end portions and a passage-
way extending therebetween, each of said first and second end
portions having an opening therethrough communicating with
the passageway extending through said body member, a fiange
member extending cndwardly from said first end portion, said
530
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
flange member having a sidewardly extending projection
thereon m position to rotatably hold and support a threaded
member when positioned thereon or therearound, a rotatable
member and means extending endwardly from the second end
portion of said body member for mounting the rotatable mem-
ber thereon, an elongated endless nexible member extending
through the passageway and through the opening associated
with said second end portion and having portions thereof
extending endwardly beyond said second end portion for
tangential engagement with opposite sides of the rotatoble
member, said endless flexible member having another portion
extending endwardly through the opening associated with the
first end portion of said body member and around said side-
wardly extending projection for engagement with a threaded
member rotatably positioned in communication with said pro-
jection, rototion of said rotatable member when the endless
flexible member is engaged with the opposite sides thereof
providing the means for controllably tensioning and moving
the flexible member longitudinally through said body member
thereby imparting rotational movement to said threaded mem-
ber.
to said force applying member and socket gripping body;
and
an operating handle telescopically and pitchably coupled
with said coupling sleeve, whereby, with the arrangement
of said driving structure and said control means, said
hexagonal socket is adapuble to any hexagonal nuts or
other bolt type fasteners for performing tightening and
loosening operations by the user at any directions.
4,436,004
UNIVERSAL MULTI-SOCKET RATCHET WRENCH
Hoi-Hiuug Chang. 21, Alley 17, Lane 65 Chung-Chin Rd^ Tai-
chnng Oty, Taiwan
FUed Mar. 3, 1W2, Ser. No. 354,482
Claims priority, application Taiwan, Oct 5, 1981, 7025849
Int a.J B25B 13/46
UA a 81-60 8 Claims
4,436,005
ROTARY TORQUE ADAPTER
Alan R. Hanson, 10024 Johnson Cir., Bloomington, Minn. 55437
FUed Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,711
Int. a.3 B25B 23/00; B25G 1/04, 3/00
UA a. 81-177 G icudn,
1. A universal multi-socket ratchet wrench comprising in
combination:
a socket gripping body having a plurality of cross slot
equally formed around the longitudinal wall of the open
head at one end and an annular recess circumscribed by a
ring of spaced tooth at the other;
a plurality of gripping member respectively and movably
received in said cross slots forming an adjustable hexago-
nal socket thereof;
a rotary conical member having a driving arm structure at
one end and a plurality of screw teeth at the other being
positioned within said annular recess of said socket grip-
ping body with respect to said gripping members;
a force applying member having a force transmission projec-
tion at one end, a conical recess in the middle, and a
spaced tooth portion at the other end, being fitly scarfed
to the toothed portion of said socket gripping body in
relation to said rotary conical member positioned therein;
a coupling sleeve connected to said force applying member-
control means installed in said coupling sleeve with respect
1. A tool adapter device having an integral hexagonal cross
sectional drive shaft with a drive end, said drive end compris-
ing a first and a second square cross-sectional drive end por-
tion, wherein said first drive end portion is disposed between
the drive shaft and said second drive end portion, and said first
drive end portion is of constant cross-sectional area and said
second drive end portion is comprised of a frustrum of a qua-
drangular pyramid which decreases from a cross-sectional area
equal to the cross-sectional area of ^he1!rst4escrib«L4rivrend
portion to decreasing cross-sectiohal areas dedi«i^ngin size in
the direction joward and fixe^ joined to said first described
nonreducing cross-sectional^ea drive end portion, said first
drive end portion operatmg cooperatively with the largest and .
equal-size square area of the second drive end portion which is
placed on the opposite end of the device from said drive shaft
to align coincidentally the centerlines of said adapter device
and a socket tool when both drive end portions are slidably
inserted into a square aperture or said socket tool to enable
in-line rotational motion at low and relatively high speeds, of
clockwise and counterclockwise direction, of continuous and
noncontinuous rotation of said adapter device and said socket
tool each about their respective coincident centeriines,
whereby said frustrum of the quadrangular pyramid of said
second drive end portion operating to transmit rotational mo-
tion at low and relatively high speeds, of clockwise and coun-
terclockwise direction, of continuous and noncontinuous rota-
tional motion of said tool adapter and the socket tool mated
thereon, when said frustrum portion of the second drive end
portion is partially slidably inserted into the square aperture of
said socket tool thereby creating a hold-on force means and a
"universal-joint" type swivel action allowed by the spatial
clearance between said socket tool square aperture and said
frustrum of the quadrangular pyramid, said second drive end
portion and said socket tool each rotating about ito own respec-
tive centerUne with the centerlines of said second drive end
portion and said socket tool being non-coincident and angu-
larly disposed to each other.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S31
4,436,006
METHOD FOR CUTTING LEAD WIRES
Hlromichi Nakamnra; Hamya Urano; Tatsuo Kojima, all of
Gifta, and Mltsonao Sekiwa, Osaka, all of Japan, assignors to
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka and Mit-
subishi Metal Corporation, Tokyo, both of, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 972,066, Dec. 21, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,299
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 29, 1977, 52-160008
Int a.3 B23D 19/Oa 35/00
VS. CL 83—13 6 Claims
stock on the reference line, then to the punch position, stamp-
ing out a part, and incrementally advancing the feed stock
through the punch press, laterally removing punched parts
from the punched stock, switching to out-feed rolls for incre-
mentally feeding the stock through the punch press once the
scrap stock advances to the out-feed rolls, and removing the
punched scrap stock.
4,436,008
PHOTOGRAPHIC HLM WEB CUTTER AND METHOD
Gerald R. Strunc, Maple Grove, Minn., assignor to Pako Corpo-
ration, Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,284
Int. a.3 B26D 5/24
U.S. a. 83—42 12 Claims
rx
t4 l4
-11
-10
1. In a method of cutting lead wires projecting from one side
of print base panels by relatively moving the panels and a
rotating circular cutting disk having a peripheral cutting edge
adapted to sever the lead wires, the improvement comprising
the steps of
providing the cutting disk with a main body and an annular
hard layer of from 0.02 to 0.2 mm in thickness made from
at least one material selected from the group consisting of
cemented carbide, TiC, TaC, Cr2C3 and AI2O3. said hard
layer forming said peripheral cutting edge and extending
radially inwardly thereof, said main body having lower
abrasion resistance than said hard layer; and
severing the lead wires successively from a plurality of
panels by rotating the cutting disk at a speed sufficiently
high to cause the peripheral cutting edge to be self-shar-
pening by chipping of said hard layer from successive
contacts with the lead wires.
4,436,007
AUTOMATED FEED FOR A PUNCH PRESS AND
METHOD OF USING SAME
Darrel L. Russon, and Warren H. Wheeler, both of Scattie,
Wash., assignors to The Boeing Company, Scattie, Wash.
FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,153
Int a.3 B26D 1/40
MS. a 83—23 n Claims
5. A method of handling feed stock through a punch press
with steps comprising: aligning feed stock for passing through
the dies of a punch press, establishing a reference line for the
leading edge of the feed stock with respect to load position in
the punch press, utUizing in-feed roUs for advancing the feed
I
iCHCTM
COWIPI
T-^My^
SHKaSE
9. A method of cutting a photographic film web made of
spliced lengths of notched film with variable frame spacing
into sections with a knife located at a fixed knife position along
a feed path, the method comprising:
(a) advancing the web along a feed path so that a leading end
of the web extends past the fixed knife position;
(b) sensing a splice in the web at a splice sensing position
upstream from the fixed knife position; PI (c) determining
a first length of web from a cut end to to the splice;
(d) if the first length to the splice is less than a predetermined
maximum length, advancing the web until a portion of the
web adjacent the splice is aligned with the fixed knife
position and activating the knife to cut a segment extend-
ing past the fixed knife position from the web; and
(e) if the first Idngth of the splice is greater than the predeter-
mined maximum length, advancing the web a second
length so that a portion of the web greater than a predeter-
mined minimum length from the cut end is aligned with
the fixed knife position, and cutting the web.
4,436,009
SAW UNIT HAVING MUTUALLY DISPLACEABLE SAW
PARTS
Jonas W. Ask, Skogsstigen 10, S-183 50 TVby, Sweden
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 160,177, Jan. 17, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 237,978
Int a.3 B27B 5/29
U.S. a. 83-72 10 Claims
1. A sawing unit comprising two sawblades having a plural-
ity of teeth with equal toothpitch, said blades being pressed
together and driven as a unit, the teeth of either blade disposed
between a pair of teeth of the other blade, the teeth of each
blade being inclined toward the plane of the other blade, said
blades being mounted for relative displacement both in the
direction of travel of said teeth and in the direction of feed of
the object being sawed during a sawing operation, actuating
means operably connected to at least one of said blades for
532
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
effecting relative displacement between said blades selected in
said direction of travel of said teeth and in said direction of feed
a
=A«tm:..
the sharp side of the blades, said carrier assembly having
a earner plate connected to the slide means and carrier
fingers which are a parallel array of planar segments
mounted above and parallel with the carrier plate, said
earner fmgers intennesh between the rack of parallel
blades, in the open position the carrier assembly allows for
inserting a food article between the rack of blades and the
earner fmgers on to the carrier plate which extends be-
yond the lowest blade in the rack and between said lowest
blade and the base, in the closed position the canier fm-
gers extend through the posterior side of the blades with
? x* »>> i»
I I ^^
during a sawing operation to regulate the cutting action of the
tcctn.
4,436,010
APPARATUS FOR CUmNG FUSIBLE MATERIAL
John M. Valentine, 14975 E. Columbia Dr., Aurora, Colo. 80014
FUed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,654
Int. a.3 B26F 3/12: B29C 1 7/10
U.S. a. 83—171
13 Claims
^"'i--^^
« 0
1. An apparatus for cutting and shaping a fusible material
workpiece, said apparatus comprising:
a. a base including a table having a top surface for supporting
said workpiece; *
b. a support member extending from said base and having a
downwardly arcuate terminal section residing at an ele-
vated position above the top surface of said table-
c. an elongate electrical resistance cutting element having
I. a lower end secured to said base, and
ii. an upper end directed toward the tenninal section of
said support member;
d. attachment means carrying the upper end of said cutting
element and adjustably positionable along the tenninal
portion of said support member; and
e. electrical supply means for providing electrical energy to
said cutting element.
the carrier plate extending under the lowest blade suffi-
ciently for the sliced food article to rest upon the carrier
plate,
a guard mounted to the base and shielding the sharp edge of
the blades and in combination with the rack of blades and
the carrier fmgers with the carrier assembly in the open
position creatmg a vertical cavity in which the food arti-
cle to be sliced is inserted;
a means stopping the base from moving relative to a work
surface and;
a locking means to secure the carrier assembly to the base.
4,436,012 ^
PENDULUM-TYPE PRODUCT SUCING MACHINE
Tbonus A. Hochanadel, Pickerington, Ohio, assignor to J. E
Grote Pepp-A-Matic Co., Inc., Columbua, Ohio
FUed Not. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,244
Int. a.J B26D 7/06: B23D 53/06
UA a. 83-703 15 cuum.
4,436,011
SUCING DEVICE FOR ROUNDED FOOD ARTICLES
Frank W. Jones, P.O. Box 4074, GreenflUe, Del. 19807
FUed Apr. 4, 1983, Ser. No. 481,764
., « ^ '■*• ^-^ ^2^ ^/O-^' ^/^* ^/20. 7/06
UA a. 83-425 J 10 Claim.
1. A manual food sheer comprising a
base;
a rack of parallel spaced blades mounted to said base at an
acute angle with said base, said blades under tension and
having two edges, one edge sharp;
a slide means mounted to the base;
a movable carrier assembly mounted to said slide means on
1. A product slicing apparatus comprising
a structural frame,
a product carrier pivotally mounted on said frame for recip-
rocating movement about a substantially horizontal pivot
axis, said earner including at least one elongated product
compartment extending generally perpendicular to and
downward from said pivot axis and adapted to receive a
product to be sliced and permit downward movement of
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S33
the product toward an open, bottom end of the compart-
ment that is spaced a predetermined distance from said
pivot axis,
product carrier drive means coupled with said carrier and
operable to effect reciprocating swinging movement of
said carrier about its pivot axis through a predetermined
arc of sufficient extent to cause the entire bottom end of
the product in the carrier and projecting from the lower
end thereof to traverse a cutting line extending trans-
versely across the path of movement of the product,
slice thickness control means operatively interengageable
with the product carrier by said product carrier for con-
trolling the distance of projection of the product with
respect to the cutting line, and
slicing means mounted on said frame and including an end-
less slicing blade carried by support means for maintaining
the blade in vertically spaced upper and lower runs having
at least a portion of the lower run forming a generally
rectilinear cutting blade section disposed in substantially
horizontal, transversely extending relationship across the
path of movement of the product at the cutting line, said
slicing blade being supported4Q.cevolve in a place aligned
with the cutting blade section of tfielOwer run thereof and
inclined to a plane tangent to an arc of movement of the
product through the cutting line to positionthe upper run
in sufficiently offset relationship to a plane perpendicular
to the tangent plane to permit said product carrier to
swing over the lower run in effecting complete cutting of
the product carried thereby, and blade drive means opera-
tively coupled with said blade to effect revolution thereof
in performance of slicing operations.
4,436,013
REOPROCATING CUTTING APPARATUS WITH THETA
DITHER
Heinz J. Gerber, West Hartford, Conn., assignor to Gcrber
Garment Technology, Inc., South Windsor, Conn.
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,673
Int. a.J B26D 7/07; B22B 3/00
U.S. a. 83-747 11 Claims
rocation strokes of the blade limited oscillatory routions
of the cutting blade about the axis of reciprocation toward
one side of the line of cut and then the other.
4,436,014
MITER BLOCK
Terence C. O'NeiU, Northumberland, England, assignor to In-
ternationale Octrooi MaatschappU "Octropa" B.V., Rotter-
dam, Netherlands
PCT No. PCr/GB81/00110, § 371 Date Feb. 5, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 5, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00018, PCT Pub.
Date Jan. 7, 1982
PCT FUed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 348,045
Qaims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jun. 25, 1980,
8020828
Int. a.J B27G 5/02
U.S. a. 83—762 2 Claims
1. A mitre block comprising a receiving slot to receive the
article to be cut and two guide slou at right angles to one
another for guiding the cutting implement, the guide slots
intersecting with one another and with the receiving slot at a
common intersection point at one end of the receiving slot.
1. An apparatus for cutting sheet material comprising:
a cutting tool in the form of an elongated cutting blade
which reciprocates generally along an axis of reciproca-
tion when performing a cutting operation, the cutting
blade having a leading cutting edge and a trailing edge,
the cutting edge and trailing edge being generally parallel
to the axis of reciprocation;
means defining a support surface for supporting sheet mate-
rial to be cut by the cutting blade;
means supporting the cutting blade with the axis of recipro-
cation of the blade generally perpendicular to the support
surface;
motive means for translating the cutting blade generally
progressively along a desired lie of cut relative to the
sheet material on the suppori surface;
means for reciprocating the cutting blade along the axis of
reciprocation in alternate upward and downward strokes
between upper and lower limits of travel; and
mechanical means interposed between the cutting blade and
the blade supporting means for producing from the recip-
4,436,015
STRINGED INSTRUMENT BRIDGE
MUan S. Zarich, 801 Dodd Rd., West St. Paul, Minn. 55118
FUed Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,123
Int. a? GIOD 3/04
U.S. a. 84— 298 , 4 Claims
E
^WVWWWW
II IS
1. A bridge for a stringed instrument comprising:
a base plate,
an elongate end wall extending perpendicularly from said
base plate and having a plurality of laterally spaced string
grooves extending across said end wall spaced from said
base plate,
an elongate bridge bar supported spaced from and parallel to
said end wall and having string support grooves across its
surface that faces said base plate corresponding to said
string support grooves across said end wall, and
means for moving said bridge bar toward and away from
said base plate while maintaining the spacing between said
bridge bar string support grooves and said base plate less
than the spacing between said end wall string suppon
grooves and said base plate.
534
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
4,436,016
VARIABLE ENERGY MISSILE EJECT SYSTEM
Gajrlord S. Olmited, Lot Altos, and Gordon W. Roao, Saratosi,
both of Califs aidgnort to Weitinghonae Electric Corp^ Pitts-
bargh. Pa.
FUed Ang. 11, 1981, Scr. No. 291,746
Int CL3 F41F 3/04
MS. a 89-1.809 7 Claims
1. A variable energy missile eject system comprising an
invariable gas generator having an outlet nozzle;
a cooling chamber filled with a liquid and having an outer
housing;
a standpipe disposed within said housing to form a centrally
located gas conduit in fluid communication with said gas
generator outlet nozzle;
said standpipe having a nozzle disposed in the lower portion;
said standpipe having an inner and outer wall portion dis-
posed to form an inner annular chamber above said stand-
pipe nozzle and an outer annular chamber extending
above and below said standpipe nozzle;
a first set of ports in said standpipe disposed above said
standpipe nozzle providing fluid communication between
said gas conduit and said inner annular chamber;
a second set of ports in said standpipe disposed in the upper
portion of said outer wall of said standpipe providing fluid
communication between inner annular chamber and said
outer annular chamber;
a third set of ports disposed in said standpipe below said
standpipe nozzle providing fluid communication between
said gas conduit and said outer annular chamber;
a fourth set of ports disposed to provide fluid communica-
tion between said gas conduit and said outer annular
chamber;
means for controlling the flow of fluid through said fourth
set of ports; and
a rupture disc disposed in said gas conduit to seal the fluid in
said annular chambers and said gas conduit.
4,436,017
MUZZLE BRAKE FOR ARTILLERY GUNS
igell MoUin, Karlskoga, Sweden, assignor to Aktiebolaget
Bofors, Bofors, Sweden
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,055
Int a.3 F41F 17/12
MS. CL 89—14 C 3 Claims
said opening including an exchangeable wear ring axially slid
into said opening and attached to the outer face of said front
wall of said body.
4,436,018
MULTIPLE LOOP CONTROL SYSTEM
MUford R. Murphy, Arlington, and Delbert E. Haakins, Irving,
both of T«., assignors to Textron Inc., ProTidence, R.I.
FUed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,713
Int. a.J F15B 9/03. 9/09
VS. a. 91-363 A 18 Claims
FAIUJME LOCIC
POSITION KOUCCK
POSITION «ouce«}Jn^,^^g2J position koucm
1. A multiple loop control system providing a single com-
posite output, comprising:
a plurality of actuators, each actuator receiving at least two
separate control signals and generating an output inter-
connected with the output of all other actuators in the
plurality to provide a single composite output;
a plurality of control loops, at least one connected to each of
said actuators, each control loop responsive to an individ-
ual input signal and generating one of said control signals
to one of the actuators; and
failure monitoring means connected to each of said actuators
and the control loops to monitor the operation thereof,
said failure monitoring means including means responsive
to a monitor signal from each actuator, and means respon-
sive to the monitor signal from one actuator having a
difference from the monitor signals for the other actuators
above a first threshold level to generate the disengage
signal to one of the actuators for a failure condition, said
failure monitoring means further including means for
detecting a hard-type failure and inert-type failure and
means for generating a disengage signal at a lower thresh-
old level for an inert-type failure than for a hard-type
failure.
1. A muzzle brake for artillery guns comprising a sidewardly
open body attached to the muzzle of the barrel of said gun, said
body being defined in the forward direction by a front wall
having an outer face provided with a central opening for the
gun projectiles, the diameter of said opening being adjusted to
the recoil forces initiated by the fire of the gun, the free area of
4,436,019
PRESSURE COMPENSATED FLUID CONTROL VALVE
Tadeusz Budzich, Moreland Hills, Ohio, assignor to Caterpillar
Tractor Company, Peoria, DL
FUed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,606
The portion of the term of this patent snbsequent to Mar. 13,
2001, has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 P15B 13/04
VS. a. 91—446 32 Claims
12. A valve assembly supplied with pressure fluid by a pump,
said valve assembly comprising a housing having an inlet
chamber, a supply chamber, first and second load chambers
and exhaust means connected to reservoir means, first valve
means for selectively interconnecting said load chambers with
said supply chamber and said exhaust means, first control
orifice means responsive to movement of said first valve means
and operable to meter fluid flow between said supply chamber
and said load chambers, second control orifice means respon-
sive to movement of said first valve means and operable to
meter fluid flow between said load chambers and said exhaust
means, positive load fluid throttling means between said inlet
chamber and said supply chamber, negative load fluid throt-
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
535
tling means between said load chambers and said exhaust
means, single pilot valve means operable through said positive
load fluid throttling means to throttle fluid flow from said inlet
chamber to said supply chamber and also operable through
said negative load fluid throttling means to throttle fluid flow
from said load chambers to said exhaust means to maintain a
constant pressure differential at a preselected constant level
across said pilot valve means and to maintain a constant pres-
sure differential across said first and said second control orifice
means, and valve means having means operable through said
positive and said negative load fluid throttling means to vary
the level of said constant pressure differential across said first
and said second control orifice means while said pressure
differential across said pilot valve means remains constant at
said constant predetermined level.
" 4,436,020
DUAL INPUT PRESSURE COMPENSATED FLUID
CONTROL VALVE
Tadeusz Buddch, Moreland HUls, Ohio, assignor to CaterpUlar
Tractor Company, Peoria, lU.
FUed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,036
Int a.3 F15B 13/04
VS. CL 91—446 10 Claims
1. A control valve assembly operable to control fluid flow to
and from a fluid motor subjected to a load, said valve assembly
having first valve means operable to meter fluid flow of said
motor, throttling control means operable to throttle fluid flow
of said motor. pUot valve means having means responsive to a
load pressure related control signal and operable through said
throttling control means to maintain a relatively constant pres-
sure differential at a preselected constant level acrou said pilot
valve means and to maintain a constant pressure differential
across said first valve means during control of said load, and
controller means having means responsive to displacement of
said first valve means and means operable to modify said load
pressure related control signal, whereby the level of said con-
stant pressure differential acting across said first valve means
can be varied in respect to displacement of said first valve
means while said pressure differential across said pilot valve
means remains constant at said constant predetermined level.
4,436,021
CHIMNEY CAP
Durward A. Hisey, St Louis, Mo., assignor to HY<C Company
Inc., St Louis, Mo.
FUed Mar. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 357,733
Int CI.J F23J 13/08
VS. a. 98—67 9 Claims
1. In a chimney cap for use in providing coverage for the
upper end of the formed chimney flue and thereby preventing
the entrance of any extraneous elements therein, comprising, a
cover means provided upwardly of the chimney flue and pre-
venting the entrance of rain or other elements downwardly
into the chimney flue, a band means arranged downwardly of
the said cover means and designed for proximity fitting upon
the said chimney flue, said cover and band means being spaced
apart a distance heightwise to allow sufficient draft to develop
and remove smoke and fumes from the chimney flue, a forami-
nous means arranged connecting with both the said cap and
band means and disposed spanning the space in between the
said means and arranged substantially in alignment with the
said band means, and retention means operatively associated
with the said band means for assuring its securement with the
chimney flue upon which it seate, said retention means includ-
ing at least one adjusuble fastener securing with the band
means and capable of tightening into binding engagement with
the chimney flue, said retention means including a flexible
strap being attached interioriy of the band means, said strap
capable of being forced inwardly during chimney cap adjust-
ment, and fastening means incorporated within the retention
means and when adjusted binding against the flexible strap for
forcing it further inwardly for binding engagement with the
chimney flue.
4,436,022
FUME HOOD INCORPORATING HIGH EFHCIENCY
AUXILIARY AIR PLENUM
Jon A. Zboralaki, Manitowoc; Harry N. Grow, Two Rivers, and
Stephen E. Holachbach, Manitowoc, aU of Wis., assignors to
HamUton Industries, Inc., Two Rivers, Wis.
FUed Aug. 28, 1981, Scr. No. 297^87
Int a^ F23J 11/00
VS. CL 98—115 LH 3 Oakm
1. A fume hood comprising s frame including top, rear, and
side panels, and an air exhaust opening; a bypass opening on
536
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
the front portion of the hood; an auxiliary air housing mounted
on the uppermost portion of the front of the hood and extend-
ing outwardly therefrom; and an access opening on the rear
portion of the auxiliary air housing which is disposed at the
bypass opening of said hood; wherein said housing further
comprises an auxiliary air supply opening; a primary means for
diffusing a downward flow of air from the air supply, said
primary means disposed adjacent to the auxiliary air supply
opening; a secondary means for diffusing the downward flow
of air, said secondary means positioned below the primary
means; a tertiary means for diffusing the downward flow of air
and directing the passage of said air flow in front of the front
portion of the hood, wherein said tertiary means includes a
downwardly depending baffle which slopes downwardly
away from the front of the hood from an area directly above
said bypass opening; said baffle comprising a perforated sup-
port member having a layer of porous diffuser material
thereon; said support member having a perforated rear portion
disposed immediately in front of the upper margin of said
bypass opening which is free of said diffuser material; said
baffle also including a front portion extending along the lower
forward margin thereof providing a second layer of diffuser
material; said front portion of said baffle and said rear portion
of said support member each having a length constituting a
minor portion of the length of said baffle measured from front
to rear thereof
4,436,023
APPARATUS FOR COOKING FOOD AND EXTRACTING
SMOKE
Kensttke Takahashi, c/o Kabnshiki Kaisha Diamond Hotel, 25,
IcUbancho, Chiyodaku, Tokyo 102, Japan
nied Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,983
lot a.3 A47J iim
U.S. a. 99—400 17 Claims
9. An apparatus for cooking food and extracting the smoke
produced thereby, comprising:
a table with a hole formed through its surface;
heating means fixed to the table surface;
a grill placed atop said heating means, said grill comprising:
an upwardly convex central body,
a plurality of raised noses formed on the surface of said
central body, said noses being directed radially outward
from the upper surface of said therein;
a peripheral groove for collecting juices encircling said
central body; and
a sidewall encircling said peripheral groove;
a downwardly opening hood for collecting smoke supported
above said heating means by means independent of said
Uble;
a hollow pipe having an open upper end positioned inside
said hood above the lower edge of said hood and a lower
end inserted tightly but removably into said hole through
said table, said pipe having no structural connection to
said hood; and a ventilation duct connected to said lower
end leading away from said table to external exhaust.
4,436,024
nUEPLACE ROTISSERIE
Terry D. Arden, 5009 Lunow, Oklahoma aty, Okla. 73135, and
Robert M. Foglesong, 3115 Del View, Del Qty, Okla. 73115
FUed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,415
Int a.J A47J 37/04
U.S. a. 99-421 HV 4 Claims
1. A portable device for cooking over an open fire in a
fireplace, said fireplace having a back wall, comprising:
a base;
vertically adjustable standard means supported by said base;
tubular means horizontally supported by said standard
means;
a post vertically secured to said back wall,
said post having a plurality of vertically spaced apertures;
a spit extending between and supi)orted at its respective end
portions by said tubular means and said post;
a drive rod coaxially secured to said tubular means opposite
said spit;
handle means including a hub having internal step diameters
respectively surrounding the drive rod equipped end
portion of said tubular means and an adjacent intermediate
portion of said drive rod;
set screw means including fu^t and second set screws on said
hub for selectively securing said hub to said drive rod for
manual angular rotation of the drive rod or rigidly secur-
ing said hub to said tubular means; and,
a rotisserie motor drivably connected with said drive rod,
whereby said handle means forms a stop when rigidly
securred to said tubular means for preventing angular
rotation of said rotisserie motor as a unit about the axis
of said drive rod.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
537
4,436,025
SECTIONING DEVICE FOR ROUNDED FOOD
ARTICLES
FVank W. Jones, P.O. Box 4074, GreenviUe, Del. 19807
FUed Apr. 1, 1983, Ser. No. 48130
Int. a.3 A47J 17/00
U.S. a. 99—538 11 Claims
4,436,026
EMPTY CAN CRUSHER
Yoshinobu Imamura; SUgeki Kamci, both of Nishlnomiya;
Tetuo Yamagata, Kobe, and Hiroshi FiUU, Amagasaki, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi Kldcn Kogyo, Ltd., Hyogo, Japaa
Filed Dm. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,748
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 6, 1981, 56*32908;
Jan. 29, 1981, 56-97399[U]; Jun. 29, 1981, 56-97400rUl; Jno. 29,
1981, 56-97401[U]
lot a.3 B30B 9/i2
U.S. a. 100—45 11 Claims
1. A device for sectioning a rounded food article comprising
a base
a conical cup of internally sharp radial blades mounted in the
base and having an apex disposed towards the base with
substantially wedge-shaped spaces between the blades,
slide guide means connected to the base,
a plunger having an outer perimeter having slide guide ways
located at the outer perimeter of the plunger in which the
slide guides engage, the plunger transversing towards the
base and returning along the slide guide means,
the plunger having slide guide obstructing tabs attached to
the outer perimeter of the plunger adjacent on each side of
the slide guide ways causing the plunger to rotate when
the plunger is installed inproperly without all the slide
guide ways cooperating with the slide guides such that the
plunger strikes the base rather than said blades;
an annular array of fingers depending from the plunger
which freely engage within the wedge-shaped spaces between
the radial blades when the plunger is moved towards the
blades, the fingers each comprising a linear element having
two ends, one end of each of the fingers being attached to the
plunger and the other end being free, the fingers being long
enough to substantially pass througli the blades when the
movement of the plunger into engagement with the base is
terminated,
stop means on the base and plunger for terminating their
engagement with each other,
a spike having a point and a stem centrally mounted at the
central junction of the blades to form their apex disposed
within the cup, the point of the spike extending upwardly
adjacent the entrance to the cup for holding the article
aligned for engagement by the plunger and for initiating
the radial splitting of the ariicle which is continued and
completed by the blades, the stem of the spike freely
terminating a short distance below the cup of blades.
1. An apparatus for crushing and sorting empty cans, com-
prising:
a main body frame;
a pressing device, said pressing device including a vertically
extending back pressure plate, a vertically extending
pressing plate horizonully spaced from and confronting
said back pressure plate, and means, including a hydraulic
cylinder, for linearly moving said pressing plate horizon-
tally toward and away from said back pressure plate be-
tween a first position horizontally spaced from said back
pressure plate a distance greater than the diameter of the
empty can to be crushed and a second position horizon-
tally spaced from said back pressure plate a distance sub-
suntially less than the diameter of the empty can to be
crushed;
an empty can supporting bar pivotally mounted to said
frame at said back pressure plate for vertically supporting
the empty can between said back pressure plate and said
pressing plate during movement of said pressing plate
toward said back pressure plate;
a magnet embedded in said pressing plate for holding a
magnetically attractive crushed empty can to said pres-
sure plate when said pressing plate is moved away from
said back pressure plate;
means for separating the magnetically attractive crushed
empty can from said pressing plate after said pressure
plate has moved away from said back pressure plate to a
third position whereby the magnetically attractive
crushed empty can falls downward under the influence of
gravity;
an empty chute for delivering an empty can to a position
between said back pressure plate and said pressing plate
when said pressing plate is in said first position; and
a forked sorting chute located in said main body frame
below said pressing device defming a fuit path below said
first position and a second path below said third position,
said forked sorting chute respectively directing magneti-
cally non-attractive and magnetically attractive crushed
empty cans falling from said pressing plate to separate
locations along fuit and second paths.
S38
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,027
STRIPPER BAR FOR ROLL BALING MACHINE
John H. Freimuth, New Holland, and Willis R. Campbell,
Ephrata, botii of Pa., aadgnora to Sperry Corporation, New
Holland, Pa. i~ •«»
FUed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,778
lat a.3 B30B 5/04
U.S. a. 100-88 5 Claims
barriers located superjacent the corresponding sides of said
rolls, and
discharge means including collector boxes located laterally
adjacent the nip of the rolls to remove collected fluid
expelled from the organic material.
4,436,029
DEVICE FOR THE PRESS DOOR OF A BALING PRESS
Albert Goldhanuner, Zum Hecht 46, D-7770 Cberlingen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 198,965, Oct. 20, 1980, abandoned.
This application Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,204
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 18,
1979, 2942218; Oct. 18, 1979, 2942229
Int. a.J B30B 15/32
U.S. a. 100-250 13 animg
1. In a roll baling machine having a base frame, a rear frame
pivotally connected to said base frame, a floor roller rotatably
supported on said frame, bale forming means supported on said
base and rear frames cooperating with said floor roller to
define a bale chamber for forming a roll bale of crop material,
said rear frame being pivotally movable between a lower posi-
tion for formation of a roll bale in said bale chamber and an
upper position for discharge of a roll bale from said bale cham-
ber, the improvement comprising:
a stripper bar mounted on said rear frame for removing crop
material from said floor roller during formation of a roll
bale in said bale chamber, said stripper bar having an edge
located proximate to said floor roller when said rear frame
is in said lower fXMition.
4,436,028
ROLL MILL FOR REDUCnON OF MOISTURE
CONTENT IN WASTE MATERIAL
DairW M. WUder, 82061 Lost VaUey La., Dexter, Oreg. 97431
FUed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 377,262
Int CL^ B30B i/04
U.S. a. 100-121 ^ 6 Claims
1. A closure device for a baling press having one end en-
closed by a press door, comprising a press door pivotobly
mounted at its lower end to said baling press, traverse bar
means secured to the upper end of said door and for holding
said door against said baling press, lever means fixably secured
to an end of an eccentric member, the eccentric member hav-
ing its opposite end routably coupled to the baling press, and
a pivotable closure beam having one end rotatably connected
to said lever means and the other end of the beam having a
guide opening inclined at an angle to the vertical such that the
guide opening is inclined opposite the direction of closure of
said press door, the traverse bar means being received in the
guide opening for holding said door against said baling press,
whereby rotation of said lever means in a closure direction
effects roution of said eccentric member and a corresponding
pivotable movement of the beam end rotatably connected to
said lever such that the inclined guide opening is displaced
towards said baling press to secure said door to the baling
press.
1. A two roll press machine for removing moisture from
organic material, said machine comprising in combination,
a machine base,
a first roll rotatably mounted on said base and coupled to a
roll driving motor and rotaUble about a fwed axis,
a second roll,
a carriage slidably mounting said second roll on said ma-
chine base enabling travel of said second roll into and out
of linear contact with said first roll,
retention means confining said carriage for rectilinear travel
on said base,
powered means carried by said base and acting on said
carriage to urge said second roll into and out of linear
contact with said first roll.
4436 030
MATERIAL COMPACTOR UTILIZING A POWER
TRANSMISSION MECHANISM
John A. Qciora, Denrer, Colo., assignor to Nelson k Johnson
Engineering, Boulder, Colo.
Division of Ser. No. 80,741, Oct. 1, 1979, Pat No. 4,353,263.
This appUcation Aug. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 407,199
Int a.3 B30B 1/00
U A a. 100—268 9 Claims
1. A material compacting apparatus comprising:
a frame;
means, movably mounted on said frame, for compressing
said material;
means, mounted adjacent said frame, for driving said com-
pressing means; and
a coupling drive comprising:
a shaft;
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
399
a first arbor joumaled on said shaft;
a second arbor joumaled on said shaft; and
4,436,031
SERIAL PRINTER
Fumlhisa Hori, Tamayama, Japan, assignor to Alps Electric Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,544
Claims priority, appUcation Japui, Dec 27, 1980, 55-185990
Int CV B4IJ 1/50
MS. a. 101-93.17 8 Claims
30S * 18
TTIT — ^1 *=v»*
1. A printer including a carriage adapted to be moved along
a line to be printed and carrying a holder containing a plurality
of circumferential rows of type elements, impact means includ-
ing a hammer movable along the line to be printed in unison
with said carriage for pressing a record medium between said
hammer and a selected one of said type elemento placed in a
printing position along the line to be printed, and selection
means for selectively sliding said rows of type elements later-
ally within said carriage for bringing a selected one of said
rows into said printing position, said selection means including
a rotary cam carried by said holder and including spiralling
c«n portion and a return cam portion, a guide portion held to
said carriage and adapted to engage said cam portions and
means including a cam shaft connected to said cam for rotating
said cam so that said guide portion can slide along said cam
portions to shift said holder laterally from its home position
within said carriage to selectively bring said rows into said
printing position and then return said holder to its home posi-
tion within said carriage by routing said shaft in a single direc-
tion, means including a type shaft extending thorugh said rows
of type elements for rotating them to bring a selected angular
position of said rows along said printing position, means in-
cluding a column shaft for shifting said carriage along the line
to be printed, means including a single motor for providing
motive power to each of said cam shaft, said rotary shaft and
said column shaft, means including a first clutch for transmit-
ting motive power selectively from said motor to said type
shaft, means including a second clutch for transmitting motive
power selectively from said motor to said cam shaft, and means
including a third clutch for transmitting motive power to said
column shaft when said first and second clutches are not trans-
mitting motive power to said type shaft and said cam shafts
respectively.
4,436,032
ROTARY SCREEN PRINTING APPARATUS
Wouter C. van Ouwerkerk, Hengelo, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
Msignor to Saneressig GmbH, Ahans-WiUlen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,833
Claims priority, appUcatton Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 21.
1981,3101766
Int a.3 B41L 41/00. 13/18
UA a 101-120 11 Claims
-;5)
engaging means, associated with said arbors and said shaft,
for engaging said first or second arbors with said shaft in
response to the direction of rotation of said shaft.
■is.^y
1. A rotary screen printing apparatus for printing dye on a
web of material, said apparatus having at least one cylindrical
screen printer with a lower portion and an inner side for which
dismantling is avoided to undertake dye change quickly at
minimum cost while also minimizing any possible dye losses,
which includes centrally therein:
supply and withdrawal means at the lower portion of said
screen printer that selectively supplies or withdraws dye,
said pipe means being connected to a source of dye for
supplying dye over the width of that portion of the inner
side of said screen printer which at any given time is the
lower portion thereof, and also for withdrawing dye
therefrom; said pipe means for supplying and withdrawing
dye being provided with at least one aperture over iu
length being directed on the screen printer and arranged
approximately in the immediate vicinity of the inner lower
side of said screen printer and being selectively connect-
ible with a dye conveying pump to supply dye and a dye
withdrawal pump selectively to remove excess quantities
of dye from said screen printer so that undesired passage
of dye through the screen printer is avoided during stand-
still thereof; means for guiding a web material to be
printed on vertically past said screen printer so that during
the printing procedure the web of material engages tan-
gentially against the screen printer and unwanted or un-
used dye reaching the web of material including any final
dye residue, is drained and/or withdrawn from the lower
inside portion of the screen printar to facilitate cleaning
thereof; and
a squeegee device which, when viewed in the direction of
rotation of said screen printer, is spaced from said pipe
means for supplying the dye that the squeegee device
pushes through the screen printer and is positioned so that
excess dye is accummulated between the squeegee device
and the lower portion of said screen printer and drains or
runs off along said screen printer for recovery therefrom
via said pipe means.
540
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,033
HOLLOW CHARGES WITH PLURAL CONICAL
CONnCURATIONS
Mkfael Precoul, Paris, France, aaaignor to Sodete d'Etudes, de
Realisatioiu et d'AppUcations Techniques (SERAT), Paris,
France
FUed Jul. 28, IWl, Ser. No. 287,547
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 6, 1980, 80 17341
Int a.J F42B 1/02
\}&. a. 102-307 18 Claims
the ignition means up to the perforated cover being shorter
than the combined burning times of the third delay charge and
of the second stooping fuse together, which lead from the
1. In a hollow charge of the type including a main explosive
charge, a priming charge at a rear portion of said main explo-
sive charge, and covering at a forward end of said main explo-
sive charge, said covering having a longitudinal axis, the im-
provement wherein said covering comprises:
plural covering stages disposed sequentially from a rear end
to a forward end of said covering;
each said stage having a conical configuration which con-
verges toward said rear end of said covering and which
defmes with a plane extending longitudinally through said
axis a pair of rectilinear slopes converging toward said
rear end of said covering;
the apical angles defmed by said pairs of rectilinear slopes
increasing from said rear end of said covering to said
forward end thereof; and
rectilinear extensions of said slopes of adjacent said sUges
intersecting.
4,436,034
SMOKE GRENADE WITH SUCCESSIVE SLOW AND
PAST BURNING CHARGES
KieU O. Jacobsen, Ranfoss; Tore Matre, Oster&s; Rolf I. Hal-
▼orsen, BoTerbm; Ingar H. Heie, Raufoas; Erling Myhrrold,
Raufoaa, and Ove R. Bcrger, Raufoas, aU of Norway, assignors
to A/S Raufoas Ammuni^nsfabrikker, Ranfoss, Norway
FUed May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260^27
Int a.3 C06D 3/00
UA a. 102-334 2 Claims
1. A smoke shell for successively discharging a fast burning
smoke emitting charge and a slow burning smoke emitting
charge comprising a steel casing, an inner casing positioned in
the upper part of the said steel casing and enclosing an upper
instantaneous fast burning smoke emitting charge in the form
of a scries of annular disc rings, and an ignition bursting charge
disposed in the central lower end of the steel casing ignition
means for igniting said bursting charge, a first stooping fuse in
the lower part of the steel casing leading from the ignition
means and extending upwardly through said slow burning
charge, an ejector charge a delay charge for controlling the
ignition of the ejector charge for the instantaneous fast burning
charge, a second delay charge disposed in the inner casing for
igniting the ignition bursting charge for the instantaneous fast
burning charge, a third delay charge and a second stooping
fuse disposed in a contact head leading from the ignition means
to the ejector charge for ejecting the said shell with ite slow
burning charge, the delay time of the first stooping fuse from
ignition means to the ejector charge, for ejecting the steel shell
with its slow burning charge in a delayed time period after the
inner casing with its fast burning charge has been ejected.
4,436,03S
TUBULAR PROJECnLE
Kaare R. StrandU, Raufoss, Norway, assignor to A/S Raufoss
Ammuniiltonsfabrikker, Raufoss, Norway
Continuation of Ser. No. 112,475, Jan. 16, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Jun. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 384,638
Claims priority, appUcation Norway, Jun. 16, 1979, 790148
Int. a.3 F42B 11/24
U A a. 102-364 5 Claims
1. A tubular projectile having a rear end with a sabot and an
open front end, characterized in that is comprises an interior
and an exterior cylindrical wall, concentrically arranged, be-
tween which at least one incendiary charge is provided in front
of at least one explsoive charge, as seen in the moving direction
of said projectile, the incendiary charge being constructed to
ignite on impact and then to ignite the explosive charge after a
predetermined delay, and including a cover in front of said
incendiary charge, said cover being a separate piece from the
interior and exterior walls, and having a portion which is
thinner and more deformable than the interior and exterior
walls, said cover being firmly secured to the forward end of
the interior and exterior walls.
4,436,036
PROJECTILE FOR DISPENSING GASEOUS MATERIAL
Frank H. Bell, Brigham Qty, Utah, assignor to Thiokol Corpo-
ration, Chicago, ni.
Dirision of Ser. No. 80,359, Sep. 28, 1979, Pat No. 4,353,303,
which is a coBtinaatioa-iB-part of Ser. No. 888,120, Mar. 20,
1978, abandoMd. This applicatioa Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No.
402,496
lat CL3 F42B W46
U.S. CL 102—367 7 n.i—
1. A projectile for dispensing gaseous materials comprising:
a closed, hollow, substantially cylindrical housing located at
a rear portion of the projectile and having an aerodynamic
forward surface forming a front portion of the projectile,
said forward surface having an aft end;
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S41
a central venturi tube having one end fixed inside the hous-
ing to a portion of the housing at the forward end thereof
that is adjacent the aft end of said forward surface and
extending aftwardly into said housing to form an annular
space therein;
means in said substantially cylindrical housing and located
adjacent the aft end of said forward surface for venting the
forward end of the venturi tube to the external environ-
ment at an area of maximum turbulence about said projec-
of reaction products within the reactor wherein said point
source of heat is an electrically heated glow plug.
material to be dispensed located in and completely filling the
annular space in said housing surrounding the venturi
tube, said material being capable of being gasified;
means for retaining said material in said annular space in said
housing;
means for releasing said material from said annular space in
said housing in the form of a gas; and
spring-loaded valve means located at the forward end of the
venturi tube for normally closing the venturi tube and for
maintaining a predetermined operating pressure within
the projectile.
4436 037
CONTINUOUS IGNITION SOURCE FOR CONTROLLED
DISPOSAL OF COMBUSTIBLE POLYMER WASTE IN A
FLUIDIZED BED REACTOR
Hoag-Hsiang Kuo, Troy, Mich., assignor to General Motors
Corporation, Detroit Mich.
FUed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,457
Int a.3 F23G 5/00, 7/00
\}S. a. 110—245 4 Claims
4,436 038
METHOD OF PREPARING PULVERIZED FUEL
WTTHDRAWN FROM A PRIMARY FUEL FLOW FOR A
PULVERIZED FUEL PILOT UGHT BY MEANS OF A
SIFTER DEVICE OR A SUPPLEMENTAL PULVERIZING
PLANT
Klaus LeUiert Gummersbach, and Klaus-Dieter Rennert Ma-
rienbeidc, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aasignors to L. A C.
SteUuBiUler GmbH, Gummersbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,252
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 16,
1981, 3105626
Int a.» F23D 7/00
U.S. a. 110-347 5 Claims
1. A method of preparing pulverized ignition fuel for ignit-
ing a pulverized-fuel annular burner flame having an internal
back flow reg.on, with the ignition energy for said annular
burner flame being introduced centrally into the interior of the
back flow region of the annular burner flame, said method
comprising the steps of:
supplying said burner with a pulverized fuel/carrier air
mixture from a pulverizing plant via a primary fuel con-
duit;
providing a pilot light for furnishing said ignition energy,
said pilot light being operated with pulverized ignition
fuel having at least one of the characteristics of coarseness
and consistency/different from the same characteristic of
said primary fuel;
withdrawing said pulverized ignition fuel for said pilot light
from said primary fuel conduit through the opening of a
withdrawal device which is capable of being shut off;
processing said withdrawn pulverized ignition fuel prior to
supplying same to said pilot light; and
directing said withdrawal opening of said withdrawal device
counter to the flow in said primary fuel conduit.
1. In a fluidized bed reactor suitable for burning paint sludge
having an acrylic polymer constituent the improvement com-
prising a point source of heat maintained at a temperature
above the ignition temperature of the polymer constituent, said
source being located in the reactor such that it is immersed in
the fluidized bed, the presence of said heat source serving to
initially and continuously ignite the acrylic paint component of
the sludge and prevent the accumulation of explosive amounts
4,436,039
ROLUNG DRUM TREE PLANTER
Marion A. Stephens, Jr., 1749 I?aa Gyde Dr., Bogaluaa, La.
70427
FUed Jul. 19. 1982, Ser. No. 399.247
Int a.i AOIC 11/02
U.S. a. 111—2 11 Claims
1. Apparatus for planting a tree or other plant comprising: a
carriage assembly having an opening at least in the forward
portion thereof; means for accommodating a human operator
of the apparatus in a non-rotating position within said carriage;
a cylindrical drum mounted for rotation about the circumfer-
ence of the carriage; at least one soil penetrating implement
attached to the exterior of the drum; and a slot located in the
drum adjacent said soil penetrating implement, said slot being
342
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
aligned with the opening in the carriage during rotation of said
drum to allow a plant to be positioned in said slot by the opera-
when said pan is in said second pocition and said pan is
moved rearwardly across the ground.
1. A multi-purpose lawn landscaping device for use on a
tractor hitch capable of raising and lowering the device, said
landscaping device comprising:
(a) a support frame;
(b) means securing said frame to said tractor hitch adjacent
one end of said frame;
(c) an elongate transversely disposed pan having a ground
scraper blade adjacent a front portion of said pan facing
toward said tractor hitch;
(d) means mounting said pan on said frame adjacent the
other end of said frame for pivotal movement about a
longitudinal axis of said ptm between a first position
wherein said pan is generally horizontally disposed, and a
second position wherein said pan is generally upright with
said scraper blade extending downwardly for engagement
with the ground;
(e) a fluid motor having pivotal connection on said support
frame on one end thereof and on said pan on the other end
thereof and on said pan on the other end for moving said
pan between said second position wherein said scraper
blade is in engagement with the ground to remove soil
therefrom, and said first position wherein said pan is gen-
erally horizontally disposed to transport removed soil
therein; and
(0 backfill means comprising an elongate blade extending
along the length of the pan and pivotally attached to a
forward undenurface portion thereof for movement be-
tween a rearwardly extending inoperative position when
said pan is in said first position, and a downwardly extend-
ing operative position for engagement with the ground
4.436,041
ATTACHMENT FOR FEEDING REINFORCING BACK
BUTTONS TO A SEWING MACHINE
Hermuin Taddicken. SchwMUsch Gnttnd, Fed. Rep. of Gcr>
many, aaiignor to Eiaeic Apparate-nnd Gcrateban GmbH,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,474
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 13,
1981, 8114009[U]
Int. a.i DOSB 3/J4
U.S. a. 112-110 7 Claims
tor for insertion in the ground after contact with the ground is
made by the soil penetrating implement.
4436040
LANDSCAPING AND SEEDING APPARATUS
William M. Cbnmley, Rte. 6, Box 600, Greer, S.C. 29651
Continuation of Ser. No. 144,427, Apr. 28, 1980. This appUcation
Aug. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 409,968
Int a.} AOIC 7/08
VJS. a. 111—10 22 Clalma
N. v.'.
Vi;
1. An attachment for feeding reinforcing back buttons to a
sewing machine having a feed for main buttons to a button
clamp which is positionable over the work material which is
moved through a sewing station, comprising a plate member
over which the material is set having a button chute guide
groove defined thereon terminating in a button recess having a
button aligning stop edge at the end thereof, and a back button
feed chute connected to said plate for feeding back buttons in
succession into said recess against said aligning stop edge.
4,436,042
DUAL FUNCnON SEWING MACHINE WTTH A
ROTATABLE BASE
Susumu Hanyu, and Yodiikazu Ebata, both of Tokyo, Japan,
aadgnon to Janomc Sewing Machine Co. Ltd., KyobaaU,
Japan
FUed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,658
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 31, 1981, 56-135436
Int a.3 DOSB 75/06
U.S. a. 112—217.1 7 cialraa
1. In a double-function sewing machine having a machine
body, lock stitching mechanism and an overlock stitching
mechanism positioned at two opposite sides of the machine
body, and feet positioned on a lower surface of the machine
body and abutting against a machine mounting surface on
which the machine is positioned, a switching device for
switching the positions of the lock stitching mechanism and the
overlock stitching mechanism comprising rotating switching
means disposed on said lower surface of the machine body and
including a rotauble operating member, a base disc operatively
connected to said operating member and adapted to move in a
vertical direction with respect to said lower surface upon
rotation of said operating member between a rest position in
which said base disc is above the machine mounting surface
and an operating position in which said base disc projects
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
543
downward fariher than said feet to contact said machine 4,436,044
mounting surface, whereby the machine body is lifted from the THREAD WIPING DEVICE
Eric W. Norditrom, Foreat Park, and Laomcc A. MaMMkl, Mt
Proapect, both of lU., aastgnors to Union Special Corporation,
Chicago, ni.
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,649
Int. a.> D05B 65/06
SClaims
U.S. a. 112—286
^ I X—
machine mounting surface and may be rotated in a horizontal
plane to place a required one of said stitching mechanisms to a
use position.
4436 043
GATE BRACKEnNG CUSHIONING SPRING
ARRANGEMENT FOR A SEWING MACHINE
EdUbcrto Cantada, East Brunswick, N J., assignor to The Singer
Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 375,922
Int. a.} DOSB 3/02
VJS. a. 112—221 2 Claims
1. In a sewing machine, a needle bar, a movable gate with a
bearing therein in which the needle bar is supported for end-
wise reciprocation, latching means carried on the needle bar,
actuating means for impariing endwise reciprocatory motion
to the needle bar through said latching means, means for un-
latching the latching means from said actuating means, elevat-
ing spring means for raising the needle bar when unlatched
from the actuating means, a fixed member on the needle bar,
and a cushioning spring clipped with upper end gate bracket-
ing coils onto the gate structure in a coaxial position with
respect to the needle bar for engagement by said fixed member
when the needle bar is raised by the elevating spring means, the
said bearing being located in an arm on the gate for the needle
bar, the bearing being encircled and gripped on an upper side
of the arm by one of the coils of the cushioning spring, and the
the other coils of the spring being located under the arm.
1. In a sewing machine having a stitching mechanism includ-
ing an eye pointed thread carrying needle means operable
along a straight line path during the sewing operation, mecha-
nism for securing the loose end of a sewing thread during the
initial operation of the stitching mechanism comprising:
spindle means arranged for movement about a fixed axis
extending generally parallel to the path of the needle
means with an annular bearing projecting transversely
therefrom;
thread engaging element means arranged at one end of said
spindle means;
a sleeve provided with an anfractuous slot whose side edges
tangentially engage and positively guide said bearing to
rotate the spindle means and thereby the thread engaging
element means outward and back along identical paths;
and
means for reciprocating the spindle means whereby moving
said element through a helical path extending generally
parallel to the needle's path with a segmented portion of
said helical path crossing the needle thread path below the
eye pointed needle.
4,436,045
DIFFERENTIAL FEED MECHANISM FOR SEWING
MACHINES
Richard T. Boaham, Oak Park; John P. Sigiols, Chicago, and
Paul H. Diakelacker, HUlside, aU of lU., assignors to Union
Special Corporation, Chicago, lU.
FUed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,147
Int. a.} DOSB 27/08
U.S. a. 112—313 3 Claims
1. In a sewing machine having a frame, a nuin drive shaft,
reciprocatory needle means, and a differential feed mechanism
comprising:
first and second feed dog carrier means arranged side by side
and supported for oscillatory and reciprocatory move-
ments relative to said frame;
means for interconnecting said first and second feed dog
carrier means to permit relative horizontal movement
between said carrier means and to prevent relative verti-
cal movement of said bars;
eccentric drive means arranged on said drive shaft for im-
parting simultaneous vertical movement of said first and
second feed dog carrier means;
first operative means interconnecting the drive shaft and said
first feed dog carrier means for effecting reciprocatory
horizontal movement of said first feed dog carrier means;
•iT
S44
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
second operative means interconnecting the drive shaft and
said second feed dog carrier means for effecting recipro-
catory horizontal movement of said second feed dog
carrier means;
each of said first and second operative means includes a
means for converting the rotational movement of the
drive shaft into oscillatory motion, a driving lever con-
nected to said motion converting means to be oscillated
thereby along a predetermined oscillatory path, linkage
means including two interconnected and substantially
equal links for connecting said driving lever to said feed
said ramps and deposited therefrom on the remaining ice
mass on either side of said channel, said stem and cutting
edges having an acute angle therebetween, and
a pair of longitudinally oriented sweep means, each having a
substantially vertical hinge at its leading edge for pivotally
connecting it to said hull for moving said deposited ice
fragments further away from said substantially ice-free
channels.
4,436,047
BOOM FOR SAILBOARDS
Leonardo Freyrie, Milan, Italy, assignor to AMF Inc., White
Plains, N.Y.
FUed May «, 1982, Ser. No. 375,254
Claims priority, application Italy, May 5, 1981, 12517 A/81
Int. aj B63H 9/04
VS. a 114-102 6 Oaims
dog carrier means for imparting reciprocatory horizontal
movements thereto;
a first adjustment means communicating with said first oper-
ative means for varying the extent of reciprocatory hori-
zontal movement of said first feed dog carrier means by
controlling the oscillatory path of the driving lever of said
first operative means; and
a second adjustment means communicating with said second
operative means for varying the extent of reciprocatory
horizontal movement of said second feed dog carrier
means by controlling the oscillatory path of the driving
lever of said second operative means.
4,436,046
ICE-BREAKING HULL
WUliao W. Braiey, 21 Arrowhead Trail, Media, Pa. 19063
FUed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,360
lot aj B63B 35/12, 35/08
UA a 114-42 12 Claims
6. A boom for sailboards having a mast and a substantially
triangular sail secured along one side to the mast, the boom
comprising: two spaced spars joined at their forward ends to
each other and to the mast, plate means fastened to the free end
of the sail and constrained by the aft ends of the spars for
limited motion substantially along the longitudinal axis of the
boom, and means actuated by motion of the spars subsUntially
transverse to the longitudinal axis for moving the plate means
along the axis to take up slack in the sail that would be pro-
duced by such spar motion.
1. An icebreaker for forming substantially ice-free channel of
water through an ice mass by breaking up a portion of the ice
mass into fragments comprising:
a hull, including a forwardly and upwardly sloping stem;
a pair of ramps having first and second longitudinally sloped
surfaces rigidly connected to and partially surrounding a
portion of said hull for substantially removing said ice
fragments from said water and depositing them on the
remaining ice mass on either side of said channel, each of
said ramps extend forward of said stem and have a longitu-
dinally oriented trough formed by their upper surfaces,
cutting edges molded to said stem and to inboard and out-
board sides of said ramps which form the sides of said
troughs for breaking said ice mass into substantially strips
of ice fragments that are removed from the water along
4436048
ROTARY TRANSFER SUBSYSTEMS AND TENSIONING
ASSEMBLIES FOR A PROCESS VESSEL
Larry L. Gentry, Sunnyvale; Herbert H. Mois, Cupertino, both
of CaUf.; Narayana N. Panicker, Grand Prairie, Tex., and
William T. Wada, Sunnyrale, Calif., assignors to MobU Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 391,070
Int. a.3 E21B 43/01
VJS. a. 114-230 20 Claims
1. A rotary fluid transfer subsystem, for transfer of produc-
tion fluids, electrical power, hydraulic power, and control
signals across a rotating interface between an offshore process
vessel and a flowline bundle of service hoses and high-pressure
hoses which are connected to a deepwater production riser
system, and a tensioning means, for maintaining a selected
tension on terminal hoses between said interface and said vessel
while said vessel weathervanes during maintenance of position
in a watch circle above said riser system, said subsystem and
said tensioning means being mounted on said vessel which is
equipped with a powered turret within a circular moonpool
and is capable of performing most subsea service functions on
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
343
said riser system without nuyor equipment support, said sub-
system and said tensioning means, in combination, comprising:
A. a column assembly which is attached to said turret and
supports horizontal loops of terminal hoses;
B. a multi-passage swivel for accommodating a poriion of
said terminal hoses not containing gas;
C. a tower for selectively tensioning said portion of said
hoses and for connecting said hoses to production piping;
D. a traveling sheave and drive mechanism which supports
horizontal loops of the remaining poriion of said hoses
while maintaining tension on and adjusting the lengths of
said remaining hoses, between connections to storage
facilities in said vessel and said column assembly, while
said column assembly remains rotatably stationary with
respect to said flowline bundle during said weathervaning
of said vessel through at least 270*; and
E. hose support trays for supporting horizontal spans of said
hoses between said tower and said column and between
said column and said traveling sheave.
4,436,049
SIMULATOR FOR TESTING SONOBUOYS
Louis E. Ante; Richard A. Lindquist, and Eugene R. Roeschlein,
•U of IndianapoUs, Ind., aaaignon to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Wash-
ington, D.C.
FUed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,152
Int. a.J B63B 2 J/16. 21/52
VJS. a. 114—254 2 Claims
1. Apparatus for simulating a sea condition for a sonobuoy
being tested in a relatively calm body of water, said sonobuoy
comprising a float and a hydrophone connected to said float by
an electrical cable comprising:
a floating platform,
means, comprising a winch placed on shore and a cable
connecting said winch with said floating platform, for
moving said floating platform at a predetermined speed
for simulating a sea current,
a drum rotatably mounted on said floating platform,
a motion cable having one end attached to said electrical
cable and the other end attached to said drum,
a reversible motor for rotating said drum, and
control means for regulating rotation of said reversible
motor whereby said motion cable is wound upon said
drum and unwound from said drum in a manner to simu-
late action of sea waves on said hydrophone, said control
means comprising a plurality of programmable read-only
memories for storing digital voltage values representing
sea wave amplitudes and having a selector switch for
selecting a desired memory.
4,436,050
SEMI-SUBMERSIBLE VESSEL
Hadar Liden, VMstra FHiluada, Sweden, aasignor to GotaverkcB
Arendal AB, Gothenburg, Sweden
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,475
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden, Oct. 23, 1980, 8007434
Int. a.} B63B 35/44
VJS. a. 114—265 2 Claims
'V> IS 10^ «->
1. A semisubmersible vessel comprising:
(A) two parallel under-water hulls;
(B) an operating deck shaped as a self-supporting displace-
ment body, having sufficient volume to hold the vessel
floating;
(C) two pairs of columns connecting said operating deck
with said under-water hulls, and arranged at generally
equal distances from each other and at the same distance
from a vertical line of symmetry through the vessel;
(D) said operating deck being a multi-deck high box struc-
ture rigidly interconnecting the upper ends of said col-
umns and extending downwardly below the upper ends of
the columns;
(E) said under-water hulls and said columns being so con-
structed that said operating deck is located substantially
above wave level and said under-water hulls are immersed
sufficiently below water level to assure that they are not
noticeably affected by wave movemenU; and
(F) a horizontal stay means interconnecting each set of
juxuposed columns in each of said pairs thereof and ar-
ranged transversely to said under-water hulls, just above
the decks thereof and below the water level;
(O) the space between said operating deck and said horizon-
tal stay means being free of obstructing cross-braces.
4,436,051
HOISTING AND LOWERING MECHANISM FOR A
ROTATABLE MAST
Jacques NoUea, Paris; Jacques Ragaln, DooMMt, and Marc
PrcTOit, Paris, aU of France, aadgnors to Sodete d'Optiqua,
PredsioB Electronique et Mechaniqnc, Sopeleo^ LeTaUoia-
Perret, France
FUed Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 344,271
Claims priority, appUcation France, Feb. 4, 1961, 81 02098
Int a^ B63G S/38
VS. a. 114—340 4 Claims
1. Mechanism for hoisting and lowering a rotatable mast for
a submarine having a thick hull (6), said mast being guided
along its longitudinal axis with respect to said submarine,
comprising
(a) a suspension (2) associated with means (3) assuring the
vertical connection of said suspension to the lower part of
said mast while permitting relative rotation of said suspen-
sion and said mast; and
546
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
(b) a jack (5) housed rod downward in said mast so that its
cylinder (51) is fast to said suspension (2) and so that the
lower end of its rod (52) is coupled through an anchoring
point (5^ to the upper part of said thick hull (6).
4,436,052
GLOBE-SHAPED BELLS WITH SINGLE-PIECE SHELLS
William It Sdull, Star Rte. Box 137, ApoUo, Pa. 15618
DiTiiioii of Ser. No. 187^95, Sep. 15, 1980, Pat No. 4,349,065.
TTiia application Jon. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 388,782
Int a.3 GIOK 1/07, 1/26
U.S. a 116-148 UCtoiBM
mounted in said slot means and said second leg being
mounted ouuide said marking member, said legs being
spring biased one against the other, whereby when the
spine of the book is inserted between the second leg and
the marking member, the marking member is held in
position in part by bias action between the two legs, and
said unitary member being shaped and rotatable about said
slot means to move said second leg to an outer position to
mark pages of the book and to an inner position to shield
said second leg against said marking member, said second
leg being alternatively resiliently biased toward one of
said inner and outer positions,
said slot means formed of a resilient plastic material extend-
ing along said edge portion, said first leg being inserted
between the facing surfaces of said slot means bowing said
facing surfaces to accommodate said fu^t leg, said first leg
comprising means to bear against said facing surfaces, said
facing surfaces resiliently biased against said means to bear
of said first leg to resiliently maintain said second leg in
said inner and outer positions.
4,436,054
XEROGRAPHIC TONER CLEANING STATION
Theodoms M. Ceelen, LaVeme; Lothar S. Jeromin, Sierra
Madre, and Lamont R. Wright, Paaadena, aU of Calif., anign-
on to Xerox Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Ang. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,666
Int a.3 G03G 21/00
UA a. 118—652 ( Claims
1. A globe-shaped or nearly globe-shaped bell, comprising a
metal shell with holes extending through the shell, which is
molded in only one piece around a readily disintegrative sub-
stance forming an inner core; and a ball-bearing or jinglet,
which, during the process of casting the shell, is held in place
securely in said disintegrative inner core of the shell's mold.
4,436,053
CLIP-ON BOOKMARK
Andre L. Zciaky, 55 W. 14th St, New York, N.Y. 10011
Filed Ang. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292»282
Int a.3 B42D 9/00
MS. a 116-237 15 Claims
1. A clip-on bookmark for a book comprising
a substantially planar marking member having two opposed
covers and at least ode edge portion,
indicia associated with at least a portion of said covers,
slot means formed by said marking member along said edge
portion, and
fastening means received by said slot means for removably
fastening said marking member to the book,
wherein said fastening means for fastening comprises a uni-
tary member comprising oppositely positioned first and
secOTd legs joined at a reverse bend and having an open
side opposite said reverse bend, said first leg being
1. In a system for the development of a xerographic image
comprising a reservoir of cleaning liquid,
a cleaning station for the removal of toner particles from a
xerographic plate after the image has been developed
comprising:
a cyUndrical cleaning roll comprising a foam outer covering
adapted to rotate in contact with said plate to remove said
toner particles from said plate,
a cylindrical donor roll in contact with said cleaning roll at
a nip, said donor roll being rotationally driven by said
cleaning roll,
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
547
means for deUvering a flow of cleaning liquid to the surface
of said donor roll at a point where the rotation of said
donor roll will pull said liquid into the nip, creating there
a standing wave of liquid,
drain means for returning the cleaning liquid which flows
downward from said standing wave into said reservoir,
and
means for rotating said cleaning roll.
4,436,055
DEVELOPING APPARATUS
Keitaro YamasUta, Saitama, and Hiromi Kashiwagi, Kumagaya,
both of Japan, assignors to Hitachi Metals, Ltd., Japan
FUed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,295
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 20, 1981, 56-39543;
Mar. 26, 1981, 56-43169
Int a.} G03G 15/09
MS. G. 118—658 4 Claims
1. A developing apparatus comprising an image carrier
member carrying an electrostatic latent image on a surface
thereof; a plurality of developing rolls disposed in opposition
to said image carrier member with developing gaps being
formed therebetween, each of said developing rolls being
formed therebetween, each of said developing rolls being
composed of a rotatable cylindrical sleeve made of a non-mag-
netic material and a permanent magnet member disposed sta-
tionarily within said sleeve and having a plurality of magnetic
poles formed in the peripheral surface, wherein at least one of
said magnetic poles of each of said permanent magnet members
is disposed in opposition to the associated one of said develop-
ing gaps so that magnetic brushes are formed on the surfaces of
the sleeves at said developing gaps when a magnetic developer
is transferred between the adjacent sleeves upon rotation of
said sleeves in a same direction, said image carrier member
being frictionally swept by said magnetic brushes; a developer
container for supplying said magnetic developer to said devel-
oping rolls; a doctor blade member for controlling a quantity
of said magnetic developer supplied to said developing gaps;
and a scraper member for scraping off the magnetic developer
after having passed through said developing gaps; wherein the
magnetic poles of the adjacent developing rolls which are
positioned in opposition and closest to each other are magne-
tized in polarities opposite to each other, and the magnetic pole
on a magnetic developer receiving side of said oppositely
positioned magnetic poles is displaced in a direction opposite
to the rotating direction of the associated sleeve from a posi-
tion at which said adjacent developing rolls come closest to
each other thereby producing a magnetic coupling having a
direction which is inclined between said oppositely positioned
magnetic poles.
4,436,056
SPILL-RESISTANT PET ANIMAL DISH
Norman J. MacLeod, 730 FraakliB Rd. K-1, Marietta, Ga.
30067
FUed JnL 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,458
lot CL^ AOIK 5/00
MS. a. 119—72 9 n.i—
1. A spill-resistant container for an animal which comprises:
(a) a bowl and lid therefor, the lid having an aperiure to
permit access by the animal to liquid within the bowl; a
segment of the lid having an outside shape to conform to
a portion of the interior surface of the bowl; the lid having
a wall section which extends generally inward and down-
ward from the lower edge of said segment, the wall sec-
tion being adapted to change the direction of a liquid
advancing generally upward along the interior surface of
the bowl and to direct it away from the aperture; and
(b) the bowl having a floor elevated above the lowermost
portion of said interior surface and an inclined section, the
upper surface of which extends generally outward and
downward from the outer periphery of the floor, so that
the lower portion of the bowl forms a depression sur-
rounding the floor, the inclined section being adapted to
create undercurrenu within the liquid as it is being moved
to oppose any forces tending to push it upward along the
interior surface of the bowl.
4,436,057
METHOD AND APPARATUS ENABLING THERMAL
ENERGY RECOVERY IN COMBUSTOR OPERATION
Henry F. Cross, Rickmansworth, and Maurice Haraun, Milton
Keynes, both of England, assignors to Energy Equipment Co.
Ltd., Bedfordshire, England
per No. PCr/GB80/00101, § 371 Date Feb. 10, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 10, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02868, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 24, 1980
per FUed Jun. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 237,144
Claims priority, appUcatioa United Kingdom, Jun. 15, 1979,
7920965
Int a.J F23G 5/02: F22B 1/02
MS. a. 122—4 D 5 Claims
1. A method of operating heating apparatus including a
fluidised bed of inert particulate material to which gas is fed to
fluidise the bed and support combustion of fuel fed thereto, the
method comprising using a mixture of air and recycled flue gas
548
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
the proportions of which may be varied to fluidise the bed of
inert particulate material, scrubbing flue gas passing from the
heating apparatus with water and bringing at least a part of the
air fluidising the bed into contact with the scrubbing water to
enable said fluidising gas to entrain and carry water vapour
and/or steam to said fluidised bed to aid control of the temper-
ature of the bed, said fluidising air being fed to the fluidised bed
by passing at least a part thereof through a chamber to which
the water used to scrub the flue-gas is also passed.
4,436,058
HOT WATER SUPPLY TANK ASSEMBLY
Roy E. McAlister, 5285 Red Rock North, Phoenix, Ariz. 85018
DiTision of Ser. No. 32,636, Apr. 23, 1979, Pat. No. 4,265,220.
This appUcation Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 213,199
Int. a.3 F22B 5/00
VS. a. 122—13 R 5 Claims
1. A potable hot water supply tank assembly comprising
a generally vertically extending housing assembly including
a peripheral wall and upper and lower end closures,
inlet means for directing a supply of unheated water into said
housing assembly adjacent said lower end closure,
outlet means for directing a supply of hot water from said
housing assembly adjacent said upper end closure,
heater means within said housing assembly adjacent said
lower end closure,
a lower screen assembly within said housing assembly above
said heating means,
an upper screen assembly within said housing assembly
adjacent said upper end closure and defining with said
lower screen assembly and the coextensive portion of said
peripheral wall a supply chamber within said housing
assembly, and
anti-convection cartridge means having structure providing
a multiplicity of separate vertical passages constituting the
entire space remaining in said supply chamber other than
said structure, said passage being of relatively small cross-
sectional area and extending completely between said
screen assemblies.
Gas
4,436,059
FLUE CONDENSATE SHIELD
Antonio Galati, Toronto, Ciinada, assignor to Canadian
Reseau-ch Institute, Don Mills, Canada
FUed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,641
Claims priority, appUcation Canada, Jul. 31, 1981, 383072
Int a.J F22B 5/00
VS. CL 122—17 2 Claims
1. An improved water heater comprising, in combination, a
water heater tank having a vertical, open-ended flue formed by
a cylindrical wall extending therethrough defining an inner
wall of the tank adjacent water in the tank, said flue adapted to
receive hot combustion gases for heating the water in said tank,
a metal annulus having an outer side and an inner side formed
at the bottom of the flue wall, said annulus being continuously
affixed to and abutting the flue wall on the annulus outer side
for effective heat transfer from the annulus to the flue wall and
to water in said tank, said annulus having an upturned lip on
the inner side thereof such that the annulus will collect and
retain condensate forming on the flue wall for subsequent
evaporation of said condensate, said annulus occupying from
about 40 to about 60% of the sectional area of the flue and
having a condensate holding capacity of about 0.3 cubic inch
per 1,000 BTU/h of fuel input.
4,436,060
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
TosUaki Tanaka, FiUisawa; Shoji UsUmura, Yokosuka, and
Yukihiro Etoh, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Nissan
Motor Company, Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
FUed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,103
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 1, 1980, 55-11280[U]
Int. a.J POIP 7/16
U.S. a. 123—41.1 3 Claims
— 44
42 32
1- A V-type internal combustion engine comprising:
(a) first and second engine blocks arranged with a V-angle;
(b) first and second cylinder units each including at least one
cylinder, said first and second cylinder units being ar-
ranged in said first and second engine blocks, respectively;
(c) means for disabling said second cylinder unit under low
load conditions; and
(d) a coolant circuit including:
a first jacket disposed in said first engine block, said first
jacket adapted to receive an engine coolant for cooling
said first cylinder unit;
a second jacket disposed in said second engine block, said
second jacket adapted to receive an engine coolant for
cooling said second cylinder unit, said second jacket
communicating in series with said first jacket;
a radiator connected through a first passage to said first
jacket and connected through a second passage to said
second jacket; and
a feed pump for circulating an engine coolant through said
coolant circuit in a direction from said first jacket to
said second jacket such that the second cylinder unit is
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
549
maintained at a temperature sufficient to permit rapid
combustion when said second cylinder unit is enabled
after being disabled.
4,436,061
AUTOMOTIVE INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Yoshimasa Hayashl, Kamaknra, Japan, assignor to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
FUed No?. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 319,886
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Nov. 14, 1980, 55-
163329[U]
Int a.3 FOIP 3/02
V.S. a. 123—41.74 10 Claims
/"
"V^
1. An automotive internal combustion engine comprising:
a cylinder head having at its bottom surface two oppositely
disposed projections which extend along the length of said
cylinder head;
a cylinder block having a plurality of cylinder sections, each
being formed therein with an engine cylinder bore, and
two water jacket walls which are oppositely disposed to
interpose therebetween said cylinder sections, each water
jacket wall being separate at its upper-most part from each
~ cylinder section and forming therebetween a water jacket,
the upper end part containing the water jacket wall upper-
most part of said cylinder block having a contacting sur-
face fitting inbetween said two projections of said cylinder
head to form a tight contact therebetween.
4,436,062
ROCKER ARM MECHANISM IN OVERHEAD CAM
TYPE ENGINE
Takeshi Nakakobara, Toyota; KiyoshI Sakaguchl, Alchl; Fumio
Ueda, and HIroyuld Murase, both of Toyota, aU of Japan,
■silgnors to Toyota JIdosha Kogyo Kabushlki Kaisha, Alchl,
Japan
FUed No¥. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 319,902
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Nov. 14, 1980, 55-
162806[U]
Int a.^ FOIL 1/02
VS. a. 123—90.27 3 Qalms
1. A rocker arm mechanism in an OHC type engine; an
intake valve, an exhaust valve, and a cam shaft comprising:
a cam rotatable while interlocking with said cam shaft; and
a rocker arm which oscillates in accordance with the rota-
tion of said cam so as to open and close one of said intake
valve and said exhaust valve, wherein said rocker arm
further comprises a rocker arm body and a pad member
rotatably fitted to said rocker arm body for contacting
said cam, said cam and said pad member being brought
into contact with each other such that said pad member
may rotate due to a frictional force generated between
said cam and said pad member as said cam rotates,
wherein
said contact of said pad member to said cam is eccentrically
located with respect to a center of rotation of said pad
member;
said pad member further comprises a shaft portion and a
substantially half-spherical cam receiving portion inte-
grally formed with one end of said shaft portion, said
rocker arm body includes a shaft hole bored therein or-
thogonal to said cam shaft, and said shaft portion is rotat-
ably supported in said shaft hole; and
wherein said cam further comprises a curved surface parallel
to said cam shaft, a tapered surface continuously formed
with said curved surface and a joint formed between said
curved surface and said tapered surface which contacts
with said flat portion of said cam receiving member such
that said cam and said pad member may be brought into
point-contact with each other.
4,436,063
PUSH ROD FOR OPERATING AN INTAKE OR
EXHAUST VALVE OF AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Masayothi Usui, Numazu, Japan, assignor to Usui Kokusal
Sangyo Kabushlki Kaisha, Shizouka, Japan
FUed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,163
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 24, 1979, 54-178951
Int a.5 FOIL 1/14
U.S. a. 123—90.61 9 Claims
1. A valve operating push rod for an internal combustion
engine comprising: an elongated metal tube having a jjair of
opposed ends and a length defined by the distance between the
opposed ends of said tube; a pair of end members having por-
tions secured to the ends of said tube respectively; and an
elongated tubular metal member having a pair of opposed ends
and a length defined by the distance between said opposed
ends of said tubular member, said length of said tubular mem-
ber being substantially the same as the length of said tube, said
tubular member being pressure fitted substantially along the
entire length of said tube with the opposed ends of said tube
being substantially adjacent respectively to the opposed ends
of said tubular member, but with at least one end of said tubular
member being spaced slightly inwardly from the subsuntially
adjacent end of said tube and the end member secured thereto,
whereby operation of the engine generates vibrations which
are attenuated by the tube and the tubular member and the
pressure fit therebetween.
1040 O.G.— 22
550
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
4,436,064
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINATION
AND UTILIZATION OF A QUANTITY OF PREHEATING
ENERGY
Falk Lamkcwits. Monick, and Jowf RiedMier, Peoteoried,
botk of Fed. Rep. of Gcnuay, anigBort to Webasto-Werk W
Baier GaibH A Co., Fed. Rep. of Gannaay
Filed Jul 1, 1981, Scr. No. 279,599
Claina priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany. JuL 2.
1980, 3024983 '' ^
lat CL^ F02N 17/02
VS. CL 12»-142J R 22 Claims
an adjustable desired temperature in dependence upon
various possible ambient temperatures outside of said
motor vehicle;
wherein said switchmg control means is operable to actuate
said heating device at a time prior to a preset time for
commencement of usage that corresponds to the differ-
ence between said preset usage commencement time and a
stored preheating time read out by said memory unit based
upon actual temperature values sensed by said sensor
means at a point of time prior to the preset usage com-
mencement time.
4,436,065
STARTER ARRANGEMENT FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSnON ENGH^
Gerhard Gradmano, Ketach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaslgnor to
Deere A Company, Moline, Ul.
FUed Apr. 5, 1982, Scr. No. 365^52
1981*35lS°'**^' •PPliotion Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 13,
Int CL^ F02N 77/00
VS. a. 123-179 B 2 Claims
1. Preheating process for automaticaUy applying a quantity
of heat energy sufficient to achieve a desired temperature at a
location within a motor vehicle prior to a period of usase
comprising the steps of:
(a) determining the respective preheating times required to
achieve said desired temperature for various possible
actual temperatures at said location on the basis of the
time required by a heating device to overcome a tempera-
ture difference between the various possible temperatures
at said location and said desired temperature in depen-
dence on various possible ambient temperatures outside of
said motor vehicle;
(b) storing the preheating times determined in step (a);
(c) predetermining a time for commencement of said period
of usage;
(d) at a predetermined point of time prior to said usage
commencement time, automatically determining a correct
preheating time from said stored preheating times for use
based upon actual temperature conditions at said location
and the actual ambient temperature outside of said motor
vehicle; and
(e) automatically commencing appUcation of heat to said
location at a time prior to said usage commencement time
that corresponds to the difference between said usage
commencement time and the correct preheating time
determined in step (d).
4. Preheating apparatus for automatically applying a quan-
tity of heat energy sufficient to achieve a desired temperature
at a location within a motor vehicle prior to a period of usase
comprising: * '
(a) a heating device;
(b) a presettable timer actuted switching control means for
actuating said heating device;
(c) an actual temperature value sensor means for sensing the
actual temperature at said location;
(d) an external temperature sensor means for detecting ac-
tual ambient temperatures outside of the motor vehicle-
and
(e) a memory unit that is addressable in dependence on the
actual temperature values sensed by said sensor means and
containing, as stored data, preheating time spans required
for said heating device to overcome a difference between
various possible actual temperatures at said location and
1. A starter system for a battery powered starter motor
coupled to an internal combustion engine, the starter system
comprising:
a starter relay having a motor terminal connected to the
starter motor, a battery terminal connected to the battery,
a coil terminal and means for connecting the battery ter-
minal to the motor terminal in response to energization of
the coil terminal;
an energizing circuit for energizing and de-energizing the
coil terminal, the energizing circuit comprising an ignition
switch, a safety switch and a starter switch connected in
series between the coil terminal and the battery; and
a deformable insulating housing for preventing access to at
least the battery terminal and the coil terminals; and
first and second manuaUy operable bridging switches, the
first bridging switch being connected in parallel with the
ignition switch and the second bridging switch being
connected in paraUel with the starter switch, the bridging
switches including first and second conductive contact
mounted on an inner surface of the housing for engage-
ment with the battery and coU terminals, respectively,
upon deformation of the housing.
4,436,066
CYLINDER HEAD FOR COMPRESSION-IGNITION
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Antonio Forala, Torla, and Giorgio FUtri, MoMdicri, both of
Italy, aaaivBora to Flat VdeoU IndwtrlsJl S.pjt, Tori^ Italy
Filed Jaik 9, 1980, Ser. No. 110,735
Claiw priority, appUcatioB Italy, May 23, 1979, 68097 A/79
Lrt. a.' PWF 1/24
VS. a 123—193 H 5 rirf—
1. A cylinder head for a compression-ignition internal com-
bustion engine of the type having precombustion chamben
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
531
associated with the engine cylinders, the head being consti-
tuted by an elongate block formed to define walls delimiting
both a cooling chamber and a plurality of cavities the latter of
which provide for each of said engine cylinders, a precombus-
tion chamber, induction and discharge ducu, and a seat for a
ftiel injector, said cooling chamber being traversable by cool-
ant liquid to cool said walls which delimit the said cavities, and
one said wall delimiting said cooling chamber constituting a
base wall the outer surface of which faces into the cylinders of
the engine when the cylinder head is assembled onto the engine
4,436,068
IGNITION SYSTEM OF AN INTERNAL COMBUSnON
ENGINE
Norihlko Nakamnra. MiaUau;, and Yoahiaki Shlbata, Sbbobo,
both of Japan, aaaigDors to Toyota Jidoaha KabMhiki Kalaha,
Toyota, Japan
FUed Ant. 5, 1982, Sar. No. 405,564
Claims priority, appUcatioB Japan, Oct 22, 1981, 56*167919
Int a.i FQ2P 1/00
VS. a. 123—310 13 daims
cylinder block, the said base wall being integral with said head
and formed, intermediate portions of the head corresponding
to said engine cylinders, with means to allow expansion com-
prising slits having a uniform thickness extending into said
cylinder head from the said outer surface of the said base wall
in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the
cylinder head across the whole width thereof adjacently
spaced from said cooling chamber whereby the portions of the
cylinder head corresponding to different cylinders are partially
separated from one another.
4,436,067
ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP ARRANGEMENT
Joaef Fritiaawenier, Anzing, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Bayerische Motoren Wcriie Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of
Gmuny
FUad No?. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,580
Gaims priority, application Fad. Rap. of Gamaay, No?. 25,
1980,3044253
Int a^ FOIP 5/12; FOIM 11/00
VS. a. 123—198 C 11 Claims
nlL-n
1. An internal combustion engine comprising a drive con-
nection for a pump assembly wherein the assembly includes a
step-down gear, a pump impeller of a coolant pump and a
ptimp wheel of a lubricating oil gear pump situated on a com-
mon shaft, wherein pump wheels of the lubricating oil gear
pump form the step-down gear for the coolant pump.
1. An internal combustion engine comprising:
a cylinder block having a cylinder bore therein;
a piston reciprocally movable in said cylinder bore;
a cylinder head fixed onto said cylinder block and having an
interior combustion space therein;
a voltage source for generating a high voltage;
a metallic plate inserted between said cylinder block and said
cylinder head and electrically connected to said cylinder
block, said metallic plate having an opening which inter-
connects said cylinder bore to said interior combustion
space and has an inner peripheral wall exposed to said
cylinder bore and said interior combustion chamber, said
metallic plate having a plurality of bores formed on the
inner peripheral wall of said opening and arranged in
series;
a first electrode arranged on the inner peripheral wall of said
opening and electrically connected to said cylinder block;
a second electrode arranged on the inner peripheral wall of
said opening and electrically connected to said voltage
source;
a plurality of third electrodes arranged in series on the inner
peripheral wall of said opening between said first elec-
trode and said second electrode, each of said third elec-
trodes having an electrode piece which has opposite ends
each being spaced from the adjacent electrode by a prede-
termined distance for forming a spark gap therebetween,
each of said third electrodes having a conductive bar
member connected to said electrode piece and extending
through the corresponding bore of said metallic pUte; and
a plurality of tubular insulating members each surrounding
said conductive bar member and inserted into the bore of
said metallic plate for forming a condenser between said
conductive bar member and said metallic plate.
4,436,069
SETHNG DEVICE FOR THE CONTROLLED
DISPLACEMENT OF A STOP CONNECTED WITH A
SETTING MEMBER
Harald CoUonia, Glaahttttea, Fad. Rap. of Garmany, aaai^or to
VDO Adolf SchiadUng AG, Fraakftart am Mala, Fad. Rap. of
Geranny
FUad Sap. 27, 1982, Sar. No. 434,689
ClaiBH priority, appUcatioB Fad. Rap. of Garauuy. No?. 21,
1981. 3146210
iBt O.) F02M S/00
VS. a 123-339 10 daiiH
1. In a setting device for controlled displacement of a stop
connected with a setting member, particuUirly an idling stop of
552
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
an internal combustion engine which is pressed by a spring
against a stop pin, the latter being displaceable by an electric
drive member, and the stop being actuauble independently of
the latter with opening of a force-locked connection to the
electric drive member, the improvement wherein
the electric drive member is an electric motor,
the force-locked connection is constituted by a clutch hav-
ing a first clutch part and a second clutch part, said first
clutch part being displaceable to engagement against said
second clutch part.
-i ,;;.« «7
said second clutch part constitutes a driving member opera-
tively connected between the stop pin and the electric
motor,
a self-locking gearing means for converting rotary motion of
said first clutch part into a translation of said stop pin,
said gearing means is arranged between the stop pin and said
displaceable first clutch part such that said clutch becomes
engaged force-locked by force of the spring on the stop
pin via the stop.
4,436,070
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE PROPORTION
OF AIR AND FUEL IN AN AIR-FUEL MIXTURE OF THE
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
MotOBobu Akagi; lashi Nomura, both of AicU; Kyo Hattori, and
KJcUro Kato, both of Shiznoka, aU of Japan, aMignon to
Alain Sciki Kabushiki Kaiaha, Kariya and Toyota Jidodu
Kahoihlki Kaiaha, Toyota, both of, Japu
FUed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 390,889
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 23, 1981, 56-097041
lat a.3 P02M 7/24
U A a 123-440 3 data.
municating with a slow system fiiel passage through a
second end thereof:
a proportional control solenoid valve including a box-
shaped housing formed of a magnetic material and pro-
vided with an air-inlet port, a first outlet port connected to
said main system air-bleeding passage and a second outlet
port connected to said slow system air-bleeding passage, a
single iron core having a tubular periphery, supported by
said housing at opposite ends thereof and provided with
separately formed first and second passages communicat-
ing with said first outlet port and said second outlet port,
respectively, at opposite ends thereof, at least one first
valve opening formed in the shape of an oblong circle
extending axially of said iron core in a portion of said iron
core provided with said first passage to allow communica-
tion of said first passage with said air-inlet port, and sec-
ond valve openings formed in the shape of an oblong
circle extending axially of said iron core in a portion of
said iron core provided with said second passage for
allowing communication of said second outlet port with
the air-inlet port, a single bobbin axially sUdably mounted
on the periphery of said iron core, a solenoid wound
around the periphery of said bobbin in an axial portion
thereof and having a first valve element and a second
valve element for opening and closing said at least one
first valve opening and said at least one second valve
opening respectively, spring means urging said bobbin in
one axial direction of said iron core and at least one pair of
permanent magnets fwed to said housing at a position
corresponding to said solenoid and so disposed that the
flux of the magnetic force thereof passes perpendicular
with respect to said solenoid; and
control means for supplying analog electric signals to said
solenoid of said proportional control solenoid valve
whereby said bobbin of said proportional control solenoid
valve moves axially along said iron core a distance pro-
portional to a level of the analog electric signals applied to
the solenoid by said control means and said first valve
element and said second valve element open said at least
one first valve opening and said at least one second valve
opening, respectively, by respective areas corresponding
to the level of said analog electric signals.
1. An apparatus for controlling the proportion of air and fuel
in the air-fuel mixture of the internal combustion engine having
an intake manifold, a main system fuel passage and a slow
system fuel supply port, comprising:
a carburetor including an air horn tube having a venturi tube
with a main nozzle and a throttle valve and connected to
the intake manifold of said internal combustion engine, a
main system fuel tube opening into said main nozzle of
said venturi tube at a first end thereof and communicating
with said main system fuel passage through a second end
thereof,a slow system fuel tube opening into said slow
system fuel supply port which is adjacent to said throttle
valve of the air horn tube at a first end thereof and com-
4,436,071
ELECTROMAGNETICALLY ACTUATABLE VALVE. IN
PARTICULAR A FUEL INJECTION VALVE
Udo Haftier, Lorch; Harro Hertfa, VaiUngen; WoUkug Kicnzle,
ScfawieberdiiigeB; Heinrich Kaapp, Leonbcrg; Rudolf Kranaa,
Stuttgart; MaafM Lenbke, Gcrliogeii; Werner Paachke,
Schwicberdingen, and Rudolf Saner, Bcnniugea, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, aaaignon to Robert Boich GmbH, Stutt-
gart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Aug. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 408,976
1981*3143849'**'' '"*"*'**°" ^*^ ^^' °' G«"»"y. Not. 5,
Int. a.3 P02M 39/00, 32/00
VS. a. 123—472 3 cudm
1. An electromagnetically actuatable valve, in particular, a
fuel mjection valve for fuel injection systems of internal com-
bustion engines provided with a housing having a valve cham-
ber therewithin, said valve furher provided with a magnetic
coil surrounding a core of ferromagnetic material, said mag-
netic coil being associated with an armature, said valve having
a movable valve component operable by said armature with
relation to a valve seat, said valve further having at least one
fuel supply opening extending through said housing to said
valve chamber and at least one fuel return opening extending
from said valve chamber to an exit in said housing, said valve
further having a collecting chamber which encompasses the
armature and the valve component and communicates with
said at least one fuel supply opening, characterized in that said
at least one fuel supply opening discharges into a flow passage
provided around said magnetic coU upstream from said collect-
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SS3
tng chamber, said flow passage communicating with said at
least one fuel return opening via a fint restriction, said core
being provided with a second restriction extending between
vmi
the collecting chamber and said at least one fuel return open-
ing, whereby vapor bubbles may be exhausted from the fuel to
be injected.
4,436,073
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING
THE FUEL FEEDING RATE OF AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Hideo Miyagi, Okaiaki, Japan, aaaignor to Toyota Jidoaha
Kogyo KabuaUki Kalalui, Toyota, Japaa
FUad Aug. 24, 1981, Sw. No. 296,242
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 1, 1980, S5-1 19832
lat. a.i PD2B 3/02
U.S. a. 123—491 12
D-'H
4,436,072
FUEL INJECnON CONTROL IN AN
INTERNAL-COMBUSTION ENGINE
Yuklo Suzuki; Kunihiko Sato, and Motoyasu Muramatsu, all of
Toyota, Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha,
Toyota, Japan
FUed Dec. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 450,044
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 29, 1982, 57-49196
Int. a.J P02B 3/00; F02P 5/04
U.S. CI. 123—488 3 Qainu
1. A method for controlling fuel injection in an internal-com-
bustion engine for an automobile in which the rate of change of
the rotational speed of the engine is checked as to whether or
not the rate of change of the rotational speed of the engine
exceeds the selected limit of the rate of change of the rotational
speed of the engine, determined by the ratio of the rotational
speed of the engine to the speed of the automobile and the ratio
of the amount of intake air to the rotational speed of the engine,
the value of the rotational speed of the engine used in the
control of fuel injection being restricted to within said selected
limit of the rata of change of the rotational speed of the engine
and the width of the fuel injecton pulse and the ignition timing
of the engine being controlled by using said restricted value of
the rotational speed of the engine.
1. A method of controlling the fuel feeding rata of an inter-
nal combustion engine, comprising the steps of:
detecting the load condition of said engine;
generating a first electrical signal related to the warm-up
condition of said engine;
generating a second electrical signal related to whether said
engine is starting or not;
generating a third electrical signal related to the rotational
speed of said engine;
determining a fuel feeding amount for every engine revolu-
tion in accordance with said detected load condition;
calculating, in response to said first and second electrical
signals, an additional increment of the fUel feeding amount
for every engine revolution, said additional increment
being determined in accordance with said detected warm-
up condition during starting and, after starting, being
decreased in accordance with the lapse of time;
correcting said calculated additional increment in response
to said third electrical signal, said calculated additional
increment being corrected to increase when the detected
rotational speed decreases and to decrease when the de-
tected rotational speed increases; and
controlling the fuel feeding amount for every engine revolu-
tion in accordance with said detarmined fuel feeding
amount and said corrected increment.
7. An apparatus for controlling the rate of fuel supplied to an
internal combustion engine comprising:
means for detecting the lo;id condition of said engine;
means for generating a first electrical signal related to the
warm-up condition of said engine;
means for generating a second electrical signal related to
whether said engine is starting or not;
means for generating a third electrical signal related to the
rotational speed of said '.*ngine;
processing means for (1) determining a fuel feeding amount
for every engine revolution in accordance with said de-
tected load condition, (2) calculating, in response to said
first and second electrical signals, an additional increment
of the fuel feeding amount for every engine revolution,
said additional increment being determined in accordance
with said detected warm-up condition during starting and,
after starting, being decreased in accordance with the
lapse of time, and (3) correcting said calculated additional
increment in response to said third electrical signal, said
correcting function correcting the calculated additional
increment to increase the increment when the detected
rotational speed decreases and to decrease the increment
when the detected rotational speed increases; and
means for controlling the fuel feeding amount for every
554
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
engine revolution in accordance with said calculated fuel
feeding rate and said corrected increment.
»,«-. 4,43d,074
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
FUEL INJECTION IN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
HIrotaka Nakatnka. Kariya; ToiUald Miaao, Nagoya; Hiaa.
■ilaa YaMioe, Kariya, and HiroU Matraofca, Saaoao, all of
iff!^ "!?•■*" *° Nlp»o«|«Mo Co, Ltd, KMlya and Toyota
JidodM Kogyo KabaahlU Kaiiha, Tooota, both of, JaMB
PUed Jul 15, 1982, Ser. No. 388,654
Claima priority, application Japan, Jn. 17, 1981, 56-92110
. , o ^ iBt a. J F02B 3/QO, WOO
UA a 123-492 sctata.
fuel pump and the other of said end portions being opera-
tively connected to the fuel dispenser,
(c) a housing for the coiled portion of the fuel line including
a tubular body having annular end recesses and opposed
covers attached within the end recesses, each of said
covers having an opening adapted to receive one end of
the tubular section and an opening adapted to receive one
end portion of the fuel line section, and
(d) the fuel line section coUed portion including at least two
turns and the ends being disposed in cross-over relation to
each other.
' I ) «:CEL£RATrON
(2) rUEL 4M01JMT
INCPi4S£
(31 CHANGE GEAR
PROHrBlTION OF
(4) ^UEL AMOUNT
INCREASE
4,436,076
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL FOR CAPACITOR
DISCHARGE IGNITION SYSTEM
Michael J. Pheo, Enfield, Conn, asrignor to R. E. Phelon Com-
puy. Inc., East Longmeadow, Man.
FUed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 306,281
Int a.J P02P i/00
U A a. 123-602 5 claim.
1. An apparatus for controlling the fuel injection in an inter-
nal combustion engine, comprising: an air flow sensor a roto-
Uon sensor; a collant water temperature sensor; a fuel injection
nozzle; and an electronic control device for receiving the
signals from said intake air sensor, said rotation sensor, and said
coolant water temperature sensor, for calculating die fuel
inj^tion duration on the basis of said received signals, and for
producmg the signal to control said fuel injection nozzle-
the ratio (Q/N) between the intake air amount (Q) and the
rotational speed (N) being used as the signal for triggering
the increase, wherein said fuel increase is prohibited or
modified dunng gear change operations of the automobile
driven by the engine.
4,436,075
FUEL PRE-HEAT DEVICE
Robert L. Campbell, Decatnr, m, and Daniel D. Bailey, 1014
Norman, Anchorage, Ak. 99504, aaaignon to Daniel D. Bai-
ley, Anchorage, Ak.
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,850
Int a.J F02M i//00
UA a. 123-557 5 Cla^
54
1. A fuel pre-heat device for use with an engine having a fuel
pump, a fuel dispenser and a radiator hose, the device compris-
mg:
(a) a tubular section having opposed ends communicating
with the radiator hose, *
(b) a fuel line section including opposed end portions and an
mtermediate coUed portion wrapped around the tubular
■ection, one of said end portions being connected to the
1. In a capacitor discharge ignition system for an internal
combustion engine having rotatable magnet means associated
with engine rotation to generate electrical energy, a capacitor
chargeable by said energy and selectively connected in timed
reUtionship with engine operation to the primary winding of
an ignition coil to generate an ignition pulse by the discharge of
the capacitor charge through said primary winding, as a means
for protecting said engine and any apparatus driven thereby
against excessive high-speed operation, an electronic shut-off
system comprising a silicon controlled rectifier (SCR) having
anode, cathode and gate electrodes, with iu anode/cathode
path connected in parallel with said capacitor and the primary
windmg of said ignition coil to shunt the energy from the
charge coil and capacitor away from said primary winding,
means for generating a voltage in response to a predetermined
high rotational speed of said engine, the gate of said SCR being
connected to said means for generating a voluge for triggering
Mid SCR to ito conductive sute and means for maintaining the
SCR m Its conductive sute for a predetermined time sufficient
to ensure complete engine cut-ofl", including a second capacitor
and a resistor connected to provide continuing current to said
anode to hold the SCR "on" for said predetermined time.
4,436,077
GUN AND RESIUENT LOOP PROJECTILE THEREFOR
Wayne G. Smith, 10129, Orerland Park, y«T 66212
FUed Dee. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,073
„„ _ Iat.aJF41B 7/00
UA CI. 124-18 i4Ctata.
1. A gun for projecting resiUent loop missiles, said sun com-
pnsmg:
a body including a handle and an elongated frame for hold-
ing a missile in a stretched condition, said body having a
cavity extending therethrough;
a member slidably positioned in the cavity including trigger
means projecting from the cavity forwardly of the handle.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
555
and plunger means movable with the member to a miuile
engaging position for dislodging the latter; and
means on the body to confine the member to a rectilinear,
fore and aft paUi of travel in the cavity, said path being
inclined upwardly as the rear of the gun is approached,
whereby said plunger may impari a generally upwardly
and rearwardly lifting force on the missile to enhance the
projection thereof, said body being configured to present
a pair of grooves at the rear of the gun to faciliute the
positioning of missiles on the gun in stretched condition,
one of the grooves being spaced upwardly and forwardly
4,436,078
APPARATUS FOR CUTTING STONE PANELS
Patrick T. Bonrke, Dooa House, Maam, County Galway, Ire-
Dirision of Ser. No. 147,757, May 8, 1980, Pat No. 4,350,552,
which la a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 64,999, Aug. 7, 1979,
Pat No. 4,346,691, which is a continnation-lB-part of Ser. No.
394,138, Sep. 4, 1973, Pat No. 3,963,846. This application Jan.
21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,551
Claima priority, appUcation United Kingdoni, Sep. 4, 1972,
40839/72; Jan. 19, 1973, 2795/73; Irdaad, May 9, 1979, 402/79
iBt a.3 B28D 1/04
\}&. CL 125—13 R 5 ClaiM
1. Apparatus for use in manufacturing composite surface
elements having a lamina of stone bonded to a backing layer,
comprising a stone-cutting saw having at least one disc blade
adapted to cut in a vertical plane, conveyor means for convey-
ing a stone slab beneath the saw blade, at least one slab grip-
ping device mounted on said conveyor means and adapted to
support the slab upwardly on one longitudinal edge of th^ slab,
and means for tumbling the partiy-cut slab onto its opposite
longitudinal edge after a first pass through the saw, the tum-
Uing means comprising a body portion having two spaced-
apart parallel channel-shaped bearings lying in a substantially
horizontal plane, a frame which is adapted to receive and
support a slab of stone and which is provided with a pair of
spaced-apart parallel axles which are adapted to engage with
said channel-^ped bearings, the arrangement being such that
the frame may be pivoted from a first position in which it is
di^xMed in a substantially vertical plane on one side of said
body portion with one of said axles located in one of said
channel-shaped bearings, through approximately 90' about
said bearings, to a position in which the frame is disposed
horizontally on said body portion with an axle engaged in each
of said channel-shaped bearings, the frame then being pivot-
able about said other channel-shaped bearing through a further
90* until it is again disposed in a substantially vertical plane on
the opposite side of the body portion.
4,436,079
FIREPLACE FOR HEATING INDOOR SPACES AND
WATER FOP SANTTARY USE
Domenico Plazzetta, Via Montello, 23<:a8ella D'Asolo-
(Prorinda dl Trcriso, Italy
FUed Jnn. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,554
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Jun. 25, 1980, 41596 A/80
Int a.i F24B 7/00
MS. a. 126—121 1 Claim
of the other groove and adjacent the path of travel of the
plunger means for dislodgement thereby, said other
groove being on the outer surface of the body at the rear
thereof and spaced downwardly of the body and below-
said one of the grooves in disposition clear of the plunger
mean's 's path of travel, whereby a stored stretched missile
positioned on the gun in said other groove will not be
dislodged by said plunger means when the latter is moved
to a missile dislodging position, and a stretched missile
may be readily positional manually in said one groove so
as to be in position for release by said plunger means.
1. A diversified heat energy operated compact fireplace
comprising a hearth, lateral walls bordering said hearth on its
sides, a partition on the rear of the hearth, a hood overlying the
hearth and a flue into which said hood extends, at the rear of
said partition an interspace defined by said partition, two com-
partments extending on the sides of said hood and communi-
cating with said interspace, said compartments having each a
front face with a plurality of holes in said front faces for allow-
ing air to flow therethrough, a screen extending in front of the
hood and the flue to defme a screened space behind said screen,
said screened space enclosing said hood and said flue, ports in
said screen at the upper region thereof to aUow passage of air
therethrough, a tube nest heat exchanger in the upper inner
portion of said hood, said heat exchanger being exposed in use
to combustion gases from the hearth, hydraulic circuit means
for said heat exchanger, said hydraulic circuit means including
a pump within said screened space for circulating heat ex-
changing oil through said heat exchanger, a gas-fired boUer in
said hydraulic circuit means and arranged in said screened
space, said gas-fired boiler providing a fuit diversified beat
energy source for said fireplace, a water heater included in said
hydraulic circuit and located in said screened space for provid-
ing hot water for sanitary purposes and radiator elements
connected with said hydraulic circuit, duct means connected
with the lower part of said interspace, a fan located below said
hearth and in communication with said duct means to draw in
use air from said interspace and thereby create in use a current
of air entering said ports of the screen from the indoor space
and flowing downwards through said screened space towards
said holes in said compartments and through said hole into said
compartments and therefrom into said interspace, said fan
556
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
having delivery ducts leading into the indoor spacse to be
heated, said duct means connected with the bottom of said
mterspace mcluding an electric resistance heater for heating in
use the air drawn by said fan, said heater providing a second
diversified heat energy source.
4436 080
FIREPLACE AND STOVE APPARATUS
Jeffrey L. Evaiu, Aspen, Colo., astignor to Ting Eoterprises,
Inc., Aspen, Colo.
Division of Ser. No. 359,061, ^plr. 17, 1982. This appUcation
Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,339
Int CL3 Fa4C 15/04
UA a. 126-139 6Ctotais
the outer casing having a bottom and an upwardly extending
sidewall, the damper assembly including:
(a) a generally horizontally extending slide plate mounted
within the outer casing above the bottom wall, the slide
plate having upper and lower surfaces and having an
opening therethrough,
(b) a pair of eye bolts, each eye bolt having a looped end and
a shank, the looped end of each eye bolt being positioned
above the slide plate and the shank of each eye bolt ex-
tending through the slide plate and being secured to the
bottom of the outer casing,
(c) a damper plate having an outside dimension greater than
the diameter of the opening in the slide plate, and
(d) a rod secured to the damper plate and extending slidably
through the looped ends of the eye bolts whereby the
damper plate is maintained in sliding contact with the
upper surface of the slide plate, the rod and the damper
plate being movable between a first position in which the
damper plate covers the opening in the slide plate and a
second position in which the damper disc uncovers the
opening in the slide plate, the rod having an end which
extends through an opening in the outer casing whereby
the rod and the damper plate can be moved from outside
of the casing.
4,436,082
ASSEMBLY FOR STEAM HEATING OR COOKING
FOOD PRODUCTS AND ITS METHOD OF OPERATION
Jeffrey H. Hiller, and Stephen S. Hlller, both of 1300 Hancock
St., Redwood Oty, Calif. 94063
Filed Oct 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,131
Int a.3 F24D 1/00
UA a. 126-348 20CUdnu
'<v^.;;',«^ii'/''^y.'.;r«:;V^^/5;V'/W
1. A fireplace door construction for a firebox comprising:
(a) a fu-eplace door; and
(b) a door frame rigidly secured to said fireplace, said door
frame comprising:
a flange portion for receipt of a flange,
a door portion against which the fireplace door can close;
Uie door portion of the frame being further from the
firebox than the flange portion, and
isolating means connecting said flange portion to said
door portion and thermally isolating the door portion
from the flange portion, to thereby prevent the heat of
the fire from warping the door portion.
4,436,081
DAMPER ASSEMBLY FOR BARBECUE GRILL
Dennis V. Hefling, Wichita, Kans., assignor to The Coleman
Company, Inc., Wichita, Kans.
FUed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,321
Int CL3 F23L i/00
UACL 126-285 A 9 ctafaM
1. A damper assembly for a barbecue having an outer casing.
1. An assembly for steam heating or cooking a given food
product, comprising housing means including a cooking cham-
ber; means for sensing the temperature within said cooking
chamber; boiler means including a steam chamber for main-
taining a supply of steam under pressure within said steam
chamber continuously throughout operation of the assembly;
and flow control means connected between said steam cham-
ber and cooking chamber and responsive to said temperature
sensing means for directing steam from the supply in said steam
chamber into said cooking chamber when the temperature
therein is below a preset value, whereby to raise the chamber
temperature to said preset value for heating or cooking said
food product at that temperature.
18. A method of steam heating or cooking given food prod-
ucts, comprising the steps of: providing an oven having an
internal chamber, inlet door means into said chamber, verti-
cally lower outlet door means out of said chamber, and ramp
means in said chamber extending between said inlet and outlet
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
557
door means for guiding a plurality of support trays between
said inlet and outlet door means, one at a time; providing a
plurality of support trays supported on wheels and placing a
plurality of said food products on each of said trays; thereafter
placing said trays, one at a time, into said chamber through said
inlet door means in cooperation with said ramp means so as to
cause said trays and the food products supported thereby to
move through said chamber, one at a time, from said inlet door
means to points adjacent said outlet door means by their own
weight; while said trays are in said chamber, heating the food
products thereon; and removing said trays and supported food
products from said chamber through said outlet door means,
one at a time, in the order in which the trays were placed into
said chamber.
a parabolic trough concentrator focusing on each of said
heat absorbers;
a plurality of open mesh baffled heat accumulators in spaced
4,436,083
SUNBEAM CONCENTRATING AND COLLECTING
APPARATUS
Kei Mori, 3'16-3-501, Kaminoge, Setagaya-ku, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,453
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 6, 1980, 55«
159013[U1
Int a.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—417 8 Claims
1. A sunbeam concentrating and collecting apparatus com-
prising a lens system for concentrating sunbeams and a light
conductor cable having a beam-receiving end face thereof
arranged at the focus of said lens system, wherein sunbeams
concentrated by said lens system are guided into said light
conductor cable, said apparatus comprising: a cable holding
means and a position adjusting means, said cable holding means
being intended to hold said beam-receiving end face of the
light conductor cable, said position adjusting means having a
first adjusting means which supports said cable holding means
and is capable of moving said beam-receiving end face of the
light conductor cable in the direction of the optical axis per-
pendicular to each other; and said apparatus further including
a light-shielding plate provided on the sunbeam concentrating
side of said cable holding means and said position adjusting
means, said light-shielding plate surrounding said beam receiv-
ing end face of the light conductor cable.
4,436,084
PORTABLE PANE MOUNTABLE SOLAR PANEL
Jack E. Carlston, 1834 Antisdale Rd., Muskegon, Mich. 49442,
and Harold W. Johnson, 3337 Jefferson, Muskegon Heights,
Mich. 49444
FUed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,199
Int a? F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—429 6 Claims
1. A portable window mounted solar panel for attaching to
the inside face of a glass pane comprising:
a shallow box-like frame open on one side and having height
adjustable means;
sealing means on the perimeter edge of the open side of said
frame to contact said glass pane;
at least one upper heat discharge port through said frame;
at least one lower input port through said frame;
a plurality of elongate heat absorbcs in said box frame;
relation to each other and in spaced relation to said ab-
sorbers and fully across the open side of said box; and
automatic means assuring unidirectional flow through said
frame from bottom to top.
4,436,085
SOLAR COLLECTOR ASSEMBLY AND FRAME
Raymond B. Larsen, SansaUto, Calif., assignor to Acme Solar
Works, Inc., Lodi, Cdlf.
Filed Aug. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 411,032
Int a.5 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126-^450 6 Claims
1. A frame for a solar collector comprising
opposite side frame members and opposite end frame mem-
ber connected to form a rectangular frame;
each of said frame memben comprising a C-shaped outer
shell and a boxlike inner member supported in spaced
relationship inside the C-shaped outer shell by insulating
material;
said boxlike member including a protrusion along the inner
edge adapted to support films on each side therewith in
spaced relationship to one another;
said protrusion on the end members including openings to
communicate with the space between said films;
means for applying fluid to the boxlUie member of the upper
end member so that the fluid flows outwardly through the
openings formed in its protrusion between the fUms and
means for removing fluid which flows through the openings
SS8
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
in the lower protrusion into the boxlike member of the
lower frame member
Mid frame adapted to support outer fUms one in spaced
relationship with each adjacent inner film and
means in one of said side frame members for introducing air
between the outer films and the adjacent inner films and
means in the other side frame member for allowing the air
to vent.
rior members in contact with the surface of the upper arm,
said anterior and posterior members being of a semi-rigid
material with the side walls of said members capable of
being flexed, the base of the anterior member having a
central portion bulged outwardly to accommodate the
bicep muscle whereby the engagement of the outwardly
4,436,0S6
Patent Not Issued For I'his Number
4,436,087
BIOPTIC INSTRUMENT
Temo Ouchi, Saitana, Japan, aadgnor to KahiwMH lf«iffcin
MedM Kenkyusbo, Tokyo, J^an
FUed Dec. 11, 1978, Scr. No. 967,949
Ctalma priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 11, 1977, S2-148461;
Dec. 11, 1977, 52.166057[i;]; Dec 24, 1977, 5M55830; Jan. 14,
1978, 53.2905[U]; Feb. 22, 1978, 53.21662[U]; Dec. 11, 1978.
53-2904(U] '
Int. a.3 A61B 1/12
MS. CL 128-6 7 cudnu
1. A medical instrument for insertion into the body for the
study of internal areas, comprising: an elongate hollow mem-
ber having a hollow passage therein, an opening at the termi-
nus of said passage; a member for insertion into said passage; an
optical member disposed in the vicinity of said opening; means
disposed adjacent said opening to deflect said insertion mem-
ber to a suiuble angle; said means to deflect being further
operable to selectively deflect the flow of a stream of cleaning
fluid from said hollow passage onto a body cavity surface or
onto said optical member; a hood surrounding said opening;
said means to deflect comprising a member extending beyond
said opening and adapted to be positioned to deflect said inser-
tion member; said means to deflect further comprising a pivot-
ing deflection member having a flow directing channel to
deflect said stream of fluid onto said optical member; and
wherein said insertion member is adapted to deliver said stream
of fluid toward said means to deflect.
4,436,088
UPPER ARM BRACE
Alan FInnieston, 1901 NW. 17 A?e., Miami, Fla. 33125
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Scr. No. 299,815
Int a.J A61F 5/04
U.S. a. 128-77 3 Claims
1. An upper arm brace for protecting and reinforcing the
surfaces of the upper arm of the wearer between the shoulder
zone and the elbow zone, said brace comprising,
an elongate, generally U-shaped posterior member having a
base and sidewalls adapted to extend around the posterior
surface of the upper arm,
an elongate generally C shaped anterior member having a
base and side walls adapted to extend around the anterior
surface of the upper arm, the posterior member and the
anterior member having longitudinal side edges being
disposed in overlapping relationship with each other
whereby the anterior and posterior members encase the
upper arm with the inner surface of the anterior and poste-
bulged central portion of the anterior member with the
bicep muscle assists in retaining the arm brace =n a prede-
termined position on the upper arm,
fastener means mounted on said posterior member for secur-
ing said posterior and anterior members snugly together in
overlapping relationship.
4,436,089
PRESSURE DRESSING WITH CUSHION
Ednard Schmid, Bdheimstraaw 37, D7000 Stuttgart 1, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
per No. PCr/DE80/00028, § 371 Date No?. 9, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Nov. 9, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02517, PCT Pub.
Dat« Sep. 17, 1981
PCT FUed Mar. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 321,168
Int a.3 A61F 13/00
UA a 128-155 6Cl«iBii
1. A skin graft pressure dressing for pressing a skin graft
against a body member,
said pressure dressing comprising in combination:
a fluid-containing cushion for engaging and exerting pres-
sure against the entire skin graft and the surrounding
normal skin on the body member,
said cushion having thin flexible walls enclosing a space for
receiving a fluid material,
said walls being made of a thin flexible resilient foU material,
a rigid pressure plate engaging said cushion on the side
thereof opposite from the skin graft for pressing said
cushion against the skin graft and the surrounding normal
skin,
said plate being made of a transparent material,
the foil material between said plate and the skin graft also
being transparent to render the skin graft clearly visible
for inspection through said plate and said cushion,
means for securing said plate to the body member whUe
exerting pressure upon said plate to press said plate against
said cushion so that said cushion wUl exeri pressure
against the skin graft,
and means for producing, maintaining and controUing the
pressure of the fluid material within said cushion.
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SS9
4,436,090
PISTON ACTUATED, PILOT VALVE OPERATED
BREATHING REGULATOR
PhUUp H. Du1iM» 38 Maadowgraaa, Irriiic CaUf. 92714
ConttnitttioB of S«>. No. 5,158, Jan. 22, 1979, abaadoaad. This
•ppUcatioa Ang. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 291,998
Int CL> A62B 7/00
U.S. a 128— 204 J6 74 Clalau
4,436,091
SURGICAL CUTTING INSTRUMENT WTTH RELEASE
MECHANISM
Anton Baako, The Bronx, N.Y., aaalgnor to Surgical Daaip
CorporatloB, Long Island Qty, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 20, 1981, Sv. No. 245,704
IataiA61B 7 7/ii
U.S. CI. 128—305 8 Clalau
1. A device for the regulation of a user's breathing from a
source of pressurized gas, comprising:
a housing having passage means for conducting said pressor*
ized gas to said user;
a valve body in said housing, said valve body having a
pressurized gas inlet and a gas outlet, said outlet communi-
cating with said passage means;
a first pressurization chamber in said body, communicating
with said inlet;
valving means, moveable within said body, for controUably
opening and closing said outlet, said valving means having
first and second surfaces, said first surface confronting
said first chamber, said second surface having a larger area
than said first surface;
a second pressurization chamber communicating with said
first pressurization chamber, said second surface of said
valving means confronting said second chamber, said
valving means being moveable in opposite directions
within said body in response to the force differential be-
tween said first and second surfaces so that said valving
means closes said gas outlet when the force on said second
surface, equal to the pressure on said second surface times
the area of said second surface, is greater than the force on
said first surface, equal to the pressure on said first surface
times the area of said first surface, thus closing said gas
outlei. when the pressures in said first and second preuur*
ization chambers are equal, and said valving means opens
said gas outlet when the force on said first surface is
greater than the force on said second surface;
a pilot valve having pilot passage means for venting gas from
said second chamber to reduce the pressure in said second
chamber with respect to the pressure in said first chamber
so '.hat said valving means opens said outlet;
pUot passage closure means, slideably moveable between a
finit position and a second position, for closing said pilot
passage means in said first position and opening said pilot
passage means in said second position;
pUot valve actuating means, attached to said pilot passage
closure means, and forming a pressure interface between
the interior and exterior of said housing, for moving said
closure means from said first position to said second posi-
tion in response to an inhalation-induced reduction in
pressure on the interior side of said interface with respect
to the pressure on the exterior side of said interface; and
exhalation outlet means from said housing.
1. A surgical instrument fbr severing by a shi^ng action
material located between two coaeting surfaces comprising
an elongated tubular member having a surface defining an
opening into whieh material to be severed is introduced,
a cutter meaaa disposed within said tubular member and
having a cutting surface to coact with the surface of said
tubular member defining and opening for producing a
shearing action of material between said cutting surface
and said surface of said tubular member,
means for moving one of said cutting means and tubular
member to produce relative motion in a flrit direction to
produce the shearing action of material between said
coacting surfaces,
and means responsive to the controlled stopping of ralatlvt
movement in said first direction causihl said moving
means to produce relative motion betwtett said euttd*
means and said surflwc of said tubular tnetabet in a Mcond
direction opposite to said Arst dit«ctk>n fot a predeter-
mined amout to dear material tta^p^d therebetween, said
cutter means always lieihiittiAg within said tubular mem-
ber.
4^436,092
EXERCISE RESPONSIVE CARDUC PACEMAKER
WUUan A. Cook, Blooadngton; Neal E. Faaraot, and Laalle A.
Geddes, both of Weat Laftqretta, aU of lad., aaaigBors to Pur-
doe Raaearch Foaadatioa, Waat Lafayette, lad.
FIM May 19, 1982, Ser. No. 379,667
lat C1.1 A61N //id
U& a 128—419 PG 9 dalms
QOai
! IS
•---(loj
1. A cardiac pacemaker including means for variably con-
trolling the stimulation rate of the heart according to the level
of muscular exertion in the body, comprising:
a temperature sensing means for sensing a non-ambient body
temperature, said non-ambient body temperature related
by an algorithm to heart rate in a normally functioning
heari, said temperature sensing means producing an out-
put signal;
an algorithm implementing means connected to said temper-
ature sensing means for implementing said output signal
by an algorithm which represenu the mathematical func-
tion between said non-ambient body temperature and
heart rate in a normally functioning heart; and
360
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
a cardiac pacemaker connected to said algorithm implement-
ing meant and responsive thereto in order to variably
control the stimulation rate of said heart.
CARDIAC PACER HAVING ACTIVE NOTCH FILTER
SYSTEM
Keadidl W. Belt, Fort Atkinson, Wis., assignor to NorbUMT
Coriioration, Fort Atkinson, Wis.
ContiBiiation of Scr. No. 203,959, Nov. 4, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcatioB 8«p. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 425,223
Int a.) A61N J/36
VS. CL 128—419 PO 14 Clains
prising a reversible complex of a binding macromolecular
component, and a charge-bearing carbohydrate compo-
nent;
C. said reversible complex adapted to react with said glucose
to change the level of electrical charge sensed by said
electrode, to thereby indicate corresponding variations in
said glucose concentration.
15. The monitor of claim 14 wherein said binding macromo-
lecular component comprises one or more lectins, and said
charge-bearing carbohydrate component, comprises monosac-
charides and oligosaccharides containing a .material selected
from the group consisting of glucose, mannose, and mixtures
thereof
-wm
I. in a cardiac pacer of the type responsive to an applied
cardiac sense signal which includes a desired signal component
and a power line-induced int^erence component, a sense
amplifier comprismg:
means coftl^visin^ a phirality of selectable Mm|>le-and^hold
channels for mdtptndeatly sampling the instantaneous
amplitude of said cardiac llgnal;
sampling means for sequentially and repeatedly selecting
said channels whereby each channel is selected for an
equal period of time over a complete selecting cycle; and
signal summation means for combining the outputs of said
channels to derive an output signal including said desired
signal component;
said channels being selected at a frequency of nf; where n is
a whole integer and f is the frequency of the power line
component, Whereby said interference component is at-
tenuated from said outpttt signal.
4,436,094
Monitor for continuous in vivo
measuremeM* of glucose concentration
AattaoAjr CeraiDi, New YoHl, N.Y^ aaiigDor to ETreka, Inc.,
Bergenfteld, N J.
Cootinnatioii-iB-|Mrt of Ser. No. ^1,991, Mar. 9, 1981, Pat No.
4430,299. Tbs appUcation Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,128
I«t a.3 GOIN 33/66. i1/30
U.S. CL 128—635 30 Claims
14. A glucose monitor for the continuous, in vivo measure-
ment of glucose concentration in anioud body fluids compris-
ing:
A. an electrode adapted to electrically sense variations in the
concentration of said glucose in said body fluid;
B. said electrode including a charge-transfer medium com-
4,436,095
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMAGING A BODY
Robert A. Kmgcr, Salt Lake Oty, Utah, assignor to Thomson-
CSF Broadcast, Inc., Stanford, Conn.
FUed Dec. 22, 1991, Ser. No. 333.558
Int. a.3 A61B 6/00
U.S. a. 128—654 12 Claims
MOIATH
tOWICI
rK'
%■
I ocncTOR t-~- ''
I
VIDEO
aENCRATOal
CONV
v~C
Ni
0£lat1-V-
-^
-{k«H — =0^
*, lFH4Mtl
SYNC. CLOCK
folipuul
1*0
IHECOHOl
1. A method for generating a processed video image of a
fluid-carrying vessel in a body, comprising the steps of:
injecting a contrast medium to pass into the vessel;
irradiating the body;
detecting radiation which passes through the body and
generating a series of frames of electronic video signals
that represent an image of the radiation transmission char-
acteristics of the body at a series of different times, each
frame including an array of pixels, the video signal level at
each pixel being determined by the radiation transmissiv-
ity of an elemental region of the body, and c^)erating on
said series of frames as follows:
storing a frame of the sequence;
comparing the video signal level at each pixel of another
frame of the sequence with the video signal level at the
corresponding pixel of the stored frame;
selecting at each said pixel a video signal level representative
of the lower of the compared video signal levels;
re-storing the selected video signal levels; and
displaying the selected video signal levels.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S61
4,436,096
PORTABLE DIGITAL HEART RATE
METER/STETHOSCOPE
Walter R. Dyck, Medicine Hat, and Bums R. Hay, Calgary,
both of Canada, assignors to Her Majesty the Queen in right
of Canada, as represented by the Minister of National De-
fence, Ottawa, Canada
FUed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,442
Claims priority, appUcation Canada, Apr. 24, 1980, 350599
Int a.3 A61B 5/02
U.S. Q. 128—689 20 Qaims
and lower aerobic exercising means, wherein said opposi-
tion force applying means comprises a hydraulic pump
'-iv
a-'
^
»2_ r^
— ^r^
wn
CIM
caintii
^•[MtltTOII l^
U
«, T, .^
4,436,097
CARDIOVASCULAR EXERCISE APPARATUS
Patrick J. Cunningham, 350 Orangetborpe A?e., #27, Placentia,
CaUf. 92670
FUed Jut 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,464
lat a.3 A61B 5/02
U A a. 128—707 14 Claims
1. An improved cardiovascular exercise apparatus compris-
ing:
a frame adapted to support a user thereon;
means carried by said frame and adapted for manual rotat-
able movement in a flrst direction for providing aerobic
exercising of the upper body of said user;
means carried by said frame and adapted for manual rotat-
able movement in a first direction for providing aerobic
exercising of the lower body of said user; and
means for applying a pre-deterroined force in opposition to
and independent of the rotatable movement of said upper
connected to rotate a common rotable shaft cooperating
with said upper and lower aerobic exercising means in a
secon direction, opposite to said first direction.
1. An electronic heart rate detector comprising:
a transducer for providing an electrical signal in response to
sounds, including heart sounds;
filter means for filtering said electrical signal, said filter
means having a passband including frequencies character-
istic of heart sounds and producing a filtered electrical
signal;
means for detecting amplitude levels of said filtered electri-
cal signal exceeding a predetermined threshold level and
providing an output pulse of fixed duration in response to
each amplitude level exceeding said threshold level, the
output of said detecting means being connected to the
input thereof, said detecting means including a compara-
tor having an input connected to the output of said filter
means for producing a first output pulse in response to
each filtered electrical signal amplitude level exceeding
said threshold level, the duration of said first output pulse
corresponding to the duration of that portion of said am-
plitude level exceeding said threshold level; means for
selectively modifying the duration of said output pulse;
means responsive to the output of said pulse modifying
means for producing a second output pulse of predeter-
mined duration, the output of said second output pulse
producing means being connected to the input of said
comparator; and
means responsive to the output of said second output pulse
producing means for producing a signal representative of
a heart rate; and
means for displaying said signal as a detected heart rate.
4,436,098
NEEDLE ASSEMBLY WITH VEIN ENTRY INDICATOR
Joseph Kauflnan, Emerson, N J., assignor to Becton Dickinson
Company, Paramus, N J.
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,408
Int a.3 A61B 5/14
U.S. a. 128—766 6 Claims
1. A needle assembly for collecting a single blood sample
from a patient for introduction into an evacuated container,
comprising
(a) a translucent housing having a forward end and a rear-
ward end;
(b) a chamber in said housing;
(c) a first access opening in said forward end;
(d) a first cannula in fluid communication with said chamber
and extending outwardly from said first access opening
and adapted for insertion into a patient;
(e) a second cannula in fluid communication with said cham-
ber and extending outwardly from said second access
opening; the improvement characterized by
(0 said second cannula having a portion on the end thereof
opposite to that extending outwardly from said second
access opening, which extends internally into said cham-
ber;
(g) said internally extending portion having a first and a
second hole therethrough, with said second hole provid-
ing fluid communication between said chamber and the
lumen of said second cannula;
(h) a vent plug of air-permeable, blood-impermeable mate-
rial in liquid-tight contact with the outer surface of such
internally extending portion and overlying said first hole;
562
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
(0 means for temporarily restricting blood How coverina
Mud second hole; and
0) Mid temporary restricting means comprising a compliant
matenal forming a sealant plug permanently displaccable
from covenng said second hole by a negative pressure
gradient applied to said second cannula, and being suffi-
aenUy pliable to deform and pass through the lumen
tnereof;
(k) whereby blood flowing into said chamber from said first
cannula under normal tourniquet pressure is prevented by
•aid plugs from flowing into said second cannula, but can
be viewed through said translucent housing to indicate
vem entry by said first cannula while air in said chamber
paMes through said vent plug and first hole and through
said second cannula, and said sealant plug being drawn
through said second hole and the lumen of said second
cannula when said pressure gradient is applied for allow-
ing blood to flow through said second cannula for collec-
tion.
position between said fust and second elongate members;
and
means coupled to said interconnecting means and responsive
to said encoder output signal for determining an angular
displacement measurement between said fint and second
elongate members, said measurement representing the
relauve angular displacement between the two body por-
tions, said measuring means including a display means for
displaying said angular displacement mesurement. means
for generatmg a reset signal defming an initial angular
position between said elongate members, said measuring
means responsive to said reset signal for determining said
angular displacement measurement relative to said initial
angular position.
4,436,099
..-JSf™^^'^"^ ^^ MEASURING THE RANGE OF
MOTION ASSOOATED WITH A HUMAN BODY JOINT
OtmetrUm D. Raftopooloa, Toledo, Ohio, aMtoor to The Uni-
▼enity of Toledo, Toledo, OUo
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,899
„„ _ iBt a.3 A61B j/;o
UA a 128-782 „ ctata.
4,436,100
wm. w>^ SMOKE GENERATOR
WiUJam D. Green, Jr., 8906 Camden St, Alexmidria, Va. 22308
I^^«"'i!7^ °'^' ^*'- *^^®1' ^^ 17, 1979, Pat No.
4,259,970. Thli application Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251.074
Int a.3 A24F ^7/00
UA a 131-330 i^jctaiou
1. An apparatus intended for use in measuring the relative
angular displacement between two body portions connected to
a common joint comprising:
a first elongate member;
a fim support means adapted to be connected to a first one
of two body portions connected to a common joint for
supporting said first elongate member in generally spaced
reUtion to the first body portion, said first support means
maintainmg said first elongate member in spaced relation
to the first body portion as the first body portion is routed
about the common joint;
a second elongate member;
a second support member adapted to be connected to a
second one of the two body portions for supporting said
second elongate member in generally spaced relation to
the second body portion, said second support means main-
taming said second elongate member in spaced relation to
the second body portion as the second body portion is
rotated about the common joint;
means for pivotally interconnecting said first and second
elongate members including an encoder means for gener-
ating an output signal representing the reUtive angular
1. In an apparatus for generating and dispensing smoke by
combustion of material on an upstream side of a gas permeable
element through which a flow stream is induced by a blower,
the improvement residing in a housing having a portion within
which said gas permeable element is mounted downstream of
the blower, a hopper within which the material is stored up-
stream of the blower, means for introducing the material from
the hopper into the blower and an inflow conduit extending
through the hopper to the blower through which ambient air is
conducted to the blower separately from the material entering
the blower from the hopper through the material introducina
means. "
4,436,101
SELF.EXTINGUISHING aGAR OR OGAREITE
S^.SS*^ ^ ^"^^ Pwkway/Apt #3C Brooklyn
PUed Mar. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 479,278
Int CLiA24D 3/04. J /lO
VS. a 131-349 20 Claimi
1. An elongated smoking-tobacco member comprising in
combination: tubular material that is inflammable, tobacco in
cut-up form compacted within tubuUu- space of the tubular
material, a compressible enclosed vessel mounted within said
tubular space near one of opposite ends of the tubular material
and said compressible enclosed vessel containing within en-
closed space thereof a fire-extinguishing composition which
when heated is decomposible into fire extinguishing product
compnsmg a non-inflammable gas propellant that is non-toxic
such that compressing pressure appUed inwardly on exterior
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
363
tubular walls of the tubular nuterial at the one end resulu in series of pulses represenutive of the monetary value of the coin
compacting the enclosed vessel and contenu thereof to rupture identified by the signal, the means for generating each of the
aforesaid coin value indicative signals comprising at least one
light source and a detector circuit means associated with each
light source for generating a signal when the optical path
between the detector and the light source is interrupted, the
means for generating the gating signal comprising a light emit-
ting source and a detector circuit means u aforesaid on oppo-
site sides of an optical path that is interruptable by any of the
countable coins at the time that the signal indicative of the
the enclosed vessel and squirt said product into said compacted
tobacco.
4,436,102
CX)IN DISCHARGE MACHINE AND PARTITIONED
CARTON
Eiichi Kokubo, and Kyoichi Osako, both of Toyko, Japan, •••
signora to Laurel Bank Machine Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,885
Claims priority, application Japan, May 30, 1980,
55/74948[U]
Int a.3 G07D 1/08
UJS. a. 133—2 8 Claims
1. A coin discharge machine which comprises: a plurality of
cartridges, each accommodating coins of a given denomina-
tion; a plurality of dropping outlets communicating with re-
spective ones of said cartridges; a coin discharge mechanism
for individually discharging the lowermost coin from the coins
stacked in each said cartridge and for transferring the dis-
charged coin to one of said dropping outlets; a plurality of
discharge passages separated from each other by pairtitions and
in communication with said dropping outlets corresponding to
said cartridges; and a carton including a plurality of receiving
sections separated from each other by partitions, said receiving
sections being disposed under respective ones of said discharge
passages, and an open collecting section connected to all said
receiving sections for collecting coins from said receiving
sections, whereby all received coins are collected in the col-
lecting section and are easily picked up.
4,436,103
COIN COLLECTING AND COUNTING SYSTEMS
Neil M. Dick, Schenectady, N.Y., aaaigBor to 4-D Electnmics
Company, Inc., Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Not. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,390
Int a.J G07D 3/16
VS. a. 133—3 D 41 Claims
1. Coin counting apparatus or the like comprising: a coin
identification system including means for generating a sepa-
rate, distinct signal indicative of the value of each countable
.coin; means for coincidentally generating a gating signal; and
means for converting each of said first-mentioned signals to a
value of that coin is being generated to generate a position
indicative signal, the means for converting the value indicative
signals to the corresponding series of pulses comprising a solid
state device which changes states when any one of said value
indicative signals and the amplified, position indicative signals
are applied thereto, and said coin identification system further
including means energizable coincidentally with the genera-
tion of coin value indicative and gating signals for providing
indications that the means employed to produce said coin value
indicative and gating signals has functioned properly.
4,436,104
METHOD OF TREATMENT FOR RECYCLING A WASTE
nLM AS A RAW MATERIAL AND APPARATUS
THEREFOR
Hidehiro Kashiwagi, Toknshima, Japan, assignor to Taiyo
Denko ic«Kiifii<iri Kaisha, Toknshiou, Japan
DiTisioa of Ser. No. 293,420, Aug. 14, 1981, Pat No. 4,379,724.
This appUcation Jan. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 455,085
Int a.i B08B 3/02, 3/12
VS. a. 134—63 3 Claims
1. An apparatus for cleaning soiled, thermoplutic resin,
waste film which comprises: crushing means for cutting a mass
of soiled, thermoplastic resin, waste film to provide s mass of
pieces of waste film; an elongated washing tank adapted to be
filled with a cleaning liquid; and elongated mesh conveyor
disposed within said washing tank and movable substantially
horizontally therein and lengthwise thereof; feeding means for
564
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
feeding the mass of pieces of waste film onto one end of said
conveyor so that the mass of pieces of waste film is moved
lengthwise through said tank by said conveyor; fint supply
means for feeding a first quantity of the cleaning liquid into
said tank adjacent to said one end of said conveyor and direct-
mg the liquid lengthwise of said conveyor toward the opposite
end thereof; jet means located within said tank above said
conveyor and close to but upstream of the opposite end of said
conveyor and adapted for directing jets of a second quantity of
the cleamng fiuid in a direction lengthwise of and opposite to
the direction of movement of said conveyor; and ultrasonic
energy transducers located on opposite lateral sides of and
above said conveyor between said first supply means and said
jet means for directing ultrasonic energy across said conveyor,
and means located below said conveyor for discharging the
soil that is removed from said waste film.
4,436,106
PIPELINE SWITCH WITH LEAKAGE CONTROL AND
CLEANABLE LEAKAGE CAVITY
Otto A. P. Tuchenhagen, mchowDuuenberg; Hani O. E.
Mleth, Hunbiirg, and Herbert R. Coura, LiichowDannen.
berg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Otto Tuchen-
hagen GnbH A Co. KG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Divisionof Ser. No. 873.068, Jan. 27, 1978, Pat No. 4,344,453.
This appUcatioa Oct 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,662
, J2*^"* l"^«»'**y' ■PPUcatlon Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 29.
1977, 2703792; Nof . 14, 1977, 2750833 '
Int a.J F16K 1/44
U.S. a. 137-240 5 c^j^
CLCANIMO FUllO
4,436,105
VALVE ACTUATOR HAVING AN ADJUSTABLE COLLET
LOCK
Kip B. Goans, Harvey, La., assignor to Baker CAC, Inc., BeUe
Chassc, La.
FUed Not. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 318,188
Int a? F16K 31/122
UA a. 137-1 22 Claims
22. A method of operating a shiftable valve member into
wedging engagement with a fixed valve seat by a linearly
shiftable actuator, comprising:
(a) moving the actuator Unearly to shift the valve member to
Its closed position in engagement with the valve seat;
(b) engaging a cam surface on the actuator with the valve
member during the final linear movement of the actuator
to wedge the valve member toward its seat;
(c) engaging the actuator with a latch in its valve closed
position; and
(d) automatically shifting the latch to accommodate for wear
of the operative surfaces of the valve member, valve seat
and actuator.
1. Apparatus for cleaning a liquid connection and securing a
stroke and spring abutment for double seat pipeline switches
with leakage control, comprising a pipeline switch housing, a
pipeline switch drive mounted within said switch housing, two
va^ve disks of different sizes, two concentrically mounted
valve rods of different lengths, one of said valve rods being
hollow, the one of longer length fitting within the other of
shorter length, said inside valve rod being connected to said
pipeline switch drive and the smaller of the two valve disks
said inside valve rod upon being lifted by said drive carrying
a^ong said valve disk of larger size, said valve disks in both the
closed position and the open position enclosing between them-
selves a leakage cavity, one end of said hollow valve rod
defimng a pressing and guide part with a spring abutment and
a connecting opening adapted to receive a cleaning fiuid, a rod
head forming a portion of the longer valve rod and defining a
connectmg opening, an upper spring abutment and an upper
stop surface for said pressure and guide part, and a spring
between said rod head and said pressing and guide part to bias
them apart, said valve rod of longer length defining an axial
bore with transverse holes communicating with said leakage
cavity and said connecting opening in said valve head, said
pressing and guide part communicating around said valve rod
of longer length and through said leakage cavity with said axial
bore and connecting opening of said valve head to provide a
fluid passageway for said cleaning fluid through said appara-
4,436,107
VENTILATION VALVE
Bengt A. Persson, 28B, Corso Italia, CH-6911 Campione D'l-
talis, Italy
FUed Jul. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 59,399
Claims priority, application Sweden, Sep. 12, 1978, 7809583
Int a.J F16K 15/00
U.S. a. 137—314 2 Claims
1. An air valve connectoble to a pipe to relieve vacuum in
said pipe whUe preventing escape of fluid therefrom, said valve
including:
a body having an inner chamber and air inlet means for
communicating said inner chamber with the ambient at-
mosphere,
said air inlet means including inner and outer concentrically
spaced valve seats.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
565
an annular water collecting groove immediately surround-
ing said outer valve seat,
a valve element displaceably mounted in said inner chamber,
said valve element being normally urged to a valve closed
position and being shiftable to a valve open position in
response to a vacuum in said pi(>e,
said valve element including an annular disc formed of an
eleastic material with said disc having a diameter suffi-
cient to engage said outer concentrically spaced valve seat
6' I
-11 U
t-5
when the valve element is in its closed position but insuffi-
cient to cover said annular water collecting groove sur-
rounding said outer valve seat, and
a channel connecting said water collecting groove and said
pipe so that when said valve element is in its closed posi-
tion with said annular disc engaging said inner and outer
concentrically spaced valve seats communication is main-
tained between said inner chamber and said pipe to permit
transmission of vacuum to said inner chamber and water
in said water collecting groove to said pipe.
4,436,108
VALVE ASSEMBLY
Eugene W. Ellsworth, 1220 E. Alice St., Phoenix, Ariz. 85020
FUed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,853
Int a.3 F16K 79/00
U.S. a. 137—375 12 Claims
1. A valve assembly for receiving a pressurized first fluid and
a pressurized second fluid and for controllably distributing a
selected said fluid to a common receiver, said valve compris-
ing:
(a) a housing including an intermediate body portion having
a first end having a first inlet chamber formed inwardly
therefrom and a second end having a second inlet chamber
formed inwardly therefrom, a first end portion detachably
receivable to the first end of the intermediate body portion
and a second end portion detachably securable to the
second end of said intermediate portion,
i. a first inlet for receiving said first fluid,
ii. a second inlet for receiving said second fluid,
iii. an outlet for discharging said selected fluid,
iv. first passage means communicating between said first
inlet and said outlet, said first passage means including
the first inlet chamber for receiving said first fluid from
said first inlet and an outlet chamber communicating
between said first inlet chamber and said outlet said
first inlet chamber including detachable liner means,
v. second passage means communicating between said
second inlet and said outlet, said second passage means
. including the second inlet chamber for receiving said
second fluid from said second inlet and said outlet
chamber, said second inlet chamber including detach-
able liner means, said detachable liner means having
substantially greater erosion resistance characteristics
than said housing for protecting said chamber from
erosive effects of said pressurized fluids, said liner
means being clamped between the intermediate body
portion and the respective end portions to retain the
liners in their respective inlet chambers, said housing
being separable for removal of said liner means,
(b) first valve means reciprocally movable, in response to a
pressurized third fluid, between an open position and a
closed position for selectively controlling the flow of said
first fluid through said first passage means; and
(c) second valve means reciprocally movable, in response to
said third fluid, between an open position and a closed
position for selectively controlling the flow for said sec-
ond fluid through said second passage means.
4,436,109
MAGNETICALLY COUPLED POSmVE ACTING LEVEL
CONTROL
Wesley L. Taylor, 8300 SW. 8, Oklahoma Qty, Okla. 73108
FUed Feb. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 469,847
Int a.5 F16K 31/34. 31/126
U.S. a. 137—413 16 Oaims
>—
1. A liquid level control, comprising:
a body adapted for connection with a liquid containing
vessel having a liquid drain or supply valve;
lever means pivotally supported by said body for vertical
pivoting movement of its respective end portions;
float means pivotally supported within the vessel proximate
said lever means for vertical pivoting movement in re-
S|X)nse to the rise and fall of liquid in the vessel;
magnetic means supported by said lever means and said float
means, respectively, in magnetic inductive relation for
pivoting said lever means in a direction opposite the direc-
tion of pivoting movement of said float means;
said body having a valve seat and having lateral bores
forming a fluid pressure path through the body valve
seat;
a source of fluid pressure connected with the liquid drain or
supply valve through the lateral bores;
valve housing means secured to said body in communication
with the lateral bores;
pressure-responsive valve means for receiving said fluid
pressure therein and being supported by and disposed
within the valve housing means for axial snap action
movement toward and away from the body valve seat in
response to changes in the fluid pressure within the pres-
sure-responsive valve means; and,
nozzle valve means and a nozzle orifice being interposed in
the fluid pressure path between the pressure-responsive
valve means and the atmosphere, said nozzle valve means
is opened and closed by said lever means as a result of
changes in the fluid pressure within the pressure-respon-
sive valve means for fluid pressure biasing said pressure-
responsive valve means toward and away from said body
valve seat in response to the rise and fall of liquid in the
vessel.
S66
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
M36,iio
PRESSURE REGULATING SYSTEMS
I>B*B. Ueawna, Terachuir, and Marins de Groot, Schyedam,
both (tf Netfaerlaada, aaaigBon to Land! den Hartos BV, Neth-
crlaodi
Filed Mar. 25, 1582, Ser. No. 361,752
Int CL^ G05D 16/00
U.S. a 137-487 J 12 Claim.
1. A regulating system for regulating the pressure in a fluid
flow line comprising:
(i) a regulating device connected in said flow line for vary-
ing the fluid flow rate along said line,
(ii) an electro-fluid control loop comprising
(a) a feed back line connected to said flow line to provide
a feed-back pressure related to to the pressure in said
flow line,
(b) a control arrangement in which said feed back pressure
IS compared with a reference pressure to provide an
electrical output signal for controlling the regulating
device in the sense to maintain a predetermined rela-
tionship between said feed back pressure and said refer-
ence pressure,
characterised in that said control arrangement comprises:
(A) a pair of control chambers, each control chamber being
divided mto sub^hambers by a flexible diaphragm and
said feed-back pressure being connected to act in one
sub-chamber and the reference pressure being connected
to act in the other sub-chamber,
(B) a diaphragm position scnser associated with each control
chamber and comprising an electric senser having a senser
coU whose electrical output is representative of the dis-
tance of the diaphragm from it, the arrangement being
such that a variation in said feed-back pressure in relation
to said reference pressure causes said diaphragms to move
m opposite directions relatively to their associated senser
coils, and
(C) comparator means for comparing the electrical outputs
from said senser coils to provide an output for controlling
said regulating device.
4,436,111
HYDRAUUC FUSE VALVE
Harold Gold, 3645 Tolland Ri, Shaker Heighta, Ohio 44122,
and Tadeoaz Badiich, 80 Murwood Dr., Moreland Hills, Ohio
44U22
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,596
Int a.3 F16K 17/30
U A a. 137-498 ^ Claim.
1. A valve assembly operable to block fluid flows in excess
of a predetermmed fluid flow, said valve assembly comprising
a housing for conducting fluid, said housing including an inner
side surface which includes a converging surface area, an inlet
end portion disposed at a first end of said converging surface
area and having a first diameter, and an ouUet end portion
disposed at a second end of said converging surface area and
havmg a second diameter which is smaUer than the first diame-
ter, a flow control member disposed in said housing, said flow
control member having a circular rim with a sharp edge por-
tion which cooperates with said inner side surface of said
housing to form a first variable size orifice, said flow control
member being movable relative to said housing between a first
position in which said sharp edge portion of the rim of said
flow conti-ol member cooperates with said inlet end portion of
said inner side surface of said housing to form an annular
orifice having a relatively large cross sectional area and a
second position in which said sharp edge portion of the rim of
said flow control member cooperates with said outlet end
portion of said inner side surface of said housing to form an
annular orifice having a relatively small cross sectional area,
said sharp edge portion of said flow control member being
disposed radiaUy inwardly of said converging surface area
dunng at least a major portion of the movement of said flow
control member between the first and second positions, and
coil spring means disposed downstream of the rim of said flow
control member for urging said flow control member toward
said first position and for blocking fluid flow through said
housmg when said flow control member is in said second
position, said coil spring means including a plurality of turns
which cooperate to define a second variable size orifice
through which fluid flows when said flow control member U in
the first position, said turns to said coU spring means being
disposed in tight abutting engagement to block fluid flow
through said housing when said flow control member is in said
second position.
4,436,112
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
Terrance J. Atkin., Rocheater, and Martin J. Field, ChurchTiUc,
both of N.Y., anignora to General Motora Corporation, De-
troit, Mich.
Filed Aog. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,651
Int. a.3 F16K 31/12
UA a 137-510 4Ctai^
4. A fuel pressure regulator comprising a diaphragm overly-
ing a base and defining a fuel chamber therebetween, said base
including a fuel access region opening to said chamber and a
fuel outlet opening from said chamber and a valve seat sur-
rounding said outlet, said diaphragm carrying a valve member
controlling fuel flow past said valve seat through said ouUet, a
coil spring having one end engaging said diaphragm and bias-
ing said diaphragm to urge said valve member toward said
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
567
valve seat whereby fuel flow past said valve seat through said
outiet is controlled to balance the fuel pressure on said dia-
phragm with the bias of said spring on said diaphragm, a spring
seat engaging the other end of said coil spring, a spring housing
surrounding said coil spring and said spring seat, a tie rod
having one end secured to said diaphragm, the other end of
said tie rod being adapted to engage said spring seat for limit-
ing movement of said spring seat away from said diaphragm,
whereby said coil spring is captured between said spring seat
and said diaphragm to simplify assembly of said pressure regu-
lator, the position of said spring seat being axially adjustable
within said housing to vary the bias of said coil spring on said
diaphragm, said spring housing having a base overlying said
spring seat, said base being axially deformable to adjust said
spring seat to the position required to establish the desired fuel
pressure in said chamber, wherein said pressure regulator
includes a stem extending from said base and a flange underly-
ing said base, said stem being adapted to receive a washer
overlying said base and a member effective to draw said flange
toward said washer to compensate for over-deformation of
said base toward said spring seat, both said base and said hous-
ing having an annular flange and said diaphragm having an
annular sealing region disposed between said flanges, said
sealing region having a plurality of peripherally spaced aper-
tures receiving fasteners which clamp said sealing region be-
tween said flanges, and wherein said sealing region has slits
extending peripherally between and spaced peripherally from
said apertures, whereby undue distortion of said diaphragm
results in separation of said diaphragm along an arcuate line
between one of said slits and one of said apertures instead of
along a radial line from one of said apertures, said diaphragm
thereby maintaining a continuous seal between said flanges.
4,436,113
CLEANING APPARATUS
John F. Finger, Bereaford, S. Dak., aaaignor to Sioux Steam
Qeaner Corporation, Bereaford, S. Dak.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 191^38, Sep. 29, 1980, Pat. No.
4,368,757. Thi. application Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335^61
Int a.3 B08B 3/00
UA a. 137-565 13 Claim.
portion of said outer tube to an outlet at a first end with
an inlet being located at a second end outside said outer
tube,
(c) first conduit means for connecting the second end of
said outer tube to the inlet of said pump,
(d) second conduit means for connecting the second end
of said inner tube to said detergent container,
(e) third conduit means for connecting the first end of said
outer tube to said water container,
(0 disk means mounted inside said outer tube adjacent the
first outlet end of said inner tube for defining a flow
annulus with said inner tube, and
(g) first check valve means in said third conduit means for
preventing backflow into said water container.
4,436,114
HYDRAUUC VALVE MECHANISM
Wolfgang KStter, Markgrttningen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aa-
aignor to Robert Boach GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,185
aaim. priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 16.
1980,3034859
Int. a.J F15B 13/04
U.S. a. 137—596 9 ri.1,.,
FINI
^^-^-'^'
1. Pressure cleaning apparatus comprising, in combination:
a pair of liquid containers at subsumtially the same level
including a water container and a detergent container;
means for replenishing and maintaining the liquid in said
water container at a predetermined liquid level;
a positive displacement pump located below said containers
and having an inlet and an outlet, the outlet being con-
nected to a nozzle; and
means for supplying a mixture of water and detergent to said
pump; including
(a) an outer tube having first and second straight end
portions interconnected by a curved intermediate por-
tion,
(b) an inner tube projecting through the curved intermedi-
ate portion of said outer tube in sealed relation there-
with, said inner tube extending axially within one end
1. A hydraulic valve mechanism, comprising a housing
having a first bore and a second bore; a control valve element
in said first bore and having control edges for direction control
and arranged so as to selectively connect motor ports in an
operative position with fluid feed and return means and to
block the same in a neutral position, and control edges ar-
ranged for forming throttle means; a pressure compensation
valve
upstream of said throttle means and having a longitudinal
valve element in said second bore and allowing with said
throttle means load independent flow control; and a non-
return valve downstream of said throttle means and coop-
erating with the motor ports, said control edges for direc-
tion control being arranged on said control valve element
only at one side of said throttle means, said non-return
valve being also arranged in said second bore of said
housing, and said longitudinal valve element also forming
a closing member of said non-return valve.
4,436,115
PRESSURE COMPENSATED FLUID CONTROL VALVE
WITH MAXIMUM FLOW ADJUSTMENT
Tadeuaz Budzich, Moreland Hilla, Ohio, anignor to Caterpillar
Tractor Company, Peoria, 111.
Filed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,037
Int a.3 F15B 13/04
U.S. a. 137—596.1 9 ciaimi
1. A control valve assembly suppUed with pressure fluid by
a pump, said control valve assembly comprising a housing
having an inlet chamber, a supply chamber, first and second
load chambers, and exhaust means connected to reservoir
568
OmCIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
means, first valve means for selectively interconnecting said
load chambers with said supply chamber and said exhaust
means, first positive load control orifice means responsive to
movement of said first valve means and operable to meter fluid
flow between said supply chamber and said load chambers,
second negative load control orifice means responsive to
movement of said first valve means and operable to meter fluid
flow between said load chambers and said exhaust means,
positive load fluid throttling means between said inlet chamber
and said supply chamber, negative load fluid throttling means
between said load chambers and said exhaust means, single
pilot valve means operable through said positive load fluid
throttling means to throttle fluid flow from said inlet chamber
to said supply chamber and also operable through said negative
load fluid throttling means to throttle fluid flow from said load
chambers to said exhaust means to maintain a constant pressure
differential at a preselected constant level across said single
pilot valve means and to maintain a constant pressure differen-
tial across said first and said second control orifice means, and
adjusting control means having means operable through said
single pilot valve means to vary the level of said constant
pressure differential across one of said first positive load con-
trol orifice means and said second negative load control orifice
means, without thereby varying the level of said constant
pressure differential across the other of the said control orifice
means.
4,436,116
FOUR-WAY VALVE
Henry R. Billeter, Marco Island, Fla., assignor to Sloan Valve
Company, Franklin Park, 111.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,833
Int. a.3 F16K 11/08. 5/14
U.S. a. 137—625.47 4 Claims
1. A four- way valve for use in a railroad air brake system
including a housing having a generally cylindrical internal
chamber and ports in communication therewith, two of said
ports being adapted for connection to a railroad car brake pipe
with an intermediate port being adapted for connection to the
railroad car air brake system, a valve member movable about
the axis of said chamber between a plurality of positions, there
being a position to close each port and a neutral position in
which all ports are in communication with said chamber, the
improvement comprising a seal member having a spherical
sealing surface carried by said valve member, spring means
urging said seal member and sealing surface thereof outwardly
of said valve member and toward said ports, and seal means for
each port including a floating seal ring within each port and
positioned for contact with said valve member seal member
sealing surface, said floating seal rings being movable axially
relative to said valve member seal member, with the outer
diameter of each floating seal ring being greater than the pres-
sure responsive sealing surface of said valve member seal mem-
ber whereby if the pressure upon said floating seal ring from
exteriorly of said four-way valve is greater than the pressure
within said four-way valve chamber, a floating seal ring will be
urged by said greater pressure into firm sealing contact with
said valve member seal member, an operating rod forming a
portion of said valve member and extending outwardly there-
from, from opposite sides thereof, from said housing, and
spring means attached to opposite ends of said rod for holding
said rod in a fixed axial position relative to said valve member.
4,436,117
LEAK RESISTANT PLUG ASSEMBLY
John E. Martin, Penllyn Pike, Springhoose, Pa. 19477
Filed Dec. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 446,153
Int. a.3 F16L 55/12
U.S. a. 138—89 13 Qainw
1. For use in plugging a tube having a hole, an expandable
plug assembly, comprising:
a sleeve having a longitudinal axis with an endwall and a
deformable tubular sidewall surrounding said endwall for
cooperating therewith to form a chamber closed at one
end and open at its opposite end, said sleeve having a
plurality of cutting edges formed integral therewith and
defined by V-shaped intersecting converging surfaces
providing a slender deformable tip and a series of shallow
grooves therebetween,
a wedge contained within said chamber, a separate expand-
able ring mounted in said chamber and having a tapered
bore slidably receiving said wedge,
said wedge, when pulled axially of the chamber, cooperating
with the ring to expand the same and thereby to expand
the tubular sidewall of the sleeve outwardly whereby the
cutting edges cooperate with the tube to define a labyrinth
seal along the outer periphery of the sleeve.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
569
4,436,118
SLEEVED DRILL PIPE
WUliam R. Garrett, Houston, Tex., assignor to Smith Interna-
tional, Inc., Newport Beacii, Calif.
Cootinaation of Ser. No. 197,057, Oct. 14, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 10,235, Feb. 8, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 818,672,
Jul. 25, 1977, Pat. No. 4,171,560. This application Dec. 7, 1981,
Ser. No. 328,169
Int. C\? E21B 17/10
\}&. a. 138—110 11 Claims
1. A drill pipe comprising:
a metal tube,
a tool joint member at each end of the tube, and
a circumferentially homogeneous metal sleeve disposed
about the tube between the tool joint members and axially
spaced from said members,
said sleeve being a dual metal centrifugal casting including
inner and outer metal shells, the outer shell being harder
than the inner shell and the inner shell being softer than
the outer shell, and
means securing said sleeve to said tube comprising a layer of
adhesive material therebetween,
both of said shells being circumferentially continuous,
the inner periphery of the harder shell being integral with
the outer periphery of the softer shell,
the inner periphery of said inner shell having a diameter
larger than the outer diameter of said tube and being
everywhere out of contact therewith,
the ends of said sleeve being out of contact with said tube
and all members connected to said tube,
said tube being free of stress concentrations at the ends of the
sleeve which could occur if the inner shell contacted the
tube, and which could occur if the ends of the sleeve
contacted a member connected to the tube.
4,436,119
THERMAL ACOUSTICAL PIPE INSULATION
James E. Shahan, and Loren Pitts, both of 55 E. Jackson Blvd^
Chici«o, lU. 60604
FUed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 422,462
Int. a.J F16L 3/08. 59/12
\jS. a. 138—149 4 Gainu
1. A prefabricated jacket assembly for thermally and acousti-
cally insulating a fluid conduit comprising:
(a) a pair of mating semicircular longitudinal sections,
(b) an outer metallic cover for each section,
(c) means for connecting the longitudinal edges of said cover
of each section together to form a cylindrical jacket,
(d) insulation conforming to the configuration of said cover
positioned upon the inner surface thereof,
(e) a backing element for the exposed surface of said insula-
tion,
(f) yieldable spacing means positioned between the outer
surface of the conduit to be insulated and said backing
element of said insulation,
(g) a vibration damper in the assembly between the outer
cover and the conduit.
(h) a damper supporting means comprising a pair of spaced
apart support members each having a portion inseriable
through the center of said damper from opposite ends
thereof so as to be independent of each other while coop-
erating to maintain said damper in its relation to said
backing member, and
(i) means for connecting said damper in facial contact with
the inner surface of the cover with said connecting means
isolated by said damper from said supporting leg portions.
4,436,120
INFLATABLE INTERNAL PIPE OBTURATOR WITH
HARDENABLE CORE
Daniel Josien, Wiilems, and Jean-Louis Migliarese, Paris, both
of France, assignors to Compagnie Francaise des Petroles,
Paris, France
Filed Jun. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 388,772
Claims priority, application France, Jun. 23, 1981, 81 12265
Int a.3 F16L 55/10
U.S. CI. 138—93 5 Gaims
liuwuAf Uinta.
I 7 ii ■• * <t * ^11
-.^^^-.j^. ^^'^^^^rZ^ ■ — : — , , . ...^ — ,-^
1. A displaceable internal obturator for a pipe, comprising:
(a) a central core (13) including a cylindrical portion (16),
said core comprising a flexible envelope (14) filled with a
hardenable material,
(b) a flexible inflatable sleeve (20) disposed around the cylin-
drical portion of said core,
(c) a flexible outer cylindrical sealing wall (9) disposed
around said sleeve and retained in place at at least one
longitudinal extremity thereof,
(d) a first flexible umbilical cord (21) connected to said
570
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
^c^^^^^'^^r '°' •"''°'"""' * ""'' ""^^ '"^° "^^ ^»>'°"«^ -•»•*=»' *« t*''""* P«»»«. the mixing tube being de-
(e) a second flexible umbUical cord (22) connected to said J?Z^ h "" *"' ^""[H^^ '^^ ^^ *"^ cross-section is non^ir-
sleeve for inflating said sleeve with a pressu^ fluid ''"^ *"** " '»*^^«* "» « •«»» one direction, the upstream
whereby the obturator may be introduced into a pipe and
displaced therealong to a desired position, whereafter the
core filler material is hardened and the sleeve is inflated to ^x=>r5>
urge the outer cylindrical wall into sealing engagement . ^^O/'
with the pipe inner wall to obturate said pipe.
4,436,121
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING AN ELASTIC OR
NON-ELASnC RIBBON
Rene Chcynet, St Jnat-Malmont, France, aiiignor to Cheynet et
sea fUa, France
FUed Jan. 30, IMl, Ser. No. 230,026
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 1, 1980, 80 02511
Int CL^ D03D 47/00
VS. a. 139—116 7 n«lm. . ^ .
vuunu portion of the mixmg tube being substantially circular, the total
cross-sectional area at the exit end being substantially that of
the remainder of the mixing tube.
IJS** P^' -%*
1. A process for making a woven ribbon with two stitched
selvages on a ribbon loom by moving a single weft inserting
member crosswise in two directions, the weft inserting mem-
ber dnving a single weft thread in both directions, the weft
inserting member inserting a first auxiliary thread in one direc-
tion to a position outside one selvage edge and alternately
driving a second auxiliary thread in the opposite direction to a
position outside the opposite selvage edge, the weft inserting
member engaging each of the auxiliary threads during one
direction of movement and being free of such engagement
during movement in the opposite direction, tying each freed
auxiliary thread to the respective selvage along with the weft
thread when the direction of the weft inserting member is
reversed.
4,436,122
DEVICE FOR INSERTING A THREAD INTO THE
WEAVING SHED OF A PNEUMATIC WEAVING
MACHINE BY MEANS OF A FLOWING FLUID
Hnbert P. van Mnllekom, Deomc, Netfacrlanda, iMignor to
Rnti-te Strakc, B.V., Nctherlandi
FUed Dec 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,634
ClaiBi priority, application Netberiuids, Dec. 31, 1980,
8007127
Int a^ D03D 47/30
VS. CL 139-438 5 ctaina
1. A device for inserting a thread into a transport tunnel
formed in the weaving shed of a pneumatic weaving machine,
the thread being inserted by a flowing fluid, said device com-
prising at least one injector including a unitary mixing tube
4,436,123
DEVICE FOR STORING FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
FOR USE ON A LOOM
Georg Senn, and Walter Koch, botii of Rfiti, Switzerland, assign-
on to Rati Machinery Works Ltd., Ruti, Switzerland
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,736
Clainu priority, appUcation Switzerland, Oct 31, 1980.
8108/80; Sep. 7, 1981, 5739/81
Int a.} D03D 47/34
VS. a. 139—452 12 Qainu
1. A device for storing filamentary thread material for insert-
ing weft threads in weaving machines, having a feed nozzle for
feeding the thread material and air, and further having an
endless thread carrier provided with a rough surface and pass-
ing the said nozzle for temporary retaining of the fed material,
characterized by the fact that the feed nozzle is arranged rig-
idly fixed in position, and that a cover member is arranged
about the horizontal part of the Uiread carrier, which cover
member rests on the thread carrier merely under the action of
iu own weight and is fixed against displacement in the longitii-
dinal and U^nsverse directions of the tiiread carrier, wherein
the material coming from the nozzle is introduced between
thread carrier and cover member.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
571
4,436,124
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR BOTTLING
OXYGEN.SENSTTIVE UQUIDS
Wolfgang Borstelmann, Dortinnnd, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Holstein nnd Kappert GmbH, Dortinnnd, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,702
Clainu priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 28.
1981,3102678
Int a.3 B65B 31/00
VS. CL 141-5 7 ctoiBu
—J
2. Apparatus for filling a container having a bottom with an
oxygen-sensitive liquid under pressure comprising liquid feed
meuis adapted to be inserted into said container for feeding
liquid into said container from said bottom thereof, said liquid
defining a rising liquid level during feeding thereof through
said liquid feed means, buffer gas feed means adapted to feed
into said container a buffer gas layer over said rising liquid
level during feeding of said liquid by said liquid feed means,
said buffer gas feed means being movable together with said
rising liquid level within said container during feeding of said
liquid.
3. In a process for filling containers with an oxygen-sensitive
liquid under pressure, said liquid defining a surface of said
liquid during said filling process, the improvement which
comprises that a buffer layer of gas is maintained over said
surface of said liquid throughout said filling process to main-
tain said liquid separated from any oxygen which may be
present within the container, said buffer gas being continu-
ously delivered to said container during the filling process, and
that said container is depressurized with said delivery being
maintained during said depressurizing of said container.
4,436,125
QUICK CONNECT COUPLING
Brian J. Blenkush, Maple Gro?e, Minn., assignor to Colder
Products Company, St Paul, Minn.
FUed Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 359,071
Int CL^ B67C 9/00
VS. CL 141—330 8 Claims
end and defining a path for the flow of fluid therethrough,
said male coupling member including a hollow tubular
portion defining an axial bore adjacent said front end, said
tubular portion being enclosed at the front end thereof by
a penetrable membrane to seal off said fluid flow path, said
tubular portion being constructed and arranged for
removeable insertion a predetermined distance into the
front end of said female coupling member, said female
coupling member defining an axial tubular bore within
which said tubular portion of said male coupling member
is concentrically received, said tubular portion of said
male coupling member including a ring-like seal about iu
circumference near the front end of said male coupling
member for providing a fluid tight seal between the out-
side surface of said tubular portion and the inside surface
of said tubular bore of said female coupling member upon
insertion of said male coupling into said female coupling
member;
(c) a valve assembly adapted for reciprocating longitudinal
axial movement within the tubular bore of said female
coupling member bet\yeen a front end position and a back
end position, said valve assembly being constructed and
arranged for engaging said male coupling member upon
insertion of said male coupling member into said female
coupling member whereby said valve assembly is caused
to move toward the back end of said female coupling
member into said back end position, said valve assembly at
a front end including a hollow needle-like member
adapted to puncture the penetrable membrane of said male
coupling member, whereby fluid How from said male
coupling member to said female coupling member is en-
abled upon removeable attachment of said male coupling
member to said female coupling member, said valve as-
sembly including means for sealing off" the fluid flow path
through said female coupling member when said valve
assembly is in said front end position, whereby said fluid
flow through said female coupling member is prevented
when said male coupling member is removed therefrom;
(d) locking means proximate the front end of said female
coupling member for releasably locking said male cou-
pling member in said female coupling member, said lock-
ing means being activated upon insertion of said male
coupling member a predetermined distance into said fe-
male coupling member;
(e) release means interconnected to said locking means for
deactivating said locking means whereby said male cou-
pling member is released by said locking means; and,
(0 spring biasing means adapted for biasing said valve assem-
bly toward the front end of said female coupling member
into said front end position, whereby when said male
coupling member is released from said female coupling
member, said valve assembly is biased into said front end
position thereby preventing the flow of fluid through said
female coupling member.
mg:
1. A quick connect/disconnect coupling assembly, compris-
(a) a female coupling member having a front end and a back
end, said female coupling member defining a path for the
flow of fluid therethrough;
(b) a male coupling member having a front end and a back
4,436,126
WOOD PLANING MACHINE
Peter Lawson, Campinas, BrazU, assignor to RockweU Interna-
tional Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,318
Int a.» B27C J/00
VS. a. 144—130 4 Clahns
1. A thicknessing machine having a plurality of comers for
wood comprising,
(a) an elongated bed over which the wood passes,
(b) an upper housing spaced from said elongated bed.
(c) cutter and drive rollers mounted in said upper housing
for rotation about separate parallel axes.
572
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
(d) a plurality of hollow pillars each containing a threaded e. said lower sidewall reinforcement providing relative stiff-
shaft for adjusting said upper housing, and locating the ness in its area of location.
4,436,127
ADVANCED PROHLE RADIAL TIRE HAVING
RELATIVELY HIGH INFLATION PRESSURE
Manuel G. Balbis, and Colin V. King, both of Rome, Italy,
assignors to The Firestone Tire A Rubber Company, Akron,
Ohio
FUed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,028
Qaims priority, application Italy, Apr. 29, 1981, 67S78 A/81
Int. a.3 B60C 3/00. 15/06
VS. a. 152—209 R 6 Claims
68
M
h
JORW
1. In an inflated tire and rim assembly wherein the tire in-
cludes a tread portion, a tread reinforcement in the tread por-
tion, a pair of sidewalls respectively on opposite sides of said
tread portion, a pair of bead portions respectively at the inner
edges of said sidewalls, a lower sidewall reinforcement adja-
cent each of said bead portions and sidewall inner edges, a bead
reinforcement in each of said bead portions, and a radial car-
cass reinforcement extending from one bead portion to the
other, the improvement being in the profile of said tire charac-
terized in:
a. the tire having a section height H and a section width S,
the aspect ratio (H/S) being in the range from about 0.80
to about 0.90;
b. the maximum section width (S) being located at a height
(h) of more than 53 percent of said section height (H),
with the design width (DRW) of said rim being about 65
percent of said section width (S);
c. the width (TW) of said tread portion being greater than 70
percent of said section width (S);
d. the inflation pressure of said tire being a minimum of
about 25 percent greater than the inflation pressure of a
conventional proflle tire of equivalent size, said assembly
being operable at said greater inflation pressure at about
the same load capacity and at about the same tire deflec-
tion as a conventional proflle tire while having acceptable
ride comfort characteristics; and
4,436,128
TIRES FOR WHEELS
Simon P. Pointer, 31 Eaton St, Norwich, NR4 7LD, England
FUcd Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 402,971
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jul. 30, 1981,
8123406
Int. a.3 B60C I5/0a J 1/00, 13/00
UJS. a. 152—209 R 5 Claims
vertical position of said upper housing on said hollow
pillars with respect to said elongated bed.
1. A tubeless tire for a wheel comprising a tread portion, and
sidewall portions terminating in bead portions to rest in the
well of a wheel rim to receive the tire, lips spaced outwardly
from the bead portions and integral with the sidewall portions
to overlie respective outer surfaces of the wheel rim flanges
and form, with the bead portions, recesses to receive the pe-
ripheral edges of the rim flanges, a plurality of equispaced
venting channels extending across each bead portion, the chan-
nels in one bead portion, and a plurality of equispaced parti-
tions extending transversely between the side walls and radi-
ally inwardly from the inner surface of the tread portion to
divide the tyre interior into a series of empty cells each of
which extends between the side walls and are entirely devoid
of solids within the sidewalls and tread portion.
4,436,129
COMPOSITE SEMIRIGID SNOW CHAIN, WITHOUT
REAR HOOKING MEANS, FOR MOTOR VEHICLES
Aldo Razza, No. 63, Via Pio Foa, Rome, Italy
FUed Dec. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 449,958
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Dec. 18, 1981,
362217/81[U]
Int. a.3 B60C 27/00
U.S. a. 152—213 A 3 Claims
1. A snow chain for motor vehicles having two parts
adapted to be applied to a wheel independently of each other,
means for connecting said parts together on the wheel, each of
said parts including a frame which is essentially rigid but has a
limited flexibility formed of two semicircular bars lying in
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
573
spaced radial planes and two U-shaped bridge elemenU con-
necting said bars at their ends for maintaining the bars in
spaced radial planes, said parts having flexible friction elemenU
which are connected to and arranged in spaced relation be-
tween said U-shaped bridge elements, an elastic connecting
element connecting said two paru together at each end thereof
and stop means for limiting the stretching of said elastic ele-
ment, said parts being located around substantially the entire
surface of the wheel.
where, d is an eflective diameter in mm of said reinforcing
element which is given by:
1.25xVNx^
where, N is the number of fllamenu constituting said reinforc-
ing element, a shock absorbing sheet interposed between said
carcass ply and each of said side portion reinforcing layers and
said ofT-road tire configured for mounting on a rim of at least
13.00x23.
4,436,130
PNEUMATIC RADUL TIRE HAVING AN EXCELLENT
SIDE-CUT RESISTANT PROPERTY
Yasuo Suzuki, Akigawa; Masaru Abe, Sayama, and Toshiro
Tezuka, Higashi-Murayama, aU of Japan, assignors to Bridge-
stone Tire Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 244,481, Mar. 16, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 63,641, Aug. 1, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 773,733, Mar. 2,
1977, abandoned. This appUcation Sep. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 416,520
Qaims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 4, 1976, 51-22651
Int. a.3 B60C 9/04, 9/08. 9/14
U.S. a. 152—353 R 15 Claims
1. An ofT-road pneumatic radial tire having an excellent
sidecut resistant property, comprising; a radial carcass body
composed of at least one rubberized ply layer each containing
metal cords embedded therein and a belt superimposed about
said radial carcass body and having a high rigidity, said tire
comprising I or 2 extensible and compressible rubberized side
portion reinforcing layers independently arranged at each side
portion of the tire and on one side of said carcass at that area
of each side portion of the tire which is inclusive of at least the
maximum cross section position of the carcass and each con-
taining a reinforcing element embedded therein and composed
of a bundle of helically formed filaments, each bundle having
3 to 30 filaments and each bundle formed by merely assembling
together said helically formed filaments without twisting at
random wherein each filament is formed of a steel wire mate-
rial, said reinforcing elements each having the helically formed
filament having a diameter <^ in the range of 0. 1 mm to 1.0 mm,
and an average diameter D of an outer contour projected on a
plane perpendicular to the axial direction of one pitch of the
filament defined by Dmax + Dmin/2 in the range of 2<|> to 20<|>,
an elongation at tensile breaking strength which is at least 1.3
times larger than that of said metal cord of the radial carcass
body, wherein said reinforcing element of each side portion
reinforcing layer located at the maximum width position of the
carcass in a vertical center section through the rotational axis
of the tire is inclined at 0* to 70* with respect to a radial plane
which is projected on and in parallel with said vertical center
section, wherein a ratio 8 of a space formed between the two
adjacent reinforcing elements to a pitch S in mm between the
midlines of said reinforcing elements is given by;
4,436,131
PNEUMATIC RADIAL TIRES
Yutaka Yamaguchi, Tokorozawa; Nobuyuki Koizumi, Higa-
shimurayaraa; Tamio Araki, Fuchu; Koichi Kojima, Higa-
shimurayama, and Nobumasa Ikeda, Kodaira, aU of Japan,
assignors to Bridgestone Tire Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 422,912
Clabns priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 29, 1982, 57-9916[U]
Int. a.i B60C 9/00
U.S. a. 152—361 FP 6 ClaUns
1. In a pneumatic radial tire comprising a tread portion, a
pair of sidewall portions extending from both sides of the tread
portion, a pair of bead portions extending from the sidewall
portions, a carcass of radial structure extending from one bead
portion to the other and composed of at least one rubberized
ply containing cords therein, and a belt superimposed about a
crown portion of the carcass and consisting of a first belt body
composed of a single ply containing metal twisted cords ar-
ranged at an inclination angle of 5*-23* with respect to the
equatorial plane of the tire and embedded in a coating rubber,
both end portions in widthwise direction of which being folded
on the remaining central base portion thereof, and a second
belt body composed of at least one rubberized ply containing
inextensible cords inclined with respect to the equatorial plane
and crossed with the cords in the base portion of the first belt
body, the improvement in which the coating rubber for the
first belt body has a dynamic modulus of 160-400 kg/cm^ and
a thickness of rubber interposed between the cords in the base
portion and the cords in the folded portion is within a range of
1.3-4.3 times an average diameter of the cords and is not less
than 2 times a thickness of the coating rubber located outside
the cords in the base portion opposite to the folded portion.
5 - (Z) + </ - <{>)
= 0.11 to 0.78
4,436,132
BEAD RINGS FOR TIRES
Jean-Pierre Cesar, Sayat, and Jean-Louis Charvet, Clermont-
Ferrand, both of France, assignors to Corapagnic Generals des
Etablissements MicheUn, Germont-Ferrand, France
Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 384,915
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jul. 20, 1981, 81 14228
Int. a.J B60C 15/04; B29H 17/32
U.S. a. 152—362 R 10 CUdms
1. A bead ring for a tire bead formed of an annular core and
an assembly of wires arranged on the core and surrounding it,
characterized by the fact that the assembly of wires is consti-
tuted of at least one layer formed of at least one strand of
continuous nonmetallic filaments which are practically parallel
to each other and free of impregnation, which strand is wound
around the core in the same direction to a layer thickneu at
574
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
^J^^ ^»T**^ *T"??/ **T**^.°[' 'V^*"^ ■"*^* proximity of one end thereof, an arcuate Hange provided at the
core and c is Uie average circumference of the core) and a twist
in the tame direction as the winding and equal to one turn per
pitch.
4.436,133
CAST VEHICLE WHEEL RIM
Jakob Rohr, SehaffliaiiseB, Switzerland, assignor to George
Fischer Ltd^ Switzeriand
FOed No?. 4, 1961, Ser. No. 318,943
Chdns priority, application Switzerland, No?. 13, 1980,
8421/80
lat a^ B40B 21/02
UA a 1S2-38U 11 ctahns
1. A unitary, cast vehicle wheel rim, particularly for use
with a tubeless tire, comprising:
a rim profile portion formed with a radially outwardly fac-
ing surface having a first outer tip, a first conical portion,
a drop center, a shoulder, a second conical portion and a
second outer tip in sequence axially, said first conical
portion partially overlying and spaced radially relative to
said drop center,
a support ring axially offset adjacent said first conical por-
tion and formed as an axial extension of said drop center,
said support ring having a conical surface for mounting
the rim on a support device, such as a spider; and
a generally radially extending annular crosspiece intercon-
necting said support ring with the center of said first
conical portion, and thereby, with the remainder of the
rim.
4,434,134
TIRE TOOL
Doipterd Gather, Rtc. 1, Box 43, CaMroo, Okla. 74932
Filed No?. 24^ 1981, Ser. No. 324,620
Int CL^ B60C 25/04
VS. CL 157->1 J 12 Claims
1. A tool kit comprising a tool for removal of a tire from a
wheel rim, lever means, and helper means, said tirc tool com-
prising a main body portion having a bore provided in the
extending outwardly from one face of the main body portion
and in a direction opposite the arcuate flange, and a plurality of
second rollers joumalled at the outer end of the arm member.
4,436,135
PORTABLE DISPLAY SYSTEM
WiUy Ytter, Stockhohn, Sweden, assignor to Eztra?enion. Inc..
New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 116,102
Int a.) A47G 5/00
VS. CL 160-135 11 Claims
1. A portable display system comprising:
a plurality of panel assemblies each comprising a detachable
front panel and a detachable rear panel, and border strip
means including at least fust and second peripheral sup-
port members for supporting and positioning the detach-
able panels in a substantially parallel and confronting
relationship;
said first peripheral support means at least partially remov-
ably positioned along at least one outer edge of said de-
tachable front and rear panels, said second peripheral
supf^rt means positioned along the other edges of said
detachable front and rear panels;
hinge means for interconnecting the plurality of panel as-
semblies with said panel assemblies being divided into first
and second arrays;
said arrays each including a main panel assembly and at least
one other connected panel assembly;
said hinge means comprising at least first and second pairs of
side hinges and a pair of comer hinges,
means securing said first pair of side hinges to side disposed
second peripheral support means of adjacent panel assem-
blies of the first array;
means securing said second pair of side hinges to side dis-
posed second peripheral support means of adjacent panel
assemblies of the second array;
means securing said pair of comer hinges between main
panel assemblies of first and second arrays with one of said
corner hinges disposed along said side disposed second
peripheral support means of first and second array main
panel assemblies, and the other of said comer hinges dis-
posed along opposite side disposed second peripheral
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
575
support means of first and second array main panel aasem'
blies.
4(436,136
INSULATED SLAT
Robert C Downey, Jr., Coluibas, Ohio, anlvBor to Hanco
Corporation, Canp Hill, Pa.
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,805
bt a' A47H J/J3
VS. a. 160—232 17 oalms
1. A door including at least a first slat assembly and a second
slat assembly, each slat assembly comprising:
(a) a skt including
(i) a generally planar side portion having an interior sur-
face on one side and an exterior surface on the other
side,
(ii) an upper end curved portion,
(iii) a lower end curved portion;
(b) an insulation cover piece including
(i) a generally planar side portion having an interior sur-
face facing towards said slat and an exterior surface
facing away from said sUt.
(ii) an upper end curved portion disposed at least partially
around said upper end curved portion of said slat, said
upper end curved portion of said cover piece held to
said upper end curved portion of said slat by iu curva-
ture around said upper end curved portion of said slat,
(iii) a generally planar upper end transverse portion ex-
tending from said side portion of said insulation cover to
said side portion of said slat, and
(iv) a generally pUnar lower end transverse portion ex-
tending from said side portion of said insulation cover to
said side portion of said slat; and
(c) insulation disposed in a cavity between said side portion
of said slat and said side portion of said insulating cover,
said cavity bounded by said upper transverse portion and
said lower transverse portion; and
wherein said lower end curved portion of said slat of said first
sUt assembly is disposed at leut partially within said upper
curved portion of said skt of said second slat assembly for
relative rotation between said first and second slat assemblies.
4,436,137
WINDOW INSULATION SYSTEM
Hogh G. Oarlea, 41 Coed-y-Glya. Soatley Rd.. Wrexham.
awyd.Engiaad
Filed Apr. 2. 1982. Ser. No. 364^10
Gains priority. appUcatioa United Klagdon. Apr. 4. 1981.
8110618
lat CL? E06B 9/J7
VS. CL 160—242 5 n.i—
1. A window insulation system for thermally insulating a
rectangular window assembly comprising:
(a) a roller blind mechanism carrying a transparent plastics
blind;
(b) means for mounting said roller blind mechanism to a
window frame above said window assembly;
(c) VELCRO strip means on the longitudinal side edges and
flnee transverse edge of said blind;
(d) mating VELCRO strip means on the f^ame around the
vertical side edges and the horizontal lower edges thereof;
and
(e) means enabling the roller blind mechanism to be dis-
placed on said mounting means between a first position, in
which the roller blind mechanism is spaced from the frame
to enable the blind to be retracted and extended, and a
second position wherein the roller blind periphery is in
sealing engagement with said frame above said window
Assembly, the latter means comprising:
(1) respective camming means pivotally interconnected with
said mounting means at the opposite ends of the roller
blind mechanism,
(2) said camming means each including a pair of camming
surfaces which are approximately mutually perpendicular;
(3) means joumaling said blind mechanism between the two
camming means;
(4) lever means pivotally interconnected with said mounting
means; and
(5) cam follower means carried by said lever means and
engaging said camming surfaces said cam followers com-
prise a projection on each of said lever means.
4.436.138
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR RECLAIMING
MOLDING SAND
Toahio KoBdo, YokohaoM, Japaa, aaaipMr to Nippon Chuao
Kabnshttd Kalaha, Kanapwa, Japu
Coatfanatloa-bHpttl of Ser. No. 171,404, JoL 23, 1980,
abudoned. This applieatioa Feb. 22, 1982. Ser. No. 35Wr
lat a.) B02C 19/J2
VS. a. 164—5 4
1. A molding sand reckmation apparatus comprising:
(a) a cylindrical housing having an opening for dust exhaus-
tion in an upper part thereof
(b) a feed opening for supplying unreclaimed sand, located in
the upper part of said cylindrical housing;
(c) a rotary drum positioned concentrically below a distribu-
tor for receiving distributed unreclaimed sand and having
a cylindrical wall, a flat base, and no top such that said
576
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
distributed unreclaimed sand is centrifugally scattered
over the top of said cylindrical wall when said rotary
drum rotates;
(d) a distributor rigidly fixed to said feed opening so dimen-
sioned as to enable distributing said unreclaimed sand fed
by said feed opening within the perimeter of the rotary
drum, said distributed unreclaimed sand falling in a cylin-
drical curtain from the outer periphery of said distributor;
(e) an annular C-shaped rack means, having a lower flange,
a cyUndrical wall, and an upper flange, concentrically
mounted above said rotary drum for receiving said scat-
tered unreclaimed sand and retaining said sand in place,
said lower flange of said rack means being separated by a
first predetermined distance from the top of said cylindri-
cal wall of said rotary drum, and said cylindrical wall of
said rack means being separated by a second predeter-
mined distance from said cylindrical housing;
(0 a fan attached integrally to the lower surface of said
rotary dnmi, such that the axis of rotation of said fan and
the axis of rotation of said rotary drum are in alignment;
(g) a suction pipe having one end thereof connected to a
central suction port of said fan and the other end thereof
which communicates with the outside of said cylindrical
housing; and
(h) a discharge opening for discharging reclaimed sand,
located in the lower part of said cylindrical housing,
wherein said first predetermined distance is adjustable by
adjusting said lower flange of said rack means so that the
amount of distributed unreclaimed sand escaping through said
first predetermined distance per unit time is less than the
amount of unreclaimed sand being supplied through said feed
opening per unit time, thereby ensuring that scattered unre-
claimed sand overflows the outer periphery of said rack means.
3. A process for reclaiming molding sand comprising the
steps of:
(a) feeding unreclaimed sand througlTa feed opening onto a
cylindrical distributor;
(b) allowing the fed sand to overflow the periphery of said
distributor and to fall in a cylindrical curtain of a smaller
diameter into a rotating rotary drum having a larger diam-
eter;
(c) scattering sand centrifugally by rotation of said rotary
drum so that the scattered sand rubs against stationary
sand pressed by centrifugal force against the cylindric^
wall of said rotary drum, thereby producing shearing
forces between the scattered and stationary layers of sand;
(d) allowing the scattered sand to overflow the periphery of
said rotary drum and to escape through a space defined by
the top of the cylindrical wall of said rotary drum and the
lower flange of an aimular C-shaped rack means, such that
the rate of escape is less than the rate of supply through
said feed opening;
(e) holding some of the scattered sand stationary by means of
said rack means and allowing the scattered sand which did
not escape through said space to scatter further as a result
of the centrifugal force produced by said rotating rotary
drum, thereby producing additional shearing forces be-
tween the further scattered and the sutionary layers of
sand; and
(0 overflowing the further scattered sand over the periphery
of said rack means.
M36,1J9
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURE OF
BRAKE DRUMS
Don S. Strader, Lansiiig, Mlch^ iMigBor to Motor Wheel Cor-
poratkM, I^mring, Mich.
FUed JnL 20, 1981, Scr. No. 284,932
Int CL^ B22D 19/08
VS. CL 164—112 6 Claim
1. Molding apparatus for manufacturing brake drums of the
type which include a preformed brake liner in the form of an
annular hoop and a shell cast around said liner, said apparatus
comprising a pair of die sections which collectively define a
mold cavity having a central axis in a closed position of said die
sections, and a centering mandrel carried by one of said die
sections for receiving a brake liner so as to define one wall of
said cavity, said centering mandrel comprising spring means
disposed in a circumferential array around a radial portion of
said mandrel for engaging the braking surface of a liner
mounted on said mandrel so as to center said liner with respect
to said axis.
4. A method of manufacturing brake drums of the type
which include a preformed brake liner and a shell cast around
said liner, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) providing a pair of die sections, at least one of which is
movable with respect to the other along an axis common
to said die sections between an open position and a closed
jj-
position in which said die sections cooperate to form a
mold cavity for said shell, one of said die sections includ-
ing a mandrel with radially oriented self-centering means
carried thereon and adapted for internal engagement with
a brake liner,
(b) with said die sections open, locating a said preformed
brake liner on said mandrel over said self-centering means
such that said means cooperates with said liner to fixture
said liner in a substantially cylindrical configuration coaxi-
ally with said axis,
(c) closing said die sections such that said brake liner is
fixtured within said cavity to form one wall of said cavity,
and then
(d) casting said shell within said cavity around said brake
liner.
4,436,140
METHOD OF CHARGING MOLTEN METAL INTO A
VERTICAL DIE CASTING MACHINE
Masuo Ebisawa, Kawagoe, and Tetsoya Suzuki, Oimachi, both
of Japan, assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 113,762, Jan. 21, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,161
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 26, 1979, 54-7888
Int a.3 B22D J 7/ J 2
VJS. a. 164-120 5 Claims
1. A method of charging molten metal into a vertical die
casting machine comprising: a die having an upper passageway
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
577
and a lower passageway defined therein, said upper passage-
way including an upper sleeve disposed therein and an upper
plunger disposed in said upper passageway for compressing
said molten metal, said lower passageway including a lower
sleeve and a lower plunger disposed in said lower passageway
for receiving said molten metal, both of said plungers cooper-
ating to charge molten metal stored therebetween into a mold
cavity defined in said die, and the gap between said upper and
lower sleeves defining an inlet passage to said mold cavity, the
method comprising the steps of:
lowering said upper plunger to a predetermined position;
raising said lower plunger to urge said molten metal up-
wardly and into said mold cavity;
actuating said upper plunger to start compressing said mol-
ten metal sandwiched between said upper and lower
plungers substantially before movement of said lower
plunger has been completed; and
completing compression of said molten metal by said upper
plunger substantially after movement of said lower
plunger has been completed, and prior to solidification of
said molten metal between said plungers.
4,436,141
MOLDING SAND BLOWERS
Aguitin Arana Erana, Zorrostea, 4 Poligono Industrial All-
Gobeo, Victoria, Spain
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 23S,732
Clainis priority, application Spain, Feb. 20, 1980, 488791; Apr.
9, 1980, 249912[U]
Int. a.3 B22C 15/22
U.S. a. 164—201 2 Claims
1. A blowing sand molding machine comprising:
a main frame having mounted on an upper portion thereof a
hopper for storing sand to be molded;
support means mounted on said main frame and consisting
essentially of first and second parallel guide bars extending
along a front portion and a rear portion, respectively, of
said main frame, said first guide bar being positioned at a
level substantially lower than said second guide bar;
master plates mounted on said guide bars for movement
along said guide bars between a closed position whereat
said master plates define a mold cavity and an open posi-
tion;
a blower cartridge mounted on said main frame for move-
ment between a first position beneath said hopper to re-
ceive therefrom a charge of sand to a second position
above said mold cavity when said master plates are in said
closed position;
means for directing automatically pressurized gas into said
blower cartridge when said blower cartridge is in said
second position thereof, and thereby for blowing the
charge of sand in said blower cartridge into said mold
cavity, said directing and blowing means comprising a
nozzle extending horizontally from said blower cartridge
and communicating with the interior thereof, a flexible
duct adapted to be connected to a source of pressurized
gas, and a block member permanently connected to said
flexible duct and having defined therein a horizontally
extending orifice, said block member being mounted on
said main frame at a position such that when said blower
cartridge moves to said second position thereof said noz-
zle of said blower cartridge simultaneously automatically
is inserted into said orifice in said block member; and
means for mounting said block member at said position
thereof for vertical displacement with said blower car-
tridge, said mounting means comprising a support fixed to
said main frame and including verticil guides, said block
member having rollers mounted for movement in said
vertical guides, spring means mounted on said support and
acting on said block member for urging said block mem-
ber upwardly along said guides, and abutment means
mounted on said support at a position to be abutted by said
block member under the spring force of said spring means,
the vertical position of said abutment means being adjust-
able.
4,436,142
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING DUCHLE
IRON CASTINGS
Da?id S. Mather, Montreal, Canada, assignor to Harvey Hub-
bell Incorporated, Orange, Conn.
FUed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,217
Int. a.i B22D 27/20
VS. a. 164-337 7
1. The combination of an open mold containing a nodulizing
treatment chamber and a casting cavity inlet adjacent the
treatment chamber and spaced therefrom by one portion of an
upper mold surface, and a sealing member mounted for move-
ment toward and away from the mold for respectively engag-
ing and disengaging the upper surface of the mold;
said sealing member having a lower surface opposing the
upper mold surface which extends to cover the underlying
treatment chamber and the casting cavity inlet, said seal-
ing member having a portion which is raised from the
mold upper surface portion opposite the treatment cham-
ber to form a first conduit for the flow of nodulized mol-
ten metal therefrom to said casting cavity inlet when the
member engages the mold;
said sealing member having a second conduit extending
upwardly from the raised portion of said sealing member
for conveying molten metal to said treatment chamber;
and
reservoir means mounted on the sealing member communi-
cating with said first conduit for containing the nodulized
metal received from said first conduit.
578
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,143
HORIZONTAL CONTINUOUS CASTING APPARATUS
G« Scmtakis, 5648 Angola Rd^ Toledo, Ohio 43615
OMtluurtioa of S«r. No. 255,559, Apr. 20, 1961, abudoMd.
Thk aMliettioa Ju. 7, 19U, 8«r. No. 800,227
lat d^ B22D J J/00
MM, a 164-440 10 r%mimm
I. A horizonU] continuous casting apparatus comprising
a furnace having a bottom wall, side walls and a top wall,
a holding block supported within said furnace and having a
vertical opening and a horizontal opening communicating
with the vertical opening,
the vertical opening extefl£ng upwardly,
a crucible mounted within said furnace and having a down-
wardly extending opening,
means fbr providing communication between the opening of
the crucible and the vertical opening of said block,
a side wall of said furnace having a horizontal opening,
a die associated with said horizontal opening in the side wall
and extending externally of said furnace,
means for providing communication between the horizontal
opening of the holding block and said die,
and cooling means associated with said die such that molten
metal passes downwardly from said crucible through the
vertical opening and horizontal opening of said block and,
in turn, through said die wherein the cooling means func-
tion to progressively solidify the metal as it is removed
from the die,
a mounting bracket on said furnace defining downwardly
and inwardly inclined surfaces engaged by said cooling
means to locate and align said die with said opening in said
holding block.
4,436,144
PRISMATIC BRICK OF REFRACTORY MATERIAL
Joael Horak, Vlaaiia, Aaatrfa, avisBor to Vaitscher Magnetit-
weriM*ActicB-G««aUaehaft, Vtenna, AMtria
CoMiaaitkM of S«r. No. 119,796, Feb. 8, 1980, abudoocd. This
applicatkM Feb. 5, 1982, Scr. No. 346,225
OaiBH priority, applicatioB Aoatria, Feb. 20, 1979, 1302/79
IM. a^ F28D lT/00
VS. d 16S— 9.1 2 daiins
ti^;:n3pi^d3/
comprised of centrally positioned prismatic bricks of refrac-
tory material surrounded by edge and comer bricks, all of the
centrally positioned prismatic bricks having a bottom surface,
a top surface, a longitudinal axis extending between the sur-
faces, and a through passage of tetragonal cross-section coaxial
with the longitudinal axis, the passage having a hydraulic
diameter of 120 to 200 mm, the hydraulic diameter being de-
fined by the relationship: four times the passage cross-section
divided by Uie periphery of the passage cross-section, and the
ratio of the hydraulic diameter to the wall thickness of the
brick, measured in the direction of the main axes extending
parallel to the bottom and/or top surface being between 3 and
S, and the periphery of each brick defining sharp comers and
the periphery of the through passage of each brick defining
four rounded comers, the bricks being stacked in layers to
form the checkerwork and the bricks in each layer being so
staggered from the bricks of an adjacefit one of the layers that
each brick of a respective superposed layer stacked on a^
spective underlying layer resto on the top surfaces of four
bricks of the underlying layer, the four bricks defining therebe-
tween a through passage in alignment with the through pas-
sage of the brick of the superposed layer and the rounded
comers of the latter through passage projecting inwardly in
relation to the former through passage.
4,436,145
CHARGE AIR COOLER MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
Joseph N. Maaflredo, Palos Verdes Estates, and Selwyn R.
Hirsch, Los Angeles, both of Calif., assignors to The Garrett
Corporation, Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed No?. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,937
Int CL^ F28F 9/00; F28D 9/00
VJS. CL 165—67 24 Claims
1. A checkerwork for chambers of a glass melting furnace
1. A charge air cooler mounting arrangement for mounting
a charge air cooler within an engine intake manifold, compris-
ing:
a plate-fin charge air cooler having a heat exchanger core
with a stacked plurality of generally parallel plate-fin heat
transfer elements defining a first flow path and a second
flow path generally parallel with said first flow path for
respective passage of charge air and coolant in heat trans-
fer relation with each other;
at least one relatively rigid mounting sleeve carried by said
charge air cooler to extend perpendicularly of said plate-
fin elements and having a length at least as great as the
width of said charge air cooler,
an engine intake manifold having a chamber formed therein
for reception of said charge air cooler with said mounting
sleeve extending transversely between a pair of manifold
side walls bounding opposite sides of the chamber;
means extending through at least one of said manifold side
walls and into said mounting sleeve for securing said
mounting sleeve with respect to said one side wall and
thereby secure said charge air cooler within said manifold;
and
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
579
means coupled between said plate-fm elemenu and said
mounting sleeve for preventing leakage between said first
and second flow paths in the vicmity of said mounting
sleeve.
4,436,146
SHELL AND TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER
James Smotarek, Blasdell, N.Y., assignor to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbory, Conn.
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,681
Int. 0.1 F28D 7/02
VJS. a 165—111 13
itiitfrtlltf:
f
iJii|iaD|ii|ini
a ^ '^ i >
It
compartmentt for a circulating cooling fluid, an aperture in
said partition member providing communication between said
compartments, a fluid inlet to one of said compartments, a fluid
ouUet from the other of said compartments, two pairs of plate
members defining two chambers of an inner assembly for a
circulating fluid to be cooled, one of said plate memben of one
of said pairs being formed by said partition member said plate
members being disposed such that one plate member is exposed
to the circulating coolant in one compartment and the other
plate members are exposed to the circulating coolant in the
other compartment, a fluid inlet to one of said chambers, a fluid
outlet from the other of said chambers and aperture means
providing communication between said chambers.
4,436,148
CHEMICAL TREATMENT FOR OIL WELLS
Richard Maxwell, 2021 E. 56tfa, Odessa, Tex. 79762
FUed Apr. 27, 1981, Scr. No. 257,780
Int a.' E21B n/06, 37/08, 43/12. 44/00
U.S. a. 166—53 3 n»im^
1. An open-ended, shell and tube heat exchanger for use in a
vertical position comprising:
(a) a longitudinal shell,
(b) a pair of spaced tube sheets attached near their periphery
to the upper and lower ends of the shell so as to define an
enclosed space,
(c) baflle means positioned proximate to the lower tube sheet
extending across and attached to the longitudinal shell so
as to divide the enclosed space into a larger condensation
chamber and a smaller vapor-liquid separation chamber,
said baffle means comprising a plurality of first openings
and a plurality of second openings larger than said first
openings,
(d) a plurality of heat transfer tubes extending through the
enclosed space having their opposite ends attached to
each tube sheet, each tube extending through a first or
second opening and adapted to have a first heat exchange
medium flow therethrough,
(e) a first conduit for introducing vapor communicating with
said condensation chamber,
(f) means for distributing the vapor substantially throughout
the condensation chamber, such that vapor and condens-
ing liquid flow downwardly along substantially the entire
length of said heat transfer tubes,
(g) a second conduit having an opening communicating with
the vapor-liquid separation chamber for removing con-
densed liquid, and
(h) a third conduit having an opening communicating with
the vapor-liquid separation chamber, for removing vapor,
at a point above the opening of the second conduit.
4,436,147
DUAL FLUID HEAT EXCHANGER
Sharon J. Hadson, Jr., LaasbertriUe, Mich., assignor to Sharon
Mannlactnring Company, Laasbert^ille, Mich.
Filed Not. 30, 1978, Ser. No. 965,149
Int d} F28D 9/00: F28F 3/12
MS. CL 165—165 10 n«i—
1. A heat exchanger made of sheet metal components com-
prising: an outer shell made of two shell memben bonded
together, a partition member in said outer shell defining two
1. In a liquid system having:
a. a liquid reservoir,
b. a pump with a pump intake in the reservoir,
c. a flow line from the pump having premurized liquid from
the reservoir,
d. a treatment drum, and
e. treatment liquid in the drum; wherein the improved struc-
ture for adding treatment liquid to the reservoir com-
prises:
f. a closed volume chamber having a top and bottom,
g. a flush line extending from the bottom of the volume
chamber to the reservoir,
h. a flush valve in the flush line.
j. a treatment feed line connecting the treatment drum to the
volume chamber,
k. a feed valve in the feed line,
1. a vent line extending from the top of volume chamber to
atmosphere,
m. a vent valve in the vent line.
S80
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
n. a liquid pressure line from the flow line to the volume
chamber, and
o. a pressure valve in the pressure line,
p. a source of gas at a gas pressure which is greater than the
pressure of the reservoir Uquid at the level of the bottom
of the volume chamber,
q. a gas line connecting the source of gas to the volume
chamber, and
r. a gas valve in the gas line,
s. a controller providing means for opening and closing said
valves so that
(i) opening the feed valve and the vent valve and closing
all other valves will fill the volume chamber with treat-
ment liquid, and then
(ii) opening the flush valve and pressure valve and closing
all other valves will flush the treatment liquid from the
volume chamber into the reservoir, and
(iii) after flushing the treatment liquid into the reservoir,
then opening the gas valve and flush valve and closing
all other valves will purge the volume chamber of
liquid.
4,436,149
HYDRAUUC SETTING TOOL
Arnold G. Edwards, Duncan, Okla^ assignor to Halliburton
Company, Dmican, Okla.
Filed Jon. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 389,700
Int a.3 E21B 23/06
\}&. a. 166—120 17 Claims
1. Apparatus for setting in a bore a well tool of the type
having radially expandable anchor means and a mandrel-
actuated slidable valve for permitting flow through the tool,
said apparatus comprising:
inner and outer sleeves telescopically interengaged and
adapted to be suspended from a tubing string for lowering
into the bore;
means for attaching a shearable connector to the lower end
of said inner sleeve for suspending such a tool therefrom;
a vertically shiflable mandrel received within the inner
sleeve for engaging the well tool valve;
means for maintaining said mandrel in a predetermined
upper position with respect to said inner sleeve;
means for telescopically moving said inner sleeve upwardly
relative to said outer sleeve, said outer sleeve engaging
said anchor means to effect setting of the tool responsive
to such movement; and
means for maintaining said mandrel in a predetermined
lower position with respect to said inner sleeve subsequent
to such setting of the tool.
4,436,150
BRIDGE PLUG
James M. Barker, Dallas, Tex., assigm>r to Otis EngiDeering
Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
FUcd Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,150
Int a.3 E21B 33/129
U.S. CL 166—31 29 Claims
1. A bridge plug for a well bore comprising
an elongated linear mandrel having an internal bypass pas-
sage opening to the lower end of said mandrel, with the
upper end of said passage terminating in lateral ports
opening to the exterior of said mandrel;
an elongated tubular outer mandrel mounted for limited
axial movement on said inner mandrel;
external slips carried on said outer mandrel for limited axial
movement relative thereto, and disposed to be expanded
into setting engagement with a well bore;
a tubular setting assembly mounted for axial movement on
said outer mandrel above said slips; said setting assembly
including a lower top wedge to engage and expand said
slips, an upper compression member, and an annular elas-
tic seal element disposed to be compressed between said
top wedge and said compression member and thereby
expanded radially into sealing engagement with the well
bore;
said outer mandrel and said compression member having
means for coupling to a setting apparatus, for concurrent
upward pull of said outer mandrel and downward push of
said setting assembly to effect the setting of said bridge
plug in a well bore;
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
381
coupling means for coupling said inner mandrel to said above said radial cement poru, thereby permitting pressured
SSh f.ift ^"*t "^ ^ °' downward movement there- Huid supplied through the tubular member to urge said annular
Td briigl plig; ' """""^ '^" **"'"* °^ P*«°" •^"'"y ^^"^^ '^°"d annular valve downwardly to
said outer mandrel'having lateral ports for selective commu- ^'°^ '"** *^'"*"* ^^'
nication with said inner mandrel ports to open and close
said bypass passage;
yieldable coupling means coupling axially said inner and
outer mandrels during the running of said plug into the
well bore, to maintain said ports in communication to
open said bypass passage; said yieldable coupling means
yielding and said outer mandrel being moved upward
relative to said inner mandrel, during the setting of said
bridge plug, to move said ports out of communication to
close said bypass passage.
'^^' SHIFTING TOOL
APPARATUS W>« WMX Cram^C THROUCH A En«. P. FWit. J,, ^ WIllUu. R. W.lc», bodi .f C«n,n,<«.
FUed Jul. 7, 1982. Ser. No. 385,613 u.S. Q. 166—214
Int a.J E21B 33/16, 33/06
SClalms
U.S. a. 166—154
5 Claims
1. A well conduit cementing apparatus for effecting plural
stage cementing of a subterranean well conduit by cement
supplied through a small diameter tubular member, compris-
ing, in combination a tubular assembly attachable at iu upper
end to the well conduit; means in the upper end of the bore of
said tubular assembly for sealingly engaging the bottom por-
tion of the small diameter tubular member; means in the lower
portions of the bore of said tubular assembly defining an axial
cement conduit communicating with the well, whereby a first
stage of cement may be supplied through the tubular member
to exteriorly surround the lower portions of said tubular assem-
bly; a plurality of peripherally spaced cement ports in said
tubular assembly located above the first stage cement level; a
first annular valve mounted relative to said tubular assembly in
sealing relation to said cement ports; a first plug means mov-
able through the tubular member to seal the bore of said first
annular valve, whereby pressured fluid applied through the
tubular member will urge said first annular valve to expose said
radial cement ports, thereby permitting a second stage of ce-
ment to be supplied through the tubular member and said
cement ports to the exterior of said tubular assembly; a second
annular valve mounted relative to said tubular assembly above
said first annular valve; an annular piston assembly mounted in
said tubular assembly and operatively connected to said second
annular valve; and a second plug means droppable through the
tubular member to seal the bore of said annular piston assembly
1. An improved shifting tool connectable in a well tool string
for operating a sliding sleeve device, comprising:
a. an inner tubular mandrel;
b. an outer key mandrel secured in concentric spaced rela-
tion around said tubular mandrel, said key mandrel having
a plurality of windows and an equal number of tlou, said
slott being spaced vertically above and aligned with each
window, each slot and each window having a camming
surface along the lower surface thereof;
c. a selectively profiled key disposed for radial movement in
each of said windows, each said key having an upper
extended portion and a lower extended portion, each
upper extended key portion having a camming surface
engageable with said slot camming surface and each lower
key extended portion having a camming surface engage-
able with said window camming surface;
d. means between said keys and said inner mandrel biasing
said keys outwardly; and
releasable holding means between said inner mandrel and
said lower key extended portion retaining said keys in a
radially movable position and said camming surfaces dis-
engaged, said holding means being releasable when an
upward force in excess of a predetermined value is applied
to said mandrels when said shifting tool is engaged with a
sliding sleeve device whereby said camming surfaces are
engaged at both ends of each key camming said keys
inwardly to disengage from said sliding sleeve device.
I.
\
1040 O.G.— 23
S82
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
M36,153
IN-Smj COMBUSTION METHOD FOR CONTROLLED
THERMAL LINKING OF WELLS
FnaeU M. CwIsob, ToIm, Okla^ anigDor to Standard OU
Conpaay, CUcaso, 111.
FUcd Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,200
lat a.} E21B 43/243
VS. CL 166-260 5 claim
CaaMTION
PM0UCT8
55^^^^5^^^^^^5^^^^^
1. A method of underground conversion of hydrocarbon*
bearing material disposed in a subterranean formation, the
method being carried out between an injection well and a
production well wherein a portion of the injection well is
deviated toward the production well, comprising:
initiating a combustion zone in the hydrocarbon-bearing
material adjacent the production well;
injecting an oxygen-containing gas and a combustible mate-
rial through separate conveyance componenu of the in-
jection well for mixing adjacent the end of the injection
well;
advancing the combustion zone through the formation from
the production well to the injection well along the devi-
ated portion of the injection well; and
removing produced gases from the formation through the
production well.
4,436,154
METHOD FOR CONTROLLING SUBSURFACE
BLOWOUT
Roy R. Vann, Houston, and Flint R. George, Katy, both of Tex.,
aadgnon to Geo Vann, Inc., Houfton, Tex.
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,867
Int a.3 E21B 43/J2
VS. a 166-281 10 daima
a location adjacent to the perforated casing of the well-
bore; orienting the gun respective to the wellbore to posi-
tion the shaped charges to fire radially away from the gun
and form tunnels towards the perforated casing of the
wellbore;
(4) firing the gun;
(5) pumping killing fluid down through the borehole,
through the tunnels, and into the lower end of the well-
bore, thereby isolating the formation from the upper well-
bore; the killing fluid being pumped down the cased bore-
hole simultaneously with the firing of the gun, with the
killing fluid being maintained at a pressure which forces a
flow path to be formed from the borehole into the perfo-
rated zone of the wellbore.
4,436,155
WELL CLEANUP AND COMPLETION APPARATUS
Emmet F. Brieger, Alburqaerqne, N. Mex., anignor to GEO
Vann, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 383,746
Int a.3 E21B 43/1 J
VS. a. 166-297 19 ctalmg
m
c'
12. Well completion apparatus comprising:
detonator means;
tubular means connected around said detonator means, and
extending therefrom;
first check valve means included in the tubular means adja-
cent said detonator means to allow flow from inside said
tubular means to the exterior thereof;
second check valve means included in said tubular means
farther from said detonator means than said first check
valve means and allowing flow from outside to inside said
tubular means.
1. In a formation having a cased wellbore extending thereto,
wherein the wellbore is damaged and the formation is inacces-
sible therethrough, the method of reworking the formation
comprising the steps of:
(1) forming a borehole which is arranged in spaced relation-
ship to the wellbore; and. drilling the lower end of the
borehole non-intersecting but witUn shooting range of the
wellbore;
(2) orienting a plurality of shaped charges of a perforating
gun to fire in the same direction;
(3) running the gun of step (2) downhole into the borehole at
4,436,156
METHOD OF TREATING WELL FORMATIONS
EMPLOYING FOAMED TREATMENT FLUIDS
Sherman E Fredrlckson, Dnncin, OkJa^ asrifMNr to Haliibor-
ton Conpnny, Duncan, Okla.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,156
Int aJ E21B 43/267. 43/27
VS. CL 166—307 20 o«if
1. A method for pUcing a foamed treating fluid into an upper
portion of a fracture in an underground well formation com-
prising:
introducing a foamed preflush fluid having a known specific
gravity into said fracture;
introducing an inert gas into said fracture containing said
foamed preflush fluid in an amount sufficient to create a
flow channel above said foamed preflush fluid in said
fracture; and,
introducing a foamed treating fluid into said fracture
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
383
whereby sdd foamed treating fluid U caused to override ing position whenever said valve means u positioned in other
said foamed preflush fluid and flow through said flow than iu closed position; a second annular piston in said annular
preuure chamber operatively connected to said latch sleeve.
and a spring interposed between said annular piston and said
second annular piston.
4,436,157
LATCH MECHANISM FOR SUBSEA TEST TREE
Robert T. Brooks, Klngwood, Tex., aaslgnor to Baker Interna-
tional Corporation, Orange, Calif.
Continuation-in>part of Ser. No. 64^32, Aug. 6, 1979, Pat No.
4,320304. This application Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,009
Int a.) E21B 43/12. 34/10
VS. CL 166—344 10 Claims
"x I' 'f "C /•*
1. In a test assembly with a blowout preventer stack above a
subterranean well and carryable between upper and lower
portions of a tubular conduit extendible to at leut one produc-
tion zone within said well, said test assembly having valve
means in the lower conduit portion manipulatable between
open and closed positions by a reciprocable actuator sleeve to
control the flow of fluid within said conduit, the Improvement
comprising: means defining an annular pressure chamber dis-
posed around said actuator sleeve; an annular piston mounted
in said annular fluid pressure chamber for shifting the actuator
sleeve between its valve open and valve closed positions;
latching means connecting said annular piston to said valve
actuator; a latch retaining sleeve axially shiftably mounted in
the upper tubular conduit portion between a liutch retaining
position securing said annular piston to said actuator sleeve,
and a latch releasing position relative to said latohing means
releasing said annulv piston from said actuator sleeve; means
for maintaining said latch retaining sleeve in said latch retain-
4,436,158
RELEASABLE DRILL STRING DEVICE AND METHOD
Kenneth J. Carstenaen, 4540 N. 44th St, No. 70, Phoenix, Aria.
85018
Filed Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 330^88
Int a.> E21B 17/10
VS. CL 166—377 38 daiaw
channel formed by said inert gas into an upper portion of
said fracture.
1 -M /
StXSk
\
^;
29. The method of releasably attaching a drill tool to a drill
collar or other tubular member of a drill string comprising the
steps of:
defining a cavity between the outor surface of the tubular
member and the inner surface of an encompassing drill
tool;
preheating the drill tool;
pouring a low melting point fill material into the cavity to
substantially fill the cavity;
solidifying the fill material in place to mechanically unite the
drill tool and tubular member by transferring heat primar-
ily to the tubular member, such that the drill tool heat
shrinks onto the fill material and preloads it under com-
pression onto the tubular member; and
remelting the fill material to remove the drill tool.
4,436,159
MANUAL/ELECTRIC ACTIVATED SQUIB ACTUATED
DISCHARGE VALVE FOR FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Blaise Reray, San Marino, Calif., aaai«Bor to Kidde, Inc., Clif-
ton, N J.
PUed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 260,132
Int a.i A62C 35/02
VS. CL 169—28 4 OaiM
1. An improved dual squib discharge valve for a container
housing preuurized fire extinguishing fluid and having a fran-
gible diaphragm for releasing said fluid upon rupture thereof
and farther including first and second squibs, said first squib
being actuated by an electric current source, means for con-
384
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
necting said electrical current source to said first squib upon
command, impact means, means for mechanically actuating
said impact means to fire said second squib upon command,
wherein the improvement comprises:
plate means having first and second screw threaded aper-
tures therein adapted to receive said first and second
squibs respectively; and
said plate means includes a generally V-shaped protrusion
extending between and beyond the active ends of said first
and second squibs to block the line of sight therebetween
when said squibs are fully seated in their respective
threaded apertures wherein said protrusion isolates shock
waves generated by firing of one of said squibs from the
other of said squibs to substantially prevent unwanted
detonation of or damage to the unfired squib.
the upward movement thereof, said stop means consisting
of nuts screwed on said screws above said top.
4,436,161
SOIL CULTIVATING IMPLEMENTS
Cornells fin der Leiy, 7 Briiichenrain, Zug, Switiarland
Filed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,396
Claima priority, appUcation Netherlands, Feb. 18, 1981.
8100784
Int CL^ AOIB 33/06. 33/12
U.S. a. 172—49.5 11 Claims
^ll-^y'A
4,436,160
SPRAYER
Franz Ragalller, Schmicdstrasse 6, A'4070 ECerdiog Osterreich,
Aostria
FUed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,293
Int. a.3 A62C 31/02; B05B 1/32
VS. a. 169—74 16 Claims
W 17 4 je 19 15 20 19 18
1. In a sprayer comprising
a tank adapted to hold a sprayable substance,
a sprayhead disposed above said tank,
a rising pipe having an inlet opening in the lower portion of
the interior of said tank and leading to said sprayhead,
a pressure vessel adapted to hold a compressed gas, and
a shutoff valve operable to esublish a communication be-
tween the interior of said pressure vessel and the interior
of said tank,
the improvement residing in that
said sprayhead comprises a base and a top,
said base is coaxial to and communicates with said rising pipe
and flares upwardly and has an upwardly facing, annular
seating face,
said top is exposed on its underside to the interior of said
base and is vertically movable relative to said base and
biased to a lower position and has an annular seating face
which faces the seating face of said base and is arranged to
be in sealing contact with said seating face of said base
when said top is in said lower position,
said base and said top have portions which extend radially
outwardly of said seating surfaces and face each other,
said radially outwardly extending portions of said top are
formed with angularly spaced apari holes,
said radially outwardly extending portions of said base and
said top are vertically spaced apart when said top is in said
lower position,
said top is adapted to be raised so that said seating faces of
said base and said top define between them an annular gap
in response to fluid pressure in the interior of said base,
screws which are parallel to the axis of said sprayhead are
secured to said radially outwardly extending portions of
said base and extend upwardly from said base through said
holes and above said top, and
said base carries vertically adjustable stop means, which are
spaced above said top when the same is in said lower
position and adapted to be engaged by said top to the limit
1. A soil cultivating implement comprising a frame and a
row of soil working members mounted along the length of an
elongated portion of said frame, a roller interconnected to said
frame to support said frame portion and said roller being lo-
cated to the rear of that portion, at least one side plate displace-
ably mounted on said frame adjacent a lateral side of said row
to deflect soil being worked inwardly towards said roller, said
plate having a lower substantially horizontal portion that ex-
tends in the general direction of implement travel during oper-
ation, said plate being pivoted to the top of said frame portion
by an arm, a horizontal portion of said arm extending for-
wardly from bracket means on said frame portion to a laterally
and outwardly extending arm portion that is connected by
fastening means to a forward part of said plate, the trailing end
of said plate extending freely to the rear and said fastening
means being adjustable to move said trailing end nearer to or
farther from said roller, a stop on said frame portion being
positioned to prevent said side plate from pivoting too far
downwardly when the implement is in operation or is undergo-
ing inoperative transport, said stop being located in front of
said frame portion, a telescoping support arm interconnecting
the forward part of said plate to said frame and said support
arm being located adjacent said outwardly extending arm
position, said support arm cooperating with said stop to arrest
the downward displacement of said side plate.
4,436,162
IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT FOR THE FRONT END OF
A TRACTOR
Michael J. Seibert, Rte. 5, Bryan, Ohio 43506
FUed Oct 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,560
Int. a.} AOIB 3/76
U.S. a. 172—810 4 Claims
1. An implement-attaching apparatus for the front end of a
tractor comprising a frame device which carries two horizon-
tally spaced supports adapted to receive two coaxial pivot pins,
an actuating linkage carrying an elongated cross-bar disposed
above and generally in parallelism with said spaced supports, a
pivot connection provided on said cross-bar intermediate its
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S8S
ends and generally midway between and above said spaced
supports, and means for supporting said frame device for lim-
ited vertical, free floating movement, said frame device includ-
ing two elongated members which are spaced apart and gener-
ally parallel, said actuating linkage includes two elongated bars
which are also spaced apart and generally parallel to each
other and to said elongated members, said two members carry-
ing said two supports, respectively, and said two bars being
connected to the opposite end portions, respectively, of said
cross-bar, said means including two eyelet elements which are
horizontally spaced and which receive said elongated members
therethrough, said eyelet elements being of a size as permits
vertical movement of said members therein.
reciprocates said first member and also imparts a cyclic partial
rotation to the first member during reciprocation thereof;
said bore being inclined towards said axis of rotary motion in
the general direction of said link from said other end to
said one end; and
the axis of said bore intersecting said axis of rotary motion
and making an angle therewith equal to about one quarter
of the angle through which said first member partially
rotates.
4,436,163
ARRANGEMENT FOR CONVERTING ROTARY
MOTION TO REQPROCATORY MOTION
Frank F. Simpson, Staines, England, assignor to Black A Decker , , _„,^ ^ ^^^ _ ^ ,, 1 ™ •^Ji,,^,^^^, ^^„^^^,
Inc., Newark, Del. LUBRICATION FAILURE DETECTION SYSTEM
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 102,688, Dec. 12, 1979. This ^'"y* ^i Garner, Ft. Worth, Tex., assignor to Globe OU Tools,
appUcation May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,156 "«' ^^^ S^S"'"** ,^, „ ^ „^ ..,
Claims priority, appUeation United Kingdom, Dec. 13, 1978, "'*' ^' *?L ,„:• r'/^V?,' ''*•■"
48309/78 ' E21B 10/22
Int. a.J B23B «/0Z «//tf U.S. Q. 175— 39 19 Claims
U.S. a. 173—117 4 Claims
1. A power operated tool, comprising:
a prime mover;
an output member for reciprocating an operating tool mem-
ber when present;
a power transmission mechanism arranged to transmit mo-
tion of the prime mover to said output member and com-
prising:
(a) a first member mounted for reciprocatory and partial
rotary motion,
(b) a second member mounted for rotary motion about an
axis transverse to the axis of reciprocatory motion of
said first member, and having a bore therein eccentric of
and inclined to said axis of rotary motion, and
(c) a link coupled at one end to said first member, and at
the other end to said second member, said other end
being mounted in said bore for swivelling and sliding
movement relative thereto,
whereby rotation of said second member by the prime mover
1^^^
1. A lubrication failure detection system for use in conjunc-
tion with an earth boring drilling system having at least one
rotary drill bit coupled to a drill string, said drill string includ-
ing an internal passage adapted to receive drilling fluid under
pressure at a first end thereof and including at least a first
orifice at a second end thereof for directing said drilling fluid
into the bottom of the annulus formed by said drilling system,
said lubrication failure detection system comprising:
at least one lubricant chamber for storing a reservoir of
lubricant;
a passageway coupling said lubricant chamber to a bearing
surface within said at least one rotary drill bit;
a flexible membrane interposed between said lubricant
chamber and said annulus, said flexible membrane adapted
to distend inwardly in response to the preuure of said
drilling fluid within said annulus, thereby forcing lubri-
cant into said passageway;
a second orifice between said internal passage and said annu-
lus;
a plug within said second orifice and a mechanical linkage
means responsive to a selected distention of said flexible
membrane for releasing said plug; and
second means for detecting a reduction in pressure of said
drilling fluid within said internal passage when said sec-
ond orifice is opened.
S86
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4.43C165
DRAIN HOLE DRILLING
LMMrd W. EmtTf, Plaw>, Tex^ aa^vwr to Atlantic RkhfleM
CoiMnjr, Los Aagdes, Calif.
Filed Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,212
lat CL3 E21B 71/00
UA a 175-61 g Claim.
1. In a method for drilling at least one laterally extending
dram hole wellbore from a primary wellbore into an area of the
earth that produces both gas and liquid, the improvement
comprising drilling a first portion of said drain hole wellbore
mto said area, said first portion being at least through the
radius of curvature portion of said drain hole wellbore, filUng
said pnmary wellbore in said area and at least said radius of
curvature portion of said drain hole wellbore with a harden-
able material, allowing said material to harden, and re-drilling
said primary wellbore and said filled portion of said drain hole
wellbore to leave an outer layer of said hardened material
around said primary and drain hole wcllbores whereby in said
area of gas and liquid production a lined primary wellbore and
a lined first portion of said drain hole wellbore adjacent said
pnmary wellbore is established to thereby reduce gas coning
into same and enhance liquid production through the unlined
portion of said drain hole wellbore.
said drill bit, then out at least one orifice of said drill bit,
and then upward through an annulus between said drill
string and said well borehole;
directing said first stream of fluid into said annulus, at a
second elevation above said drill bit, with a velocity com-
ponent tangential to said annulus; and thereby
imparting a swirUng motion in only one direction about said
drill string to said upward flowing second stream of dril-
ling fluid; and
wherein said step of directing said first stream of fluid into
said annulus includes steps of:
directing said first stream of fluid into a lower portion of
an annular space disposed in a cyUndrical housing with
a velocity component tangential to said anndar space at
a point where said first stream of fluid enters said annu-
lar space, to thereby create a swirling motion of said
first stream of fluid within said annular space within said
housing;
flowing said swirling first stream of fluid upward through
said annular space within said housing; and
ejecting said upwardly swirling first stream of fluid from
an upper portion of said annular space into said annulus.
4,436,167
METHOD OF EXCAVATING A PILE HOLE AND AN
APPARATUS THEREFOR
Maaakazu Mainda, Sakai, and Hironori MatMmioto, Amaga-
lald, both of Japan, aaiignon to Oknmnra Corporation.
Osaka, Japan
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,236
Int. CL^ E21B 10/32
UA a 175-72 MClaiiB.
4,436,166
DOWNHOLE VORTEX GENERATOR AND METHOD
AaadoUah HayatdaToodi, and Ladd M. Adama, both of Norman,
Okla., aaaignors to GiU ladavtries, lac. Meeker, Colo.
Filed Jul 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,676
lat a^ E21B 21/00
UA a 175-65 47 Claim.
1. A method of drilling a well, comprising:
rotating a drill bit attached to a lower end of a drill string by
rotating an upper end of said drill string, and thereby
boring a well borehole;
dividing a downward flow of drilling fluid in said drill
string, at a first elevation above said drill bit, into a first
stream and a second stream;
directing said second stream of fluid downward, through a
portion of said drill string below said first elevation, to
1. In a pile hole excavating method of excavating a pile hole
of the required diameter by means of excavating bitt fixed to
the lower end portion of a rotary drill pipe and stabiUzing the
hole wall by filling the excavated pUc hole with slurry, the
improvement comprising firstly excavating a pile hole portion
of a larger diameter down to the required depth by moving
widening bits on the drilUng apparatus to an extended position,
drawing the widening bits in to a reti-acted position and exca-
vating a pile hole portion of reduced diameter down to the
required depth, moving the widening bits to the extended
podtion and excavating a pile hole bottom of widened diame-
ter for forming a pile hole with a larger diameter at the pile
head and at the pile bottom, and finally sucking up and dis-
charging the soil, sand, slime and slurry excavated by both bite
and settied on the hole bottom by a suction pipe fixed to the
rotary drill pipe.
MARCH 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
587
4,436,168
THRUST GENERATOR FOR BORING TOOLS
NcwtOB B. DiflBokea, 2952 Bnttonwood Dr., CarroUton, Tex.
75006
FUad Jan. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 339,001
lat a.i E21B 4/04
VJS. CL 175—94 15 Claim.
1. A rotary drilling system for drilling a well bore in the
earth comprising in combination:
a. an electric motor comprising a housing and at least one
rotor;
b. a twist resistant flexible conduit for conducting drilling
fluid and electric power to one end of said housing of said
electric motor;
c. at least one rotor driven hollow shaft projecting from the
other end of said housing;
d. hollow shaft driven bit means;
e. marine screw propeller means mounted on said rotor
driven shaft rotation of which generates forward thrust
along the axis of said shaft;
f. means for transmitting the forward thrust generated by
said propeller to said bit means, said housing and said
. conduit; and
g. coupling means connecting the end of said conduit and
said motor housing, said coupling means transmitting
torque from the motor housing to the conduit to resist the
tendency of the motor housing to rotate in a direction
counter to the rotation of said hollow shaft as torque is
imposed to the housing through the action of the drill bit
and the propeller.
elevauble cab movable between lowered and raised positions
comprising:
a subframe connected to said upper works;
an inner link pivotally connected at its upper end to said
subframe and at its lower end to said cab and positioned
parallel to and adjacent said wall when said cab is in its
lowered position;
a pair of outer links oriented parallel to said inner link and
pivotally connected to said subframe and said cab at their
upper and lower ends respectively;
upper and lower cross tubes connected between said outer
links; and
hydraulic rams positioned between said inner link and outer
links and pivotally connected between said subframe and
one of said cross tubes, whereby extension of said rams
will cause said cab to be raised and contraction of said
rams will cause said cab to be lowered to a position adja-
cent said upper works.
4,436,170
EXTERNALLY TRACK-GUIDEb VEHICLE,
ESPECIALLY FOR THE LOCAL PUBUC PASSENGER
TRAFFIC
Herbert Mehren, Ludwigaburg, and Ferdinand Panik, Fellbach,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aMignors to Daiader-Beax
AktiengeMllKhaft, Stuttgart Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Oct 13, 1978, Ser. No. 951,044
Claim, priority, application Fed. Rep. of Gcmaay, Oct IS,
1977, 2746462
Int a? B62D 1/26
VJS. a. 180-131 21 Claim.
4,436,169
ELEVATING AND TILTING MECHANISM FOR CRANE
CAB
Danai. A. JeBneiloha, and Lyie B. JeoMn, both of Cedar Rap*
Ida, Iowa, aMigaor. to FMC Corporation, Chicago, Dl.
Filed Jaa. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,287
Int CL^ B62D 23/00
VS. CL 180-89.14 6 Claim.
1. In combination with a crane having a lower works rotat-
ably supporting an upper works including an upright wall, an
1. A vehicle comprising a vehicle axle means including
steerable vehicle wheels mounted thereon, croM-guide roller
means being adapted to cooperate with an external guide track
for mechanically guiding and automatically influencing a de-
flection angle of the steerable wheels, and suppori arm means
for mounting said cross-guide roller means on at least one side
of the vehicle, said cross-guide roller means being located at a
forward end of the support arm means in front of the steerable
vehicle wheel, as viewed in a normal driving direction of the
vehicle, the support arm means is attached to the hub of each
of the steerable vehicle wheels, the crots-guide roller means
includes a single croM-guide roller, a single cross-guide roller
is arranged on each of the support arm means so that a cross-
guide roller means is provided on both sides of the vehicle
forwardly of the steerable vehicle wheel, characterized in that
the support arm means are constructed relatively bending-rigid
under a substantial elimination of yieldingness, and in that the
588
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
cross-guide roller is constructed as a metal wheel provided
along an outer circumference thereof with a solid rubber tread,
force storage means are interposed between the support ami
means for prestressing the support arm means in a direc-
tion toward a position substantially corresponding to a
straight driving position of the vehicle,
a distance between outer surfaces of the cross-guide rollers is
greater than a distance between cross-guide means of the
external guide track so that the cross-guide rollers are
adapted to be pressed against the cross-guide means under
« prestress of about 400 to about 1,000 N.
opposite sides of said rear wheel, an exhaust pipe having a front
end connected to said engine and a rear end connected to said
first muffler, said turbo-charger having a turbine disposed in
said exhaust pipe and a compressor coupled for rotation with
said turbine, a waste pipe branching from said exhaust pipe at
4,436,171
POWER ASSISTED STEERING DEVICE TOR A VEIflCLE
Patrice Bertin, Paris, France, asiignor to VALEO, Paris.
France
FUed Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,485
Oainu priority, appUcation France, Feb. 23, 1981, 81 03512
Int. a.3 B62D 5/06
VS. 0. 180-148 6 Claims
"f "',
1. Power-assisted steering device for a vehicle, comprising
control means (10) acting on turning means (11) via a rotating
transmission element (13), this element (13) being in two parts
(13A and 13B) coupled elastically by a torsion bar (52), a
limited relative angular play being provided between these two
parts (13A, 13B) to permit an angular offset between said parts
(13A, 13B) under the action of the control means (10) and
against a restoring action of the torsion bar (52), and power-
assistance means (17, 18) which, in response to such an angular
offset, are allowed to act on the turning means (11) in the same
direction as the control means (10), said power-assistance
means comprising a hydraulic unit (17, 18), an actuator (19)
actmg on the turning means (11) and a distributor (12) located
between the unit and the actuator, in which device said torsion
bar (52) has, on the one hand, a main portion (53) which passes
through the distributor (21) and extends freely in a perforation
(50, 51) of said parts (13A, 13B) and, on the other hand, two
ends (54, 55) which are fixed respectively to said parts (13A,
13B), at least one (54) of these ends being formed by a widened
head (56) of said torsion bar (52), said device being character-
ized in that at least one annular sealing gasket (70, 70') is ar-
ranged round the main portion (53) of the torsion bar (52),
being applied against said widened head (56) and engaged in
said perforation (50), the torsion bar (52) having, between the
main portion (53) and the widened head (56), a fillet (57)
against which said annular sealing gasket (70, 70') wedges
itself. *
a position upstream of said turbine and connected to said sec-
ond muffler, and a control valve provided internally of said
waste pipe for regulating the flow of exhaust gas passing there-
through and adapted to open when the outlet pressure of said
compressor exceeds a predetermined level,
4,436,173
SHAFT DRIVE APPARATUS FOR MOTORIZED
TWaWHEELED VEHICLE
Hirotake Takahashi, Sayama, Japan, anignor to Honda Giken
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaiaha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,908
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 15, 1981, 56-72155:
May 15, 1981, 56-72156; May 16, 1981, 56.71161[U1; May 19
1981, 56.72206[U]; May 19, 1981, 56.72207[U]
Int. a.3 B62M J 7/00. 25/28
U.S. a. 180-226 WClainif
4,436,172
MOTORCYCLE HAVING AN ENGINE WITH A
TURBO-SUPERCHARGER
Kazoo Inoue, Tokyo, and Tsuoeo Oteoka, Wako, both of Japan,
aMignon to Honda GUten Kogyo ic»i«n«hiiri ic«t«hf| Tokyo
Japan '
FUed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,368
Claiaia priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 24, 1981, 56-9174
Int a.J B62D 63/04: P02D 23/00
UA a 180-219 eOaima
1. A motorcycle having an engine with a turbo-supercharger
mounted on a body frame between front and rear wheels,
comprising: a first muffler and a second muffler arranged on
1. In a shaft drive apparatus in a two-wheeled vehicle which
includes a vehicle body having a middle portion; front wheel
mounted on the body; a rear fork mounted on the body; an
internal combustion engine having an output shaft mounted on
said middle portion; and a rear wheel mounted on said rear
fork; the shaft driving apparatus including: a bevel gear mecha-
nism having a gear casing and an input shaft connected to said
rear wheel; a propeller shaft having opposite ends with one end
connected to said output shaft and the other end extending
axially into said rear fork; and a torque damper interconnecting
said other end to said input shaft; the improvement comprising
an outer casing extending over and liquid-tightiy enclosing
said torque damper, said casing being attached to said propeller
shaft to rotate therewith.
4,436,174
VEHICULAR POWER UNIT SUPPORTING DEVICE
Akira Morisono, Saitama, Japan, aasignor to Honda GUicn
Kogyo KabuahUd Kaislia, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 21, 1962, Ser. No. 420,643
aaims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 28, 1981, 56-153136
Int a^ B62K 11/04
UA a 180-227 lOCIainu
1. In a vehicle having a vehicle body frame, at least one rear
wheel, an engine, transmission means for transmitting power of
said engine to said rear wheel, a transmission case which
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S89
houses said transmission means, a power unit comprising an
integral combination of said transmission case and said engine
and rotatably supporting said rear wheel and a cushion means
for suspending said power unit from said vehicle body frame,
a power unit supporting device comprising:
a front member fixed to said vehicle body frame;
a rear member pivotably connected to said power unit; and
at least two spring members which cross each other to define
substantially an X-shape in side-elevation, front and rear
ends of said spring members being fixed to said front and
rear members, respectively.
4,436,176
DELAYED VEHICLE STARTER
Albert O. Cota, 17475 Flanden St., Granada HUls, CaUf. 91344,
and Dean C. Obray, 624 23rd St., Manhattan Beach, CaUf.
90266
FUad Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 331,300
Int. a? B60R 25/04
U.S. a. 180—287 13 Claims
I — *%s-
'-^^^^tK^
n^^
4,436,175
FRONT WHEEL SUSPENSION FOR A FRONT
ENGINE-FRONT WHEEL DRIVE AUTOMOBILE
Kenichi Watanabe, and Takashi Sumiraoto, both of Hiroahima,
Japan, aasignors to Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd., Hiroahima, Japan
FUed Aug. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 407,173
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 12, 1981, 56-126400
Int. a.3 B62D 9/00; B60G 25/00
U.S. a. 180—254 5 Claims
1. A front engine - front wheel drive automobile comprising
a power unit including differential gear means provided with
left and right output shafts, left and right front wheels mounted
for steering movement about left and right king pin axes, re-
spectively, left and right drive shafts having one end connected
with said left and right output shafts of the differential gear
means, respectively, and the other end with said left and right
wheels, respectively, to transmit driving torque to the wheels,
said left and right drive shafts being inclined with respect to a
horizontal plane by different angles so that a difference be-
tween turning moments about said left and right king pin axes
is produced when the driving torque is being transmitted to the
wheels, the wheel which is connected with the drive shaft with
a larger inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane
having a larger camber angle than the other wheel to thereby
produce a difference between turning moments about the left
and right king pin axes which is in a direction opposite to the
difference between turning moments caused by the different
angles in inclination of the driving shafts.
1. A Delayed Vehicle Starter contained within the structure
of a motor vehicle and comprised of a first circuit that prevents
the driver of the motor vehicle from starting the vehicle before
the driver has sequentially depressed, within a preset time, a
plurality of electrical switches and where once started the
vehicle must be moved for a minimum distance, within said
preset time, to keep the vehicle ignition system enabled, where
said first circuit comprises:
(a) a power source,
(b) a motor vehicle ingition switch where the pole of said
ignition switch is connected to said power source such
that when said ignition switch is placed in the OFF posi-
tion a voltage, in part, from said power source is applied to
one of the inputs of a first two-input AND gate,
(c) a first switch connected to said power source such that
when said first switch is closed the second enabling input
is applied to said first two-input AND gate,
(d) a first timer that is enabled by the output of said first
two-input AND gate where said first timer is active dur-
ing its preset time and its output provides one of the inputs
to a second two-input AND gate and one of the inputs to
a three-input AND gate,
(e) a second switch connected to said power source such that
when said second switch is closed, subsequent to the
closing of said first switch, the second enabling input is
applied to said second two-input AND gate,
(0 a second timer that is enabled by the output of said second
two-input AND gate where said second timer is active
during its preset time and its output provides the second
input to said three-input AND gate, where the third en-
abling input to said three-input AND gate is applied when
said vehicle ignition switch is placed in the ON position,
(g) a two-input OR gate that is initially enabled by the output
from said three-input AND gate where output of said OR
gate is applied through a first amplifier to energize a
two-pole double-throw first relay such that when said first
relay is energized a voltage from said power source is
applied through the closed contact of said vehicle ignition
switch and through the closed first contact set of said first
relay to the vehicle ignition system,
(h) an Ok-To-Start indicator, electrically connected in paral-
lel with the vehicle ignition system, that is energized by a
voltage applied through the closed first contact set of said
first relay,
(i) a motor vehicle start switch where one side of said start
switch is connected to said power source such that when
said start switch is placed in the ON position a voltage
from said power source is applied through the closed
590
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
second contact set of said first relay to the vehicle start
motor,
0) a routional transducer assembly that produces a series of
pulsed signals when said vehicle is moved,
(k) an electronic counter that receives the signals from said
rotational transducer assembly such that when said
counter reaches a preset count level, corresponding to an
established minimum travel distance, an output signal is
produced, and
G) a first bisuble latch that when set by the output signal
from said electronic counter produces a signal that, when
applied through said two-input OR gate and said first
amplifier, maintains said first relay in an energized condi-
tion to keep the vehicle ignition system enabled after the
preset time in said first timer and said second timer has
expired.
M3<,178
HOUSING LOUDSPEAKER
Han»JoMhiin Gieger, FlMberbriicke 5, 3300 Brannichireig,
DE, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 25, 1982, Scr. No. 342,163
Oaima priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Gcmany, Jan. 29.
1981, 3102870
Int a.3 H05K 5/00
U.S. a. 181-151 25 Clains
4,436,177
TRUCK OPERATOR'S CAB WITH EQUIPMENT
CONTROL STATION
Thomas L. Elliston, Fort Worth, Tex., assignor to Hydra-Rig,
Inc., Fort Worth, Tex.
FUed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,802
Int. a.3 B62D i3m
U.S. a. 180-324 11 Claims
1. In an over the road motor vehicle including a chassis
having a main propulsion engine mounted thereon, an opera-
tor's cab forming an enclosure defining a driver's compartment
for driving said vehicle, said driver's compartment including
steering means for said vehicle and an instrument panel for
monitoring instruments for said main engine, said cab including
a front wall including a windshield formed therein, spaced
apart sidewalls, a roof, a rear wall, at least one access door to
said driver's compartment, and access doors in each of said
sidewalls separate from said one access door to said driver's
compartment and opening to a separate control station formed
within said enclosure and generally rearward of said driver's
compartment, a control panel disposed at sid control station
and including means for controlling and monitoring equipment
disposed on said vehicle and generally rearward of said cab, a
floor forming a part of said enclosure at said control station,
and a stepped portion of said roof above said floor providing
substantially standing headroom for an operator at said control
panel.
1. A loudspeaker comprising a housing having an interior
defined by an inner wall; a loudspeaker element in said interior
and having a vibration member, said housing being formed
with a loudspeaker opening in one face thereof and an addi-
tional opening at an opposite face thereof, said openings defin-
ing a box-like intermediate space in said interior; and means for
eliminating the sound emitted by the loudspeaker into said
interior, said means including a filling with two sound-absorb-
ing faces mounted in said box-like intermediate space between
said loudspeaker opening and said additional opening, one of
said faces being defmed by a flow-tight closure of an elastically
vibrationable mass positioned within said interior and having a
predetermined size, and the other of said faces being defmed by
at least one air-flow opening in said closure, said air-flow
opening being filled with a packing and having a size much
smaller than the size of the flow-tight closure.
4,436,179
NOISE CONTROL APPARATUS
Tsuyoshi Yamamoto; Norihisa Taniguchi, both of Tokyo;
Kazuyoshi lida, Yokohama, and Yoshikazn Kondo, Tokyo, all
of Japan, asrignors to Japanese National Railways and
Bridgestone Tire Company Limited, both of Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,617
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 9, 1961, 56-1156
Int a.3 GIOK n/00
U.S. a. 181—210 7 n.!—
1. A noise control apparatus for reducing sound volume of
noise propagating from a noise source, comprising:
a sound arresting waU separate fi-om the noise source; and
means for shifting in phase and refracting the acoustic wave
of the noise to provide a refracted propagating acoustic
wave, said means being disposed at substantiaUy the top of
said sound arresting waU, said means being hoUow and
further comprising bent plates vertically disposed within
said means, said bent plates having an equal interval there-
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
391
between and having front edges aligned in such a manner
that a line drawn through the front edges diagonally
descends and intersects with said noise source,
whereby said refracted propagating acoustic wave interferes
with said acoustic wave directly propagating from the
noise source and diffracting over said sound arresting
wall.
when said user applies a force load on a first longitudinal
end of said seating means, and (2) terminating rotation of
4,436,180
METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR PIVOTING AN
ACCOMMODATION LADDER
Per NUsson, VKstra FHiliuida, Sweden, assignor to AB WeUn,
Gothcnborg, Sweden
FUed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,802
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden, Apr. 13, 1981, 8102342
Int CL^ B63B 23/04
\}&. a. 182—97 3 Claims
2. A device for pivoting an accommodation ladder between
a stowing position on a ship's deck and an active position
outside the ship's side comprising at least one fixed davit a
winch, an operating wire one end of which is wound up on the
winch and the other end is attached to the ladder, a two-arm
link pivotably mounted on the davit about a horizontal shaft
arranged between the said two arms, a puUey for the operating
wire mounted on one of said arms of said link and being pivota-
bly movable by said link between two positions, said ladder
being pivotable by means of said operating wire from one of its
stowing and active positions up to a substantially vertical
position in which the center of gravity of the ladder has passed
a vertical line through the pivot center of the ladder, and a
member having its one end attached to the ladder and its other
end connected to the second arm of said link in such a manner
that said member causes the link with the pulley to pivot from
one of said two positions thereof to the other when the ladder
is pivoted downwards further from said substantially vertical
position.
4,436,181
ESCAPE SYSTEM
Dtfid Gotman, 447 Mercy St, PhUadcUiia, Pa. 19148
FUed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,578
Int a> A62B 1/06
MS. a 182—236 10 Claims
1. An escape system for vertically lowering a user at a prede-
termined rate of descent responsive to a user appUed force,
comprising:
(a) a mounting bar member extending in a longitudinal direc-
tion, said mounting bar member being fuedly secured to a
base surface;
(b) seating means extending in said longitudinal direction for
providing a seat for said user;
(c) pulley means displaceably coupled to said seating means
on opposing longitudinal ends thereof; and,
(d) lever means secured to said puUey means on opposing
ends thereof for (1) actuating rotation of said pulley means
said pulley means when said user applies a force load on a
second longitudinal end of said seating means.
4,436,182
APPARATUS FOR DEPOSITING VALUABLES IN
ENVELOPES WITH AUTOMATIC ENVELOPE
DISPENSING
Lado Slmonotti, Banchette d'lfrea, and Carlo Motta, Borgo-
flranco d'lrrea, both of Italy, assignors to Ing. C. OUTftif k C,
S.P.A., Iirea, Italy
FUed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 254,140
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Apr. 16, 1980, 67587 A/80
Int a^ G07G 5/00
U.S. a 186-37 13 Claims
1. An apparatus for depositing valuables in envelopes, with
automatic dispensing of envelopes, in which the envelopes to
be deposited are inserted into a slot of the apparatus and con-
veyed into an internal drawer of the apparatus, comprising a
magazine within the apparatus containing the empty envel-
opes, a conveyor for individually moving the envelopes, said
conveyor including at least one pair of belts in contact with
one another along a predetermined path between the slot and
an internal deflection station, a reversible electric motor opera-
ble for selectively driving the belts in a first direction to dis-
pense an envelope from the magazine to the slot and in a sec-
ond direction to convey an envelope inserted in the slot toward
the drawer, said magazine including a duct leading to the
deflection station, the duct being disposed in such a way that
an envelope coming from the conveyor does not enter it
4,436,183
MATERIAL HANDLING APPARATUS
Victor R. Lauricb-Trost 34600 McAfee Dr., Solon, Ohio 44139
FUed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 302,515
Int a> B66B 11/04
U A a. 187—9 E 5 Claims
1. A lift apparatus for use in material handling comprising a
592
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
chassis member mounted on wheel means for movement along
the ground, a pair of laterally spaced, oppositely disposed mast
assemblies extend upwardly from said chassis member, a lift
platform assembly is disposed between and operably con-
nected to said mast assemblies for vertical lifting movement
toward and away from said chassis member, and fluid power
means are operably associated with each of said mast assem-
blies to impart said lifting movement to said lift carriage assem-
bly, wherein said wheel means includes a pair of steering and
traction units each including a motor and a steering and trac-
tion wheel, and a pair of freely rouuble caster wheels, endless
chain drive means operably connecting one of said caster
hatchway from a position displaced from the landing to a
predetermined position adjacent to the landing,
said elevator car having an opening,
closure means for controlling passenger movement between
the car and landing through said opening,
marker means associated with the landing indicative of an
allowable displacement zone of the elevator car from the
landing within which the closure means may be actuated
to allow passenger exit from the car, in the event the
elevator car stops for an unscheduled length of time at a
position other than level with said landing,
and electromechanical means responsive to said marker
means, including means carried by said elevator car for
detecting said marker means, and for mechanically pre-
venting actuation of said closure means, at least to an
extent which would enable passenger exit from the car,
when the elevator car is outside said allowable displace-
ment zone.
wheels with an associated one of said steering and traction
units for synchronously turning said caster wheels upon actua-
tion of an associated of said motors, and an operators cab
mounted for movement with said lift carriage assembly, and
steering control means operable from said operator's cab for
controlling steering movement of said steering and traction
units from said cab, wherein said steering and traction units
each include driven sprocket means disposed for meshing
engagement with said drive chain means and said orbital drive
motors including drive sprocket means for driving meshing
engagement with said drive chain means for synchronously
turning said caster wheels with said traction wheels.
4,436,184
ELEVATOR SYSTEM
John G. Dorman, Randolph; Anthony M. Balbo, Millbum, both
o£^N J.; Charles E. Randall, Boiling Springs, and Robert A.
Sette, Gettysburg, both of Pa., assignors to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed May 5, 1982, Ser. No. 375,249
Int. a.3 B66B J3/J6
U.S. a. 187—29 R 21 Claims
4,436,185
ELEVATOR SYSTEM
Richard H. Ludwig, West Caldwell; Wing C. Quan, Waldwick;
Alan L. Husson, Hackettstown; Linus R. Dimberger, Ran-
dolph, and Marjorie J. Polls, Morris Township, Morris
County, all of N J., assignors to Westinghouse Electric Corp.,
Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Apr. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 370,021
Int. a.3 B66B 3/02
U.S. a. 187—29 R 13 Claims
neTuiMt
1. An elevator system, comprising:
a structure having a hatchway and a landing,
an elevator car,
means mounting said elevator car for movement in said
1. A method of reinitializing an elevator system in a building
having a plurality of floors, including upper and lower termi-
nal floors, following an occurrence which may result in an
elevator car being stopped at a position other than level with a
floor of the building, comprising the steps of:
determining if the elevator car is within a predetermined
distance from a floor,
setting the car position to the associated floor when it is
found to be within said predetermined distance,
setting the car position to the closest floor to the elevator car
in a predetermined travel direction, when the elevator car
is not within said predetermined distance,
and moving the elevator car to a predetermined floor when
it is not within said predetermined distance.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
593
4,436,186
DISC BRAKE ASSEMBLY
Irving R. Ritsema, South Bend, and James J. Colpaert, Granger,
both of Ind., assignors to The Bendix Corporation, Southfleld,
Mich.
FUed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,918
Int. a.J F16D 65/54
U.S. a. 188-71.8 11 Qaims
1. A disc brake assembly comprising a torque member se-
cured to a nonrotatable portion of a vehicle, a caliper assembly
movably disposed relative to the disc by means of at least one
pin assembly connecting the caliper assembly to the torque
member, a pair of friction elements cooperating with the cali-
per assembly during braking to engage the disc to retard rota-
tion of the latter, and the pin assembly including a bolt thread-
ably coupled to the torque member and extending through an
opening in the caliper assembly, a resilient bushing engaged to
the caliper assembly and extending through the caliper assem-
bly opening, and a sleeve disposed between the resilient bush-
ing and the bolt, characterized by said sleeve cooperating with
said bolt to define a predetermined axial clearance therebe-
tween, said predetermined axial clearance providing for said
sleeve to move with said caliper assembly and said resilient
bushing initially during braking, said resilient bushing moving
relative to said sleeve after said predetermined axial clearance
is taken up between said sleeve and bolt during braking in
order to define an adjusted position for said resilient bushing
and caliper assembly relative to said sleeve in response to wear
of said friction elements, and said pin assembly further includ-
ing a resilient member extending between said sleeve and said
bolt to bias said sleeve to a position maintaining said predeter-
mined axial clearance between said sleeve and said bolt.
4,436,187
DISC BRAKE ASSEMBLY
Daniel L. Bolenbaugh, and John R. Wegh, both of South Bend,
Ind., assignors to The Bendix Corporation, Southfleld, Mich.
FUed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,349
Int. a.3 F16D 55/224
U.S. a. 188—73.45 2 Claims
assemblies disposed within matching, axially extending slots
between the caliper assembly and each of the pair of arms, and
a resilient member engageable with one of the pair of pin
assemblies, characterized by said one pin assembly including a
pin having a longitudinal axis and flanges extending radially
from said axis defining slots leading to central holes formed
along said axis at opposite ends of said pin, said resilient mem-
ber including ends biased to fit within the respective holes and
legs biased to fit within the respective slots, one of said pair of
arms defining an axially extending groove opening away from
the caliper, said resilient member including a connecting part
extending between said legs and disposed within said axially
extending groove, said one pin assembly slots defining a first
locking fit with said resilient member to prevent roution of the
latter about one of the matching slots, said axially extending
groove defining a second locking fit with said resilient member
to also prevent rotation of the latter about said one matching
slot, and said one pin assembly extending from the holes and
slots to the axially extending groove while remaining radially
inwardly of a radial outer dimension for said one arm.
4,436,188
CONTROLLED MOTION APPARATUS
Cecil R. Jones, 21127 Bank Mill Rd., Saratoga, Calif. 95070
FUed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,466
Int. a.3 B06B J/Oa- F16D 3/22
U.S. a. 188—378 7 aaims
X2 PLANS-
■•«
1. A disc brake assembly comprising a torque member dis-
posed adjacent a rotor to be braked, the torque member includ-
ing a pair of arms extending axially over the periphery of the
rotor and circumferentially spaced from each other, a caliper
assembly carried by the pair of arms via nonrotatable pin
1. Controlled motion apparatus comprising a rigid base
member, a support member, and means for mounting the sup-
port member to the rigid base for controlled motion relative to
the base, said support member mounting means comprising
three indejsendently-driven displacement actuators each hav-
ing a fixed part and a linearly movable part and having one of
said parts connected by means of a first non-rotatable universal
joint to a region of said support member and having the other
of said parts connected by means of a second non-rotatable
universal joint to a region of said rigid base, each of said actua-
tors being capable upon actuation of causing a linear motion
displacement of said support member along one of three or-
thogonal axes of an XYZ coordinate system but without per-
mitting rotation about its respective displacement axis of the
actuator movable part with respect to its fixed part or of the
actuator fixed part in response to a linear displacement of the
support along any of the three orthogonal axes, said non-rotat-
ing actuators by means of the first and second non-routable
universal joint connections cooperating, during driving of the
actuators to cause the said support member to undergo a con-
trolled motion relative to the rigid base member, to maintain
the support member substantially parallel to a desired plane
formed by two axes of the coordinate system and to constrain
the motion of said support member substantially parallel to said
desired plane, and means connected to the apparatus for sens-
ing the amount of support member displacement in iu three
displacement axes and generating signals representative of said
displacement.
594
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
4^36,189
MULTI-PURPOSE TRAVELING BAG
Fnak Bun, 1030 E. SOtfa St, Hialech, Fla. 33013
Flkd Apr. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 36M99
Int. Ca.J A45C 5/06. 13/00
VS. CL 190—108
lOaia
M36,190
TORSIONLESS MULTIPLE CONNECTOR REEL DEVICE
TlaMthy H. WortzcU, Smrtfa Wiadfor, Coiu., aHigBor to Con-
bMtkM Eagfnceriiig, lac, Wiadior, Conn.
FIM JnL 29, 1981, Scr. No. 287,679
lot a.) H02G 11/00
VJS. CL 191— 12J R 3 oaimt
1. A multi-purpose traveling bag comprising, in combination
a substantially rectangular, elongated garment bag portion,
said garment bag portion comprising inner and outer flexible
panels secured in spaced relation by a comparatively narrow
flexible side panel, said iimer and outer panels and said side
panel deflning, together, an interior compartment for hanging
clothes, means for opening said interior compartment for the
insertion and removal of clothes, a pair of side bag compart-
ment portions of substantially rectangular shape and each
having a flexible inside panel, a flexible outside panel and a
flexible, peripheral side wall panel defming with said inside and
outside panels a second interior compartment, the outside
panel of each of said side bag compartment portions being
fitted with a zipper strip for opening and closing said side bag
compartment portion, zipper means for peripherally attaching
said inside panel of said side bag compartment portions, one
each, to upper and lower longitudinal end portions, respec-
tively, of said outer panel of said garment bag portion, a brief-
case compartment portion of the same rectangular shape as
that of said side bag compartment portions, said briefcase
compartment portion having a pair of opposed outside panels
secured in a spaced relation by a peripheral, flexible, briefcase
side wall panel and defining therewith a third interior compart-
ment, zipper means in said peripheral briefcase side wall panel
for opening and closing said briefcase interior compartment,
zipper means for removably attaching said briefcase compart-
ment portion, face-to-face against said inside panel of said
garment bag portion at the lower longitudinal end portion
thereof, and zipper means for detachably securing a lower
edge portion of said inner panel of said elongated garment bag
portion with the upper edge portion thereof upon said elon-
gated garment bag portion being folded double to the inside
from bottom to top, hand carrying means at the upper end of
said garment bag portion when so folded and secured, said
means for opening said interior compartment of said garment
bag portion comprising a zipper extending along the upper end
of said garment bag portion side panel, and a hook flexibly
linked with respect to the inside of said interior compartment
of said garment bag portion and extensible through said zipper
when partially opened to permit hanging of said garment bag
portion from a clothes pole or the like, said zipper means for
peripherally attaching said inside panel of said side bag com-
partment portions being selectively cooperative with said
zipper means for removably attaching said briefcase compart-
ment portion against said inside panel of said garment bag
portion, selectively, to detachably secure said side bag com-
partment portions, one each, to the sides of said briefcase
compartment portion, said zipper strip for opening and closing
each of said side bag compartment portions following a U-
shaped course closely spaced to the peripheral sides and top of
said side bag compartment portions to permit the opening and
closing of said side bag compartment outside panels, and hand
grip means extending outwardly of the upper end of said brief-
case compartment portion.
1. An apparatus to be electrically connected to a stationary
output circuit, for advancing and retrieving an electrical input
cable, comprising:
a stationary frame;
a drum carried by the frame and adapted to advance and
retrieve the input cable by rotating about an axis;
a reel carried by the frame adjacent to and coaxial with said
drum;
a flexible ribbon cable circumferentially coiled about said
reel, the ribbon cable having its inner end adapted to
connect to the tail end of the input cable and to rotate with
the reel about said axis;
a housing enclosing the ribbon cable for maintaining the
ribbon cable substantially concentric;
socket means carried by the frame and wired to the tail end
of the ribbon cable, adapted to electrically connect the
ribbon cable to the output circuit; and
means for rotating the drum and reel simultaneously.
4,436,191
AUTOMOBILE HAND CONTROL
WUllam E. Perry, 9417 Delancey Dr., Vienna, Va, 22180
FOcd Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 330,785
Int. a.3 B60K 41/20
U.S. a. 192—3 S 21 Claima
4~
\\.
\\
1. A vehicle control system for a vehicle having a throttle
having a throttle spring tending to move the throttle to a
closed position, said system including:
an operator actuated movable control member;
cable means having first and second ends with said first end
being connected to said movable control member and said
second end being connected to an engine throttle so that
movement of the control member results in movement of
the cable means and consequent movement of the engine
throttle; and
air pressure actuated power assist means connected to said
MARCH 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
595
cable means for aiding in movement of said cable against
the force of said throttle spring and for maintaining said
cable means in any given position of adjustment while
permitting a subsequent movement of the cable to a subse-
quent position of adjustment in response to subsequent
movement of said movable control member.
friction material layer, which grooves extend completely
through the friction nuterial layer and through substantially all
4,436,192
RIBBON DRIVE CLUTCH
Scott J. Longrod, Woodbnry, Conn., anignor to SCM Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,224
Int a.J F16D 11/06; B41J 33/50
VJS. CI. 192—43.1 11 CUinii
M M
of the resilient layer, thus providing a path for coolant fluid
flow in the laminated structure which is substantially greater
than that of a grooved friction layer.
4,436,194
COIN OPERATED DELIVERY SYSTEM FOR VENDING
MACHINES
JaniM O. Hanley, 12838 Borwell Dr., Minnetonka, Minn. 5
FUed Aug. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 519,845
Int a.J G07F 5/02
U.S. a. 194—63 9 Claims
1. A ribbon drive clutch comprising a reversible stepper
motor having an output shaft,
clutch plate means mounted on said output shaft,
first cam means mounted on said clutch plate means,
second cam means mounted on said clutch plate means,
pawl means mounted on said clutch plate means disposed to
engage said first cam means for rotation with said output
thttt responsive to rotation of said output shaft in a first
direction and disposed to engage said second cam means
for rotation with said output shaft responsive to rotation
of said output shaft in a second direction,
first ribbon drive means,
second ribbon drive means,
first cam follower means disposed to operate said first ribbon
drive means responsive to rotation of said output shaft in
said first direction and,
second cam follower means disposed to operate said second
ribbon drive means responsive to rotation of said second
ribbon drive means in said second direction.
4,436,193
VARIABLE PULLEY TRANSMISSION
Richard L. Smirl, Arlington Heights, Dl., anignor to Borg-
Wamer Corporation, Chicago, DL
DiTidon of Scr. No. 257,283, Apr. 24, 1981. This appUcation
Dec 15, 1982, Scr. No. 449,894
Int a.i F16D 13/68
VS. CL 192—107 C 3 Claims
1. A fluid cooled clutch including a generally annular lami-
nated clutch disc assembly having an inner and an outer pe-
riphery which disc assembly comprises a central disc with
opposed surfaces, a resilient material layer affixed to each
surface, a friction material layer affixed to each resilient layer
where each resilient layer is at least as thick as the friction
nuterial layer, and a pattern of grooves is provided in the
1. A coin operated delivery system for a product vending
machine comprising:
(A) an elongated open top horizontal channel,
(B) an elongated horizontally disposed helix within said
channel,
(1) the coils of said helix being widely spaced apart to
receive loosely therebetween a vertically disposed
product to be dispensed,
(2) one end of said helix extending at least to the corre-
sponding end of the channel, and
(C) a vertically disposed rotatable coin receiver mechani-
cally linked directly to the opposite end of the helix, said
coin receiver when containing the requisite amount of
money being capable of manual rotation through at least
one full roution to rotate the helix through its direct
mechanical linkage through one full roution to discharge
in a front to rear direction one unit of product contained
therein from the remote end of the channel.
4,436,195
MULTI-COIN CHUTE MECHANISM
Donald C. Schmitt Lithonia, and Melvin J. Har?ill, Conyers,
both of Gtn assignors to Reed Industries, Inc., Stone Moan-
tain, Ga.
FUed Jan. 18, 1981, Scr. No. 274,878
Int CLJ G07F 5/02
VS. CL 194—92 5 Claims
1. In a coin chute having a frame defining a coin-supporting
surface, a slide movable over said surface and having at least
one opening therein to define, with said surface, a coin socket
for transporting s coin received therein along a path on said
surface from an initial position to a coin discharge position,
said surface having an opening at such discharge position to
596
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
allow a coin to drop from the socket, the improvement which
comprises:
coin diameter gauging means for sensing an undersize coin
or a spurious coin with a hole in it in said socket as the
coin is transported toward said discharge position and for
arresting movement of said slide upon the sensing of an
undersize coin or a spurious coin with a hole in it,
said gauging means comprising a dog carried by said frame
and having a tip engaging said slide, as the slide is moved,
along a line which is within the widthwise confines of said
path,
of the coin passing the coils and the apparatus includes means
for comparing the composite waveform with stored informa>
tion indicative of acceptable coins.
4,436,197
ARTICXE ORIENTING APPARATUS
Murdo A. MacDonald, Bloomfleld Hilla, Mich., aisignor to
Oyde Corporatioii, Auburn Heights, Mich.
FUed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339^30
Int a.3 B65G 47/24
U.S. a. 198—389 11 ciainia
means mounting said dog on said frame for normally main-
taining said tip in a generally upright plane passing
through said line while allowing said tip to tilt relative to
said upright plane and to shift laterally across said surface
with respect to said line,
whereby when the slide is moved toward the discharge
position, said tip actively seeks and penetrates deeply into
any peripheral gap within said socket created by an under-
size coin, or penetrates into the hole of a spurious coin
with a hole in it and prevents further inward motion of the
slide.
4,436,196
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR ASSESSING
COINS
Malcolm Crisp, Swayesey, and Christopher Lewis, Ely, both of
England, assignors to Plessey Overseas Limited, Ilford, En-
gland
FUed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,765
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jun. 20, 1980,
8020338
Int CL3 G07F i/02
UA a. 194—100 A 6 Claims
J
02
-»-
RF
■"'nFp^
T COUNT
1. A coin discriminating apparatus comprising first and
second coil sets each comprising a transmit and receive coil,
each set arranged to be subject to an abrupt flux change and
associated with a coin runway in such a manner that a coin
passing along the runway travels through a coil set and the
transmit coils of both coil sets are driven in series by an abrupt
flux change generator which is operable as the coin passes the
said coil set, and the reqeive coils of the coil sets are connected
in parallel and in opposition to each other and across the inputs
of a differential amplifier whose output is used to drive a zero
detector, the composite waveform produced being indicative
1. An apparatus for orienting articles each having a head and
a reduced shank comprising, a track having a pair of generally
parallel and laterally spaced apart rails constructed and ar-
ranged to receive the head of an article thereon with at least a
portion of the shank thereof depending therebetween, said
track sloping downwardly such that articles received thereon
will slide toward the lower end thereof, a discharge section of
said track being constructed and arranged to be movable to a
first position in generally longitudinal alignment with said
track such that articles received thereon will slide toward the
lower end of said discharge section and to a second position
wherein at least a portion of said discharge section is displaced
from said first position such that articles will drop off said
discharge section, a gate associated with said track and con-
structed and arranged to permit only articles received on said
track with their heads bearing on said rails and their shanks
depending therebetween to move on said track downstream of
the lower end of said discharge section and to prevent articles
bearing on said track in any other orientation from moving
downstream of the lower end of said discharge section, article
delivery means associated with said track and constructed and
arranged to repeatedly dump articles onto said track upstream
of said gate, drive means constructed and arranged to move
said discharge section of said track to said first and second
positions, and cycle means associated with said drive means
and constructed and arranged to periodically cycle said drive
means to move said discharge section of said track from said
first position to said second position and back to said first
position, whereby at least some of the articles dumped onto
said track by said article delivery means are received on said
track with their heads bearing on said rails and their shanks
depending therebetween and at least some of such articles so
received on said track and not so oriented are prevented by
said gate from passing downstream thereof and the periodic
cycling of said discharge section of said track removes there-
from any not so oriented articles bearing on said discharge
section such that a succession of only oriented articles emerge
from said track downstream of said gate.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
597
4,436,198
CONVEYOR BELT SYSTEM HAVING A PHASE SHIFT
INDICATOR AND ADJUSTER FOR OPTIMUM TUNING
OF A SYNCHRONOUS RIP DETECTOR aRCUIT
Robert J. Houck, Akron, Ohio, and Keirin J. King, Coon Rapids,
Minn., assignors to The B. F. Goodrich Company, New York,
N.Y.
FUed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,712
Int. a.) B65G 4i/06
U.S. a. 198—502 3 Claims
1. In a conveyor belt assembly, with rip detection capabili-
ties, a circuit for shifting the phase of one signal relative to
another signal and for determining the synchronous relation-
ship therebetween, comprising: first means for producing digi-
tal information directly coordinated with the instantaneous
time frame development of such another signal, thumbwheel
switch means for setting a predetermined phase relation of
such one signal relative to such another signal, comparator
means responsive to such digital information and said set
means for producing an output signal representative of the
phase of such one signal, output means responsive to such
output signal for producing such one signal at a phase corre-
sponding thereto and light emitting diode means for illuminat-
ing in intensity inversly proportionately to the degree of syn-
chronization of the phase relationships.
4,436,199
CAM-OPERATED MULTISTROKE FEED MECHANISM
Kiyokazu Baba, Komatsu, and Kei^i Nishida, Matsuto, both of
Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Scisakusho,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 18, 1982, Ser, No. 379,447
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct. 8, 1981, 56-159398
Int. a.3 B65G 25/04
U.S. a. 198—750 9 Oairas
1. In apparatus for transferring or feeding articles, the appa-
ratus including a feed member which reciprocates for causing
such transferring or feeding motion, a multistroke feed mecha-
nism for reciprocating the feed member over any selected one
of a plurality of preassigned different strokes, the multistroke
feed mechanism comprising:
(a) a rotatable camshaft;
(b) a set of feed cams having differently contoured surfaces
and mounted side by side on the camshaft, the feed cams
being jointly movable axially of the camshaft while being
constrained to simultaneous rotation therewith;
(c) a cam follower arranged for engagement with the con-
toured surface of one of the feed cams;
(d) means defining a pair of opposed fluid chambers acting
between the camshaft and the set of feed cams for moving
the latter axially of the camshaft to a desired position
where a selected one of the feed cams is engaged by the
cam follower; and
(e) a linkage for operatively connecting the cam follower to
the feed member in order to cause the latter to reciprocate
over a distance determined by the contoured surface of
the selected feed cam in engagement with the cam fol-
lower.
4,436,200
LOW FRICTION FLAT-TOP ARTICLE CARRYING
CHAIN
Wasly G. Hodlewsky, Greendale, and WiUlam H. Bloedom,
West AUis, both of Wis., assignors to Rexnord Inc., MUwau-
kec. Wis.
Continuation of Ser. No. 653,564, Jan. 29, 1976, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 225,845, Feb. 14, 1972,
abandoned. This appUcation Jul. 23, 1979, Ser. No. 59,851
Int a.} B65G 17/ 40
U.S. a. 198—851 6 Qaims
//v
1. A chain comprising links interconnected by pins for ariic-
ulation and having a tensile strength, wear resistance and low
coefficient of friction for operation on rigid supporting guide
ways of a dissimilar material, the improvement wherein each
such link comprises an injection molded thermoplastic unitary
monolithic acetal resin with a uniform dispersion of random
oriented tetraflouroethylene monofilamentous fibers in a se-
lected proportion embedded therein, said proportion being leu
than that which would measurably reduce the tensile strength
of the link, the comparison being with simUarly connected
links molded under the same conditions entirely of the same
acetal resin alone and using the same accepted measurement
procedure, and said proportion being greater than 1.3% by
weight and such that the number of fibers exposed to the guide
ways are sufficient to reduce the coefficient of friction of the
link with the guide ways to 0.2, said coefficient being well
below that indicated by accepted test procedures using test
specimens of the same resin with the same fibers in said propor-
tion.
4,436,201
DISC CARTRIDGE HAVING A DETACHABLE LID
Shosei Inaba, Sagamihara, Japan, assignor to Victor Company of
Japan Limited, Yokohama, Japan
FUed Not. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 440,158
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Not. 11, 1981, 56-
167141[U]; Nov. 19, 1981, 56-171455[U]
Int a.5 B65D 65/30. 85/57; n6F 1/22
VS. a. 206—444 8 Claims
1. A disc cartridge for containing an information recording
disc therein, comprising:
(a) a cartridge body having an opening at one end thereof for
inserting and taking out a recording disc therethrough;
(b) a lid detachably engaged with said end for covering said
opening when engaged with said cartridge body, said lid
398
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
having a lid body and a pair of engaging means provided
at both ends of said lid body for the engagement of said lid
with said cartridge body, said lid body and said engaging
means being integrally formed of a synthetic resin;
said engaging means having;
a lock arm having a curved portion, one end of said lock
arm being connected to said lid body, a projection,
which will be received in a recess made in said cartridge
outer surface and positioned exteriorly with respect to
said envelope;
(0 a pair of extensions each attached to a respective side flap
and extending inwardly therefrom; each said extension
having a lower portion secured to said front panel outer
surface and an unsecured upper portion;
(g) each said extension including an extension inner side
edge, said extension inner side edges being positioned in
spaced, opposed relationship; and
(h) a pair of closures each formed between said front panel
outer surface and a respective extension unsecured por-
tion; each said closure being adapted to slidably and re-
leasably receive therein a respective said insert side mar-
gin whereby said card insert is removably retained adja-
cent said front panel outer surface and whereby said card
insert is visible between said extduion side edges.
body, being provided in the vicinity of the other end of
said lock arm;
a plurality of leaf spring elements constituting a generally
zigzag-shaped spring means, which is interposed be-
tween one end of said lid body and said lock arm, each
of said leaf spring elements being connected to another
at its end to form consecutive V-shapes, every other leaf
spring element in said zigzag-shaped spring means has a
thin fKsrtion and a thick portion.
♦.*3«»202 4,436.203
REUSABLE ENVELOPE TAMPER RESISTANT PACKAGING DEVICE
E. Bertram Berkley, Kansas Qty, Mo., assignor to Tension Ellis M. Reyner, New Brunswick, NJ., assignor to Joy Re-
EoTclope Corporation, Kansas aty. Mo. search Incorporated, New Bnuiswick, N J.
FUed Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,127 FUed May 10, 1983, Ser. No. 493,363
„ » ^ ^*- ^-^ "^^ *^/^* ^^ C1.J B65D 81/20. 85/86; GOIL 19/12
UA a. 206-455 9 Claims U.S. Q. 206-524.8 33 Claims
1. An envelope for removably receiving and retaining a card
insert with opposite side margins, which comprises:
(a) an exposed front panel having an inner and an outer
surface, an upper and a lower edge, and opposite side
edges;
(b) an exposed back panel having an inner and an outer
surface, an upper and a lower edge, and opposite side
edges; said back panel being integrally connected to said
front panel and demarcated therefrom by a lower edge
fold line along said front and back panel lower edges;
(c) said back panel being folded along said lower edge fold
line with respect to said front panel and positioned adja-
cent thereto;
(d) said front and back panels forming a pocket therebe-
tween open at said front and back panel upper edges;
(e) a pair of opposed side flaps each having a respective side
flap edge and each being integrally connected to said back
panel and demarcated therefrom by a respective fold line
along said side flap edge and a respective back panel side
edge, each said side flap being attached to said front panel
1. In a tamper-resistant package, at least one over sized
closeable outer enclosure and at least one inner enclosure fitted
with closure means containing at least one flowable material in
addition to the product, and means associated with said pack-
age for making available higher pressure inside the inner enclo-
sure than that of its surrounding atmosphere, space between
said outer and inner enclosures contains a predetermined
amount of flowable material suitable for the proper functioning
of said package, the internal pressure in said outer enclosure is
reduced to a predetermined level below that of its surrounding
atmosphere by drawing out a suitable quantity of its flowable
contents before closing it, the walls of said outer enclosure
press against the walls of said inner enclosure which holds the
product and restricts its movement therein to a predetermined
extent, means associated with said package for manifesting
evidence that tampering with said package has occurred in the
event that the contents in said inner enclosure is tampered with
through at least one aperture made in said walls of said package
leading to the product therein.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
399
4,436,204
DRYWALL JOINT COMPOUND PACKAGING
Gcnrd T. Sowinski, Lancaster, N.Y., MiigDor to Natloaal Gyp-
sum Company, Dallas, Tex.
FUed Dec. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 448,291
Int CIJ B65D 75/48. 77/12
U.S. a. 206—525 10 Claims
wall and said flap, whereby said flap is releasable to open
said top wall by pulling said flap away from said front wall
14
10
A.
3e*
U. 2
and peeling the surfaces of said areu of paperboard de-
fined by said first knife cuts.
1. A package of ready-mix joint compound comprising a 4,436,207
cylindrical plastic tube gathered and sealed at each end and AUTOMATIC CORN SORTING AND INSPECTION
filled with an aqueous slurry of drywall joint compound. SYSTEM
Edward L. Klnkis, 1270 MarshaU Dr.,^j;., Salem, Oreg* 97302
FUed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,942
4,436,205 Int. Q.^ B07C 5/10; G02B 5/16
AMPULE CASE u.S. Q. 209-577 4 Claims
Isamu Horii, Osaka, Japan, assignor to Fi^isawa Pharmaceuti-
cal Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 363,920
Claims priority, qipUcation Japan, Apr. 3, 1981, 56-50897
Int a.3 B65D 85/42. 73/00
U.S. a. 206—530 7 Claims
1. An ampule case comprising one or more L-shaped base
sheets in which the long side of each L extends along one side
of the ampule, means effecting adherence between the shori
side of each L and the bottom side of each ampule and means
formed as an integral extension of each base sheet covering at
least one other dimension of said ampule.
4. An automatic sorting and inspection system for articles of
food, comprising a plurality of grading and removal stations,
each station including means for sensing a particular character-
istic of the articles, means for conveying each of the articles
through each of the stations, and means for removal of the
articles from the conveying means at each of the stations, said
sensing means including a plurality of fiber optic tubes having
ends positioned above said conveying means, means for trans-
mitting light through said optic fiber tubes, n^ounting means
for anchoring the ends of the optic fiber tubes and spring
means connected to the mounting means for rectilinear move-
ment thereof to enable the ends of the optic fiber tubes to
follow contours of the articles during travel on the conveying
means.
4,436,206
RECLOSABLE PAPERBOARD CARTON STRUCTURE
Morris W. Kuchenbecker, Neenah, Wis., assignor to James
River/Dixie-Northem, Inc., Norwalk, Conn.
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,388
Int. a? B65D 5/54
MS. a. 206—625 18 Claims
1. A reclosable paperboard carton structure comprising:
an open-top body portion including upstanding front and
rear walls and opposed end walls;
a cover including a top wall hinged along an edge portion
thereof to said rear wall, and a depending front flap on the
free edge portion of said top wall opposite the recited
hinged edge portion; and
means releasably adhering said flap to said front wall com-
prising adhesive on said front wall and said flap in prede-
termined areas thereof defined by a pattern of discontinu-
ous first knife cuts provided in at least one of said front
4,436,208
GUIDE MEMBER FOR A ROLLER-TYPE CLASSIFYING
MACHINE
Walter I. Cronan, 125 LakcTiew Are., Leonia, N J. 07605
FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,633 -^
Int a.J B07C 5/04
U.S. a. 209—668 24 Clahns
1. An improved classifying machine having first and second
rollers supported with their rolling surfaces facing and spaced
apart from each other, said rollers having respective axes of
rotation lying in the same plane, said apparatus including
means for rotating said rollers about their axes as a workpiece
is fed along at least a portion of the rollers' length whUe the
workpiece is seated between and in contact with the roller'
surfaces, the improvement comprising:
an elongated gtiide member including a tensioned filament
disposed between said rollers and extending along a sub-
stantial pari of the length of said rollers, and
means positioning said filament at a position where it pro-
vides vertical support to the workpiece whUe the work-
piece is seated in contact with the surfaces of both rollers,
and positioning said filament relative to said roUers so that
600
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
when said workpiece is seated in contact with said rollers
and said filament, the center of gravity of the workpiece
bar is forceably inserted into said recess and is self-retain-
ing therein after assembly.
t-190
must rise in order for the workpiece to break contact with
either of the roller surfaces.
4,436,209
MERCHANDISE DISPLAY HOOK
David R. Thalenfeld, Bcachunt, N.Y,, aciignor to Trion Indus-
tries Inc., WUkes-Barre, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 151,357, May 19, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,351,440, Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 918,483, Jun. 23,
1978, abandoned. This appUcation Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No.
303,419
Int. a.3 A47F 5/00
U.S. a 211-57.1 10 OaiDtt
4,436,210
THREADED CAP FOR SEVERING A CLOSURE FROM A
HERMETICALLY SEALED CONTAINER
Gerhard H. Weiler, South Harrington, and Louis T. Pagels,
Hanover Park, botii of lU., assignors to Automatic Liquid
Packaging, Inc., Arlington Heights, 111.
FUed Apr. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 364,476
Int. a.J B65D 1/02
UA a 215-32 4 ciai,^
1. A sealed package comprising:
a hermetically sealed plastic container having a body portion
provided with an annular bearing surface and a cover
integral therewith but adapted to be severed therefrom-
and '
a cap threadedly engaged with said cover and operable to
sever said cover from said body portion when said cap is
threaded down on said container to abut the bearing sur-
face and thereby open said container;
said cap defining a discontinuous bottom edge adapted to
bear against said container annular bearing surface as the
cap is threaded down onto said container, whereby the
surface area contact between said bottom edge and shoul-
der is substantially reduced;
said bottom edge further comprising a plurality of alternat-
ing circumferentially spaced prominences and recesses,
only said prominences being adapted to bear against said
annular bearing surface of said container; and
said prominences being arcuate so that the surface area
contact between a prominence and said container annular
bearing surface is substantially tangential.
4,436,211
SAFETY PACKAGE
Peter P. Gach, Evansville, Ind., assignor to Sunbeam Plastics
Corporation, Evansvllle, lad.
FUed Dec. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 450,686
Int a.3 B65D 55/02
UA a 215-216 9ci.inis
1. A two part merchandise hook or the like which comprises
(«) a formed wire support element having an outwardly
extending portion and a downwardly extending stabilizina
portion, *
(b) a hinge bar secured to said support element;
(c) a molded plastic base member including spaced, L-
shaped mounting lugs adapted for reception in an aoer-
tured display panel,
(d) said base member having an open-sided hinge recess for
the reception of said hinge bar,
(e) said base member being pivotable about said hinge bar
when assembled therewith,
(0 the open side of said recess being of smaller dimension
than the diameter of said hinge bar, whereby said hinge
1. A safety package comprising: a container having a cylin-
drical neck portion forming an opening, a cylindrical cap
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
601
disposed on said neck for closing said opening, complementary
cam means on said neck of said container and on said cap to
permit relative axial movement between a first position closing
said opening and a second position permitting removal of said
cap upon relative rotation of said cap and container less than
one turn, said cap including an outer skirt concentric with said
cap, a plurality of ratchet teeth uniformly spaced on the cir-
cumference of said skirt, a lock element on said container
engageable with said teeth to permit rotation of said cap in a
closing direction toward said first position and being engage-
able with any one of said teeth to substantially prevent relative
rotation of said container and cap toward said 2nd position for
a distance more than the spacing between adjacent teeth, said
skirt being deformable by simultaneous radial pressure at dia-
metrically spaced points on said skirt spaced approximately 90*
from said lock element to move said one of said teeth radially
outward and disengage said lock element from said one of said
teeth to permit relative rotation of said cap and closure in an
opening direction.
4,436,212
TAMPER PROOF CLOSURE
Saotos A. Ali^Jandro Llera, San Juan, P.R., assignor to Precision
Plastic Products Corp.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 185,889, Sep. 10, 1980, Pat. No.
4,380,299. This appUcation May 5, 1982, Ser. No. 375,207
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 19,
2000, has been discUimed.
Int. a.3 B65D 49/12
M&, a. 215—252 21 Claims
1. A tamper proof closure for a container with a neck fmish
having a threaded portion and a retaining means therebelow
having a bottom surface, said closure comprising:
a body having a substantially straight side wall having an
inner surface with an internally threaded portion located
on said inner surface and on its external surface having
located thereon a plurality of spaced ribs;
a breakaway skirt therebelow;
a frangible connecting means for connecting said breakaway
to said side wall including a plurality of straps formed
from a select number of ribs by an undercut in the side
wall which extends outward from said inner surface;
said breakaway skirt being adapted to slide over said retain-
ing means as the closure is threaded onto the container
and to be disposed below of and adjacent to said retaining
means when said closure is fully threaded onto the con-
tainer;
whereby when the closure is unthreaded from the container,
the breakaway skirt wUl be severed from the body at the
frangible connecting means by the bottom surface of said
retaining means acting on the breakaway skirt leaving said
breakaway skirt on the container as an indication of tam-
pering.
4,436,213
CONTAINER HAVING TAMPER EVIDENT SEAL AND
IMAGED POLYMER HLM USEFUL AS SUCH A SEAL
Fred R. Paul, Jr., Chisago, and James S. MrodBski, Oakdale,
both of Minn., assignors to Minnesota Mining and Manufac-
turing Co., St. Paul, Minn.
FUed Nov. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 439,638
Int a.3 B65D 51/00
U.S. a. 215—365 11 Claims
1. A container having walls defining a cavity and an opening
into said cavity covered by a tamper evident seal comprising a
normally transparent polymer film which can be repeatedly
rendered temporarily translucent by stretching and transparent
by relaxing.
4,436,214
ANTI-THEFT PICNIC DEVICE
David Henderson, 14 Chester Rd., Darien, Conn. 06820
FUed Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 450,987
Int. a.3 B68D 25/24: E02D 5/SO
U.S. a. 220—18 13 Claims
t-2
1. A securable beach picnic chest assembly comprising, in
combination, a picnic chest having a floor, a closable lid, lock-
ing means for locking said lid, and carrying handles, with the
chest being constructed to be of sufficiently light weight to be
hand-portable, and with the floor having a through opening;
and a locking spike device extending through said through
opening and including a body portion, an insertion point at a
lower end of the body portion, a shoulder at an upper end of
the body portion securing the picnic chest to the locking spike
device, a plurality of locking spikes having at least anchoring
portions thereof disposed outside said body p>ortion, slide
means within said body portion coupled to said locking spikes
and displaceable between first and second operative positions,
and an actuator handle within said picnic chest and operative
selectively to displace said slide means to said first position in
which said anchoring portions of said locking spikes are dis-
posed against said body portion so that said locking spike
device can be inserted into and withdrawn from sand or soft
soil, and to said second position in which said anchoring por-
tions of said locking spikes are angled outwardly from said
body portion to anchor said locking spike device and picnic
chest in place in the sand or soft soU.
4,436,215
STORAGE DRAWER WITH RETAINED PARTITIONS
Kvl W. Kleinert, 19601 Beach CUff Blvd., Rocky River, OUo
ail6, and Kennetii B. KleUwrt, 1285 E. Melrose Dr., West-
lake, Ohio 44145
FUed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341.464
Int a? B65D 1/24, 25/04
U.S. Q. 22&-22J 7 Gains
1. A storage drawer which comprises:
a bottom;
two ends extending from the bottom;
two sides extending from the bottom between the two ends,
each side having a plurality of longitudinaUy spaced slots
602
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
bottom thereof, the receues for each pair of ridges being
opposite each other, each recess extending into the ridge
in a direction generally perpendicular to the slot; and
each end on each side of the partition, each tab adapted to
fit in one of the recesses, the sides of the partition adapted
to be held by the narrowing slot as the partition is inserted
into the drawer, and the Ub adapted to be held in the
recesses.
extending from the bottom, each slot defined by two cal support member extending upwardly and inwardly from
!?J^^J^f? ^* /^"^ ^^ ' ^' °^ ridges which said seating ring and a support platform having a container
^^i . i u i^ "**" converging as the slot receiving surface disposed within said seating ring, said seating
SSwer ^"S iJL^T "°. T ^^ ''°' "r r ™«' "^^ '"PP^" "^'' "d '^ .upport'platform haCg f
hl^. rr^exS:a?„rl^H r"*' ^^"^^r '^'^"^ °f **«"» ^5 mils, at least one circumferential rib
rlVJ°^ !?^ extendmg from the top of the slot toward the po»ed on said seating ring and a plurality of generally verti-
cally oriented ribs extending between and intersecting said
circumferential rib and said lower rib. said ribs each having a
thickness of about 40 to 43 mils, a second lower rib disposed
generally on said seating ring and spaced inwardly from said
^wer rib, a third lower rib disposed generally at the intersec-
tion of said support member and said support platform, a plu-
rality of generally conically oriented ribs on said support mem-
ber extending between said second lower rib and said third
lower rib. a circumferential step in said support platform and a
plurality of radially oriented, intersecting ribs disposed on said
support platform within said circumferential step.
7. A base cup for receiving a container having a hemispheri-
cal bottom comprising, in combination, an annular sidewall
having a thickness of about 20 mils, a seating ring extending
generally inwardly from said sidewall, a generally frusto-coni-
cd support member extending upwardly and inwardly from
_^ . . _, ^ ^ ,^ ""d seating ring and a support platform having a container
a partition adapted to be held on each side by one of the slots receiving surface disposed within said seating ring, said seating
on the side of the drawer, the partition having a pair of ring, said support member, and said support pUtform having a
diametrically opposed protruding tabs which extend from thickness of about 25 mils, at least one circumferential rib
disposed on said annular sidewall, at least one lower rib dis-
posed on said seating ring and a plurality of generally verti-
cally oriented ribs extending between and intersecting said
circumferential rib and said lower rib, said ribs each having a
thickness of about 40 to 4S mils, a second lower rib disposed
generally on said seating ring and spaced inwardly from said
lower rib. said ribs being disposed on the inside of said base
cup.
10. A plastic base cup for receiving a container having a
hemispherical bottom comprising, in combination, an annular
sidewall, a seating ring extending generally inwardly from said
sidewall. a generally frusto-conical support member extending
upwardly and inwardly from said seating ring and a support
platform having a container receiving surface, at least one
circumferential rib disposed on said annular sidewall. an annu-
lar thickened portion at substantially the intersection of the
support member and the support platform, and a plurality of
substantially conically extending ribs disposed on said support
member and intersecting said thickened portion.
16. A base cup for receiving a container having a hemispher-
ical bottom comprising, in combination, an annular sidewall, a
seating ring extending generally inwardly from said sidewall, a
generally frusto-conical support member extending upwardly
and inwardly from said seating ring and a support platform
having a container receiving surface, at least one circumferen-
tial rib disposed on said annular sidewall, a pair of substantially
concentric ribs, one of said ribs disposed at substantially the
intersection of said seating ring and said support member and
,..,.. the other of said ribs disposed at substantially the intersection
1. A base cup for receivmg a contamer having a generally of said support member and said support platform and a plural-
spbencal bottom compnsmg. m combination, an annular side- ity of substantially conically extending ribs disposed between
waU. a seatmg nng extendmg generally inwardly from said and intersecting said pair of concentric ribs.
sidewall. a generally frusto-comcal support member extending
upwardly and inwardly from said seating ring and a support
platform having a container receiving surface, at least one 4,436,217
circumferential rib disposed on said annular sidewall. at lesat PAINT BRUSH SUPPORT
one lower rib disposed on said seating ring and a plurality of John C. Ritter, 12645 Dacben, Detroit, Mich. 48224
generally vertically oriented ribs extending between said cir- FUed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,413
cumferential rib and said lower rib, a pair of concentric ribs, InU Q.^ A46B 17/02
one of said concentric ribs disposed generally at the intersec- U A CL 220—85 D 6 Claims
tion of said seating ring and said support member, the other of 1. A paint brush support attachable to the outer portion of a
said concentric nbs disposed generally at the intersection of paint container having a bale attached to the outer portion of
said support member and said support platform. the paint container by a bale attachment button, the paint brush
6. A base cup for receivng a container having a hemispheri- support comprising:
4,436,216
RIBBED BASE CUPS
Long F. Chang, Sylvania, Ohio, aaiignor to Owens-Illinois, Inc.,
Toledo, Ohio
FUed Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 412,673
Int. Cl^ B65D 23/00
U A a. 220-69 22 Claims
cal bottom comprising, in combination, an annular sidewall
having a thickness of about 20 mils, a seating ring extending
generally inwardly from said sidewall, a generally frusto-coni-
a brush container, the brush container comprising a vessel
having an open top, an inside wall having a top edge,
opposed side walls and an outside wall;
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
603
an aperture formed in the inside wall of the brush container, said turning stop engages under a neck edge (36) facing into the
the aperture being snugly engageable with the bale attach- neck interior, characterized in that a turning handle (2) carries
ment button to support the brush container on the paint a slide surface (21) which simultimeously forms a turning car-
container; and rief (32) for laid turning step (26), wherein said turning carrier
and said turning stop are coupled via a turning lifting apparatus
a slot extending from the top edge of the inner wall of the (24, 43) and in that a turning protection member (29) rouubly
brush container to the aperture to clear the bale when supported at said turning handle is rouubly supported in said
mounting the brush container on the bale attachment „^)^ /|\
button.
4,436,218
REVERSE BUCKLING BURSTING DISC
John G. Bcesc, Cardiff, England, assignor to IMI Marston
Limited, Wolverhampton, England
Filed Jan. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 342,803
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 19, 1981,
8105237
iBt a. J FI6K 17/40
vs. a 220—89 A
8ClalBU
/
'^18
1. A reverse buckling preuure relief disc adapted to be
disposed, in use, with its convex side towards the lUgher pres-
sure encountered in use, wherein the improvement comprising
the disc having a central domed region, an outer flange and ai|
integral transitional region interconnecting the flange and the
central domed region, the transitional region being of gener-
ally frusto-conical shape and having an included angle in the
region 170* to 70*, the included angle of the tangenu of the
domed region taken where the central domed region meeu the
transitional region being less than the said included angle of the
transitional region.
4,436,219
SEALING CAP FOR A GASOLINE TANK
Helnrieh Renttw, WilbUnien, Fed. Rep. of Gemany, aaaignor
to Reotter MetallwarenflriNrik GmbH, Waiblingen, Fed. Rep.
of Gennany
Filed Not. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 444,205
ClaiBM priority, appUcatioa Fed. Rep. of GeraMny, Not. 26,
1981, 3146824
Int. a.) B65D 41/96. 41/36
\i£. a. 220—295 22 Clains
1. Sealing cap with turning stop (26) for placing on a filler
neck (1) provided with a counter stop (27), in particular of a
gasoline tank, which is supported with the intermediary of a
sealing ring (4) on the free end (5) of said filler neck, wherein
4,436,220
HERMETIC PACKAGE USING MEMBRANE SEAL
Louis D. Simmons, Arnold, Md., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Air Force,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Jun. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 393,266
Int. a.} B65D 41/00
VJS. a. 220-359 4 Claias
1. A solderable, hermetically sealed reuseable container
which comprises:
a. a container body defining a cavity therein and presenting
a solderable surface defining an opening for said con-
tainer:
b. a thin, reuseable, solderable metallic membrane for her-
metically sealing said opening by interfacing with said
solderable surface by the application of heat around the
periphery of said membrane;
c. a solder seal interfacing said membrane and said solderable
surface;
d. a protective plate covering said membrane; and
e. means for removably attaching said protective plate to
said container body.
604
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436^21
CONTAINER AND DISPENSING PLATE FOR A ROLL OF
PRE-MOISTENED TOWELETTES
Herman Mirgnlics, Westflcld, N J., mignor to Sterling Drug
Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct 12, 1978, Ser. No. 950,616
Int aj A47K 10/38
VJS. a. 221—46 9 Ctaimf
segments of a circle of substantially the same radius as the
containers, each said lever member having an upper pressure
surface opposed to and spaced from its lower support surface
so as to apply downward pressure to the top of the lowermost
of the stack of containers when in the said second position, the
inner edges of the upper pressure surfaces forming concave
segments of a circle and wherein the upper pressure surfaces
are horizontal when the lever members are in their second
position.
4,436,22.1
DEVICE FOR RECORDING THE DISPENSING OF
FLUIDS
Jerry L. WUion, 2810 E. 46th St., Chattanooga, Tenn. 37407
FUed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,244
Int. a.J B67D 5/22; GOIF lJ/26
VJS. CL 222-36 5 Oaimi
7. A device for dispensing and separating a single perforated
sheet from a continuous roll of sheets which are joined at
perforations, said device comprising a substantially rigid plate
having therethrough a dispensing opening dimensioned to
allow an end sheet of a roll to slide therethrough, a slit having
a first end opening into said dispensing opening and a second
end, and sloped edges converging toward said second end of
said slit from an outer edge of said plate, whereby said end
sheet of said roll slides through said slit into said dispensing
opening, and the remaining sheets are pulled directly through
said dispensing op>ening.
4,436,222
APPARATUS FOR DISPENSING CONTAINERS
Michael Taylor, Lower Norton, Nr. Warwick, and Malcolm D.
N. Withnall, Moreton Morrell, both of England, assignors to
Mars Limited, London, England
FUed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,708
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Dec. 18, 1980.
8040531
Int a.3 B65H 3/24
VJS. a. 221-223 7 Qainis
\,\A
1. In combination, a dispenser for dispensing a predeter-
mined measured unit of conductive fluid from a container
when the container is tipped, and a device for recording the
number of measured units dispensed by the dispenser, said
dispenser having a housing including an outlet spout, means
including an inlet for entering into said container, and a con-
duit communicating said inlet and said outlet, said device
comprising, a casing mounted on the exterior of the housing of
said dispenser, a pair of electrical conductors extending from
the casing and disposed in spaced apart disposition within said
conduit adjacent said outlet spout to form a gap, whereby
whenever said container is tipped fluid is presented over said
conductors to provide an electrical path across said gap, and
electrical circuit means disposed within said casing and con-
nected across said conductors, said circuit means including a
source of electrical energy, and an electrical counting means
for counting and recording the number of times the electrical
path across said gap occurs and thereby the number of prede-
termined measured units dispensed by said dispenser.
1. Apparatus for dispensing containers from a stack, com-
prising a plurality of jaw assemblies evenly spaced around a
common vertical axis, each jaw assembly having a catch mem-
ber and a lever member pivotable about horizontal axes be-
tween a first rest position in which the catch member is pivoted
upwards away from' the common axis to allow a stack of con-
tainers to pass it and rest on a lower support surface of the
lever member and a second dispensing position in which an
upper support surface of the catch member is positioned to
support the stack of containers and the lever member is pivoted
downwards away from the common axis to allow the lower-
most of the stack of containers to pass it, wherein the inner
edges of the upper and lower support surfaces form concave
4,436,224
DISPENSER FOR FLUIDS AND PAPER TOWELS
Joha Mclnemy, 25 Central Sq., Grafton, Mass. 01519
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,189
Int a.3 B67D 5/06; B65H 79/00
U.S. CL 222—183 14 Claims
1. Dispenser for fluid and paper towels in which the towels
are arranged in a roll having a central bore, the dispenser
comprising:
(a) a fluid container comprising:
1. a base portion with an upper horizontal surface,
2. an elongated neck portion which extends vertically
from the base portion and is adapted to extend through
the bore of a roll of paper towels, so that the roll is
supported on said horizontal surface and the top of said
elongated neck portion extends above the roll, and
3. an outlet aperture at the top of the elongated neck
portion;
(b) a fluid dispensing flxture consisting of a manually oper-
ated pump comprising:
1. a cap adapted to flt on top of the elongated neck por-
tion,
2. a spout on top of the cap, and
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
60S
3. an elongated tube which is operatively connected to the said outlet valve and said nozzle, said valves being operated
spout and which extends down into the base portion of solely by said flnger squeezing said bulb,
the container. ^^—^^.~^-^—
7. Dispenser for fluid and paper towels in which the towels
are arranged in a roll having a central bore, the dispenser 4,436,226
comprising: MATERIAL METERING DEVICE
(a) a fluid container having an outlet aperture and compris- ^^ ^- A«8«". 2750 SaUor Are., Ventura, CaUf. 93001
ing. • *^ *^ FUad Aug. 6, 1981, Sw. No. 290,419
1. a base portion with an upper horizontal surface, ^*' ^'^ ^^^ ^^^^
VJS. a. 222-280
9 Claim
2. an elongated neck portion which extends vertically
from the base portion and is adapted to extend through
the bore of a roll of paper towels, so that the roll is
supported on said horizontal surface and the top of said
elongated neck portion extends above the roll, and
3. an outlet aperture at said base portion,
(b) a fluid dispensing fixture consisting of a spigot at said
outlet aperture.
4,436,225
DISPENSER HAVING A TRIGGER-BULB PUMP
Sidney M. Libit 441 Lakeside Ter., Glencoe, lU. 60022
Continuation of Ser. No. 162,429, Jun. 24, 1980, Pat. No.
4,352,443. This appUcation May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 378,805
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 5, 1999,
has been discUdmed.
lot a.3 B05B 11/01
VS. a. lU-Wl 5 Claims
1. A metering device for particulate material, comprising:
forward and rear rollers for supporting a conveyor belt,
a flexible conveyor belt wound about the rollers,
means for dispensing particulate material onto said conveyor
belt
means for rotating at least one of the rollers to rotate the
conveyor belt with its upper surface moving toward the
forward roller,
a gate having a lower material contacting surface, said gate
comprising a generally cylindrtcal elongate rod positioned
generally above and forward from the forward roller with
its axis generally parallel to the roller axis, and a material
blocking surface above said rod, said rod cooperting with
the forward roller to define a gate opening which prevents
material above the level of the lower rod surface from
being metered past the gate,
means for adjusting the position of the gate along a path
which extends upward and forward from the forward
roller to control the volumetric metering rate and permit
material being metered past the gate to fall downwardly,
and
means for continuously rotating the rod so that its lower
surface moves in the direction of material flow, thereby
retarding clogging of metered nuterial at the gate.
1. A pump for a fluid container comprising: a two part spray
head which fits together to form means for dispensing fluid
from the container via passages in at least one of said two parts,
said head including a fluid-dispensing nozzle; a flrst of said
parts being shaped and proportioned to provide flrst means for
enabling a flow of fluid from near the bottom of the container
to the nozzle; second means interposed in said first means for
drawing fluid from said container and for delivering it to and
expelling it from said nozzle, said second means further includ-
ing a flexible trigger means having a flange with contours for
forming intake and outlet fluid valves and an air breather
valve, and said flexible trigger means contours further forming
a thin waUed bulb which is dependent from said flange and
which is positioned to be in direct contact with a finger on the
hand of an operator, said flnger flrst closing and then opening
said bulb for sucking in said fluid via said first means and said
intake valve and then closing said bulb for expeUing fluid via
4,436,2r
PUMP AND TAP ASSEMBLY FOR BEVERAGE
CONTAINERS
Arthur L. Johnson, Jr., and Marlow W. Dodge, both of Rock*
ford, lU., aatlgnors to Johnson EnttrprisM, Inc., Rockfbrd,
ni.
FUed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,838
Int a.) B67D 5/42
VS. a. 222—382 1 OiOm
1. In a pump and tap assembly for a beverage container, the
combination of, a single unitary piece of rigid plastic material
and comprising, a cylinder having a first end open to receive a
hand operated piston, and a tapping unit formed integrally
with the second end of said cylinder, said tapping unit includ-
ing a bottom wall portion formed integrally with said cylinder
and closing said second end of the cylinder, a first rigid tube
formed integrally with said bottom wall portion and projecting
longitudinally outwardly from said bottom wall portion, said
tube having an enlarged portion of predetermined length a^js-
cent said bottom waU portion and communicating with the
interior of said cylinder while terminating at said bottom waU
portion thereby to permit air to be pumped from said cylinder
into the container through said tube, the outer end portion of
said first tube having an internal diameter of predetermined
size, a hollow tubular boss integrally formed on the exterior of
said bottom portion and projecting longitudinally from said
bottom wall portion alongside said tube a distance equal to said
predetermined length, the outer end of said bou having a hole
606
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
facing longitudinally outwardly to receive and hold a second
rigid tube generally paralleling said first tube, a web integral
with and extending acrocs the interior of said boss to separate
the interior of the boss from the interior of said cylinder, a
tubular fitting formed integrally with said boss and projecting
laterally therefrom, said fitting communicating with the inte-
rior of said boss and adapted to receive a hose whereby bever-
age in the container flows out through said second tube, said
boas, said fitting and said hose, and a separate and elongated
one-way valve made of elastomeric material and disposed in
said outer end portion of said first tube, said valve having a
generally cylindrical body with a radial flange at its outer end,
said body extending longitudinally of said first tube and having
a slit which is adjacent its outer end and which opens to permit
air to flow only in the direction from said cylinder to the
container, the natural diameter of said radial flange of said
valve being greater than the internal diameter of said outer end
portion of said first tube whereby the flange is compressed
against the inside of said first tube to hold the valve in place as
said piston moves back and forth in said cylinder.
KEG TAPPING APPARATUS HAVING IMPROVED
RETAINER
John A. Vny, Orange, Coon^ aaiigiior to HofT-Sterens, Inc^
AMoaJa, Conii.
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,961
Irt. CLJ F16K 35/Oa- F16L 37/28
VS. a. 222—400.7 3 daimt
^
1. In a tapping apparatus for a keg having a neck, the Upping
apparatus including a tavern unit and a keg unit, the keg unit
including a generally cylindrical retainer for positioning within
the neck and having an outwardly opening coaxial bore, said
retainer having a plurality of coupling lugs projecting into the
bore, the tavern unit having a coupling member received
within the bore and coupled to the keg unit by engagement
with the coupling lugs, the improvement comprising said re-
tainer having a generally cylindrical body defining said bore
and made from one material, said body having an annular
bearing surface at its outer end and a plurality of notches
therein communicating with said bore, each of said notches
extending radially through said body and opening outwardly
through said bearing surface, each of said notches having a
dovetailed inner end portion converging outwardly toward
said bearing surface, a plurality of inserts equal in number to
said notches and made from another material harder than said
one material, each of said inserts received within and generally
complementing an associated one of said notches, each of said
inserts defining an associated one of said coupling lugs and a
portion of said bearing surface, and means for retaining said
inserts in integral assembly with said body.
4,436029
HIGH FLOW TILT VALVE WITH ACXXLERATING CAM
EQUIPPED MOVEABLE CUP
Walter C. Beard, Sooth Street, Mlddlebory, Conn. 06762
ContiBuatioa-in-|Mrt of Ser. No. 405.696, Aug. 5, 1982,
abandoned. This appUcation Oct 1, 1982, Ser. No. 432,298
Int a.3 B65D 83/14
VJS, CL 222-402 J2 21 Claima
1. A fluid dispensing valve structure for dispensing the
viscous contents of a pressurized tontainer comprising:
a mounting cup member sealingly securable to said pressur-
ized container and having communications with the pres-
surized contents of said container,
a resilient seal member carried within said mounting cup
member,
an elongated tubular nozzle means having a dispensing ori-
fice in one end thereof and having a second opposed and
outwardly flanged end extending through said mounting
cup member and supported in said mounting cup member
by said resilient seal member in a normally generally
straight upright extended position,
a moveable valve cup member reciprocally slidably carried
within said mounting cup member and normally biasable
against said resilient seal member to form a seal means for
normally sealing the contents of said container, said move-
able valve cup member being engageable with said second
end, said contents of said pressurized container being
dispensable when said one end is tiltably displaced relative
to its generally straight upright extended position by an
external deflecting operating force applied thereagainst,
thereby opening said seal means, said moveable valve cup
member including:
(A) a base portion extending across said second end of said
tubular nozzle means,
(B) rib means upstanding from said base portion for engag-
ing said resilient seal member peripherally of said tubu-
lar nozzle means,
(C) camming means centrally upstanding from said base
portion and slidably engagable with portions of said
second end of said tubular nozzle means when said one
end is so tiltably displaced, whereby deflection of said
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
607
moveable valve cup member occurs when said second
end slides along said camming means,
(D) guidance means for orienting said moveable valve cup
member relative to said mounting cup member for
stable reciprocal sliding movements longitudinally rela-
tive to said mounting cup member, and
(E) channel means defined by said moveable valve cup
member longitudinally extending therethrough adapted
for the laminar flow of a viscous fluid therethrough, the
interrelationship between said moveable valve cup
member, said tubular nozzle means, said resilient seal
member, and said mounting cup member being such
that a substantially unobstructed flow of said contents
through said valve structure can occur when said one
end is so tiltably displaced and also such that when said
tubular nozzle means is so tiltably displaced, said second
end first exerts said operating force against said base
portion and thereafter, as said tiltable displacement
increases, said second end next exerts said operating
force against said camming means.
4,436,230
ARRANGEMENT FOR PULSATION-FREE FEEDING OF
A LIQUID MEDIUM
Frank Hoftnann, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, asaignor to
Firma Walter Hoftnann Maschinenfabrik, Fed. Rep. of Gcr-
many
FUed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,336
Claimf priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 26,
1980, 3007116
Int a.3 F04B 21/02. 23/06
VS. CL 222—614 9 Claims
4,436,231
METHOD AND MACHINE FOR PRE-FORMING AND
TURNING GLOVES
James C. Kelly, and Charles H. Shurdca, both of Stark?lllc
Miss., aasigDors to StarkvUlc Tool A Die Company, Stark*
▼illcMias.
FUed Not. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,505
iBt a.3 A41H 43/00
VS. CL 223—40 45 Clalni
1. A method of pre-forming and turning gloves comprising:
(a) placing an unturned glove on five turning tubes having
resiliently mounted ends;
(b) mechanically centering the fingers of said glove on said
turning tubes by exerting pressure on the glove between said
fingers;
(c) pre-forming the glove by stretching the stitches at the tips
of the fingers of said glove by mechanically advancing five
turning rods into the tops of said fingers and said resiliently
mounted ends of said turning tubes while maintaining said
pressure between the fingers of said glove wherein the
thumb turning rod is mechanically actuated independently
of the remaining turning rods;
(d) removing said pressure from between the fingers of said
glove;
(e) mechanically removing pressure on said glove by removing
said thumb turning rod at a rate of removal independent of
the rate of removal of said remaining turning rods; and
(0 mechanically turning in a single operation all the fingers, the
thumb, the palm and wrist of said glove.
1. An apparatus for pulsation-free feeding of a liquid me-
dium, operable at a certain drive speed, comprising:
a supply container for a liquid medium;
a consuming device;
at least two sutically-operated feeding devices, each of
which has an inlet end communicating with said supply
container and a discharge end, as well as reciprocating
displacement means which has a feed stroke for generat-
ing a liquid flow out of said discharge end of each feeding
device, said feed strokes of said feeding devices overlap-
ping one another and producing equivalent liquid flows;
and
switch-over means for successively, simultaneously, and
alternately connecting said discharge ends of said feeding
devices with said consuming device and with said supply
container, respectively, during said feed strokes of said
feeding devices.
4,436,232
BRACKET FOR MOTORCYCLE LOCK
Peter L. Zane, S. Eoton, and Michael S. Zanc, Cambridge, both
of Mau., auignors to KBL Corporation, Boston, Mass.
FUed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 297,240
Int a.) B62J n/00
VS. a. 224-39 13 Claims
1. A bracket mountable to a support for holding a lock
having a U-shaped shackle and a cross-piece adapted to be
locked perpendicularly across the legs of said shackle, said
bracket comprising ,
(a) a rigid body portion dimensioned to generally span at
least between the legs of said shackle,
(b) said body portion being formed with at least one channel
extending along an edge thereof and adapted to receive a
leg of said shackle,
(c) clamp means mounted to said body portion and adapted
608
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
to engage said cross-piece to prevent movement of said 4,436,234
leg along said channel. FRAME FASTENER
George W. Kennedy, Pompano Beach, Fla., assignor to Senco
Southeast, Inc., Decatur, Ga.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,607
Int a.J B27F 7/34
U A CL 227—4 9 Oalms
4,436,233
BABY CARRIER
James B. HiU, and SaUy F. Hill, both of Rte. 2, Galena, Mo.
65656
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,682
Int. a.J A47D 13/02
U.S. a. 224—159 8 Qainu
1. Apparatus for carrying an infant on and by the body of an
adult comprising:
a seat means adapted to be located in proximity to the waist,
hip and stomach of an adult for conformable supporting
engagement with the legs, buttocks and lower back of the
infant;
a lower hip strap means attached to a lower portion of said
seat means and adapted to be located about the hips of an
adult for conformable supporting engagement with the
body of the adult;
an upper shoulder strap means attached to an up;>er portion
of said seat means and adapted to be located across the
back and over the shoulder and across the chest of the
adult for conformable supporting engagement with the
body of the adult; and
said seat means and said hip strap means and said shoulder
strap means being constructed and arranged to form said
seat means into a J shape configuration providing a front
flap portion connected to and extending downwardly
from said waist strap means and located between the
infant and the adult and a bottom portion located in the
crotch area of the infant and a back portion extending
upwardly across the back of the infant and being con-
nected to said shoulder strap means.
171
168 |I69
(d) mounting means operatively associated with said bracket
for mounting said bracket to said support.
1. In apparatus for fastening mitered joints of a frame com-
prising a clamp assembly for holding two frame elements in a
common plane and in angled abutment with each other to form
a mitered joint, means for moving said clamp assembly into
clamping engagement with the frame elements, support means
for supporting a fastener tool with its fastener discharge open-
ing at a position on one side of the common plane at a location
where the mitered joint is to be positioned and at an attitude to
discharge a fastener into the mitered joint, the improvement
comprising a brace member movable into engagement with the
frame elements at the mitered joint clamped by said clamp
assembly on the other side of the common plane, said brace
member including a foot with a surface movable into engage-
ment with both frame elements at the mitered joint to brace the
frame elements in a common plane, a stem connected at one of
its ends to said foot, a socket member movably mounted to said
stem, and said socket member and stem including means for
limiting the movement of said foot and stem with respect to
said socket member as the foot engages the frame elements,
means for moving said brace member into engagement with
the mitered joint, and control means responsive to the move-
ment of the stem and the socket member with respect to each
other as the foot engages the frame elements to discharge a
fastener from the fastener tool.
4,436,235
PORTABLE PNEUMATIC NAIL DRIVING APPARATUS
Francis A. Hebert, SchricTer, La., assignor to South Louisiana
Contractors Inc., Lafayette, La.
FUed Jun. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 386,311
Int a.3 B25C 1/02
U.S. a. 227—111 8 dainis
1. For use with a percussive air hammer having a chisel, a
nail driving apparatus comprising:
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
609
(a) a base member,
(b) guide means upstanding from each side of said base
member,
(c) cradle means movable along said guide means,
(d) means carried by said cradle means adapted to mount the
air hammer securely to said cradle means,
(e) nail barrel means into which both nails to be driven and
the chisel of the air hammer are to be received is posi-
tioned on and carried by said base member; and
(f) one of said guide means upstanding from said base mem-
ber forming a nail chute having means for delivering nails
singly to said barrel means.
4,436,236
FRONT GATE AND LATCH ASSEMBLY FOR THE
GUIDE BODY OF AN INDUSTRIAL FASTENER
DRIVING TOOL
WilUain T. Jobe, Bethel, Ohio, assignor to Senco Products, Inc.,
Cincinnati, Ohio
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,180
Int. Q\? B25L 1/04
U.S. a. 227—123 10 n«i-T
main valve being continuously exposed to air under preaure, a
remote valve assembly for actuating said tool, a connection
between said remote valve assembly and the upper side of said
main valve, said remote valve assembly in the inactive position
providing a connection between said air under pressure and the
upper side of said main valve, said upper side of said main
valve having a greater area than iu underside, a connection
between said return air chamber and said remote valve assem-
bly, and a selector valve in said last named connection, the
improvement wherein said remote valve assembly comprises a
1. A fastener driving tool of the type having a fastener-con-
taining magazine, a reciprocating fastener driver, a guide body
communicating with said magazine and having a front open-
ing, and an elongated front gate closing said front opening, said
gate being pivotally affixed at one end to said guide body and
being swingable between open and closed positions, said gate
in closed position and said guide body defming a drive track
for said fasteners and said fastener driver, characterized by a
latch plate extending transversely of the long axis of said gate
and being captively and slidably mounted on said gate, said
latch plate having end portions extending laterally to either
side of said gate, a spaced pair of locking blocks mounted on
said guide body to either side of said front opening, said lock-
ing blocks having opposed laterally extending lugs, said latch
plate being shiftable along said gate between a gate-locking
position near the free end of said gate wherein said latch plate
ends are in wedging engagement with said locking block lugs
and a gate release position free of said locking block lugs, and
a manually actuable over-center lever assembly to shift said
latch plate.
4,436,237
AUTOMATIC nRING SYSTEM FOR PNEUMATIC
TOOLS
George F. Vombcrger, and John P. Crutcher, both of Cincinnati,
Ohio, assignors to Senco Products, Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
FUed Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,772
Int a.) B25C 1/04; FOID 25/06
\}&, a. 227—130 10 Clalns
1. In a pneumatically actuated fastener applying tool of the
type having a tool body adapted to be connected to a supply of
air under pressure, a cylinder in said body, a piston and fastener
driver reciprocable in said cylinder, a return air chamber in
said body, a main valve for supplying air under preuure to said
piston for a working stroke, a portion of the underside of said
one-piece movable core shiftable between an idle position and
an active position, said selector valve in one position venting
said air under pressure from above said main valve through
said remote valve assembly and selector valve to atmosphere
to provide a working stroke upon each actuation of said re-
mote valve assembly, said selector valve in another position
providing a connection between said return air chamber
through said selector valve and remote valve assembly directly
to the upper side of said main valve to provide for auto-fire
operation of said tool as long u said remote valve assembly is
in said active position.
4,436,238
APPARATUS FOR ATTACHING FASTENER ELEMENTS
ONTO A GARMENT
Furaio Sckl, Toyaraa, Japan, assignor to Yoshlda Kogyo K K,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,610
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 13, 1979, 54-
172896[U]
Int. a^ A41H 37/04. 37/16
U,S. a 227-149 1 Claim
..«•
"^ff."
3« / M M
1. An apparatus for attaching a pair of fastener elemente onto
a garment, comprising:
(a) a frame having a Uble and a bored head;
(b) a stationary die mounted on said table in opposite relation
to said bored head;
(c) a plunger reciprocable mounted in said bored head for
movement along a path toward and away from said die
having a plunger head supporting a punch for coaction
with said die to attach the pair of fastener elementt onto
the garment from opposite sides thereof;
(d) first means on said bored head for releasably holding one
of the futener elements in said path in front of said punch.
610
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
said first means being adapted to be actuated by said
punch for releasing said one fastener element, and includ-
ing a substantially hollow cyUndrical holder slidably
mounted in said bored head in front of said plunger;
(e) second means on said die for releasably holding the other
fastener element in said path in front of said die, said
second means being responsive to coaction with said
holder for releasing the other fastener element; and
(0 third means acting between said plunger head and said
holder for frictionally retaining said holder on said third
means so as to enable said holder to move along with said
plunger head, said third means comprising a split bush
made of an elastic metal and fitted loosely over said
plunger head, said holder being compressively fitted over
said split bush so as to be held on said split bush under the
resilience of said split bush.
4,436,239
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING
SPIRAL PIPE
YoaUto Tsnyanu, Kltakjmihu; Yasumi Shlmazaki, Mimakata;
KazatoaU KaUta, Kitakynshu, and Toahio Hirokawa,
KlBdtia, all of Japan, aaaigDon to Nippon Steel Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,555
iBt CL^ B23K 31/06
U.S. a. 228—17 11 n«t—
7. A spiral pipe manufacturing apparatus which comprises: a
forming apparatus having three forming roll means disposed at
the apexes of a triangle and positioned along the circumference
of the pipe being manufactured for continuously bending a flat
strip into spiral form, one of said roll means being an internal
forming roll for contacting the inner surface of the strip and
pressing toward the outside of the pipe and the other two of
said forming roll means being outer rolls and respectively
being ahead of and behind said internal forming roll in the
direction of movement of the strip and for contacting the outer
surface of the strip and pressing it toward the inside of the pipe,
a welding apparatus provided behind said forming apparatus in
the direction of movement of the strip and along the circumfer-
ence of the pipe being manufactured for continuously welding
the seam of the spirally formed strip, a plurality of holding rolls
podtioned along the path of movement of the strip behind said
forming apparatus for engaging one side of the strip for hold-
ing the strip in a shape equal to the desired diameter of the
pipe, and a bending moment imparting roll means adjacent to
and behind the forming apparatus in the direction of movement
of the strip and ahead of the first of said holding rolls and on
the opposite side of the strip from said holding rolls and adjust-
ably movable in the direction of the pipe diameter for engaging
the strip for holding it in a position as it moves past said bend-
ing moment imparting roll means for making the diameter of
the q>traUy bent strip equal to the desired diameter of the
finiahed inpe.
4,436,240
METHOD FOR PLATING DIELECTRIC ELEMENTS IN
AN ISOLATOR AND FOR ASSEMBLING THE ISOLATOR
Jay H. Feinberg, Deoilcld, and TerraMC bowlca, Lincohi-
•hire, botii of DL, aadpMn to Zcaith Radio Corporation,
Glcnficw, m
Filed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,423
iBt a? C23C 3/02
U.S. CL 228-122 2 Clalnis
W«*«*«A^^J
«eiN( uuvf-
1. For an isolator comprising a hollow, cylindrical ferrite
bead sandwiched between a pair of hollow, cylindrical dielec-
tric elements having metal plated inner and outer circumfer-
ences and non-plated inner and outer circumferences, a method
for plating the end faces and for assembling the isolator within
a hollow connector shell, comprising:
sensitizing and activating the dielectric elements such that a
subsequently applied pUting will adhere thereto;
covering the end faces of the dielectric elements with a
non-conductive plating resist;
immersing the dielectric elements in a metal plating bath to
plate the inner and outer circumferences of the dielectric
elements;
sandwiching the ferrite bead between the plated dielectric
elements such that the dielectric elements abut the ferrite
bead without being bonded thereto;
providing a tubular conductor sized to fit within said dielec-
tric elements and ferrite bead;
surrounding the tubular conductor with a thin solder sheath;
inserting the tubular conductor with the solder sheath
thereon into the assembled dielectric elements and ferrite
bead;
surrounding the assembled dielectric elements and ferrite
bead with a second thin solder sheath;
inserting the assembled dielectric elements and ferrite bead
with the second solder sheath thereon into the connector
shell; and
heating the entire structure so as to solder the tubular con-
ductor to the plated inner circumferences of the dielectric
elements and to solder the connector shell to the plated
outer circumferences of the dielectric elements.
4,436,241
METAIXXRAMIC JOINT
Joaeph H. F. G. Upperta, Hengelo, Netiierlanda, aaiigDor to
HaieaeUcr B.V., Hengelo, NetiMrlaada
Continnation of Ser. No. 126,286, Mar. 3, 1980, ahandoBed. TUi
applicatioB Jan. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,438
Ciaima priority, appUcatioo Netherlanda, Mar. 5, 1979.
7901740
Int. a.) B23K 1/04: C04B 37/02
U.S. CL 228—124 7 ClaloH
1. A method for producing a vacuum-tight butt brazing joint
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
611
between a metallized ceramic pari and a stainless steel pari,
■aid method comprising the steps of
(a) shaping the end portion of the stainless steel part to be
joined with the metallized ceramic part such that it has a
height of from about 4 mm to about 12 mm and a maxi-
mum thickness along this height of 0.8 mm,
(b) annealing at least said shaped end portion of said stainless
steel part, and
(c) brazing said annealed and shaped end portion of said
stainless steel part directly to said meUllized ceramic part.
fold lines defming a top, left and right sides, a bottom and
front and rear ends for folding into a box;
(b) means having fold lines defining a central partition in said
box including an extended portion of said box stamping,
said extended portion when folded to form the partition
defining front and rear Ubs, the central area of the top
having front and rear slou for receiving said ubs, and the
central area of said bottom having front and rear slou for
receiving the protruding ubs from the top of another box
4,436,242
DESOLDERING TOOL AND METHOD OF
DESOLDERING LEADLESS COMPONENTS
Robert W. SUaler, Noblesrille, and Ronald E. McVety, Indian-
apolis, botii of Ind., aaaignort to RCA Corporation, New York.
N.Y.
FUed Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 331,088
Int a^ B23K 3/02: H05K 13/00
U.S. a. 228—264 IS Claims
13. A leadless component desoldering tool tip comprising:
a shaft having an end face;
a rod-like member having first and second faces at iu respec-
tive opposite ends, said member being heat conductively
and mechanically fued at iU first face to said end face of
said shaft; and
a rectangular member attached to said second face of said
member, the rectangular member comprising side walls
which define a recess of given shape, and having also a
planar base normal to said side walls defining the base of
said recess, said side walls being discontinuous to permit
the insertion in the discontinuity of a tool for removing
firom the recess a component that may be present therein.
IS. A method of removing a leadless component from a
printed circuit board comprising:
coating the recess of a recessed desoldering tip with solder;
heating said tip and solder until the solder is molten;
applying the tip to said component to provide sufficiently
close engagement between said molten solder and compo-
nent to create molecular attraction forces therebetween
and sufficient heat transfer from said tip to said component
to loosen said component from said board; and
displacing said tip relative to said printed circuit board to
remove said loosened component from said board.
4,436443
STORAGE FILE FOR SLIDES AND TISSUE BLOCKS
FMarlc L. Naaon, Van Nnya, and Walton B. CMna, Sheman
Oaka, both of Calif., aMigBon to Medical PackagiBg Corpora-
tion Santa Moaica, Calif.
FUed Sep. 27, 1982, Sar. No. 424,028
lat a.1 B65D 5/48
VS. a. 229—27 3 OaiaH
1. A storage file for slides and tissue blocks including, in
combination:
(a) a box stamping comprising initially a flat sheet having
to enable indexing of several of the boxes in a vertical
stack; and
(c) a tray stamping comprising initially a flat sheet having
fold lines defining a floor, left and right sides, and front
and rear ends for folding into a tray receivable in said box
whereby a storage file for slides and tissue blocks can be
economically formed from said box, partition and tray
stampings, and whereby said stampings in their initial flat
configuration can be compactly stored and shipped.
4,436,244
CARTON BLAP«W WTTH INTEGRAL HANDLE
Charles K. Morris, 529 Smitiu Rd., Tenpleatowe, Victoria,
3081. Australia
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 232,046, Jan. 23, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcatioa Jul. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 394,941
lat a^ B65D 5/46
U.S. Q. 229—52 B 6 Clains
1. A carton blank for forming a carton of square or rectangu-
lar crou-section therefrom, wherein said carton blank is
adapted to be folded and joined to form a carton which is
provided at one end with two pairs of opposed integral flaps,
the first of said pairs of flaps being adapted to overlap and close
off said carton end when folded thereover, the second of said
opposed pairs of flaps each reducing in width from itt connec-
tion with the carton end to form narrow extended portions,
whereby said narrow extended portions may be joined when
said second opposed pair of flaps is folded flat over the carton
end to form a composite handle member which lies generally
flat over the carton end, covering and generally following the
direction of a line joining the sides of the carton end to which
said second opposed pair of flaps are attached and bisecting
612
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
said carton end, said composite handle member having a carry
handle portion opposite ends of which join the broader sec-
tions of said second opposed pair of flaps, said carry handle
portion having a width substantially less than the edges of the
carton end to which said second opposed pair of flaps are
attached, one flap of said first pair of opposed integral flaps
including an integral strip with means for facilitating severing
of said strip therefrom, said one flap being dimensioned so that
said strip underlies said carry handle portion when said first
and second pairs of opposed flaps are folded down over said
carton end.
stock, said straight stock intersecting with said angle stock
generally at the center of said angle stock and at right angles
4,436,245
PNEUMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM, ESPEOALLY FOR
VEHICLE HEATING SYSTEMS
Manfred Nonnennuuio, Schwieberdingen, and Steffi Deuachle,
Fellback, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, anignora to Siiddeut-
Kbe Kiihlerfibrik Julius Fr. Bchr GmbH A Co. KG, Stutt-
gart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Scr. No. 235,662, Feb. 18, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 87,984, Oct. 25,
1979, abandoned. This application Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No.
372,545
Int a.3 F24F 13/10
VS. CL 236—49 10 Claims
1. In a temperature control apparatus including at least one
temperature sensor means for generating a temperature signal,
a controller means for generating a pump control signal as a
function of said temperature signal, pump means for generating
a fluid pressure in a conduit as a function of said pump control
signal, and at least one actuator means connected to said con-
duit for positioning a control element located to control the
flow of heat-carrying medium in the apparatus as a function of
the pressure in said conduit, the improvement comprising:
a restriction means in said conduit for continuously venting
said conduit to atmosphere; and
said controller means continuously generating pump control
signals to continuously operate said pump means, once the
system is powered, at selected capacities to maintain a
pressure in said conduit sufficient to operate said actuator
means to position said control element to a desired posi-
tion with said restriction means continuously venting said
conduit.
4,436,246
TRACnON DEVICES
Dtfid S. Goldsmith, 420 Park Ave., Highland Park. 01. 60035
FUed Aug. 3, 1979, Ser. No. 35,920
Int a.} EOIB 23/00
VS. a 238—14 1 Oairn
1. A traction device to serve as a traction base for a drive
wheel of an automotive vehicle, comprising in combination, a
length of ferrous metal straight stock, ferrous metal washers
situated at points along the length of said straight stock in
surrounding relation thereto, a section of ferrous metal angle
thereto, said straight stock, angled stock, and washers being
welded together so as to constitute a unitized whole.
4,436,247
FUEL INJECnON NOZZLE AND HOLDER ASSEMBLY
FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
Jiro Akagi, Oyama, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Komatsu Seisakusho, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 367,985
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 29, 1981, 56-
160228[U]
Int Q.^ F02M 61/08
VS. CL 239—533.7 6 Claims
1. A device for the injection of fuel under pressure into a
combustion chamber of an internal combustion engine, com-
prising:
(a) a body having formed therein a fuel inlet for admitting
pressurized fuel, a storage chamber for receiving the
incoming pressurized fuel, and a spray orifice for dis-
charging in the form of droplets the pressurized fuel from
the storage chamber
(b) a first spring within the body;
(c) a needle valve, including a stem, within the body for
covering and uncovering the spray orifice, the needle
valve being normally held in a position to cover the spray
orifice under the bias of the first spring and adapted to be
acted upon by the pressurized fuel in the storage chamber
for uncovering the spray orifice against the bias of the first
spring;
(d) a check valve slidably fitted over the stem of the needle
valve and acted upon by the first spring for blocking
communication between the fuel inlet and the storage
chamber upon admission of each required amount of
pressurized fuel into the storage chamber;
(e) a second spring within the body;
(0 a yieldable abutment disposed opposite to an end of the
needle valve, the abutment being biased by the second
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
613
spring toward the needle valve and normally retained a
prescribed distance away therefrom; and
(g) whereby the needle valve is unseated to uncover the
spray orifice only against the force of the first spring when
the fuel introduced into the storage chamber is at rela-
tively low pressure, and against the resultant of the forces
of the first and the second springs when the fuel in the
storage chamber is at higher pressure.
4,436,248
ADJUSTABLE SHEARBAR APPARATUS
Curtis H. Undblom, New Holland; H. Ne?in Lausch, Denver,
and Edward H. Priepkc, Lancaster, all of Pa., assignors to
Sperry Corporation, New Holland, Pa.
FUed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,654
Int a.i B02C 18/16
VS. a. 241—101.7 5 Claims
1. In a forage harvester, adjustable shearbar apparatus com-
prising,
spaced opposing side sheets,
an elongated shearbar having opposing sides,
lower support means for supporting the shearbar, said lower
support means being an elongated support member ex-
tending between and connected to said side sheets and
extending substantially along the length of said shearbar,
upper support means connected to said side sheets for urging
said shearbar against said lower support means adjacent
opposite ends of said shearbar,
a pair of levers pivotally connected to said lower support
means, said levers each having first and second portions
disposed on said opposing sides of said shearbar,
means for securely clamping said first and second portions
against said opposing sides of said shearbar, and
means for pivoting said levers and moving said shearbar
linearly relative to said lower support means, said means
for pivoting including adjustment members coupled di-
rectly to said levers.
4,436,249
WINDING SYSTEM
Jack Santa Lucia, N. Haledon, and Kenneth Trapp, West New
York, both of N J., assignors to Independent Maching Com-
pany, Paterson, N J.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Scr. No. 344,807
Int a.J B65H 54/02. 54/40. 54/54
VS. a. 242—18 R 3 Claims
1. A winding system including:
frame means;
power driven shaft means mounted on said frame means;
a work fluid source for providing work fluid at a selected
variable pressure;
a mandrel carrier block mounted for rotation;
mandrel means mounted on said mandrel carrier block for
rotation therewith and including wound material support
means for receiving material being wound;
work fluid controlled drive coupling means connected to
said work fluid source for providing a selectively deter-
mined variable maximum drive torque to the carrier block
from the power driven shaft means in accordance with the
pressure of work fluid from said work fluid source; and
wherein said mandrel means comprises;
a coupling disc removably connected to a side of said driven
mandrel carrier block for coaxial rotation therewith;
a hollow mandrel sleeve extending outwardly in cantilever
manner with respect to said coupling disc;
pivotal latch means mounted to extend outwardly of said
mandrel sleeve for engaging a latch surface of spool means
axially positionable over said mandrel sleeve;
ejector shaft means mounted in said mandrel sleeve for axial
reciprocation between an outer latch portion and an inner
latch release position in which a portion of said ejector
shaft engages said latch member to pivot said latch mem-
ber downwardly out of latching position to permit the
removal of a spool from said mandrel sleeve; and
manually operable handle means on an outer end of said
ejector shaft for axially moving said ejector shaft.
4,436,250
DRIVE UNIT FOR A TRANSPORT CABLE
Herbert Becker, Coburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
MetaUwerk Max Brose GmbH A Co., Coburg, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,560
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 20,
1980, 8022252[U]
Int a.J B65H 75/44. 75/48
VS. a. 242—54 R 14 Claims
1. Drive unit for winding and unwinding a transport cable,
such as for use with a safety belt employed in a motor vehicle
in moving the safety belt between the engaged and released
conditions, comprising a housing, a motor-driven take-up roll
mounted within said housing, said take-up roll having an annu-
lar surface on which said transport cable can be wound around
a winding axis with said annular surface encircling and facing
radially outwardly from the winding axis so that the annular
surface extends circumferentially and in the axial direction of
the winding axis, a casing spaced radially outwardly from and
enclosing said annular surface and having a radially inwardly
circumferentially extending surface facing toward said radially
outwardly facing annular surface, said radially outwardly
facing annular surface having a first end and a second end
spaced apart in the axial direction of said winding axis, said
transport cable is secured at the first end of said radially out-
wardly facing surface to said take-up roll, said housing having
an opening through which said transport cable extends out of
said housing with said opening spaced in the axial direction of
the winding axis from the first end of said radially outwardly
facing annular surface and being closer to the second end
1040 O.C.— 24
614
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
thereof, said tnmsport cable contacts said radially outwardly
facing annular surface of said take-up roll when said cable is
wound into said housing and contacts said radially inwardly
facing surface of said casing when said cable in unwound out of
said housing, said radially inwardly facing surface is fnisto-
conical for at least a portion of its dimension extending in the
axial direction of the winding axis with the smaller diameter
end of said radially inwardly facing surface located opposite
the nrst end of said radially outwardly facing annuUu- surface
and the larger diameter end spaced axially therefrom toward
the second end of said annular surface, said housing having a
cable guide surface thereon facing into the space between said
which is variable in accordance with a predetermined
function; said first drive means comprising tape measuring
means for measuring the length of tape fed by said first
drive means and means for comparing said length of said
tape with said preselected amount;
second drive means for driving said hub so as to wind tape
fed by said first drive means onto said hub; and
tension monitoring means for maintaining at a predeter-
mined level substantially constant tension on said Upe as
said /tape is fed by said first drive means and wound onto
said hub said second drive means, said tension monitoring
means including (1) a pivotally mounted dancer arm for
supporting the tape as said tape is fed by said first drive
means and wound onto said hub by said second drive
means, said dancer arm being mounted so that iu pivotal
position varies with the tension on said Upe, and (2) means
for adjusting said second drive means responsively to
changes in the position gf said dancer arm so as to vary the
speed at which said tape is wound onto said hub in a
direction and by an amount which will maintain the Upe
wound onto said hub at a substantially constant tension-
and
means responsive to said comparison between the length of
Upe measured by said Upe measuring means and said
preselected amount for disabling said first and second
drive means when said length of Upe measured by said
Upe measuring means equals said preselected amount.
radiaUy inwardly and radially outwardly facing surfaces, said
radially inwardly facing surface having the larger diameter end
thereof merging into said cable guide surface, said radially
inwardly facing surface having a surface part adjacent to and
spaced in the axial direction of said winding axis from said
cable guide surface with said surface part extending trans-
versely of the axial direction of and circumferentially relative
to said winding axis and said surface part projecting radially
mwardly toward said radiaUy outwardly facing annular sur-
face from said radially inwardly facing surface extending be-
tween said surface part and the larger diameter end of said
radially inwardly facing surface.
4,436,251
TAPE WINDING SYSTEM
JoMph p. Deyeaw, Walpole, Mim^ Davkl Smer, Northport,
N.Y^ aod Richard G. Bcrabe, Marlboro, Mav^ MdgBon to
Kiog iBstrnmcBt Corporatioii, Wcstboro, Mmi.
Filed Aag. 6, 1981, Scr. No. 290,417
Int aJ B65H 59/3S, 77 /(Xi; H02P 5/46
MS, CL 242—56 R 14 ,
4,436,252
TENSION SHAFT FOR WINDING FRAMES
Wolfgang BarUe, Zma Bohrtnnn 3, 3250 Hamcln 1, and Dieter
Opitz, Ringstraaie 32, 8671 Forbau, both of Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Ang. 26, 1982, Scr. No. 411,788
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Ans. 28.
1981, 8125169[U] ^' * *
lat a^ B23B 31/40. 5/22; B65H 75/18
UA a 242-72 B 13 Claim
JO
I 1 I — I \ I .
Twk\ \ \ \ \ \ i] T\r7\
-m — 1 — 1 — I — I — 1 —
1. In a tension shaft for a winding machine including a cen-
tral shaft piece for winding widths of sheet material thereon
with a Hexible tube wound about the outside of the central
shaft piece, the outside diameter of the central shaft piece being
variable by inflating or deflating the flexible tube, a valve for
feeding or discharging air into the interior of the central shaft
piece and an air inlet to the tube for coupling the interior of the
central shaft piece with the interior of the flexible tube, the
improvement which comprises an air inlet to the tube compris-
ing a screw having a shaft and a screw head, an axial opening
extending from the end of the screw shaft along the screw
shaft, at least one radial hole emanating from the axial opening
to the exterior of the screw shaft, an intermediate piece dis-
posed within the tube, the intermediate piece adapted to re-
J« JlS!f^J«[J"^* *''* "^^ ' '"*'*• "^ •PP'^tus ceive the screw shaft and formed with at least one radial hole
compnang, m combmatum: for cooperating with the radial hole in the screw shaft, the
f«t dnve me«» for feedmg from a supply of said Upe a intermeSu pice cUmp^T ^ in^orTXTS ^
preselected, programmable amount of said upe at a speed fS^^)^ t^A>. L,^ o^^^"^^"^^!^
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
613
4,436,253
DEVICE FOR CLAMPING ONE TERMINAL END OF A
TAPE IN A TAPE REEL
Koji Wttaaaba, I^laawa, Japaa, aaaivsor to NIFCO, lae^
YokohaoM, Japan
FUad No?. 16, 1981, Sar. No. 322,009
OaiBH priority, appUcatioa Japan, No?. 26, 1980, 55-
168233[U]
Int a.i B6SH 75/28
MS. CL 242—74.1 8 Claims
220 2W
^ ""4
n
1. The combination of a Upe reel hub and a device for
clamping the terminal end portion of a Upe within a recess
defined within said Upe reel hub, comprising:
fint fastening means mounted upon said Upe reel hub;
a base member defined upon said device;
a pair of legs extending substantially radially inwardly from
said base member toward said Upe reel hub;
second fastening means defuied upon said pair of legs of said
device for operatively engaging said first fastening means
of said Upe reel hub; and
a bridge member connecting the radially inner ends of said
pair of legs,
the radial distance defmed between said device base member
and said bridge member being greater than the effective
radial depth of said recess so as to cause circumferential
expansion of said clamping device legs and said second
fastening means, in response to radial contraction of said
clamping device as a result of engagement between said
clamping device bridge member and the radially inner
portion of said hub defining said recess as said clamping
device is radially inserted into said Upe reel hub recess.
whereby said second fastening means of said device opera-
tively engage said first fastening means of said hub.
carried by the gear casing, hollow bail means open at both
ends, means roUUbly mounting the bail means on said gear
casing, spool means, means routably and reciprocally mount-
ing the spool means concentrically in said bail means with the
spool means suitably projecting from both ends thereof for
reciprocation and roution of said spool means within said bail
means and for roution of said bail means about said spool
means, spool gear means, means reciprocally mounting the
spool gear means on said spool means for possible engagement
with said crank means, bail gear means, means reciprocally
mounting the bail gear means on said bail means for possible
engagement with said crank means, spool stop means, means
mounting the spool stop means on said gear casing for possible
engagement with said spool gear means, bail stop means, means
mounting the bail stop means on said gear casing for possible
engagement with said bail gear means, drive selector means,
means routably mounting one end of the drive selector means
on said spool gear means and the other end on said bail gear
means, means reciprocally mounting said drive selector means
on said gear casing with poriion of former suitably projecting
through a side wall of latter; said drive selector means having
first and second reciprocal positions relative to said gear cas-
ing, respectively closer to and farther from said bail meaiu;
whenever said drive selector means is in said first position, said
bail gear means is engaged with and held sutionary by said bail
stop means while said spool gear means is engaged with said
crank means, to be routed by said crank means in predeter-
mined direction, with said spool means, when said crank means
is routed in conventional direction; and whenever said drive
selector means is in said second position, said spool gear means
is engaged with and held routionally sutionary by said spool
stop means while said bail gear means is engaged with said
crank means, to be routed by said crank means opposiu to said
predetermined direction, with said bail means, when said crank
means is routed in conventional direction.
4,436,254
SPINNING REEL FOR FLY-FISHING
Carl N. Nonnann, 2332 Barcelona Way, Sacramento, Calif.
95825
Filed Apr. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 367,096
Int a? AOIK 89/01
MS. CL Ul-^2\ R 1 Claiai
4,436,255
SEATBELT RETRACTOR
Ka^i Matsui, Higasliikanio, and Fuminori Teraoka, NishikaoM,
both of Japan, aMignon to Kabnshiki Kalaha Tokai-Rika*
DenM-Seiaaknaho, Aichi, Japan
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,707
dainis priority, application Japan, Jan. 20, 1981, 56-7152[U]
Int a.} A62B 35/02; B65H 75/48
MS. a. 242—107.4 A 14 OaiaM
r'
1. A fishing reel comprising a gear casing, crank means
1. A seatbelt retractor for retracting a passenger retraining
seatbelt, comprising:
a takeup shaft around which the seatbelt is wound by a
biasing force;
locking means for stopping the belt-unwinding roution of
said takeup shaft;
acceleration sensing means for sensing a vehicular emer-
gency situation and operating said locking means; and
cam means responsive to unwinding of the seatbelt more
than a predetermined value from said takeup shaft for
operating said locking means to stop belt unwinding rota-
tion of said takeup shaft.
616
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,256
REEL SHAFT/REEL HUB FimNG APPARATUS
SinldiJ Saltoa« Tokyo, Japan, anignor to Olympus Optical Co.,
LtiL, Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,416
Oaiau priority, application Japan, Jon. 4, 1980, 55-77523rui:
Jun. 4. 1980. 55-77525[U]
Int a.5 G03B 1/04: GllB 15/32. 23/04
U A a 242-200 12 dainu
gage a corresponding one of said reel shafts, each of the
idlers including an idler shaft having a lower end or side
face arranged for frictional contact with the flywheel, so
that the support lever rocks correspondingly to the rotat-
J7
COKTSOL
MEMS
\B
'? ^=X
16 44 23
IjimimmitiimiiiiM
^///y^^
ifm\
21
ing direction of the capstan shaft by the frictional force
between the flywheel and the idler shafts and one of the
idlers on the support lever engages the corresponding reel
shaft to drive the reel shaft.
1. A reel shaft/reel hub fitting apparatus for fitting a reel hub
of a tope cassette on a reel shaft of a magnetic recording tope
running apparatus, said reel shaft/reel hub fitting apparatus
comprising:
at least one engaging projection mounting on the outer
circumferential surface of said reel shaft and having two
side faces which edge away from each other along the
circumferential direction as said side faces extend in the
direction in which said reel shaft is fitted in said reel hub;
locating means disposed on said reel hub and engaging said
reel shaft along the axis of rototion thereof when said reel
hub is fitted on said reel shaft, thereby defining the posi-
tion of said reel hub relative to said reel shaft along said
axis of rototion;
said locating means comprising a wall inwardly projecting
from said reel hub in the radial direction thereof;
said reel shaft being provided with a plurality of protrusions
projecting along said axis of rototion of said reel shaft so as
to abut against said inwardly projecting wall of said reel
hub; and at least one engaged projection formed on the
inner circumferential surface of said reel hub and adapted
to engage at least one of said side faces of an engaging
projection of said reel shaft, said at least one engaging
projection being located within the locus of rototion of
said two side faces of said engaging projection when the
position of said reel hub relative to said reel shaft along
said axis of rototion is defined by said locating means.
4,436,257
REEL DRIVING METHOD FOR TAPE RECORDER AND
A DRIVING MECHANISM FOR ITS PRACnCE
Akira Osanai, Tokyo, Japan, aaalgnor to Olympus Optical Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 329,031
Claims priority, appUcation Japmi, Dec. 15, 1980, 55-176876
Int CL^ G03B 1/04; GllB W32
M&. a 242-201 6 Claims
2. A reel driving mechanism for a tope recorder including a
pair of red shafts and a capstan shaft which can be reversed in
rototion, comprising:
a flywheel fixed coaxially to the capstan shaft,
a rockable support lever arranged over the flywheel for
rocking movement about a rocking center of the support
lever, and
a pair of idlers provided on the support lever on both sides
of the rocking center of the support lever and engaging
the capstan shaft to be driven by the capstan shaft,
wherein each of the idlen is arranged to selectively en-
4,436,258
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR
SIMULTANEOUSLY PACKAGING LINEAR BUNDLES
OF FILAMENTS INTO INDIVIDUAL PACKAGES
Robert R. Jackson, Toledo, and Jerome P. Klink, Granville,
both of Ohio, assignors to Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corpora-
tion, Toledo, Ohio
FUed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,087
Int a.3 B65H 54/02. 54/20
U.S. a. 242-18 G 9 claims
-m^
1. The method of simultaneously winding linear elements
into more than one package including advancing a plurality of
linear elements, forming the advancing linear elements into
more than one wound package each rototed at the same angu-
lar speed, intermittently supplying indications of the size of the
packages being wound at a normal increase in the sizes of the
several packages, and indicating a deviation in said normal
increase in size of any of the packages when any of the pack-
ages have a predetermined lesser size than the largest package.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
617
4,436,259
APPARATUS FOR THE CONTROLLED ADVANCE AND
RETRACnONOF A FLEXIBLE PAY-OUT CONNECnON
nXED TO A SATELLITE BODY
GUnther Schmidt Immenstaad, and Carl-Christian Etzler, Frie-
drichshafen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Dor-
nler System GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 287,805
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 9,
1980,3038095
Int. a.^ B64G 1/3%
U.S. a. 244—3.1 5 Claims
spherically-shaped concave portion therein sized to re-
ceive said spherically-shaped convex portion of said first
optical component therein, both said optical components
having the same index of refaction;
said first optical component and said second optical compo-
nent being mounted with respect to one another for rela-
tive movement therebetween;
means interposed between said first optical component and
said second optical component for allowing said move-
ment to take place, said means for allowing movement
between said optical components being in the form of an
air bearing; and
means operably connected to at least said first of said optical
components for moving said first optical component with
respect to said second optical component;
whereby said beam of optical energy directed toward said
flat surface of said first optical component exits said flat
surface of said second optical component as said first and
second optical components move with respect to one
another.
1. In an apparatus comprising a spin-imparted satellite body
having a pay-out cable fixed thereto with a pay-out means
mounted on said pay-out cable,
the improvement which comprises at least one groove
means at the periphery of the satellite body to receive the
pay-out cable, and at least one elastic holding means to
hold the pay-out cable at the groove opening.
4,436,260
OPTICAL SCANNER FOR USE IN CONnNED AREAS
Edward J. Donelan, Andover, Mass., assignor to The United
SUtes of America as represented by the Secretary of the Air
Force, Washington, D.C.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,785
Int a.J F41G 7/22: G02B 27/17
U.S. a. 244—3.16 15 Claims
4,436,261
V/STOL AIRCRAFT
KoUo KolefT, 1440 County Line Rd., Alden, N.Y. 14004
Continuation of Ser. No. 142,914, Apr. 23, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,250
Int. Ci} B64C 15/00
U.S. a. 244—51 9 Claims
11. In an elongated, slender missile having a laser tracker
system for emitting a beam of optical energy of preselected
wavelength, a nose cone, a window within said nose cone
transparent to said preselected wavelength, the improvement
therein being in the form of an optical scanner positioned
adjacent said window and optically aligned between said laser
tracker system and said window, said optical scanner compris-
ing:
a movable prism assembly, said movable prism assembly
including a first optical component having a flat surface
on one side thereof and a spherically-shaped convex por-
tion adjacent said flat surface, and a second optical com-
ponent having a flat surface on one side thereof and a
1. A V/STOL heavier than air aircraft, including:
an aircraft body;
a thrust producing member;
means for mounting said member exteriorly of said body in
spaced relation thereto and constraining said member for
pivotal movement, with respect to said body, about a
single axis;
an exterior rigid housing spaced from said body and fixed for
movement with said thrust producing member, said hous-
ing formed substantially in the shape of two smooth based
dishes substantially in the shape of two partial circular
conoids having their bases in abutting engagement, the
outer surface of each of said conoids being maxially
spaced from said axis at its respective geometric center
and being progressively and gradually spaced closer and
closer to said axis from a surface thereof that is at least
adjacent said geometric center to the radial extremity
thereof to provide a closed hollow chamber therebetween
and being completely synunetrical about all lines which
intersect said axis and which are contained within the
plane of movement of said exterior housing in all pivotal
positions thereof.
618
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
WINDBLACT HEAD PROTECTOR FOR USE DURING
PILOT EJECTION FROM AN AIRCRAFT
Robert J. Caudngi. Hcrwm BcMk, CiUf^ Misiior to TTie
Uattod States of AMrici M reprcwntod by the SMratary of
the Air Force, WagUagtoii, D.C.
Filed Apr. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 370,«3
lat a.} B64D 25/04
UAa2U-122AG ,ctatas
1. A windblast head protector for use with an ejection seat of
an aircraft comprising:
a tubular frame, said frame having a canopy thereon and
means shdably connected to said frame for supporting said
frame on top of a hehnet of a crew member positioned
within said ejection seat when said head protector is in a
fully deployed condition;
means connected between said frame and said ejection seat
for providing support for said frame and for contacting
the sides of said helmet when said head protector is in said
fully deployed condition; and
means operably connected to said frame for securely posi-
tioning said frame against said ejection seat in said fully
deployed condition and for moving said frame from a
stowed position within a pilot chute compartment of said
ejection seat to said fully deployed condition.
4,436,263
AERODYNAMICALLY CONTOURED, LOW DRAG
WING, ENGINE AND ENGINE NACELLE
COMBINATION
Louli B. Gratier, Seattle, aiMl Walter B. GUlette, IiHMiiiah, both
of Wash., aMlgnon to The Boeing Compuiy, Seattle, Waih.
CoBtlBiiatloB of Ser. No. 000,6M, Jan. 3, 1979, abudoocd. TTiii
appUcatkM Dec 22, 1900, Ser. No. 218,829
lat a^ B64C 1/38; B64D 29/02
VS. a. 244-130 j4 ctaim.
having a forward section extending forwardly of the
leading edge and a rear section positioned rearwardly of
the leading edge, said nacelle having an inboard side
surface portion and an outboard side surface portion,
(c.) an engine mounted in said nacelle,
(d.) said airfoU being characterized in that in a situation
where the airfoU would be passing in flight through said
airstream at the design speed, but without aerodynamic
mterference from other objecU in proximity thereto, said
airfoil would create in said airstream an airstream flow
pattern having a plurality of streamlines which approach
the leading edge and pass under the airfoil, with the airfoil
creating in said airstream flow pattern a critical zone,
which zone includes a general area in said aintream flow
proximate said airfoil, where at least one of the following
conditions occur:
1. a local pressure coefficient in said airstream flow has an
absolute magnitude greater than O.OS,
2. said airstream flow about said airfoU is supersonic.
(e) said nacelle having a critical surface region which com-
prises the nacelle side surface portions adjacent an airfoU
portion that sweeps Uterally and forwardly from the
nacelle,
(0 said nacelle having a critical contour area which com-
prises an area where any portion of the critical surface
region is within said critical zone,
(g) the critical contour area of the nacelle being in substan-
tial contour alignment with the streamlines immediately
adjacent the critical contour area to therd>y reduce inter-
ference between said nacelle and said airfoU, which
streamlines form a stream sheet, said critical contour area
havmg a forward portion forward of the leading edge and
sloping rearwardly in a direction slanted from said main
flow direction in a direction of rearward sweep of said
airfoU, said critical contour area having a rear portion
rearward of said leading edge sloping rearwardly in a
direction from said main flow direction also in the direc-
tion of rearward sweep of the airfoU,
(h) other nacelle surface portions which are not included in
the critical contour area beuig coUectively a non-critical
contour area, said non-critical contour area having at least
a substantial portion thereof shaped to conform to config-
uration requirements of said engine, with at least part of
the substantial portion of the non-critical contour area
departing from substantial contour alignment with adja-
cent streamlines.
--«» te
4,436,264
FLYING DEVICE
Elmer B. Bruinfleld, 1136 W. Long. StephenTiUe, Tex. 76401
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,491
iBt aj B64C 3J/06
UA a. 244-153 R ^cUdm
1. In an aircraft having a longitudinal axis and designed for
flight at a predetermined design speed through a main air-
stream having a main flow direction, a combination of an
airfoU. engine and engine naceUe. said combination compris-
ing:
(a.) an airfoU having a leading edge, a traUing edge, and a
lower aerodynamic surface, said airfoU having a predeter-
mined (weep) sweep angle of at least 10', and having an
outboard end and an inboard end,
(b.) a naceUe mounted direcdy adjacent to said airfoU at a
location below and forwardly of said airfoU, said naceUe
1. A kite fabricated of a Ughtweight material and comoris-
mg: "^
an annular body having a circular outer periphery, at least a
generally circular inner periphery, and a relatively thin
height with respect to its radial extent;
the annular body having a flat unobstructed top surface and
a bottom surface which is part of the surface of a sphere;
a bar element lying on a diameter of the annular body and
secured at its ends to the annular body at said inner periph-
ery;
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
619
the bar element limited in height to confinement between the
plane of said top surface and the surface of the sphere;
the bar element being structured so as to direcUy accommo-
date the kit tow line at a forward location; and
rudder means disposed at the traUing location of the annular
body and in symmetry with said diameter.
1. A cable socket providing traction relief adapted to be
mounted in an opening formed in a wall of a housing for elec-
trical components, comprising:
a tubular grommet insertable into an opening in a housing
waU and including a grommet head for supporting the
grommet on a housing wall;
an inner socket portion coaxiaUy situated within said tubular
grommet so as to be twistable therein around a common
axis of the grommet and inner portion, said inner portion
having a passage opening for receiving a cable and includ-
ing a head portion and a flexible extension for encompau-
ing a cable passing through said passage opening, said
flexible extension having a first end connected to said head
portion and a free end region spaced from said head por-
tion;
means for securing said free end region of said flexible exten-
sion of said inner socket portion to said tubular grommet
so that said free end region is prevented from twisting
with respect to said grommet when said inner socket
portion is twisted within said gronmiet; and
means for locking said inner socket portion to said grommet
against rotation therein,
wherd>y upon twisting said inner portion with respect to
said grommet with a cable received in said passage open-
ing and said free end region of said flexible extension
secured to said grommet by said securing means so u to be
prevented from twisting with respect to said grommet,
said flexible extension is twisted to compress against the
cable to hold the same in the socket.
4,436,266
CONDUIT SUPPORT DEVICE
TboauH W. GerdiBi, 5809 HawUM- FMbs Rd., St Loois, Mo.
63129
Filed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,551
Int a> n6L 3/08
VS, a 248—74 R 23
4,436,265
CABLE SOCKET WITH TRACnON REUEF FOR THE
HOUSINGS OF ELECTRIC MACHINES
Hans Simon, Brochbauaencr Straasc, 5463 Unkel am Rhein, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,241
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 12,
1980 3018119
lat a.) H02G i/;& HOIB 1 7/26; F16L 5/00
VJS. a. 248—56 16 Claims
1. A conduit support device operable in all angular orienta-
tions for holding and supporting a conduit member therein,
said device comprising a frame member having a pair of later-
ally spaced leg members extending therefrom defining a space
therebetween, closure means including a closure member and
journal means pivotally attaching the closure member to one of
said leg members adjacent the free end thereof for controlling
access to the space defined between said leg members, said
closure member being rotatably movable about the journal
means between a closed position restricting access to the space
between said leg memben and an open position angularly
related thereto to open the space between said leg members for
admitting a conduit member therebetween, said closure mem-
ber having a first portion movable between the open position
substantially in alignment with the leg member to which it is
pivotally attached and the closed position substantiaUy normal
thereto extending between said leg members, said closure
member having a second portion cngageable with the leg
portion ui the closed position thereof to limit movement
thereof, said closure member being movable to its open posi-
tion in response to a force exerted thereagainst, said force
being applied in a direction towards the space defined between
said leg members, and yieldable means biasing said closure
member towards the closed position thereof
4,436,267
HOSE HANGER
Harold O. Eada, Paritefsbars, W. Va^ and RoaaM R. Fowler,
CoolTUle, Ohio, aHigaort to O. Abms Co^ Parkarabarg, W.
Va.
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,374
lat a.i A62C 23/04; B05B 15/06
VS. a. 248—75 12 OaiaM
1. In a hanger adapted to be fixedly attached to a mounting
wall for supporting a length of hose in coUed formation which
comprises a one-piece body molded of plastic material, said
body including an upright mounting wall engaging section
adapted to be fixedly attached to a mounting waU, a hose coU
supporting section extending horizontaUy from the bottom of
said mounting waU engaging section and a hose coU retaining
section extending upwardly from the horizontaUy outwardly
extending end of said hose coU supporting section, the im-
provement which comprises:
said hose coU supporting section including spaced thin wall
saddle portions defining hose coU engaging surfaces fac-
ing generaUy upwardly and disposed generaUy in an arcu-
620
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
ate plane and thin wall channel means integrally intercon-
nected between said spaced thin wall saddle portions
disposed below the adjacent hose coil engaging surfaces
thereof and opening generally in a direction toward the
same,
said mounting wall engaging section including spaced thin
wall side portions defining hose coil retaining surfaces
disposed in upwardly extending relation with respect to
associated hose coil engaging surfaces of said saddle por-
tions and facing generally in a direction thereabove and
evenly over the wedges despite misaUgnment between the
load to be carried and the floor upon which the base may
be rested.
M36,269
DISPENSER SUSPENSION MEANS EMPLOYING
PLANAR SPRING-LOADED DETENT
Robert S. Dlrkaiiig, Ondiuiati* and Dak E. Barker, Hunilton,
both of Ohio, aadgnon to The Procter it Gamble Company.
Cindmuiti, Ohio
FUed Not. 28, IMO, Scr. No. 210,965
iBt a.3 A47G 55/00
UA a 248-214 WClalmi
O
thin wall channel means integrally interconnected be-
tween said spaced thin wall side portions disposed hori-
zontally outwardly from the adjacent hose coil retaining
surfaces thereof and opening generally in a direction
toward the same,
the thin wall channel means in said mounting wall engaging
section being integrally connected with the thin wall
channel means in said hose coil supporting section and
providing mounting wall engaging surface means adjacent
the integral connection thereof with the thin wall channel
means in said hose coil supporting section.
4,436,268
SELF-AUGNING LOAD LEVELING DEVICE
Frederick G. Schriever, 64 Claireriew, Grosse Polnte Shores,
Mich. 48236
FUed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,368
Int a.3 F16M lJ/24
VS. a. 248-188J 13 ciate.
1. A leveling device for supporting heavy loads comprising,
in combination:
a. a base member;
b. a load supporting member disposed above the base mem-
ber;
c. a pair of wedges positioned one above the other and
disposed between said members, each wedge slidably
engaging one of said members along an inclined interface;
d. said wedges slidably engaging one another along a non-
inclined interface;
e. means connected to each of said wedges for sUdably
shifting them along said interface and reUtive to each
other and to said base and load supporting members to
thereby vary the height of the load supporting member
relative to the base member; and
f. alignment compensating means for distributing a load
1. A vertically adjustable hanger for supporting a dispenser
for adding a chemical to a toilet tank on a vertical wall member
of said toilet tank at a predetermined height selected by the user,
said hanger comprising:
(a) a planar bayonet member having a predetermined length,
width and thickness, said bayonet member having means
for being attached to said wall member, said bayonet
member including at least one resiliently deformable pro-
jection located along a longitudinal edge thereof and
extending outwardly in a direction generally parallel to
the width of said bayonet member, said projection being
resiliently deformable in the plane of said bayonet member
in a direction generally parallel to the width thereof; and
(b) a channel means secured to said dispenser, said channel
means having a predetermined length, width and thick-
ness, said channel means having opposed longitudinal
edges located in the plane of said bayonet member, said
opposed longitudinal edges of said channel means being
adapted to engage opposed longitudinal edges of said
bayonet member, at least one of said longitudinal edges of
said channel means having a multiplicity of vertically
spaced projection receiving means having a shape sub-
stantially complementary to that of said projection locat-
ed along at least one of said longitudinal edges of said
bayonet member and adapted to engage said projection
on said longitudinal edge of said bayonet member, whereby
the vertical position of said dispenser may be adjusted as
desu-ed by advancing or retracting said bayonet member
in said channel means in a direction generally parallel to
Its length by engaging said resUienUy deformable projec-
tion on said bayonet member in one of said projection
receiving means located along the adjacent longitudinal
edge of said channel means.
4,436,270
SUPPORT MECHANISM OF SWIVEL SEAT STRUCTURE
Masakazu Muraishi, Higashimnrayama, Japan, aasignor to
Nittan Motor Company, Limited, Japan
FUed Jon. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,234
Clalma priority, appUcatioo Japui, Jul. 16, 1980, 55-97181
Int. CL^ F16M 13/00
UA a 248-416 11 Clalma
1. A support mechanism of a swivel seat structure having a
seat cushion horizontally positioned over a floor surface, com-
prising:
a pivot element located below the seat cushion and having a
center axis about which the seat cushion is horizontally
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
621
tumable with respect to the floor surface, the center of the
pivot element being closer to the rear end of the seat
cushion than to the front end of the seat cushion;
a base member which is held stationary with respect to the
floor surface;
a swivel member carrying the seat cushion thereon and
pivotally mounted on said base member by means of said
pivot element, the swivel member being horizontally
tumable on the base member about the center axis of the
pivot element;
guide rails positioned below the seat cushion and in front of
said pivot element and having an arcuate stationary guide
raU which is held stationary with respect to the floor
r
extending through both said hinges, a pair of sleeves each
having a transverse hole therethrough for being slidable along
said axle rod, and in front of a front side of said panel, an
"L"-shaped rod adjustably secured in an upper end of each said
sleeve, a forwardly extending upper hook adjustably carried
by each said "L"-shaped rod, a pair of bushing sleeves slidable
along said axle rod, a bushing affixed on each said bushing
sleeve, a forwardly extending lower hook adjustably carried
by each said bushing, a horizontal book rest located forwardly
of a lower poriion of said sleeves and supported at opposite
ends upo^pposite ends of said base forward portion, and a
horizontaMk extending across a front upper portion of said
panel being located between said panel and the first said
sleeves, a plurality of plastic segments being along a front side
of said bar.
surface and an arcuate movable guide rail which is slidable
on and along the stationary guide rail and which is secured
to said swivel member for being tumable with the swivel
member and the seat cushion about the center axis of said
pivot element; and
retaining means positioned between said pivot element and
said guide rails and arranged to provide retaining engage-
ment between the base member and the swivel member
while permitting the swivel member to tum on and with
respect to the base member, the retaining means compris-
ing a retainer pin which is axially clamped to the base
member and the swivel member for providing said retain-
ing engagement between the base member and the swivel
member.
4,436,271
BOOK HOLDING DEVICE
HipoUto S. Manio, 95 Ten Eyck WaUc, Apt. 73, Brooklyn, N.Y.
11206
FUed Jul. 16, 1982, Scr. No. 398,986
Int. a.J A47B 97/04
U.S. a. 248—460 1 Claim
1. A book holding device, comprising, in combination, a flat
base, a panel hinged by means of a pair of spaced-apart hinges
upon a forward poriion of said base, a plurality of spaced-apart
cleats on a rear side of said panel, a brace pivoted upon a rear
portion of said base for being propf)ed under a selected one of
said cleats, an elongated axle rod forming a single hinge pin
4,436,272
CHRISTMAS TREE STAND HAVING STABILIZED
CLAMPING MEMBERS
Jamcf B. LUe, Rte. 1, RuaaeUriUe, Ark. 72801, and Dan C.
Mathea, Jr., 301 Ridgeway, UtUe Rock, Ark. 72205
FUed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 364,791
Int. a.3 A47G 33/12
U.S. a. 248—527 6 Claims
■M ,^
1. A clamping stand for Christmas trees and the like, com-
prising a vessel having a continuous vertical wall, whereby the
bottom of the trunk of such tree may be received therein, base
means secured thereunder, a pair of horizontal clamping
screws threaded through the veriical wall of the vessel and
presented opposite to each other, and a vertical clamping
member mounted on the inner end of each clamping screw,
characterized in that each clamping screw has, spaced from iu
inner end, a reduced diameter neck portion terminating out-
wardly in a shoulder, further characterized in that each verti-
cal clamping member has, substantially along its mid-height, a
vertical slot including a rounded lower end poriion sufficiently
large to pass over the inner end of a clamping screw and a
narrower slot poriion extending upwardly therefrom, said
narrower portion being sufficiently wide to engage slidingly
on the neck portion of the clamping screw but smaller than the
shoulder thereof, whereby on so screwing a screw inner end
through the vessel wall as to project inwardly into the vessel,
the clamping member may be mounted thereon by passing the
lower end of said mid-level slot over the clamping screw inner
end and sliding the said slot downward along the neck poriion,
and whereby cUunping may thereafter be achieved by preuure
of the shoulder against the clamping member.
622
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
M3d,273
FASTENING MEANS FOR REARVIEW MIRROR IN
AUTOMOBILE INTERIOR
Tttao Yada, YokohaoM, aod YoiUaki Notoya, ZmiiL both of
Japu, SMipMin to Nifco lac^ Yokohama, Japan
FIM Dec 10, 19§1, Ser. No. 329,491
,.,S!l?n'*'*'^' Wlicatiod Japan, Dec. 16, 1980. 55-
17y9o2{UJ
lat CL^ FICM 13m
UAa24«-549 2CIatai
pads having an outer Uyer of ultra-high molecular weight
polyethylene that contacts said concrete pad. each of said pads
having an uiner Uyer of elastomeric material bonded to said
outer adjacent layer, and each of said inner layer of elastomeric
material havmg Uterally and longitudinally spaced elastomeric
projections molded thereto to provide vibration isolation to a
machine mounded on said concrete pad.
4,434,275
CONCRETE FORM EXTENDER DEVICE
Gary L. Hendenhot, 7164 Gro?eland Rd., HoUy, Mich. 48442
Pltod Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,559
I"t a.' E04G 77/06
UAa249-47 gcialm.
1. A fastemng means for a rearview mirror in an automobUe
iwdy. which comprises a fastening base integrally formed at
U»e basal end of an arm for supporting the rearview mirror, a
nxmg member made of a synthetic resin, and a setscrew
adapted to secure said fixing member to the automobile body,
said fixmg member being provided with a tubular screw-
receivmg portion and a domelike flange-shaped engaging head
portion extended from the peripheral surface of said screw-
receivuig portion, said engaging portion on the side opposite to
the tubular portion being convex and having an underiying
peripheral surface engageable with said base, said engaging
head portion being provided with thin-walled portions for
enablmg said flange shape of the engaging portion to be broken
under an unpact, said thin walled portion comprises an annular
groove encircling said tubular member and a plurality of
rooves radiating outwardly therefrom, said fastening base
hcmg provided with a perforation for permitting insertion
tfterem of the screw-receiving portion of said fixing member
tnereby enablmg said engaging portion to come into fast en-
gagement with the edge of the perforation, and said setscrew
bemg adapted to be passed through the hoUow part of said
screw-receiving portion and driven heUcally into the automo-
bUe body, whereby said fastening base is attached fast to the
automobUe body through the medium of said fixing member.
4,436,274
VIBRATION DAMPENING SUPPORT
JttMi H. KraaMT, Akron, Ohio, aadgnor to nc B. F. Goodrich
Cnnpaay, New York, N.Y.
FUad Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,232
lat a.^ F16M 1/00
UAa248-633 sctata.
1. A concrete form assembly including a plurality of forms
arranged m top to bottom reUtionship, each of such forms
mcluding a transverse metal strap including at least one out-
standmg scaffold bolt, the invention comprising:
a plurality of separate extender devices for holding said
forms m assembled top to bottom relationship, each of said
extender devices including a slotted upper end and slotted
lower end, said slotted ends engaging respective scaffold
bolto in tight holding relationship, said slotted ends further
mcluding sharpened slot portions and beveled end por-
tions to facUitate assembly and clean-off" of said bolte, said
extender devices each including a pair of off-set portions
proximate each of iu end portions and adjacent to and
abutting the corresponding straps, said extender portions
further including a flat portion intermediate said off-set
portions and in firm engagement with the forces of the
adjacent upper and lower forms.
1. A vibration isoUtion pad for the support of machinery
wberon a concrete floor is to support such machinery, said
floor havmg a pit with sidewalk and a support base of con-
«ete, a first set of flat composite pads Uying on said support
base m abutting reUtionship to cover said base, a second set of
flatoompowte pads lying in pUnes normal to said first set and
■bottingly contacting said sidewalls. a concrete pad in said pit
fnctionaUy engaging aU of said composite pads, each of said
4,436,276
PIN SUPPORT AND MOLD FOR FOAMING AND
CURING RESIN EXTERIOR OVER BALL CORE
Gordon J. Donahne, Weat Henrietta, N.Y., aaeignor to VopUz
Corporation, Pitlaford, N.Y.
Continnation of Ser. No. 341,743, Jan. 22, 1982, atandonad.
which la a continnation of Ser. No. 182^16, Ang. 29, 1980.
■b«»oned. nia application Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 419.904
lBta3B29Di7/M
UA a 249-91 jctatai
1. A pin support and mold for foaming and curing a spherical
ream exterior over a spherical ball core that is about one-half
the dUmeter of said resin exterior, said pin support and mold
comprising:
a. a two-part mold having a spherical cavity and a mold
parting plane intersecting the center of said spherical
cavity;
b. a bore hole extending through said mold parts at said mold
parting plane, the axis of said bore hole being oriented to
pais through said center of said spherical cavity;
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
623
c. a pin support including a straight shaft extending through
a diameter of said core;
d. said shaft fitting snugly within said bore hole and extend-
ing for the length of said bore hole from one exterior side
of said mold to an opposite exterior side of said mold to
support said core within said spherical cavity;
e. said shaft having a locator abutment arranged to engage
one of said exterior sides of said mold to locate said shaft
axially relative to said mold exterior and thus locate said
core within said spherical cavity;
f. said pin support extending outward beyond said locator
abutment away from said engaged exterior side of said
mold;
4,436,277
TORQUE PINCH VALVE
Edward Robak, 5520 San Joan Dr., Orange, Calif. 92669, and
Carter K. Refa, 13312 Loretta Dr., Santa Ana, Calif. 92705
FUad Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,616
lat a.) n6K 7/06
MS, a. 251-6 14 Claims
1. A pinch valve comprising:
(a) a housing formed of upper and lower half housings,
having distal and opposite ports and a flexible conduit
extending therebetween to form a fluid passageway
through said housing,
(b) a pinch bar attached to an arm pivotally attached to the
inside top wall of said upper half housing and a lead screw
engaged in a threaded aperture in said top wall to provide
an adjustment abutment stop for said arm; and
(c) a valve member movably mounted to the lower half
housing with actuator means to urge said valve member
between an open position permitting unobstructed flow
through said conduit and a throttling position constricting
said flexible conduit between said valve member and anvil
means,
whereby said valve is operable to control rate of flow and to
shut off flow, u determined by the adjustable position of
said anvU means.
4.436,278
DISCONNECTABLE VALVE MOTOR DRIVE
Glen H. Smith, Algona, Wash., aaaignor to Morgan ladnatriaa,
Inc., Seattle, Wash.
Continnation of Ser. No. 128,958, Mar. 10, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcatioB Jua. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,340
Int a.i F16K il/Oy. F16D 7/00
U.S. a. 251-130 13
g. said outward extension of said pin support being formed as
a coupling element disposed outside said mold;
h. said pin support being arranged so that, without moving
said pin support, said mold parts can be separated when
said foamed spherical resin exterior is partly cured, and
said pin support can be moved clear of said mold to move
said ball clear of said spherical cavity; and
i. said coupling element being shaped for hanging up said
shaft to support said ball for curing in air out of contact
with other surfaces for a curing time following molding of
said resin exterior over said core.
1. An offset drive assembly for coupling a valve stem to a
motor, comprising:
a drive motor having an output shaft;
a valve having a stem offset from the motor shaft, the stem
having a threaded end;
means for driving the stem of the valve from the motor
which comprises:
a collar rotaubly coupled to the drive motor output shaft;
a stem nut releasably and drivably engaged with said collar
and threaded on the threaded end of the stem, said stem
nut and collar being co-axial with one another; and
a removable locking member releasably locking the stem nut
and the collar together in fixed relative reUtion tot co-
axial roUtion, the locking member interconnecting the
stem nut and collar and being accessible from the exterior
of the offset drive assembly for rapid and easy release of
the collar from driving engagement with the stem nut by
removal of the member without fiirther disassembly of the
offset drive assembly to allow manual rotation of the stem
nut to drive the stem independent of the drive motor.
4.436,279
STEM CONNECnON FOR GATE VALVE
Jamaa V. Bonda, Honaton, and Paal R. Onun, Stafford, both of
Tax^ aaaignors to ACF Indnatrlaa, Incorporated. New York,
N.Y.
FUad Dec. 27. 1982, Ser. No. 453,568
Int. a» F161 25/00. 31/143
VS. a 251—86 7 ClaiM
1. An improved stem connection structure for connecting a
stem to a gate member in a reciprocating gate valve of the type
having a valve body with a valve chamber and inlet and outlet
flow passages communicating with the valve chamber, a gate
member slidably mounted within the valve chamber for move-
ment between open and closed positions reUtive to the flow
passages and having an externally threaded upper gate exten-
sion thereon, the gate extension having a first slot formed
624
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
therein being disposed in substantially parallel relation with the
longitudinal axes of the inlet and outlet flow passages, a bonnet
TOnnected to the valve body to form a closure for the valve
body, an operating stem carried by the bonnet and having a
stem extension on the lower end thereof disposed within the
valve chamber, the stem extension having an elongated key
formed on its lowermost end received by the first slot of the
gate extension to form a key-slot combination, and the stem
having operator means connected to an upper end thereof for
moving the stem and gate member in a direction transversely
to the direction of fluid flow through the flow passages,
wherein the improvement comprises:
the stem extension having an externally threaded portion
contained thereon adjacent and above the elongated key
an mtemally threaded coUar threadably engaging the stem
extension and having an axial bore therethrough in axial
alignment with the longitudinal axis of the stem surround-
mg the key-slot combination, and having a second slot
extending therethrough in the direction of fluid flow
opened and closed positions and incorporating a valve stem,
which valve element is operated by linear unseating move-
ment, rotational repositioning movement and linear reseating
movement, said valve actuator mechanism comprising:
an actuator housing adapted for fixed assembly with said
plug valve;
a first actuator stem extending from said housing and
adapted to be connected in nonrotatable and linearly
immovable relation with said valve stem;
a second actuator stem being movably positioned within said
actuator housing and being in co-axial spaced relation
with said first actuator stem;
means imparting linear and rotational movement to said
second actuator stem; and
}
through the gate valve, releasable locking means on the
collar for releasably securing the collar to the stem exten-
sion at a predetermined position;
an adjusting nut fitting within the second slot and threaded
onto the gate extension for providing a connection be-
tween the stem and gate member, the second slot having
supporting means for retaining the nut and collar in engag-
mg relationship and retaining the key-slot combination in
engagmg relationship, the second slot permitting move-
ment of the nut and gate member relative to the longitudi-
nal axis of the stem in a direction generally parallel to the
longitudmal axis of the flow passage, the adjusting nut
bemg accessible through the second slot without disas-
sembly of the stem and gate member for manual axial
adjustment of the gate member relative to the longitudinal
axis of the stem so that the gate member port can be
aligned with the inlet and outlet flow passages when the
gate member is in the open position; and
relMsable locking means on the nut for releasably securing
the nut to the gate extension at a predetermined position.
4,436,280
VALVE ACTUATOR MECHANISM FX)R UFT-TURN
TYPE VALVES
Bernard H. Gdiow, HooitM, Tex^ aadgnor to Daniel Indiis-
trics, lac^ HooatoB, Tex.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,300
., „ « "^ ^^ ^^ ■'^/^ft ^^/^^. ^^/^^
UACL2S1-229 23a,im
1. A valve actuator mechanism for a lift-turn type plug valve
having an mtemal valve element for movement between an
movement translation means incorporating gear means and
operatively interconnecting said first and second actuator
stems, said movement translation means moves said valve
element in one of said valve element positions and being
operative during a first linear movement of said second
actuator stem to impart linear movement to said first
actuator stem in one direction to unseat said valve ele-
ment, being operative upon combined linear and rota-
tional movement of said second actuator stem to impart
solely rotational movement to said first actuator stem and
being operative upon ftirther linear movement of said
second actuator stem in said one direction to impart solely
Unear movement to said first actuator stem in an opposite
direction to reseat the valve element.
4,436,281
BUTTERFLY VALVE WTTH AN IMPROVED
OBTURATION DEVICE
Alain Chiron, Oloron Sdnte Mule, Fhuce, aadgnor to AppUca-
tions Mecaniqnea et Robinetterie IndnatrieUe, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 152,411, May 22, 1980. This
appUcation Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,046
Clainii priority, appUcation France, May 23, 1979, 79 13175
Int CL^ F16K J/22
UA a 251-305 9ctai„
1. A butterfly valve having an unwedged butterfly gate,
optionally off-centered in relation to its drive axis, and a seat
perpendicular to the axis of the valve body, characterized in
that the peripheral edge surface of said butterfly gate U formed
by two surfaces whose cross-sections are curves of the same
family, and has a configuration such that normals to it in the
regions on both sides of the plane of symmetry of the butterfly
gate containing the axis of rotation or parallel to it intersect the
axis of symmetry of the seat, normal to the seat plane, at two
distinct points, CI and C2, when the butterfly gate is in the
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
625
closed position, and the normals to one of the two surfaces
converge at point CI, situated on said axis of symmetry, above
said axis of rotation and the normals to the second surface
converge at point C2 situated on said axis of symmetry under
said axis or rotation, and that, for zones situated at the level of
passage of the axis of rotation of the butterfly gate defined by
sectors forming an angle 8 on both sides of the plane of symme-
try of the butterfly gate containing the said axis, or parallel to
it, the points of intersection of the normals intersect the seg-
ment limited by said points CI and C2, with the resulting
variations of points of intersection being effected progressively
in a continuous manner.
position in which the gate thereof reciprocates in a substan-
tially horizontal plane comprising:
a valve body having a cylindrical bore projecting into one
side of the body and forming a gate chamber in the body
for the accommodation of the gate of the valve;
a gate reciprocably mounted in said gate chamber;
a closure plate removably secured to said valve body and
extending across and closing the opening to said bore at
one side of the valve body;
a bonnet opening formed in said valve body on the opposite
side thereof from said closure plate and communicating
with said bore;
fluid flow passageway means in said valve body for permit-
ting fluid to flow through said gate valve when said gate
is open, said fluid flow passageway means comprising:
a first bore portion projecting into said valve body along
an axis extending normal to the axis of said cylindrical
bore forming said gate valve chamber;
an upstream seat counterbore registering with and open-
ing into said first bore portion, said upstream seat coun-
terbore being disposed in concentric and coaxial rela-
tionship to said first bore portion and projecting from
said first bore portion to said gate bore, and communi-
cating at one of its open ends with said gate bore;
a second bore portion projecting into the opposite side of
4,436,282
GATE VALVE WTTH REINFORCING RIBS
Jan de Vriet, Amsterdam, Netherlands, assignor to Tbomassen
Amsterdam B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands
FUed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,644
Int. a.3 F16K 27/04
UJS. a 251—329 4 Claims
1. A gate valve comprising a body formed of flat end walls
and flat side walls interconnected by welding to form a sub-
stantially rectangular cross section in a plane perpendicular to
said end walls, said end walls having aligned openings forming
flow passages, a plurality of metal reinforcing ribs extending
across the exterior faces of said end walls and in engagement
with said end walls on opposite sides of the body, said ribs
being disposed in parallel planes parallel to the axis of the flow
passage and perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the body,
each rib on one side of the body being in the same plane as a rib
on the other side of said body, each rib having an inner portion
of the periphery in contact with an end wall and an outer
portion of the periphery spaced away from the end walls and
extending parallel thereto, the improvement comprising a strap
extending around each pair of opposite ribs, the straps extend-
ing parallel to the side walls of the body, the straps being
securely attached to the ribs only at said outer portions of the
periphery.
4,436,283
GATE VALVE
John H. Shore, 8 Cherokee St, Shawnee, Okia. 74801
Filed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,004
Int a.» F16K 25/00
VS. a. 251—174 2 OahM
1. A gate valve especially adapted for use in a horizontal
said valve body from said first bore portion and in axial
alignment with said first bore portion;
a downstream seat counterbore Signed with and opening
into said second bore portion, said downstream seat
counterbore being concentric and coaxially related to
said second bore portion, and said downstream seat
counterbore extending from said second bore portion to
said gate bore and opening into said gate bore on the
opposite side thereof from said upstream seat counter-
bore;
a first shoulder formed at the intersection of said first bore
portion and said upstream seat counterbore; and
a second shoulder formed at the intersection of said sec-
ond bore portion and said upstream seat counterbore;
an annular wave spring bearing against said first shoulder
and concentrically surrounding the axes of said upstream
seat counterbore and said first bore portion;
an annular upstream seat slidably mounted in said upstream
seat counterbore and having a first end bearing against
said wave spring and a second end bearing against one side
of said gate;
an annular downstream seat slidably mounted in said down-
stream seat counterbore and concentrically surrounding
the axes of said downstream seat counterbore and said
second bore portion, said downstream seat having a first
end adjacent said second shoulder and having a second
626
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
«id in contact with the oppoMte «ide of said g«e from the
tide contacted by said upstream seat;
a bonnet including a neck portion projecting through said
bonnet opening and carrying external threads at a location
outside said valve body, said bonnet further including an
annular flange at the end of said neck portion inside laid
valve body;
sealing means between said annular flange and said valve
body;
bonnet retainer means threadedly engaged with the external
threads on said neck portion and located outside said
valve body;
• valve stem having a first end threadedly and adjustably
connected with said gate for causing reciprocation of said
gate when said valve stem is roteted, and having a second
end outside said valve body;
an operating handle outside said body and connected to said
valve stem for rotation of the valve stem when said oper-
atmg handle is routed; and
Peking means secured to the end of said bonnet outside said
valve body and packingly surrounding said valve stem.
M3<,284
TENSED WIRE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Artaro G. Varcla-Heraaadez, Califoraia 2040 Apt 152, Santi-
■gOt Chile
P1W Aug. 5, 1582, Ser. No. 405,547
InLCL^EMH 17/02
UA a. 256-35 4cUto.
ing bar about its longitudinal axis and reciprocating ham-
menng motion to said striking bar, and
a driU rod having a connection to said striking bar, said drill
rod havmg at an extremity thereof remote from said con-
nection a driU bit for removing clay or mud from said iron
notch, the improvement wherein:
• ^ J?;-i-;». v«o
^ -tL"! tI 1
(a) said connection is of a quick-change type and (b) said
apparatus further includes an elongated poking bar having
at one end thereof means for securing said poking bar to
said connection of a quick-change type.
1. A system for forming treUises, fences, and self-supporting
•tnirtures comprising: a plurality of wires of substantiaUy
equal length, each having first and second ends; first and sec-
ond means for anchoring said wires at said ends to place said
wires under substantial tension and position the same in sub-
stantially mutuaUy parallel relation; and laterally extending
link elements mterconnecting said plurality of wires at periodic
intervaU between said first and second terminals, for the trans-
miaaion of laterally applied forces exerted thereon, said link
elemaits bang free of other interconnection and comprising
Ittigtte of relatively rigid wire bent at intervals to form £
sliaped loops each comprising two offset parallel portions and
•n angular connecting portion disposed at acute angles to said
pwallel portions and extending linearly therebetween, said
wiTM being mterlaced between the same sides of said paraUel
portions and around the facing side of said connecting portion
mtermediate the Unear extent thereof to be held in lateraUy
non-«bppmg engagement with said like elements.
4,436,286
^132^ ^^ AFTERBURNING COMBUSTIBLE
CONSTTTUENTS OF EXHAUST GASES FROM ROTARY
KILNS
Wolfra. Schnabd, Iditdn; Ernst Schen, FVankftart am Main,
•ad Harry Serbent, Haaao, aU of Fed. Rep. of Gemuuv^
MdgMrs to Metallgwellacfaaft Aktiengeiellachaft, FrimkAirt
am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 14, 1M2, Ser. No. 417,956
192r3S89«f *^' ''*"*^"' ''"*• *•"• «' G«™»y. Mar. 12,
Irt. CLJ C21B J3/08
UAa266-U 7cWm.
M36,28S
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPENING
BLAST-FURNACE TAP HOLES
Robert T. Woodiaci, Box W, Man, Pa. 16046
Filed Jtm. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,866
lit 0.3 C21C 5/4S
UA a 266-45 4 0.^
1 . In q>paratus for opening the iron notoh of a hlatt furnace
said apparatus comprising:
a striking bar,
pneumatic means for imparting rotary motion to said strik-
1. In a process of afterburning combustible constituentt of
exhaust gases from rotary kilns used for metallurgical processes,
compnsmg afterburning the exhaust gases from the rotary kib
at a temperature above their ignition temperature in an after-
bummg chamber and supplying oxygen-containing gases to
said afterburning chamber, the improvement comprising bum-
mg part of the combustible constituents in each of a plurality of
series connected stages in said afterburner, supplying each of
such suges with oxygen at a controUed rate, and cooling the
gas which is about to enter each succeeding sUge by injecting
water to a temperature above the ignition temperature of the
gas and bdow the caking temperature of the entrained fine
dust
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
627
4,436,287
METHOD FOR PROTECTING TUYERES FOR REFINING
A MOLTEN IRON
Toihlkazn Saknraya; Hideo Nakamnra; Nobno Harada; Tetraya
FmU, and Tosblhiko Emi, all of Chlba, Japan, aadpMrs to
Kawasaki Steel Corporatkm, Kobe, Japan
Filed JoL 6, 1983, Ser. No. 511,511
Claims priority, applicatioB Japan, Jul 12, 1982, 57-120961;
Jul. 12, 1982, 57-120962; Jnl. 12, 1982, 57-120963; JoL 12, 1982,
57-120964
Int CL' C21B 7/16
VS. a. 266—47 9 Claims
circuit means is isolated thereby from said computerized
control unit.
4,436,289
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
ATMOSPHERE IN A CARBURIZING FURNACE
UTILIZING A CASCADED VALVING SYSTEM
John J. CooaeUy, NaperWlle, and Raymond A. CeUitti, Hint-
dale, both of U., asatgnors to Intcniatioaal Harvaatar Co.,
Chicago, ni.
FUed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,289
Int a.i C21B 7/24
VJS. a. 266—80 20 ClaliH
r
I'
I
eotaiCiinmitmmi$ i»r%
'»tOi,timmt
M4 3%ofOi/kimmt
t 4 € a
&S
1. A method for protecting tuyeres for refming a molten iron
which penetrate a wall of a refming vessel and through which
a refining gas flow consisting of oxygen gas or a gas containing
oxygen is blown together with a shrouding gas flow surround-
ing the refining gas flow into a molten iron charged in a refm-
ing vessel, which comprises supplying a carbon monoxide-con-
taining gas so as to satisfy the following equation
wherein x shows a concentration (%) of carbon monoxide in
the shrouding gas, qc shows an amount (Nm^/hr) of the
shrouding gas flowed and qo shows an amount (Nm^/hr) of
oxygen gas flowed from an inner pipe, to said tuyeres as the
shrouding gas.
4,436,288
METAL MACHINING DEVICE WTTH CONTROL
CIRCUTT ISOLATION
James D. KeUogg, and Angnst C. Mingesz, both of MUwaukee,
WIfl., aaaignors to C-R-O, Inc., Mcaomoaee Falls, Wis.
FUed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,621
Int a.} B23K 7/02
VS. a 26^-69 4 Claims
uu iMWiT nwiim. V"//«
1. In carburizing apparatus of the type utilizing a carburizing
furnace having multiple zones, and apparatus for applying
nitrogen and methanol to the various zones, the improvement
comprising:
first means for controlling the flow rate of the nitrogen and
methanol into the furnace, said first means including
means for providing a high flow rate to the f^imace and
for providing a low flow rate to the furnace, and second
flow control means cooperating with said first flow con-
trol means for distributing the nitrogen and methanol to
the various zones of the furnace in varying proportions,
said system further including control means responsive to
one or more componenu of the gas composition within
the various zones for individually altering the proportions
of nitrogen and methanol applied to the various individual
zones to obtain a predetermined cartx>n potential in each
zone.
1. In a device for machining horizontally disposed fixed
metal workpieces:
(a) a pair of gantries mounted for movement along longitudi-
nally extending rails.
(b) an elongated transverse tool carrying bridge extending
between said gantries and with said bridge having tool
means mounted for movement therealong.
(c) a programmable computerized numerical machining
control unit mounted adjacent one end of said bridge.
(d) supplemental electronic circuit means connected to said
control unit
(e) and said tool carrying bridge enclosing said circuit means
therewithin so that electronic noise emanating from said
4,436,290
PLASMA MELTING FURNACE ARRANGEMENT
Hehnut D. KUches, Asten; Walter LugKbeMar, Uni; Enwt
Riegler, Eons, and Emit Z^iicek, Otteaahaim, all of Aaitria,
asaignon to Voest-Alpine Akticngeaellachaft Liaz, Aostria
FUed Aug. r, 1982, Ser. No. 412,202
ClalBU priority, application Anstria, Sep. 15, 1981, 3980/81
Int CLi aiB 7/22
VS. a. 266-158 4 OaiiM
1. In a plasma melting furnace arrangement of the type
including a cover, a melt container having a side wall and an
upper rim. plasma burners arranged so as to be inclined
towards the furnace axis and guided through said side wall, a
main flue gas conduit connected to said cover and equipped
with a draft regulating damper, and a separate discharge means
provided for flue gases from other f^irnace openings, the im-
628
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
Martin PfannMhinidt, Heiligenliaiis. Fed. Ren of a.r»...
HledM«.3l,M«J,Ser.No.3«33M
13 OaiiBs
are provided within said downwardly open channel for sup-
plying a protective gas downwardly in an area above said
furnace openings.
r^m'
..^ 4,436,291
l^ALLURGICAL VESSEL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
KMbed N Nagati, Mars, Pa., assignor to Pennsylvania Engi-
neering Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,316
„„ _ Int. a.3 C21C 5/iO
UA a 266-246 jciainu
1. A metallurgical vessel subject to expansion and contrac-
tion dunng Its operating cycles and including trunnion support
means havmg a support surface at least partially surrounding
the v«sel and a plurality of link members each having a first
pair of spaced apan legs extending longitudinally from one end
oppoIi^nS "" °' ''^ '"^ '^^ "^^"^^« ^-- ^he
an auxiliary support,
the first and second pairs of legs of each member are respec-
tively pivotally coupled to a first hinge means mountedon
the vessel and a second hinge means mounted on the
auxiliary support,
each hinge means including a first hinge member disposed
between the legs of its pivotally connected link member
and second and third hinge members disposed adjacent
the opposite sides thereof,
and first and second pin means extending respectively
through said first and second pairs of legs and the hinge
members associated therewith, said pin means extending
generally tangentially relative to said vessel
the gap between the legs of the pair which is coupled to the
vessel and the width of the hinge member disposed there-
between is less than the gap between the legs and of the
^.u^t *1«^"P'«^ ^° *« """iliary support and the
width of the hmge member disposed therebetween,
said auxiliary support having a surface substantially coexten-
sive with MKl disposed in an opposed relation to said
support surface, and
resilient means being disposed between said surfaces.
1. A system for the continuous and uninterrupted treatment
web fe^r^T "'^J "''• '°'"P"^^« "> ^PP^«"^ having a
s^lX tir ^"^ ' '^'^^"^' '^^•°" ^'^h an annealing
sution therebetween, a web entry storage station upstream of
the annealmg station in the direction of web travel, the dis-
charge sUtion including a web discharge storage station,
means for contmuously moving the web through said stations
ou^^TT'''''^ ^'' "'"^'"« operation'may be caS
out. and a hot-dip coating station located between the anealing
^t "i^^^ '^"°"'' '"^^ ^°' selectively directing the web
through the coatmg station for combining the annealing opera-
Uon with a hot-dip web coating operation, and mLs for
selectively by-passmg the web from the coating station and
directing the web into the discharge station to reconvert the
combined annealing and coating operations solely into the web
annealmg operation, the means for by-passing the web and
directing the web mto the discharge station including means
for severing the web between the annealing and coating sta-
tions to define a first leading web end and between the coating
and discharge stations to define a first traUing web end. and
means for jommg the leading and traUing ends together.
»«^ 4,436,293
ROTARY SUPPORT FOR CONTINUOUS CASTING
LADLES
PauISHchmidt, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Edou«d
i^e, Luxembourg, Luxembourg, assignors to Paul Worth
S.A., Luxembourg
PUed Not. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 439,354
83753 '"*°''*^' ■PP""**"" Luxembourg, Not. 13, 1981,
tro ^ . Int a.3 C21B i/OO
U.S. a. 26(^276 „c^
1. In a rotary support for continuous casting ladles, which
mcludes a vertical column, a drive mechanism for rotating the
vertical co umn about its vertical axis, a cross arm carri«S by
the vertical column and having at least one of its ends bifur-
cated to form a pair of support arms, each of the two arms
compnsmg means for carrying between them a casting ladle
tiie unprovement comprising:
a support housing carried at the end of each of said supoort
arms; kf^
weighing cell means attached to said housing at the bottom
thereof;
a U-shaped weighing frame vertically mounted in said hous-
mg, said weighing frame having an axis of symmetry
said weighing frame being on said weighing ceU and 'said
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
629
weighing cell being positioned along said axis of symme-
try;
said U-shaped weighing frame having a pair of guide rails
forming vertical guide arms;
ladle carrier carriage means adjusubly mounted in said
weighing frame and movable on said guide rails of said
—I
weighing frame, said carriage means being symmetrical
with respect to said axis of symmetry;
means for raising and lowering said ladle carrier carriage
means; and
stabilization means between said weighing frame and said
housing.
4,436,294
ONE HAND CLAMPING DEVICE
Robert L. Irelan, 500 Fitch St., Socorro, N. Mex. 87801
Filed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,261
Int. a.3 B66F 3/00
U.S. a 269-6 11 chdms
consiste of a slot lengthwise of the screw, and a guide plate
removably mounted in the main unit which engages in the
slot to prevent screw rotation;
said main unit having head and handle portions, the head
portion receiving said guide plate, the guide plate having
a recess therein, and a spring mounted detent also in the
head portion which cooperates with said recess to resil-
iently retain the guide plate in the head portion.
4,436,295
VACUUM CHUCK FOR HOLDING HLAMENTS
Robert A. Wey, Piainville, and Harold A. Roberu, North AtUe-
boro, both of Mass., assignors to Augat Inc., Mansfield, Mau.
FUed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,072
Int. a.i B25B n/00
U.S. a. 269-21 10 Qaims
1. A vacuum chuck comprising:
first and second blocks each having adjacent top and side
surfaces set at substantially right angles to each other and
having chamfered edges between said surfaces;
means for holding said first and second blocks with the side
surfaces thereof in butting relationship and with said top
surfaces having a V-shaped channel running thereacross
formed by the chamfered edges;
the butted side surfaces of said first and second blocks hav-
ing one or more matching slots forming one or more
passages communicating with the V-shaped channel; and
means adapted for connecting a source of vacuum to said
one or more passages;
wherein said holding means includes:
a cradle having a bottom and a pair of upwardly extending
arms passing adjacent to sides of said first and second
blocks opposite the abutting side surfaces; and
means for securing said first and second blocks to said cradle
from said arms and for pressing said butting side surfaces
together.
1. A clamping device comprising:
a main unit holdable in one hand by a user of the device;
first clamp means mounted on the main unit in a relatively
fixed relationship thereto for engagement with one side of
a work-piece to be clamped;
second clamp means mounted on the main unit in movable
relationship thereto for in and out movement relative to
the main unit for engaging the opposite side of the work-
piece;
activating means for effecting the in and out movement of
said second clamp means by the same hand holding the
main unit;
means for permitting reversibility of operation of the device;
said second clamp means including an elongated screw
mounted in said main unit with one end thereof extending
out of said main unit, said elongated screw having means
associated therewith for preventing rotation thereof;
said means for preventing rotation of said elongated screw
4,436,296
FEEDER DEVICE FOR FOLDING MACHINES
Carlo Fonio, Galliate, Italy, aMignor to Rockwell International
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,855
Claims priority, application Italy, Jun. 18, 1980, 22842 A/80
Int. a.3 B65H 29/46
U.S. a. 270—31 4 Claims
1. A feeder device for withdrawing web material from a
supply roll supported on a shaft (29) mounted on a folding
machine of the type having a worksurface and a carriage
mounted for reciprocating movement thereon for effecting
advance of the web material onto the worksurface in folded
superposed layers, said feeder device comprising:
(a) a conveyor supported on one end of the carriage includ-
ing:
(i) a plurality of spaced rotaubly driven cylindrical rollers
(6. 11. 12);
(ii) at least one conveyor belt (13) in driving engagement
with each said cylindrical rollers;
(b) a loader device (18) pivotally mounted at one end thereof
to an end of the carriage opposite said conveyor and being
bifurcated at an opposite end. said bifurcation being
630
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
formed by opposed anns, one of said arms having a sup-
port shaft (29) receiving portion for lifting the shaft (29)
and web supply roll (25) mounted thereon from a loading
position, the other arm includes a support surface (26) that
supports the shaft to allow the supply roll (25) to lie
against the conveyor belt (13) when said loader device is
in a feed position to cause paying out of material from the
roll (25), said support surface (26) of said other arm being
elongated and merging with the shaft receiving portion to
'? M
form a continuous path for the shaft (29) to move along,
said support surface (26) forming an inclined ramp when
the loader device (18) is situated in the feed position to
cause the shaft (29) to move there along and carry the
support roll (25) into and for continuous engagement with
the conveyor belt (13); and
(c) drive means for pivoting said loader device with said web
supply roll between the loading position adjacent the
worksurface to the feed position.
4,436,297
HORIZONTAL BINDERY LOADER ADAPTOR FOR
FEEDING SIGNATURES INTO A VERTICAL POCKET
MoluuUit S. Chandhoke, Plattaborgh, N.Y^ assignor to Harris
Graphics Corporation, Melbourne, Fla.
FUed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,170
Int. a.J B65H 1/30. 1/02. 3/12
VS. a. 271—3.1 9 Claims
~'^~"'*=V>— J
1. Apparatus for feeding signatures into a generally verti-
cally extending pocket in which the signatures are supported
on a folded edge and from which the signatures are fed by a
feed mechanism, said apparatus comprising a frame,
a generally horizontally oriented hopper arranged to receive
signatures in a generally horizontal array,
first feeding means for feeding said signatures from a loading
position in a shingled stream with the folded edge trailing
into said hopper, and
second feeding means for feeding a shingled stream of said
signatures from said hopper, said second feeding means
including means for feeding the signatures sequentially
from the bottom of said hopper with the folded edge of
each signature leading and for directing the signatures on
folded edge into the generally vertically extending pocket,
said second feeding means including bottom feeding means
for sequentially feeding the signatures individually off the
bottom of the pack of signatures in the hopper in a reshin-
gled stream into said generally vertically extending feed
pocket, said bottom feeding means including conveyor
means forming the bottom of said hopper, and
a vacuum manifold,
said conveyor means including a perforated conveyor belt
operatively traveling over the inlet side of said vacuum
manifold for feeding said signatures into said reshingled
stream relationship while signatures are fed off the bottom
of the pack in the hopper,
a signature stop adjustably mounted on the frame and mov-
able relative to said pack of signatures for permitting said
pack of signatures to have different lengths of signatures
therein, and
means for simultaneously moving said vacuum manifold and
signature stop for maintaining the same length overlap
step in the shingled stream of signatures for different
length signatures.
4,436,298
SHEET FEEDER
Siegmar Donner, Friedberg; Giinter Strempler, and Manfred
Schmid, both of AngAnrg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as>
signors to Kleindienst GmbH * Co. and KG MaschinenAibrik,
both of, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jnl. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,934
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Ans. 2,
1980, 3029458
Int CL^ B65H 3/S2
VJS. a 271—10 6 Claims
f24 »-26
2 15*8 12
49 7
1. A sheet feeder comprising:
a support adapted to hold a stack of sheett;
a straight guide rail extending from said stack parallel to a
transport direction and defming a transport path extend-
ing in said direction;
a generically cylindrical sheet-forwarding roller above said
support and vertically engageable with the topmost sheet
of said stack said sheet-forwarding roller being centered
on and rotatable about an axis inclined to said direction
and rail;
means for routing said sheet-forwarding roller about the
respective axis while in contact with the top-most sheet of
said stack for displacing said topmost sheet in said direc-
tion and toward said rail;
feed rollers downstream of said sheet-forwarding
means for rotating said feed rollers and thereby advancing a
sheet engaged thereby along said path in said direction;
means for vertically displacing said sheet-forwarding roller
and urging same periodically down into contact with the
topmost sheet of said stack;
a stripper roller underneath said path immediately down-
stream of said stack;
means for rotating said stripper roller in a direction to dis-
place a sheet resting on it back against said transport
direction;
a freely routable stripper roller above the first-mentioned
stripper roller and vertically displaceable into engagement
therewith; and
means for vertically displacing said freely roUtable roller.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
631
4,436,299
SHEET FEEDING DEVICE
Winston A. Orsinger, Nazareth, Pa., assignor to Bell A HoweU
Conpuiy, PhillipsbarB. NJ.
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,277
lot a.3 B65H 3/08
UA a 271-100 17 Claims
1. A pivoting-type of sheet separating mechanism for sepa-
rating a bottom-most sheet from a main portion of a sheet stack
comprising:
a main frame;
a hopper assembly mounted on said main frame for support-
ing a stack of sheets;
a sheet separating means for gripping a bottom-most sheet of
the sheet stack and then moving along an arcuate path
away from said sheet stack in a direction down and under
said sheet stack, thereby bending a separated edge of said
bottom-most sheet away from a main portion of said sheet
stack; and
a linkage means for mounting said sheet separating means to
said main frame for causing said sheet separating means to
move in said arcuate path in said direction down and
under said sheet stack so that the apparent pivot point of
said sheet separating means is on the concave side of said
arcuate path, said linkage means being mounted to said
main frame on the convex side of said arcuate path, how-
ever, so that the actual pivot point of said sheet separating
means is on the convex side of said arcuate path.
a vacuum source for generating a substantially constant
reduced pressure,
a suction head assembly pneumatically connected with said
vacuum source for sucking a low portion of the first sheet
of the paper sheet bundle,
swinging means for swinging said suction head assembly
from a suction position engaging with said lower portion
of the first sheet of said paper sheet bundle to a take-up
position for passing the paper sheets to said conveyer
assembly, and
a valve interposed between said vacuum source and said
suction head assembly for selectively communicating said
suction head assembly with said vacuum source, said
valve including a circular housing in communication with
said vacuum source, a hollow timing member having a slit
and being roUUbly received within said housing, and a
hollow cylindrical shaft for carrying said suction head
assembly and for providing communication therewith, an
end of said cylindrical shaft being received within said
timing member and having a cut-out portion, the roution
of said timing member and the swinging movement of said
cylindrical shaft being in synchronism with each other so
that said suction head assembly communicates with said
vacuum source and is under a substantially constant re-
duced pressure when in the suction position, and is out of
communication with said vacuum source when in the
take-up position.
4,436,301
DOCUMENT RESTACK TRANSPORT
Michael S. Docry, Rochester, Edward W. C. HanzUk, Webster;
John A. Adanek, Rochester, and William J. McUughlia,
Fairport, all of N.Y., aasignors to Xerox Corporation, Stam-
ford, Conn.
FUed Not. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,630
iBt a.J B65H 29/32. 29/54
UA a. 271-177 ^ la^n
4,436,300
PAPER SHEET STRIPPER DEVICE
Koaichi Goi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Laurel Bank Machine
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,618
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 4, 1980, 55-122639
lot a.3 B65H 7/16. 3/08
UA a. 271-107 SdalBM
I. A paper sheet stripper device for stripping sheeu of paper
one by one from a paper sheet bundle to feed the same to a
conveyer assembly, comprising:
1. In a recirculating document handler for sequentially feed-
ing document sheeU at a high rate of speed from the bottom of
a document restacking tray to an imaging sution of a copier
and for sequentially returning the document sheeU to said
document restacking tray, the improvement in controlled high
speed restacking of flimsy document sheeu in said document
tray comprising:
a plurality of vacuum sheet transport belu extending over
said document restacking tray for retaining thereagainst
and transporting flimsy document sheeU out over said
document restacking tray from adjacent an upstream
(entrance) end thereof toward a downstream end thereof,
wherein one said vacuum belt is adapted to vacuum-retain
one edge of each said flimsy document sheet,
and wherein a second said vacuum belt is spaced from said
one belt by plural intervening said belu, and has a width
greater than said intervening belu, so as to vacuum-retain
the opposite edge of various popular lengths of said sheeu,
sheet sensing means for sensing the transporting of a docu-
632
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
ment sheet over said document tray by said transport
belts.
document sheet knockdown means actuated by said sheet
sensing means for rapidly separating a transported docu*
ment sheet from said transport belts and mechanically
pushing that document sheet down into said document
restacking tray when the document sheet is in a restacking
position,
said document sheet knockdown means comprising a plural-
ity of elongated bars interdigiuted with said plurality of
vacuum transport belts and recessed out of the document
sheet path of said vacuum transport belts when not so
actuating,
said elongated bars being pivotally mounted, relative to the
sheet transport path of said vacuum sheet transport belts,
to have a maximum knockdown effect on the trailing
portion of a document sheet adjacent said upstream (en-
trance) end of said document restacking tray when so
actuated,
and means actuated in coordination with said document
sheet knockdown means to remove vacuum from said
vacuum sheet transport belts during said actuation of said
knockdown means.
4,436^2
APPARATUS FOR SLOWING DOWN AND PREVENTING
EDGE DAMAGE ON MOVING SHEETS
Kenneth G. Frye, South Egremont, Mass.; Donald C. Fitzpat*
rick, Chatham, N.Y., and Arthur T. Karis, Lenox, Mass.,
assignors to Beloit Corporation, Beloit, Wis.
FUed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,002
Int. a.J B65H 29/68
VJS. a. 271—202 34 Qaims
j\WCUUMp V^IA'
30. A method for overlapping cut-size sheets passing in
seriatim flow from a relatively high-speed tape conveyor sys-
tem to a relatively low-speed tape conveyor system, wherein
said low-speed tape conveyor has sheet carrying surfaces at a
level substantially lower than sheet-carrying surfaces for said
high-speed tape conveyor system, comprising:
dropping sheets off a delivery end of said high-speed tape
conveyor system onto a support plate such that the lead-
ing edge of each sheet extends horizontally outward ini-
tially and then gently curves toward said support plate
and the trailing edge of each sheet bends off said delivery
end so as to be snapped down flush with said support
plate,
delaying each sheet downstream of said support plate by
passing each sheet through a slowdown nip formed at the
level of the carrying surfaces of said low-speed conveyor
by upper and lower roll means such that the trailing edge
of each sheet is overlapped by the leading edge of the next
succeeding sheet as the leading edge of the next succeed-
ing sheet drops off said high-speed delivery end,
slowing each sheet down to the speed of said low-speed tape
conveyor system after each sheet has passed through said
slowdown nip with a stop roll means rotatably disposed
over said low-speed tape conveyor system, and
directing each sheet through said slowdown nip at a con-
stant speed less than speed of said high-speed upe con-
veyor system but greater than the speed of said low-speed
Upe conveyor such that the trailing edge of each slowed
sheet is further overlapped by the leading edge of the next
succeeding sheet passing through said slowdown nip.
4,436,303
PHYSICAL THERAPY APPARATUS
James B. McKUlip, 15243 Vanowen, Van Nuys, Calif. 91405,
and Edmund J. Brown, 3186 N. Rouini St., Topanga, Calif.
90290
Continuation of Ser. No. 173,613, Jul. 30, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 937,070, Aug. 28, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jul. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 283,929
Int. a.J A63B 21/22
U.S. a. 272—132 10 Claims
1. An apparatus suitable for physical therapy comprising:
(a) a frame structure;
(b) an angularly movable shaft carried by the frame structure
and engaged by a patient;
(c) (i) first and second clutch discs mounted on the shaft, (ii)
a first one way drive means for moving the first clutch
disc with the shaft only when the shaft angularly moves in
a first direction, and (iii) a second one way drive means for
moving the second clutch disc with the shaft only when
the shaft angularly moves in a second direction opposite
the first direction; and
(d) a pair of frictional adjusting means mounted proximate to
the clutch discs, each adjusting means comprising a cylin-
der containing hydraulic fluid, a piston positioned in each
cylinder for engaging a respective one of the clutch discs,
and means associated with each cylinder for varying the
pressure of the hydraulic fluid in each cylinder for varying
the friction between each piston and its respective clutch
disc, and thereby independently varying the frictional
resistance of the shaft's angular movement alternately in
the first direction and then in the second directions.
4,43634
TENNIS TEACHING AID
Bonnie L. Castleman, 43 Ellen La., and Mary Jean, 25 CllfMde
Dr., both of Manchester, Conn. 06040
FUed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 275,126
Int. a.3 A63B 6J/00
VJS. a. 273—29 A 3 Claims
1. A tennis teaching aid for use on a tennis court having two
net posts between which a standard net is stretched, said teach-
ing aid comprising:
two auxiliary posts attachable respectively to said two net
posts so as to extend vertically upwardly from said net
posts, and
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
633
a target band assembly adapted for connection at its opposite
ends to said two auxiliary posu so as to stretch between
said posu in vertically spaced relation to the top of said
standard net stretched between said net posts,
said target band assembly including at least one rope adapted
to extend between and to be connected at its opposite ends
to said auxiliary posts, and a target band attached to said
rope and of a length approximately equal to the length of
the said standard net stretched between said net posts,
means for releasably connecting one end of said rope to one
of said auxiliary posts, and
means carried by the other of said auxiliary posts for releas-
ably receiving the other end of said rope and for holding
said end in a tightened condition with adjustable tension.
.^^^Xj^^-
a. r-
V. ^
iC
f- :^ -
.'.'i ^ '
„ . 1.
'JBfrm
WF^W"
* ' ^l^f':
I*
/ ,^1 , —
■•
Xc
i^^'
t^
each of said auxiliary posts having a plurality of vertically
spaced openings extending therethrough, said means for
releasably connecting one end of said rope to one of said
auxiliary posts including a snap hook connected to said
one rope end and selectively receivable in any one of said
openings of said one auxiliary post, and said means for
releasably receiving the other end of said rope and for
holding it in a tightened condition with adjusuble tension
comprising a jamb cleat device carried by said other auxil-
iary post below said vertically spaced openings therein so
that said other end of said rope may be inserted through
any selected one of said openings in said other auxiliary
post to determine the heighth of said other end and may be
received by said jamb cleat device to hold it in tightened
condition.
4,43635
COMPOSITE REINFORCED RACKET STRUCTURE
David Femandei, Camarillo, CaUf., assignor to American Sports
Equipment, Camarillo, Calif.
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,255
Int a.» A63B 49/02, 49/12
U.S. a. 273—73 C 10 Claims
1. A frame structure adapted for use as a tennis racket com-
prising:
a tubular frame in the shape of a racket, said racket having a
handle, yoke and head, said frame including interior,
exterior and side surfaces and having first and second end
portions adjacent and parallel each other to form the
racket handle, a semi-circular central portion forming the
racket head and first and second mid portions located
between the racket handle and racket head to form the
racket yoke wherein said first and second mid portions
diverge from each other from the racket handle to the
racket head to form an open space between said mid
portions where they join said central portion;
a plurality of surfaces defining elongated slou in said frame
passing from said exterior frame surface to said interior
frame surface, said slou being located at spaced locations
in the racket handle, yoke and head
a unitary composite nuterial racket support frame having an
outer rim extending continuously around and acyacent to
the frame exterior surface from said first end portion to
said second end portion, an inner rim extending continu-
ously around and adjacent to the frame interior surface
from said first end portion to said second end portion, and
a plurality of integral ribs extending through said elon-
gated slots and joining said outer rim to said inner rim at
the racket handle, yoke and head, said racket support
frame further including one or more spaced integral sup-
port bars located in the racket handle and yoke and ex-
tending between and joining the inner rim of said support
frame, wherein one of said support bars provides a string
mounting and racket support bar integral with said inner
rim and extending across said open space between said
inner rim where said frame mid portions join the frame
central portion, said string mounting and racket support
bar including a plurality of surfaces defining spaced holes
adapted for mounting racket string;
a plurality of surfaces defining holes adapted for mounting
racket string extending through said inner rim, outer rim
and integral rib, said holes passing laterally through the
elongated slots in said frame central portion.
4 436 306
EIGHT-SIDED GAME DICE WITH SUIT ATTRIBUTE
MARKINGS
David M. Sanders, 705 Bay Ave., Capitola, Calif. 95010
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,147
Int. a.J A63F 9/04
U.S. a. 273—146 3 Claims
'\^ '"/
1. A set of five game dice, each die having eight faces, each
634
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
face bearing a numerical attribute marking selected from a
range of eight ranked numerical attribute markings and a suit
attribute marking selected from a set of five suit attribute
markings, the suit attribute and numerical attribute markings
for each face being selected so that:
each die bears one each of two of the five suit attribute
markings thereon and two each of the remaining three suit
attribute markings with the combinations of said two of
the five and the combinations of said three of the remain-
ing five suit attribute markings both being of differing
combinations on each respective die;
each die bears each numerical attribute marking on exactly
one face;
every possible combination of a suit attribute marking and a
numerical attribute marking appears on exactly one face
of the set of five dice with each of the two numerical
attribute markings in the middle of said range of eight
ranked numerical attribute markings appearing in combi-
nation with said one each of two of the five suit atribute
markings on each respective die;
said two numerical attribute markings in the middle of said
range of light ranked numerical attribute markings effec-
tively dividing said range into three groups, a first group
having the three lowest ranked numerical attributes, a
second group having the middle two numerical attributes,
and a third group having the three highest ranked numeri-
cal attributes; and
on each die, any two faces bearing the same suit attribute
marking bear numerical attribute markings which occupy
the same relative positions within said first and third
groups of numerical attributes to permit the throwing of
both ordinary and straight flushes.
4,436,307
DEVICE FOR FACHJTATING ASSEMBLY, STORAGE
AND TRANSPORTATION OF A JIGSAW PUZZLE
T. Francis Caldwell, Rockford, m., aaiigiior to Panic Spedal*
ties, St Charles, 111.
FUcd Jon. 10, 1982, Scr. No. 386,926
Int. a.3 A63F 9/10
VS. a rS— 157 R 11 Claims
1. A device for facilitating assembly of a jigsaw puzzle and
for enabling the puzzle to be transported, said device compris-
ing a generally rectangular assembly tray for holding assem-
bled puzzle pieces, a plurality of generally rectangular storage
trays for holding unassembled puzzle pieces, each of said trays
having a bottom wall and four upstanding side walls, the over-
all height of each storage tray being approximately equal to the
overall height of the assembly tray, the overall length of each
storage tray being slightly less than the overall length of the
assembly tray, and the combined overall widths of the plurality
of storage trays being slightly less than the overall width of the
assembly tray whereby said storage trays may nest removably
within and substantially fill said assembly tray, the bottoms of
said storage trays being located adjacent the bottom of said
assembly tray and engaging any assembled puzzle pieces
therein to hold such pieces in assembled relationship when said
assembly tray is turned on edge and transported, generally
rectangular fUler blocks for each of said storage trays, each of
said fiUer blocks having an overall height approximately equal
to the overall height of the respective filler tray and having an
overall length and width somewhat less than the overall length
and width of the respective filler tray whereby said filler
blocks may nest removably within and substantially fill the
respective storage tray, the bottoms of said blocks engaging
any unassembled puzzle pieces in said storage trays and pre-
venting such pieces from becoming inverted within said stor-
age trays, and a removable cover disposed in covering relation
with the outer sides of said blocks and connected to said assem-
bly tray, said cover holding said blocks in said storage trays
and holding said storage trays in said assembly tray.
4,436,306
BINGO GAME DISPLAY
William Rose, 7862 Naylor Ave., Los Angeles, Calif. 90045, and
David M. Rose, 12849 Via Caballo Rojo, San Diego, Calif.
92129
Filed Jol. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284^1
Int a.) A63F 3/06
VJS. a. 273—237 12 Claims
1. A bingo game display comprising display means including
a plurality of light means arranged in a matrix form corre-
sponding to a bingo card, and control means coupled to the
display means, the control means including memory means
having stored therein information corresponding to a plurality
of patterns desired to be displayed, and a single pattern selector
switch means coupled to the memory means for providing an
output for application to the memory means corresponding to
a desired pattern to be displayed, the memory means being
responsive at least to the output of the pattern selector switch
means for supplying an output to the light means in accordance
with the pattern selected for enabling energization of the Ught
means according to the pattern selected, automatic sequencing
means coupled to the memory means for providing an output
to the memory means which automatically changes at prede-
termined intervals, said automatic sequencing means includes a
counter means for being set to a predetermined number and for
counting up to the predetermin«l number, consecutive pattern
selector switch means for setting the predetermined number
into the counter means, and means for varying the predeter-
mined intervals including clock means for supplying clock
pulses to the counter means, the counter means counting the
clock pulses and supplying an output to the adder means in
accordance with the count thereof, said clock means provides
clock pulses at a fast and a slow rate, and the means for varying
the predetermined intervals includes switch means for select-
ing one of the fast and slow rate clock pulses for application to
the counter means, the memory address supplied by the adder
means being changed at the rate of the clock pulses for causing
sequencing of the memory means and the display patterns
displayed by the light means, said memory means being re-
sponsive to the automatic sequencing means for automatically
changing the output thereof at the predetermined intervals to
energize the light means in accordance with different predeter-
mined pattern according to the outputs of the pattern selector
switch means and the automatic sequencing means, snd digital
adder means for supplying a memory address to the memory
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
633
means, the digital adder means receiving an input from the
pattern selector switch means and an input from the automatic
sequencing means for supplying as a memory address the sum
of the two inpuU, and reset means for resetting the counter
means in response to the counter means counting up to the
predetermined number, whereby different predetermined pat-
terns are displayed during a game.
4,436,309
STRATEGY CARD GAME
Gordon A. Barlow, Glenriew; John R. Newcomer, Des Plalaes,
and Fred Bczark, Northbrook, aU of Ul., aasignora to Gordon
Barlow Design, Skokic, Ul.
FUed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 347,016
Int a^ A63F 3/00
U.S. a. 273-267 3 cuims
///<
: K :
1. A game including:
a game board having a base and pegs upstanding on the base
arranged in columns and rows to define a grid of uni-
formly sized squares,
a plurality of square cards,
each card being divided into nine colored squares identical
in size to the squares of the game board.
notches formed along the sides of each card at the comers of
each square and openings formed in the card at the cor-
ners of the center square so that the cards can be fitted
over the pegs and against one another and the base of the
game board.
the squares on the cards being arranged in patterns of color
so that the cards can be placed on top of one another in a
partially overlapping manner to ultimately form a pattern
of nine contiguous squares of the same color when viewed
from above.
4,436,310
SEALING DEVICE FOR JOINT
Maaald Sawabe, Okazaki, and Tadanobu Kumagai, Toyota, both
of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kai-
aha, Toyota, Japan
FUed Jua. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,832
Claims priority, appUcation Japu, Oct 6, 1981, 56-
147725[U]
Int a.5 F16D 3/84; F16J 3/00
VS. a. 277—11 14 Claims
joint comprising a first shaft, a casing receiving an end portion
of the fu^t shaft through one end and provided with a flange on
the periphery of the other end thereof, and a second shaft
provided with a flange at one end thereof to be joined to the
flange of the casing, said sealing device comprising a sealing
member having an endless shape and provided with a plurality
of projections, and an end cover with iu periphery held be-
tween said flanges and adapted to hold the sealing member in
association with the flange of said casing, said end cover being
provided with a plurality of through holes each of which
receives one of the projections of the sealing member, and said
flange of said second shaft being formed so as to make visible
from ouuide of said joint, when said flanges are joined, the
reception of said projections in said holes.
4,436,311
SEGMENTED LABYRINTH-TYPE SHAFT SEALING
SYSTEM FOR FLUID TURBINES
Ronald E. Brandon, 1734 Lenox Rd., Schenectady, N.Y. 12308
Filed Apr. 20, 1982, Scr. No. 370,093
Int a.} F16J 15/44
UA a. 277-27 7 Claims
1. A combination including a joint and a sealing device, said
I. In an elastic fluid turbine employing seals to minimize
leakage between routing and sutionary componenu, an im-
provement in the seal arrangement utilizing the combination
of:
a segmented seal ring supported by and at least partially
contained in an annular groove formed in a sutionary
casing to permit motion of said seal ring between a large
diameter position and a small diameter position corre-
sponding respectively to large and small clearance of said
seal ring with regard to the routing shaA. said seal ring
groove being partially defined by a pair of opposing,
spaced apart shoulders on said casing which form an
opening of said groove extending radially into the clear-
ance area between said casing and said routing shaft;
each segment of said seal ring including an inner arcuate
portion hving seal teeth extending therefrom in the direc-
tion of and adjacent to said routing shaft, a radially out-
wardly facing arcuate surface on said seal ring segment
which is located opposite to a radially inward facing
arcuate surface of said casing for limiting said large clear-
ance position by contact between said opposing surfaces,
an outer ring portion disposed within said seal ring groove
for both axial and radial movement therein and having a
pair of shoulders, extending axially in opposite directions
for making radial contact respectively with said pair of
spaced apart shoulden on said casing and thereby limiting
said sm^ clearance position, and a neck portion con-
nected between said inner arcuate portion and said outer
ring portion and extending between said casing shoulders,
said neck portion having an axial thickness which is less
than the distance between said opposing casing shoulders
636
\
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
to thereby axially locate said seal ring segment against one
of said casing shoulders and provide a contact pressure
seal at the said of said neck portion which is subject to
lower turbine fluid pressure; and
a radial p>ositioning means comprising a compressed spring
means biased against said ring segments to forcibly cause
said segments to move to said large clearance position,
while working fluid which is freely admitted to the annu-
lar space between said casing and said ring segments will
urge said segments toward said small clearance position,
whereby at low speed and small turbine loads the spring
forces will predominate, while at high flows and high
working fluid pressure the pressure forces will predomi-
nate.
4,436,312
TRANSVERSELY SUPPORTED SEAL
Sydney Davis, 704 Lamberton Dr., Silver Spring, Md. 20902,
and Alexander Malaktaoff, 590 S. Harrison St., Arlington, Va.
22204
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,132
Int. a.^ B63B J/38
U.S. a. 277—34 11 aaims
inside surface having radial dimensions in excess of the
radius of said shaft, concentrically surrounding said shaft,
said housing having an aft end facing aftward;
(2) a plurality of longitudinally spaced annular iron pole
blocks having radially outward surfaces, Tixed on flrst
concentric circles of said housing to said inside surface
and radially inward surfaces spaced from the outer surface
of said shaft adjacent said aft end of said housing, said iron
pole blocks defining at least one annular space between at
least two adjacent ones of said iron pole blocks, having a
radially outward portion and a radially inward portion;
(3) a plurality of circularly arched circumferentially spaced
permanent magnets mounted in said radially outward
portion of each of said at least one annular space so as to
19 „ SS, I 27
bridge said at least two adjacent ones of said iron pole
blocks, leaving a flrst gap in said radially inward portion
and inwardly of said iron pole blocks between the radially
inward surfaces of each of said plurality of permanent
magnets and said plurality of iron pole blocks on the one
hand, and the outer surface of said shaft on the other hand;
and
(4) magnetic fluid comprising magnetic material held in each
said flrst gap; the aftmost one of said at least two adjacent
ones of said iron pole blocks forming the aftmost magnetic
element of said device in the magnetic circuit inclusive of
said magnetic fluid in said each flrst gap; said magnetic
fluid, said permanent magnet, said housing and said iron
pole blocks deflning a non-contact high-pressure seal.
1. A seal structure for an air cushion marine vessel of the
type having a hull with spaced, depending sidewalls for form-
ing a plenum chamber therebetween, comprising:
a flexible bag secured to the hull and positioned between the
sidewalls to form an expansible chamber, said bag being
deformable in response to fluid pressures exerted thereon;
a stiffened lobe portion positioned beneath said bag, said
stiffened lobe portion including a membrane section and a
plurality of elongated stiffener members connected to and
extending traversely across said membrane section; and
support means connected to the hull for flexibly supporting
said stiffened lobe portion beneath said bag;
wherein said support means includes positioning elements
connected to the longitudinal end portions of said stiffener
members, and adjusting straps connected to the hull and
said positioning elements for limiting the downward de-
flection of said stiffened lobe portion.
4,436,314
SLIDE RING SEAL WITH SPRING TO RADIALLY BIAS
IN OPPOSITE RADIAL DIRECTIONS
Paul VoMieck, Bnncheid, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Goetze AG, Burscheid, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 422,191
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 25,
1982, 3202274; Jun. 18, 1982, 3222759
Int. a.J F16J 15/36
U.S. a. 277—86 19 Claims
4,436,313
DEVICE FOR SEALING A PROPELLER SHAFT
AGAINST INVASION OF SEA WATER
Hirosiii Tamama; Ynkio Ozawa, both of Saitama; Jingo Miya-
zaki, Tokyo; Hirosiii Ito, Saitama, and Toyohiro Kinoshita,
Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Japanese National Railways,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,803
Int CU F16J 15/54, 15/40
VS. a. 277—80 9 Claims
1. A device for sealing a propeller shaft extending aftward
from a surface of a ship against invasion of water, comprising:
(1) a cylindrical housing having a longitudinal axis and an
1. A slide ring seal comprising a slide ring having a central
axis and a circumferential face; a tubular sleeve member com-
prising a beUows overlapping at least a portion of said circum-
ferential face and an adhering part integral with said bellows
and extending axially from said slide ring; and a compression
spring approximately conical in configuration positioned
within said tubular sleeve member comprising at least three
spring turns positioned in different radial planes with respect to
said central axis, at least two of said spring turns having differ-
ent diameters, and wherein the spring turns having the smallest
and largest diameter cooperate with said adhering part and
NfARCH 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
637
that portion of said bellows which overiaps said slide ring to
radially bias said slide ring seal in opposite radial directions.
4,436,315
TWO PIECE SEAL ADAPTED FOR SIMPLIHED
INSTALLATION
Seymour A. Hatch, Bensenville, and James P. Morley, ArUng>
ton Heights, both of lU., assignors to CR Industries, Elgin, lU.
FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 311,148
Int. a.3 F16J 15/34
U.S. a. 277-92 9 Claims
1. A mechanical end face seal assembly comprising, in com-
bination, a rigid, abrasion-resistant primary seal ring and an
elastomeric, abrasion-resistant secondary seal ring, said pri-
mary seal ring being an annular ring having a body which
includes flrst and second axial end face portions and a gener-
ally radially inwardly directed, axially extending annular sur-
face portion joining said end portions at their respective inner
diameters, a portion of one of said end faces being finished so
as to provide, in cooperation with a mating ring, a primary seal
band area, said primary ring further includipg a radially out-
wardly directed annular surface having a tapered portion with
the larger diameter portion lying closer to said end face having
said seal band area thereon, and including a substantially cylin-
drical portion lying opposite said end face having said sealing
band area thereon, said secondary seal ring being of an annular
conflguration and having a body with a body center section of
substantially circular cross section and including an outer
surface adapted in use to roll up and down said tapered surface
of said primary seal ring to provide an axial sealing load for
said primary ring, said secondary ring further including a
substantially cylindrical axial portion formed on an inner diam-
eter thereof and extending axially a distance substantially equal
to said substantially cylindrical portion of said primary sealing
ring for positioning said secondary seal ring thereon and fur-
ther including at least one annular positioning rib lying outside
said body center section, with said rib including a radially
inwardly directed, axially facing shoulder surface adapted to
engage said primary ring end face surface opposite said seal
band surface in abutting relation to prevent axial movement of
said secondary seal ring relative to said primary seal ring dur-
ing installation of said seal assembly.
4,436,316
FLUID SEAL
Michael A. Karr, Jr., 9353 Rosstown Way, Houston, Tex. 77080
FUed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,350
lat a.J F16J 15/16
VS. a. 277—124 7 Claims
1. A seal assembly which comprises:
a first seal ring having a geometric axis, said first seal ring
having a unitary substantially rigid support member hav-
ing a cross section which is generally T-shaped, said T-
shaped cross section being defmed by a hoop shaped
section, having inner and outer faces, which is coaxial
with said geometric axis and a section of a generally disc
shaped section which is also coaxial with said geometric
axis; a first annular elastic seal abutting one of said faces;
and a second annular elastic seal abutting the other of said
faces;
a second seal ring which also has a geometric axis, said
. second seal ring has a unitary substantially rigid support
member having a cross section which is generally T-
shaped, the T-shape being defined by a hoop shaped sec-
tion having inner and outer faces, which is coaxial with
said geometric axis, and a section of a generally disc
shaped section which is also coaxial with said geometric
axis; a first annular elastic seal abutting one of said faces;
and a second annular elastic seal abutting the other of said
faces;
said first and said second seal rings and said respective uni-
tary subsUntially rigid support members thereof arc dis-
posed in coaxial and axially abutting relationship;
said seal assembly includes a cylindrical housing thereabout
which includes a weep hole; and
a hoop shaped backup member extends around the outer
circumference of each seal assembly in abutting relation-
ship to one of said annular elastic seals.
4,436,317
CASSETTE SEAL HAVING A COUNTERRING FREE
FROM UNREUEVED INTERNAL STRESS
WiUielm Schmitt, Heppcnheim-Erbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Firma Carl Freudenbcrg, Weinbeim, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jan. 7, 1983, Ser. No. 456,447
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 15,
1982, 3213809
iBt a.J F16J 15/32
VS. a. 277—134 17 Claims
1. In a cassette seal compring a U-ring having legs projecting
in the direction of a relatively rotating machine part, a counter-
ring connected to the relatively rotating machine part, and at
least one sealing lip fabricated from an elastomer material
which rests under pretention against the running surface of the
counterring extending in the axial direction thereby forming a
seal, the improvement which comprises
said counterring is in the shape of a hollow cylinder and is
free of unrelieved internal stresses;
said counterring is associated with said legs of said U-ring
with a small axial clearance on both sides whereby said
counterring and said U-ring enclose a hollow space hav-
ing substantially rectangular boundaries; and
said sealing lip is mounted on said U-ring and extends into
638
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
uid hollow space formed by said counterring and said
U-ring.
4,436,318
VEHICLE LEVEL DETECTOR WITH FAIL-SAFE
MECHANISM
Ma»Mii IcUkawa, Atngi, and SacUo Satake, Yokohama, both
of Japan, aHigaors to Niann Motor Conpaoy, Limited, Yo-
kohama and Atsugi Motor Parts Company Uodted, Atrngi,
both of, Japan
Filed JnL 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,795
Claima priority, application Japan, Sep. 27, 1980, 55-134645
Int a.i B60G 3/14
U.S. a. 280-104 20 Claims
nmning in generally the same direction as the junctions
of said top and side portions; and
(b) an outer wall located on the opposite side of said inner
wall from said tire and cooperatively arranged to reduce
32 b
1. A vehicle level detector comprising:
a detector housing secured onto a vehicle body for motion
therewith;
a stationary transducer element secured with said detector
housing;
a movable transducer element disposed within said detector
housing in an opposing relationship with respect to said
stationary transducer element, said movable transducer
element cooperatively producing a first signal indicative
of the vehicle body elevation relative to a vehicle suspen-
sion member lowered across a first predetermined value
and a second signal indicative of the vehicle body eleva-
tion relative to said vehicle suspension member raised
across a second predetermined; value
a link mechanism connected to said movable transducer
element and operating said movable transducer element
among the first position where said transducer elements
produce said first signal, the second position where said
transducer elements produce said second signal and the
third position where said transducer elemenu are in an
inoperative position; and
a resilient means associated with said movable transducer
element for resiliently positioning said movable trans-
ducer element to said third position.
4,436,319
VEHICLE WHEEL SPLASH GUARD
Jaama E. aotter, 1703 Redbod Ct^ Plaiafldd, Ind. 46168
Filed Oct 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309^1
Int a.i B62D 25/16
U.S. a 280-154 J R 15 Claims
1. A vehicle wheel splash guard for mounting to wheeled
vehicles so u to partially enclose or cover the tires of such
vehicles, said splash guard comprising:
(a) an inner wall having:
(1) an elongated top portion having longitudinal and trans-
verse edges aligned with and above a corresponding
vehicle tire when mounted to a corresponding vehicle;
(2) a pair of side portions extending radially inward from
the longitudinal edges of said top portion toward the
axis of said tire, one side portion adjacent to each side of
said tire;
(3) a plurality of first apertures in said top portion which
extend generally parallel to the axis of said tire; and
(4) a plurality of second apertures in said side portions
32 b
splash and spray from said tire, said outer wall being
joined to said inner wall at the radially inward edges of
said side portions, said jointed location being sealed to
substantially prevent leakage of fiuids therethrough.
4,436,320
CHASSIS FOR INVALID WHEELCHAIRS
Uwe Bmdermann, Heikendorfj Kari-H. Knuc; Gontar KraU,
both of Kiel; E. Volker Unde, Klanadorf, and Dittcr R. Lo-
renz, iQel, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to ETeraat A
Jennings, Inc., Camarlllo, Calif.
FUed Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,740
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Gcmnny, May 7,
1981,31118112
Int a.) B62M 1/14
U.S. CL 280—242 WC 9 Claims
1. A chassis for invalid wheelchairs including, in combina-
tion:
(a) left and right lateral frames for rotatably supporting at
their forward and rear ends front and rear wheels ttxpo
tively, said lateral frames lying in spaced generally verti-
cal parallel planes;
(b) first and second connecting members arranged in a cross,
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
639
lymg generally in an horizontal plane between said verti-
cal parallel planes, the extending ends of said members
being attached to said Uteral frames; and
(c) a third connecting member extending horizontally be-
tween and attached to said Uteral frames in a position
spaced above said horizontal plane, said third member
being normal to said vertical planes, so that when said
chassis is viewed from the side, at the most only two frame
mounting poinu fall on a straight line, said first, second
and third connecting members constituting leaf springs
providing an elutic connection between the lateral frames
permitting slight rotations of the frames in their own
planes about an horizontal axis, the attachment poinU of
said members to said Uteral frames permitting further
eUstic reUtive movemenu between said lateral frames.
4,436,321
ELECTRICALLY RELEASABLE SAFETY SU BINDING
Rnlf Storandt; Georg Scheck, and Peter Biermaan, aU of Leon-
berg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Geze GmbH, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,496
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 9,
Int a.} A63C 9/W5
UA a. 280-612 22aaims
4,436,322
LOCKING MECHANISM
Heinz Wittmann, and VUdimir Konwitn, both of VImum. Aw
tria, aaaipMrs to TMC Corporation, Bnar, Switisrtand
Filed Oct 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,393
of^f^J?!^'?**""**** ^"^^ <^ »• »•». «03/80;
Feb. 4, 1981, 501/81
Int ai A63C 9/06
UA a 280-614 MOalms
1. An electrically releasable safety ski binding comprising a
fixed binding part; retaining means for releasably retaining a ski
boot in the binding; a battery operated power supply; electrical
meuuring sensor means for sensing the load on a skier's leg; a
signal former connected to said electrical meuuring sensor
means for forming a release signal when said load reaches a
predetermined value; a release mechanism including an elec-
tromagnetic converter, wherein said electromagnetic con-
yerter is responsive to said release ngnal to release said retain-
ing means for movement away from said ski boot; a normally
inoperative release spring assocUted with said release mecha-
nism, said release spring having first and second ends; and
means for placing said release spring in an operative sute on
failure of said power supply; wherein, in said operative sUte.
said release spring is disposed operatively in parallel with said
electromagnetic converter, with said first end being braced
against a fixed housing part and said second end bearing on said
release mechanism; and wherein said release spring is arranged
to yield in said operative sute to permit release of said binding
once a predetermined release setting is reached.
1. A safety ski binding for use in cross-country skiing and
downhill skiing, comprising:
a cross-country plate having a bearing block thereon adja-
cent the rear portion thereof to which a heel holder is
supported;
locking means for faciUuting a locking of at leut the rear
portion of said cross-country plate to said ski, said locking
means having a locking element which, in the locked
position of said cross-country plate, is received in an
opening through said cross-country plate, said locking
means further including a slide member movably sup-
ported on said cross-country pUte and being movable
between a first position operstively engaging said locking
element to lock said cross-country pUte to said ski and a
second position free of engagement with said locking
element to unlock said cross-country pUte from said ski,
said locking means further including an elongated rail
fixed to said ski and means on said rail and said locking
element for movably guiding said locking element along
the length of said rail; and
lever means for effecting a movement of said sUde member
between said first and second positions.
V
4,436,323
LOCKING DEVICE FOR A MOVING ANCHOR OF A
SEAT BELT
Kaauo Yamamoto, Sagamlhara, Japan, assignor to NSK-Wamer
K.K., Japan
FOed Jul. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 403,406
Ctaims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 3, 1981, 56.130376rui
Int a.3 B60R 21/10
UAa280-804 scUime
1. A locking device for a moving anchor used in an auto-
matic seat belt system, having:
an anchor member movable between a rearward, seat occu-
pant restraining position and a forward, seat occupant
liberating position along a guide member secured to a
vehicle body;
640
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
a pivotable member pivotably mounted on said anchor mem-
ber;
a driving member operatively connected to said pivotable
member so as to pivotally move said pivotable member
between a first position and a second position, said driving
member moving said pivotable member to said flrst posi-
tion when said driving member is moved from the seat
occupant liberating position toward the seat occupant
restraining position in response to the closing of a door
and thereafter moving said pivotable member and said
anchor member together to the seat occupant restraining
position, said driving member moving said pivotable
member to said second position when said driving mem-
ber is moved from the seat occupant restraining position
toward the seat occupant liberating position in response to
the opening of the door and thereafter moving said pivot-
able member and said anchor member together to the seat
occupant liberating position;
a locking member provided on a base member secured to the
vehicle body and adapted for movement between a lock-
ing position at which the locking member prevents the
movement of said anchor member to the seat occupant
liberating position and a non-locking position at which the
locking member permits movement of said anchor mem-
ber to the seat occupant Uberating position; and
a biasing member biasing said locking member toward said
locking position;
at least one of said pivotable member and said anchor mem-
ber forming a locking surface engageable with said lock-
ing member in its locking position when said anchor mem-
ber is in said seat occupant restraining position and said
pivotable member is in said first position in order to pre-
vent movement of said anchor member to said seat occu-
pant liberating position, said locking member being lo-
cated forwardly of said locking surface when said anchor
member is in said seat occupant restraining position, and
said pivotable member in said second position forming a
cam surface which moves said lock^g member to its
non-locking position when said anchor member and said
pivotable member are about to be moved from the seat
occupant restraining position toward the seat occupant
liberating position by said driving member.
4,436^24
BRIDGE BIDDING AID
Lyndon O. Barton, 26 Shull Dr., Newark, Del. 19711
Filed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,310
Int a.3 G09B 19/22; A63F 3/00
VJS. a. 283—50
4CIaiiiis
I i
7^
W
'J
y^
<]aitc4s»
•ata asM
^^
not uv Kt me
■4o oil SHiai4o 01 jncMta
urniMS lis OFi
OMf IN Un SUIT
2
1^
^.
»oim nouiBie
PHUTT DOU»Li .
10
arwiMC atoeta
^
W"
t i
I i
sheets, devised to aid bridge players in bidding situations,
wherein
a. said sheets and said cover are permanently secured to a
spine, and contain notes so arranged that, when said book-
let is unfolded, four players seated around a table can
simultaneously and independently consult said notes to
decide on their respective bids,
b. said oversized cover has a portion extending beyond said
sheets such that when said booklet is unfolded, said ex-
tended portion forms a border around said sheets,
c. said notes contained on said sheets are so arranged that,
when said booklet is unfolded, the notes relating to the
opening bidding sequence are positioned typically on one
page and face, or are readable only by, the opening bidder,
while the notes relating to the response bidding sequence
are positioned typically on the opposite page and face, or
are readable only by, the responder,
d. said notes contained on said cover are recorded on said
extended portion and arranged such that, when said book-
let is unfolded, they directly face each player,
e. said notes on said sheets and said cover facing each player
are in immediate proximity to each player,
f. said booklet when unfolded and placed on a level surface
will permit said sheets to be maintained in a flat and stable
position.
4,436,325
COUPLING
Jack E. Miller, Hongton, Tex., anignor to Big Inch Marine
Syitema, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Continnation-Ui-part of Ser. No. 214,251, Dec. 8, 1980,
abandoned. Thii appUcation No?. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 320,889
iBt a.3 F16L 55/00. 37/18. 25/00; F16J 15/00
U.S. a. 285—18 50 Clains
VilVM-l .''./"'-"
1. A booklet having an oversized cover and a plurality of
ii
1. A coupling for coupling two tubular elements in sealed
relationship, the coupling comprising:
(a) a first tubular member having an outer end for connec-
tion to one tubular element, and having an inner end
comprising an axially extending locking sleeve, the lock-
ing sleeve having an annular gripping zone defined by the
locking sleeve having at least one annular gripping mem-
ber along its inner surface in the gripping zone, having
cam means along its outer surface in the gripping zone,
and by the locking sleeve being radially compressible in
the gripping zone;
(b) a second tubular member having an outer end for con-
nection to another tubular element, and having an inner
end comprising an inner barrel located within the locking
sleeve;
(c) an annular locking piston which surrounds the gripping
zone, the locking piston being axially displaceable rela-
tively to the first tubular member between an inoperative
position and an operative locking position, and the locking
piston having a locking zone with complementary cam
means along the inner surface of the piston in the locking
zone to cooperate with the cam means of the gripping
zone in the operative position of the piston to radially
compress the gripping zone and thus compress the annular
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
641
gripping member into sealing engagement with the inner
barrel to lock the coupling;
(d) the locking piston being positioned to defme a compres-
sion chamber in the coupling for receiving a compression
fluid under pressure to displace the piston into its opera-
tive position, the compression chamber extending through
between the cam means and the complementary cam
means for compression fluid pressure within the compres-
sion chamber to resiliently expand the locking zone rela-
tively to the gripping zone to reduce interference between
the cam means and complementary cam means during
translation of the piston into its operative position.
4,436,326
FLEXIBLE COUPUNG FOR FLUID DUCTS
Bertram A. Peaiter, Marietta, Ga., aaaignor to Lockheed Corpo-
ration, Burbank, Calif.
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,760
Int. a.J F16L 55/00
U.S. Q. 285—178 7 Qalnu
1. A flexible coupling for fluid ducts when disposed end to
end comprising:
a pair of coupling half assemblies, one adapted to overiie and
surround each of said duct ends, at least one of said assem-
blies including an insert having an eccentric opening for
the passage therethrough of the associated duct end and
each of said assemblies having an engagement comple-
mental to the engagement of the other assembly;
a connector operative on said engagements to thereby se-
cure them one to the other against relative movement;
a ring spacer having an overall diameter substantially equal
to the internal diameter of said coupling half assemblies;
a pair of discs, each provided with a central eccentric open-
ing substantially equal in diameter to the external dimen-
sion of each respective one of said duct ends for the pas-
sage therethrough of said one duct end, one of said discs
being disposed between each said coupling half assembly
and said ring spacer; and
a seal between each coupling half assembly and the associ-
ated disc.
4,436,3r
CLAMP JOINT FOR PIPES
Rudolf Schacfer, Brauarttraaae 38, IMIOO Duiaborg 1, Fad.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,562
CUdnf priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 20,
1980, 3031314
lat a.> F16L 23/Oa 19/00. 25/00
US. a. 288—364 9 Clainii
1. Clamp Joint for axially clamping together the end faces of
first and second coaxial cylindrical members having identical
diameters, said clamp joint comprising: at leut one first projec-
tion secured to the first member near the end face thereof and
at leMt one second projection secured to the second member
near the end face thereof, each projection projecting substan-
tially radially outwardly from its aasociated member, and lying
in a plane parallel to the common longitudinal axis of the
members, said second projection being provided with a bore
whose axis is transverse to the common longitudinal axis of the
members; a connecting part articulated to said first projection,
extending axially from the first member to the region of said
second projection and lying in a plane parallel to the common
longitudinal axis of the members, said connecting part being
provided with a first bore whose axis is transverse to the com-
mon longitudinal axis of the members and located to be aligned
with said bore in said second projection when the end faces of
the members are in proximity to one another; and a first bolt
arranged to be inserted into said first bore in said connecting
part and said bore in said second projection in the direction of
the axes of said bores, said first bolt being provided with a
laterally projecting eccentric portion extending along a se-
lected region of its length to engage one of said bores when
said first bolt is inserted therein; with said one of said bores
having a diameter which corresponds to the diameter of said
first bolt and the lateral extent of said projecting eccentric
portion and the other of said bores having a diameter which is
smaller than that of said one of said bores and which corre-
sponds to the diameter of said first bolt ouuide of said selected
region of its length, and wherein said first projection is pro-
vided with a bore whose axis is transverse to the common
longitudinal axis of the members, and said connecting part is
provided with a second bore whose axis is transverse to the
common longitudinal axis of the members and which is aligned
with said bore in said first projection, and further comprising
means articulating said connecting part to said first projection,
said means being composed of a second bolt arranged to be
inserted into said second bore in said connecting pari and said
bore in said first projection in the direction of the axes of those
bores, said second bolt being provided with a laterally project-
ing eccentric ponion extending along a selected region of iu
length at a location such that when said second bolt is inserted
into said bore in said first projection and said second bore in
said connecting part, said projecting eccentric ponion of said
second bolt engages one of said bores into which said second
bolt is inserted, with said bore which is engaged by said pro-
jecting eccentric poriion of said second bolt having a diameter
which corresponds to the diameter of said second bolt and the
lateral extent of said projecting eccentric portion of said sec-
ond bolt, and the other of said bores into which said second
bolt is inserted having a diameter which is smaller than that of
said bore which is engaged by said projecting eccentric portion
of said second bolt and which corresponds to the diameter of
said second bolt outside of said selected region of iu length.
4,436,328
KEYLESS LOCK
John E. Chanioaky, 8 Maleola St„ Waet Babylon, N.Y. 11704
FUad Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,288
lat a> E05C 5/02
MA. a. 292—67 8 ClaiM
1. An Improved keyless lock which comprises:
(a) a helical spring;
(b) a rectangular housing having a plurality of mounting
642
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
holes, a recessed central square aperture surrounded by an
annular lip on top, a slot in a long side wall and an open
bottom;
(c) a latch consisting of a round portion having a square
aperture, a tongue on the one side and a comer stop on
other side;
(d) a latch release having a finger grip handle and a shaft
with a square mating portion placed through said helical
spring, said square aperture in said housing and said square
aperture in said latch so that said finger grip handle is in
1^ with said tongue of said Utch;
(e) means for fastening said latch release to said latch so that
when said finger grip handle is depressed compressing
said helical spring, said square mating portion of said latch
release will disengage with said square aperture of said
housing allowing said latch release and said latch to rotate
to a locked position through said slot in said long side wall
of said housing whereby said comer stop engages the solid
long wall of said housing preventing further rotation; and
(0 means for mounting said rectangular housing to a frame.
4,436,329
LOCKING MECHANISM
Thonaa J. Metiger, 6501 NW. 87th Ave^ Parkhud, Fla. 33067
FIM Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,339
iBt a.} E05C 1/06
MS. CL 292—150 4 Ckdma
1. A locking mechanism for a sliding window or door of the
type having an inner transparent pane mounted to a rectangu-
lar inner frame and an outer surrounding rectangular frame
naounted to a wall, said locking mechanism being incorporated
within one side of said inner frame and comprising a sUde, a
latch adapted to move and lock said slide, a deadbolt attached
to said slide and adapted to extend into said outer frame to lock
said frames together, said inner frame defining a latch port
adjacent said latch, said latch port comprising a wider locking
segment and a narrower adjacent unlocking segment, said
latch comprising a latch post, a latch button, a latch casing, and
a latch spring, said latch post being coupled to said slide and
extending therefrom to said latch port, said latch button being
slideably mounted on said latch post and defining a railed
button portion and a lower button portion, and latch spring
surrounding said latch post between said latch button and said
slide, so that said raised button portion will extend through said
locking segment when said latch button is manipulated to
move said slide to engage said deadbolt with said outer frame,
said latch spring maintaining said raised button portion in said
locking segment until said latch button is depressed, said latch
casing being positioned between said slide and said latch port,
said casing surrounding said latch button and defining slot
means for passage of said latch bolt between said latch button
and said slide, said latch casing being adapted to prevent excur-
sion of said latch button and said slide beyond said latch port
within said inner frame.
4,436,330
FOLDING SUPPORT WITH DOUBLE-POSITIVE LOCK
Henry C. Mayo, Alexandria, and Joaaph E. KonaBdorfar, Ma-
naaaaa, both of Va., aastgnon to The United States of America
as represented by the Secretary of the Amy, Waahiagtoa,
D.C
FUed Dec. 4, 1961, S«r. No. 327,530
bt a.' E05C 17/32
U.S. a. 292—263 9 Claims
1. A folding support assembly which opens to hold a sup-
ported object a predetermined distance from a supporting
object having a first arm with a slot at one end, a second arm
having a first end and a second end, said first end being pivot-
ally connected to one of said supporting object and said sup-
ported object, and having a bracket assembly extending from
the second arm mounted along the length of the second arm
between the first and second ends of the second arm, a pin
mounted in the bracket assembly, wherein the first arm is
connected to the second arm at the bracket assembly such that
the pin of the second arm extends through the slot of the first
arm and the first arm is pivotable about the pin, and further
having:
a Utch assembly positioned on the second arm on said sec-
ond end which locks the pivotable movement of the first
arm when the support assembly is in an open position.
4,436,331
MULTIPLE-POSITION HASP-TYPE DOOR CHECK
Howard E. Gliekauw, 4 NairtMlMt La., OUfetta, Mo. 63U2;
Alan J. BroddoB. 7400 BarirtafhaM, Claytaa, Mo. 63105. aad
Nomaa C BroddoB, 10984 Ckamhray CL, Oers Coaw, Mo.
63141
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Sar. No. 319,220
Lit CL) E05C 17/16
UjS. a 292—270 5 CbdM
1. A door check of the type having, for affixing to the inner
surface of a door jamb, a hasp hinged on a fixed vertical axis,
the hasp being elongated and having perpendicular to said axis
an elonigated slot terminating at the hinge axis in an enlarged
yoke-like opening, the door check further having, for affixhig
to the inner surface of a door, a slide-supporting member firom
which a headed slide member projects horizontally parallel to
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
643
such door surface, for reception within the opening of the hup
for sliding within iu slot, characterized in that:
A. the slot has, continuing from the yoke-like opening, a
broader slot portion extending to a shoulder-like junction,
from which a narrower slot portion continugi^JVid^
B. the slide member has a deeper portion slidable within the
broader slot portion and a shallower slide portion alterna-
tively slidable within the narrower slot portion, and termi-
nates in a head whose depth is less than such yoke-like
opening and greater than either said slot portions,
whereby by moving the hasp on iu hinge and on fitting the
slide member head through the yoke-like opening, a per-
son inside the door may select between the extent of
opening permitted by the said two slot portions.
4,436,393
HAND OPERATED HOIST HAVING IMPROVED MEANS
CONTROLLING FREE ROTATION OF A LOAD SHEAVE
Ki^Ji Taada, Osaka, Japan, aaaipuir to El^ihant Ckala Blocli
Company Limited. Osaka, Japan
FUad Apr. 2, 1981. Ser. No. 250.157
Caains priority, appUcatioa Japan, Apr. 1, 1980, 55-43130
Int. a.) B66D 1/04
U A a 294-82 R g ciaiiw
4,436,332
MOP HEAD INSTALLATION TOOL
Ehner L. EUiaon, 1157 N. 33rd St, Springflald, Oreg. 97477
Filed Ang. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 28934
Int. a» A47L 13/25
MS. a. 294—1 R 2 Gains
1. A hand held tool for temporary engagement with and
manually stretching fabric mop heads during installation of
same on elongate mop frames, said tool comprising,
a handgrip, and
a guide structure of semi-circular section integral with one
end of said handgrip, said guide structure including a lip
remote from the handgrip and adapted for temporary
inserted engagement with one end of a mop head, said
guide structure including a curved surface area along
which one end of the mop frame may slide into inserted
engagement with that portion of the mop head temporar-
ily engaged by said Up of the guide structure.
1. A hand-operated hoist comprising a hoist body, means for
hanging said body, a sheave shaft hsving s load sheave sup-
ported routably to said body, power operation means for
driving said sheave shaft, and control means for permitting
roution of said sheave shaft, said power operation means
comprising s drive shaft, a roUUbly driven hand wheel driven
by an endleu chain, said hand wheel being coupled with said
drive shaft by screw means, a mechanical brake for locking
reverse roution of said sheave shaft and for transmitting a
driving force from said hand wheel when it routes in s driving
direction to said drive shaft, and a reduction gear mechanism
comprising a plurality of gean through which the driving
force from said hand wheel is reduced in speed and transmitted
to said sheave shaft, said drive shaft being supported to said
sheave shaft so as to be axially movably with respect thereto
and having an urging member for urging said hand wheel
toward said mechanical brake, so that when said hand wheel is
unscrewed by being routed reversely to said driving direction,
when said load sheave bean no load, said drive shaft axially
moves in a first direction under the action of said urging mem-
ber and at least one of the gean of said reduction gear mecha-
nism axially moves in said flnt direction to follow axial move-
ment of said drive shaft, said control means including a clutch
mechanism which functions upon axial movement of said gear
following axial movement of said drive shaft to disengage and
interrupt the driving force transmitted to said sheave shaft
thereby allowing said sheave shaft to freely rouu, said at leut
one gear being provided with a spring means for biasing said
clutch mechanism in a disengaging position so that when said
hand wheel is routed reversely the axial movement of said
gear following said drive shaft in said fint direction causes said
spring means to operate to disengage said clutch m^hanttm
permitting free roution of said load sheave, and means for
axially forcibly moving said driving shaft and said gear in a
second direction opposite the fint upon relative roution of
said hand wheel with respect to said driving shaft when said
hand wheel is changed in roUtional direction from a reverse
rotation direction to said driving direction.
644
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,334
RELEASING OVERSHOT APPARATUS
Lloyd C. Rathborm Friciidfwood, Tou MiigBor to Loomli
International Inc^ Pasadena, Tex.
Filed Oct 19, 1981, Scr. No. 312,770
Int CL^ E21B 31/12
U.S. a. 294— 86J 11 Claims
refrigerator rod, thereby to dampen oscillation move-
ments of said refrigerator and refrigerator rod, and.
8. A retrieving apparatus comprising: a tubular body having
oppositely disposed longitudinally extending slots in the wall
thereof, each of said slots having an inclined surface at its
lower end; an elongated gripping member carried in each of
said slots and being movable longitudinally and laterally with
respect thereto; first resilient means reacting between said
body and said gripping members for urging the lower end
portions thereof into engagement with said inclined surfaces to
cause said lower end portions to move inwardly to a gripping
position; second resilient means reacting between central por-
tions of said gripping members and urging said central portions
laterally outward whereby inward pressure on the upper end
portions thereof can be employed to pivot said gripping mem-
bers about said central portions to cause outward movement of
said lower end portions to a released position; and means
projecting from the upper end of each gripping member for
limiting outward movement with respect to said body, said
first resilient means being constituted by a coil spring having its
lower end section received over said limiting means.
4,436,335
APPLIANCE SUPPORTS
CharUa J. Yooa, 39182 SJL 517, Lisbon, Ohio 44432
Filed Jan. 11, 1982, Scr. No. 338^54
iBt a.} B60N 3/10
U.S. CL 296—24 R 6 Claims
1. A support for a refrigerator housed in a travel trailer,
comprising:
support means rigidly connected to a surface of said trailer
and disposed above a floor space of said trailer a distance
greater than the height of said refrigerator,
a rod rigidly secured to said refrigerator and extending
upwardly therefrom to said support means,
a ball and socket connection between the refrigerator rod
and said support means thereby to suspend said refrigera-
tor and permit it to swing to level condition when said
travel trailer is in any tilted position,
a plurality of dash pots having the cylinders and rods thereof
respectively interconnected between said refrigerator rod
and a laterally adjacent surface of the trailer with said
dash pots in angular spaced relation about the axis of said
v
\
\
N
N
\
N
^"s^^x"
1/ ^ '! \
\ / ' ^
USI^SE
K
^:vsT^^v^vs^v^\\^v^^^^^;:^^^^^'\vc
means connected to said rod and to a wall of said trailer to
restrain movement of said refrigerator rod about its longi-
tudinal axis, thereby to prevent said refrigerator from
excessively rotating during any tilting movement.
4,436,336
HATCHBACK DOOR OF A MOTOR VEHICLE
Tetsuo Shimizu, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan
FUed No?. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,772
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 3, 1980, 55*
173365[U]
Int. CI.3 B62D 25/00
U.S. a. 296—76 3 Claims
1. A hatchback door assembly for a vehicle comprising:
a hatchback door of glass hinged at its one edge portion to
the vehicle body to be swingable upward and downward
relative to the vehicle body to open and close a door
opening formed in said vehicle body;
an elongate strip of flexible elastic material which is attached
to the other edge portion of said door in a manner to
extend along the entire of the other edge portion and to
cover at least the extreme edge of same, said elongate strip
including a main-portion covering the outside surface of
the other edge portion and a sub-portion straddling the
extreme edge of the other edge portion to cover the inside
surface of the other edge portion;
an elongate retainer embedded in the main-portion of said
strip to extend along the length of said strip; and
bolts and nuts for securing said strip to said glass door, each
bolt being secured to said retainer and extending there-
from to be inserted in the corresponding hole formed in
the glass door having its leading end projected from the
inside surface of the glass door, each nut being screwed to
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
MS
the projected end of the corresponding bolt to assure the
connection of the strip to said glass door.
4,436,337
VEHICLE BODY MOLDING ASSEMBLY
Laurence B. Bowes, Utica, and Thomas J. Gray, Warren, both of
Mich., assignors to General Motors Corporation, Detroit,
Mich.
FUed Aug. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 404,562
Int. Q\} B62D 25/02
U.S. a 296—201 3 Claims
which the sliding cover can be operated via a transmission, at
least one threaded cable and a cover-adjusting unit connected
with the threaded cable, and having a switching arrangement
that is in operating connection with the cover-adjusting unit
and is rendered operative as a Amotion of the position of the
cover-adjusting unit, said switching arrangement switching off
current supply to the electric motor in a position of the cover-
adjusting unit that corresponds to a closed position of the
sliding cover, wherein, between the cover-adjusting unit and
the switching arrangement, a clutch means is provided for
interrupting the operating connection between the cover-
adjusting unit and the switching arrangement.
1. A vehicle body reveal molding assembly comprising, in
combination,
an elongated body member of angular cross-section for
abutting a complementary shaped portion of a vehicle
body panel,
an angular cross-section molding attachment portion extend-
ing outwardly of the plane of the body member,
means integrally attaching opposite end edges of the attach-
ment portion to the body member,
the body member including an opening therethrough under-
neath each side edge of the attachment portion,
and an elongated molding of angular cross-section having
side edge portions provided with elongated terminal
flanges reversely bent underneath the molding, the edge
portions and flanges overlying and concealing the open-
ings in the body member underneath each side edge of the
attachment portion, and seating on the body member to
each side of each opening, the flanges edgewise engaging
the side edges of the molding attachment portion to releas-
ably secure the molding to the body member.
4,436,338
OPERATING MECHANISM FOR A TILTABLE SLIDING
COVER
Hans Jardin, Inning, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Webas-
to-Werk W. Baler GmbH A Co., Munich, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,530
Int. a.J B60J 7/04
U.S. Q. 296—223 12 Claims
4,436439
LAP DEVICE FOR WHEELCHAIR PATIENTS
Arthur L. H. Albers, 1916 Green Bay Rd., Grafton, WU. 53024
FUed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 311,996
Int. a.3 A47B 63/02
U,S. G. 297—153 1 Claim
1. An operating mechanism for a tUtable sliding cover of a
roof of a motor vehicle having an electric motor by means of
1. In combination with a wheelchair having a seat with a
front edge, a back, armrests set back from the said front edge
of said seat, and vertical bracing members extending down-
wardly from the front terminus portions of said armrests:
(a) a lap device for positioning in front of the patient,
(b) coupling means for removably attaching the rear portion
of said lap device to said vertical bracing members below
the plane of said armrests,
(c) said coupling means being constructed to respectively
connect or disconnect said lap device from said vertical
bracing members by arcuate downward or upward pivot-
ing of said lap device rear portion about a transverse
horizontal axis extending between said bracing members,
said coupling means comprising:
(1) coupling assemblies secured to said vertical bracing
members,
(2) said coupling assemblies each including a base, an
upper lip, and a hook having an upwardly forwardly
inclined body portion which merges at its upper end
into a rearwardly bent tail,
(3) and opening means formed in the rear comer of said
lap device for being received over said hooks,
(4) said tails forming means to confme said rear comers
against said upper lips when said lap device is in its
lowered coupled position,
(d) and stabilizing locator means connected to said lap de-
vice and engageable with said bracing members upon
downward pivoting of said lap device,
(e) the said opening means of said lap device being automati-
cally movable over said hook tails upon forward tipping
of the wheelchair to the floor to thereby automatically
decouple said frame from the wheelchair.
1040 O.G.— 25
646
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4>436J40
FISHING SEAT, ROD HOLDER AND PAIL !^!li^""!,^°' connecting said shoulder portions to said back
H.iio' Henuadei, 1085 Admoot A.e.. F>«J» Squ^e, N Y ^TZtTu T '"'J'^ J"««» ^^ detachably connecting
now ^^ '^""•' '^•*- «"d crotch portion of said harness portion to said seat portion
FUed Jul. 27. 1981, Ser. No. 287,188 *" *** '''°^^ P°"'°" °^ ***** f*"®"* P°^^°^-
lat a.3 A47C 9/00 '
VS. a. 297—193 , ri-«—
FURNITURE JOINT ASSEMBLY
Wtrren C. Nilson, Omro, and Thomas L. Rabe, Oihkodi, both of
wia^ asaignon to The Buckstaff ComiMiiy. Inc., Otkoah, Wis.
Filed Not. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,499
Int. a.3 A47C ;//2
UA a 297-445 14 Claim.
1. A combined fishing seat, rod holder and pail, comprising-
an elongated horizontal seat member,
a pail positioned under said seat, a pair of holes in the side of
the pail along a diameter,
a mounting member fixedly connected to the underside of
the seat and adapted to fit into the pail,
a pair of extension members extending from the ends of the
•mounting member, the extension members being adapted
to fit into the holes in the pail,
a pair of members hinged to the elongated seat member so as
to cover the pail opening, and
a plurality of mounting holes mounted adjacent the ends of
the horizontal seat member whereby fishing rods, warning
mdicators and containers may be mounted in said holes.
4,436,341
INFANT SAFETY CAR SEAT
MMiricc CooverK, 1311 BriarUll Dr., Akron, Ohio 44313
FUed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,300
„„ _ Int a.J A47C //fltf
UAa297-250 5 Qaim.
1. A jomt assembly in an article of furniture comprising-
a first elongated furniture component having a surface and
havmg a wedge shaped groove extending inwardly along
said surface of said component,
a Mcond elongated furniture component connected to said
first component such that the longitudinal axes of said
components are substantially perpendicular to each other
and one of said longitudinal axes lies in a substantially
vertical plane and said second component having a sur-
face, said surface having a wedge shaped groove extend-
ing mwardly along said surface, said wedge shaped
grooves m said first and second furniture components
havmg substantially equal dimensions and being in align-
ment, said grooves in said first and second components
cooperating to define a wedge receiving recess located
along the surface formed by the joining of said first and
second components, and
a wedge member disposed within said wedge receivina
recess. *
4,436,343
FRAMELESS FOAM BASE FOR UPHOLSTERED
SEATING FURNITURE AND METHOD
Charles Schneider, 314 South 67th St., Omaha, Nebr. 68132
FUed Not. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,190
Int, a.J A47C 7/18, 7/24
US. a 297-456 „ cw^
1. A safety car seat of the type used for infants and adapted
to rest on and be releasably secured to a conventional automo-
bUe seat comprising bottom, seat, back and side portions inte-
grally secured together, a front portion comprising a rigid
cross member fixed above said seat portion and a croteh por-
tion extendmg downwardly from said cross member to said
seat portion to define a pair of leg openings, means detachably
connecting said cross member to said side portions, infant
harness means mcluding shoulder portions and a croteh por-
1. Foam base for furniture seating comprising a pluraUty of
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
647
angularly intersecting panels of low-density resiliently-com-
pressive foam material, said plurality of foam panels including
a spaced apart pair of upright arm-panels and at least one
intersecting-panel, each upright arm-panel including a non-
vertical top-edge and a pair of upright surfaces including an
outward-surface remote from the intervening-panel and an
inward-surface closer to the intervening-panel, the angularity
between each upright arm-panel and the intervening-panel
being maintained with opposed angular stifTener connections
including an internal-angle connector and an external-angle
connector located respectively at the interior-angle and at the
exterior-angle formed by each arm-panel and an intervening
panel, each angular stifTener connection being provided by
flexible fabric sheeting adhered to the arm-panel and to the
intervening-panel, said adhesively attached fabric sheeting
being of low permeability to airflow so to also, in addition to
providing angularity maintenance means, provide a barrier to
airflow whereby the arm-panel is resistent to decompression
whenever the furniture occupant bears his weight against the
arm-panel, and each said internal-angle connector being
wholly relegated in elevation a finite distance below the armr-
esting top-edge of the upright arm-panel so as to enhance
comfort to the seated occupant's arm resting downwardly
thereagainst.
4,436,344
IN SITU RETORTING OF OIL SHALE WITH PULSED
COMBUSTION
John M. Forgac, Elmhunt, lU., and Gerald B. Hockstra, de-
ceased, late of South HoUand, lU. (by Edith Hockstra, execu-
trii), aaiignors to Standard OU Company (Indiana), Chicago,
lU.
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,687
Int. a.J E21B 43/243; E21C 4J/W
VS. a. 299—2 24 Claims
FfED US Puf L PJRSE
Iki.l 6*1
1^ k
1. A process for retorting oil shale, comprising the steps of:
heating a portion of a rubblized mass of oil shale to a retort-
ing temperature to liberate shale oil and ofT gases contain-
ing hydrocarbons from said oil shale leaving retorted
shale containing residual carbon;
combusting said residual carbon in said oU shale in a combus-
tion zone behind said retorting zone in said underground
retort with a flame front fed by a feed gas. said flame front
advancing generally in the direction of flow of said feed
gas;
quenching said flame front by blanketing said flame front
with a purge gu consisting of stripped recycled off gases
and subsequently reigniting said flame front whUe con-
tinuing to liberate shale oil and off gases containing hydro-
carbons in said retorting zone;
withdrawing said liberated shale oil and off gases containing
hydrocarbons from said underground retort;
stripping said hydrocarbons from said off gases; and
recycling said stripped of gases to said retort for use as said
purge gas.
4,436,345
CONTINUOUS MINING MACHINE HAVING CONTOUR
CUTTERS
Walter SUks, Downers Grore, and Joseph Gonski, Oak Lawn,
both of lU., assignors to Goodman Equipment Corporation,
Chicago, lU.
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,497
Int. a.J E21C 27/24
VS. d 299—59 32 Claims
1. A rotary boring head for use in a continuous boring opera-
tion or the like comprising:
a prinuuy cutter head having a longitudinal axis defining a
first rotational axis and being operative to rotate and cut a
bore of predetermined transverse cross-sectional configu-
ration in a mine face or the like when advanced there-
against while rotating about said first rotational axis,
at least one contour cutter carried by said primary cutter
head about said first rotational axis as said primary cutter
head routes, said contour cutter being rotatable about a
second roUtional axis parallel to and spaced from said first
roUtional axis and in predetermined timed relation to the
rotetion of said primary cutter head,
said contour cutter having at least one cutter tooth thereon
operative to cut selected circumferentially spaced areas
radially outwardly of the bore cut by said primary cutter
head during said rotation of said primary cutter head and
said contour cutter in said predetermined timed relation so
as to enlarge said bore and give it a cross-sectional shape
approximating a square,
and means for rotating said primary cutter head and said
contour cutter in said predetermined timed relation.
4,436,346
CUTTING ROLLER FOR A MINING MACHINE
Gcrd Best, SprockhttTcl, and Norbert B. WeUurt, Dortmund,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Krampc A Co.
Fertignng in Bergbaubedarf GmbH, Hamm, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,724
Claims priority, appUcatioa Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 17,
1981, 3108732
iBt a.! E21C 25/10
VS. CL 299—87 13 Claims
1. A cutting roller for a mining machine, comprising a tubu-
lar body member having a longitudinal central axis, an end
nearer the workings and a discharge end; a closure member
adjacent said end nearer the workings and arranged to face the
workings; at least two blades helically extending along an
outer surface of the body member parallel one to another to
form a space therebetween; and at least one charging coil on
said body member mounted in said space, said charging coil
extending only over a part of the length of the tubular body
member in a direction of said longitudinal axis, said charging
coil extending along said outer surface parallel to said blades,
648
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
said blades and charging coil extending about said outer sur-
face with an equal angle of inclination, and wherein said charg-
ing coil has its largest size in a radial direction at said discharge
end of the tubular body member.
1. A pressure-medium brake system for vehicles having at
least two brake circuits, each of said brake circuits having its
own source of pressure-medium, and each having one relay
valve, said brake circuits controlled by a multi-circuit service
brake valve, said multi-circuit service brake valve being in a
line extending to control chambers associated with each of said
relay valves, said control chambers arranged to control a
braking medium, characterized in that said sources of pressure
medium supplies a control for each of said relay valves and a
working medium for actuation of the brake circuit and further
that an electrical supply means for additional control of said
relay valves is provided at said multi-circuit service brake
valve.
4436,348
ANTI-SKID HYDRAULIC BRAKING SYSTEMS FOR
VEHICLES
Glyn P. R. Farr, Warwickihire, England, assignor to Lucas
Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
FUed Oct. 7, 1982, Scr. No. 433,233
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct 13, 1981,
8130883
Int a.) B60T %/02
MS, a. 303—115 24 Claims
1. An anti-skid hydraulic braking system for vehicles com-
prising a wheel brake, a source of hydraulic fluid under pres-
sure for applying said brake, skid sensing means for emitting
skid signals responsive to behaviour of said wheel when said
brake is appUed, a modulator assembly for modulating the
supply of fluid from said source to said brake in resilonse to
said skid signals from said skid sensing means, said modulator
assembly comprising a housing having a bore, a de-boost piston
working in said bore, a first valve, means in said housing defin-
ing an expander chamber between an end of said de-boost
piston and said first valve, said first valve being disposed be-
tween said source and said expander chamber, means in said
housing defining a support chamber to which said de-boost
piston is subjected, and a second valve for controlling applica-
tion to said de-boost piston of support fluid in said support
chamber to determine the relative position of said de-boost
piston in said bore, said support fluid normally being adapted
to provide a biassing force for holding said de-boost piston in
an advanced position in which the effective volume of said
expander piston is at a minimum value, and said first valve
being movable between an open position at least when said
4436,347
PRESSURE MEDIUM BRAKE SYSTEM HAVING A
DUAL-VALVE CONTROL
Werner Stumpe, Komwestheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Aug. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 411,140
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 6,
1982, 3204185
Int. a.3 B60T WIS
U.S. a. 303—6 R 4 Claims
de-boost piston is in said advanced position and a closed posi-
tion when said de-boost piston is displaced from said advanced
position and into a retracted position, and means responsive to
a skid signal to manipulate said second valve in order to release
said support fluid thereby reducing said biassing force where-
after said piston can move away from said advanced position
and into said retracted position in which said effective volume
of said expander chamber is increased thereby reducing said
pressure of fluid applied to said brake, wherein means are
provided for normally biassing said first valve into a fully open
position, and operation of said first valve is controlled indepen-
dently of the de-boost piston, inhibit means being incorporated
to ensure that at the termination of a skid signal said first valve
is maintained in a closed position at least until said de-boost
piston has returned to said advanced position.
4,436,349
ROLLING BEARING
Stig L. HallerbMck, Vjistra FrSlunda, Sweden, assignor to Alt*
tiebolaget SKF, Gothenburg, Sweden
FUed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,136
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden, Jan. 10, 1981, 8103629
Int. a.3 F16C 79/00, W3S. 33/44
U.S. a. 308—189 R 7 Claims
1. A retainer for a rolling bearing including inner and outer
race rings and rolling elements in the annular space between
the rings comprising a pair of annular members and a series of
circumferentially spaced webs between the annular members
defining pockets for the rolling elements, said annular members
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
649
consisting of a ring-Uke reinforcing member of a metallic mate-
rial having substantially the same coefficient of thermal expan-
sion as the race rings and embedded in an outer shell of a
plastic material having a different coefficient of thermal expan-
sion, said metallic ring-like reinforcing members being an-
chored to said plastic outer shell at said web locations and said
outer shell being of a greater cross sectional area at said web
locations than the areas in between whereby the thermal ex-
pansion properties of said metallic reinforcing members domi-
nates.
4,436350
HOUSING AND RELATED MOUNTING SYSTEM FOR
STEREO SYSTEMS ON MOTORCYCLES
Bart JoUn, 2265 W. Broadway Apt. H-101, Anaheim, CaUf.
92804
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 236,503
Int. a.J A47B 81/06. 96/06: B62J 7/00
U.S. a. 312—7.1 4 Claims
1. A housing and mounting system for stereos, radios, mobile
communication broadcasting systems, and the like, with their
related units for motorcycle comprising:
(a) A plastic hollow housing unit suitably shaped to contain
a stereo, radio, C.B. or the lUce with necessary auxiliary
elements; and
(b) (Means to support said housing unit and connect said unit
to the handlebars of a motorcycle (.) comprising two or
more support arms with means to connect such support
. arms to said housing unit and means to connect said sup-
port arms to the handlebars of a motorcycle.) Two or
> more support arms;
(c) Means to connect said support arms to said housing unit
comprising two housing brackets connected to or integral
with said housing unit;
(d) Said housing brackets containing a channel and appropri-
ate nuts and bolts to contain said support arms insertable in
said channel.
to receive electronics equipment therein, means on said
case for mounting the electronics equipment in said case,
said case being selectively pivotally movable between open
and closed positions relative to said bottom mount por-
tion,
said case, when in its open position, presenting said open
bottom portion in a forwardly manner whereby said elec-
tronics equipment is exposed for operation,
said case, when in its closed position, extending over and
around the electronics equipment to shield the electronics
equipment from the elements of weather,
a pivotal mounting means pivotally connecting each of said
side portions of said case to one of the side walls of said
bracket,
at least one of said pivotal mounting means including selec-
tive locking means for selectively maintaining said case in
its said open and closed positions.
4,436,352
KITCHEN FURNISHINGS
YosUo Okada, Katano; YosUaki Suzuki, Suits; Ryohei
Murakami, Habiklno, and Yoshiaki Segawa, Nishinoralya, aU
of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,
Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
PCT No. PCT/JP81/00029, § 371 Date Oct. 15, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 15, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02382. PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 3, 1981
per FUed Feb. 16, 1981, Scr. No. 314,096
Gaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 20, 1980, 55-20713
Int. a.J A47B 77/06; A47L 19/02
U.S. a. 312—228 6 Claims
4,436,351
APPARATUS FOR MOUNTING ELECTRONICS
EQUIPMENT
John V. KitreU, Lincoln, Nebr., assignor to Radio Engineering
Serricc, Inc., Omaha, Nebr.
FUed Nov. 20, 1981, Scr. No. 323,542
Int. a.J A47B 77/08: F16L 5/00
VS. CL 312—223 4 Claims
1. An apparatus for mounting electronics equipment, com-
prising,
a substantially U-shaped bracket comprising a bottom mount
portion having first and spacing-apart side walls extending
upwardly from said bottom mount portion,
a| hollow case selectively pivotally mounted on said side
' walls and being received therebetween,
said case comprising first and second spaced-apart side por-
tions having rearward and forward ends and upper and
lower ends, a back portion extending between the rear-
ward ends of said side portions, a top portion extending
between the upper ends of said side portions, a front por-
tion extending between the forward ends of said side
portions, said case having an open bottom portion adapted
A kitchen arrangement comprising:
a sink having a front side facing frontward, a rear side
facing rearward, and two opposite sides connecting said
front and rear sides, one of said two sides having an upper
side edge;
650
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
b. a countertop adjacent said upper side edge on said one of
■aid two sides of said sink defining an open space there-
above above said upper side edge; and
c. a storage cabinet on said one of said two sides of said sink
above said countertop and said upper side edge, adjacent
said countertop and horizontally spaced from said upper
side edge, said cabinet including:
(1) outer walls defining an interior space therein, including
a near side wall facing said sink, and a frontward facing
front wall contiguous to said near side wall, a continu-
ous opening being provided in said near side wall and in
said front wall,
(2) a plurality of rack assemblies having rack shelves
mounted thereon, slidably mounted to said outer walls
within said interior space forwardly and rearwardly
side-by-side for movement toward and away from said
sink, such that said rack shelves are freely movable
between said interior space and said open space adja-
cent said sink, and
(3) a lower drain tray within said interior space below said
rack assemblies for receiving water drops falling from
any items accommodated on said rack shelves.
folded closed position, and said Uble top perpendicular to
said top panel in said open position.
4,436^54
FLAT-nLE
Stanley R. Thomd, Brooklyo Center, Minn^ aadgiior to Llboly
Carton Co., MlnneapoUa, Minn.
FUed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,699
Int a.i A47B 43/02
UA a. 312-259 gctata.
4,436,353
PORTABLE STORAGE DEVICE AND TABLE
Myron B. Tucker, 6600 Hill Rd., Boise, Id. 83703
FUed Aag. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,610
Int a.J A47B i5/00
U.S. a. 312-241 3 Claims
1. A container and foldable support surface comprising:
a container means including a top, bottom, front, back and
two side panels;
a shelf face including a means for pivotally connecting said
shelf face with said front panel;
a table top including a means for pivotally connecting said
table top with said top panel, said table top having a folded
closed position and an unfolded open position;
said top panel including a means for pivotally connecting
said top pan^ with said back panel, said top panel pivoting
to an open position and acting as a support for said table
top in said open position;
said shelf face including a top cross member; a bottom cross
member parallel to said top cross member; two parallel
side members which are substantially perpendicular to
said cross members; two wing braces including a means
for pivotally connecting said wing braces with said top
cross member, said wing braces pivoting from said closed
position where said wing braces are folded inwardly and
are substantially parallel to said top cross member, to said
open position where said wing braces are unfolded and
substantially perpendicular to said top cross member, said
wing braces in said unfolded position for the support of
said table top;
said shelf face substantially parallel to and spaced from said
bottom panel in said folded closed position, said shelf face
substantially parallel to said front panel in said open posi-
tkm. laid shelf face acting as a means for support for said
table top in said open unfolded position; and
■aid table top parallel and interior to said top panel in said
1. A flat-file having a plurality of drawers located in a shell
having a top, a bottom, a back, an open front, fu^t and second
sides and at least one shelf located between and parallel to the
said top and said bottom, the improvement comprising at least
one shelf support member, said shell and said support member
being formed of a foldable material, said support member
comprising:
a main panel located inside of and parallel to one of said
sides; and
at least one front shelf support panel attached to the front of
said main panel, said front support panel comprising at
least one slot therein for engaging and supporting a shelf;
a front spacing panel spacing said front support panel from
said main panel, said front support panel and said front
spacing panel overlying said main panel; and
a rear support panel attached to the rear of said main panel,
said rear support panel comprising at least one slot therein
for engaging and supporting a shelf.
4,436,355
MODULAR STORAGE SYSTEM
WUliam S. Fortune, 29866 Cntfabert St., Malibu, Calif. 90265
Continuation of Ser. No. 67,841, Ang. 20, 1979. This appUcatioB
May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,615
Int. a.3 A47B M/Oa- F16B 7^/00
U.S. a. 312—270 6 Claims
M 40
1. A modular storage system for product packaging parts
comprising:
(a) a plurality of housings;
(b) a drawer for each of said housings;
(c) each of said housings including a top wall and two paral-
lel side walls, said top wall having a plurality of alignment
slots adjacent said side walls, alignment Ubs extending
downwardly from said side walls and registering with
alignment slots of a housing thereabove;
(d) each of said housings having on its top wall a recess and
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
631
having on the bottom of the side wall opposite said recess
a lateral rail extending therefrom and adapted to fit the
recess of a laterally adjacent housing, and alignment slots
on said rail; and
(e) each of said drawers having a bottom wall and two side
walls, a front wall including a portion for removably
inserting or withdrawing said drawer into or from one of
■aid housings, and a rear wall including a horizontally
projecting surface having an upward projection to coop-
erate with a downwardly extending ridge on the end of
the top wall of said housing, thereby to form a stop.
4,436.356
OVEN SUPPORTING APPARATUS INCORPORATING
SLIDABLE COOKWARE SUPPORT
Desi D. Stelling, 19218 N. 17th Ave., Phoenix, Ariz. 85027
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,190
Int. a.J F24C 15/16
U.S. a. 312—281 7 Claims
1. A cookware support for use in conjunction with an oven
and for supporting at least first and second food containers
each having a bottom portion, the bottom portion of the first
food container being larger than the bottom portion of the
second food container, said cookware support comprising in
combination:
a. a base;
b. a first supporting surface supported by said base, said first
supporting surface having an area commensurate with the
bottom portion of the first food container for supporting
the first food container, said first supporting surface in-
cluding a first horizontally disposed region having an
outer periphery commensurate with the bottom portion of
the first food container, said first supporting surface also
including a first side wall extending upwardly from the
outer periphery of said first horizontally disposed region
for maintaining the first food container upon said first
horizontally disposed region; and
c. a second supporting surface supported by said base con-
centric with and depressed within and below said first
supporting surface, said second supporting surface having
an area commensurate with the bottom portion of the
second food container for supporting the second food
container, said second supporting surface including a
second horizontally disposed region having an outer pe-
riphery commensurate with the bottom portion of the
second food container, said second supporting surface also
including a second side wall extending upwardly from the
outer periphery of said second horizontally disposed re-
gion to said first horizontally disposed region for main-
taining the second food container upon said second hori-
zontally disposed region;
d. said first and second supporting surfaces being made of an
elastic material for enabling said first and second side
walls to grippingly engage the bottom portions of the first
and second food containers, respectively.
4,436,357
PULL-OUT GUIDE ASSEMBLY FOR DRAWERS,
SHELVES OR THE UKE
Erich Rttck, and Josef BmniMf, both of Httchst, Austria, aasigB-
Oft to Julius Blum Gsa. m.b.H., Httchst, Austria
FUed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 347,234
Claims priority, appUcation Austria, Feb. 19, 1981, 746/81
iBt a.J n6C 21/00
U.S. a. 312-338 4 Clalns
1. In a pull-out guide arrangement for use on opposite sides
of a drawer, shelf or the like for guiding movement thereof into
and out of a body of a piece of furniture, said arrangement
being of the type including, for use on respective opposite sides
of the drawer, shelf or the like, first and second assemblies each
comprising a supporting rail adapted to be mounted on a side
panel of the body of the piece of furniture, a pull-out rail
adapted to be mounted on the respective side of the drawer,
shelf or the like, a roller carrier positioned between said sup-
porting and pull-out rails, and rollers retained by said roller
carrier, the improvement wherein:
said first assembly comprises:
a said supporting rail having spaced outer and inner verti-
cal flanges and spaced upper and lower horizontal
flanges;
a said pull-out rail having outer and inner vertical flanges
extending in opposite directions from opposite ends of a
horizontal flange;
a said roller carrier positioned between said supporting
and pull-out rails;
said rollers including plural cylindrical vertical load bear-
ing rollers retained by said roller carrier, at least one
said vertical load bearing roller being in rolling contact
with said upper horizontal flange of said supporting rail
and said horizontal flange of said pull-out rail, and at
least one said vertical load bearing roller being in roll-
ing contact with said horizontal flange of said pull-out
rail and said lower horizontal flange of said supporting
rail; and
said rollers further including plural cylindrical, lateral
guide rollen retained by said roller carrier, at least one
said guide roller being above said horizontal flange of
said pull-out rail and in rolling contact with a first said
vertical flange of said supporting rail and a first said
vertical flange of said pull-out rail, and at least one said
guide roller being below said horizontal flange of said
pull-out rail and in rolling contact with a second said
vertical flange of said supporting rail and a second said
vertical flange of said pull-out rail; and
said second assembly comprises said supporting and pull-out
rails each having only a single vertical flange;
whereby said first assembly provides precise lateral stabUity
for the drawer, shelf or the like, and said second assembly
is laterally open to allow for manufacturing tolerances of
the drawer, shelf or the lUie.
652
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,358
TERMINAL TAB INTENDED FOR MOUNTING ON A
CIRCUIT BOARD
Daniel R. Coldren, Eaola, and Dennis P. Schwenk, Hammeb-
town, both of Pa., aadgnora to AMP Incorporated, Harrii-
burg. Pa.
FUed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 364,151
Int. Q.^ HOIR 9/09
VS. a. 339-17 C 7 Claims
1. A tab-type terminal of the type comprising a flat rectangu-
lar tab having a free end and a mounting end, the mounting end
having mounting means for mounting the terminal on a circuit
board, the tab having oppositely facing parallel major surfaces
and oppositely facing parallel edge surfaces extending from the
free end to the mounting end, the terminal being characterized
in that:
the mounting end comprises a base portion having oppo-
sitely facing major surfaces which are co-planar with the
major surfaces of the tab, the base portion extending later-
ally beyond the edge surfaces of the tab whereby stop
shoulders, directed towards the free end of the tab, are
provided for a receptacle coupled to the tab,
a mounting leg extends from the base portion, the mounting
leg being located between the side edges of the base por-
tion, the mounting leg having convergent side edges ex-
tending towards the base portion, the slot dividing the
mounting leg into two side-by-side co-planar sections,
a pair of stabilizing arms extend in opposite directions from
the base portion normally of the planes of the major sur-
faces of the base portion, the stabilizing arms having co-
planar support surfaces for stabilizing the terminal on one
surface of a circuit board, the stabilizing arms having been
formed by bending portions of the flat blank of the termi-
nal in opposite directions until the arms extend at substan-
tially right angles from the flat base portion, the co-planar
support surfaces being extensions of the major surfaces of
the base portion and not edge surfaces whereby the tab
can be mounted on a circuit board by inserting the mount-
ing leg through a hole in the circuit board until the sup-
port surfaces are against the one surface of the circuit
board and thereafter bending the two sections of the
mounting leg into engagement with the circuit board at
the other surface thereof
4,436,359
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR TERMINATION SYSTEM
FOR QUICK FIELD SERVICE
Alan H. Kasper, and Istran Matlie, both of Cicero, U., assignors
to Allied Corporation, Morris Township, Morris County, N J.
Filed Oct 14, 1977, Ser. No. 842,186
Int a.3 HOIR 13/422. 13/627
VJS. a. 339—61 M 9 Clainu
1. An electrical connector termination system comprising:
a connector component defining a plurality of open ended,
elongate mounting cavities therein and including a plural-
ity of contact members disposed respectively in said cavi-
ties, each said cavity including a restrictive guide oriflce
defined by inner embossment means disposed proximate
one open end thereof, each said contact member including
a terminal socket element disposed within one said cavity
inwardly of said embossment means; and
a termination component including a support member defin-
ing at least one open ended, elongate slot therein with
each said slot communicating longitudinally therealong
with the exterior of said support member by a longitudinal
side opening, said support member including inner restric-
tive lip means disposed in each said slot proximate the
open end thereof, and a pin contact member at least par-
tially disposed in each said slot and disengageable there-
from through said side opening, each said pin contact
member including a terminal portion, an active pin por-
tion for electrically and mechanically engaging within one
said socket element and at least one neck portion interme-
diate said terminal and active pin portion for releasable
engagement with one said restrictive lip means, each said
active pin portion cooperating with one said restrictive
guide orifice to releasably maintain said connector and
termination components in a fully terminated condition,
all said pin contact members being simultaneously disen-
gageable from said support member after engagement
within said socket elements.
4,436,360
ELECTRICAL CONNECTORS AND TERMINAL
CONNECTING BLOCK
Robert H. Knickerbocker, Cheshire, Conn., assignor to The
Siemon Company, Watertown, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 262,495, Jun. 14, 1972, Pat. No.
4,084,877, which is a continuatloa of Ser. No. 868,417, Oct 22,
1969, abandoned. This appUcatlon Feb. 21, 1978, Ser. No.
879,268
Int. a.) HOIR 9/08
VJS. a. 339—97 P 4 Claims
1. A two- wire clip terminal comprising an elongate flat body
formed from flat resilient metal and having two notches at its
upper part, a base portion at its lower part, and a slot communi-
cating with the lower end of each notch, said slots providing a
center arm and two end arms extending in the same direction
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
633
from a common base, the outer ends of said arms being free so
as to provide three cantilever beams arranged side by side, the
effective width of each end arm being less than the effective
width of said center arm.
4,436,361
HERMAPHRODTnC BACK SHELL COVER
Earl W. McCleerey, Mechanlcsburg, Pa., assignor to AMP
Incorporated, Harrisburg, Pa.
FUed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,207
Int. a.3 HOIR 4/24
VJS. a. 339—97 P 5 Claims
ing means on said short wall including an outwardly di-
rected lug, said latching means adapted to extend through
said channel with said lug engaging said shoulder,
whereby, a pair of oppositely oriented cover members are
snap fitted together to enclose a rear terminating portion
of an electrical connector.
4,436,362
CONNECTOR FOR PRINTED ORCUTT BOARDS
Richard Hoffmann, and Franz Zobawa, both of Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens AktiengeselUchaft,
Berlin A Munich
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,708
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 2,
1981, 3103455
Int. Q.3 HOIR 13/58
V.S. a. 339—103 M 10 Claims
1. A connecting plug comprising:
a rectangular parallelopiped contact strip including a front
face and a plurality of elongate rectangular chambers
therein for supporting a plurality of contacts in a predeter-
mined pattern, and a pair of oppositely-directed detents;
and a receiving part including a front cross bar having a
front face, a rear face and a plurality of beveled openings
therethrough in the same pattern as and for alignment
with said chambers, a floor extending rearwardly from
said front cross bar and including a rear section, strain
relief grooves in said rear section and a pair of openings on
respective sides adjacent said rear face of said front cross
bar, said side walls including respective openings for
snap-in retention of said oppositely-directed detents and
respective guide tracks for said detents extending from the
rear ends of said side walls to said openings.
5. A back shell assembly for enclosing an open rear portion
of an elongated electrical connector designed to terminate a
plurality of electrical conductors in said open rear portion and
having at least one transverse channel extending across said
connector at a location spaced from a mating face of said
connector, said back shell assembly enclosing and protecting
the termination of said conductors and comprising:
a pair of hermaphroditic cover members together defining a
through cavity for receiving a portion of said connector
therein, each said cover member having a first long wall,
a second parallel spaced short wall, and an intermediate
wall interconnecting said first and second walls along one
aligned marginal edge of each said first and second walls,
said first wall having an elongated groove extending along
substantially the entire free edge thereof and said second
short wall having an elongated flange extending along
substantially the entire free edge thereof adapted to be
received in the groove of said long wall of another cover
member, a transversely extending rib on an inner surface
of said long wall forming a channel intersecting said
groove and opening outwardly to define a shoulder, latch-
4,436,363
BROADBAND ANTIREFLECHON COATING FOR
INFRARED TRANSMISSIVE MATERIALS
Kenneth B. Steinbniegge; Johanna S. Schruben, and Lylc H.
Taylor, all of Murrysrille, Pa., aasignors to Westlnghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 405^25
Int. a.3 G02B 5/28
VJS. a. 350—1.6 16 Claims
1. A broadband antireflection coating for use on infrared
transmissive materials comprising:
a first thin layer, of a compound selected from the group
consisting of zinc-selenide (ZnSe) and zinc-sulfide (ZnS),
disposed on the transmissive material;
a second thin layer, of a compound selected from the group
consisting of lead-fluoride (PbF;) and aluminum oxide
(AI2O3), disposed on said first layer; and
654
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
a third thin layer of a compound, selected from the group lightwaves through said main channel in said first optical
consistmg of magnesium-nuoride (MgFj). barium-fluoride coupler for an optical fiber,
a receiver at said first terminal accepting lightwaves from said
auxiliary channel in said first optical coupler,
]r. WHTN
-=-^^
INHT
X
]
nmiwcH|~^a
*— J— =-j ICCtlWI -j^M
(BaF2) and calcium-fluoride (CaF:), disposed on said
second layer.
4,436.364
PIEZOELECTRIC APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING
ROTARY OSOLLATION OF A MIRROR
Reinhard Lauer, Denzlingen. and Dietmar Pfefferle, Pfaffen-
weiler, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Erwin Sick
GmbH Optik-ElektroBik« Waldkirch, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,366
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 18.
1980, 3035315
Int a.3 G02B 27/17; G02F 1/34
U.S. a. 350-6.6 9 Claims
a reflector at said second terminal for lightwaves incoming
from an optical fiber to said main channel in said second
optical coupler, and
electrical signaling means at said second terminal for modulat-
ing reflected lightwaves in said auxiliary channel in said
second optical coupler.
4,436.366
END CAPPING AN OPTICAL nBER
Edward A. Abramaon. Newark. Del^ asaignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemonrs and Company, Wilmington, Del.
FUed Feb. 17. 1981. Ser. No. 235,036
lot a.i G02B 7/26
U.S. a. 350— 96 JO 5 ciainu
1. Piezoelectric apparatus for producing rotary oscillation of
a mirror, the apparatus comprising first and second piezoce-
ramie flexible strips each having a clamped end and a free end,
said strips being substantially aligned in one plane with their
free ends facing and spaced apart from each other; AC voltage
generating means for generating an AC voltage with a fre-
quency which differs significantly from a natural resonant
frequency of said strips; means for applying said AC voltage to
said strips to energise them to execute oscillations so that said
free ends are periodically displaced in counterphase out of said
plane; respective resilient mounting means extending between
said free ends and said mirror for mounting said mirror on
strips feedback electrode means on at least one of said strips for
generating a feedback voltage, means for time delaying said
feedback voltoge by an amount equal to one half of a period of
said natural resonant frequency and means for feeding said
feedback voltage back to said strips together with said AC
voltage.
1. A cut optical fiber end capped with a light transmissible
smooth flat surface comprising a hardened photopolymeriz-
able layer having a maximum thickness about 0.45 times the
diameter of the core divided by the numerical aperture of said
core and a minimum thickness of 20 /im.
2. An end capped optical fiber according to claim 1 wherein
the photopolymerizable layer is derived from a composition
comprising trimethylol propane triacrylate, polyoxyethyl tri-
methylolpropane, polyethyleneoxide lauryl ether, 2-mercapto
benzoxazole, styrene/maleic anhydride copolymer, 2,-2'-(o-
chlorophenyl)-4,4',5,5'-tetraphenylbiimidazole and Michler's
ketone.
3. A cut optical fiber end capped with a light transmissible
smooth flat surface comprising a hardened thermally polymer-
izable layer having a maximum thickness about 0.4S times the
diameter of the core divided by the numerical aperture of said
core and a minimum thickness of 20 /im.
4,436.365
DATA LINK USING INTEGRATED OPTICS DEVICES
Martin G. Hodgina. Yorktown Heights, N.Y., and William J.
Jordan. WUppany, N J., aadgnon to BeU Telephone Ubora-
tories. Incorporated. Mnrray HUl. N J.
FUed Oct 21. 1981. Ser. No. 313,600
Int CI.' G02B 5/174
U A CL 350-96.16 IQ Chtan
3. A signal transmission system including at least one optical
fiber as the medium of transmission comprising
first and second terminals for said transmission system,
first and second optical couplers including main and auxiliary
channels in cross-coupling proximity at the respective termi-
nals of said transmission system,
a light source at said first terminal for providing continuous
4.436.367
OPTICAL SUP RING ASSEMBLY
Norris E. Lewis, ChristiaBsburg, and Michael B. MUler. Blacks*
burg, both of Va.^ assignors to Uttoo Systems, Inc., Blacks-
borg, Va.
FUed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,588
lat a^ G02B 7/26
MS. a. 350— 96J0 11 Claims
6. An optical slip ring assembly for coupling an optic signal
from a rotor source to a stator detector, the assembly compris-
ing:
a rotor optic fiber having a first end for coupling with the
optic signal source and a second end portion having one
side progressively removed so that both the width and the
depth of the removed area increases along the length of
the fiber to form a light-emitting area of a selected length,
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
655
cylindrical rotor means having a circular groove means for
inounting said fiber second end portion therein so that said
light-emitting area faces radially outwardly,
a plurality of stator fibers each having a first pickup end, said
pickup ends being grouped into a radial symmetric array
of selectively inwardly directed multistrand fiber blocks
which collectively comprise a pickup area,
stator means for mounting said fiber pickup ends in said
because of a subsuntial diflierence in at least one of the
following: the relative core cladding index difference,
wherein the index of refraction of said primary core is
substantially greater than the index of refraction of said
secondary core, wavelengths of light transmitted in the
cores, and diameters of said primary and secondary cores;
means for propagating and detecting light signals along said
optical waveguide; and
means for detecting a change in said relative light loss be-
tween said primary and secondary cores to identify per-
turbation of said optical fiber.
4,436,369
STEREOSCOPIC LENS SYSTEM
WUliam A. Bukowskl, New York, N.Y., auignor to Optimax III,
Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300J55
Int. a.' G02B 27/24: G03B 35/10
U.S. a. 350—130 15 Claims
radially symmetric, selectively inwardly directed array
concentrically about said circular groove means defining
said pickup area so that said light-emitting area rotates
concentrically therein whereby an optic signal transmitted
from the source through the rotor fiber is picked up by
said stator fibers, and
each said stator fiber having a second end grouped in a
collective bundle for coupling the optic signal picked up
by said stator fibers to the stator detector.
4,436,368
MULTIPLE CORE OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE FOR SECURE
TRANSMISSION
Donald B. Keck, Big Flats, N.Y., assignor to Coming Glau
Works, Coming, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of S«r. No. 803,772, Jun. 6, 1977,
abandoned. This appUcation Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,925
Int a.3 G02B 5/172
\3&. a. 350—96.33 21 Claims
»»°;3
11. Apparatus for detecting intrusion upon an optical wave-
guide communication system comprising:
a glass optical wavegtiide having multiple cores and clad-
ding, the index of refraction of each core being greater
than the index of refraction of its cladding, the relative
light loss between a primary core and a secondary core
being much different upon perturbation of the waveguide
1. A stereoscopic lens system for attachment and use with a
motion picture camera device for simultaneously forming left
and right images of a viewed scene on an optical plane for
recording pairs of such left and right images in successive
frame areas of a motion picture record medium carried by the
camera device, comprising:
an optics body;
a pair of focusable optical image receiving lens elements
carried by said body and being laterally spaced apart by an
interocular distance and vertically displaced by an amount
corresponding to the pitch between adjacent longitudi-
nally displaced halves of the frame areas on the record
medium to be recorded;
a relay lens mounted to said optics body and adapted for
removable mounting to the motion picture camera device;
field lens means at the interior of said body and optically
spaced from the receiving elements near the image plane
thereof so as to form respective left and right focused
images;
masking means in the respective optical paths for said right
and left images for establishing a division line between
said images along adjacent lateral edges thereof within the
frame area;
reflecting element means at the interior of said body and
located intermediate said field lens means and said optical
plane for directing said left and right images from said
field lens means simultaneously to said relay lens such that
said simultaneous images, as presented to said relay lens
for transmission to the plane of the record medium, are
generally in lateral registration and longitudinally super-
posed in an area corresponding to a single frame of the
record medium to be recorded.
656
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436^70
SPACE VARIANT LINEAR PHASE SHIFTER FOR
OPTICAL AMBIGUITY FUNCnON GENERATOR
JoMph J. Rebholz, Bunurille, and Poohsan N. Tamura, BIoo-
mington, both of Minn^ aaiignora to Honeywell Inc., Minne-
apolis, Minn.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,927
Int. a.3 G06G 9/00; GOIS li/5B
U.S. a. 350—162.12 3 Claims
mirror element and a predetermined portion of the mirror
element spaced inwardly from the edge thereof regardless
1. An optica] system utilizing a beam of substantially coher-
ent light to create the ambiguity function arising from a first
signal and a second signal; said system comprising:
a first data input means for coding said light beam with said
first signal, said first means defining an x, y coordinate
system;
a first Fourier Transform lens means lying in the path of said
light beam and a Fourier Transform plane associated with
said first Fourier Transform lens means;
a linear phase shifter comprising a lens pair including a
cylindrical lens and a spherical lens fastened together, the
spherical lens having a sign opposite from that of the
cylindrical lens and said lens pair lying in the path of said
light beam in said Fourier Transform plane and wherein,
in order to generate the proper transmissivity function, the
lens pair is rotated about the optical axis by 45° with
respect to the x, y coordinate system;
a second data input means for coding said light beam with
said second signal; and,
a final Fourier Transform lens means lying in the path of said
light beam for producing the ambiguity function at an
ambiguity plane.
4,436,371
VEHICLE MIRROR ASSEMBLY
Denis Wood, Dublin, Ireland; John F. Thomas, Jr., Holland,
Mich., and Barry Dipper, Cardiff, Wales, assignors to Don-
nelly Mirrors, Inc., Holland, Mich.
FUed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,969
Int. a.3 G02B 17/00
U.S. a. 350-281 65 Claims
1. In a day/night rearview mirror assembly for vehicles
including a mirror case and a pivot actuator, said case being
formed in one piece from a resinous material and having a
back, a continuous peripheral side wall adapted to outline the
peripheral edge of a mirror element, and support means for
supporting said pivot actuator within said case, said pivot
actuator having mounting means for mounting a bracket for
securing said assembly on a support and pivot means for pivot-
ing said actuator and case between at least two different posi-
tions with respect to said mounting means, the improvement
comprising:
said molded case including flexible, resiHent portions and
having a preformed lip on said continuous peripheral side
wall for retaining a mirror element within said case; said
pivot actuator being substantially rigid; said case portions
being sufficiently flexible and resilient to bias said actuator
toward one or the other of said actuator positions; said
support means supporting said actuator in a prestressed
position when assembled in said case while said Up extends
inwardly a distance sufficient such that when a mirror
element is received within said case, and said actuator is
pivoted with said pivot means, said case will flex with
respect to said rigid actuator to allow the pivotal move-
ment while said lip will continue to cover the edge of the
/U/SMT'
of the flexing action of said case and said lip during such
pivoting.
4,436,372
ELLIPTICAL MIRROR FOR VEHICULAR USE
William P. Schmidt, Rockwood, and Franklin D. Hutchinson,
New Boston, both of Mich., assignors to Mirror Lite Com-
pany, Rockwood, Mich.
FUed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,662
Int. a.3 G02B 5/10
U.S. a. 350—293 27 Claims
^^J-.^^
1. A mirror comprising:
a convex reflecting surface having a continuous peripheral
edge, said continuous peripheral edge defining a plane,
said convex reflecting surface further having an apex
extending a predetermined distance H from said plane,
said convex reflecting surface at said continuous periph-
eral edge having an outer diameter D, said outer diameter
D and said predetermined distance H having a relation-
ship of D/H in the range of 2.S to 3.00.
4,436,373
SOLAR REFLECTOR PANEL
Paul A. Kirsch, Bcnsalem, Pa., assignor to The Budd Company,
Troy, Mich.
FUed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,097
Int a.3 G02B 7/1%, 5/10
U.S. a. 350—296 1 Claim
1. A parabolic solar reflector panel for focusing energy
received from the sun comprising:
\
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
657
(a) a glass sheet with four side edges and having front and
rear surfaces;
(b) said rear surface of said glass sheet having a reflective
coating thereon;
(c) said reflective coating having a protective coating
thereon;
(d) an integral fiberglass reinforced thermoset piece having a
plurality of rib portions secured to said protective coating
to provide a backing of uniform thickness for said glass
sheet with said reflective and protective coatings;
(e) said piece extending around the four side edges of said
glass sheet and extending partly across the front surface
n
>
(
St
\
■
ends of said housing on the back side of its upper portion
for wide-angle viewing to the rear of the operator.
4,436,375
SIGHT GLASS APPARATUS
Charles E. Meginnis, deceased, Ute of Charleston, W. Va. (by
Stanley T. McKeny, executor), assignor to Preuurc Products
Company, Charleston, W. Va.
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 353,924
Int. a.3 G02B 5/00. 7/00; GOIF 23/02
U.S. a. 350—319 10 Claims
M -V 1'-^ *P
-SUMS OtCRMNG
|\\"»; ».
1)^ r F f • I ^ a
r^
Si S2
thereof to provide a lip portion about the periphery of said
glass sheet to mechanically lock said sheet to said piece;
(0 said lip portion extending from 0.2S" to 0.12S" over the
front surface of said glass sheet and having a thickness
between 0.040" to 0.125";
(g) attachment elements disposed on said solar panel;
(h) a strongback assembly;
(i) means including said attachment elements to connect said
solar reflector panel to said strongback; and
0) said strongback assembly being movable to move said
reflector panel in a direction to receive maximum energy
from the sun.
4,436,374
FORKLIFT SAFETY SCOPE
Henry A. Krueger, 4920 S. Under Ave., Chicago, 111. 60638
FUed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 339,997
Int. a.3 G02B 5/0%. 5/10
U.S. a. 350—302 8 Claims
1. A sight glass assembly comprising a housing structure
having a circular opening therethrough, said opening having
an enlarged section, a lens disposed across said opening and
having a peripheral portion received within said enlarged
section, a sealing ring assembly disposed in said enlarged sec-
tion, said sealing ring assembly comprising a rigid compression
ring and a resilient packing member mounted on said compres-
sion ring, said packing member having an L-shaped cross-sec-
tional configuration including a wall portion mounted on an
inner side of said compression ring and engaging the periphery
of said lens and a flange portion mounted on said compression
ring and engaging said housing structure, and means mounted
on said housing structure and engageable with said compres-
sion ring for urging said compression ring against said packing
member, causing said packing member to expand radially,
thereby eflecting a seal between said housing structure and the
periphery of said lens and placing said lens in radial compres-
sion.
4,436,376
LIGHT MODULATOR, DEMODULATOR AND METHOD
OF COMMUNICATION EMPLOYING THE SAME
James L. Fergason, 5806 Homing Rd., Kent, Ohio 44240
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 121,071, Feb. 13, 1980, Pat. No.
4,385,806, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 913,618,
Jun. 8, 1978, abandoned. This application Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No.
235,006
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 31,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 G02F 1/13
U.S. a. 350—332 27 Claims
1. In a forklift truck having a front lift assembly including a
frame with two vertical side posts projecting upwardly at the
front end of the truck and a horizontal cross member joining
the two posts at an elevated position which blocks the forward
view of the truck operator during normal operating conditions,
the improvement which comprises:
periscope means including an elongated tubular housing
arranged on the back side of said cross member, said
housing having an upper portion rising above said cross
member with a front transparent window and a lower
portion located behind said cross member with a back
transparent window, each window extending over most of
the length of the housing, a paired set of periscopic mir-
rors mounted diagonally within said housing in substan-
tially parallel facing relationship for periscopic viewing
from the upper front window down to the lower back
window; and
two convex mirrors, each being mounted near the opposite
1. A light modulator comprising at least one liquid crystal
cell comprising two parallel transparent plates; a transparent
electrical conductive layer applied to the confronting surfaces
of the said two plates; each said conductive layer having paral-
lel surface alignment, the said alignment of the two adjoining
surfaces being parallel; a continuous layer of nematic liquid
crystal having positive dielectric anisotropy between the two
electrical conducting coatings;
658
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
means for applying a fued electrical bias to the two said
electrical conducting coatings;
means for applying an amplitude modulated oscillatory
electrical signal having a frequency greater than 10 hertz
across the said continuous layer;
a source of polarized light directed through the said two
transparent plates;
whereby the light which passes through the said two trans-
parent plates is a phase-shifted beam which is distinguish-
able from the light from the said source in a manner which
corresponds to the said oscillatory electrical signal.
4,436,377
TRANSMISSIVE REFLECTOR INCLUDING NACREOUS,
PRESSURE SENSITIVE ADHESIVE LAYER
James A. Miller, Silver Lake, Ohio, assignor to Morgan Adhe-
sives Company, Stow, Ohio
FUed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,581
Int a.3 G02F 1/133; G42D 15/00; C09K 3/34; B32B 5/16
U.S. CL 350—345 21 Claims
— .jW^_ ..■.f-.^./r .■.■■■.. Ij....- ..f.^...... ..^l■ ^
10
1. A transmissive reflector, comprising;
a nacreous pigment and a transparent adhesive, the amount
of said nacreous pigment being from IS to 30 parts by
weight based upon 100 parts by weight of said adhesive,
said nacreous pigment having a particle size of from 2 to
50 microns, said nacreous pigment being in combination
with said adhesive, said combination being a mixture.
4,436,378
PASSIVE DISPLAY MODULE AND SYSTEM
David H. Kirkman, Winchester, England, assignor to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,914
Claims priority, appUcation European Pat Off., Dec. 31,
1980, 80304781.0
Int a.3 G02F 1/17
U.S. a. 350—345 9 Claims
1. A passive display module for use in a display system
having a source of illumination and a projection lens compris-
ing:
a counter electrode,
a display electrode area,
a liquid filled cell having a transparent top portion and a wall
surrounding said display electrode area,
a side light guide coextensive with said display electrode area
in one dimension, said guide having an inner face forming at
least a part of said wall and an outer face for receiving Ught
from an external source, said guide having a reflective upper
surface inclined downwardly towards said display electrode
area.
4,436,379
TWO-LAYER UQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY PANEL
Fumiaki Fnnada, Yamatokoriyama; Synlchi Kozakl, Nan;
Masataka Matsuora, Tenri, and Tomio Wada, Nara, aU of
Japan, assignors to Sharp KaiimiMif^ Kaisha, Osaka, J^mu
FUed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,532
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Nov. 13, 1979, 54-147244
Int a.J G02F 1/13
\3S. CL 350—347 E 3 Cfadois
2«
6a 5 fa
.V>K»'XI'/V>K*^V/> 'K«'/>'yK«'>»-/K*>1 VK4VMK/K4- «'>K«V/'/»>KV>l-yM*<
ia
1. A liquid crystal display ceU comprising:
first, second and third substrate means;
a first pair of patterned electrode means formed on said first
and said second substrate means, and a second pair of
patterned electrode means formed on said second and said
third substrate means;
said first and said second substrate means forming a first
cavity therebetween and said second and said third sub-
strate means forming a second cavity therebetween;
a first liquid crystal layer disposed in said first cavity and a
second liquid crystal layer disposed in said second cavity;
and
a pair of polarizers each adhered to an outer surface of said
first substrate means and said third substrate means, re-
spectively;
each of said polarizers having a plane of polarization sub-
stantially perpendicular to or parallel to the plane of polar-
ization of the other of said polarizers;
the plane of polarization of each of said polarizers being
substantially perpendicular to or parallel to the direction
of the longitudinal axes of liquid crystal molecules in each
of said first Uquid crystal layer and said second liquid
crystal layer;
where the value of the product Ani-di wherein Ani is the
double refractive index of said first liquid crystal layer and
di is the thickness of said first liquid crystal layer, deviates
from the value of the product An2d2, wherein An: is the
double refractive index of said second Uquid crystal layer
and d2 is the thickness of said second liquid crystal layer,
by about 10% to about 20% and both Ani-di and An2-d2
for visible light are less than 2 ^m.
4,436,380
ELECTROCHROMIC DISPLAY DEVICE
Kohzo Yano, Yamatokoriyama; Hlroshl Hamada, Nara;
YasnhUco Inami, Nara, and Tondo Wada, Nara, aU of Japan,
assignors to Sharp KaiwMiitu Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
FUed JnL 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,047
Claims priority, appUcation Japu, JnL 31, 1980, 55-106885
Int CLJ G02F 1/17
U.S. CL 350—357 20 Claims
1. An electrochromic display device having an electrolyte a
display electrode formed of an electrochromic substance and a
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
y
659
counter-electrode therefor in which a redox layer of said coun-
ter-electrode is formed from a burnt material comprising a
31 17 15 16
22
26'
■18
>f\-|.^>\ri9
22
25 24 20 21 30
self-film-forming compound and a carbonaceous electrocon-
ductive substance and including substantially no binder.
4,436,381
PREOSION PRESSED GLASS OBJECT
Hendrik J. M. Joorraann; Hendrik VerweU, and Jan Haisma, all
of Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. PhUips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 396,533, Jul. 8, 1982, which is a division of
Ser. No. 161,196, Jun. 19, 1980, Pat. No. 4,348,484, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 119,324, Feb. 7, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Jun. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 507,404
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, May 18, 1979,
7903914
Int. a.3 G02B 3/00; C03C 3/16
U.S. a. 350—432 3 Qainu
component having the convex surface on the object side, a
third negative meniscus lens component having the convex
surface on the object side, a fourth positive lens component, a
fifth negative meniscus lens component, a sixth positive ce-
mented lens component, a seventh negative cemented lens
component, an eighth positive meniscus lens component hav-
ing the convex surface on the object side, a ninth positive lens
component and a filter disposed between said fifth and sixth
lens componenu, said lens system satisfying the following
respective conditions:
(l)vi>70
(2) 5.5f<fi<7.2f
(3)n2, n3>1.75
(4) 0.65f< |fi2343| <0.75f, fl2345<0
(5) 0.2f<dio-l-di|/N-|.di2<0.3f
(6)0.44f<D6<0.55f
wherein the reference symbol f represents a composite focal
length of the entire system, the reference symbol f 1 represents
a focal length of the first lens component, the reference symbol
fl2345 represente a composite focal length from the first lens
component to fifth lens component, the reference symbols n2
and na represent refractive indices respectively of the second
lens component and third lens component, the reference sym-
bol vi represents an Abbe's number of the first lens component,
the reference symbol di 1 represents a thickness of the filter, the
reference symbols dioand di2 represent air spaces respectively
between the fifth lens component and filter and between the
filter and sixth lens component, the reference symbol N repre-
sents a refractive index of the filter, and the reference symbol
D6 represents a thickness of the sixth lens component.
1. A precision pressed object of glass comprising a glass
having a composition consisting essentially of 45-55 mol, %
P20$, 15-40 mol. % BaO, 5-35 mol. % PbO, 5-15 mol. %
Li20, 0-2 mol. % AI2O3, and 0-6 mol. % F in the form of
fluoride wherein up to 25% of BaO may be replaced by an
equimolar quantity of at least one of CaO, MgO and SrO, and
up to 25% of Li20 may be replaced by an equimolar quantity
of at least one other alkali metal oxide; and a lens arrangement
of said glass composition, said lens arrangement not deviating
at any single point of its surface by more than 0.5 micrometers
from a predetermined curvature, and said lens arrangement
having a surface roughness less than 0.02 micrometers.
4,436,382
RETROFOCUS TYPE SUPER WIDE ANGLE LENS
SYSTEM
Kazuo Ikari, HachloiUi, and Tom FuJU, HUio, both of Japan,
assignors to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd., Tol^o, Japan
FUed Oct 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,915
Cbdms priority, appUcatioa Japan, Nov. 4, 1980, 55*153790
Int a.3 G02B 9/64. 13/04
U.S. a. 350—458 7 dabns
4,436,383
F-e LENS SYSTEM
Hanio Maeda, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,311
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 11, 1981, 56-142404
Int a.3 G02B 9/34. 27/17
U.S. a. 350—469 7 CUdms
1. An F-0 lens system comprising a first lens group consist-
ing of a first positive meniscus lens component having a con-
cave surface on the incidence side and a second negative lens
component, and a second lens group consisting of a third
positive lens component and a fourth positive lens component,
said lens system being so designed as to satisfy the foUowing
conditions:
0.24 < -^ < 0.29
3.2 <
/I
<7.1
0.95 < — < 1.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
wherein the reference symbol e/ // represents distance between
1. A retrofocus type superwide angle lens system comprising the principal poinu of said first lens group and said second lens
a first positive meniscus lens component having the convex group, the reference symbol f// designates focal length of said
surface on the object side, a second negative meniscus lens second lens group, the reference symbols f 1 and f2 denote focal
660
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
lengths of said first and second lens components respectively,
and the reference symbols r: and rs represent radii of curvature
on the image side surface of said first lens component and
incidence side surface of said second lens component respec-
tively.
V^4
Ol
eA "
cx_,
1. A binocular stereo-microscope comprising a right and left
objective, a right and left eyepiece, a right porro prism ar-
ranged between said right objective and right eyepiece and a
left porro prism arranged between said left objective and left
eyepiece, each of said right and left porro prisms having a first,
second, third and fourth reflecting surfaces, both said first and
fourth reflecting surfaces being at 45 degrees to the plane
vertical to the optical axis of the rays reflected by said first
reflecting surface, said binocular stereo-microscope being
arranged so that rays from an object pass through said objec-
tive and are reflected by said first, second, third and fourth
reflecting surfaces in this order and an image formed by said
rays is observed through said eyepiece, and said four reflecting
surfaces being arranged to satisfy the relation expressed by the
following formula:
sin /3 cos (ii-cos fi tan 03-v)-tan a sin <i)=0
[a>=o)] + o>2 >n<J v=o)i— wj
«=»l-t-o>2> v=a>i-o»2T«), a#0 and /S#0
wherein reference symbol <a\ represents the angle between the
plane vertical to the optical axis of said objective and the plane
including the optical axis of the rays reflected by said second
reflecting surface and directed toward said third reflecting
surface, reference symbol tai represents the angle between the
plane vertical to the optical axis of the rays reflected by said
second reflecting surface and directed toward said third re-
flecting surface and the plane including the optical axis of said
eyepiece, reference symbol /3 represents the rotational angle of
said porro prism in the clockwise direction from the plane
including the optical axes of said objective and eyepieces
around the optical axis of said objective, and reference symbol
2a represents the internal angle between said right and left
objectives.
4,436^5
SPEOMEN HOLDER FOR INVERTED MICROSCOPES
Herat Fischer, and Friedrich K. MSlliing, both of Aalen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, anignora to Carl-Zein-Stiftung, Heiden*
heim. Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 287,379
Ctaimi priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 25.
1980,3028154 ^. • .
Int. a.J G02B 21/26; B25B 5/02. 5/16
U A a. 350-529 g Oalmi
4,436,384
BINOCULAR STEREO-MICROSCOPE
Aldo Taira, Hachioi^i, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,239
Claims priority, application Japan, May 8, 1980, 55-59993
Int. a.3 G02B 21/22
U.S. a. 350—515 1 Claim
1. A specimen holder mounted on the stage of an inverted
microscope for receiving specimens of different dimensions,
characterized by the fact that the specimen holder (1) consists
essentially of two plates (2a. 2*) which are horizontally
mounted for displacement with respect to each other, the two
opposite sides of said plates having indentations {Sa, ib) pro-
vided with steps (3a, ib) for disposing the specimens thereon,
said indentations supplementing each other to form an opening
(4) the dimensions of which can be varied by displacing the
plates (2a. 2b).
4,436,386
BINOCULARS HOUSING
Isao Ishibai, and Kunimitsu Kobayashi, both of Toyko, Japan,
assignors to Hoya Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,627
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 27, 1980, 55-
120507[U]
Int. a.3 G02B 23/18
U.S. a. 350—550 4 Claims
1. A housing for binoculars comprising: upper and lower
housing halves, said halves having objective lens frames and
ocular lens frames integrally molded therewith; said objective
lens frames and said ocular lens frames projecting outwardly
from said upper and lower housing halves with a half of each
of said frames being integrally molded with one of said halves
and the other half of each of said frames being integrally
molded with the other said housing halves and each of said
frames having at least one projection formed integrally there-
with and ring members each having at least one groove affixed
to said objective lens frames and said ocular lens frames with
said projections in said grooves for joining said upper and
lower halves, said upper and lower halves, when assembled,
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
661
completely protecting left and right optical systems, a focusing
mechanism, and an eyepiece adjustment mechanism of said
binoculars.
4,436,387
LENS GROUP SHIFTING MECHANISM FOR ZOOM
BINOCULARS
Fumio Shimizu, Minowa, Japan, assignor to Light Koki Co.,
Ltd., Nagano, Japan
FUed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,178
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 26, 1980, 55-183856
lot a.3 G02B 7/06
U.S. a. 350—556 3 Claims
fundus with light of wavelength within the first range and
light of wavelength within a second range different from
the first range, operation of said mark forming means
being coordinated with said focusing means;
photosensing means disposed in an optical path of said imag-
ing optical means for sensing the detection mark reflected
from the fundus;
filtering means for filtering the light incident on said photo-
sensing means, said filtering means being able to cut off
said light of wavelength within the first range and to
transmit light of wavelength within the second range;
observation means disposed in an optical path of said imag-
ing optical means for permitting an observer to observe
1. In a zoom lens system including at least one outer cylinder
having a longitudinal axis, a frame connected to said cylinder,
and a lens group in said cylinder which is movable along said
axis, a mechanism for longitudinally shifting said lens group
comprising:
a lever having opposite ends and being pivotally mounted in
the frame between said ends, each end having a rotatable
pin mounted thereon;
a terminal member mounted on said lens group having a
groove therein extending perpendiculariy to said axis, one
pin of one end of said lever riding in the groove;
a shift bar mounted in said frame movable only in parallel
with said axis and having opposite ends, one end of said
bar having a groove therein extending perpendicularly to
said axis, the other pin of said lever riding in the groove;
and
rotatable means in the frame for moving said shift bar longi-
tudinally so that, upon such movement, the engagement of
the pin in the groove of the bar pivots the lever so that the
engagement of the other pin in the groove of the terminal
members shifts the lens group longitudinally.
4,436,388
EYE-FUNDUS CAMERA PROVIDED WITH AUTOMATIC
FOCUSING FUNCnON
Junlchi Takahashi, Kawasaki; Toshlo Sakane, Yokohama, and
Yi^i Itoh, Chlgasaki, aU of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabu*
shUd Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,878
CUdms priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 25, 1980, 55-55068
Int C\? A61B 3/14
U.S. a. 351—206 12 CUdms
1. An eye-fundus camera comprising:
means for obtaining a picture of the fundus of an eye being
examined and including illumination means for Uluminat-
ing the fundus with an illumination light of wavelength
within a first range, imaging optical means for forming an
image of the Uluminated fundus, photodetecting means for
detecting the image, and focusing means for causing said
optical means to focus the image on said detecting means;
mark forming means for forming a detection mark on the
'■^'^"mm^m
m(}^'-{iM
the fundus and the detection mark and also for providing
a visual field for observation by the observer;
comparative mark providing means for providing a compar-
ative mark locatable in the visual field for observation
relative to the detection mark reflected from the fundus in
a predetermined relation when said focusing means causes
said optical means to focus the image on said photo-
detecting means; and
control means for operating said focusing means and said
mark forming means until the detection mark and the
comparative mark are located in the predetermined rela-
tion, whereby
said focusing means causes said optical means to focus the
image on said photo-detecting means.
4,436,389
OPHTHALMIC INSTRUMENT HAVING WORKING
DISTANCE DETECnNG MEANS
Eiichi Sano, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Kogaku Kikai
Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
FUed Jun. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 162,685
CUdms priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 28, 1979, 54-81631
Int. a.i A61B 3/14; G03B 29/00
U.S. a. 351—208 8 CUdms
^^A^
^n-m
y
1. An ophthalmic instrument comprising objective lens
means adapted to be located adjacent a patient's eye having a
cornea with a working distance between the objective lens
means and the patient's eye, an illuminating system including
light source means and ring-shaped aperture means located
substantially in conjugate with the patient's eye with respect to
662
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
said objective lens means so that illumination light is projected
through said aperture means and said objective lens means to
the patient's eye, working distance detecting means including
light receiving means provided at a plurality of points around
the objective lens means for detecting the location of a radially
inner boundary of an image of said ring-shaped aperture means
as produced around the objective lens means by the light
projected from said illumination system and reflected at the
cornea of the patient's eye, said light receiving means having
means for detecting radial positions of at least a plurality of
poinu of said radially inner boundary of the image to deter-
mine the working distance and the alignment between the
optical axis of the eye an the optical axis of the instrument.
4.436,391
APPARATUS FOR PROJECTING ANY SELECTED
IMAGE IN A RECORDING MEDIUM HAVING IMAGES
RECORDED THEREON IN AT LEAST TWO LINES
Kazuo Kashiwagi, Tokyo, Japan, aiaignor to Canon Kabnshlki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUcd Aug. 23, 1982, Scr. No. 410,450
Ctalma priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 12, 1981, 56-144138:
Sep. 12, 1981, 56-144139
Int a.J G03B 23/12
UA a 353-26 R WCIalnu
26-
4,436.390
OPHTHALMIC INSTRUMENT HAVING A CROSS
CYLINDER LENS
Mitfugu Aoki, Tokyo, Japan, aasignor to Tokyo Kogaku Kikai
Kabuahiki Kaiiha, Japan
FUed Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347,898
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 16, 1981, 56-
20300[U]; Feb. 27, 1981, 56-26962[U]
Int. Q\} A61B i/02
U.S. a. 351-234 9 Qalms
i — rrUV-36
35 34
3
i^'
1. Apparatus for projecting on a projection surface any
selected image in a recording medium having images recorded
thereon in at least two lines, said apparatus comprising:
optical means for projecting on the projection surface any
image in one line on said recording medium;
image rotating means for changing the orientation of the
image projected on said projection surface;
line changing means for changing the line of images to be
projected; and
means for driving said image rotating means in response to
the operation of said line changing means.
4,43632
DISTORTION CORRECnON FOR AN OVERHEAD
PROJECTOR SYSTEM
Dennis F. Vanderwerf, Cottage Grove, Minn., assignor to Min-
nesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Jan. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 455,424
Int. a.J G03B 21/14
U.S. a. 353—38 6 dalnu
1. An ophthalmic instrument comprising cylindrical lens
means and cross cylinder means which are adapted to be lo-
cated in an examining optical path having an optical axis,
housing means containing said cylindrical lens means and said
cross cylinder means, swingable lever means mounted on said
housing means for swingable movement about an axis substan-
tially parallel with said optical axis of the optical path, said
cross cylinder means being carried by said swingable lever
means so that it can be moved into and out of said examining
optical path in response to the swingable movement of the
swingable lever means, said cross cylinder means including
cross cylinder lens means having an intermediate axis, inner
tube means supporting said cross cylinder lens means for rota-
tion about said intermediate axis by an angle of 180*, and outer
tube means supporting said inner tube means and mounted on
said swingable lever means for rotation about an axis parallel
with said optical axis, first rotatable disc means coaxial with
said axis of swingable movement of said swingable member,
fu^t means for interconnecting said outer tube means with said
first rotatable disc means so that a rotation of said outer tube
means is transmitted to said first disc means, second means for
interconnecting said first rotatable disc means with second
routable disc means which is adapted to rotating said cylindri-
cal lens means about said optical axis so that a rotation of said
first means is transmitted to said second disc means.
1. An overhead projector for projecting an undistorted
image of a transparency onto a veriical projection surface at an
oblique angle above a horizontal plane, comprising:
a horizontal stage upon which the transparency to be imaged
is placed;
a projection lens having a predetermined optic axis oriented
in a vertical plane and positioned on one side of said stage
and offset from the center of said stage toward said projec-
tion surface along a line extending from the center of said
stage and inclined toward said projection surface at an
angle with respect to a vertical plane equal to said oblique
angle;
lighting means disposed opposite said projection lens with
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
663
respect to said stage and including a light source having a
preidetermined optic axis oriented in a veriical plane for
directing light toward said transparency and a condensing
lens positioned between said light source and said suge
and having a predetermined optic axis oriented in a verti-
cal plane for directing light through said stage and said
transparency and focusing said light at a focal position
above the center of said stage so that light exiting said
condensing lens is convergent at said focal position;
a Fresnel prism having a series of parallel, linear grooves
oriented perpendicular to the direction of said offset of
said projection lens, said grooves including inclined planar
surfaces angled with respect to a horizontal plane at vary-
ing angles, said prism being disposed between said con-
densing lens of said lighting means and said stage for
redirecting said convergent light focused by said condens-
ing lens to a position along said line extending from the
center of said stage and inclined toward said projection
surface at an angle with respect to a vertical plane equal to
said oblique angle, said position along said line corre-
sponding to the position of said projection lens; and
a planar mirror disposed opposite said stage with respect to
said projection lens to reflect light transmitted by said
projection lens to said projection surface.
4,436,393
DISTOR'nON CORRECTION FOR AN OVERHEAD
PROJECTOR SYSTEM
Dennis F. Vanderwerf, Cottage Grove, Minn., assignor to Min-
nesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Jan. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 455,425
Int. a.J G03B 21/14
U.S. Q. 353—38 4 Qaims
1. An overhead projector for projecting an undistorted
image of a transparency onto a vertical projection surface at a
selected oblique projection angle above a horizontal plane
within a range of oblique projection angles, comprising:
a horizontal transparency stage upon which the transpar-
ency to be imaged is placed;
a projection lens having a predetermined optic axis oriented
in a vertial plane, said lens being positioned above said
stage and ofTset from the center of said stage toward said
projection surface so that said lens will intersect a line
extending from the center of said stage and inclined
toward said projection surface at an angle with respect to
a vertical plane equal to said selected oblique projection
angle;
means for illuminating said transparency including a light
source disposed below said stage and having a predeter-
mined optic axis oriented in a vertical plane and intersect-
ing the center of said stage;
means disposed between said means for illuminating said
transparency and said stage for redirecting light produced
by said light source to said projection lens at said angle to
a vertical plane equal to said selected oblique projection
angle including a first annular Fresnel lens parallel to said
stage and having a predetermined optic axis oriented in a
vertical plane and coincident with said optic axis of said
light source and disposed between said light source and
said stage, and a second annular Fresnel lens parallel to
said stage and having a predetermined optic axis oriented
in a vertical plane and displaced from said optic axis of
said first annular Fresnel lens and said optic axis of said
light source in the direction of said offset of said oroiec-
tion lens, and first and second annular Fresnel lenses
cooperating to focus light produced by said light source at
said offset position of said projection lens; and
a mirror disposed adjacent said projection lens for reflecting
light exiting said projection lens toward said projection
surface at said oblique projection angle.
4,43634
SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING 'THE
EXPOSURE OF COLOR PICTURE TUBE PHOSPHOR
SCREENS
William R. Kelly, and Ernesto J. Alvero, both of Lancaster, Pa.,
assignors to RCA Corporation, Princeton, N J.
FUed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267.750
Int. a.3 G03B 41/00
U.S. a. 354—1 10 Claims
A\
-c
I. In a lighthouse employed for exposing an actinic energy
sensitive coating present on the inside surface of a picture tube
panel and having an actinic energy source and a power supply
for energizing said energy source, an improved system for
maintaining a constant energy intensity-time relationship com-
prising:
means directly responsive to the energizing power provided
to said actinic energy source for providing an output
signal having a characteristic related to the intensity of
said energy source;
means responsive to said output signal for providing a con-
trol signal, said control signal having a frequency deter-
mined by said output signal characteristic; and
means responsive to said control signal for controlling the
exposure of said actinic energy sensitive coating in accor-
dance with said control signal frequency, said means
responsive to said control signal including means for
providing a reference signal representative of a reference
frequency and means receiving said reference signal and
said control signal frequency for providing a signal related
to the ratio of said reference frequency and said control
signal frequency.
4,43635
FOCUS DETECTING DEVICE IN A SINGLE LENS
REFLEX CAMERA
Tom Fukuhara, Ischara, Japan, assignor to Nippon Kogaku
K.K., Tokyo. Japan
FUed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,728
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 6, 1981, 56-15830[U];
Feb. 13, 1981, 56-18185[U]
Int. a.' G03B i/OO, 19/12
U.S. a. 354-^406 2 Clains
1. In a single lens reflex camera including a housing, a main
reflectins mirror caDable of t>artiallv transmittins incident
664
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
light therethrough and disposed in a light path passing through
a mirror box provided between an objective lens and a film
surface so as to direct a light beam passing through said objec-
tive lens to a viewfmder optical system, an auxiliary reflecting
mirror for reflecting the light transmitted through said main
reflecting mirror toward a predetermined wall surface of said
mirror box lying at a location opposed to said viewfmder
optical system with said main reflecting mirror interposed
therebetween, and an optical device for detecting the focused
condition of said objective lens with respect to an object to be
photographed, the housing having a lengthwise dimension
perpendicular to the optical axis of the objective lens that is
greater than its dimension in the direction of the optical axis,
the improvement wherein said mirror box is formed with a
depression in said predetermined wall surface and said optical
device is disposed in the depression, said predetermined wall
surface being substantially coincident with a pre-imaging plane
of the objective lens that is conjugate with said film surface,
and wherein said optical device comprises field stop means
formed at an opening of said depression and located in said
predetermined wall surface, field lens means disposed in an
optical path leading from said field stop means, reflecting
means having first and second reflecting surfaces for separat-
ing the light from said field lens means into two mutually
opposed directions substantially parallel to said lengthwise
dimension of the housing, first and second photoelectric con-
verter means provided on the optical paths of the light beams
separated by said first and second reflecting surfaces and
spaced along the lengthwise dimension of the housing, the
distance between said reflecting means and each of said photo-
electric converter means along said lengthwise dimension
being substantially greater than the distance between said
pre-imaging plane and said reflecting means, and a pair of
re-imaging lens means disposed in the optical paths leading
from said reflecting means to said first and second photoelec-
tric converter means for forming first and second images on
said first and second photoelectric converter means, respec-
tively, from an image formed by said objective lens at said
pre-imaging plane.
4,436,396
ELECTROFLASH UNIT
Osama Maida, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Kogaku K.K.,
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of S«r. No. 358.836, Mar. 16, 1982, abandoned.
This appUcation Jon. 8, 1983, Ser. No. 501,545
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 23, 1981, 56-40505;
Mar. 23, 1981, 56^503
Int. a.3 G03B 15/05
MS, a 354-416 28 Claims
T' Tl 7l T. T,
with an output from said light measuring means or a sec-
ond mode that is different from said first mode, and
wherein said signal generating means generates said pre-
determined signal upon power being supplied to the elec-
troflash unit from said power source and upon said first
mode being selected by said selection means.
1. An electroflash unit attachable to a camera having means
for measuring light received through a photographing lens
thereof, said electroflash unit comprising:
a power source;
terminal means for connecting the electroflash unit to the
camera;
means for effecting flash light emission;
means for terminating said flash unit emission;
means for generating, on said terminal means, a predeter-
mined signal for plasting the light measuring means in a
state in which it is ready for operation; and
selection means for alternately selecting a first mode in
which flash light emission is terminated in accordance
4,436,397
PHOTOGRAPHIC INFORMATION DISPLAY SYSTEMS
FOR USE IN PHOTOGRAPHIC CAMERAS
Takeo Kobayashi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Asahi Kogaku
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,006
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 28, 1981, 56-81297
Int. a.3 G03B 17/20
U.S. a. 354-465 7 ci.i„„
'^A [jJ JLIS.'lLlJlirh.i? . I S. . '
— iTmTrrj'TmTrr. — 1_^ ,
WHfL
l-« •-• (-C t-O
1. A photographic information display system of a photo-
graphic camera having a finder comprising:
(a) a plurality of digits arranged in a field of view of said
finder,
(b) an arithmetic operation circuit inputted with digital
photographic information for producing digital code bits,
(c) a memory circuit for storing outputs of said arithmetic
operation circuit,
(d) a timing pulse generator supplied with the output signal
of an oscillator for producing successively lagged pulse
signals,
(e) a NAND gate circuit supplied with the output signal of
said arithmetic operation circuit and the pulse signals
outputted by said timing pulse generator for judging
whether a photographic information outputted by said
arithmetic operation circuit is adequate or not for output-
ting successively lagged pulse signals,
(0 AND gate circuits of a number corresponding to that of
said digits and respectively supplied with binary informa-
tions read out from said memory circuit and said lagged
pulse signals outputted by the NAND gate circuit, and
(g) digit drivers respectively supplied with binary informa-
MaRCH 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
663
tions outputted from said AND gate circuiu for driving
said digiu,
whereby sequentially to turn on or off said digiu at a predeter-
mined period for giving an alarm to a user of said photographic
camera.
4,43638
DEVICE FOR SPLnriNG PART OF LIGHT INHDENT
ON AN IMAGE FORMING OPTICAL SYSTEM
Klyonobu Endo, and Noriyuki Nose, both of Yokohama, Japan,
assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 280,347, Jul. 6, 1981, abandoned. This
appUcation Mar. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 476,398
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 25, 1980, 55-101909
Int. a.} G03B 13/08; G02B 5/02
U.S. a. 354—476 5 Oaims
the picture window as seen with respect to the forward trans-
pori direction of the strip-shaped material are alterable in
position by displacement of the muk, adjusuble means for
selecting a desired picture window as to iu size and/or position
within the picture area, first mechanical-electrical transducer
means coupled with said means for selecting the picture win-
dow for producing electrical signals in response to the selected
picture window, second mechanical-electrical transducer
means associated with said transport arrangement for produc-
ing electrical signals in response to any displacement of the
strip-shaped material in iU longitudinal direction, at least one
electronic logical circuit arrangement having a plurality of
signal inputs and outputs, said first and second transducer
means being electrically connected with some of the signal
inputs of said electronic logical circuit arrangement, and elec-
trically-operated transport control means associated with the
4-
-9
-s
.10
Jl
1. A device for splitting part of the light incident on an
image forming optical system, comprising:
a transparent substrate having a surface on which a periodic
relief is formed; and
a transparent filling, layer filling up completely said relief
surface of said transparent substrate to form a relief type
diffraction grating therein,
whereby said relief type diffraction grating serves to sepa-
rate No-th order of reflected diffraction light (NoS2) out
of the optical path of said incident light, each of the
transmitted diffraction light beams of orders lower than
the No-th order, except for zero order, having a diffrac-
tion efficiency not more than 6%.
a photodetector disposed outside of the optical path of said
incident light for detecting the No-th order of reflected
diffraction light beam which has been diffracted at said
relief type diffraction grating.
®"
r
F^
-
, , /
"~»
4 436 399
APPARATUS FOR TRANSPORTING OR POSITIONING
OF A STRIP-SHAPED LIGHT-SENSITIVE MATERIAL
WITH REFERENCE TO A PICTURE WINDOW
Carl Koch, Im SantenbiUU No. 82, Stetten, and Karl Gfeller,
KIrchweg 120, Langwiescn, both of Switzerland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 404,421, Jul. 28, 1982,
abandoned, which is a continttation of Ser. No. 161,647, Jun. 20,
1980, abandoned. This appUcation Aug. 27, 1982, Ser. No.
412,376
CUOms priority, appUcation Switzerland, Jun. 2, 1979,
5794/79
lot a^ G03B 17/02
MS. a. 354—159 24 Ckims
1. A device for use in making photographic exposures on a
strip-shaped, light-sensitive material, said device comprising a
housing having a picture area-limiting frame providing a fixed
light-path opeiiing, means for guiding the strip-shaped light-
sensitive material within the housing and behind the light-path
opening, a transport arrangement for the forward transport of
the strip-shaped material in steps in its longitudinal direction, at
least one adjustable mask for covering portions of the light-
path opening to thereby form a picture window which is
smaller than the light-path opening, the portions of the light-
path opening which can be covered by the mask adjoining
opposite edges of the light-path opening that are at right angles
to the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped material so that
a first edge of the picture window as well as a second edge of
transport arrangement for the strip-shaped material, said trans-
port control means being connected with some of the signal
outputs of the logical circuit arrangement, said logical control
arrangement being connected to deliver to said transport con-
trol means output signals dependent on the signals from said
first and second transducer means for controlling the transport
arrangement such that the steps of forward transport caused by
the transport arrangement for the strip-shaped material area
automatically limited in accordance with the size of the picture
window defined by the mask and such that each adjustment of
the means for selecting the picture window, which calls for a
positional change of the second edge of the picture window in
the forward transport direction of the strip-shaped material,
automatically produces a forward correction transport of the
strip-shaped material at least equal to said positional change.
4,436,400
APPARATUS FOR POSITIVE VIGNETTING
PhUUp S. Charts, 2631 Buenos Aires, Corina, CaUf. 91724, and
Roy Sweeney, Pasadena, CaUf., assignors to PhUUp Stewart
Charis, Pasadena, CaUf., a part interest
FUed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 326,859
Int. a.} G03B U/00
U.S. a. 354—296 4 Claims
1. A positive vignetting apparatus for positioning between a
camera lens and a subject to be photographed to allow the
addition of lighting to the peripheral region of a photographic
image of the subject without interference with the central
subject region thereof comprising:
a housing for positioning between the lens of a camera and
the subject to be photographed;
said housing including a direct optical path therethrough
between the subject and the lens of the camera with which
the apparatus is associated, said optical path being free of
optical elementt in the region of the optical path directed
at the subject;
666
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
vignetting means for partially obstructing a portion of the
direct optical path between the subject and the lens of said
camera;
an auxiliary light source contained within said housing and
positioned between said vignetting means and the lens of
said camera;
means shielding the lens of the camera from direct exposure
to said auxiliary light source;
Fitting comprising at least one bead on the interior of the tank
base and at least one bead and stop formation located on the
exterior of the closure member to enable the closure member to
be latched into a position in which it cannot be axially ex-
tracted from the base.
said auxiliary light source being operative to illuminate the
face of said vignetting means on the side thereof exposed
to the lens of said camera;
whereby said lens is illuminated directly by light from said
subject without intervening optical elements in a portion
of the optical path between the subject and the camera
lens is illuminated indirectly at peripheral regions of the
optica] path to provide positive vignetting of the periph-
eral regions thereof.
4,436,401
TANK WITH LIGHT-TIGHT CLOSURE
Eric Taylor, London, England, assignor to Paterson Products
Limited, London, England
FUed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,583
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 7, 1981,
8110891
Int a.3 G03D 13/04
U.S. a. 354—312 4 Claims
iiiiiiii ■ iiiiiin
miiiii
iiiiiitr
Ullllll
?
IIIIIIII
'""I"
IIIIIIII
muu
1. In a developing tank comprising a base member having
the form of a hollow, generally cylindrical upwardly open
tank, a film strip receiving member adapted to fit inside the
tank and comprising a central spindle and a film-support
mounted thereon, the film-support including a pair of spaced
apart discs having on their facing surfaces spiral grooves for
the reception of a film-strip, the tank additionally including a
closure member adapted to close the upwardly open tank base
in light-tight fashion^ the improvement comprising a substan-
tially funnel shaped closure member which extends across the
entire width of the tank and has on its external periphery means
which constitute, together with cooperating means on the
interior cylindrical surface of the walls of the tank, a bayonet
4436402
COPYING MACHINE
Rynbun Seimiya; Fumio Iwai, and Isao Nosaka, all of Hachioji,
Japan, assignors to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed No?. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,694
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 12, 1979, 54-145514
Int. a.3 G03G 15/04
UA a. 355—3 R 1 Qaim
1. In an electrophotographic copying machine of the type in
which an original placed upon a copy board is scanned and its
image projected upon a photosensitive surface, and in which
the effective distance between said original and the photosensi-
tive surface may be varied depending upon the size of the
original to be scanned, the improvement comprising indexing
means on said copy board indicating the placement of the
original to be scanned relative to a central base line, said index-
ing means being so dimensioned that the shorter side of the
original always corresponds to the direction of scanning.
4,436,403
GUIDANCE CORRECnON METHOD AND APPARATUS
FOR COPY PAPER PATH IN A COPIER
John H. Rhodes, Jr., and Alfonso A. Rosati, both of Longmont,
Colo., assignors to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jon. 7, 1962, Ser. No. 385,592
Int CL^ G03G 15/00
US. a. 355—3 SH 7 Claims
1. In a copier having first means for driving copy sheets
through an image transfer station and thence into second driv-
ing means such as fuser rollers and the like for withdrawing the
copy sheets from the transfer station and wherein the copy
sheet follows a curved path between said transfer station and
said second driving means, an improvement comprising:
a bender bar having at least a portion of the surface thereof
formed as an elongated edge; and
means mounting said bender bar with said edge forming an
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
667
inner guide for copy sheets passing through said curved
path, said mounting means including means establishing
different path lengths as between opposite ends of said bar
for copy sheete traveling from said image transfer station
to said second driving means, whereby said path length
esublishing means compensates for twisting motions to
copy sheets which cause distortion and blurring in image
transfer to the copy sheets.
'"^^■^
1. Sheet handling apparatus comprising:
means for defining first and second convergent paths along
which sheets are moved seriatim;
means located adjacent to said first path near the conver-
gence of said first and second paths for engaging sheets
moved along said first path, said means being moveable
into and out of said first path;
guide means located adjacent to said engaging means for
guiding a sheet moved along one of said paths, said guide
means being moveable between a first position adjacent to
said first path and a second position adjacent to said sec-
ond path; and
means (1) for moving said guide means to said first position
and for latching said engaging means so that it extends
into said first path to engage a sheet moved along said first
path; and (2) for moving said guide means to said second
position, and for latching said engaging means so that it is
held remote from said first and second paths.
4,436,405
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REGISTERING
RELATED TRANSFERABLE IMAGES IN ACCURATE
SUPERPOSITION ON A RECEIVER MEMBER
Robert J. Kindt, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
ComiNUiy, Rochester, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,238
Int. a.3 G03G 15/01
U.S. a. 355—3 TR 12 Claims
1. In an electrographic copier having means for forming
related transferable images at spaced locations on image-car-
rier means movable along a travel path, means for stopping
such image-carrier means to position one transferable image at
a predetermined location in said path, and transferring means
mounted adjacent to said path and movable relative to such
stopped image-carrier means for transferring a transferable
image from such image-carrier means to a receiver member,
the improvement comprising:
means for clamping a receiver member to said stopping
means; and
means, operatively associated with said transferring means,
for (i) positioning such clamped receiver member, during
movement of said transferring means, in transfer relation
with such one transferable image on the stopped image-
carrier means, and following transfer of such one transfer-
able image, (ii) removing such receiver member from such
4,436,404
SHEET HANDLING APPARATUS
William J. Simmons, and Richard Tinder, both of Rochester,
N.Y., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,733
Int a.3 G03G 15/14. 15/22
U.S. a. 355—3 SH 15 Claims
transfer relation while keeping such receiver member
clamped to said stopping means so that such image-carrier
means can be stopped to position another related transfer-
able image at said predetermined location, whereat such
receiver member has the same position relative to such
other related transferable image as it had to such one
transferable image, whereby such related images when
transferred are in accurate superposed register on such
receiver member.
4,436,406
PAPER FEEDER FOR RECORDING APPARATUS
Hiroshi Murasaki, Sakai; Masaya Ogawa, Osaka; Yi^i Enogu-
cU, Higashiosaka, and Mikio Masui, Itami, aU of Japan,
assignors to Minolu Camera Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,624
Claims priority, application Japan, Jon. 30, 1981, 56-102668
Int a? G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355—3 SH 14 Claims
1. The combination of:
a recording apparatus having a main body with means for
driving the apparatus therein, an automatic feed mecha-
nism therein including paper storage means and means for
automatically feeding recording paper from said storage
means, and a manual feed mechanism for feeding into said
apparatus recording paper manually inserted thereinto;
a paper feeder for supplying recording paper into the inte-
rior of the record apparatus and comprising a recording
paper accommodating unit for accommodating a larger
number of sheets of recording paper than the paper stor-
age means of the automatic feed mechanisnC uid unit
having means for feeding the recording paper out of the
668
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
unit, and releasable engaging means for removably attach-
ing the unit to said main body with the feeding means
positioned in a position opposed to said manual feed mech-
anism of the apparatus for delivering sheets of recording
paper to said manual feed means;
holding means on said main body and engagable with said
engaging means for holding said unit; and
coupling means for coupling said apparatus driving means
and said feeding means when said unit is attached to said
main body;
whereby when said unit is attached to said main body with
a multiplicity of sheets of recording paper accommodated
therein, the sheets can be fed to the interior of the appara-
tus through the manual feed mechanism.
4436407
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC REPRODUCnON OF A
THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECT
Toyokazu Satomi, Yokohama, and Nobuo Sakuma, Tokyo, both
of Japan, assignors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Japan
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,487
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 25, 1981, 56-79044
Int a.3 G03G 15/00
MS. a. 355—11 8 Claims
tain an "on" condition of said contacts during the time
from the beginning of manual turning on to activating of
manual turning off, and said power switch unit further
including a coil to release the "on" condition of said actua-
tor means before the manual activation thereof to turn
"ofT* said contacts;
timer means for measuring the time lapse from completion of
copying operation, said timer means being controlled by
said process control means;
1. An electrophotographic copying machine capable of
making a two-dimensional copy either from a two-dimensional
or three-dimensional object comprising:
holder means having a holding surface for holding a two-di-
mensional object on said surface or for holding a three-di-
mensional object extending above said surface;
a photosensitive member;
an optical system for directing a light image reflected from
said object to said photosensitive member;
adjusting means for adjusting said optical system to maintain
a conjugate image forming relation between a field of a
focal distance coincident with said holding surface and
said photosensitive member, and between a field of a focal
distance at a selected height above said holding surface
and said photosensitive member; and
electrophotographic processing means including charging
means and developing means to be applied to said photo-
sensitive member in forming an image thereon.
4,436408
IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS INCLUDING POWER
SWTTCH OPERATING MEANS
Tsuneki Inuzuka, Machida; Masato Ishida, Kawasaki; Hiroshi
Taaioka, Tokyo, and Hisashi Sakamaki, Yokohama, all of
Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUcd Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,975
Int a.3 G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355-14 R 8 cudms
1. Copying apparatus comprising:
process means for forming a visible image on a copy mate-
rial;
process control means for operatively controlling said pro-
cess means;
a manual power switch unit for supplying power to electric
loads of said process means and said process control
means, said manual power switch unit including switch
contacts and manually activated a^uator means to main-
206'
4C LINE PORT
power control means for driving said coil to release said
actuator means from the "on" condition to the "off" con-
dition when a predetermined period of time is measured
by said timer means; and
input means comprising instruction keys, wherein the mea-
suring operation of said timer means is reset by operation
of a said instruction key.
4436 409
nLE COMPACnON APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR
COPIERS
Carl A. Queener, Lyons, Colo., assignor to International Busi-
ness Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,932
Int a.3 G03G 15/00
MS. a. 355—14 R 17 Claims
•\
^^^ ^^SPF"
1. In an apparatus having a photosensitive surface for elec-
trostatically recording images and means synchronously mov-
ing copy sheets relative to the photosensitive surface for trans-
ferring images corresponding to the electrostatically recorded
images to a copy sheet at a transfer station, an improvement for
recording a plurality of original document images on a single
copy sheet comprising:
original document image producing means for producing a
light image at the photosensitive surface with said light
image being no greater than half the size of the surface
area of the copy sheet,
means controlling the orientation of said light image on said
photosensitive surface with respect to the synchronous
movement of the copy sheet for causing said light images
corresponding to sequential original document images to
March 13. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
669
be transferred to the copy sheet on separate portions of the improvement wherein a slide plate capable of reciprocating in
surface area thereof in a predetermined sequence, and the widthwise direction along the inner surface of at least one
means selectively operable for commanding said controlling
means to initiate image production at the photosensitive
surface at a location other than the first location of the
predetermined sequence.
4,436,410
IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS
Yntaka Komiya, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368,675
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 20, 1981, 56-58585
Int a.J G03G 15/01, 15/04
MS. CL 355—14 E 11 Claims
side wall of the toner particle receptacle is mounted to at least
the lower portion of the inner surface of said side wall.
^^ 1C0NTR0L
St-
4,436,412
CLEANING DEVICE FOR USE ON AN ELECTROSTATIC
COPYING APPARATUS
Ryutaro Yamagata, Hyogo; NobuhUco Koxuka, Osaka; Hltoshi
Nishihama, Osaka; Shigeo Koyama, Osaka, and Kazutada
Sakai, Osaka, all of Japan, assignors to Mita Industrial Com-
pany Limited, Osaka, Japan
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,565
Int a.3 G03G 21/00
U.S. a. 355—15 8 Claims
8. A color image forming apparatus having a variable magni-
fication ratio copy function comprising:
specifying means for specifying a magnification ratio of an
image to be formed on a record medium;
image forming means for forming a color image on said
record medium at the magnification ratio specified by said
specifying means, said image forming means including
exposure means for exposing an original and a plurality of
spectrometric means for selection to color-decompose
light from said original; and
control means for controlling said exposure means in accor-
dance with the magnification ratio specified by said speci-
fying means and the selected one of said plurality of spec-
trometric means, wherein said control means corrects the
light intensity by controlling a voltage applied to said
exposure means.
4 436 411
TONER dispenser' AND DETECTOR FOR AN
ELECTROSTATIC COPYING APPARATUS
Hideo Mlyoshl, HabUdno; Tadashl Umeda, Yaraato Takada, and
Takashl Aokl, Kusatsu, aU of Japan, assignors to Mita Indus-
trial Co., Ltd.. Japan
DlTision of Ser. No. 250,829. Apr. 3. 1981. Pat No. 4.382,674.
This appUcation Feb. 8, 1983, Ser. No. 465.062
Claims priority. appUcation Japan. Apr. 15. 1980. 55-49497
Int. a.3 G03G 15/08
MS. a. 355—14 D 12 Claims
1. In a developing device for an electrostatic copying appa-
ratus, said developing device comprising a developer recepta-
cle, a developer applicator mechanism for holding a pari of a
developer in the receptacle on its surface and applying toner
particles to a latent electrostatic image to be developed, and a
toner particle dispenser mechanism, said toner particle dis-
penser having a toner particle receptacle with an open bottom
and a feed roller disposed rotatably at the opening of the toner
particle receptacle and adapted to dispense the toner particles
in the toner particle receptacle to the developer receptacle; the
1. A cleaning device for use in a transfer type electrostatic
copying apparatus for removing residual magnetizable toner
from a photosensitive surface of the copying apparatus after an
operation of transfer of an electrostatic latent toner image from
the photosensitive surface, said cleaning device comprising:
magnetic brush cleaning means, adapted to be positioned
adjacent the photosensitive surface at a downstream posi-
tion with respect to the position of a transfer operation, for
magnetically removing residual toner from the photosen-
sitive surface, said magnetic brush cleaning means com-
prising a permanent magnet member fixedly positioned
within a hollow sleeve which is formed of a non-magnetiz-
able material and which is rotatable adjacent the photo-
sensitive surface, such that there is formed on the periph-
eral surface of said sleeve a magnetic brush of toner re-
moved from the photosensitive surface;
a restricting member positioned adjacent said sleeve for
restricting the length of the bristles of said magnetic brush
formed on said peripheral surface;
a toner receptacle for receiving toner removed from the
photosensitive surface by said magnetic brush cleaning
means, said receptacle being mounted for downward
movement as the weight of toner accumulated in said
receptacle increases;
switch means positioned with respect to said receptacle to be
actuated thereby when the weight of toner accumulated
670
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
therein has reached a predetermined value and thereby to
provide an indication of such accumulation;
feed-in means for forcibly feeding said removed toner to said
receptacle means; and
brush roller, means, adapted to be positioned upstream of
said magnetic brush cleaning means, for removing a
charge from the photosensitive surface prior to removal
therefrom of the residual toner by said magnetic brush
cleaning means, said bnish roller means comprising a
cylindrical member formed of a light transmitting material
and mounted for rotation, a charge eraser lamp positioned
within said cylindrical member, and a brush arranged on
the peripheral surface of said cylindrical member to bnish
against the photosensitive surface, said brush being ar-
ranged on said peripheral surface in a manner to define
light transmitting areas to enable light from said charge
eraser lamp to pass through said brush onto the photosen-
sitive surface.
4,436,414
TONER COLLECTION DEVICE
ShinWchi Kamiyama, Yokohama, and Yataka Haacgawa, Tokyo,
both of Japan, asaignors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Japan
FUed Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 420,864
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 25, 1981, 56-152327;
Sep. 25, 1981, 56-152328; Sep. 25, 1981, 56-152329
Int. a^ G03G 15/08
U.S. a. 355—15 10 Claima
4,436,413
MAGNETIC BRUSH DEVELOPING APPARATUS
Tateki Oka, Toyokawa, Japan, assignor to Minolta Camera
Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
FUed Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 413,724
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 11, 1981, 56-145650
Int. a.3 G03G 15/08
US. O. 355—15 7 Claims
f * •
1. A magnetic brush developing apparatus comprising a
developing sleeve made of a nonmagnetic material, a magnetic
roller rotatably mounted within said developing sleeve, means
for supplying a magnetic developer onto the peripheral surface
of said developing sleeve, drive means connected to said mag-
netic roller for rotating said magnetic roller to transport the
supplied developer along the peripheral surface of said devel-
oping sleeve, a developer scraping member made of a nonmag-
netic material and having a free end engaged with said devel-
oping sleeve for scraping developer off the peripheral surface
of said developing sleeve and guiding the developer along a
guide surface on said scraping member in a direction away
from the surface of said developing sleeve, and a foreign mate-
rial separating member made of a magnetic material and dis-
posed within a region which is subject to the magnetic action
of said magnetic roller and having an edge opposed to said
magnetic roller around which an alternating magnetic field is
set up when the magnetic roller is rotated, whereby said alter-
nating magnetic field agitates the developer which is scraped
off the peripheral surface of the developing sleeve for separat-
ing foreign material therefrom.
1. A toner collecting device comprising:
a container provided with an opening through which toner
is collected therein;
a holder generally in the shape of a tray for holding said
container; and
rocking means for rocking said holder back and forih such
that said holder moves at an accelerated speed while being
rocked in a predetermined direction and moves at a
slower speed while being rocked back to the original
position.
4,436,415
EXPOSURE PROCESS FOR USE IN A VARIABLE
MAGNinCATION COPYING MACHINE
Maaami Emoto, Kanagawa, Japan, aaaignor to Ricoh Company,
Ltd., Japan
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,872
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 22, 1980, 55-181648
Int a? G03B 27/52
U.S. O. 355—55 24 Claims
'O tS 4-1 C
1. An exposure process for use in a variable magnification
copying machine in which a photosensitive member is subject
to a slitwise exposure progressively in accordance with a scan
direction normal to a lengthwise direction of an exposure slit,
and an imaging lens system having an optical axis therefor
being movable in the scan direction in conjunction with said
progressive slitwise exposure and being displaceable in accor-
dance with a particular magnitude of copying magnification
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
671
which is utUized during a copying operation, the exposure
process comprising the steps of providing at least one rectan-
gular light shield member adjacent to the end face of a lens and
oriented so that its lengthwise direction corresponds to said
scan direction, the light shield member being integral with the
imaging lens system as the latter is displaced, the light shield
member being disposed so that it is wedged parily into an
exposure light flux as viewed in the lengthwise direction of the
exposure slit when the light shield member is to intercept light,
and changing the extent of intercepting the exposure light flux
by the light shield member as a copying magnification is
changed, whereby the distribution of exposure light in the
lengthwise direction of the exposure slit is made uniform.
4,436,416
MIRROR SCANNING CONTROL MECHANISM IN
VARIABLE MAGNinCATION TYPE COPYING
MACHINE
Ikuo Negoro, and Hisao Iwanade, both of Tokyo, Japan, assign-
ors to Asahi Kogaku Kogyo KabushUd Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 326,977
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 11, 1980, 55-174989
Int. a.J G03B 27/34. 27/40. 27/70
U.S. a. 355—57 12 Claims
1. In a copying machine of the type having means for hold-
ing an original document in a substantially fixed position, a full
speed mirror, movable a scanning distance which is at least the
length of said original at a scanning speed for reflecting light
from said original, half-speed mirrors movable in synchronism
with said full speed mirror at subsuntially half the speed
thereof for receiving and reflecting said light from said full
speed mirror, a magnification varying device including a zoom
lens system for receiving said reflected light from said half-
speed mirrors and for varying the magnification factor of said
copy machine, and a recording medium for receiving said light
from said magnification varying device and recording an
image of said original with a desired magnification factor, a
mirror scanning control mechanism comprising:
control means for controlling said scanning speed in accor-
dance with at least said desired magnification factor.
4,436,417
BEAM DIRECTOR FOR OPTICAL RANGING SYSTEM
Richard A. Hutchin, Marlboro, Mass., assignor to Itek Corpora-
tion, Lexington, Mass.
FUed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,335
Int. a.i GOIG 9/02
U.S. a. 356—4.5 4 Claims
1. An optical ranging system, comprising:
a. first and second reflectors, the distance between which is
being measured optically;
b. means for introducing a beam of radiation between said
first and second reflectors such that the radiation beam is
reflected therebetween, including a steering beam splitter
positioned obliquely in the radiation beam between the
first and second reflectors with the beam of radiation
being introduced obliquely onto the beam splitter and a
poriion of the beam being reflected by the beam splitter
onto the first refiector which reflecte it back through the
beam splitter onto the second reflector which reflecu it
back onto the beam splitter where it interferes with the
radiation beam being initially introduced onto the beam
splitter, said beam splitter being roUUble about at least a
first axis substantially perpendicular to the radiation beam
reflected between the first and second reflectors for steer-
ing the beam between the reflectors to compensate for
relative movements therebetween, such that translation of
the steering beam splitter in any direction does affect the
optical path difference between the reflectors.
4,436,418
DISTANCE DETECTOR DEVICE
Yukio Morino, ShUtawatashi, Japan, assignor to ScUco Koki
KabushUd Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,528
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 8, 1980, 55-124268
Int. a.J GOIC 3/10; G03B 7/08
U.S. a. 356—1 7 Claims
1. A distance detector device comprising: light projecting
means for projecting light toward an object whose distance is
to be measured, said light projecting means comprising a light
emitting element and a light projecting lens for projecting light
from said light emitting element; image forming means for
receiving reflected light from the object whose distance is to
be measured and for forming an image thereof; a light sensitive
element positioned at an image forming pari of said image
forming means for developing a photoelectric output in re-
sponse to light incident thereon; a light-blocking shade mov-
able over a surface of said light sensitive element to vary its
position along the length of said light sensitive element and
accordingly vary the photoelectric output thereof in depen-
dence upon the distance to the object whose distance is to be
measured; and a sensor circuit for sensing a variation of the
photoelectric output of said light sensitive element caused by
shielding of the light reflected from the object whose distance
is to be measured when said shade is operated.
672
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
4,436,419
OPTICAL STRAIN GAUGE
Karl A. Stetioo, Cofentry, and Irene R. HarriioB, Manchester, and
both of Coan., anignors to United Technologies Corporation,
Hartford, Conn.
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,238
Int a.} GOIB 9/02
U.S. CL 356—35.5 i Claim
from said source that has been transmitted by said grating
through said second transparent portion;
\
^'1
/
I
-V-
'^. o:
1. An optical system for measuring strain in a test object
comprising:
means for generating first and second optical beams having
first and second frequencies;
means for directing said first and second beams on said test
object;
at least two means for focusing radiation of said first and
second frequencies diffusely reflected from said test object
onto a focus plane;
a predetermined moire interference pattern recording posi-
tioned in said focus plane to intercept said focused radia-
tion, said moire pattern representing an exposure when the
amount of said strain is zero;
at least two detectors responsive to radiation focused by said
at least two means for focusing for generating electrical
signals in response to radiation of said first and second
frequencies impinging thereon, said electrical signals hav-
ing first and second phases;
means for measuring the phase diflierence between said first
and second phases of said electrical signals to form a
representation of said strain.
4 436 420
OPTICAL FLUID ANALYZING APPARATUS AND
METHOD
StCTen W. Depp, and Glenn T. Sincerbox, both of San Joae,
Calif., aadgnora to Intematioaal BniineM Machines Corpora-
tion, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,269
IJit. a.J GOIN 21/41
U.S. a. 356—128 7 cudma
1. An optica] fluid analyzing apparatus comprising:
transparent means having a known refractive index and
defining between first and second portions thereof a cell
for receiving a fluid sample having an unknown refractive
index, said first portion having a diffraction grating
formed on an inner surface facing the cell;
a light source positioned at an incident angle with said grat-
ing to satisfy the Bragg condition;
first detector means for sensing the intensity of the light from
said source that has been diffracted by said grating
through the sample;
second detector means for sensing the intensity of the light
means responsive to signals generated by said first and sec-
ond detector means for providing an output related to the
refractive index of the sample.
4,436,421
POLARIS AXIS nNDER
Kozaburo Suzuki, Saitama, Japan, assignor to Asahi Kogaku
Kogyo Kabushlki Kalsha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,141
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 3, 1980, 55-125506[U]
Int. a.3 GOIB 11/26: GOIC 17/34
U.S. a. 356—153 13 Claims
• 20
1 >•
' .2
2ZZZ2
1. A polar axis finder for an equatorial mounting telescope,
comprising:
an objective lens;
a focus mirror disposed at a focal point of said objective lens,
said focus mirror being rotatable about an axis of rotation
and having a Polaris collimating mark thereon which is
asymmetrically disposed with respect to said axis of rota-
tion;
a date scale;
a time scale fixedly secured for rotation with said focus
mirror relative to said date scale; and
an eyepiece for viewing an image of Polaris via said objec-
tive lens and focus mirror.
4,436,422
SENSOR WHICH IS SENSITIVE TO PRESSURE,
TENSION, TORSION AND HEAT AND A PROCESS OF
OPERAnON
Gerhard Schifltoer, Mnnich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin k Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Ang. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 179,665
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 7,
1979, 2936303
lot a.3 GOIB 9/02
U.S. a. 356—349 5 Claims
1. A process of utilizing a sensor which is sensitive to influ-
ences including pressure, heat, tension and torsion, said process
including: providing a sensor having means for receiving influ-
ences from pressure, heat, tension and torsion, said means
comprising a ring interferometer having a light source, a pair
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
673
of detectors, and a waveguide wound in a coil with a coupling
point at each end, said waveguide being capable of propagating
only one mode of specific first and second polarization states
with the second polarization sute being of a fixed relationship
to said first polarization state; said ring interferometer having
(1) means for coupling light of said first polarization sute from
said source into each coupling point of the waveguide for
propagation therein to the other coupling point for output
coupling therefrom, (2) means for receiving said output cou-
pled light from said pair of coupling points, for superimposing
o^^^
-113'
-^2
approximately midway between the apexes of the triangu-
lar body; and
a plurality of sliu longitudinally formed between the wing
sections and the arcuate segments for permitting oscillat-
ing displacement of the body relative to the wing sections
about the axis.
4,436,424
INTERFEROMETER USING TRANSVERSE DEVUTION
OF TEST BEAM
Joachim Bunkenburg, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to GCA Corpo-
ration, Bedford, Mass.
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,269
Int. Q.3 GOIB 9/02
U.S. a. 356—356 13 Claims
^-^
V
■i>-
components thereof into two separate superimposed beams,
and for separately directing said two separate beams at said
pair of detectors, and (3) a polarizer which is transparent to
only said second polarization state and which is located in the
path of each separate superimposed beam adjacent a light
receiving surface of the respective detector; subjecting said
interferometer to one of said influences to cause a changeover
of light of said first polarization sute to the second polarization
sute to change the intensity of the light of said second polar-
ization sute; and measuring the change in the intensity of the
light of the second polarization sute received at said detectors.
4,436,423
RING LASER GYROSCOPE SUSPENSION
Shri A. Kumar, Parsippany; Bo H. G. LJung, and James G.
Koper, both of Wayne, aU of N J., assignors to The Singer
Company, Little FaUs, N J.
FUed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,608
Int. a.J GOIC 19/64
U.S. CI. 356—350 4 Claims
1. A ring laser gyroscope comprising:
a generally triangular body having three apexes and an axis;
a bore axially formed in the center of the body coaxially
therewith;
a generally cylindrically shaped hinge located within the
bore coaxially therewith, the hinge including:
a plurality of radially extending spaced wing sections for
mounting the hinge;
a plurality of arcuate segmentt, each segment bridging two
adjacent wing sections and extending radially outwardly
therefrom for contact with the bore, the segmenu sub-
tending predetermined arcuate areas of contact with the
bore, the segmenu being positioned in a preselected orien-
Ution so that the centers of the contact areu are located
1. An interferometer using light divided into reference and
test beams traveling different paths from which said beams are
reflected and recombined for detecting interference fringes,
the path for said test beam being arranged to change in length
with deviation transverse to said test beam path, said interfer-
ometer comprising:
a. a test- beam reflector formed as a reflective diffration
grating;
b. said diffraction grating being inclined relative to said test
beam at the autocollimation angle of said grating so said
grating reflects said test beam back on itself;
c. means responsive to said deviation transverse to said test
beam path for moving the region where said test beam is
incident on said inclined grating; and
d. said inclination of said diffraction grating being oriented
relative to said test beam so that movement of said region
where said test beam is incident on said inclined grating
changes the path length of said test beam.
4,436,425
SIGNAL WAVEFORM DETECTOR USING SYNTHETIC
FM DEMODULATION
James H. Cole, Great FaUs, Va., assignor to The United Statss
of America u represented by the Secretary of the Nary,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,813
Int. Q.} GOIB 9/02
U.S. a. 356—361 7 Claims
^H^^
1. A test signal waveform detector comprising:
an interferometer for splitting into two parts a light beam from
an external coherent light source, for modulating the phase
674
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
difference of the two parts by the waveform of a sinusoidal
test signal and the waveform of a sinusoidal reference signal,
the reference signal having a frequency tan *nd acting as a
carrier to the test signal information, and for recombining
the two parts of the split beam to form an interference pat-
tern;
a photodetector disposed at the output of the interferometer
and responsive to forming of the interference pattern for
producing an ac signal that is proportional to the cosine of
the phase difTerence of the recombined two parts of the split
beam;
signal conversion means connected to the photodetector for
converting the ac signal produced by the photodetector to
another ac signal that carries the test signal information as an
equivalent frequency modulation; and
a demodulator connected to the signal conversion means for
extracting the test signal information from the other ac
signal.
4,436,426
HIGH-PREOSION REFLECTOMETER
Irl W. Smith, Newton, Mass., assignor to Raytheon Company,
Lexington, Maia.
ContiBiution of Scr. No. 866,893, Jan. 3, 1978, abandoned. This
•ppUcation Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,404
Int. CX? GOIB 11/30; GOIJ 4/00; GOIN 21/55
VS. a. 356—369 16 C3ainis
energizing the source of light with pulses from the same
resonant circuit, thereby synchronizing the light pulses
from the source with the photoresponsive circuit to per-
mit noise rejection.
4,436,428
PHOTOACOUSnC SPECTROMETER
Atrao Watanabe, and Masahiro Uno, both of Kawaaakl, Japan,
assignors to FiUi Electric Co., Ltd., Kawasaki, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 55,271, Jul. 6, 1979, abandoned,
and a continnation-in-part of Ser. No. 55,272, Jul. 6, 1979,
abandoned, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 58^07, Jul.
17, 1979, abaiutoncd. This application Not. 25, 1980, Ser. No.
210,407
Int a.3 GOIN 21/00
U.S. a. 356—432 i cUdm
MMffOM, /J
fW*™ SrtS*;i«"
h: -O-^i-JC^E
206
279
ao2
1. A reflectometer for determining the reflectivity of reflect-
ing means comprising:
means for producing a beam of light;
first and second reflecting means;
means for producing a flrst signal which is a function of the
difference of the reflectivities of said first and second
reflecting means;
means for producing a second signal which is a function of
the product of said reflectivities; and
means for producing an output signal as a function of said
first and second signals, said output signal being a function
of the reflectivity of at least one of said first and second
reflecting means.
4,436,427
PHOTOELECTRIC MEASUREMENT OF MOVING
FILAMENTARY MATERIAL
Hermann Schwartz, Pflifflkon, assignor to Siegfried Preyer,
Switzerland
FUed Feb. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 347,277
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Feb. 18, 1981,
1078/81
Int CL^ GOIB 11/10
U.S. a. 356-385 6 Claims
1. A method of measuring the diameter of longitudinally
moving filamentary material including
providing a pulsed source of light and a photoresponsive
detector facing and on opposite sides of a measuring gap,
running the filamentary material through the gap,
providing a resonant circuit coupled to the output of the
photoresponsive detector for rejecting signals other than
those resulting from the pulsed source of light, and
'»iO
ITS
'ZT7
1. A photoacoustic spectometer including a mounting block
and a detector block carried thereby, said mounting block
having a vertically-oriented opening therethrough and a hori-
zontal opening therein communicating with said vertical open-
ing;
support means movably carried in said vertically oriented
opening;
vertical adjustment means carried by said horizontal open-
ing and engaging said support means for efTecting vertical
motion thereof;
said detector block being supported from said mounting
block and have an overhanging portion, said overhanging
portion including at least one opening therethrough;
said detector block including, in addition, a sample bed
portion, said sample bed portion including a recess in the
lower surface thereof adapted to receive said support and
at least one upper recess in the upper surface thereof
adapted to receive a sample dish, said upper recess being
positioned to be, in use, aligned with said at least one
opening in said overhanging portion of said detector
block;
a window covering said upper recess;
an O-ring surrounding said window;
said sample bed portion including, in addition, a reference
chamber;
a tunnel fluid-coupling said reference chamber to said upper
recess;
a pair of thermo-sensitive elements supported at the refer-
ence chamber end of said tunnel and each having termi-
nals for connection to external electrical circuits;
said reference chamber having means for connecting to an
external source of a fluid;
said sample bed portion and said "0"-ring being forced into
sealing engagement with said overhanging portion upon
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
675
upward movement of said support means by adjustment of
said vertical adjustment means, to form a sealed chamber.
4,436,429
SLURRY PRODUCTION SYSTEM
William A. Strong, Rte. 11, Box 1150, Brinkley Rd., Pine Bluff,
Ark. 71611, and Kenneth Church, Pine Bluff, Ark., assignors
to Willian A. Strong, Pine Bluff, Ark.
Division of Scr. No. 262,754, May 11, 1981. This appUcation
Sep. 27, 1982, Scr. No. 424,400
Int a? BOIF 3/12
U.S. a. 366—2 11 Claims
wall and an outlet connected to a suction device and an axially
disposed, motor-driven mixing shaft having mixing means, the
improvement comprising said mixing chamber including a disc
member surrounding said shaft and rouuble therewith, said
disc member extending substantially perpendicular to said
shaft and having on a face thereof opposite said outlet said
mixing means, said mixing means comprising a plurality of
generally upstanding and radially extending beaters being
secured on said face of said disc member, each said beater
vs*i«ati
snio
ClICT«iC
ItOTM
^
1. An automatic slurry production system comprising:
means for receiving a powdered or aggregate raw material
material and a liquid to be mixed therewith whereby to
form a slurry mixture;
agitator means for blending said slurry mixture;
hydraulic motor means for actuating said agitator means;
means for sensing hydraulic pressure variations experienced
by said hydraulic motor means whereby to derive a con-
trol signal proportional to slurry viscosity;
valve means for controlling the introduction of liquid into
said means for receiving a powdered or aggregate raw
material, said valve means responsive to said control sig-
nal whereby liquid flow rate is generally proportional to
the viscosity of said slurry mixture;
pump means for outputting slurry from said system;
means for regulating slurry output volume, said last men-
tioned means comprising:
sensing means for monitoring slurry head level within said
means for receiving a powdered or aggregate raw mate-
rial; and,
means responsive to said last mentioned sensing means for
controlling the speed of said pump means whereby to
control slurry output volume in response to said slurry
head level.
having a free outer edge, said free outer edges of said beaters
and outer edge of said disc member being spaced from said
mixing chamber wall to define an annular gap having a width
just exceeding the largest grain diameter of the dry mortar,
said mixing chamber comprising further an annular liquid
supply member surrounding and radially spaced apart from
said mixing shaft, and said mixing chamber including further-
more baflle means for diverting the material being mixed from
said suction device.
4,436,430
DEVICE FOR THE CONTINUOUS MIXING OF A DRY
FINISHED MORTAR
Kari M. Mayer, Immenbofcn 55, 8951 Ruderatshofen, and
Rudolf SchMfer, Blaichachcr Str. 21, 8971 Burgfterg, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Coatiniiation of Ser. No. 149,695, May 14, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation May 11, 1982, Scr. No. 377,168
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 17,
1979, 2920025
Int. a.3 B28C 5/08, 5/16
MS. a. 366—13 10 Claims
1. In a device for the continuous mixing of a powdery, dry
mortar with a liquid and/or foam material, wherein said device
includes a cylindrical mixing chamber having a circumferential
4,436,431
SLURRY PRODUCTION SYSTEM
WUUam A. Strong, Rte. 11, Box 1150, Brinkley Rd., Pine Bluff,
Ark. 71611, and Kenneth Church, Pine Bluff, Ark., aaaignora
to WUUam A. Strong, Pine Bluff, Ark.
Division of Scr. No. 262,754, May 11, 1981, Pat. No. 4,397,561.
This appUcation Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,278
Int. a.3 BOIF 15/02
U.S. a. 366—17 2 Claims
1. Automatic slurry mixing and pumping apparatus compris-
ing:
vat means for receiving a powdered or aggregate raw in-
coming material and a liquid to be mixed therewith
whereby to form a slurry mixture;
agiutor means dispossed within said vat means for blending
said slurry mixture;
hydraulic motor means for actuating said agitator means;
pump means in fluid flow communication with said vat
means for outputting slurry from said apparatus;
variable speed electric motor means for driving said pump
means;
means for automatically controlling output volume, said last
mentioned means comprising:
ultrasonic, open channel monitoring means for monitoring
slurry head level within said vat means and for control-
ling said variable speed electric motor means in re-
sponse thereto; and,
means responsive to said head monitoring means for con-
troUing the speed of said pump means whereby to regu-
late the volume of slurry outputted from said apparatus;
and,
676
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
means for continuously and automatically regulating slurry
viscosity concurrently with operation of said means for
controlling slurry output volume, said last mentioned
means comprising:
means for sensing hydraulic pressure variations experi*
t*CID
lilCTIrC
itorwi
:^
enced by said hydraulic motor means hereby to derive
a control signal proportional to slurry viscosity; and,
valve means for controlling the introduction of liquid in to
said vat means, said valve means responsive to said
control signal whereby liquid flow rate is generally
proportional to the viscosity of said slurry mixture.
4,436,432
KNEADING MACHINE
Amabile Drocco, Alba, Italy, assignor to Sancassiano S.p.A.,
Cuneo, Italy
FUed Nov. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,049
Claims priority, application Italy, Nov. 13, 1980, 68740 A/80
Int a.3 A21C J/06. 1/14; B28C 1/16; B29B 1/06
VS. a. 366—95 6 Claims
1. A kneading machine including:
a fixed support structure;
a kneading trough centrally supported by said support struc-
ture for rotation about a vertical axis, and
a rotary kneading tool located within said kneading trough,
wherein the improvement comprises providing:
said kneading tool with means for rotating said tool about a
substantially horizontal axis, and
said machine being further provided with fixed counter-
members which comprise two arms supported in a sub-
stantially horizontal plane by a central shaft and disposed
at both sides of said kneading tool, said fued counter-
members cooperating with said kneading tool to separate
the dough entrained by said tool during rotation, wherein
the axis of rotation of said kneading tool extends substan-
tially radially of the vertical axis of rotation of said knead-
ing trough.
4,436,433
BLENDING OF FLUID MATERIALS
George D. Barnes, Camberley, England, assignor to Wilkinson
Rubber Llnatex Limited, Great Britain
FUed Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 345,407
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 9, 1981,
8103909
Int CI' G05D 11/02
U.S. CL 366—152 20 Claims
1. Apparatus for treating a particulate material, the constitu-
ent particles of which are of non-uniform size, in order to
obtain at least one product which meets a desired particulate
specification, the apparatus comprising a classifier which sepa-
rates the partculate material into a relatively coarse underflow
fraction and a relatively fine overflow fraction, and which has
control means for varying as required the flow of the under-
flow fraction from the classifier, the apparatus further com-
prises at least a first and a second one of said classifier, the said
first classifier having a first control means for varying as re-
quired the flow of a first underflow fraction from the said first
classifer and the second classifier having a second control
means for varying as required the flow of a second underflow
fraction from the said second classifier, means for blending the
consequent first and second underflow fractions including
means for controlling the first and second control means so as
to maintain during blending a chosen blend ratio between the
rate of flow of the first underflow fraction and the rate of flow
of the second underflow fraction, and means for dumping such
underflow fraction as is surplus to blending requirements.
15. Apparatus to control blending of supplies of at least a
first and a second fluid material comprising (1) at least a first
flow control valve actuable by a first valve signal for control-
ling a flow of said first material and a second flow control
valve actuable by a second valve signal for controlling a flow
of said second material, (2) ratio-setting means for securing a
chosen ratio between a rate of flow of the first fluid material
through the first valve and a rate of flow of the second fluid
material through the second valve and thereby obtain a desired
blend of material upon mixing the said flows downstream of
said valves, and (3) check means for sensing periods of time
when one or more of the said supplies is not adequate for
obtaining the desired blend and for halting blending until the
supplies are adequate.
4,436,434
PNEUMATIC TIMER
Kurt StoU, Lenzhalde 72, D-7300 Essllngen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, and Hans-Helnrich GlMttU, Seestrasse 252, CH-8700
Kiisnacht, Switzerland
FUed Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,668
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, JuL 28,
1981, 3129663
Int. a.3 G04B 1/26
VJS. a. 368—65 13 dnins
1. A pneumatic timer having
a housing,
a bellows supported by said housing and able to be changed
in length along a bellows axis with a change in the amount
of air within a space in the said bellows,
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
677
a spring for causing a change in length of said bellows with
motion thereof along said axis,
an air valve joining said space within said bellows with the
atmosphere,
a bellows driving unit for opening said valve and producing
a change in the length of said bellows along said bellows
axis against said spring with an exchange of air between
the space inside said bellows and the atmosphere, said
driving unit then moving into a starting position thereof.
» 1$ 1
an adjustable choke joining said bellows space with the
atmosphere,
a sensing unit for sensing the end of a change in the length of
said bellows as produced by said spring,
and a stop for limiting motion of said bellows as produced by
said spring, said stop and said sensing unit being a one-
piece structure, said stop being adjustably fixed to and in
said housing so that it may be moved along said axis.
4,436,435
ANALOG AND DIGITAL DISPLAY TIMEPIECE
Kenichi UshUcoshi, Suwa, Japan, assignor to KabushUd Kaisha
Snwa Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 147,881, May 8, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,426
Claims priority, application Japan, May 8, 1979, 54-61172;
Oct. 11, 1979, 54-131001
Int. a.} G04B 25/00
U.S. a. 368—71 13 Qalms
a watch case having an upper display surface and an interior,
said display surface having at least one display opening;
a transparent cover panel within said display opening;
watch movement means including at least timekeeping cir-
cuit means and a gear train and motor for driving an
analog display, and driving circuit means for driving a
digital display, said movement disposed within said inte-
rior;
analog display means disposed within said interior between
said movement and said transparent cover panel in regis-
tration with said display opening, said analog display
means including a substantially planar analog dial cover-
ing at least a portion of said movement and at least an hour
hand and a minute hand, said hands driven by said gear
train and motor; and
liquid crystal digital display means within said interior be-
tween said movement means and said transparent cover
panel in the space occupied by said hands, said digital
display means driven by said driving circuit means in said
movement means and disposed adjacent said analog dis-
play means in registration with said at least one display
opening, said digital display means occupying a smaller
surface area than that of said analog display and mounted
to said watch movement means and disposed in a direction
of 12 o'clock of said analog display, the face of the liquid
crysul digital display means being inclined to the direc-
tion of six o'clock with respect to said dial so that one side
of the liquid crystal digital display means is adjacent to the
dial and the other side of the display means is adjacent to
the under surface of the transparent cover panel and fur-
ther, said digitsal display and said hands being disposed in
the same region defined by the space between said cover
panel and said analog dial.
4,436,436
DETECTION CTRCUIT FOR AN ELECTRONIC
TIMEPIECE
Masuo Kltano, Matsumoto, Japan, assignor to Shlmauchl Seiki
KabushUd Kaisha, Nagano and Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa ScUio-
sha, Tokyo, both of, Japan
FUed Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,208
Qainu priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 3, 1981, 56-138909;
Jun. 16, 1982, 57-103625
Int. a.3 G04B 7/00, H03K 17/22
U.S. a. 368—204 8 Claims
•*s *e».
S!t
1. A hybrid display watch comprising:
1040 O.G.— 26
1. In an electronic timepiece comprising an oscillator circuit
outputting a standard frequency signal, a divider network
dividing down said standard frequency signal to provide time-
keeping data, display means for displaying at least said time-
keeping data, a battery, said battery when applied, providing
power to operate said electronic timepiece, a voltage circuit
for boosting the voltage out of said battery, operation of said
voltage boosting circuit being subject to input thereto of a
frequency signal derived from operation of said oscillator
circuit, the improvement therein comprising:
a detection circuit for detecting the application of said bat-
tery in said timepiece, said detection circuit including:
a capacitor having first and second terminals;
a first switching element in parallel with said capacitor, said
678
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
first switching element when OFF being an open circuit
and when ON being of low resistance;
a second switching element electrically connected at one
end to said second capacitor terminal, boosted voltage
terminals of said voltage circuit being electrically con-
nected respectively to said first capacitor terminal and to
the other end of said second switching element;
circuit means operating in a first mode turning said first
switching element OFF and said second switching ele-
men ON when said boosted output at said voltage circuit
terminals exceeds the voltage of said battery, and in a
second mode turning said first switching element ON and
said second switching element OFF when said output at
said voltage circuit terminals is less than said battery
voltage, said capacitor charging through said second
switching element in said first mode, charging of said
capacitor to a selected level in said first mode causing an
output signal indicative of battery application and opera-
tion of said oscillator circuit.
4,436,437
HIGH ENERGY SINGLE PULSE LASER CALORIMETER
William R. Beggi, Albnqnerqoe, N. Mex., and Barry D. Crane,
USAF Academy, Colo., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Air Force.
Washington, D.C.
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,818
Int. a.J GOIJ 5/24: GOIK 77/00
UA a 374-32 3 0.1^
1. A high energy, single pulse laser calorimeter apparatus
comprising in combination:
an energy absorbing means for absorbing the energy in a
laser beam, said energy absorbing means converting the
energy in said laser beam to a heat signal.
an energy equilibrating means to receive and absorb said
heat signal,
a bonding means to bond said energy absorbing means and
said energy equilibrating means together, said bonding
means being thermally conductive, and,
a heat sensing means to receive said heat signal from said
energy equilibrating means, said heat sensing means de-
tecting and converting said heat signal to a voltoge signal,
said heat sensing means comprising a plurality of transis-
tors of which the base and emitter leads between respec-
tive adjacent transistors are connected together to form a
series circuit of diode junctions, and a constant current
source to forward bias said series circuit of diode junctions
to provide a voltage drop thereacross.
4,436,438
MULTIPLE PROBE TEMPERATURE MEASURING
SYSTEM AND PROBES THEREFOR
Henry P. Voanick, Arcadia, Calif., aasignor to WaU lastm-
ments, Inc, ColTer Qty, Calif.
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Scr. No. 285,331
lot a.3 GOIK 7/20
UA a 374-165 gchtaa
1. A resistance heat measuring system comprising
a plurality of independent, individually separate and mutu-
ally unconnected probes including at least an immersion
probe and a surface probe, each said probe having a probe
Ixxly and a resistive sensor mounted therein, said immer-
sion probe sensor having a nominal resistance at a refer-
ence temperature and a nontemperature varying resistor
connected in series therewith,
a first detachable electrical connector attached to said im-
mersion probe body and electrically connected to the
immersion probe sensor,
a second detachable electrical connector attached to said
surface probe body and electrically connected to the
surface probe sensor,
a meter for indicating temperature in accordance with mea-
sured resistance of a probe sensor, said meter being cali-
brated to the resistance temperature curve of a resistive
sensor having said nominal resistance at said reference
temperature,
means including said connectors for alternatively and de-
tachably connecting one or the other of said probes to said
meter.
said surface probe sensor having a resistance at said refer-
ence temperature that is substantially the same as the sum
of the resistance of said immersion probe sensor, and said
nontemperature varying resistor at said reference temper-
ature whereby the resistance of said surface probe sensor
changes at a greater rate with equal temperature changes
in said sensors than does the resistance of said immersion
probe sensor to thereby decrease errors due to loss of heat
from said surface probe body to ambient atmosphere
when said surface probe is connected to the meter and said
surface probe body is in contact with a surface of which
temperature is to be measured, and whereby each said
probe may be interchangeably and individually connected
to said meter for temperature measurement without
changing calibration of the meter.
4,436,439
SMALL PRINTER
Hamhiko Koto, SUoJiri, Japui, aasignor to Epson CorporatkMi,
Nagano and Kaboshlld Kalsha Snwa Sdkosha, Tokyo, both of,
Japan
Filed Ang. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,610
Claims priority, appUcation Japan. Ang. 27, 1980, 55-117890:
Ang. 27, 1980, 55-117891
lat d? GOID 15/18
U.S. a 400-126 66 dalw
1. A printer for printing characters on a printing medium
comprising a frame, carriage means slidably mounted on said
frame for reciprocal lateral displacement across said printing
medium, a first end of said carriage means being slidably
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
679
mounted on said frame, said carriage means including a second
end pivotally coupled to said frame, printing means carried on
said carriage means for selectively printing characters at pre-
determined positions along lines of said printing medium,
motor means for providing a rotary motion, coupling means
coupling said motor means to said carriage means for selec-
tively converting the rotary motion of said motor means into
non-uniform reciprocation of said carriage means so that said
printing means reciprocates through said predetermined posi-
tions, said coupling means being a crank means including a
•« 47
crank gear means rotatably mounted on said frame and en-
gaged with said motor means for rotation thereby and a trans-
mission lever means coupled intermediate said crank gear
means and said carriage means for converting the rotation of
said crank gear means into reciprocation of said carriage
means, and printing position control circuit means for deter-
mining when said printing means is in each said predetermined
position and for selectively supplying a printing signal to said
printing means so that said printing means will print a charac-
ter at said selected predetermined positions.
SHIFTABLE DAISY WHEEL PRINTER
,-^ Nobuo Iwata, Kanagawi, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Company,
\ Ltd., Japan
Filed Oct 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,443
aalBS priority, appliartioa Japan, No?. 10, 1980, 55-157833
Int a^ B41J 1/24
U.S. a 400— 144J 17 Oains
1. A printer including a type wheel carrying a multiplicity of
fingers carrying type in a plurality of tien ud centrally pro-
vided with a rotary shaft, means for achieving a printing opera-
tion by imparting to the type wheel a motion to select one of
the plurality of tien and a rotary motion to select one of the
muliplicity of fingers; characterized in that said means includes
a rotatable drive shaft for transmitting torque to said rotary
shaft of the type wheel through a joint comprising a pair of
pins substantially orthogonal to each other and a coupling
member having portions slidably receiving each of said pins,
said portions being spaced radially outwards from each of said
shafts.
4,436,441
TYPEWRITER ACCESSORY DEVICE FOR BOLD FACE
TYPING
George R. Robert, 11 Hackfeld Rd., Worcester, Maas. 01609
FUed Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,680
Int a.i B41J 7/18
U.S. a. 400—304 3 Claims
1. A device for creating bold type for use with a typewriter
having a half-space lever, the device comprising: (a) a frame
adapted to be positioned adjacent the half-space lever said
frame having: (i) a base with securing lugs affixed to said base,
and (ii) a support member integral with said base, (b) first
means adjustably mounted on said support member for con-
tacting said lever, (c) and second means for securing said first
means into a pre-selected position with respect to said support
member.
4,436,442
DIRECTORY HOLDER
Reaold A. Miskia, 1722 Roberta St, Salt Lake Qty, Utah 84115
CoBtiBiiatloa of Ser. No. 159,960, Jua. 16, 1980, abaadoaed,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 892,997, Apr. 3, 1978,
abandoned. This application Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427385
Int a? B42F 13/00
MS. a. 402—73 10 Clalau
1. A directory holding device for containing, preserving and
securing a directory such as a telephone directory, said direc-
tory holding device comprising:
(a) bed means adapted to receive a directory;
(b) cover means;
(c) hinge means adapted for hingedly attaching said cover
means, along one side thereof, to a mutually re^wctive
680
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
side of said bed means, so that the cover means can be
moved from a closed position in which it substantially
overlies said bed means to an open position in which it lies
substantially adjacent to said bed means, whereby said
cover means is adapted to cover the directory when said
cover means is in the closed position overlying said bed
means and to receive any portion of the directory when
said cover means is in the open position lying adjacent to
said bed means;
(d) flange support means at the respective bottom ends of
said bed means and said cover means for supporting the
pages of a directory when any portion of said directory is
received in said bed means and said cover means;
(e) positioning pin means comprising a generally inverted
U-shaped member having a front portion and a straight
back portion which is bent back over said front portion,
with said straight back portion being adapted to serve as a
hinge pin in said hinge means, whereby said positioning
pin means may pivot about the hinge line of said hinge
means, and with said front portion of said positioning pin
means being adapted to extend downwardly between
pages of the directory to maintain the top side of the
directory in a proper position;
(0 cradle pin means comprising an elongate pin member
having a straight central portion with opposite end por-
tions which are bent back in opposite directions over the
central portion so as to form a top loop defmed by one of
the end portions and the central portion and a bottom loop
defmed by the other end portion and the central portion,
with the one end portion forming said top loop serving as
a hinge pin in said hinge means whereby said cradle pin
means is adapted to pivot about the hinge line of said hinge
means, and whereby the other end portion forming said
bottom loop being adapted to extend upwardly between
pages of the directory such that the directory is supported
by said bottom loop; and
(g) security means adapted to prevent easy removal of said
positioning pin means from said hinge means and subse-
quently easy removal of a directory from said directory
holding device, said security means comprising an elon-
gate tab means mounted for movement from a first posi-
tion to a second position, wherein in said first position a
portion of said tab means extends over said positioning pin
means blocking the removal of said positioning pin means
from said hinge means, and wherein in said second posi-
ton, the tab means clears said positioning pin means so that
said positioning pin means can be removed from said
hinge means.
with said first threaded bore, said second bore including
female screw threads, said rod and cap joining together to
form a circular bearing surface; and
(C) a bolt having male screw threads, a first segment of said
male threads engaging the female threads of said first
threaded bore and a second segment of said male threads
engaging the female threads of said second threaded bore,
one of said threaded bores or one of said segments of male
threads having truncated threads to reduce the length of
engagement of the corresponding threads with said trun-
cated threads and to act with the corresponding threads to
distort said engaging threads as said bolt is tightened;
thereby providing a centering action to assure alignment of
said first bore and said second bore and a locking action to
resist loosening of said bolt.
4436444
MECHANISM FOR CONNECTING AND
DISCONNECTING CRANE SECTIONS
Edward P. Scherrer, North Liberty, Iowa, assignor to FMC
Corporation, Chicago, 111.
FUed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,298
Int. a.3 F16D 1/00; F16G U/00
U.S. a. 403-24 14 Claims
4,436,443
CONNECTING ROD
Daniel F. McCorraick, Oshkosh, Wis., assignor to Brunswick
Corporation, Skokie, 111.
FUed Nov. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 441,343
Int. a.3 F16B 19/02
MS. CL 403—14 10 cUdms
1. In a crane having a split locking ring for assembling and
disassembling the crane upper respectively to and from the
crane lower, a first hydraulic ram connected between the free
ends of the ring to exert substantially circumferencial forces to
expand and contract the ring; the improvement comprising:
a second hydraulic ram arranged to exert a substantially
radial force on said ring when assembling said crane.
16^ ^23
1. A connecting rod assembly for connecting a piston to a
crankshaft, said assembly comprising:
(A) a connecting rod having a first threaded bore, said first
bore including female threads;
(B) a connecting rod having a second threaded bore aligned
4,436,445
STUD ANCHOR FOR SECURING A HOLLOW
NON-ROUND EXTENSION BASE
Arthur R. Templeman, Overland Park, Kans., assignor to Peter*
son Manufacturing Co., Grandview, Mo.
FUed Not. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,888
Int. a.3 F16B 7/08: F16L 41/00
U.S. a 403-189 8 Claims
1. A stud anchor in an operational combination with a hol-
low extension and a mounting bracket, wherein said stud an-
chor firmly connects said hollow extension to said mounting
bracket;
(a) said stud anchor comprising an anchor member having a
base, a shank, and a head; a biasing member; and anchor
member securing means;
(1) said base being on an end of said anchor member
abutting said mounting bracket; said base having a
locking means comprising a non-round lug depending
from said base and adapted to snugly mate with an
aperture in said mounting bracket, thereby preventing
free rotation of said anchor member relative to said
mounting bracket and ensuring proper orientation of
said stud anchor relative to said mounting bracket;
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
681
(2) said shank being an extension between said base and
said head of said anchor member;
(3) said head including a plurality of resiliently deformable
segments flexibly attached to said shank, said segments
each having an outer wall surface;
(4) said biasing member having selective activation means
adapted for selective biasing of said segments out-
wardly from an axis of said anchor member and into
frictional engagement with said hollow extension;
(5) said anchor member securing means adapted for selec-
tive, secure attachment of said anchor member to said
mounting bracket;
^
(b) said hollow extension having inner wall surfaces snugly
enclosing said stud anchor; said stud anchor is operably
positioned in the extension and with an end of said hollow
extension being of configuration requiring fixed and pre-
determined orientation relative to said mounting bracket;
said non-round lug on said anchor member controlling
and fixing said orientation;
(c) whereby when said segments are selectively biased out-
wardly by said biasing member into frictional engagement
with said hollow extension inner wall surfaces, said stud
anchor securely retains said extension onto said mounting
bracket.
4,436,446
ADJUSTABLE, QUICK-RELEASE BARRIER CLAMP
James R. Gordon, 301 W. BoUng, BcntonJlL 62812
FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Scrfi^oTSoS,)
Int. C\? B25G 3/36; E04G 7/00
U.S. a. 403—384 10 Qaims
1. An adjustable quick-release clamp which clamps a barrier
member to a base, comprising:
a clamp support member affixed to and projecting out-
wardly from the base;
an elongated main lever having a central aperture through
which the clamp support member projects;
a retainer member, mounted on the clamp support member
outwardly of the main lever in position to retain the main
lever on the clamp support member and acting as a ful-
crum for the main lever, the retainer member being adjust-
ably mounted on the support member for movement
toward and away from the base adjusting the fulcrum for
the main lever to accommodate barrier members of vary-
ing thickness, and permitting adjustment of the clamping
pressure;
gripper means mounted on a first end of the main lever, on
the side of the main lever facing the base, adapted to
engage a barrier member;
an overcenter toggle cam, pivotally mounted on the second
end of the main lever for movement between a release
position, affording minimal spacing between the base and
the second end of the main lever, and a range of clamp
positions in which the cam holds the second end of the
main lever at a substantial displacement from the base,
movement of the cam to a clamp position causing the main
lever to engage the retainer member and pivot about the
retainer member as a fiilcrum, moving the first end of the
means
main lever toward the base so that the gripper
securely clamps the barrier member to the base;
and a handle lever, attached to the cam, for manually pivot-
ing the cam between its release and clamp positions.
4,436,447
EROSION CONTROL BLOCKS
Robert E. Crowe, Milton, Canada, assignor to Terraflx Erosion
Control Products, Inc., Islington, Canada
Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,n
Qaims priority, application Canada, Sep. 17, 1980, 360539
Int. a.} E02B 3/14
U.S. CI. 405—16 8 Claims
1. A concrete erosion control block having a pair of parallel
opposed oblong rectangular outer surfaces, a pair of parallel
opposed side surfaces extending lengthwise of said outer sur-
faces, a pair of longitudinally spaced frustoconical spigots
formed on one of said parallel side surfaces and at least one
longitudinally elongated slot in the opposite side surface, the
spigots and the at least one slot being located to interengage
respectively with slots and spigots of similar quincuncially
related blocks when the blocks are layed in bond in adjacent
parallel courses with their outer surfaces substantially in com-
mon planes, whereby to permit relative movement of said
courses in a direction parallel to said side surfaces and relative
angular movement between adjacent blocks in both the same
and adjacent courses, whilst restraining movement of individ-
ual blocks out of said common planes.
682
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
EXCAVATING MACHINE FOR TUNNELS AND
GALLERIES
Wolf Magnus, Tugrtcdt-WUitedt; Otto Bnuch, HdUgenhaiig;
Dirk Fischer, Bnrgwedel, and Werner Wippig, Uhrte, aU of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoctatief AG, ?onn. Gebr.
Helflnann, Essen and Bade A Theelen GmbH, Lehrte, both of,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,462
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 29.
1979, 2952744 '
Int. a.} E02D 9/06
UA a 405-143 2 Claims
1. In a machine for excavating tunnels and galleries and
comprising a shield advanced along an excavated stretch by
hydraulic means braced against a pressure ring, the improve-
ment wherein said shield comprises in combination:
at least two annular shell sections separated axially from one
another and defining a separation gap;
a seal bridging said gap;
a plurality of peripherally spaced piston-and-cylinder ar-
rangements bridging said gap and braced at opposite ends
against said shell sections, each of said piston-and-cylinder
arrangements being a double-acting hydraulic cylinder;
and
means forming at least one closed passive hydraulic network
and connected to said piston-and-cylinder arrangements
to connect said double-acting cylinders in parallel for
enabling variation in the effective lengths thereof to per-
mit angular offsetting of axes of said shell sections.
positioning an end of the pipe string within a predetermined
range of an end of the pipe segment;
attaching a first gripper block to the end of the pipe string;
movmg an alignment tool over to the pipe segment while
paying out connecting means between the alignment tool
and the first gripper block;
attaching a second gripper block of the alignment tool to the
end of the pipe segment;
tensioning the connecting means to draw the end of the pipe
segment and the end of the pipe string within close prox-
imity of each other;
attaching a third gripper block of the alignment tool to the
end of the pipe string, the second gripper block and the
third gripper block being in a spaced-apart position; and
drawing the second gripper block and the third gripper
block toward each other, thereby aligning the end of the
pipe string with the end of the pipe segment.
4,436,450
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REMOVING
BUOYANCY MODULES FROM SUBMERGED PIPE
Don C. Reed, Humble, Tex., assignor to Exxon Production
Research Co., Houston, Tex.
FUed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 294,968
Int. a.3 F16L 1/04; B63B 21/52
UA a 405-171 11 Claims
•» ^a
4 436 449
DRILL SHIP PIPE CAPTURE
Arren F. Smoot, and Sljtze De Jong, both of San Jose, Calif.,
assignors to Shell Oil Company, Houston, Tex.
FUed Dec. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 452,245
Int. CLJ F16L 7/00; B23P 19/04; B63C 11/00
U.S. a. 405-170 12 Claims
It
1. Apparatus for releasably attaching a buoyant module to a
submerged pipeline, comprising:
a first strap wrapped over the top of the module;
a second strap wrapped around the underside of the pipeline;
a first link connected between one pair of opposing ends of
said first and second straps, said first link being breakable
upon application thereto of a preselected tension greater
than that exerted thereon by the positive buoyant force of
the module;
a second link releasably connected between the other pair of
opposing ends of said first and second straps; and
means for releasing said second link from between said first
and second straps in response to the first link being bro-
ken.
CABU STOIUOl ^
\Limm0f
u
' >m.f coHMtcnn
4,436,451
SELF-STANDING MARINE RISER
Harold E. Anderson, 26 Dover St., London, England WIX 3PA
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,867
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Feb. 20, 1980,
8005655
Int a.1 E21B 7/12
MS. CL 405-195 14 claims
1. A self-standing marine riser which comprises a base, a
riser column, a flexible joint between the base and the riser
column, and a plurality of catenary chains attached to the top
of the riser column for providing a loose coupling between the
top of the riser column and a surface structure including a
1 ▲ .n.*k/^ r 1 -_ . e vessel, rig, platform and the Uke on the surface above the
inLtrT !^^ ' '"'^ "'™« ''^'^ ' previoudy location of the riser, said chain, providing a direct comiection
msuUed pipe segment compnsmg: between »ud riser column and «dd surfacl structure, said ril^r
'I'tO BKIfPtR tLOCK
ircuixic cruMOSK
I*
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
683
column comprising a lower relatively slender column section 4,436,453
and an upper column section which includes at IcMt one vari- MACHINE FOR AND METHOD OF HARDENING SOFT
GROUND IN DEPTHS
Mitao Mlnra; Yoahiaori Knkiao, and Taknmi Fi^U, aU of Tokyo,
Japan, assignors to Takanaka Komntan Co., Ltd. and
Takenaka Dobokn Co^ Ltd., both of, Japan
FUad Mar. 8, 1982, Sar. No. 355,648
Int ai E02D 3/12
U.S. a. 405—263 5 Claims
able buoyancy chamber, said riser supporting at least one
conduit for the conveyance of a fluid.
4,436,452
SONIC PILE DRIVER SYSTEM EMPLOYING
RESONANT DRIVE MEMBER AND PHASED COUPLING
Albert G. Bodine, 7877 Woodley Ave., Van Nuys, Calif. 91406
FUed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,563
Int a.3 E02D 7/18
MS. a. 405—232 15 Claims
«- «^-*>
1. A machine for hardening the soft ground in depths, hav-
ing elongated agitation shafts provided with agiution vanes at
lower portions thereof and fastened rouubly to an elongated
support cylinder, a rotary driving means to which the upper
ends of said agitation shafts are connected, and a hardener
supply unit adapted to discharge a hardener in the vicinity of
said agitation vanes, comprising suitable pairs of brackeu
provided on the outer circumferential surfaces of upper and
lower end portions of said support cylinder so as to project
outward therefrom, and connecting means for joining together
via jacks said pairs of brackets each pair of which are vertically
opposed to each other, said jacks being adapted to be expanded
and contracted so u to correct the direction in which a lower
end portion of said machine is inserted into the soft ground.
4,436,454
DEVICE FOR POSITIONING AN OFF-SHORE
PLATFORM ON ITS SUPPORT STRUCTURE
Jean-Louis Ninet and Robert Vaillant both of Nantes, France,
assignors to AteUers et Chantlers dc Bretagne-ABC, Nantes,
France
FUed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,456
Claims priority, application France, Dec. 23, 1980, 80 27347
Int. a.3 E02D 21/00
U.S. a. 405—204 9 Claims
1. A sonic system for driving an elongated member into
earthen material comprising
means for generating sonic energy,
an elongated compliant resonator member,
means for coupling sonic energy from said generating means
to said compliant resonator member, the frequency of said
sonic energy being such as to cause resonant longitudinal
standing wave vibration of said resonator member,
coupler member means for coupling sonic energy from the
resonator member to the elongated member and,
means for adjusting the coupling of sonic energy to the
elongated member to a preselected fractional portion of
the total vibrational cycle of said resonant member,
said elongated member being driven non-resonantly along
the longitudinal axis thereof during said predetermined
fractional portion of the vibrational cycle.
1. A device for positioning an off-shore platform on a previ-
684
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
ously-installed support structure, said support structure includ-
ing verticaJly upstanding legs, said pUtfonn having support
pUes designed to axially aUgn with and to rest on the legs of the
support structure, said platform further comprising means for
moving said piles vertically to move said pUes downwardly
towards said legs and for locking said pUes at an axially dis-
placed position with respect to said platform, said legs includ-
ing upwardly open centering cones, each pile being constituted
by a hollow tube, a rod slidably positioned coaxially within
said tube, said rod terminating at its lower end in a centering
pm for reception within said centering cone of said leg, a
resilient, compressible shock-absorbing component fixed to
said rod and operatively interposed between said rod and said
hollow tube, and means for effecting controlled sliding of said
rod bearing said resUent, compressible shock-absorbing com-
ponent within said hollow tube to effect precompression of
said shock-absorbing component during transport of said plat-
form to the situs of said previously installed support structure
and for facUitoting final positioning of said pile against said leg
without impact and for taking up the load of the platform as
transmitted to the leg to facilitate welding of said pile to said
leg at the interface between the pile hollow tube and said leg
about said centering cone.
9. A process for positioning of an off-shore platform on a
previously installed support structure, said support structure
mcluding vertically raised legs, said platform having support
piles corresponding to said legs and intended to rest on said
legs of said support structure, and means for mounting said
piles on said platform for vertical movement to said platform
and for selective locking of said piles in position on said plat-
form, and wherein each pile is constituted by a tube bearing a
shdable rod abutting a shock-absorbing component and having
means for controlled sliding of the rod in said pile, and wherein
the lower part of the rod contains a centering pin extending
beneath the lower end of the pile for reception within a support
cone borne by said leg, said process comprising, during trans-
port of said platform:
partially compressing said shock-absorbing component by
the weight of the platform and by operation of said means
for effecting controlled sliding of said rod within said pile,
partially releasing the precompression of said shock-absorb-
ing component when the piles are aligned with said legs,
driving said piles vertically downwardly relative to said
platform to engage the centering pin of said hollow rod
with the support cone of said leg. while completely com-
pressing said shock-absorbing component,
effecting controlled sliding of said rod to partially release the
compressed shock-absorbing component and to remove
the clearance between the pile and said leg,
welding said pile to said leg,
cutting said pile subsequent to platform installing, and
removing and hoisting said hollow rod and said shock-
absorbing component from the interior of said pile for
subsequent re-use without affecting the positioned off-
shore platform relative to the support structure.
a floor and walls defining a tunnel cross section of a predeter-
mined height and width, by mounting support members in
holes drilled at an acute angle to the tunnel walls, comprising
the steps of,
(a) entering a steerable low profile mine drilling rig with a
height less than the tunnel height and supported by two
sets of rubber tired wheels with a wheelbase shorter than
the tunnel width into the tunnel and supporting the rig on
its rubber tires,
(b) extending from a position between the wheels of one
wheel set a boom member of predetermined length to fit
with said rig across the width of said tunnel carrying a
dnll movable along the length of the boom generally
perpendicular to the wheel set and positionable at various
angles relative to the tunnel walls by a mechanism carried
by said rig,
(c) orienting the drilling rib transversely in the tunnel with
the boom member directed generally across the width of
the tunnel and manipulating the boom by means on the rig
providing direction and support for the boom in a selected
position to direct a drill into the walls,
(d) positioning the boom member with one end disposed to
direct the drill into a wall at said angle,
(e) anchoring the other end of the boom from the drill on the
floor of the tunnel to counteract drilling force, and
(0 drilling the holes at said angle into the walls for mounting
the support members with the boom member anchored to
the floor.
4436456
PNEUMATIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR
BANKING AND THE LIKE
William D. Thonuu, Marion, Iowa, aaiignor to Kidde, Inc.,
Clifton, N,J.
FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,289
Int. a.' B65G 51/08, 51/26
U^. a 406-19 9ci«ini.
Vv"»</Vi
m^^m^^
4,436,455
UNIVERSALLY POSITIONABLE LOW PROHLE MINE
DRILLING MACHINE AND METHOD
EnheU C. Vance, Box 86, JeweU Ridge, Va, 24622
Continution-in-pul of S«r. No. 142,871, Apr. 23, 1980. Thii
■ppUcation Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,239
Int CL' E21D U/00; E21B 7/00
UAa405-303 4ciata«
1. The method of bracing the waUs of a mine tunnel having
1. In a pneumatic communication system having a pair of
spaced apart first and second carrier terminals, each of the
terminals defining an upright enclosure having upper and
lower ends; a carrier transit tube interconnecting and opening
into each terminal adjacent its lower end; first and second
carrier elevators respectively in the first and second terminals
and movable therein between upper positions adjacent the
terminal upper ends and lower positions adjacent the terminal
lower ends; ajMrrier for containing items to be transported
back andforjh^tween the terminals through the transit tube,
each cafi*r elevator and the carrier having corresponding
leadipfand trailing transverse ends with respect to each termi-
jjaKand the respective directions of travel of the carrier
through the transit tube, the carrier being receivable on each
carrier elevator from the transit tube through an opening in the
leading end of the carrier elevator when in iu lower position
and movable through the transit tube by pneumatic pressure
upon the carrier trailing end, each carrier elevator with the
carrier thereon being gravitationally descendable from its
upper to its lower position and elevatable from its lower to its
upper position by pneumatic pressure; first and second selec-
tively operable releasable means respectively retaining the first
and second elevators with the carrier thereon in their upper
positions and releasable to allow the same to descend to their
lower positions; and first and second selectively operable pneu-
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
683
matic pressure producing means communicating with the
atmosphere and respectively associated with the first and
second terminals, the system being characterized by: the first
releasable means operating to allow the first carrier elevator
with the carrier thereon to descend to its lower position; the
first pressure producing means only thereupon operating to
pneumatically communicate with the trailing end of the carrier
when on the first carrier elevator at its lower position and
thence with the transit tube through the first carrier elevator
and said opening therein effective to propel the carrier from
the first elevator and through the transit tube onto the second
carrier elevator through said opening therein when the second
carrier elevator is at iU lower position; the second pressure
producing means then also operating to pneumatically commu-
nicate with the second carrier elevator effective to elevate the
same and the carrier thereon in the second terminal so that the
operating first pressure producing means thereupon also pneu-
matically communicating with the second carrier elevator via
the transit tube and together with the operating second pres-
sure producing means elevates the second carrier elevator and
the carrier thereon to its upper position, the second releasable
means thereupon operating to retain the second carrier eleva-
tor and the carrier thereon in its upper position; the second
releasable means operating to allow the second carrier elevator
with the carrier thereon to descend to its lower position; the
second pressure producing means only thereupon operating to
pneumatically communicate with the trailing end of the carrier
when on the second carrier elevator at its lower position and
thence with the transit tube through the second carrier eleva-
lof jnd said opening therein effective to propel the carrier
from the second elevator and through the transit tube onto the
first carrier elevator through said opening therein when the
i'lrst carrier elevator is at its lower position; the first pressure
producing means then also operating to pneumatically commu-
nicate with the first carrier elevator effective to elevate the
same and the carrier thereon in the first terminal so that the
oper-ating second pressure producing means thereupon also
pneumatically communicates with the first carrier elevator via
the transit tube and together with the operating first pressure
p'oduci.ig means elevates the first carrier elevator and the
carrier thereon to its upper position, the first releasable means
thereupon operating to retain the first carrier elevator and the
carrier thereon in its upper position; first and second vent
means respectively associated with the first and second termi-
nals and operable to vent the system ahead of the carrier to the
atmosphere, each of the vent means having successive first,
second and third sUges of operation, the first suge of the
second vent means operating while the first carrier elevator
with the carrier thereon descends from its upper to its lower
position upon release of the first releasable means, the second
stage of the second vent means operating while the carrier is
moving through the transit tube from the first to the second
terminal, the third stage of the second vent means operating
while the second carrier elevator with the carrier thereon is
being elevated to its upper position, the first state of the first
vent means operating while the second carrier elevator with
the carrier thereon descends from its upper to its lower posi-
tion upon release of the second releasable means, the second
stage of the first vent means operating while the carrier is
moving through the transit tube from the second to the first
terminal, the third stage of the first vent means operating while
the first carrier elevator with the carrier thereon is being ele-
vated to its upper position, the second stages of operation of
the first and second vent means being effective to control the
speed of the carrier through t^e transit tube; and means con-
trolling operation of the first and second pressure producing
means, the first and second vent means, and the first and sec-
ond releasable means, all as aforesaid.
4,436,457
SUCnON PIPE
Junes T. WUllngham, Lubbock, Tex., aaaignor to South Plains
Sheet Metal, Inc., Lubbock, Tex.
FUed No?. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 322,391
Int. a.J B65G 53/52
U.S. a 406-116 2 cialnu
1. An improved suction head comprising:
a. a top support box with
b. an upper flange adapted to be connected to a section of
pipe.
c. said top support box having opposing, flat, parallel sides,
d. two co-axial support stub axles, one of the axles attached
to each flat side,
e. said top support box having opposing, cylindrical sides
co-axial with said stub axles,
f a bottom hang box with
g. a lower flange adapted to be attached to a pick-up pipe,
h. said bottom hang box having opposing, flat, parallel sides,
i. two co-axial hang stub axles, one of the hang axles at-
tached to each flat side of the hang box,
j. said bottom hang box having opposing, cylindrical sides
co-axial with said hang axles,
k. a rectangular frame having
(i) two opposing, parallel sides designated as support sides,
and
(ii) two opposing, parallel sides designated as hang sides.
I. said support sides of the frame joumaled to said support
axles,
m. said hang sides of the frame joumaled to said hang axles,
n. a support seal flap attached to each of the support sides of
the frame,
o. each of the support flaps rubbing against one of the flat
sides of the support box on the outside of the frame and
against one of the cylindrical sides of the hang box on the
inside of the frame, and
p. a hang seal flap attached to each of the hang sides of the
frame,
q. each of the hang flaps rubbing against a flat side of the
hang box on the inside of the frame and against the cylin-
drical side of the support box on the outside of the frame.
4,436,458
LIQUID-SOUD CONTACTING APPARATUS
Lawrence W. Wiadom, Dailaa, and Gordon R. Wilson, DeSoto,
both of Tex., aasignon to Frito-Lay, Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 972,404, Dec. 22, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Dec. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 452,329
Int a.} B65G 53/40
U.S. a. 406—135 16 Cialnu
13. Apparatus suitable for providing movement of a bed of
solid particles substantially uniformly therethrough in a down-
wardly direction in contact with liquid comprising:
(a) a generally vertically-disposed vessel for containing a
compact bed of solid particles for contact with liquid;
(b) a rotatable, generally horizontally-disposed lower disc
means extending substantially throughout the cross-sec-
tional area of a lower portion of the bed for supporting the
bed, said lower disc means having at least one radially
686
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
extending, slot-like opening for passing solidis there-
through from the bed, said opening having a substantially
uniform slot width throughout substantially the entire
radius of the cross-sectional bed area;
(c) scoop means fastened on said lower disc means and
extending upwardly and over the entire radial length of
said slot-like opening for deflecting a substantially uni-
form thickness of the solid particle bed downward
through said opening in said lower disc means during one
revolution of said lower disc means;
(d) means for rotating said lower disc means;
-Ic I.?
u
(e) vertically oriented, plate-like baffle means fixedly
mounted over said lower disc means and extending hori-
zontally just above said lower disc means substantially the
entire radial dimension of the bed for preventing rotation
of the bed while permitting uniform downward move«
ment of the bed; and
(0 outlet means for discharging solid particles from the
lower portion of said vessel below said lower disc means
while maintaining liquid in said vessel at a substantial
height above said lower disc means;
said baffle means further including an extendable portion
which is adjustably secured so that said extendable portion is
adjustable toward and away from the lower disc means.
4,436,459
PNEUMATIC STREAM DIVIDER
Lawrence G. Caldwell, DeTon, Pa., asiignor to The Ducon Com-
pany, Inc., Mineola, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 837,066, Sep. 28, 1977,
abaadoned. This application Apr. 23, 1979, Ser. No. 32,209
lat a.3 B65G 53/56. 53/66
U.S. CL 406—181 10 Claims
1. A system for dividing a dilute phase particulate laden
pneumatic stream into branch streams having a predetermined
amount of particulate comprising a primary conduit for con-
veying a particulate laden pneumatic stream to be divided, a
dead pocket spaced from and aligned with the terminal end
portion of said conduit, said pocket being closed at one end.
second and third branch conduits communicating with said
dead pocket at a location adjacent the terminal end of said first
conduit and spaced from the closed end of said pocket, and
means for adjusting the relative position of the longitudinal
axis of said primary conduit with respect to the center of the
closed end of said pocket to facilitate division of particulate in
accordance with a desired ratio, said means faciliuting shifting
the primary conduit relative to the center of said pocket in a
direction perpendicular to the center line of said primary con-
duit.
4,436,460
AUTOMATIC DEPTH COMPENSATING SYSTEM
Tlionias A. Powell, Rockford, 111., assignor to Ex-Cell-O Corpo-
ration, Troy, Mich.
FUed Jon. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,450
Int a.3 B23B 41/12
MS. a. 408—14 4 Claims
1. A spindle head bore depth compensating assembly for
controlling a predetermined bore depth dimension between an
outer reference surface on a workpiece having a bore with an
interior bore surface to be finish machined, the combination of:
a spindle head slide (14) having a positive machine stop (93); a
spindle head (22) carried by said slide including stop means
(124) engageable with the outer reference surface; a spindle
shaft (40) having a driven end (28) and frontal portion (71);
bearing means (46, 48) at opposite ends of said spindle shaft for
supporting said spindle shaft for axial movement and rotation
relative to said spindle head; a tool holder body (70) having an
outer circumference and one end inserUble into the workpiece
bore; connector means (72, 76) for connecting said tool holder
body to said frontal portion; a spring cavity (90) in said tool
holder body arranged concentrically of said connector means;
mechanical spring means (84) in said cavity to spring load said
tool holder whereby engagement pressure of said stop means
(124) on the workpiece during a spindle head feed stroke is
limited to the spring rate of said mechanical springs means as
the spindle slide engages said positive machine stop; tool means
(112) supported on the outer circumference of said tool holder
for finish machining the interior bore surface; means (109)
(110) for pre-setting said tool means at a fixed ajdal and radial
position on said tool holder body; an adjustment sleeve (208)
on said tool holder body; bearing means (220) for supporting
said tool holder body for rotation within said adjustment collar
and for axially fixing said adjustment sleeve with respect to
said tool holder; and drive means for adjustably positioning
said sleeve with respect to said stop means (124) to adjust the
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
687
position of said stop means (124) axially of said sleeve (208)
thereby to compensate for the depth of cut of said tool means
(112).
4,436,461
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FABRICATING
FUSION REACTOR COILS
Michelangelo DiMartino, San Diego, Calif., assignor to Burt
Precision Products, Inc., San Diego, Calif.
FUed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,236
Int. a? B23C 3/04: B23D 1/02
U,S. a. 409—132 11 Claims
9. A method for machining the surfaces of an elongate,
generally helical shaped, rectangular cross-section metal work
piece which is to partially encircle a toroid in both the poloidal
and toroidal direction when finished, the work piece having an
inside surface, an outside surface, and a pair of opposite side
surfaces, the method comprising the step of:
supporting the work piece with its inside surface unob-
structed;
moving the work piece in the toroidal direction;
cutting the entire inside surface of the work piece in the
poloidal direction while the work piece is moving in the
toroidal direction;
supporting the work piece with its outside surface unob-
structed;
moving the work piece in the toroidal direction; and
cutting the entire outside surface of the work piece in the
poloidal direction while the work piece is moving in the
toroidal direction.
4,436,462
MULTI-STOP DEPTH CONTROL
RafMl Martinez, 101 Monroe St, Garfield, N J. 07026
FUed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,164
Int. a.3 B23B 49/00: B23C 1/06
MS. a. 409—218 7 Claims
1. A multi-stop depth control in combination with a milling
machine having a quill frame, a fixed platform extending from
the frame, a quill movable in a verticid direction in the frame
having a projection extending beyond the frame with a
through bore therein and a scale for indicating vertical dis-
tance, comprising:
a base member fixed to the milling machine platform, the
platform being vertically aligned with and below the
projection;
a set wheel rotatably mounted to said base member;
position setting means connected between said wheel and
said base member for establishing a plurality of firm rotary
positions between said wheel and the milling machine
frame;
a plurality of rods circumferentially spaced and extending
upwardly from a top surface of said wheel each engage-
able with the quill projection through bore in one of said
plurality or roury positions when each rod is vertically
aligned between the platform and the projection;
a vernier carrying element rotaubly mounted on each rod
and movable to any selected vertical position on each rod;
and
element locking means connected to each vernier carrying
element for locking each vernier carrying element at a
selected vertical position on each rod respectively;
each vernier carrying element with respective rod movable
into one of said plurality of said rotary positions to bring
said vernier carrying element into close association with
the milling machine scale for accurately setting the verti-
cal position of each vernier carrying element on each
respective rod;
each vernier carrying element functioning as a stop for
abutment with the milling machine quill projection for
stopping a vertical descent of the milling machine quill.
4,436,463
QUICK CHANGE TOOLING SYSTEM
Ike D. Rea, Mount Gcmens, Mich., assignor to General Electric
Company, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,080
lat. a.3 B23Q 3/12: B23B 31/02
MS. a. 409—232 10 Claims
1. An assembly for facUitating the mounting and ejecting of
cutting tools on a rotatable tool adaptor shank, said assembly
comprising in combination;
an elongated tool adaptor shank having a gripping end and a
driving end, with the outer surface of said shank being
tapered towards said driving end and with said gripping
end being defined by a cylindrical flange portion, said
688
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
flange portion having a V-shaped channel formed therein
and extending circumferentially therearound, said flange
portion further including a pair of opposed slots interrupt-
ing said flange portion and in communication with said
channel, said slots for engaging a machine tool;
a spindle having a cylindrical configuration with the outer
surface thereof being threaded and with the inner surface
of said spindle being tapered and substantially conforming
to the configuration of said driving end of said tool shank
such that said driving end is freely receivable therein;
an elongated cylindrical nut having front and rear ends, with
the inner surface of said nut, adjacent to said rear end
thereof, being threaded and adapted to engage the
threaded portion of said spindle and with the inner surface
of said nut adjacent to the front end thereof, including two
opposed projections extending radially inwardly,
whereby with said driving end of said tool adaptor shank
being inserted within said tapered inner surface of said
spindle, and said nut being mounted over said tool adaptor
shank, with said projections being initially received in said
slots, said nut may be rotated causing said threaded por-
tions of said nut and spindle to be interlocked while said
projections become engaged in said channel thereby posi-
tively drawing and securely locking said tool adaptor
shank within said spindle; and
wherein the distance between the front end and projections
of said nut corresponds to the spacing between the center
of said channel and the front surface of said gripping end
of said shank so that said front end and front surface are
coplanar when said projections are in said channel, to
thereby facilitate the mounting of the cutting tools.
4436 464
CLAMPING APPARATUS FOR A CUTTER
Walter SeiberUch, Ettlingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Maag Gear-Wheel A Machine Company Limited, Zurich,
Switzerland
FUed Sep. 23, 1981, Set. No. 304,824
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Oct. 7, 1980
7478/80
Int a.3 B23C 5/26
VS. a 409-233 5 cudms
said protruding means serving for attachment of said shaper
cutter;
a clamping plate secured to an end of said protruding means;
a clamping mandrel securing said clamping plate to said end
of said protruding means;
said clamping plate and said clamping mandrel coacting
with each other for clamping said shaper cutter at said
contact surface of said cutter holder;
said ram spindle being hollow;
a spring arrangement arranged in said hollow ram spindle;
a piston arranged in said hollow ram spindle;
means for prebiasing said spring arrangement to exert an
axial clamping force;
a coupling constructed such as to transmit said axial clamp-
ing force;
said coupling including means for easily releasing said cou-
pling after the elimination of said clamping force;
said spring arrangement being connected to said cutter
holder or shaper cutter by means of said coupling;
said piston defining a pressure chamber within said ram
spindle and which is capable of connection with a pressure
medium source; and
means for pressurizing said pressure chamber to thereby
eliminate said clamping force of said spring arrangement
by means of said piston.
4436465
SCROLL MANUFACTURING TOOL
E^i Fukushima, Fujiml, Japan; SeUchi Fnkuhara, Gunma, Ja-
pan, and Masabani Hiraga, Hoigo, Japan, assignors to San-
den Corporation, Gunma, Japan
FUed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,142
Claims priority, application Japan, May 20, 1981, 56-76139
Int. a.3 B23D 5/02. 43/06; B23P 15/42. 15/44
U.S. a. 409-243 4 Claims
1. A clamping apparatus for a shaper cutter for a gear shap-
ing machine, in particular a generating gear shaping machine
for the production of gears, comprising:
a to-and-fro axially displaceable ram spindle;
a cutter holder provided at one end of said ram spindle;
said cutter holder possessing a contact surface for the shaper
cutter,
means protruding axially away horn said contact surface;
1. A manufacturing tool for finishing a preformed scroll for
use in a scroll type fluid displacement apparatus comprising:
(a) a working member having an end plate and a first invo-
lute element extending from one end surface of said end
plate, a cutting edge extending along an inner side wall of
an axial end of said first involute, and said end plate having
a plurality of arc shaped holes along an outer side wall of
said first involute element;
(b) a second involute element rotatably coupled to said
working member and interfitting with said first involute
element in a disposition to defme a radial gap between the
first and second involute elements, a cutting edge extend-
ing along an outer side wall of an axial end of said second
involute, and a plurality of pins projecting axially from the
other axial end of said second involute element and pene-
trating through said arc shaped holes, said pins being
rotatably movable within said arc shaped holes; and
(c) a rotatable member having a plurality of holes extending
in the axial direction, said pins having extending into axial
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
689
end poriions said holes in said rotatable member to couple
said rotatable member to said second involute member and
to transmit the rotation of said rotatable member to said
second involute element to effect relative roution be-
tween said first and second involute elements to adjust
said radial gap between them and thereby position said
cutting edges into contact with said preformed scroll
positioned in said radial gap to trim said scroll to finished
dimensions.
1. A cargo restraining apparatus secured transversely of a
transport vehicle to provide a bulkhead in said vehicle during
shipment, and comprising
a rectangular panel of relatively high strength flexible sheet
material, and having opposing upper and lower longitudi-
nal edges and opposing transverse end edges, and with
said upper and lower longitudinal edges being hemmed to
form a passageway therealong and with the opposed ends
of each passageway being open adjacent the respective
comers of the panel,
flexible loading strap means slidably mounted within said
passageway along each of said upper and lower longitudi-
nal edges of said panel and crossing on one side of said
panel, said flexible loading strap means generally defining
a figure eight configuration on said panel, said strap means
having two ends positioned adjacent each other on said
one side of said panel, and means for adjustably intercon-
necting said two ends,
securement means connected at one end to said strap means
at each of the four comers of said panel, and being con-
nected at the other end to an adjacent anchoring structure
in said transport vehicle for securing each comer of said
panel thereto and in pressure contact against one side of a
load to confine and restrain the load against movement
during shipment, whereby said panel acts to spread the
contact pressure with the load over a relatively large area,
and said flexible loading strap means serves to reinforce
and suppori said panel.
4,436,467
EASILY RELEASABLE BLIND RIVETS
Sven B. Larsson, Myrgangen 41, S-461 62 TroilhMttan, and
Bengt U. I. Andersson, BJSrk^iigen 8, S-460 20 Sjuntorp. both
of Sweden
FUed Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 285,855
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden, Jul. 23, 1980, 8005318
Int a.} F16B 13/04
U.S. a. 411—34 4 Claims
1. A blind rivet comprising a tubular member insertable
through aligned holes in workpieces to be rivetted together
from an outer accessible side to an inner non-accessible side, an
enlarged separate retainer on one end of said tubular member
having a cross-section larger than said holes on the outer side
of the workpieces, said one end to be installed at said outer
side, an expanding pin extending coaxially through said tubular
member, an enlarged head on the inner end of said pin having
a cross-section larger in size than the bore through said tubular
member, but smaller than the hole in the workpiece on the
inner side, a tapered expanding surface on said enlarged head
of said pin on the side of said head adjacent said inner side of
said tubular member so that when said expanding pin is drawn
4,436,466
CARGO RESTRAINING APPARATUS
Frank J. Marino, 17 Battery PI., New York, N.Y. 10017
FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,265
Int. a.3 B60P 7/14: B61D 45/00: B63B 25/24
U.S. a. 410—118 7 Claims
through said tubular member a limited distance said inner end
of the tubular member is expanded radially outwardly to a
cross-sectional size larger than the hole in the workpiece on
the inner side, said retainer being removable from said tubular
member so that said rivet may be removed from the work-
pieces without damaging them.
4,436,468
BALL HEAD LOCK NUT AS A COMPONENT ELEME3VT
OF BICYCLE HEAD PARTS
Nobuo Ozaki, and Yoshimasa Kaneko, both of Osaka, Japan,
assignors to Maeda Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Jul. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 399,978
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 20, 1981, 56-
108527[U]
Int. a.3 F16B 39/34
U.S. a. 411—248 4 Claims
10 12
1. A ball head lock nut as a component element of bicycle
head paris, which comprises
a substantially annular body having a threaded, cylindrical
intemal wall,
an annular groove formed in said threaded, cylindrical inter-
nal wall,
a split clamping ring received within said annular groove,
at least one radially extending threaded through hole formed
in said annular body with its inner end passing through
said annular groove,
a deformable fixing piece having a diametrically extending
slot formed in its inner end wall,
said deformable fuing piece being disposed within said
radially extending threaded through hole, with said slot
engaged with a pari of said clamping ring, and
a set screw screwed into said radially extending threaded
through hole to push said deformable fixing piece axially
inwardly for forcible compression and deformation of said
deformable fixing piece.
690
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,4d9
AUXILIARY FEED HOPPER FOR PERMITTING THE
TRIMMING, IN A SADDLE BINDER OF PERFECT
BOUND BOOKS
Eugene L. KeUy, 814 W. Shennoor St, Peoria, lU. 61614
Filed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,094
iBt a.J B42C 19/12; B65H 1/00
UA a 412-16 7 0.1^
having a portion of said top edge below said dead plate
and between said inner and outer edges of said dead plate;
means for vertically indexing said movable bottom member
to a plurality of load positions;
ajar clamp mounted for vertical movement above said dead
plate so that containers situated on said dead plate adja-
1. A u^le binder having a delivery bed and including a
three-kirife trimmer at the end of the bed, the bed having a pair
of slots with successive pairs of upstanding infeed lugs extend-
ing therethrough at regularly spaced intervals and with means
for driving the lugs in unison synchronized with the knives in
the trimmer for transporting books one by one into the trim-
mer, an auxiliary feed hopper for permitting the trimming, in
the saddle binder, of perfect bound books comprising, in com-
bination, a base plate having a pair of longitudinally extending
slots, means for supporting the base plate horizontally superim-
posed above the delivery bed with the slots in the base plate
and delivery bed in register with one another, a rear stock plate
secured along its lower edge to the base plate and projecting
vertically therefrom in a direction at right angles to the slots, a
front stock guide supported on the base plate and spaced from
the rear stock plate and parallel thereto, side stock guides
spaced on the base plate parallel to one another, the front stock
guide and side stock guides being adjustably movable with
respect to the base plate and having means for clamping them
in position for snugly receiving a stack of perfect bound books
between them, means for supporting the front stock guide
spaced above the base plate to form a gap to permit the lower-
most book in the stack to feed thereunder while holding back
the remainder of the stack, the front stock guide including an
adjustable barrier projecting downwardly therefrom for ad-
justing the effective height of the gap in accordance with the
thickness of the books being fed, the supporting means for the
base plate including pedestals of adjustable height under the
base plate spaced from one another in a two dimensional pat-
tern for elevating the base plate relative to the delivery bed to
such height that only the tips of the lugs project through the
longitudinally extending slots, the height of the tips above the
base plate being less than the height of the gap under the
barrier.
cent the outer edge thereof can be secured between said
jar clamp and said dead plate; and
means for horizontally indexing said retort crate between
said first position and a second position, said second posi-
tion being farther from said inner edge of said dead plate
than said first position, whereby a settling space for said
containers is provided within said crate.
4,436,471
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STACKING FOR BARS
AND THE LIKE
Charles F. Koehler, c/o American Drawn Steel Corporation,
P.O. Box 54, Alliaon Park, Pa. 15101
FUed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,751
Int. a.3 B65G 57/03
U.S. a 414-36 9ciainu
4,436,470
RETORT CRATE LOADER AND UNLOADER
Burry L. Spletzer, and George Swiatlowtki, both of Ftwnont,
Mich., asrignors to Gcrber Producti Company, F^mont,
Mich.
FUed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202^18
Int a.3 B65G 57/08
UA a. 414-36 IQainM
1. Apparatus for loading containers into a retort crate, said
retort crate mounted on a movable carriage, said containers
arranged in said retort crate in a plurality of levels, said retort
crate having a movable bottom member and an open top, said
top bounded by a top edge, comprising:
a container conveyor means including a dead plate at one
end, said dead plate having an inner edge adjacent said
one end and an outer edge opposite said inner edge;
means for positioning said carriage and retort crate there-
with to a first position, said crate in said first position
1. Stacking apparatus for bars and the like comprising an
elongate run-in table having a feed axis lengthwise of said
run-in table, a plurality of stacking guides arranged parallel to
the run-in table and offset from the axis thereof at different
distances, and bar deflector means associated with at least
some stacking guides, each deflector means being rotatable
about a vertical axis and movable between a first position
substantially transverse to the feed axis in a plane generally
sloping from the horizontal in which the deflector means
bridge across the stacking guide and a second position in which
the deflector means are substantially parallel to the feed axis
and are clear of the stacking guide for deposit of bars and the
like in the stacking guide, said deflector means when posi-
tioned in bridging position acting to receive bars from the
run-in table and deflect them from the associated stacking
cradle.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
691
4,436,472
SHEET PILING DEVICES
Otto Kunzmann, Neuffen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, asiignor to
Bielomatik Uuze GmbH A Co., Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Nov. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 322,176
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 6,
1980, 3046107
Int a.J B65H 31/32
U.S. a. 414—50
2. An apparatus for successively stacking and removing piles
of sheets conveyed to the apparatus, comprising:
two alternatively operable carrier elements for the piles;
means operable at the front edge of the pile, relative to the
transport direction, for separating finished piles from
subsequently conveyed sheets;
means for removing finished piles;
first means for alternatively driving each said carrier ele-
ment along the sheet transport direction, the leading edge
of each said carrier element moving near the trailing edge
of a finished pile being removed and substantially in a
plane defined by the top surface of the finished pile; and,
second means for alternatively driving each said carrier
element along the sheet piling direction, substantially
perpendicular to the sheet transport direction, whereby
the carrier elements alternatively support newly forming
piles until each completed pile is engaged by the pile
removal means.
4 436 473
DRIVE MECHANISM FOR A ROTATABLE SWEEP ARM
George E. Olion, ArUngton Heights, 01., aiiignor to A. O. Smith
Hanreitore Product!, Inc., ArUngton Heigbti, 01.
FUed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,495
Int. a.i B65G 65/46
MS. a. 414—310 11 Claims
sections, said root sections having sloping relief pockets, rota-
tion of said drive member will rotate said turntable and said
dislodging and conveying member about said axis, said teeth
acting to drive the stored material upwardly through said
passages and downwardly through said pockets as said
sprocket rotates to thereby prevent jamming of said teeth by
said stored material.
10 Claims
6. In a storage structure to contain a stored material, a mate-
rial dislodging and conveying member mounted for rotation in
the structure about a vertical axis and disposed to dislodge the
stored material and convey the dislodged material toward said
axis, a turntable connected to the inner end of said dislodging
and conveying member and including a plurality of radially
extending circumferentially spaced drive pins, a drive member
having a plurality of teeth disposed to engage said drive pins,
and drive means for rotating said drive member, said turntable
including a plurality of vertically extending material conduct-
ing passages disposed in vertical alignment with the spaces
between adjacent drive pins, the upper end of each passage
having a greater cross sectional area than the lower end of said
passage, said drive member comprises a sprocket the base
portions of adjacent sprocket teeth being cdnnected by root
4,436,474
SELECTING ARTICLES FROM AN ARRAY THEREOF
James W. Brossman, Jr., Bethel; Carol A. Nemeth, Reading, and
Alan K. Shapiro, ShUUngton, aU of Pa., assignors to Western
Hectric Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 337,051
Int a.i B65B 19/34
U.S. a. 414—417 13 daims
1. Apparatus for selecting at least one planate article from an
array thereof, comprising:
a carrier for holding such articles in a mutually spaced,
substantially parallel relationship along a single file by
supporting peripheral portions of each article in opposing
guides formed along opposing first and second sides of
said carrier;
means for positioning the carrier so the file of articles ex-
tends substantially along a positioning plane passing gen-
erally centrally of each article and of said positioning
means;
a rotatable shaft extending parallel to and indexable along
the file and adjacent to the articles;
at least one cam mounted eccentrically to the shaft such that
when said shaft is rotated a convex portion of said cam
moves arcuately toward and slidably engages edge por-
tions of an article to displace said article; and
means for indexing the shaft and cam along the file and for
rotating the same such that* selected articles therein are
engageable for displacement.
4,436,475
LOG SKIDDER WITH LOAD DISTRIBUTING BOOM
ATTACHMENT
Leon BUigg, Marble FaUs, Tex., assignor to RoUigon Corpora-
tion, Stafford, Tex.
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,801
Int d? B66D 3/00
UJS. CL 414—569 10 n«im«
1. Apparatus for use with a log skidder vehicle having front
and rear ground-engaging wheels, a frame, a logging arch at
the rear of said frame, and winch and cable means for pulling
the end of a log up to the rear of the vehicle and elevating the
end portion thereof, comprising: an elongated boom structure
having a front section and a rem- section; means for pivotally
692
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
mounting said boom structure at a location between its ends on
Mid logging arch, said mounting means defining a transverse
horizontal pivot axis; abutment means on the rear section of
said boom structure arranged to engage the elevated end por-
tion of the log m response to pivotal roution of said boom
structure about said axis; and selectively operable means con-
nected between said front section and said frame for causing
upwardly directed forces to be applied to said front section and
to said arch, and downwardly directed forces to be applied to
said log and said frame to thereby control the distribution of
weight earned by the front and rear wheels of said vehicle
movement restricting means includes first and second
pulleys mounted on said at least one intermediate element
of said tubular elements adjacent its opposite ends, and
first and second cables engaged around said two pulleys,
said cables each being connected at their opposite ends
with an end portion of adjacent tubular elements which
engage with opposite ends of said at least one intermediate
element.
4,436,476
ROD DEVICE FOR USE AS AN ARM OF AN EXCAVATOR
Ryntaro Yoritomi, 5-17.12, KoisUluiwa, Bunkyo-ku, Tokyo.
Japan
Continuation of S«r. No. 90,325, Not. 1, 1979, abandoned. This
application Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,911
Clainu priority, appUcation Japan, Nov. 24, 1978, 53-145033:
Feb. 10, 1979, 54-014601; May 14, 1979, 544)58773
Int a.3 E02F 5/22
UA a 414-690 9cu,^
1. An excavator comprising:
a base structure;
a boom pivotally attached to said base structure at a first end
and having a second end;
an excavator head;
an excavator head supporting arm including;
a plurality of telescopic tubular elements including an
outermost element, at least one intermediate element
and an innermost element, the outermost element being
pivotally mounted to said second end of said boom at
substantially an intermediate portion thereof, said exca-
vator head being mounted to said innermost element;
movement restricting means for limiting the relative axial
movement between adjacent ones of said telescoping
elements; and
cable telescopic control means connected between said
outermost element and innermost element of said plural-
ity of tubular elements for controlling the axial exten-
sion of said excavator head supporting arm; and
fluid preMure operated linear actuator means having rela-
tively movable opposite ends for pivotally tilting said
excavator bead supporting arm with respect to said boom,
one of said opposite ends being pivotally connected to
substantially a middle portion of said boom while the
other of said opposite ends is pivotally connected to a
poruon of said outermost tubular element substantially
distant from the pivot point between said outermost tubu-
lar element and said second end of said boom towards the
one end thereof being opposite to the other end thereof for
supporting said excavator head; wherein said relative axial
4,436,477
QUICK ATTACHMENT CARRIER ASSEMBLY
John B. Unertz, Carver County, and CarroU E. Moore, Sibley
County, both of Minn., asrignora to Farmhand, Inc., Hopkins.
Minn. •"-"-•
FUed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,509
Int. a.3 E02F 3/81
U.S. a. 414-723 2 didmt
1. Apparatus for releasably connecting a material handling
attachment to a loader, comprising:
a pair of laterally spaced apart upper transverse pins secured
to the attachment;
a pair of laterally spaced apart lower transverse pins secured
to the attachment beneath said upper transverse pins;
a pair of laterally spaced apart carriers secured to the front
end loader, each carrier including an upwardly open top
notch adapted to receive an upper transverse pin and a
forwardly open bottom notch adapted to receive a lower
transverse pin;
a hook mounted on at least one of said carriers for pivotal
movement between a latched position in engagement with
the corresponding lower transverse pin and an unlatched
position;
handle means for manually actuating said hook between the
latched and unlatched positions; and
means for releasably locking said hook in either position;
said releasable locking means including;
a latch plate mounted on said carrier adjacent said hook with
holes therein corresponding to the latched and unlatched
positions of said hook;
a locking pin mounted on said hook for movement toward
and away from said latch plate; and
means for normally biasing said locking pin toward a locked
position in registry with either hole in said latch plate.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
693
4,436,478
APPARATUS FOR MAKING MOLDED ARTICLES
Roland M. Allen, Kenilworth, and Andrew J. Kalocai, Potts-
town, both'Of Pa., aisignors to The West Company, Phocnix-
fiUcPa.
Dirision of Ser. No. 286,977, Jul. 27, 1981, abuidoned, which U
■ continuation of Ser. No. 142,028, Apr. 21, 1980, abandoned.
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 13,252, Feb. 21, 1979,
abandoned, which ii a continuation of Ser. No. 743,071, Nov. 18,
1976, abandoned, which it a division of Ser. No. 473,216, May
24, 1974, abandoned. This appUcation Feb. 7, 1983, Ser. No.
464,281
Int. a.' A61J 1/06; B29H 3/06
U.S. a. 414-752 3 Clainu
1. Apparatus for handling a plurality of clad elements of a
predetermined configuration formed from a sheet consisting of
a layer of an elastomeric material bonded to a layer of inert
material and deposited in openings of a die corresponding in
number and arrangement to cavities of a mold comprising a
transfer mechanism having a plurality of rods having a pickup
face with at least one fluid port, said rods corresponding in
number and array to the die openings and mold cavities, means
for selectively connecting said fluid port to a source of vacuum
to retain a clad element on said pickup face when it engages the
element in the die openings and to an air pressure source to
discharge the clad element in the cavity of a mold, and a recip-
rocating punch having a plurality of punch rods for forming
the clad elements from the sheet material and depositing them
in the openings of the die and wherein said die and mold are
positioned adjacent one another and said transfer mechanism
includes means mounting it for translating movement between
a first position overlying said die with the punch rods aligned
with the die openings and a second position overlying the mold
with the pickup rods aligned with the mold cavities.
4,436,479
METHOD AND MEANS FOR ORIENTING BEVEL
TIPPED NEEDLES AND THE LIKE
Arcbille Belloli, Milan, Italy, assignor to Joule' Technical Cor-
poration, Union, NJ.
FUed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,466
Int. a.3 B65G 47/24
VJS. a 414—757 8 Qaims
I— I
1. Means for orienting an elongated article with a shank
portion and a flat or bevelled portion comprising the combina-
tion of a fixture with spaced stop and knife edge means, said
knife edge means positioned at a level above the stop and at a
distance from the stop causing it to engage the article interme-
diate in the ends of iu flat portion, and means for vibrating said
knife edge means.
5. A method for orienting elongated articles having shank
portions and bevelled tips comprising the steps of supporting
the articles between a stop and a knife edge with the knife edge
engaging the bevelled tips and the stop engaging the opposite
end, and vibrating the knife edge.
4,436,480
HYDRO-TURBINE DEVICE FOR GENERATING
ELECrRICITV
PhUip Vary, 100 SW. Hideaway, Stuart, FU. 33494
FUed Jun. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 391,471
Int. a.J F03B 7/00
VJS. a. 415—2 R 4 Qaims
1. A hydro-turbine device for generating electricity from the
flow of water through a channel, comprising;
frame means mountable in said channel;
a horizontal, rotatable shaft carried by said frame means and
disposed to extend transversely of the direction of water
flow through said channel, said shaft being adapted to be
connected to generator means;
hub means mounted on said shaft;
a pair of spaced end plates received on said shaft, said hub
means extending between said end plates;
at least six equally spaced vanes fixedly mounted to extend
between said end plates parallel with said shaft, said vanes
extending radially from said hub means and being curved
so that the rear faces thereof are concave;
said end plates, said hub means and said vanes forming a
turbine wheel disposed so that the front thereof faces
water flowing through said channel and so that the rear
faces of said vanes are exposed to said flowing water as
they move downwardly from the top toward the bottom
of said wheel;
cover means mounted over the rear of said turbine wheel,
said cover means being carried by said frame means and
extending from the top of said wheel rearwardly and
downwardly to a termination point spaced upwardly from
the bottom of the wheel but below a horizontal plane
containing the axis of said shaft;
an extension on said cover means extending forwardly gen-
erally tangentially from the top of said wheel, the forward
edge thereof being positioned generally above the for-
ward edge of said turbine wheel; and
an arcuate scoop mounted on said extension and extendmg
downwardly and rearwardly from the forward edge
thereof toward and nearly into engagement with said
vanes of said turbine wheel, the inner, lower edge of said
arcuate scoop being positioned about 30 degrees removed
from a vertical plane containing said shaft, said scoop
serving to capture water flowing toward said wheel and
direct it centrally against the concave rear face of each
694
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
vane as the vane moves downwardly between about 30
and 60 degrees from said vertical position;
said frame means being arranged to mount said shaft so that
the bottom of said turbine wheel is spaced above the
bottom of said channel so that a substantial flow of water
passes under the wheel, said water flowing under the
turbine wheel being effective to remove spent water from
behind the vanes in the region between the bottom of said
wheel and the bottom edge of said cover means, through
aspirator-like action.
4,436,481
INTAKE VORTEX WmSTLE SILENCING APPARATUS
AND METHODS
Charles G. Linder, Chandler, Ariz., asaignor to The Garrett
Corporation, Los Angeles, Calif.
FUed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,716
Int. aj F04B 29/66
VJS. a. 415—119 22 Claimi
1. A gas intake assembly comprising:
(a) a body having an axis, a gas inlet, a gas outlet spaced
apart from said inlet, and a gas flow passage communicat-
ing with said inlet and outlet, each of said inlet, said outlet
and said flow passage circumscribing said axis;
(b) means for inparting to gas entering said inlet and travers-
ing said flow passage a vortex flow pattern in which the
gas swirls about said axis; and
(c) means for disturbing only a relatively small, radially
outermost portion of said vortex flow pattern, without
significantly distupting the remainder thereof, to attenuate
whistle noise generated by said vortex flow patters,
said imparting means including a series of inlet guide vane
means positioned in a mutually spaced relationship around
said gas inlet, said disturbing means including at least one
vortex-disturbing member and means for positioning each
said vortex-disturbing member in the path of said vortex
flow pattern adjacent said gas inlet, said positioning means
including means for connecting each said vortex-disturb-
ing member to one of said guide vane means.
4,436,482
CONSTANT SHIP SPEED CONTROL METHOD
Morio Inoue, Yokohama; Satoshi Hoshino, Tokyo; Hideki
Namura, Yokohama, and Takashi Watari, Kamakiira, all of
Japan, assignors to Nippon Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,021
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 19, 1980, 55-129198
lat CL3 B63H 3/10
VS. CL 416-1 3 Claims
1. A method for controlling the speed of a ship which in-
cludes a main engine for driving a main shaft at a given rpm, a
fuel rack adapted to be positioned for setting the horsepower
generated by the main engine, a controllable pitch propeller
having a variable blade angle connected to the main shaft, and
a ship speed detector, said method comprising the steps of:
determining the actual horsepower of the main engine in
accordance with the main engine fuel rack position and
the main shaft rpm;
determining a desired horsepower corresponding to a de-
sired ship speed in accordance with the detected ship
speed from the ship speed detector, the actual horsepower
of the main engine, and a preset ship speed;
generating a first function of first fuel rack position and first
main shaft rpm which provides an optimimi propeller
efficiency in accordance with said preset ship speed and
generating a second function of a second fuel rack position
and a second main shaft rpm;
comparing said first and second functions so as to define a
range related to said second function where use of said
first function results in a rich torque and a second range
where use of said first function results in no rich torque,
thereby generating a minimum fuel characteristic func-
tion;
determining a desired engine rpm in accordance with said
minimum fuel characteristic function and said desired
horsepower;
controlling the rpm of the main shaft in accordance with said
desired rpm;
determining a desired fuel rack position in accordance with
the desired rpm and said desired horsepower;
comparing said desired fuel rack position and the main en-
gine fuel rack position to obuin a difference therebe-
tween; and
controlling the blade angle of the controllable pitch propel-
ler in accordance with said difference thereby to attain
efficiency in operation.
4,436,483
HEUCOPTER ROTORS
Kenneth Watson, Yeofil, England, assignor to Westland pic,
Yeovil, England
FUed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 338,103
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jan. 22, 1981,
8101871
Int CL3 B64C J 1/28. 27/50
U.S. a. 416—143 16 Claims
1. A helicopter rotor having a rotor hub, a blade pivotally
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
695
connected to the hub for movement between an operational
spread position and a folded position about a generally vertical
fold axis (14) located at one side of a longitudinal centeriine, at
least one laterally extending lock pin for locking the blade in
the spread position and a powered fold mechanism comprising
a reversible rotary power source for rotation about a generally
vertical rotation axis (24) coincident with the centreline, a
lever (23) rotationally fixed to the power source, a curved link
having one end pivotally attached to the blade about a vertical
pivot axis (63) spaced-apart radially of the axis (24) and its
other end pivotally attached about a vertical pivot axis (35) to
the free end of said lever and an arm pivotally attached be-
tween the curved link and the said lock pin, wherein with the
blade in the spread position the said vertical pivot axis (35) is
located in an over-center position and at an acute angle relative
a line extending through the said rotation axis (24) and the
pivot axis (63) and on the same side of the line as the fold axis
(14).
1. A transverse flow fan rotor comprising a central axial
rotor shaft, a plurality of axially spaced coaxial rotor discs of a
uniform diameter on the rotor shaft and having central through
openings receiving said shaft, said through openings having
circumferentially spaced radial Ipcator notches, conically
tapered split constrictive bushing surrounding said shaft
within the through openings, axially opposing substantially
rigid pairs of clamping collars surrounding said shaft on oppo-
site sides of said discs, one clamping collar of each pair having
a conically tapered cavity receiving at least a part of the adja-
cent constrictive bushing, the opposing collar in each pair
engaging the adjacent end face of the constrictive bushing to
force it wedgingly into said cavity, a compressible shim ele-
ment disposed between each disc and the adjacent end face of
one of said clamping collars to compensate for tolerance vaia-
tions, the clamping collars having bolt receiving openings
formed therethrough in coaxial alignment with said locator
notches, clamping bolts extending through the bolt receiving
openings and locator notches, the discs each having a multi-
plicity of circumferentially equidistantly spaced fan blade
mounting slots formed therethrough near and inwardly of their
peripheries and spaced radially of the axis of said shaft in
concentric relationship therewith, the blade mounting slots of
the disc being in axial alignment, a corresponding number of
elongated substantially equal length fan blades engaging
through said slots of the disc and being supported therein
relatively loosely, said fan blades having longitudinal slots
formed therethrough at least adjacent to one of said discs and
the slots being positioned within the blade mounting slots of
the disc and extending on opposite sides of the disc, and pairs
of releasable and readily removable spring locking elements
engaged within said longitudinal slou of said blades on oppo-
site sides of the disc and restraining the blades against axial
displacement relative to said discs during the operation of the
fan rotor and allowing ready removal and replacement of
individual blades when required.
4,436.485
TURBINE WHEEL WITH INTEGRAL DS BLADES AND
EQUIAXED HUB
George L. Vonnegut, IndiaaapoUs, Ind., assignor to General
Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 896,709, Apr. 17, 1978, Pat. No. 4,240,498.
ThU appUcation Jul. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 174,034 .
Int. a.J POID 5/14
VJS. a. 416—241 R 2 Claims
t ^
4,436,484
TRANSVERSE FLOW FAN ROTOR
WiUiam F. Temple, and Jesse Daniels, both of Albany, Ga.,
assignors to LUUston Corporation, Albany, Ga.
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,607
Int. a.3 FD4D 29/28
U.S. a. 416—178 7 Clabns
1. A cast metal turbine wheel comprising a cylindrical disc
and integral turbine blades arrayed about the perimeter of said
disc;
the grain structure of the metal of said blades being colum-
nar, the grains being predominantly oriented lengthwise in
the radial direction, substantially parallel to the leading
and trailing edges of said blades;
the grain structure of the metal in said disc being predomi-
nantly equiaxed.
4,436,486
CTRCULATING PUMP UNIT
Niels D. Jensen, Bjerringbro; Horst Komossa, Wlttenbom, and
Kurt F. Nielsen, Bjerringbro, all of Denmark, assignors to
Grundfos A/S, Bjerringbro, Denmark
FUed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,782
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 19,
1980, 3022872
Int. a.3 F04B 49/06
U.S. a. 417—45 3 Claims
1. A circulating pump system, comprising:
(a) a motor capable of operating in a plurality of operating
modes, including at least a highest moment mode and a
lowest moment mode, said motor having a current circuit;
696
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
(b) a pump mechanically connected to and driven by said
motor;
(c) a rotation speed switch having an input terminal and a
plurality of output terminals, each of said output terminals
corresponding to one of said operating modes such that
when one of said output terminals is electrically con-
nected to said input terminal, said motor operates in said
corresponding mode;
(d) a plurality of output leads, each of said output leads being
electrically connected at one end to one of said output
terminals and in turn corresponding to one of said operat-
ing modes; and
(e) a thermostat having a temperature-sensing means and a
start up switch operatively connected to said temperature-
sensing means, said start up switch being responsive to a
predetermined temperature condition in said motor, said
predetermined temperature condition occurring only
when said motor is stopped, said start up switch having a
response to the detection of said predetermined tempera-
ture condition by said temperature-sensing means, said
response being to override said rotation speed switch by
electrically connecting said current circuit to that one of
said leads which corresponds to said highest moment
mode, thereby placing said motor in said highest moment
mode and bypassing said rotation speed switch, and then
in response to the cessation of said predetermined temper-
ature condition, to cease overriding said rotation speed
switch by electrically connecting said current circuit to
said input terminal, thereby placing said motor in the
mode corresponding to that one of said output terminals
which is electrically connected to said input terminal.
4,436,487
FOAM LIQUID CONCENTRATE SUPPLY SYSTEM
Fay A. Purvis, Malvern; Robert W. Bennett, Dowingtown, and
Roger A. Ruth, Glenmoore, all of Pa., assignors to Enterra
Corporation, Radnor, Pa.
Filed Jun. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 393,511
Int. a.3 A62C 35/44; G05D 11/00; P04B 49/08
U.S. a. 417-46 10 Claims
meter the amount of liquid chemical additive supplied to
said pressure drop inducing device;
a variable output hydraulic drive means for powering said
additive pump; and
control means responsive to the water pressure developed
by said water pump and to the liquid chemical additive
pressure developed by said additive pump for varying the
power output of said hydraulic drive means in order to
maintain said water pressure and said liquid chemical
additive pressure in balance irrespective of changes in
water pump flow rate, water pump operating pressure,
and the setting of said second valve.
4,436 488
BELOW MOTOR PRESSURECOMPENSATION SYSTEM
FOR SUBMERSIBLE PUMP
Raymond L. Witten, Tulsa, Okla., assignor to Hughes Tool
Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,224
Int. a.3 F04B 35/04; H02K 5/12
U.S. a. 417-53 2 Claims
;|:::-»a
1. For use with a motor-driven water pump of the type
having at least one outlet through which water may be
pumped, said outlet having associated therewith a first valve
and a fluid pressure drop inducing device, said first valve being
operable to open and close said outlet and said pressure drop
inducing device being operable to admit a liquid chemical
additive into said outlet at a flow rate which is directly propor-
tional to the flow rate of the water being pumped therethrough
when said first valve is open, a system for supplying a liquid
chemical additive to said pressure drop inducing device, com-
prising:
a liquid chemical additive storage tank;
an additive pump connected respectively by suction and
discharge conduits to said storage tank and to said pres-
sure drop inducing device;
a second valve arranged in said discharge conduit, said
second valve being operable when closed to isolate said
pressure drop inducing device from said additive pump,
and being operable when open to a selected setting to
1. A method of installing in a well a submersible pump
assembly of the type having an electric motor contained within
a lubricant filled motor chamber below a pump, comprising:
providing a pressure compensator chamber below the motor
chamber;
providing a passage between the pressure compensator
chamber and a communication port in the motor chamber;
mounting in the pressure compensator chamber an expansi-
ble container having an interior sealed from lubricant in
the pressure compensator chamber;
providing a port from the exterior of the pressure compensa-
tor chamber to the interior of the container;
placing into the container a liquid of specific gravity greater
than the specific gravity of the lubricant and selected to
provide a total weight for the container that substantially
equals the weight of the lubricant in the motor chamber
above the communication port; then
lowering the pump assembly into the well.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
697
4,436,489
CONTROL DEVICE FOR A LIQUID PUMP WITH
ADJUSTABLE PUMPING VOLUME
Jan Zangenberg, Nordborg, Denmark, assignor to Danfoss A/S,
Nordborg, Denmark
FUed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,756
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 29,
1981, 3112561
Int. a.3 F04B 49/00
U.S. a. 417-218 3 Claims
1"
an inlet coupling the annular space to a supply of oil in the
bottom of the unitary housing; and
U 27 26 20
1. A control unit for a pump of the type having adjustable
volume control means, comprising, a tank port, a motor speed
control setting unit having first and second pressure chambers
and a moveable valve element having first and second smaller
and larger pressure faces as moveable walls of said pressure
chambers, means connecting said moveable valve element to
said pump adjustable volume control means, a pressure inde-
pendent constant flow regulator having an outlet connected to
said second pressure chamber, first and second pump outlet
ports connected respectively to said first pressure chamber and
the inlet of said constant flow regulator, said setting unit hav-
ing speed setting valve means including a valve member hav-
ing adjustable fixed positions relative to said moveable valve
element and providing variable throttle means between said
second pressure chamber and said tank port to establish a
control pressure in said second pressure chamber.
4,436,490
COMPRESSOR AND LUBRICATING PUMP ASSEMBLY
Siegfried Schonwald, Bad Neustadt-Saale, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignor to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and
Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 27, 1982, Ser. No. 382,685
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 15,
1981, 3123631
Int. a.3 F04B 39/02
U.S. a. 417—372 6 Qaims
1. A unitary compressor assembly comprising:
a compressor with an external-rotor drive motor, both
mounted on a stationary shaft which has a bore shaft canal
for supplying lubricant to the compressor, a friction pump
located at the opposite end of the stationary shaft from the
compressor, and a unitary housing;
the friction pump further comprising:
an impeller comprising a hollow cylinder, the cylinder cou-
pled to the external rotor of the drive motor;
a pump housing mounted on the shaft, the pump housing
comprising inner and outer parts providing an annular
* space in which the hollow cylinder is received, the cylin-
der dividing the annular space into an inner gap and an
outer gap;
an outlet coupling the annular space to the borehole;
an n n
at least one constriction in each gap for impeding the flow of
oil.
4,436,491
METHOD OF SUPPLYING HYDRAULIC OPERATING
FLUID IN DIAPHRAGM TYPE
Masashi Ishiyama, Minami-ashigara, and Michinori Ishibashi,
Higashimurayama, both of Japan, assignors to Fi^i Photo
Film Co., Ltd. and Nikkiso Co., Ltd., of JPX
Continuation of Ser. No. 107,647, Dec. 27, 1979, abandoned.
This application Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,704
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 20, 1978, 53-161579
Int. a.3 P04B 9/10
U.S. CI. 417—385 3 Qaims
1. In the method of supplying hydraulic operating fluid in a
diaphragm type pump in which a diaphragm is driven by an
operating fluid and operating fluid is supplied to an operating
chamber from an oil reservoir at the final stage of a suction
stroke in the main cylinder of the pump, the improvement
comprising instantaneously supplying a predetermined minute
amount, between about 0.1 and about 2% of the whole volume
of the displacement of the diaphragm, of operating fluid, said
predetermined minute amount being delivered through a
valve,
(a) said valve being provided with a piston in a chamber
operating between an enable position wherein operating
fluid from said reservoir can pass to said operating cham-
ber and a disable position wherein passage of said operat-
ing fluid is blocked;
(b) being urged into its disable position by a spring;
(c) said piston being urged by a selectively applied external
pressure oil to move it to its enable position;
(d) said valve being provided with a leakage hole in the wall
of the chamber, said leakage hole being just below the top
of the piston when the piston is in the disable position and
698
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
being blocked by the piston when the piston is in the
disable position and being open to passage of the external
pressure oil when the piston is in the enable position.
4,436,492
SURFACE POWER UNIT FOR A DOWNHOLE PUMP
Daniel G. Peterton, Loi Angeles, and John W. Erickson,
HoBtiiigtoa Beach, both of Calif., aasignors to Kobe, Inc., aty
of Commerce, Calif.
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,121
Int. a.3 F04B 35/02
U.S. a. 417-386 4 daima
B&Z
1. A surface power unit for use on a subterranean well for
applying pulses of fluid to a downhole pump in the well bore
comprising: cylinder means having a piston slidably disposed
therein, said piston dividing said cylinder into a charging side
and a power side; means responsive to the movement of said
piston in said cylinder for generating control signals represent-
ing positions of said piston in said cylinder; means responsive
to at least one of said control signals for connecting a source of
pressurized fluid to said charging side of said cylinder, and
responsive to at least another one of said control signals for
alternatively venting fluid from said charging side of said
cylinder; and conduit means for connecting said power side of
said cylinder directly to the downhole pump; a return pipe
connected between the well bore and said power side of said
cylinder and having a check valve positioned therein for per-
mitting fluid flow only from the well bore to said cylinder.
4,436,493
SELF CONTAINED PUMP AND REVERSING
MECHANISM THEREFOR
William S. Credle, Jr., Stone Mountain, Ga., aadgnor to The
Coca-Cola Company, Atlanta, Ga.
CoBtiniiation-in-part of Ser. No. 77,544, Sep. 21, 1979,
abandoned. Thla application Not. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,584
Int CL^ F04B 43/06
MS. a 417-393 o cking
1. A reciprocating pump and reversing mechanism therefor
comprising in combination:
a housing having a pair of laterally spaced chambers with
diaphragm members therein dividing each of said cham-
bers into a driving section and a discharge section;
said diaphragm members being interconnected by a common
shaft;
a protrusion extending from said common shaft;
manifold means in said housing for transmitting fluid to and
from said driving sections and discharge sections of said
chambers through fluid inlet and outlet ports therein;
inlet and outlet check valves in selected ones of said ports for
controlling the flow of liquid to be pumped to and from
said discharge sections through said manifold means, said
check valves being contained within cartridges, said car-
tridges having a universal shape which will fit into either
_ said inlet or outlet ports of oriented consistent with a
proper fluid flow direction, and having coded configura-
tions on each said check valve cartridge which preclude
the insertion thereof into said inlet or outlet port inconsis-
tent with said proper predetermined fluid flow direction;
and
a reversing mechanism module contained within a common
housing removably attached to said pump between said
discharge chambers and adjacent said common shaft, said
module including,
control valve means for directing driving fluid alternately to
a selected one of said driving sections defined by said
diaphragms in said lateral chambers, a valve actuating
member mounted adjacent to said shalt for sliding move-
ment on bearing surfaces between first and second posi-
tions partially in response to engagement by said protru-
sion, said valve actuating member constraining said con-
trol valve means to alternately direct said driving fluid to
the respective driving sections in said first and second
positions of said actuating member, and snap-acting means
for accelerating and biasing said valve actuating member
against any tendency to stop between said first and second
positions, said snap-acting means including a pair of op-
posed coil springs attached to the bottom of said actuator
and disposed on opposite sides of an axis which is parallel
to a longitudinal axis of said shaft, said coil springs exert-
ing equal and opposite forces on said valve actuating
member in directions transverse to said axis throughout
the positions of movement on said surfaces.
4,436,494
PLUNGER PUMP
Kazuo Yamaizomi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nagano KeikI
Scisakosho, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,169
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 20, 1981, 56/40839
Int a.i F04B 21/00
U.S. a 417—403 7 Claims
1. A plunger pump, comprising:
an elongate and hollow plunger case having an inlet port and
an outlet port;
an elongate plunger reciprocally mounted in said plunger
case;
drive means for effecting a reciprocal driving of said
plunger;
inlet valve means on said plunger case adapted to control the
input of fluid through said inlet port;
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
m
discharge valve means on said plunger spaced axially along
said plunger from said inlet valve means and being
adapted to control the output of fluid from said outlet port
and in response to reciprocations of said plunger;
an elongate bellows encircling a portion of said plunger and
being connected at one end to one end of said plunger case
and extending in the interior of said plunger case, the
other end of said bellows being connected to said plunger.
the outer surface of said plunger being spaced from the
interior surface of said plunger case to define a flow path
therebetween for said fluid;
seal means for providing a fluid tight seal at the connections
of said bellows to said plunger case and said plunger; and
bellows deformation prevention means for preventing ab-
normal deformations of and maintaining a uniform diame-
ter of said bellows as said plunger is reciprocated.
4,436,495
METHOD OF FABRICATING TWO-PIECE SCROLL
MEMBERS FOR SCROLL APPARATUS AND
RESULTING SCROLL MEMBERS
John E. McCullough, Carlisle, Mass., assignor to Arthur D.
Little, Inc., Cambridge, Mass.
FUed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,563
Int C\? POIC 1/02. 21/08; B23P 11/00
U.S. a. 418—55 15 Claims
1. A method of fabricating a scroll member having an invo-
lute wrap rigidly affixed to an end plate, comprising the steps
of:
(a) forming in the surface of an end plate an involutely
configured channel;
(b) forming a reentrant groove in one side wall of said chan-
nel along its length;
(c) providing an involute wrap sized and configured to seat
in said channel and having a surface configured to at least
partially engage said reentrant groove along its length;
(d) seating said wrap into said channel thereby to defme a
locking space between the flank of said wrap and the other
side wall of said channel; and
(e) locking said wrap in said channel into fixed engagement
with said end plate wherein said locking comprises the
stejw of inserting a locking strip formed of matenal which
has sufficient flexibility to permit it to be wound into said
locking space and sufllcient ductility to allow it to be
coined into said locking space and coining said locking
strip thereby to wedge said wrap into said channel.
4,436,496
MOLD FOR A LIQUID INJECHON MOLDING
COMPOSITION
Aldo A. Laghi, Saratoga, N.Y., assignor to General Electric
Company, Waterford, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,242
Int. a.' B29F 1/05: B29G 3/00
U.S. a. 425—543 n Claims
1. A mold apparatus for liquid injection molding composi-
tions comprising:
a frame having a forward and a rear end;
support plate means mounted on said frame and supporting
a support post means, said plate means having a forward
end and a rear end;
a mold frame means mounted on said support post means;
a conduit for liquid molding composition slidably mounted
on the forward end of said frame and on the forward end
of said mold frame means;
a first plate means having passage means therein for the
passage of liquid molding composition and fixedly
mounted on the forward end of said conduit and adapted
to slide within said support post means and within said
mold frame means and located adjacent said forward end
of said frame;
nozzle means at the end of said pasage means in said first
plate means adjacent the rear end of said mold frame
means away from said conduit means, said nozzle means
including pin means slidably mounted in said mold frame
means and adapted to open and close a nozzle opening
means in said nozzle means; and
mold cavity means slidably mounted on said support post
means and adapted to move toward and away from said
nozzle means.
700
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,497
MOLD AND VENT PLUG THEREFOR
James M. Dahl, Stow, Bernard B. Jacob*; Joseph E. Lipovac,
both of Akron; Ralph A. Meglen, Copley, and Donald W.
Ward, Cuyahoga Falls, all of Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear
Tire A Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
FUed Oct. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 437,094
Int. a.3 B29H 5/02
VS. CL 425—28 R 16 Claims
1. A vent plug for a mold used in forming elastomeric arti-
cles and the like comprising an elongated body having an axis
and first and second axial ends, the overall length of said body
measured parallel to said axis being greater than any external
diameter of said body measured perpendicular to said axis, said
body having at said first axial end a first external diameter
which is constant over a predetermined portion of the length
of said body equal to not more than SO percent of said overall
length, said body along the remainder of its length having an
external diameter that is less than said first external diameter,
and an opening extending through said body from said first
axial end to said second axial end.
4,436,498
APPARATUS FOR CURING CONCRETE PRODUCTS
John A. Murray, Norristown, Pa., assignor to Conger/Murray
Systems, Inc., Palm Beach, Fla.
FUed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,608
Int a.3 B29C 25/00
U.S. a. 425—73 9 Qaims
;»
TT
1
^
TT
*
escape from said shapes during feeding of said carbon dioxide
gas.
1. In an apparatus for the manufacture of concrete and like
producu having means for blending a desired mixture, means
for molding the mixture to desired configurations, and for
delivering the shapes thus formed for movement along a prede-
termined path, conveying means for moving the shapes thus
formed to and through a chamber in which the shapes are
exposed to carbon dioxide gas during the movement thereof
through the chamber, the carbon dioxide gas being fed into the
chamber at a controlled pressure, the improvement which
comprises a series of spaced tube means along the top of the
chamber, each of said tube means having a multiplicity of
spaced orifices for feeding carbon dioxide gas into said cham-
ber, said tube means and said orifices being spaced so as to
permit water from carbonation and hydration reactions to
4 436 499
HOUSEHOLD HAND-DEVICE FOR USE AS
MEAT-PRESSER TO SHAPE MINCEMENT INTO
STEAKS
AntonietU Ferrighi, Crusinallo, Italy, assignor to Acea Manodo-
mestici S.r.l., Crusinallo, Italy
FUed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 398,961
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Jul. 20, 1981, 23027 A/81
Int a.3 A22C 7/00; B29C 1/00
U.S. a. 425—195 7 Claims
1. A hand operable device for use as a household meat
presser, said device having a cylindrical central body within
which a cylindrical handle member is slideably received, said
handle member having a spring return means, a container
member connected with said central body and having therein
a plunger pressing means moveable by said handle and a cup
member removeably connected with said central body and
forming a bottom closure for said container member.
4,436,500
IN-LINE ROTATIONAL CASTING APPARATUS
Fred E. AUen; Bruce W. Thuener, both of MUlvUle, and Peter R.
Shadinger, Vineland, aU of N J., assignors to Wheaton Indus-
tries, MiUvUle, N.J.
FUed Jan. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 109,798
Int a.3 B29C 5/04
U.S. a. 425—290
27 Claims
1. Spin casting apparatus for molding hollow objects com-
prising:
a. loading conveyor adapted to receive at fixed intervals and
to transport continuously a sucession of lower mold
halves,
b. conveyor-synchronized fill dispenser including a dis-
penser head having at least one fill nozzle adapted to
dispense a castable liquid adapted to form a hoUow object
by spin-casting into said lower mold halves in the course
of the transporting thereof by said loading conveyor, said
dispenser including means to lower said dispenser head
from a starting position to a fill elevation position, to
transport said head in said fill elevation position, in syn-
chronization with said loading conveyor, to raise said
dispenser head to a return elevation position, and to return
said dispenser head in said return elevation position to said
starting position, said dispenser including further means to
dispense said fill liquid in said recepticle in the course of
said synchronized movement.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
701
c. loader for receiving sucessive mold assemblies comprising
lower mold halves, castable liquid therein, and upper
mold halves mated therewith and upper and lower mold
half clamping means, from said loading conveyor and
transferring said mold assemblies to successively pres-
ented traveling chucks, said loader including a dead plate
onto which said mold assemblies are transferred by said
• conveyor, including a stop member to limit the travel of
said mold assemblies and push bar loading means to push
each of said mold assemblies perpendicularly with respect
to said conveyor motion in timed sequence with said
traveling chucks whereby each of said successively trans-
ferred mold assemblies is engaged to one of said succes-
sively presented chucks,
d. continuous spin caster comprising an elongated carrier
means for said traveling chucks, said chucks being linearly
spaced from one another along a horizontally disposed
carrier means center line, further including means for
continuously moving each of said chucks in a helical path
about said carrier means center line, from a chuck loading
position to a chuck unloading position at a predetermined
rate such that the elapsed time for travel of a chuck from
said loading position to said unloading position is not less
than the time required for said casting material to harden
in said mold, said spin caster further including means for
continuously rotating each of said chucks about an axis
radially projecting from said carrier means center line;
e. semi-automatic piercer adapted to form vent holes in all of
molded objects disposed in said mold assemblies, said
piercer comprising a tabletop adapted to receive a mold
assembly with at least one perforation corresponding' to
the position of a molded object in said mold assembly and
stop members adapted to receive and abut said mold as-
sembly on three sides thereof, said piercer further includ-
ing a manually activated swinging arm assembly having a
piercing element disposed beneath
said tabletop perforation and adapted upon upward swing-
ing thereof to protrude through said perforations and to
pierce hollow molded objects disposed thereat.
4,436,501
APPARATUS FOR MAKING SPEOAL BRICK SHAPES
Samuel P. Kenworthy, Southern Pines, N.C., assignor to Basic
Machinery Co., Inc., SUer Qty, N.C.
FUed Jul. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 401,103
Int a.3 B29C J 7/ 14
VJS. a. 425—308 7 Claims
are positioned thereon by said pusher to an upper position
above said frame to cause said cutter frame to cut said slugs
into a plurality of shaped brick like articles, said pusher there-
after moving said articles from said elevator while said eleva-
tor remains in said second position.
L^i£^
1. An apparatus for producing special brick shapes compris-
ing conveyor means along which elongated slugs of green clay
having an upper finish face and side edges are carried to a
setting machine, a cutter frame adjacent to said conveyor
means operable to cut slugs into special brick shapes, a pusher
operable to push selected slugs off of said conveyor means to
a location under said cutter frame, an elevator vertically mov-
able between a first position below said frame in which slugs
4,436,502
AUGER FEED ARRANGEMENT FOR CUBING
MACHINE
Garth C. Nelson, El QOon; Henry J. White, U JoUa, and Ge-
rald B. Nelson, San Diego, aU of Calif., aasignors to Papakube
Corporation, San Diego, CaUf.
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 428357
Int. a.5 B30B 9/28. 11/24
U.S. a. 425—331 9 Qaims
1. In a cubing machine having an annular die assembly, a
circular die cavity formed about the inner periphery of said die
assembly, and at least one press wheel adapted to be seated in
said circular die cavity and arranged to be rotated therearound,
an auger arrangement for supplying feed stock to said circular
die cavity, including:
an outer housing;
an auger drum mounted concentrically within said housing
and spaced therefrom, said housing and auger drum being
arranged generally on the central axis of said annular die
assembly to extend from one side of said circular die
cavity, and said auger drum being rotauble relative to said
housing and having the outer end thereof disposed in
closely spaced relationship to said annular die cavity;
a rigid blade mounted on said auger drum and forming an
auger flight, the outer end of said blade terminating short
of the outer end of said auger drum;
a mounting plate carried on the outer end of said rigid blade
and extending outwardly therefrom, the outer end of said
mounting plate also terminating shori of the outer end of
said auger drum;
a clamping plate adapted to be mated with said mounting
pltte;
means for connecting said clamping plate with said mount-
ing plate; and
a flexible, resUient tip arranged to be clamped at iu lower,
inner comer between said mounting plate and said clamp-
ing plate, said flexible, resUient tip extending at least to the
outer end of said auger drum and having a height that is
generally at least equal to the height of said rigid blade.
702
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
APPARATUS AND PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION
OF PILE SURFACE ARTICLES
DomM J. Bye, RuBcora; Harold P. Staaistreet, Poatypool, both
of EagiaBd, aad Weraer Undeostnitii, Octtriagen, Fed. Rep.
of Geniaay, ailigBon to Imperial Cheaiical ladostrics PLC,
Londoa, Eaglaad
CoatiaaatkM of Ser. No. 611,243, Sep. 8, 1975, wiileh is a
coatiaoatioa of Ser. No. 417,597, No?. 20, 1973, abaadoned. This
appUcatioB Mar. 31, 1978, Ser. No. 892,023
daiau priority, appUcatioa Uaited Kiagdom, Dec. 4, 1972,
55831/72
lat CL^ B29C 17/02
U.S. a. 425—384 6 ClaiaM
providing an audible and/or visual warning signal when
the sensed condition reaches a first predetermined value;
interrupting means responsive to signals from the probe for
automatically interrupting the combustion of fuel when
the sensed condition has reached a second predetermined
value which exceeds said first value; and
an electric circuit including a voltage source and a plurality
of relays for relaying signals from said probe to the indi-
cating, signaling and interrupting means.
1. Apparatus for manufacturing a pile surfaced product of
the kind having a foundation layer and a pile of filament form-
ing thermoplastic material thereon, said apparatus comprising
a roll having a substantially smooth cylindrical surface heated
to above the softening temperature of the thermoplastic, feed
means for holding the front of the foundation layer against the
thermoplastic material and the thermoplastic material against
said heated surface so that the thermoplastic adheres to the
surface and bonds to the backing, means to withdraw the
laminate of the foundation layer and the thermoplastic from
the heated surface so that filaments of softened thermoplastic
material are formed by stringing said softened thermoplastic
material between the foundation layer and the heated surface
in a filament forming area, a rigid rod or bar of lesser diameter
than the heated roll situated close to the heated surface and
transverse to the direction of movement of the laminate with-
out forming a nip with said roller, said rod or bar sharply
parting the laminate from said roll, and jet means located at a
Ikxition between the rod or rod and the point where the foun-
dation parts from said roll for directing a stream of cooling
fluid from the back of the foundation layer into the filament
forming area.
4,436,505
DEVICE FOR DETECTING FLAME IN OPEN-TYPE
COMBUSTOR AND OXYGEN DENSITY OF INDOOR AIR
Hiroahi Yamagnchi, aad Nobomasa Negishi, both of Gnnau,
Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi DeaU JCaJinfiitu Kaiaha, To-
Iqro, Japan
FUed Job. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,505
Claina priority, application Japan, JoL 1, 1980, 55-89475
Int a? F23N 5/24
U.S. a. 431—76 8 daims
M B, «* «,
4,436,504
APPARATUS FOR MONITORING EXHAUST GASES
Rolf Kommm, Schnlstraase 43/1, D 7300 Esslingea 1 • Berk-
heim. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,237
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Gerauay, Apr. 30,
1981, 3117158
lat CL^ F23N 5/24
U.S. CL 431—15 6 Claims
1. Apparatus for monitoring exhaust gases from the combus-
tion of fiiel, particularly a heating system, comprising in combi-
nation:
a housing having an opening communicating with the ex-
haust gases;
an elongated and interchangeable sensing probe in the hous-
ing extending through the opening;
probe mounting means within the housing to mount said
probe selectively for swivel and longitudinal movement
and locking position;
temperature indicating means responsive to signals from said
probe for indicating the sensed condition;
sijpialing means responsive to signals from the probe for
1. A device for detecting both the presence or absence of
flame in a combustor and an oxygen density of room air feed-
ing said combustor, comprising:
a reference source for applying a reference signal across a
portion of said flame;
an ion current detecting sensor for detecting an ion current
in said flame produced as a result of said reference signal;
means for producing a detection output signal in response to
an ion current detected by said sensor with a scale factor
with respect to said detected ion current such that no
erroneous detection of the presence or absence of flame
occurs;
means for changing said scale factor a predetermined period
of time after start of combustion of said flame to a value
suitable for detecting an indoor oxygen density; and
means operating in response to said detection output signal
for comparing said detection output signal with a fixed
reference value for producing a final output signal sequen-
tially indicative of the presence or absence of flame and
said oxygen density.
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
703
4,436,506
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A GAS HEATED WATER OR
AIR HEATER
Haadrikns Berkhof, Ebubcb, Netherlands, aasfgaor to Hoasy-
wcU B.V., Amsterdam, Netherlands
FUed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,486
Oaims priority, appUcatioa Fed. Rap. of Germaay, Apr. 13,
1981,3114954
lat ai F23N 5/QO
\i&. a. 431—76 4 «^««f
3St
' 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i-H^-T'O-'
3-'
^jE^iiiiinnniin,,,,
■•#1
.]
I >-M I
1. Control system for a gas heated water or air heater having
a gas control valve controlled by a temperature sensor and
comprising a control member for the supply of combustion air
which is controlled dependent on the gas flow, comprising a
sensor for the content of oxygen or carbon dioxide in the flue
gases is provided in the stack of the heater connected to an
electric controller, the output signal of which controls the
control member for the air volume, and further comprising a
fan and a control valve connected in series with the fan and
used as a controllable source of combustion air, wherein the
control valve comprises a servo pressure regulator as well as a
diaphragm operator for the control member of the control
valve operated by the output pressure of the pressure regula-
tor, and that a solenoid operator determining the set point of
the pressure regulator is mounted on the servo pressure regula-
tor and is controlled by the output signal of the electric con-
troller.
two additional chambers and directed towards the bed portion
extending above said flrst chamber for selectively reducing the
build-up of particulate material in the bed portions extending
above said two additional chambers.
4,436,508
CERAMIC BURNER FOR GAS, PARTICULARLY FOR A
HOT-BLAST STOVE FOR A BLAST FURNACE
Johannes C. vaa den Bemt, Schagea, Netherlaads, aaaigBor to
Estel Hoogovens BV, Netherlands
FUed Apr. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 366,135
Int. a.J C21B 9/00; F24H 7/QO; F23C 5/00
U.S. a. 432—214 7 Claims
4,436,507
FLUmiZED BED REACTOR UTILIZING ZONAL
FLUIDIZATION AND ANTI-MOUNDING AIR
DISTRIBUTORS
Robert D. Stewart, Verona, aad Robert L. Gamble, Wayne, both
of N J., aasigBors to Foster Wheeler Eaergy Corporation,
Lifingrton, N J.
FUed Jnl. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,864
Int a.i F23D 19/02
U.S. CL 431—170 3 Claims
1. A fluidized bed reactor comprising a housing, grate means
supported in said housing, a bed of combustible particulate
material supported on said grate means, means extending in
said housing for supplying additional combustible particulate
material to said bed of particulate material, an air plenum
extending immediately below said grate means, said plenum
being divided into a first chamber and at least two additional
chambers, means for selectively passing air from said chambers
through corresponding portions of said grate means and into
corresponding portions of said bed extending above said cham-
bers to selectively fluidize said bed portions, and an air distrib-
utor extending in each of the bed portions extending above said
I
1. In a ceramic burner for use in combustion gas in a combus-
tion chamber of a hot blast stove for s blut furnace plant
having a burner tip defining a vertical gu conduit and vertical
air conduits on the sides of the gas conduit exiting through
ports into the gas conduit, the improvement comprising the tip
defining a gas conduit of rectangular cross-section in plan view
having portions of the longer sides flared outwardly at an exit
end, said ports exiting in said flared portions, a plurality of
spaced vertical recesses of lesser number than said ports on
each longer side of said gas conduit and suggered with respect
to the recesses on the other side, said recesses extending along
said gu conduit in the flared portions to alternating portt of
said air conduits.
704
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,509
CONTROLLED ENVIRONMENT FOR DIFFUSION
FURNACE
Karl H. Koamuiek, Lake Park, and Robert C. Shambelan, Te-
qneita, both of Fla^ aaaignort to RCA Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376^72
Int. a.J F27D 5/00
U.S. CL 432—253 5 Clainif
PI
^22
^
^)
^!^
20 >
1. In 8 furnace system for processing silicon wafers having a
cabinet region for storing and supplying gases and reactants
used in the processing of the silicon wafers, a furnace zone
abutting and communicating with the cabinet region having a
refractory reaction tube of a given diameter extending there-
through, one end of the reaction tube communicating with the
cabinet region for receiving the gases and reactants under
pressure and the other end terminating in one end of a scaven-
ger chamber to exhaust residual gases and reactants and a
loading-unloading chamber abutting the other end of the scav-
enger chamber whereby boat members loaded with silicon
wafers may be handled seriatum through the loading-unload-
ing chamber, through the scavenger chamber and into the
reaction tube, the improvement comprising:
a movable control member mounted for linear movement
within the reaction tube, the scavenger and loading-
unloading chambers along an extension of the longitudinal
axis of the reaction tube and comprising an inner tube
having the same diameter as the reaction tube and an outer
tube concentric with and spaced from the inner tube, both
tubes fixed for parallel and simultaneous movement in the
same direction.
4,436,510
ORTHODONTIC CHAIN APPUCATION TOOL
Panl E. nein. Lake Otwego, Oreg., aaaignor to Modcom, Inc.,
Caaby, Or^
FUed Ang. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 411,496
Int CL^ A61C 3/00
U.S. CL 433—4 2 dalnia
1. An applicator tool for use with an orthodontic loop chain
to faciliute attaching, through the use of individual loops in
the chain, an orthodontic archwire to orthodontic tooth appli-
ances, where the chain is composed of a series of elastically
defonnable loops connected by breakaway isthmuses, said tool
comprising
a pair of pivotally connected arms,
a pair of loop-gripping tips adapted for clamping an end loop
in the chain in a manner permitting the end loop to be
placed on a tooth appliance, to secure an archwire thereto,
a chain dispenser mounted on one of the arms, adjacent the
other end thereof,
means defining a path along which the chain is intended to
be advanced in a forward direction from said chain dis-
penser toward said tips, and
means elastically encircling said tips forming a constriction
zone in said path through which an end-adjacent loop in
the chain is adapted to pass, by reversible loop elongation
produced by the application of a downstream force on the
chain which is substantially less than that required to
break an isthmus in the cha^.
4,436,511
MOLDED DENTAL PRESS
John W. MitcheU, Sr., 1701 W. 168th St, Gutlena, CaUf. 90247
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 384,183, Jun. 2, 1982. Thia
appUcation Aug. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 411,675
Int a.3 A61C 19/00
U.S. a. 433—49 5 Claims
V -/■?
2. A dental press for tensioned holding during a curing
period of a workpiece such as a body of moldable material
adhesively supporting a matching pair of dentures and corre-
sponding oral models, at least one of which dentures bears
curable relining material conformably held intermediate the
denture and its model, said press comprising in combination:
an open frame formed of separate upper and lower work-
contact surfaces, each having an obverse planar face dis-
posed facing each other, mutually parallel and vertically
spaced apart by upstanding support means, tensioning
means carried by said support means for frictional regis-
tration with said upper contact surface for clamping said
workpiece in said frame between and in frictional contact
with the respective work-contact surfaces, said upper
work-contact surface having a reverse face formed with a
pattern of upstanding, axially-outward directed, generally
diametric ribs plus a peripheral ring which ring together
with the diametric ribs form multiple spill-over catch
basins, said upper work-contact surface being formed with
at least one transverse aperture connecting its obverse and
reverse faces and opening to one of said basins so as to
enable passage thereto of small amounts of said moldable
material which may be thus extruded from said workpiece
upon initial pressure of the obverse faces thereagainst
when the workpiece is disposed therebetween.
4,436^12
DEVICE FOR FIXING DRILL BITS INTO THE HEAD OF
AIR MOTORS FOR HAND-HELD DENTISTS' TOOLS
Philippe Garda, Bcaaacon, France, aaaignor to Micro-Mega
S»A., Bcaancon, France
Filed No?. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,411
Claima priority, appUcation France, Dec. 22, 1980, 80 27642;
Feb. 10, 1981, 81 02734; Feb. 10, 1981, 81 02735
Int a.3 A61C 1/14
U.S. a. 433—129 12 Claima
1. Device for securing a drill bit into the head of an air motor
driven dental drill of the type including a housing mounting a
rotor having a collet means for receiving the shank of the drill
bit and a bit retention means to secure the bit in the collet
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
705
means, the improvement wherein the retention means (6) in-
cludes longitudinal sliu (7) and a head portion (10) having an
inclmed surface (11), the coUet means of the rotor (2) having an
uichned surface (12) corresponding to said inclined surface
(11), a biasmg means acting at one end of the retention means
(6) to close the head portion (10) of the retention means onto
the shank of the drill bit using the cooperation of inclined
4,436,513
FREE-SAIL SYSTEM SAILBOARD SIMULATOR
Kenneth S. Darby, R.D. 1, Box 311, FalU, Pa. 18615
FUed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,451
Int Q\? G09B 9/06
U.S. a 434-60 I Claim
1. An improvement in the design of a simulator to be used to
instruct sailing on a free-sail system sailboard consisting of two
complete discs of plywood or other material to form a base and
a deck, having a hull-shaped non-skid area on the upper disc
and within the diameter of the upper disc, having a swivel joint
mount on the hull area, and inverted casters mounted on the
lower disc with a pivoting bearing in the center acting as an
axis around which the upper disc rotates and having an adjust-
able dampener for regulating the ease at which a simulator
rotates and a cylindrical shape guard protruding down from
the upper disc to keep fmgers away from the casters.
has a lower portion supporting propeller shaft means, propeller
means mounted on said propeller shaft means and including
hub means and blade means, said hub means being formed with
exhaust passage means which is extending axially along the
hub means and connected at one end with said exhaust gas
passage means in the housing means, the other end of the
exhaust passage means being opened rearwardly of the hub
means, outer pipe means having a front portion radially spaced
apart from and integral with said hub means and extending
substantially parallel with said hub means to surround at least
the rear portion of said hub means to thereby form a substan-
tially straight passage between the front portion of the outer
surface (11) and corresponding inclined surface (12), and a
release means to release the shank of the drill bit by compress-
ing the biasing means, said release means comprising a button
(14) fitted over the housing and a closure member (13) rigidly
fixed at one end of the retention means (6), wherein a turning
of said button (14) causes displacement of said closure member
(13).
pipe means and the hub means, said outer pipe means further
having a rear portion fitted to a rear end of the front portion
and means extending rearwardly beyond said other end of the
exhaust passage means in the hub means, said rear portion of
the outer pipe means having a rear wall formed with opening
means which is smaller in diameter than the rear end of said
hub means, said rear wall of the rear portion of the outer pipe
means having an internally threaded central hole which is in
threadable engagement with an externally threaded rear end
portion of said propeller shaft means, and said outer pipe means
having a front end which is located forwardly of trailing edge
of said blade means.
4,436,515
ARTICULATION DEVICE HAVING A DOUBLE
UNIVERSAL JOINT AND A BALL JOINT UNIT
Bernard MaUet Limay, France, aaaignor to NadcUa, Ruell
Mahnaiaon, France
FUed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 421,802
Claima priority, appUcation France, Oct 23, 1981, 81 19926
Int a.3 F16D 3/26. 3/30
UA a 464-114 9 oalma
28 ^TjJ J \ ^22
10 29
4,436,514
EXHAUST MEANS FOR MARINE PROPULSION UNIT
Maaaaori Takahaahi, Hamamatau, and HidehUto Uehara, Shizu-
oka, both of Japan, aaaignora to Yamaha Hataudoki Kahmhiitf
Kaiaha, Iwata, Japan
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,372
Claima priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 16, 1980, 55-128377
Int a.3 B63H 1/14
U.S. a 440-89 5 Claima
1. A marine propulsion unit comprising housing means
which is formed with engine exhaust gas passage means and
1. An articulation device comprising two universal joinU,
intermediate connecting means for interconnecting the two
universal joints, and a ball joint unit, said device being pro-
vided for transmitting a movement of rotation between a driv-
ing shaft and a driven shaft which are adapted to be rendered
rigid respectively with a fork member of a first of said univer-
sal joints and a fork member of a second of said universal jointt,
the ball joint unit comprising a first element and a second
element respectively carried by said two fork members, spi-
ders, rolling bearings connecting said two fork members to said
intermediate connecting means through said spidera, each of
706
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
the elements of the ball joint unit being constructed in the form
of a fork member having branches which are respectively
engaged between and in contact with branches of the corre-
sponding fork member of said first and second universal joints,
the fork members of the ball joint unit each having a web
which carries a projection which cooperates with a comple-
mentary projection provided on the web of the other fork
member of the ball joint unit, the fork members of the ball joint
unit defining in their branches transverse apertures receiving
inwardly projecting portions of said rolling bearings by means
of which rolling bearings the spiders are moimted in the
branches of the fork members of the first and second universal
joints.
CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARING SUPPORT FOR
TRUNNIONS IN FORK EYES OF UNIVERSAL JOINTS
ArmiB Olichewiki, SchweinAirt; Manfred BraBdenstein, Eus-
■eBhcim, and HeiBrieh Kimkel, SchweinAirt, ail of Fed. Rep.
of Germany, aaiigBors to SKF Kngeiiagertabriken GmbH,
SchweinAirt, Fed. Rep. of Gcnnany
FUed Jul. 17, 1981, Scr. No. 284,191
Claims priority, applicatioB Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 18,
1980, 3027263
Int. CL3 F16D 3/41
U.S. a 464—128 8 Claims
1. Support means for trunnions in fork eyes of universal
joints having a cylindrical bore comprising a bearing bushing
mounted in the cylindrical bore and consisting of a generally
cylindrical sleeve section and a bottom section closing one
axial end of said sleeve section adapted to axially support the
trunnion, a plurality of cylindrical rollers having axial end
faces arranged in at least two side by side rows in an annular
space between said sleeve section and trunnion, said trunnion
having an outer peripheral surface defining the inner raceways
for the rows of rollers, said sleeve section having a constant
uniform outer diameter and having stepped outer races formed
in its bore section offset in steps radially inwardly towards said
bottom section thereby to define a relatively thick walled
sleeve section for a first row of rollers adjacent the bottom
section and a relatively thin walled sleeve section for the rol-
lers of a second row which are greater in diameter than said
rollers of said first row, said sleeve section under the outer
races being supported non-elastically at its outer peripheral
surface adjacent the bottom section over its entire periphery
and being supported elastically on its side opposite the bottom
section at least in a radial load direction in the fork eye by
means of an intermediate bushing member made of an elasti-
cally compressible material which seats between the inner wall
of the bore of the fork eye and the outer peripheral surface of
the bearing bushing and overlies said second row of rollers.
4,434,517
APPARATUS FOR MAMNC TRANSVERSE FLOW
CIGARETTE FILTERS
Jean-Pierre Ldict, Montrcux, Switzerland, aaaignor to Bann*
gartner Papiers SA., Renens, Switzerland
CoBtiniiation.in-part of Ser. No. 839,607, Oct 5, 1977, Pat No.
4,164,438. This appUcation Mar. 14, 1979, Scr. No. 20,471
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Oct 5, 1976,
12568/76
Int C1.3 A24C 5/50
U.S. a. 493—45 11 Claima
1. Apparatus for making transverse flow cigarette filters
which comprises:
means for forming cellulose acetate previously impregnated
with a plasticizing agent into a rod having a porous cover-
ing:
means for cutting said rod at a cutting station into sections
each having a length of several filters;
means for conveying said rod sections from said cutting
station in a direction transverse to the lengths of said rod
sections; and
means engaging opposite ends of said rod sections for posi-
tioning said rod sections while being thus conveyed,
said conveying means comprising a revolving drum having
in its peripheral surface a plurality of longitudinal grooves
into which said rod sections are fed and by which they are
conveyed as said drum revolves, and a second revolving
drum having in its peripheral surface longitudinal grooves
into which said rod sections are transferred, said second
drum having in its groove spaced projections for forming
longitudinally spaced indentations in one side of each of
said rod sections while said sections are being conveyed
by said conveying means from said cutting station.
4^436,518
METAL TROUGH
Da?ld L. Boat, 120 E. Krans St, St Lonia, Mo. 63111
FUed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 186^99
Int a.i B65G 75/60
U.S. CL 428—595
SClaint
1. A trough comprising a length of sheet metal formed into
a trough having flanges along each side of the trough with a
smooth continuous curve between the flanges and the body of
March 13, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
707
the trough, and a bar of metal welded along the underside of
each longitudinal edge of said metal sheet before said flanges
are formed; said bar being formed simultaneously with said
sheet, so as to produce a flange reinforcement having a smooth
continuous curve, which curve is substantially identical to the
smooth continuous curve of the flanges on the trough.
4,436,519
REMOVABLE HEMOSTASIS VALVE
William J. O'Neill, Garland, Tex., aaaignor to Argon Medical
Corp., Athena, Tex.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,984
Int CL^ A61M 5/00
UA a. 604-175 10 Clalnii
ber with a single, linear slit therein, said diaphragm being
mounted in said central passage, said diaphragm wall
member having an inner bottom diaphragm surface, and
an outer bottom diaphragm surface, said slit extending
through said wall member from said inner bottom dia-
phragm surface to said outer bottom diaphragm surface,
said wall member defining with said seal a diaphragm
chamber within the space between said inner bottom
diaphragm surface and said seal, whereby the side walls of
said dome shaped diaphragm will act in cooperation with
the walls of said central passage to resiliently urge said slit
closed when no catheter is present therethrough.
1. A hemostasis valve comprising:
(a) a body having a central passage therein;
(b) a seal having a central aperture therein, said seal being
mounted in said central passage; and
(c) a resilient, dome shaped diaphragm having a wall mem-
4,436,520
LOW GLOSS nLMS OF ENHANCED ADHESION
Robert J. Lipko, Uewellyn, and Douglas J. Laurent Auburn,
both of Pa., aaaignon to Exxon Research k Engineering Co^
norhara Park, N J.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,367
Int a.J A61F 13/02
UA a 604-385 jcudms
1. A disposable diaper having a diaper back sheet of polyole-
fin, non-woven top sheet, absorbent inner layer and tape clo-
sure tabs, wherein the exposed surface of said diaper back sheet
has a 45* gloss of no greater than 8, a mean value of maximum
profile height (Rp„) of less than 100 microinches and a mean
maximum peak to valley height (R,„) of less than 200 micro-
inches, wherein said surface has enhanced adhesion to said tape
closure tabs.
CHEMICAL
4,436,521
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING DYED AND ANTI-SHRINK
TREATED WOOL
Oskar Annen, Aesch; Hemumn EgU, Basel, and Karl Zeslger,
Allfchwil, all of Switzerland, aiaignon to Sandoz Ltd., Basel,
Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 178,124, Aug. 14, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 103,272, Dec. 13, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation May 27, 1982, Ser. No. 382,681
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Oct. 18, 1979,
9366/79
Int. a.3 D06P 1/56. 3/16. 5/00, 5/02
U.S. a. 8—493 29 Claims
1. A process for producing dyed and anti-shrink treated
wool which comprises dyeing wool with an acid milhng or a
metal complex dye either before, after or between the steps of
an anti-shrink treatment and after-treating the dyed wool with
a liquor containing a mixture of a cationic fixing agent and a
levelling/retarding agent having afTmity for wool dyestufTs,
with the proviso that where the anti-shrink treatment com-
prises a chlorination step the dyeing and afterireatment are
carried out after such chlorination step.
4,436,522
DISPERSE DYE COMPOSITION
Toahio Niwa, and Susumu Nagashima, both of Kanagawa, Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Chemical Industries Limited, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,482
Int. a.J C09B 67/3%. 67/40: D06P 1/613
U.S. a. 8—524 2 Claims
1. A disperse dye composition containing:
20 to 30% by weight of a water-insoluble or sparingly solu-
ble dye; and
1 to S% by weight of a water-soluble surface active agent
represented by the formula:
in the molecular weight range from 300 to 300, and subse-
quently subjecting the resultant concentrate to wet grinding.
4,436,524
AFTER TREATING COMPOSITION FOR DIRECT OR
REACnVE DYEINGS ON CELLULOSE
Salfatore Valenti, Binningen, Switzerland, auignor to Sandoz
Ltd., Basel, Switzerland
FUed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376.902
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 16,
1981, 3119645; Jun. 19, 1981, 3124195
Int. a.J D06P 5/02
U.S. a. 8—551 23 Qaims
1. A composition useful as an aftertreatment agent for im-
proving the fastness of a dyeing, printing or optical brightening
on a hydroxy group-containing fibrous substrate which com-
position comprises
(1) a mixture of (A) and (C),
(2) a mixture of (A), (B) and (C),
(3) a precondensate prepared by reacting (A) with (B) in the
presence of (C), or
(4) a mixture of (C) and a precondensate prepared by react-
ing (A) with (B) in the absence of (C),
wherein
(A) is a linear or crosslinked polymer comprising repeating
units of the formula I" or I'",
(B) is an N-methylol derivative of a urea, melamine, gua-
namine, triazinone, urone, carbamate or acid amide;
and
(C) is a catalyst for the cross-linking of N-methylol com-
pounds of the type (B) above,
with the proviso that in the composition of type (1) component
(A) comprises repeating uniu of formula I'", said formulae I"
and I'" being as follows:
R>
CH3
**— ^_>-0-eCH2CH20-)jeCH2CHO-)w(-CH2CH20^H
wherein Rj is a hydrogen atom or an a-methylbenzyl
group, R2 is a hydrogen atom or an a-methylbenzyl
group, R3 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, R^ is a
hydrogen atom, a methyl group or an a-methybenzyl
group, with the proviso that one of Rl, R2 and R^ is an
a-methylbenzyl group, wherein one of 1 and n is 0 and the
other is an integer of 7 to 20, and m is an integer of 0 to 3.
4,436,523
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF STORAGE
STABLE COLORANT COMPOSITIONS BY
ULTRAFILTRATION AND WET MILLING
Paul Hugelahofer, Muttenz; Peter Zbinden, HSlsteln, and Zde*
nek Kod, Binningen, aU of SwitzerUud, assignors to Ciba*
Gcigy Corporation, Ardaley, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 419,660
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerhmd, Sep. 29, 1981,
6258/81
Int a.3 C09B 67/46; D06P 1/16
VS. a. 8—527 20 Claima
1. A process for the preparation of storage stable composi-
tions of sparingly soluble or water-insoluble colorants, which
process comprises mixing an aqueous suspension of at least one
sparingly soluble or water-insoluble colorant with at least one
surface-active substance, subjecting the mixture to ultrafiltra-
tion through an asymmetrical membrane which contains ionic
groups and has a pore diameter of 1 to 300 A and a cut-off level
CH3
CH3
-N®-(-CH2iyNHCONH't-CH2i|rN®-X'i— (-
CH3 CH3
I"
wherein X|' is C2-i2alkylene,
— CH2COCH2
-, -CH2-/rjVcH2-
or
CH2
CH2—
and each y. independently, is 2-4, and
-f-W-Y-Z-Y-W-Xi-}-
in which each W independently is
R
— N®—
I
R
— ®N N®—
R V— y R
(s)
0>)
1040 O.G.— 27
709
710
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
-continued
.®N N®- or
(c)
(d)
in which each
R, independently, is Cs-^cycloalkyl; Ci-2oalkyl; Ci.2oalkyl
monosubstituted by —OH, — CN, R,0_R,S— , RiCO— ,
or — CON(R2)2; Ci.4alkyl monosubstituted by — COOH
or arylsulphonyl or mono- or di-substituted by — COORi;
phenyl or benzyl unsubstituted or substituted by up to 3
groups selected from Ri— , RiO— , —OH, — CN, halogen
and —COOH; or both groups R on a single nitrogen atom,
together with the nitrogen atom to which they are at-
tached, form a 5- or 6-membered ring;
Rl is Ci^kyl;
R2 is hydrogen, Ci-«alkyl or Ci.4alkyl monosubstituted by
—OH, aryl or Ci.4alkoxy;
X] is a divalent bridging group,
each
Y, independently, is arylene, aralkylene, alkarylene, oxyary-
lene or Ci-isalkylene, which may be interrupted by up to
7 oxygen or 3 quaternary nitrogen atoms and may be
substituted by up to 3 —OH or — ORi groups,
and
Z is a bridging group of formula (e) or (0
a group
/
or a group
R '
R
-Y-8-R ;
\
Rio
in which Y and R are as defined above and Rio is Ci_2oalkyI
which may be unsubstituted or substituted by up to 3 hydroxy
or halogen groups and/or may be interrupted by up to 3
—O—, — S— , — NRi 1— or — N®(Ri)2— groups, where Ri i is
hydrogen or Ci_4alkyl.
4,436,525
FUEL GEL FOR CHARCOAL OR WOOD FIRES
Barney J. Zmoda, Bridgewatcr, and Paul J. Fcaiock, South
Plainfield, both of N J., anignorfl to Colgate-PalnoliTe Com*
pwiy, New York, N.Y.
FUcd Mar. 16, 1983, Ser. No. 475,818
Int a.3 ClOL 7/04
VJS. a. 44-7 J 7 cta|n„
1. A solid alcohol fuel fire starter ^«iipri8ing a firm, free-
standing molded solid anhydrous alcdhol gel which does not
liquify during combustion consisting essentially of a major
proportion of an anhydrous alcohoUc mixture of methanol and
isopropanol in the weight ratio of about 3:1, and a fatty acid
soap gelling agent.
*»^ /»» (e)
N
X
N _ N
-N '^ N-
R9 R9
*\ /*' (0
N
A
N _ N
a9a
-N N-R,
in which
R5 is a direct bond, Ci-ualkylene, Ci-i2alkylene interrupted
by up to 3 N or O atoms, arylene, diaminoarylene or
dioxyarylene,
R« is Ci.i2alkylene or C2-i2alkylene interrupted by up to 3
N, O or S atoms,
R7 is arylene,
Rs is Ci-i2alkylene or arylene,
and each
R9 independently is hydrogen, Ci.20tlkyl, unsubstituted or
substituted by up to 3 hydroxy, Ci-4alkoxy or halogen
groups,
4,436,526
METHOD FOR MAKING AN ARimCIAL FUEL LOG
Morris E. Holder, East Ridge, Tenn., aarignor to HMVH Cor-
poration, Chattanooga, Tenn.
FUcd Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 392,287
Int. a.3 ClOL 5/00
VJS. a. 44—10 B 14 Claims
1. A method for making an artificial fuel log comprising:
(a) providing a mixture of combustible material and binder in
a hollow mold which is open at both ends;
(b) applying compressive forces having both axial and radial
components at both ends of the mold to compress the
mixture in the mold;
(c) closing both ends of the mold to maintain the compressed
mixture therein at a fixed volume;
(d) effecting at least partial curing of the compressed mixture
within the mold;
(e) removing the closures from the ends of the mold; and
(0 removing the fiiel log from the mold.
4. The method of claim 1 wherein the combustible material
is lignocellulosic material having a moisture content of 18% by
weight or less, and the binder is a thermosetting resin.
12. An artificial fuel log made by the method comprising:
(a) providing a mixture of combustible material and binder in
a hollow mold which is open at both ends;
(b) applying compressive forces having both axial and radial
components at both ends of the mold to compress the
mixture in the mold;
(c) closing both ends of the mold to maintain the compressed
mixture therein at a fixed volume;
(d) effecting at least partial curing of the compressed mixture
within the mold;
(e) removing the closures from the ends of the mold; and
(0 removing the fuel log from the mold.
March 13. 1984
CHEMICAL
711
4,436,527
STABILIZER FOR MIXED FUELS
Maaaaki Yamamnra, Wakayanu; Taiio IgaraaU, Amagasaki,
and Toahiynki Ukigai, Chiba, all of Japan, aasignors to Kao
Soap Co., Ltd.; Lion Corporation and Nippon Oil and Fata
COh Ltd., all of Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300^55
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 16, 1980, 55/128087
Int a.3 ClOL J/32
VS. a. 44—51 10 Claims
1. A mixed fuel composition which comprises a dispersion of
pulverized coal dispersed in fuel oil, said dispersion containing
an effective stabilizing amount of the reaction product ob-
tained by reacting (1) polyol having at least 3 hydroxy! groups
in the molecule and having a molecular weight of from 400 to
10,000, with (2) an epihalohydrin.
separated from residual mineral material which is removed
with slag from said slag layer.
4,436,529
METHOD FOR REMOVING SULPHUR IN
CONJUNCnON WTTH THE GASIHCATION OF
CARBONACEOUS MATERIAL IN METAL SMELTS
Per A. H. H. Fahlstrttm, Akersberga, and Karl G. Gtfrliag,
UdingS, both of Sweden, aaaignors to Bolidea Aktiebolag,
Stockholm, Sweden
Filed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,091
Claims priority, applicatioa Sweden, Apr. 21, 1981, 8102508
Int. a.3 ClOJ 3/00
VJS. a 48—197 R 8 Claims
1. A method for removing sulphur when gasifying metal
smelts of carbonaceous material containing sulphur, character-
ized in that the carbonaceous material is charged to a gasifying
reactor containing an iron and/or manganese smelt with a
temperature of between 1100* and 1600* C. substantially satu-
rated with respect to sulphur and carbon to form a smelt layer,
a nutte layer and a slag layer; and tapping off the matte layer
4,436,530
PROCESS FOR GASIFYING SOLID CARBON
CONTAINING MATERIALS
Edward T. Child, Tarrytown, and William B. Crooch,
paqua, both of N.Y., aaaignort to Texaco Devalopmant Corpo-
ration, White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 394,974
Int a.i ClOJ 3/46
VJS. a. 48—197 R 17
4,436,528
AQUEOUS SLURRIES OF CARBONACEOUS
MATERIALS
Martin J. ScUck, New York, N.Y., and Kathy A. Knitto-, New-
ark, Calif., aaaignors to Diamond Shamrock Chendcals Com-
pany, Dallaa, Tex.
FUed Sep. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 419,618
Int a.» ClOL 1/32
VS. CL 44—51 23 Claims
1. A stabUizer composition for aqueous carbonaceous slur-
ries comprising:
(a) at least one dispersant selected from the group consisting
of the sodium, lithium, potassium and ammonium salts of
naphthalenesulfonic acid formaldehyde condensate, and
(b) at leut one water soluble polymer selected from the
group consisting of sodium alginate, guar gum, locust
bean gimi, carboxymethylhydroxypropyl guar gum, hy-
droxypropyl guar gum and guarpak guar gum.
21. A process for preparing stable aqueous carbonaceous
slurries comprising incorporating into said slurry the composi-
tion of claim 1 in an amount sufficient to reduced water content
of the slurry, stabilize the network of carbonaceous material in
water and improve pumpability.
■ >•
ri^o
V
\ '.^ s.
1. The method which comprises
gasifying a solid carbon-containing charge in the presence of
water and an oxygen-containing gas thereby forming a hot
synthesis gas containing carbon monoxide and hydrogen
at 1100*C.-1600*C.;
cooling by radiation said hot synthesis gas containing carbon
monoxide and hydrogen to SOO* C.-800* C. thereby form-
ing a cooled synthesis gas;
removing at IcMt a portion of the ash components from said
cooled synthesis gas thereby forming a partially deashed
cooled synthesis gas;
convectively cooling said partially deashed cooled synthesis
gas in a transfer line convection cooler from initial tem-
perature of 300* C.-800* C. to a final temperature of 400*
C.-700* C. thereby forming a further cooled synthesis gas;
convectively cooling a first, carbon monoxide-production
portion of said further cooled synthesis gas to ISO*
C.-400* C. thereby forming a convectively cooled first
portion;
scrubbing said convectively cooled first portion thereby
forming a scrubbed first portion of said synthesis gas in
amount desired for carbon monoxide production;
contacting a second portion of said cooled synthesis gas with
aqueous coolant in a synthesis gas scrubbing and quench
operation wherein, u said gas is cooled from 400* C.-700*
C. down to ISO* C.-2S0* C, it volatUizes therein water in
predetermined desired amount for shift conversion
thereby forming a shift conversion charge gas;
preheating said shift conversion charge gas to 173* C.-230*
C;
passing said preheated shift conversion charge gas to a shift
conversion operation wherein at 230* C.-3S0* C. and
300-1200 psig water reacts with carbon monoxide form-
ing carbon dioxide and hydrogen to yield a product syn-
thesis gas; and
withdrawing said product synthesis gas.
712
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,531
SYNTHESIS GAS FROM SLURRIES OF SOLID
CARBONACEOUS FUELS
Lawrence E. Estabrook, Whittier, Cilif^ and Robert M. Snggitt,
Wappingen Falls, N.Y^ aidgnors to Texaco Derelopment
Corporation, White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 412,437
Int a.3 ClOJ 3/46
MS. CL 48—197 R 28 Claims
1. A continuous process for the production of synthesis gas,
fuel gas, or reducing gas from a slurry of an ash-containing
solid carbonaceous fuel comprising,
(1) reacting about 75 to 95 weight percent of the carbon in
said slurry of ash-containing solid carbonaceous fuel by
noncatalytic partial oxidation with a free-oxygen contain-
ing gas and in the presence of a temperature moderator in
the free-flow refractory lined reaction zone of a gas gener-
ator at an autogenous temperature in the range of about
2350* F. to 2900* F. and a pressure in a range of about 10
to 200 atmospheres to produce a hot stream of gas com-
prising H2, CO, CO2, and at least one material selected
from the group consisting of H2, N2, H2S, COS, CH4,
NH3, A, HCl, HCN, and containing entrained matter
comprising particulate carbon, the remainder of the un-
converted ash-containing solid carbonaceous fuel, and
molten slag;
(2) passing the hot gas stream into a gas cooling zone includ-
ing a radiant cooler provided with an unobstructed central
passage through which the hot gas stream is passed; con-
tacting said hot gas stream within said cooling zone with
an aqueous solution of catalyst consisting of a water solu-
ble alkali metal compound and/or an alkaline earth metal
compound and water, wherein the alkali metal and/or the
alkaline earth metal constituents of the compound are
selected from the metals in the Periodic Table of Elements
in Groups lA and/or IIA; and intimately mixing said
catalyst solution with said entrained matter and vaporiz-
ing the water;
(3) reacting in said gas cooling zone in the presence of said
catalyst H2O and at least a portion of the particulate
carbon and the carbon in the remainder of the uncon-
verted ash-containing solid carbonaceous fuel entrained in
said gas stream; and simultaneously reducing the tempera-
ture of said gas stream from an entering temperature in the
range of about 2300* F. - 2800* F. to a discharge tempera-
ture in the range of about 1350* F. - 1600* F. by indirect
heat exchange with a coolant; and
(4) discharging from said gas cooling zone a partially cooled
gas stream containing an increased amount of H2+COx.
low-temperature steam reforming, high-temperature
steam reforming, CO conversion and methanation and
4,436,532
PROCESS FOR CONVERTING SOLID WASTES TO
GASES FOR USE AS A TOWN GAS
Katsonoba Yamagnchi, Yokohama; Seiichi Matsooka, Aqjyo;
Takayuki Hayashida, and Tomio Hayase, botii of Yokohama,
all of Japan, assignors to JGC Corporation and Tsnkishima
Kikai Co., Ltd., botii of Tokyo, Japan, a part interest
FUed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,606
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 13, 1981, 56-35303
Int. a.' ClOJ 3/00
U A CL 48—209 14 Claims
1. A process for converting solid wastes to gases suitable for
use as a town gas comprising the steps of:
(1) pyrolyzing solid wastes at a temperature of at least 550*
C. in a pyrolyzing furnace to produce pyrolysis gases
containing hydrogen, carbon monoxide, carbonic acid
gas, methane and other hydrocarbons, inert gases, chlo-
rine-containing compounds, sulfur-containing compounds
and other impurities,
(2) washing the thus produced pyrolysis gases,
(3) refining the thus washed pyrolysis gases,
(4) reforming the thus refmed pyrolysis gases with the steam
contained therein by at least one member selected from
(5) separating at least one member selected from the steam
and carbonic acid gas from the thus reformed pyrolysis
gases thereby to obtain the gases suitable for use as a town
gas.
4,436,533
ADSORPTION PROCESS
Robert P. Bannon, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell OU Com-
pany, Houston, Tex.
FUed Dec. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 446,299
Int a.i BOID 53/04
U.S. a. 55—26 8 Claims
1. A improved process for using at least three molecular
sieve adsorbent beds and a continuous flow of a vapor-phase
eluent to effect the resolution of a continuous flow of a vapor-
phase hydrocarbon feed mixture containing normal paraffins
and non-normal paraffin hydrocarbons into an adsorbate prod-
uct fraction comprising normal paraffins and a raffinate prod-
uct fraction comprising non-normal paraffin hydrocarbons,
which process comprises repeated sequential performance of
the following steps: step one, in which
the feed mixture is passed through a first adsorbent bed,
effluent is withdrawn from the first bed and passed through
a second adsorbent bed,
the eluent flow is passed through a third adsorbent bed,
adsorbate product is withdrawn as an effluent from the third
bed, and
raffinate product is withdrawn as an effluent from the sec-
ond bed;
step two, in which
the feed mixture is passed through the second bed,
the eluent flow is passed through the first bed,
effluent from the fu^t bed is withdrawn and is passed
through the third bed, and
raffinate product is withdrawn as effluent from the second
bed and from the third bed;
step three, in which
the feed mixture is passed through the second bed,
the eluent flow is passed through the fuit bed,
adsorbate product is withdrawn as effluent from the first
bed,
effluent from the second bed is withdrawn and is divided
into a major fraction containing between about SO and 93
volume percent and a minor fraction containing between
about 5 and 50 volume percent,
said minor fraction is passed through the third bed, and
raffinate product is withdrawn as said major fraction of
effluent from the second bed and as effluent from the third
bed;
step four, in which
the feed mixture is passed through the second bed,
effluent is withdrawn from the second bed and passed
through the third bed,
the eluent flow is passed through the first bed,
adsorbate product is withdrawn as effluent from the first
bed, and
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
713
raffinate product is withdrawn as effluent from the third bed,
step five, in which
the feed mixture is passed through the third bed,
the eluent flow is passed through the second bed,
effluent from the second bed is withdrawn and is passed
through the first bed, and
raffinate product is withdrawn as effluent from the first bed
and from the third bed;
step six, in which
the feed mixture is passed through the third bed,
the eluent flow is passed through the second bed,
adsorbate product is withdrawn as effluent from the second
bed,
effluent from the third bed is withdrawn and is divided into
a major fraction containing between about 50 and 95
volume percent and a minor fraction containing between
about 5 and 50 volume percent,
said minor fraction is passed through the first bed, and
raffinate product is withdrawn as said major fraction of
effluent from the third bed and as effluent from the first
bed:
step seven, in which
the feed mixture is passed through the third bed,
effluent is withdrawn from the third bed and passed through
the first bed,
the eluent flow is passed through the second bed,
adsorbate product is withdrawn as effluent from the second
bed, and
raffinate product is withdrawn as effluent from the first bed;
and
step eight, in which
the feed mixture is passed through the first bed,
the eluent flow is passed through the third bed,
effluent from the third bed is withdrawn and is passed
through the second bed, and
raffinate product is withdrawn as effluent from the first bed
and from the second bed; and
step nine, in which
the feed mixture is passed through the first bed,
the eluent flow is passed through the third bed,
adsorbate product is withdrawn as effluent from the third
bed,
effluent from the first bed is withdrawn and is divided into a
major fraction containing between about 50 and 95 vol-
ume percent and a minor fraction containing between
about 5 and 50 volume percent,
said minor fraction is passed through the second bed, and
raffinate product is withdrawn as said major fraction of
effluent from the first bed and as effluent from the second
bed.
recirculating through the adsorber for a predetermined time
a portion of the mixture leaving the adsorber, without
^
/*
"Tr r i -' . ^ P
V/////////.
<A — T— ?■
i— _ h-1- i
y
heating said portion, to effect further desorption of the
adsorber.
4,436,535
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REMOVING SOOT FROM
EXHAUST GASES
Hans Erdmanosdbrfer, Ludwigsburg; Manfred Wagner, Stutt-
gart, and Gerd Weyh, Leoaberg-Eltingen, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, aasignors to Filtcrwerk Mann A Hunmel GmbH,
Ludwigsburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,650
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 21,
1981, 3111228
Int. Ci} BOID 46/04
U.S. a. 55—96 15 Claims
4,436,534
METHOD FOR REDUONG DESORBENT
CONSUMPTION IN RECOVERY SYSTEMS
Bernard R. Scguy, Amcec Corporation, 2625 Butterfleld Rd.,
Oak Brook, lU. 60521
FUed No?. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 440,076
Int. a.3 BOID 53/04
U.S. CI. 55—58 22 Claims
1. In a desorption stage in the operation of a system for
recovering a chemical substance from a carrier medium,
wherein an externally supplied desorbent used in the desorp-
tion of an adsorber in said system is heated prior to its introduc-
tion to said adsorber, the method for reducing consumption of
said preheated desorbent during the desorption of said ad-
sorber comprising the steps of:
initiating a flow of said preheated desorbent through the
adsorber to commence the desorption operation;
reducing the flow of said preheated desorbent entering the
adsorber at a predetermined time during the desorption
operation; and
1. A method of removing soot from the exhaust gases of an
internal combustion engine, particularly of a diesel engine,
comprising the steps of:
filtering the soot particles from the exhaust gas by means of
an exhaust filter which retains and collects the soot;
during operation of the engine, from time to time burning off
the collected soot to a gas which passes through the ex-
haust filter by adding to the soot a dose of a flowable
combustion-inducing substance which lowers the soot
ignition temperature and a supply of combustion air;
monitoring the temperature inside the exhaust filter and
using the presence of an operating temperature above a
predetermined level as a precondition for the initiation of
the bum-off step; and
monitoring the accumulation of soot in the exhaust filter, in
terms of the resultant increase in the flow resistance of the
filter, and using the presence of a predetermined flow
resistance as a trigger condition for the initiation of the
bum-off step.
714
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
4*436,536
DUST COLLECTING FILTER CARTRIDGE AND
ATTACHMENT STRUCTURE FOR SUSPENDING SAME
FROM BAGHOUSE TUBE SHEET
JaoMS W. RoMawM, Woodrldge, Dl^ MdgDor to Flex-Klceii
CorpontkM, GUci«o, m.
FUed Sep. 29, 1M2, Ser. No. 428,324
ImL CL^ BOID 46/52
VS. CL 55—341 R 3 Claims
y
1. A dust filter baghouse comprising;
A. A baghouse tube she^ having a pluraUty of openings
therein;
B. A plurality of small-diameter filter cartridges, each filter
cartridge comprising a cylindrical perforated sleeve, an
annular pleated filter media which encircules said sleeve,
and a cap secured to the upper end of said filter media,
C. Attachment structure suspending each of said filter car-
tridges from said baghouse tube sheet in registry with one
of said openings, said attachment structure comprising:
a. a collar having an annular upper horizontal shoulder
portion, an enlarged rim portion, and an annular portion
depending downwardly from said rim portion;
b. means securing said shoulder portion of said collar to
said cap;
c. an annular double-beaded cuff, said cuff having an
upper bead, a lower bead and an outer annular groove
between said upper and lower beads receiving the edge
of one of said openings in the tube sheet, said upper bead
of said cuff being positioned to rest on and be supported
by said tube sheet, said cuff including spring means so as
to be spring biased in an outward direction toward said
edge of said opening in said tube sheet; thereby to effect
a dust-tight seal between said opening edge and said
cuff;
d. said rim of said collar resting on and be supported by
said cuff,
e. said depending portion of said collar being press fitted
into said cuff to effect a dust-tight seal between said
depending collar portion and said cuff.
4,436,537
MODULAR HYDRIDE CONTAINER
Pierre P. TnHloo, Raaaey, N J., anigiior to MPD Technology
Corporatioa, Wyclraff, N J.
CoativMtioB of Ser. No. 19,658, Mar. 12, 1979, abandoned. This
appiicatioa Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,325
bt CL^ BOID 53/04
VS. CL 55—387 3 nail.
1. A hydrogen containment unit comprising
a. a container for gaseous hydrogen,
b. valved piping means to introduce gaseous hydrogen into
and withdraw gaseous hydrogen from said container,
c. a multiplicity of open-topped metallic trays in said con-
tainer each tray
1. having at least one depressed storage zone for pulver-
ized solid material and
2. being made of a hydrogen resistant material of good
heat conductivity
d. a multiplicity of masses of pulverized solid hydridable
material in said depressed storage zones of said multiplic-
ity of trays said masses of hydridable material being con-
fined solely by said depressed storage zones and being
open to reaction with gaseous hydrogen in said container,
and
e. said multipUcity of trays being stacked unnested in said
container to thereby defme a labyrinth of hydrogen gas
transport passages devoid of pressure drop barriers and
communicating with all of said multiplicity of masses of
hydridable material and a heat transfer network extending
throughout the bulk of the volume of said container.
4,436,538
FILTER FOR CLEANING EXHAUST GASES FROM
DIESEL ENGINE
Manhiro Tonita, and Shigem TakagI, both of A^Jo, Japan,
aMignon to Nippon Soken, lac, Nishio, Japan
Filed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,348
Claims priority, appiicatioa Japan, Apr. 22, 1981, 5641824;
Apr. 24, 1981, 56-62787; Apr. 28, 1981, 5644432
lot a.3 BOID 39/20
VS. a. 55—482 7 Claims
1. A filter for collecting carbon particulates in the exhaust
gases emitted from a diesel engine, comprising:
an exhaust gas cleaning portion provided with a large num-
ber of interconnected fine pores through which exhaust
gases flow; said exhaust gas cleaning portion being pro-
vided with an exhaust gas inlet surface and an exhaust gas
outlet surface; and
an outer wall portion which is formed around the outer
peripheral surface of said cleaning portion so as to be
integral therewith, except for said exhaust gas inlet surface
and said exhaust gas outlet surface of said cleaning por-
tion;
said exhaust gas cleaning portion being formed of porous
ceramic, the whole of which has uniform bulk density;
said outer wall portion being formed of porous ceramic, the
bulk density of said outer wall portion increasing from the
inner periphery thereof toward the outer periphery
thereof so that the inner periphery of said outer waU
portion has a bulk density slightly larger than that of the
outer periphery of said cleaning portion while the outer
periphery of said outer wall portion has such a high bulk
density that the exhaust gases do not flow therethrough.
715
4,436,539
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AIR-CONDITIONING
BY MEANS OF A HYDROGEN HEAT PUMP
ModM Ron; Matrei Kldncr, and Uri Naron, aU of Haifk, Israel,
aarignort to Technion Research and De?elopment Foundation
Ltd., Haifk, Israel
FUed Oct 6, 1981, Ser. No. 309,225
Int. a.i F25B 13/00
VS. a. 62—4 10 aains
TO AMKNT
C
ir
wvaa/
Hl.
VAA/vyv,
n
/WAA/\
W
/WNAA
TO AMBIENT
^f
c
1. A method of air-conditioning a vehicle using a hydrogen-
based chemical heat pump including a dual metal hydride
system of two different hydrides capable of passing hydrogen
therebetween, and wherein one of the hydrides is a low-tem-
perature hydride and the other a high-temperature hydride,
said method comprising
providing said low temperature hydride in the form of a
porous metal compact; •
heating with waste heat from said vehicle high-temperature
hydride having hydrogen absorbed therein to cause de-
sorption of said hydrogen from said high-temperature
hydride and flow to said low-temperature hydride;
absorbing said hydrogen by said low-temperature hydride
while cooling said low-temperature hydride by heat ex-
change with the ambient atmosphere;
stopping the flow of waste heat to said high-temperature
hydride upon completion of desorption; and
cooling said high-temperature hydride by heat exchange
with the ambient atmosphere to provide said high-temper-
ature hydride with a sufficiently low-temperature at
which it is capable of absorbing hydrogen from said low-
temperature hydride; and
further cooling said cooled low-temperature hydride con-
taining said hydrogen absorbed therein by desorbing hy-
drogen therefrom and then heating at a high heat transfer
rate said cooled low-temperature hydride by heat ex-
change with the environment being air-conditioned and
further desorbing said hydrogen from said low-tempera-
ture hydride and passing said hydrogen to said cooled
high-temperature hydride where said hydrogen is ab-
sorbed thereby.
3. An air-conditioning unit for a vehicle based on a hydrogen
heat pump, comprising:
a high-temperature hydride tank and a low temperature
hydride tank, a fixed quantity of hydrogen disposed
within at least one of said tanks, means for passing said
hydrogen between said tanks, first heat exchange means
between a source of waste heat from said vehicle at a
high-temperature and said high-temperature hydride tank,
second heat exchange means between ambient and said
high-temperature hydride tank, third heat exchange
means between ambient and said low-temperature hydride
tank, fourth heat exchange means between a space to be
cooled and said low-temperature hydride tank, and
control means to control the operation of all said heat ex-
change means in sequence to effect heating of said high-
temperature hydrides tank, desorption of hydrogen there-
from and absorption in said low-temperature hydride
tank, followed by desorption of hydrogen from the low-
temperature hydride tank, cooling of said space to be
cooled and absorption of hydrogen in said high-tempera-
ture hydride tank;
said high-temperature hydride tank and said low-tempera-
ture hydride tank respectively containing therein a high-
temperature metal hydride and a low-temperature metal
hydride in the form of low-temperature porous metal
hydride compacu, said hydrides being so selected that the
desorption preuure of said high-temperature metal hy-
dride is higher than the absorption pressure of said low-
temperature hydride at temperatures prevailing in said
tanks during desorption from said high-temperature hy-
dride tank, and the desorption preuure of said low-tem-
perature metal hydride is higher than the absorption pres-
sure of said high-temperature metal hydride at tempera-
tures prevailing in said tanks during desorption from said
low-pressure hydride tank.
4,436,540
LOW PRESSURE SEPARATION FOR UGHT
HYDROCARBON RECOVERY
Edward J. Dowd, deceased, late of Sommit, N J. (by Dorothy N.
Dowd, legil representetiTc), and Joseph F. Carpeacy, Monis-
town, N J., assignors to Exxon Research A Engineering Co.,
Florban Park, N J.
FUed Oct 15, 1982, Ser. No. 434,584
Int a.3 F25J 3/Oi
VS. a. 62—30 14 Claims
■»*■.*«•• «<«1M«MU lii,^ ^3i*
10. A process for separating a feed gaseous mixture contain-
ing light olefinic constituents and comprising Cs-t-'s down to
methane and hydrogen, into fractions, which comprises in
combination the steps of:
(a) compressing the feed gu to a compressor discharge
pressure in the range of SO to 100 psia prior to passing it to
a recovery operation;
(b) cooling the compreued feed gas in a first refrigeration
zone wherein it is passed in countercurrent contact with a
C4 stream taken from a depropanizer, to condense a
C4-Cs^ concentrate and passing tlie same to a debuu-
nizer in which it is fractionated with removal of a liquid
Ci+ fraction;
(c) cooling the residual gas from said first zone in a second
refrigeration zone wherein it is passed in countercurrent
contact with a C3 stream taken from a deethanizer, to
condense a C3-C4 concentrate, pumping the same to a
higher preuure and passing the same to the depropanizer
in which it is fractionated in the presence of distUUte from
the debutanizer;
(d) cooling the residual gas from said second zone in a third
refrigeration zone wherein it is passed in countercurrent
contact with a Cj stream taken from a demethanizer, to
condense a C2-C3 concentrate, pumping the same to a
higher preuure and passing the same to the deethanizer in
which it is fractionated in the presence of distillate from
the depropanizer;
(e) cooling the residual gas from said third zone in a fourth
refrigeration zone wherein it is passed in countercurrent
contact with a predominantly methane stream taken from
the demethanizer, to condense a C1-C2 concentrate and
separating tail gas from said fourth zone; and
716
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
(f) pumping the condensed portion from said fourth zone to
a higher pressure, passing it into the demethanizer and
fractionating the same in the presence of distillate from the
deethanizer to obtain a purified C2 bottoms fraction and a
predominantly methane vapor fraction; to obtain a saving
in energy as compared with carrying out said process
employing a compressor discharge pressure above said
range.
4,436^1
METHOD FOR PRODUCTION OF MINERAL HBERS
Michael T. Pellegrin; Terry J. Haima, both of Newark, and
Thomas K. Thompaon, Gfanyille, ail of Ohio, asaignors to
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation, Toledo, Ohio
Contiauation of Ser. No. 141,872, Apr. 21, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,177
Int. aJ C03B 37/085
VS. a. 65—2 1 Claim
acid, an aqueous solution of an allcali metal salt, a ketone
and an alcohol,
leaching a portion of the water-soluble compound in the
form of ions from the gelled body to provide a concentra-
tion gradient of the water-soluble compound in the gelled
body such that the concentration of the water-soluble
compound decreases radially outwardly from the central
part of the gelled body,
drying the gelled body in a predetermined atmosphere,
decomposing the water-soluble compound,
heating and firing the gelled body at a temperature of 650* to
900* C, and
sintering the gelled body at a temperature of 900* to 1450* C.
to collapse micropores in the gelled body and form a
transparent glass.
4,436,543
NECK RING MOLD APPARATUS FOR GLASS BOTTLE
MANUFACTURE
Harold B. Kasten, 5312 Shannon, Codtny, HI. 62035
FUed Jan. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 384,772
Int a.3 C03B 9/325. 9/46
\}&. a. 65-172 6 Claimi
1. In a method of making glass fibers from a body of molten
glass confined in a bushing, the steps of:
(a) flowing molten glass from the body through an orifice
plate having a plurality of orifices;
(b) attenuating a fiber at each of said orifices;
(c) interposing a flow resistance in the path of flow of said
molten glass to said plate, the ratio of resistance of flow of
the molten glass through the resistance to the resistance of
flow of molten glass through said plate being from about
O.S to about 1.0; and
(d) heating the molten glass between said resistance and said
plate by current supplied to both the resistance and the
orifice plate;
the performance of steps (c) and (d) reducing the pressure of
the molten glass at the plate by a factor of from 30 to S0% of
the head pressure of the molten glass body above the plate and
decreasing the bead fall time from an orifice at which fiber
attenuation has been interrupted.
4,436,542
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF AN OPTICAL
GLASS ARTICLE
Shiro Kurocaki, Osaka, Japan, assignor to Sumitomo Electric
Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,896
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 16, 1980, 55-127116;
Not. 27, 1980, 55-167820
iBt CL^ C03B 19/06
U.S. a. 65—18.1 22 Claims
1. A process for the production of an optical glass article,
which comprises:
preparing an aqueous solution containing silicic acid or
ammonium silicate,
dissolving in the aqueous solution a water-soluble compound
selected from the group consisting of thallium nitrate,
cesium nitrate and rubidium nitrate,
neutralizing the resulting aqueous solution,
reacting the components of the aqueous solution at a temper-
ature of from the freezing point to the boiling point of the
aqueous solution in a time sufficient to polymerize silica
and form an aggregated porous gelled body,
immersing the gelled body in a leaching Uquor selected from
the group consisting of water, an aqueous solution of an
1. For molding the necks of glass bottles to a desired external
configuration,
neck ring mold apparatus comprising:
A. a pair of neck ring mold halves having vertical parting
plane surfaces extending to bottom surfaces, the said
mold halves when mounted with their parting plane
surfaces together forming an annulus about a k>wer well
of circular cross-section and having bottom portioas,
measured from the lowermost end of said well, whoae
thickness substantially equals the depth of such desired
external configuration, the bottom surface of each mold
half having formed therein a recess extending therefrom
up to the lowermost level of said well, said reccM hav-
ing a pair of side walls spaced from each other at a
distance substantially equal to the diameter of said well
at its lowermost level, said recess further having a third
wall joining said pair of side walls which third wall is
parallel to the parting plane at a spacing therefrom
greater than the radius of said well at its said lowermost
level; and assembled therewith
B. a pair of repUceable mold inserts each insert being
formed of sintered metal, one secured in each said re-
cess and filling same from the lowermost level of said
well to the mold half bottom surfaces, each insert ex-
tending from said third wall of the recess to the parting
plane and presenting, substantially symmetrically
thereto, half-round cavity surfaces whose radius is
smaller than that of said well, which cavity surfaces are
configured complementary to such desired external
configuration for the neck of such glass bottles.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
717
4,436,544
ALUMINUM BRONZE GLASSMAKING MOLDS
Thonus W. McCauiland, Brockway, Pa., assignor to Brockway.
Inc. (NY), Brockway, Pa.
FUed Not. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 442,006
Int. Q\? C03B 11/00
U.S. a. 65—374.12 24 Qaima
1. A glassmaking mold part adapted for use in a glassware
forming machine, which comprises a mold member shaped
from an aluminum bronze alloy composition essentially con-
sisting of (i) less than about 0.5% by weight manganese, (ii)
from about 3.5 to about 4.5% by weight of nickel, (ill) from
about 3.5 to about 4.5% by weight of iron, (iv) from about 10.5
to about 11.5% by weight aluminum, with (v) the balance
copper, and (vi) said composition being subsuntially devoid of
both zinc and lead.
4 436 545
PROCESS HAVING THE TWO-FOLD RESULT OF THE
DISPOSAL OF WASTE PICKLE LIQUOR AND THE
PRODUCTION OF FERTILIZER
Donald W. Lyons, Jr., Fort Scott, Kans., and ETerette L. Wyatt,
Carthage, Mo., auignors to Leggett A Piatt, Incorporated,
Carthage, Mo.
Filed Jul. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 403,424
Int. C1.3 C05C 9/00
U.S. a. 71—25 11 aaims
1. A process for the disposal of waste pickle liquor from a
ferrous metal treating operation and the production of a useful
fertilizer comprising mixing urea in waste sulfuric acid pickle
liquor at a temperature sufficient to avoid substantial formation
of iron precipitate whereby a liquid fertilizer having an iron
content of at least about 3% by weight is produced comprising
a stable urea-iron sulfate combination which does not salt out
at a temperature of 20* C.
4436 546
FERTILIZER MATERIAL FROM APATITE
Fredrik P. Glasser, Buckibum, Scotland, and Richard P. Guna-
wardane, Kandy, Sri Lanka, assignors to National Research
DeTelopment Corporation, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 261,162, filed as PCT GB80/00139,
Sep. 8, 1980, pubUshed as WO81/00711, Mar. 19, 1981,
§ 102(e) date Apr. 30, 1981, Pat. No. 4,363,650. ThU applica-
tion Jul. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 406,713
Gainu priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Sep. 7, 1979,
7931090
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 14,
1999, has been discUdmed.
Int. a.3 C05B 13/00
U.S.a71-36 6aaims
whereby there is ensured the presence of sufficient siliceous
material to keep the free-lime content of the fertilizer material
below 2 weight % and to inhibit formation of tetracalcium
phosphate.
4,436,547
PLANT TECHNIQUE
Michael J. Sampson, Chichester, England, assignor to Staart
Enterprises Ltd., London, England
per No. PCr/GB79/00050, § 371 Date Not. 28, 1979, § 102(e)
Date Oct 27, 1979, PCT Pub. No. WO79/00838, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 18, 1979
PCT FUed Mar. 22, 1979, Ser. No. 85,918
Int. a.5 AOIN 43/48, 43/40, 33/02
U.S. a. 71—76 8 Claims
1. A method of applying an agricultural chemical compris-
ing the steps of
(A) applying an effective amount of an agricutural chemical
to a locus to regulate the growth of plants, said agricul-
tural chemical being selected from the group consisting of
quaternary ammonium compounds of the formula
R— N(CH3)3— Y in which Y is a non-phytotoxic anion
and R is an aliphatic radical of from 1 to 8 carbon atoms
containing a non-ionizing nucleophilic group or atom;
and
(B) applying an effective amount of additive to modify the
metabolism of plants to the same locus as said agricultural
chemical not more than 15 days earlier than or more than
15 days later than the application of said agricultural
chemical, said additive being vitamins or coenzymes se-
lected from the group consisting of thiamine, riboflavin,
pyridoxins pyridoxamine, pyridoxal, nicotinamide, folic
acid, or the precursors of said vitamins or coenzymes.
4436 548
PLANT GROWTH REGULATING a-AZOLYLGLYCOLS
Bemd Zeeh, Ludwigshafen; Norbcrt Gtietz, Worms; Eberhard
Ammermann, Ludwigshafen, and Johann Jung, Limburgerbof,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Aktiengesell-
schaft. Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,276
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 18,
1980, 3047726
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/50 43/64: C07D 249/08. 233/60
U.S. a. 71—76 1 Qaim
1. A process for reducing plant height and/or lateral plant
branching which comprises: applying to the plants to be acted
upon or to their seeds or to their habitat an effective amount of
a composition comprising a liquid or solid carrier and a com-
pound I of the formula
R>
I
R'— O— CH— C— OH
A3
1. A method of making a feriilizer material from hard min-
eral apatite rich in chlorine and/or fluorine, by roasting apatite
at from about 880* C. to about 950* C. as a final temperature
with a carbonate and/or aluminosilicate of an alkali metal in an
amount such that the molar ratio of apatite (as P203):alkali
metal :siliceous material (as SiO:) is l:at least 3:(0.75-1.0)
where R' is alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms. R2 is alkyl of 1 to 6
carbon atoms or unsubstituted or halogen substituted phenyl or
biphenyl, R^ is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms or
alkenyl or alkynyl of 2 to 6 carbon atoms or unsubstituted or
halogen substituted benzyl and X is CH or N, and their plant-
tolerated salts.
718
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
M36,549
THIADIAZINE HERBICTOES
I D. TUbaolt, IndiaBapolis, ImL, avignor to Eli Lilly aad
Company, lodianapoUs, IjmL
Filed Oct 28, 1982, Ser. No. 437,380
iBt a.J AOIN 43/88: C07D 285/16
MS. CL 71—90 15 n.i««
1. A compound of the formula
N — N
-NH-^ ^a-Ri
4,436,550
PROCESS FOR RECOVERY OF ALUMINUM FROM
CARBONACEOUS WASTE PRODUCTS
Laazlo Kapolyi, Budapest, Hungary, aasignor to Tatabanyai
SienlMuiyak, Tatabanya, Hungary
Continuation of Ser. No. 15,970, Feb. 28, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 819,811, Jul. 28, 1977,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 755,405,
Dec. 29, 1976, abandoned. This appUcation Jan. 20, 1982, Ser.
No. 340,996
Int CL^ C22B 21/02
U.S. a 75—10 R 4 Claims
1. A process for producing energy and products useful in the
manufacture of metals, cement and artificial stone which com-
prises the steps of:
(a), combusting a carbonaceous waste material containing
silica and alumina; and having a heat of combustion of
from about 2,000 kcalAg to about 3,500 kcalAg to form
thermal energy and a slag containing silica and alumina;
(b). adjusting the composition of said slag by adding a min-
eral additive including a calcium containing material to
said slag to obtain upon sintering calcium silicate and
calcium aluminate;
(c). additionally adding an amount of under 1% of ferrosili-
con alloy to the adjusted slag to promote disintegration
upon sintering and cooling;
(d). sintering and cooling the adjusted slag of step (c) to
obtain a disintegrated material;
(e). separating said disintegrated material and recovering a
separated material and a first residue remaining useful for
forming artificial stone;
(0- treating said separated material with an aqueous solution
to extract aluminum values and leaving a second residue
useful for forming cement;
(g). treating said aluminum values to obtain alumina;
(h). treating said alumina to obtain aluminum.
4)496,951
PROCESS FOR MAKING STEEL FROM
DIRECT-REDUCED IRON
TakasU Mori, NUhama, Japmi, assignor to Somitomo HetTy
Indostriea, Ltd^ Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct 15, 1982, Ser. No. 434,455
Claims priority, appUcatioa Japmi, Oct 26, 1981, 56-171103;
Jan. 26, 1982, 57-11680
Irt. CL^ C21C 5/28, 5/52
UjS. CL 75—12 17 rirfi.
1. In a process for manufacturing steel in which an iron
oxide-containing starting material is heated and reduced with a
solid, carbon-containing, reducing agent in a reducing furnace
to form pellets of direct-reduced metallic iron mixed with char,
and then said direct-reduced metallic iron is smelted in a sepa-
rate smelting furnace to form said steel, the improvement
which comprises: discharging said pelleu of direct-reduced
metallic iron mixed with char from the outlet of said reducing
furnace into a hood which provides a substantially air-tight
enclosure around said reducing furnace outlet, then feeding
said pellets mixed with an amount of char sufTicient to form pig
wherein:
each Rl is independently methyl or ethyl;
R2 is Ci-Cio alkyl, Cs-Cg cycloalkyl or C1-C4 alkyl substi-
tuted Cs-Cgcycloalkyl; and the agronomically-acceptable
salts thereof
„\
f
10-
^
W-'-\
— s
f
N
1y
v
iron when said char is melted with said pellets from said hood
into a heating furnace while said pellets remain at substantially
the same high temperature that they had when they were
dischaged from said reducing furnace and while said pellets are
protected from substantial oxidation caused by contact with
the ambient air, then melting said peUets mixed with char in
said heating furnace to form molten pig iron^ then discharging
said molten pig iron from said heating furnace into a ladle, and
then discharging said molten pig iron from said ladle into said
smelting furnace.
4,436,552
METHOD OF FURNACE OPERATION WITH HIGH
PELLET BURDENS
Melvin C. Chang, Charlotte, N.C., and John L. Howell, North
Huntingdon, Pa., aasignors to United States Steel Corpora-
tion, Pittaburgh, Pa.
Filed Ang. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,422
Int a? C21B 5/00
U.S. a. 75—41 24 Claims
n ^' \
1. In the method of producing metal in a shaft furnace con-
taining one or more substantially horizontal layers of coke and
one or more separate substantially horizontal layers of ore
i^ve and/or below the coke layers, said layers being posi-
tioned across the furnace cross section, and wherein greater
than about 80 percent of the ore therein is present in the form
of pellets, the improvement comprising separating fine ore
material from said pellets, and then adding the separated fine
ore material on a controlled basis to said furnace adjacent to
the walls of said furnace to reduce the gas flow adjacent said
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
719
walls and thereby protect the furnace lining, and wherein
subsequent to separating said fine ore material from said pelleu
and prior to adding said fme ore material to said furnace, the
ultrafine fraction of said ore materia] which would present
material handling problems when wet or be blown out of the
furnace by the hot furnace gases is either (1) separated from
said fine material which is added to said furnace, or (2) micro-
pelletized prior to addition to said furnace in order to provide
a material having suitable properties for flowing into said
furnace.
from 7S-100 Kgf/mm^ and having a low temperature durabil-
ity of over 28 kg/mm^ at -90* C.
4,436,553
PROCESS TO PRODUCE LOW HYDROGEN STEEL
Rockne J. Andreini, Bellevue, Wash.; Stewart K. Mehlman,
Tarrytown, N.Y.; Ronald J. Sellnes, Yorktown Heights, N.Y.,
and Balkishan Agrawal, Ossining, N.Y., auignors to Union
Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,440
Int a.' C21C 7/00
MS. a. 75—52 10 Qaims
1. A process for the production of steel having a hydrogen
content of less than about 2 ppm, comprising:
charging a steel melt into a refining vessel equipped with at
least one submerged tuyere, making alloying and slag-
forming additions to the melt, decarburizing the melt by
injecting a gas mixture comprising oxygen and a dilution
gas into the melt through said tuyere(8); following decar-
burization, injecting sparging gas into the melt through
said tuyere(s), said tuyere(s) being gas cooled during at
least a portion of the production process, characterized by
the steps comprising, in combination:
(1) providing a substantially dry refining vessel into which
the melt is charged,
(2) providing substantially dry cooling gas to the tuyere(s),
(3) substantially completing all of the slag-forming additions
to the melt prior to the start of decarburization,
(4) fluxing the slag forming additions prior to the start of
decarburization,
(5) substantially completing the addition of all those ele-
ments to the melt which are reducable by silicon prior to
the start of decarburization,
(6) decarburizing the melt to essentially its aim carbon con-
tent by injecting into the melt through said tuyere(s), a gas
mixture of oxygen and a dilution gas for a time sufTicient
to remove at least 0.2 weight percent carbon from the melt
and maintaining an off-gas flow rate during said decarburi-
zation sufficient to substantially prevent air from infiltrat-
ing into said vessel, and
(7) maintaining the ofT-gas flow rate during any reduction
and fmishing steps at a rate sufficient to substantially
prevent air from infiltrating into said vessel by injecting
sparging gas into the melt through said tuyere(s) in an
amount at least equal to 100 cubic feet per ton of melt.
4|496,994
HIGH STRENGTH AND HIGH TOUGHNESS WELDING
MATERIAL
Takaahi Onae; Kiiabnroo Tanaka; Masahiro Aoki; FomitoaU
Hirayama, and Snsnmu Iiaki, all of Hiroshima, Japan, aasign-
ors to Mitaubiahi Jokogyo if«hii«ii«ir« Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct 29, 1982, Ser. No. 437,886
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Not. 18, 1981, 56-183722
Int a^ C22C i8/44
\}&. a 75—128 T 1 Claim
1. A high strength and high toughness steel welding material
which has been modified by subjecting a welding portion
welded with said welding material to quenching and annealing
said welding material consisting essentially of: C: 0.03-0.13%,
Si: 0.23-0.70%. Mn: 0.60-1.80%. Cu: an efTective amount up to
0.20%, Ni: 4.5-11.0%. Cr: 0.20-1.20%. Mo: 0.20-0.60%. Ti:
0.03-0.12%, and the balance being substantially iron and
wherein the Cr-t-Mo is from 0.40% to 0.030 X(Ni%)2 by
weight said welding matorial having a yield strength ranging
4,436,555
MAGNESIUM PHOSPHATE GLASS CEMENTS WITH
CERAMIC-TYPE PROPERTIES
Toshiftami Sugana, Mastic Beach, and Lawrence E. Kukacka,
Port Jefferson, both of N.Y., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the United Stotcs Department of
Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 422,510
Int. a.} C04B 9/04
U.S. a. 106—85 7 Oaims
1. A method of making a fast-setting magnesium glass ce-
mentitious material comprising the steps of:
heating a first magnesium oxide powder to a temperature of
about 900* C, said first magnesium oxide powder having
a surface area in the range of 18-20 square meters per
gram;
heating a second magnesium oxide powder to a temperature
greater than 1300* C, said second magnesium oxide pow-
der having a surface area in the range of 1-3 square meters
per gram;
mixing said first and second magnesium oxide powders with
a aggregate; and
mixing an aqueous ammonium polyphosphate solution with
the mixture of said aggregate and said first and second
magnesium oxide powders in forming said fast-setting
magnesium glass cementitious material.
4,436,556
PROCESS FOR CONSOUDATING SOIL AND FROST
PROTECnON LAYERS PRODUCED THEREBY
Friedrich Kadelka, Bad Segeberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Chemische Fabrik Grunau GmbH, lUertissen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,678
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 29,
1980, 3028670
Int a.3 O04B 7/55
U.S. a. 106—90 25 Claims
1. In a process for the consolidation of soil in which moisture
containing soil, rubbish or a mixture of soil and rubbish is
mixed with cement and then compressed to form the consoli-
dated soil the improvement comprising adding as the sole
additive a fluidizing agent to the composition to be consoli-
dated, said fluidizing agent being the amount of fluidizing
agent based on the dry material being 2.3 to 3%, based on the
cement content of the composition.
4,436,557
MODIFIED LASER-ANNEAUNG PROCESS FOR
IMPROVING THE QUALITY OF ELECTRICAL P-N
JUNCnONS AND DEVICES
Richard F. Wood, Oak Ridga, and Rosa T. Young, Farragut
both of Tenn., assizors to The United States of AoMrica as
represented by the United States Department of Energy,
WasUngton, D.C
FUed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 349,959
Int CLJ HOIL 21/265. 21/24
UJS. CL 148— IJ 11 Claims
1. In a process for producing a light-responsive electrical-
junction device, said proceu including the steps of providing a
body of crystalline semiconductor material having a doped
surface layer, irradiating said layer with at leut one laser pulse
to effect melting of the same, permitting recrystallization of the
material so melted, and providing the resulting body with
electrical contacts, the method of increasing the open-circuit-
volUge parameter for said device, comprising:
heating said body to a selected temperature and conducting
said irradiating operation while said body is so heated to
720
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
effect an increase in said parameter, said temperature
being sufficient to effect a reduction in the rate of said
^
''•CS»V.(II0"c>~'l ,. Si
KSCn UIIC<LI0IC,O2 J/cm'l IT
titnnoT sutsTurt TtM^curuac)
\ ^ ^. »
AS lim.ANTEO
- — 15-C
lOO'C
4oo»e
•00-C
\\
0 2 0)
OCPTH lyal
gallium, manganese, nickel, palladium, silicon and vana-
dium.
11. A process according to claim 1, wherein
nickel and copper are melted to prepare said metallic mate-
rial having the surface portion of a copper-nickel alloy,
and said metallic material is immersed in a molten salt bath
containing boron to form fine nickel boride particles uni-
formly dispersed in said surface portion.
recrystallization but insufficient to effect substantial mi-
gration of impurities within said body.
4,436,558
ELECTROCHEMICAL PHOTOVOLTAIC CELL HAVING
TERNARY ALLOY nLM
Michael A. Russak, Farmingdale, N.Y., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the United States Depart-
ment of Energy, Washington, D.C
Division of Ser. No. 216,706, Dec. 15, 1980, abandoned. This
application Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,376
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/00
U.S. a. 148-1.5 2 Claims
SOCAR
RADIATION
LISMT PASSING CONDUCTOR 1 1
SCMI- CONDUCTOR CLECTROOC l2
'elec
ELECTROCC 15
TT
1. A method for fabricating a thin film compound semicon-
ductor electrode of CdSei -xTe„ where O^x^ 1, for an elec-
trochemical photovoltaic cell comprising the steps:
evacuating a chamber;
exposing a light passing conducting substrate to three heated
sources respectively including the elements Cd, Se, and
Te; wherein the substrate is maintained at a temperature of
about 90° C;
simultaneously depositing the elements on the substrate at
predetermined rates; and
heat treating the electrode.
4436 559
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING BORIDE
DISPERSION COPPER ALLOYS
Hironori FHJita, and Tohru And, both of Aichi, Japan, assignors
to Kabnshiki Kaisha Toyota Chuo Kenkyusho, Japan
FUed Jun. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,453
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 12, 1981, 56-91096
Int. a? C23F 7/00
U.S. a. 148-6 16 Claims
1> A process for manufacturing a boride dispersed copper
alloy, which comprises:
preparing a metallic material having a surface portion com-
prising a copper alloy containing at least one metal se-
lected from the group consisting of beryllium, gallium,
manganese, nickel, palladium, silicon and vanadium, and
copper or an alloy thereof; and
diffusing boron into said metallic material to form in said
surface portion thereof fine particles of a boride of at least
one metal selected from the group consisting of beryllium,
4,436,560
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING BORIDE
DISPERSION COPPER ALLOYS
Hironori Fujita; Tohru Aral, and Jiro Mizuno, Osami Kasuya;
Koichi Ono, Tashid Suzuki, all of Aichi, Japan, assignors to
Kabushiki Kaisha ToyoU Chuo Kenkyusho and Kabushiki
Kaisha Tokai Rika Denki Seisakusho, all of Japan
Filed Jun. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,455
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 25, 1982, 57-9731
Int. a.3 C23F 7/00
U.S. a. 148—6 15 Claims
I. A process for manufacturing a boride dispersed copper
alloy, which comprises:
preparing a metallic material having a surface portion com-
prising an alloy or fine particles of at least one element
selected from the group consisting of aluminum (Al),
arsenic (As), cadmium (Cd), cobalt (Co), chromium (Cr),
iron (Fe), magnesium (Mg), molybdenum (Mo), niobium
(Nb), platinum (Ft), tantalum (Ta), tungsten (W) and
zirconium (Zr), and copper or an alloy thereof; and
diffusing boron into said metallic material to form in said
surface portion thereof fine particles of a boride of at least
one element selected from the group consisting of Al, As,
Cd, Co, Cr, Fe, Mg, Mo, Nb, Pt, Ta, W and Zr.
II. A process according to claim 1, wherein chromium and
copper are melted to prepare said metallic material having the
surface portion of a copper-chromium alloy, and said metallic
material is immersed in a molten salt bath containing boron to
form fine CrB2 particles uniformly dispersed in said surface
portion.
4 436 561
PRESS-FORMABLE HIGH STRENGTH DUAL PHASE
STRUCTURE COLD ROLLED STEEL SHEET AND
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG THE SAME
Nobuyuki Takahashi; Yoshikuni Furuno, both of Kitakyushu,
and Masaaki Fukunaga, Onga, all of Japan, assignors to
Nippon Steel Corporation, Japan
FUed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 281^6
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 5, 1980, 55-91998
Int a.3 C21D 8/04
U.S. a. 148-12 F 5 Claims
1. A process for producing a press-formable. high-strength.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
721
dual phase structure cold rolled steel sheet having a tensile
strength of 40-50 kg/mm^ which comprises hot rolling, at a
finishmg temperature higher than the Ars transformation
pomt, a steel slab consisting of C: 0.02-0.20%, Si: less than
0.1%, Mn: 1.2-2.0%, acid-soluble Al: 0.005-0.100%, B: more
than 0.0003% and less than 0.0050% in terms of
B%-0.7xN% in solid solution on the condition that B/C is
more than 0.03, N: less than 0.0060%, the balance being iron
and incidental impurities; cooling the hot strip at a rate of 10*
to 150* C./sec, coiling the strip at a temperature lower than
730* C, pickling and cold rolling the coil, soaking the cold
rolled strip at an annealing temperature between the Aci trans-
formation point and 800* C, and cooling the strip at a rate of
more than 3' C./sec.
4436 564
REINFORCEMENT PRODUCT FOR USE IN CEMENT
BOARDS AND A METHOD OF MANUFACTURING SAID
PRODUCT AND BOARDS
Ian D. Slack, Bradford; David G. Ellis, Leeds, and Colin Firth,
BrMlford, aU of England, assignors to Plasticiscrs Limited.
Yorkshire, Enghmd
FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,377
Qaims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Aug. 2, 1980,
Int. a.i B32B 3/18. 5/10. 5/12. 13/02
U.S. a. 156-42 14 Claims
4 436 562
BASIC BONDED FLUXES FOR SUBMERGED ARC
WELDING HAVING AN EXCELLENT REMOVABILITY
OF SLAG AT A NARROW GROOVE
Masaaki Tokuhisa, and Yukio Hirai, both of Chiba, Japan,
assignors to Kawasaki Steel Corporation, Kobe, Japan
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,888
Oaims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 5, 1981, 56-85614
Int. a.3 B23K 35/34
U.S. a. 148-24 2aaims
-}
La aJia fi-L
|ru_a_s aJ-s aJia.
Ii I a o o I o ( o oT
^
ra
2
1. In basic bonded fluxes for submerged arc welding at a
narrow groove consisting of a mixture of a slag forming com-
position, a gas forming composition and metal powders, the
improvement comprising the slag forming composition con-
sisting mainly of 5-20% by weight of BaO, not more than 10%
by weight of CaO, 20 to 50% by weight of MgO, 6-25% by
weight of Si02, 3-15% by weight of AI2 Oz and 7-18% by
weight of CaF^, a value of basicity shown by a ratio of a basic
component and an acidic component being 2.3 to 4.5, and the
gas forming composition consisting of BaCOs, CaCOj and
MgCOs, a total amount of which is 10-60% by weight,
whereby a removabUity of slag at a narrow groove weld is
improved.
4,436,563
FLUX FOR OVERLAY WELDING
Oiunu Tanaka, Fi^isawa; Kazuhiro Takeba, Yamato; Hiroshi
Saita, Fi^isawa; Yukinobu Matsushita, Yokohama, and Koji
Koyabu, Kamakura, aU of Japan, assignors to KabushUd
Kaisha Kobe SeUco Sho, Kobe, Japan
FUed Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,586
Claims priority, appUcation Japui, Jul. 27, 1981, 56-118241
Int Q\? B23K 35/34
U.S. a. 148—26 3 Oaims
2. A flux as claimed in plaim 1, wherein the ratio of MgO/Si-
O2S2.O.
1. A reinforcement product for use in cement boards, com-
prising cross layered webs of plastic fibre with a preponder-
ance of fibres laid in a trans-axial direction, and continuous
filaments or fibrillated tapes located between the layers to
impart a high degree of strength in the linear direction, the
cross-laid web and the filamenu or tapes being compacted
together to form a reinforcement product which can be rolled
up and handled for further processing on cement board form-
ing machines, the webs of plastic being formed from a sheet or
film of plastics material which has been monoaxially orientated
in the linear direction, fibrillated to form a cohesive fibre mass,
cut into desired lengths, carded to break up the film into a
coarse fibre mass, and stripped from the carding machine to
form a continuous web of fibres.
4. A method of manufacturing a reinforcement product for
use in cement boards, a comprising the steps of extruding a
sheet or film from a plastics material, monoaxially orientating
the said sheet in the linear direction fibrillating the orientated
sheet to form a cohesive fibre mass, cutting the fibrillated film
into desired lengths, carding the cut lengths of fibrillated film
on a carding machine, to break up the fibrillated film into a
coarse fibrous mass, and stripping the fibrous mass from the
carding machine to form a continuous coarse fibrous web,
cross layering the web of fibres to ensure an even thickness
with a preponderance of the fibres being laid in a transaxial
direction, introducing continuous filaments or fibrillated upes
between the layers to impart a high degree of strength in the
linear direction, and compacting the cross-laid web of fibres
together with said continuous filaments or fibrillated tapes, to
give cohesion between the fibres in the web and produce a web
which can be roUed up and handled for further processing on
cement board forming machines.
11. A method of manufacturing a cement board using a
reinforcement product constructed by the method according
to claim 5 wherein a cement slurry is impregnated into the
reinforcement product, excess moisture is subsequently re-
moved, and the board is then allowed to set.
722
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,565
METHOD OF MAKING A HEATING DEVICE FOR
UTILIZING TH£,SKIN EFFECT OF ALTERNATING
CURRENT
Harold B. Weitzel, StrongiTiUc and Darid G. Pannan, Medina,
both of Ohio, aaaignon to Ricwil, Incorporated, Brecksfille,
Ohio
FUed Oct 22, 1961, Ser. No. 313,937
Int CLJ HOIR 5/02; B21F 15/02
MS. a. 156-49 8 Claims
conductor joint and the first position of the one cable end;
and,
m. wrapping insulating material across said joint and heat
fusing said material to form another layer of substantially
void free insulation at least as thick as the outer insulation
jacket of said cables, extending between the first positions
of the joined cable ends.
4,436,566
RE*ENTERABLE CLOSURE
Dexter C. Tight, Jr^ Palo Alto, Calif., assignor to Raycben
Corporation, Menlo Park, CUlf.
Filed Jnn. IS, 1982, Ser. No. 388,791
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jon. 15, 1981.
8118362
Int a.J HOIB 13/06; H02G 13/06; B32B 3/02
U.S. a. 156-56 17 oalmg
1. In a heating system utilizing the skin effect of alternating
current in which a power cable comprising a primary conduc-
tor surrounded by a layer of semiconductor material, a primary
insulation layer, a shield layer and an outer insulation jacket, is
disposed with a heat tube and which operates with a continu-
ous applied voltage of at least 5 KV and at a temperature of
substantially 210* C, a method for joining a feed end of a
length of the power cable to a terminal end of another length
of the power cable, comprising the steps ofc
a. removing the outer insulation jacket at jthe feed and termi-
nal ends of said lengths of power cable to expose a prede-
termined length of said shield layer extending from the
extreme ends of the cable to a first position spaced from
said ends;
b. removing the shield layer, primary insulation layer and
semiconductor layer from each cable end to expose the
primary conductor for a distance extending from the
extreme ends of the cables to a second position intermedi-
ate the ends of the cables and said first positions;
c. removing the shield layer from each cable end between
said second position and a spaced, third position located
intermediate said first and second position, leaving a por-
tion of the shield layer exposed extending between said
first and third positions;
d. mechanically joining tog^her the exposed primary con-
ductors of each cable end to form a conductor joint;
e. wrapping semiconductor material around the exposed
conductor ends to completely cover said conductor joint,
said material extending between the second positions of
each cable end;
f. wrapping insulation material across said joint between the
third position of the cable lengths until a partial insulation
layer of predetermined thickness is formed, said partial
layer being less than the final desired insulation thickness;
g. heat fusing said layer of wrapped insulation;
h. repeating steps (0 and (g) to obtain a substantially void
free, final insulation thickness at least as thick as said
primary insulation layer of said cables;
i. wrapping a semiconductor material from the fu^t position
of one cable end to a fourth position located intermediate
the conductor joint and the third position of the other
cable end;
j. wrapping insulation material over said semiconductor
material and heat fusing said material to form a substan-
tially void free insulation layer extending substantially
between the first position of said one cable end to the third
position of said other cable end;
k. electrically communicating the shield layer of said other
cable end with said heat tube;
1. wrapping semiconductor material from the first position of
the other cable end to a position located intermediate the
1. A recoverable polymeric article for use as a wraparound
sleeve, having a first upstanding rail adjacent one edge thereof,
and a second upstanding rail spaced from another edge such
that the portion of material between the second rail and the
other edge is a flap which can underlie the rails when the
sleeve is in use; the sleeve at the base of the first rail or the flap
having means which, on recovery of the sleeve, allows passage
of sealant on a surface of the sleeve into a region between the first
rail, the second rail and the flap.
15. A method of re-entering and re-enclosing a closed wrap-
around sleeve formed from an article according to claim 1, 8 or
9, which method comprises:
(a) removing the rails from the sleeves;
(b) removing a central portion of the sleeve, leaving intact
end portions thereof which have between their respective
rail butts sealant which has passed across the flap;
(c) enclosing the space between said end portions within a
second recoverable sleeve such that the ends of the second
sleeve at least overlie sealant between the butts of the rails;
and
(d) recovering the second sleeve.
4,436,567
METHOD FOR JOINING WEBS OF ASEPTIC POUCHES
Roy J. Wdkert, c/o 645 S. High St, Corington, Ohio 45318
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,299
lot a.} B65H 69/02
U.S. a. 156—158 8 Claims
1. A method of joining together two tubular webs, each
collapsed to form opposing walls, and having a sealed leading
end and a sealed trailing end, comprising the steps of:
placing said leading end of one of said webs over said trailing
end of the other of said webs to form overlapping ends;
applying microbicidal adhesive means between said overlap-
ping ends, thereby joining said overlapping ends together;
forming a peel seal between said opposing walls of each of
said overlapping ends above and below said adhesive
means;
\
•3»
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
723
making a fusion-like incision through said overlapping ends
within said peel seals and through said adhesive means;
sealing said incision with second microbiocidal adhesive
means; and
separating portions of said peel seals of each of said webs at
said incision to provide an internal passageway through
the joined tubular webs.
4,436,569
METHOD FOR FORMING A PROTECTIVE COVER FOR
AIRCRAFT HAVING CONICAL RADOMES
Harold H. Somerflack, Virginia Beach, Va., aaaigBor to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Nify, Washington, D.C.
FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303302
Int a.J B29D 23/10
U.S. a. 156—217
/
2Clalms
4,436,568
IN STTU PREaPTTATED HBROUS LAMINATE AND
METHOD OF PRODUONG SAME
Ole-Bendt Rasmussen, Forchwaldstraase 23, CH-6318 Walch-
wU/Zug, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 177,806, Aug. 13, 1980, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 102,561, Dec. 11, 1979, Pat. No.
4,294,638, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 841,481, Oct. 12,
1977, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 657,649,
Feb. 12, 1976, abandoned. This application May 2, 1983, Ser.
No. 488,004
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Feb. 12, 1975,
5971/75
Int. C1.3 B65H il/00; B32B 31/00; B29C 79/00
UjS. a. 156—176 3 Qairas
1. A method of forming a protective covering for pointed
radomes on aircraft, comprising:
forming a sheet of layered polyurethane, adhesive and poly-
ethylene into a cone having an overlapping portion;
placing the conically formed sheet around a conically
shaped male form with the polyethylene facing inwardly;
removing the polyethylene at the overlapping portion and
bonding the polyurethane;
placing the male form with the conically formed sheet there-
around into a female mold having a shape corresponding
to the desired shape for aircraft radomes;
heating the female mold;
reducing the pressure in the female mold to draw the sheet
of layered material into the shape thereof;
cooling the mold while still under reduced pressure;
removing the formed protective covering from the female
mold; and
removing the inwardly facing sheet of polyethylene to ex-
pose the adhesive prior to applicaion to a radome.
1. A method of forming a fibrous sheet which comprises the
steps of extruding from a given point onto a collecting surface
a film of a viscous solution comprising a polymer dissolved in
a solvent or swelling agent therefor, during such extrusion
advancing the collecting surface away from the extrusion
point, and subjecting the extruded film of said polymer extru-
sion to cooling to solidify the thus-extruded film to precipitate
said dissolved polymer in the form of a random reticulate
sheet-like array of solid fibers having a predominate grain
direction by virtue of the movement of the collecting surface
relative to said extrusion point, laminating the resultant fibrous
sheet-lUce array with at least one other fibrous sheet-lUce array
having a grain direction intersecting with that of the first sheet
and before or after said lamination substantially removing said
solvent or swelling agent.
4,436,570
PROCESS FOR BONDING HLMS
Karl-Friedrich Neuhaus, Krefeld; Horst MUUer-Albrecht Co-
logne; Manft^ DoUhausen, Odenthal, and Hermann Perrey,
Krefeld, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer
AktiengesellMhaft, Leverkuscn, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,736
Chdms priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 31,
1981, 3130430
Int. C\} B32B 31/00
U.S. a. 156— 273 J 11 Claims
1. A process for bonding a film to a substrate comprising:
(a) applying a layer from OS to 20 fim thick of an adhesive
which nuy be cross-linked by high energy radiation to the
film to be bonded,
(b) contacting the film of (a) with the substrate, and
(c) subjecting the adhesive to high energy radiation
wherein the adhesive is a mixture of
(i) at least one polyisocyanate and
(ii) at least one compound containing both a (meth)acryl-
oyl group and a hydroxyl group in which the equivalent
ratio of hydroxyl groups to isocyanate groups is from
0.8:1 to 1.3:1.
f
724
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436^71
PRINTING APPARATUS
Motoyaiu NakanUhi, Fi^Jishi, Japan, assignor to
Katoha Cubic Engineering, Shizuokaken, Japan
FUed Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401^83
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 18, 1981,
lot a.3 B44C 1/16
U.S. a. 156-384
62 6' ,6fl
Kabusliild
56-129878
16 Claims
wheel engageable with a carrier web, a ratchet wheel for
driving the feed wheel, a pawl member driven by the gearing
and cooperable with the ratchet wheel, means providing a
lost-motion connection between the gearing and the feed
wheel so that the feed wheel is driven through a relatively
small angle, and wherein the pawl member includes a plurality
of pawls and the ratchet wheel has a plurality of ratchet teeth
equal in number to the number of pawls.
1. A printing apparatus comprising
(a) a transcription tub for containing a liquid, which is open
at its upper side,
(b) a means for directing a flow of the liquid through said
transcription tub at a fixed rate,
(c) a film supplying means, provided at an upstream side of
said transcription tub relative to the flow direction of the
liquid through said transcription tub, for supplying a long
transcription film onto the surface of the liquid so that a
transcription pattern on the film is kept face up, and
(d) an article supplying means, provided above said tran-
scription tub, for immersing at least part of an article to be
printed upon into the liquid while keeping the article in
contact with the transcription pattern of the film, wherein
said article supplying means includes means for directing
the article to be printed upon from above said transcrip-
tion tub downward and downstream into downward and
downstream slanting contact with the film and transcrip-
tion pattern thereon in said transcription tub, changing the
direction of movement of the article within the liquid and
transferring the transcription pattern onto the article and
lifting the article slantingly upward and downstream to
move the article and transcription pattern out of the tran-
scription tub.
4,436,572
HAND-HELD LABELER
James A. Makley, Miamisburg, Ohio, assignor to Monarch
Marking Systems, Inc., Dayton, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 272,795, Jun. 11, 1981, Pat. No.
4,352,710. This appUcation Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423,374
Int a.3 B32B 31/00
UA a. 156—384 10 CUdms
4,436,573
PORTABLE LABEL APPLYING MACHINE
Yo Sato, Tokyo, and Tadao Kashiwaba, Kitakami, both of Japan,
assignors to Kabushlki Kaisha Sato, Japan
Filed Dec. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 452,707
Related U.S. Application DaU. This Application is a Continu-
ation-in-part of Application Ser. No. 368,732.
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 28, 1981, 56-210021;
Jan. 20, 1982, 57-4943[U]
Int. a.3 B65C 9/18. 11/00
U.S. a. 156—384 22 Claims
1. A portable label applying machine, comprising:
a printing device for printing a label strip in which the label
strip comprises a plurality of labels removably positioned
in series, one after the other, on a web of backing paper;
a separate applying device for applying labels which have
been peeled from the web of backing paper to other ob-
jects, and including an applying section to apply peeled
labels to other objects;
a separate cassette detachably mountable selectively on one
of the printing device and the applying device; said cas-
sette comprising a section for receiving and supporting
thereon a printed label strip which is fed thereto from the
printing device and also for feeding the label strip to a
peeling section; a peeling section for bending only the
backing paper web of the label strip in a direction and to
an extent for peeling off the labels from the backing paper
web; and a self-contained guide section for receiving and
guiding the bent web of backing paper after the labels
have been peeled off;
the applying device also including a manually operable
feeding mechanism for engaging the backing paper web
after the feeding section for moving the backing paper
web through manual action, for effecting peeling of the
labels from the backing paper web.
403 ' 7*— "^ ^
*"' 410 *0*
1. Hand-held apparatus for printing and applying labels
releasably secured by pressure sensitive adhesive to a carrier
web, comprising: a housing including a handle, an actuator
disposed at the handle, a movably mounted print head, a platen
cooperable with the print head, gearing drivably connecting
the actuator and the print head, means for delaminating printed
labels from the carrier web, means for applying labels, a feed
4,436,574
RADIAL MANDREL
Robert C. Long, Randolph, and Richard K. Peters, Tallmadge,
both of Ohio, assignors to Eagle-Picher Industries, Inc., Cin-
cinnati, Ohio
FUed Dec. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 449,135
Int. a. J B29H 17/ 16
U.S. a. 156—415 8 Claims
1. In a radial mandrel for use in forming wound objects, said
radial mandrel having a drive shaft and a plurality of alternat-
ing large segment means and small segment means supported
by a pair of cone means, said pair of cone means being adapted
to move axially toward and away from one another to move
said large and small segment means radially inwardly and
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
725
outwardly between a contracted and expanded position, the
improvement comprising:
a mechanism for axially moving said pair of cone means
toward and away from one another, said mechanism in-
cluding a sleeve rotatable with said drive shaft in a first
and second direction, said sleeve being formed with a pair
of groove means in the exterior surface thereof, said pair
of cone means engaging respective ones of said groove
means and following therealong with the rotation of said
'/y//y^yy/y//^/^//// .
. 'VOvNXNXVVXVvVs.N.NVVNXXXV
«.VVV\VVNN\\VvNNN.>VvN.V«>.NXvV
sleeve, said pair of cone means being moved axially apart
while following said groove means with said sleeve and
drive shaft rotating in said first direction for radially mov-
ing said large and small segment means to a retracted
position, and said pair of cone means being moved axially
toward one another while following said groove means
with said sleeve and drive shaft rotating in said second
direction for radially moving said large and small segment
means to an expanded position.
4,436,575
DEVICE FOR MANUFACTURING A HEATING GLASS
PLATE
Maurice Dran, Paris, and Bernard Jamet, SuUy sur Loire, both
of France, assignors to Saint Gobain Vitrage, Courbevoie,
France
Division of Ser. No. 223,107, Jan. 7, 1981, Pat. No. 4,395,622.
This appUcation Sep. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 419,504
Clahns priority, appUcation France, Jan. 8, 1980, 80 00278
Int. a.3 H06B i/00
U.S. a. 156—433 4 Oainis
1. A device for the manufacture of glass plate having a
heating network made up of fine electrical resistance wires
embedded in a thermoplastic layer following curved directri-
ces extending between two collector strips, said device com-
prising a supporting plate adapted to support a thermoplastic
sheet, a bridge supporting a sliding carriage, resistance wire-
laying members carried by said carriage, means for imparting
reciprocal motion to said carriage, guides extending perpendic-
ular to said bridge on which said bridge may slide, a rod con-
necting said carriage to a vertical spindle located in the median
plane of the plate, and an intermittent advance mechanism for
intermittently shifting the plate with respect to the carriage.
4,436,576
APPARATUS FOR FORMING BOTTOM HEAT SEALS
Frederick C. Sciden, Holmes Beach, FUu, assignor to Rexham
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Apr. 20, 1981. Ser. No. 255,760
Int. a.i B32B il/04
U.S. a. 156—543 7 Claims
f>c3r,-f
1. Apparatus for sealing together the extreme bottom por-
tions of two face-to-face upright strips of heat scalable material
as the strips are advanced lengthwise along a predetermined
path, said apparatus comprising a substantially cylindrical
drum having a predetermined outer diameter, means support-
ing said drum to rotate about an upright axis, a circular sealing
ring located below and rotatable with the lower end of said
drum, said sealing ring being concentric with said drum and
having an outer diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the
drum whereby the outer surface of said sealing ring is spaced
radially inwardly from the outer surface of said drum, said
sealing ring defining the lowermost strip-engaging surface of
said apparatus, means for heating said sealing ring, said strips
being guided so that the inner of said strips contacu a first
pre-selected arc around the outer surface of said drum, press-
ing means mounted adjacent the lower end of said drum and
extending axially above and below said lower end a distance
sufficient to span an axial portion of said drum and said sealing
ring, said pressing means pressing against said outer strip and
acting through such strip to press an upper portion of the inner
strip into engagement with a second and shorter preselected
arc of the outer surface of said drum between the ends of said
first arc and to press the bottom portion of said inner strip into
engagement with a corresponding short arc of the outer sur-
face of said sealing ring as said strips are advanced along said
path so that between the ends of the first and second arcs said
upper portion is in engagement with said drum and said bottom
portion is free of engagement with said sealing ring whereby
said sealing ring forms a substantially wrinkle-free seal along
the bottoms of said strips.
4,436,577
METHOD OF REGULATING CONCENTRATION AND
DISTRIBUTION OF OXYGEN IN CZOCHRALSKI
GROWN SIUCON
RoBN- A. Frederick, St. Louis County, and Jerry W. Moody, St.
Charles, both of Mo., assignors to Monsanto Company, St.
Louis, Mo.
Continuation-Ui-part of Ser. No. 220,924, Dec. 24, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,643
Int a.3 C30B 75/00
U.S. a. 156-617 SP 8 Claims
1. In the Czochralski method for producing silicon rods
wherein a single crystal silicon rod is grown by pulling from a
sUicon melt contained in a crucible and said rod and said cruci-
ble are rotated in opposite directions, the improvement to
provide both axial and radial uniform distribution of oxygen
throughout said rod comprising:
726
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
^^^n^nftS^""' Z "" "' ! "!!f ^'" **" '**" "*** '^ ' '*°^^« ^">"* °^32 nun for a rod diameter greater than
rotation rate of said crucible as said rod is grown, and 75 nun. »!»»« uim
run* THM TWW TMf C«TIT«L
4,436^79
METHOD OF FORMING MULTIPLEXED MAGNEnC
BUBBLE DETECTORS
Donald K. Rom, and Peter J. SU?eman, both of Palo Alto,
CaUf., aadgnors to Intel Corporation, Santa Clara, Calif
DiTliion of Ser. No. 229,345, Jan. 29, 1981. llii. appUcatlon Jul.
25, 1983, Ser. No. 516,980
., o J*- ^'' ^^^ ^/^^' **^ ^Z^^' owe IS/Oa 25/06
U A a 156-626 4 cMm
20 40 to (0
rc«ct>iT cmrtTii. moitN
O Cf am WMiini
# COM NCAIMIMS
CMTtTM, »orariM ii«Ti I nra c«
caueiCLC wnnoa mti loum ce*
100
B. increasing the rotation rate of said crucible as the length
of said rod increases.
4,436,578
METHOD OF SETTING A STABLE MELTING ZONE IN A
SEMICONDUCTOR CRYSTALLINE ROD DURING
CRUCIBLE-FREE ZONE MELTING THEREOF
Wolfgang KeUer, Mnnich, and Gerhard Schrotter, Neufahm,
both of Fed. Rep. of Gennany, assignors to Siemens Aktien-
geaellachaft, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep. of Gennany
Coatinaation-in-part of Ser. No. 12,386, Feb. 15, 1979,
abandoned. This application Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,028
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 27.
1978, 2808401
Int a.3 C30B 13/20
U.S. a. 156-620 1 Claim
1. Method of setting a stable melting zone in a semiconduc-
tor crystalline rod during crucible-free zone melting thereof in
a receptacle, by means of a single-winding induction heating
coil having an inner diameter smaller than the diameter of a
portion of the rod being fed to the melting zone which com-
prises evacuating the receptacle to a pressure of 10-' mm Hg,
subsequently performing the crucible-free zone melting in an
argon atmosphere having a degree of purity of 99.999% in the
receptacle at a constantly maintained overpressure in vicinity
of at least 1.5 au and majiimally 6 ata, and setting the outer
melting-zone height at a value of between 15 and 23 mm for a
diameter of the recy^tallized rod portion within a range of 30
to 50 mm, at a value of between 18 and 26 mm for a diameter
of the recrystallized rod portion within a range of 50 to 75 nun
3. During the fabrication of a magnetic bubble detector
which includes a magnetoresistive detection elements and a
propagation element insulated from said detection element, a
process for optimizing the output from said detection element
comprising the steps of:
determining the thickness of the layer from which said de-
tection element is to be formed;
forming a masking member over said layer to define said
detection element;
etching said detection element from said layer, including
controlling the undercutting of said detection element
below said masking member so as to obtain a predeter-
mined width of said detector element, said width being
selected such that the width to thickness ratio of said
detection element is approximately equal to a predeter-
mined number;
whereby the output of said detection element is optimized.
4,436,580
METHOD OF PREPARING A MERCURY CADIUM
TELLURIDE SUBSTRATE FOR PASSIVATION AND
PROCESSING
Phillip R. Boyd, Upper Marlboro, Md.; Gary K. Green, FMe-
ricksbnrg, and Barbara E Sumner, Alexandria, both of Va.,
assignors to The United States of America as represented by
the Secretary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
FUed Aug. 12, 1983, Ser. No. 522,775
Int a.3 HOIL 21/306; B44C 1/22; O03C 15/00. 25/06
UA a. 156-636 5 Claim.
1. A method of preparing a mercury cadmium telluride
substrate for passivation and processing, said method compris-
ing the steps of:
providing an Hgi _xCd,Te substrate;
etching said substrate with a bromine methanol etch until the
surface of said substrate is free of visible oxides and resid-
ual impurities;
quenching the etched substrate until all traces of bromine is
removed and rinsing in acetone and methanol to remove
soluble residuals and drying immediately;
coating said Hgi _;,CdxTe substrate with CdTe in a coating
system evacuated down to about 2-5 x IQ-' Torr wherein
said CdTe is deposited on said substrate at about 10-12 A
per second to a thickness of about 1000 A;
polishing the processed CdTe layer of said substrate by a
contactless polish means having a polishing solution com-
prised of 50% ethylene glycol and 50% methanol and
bromine mixture of 2% bromine and 98% methanol.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
727
wherein Mid CdTe Uyer is polished down to generally of said plurality of sUicon regions different in impurity concen-
less than 200 A; and ^^^ from each other is etched at substantially the same
'^'^^l^^r^^'^^^^'T^ "* '"^*^°' "^"^ f '"S" «^hi"« "»* to P™vide etching to substantially the Lie depth
of bromme is removed and nnsmg m acetone and metha- ^*m..um,,, uk awuc ucpui.
l-test. i|
ITOMM awMT»*Ti 10 siTM sap— ■!
■MWnil CTCNCt WMTlSTf « MTNkMtL 1
•> M» 4M MMma m aCITOM M* MirNMOt. 1
am •**<■• iMMtiiTtcT 1
TNClMUa or AtewT tMO * 1
" '• il If «M 1
«•«#!• JO 1
CWracTkCM »OU«IM>« U U lATCi WITH a
R«LaiMH tourrioa or M« ctmyum «.vck h« m%
•
100 A
•uMCNM »Out«U tuMTiaTi m mttMAiML 1
aia l«MM m SCItOM AM MTNAMOt. 1
1
ca ti jt
j-l
», C t, |{
nol to remove soluble residuals and drying the substrate
immediately whereby the quality of the Hgi-xCd^Te
layers is improved by the CdTe processing steps to yield
a surface exhibiting improved quality and smaller varia-
tions in composition or x-valve.
4,436381
UNIFORM ETCHING OF SIUCON (DOPED AND
UNDOPED) UTILIZING IONS
Sadayuki Okudaira; HIroJi Saida, both of KokubniUi; Yoahio
Sakai, Hachioji; Shigeni NisUmatso, KokubunJi, and Keizo
Sozoki, Hachioji, all of Japan, assignora to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 370,147
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 22, 1981, 56-59852
Int a.3 HOIL 21/308
VS. a. 156—643 11 Claims
1. In a dry etching method for simultaneously etching a
plurality of silicon regions different in impurity concentration
from each other, by bringing said silicon regions into contact
with a plasma, the improvement comprising a step of perform-
ing dry etching, in a magneto-microwave etching apparatus,
for said silicon regions substantially only by ions contained in
said plasma, whereby each of said plurality of silicon regions
different in impurity concentration from each other is etched at
substantially the same etching rate to provide etching to sub-
stantially the same depth.
10. In a dry etching method for simultaneously etching a
plurality of silicon regions different in impurity concentration
from each other, by bringing said silicon regions into contact
with a plasma, the improvement comprising providing a
plasma, for said dry etching of said plurality of silicon regions,
with a sufficiently high density, generated in a sufficiently
low-pressure gas, such that the dry etching is carried out sub-
standally only by ions contained in said plasma, wherd>y each
4,436,582
MULTILEVEL METALLIZATION PROCESS FOR
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Ar^ N. Sazeoa, 4217 Pomona Atc, Palo Alto, Calif. 94306
FUed Oet 28, 1980, Ser. No. 201,109
Int a.} C23F 1/02
VJS. a. 156-656 6 ClaiM
t»»*inoi>
<M«, (W
M»,
iir-^irranMow
MO. '(tot)
-(tot)
-MOO.
1. A process for fabricating electrical connections on an
integrated circuit structure between a lower electrically con-
ducting layer and a next upper electrically conducting layer
with the material of said lower and next upper layen being
selected from the group including metals and alloys, the pro-
cess comprising:
forming electrically conductive first material on the inte-
grated circuit structure in at least one location where the
lower and the next upper layer are to be electrically con-
nected, the first material being inert to etchants for the
lower and the next upper layer, the area of contact be-
tween the lower and next upper layers being less than the
area of the first material;
depositing the lower layer over first portions of the inte-
grated circuit structure and over the fuit material;
depositing a dielectrical material over all of the lower layer
and the first material;
etching the dielectric material over at least part of the first
material using a process to which the first material is not
as susceptible as the dielectric materials, and
forming the next upper layer over second portions of the
integrated circuit structure and in contact with the lower
layer exposed by the step of etching dielectric material.
SELECTIVE ETCHING METHOD OF POLYIMIDE TYPE
RESIN nLM
Atsnshi Salki, Kogaad; Takao Iwayanagl, Neriom; Saboro
Nonogaki, Megnro; Takaahi Nishida, Taltoo, and Seiki
Harada, Hachioji, all of Japan, assigDors to Hitachi, Ltd<^
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Not. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 445,576
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 21, 1981, 56-205326
Int. a.5 B44C 1/22; C03C 15/Oa 25/06; B29C 17/08
VJS. a. 156—659.1 8 daiam
1. A selective etching method of a polyimide type resin film.
728
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
compraing forming a film made of negative type photoresist
material usmg an unsaturated ketone polymer as a base resin on
a polyimide type resin film, exposing a predetermined portion
or said film, developing said film to obtain an etching mask
havmg a predetermined pattern and etching said resin film by
use of a mued solution of 20 to 40 vol% of hydrazine hydrate
and the balance of polyamine as the etching solution.
4,436,584
ANISOTROPIC PLASMA ETCHING OF
SEMICONDUCTORS
Stephen E. Bemacki, Northboro, and Bernard B. Kosicki, Ac-
ton, both of Mass., assignors to Sperry Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
FOed Mar. 21, 1983, Ser. No. 477,581
Int a.3 HOIL 21/306: B44C 1/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06
UA a. 156-643 10 Claims
of electrical insulating material deformed in a predetermined
pattern for establishing a plurality of electrical insulating com-
partments, said method comprising: moving a first sheet of
electncal insulating material to a securing station at a first
predetermined average rate of supply in a longitudinal direc-
tion; moving a second sheet of electrical insulating material to
a forming station at a second predetermined average rate of
supply greater than the first predetermined average rate of
supply of the first sheet of insulating material and from the
forming station to the securing station in a longitudinal direc-
tion; deforming the second sheet of insulating material in a
predetermined pattern of partial compartments at the forming
station by means of arbors to form compartment portions
connected by webs extending in a direction transverse relative
to the longitudinal direction of movement of the second sheet
and wherein the deforming of the second sheet occurs while
both the first and second sheets are undergoing movement-
moving the first sheet of insulating material into a position
adjacent the second sheet of insulating material at the securing
1. A method of patterning the surface of a material, to be
etched within selective regions, said regions defining sidewalls
substantially normal to said surface, comprising the following
providing a substrate with a planar surface,
depositing an overiying process layer with apertures corre-
sponding with said regions, said layer having substantially
vertical edges,
etching said material within a plasma environment contained
within a discharge apparatus, said plasma resulting for
imposition of an electrical field across a gaseous halocar-
bon compound betwen two electrodes, said plasma deter-
mined by an electrical power density and a total pressure,
said gaseous compound chemically reacting with said
plasma to form a polymer film on said processing layer
and said material, said polymer film formed only on said
edges and on said sidewalls, thereby lessening the lateral
etch rate relative to the vertical etch rate of said surface
being etched, so that said etching is substantially ideally
anisotropic,
said etching step being primarily due to directional positive
ion bombardment and chemical reaction with said mate-
rial to be etched, etching being sufficiently selective to
remove a desired thickness below said material surface
whUe retaining a sufficient thickness of said processing
layer to prevent substantial attack of the surface below
portions of said processing layer which are not apertured.
4,436,585
METHODS FOR MAKING CONNECOON INSULATORS
QdoB E. Moodie, and Richard D. Bums, both of Holland,
Mich., assignors to General Electric Company, Fort Wayne
lod. '
Cootinaation of Ser. No. 871,681, Jan. 23, 1978, abandoned. ITiis
appUcation Mm-. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,591
lat a.3 B65D 73/02: B31F 1/20
VS. a 156-73.1 ,5 ciai^
1. A method of fabricating an electrical connection insulator,
for a dynamoelectric machine, having a base portion estab-
lished by a piece of a first sheet of electrical insulating material
and a retaining portion esublished by a piece of a second sheet
station; ultrasonically welding the first sheet of insulating
matenal and the second sheet of insulating material and
thereby securing together the webs of the first sheet of insulat-
ing material and the second sheet of insulating material to
thereby establish electrical insulating compartments bounded
by a base portion established by the first sheet of insulating
matenal and by a retaining portion established by the compart-
ment portions of the second sheet of the insulating material and
also thereby trapping the arbors between the first and second
sheets of material in the compartment portions; withdrawing
the arbors from the compartment portions by moving the
arbors laterally and transversely relative to the longitudinal
direction of movement of the secured together first and second
sheets of material; advancing and positioning the first sheet of
insulating material and second sheet of insulating material at a
cutting station; and severing the first sheet of insulating mate-
rial and the second sheet of insulating material to establish an
electrical connection insulator having a plurality of electrical
insulating compartments.
4436 586
METHOD OF PRODUCING KRAFT PULP USING AN
AOD PREHYDROLYSIS AND PRE-EXTRACnON
Carl L. Elmore, Glen Falls, N.Y., assignor to Kamyr, Inc., Glen
FUed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,627
Int. a.3 D21C 1/04. 1/06. 3/02
U.S. a. 162-19 20 Claims
1. A method of producing carbohydrate material and kraft
pulp from a liquid slurry of comminuted cellulosic fiber mate-
rial comprising the steps of continuously:
(a) subjecting the liquid slurry of comminuted cellulosic
fiber material to mild acid prehydrolysis, by subjecting
said material to an acid concentration of, or equivalent to,
about 0.2-0.5 percent H2SO4. and a temperature of about
120* C. or less;
(b) subjecting the slurry of prehydrolized comminuted cellu-
losic fiber material to mild caustic pre-extraction, by sub-
jecting said material to a caustic concentration of, or
equivalent to, about 0.5-4.0 percent NaOH, and at a tem-
perature of about 60*-90' C;
(c) removing hydrolysate, having carbohydrate material,
released during the practice of steps (a) and (b) from the
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
729
comminuted cellulosic material while continuously prac-
ticing steps (a) and (b); and
»r^/f^^
■Aunntrm
(d) effecting kraft cooking of the prehydrolized, pre-
extracted comminuted cellulosic fiber material to produce
kraft pulp.
4,436,587
METHOD FOR PRODUONG MULTILAYER PAPER
Ingmar Andersson, Hammaro, Sweden, assignor to AB Karlstads
Mekaniska Werkstad, Karlstad, Sweden
Filed Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,470
Int. a.3 D21F 11/04
U.S. a. 162—123 5 Cbdras
1. In a method for forming paper by supplying paper stock to
a converging throat between two foraminous forming fabrics
and dewatering and forming said stock by running said form-
ing fabrics along a curved plain surface of a fabric supporting
member with said stock therebetween, the steps of discharging
into said throat at least two laterally coextensive, sheet-like jets
of paper stock in superimposed, spaced apart relation with a
gap therebetween, maintaining in the gap between said jets at
the discharge location a wedge-shaped body of gaseous fluid at
a pressure such that the adjacent faces of the jets gradually
approach one another and meet to form a stratified jet as they
travel towards the narrow end of said throat, and setting the
discharge velocity of the jet closest to the curved plain surface
to be higher than that of an adjacent discharged jet by an
amount in the range up to 10% but at least IS to 20 m/min
higher.
4,436,588
PROCESS FOR DEVOLATIUZING DEVOLATILIZABLE
nNE-GRAINED MATERIAL BY MEANS OF HOT,
nNE-GRAINED HEAT-CARRYING MATERIAL
Roland Raramler, KSnigstein, and Alfons Bussmann, Nidderau,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Metallgesellschaft
Aktlengesellschaft, Frankfiirt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Gcr-
many
Dirision of Ser. No. 206,512, Not. 13, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,686
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Not. 15,
1979, 2946102
Int. a.3 ClOB 49/20. 53/06
VS. a. 201—12 3 Claims
r
H'^^M-^H
fine-grained material selected from the group consisting of tar
sand, oil shale, oil-containing diatomaceous earth and coal
which comprises:
(A) feeding said hydrocarbon-containing fine-grained mate-
rial having a grain size not in excess of 8 mm, to an agitat-
ing chamber having a horizontal or sloped bottom termi-
nating in a discharge chute, said material being fed
through a plurality of first feed conduiu;
(B) introducing heat-carrying fine-grained solids having a
temperature of 500* to 1000* C. and a particle size not in
excess of 8 mm, to said chamber by a plurality of second
feed conduits, said first and second feed conduits being
arranged to form superimposed layers of said material and
said solids so as to contact and to mix said solids and
hydrocarbon-containing fine-grained material, thereby
heating the material to temperatures of about 400* to 900*
C. and devolatilizing the material;
(C) withdrawing hydrocarbon gases and vapors from said
chamber;
(D) introducing a portion of said gases as sole agitating gas
into the mixture of heat-carrying solids and hydrocarbon-
containing material through a plurality of nozzles at dif-
ferent valocities, the velocity of the agiuting gas intro-
duced in a first zone adjacent to the first and second feed
conduits being higher than the velocity of the gas in a
succeeding second zone in the direction toward said dis-
charge chute, the velocity of agitating gas in a third zone
next preceding said discharge chute being higher than in
the second zone, the velocities of the agitating gas leaving
the nozzles being in the range between 10 and 60 meters
per second;
(E) moving the mixture of solids in an agitated state, agitated
by said agitating gas, towards said discharge chute such
that the height of said solids in the agiuting chamber is
from 0.1 to 1.0 meter; and
(F) feeding the mixture from said discharge chute into a
dwell zone, with gases and vapors being withdrawn from
said dwell zone.
4,436,589
METHOD OF PRETREATING COAL FOR COKING
PLANT
Vladan PetroTic, and Heinz Rotthaus, both of Essen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Kmpp>Koppers GmbH, Essen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed May 10, 1962, Ser. No. 376,834
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 29,
1981, 3121285
Int a.J ClOB 39/02. 57/10
VS. CI. 201—41 4 Claims
— L20 tlLJi „
1. A process for devolatilizing a hydrocarbon-containing
1. A method of pretreating coal for a coking plant with coal
preheating and coke dry cooling, the method comprising the
steps of <■
heating and drying coal in two stages in two throughflow
dryers successively connected with one another and sup-
plied with steam, so that in a first one of the throughflow
drien the steam is supplied with a temperature of subatan-
730
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
tially 600* C. and the coal is heated to a temperature
subMantiaUy between 70'-90- C. and to a water content of
»ub«tantially 2 weight %, whereas in a second one of the
throughflow driers the steam is supplied with a tempera-
ture of substantially between 400*-500* C. and the coal is
heated to a temperature of substantially 200* C. and dried
to a residual water content of substantially 0-0.1 weight
%;
removing dust from the steam after passing through the
throughflow driers; and
heating the steam after dust removal in the heat exchange
relationship with a circulating gas of a coke dry cooling
operation.
an electrolytic bath that includes at least one brightener, char-
acterized in that the metal is deposited on the basic screen
material by using a pulsed current whereby metal is deposited
substantially perpendicular to the basic screen material and
apertures through the screen material are substantially as large
as those apertures through the basic screen material.
4,436^90
DETECTION OF NITRATE ESTERS USING SILVER
ELECTRODE
MdTlii H. Milci, and Dwight A. Fine, both of Ridgecrest, Calif.,
■aiigDorf to The United States of America as represented by
the Secretary of the Nary, Washington, D.C.
F!l«d Oct. 4, 1582, Ser. No. 432,485
lat a.3 COIN 27/48
U.S. a 204-1 T 6 Chdms
4,436,592
METHOD OF SELECTIVELY ELECTROPLATING THE
NODES OF DIMPLED TITANIUM MATERIAL
Brian Norris, San Diego, and Robert M. Castro, La Mesa, both
of Calif., assignors to Rohr Industries, Inc., Chula Vista, Calif.
FUed Apr. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 488,351
Int. CV C25D 5/02
U.S. a. 204-15 12 ciatau
-01 -OJ -M
POriNTUL VS. KC/V
1. A method of detecting nitrate esters in a sample solution
using a voltammetric instrument with a solid working elec-
trode comprising the steps of:
forming a test solution by mixing a sample solution with a
supporting electrolyte solution;
placing said test solution into a cell having a solid working
electrode selected from the group consisting of silver,
gold and copper, a counter electrode and a reference
electrode;
deoxygenating said test solution;
applying a linearly varying potential over the range of -0.3
V to - 1.0 V (vs. SCE) to said cell; and
recording a voltammagram with a recorder as the potential
is applied whereby said nitrate esters are detected as a
wave in a voltammetric scan.
4,436,591
PROCESS OF ELECTROFORMING SCREEN MATERIAL
Johaa A. de Hek, Amhcm, Netherlands, aadgnor to Veco Be-
beer B.V., Nctherhuda
Flkd Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,447
Oidw priority, application Netherlands, No?. 13, 1981,
8105150
lat a.3 C25D 1/06, 7/00
UA a 204—11 14 n.i».
1. A process for electroplating the nodes of dimpled sheet
material comprising the steps of:
(a) providing a flat block of electrical conductive material
having at least one substantially flat surface;
(b) positioning on the flat surface of said block; a porous
absorbent fabric material;
(c) wetting the porous fabric material with a electrolyte
solution;
(d) placing one node surface of a cleaned dimpled sheet of
material on the wetted porous fabric material;
(e) placing a sheet of conductive material on the other sur-
face of the dimpled sheet for holding said sheet against
said wetted porous fabric material;
(0 attaching electrodes to said block of electrical conductive
material and to said sheet of conductive metal; and
(g) applying appropriate plating voltage to said electrodes
for a predetermined period of time.
1. Process of electrolytically producing screen material by
depositing a metal upon a basic screen material disposed within
4,436,593
SELF-ALIGNED POLE TIPS
John R. Oabomc, Saratoga, and Peter G. BlachofT, Cnpertino,
both of Calif., assignors to Memorex Corporatioa, Santa
Clara, Calif.
Filed Jnl. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,540
lat CL^ GllB 5/42
UA a 204-15 29 Claina
1. A method of precisely aligning the pole tips of a thin film
magnetic head comprising:
a. applying to a suppori, two metallic layers separated by an
insulative hiyer, these all being superposed on one an-
other, said metallic layers to become the pole tips of the
magnetic head; a "first" one of said metallic layers being
applied to said support; the insulative Uiyer being then
applied over said 'Tirst" metallic layer, and a "second"
metallic Uyer being then applied on said insulative Uyer;
b. applying a photo-resist to the surface of said "second", or
"top" metallic Uiyer in imagewise configuration to estab-
lish the shape of the top pole;
c. etching the top metallic layer to the insulative layer in
areas not protected by the photo-resist thus forming the
top pole;
d. removing the photo-resist and encapsulating the top pole
with a protective metal;
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
731
e. etching the insulative layer using the top pole as a mask;
and
w///////mm//A
yMmmPM.
f. etching the "first", or "bottom" metallic layer using the
top pole and insulative layer as a mask to form the bottom
pole.
4,436,594
METHOD OF TREATING THE SURFACE OF A METAL
CONTAINER
Yoahiaki Nishida, Kitakyushu; ShuiUi Yaao, Sagaraihara, and
Tadahiro Mai uyana, Ibaragi, all of Japan, aasignon to Daiwa
Can Company, Limited, Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,539
Int. a.3 C25D 5/36. 5/44. 7/04. 13/20
MS. a. 204—33 3 Clainu
capable of being operated at current densities of up to 600 amps
per square foot and into which metal impurities are introduced
comprising a salt of an alloying metal selected from the group
consisting of nickel, cobalt and mixtures thereof; the reaction
product of an alkali metal gold cyanide with a mixture of
glycolic acid and an alkali metal salt of glycolic acid which are
present in amounu sufficient to complex the alkali metal gold
cyanide and in a ratio sufficient to generate a pH in the bath of
from about 4 to about 5 and wherein the alloying metal it
present in a predetermined ratio to the gold, said bath further
comprising nitrilotriacetic acid in an amount sufficient to pre-
vent codeposition of the introduced metal impurities with the
gold alloy.
23. A process for electroplating an alloy of gold and nickel
onto a substrate from an aqueous gold alloy electroplating bath
which comprises ionic nickel in a predetermined concentra-
tion, the reaction product of an alkali metal gold cyanide and
a mixture of glycolic acid and an alkali metal salt of glycolic
acid, wherein the glycolic acid and the alkali metal salt of
glycolic acid are present in sufficient quantity to complex the
alkali metal gold cyanide and in a ratio sufficient to provide a
pH of from about 4 to about 5 comprising the steps of:
a. plating the substrate with nickel in a nickel electroplating
bath;
b. electroplating the nickel plated substrate with the alloy of
gold and nickel in the aqueous gold alloy electroplating
bath; and
c. introducing nitrilotriacetic acid to the gold alloy electro-
plating bath in a concentration sufficient to complex all
ionic nickel introduced to said aqueous gold plating bath
from said nickel plating bath to maintain free ionic nickel
in said gold alloy electroplating bath at said predeter-
mined concentration.
..^,
/
m
i.
' -.It
'A^
I
ir^
1. A method of treating a surface of a seamless container
made of a member selected from te group consisting of steel
and aluminum, which comprises:
causing an organic solvent to flow along and on said surface
to degrease said surface,
blowing compressed air on said degreased surface to remove
said organic solvent from said degreased surface, and
subjecting the resultant surface to (1) electrolysis in an aque-
ous electrolytic fluid or (2) electrophoretic coating in an
aqueous electrophoretic fluid.
4,436,595
ELECTROPLATING BATH AND METHOD
Walter T. Mataoa, Los Aogelea, Calif., anignor to Metal Sur-
laces, Inc^ Bell Gardens, Calif.
CoBtiBnatloo-iB-part of Ser. No. 270,844, Jua. 5, 1981. lUs
appUcatiOB Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 358,862
lat a.J C25D 3/62, 5/10
US. CL 204—40 29 Claian
1. An aqueous electroplating bath for depositing a gold alloy
4,436,596
N-SUBSTTrUTED-2-(R)-(SULFINIC
AaD)-3-(SMACYLAMIDO)-4-OXO-AZETIDINES AND
PROCESS
David A. Hall, ladiaaapolis, lad., assigaor to Eli Lilly
Conpaay, ladhuiapolls, lad.
FUed No?. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 442,075
lat a.3 C25C 3/00: C07D 205/Oi. 403/12, 405/12
VS. a. 204-59 R 31
1. A process for preparing a compound of the formula
Ah
R2 N
n
SOOM
OH
COORi
which comprises electrolytically reducing at a potential at or
above the reduction potential required for the cleavage of the
sulfoae to Cj bond of a cephalosporin sulfone compound of the
formula
/
732
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
Ah
R2 N
O O
s
fractory anode stops mounted in said cathode and extending
vertically upwardly from said cathode, through said molten
/ V
/^v/v-
CXX)Ri
in a solvent chosen from the group consisting of a polar or-
ganic solvent, water, and a mixture of the two, all of which are
stoble under the conditions of the electrolysis, and
(a) when the solvent used is a polar organic solvent or a
mixture of water and a polar organic solvent, in the pres-
ence of a proton source comprised of a carboxylic acid
having a pKa between about zero to about five in an
amount equal to at least one molar equivalent per molar
equivalent of cephalosporin sulfone; or
(b) when the solvent used is water, maintaining the pH of the
aqueous solution between about three to about nine;
at a temperature above about the freezing point of the solvent
to about 40' C; wherein the electrolytic reduction is carried
out in the presence of a catholyte selected from the group
consisting of an alkali metal salt, ammonium and substituted
ammonium salts.
[/ .'y.'y ///.'. , .'/.' A ,'/.'/.'/.■.' , .'.'///,■// .'\
aluminum pad and into said aluminum-cryolite bath for a
distance greater than said RHM shapes.
4436 597
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING
ALUMINUM IN AN ELECTROLYSIS CELL WITH
QUARRY TILE LINING
Louis A. Hartley, II, New London, N.C., assignor to Aluminum
Company of America, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,896
Int QV C25C 3/06. 3/08
U.S. a. 204-67 J Claim
4,436,599
METHOD FOR MAKING A CATHODE, AND METHOD
FOR LOWERING HYDROGEN OVERVOLTAGE IN A
CHLORALKALI CELL
Thomas C. Bissot, Newark, and Stephen U, Wilmington, both of
Del., assignors to E. I. Du Pont De Nemours A Company,
Wilmington, Del. Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Apr. 13, 1983, Ser. No. 484,557
Int. a.J C25B 1/34. 11/04
UA a. 204-98 18 Claims
13. A process for making an iron-activated cathode from the
cathode of a chloralkali cell which comprises an anode com-
partment, an anode situated within said anode compartment, a
cathode compartment, a cathode situated within said cathode
compartment, and a cation-exchange membrane between said
anode compartment and said cathode compartment, said anode
compartment containing aqueous brine solution, said cathode
compartment containing aqueous caustic solution, said process
comprising
(a) introducing into said cathode compartment an aqueous
solution containing ferrite ions, and
(b) passing an electrical current between said anode and said
cathode until a deposit comprising iron forms on the
surface of said cathode.
290
1. In a process for the electrolytic production of aluminum,
in a cell having a side wall including a layer of carbon electri-
cally insulated from a jacket of metal, the improvement com-
prising interposing an upwardly extending layer of tile be-
tween the carbon layer and the metal jacket.
4436 600
METHOD FOR TREATMENT OF COPPER ANODES TO
BE ELECTROREFINED
Tatsuo Imamura, Tokyo, and Mitsuo Katoh, Ibaraki, both of
Japan, assignors to Nippon Mining Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 478,769
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 25, 1982, 57-46218
Int a.3 C25R 1/12
VS. a. 204-140 7 Claims
4,436,598
ALUMINA REDUCnON CELL
Alton T. Tabereanx, Sheffleld, and John T. WUlett, Florence,
both of Ala., assignors to Reynolds Metals Company, Rich-
mond, Va.
FUed Sep. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 536,710
Int. a? C25C 3/06
UA a. 204-67 9 Claims
1. In an alumina reduction cell having an anode, a carbona- ,„,
ceous cathode and a plurity of refractory hard metal (RHM)
shapes mounted in and extending vertically upwardly from 1. A method for preventing passivation of cast copper an-
said cathode, through a molten aluminum pad and into an odes during electrorefining. comprising the steps of:
alumina-cryohte bath, the miprovement comprising inert re- providing copper anodes to be electrorefined
--J
so
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
733
heating the anodes to a temperature within the range of 600* 4,436,603
C. to 1,050* C; and APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING A REPUCA FROM A
cooling the anodes at a cooling rate within a range from 20* MATRIX
C./hour to 400* C./hour. John J. Pnisak, and Bhupendra P. Patel, both of ladianapoUs,
Ind., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 507,531
Int a' C25D 77/00
^^3^^j US. a 204-194 6 Claims
METAL REMOVAL PROCESS
Kenneth J. BraacUck, Menton Irylng NaUdn, Uni?ersity Hts.,
both of Ohio, and Mary R. Suchanski, Rochester, N.Y., as-
signors to Diamond Shamrock Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
FUed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,565
Int a.J C02F 1/46
U.S. a. 204—149 11 Claim
1. An electrolytic process for removing a significant portion
of at least one metal contaminant from waste water comprising
electrolyzing said waste water between a plurality of electri-
cally energized anodes and cathodes arranged in an alternating
sequence without either membrane or diaphragm separators
therebetween, each of said anodes having openings therein
permitting passage of such waste water therethrough and each
of said cathodes being in the form of metallized organic poly-
mer foam reticulates.
4,436,602
BLOCKING SHIELD ASD METHOD FOR CONTOURING
THE THICKNESS OF SPUTTER COATED LAYERS
Dtfid J. Ham, Santa Cruz; Frederick T. Turner, Sunny?ale,
and Martin A. Hutchinson, Santa Clara, aU of CaUf., aulgn-
ora to Varian Associates, Inc., Palo Alto, CaUf.
DlTislon of Ser. No. 325,588, Not. 27, 1981, Pat No. 4,416,759.
This appUcation Aug. 19, 1983, Ser. No. 524,708
Int a.J C23C 75/00
U.S. a. 204—192 R 10 Claims
1. A method of sputter depositing an arbitrarily contoured
film of a single material onto a substrate in a multi-station
sputter system, comprising the steps of
sputter depositing said material onto said substrate from a
cathode source in a first sputter station;
indexing said substrate to another sputter station, said sub-
strate being shielded from deposition from completion of
sputtering at said first sputter station to commencement of
sputtering at said other sputter station;
sputter depositing said material onto said substrate from a
cathode source in said other sputter station;
the contour of said material sputtered on said substrate at
said first sputter station being different from the contour
of said material sputtered on said substrate at said other
sputter station; and
said difference in contour of said sputtered material being
obtained by a blocking shield placed in fixed position in
one of said sputter stations in between said cathode source
and said substrate.
1. An apparatus for separating a replica of a first diameter
from a surface of a matrix of a larger second diameter wherein
the replica is secured to the matrix by a circumferential seal
means of a predetermined diameter positioned inwardly and
adjacent to the first diameter, said apparatus comprising in
combination:
(a) a lower turntable rotatably mounted on a support means,
said lower turntable having an outer diameter at least as
large as said second diameter and having a flat central
portion of a diameter of about said predetermined diame-
ter of the seal means with the outer circumferential por-
tion of the lower turntable being bevelled from the edge of
the flat portion of the outer diameter of the lower turnta-
ble at a predetermined angle sufficient so that a nutrix
clamped on the flat portion can be flexed to the surface of
the bevel without being permanently distorted;
(b) means for rotating said lower turntable;
(c) an upper turntable assembly comprised of an upper tum-
Uble having a flat surface and a diameter less than said
first diameter; holding means for receiving and holding
said upper turntable and means associated with said hold-
ing means for permitting rotation of said turntable inde-
pendent of said holding means;
(d) means for raising and lowering the upper turntable means
vertically in alignment with said lower tumuble and for
applying upward and downward force;
(e) pressure applying means for forcing the outer diameter of
a matrix clamped between the upper and lower turntables
into contact with the bevelled edge of the lower turntable;
(0 lower clamp means mounted on said support means in an
opposing relationship to the lower turntable, said lower
clamp means having the leading portions thereof beveUed
to about said predetermined angle;
(g) means for advancing and retracting said lower clamp
means toward and away from the lower turntable with the
beveUed leading portion of the lower clamp means being
aligned so as to engage in locking contact the bevelled
edge of the lower turntable; and
(h) movable upper clamp means for gripping a portion of a
replica extending behind the outer diameter of the upper
turntable.
734
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,604
DESCALER FOR SYSTEMS EMPLOYING WATER AS A
HEAT TRANSFER AGENT
Aatkamy J. Wahm, 3305 Huel Ia, Hazd Crest, Dl. 60429,
and Staaftord C Ndton, Park Ridge, m., aMignon to Antiioay
J. Walten, Haiel Ocst, U.
Filed Aag. 2, 1902, Scr. No. 403,929
lat CLJ C23F 13/00
VJS. a. 204—196 3 daimi
therein a plurality of compartmenu, each said compart-
ment having an open side through one wall of said frame;
monopolar terminal electrodes mounted in said frame for
connection to current leads;
a plurality of bipolar electrodes; and
means for supporting said bipolar electrodes within each
said compartment and for allowing removal and insertion
of said bipolar electrodes through said open side.
1. An electrolytic scale inhibiting device for cooling systems
employing water as a heat transfer agent comprising:
a closed heat transfer circuit along which cooling water
flows and including at least one inlet pipe,
an internally threaded fitting extending into said inlet pipe
and permanently secured thereto,
an electrolytic probe in the form of a hollow copper tube
removably secured to said fitting and sealed thereto and
extending axially along said inlet pipe, '
said probe having a spiral copper wire brazed to its exterior
surface and extending therealong to the inner end of said
probe,
a copper end closure for the end of said probe,
a ground wire secured to said end closure and extending
along said probe through the outer wall end thereof,
said ground wire being insulated in the region of said fitting
and extending outside of said probe and having a free end
outside of said heat transfer circuit connected to ground,
sealing and insulating means mounting said probe in said
fitting, comprising an insulating bushing threaded on the
outer end of said probe,
the mounting for said probe in said fitting also including an
internally and externally threaded retamer threaded
within said fitting and having said bushing threaded
therein, said retainer having a head that can be gripped by
a wrench and said seaUng and insulating bushing being
threaded within said retainer and cut-off" flush with the
outer end of said bushing when assembled to said retainer,
to provide a permanent water tight insulation and sealing
support between said retainer and probe.
4,436,605
BIPOLAR ELECTRODE ELECTROLYSIS APPARATUS
Radn Hoka, Boulogne, France, aaiivior to Degremont, RueU
MalaaiaoB, Fraoce
FUed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 372,238
lat CL3 C25D J 7/00; C25B J5/0a 9/02. 11/10
UACL 204-225 13 Clalmi
4,436,606
ELECTROLYSIS APPARATUS
Jean F. VieUefont, Herenthoat; Carolof M. Hens, Olen, and
Hubert J. Tobback, Uchtaart, all of Belgium, aaaignors to
MetaUmrgie Hoboken-Orerpelt, Bmaiela, Belgium
per No. PCT/BE82/00002, § 371 Date Sep. 30, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 30, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/02907, PCT Pab.
Date Sep. 2, 1982
PCT FUed Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 432,925
Claims priority, application Luxembourg, Feb. 19, 1981,
U.S. a. 204—225
Int a.3 C25D 17/08
13 Claims
-- 1 1 1
<
FTT
W
ITT!
1. A bipolar electrode electrolysis apparatus, particularly for
the electrolysis of saline solutions, said apparatus comprising:
a frame formed of an electrically insulating material, said
frame comprising a parallelepidedal enclosure defining
1. An electrolysis apparatus comprising
a plurality of electrolytic ceUs (2) positioned side by side,
each cell being adapted to contain a vertically suspended
group of electrodes consisting of anodes (10) alternating
with cathodes (11), these electrodes being provided at
both their sides with a suspension lug (12, 16),
support and connection means (18), positioned on the walls
(17) separating the adjacent cells, for supporting the sus-
pension lugs of the electrodes and for connecting the cells
electrically, these means comprising per wall two rows
(19, 20) of supports (21, 22) extending on both sides of a
median element (23) of electrical connection, each row
comprising supports made of an electroconductive mate-
rial (21) alternating with supports made of an insulating
material (22), and
handling means (5) for introducing a group of electrodes in
a cell and for withdrawing it therefrom,
characterized in that
the supports (21, 22) dominate the median element (23) of
electrical connection,
the lugs (12, 16) of the electrodes suspended in the cells
extend beyond their supports (21, 22), and
the handling means (5) are adapted to lift the electrodes by
the under-side of the extremities of their lugs (12, 16)
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
73S
4,436,607
ANODE SUPERSTRUCTURE OF A FUSED SALT
ELECTROLYTIC CELL AND POT ROOM FITTED OUT
WTTHSAME
Wemcr K. Fisclier, Ventboae, Switxcrlaod, aidgnor to Swiit
Aluminium Ltd., Chippis, Switzerland
FiM Jul. 1, 1982, Scr. No. 394,115
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 14, 1981,
4596/81
lat. a.J C25C 3/10, 3/22
U.S. a. 204—246 11 Claims
1. Anode superstructure of a hooded fused salt electrolytic
cell for producing aluminum which comprises anodes in said
cell, spaced apart anode conductor sections communicating
with said anodes and feeding electric current to said anodes,
and an electrically insulated footbridge positioned between
said anode conductor sections over the length of the cell acces-
sible at least from one end of said cell wherein a housing which
is open at least one end is provided over the footbridge.
4,436,608
NARROW GAP GAS ELECTRODE ELECTROLYTIC
CELL
William R. Bennett, North Olmated, and Thomas M. Qere,
Willowick, both of Ohio, aisignorf to Diamond Shamrock
Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Aog. 26, 1982, Scr. No. 411,895
lat a? C25B 9/02. 11/03
U.S. CL 204—265 5 Claims
♦i"^ 11
41^^. V„.
1. In a gas-diffusion electrode type electrolytic cell having
anode and cathode compartments defmed by a cell separator
and having a gas-diffusion electrode positioned in at least one
of the compartments spaced from the separator, electrolyte
within the compartment being in contact with one surface of
the gas-diffusion electrode and a reactant-containing gas being
in contact with the other surface of said gas-diffusion elec-
trode, the improvement comprising an electrode frame, said
frame having a channel being formed circumferentially upon
the electrode frame, at least the edge portions of said gas-diffu-
sion electrode being received in said channel, said frame in-
cluding at least one retainer received in said channel and at
leut one fastener for securing said retainer to said electrode
frame thereby retaining the gas-diffusion electrode upon the
electrode frame, said frame also including integral passages for
maintaining the gas adjacent to one surface of said gas-diffu-
sion electrode, and separate integral passages for maintaining
electrolyte adjacent to the other surface of said gas-diffusion
electrode.
4,436,609
ELECTROLYTIC CELL HAVING AN ELASTOMERIC
SHEET COVERING THE CELL BASE
Mathcw G. Sobicniak, Lewistoa, N.Y., aaiigDor to J. A. Webb,
Inc., Buffalo, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 17, 1983, Scr. No. 476.131
lat. a.J C25B 1/16. 1/26. 9/00
VJS. a. 204—267 6 Claims
^xx I ryy/x I '/yyy.< • vyy ^ I «^y> y. I VK ^ I w&
1. In an electrolytic cell comprising a cell compartment, a
conductive metal base within said compartment, a flexible
heat-resistant elastomeric base sheet within the bottom portion
of said compartment covering and in contact with said metal
base, a plurality of anode members mounted within said com-
partment in electrical contact with said base member, the
bottom portion of said anode members passing through said
elastomeric sheet and forming a liquid-tight seal separating said
base member from said cell compartment, a plurality of cath-
ode members positioned within said compartment to facilitate
the passage of electrical current through said compartment,
the improvement which comprises the use of a composite,
thermoplastic elastomeric base sheet fabricated of a mixture of
from about 23 to about 73 percent by weight of thermoplastic
polyolefin resin and from about 23 to about 73 percent by
weight of rubber selected from the group of polyolefin rubber,
butyl rubber, neoprene, natural rubber and mixtures thereof
4,436,610
APPARATUS FOR MEASURING ELECTROCHEMICAL
ACnVTTY
SteTCB E. Enzer, Brooklyn, and Robert J. Sarriae, Ann Arbor,
both of Mich., aisigBorf to Traasidyne General Corporatioa,
Ann Arbor, Mich.
Coatiauatioa of Ser. No. 216,458, Dec. 15, 1960, Pat No.
4,397,725. This appUcation Dec 13, 1982, Scr. No. 449,336
lat a.3 GOIN 27/46
VS. a. 204—400 8 Claims
1. In a device for measuring electrochemical activity of a
liquid, said device having spaced indicating and reference
electrodes, and means for introducing an electrolyte solution
to cover the electrodes wherein said electrochemical activity is
determined by the electrical properties developed between the
electrodes in response to the indicating electrode being con-
tacted with the liquid, the improvement comprising:
a generally rectangular thin walled transparent housing
having a generally U-shaped hoUowed out portion therein
terminating in adjacent open ended trough and throat
portions in an upper surface of the housing, said electrodes
having tips disposed in said hollowed out portion, a break-
736
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
able ampule containing the electrolyte solution, rigid
means transverse to the legs of said hollowed out portion
and located adjacent to the lower portion of the trough
supporting said ampule a tape for holding the ampule in
the trough.
4,436,611
PROCESS FOR HEATING RECYCXE GAS IN OIL SHALE
RETORTING
Louis H. Jaquay, Pittsburgh, and Marie Venetti, Bethel Park,
both of Pa., assignors to DniTo Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jul. 1, 1983, Ser. No. 510,291
lat. a.3 ClOG 1/02: ClOB 49/02. Si/06
UA a 208-11 R 10 Claims
4,436,612
CATALYTIC REFORMING PROCESS
Soni O. Oyekan, Piscataway, N J., and George A. Swan, Baton
Rouge, La., assignors to Exxon Research and Engincerins
Co., Florham Parli, N J.
Continuation-in.part of Ser. No. 82,805, Oct 9, 1979. This
appUcation Apr. 6, 1983, Ser. No. 482,515
Int a.3 ClOG 35/06
U.S. a. 208—65 ,5 cta,^
1. In a process for improving the octane quality of a naphtha
m a reforming unit comprised of a plurality of serially con-
nected reactors, inclusive of one or more lead reactors and a
tail reactor, each of which contains a platinum-rhenium cata-
lyst, the naphtha flowing in sequence from one reactor of the
series to another and contacting the catalyst at reforming
conditions in the presence of hydrogen,
the improvement comprising,
providing the tail reactor with a catalyst having a weight
ratio of rhenium:platinum of at least about 1.5:1, while
providing the lead reactors with a catalyst having a
weight ratio of rhenium:platinum of up to about 1.2:1.
4,436,613
TWO STAGE CATALYTIC CRACKING PROCESS
Scott M. Sayles; Leonce F. Castagnos, Jr., both of Nederland;
Charles H. Schrader, Groves, all of Tex.; Edward W. Dilling-
ham, Ontario, Calif., and Richard P. Scott, deceased, late of
Groves, Tex. (by Candice Chord Scott, executrix), assignors to
Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 446,812
Int a^ ClOG 51/02: BOIJ B/26. 8/28
U.S. a. 208-74 15Cl«inu
1. A process for heating recycle gas for the indirect retorting
of oil from fresh oil shale after the oil has been removed from
the recycle gas, utilizing the residual carbon in hot oil depleted
shale, said process comprising the steps of:
charging hot, oil depleted shale into the top of a vertical
shaft furnace for descending passage therethrough;
supplying sufficient oxygen containing gas to said vertical
shaft furnace for the combustion of the residual carbon in
said hot, oil depleted shale in the upper portion of said
vertical shaft furnace to generate hot spent shale, combus-
tion gases and heat energy which is absorbed by the hot
spent shale;
recovering the heat energy from said hot, spent shale in the
lower portion of said shaft furnace for heating said recycle
gas and for cooling said spent shale; and
returning at least a portion of the cooled spent shale from the
bottom of said vertical shaft furnace to the top thereof for
heat absorption during the combustion of the carbon
content of the oil depleted shale in order to moderate the
temperature of combustion.
1. In a process for the fluid catalytic cracking of heavy
hydrocarbon feedstocks containing catalyst poisons wherein
spent catalyst from said catalytic cracking reaction is stripped
of volatile hydrocarbons prior to regeneration and stripped
catalyst is regenerated by burning coke therefrom with an
oxygen-containing gas, the improvement which comprises
contacting said heavy hydrocarbon feedstock in a first fluid-
ized catalytic cracking reaction zone with a zeolite type crack-
ing catalyst having a substantial but relatively low catalytic
cracking activity as compared with fresh catalyst, passing
stripped catalyst from said first reaction zone to a first dense
phase fluidized bed catalyst regeneration zone of a catalyst
regeneration system comprising multiple catalyst regeneration
zones, recovering a gas oil fraction from products of reaction
of said first reaction zone, and contacting said gas oil fraction
in a second fluidized catalytic cracking zone with a zeolite type
cracking catalyst of relatively high catalytic activity as com-
pared with the catalyst in said first reaction zone, passing
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
737
stripped catalyst from said second cracking zone to a second
dense phase fluidized bed catalyst regeneration zone, supply-
ing sufficient oxygen-containing regeneration gas to said re-
generation zones to provide an excess of oxygen over that
required for complete combustion of coke to carbon dioxide,
discharging flue gases substantially free from carbon monoxide
from said regeneration zones, adding fresh catalyst to said
catalyst regenerated in said second regeneration zone, with-
drawing used catalyst from said second regeneration zone and
introducing said used catalyst into said first regeneration zone
as the source of catalyst therefor, and discharging used catalyst
from said first regeneration zone.
4,436,614
PROCESS FOR DEW AXING AND DESULFURIZING
OILS
Hazel C. Olbrich, Rodeo; Dennis J. O'Rear, Petaluma, and John
A. Zakarian, Richmond, all of Calif., assignors to Chevron
Research Company, San Francisco, Calif.
FUed Oct. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 433,620
Int a.3 ClOG 45/02. 65/12
U.S. a. 208—89 7 Qainu
noo iioo 1400 1*00 laoo tooo
Moun ONtrWAM
1. A process for treating hydrocarbon containing feeds in a
single reaction vessel, comprising:
(a) contacting in a desulfurizing reaction zone a hydrocarbo-
naceous feed boiling from about 35* C. to 650* C. with a
desulfurizing catalyst under desulfurizing conditions
which comprise a hydrocarbon partial pressure above
about 30 psia;
(b) mixing the effluent of said desulfurizing reaction zone
with a diluent to form an eflluent and diluent gas mixture;
and
(c) contacting said desulfurizing zone effluent and diluent
gjBS mixture with a nonhydrogenating dewaxing catalyst,
which comprises an intermediate pore size molecular
sieve, under dewaxing conditions, which comprise a hy-
drocarbon partial pressure in said mixture of less than
about 30 psia.
4,436,615
PROCESS FOR REMOVING SOUDS FROM COAL TAR
Norman S. Boodman, Penn Hills Township, Allegheny County;
Elvin L. Farr, Greensburg; Robert J. Osterholm, Murrysville,
all of Pa., and Neulan B. Green, III, Birmingham, Ala., assign-
ors to United States Steel Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed May 9, 1983, Ser. No. 493,118
Int a.J ClOC 7/00; ClOG 31/00. 31/09. 31/10
VJS. a. 208—177 28 Claims
1. A process for removing solids from coal tar for the prepa-
ration of a coal tar pitch containing liquid comprising (1)
centrifuging said coal tar at a suitable viscosity to separate
large particle size solids and liquid fraction from a first liquid
fraction containing pitch and small particle size solids, and (2)
filtering said large particle size solids and liquid fraction while
maintaining said fraction at a suitable viscosity to thereby
produce a second pitch containing liquid fraction which is
substantially free of solids, and a densified readily handleable
large particle size solid material.
4,436,616
PROCESS FOR THE BENEHOATION OF PHOSPHATE
ORES
PhiUppe Dufonr, Les Hauts-Booleanx, 30740 Saint-Laurent Le
Minlen Jean-Jacques PrcdaU, 2, me de Blampiefort 78310
Elanconrt both of France; Guy Ranchin, deceased, late of
VersaUles, France; by Marc Ranchin, legal heir, and by Gene-
vieve Ranchin, legal heir, both of 16 rue Albert Joly, Ver-
saiUes, France
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 204,520, Nov. 6, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,652
Int a.3 B03D 1/06
US. a. 209—3 28 Claims
t
noM
I.
■Mr
31
-!-•
imiTiotr
,a
^
cmof
TU
B
-M
agnm
1
<^
Funnn
«4
■ 1
M
-«
cMWtn
^a
1. A process for the beneficiation of phosphate ore contain-
ing a magnesia-rich carbonate-containing gangue and a silica-
containing gangue comprising:
(a) washing and classifying the phosphate ore to form a first
fraction comprising primary fines and removing the pri-
mary fines from the phosphate ore;
(b) subjecting the phosphate ore to controlled attrition dur-
ing a period of not less than 3 minutes to remove at least
a portion of the magnesia-rich carbonate-containing
gangue from the phosphate ore particles;
(c) separating the particles resulting from (b) into a fine and
a coarse fraction; and
(d) subjecting the coarse fraction obtained in (c) to a plural-
ity of froth flotations to remove the remaining magnesia-
rich carbonate-containing gangue and the silica-contain-
ing gangue and to recover a concentrated phosphate
product, said froth flotations including a phosphate flota-
tion, a silica flotation and an anionic carbonate flotation.
4,436,617
FROTH FLOTATION ORE BENEHCUTION PROCESS
UTILIZING ENHANCED GASinCATION AND FLOW
TECHNIQUES
WUcy I. Moore, Glenolden, and Ronald L. Tassoni, Milmont
Park, both of Pa., assignors to Cocal, Inc., Holmes, Pa.
FUed Jul. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 401,009
Int 0.3 B03B 1/00
U.S. a. 209—3 32 Claims
15. A method of beneficiating ores, comprising the steps of:
classifying said ore to a predetermined size range;
mixing said classified ore with a frothing agent to form a
slurry;
flowing said slurry through a mixing chamber;
injecting gas under pressure into said slurry in said mixing
chamber to form a gasified slurry;
establishing in a closed vessel a fluid medium at a predeter-
mined operating level;
738
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
expeUing said gasified slurry into said Ouid medium below chamber; and (d) separating means for separating the pelletized
said level for percoUtmg through the medium and causing coal particles from said slurry upon discharge from said pump
"^^f^S^^^'^'^^O'^'^P^io^ted below the turfBce slurry is substantially reduced,
of the medium a second ore fraction tending to sink in the
fluid medium;
withdrawing said froth from said vessel;
MO I
■.nin^"
-^^
separating said froth into a gaseous component and a non-
gaseous component:
compressing said gaseous component and reinjecting it into
said slurry in said mixing chamber;
separating said non-gaseous component into ore solids and a
liquid; and
exhausting said second ore fraction from said vessel through
said underflow siphon.
4,436,618
RECOVERY OF COAL FROM COAL HANDLING
OPERATIONS
Geoffrey R. Rigjby, Charleatown, and Thomas G. Callcott, May*
field, both of Australia, aarignors to The Broken Hill Propri*
etary Company Limited, Melbonme, Anttralla
ContinBatioB-in-part of Scr. No. 127,107, Mar. 4, 1980,
•budoned. This appUcation Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,779
Claims priority, appUcation Australia, Mar. 5, 1979, PD7887
Int a.) B03D 3/06
VJS. a. 209—5 13 cteiBu
T
>t
8. A system for recovering coal in the form of pellets from a
particulate coal bearing slurry comprising (a) a pipeUne for
carrying the slurry; G>) a centrifugal turbulent flow slurry
pomp having a pumping chamber connected to said pipeline
for pumping said slurry; (c) feed means for introducing an
appropriate hydrophobic Uquid to the pumping chamber of
said pump simultaneously with the introduction of said slurry
into said pumping chamber in a metered quantity sufficient to
achieve substantially intimate contact between the hydropho-
bic liquid and the coal particles in said slurry, said pump means
and said feed means co-operating to pass said slurry and said
hydrophobic liquid through said pump in a single pass and to
subject the coal particles to extreme turbulence within the
pumping chamber to rapidly coat the coal particles with the
hydrophobic Uquid and to repeatedly bring the coal particles
into contact with other coal particles in the pumping chamber
to agglomerate and peUetize the coal particles in the pumping
4,436,619
METHOD OF SORTING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING THIS METHOD
Ut N. PetroT, Leninsky proipekt, 153, k?. 35; VUctor A. Ado-
nlet, nUtia Starykh bolahcrikoT, 98, kr. 51, and Valery I.
KoBOBOT, Leninsky proipekt, 151, kv. 18, aU of VoroBcih.
U.S.S.R.
FUed Aug. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 291,956
CUdms priority, appUcation U.S.S.IL, Jub. 6, 1978, 2639123;
Aug. 28, 1980, 2980518
Int a.3 B07C 5/344
U.S. a. 209—573 3 Claims
1. An apparatus for sorting semiconductor devices, compris-
mg:
means for loading semiconductor devices having an outlet
portion with a receiving end and a deUvery end;
a contact mechanism adjoining said loading means, underly-
ing said outlet portion, and having two slots for receiving
semiconductor devices from said deUvery end of said
outlet portion, each of said slots having a outlet;
means for osciUating said outlet portion so that the delivery
end is moved between a flrst Umit position aligned with
one of said slots and a second limit position aligned with a
second of said slots;
abutment means carried by said deUvery end of said outlet
portion of said loading means for altematingly closing said
outlets of said slots during movement of said outlet por-
tion of said loading means;
said contact mechanism having contact elements associated
with each of said slots;
means for moving said contact elements into and out of
engagement with leads of semiconductor devices loaded
into said slots;
means for measuring the electric parameters of semiconduc-
tor devices electrically connected to said contact elemenu
of said contact mechanism;
receptacles for receiving semiconductor devices; and
conveying means underlying said contact mechanism for
receiving semiconductor devices from said slots and for
sorting out semiconductor devices into re^>ective ones of
said receptacles.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
739
4,436,620
INTEGRAL HYDRAUUC CIRCUIT FOR
HEMODIALYSIS APPARATUS
Marc BeUotti, WUuetiu; Richard P. Goldhaber, LibcrtyrUle;
Earl G. PhiUips, Harrington, and Theodore H. Toch, Stream-
wood, aU of ni., asflgBon to Baxter TraTcaol Laboratories,
lac, Deerfleld, III.
CoBtiBuatioB of Ser. No. 794,755, May 19, 1977, abaadoaed.
This appUcatioB Jnl. 13, 1979, Scr. No. 57,387
iBt a.3 BOID 31/00
VS. d 210—90 16 Clains
a liquid inlet in communication with said interior of said
cover, the improvement comprising:
hold-down means pivotally carried by said housing top wall
and movable between a first lowered position wherein
said hold-down means overlays a portion of each nitering
means to retain said filtering means within said housing
top wall openings and a second raised position subsequent
to the removal of said cover from said housing wherein
said hold-down means is pivoted with respect to said
housing top wall to a position spaced from said Altering
means to effect removal of said filtering means; the hold-
down means including:
tw
1. In a hydraulic circuit member for use with a membrane
diffusion device, which comprises a unitary member defining a
plurality of blood-receiving chambers, and conduit means
communicating between said blood-receiving chambers, for
directing, receiving, and processing blood passing through said
membrane diffusion device, in which at least one of said blood
receiving chambers defines a transversely-enlarged upper
chamber portion connected by a step wall which abruptly
narrows the bottom end of said enlarged chamber area to a
lower chamber portion of lesser transverse dimension, and
points of communication of said conduit means with said
chamber, including an inlet spaced from the bottom of said
chamber and communicating directly with said enlarged upper
chamber portion in an upwardly-pointing direction through
said step wall, and an outlet positioned adjacent the end of said
lower portion remote from said enlarged, upper portion of said
chamber, said chamber defining vent means for gases at its
upper end and constituting an improved bubble trap for blood
when blood is introduced through said inlet and withdrawn
through said outlet.
4,436,621
PRESSURE VESSEL HAVING A PLURALITY OF
nLTERING ELEMENTS
Charles W. Picker, Weat BlooBifleld, Mkh., aasigBor to Oak*
laad Prodncts, Ibc., Pontiac, Mich.
Filed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,188
iBt a.3 BOID 29/26. 35/16
U.S. a 210-232 3 Claims
1. In a filter of the type comprising:
a housing having side and bottom walls and a top waU
spaced from said bottom wall, said housing having a liquid
outlet, sid housing top waU having at leut two spaced
openings formed therein;
removable, bag-shaped fUtering means for straining a liquid
having an open upper end fitted into each top waU open-
ing, each filtering means being supported by said top waU
at its open end and projecting into the interior of said
housing below said top wall;
a removable cover enclosing said filter housing, the interior
of said cover defining a flow passage communicating with
each filtering means open end; and
a ring member pivotally mounted to said top wall such that
said ring member may be pivoted with respect to said top
wall from said first lowered position to said second raised
position, said ring member overlaying said filtering means
when in said second lowered position; and
clamping means secured to said top wall for clamping a
portion of said ring member to said top wall at a point
angularly spaced from the point of pivotable movement
for said ring member when said ring member is in said
second lowered position.
4,436,622
EDUCTOR TRUCK
Anthony V. Petrettl, Whitestone, N.Y., aadgnor to Metro Hoist
A Body Co., Ibc, Whitestoae, N.Y.
DiriiloB of Ser. No. 40,551, May 21, 1979, Pat No. 4^89,314.
This appUcatiOB Mar. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 478356
iBt a.i BOID 21/00; C02C 1/18
US. a. 210—232 1 Claia
1. An eductor truck comprising a frame, a settling tank
pivotally mounted on said frame, said settling tank having an
eductor unit thereon, storage unit means mounted on said
frame on each side of said settling tank, means for lifting said
settling tank relative to sai^ frame and between said storage
means whereby the storage means will not interfere with said
740
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
lifting operation, said lifting means comprising hydraulic
means mounted beneath said settling tank and between said
storage means, a walkway located above each of said storage
means, a control valve mounted on said settling tank for oper-
ating said eductor unit, said control valve being operable from
a point remote from its position on the settling tank, a hydrau-
lic motor mounted adjacent the settling tank to operate the
control valve, the hydraulic motor being remotely controlled,
said settling tank having a rear door which is pivotally
mounted to open, holding devices mounted around the door to
hold the door closed and releasable latch means being pro-
vided to prevent the door from being opened after the holding
devices are removed, said latch means comprising a latch arm
movable from a position against the door to hold the door
closed to a position away from the door to allow the door to
swing open, said latch arm being hydraulically operated by a
hydraulic motor from a position beneath the setUing tank, said
hydraulic motor being mounted on and depending from said
settling tank and located between said storage means and a
pivotally mounted, telescopically extendable tank supporting
means mounted on said frame forward of said settling tank
movable to a position beneath the settling tank when it is tilted
to hold the tank up should said hydraulic motor fail.
4,436,623
ADSORBENT CARTRIDGE
John S. Cullen, Buffalo; Samuel A. Incorria, and James A. Vogt,
both ofTonawanda, all of N.Y., assignors to Multiform Desic-
caats. Inc., Buffalo, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,756
Int. aj BOID 27/08
VJS, a. 210—282 21 Qaims
1. An adsorbent cartridge for mounting in a housing having
a wall comprising a flexible porous casing including a substan-
tially cylindrical flexible porous fabric wall and a flexible
porous first end wall at one end of said substantially cylindrical
wall and a flexible porous second end wall at the opposite end
of said substantially cylindrical wall, a rim formed by combin-
ing the edge portions of said substantially cylindrical flexible
porous fabric wall and said second end wall, adsorbent in said
casing, said rim extending radially outwardly from said sub-
stantially cylindrical wall to provide a seal with said wall of
said housing, and said substantially cylindrical flexible porous
fabric wall being adapted to bulge outwardly into engagement
with said wall of said housing to provide a seal therewith when
opposing forces are applied toward each other on said first and
second end walls.
4,436,624
C»T METHOD OF CONVERTING AND SEPARATING
SUBSTANCES CONTAINED, DISSOLVED OR
DISSOLVABLE IN A CARRIER LIQUID
Eberhard Kreuzburg, M611n; Dietrich J. Von Der Pahle, Bonn;
Rolf Monsfaeimen Ernst Pfleiderer, both of Darmstadt, and
Tilman Taeger, Griesheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Universal Gcsellschaft fiir Umwelttechnik mbH,
MSlln and RShm GmbH, Darmstadt, both of, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 246,933
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 27.
1980, 3011844
Int a.3 C02F 1/24
VJS. a. 210—632 4 Claims
1. A method of recovering a high molecular weight material
from water containing a dissolved proteinaceous substance,
said method comprising the steps of:
(a) circulating the water containing said substance through a
first jet immersion reactor in which the water containing
the substance is forced through a small cross-section pas-
sage into a vessel containing the water and the substance,
and of larger cross section, the circulation being effected
with a two-phase pump having a suction side connected to
said vessel and a discharge side connected to said passage,
thereby breaking down molecules of said substance;
(b) passing water from said vessel containing said substance
in a dissolved and broken-down state into a second two-
phase pump and circulating it through a second jet immer-
sion reactor having a respective passage communicating
with the discharge side of said second pump and opening
into a vessel of larger cross section containing liquid and
communicating with the suction side of said second pump,
thereby causing the frothing of the broken-down sub-
stance in said liquid;
(c) adding enzymes to at least one of said reactors for pro-
moting the breakdown of said substance therein;
(d) adding a flocculating agent to at least said second reactor
for promoting the separation of broken-down substances
from said liquid; and
(e) separating the broken-down substance from the liquid of
said second reaction by flotation.
4,436,625
METHOD FOR FURIHCATION OF CRESIDINE
SULFONIC ACID BY SOLVENT EXTRACnON
Henry M. Grotta, Delaware, and Perry J. Gangiian, Colnmbiis,
both of Ohio, assignors to Bufhlo Color Corp., West Pater-
son, N J.
FUed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,607
Int a.} BOID 11/04
VS. a. 210—634 16 Claims
1. A method for removing residual cresidine from impure
p-cresidine sulfonic acid which impure p-cresidine sulfonic
acid contains from above about 2 parts per billion to about 1500
parts per million of cresidine, said method comprising contact-
ing an aqueous solution of the impure p-cresidine sulfonic acid
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
741
with sufficient liquid hydrocarbon of from five to eighteen
carbon atoms for a sufficient time to extract the cresidine from
the p-cresidine sulfonic acid to a concentration of less than two
parts per billion of cresidine in the p-cresidine sulfonic acid.
4,436,626
CAPILLARY DIAPHRAGMS FOR USE IN
DIAHLTRATION
Roland Schnabel, Hofheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
JENAer Gluwerk Schott A Gen., Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 970,795, Dec. 18, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,187
Qaims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 23,
1977, 2757673
Int. a.3 BOID 13/00
U.S. a. 210—652 3 Qaims
-#^n
tromagnetic means to cause said impurites to be attracted
to said electromagnetic means; and
lutMtric mttm
tTntetmt
fMtlUllirTIC 9»l
tLierooirm
Itrm coKUimiii
iittntrictn.r
4rT»tcTtii€ iitrv»irif$
mmi luuii TIC mum me
ii.rcT»»ir$ii tdm i»rt ee»uer
HMnritB
Muo*! eenTtcr
BtTwitH uAmtrie
mtAia tut Uttm
9iPi0iTf Ht^i/HiritS
f»Om UAttltTlC MgAMt
mmiiTilt
lutifric
(c) withdrawing from contact with said molten salt bath said
encased electromagnetic means having said impurities
clinging thereto by magnetic attraction.
1. A method of treating blood comprising providing a device
having a housing with an inlet, a first outlet and a second
outlet, a plurality of capillary diaphragms of porous glass
material having means for preventing coagulation of blood,
said means for preventing coagulation comprising a chemical
surface modification of the glass material with molecules com-
prising a radical selected from a group consisting of silanol,
silanes and hydrosilicons in combination with a functional
group being selected from a group consisting of — CH3, — CN,
—OH, — SO3H, — NH2. — N(+)R3, -NO2. -COOR,
— C
\
H
— COOH, — SH, —NO and — NC, and means for sealing the
diaphragms in the housing so that a poriion of the blood enter-
ing through the inlet and not passing through the diaphragms
leaves the housing through the first outlet while a portion
passing through the diaphragms exits the housing through the
second outlet, introducing blood at the inlet and removing
portions from each of the first and second outiets so that the
blood is treated without any coagulation occurring.
4,436,627
MAGNETIC REMOVAL OF IMPURITIES FROM
MOLTEN SALT BATHS
Matthew J. McMonigle, New Kensington, Pa., assignor to Alu-
minum Company of America, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,588
Int. a.3 BOID 35/06
VS. a. 210-695 2 Claims
1. A process for removing ferromagnetic impurities from a
molten salt bath used for electrolytic reduction of metal salt
which comprises:
(a) encasing in a magnetically transparent quartz material,
electromagnetic means capable of attracting said ferro-
magnetic impurities;
(b) contacting said molten salt bath with said encased elec-
4,436,628
POLYPHOSPHORIC AOD AS A SCALE AND
CORROSION INHIBITOR
Paul H. Ralston, Bethel Park, and Sandra L. Whitney, North
Fayette Township, Oakdale County, both of Pa., assignors to
Calgon Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 408,335, Aug. 16, 1982,
abandoned. This appUcation Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 419,868
Int. a.J C02F 5/08
U.S. a. 210—697 2 Claims
/
■^
-^t"**
y
/
J '
i m
/
/
V
^
S
\
••»s
1
J
\
s
h\
s
•
S
^
ffl
1. A process for the inhibition of scale and corrosion forma-
tion in an aqueous system containing calcium, carbonate, and
bicarbonate ions, comprising adding to the system about 0. 1 to
100 ppm, by weight, based on the total aqueous content of said
system, of about 110 to 113% neutralized polyphosphoric acid
prepared by adding 110 to 115% polyphosphoric acid to an
alkaline mediuin selected from the group consisting of sodium
hydroxide and potassium hydroxide.
1040 O.G.— 28
742
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,629
METHOD FOR RECOVERING USEFUL PRODUCTS
FROM WASTE PRODUCTS OBTAINED WHEN
MANUFACTURING ALUMINIUM FLUORIDE
LcBBart H. A. Bcrgliiiid, HeUn^bors, Sweden, iMigiior to Bol-
idea Aktkbolag, StockJiolm, Sweden
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Scr. No. 333,024
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden, Jan. 16, 1981, 8100218
Int a^ C02F 1/60
U.S. a 21(K-712 9 cialBii
ZL
;^=^
JL-.
1m-
JUi.
T"
y" J
aj -,-i-i
^^^V
hquids, a first of the Uquids being less dense than a second and
more dense liquid, said apparatus comprising
(a) an upright liquid container;
(b) a liquid inlet into the container for introduction of the
mixture into the container;
(c) a lower liquid outiet adjacent the bottom of the container
for passing the more dense liquid from the container;
(d) a low float in the container and at an elevational level
above the level of the lower outlet;
(e) means in said lower outlet and operatively connected to
said low float for controlling flow through said outlet;
(0 an upper liquid outlet from the container, said upper
outlet being at an elevational level above the elevational
level of the low float;
(g) a second float in the container and at an elevational level
between the low float and the upper liquid outlet, said low
and second floats being of similar specific gravities which
are more dense than the first Uquid but less dense than the
second liquid; and
(h) means in said upper outlet operatively connected only to
said second float for controlling flow only through said
upper ouUet and being independent of flow control in the
lower outlet, said second float and upper outlet flow
control means being connected in parallel with said low
float and lower outlet flow control means.
:f^
1. A method for recovering useable products from waste
products produced in the manufacture of aluminum fluoride
from aluminum hydroxide and fluorosilicic acid, which com-
prises the steps of
(a) preparing a first solution by dissolving silica precipitate
produced in the manufacture of aluminum fluoride in a
strongly basic hydroxide;
(b) preparing a second solution by dissolving aluminum
hydroxide with a strongly basic hydroxide;
(c) combining solutions (a) and (b) with waste mother Uquor
from the manufacture of aluminum fluoride, the propor-
tions of solution (a), solution (b) and waste mother liquor
being such that the pH value of the mixture lies between
about 10 and 14, whereupon the silica content of the waste
products is precipitated as a silicoaluminate;
and
(d) separating the precipitated silicoaluminate and recover-
ing a clarified residue solution.
4,436,631
MULTIPLE PARTICLE WASHING SYSTEM AND
METHOD OF USE
Henry A. Graham, Jr., Annandale; Johnna B. Hawk, Rocky
HUl, and Roiemary K. Chachowski, ManriUe, aU of N J.,
aaaignofi to Ortho Diagnoitic Syitems Inc., Raritan, N J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 290^67, Aug. 5, 1981. This
appUcation Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,022
The portion of the term of tUi patent snbieqnent to Mar. 6,
2001, has been iH«<.i«t.n^
Int CL3 BOID 2J/26
UA a 210-772 5Ctal,„
4,436,630
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEPARATING A
MIXTURE OF TWO LIQUIDS
Edward M. Andenon, 2620 E. Medicine Lake Blvd., Minneapo-
lis, Minn. 55441
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,344
Int CL^ C02F J /4a- BOID J2/0a 21/24
UA a. 210-744 lOCIaima
<^
1. Apparatus for physically separating a mixture of two
1. A method for washing and collecting particles having a
particular density or sedimentation rate from a popuUtion of
particles and contained in a first fluid for use with a system
comprising 1) an outer centrifuge tube having an open top end
and a closed bottom end for containing a wash solution and 2)
an inner tube, inseruble into said outer tube, said inner tube
forming a chamber for receiving fluids and having an upper
portion with a first diameter and a lower portion with a second
diameter smaller than said first diameter but sufficiently large
so that substantially all fluids placed in said chamber will freely
flow therethrough solely on the basis of normal gravitational
forces, said chamber being fimnel shaped between said first and
second diameters whereby a smoothly decreasing wall diame-
ter is formed from said first to said second diameters, said
method comprising the steps of:
placing in said outer tube a wash solution having a density at
the minimum substantially equal to that of the fmt fluid
and intermediate the density of at least two different parti-
cles contained in the first fluid;
inserting said inner tube into said outer tube containing the
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
743
wash solution whereby the wash solution level rises to be
a level within the inner tube;
layering said first fluid containing the particles to be washed
and collected in said inner tube chamber on top of said
wash solution thereby forming an interface in said inner
tube and a centrifuge combination;
centrifiiging said centrifiige tube combination for moving at
least one of the different particles through said wash
solution to a level where the density of said second fluid is
substantially the same as that of the particles; and
if said particles have moved out of said inner tube, removing
said inner tube, the first fluid and the second fluid as
required whereby the desired particles are obtained; or
if said desired particles are contained within said inner tube,
removing said inner tube with said first and second fluids
contained therein and dispensing said first and second
fluids whereby the desired particles are obtained.
4,436,632
CLARIFIER SKIMMER
Harold J. Beard, P.O. Box 3838, Baton Rouge, La. 70821
Continnation-in-part of Ser. No. 370,802, Apr. 22, 1982, Pat. No.
4,383,922, which is a continnation-bi-part of Ser. No. 316,112,
Oct 29, 1981, Pat No. 4,362,625. This appUcation May 16,
1983, Ser. No. 494,641
Int CU BOID 21/00
VS. CL 210—776 2 Claims
,J!>i^^^
1. A process for clarifying a waste water stream comprising:
(a) circuitously flowing said waste water stream in an oxida-
tion ditch having an elongated clarifier positioned therein
with its front section heading into the flow of said waste
water stream and positioned to decrease the cross-sec-
tional area of said waste water stream in said oxidation
ditch where said clarifier is located,
(b) diverting a portion of said waste water stream into said
clarifier,
(c) causing said portion to flow at a rate and distance suffi-
cient to generate said portion into a clarified phase and a
sludge phase,
(d) causing a surface section of said portion to strike a baffle
means extending between the sides of said clarifier
wherein said clarifier has ports in its sidewalk to allow
surface fluids to flow out of said clarifier, said baffle means
being positioned to divert said surface section toward said
ports,
(e) removing said sludge phase from said clarifier, and
(0 removing said clarified phase from said clarifier.
side and rear side of the filter cloth such that the Uquid
portion of the suspension flows through said filter cloth to
become filtrate and a soUds portion of the suspension
collects on said filter cloth u filter cake, said cloth having
Uquid impermeable zones;
maintaining said filter cloth in a predetermined podtion
during said passing step;
intermittently backwashing the liquid portion in a reverse
direction through said filter cloth;
allowing said filter cloth to be displaced away from said
predetermined position during said backwuhing step;
collecting the solids portion from said front side of the filter
cloth on an accumulator grating thereby clearing the
soUds portion deposited on the front side of the filter
cloth,
and
subsequently passing a liquid portion of the suspension again
through Uie filter cloth with said liquid portion flowing
through the portion of said grating which overlies said
liquid impermeable zones without dislodging filter cake
on said grating.
4,436,634
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING CELLS
BY SEDIMENTATION VELOCTTY
John R. WeUs, Los Angeles Coonty, Calif., aMignor to Wcicor,
IuCm Logan, Utah
FUed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,816
Int a.i BOID 21/24
U.S. a 210—800 16
4,436,633
FILTRATION THICKENING METHOD AND
APPARATUS
EU L RoUnsky, 66 Lytton Blvd., Toronto, Ontario M4R 1L3,
and Darid H. Laing, 16A Henry St, Toronto, Ontario M5T
1X1, both of Canada
FUed Aag. 14, 1981, Scr. No. 292,737
Int a.» BOID 29/16, 29/32. 29/38
VS. a 210—791 21 Claims
14. A process for filtering a liquid-soUds suspension compris-
ing:
pasting a Uquid portion of the suspension through a filter
cloth by means of a pressure diffierential between the front
M 41
1. Apparatus for separating cells of differing sedimenution
velocities, comprising a closed separation vessel having an
open and unobstructed interior and adapted to be mounted for
tUting from and back to horizontal position; a reUtively very
small lower port located at the lowermost level of the interior
of said vessel when said vessel is in its tUted position; a similar
upper port located at the uppermost level of the interior of said
vessel when said vessel is in its tUted position, the opening of at
least the lower port into the interior of the vessel being offiwt
from the interior of the vessel; and flow distributing means
having flow distributing structure located between the lower
744
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
port and the interior of the vessel and offset from the interior
of the vessel for fanning out and decreasing the velocity of the
incoming flow and thereby reducing the tendency of incoming
liquid to disturb isodense layers of liquid contained in the
vessel.
16. A method for separating cells of differing sedimentation
velocities, comprising the steps of tilting from horizontal posi-
tion a separation vessel constructed in accordance with claim
1; introducing a density gradient liquid through the lower port
and distributing its flow by means of a baffle or expansion
chamber or both before and as it enters the interior of the
vessel; filling the vessel with said gradient liquid until flow out
of the upper port begins; loading the vessel with a cell suspen-
sion containing cells which are to be separated according to
differences in sedimentation velocity, said loading being by
way of the flow distributing means so said cell suspension will
be distributed before and as it enters the interior of the vessel;
moving the vessel back to horizontal position so that the iso-
dense layers of the gradient liquid decrease in thickness with
respect to their thickness when the vessel is in the tilted posi-
tion; leaving the vessel in the horizontal position for a sufficient
period of time to allow the cells in the cell suspension to sepa-
rate on the gradient according to their respective sedimenta-
tion velocities; again tilting the separation vessel so as to in-
crease the thickness of the isodense layers; and collecting the
isodense layers of gradient liquid as various fractions, by re-
moving the gradient liquid through the lower port.
higher is obtained and the useful life of said surface filter is
extended.
4,436,636
INVERT EMULSION WELL SERViaNG FLUIDS
William M. Camicom, Houston, Tex., assignor to NL Indus-
tries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,652
Int a.3 C09K 7/06
UA a. 252-8.5 P 4ci.i^
1. An mvert emulsion well servicing fluid consisting essen-
tially of:
a liquid hydrocarbon oleaginous phase, an aqueous phase,
the volume ratio of said oleaginous phase to said aqueous
phase being from about 99/1 to about 1/1, an invert emul-
sifying agent, from about 1 to about 20 ppb of said fluid of
a finely divided, solid, particulate, linear, high density
polyethylene having an average particle diameter of from
about 15 to about 40 microns, said particles being gener-
ally spherically shaped, said polyethylene having a density
of at least about 0.94 g/cc, and from about 0.5 to about 4
ppb of said fluid of an organophilic clay.
4,436,635
PROCESS FOR nLTRATION OF OIL AND GAS WELL
TREATMENT FLUIDS
Howard Abrams, Plainview, and Barrington T. Allen, Bayrille,
both of N.Y., assignors to Pall Corporation, Glen Cove, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 305,070, Sep. 24, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 405,938
lat a.J BOID 27/06
U.S. a 210-806 20 Claims
t « % or nwTcus (of tow.
NUMGR pvcaENrxstKROcms
H VXL
0 O»W4O90a070a090l00
»0r«MTICUSOF TOUU. MiaiaER PKESOrr) <SMCROMTERS
IN SEE
1. A filtering process for obtaining a clear filtrate effluent
from a turbid oil or gas well treatment fluid contaminated with
up to about 2,000 parts per million of solid particulates com-
prised of drilling and formation debris having particle sizes in
the range of from about 0.1 to about 30 micrometers compris-
ing passing said treatment fluid through a surface filter having
an absolute pore rating of about 40 micrometers or less at a
flow density of from about 0.05 to about 0.5 gallons per minute
per square foot of filter surface such that (1) initially at least a
portion of said particulates is collected on the upstream surface
of said surface filter and begins forming a filter cake with
enhanced capability for removing particulates smaller than the
absolute pore rating of said surface filter and (2) thereafter said
treatment fluid is filtered through a filter composite of (i) said
surface filter and (ii) said filter cake, whereby a clear filtrate
effluent substantially free of solid particulates having particle
sizes in the range of from about 0. 1 to about 30 micrometers or
4,436,637
FABRIC SOFTENING HEAVY DUTY LIQUID
DETERGENT CONTAINING A MIXTURE OF WATER
INSOLUBLE SOAP AND CLAY
Pallassana N. Ramacbandran, Robbinsrille, and Kenneth S.
Peterson, Keasbey, both of N J., assignors to Colgate-Palmol*
ive Company, New York, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 449,271
Int a.3 CUD 3/12: D06M 13/24
U.S. a. 252—8.7 g Claims
1. A fabric softening heavy duty liquid detergent which
comprises 5 to 20% of synthetic organic detergent selected
from the group consisting of anionic, nonionic and amphoteric
detergents, and mixtures thereof, 5 to 35% of builder salt, and
mixtures thereof, 8 to 20% of a swelling bentonite, 0.5 to 10%
of water insoluble metal soap, and 40 to 70% of water.
4,436,638
ADDITIVE COMPOSITION FOR RELEASE OF STUCK
DRILL PIPE
Thad O. Walker, Humble, and Patricia C. Matthews, Houston,
both of Tex., assignors to Exxon Research A Engineering Co.,
Florham Park, N J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 254,424, Apr. 15, 1981. This
appUcation Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,110
Int QV E21B 23/00
UA a. 252-8.55 R 8 Claims
1. An improved method of releasing a stuck drill string in the
borehole of an underground formation during drilling opera-
tions employing a drilling fluid which comprises contacting
said stuck drill string with an additive composition effective to
reduce the annular pressure exerted by the drilling fluid against
the stuck drill string and to release said stuck drill string, said
additive composition being comprised of from 5 to 18 weight
percent of a propoxylated C18-C32 alcohols mud dehydrating
agent represented by the formula:
ST' 1.
t— f-C— C-0-|— H
wherein R represents from 18 to 32 carbon alkoxy groups and
n is an integer of from 18 to 35; 8 to 20 weight percent of an
oU-soluble C8-C22 fatty acid ester of a polyol or polyol anhy-
dride emulsifier-wetting agent; and, a liquid hydrocarbon dUu-
MarCH 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
745
ent, said weight percent being based on the total weight of said
composition.
4 436 639
AMMONIUM SALTS OF POLYMALEIC AODS AND USE
AS CORROSION INHIBITORS IN WATER-IN-OIL
EMULSIONS
Knut Oppenlaender, Ludwigshafen; Karl Stork, Lampertheim,
and Klaus Barthold, Mannheim, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,284
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 15,
1981, 3119376
Int a.3 C09K 7/02; C23F 11/14
U.S. a. 252—8.55 E 5 Cbdms
1. A polymaleic acid salt obtained by reacting a polymaleic
acid having a molecular weight of 200 to 1500 with an amine
having the formula
R2
R'— N— R3
in which R' and R^ are the same or different and are H or
C9-C2oalkyl or C9-C2oalkenyl radical and R^ is a C9-C2oaIkyl
or C9-C20 alkenyl radical.
4. A water-in-oil emulsion containing from 100 ppm to
10,000 ppm of a salt of claim 1.
4,436,640
GLYCOLATE DITHIOPHOSPHORIC AODS, METAL
SALTS THEREOF AND OIL COMPOSITIONS
CONTAINING THE SALTS
Elaine S. Yamaguchi, El Cerrito, CaUf., assignor to Chevron
Research Company, San Francisco, Calif.
FUed May 27, 1982, Ser. No. 382,459
Int a.5 ClOM l/4i
U.S. a. 252—32.7 E 10 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
R1OCCH2O S
Ml
O P— SH
II /
R2OCCH2O
wherein Ri and R2 are the same or different alkyl groups
containing 1 to 12 carbon atoms or an alkali or alkaline earth
metal or transition metal salt thereof.
mine and boiling at a temperature below about 30* C. at
atmospheric pressure,
(b) a refrigeration oil composed essentially of a refined min-
eral oil having a pour point of between about 0* and — 50*
C, and
(c) a blue anthraquinone dye corresponding to the formula
Ro
wherein each ^p is methyl, one R^ of each anilino group is
ethyl, and the other Ro of each anilino group is either methyl or
ethyl, and wherein the proportion of halocarbon to refrigera-
tion oil is between about 10:1 and about 4:6 and wherein the
concentration of dye in the liquid is between about 0.01 and
0.5%.
4,436,642
NONIONIC SURFACTANTS FOR AUTOMATIC
DISHWASHER DETERGENTS
Robert J. Scott New Qty, N.Y., assignor to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
FUed Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,597
Int a.5 CUD 1/70. 3/075. 3/395
U.S. a. 252—95 4 Claims
1. An automatic dishwasher detergent comprising:
(a) from about 10 weight percent to about 90 weight percent
of a detergency builder;
(b) from about 0.5 weight percent to about 10 weight per-
cent of an active chlorine containing compound; and
(c) from about 1 weight percent to about 15 weight p>ercent
of a nonionic surfactant of the formula
4,436,641
REFRIGERATION LIQUID WITH BLUE LEAK
INDICATOR AND PROCESS OF USING SAME
Dale E. Stelz, Goddard, Kans.; Frank I. CarroU, Durham, and
WUson M. Whaley, Gary, both of N.C., assignors to Racon
Incorporated, Wichita, Kans.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 265,697, May 21, 1981, Pat
No. 4,369,120. This appUcation Not. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 444,884
Int. a.3 C09K 5/04
VS. CL 252—68 9 Qaims
7. A blue, leak-indicating refrigeration liquid which com-
prises
(a) at least one oil-soluble halocarbon selected from the
group consisting of octafluoropropane, octafluorocy-
clobutane, chloroheptafluorocyclobutane and haloalkanes
containing from one to two carbon atoms, from one to six
fluorine atoms and from zero to three halogen atoms
selected from the group consisting of chlorine and bro-
1-HOj °~^*~^'
wherein R is a nonyl group, x is 12 and y is 4.
4. A method of washing dishes comprising contacting dishes
in an automatic dishwasher with a detergent comprising a
nonionic surfactant of the formula:
l-PQ^-0-PO,-EO,
wherein R is a nonyl group; PC is an oxypropylene group; x is
12; EO is an oxyethylene group; and y is 4, said detergent
containing an active chlorine-containing compound and exhib-
iting low-foaming, superior wetting and scouring, and chlorine
compatibUity.
746
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,643
REGENERATION OF AQUEOUS DECREASING AND
CLEANING SOLUTIONS
HdgB BSrger, Ericratli, and Christiao RoMmami. Langenfeld,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaaigiiort to Henkel KCaA,
Dueneldorf, Fed. Rep. of Gcmiany
Filed Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,288
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 19.
1981,3137341
Int a.J CUD 3/08; C23G 1/36
U.S. a. 252-135 11 Claims
1. A process for regenerating an alkaline or neutral silicate-
free and phosphate-free aqueous degreasing and cleaning solu-
tion contaminated by emulsified mineral oil, natural oil, or a
mixture thereof, comprising the steps of
(a) adding to said contaminated solution from about 1 to
about 5 g/1 of either (1) at least one alkali metal phosphate,
(2) at least one alkali metal silicate, or (3) a mixture of at
least one alkali metal phosphate and at least one alkali
metal silicate, and
(b) adding to said contaminated solution either (1) from
about 0.3 to about 2 g/1 of calcium ions, (2) from about 0.2
to about 1.2 g/1 of magnesium ions, or (3) a quantity of a
mixture of calcium ions and magnesium ions chemically
equivalent to from about 0.3 to about 2 g/1 of calcium ions.
4,436,644
ADJUNCTS FOR USE IN THE MANUFACTURE OF
DETERGENT POWDERS
Richard S. Johnaon, and John K. Potter, both of Wirral, Fji-
gland, asaignora to Lerer Brothers Company, New York, N.Y.
Dlrialon of Ser. No. 200,791, Oct 27, 1980, Pat No. 4,328,114.
This appUcation Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,703
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Oct. 31, 1979.
7937630
The portion of the term of this patent subaequent to May 4, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int a.> CUD 77/00
UA a. 252-174.13 10 Claims
1. An adjunct for the use in the manufacture of a detergent
powder comprising a liquid nonionic surfactant absorbed on
granulated, substantially fully hydrated sodium tripolyphos-
phate or sodium dihydrogen orthophosphate wherein the
amount of nonionic surfactant absorbed on the sodium tripoly-
phosphate or sodium dihydrogen orthophosphate is at least
0.85 cc/g.
group (a) components are present, three componenU are
selected from group (b).
4,436,646
GREEN-EMTITING PHOSPHOR FOR CATHODE-RAY
TUBE
Takeahi Takahara, Yokoaoka; Takeo Sato; Takeo Itoo, both of
Fnkaya, and Maaaaki Tamatani, F^iaawa, all of Japan, aa-
signors to Shibanra Denki KmIumMh Kaiaha, Kawaaaki,
Japan
FUed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,269
Claima priority, appUcation Japan, Oct 6, 1981, 56-158218
Int CL3 C09K 11/463
U.S. a. 252—301.4 S | nrf»
1. A green-emitting phosphor for a cathode-ray tube, con-
sisting of calcium sulfide activated by cerium and Uthium. the
cerium concentration being within the range of 0.06 to 0.5 mol
% and the lithium concentration being in the range 0.05 to 0.4
mol % said phosphor exhibiting a higher luminous efficiency
than calcium sulfide phosphor activated by cerium and sodium
when excited at a current density of 4 ^lA/cm^.
4,436,645
FLUORIDE CONTAINING COMPOSTHONS FOR
REMOVAL OF POLLUTANTS FROM WASTE WATERS
AND METHODS OF UTILIZING SAME
Anthony V. Ceaaer, Cemetary Rd., Great Meadows, N J. 07838
FUed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,902
Int a.3 C02F 1/52. 1/62
UA a. 252-179 10 Claima
1. A composition adapted to the removal of heavy metal,
water soluble, water immiscible and water immiscible organic
poUutants from waste waters comprising
(a) ion exchange absorbent gels, consisting of at least one
member selected from the group consisting of calcined
clays, amorphous silicas, aluminas, natural and artificial
zeolites, perlites or vermiculite,
(b) cementitious materials selected from the group consisting
of Portland cements, aluminous cements, puzzalan ce-
ments, gypsum plasters, alkaline earth metal oxides and
aUudine earth metals hydrated oxides,
(c) water soluble fluoride containing salts, and
(d) alkali metal ortho phosphates, provided that where no
aUcali metal ortho phosphate is present an additional com-
ponent is selected fi-om group (a) or group (b), fiirther
provided that where no alkali metal ortho phosphate or
4,436,647
SELF-EMULSIFIABLE ANTIFOAMS
Ewald Pirson, Burghaosen; Jakob SchmidUcof^, Mehring-dd,
and Ernst Innertaberger, Burghhanaen, aU of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, asaignors to Wacker-Cbemie GmbH, Monich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 114,874, Jan. 24, 1980, abandoned. Thia
appUcation Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,445
Claima priority, appUcation Fed. R^. of Germany. Jan. 30.
1979, 2903423
Int CL3 BOID 77/00
U A a. 252-358 3 claims
1. A se!f-emulsifiable antifoam composition which is essen-
tially anhydrous consisting essentially of an organopolysilox-
ane in which at least 80 mole percent of the siloxane units are
dihydrocarbon siloxane units, a filler in an amount of from
about 0. 1 to about 30 percent by weight based on the weight of
the organopolysiloxane, a water-soluble cellulose derivative in
an amount of from about 2 to 30 percent by weight based on
the weight of the composition and from about 5 to about 25
percent by weight based on the weight of the compositidn of at
least one compound of the general formula
RCOCHCHjhSOsM,
where R is an aliphatic hydrocarbon radical having at least 7
carbon atoms, in which at least 10 percent of the number of R
radicals must have at least 1 1 carbon atoms, and M is selected
from the group consisting of an ammonium group and an alkali
metal ion.
4,436,648
ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTING THERMOPLASTIC
MATERIAL, TTS MANUFACTURE, AND RESULTING
ARTICLE
Sarwan K. Khanna, Carmel, and Satya P. Khanna, IndianapoUa,
both of Ind., aaaignors to BeU Telephone Laboratoriea, Incor-
porated, Murray HUl, N J.
Filed Dec 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,260
Int a.3 HOIB 1/06
U.S. a. 252—511 s Claima
1. Electret microphone comprising a molded thermoplastic
component of which at least a portion is electricaUy conduct-
ing, the material of said at least a portion consisting essentially
of an acrylonitrile butadiene styrene copolymer resin and
carbon particles, carbon being contained in said material in a
percentage by weight which is here designated as x and which
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
747
is in the range of 5-20 weight percent of said material, and said
material having electrical sheet resistance which, in the ab-
sence of surface metallization, is less than or equal to a value of
6O,00O/x3 ohm per square.
4,436,649
GREASE COMPOSmON WITH IMPROVED LOW
SHEAR STABILTTY
Jeffrey E. Stemke, Petaloma, CaUf., aaaignor to CbcTron Re-
■earch Company, San Frandaco, Calif.
FUed Jun. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,904
Int a.3 ClOM 5/20
U.S. a. 252—51.5 A 6 Oaima
1. A grease composition comprising a major amount of a
lubricating oil base vehicle, a polyurea gellant in an amount
sufficient to thicken the base vehicle to a grease consistency,
and from 0.1 to 20 weight percent of a polyhydroxylated
compound.
stabilizer being selected from the group consisting of
sodium, potassium, rubidium, cesium, and combinations
thereof, said stabilizer being from about 0.001 to about 10
mole percent of said sintered body.
4,436,651
THERMIONIC CATHODE AND PROCESS FOR
PREPARING THE SAME
Darid M. ComeUlc, c/o Cathodyne Corporation, 490 Windsor
Park Dr., CeatenrUle, Ohio 45459, aaaignor to Darid M.
ComeiUc, Springboro, Ohio
FUed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,588
Int a.3 HOIB 7/05
U.S. a. 252—521 16
4,436,650
LOW VOLTAGE CERAMIC VARISTOR
LesUe J. Bowen, Waltham, Maas., assignor to GTE Laboratoriea
Incorporated, Waltham, Maas.
FUed Jul. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 398,038
Int a.J HOIB 7/06
U.S. CL 252—518 6 CUOma
tJ9t
10
\
A
L
^mWWF^-^^
1. A thermionic cathode employing, in a matrix metal, an
alkaline earth metal hydroxy oxy carbonate as an emission
material, wherein said alkaline earth metal is selected from the
group consisting of barium, strontium, calcium and mixtures
thereof, said matrix metal is selected from the group consisting
of rhenium, nickel, molybdenum, platinum, paladium, ruthe-
nium, iron, tantalum, and alloys thereof, and the weight ratio
of said emission material to said matrix metal as in the range of
approximately 1/10 to 10/1.
1. A varistor comprising a sintered body of a bulk type, said
sintered body consisting
essentially of zinc oxide as a main component of the sintered
body, said zinc oxide having an average grain size greater
than about 50 microns;
an additive for impaning to the sintered body a voltage-
dependent property, said additive comprising the oxide of
elements selected from the group consisting of Bi, Co, Mn,
Sb, Cr, Ti, Pb, Ba, Ni, Sn, and combinations thereof, and
being approximately 3 mole percent of the sintered body
composition;
a zinc oxide grain growth promoting agent, said agent hav-
ing a cation having an ionic radius less than the ionic
radius of Zn + ^ and the cation of said agent having an ionic
valence of three, said cation of said zinc oxide grain
growth promoting agent being aluminum, said zinc oxide
grain growth promoting agent being from about 0.001 to
about 1.0 mole percent of said sintered body;
and
a grain boundary barrier layer stabUizer for imparting to the
sintered body a stable grain boundary barrier layer, said
stabilizer having a cation having an ionic radius greater
than the ionic raidius of Zn-^^ and the cation of said stabi-
lizer having an ionic valence of one, said cation of said
4,436,652
PHENYLETHYLMETHYLCARBONATE MIXTURES
CONTAINING SAME AND ORGANOLEPTIC USES
THEREOF
Richard M. Boden, Monmonth Beach; Theodore J. Tysckiewica,
SayreriUc, and Hugh Watkins, Uncroft aU of N J., aaaignors
to International Flavors A Fragrancca Inc., New York, N.Y.
Diriaion of Ser. No. 329,221, Dec. 10, 1981. Thia appUcation
Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 422,489
Int a.J A61K 7/46: CUB 9/00
U5. a. 252—522 R 3 Ctaima
1. A mixture consisting essentiaUy of phenylethyl methylcar-
bonate having the structure:
[on
Y
and at least one substance selected from the group consisting
of:
748
OFPICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
''hl;^ra^;^S?u?etKt^^^^^^ perfume compositions, colognes and perfumed articles com-
cvicu irora uie group consisUng of. pnsmg the step of addmg to a perfume composition or cologne
an aroma augmenting or enhancing quantity of the composi-
tion of matter of claim 1.
GLC PROFILE FOR FRACTION 6 OF
EXAMPLE I.
OH and,
the weight ratio of phenylethyl methylcarbonate:3-meth-
yM-phenyl-pentanol-5 being from about 0.1:1 up to about
1.0. 1; and
(u) at least one cyclohexyl butenone derivative defined
accordmg to the structure:
wherem one or two of the dashed lines is a carbon-carbon
double bond and the other of the dashed lines is a carbon-
carbon smgle bond with the proviso that when two of the
dashed hnes are carbon-carbon double bonds, said carbon-
carbon double bonds are conjugated, the weight ratio of
phenylethyl methylcarbonate:cyclohexyl butenone deriv-
ative having the generic structure:
4,436,653
STABLE LIQUID DETERGENT COMPOSITIONS
Ronald L. Jacobson, Wyoming, and Dean C. Hanley, Cincinnati,
both of Ohio, assignors to The Procter A Gamble Company.
Cincinnati, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 251,650, Apr. 6, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,557
Int a.3 CUD 1/44
U.S. a. 252-547 „ QgiiM
1. A stable liquid detergent composition comprising:
(a) from about 3% to about 20% of an ethoxylated alcohol
or ethoxylated alkyl phenol nonionic surfactant of the
formula R(OC2H4),OH, wherein R is selected from the
group consisting of aliphatic hydrocarbon radicals con-
taining from about 8 to about 15 carbon atoms and alkyl
phenyl radicals in which the alkyl group contains from
about 8 to about 12 carbon atoms, n is from about 3 to
about 9, and said nonionic surfactant has an HLB value of
from about 10 to about 13;
(b) from about 2% to about 15% of an amine oxide surfac-
tant having the formula
wherein R' is an alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyhydroxypropyl,
alkoxyhydroxyethyl, alkyl amido or alkyl carboxylate
radical in which the alkyl and alkoxy portions contain
from about 8 to about 18 carbon atoms, R2 and R^ are
selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, pro-
pyl, isopropyl, 2-hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxypropyl, 3-
hydroxypropyl, or said groups joined together to form a
cyclic structure in which the nitrogen is part of a hetero-
cyclic ring, and n is from 0 to about 10;
(c) from about 1% to about 10% of an alcohol polyethoxy-
late sulfate surfactant having the formula R*0(C2H40);„.
SO3M, wherein R* is an alkyl or hydroxyalkyl radical
containing from about 10 to about 18 carbon atoms, m is
from about 2 to about 10 and M is a compatible cation;
(d) from about 10% to about 20% of a water-soluble ni-
trilotriacelate or citrate detergency builder capable of
sequestering calcium and magnesium ions in water solu-
tion; provided that components (a), (b), (c) and (d) to-
gether represent less than about 40% by weight of the
composition;
(e) from 0% to about 25% of a hydrotrope;
(0 up to about 89% water; said liquid detergent composition
being in isotropic form and having a pH of from about 8 to
about 13 in a 0.2% water solution at 20* C.
being from about 1:1 x 10-' up to about 1:1
2. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of
consumable materials selected from the group consisting of
4,436,654
nRE-RETARDANT INSULATING OILS
Etsuo Ohe; Katsuo Sugawara, both of Hitachi; Ititaro Tani,
Kitaibaraki, and Hideo Tsukioka, Mito, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 376,125
Claims priority, application Japan, May 8, 1981, 56-68168
Int a.3 HOIB 3/24
U.S. a. 252-574 14 Claims
1. An insulating oil characterized in that a phosphoric tri-
ester containing at least one aromatic ring is mixed with a
benzenetricarboxylic acid trialkyl ester or with a polyol ester
obtained from trimethylolpropane and a saturated fatty acid,
said triester being mixed in an amount of 30 to 80% by weight
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
749
based on the total weight of said triester and either said ben-
zenetricarboxylic acid tnalkyl ester or said polyol ester.
4,436,655
PROCESS FOR THE CONTINUOUS PURIHCATION OF
CONTAMINATED FLUIDS AND FOR CONDITIONING
THE RESULTING CONCENTRATES
Ermanno Masotto, and Sergio Gagliardi, both of Rome, Italy,
assignors to Comitatonazionale Per Lienergia Nucleare,
Rome, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 86,669, Oct. 19, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,419
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Oct. 27, 1978, 51669 A/78
Int a.^ G21F 9/12
U.S. a. 252—628 8 CUdms
C^'
1. In a process for continuously treating contaminants con-
tained in a fluid, for the purpose of their final disposal, compris-
ing providing at least one expendable collecting receptacle
which has an inlet port and an outlet port and which is totally
encapsulated with a solid inert mass except for the ports, puri-
fying the fluid by at least one operation which includes treating
the fluid to remove contaminants therefrom and retaining the
contaminants in said collecting receptacle, the fluid having
been passed into said collecting receptacle through said ports,
and subsequently encapsulating the ports in a solid inert mass,
the improvement of (a) placing the collecting receptacle in an
open top container of substantially greater size than the col-
lecting receptacle, and totally encapsulating the collecting
receptacle except for the ports with said solid inert mass which
is added to the container before purifying the fluid, so as to
completely surround the collecting receptacle up to a level
above the top of the collecting receptacle and below the ports
and the top of the container, said mass functioning as a biologi-
cal shield, or as a coating resistant to chemical attack and
mechanical stress, or as a biological shield and as a coating
resistant to chemical attack and mechanical stress, and (b)
rendering insoluble the contaminants within said collecting
receptacle by passing into said receptacle in a continuous way
through said inlet port with excess passing out through said
outlet port, after purifying the fluid and before encapsulating
the ports, at least one substance which solidifies to a solid
matrix therefore rendering the contaminants insoluble within
said collecting receptacle.
(1) Appearance: White, powdery solid;
(2) Solubility: Soluble in water, but insoluble in organic
solvents such as methanol, ethanol and acetone;
(3) Acidic or basic nature: Amphoteric electrolyte having an
isoelectric point of pH 5.2;
(4) Infrared absorption spectrum (pelleted in KBr): With
characteristic absorption peaks at 3 500 -> 3300, 1660 and
1550 cm-';
(5) Ultraviolet absorption spectrum in an aqueous solution:
With a characteristic absorption peak >^max^^ at 279 nm;
(6) Color reactions: Positive in biuret reaction, xanthopro-
teic reaction, phenolic reagent reaction according to
Lowry-Folin method, anthrone-sulfuric acid reaction and
phenol-sulfuric acid reaction, but negative in cysteine-sul-
furic acid reaction;
(7) Average molecular weight: About 5000 as measured by
gel -electrophoresis.
3. A process for the preparation of a glycoprotein substance
having an average molecular weight of about 5000 and an
isoelectric point of pH 5.2 from scallop shellfish which com-
prises recovering the liquid portion which comes from cooking
of raw scallop shellfish with a hot aqueous solvent or with
vapor of such solvent and which is to be discarded as waste,
concentrating the liquid portion to a smaller volume or to
dryness to yield a concentrate or dry powder, dissolving the
concentrate or dry powder in water to form an aqueous solu-
tion thereof, subjecting the aqueous solution to a series of
treatments comprising ion-exchange chromatography with a
basic anion exchanger, isoelectric focusing and molecular
weight-fractionating treatments comprising gel-filtration and
electrophoresis, in any desired sequence, whereby to isolate a
glycoprotein substance which is adsorbable on the basic ion
exchanger and which has an average molecular weight of
about 5000 and an isoelectric point of pH 5.2.
4,436,656
NOVEL ANTITUMOR GLYCOPROTEIN SUBSTANCE
AND ITS PREPARATION
Takuma Sasaki, Tokyo; Kazaya Nakamichi; Yakndo Tachlbana,
both of Sohka, and KiyoshI Minami, Koahigaya, aU of Japan,
assignors to Manizen OU Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Aug. 2, 1983, Ser. No. 519,724
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 9, 1982, 57-137209
Int a.5 A23J 1/04; C07G 7/00
U.S. a. 260—112 R 4 Claims
1. A glycoprotein substance possessing an antitumor activity
which is recovered from the liquid portion coming from cook-
ing of raw scallop shellfish with a hot aqueous solvent or with
the vapor of such solvent and which has the following charac-
teristics:
4,436,657
ANTITUMOR GLYCOPROTEIN SUBSTANCE AND
PREPARATICN THEREOF
Takuma Sasaki, Tokyo; Kazuya Nakamichi; Yakudo Tachibana,
both of Sohka, and Kiyoshi Minami, Koshigaya, aU of Japan,
assignors to Manizen OU Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Aug. 2, 1983, Ser. No. 519,725
Cbdms priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 9, 1982, 57-137210
Int a.5 A23J 1/04; O07G 7/00
U.S. a. 260—112 R 6 ClabBS
1. A glycoprotein substance possessing an antitumor activity
which is recovered from the liquid portion which comes from
cooking of raw scallop with a hot aqueous solvent or with the
vapor of such solvent and which has the following characteris-
tics:-
(1) Appearance: White, powdery solid.
(2) SolubUity: Soluble easily in water, but insoluble in or-
ganic solvents such as methanol, ethanol and acetone.
(3) Acidic or basic nature: Amphoteric electrolyte having an
isoelectric point of pH 5.5.
(4) Infrared absorption spectrum (pelleted in KBr): With
characteristic absorption peaks at 3 500 ~ 3 300, 1660 and
1550 cm-'.
(5) Ultraviolet absorption spectrum in an aqueous solution:
With a characteristic absorption peak Xmax H2O at 255
nm.
(6) Color reactions: Positive in biuret reaction, xanthopro-
teic reaction, phenolic reagent reaction according to
Lowry-Folin method, anthrone-sulfuric acid reaction,
phenol-sulfuric acid reaction and cysteine-sulfuric acid
reaction.
(7) Average molecular weight: About 470,000 as measured
by gel-electrophoresis.
4. A process for the preparation of a water-soluble, antitu-
mor glycoprotein substance having an average molecular
weight of about 470,000 and an isoelectric point of pH 5.5 from
scallop which comprises recovering the Uquid portion which
comes from cooking of raw scallop with a hot aqueous solvent
750
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
751
or with vapor of such solvent and which is to be discarded as
waste, concentrating the liquid portion thus recovered to a
smaller volume or to dryness to yield a concentrate or dry
powder, dissolving the concentrate or dry powder in water or
an aqueous solvent to form an aqueous solution thereof and
subjecting the aqueous solution to a series of treatments com-
prising ion exchange chromatography with a basic anion ex-
changer and molecular weight-fractionating treatments com-
prising gel-filtration and electrophoresis, in any desired se-
quence, whereby isolating a fraction consisting essentially of a
glycoprotein substance which is adsorbable on a basic anion
exchanger and which has an average molecular weight of
about 470,000 and an isoelectric point of pH 5.5.
4,436,658
PROCESS OF EXTRACTION OF LACTOFERRINE AND
IMMUNOGLOBULINS OF MILK
Aadre Peyrouet, Ger, and Francois Spring, Pan, both of France,
aadgnon to Sodete Nationale Elf AqnitaiBC, Fhuce
FUed May 12, 1W2, Ser. No. 377,316
Ctalmf priority, appUcatioD Fhmce, May 15, 1981, 81 09740
Int a.3 A23J 1/20
UA a. 260-122 7ciainM
1. In a process of extraction of iron-fixing milk proteins,
from an aqueous medium substantially free from caseins by
adsorption on a solid support followed by elution of the ad-
sorbed proteins by means of an acid solution, the improvement
which comprises effecting the adsorption in a weakly basic
medium at a pH of 7.7 to 8.8 on pulverulent sUica having a
particle size from 5 urn to 5 mm, a specific surface of about 5
to 150 mVg and a pore diameter of from 25 to 250 nm.
4,436,659
METALIZED DVES, THEIR MANUFACTURE AND USE
Arthur Biihler, Rhdnfeldcii, and Hsm U. Schiitz, Baael, both of
Switzerland, aaaignors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Ardaley,
N.Y.
DiTiaioB of Ser. No. 146,973, May 5, 1980, Pat No. 4,318,849,
which ia a divisioB of Ser. No. 904,358, May 9, 1978, Pat No.
4,215,042, which is a continaatioB of Ser. No. 589,963, Jon. 24,
1975, abMdooed. This appUcation Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,533
Claim priority, applicatioa Switzerland, Jul. 16, 1974.
9764/74; May 27, 1975, 6750/75
Int CLJ B66C 23/60
UA a. 260-146 R « claims
1. A copper, nickel, chromium or cobalt complex of an azo
dye of the formula
U-R2-Z(Ar-N=N-);„D(Y>-N=N-E-Y'
wherein
D is benzene or naphthalene,
Y is hydroxy, methoxy or carboxy,
Y' is hydroxy or amino,
E is 6-hydroxypyridone or 6-<amino, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkyl-
mercapto or aryhnercapto)-2,4-diamino-5-(cyano or car-
bamido)pyridine
Z is -SO2-, -S02N(R|)- or -CON(Ri)- wherein R,
is hydrogen or Ci-c»-alkyl,
R2 is Ci-Q-alkylene or arylene,
Ar is arylene,
m is 0 or 1 and
U is a sulfonic acid group or a carboxy group, and wherein
D and E contain no ionogenic subttituenu in addition to U
except that together D and E may further contain one
sulfo group.
4,436,660
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF 5.CYANO.AND
5-CARBOXAMIDO-5H.DIBENZ[BaqAZEPINES
Emat Aofdcrfaaar, Kaiseraugst; Uemenz Sprecbcr, Baael, and
Jaaoa Zergenyi, Seltiaberg, all of Switzerland, aaaignors to
Ciba.<Wgy Corporation, Ardaley, N.Y.
CoBtiniiatioB of Ser. No. 198,887, Oct 20, 1960, abandoned.
This application May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,464
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Oct 30. 1979
9705/79 *
Int a.J O07D 223/26
UAa260-239D 4ci,ia,
1. A process for producing 5.cyano-5H-dibenz[b,f]azepine
comprising reacting 5H-dibenz[b.flazepine with cyanogen
chloride or cyanogen bromide in the presence of at least cata-
lytically effective amounts of N.N-dimethylacetamide, N,N.
diethylacetamide, N.N-di-npropylacetamide, N,N-dimethyl-
propionamide or N,N-diethylpropionamide, hexamethylphos-
phoric acid triamide, N-methyl-pyrrolidone-(2), sulfolane,
benzyltriethylammonium chloride or dibenzyl-diethylam-
monium chloride as strong polar substances within the temper-
ature range of 20*- 100* C.
2. A process for producing 5H-dibenz[b,f]azepine-5-carbox.
amide comprising reacting 5H-dibenz[b,nazepine with cyano-
gen chloride or cyanogen bromide in the presence of at least
catalytically effective amount of N,N-dimethylacetamide,
N,N-diethylacetamide, N,N-di-n-propylacetamide, N.N-dime-
thylpropionamide or N,N-diethylpropionamide, hexamethyl-
phosphoric acid triamide, N-methyl-pyrrolidone-(2), sulfolane
benzyltriethylammonium chloride or dibenzyl-diethylammoni-
umchloridc as strong polar substances within the temperature
range of 20*- 100* C, hydrolysing the 5-cyano-5H-dibenz[b,-
f]azepine obtained by treating with formic or acetic acid or
trichloro- or trifluoroacetic acid in admixture with sulfuric
acid and fmally treating the mixture with water at a tempera-
ture range of -5* to -|- 80* C.
3. A process for producing 5H-dibenz[b,f]azepine-5-carbox-
amide comprising reacting 5H-dibenz[b,f]azepine with cyano-
gen chloride or cyanogen bromide in the presence of at least
catalytically effective amounts of N.N-dimethylacetamide,
N.N-diethylacetamide, N,N-di-n-propylacetamide, N.N-dime-
thylpropionamide or N.N-diethylpropionamide, hexamethyl-
phosphonic acid triamide, N-methyl-pyrrolidone-(2), sulfo-
lane, benzyltriethylammonium chloride or di-benzyl-die-
thylammonium chloride as strong polar substances within the
temperature range of 20*- 100* C, hydrolysing the 5-cyano-
5H-dibenz[b,flazepine obtamed by reacting with 30% H2O2
and sodium hydrogen carbonate and finally treating the mix-
ture with water at a temperature range of -5* to -J- 80* C
4. A process for producing 5H-dibenz[b,f]azepine-5-carbox-
amide comprising reacting 5H-dibenz[b,f]azepine with cyano-
gen chloride or cyanogen bromide in the presence of at least
catalytically effective amounU of N.N-dimethylacetamide,
N.N-diethylacetamide, N,N.di-n-propylacetamide, N.N-dime-
thylpropionamide or N.N-diethylpropionamide, hexamethyl-
phosphoric acid triamide, N-methyl-pyrrolidone-<2). sulfolane,
benzyltriethylammonium chloride or dibenzyl-diethylam-
monium chloride as strong polar substances within the temper-
ature range of 20'- 100* C, hydrolyzing the S-cyano-5H-
dibenz[b,f]azepine obtained by reacting with the complex
BF3 JCH3COOH in acetic acid and chlorobenzene and then
decomposing the crystalline addition compound of 5H-
dibenz[b,f]azepine S-carboxamide with BF3 obtained by treat-
ment with water in a temperature range of -5* to -»-80* C.
4,436,661
3-SUBSTITUTED BICYCUC AZETIDINONE
DERIVATIVES
Hana R. Pftendlcr, Ueatal, Switaeriaad, aaaivmr to CIb»«cigy
Corporatioa, Ardaley, N.Y.
Coatinuation-in-part of Ser. No. 17VI21, Jal. 23, 1980,
abandoned. This application Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,3iN
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Aog. 1, 1979,
7077/79; Jul. 1, 1980, 5083/80
Int a.J O07D 5W04. 205/08. 513/04. 401/04
U.S. a. 260—245.3 20 Clains
1. Compoimds of the formula
=ti-
(O),
(0
A
I
N O,
R* R*
wherein R denotes hydrogen or R^ which denotes lower alkyl,
hydroxy-lower alkyl, hydroxy-lower alkyl protected against
oxidation by a conventional hydroxy protecting group, lower
alkoxy-lower alkyl, lower alkanoyloxy-lower alkyl, hydrox-
ysulfonyloxy-lower alkyl wherein hydroxysulfonyl is present
in the form of an alkali metal salt or an ammonium salt, halo-
lower alkyl, lower alkylthio-lower alkyl, lower alkoxycarbo-
nyl-lower alkyl, cyano-lower alkyl. sulfo-lower alkyl wherein
sulfo is present in the form of an alkali metal salt or an ammo-
nium salt, amino-lower alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkoxycar-
bonyl. benzyloxycarbonyl, p-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl, di-
phenylmethoxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl
substituted by halogen, lower alkoxy or by nitro, aminocarbo-
nyl. lower alkylaminocarbonyl. di-lower alkylaminocarbonyl.
cycloalkyl having 3 to 7 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl-lower alkyl
having 4 to 7 carbon atoms, cycloalkenyl having 3 to 7 carbon
atoms and one or two carbon-carbon double bonds, cyclohex-
ylvinyl, cyclohexylallyl, cyclohcxenylmethyl. 1.4-cyclohex-
adienylmethyl, phenyl, phenyl-lower alkyl, phenyl or phenyl-
lower alkyl wherein phenyl is substituted by lower alkyl, lower
alkoxy, halogen, nitro or amino, phenyl-lower alkyl substituted
in a-position by hydroxy, hydroxysulfonyloxy, carboxy, sulfo
or amino, pyridyl. thienyl. furyl pyridyl-lower alkyl, thienyl-
lower alkyl, furyl-lower alkyl, or pyridyl-lower alkyl, thienyl-
lower alkyl, or furyl-lower alkyl substituted in a-position by
hydroxy, hydroxysulfonyloxy, carboxy, sulfo. or by amino,
phenyl-lower alkenyl, or furylallyl, R^ and Re each denote
hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl, phenyl-lower alkyl, or, if taken
together, lower alkylene, A denotes ethylene, 1,2-propylene.
or 1.2-butylene, and n represents zero or two, the sterreoiso-
mers thereof, and mixtures of these stereoisomers.
wherein R| and R3 are selected from the group consisting of
hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy or
— O— C— R7
II
o
and R2 and R4 «re hydrogen or Ri and R2 and/or R3 and R4
taken togethkare 0x0 groups with the proviso that at least one
0x0 group is present; R is selected from the group consisting of
hydrogen, lower alkyl, C2 to C7 carboxylic acids and the lower
alkyl esters, amides and mono or di lower alkyl amides thereof,
hydroxy C2 to C7 alkyl and amino C2 to C? alkyl or mono- or
di-lower alkyl amino C2 to C? alkyl; Rs is halogen or hydrogen
and R6 is halogen with the proviso that when R| or R3 is
hydroxy, lower alkoxy or
— O— C— R7
I
then R is lower alkyl or hydrogen; R7 is Ci to C^ alkyl, phenyl,
or hydrogen the N-oxides and the pharmaceutically acceptable
salts thereof
4,436,662
PYRROLO[3,4-D][2]BENZAZEPINONES
Rodaey L Fryar, North Caldwell; Ea«ena J. Trybidaki, Panip-
paoy, and Armin Walaer, Waat Caldwell, aU of N J., aaai^on
to HoftaauHU Roche Inc^ Notlty, N J.
CoBtinaatioa'iB-part of Ser. No. 393,142, Jut 28, 1962,
abandoned, which ia a coatiaBatloB-i»-part of Sar. No. 379,400,
May 18, 1982. This applkatloa Mar. 31, 1963, Ser. No. 461,021
lit a.} C07D 4«7/02
U.S. CL 260—248.7 17
1. A compound of the formula
4,436,663
PROCESS FOR SEPARATING PORPHYRINS
KciUi Manihaahi, Yokohaau^ lehiro Kojima, Yokoanka; Yataka
Ognchi; Noboni Endoh, both of Tokyo, and Tetsso Satoh,
Yokohama, all of Japan, aadgnors to Nippon OU Coaqtaayi
Ltd^ Japan
FUed Aug. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 404,084
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 4, 1981, 56-121359
Int a.5 C07D 487/22
U.S. CL 260—245.91 7 OaiM
1. A process for separatig porphyrins, which comprises
(1) adjusting the pH of the liquid phaM of a culture broth
containing at least two porphyrins to about 2.5 to about 4
and collecting the resulting solid containing the porphy-
rins,
(2) either (a) preparing an acidic aqueous solution of said
solid and adjusting the pH of iu liquid phase left after
removal of insoluble matter to about 6 to about 8 to form
an aqueous solution containing the porphyrins, or (b)
preparing an acid-containing lower alcohol solution of
said solid, adjusting the pH of its liquid phase left after
removal of insoluble matter, adding water in an amount at
least twice the amount of the solution to precipiute lower
alkyl esters of the porphyrins, collecting the precipiute:
and dissolving them in an organic solvent to form an
organic solvent solution of the porphyrin esters,
(3) contacting the solution obtained in (a) or (b) in step (2)
with a copolymer having a surface area of at least about
700 mVg and derived from
(i) divinylbenzene,
(ii) styrene or its ftmctional derivative,
752
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
(iii) an alkenyl ester of a benzenepolycarbo.ylic acid
represented by the following formula
r -4-COOR),
(b) azeotropically distilling the resulting solvent medium
with an aromatic hydrocarbon; and
(c) reacting the 3.5HJibromo-4.hydroxyben2onitrile interme-
diate m said aromatic hydrocarbon with an acid halide
selected from the group consisting of an aliphatic, cycloal-
iphatic and aromatic acid halide.
wherein R represento an alkenyl group having 3 to 10
carbon atoms, and n is 2 or 3, thereby permitting ad-
sorption of the porphyrins or their esters to the copoly-
mer, and
(4) thereafter, eluting the copolymer to obtain fractions of
the mdividual porphyrins or their esters.
4,436,664
NmiOGEN<X)NTAINING POLYETHER
MACROCYCLES WITH A SIOEARM CONTAINING
NEUTRAL ELECTRON DONOR GROUPS
George W. Gokel, Greenbelt, Md., mignor to W. R. Grace A
Co^ New York, N.Y.
Cootiniiation-iB-put of Ser. No. 203,165, Nor. 3, 1980,
ahandoBcd, which is a continnatioB-in-pul of Ser. No. 198,981,
Oct 21, 1980, abandoned. This appUcation Jan. 15, 1982, Ser.
No. 339,530
Int. a.J C07D 273/01
U A a 260-330.6 12 cWbu
1. An ether composition of the formula: wherein: R is
4,436,666
BIOaOAL ENOL DERIVATIVES OF
2.ARYL.l,3<TCLOALKANEDIONE COMPOUNDS
TTioniasN. Wheeler, Oiarleston, W. Va., aidgDor to Union
Carbide Corporation, Danbory, Conn.
FUed Sep. 22, 1978, Ser. No. 945,005
The portion of the term of this patent rabaequent to Jnn. 24,
1997, haa been disclaimed.
. , o ^ iBt a J C07C lU/OO. 69/96
VS. CI. 260-455 B jl daima
1. A compound of the formula:
OR R|
N-R
where
X is 0, I or 2 and
R is
2-(alkoxy)^yl.,
2-alkoxy phenyl*.
2-alkoxy phenylmethyl-,
2-alkoxy phenylethyl-,
amino alkyl-, or
2-amino phenyl-,
wherdn q is I to 4, the alkoxy and alkyl groups contain 1 to 3
carton atoms, the said amino is NH2-, monoalkylamino- or
diaUcylammo-, wherein the alkyl on the amino contains Ito 2
carton atoms and wherein the said 2-alkoxy phenyl rings may
optionally be substituted by up to two alkyl and/or alkoxy
groups, each of 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
4,436,665
TWO SOLVENT PROCESS FOR PREPARATION OF
ESp»S OF 3,5.DIBROM04.HYDROXYBENZONrrRILE
Ridtard E. Sheada, Durhain, N.C., a«l DtTid A. Segal, Hatfleld,
Pa., aaalgnors to Union Carbide CorporatioB, Danbnry, Conn.
FUed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 426,733
Int CLJ C07C J2J/7S
UAa260-404 13Clainu
LA method of preparing esters of 3.5-dibromo-4.hydrox.
ybenzomtnle from 4-cyanophenol which comprises:
^*^«!!^^* '"*' 4-cyanophenol with a reactant(s) selected
from the group consisting of bromine; bromine and chlo-
rine; and preformed bromine chloride in water or 3%
aqueous hydrogen bromide;
0 0 00
R U R'. -COR'. -CSR' or -C-R"-C-R';
wherein:
R' may not include more than thirty aliphatic carbons and is
selected from: an unsubstituted or substituted alkyl, alke-
nyl, alkynyl, bicycloalkyl, bicycloalkenyl, cycloalkyl,
cycloalkenyl, phenyl, phenylalkyl, naphthyl, or naphthy-
lalkyl group wherein the permissible substituents are one
or more alkyl. cyano, nitro, alkoxy, aryloxy, halogen,
haloalkyl, alkylthio, arylthio, alkylsulfmyl, arylsulfuiyl,
alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl alkoxyalkyl, aryloxyalkyl, al-
kylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl. arylsulfinylalkyl. alkylsulHny-
lalkyl, alkylsulfonylalkyl, arylsulfonylalkyl, or dialkyl-
amino groups in any combination;
R" is a divalent moiety which may not include more than
thirty aliphatic carbon atoms and is selected from an
unsubstituted or substituted alkylene, alkenylene, alkyny-
lene, bicycloalkylene, bicycloalkenylene, cycloalkylene,
cycloalkenylene, phenylene, phenylalkylene, naphthy-
lene, or naphthylalkylene group wherein the permissible
substitucnu are one or more alkyl, cyano, nitro, alkoxy,
aryloxy, halogen, haloalkyl, alkylthio, arylthio, alkylsulfi-
nyl, arylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl alkoxyalkyl,
aryloxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylthioalkyl, alkylsulfmylal-
kyl, arylsulfmylalkyl, alkyUulfonylalkyl. arylsulfonylalkyl
or dialkylamino groups, in any combination;
Ri may not individually include more than ten aliphatic
carbon atoms and is an alkyl, haloalkyl, halogen or
polyhaloalkyl group;
R2. R3, R4 and R5 may not individually include more than
ten aliphatic carbon atoms and are individually hydrogen,
nitro, polyhaloalkyl, halogen, cyano, alkyl, alkoxy, alkyl-
thio, alkylsulfmyl. alkylsulfonyl, alkanoyl amido. amino or
haloalkyl groups;
A is an alkylene or alkenylene chain containing two or three
carbon atoms which may be substituted by one or more
substituentt which may be the same or different selected
from:
(a) substituenu which may not include more than ten
aliphatic carbon atoms selected from: an alkyl, alkenyl.
cycloalkyl or cycloalkenyl groups, which groups may
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
753
be further substituted with one or more cyano. halogen,
nitro, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio. arylthio. alkylsulflnyl.
arylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, acylamido, or
dialkylamino substituents in any combination; and a
phenyl group which may be substituted by one or more
alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, cyano, halo-
gen, nitro, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkylthio, arylthio, alkylsul-
flnyl. arylsulfinyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl,
acylamido or dialkylamino substituents in any combina-
tion;
(b) a divalent alkylene or alkenylene group having from 2
to 20 carbon atoms completing a 3,4,3,6 or 7 membered
carbon ring with the proviso that when A is a hydrocar-
bon chain containing two carbon atoms, said hydrocar-
bon chain may not form together with said divalent
alkylene group a six membered fused polycyclic ring
structure wherein said six membered ring has more than
two double bonds.
4,436,667
PROCESS FOR PREPARING CYCLOPROPANE
CARBOXYLIC ACID ESTER DERIVATIVES
Michael J. Bull, Kent, England, asaignor to Shell Internationale
Research MaatschappU B. V., The Hague, Netherlands
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,892
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 23, 1980,
8013309
Int. a? C07C 121/75
U.S. a. 260—465 D 11 Claimi
1. A process for increasing the IR cis S isomer content in a
mixture of cis-isomers of a compound of formula:
R'O— C— OR' I
N
O
where R^ and R^ are identical or different and each is an aral-
kyl group of 7 to 12 carbon atoms, an alkenyl group of 2 to 12
carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group of 5 to 8 carbon atoms or an
alkyl group of 1 to 18 carbon atoms, by reacting a carbamic
acid ester with an alcohol, the improvement which comprises:
reacting a carbamic acid ester of the formula
H2N-C-OR*
II
where R' has the above meanings, with an alcohol of the
formula
Rl-OH
III
where R' has the above meanings, at a temperature above 140'
C, the ammonia formed being stripped from the reaction
mixture during the reaction by passing an inert gas there-
through.
H CH
CH3
CH3
f \ co-o— CH— y ^
wherein R' and R' are independently chlorine, bromine or
methyl, comprising the steps of:
dissolving as a solute a cis-isomer mixture of compound (I)
which contains substantial quantities of IR cis R-isomer
and IS cis S-isomer in an organic amine base having from
3 to 7 carbon atoms selected from a group consisting of
secondary amines having two branched alkyl groups and
tertiary amines;
evaporating the amine from said solute, whereby during
evaporation the dissolved IR cis R and IS cis S-isomer
content of said solute is progressively epimerized to IR cis
S and IS cis R-isomers, respectively, which progressively
crystallize from said solution as the amine content thereof
diminishes by evaporation; and
continuing evaporation until substantially all of said amine is
removed from said solute, whereby said solute is recov'
ered as a 1:1 crystalline mixture of IR cis S and IS cis R
isomers.
4,436,668 >
PREPARATION OF CARBONATES
Wolfgang Harder, Weinheim; Franz Merger, Frankenthal, and
Friedrich Towae, Lodwigriiafen, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
aaaignori to BASF AktiengeaeUschaft, Lndwigdiafen, Fed.
Rep. of Gcmany
FUed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,763
lat a.) O07C 66/00
U.S. a 260—463 12 Clafana
1. In a proceu for the preparation of a carbonate of the
formula
4,436,669
PREPARATION OF AROMATIC/ALIPHATIC NITRILES
Roland Jacques, Alea; Michel ReppeUn, CoUottgea>au-Moat-
d'Or, and Laurent Seigneurin, Saliadrea, aU of France, assign-
ors to Rhone*Ponlenc SpeciaUtes Chlndques, CotirbeToic,
France
FUed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,191
Claims priority, appUcation France, May 15, 1981, 81 09694
Int a.J C07C 120/10
U.S. a. 260-465 B 18 ClaiaM
1. A process for the preparation of an aromatic or aliphatic
nitrile having the formula:
Ar— A— CN
(I)
wherein Ar is a benzene radical and A is a direct chemical
bond or a hydrocarbon radical having from 1 to 6 carbon
atoms, comprising heating to a temperature ranging from
about 430* C. to about 330* C. a formamide or formanilide
having the formuU:
Ar— A-.-NHCHO
or an amide having the formula:
Ar-A-CONHj
GD
am
in the presence of a fluorinated sUiceous catalyst, said catalyst
having been prepared by (i) impregnating a particuUte sUica
containing from about 0.03 to about 2% by weight of fluorine,
expressed as F~ bonded to the sUica, with a dilute aqueous
solution of hydrofluoric acid, said hydrofluoric acid solution
having a concentration in HF of leu than about 3% by weight,
and the ratio by weight of the hydrofluoric acid contained in
said aqueous solution thereof to the silica being less than about
S%, followed by (ii) drying the catalyst thus impregnated.
754
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
4,43M70
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING
HYDROXYBENZONTTRILES
Rywo UcM, NiiUMMdya; KnqrvU Sdu»ta, Kobe; KeUi
Kawate, Sdod, nd YiMUyaU Naito, NiibiBOBiya, aU of
Japaa, aarifMn to KabaaUU Kaiaha Veao Sdyain Oyokea-
kyaao, OMka, Japaa
Filed Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 413,796
Oatrn priority, appUcatloo Japaa, Sep. 7, 1991, 56-139831
lat CLJ C07C 120/Oa 121/75
MS. CL 260-^«6S B 9 OalaH
1. A process for producing a hydroxybenzonitrile, which
comprises reacting a hydroxybenzoic acid ester with ammonia
in the vapor phase in the presence of a boron phosphate sup-
ported catalyst
ride at a temperature ranging from about 430* C. to about 600*
C. in an dectricaUy heated fluidized bed reaction zone com-
M36,671
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING UNSATURATED
ALIPHATIC DINTTRILES
Itaoo Faraoya, Salta, aod Ynzom Kitazawa, Hlrakata, both of
Japan, aaaigaors to Takeda Chemical ladaitriea. Limited,
Oaaka, Japaa
Filed Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 344,936
OaiBH priority, applicatioB Japan, Feb. 12, 1981, 56-19941
lat a.3 C07C 120/14
UA a. 260-465 J 7 Claims
1. In a process for producing fumaronitrile and maleonitrile
which comprises reacting at least one straight chain hydrocar-
bon having 4 carbon atoms with ammonia and oxygen in the
presence of an ammoxidation catalyst composition, the im-
provement wherein the ammoxidation catalyst consists essen-
tially of the following active components:
(A) at least one oxide of vanadium and tungsten, and
(B)
(1) at least one oxide of antimony, phosphorus and boron,
and/or
(2) at least one oxide of chromium, nickel, aluminum and
silicon.
prising a fluidized bed of electrically-conductive particulate
matter.
4,436,674
VAPOR MASS FLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
Joaeph C. McMenaaiin, Oceaaside, Calif., aaaigBor to J.C.
Schnfflacber Co., Oceanside, Calif.
CoBtinBation.in.part of Ser. No. 288,360, Jul. 30, 1981, Pat No.
433,013, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 151,741, May 20,
1980, abandoned. This application Apr. 12, 1983, Ser. No.
484198
Int a.3 BOIF 3/04
UA a 261-64 B 10 Oaima
4,436,672
OIL RECOVERY METHOD UTILIZING GLYCERYL
ETHER SULFONATES
Carter G. Naylor, AnstiB, Tex., assignor to Texaco, Ib&, White
Plains, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,364
Int a^ C07C 143/42. 143/11
U.S. a 260-512 R 7Clainia
1. A composition of matter of the formula:
RO(AO)^CH2CHO);„H
CH2OCH2CH2CH2SO3X
wherein
R is a linear or branched alkyl radical or mono- or.polyalkyl
substituted benzene radical containing from 8 to 24 carbon
atoms; AG is an alkylene oxide radical of from 2 to 4
carbon atoms; n is an integer of from 1 to 50; m is an
integer of from 1 to 10; and X is a sodium, potassium or
ammonium cation.
4^436,673
FLUID BED PROCESS FOR PREPARING
PHENYLPHOSPHONOUS DICHLORIDE
I E. SkTMc, West Nyacfc, N.Y., aasigMr to Staaffer Cheni-
cal CoaipaBy, Westport, Coaa.
FUed Oet 23, 1900, Ser. No. 199,793
lat CL? C07F 9/42
U A a 260-543 P 3 QaiiM
1. A process for preparing phenylphoq)honous dichloride
which comprises reacting benzene with phosphorous trichlo-
1. In a chemical vapor delivery system including a container
partially filled with material to be vaporized and applied to a
system which uses the vapor, means for ducting a carrier gas
through said material to transport said vaporized material, a
valve for controlling the flow of said carrier gas to said con-
tainer, and means for controlling the temperature of the mate-
rial in said container, an improved method comprising:
providing a continuous, uniform mass flow of said vaporized
material to said using system by:
sensing the total gaseous pressure (?) in said container,
comparing said sensed pressure (?) with a reference pres-
sure (?<,) to provide a pressure differential
(A?=?-?,);
generating a signal in a vapor mass flow controller utiliz-
ing said pressure differential (A?) in a computation by
the controller wherein, as the differential becomes more
positive, said computation demands an increase in car-
rier gas flows; and
transmitting said signal to said flow control valve, said
signal adjusting said flow control valve to control the
carrier gas flow to provide said continuous uniform
mass flow of said vaporized material.
4. A chemical vapor delivery system comprising:
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
755
a bubbler container for holding a quantity of high purity
liquid to be vaporized and applied to a using system;
means for transporting a carrier gas through said liquid to
transport the vaporized material to the using system;
means for sensing the carrier gas flow rate;
valve means for controlling the flow of said carrier gas;
means for sensing and controlUng the temperature of said
liquid;
means for sensing the total gaseous pressure in said con-
tainer; and
controller means connected to receive the sensed carrier gas
flow rate, the sensed temperature and the sensed preuure
and to compare the sensed preuure (?) with a reference
pressure (P0) to provide a preuure differential
(A?« ?-?«). said controller generating a signal in a com-
putation wherein, as the differential (A?) becomes more
positive, said computation demands an increase in carrier
gu flow rate, said signal for controlling said carrier gu
flow control valve means in a manner to produce a contin-
uous, uniform mau flow of said vaporized liquid to said
using system.
4,436,675
MULTISTAGE WATER PURinCATION APPARATUS
Makino Hisao, Chiba, and Koztma Sadao, Tokyo, both of Japan,
assignors to Kaiyo Kogyo Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,716
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct 26, 1981, 56-170951
Int a^ BOID 47/02
U.S. a. 261—77 3 Claims
10 ;o B
1. A multistage water purifier comprising:
an upper stage water purifier constituted by an upper pump-
ing sleeve, a plurality of upper suction pipes opening into
said upper pumping sleeve, a buoyancy chamber provided
on the upper end of said upper pumping sleeve, a plurality
of floats above the upper end of said upper pumping
sleeve, connecting members connecting said floats to the
upper end of said upper pumping sleeve for maintaining
the upper end of said upper pumping sleeve a predeter-
mined distance below said floats, and an intermittent air
supplying means in the lower portion of said upper pump-
ing sleeve for intermittently supplying air into said pump-
ing sleeve; and
a lower stage water purifier constituted by a lower pumping
sleeve, a plurality of lower suction pipes opening into said
lower pumping sleeve, an arcuate deflector attached to
the upper end of said lower pumping sleeve, an intermit-
tent air supplying means in the lower end portion of said
lower pumping sleeve for supplying air intermittently into
said lower pumping sleeve, a weight and a chain means
connecting said weight to the lower end of said lower
pumping deeve, the upper end of said lower stage water
purifier being connected to the lower end of said upper
stage water purifier;
said intermittent air supplying means of at leut said upper
sUge water purifier having an air chamber for feeding air
intermittently, said air chamber including an outer cylin-
der having a top plate, an inner cylinder having s bottom
plate and positioned in said outer cylinder and spaced
from the inner surface of the wall thereof, an air relief pipe
attached to and opening upwardly through said top plate
into said upper pumping sleeve and extending down-
wardly into said inner cylinder to s point spaced from and
opposed to the bottom plate of said inner cylinder, and an
air supplying tube connected to said outer cylinder for
supplying preuurized air thereinto, said air relief pipe
being sufficiently large to discharge into said upper pump-
ing sleeve a bubble of air sufficient to substantially fill said
upper pumping sleeve.
4,436,676
COOLING PLANT
Klans Gebka, Gabhansaa; Friadrich Hiiha. Ofreabach, and Rolf
Lakutat Neu-Iseaburg, all of Fad. Rep. of Ganaany, aaaigaors
to Kraftwark Union Aktiengasellsebaft, Mttlhaim, Fed. Rap.
of Germaay
FUed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 353,882
Claims priority, application Fed. Rap. of Garauuy, Mar. 9,
1981, 3108855
lat a.) BOIF 3/04
MS. a. 261—151 2 Oains
1. Plant for cooling water circulating in a secondary cooling
loop, comprising a plurality of parallel operating cooling cells
each having a blower, a drive motor for said blower and a
cooling water pump having a suction side, said cooling water
pumps of said cooling cells being separately drivable. a cold
water basin connected to said cooling cells, a secondary cool-
ing water pump connected to said cold water buin, a heat
exchanger connected to said secondary cooling water pump, a
warm water basin being connected to said heat exchanger,
being directly connected to said suction side of said cooling
water pumps and being disposed upstream of said cold water
basin, and means disposed between said warm water basin and
said cold water basin for providing an overflow therebetween,
said warm water basin including a main basin in the form of a
canal-like trough being substantially closed on all sides thereof
and a secondary basin being disposed at a higher level than said
main basin and being connected downstream thereof, said
secondary basin being in the form of a shallow cup forming a
cold water collecting buin upstream of said cold water basin,
and said overflow means being part of said secondary basin
providing overflow between said secondary basin and said
cold water basin.
756
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,677
NUCLEAR FUEL FABRICATION PROCESS
Kameth C. Radford, ChurchUl, and Don E, Harrison, Murrys-
▼Ule, both of Pa^ aaiignors to Westinghoiue Qectric Corp
Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Aug. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 403,969
Int a.J G21C 21/00
MS. a 264-0 J 17 Claim.
thermoplastic melt to provide foamed thermoplastic extrudate,
comprising:
providing an extruded Howing mass of thermoplastic melt;
constraining the now of said melt into a tubular configura-
tion over a fmite distance;
impinging an annular sheet-like How of gas under pressure
on said tubular configuration of melt substantially trans-
versely of the direction of flow thereof to entrain said gas
in said melt;
TCIMBUCBI
l'll'"M»l!'»)
nV nnnn, nnnf^
1. A method of making a pellet from a powder comprising:
(A) placing said powder in a heat-shrinkable self-supportina
bottle; ^^ *
(B) scaling said self-supporting bottle;
(C) isosutically pressing said self-supporting bottle at a
temperature which causes it to shrink at about the same
rate that the powder within it is compressed; and
(D) decomposing said self-supporting bottle and sintering
said powder.
subsequently returning said melt with entrained gas to a
flowing mass configuration;
controlling the flow rate and temperature of said flowing
mass with entrained gas to optimum values for subsequent
extrusion; and
extruding said flowing mass with entrained gas to produce
said foamed thermoplastic extrudate
4,436,678
METHOD FOR HOT REPAIRING THE INSIDE OF A
FURNACE
YasBo Nishikawa, and Hirokoni TakahaaU, both of Okayama,
Japan, aisignors to Kyusyu Refractories Co., Ltd., Okayama,
Japan
FUed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,636
Int C\? F27D 1/16
UAa.264-30 sctaim,
1. A method for hot repairing the inside of a high tempera-
ture furnace comprising the steps of forming a hot repair mate-
rial m the state of a slurry by adding 10-15 weight % of water
to a monolithic refractory material composed mainly of a
refractory material and a binder, or a refractory in admixture
with carbon containing granulated particles and additionally a
bmder; directing and compacting said repair material into
portions necessitating repairs in the high temperature furnace-
allowing the water in said repair material to boU; and harden-
ing said monolithic refractory material by said boiling opera-
tion; said monolithic refractory material having a particle size
composition of coarse particles of 1-10 mm in the range of
10-70 weight %, ultrafme particles below 0.063 mm in the
range of 10-50 weight % and particles of 1-0.063 mm for the
residual f>art.
4,436,679
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING
FOAMED THERMOPLASTIC MATERIALS
■ W. Winatcad, Baltimore, Md., aadgnor to Maryland
Cup Corporatioii, Owings Mllla, Md.
Filed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,403
Int CL' B29D 27/00
UAa264-40J 49CUdm.
1. The method of entraining gas as a blowing agent in a
4,436,680
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG GRANULAR,
fire-resistant MATERIAL
Axel Eschner, Wiesbaden; Rudolf Ganz, Mainz-Gonaenheim;
Glinter Tkotz, Wiesbaden; Hermann Stein, Bad Diirkheim,
and Klaus Kreuels, Eltiille, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
aaaignon to Dldier-Werke AG, Wiesbaden, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,247
Clainu priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 16,
1981, 3105579
Int a.3 C04B 21/06
UAa264-60 25CIaims
1. A process for producing a granular, fire-resistant material,
which comprises:
mixing 100 parts by weight of ceramic fibers, 2 to 15 parts by
weight of at least one member selected from the group
consisting of cUy, AI2O3, SiOj, aluminum hydroxide,
magnesium oxide, titanium dioxide and chromium oxide, 1
to 8 parts by weight, as P2O5, of a phosphate bonding
agent, and about 2 to about 25 parts by weight of water, to
form a substantially uniformly dispersed mixture,
compacting said mixture by a volume coefficient of at least
subjecting said compacted mixture to at least one heat-treat-
ment selected from the group consisting of drying at 1 10*
to 180* C, heat-treating at 250* to 600* C. and firing at
800* to 1550' C, and
granulating the thus heated product.
<^
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
757
4,436,681
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING IRON OXIDE WEIGHTING
MATERIAL FROM IRON CHLORIDE SOLUTIONS
VirgU J. Barczak, 2500 NW. 109th St, Oklahoma Oty, Okla.
73120; Haywood A. Perkins, 2905 Crown Colony Ct, MobUc,
Ala. 36609, and O. L. Daigle, 2716 NW. 59th St., Oklahoma
aty, Okla. 73112
Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 378,784
lot a.3 B28B 11/00
U.S. a 264-67 4 Claims
1"
(0 compressing the powder between the rollers to compact
and to coalesce the powder into a film;
(g) drawing the film from between the rollers;
(h) maintaining the circumferential speed of the rollers es-
sentially equal to the linear speed of the film drawn from
between the rollers; and
(i) applying tension to the film drawn from between the
rollers to produce a flat film.
/.
laOMCNlMl
MkWTlOII
■•L.^^^^^ 1
I uucnja
\ y (froibciHaa*
i0usr«ii
-4
■ CLU»ric«rioM
1 UrK
k MMOwC
>ri0M ' •
"
1. A process for preparing a weighting material adapated for
use in a drilling fluid which comprises:
A. compacting a particulate iron oxide byproduct formed
during the regeneration of aqueous hydrochloric acid
from an iron chloride solution to reduce the porosity
thereof and to increase the pour density thereof to at least
85 pounds per cubic foot and the tap density thereof to at
least 100 pounds per cubic foot,
B. calcining said compacted iron oxide byproduct at temper-
atures in the range of from about 900* C. to about 1300* C.
for a period of time sufficient to sinter said compacted iron
oxide byproduct and reduce the surface area of said by-
product to less than about 10 square meters per gram and
thereafter
C. grinding said calcined byproduct to a predetermined
particle size.
4436 683
METHOD FOR FABRICATING AN INFORMATION
SIGNAL RECORDED MEDIUM OF THE
ELECTROSTATIC CAPACITY TYPE
Yofhikl Nishihara, Yokohama, and Kazumichi Miyamoto,
Ichikawa, both of Japan, assignors to Victor Company of
Japan, Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Oct. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 437,679
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 2, 1981, 56*174513
Inta.'B29D;7/a?
U.S. a. 264-107 6 Claims
1. A method for fabricating an information signal recorded
medium of the electrostatic capacity type which comprises
providing a conductive resin composition comprising a vinyl
chloride resin, about 1.5 to 10 parts by weight of a stabilizer for
the copolymer resin, about 0.1 to 1.5 parts by weight of a
silicone oil and about 15 to about 70 parts by weight of a
carbon black conductive material, each based on 100 parts by
weight of the vinyl chloride resin, kneading the conductive
resin composition at a temperature sufficient for melting the
copolymer resin, and press molding the kneaded composition
in such a way that intended information signals are recorded in
geometrical patterns to g;ive a recorded medium, the conduc-
tive resin composition being applied with about 0.4 to 25 parts
by weight of water per 100 parts by weight of the resin prior
to or during the kneading, the kneading being continued until
the applied water is substantially removed.
4,436,682
ROLL COMPACTING OF POLYMER POWDERS INTO
FULLY DENSE PRODUCTS
Walter V. Knopp, Wyckoff, N J., assignor to Rerere Copper and
BraM, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 216,646, Dec. 15, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Not. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,432
Int a.} B28B 1/08
U.S. a. 264—70 6 Claims
4436684
METHOD OF FORMINGIMPLANTABLE PROSTHESES
FOR RECONSTRUCTIVE SURGERY
Darid N. White, Palo Alto, Calif., assignor to Contour Med
Partners, Ltd., Mountain View, Calif.
FUed Jun. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 384,646
Int. a.3 B23Q 15/14
U.S. a. 264—138 31 Claims
-
1
yVi
j-K,
UDl««T VtKi
SCM
h
DEtUTIM
-•
0>l> 1
nOCESSiU
«-
CWIOIWTE CEIEIiIiM
«ID DtKfUUTlOl
-•
MMl 1
scuirriK 1
-15
1. A process for producing a polymer film comprising:
(a) storing a supply of a polymer powder;
(b) feeding a free falling stream of the powder between a pair
of spaced roUers;
(c) metering the stream of powder fed between the roUers;
(d) heating the powder;
(e) rotating the rollers;
1. A method of fabricating a three dimensional corporeal
model of a structure internal to a body, comprising:
subjecting the body to radiant energy to produce radiant
energy responses internal to said body, the radiant energy
selected to produce radiant energy responses that are
characteristic of a selected physical property of substances
detectable exterior of the body;
detecting produced radiant energy responses to obuin rep-
resentations of substances at locations internal to the body
defining structures internal to said body three-dimension-
ally;
generating from the representations of the substances a set of
three dimensional coordinates defining a three dimen-
sional representation of a selected structure internal to the
body; and
directing a sculpting tool into a workpiece in accordance
with the generated set of three dimensional coordinates to
form a corporeal model corresponding to the three dimen-
sional represenution of the selected structure.
758
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
CONTINUOUS PRESS FORMING METHOD FOR SHEET
RESIN
Koji Emnra; Tonco Saadd, ud Hidemlclif Kazama, aU of FrJI,
Japan, anigBon to Yamakawa iBdutiial Company, Limited,
SUzaoka, Japan
Filed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,434
Claima priority, appUcation Japan, Dec 1, 1981, 56-193454
Int CL' B29C 17/14
VS. CL 264-148 n Claima
1. A continuous method for press forming a sheet resin,
which comprises the steps of:
(a) continuously extruding molten resin from a supply source
for the molten resin,
(b) subjecting the extruded molten resin to a sheet forming to
obtain a softened sheet resin strip synchronously with the
extrusion of the molten resin from the supply source,
(c) subjecting the softened resin to a primary thermal control
step whereby the temperature of the resin sheet is regu-
lated so that it possesses the necessary surface stiffness and
thermoplasticity to be subsequently cut into pieces of a
fixed length,
(d) cutting the thus temperature regulated sheet resin strip
into sheet resin pieces of a fixed length,
(e) subjecting the sheet resin pieces to a secondary thermal
control so that they possess the necessary thermoplasticity
and surface stiffness so it can be subsequently press
formed,
(0 intermittently injecting said sheet resin pieces of a fixed
length into a press forming machine, and
(g) clamping said sheet resin pieces by use of the press form-
ing machine synchronously with the injection of the sheet
resin pieces into the press forming machine, whereby all
the steps can be subjected to one consecutive operation.
4,436,686
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING LEVEL VIALS
Michael Drori, MobUe Poat - Upper Gaill, Klbbatz Haooahrim.
larael
Filed Sep. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 419,036
Claima priority, appUcation larael, Sep. 25, 1981, 63934
Int a^ B29D 23/02
VS. a. 264-163 5 Claima
shape and at least two spaced external integral thin annu-
lar ribs,
). transferring said core into a second suitable mold in the
same machine and molding a vial body around it of trans-
parent thermoplastic material,
;. removing said vial body from said machine after cooling
and withdrawing said pin member from the core and then
said core from the vial body, whereby said ribs are sev-
ered from the core and remain in said body, to form bub-
ble indicia, the softening temperature of said transparent
plastic being lower than that of the opaque plastic.
4,436,687
APPARATUS AND PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON
OF PILE SURFACE ARTICLES
Donald J. Bye, Roncom; Harold P. Staniatreet, Pontypool, both
of England, and Werner Lindenatmth, Oeatringen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, aaiignon to Imperial Chemical Indoatriea PLC,
London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 417,597, Not. 20, 1973, abandoned.
Thia appUcation Sep. 8, 1975, Ser. No. 611,243
Claima priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Dec 4, 1972.
55831/72
Int a.J B29C 17/02
VS. a. 264-164 5 Claims
1. A process for the production of a pile surfaced product
comprising feeding a thermoplastic material against a substan-
tially smooth surfaced roll heated to a temperature above the
softening point of the thermoplastic material and a paper back-
ing against the thermoplastic so that the thermoplastic material
adheres to the surface and bonds to the backing, withdrawing
the laminate of the backing and the thermoplastic material
from the roll so that fibrils are drawn out from thermoplastic
material between the surface of the roU and the backing in a
fibril forming area, the laminate being withdrawn over a rod or
bar having a radius of curvature of between 1 1 and S millime-
ters and being positioned transverse to the direction of move-
ment of the laminate at a distance from the surface of the roll
greater than the combined thickness of the thermoplastic mate-
rial and the backing, cooling the fibrils by directing a coolant
into the fibril forming area and disjoining the fibrils from the
heated surface.
1. A method of manufacturing level vials comprising the
steps of:
a. molding a core of an opaque thermoplastic material
around a pin member in a conventional double-injection
molding machine the resulting core having a barrel-like
4,436,688
PROCESS FOR MELT-SPINNING OF SYNTHETIC
POLYMERS
Gonter Koachinek, Dietzenbach; Dietmar Wandel, Hanao;
Bemd Kretachmann, Kahl, and Rolf Zinaier, Henaenstamm,
aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignon to Da?y McKee Ak-
tieageseUachaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,780
Oaiam priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Gennany, Sep. 29,
1980,3036683
Int CL^ DOID 5/08
VS. CL 264—176 F 6 Claims
1. In a process for melt-spinning of synthetic polymers se-
lected from the group consisting of polyamide 6, polyamide 66,
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
759
polyester and their copolymers into filamento wherein the
pdymer is melt-spun through orifices, said orifices being lo-
cated in a spinneret, said spinneret being of a substantially
planar bottom surface, thereby forming said filamenU, said
filamento being allowed to emerge from said spinneret and
drop into a blowing duct, said blowing duct having an upper-
most blow point, said filamento being subjected to a current of
air flowing in a direction normal to the filamento and cooled in
a cooling zone, said cooling zone being located below said
uppermost blow point, said filamento being moistened and
prepared and then withdrawn at a speed of between 600 and
6000 meters/min., said uppermost blow point and said surface
4,436,690
CURVED MANDREL FOR CURING POLYMERIC HOSE
AND METHOD
Richard F. Daris, WayaesriUe, N.C., asdgnor to Dayco Corpo-
ration, Dayton, Ohio
Diriaioa of Ser. No. 86,984, Oct. 22, 1979, Pat No. 4,298,330.
Thia appUcatioa Oct 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,698
Int a.} B29H 5/18
VS. a 264—313 4 Claims
a«iS6,M,is
of said spinneret having a distance "D" therebetween and
defining a quiescent zone, said distance "D" being selected so
that said distance is within a range, said range having an upper
limit and a lower limit, the improvement in which said upper
limit is defmed by a relation "B," wherein 8=48.2 (log v)- 109
(mm), and said lower limit is defmed by a relation Ai, A2 or
A3 wherein
A| = 34.4(log v)-71 (mm) and applies to a spinneret load of
less than O.S g/min/cm^
A2=-320og v-3.356)2-f34 (mm) and applies to a spin-
neret load of O.S- 1.8 g/min/cm^
A3=-440og V- 3.22 1)2 -1-32 (mm) and applies to a spin-
neret load greater than 1.8 g/min/cm^,
wherein "v" is the spinning withdrawal speed in meters/min.
4,436,689
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF POLYMER
FILAMENTS HAVING HIGH TENSILE STRENGTH
Paul Smith, WUmington, Del.; Pieter J. Lemstra, Brunasum,
NetherUnds; Robert Kirschbaom, Sittard, Netherlands, and
Jacques P. L. PUpers, Umbricht Netherlands, assignors to
Stamicarbon B.V., Geleen, Netherlands
FUed Oct 18, 1982, Ser. No. 434,829
Claims priority, appUcation Netherbuds, Oct 17, 1981,
8104728
Int a.} DOIF 6/00
VS. a. 264—204 15 Claims
1. An improved process for the preparation of polyethylene
filamento having a high tensile strength and modulus by spin-
ning a solution of linear high-molecular weight polyethylene
and thereafter stretching the filament thus formed, the im-
provement essentially comprising:
spinning a solution of an ethylene polymer or copolymer at
a temperature above the gel point of said solution, said
solution containing at least 80 percent by weight solvent,
and wherein said ethylene polymer or copolymer
contains at least S percent by weight of at least one alkene
having 3 to 8 carbon atoms;
has a weight-average molecular weight Mw greater than
4xl0'k/kmole;and
has a weight/number average molecular weight ratio
Mw/Mn lower than S;
cooling the spun polymer solution to a temperature below ito
gel point to form a gel filament; and
stretching said gel filament under conditions such that a
polymer filament having a tensile strength of at least I.S
GPa at room temperature is formed.
1. In a method of making a curved mandrel for supporting an
uncured polymeric hose during curing to define a correspond-
ing curved configuration in the cured hose; the improvement
comprising the steps of; forming a plurality of subsuntially
cylindrical members each having opposed end faces with a first
type of said members each having said opposed end faces
thereof disposed in substantially parallel relation and with a
second type of said members each having said opposed end
faces disposed in substantially non-parallel relation; disposing
said plurality of members in end-to-end relation so as to be
adapted to be relatively routed to define the configuration of
said mandrel including predetermined curve means therein;
in^rlocking said members with interlocking means which
interlock the members in only one position to define said con-
figuration and curve means; and holding said members with
readily attachable and detachable holding means enabling
holding said members axially against each other after inter-
locking thereof; said members with said interlocking means
and holding means being adapted to, provide a substantially
straight mandrel for easy installation of an uncured straight
hose therearound, define said configuration and curve means in
said mandrel and uncured hose by relatively rotating said
members, and provide looseness and axial spacing between
members to enable easy withdrawal of the cured curved hose
from around said members.
4,436,691
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE FORMATION OF
A SPHEROMAK PLASMA
Stephen C. Jardin, Princeton; Maaaaki Yamada, LawrenceriUe;
Harold P. Forth, and Mitcheo Okabayaahi, both of Princeton,
aU of NJ., aasignors to The United States of America as
represented by the United States Department of Energy,
Waahlngton, D.C.
FUed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 246,976
Int a.i G21B 1/00
VS. a. 376—137 14 Claims
1. In a method for producing and confining a plasma which
includes the steps of:
evacuating a vacuum vessel and filling said vessel with a
neutral species;
producing a first poloidal magnetic field within said vacuum
vessel;
producing a second poloidal magnetic field in said vacuum
vessel by pulsing s current in a first direction through a
poloidal field generating coil, the poloidal field generating
760
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
coil located in a toroidal shaped flux core which is en-
closed within a housing, such that said first and said sec-
ond poloidal magnetic fields are superimposed to form a
composite poloidal field in said vacuum vessel having
regions of stronger and weaker strength;
producing a toroidal magnetic field in said vacuum vessel by
passing a current through a toroidal field generating coil
which is located in said flux core, thereby initiating a
plasma discharge and causing toroidal flux to appear
outside of said flux core;
expanding the plasma in the direction of said region of
weaker poloidal magnetic field strength;
producing an equilibrium magnetic field by passing a current
through at least one external equilibrium field coil which
is positioned outside of said flux core housing so as to set
up an equilibrium magnetic field;
an improved method of detaching said plasma from said flux
core, comprising:
.« .ifssauN ,
producing, as part of the step of producing said second
poloidal field, a composite magnetic field having field
lines tangential to an outer surface of said flux core includ-
ing the step of passing a current through an interior equi-
librium field coil located inside of said flux core housing,
so as to contribute to said equilibrium magnetic field; and
reversing simultaneously the directions of currents in the
poloidal field and the toroidal field generating coils such
that a resultant normal component V^ of the velocity of
said plasma away from said flux core is approximately
zero, said normal velocity component V^ being character-
ized by the equation Vn=EpB,-E,Bp, where E,and B^are
electric and magnetic fields, respectively, set up by said
poloidal field generating coil and where B/ and Ep are
magnetic and electric fields, respectively, set up by said
toroidal field generating coil, to pinch off at least most of
said expanded plasma so as to cause poloidal magnetic
field line reconnection within the pinched-ofT portion,
thereby producing a detached plasma.
4,436,692
PLUG FOR REACTOR PRESSURE VESSEL NOZZLE
Donald D. Stenabaugb, Danbury, Conn^ anignor to Automation
Indnstries, Inc., Greenwich, Conn.
FUed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,509
Int. a.3 G21C 19/04
VJS. CI. 376—204 13 Claims
1. The method of plugging an underwater nozzle opening in
a vertical sidewall of a cylindrical nuclear reactor vessel con-
taining a core shroud radially displaced from said sidewall to
form an annular space, said annular space containing jet pumps
therein spaced from said sidewall, which comprises:
providing a substantially disk shaped plug having a diameter
sufficient to cover said nozzle opening and curved to
match the curve of said sidewall, means on one surface of
said plug for sealing against said sidewall around said
nozzle opening, and cylinder/piston means carried by the
other side of said plug;
lowering said plug as it hangs vertically from a first cable
into said annular space above said jet pumps and laterally
displaced from vertical alignment with said nozzle;
pushing said cable toward said sidewall until said plug is
vertically aligned with the space between said sidewall
and said jet pumps;
lowering said plug on said first cable into the space between
said sidewall and said jet pumps;
laterally shifting said plug into vertical alignment with said
nozzle while shifting the weight of said plug to a second
cable;
lowering said plug on said second cable into alignment with
said nozzle opening; and
actuating said cylinder/piston means to force said plug away
from said core shroud and into sealing engagement over
said nozzle opening.
4,436,693
NON-IMPACTING LOOSE ROD STORAGE CANISTER
Louis J. Zezza, Ossining, N.Y., and Iqbal Husain, Brookfleld,
Conn., assignors to Automation Industries, Inc., Greenwich,
Conn.
FUed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,410
Int. a.3 G21C 19/20
U.S. a. 376—272 6 Claims
1. In combination with a nuclear fuel rod elongated storage
cell having an open upper end, side walls, and a bottom wall
formed with a central hole, a fuel rod canister contained within
said cell comprising
(a) an elongated body having an open upper end and a closed
lower end,
(b) a support pin extending downwardly from the closed
lower end of the body and fitted within the central hole in
the bottom wall of the cell to restrain the lower end of the
body against lateral movement,
(c) a cap on the open upper end of the body, and
(d) means for securing the cap to the body,
(e) the cap being closely spaced from and contained against
substantial lateral movement by the side walls of the cell.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
761
4436 694
NUCLEAR REACTOR CAVTTY DECONTAMINATION
MACHINE
Michael Vassalotti, New Milford, Conn., and Alvaro ObUgado,
Waccabuc, N.Y., assignors to Automation Industries, Inc.,
Greenwich, Conn.
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,554
Int a.J G21C 19/20
VJS. a. 376—310 10 Claims
free-falling liquid masses for descent into said chamber
such that at the mstant of nuclear explosion said nuclear
1. Apparatus for decontaminating the inside walls of a nu-
clear reactor cavity in a refueling floor, having a raised curb
around its periphery which comprises:
a chassis having whMls in rolling contact with said floor;
first and second curb wheels mounted on said chassis in
horizontal rolling contact with said curb;
a support member extending upwardly and laterally from
said chassis;
an elongated mast depending from said suppori member and
into the reactor cavity;
at least one reaction wheel carried by said mast for horizon-
tal rolling engagement with the cavity wall;
a carriage vertically positionable along said elongated mast;
and
means carried by said carriage for spraying decontaminating
fluid on said cavity wall.
4436695
LARGER COI^AINED NUCLEAR EXPLOSION
BREEDER REACTOR SYSTEMS
Edward F. Marwick, 5149 Dobson St., Skokie, U. 60077
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 40,849, May 21, 1979, Pat No.
4,344,913, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 953,166,
Oct. 20, 1978, Pat No. 4,216,058, which is a continuation-in-part
of Sar. No. 810,894, Jun. 28, 1977, Pat No. 4,121,971. This
•ppUcation Apr. 7, 1980, Sar. No. 137,849
Int a.J G21C 1/02
VJS. a. 376—317 39 Claims
14. Apparatus for producing useful energy, said apparatus
comprising:
a large chamber;
means for introducing nuclear explosive means for descent
into said chamber;
means for causing an explosion of said nuclear explosive
means at a predetermined point in said chamber;
means for introducing a plurality of substantially contiguous
explosive means is substantially surrounded by said plural-
ity of masses; and
means for introducing spray into said chamber.
4436 696
PROCESS FOR PROVIDING A UNIFORM CARBON
DISTRIBUTION IN FERROUS COMPACTS AT HIGH
TEMPERATURES
Daniel M. Buck; Alan T. Sibley, botii of AUentown, and John J.
Kaiser, Catasauqua, ail of Pa., auignors to Air ProducU and
Chemicals, Inc., AUentown, Pa.
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,512
Int a.J B22F 3/00
U.S. a. 419—57 8 Claims
1. A process for high temperature sintering which provides
a substantially uniform carbon distribution in a ferrous powder
metallurgy compact, which process comprises:
(a) heating the ferrous powder metallurgy compact in the
heating zone of a sintering furnace to a temperature of at
least 2,200* P..
(b) introducing into the heating zone an atmosphere com-
prising about 2 to less than 10 volume percent hydrogen,
about 0.5 to 2.0 volume percent carbon monoxide, about
0.5 to 1.0 volume percent methane, the level of either the
carbon monoxide or the methane being at least slightly
greater than 0.5 volume percent when the other is about
0.5 volume percent and the hydrogen is about 2 volume
percent, and the balance nitrogen, and
(c) removing the sintered compact.
V
4,436,697
SOLDERING ALLOY
Ronald Friedrich, Kamp-Untfort and ManfM MiUler, Essen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaslgnors to Fried. Knipp
GaseUschaft mit beschrinkter Haftung, Easea, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 422,193
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 20,
1981, 3145944
lat a^ C23C 19/07. 30/00
VJS. a. 420-440 4 Claims
1. Soldering alloy comprismg 25 to 35% iron, 15 to 25%
chromium, 3 to 6% silicon, 1 to 4% molybdenum, and the
remainder essentially cobalt.
762
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,43«,i98
FEED FORWARD CARBON BLACK REACTOR
CONTROL
Galea D. Stacy, and Merle R. Liklas, Jr., both of BartlcfTttle,
Oida., anignon to Philiipi Petroleum Company, BartleariUe,
Okla.
DiTiaion of Ser. No. 19S,710, Oct 9, 19W, Pat No. 4^55,016.
This appUcation Jul. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 401,279
Int a.3 G05D 7/00; O09C //¥«; BOIJ 4/00
MS. a. 422—42 1 Claim
4,434,499
MONITORING SYSTEM FOR CHECKING ELECTRIC
ROTARY MACHINE FOR LOCAL OVERHEATING
Kiyoahl Narato, Ibarald; Keiioa Ohtaolu, Hitachi; Toorn Inada,
Hitachi, and Takaahi Watanabe, Hitachi, all of Japan* aadgn*
on to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jon. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,354
Claimi priority, appUcatioa Japan, Sep. 6, 1980, 55-122944
Int a^ GOIN WOO, 27/00. 33/44
U.S. a. 422-48 2 Claimi
1. An apparatus for producing carbon black comprising
a. a carbon black reactor having
aa. an essentially cylindrically shaped housing,
bb. means for introducing hydrocarbon feed at or near the
axis of the housing and in essentially the axial direction,
cc. means for introducing a fuel into said reactor,
dd. means for introducing a free oxygen-containing gas
into said reactor,
ee. means for introducing hot combustion gases obtained
by the combustion of said fuel and free oxygen-contain-
ing gas in essentially tangential direction into said hous-
ing,
ff. means for withdrawal of carbon black containing
smoke from said housing,
b. a humidity signal generator for determining the content of
water in the free oxygen-containing gas entering the car-
bon black reactor,
c. an automatic double control unit operatively connected to
said humidity signal generator and receiving said humidity
signal, said unit being capable of converting said humidity
signal into a feed control signal and into an oxygen control
signal, each of said control signals being automatically
computed by said unit in such a way that a manipulation of
the feed flow or respectively the flow of free oxygen-con-
taining gas responsive to the respective control signal
keeps one carbon black property or respectively carbon
black process property essentially constant >aid unit being
further equipped with select means capable of selecting
that one of said control signals for a respective manipula-
tion which causes the larger conversion of the feed to
carbon black, said double control unit being operatively
connected to both a manipulator in the means for intro-
ducing hydrocarbon feed and a manipulator in the means
for introducng free oxygen-containing gas such as to
allow the manipulation of either the hydrocarbon feed or
the flow of free oxygen-containing gas into the carbon
black reactor responsive to the respective control signal.
' ' ^ /'// • ,•/ '/
1. A monitoring system for checking for local overheating of
an electric rotary machine of the gas-cooled type, with the
machine including parts covered with organic insulating mate-
rial tending to undergo pyrolysis when exposed to elevated
temperatures, the system comprising:
a sensing means for sensing a concentration of minuscule
particles in a coolant gas for the electric rotary machine,
the electric rotary machine being determined as having a
local overheating when a predetermined level is exceeded
by the concentration of the minuscule particles as sensed
by said sensing means;
test gas supply means for supplying liquified carbon dioxide
connected to said sensing means, said test gas supply
means being operative to feed the liquified carbon dioxide
into said sensing means thereby causing the sensing means
to perform a sensing operation, to thereby determine
whether or not the sensing means is functioning normally;
a passage means for feeding coolant gas from the electric
rotary machine into said sensing means, said passage
means comprising a first passage for directly feeding the
coolant gas from the electric rotary machine into the
sensing means, and a second passage for feeding the cool-
ant gas from the electric rotary machine into the sensing
means through a filter means for removing minuscule
particles from the coolant gas to provide the sensing
means with a gas free from minuscule particles;
a liquid atomizing device communicating with said second
passage at a position downstream of said filter means for
injecting the liquified carbon dioxide as atomized particles
into the gas free from the minuscule particles; and
switch means for switching a direction of flow of the coolant
gas between the first passage and the second passage, said
switch means being adapted to allow the coolant gas to
flow through the first passage when the coolant gas flow-
ing through the electric rotary machine is sensed by the
sensing means to determine a concentration thereof, and
to allow the coolant gas to flow through the second pas-
sage when the gas free from the minuscule particles is
provided by the filter means and the liquified carbon
dioxide is injected as atomized particles by the liquid
atomizing device into the filtered gas to provide a test gas
so that the test gas is fed into the sensing means to deter-
mine whether or not the sensing means is functioning
normally.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
763
4,434,700
AUTOCLAVABLE PIPETTE JAR AND METHOD OF
USING TT
Eric D. Erickson, Lincoln, Nebr., aaaignor to The Board of
Rcganta of the Unl?enity of Nebraska, Lincoln, Nebr.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 177,013, Aug. 11, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Jaa. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 334,895
Int a.! A41L 2/00. 2/26; B45D 25/00
VJS. a. 422-102 6 Claims
1. A two-position autoclavable container comprising:
walls of autoclavable material forming a compartment for
holding pipettes;
said walls of autoclavable material being shaped to form a
base, a side wall and a top of said container with the base,
side wall and top at least partly defining and enclosing said
compartment;
said base having a flat bottom surface, whereby said con-
tainer may be supported thereon in a first suble position;
said side wall being tubular and extending upwardly from
said base;
constraint means for preventing said container from rolling
when it rests in a second stable position where it is not
supported by the flat bottom surface, whereby said con-
tainer nuiy be supported in the second stable position and
wherein said constraint means includes a straight resting
edge which extends as a side of said base, with the base
being otherwise generally disc shaped;
said base, side wall and top having a continuous portion,
whereby said pipette jar may hold a liquid when resting in
either said first or said second suble position; and
said side wall having an opening immediately adjacent to
said top and located on the opposite side of said compart-
ment from said straight resting edge, whereby said open-
ing is near the top of said compartment and pipettes can be
inserted through said opening with said container resting
in a selected one of said first or said second stable positions
to permit said container to be placed in an autoclave in
either of said two positions while holding a liquid.
4,434,701
ADSORPTION REACTOR AND METHOD FOR
REMOVING SO2 FROM WASTE GASES
Ekkehard Richter, Essen, and Martin Reinke, Dortmund, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assigDon to Bergwerksrerbaad
GmbH, Essen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,270
Oaims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 29,
1981, 3138465
Int a» FOIN 3/10
VS. a. 422—173 8 Claims
1. An adsorption reactor for removing SO2 and the like from
waste gases, comprising
a single bed of a grained adsorption medium moving in a
substantially downward direction and arranged so that
waste gases pass through said bed in a gas flow direction
transversely of the adsorption medium movement direc-
tion; and
a temperature separating permeable member formed by heat
exchanger tubes inserted in said single bed of a grained
adsorption medium and subdividing said single bed into at
leut a first adsorption layer located upstream of said heat
exchanger pipes in said gas flow direction so that waste
gases pau said first adsorption layer at a higher tempera-
ture, and a second adsorption layer located transversely
adjacent to said first adsorption layer and downstream of
said heat exchanger pipes in said gas flow direction so that
the waste gases pau second adsorption layer at a lower
temperature.
5. A method of adsorption for removing SOj and the like
from waste gases, comprising the steps of
passing waste gases through a single bed of a grained adsorp-
tion medium moving from above downwardly, in a gu
passage direction transversely of the adsorption medium
movement direction; and
arranging a temperature separating permeable member
formed by a heat exchanger in the bed of the grained
adsorption medium and subdividing said single bed into at
least a first adsorption layer located upstream of the heat
exchanger pipes in said gas flow direction so that wute
gases pass said first adsorption layer at a higher tempera-
ture, and a second adsorption layer located transversely
adjacent to said first adsorption layer and downstream of
said heat exchanger pipes on said gas flow direction so
that the waste gases pau second adsorption layer at a
lower temperature.
4,434,702
REACTOR FOR HYDROGENATING COAL SLURRY
Rndi Schulx, Fussgoenbeim; Hubert Puestel, Muttcrttadt; Ge-
org Weber, Lodwigihafea, and Heriberi Kuerten, Neustodt
aU of Fed. Rep. of Gemany, assignors to BASF AktieagescU-
ichaft. Fed. Rep. of Gennany
FUed Jaa. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,244
Clainu priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 30,
1981, 3103081
Int a.i BOIJ 8/04
VS. a. 422—195 5 Claims
1. A multi-stage reactor for hydrogenating coal slurry under
preuures of up to 700 bar, preferably of up to 350 bar, compris-
ing a closed preuure vessel having inlets for gas and coal
slurry through the reactor bottom, an outlet for sludge, gases
and vapors in the reactor top, and at least 4 dividing trays in
764
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
the pressure vessel, by means of which trays the individual
reaction stages are separated from one another, wherein each
dividing tray has a progressively reducing cross-section com-
prising two opposed shells of conical, elliptical or hemispheri-
cal shape, with passage orifices, spaced over its entire lower
face, so as to prevent coal slurry caking onto the tray in the
direction of flow of the gas and coal slurry reactants, said
passage of orifices having inlets on the face of the lower shell
which are reduced in cross-section with upward distance, the
space between said shells being filled with a ceramic mass, and
said shells having a multiplicity of small holes therein.
a reducing agent, thereby precipitating uranium dioxide;
and
recovering the precipitated uranium dioxide from the solu-
tion.
4,436,703
LIME SLAKER
Stanley C. Lane, Seattle, Wash., assignor to Crown Zellerbach
Corporation, San Francisco, Calif.
FUed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328^72
Int a.3 BOIF 3/12
VS. a. 422—225 8 Gaims
4,436,705
EXTRACTING CHROMIUM (III) FROM AQUEOUS
SOLUTIONS WITH ^ETHYLHEXYL ACID PHOSPHATE
Dale E. Lyman, Bumpass, Va., assignor to Mobil Oil Corpora*
tion, New York, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 1, 1983, Ser. No. 518,994
Int. a.3 COIG 37/00
U.S. a. 423— 54 10 Claims
1. A process for the extraction of chromium (III) from an
aqueous chromium (Ill)-bearing solution comprising:
(a) contacting said solution with an organic extraction sol-
vent comprising a mixture of mono-2-ethylhexyl phos-
phoric acid and di-2-ethylhexyl phosphoric acid as ex-
tractant whereby chromium (111) is extracted from the
aqueous solution into the organic phase; and
(b) subsequently separating the resultant chromium (III)
loaded organic phase from the aqueous phase.
1. In a lime slaker comprising a vessel, means for maintaining
a desired level of liquor in the vessel, and a vent pipe for
allowing excess hot vapor in the vessel to escape, the improve-
ment wherein the vent pipe is a substantially vertical pipe
extending from a point within the vessel above the desired
level of liquor andH}irough the bottom of the vessel to a space
below the vessel, with the outlet of the vent pipe being below
the vessel, and a shower head for spraying water into the vent
pipe is disposed at the inlet end of the vent pipe, the shower
head being connected to means for supplying water to the
shower head, whereby the water sprayed into the vent pipe
flows into the space below the vessel and drains therefrom.
4,436,706
PROCESS FOR THE RECOVERY OF PENTAVALENT
VANADIUM COMPOUNDS FROM ACID CATALYST
EXTRACTS
Lambertus J. G. Nacken, and Albertiis H. Baas, both of Arnhem,
Netherlands, assignors to Shell Internationale Research
Maatschapplj B. V., The Hague, Netherlands
FUed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 406,116
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, Aug. 26, 1981,
8103964
Int. a.3 COIG 31/02
U.S. a. 423—65 15 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of pentavalent vanadium
compounds by reprocessing acid extracts of vanadium-contain-
ing catalysts spent in the hydrotreatment of crude or residual
oils, characterized in that extracts containing trivalent and
tetravalent vanadium are oxidized at a pH between O.S and 2.6
with an oxygen-containing gas to form concentrates of tetrava-
lent vanadium, after which oxidation is carried out at a pH
between 2.6 and 4.0 with an oxygen-containing gas to form
concentrates of pentavalent vanadium.
4,436,704
METHOD OF RECOVERING URANIUM OXIDE FROM
ALKALINE SODIUM URANYL CARBONATE
SOLUTIONS
Otmar Krennrich, Obenirsel; Gottfried Brendel, and Hartmut
Pietsch, both of Bad Homburg, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to MetaUgeseUschaft AktiengeseUschaft, Frankfurt
am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,865
Qaims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 22,
1981, 3128855
Int a.3 COIG 43/025
VJS. a. 423—11 6 Claims
1. A method of recovering uranium dioxide from an alkaline
sodium uranyl carbonate solution which comprises the steps
of:
heating said solution to a temperature above its boUing point
at atmospheric pressure and bringing said solution to a
superatmospheric pressure;
reacting said solution at said temperature and under superat-
mospheric pressure with particulate metallic iron forming
4,436,707
METHOD FOR THE REMOVAL OF ACIDIC GASES
SUCH AS CARBON DIOXIDE FROM GASEOUS
MIXTURES
Heinz Karwat, Pullach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Linde
AktiengeseUschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 322,417, Nov. 18, 1981, abandoned.
This appUcation Jun. 30, 1983, Ser. No. 510,155
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Not. 20,
1980,3043831
Int a.3 BOID 53/34
U.S. a. 423—226 6 Claims
1. A method for the removal of acidic gases comprising H2S
or CO2 from gaseous mixtures which comprises washing said
gaseous mixtures with a wash stream comprising methanol
containing ammonia in an amount greater than O.S weight
percent sufficient to prevent the formation of a solid precipi-
tate of ammonia therein, and so as to remove at least a portion
of said acidic gases from said gaseous mixture and to produce
a laden methanol stream containing said acidic gases therein,
regenerating said laden methanol stream by removing a sufTi-
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
765
cient portion of said acidic gases therefrom, so as to regenerate
said wash stream containing greater than about 0.65 weight
SJC
H;-r
^y^
^f
percent CO2 therefrom, and recycling said regenerated wash
stream.
4,436,708
PRODUCnON OF SYNTHETIC ZEOLITES
Robert N. Sanders, Baton Rouge, La., assignor to Ethyl Corpo-
ration, Richmond, Va.
FUed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,428
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 23,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 COIB 33/28
U.S. a. 423—329 16 Claims
1. A method of producing a crystalline synthetic faujasite of
the zeolite "Y" type, comprising the steps of separately prepar-
ing a sodium silicate solution and a sodium aluminate solution,
providing an activated system comprising a sodium silicate
solution mixed with agitation for a period of at least about
one-half hour with a seed amount of finely ground synthetic
faujasite of the zeolite "Y" type at a temperature up to about 0*
C, mixing the sodium aluminate solution with the activated
system over a period of up to about five hours to provide a
mixture having the following molar ratio:
(4.4-8.5)Na2O.Al2O3.(10.1-16.0)SiO2.(145-200).
H2O,
allowing the mixture to stand for up to about 24 hours at a
temperature from about 0* C. to ambient, heating the mixture
to a temperature of about 90" C.-105' C. and reacting at said
temperature until the desired crystalline synthetic faujasite of
the zeolite "Y" type is formed, and recovering said zeolite
4,436,709
LASER PRODUCnON OF CARBON-13 BASED ON
CF2HCL
Michel Gauthier, Aylmer; Peter A. Hackett and CU?e WUUs,
both of Ottawa, aU of Canada, assignors to Canadian Patents
A Development Limited, Ottawa, Canada
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,741
Claims priority, appUcation Canada, May 26, 1981, 378279
Int a.3 BOID 59/00
VS. CL 423—437 3 Claims
1. A method of producing carbon- 13 by multiphoton decom-
position of CF2HCI, said material containing carbon- 12 and
carbon- 13 isotopic species, comprising:
(a) irradiating gaseous CF2HCI in a reaction chamber at a
pressure in the range 10-100 Torr with an infra-red laser
beam at a frequency in the range 1040-1080 wavenumbers
to selectively decompose the CF2HCI to give C2F4 en-
riched to a first level of carbon- 13. CF2HCI, and HCl,
(b) passing these products through an absorber to remove
the HCl and a separation suge to remove the CF2HCI
depleted in carbon- 13,
(c) oxidizing the C2F4 to form CO2, and
■if
E^>— f^^
c^«i, HCl. V>
c%«.V.
levtxrn 1
:^
KmwTiail
TBStti'e.
^
HI
•^ L |lft-W»C«l
HtSet
(d) passing the CO2 through a second exchange st|ige to
separate the '3C02 and the '2CO2 and give a CO2 product
containing approximately 90-99% carbon- 13.
4,436,710
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING POTASSIUM
SULFATE
Naomi Miyazakl, Tokyo, and Aklra Fi^imura, Yono, both of
Japan, assignors to Onoda Chemical Industry Co., Ltd., To-
kyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 405,726
Oalms priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 19, 1982, 57-44168
Int a.3 COIB 7/01; COID 5/02
VS. a. 423—552 4 Claims
1. A method of manufacturing potassium sulfate which
comprises:
the first dry step consisting of heating raw materials pre-
pared by mixing concentrated sulfuric acid and recycled
mixed cake from the third step, said cake consisting essen-
tially of K2SO4, KHS04and KCl, with at most addition of
only a minor portion of non-recycled KCl, wherein the
SO4 contained in the mixed raw materials has a molar ratio
to K contained therein ranging from 1 .0; 1 .3 to 1 .0: 1 .4, at a
temperature of from 290* to 350* C. to form mixed salts of
KHSO4 and K2SO4 in a molten slurry state, the amount of
H2SO4, K2SO4, KHSO4 and KCl being sufficient to pro-
duce said mixed salts which have the composition
KAH2-nS04 wherein n= 1.3-1.4; and recovering the
major poriion of the total chloride values added in the
overall process as hydrogen chloride gas which is
evolved;
the second wet step consisting of dissolving said (i) mixed
salts and (ii) additional non-recycled KCl, into water, the
amount of said additional non-recycled KCl being 1.0 to
I.S times the chemically equivalent amount which is suffi-
cient to change the KHSO4 in said mixed salts into potas-
766
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
rium sulfate, and the amount of said water being such that
the aqueous solution of hydrochloric acid produced by
the reaction of said second step has a concentration rang-
ing from 6 to 9%; heating the solution to a reaction tem-
perature of from 60* to 90* C. to form additional K2SO4
and to precipitate potassium sulfate crystals; cooling the
reacted solution to a temperature of from SO* to 20* C. to
precipitate additional potassium sulfate crystals; and filter-
ing said solution to remove crystals of potassium sulfate
which are recovered as the final product and to obtain a
filtrate; and
the third circulating step consisting of evaporating said
filtrate to obtain a mixed cake of K2SO4, KHSO4 and KCl;
and recycUng said mixed cake to the first step to be used
as part of said raw materials.
4,436,711
METHOD OF REMOVING HYDROGEN SULHDE FROM
GASES UTILIZING A POLYVALENT METAL CHELATE
SOLUTION AND REGENERATING THE SOLUTION IN A
FUEL CELL
DoaaM C. Olaoo, Houaton, Tex^ aiiignor to Shell Oil Company,
Houston, Tex.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,467
lot a J COIB 17/04; BOID 53/34
VS. a. 423—573 G 6 Claims
,«
1. A process for the removal of H2S from a sour gaseous
stream comprising
(a) contacting the sour gaseous stream in a contacting zone
with an aqueous reaction solution at a temperature below
the melting point of sulfur, the solution containing an
effective amount of an oxidizing reactant comprising a
oxidizing polyvalent metal chelate of an acid having the
formula
N— R— N
/ \
Y Y
wherein
from two to four of the groups Y are selected from acetic
and propionic acid groups;
from zero to two of the groups Y are selected from 2-
hydroxyethyl, 2-hydroxy propyl, and
— CH2CH2N
/
\
cyclohexane or benzene where the two hydrogen atoms
replaced by nitrogen atoms are in the 1,2 position, and
mixtures thereof; and producing a sweet gas stream and an
aqueous reaction solution containing crystalline sulfur,
hydrogen ions and the reduced polyvalent metal chelate
or chelates of said acid, said contacting zone comprising
an anode section of an electrochemical cell, said electro-
chemical cell also comprising a separate cathode section
containing a cathode connected through an external load
to the anode, the anode section and cathode section being
separated by a hydrogen ion permeable barrier;
(b) oxidizing reduced polyvalent metal chelate or chelates of
said acid in the aqueous reaction solution, while concomi-
tantly supplying oxygen to the cathode section and allow-
ing hydrogen ions to migrate to the cathode section and
producing direct current through the load, and water at
the cathode;
(c) removing sulfur from the aqueous reaction solution, and
water from cathode section.
4,436,712
METHOD OF REMOVING HYDROGEN SULFIDE FROM
GASES UTILIZING A POLYVALENT METAL CHELATE
OF NITRILOTRIACETIC ACID AND
ELECTROLYTICALLY REGENERATING THE
SOLUTION
Donald C. Olson, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell Oil Company,
Hooston, Tex.
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,958
Int a.3 OOIB 17/04; BOID 53/34
VJS. CL 423—573 G 6 Claims
swffr
wherein X is selected from acetic acid and propionic acid
groups; and
R is ethylene, propylene or isopropylene or alternatively
1. A process for the removal of H2S from a sour gaseous
stream comprising
(a) contacting the sour gaseous stream in a contacting zone
with an aqueous reaction solution at a temperature below
the melting point of sulfur, the solution containing an
effective amount of an oxidizing polyvalent metal chelate
of nitrilotriacetic acid, and mixtures thereof, and produc-
ing a sweet gas stream and an aqueous admixture contain-
ing crystalline sulfur, hydrogen ions, and reduced polyva-
lent metal chelate or chelates of nitrilotriacetic acid; said
contacting zone comprising an anode section of an elec-
trochemical cell, said cell also comprising a separate cha-
thode section containing a cathode connected through an
external electrical connection to the anode, the anode
section and the cathode section being separated by a hy-
drogen ion permeable barrier;
(b) oxidizing the reduced polyvalent metal chelate or che-
lates of nitrilotriacetic acid in the aqueous reaction solu-
tion at the anode by supplying direct current to said cell,
concomitantly allowing hydrogen ions to migrate to the
cathode and producing hydrogen at the cathode;
(c) removing sulfur from the aqueous reaction solution, and
hydrogen from the cathode section.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
7«T
4^436,713
METHOD OF REMOVING HYDROGEN SULFIDE FROM
GASES UTILIZING A POLYVALENT METAL CHELATE
OF NITRILOnUACETIC ACID AND REGENERATING
THE SOLUTION IN A FUEL CELL
Donld C. Olson, Houston, Tex., assignor to SheU Ofl Conpuy,
Houston, Tex.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,466
Int CL' COIB 17/04; BOID 53/34
VS. CL 423—573 G 6 Clabus
tmar
~-Am
1. A process for the removal of H2S from a sour gaseous
stream comprising
(a) contacting the sour gaseous stream in a contacting zone
with an aqueous reaction solution at a temperature below
the melting point of sulfur, the solution containing an
effective amount of an oxidizing polyvalent metal chelate
of nitrilotriacetic acid, and mixtures thereof, and produc-
ing a sweet gas stream and an aqueous admixture contain-
ing crystalline sulfur, hydrogen ions and reduced polyva-
lent metal chelate or chelates of nitrilotriacetic acid; said
contacting zone comprising an anode section of an elec-
trochemical cell, said electrochemical cell also comprising
a separate cathode section containing a cathode connected
through an external load to the anode, the anode section
and cathode section being separated by a hydrogen ion
permeable barrier;
(b) oxidizing reduced polyvalent metal chelate or cheUtes of
nitrilotriacetic acid at the anode in the aqueous reaction
solution while concomitantly supplying oxygen to the
cathode section and allowing hydrogen ions to migrate to
the cathode section, and producing direct current through
the load and water at the cathode;
(c) removing sulfur from the aqueous reaction solution, and
water from the cathode section.
lent metal cheUte or chelates of nitrilotriacetic acid; said
contacting zone comprising an anode section of an elec-
trochemical cell, said cell also comprising a separate cath-
ode section containing a cathode connected through an
external electrical connection to the anode, the anode
section and the cathode section being separated by a hy-
drogen permeable barrier;
(b) oxidizing the reduced polyvalent metal chelate or che-
lates of nitrilotriacetic acid in the aqueous reaction solu-
tion at the anode by supplying direct current to said cell
and allowing hydrogen ions to migrate to the cathode,
concomitantly supplying oxygen to the cathode and form-
ing water at the cathode;
(c) removing sulfur from the aqueous reaction solution, and
water from the cathode section.
4,436,714
METHOD OF REMOVING HYDROGEN SULFIDE FROM
GASES UTILIZING A POLYVALENT METAL CHELATE
OF NITRILOTRIACETIC ACID AND
ELECTROLYTICALLY REGENERATING THE
SOLUTION
Dooald C. Olson, Houston, Tex., assigiior to Shell Oil Compaay,
Houston, Tex.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Sw. No. 430,532
bt CL' COIB 17/04; BOID 53/34
VS. CL 423—573 G 6 Claims
1. A process for the removal of H2S from a sour gaseous
stream comprising
(a) contacting the sour gaseous gream in a contacting zone
with an aqueous reaction solution at a temperature below
the melting point of sulfur, the solution containing an
effective amount of an oxidizing polyvalent metal chelate
of nitrilotriacetic acid, and mixtures thereof, and produc-
ing a sweet gas stream and an aqueous admixture contain-
ing crystalline sulfbr, hydrogen ions, and reduced polyva-
4,436,715
STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL OF SINGLET OXYGEN
A. Paul Schaap, Detroit; George E. Busch, Milan, and Robert L.
Nolcn, Jr., Ann Arbor, all of Mich., assigBors to KMS Fusion,
Inc., Ann Arbor, Mich.
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,033
Int a.3 OOIB 13/00
VS. a 423—579 16 o«i—
1. A soUd phase generator for releasing singlet oxygen in gas
phase which comprises an endoperoxide molecular dispersion
on a soUd phase substrate of material selected from the group
consisting of polymers, ceramics, silica glasses and metals, said
endoperoxide having fused rings with a first of said rings being
aromatic and a second of said rings being in aliphatic ring
adjacently fused to said first ring with an oxygen-oxygen
group bridging across non-adjacent carbons of said second
ring, said dispersion on said substrate having a plurality of
passages for diffusion of gas phase singlet oxygen from an
interior portion of said dispersion to the surface thereof.
4,436,716
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF SULPHUR WTTH
INCREASED ENERGY RECOVERY FROM A GAS
CONTAINING H2S, SO2, H2 AND/OR CO
Georges Kfasaikoff, Monein, and Robert Voirin, Moureux, both
of France, aasigaors to Societe Natiouale Elf AQuitaiac (Pro-
dnctioB), Paria, France
Filed No?. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,846
Claims priority, applicatiou Vnaet, Not. 17, 1980, 80 24324
lot a> ODIB 17/04
VS. a 423—574 R 26 ClaiiM
1. In a process for the production of sulfur, with increased
energy recovery, from a gas containing H2S and SO2, and at
least one compound selected from H2 and CO, wherein the gas
passes through a CLAUS catalyst in a primary catalytic stage
operating at a temperature between 200* C. and 460* C. to
form sulphur by reaction of SO2 with HjS, and the reaction
768
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
mixture from the primary stage is cooled by indirect heat
exchange with water to condense sulfur contained in the mix-
ture and produce steam, the improvement which comprises:
passing the gas containing H2 and CO through a CLAUS
reaction catayst in the primary catalytic stage wherein at
least the final one eighth of the catalyst volume comprises
a composite catalyst which comprises a refractory oxide
CLAUS reaction catalyst having fixed thereon from 0.3 to
20 percent by weight, of the composite catalyst of at least
one transition metal compound of metals selected from the
group consisting of Groups I, II, V, VI and VIII of the
PERIODIC CLASSinCATION OF ELEMENTS at a
temperature above 300* C, to achieve H2 and CO oxida-
tion.
4,436,717
'8F.4-FLUOROANTIPYIUNE
Chyng-Yann Shine, Wadiiag River, ami Alfred P. Wolf, Setaoket,
both of N.Y„ aHignors to The United States of America as
represented by the United States Department of Energy,
Washington, D.C.
FUed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,422
lat a.3 A61K 43/00, 49/00
MS. CL 424—1.1 3 Cbdms
1. A method for preparing the novel radioactive compound
•*F-4-nuoroantipyrine which comprises treating antipyrine in
glacial acetic acid with radioactive fluorine in a carrier of
molecular fluorine, at room temperature, and purifying said
compound by means of gel chromatography with ethyl acetate
as eluent.
4,436,718
lODINATING REAGENT
Paiil K. Smith, Roscoe, U., assignor to Pierce Chemical Com-
pany, Roclcford, ni.
FUed Oct 13, 1981, Ser. No. 311,077
Int. a.J A61K 43/00. 49/00
U.S. a. 424—1.1 13 Claims
1. An oxidant useful in achieving transformations in a biolog-
ical specimen comprising a water insoluble bead having cova-
lently attached to its surface molecules containing a chlora-
niine group, with the size and shape of said bead being compat-
ible with easy physical separation of the oxidant from a solu-
tion of said biological specimen.
4,436,719
MICROENCAPSULATED INSECnODAL PERSISTENCY
THROUGH THE USE OF GELATIN
Harold L. Lindaberry, Ambler, Pa., assignor to Penowalt Corpo-
ratioB, Philadelphia, Pa.
Continiiation of Ser. No. 241,091, Mar. 6, 1981, abandoned. This
appUcation Jon. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,650
iBt a.3 A61K 9/50
MS. CL 424—37 1 Claim
1. A method for improving the persistent adherence of mi-
crocapsules of insecticide to foliage of a crop to protect said
foliage from insect attack comprising:
providing an insecticide, said insecticide being microencap-
sulated in microcapsules comprising polyamide-polyurea
subunits;
suspending said microencapsulated insecticide in an aqueous
spray medium;
admixing with said aqueous medium from about 0.05% to
about 1.0% by volume of said medium of type B gelatin,
having an average molecular weight of from about 13,000
to about 30,000 and a viscosity of from 10 to about 30
poises; and
applying said admixture to said foliage by spraying means at
a rate of from about 0.2S to about 2.0 lbs. of microencapsu-
lated insecticide per acre of plants to improve said protec-
tion from insect attack for an improved period of time,
said type B gelatin decreasing the permeactivity of the
encapsulated insecticide through the capsule walls, which
are coated, at least in part, and, in this way, the rate of
release of the insecticide to the environment decreased,
and the persistency of the insecticide concomitantly in-
creased.
4,436,720
GRANULATED TREATMENT-AND-PROPHYLACnC
DENTAL PREPARATION POSSESSING ANTICARIOUS
EFFECT
Gennady N. Pakhomo?, Uninsky prospekt 123/1, k?. 529,
Moscow; Anita Y. Loste, ulitsa Lachplesha 27, kv. 22; Galina
I. Kadnikora, ulitsa Ya. Rndzutaka 60, kr. 10, both of Riga,
and Anatoly G. Kolcsnik, nlitsa Shosseinaya 58 korpus 2, kv.
59, Moscow, aU of U.S.S.R.
Filed Mar. 4, 1983, Ser. No. 472,166
Int. a.3 A61K 7/16, 7/18, 7/26. 9/46
MS. a 424-44 3 Claims
1. A granulated treatment-and-prophylactic dental prepara-
tion comprising an abrasive substance, tartaric acid, sodium
bicarbonate, a foaming agent, a flavouring agent, a binder and
an anticarious substance comprising a product obtained by
treatment of a bone tissue with dilute mineral acid to complete
dissolution of mineral components and water-soluble proteins
contained in the bone tissue, separation of the resulting solu-
tion, dilution thereof with water with the addition of a stabiliz-
ing agent-citric acid or salts thereof, followed by neutralization
of the solution and drying, and containing the following com-
ponents, percent by weight:
calcium — 2-6,
sodium— 19-23,
potassium— 0.04-0. 1 8,
mineral acid anion — 6-10.6,
orthophosphoric acid anion— 1.3-S.O,
water-soluble proteins — 1.0-S.O,
magnesium — O.OS-0.2,
mixture of trace elements including fluorine, tin, manganese,
zinc, iron— 0.01-0.02
complex citrate compounds as calculated for citric acid
anion — the balance,
and having the following proportions of the starting compo-
nents, percent by weight:
tartaric acid— 1 1 - 1 S,
foaming agent — 1.8-2.27,
sodium bicarbonate— 42-46,
binder— 0.11-0.13,
flavouring agent — 0.8-1.2,
anti-caries substance — 1-6,
abrasive substance — the blance.
4,436,721
ORAL COMPOSITION HAVING MOLE RATIO OF
TETRA (METHYLENE PHOSPHONATE) TO ALKAU
METAL FLUORIDE OF AT LEAST 1.4:1
Abdul Gafhr, Somerset, NJ., assigDor to Colgate-PalmoUfe
Company, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jon. 8, 1983, Ser. No. 502,078
Int CL^ A61K 7/16. 7/18. 7/22
MS. a. 424—52 8 Claims
1. An oral composition comprising an oral vehicle, at least
about 0.115% by weight of a diamine tetra (methylene phos-
phonate) having the formula:
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
769
X2O3P-H2C CH2-PO3X2
N-(CH2),N
X2O3P-H2C CH2-POJX2
wherein n is a number from 1 to 10 and X is selected from the
group consisting of hydrogen and an orally accepUble cation,
at least one X group being an orally accepuble cation, and
alkali metal fluoride, in amount which provides about 0.01-1%
by weight of fluoride ion, the mole ratio of the tetra (methy-
lene phosphonate) portion, (CH2-P03-2)4, of said diamine
tetra (methylene phosphonate) to fluoride ion being at least
about 1.4:1.
4,436,722
HAIR RINSE COMPOSITION
KiiUiro Matsunaga, Miyashiro; Takeo Okumura, Sakura; Sachio
Naito, Tokyo, and Rikio Tsushima, Wakayama, aU of Japan,
assignors to Kao Soap Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,490
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Nov. 17, 1980, 55-161599
Int. a.3 A61K 7/08
UA a 424-70 7 Claims
1. A hair rinse composition comprising 0.01 to 10 wt.% at
least one cationic surface active agent and 0.01 to 10 wt.% a
decomposition derivative of a keratin material selected from
the group consisting of (1) alkali salts of decomposition prod-
ucts obtained by oxidation of keratin material, (2) alkali salts of
derivatives at a thiol group of decomposition producU ob-
tained by reduction of keratin material, and a mixture thereof,
these components having been dispersed or dissolved in a
solvent.
4,436,725
PHYSIOLOGICALLY ACnVE NOVEL SUBSTANCE
MUTASTEIN AND PROCESS FOR TTS PRODUCnON
Akira EmIo, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Godo Shiisei Co., Ltd
Tokyo, Japan
FUmI Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 352,069
Claiffls priority, appUcation Japaa, Mar. 6, 1981, 56-31985
lat, a.5 A61K 35/00. 7/16; C12D 1/02
UA a 424-116 gcw„
1. A physiologically active substance idenUfied as Mutastein
having the following physiochemical properties:
(1) a molecular weight of at leut 200,000, and said Mutas-
tein, when being subjected to gel-filtration over Sephadex
O-lOO or SephaUose 6B, is eluted in the void volume;
(2) the ultraviolet spectrum of FIG. 1;
(3) the infrared spectrum of FIG. 2;
(4) said Mutastein having a proteinaceous nature and con-
taining about 10% of a saccharide;
(5) said Mutastein being soluble in water and a saline solu-
tion, but being salted out from a saturated solution con-
taining about 30% of ammonium sulfate; said Mutastein
being insoluble in acetone, ethanol, ethylaceute and ben-
zene;
(6) said Mutastein being dissolvable in a buffer solution
having a pH of at least 7, but precipitating from solution at
a pH of from 3 to 3.5;
(7) said Mutastein being stable when heat-treated at pH 9 at
100' C. for 10 minutes;
(8) an elemental analysis of: C: about 44%, H: about 7% and
N: about 12%,
(9) color reactions yielding an orange color to the Phenol-
sulfuric acid color reaction and blue to the Folin's color
reaction.
4,436,723
ARTHRTnS COMPOSmON OF MATTER, AND
METHODS OF PREPARING AND UTILIZING SAME
Juaaita Nepon, 21640 Twelve MUe Rd., St. Oalr Shores, Mich.
48081
FUed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,457
Int. a.J A61K 35/12, 35/28. 35/407
U.S. a 424-95 3 Claim,
1. A composition for use in treating arthritis comprising:
dried edible natural bone meal;
said bone meal comprising red bone marrow; and natural
desiccated beef liver;
said bone meal and said desiccated liver being mixed with
water;
the relative proportion of edible bone meal to liver being
approximately eight parte bone meal to five parte liver.
4,436,724
METHOD OF PRODUCING y-GLOBUUN FOR
INTRAVENOUS INJECTION AND THERAPEUTIC
AGENT PRODUCED THEREBY
Hamo Ohaishi, Chflia; Hiroshi Kosmume, Kanagawa; Yasuo
Snnki, Saitama, and Ei Mochida, Tokyo, aU of Japan, assign-
ors to Mochida Phamaeeutical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 26, 1982, Ser. No. 382,233
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 29, 1981, 56-82903
Int a.J C07G 7/00
MS. a 424—101 35 claims
1. A method of producing y-globulin for intravenous injec-
tion, which comprises treating y-globulin with an enzyme,
selected from pepsin and uropepsin, in a pH range of 6.0 to 7.5.
35. A therapeutic agent for intravenous injection comprising
y-globulin treated with an enzyme, said enzyme being selected
from pepsin and uropepsin, in a pH range of 6.0 to 7.5.
4,436,726
N-ACYLPEPTIDE COMPOUND, PROCESSES FOR THE
PREPARATION THEREOF AND THE
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSTHONS
Kazuyoshi Umchara, Ashiya; Hirokan Taaaka, Takarazaka;
Itsno Uchida, Kyoto; MManobn Kohsaka, s^w^;, and Hiroshi
Imaaaka, Mishima, aU of Japan, assignors to FiUisawa Phar-
maceutical Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
PUad Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 329,075
Claims priority, appUcatioa United Kingdom. Dec 15, 1980,
lat a.» C07C 103/52: A61K 37/02: C07C 67/02
UA a 424-177 « Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
R3
R2-CH-X-C0(NH-Y-C0),NHCH-R*
OCO-R'
wherein
Ri and R2 are each alkyl or aUcenyl;
R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, hydroxyOower)alkyl, heterocy-
clicOower)alkyl or arGower)aUcyl, wherein the aryl moi-
ety may have hydroxy or protected hydroxy;
R* is carboxy, esterified carboxy, carboxyOower)alkyl or
esterified carboxyOower)aUcyl;
X is bond or lower aUcylene;
Y is lower aUcylene or lower alkylidene; and
n is an integer of 0 or 1; or its pharmacenticaUy acceptable
salt
770
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
M3<,727
REFINED DETOXIFIED ENDOTOXIN PRODUCT
Edpr E. Ribi, HamiltoB, Mont, amigftor to RIbi lammiioCliciii
RtMvch, Ibc^ Hamiltoii, Mont
FUcd May 26, 1982, Ser. No. 382,404
iBt CL3 A61K 57/00: AOIN 65/Oa- C07G 7/00
VJS. CL 424—177 16 Claims
1. A method of producing refined detoxified endotoxin
having no detectable 2-keto-3-deoxyoctanoate, between about
330 and 473 nmoles/mg of phosphorus, and between about
1700 and 2000 nmoles/mg of fatty acids which comprises:
(a) hydrolyzing an endotoxin extract derived from En-
terobacteriaciae with an acid capable of hydrolyzing the
same;
(b) lyophilizing the hydrolyzed product to obtain crude lipid
A;
(c) treating crude lipid A with a first solvent capable of
dissolving fatty acids contained therein to remove said
fatty acids from a resulting insoluble product
(d) dissolving the resulting insoluble product in a second
solvent capable of dissolving the same; and
(e) passing the resulting solution through a chromatographic
column of a type which will allow elution of the desired
product to obtain the refined detoxified endotoxin.
4,436,728
REFINED DETOXIFIED ENDOTOXIN PRODUCT
Edgar E. Ribi, Hamilton; Steren M. Schwartanaa, SteTenirille,
and John L. Cantrell, Hamilton, all of Mont, aaiignon to
Ribi InunnnoChcm Research, Inc, Hamilton, Mont
Filed May 26, 1982, Ser. No. 382,405
Int a.3 A61K 37/00: AOIN 6S/0a- C07G 7/00
VS. a. 424—177 11 Claims
1. A therapeutic composition for imparting immunotherapy
comprising an effective amount of each of
(a) refined detoxified endotoxin having no detectable 2-keto-
3-deoxyoctanoate and having between 330 and 473 nmo-
les/mg of phosphorus and between about 1700 and 2000
nmoles/mg of fatty acids prepared by the method which
comprises:
(i) hydrolyzing an endotoxin extract derived from En-
terobacteriaciae with an acid capable of hydrolyzing
the same;
Oi) lyophilizing the hydrolyzed product to obtain crude
lipid A;
(iii) treating crude lipid A with a first solvent capable of
dissolving fatty acids contained therein to remove said
fatty acids from a resulting insoluble product
(iv) dissolving the resulting insoluble product in a second
solvent capable of dissolving the same; and
(v) passing the resulting solution through a chromato-
graphic column of a type which will allow elution of
the desired product to obtain the refined detoxified
endotoxin;
(b) cell wall skeleton;
(c) trehalose dimycolate; and a pharmaceutically acceptable
carrier.
4^436,729
23-DEMYCINOSYLTYLOSIN COMPOUNDS,
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSTHONS AND METHOD
OF USE
Aahit K. Gaagnly, Upper Montclair; Yi-Tsong Lin, Parsippany,
•ad Alan K. Mallaas, West Orange, aU of N J., assignmv to
Schsring Corporation, Kenilwortfa, N J.
Filed Jnn. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,901
Int OJ A61K 31/71; 0D7H 17/08
VS. CL 424—180 47 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
wherein
Ri is hydrogen or an acyl group selected from alkanoyl (tf 2
to 3 carbon atoms, palmityl, stearyl, lauryl, oleyl, chloro-
acetyl, benzoyl, adamantanecarbonyl, cyclopropanecar-
bonyl, cyclohexanecarbonyl, /8-cyclohexylproptonyl,
phenylacetyl, phenoxyacetyl, mandelyl, 2-thienylacetyl,
alkyl-. aryl- and aralkylsulfonyl, substituted aryl- and
aralkylsulfonyl, wherein the substituents on the aryl por-
tions are halogen, nitro and alkoxy groups, succinyl, mal-
eyl, fumaryl, malonyl and phthalyl;
R2 is acyl, wherein acyl is as defined in Ri;
R3 is hydrogen or acyl, wherein acyl is as defined in Ri; or
R2 and R3 are together a carbonyl group linking the 3"-
and 4" -hydroxy! groups;
R4 is hydrogen or acyl, wherein acyl is as defmed in Ri;
Rs is selected from the group consisting of
N-NH-aralkyl,
/-(CH2),— ^
N— NH— C— NHj. and N— N
s V
J
wherein
n is 0-2, and
Q is selected from the group consisting of
CH2. CHR7. CHRs, CR7R8. NRi. O, S, SO2. CHOH. CHOR7,
<.)■
V
CR70H. crtoRs. o |, cai7— o— c— R7, chcooh,
o'
?
CHCOOR7. CHCONH2 and CHCNR7R1.
wherein R7 and Rg are independently selected from the
group consisting of (Ci-Q) alkyl, (C7-C10) aralkyl and
(Q-Cio) aryl including X-substituted aryl and valkyl,
wherein X is halogen, trifluoromethyl, (Ci-Q) alkoxy, or
(Ci-Cfi) alkylcarbonyl; lU is mediyl, hydroxymethyl,
fluoromethyl, chloromethyl, bromomethyl, iodomethyl,
di (Ci-Cfi) alkylamino, acyloxymethyl, CHO or a group
of the formula CH=Rs wherein Rs is as hereinbefore
defined; and
the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
20. A method of eliciting an antibacterial response in a mam-
mal having a gram positive bacterial infection which comprises
administering to the mammal a therapeutically effective quan-
tity of a compound according to ckim 1.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
771
4,436,730
IONIC OPTHALMIC CELLULOSE POLYMER
SOLUTIONS
Edward J. Ellis, GwNrgetown, and Joseph C. Salamone, Marble-
head, both of Mass., assignors to Polymer Technology Corpo-
ration, Wilmington, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 51,961, Jon. 25, 1979, Pat No.
4,321,261, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 38,703,
May 14, 1979, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No.
867,136, Jan. 5, 1978, Pat No. 4,168,112. This appUcation No?.
9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,111
The portion of the term of this patent snbsoqnent to Mar. 23,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int a.) A61K 31/73
VS. a 424-180 3 dainu
1. A lens solutiohJbr ti^|ing contact lens surfaces to form a
protective coating thereof
said lens solution conuMbig essentially of a cationic cellulose
polymer in solution with said polymer being present in an
amount of from 0.001 to 10% by weight of said solution,
said solution being useful to form protective coatings on lens
surfaces formed of oppositely charged material by produc-
ing a thin coating of a hydrogel when contacted with said
contact lens surface,
said lens solution having a pH in the range of from 6 to 8,
said polymer having the following formula:
CH2OR1
J— O
CH2CHCH2OH
x-0-3, y-0-4 and z-0-3
X--a-, Br-, I-, HSO4-, CH3SO4-, H2PO4-,
NO3-.
4,436,731
SEMI-SYNTHETIC CHITIN DERIVATIVE, THE
PROCESS FOR rrS PREPARATION, AND
THERAPEUTIC COMPOSITIONS WHICH CONTAIN IT
AS ACTIVE PRINCIPLE
Ja?ler E Malta, Buenos Airss, Argentina, assignor to Etablisse-
ment Texeontor, Vaduz, Usehtenstaia
FUed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 363,825
Claims priority, application Italy, Apr. 6, 1981. 20953 A/Sl
Int a.J A61K 31/73; 0D8B 37/08
VS. a. 424—18.0 5 daimg
1. A polysaccharide of formula:
o o
i ^^
R2
CH20H
CH
I
CH— OH
O CH— OH
I
n
o
L
I
CH-N(R)3CI
CH
CH2OH
iff"
Ip CH— OH
CH-N(R)3a
-CH
O (
iLi
CH2OH
(D
lo CH-OH
CH-N(R)3X
l-CH-OH
where Ri, R2 and R3 are selected from the group consisting
essentially of H, derivatives of C1-C20 carboxylic acid,
C1-C20 alkyl groups, Ci to C3 monohydric and dihydric
alkanols. hydroxyethyl groups, hydroxypropyl groups, eth-
ylene oxide groups, propylene oxide groups, phenyl groups,
"Z" groups and combinations thereof, Z being selected from
cationic groups, said cationic groups being selected from
groups as follows:
A. groups containing nitrogen
\ ?"
Z - X-R"-N+-(CH2^reCHireCH2*
R"'
where: <
K; R" and R" can be H, CH3. C2H5, CH2CH2OH, or
CH2CHCH2OH
OH
x-0-5, y»0-4, and z-0-3
X--C1-, Br-, I-, HSO4-, CH3SO4-, H2PO4-.
NO3-
B. Oroups containing phosphorous
R' OH
Z - X-R"-N+-(CH2*reCHireCH2^
R'"
in which R is alkyl of 1-6 carbon atoms, n is a whole number
between 1000 and 2000, X-Cl, CH3OSO3-, SO4--.
5. A therapeutic composition comprising a hypocholes-
terolemically effective amount of a compound as defined in
claim 1 and a pharmaceutically accepuble carrier.
4,436,732
MEDICATED COMPOUND FOR TREATING DISEASES
INFECTED BY VIRUS OF THE HERPES GROUP
Scraflna A. Vichkano?a, ulitM Moskofskaya, 1, kv. 192, IJnb-
artsy, Moakovskaya oblast; IJudndla D. Shipolina, 28, kr.
240, poselok Razrilka, Moskorskaya oblast; Vladimir I. Gly-
lin, oUtsa ShipUoTskaya, 29, korpus 2 kv. 255, Moscow; Alex-
aadr I. BankoTsky, uUtsa Institntakaya, 4, kT. 6, p/o "Vllar",
MoskoTskaya oblast; Mikhail G. Pimano?, Vtoraya K?ssi»-
skaya, 24, korpos 2, k?. 8, Moscow, and KUa L Boryas? ,
ploschad Lenina, 5a, k?. 33, Odndunt aU of U.S.SJL
FUed Oct 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,016
Int a.J A61k 31/70- C13K 11/00
VS. CL 424—180 3 n.1,..
1. A method of treating a herpes viral infection which com-
prises administering to a patient suffering from said infection a
pharmaceutical composition containing as an active ingredient
2-C-/3-D-glucopyranosyl-l,3,6,7-tetraoxyxanthone of the for-
mula:
HO
OH O
OH
OH
where:
R'. R" and R'
can be H, CH3, C2H5, CH2CH2OH, or "» "> Mtiviral effective amount
772
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
M36,733
4"- AND 3-ESTER DERIVATIVES OF DMT AND DMOT
Herbert A. Kint, ImUaaapoUs, Ind., assignor to Eli Lilly and
Company, Indianapolis, Ind.
Filed Mar. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 354,262
Int a.3 A61K 31/71; C07H 17/08
U.S. CL 424—180 53 CUdms
1. A compound of the formula
CH3
R'— CH:
CH3— CH2
.CH3
O OR' I
0R2 L L N— CH3 OH
CH3 °n
CH3
wherein
R is hydrogen, Ci-Cs-alkanoyl, Ci-Cs-alkanoyl having
from one to three halo substituents, benzoyl, phenylacetyl,
or phenoxyacetyl or benzoyl, phenylacetyl or phenoxya-
cetyl having on the phenyl ring from one to five halo or
methyl or from one to two methoxyl, nitro, or hydroxyl
groups;
R' is hydrogen, Cj-Cs-alkanoyl, Ci-Cs-alkanoyl having
from one to three halo substituents, benzoyl, phenylacetyl,
or phenylpropionyl or benzoyl, phenylacetyl, or phenyl-
propionyl having on the phenyl ring from one to five halo
or methyl or from one to two methoxyl, nitro, or hydroxyl
groups;
R2 is hydrogen, Ci-Cj-alkanoyl, Ci-Cfi-alkanoyl having
from one to three halo substituents, benzoyl, phenylacetyl,
phenylpropionyl, phenoxyacetyl, or phenylthioacetyl or
benzoyl, phenylacetyl, phenylpropionyl, phenoxyacetyl
or phenylthioacetyl having on the phenyl ring from one to
five halo or methyl or from one to two methoxy, nitro, or
hydroxyl groups;
R^ is hydrogen or R*0— ; and
R* is hydrogen or an acyl group selected from:
at least 1 atom of the ring system is a heteroatom selected
from O, N, and S;
X is O, S, -NH-, -N(CH3)-, -C-C-, -CH=CH-,
-C(CH3)=CH-, -CH=C(CH3)— or
-C(CH3)=C(CH3)-; and
R6 and R' are Ci-Cj-alkyl or optionally substituted phenyl
or benzyl;
and further provided that one of R or R2 must be other than
hydrogen and that, when Ri is hydrogen, R^ is hydrogen or
—OH and R2 is acetyl, R cannot be hydrogen, acetyl, n-buty-
ryl or isovaleryl and, when R and R' are hydrogen and R' is
hydrogen or OH, R^ cannot be propionyl; and the acid addi-
tion salts thereof
52. A method for controlling susceptible Mycoplasma infec-
tions which comprises administering to an infected or suscepti-
ble warm-blooded animal an effective amount of a compound
of claim 1 or a pharmaceutically-acceptable acid addition salt
thereof and a suitable pharmaceutical vehicle.
4,436,734
CONTROL OF SWINE DYSENTERY
Earl E. Ose, Greenfield, Ind., assignor to Eli Lilly and Company,
Indianapolis, Ind.
FUed Jan. 17, 1983, Ser. No. 458,381
Int a^ A61K 31/71
U.S. a. 424—181 9 Claims
1. A method for the treatment or prevention of swine dysen-
tery which comprises administering to swine suffering from or
exposed to swine dysentery an effective amount of avilamycin.
O O
II II
R5— (CH2)m-Xp-(CH2),-CH-, R6-SO2-, R«0-P—
R'O
00 O
*« " * " < II
R*0-P-; R6-P-; and R'-(CH2)m-Xp-(CH2)„-CH-
i' R7
substituted by one or two halo, ethyl, methoxy, amino,
N-protected amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, nitro,
acetoxy, acetamido, azido, carbomethoxy, carboxamido,
cyano, or hydroxyl groups, provided that, when the sub-
stituent is other than halo or alkyl, there can be no more
than one substituent on any connecting — CH2 — group;
p is 0 or 1; m and n are integers from 0 to 4;
R5 U hydrogen, halo, Ci-C4-alkyl, Ca-Cg-cydoalkyl,
phenyl, Cj-Cg-cycloalkenyl, naphthyl, indenyl, tetralinyl,
decalinyl, adamantyl. 1 -ethyl- 1 ,4-dihydro-4-oxo[ 1 ,31diox-
olo[4,S-g]cinnolin-3-yl(cinnoxacinyl), a monocyclic heter-
ocyclic ring system comprising 3 to 8 atoms or a bicyclic
heterocyclic ring system comprising 6 to 1 1 atoms, pro-
vided that at least 1 atom of the ring system is carbon and
4,436,735
KETALS OF 3'"-DEHYDROCARDENOLIDE
TRIDIGITOXOSIDES
Wolfgang Schanmann, Heidelberg; FHtz Kaiser, Lampertheim;
Wolfgang VoigtUndcr, Weinheim; Edgar Hoyer, Mannheim,
and Peter Nenbert, Weinheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Boehringer Mannheim GmbH, Mannheim, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Not. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 439,653
Claims priority, applieatioo Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nor. 26,
1981, 3146899
Int a.3 A61K 31/3%5: C07J 79/00
U.S. CL 424—182 20 Claims
1. A ketal of 3"'-dehydrocardenolide tridigitoxosides of the
general formula:
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
773
4,436,736
METHODS FOR CONTROLUNG PESTS WITH
SUBSTITUTED PHENYL THIO(THIONO)PHOSPHATES
AND THE THIO(THIONO)PHOSPHATES
Leonard E. Hodakowski, and Charles A. Wilson, II, both of
^ Raleigh, N.C., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation, Dan-
bury, Conn.
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,251
Int a.» AOIN 57/14: CffTF 9/165
VJS. a. 424—211 33 Claims
1. A method of controlling insects and mites which com-
prises subjecting them to an insecticidally or miticidally effec-
tive amount of a compound of the formula:
in which Ri and R2 are identical alkyl radicals containing up to
3 carbon atoms or together represent a cyclic ketal containing
2 to 6 carbon atoms, R3 represents two hydrogen atoms, the
group
OH
/
CH«Y
wherein:
X is oxygen
R' and R^ are individually lower alkyl groups;
Z is hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, halo, nitro, cyano, aryl, aryl-
oxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, a C3 to
Cg cycloalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, alkylsulfinylalkyl, alkylsul-
fonylalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, dialkylaminoalkyi, trihaloal-
kyl, or divalent alkylene group of 3 to S carbon atoms;
n is I, 2 or 3;
Yis
X>
1. NNHCNR^R*
00
2. NNHCCNR'R*
wherein:
R^ and R^ are individually hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower
alkenyl, or aryl;
3. NOR5
wherein:
R' is substituted or unsubstituted lower alkyl, aryl, or arylal-
kyl;
or the radical
4. NNHCR'
I
<
O— Ri
O R2
wherein Ri and R2 have the above-given meaning, and R4 is a
hydrogen atom or a lower acyl or alkyl radical with up to 3
carbon atoms.
20. A method of treating a cardiac insufficiency in a patient
which comprise administering to such patient a cardioactive
effective amount of a compound accortUng to claim 1.
wherein:
R^ is lower alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, substituted alkyl, cy-
cloalkoxy, fiiranyl, or phenylureido;
O
NNHCCH2NR3'
wherein:
R' is lower alkyl;
wherein:
X' is oxygen or sulfur.
12. Compounds of the formula:
1040 O.G.— 29
774
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
z.
O O— R'
\ /
P
X S— R2
of (a) to (b) is from about 2:1 to about 4:1, in combination
with a non-toxic carrier therefor.
CH—Y
wherein:
X is oxygen or sulfur;
R' and R^ are individually lower alkyl groups;
Z is hydrogen, alkyl, alkoxy, halo, nitro, cyano, aryl, aryl-
oxy, alkylthio, amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, a C3 to
Cg cycioalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, alkylsulfmylalkyl, alkylsul-
fonylalkyl, alkylaminoalkyl, or divalent alkylene group of
3 to S carbon atoms;
n is 1, 2 or 3;
Yis
X«
4. NNHCR*
wherein:
R^ and R^ are individually hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower
alkenyl, or aryl;
3. NOR5
wherein:
R' is substituted or unsubstituted lower alkyl, aryl, or arylal-
kyl;
4,436,738
STABILIZED ESTRADIOL CREAM COMPOSITION
Robert J. Beqnette; Liada G. Hobbi, and Joaeph A. Scott, aU of
ETaasTille, buL, assignors to Mead Johason * Compaay,
ETaasfille, lad.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,068
lat CL' A61K 31/56
VS. CL 424—238 4 Claiais
1. A cream composition for topical estrogen therapy which
comprises 17/3-estradiol of a concentration of about 1% or less
on a weight basis relative to the whole composition and the
remainder being a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier
wherein said carrier contains as stabilizers from about 0.01 to
about 10% by weight of at least one member selected from
(a) one or more phenolic-type antioxidants selected from the
group consisting of t-butylhydroquinone, di-t-amylhy-
droquinone, di-t-butylhydroquinone, butylhydroxytol-
uene, butylhydroxyanisole, pyrocatechol, pyrogallol,
propyl gallate, and nordihydroguaiaretic acid;
(b) one or more metal chelating agents selected from the
group consisting of the sodium edetotes (EDTA), and
edatic acid; and
(c) one or more suspending agents selected from the group
consisting of carbomer, carboxymethylcellulose, hydrox-
ypropyl methylcellulose and methylcellulose.
X«
4. NNHCR^
wherein:
R^ is lower alkyl, alkoxy, aryloxy, substituted alkyl, cy-
cloalkoxy, furanyl, or phenylureido;
O
5. NNHCCH2NR3'
wherein:
R' is lower alkyl;
wherein
X' is oxygen or sulfur.
4,434,737
ANTHELMINTIC COMPOSITIONS
Joaeph C Boray, Ncatral Bay, Anttralia, aadgaor to Cfba-Geigy
CorporatkM, Ardiley, N.Y.
Fllad Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 358,986
ClaiaH priority, appUcatioB Switzerland, Mar. 18, 1981,
1841/81
lat CL^ A61K 31/66. 31/415
U.S. CL 424-225 6 daini
1. An anthelmintic composition comprising an anthelminiti-
cally effective amount of a combination of (a) 0-<4-bromo-2-
chlorophenyl) O-ethyl S-propyl phosphorothioate and (b) at
least one member selected from the group consisting of
(i) a compound of the formula:
4,436,739
SUBSTITUTED l-TinA-3-AZA-4-ONES
Eriks V. Knunkalns, ladiaaapolis, lad., aaiigBOf to Eli Lilly and
Company, Indianapolis, lad.
DiTision of Ser. No. 188,189, Sep. 18, 1980, abaadoaed, which is
a coBtianatioB-iB-part of Ser. No. 110,868, Jaa. 9, 1980,
abaadoaed, which is a coatianatioB-ia-part of Ser. No. 951,708,
Oct 16, 1978, abaadoaed. This applicatioa Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No.
327,311
lat as AOIN 43/40. 43/86; C07D 401/04
VJS. CL 424—246 5 rimtmm
1. A method of protecting plants from phytopathogenic
fungi which comprises contacting the fungi with a fungicidal-
ly-effective and non-herbicidal amount of a compound of the
formula
(V)
N-R»«
I— O
wherein
Ri^ is C3-C6 alkyl, Cj-Q cycioalkyl, halobenzyl, halo-
phenyl, trifluoromethylphenyl, tolyl, or methoxyphenyl;
Ris is hydrogen or methyl; and
R'^ is hydrogen or methyl;
or an acid addition salt thereof
NHCOOCH3
wherein R2 is propyl or phenyl; and
Oi) the acid addition salts thereof, wherein the weight ratio
4,436,740
3-CYCLOALKYLAMINO-2-OR-PROPOXYCYANOPYRI-
DINES
Joha J. Baldwia, Gwyaedd Valley, Pa^ aiiiflMr to Merck ft
Co., lacn Rahway, N J.
FQed JbL 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,454
lat a.3 O07D 213/57: A61K 31/44
VS. CL 424—263 8 OaiaH
1. Compounds having the formula:
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
775
(r
in mammals susceptible to treatmenu by beu-adrenergic
agents which comprises the step of administering to the mam-
mal a 4-hydroxy-2,l,3-benzthiadiazole amine compound of the
formula
N
O— CHj— CHOR-CHi-NHRi
and pharmaceutically acceptable salu thereof wherein:
R is Hand
Ri is Cs-Cg cycioalkyl or substituted Cs-Cg cycioalkyl
wherein the substituent is mono- or diloweralkyl.
8. A method of treating hypertension in humans by adminis-
tering to humans in need of such treatment, an effective
amount of a compound of claim 1.
4,436,741
METHOD FOR ADMINISTERING SCOPOLAMINE
TRANSDERMALLY
Joha Urqnhart; Saatosh K. Chaadnaekaraa, both of Palo Alto,
aad Jane E. Shaw, Atbertoa, all of Calif., assignors to ALZA
Corporatioa, Palo Alto, Calif.
Coatianatioa of Ser. No. 253,961, Apr. 13, 1981, abandoned,
which is a coatiBuatioB of Ser. No. 777,130, Mar. 14, 1977, Pat
No. 4,262,003, which is a dirisioB of Ser. No. 721,602, Sep. 7,
1976, Pat No. 4,031^94, which Is a coatiauation-in-part of Ser.
No. 638,947, Dec 8, 1975, abaadoaed, which is a
coatianatioB-ia-part of Ser. No. 547,504, Feb. 6, 1976,
■baBdoBsd. This appUcatioa Mar. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 474,754
The portioB of the tern of this pateat sabeequeat to Apr. 14,
1998, has beea disclaimed,
lat CL^ A61K 31/445
VS. CL 424—267 11 Claims
1. A method for administering scopolamine transdermally
for a prolonged time period comprising administering scopola-
mine base to a predetermined area of unbroken skin in a skin
saturating initial dose of about 10 to about 200 ^g/cm^ of skin
and thereafter at a substantially constant rate in the range of
about 0.3 to about IS ng/ht which rate is sufficient to maintain
the urinary excretion of scopolamine in the range of from 0.03
to about 1.3 fig/hr for said prolonged period of time.
4,436,742
4>HYDROXY-2,l,3-BENZTHIADIAZOLE COMPOUNDS
AND /3-ADRENERGIC METHOD OF USE THEREFOR
Erich Faahuid, Maaaheim-Garteastadt; Wolfgaag Kampe, Hed-
detheim; Knrt Stacfa, Maaaheim-Waldhof, aad Wolf^
Bartscfa, Vieraheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Genaaay, assigaors to
Boehriager Manaheim GmbH, Maaaheim, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
Biaay
CoBtiauatioa of Ser. No. 535,902, Dec. 23, 1974, abaadoaed.
This appUcatioB Not. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,741
ClaiBM priority, applicatioa Fed. Rep. of Gemaay, Feb. 1,
1974, 2404858
lat a.) D61K 31/41; O07D 285/06
VS. CL 424—269 10 Claiais
1. 4-Hydroxy-2,l,3-benzthiadiazole amine compound of the
formula:
OH
I
O— CH2— CH— CH2— NH— R,
(D
^^
wherein
R is branched alkyl of 3 or 4 carbon atoms and the pharma-
cologically compatible salts thereof
7. Method for treating cardiac or circulatory insufltoiencies
OH
I
O-CH2— CH-CH2-NH-R,
(D
Oc;
wherein
R is branched alkyl of 3 or 4 carbon atoms,
or a pharmacologically compatible salt thereof, in a therapeuti-
cally effective amount.
4,436,743
3-[N-(LOWER ALKYL)*N-(TETRAHYDRO^THIE?«YL
5,5*DIOXIDE)]SYDNONIMINES
Karl Schteaflager, Uehlfeld; Radi Beyerle, FraakAut an Maia;
Hehaut Boha; MeUtta Jnst both of Schdoeck; Piero A. Mar-
toraaa. Bad Homborg, aad Rolf-Eberfaard Nitz, Fraakftvt an
Maia, all of Fed. Rep. of Gemaay, assigaors to Caasella
Aktieagesellschaft, Fad. Rep. of Gernaay
Filed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,366
ClaiBM priority, appUcatioa Fed. Rep. of Gemaay, Mar. 2,
1981, 3107933
lat a^ C07D 271/04; A61K 31/41
VS. CL 414—269 24 Clains
1. A pharmacologically-active compound which, in free-
base state, is of the formula
.N
Rj r ^11
\ ry H lis
«N^N N-C-0-R3),_,^N-I^^M)2-
wherein
R2 is — H or -CO— R*;
R^ is methyl, ethyl, propyl or isopropyl;
R^ is aliphatic hydrocarbyl with from 1 to 4 carbon atoms
and optionally substituted by alkoxy with from 1 to 3
carbon atoms, cycloaliphatic hydrocarbyl with from 3 to
7 ring crbon atoms, tricycloaiiphatic hydrocarbyl with
from 7 to 16 ring carbon atoms, alkoxy with from 1 to 6
carbon atoms, phenoxy, napththoxy, alkoxycarbonyl with
from 2 to 7 carbon atoms, phenyl, naphthyl or such phenyl
or naphthyl optionally substitutent with from 1 to 3 sub-
stitutents each of which is a member selected from the
group consisting of halo, alkyl with from 1 to 3 carbon
atoms, alkoxy with from 1 to 3 carbon atoms and nitro,
and at most 2 of which are nitro; and
nisi.
776
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
M36,744
FUNGICIDAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING
N-AMINO-2-OXO-3^XAZOLIDINE DERIVATIVES AND
FOLPET OR CAPTAN
Jott Harr, Oberwil, Switzerland, iMignor to Sandoz Ltd., Basel,
Switzerland
DiTiaion of Ser. No. 178,276, Aug. 15, 1980, Pat No. 4,347,253.
This application Jnn. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,334
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 25, 1980,
8013721; Apr. 25, 1980, 8013720; Apr. 25, 1980, 8013719
Int a.5 AOIN 43/36. 43/76. 47/10. 59/20
U A CL 424-272 u Claims
1. A fungicidal composition comprising a component (a) of
f°™"'* ^ where
Ri
R2
wherein
Rlis
\
1
/
O
II
N— N
R3I \^
R4 Rs
x=H, F. CI. Br, I. SCH3, S(0)CH3, S(02)CH3, OCH3 and
CH3,
y=H, F, CI, Br, I, SCH3, S(0)CH3, S(02)CH3, OCH3 and
CH3, and
z=H, F, CI, Br, I, OCH3 and CH3.
wherein
R7and Rg, independently, are Ci.4alkyl, halogen or Ci^k-
oxy, and
R9 is hydrogen, Ci_4alkyl or halogen,
R2 is CO-Rio,
wherein
Rio is Ci-«alkoxy.Ci-4alkyl, Ci-«alkylthio-Ci^kyl,
2-fiu7l, 2-tetrahydrofuryl, halogenated 2-furyI, haloge-
nated 2-tetrahydrofuryl, 1-imidazolylmethyl, 1-pyr-
razolylmethyl, 2-tetrahydrofuryloxymethyl, 2-tetrahy-
dropyranyloxymethyl, or Ci-^halogenalkyl, and
R3, R4, R5 and R^are independently hydrogen or Ci-4alkyl,
and
a component (b) selected from the group consisting of cap-
tan and folpet; the weight ratio of component (a) to com-
ponent (b) being in the range of 1:1 to 1:10.
4,436,745
METHOD OF INHIBrnNG ALDOSE REDUCTASE
ACTIVITY
Billie M. York, Jr., Fort Worth, Tex., assignor to Alcoo Labora-
tories, Inc., Fort Worth, Tex.
Filed Apr. 15. 1982, Ser. No. 368,630
Int CV A61K 31/415
\5S. a. 424-273 R \% Claims
1. A method for treating diabetic complications in mammals
comprising administering an effective amount of spiro-(fluor-
en-9,4'-imidazolidine)-2',S'-dione or pharmaceutically accept-
able salt thereof having the formula
4,436,746
THROMBOXANE SYNTHETASE INmBITORY
N-SUBSTITUTED.2m.IMIDAZOLYL)INDOLES
Harris B. Renfroe, West Nyack, N.Y., assignor to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation, Ardaley, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,644
Int a.3 A61K 31/415: C07D 403/04
U.S. a. 424—273 R 9 Claims
1. A compoimd of the formula
(D
wherein
Rl represents hydrogen or lower alkyl;
Im represents 1-imidazoly! unsubstituted or substituted by
lower alkyl, carboxy, lower alkoxycarbonyl or carbam-
oyl;
R2 and R3 independently represent hydrogen, lower alkyl,
halogen, trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, lower alkoxy, lower
alkyHthio, sulfmyl or sulfonyl); or
R2 and R3 together when attached to adjacent carbons rep-
resent lower alkylenedioxy;
A represents straight chain or branched alkylene of 1 to 12
carbon atoms, alkenylene of 2 to 12 carbon atoms, alkyny-
lene of 2 to 12 carbon atoms, lower alkylenephenylene
lower alkylene, lower alkylenephenylene, phenylene
lower alkylene, phenylene, a direct bond, lower alkylene-
(thio or oxy>lower alkylene, lower alkylene-(thio or oxy)-
phenylene;
B represents carboxy, lower alkoxycarbonyl, carbamoyl,
mono- or di- lower alkylcarbamoyl, cyano or hydroxy-
methyl; the N-oxide thereof; or a pharmaceutically ac-
cepuble salt thereof.
9. A method of treating diseases responsive to thromboxane
synthetase inhibition in mammals comprising the administra-
tion to a mammal in need thereof of a therapeutically effective
amount of a compound of claim 1 in combination with one or
more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
777
4,436,747
NARGENICIN Ci
Walter D. Celmer, New London; Walter P. Cnllen, East Lyme,
both of Conn.; Riichiro Shibakawa, Handa, and Juasuke Tone,
Chita, both of Japan, assignors to Pfizer Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct 21, 1982, Ser. No. 435,793
Int a.J A61K 31/40; C07D 405/14
U.S. a 424—274 3 Claims
1. Nargenicin Ci, the compound of the formula
CH3O— CH2
H
N
LJrr
4,436,748
BENZO[b]THIOPHENES
Helen H. Ong, Whippany, N J., and James A. Profitt Goshen,
Ind., assignors to Hocchst-Roussel Pharmaceuticals Inc.,
Somerrille, N J.
Continnation-in-part of Ser. No. 198,736, Oct 20, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,470
Int a.3 A61K 31/38; C07D 333/64
U.S. a. 424—275 110 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
O— R3
wherein Ri is lower alkanoyl, formyl or a group of the formula
— C— OH
I
R20
wherein R19 and R20 are each independently hydrogen or
lower alkyl; Ri and R2 are hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower cyclo-
alkyl, or a group of the formula
(Y)p
wherein Y is hydrogen, halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or
hydroxy and p is 1 or 2, with the proviso that Ri and R2 are not
simultaneously hydrogen; R3 is Z wherein Z is a group of the
formula
-C-R«
Rs
wherein R4 and R5 are hydrogen or lower alkyl; R6 is carboxy,
hydroxymethyl, lower alkoxycarbonyl, or hydroxyaminocar-
bonyl; X is halogen; n is 2 and m is 0, 1 or 2; and the O-Rs
substituent is attached to the S-position of the benzo[b]thio-
phene nucleus, or a pharmaceutically acceptable basic addition
salt thereof when R6 is carboxy.
81. A method of reducing blood pressure in mammals com-
prising administering to a mammal requiring blood pressure
reduction a blood pressure reducing effective amount of a
compound of the formula
0-R3
wherein R| is lower alkanoyl, formyl or a group of the formula
R,.
— C— OH
I
R20
wherein R19 and R20 are each independently hydrogen or
lower alkyl; wherein Ri and R2 are hydrogen, lower alkyl,
lower cycloalkyl or a group of the formula
^.
wherein Y is hydrogen, halogen, lower alkyl, alkoxy or hy-
droxy and p is 1 or 2 with the proviso that R| and R2 are not
simultaneously hydrogen; R3 is Z wherein Z is lower alkyl or
a group of the formula
-C-R«
Rs
wherein R4 and Rs are hydrogen or lower alkyl; R^ is carboxy,
hydroxymethyl, lower alkoxycarbonyl, or hydroxyaminocar-
bonyl; X halogen or lower alkyl, n is 1 or 2 and m is 0, 1 or 2,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable basic addition salt thereof
when R6 is carboxy.
778
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
M3C749
COMPOUNDS OF THE BENZOXEPINE SERIES AND
SULPHUR. AND NITROGEN4X>NTAINING
ANALOGUES; THEIR PROCESSES FOR THE
PREPARATION OF THESE PRODUCTS AND THE USE
THEREOF IN THE PHARMACEUTICAL FIELD
PUl^pe Hrtingwti; Jcu-F^aiicoit Patoiteam and Gilbert Mar-
cdoB, aU of Castrca, Fnaee, avigBon to Pierre Fabre S^
Paria, Fhucc
Filed May 10, 1982, Scr. No. 376,645
ClaiM priority, appUcatioB France, May 11, 1961, 81 09327;
May 4, 1982, 82 07693
lat a^ C07D 313/08, 337/08. 223/16: A61K 31/335. 31/55.
31/38
MS. a 424-278 5 n.t«.
1. A compound corresponding to formula I:
(D
Xnux
•I
226 nm
263 inflection
362
(219)
19,100
11.600
B. An infrared absorption spectrum in CCI4 having principal
absorptions at: 3560, 3440, 2975, 2930, 2855, 1730, 1660,
1595, 1195, 1165, 1145, 1090, 1080, and 970 reciprocal
centimeters;
C. A proton nuclear magnetic resonance spectrum having
principal signals at: (s=singlet, t=triplet, q«quartet,
m=multiplet, dd= double doublet, dt= double triplet)
0.83 s; 1.35 d (J=7); 1.43 s (cyclohexane); 1.618 (H2O)
1.72 s; 1.92 m; 2.18 dt (J=5,15); 2.45 dd (J=8,15); 2.78 m
2.83 d (J=4); 3.14 d (J=4); 3.39 s; 3.59 d (J = 5); 3.9 m
4.22 s; 4.54 d (J= 13>, 5.06 s; 5.39 d (J= 17); 5.43 d (J=5)
5.80d (J=3); 5.9 m; 5.93 d (J= 12); 6.52 dd (J= 10,12); 7.26
dd (J= 10,17); 7.27 s (chloroform) parts per million down*
field from tetramethylsilane;
D. Carbon- 13 Nuclear Resonance Spectrum in CDCI3 (FIG.
10); Principal signals at:
wherein
X represents oxygen;
Ri to R4, and R'l to R'3 independently represent the follow-
ing:
a hydrogen atom,
a Ci to C5 alkoxy or a C2 to C3 acyloxy radical,
a hydroxy radical,
a hydroxy Ci to C5 alkoxy, mono- or di- Ci to C5 alkyl
amino Ci to Cs alkoxy radical.
166.67
79.13
61.3
166.3S
78.69
48.97
154.91
78.42 \
48.03
142.3S
77.02 } CDCI3 43.36
140.40
75.62 /
34.46
134.13
73.33
27.61
133.36
74.63
23.45
120.98
74.16
23.30
118.88
68.23
20.33
118.23
63.48
13.80
93.10*
64.02
7.34
Parts per million
downfield from
tetramethylsilane
Mnstniment DOiM
4,436,750
12'-HYDROXYVERRUCARIN J AND ISO^ATRATOXIN
H
Urn A. Smitka; Richard H. Bunge; James C. French, all of Ann
Arbor, and Roaaell J. Bloem, Dearborn, all of Mich^ aaaignors
to Warner-Lambert Company, Morris Plains, N J.
FUed Oct 4, 1982, Scr. No. 432,467
Lrt. CL3 C07D 493/22: A61K 31/365
U A CL 424-279 3 Claims
4,436,751
NTTROBENZYL MONATES ANTIBACTERIAL
COMPOUNDS
Peter J. O'Hanlon, Redhill, and Graham Walker, Guildford,
both of England, aaaignors to Beecham Group Limited, En-
tfand
FUed Dec 11, 1981, Ser. No. 330,012
Oaims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Dec. 31, 1980,
8041559; Aug. 18, 1981, 8125168; Oct 9, 1981, 8130541
Int CL3 A61K 31/35: Om) 309/10
VS. CL 424—283 7 Oainia
1. A compound of formula (II):
m
aty^^o^L-
by:
1. The compound iao-satratoxin H, which is characterized
A. An ultraviolet absorption spectrum in methanol with the
following properties:
Yto
i I
— CH«CH— CH2— CH- or — CH— CH-CH2— CH— ,
O
Ri is hydrogen or Cm alkyl.
and the depicted nitro group is in the meta- or para- position
on the benzene ring.
5. A method for treating mycoplasmal infections in humans
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
779
and animals which comprises administering an effective, non-
toxic.amount of a compound according to claim 1 to a human
or animal having a micoplasmal infection.
4,436,752
TREATMENT OF GASTRIC AND GASTRO-DUODENAL
DISORDERS WITH DERIVATIVES OF PHENYL
ALIPHATIC CARBOXYUC AQDS
Yani Christidis, and Robert Fonmex, both of Paris, FTancc,
aasignort to Rouaael Uclaf, Paris, France
FUed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,209
Claims priority, appUcation France, Apr. 17, 1981, 81 07802
Int a.J A61K 31/19
VJS. a. 424—317 4 Claims
1. A method of treating a patient suflering from hyperchlor-
hydria, gastric or gastro-duodenal ulcers, gastritis, hiatal her-
nia, or gastric or gastro-duodenal ailments accompanied by
gastric hyperacidity, comprising administering to said patient
an anti-ulcer and anti-gastric secretory effective amount of a
compound of the formula (I)
OCH3
a)
CH3O— r^^^p OCH3
l^^ J— C-CH— CH-
^^^ II I I
II I I
O A B
COOR
in which A and B together represent a double bond or else A
represents a hydrogen atom and B represente a hydroxy radi-
cal, and in which R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl
radical containing from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, in their racemic or
optically active forms, and pharmaceutical! y acceptable salts
of said compound wherein R represents a hydrogen atom.
4,436,753
METHOD FOR THERAPY OF ISCHEMIC DISEASE
Isnke Imada, Iznmi; Akinobn Nagaoka, Kawaniahi, and Minoru
Hirata, Dieda, aU of Japan, aaaignors to Takeda Chemical
Indnstriea, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Dec 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,538
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 30, 1979, 54*171125
Int a.3 A61K 31/12
VS. a. 424—331 8 Gains
1. A method of improving ceUular metabolism in the treat-
ment of ischemic diseases comprising cerebral infarction, cere-
bral hemorrhage, cerebral hemorrhagic infarction, cerebral
embolus, cardiac failure, nephrosclerosis, proteinuria due to
vascular lesion and renovascular hypertension, which com-
prises administering to a mammal suifTering from the disease a
compound of the formula:
CH3O,
CH3O
CH3
(CH2),-OH
wherein n is an integer of from 4 to 22, in an amount of about
0.006 mg to 12 mg per kilogram of body weight of the mammal
per day.
4,436,754
DISINFECTING AND STERILIZING COMPOSITION
Paul T. Jacobs, ArUngtoo, Taz^ aaaignor to SorgUcoa, lac,
Arlington, Tex.
Continnatlon-bi-part of S«r. No. 178^18, Aag. 14, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 343,678
Int a^ AOIN 35/00
VS. a. 424 333 10 Claims
1. A phenol-free sporicidal composition hsving low odor
and irritation potential comprising an aqueous solution con-
taining 0. 1 % to 4% by weight of a 2 to 6 carbon atom saturated
dialdehyde and containing as an odor reducing agent 5% to
25% by weight of a diol or monosubstituted diol of the formula
RO(CH2CH20)^— CH2CH2OH, where R is H or CH3— and n
is an integer from 1 to about 22.
4,436,755
SEPARATION OF FRUIT JUICE WITH FIBERS OF AN
OLEFIN POLYMER
Luciano Perdomini; Elia Tonon, both of Verona, and LanfTanco
Paronetto, Negrar, aU of, assignors to Montedison S.pwi. and
Chimid Perdomini S.p.A., both of Milan, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 121,024, Feb. 13, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,174
Oaims priority, appUcation Italy, Feb. 14, 1979, 20188 A/79
Int a.i C12G 1/Oa- A23L 2/02
VS. a. 426—15 8 Claims
1. A method for separating fruit juice from fruit material
containing solids comprising mixing the fruit material contain-
ing solids with fibrous materials which are wettable or have
been treated to render them wetuble and which consist of
fibers of an olefm polymer having a surface area of at least 1
m^/g, a mean length of 0.5-5 mm, and a mean diameter of 1 to
500 microns, and separating juice from the mixture of fibrous
materia] and fruit material containing solids.
4,436,756
METHOD FOR EXTRACTING MYCOTOXINS FROM
VEGETABLE FLOURS
Marco CaneUa, and Giancarlo Sodinl, both of Rome, Italy,
aaaignors to E.N.I. Ente Naaionale Indrocarburi, Room, Italy
Continuation of Scr. No. 68,141, Aug. 20, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 862,774, Dec. 21, 1977,
abandoned, which is a contlnnation of Ser. No. 705,014, Jnl. 14,
1976, abandoned. This appUcation Mar. 16, 1983, Ser. No.
475,915
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Jnl. 15, 1975, 25422 A/75
The portion of the tern of this patent snbaeqncnt to Feb. 7, 1995,
has been disdained.
Int di A23L 1/20
VS. a. 426—430 10 Oaiiss
1. A method for the extraction of mycotoxins from myco-
toxin contaminated vegetable flours comprising the step of
treating said flours or the products obtained with an organic
solvent which contains at least a polar group, admixed with an
aqueous solution of an electrolyte having an acidic nature.
4,436,757
CRYOGENIC PROCESS FOR DECORTICATION AND
HULLING OF SUNFLOWER SEEDS
Donald A. Lange, Brooklyn Park; Marc C Hanaon, St Lonis
Park, and Kennetii J. Krifa, MinneapoUs, aU of Minn^ I
ors to General Mills, Inc, MinnaapoUa, Minn.
FUed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,203
Int CLJ A23L 1/212. 1/36
VS. CL 426-438 15
1. A process for decorticating and huUing sunflower seeds,
comprising the steps of:
A. contacting unshelled sunflower seeds with a cryogenic
liquid gas for a time sufficient to aUow penetration of the
liquid gas into the seeds to form infused seeds, and imme-
diately thereafter.
780
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
B. contacting the cryogenically infused seeds with a liquid
or aqueous heating medium at least about 100* F. warmer
than the boiling temperature of the gas to vaporize the gas
and thermally stress the seed hulls whereby a fraction of
the seeds are decorticated and hulled, thereby forming a
mixture of hulled meats, hull fragments, partially decorti-
cated seeds and nondecorticated seeds, and then
C. separating the hulled meats from the mixture.
4*436,758
DOUGH CONDITIONING COMPOSITION
Jerome B. ThompMn, Box 231 - Rte. 3, Cumberland, Md. 21S02
FUcd Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 175,142
lat a.3 A21D 70/00
U^. CL 426-549 u Claima
1. A stable dough conditioning composition for addition in a
concentrated form to yeast-leavened dough to eliminate the
need for the addition of ammonium salts to said dough, said
composition consisting essentially of the following active in-
gredients:
a soUd organic acid: 60-98%
A bromate salt compatible with said acid: 0.4-4%.
(c) separating from said stearin fraction an olein fraction
which has the solid fat content noted below:
N 10 =24-40,
N2o=3-8 and
N30=0-3;
(d) emulsifying an aqueous phase with a pH in the range of
about 4.0 to about 7.0 and constituting from about 20% to
about 70% of the total spread, in a fatty phase essentially
consisting of said separated olein and constituting about
30% to about 80% of the total spread to obtain a water-in-
oil emulsion; and
(e) simultaneously cooling and working said emulsion under
conditions leading to a spread having a hardness of at least
80 g/cm2 at 20* C, and at most 1300 g/cm^ at 10* C. and
of at most 1800 g/cm^ at 5* C.
4,436,759
PRODUCnON OF SHAPED FOOD PRODUCTS
David M. Trilling, WeUealey, Man., and Yechiel Smadar,
Ramat Hasharon, Israel, assignors to Caribou Flaherica, Inc.,
Boston, Man.
FUed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,301
^, Int a.J A23L J/04
VS. a. 426-57ip^ 26 Claimt
1. A process for the production of shaped food products
from comminuted, granulated or chopped foodstuffs compris-
ing (1) preparing a slurry of one or more foodstuffs with a
binder, a gelling agent and a bivalent ion releasing material;
said slurry being prepared by first mixing together the binder,
the gelling agent and the bivalent ion releasing material to form
a dry blend, the dry blend of these materials is then added and
mixed with the foodstuffs to form the slurry, the resultant
slurry is then allowed to stand for a period of time sufficient to
allow the release of ions from the bivalent ion releasing mate-
rial so as to form a gel; said binder being selected from the
group consisting of a cellulose ether, a gum and mixtures
thereof and being present in an amount of from about 0.10% to
about 6.0% by weight based on the weight of the foodstuff;
said gelling agent being an alkali metal alginate and being
present in an amount of from about 0. 1% to about 1.0% based
on the weight of the foodstuffs; said bivalent ion releasing
material being present in an amount of from about 0.001% to
about 0.004%; (2) preparing a shaped food product by shaping
the slurry by means of a shaping and forming device; and (3)
processing the shaped food product into a final product.
4,436,761
METHOD FOR TREATMENT OF METAL SUBSTRATE
FOR GROWTH OF HYDROGEN-CONTAINING
SEMICONDUCTOR FILM
Yutaka Hayashi; Mitsnyuki Yamanaka, and HidcynkI
Karaaawa, all of Ibaraki, Japan, assignors to Agency of Indus-
trial Science it Technology and Ministry of International
Trade A Industry, both of Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,813
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 30, 1981, 56-119874
Int C1.3 B05D 3/06
VS. a. 427-38 5 cUdms
4,436,760
LOW-CALORIE SPREAD BASED ON A LOW-MELTING
BUTTERFAT FRACTION
Laurentius A. M. Verliagen, and Leendert G. Wamaar, both of
Vlaardingen, Netherlands, assignors to Lever Brothers Com-
pany, New York, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,413
CUdms priority, appUcation Netherlands, Apr. 2, 1961,
8101638
Int CL^ A23D 3/02
VS. a. 426-603 3 Claims
1. A process for producing a low-calorie water-in-oil emul-
sion spread based on butterfat, comprising the steps of:
(a) melting butterfat by heating said butterfat up to a temper-
ature not exceeding 43* C;
(b) cooling the molten butterfat to a temperature ranging
from 20* C. to 30* C. in the absence of a solvent to frac-
tionate said butterfat thereby yielding a higher melting
stearin fraction and a lower melting olein fraction;
1. A method for the treatment of a cleaned metal substrate
for the growth of a hydrogen-containing semiconductor film
on said metal substrate which comprises exposing the surface
of said cleaned metal substrate on which said semiconductor
film is to be deposited to plasma consisting essentially of hy-
drogen in advance of the deposition thereon of said semicon-
ductor film to cause hydrogen to be adsorbed on the surface of
the substrate, thereby improving the electric contact charac-
teristic between the metal substrate and the semiconductor film
deposited thereon.
2. The method according to claim 1, wherein subsequently
to the exposure of the surface of the metal substrate to hydro-
gen plasma, the semiconductor film is deposited in situ on the
treated surface of the metal substrate.
4,436,762
LOW PRESSURE PLASMA DISCHARGE FORMATION
OF REFRACTORY COATINGS
Walter P. Lapatorich, Watertown; Joseph M. Prood, WeUesley
HUls, and LesUe A. Riseberg, Sudbury, aU of Mass., assignors
to GTE Laboratories Incorporated, Waltfaam, Mass.
FUed JuL 26, 1982, Ser. No. 402,176
Int CL^ B05D 3/06
VS. CL 427—39 IQ Ori^t
1. A coating process for coating a surface inside a vessel
comprising
providing a vessel having contents comprising an inert gas,
and reactants, said reactants consisting essentially of Si02
and a halide of a metal selected from the group consisting
of B, Al, Ga, In, Tl, and combinations thereof; and
generating a plasma within said vessel containing said inert
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
781
gas, and said reactants, to form a refractory metal oxide
protective coating on a surface inside the vessel.
4,436,763
METHOD OF PLATING A WIRE WTTH METAL
Paul Metz, Luxembourg, Luxembourg, assignor to Arbed S/A,
Luxembourg
FUed Jan. 19, 1983, Ser. No. 459,197
Claims priority, appUcation Luxembourg, Jan. 26, 1982,
83897
Int a.3 B05D 3/14
VS. a. 427—47
6Clainis
1. A method of plating a strand with a metal, the method
comprising the steps of:
melting the metal and forming a bath of the molten metal;
displacing the strand longitudinally through the molten-
metal bath so the strand leaves the bath at a surface
thereof, whereby the molten metal of the bath sticks to the
strand and forms a molten metallic layer thereon;
forming around the strand generally at the surface a helicoi-
dal magnetic field generally centered on the strand and
positioned to exeri on the metallic layer a magnetic force
generally parallel to the strand and on the bath a rotary
force generally centered on the strand; and
polarizing the field in accordance with desired layer thick-
ness.
4,436,764
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR
SURFACE-HARDENING TREATMENT OF SYNTHETIC
RESIN SHAPED ARTICLES
Atushi Nakarima; Mitisuke Edamatsu, and Kei^i Kushl, aU of
Otake, Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Rayon Company, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,588
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 28, 1981, 56-118756
Int a.3 B05D 3/06
VS. a. 427—54.1 10 Claims
17 rl8
16
12
2Qt
D ll'
fT—^ C
40
e\
21
'&> 32W jiw
k
1. A method for the surface-hardening treatment of a syn-
thetic resin shaped article wherein a synthetic resin shaped
article is dipped in a surface-hardening solution; the synthetic
resin shaped article is gradually pulled up therefrom thereby
being coated with the surface-hardening solution; and the
coated shaped article is irradiated with ultraviolet rays to cure
the coating, CHARACTERIZED IN THAT (a) the synthetic
resin shaped article is dipped in succession in a washing pre-
treatment tank, a drying tank having warm water or an organic
solvent and a hardening solution tank while the synthetic resin
shaped ariicle is conveyed by a first conveyor, and then, the
synthetic resin shaped article is transferred from the first con-
veyor through an intermediate conveyor to a second conveyor
whereby the synthetic resin shaped article is conveyed to an
ultraviolet ray-curing step; (b) the synthetic resin shaped arti-
cle is introduced to and withdrawn from the respective steps in
the state where the synthetic resin shaped article is hung on a
hanger, and one or a plurality of hangers are attached to each
of a plurality of portions of the first conveyor so that the
synthetic resin shaped articles are simultaneously subjected to
the dipping treatment in the respective tanks, whereas the
hangers arc conveyed one by one from the intermediate con-
veyor to the second conveyor where the synthetic resin shaped
articles are separately hung; (c) in each of the washing pre-
treatment tank, the drying tank comprising warm water or an
organic solvent and the hardening solution tank, the liquid is
overflowed therefrom and circulated via a filter to each tank;
and (d) the surface-hardening treatment is carried out under
such conditions that the surface-hardening solution in the
hardening solution tank and the atmosphere above the harden-
ing solution tank are maintained at room temperature and the
dew point of said atmosphere is maintained at a level lower by
at least 3* C. than the temperature of the surface-hardening
solution.
7. An apparatus for the surface-hardening treatment of a
synthetic resin shaped article by dipping a synthetic resin
shaped article in a surface-hardening solution, gradually pull-
ing up the synthetic resin shaped article to coat the surface of
the synthetic resin shaped article with the surface-hardening
solution, and irradiating the coated shaped article with ultravi-
olet rays to cure the coating, said apparatus comprising (a) a
conveyor system including a first conveyor for conveying the
synthetic resin shaped article in succession through a washing
pretreatment tanks, a drying tank and a hardening solution
tank to effect dipping in the respective tanks, a second con-
veyor for conveying the synthetic resin shaped article to an
ultraviolet ray-curing device, and an intermediate conveyor
for transferring secondary hangers each having the synthetic
resin shaped article hung thereon from the first conveyor to
the second conveyor; one or more of said secondary hangers
each having the synthetic resin shaped article hung thereon
being detachably attached to each of a plurality of primary
hangers attached to the first conveyor; and said secondary
hangers being conveyed separately and one by one from the
first conveyor through the intermediate conveyor to the sec-
ond conveyor whereby the secondary hangers are conveyed
one by one to the ultraviolet ray-curing device; (b) pumps for
circulating the liquids through pipe lines from the washing
pretreatment tank, drying tank and hardening solution tank to
the respective tanks, and filters arranged downstream of said
pumps in the respective circulating pipe lines; (c) a device
surrounding the respective conveyors, and the washing pre-
treatment tank, the drying tank, the hardening solution tank
and the ultraviolet ray-curing device to defme a substantially
closed treating chamber; and (d) a device including an air
feeder for feeding air into the treating chamber, a filter for
removing dusts from the air in the treating chamber and a heat
exchanger for adjusting the temperature and humidity of the
air in the treating chamber.
782
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,43«,765
MEraOD FORFORMINC INDIUM OXIDE/N-SIUCON
HETEROJUNCnON SOLAR CELLS
Ton Feng. Morris Plains, and Anal K. Gbosh, New ProridcMc,
both of N J^ assignon to Exxon Research and Eagineerinfl
Co., Rorfaan Park, N J.
DiTlsion of Ser. No. 258,935, Apr. 30, 1981, Pat No. 4,366,335,
which is a continnation-in-part of Ser. No. 222,367, Jan. 5, 1981,
■baadoned. This appUcation Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 422,668
Int. a.J HOIL 31/18
U.S. a. 427-74 17 Qains
p n n n n en ch bp-"
1. A method for forming a high efficiency indium oxide/n-
silicon heterojunction solar cell comprising:
providing an n-type silicon substrate having at least one
major surface area coated with a thin layer of silicon
oxide, Si02, said oxide layer being less than about 30
Angstroms thick;
contacting said substrate with an atomized liquid solution of
anhydrous indium trichloride (InCh), water, and an or-
ganic ester, and/or an alcohol having a boiling point less
than about 250* C. while heating and maintaining said
substrate at a temperature ranging from about 350* C. to
about 450* C. to deposit a layer of semiconductor indium
oxide on said oxidized silicon, said indium oxide forming a
heterojunction to the oxidized silicon substrate; and
ceasing said heating and rapidly cooling said substrate upon
completion of the deposition of said indium oxide to pro-
duce a heterojunction solar cell having an Air Mass One
solar efficiency in excess of about 10%.
4,436,766
PLATED BRIDGE STEP-OVER CONNECnON FOR
MONOLITHIC DEVICES AND METHOD FOR MAKING
THEREOF
Ralph E. Willians, Richardson, Tex., aarignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Na?y.
Washington, D.C.
FUed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263,821
lat a.J HOIL 21/88
MS. a 427-96 3 Qains
1. A method of forming a step-over connection in a mono-
lithic device having a substrate, a plurality of laterally spaced
metalizations supported by said substrate, and a dielectric layer
over at least one of said metalizations, comprising the steps of:
providing a first resist layer having a finite thickness over
said metalizations and said dielectric layer;
forming first and second openings in said first resist layer
layer exposing at least one selected surface area of said
dielectric layer and a selected first area of said metaliza-
tions;
etching said dielectric layer in said selected surface area
thereof to expose a selected second area of said metaliza-
tions;
plating metal onto said first and second areas of said metaliz-
ations to form first and second pillars having a height
about equal to said thickness of said first resist layer;
forming a thin sputtered metal layer over said first resist
layer and said pillars;
providing a second resist layer over said sputtered metal
layer;
forming a connector bridge pattern opening in said second
resist layer, said connector bridge pattern opening expos-
mg said first and second pillars and a connecting area of
said sputtered metal layer therebetween;
plating metal onto said pillars and exposed sputtered metal
layer to form a metal bridge connector spanning the space
between said metalizations; and
removing said first and second resist layers and said sput-
tered metal layer external to said bridge pattern opening.
4,436,767
SLURRY SEAL METHOD USING ACRYLAMIDE AND
RUBBER MODIFIED ASPHALTIC EMULSION
Anthony V. Groasi; Lonis T. Hahn; MSnA Marzocchi, aU of
Newark, and Charles E. Bolen, Heath, aU of Ohio, assignors
to Owens-Coming FIberglas Corporation, Toledo, Ohio
Filed Dec. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453,067
Int CL^ B05D 5/10
MS. a. 427-138 11 Claims
1. In a pavement surface-treating method comprising apply-
ing a slurry seal composition to pavement, said composition
comprising aggregate and a slow setting asphalt emulsion, the
improvement wherein said emulsion further comprises, in
admixture therewith, an effective breaktime decreasing
amount of an emulsion containing the prereacted reaction
product of an acrylamide asphalt having a viscosity of less than
about 120,000 cps (at 140* F.), a vinyl aromatic monomer and
a rubbery polymer.
4,436,768
REFRACTORY STRUCTURE AND PROCESS FOR THE
PREPARAnON THEREOF
John L. F^eeonf , Peekskill; Willian J. Haag, Pooghkeepsie, and
Jerry M. Woodall, Bedftord Hills, aU of N.Y., assignors to
International Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 148,610, May 12, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Aug. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 411,218
Int a.i B05D 3/02. 5/00
MS. a 427-227 21 Claims
BORON K*
INTCNtlTY
(NORMALIZCD)
IM
MO N> H« lU
WAVELCNOTH (AN«trilOMS)
lit
!• A process of forming a refractory compound structure
wherein said compound is a combination of a metallic element
wherein said metaJlic element is solid at normal room tempera-
ture and has a vapor pressure of at least one order of magnitude
lower than that of said nonmetallic element in the temperature
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
783
range at which decomposition of the refractory compound
occurs, and wherein the structure has an adherent dense ele-
mental layer of said refractory compound over the surface of
the structure which comprises:
evacuating a chamber containing a refractory compound
structure to a preuure less than about 10~^ torr; and
heating said refractory compound structure in said cham-
ber at a decomposition temperature of about 1300* C. to
about 1800* C. for a time sufficient to form an elemental
layer of said metallic component of said refractory com-
pound on said structure.
4,436,769
METAL ORGANIC VAPOR DEPOSTOON PROCEDURE
FOR PREPARING GROUP HI— V COMPOUNDS ON A
HEATED SUBSTRATE
Rodney H. Moss, Felixstowe, and Marc M. Faktor, Bushey
Hca^ both of England, assignors to British Teleconnunica-
tions, London, England
FUed Not. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,438
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, No?. 18, 1980,
8036902; Feb. 17. 1981, 8104953
Int CL' C23C 11/00. 13/00
MS. a. 427—252 10 Claims
4,436,770
OXYNITRIDE FILM AND TTS MANUFACTURING
METHOD
Jna-ichi Nishiiawa, and Ikuo Shiota, both of Sendai, Japan,
assignors to Bodda HiOi* Handotai Kenkyn Shinkokai, Sen-
dni, Japan
Dirision of Ser. No. 215,442, Dec. 11, 1980, Pat No. 4,331,737,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 23,766, Mar. 26, 1979,
abnndoned. This appUcation Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,619
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 1, 1978, 53-38580;
JuL 14, 1978, 53-86573
Int CL^ B05D 5/00; C23C 11 /OO, 15/00
MS. a 4r— 255 J 9 Claims
=f¥Tll
«*U T{M? SYSTCM
oxynitride of one substance selected from the group consisting
of gallium, aluminum and their mixture, the oxynitride having
an oxygen-to-nitrogen ratio of at least O.IS, comprising the
steps of:
adding a controlled amount of water to a predetermined
amount of halide of said one substance;
subjecting the water-added halide to ammonia treatment to
form a supply source;
transporting said supply source onto a heated substrate by a
carrier gas and forming said film on said substrate by
reaction of thermal decomposition of said supply source
thereon.
1. In a method of forming a group Ill-group V compound on
a heated substrate by causing vapor streams carrying respec-
tively a group III alkyl derivative and a group V hydride to
mix and impinge on the substrate, whereby the group III alkyl
derivative and the group V hydride react to form the group
Ill-group V compound, the improvement which comprises:
modifying the group III alkyl derivative by the donation
thereto of electron density to form a weaker Lewis acid; mix-
ing the resulting modified group III alkyl derivative with the
group V hydride; and impinging the mixture on the substrate.
4,436,771
METHOD OF LASTING SHOES
Robert C. Simmonds, Jr^ Boxford, and Andrew J. GUbride,
Swampscott both of Mass., assignors to USM Corporation,
Fannington, Conn.
FUed Mar. 2, 1983, Ser. No. 469,503
Int a.} A43D 29/00
MS. a. 427—284 6 Claims
1. Method of lasting shoes, using adhesive, from the toe to at
least over the ball region thereof, wherein the toe and forepart
region of the shoe is inwiped by means of a pair of wiper plates
mounted for inwiping movement about a common pivot lo-
cated at or adjacent the toe end of the shoe, and wherein the
adhesive is applied partly by means of an imprinter plate which
is pressed against the shoe bottom and partly by nozzles mov-
able along opposite sides of the shoe, characterized in that the
region to which adhesive is applied by means of the imprinter
plate extends from the toe end of the shoe and lies within, but
is substantially smaller than, the region inwiped by said pair of
wiper plates.
1. A method of manufacturing a film substantially formed of
4,436,772
ANTICORROSIVE COATING PROCESS
Masaaki Yamabe, Machida; Hiromichi Higaki, Yokohama;
Toshio Shinohara, Yokohama; HiroyuU Tanabc, Yokohama,
and Shunsnks Nakayaau, Yokohama, aU of Japan, assignors
to Dai Nippon Toryo Co., Ltd., Osaka and Asahi Glass Com-
pany, Ltd., Tokyo, both of, Japan
FUed Jan. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 460,380
ClaUns priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 5, 1982, 57-16361
Int a> B05D 3/02
MS. CL 427—379 6 Claims
1. An anticorrosive coating process which comprises:
(i) a step of applying on a substrate a zinc-rich paint or an
epoxy resin primer coating, followed by air-drying,
(U) a step of applying thereon an intermediate synthetic resin
coating, followed by air-drying, and
(iii) a step of applying thereon a top coating comprising (a)
a fluorine-containing copolymer composed of from 40 to
60 molar % of a fluoroolefin, from S to 43 molar % of
cyclohexyl vinyl ether, from 3 to 43 molar % of an alkyl vi-
784
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
nyl ether, from 3 to 15 molar % of a hydroxyalkyl vinyl
ether and from 0 to 30 molar % of other comonomer and
(b) a polyisocyanate, followed by air-drying.
4,436,773
ANTICORROSIVE COATING PROCESS
Maaaaki Yamabe, Machida; Hiromichi Higaki, Yokohama;
Toshio Shinohara, Yokohama; Hiroyuki Tanabe, Yokohama,
and Shiuisuke Nakayama, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors
to Dai Nippon Toryo Co., Ltd., Osaka and Asahi Glass Com-
pany Ltd., Tokyo, both of, Japan
FUed Jan. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 460,383
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 5, 1982, 57-16359:
Feb. 5, 1982, 57-16360
Int. a.3 B05D 3/02
U.S. a. 427-380 12 Qaims
1. An anticorrosive coating process which comprises:
(i) a step of forming a primer coating layer by applying on a
substrate an oil-type anticorrosive coating or an alkyd
resin-type anticorrosive coating as a primer coating, fol-
lowed by air-drying,
(ii) a step of forming a binder coating layer by applying on
the primer coating layer a phenol-modified alkyd resin-
type coating containing a flaky pigment, followed by
air-drying, and
(iii) a step of forming a top coating layer by applying on the
binder layer a top coating comprising (a) a fluorine-con-
taining copolymer composed of from 40 to 60 molar % of
a fluoroolefm, from 5 to 45 molar % of cyclohexylvinyl
ether, from 5 to 45 molar % of an alkylvinyl ether, from 3
to 15 molar % of a hydroxyalkyl vinyl ether and from 0 to
30 molar % of other comonomer and (b) a polyisocyanate,
followed by air-drying.
coating said bonding layer with a wear resistant material
formed from titanium boride.
4,436,776
PROCESS FOR CUSTOMIZING GLASS GREETING
CARDS AND GLASS GREETING CARD PRODUCT
William Wojcik, 3909 Northaven Dr., Charlotte, N.C. 28206
FUed May 4, 1983, Ser. No. 491,356
Int. a.» A47G J/J2; B44C J/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06
U.S. a. 428-14 6 cudms
SITES
4,436,774
RUBBER/POLYMERIC MATERIAL COMPOSI ,
Ian Biggs, Sutton Coldfield, and Ronald S. Goy, Stalferdshire,
both of England, assignors to Dunlop Limited, London, En-
gland
Continuation of Ser. No. 941,249, Sep. 11, 1978, abandoned. TTiis
appUcation Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,709
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, May 12, 1978,
19167/78
Int. a.3 B05D 3/02; B29H 5/02. 5/10
U.S. a. 427-40 48aaims
1. A method of making a composite by bonding a rubber to
a polymeric material comprising the steps of (i) applying to a
vulcanisable rubber composition a treatment agent which will
halogenate and/or oxidise the rubber surface, (ii) vulcanising
the rubber composition by means of a fluidised bed (iii) con-
tacting the vulcanised treated rubber composition with a poly-
meric material and (iv) causing or allowing the polymeric
material to solidify in contact with the rubber composition to
form the composite.
6. A customized glass greeting card comprising:
(a) first and second sheets of glass having a design thereon
formed by areas of transparent and etched, translucent
surfaces;
(b) first and second frames hinged together on one side
thereof for holding said first and second sheets of glass,
respectively, so as to resemble a folded card;
whereby the clear, etched glass transmits light and appears
dark relative to the translucent areas of the glass which reflect
light and appear relatively light and so resemble a printed card
whether the hinged frames are open or closed together and
further whereby only the design on the top sheet of glass is
visible when the hinged frames are closed together.
4 436 777
METHOD FOR MAKING DECORATED BATTERY
CASINGS
Kenneth M. KarpUofT, New RocheUe, N.Y., assignor to DuraceU
Inc., Bethel, Conn.
FUed Dec. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,566
Int. a.3 B32B 1/08; HOIM 2/02
U.S. a. 428—36 13 Claims
4,436,775
HARD METAL BODY AND METHOD OF MAKING
SAME
Donald E. Graham, St. Clair Shores, Mich., assignor to General
Electric Company, Detroit, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 276,918, Jan. 24, 1981, Pat. No. 433,865.
This appUcation May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 381,773
Int a.3 C23C 11/02; B22F 7/02
U.S. a. 427—419.7 4 oaims
1. A method of producing a multi-layered wear resistant
article with improved bonding strength between the layers
comprising the steps of:
providing a substrate formed from a cemented sintered metal
carbide material;
depositing a bonding layer on said substrate, said bonding
layer being formed of boron; and
1. A method for making a battery casing from a decorated
heat shrinkable enclosure member characterized in that said
method comprises the steps of placing said enclosure member
on a support member and shrinking said heat shrinkable enclo-
sure member thereon, decorating said enclosure member whUe
on said support member, removing said decorated heat shrunk
enclosure member from said support member and fixedly en-
closing a battery therewithin.
March 13. 1984
CHEMICAL
785
10. A decorated battery casing made in accordance with the 4,436,779
method of claims 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. 6. 8 or 9. MODULAR SURFACE SUCH AS FOR USE IN SPORTS
K. Anthony Menconi, 6835 County Line La., Burr Ridge, lU.
60521, and Joseph F. Gribauskas, Jr., 21 W. 246 Audubon
Rd., Lombard, lU. 60148
FUed Jul. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 394.528
Int. a.3 B32B 3/00
4,436,778 UA Q. 428-169 13 Claims
MULTILAYER TUBULAR BODY WTTH UNCENTERED
BARRIER LAYER
Jeffrey N. Dugal, Muncie, Ind., assignor to Ball Corporation,
Muncie, Ind.
Continuation of Ser. No. 308,292, Oct. 5, 1981, abandoned. This
application Apr. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 485,760
Int. a.3 B29F 1/10; B32B 9/04
U.S. a. 428—36 13 Oaina
1. A nonflexible thick-walled tubular article with a wall
thickness in excess of 0. 1 inch having a heat-degradable polyvi-
nylidene barrier layer with a marked decrease in relative vol-
ume of entrapped inclusions per given length, said article
capable of being biaxially oriented into a container possessing
low gas permeability comprising at least three cojoined poly-
meric layers with at least one intermediate polymeric layer
being a polyvinylidene chloride barrier layer, said article being
formed by simultaneously coextruding and bonding the poly-
meric layers together as a series of melted streams with the
intermediate polyvinylidene chloride barrier layer being lo-
cated proximate the exterior surface thereof, the outer poly-
meric layer being less thick than the article portion within the
polyvinylidene chloride barrier layer, and quenching said
series of melted streams from the outer exterior surface of said
series proximate said polyvinylidene chloride barrier layer,
said polyvinylidene chloride barrier layer being located within
the outer about one percent to 33 percent of the total thickness
and having a thickness of from about 1 percent to about 20
percent of the total thickness of the cojoined, multilayered
tubular article.
8. A method of substantially reducing gaseous inclusions in
coextruding a solid nonflexible tubular body having at least
three polymeric layers including inner and outer layers of
thermoplastic material selected from a group comprising poly-
olefins, polystyrenes, and polyesters, and an intermediate poly-
vinylidene chloride barrier layer therein, said body having a
wall thickness of about 0.1 inch to about 0.5 inch and being
capable of being axially oriented into a container possessing
low gas permeability, which comprises forming a series of
melted streams of the polymeric materials, enveloping the
series of melted streams to form separate and defined cojoined
tubular layers one upon the other, and introducing the polyvi-
nylidene chloride barrier layer intermediately within said se-
ries and proximate the exterior surface of said tubular layers,
said polyvinylidene chloride barrier layer being within the
outer 1 percent to 33 percent of the total thickness of the
cojoined tubular layers and having a thickness of from about 1
percent to about 20 percent of total thickness of the cojoined
tubular layers, and thereafter quenching said series of cojoined
tubular layers from their outer exterior surface proximate said
barrier layer to form a cojoined multilayered solid thick-
walled body.
..i*^^ ^*
1. A module for a modular surface comprising a tile having
an upper surface and a plurality of support means underlying
the surface for engaging an undersurface, the tile being flexible
to accommodate imperfections in the undersurface while keep-
ing the support means in conUct therewith, continuous float-
ing expansion joints dividing the surface into square pads
supported by said support means and oriented with diagonals
generally parallel to the tile edges whereby the number and
effectiveness of the expansion joints is greatest along the tile
diagonal to maintain said support means in contact with the
undersurface under conditions of changing temperature.
4 436 780
NONWOVEN WIPER LAMINATE
Harry W. Hotchklss; Patrick J. Notiieis, boUi of Cobb County,
and Stephen M. Engleberi, Cherokee County, aU of Ga., as-
signors to Kimberly-Clark Corporation, Neenab, Wis.
FUed Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,214
Int. a.3 B32B 27/14
U.S. a. 428—198 9 Claims
-j»
1. Wiper comprising a laminate including a relatively high
basis weight web having a basis weight in the range of from
about 17 to 170 g/m^ comprising meltblown thermoplastic
microfibers having an average diameter in the range of up to
about 10 microns and treated with a surfactant and, on both
sides of said meltblown web, a relatively low basis weight web
having a basis weight in the range of from about 7 to 34 g/m^
comprising generally continuous thermoplastic fUamenu hav-
ing an average diameter in excess of about 10 microns wherein
the proportion of the microfiber web to the combined outer
webs is at least about 2 to 1 by weight.
786
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
M3<,781
CENTRIFUGALLY CAST POLE COMPRISED OF A
REINFORCED RESIN FOR SUPPORTING A UGHT OR
THE LIKE UPON AN END THEREOF
Bnmo Rother, Nemnarkt, and Hartamt Troamem Poftbaner-
Heng, both of Fed. Rep. of GcrmaBy, aMignon to G Ji. Pfldd-
erer GmbH A Co., KG, Nemnarkt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
DiTigion of Ser. No. 229,410, Jan. 29, 1981, abandoned. This
appUcation JnL 6, 1982, Ser. No. 995,230
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Ana. 29.
1980,3032574
Int a.3 B29C 5/04; B32B 3J/00; E04C 3/30; E04H 12/00
VS. a. 428-365 ^ Claims
the form of slightly flattened beads having a thickness of about
0.3 to 2.0 mm and a circular diameter of 0.8 to 4.0 mm, said
pellets having a bulk density of from about 37 to 50 pounds per
cubic foot.
Hint
1. A reinforced synthetic resin tapered pole comprising an
elongated tapered pole formed by centrifugally casting a syn-
thetic resin reinforcement means embedded within said pole
without protruding to the outer surface of said pole, said rein-
forcement means comprising an outer mat which is penetrable
by said synthetic resin and which has a specific gravity slightly
lower than the specific gravity of said synthetic resin such that
during said centrifugal casting, the synthetic resin passes radi-
ally outwardly through said mat to form an outer radial layer
of synthetic resin as said mat floats on said outer radial layer of
synthetic resin due to the lower specific gravity of said syn-
thetic resin, said reinforcement means further comprising fi-
brous material penetrable by said synthetic resin and disposed
on the radial inner side of said mat, said reinforcement means
maintaining said fibrous material within the walls of said pole
and preventing said fibrous material from penetrating the outer
surface of said pole, a wire cloth embedded within said pole
between said mat and said fibrous material, said wire cloth
extending along a portion of the longitudinal length of said
pole, and an attachment member attached to said pole by
attachment elements, said attachment elements penetrating
said outer layer of synthetic resin to said wire cloth which
provides a solid resistance to further penetration by said at-
tachment elements, whereby a firm attachment of said attach-
ment member to said pole is thereby achieved.
4,436,783
THERMOSENSmVE RECORDING MATERIAL
Fumio Okuraura, Knnitachi; MasaUro HigncU, Tokyo; Shnn
Kamei, Kitamoto, and MasaUro Miyauchi, Tokyo, all of
Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Paper Mills, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
nied Apr. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 366,086
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 11, 1981, 56-54848
Int. a.» B41M 5/18
VS. a. 428-411 14 cudms
1. In a thermosensitive recording material containing essen-
tially a bisphenol compound as color developer and a dye
precursor which, upon being heated, forms color by reacting
with said bisphenol compound, the improvement whereby the
color generating characteristics of the thermosensitive record-
ing material are ameliorated which comprises employing as the
color developer a fused mixture of said bisphenol compound
and one or more monohydroxy phenolic compounds.
4436 784
PROCESS FOR PREPARING PLASTICIZED POLYVINYL
CHLORIDE SUBSTRATES COMPRISING A
MOISTURE^URED POLYURETHANE COATING AND
THE PRODUCTS RESULTING THEREFROM
Wendell A. Ehrhart, Hallam, Pa., aaaigaor to Armstrong World
Industries, Inc., Lancaster, Pa.
FUed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,355
Int CL^ B32B 27/40
VS. a 428—423.1 8 dainis
5. A plasticized polyvinyl chloride substrate comprising a
moisture-cured polyurethane coating, said coated substrate
being obtained by
preparing a prepolymer composition comprising a moisture-
curable polyurethane prepolymer and a plasticizer,
applying said prepolymer composition to a plasticized poly-
vinyl chloride substrate, and
heating and moisture-curing the coated substrate, whereby a
substantial portion of the plasticizer in said coating mi-
grates into said substrate.
4,436,782
OUGOMER PELLETS OF ETHYLENE
TEREPHTHALATE
anagfUi H. Ho, Klnston, N.C., assignor to E. L Dn Pont de
NeoMors and Company, Witaoingtoo, DeL
DiTWon of Ser. No. 209,324, Nor. 24, 1980, Pat No. 4,340,550.
This appUcatkM May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,155
Int CLJ B32B 5/16. 9/00: C08G 63/02
VS. CL 42ft-402 i ciolm
1. Free-flowing pellete of ethylene terephthalate oligomer of
from about 0.08 to 0. 1 5 intrinsic viscosity, said pellets being in
4,436,785
SILVER-FILLED GLASS
Raymond L. Dietz, Poway, MIduwl Featherby, Son Diego, and
Peter K. Margetts, El Caion, all of Calif., aaoignon to John-
son Matthey Inc MalTem, Pa.
DfTiskM of Ser. No. 355,719, Mar. 8, 1982, Pot No. 4,401,767,
which is a continaatkM-in-part of Ser. No. 287^92, Ang. 3, 1981,
abandoned, lids appUcation May 16, 1983, Ser. No. 494,873
Int a^ B32B 17/06; B22F 7/02; CMC 3/10
VS. CL 428—427 6
1. An electronic assembly comprising:
a ceramic substrate;
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
787
a semiconductive device attached to said substrate by a
bond;
said bond being a silver-filled glass consisting essentially of:
23 to 93% of silver powder; and
^
i,:%wA^wi%
zz^in
73 to 3% of a high-lead borosilicate substantially soduim-
free glass having a softening temperature in the range of
323* to 423* C, and a coefficient of thermal expansion no
higher than about 13 ppm/*C.
4,436,786
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM
Tokchlsa Ohkawo, Usnda, and KunUchl Yoda, Saku, both of
Japan, assignors to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 364,056
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 1, 1981, 56-47313
Int a.J GllB 5/70
VS. a. 428—447 10 Claims
1. A magnetic recording medium comprising a base material
and a magnetic coating layer thereon, said magnetic coating
layer containing a binder, a highly viscous silicone oil having a
viscosity of at least 100,000 centistokes and a higher fatty acid
having a melting point of at least 44* C, said silicone oil in an
amount of about 0.2% to about 2.0% by weight of said binder
and said higher fatty acid in an amount of about 0.3% to about
4.0% by weight of said binder.
4,436,787
DURABLE PRIMER COMPOSmON
Rynzo MUcami, and Katsnyoshi Nakasi^i, both of IchUiara,
Japan, assignors to Dow Coming Corporation, Midland,
Mich.
FUed Feb. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 463,379
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 19, 1982, 57-25551
Int a.} B32B 9/04
VS. a. 428—447 11 Claims
1. A primer composition comprising
(A) 100 parts by weight of a silicone-modified epoxy resin
which has both epoxy groups and silicone-bonded alkoxy
radicals, said sUicone-modified epoxy resins being the
condensation reaction product between
(a) an alkoxy sUicon compound being expressed by the
average unit formula
R<iSiO 4_a_»
— J
wherein R represents a monovalent radical selected
from the group consisting of hydrocarbon radicals and
substituted hydrocarbon radicals having at lease one
hydrogen atom substituted by a halogen atom, cyano,
mercapto, hydroxy!, methacryloxy, acryloxy, glyci-
doxy, and 3,4-epoxycyclohexyl, X represents an aUcoxy
radical or an alkoxyalkoxy radical, a has a value from 0
to 2 inclusive, b has a value from 1 to 4 inclusive and the
sum of a -(-b has a value from 1 to 4 inclusive,
(b) an epoxy resin having both epoxy groups and hydroxyl
radicals in the molecules,
where (a) and (b) are present in amounts sufficient to satisfy the
following relationship
2 1
eQuivilent number of i|^y«Y .^JT^'* '" (f)
equivalent number of hydroxyl ndicals in (6)
(B) 10 to 100 parts by weight of an aminoxy organosiUcon
compound having per molecule at least one silicon-
bonded aminoxy radical which is expressed by the for-
mula
R2iNO Si«
wherein R' represent hydrogen atom, a monovalent hy-
drocarbon radical, a halogenated monovalent hydrocar-
bon radical, or two radials represented by R> can be
bonded together, and (C) 0. 1 to 100 parts by weight of an
organotitanate.
5. An article comprising a substrate having a surface coated
with a dried film derived from the primer composition of claim
1.
7. An article in accord with claim 5 further comprising a
cured room temperature vulcanizable silicone rubber bonded
to the dried film where said cured rubber is cured while in
contact with said dried fUm.
4,436,788
COMPOSFTE STRETCH WRAP RLM
Barry A. Cooper, Wayzata, MUm., assignor to Bemis Company,
Inc., MinneapoUs, Minn.
DiTlsion of Ser. No. 119,192, Feb. 2, 1980. This appUcation Dec.
1, 1982, Ser. No. 446,055
Int a.3 B32B 27/06; C08L 23/16
VS. a. 428—483 12 Claims
•!— t— s-
i Ji -i, X.. .;, .jm'
1. A composite film comprising:
a first layer comprising at least about 90% by weight of high
molecular weight copolymer of ethylene and vinyl aceute
containing between about 4 and about 23% by weight of
repeating units derived from vinyl acetate and liaving a
melt index of between about 0. 1 and about 4.0 and a tacki-
fier selected from the group consisting of a low molecular
weight polyisobutene, polyterpenes, amorphous polypro-
pylene and microcrystalline wax; and
a second layer lamellarly adhered to said first layer and
comprising at least about 90% by weight of a linear low
density polyethylene having a specific gravity of between
about 0.917 and about 0.943.
4,436,789
POLYOXAZOLINE-MODIFIED, PAPER COATING
Roy A. Daris, and Norman L. Madison, both of Midland, Mkh^
oasignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
FUed Ang. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 182,250
Int CL' C08L 79/02
VS. CL 428—537 8 Claims
1. An improved fluid, paper coating composition having at
least 40 weight percent solids in an aqueous dispersion which
contains an opacifying amount of pigment, a binding amount of
a binder and an alkaline pH modifying substance in an amount
sufficient to produce a pH of at least about 7, wherein the
improvement comprises at least about 0.003 percent based on
the binder of a 2-oxazoline polymer having a molecular weight
of from about 1,000 to about 130,000 as determined by gel
permeation chromatography prepared from 2-oxazoline mono-
mers of the formula
788
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
p— C— R2
wherein said movable terminal, when in said first position,
contacts neither of said positive electrode and said nega-
tive electrode and, when in said second position, can
contact one of said electrodes; and
R-C
N-C-R3
wherein R is alkyl, aralkyl, phenyl or inertly substituted phenyl
and R1-R4 are each independently hydrogen, alkyl, aralkyl,
phenyl or inertly substituted phenyl.
8. A paper coated by the process of claim 7.
4436 790
GOLD-COLORED COIN MATERIAL
Bruno Prinz, Oberurael; Manfred B. Rockel, Friedrichsdorf;
Giinther Rudolph, Nueberg; Ulrich Heubner, Werdohl, and
Hiigo Zoebe, Altena, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Vereinlgte Dentich MetaUwerke AG, Frankfurt am Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Apr. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 370,692
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 23.
1981,3116125
Int. a.3 C22C 9/01. 9/02
VS. a. 428-675 6 Claims
1. A coin made of a copper base alloy consisting essentially
of 1 to 7 percent tin and 1 to 7 percent aluminum and contain-
ing aluminum and tin in a total not in excess of 10 percent,
balanced copper and inevitable impurities due to the manufac-
ture.
(c) means for moving said movable terminal to said second
position in response to the containment of said battery.
4,436,791
CAST COLD ROLLING ROLL
Jacques Bocquet, Sedan, and Jean C. Werquin, Ronchin, both of
France, assignors to Union Siderurgique du Nord et de I'Est de
la France, Paris, France
FUed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,487
Claims priority, application France, Oct. 31, 1980, 80 23316
Int. a.^ C21D 9/38; B21B 27/02
UA a. 428-682 6 Claims
1. A cast bimetallic composite roll for cold rolling, compris-
ing in combination a heart metal constituted by a nodular or
lamellar cast iron and a case metal constituted by a steel having
a chromium content of 8 to 16% and a carbon content of 0.65
to 0.95%, the ratio between the chromium and carbon being
between 1 1 and 16 and the structure of the case metal being
martensitic with a residual austenite content of less than 10%
and a hardness exceeding 700 HV.
4,436,793
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR HYDROGEN GENERATORS
Otto J. Adlhart, Tenafly, N J., assignor to Engelhard Conon-
Hon, Iselin, N J.
FUed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 426,324
Int. a.3 HOIM 8/06
UA a. 429-17 27 Claims
4,436,792
CONTAINER DEVICE FOR PLANAR BATTERY
Naoki Tomino, Tokyo; Osamu Ikeda, Kawasaki; Yoshio Mat-
suzawa, Tokyo, and Hideya Inoue, Kawasaki, aU of Japan,
assignors to Nippon Kogaku K.K., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Nov. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 440,423
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Not. 12, 1981, 56-
167658[U]; Nov. 27. 1981, 56-1 753 16[U]; Nov. 27, 1981, 56-
175317[U]; Dec. 4, 1981, 56.180654[U]
Int. a.3 HOIM 2/ JO
VS. a. 429-1 14 ciaia,
1. A device capable of containing at least one planar battery
having a positive electrode and a negative electrode and capa-
ble of supplying a power to a circuit when said battery has
been completely contained, said device including:
(a) a plurality of terminals for contacting said positive elec-
trode and said negative electrode, respectively, of said
battery when completely contained;
(b) means for holding each of said plurality of terminals, said
holding means holding at least one of said terminals mov-
ably between a first position and a second position, and
MVIXIOGEN
OENCRATOR
-51
SO
>E
L I
](-"
L,
1. A system for controlling the generation of hydrogen upon
demand comprising:
(a) a hydrogen generator means of the type which relies at
least partially on the process of anodic corrosion to gener-
ate hydrogen having an anode, a cathode and an aqueous
electrolyte therebetween and a circuit means for enabling
electrical circuit to pass between the anode and cathode in
addition to the electrolyte,
(b) a hydrogen consuming device for receiving and utUizing
hydrogen produced by the hydrogen generator means,
and
(c) a controUer means for regulating the passage of current
through the circuit means in response to demand for hy-
drogen by the consuming device
whereby hydrogen is automatically generated and provided to
the consuming device only as required by the consuming de-
vice.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
789
4,436,794
MOLTEN CARBONATE FUEL CELL
Masato Takeuchi, Katsuta; Hideo Okada, Hitachi; Hirosi
Tobita, Kitaibaraki; Sigeni Okabe, Hitachi; Shinpei Matsuda,
Ibaraki; Munehiko Tonami; Kohki Tamura, and Fumito
NakiOima. «U of Hitachi, Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,056
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 31, 1981, 56-46453
Int. a.3 HOIM 4/90. 8/14
VS. a. 429—40 15 Claims
1. In a molten carbonate fuel cell comprising an anode, a
cathode and an alkali metal-carbonate electrolyte placed be-
tween both the electrodes and operated by supplying a fuel
into a fuel chamber placed in the anode side and an oxidant into
an oxidant chamber placed in the cathode side, the improve-
ment wherein at least one of said electrodes contains nickel
oxide and/or cobalt oxide, together with at least one rare earth
element oxide.
4,436,795
ALKALINE ELECTRIC STORAGE CELLS
Michael J. Cooper, Redditch, and James Parker, Alvechurch, aU
of England, assignors to Chloride Group PubUc Limited Com-
pany, London, England
FUed Jul. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 398,433
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jul. 17, 1981,
8122088
Int a.J HOIM 10/52
VS. a. 429—53 14 Claims
unobstructed electrical path between said adjacent elec-
trodes;
(d) second separator means which separate the upper por-
tions of adjacent electrodes, said second separator means
comprising gas permeable absorbent material capable of
conducting electrolyte by capillary action; and
(e) a free electrolyte contained in said container and having
a normal level which is above the bottoms of said second
separator means and below the tops of said negative elec-
trodes,
whereby the lower portions of adjacent positive and nega-
tive electrodes are below the normal electrolyte level and
operate electrochemically in the conventional manner and
the upper portions of adjacent jxssitive and negative elec-
trodes are above the normal electrolyte level but kept
moist with electrolyte by said second separator means and
thus also operate electro-chemically in the conventional
manner.
4,436,796
ALL-SOLID ELECTRODES WTTH MIXED CONDUCTOR
MATRIX
Robert A. Huggins, Stanford, CaUf., and Bernard A. Boukamp,
Achterste Kamp, Netherlands, assignors to The United Sutcs
of America as represented by the United Sutes Department of
Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,563
Int. a.3 HOIM 4/40
VS. a. 429—112 26 Claims
1. An electrochemical cell comprising:
a positive electrode, a negative electrode, and an electrolyte,
said positive or negative electrode having an all-solid, com-
posite microinstructural morphology and including
therein both a reactant phase and a mixed-conducting
matrix phase.
4,436,797
X-RAY MASK
Michael J. Brady, Brewster, Bernard S. Meyerson, Yorktown
Heights, both of N.Y., and John M. Warlaumont, Rldgewood,
N J., assignors to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 394,018
Int. a.J F24F 13/00: B05B 5/00; C23C 15/00; B32B 9/00
VS. a. 430—5 20 Claims
1. An electric storage ceU of alkaline type, said cell compris-
ing:
(a) a container;
(b) a plurality of alternate positive and negative electrodes
disposed in said container, said positive and negative
electrodes being conceptually divisible into upper and
lower portions;
(c) first separator means which separate the lower portions
of adjacent electrodes and wluch leave a substantially
I. An X-ray mask comprising an X-ray absorbing pattern
supported by a foil of hydrogenated amorphous carbon having
an optical bandgap of at least one electron volt.
II. An X-ray mask comprising a substantially X-ray absorb-
ing patterned layer supported by a substantiaUy X-ray trans-
790
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
p«rent foil, uid foU compriting hydrogenated amorphous
carbon and having an optical bandgap of at least one electron
volt, and further comprisug a frame supporting said X-ray
transparent foil, said frame comprising silicon.
^-
)^N-N
*•- r^^N
OH
M36,798
MEraOD OF TREATING A DYE IMAGE
driftopher D. Shennan, Brentwood, and Micliacl W. F^, D-
ford, both of Engtand, aaiignon to CflM^Geisy AG, Basel.
Switzerland
FUed Jnn. 28, 1962, Scr. No. 392,442
Claimi priority, application United Kingdom, Aog. 13, 1981,
Int a.J G03C 3/00, 5/24
VJS. a. 430-17 15 CtalBM
1. A method of treating a dye image in photographic mate-
rial which dye image has been formed by the colour coupUng
reaction of a primary aromatic amine colour developing agent
with a phenolic colour coupler of the formula
(1)
N
)
wherein;
(a) X represents the atoms necessary to complete a 5- or
^membered heterocyclic ring, and
»/ n ic|/ic9cuw uic Biunis necessary to complete a 5-
6-membered heterocyclic ring, and
(b) Y represents the atoms necessary to complete a 5-
6-membered fused ring.
or
where T is —OH. — NH2 or — NHR5 where R5 U alkyl or aryl,
one of Ri and R3 is the coupling position and if it is the cou-
pling position the substituent group is hydrogen or halogen, a
nitrogen-linked heterocycle or — SR* where R« is optionally
substituted alkyl having 1 to 20 carbon atoms or optionally
substituted aryl or an optionally substituted heterocycle, the
other of Ri and R3 and R2 and R4 are each hydrogen or halo-
gen or optionally substituted organic groups, or one of Ri and
R2 together or R2 and R3 together may represent the atoms
necessary to complete an optionally substituted benzannelated
ring, which treatment method comprises treating the dye
image with an aqueous solution which comprises a salt of a
metal selected from the group consisting of manganese, iron,
nickel, cobalt, copper, zinc, cadmium, lead, aluminium, vana-
dium, chromium or titanium transition (b-sub group) metal, or
a metal of the third or fourth main group of the periodic table
of the elements, the concentration of the metal ion in the aque-
ous solution being at least 10-^M.
15. The photographic dye image obtained by the method
according to claim 1.
4,436,800
MULTILAYER ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC ELEMENT
CX)NTAINING A TRISAZO CHARGE CARRIER
GENERATING SUBSTANCE AND A HYDRAZONE
CHARGE CARRIER TRANSFER SUBSTANCE
Maaaftuni Ohta, Snaono, and Klyodd Sakai, Nomazn, both of
Japan, assignors to Ricoh Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 19, 1982, Scr. No. 379,686
Clains priority, application Japu, May 28, 1981, 56-801S2:
May 28, 1981, 56^153; May 28, 1981, S640154; May 28, 1981,
56^155; May 28, 1981, 36^162; May 28, 1981, 56«)163;
May 28, 1981, 56^164; May 28, 1981, 56^165; May 29, 1981,
56^2235; May 29, 1981, S642236; May 29, 1981, 56-82237;
May 29, 1981, 56-82238; Jun. 10, 1981, 5648103; Jan. 10, 1981,
56-88104; Jon. 10, 1981, 56-88105; Jun. 10, 1981, 56-88106; Jon.
10, 1981, 56-88112; Jon. 10, 1981, 56-88113; Jon. 12, 1981,
56-90612; Jon. 12, 1981, 56-90613; Jnn. 12, 1981, 56-90614; Jan.
6, 1982, 57-475; Jan. 18, 1982, 57-5683; Jan. 18, 1982, 57-5684;
Jan. 18, 1982, 57-5688 ^^
Int a.3 G03G 5/06
UA a 430-59 16 Claims
1. An electrophotographic element comprising an electri-
cally conductive substrate, a charge carrier generating layer
and a charge transfer layer superimposed on said substrate,
wherein said charge carrier generating layer contains a trisazo
compound having the general formula (I):
Ar'HNOC
(D
g)-NH (O)
HO CONHAfl
4,436,799
PHOTOGRAPHIC PRODUCTS AND PROCESSES
EMPLOYING NOVEL NONDIFFUSIBLE MAGENTA
DYE-RELEASING COMPOUNDS AND-PRECURSORS
THEREOF
StercB EnuH, Rocheater, and Jamca K. Elwood, Victor, both of
N.Y., aaiisBon to Eastman Kodak Coapuiy, Rochester, N.Y.
Diriaion of Ser. No. 458,499, Jan. 17, 1983, which is a
coatiBaatioii-in-part of Ser. No. 380,843, May 21, 1982,
■bttdoned. lUs appUcatioo Jan. 15, 1983, Scr. No. 504,631
Irt. a.J G03C 1/40: O09B 45/00
VS. a. 430-17 12 oaim
7. A photographic element comprising a support having
thereon a coordination complex of a polyvalent metal ion and
a compound having the formula:
OH
Ar'HNOC
wherein, Ar' represents
CH3
-©. -©-C2H5, -^^OCH^ -^.
C2HS oCiHs
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
791
-continued
CH3 a
-©-CH3. -^ or -(0 ,
CHj CH3 CHj
and said charge transfer layer contains a hydrazone compound
having the general formula 01). (III). (IV) or (V):
ai)
wherein, R> represenU a methyl group, an ethyl group, a
2-hydroxyethyl group or a 2-chloroethyl group, R2 represente
a methyl group, an ethyl group, a benzyl group or a phenyl
group, and R3 represents hydrogen, chlorine, bromine, an alkyl
group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to
4 carbon atoms, a dialkylamino group or a nitro group.
4,436301
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING ELEMENT
HAVING AN ANILINE SULPHONEPHTHELEIN
CHARGE GENERATOR
FhUMO Kninch, Baschette, Italy, aadgnor to lag. C OU?cttl *
C S.pA., Ivrea, Italy
FUed Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 451^87
Clains priority, appUcation Italy, Dec. 21, 1981, 68649 A/81
Int a.3 G03G 5/06, 5/14
UA a. 430-73 11 dalM
1. An electrophotographic recording element comprising an
electrically conducting support, and a film of photoconductor
material containing an electric charge generator compound,
said charge generator compound comprising a sulphoneph-
thalein derivative in which at least one phenyl ring com-
prises a substituted amino group in which at IcMt one
substituent is an aromatic or heterocyclic ring.
4,436,802
REVERSAL ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY DEVELOPING
METHOD
Shuichi Ohtsuka, and Yasno Aotmka, both of f^wlwi, Japan,
assignors to FiUi Photo FUm Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 446,273
Claims priority, appUcation Japwi, Dec 7, 1981, 56-196627
Int CL» G03G 13/09
UA a 430-100 3 caaims
Ar2— CH«N— N— / (^ \
ail)
wherein Ar^ represents a naphthalene ring, a substituted nap-
thalene ring, an anthracene ring, a substituted anthracene ring,
a styryl group, a substituted styryl group, a pyridine ring, a
furan ring or a thiophene ring, and R* represenU an alkyl group
or a benzyl group.
R«
R«
(IV)
.^CH-.-.-^
wherein, R', R', R' and R« each represenU hydrogen, an alkyl
group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group having 1 to
3 carbon atoms, a dialkylamino group or a dibenzylamino
group, and R' represenU an alkyl group or a benzyl group.
(V)
n-n-/qVoch,
CH2 \— /
wherein, R'O, R", R>2, and R'3 each represenU hydrogen, an
alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, an aUcoxy group
having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, a substituted or non-substituted
dialkylamino group, a dibenzylamino group or a halogen atom,
and a binder.
^--t
1. In electrophotography in which an electrophotosensitive
material is electrostatically charged to iu "saturation charging
potential"; is exposed to an image to be reproduced to form an
electrostatic latent image; and fmally is subjected to a magnetic
brush, reversal development with a one-component magnetic
toner at a bias potential of the same polarity as the potential
appearing on the electrosutically charged material, an im-
proved developing method characterized in that it uses a one-
component magnetic toner having a resistivity of 10^ or more
ohm.centimeter within the range of electric charge induction
of inter-toner particles and a coercive force of ISO or more
oersteds.
4,436^03
METHOD OF DEVELOPING ELECTROSTATIC IMAGE
WTTH MAGNEnC BRUSH EAR PROMOTER
Toahimitsu Ikeda, Himtji; Nobnyasu Honda, Tcari, and Tetaaya
Nakano, Osaka, aU of Japan, aaaignors to Mita Indnitrial G>.,
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Mar. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 360,938
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 23, 1981, 56-40424
lot CL^ G03G 9/14, 13/09
VJS. a. 430-122 9 r^m^^
1. A method of developing an electrosutic image by bring-
ing an electrosutic image-carrying surface of a substrate into
sliding contact with a magnetic brush of a developer formed on
a developer-feeding sleeve having a magnet arranged in the
interior Uiereof, wherein the magnetic brush is formed from
(A) an earing-promoting component comprising particles of a
dispersion of a powder of a magnetic material in a resin, which
have a relatively large diameter of 70 to 300 microns, the
magnetic material being present in an amount of 30 to 80% by
792
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
weight based on the total weight of the resin and the magnetic
material and (B) a developer component comprising particles
of a dispersion of a powder of a magnetic material in a binder
medium, which have a rektively small diameter of 5 to 50
microns, the magnetic material being present in the developer
OH
I
CH3— C— CH3,
component in an amount of 40 to 75% by weight based on the
total weight of the resin and the magnetic material, and the
ratio of the earing-promoting component to the developer
component being within the range of 80:20 to 10:90, and
wherein the electrostatic image is developed only by the devel-
oper component.
4436804
UGHT-SENSmVE POLYMERIC DIAZONIUM
CONDENSATES AND REPRODUCnON
COMPOSITIONS AND MATERIALS THEREWTTH
John E. Walls, Annandale, N J., assignor to American Hoechst
Corporation, Somenrille, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 245,837, Mar. 20, 1981,
abandoned. This application Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,335
Int a.3 G03C 1/54: C07C 113/04
UA a. 430-157 27 Claims
1. A light sensitive, substantially linear polymeric diazonium
reaction compound comprising repeating units of the conden-
sation product of each of the general types E+X- and Q, in
which E+X- is a radical of the compound of the general
formula:
-CH2OH, -CH20(CH2)«CH3.
f
— CH2— 0-C-CH3,
— CH2CI and — CH2Br;
n is an integer from 0 to 3;
M is an aromatic radical selected from the group consisting
of aromatic hydrocarbons, diaryl ethers, diaryl sulfides,
diaryl sulfones, diaryl amines, diaryl ketones and diaryl
diketones;
m is 1 to 6; Y Is selected from the group consisting of — CH2—
or —CH2—O—CH2— bridge; and
T is the same as R when Y=— CH2— and H— when
Y=-CH2-0-CH2-;
wherein said diazonium compound is prepared by a two-step
process consisting essentially of forming a precondensed oligo-
mer component Q and reacting said component Q with radical
E+X- such that the ratio of M to E+X- is at least 2:1;
whereby said diazonium compound is capable of being sub-
stantially insolubilized when it is coated on a suitable substrate
and exposed to a suitable light source at an energy level of 4
mJ/cm2.
19. A photosensitive composition comprising a light sensi-
tive component wherein said light sensitive component con-
sists essentially of a light sensitive, substantially linear poly-
meric diazonium reaction compound having repeating unite of
the condensation product of each of the general types E+X-
and Q, in which E+X- is a radical of the compound of the
general formula:
R— K
N2+X-
wherein:
— K — is selected from the group consisting of
R— K
N2+X-
wherein:
— K — is selected from the group consisting of
H
I
-N-,
— S— , — O— , and — CH2— , or is absent;
R' is selected from the group consisting of phenyl and Ci to
C4 alkyi substituted phenyl;
P and Pi are selected from the group consisting of Ci to C4
alkyl, methoxy, ethoxy, butoxy, or H;
Pi may be the same as P or different; and
X- is an anion; and is a radical of an oligomer having the
structure:
H
I
-N-,
— S— , — O— , and — CH2— , or is absent;
R' is selected from the group consisting of phenyl and Ci to
C4 alkyl substituted phenyl;
P and Pi are selected from the group consisting of Ci to C4
alkyl, methoxy, ethoxy, butoxy, or H;
Pi may be the same as P or different; and
X- is an anion; and Q is a radical of an oligomer having the
structure:
T
R-M-(-Y-M)«-R
wherein:
R is selected from the group consisting of
T
R-M-(-Y-M)«-R
wherein:
R is selected from the group consisting of
March 13. 1984
CHEMICAL
793
f
CH3— C— CH3,
-CH2OH, -CH20(CH2)«CH3,
R'-K
N2+X-
o
II r'
-CH2-0-C-CH3.
— CH2CI and — CH2Br;
n is an integer from 0 to 3;
M is an aromatic radical selected from the group consisting
of aromatic hydrocarbons, diaryl ethers, diaryl sulfides,
diaryl sulfones, diaryl amines, diaryl ketones and diaryl
diketones;
m is 1 to 6;
Y is selected from the group consisting of — CH2— or
—CH2—O—CH2— bridge; and
T is the same as R when Y=— CH2— and H— when
Y=-CH2-0-CH2-:
wherein said diazonium compound is prepared by a two-step
process consisting essentially of forming a precondensed oligo-
mer component Q and reacting said component Q with radical
E+X- such that the ratio of M to E+X- is at least 2:1;
whereby said diazonium compound is capable of being sub-
stantially insolubilized when it is coated on a suiuble substrate
and exposed to a suiuble light source at an energy level of 4
mJ/cm^.
24. A process for the preparation of a light sensitive, substan-
tially linear polymeric diazonium reaction compound consist-
ing essentially of forming a condensed oligomer component Q
having the structure
T
R-M-(-Y-M);n-R
wherein:
R is selected from the group consisting of
wherein:
— K— is selected from the group consisting of
-N-.
— S— . — O— , and — CH2— , or is absent;
R' is selected from the group consisting of phenyl and C| to
C4 alkyl substituted phenyl;
P and P| are selected from the group consisting of Ci to C4
alkyl, methoxy, ethoxy, butoxy, or H;
Pi may be the same as P or different; and
X- is an anion;
such that the ratio of M to E+X- is at least 2:1, thereby form-
ing a reaction compound having repeating Q and E+X-
groups which reaction compound is capable of being substan-
tially insolubilized when it is coated on a suiuble substrate and
exposed to a suiuble light source at an energy level of 4
mJ/cm2.
OH
I
CH3-C-CH3.
-CH2OH, -CH20(CH2)„CH3,
O
II
— CH2— O— C— CH3,
— CH2CI and — CH2Br;
n is an integer from 0 to 3;
M is an aromatic radical selected from the group consisting
of aromatic hydrocarbons, diaryl ethers, diaryl sulfides,
diaryl sulfones, diaryl amines, diaryl ketones and diaryl
diketones;
m is 1 to 6;
Y is selected from the group consisting of — CH2— or
—CH2—O—CH2— bridge; and
T is the same as R when Y=— CH2— and H— when
Y" — CH2 — O — CH2 — ; and then reacting said compo-
nent Q with a component E+X- having the structure
4,436,805
SILVER COMPLEX DIFFUSION TRANSFER PROCESS
USING TWO TONING AGENTS
Shigeni Iguchi, and Scigo Ebato, both of Nagaokakyo, Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Paper Mills, Ltd., Tokyo, Japui
Filed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 423,723
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct. 26, 1981, 56-171138
Int. a? G03C 5/54. 1/10. 1/40
U.S. a. 430-248 8 claims
1. A silver complex diffusion transfer process which com-
prises the steps of:
(1) exposing a silver halide emulsion layer,
(2) developing the emulsion layer with an alkaline solution in
the presence of a silver halide developing agent and a
silver halide solvent to form a diffusible silver complex,
and then
(3) transferring the diffusible silver complex onto an image
receiving layer to form a silver image,
wherein said alkaline solution contains an alkali-soluble
iodide and a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic compound
represented by the following general formula (I) or (II):
Q
\
a)
C-SH
N
Rj'^-^N
\
ai)
/
I
Ri
in which R represenu an alkyl group of at least 4 carbon
atoms, an aryl group or a group containing both the
alkyl and aryl groups, Ri and R2 represent a hydrogen
atom or a substituent and at least one of R| and R2
represenu an alkyl group of at leut 4 carbon atoms, an
aryl group or a group containing both the alkyl and aryl
794
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
groups, and Z represente a 5- or 6-membered heterocy-
clic ring
the iodine and the heterocyclic compound present in an
amount such that the molar ratio of the iodide in terms of
iodine to the heterocyclic compound is in the range of
from 1:5 to 5:1.
4,4M,g06
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
FVaads J. Reodnlic, Sodbory; Robert K. TrauTage, Whitins-
▼Ule, both of MaM^ and Paul A. Bodnch, Lakewood, Colo.,
•Mignort to W. R. Grace A Co., Cambridge, Maia.
Continaation-in-iMrt of Ser. No. 225,810, Jan. 16, 1981,
abudoned. Tbia appUcation Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,777
Int a.J G03C 5/00
VS. a 430-311 3j cudma
COAT >
Wl Tm
nOuio roiriKA
CKO tUk(T(iti
»l»CI
» »mOIO TOOl
• kO<C L<aurO
HivfNG encuiT
COlTiNS
dodecyl monosulfate which is present in an amount of
from about 0.05% to about 10%, and
(b) a sodium, lithium, potassium or ammonium metasilicate
salt which is present in an amount of from about 0.001 % to
about 5.0%, and
(c) a lithium, potassium, sodium or ammonium borate salt
which is present in an amount of from about 0. 1 % to about
15%, and
(d) one or more compounds selected from the group consist-
ing of oxalic, malonic, succinic, glutaric and adipic acids
or a lithium, potassium, sodium or ammonium salt thereof
which is present in an amount of from about 0.01% to
about 5%, and
(e) di- and/or tri-sodium or -potassium phosphate which is
present in an amount of from about 0.5% to about 12%,
and
wherein both sodium and potassium compounds must be pres-
ent in said composition and the ratio of sodium to potassium
ranges from about 1:1 to about 1.4:2, and wherein said percent-
ages are by weight of the solid parts of said composition.
»"i.Y comiurio nCMT
TOOl.
TO Tnt »hOTO
«(l<0«f LIQUID >0lrMII^ WHICH H<t
"OT klfN CUKto
KIMOX
fl'OdO H(T«|.
cTCHiNe
KtHOVt CU^IO neUlO rOLTMII^
1. A process for making a resist pattern on circuit boards
comprising:
(a) providing a circuit board substrate;
(b) coating at least a portion of said substrate with a liquid
polymer composition curable to a solid by means of non-
coherent coUimated light radiation;
(c) projecting a pattern of substantially collimated non-
coherent light radiation patterned by patterning means out
of contact with said liquid polymer coating;
(d) exposing said coating of liquid polymer composition to
said projwjted pattern of substantially collimated non-
coherent light radiation and curing the polymer composi-
tion to a solid polymer in said pattern of substantially
collimated non-coherent light and maintaining said liquid
polymer a substantially uncured liquid polymer outside of
said pattern of substantially collimated non-coherent light;
and
(e) removing said substantially uncured liquid polymer leav-
ing said solid polymer in said pattern on said circuit board
substrate.
4,436808
SILVER HALIDE COLOR PHOTOGRAPHIC
UGHT-SENSmVE MATERIAL
Morio Yagihara; Taumoni Hirano, and KelJi Mihayashi, all of
Kanagawa, Japan, aaaignon to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.,
Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Feb. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 469,660
Clalma priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 25, 1982, 57-29683
iBt CL^ G03C 7/J6. 5/24
VS. CL 430-381 19 Qalma
19. A method of forming a color image comprising develop-
ing an imagewise exposed silver halide color photographic
light-sensitive material comprising a support having thereon a
silver halide emulsion layer containing a magenta color image
forming polymer coupler latex which is capable of forming a
dye upon coupling with an oxidation product of an aromatic
primary amine developing agent and which is a homopolymer
or copolymer having a repeating unit derived from a monomer
coupler represented by the following general formula (I):
R4-
T
N.
V
•S-R2i-Y-)reR3-)llrt-X^C«CH2
0)
I
Ar
4,436,807
DEVELOPER COMPOSITION WITH SODIUM,
UnnUM AND/OR POTASSIUM SALTS FOR
DEVELOPING NEGATIVE WORKING IMAGED
PHOTOGRAPHIC MATERIAL
John E. Walla, Wieabaden Biebrich, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
aaritaor to American Hoectast Corporatioa, Somarille, N J.
Filed Jul. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,509
lat CLJ G03C 5/24. 5/34; G03F 7/00
VS. CL 430-331 g Oalma
1. A developing composition capable of removing the unex-
posed non-image areas of an imagewise exposed negative
working photogr^>hic element which comprises an aqueous
solution having a pH of from about 8 to 12 of
(a) a sodium, potassium or lithium salt of octyl, decyl or
wherein Ri represents hydrogen, a lower alkyl group contain-
ing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms or a chlorine atom; R2 and R3,
which may be the same or different, each represente an unsub-
stituted or substituted alkylene group which may be a straight
chain or a branched chain, an unsubstituted or substituted
arylene group or an unsubstituted or substituted aralkylene
group; X represente — CONH— or —COO—; Y represente
— O— , — S— , —SO—, — SO2— , —CONH— or —COO—;
Ar represente an unsubstituted or substituted phenyl group; R4
represente an unsubstituted or substituted anilino group, an
unsubstituted or substituted acyhmiino group or an unsubsti-
tuted or substituted ureido group; 1 represente 0 or 1; m repre-
sente 0 or 1; and n represente 0 or 1; wherein said developing
is conducted using an alkaline aqueous solution containing an
aromatic primary amine developing agent.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
79S
4,436309
METHOD FOR UGHT-SHIELDING A ROLL
PHOTOGRAPHIC FILM
Mntiuo Akao, and Tadaahi Kawata, both of Kanagawa, Japan,
aaaigDOffl to Fi^i Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Diriaion of Ser. No. 141,533, Apr. 18, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation No?. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,894
Int a.J G03C 3/02; B32B 7/02
VS. a. 430-501 16 Clalma
1. In a method for light-shielding a roll photographic film
comprising overlaying a backing paper on the roll photo-
graphic film and winding together said roll photographic film
and backing paper, with the backing paper being located exte-
rior to the roll film, the improvement which comprises the
backing paper comprising a support; a print layer and at least
one aluminum layer provided on the support, said backing
paper being 50/i to 150>t in total thickness.
4,436,810
COLOR-PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING MATERLiL
CONTAINING NON-DIFFUSING ELECTRON DONOR
PRECURSOR COMPOUNDS
Karl Kiiftaer, Unterhaching; Paul Mara, Le?erkuacn, and Wolf-
gang Uaaig, Mnalch, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Agfh-GcTaert Aktiengwellachaft, Lerarkuaen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Apr. 29, 1983, Ser. No. 490,128
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 12,
1982, 3217877
Int a.3 G03C 1/m 1/40. 5/24. 7/26
VS. a. 430—551 3 Claims
CO - CO »,
N-CH-CO- -R
R'
wherein
Z represwite a radical which completes a condensed aro-
matic ring system;
R' represente an n-valent aliphatic or aromatic radical;
R2 represente H, alkyl or aryl,
R3 represente one or more radicals to control the diffusion
properties and the activation pH;
and
n represente 1 or 2.
4,436311
PHOTOGRAPHIC MATERIAL
Mario Fryberg, Praroraaa-le-Mouret and VUctor Wciaa, Fri-
bourg, both of Switaerlaod, aaaignors to Ciba-Gcigy AG.
Basel, SwitzerUud
FUed Jon. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 391,091
Claims priority, appUcation SwitBcrlaod, Jul. 10, 1981.
4545/81
Int a.J G03C 1/08. 1/10
VS. a 430-564 11 OaUM
1. A photographic recording material which contains at leut
one development accelerator in at least one silver halide emul-
sion layer or in a colloid layer adjacent to this layer, wherein
the development accelerator is of the formula
''-^y-'r^y^'
0)
R3
in which Ri, R2 and R3 independently of one another are
hydrogen, alkyl having 1 to 16 carbon atoms each or substi-
tuted or unsubstituted alkoxy having 1 to 18 carbon atoms each
and R2 additionally represente a radical of the formula
1 tlMnl
1. A color-photographic recording material comprising at
least one photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer and a
non-diffusing color-providing compound associated with this
layer, which material contains, in at least one photosensitive
sUver halide emulsion layer or in a non-photosensitive binder
layer, a non-diffusing electron donor precursor compound
(ED precursor compound), from which a non-diffusing ED
compound is formed under alkaline development conditions,
wherein the improvement comprises the ED precursor com-
pound corresponds to the foUowing formula I:
<S°-x<y
R3
in which Ri and R3 have the abovementioned meaning, R4 is
unsubstituted or substituted phenoxy or unsubstituted or sub-
stituted ammo and Rs is a radical of the formula
in whic
O-P
ad R4 have the abovementioned meanings
796
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
and R2' has the same meanings as R] and R3 or R3 represents
hydrogen when R2 is a radical of the formula
<S-
R4
measurement exceeds said predetermined blood sugar
concentration to thereby obtain a more accurate value of
the blood sugar concentration in the blood specimen over
the entire range of blood sugar concentration values than
by using only one correction coefficient over the entire
range of blood sugar concentration values.
4,436,812
PROCESS OF CALIBRATING A BLOOD SUGAR
ANALYZING APPARATUS
Koichi Endoh, Tokyo; NobuUko TtaiU KeUirofa Nakamnra, both
of Yokoraka; TocUyoshi Hamada, and KeiicU bhida, both of
Tokyo, all of Japan, assignora to Fuji Electric Co^ Ltd.,
Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Oct 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,665
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct 29, 1980, 55-150753;
Oct. 29, 1980, 55-150754; Oct 29, 1980, 55-150755; Noy. 21,
1980, 55-163333; Dec. 9, 1980, 55-172664 ^
Int a.J GOIN 33/66, 35/00
VS. a. 435-14 8 dalms
4,436,813
IMMOBILIZED MICROBIAL CELL COMPOSITION FOR
MAKING L-ASPARTIC AOD
Louis L. Wood, Rockrille, and Gary J. Calton, Elkridge, both of
Md., aislgnors to Pnriflcation Engineering, Inc., Columbia,
Md.
Filed Mar. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 358,784
Int CL^ C12P 13/20; C12N 11/12. 11/08, 11/04
U.S. a. 435-109 11 ctaiBtt
4. A composition comprising immobilized K coli cells hav-
ing L-aspartase activity, the cells being immobilized by means
of an insoluble, crosslinked polymer obtained by curing a
curable polyazetidine prepolymer, said prepolymer being
cured at a temperature below the temperature at which the
L-aspartase activity of the microbial cells is significantly re-
duced, the cell/crosslinked polymer composition constituting
a coating on a solid inert carrier.
a 53 73 55
1. A process of calibrating a blood sugar analyzing apparatus
and measuring the blood sugar concentration in a blood speci-
men, wherein, the blood sugar concentration in the blood
specimen is measured with a fixed enzyme membrane sensor
and corrected by calibration means, said blood sugar analyzing
apparatus providing a linear relationship between measured
and actual blood sugar concentrations in a first range of blood
sugar concentrations which are lower than a predetermined
blood sugar concentration, and producing a deviation from
said Unear relationship in a second range of blood sugar con-
centrations higher than said predetermined blood sugar con-
centration, said process comprising the steps of:
measuring at least one standard solution having a known
blood sugar concentration in said first range and storing
the result of said measurement in storage means in said
blood sugar analyzing apparatus,
calculating a first correction coefficient in dependence on
the stored measured value and the known blood sugar
concentration from the reference blood sugar concentra-
tion in said first range, and storing said first correction
coefficient in storage means,
measuring at least one standard solution having a known
concentration in said second range and storing the result
of said measurement in storage means in said blood sugar
analyzing apparatus,
calculating a second correction coefficent in dependence on
the stored measured value and the known blood sugar
concentration in said second range and storing said second
correction coefficient in storage means, and
measuring a blood specimen and calculating the result of the
measurement by using said first correction coefficient
when said result of the measurement is less than said
predetermined blood sugar concentration and by using
said second correction coefficient when the result of the
4,436,814
METHOD FOR THE RECOVERY OF ENZYMES AFTER
THE TREATMENT OF STARCH-CONTAINING RAW
MATERIALS USED FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
FERMENTATION ALCOHOL
Hans MiiUer, Erlenbach; Hans-Peter KnSpfel; Felix Milller,
both of StMAi, all of Switzerhmd, and Rolf H. Kretz, Singen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, aiiignors to PEC Process Engineering
Company, Miinnedorf, Switzerland
FUed Not. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,819
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 2, 1980.
8893/80
Int a.3 CUP 19/20. 19/14. 7/14; C12N 9/28
VS. a. 435—162 4 Claims
1. In the method of treating starch-containing raw materials
for the production of fermentation alcohol, by, in order, the
steps of enzymatically degrading said starch-containing raw
materials, separating solids from said raw materials, thereby,
providing a liquid phase and a first solids phase in the form of
a filter cake, subjecting said liquid phase to a fermentation for
the production of ethanol, suspending said solids phase in
water, separating solids from said solids phase suspended in
water, thereby providing an enzyme-containing wash water
phase and a second solids phase, and collecting said second
solids phase for furiher working-up, the improvement compris-
ing leading said enzyme-containing wash water back into said
step of enzymatically degrading.
4,436,815
METHOD FOR STABILIZING AND SELECTING
RECOMBINANT DNA CONTAINING HOST CELLS
Charles L. Herahberger, New Paleatinc, and Paul R. Rofteck«
Jr., Beech Grove, both of lad., aaiigDon to EU Lilly aod
Company, Indianapolis, Ind.
FUed Not. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,511
Int a.3 C12N 15/00. 1/20. 1/00; CUP 21/00 21/02; C07H
21/04
VS. a. 435—172 27 Claims
1. In the method for stabUizing and selecting host cells con-
taining recombinant DNA in which host cells are transformed
with a recombinant DNA cloning vector which contains both
the ~2.5 kb Bglll cl repressor-containing restriction fragment
of bacteriophage X and a gene which expresses a functional
polypeptide, and in which the transformed host cells are lysog-
enized with a lysogenic organism containing a marker which is
lethal or conditionally lethal in the host cells but which is
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
797
repressed in the transformed host cell by the repressor gene
contained in the recombinant DNA cloning vector, an im-
provement wherein the improvement comprises:
transforming the host cells with a recombinant DNA clon-
ing vector comprising
(a) the Pstl-HincII cl repressor-containing restriction
fragment of bacteriophage \; and
(b) a gene which expresses a functional polypeptide;
subject to the limitation that the host cells are E coli. the
lysogenic organism is bacteriophage X and the recombi-
nant DNA cloning vector contains a replicon and a pro-
moter which are not sensitive to the repressor, and subject
to the further limitotion, that when the transformed host
cells are lysogenized with a lysogenic organism contain-
ing a gene which is conditionally lethal, the resulting host
cells are cultured under restrictive conditions.
4,436,816
CELL GROWTH PROMOTING MATERIAL
Stephen K. Dinka, Washington Crossing, Pa., assignor to Pit-
man-Moore, Inc., Washington Crouing, N.J.
FUed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 342,026
Int a.3 C12N 5/00. 1/38; A61K 35/14
VS. a. 435—240 7 Claims
1. A process for preparing growth promoting material,
whose effectiveness can be demonstrated by in vitro cell cul-
ture experiments, which comprises:
(a) slowly contacting serum or plasma with sufficient chilled
perchloric acid to reach a 0. 1 to 0.25 final molar concen-
tration of said perchloric acid in said serum or plasma,
(b) at a temperature of - 1* C. to 15' C,
(c) under intensive mixing which is continued until a homo-
geneous suspension is obtained,
(d) separating the resulUnt precipiute. which contains the
growth-promoting substances, from the supernatant,
(e) eluting said growth-promoting substances from said
precipiute by first resuspending said precipitate in an
aqueous alkaline or salt solution, and thereaAer,
(0 adjusting the pH to solubilize the growth-promoting
substances from the insoluble proteins,
(g) separating the supernatant, which contains the growth-
promoting substances, from the insoluble, undesired pre-
cipitate,
(h) exchanging the solvent in the supernatant for a physio-
logical solution, and
(i) sterilizing the resultant growth-promoting material.
4,436,817
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AEROBIC
DECOMPOSITION OR DRYING OF ORGANIC WASTE
MATERIAL
Herbert Nemetz, Bleichstrasse 10, 6369 Schoeneck Hess 1, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
DiTision of Ser. No. 181,953, Aug. 27, 1980, Pat No. 4,384,877.
This appUcation Sep. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 419,010
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 15,
1979, 2937390; Not. 30, 1979, 2948176
Int a.3 C12M 1/04
VS. a. 435—313 22 Claims
elongated composting passageway chamber comprising in
sequence an intake zone, shaping zone, reaction zone, and
discharge or transfer zone; said intake zone comprising an
opening at the top of the chamber; means for intermittently
feeding substantially equal poriions or charges of material into
the intake zone through said opening; said shaping zone adjoin-
ing the intake zone and comprising an ante-chamber closed on
the sides for shaping a portion of material received from the
intake zone; clearing element means mounted at the intake
zone end of the chamber, said clearing element constructed
and arranged for reciprocating extension and retraction for
pushing and sliding a portion or charge of material received at
the intake zone into the shaping zone and for stepwise pushing
and compacting successive portions against each other and
through the reaction zone; means for extending and retracting
said clearing element over a stroke the dimension of said intake
zone; said reaction zone comprising an elongate passageway
adjoining the shaping zone; means for aerating the material in
separate sections spaced along the reaction zone; said dis-
charge or transfer zone adjoining the reaction zone and com-
prising opening means at the bottom of the chamber for inter-
mittently discharging or transferring portions from the cham-
ber as the portions pass through the reaction zone.
4,436,818
APPARATUS FOR CARRYING OUT AN ANAEROBIC
FERMENTATION OF ORGANIC SOLID MATTER FOR
THE PURPOSE OF EXTRACTING A COMBUSTIBLE GAS
Peter Widmer, Ruchwcid 202, 8911 Oberiunkhofen, Switzerland
PCT No. PCn'/CH81/00077, § 371 Date Mar. 10, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 10, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00299, PCI Pub.
Date Feb. 4, 1982
PCT FUed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 359,671
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul 11. 1980.
5316/80
Int a.3 CUM 1/02
VS. a, 435-316 5 Claims
I f
W''("i'''{"'{"X"'('"!''i"'f'f(''X''(,'X'"'^'
x^
lll)s
^\^ -I
^^5
i\
^10 I ^sT
1. A composting bin apparatus for aerobic decomposition
and drying of organic waste materials comprising: at least one
1. Apparatus for anaerobic fermentation of organic slurry
for the purpose of obtaining a combustible gas therefrom,
characterizoJ by:
A. means defining a fermentation chamber having a top edge
extending therearound that lies in a substantially horizon-
tal plane and having a bottom surface which converges
downwardly from said top edge to a central portion of
said bottom surface;
B. rigid supporting structure projecting above said plane;
C. A cover of supple gas tight material extending acrou the
fermentation chamber beneath said supporting structure
to defme a foldingly contracuble and inflaubly expand-
able gas chamber that is above said pUne and in open
communication with said fermentation chamber, said
cover
(1) having an edge portion that is sealed to said top edge
of the fermentation chamber all around the same and
(2) having a central portion which is fuedly supportingly
798
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
connected to said supporting structure at a level sub-
stantially above said plane;
D. weighting means attached to said cover at locations
spaced from said central portion thereof and from said
edge portion thereof, for gravity loading the cover so that
it tends to contract and maintain gas in said gas chamber
underpressure;
E. an upright stack duct supported near an upper end thereof
by said supporting structure and extending downwardly
through said central portion of the cover, in sealed rela-
tion thereto, to near said central portion of the bottom
surface, said stack duct
(1) having apertures therein at substantially the level of
said plane and
(2) comprising means for charging slurry into said fermen-
tation chamber and for withdrawing gas from said gas
chamber;
F. a screw pump in said stack duct, below said apertures
therein, for pumping slurry between said apertures and the
bottom end of the stack duct and thereby agitating slurry
in the fermentation chamber; and
G. means cooperating with the portion of said stack duct
that is below said plane to provide a fluid chamber
through which heated fluid is circulated for heating the
contents of said fermentation chamber.
M3M20
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GLYGOSYLATED
HEMOGLOBIN SEPARATING AND MEASURING
FRACTIONS
Pwil C Rdter, 20 CeUa St, Port JeffierMw Station. N.Y. 11776
Flkd Feb. 1. 1M2. Ser. No. 344.404
Int CL3 GOIN W72
UAa434-67 37CtaiBs
MCTCR
4.436.819
ETHYLENE OXIDE PROCESS DOSIMETER
Charles R. Manalng. Loa Ahoa. Calif., anignor to Aiiay Tec
Aaaodates, Inc., Loa Ahoa, Calif.
Filed Mar. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 354,496
Int a^ GOIN 2im
MS. CL 436-1 13 q^^
APV «•««*'▼,
'•*" to c*K*««w^«a
\ -
16. A method for separating glycosylated hemoglobin from
a sample of whole blood fluid comprising:
a. providing a quantity of a cation exchange resin to a con-
tainer;
b. providing a quantity of a blood cell lysing composition to
said container;
c. providing a quantity of blood sample to said container;
d. agitating said container for a period of time;
e. providing said container with a quantity of a viscous
polymeric material during agitation; and
f. providing a settling period for said container; whereby
during agitation the blood cells of said sample are lysed by
the blood cell lysing composition, glycosylated hemoglo-
bin is released from said lysed blood cells and goes into
suspension in the blood sample fluid, the remaining hemo-
globin from said lysed blood cells binds with the cation
exchange resin suspended in the blood sample fluid and
settles to the bottom of said container with the other blood
cell fragments during the settUng period, and the glycosy-
lated hemoglobin remains separately in suspension in the
blood sample fluid, said viscous polymeric material pro-
viding a permanent barrier between settled solids and the
glycosylated hemoglobin in the blood sample fluid.
4,436,821
SIMULATED HUMAN PLATELETS FROM RED BLOOD
CELLS
Wayne L. Ryan, Omaha, Nebr., aaaignor to Streck Laboratories,
IbCh Omaha, Nebr.
FUed Apr. 12. 1982. Ser. No. 367.597
Int CL' GOIN 33/4^ C09K 3/00
UA CL 436-10 16 Clafans
1. A lysable, blood platelet reference control comprising a
suspension of a mixture of permanently shrunken animal red
blood cells in a suspension medium non-deleterious to said
cells, said cells having been partially fixed with a fixing agent
to reduce cell membrane elasticity prior to being shrunken, and
said mixture of permanently shrunken lysable cells in said
suspension medium simulating in number, size and volume
distribution the platelets present in human whole blood.
' I M M I I I M I I I I
vyvy
1. A device for colorimetrically quantifying exposure to
ethylene oxide which comprises a polymer substrate which
exhibits Case Il-transport for ethylene oxide through the body
of which is dispersed a concentration of a color-forming com-
pound which undergoes a color-change upon reaction with
ethylene oxide, said concentration being chosen to provide a
variable degree of color-change in said device which, at a
uniform temperature, is a previously determined function of
the device's quantity of exposure to ethylene oxide.
4.436.822
REAGENT MIXING SYSTEM AND METHOD
AU H. Esdfu, San Fhmdso. Calif ., aasigDor to Sherwood Medi-
cal Company, St Louis, Mo.
Filed Sep. 22, 1981. Ser. No. 304,453
Int CL3 GOIN 31/00. 1/14. 21/24
U.S. CL 436—164 i6 rirf—
1. A method of introducing and mixing a predetermined
amount of a liquid reagent with a predetermined amount of a
sample in a process of analyzing a characteristic of the sample
comprising the steps of successively introducing through noz-
zle means a pluraUty of discrete jets of a liquid reagent into a
container holding a sample while the nozzle means is spaced
^
March 13. 1984
CHEMICAL
799
from the container and with sufficient force to cflect turbulent
mixing of the reagent and specimen with each jet, predetermi-
nately time spacing the jeU so that the turbulent mixing caused
by one jet is reduced in magnitude before the next jet is intro-
VOLTMC
SJPKt
SOUWCE
C»
■CAO-OUTl
ayvT .1
duced. the plurality of the jets providing said predetermined
amount of the liquid reagent, and after the last jet has been
introduced into the container detecting a characteristic of the
container contents.
4.436.823
SIUCA GELS INCORPORATING INSOLUBILIZED
REAGENTS
Alftred Bliimcke; Peter Fischer, both of Rheinfclden, and Hans-
Joachim VaUensieck, Wehr, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Dragerwerk Aktiengesellschaft Lubeck, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Dirision of Ser. No. 54,518, Jul. 3, 1979, Pat No. 4,301,027.
This appUcation May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,162
CUdms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 3.
1978, 2829091
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to No?. 17,
1998, has been discbdmed.
Int a^ C09K 3/00; GOIN 31/22. 21/06
VJS. a. 436—169 12 Claims
1. A composition consisting essentially of a dried silica gel
containing in insolubilized form a normally soluble reagent
which retains it reactivity, said reagent being uniformly ab-
sorbed in and throughout said silica gel, said reagent being
insoluble to solvents in which it is normally soluble.
4,436,824
LEUKOCYTE MIGRATION THROUGH ANTIGEN
CONTAINING AGAROSES FOR
IMMUNOCOMPETENCE TESTING
Dtfid C. Bishop, Sergeantsrille, N J., aaaignor to Ortho Diag-
nostic Systems, Inc., Raritan, N J.
FUed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,864
Int a^ GOIN 33/48. 33/50 33/54
\}S. a. 436—514 8 n«i».
plurality of antigen-containing agarose sheeU and one
control agarose sheet;
(c) incubating the sheets;
(d) determining the amount of leukocyte migration from
each well; and
(e) determining the level of cellular immunocompetence of
the patient baaed upon the amount of leukocyte migration
in step (d),
wherein each of the plurality of antigen-containing agarose test
sheeU contains an effective diagnostic concentration of an
individual recall antigen and the control agarose sheet contains
no antigen.
4,436325
PROCESS AND REAGENTS FOR ANTIBODY
DETECnON INVOLVING ERYTHROCYTE
AGGLUTINATION
Parriz Lalezari, Scarsdale, N.Y., aasignor to Montcflore Hospi-
tal and Medical Center, Inc., Bronx, N.Y.
Continuaticn of Ser. No. 144.447. Apr. 28, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation May 21, 1982. Ser. No. 380,939
Int a.' GOIN 33/54
U.S. a 436—520 40 Claims
1. A process for the detection of antibodies in a test sample
comprising:
(a) preparing an essentially isotonic and low ionic strength
suspension comprising said sample, a sensitization effec-
tive amount of ethylenediamine tetra-aceUte, and erythro-
cytes in net negatively-charged form;
(b) maintaining said suspension for at least 30 seconds;
(c) combining said suspension with an amount of a solution
of polymer effective for agglutination of said erythro-
cytes;
(d) separating the resultant agglutinates of polymer and
erythrocytes from supernatant of said suspension;
(d) dispersing said agglutinates without bound antibody in a
hyperionic salt solution having an essentially neutral pH;
and
(0 monitoring the resuspended agglutinates for the presence
or absence of antibody.
4,436,826
TAGGED IMMUNOASSAY
Chla-Gee Wang, MUlwood, N.Y., assignor to Wang Aasodatas,
MUlwood, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,711
Int a.3 GOIN 33/54. 33/56
VJS. a. 436—525 46 n.i».
1. An immunoassay method for measurement of the content
of a target antigen or antibody in a fluid or tissue specimen,
which comprises reacting the target with reagent antibody or
antigen which forms a complex with the target and is tagged
with tagging elements or compounds which are unassociated
chemically with said reagent and are protected against reaction
(b) placing a leukocyte sample, with substantiaUy no prior with the target and the biological and chemical environment of
incubation with antigen, in at least one weU of each of a the assay, and detecting the formed, tagged complexes.
1. A method for determining the level of cellular im-
munocompetence in a patient which comprises the steps of:
(a) obtaining a sample of leukocytes from said patient;
800
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
801
4,436,827
DETECTING PARTICLE AGGLUTINATION WITH
VESSEL HAVING INCLINEO, STEPPED BOTTOM
SURFACE
Akin Tunagiwa, Hino, Japan, anignor to Olympus Optical Co.
Ltd., Japan
FUed Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,565
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 30, 1981, 56-118504
Int a.3 GOIN 33/54. 33/80. 21/05. 31/02
UAa436-534 12 Claims
n is 2, 3, 4, or 5
with a protein, or an iodizable amino acid selected from
the group consisting of tyramine, histidine, tyrosine or
tyrosine ethyl ester, or a peptide containing tyrosine.
4436 829
GLASS FRITS CONTAINING WO3 OR MOO3 IN
RU02-BASED RESISTORS
Robert G. Howell, Coming, N.Y., assignor to Coming Glass
Works, Coming, N.Y.
FUed Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,574
Int. a.J C03C 3/08. 3/10. 3/30
UA a 501-22 2 Claims
900
1. A method for detecting a particle agglutination reaction
with the aid of a flow cell type reaction vessel comprising:
supplying a test liquid containing particles into a reaction
vessel which comprises a tubular body having an inlet, an
outlet arranged below said inlet and a passage communi-
cating between said inlet and said outlet, said tubular body
being inclined to define an inclined bottom surface by an
inner wall of said passage, said bottom surface having a
plurality of steps formed therein for forming a stable base
layer of particles descending thereon;
keeping the test liquid stationary in the reaction vessel for a
predetermined time; and
detecting a particle agglutination pattern formed by aggluti-
nated particles settled on the inclined bottom surface.
4,436,828
REACTIVE ASYMMETRICAL DICARBOXYLIC AOD
ESTERS AND REAGENTS FOR THE INVESTIGATION
OF CARDUC GLYCOSIDES
Hans-Georg Batz, Tntzing; Hans-Ralf Linke, Wielenbach; Klaua
Stcllner, Bemried, and Giinter Weimann, Tutzing, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Boehringer Mannheim GmbH,
Mannheim- Waldhof, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 883,981, Mar. 6, 1978, Pat. No. 4,282,151,
which is a dirision of Ser. No. 715,020, Aug. 16, 1976, Pat. No.
4,133,949. This application Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,838
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 20.
1975,2537129 /• »• .
Int a.3 A61K 43/00: GOIN 33/56: C07G 7/00
UA a. 436-545 jctalms
1. Process for the preparation of reagents for the investiga-
tion of cardiac glycosides (Digitalis glycosides) in aqueous or
physiological solution, comprising reacting dicarboxylic acid
ester compounds of the formula
• EXAMPLE
O EXAMPLE
0 EXAMPLE
A EXAMPLE
■ EXAMPLE
sso
FIRING TEMP.
1. Glass frit compositions for use in thick film, RuOj-based
resistor inks suitable for application to alumina substrates ex-
hibiting coefficients of thermal expansion approximating that
of the alumina substrate material and temperature coefficient
of resistance values of less than 100 ppm which consist essen-
tially, expressed in terms of mole percent on the oxide basis, of
about 32-39% PbO, 44-47% B2O3, 14-17% SiO:. and an
effective amount of WO3 or M0O3 up to 5%.
R]0
I
R2-C-(CH2),-CO-X
R3
wherein
Ri is alky I of up to 3 carbon atoms, or is a digoxin or digi-
toxin residue
R2 and R3 are individually selected from alkoxy of up to 3
carbon atoms or together represent an oxygen atom,
X is cyanomethoxy, succinimido-N-oxy. N-methyl-pyridini-
umoxy. 2,4-dinitrophenoxy, 2.4,S-trichlorophenoxy, pen-
tachlorophenoxy, phenylthio, p-nitrophenoxy, p-
nitrophenylthio, piperidyl-N-oxy, and
4,436,830
COATING FOR METAL-CUTTING TOOLS
Anatoly A. Andreev, DanUevskogo, uUtsa 31, kv. 47; Igor V.
GavrUko, Traktoroatroitelel, uUtsa 65, ky. 71, both of Khar-
kov; Alexel G. Gavrilov, Vostochnaya, uUtaa 11, kr. 6,
DomodedoTO Moakovskaya obUut; Anatoly S. Vercschaka,
Kastanaevskaya, uUtsa 42, korpus 1, kv. 57; VUctor P. Ziwd,
Uchebny pereulok, 2, kr. 57, both of Moscow; Valentin G.
PadaUca, DanUevskogo, uUtsa 10, kv. 122, Kharkov, and An-
drei K. SincIschUcov, Pervomaiskaya, uUtsa 20, kv. 32, Mos-
cow, aU of U.S.SJI.
PCT No. PCr/SU81/00025, § 371 Date Oct 28, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 28, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/03036, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 16, 1982
PCT FUed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 438,961
Int a? C04B 35/58
U.S. a. 501—96 1 dalBi
1. A coating for a metal-cutting tool consisting of titanium
nitride, characterized in that it additionally contains either
chromium nitride in an amount of from 10 to 30% by weight
or aluminium nitride in an amount of from 3 to 18% by weight
molybdenum nitride in an amount of from 2 to 8% by weight
chromium nitride in an amount of from 2 to 10% by weight
and sUicon nitride in an amount of from 0.3 to 10% by weight
all being taken in combination and uniformly distributed within
the volume of the coating.
4,436,831
CALCINED MEMBER FOR ARC-EXTINGUISHING
CHAMBERS
Shizntaka Nishizako, TiUimi; Isao IshU, Amagaaaki, and Yo-
ihiaki Sakamoto, Snita, aU of Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi
DenU Kahnahiki Kaiaha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,695
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 15, 1981, 56-110381
Int a.3 O04B 35/04. 35/18
VS. a. 501—119 10 Claims
x—
y
— Y
which contains aluminum hydroxide as a structural promoter,
wherein the improvement comprises co-precipiuting copper,
zinc and aluminum nitrates or acetates with sodium bicarbon-
ate.
3. The process of claim 1, wherein said catalyst is commi-
nuted.
5. The process of claim 1, wherein said mixed crystalline
material of the formula
Cu2.2Zn2.8(OH)6(C03)2
has an X-ray diffraction diagram characterized by at least the
following d values of the diffraction lines: 6.75; 3.70; 3.21; 2.90-
2.75; 2.64; 2.15; 1.94; and 1.61.
1. A calcined member for arc-extinguishing chambers,
which consists of an inorganic composite insulation material
obtained by molding and heat-treating a starting material under
pressurized condition, said stariing material consisting essen-
tially of 10 to 50% by weight of a mica powder as a base
material, 10 to 50% by weight of a magnesium oxide as a
charging material, and 25 to 60% by weight of a binder of
boric acid, boric anhydride and zinc oxide, the boric acid being
present in an amount of 20 to 60 parts by weight based on 100
total parts by weight of binder.
4,436332
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF BRIDGED
CLAYS, CLAYS PREPARED BY SAID PROCESS, AND
USES FOR SAID CLAYS
Pierre Jacobs, 6, PopuUeren Straat 1686 GoUc; Georges Ponce-
let 15, me de Wavre, 5998 Beauvechain, and Alain Schutz, 4,
me Godincourt, 6778 Muason, aU of Belgium
FUed Aug. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 411,769
Claims priority, appUcation France, Aug. 27, 1981, 81 16387
Int a.3 BOIJ 29/02. 37/06
U.S. a. 502—84 46 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of bridged clays, comprising
subjecting a mixture of an aqueous solution of at least one
metal hydroxide and an aqueous clay suspension to dialysis.
3. A process according to claim 1, wherein said hydroxide is
selected from the group formed by the hydroxides of the ele-
ments of groups IIB, IIIB, IVB, VB, VIB, VIIB, VIIIB, L\,
IIA, IIIA, IVA, VA and VIA of the periodic table of the
elements.
4,436333
PREPARATION OF METHANOL SYNTHESIS
CATALYST COMPRISING ZINC, COPPER AND
ALUMINUM
Franz J. Broecker, Ludwigshafen; Karl-Heinz Graendler, Um-
burgerho^ Laazlo Maroai, Ludwigshafen; Matthias Schwarz-
mann, Limburgerho^ Bruno Triebskora, and Guenter Zfa'ker,
both of Ludwigdiafen, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to BASF AktiengeseUschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 253,662, Apr. 14, 1981, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 82,526, Oct 9, 1979, abandoned.
This appUcation Mar. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 478,995
Int a.J BOIJ 27/20. 23/80: LOIB 31/24: L07C 29/16
MS. a. 502—176 8 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a catalyst, for methanol
synthesis, from a mixed crystalline material of the formula
Cu2.2Zn2.8(OH)6(C03)2
4,436334
IRON-THALLIUM CATALYSTS FOR USE IN CO
HYDROGENATION AND PROCESS OF PREPARING
THE CATALYSTS
FrankUn J. Wright Watchung, N J., assignor to Exxon Re
search and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 298391, Sep. 3, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 275,451, Jun. 19,
1981, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 186309,
Sep. 15, 1980, abandoned. This appUcation Sep. IS, 1982, Ser.
No. 418380
Int a.' BOIJ 23/80. 23/82
U.S. a. 502-201 16 Oalma
1. A catalyst composition consisting essentially of a mixture
of an iron compound and a thallium compound, being sup-
ported or unsupporied, said compound of iron and thallium
being selected from the group consisting of an oxide, hydrox-
ide, carbonate, sulfate, carbide, halide, nitrate, or mixtures
thereof, wherein the weight ratio of iron-thallium, taken as the
free metals, is from about 100:1 to 1:100, and wherein said iron
compound contains iron value substantially in the trivalent
state, and wherein said thallium compound is substantiaUy
deposited on the surface of said iron compound.
4,436335
PROCESS FOR PREPARATION OF CATALYSTS
Shigera Horie, Gouzn; Yasuo Yamamoto, NUgata, and Takeo
Ikaraahi, NUtsn, aU of Japan, aasignors to Mitsubishi Gas
Chemical Company Inc., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 477,755
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 24, 1982, 57-46497
Int a.J BOIJ 27/14
U3. a 502—208 7 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a catalyst for the synthe-
sis of methyl formate by dchydrogenating methanol in the
gaseous phase, said process being characterized in that (A) at
least one phosphate selected from the group consisting of
copper phosphates, zinc phosphates and aluminum phosphates,
and (B) at least one chloride selected from the group consisting
of copper chlorides, zinc chloride, aluminum chloride, alkali
metal chlorides and alkaline earth metal chlorides and/or (C)
at least one compound selected from the group consisting of
alkali metal compounds (exclusive of halides) and alkaline
earth metal compounds (exclusive of halides) are added to
copper oxide, zinc oxide and aluminum oxide.
4336336
CATALYST FOR THE HYDRODEALKYLATION OF
ALKYLAROMATIC COMPOUNDS
Francis P. Daly, Haddonfleld, N J., and Frederick C. WUhelm,
West Chester, Pa., aasignors to Air Products and Cbeadcals,
Inc., AUentown, Pa.
FUed Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,192
Int a.J BOIJ 21/04. 23/04. 23/26
MS. CL 502—317 7 n«t-«
1. A catalyst comprising a gamma-alumina suppori impreg-
802
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
nated with about 8 to 12 wt% chromia and about 0.3 to 0.6
wt% aodium oxide, the catalytt having a surface area fix)ni 175
to 275 m^/g and a pore volume from 0.5 to 1.2 cc/g.
PREPARATION OF ALKANOLS FROM SYNTHESIS GAS
Jiaat-Joi Lin, RoomI Rock, Tcz^ MripMr to Texaco Inc^
White Plaina, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 428,491
Int a^ C07C 27/06
\}&. CL 518—700 18 aaimt
1. A process for making alkanols which comprises reacting a
mixture of CX) and H2 at a pressure of about 500 psig or greater
and at a temperature of at least 150* C. in the presence of a
catalyst system comprising a ruthenium-containing compound,
a samarium-containing compound and a quaternary phospho-
nium salt, in the presence of an inert, oxygenated solvent.
adding to the reaction medium one or more cooled solutions
of bisphenol A and polyalkyleneglycol; and
adding to the reaction medium a cooled solution of phosgene
in excess of less than about 10 weight-% of the stoichio-
metrically required weight amount leUtive to bisphenol A
and polyalkyleneglycol in such way that the phosgene
contacto substantially the reaction partners from the one
or more cooled solutions after they have spread in the
reaction medium,
said step of adding being performed in such manner that the
one or more cooled solutions are added through a tube
ending above the liquid level of the reaction mixture, and
the cooled solution of phosgene is added through a tube
ending above the liquid level of the reaction medium so
that the solutions added contact only within the stirred
reaction mixture the reaction partner;
and isolating the copolymer from the reaction mixture.
4,436438
PROCESS FOR PREPARING ALKANOLS AND ESTERS
FROM SYNTHESIS GAS
Jiaag-Jen Lin, RouBd Rock, Tex., aadgnor to Texaco IiiCm
White Plaina, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,334
tat CL» C07C 27/06, 29/15
UjS. CL 518—700 24 Claims
1. A process for making alkanols and esters which comprises
reacting a mixture of CO and H2 at a pressure of about 500 psig
or greater and at a temperature of at least 150* C. in the pres-
ence of a catalyst system comprising one or more ruthenium-
containing compounds, a second metal catalyst selected from
groups IVB, VB or VIE, consisting of a zirconium, titanium,
vanadium or chromium-containing compound, and a quater-
nary phosphonium salt, in the presence of an inert, oxygenated
solvent.
PROCESS FOR PREPARING
POLYCARBONATE-POLYETHER-BLOCKCOPOLYM*
ERS
Joadda Behake, AaorlMch, and Walter UtffetaBanii, Erlen-
bach, both of Fed. Rep. of Gcrnaay, aisigBon to Akao NV,
Aniheai, Nethcriaada
Filed Ang. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 177,463
Ciaiaia priority, appUcatloa Fed. Rep. of Germany, Ang. 13,
1979, 2932737
tat a» C08G W44, 63/68; C08J 9/28
MS, CL 521—64 20 Claims
4,436,840
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING PRE-FOAMED PARTICLES
OF POLYOLEFIN RESIN
Hlroyoki AUyana, Hiratsaka; Smaio Shinada, Kannna;
Knniaori Hhroaawa, Isehara, and Hidekl Knwabara, Hatano,
aU of Japan, aaslgnon to Japan Styrene Paper Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 420^74
Clafans priority, application Japan, Sep. 28, 1981, 56-153230
Int a.3 C08J 9/22: B29D 27/00
U.S. a 521—58 2 Oaims
1. In a process for producing pre-foamed particles of a poly-
olefin resin which comprises impregnating a volatile blowing
agent into particles of a polyolefin resin while dispersing the
resin particles and the blowing agent in a Uquid dispersing
medium which does not dissolve the resin particles under heat
in a closed vessel, opening one end of the vessel and releasing
the resin particles and the dispersing medium simultaneously
into an atmosphere kept at a lower pressure than the inside
pressure of the vessel; the improvement wherein the pressure
of the inside of the vessel after opening its one end is main-
tained at a substantially constant pressure which is at least 0.7
times the vapor preuure of the blowing agent before opening
the end of the vessel.
^fC»
MOtOMt* lofiaSla riigHicia
SOLUT lOM W I I2J] 1
1. A method for production of polycarbonate-polyether-
copolymers comprising
providing a cooled initial reaction medium in a cooled reac-
tion chamber;
4,436,841
SINGLE-PHASE, STORAGE-STABLE POLYOL
COMPOSmONS CONTAINING SALTS AND THE USE
THEREOF IN THE PRODUCnON OF
POLYURETHANES
Werner Ra«hofer, Cologne; Woliipuig Rrirhmann, HOden;
Adolf Richartz, Cologne, and Manfired Dietrich, Lererknsen,
all of Fed. Rep. of Gennany, aaiignors to Bayer Aktiengeaell-
■chafk, Lererknaea, Fed. Rev. of Gcrnaay
FOed May 24, 1983, Ser. No. 497,640
ClaiuM priority, applicatioa Fed. Rep. of Geranay, May 26,
1982, 3219822
tat CL3 C09K 3/00: O08G 18/14. 18/65
UJS. CL 521—106 15 n.!,..
1. A single-phase, storage-stable, emulsifier-free polyol mix-
ture comprising 100 parts of a relatively high molecular weight
polyoxyalkylene polyol of OH number from 20 to 120, which
has at least 5% and less than 80%, by weight of terminal
oxyethylene blocks; from 1 to 100 parte of a tow molecular
weight diol mixture which is a reaction product of ethylene
glycol, butane diol-1,4, or a mixture of ethylene glycol and
butane diol-1,4 with from 0.05 to 0.50 mols/mol of ethylene
glycol, butane diol-1,4 of a mixture of these compounds of
alkyl oxiranes corresponding to the formuk:
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
803
R« R2
\ /
c
\
o.
-continued
/
c
/ \
Rs R4
wherein
R| represente CH3, CH2CI or C2HS;
R2 represente H or CH3; and
R3 and R4 represent H, CH3 or C2H5;
and from 0.01 to 5 parte of solubilizing additives comprising
one or more salte, the cations of which are from Groups 1, 11
and III of the Periodic Table, ammonium or mono- to tetra-
alkyl ammonium ions, and the anions of which are produced by
removing at least one proton from an acid having a pKi value
of at least 10- 1
12. A process for the production of polyurethanes compris-
ing reacting isocyanates with a single-phase; storage-stable,
emulsifier-free polyol mixture comprising 100 parte of a rela-
tively high molecular weight polyoxyalkylene polyol of OH
number from 20 to 120, which has at least i% and less than
80%, by weight, of terminal oxyethylene blocks; from 1 to 100
parte of a low molecular weight diol mixture which is a reac-
tion product of ethylene glycol, butane diol-1,4 or a mixture of
ethylene glycol and butane diol-1,4, with from 0.05 to 0.50
mols/mol of ethylene glycol, butane diol-1,4 or a mixture of
these compounds of alkyl oxiranes corresponding to the for-
mula:
*«.
R2
\ /
c
\
0,
/
c
/ \
It)
R4
wherein
Ri represente CH3, CH2CI or C2HS;
R2 represente H or CH3; and
R3 and R4 represent H. CH3 or C2HS;
and from 0.01 to 5 parte of solubilizing additives comprising
one or more salts, the cations of which are from Groups 1, 11
and III of the Periodic Table, ammonia or mono- to tetra-alkyl
ammonium ions, and the anions of which are produced by
removing at least one proton from an acid having a Vi, value of
at leut 10- ^
4,436,842
ALKYL POLYAMINE ETHERS AS CATALYSTS FOR
ISOCYANATE REACnONS
Howard L. Harwell, Zionarille, Pa^ aadgnor to Air Prodncta
and Chemicala, Inc., AUcntown, Pa.
Filed Sep. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 414,759
tat a.) O08G 18/14
UJS. CL 521—115 4 Clains
1. A process for catalyzing a reaction between an organic
isocyanate and a composition that contains active hydrogen as
measured and determined by the Zerewitinofi* method which
comprises carrying out the reaction in the presence of a cata-
lytic quantity of a polyamine represented by the formula:
I R
\ I
N— CH2— CH2-N— CH2— CH2— O— CHj— CH2—
%-
(CH2CH2)«N
/
\
R
wherein
R is methyl, ethyl,
y is 0 or 1 when x is 1,
z is 0 when Y is 0, and
z is 1 when Y is 1.
4,436,843
HIGH-RESIUENCE POLYURETHANE FOAMS HAVING
IMPROVED RESISTANCE TO SHRINKAGE
Richard L. Rowton, and Michael Cascurida, both of Anttia,
Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 450,590
tat a.i C08G 18/14
U.S. a. 521—167 4 Claims
1. A high-resilience polyurethane foam having improved
resistance to shrinkage, obtained by reacting in the presence of
a blowing agent and a catalyst of polyurethane formation, an
organic polyisocyanate and a polyol component comprising 10
to 50 weight percent of a polymer polyol and 50 to 90 weight
percent of a polyol which is an ethylene oxide-capped propox-
ylated ethylenediamine adduct having a molecular weight in
the range from about 4,000 to 10,000, a hydroxyl number in the
range from 25 to 45 and an ethylene oxide content of up to
15%, where the resultant foam possesses improved openness in
the absence of subsequent crushing.
4,436^44
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF A FOUNDRY
CORE OR MOULD
Arnold Schroader, Dercntcr, and Lodew^k Roakott Gorsaal,
both of Nethcrhuids, assignors to Akaona tacorporated, Aaba-
rille, N.C.
Filed Dae. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 451,638
CUdnu priority, application Netherlands, Dae 21, 1981,
8105743
tat a' C08K 3/36
U.S. a. 523—144 5 Oaims
1. An improved process for the manufacture of a foundry
core or mould, comprising forming into the foundry core or
mould a composition comprising a granular filler, a synthetic
resin which cures under the action of an acid and and a desensi-
tized ketone peroxide composition and treating said formed
composition with sulphur dioxide, wherein the improvement
comprises using u the desensitizing agent a dialkyl ester of an
aliphatic dicarboxylic acid of the general formula
\ /°
C— (CH2)«— C
/ \
R|— O 0-R2
wherein n« 1-7 and Ri and R2«a branched or non-branched
alkyl group having 3 to 5 carbon atoms.
TRAFnC MARKING PAINT
Maaao Kitano, Oaaka, Japaa, aarifMr to Tea Paint Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japaa
FUad Oct 25, 1982, Ser. No. 436,3r
ClaiaM priority, applicatioa Japaa, Oct 29, 1981, 56-174020
tat a? C09D 5/00. 3/48: EOIF 9/04. 9/08
M&. a 523-172 1 Claim
1. A traffic marking paint comprising 10 to 40% by weight
of a non-aqueous dispersion of a resin having a glass transition
804
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
temperature of 20* to 70* C. and having a molecular weight of
10,000 to 20.000, 40 to 60% by weight of a fUler, and a pigment,
said paint having a solids content of 70 to 90% by weight, said
non-aqueous dispersion having a solids content of SO to 70% by
weight and being prepared by polymerizing an ethylenically
unsaturated monomer selected from the group consisting of
methyl acrylate, methyl methacrylate, ethyl acrylate, ethyl
methacrylate, butyl acrylate, butyl methacrylate, 2-hydrox-
yethyl acrylate, acrylonitrile and styrene in a dispersion me-
dium in the presence of a dispersant selected from the group
consisting of an acrylic resin, an alkyd resin, an acrylic modi-
fied alkyd resin, chlorinated rubber and polybutadiene, the
ratio of said ethylenically unsaturated monomer to said disper-
sant being from about 70/30 to about 80/20 by weight.
4436 846
COMPOSITION AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING THE
PROPERTIES OF LIQUID MEDIA
Karl W. Krantz, Schenectwly, N.Y., iMignor to General Electric
CdmiMny, Waterford, N.Y.
Diiriiion of Ser. No. 91,989, Nov. 7, 1979, Pat. No. 4^41,684,
which is a diriaion of Ser. No. 584,417, Jun. 6, 1975, Pat. No.
4,190,069. This appUcation May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,200
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 26,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 CXWK 5/01. 5/04: F17D 1/16. 1/17
UA a 523-175 18 Ctaims
1. A process for transmitting a hydrocarbon fluid through a
pipeline at a reduced fluid flow friction loss, which comprises:
A. intermixing with said fluid a composition which is an
oil-in-oil emulsion comprising:
(i) a continuous phase of a liquid which is different from
but normally miscible with said hydrocarbon fluid, and,
dispersed therein,
(ii) a stable discontinuous phase predominantly compris-
ing fine particles of a high molecular weight polymer
selected from polyhydrocarbon or polydiorganosilox-
ane having a molecular weight of at least 500,000 which
is ultimately miscible with said hydrocarbon fluid,
the amount of said composition being selected to provide from
10 ppm to 1500 ppm of high molecular weight polymer based
on said hydrocarbon fluid; and
B. transmitting the resulting mixture through a pipeline at a
velocity sufficient to establish turbulent flow conditions.
ratio of the silane coupling agent to alkoxysilane being
between 0.15:1 and 15:1.
4,436348
AQUEOUS CO-EMULSIONS OF EPOXY RESIN AND
MINERAL OIL
Richard M. Haines, Warsaw; Robert Wong, GranriUe, and
Elisabeth J. Berger, Newark, all of Ohio, assignors to Owens-
Coming Fiberglas Corporation, Toledo, Ohio
FUed Apr. 12, 1983, Ser. No. 484,131
Int. a.VB32B 17/08. 17/10: C08L 1/28. 63/02
U.S. a 523-426 9C\Mim»
1. An aqueous emulsion consisting essentially of: (a) about 30
to about 75 weight percent, based on the total weight of the
emulsion, of (i) an emulsified liquid epoxy resin or (ii) an emul-
sified liquid solution containing a total weight of epoxy resin
from about 30 to about 75 percent of the total weight of the
emulsion and an organic solvent therefor; (b) about 1 to about
5 weight percent, based on the weight of the epoxy resin, of
mineral oil; (c) about 5 to about 12 weight percent, based on
the weight of the epoxy resin, of predominantly non-ionic
surfactant for emulsifying the epoxy resin or solution thereof
and the mineral oil; (d) about 0.5 to about 5 weight percent,
based on the weight of the epoxy resin, of an anti-static agent
and (e) water.
4,436,847
RUBBER COMPOSITIONS
Melrio P. Wagner, Barberton, Ohio, assignor to PPG Indus-
tries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
CoBtinii8tion-in.part of Ser. No. 382,542, May 27, 1982. This
appUcation Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,108
Int a.3 C08K 3/34. 3/30
U.S. a. 523-203 16 claims
1. In a rubber composition comprising a curable rubber,
from 10 to 90 parts, per 100 parts of rubber, of finely divided
reinforcing siliceous pigment and a coupling amount of a silane
coupling agent, the improvement wherein a silane coupling
composition of the silane coupling agent in combination with
an alkoxysilane is admixed with said siliceous pigment, said
alkoxysilane having the graphic formula:
R"— Si— (OROa,
wherein R' is selected from Ci-Cio alkyl or alkoxyalkyl con-
taining from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, and R" is a Ci-Cio alkyl,
and the silane coupling agent is chosen from the group consist-
ing of:
(a) organic silane compounds containing an internal active
olefinic linkage,
(b) bis(alkoxy8ilylalkyl)polysulfides,
(c) haloalkylsilanes, and
(d) silane compounds containing a vinyl functional group in
the organofunctional portion of the compound, the weight
4,436^49
AQUEOUS RESIN COMPOSITION
Tetsuo Aihara; Yasuharu Nakayama; Koichi Uraeyama; Kozo
Sawada, and Masaaki Shinohara, all of Hiratsuka, Japan,
assignors to Kansai Paint Company, Limited, Hyogo, Japan
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,080
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct 26, 1981, 56-171115:
Dec. 18, 1981, 56-203430
Int a.3 C08L 67/08: C09D 3/68
U.S. a. 523-501 49 cudms
1. An aqueous resin composition comprising a neutralization
product of an isocyanurate group-containing maleinized alkyd
resin having an acid value of 5 to 65 in an aqueous medium,
said maleinized alkyd resin being prepared by maleinizing an
alkyd resin having an acid value of not more than 10 and a
hydroxyl value of not more than 10 which is the product of
condensation reaction of
(A) 20 to 60% by weight of at least one of drying or semi-
drying oils and fatty acids,
(B) 10 to 45% by weight of at least one trisOiydroxyalkyl-
)isocyanurate,
(C) 0 to 45% by weight of at least one polyhydric alcohol
other than the component (B),
(D) 10 to 45% by weight of at least one polybasic acid, and
(E) 0 to 15% by weight of at least one monobasic acid.
23. An aqueous emulsion resin composition obtained by
emulsion polymerization of a radical polymerizable unsatu-
rated monomer in an aqueous medium in the presence of a
neutralization product of an isocyanurate group-containing
maleinized alkyd resin having an acid value of 6 to 65, said
maleinized alkyd resin being prepared by maleinizing an alkyd
resin having an acid value of not more than 10 and a hydroxyl
value of not more than 10 which is the product of condensation
reaction of
(A) 20 to 60% by weight of at least one of drying or semidry-
ing oils and fatty acids,
(B) 10 to 45% by weight of at least one tris(hydroxyalkyI-
)isocyanurate,
(C) 0 to 45% by weight of at least one polyhydric alcohol
other than the component (B),
(D) 10 to 45% by weight of at least one polybasic acid, and
(E) 0 to 15% by weight of at least one monobasic acid.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
803
4,436,850
STABILIZING SBR LATEX IN CEMENT
FORMULATIONS WITH LOW MOLECULAR WEIGHT
POLYMERS
Patricia E. Burdick, Budd Lake, and Ronald J. Rapp, Florham
Park, both of N.J., assignors to AUied Corporation, Morris
Township, Morris County, N J.
FUed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,480
Int a.3 C08K 3/00
U.S. a. 524-8 16 oaims
1. A composition comprising:
cement; latex containing an elastomer, water; and 0.1 to 10
times the weight of the elastomer of a low molecular
weight polymer, selected from the group consisting of a
polyethylene having a number average molecular weight
of from 6,000 to 20,000 and an oxidized polyethylene
having an acid number from 7 to 40.
4,436353
PHENOL-MELAMINE RESINS FOR IMPROVING
RUBBER TO METAL ADHESION
WUUan W. ScUomaa, Jr., Stow, Ohio, assignor to The Good-
year Tire A Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Aug. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 409,790
Int a.» C08L 7/00. 9/00, 9/02. 9/06
VS. a. 524-91 13 citiB,
1. A rubber compound, including an adhesion promoter for
rubber to metal adhesion, comprising:
the adhesion promoter consisting of the reaction product of
a phenol and a substituted melamine, said phenol having
the formula
4,436,851
SILICONE RESIN COATING COMPOSITION
CONTAINING AN ULTRAVIOLET LIGHT ABSORBING
AGENT
Howard A. Vaughn, Jr., Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General
Electric Company, Waterford, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 964,910, No?. 30, 1978,
abandoned. This application Apr. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 364^2
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 5, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 C08J 3/00: C08L 1/28. 5/00. 83/04
U.S. a 524-43 17 Claims
1. An aqueous coating composition comprising a dispersion
of colloidal silica in an aliphatic alcohol-water solution of the
partial condensate of a silanol of the formula RSJ(OH)3,
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of alkyl having
from 1 to 3 carbon atoms and aryl, at least 70 weight percent
of the silanol being CH3Si(OH)3, said composition containing
10 to 50 weight percent solids consisting essentially of 10 to 70
weight percent colloidal silica and 30 to 90 weight percent of
the partial condensate, the composition further containing
from about 0.1 to about 1.0 weight percent of a thickening
agent selected from the group consisting of hydroxypropyl
guar gum and hydroxypropyl cellulose and a small amount
effective to prevent discoloration of the substrate to which said
coating composition is applied of an ultraviolet light absorbing
agent which is soluble in the composition, said composition
having a pH of 7.1 to about 7.8.
4,436,852
PROCESS FOR THE COLORATION OF LINEAR
POLYESTERS IN THE MELT WITH
PERYLENETETRACARBOXYUC ACID
BIS-METHYUMIDE
FridoUn BMbler, AUschwU, Switzerland, assignor to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 338,710, Jan. 11, 1982, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 156,243, Jun. 4, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Not. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 438,445
Claims priority, appUcation Switzcrknd, Jun. 15, 1979,
5624/79
Int CL^ C08L 67/02
U.S. a. 524—88 6 dahns
1. A process for colouring linear polyester in the melt in
navy blue and dark blue shades, which process comprises
using, as colourant a mixture consisting of 0.2 to 1% by weight
of finely dispersed, undissolved perylenetetracarboxylic acid
bis-methylimide, based on the amount of polyester, and a blue
polymer-soluble colourant.
where Ri, R:, R3 and R4 may be the same or different and
are selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and
Ci to Cio acyclic and cyclic alkyl radicals; and
a substituted melamine having the formula
RjOCHj-^ ^ Y ^CHjOR*
N N
RgCXTHj'
.N.
CH2OR7
R5, R6, R7. Rg, R9 and Rio are selected from the group
consisting of Ci to C5 alkyl radicals; wherein said reaction
product is added to a rubber compounding recipe in an
amount between I and 8 parts per 100 parts by weight
rubber; and
wherein the rubber is a sulfur curable elastomer.
4,436354
SELF-EXTINGUISHING THERMOPLASTIC MOLDING
MATERIAL
Franz Brandstetter, Neustadt; VoUwr Mueach, Ludwigshafea;
Herbert Naarmann, Wattenheim, and Edmund Priebc, Frank-
enthal, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Ak-
tiengeseUschaft Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,015
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Gennany, Feb. 18.
1981, 3105946
Int a.J C08K 5/52, 5/53: CD8L 71/04
U.S. a. 524—139 2 Claims
1. A self-extinguishing thermoplastic material comprising
(A) from 70 to 10 parts by weight of an impact-resistant
styrene polymer containing a soft component based on a
grafted polybutadiene or a grafted copolymer of butadi-
ene and styrene,
(B) from 30 to 90 parU by weight of a polyphenylene ether
and
(C) from 1 to 20 parts by weight of a phosphorus-containing
compound as flameproofing additive,
wherein the soft component of the impact-resistant styrene
polymer (A) consisU essentiaUy of a mixture of from 98 to 10
percent by weight of particles having a mean particle size of
from 0.3 to 1.2 /xm and from 2 to 90 percent by weight of
particles having a mean particle size of from 4 to 10 ^m and
wherein said mixture is obtained by blending impact-resistant
styrene polymers whose soft components have difierent parti-
cle sizes.
1040 O.G.— 30
806
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
TWO-COMPONENT URETHANE COATING SYSTEM
WflUttB A. Hisiias, GatM Mflb. tad Joha S. Pen, Mentor,
kotk of Ohio, MrigBon to The Labriiol Corporatkm, Wick.
liffe,Ohio
CoatiautkM of Ser. No. 376,821, May U, 1M2, alMadoaed.
His appUcatioo Joa. 29, 1983, Ser. No. 508,992
lat a^ C08K 5/52
VJS. CL 524—145 79 n.!—
1. A composition comprising:
(A) sn organic polyfunctions] isocyanate;
(B) a non-Newtonian colloidal disperse system comprising
(1) solid metal-containing colloidal particles predisposed
in (2) a disperse medium of at least one inert organic liquid
and (3) as an essential third component at least one mem-
ber selected from the class consisting of organic com-
pounds which are substantially soluble in said disperse
medium, the molecules of said organic comfwund being
characterized by polar substituents and hydrophobic por-
tions; and
(C) an acidic ester of a phosphoric acid, the organic portions
of said acidic ester being selected from the group consist-
ing of hydrocarbyloxy and hydroxy-substituted hydrocar-
byloxy compounds.
AQUEOUS ORGANOPOLYSILOXANE EMULSIERS AND
A PROCESS FOR TREATING ORGANIC FIBERS
THEREWITH
Kari Hnho, aad Heinrich Marwitz, both of Bnrghanseo, Fed.
Rep. of Gcrauuiy, asdgnofi to Wacker^Chemie GmbH, Ma>
■i^ Fed. Rep. of Gcrmaay
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,457
ClaiBH priority, appUcatioa Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 10,
1981, 3104582
lat a.3 C08L 83/04
\}JS. CL 524-211 10 Claims
1. An aqueous emulsion for impregnating organic fibers
comprising (1) an organopolysiloxane having diorganosiloxane
units in which both organic radicals are monovalent hydrocar-
bon radicals, and at least two monovalent SiC-bonded organic
radicals having a basic nitrogen atom per molecule, in which
the SiC-bonded organic radicals having a basic nitrogen atom
are present in monoorganosiloxane units; (2) an organopolysi-
loxane with at least 3 Si-bonded hydrogen atoms per molecule;
(3) a catalyst for the condensation of Si-bonded condensable
groups; (4) an emulsifier selected from the group consisting of
an organosiloxane-oxyalkylene block copolymer in which the
oxyalkylene block is bonded to the organosiloxane block
through an SiOC bond, a nonionic emulsifier, an anionic emul-
sifier and mixtures thereof; and (5) a diorganopolysiloxane
haying an Si-bonded hydroxy] group in each of its terminal
units and whose organic radicals are free of nitrogen.
4,436,857
COATING RUBBER WITH A COMPOSITION WHICH
RESISTS REMOVAL BY WATER
Tloag H. Kaan, Stow, and John G. Sommv, Hndsoa, both of
Ohio, aMisMn to Hm General Tire A Rubber Company,
Akron, Ohio
Cotttinaation of Ser. No. 213,433, Dec. 5, 1980, ■h.nHiMiwi,
which is a continoation of Ser. No. 93,771, No?. 13, 1979,
abandoned, which ia a dirision of Ser. No. 21,380, Mar. 19, 1979,
Pat No. 4,217,395, which ia a continaation-tn-part of Ser. No.
931,597, Aag. 7, 1978, abandoned. This application Aug. 6, 1981,
Ser. No. 290,637
Int CL^ C08K 5/05
VS. a. 524—260 5 Oaima
1. A composition of matter comprising a compounded aque-
ous polymeric latex containing a carboxylated copolymer
having a glass transition temperature of not less than about
—30* C, and in which said copolymer consists essentially of a
carboxylated copolymer of (1) at least 4S% by weight of a
monomer selected from the group consisting of styrene, vinyl
toluene, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile, acrylamide, methac-
ryUunide, methylmethacrylate and ethylmethacrylate and mix-
tures thereof, (2) a copolymerizable monomer selected from
the group consisting of acrylic acid, meethacrylic acid, etha-
crylic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, itaconic acid, citraconic
acid, sorbic acid and crotonic acid and mixtures thereof in an
amount of up to 10% by weight and (3) the balance in an
amount sufficient to provide some flexibility to and for vulcani*
zation of the copolymer, a copolymerizable monomer selected
from the group consisting of butadiene- 1,3, isoprene, 2,3-
dimethyl-butadiene-1,3 and piperylene and mixtures thereof,
said latex being compounded with from about 1 SO to 1000 parts
by weight of inorganic, nonblack rubber compounding pig-
ments per 100 parts by weight of said copolymer in said latex,
from about 1 to 30 parts by weight of rubber stabilizers and
wetting agents per 100 parts by weight of said copolymer in
said latex and a heat sensitizer for said copolymer in said latex
in an amount of from about 0.75 to 15 parts by weight per 100
parts by weight of said copolymer in said latex, said heat sensi-
tizer being selected fom the group consisting of the zinc am-
mine system, polyvinyhnethylether, polypropylene glycol,
2-nitro-2-methyl-l-propanol and polyoxypropylene oxyethyl-
ene glycol and mixtures thereof, the total solids content of said
latex being from about 10 to 75% by weight and said composi-
tion characterized in being able to provide a hot, sticky rubber
compound with an adherent water resistant coating or film so
Uiat the rubber can be water cooled and dried and assembled or
stacked without sticking.
4,436,858
PLASnCIZED POLYDICYCLOPENTADIENE AND A
METHOD FOR MAKING THE SAME
Daniel W. Klosiewicz, Newark, Del., assignor to Hercules Incor-
porated, Wilndngton, DeL
Filed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,449
Int a.3 C08K 5/12
VJS. CL 524—296 6 Claims
1. A method for making a crosslinked polymer of polymer-
ized units of DCPD comprising: first, combioing a plurality of
reactant streams, one of which contains the activator of a
methathesis-catalyst system, and a second, which contains a
catalyst of said methathesis-catalyst system, and at least one of
which contiuns dicyclopentadiene, and at least one of which
contains an ester plasticizer having a solubility parameter of
from 7.8 to about 10.2 to form a reaction mixture and then
immediately injecting the reaction mixture into a mold where
polymerization occurs.
4,496,899
POLYNORBORNENES CURED WITH ISOCYANATES
AND OPTIONALLY WITH POLYOLS
Oaade Stein, Goarieox, and Andre Marbnch, Vemenil, both of
Fhuce, assignors to Sodete CUmiqne des Charbonnages SjL,
Piris,Fhuwe
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,150
Claims priority, application France, Ang. 8, 1980, 80 17514
Int a^ C08K 5/12. 5/01. 5/11: CD8F 8/30
U.S. a. 524—297 » QainH
1. In a process for preparing a ring-opened polynorbomene
composition which is castable at ambient temperature, com-
prising the step of admixing, at ambient temperature, a finely
divided ring-opened polynorbomene prepared by ring-open-
ing catalytic polymerization, with an effective fluidifying
amount of an ester or hydrocarbon plasticizer and an effective
amount for curing of a curing agent, thereby forming a castable
fluid mixture,
the improvement wherein said curing agent is an isocyanato
cross-linking agent; whereby the resultant mixture is cas-
table and curable at ambient temperature and the resultant
cured elastomeric product has an improved compression
KfARCH 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
807
modulus and residual set while retaining its desired re-
bound elasticity values.
subilizing agent and said water dispersible polyurethane
being in a dry weight ratio in the range of from 1:9 to 9:1.
4,436360
REINFORCED THERMOPLASTIC COMPOSITION
Leonard R. Hepp, E?ansriUe, Ind., assignor to General Electric
Company, Pittsfleld, Mass.
Continnatioa of Ser. No. 316,948, Oct 30, 1981, abandoned.
This appUcation May 24, 1983, Ser. No. 497,503
lat a.i C08K 3/40
U.S. a 524—394 6 Qainis
1. A reinforced thermoplastic composition which has a high
deflection temperature under load at 264 psi and which molds
into opaque, crystalline specimens in thin, thick and large/flat
parts exhibiting improved control in warpage, said composi-
tion comprising:
(A) a stable blended resinous combination comprising:
(i) from about 60 to about 90 paru by weight of a poly(ethy-
lene terephthalate) resin and
(ii) from about 40 to about 10 parU by weight of a poly(l,4-
butylene terephthalate) resin or a copolyester thereof with
a minor amount of an aliphatic or aromatic dicarboxylic
acid or an aliphatic polyol;
(B) from about 5 to about 60 parU by weight per 100 parts by
weight of said composition of reinforcing filamentous glsss;
(Q an internal nucleating amount of sodium stearate, alone, or
in further combination with
(D) «n effective, property improvi|ig amount of an oxirane
compound.
4,436361
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONTAINING ALKYL
ACRYLATE AND ALKYL METHACRYLATE
SEQUENTIALLY POLYMERIZED THEREON
Minora Ushioda, AmagaaH; Keqji Ueno; Hiroyasn Fnmkawa,
both of Takasago, and Masahiro Kobayaahi, Amagasaki, all of
Japan, assignors to Kanegitftachi Kagakn Kogyo KabashlU
Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 358^89
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 19, 1981, 5641259
Int a.» C08L 27/22: C08F 259/04
MS. CL 524-425 7 Claims
1. A particulate modified vinyl chloride polymer prepared
by a process which comprises: (1) impregnating porous parti-
cles of a vinyl chloride polymer with an alkyl acrylate having
a C4 to Ci8 alkyl group, (2) polymerizing said alkyl acrylate, (3)
adding an alkyl methacrylate having a Ci to C4 alkyl group to
the polymerization system in the course of said polymerization
of said alkyl acrylate, and (4) continuing said polymerization,
the total amount of said alkyl acrylate and said alkyl methacry-
late being from 2 to 20 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight
of said porous particles, and the weight ratio of said alkylacry-
late to said alkyl methacrylate being from 90/10 to 60/40.
4,436362
THERMALLY STABLE THICKENER
Marrin T. Tetnbanm, Wexford, Pa., and Bnrlon C Qowley,
Toms River, N J., assiviors to NL Indastries, Inc^ New York,
N.Y.
Filed Jon. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 504,156
Int CL^ O08K 3/34
MS. CL 524—445 30 QainH
1. A thermally stable thickener comprised of:
(a) a stabilizing agent which is at least one smectite-type clay
having a cation exchange capacity of at leut 75 millie-
quivalents per 100 grams of clay, 100% active clay basis;
uid
(b) a water dispersible polyurethane which, when mixed into
an aqueous composition alone, results in a thickened aque-
ous composition that exhibits a decrease in room tempera-
ture Stormer viscosity after one month at 140* P., said
USE OF ETHYLENE-VINYL ACETATE COPOLYMERS
AND OXIDIZED HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE
HOMOPOLYMERS AS PROCESSING AIDS FOR TALC
FILLED POLYPROPYLENE COMPOUNDS
Paul J. Albee, Jr^ Bensalem, Pa., aad Patricia E. Bnrdick, Bndd
Lake, N J., assivsors to Allied Corporatioa, Morris Township,
Morris County, N J.
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259306 -
Int a» C08K 3/34. 5/10
VS. CL 524—451 -^ 14 Claims
1. A composition comprising:
polypropylene;
from 1 percent to 50 percent based on the weight of the
polypropylene of talc;
from 0.1 percent to 10 percent based on the weight of the
polypropylene of sn ethylene-vinyl aceute copolymer
having from 2 to 45 percent by weight of the vinyl acetate
moiety and a Brookfield viscosity at 140* C. of from 300
centipoises to 700 centipoises.
4336364
AQUEOUS EMULSIONS OF ACRYLAMIDE AND
RUBBER MODIFIED ASPHALTS
Anthony V. Grossi, Newark; Leoa A. Hafslec, Minerra Park;
Loois T. Haha, and AlfM Maraocchi, both of Newark, aU of
Ohio, assignors to Owens-Corning FlberglM CorporatioB,
Toledo, Ohio
Cotttinaation-in-part of Ser. No. 329302, Dec. 11, 1981, Pat No.
439438I. lUs appUcation Dec 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453331
The portion of the term of this patent snbseqnent to Dec. 6, 2000,
Int CL^ O08L 91/00
U.S. a. 524— 458 is
1. In an uphalt emulsion comprising water, an asphaltic
material and effective emulsifying amounts of an emulsifier, the
improvement wherein said asphaltic material is the prereacted
reaction product produced by reacting an acrylamide, asphalt
having a viscosity of less than about 120.000 cps (at 140* P.), a
vinyl aromatic monomer and a rubbery polymer.
4,436365
POLY(ARYLENE SULFIDE) COMPOSITION SUITABLE
FOR MOLDING
WUUam H. Bearer, BartlesriUe, Okla., assignor to PhiUips
Petroleum Company, BartlesriUe, Okla.
FUed Nov. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 445307
Int CL^ O08K 3/02. 3/40. 3/36
VS. CL 524—504 g Claims
1. A composition suitable for molding comprising:
(a) from about 25 to about 50 weight percent poly(arylene
sulfide).
(b) from about 10 to about 30 weight percent reinforeing
agent,
(c) from about 30 to about 60 weight percent fUler.
(d) from about 0.5 to about 2 wei^t percent of processing
aid,
(e) from zero to about 3 weight percent colorant, and
(0 from about 0.5 to about 2 weight percent of an oil-soluble
organonitrogen compound graftod hydrogenated coigu-
gated diene/monovinylarene copolymer having (1) a
polymerized monovinylarene content of about 20 to 70
weight percent with the proviso that when said copoly-
mer contains a random block, the block polymonovinyla-
rene content is in the range of about 15 to 35 weight
percent (2) a number average molecular weight suitable
for oil solubility. (3) the extent of hydrogenation of said
copolymer such that about at leut 95 wdght percent of
olefblic double bonds having been saturated and (4) less
808
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
than about 5 weight percent of aromatic double bonds
having been saturated, said copolymer characterized as
having been prepared by the process which comprises
metalating a hydrogenated conjugated diene hydrocar-
bon/monovinylarene hydrocarbon copolymer, and react-
ing the resulting metalated hydrogenated copolymer with
efTective amounts of at least one nitrogen-containing or-
ganic compound represented by the general formulae
X-Q-(NR23)« or Y[Q.(NR23)„];„ wherein each R3 is the
same or different alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, or combination
radical, Q is a hydrocarbon radical having a valence of
n-t- 1 and is a saturated aliphatic, saturated cycloaliphatic,
aromatic or combination radical, X is a functional group
capable of reaction on a one-to-one basis with one equiva-
lent of polymer metal, Y is or contains a functional group
capable of reacting on a one-to-one basis with one equiva-
lent of polymer metal, n is at least one, and m is 2 or 3,
thereby preparing said grafted copolymer.
consisting essentially of an aqueous admixture of from about 5
to about 60 dry weight percent poly 2-ethyl-2-oxazoline and a
thermoplastic polymer having sufficient strength to form an
adhesive film, said thermoplastic polymer being selected from
the group consisting of polyvinyl alcohol, ethylene/vinyl
acetate copolymer, and polyvinyl pyrrolidone.
4,436,868
INSULATION COMPOSITION
KendaU R. Harris, Houston, Tex., assignor to B A B Insulation.
Inc., Houston, Tex.
FUed Dec. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453,783
Int CL3 O08K 3/22. 3/08
UA a 524-783 4a,i,„.
1. A composition comprising:
25-40% by weight silicone gel;
30-60% by weight powdered lead; and
5-35% by weight lead oxide.
4,436,866
AQUEOUS, ADHESIVE COATING COMPOSITION WITH
A NON-SELFCROSSUNKABLE ELASTOMER Ft)R USE
WITH FILAMENTARY MATERIALS
Mikhail M. Girgis, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to PPG Industries,
Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 238,725, Feb. 27, 1981, Pat Ito.
4,405,746. This appUcation Not. 25, 1981, Ser, No. 324,750
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 20,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 C08L 61/12
U.S. a. 524-510 20 Claims
1. An aqueous adhesive coating composition for treating
filamentary materials to reinforce elastomeric matrix materials,
comprising:
(1) at least three elastomeric materials, where the total gel
content of the coating composition attributable to the
elastomeric materials is less than about 70 weight percent
based on the aqueous coating composition, wherein the
three elastomeric materials are:
A. A vinyl-pyridine-containing elastomeric latex selected
from the group consisting of an elastomeric copolymer
latex produced from a vinyl pyridine-containing mono-
mer and 1,3-diene hydrocarbon monomer and an elasto-
meric terpolymer latex produced from vinyl pyridine-
containing monomer, 1,3-diene hydrocarbon monomer
and a vinyl-containing monomer,
B. non-self-crosslinkable elastomeric homopolymer or
interpolymer latex, wherein the elastomer has been
formed by the reaction of 1,3-diene hydrocarbon mono-
mers, and where the elastomeric latex has a gel content
of less than 40% and an average particle size of less than
around 2000 angstroms.
C. carboxylated butadiene polymer having an amount of
bound styrene not exceeding 75 weight percent, of the
copolymer and having an amount of carboxylation in
the range of about 1 to about 10 weight percent, of the
copolymer where the amount of the copolymer present
is in the range of 3 to about 10 weight percent of the
coating on a dry solids basis, and
(2) phenolic aldehyde condensate polymer,
(3) and water.
4,436,869
PRODUCnON OF CLOSED-CELL POLYURETHANE
MOLDINGS HAVING A DENSIFIED SURFACE ZONE
Otmar Zipp, Osnabniecke; Heinz BoUmann, Alfhausen; Herbert
Stutz, Karlsruhe, and Wolfgang Scholz, Umfoerde, aU of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Elastogran GmbH, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,406
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 4.
1981,3113690 /•!•'.
Int a.3 C08G 18/14
U.S. a. 525-51 7Ctaintt
1. A process for the production of polyurethane moldings
which have a densified surface zone and substantially closed
cells by reacting organic polyisocyanates, polyols and water,
wherein
(a) 100 parts by weight of an NCO-containing prepolymer,
having an NCO content from 3 to 6% by weight, said
polymer being prepared by reacting organic diisocyanates
and substantially linear polyester-polyols or polytetra-
methylene ether glycol and
(b) 0.5 to 1.6 parts by weight of water are mixed thoroughly
in the presence of
(c) one or more catalysts
(d) one or more surfactants, cell regulators, flameproofing
agents, stabilizers, dyes, pigments, and fillers as assistants
and/or additives,
the resulting reaction mixture is introduced into a mold of
which the inner wall has a surface temperature of from 50* C.
to 70* C, the mold is closed and the mixture is allowed to
harden whilst undergoing densification.
4,436,867
CREPING ADHESIVES CONTAINING POLY
2-ETHYL-2-OXAZOLINE
William S. Pompinn, Winnebago County, and Herbert E. Gnibe,
Ontaganie County, both of Wis., assignors to Kimberly-Clark
Corporation, Neeoah, Wis.
Filed Jon. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 389,193
I«t CL^ C08L 29/04. 39/06; B31F 1/12
VS. a 524-503 5 ctainis
1. A creping adhesive for use in a throughdrying process for
the manufacture of creped wadding, said creping adhesive
4,436,870
PRODUCnON OF MOLDING MATERIALS
CONTAINING POLYPHENYLENE ETHERS
Klaus Hinselmann, Mutterstadt; Herbert Naarmann, Watten-
heim; Adolf Echte, Ludwigshafen; Eduard HeU, Limburger-
hof; Albert Nikles, Ludwigshafen; Rudi W. Reffert Beinder-
sheim, and Jnergen Hambrecht Heidelberg, all of Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Jul. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 400,689
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 7.
1981,3131440
Int CL^ C08L 71/04
VJS. a. 525-53 4 caaims
1. A process for the production of a molding material con-
taining a high molecular weight polyphenylene ether from a
solution of polyphenylene ether in an organic solvent, together
with a homopolymer or copolymer of styrene, by freeing such
solution from the solvent, said process comprising: heating a
polyphenylene ether solution in a first stage to from 190* to
250* C. to concentrate the solution to a solids content of from
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
809
15 to 60% by weight, and thereafter, in a second stage, adding
the styrene homopolymer or copolymer to the concentrated
solution, whereupon the resulting solution of the polymer
mixture is freed of the solvent by multi-sUge evaporation
under reduced pressure.
4,436,871
IMIDE-SAN POLYMER-BLENDS
William H. Staas, ChurchyiUe, Pa., assignor to Rohm and Haas
Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
FUed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,479
Int a^ C08L 25/12. 25/14. 35/06. 51/00
U.S. a. 525—64 12 Claims
1. Composition comprising a soluble or partly soluble blend
of (A) about I to 99 parts by weight polyglutarimide and (B)
about 99 to 1 part by weight of (1) a single stage polymer
consisting essentially of a styrene-acrylonitrile copolymer, or
(2) a mixture of (1) with a multiple stage polymer having a final
stage consisting essentially of a styrene-acrylonitrile copoly-
mer.
4,436373
CONJUGATED DIENE BLOCK POLYMER AND
PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE SAME
Hiroshi Furukawa, Kobe; Yuichi Saito, Nishinomiya; Akio Imai;
Keisaku Yaraamoto, botii of IchUiara; Hiroyoshi Takao,
Chiba, and Nobuyuki Yoshida, IchUiara, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 324,545, Nov. 24, 1981, abandoned.
This application Mar. 21, 1983, Ser. No. 477,583
Claims priority, application Japan, Not. 27, 1980, 55-167836
Int a.3 C08F 297/02
VJS. a. 525—314 4 Claims
1. A linear block polymer of a conjugated diene, having a
Mooney viscosity of 20 to 120 at 121* C. and consisting essen-
tially of blocks (A) and (B) defined by the following conditions
(1) to (4);
(1) the block (A) of which the content of 1,2- and/or 3,4-
bonding is from 20 to 60% by mole,
(2) the block (B) of which the content of 1,2- and/or 3,4-
bonding is from 50 to 90% by mole,
(3) the diflerence in the 1,2- and/or 3,4-bonding content
between the block (A) and the block (B) is from 20 to 50%
by mole, and
(4) the average content of 1,2- and/or 3,4-bonding in the
block polymer consisting essentially of the blocks (A) and
(B) is from 50 to 85% by mole.
4,436,872
HIGH IMPACT MOLDING COMPOSITIONS
Paul W. Flood, Lake Hopatcong; Charles D. Mason, Chatham
Township, and Stephen R. Schulze, West Caldwell, aU of N.J.,
assignors to AUied Corporation, Morris Township, Morris
County, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 209,182, Not. 21, 1980, Pat. No.
4,335,223, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 46,536,
Jun. 7, 1979, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 914,705, Jun. 12, 1978, abandoned. This application Mar.
29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,365
Int a.3 C08L 77/00, 77/02
U.S. a. 525—179 18 Qaims
1. A melt-blended polyamide composition comprising:
from 60 to 98 percent by weight of the composition of a
polyamide selected from the group consisting of polyhex-
amethyleneadipamide, polyepsiloncaprolactam, and a
mixture of polyhexamethyleneadipamide and polyepsilon-
caprolactam,
an acid copolymer of an a-olefin having 2 to 5 carbons, with
1 to 20 mol percent of an unsaturated carboxylic acid
having 3 to 8 carbons;
an ester copolymer of an a-olefin having 2 to 5 carbons, with
1 to 20 mol percent of an alkyl ester of an unsaturated
carboxylic acid having 3 to 8 carbons and the alkyl group
having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, the weight proportions be-
tween the acid copolymer and ester copolymer being from
1 part of acid copolymer to 10 parts of ester copolymer up
to 30 parts acid copolymer to 1 part ester copolymer;
from about 0.05 to 1.0 percent by weight based on the
weight of the composition of a metal compound having
the cation of a metal selected from Group lA, IB, IIA,
JIB, IIIA, IV A, VA, VIB. VIIB, and VIIIB of the Peri-
odic Table of the Elements, and the anion of the metal
compound is selected from the group consisting of hy-
drides, formates, aceutes, alcoholates, glycolates, and
halides and wherein the notched Izod impact resistance of
the composition is higher than for a lUce composition not
containing the metal compound the composition being
blended under conditions wherein the metal compound
remains substantially unreacted with the copolymer acid.
4,436,874
ACRYLIC COPOLYMERS AND THEIR USE IN SOLID
PHASE PEPTIDE SYNTHESIS
Christian Aspisi, Boulgon; Bernard Calas, Saint-Gcly du Fesc;
Jacques Daunis, MontpeUien Michel FoUet Aramon; Robert
Jacquier, and Joseph PareUo, both of MontpelUer, aU of
France, assignors to Sodete d'Expansion Scientiflque "EX-
PANSU", Paris, France
Filed Not. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 440,440
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Not. 19, 1981,
8134861
Int a.J BOIJ 31/08; C08F 220/58. 220/60
U.S. a. 525—327.1 6 Claims
1. New amino-functionalized acrylic copolymers derived by
functionalization by ethylene diamine on Rj substituent of the
copolymers containing:
from 30% to 90%, by weight, of a monomer (matrix) corre-
sponding to an N-acryloylpolymethylenimine of formula
R
I
CH2«C
-C-N ±
with Ri = H or — CHj
Z = — (CHj),!— with ni = 4, 5 or 6 or
— (CH2)2— X— (CH2)2— with x = O or N— CH3
or a N-acryloyldialkylamide, of formula:
R:
Ri
I /
CH2"C— C— N
II \
O R2
with
R| having the same meaning as above
R2=— CHsor— C2H5
from 2% to 50%, by weight, of a monomer Ginker) corre-
sponding to an N,N'-diacryloyldiaminoalcane of formula
810
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
CH2«CH— C— NH— (CH2)(i2— NH— C— CH— CH2
I. "
o o
with 02 * I or 2
reactive polymeric component bearing at least one catalytic,
anionic group of a strongly acidic group having a pKa of less
than about 3 and a plurality of a pendant carboxyl containing
coreactive group selected from the group consisting of
— CXX)H, — CXX)R wherein R is a hydrocarbyl or inertly
substituted hydrocarbyl or — C»X wherein X is —CI or —Br,
mmA !■«*-. -ier ♦« £.<of w • u. r /* • ,• ""** coniposition having dispersed therein a coreactive compo-
andfrom2%to6S%, by weight, of a monomer (functionab- „-„♦ tuhi/.h /./%•.#.!.. T ...Li ri ♦ * ^ vvvu.pv-
zation agent) corresponding to an acryloylaminoacid or "'2 ^^?^. "*"T\' °T**'. °^ ""^"^ coreactive groups
ester, racemic of foraiula: sufficiently mert to the carboxyl containmg coreactive group
such that the composition is stable at ambient temperatures,
which latent groups are converted to groups coreactive with
CH2*C— C— N— (CH2)/i3— C— OR3 the carboxyl containing coreactive groups in the presence of
I ^ ^ U an amount of catalytic, anionic groups and at elevated temper-
atures sufficient to cure the composition.
with Ri = H or — CHj
R3 » H or — CH3
03 = 1, 2, 3 or S
or an asymetric N-acryloylaminoacide (or ester) (L series)
of the formula:
CH2*C— C— NH— CH— C— OR3
I II I II
Rl O R4 O
with Rl = H or — CH3
R3 having the same meaning as above
\
R4 = — CH3
-CH(CH3)2
-CH2{CH3)2
— CH2
o
— CH2
o
-OH
— CH2— CH2— S— CH3
-(CH2)4-NH2
or the N-acryloyl (L) proline, or its methyl ester of the
formula:
4,436,876
BLOCK COPOLYMERS OF POLYPHENYLENE OXTOES
AND STERICALLY-HINDERED AROMATIC
POLYCARBONATES
George R. Loucks, Scotia, N.Y^ aarignor to General Electric
Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
DiTiaion of Ser. No. 250,511, Apr. 2, 1981, Pat No. 4,377,662.
This appUcation Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,497
Int a.3 C08L 71/04. 69/00
U.S. a. 525—394 6 Claims
1. A process of forming a block copolymer of polyphenylene
oxide and a sterically-hindered aromatic polycarbonate com-
prising the following process sequence:
(1) Forming an agitated two-phase mixture comprising,
(i) an organic phase containing a polyphenylene oxide, a
sterically hindered aromatic dihydroxy compound, an
inert organic solvent, a tertiary amine, and, optionally, a
non sterically hindered aromatic dihydroxy compound,
(ii) an aqueous phase containing a solution of an alkali
metal hydroxide having a pH value of at least 10,
(2) Adding and reacting a carbonyl halide with both the
polyphenylene oxide and the sterically hindered aromatic
dihydroxy compound plus any, optional non-sterically
hindered aromatic dihydroxy compoimd to form a block
copolymer, the quantity of said carbonyl halide being
sufficiently large to react with all the aromatic dihydroxy
compounds, and
(3) Recovering the polyphenylene oxide and sterically hin-
dered aromatic polycarbonate block copolymer.
r^i
I
CH2«C-C-N OR3
I II
Rl O
with Rl = H or — CH3
R3 having the same meaning as above.
4,436375
CURABLE POLYMERIC COMPOSITIONS
Eugene R. Janiga, Gladwio, Mich., aaaignor to The Dow Chemi-
cal Company, Midland, Mich.
FUed Oct 25, 1979, Ser. No. 88,273
Int a.3 C08F 8/00
VS. CL 525—385 11 ri«ii—
1. A curable polymeric composition comprising a catalytic
4,436,877
THERMOPLASTIC POLYESTER COMPOSITION
Taknio Kasnga, Tokyo; KatmUko Takahaaid, F^ji, and
Tnneyaao Nakashima, Kawasaki, aU of Japan, aaaignors to
Polyplastics Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Not. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 440,132
Int CL3 C08G 63/76
VJS. CL 525—437 18 Claims
I. A thermoplastic polyester composition compriung:
(a) a thermoplastic polyester resin which contains a moiety
derived from an aromatic dibasic acid as a predominant
acidic moiety, and
(b) a hydantoin compound in an amount sufficient to sub-
stantially retard evolution of aromatic dibasic acid vapor
during melt processing of the composition.
II. A method of preventing mold deposits during a molding
operation of a thermoplastic polyester resin containing an
aromatic dibasic acid as a predominant acid moiety comprising
the addition of 0.01-10 parts by weight of a hydantoin com-
pound per 100 parts by weight of the polyester resin.
March 13. 1984
CHEMICAL
811
4,436,878
WATER-DISPERSIBLE BINDERS FOR CATIONIC
ELECTROPAINTS, AND A PROCESS FOR THEIR
PREPARATION
Wtrf^ang Batzill, Miinster, Hont Diefenbach, NottnUi; Michael
Gdst Miister, and Eberhard Schnpp, Schwetzingen, aU of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, aarignors to BASF Farbea A Fasem
AG, Hambnrg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 471,739
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 20,
1982, 3210306
Int a.3 C08L 63/00
VJS. CL 525—438 36 Claims
1. A water-dispersible binder which is intended for cationic
electropaints and is based on reaction products which are
formed from modified epoxy resins with primary and/or sec-
ondary amines and which can, if desired, also contain cross-
linking agents, pigments, flow-control agents and other cus-
tomary auxiliaries, which contains as reaction products those
which have been prepared by reacting
(A) Low molecular weight epoxy resins which contain
aromatic groups and have an epoxide equivalent weight of
less than 37S with
(B) aliphatic and/or alicyclic polyfunctional alcohols or
carboxylic acids having a molecular weight of less than
350 by addition to the epoxy group in such a way that the
reaction products contain 10-43% of aromatic groups,
calculated as phenylene group, and reacting the reaction
products of A and B with
(C) if desired up to 60% by weight, relative to total binder,
of polyfunctional alcohols, carboxylic acids and/or SH
compounds having a molecular weight of 300-5,000, the
molar ratios of (A), (B) and, if desired, (C) being chosen in
such a way that the resulting intermediate product has
terminal epoxy groups,
(D) by reacting the intermediate product by the addition of
a phenolic hydroxy! group of a monophenol and/or di-
phenol to the epoxy groups, the monophenol or diphenol
having as a substituent on the aromatic ring(s) at least one
grouping of the formula
?
(D
-CH2— NH-C-CR'«CHR2
in which R> and R^ are identical to or different from one
another and represent hydrogen or a methyl group, with
the proviso that primary and/or secondary amines have
been added, before or after the reaction of the phenolic
hydroxyl groups with the epoxy groups, to at least some
of the groupings of the formula (I).
4,436,879
COPOLYESTER-CARBONATE BLENDS
Keaaath F. Miller, Mt Venion, and Edward Belfonrc, New
Hanaoay, both of lad., aasignon to Geaeral Electric Con-
paay, Mt Vcraoa, lad.
Filed Dec. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 452,908
lat a^ O08L 69/00
UJS. a 525—439 27 daiaii
1. Thermoplastic compositions comprised of, in physical
admixture:
(i) from about 1 to about 85 weight percent of at least one
randomly branched aromatic polycarbonate resin derived
from (a) at least one dihydric phenol, (b) a carbonate
precursor, and (c) a minor amount of at least one branch-
ing agent selected from polyfunctional organic com-
pounds containing at leMt three functional groups; and
(ii) from about IS to about 99 weight percent of at least one
oopolyester-carbonate resin.
HEAT-CURABLE EPOXIDE RESIN COMPOSITIONS
Edward Ining, Bnrwell, England, aaaigaor to Ciba-Geigy Corpo-
ration, Ardsley. N.Y.
FUed Feb. 1. 1983, Ser. No. 462,820
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Feb. 11, 1982,
8204053
lat CL^ C08G 59/72, 59/68
U.S. a. 525—504 10 Claims
1. A heat-curable composition, substantially free from any
unsaturated pQl^anerisable material, comprising
(a) an epoxide resin containing more thisn one 2,3-epoxypro-
pyl group per average molecule,
(b) a latent hardener for epoxide resins that is a boron trifluo-
ride-amine complex, and
(c) an organic oxidant selected from quinones, peroxides,
and iodosoaromatic compounds.
4,436,881
POLYURETHANE BINDER COMPOSITIONS
Robert A. Laitar, Woodridge, Dl., aadgnor to Acme Reain Cor-
poration, Forest Park. lU.
FUed Jon. 29, 1983, Ser. No. 506,781
Int a.' C08G 18/06, 18/08, 18/28
U.S. a. 525—504 33 ClalBia
1. In a binder composition comprising a polyhydroxy com-
ponent, an isocyanate component having a functionality of two
or more and sufficient catalyst to catalyze subsuntially com-
pletely the reaction between the polyhydroxy component and
the isocyanate component wherein the improvement com-
prises including in the composition an additive selected from
the group consisting of dichloroarylphosphines, chlorodiaryl-
phosphines, arylphosphonic dichlorides, diary Iphosphinyl
chlorides, and mixtures thereof, said additive being present in
an amount equal to from about 0.02% to about 3% by weight
of the isocyanate component.
4,436,882
POLYMERIZATION PROCESS UTILIZING A CATALYST
PREPARED BY AGING OF A
CHROMIUM-CONTAI?aNG GEL AT HIGH PH
Donald R. Witt BartietrUle, Okla., aaaignor to PhUUpa Petro-
leum Company, BartiesriUe, Okla.
Difision of Ser. No. 340,938, Jan. 20, 1982, Pat No. 4,405^01.
This appUcation Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 423,593
Int a.3 OOeF 4/02. 4/24
U.S. a. 526—106 28 Claims
1. A polymerizatiion process comprising:
contacting at leut one mono- 1 -olefin having 2 to 8 carbon
atoms per molecule in a reaction zone under polymeriza-
tion conditions with a catalyst prepared by a process
comprising:
forming a co-gelled silica-chromium hydrogel;
aging said hydrogel for a time of at least one hour at a pH
within the range of 7 to 9;
thereafter treating said hydrogel with a volatile Uquid
organic compound to remove water and thus convert
said hydrogel to a xerogel; and
activating the thus formed xerogel; and
recovering a polymer.
18. A polymerization process comprising:
contacting at least one mono- 1 -olefin having 2 to 8 carbon
atoms per molecule in a reaction zone under polymeriza-
tion conditions with a catalyst prepared by a process
comprising:
forming a sUica, titania, chromium tergel hydrogel, said
chromium coming from a coordination chromium com-
pound having a nitrogen-containing group;
aging said hydrogel for at least one hour,
thereafter treating said hydrogel with a volatUe Uquid
organic compound to remove water and thus convert
said hydrogel to a xerogel; and
812
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
activating the thus formed xerogel; and
recovering a polymer.
4,436,883
POLYMERIZATION USING A SUPPORT FORMED BY
HEATING SIUCA GEL IN INERT ATMOSPHERE
Donald R. Witt, BartlcsriUe, Okla^ Miigiior to Phillipi Petro-
lemn Company, BartleiTille, Okla.
Division of Ser. No. 340,937, Jan. 20, 1982, Pat No. 4,392,990.
This appUcation Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 423,600
Int a.J C08F 4/02. 4/24
VS. a. 526-106 25 Claims
1. A polymerization process comprising:
contacting at least one mono-l-olefm having 2 to 8 carbon
atoms per molecule in a reaction zone under polymeriza-
tion conditions with a catalyst produced by a process
comprising:
(a) forming a silica hydrogel;
(b) aging said hydrogel for a time of at least one hour;
(c) treating the thus aged hydrogel with a volatile liquid
saturated aliphatic alcohol having a solubility in water of
less than 6 grams per 100 grams of water to convert said
hydrogel to a xerogel;
(d) subjecting the thus formed xerogel to a heat treatment in
an inert atmosphere at m elevated temperature;
(e) activating the thus heat(treated xerogel. said xerogel also
containing chromium, in an oxygen-containing ambient
for a time sufficient to activate same; and recovering a
polymer.
acrylates and methacrylates; styrene; ethylene, vinyl ace-
tate; and vinyl chloride
in an organic solvent and in the substantial absence of water
and Lewis-type bases and
in the presence of
(1) a mercaptan chain-transfer agent of the formula R-S-H
wherein R is of at least 4 carbons and is alkyl, aryl or
O
II
R3-0-C-(CH2),-.
R3 being alkyl or aryl and n being an integer from 0 to 8,
and
(2) an organic polymerization initiator,
the mole ratio chain-transfer agent/initiator being from
1/10 to 10/1 and the temperature being sufficient to
decompose the initiator but insufficient to favor the
production of a thiourethane.
4,436384
PROCESS FOR POLYMERIZING CONJUGATE
DIOLEFINS, AND MEANS SUTTABLE FOR THIS
PURPOSE
Antonio Carbonaro, Milan, and Luciano Ripani, S. Donato
Milanese, both of Italy, assignors to Enoxy Chimica, S.P.A..
Sassari, Italy
FUed Apr. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 484,955
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Apr. 15, 1982, 20747 A/82
Int a.J C08F 4/52
UA a 526-111 14 Claims
1. A catalytic system for polymerising conjugate diolefms,
prepared from:
(a) at least one of the elements pertaining to Group III B of
the periodic system;
(b) at least one aluminium compound of formula AIR2R'
where R is alkyl, cycloalkyl or alkylaryl, and R' is R or H;
(c) at least one organic halogen derivative or a halide of an
element able to exist in at least two valency states, the
halide corresponding to a state higher than the minimum;
(d) at least one compound containing one or more salifiable
hydroxyl groups such as water, carboxylic alcohols or
carboxyUc acids.
4,436,886
2.PHENYLBANZOTHIAZOLE POLYMERS
Tsu-Tzu Tsal, Dayton, and Fred E. Arnold, Centerrille, botii of
Ohio, anignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 356,577, Mar. 9, 1982,
abandoned. This appUcation Feb. 2, 1983, Ser. No. 463,192
Int a.3 C08F 26/06. 28/06
U.S. a. 526-257 10 Claims
1. A 2-phenylbenzothiazole resin formed by the thermal,
self-polymerization of a 2-phenylbenzothiazole monomer hav-
ing at least one terminal acetylene group of the formula
wherein R^ and R^are — H or — C—CH, wherein at least one
of Ra or R* is — C»CH.
4 436 885
PREPARATION OF ISOCTANATE-FUNCnONAL
POLYMERS CONTAINING A TERMINAL
MONOSULFIDE GROUP
Danryl W. Brixins, Grosse Dc, Mich., and John A. Slnuns,
WUmington, Del., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and
Company, WUmington, Del.
Division of Ser. No. 195,081, Oct 8, 1980, Pat No. 4,351,755,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 53,301, Jon. 29, 1979,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 819,121, Jnl. 26, 1977,
abandoned. This appUcation Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,114
Int a.3 C08F 2/06. 2/38
UA a. 526—214 28 daims
1. The process of preparing a polymer of a number average
molecular weight of 500-10,000 which comprises reacting
at least one isocyanatoalkyl acrylate or methacrylate alone
or with
at least one comonomer of the group consisting of alkyl
4,436,887
N- VINYL LACTAM BASED BIOMEDICAL DEVICES
Richard C. Chromecek, Macedon; Gary D. Friends, Ontario;
Lawrence Y. Wissman, and Raymond A. Yourd, III, both of
Rochester, aU of N.Y., assignors to Bausch A Lomb Incorpo-
rated, Rochester, N.Y.
FUed Not. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,355
Int a.3 C08F 226/06. 226/08; G03B 21/46
VS. a. 526-263 27 Claims
1. As a new article of manufacture, a contact lens formed
from a hydrophilic polymer formed by polymerizing (a) (1)
one or more N-vinyl lactams and/or heterocyclic N-vinyl
monomers, said N-vinyl lactams being selected from the group
consisting of N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidinone, N-(l -methyl) vinyl pyr-
rolidinone, N-vinyl-2-piperidone and N-vinyl-2-caprolactam
which may be substituted in the lactam ring by one or more
lower alkyl groups, said heterocyclic N-vinyl monomers being
selected from the group consisting of N-vinyl imidazole, N-
vinyl succinimide, N-vinyl diglycolylimide, N-vinyl glutari-
mide, N-vinyl-3-morpholinone and N-vinyl-5-methyl-3-mor-
pholinone, and (2) from zero to 50 weight percent of the total
monomer present is at least one hydrophobic monomer or
hydrophilic monomer other than N-vinyl lactam and/or heter-
ocyclic N-vinyl monomer, said hydrophobic monomer(8)
being selected from the group consisting of acrylates, methac-
rylates, itaconates, fumarates, maleates and crotonates wherein
the esterified group has from 1 to 30 carbon atoms, said hydro-
phiUc monomer(s) being selected from the group consisting of
hydroxyesters, free acids, amides and amines of acrylates.
March 13. 1984
CHEMICAL
813
methacrylates and itaconates, and (b) a resonance free di(al-
kene tertiary amine) cyclic compound crosslinking agent alone
or in admixture with a crosslinking agent of another chemical
structure in which case said cyclic compound is at least 50
mole percent of said mixture, said cyclic compound having the
formula CH2:CG(CH2)xN-J~N(CH2)j,CH:CH2 wherein x is
0 or 1, G is hydrogen or methyl and J is the balance of struc-
ture forming cyclic dialkene urea, said agent being present in
an amount from 0.01 to 10 weight percent of the total mono-
mer of (A) (1) and (A) (2) present to form a crosslinked 3-
dimensional polymeric network, said polymer having an oxy-
gen permeability of at least 24x10-"
cm2cm/(8ec.cm2mmHg) and a tear initiation strength of at
least 3 g/mm of thickness.
cally effective amount of nickel and an alkyl or acyl halide
promoter therefor, at a temperature of at least 120* C. and
under and total pressure of less than 200 bars, said carbonyla-
tion being carried out in the presence of at least one vanadium
compound in which the vanadium is in an oxidation sute of 4
or 5, and in an initial carboxylic acid reaction medium having
the formula R2— GOGH, wherein R2 is defined as was Ri
above, and further wherein R' and R2 may be the same or
different.
4436 888
METHOD FOR MAKING BALANCED LOW SHRINK
TENSION POLYOLEnN HLM
Kerry J. Coppic, Webster, Tex., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
FUed Oct. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 432,836
Int a.' C08F 110/02; B29C 17/02
VS. a. 526—348.1 7 cialoM
1. A method for making a biaxially oriented polyolefin film
with substantially balanced shrinkage of at least 7 percent at
11 0* C. and a substantially balanced shrink force of not more
than 2.2 MPa as measured at 1 10* C, said method comprising
the sequential steps of:
(a) heating a biaxially oriented polyolefin heat-shrinkable
film to a temperature of from 124'- 138* C,
(b) stretching the heated film resulting from step (a) in the
longitudinal direction by a factor from l.OS to 1.20,
(c) cooling the stretched film resulting from step (b) to a
temperature of not greater than 55* C. whUe maintaining
the degree of stretch created in step (b),
(d) heating the cooled film resulting from step (c) to a tem-
perature of from 124'-138' C,
(e) relaxing the heated film resulting from step (d) in the
longitudinal direction by a factor of from 0.83 to 0.95, and
(0 cooling the relaxed film resulting from step (e) to a tem-
perature of not greater than 55* C. while maintaining the
degree of relaxation created in step (e).
7. The product produced by the process of claim 1.
4.436389
PREPARATION OF CARBOXYUC ACIDS BY
CARBONYLATION OF ALCOHOLS
Jean Gauthier-Lafaye, Lyons, and Robert Perron, Charly, both
of F^rancc, assignors to Rhone-Poulenc Industries, Paris,
Fhuce
FUed May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260,810
Clainu priority, appUcation Fnuwc May 6, 1980, 80 10540
Int a.J C07C 51/12. 53/08. 53/134. 57/30. 57/32
VS. a. 562—519 21 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a carboxylic acid having
the structural formula R'COOH, wherein R> is a linear,
branched or cyclic chain alkyl radical of from 1 to 6 carbon
atoms or a phenyl-CnHid-radical wherein 1 S n S 6, comprising
carbonylating an alcohol having the formula R'— OH with
carbon monoxide in liquid phase, in the presence of a catalyti-
4,436,890
AROMATIC UREA-BASED CURING AGENT SYSTEM
FOR EPOXY RESIN COATING COMPOSITIONS
Marvin L. Kauftnaa, Bridgewater, N J., assignor to MobU OU
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 454,787
Int a.J C08G 59/44. 59/68
VS. a. 528-93 25 Gains
1. A suble, heat curable coating composition consisting
essentially of:
(a) a polyepoxide having a plurality of 1,2-epoxy groups and
an epoxy equivalency greater than 1.0;
(b) an aromatic urea containing the moiety
if
Ar— NH— C— N—
wherein Ar is substituted or unsubstituted, mononuclear or
polynuclear aromatic, said aromatic urea being present in
amounts sufficient to provide an effective amount of a coreac-
tive amine curing agent for said polyepoxide upon reaction of
said aromatic urea with a portion of said polyepoxide when
said composition is maintained under curing conditions which
include a temperature of at least about 70* C, and
(c) a condensation-type catalyst present in an amount effec-
tive to promote the reaction of said aromatic urea with a
portion of said polyepoxide at a temperature of at least
about 70* C;
said composition being substantially free of coreactive amounts
of amine and polycarboxylic acid anhydride curing agenu at
temperatures below about 70* C.
4,436,891
MODinED POLYOXYALKYLENEPOLYAMINE
CURING AGENTS FOR EPOXY RESINS
ArUUko Umeda, and YosUyukl Iwasc, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Texaeo Inc., White Plaliis, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,059
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 14, 1981, 86-144023
Int a.> C08G 59/50
VS. a. 528—111 10 CUOms
1. A curing agent for vicinal epoxy resins having an average
of at least 1.8 reactive 1,2-epoxy groups per molecule compris-
ing the reaction product of an alkyleneimine of the formula:
R— CH2 CHj
\ /
N
k
wherein R is hydrogen or Ci-Cs alkyl with a polyoxyalk-
ylenepolyamine, wherein the curing agent is defined by the
formulas:
H2N-R'-NHCHCH2NH2
814
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
•continued
H2NCH3CH(HNCH2CH)r-NH~R'-HN(CHCH2NH)«CHCH2NH2
I
R
I
R
I
R
H2NCH2CH ~ R' ~ N(CHCH2NH2)2
R R
and
(H2NCH2CH)2— N ~ R' ~ N(CHCH2NH2)2
R
k
wherein R' is polyoxyalkylene, a+b ranges from 1 to 20 and R
is hydrogen or C1-C5 alkyl.
4,436393
COPOLYESTER OF POLYETHYLENE
TEREPHTHALATE AND SULFONYL DIPHENOL
MiehMl S. Choiod, Corawella Heighti, Pa^ assignor to Roka
and Haas Coapaay, Philadelphia, Pa.
FUed Oct 25, 1962, Scr. No. 436,228
lit CLi O06G 63/J8, 63/68
US. a. 528—173 18 Claims
1. A copolyester of polyethylene terephthalate capable of
being molded into clear articles comprising from about 2 to
about 20 mole percent sulfonyl diphenol, isomers and mixtures
thereof, and from about 98 to about 80 mole percent ethylene
terephthalate prepolymer.
4,436,892
IMIDAZOLIDES
Hclnot 2SoBdlcr, Bottmingen; Friedricfa Lohse, Oberwll, and
Roland Moser, Basel, all of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-
Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 447,344
aaims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Dec. 15, 1981,
7992/81
Int a.J C08G 59/54. 59/44
U.S. CL 528—117 10 Claims
1. An imidazolide of the formula I
(I)
wherein
Rl is hydrogen, Ci-Ci2-alkyl or phenyl, and R2 is hydrogen,
or
R] is ethyl, and R2 is methyl, or
Rl is hydrogen, and R2 is phenyl or methyl, and
R3 is a group of any one of the formulae II- VI
00
ail)
N02
N02
(IV)
CV)
(VI)
wherein Xi is hydrogen, chlorine or NO2. and X2 is hy-
drogen or NO2.
8. A curable mixture containing an imidazolide of the for-
mula I according to claim 1, which mixture contains also a
polyepoxide compound having on average more than one
epoxide group in the molecule.
4,436,894
NOVEL WHOLLY AROMATIC COPOLYESTER,
PROCESS FOR PRODUCnON THEREOF, AND VllM
MELT-SHAPED THEREFROM
Takaaori Urasaki, Hino; YasiUi Hirabayashi, Hachioji; Tugusi
Yoshida, and Hiroo Inata, both of Hino, aU of Japan, assign-
ors to TeUin Limited, Osaka, Japan
FUed JuL 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,855
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, JnL 31, 1980, 55-104361;
Oct 23, 1980, 55-147548; Oct 24, 1960, 55-148143
Int a.3 C08G 63/18. 63/60
U.S. a. 528—176 23 Claims
1. A wholly aromatic copolyester composed mainly of iso-
phthalic acid units and hydroquinone units, the total propor-
tion of said isophthalic acid units and hydroquinone units being
at least about 80 mole% based on the entire units, said wholly
aromatic copolyester having a terminal carboxyl group con-
centration, measured by dissolving the whoUy aromatic co-
polyester in a mixed solvent of phenol and tetrachloroethane in
a weight ratio of 4:6 and titrating the resulting solution with a
benzyl alcohol solution of sodium hydroxide using bromo-
cresol green as an indicator, of not more than about 90 eq/10^
g and a reduced viscosity, determined at 33* C. in a mixed
solvent of phenol and tetrachloroethane in a weight ratio of 4:6
in a concentration of 1.2 g/dl of at least about 0.6 and being
substantially linear and melt-shapable and substantially free
from a halogen atom bonded to the molecular chain.
4,436398
POLYESTER CONTAINERS HAVING IMPROVED GAS
BARRIER PROPERTIES
Robert B. Barbae, and Boras Daris, both of Kingsport Temu,
aasipiors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
FUed Apr. 13, 1983, Ser. No. 484^01
Int CL^ CD8G 63/44. 63/68
U.S. CL 528—288 11 Claim
1. A container formed from a polyester resin comprising the
reaction product of
(A) a diol containing up to about 8 carbon atoms, and
(B) a diacid component comprising
(i) terephthalic acid and
(ii) a second diacid selected from iminodiacetic acid, ox-
ydiacetic acid, thiodiacetic acid, and mixtures thereof,
wherein said second diacid is present in a concentration
of about 1 to SO mole percent, based upon the total
amount of diacid, and wherein said polyester resin has
an inherent viscosity of about O.S to 1.3.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
81S
4,436396
POLYESTER COPOLYMER
Ichiro Okamoto, and Yuao Toga, both of Himdi, Japan, — *gp«-
ors to Daieel Cheodcal ladwtriea, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Sap. 14, 1982, Sar. No. 418,120
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sap. 29, 1981, S6.184r5;
Sep. 29, 1981, 56-154276; Oct 8, 1981, 56-161509; Oct 8, 1981,
56-161510
Int a' O08G 63/66
MS. a 156-332 4 Oaiais
1. A polyester copolymer obtained by copolymerizing
(A) terephthalic acid or a mixture of not less than 50 mol %
of terephthalic acid and at least one kind of dicarboxylic
acid selected from aromatic dicarboxylic acids excluding
terephthalic acid and aliphatic dicarboxylic acids, said
terephthalic acid and dicarboxylic acid optionally forming
an ester-forming derivative thereof,
(B) a low-molecular weight diol composed of 1 to 50 mol %
of 2-methyl-1.3-propanediol and 99 to 50 mol % of 1,6-
hexanediol, and
(C) at least one kind of high-molecular weight diol (in such
an amount that the high-molecular weight diol component
in the copolymer is 0 to 60 wt %) selected from polyalkyl-
ene ether glycol and polycaprolactone glycol.
4. A method of bonding an article to another article by using
the polyester copolymer as defined in any of claims 1, 2 and 3,
as an adhesive.
4,436399
LAYERED ORGANOPHOSPHORUS INORGANIC
POLYMERS
Patar M. DiGiacoiM, Mission Vl^ and Martia B. Dlaaa,
Santa Ana, both of CaUf., aasigDors to Oeddaatal Baaaarch
Corporation, Irrlna, CaUf .
Continaation-in-part of Sar. No. 945371, Sap. 26, 1978, Pat No.
4332,146. This appUcation JnL 24. 1979, Sar. No. 60,076
The portion of the term of this patent sabaaquant to Mar. 17,
1998, has baaa disclaiaad.
Int a.J 0D8G 79/04. 79/14
MS. a 528-398 4 ri.i—
1. A procoM for the production of phosphorus-containing
organo substituted inorganic polymen which comprises react-
ing in a liquid medium at leut one organophosphorous or
organophosphoric acid compound of the formula:
I(H0)20P],^ or I(H0)20P0]^
wherein n is 1 or 2 and R is an organo group covalently cou-
pled to phosphorus and wherein when n is 2, R contains at least
two carbon atoms and is directly or indirectly coupled to the
phosphorus atoms through different carbon atoms whereby
the two phosphorus atoms are separated by at least two carbon
atoms, with at leut one tetravalent metal ion to precipitate,
from the liquid medium, a solid inorganic polymer in which the
molar ratio of phosphorus to tetravalent metal is about 2 to 1
and in which the organo group is covalently bonded to phos-
phorus and phosphorus is linked to the tetrsvalent metal
through oxygen.
4,436,897
PREPARATION OF POLYCAPROLACTAM WITH
AQUEOUS EXTRACT CONTAINING CAPROLACTAM
AND CAPROLACTAM OUGOMERS
Hugo StreUcr, Friukanthal; Werner Hocrauf, Ludwigshafen,
and Friedrich UriNuek, Schifferstadt aU of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to BASF AktiengsseUschaft, Fad. Rap. of
Germany
FUed Aug. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 410381
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 2,
1981,3134717
Int a.3 C08G 69/16
VS. a. 528—323 2 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of fiber-forming polycapro-
lactam comprising polymerizing s composition comprising
c-caprolactam and an aqueous extract containing caprolactam
and caprolactam oligomers, which extract has been obtained
by extracting polycaprolactam with water, wherein such aque-
ous extract contains from 0.1 to 5.0% by weight of oligomers
of caprolactam, bated on teh monomeric caprolactam con-
tained in the aqueous extract.
4336300
PROCESS FOR DEACTIVATING POLYMERIZAHON
CATALYST
KasahUio Matsuzaki; TosUyuki Iwaisako, and Juaso
Masamoto, aU of KnrashUd, Japan, assignors to Asahi Kasel
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
FUed Mar. 28. 1983, Sar. No. 479385
Claims priority, appUcatioa Japan, Mar. 29. 1982. 57-48990
Int a.) C08G 2/28
U3. a. 528—490 u Claims
1. A procett for deactivating a cationic polymerization
catalyst for the production of an oxymethylene copolymer
from trioxane and a cyclic ether and/or a cyclic formal in the
presence of the cationic polymerization catalyst which com-
prises contacting a deactivating agent in the sute of gas phase
with the copolymer produced at a temperature not causing
degradation of the copolymer produced.
4336398
PREPARATION OF SPINNABLE POLYAMIDE FROM
DINTTRILE. DIAMINE, HiO WTTH P CONTAINING
CATALYST
Hansdieter Hoflmann, Karbea; Haas-Jochen Rothe, Malntal;
Georg Sknpin, BnichkobaL ud Konrad Wolff, Ftttkftart am
Main, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aasignors to Dn?y McKae
Aktiwigsaellschaft, BorsiflBUe, Fed. R^. of Germany
ContlnBation-in-part of Ser. No. 370371, Apr. 20, 1982,
aboadoaed, which is a continnation-la>part of Sar. No. 264382,
May 18, 1981, abandoned. This appUcation May 10, 1982, Ser.
No. 375371
Int a.^ O08G 69/00
U.S. a 528—336 28 fa««"i>
1. A method for the production of a spinnable polyamide
comprising contacting a dinitrile, an aUphatic diamine, excoM
water and a catalytic amount of an oxygen containing phos-
phorous compound in a reaction vessel.
4336301
HYDROCARBON WASH UQUID FOR CATALYST
SEPARATION
Fred T. Sherk, BartlasriUe, Okla., assivMr to PhttUps Petro-
lanm Company, Bartlasfttia, Okla.
FUad Feb. 22, 1982, Sar. No. 350381
Int a.i O08F 6/10. 6/06
\5S. a 528-498 8
1. In a continuous propylene mass polymerization wherein
816
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
liquid propylene is contacted in a polymerization zone with a
suitable catalyst in the presence of propane under conditions so
as to form solid polymer, effluent from said polymerization
zone comprising propylene and propane is contacted in a wash
column with a wash liquid to separate catalyst residues there-
from, used wash liquid from the wash column is subjected to
frationation to recover propylene therefrom, washed polymer
is recovered from the wash column and passed to a flashing
zone wherein liquid is flashed from the solid polymer, the
improvement comprising passing overhead vapors comprising
propylene and propane from the flash zone to a condensing
zone wherein said vapors are condensed to a liquid having
substantially the same hydrocarbon composition as the over-
head vapors from the flash zone and passing at least a portion
of the liquid obtained from the condensing zone to the wash
zone where said liquid serves as at least a portion of the wash
liquid supply and a fractionation sidestream comprising propy-
lene and propane is also employed as wash liquid.
4,436,903
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF 7
/3-SUBS'lirUTEl>^UNSUBSTITUTED-3-CEPHEM-4-
CARBOXYUC ACID COMPOUNDS
GottMed Scdelmeicr, Ehrenldrchen-Noraingen, Fed. Rep. of
Gemumy, and Riccardo Scartezzini, Baael, Switzerland, as-
rignon to Oba-Gcigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
FUed Dec 11, 1981, Set. No. 329,916
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Dec. 22, 1980,
9468/80
lat a.J O07D 501/04
MS. a. 544-016 19 ciaima
1. A process for the production of a 7/3-amino-3-cephem-4-
carboxylic acid compound of the formula
4,436,902
REMOVAL OF CONTAMINANTS IN UQUID
PURinCATION
William E. Wood, and Franklin T. Barber, both of BartlesriUe,
OUa., aaaignors to Phillips Petroleum Company, Bartlesrille,
Okla.
FUed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,379
Int. a.3 C08F 6/08
UA a. 528—501 12 Claims
1. A process for purifying a liquid to be purified which
contains contaminants, comprising:
(a) passing a feedstream comprising the liquid to be purified
and a contaminant to a first fractionating column,
(b) separating in said first fractionating column said feed-
stream into a first overhead fraction, a side draw fraction,
and a first bottom fraction,
(c) removing from said first fractionating column, said first
overhead fraction comprising a contaminant having a
volatility greater than that of the liquid to be purified,
(d) feeding to a second fractionating column, said first bot-
tom fraction of the first fractionating column, said first
bottom fraction comprising a contaminant having a vola-
tiUty less than or equal to the volatility of the liquid to be
purified and comprising a portion of the liquid to be puri-
fied,
(e) separating in said second fractionating column said first
bottom fraction of the first fractionating column into a
second overhead fraction and a second bottom fraction
(0 removing from the process, said second bottom fraction
of the second fractionating column comprising substan-
tially a contaminant,
(g) removing from said second fractionating column, said
second overhead fraction comprising the liquid to be
purified in a vapor phase,
(h) feeding said second overhead stream into the fu^t frac-
tionating column to provide a portion of the heat required
in said first fractionating column,
(i) removing from the fu^t fractionating column, at a point
above where said second overhead stream is fed into the
first fractionating column, said side stream fraction of the
first fractionating column comprising the liquid purified of
contaminant,
0) cooling said side draw fraction which has been removed
from the first fractionating column,
(k) passing a portion of the cooled side draw fraction to the
second fractionating column as a reflux-type stream,
(1) recovering a portion of the cooled side draw fraction as
purified liquid product.
(D
O—C— R2
wherein Ri«is hydrogen, an acyl group of the formula:
R» O (lA)
R«— C— C— ,
K
wherein (1) R^ is phenyl, hydroxyphenyl, lower alkylsul
fonylaminophenyl, aminomethylphenyl, 2- or 3-thienyl, amino
methylthienyl, furyl, aminomethylfuryl, cyclohexadienyl
aminomethyl-l,4-cyclohexadienyl, cyclohexenyl, aminometh
yl-1-cyclohexenyl, aminothiazolyl, lower alkylaminothiazolyl.
aminothiadiazolyl, or lower alkylaminothiadiazolyl, in which
the hydroxy and amino groups are in the free form or are
protected by conventional hydroxy- and amino protecting
groups, Kb is hydrogen, and R^ is hydrogen, amino or amino
protected by a conventional amino protecting group, hydroxy,
hydroxy protected by a conventional hydroxy protecting
group, carboxy, lower alkoxycarbonyl, or sulfo, or wherein (2)
Ra is 3-amino-3-carboxypropyl or 3-amino-3-carboxypropyl in
which amino and carboxy are protected by conventional
amino and carboxy protecting groups, cyano, 1-tetrazolyl,
phenoxy, or 4.pyridylthio, and R* and Re are hydrogen, or
wherein (3) Ra is phenyl, thienyl, 2-furyl, 2-amino-4-thiazolyl,
2-lower alkylamino-4-thiazolyl, 5-amino-l,2,4-thiadiazolyl or
S-lower alkylamino-l,2,4-thiadiazolyl wherein amino can be
protected by a conventional amino protecting group, and R*
and Re together are syn-lower alkoximino, or is an amino
protective group Ri-^ selected from the group consisting of
trityl, Mower alkoxycarbonyl- l-propen-2-yl, 2-nitrophe-
nylthio, pentachlorophenylthio, tritylthio, tri-lower alkylsilyl,
halo-lower alkoxy-lower alkylsilyl and tri-lower alkylsilyl,
Ri* is hydrogen, or Ri« and Ri* together ar a bivalent amino
protecting group selected from the group consisting of succi-
nyl, phthaloyl and 4,4-dimethyI-2-phenyl-l-oxo-3-aza-l,4-
butylene, and R2 is hydroxy, or a group which, together with
the carbonyl grouping — C(=0)— forms a conventionally
protected carboxy group, which comprises reacting a com-
pound of the formula
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
817
'f
ai)
y"\.
, O-C-Rj
wherein n is 0 or 1, Rj", Ri*and R2 are as defined for formula
I, and the group of the formula — N(R3<0 (R3*) is a secondary
amino group wherein one of the groups Rs" and R3* represente
hydrogen and the other lower alkyl, lower alkyl substituted by
lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, cycloalkyl, phenyl or thienyl,
cycloalkyl, or cycloalkyl substituted by lower alkoxy or lower
alkylthio, or — NCRa") (R3*) represents a tertiary amino group
wherein R3" and R3* are the same or different and represent
lower alkyl, lower alkyl substituted by lower alkoxy, lower
alkylthio, cycloalkyl, phenyl or thienyl, cycloalkyl or cycloal-
kyl substituted by lower alkoxy or lower alkylthio or Rs^and
R3* can be linked with a carbon-carbon bond or with an oxy-
gen or sulfur atom, — NH— , or a lower alkylated nitrogen
atom under acid conditions with a complex borohydride.
N
II
N
CH2— CH2— NHCOCH3
n N N N N-
N
I
GH3
C"3 ^N ^ ^oH
4,436,904
CEPHALOSPORINS
Shigeo Shimizu; Hiroyuki Takano, both of YuAitsu; Sboji Yo-
■himura, Inima, and KiiUi Takada, Tokyo, all of Japan, •■•
signon to Kanto Ishi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337,380
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 14, 1981, 56-20347:
Feb. 14, 1981, 56-20348
Int. a.J C07D 501/56
U.S. a. 544—27 11 Claims
1. A novel cephalosporin represented by the following for-
mula:
i
^
N N
CH3
-S-H^ JLnHCOCHs. -S-l!^ J-N tnd
s s \
CH3
R2-Ls T
1
N— COhfH— CH—
I
B
0)
s
— CONH I 1^ "S
in which R3 is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
R' is hydrogen, alkali metal, an organic amine or an ester
moiety, Rj and R2 are the same or different and are hydrogen
or lower alkyl and B stands for a 1,4-cyclohexadienyl group, a
group
COOR'
wherein R is hydrogen, acyloxy of formula R4COO— , in
which R4 is alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms; carbamoyloxy, a
pyridinium radical of formula
.or-
m which R^ is hydrogen, alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
carboxy, lower alkoxy. carbamoyl, halogen or sulfamoyl or a
group — S— Het in which Het is
in which Y is hydrogen, —OH or
— O— C— Rs
I
in which Rs is alkyl having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or alkoxy
having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, Z is hydrogen or halogen and p is
an integer of 1 or 2, a furan group or a thiophene group.
818
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
4,436,909
PREPARATION OF
4'METHYI^5-OXO-3.THIOXO-TETRAHYDRO-lA4,-
aiMHVTRIAZINES
G«rh«d BoMC Wa9pcrtal.Elbcrfcld, Fed. Rcy. of Gcnuay,
Mriffor to Bayer AMcageMllsehaft, LerflrkHeii, Fed. Rep.
of GcnMoy
Filed Aog. 9, 19e2, Ser. No. 40M79
Oaiw priority, eppUattioB Fed. Rep. of Genuoy, Aeg. 29,
1981, 3134230
Irt. a» C07D 253/06
MS. CL 541—182 19 n«i..«
1. A procew for the production of a 4>methyl-S-oxo-3-thioX'
o-tetrahydro-l,2,4-<2H. 4H>truzine of the two Uutomeric
forms
wherein R is an optionally substituted aliphatic radical hav-
ing up to 12 carbons atoms, an optionally sul»tituted
cycloalkyl radical having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, an option-
ally substituted phenyl or naphthyl radical or an option-
ally substituted heterocyclic radical,
comprising in a first step reacting an acyl cyanide of the for-
mula
R-CO-CN
with a carboxylic acid anhydride of the formula
R'— CO— O-CO— R'
in which R' is an optionally substituted aliphatic radical
having up to 8 carbon atoms or an optionally substituted
phenyl radical,
in the presence of a strong acid at a temperature between about
— SO* and 1 SO* C, and in a second step contacting the reaction
mixture thus obtained directly with 4-methyltMosemicarba-
zide.
4,436,906
ANTHRAQUINONE DYES FOR
CELLULOSE-CONTAINING FIBERS AND PROCESS FOR
PRODUCING THE SAME
ToiUo Niwm aad Toshio Hihara, both of Kanaviwa, Japan,
aMi^ors to MltiBbishi Chemical ladoitrice Ltd^ Tokyo,
Japan
Filed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,320
daima priority, appUeatioa Japan, May 20, 1981, 56-7S974;
JoL 20, 1981, 56-113258; JoL 24, 1981, 56-116015; Jnl. 27, 1981,
56-117472
lat a» O07D 251/42
MS. CL 544—187 2 Claims
1. An anthraquinone dye for cellulose-containing fibers
having the formula (I):
R' O NHX' CD
R* . Q R'
wherein R' is — NH2 or a hydroxy! group; R^ is a hydrogen
atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a cyano group or
— SO2R (wherein R is a lower alkyl group or a phenyl group>,
R3 and R^ are each a hydrogen atom, — NH2, a hydroxy!
group, a nitro group, a chlorine atom or a bromine atom; Y is
either — O— or — S— ; one of X' and X^ is a hydrogen atom
and the other is
N
R» Z
<^
-{
N
NRV
(wherein Z is either — O— or — S— ; R' is a lower alkyl group,
a lower alkoxy group or a hydrogen atom; R^ and R^ are each
a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, an alkenyl group, a cyclo-
hexyl group, an aryl group or an aralkyl group which may be
substituted by a cyano group, a hydroxy! group, a lower alk-
oxy group or a dialkylamino group, or NR*R' represents a S-
or 6-membered nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring formed
by the bonding of R* and R' such that when R* and R"' are
taken together to form a heterocyclic ring, the nitrogen of the
heterocyclic ring to which R^ or R^ are bonded is the nitrogen
N of NR*R'; the sum of the carbon atoms of R' and R' is not
more than 18); and n is 0 or 1, but n is 0 when X^ is a hydrogen
atom.
4,436,907
BENZYL-PYRIMIDINYLALKYL-ETHERS AS PLANT
GROWTH REGULATORS AND FUNGICIDES, AND
CORRESPONDING PYRIMIDINYL-CARBINOLS
Graham Holmwood, Wappertal; Klaus Llimen, Berg.-Gladbach,
and Panl-Emst Fh>hbtfger, Lererknsen, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Le?Mlnisea,
Fed. Rep. of Geraumy
Filed Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 344,261
OalBM priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 14,
1981, 3105374
lot CL^ C07D 239/26
U.S. a 544—335 8 Claims
1. A benzyl-pyrimidinylalkyl-ether of the formula
x'
X2
X'
CH2— O— CH— R
rS
N N
in which
R is alky! having 1 to 8 carbon atoms; cycloalkyl which has
3 to 7 carbon atoms and which is optionally substituted by
alky! having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; or phenyl which is
optionally substituted by halogen, alkyl having 1 to 4
carbon atoms, alkoxy having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and/or
halogenoalky! having 1 to 2 carbon atoms and 1 to S
halogen atoms,
Xl is hydrogen, halogen, alky! having 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
cycloalkyl having 3 to 7 carbon atoms, alkoxy having 1 to
4 carbon atoms, alkyltliio having 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
halogenoalky! having 1 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 to S
halogen atoms, halogenoalkoxy having 1 to 4 carbon
atoms and 1 to S halogen atoms, halogenoalkylthio liaving
1 to 4 carbon atoms and 1 to S halogen atoms, phenyl
which is optionally substituted by halogen and/or by alkyl
having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, phraoxy which is optionally
March 13. 1984
CHEMICAL
819
substituted by halogen and/or by alkyl having 1 to 4
carbon atoms, phenylalkyl which has 1 to 4 carbon atoms
in the alkyl part and which is optionally substituted in the
phenyl part by halogen and/or by alkyl having 1 to 4
carbon atoms, or phenylalkoxy which has 1 to 4 carbon
atoms in the alkoxy part and which is optionally substi-
tuted in the phenyl part by halogen and/or by alkyl hav-
ing 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and
X2 and X^ each independently is hydrogen, halogen, alkyl
having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl having 3 to 7
carbon atoms, alkoxy having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkyl-
thio having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or halogenoalkyl, haloge-
noalkoxy or halogenoalkylthio each having 1 to 4 carbon
atoms and 1 to S halogen atoms,
or an acid addition salt or metal salt complex thereof.
4,436,908
HETEROSULFONAMIDES
I^rka Jodc, Hanover. Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Jo-
haaa A. Wuelfing, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Coatiauation of Ser. No. 148,139. May 9. 1980, abaadoned. This
appUeatioa Mar. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 357,469
Claims priority, appUeatioa United Kingdom, May 16, 1979,
7917035
Int a.' O07D 211/24, 207/09
U.S. a. 546-206 5 Claims
1. A compound of the formula (I) having anti-arrythmic
activity of low acute toxicity:
4,436,910
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF AQUEOUS
SOLUTIONS OF SODIUM SALTS OF a-AMINO
CARBOXYUC AODS
Axel Ueeauua, Haaaa; Berad i-«hiMii, Freiterieht, and Jiir-
sea Martens, Alxeaaa, aU of Fed. Rep. of Gerauay, aaai«Mn
to Degassa Aktiengssellschaft, FraakAirt am Mala, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Piled Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347.477
Oalms priority. appUeatioa Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 12.
1981.3105008 7. •*.
lat a.» C07D 211/60. 207/16
MS. a. 546-245 9 ciaUas
1. A process for the production of an aqueous solution of the
sodium salt of an a-aminocarboxylic acid practically free from
foreign salu comprising uponifying under alkaline conditions
the corresponding hydantoin at a temperature between 1 10*
and 180* C. employing based on the hydantoin 1 equivalent of
sodium hydroxide and 2 equivalenU of calcium oxide or hy-
droxide per hydantoin group, after the end of the uponiflca-
tion separating off the precipitated calcium carbonate and
concentrating the remaining aqueous sodium salt solution to
drive off the ammonia contained therein with the proviso that
there is additionally employed 1 equivalent of sodium hydrox-
ide for any carboxyl or carbamide group present in the hydan-
toin, the materials employed consisting essentially of the hy-
dantoin, sodium hydroxide, calcium oxide or hydroxide and
water.
RaN-(CH2)^NH-S02R'
a)
characterized in that NRj represenu a piperidyl, pyrrolidyl, or
N-methylpiperazyl group any of Which may be substituted by
one or two methyl groups; R> is a 1 -naphthyl group optionally
substituted by one or more moieties selected from fluorine,
chlorine, bromine, methoxyl, ethoxyl, acetoxyl, nitro, cyano,
amino optionally substituted by one or two Cm alkyl groups,
methyl, ethyl, carboxyl, methoxycarbonyl, ethoxycarbonyl,
acetamino or acetamido or carboxamido; and n is 2 or 3 or an
acid addition salt with a pharmaceutically acceptable organic
or inorganic acid, a pharmaceutically acceptable quaternary
ammonium salt, a pharmaceutically acceptable internal salt or
a salt of a pharmaceuticaUy acceptable metal or optionally
substituted ammonium.
4.436.911
HETEROCYCUC AMIDINOUREAS
WUUam L. Studt, HarleysriUe; Harry K. Zimmermaa, Quaker-
town, aad George H. Douglas, MalTera, aU of Pa., aarigaors to
WUUam H. Rorer, lac. Fori Washlagtoa, Pa.
Filed May 12. 1981, Ser. No. 262,811
lat a.J C07D 213/77; A61K 31/44
MS. CL 546—291 u
1. A compound of the formula
f
R|— N— C-NH-C-N
A,
4,436,909
CATIONIC SURFACE-ACTIVE AGENTS
Gregoire Kalopissis, Paris, and Gay Vaalerberghe, Mltry-Mory,
both of France, aasigBors to L'Oreal, Paris, Fraaca
Difision of Ser. No. 891,455, Mar. 29, 1978. Pat No. 4.220.602.
which U a division of Ser. No. 742.671. Nov. 17. 1976, Pat No.
4,096,332. which is a dirisioa of Ser. No. 547,465, Feb. 6, 1975.
Pat No. 4,009.255. which is a dirisioB of Ser. No. 187,151, Oct
6, 1971. Pat No. 3379,464, which is a coatiauatioB-ia-pari of
Ser. No. 655,336, Jul. 24. 1967. abaadoned. 1^ appUeatioa Jaa.
11. 1980, Ser. No. 111,326
Claims priority, appUeatioa Luxemboorg. Jol. 26, 1966,
51645; May 12, 1967, 53667
lat CLJ C07D 295/08: C07C 91/10
MS. a. 546—248 IS ri«ii.
1. A cationic surface-active agent having the formula
R'0+CjHj(CH3X>*Prf-C2H3(CH20HX)tr
— CH2— CHOH— CH2— N
\
CH2— CHOH— CHj
CH2-CHOH-CHJ
wherein R' is octadecyl, m has a statistical average value of
S.2S and n has a statistical average value of 1.
wherein;
X is O or S;
R2 i* hydrogen or lower alkyl;
Rs and lU are hydrogen, lower alkyl, phenyl, substituted
phenyl, phenyl loweralkyl, substituted phenyl loweraUcyl,
cycloloweralkyl, lower aUcoxy, or lower aUcenyl;
Ri is one of the follovmg pyridyl groups;
wherein n is 0 or 1; and (R) is a ring substituent selected
from the group consisting of lower alkyl, lower alkoxy,
lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, phenyl, phenyl loweralkyl,
loweraUcyl phenyl loweralkyl, nitro, sulfonyl, carbamoyl,
halo, cyano, carboxyl, amino, lower alkanoyl, amino
lower aUcyl, lower alkyl amido, hydroxy, halo lower
alkyl, lower alkanoyloxy, and lower alkanoylamino;
and wherein substituted phenyl means a phenyl group in
which one or more of the hydrogens has been replaced by
the same or different substituentt including halo, or lower
•Ikyl;
or a non-toxic phafmaoeuticaUy acceptable salt theraof.
820
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
7-[2-(2-AMINOOXAZOL-4-yl).2-(OX-
IMINO)ACXTAMIDO CEPHALOSPORIN ANTIBIOTICS
AND INTERMEDIATES THEREFOR
Wiiliam J. Wbecler, Indianapoiif, In<L, anignor to Eli Lilly and
Compuy, Indianapolii, Ind.
Division of Ser. No. 300,140, Sep. 8, 1981. Thii appUcation Sep.
13, 1982, Scr. No. 417,242
Int a.3 C07D 263/30
VJS. CL 548-233 25 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
ylamino)-2-benzyl-indazole, 7-(2-imidazolin-2-ylamino> 1 -ben-
zyl-indazole, 7-(2-imidazolin-2-ylamino)-2-benzyl-indazole,
S-chloro- 1 -(2-imidazolin-2-ylamino)phenyl)-inda2ole, 5-
chloro- 1 -(3.5-dichloro-4-{2-imida2olin-2-ylamino)phenyl)-
indazole hydrochloride, 5-chloro-l-(3,5-dichloro-2-{2-imidazo-
lin-2-ylamino)phenyl>indazole, 5-chloro-l-(3-(2-imidazoIin.2-
ylamino)benzyl)-indazole or a pharmaceutically acceptable
salt thereof.
RgNH
'-<
II
N
\
ORi
wherein:
Rl is hydrogen, Ci to C4 alkyl, a carboxy-substituted alkyl or
carboxy-substituted cycloalkyl group represented by the
formula
4,436,914
BENZODIOXANE-IMIDAZOLINE COMPOUNDS AS
ANTIHYPERTENSIVES
Arthur F. Kluge; Arthur M. Strosberg; Roger L. Whiting, and
George A. Christie, aU of 3401 HiUTiew Are., Palo Alto, Calif.
94304
FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,679
Int. a.3 C07D 405/04. 405/06
MS. a. 548-348 3 Qalms
1. The compound 4.phenyl-2-(l,4-benzodioxan-2-ylmethyI-
)imidazoline or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition
salt thereof.
I
-C-(CH2)«-COR'
b
wherein m is 0 to 3; a and b when taken separately are
independently hydrogen or Ci to C3 alkyl, or when taken
together with the carbon to which they are attached form
a C3 to C7 carboxyiic ring; R' is hydroxy, amino, Ci to C4
alkoxy, or —OR" where R" is a carboxy-protecting
group; or Rl is a secondary amido group of the formula
O
II
— C— NHR"
wherein R" is Ci to C4 alkyl, phenyl or Ci to C3 alkyl
substituted by phenyl; Rg is hydrogen or an amino protect-
ing group; G is chloro, bromo, hydroxy, Ci to C4 alkoxy,
phenoxy, or a group of the formula
wherein J is the residue of a group forming an activated
ester; or a group of the formula
— oeM®
wherein M® is a monovalent cation.
4,436,913
IH- AND 2H- INDAZOLE DERIVATIVES
Istran Mohiar; Kurt Thiele; Felix Geissmann, and Ulrich Jahn,
all of Zoflngen, Switzerland, assignors to Siegfried Aktien-
grsellschaft, Zoflngen, Switzerland
per No. PCr/EP80/00094, § 371 Date Apr. 28, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 28, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00824, PCT Pub.
Date Mar. 18, 1982
PCT Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 375,116
Int CL3 C07D 403/12
U.S. a. 548-316 17 ciainu
1. IH- and 2H-indazole derivative selected from the group
consisting of 4-<2-tmidazoIin-2-ylamino)-2-benzyl-indazole
6-(2-imidazoIin-2-ylamino)-2-methyl-indazole dihydrochlor
ide, 4-<2-imidazolin-2-ylamino)-I-benzyUindazole, 5-(2
imidazolin-2-ylamino)- 1 -benzyUndazole, 5-(2-imidazolin-2
ylamino)-l-<4-chlorobenzyl)-indazole, S-(2-imidazolin-2
4,436,915
PYRANO-INDOLES
Francois Picart, DlJon, France, assignor to Societe de Recher>
ches Industrielles, Paris, France
FUed Jun. 23, 1981, Scr. No. 276,643
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jun. 26, 1980, 80 14246
Int. a? arm 491/06
VJS. a. 548-432 9 Claims
9. Pyranoindole compounds selected from the group consist-
ing of;
(i) pyrano indoles of the formula:
(ii) pyrano indoles of the formula: and
C
r«
(Ui) pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof
in which:
X represents CH2, CHOH, or CO;
Rl represents an atom of hydrogen, or a C|_4 alkyl group;
R2 represents an atom of hydrogen, or a COY2 group
(where Y2 is OH or C1-4 alkoxy);
R3 represents an atom of hydrogen, or an atom of halogen;
and
R4 represents an atom of hydrogen, an atom of halogen, an
OH group Cm aUcyl, or Ci_4 aUcoxy.
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
821
4,436,916
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF INDOLES
FiUio Matsuda, Kamakura; Takazo Kato, Ashigarakami;
Tadatoshi Honda, Fi^isawa; Kazuhiro Terada, Yokohama,
and Yasuo Kogure, Yokosuka, aU of Japan, assignors to Mit-
sui Toatsu Chemicals, Inc., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,627
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 3, 1980, 55-73741
Int. a.J C07D 209/08. 209/12
VJS. a. 548—508 10 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of indoles of formula 1
■-oa:
H
wherein R] is a hydrogen atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom,
methyl group, or methoxy group, and each of R2 and R3 is a
hydrogen atom, methyl group or ethyl group, at least one of
R2 and R3 is a hydrogen, which comprises the step of reacting
a member selected from the group consisting of anilines of
formula (II)
NH:
6-
wherein Ri has the same meaning as in the formula I, with a
1,2-glycol selected from the group consisting of ethylene gly-
col, propylene glycol and 1,2-butanediol in the presence of a
catalytic amount of a sulfide or selenide of cadmium and/or
zinc in the vapor phase at a temperature of from 2(X)* C. to 600*
C, or in the liquid phase or mixed vapor-liquid phase at a
temperature of from 2(X)* C. to 500* C.
4,436,917
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF INDOLES
FVJio Matsuda, Kamakura, and Takazo Kato, Ashigarakami,
both of Japan, assignors to Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals, Inc.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 15, 1981, Scr. No. 254,310
Int. a.J C07D 209/08. 209/12
V.S. a. 548—508 18 CUims
1. A process for the preparation of indoles of the formula
'<xx.
H
wherein R] is a hydrogen atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom,
methyl group, or methoxy group and R2 and R3 are a hydrogen
atom, methyl group or ethyl group, at least one of R2 and R3
being hydrogen which comprises the step of reacting a com-
pound selected from the group consisting of aniline, o-tolui-
dine, m-toluidine, p-toluidine, o-chloroaniline, m-chloroani-
line, p<hloroaniline, o-bromoaniline, m-bromoaniline, p-
bromoaniline, o-anisidine, m-anisidine or p-anisidine with a
member selected from the group consisting of ethylene glycol,
propylene glycol, and 1,2-butanediol, in the vapor phase at a
temperature of 2(X)* to 600* C, or in the liquid phase or a mixed
vapor-liquid phase a temperature of 200* to SOO* C. in the
presence of a catalytic amount of:
(a) at least one member selected from the group consisting of
CdO. AI2O3— B2O3, Si02— CdO, Si02— MgO, Ti02— S-
n02, CdO— Bi203, Si02-Y203, Bi203-Be0, Sl-
O2— La203, Si02— Ce203 and Si02— ZnO— AgO;
(b) a sulfide or selenide of at least one element selected from
the group consisting of Pd, Ft, and Mo;
(c) a chloride, nitrate, sulfate or phosphate of at least one
element selected from the group consisting of Tl, Mn, Y,
Al, Zn, Cd and In;
(d) at least one element selected from the group consisting of
Ir, Os and Ru; or
(e) Metallic Ag supported on an a-Al203 or Si02— ZnO
carrier.
17. A process for the preparation of an indole which com-
prises the step of reacting aniline, p-toluidine, p-chloroaniline
or o-anisidine with ethylene glycol, propylene glycol or 1.2-
butanediol in the vapor phase at a temperature of 200* to 600*
C. in the presence of a catalytic amount of:
(a) at least one member selected from the group consisting of
CdO, AI2O3— B2O3, Si02— CdO. Si02— MgO, TiOj— S-
n02, CdO— Bi203. SiO-Y203, Bi20-BeO. Si-
O2— U2O3. SiO— 2— Ce203 and Si02— ZnO— AgO;
(b) a sulfide or selenide of at least one element selected from
the group consisting of Pd, Pt and Mo;
(c) a chloride, nitrate, sulfate or phosphate of at least one
element selected from the group consisting of Tl, Mn, Y,
Al, Zn, Cd and In;
(d) at least one element selected from the group consisting of
Ir, Os and Ru; or
(e) metallic Ag supported on an a-Al203 or Si02— ZnO
carrier, thereby forming an indole.
4,436,918
METHOD FOR PRODUCTION OF PEPTIDE, AND ITS
INTERMEDIATE
Satoshl Horii, Sakai; Hiroshi Fukase, Osaka, and Eijl Higa-
shidc, Takarazuka, all of Japan, auignors to Takeda Chemical
Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,337
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 26, 1981, 56-10544
Int. a.' C07D 207/40
VJS. a. 548—546 1 ClaUn
1. A compound of the formula:
COOR2 ^
I
Z— CH-CH CH2
I I
^C C^
N
l>
wherein Z is amino or amino protected by benzyloxycarbonyl,
p-methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, p-nitrobenzyloxycarbonyl, p-
chlorobenzyloxycarbony, p-bromobenzyloxycarbonyl, tert-
butoxycarbonyl or 2,2,2-trichloroethoxy-carbonyl; R' is hy-
drogen or 2,4-dimethoxybenzyl; and R^ is hydrogen, methyl,
ethyl, tert-butyl, 2,2,2-trichloroethyl, benzyl, p-methoxyben-
zyl, p-nitrobenzyl, trityl, benzhydryl, bis(p-methoxyphenyl)-
methyl or phenacyl.
4,436,919
BORANE COMPLEXES
Christian Aspisi, Boulbon; Marc Bonato, Aramon, and Robert
Jacquicr, MontpeUier, aU of France, assignors to Societe
d'Expansion Scientiflquc "EXPANSU", Paris, France
FUed Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 358,847
Clahns priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Mar. 25, 1981,
8109392
Int a.3 C07F 5/02
VJS. CI. 549—4 1 Claim
1. Chiral organoboranes of the formula
822
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
•continued
R
(CH2)„ /
in which X represents a methylene group or a sulphur atom, n
and p are Oor 1.
4,436,920
IMAGE RECORDING MEMBERS
Kozo Sato; Ken Iwaknra, both of Kanagawa, and AUra Igaradil,
Shizuoka, all of Japan, asdgnora to Fi^i Photo Film Co., Ltd.,
Mioami-aahigara, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 212,010, Dec. 1, IWO, Pat No. 4,390,616.
This appUcation Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,105
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Not. 30, 1979, 54-155117
Int a.3 C07D 493/10
U.S. a. 549-227 6 Claims
1. A diarylaminofluoran dye precursor represented by the
formula (I)
(D
a:oa:o
I
wherein R is an alkyl group,
Ri and R2 each represent hydrogen, an alkyl group, a cyclo-
alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group or a heterocy-
clic ring selected from the group consisting of a furyl
group, a pyrrolyl group, a thienyl group, an indolyl group,
a carbazolyl group, a phenoxazinyl group, a phenothiazi-
nyl group, and a phenazinyl group, or Ri and R2 together
form a heterocyclic ring selected from the group consist-
ing of
wherein R is an alkyl group,
R3, R4 and R5 each represent an alkyl group, an alkoxy
group, a halogen atom, a nitro group, an amino group, an
alkylamino group, a dialkylamino group, or an acylamino
group,
X and y are each 0 or an integer of from 1 to 3, and
z is 0 or an integer of from 1 to 4.
wherein
Ar and Ar' each are selected from the group consisting of a
phenyl group, an alkyl-substituted phenyl group, an al-
koxy-substituted phenyl group, a halogen-substituted
phenyl group, a naphthyl group, an aralkyl-substituted
naphthyl group, a halogen-substituted naphthyl group,
and an alkoxy-substituted naphthyl group, or wherein Ar
and Ar' are heterocyclic rings selected from the group
consisting of a furyl group, a pyrrolyl group, a thienyl
group, an indolyl group, a carbazolyl group, a phenoxazi-
nyl group, a phenothiazinyl group, and a phenazinyl
group, or wherein Ar and Ar' together form a heterocy-
cUc ring selected from the group consisting of
ccoa:o
4,436,921
l-(4-AMINOBENZYL)-2^DIOXOPIPERAZINE
DERIVATIVES, ACID ADDITION SALTS THEREOF AND
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING SAME
Takako Hori, Toyama; Choaaka YoaUda, Takaoka; Yasoo KIba,
Toyama; Ryuko Takeno, Toyama; Joji Nakano, Toyama; Jon
Nitta, Namckawa; Somlko Kiahimoto, Toyama; Shohachi
Murakami, Toyama; Hisatsugn Tsnda, Toyama, and laamn
Saikawa, Toyama, all of Japan, assignors to Toyama Chemical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed JnL 16, 1980, Ser. No. 169,457
daims priority, appUcation Japui, Jul. 24, 1979, 54-93234
Int a^ C07D ^07/00; A61K 31/495
U.S. a 544-238 4 Claims
1. A compound represented by the foUowing formula,
0.0
R»NH— /QV-CH-N N-R»
\ / R* \ /
wherein
R' represents a 6-membered nitrogen heterocycUc group
selected from the group consisting of piperidinyl, 2-pyri-
dyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidinyl,
S-pyrimidinyl. 3-pyridazinyl, 4-pyridazinyl and pyrazinyl,
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
823
and is optionaUy substituted by fluorine, chlorine, bro-
mine, iodine, hydroxyl, carboxyl. Cm slkoxycarbonyl,
phenyl-CMalkoxycarbonyl, phenoxycarbonyl. Cu alkyl,
di-CM aUcoxy-CM alkyl, C2.4 alkenyl, phenyl-CM alkyl,
Ci^ cycloalkyl. cyano, mercapto, Cm alkylthio, nitro,
0x0, imino, tUoxo, Cm alkanoylamino. Cm alkoxy, phe-
nyl-CM alkyloxy, C1.8 acyl, amino, Cm alkylamino, di-
CM alkylamino, anilino, phenyl-CM aUcylamino, phenyl-
CM alkoxycarbamoyl, pyridylamino, pyrimidinylamino
or S- or 6-membered heterocyclic group containing O, S
or N selected from the group consisting of piperidinyl,
2-pyridyl, 3-pyridyl, 4-pyridyl, 2-pyrimidinyl, 4-pyrimidi-
°yli S-pyrimidinyl, 3-pyridazinyl, 4-pyridazinyl, pyrazi-
nyl* 2-pyrrolidinyl, 3-pyrrolidinyl, 3-pyrazolyl, 4-pyrazo-
lyl, 5-pyrazolyl, 4-triazolyl, S-triazolyl, S-tetrazolyl, 2-
thienyl, 3-thienyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl, 2-thiazolyl, 4-thiazolyl,
S-thiazolyl, 3-isothiazolyl, 4-isothiazolyl, S-isothiazolyl,
2-oxazolyl, 4-oxazolyl, S-oxazolyl, 3-isoxazolyl, 4-i80xazo-
lyl, S-isoxazolyl, 2-imidazolyl, 4-imidazolyl, S-imidazolyl,
2-indolyl, 3-indolyl, S-indolyl, 2-benzimidazolyl and S-
benzimidazolyl;
R^ represenu hydrogen or Cm alkyl; and
R' represents hydrogen, Cm alkyl, phenyl-CM alkyl, 2-
pyrazinyl or phenyl, which may be unsubstituted or sub-
stituted by fluorine, chlorine, bromine, iodine, Cm aUiyl,
CMalkoxycarbonyl, Cs.6 cycloalkyl. Cm alkanoylamino.
Cm aUcoxy, Ci-g acyl. amino, nitro. di-CM alkylamino.
pyridylamino. piperidinyl.2-pyridyl, pyrazinyl or 2-furyl
which may be substituted by methyl, methoxycarbonyl,
acetylamino, amino, or nitro; or
a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
4,436,922
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURE OF HIGH-PURfFY
PHTHALIC ANHYDRIDE
Ynlchi Kita, AkashI; Keataro Sakamoto, Hyogo, and Takahisa
Sato, HimitJlt aU of Japan, aaalgnors to Nippon Shokubai
Kagako Kogyo Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed JoL 1, 1982, Ser. No. 394,477
Claims priority, appUcatioB Japan, Jul. 6, 1981, 56-104404;
JnL 15, 1981, 56-109300; Not. 7, 1981, 56-177808
Int a^ C07D 307/89
UJS. CL 549—251 12 Claims
1. A method for the manufacture of high-purity phthaUc
anhydride, which comprises exposing crude phthalic anhy-
dride obtained by vapor-phase catalytic oxidation of ortho-
xylene to contact with, per Kg of crude phthalic anhydride, a
gas containing molecular oxygen at a rate of at least 0.0001
mole/hour of oxygen, at an elevated temperature in the pres-
ence of 10-10,000 ppm by weight, as alkali metal atom, of an
alkaU metal salt of at least one carboxylic acid selected from
the group consisting of maleic acid, succinic acid and benzoic
acid, and subsequently subjecting the resultant reaction mix-
ture to distillation.
6. A method for the manufacture of high-purity phthaUc
anhydride, which comprises exposing crude phthalic anhy-
dride obtained by vapor-phase catalytic oxidation of ortho-
xylene, par Kg thereof, to contact with a gas containing at least
0.0001 mole/hour of molecular oxygen at an elevated tempera-
ture in the presence of 10-10,000 ppm by weight, as alkaU
metal atom of an alkaU metal salt of at least one carboxylic acid
selected from the group consisting of maleic acid, succinic acid
and benzoic acid together with a manganese-containing alloy
composition, of at least 0.05% by weight and a surface area of
at least SxlO^^ and subsequently subjecting the resultant
reaction mixture to distillation.
4,436,923
TRIFLUOROMETHYL-SUBSTITUTED CHROMOGENIC
CROWN ETHERS AND METHODS OF USING SAME
GUbert E. Pacey, and Banard P. Bnbnis, both of Oxford, Ohio,
assignors to The Prcaideat and Tmstaes of the Miami UniTsr-
sity, Oxford, Ohio
FUed Jon. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 386,066
Int a.» C07D 323/00
U.S. a. 549—352 4 OalM
S00 400800W0 SM4004SO 80owo40oaooworao
WAVELENGTH /ftm ,
1. Chromogenic crown ethen of the formula
r'-\
1
o
where R is taken from the group consisting of
<T
■i?
4. A process for synthesis of trifluoromethyl-substituted,
lS-crown-3 chromogenic ethers, comprising the following
steps in sequence:
(a) forming a reaction mixture in an organic solvent of
(i) 4'-aminobenzo-lS-crown-S.
(ii) a compound selected from the group consisting of
l-chloro-2,6-dinitro-4-trifluoromethylbenzene, and 1-
chloro-2,4-dinitro-6-trifluoromethylbenzene, and
(iii) a base, and
(b) isolating a trifluoromethyl-substituted crown ether from
said reaction mixture.
4,436,924
ULTRAVIOLET UGHT ABSORBING AGENTS AND
COMPOSmONS AND ARTICLES CONTAINING SAME
Bmcc A. Aahby, and Siegfried H. Schroeter, both of Schenec-
tady, N.Y., aasignors to General Dectric Company, Water-
ford, N.Y.
DlTision of Ser. No. 225,429, Jan. IS, 1981, Pat No. 4,374,674.
This appUcation Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 421,797
The portion of the term of this patent snbaegnent to JnL 14»
1998, has been «><««'i»<n«fld,
Int CLJ C09K 3/00: O07F 7/18. 7/09
MS. CL 556-416 3 OaiaM
1. An ultraviolet light absorbing agent, comprising a com-
pound having the formula:
824
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
wherein
\
X is C— O,
or
OQ
c«c— c— ow
/ I
CN
YisOH;
Z is H, OH, OQ or OW;
Q is -CH2(CH2)«Si(R2);r(OR|)^ and
WiS-C;„H2;„+,;
Where x=0, 1 or 2. y=l, 2 or 3, x+y=3. R,=alkyl or
aikanoyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, R2=alkyl having 1
to 6 carbon atoms, n=0, 1 or 2 and m= 1 to 18.
H02C(CH2)n-CH-C02H
NH
I
Hi
wherein R| and n are as defined above with a DL-
phenylalanine lower alkyl ester of the formula:
O
H
H2NCHR2CR3
wherein R2 and R3 are as defined above in the presence of
protease m an aqueous medium at a pH at which said
protease exerts its enzymatic activity;
(b) separating said addition compound from the aqueous
medium;
(c) reacting said acid addition compound with an aqueous
acid solution, thereby decomposing said acid addition
compounds; and
(d) recovering said phenylalanine lower alkyl ester in its
D-form.
4,436^25
ADDITION COMPOUND OF DIPEPTIDE DERIVATIVE
AND AMINO ACID DERIVATIVE
Yoshikazu Isowa; Muncki Ohmori, both of Tokyo; Kaoni Mori-
Tetsuya Ichikawa, both of Sagamihara; Yiyi Nonaka, Shin-
Nanyo; KeUchJ Kihara, Shln-Nanyo; Kiyotaka Oyama, Shin-
Nanyo; Hegiro Satoh. Shia-Nanyo, and ShigeakJ Nishimura,
Shin-Nanyo, aU of Japan, assignors to Toyo Soda Manufac-
turing Co., Ltd., Shin-Nanyo and Si^ami Chemical Research
Center, Tokyo, both of, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 119,654, Feb. 8, 1980, abandoned,
which IS a dirision of Ser. No. 20,058, Mar. 13, 1979, abandoned,
which IS a division of Ser. No. 870,108, Jan. 17, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Jun. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 270,025
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 27, 1977, 5^7279:
May 19, 1977, 52-57036 '
The portion of die term of tills patent subsequent to Mar. 17,
1998, has been disclaimed.
iBt a.J C07C 101/00
UA CI. 560-19 5 Claims
1. A process for resolving a racemate of a phenylalanine
lower alkyl ester, comprising:
(a) preparing an addition compound of the formula:
O
R3COCHNH2.H02C(CH2)„-CH-CONH-CH-CR3.
i I I
*2 NH R2
Rl
wherein the
4,436,926
ALKANE ACETATES PRODUCED BY OXIDATIVE
ESTERIFICATION OF OLEFINS OVER A CATALYST
CONTAINING A RARE EARTH OXIDE
John R. Sanderson; Terry L. Renken, and Uwis W. Watts, Jr.,
lUl of Austin, Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains,
FUed Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,662
Int. a.i C07C 67/05
U.S. a. 560-246 ,0 ciaj^
1. An improved process for the production of alkane hy-
droxy acetates and diacetates by reacting an olefin or a mixture
of olefins with oxygen and a carboxylate ion source selected
from the group consisting of acetic acid and acetic anhydride,
wherein the improvement consists essentially of conducting
the reaction in the presence of a rare earth oxide catalyst.
4,436,927
ALKANE ACETATES PRODUCED BY OXIDATIVE
ESTERinCATION OF OLEFINS OVER THALLIUM
BORATE
John R, Sanderson, and Lewis W. Watts, Jr., botii of Austin,
Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,665
Int a.J C07C 67/05
VS. a. 560—246 J cW^
1. An improved process for the production of alkane hy-
droxy acetates and diacetates by reacting an olefin or a mixture
of olefins with oxygen and a carboxylate ion source selected
from the group consisting of acetic acid and acetic anhydride,
wherein the improvement comprises conducting the reaction
in the presence of thallium borate.
Q O
H02C(CH2);,CH-CONHCHCR3 and R3C-CH-NH2
NH R2 A2
fragments of said addition compound are the LL form and
D form respectively, and wherein Ri is a benzyloxycarbo-
nyl group or a p-methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl group, R2 is
benzyl, R3 is lower alkoxy and n is 1 or 2 by reacting an
N-substituted-L-monoamino-dicarboxyUc acid of the for-
mula:
4,436,928
ALKANE ACETATES PRODUCED BY OXIDATIVE
ESTERinCATION OF OLEFINS OVER CATALYST
SYSTEMS CONTAINING OXIDES AND BORATES
JolM R. Sanderson; Terry L. Renken, and Lewis W. Watts, Jr.,
jUl of Austin, Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains,
Filed JoL 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,666
Int a.3 C07C 67/05. 67/055
VJS. a. 560-246 14 chl^
1. An improved process for the production of alkane hy-
droxy acetates and diacetates by reacting an olefin or a mixture
of olefins with oxygen and a carboxylate ion source selected
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
82S
from the group consisting of acetic acid and acetic anhydride
wherein the improvement comprises conducting the reaction
in the presence of a catalyst system comprising at least one
transition metal oxide compound and at least one borate com-
pound selected from the group consisting of alkali metal bo-
rates, alkali earth metal borates and transition metal borates.
4,436,929
ALKANE ACETATES PRODUCED BY OXIDATIVE
ESTERinCATION OF OLEFINS OVER ALKALI EARTH
METAL BORATES
John R. Sanderson, and Lewis W. Watts, Jr., both of Austin,
Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,667
Int. a.3 C07C 67/05
VS. a. 560—246 11 Claims
1. An improved process for the production of alkane hy-
droxy acetates and diacetotes by reacting an olefin or a mixture
of olefins with oxygen and a carboxylate ion source selected
from the group consisting of acetic acid and acetic anhydride,
wherein the improvement comprises conducting the reaction
in the presence of one or more alkali earth metal borate cata-
lysts.
4,436,930
ALKANE ACETATES PRODUCED BY OXIDATIVE
ESTERinCATION OF OLEFINS OVER ALKALI METAL
BORATES
John R. Sanderson, and Lewis W. Watts, Jr., both of Austin,
Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,668
Int. a.J C07C 67/05
VS. a. 560—246 11 Claims
1. An improved process for the production of alkane hy-
droxy acetates and diacetates by reacting an olefin or a mixture
of olefins with oxygen and a carboxylate ion source selected
from the group consisting of acetic acid and acetic anhydride,
wherein the improvement consists essentially of conducting
the reaction in the presence of one or more alkali metal borate
catalysts.
4,436,931
ALKANE ACETATES PRODUCED BY OXIDATIVE
ESTERinCATION OF OLEFINS OVER CERTAIN OXIDE
CATALYSTS
John R. Sanderson; Lewis W. Watts, Jr., and Terry L. Renken,
aU of Austin, Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White PUdns,
N.Y.
FUed Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,685
Int a.J C07C 67/05
VS. a. 560—246 10 Claims
1. An improved process for the production of alkane hy-
droxy acetates and diacetates by reacting an olefin or a mixture
of olefins with oxygen and a carboxylate ion source selected
from the group consisting of acetic acid and acetic anhydride
wherein the improvement consists essentially of conducting
the reaction in the presence of an oxide catalyst selected from
the group of oxide catalysts consisting of niobium oxide, iron
oxide and bismuth oxide.
4,436,932
ALKANE ACETATES PRODUCED BY OXIDATIVE
ESTERIFICATION OF OLEFINS OVER AMMONIUM
BORATE IN THE PRESENCE OF A CARBOXYLATE ION
SOURCE
John R. Sanderson, Austin; Steven H. Vanderpool, New Braun-
fels, and Lewis W. Watts, Jr., Austin, aU of Tex., assignors to
Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,686
Int CL^ C07C 67/05
VS. CL 560—246 10 Claims
1. An improved process for the production of alkane hy-
droxy acetates and diaceutes by reacting an olefin or a mixture
of olefms with oxygen and a carboxylate ion source selected
from the group consisting of acetic acid and acetic anhydride,
wherein the improvement comprises conducting the reaction
in the presence of ammonium borate.
4,436,933
POLYMERIC ETHYLENE OXIDE/PROPYLENE OXIDE
OR ETHYLENE OXIDE/BUTYLENE OXIDE ETHER
CARBOXYLIC AODS, A PROCESS FOR THEIR
PREPARATION AND THEIR USE
Hehnut Diery, KeUiheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Aug. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 413,411
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 11,
1981, 3136025
Int a.J C07C 59/00
VS. a. 562—470 3 Claims
1. A polymeric ethylene oxide/propylene oxide or ethylene
oxide/butylene oxide ether carboxyUc acid of the formula
HO-
0)
CH
COOA
0-(CH2CH20),r-(CHCH20)>,-
X^-
— (CH2CH2O)
wherein R denotes methyl or ethyl, preferably methyl, A
denotes hydrogen or a metal cation, preferably Na(+)or K(+),
X and Z together denote a number from 2 to 360, preferably
from 2 to 140, y denoted a number from 15 to 70, preferably
from 25 to 70 and n denotes a number from 1 to 10.
4,436,934
BICYCLIC PROSTAGLANDIN ANALOGS AND METHOD
OF SYNTHESIS
Richard C. Larock, Ames, Iowa, assignor to Iowa State Univer-
sity Research Foundation, Inc., Ames, Iowa
Division of Ser. No. 231,596, Feb. 5, 1981. This appUcation Dec
28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,750
Int a.J C07C 177/00
VS. CI. 562—502 9 Claims
1. Prostaglandin analogs of the formula:
(CH2),X
wherein n equals a whole integer of from 0 to 7, X is a carbox-
ylic acid group, or X is an alcohol group, or Ci-Cg ester, or
Ci-Cg ether, or Ci-Cg amide, A is selected from the group of
methylene, ethylene, oxy, imino, alkyl, phenyl and Ci-Cg aryl
substituted imino; D is selected from the group of methylene,
ethylene, vinylene, B is selected from the group of ethylene, cis
and trans vinylene, and ethynylene; R and Ri are hydrogen,
Ci-Cg aUcyl and Ci-Cg aryl or (CH2), with Z being 2 to 5, and
Q is hydroxy, methoxy, acetoxy or hydrogen, or Q and Rt are
oxa.
826
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
4,436.935
THIOCARBAMOYLALKOXYPHENYLUREAS
nr Bemr, RItfcw, SwlticrlaBd; Gwirg Pi«iotas, LSrrach,
Fed. Rep. of GcnMny, aad Otto Rohr, Therwil, SwitMrlaad,
to ObihGcior CorvoratkM, ArMcy, N.Y.
FDed Aog. 7, 1981, Scr. No. 291,0m
priority, appUcatkM Swfticriaad, Ana* 19, 19W,
6254/80
lat CL^ C07C 161/00: E05B 65/00
U A CL 564—49 5 Oaim
1. A UuocartMunoyalkoxyphenylurea of the formula
S Rs
II I
NHj— C— C— O
(11)
wherein Ri and R2 have their previous significance, with up to
three moles of an alkylating agent (Jll) capable of introducing
a residue Z into the benzene ring of an amine of formula II at
a position ortho or para to the NH2 group, the reaction being
effected at elevated temperature in the presence of an acid
catalyst in an aqueous acid medium containing at least 30% by
weight of water, based on the acid used, and optionally con-
verting the compound of formula I into a salt, or metal salt
complex, with an organic or inorganic salt.
wherein
Ri is methyl or methoxy,
R5 is hydrogen. C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy or C2-C5 alkoxy-
alkyl, and
Kf, is hydrogen or C1-C4 alkyl.
4.436.936
ALKYLATION AND ARALKYLATION OF AROMATIC
AMINES
Frederick H. Howell, AthertOB, Eogbud, iMisDor to Clba*Gdfly
Corporatkm. AnUcy, N.Y.
Filed Job. 10, 1982. Ser. No. 387.082
daiaw priority, appUcatioB United KlBgdom, Jon. 19. 1981.
8119010
iBt a' C07C 85/24
UJS. CL 564-409 13 cbtae
1. A process for producing a compound having the formula
4.436.937
PROCESS FOR THE RING ALKYLATION OF AN
ANILINE
Fhmk Baardman; Robert ^an HeUen, and Marpretka J. de
Nie-Sariok, aU of Amitcrdan, Netherlands, aaiignon to SheU
Oil Company, Hoostoa, Tex.
Filed Oct 25. 1982. Ser. No. 436.215
Claims priority, appiicatioa United Kingdom, Nor. 11, 198L
8133996
Int CL^ C07C 85/24
U A a. 564-409 g ciaimg
1. A process for the alkylation of an aniline which comprises
treating the aniline with an alkylating agent in the liquid phase,
at a temperature in the range of from - 30* C. to 40* C, in the
presence of at least 1.02 mole of an aluminum halide per mole
of the aniline.
I
NH2
(D
4*436.938
MANUFACTURE OF AMINES
Alan J. Tompsett, StocktoaH»>Teea, Eogiaad, asaignor to Impo*
rial Owmical Indostries PLC, LoDdoo, En^and
Filed Ang. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 413.443
Claims priority, application United Kingdom. Sep. 18, 1981,
8128322 —- ^--K
Int CL3 C07C 85/06. 85/02
U.S. a 564-474 9 ciaima
1. A process for the manufacture of methylamines which
comprises reacting a feed comprising methanol, dimethylether
or mixtures thereof and ammonia over a catalyst comprising
binderless zeoUte A in the alkaline earth form.
as well as salts or metal salt complexes thereof with organic or
inorganic acids, in which formula I n is 1, 2 or 3, Ri is H,
halogen. CF3, COs, C1-C5 straight or branch chain alkyl or
phenyl, R2 is H, halogen, or C1-C5 straight or branch chain
alkyl, and Z is linked at a position ortho or para to the NH2
group and is a residue of formula
V
-C-R.
lU
wherein R3 is H or C1-C4 straight chain alkyl, R4 is C1-C4
straight chain alkyl or phenyl and Rs is Ci-Cg straight or
branch chain alkyl or phenyl, or R3 and R4 and/or R4 and R5,
together with the carbon atom to which they are bonded, may
be a cyclohexylene ring, which comprises reacting 1.0 mole of
an aromatic amine having the formula II
4.436,939
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING
l-(P-PRENYLPHENYL)ErHANOL
Takehiro Amaao, Urawa; Keaiei Yoahikawa, Kitamoto; Tat*
sohiko Sano; Yntaka Ohnchi, both of Ohmiya; MicUhiro
Ishiguro, KurasUki; Manzo Shiono, Knrashiki; YoehUi Figita,
KnrasUki, aad Takaaid Niahida, KurasUki, aU of Japan,
aaiigDon to Taiaho Pharmceirtieal Co., Ltd.. Tokyo and
Koraray Co., Ltd^ OkayaM, both of, Japan
FUed Ang. 25, 1982. Ser. No. 411.481
aaiiH priority, appiicatioa Japaa, Aag. 26. 1981. 56-134778
lat CL* C07C 33/28
U.S. CL 568—813 9 n.i—
1. A process for producing l-<P-prenylphenyl)ethanol,
which comprises reacting p-chloroprenylbenzene with magne-
sium at a temperature between 100* C. and ISO* C. to form a
Orignard reagent, and then reacting said Orignard reagent
with acetaldefayde at a temperature between -40* C. and 20*
C
March 13, 1984
CHEMICAL
827
4,4364M0
PHOTOCHEMICAL METHOD FOR PREPARING LOW
MOLECULAR WEIGHT OLEFIN POLYMERS AND
COPOLYMERS OF 3-BUTENE-l-OL
Ellis K. FleUa, RItot Foreat, aad William C. Clarke, Evaaston,
both of DL, aaaigaon to Staadard Oil Company (ladiaaa),
Cliica80,IlL
FUed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,060
lat a? BOIJ 19/12
U.S. CL 568—857 18 Claims
V. A composition structurally represented as containing
repeating units as follows:
4,436,942
PROCESS FOR THE CATALYZED FLUORINATION OF
HALOALKYL AROMATIC COMPOUNDS
Charies G. Rader, Grand Islaad, aad Stephen Robota, North
Toaawaada, both of N.Y., asaigaors to Occidental Chemical
Corporation, Niagara Falls, N.Y.
CoatiauatioB of Ser. No. 846,047, Oct 27, 1977, abaadoaed.
This appUcatioB Apr. 30, 1979, Ser. No. 34,803
lat a.3 O07C 9/08
UJS. a. 570—145 19 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a benzotrifluoride com-
pound of the formula
C—C— C— C— OH
.(CF3)«
R2
/
I
R'
R3 R4 R
I I I
Rl— C— C— C— C— OH
/III
R2 H R'
—Hand
(D
Rl R3 R4 R
\ r r I
CMC— C— C— OH
Rj
/
I
R'
I r
Rl— C— C— C—
/ I I
R2 R3 H
ai)
/
m
R
I
— C— OH
I
R'
— H
wherein m and n are fractional and whole numbers from 1 to
10, Rl, R2, R3 and R4are individually selected from the group
consisting of hydrogen and alkyl groups of 1 to 9 carbon
atoms, wherein the sum of carbon atoms of Ri, R2, R3 and R4
does not exceed 9, R and R' are alkyl groups of from 1 to 1 1
carbon atoms wherein the sum of carbon atoms of R' and R
does not exceed 12 wherein Ri and R3 can be joined to form an
alicyclic olefin.
which comprises contacting a benzotrichloride compound of
the formula
,(CCl3)«
wherein
n is 0 to S, and
m is 1 to 3
in the vapor phase, with hydrogen fluoride in the presence of
a catalyst consisting essentially of a granular, porous high
surface area catalyst prepared by treating y-alumina with
hydrogen fluoride.
4,436,943
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
2>DICYCLOHEXENYLPROPANE
Gcbhard Rauleder, Haan, aad Helmnt Waldaiaan, Lcverkusen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Gcrmaay, assignors to Bayer Aktiea-
gesellschaft, Lererknsen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 21, 1983. Scr. No. 477,464
Claiau priority, appiicatioa Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 26,
1982, 3211304
lat a.i O07C 1/20
U.S. a. 585—357 9 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of 2,2-dicyclohexenylpro-
pane which comprises heating 4,4'-dioxydJcyclohexylpropane
in the presence of a strong acid, under a pressure of 1 to SO
m.bar and at a temperature in the range of from 120* to 220' C.
and distilling ofT 2,2-dicyclohexenylpropane together with
water formed from the reaction mixture and separating water
from the top product of the distillation.
4.436.941
PROCESS FOR THE ISOMERIZATION OF
ALKYLBENZOTRIFLUORIDES
Albreeht MarhoM, Leferkaaea. aad Erich Klaake, Odeathal,
both fd Fed. Rep. of Genaaay, aaaigaors to Bayer Aktiea-
geaeltachaft, Lererkasea, Fed. Rep. of Genaaay
FUed Dee. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 449.331
ClalaM priority. applicatioB Fed. Rep. of Genaaay, Dec 24,
1981, 3151364
lat a» C07C /7/2¥
U.S. a. 570-144 20 OaiM
1. A process for isomerizing an alkylbenzotrifluoride which
comprises contacting said alkylbenzotrifluoride with hydrogen
fluoride.
4,436.9U
PREPARATION OF O-XYLENE AND ETHYLBENZENE
Haas-MartiB Welti, Bad Dnrkheim; Rolf Fischer, Heidelberg,
aad Haas H. PohL Deldeabeim, all of Fed. Rep. of Gcnaany,
aarigaors to BASF Aktiengesellachaft Fed. Rep. of Gerauay
FUed Jaa. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,285
ClahM priority, appUcatioa Fed. Rep. of Genaaay, Jaa. 15,
1981, 3101043
lat a.J C07C 1/20
U.8. CL 585—408 5 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a mixture of o-xylene and
ethylbcmene in a one-stage reaction, said mixture containing
ethylbenzene as its principal product, which process com-
prises:
heating 2,7-octadien-l-ol, l,7-octadien-3-ol or mixtures con-
828
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
taining these octadienols, or carboxylates of 2,7-octadien-
l-ol or of l,7-octadien-3-ol, or mixtures containing these
carboxylates at a temperature of from 200* to 550* C. over
an aluminum oxide or titanium doxide catalyst to convert
these starting materials to said mixture of o-xylene and
ethylbenzene, ethylbenzene being the principal product of
the mixture.
4,436,945
METHOD OF HYDRO-DEALKYLATION
Masahiko Koya, and Yohei Fuknoka, both of Kurashlki, Japan,
assignors to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kaboshiki Kaisha, Osaka!
Japan
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,145
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 1, 1981, 56-49193
Int a.3 C07C 4/ J 2
U.S. a. 585-488 4 cudms
1. A method for hydro-dealkylation of an alkyl aromatic
hydrocarbon which comprises treating the alkyl aromatic
hydrocarbon in the presence of hydrogen using a catalyst
mainly composed of a zeolite 15 to 50 equivalent % of ex-
changeable cations of which are exchanged with hydrogen
ions.
4,436,947
OLEFIN OUGOMERIZATION USING BORON
TRIFLUORIDE AND A THREE-COMPONENT
CXX^ATALYST
Neal E. Morguisoii, McCumDcm Township, Allegheny County,
and Adam V. Vayda, Oaknont, both of Pa., assignors to Gulf
Research A Development Company, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,446
Int. a.3 C07C 3/18
VJS. a. 585—525 g cMm
1. A process for producing a mixture of olefm oligomers
which compnses contacting an olefm having from about six to
about 20 carbon atoms or a mixture thereof with a catalyst
comprismg boron trifluoride and a cocatalyst comprising be-
tween about 50 and about 98 weight percent of an aliphatic
alcohol havmg from one to about ten carbon atoms, between
about one and about 25 percent of an aliphatic ketone having
from three to about ten carbon atoms and about one to about 25
percent of a polyol selected from ethylene glycol, propylene
glycol, butane diol and glycerine.
4,4364M6
PREPARAnON OF PROPYLENE AND BUTYLENE
DIMERS USING PALLADIUM CYANIDE AS CATALYST
Edgar J. Smutny, Houston, Tex., assignor to SheU Oil Company.
Houston, Tex.
FUed Noir. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 442,999
Int. a.3 C07C 3/JO. 3/12. 3/18
U.S. a. 585-510 „ Claims
1. A process for the selective dimerization of propylene
and/or n-butylenes which comprises steps for (a) contacting
under mechanical agitation an olefm reactant selected from the
group consisting of propylene, 1-butene, 2-butene, and mix-
tures thereof with a heterogeneous palladium cyanide catalyst
at a temperature in the range from about 50' C. to 150* C, the
quantity of said palladium cyanide being between about 0.01
and 10 percent by weight calculated on the weight of olefm
reactant, to produce a reaction product solution containing
olefin reactant dimers, and (b) recovering said dimers from said
product solution.
4436948
catalyst'compositions
Rex L. Bobsein, BartlesvUle, Okla., assignor to PhUUps Petro-
leum Company, BartlesrUle, Okla.
FUed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,202
Int. a.3 C07C 2/02; BOl J 27/06
UA a. 585-532 liaalms
1. A catalyst composition suitable for use inthe oligomeriza-
tion of olefins comprising at least two metal containing compo-
nents wherein:
the first component contains one or more Group IIIA metal
halides and the second component contains one or more
metal halides selected from Group IVB metals and the
catalyst contains metal components in about equal
amounts based on their atomic weights.
6. A process of oligomcrizing olefms comprising subjecting
tbem to oligomerization conditions in the presence of a catalyst
containing:
(1) a Group IIA metal halide, and
(2) at least one other metal halide selected from Group IVB
metals, wherein the catalyst contains metal components in
about equal amounts based on their atomic weights.
4436,949
OLEFIN CONVERSION PROCESS
John W. Myers, and Daniel J. Strope, both of BartlesvUle,
Okla., assignors to PhUUps Petroleum Company, BartlesrUle,
FUed Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 420,970
Int a^ C07C 5/24, 5/30
U.S. a. 585-664 19 Claims
1. A process for the conversion of at least one olefm which
comprises adding to said olefm at least 0.10 mole percent of
water and thereafter contacting the resulting wet olefm with
an acidic alumina catalyst.
ELECTRICAL
4,436,950
SYSTEM FOR SEALING PASSAGES IN THE WALLS OF
GLANDLESS ORCULATING PUMPS OR THE LIKE
Karl GaflU, Hessheim, and Christian Klepp, Frankenthal, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Klein, Schanzlin A
Becker AktiengeseUKhaft, Fnmkcnthal, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337,329
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 31,
1981, 3103299
Int. a.3 HOIB 17/30
VJS. a. 174—11 BH 18 Claims
1. A system for sealing a passage which is provided in a wall
separating a higher-pressure area from a lower-pressure area
and serves to allow for the transmission of electrical energy
from a source in one of said areas to a consumer in the other of
said areas, comprising an annular non-magnetic seat provided
in the passage and having a predetermined inner diameter; an
elongated conductor adapted to be introduced into said pas-
sage from the lower pressure area, said conductor extending
through said passage and having in said higher-pressure iirea a
portion with an outer diameter exceeding said predetermined
inner diameter and being urged toward said seat owing to the
pressure differential between said areas; cable means con-
nected with said conductor in said higher-pressure area; a rigid
pressure- and temperature-resistant insulating sleeve surround-
ing said conductor in said passage and bearing against said seat;
a tubular insulating device surrounding said portion of said
conductor and a portion of said sleeve in said higher-pressure
area; a flexible insulating sheath sealingly surrounding said
device; and a sealing element interposed between said conduc-
tor and said sleeve in the region of said portion of said conduc-
tor.
disposed on said inner surface of said ceramic plate, external
contact elemenu being disposed on said inner surface of said
ceramic plate and being freely accessible from on top of said
housing, said housing including a frame having an open top
and bottom, a central fastening part having a lower surface and
having a hole formed therethrough for fastening the module to
a heat sink, and radially-directed spokes extended between said
frame and said central fastening pari, said ceramic plate being
4,436,951
SEMICONDUCTOR POWER MODULE
Rolf Rief, Mannheim, and Peter Wetzel, Weinhebn-LUtzel-
sachsen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Brown,
BoTeri A Cie AG, Mannheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,335
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 25,
1980, 3028178
Int a.3 H05K 5/00
UJS. CL 174—52 PE 10 Oaims
1. Semiconductor power module, comprising a substantially
prismatic plastic housing with a lower surface having a recess
with a shoulder-lUce step formed in the periphery thereof, a
ceramic plate being inserted into said step and having an outer
Oat surface extending beyond said lower surface of said hous-
ing and an inner flat surface facing the interior of said housing,
metallizations, semiconductor components and solder jumpers
5 ' 7
braced against said lower surface of said central fastening part
and having a breakthrough formed therein in alignment with
said through hole, said spokes being disposed at a distance
from said ceramic plate defining a space therebetween, and
each of said external conUct elements being separated from
each other by at least one spoke, and hardened insulating
casting compound filling substantially half of the interior of
said housing.
4,436,952
CABLE CLAMPING DEVICE INTEGRALLY FORMED
WITH PLASTIC MOLDED ELECTRICAL BOX
Alan C. Lockwood, 4526 Darlow A?c., Rosemead, CaUf. 91770
FUed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,247
Int. G.3 H02G 3/08
U.S. CI. 174—65 R 8 n.ii.
1. In a molded electrical box having a plurality of walls with
broad ouuide surfaces a clamping device integrally formed
with said box for clamping a member to said box, said member
passing from the ouUide of the box to the interior thereof
through an aperture formed in a wall of said box, said clamping
device comprising
a single resilient finger member hinged at one end thereof to
one of the walls of said box and extending away from said
wall at an acute angle relative to the broad ouUide surface
of said wall, said finger member being free of the box at
the sides and the other end thereof, said finger member
being positioned in said aperture,
tab means formed on said free other end of the fmger mem-
ber for use in prying said fmger member away from said
clamped member to permit the removal or repositioning
thereof, said tab means being in the form of a strip having
at least one flat surface, the flat surface of said tab means
being positioned directly opposite an-inside wall of said
box,
means for establishing a limiting position to the bending of
said finger member comprising a projection formed on a
829
830
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
■urface of said finger member facing towards the interior
of said box, and
strip means extending from an inner wal] of said box against
which the projection abuts with the finger member in said
limiting position,
the member passing from the outside to the inside of the box
being clamped in said aperture between the finger member
and the wall portions forming said aperture.
4,436,993
BUS BAR ASSEMBLY WITH DISCRETE CAPACITOR
ELEMENTS
Michael M. Gottlieb, Knudnem, Belgiimi, asslsiior to Rogers
Corporatioii, Rogers, Conn.
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Scr. No. 24932
lot CL^ HOIB 7/00
MS, CL 174—72 B 9 n.im.
4,436,954
STEEL4X>RED ALUMINUM CABLE
Gjrula KadeijdK, Birthory LaJ6/a, 3S32 Mlakole, m; Albert
Veres, Selyowet uJJLl, 3527 Mlikolc; Iitru Btfkocsy.
Komnlin aJ,, 3530 Miakok, aid Jam f.— «.«ir Bars.
thegyaUa 11.S4., 3532 Miskok, m, aU of Hoavvy
CoBtiBnatioB of Ser. No. 135,514, Mar. 31, 1980, abaadoaed,
wUch is a coatiaaatioB of Scr. No. 934,588, Aag. 17, 1978,
abaadoaed. lUs appUcatioa Aag. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,191
Claiais priority, applicatioa Haagary, Aag. 19, 1977, DE 939
lat a? HOIB 5/10
UA a 174—128 R 10 ciaiBM
1. A bus bar assembly including:
centrally disposed electrically insulating spacer means hav-
ing at least one opening therein;
capacitor means in said opening in said spacer means, said
capacitor means including a layer of dielectric material
having a pair of opposed first and second planar surfaces
with first and second respective electrically conductive
layers on each of said planar surfaces;
first and second bus bar means positioned on opposite sides
of said capacitor means;
first and second means for connecting said first and second
bus bar means respectively to the conductive layers on
each of said first and second planar surfaces of said capaci-
tor means; and
said first and second connecting means being comprised of
an assembly of a conductor on a flexible substrate, with
the conductor thereof in electrical contact with said first
and second conductive layers, respectively, of said capaci-
tor means, and said assembUes retaining said capacitor
means in the bus bar assembly.
6. A high c^>acitance bus bar assembly including:
centrally disposed electrically insulating spacer means hav-
ing first and second opposed planar surfaces and at lease
one opening therein;
capacitor means in said opening in said spacer means, said
capacitor means having a layer of dielectric material with
fint and second opposed planar surfaces with electrically
conductive layers thereon;
first and second bus bar means, said first bus bar means being
on said first surface of said spacer means and said second
bus bar means being on said second surface of said spacer
means; and
each of said bus bar means being comprised of an assembly
of a flexible nonconductive substrate and a conductor on
the substrate, the conductor of said first bus bar means
bridging said opening in said spacer means on said first
surface of said spacer means and being in electrical
contact with the electrically conductive layer on said first
planar surface of said capacitor means, and the conductor
of said second bus bar means bridging said opening in said
spacer means on said second surface of said spacer means
and being in electrical contact with the electrically con-
ductive layer of said second planar surface of said capaci-
tor means.
1. A steel-cored aluminum cable for electric power conduc-
tion, comprising a steel core including a plurality of steel wires,
an aluminium coating disposed all around the wires and formed
from an aluminium sheet having an inner surface pressed into
direct contact therewith and a substantially cylindrical outer
surface and a plurality of aluminium staples disposed around
the aluminium coating ans upset into direct contact with the
cylindrical outer surface of the aluminium coating along the
entire innermost circumferential surface of the aluminium
staples to impart a trapezoidal cross-section to each of the
staples.
4,434,955
TERMINAL ASSEMBLY
Jaam C Kyle, 2547 Fliher Rd., Roaebarg, Oreg. 97470
Filed May 15, 1981, Scr. No. 264,066
lat a.3 HOIB 17/26: C03C 27/02. 3/22
\}S. CL 174—152 GM 23 Claiais
9. In combination,
a ferrule,
a terminal pin disposed in spaced relationship to the ferrule,
first layers made from a first ceramic insulating material and
disposed in spaced relationship to one another in the space
between the terminal pin and the ferrule and fused to
adjacent ones of the terminal pin and the ferrule, the first
ceramic insulating material having properties of with-
standing considerable pressures without any deterioration
in the fused relationship with the terminal pin and the
ferrule, and
second layers made from a second ceramic insulating mate-
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
831
rial and disposed in spaced relationship in the space be-
tween the terminal pin and the ferrule and between the
first biyers and fiised to adjacent ones of the terminal pin
and the ferrule and the first layers, the second ceramic
insulating material having properties of withstanding
elevated temperatures without any deterioration in the
fused relationship with the terminal pin and the ferrule.
4,436,956
SWITCHABLE BANDPASS FILTER
Paal T. Sehreiber, Fort Worth, Tex., aasigaor to Taady Corpora-
tioB, Forth Worth, Tcz.
Filed Dec 29, 1981, Scr. No. 335,553
lat a.} H03H U/12
MS. CL 179—2 C 10 riaiif
-PiS^^
1. An electronic bandpass filter for use in a device which
requires bandpass filtering with at least two distinct center
frequencies and which generates a control signal to select said
center frequency, said filter having an input for receiving
signals from said device and comprising,
at least one filter section having an active signal gain element
and at least two passive frequency selecting elementt
means responsive to said control signal for selectively con-
necting said frequency selecting elements to said active
element to select the center frequency of said filter, and
gain means connected in series with said input and said filter
section and having a signal gain relative to the signal gain
of said filter section so that substantially the entire signal
gain of said filter results from said gain means.
4,436,957
TELEPHONE SECURITY SYSTEM FOR CORDLESS
TELEPHONY
Fhuric J. Mazza, Edisoa, aad Joha DeFIUppis, Sonth Amboy,
both of N J., assigBors to lateraatioaal Tclepboae aad Tele-
graph Corporatioa, New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 22, 1981, Scr. No. 333,528
lat a.1 H04M 1/66: H04Q 7/04
MS. a. 179—2 EA 17 Claiais
1. In a cordless telephone system of the type having a base
unit coupled to a telephone line and for transmitting to and
receiving signals from a remote unit associated with said base
unit, said remote unit also capable of transmitting to and re-
ceiving signals from said base unit, said base unit capable of
causing said telephone line to go "ofT-hook" when requested
by said remote unit to cause dial tone to be transmitted to said
remote unit the combination therewith of ^>paFatus for pre-
venting the transmission of dial tone from said base unit to said
remote unit until authorized, said apparatus comprising:
means for storing a predetermined signal code in said base
unit;
means located in said base unit for receiving signals transmit-
ted by said remote unit when it is desired to transmit a dial
tone to said remote unit from said base unit said signals
including signals indicative of said predetermined code,
and said means for receiving said signals including a first
timing circuit operative to provide a timing interval of a
given duration when a transition pulse is detected indica-
tive of a dial signal, whereby if additional pulses are not
received during said interval said telephone is inhibited
from receiving said dial tone;
means associated with said base unit for comparing said
signals received from said remote unit with said stored
signals indicative of said predetermined signal code in
order to detect a favorable comparison therebetween; and
means for activating said telephone line to transmit said dial
tone from said base unit to said remote unit when a favor-
able comparison is made.
4,436,958
SYSTEM USING THE TELEPHONE NETWORK TO
CONTROL LOCKS AT A NUMBER OF REMOTE
LOCATIONS
Robert C. Haasca, Orhuid Park, aad Paal G. Novorolaky, Carol
Strcaat both of HI., assigaors to Westcra Electric Compaay,
lac. New York, N.Y.
FUcd Jaa. 30, 1982, Scr. No. 393,992
lat d} H04M 11/00
MS. a. 179—2 A 16 n«ii—
-Xn^
-M.
1. A system for selectively operating a device in response to
a sequence of telephone call multifrequency dial pulses, which
comprises:
means responsive to each multifrequency dial pulse for
generating a transfer signal;
a sequence circuit responsive to second and third telephone
call multifrequency dial pulses and a termination of each
accompanying transfer signal for producing output sig-
nals;
a first timing circuit operated by a first of said sequence
telephone multifrequency call dial pulses for producing an
enabling signal that enables said sequence circuit to re-
spond to said second and third telephone call dial pulses
within a first predetermined time; and
a second timing circuit responsive to operation of said se-
832
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
quence circuit for operating the device for a second prede-
termined period of time whereafter the second timing
circuit reverts to an initial setting.
AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE ANSWERING DEVICE
Takaahi Nakatsnyama, Kawaiaki« and Yoshitomo Nakano, To-
kyo, both of Japan, asiignon to Sony Corporation, Tokyo,
Japan
FUed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,189
Claimi priority, appUcation Japan, Jon. 9, 1980, 55-77483
Int CL3 A04M 11/10
VS. a. 179-6.09 19 Claims
4,436,960
TELEPHONE RINGING SIGNAL GENERATOR
William R. Harmon, Jr., Burlington, N.C., aaiignor to Bell
Telqihone Laboratoriea, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N J.
Filed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,224
Int CL' H04M 5/12
UA a. 179-51 AA 8 claims
-A-
-A
-trS- ERASE
Ui
IL
E
I
liL
'-(V|)
iL
Ii!
ra
:K.,
^^T. ERASe
Ul
4 Li,
GBTIOl
— t^
«•'
■43
ITWT l/K/TW J
-m
a
w
m "
i^.M^ijffl;^-^[^.
1. A method of automatically answering phone calls on a
phone line and recording messages from calling parties in
sequence on a single magnetic tape with a magnetic tape device
having a stop mode, a rewind mode, a forward mode, and al
fast-forward mode comprising the steps of:
providing a magnetic tape having recorded thereon an out-
going message and a control signal indicating the end of
said outgoing message;
automatically coupling the device to the phone line upon
detection of a ringing signal on the phone line;
setting the device into its forward mode and playing said
prerecorded outgoing message;
detecting the length of advance of said magnetic tape, with
values representing the length of advance at the beginning
and end of the outgoing message and at the end of any
previously recorded incoming message being stored,
wherein said stored value representing the length of ad-
vance at the end of said outgoing message is determined
by using said control signal;
comparing the length of advance of said magnetic tape with
said stored values and when said length corresponding to
the end of the outgoing message is reached and if no
previous incoming messages have been recorded, record-
ing in said track any incoming message from the calling
party, but if there have been previously recorded any such
incoming messages, setting said device into its fast-for-
ward mode until the length of advance corresponding to
the end of the last such previously-recorded incoming
message is detected, and then setting said device into its
forward mode and recording the incoming message from
the calling party;
upon termination of the incoming message, storing the value
representing the length of advance at the end thereof, and
setting the device into its rewind mode;
detecting said length of advance as said tape is rewound, and
comparing said detected length of advance with said
stored values; and
when said detected length of advance corresponds to the
stored value representing the beginning of said outgoing
message, setting said device into its stop mode, thereby
conditioning the device to greet any subsequent calling
parties by playing back said recorded outgoing message.
1. Apparatus for generating a telephone ringing signal com-
prising a source of an alternating current input signal, control
means responsive to the input signal for generating first and
second control signals, each control signal having an active
level and an inactive level, first means responsive to the first
control signal for supplying a current to the subscriber's line
during at least a time interval in which the first control signal
subsists at an active level, second means responsive to the
second control signal for supplying a current to the subscrib-
er's line during at least a time interval in which the second
control signal subsists at an active level, the current from the
first means being in an opposite direction to the current from
the second means, the first control signal having a frequency
equal to the frequency of the second control signal, the fre-
quency of the first or second control signal being substantially
equal to the frequency of the ringing signal, and the frequency
of the ringing signal being substantially less than the frequency
of the alternating current input signal.
4,436,961
COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM CONNECTING CIRCUIT
FOR CONTROLLING DERIVATION OF OPERATING
POWER FROM SUBSCRIBER UNE CURRENT
Thomas Heilig, Spiegelberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH, Frankfurt am Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 285^67
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 23.
1980, 3027783
Int. a.J H04B 1/58; H04M 1/76. 19/00
U.S. a. 179—77 4 Claims
1. A circuit arrangement for connecting a communications
set, defining a subscriber loop containing a load to be supplied
with operating power, to a subscriber line of a subscription
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
833
commumcation network in which each subscriber line includes
two wires between which the communications set is conduc-
tively connected, said circuit arrangement comprising: an
operational amplifier having a noninverting input, an inverting
input and an output; a setting transistor connected to have iu
conductive state controlled by the signal at said amplifier
output and connected for influencing the current flowing
between the two wires of the associated line and through the
subscriber loop; a voltoge divider connected between the two
wires of the subscriber line and having a center Up connected
to the inverting input of said amplifier for applying to said
amplifier inverting input a voltage proportional to the volUge
between the two wires of the associated line ; a measuring
resistor connected to conduct the current flowing through the
subscriber loop and connected between one wire of the line
and the noninverting input of said amplifier; a source of a
reference voltage connected between said measuring resistor
and said noninverting input of said amplifier; and a second
resistor connected between said inverting input of said ampli-
fier and the end of said reference voltage source remote from
said amplifier noninverting input; and wherein the load to be
supplied with operating power is connected in series between
said transistor and one wire of the associated line.
4,436,963
IMPUED PRINCIPAL ADDRESSING IN A CALL
COVERAGE ARRANGEMENT
Jennie L. Cottrell, Arrada; Richard A. Darit, Boulder; Soaan K.
Harris, Northgleaa; Bernard R. Jonca, Arrada, and John Y
Payseur, Thornton, aU of Colo., aaiigBora to Bdl Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray HiU, N J,
FUed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,423
lat a.} H04M 3/50
UA a 179-18 B 18 Claims
r
^
-cnb
pi"Xjp-"'
L":
I »u«iM i«Mna
-gtt^j
few-
4,436,962
CALL COVERAGE ARRANGEMENT
Richard A. Daria, Boulder, Susan K. Harris, Nortiiglenn, and
Bernard R. Jones, Arrada, aU of Colo., assignors to BcU
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray HUl, N J.
FUed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,422
iBt a.3 H04M 3/50: H04Q 3/64
U.S. a. 179-18 B 38 chdms
-A
m
-A
r
III,
1 MUWim IMCOW 1
1 1 I 1 MM 1 '
("
J
1
-H^ 1 — SSm\ \
1 '"
>-
r
1
'•III !.|i| 1
..XQ-
'-IH
a:
am
,m
'•■'1
[hi
■KM
nr
. m
mam nttil
t
0-
1. A method of providing call coverage service for a princi-
pal sUtion in a telephone system having a storage memory and
serving a plurality of stations, comprising the steps of
storing call coverage criteria in memory specifying condi-
tions under which calls directed to the principal station
will be redirected to coverage,
storing in memory identifications of a plurality of call cover-
ing stations for the principal sUtion and an order of prefer-
ence of the call covering stations, and
in response to a call intended for the principal sUtion from a
caUing sUtion and satisfying the coverage criteria, redi-
recting the call to coverage from the principal sUtion
sequentially to each of the covering sutions in the order of
preference until the call is answered or abandoned.
1. In a telephone system having a storage memory and serv-
ing a plurality of telephone sutions, a method of providing call
handling operations at a call covering sUtion, comprising th«
steps of r a ^
redirecting calls intended for ones of a prescribed group of
principal sutions to the call covering sution under pre-
scribed circumstances,
automatically identifying an intended principal sution re-
sponsive to a signal from the covering sution on a said call
redirected to the covering sution, and
executing a call processing operation specified by the signal
with respect to the principal sution identified in the imme-
diately preceding step.
4,436,964
HooKswrrcH mechanism for telephone
INSTRUMENT
Ste?e W. Haskins, Corintik, Miss., aaiignor to International
Telephone and Telegraph Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,179
Int. a.J HOIH 21/06. 21/24. 21/82; H04M 1/08
U.S. a. 179-164 pctaiBM
1. An electrical hookswitch mechanism, for use in a tele-
phone instrument for actuating a plurality of contact spring
sets on each operation of the mechanism, comprising: an actu-
ating lever for said mechanism, a plurality of sett of leaf
springs, each spring comprising an elongated body portion
with a contact at one end thereof stepped from the body por-
tion, each set of springs including a spring in a fuit parallel
alignment and a spring in a second parallel alignment, a rout-
able camshaft positioned between the first and second align-
834
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
ments, a plurality of cams on said camshaft with each cam
petitioned between springs of a set along the body portion
thereof, first and second oppositely directed lobes on each
cam, each said lobe having a spring engaging surface adaptpd
to engage a respective one of the springs of the set between
which the cam is positioned, an enclosing housing surrounding
said springs and cams, with lateral extensions of said camshaft
extending out of said housing at each end to enable coupling of
the camshaft to said actuating lever for causing rotation of said
camshaft and consequent actuation of spring contacts in re-
sponse to movement of said actuating lever, and shaft means
for pivoting said lever spaced from and generally parallel to
the axis of the camshaft and coupled thereto for rotation of said
camshaft responsive to pivotal movement of the lever.
4.436.966
CONFERENCE MICROPHONE UNIT
Radaada Botroa, Nepcan, Canada, MrigMNr to Dvmw. Imc^
Hanrard,IlL
Fllad Mar. 15. 1982. S«>. No. 38*J93
lat 0.3 H04R 19/04. 1/32
VS. a. 179—121 D 9 ri.i—
4.436.965
SEALING MEANS FOR TELEPHONE COVER DEVICE
Mihoa Mom, Fort Lee. N J., aadgnor to APM Corporation.
Eaglewood, N J.
CoatiniiatkMi-ia.part of Ser. No. 236.757, Feb. 23. 1981, and a
coatiaiiatkw-ia-part of Ser. No. 61.647, May 7, 1981, and a
cootiBBatioB-iB-part of Ser. No. 286.063, JbL 23, 1981. This
appUcatioB Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299.509
iBt O.} H02M 1/23
V& a. 179—184 8 rirf—
\0^^
it-
1. A microphone unit comprising a bidirectional acousto*
electric transducer of the cosine-response type disposed in
proximity to, and between, two dish-like back-to-back sound
collectors each having an aperture therein exposing one of two
active, opposite surfaces of said acousto-electric transducer,
whereby said microphone unit exhibiu substantially rotational
symmetry around a central axis of bidirectionality.
4.436.967
TELEPHONE LOCK
Eric S. Cohen, c/o Coae TechBology Corp.. 15 E. 40th St., New
York. N.Y. 10019
Filed Mar. 11. 1982, Ser. No. 357.306
iBt a.} H04M 1/66
VS. CL 179—189 R 9 n.i—
1. A protective cover for the push-button array of a push-
button telephone set, comprising:
a flexible elastomeric sheet having a grid of upwardly-
directed pockets, each of said pockets being defined by
substantially vertical side-walls rising above the main
plane of said sheet and an upper top portion extending
across the tops of said vertical walls, the adjacent vertical
walls of adjacent pockets being spaced from each other;
said pockets thereby extending above the said plane of
said sheet and being open at the lower end for receiving
each of the buttons of said array and thereby overlying the
corresponding array of push-buttons on said telephone;
said top portion of each said pocket being provided with
an upwardly protruding portion, the lateral periphery of
which is inward of said vertical walls; said pockets being
elastically depressible independently of one another
toward their open ends, to permit individual displacement
of the underlying telephone set push-buttons received in
said pockets; said sheet including a skirt portion extending
laterally beyond said grid and said sheet being continuous
between its lateral edges, wherd)y said entire push-button
amy is overlaid by said cover and thereby protected from
spillage of Uquids or other environmental hazards; and
a gasket for effectively sealing said protective cover to said
telephone set, said gasket being ad^ted to extend com-
pletely around the periphery of the elastomeric sheet, said
gasket being flexible and adherent to the elastomeric sheet
and the tdephone set; and said gasket having covers on
oppoahe sides thereof which are removable for attach-
ment of the gasket, by the application of pressure, to the
elastomeric sheet and the telephooe set, respectively.
1. A lock for a telephone of the type having apertured caps
threadedly mounted at opposite end regions of a handset, each
cap forming an annular generally U-shaped, externally-open
groove between the end face of the respective cap and the
handset, said lock comprising:
(a) a locking cup mountable over one of the caps, said lock-
ing cup having a shield portion for overlying the apertures
in said one cap, and an annular generally cylindrical skirt
portion depending from the shield portion and covering
the groove formed by said one cap to thereby prevent
across to the groove;
G>) means for preventing sound firom passing through the
apertam of said one cap when the locking cup is mounted
thereon; 1^
(c) means on the locking cup for locking the same on said
one cap, said locking means including a stationary locking
element fixedly mounted on the skirt portion and extend-
ing into and within the groove a predetermined location
along the periphery of the groove, and a manually-
operated movable locking element mounted on the lock-
ing cup for dispbcement between a retracted position in
which the movable locking element is located exteriorly
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
83S
of the groove, and a locked position in which the movable
locking element extends into and within the groove and
lockingly engages said one cap at another location along
the periphery of the groove which is spaced remotely
from said predetermined location, to thereby prevent
unauthorized use of the telephone.
4.436.968
MULTIPLE POSITION SWITCH
Joe D. GiBlie. P.O. Box 51350, Palo Alto. Calif. 94303
Filed Dec. 10. 1981, Ser. No. 329,342
iBt a.J HOIH 9/Oa 15/00, 19/00
vs. CL 200—5 R 21 Gains
(b) presetting elemenU to be inserted to fit into said plug-in
portions of said scale plate,
(c) an operating lever shifted by said presetting elemenU to
turn a switch on,
(d) said scale plate comprising a plastic guide portion to
serve to position said presetting elementt and to keep the
position of each presetting element inserted in the pre-
scribed position, and
(e) a metallic body inserted in said plutic guide portion of
said scale plate in such manner that the periphery of the
metallic body extrudes into said slott and grooves,
whereby said presetting elements resiliently engage the
periphery of said metallic body.
4.436,970
SWITCH ASSEMBLIES
WllUan F. Swisher, Carthage, Dl., aaaigBor to Metbodc Elec-
trooica. Inc., Chicago, Dl.
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,496
iBt ai HOIH 9/00. 1/06
VS. CL 200-61 J6 15 i
1. A switch for connecting a plurality of conductors to one
of a plurality of ports, comprising in combination:
a. at least one first connector of the plug-in type having a
plurality of contacU therein, said contacts being connected
to individual wires of flexible multiple conductors,
b. a plurality of complementary second connectors of the
plug-in type mounted on a frame and facing in the same
direction, each having contacts complementary to the
contacts of a first connector,
c. a lever arm attached to said first connector and mounted for
restricted movement on said frame and having a handle
thereon, whereby:
d. an operator can actuate said handle to move said first con-
nector to a selected one of said second connectors and plug
said connectors together.
4.436.969
TIMING DEVICE FOR TIME SWITCH
YoaUaU MotoU. HlroaUau. Japan, aaslpMr to MltsuMshl
DeaU Kaboahlki Kaiaha. Tokyo. Japan
Filed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368.127
OafaBs priority, applkatioa Japan. Apr. IS, 1981, 5647393;
Apr. 15. 1981. 56.57394
iBt aJ HOIH 7/Oa 43/00- F16H 53/00
VS. CL 200-38 R 7 fi,t.».
1. A timing device for time switch comprising:
(a) a scale plate rotated at a constant rate and having plug-in
portions involving slots and grooves corresponding to a
time scale on the circumferential part thereof,
6. A switch assembly comprising:
body means supporting first and second electrical contacU in
normally open relationship,
said first electrical contact having a raised tactile area capa-
ble of being deformed for movement in response to the
application of a force thereto,
an actuator member mounted adjacent said tactile area to
apply a force thereto and cause said first electrical contact
to contact said second contact for creating an electrical
connection,
said tactile area being formed by a warped section of said
first electrical contact,
said first electrical contact having a slit provided on one side
of said warped section to separate said warped section
from a border section adjacent an edge of said first electri-
cal contact, said first electrical contact having at least one
connecting section joining said border section at one end
of said slit, and
the length of said border section is physically shortened
relative to said warped section to create said raised tactile
area.
4.436.971
SNAP-IN SWrrCH MOUNTING STRUCTURE
Syng N. KiBi, HoAbbb Eatataa. DL, Mri«Mr to Wleo Corpora-
tioB, Nilaa. DL
FUod Apr. 23. 1982. Ser. No. 371,513
iBt a.) H02B 5/00
VS. CL 200-295 19
<0
8. Structure for mounting a leaf spring switch having a body
836
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
which carries at least two leaf springs, said body having a
height and a width and a length, said mounting structure com-
prising two side abutments spaced apart a distance about equal
to the width of the body, upper and lower abutments spaced
apart a distance about equal to the height of the body, front and
rear abutments spaced apart a distance about equal to the
length of the body, and an upwardly and rearwardly directed
ramp in front of said rear abutment, the leaf spring switch
being mounted by placing the body on top of said front abut-
ment and beneath said upper abutment and between said side
abutments, then pushing the body rearwardly until engage-
ment with said ramp and continuing to push said body rear-
wardly to cause said body to ride up said ramp and onto said
lower abutment.
laa
lae
1. In a circuit protector or the like
a handle,
a case from which said handle extends,
an electrical lamp within said handle,
a first pair of terminals secured to said handle and to said
lamp,
a second pair of terminals carried by said case,
electrical leads extending from said second pair of terminals
to a pair of springs,
said springs having end portions engageable by said first pair
of terminals,
said springs are carried by a post integral with said case,
said end portions rest upon a boss formed on said case,
said first pair of terminals press upon said end portions to
close the circuit to said lamp,
said springs are formed by a plurality of coils and said coils
are mounted about said post,
an insulating spacer between said coils, and
said electrical leads have end portions stripped of insulation
and wedged between adjacent coils of said springs.
4,436,973
HIGH FREQUENCY HEATING APPLIANCE WITH AN
ANTENNA AND STIRRER ASSEMBLY
Nobno Ikeda, and Hiroftimi Yoahimnra, both of Nara, Japan,
aadgnors to Matsushita Electric Indnstrial Co., Ltd., Osaka,
Japan
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,601
aaims priority, appUcation Japan, May 15, 1981, 56-73701
iBt a.3 H05B 6/74
MS. CL 21»-10J5 F 7 Claims
1. A high frequency heating appliance comprising:
a heating chamber having a plurality of walls and disposed in
a main body of said appliance;
a high frequency oscillator, having a dipole antenna and
having a stirrer fan which is made from a metallic plate
and which is used for stirring high frequency waves radi-
ated from said high frequency oscillator toward the inte-
rior of said heating chamber, said stirrer fan having a
rotary shaft concentric with said dipole antenna;
wherein said stirrer fan includes a plurality of stirrer bUdes
and further includes at least one vertical metallic segment
which is arranged so as to be substantially parallel to said
dipole antenna and located adjacent thereto, said at least
one vertical segment of said stirrer fan further including a
4,436,972
CIRCUIT PROTECTOR HAVING A LAMP WITHIN ITS
HANDLE AND TERMINALS THEREFOR
WilliaiB F. Scaakw, New Hope, Pa., assignor to Heinemann
Electric Company, LawrenceriUe, N J.
CoBtioiiation-iB-part of Ser. No. 183,959, Sep. 3, 1980, Pat No.
4438,586. This application Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,155
Int. a.} HOIH 9/16
MS. a 20(^-315 2 Claims
horizontal metallic subsegment which is arranged so as to
be substantially parallel to a wall of said heating chamber
having said dipole antenna installed thereon, and wherein
the distance between said horizontal metallic subsegment
and said wall of the heating chamber is selected to be
shorter than i of the wavelength of said high frequency
waves;
and wherein said at least one vertical metallic segment is
disposed in a direction which is substantially normal to the
direction of the high frequency waves radiated from said
dipole antenna.
4,436,974
PIPE RESISTANCE BUTT WELDING APPARATUS
Vladimir K. Lebedeir; Sergei L Knchnk-Yatsenko; Vastly A.
Sakhamor, Boris A. Galian; Grigory B. Asoyants, and Vladi-
mlr L Tishora, aU of Klcr, U.S.S.R., assignors to Institat
Etektrosrarki Imeni E.O.Patona Akademii Nank Ukrainskoi
SSR, Kiev, U.S.S.R.
Filed Ang. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,416
Int a.J B23K 11/04, 37/04
MS. a. 219-66 3 Claims
S.l !0 ♦
n n
1. A pipe resistance butt welding apparatus comprising:
(a) a body having an elongated carrying member;
(b) an internal expanding clamp including current-feeding
shoes and rigidly attached to said body;
(c) an internal expanding clamp includmg current-feeding
shoes and movably mounted on said elongated carrying
member for axial motion;
(d) a drive intended to enable reciprocating motion of said
internal expanding chunp mounted on the elongated car-
rying member;
(e) a trimming mechanism for removing flash, mounted on at
least one of said internal expanding clamps;
(0 centering supporting rollers mounted on the body by
means of spring-loaded levers;
(g) three-arm rockers rotatably mounted on said body,
spring-loaded, and having three arms;
(h) driving wheels mounted on the first arms of said three-
arm rockers so as to be movable between first positions
engaged with the internal surface of pipe being welded
and second positions disengaged from the internal surface;
(i) a rotation drive enabUng rotation of said wheels and
mounted on said body;
(j) additional supporting rollers mounted on the second arms
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
837
of said three-arm rockers so as to movable between posi-
tions disengaged from the internal surface and positions
engaged with the internal surface, said additional support-
ing rollers being in the disengaged positions thereof when
said driving wheels are in engaged positions and said
additional supporting rollers being in the engaged posi-
tions thereof when said driving wheels are in disengaged
positions; and
(k) a power cylinder mounted on said body and having a rod
connected with the third arms of said three-arm rockers
for controlling movement of said three-arm rockers.
material from the workpiece while permitting said ma-
chining electrode face to erosively wear; and
4,436,975
WIRE-CUT, ELECTRIC DISCHARGE MACHINING
METHOD
Yoshiyuki Nomura; Kanemasa Okuda, both of Hino, and Hisao
Ishii, Mitaka, all of Japan, assignors to Fi^itsu Fanuc Lim-
ited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,188
Gaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 4, 1980, 55-106857
Int. a.5 B23P 1/08
U.S. a. 219—69 W
sensing the erosive wear of said tool electrode by sensing a
change in the mode of said vibrations.
4 436 977
3 Qaims INERT GAS DISTRIBUTOR* ATTACHMENT FOR ARC
WELDING TORCHES
• Daniel L. Cash, Rte. 2 Box 667, Corbett, Oreg. 97019, and Frank
L. Stoddard, 3510 NE. Dorchester Way, Corvallis, Oreg.
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,700
Int. a.3 B23K 9/16
U.S. a. 219-75 6 aaims
1. A wire-cut, electric discharge machining method in which
a wire is inserted into a machining start hole made in a work-
piece to start electric discharge machining from the machining
start hole, comprising the steps of:
(a) forming a bushing of a conductive material; and
(b) increasing the conductivity of the start hole by pressing
the bushing into a surt hole made in the workpiece to
provide the machining start hole.
4,436,976
ELECTROEROSION MACHINING METHOD AND
APPARATUS WITH AUTOMATIC
VIBRATIONS-SENSING ELECTRODE WEAR
COMPENSATION
Kiyoshi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,432
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 27, 1980, 55-149368
Int. a.J B23P 7/00. 1/12
U.S. a. 219-69 V 22 Qaims
1. A method of electroerosively machining a workpiece
with a tool electrode, comprising the steps of:
supporting said tool electrode to bring its free end portion
defining a machining electrode face into spaced Juxtaposi-
tion with the workpiece and to define a machining gap
therewith;
flooding said machining gap with a machining liquid;
causing said free end portion of the tool electrode to trans-
versely vibrate at a given frequency;
passing an erosion machining current between said tool
electrode and said workpiece to electroerosively remove
1. For use with an inert gas arc welding torch, an inert gas
distributor comprising:
(a) a hollow housing having an open bottom side,
(b) gas inlet means on the housing for communicating a
source of inert gas with the interior of the housing for exit
through said open bottom side, and
(c) support means pivoUlly engaging the housing for sup-
porting the same,
(d) the support means being arranged for mounting on an
inert gas arc welding torch to dispose the housing adja-
cent the torch electrode and trailing the direction of
movement of the torch during welding for directing inert
gas over a sufficient length of produced weld to allow the
weld to cool to a temperature at which it is not substan-
tially adversely effected by atmospheric oxygen and nitro-
gen,
(e) the pivoul engagement of the support means with the
housing being arranged to allow pivoul movement of the
torch relative to the housing on an axis substantially per-
pendicular to the direction of movement of the torch
during welding for adjusting the angle of the torch while
maintaining the open bottom end of the housing cicisely
adjacent or in sliding contact with the surface of the work
being welded.
1040 O.G.— 31
838
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,436,978
SAMPLING DEVICE
Jerome H. Lemelson, 85 Rector St., Metuchen, N J. 08840
Continiiation-in-|Mrt of Ser. No. 831,778, Aug. 18, 1977, Pat.
No. 4,237,364. Thta appUcation Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,313
Int. a.3 B23K 27/00
MS. a. 219-121 LC 2 Claims
1. In a tool for operating on work with intense radiation, the
combination comprising:
a housing having an opening therein,
means supported within said housing for generating an in-
tense radiant energy beam and directing said radiant en-
ergy beam through said opening at work located adjacent
said opening wherein said beam is of sufficient intensity to
vaporize material located in alignment with said opening,
a sampling conduit supported by said housing adjacent said
opening in said housing and having an opening for receiv-
ing material vaporized by said intense radiant energy
beam intersecting work adjacent said opening,
suction means connected to said conduit for generating and
applying suction pressure to said conduit for drawing
material vaporized adjacent said opening into said con-
duit,
means supported by said housing for receiving and retaining
material drawn through said conduit, and
a material analyzing means connected to receive material
drawn by said suction means through said conduit for
analyzing said material.
4,436,979
APPARATUS FOR CONTINUOUS LASER WELDING
Carl J. NUaen, Hopatcong, N J., assignor to SWS, Incorporated,
Landing. N J.
Filed May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,586
Int. a.J B23K 27/00
U.S. a. 219-121 LC 25 Clainu
» 9 i "» r~
1. Apparatus for continuous laser welding adjacent longitu-
dinally extending edges of generally tubular shaped members
comprising Z-bar guide means for positioning and guiding said
edges as the members are moved toward a welding area with
a laser welding means for welding said edges, and a mandrel
connected to said Z-bar guide means and extending internally
and in the direction of movement of said members, said man-
drel including laser beam dump means positioned adjacent said
welding area for absorbing light from a laser beam produced
by said laser welding means.
4436 980
ELECTRIC ARC WELDING APPARATUS
Norbert Pache, Augsburg, and Karel Mazac, Friedberg, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Industrie-Werke Karls-
ruhe Augsburg Aktiengesellschaft, Augsburg, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,906
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 13.
1980, 3018199
Int. a.} B23K 9/OS
U.S. a. 219-123 10 Qaims
1. An apparatus for the electric arc welding of two annular
workpieces along an endless annular weld seam path lying in a
plane, said apparatus comprising at least two radially extending
flat unipolar magnet cores lying in said plane of said path and
having juxtaposed ends directly forming a magnetizable ring in
the plane of said path and surrounding same, each of said cores
carrying a respective electromagnet coil, mutually juxtaposed
ends of said cores being of circular arc segments forming said
ring directly, the ends of said cores having faces juxtaposed
with said seam end of an area no greater than respective cross
sections of said cores surrounded by said coils said circular arc
segments substantially completely enclosing said path in a
substantially closed ring and having respective chord lengths
of at most the width of the portions of the magnet cores sur-
rounded by said coils in said plane.
4,436,981
VERTICAL DOWN WELDING PROCESS BY GRAVITY
ARC WELDING AND WELDING MACHINE THEREFOR
Noboru Sakamoto; Itaru Yamashita; Satoshi Wada; Kenichi
Yano, and Suehiro Oda, all of Chiba, Japan, assignors to
Kawasaki Steel Corporation, Kobe, Japan
per No. PCr/JP81/00123, § 371 Date Jan. 29, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 29, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO81/03453, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 10, 1981
PCT FUed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 346,074
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 2, 1980, 55-74092;
Jun. 25, 1980, 55.88130[U]; Jun. 25, 1980. 55-88131[U]
Int a? B23K 9/12
U.S. a. 219— 124J2 2 ClaiM
2. A downward welding machine comprising:
a guide rail comprising; a main rail and a sub-rail and dis-
posed upwardly slanted with respect to a vertical weld
line;
said sub-rail terminating at its lower end with the upper end
of said main rail and being adapted such that the angle
between a welding rod and a vertical weld line is continu-
ously increased from an initial angle of at least 20* up to an
angle in a range between 3S* and 80* with a descent of a
welding rod holder supporting said welding rod along
said sub-rail from the upper end to the lower end thereof;
said main rail extending from the lower end of said sub-rail
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
839
being straight so that said angle between 35* and 80*
between said welding rod and vertical weld line is main-
tained while said welding rod holder is lowered along said
main rail from the upper end to the lower end thereof;
said welding rod holder capable of lowering gravity along
said guide rail, said welding rod being securedly set in said
welding rod holder so that it cannot be rotated with re-
spect thereto; and
to the parent metal, said
a support base having a triangular or like shape, the lower
end of said guide rail being supported on said support base
at or in the vicinity of the intersection of two sides thereof
other than the largest side, said support base having mag-
netic holder members attached to its back at the other two
intersection points than said guide rail support point and
also at least two positioning rods extending from its edge
facing said vertical weld line, one end of each said posi-
tioning rod being rotatable with respect to said support
base.
4,436.982
TWO ELECTRODE WELDING WITH DIFFERENT
CURRENTS SUPPLIED TO THE ELECTRODES
Satoshi Kokura, Hitachiota; Masayasu Nibei, Hitachi; HirosU
Wachi, Hitachi; Hiromi Mashida, Hitachi, and Kouaaku
Senda, Hitachi, aU of Japan, aasignors to Hitachi, Ltd., To-
kyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 323,027
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Nov. 21, 1980, 55-163347
Int a.3 B23K 9/09
U.S. a. 219— 130J1 15 Claims
1. A two electrode welding method wherein welding is
carried out by means of arcs struck between two electrodes
and a parent metal, said two electrodes being a leading elec-
trode and a trailing electrode located in side-by-side, spaced-
apart relation in a direction in which the welding surface
advances and movable relative
method comprising the steps of:
passing a welding current alternately to the leading and
trailing electrodes;
controlling the value of a peak current supplied to the lead-
ing electrode to be a value higher than that of a peak
current supplied to the trailing electrode;
controlling the value of a time distribution rate of the peak
current supplied to the trailing electrode to be a value
higher than that of a time distribution rate of the peak
current supplied to the leading electrode;
preheating a portion of the parent metal by the heat of the
arc struck between the leading electrode and the parent
metal; and
melting the preheated portion of the parent metal by the heat
of the arc struck between the trailing electrode and the
parent metal when the former has moved to a position
above the preheated portion of the latter.
4,436.983
ELECTRIC WATER HEATER WTTH UPWARDLY
INCLINED ZIG-ZAG FLOW PATH
Leo A. Solobay, 410 Quebec Are., Toronto, Canada M6P 2V4
Continuation of Ser. No. 242,952, Mar. 12, 1981, abandoned.
This application Jan. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 455,087
Int. C\} H05B 1/02. 3/82: F24H 1/20
U.S. a. 219-306 8 Clains
1. An electric water heater having an inlet, an outlet and a
series of consecutive pipe sections in a zig-zag configuration
through which water successively flows in passing from the
inlet to the outlet, the zig-zag configuration being such that,
when the heater is in use with the pipe sections one above the
other, each pipe section is upwardly inclined to the horizontal
at an acute angle of at least about 30 degrees such that water
flows in an upwardly inclined direction through each pipe
section, each pipe section having a first end, a second open end
and a side wall with an opening adjacent to the first end, each
840
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
pipe section having a uniUry tubular member fitted thereon
adjacent said first end, said tubular member having a lateral
tubular extension communicating with said side wall opening,
each pipe section having an electric immersion heater therein
extending longitudinally of the pipe section from the first end
thereof and past which water passing through the pipe section
flows, said tubular member supporting the immersion heater at
said first end, the lateral tubular extension of the tubular mem-
ber on the first pipe section in the series being connected to one
of said inlet and outlet, the second open end of each pipe
section in the series other than the last being connected to the
lateral tubular extension of the tubular member on the next
pipe section in the series, and the second open end of the last
pipe section in the series being connected to the other of said
inlet and outlet.
source thereby to cause said zone to sweep the surface of
a wafer held by said chuck;
air track means for transporting wafers to be treated to said
chuck at said first station; and
4 436 984
ELECTRIC ARC DISCHARGE APPARATUS
Alan L. Hare, and Allan P. George, both of Cleveland, England,
assignors to Tioxide Group PLC, Cleveland, England
Filed Nov. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 442,715
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 10, 1981,
ol3/291
Int. a.3 H05B 7/18
U.S. a 219-383 9 Qaims
air track means for taking treated wafers away from said
chuck at said second station.
"-^
4,436,986
ELECTRIC BLANKET SAFETY ORCUIT
Gordon S. Carlson, Northbrook, III., assignor to Sunbeam Cor-
poration, Oak Brook, III.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,196
Int. a.3 H05B 1/02
U.S. a. 219-505 ,7 Qaims
X
^
0 V.
38 40
XL
26
34—
\
'< 16
iM^^ni^HMMnl
46
—M^~
50
=^
z^
-»^w■
.32
—94
32
■^
SS
-48
22
—44
36
1. An electric discharge apparatus which comprises a power
supply comprising a multi-phase transformer, arc stabilisation
means and two or more rectifier bridges each bridge providing
a pair of power outputs, a first pair of electrodes with one of
said first pair of electrodes electrically connected to one power
output of a first selected pair of power outputs and the other of
said first pair of electrodes electrically connected to the other
power output of said first selected pair of power outputs and a
second pair of electrodes with one of said second pair of elec-
trodes electrically connected to one power output of a second
selected pair of power outputs different from the said first
selected pair of power outputs and the other of said second pair
of electrodes electrically connected to the other power output
of said second selected pair of outputs.
4,436,985
APPARATUS FOR HEAT TREATING SEMICONDUCTOR
WAFERS
T. Jerome Weber, Mt. View, Calif., assignor to GCA Corpora-
tion, Bedford, Mass.
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 373,978
Int. a.3 F26B i/30: H05B 1/00
U.S. a 219-388 2 Claims
1. Apparatus for heat treating semiconductor wafers, said
apparatus comprising:
infrared source means including a linear high intensity lamp
and a linear reflector focusing radiation from said lamp on
a linear Urget zone;
a vacuum chuck for holding a wafer to be treated;
a heat sink on the opposite side of said zone from said lamp;
means for traversing said chuck through the region between
said source and said sink from a first station on one side of
the course to a second sution on the other side of said
1. In an electrical circuit, the combination comprising a
heating cable including a pair of spaced conductors separated
throughout their lengths by a layer of positive temperature
coefficient resistance material, each of said conductors having
a power supply end and a sensing end, a power supply cord
connected to said cable at said power supply ends of said
conductors to connect said cable to an alternating current
power supply, a current responsive switching means in series
with one of said conductors, a sensing means connected to said
sensing ends of said conductors, said sensing means including a
pair of series connected impedance elements, a pair of gas tube
elements connected in series between said power supply ends
of said conductors, the junction of said impedance elements
and the gas tube elements being connected together, said gas
tube elements being nonconducting under normal operating
conditions and conducting when shorts or open circuit condi-
tions occur in said conductors, said gas tube elements having
sufficient current capacity in the conducting state to activate
said switching means in series with said cable.
4,436,987
WELD CONNECnON FOR PLASTIC PIPE
Alfred Thalmann, and Fritz Reich, both of Uhwiesen, Switzer-
land, assignors to Georg Fischer Aktiengesellschaft, Switzer-
iMd
Filed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,240
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Oct 2, 1981.
6349/81
Int. a.3 H05B i/5S
\}&. a. 219-535 12 Qaiau
1. An apparatus for forming a weld connection with plastic
pipe, comprising
first and second molded plastic parts, each of said parts
having an internal surface corresponding to a peripheral
portion of the pipe being welded such that said internal
surfaces define a cavity for receiving and enclosing the
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
841
pipe, said parts being separated by first and second longi- 4,436,989
tudinally extending clearances; and CASH DRAWER FOR CASH REGISTERS IN TELLERS'
first and second heating mats adjacent said internal surfaces STATIONS, SALES COUNTERS OR THE LIKE
of said first and second parts, respectively, each of said Gcrhardt Schuldt, Oerllnghausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to ADS - Anker GmbH, Bielefeld, Fed. Rep. of Gcr-
many
Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,431
Claims priority, application European Pat. Off., Aug. 14, 1981,
81 106 327
iBt a.J G07G 1/00
UJS. a. 235—22 11 Claims
mats havifig one end portion in one of said clearances and
comprising a resistance wire coated with plastic, said mats
completely covering said internal surfaces and the pipe
periphery to be welded.
4,436,988
SPIRAL BinLAR WELDING SLEEVE
James J. Blumenkranz, Hollywood, Calif., assignor to R A G
Sloane Mfg. Co., Inc., Sun Valley, Calif.
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,158
Int. a.J H05B i/44
U.S. a. 219-544 13 Claims
1. A spiral bifilar welding sleeve for positioning between
two thermoplastic members to be bonded together, said sleeve
comprising;
an elongated thermoplastic sheath of generally rectangular
cross-section, having a pair of short sides and a pair of
long sides;
a pair of electrically conductive wires embedded within said
sheath in a spaced, generally parallel relationship; and
coupling means for electrically coupling said wires together
at one end of said sheath, said wires at the other end being
adapted for connection to an electrical current source,
said sheath being wound into a plurality of turns defining
a generally spiral coil with the short sides of adjacent
turns being bonded together, said sheath being fusible
when electrical current is passed through said wires to
bond the thermoplastic members with respect to each
other.
1. Cash drawer for cash registers in tellers' stations, sales
counters or the like, comprising a slide-in unit and a drawer
tray being movable into and out of said slide-in unit in given
directions; said slide-in unit having vertical side plates at oppo-
site sides thereof, a rib being integral with each of said side
plates extended along said given directions and projecting
toward each other, a rack integral with the top of each of said
ribs, and a roller disposed in vicinity of the front of each of said
side plates; a guide shaft being rotaubly supported at the back
of said drawer tray, a pinion being fastened to each end of said
guide shaft and being in engagement with one of said racks of
said side plates; and said drawer tray having sides and a longi-
tudinal flange integral with each of said sides of said drawer
tray being extended along said given directions and supported
on said rollers when the drawer is opened and closed.
4,436,990
C UNTING DEVICE
Michael R. Saccucci, «>»S Pineda St., Cocoa, Ha. 32922
Filed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 399,883
Int. a.J G06C 27/00
U.S. a. 235—1 R 7 Qaims
1. A device for counting the cups remaining inside a tubular
cup dispensing device, said device being of the type which has
an open lower end and means at said open lower end to permit
one at a time dispensing of cups in a nested column of cups
inside said device while preventing the entire nested column of
cups from falling out of said cup dispensing device all at once,
said cup dispensing device comprising a closed upper end and
spring means to normally urge the column of cups therein
towards said open lower end, said counting device comprising
a shaft and at least one end member fixed at one end of said
shaft, at least one scale means on said shaft starting from said at
least one end member and extending along said shaft away
from said end member, said counting device being so sized as
842
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
to fit into said open lower end of said cup counting device with
said end member in contact with the lowermost one of said
column of nested cups, said shaft having a length sufficiently
long to permit use of said shaft to push via said end member
against said column of cups and to compress said spring means
to iu fully compressed minimum length; and each of said at
least one scale means being calibrated for all of a particular size
and type of cup and for a particular length of cup counting
device and spring means therein; whereby the lower end of
said cup counting device will be positioned with respect to said
scale means in the said fully compressed minimum length
position of said column of cups and of said spring means to
read directly in number of said particular size and type of cups
in said particular cup counting device.
4 436 992
CHECK CONTROLLED METERING DEVICE
Luther G. Sinijian, 1750 S. Ocean U., Ft. Uuderdale, Fla.
33316
Continuation-in-|Mrt of Ser. No. 223,239, Jan. 8, 1981. Thit
application Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,414
Int. a.3 G06F 7/08
U.S. a. 235-381 jci^„.
so
10-^
!X
u
tCNtllM
MCAN*
^^
CNCOOINO
MtANt
4 436 991
BADGE READER USING INFRARED LIGHT
Gordon H. Albert, Larchmont, and Harvey M. Feinman, Bronx,
both of N.Y., asaignors to Sealectro Corporation, Mamaro-
neck, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,789
Int. a.3 G06K 7/10
MS. a. 235-468 8 Gaim.
I»»UT
SI
S4<
MANUAL
INFUT
MEANS
COMPUTINB MIAW
^NOCCtSO*
ft MfMONV
1. Apparatus for determing whether portions of an identifl-
cation badge are relatively opaque or transparent to infrared
radiation upon movement of said badge relative to said appara-
tus comprising:
identification means on said badge including relatively trans-
parent portions having an infrared transmissivity of at
least 2% for passing infrared radiation incident thereon,
and relatively opaque portions having infrared transmis-
sivity of not more than 0.05%;
a source of infrared radiation;
detector means for sensing infrared radiation and producing
an output signal in response thereto;
alignment means for detecting the alignment of said rela-
tively opaque or transparent portions of said badge with
said source and detector means and for producing an
alignment signal upon the occurrence of a predetermined
alignment;
activating means for activating said source to produce a
pulse of infrared radiation having a first pulse width in
response to the production of an alignment signal, which
radiation is sensed by said detector means when a rela-
tively transparent portion of said badge is aligned there-
with;
means for receiving output signals from said detector means
and producing an indication signal in response thereto;
means for utilizing said indication signal in response to a
readout signal; and
dau strobe means for receiving said alignment signal and
producing said readout signal in response thereto, said
readout signal having a second pulse width approximately
one-quarter of that of said first pulse width and being
timed to occur substantially during the last quarter of said
pulse of infrared radiation, whereby the indication signal
is utilized during said last quarter.
1. In a check controlled metering device, such as a check
controlled postage meter, the combination comprising:
an apparatus having check acceptance means for receiving a
check having coded data thereon;
sensing means cooperatively associated with said check
acceptance means for sensing the coded data on a check
received by said acceptance means;
input means associated with said apparatus for inputing data
related to rendering the metering device operable;
computing means including means for receiving and storing
credit data adapted to be coupled to said sensing means
and said input means for receiving said sensed coded data
and said data from said input means and processing the
received data and providing a meter charge code respon-
sive to the received data and credit data stored in said
computing means being in predetermined relation, and
encoding means associated with said check acceptance
means for encoding a check received in said acceptance
means with said meter charge code.
4,436,993
ELECTRONIC KEY
William P. Flies, Bunuville, Minn., assignor to Datakey, Inc.,
Burnsville, Minn.
Filed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,366
Int. Q\? H04Q i/00
U.S. a. 235-382 6 Qaims
1. A key-like device having head and insert-body portions,
the insert-body portion being adapted for insertion into a re-
ceptacle and rotation therein to a "locked" position and includ-
ing:
two sets of generally oppositely disposed spaced grooves
transversely extending over the surface of the insert-body
of the key so as to be in alignment with the rotational
movement of the insert-body when rotated in a receptacle,
an electrical circuit element encapsulated within the key,
a plurality of spaced electrical contacto formed by a plurality
of electrical leads connected to the electrical circuit ele-
ment, each of the leads extending outwardly from the key
body and lying in a respective groove thereby forming a
plurality of spaced electrical contacto on the key body.
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
843
each contact having a certain contact dimension in each
respective groove and defining leading and trailing ends
with respect to the rotational direction of key rotation,
and
at least one switch contact in a respective groove, the switch
contact having a certain contact dimension defined by
leading and trailing ends which is smaller than that of the
spaced electrical contacts, the leading ends of the switch
contact being spaced behind the leading ends of the other
contacts with respect to rotation to the "locked" position
whereby switch contact is 37 made" after the other
contacts are "made."
4,436,994
PHOTOMULTIPLIER DETECTOR PROTECTION
DEVICE AND METHOD
James G. Van Vllet, U Habra, and James R. Brown,
Huntington Beach, both of Calif., assignors to Beckman In-
struments, Inc., Fullerton, Calif.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,810
Int. a.J HOIJ n/50
U.S. a. 250—207 10 Qaims
OnN LOV VClTMC
CONTMLLID
fmrnxf.
I
1. An improved photomultiplier detector protection system
wherein an adjustment signal from external means adjusts the
sensitivity of the photomultiplier detector, the system compris-
ing:
a power supply for generating a variable output volUge in
response to a control signal;
a photomultiplier detector responsive to incident light flux
and to the power supply output volUge for generating an
output related to the incident light flux and the magnitude
of the power supply output voltage;
reference means for generating a reference signal propor-
tional to a predetermined photomultiplier detector output;
comparator means responsive to the reference signal and
responsive to the photomultiplier detector output for
comparing the reference signal and the photomultiplier
detector output to generate an output when the reference
signal and the photomultiplier detector output are in a
predetermined relationship;
means for receiving the adjustment signal; and
summing means responsive to the adjustment signal from the
receiving means and to the comparator means output for
generating the control signal by summing the adjustment
signal and the comparator means output.
4 436 995
nBER OPTICS TRANSDUCERS FOR SENSING
PARAMETER MAGNITUDE
James R. Whitten, Scotia, N.Y., assignor to General Electric
Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,266
Int. C\? G02B i/l4
U.S. a. 250-227 11 Claims
1. A transducer for providing an electrical signal of magni-
tude responsive to the magnitude of a mechanical displacement
to be sensed, comprising:
a continuous optical fiber having first and second ends;
transmitter means for introducing a quantity of optical en-
ergy into the first end of said fiber;
detector means, coupled to the second end of said fiber, for
converting the magnitude of optical energy received
thereat to the magnitude of an electrical signal forming the
transducer output;
a fixed member; and
a movable member having a spacing from said fixed member
varying responsive to the magnitude of the mechanical
displacement to be sensed;
said fiber forming at least one loop with each loop formed
about and enclosing both said fixed and movable mem-
bers, and having a variation in the optical attenuation
losses through said fiber due to microbending induced by
a change in the radius-of-curvature of said at least one
fiber loop responsive to a change in the mechanical dis-
placement between said members, to cause a variation in
the detector means output signal.
4,436,996
BOREHOLE COMPENSATED KUT LOG
Dan M. Arnold; Harry D. Smith, Jr., and Ward E. Schultz, all
of Houston, Tex., assignors to Hailiburton Company, Duncan,
OUa.
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265.736
lat, a.J GOIV i/00
U.S. a. 250—256 35 Claims
1. A method of natural gamma ray spectral logging of a well
borehole to determine the relative elemental constituency of
uranium, potassium and thorium in earth formations penetrated
by a well borehole, substantially independently of borehole
conditions, comprising the steps of:
obtaining, with a borehole measurement system standard
individual gamma ray spectra of uranium, potassium and
thorium bearing earth formations penetrated by well bore-
844
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
holes having sundard geometrical and constituent proper-
ties;
obtaining, with a borehole measurement system, an un-
known gamma ray energy spectrum in a measurement
borehole having unknown borehole conditions, said un-
known gamma ray spectrum being divided into gamma
ray intensities measured in at least four energy bands
corresponding to a first energy band containing the 2.61
MeV thorium decay peak, a second energy band contain-
ing the 1.76 MeV uranium decay peak, a third energy
band containing the 1.46 MeV potassium decay peak, and
one or more additional energy bands for monitoring the
shape of said unknown gamma ray spectrum as a function
of borehole conditions;
comparing said standard individual gamma ray spectra with
said unknown gamma ray spectrum to derive by an itera-
tive process a parameter indicative of the effect of the
unknown borehole conditions on the unknown gamma ray
spectrum;
compensating said standard gamma ray spectra as a function
of said parameter indicative of said unknown borehole
conditions to derive a set of compensated standard gamma
ray spectra; and,
comparing said compensated standard gamma ray spectra
with said unknown gamma ray spectrum to derive bore-
hole compensated relative constituencies of uranium,
potassium, and thorium in said unknown borehole.
tion means connected between said inlet (5) of said diffusion
pump (6) and said inlet connection to said structure to be
4 436 997
METHOD FOR THE DETERMINATION OF CLAY AND
MICA CONCENTRATIONS IN SUBSURFACE
SANDSTONE FORMATIONS THROUGH RADIOACTIVE
LOGGING
Linus S. Allen, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Mobil Oil Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,059
Int. C1.3 GOIV 5/00
^f • CI- 25f-256 3 Claims
1. A method for determinmg the clay cbntent of a subsurface
sandstone formation from a record of the natural gamma radia-
tion of the thorium, uranium and potassium trace elements in
said formations, comprising the steps of:
(a) producing a first measurement of the difference in the
total and the potassium gamma-ray activities of the inter-
val of interest,
(b) producing a second measurement of the difference in the
total and the potassium gamma-ray activities in a clean
sandstone interval,
(c) producing a third measurement of the difference in the
total and the potassium gamma-ray activities in a mica-
free shale interval, and
(d) identifying the volume fraction of clay content in the
interval of interest as the ratio of the difference of said first
and second measurements to the difference of said second
and third measurements.
tested, whereby the necessity of using a vane pump is avoided,
allowmg a recirculating loop of gas to be maintained within the
system for some period of time for measuring purposes.
4,436,999
STRUCTURAL DEFECT DETECTION
Weraer Kern, Hightstown, N.J., assignor to RCA Corporation.
New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 386,240
Int. a.3 COIN 1/30
U.S. a. 250-302 7 cMm
1. A method of detecting microdefects in the surface layer of
a substrate having two or more layers comprising:
(a) contacting the surface of the substrate with a composition
comprising a fluorescent organic compound characterized
by the capacity to fluoresce only in solution, dimethyl
sulfoxide, a suitable lower alkanol, a suitable surfactant
and water for a time sufficient for the composition to
penetrate the microdefects;
(b) draining the excess composition from the surface of the
substrate;
(c) allowing the surface to dry;
(d) irradiating the substrate while the dye in the mi-
crodefects remains in solution with actinic radiation,
whereby fluorescence is activated only in the mi-
crodefects.
4,437,000
APERTURE PIECE AND METHOD FOR CALIBRATING
BACKSCATTER THICKNESS MEASURING
INSTRUMENTS FOR MEASURING CONCAVE
WORKPIECES
Jacques Weinstock, Flushing, N.Y., assignor to UPA Technol.
ogy. Inc., Syosset, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,936
Int. a.3 COIN 23/00; GOID 18/00
U.S. a. 250-308 2 Claims
4,436,998
HELIUM LEAKAGE DETECTOR
Jacques Tallon, Annecy, France, assignor to Compagnie Indus-
trielle des Telecommunications, Paris, France
Division of Ser. No. 233,236, Feb. 10, 1981, Pat. No. 4^65,158.
This application Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 451,691
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 11, 1980, 80 02923
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 21,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. aj BOID 59/44
U.S. a 250-288 3Ctoi^
1. In a helium leakage detector having no vane pump, and
including a molecular diffusion pump (6) having an inlet (5)
and outlet (7), and a measuring spectrometric cell connected in
a branch circuit from said diffusion pump, wherein the im-
provement comprises a bypass conduit connecting said outlet
(7) to an inlet connection to a structure to be tested, and restric-
1. An aperture piece for use in conjunction with backscatter
type apparatus for measuring the thickness of a thin coating on
a concave surface of a workpiece substrate comprising
a planar base section having a central aperture therein,
an outwardly extending and progressively tapering hollow
boss in the general form of a truncated cone mounted over
said central aperture, said hollow boss having a longitudi-
nal axis and outwardly terminating in a small rectongular
aperture in the extending end thereof defined by a pair of
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
843
spaced parallel elongate edges and a pair of spaced paral-
lel short edges disposed perpendicular to said elongate
edges,
said rectangular aperture being of markedly smaller areal
extent than said central aperture in said base section,
the external surface of the base portion of said boss being
selectively shaped to include a first pair of diametrically
opposed planar converging surfaces disposed parallel to
the elongate defining edges of said small rectangular aper-
ture and with the projected included angle between said
first pair of surfaces being bisected by the longitudinal axis
of said boss,
the external surface of the upper portion of said boss being
further selectively shaped to include a second pair of
diametrically opposed planar converging surfaces dis-
posed parallel to the elongate defining edges of said small
rectangular aperture and with the projected included
angle between said second pair of surfaces being bisected
by the longitudinal axis of said boss,
said second pair of converging surfaces having the upper
defining edges thereof disposed in closely adjacent rela-
tion with said elongate defining edges of said small rectan-
gular aperture to define a narrow perimetric sample sup-
port surface thereabout and defining a projected included
angle that is less than the projected included angle be-
tween said first pair of converging planar surfaces.
4,437,001
CORONA GENERATING APPARATUS
Yoshiaki Harada, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Konishiroku
Photo Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,376
Gaims priority, application Japan, May 31, 1980, 55-73869;
Sep. 26, 1980, 55-134980
Int. a.5 HOIT 19/04
U.S. a. 250-324 4 Gaims
7 4
5--
/?
fi
!^£
T
1. In a corona generating apparatus for charging a photosen-
sitive surface, including a corona wire spaced from the photo-
sensitive surface and from which charge is generated and a
regulating member disposed between the wire and the photo-
sensitive surface for preventing the accumulation of charge on
the surface in a region at which no image is to be formed, the
corona wire and the regulating member each being disposed
substantially parallel to the photosensitive surface, the im-
provement comprising an improved regulating member to
closely and accurately define the boundary of the non-image
region on the surface, comprising:
an extension of said regulating member substantially longitu-
dinally along the corona wire, said extension including a
pair of bends delineating therebetween a ramp and a
contact portion extending from the bend most remote
from the regulating member, said contact portion being
disposed substantially parallel to and in at least close
proximity to the photosensitive surface to shield the sur-
face of charge generated by the corona wire and, by
reason of its close proximity to the surface, thereby
closely define the boundary of said non-image region, at
least said contact portion being formed of a flexible mate-
rial so as to prevent damage to the photosensitive surface
in the event that said r>ortion contacts the surface, and
each of said bends being less than 90 degrees.
4,437,002
PYROELECTRIC INFRARED SENSOR
Yoshihani Taniguchi; Sbigeki Edano, and Masanori Aklyama,
all of Tottori, Japan, auignon to NIhon Ceramic Co., Ltd.,
Tottori, Japan
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,433
Gaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 21, 1980, 55-
55134[U]; Apr. 21, 1980. 55-55 135(U]; May 9, 1980, 55-
64031(U]
Int. G.J GOIJ 1/42
U.S. G. 250-338 « a»im»
-41-2
■12-1
-72
•1
*J
1. A pyroelectric infrared sensor, comprising:
a can having a window with an optical filter attached
thereto;
a pyroelectric ceramic element;
a field-effect transistor provided with electric terminals; and
a stem having a ub, wherein:
said pyroelectric ceramic element has two back electrodes
on the back surface thereof and at least two front elec-
trodes on the front surface thereof, each of said at least
two front electrodes having a first region overlapping
with a part of one of said back electrodes and a second
region overlapping with a part of the other of said back
electrodes;
each of said at least two front electrodes are arranged adja-
cent to each other and are electrically insulated from each
other; and
said first regions and said second regions of said at least two
front electrodes have a ratio of areas of approximately 1:1.
4,437,003
DIFFERENTIAL PYROELECTRIC SENSOR WITH
STATIC DISCHARGE
Alan P. Doctor, Ormond Beach, Fla., assignor to Eltec Instru-
ments, Inc., Orlando, Fla.
Filed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 287,883
Int. G.J GOIJ 5/10
U.S. G. 250—338 |i Claims
1. A two terminal differential thermal sensor comprising:
a pair of pyroelectric detectors connected in a series op-
posed connection, said detectors havmg two output elec-
trodes and a common electrode; and
846
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
first resistor means connected between one of said output
electrodes and said common electrode and second resistor
means connected between the other of said output elec-
trodes and said common electrode for bleeding static
charges from said pair of detectors.
4,437,004
MODULAR GAS ANALYZER
Robert E. Passaro, and Irvin G. Burough, both of Walnut Creek,
Calif., assignors to Andros Analyzers Incorporated, Oakland,
Calif.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,485
Int. aj GOIJ J/04; GOIN 21/01
VS. a. 250-343 5 Claims
4,437,005
NONDISPERSIVE INFRARED GAS ANALYZER
Paul-Arthur OphofT, Worth, and Johann Weinel, Karlsruhe,
both of Fed. Rep. of Gemiany, assignors to Siemens Aktien-
gesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of Gemiany
Filed Not. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 322,210
Qaims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany. Nov. 17.
1980,3043332
Int a.3 qoij 1/00
U.S. a. 250-343 sOMima
1. In an infrared gas analyzer including a sample cell for
containing the gas mixture to be analyzed, means for directing
infrared energy through said sample cell, source means for
periodically interrupting the infrared energy at a predeter-
mined frequency, detector means responsive to infrared energy
of at least one preselected wavelength for producing a signal
having an amplitude proportional to the infrared energy pass-
ing through said sample cell and having a frequency corre-
sponding to the predetermined frequency, said preselected
wavelength corresponding to the characteristic absorption
wavelength of a preselected gas, and signal processing means
for processing the signal output of said detector means to
produce a signal representative of the concentration of the
preselected gas in the mixture being analyzed, the analyzer
being a modular construction to facilitate assembly and re-
placement of components, comprising
a modular sample tube,
a modular source housing means for mounting the source of
infrared energy at one end of said sample tube,
a modular detector housing means for mounting the detector
means at the opposite end of said tube,
a printed circuit board mounting the signal processing
means, and
a mounting means for supporting said sample tube, source
housing means, detector housing means and printed cir-
cuit board, said mounting means comprising a unitary
structure including a base and a plurality of integral chan-
nel members extending transversely from the same side
thereof and spaced in pairs to form three subsuntially
parallel pairs of channels for engaging with and locating
said source housing means, detector housing means and
printed circuit board, respectively, in operative relation-
ship with each other, and detent means for releasably
securing said source housing means, detector housing
means and printed circuit board in said channel members
to enable said source housing means, said detector housing
means and said printed circuit board to be readily re-
moved individually for repair or replacement without the
need to remove other modular elements.
1. A nondispersive infrared gas analyzer of the type having
a plurality of gas-filled chambers arranged in the propagation
path of modulated infrared radiation, and a measuring pickup
for producing an electrical measurement signal, the nondisper-
sive infrared gas analyzer further comprising:
pulsed energy supply means for producing electrical pulses
having a duty cycle which is less than 1;
infrared radiation means for producing infrared radiation
which is modulated in response to said duty cycle of said
pulsed energy supply means, said infrared radiation means
having a predetermined continuous power rating; and
pulse control means for terminating each of said electrical
pulses from said pulsed energy supply means in response
to a peak value of a corresponding pulse in the electrical
measurement signal.
4,437,006
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING
RADIATION IN COMPUTER-ASSISTED TOMOGRAPHY
AND RADIOGRAPHIC APPLICATIONS
Ira L. Morgan; E. C. George Sudarshan; Alrin L. MitcheU;
James P. Cooae; Hunter D. EUinger, and James W. Jagger, aU
of Austin, Tex., assignors to Scientific Measurement Systems,
Inc., Austin, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 879,439, Feb. 21, 1978, Pat. No. 4,284,895.
This appUcation May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260,695
Int. a.J GOIT 1/20
U A a 250-363 S i6 Qaims
1. Radiographic apparatus for determining the intensity of
penetrating radiation passing through an object as a plurality of
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
847
penetrating ray photons along a plurality of respective paths
from a radiation source; comprising:
(a) high-speed scintillator means having a very fast decay
time for detecting the plurality of penetrating ray photons
passing through the object along one of the plurality of
paths and converting the energy of the penetrating ray
photons into a plurality of light photons within a suffi-
ciently short time interval after detection such that sub-
stantially all light photons associated with each detected
penetrating ray photon are generated within different time
intervals;
(b) photomultiplier means optically coupled to said scintilla-
tor means for detecting the light photons associated with
each penetrating ray photon detected and generating a
signal for each plurality of light photons associated with a
penetrating ray photon detected; and
(c) counting means for counting the signals generated by
said photomultiplier means and generating output signals
representative of the number of penetrating ray photons
detected.
4,437,008
ELECTRON BEAM CONTROL SYSTEM
Tadahito Matsuda, Hohya; Masahide Okumura, Sagamihara;
Hisatake Yokouchi, Tokyo; Susumu Ozasa, Kashiwa. and
Yasuo Kato, Zama, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon Tele-
graph & Telephone Public Corporation, Tokyo and Hitachi,
Ltd., both of, Japan
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,682
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 23, 1980, 55-52888
Int. CI.' HOIJ 3/14: G06M 3/14
U.S. CI. 250-396 R 4 Claims
*~lQ-(s^}-®-Hp i fo-^-^^H^T* "
4,437,007
LARGE ARRAYS OF DISCRETE IONIZING RADIATION
DETECTORS MULTIPLEXED USING FLUORESCENT
OPTICAL CONVERTERS
Evan E. Koslow, Westport, Conn., and Robert R. Edelman,
Brookline, Mass., assignors to Koslow Technologies Corpora-
tion, Westport, Conn.
Filed Apr. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 366,472
Int. a.J GOIT 1/20
U.S. a. 250-366 22 Claims
1. An electron beam control system having means for manu-
ally adjusting currents flowing through two defiection coils
which respectively cause deflection of said beam in directions
orthogonal to each other, said means for manually adjusting
comprising means to simultaneously produce coil deflection
control signals for controlling the current in said two denec-
tion coils by the execution of a single operation, nonvolatile
memory means for permitting the selective storage or readout
of coil deflection control signals produced by the means to
simultaneously produce coil defiection control signals and
means for causing the selective application of previously
stored coil defiection control signals or currently produced
coil defiection control signals to the defiection coils whereby
the readjustment of the position of the electron beam may be
dispensed with after the control system is turned off and then
turned on by the selective application of the stored control
signals to the defiection coils.
1. A radiation detection and conversion apparatus compris-
ing:
an array of individual, optically isolated, radiation sensitive
elements that emit optical radiation upon absorption of
radiation stimuli;
an array of elongated, parallel channel means, each of said
channel means being positioned to receive and trap optical
radiation emitted by a plurality of said radiation sensitive
elements and transporiing said optical radiation there-
along;
an array of electro-optical devices coupled to at least one
end of said channels for converting the transported radia-
tion into electrical signals whereby each such electrical
signal indicates that at least one of said radiation sensitive
elements has absorbed a radiation stimulus.
4437 009
SCANNING ELECTRON MICROSCOPE OR SIMILAR
EQUIPMENT
Shigetomo Yamazaki, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki
Kaisha Akashi Scisakusho, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347^63
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 3, 1981, 56-30266
Int. a.3 HOIF 7/00: GOIN 23/00
U.S. a. 250—396 ML 6 Gaims
5^-^
1. A scanning electron microscope or similar equipment,
comprising an electromagnetic objective lens having its lens
center between the upper and lower poles thereof, an opening
formed on the lower pole so that a specimen may be passed
through the opening and placed in the vicinity of the lens
center, and a magnetic pole piece defining an aperiure having
a diameter smaller than that of the opening and detachably
provided in the opening so as to decrease the magnetic flux
\
848
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
leaked through the opening when the specimen is placed below
the lower pole.
4,437,011
RADIATION EXOTED PHOSPHOR SCREEN AND
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING THE SAME
Takuhi Noji, Odawara; Norio Hapao, Ayase, and Yoshihani
Obata, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jun. U, 1981, Ser. No. 272,764
Qainu priority, application Japan, Jun. 16, 1980. 55/80146'
Feb. 17, 1981, 56/21934 /»««•«»,
Int. a.J GOIJ 1/58
U.S. a. 250-486.1 ,2 Qaims
13 2S
4,437,010
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ANALYZING
CONDITIONER ON A BOWLING LANE SURFACE
Carl E. Scheie, LIbertyville, and G. Arnold Muma, Casnovia,
both of III., assignors to Brunswick Corporation, Skokie, III
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,059
Int. a.3 F21V 9/7(5, GOIN 21/64
U.S. a. 250-459.1 5 a,i„.
O-'
1. Apparatus for analyzing and evaluating the thickness and
distnbution of conditioning material applied to the surface of a
bowling lane, the conditioning material treated with a fluores-
cent additive prior to application to the bowling lane surface,
the apparatus adapted for analyzing the treated conditioning
material which has been transferred onto an elongated trans-
parent strip from a transverse section of the bowling lane
surface;
the apparatus comprising, in combination:
a source of ultra-violet light directed to strike one side of the
elongated strip;
a first photocell on the side of the strip opposite the one side
for sensing blue light emitted by the fluorescent additive;
a second photocell adapted to receive light emanating from
the source; and
means for comparing the intensity of light from the strip
measured by the first photocell with the intensity of the
light from the source measured by the second photocell
whereby readings of intensity of light from the strip can be
measured independently of variations in intensity of light
from the source,
said light intensity from the strip being directly proportional
to the quantity of conditioning material applied to finite
portions of the transverse section of a bowling lane surface
and correlated to the thickness and distribution of condi-
tioning material transferred from the bowling lane surface.
1. A radiation excited input phosphor screen comprising:
a substrate having a substantially smooth surface;
a first phosphor layer vapor-deposited on said smooth sur-
face of said substrate and including phosphor crystal parti-
cles having mean diameter of 15 /im or less; and
a second phosphor layer of alkali halide phosphor material
vapor-deposited on said first phosphor layer and including
mdividual columnar crystals grown substantially verti-
cally with respect to said smooth surface of said substrate,
said columnar crysuls standing close together with fine
spaces therebetween, said second phosphor layer having a
thickness ten or more times that of said first phosphor
layer.
4,437,012
DEVICE FOR BRINGING ABOUT COINCIDENCE
BETWEEN THE AXIS OF A MEASURING PROBE AND A
NORMAL TO THE SURFACE OF A PART TO BE
CONTROLLED
Claude Cavy, Versailles, and Marie L. Rolland, Bourg la Reine,
both of France, assignors to Commissariat a I'Energie Ato-
mique, Paris, France
Filed Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 328,920
Qaims priority, application France, Dec. 24, 1980, 80 27514
Int. a.3 G12B 5/00, 9/08: GOID 11/00; GOIN 23/203
U.S. a 250-491.1 7CtaiM
-Th
1. Apparatus comprising a probe for measuring local thick-
ness of a surface layer that defines a surface of revolution on a
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
849
part, said probe having a probe axis that must be normal to said
surface at each location where a thickness measurement is
made and having a front end that must be adjacent to said
surface, said apparatus comprising:
A. supporting means for holding said part with the axis of
revolution of its said surface coinciding with a reference
axis;
B. a first carrier member connected with said supporting
means and adjustably shiftable relative thereto in opposite
directions parallel to said reference axis;
C. a second carrier member connected with said first carrier
member for bodily movement therewith in said opposite
directions and for rotation relative thereto about a rota-
tion axis transverse to said reference axis;
D. a third carrier member connected with said second car-
rier member for bodily movement therewith and for lim-
ited swinging relative thereto about an oscillation axis
substantially transverse to said reference axis and said
rotation axis;
E. a connection between said probe and said third carrier
member whereby
(1) the probe is disposed with its probe axis substantially
intersecting and normal to said rotation axis and said
oscillation axis and its front end remote from those axes,
(2) the probe is constrained to move bodily with said third
carrier member, and
(3) the probe is adjustably shiftable relative to said third
carrier member in directions along said probe axis; and
F. sensing means on the front end portion of the probe, at a
plurality of locations spaced from the probe axis, for
indicating coincidence between the probe axis and a nor-
mal to a local area of surface forwardly adjacent to the
probe.
4,437,013
NEUTRON AND GAMMA RADIATION SHIELDING
MATERIAL, STRUCTURE, AND PROCESS OF MAKING
STRUCTURE
Hugh L. Hondorp, Princeton Junction, N.J., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the Department of
Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,576
Int. a.' G21C 11/00; G21F 3/02
U.S. a. 250—515.1 13 Oaims
1. A material for use as a neutron and gamma radiation shield
consisting of about 93 to 97 percent by weight Si02 and about
S to 3 percent by weight sodium silicate.
4,437,014
SMOKE DETECTION AND DISCONNECnON
APPARATUS
Lawrence J. Jones, 60 Church St., R.D. #4, Box 3, Milford, N.J.
08848
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,584
Int. a.^ GOIN 15/06
U.S. a. 250—574 20 Qaims
a plurality of apertures located between the inlet aperture and
the outlet aperture of said housing and in fluid communication
therewith, radiation emitting means located in position to
transmit a beam of radiation through at least a portion of the
detection chamber member in said housing, radiation detection
means located in position to detect the beam of radiation trans-
mitted through at least a portion of the detection chamber
member in said housing, said radiation emitting means being
located to transmit a beam of radiation through only one of the
apertures of said detection chamber member to cause said
aperture to be a smoke detection chamber, smoke detection
means connected to said radiation emitting means and said
radiation detection means for causing the operation of said
radiation emitting means and for determining when the inten-
sity of the radiation beam detected by said radiation detection
means is reduced due to the presence of smoke in the smoke
detection chamber in said chamber member, smoke concen-
trating means for concentrating smoke located between the
inlet of said housing and said detection chamber member, said
smoke concentrating means having an inlet aperture and an
outlet located adjacent to said detection chamber member with
the cross sectional area of the inlet aperture being greater than
the cross sectional area of the outlet, and disconnecting means
connected to said smoke detection means and adapted to be
connected to monitored electrical apparatus for turning off the
electricity to said monitored electrical apparatus when said
smoke detection means determines that the intensity of the
radiation beam detected by said radiation detection means is
reduced due to the presence of smoke in the smoke detection
chamber in said detection chamber member.
4,437,015
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AUTOMOBILE
ACTUATED POWER GENERATION
Jack Rosenblum, 923 West "I" St., Ontario, Calif. 91762
Continuation of Ser. No. 111,473, Jan. 11, 1980, abandoned. This
application Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,371
Int. a.3 F04B 35/00
U.S. a. 290—1 R 1 Claim
**^|.gCJMU.*1Tl4 JoUmtfL 1
1. Smoke detection and disconnection apparatus comprising
a housing having an inlet aperture and an outlet aperture for
the passage of smoke and a detection chamber member having
1. Power transfer apparatus for generating power from
passing wheeled vehicles on a roadway including at least two
separate lanes for vehicles traveling in opposite directions,
comprising a plurality of pairs of oppositely disposed parallel
roller shafts transverse of each separate lane of said roadway,
spaced rollers secured to each oppositely disposed parallel
shaft to rotate therewith and adapted to be engaged by and
rotated by vehicle wheels of said vehicles in contact therewith
on each lane of said roadway, each of said pairs of oppositely
disposed parallel shafts being spaced from each other pair of
oppositely disposed parallel shafts so that wheels on both ends
of said vehicle do not contact rollers on adjacent spaced pairs
of shafts at the same time, a bevel gear fixed to oppositely
disposed ends of each pair of said roller shafts and rotatable
therewith, a spider gear located between said at least two lanes
of roadway and positioned to be engaged and driven by bevel
gears on one pair of said roller shafts, adjacent pairs of roller
shafts positioned on opposite sides of said one pair of said roller
8S0
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13^1984
shafts and equally spaced therefrom, a jack shaft having a
bevel gear on each end thereof, said jack shaft engaging said
bevel gears of each pair of roller shafts on opposite sides of said
one pair of roller shaft and said spider gear thereby driving said
spider gear, a translator means, said spider gear being con-
nected to said translator means via a translator shaft, a power
accumulator means operatively linked to said translator means,
and further means linking said accumulator means to a power
demand.
arranged that the turbine runner can be in contact with ■
surrounding flow of water whilst the generator has a water-
tight enclosure into which the drive shaft extends from the
turbine in a waterproof bushing and to which at least one
electric cable for transmitting the electricity produced is con-
nected by means of a watertight connection, and so that the
inlet tube, the flow tube and the discharge tube are made from
prefabricated concrete components, whereby the mechanical
unit, as a separate unit, is located in the flow tube in which the
4,437,016
POWER ABSORBING DEVICE FOR
LOW-TEMPERATURE REFRIGERATING MACHINE
Shunichi Nakaya, Kawasaki, and Katsumasa Araoka, Yoko-
hama, both of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Feb. 2, 1982, Set. No. 345,017
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 27, 1981, S6-28223
Int. a.J H02K 51/00
U.S.a.290-lR 4 Claims
n
(-«
1. A power absorbing device for absorbing the mechanical
energy of reciprocating motion of pistons of a reciprocating
adiabatic expansion engine, comprising:
a cylindrical cam for converting the reciprocating motion of
said pistons into rotatory motion, said cylindrical cam
having a hollow space therein;
a speed-increasing gear in said hollow space for increasing
the speed of said rotatory motion, said speed-increasing
gear having an output shaft to rotate at an increased speed;
and
an electric generator including a rotor mounted on said
output shaft to rotate and an electric generating section
operating jointly with said rotor to supply an external load
with electric power.
electric cables run, and whereby the flow tube is essentially
vertical and provides a support for the unit, and at its upper
end has an aperture through which the unit can be passed so
that the unit can be assembled in the flow tube by being passed
through the said aperture and lowered down onto the support,
with the mechanical unit— even in the assembled state— com-
prising a unit which is separate from the installation portion
and which can be dismantled by being hoisted upwards from
the support through the said aperture.
4,437,018
AUDIO COMPONENT COUPLER
Stephen C. Manley, 8 Bartlctt St., Charlestown, Mass. 02129
Filed Dec. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 446,984
Int. a.J H02J 1/00
U.S. a. 307-38 5 ctaJms
4,437,017
ARRANGEMENT FOR HYDROELECTRIC POWER
PLANTS
Thomas V. dsterberg, VMnjo, Sweden, assignor to A-Betong AB.
Vixio, Sweden
Filed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,491
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 11, 1981, 8100934
Int. a.^ F03B 13/08; E02B 9/00
as. a. 290—52 2 Claims
1. Arrangement for hydroelectric power plant which com-
prises a flow tube through which water flows during opera-
tion, at least one inlet tube for water which leads to the flow
tube, at least one discharge tube for the water which leads from
the flow tube, at least one turbine runner arranged in the flow
tube which is driven by the water which flows through the
flow tube, a drive shaft connected with the turbine runner and
an electric generator connected with the drive shaft so that
when the water flows through the flow tube and causes the
turbine runner to route, the latter via the drive shaft drives the
generator which thus generates electricity, in which the ar-
rangement exhibits accentuated sub-divisioning between the
mechanical unit and portions of an insullation nature, so that
the turbine runner and generator are located directly adjacent
to each other and together with the drive shaft form a unit so
1. An audio component coupler for externally integrating
separate audio-visual components for coupled operation, com-
prising a housing having at least a main electrical power con-
nector for receiving power from a power source, and first and
second component electrical power connectors for supplying
operating power to components separately connectable exter-
nally thereto; means defining a first power transfer path inter-
connecting said main electrical power connector and said first
component power connector, said first path including sensing
means providing an indication of the transfer of power along
said path; and means defining a second power transfer path
interconnecting said main electrical power connector and said
second component power connector, said second path includ-
ing power interruption means having switching means settable
by the user to either of two independently selectable states in
which the flow of power in the second path is responsive to the
flow of power in said first path when set to said first state and
is independent of the flow of power in the first path when set
to said second state.
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
8S1
4,437,019
LINEAR DIFFERENTIAL TRANSFORMER WITH
CONSTANT AMPLITUDE AND VARIABLE PHASE
OUTPUT
Jacob Chass, Rego Park, N.Y., assignor to Pickering A Com-
pany, Inc., Plainview, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 7, 1983, Ser. No. 464,754
Int. a.' H02J 3/00; HOIF 71/06
U.S. a. 307—83 12 Qaims
1. A differential transformer comprising:
an electrical coil extending longitudinally along an axis
providing a transformer secondary winding;
first and second transformer primary windings defined by
electrical coils lying generally in spaced parallel first and
second planes which cut said axis at an angle other than
90', each of said primary winding extending about said
secondary winding; and,
a core of magnetic material disposed for linear movement
parallel to said axis and equal in length to at least the
minimal axial distance between said primary windings
whereby when said primary windings are excited by AC
voltages 90' out of phase with each other the phase of the
secondary winding output voltage will vary with the
linear displacement of said core between said primary
windings and the amplitude of said output voltage will
remain constant.
4,437,020
ELECTROMAGNETIC SWITCHGEAR
Gerhard Schrttther, Amberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengescllschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,967
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 12,
1981, 3105117
Int. a.) HOIH 33/14
UJS. a. 307—135 5 Claims
1. An electromagnetic switchgear, useful for making and
breaking at least one connection from a network to a capaci-
tive load via a damping resistor, comprising:
a set of switches for each connection being switched, each
set comprising a main switch and a leading switch dis-
posed one above the other in stories in the switchgear and
operable together, each switch comprising an input
contact adapted to be connected to the network, an output
contact adapted to be connected to the capacitive load,
and a movable bridge contact;
a jumper electrically coupling the input contacts of each set,
the jumper extending from one story to the other; and
a resistor coupling the output contacu of each set, the resis-
tor extending from one story to the other.
4,437,021
LINE DRIVER CTRCUIT
Hideji Sumi, Yokohama, and Masayuki Kokado, Kawasaki, both
of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,438
Int. a.J H03K 3/33. 3/01
U.S. CI. 307—270
9 Claims
-^
1. A line driver circuit comprising:
a differential pair of transistors having a first transistor for
receiving an input signal and a second transistor for re-
ceiving a reference signal, said first and second transistors
being exclusively turned on and off in response to the
electric potential of the input signal;
an output stage having an emitter follower including a plu-
rality of transistors in which an output-stage transistor
provides an output signal of a high potential or a low
potential in response to the output potential of the differ-
ential pair; and
a discharge path means for drawing charges accumulated on
the base of the output-stage transistor in the emitter fol-
lower, through one of the transistors in the differential
pair, when the output-stage transistor in the emitter fol-
lower is turned from ON to OFF,
wherein said discharge path means comprises current switch
means, having at least one diode between the base of said
output-stage transistor and the collector of said one of the
transistors in said differential pair, for cutting off said
discharge path means when the voltage between the base
and the emitter of said output-stage transistor is equal to or
lower than the threshold voltage for turning on said out-
put-stage transistor.
4.437,022
MONOLITHICALLY INTEGRATED PUSH-PULL
DRIVER
Eddehard F. Miersch, Boeblingen; Kurt Pollmann, Altdorf;
Helmut Schettler, Dettcnhauscn, and Rainer Zuhlke, Leon-
berg, all of Fad. Rep. of GermtBy, assignors to International
Business MacUaes Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,203
Claims priority, application European Pat Off., Jan. 30, 1981,
81100662.6
Int. a.i A03K 3/26. 5/00
VJS. CI. 307—270 6 Claims
1. Integrated push-pull driver circuit having a reduced noise
voltage including an output stage connected between a first
and second chip voltage supply line and a third voltage supply
line provided on an integration package level higher than the
level of the chip comprising the driver circuit, said third volt-
832
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
age supply line carrying substantially the same potential as said
second chip voltage line, said output stage comprising;
a first transistor the collector-emitter path being connected
between said first volUge supply line and an output termi-
nal;
a second transistor the collector-emitter path being con-
nected in series with the collector-emitter path of the first
transistor with the collector of the second transistor being
connected to the output terminal;
means for forming from an input signal corresponding true
and inverted signals and applying them to the bases of said
first and second transistors, respectively;
a third transistor the collector-emitter path being connected
between the emitter of the second transistor and the sec-
ond voltage supply line; and
means connected between the base of the third transistor and
said third voltage supply line establishing a reference
potential at said base and reducing the rate of current
change through the second transistor when said second
transistor is turned on;
whereby a reduced noise voltage is generated on the second
chip voltage supply line.
4,437,023
CURRENT MIRROR SOURCE CIRCUITRY
Harry A. Gill, Jr., Cupertino, Calif., assignor to Raytheon Com-
pany, Lexington, Mass.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,309
Int. a.J H03K 3/01; G05F 3/20
U.S. a. 307-296 R , c,.i„
1. A current source circuit comprising:
(a) a pair of current sources;
(b) a current mirror circuit comprising a plurality of transis-
tors having a common base electrode, such plurality of
transistors including a master transistor and at least one
slave transistor, emitter electrodes thereof being electri-
cally connected to a voltage source;
(c) differential amplifier means comprising a pair of transis-
tors having emitter electrodes connected to a first one of
the pair of current sources, a first one of the pair of transis-
tors having a base electrode coupled to a collector elec-
trode of the master transistor and to a second one of the
pair of current sources and a collector electrode coupled
to the voltage source, and a second one of the pair of
transistors having a collector electrode connected to the
common base electrode, for producing a current flow
through the collector electrode of at least one slave tran-
sistor substantially proportional to the current fiow
through the collector electrode of the master transistor
(d) wherein the differential amplifier means includes a diode
connected transistor coupled between the collector elec-
trode of the second one of the pair of transistors of the
differential amplifier means and the voltage source and
wherein the first one of the pair of current sources pro-
duces a mirror current MI where I is the current produced
by the first one of the pair of current sources and M is at
least equal to (n(l -|-hfe;„,>,) + X-|- l)/hfe;„,>, where n is the
ratio of the emitter current density of the diode connected
transistor to the current density of the master transistor, X
IS the ratio of the total collector current of the slave tran-
sistor to the collector current of the master transistor and
M^min is the minimum current gain of the plurality of
transistors of the current mirror circuit.
4,437,024
ACTIVELY CONTROLLED INPUT BUFFER
Ihor T. Wacyk, Bridgewater, N.J., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,660
Int. a.J H03K 19/094. 19/017. 17/26. 17/284
U.S. CI. 307-475 g Qaim.
1. The combination comprising:
first and second IGFETs of complementary conductivity
type, each IGFET having source and drain electrodes
defining the ends of a conduction path and a control
electrode;
a signal input terminal, a signal output terminal, and first and
second power terminals for the application therebetween
of an operating potential;
means connecting the control electrodes of said first and
second IGFETs to said signal input terminal;
means connecting the drain electrodes of said first and sec-
ond IGFETs to said signal output terminal;
a controllable impedance means connected between said
source of said first IGFET and said first power terminal,
said controllable impedance means normally providing a
relatively high impedance path when said first IGFET is
turned on;
means connecting said source of said second IGFET to said
second power terminal; and
pulse generating means coupled between said signal output
terminal and said controllable impedance means for mo-
mentarily placing said controllable impedance means in a
relatively low impedance condition in response to said
first IGFET being driven from an OFF to an ON condi-
tion.
March 13. 1984
ELECTRICAL
IS3
4,437,025
MOS BUFFER FOR RECEIVING TTL LEVEL SIGNALS
Wei'Ti Liu, San Jose, and Douglas J. Lee, Santa Clara, both of
Calif., assignors to Intel Corporation, Santa Oara, Calif.
Filed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 287,889
Int. a.) H03K 19/094
U.S. a. 307-475 9 Gaims
C
r"
t
HE
:a
Er" HE-'
I
/
Ti
'Om€» Smt
tion across said channel, and the plurality of pairs produces a
load current, said control apparatus comprising;
means for converting each electrode current into first and
second periodic control signals which are 180* out of
phase with respect to each other and which have equal
magnitudes corresponding to the magnitude of the associ-
ated electrode current at preset locations across the chan-
nel; and
means for magnetically coupling individual ones of said first
control signals and for magnetically coupling individual
ones of said second control signals such that the corre-
sponding electrode currents are equalized or rendered
proportional in the same or constant ratios in accordance
with the locations of the electrode currents.
1. An integrated circuit for converting a first binary signal
operating between first levels, to a second binary signal operat-
ing between second levels, comprising:
a first inverter coupled to receive said first binary signal as
an input signal;
a reference voltage means for providing a reference voltage
for said first inverter, said reference means coupled to said
first inverter;
a second inverter for providing current to said reference
means when said first binary signal is at one of said first
levels, and for providing a current path for said first in-
verter when said first binary signal is at said other of said
first levels, said second inverter coupled to said reference
means and coupled to receive said first binary signal; and,
level shifting means coupled to the output of said first in-
verter, for shifting the output signal from said first in-
verter when said first binary signal is at the other of said
first level, said level shifting means coupled to receive said
first binary signal;
whereby said output signal from said first inverter with said
level shifting, provides said second binary signal.
4,437,026
APPARATUS FOR ELECTRODE CURRENT CONTROL
IN LINEAR MHD GENERATORS
Ara M. Demirjian, Arlington, Mass., and Albert Solbes, Rancho
Palos Verdes, Calif., assignors to The United States of Amer-
ica as represented by the United States Department of Energy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,355
Int. a.3 H02K 45/00
U.S. a. 310—11 13 Oaims
#tN
HtJjC*-'
u upj
k»jc»-i
E
1_L
— II
'r*:
I • «
l-l*T-t»-'l
1. Apparatus for controlling electrode current distribution in
dc circuits of the type having- a picrralhy of pairs of opposed
electrodes along a channel wherein each electrode pair pro-
duces a corresponding dc electrode current at a pre-set loca-
4,437,027
MOLDED SUBMERSIBLE MOTOR
Sakuei Yamamoto, and Mitsuhiro Nishida, both of Fukuoka,
Japan, assignors to MiUubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, To-
kyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 337,911
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 17, 1981, 56-6628
Int. a.J H02K 7/10
U.S. a. 310—78 2 Oaims
1. A molded submersible motor, comprising:
(a) an open ended, hollow cylindrical frame (4) formed of
resinous molding material.
(b) a stator assembly including a stator core (2) and a sutor
coil (15) embedded in said frame,
(c) a rotor assembly (20) rouubly mounted inside of the
stator assembly,
(d) a pair of end brackets (10, 11) formed of resinous molding
material and individually detachably secured to opposite
ends of said frame to close the openings thereof,
(e) a voltage surge absorber unit molded into said frame,
(0 a starting switch unit of said motor molded into one of
said end brackets positioned at an end of the motor
adapted to be coupled to an apparatus driven by said
motor,
(g) a lower connector (7) molded into said frame and cou-
pled to said stator coil (15) and said voltage surge absorber
unit via lead wires (8) embedded in said frame, and
(h) an upper connector (13) molded into said one of said end
brackets for coupling a power source cable (12) to said
lower connector and said starting switch unit.
854
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4^7,028
ARMATURE WINDING FOR A DC MULTI-POLE
MOTOR
Kenske Ikeda, Room No. 3, Midori-M, 10-3, Chuoriakan 6-
chomc, Yamato-shi, Kaoagawa-ken, Japan
Cootiouation of Ser. No. 32,482, Apr. 23, 1979, abandoned. Thia
application May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,197
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 25, 1978, 53-49133
Int. a.i H02K i/OO
UA a. 310-198 J Claims
4,437,029
DIRECT CURRENT MOTOR
Itsuki Ban, 829, Higasiii-Oizumimaclii, Nerima-ku, Tokyo-
Manabu Shiraki, 4451-171 Shimotounim, Yamato-ahi'
Kanagawa-ken, and Kazotaito Egami, 2-44-1 Cbuo, Nakano-
ku, Tokyo, all of Japan
FUed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,089
Int. a.3 H02K 2i/26
U.S. a. 310-198 4cud^
1. A DC multi-pole electrodynamic device, comprising:
an annular array of fixed field magnets forming fixed mag-
netic field poles of alternating magnetic polarity around
the array, respectively;
magnetic material for closing magnetic circuits of said field
magnets;
an armature operatively disposed adjacent to said field mag-
nets and mounted for rotation about an axis, said armature
having a commutator composed of an annular array of
commutator segments and a winding composed of a plu-
rality of armature coils;
a set of two brushes in electrical contact with respective
commutator segments of said commutator to respectively
provide electrical current of different electrical potential;
a first one of said coils being formed by a single conductor
having a first tap at one of its ends and a second tap at the
other of its ends, each tap being electrically connected to
respective first and second commutator segments, said
first coil comprising a plurality of complete conductor
turns around said armature with each turn having succes-
sive active armature portions of alternating magnetic
polarity when energized adjacent to said successive ones
of said magnetic field poles;
a second one of said coils being formed by a single conduc-
tor having a third tap at one of its ends and a fourth tap at
the other of its ends, each tap being electrically connected
to respective third and fourth commuutor segments, said
second coil comprising a plurality of complete conductor
turns around said armature with each turn having succes-
sive active armature portions of alternating magnetic
polarity when energized adjacent to said successive ones
of said magnetic field poles;
said first one of said coils being in magnetic phase with said
second one of said coils;
said armature further including a conductive winding for
connecting said second tap directly to said third Up so
that their respective commutator segmenU will be at
substantially the same potential when one is energized;
ail of said coils substantially identical, displaced about said
axis with respect to their adjacent coils and separated pairs
of said coils being in magnetic phase, said separated pairs
being connected by a conductive winding in a like manner
of said first and second coils; and
the number of said ups being equal to one-half PZ, wherein
P represents the number of said magnetic field poles and Z
is the number of said armature coils.
1. A direct current motor for imparting continuous rotation
comprising:
a field magnet having a circular array of 2mn magnetic poles
magnetized with the same magnetic intervals as those of
magnetic poles N and S, where m is an integer of 1 or
more and n is an integer of 3 or more;
an armature with a circular array of m(2n± 1) armature coils
arranged with equal pitch;
means for mounting said field magnet and armature for
relative roution in coaxial juxtaposition; and
electric power supply control means including means for
supplying armature drive current to said armature coils
and means for switching said armature current 2mn
(2n± 1) times per revolution of the armature with respect
to the field magnet.
4,437,030
ROTOR WITH A COOLING DEVICE, MORE
PARTICULARLY OF THE COMMUTATOR, FOR
ELECTRIC MOTORS, AND THE METHOD AND MEANS
FOR MAKING THIS DEVICE
Michel Coquillart, Saint.Etienne Terrenoire, France, assignor to
Mavilor Systemes, Switzerland
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 260,996
Claims priority, application France, May 9, 1980, 80 11149
Int. a.J H02K 9/2%
U.S. a. 310-227 7 cu,^
1. Rotor with commuutor-cooling device for electric mo-
tors of the type comprising a molded unit having an inner
bushing (2) on the driving shaft (6), a current commuutor (3)
and a winding (5) connected to the commuutor (3), wherein
cooling is effected by a thermal bridge esUblished between
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
8SS
said inner bushing (2) and said commuutor (3) by at least one
thermal conductor (1-C1-C2) embedded in the rotor, one part
of which is positioned immediately adjacent to said commuu-
tor (3) but without contacting it, and the other part of which is
in intimate conUct with said inner bushing (2) in order to
create a transfer of heat from said commuutor to said inner
bushing.
4,437,031
ZNO SAW DEVICE HAVING SEPARATE COMB
TRANSDUCER
Robert L. Gunshon Robert F. Pierret, both of West Lafayette,
Ind., and Michael R. Melloch, Mesquite, Tex., assignors to
Purdue Research Foundation, West Lafayette, Ind.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,683
Int. a.3 HOIL 41/04
U.S. a. 310—313 B 9 Claims
1::=;
41 -»
/
^^A
-:7^
4,437,032
SENSOR FOR DISTANCE MEASUREMENT BY
ULTRASOUND
Egon Gelhard, Thomas-Mann-Str, 10, D-5000 Koln 51, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,484
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 23,
1981, 3137745
Int. a.J HOIL 41 /OH
U.S. a. 310—324 6 Qaims
1. In a sensor for measuring disUnce by transmitting ultra-
sound signals beamed onto objects, and receiving signals re-
flected from said objects, including an ultrasound transmitter
member for transmitting said signals, and an ultrasound re-
ceiver member for receiving the reflected signals, at least one
of said members including a converter formed with a cavity
and having piezo-ceramic resonator means disposed therein for
converting the ultrasound signals to electrical signals, or the
electrical signals to the ultrasound signals, said converter in-
cluding a substantially circular membrane having an inner side,
the improvement comprising, in combination,
damping means disposed on opposite circular segments of
the inner side of said substantially circular membrane for
preventing the transmission or reception of ultrasound
signals having excessive strength.
4,437,033
ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER MATRIX HAVING HLLER
MATERIAL WTTH DIFFERENT ACOUSTICAL
IMPEDANCE
Heinrich Diepers, HochsUdt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,583
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 6,
1980, 302144
Int. a.J HOIR n/06
U.S. a. 310—334 3 Qaims
(» ,*
1. A separate comb transducer for use in a device having a
surface acoustic wave coupled thereto, said transducer com-
prising first and second conductive elements each of which
includes an arm and a plurality of fingers extending from said
arm, said fingers being substantially parallel to and spaced from
one another with the width of said fingers and the spacing
therebetween each being substantially equal to one-half of the
wavelength of said surface acoustic wave, and said elements
being positioned with the fingers of each element substantially ^
parallel to the fingers of the other element with the free ends of
the fingers of each element adjacent to but not overiapping the
fingers of the other element, and with said fingers of each said
element being substantially aligned with the spaces adjacent to
said fingers of the other element.
1. An ultrasonic transducer arrangement having a matrix of
ultrasonic oscillators, the arrangement further comprising:
a plurality of ultrasonic oscillators, each ultrasonic oscillator
consisting of a matrix of columnar transducer elements
which are electrically controlled simuluneously, each
transducer element having a uniform thickness through-
out its height, the height of each such element being sub-
stantially greater than the thickness thereof;
filler material interposed between individual ones of the
transducer oscillators, and between individual ones of the
transducer elements, said filler material being limited in
extent to the height of the transducer elements and havmg
an acoustic impedance which is substantially diflerent
from the acoustic impedance of the oscillator material of
the transducer elements, and for providing a structurally
locking connection between adjacent ones of the trans-
ducer elements throughout their height;
a plurality of electrode conductor strips disposed on either
side of said matrix of columnar transducer elements, said
electrode conductor strips being arranged parallel to one
another so as to form rows of electrode conductor strips
on one side of said matrix, and parallel to one another on
the other side of said matrix in a direction transverse to
said rows of electrode conductor strips to form columns of
electrode conductor strips on said other side of said ma-
trix; and
a plurality of electronic delay sUges associated with respec-
tive ones of said rows of electrode conductor strips, said
columns of electrode conductor strips and said rows of
electrode conductor strips being separately controllable.
856
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,437,034
PARALLEL-WIRE GRID ASSEMBLY WITH METHOD
AND APPARATUS FOR CONSTRUCTION THEREOF
Edward F. Uwandowtki, Westmont, and John Vrabec, South
Holland, both of III., assignors to The United States of Amer-
ica as represented by the United States Department of Energy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,920
Int. a.J HOIJ 1/46. 17/04. 19/38. 21/10
UA a. 313-348 , c,^„
mosaic of spaced pyroelectric elements bonded at its base to a
support covered with an electrode from which is taken, during
readmg of the target, the electric signal corresponding to each
element and depending on the incident, more especially infra-
red. radiation received by the element, said layer further com-
prising pyroelectric junction arms between said pyroelectric
elements, connecting together at least some thereof, said pyro-
electric junction arms extending over a certain height from
said base and presenting dimensions, particularly a section
parallel to said base, which are small with respect to those of
the pyroelectric elements themselves.
1. A winding assembly for use in constructing a plurality of
parallel-wire grids wherein arrays of substantially coplanar
spaced-apart parallel wires are retained between overlying first
and second mating frame members by an electrically conduc-
tive adhesive, the arrays being formed by continuously wind-
ing a wire along a predetermined path, the winding assembly
comprising; '
a plurality of spaced-apart spindles each having opposing
ends, at least one outer surface for contacting said wire
and a plurality of predeterminedly spaced index means on
said one surface for receiving said wire, said index means
comprising a single continuous substantially helical
groove formed on the outer surfaces of said spindles-
first and second spaced-apart walls, said opposing ends of
said first and said second spindles joined to said first and
said second walls respectively, so as to be suspended
therebetween in a predetermined spaced-apart relation-
ship;
means for rotatably mounting said first wall to rotate said
assembly, thereby winding said wire about said plurality
of spindles; and
aperture means located in said second wall for introduction
of one of said first and said second mating frame members
to interior portions of said wire array which are enclosed
by the continuous winding of said wire about said plural-
ity of said spindles.
4437 036
CATHODERAY TUBEHAVING A TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATED MASK-FRAME ASSEMBLY
Frank R. Ragland, Jr., Lancaster, Pa., assignor to RCA Corno-
ration. New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,383
Int. a.J HOIJ 29/%0
U.S. a. 313-402 ,4c„i™.
4,437,035
PYROELECTRIC TARGET AND IMAGE PICK UP TUBE
PROVIDED WITH SUCH A TARGET
Qaude Y. Raverdy, and Serge Veron, both of Paris, France,
assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
FUed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,247
Claims priority, application France, Oct. 14, 1980, 80 21943
Int. a.3 HOIJ il/00. 31/26
VS. a. 313-388 5 ^Mm
1. In a cathode-ray tube having a mask-frame assembly
mounted therein in spaced relation to a screen, said mask-frame
assembly including a shadow mask attached to a peripheral
frame, the improvement comprising
said mask-frame assembly including a plurality of peripheral
flexible portions at least one of which is bridged by a
member having a different coefficient of thermal expan-
sion than said assembly, said bridging member being at-
tached to said assembly at opposite sides of the at least one
bridged flexible portion, whereby said at least one flexible
portion is caused to flex by the expansion of said bridging
member when said bridging portion becomes heated dur-
ing tube operation.
1. A pyroelectric target for an image pick up tube, made
from a layer of a material endowed with the property of pyro-
electricity, which presents a spontaneous electric polarization
which depends on its temperature, said layer divided into a
4,437,037
DISPLAY PANEL AND KEEP-ALIVE ARRANGEMENT
THEREFOR
Edgar L. Harvey, Jamesburg, N J., assignor to Burroughs Cor-
poration, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,755
Int. a.3 HOIJ 17/49. 17/46
UA a 313-585 2 Claims
1. A display panel comprising pi a gas-filled envelope made
up of a base plate and a face plate sealed together hennetically,
an array of rows and columns of gas-filled cells,
a plurality of first electrodes disposed parallel to each other
and seated m elongated first slots in the top surface of said
base plate.
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
857
a plurality of second electrodes seated in other slots in the
top surface of said base plate, and
a plurality of identical strip electrodes disposed between said
base plate and face plate and oriented at an angle to said
first electrodes to define gas cells therewith, one of said
strip electrodes being operable as an anode with respect to
said second electrodes operable as glow cathodes, and the
4,437,038
HOLLOW CATHODE LAMP WITH IMPROVED
STABILITY ALLOY FOR THE CATHODE
Vincent F. Link, Elmira, and George K. Yamasaki, Horseheads,
both of N.Y., assignors to Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pitts-
burgh, Pa.
Filed May 29, 1979, Ser. No. 43,529
Int. a? HOIJ 17/04
U,S. a. 313—633 3 Oaims
1. A spectral radiation source of the hollow cathode type
comprising an anode and cathode positioned within a gas filled
envelope, with the operating discharge between the anode and
the cathode generating spectral radiation which is characteris-
tic of the metal cathode, the improvement wherein the metal
cathode,
consists of an alloy of silver which is chemically stable and
readily sputtered, and
calcium in an amount of up to about 23 weight percent of the
alloy.
4,437,039
STARTING ARRANGEMENT FOR
HIGH-INTENSITY-DISCHARGE SODIUM LAMP
Daniel A. Larson, Cedar Grove, N.J., assignor to North Ameri-
can Philips Electric Corp., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 948,131, Oct. 3, 1978, Pat. No.
4,191,910. This application Oct. 25, 1979, Ser. No. 88,424
Int. a.3 HOIJ 7/44. 17/34. 19/78. 29/96: HOIK 1/62
U.S. a. 315-60 15 Qalm.
others of said strip electrodes being operable as glow
cathodes with respect to said first electrodes,
said strip electrodes being disposed in an array along said
base plate, and said one of said strip electrodes is the first
strip electrode in the array, said other slots being shorter
than said first slots and extending from the edge of the
base plate only up to said first strip electrode.
1. In combination with a high-intensity-discharge sodium
lamp comprising an arc tube formed as an elongated hollow
alumina body member of predetermined dimensions having
alumina end-closure members hermetically sealed to the end
portions of the hollow body member and enclosing a dis-
charge-sustaining filling comprising sodium and inert ionizable
starting gas, electrodes operatively positioned within said arc
tube proximate the ends thereof, electrical lead-in means sealed
to and extending through said alumina end-closure members
and connecting to said electrodes to form composite electrode-
lead-in structures, a light-transmitting protective outer enve-
lope surrounding said arc tube, frame means positioned within
said outer envelope for supporting said arc tube in predeter-
mined position within said outer envelope, electrical adaptor
means affixed to said outer envelope for connection to a source
of power, a pair of electrical connection means connecting said
electrical adaptor means to said electrical lead-in means, and
one of said electrical connection means including said frame
means to electrically connect one of said electrodes to said
electrical adaptor means, the improvement which comprises:
(a) electrically conducting ceramic means hermetically
sealed to and extending through said arc tube at least at
one end thereof to form electrically conducting path
means through said arc tube, a portion of said conducting
ceramic means positioned interiorly of said arc tube and
electrically insulated from the proximate electrical lead-in
means, said conducting ceramic means comprising refrac-
tory-oxide-based ceramic matrix which is non-reactive
with respect to high-temperature sodium vapor and which
possesses the predetermined thermal-physical-chemical
properties required to form a high-temperature seal, with
alumina, and said refractory-oxide-based conducting ce-
ramic means having embedded therein a predetermined
amount of finely divided refractory metal which is inert
with respect to said discharge-sustaining filling to provide
said conducting ceramic means with a predetermined
electrical conductivity;
(b) electrically insulating barrier means positioned interme-
diate said arc-tube-interior portion of said conducting
ceramic means and portions of said electrical lead-in con-
ductor means which project interiorly of said arc tube and
are proximate said conducting ceramic means, and said
N
858
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
barrier means being dimensioned to intercept any con-
densed discharge-sustaining filling and prevent same from
forming a conducting path between said conducting ce-
ramic means and the proximate lead-in conductor means-
and '
(c) during starting of said lamp said conducting ceramic
means electrically connect, exterioriy of said arc tube, to
the said electrode which is positioned proximate the oppo-
site end of said arc tube from the connected conducting
ceramic means, and during starting of said lamp the total
electrical resistance between said arc-tube-interior portion
of said conducting ceramic means and the connected
opposite electrode permitting the maintenance of a glow-
type discharge within said arc tube between said arc tube
interior portion of said conducting ceramic means and the
said composite electrode-lead-in structure which is proxi-
mate thereto to ionize the atmosphere within said arc tube.
4,437 040
METHOD OF EFFECTING STABILIZED DIMMING OF
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
David L. Bay, Beverly, Mass., assignor to GTE Products Corpo-
ration, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,307
Int. a.3 H05B 37/02
U.S. a. 315-209 R 5 aai„s
winding disposed on said core, said winding coupled to
the exterior of said envelope through a pair of wire leads;
a length of conductive material disposed within said enve-
lope; and
an amalgam patch situated on said conductive material, said
length of conductive material electrically connected to
said pair of wire leads so that automatically variable con-
trol of the heat supplied said amalgam patch is achieved
during lamp operation, rapid heating of said amalgam
occuring due to high starting voltages applied to said core,
and reduced heating of said amalgam patch after lamp
starting due to lower lamp operating voltages.
6. A solenoidal electric field lamp comprising:
an evacuable, light-transmissive envelope having an ioniz-
able medium including mercury vapor, disposed therein;
means for providing a solenoidal electric field within said
envelope, said means comprising a core being coupled to
1. In an electronic ballast system including an oscillator
signal source and an output transformer for driving a lamp
filament, a method of effecting subilized lamp dimming
whereby a lamp filament voltage is maintained substantially
constant despite variations in the power level supplied to the
lamp, the method comprising the steps of:
coupling a first inductance in the resonant loop of the oscilla-
tor signal source,
substantially clamping the voltage across the first induc-
tance,
coupling a second inductance to the first inductance so that
the voltage across the second inductance is in proportion
to the voltage across the first inductance, and
applying the voltage across the second inductance to the
lamp filament so that a dominant component of the total
voluge across the filament is attributable to the voltage
across the second inductance.
4,437,041
AMALGAM HEATING SYSTEM FOR SOLENOIDAL
ELECTRIC FIELD LAMPS
Victor D. Roberts, Burnt Hills, N.Y., assignor to General Elec-
trie CooipaBy, Schenectady. N.Y.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,254
Int a.i H05B 41/16, 41/24
UACL31S-248 10 Clainu
1. A solenoidal electric field lamp comprising:
an evacuable, light transmissive envelope having an ioniz-
able medium including mercury vapor, disposed therein;
means for providing a solenoidal electric field within said
envelope, said means comprising a core being coupled to
an external alternating current power source through a
an external alternating current source through a winding
disposed on said core, said winding coupled to the exterior
of said envelope through a pair of wire leads;
a length of conductive material formed in a loop linking the
core, so that during lamp operation the time varying
magnetic field which drives the discharge current in the
lamp also causes a current to flow in said conductive loop;
and
an amalgam patch situated on said conductive material, so
that automatically variable control of the heat supplied
said amalgam patch is achieved during lamp operation,
with rapid heating of said amalgam patch disposed on said
conductive loop due to the high starting voltage applied
to said core by said external alternating current source and
reduced heating of the amalgam patch after lamp starting
due to the lower voltage provided to the core after start-
ing because of the solenoidal electric field lamp operating
characteristic.
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
8S9
4,437,042
STARTING AND OPERATING aRCUIT FOR GASEOUS
DISCHARGE LAlifPS
Don Morals, Danville, III., and Daniel V. Owen, Hendersonville,
N.C., auignors to General Electric Company, Schenectady,
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,533
Int. a.J H05B 37/00, 39/00, 41/14
U.S. a 315-289 15 Qaims
a controlled impedance coupled between said ballut and
said lamp;
circuit means for controlling a period of conduction for said
controlled impedance;
said circuit means including means combining signals pro-
portional to a current through said lamp, a voltage acrou
said lamp and an output lighting level of said lamp; and
current conduction means for providing a current path when
said controlled impedance is not in a period of conduction.
4.437,044
FLAT CATHODE RAY TUBE AND METHOD OF
OPERATION
Werner Veith. Heidelberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengescllschaft, Berlin k Munich. Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 109,810, Jan. 7, 1980,
abandoned. This application May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,405
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Jan. 25.
1979. 2902852
Int. C1.J HOIJ 29/70. 29/72
U.S. a. 315-366 20 Claims
1. A starting and operating circuit for gaseous discharge
lamp comprising, in combination, a source of alternating cur-
rent, inductive ballast means connected at its input side to said
current source, discharge lamp means connected to the output
side of said ballast means, transformer means connected in
series with said discharge lamp means across said ballast
means, sine wave oscillator means connected at its input side
through rectifying means to said current source and at its
output side of said transformer means whereby said trans-
former means steps up and applies to said discharge lamp
means sine wave voltage produced by said oscillator means for
starting and restarting said discharge lamp means, said circuit
being subject to overshoot of voltage from said current source
to said oscillator means, and means connected to said rectifying
means and said oscillator means for limiting said voltage over-
shoot.
^" 4^ k\ ^3] M3
t^13J
1 I
4,437.043
LIGHTING CONTROL FOR HIGH INTENSITY
DISCHARGE LAMP
Ira J. Pitel. Morristown. NJ.. aMignor to Comell-Dubllier
Electric Corporation. Newark, N J.
Filed Nov. 22. 1982. Ser. No. 443,243
Int. a? H05B 41/392
MS. a. 315—308 14 Qaims
1. A control circuit for regulating light output of high inten-
sity discharge lamps comprising:
a magnetic ballast providing electrical power for at leut one
high intensity lamp;
1. A method for displaying optical information in a fiat
cathode ray tube comprising the steps of providing a flat cath-
ode ray tube leaving an evacuated container having a front and
back wall which are parallel to each other, said front wall
supporting a cathodo-luminescent layer and a flatly extending
acceleration anode, said back wall having a flatly extending
back electrode, said container in a plane extending parallel to
the front and back walls and sub-dividing the chamber into a
back chamber and a front chamber being provided with a
substrate having a plurality of parallel extending conductive
strips forming at least one group of row conductors facing the
back electrode and on a surface opposite the row conductors
being provided with a plurality of parallel conductor strips
extending perpendicular to the direction of the row conductors
to form column conductors, said substrate being provided with
apertures disposed in the row conductors, said cathode ray
tube being provided with an electron source extending along
one side wall of the container parallel to the row conductors,
said electron source including one emission cathode as well as
one attraction anode to produce a flat electron beam having a
width which extends the entire length of the row conductors,
extends parallel to the row conductors, and projecu the beam
obliquely into the back chamber, said tube including a beam
guidance electrode with an equal potential extending in a plane
parallel to the back wall between the row conductor and the
back electrode; controlling the potentials applied on the back
electrodes, the acceleration anode, the emission cathode, the
attraction anode, the beam guidance electrode and the row
conductors to project a flat beam from the electron source
obliquely into the back chamber to travel in a sinuous path
with a wavelength and with penetration of the plane of the
beam guidance electrode at least once prior to penetrating a
selected row conductor and to penetrate successively selected
row conductors, said controlling including applying a base
potential to the cathode, applying a potential more positive
than the base potential to the beam guidance electrode, apply-
ing potentials more negative than the base potential to the back
electrode and to at leut all of the row conductors located
between a selected row conductor and the cathode, and raising
the potential on each selected row coneuctor to be S to the
base potential to move the selected row conducton along the
860
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
row conductive successively; changing the wavelength of the
sinuous path of the flat beam in a saw tooth manner so that the
flat beam strikes each row conductor of the group of conduc-
tors after travelling the same number of half wavelengths and
after leaving the sinuous path at the same phase of the path,
said changing of the wavelength includes modulating the po-
tential applied to at least one of the back electrodes, beam
guidance electrode, non-selected row conductors and the
attraction anode in a saw tooth manner; and providing selected
signal voltages to the column conductors to selectively block
the passage of the electron beam through space points of the
selected row conductor and enable passage at other points so
that the electron beam strikes selected points of a row of points
on the cathodo-luminescent layer associated with the selected
row conductor.
4,437,046
EXTRUSION DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM
Louie M. Faillace, Pawcatuck, Conn., aisignor to Crompton A
Knowles Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 389,937
Int. a.J G05B 19/24
U.S. a. 318-571 5 ci^„.
4,437 045
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING
SERVOMECHANISM BY USE OF MODEL REFERENCE
SERVO-CONTROL SYSTEM
Toyokazu Mitsuoka, Niiza, Japan, assignor to Agency of Indus-
trial Science A Technology and Ministry of International
Trade and Industry, both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,966
Int. C\? G05B 13/00
U.S. a. 318-561 ,2 aaims
10 11
^fM>H
4m
ShM^
m
K)-^
^'
12
1. An apparatus for model reference adaptive servo-control,
which comprises in combination:
a final control element to be driven on the basis of an instruc-
tion input and to be controlled by feeding back the output
of the final control element to the instruction input;
a reference model provided with the performance character-
istics the same as those of the final control element;
a detector for detecting a load value and a load variation
value of said final control element;
a comparator for comparing the outputs of said final control
element and said reference model thereby obuining the
difference therebetween;
at least one adaptive control coefficient circuit having stored
therein an adaptive control coefficient which is so pre-
scribed that the difference between the outputs of the final
control element and reference model is eliminated, and
adapted to produce an adjusting parameter by multiplying
one of the instruction input, load value and load variation
value by said adaptive control coefficient;
at least one multiplier for multiplying at least one adaptive
control coefficient by at least one of the instruction input,
load value and load variation value thereby to obtain an
adaptive control input; and
an adder for adding said adaptive control input to said in-
struction input and feeding these inputs to the final control
element.
1. For use with a drive unit including an electric drive motor
and regulator therefor and providing analog condition infor-
mation signals indicating a plurality of operating conditions of
the drive unit, said operating conditions including drive rpm,
armature voltage and armature current, a drive interface unit
adapted to accept said analog condition information signals
having any of a plurality of said of predetermined input charac-
teristics and to provide corresponding digital signals having
characteristics invariant with respect to the particular said
input characteristics,
said drive interface unit having
analog signal input means for receiving from said drive unit
a set of said analog condition information signals, said
analog signal input means having selectable means con-
nectable to said drive unit to receive said set of analog
condition information signals having any of a plurality of
predetermined input characteristics,
analog signal output means for outputting to said drive unit
analog control signals representative of a plurality of drive
operating commands, said operating commands including
on/off commands and speed set commands, said analog
signal output means having selectable means connectable
to said drive unit to output said analog control signals
having any of a plurality of predetermined output charac-
teristics,
internal daU bus means for carrying digiul information
signals, said digital information signals having characteris-
tics generally substantially different from said predeter-
mined input and output characteristics,
input signal isolation means connected between said analog
signal input means and said data bus, for providing, for
each said operating condition, corresponding said digital
signals in response to input said analog condition informa-
tion signals, said digital signal characteristics being invari-
ant with respect to input of said set of analog condition
information signals having any of said plurality of prede-
termined input characteristics,
output signal isolation means connected between said analog
signal output means and said daU bus means, for provid-
ing, for each said drive operating command, correspond-
ing said analog control signals in response to said digital
signals, said analog control signals having a selected one
of said predetermined output characteristics, and
command input means connected to said data bus means for
inputting drive operating commands,
data storing and channeling means connected to said data
bus means and having timing means and digital informa-
tion signal storage,
said data storing and channeling means being responsive to
said timing means successively to receive from said input
signal isolation means said digiul signals indicating said
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
86!
drive operating conditions and to store said digital signals
in said digital signal storage,
said data storing and channeling means being responsive to
said input commands to control said analog signal output
means to output said analog control signals indicating said
input command.
4,437 047
SYSTEM FOR AUTONOMOUS EARTH-POINTING
ACQUISITION OF A DUAL-SPIN SATELLITE
John W. Smay, Torrance, Calif., assignor to Hughes Aircraft
Company, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,776
Int. a.}B64C 17/06
U.S. a. 318-649 3 c\»im%
niiiiM
i_j me
-• tlllM
NUtM
r^ mm
CNTIM
etWdUTIH
TNWI ^ II
M
eiiTKi
1 eomiu'iN
UTI
TtlMI
CMUN
INK
rsHepJT
lulu
UltOi
/ 11,11
(uia mut
J4 >
1. Apparatus for providing torque command signals to a
torque motor which controls the pointing direction of the
despun portion of a dual-spin satellite having spun and despun
portions, said despun portion having a desired pointing direc-
tion within predetermined angular limits, said apparatus com-
prising:
first means for sensing the relative pointing position of said
despun portion and providing first signals indicative
thereof;
second means for providing second signals indicative of said
predetermined angular limits;
third means coupled to said first and second means for gen-
erating position torque command signals;
fourth means coupled to said first means for generating rate
torque command signals;
switching and summing means coupled to said third and
fourth means and to said torque motor for providing said
position torque command signals to said torque motor
when said relative pointing position is within said angular
limits, and for providing the sum of said position and rate
torque signals to said torque motor when said relative
pointing position is outside said angular limits.
4,437 048
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A PULLED LOAD,
PARTICULARLY AGRICULTURAL
TRACrOR-AND-PLOUGH CONTROL SYSTEM
Winfried Arnold, Vaihingen/Enz, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Jun. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 389,587
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 21,
1981, 3128713
Int. a? G05B 1/06
U.S. a. 318—663 23 Claims
1. Control system for a pulled load from a traction drive in
which the position of the load with respect to ground level is
subject to a command control (7), particulariy for agricultural
trailed apparatus pulled by a tractor, having
a position command element (7) providing a command posi-
tion signal;
a position transducer (1) providing an actual position signal;
a force transducer (2) measuring the pulling force and pro-
viding an actual force signal;
a controlled mixer (6) connected to and controlled by the
actual position signal and the actual force signal and pro-
viding a combined mixed signal;
and a control means (33, 34) coupled to the pulled load and
responsive to the commanded position signal and com-
bined signal to position the pulled load with respect to
ground level;
and comprising, in accordance with the invention,
* MTWUI
8,>«iri()i
means (3. 4, 5) for normalizing one of said actual signals with
respect to another one of the actual signals, said so nor-
malized one signal and the other one of the signals being
connected to the controlled mixer to eliminate reaction on
the mixing ratio or mixing relationship efTected by the
controlled mixer upon relative change of said one actual
signal with respect to the other, and hence change of the
actual position of the pulled load independently of change
of the setting of the positioning command element (7).
4,437,049
STEPPER MOTOR CONTROLLER
Robert N. Tullos, and Arthur Ostroff, both of Woodland Hills,
Calif., assignors to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing
Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Apr. 27, 1982. Ser. No. 372.384
Int. CI.) H02K 29/04
U.S. a. 318—696 5 claims
•<f .*
1. For a stepper motor capable of being positioned at a
plurality of positions, having a plurality of steps and an associ-
ated current state for each of said plurality of positions and
each of said plurality of positions being associated with one of
said plurality of steps, a method of moving said stepper motor
from an initial position to a final position by means of sequen-
tially stepping said stepper motor through said plurality of
steps, comprising the sequential operations of:
determining the direction of movement from said initial
position to said final position;
862
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
determining the number of steps from an initial step associ-
ated with said initial position to a final step associated with
said final position;
only if said direction of movement is in a first direction, then
incrementing said number of steps;
applying to said stepper motor the current state associated
with the next of said plurality of steps in said direction of
movement;
repeating the previous operation until said number of steps
have been initiated;
if said direction of movement is in said first direction, then
applying to said stepper motor the current state associated
with said final step; and
allowing said stepper motor to settle into said final position;
whereby the magnetc hysteresis of said stepper motor is
diminished by always electrically and magnetically ap-
proaching said final position from said second direction
even though said direction of movement from said initial
position to said final position may be in said first direction.
conditions, thereby permitting the employment of differ-
ent ratios for steady state and changing conditions.
4,437,051
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING
INDUCTION MOTOR
Nobuyoshj Muto; Hiroshi Nagase; KeiJiro Sakai, and Yasuo
Matsuda, all of Hitachi, Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 441,624
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 16, 1981, 56-182304
Int. a.' H02P 5/40
U.S. a. 318-808 4 Qaims
(gK- ^
a 24
4,437,050
STABILIZING CIRCUIT FOR CONTROLLED
INVERTER-MOTOR SYSTEM
John K. Overzet, Elmhurst, III., assignor to Borg- Warner Corpo-
ration, Chicago, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 189,445, Sep. 22, 1980, abandoned. This
application Nov. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 445,647
Int. a.3 H02P 7/42
U.S. a. 318—798 5 Qaims
eoairaoLLeo
••ro«C f—
STtTCM-
WVCMTCII n-
1. A control system for controlling and stabilizing the opera-
tion of an a-c motor driven by the output a-c voltage devel-
oped by an inverter from an adjustable d-c bus voltage re-
ceived over a d-c bus from a controlled d-c power supply, the
d-c bus voltage being subject to undesired variations under
changing conditions, said control system comprising:
means for providing a set point voltage representing a de-
sired steady state amplitude and a desired steady state
frequency for the a-c voltage produced by the inverter;
first utilizing means for utilizing the set point voltage to
adjust the d-c bus voltage to establish the inverter output
voluge at the desired steady sute amplitude, and includ-
ing a frequency insensitive feedback circuit, having a
predetermined first gain factor, from the d-c bus for deter-
minmg the ratio of steady state d-c bus voltage to steady
state inverter frequency;
second utilizing means for utilizing the set point volUge to
establish the frequency of the inverter output voltage at
the desired steady sUte level; and
stabilizing means, including a frequency insensitive circuit
having a predetermined secpnd gain factor, responsive to
a deviation in the d-c bus volUge from the desired steady
sute amplitude for varying the inverter frequency to
change the electrical load across the d-c bus to maintain
the bus voltage constant under changing conditions, the
second gain factor determining the ratio of d-c bus voltage
deviation to inverter frequency deviation under changing
1. An induction motor control system comprising an in-
verter for producing AC power by pulse-width modulation, an
induction motor powered by said inverter, a speed detector for
measuring the rotational speed of said induction motor, a cur-
rent detector for measuring the primary current of said induc-
tion motor, a speed controller which receives a speed com-
mand and output of said speed detector so as to provide a speed
control signal, a current controller which receives said speed
control signal and output of said current detector so as to
provide a current control signal, an adder which adds output
of said speed detector and said speed control signal so as to
provide an inverter frequency command, and a pulse-width
modulator which produces a pulse-width modulation signal in
accordance with outputs of said current controller and said
adder and supplies said pulse-width modulation signal to said
inverter, wherein said system further comprises a computa-
tional means which receives said speed control signal and
calculates the value of phase compensation, output of said
means being supplied to said adder so that it is added to output
of said speed detector and said speed control signal, output of
said adder being supplied as said inverter frequency command
to said pulse-width modulator.
4,437,052
STATIC VAR GENERATOR
Laszlo Gyugyi, Peiu Hills, Pa^ aisignor to Weatingbouse Elec-
tric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,940
Int. a.} H02J 3/1%
U.S. a. 323-210 4 Clainu
1. A static VAR generator, comprising:
(a) a capacitive current means disposed for connection into
an AC network;
(b) a first inductive current means disposed for connection
into said AC network;
(c) a second inductive current means disposed for connec-
tion into said AC network;
(d) a VAR monitoring means for monitoring the reactive
requirement of said AC network;
March 13. 1984
ELECTRICAL
863
(e) a first control means connected to said first inductive
current means, and said VAR monitoring means in phase
with the AC network voltage for controlling connection
of said first inductive current means into the AC network
in response to the reactive requirements of said AC net-
work; and
Bl^Sm
(0 a phase shifting means connected to said second inductive
current means and a second control means responsive to
the phase shifting means for controlling connection of said
second inductive current means at a voltage phase angle
leading the voltage of said first control means.
4,437,053
GRADIENT POWER SUPPLY
Ronald F. Bax, Columbia, Md., assignor to Diasonics (NMR)
Inc., South San Francisco, Calif.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,692
Int. a.J G05F 1/44
U.S. a. 323—268 20 Claims
1. A power supply for driving a coil comprising:
a source of a first potential;
a source of a second potential, said second potential being
lower than said first potential;
switching means coupled to said first potential for switching
said first potential;
a control device for controlling the fiow of current, said
device coupled in series with said switching means and
said source of said second potential at one of ite terminals
and the other of its terminals being coupled to said coil;
control means for causing both said switching means and
control device to conduct when current flow is being
changed within said coil and for causing said switching
means to cease conducting and said control device to
conduct when the current through said coil is at a steady
state, said control means being coupled to said switching
means, control device and said coil;
whereby the current in said coil may be driven to a high
level primarily with current from said first source of po-
tential and then maintained at said high level with current
supplied primarily from said second source of potential
under control of said control devices.
4,437.054
ADAPTOR TO FAaLITATE TESTING OF A LAMP
HOLDER
John E. Swift, Sr., Baltimore, Md., assignor to Bethlehem Steel
Corporation, Bethlehem, Pa.
Filed Jan. 18. 1982, Ser. No. 340,398
Int. Ci} GOIR n/02
U.S. a. 324-51 3a^„„
1. An adaptor to facilitate the testing of a lamp holder com-
prising:
A. a body made of electrically non-conductive material, said
body having a probe made of electrically non-conductive
material with a tip made of electrically conductive mate-
rial, said tip made of electrically conductive material for
insertion by straight line movement into the socket of a
lamp holder to contact the hot lead thereof,
B. a band of electrically conductive material on said probe to
contact the neutral lead of said lamp holder,
C. a spring clip atUched to said body to contact the ground
lead of said lamp holder, and
D. a three-hole receptacle atuched to said body with one
hole electrically connected to said tip, the second hole
electrically connected to said band and the third hole
electrically connected to said clip.
4,437.055
PROCESS FOR THE CAPAQTIVE MEASUREMENT OF
LENGTHS AND OF ANGLES
Hans U. Meyer, rue des Taneurs 3, 1110 Morges, Switzerland
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,478
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 21. 1980,
8609/80
lot a.) GOIR 27/26
U.S. a. 324—61 R 8 Oaims
ttmjrtti
■Neuurow
1. A capacitive process for the measurement of lengths and
of angles, which uses a plurality of emitting electrodes (10)
arranged in series, and at least one receiving electrode (20)
which faces the emitting electrodes and is of less length than
said series, and which is displaceable parallel to the latter,
characterized in that the emitting electrodes which face a
receiving electrode form two groups each one of them con-
864
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
nected to an alternating voltage Vi, respectively V2, of con-
stant amplitude, having the same frequency and of opposite
phase, separated by an emitting electrode which is connected
to an alternating voltage Vx which is varied between Vi and
V2 in a manner such that it constitutes a measurement of the
displacement of the receiving electrode, the signal caught by
the receiving electrode being maintained equal to zero by
varying said voltage Vx. the capacities between the aforemen-
tioned emitting and receiving electrodes being, over a trajec-
tory of at least one L, which is the shift between the center
lines of two emitting electrodes, an exact linear function of the
displacement.
4 437 056
CAB SIGNAL TEST SET FOR AUTOMATICALLY
TESTING THE PICKUP COILS AND CHECKING AN
AMPLIHER OF CAB SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
Joseph J. Pierro, Jr., Dayton, Pa., assignor to American Stan-
dard Inc., Swissvale, Pa.
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,581
Int. a.3 GOIR 15/12; G08B 29/00
U.S. a. 324-73 AT 13 aa,„g
4,437,057
FREQUENCY DETECTION SYSTEM
Sunao Suzuki, Kobe, and Koji Maeda, Takatsuki, both of Japan
assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo
Japan '
Filed Jan. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 342,917
Gaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 10, 1981, 56-18609
Int. a.3 GOIR 23/02
U.S. a 324-78 R 3 Clainu
«P « Y ^ *• 50
I ^Z> OUTPUT
LJ^.
1. A frequency detection system comprising sampling means
for sampling an AC input V(t) having a frequency to be de-
tected with a predetermined constant sampling period h to
form sampled values V(to-2h), V(To-h), V(to-hh) and
V(to+2h) where t^ designates any desired time point, and
calculating means for calculating
><*) =
V(.to -I- Ih) - V(to - Ih)
V{to + A) - nno - h)
to provide a measure of said frequency of said AC input.
4,437,058
INDICATING MEANS FOR MEASURING INSTRUMENT
Dainichiro Kinoshita, Kyoto, Japan, assignor to Horiba, Ltd.,
Kyoto, Japan
Filed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,368
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 5, 1980, 55-91988
Int. a.3 GOIR 19/26: GOIN 27/42
UA a. 324-120 6a2im
1. A cab signal test set for automatically testing the integrity
of pickup coils and for checking the sensitivity of an amplifier
of a cab signal receiver of cab signal equipment comprising, a
mode selector means electrically connected to a clock means
for surting a timing rate, said clock means electrically con-
nected to a counting means for initiating a counting operation
in accordance with the timing rate, said counting means elec-
trically connected to a code selecting means for causing a code
action, said code selecting means connected to a code oscillat-
ing means, said code oscillating means connected to a carrier
oscillating means, said carrier oscillating means producing a
series of modulated carrier signals and directly injecting in a
sequential order a selected one of the series of modulated
carrier signals into the pickup coils and receiver to simulate
legitimate cab signal speed commands for verifying the func-
tionality of the cag signal equipment.
1. An indicating means for measuring instruments producing
measurement signals expressed as voltage values, said indicat-
ing means comprising a voltage-frequency converter for con-
verting the voltage signals into frequency signals with a fre-
quency proportional to the value of the voltage signals, fre-
quency sensing means connected to said voltage frequency
converter for sensing the frequency signals, an indicator con-
nected to said frequency sensing means for receiving the
sensed frequency and for digitally indicating the sensed fre-
quency as a value corresponding to the measured value, a first
switch connected between said voltage-frequency converter
and said frequency sensing means, a power source, connected
to at least one of said voltage-frequency converter, said fre-
quency sensing means and said indicator, a second switch
connected between said power source and said at least one of
said voltage-frequency converter, said frequency sensing
means and said indicator, for providing operating power from
said power source to said at least one of said voltage-frequency
converter, said sensing means and said indicator only when
said second switch is closed, and a controlling means con-
nected to said first switch, responsive to closing of said second
switch, for holding said first switch in an open state for a first
March 13. 1984
ELECTRICAL
863
predetermined time for permitting said frequency sensing
means to stabilize, and in a closed state for a second predeter-
mined time following said first predetermined time, for en-
abling said frequency sensing means to sense the frequency of
the frequency signals during said second predetermined time.
4,437,059
WATTMETER
Eric A. Hauptmann, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Rochester
Instrument Systems, Inc., Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 199,379
Int. a.J GOIR 11/00. 21/06
U.S. a. 324-142 19 Qaims
V V
'lY , r r
1^* ' . . 9* J ♦" ~* — — —1
ZEffli^r
,___fOWM ^UMLT j^ j
1. A wattmeter for measuring the power passed by conduc-
tor means, comprising:
current sensing means for measuring the instantaneous cur-
rent flowing in said conductor means and for generating
an induced current representative of the current flowing
in the conductor means;
voltage sensing means for sampling the instantaneous volt-
age of said conductor means with respect to a voltage
reference;
multiplier means responsive to the current sensing means
and voltage sensing means for generating a product signal
representative of the instantaneous power passed by the
conductor means;
integrator means for integrating said product signal and
generating a pulsed control signal with pulses having a
frequency proportional to the average power passed by
said conductor means, said integrator means including,
means for integrating said product signal after each pulse of
the pulsed control signal is generated and for generating a
sum signal representative of the sum of the integrated
product signal and a predefined power correction factor;
means for generating each pulse of said pulsed control signal
for a predefined time interval when the magnitude of the
sum signal is represenutive of a predefined value of
power; and
means for defining a value of said power correction factor
representative of measured power during said predefined
time interval.
4,437,060
METHOD FOR DEEP LEVEL TRANSIENT
SPECTROSCOPY SCANNING AND APPARATUS FOR
CARRYING OUT THE METHOD
Gyorgy Ferenczi; Peter Horvath; Ferenc Toth; Jozsef Kiss, and
Janos Boda, all of Budapest, Hungary, assignors to Magyar
Tudomanyos Akade'mia Muszaki Fizikai KuUtd Intezete,
Budapest, Hungary
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,903
Oaims priority, application Hungary, Jun. 7, 1980, 1439/80
Int. a.3 GOIR 31/26
U.S. a. 324—158 D 8 Qaims
1. In a method for carrying out deep level transient spectros-
copy scanning on a semiconductor junction containing traps in
the neighborhood thereof by measuring a predetermined se-
quence of transient capacitance changes of said junction, in
which each measurement of said sequence comprises the steps
of:
(a) applying a high frequency signal to a diode representing
said junction;
(b) applying a reverse bias voltage to said diode;
(c) applying a voltage pulse with a predetermined duration
to said diode superimposed on the reversed bias voltage to
provide a substantially different charge state of said traps;
(d) detecting the amplitude envelope of the capacitive signal
component of said high frequency signal passed through
said diode following the cessation of the pulse to form an
input signal of a lock-in amplifier;
(e) repeating steps (b) to (d) periodically, in which the repeti-
tion period is substantially longer than said voltage pulse
and substantially longer than the period of said high fre-
quency signal;
- (0 generating a symmetrical synchronizing pulse sequence
with a repetition and duration both equal to said repetition
period in such a way that a dead period elapses between
the ending moment of said voltage pulse and starting
moments of said synchronizing pulse sequence to form a
synchronizing signal for said lock-in amplifier;
(g) generating respective simulated signals during each of
said voltage pulses and the subsequent dead periods to
take values corresponding to those of said amplitude en-
velopes before said voltage pulses; and
(h) connecting said simulated signals to the signal input of
said lock-in amplifier during the non-existence of said
amplitude envelope,
whereby said lock-in amplifier is used to provide a weighted
value of said amplitude envelope with said synchronizing
pulse to represent the measure of the transient capacitance
change in which during said scanning, the lengths of said
dead periods being adjusted to form a predetermined same
fraction of any corresponding repetition time period, and
said measurements in said sequence being distinguishable
in the temperature of said junction and/or in the lengths of
the repetition periods and/or in the voltage pulses,
4,437,061
SPEED DETECTOR FOR SEWING MACHINES
Nozomu Shinozaki, Hirakata; Shigeo Neki, Osaka, and Takashi
Dohi, Hirakata, all of Japan, assignors to MatsushiU Electric
Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,514
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 31, 1980, 55-106126
Int. Q.3 GOIR 1/04
U.S. Q. 324—166 12 Qaims
1. A speed detector for a sewing machine comprising a rotor
rotatable with a drive shaft of the sewing machine, a sutor
fixed to a housing of the sewing machine, said rotor and stator
being formed of a ferromagnetic material and each having a
multitude of teeth which face in opposition to the teeth of the
other forming a gap therebetween, a permanent magnet form-
ing a closed loop magnetic circuit with said rotor and stator. a
coil which intersects the magnetic flux of said closed loop
magnetic circuit to generate a voltage which is used to gener-
866
OPT^ICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
ate a train of pulses at a frequency proportional to the rota-
tional speed of said sewing machine through an amplifier and
a waveshaping circuit, further comprising an integrating cir-
cuit connected to one of said amplifier and waveshaping cir-
cuit.
4,437,062
EDDY CURRENT TESTING APPARATUS INCLUDING A
TWO COIL PROBE HAVING SANDWICHED WINDINGS
Bernard J. Donnelly, Kirkton, Scotland, assignor to Thorbum
Technics (International) Limited, Glasgow, Scotland
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,422
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 7, 1979.
7942263; Sep. 15, 1980, 8029772
Int. a.3 GOIN 27/90: GOIR ii/U: HOIF 27/2%
UA a. 324-238 9 ^^^
1. An eddy current inspection probe comprising a ferrite
rod, a non-conductive bobbin located on the ferrite rod and
havmg a coil-receiving portion positioned adjacent one end of
the femte rod and tw»«e«^ wound around the rod axis in said
coil-receiving portion, each coil having a first full layer of
turns extending along the whole of said coil-receiving portion
and a second partial layer of turns, the two said partial layers
froming a common layer sandwiched between said first layers.
4,437,063
SPECIMEN HEAD FOR ELECTRON SPIN RESONANCE
AND PARAMAGNETIC ELECTRON RESONANCE
MEASUREMENTS
Reinhard Biehl, Karlsruhe, and Dieter Schmalbein, MarxzeU-
BnrbM, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bruker
Analytiaclie MeBtecfanik GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,582
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 6,
Int a.} GOIR 33/0%
UA a. 324-316 16 Claims
1. A specimen head for electron spin resonance and para-
magnetic electron resonance measurements comprising:
an annularly cylindrical resonator having two end walls,
a waveguide, said waveguide being coupled to one of the
end walls of said resonator,
means including said waveguide for exciting an Hoi i wave in
said resonator,
the other end wall of said resonator being formed by a piston
having an opening for inu-oducing a specimen into the
resonator,
said opening and said resonator being concentric,
means for shifting said piston,
means for altering the coupling of said waveguide to said
resonator,
a bearing block,
a hollow piston rod,
said piston being attached at the end of the hollow piston rod
and mounted in the bearing block,
said bearing block containing said resonator,
said piston rod being concentric relative to the axis of said
resonator and longitudinally shiftable,
said waveguide being atUched to said bearing block on that
side of said resonator which is opposite said piston,
said waveguide extending along the outside of said bearing
block parallel to said piston rod.
dnve shafts, said drive shafts being arranged on the side of
said piston rod opposite said waveguide in the plane con-
taming the axes of said waveguide and said piston rod and
are mounted to said bearing block,
said drive shafts being connected to the means for shifting
said piston,
said means for shifting said piston engaging said piston rod
and the means for altering the coupling of said waveguide,
in which said bearing block is attached to the head member
by means of rods extending parallel to said waveguide and
said drive shafts,
wherein the free end of said waveguide is attached to the
head member,
the free ends of said drive shafts being mounted in said head
member,
said head member having a hole to receive said piston rod.
4 437 064
APPARATUS FOR DETECTING A MAGNEnC
ANOMALY CONTIGUOUS TO REMOTE LOCATION BY
SQUID GRADIOMETER AND MAGNETOMETER
SYSTEMS
William C. Orerton, Jr., and William A. Steyert, Jr., both of Lot
Alamos, N. Mex., assignors to The United Suites of America
as represented by tiie United States Department of Enersy.
Washington, D.C. '*'
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,247
Int a.3 GOIV 3/26; GOIR 33/03^
UA a. 324-^346 II Clataia
1. A SQUID magnetic detection apparatus suitable for oper-
ation at a remote location such as within a borehole, said appa-
ratus comprising:
cryogenic housing means insertable into a borehole for con-
taining and maintaining a cryogenic environment within:
first SQUID means secured within said cryogenic housing
means, said first SQUID means having a horizontal axial
position axially rotatable magnetic field sensing coil ar-
rangement including a pair of balanced axial coils wherein
March 13. 1984
ELECTRICAL
867
each coil in said pair of balanced axial coils is wound near
an individually associated end of a high thermal conduc-
tive insulating round cylinder of approximately 2.25
inches in diameter and 1.710 inches in length, said first
SQUID means for generating electrical signals representa-
tive of the magnetic field sensed by said horizontal axial
position axially rotatable magnetic field sensing coil ar-
rangement;
second SQUID means secured within said cryogenic hous-
ing means, said second SQUID means having a horizontal
planar position axially rotatable magnetic field sensing coil
arrangement including a pair of balanced planar coils
wherein each coil in said pair of balanced planar coils
comprises an approximately three turn spiral coil of ap-
proximately I inch outside diameter, formed upon a high
thermal conductive insulating form of dimensions approx-
imately 2| inches wide by 1.5 inches high by 0.5 inches
thick, said second SQUID means for generating electrical
signals represenutive of the magnetic field sensed by said
4,437,065
ARRANGEMENT FOR MONITORING CATHODICALLY
PROTECTED STRUCTURES
Gerrit Woudstra, Roden, Netherlands, assignor to Stamicarbon
B.V., Geleen, Netherlands
Filed Sep. 1, 1981. Ser. No. 298,520
Qaims priority, application Netherlands. Sep. 12, 1980,
8005149
Int. CI.3 GOIN 27/42
U.S. a. 324-425 ,4 Qaims
•rrraoMea
11
12 13
X
14 1^17 1
jusMurr
— — fTTTTI
n
(/'^^
■e4tic4eatteiur
horizontal planar position axially rotatable magnetic field
sensing coil arrangement;
rotation means secured with said cryogenic housing means
and coupled to said horizongal axial position and said
horizontal planar position axially rotatable magnetic field
sensing coil arrangements for rotating simultaneously
both said coil arrangements;
electronic means secured within said cryogenic housing
means, said electronic means communicating with said
rotation means for directing the rotating of said rotation
means, said electronic means further communicating with
said first and second SQUID means for receiving said
electrical signals generated by said first and second
SQUID means; and
remote electrical coupling means connected through said
cryogenic housing means to said electronic means for
facilitating remote control of said rotation means and
remote monitoring of said electrical signals generated by
said first and second SQUID means.
1. An apparatus for monitoring the potential with respect to
the soil of a metallic structure buried in soil and cathodically
protected by an externally applied DC voltage, comprising:
a measuring electrode for placement in the soil adjacent to
the structure to be monitored, the electrode being electri-
cally connected to the structure;
a reference electrode placed on or in the soil;
a measuring circuit coupled to the measuring and reference
electrodes for measuring the potential difference between
the measuring and reference electrodes, the measuring
circuit including
a generator for generating a reference potential;
a comparator for comparing the measured potential differ-
ence between the measuring electrode and the reference
electrode with the reference potential and providing a
comparison signal indicative of the amount by which
the measured potential difference exceeds the reference
potential;
a pulse signal generator, for generating, in response to the
comparison signal, a pulse stream signal having a pulse
frequency proportional to the companson signal and
therefore proportional to the amount by which the
measured potential difference exceeds the reference
potential;
a counter for counting the number of pulses of the pulse
stream signal during a measuring time cycle;
timer means for determining and recording the time inter-
val of the measuring time cycle; and
means, coupled to the counter and timer means so as to
receive data therefrom, for computing, after completion
of the measuring cycle, the average value of the amount
by which the measured potential has been higher than
the reference potential during the measuring time cycle.
4,437,066
APPARATUS FOR SYNTHESIZING A SIGNAL BY
PRODUaNG SAMPLES OF SUCH SIGNAL AT A RATE
LESS THAN THE NYQUIST SAMPLING RATE
Bruce E. Gordon, Santa Barbara, Calif., assignor to RayUicon
Company, Lexington, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 152,015, May 21, 1980, Pat. No. 4,349,918.
This application Aug. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 412,458
Int. a.} H03K 9/06
U.S. a. 328—14 4 Claims
1. In combination:
(a) means for producing samples of a signal having a fre-
quency f, such samples being produced at a predetermined
sampling rate fo. where fo it leu than 2f, such produced
samples having a plurality of frequency components sepa-
rated in frequency one from another by an amount having
868
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
a predetermined relationship to the samphng rate, one of
such frequency components having the frequency f; and
22a AZ* M«
output coupled to said input switch and said feedback
switch for providing a close command for a predeter-
mined time interval to said input switch and said feedback
switch to shunt said input resistor and said feedback resis-
tor, after a pulse passes through said amplification means.
4,437,068
FSK DEMODULATOR FOR
FREQUENCY-MODULATION MODEM
Jean E. Picquendar, Paris, France, assignor to Thomson-CSF.
Paris, France
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,128
Int. a.J H03D 3/00; H04L 27/14
U.S. a. 329-105 11 Claims
'»-Sl>*«l«»i|
(b) means, responsive to a signal indicative of the frequency
f and fed by the train of produced samples, for coupling
the one of the produced plurality of frequency compo-
nents having the frequency f to an output.
■^-f
<;./>
Jc.
4,437,067
TRANSIENT ERROR REDUCnON FOR STORED
CHARGED aRCUITS
Joe A. McKenzie, Ridgecrest, Calif., and Gary D. Lowe, Prague,
Olda., assignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of tbe Navy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 187,124
Int. a.5 H03B 1/00. 1/04; H03K 5/00; H04B 1/10
U.S. a. 328-167 5 Qaims
M FILTER^ \'^ 1 1 - ,
1. An electronic circuit for eliminating transient error in a
stored charge circuit without altering a transfer function,
comprising:
amplification means having an inverting input for receipt of
an input signal having a sharp transient rise time, a non-
inverting input referenced to ground, and an output;
an input lead coupling said inverting input of said amplifica-
tion means to an outside source, and having an input
resistor in series with an input capacitor, said input capaci-
tor being coupled between said input resistor and said
inverting input of said amplification means for differentia-
tion of said input signal;
a normally open input switch coupled to said input lead in
parallel with said input resistor for shunting said input
resistor on command;
a first feedback lead having a feedback resistor coupling said
output of said amplification means to said inverting input
of said amplification means;
a normally open feedback switch coupled to said first feed-
back lead in parallel with said feedback resistor for shunt-
ing said feedback resistor on command;
a second feedback lead having a feedback capacitor coupling
said output of said amplification means to said input lead at
a junction between said input resistor and said input ca-
pacitor for integration of said input signal; and
switching actuator means coupled to said output of said
amplification means and having a switching command
.T^
1. A FSK demodulator for a frequency-modulation modem,
this modem being formed from a modulator ensuring the con-
version of a succession of binary signals equal to 0 or to 1 into
a periodic analog signal at two different frequencies, F^ and
Fz, and a demodulator ensuring the conversion of the analog
signal at two frequencies ¥a and Fz, into a succession of 0 and
1, wherein the demodulator comprises
(a) two parallel channels over which there is simultaneously
sent a sine curve analog signal to be demodulated, each
channel being formed by:
(i) two parallel transverse filters which comprise an n-t-1
stage shift register and which form the convolution be-
tween the input signal of the sampled filter and the pulse
response of the filter defined by its weighting coefficients
h*, the weighting coefficients of the two filters being
functions of the product cjpr, a given function f/j (wpr)
being the weighting coefficient of one of the filters, and
another given function f/Ctopr) being the weighting coeffi-
cient of the other filter with:
for one of the channels a)=W^ = 27rF^ and for the other
channel &) = Wz=2n'Fz; and in which
T, is the delay with which the shifting of a sample takes
place from one stage of the register to the next;
p is varying from 1 to n and nr such that n is limited to the
duration of the baud of the modem; and
with W^ and Wz depending on the channel, the maximum
of f/j (wpr) equal to that of f/ (wpr) and with a phase
shift of ff/2 between f/j and Fr, and
(ii) a device ensuring the squaring of the signal from each
filter; and
(b) a differential amplifier receiving the signal from the two
channels and supplying the output signal of the demodula-
tor.
4437 069
LOW NOISE TUNED AMPLIHER
Leonard L. IQeinberg, Greenbelt, Md., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Administrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
FUed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,839
Int. a.3 H03F 1/34
U.S. a. 330—109 10 Claims
1. A tuned, low noise amplifier comprising:
a first amplifying sUge including a field effect transistor with
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
869
gate, drain and source connections and having both signal
input and signal output means;
a second amplifying stage driven by said first amplifying
stage from said first stage signal output means and includ-
ing an operational amplifier having inverting and non-
^-^3w ^^
■'9 _._
-1 c/t""'
inverting inputs and a second stage signal output means,
said operational amplifier being loaded in a reactive impe-
dance bridge configuration and said second stage reflect-
ing a negative resistance in parallel with said first stage
signal output means.
4,437,070
AMPLinER ARRANGEMENT WHOSE OVERALL GAIN
IS CONTROLLABLE BY MEANS OF A CONTROL
VOLTAGE
Manfred Horl, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,334
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 29,
1980, 3007715
Int. a.3 H03F 3/45, 1/34; H03G 3/20
U.S. a. 330—254 16 Gaims
£
\&H
r r
X
1. An amplifier arrangement comprising a first amplifier
having at least one input and an output, a second amplifier
having a low-pass frequency characteristic and an input cou-
pled to the output of the first amplfier and an output coupled
by means of at least one negative feedback branch to an input
of the first amplifier to provide negative feedback, and control
voltage means coupled to an input of said first amplifier for
varying the negative feedback and thereby the overall gain of
the amplifier arrangement, said control voltage means also
being coupled to the second amplifier for varying the gain of
the second amplifier such that for an increase in the overall
gain of the ampfifier arrangement the gain of the second ampli-
fier also increases.
an oscillator circuit having a frequency-control input and an
output for delivering the clock signal H;
first logical means having a first input for receiving the
binary signal S, a second input for receiving the clock
signal H and having an output for delivering a logical
signal Si representing the sign of the phase difference
between the signals S and H;
second logical means having a first input for receiving the
signal S) from said first logical means output, a second
input for receiving the clock signal H and having an out-
put for delivering a logical signal Sj representing the sign
of the frequency difference between the signals S and H;
a switching circuit having a first and a second input for
receiving respectively the signals Si and S3 from the out-
puts of said first and second logical means, a control input
and an output for delivering one of the signals Si or S3
according to the signal applied to the control input;
a switching control circuit having a first input for receiving
the signal S3 from said second logical means, a second
input and an output connected to the control input of the
switching circuit;
a tuning control circuit having an input coupled to the out-
put of the switching circuit and an output coupled to the
second input of said switching control circuit and also to
the control input of the oscillator circuit for delivering a
control voltage to the oscillator circuit.
4,437,072
LOCK DETECTING CIRCUIT FOR PHASE-LOCKED
LOOP FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZER
Fumitaka Asami, Kunitacbi, Japan, assignor to Fi^Jitsu Limited,
Kawasaki, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 179,898, Aug. 20, 1980, abandoned.
This application Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 420,633
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 23, 1979, 54-107392
Int. a.' H03L 7/18
U.S. a. 331—1 A 12 Gaims
• «•
I » I — I I , loaPLLAToin r'
^1 1 y
I -bGTAL"!
*< ClUCUIT
_J ,
ilMNG
R1
CJ
"^ '•
4,437,071
DEVICE FOR THE RECOVERY OF A CLOCK SIGNAL
FROM A BINARY SIGNAL
Daniel Rougeolle, Paris, France, assignor to Thomson-CSF,
Paris, France
FUed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,260
Claims priority, application France, Dec. 9, 1980, 80 26075
Int. G.3 H03L 7/08
U.S. G. 331—1 A 7 Gaims
1. A device for the recovery of a local clock signal H from
a binary signal S, comprising:
1. A phase-locked loop circuit comprising:
a reference oscillator providing a first output signal;
a reference frequency divider, operatively connected to said
reference oscillator, for dividing the frequency of the first
output signal of said reference oscillator by a predeter-
mined value and producing a second output signal having
a frequency corresponding to the divided frequency of the
first output signal;
a voltage controlled oscillator providing a third output
signal;
a programmable frequency divider, operatively connected
1040 O.G.— 32
870
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
to said voltoge controlled oscillator, for dividing the fre-
quency of the third output signal by a controlled variable
value to produce a fourth output signal;
a phase comparator, operatively connected to said program-
mable frequency divider and said reference frequency
divider, for receiving and monitoring the difference in
phase between the fourth and second output signals and
providmg first and second phase output signals, resoec-
tively; *^
a low pass filter, operatively connected between said phase
comparator and said voltage controlled oscillator, for
controllmg said voltage controlled oscillator in depen-
dence upon the first and second phase output signals of
said phase comparator;
lock detecto' means, operatively connected to said phase
comparator, for generating a first lock detecting signal
which IS pulsed when a difference in phase is detected
between said fourth and second output signals; and
digital signal maintaining circuit means, operatively con-
nected to said lock detector means and said reference
frequency divider, for converting the first lock detecting
signal into a second lock detecting signal having a direct
current level, maintaining the second lock detecting signal
for a predetermined time after the first lock detecting
signal IS extinguished and providing an output signal, said
digiul signal maintaining circuit means comprising
converter circuit means, operatively connected to said refer-
ence frequency divider and said lock detector means, for
converting the first lock detecting signal into the second
lock detecting signal in dependence upon the second
output signal and outputting the second lock detecting
signal; and *
maintaining circuit means, operatively connected to said
converter circuit means, for maintaining the potential of
the second lock detecting signal for the predetermined
time after the first lock detecting signal is extinguished and
providing the output signal.
4,437,073
EQUALIZER CAVITY WITH INDEPENDENT
AMPLrrUDE CONTROL
Herbert L. Thai, Jr., Tredyffrin Township, Chester County, Pa.,
assipior to The United States of America as represented by
the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 347,384
Int. a.3 HOIP 5/00: H03H 7/03
U.S. a. 333-28 R .Claims
tromagnetic energy therein to enter said circular wave-
guide means, said circular waveguide means including
means for absorbing RF energy and means for positioning
said RF absorber means within said circular waveguide
means. *
4,437,074
ULTRAHIGHFREQUENCY TRANSMISSION LINE OF
THE THREE-PLATE AIR TYPE AND USES THEREOF
Georges Cohen, and Jean Heroux, both of Paris, France, assign-
ors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,319
Qaims priority, application France, Dec. 18, 1980, 80 26912
Int. a.3 HOIP 3/08. 5/12
U.S. a. 333-128 , 15 ^^
\ An ultrahigh frequency transmission line comprising:
two parallel conducting plates spaced apart from each other
and connected electrically together, the space separating
these two plates being filled with air;
a central conducting strip placed between said two plates
and parallel thereto; and
a plurality of support pieces made from a dielectric material
and spread out along each side of said strip, each support
piece being a parallelpipedic block mounted transversely
with respect to said strip and having lower and upper
faces on which said two conducting plates are respec-
tively placed so as to bear on said faces of said block, each
of said blocks comprising a longitudinal tapered extension
and a notch provided at the end of said extension in which
a side of said strip is positioned so as to be held in place.
4,437,075
SELF-CORRECTED ELECTRIC HLTERS
Corinne Darmouni, Paris, France, assignor to Thomson-CSF
Paris, France
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,751
Qaims priority, appUcation France, Jan. 23, 1981, 81 01294
Int. a.3 H03H 7/03. 7/075
U.S. a. 333-167 3 cutas
1. An equalizer cavity apparatus with independent ampli-
tude control comprising in combination:
a rectangular waveguide for carrying an electromagnetic
energy;
an equalizer cavity means mounted on the top surface of said
rectangular waveguide, said equalizer cavity means being
directionally coupled to said rectangular waveguide to
receive a predetermined amount of said electromagnetic
energy through an opening between said equalizer cavity
means and said recungular waveguide, and,
a circular waveguide means positioned on the top surface of
said equalizer cavity means, said equalizer cavity means
including an aperture in its top surface to allow said elec-
tZ It
1. A self-corrected electric filter with localized constant
elements for filtering a wide band input signal which com-
prises:
filtering means constituted by a group of n resonators Rl to
Rn, n being an even number, n-2 resonators of the group
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
871
being ordered in cascade between the first resonator Rl
and the final resonator Rn;
input impedance matching means connected to said first
resonator Rl for applying said wide band input signal to
said filtering means;
output impedance matching means connected to said final
resonator Rn for constituting the output of said self cor-
rected electric filter;
correction means comprising a first group of coupling means
Mi,i-(- 1, whereby i is a positive integer and takes all the
possible values from 1 to n— 1, each coupling means Mi-
,i-|-l connecting two adjacent resonators Ri and Ri-«-l,
said group of n resonators being self inductive except for
the coupling means connecting the two central resonators
which is capacitive, said correction means also comprising
a second group of secondary coupling means MK,1, each
secondary coupling means connecting a Kth and a 1th
resonator RK and Rl of said group of n resonators,
whereby K takes all possible values from 1 to (n — 2)/2
individually, and 1 is equal to n— (K — 1), for contributing
to arithmetic symmetry of the amplitude and of the group
delay time for correcting distortion of group delay time.
4,437,077
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE USABLE AT VERY HIGH
FREQUENQES AND ITS PRODUCTION PROCESS
Raymond Henry, and Michel Heitzmaan, both of Paris, France,
assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,690
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 8, 1980, 80 17533
Int. a.5 HOIP 1/00
U.S. O. 333—245 4 Claims
4,437,076
COAXIAL nLTER HAVING A PLURALITY OF
RESONATORS EACH HAVING A BOTTOMED
CYLINDER
Mitsuo Makimoto, Yokohama; Haruyoshi Endo, Sagamihara;
Ko Kikuchi, Tokyo, and Sadahiko Yamashita, Sagamihara, all
of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,766
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 17, 1981, 56-22602
Int. a.3 HOIP 1/205. 7/05
U.S. a. 333—206 12 Qaims
1. A semiconductor device comprising:
a diode of the type able to operate at a very high frequency,
a pedestal, said diode being welded on said pedesul, and a
coaxial line with presettable impedance constituted by
a cylindrical ring concentric to the diode, said ring being
made from dielectric material and having an outer cylin-
drical surface and one of its ends metal-coated, the metal
coated one end being welded on the pedestal,
and a cylindrical mandrel having an external diameter
smaller than the internal diameter of the cylindrical ring,
said mandrel having a length slightly exceeding the length
of said cylindrical ring, said mandrel having a convex end
in contact with the diode and an opposite planar end, the
external surface of said mandrel supporting at least one
metal coating which is a good conductor of electricity.
305
30e 307 309 SO
.502
1. A coaxial filter arrangement comprising:
(a) a plurality of resonators each having:
a center conductor;
a metallic cylinder having a bottom and a peripheral wall
portion with a predetermined diameter, said metallic
wall portion being attached to one end of said center
conductor in such a manner that said peripheral wall
portion surrounds said center conductor; and
an outer conductor having a closed end and an open end,
said closed end being connected to the other end of said
center conductor so that said outer conductor is coaxi-
ally arranged with said center conductor, the axial
length of said outer conductor being shorter than that of
said center conductor so that said metallic cylinder is
received in the bore of said outer conductor with a
maximum diameter portion of said peripheral wall por-
tion being received entirely in said bore; and
(b) a dielectric plate having coupling capacitances for cou-
pling said plurality of resonators to form said filter, said
dielectric plate being positioned apart from the open end
of each of said outer conductors by a predetermined dis-
tance.
4,437,078
POLARIZED ELECTROMAGNETIC DEVICE
Yoshihide Bando, Kyoto; Toshiki Tanaka, Yawata; Sueaki
Honda, Uji; Yoshihiko Takahashi, Kyoto; Kenichi Tsuniyo-
shi, Omihachiman; Katsumi Kawashima, Shiga, and Syuichi
Kishimoto, Kyoto, all of Japan, assignors to Omron Tateisi
Electronics Co., Nagaokakyo, Japan
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,495
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 3, 1981, 56-15229;
Mar. 3, 1981, 56-30764; May 16, 1981, 56-65128
Int Q.' HOIH 51/22
UJS. Q. 335—81 10 Qaims
310
320
1. A polarized electromagnetic device, comprising:
a generally I-shaped magnetic core member carrying a coil
winding on the central portion thereof;
a pair of permanent magnets which are arranged in parallel
with and outwardly of the respective end portions of said
core member; and
first and second armature plate members which are mutually
872
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
confronting and joined together through said pair of per-
manent magnets at the opposite end portions of said arma-
ture plate members, thereby presenting a spacing for
accommodatmg said core member therebetween with
gaps between said plate members and said core member-
said core member and armature plate members being sup-
ported to be swingabJe for relative movement with re-
spect to a center transverse axis of said center portion of
the core member.
»,.:-.^.^ 4,437,080
METHOD AND APPARATUS UTILIZING CRYSTAI I iMir
COMPOUND SUPERCONDUCHNG ELEMEiii^i
HAVING EXTENDED STRAIN OPERATIN^RiScE
CAPABILITIES WITHOUT CRITICAL STrSen?
. .. „, ^. DEGRADATION
John W. Ekin, Boulder, Colo.; John R. Garaler, and Aleksanrfor
I. Braginski, both of Pittsburgh, P.., ^ijor^tt ^f Sei
of America a. represented by the Secretary of Commerce wd
he Secretary of the Air Force ».d The United StatTof Am"
WasLX^^:? '' ''' "--"-^ ^' ^"^ ^^' ^-« •-'" Of
Filed Feb. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 465,942
,,o ^ Int. a.J HOIF 7/22
U.S. a. 335-216 ,„ ^ ,
20 Qaims
4,437,079
MAGNETIC SNAP LATCH
hTo* "'""•'S?' S""*". Wis., assignor to Eaton Corpora
non, Geveland, Ohio
Filed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,336
.,o ^ , Int. a.J HOIH 9/20
U.S. a. 335—170
1. In an apparatus for utilizing electrical energy, a supercon-
ductmg element having intrinsic elastic strains of maSe
flemem £'" V"" Tr'^'^" '"'"'''"• ^'^ superconSng
element bemg formed from a crystalline compound supercon
,„ r. . ^"^ •^^'"^^enal that is capable of withstanding said imrTnsic
10 Qaims elastic strams imposed on said superconductive materia In S
dement without appreciably degrading the critical cu^enf^f
toamaTnT r^M."" ''"P^^^°"ducting element is sub/ec °d
to a magnetic field having its component normal to the current
carrying direction of said element greater than 8 Tesla.
4,437,081
n.r.?H^* w^ ARMATURE TRANSFORMER RELAY
X.n 7i"' ?«'«*'«''' Minn., assignor to MinnesoU
Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn
Filed Dec. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 453,834
„^ ^ Int. a.J HOIF 7/0«
U.S. a. 335-229 , ^ ,
3 Oaims
Ueuuo *ji0
1. A magnetic snap latch comprising:
a magnetic circuit comprising a magnetic frame-
a magnetic plunger extending into said frame and having an
internal end therewithin and an external end adapted to be
coupled to a driven element;
said magnetic circuit also comprising means defining an air
gap between said internal end of said plunger
said magnetic circuit when said plunger is in' its normal
position;
and means normally maintaining said plunger in its normal
position whereby said air gap is open-
a coil having terminal wires extending therefrom and means
mounting said coil within said frame to surround said
internal end of said plunger;
a low permeability magnetic member secured to an interme-
diate point of said plunger for magnetic attraction to said
frame upon initial energization of said coil to restrain said
plunger from being moved by the magnetic force in said
air gap;
and said low permeability magnetic member reaching mag-
netic saturation before said magnetic frame whereby the
magnetic force in said air gap causes snap action move-
ment of said plunger in the closing direction of said air
gap.
1. An electromagnetic device, comprising:
a ferromagnetic core having first and second legs complet-
mg a closed magnetic circuit;
an armature pivotably mounted in said electromagnetic
device for optionally contacting said ferromagnetic core-
said armature and said ferromagnetic core defining a gap
between said ferromagnetic core and said armature at the
opposite side of said ferromagnetic core from the side of
said ferromagnetic core at which said armature is contact-
ing said ferromagnetic core;
a flux return bracket mounted in said electromagnetic device
between said pivotably mounted position of said armature
and said ferromagnetic core;
a source of latching flux cooperating with said ferromag-
netic core, said flux return bracket and said armature for
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
873
holding said armature in contact with said ferromagnetic
core; and
a source of operating flux cooperating with said ferromag-
netic core for selectively establishing a magnetic flux
across said gap;
whereby said armature may be pivotably moved from
contact with said ferromagnetic core one side of said
armature to contact with said ferromagnetic core on the
other side of said armature.
4,437,082
APPARATUS FOR CONTINUALLY UPGRADING
TRANSFORMER DIELECTRIC LIQUID
Edward J. Walsh, and Robert A. Kurz, both of Hermitage, Pa.,
assignors to Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,288
Int. C1.J HOIF 27/10
U.S. a. 336—58 9 Oaims
being generally coaxial, and a third member that joins said
first and sc oond members on said inboard side of said
current transformer;
said enclosure having an opening through which said cable
extends;
1. An apparatus for continually upgrading transformer di-
electric fluid by degassing, demoisturizing, and filtering the
fluid, comprising:
a tank,
a dielectric fluid having a low vapor pressure disposed in the
tank and containing contaminants including moisture,
gases, and insoluble particulates,
an electrical winding immersed within the fluid in the tank.
filter means for decontaminating the fluid including a fluid
recirculating device for degassing, demoisturizing, and
filtering the fluid.
the fluid recirculating device for degassing including a per-
meation cell having a membrane material and within a
supportive container,
the fluid recirculating device for demoisturizing including
granular pellets of a desiccant material for reducing mois-
ture in the fluid to 20 ppm or less at room temperature,
whereby decontaminated fluid is returned into the tank.
4,437,083
CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR TURBINE
GENERATORS
Franklin T. Emery, Greentree Borough, Pa., assignor to Electric
Power Research Institute, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,666
Int. a.3 HOIF 15/02
U.S. Q. 336—65 2 Oaims
1. A current transformer mounting arrangement comprising:
an annularly shaped current transformer having a conductor
extending centrally therethrough and a cable extending
from an outer portion thereof;
an enclosure of generally rigid insulative material having
said transformer disposed therein and comprising a first
member having a bore through which said conductor
extends, a first portion of said first member disposed
through the inside diameter of said current transformer
and a second portion of said first member extending axi-
ally from said first portion on a first, inboard, side of said
current transformer, a second member disposed around
the outside diameter of said current transformer, said
second member and said first portion of said first member
said enclosure second member being fit within an opening of
a fixed wall of conductive material, and an enclosure
fourth member located against the outside of said wall and
joined to an outboard portion of said second member, said
fourth member having an opening through which said
conductor extends.
4,437,084
ENCAPSULATED, WATERPROOF TEMPERATURE
SENSITIVE DEVICE AND METHOD OF
MANUFACTURE
Harold K. Oayton, Jr., Glen Ellyn, III., assignor to Cooper
Industries, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,057
Int. O.J HOIC 7/li
U.S. O. 338—22 R 6 Oaims
1. An encapsulated, waterproof temperature sensitive device
comprising:
an elongated cable including two conductors, and a cable
jacket surrounding said conductors, the proximal ends of
said conductors extending proximally beyond the proxi-
mal end of said cable jacket;
a temperature sensor with two leads, each lead being con-
nected to the proximal end of a respective one of said
conductors, said temperature sensor having an electrical
property systematically related to the temperature of said
sensor, whereby an electrical signal indicative of tempera-
ture may be sensed at the distal ends of said conductors;
means for electrically insulating one of said leads and respec-
tive conductor from the other of said leads and respective
conductor;
tubing of insulating material extending from adjacent said
jacket and surrounding said temperature sensor, said leads
and the proximal ends of said conductors;
a substantially solid, molded shroud encapsulating said tub-
ing, said temperature sensor, said leads, the proximal ends
of said conductors, and the proximal end of said jacket,
said shroud having at least one passageway extending
from its exterior to said tubing between the ends of said
tubing, -said shroud being sealed to said jacket around iu
entire circumference and sealed to said tubing around all
said passageways so as to waterproof said device.
874
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,437,085
ROUTE MAPPING DEVICE
!?^ ?!*"*' ^^"^^ ^"^""^ '*"■'' *^^ ^"'** 2°°*' I^ An
•■''^^f " Bill* y^Mio /
FUed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,657
Int. a.3 G08G 7/00; G08C 21/00
VS. a. 340-286 M
predetermined parity that might introduce a DC component
into the transmitted signal with normal transmission. SS In
response to said first indicating signal, the state of a current bit
SLnal f '"**?. °^^ "*J'»P«"» bit modifying the transmission of
signal transitions from the onset of such sequence to eliminate
12 Claims ^^m J°'"P°"«"<'.»he improvement comprising in response
to said first indicating signal examining a limited number
greater than two of bits next succeeding a current bit to deter-
mine at the onset of any such sequence if the sequence termi-
nates withm said limited number of next succeeding bits and
would not introduce such DC component with norSiaHr^s
mission, and inhibiting said modifying of the transmission of
signal transitions corresponding to any of the second bit states
of such sequence that would not introduce such DC compo-
nent with normal transmission.
1. A delivery route mapping device for ground vehicles
comprising: * «"v.ica
a computer device;
a cathode ray tube (CRT) having a display surface-
a translucent map disposed on the display surface of the
CRT, said CRT being in communication with the com-
SirdlT"^^ ^hich is programmed to direct the display of
means for entering into said computer device a list of cus-
tomers to whom deliveries are to be made-
means responsive to the entering means, for' directing said
computer to cause the CRT to display a plurality oflights
behind said map, each said light corresponding to a loca-
tion of a customer to whom deliveries are to be made- and
means for associating each said light with the name of the
customer to whom said light corresponds.
4,437,087
n-^.. ^^tr^^ DIFFERENTIAL PCM CODING
ilL : l^^^J^^ Bwk, N.J., aadgnor to Bell Telephone
Uboratories, Incorporated, Murray HUl, N J.
Filed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,355
VS. a. 340-347 DD ^ CW^
4,437,086
LIMFTED LOOK-AHEAD MEANS
[!Zu ,'^"!*'' ^*"'° '*"'*♦ ■"*' P«»' J- Rudnick, Oakland,
Continuation of Ser. No. 949.161, Oct. 5, 1978, abandoned. This
application Mar. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 131,042
Int. a.^ H03K 13/24
VS. a. 340-347 DD ,o Claims
1. A coder (100) for converting a linear input signal repre-
sentative of encoded speech, voiceband dau or tone signals
mto a quantized differential PCM output signal, the input
signal being coupled to the input of a difference circuit (11)
along with a signal estimate of said input signal to obtain a
difference signal indicative of the difference therebetween a
predictor means (12) for producing said signal estimate, 'an
adaptive quantizing means (DLQ) for receiving said difference
signal and providing at its output a quantized version of the
difference signal, and means (17) for adding said quantized
version of the difference signal with said signal estimate and
coupling the sum to the input of said predictor means
said adaptive quantizing means being characterized 'by
means (FIG. 2) for dynamically controlling said adaptive
quantizing means speed of adaptation including, means for
producing a fast speed of adaptation when the input signal
represents speech signals and a slow speed of adaptation
when the input signal represents encoded voiceband dau
or tone signals.
6. In a self-clocking method for transmitting binary data bits
sequentially in successive clocked bit cells of a transmission
channel wherein logical first bit states of a sequence of data bit
states are normally transmitted by signal transitions relatively
early in respective bit cells and logical second bit states of said
sequence of data bit states are normally transmitted as signal
transitions relatively late in respective bit cells and any trwisi-
Uon relatively early in a bit cell following a transition rela-
tively Ute m the next preceding bit cell is normally suppressed
said method including generating a first indicating signal when
the number of first bit sutes in the sequence of dato bit sutes is
Of a predetermined parity, detecting the onset of a sequence of
second bit sutes foUowing a first bit sute productive of said
4,437 088
ELECTRICAL SIMULATION OF PERCUSSIVE BELL
Hvry p. Ferguson, Owen Sound, Canada, anignor to General
Signal Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 323,520
Int a.J G08B 7/00
VS. a. 340-384 E ,g q,,^
1. An electronic bell which produces a signal which sounds
like a standard electromechanical bell comprising in combina-
tion:
(a) a rate generator for producing an output signal at a
predetermined stroke rate that determines the ringing
frequency of the bell sound;
(b) a modulation envelope generator for producing a low
frequency and a high frequency decaying exponential
control signal m response to signals from said rate genera-
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
875
tor wherein said low frequency signal has a first time
consUnt and said high frequency control signal has a
second time consUnt, said first time consUnt being longer
than said second time consUnt;
(c) first and second audio frequency generators of first and
second frequencies, respectively;
(d) first and second modulating means coupled to said first
and second audio frequency generators and said first and
second decaying exponential control signals, respectively,
\rc
for producing first and second signals comprising modula-
tions of said first and second audio frequencies, respec-
tively;
(e) mixing means coupled to said first and second modulated
output signals for mixing the same; and
(0 a loudspeaker and coupling means coupling said mixed
audio frequencies to said loudspeaker for producing an
audible sound characteristic of a vibrating bell struck at
the frequency of said rate generator.
4,437,089
DUAL SENSITIVITY INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM
Serge Acbard, Marly-Le-Roi, France, assignor to S.A. Promo-
cab, Versailles, France
Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,498
Claims priority, application France, Jun. 24, 1980, 80 13982
Int. a.3 G08B 13/22. 29/00
U.S. a. 340—541 10 Oaims
J
:i
.^'
(■ncnoN
MM il«W
r
*-
■tAcnoH
•
»t
tVAcnOM
■A-AMnaLT
•—
^
1. A system for protecting a zone against human aggression,
comprising at least two circuits of sensors for detection of
human presence, said sensor circuits arranged within said zone
and capable of producing electric signals when they detect a
human presence, response means activated by said electric
signals for indicating human presence, electronic processing
means arranged between the sensors for detection of human
presence and the response means, to operate first response
means when they receive an electrical signal from a detection
sensor of a first circuit of sensors and second response means
when they receive an electrical signal from a detection sensor
of a second circuit of sensors, said electronic processing means
comprising means to increase the sensitivity of the sensors of
the second circuit of sensors at the time of reception of a signal
from a sensor of the first circuit of sensors.
4,437,090
APPARATUS FOR INDICATING CREOSOTE BUILDUP
IN A CHIMNEY
R. Edward Hanson, 12 Dale St., Hallowell, Me. 04347
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,781
Int. a.3 G08B 21/00
VS. a. 340—613
nClains
1. Apparatus for indicating creosote in the fiue of a chimney,
said apparatus including an accumulator through which chim-
ney Hue gases will How with creosote becoming deposited
thereon when the accumulator is within the flow and the
chimney in service, said accumulator of a cross sectional size
and shape such that it may be a free fit within the^ue without
adversely affecting the draft therethrough, a normally open
switch having an operating arm operable to effect the closing
of the switch when a predetermined weight is applied to said
arm, means to attach said switch to the upper end of the chim-
ney, a suspending member connected to said arm and said
accumulator when the switch is attached to said chimney, said
connecting means then holding said accumulator centrally of
the flue and in a position lengthwise thereof where a major
buildup of creosote is anticipated, the weight of the accumula-
tor and connecting means insufficient to effect the closing of
said switch until creosote has built up on the surface of said
accumulator to so increase said weight as to apply said weight,
and a circuit including said switch and a warning signal opera-
ble when said circuit is closed by said switch.
4,437,091
FLUIIH}UANTITY ALARMING DEVICES FOR THE
MASTER CYLINDER
Yoshinobu Mizusaki, Ueda, Japan, assignor to Nissin Kogyo
Co., Ltd., Ueda, Japan
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,224
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 24, 1980, 55-104976
Int. a.3 G08B 21/00
U.S. G. 340—623 5 Claims
1. A fluid-quantity alarming system for a brake cylinder
comprising;
a brake master cylinder body;
a reservoir connected to said cylinder body, said reservoir
being subsUntially in an elongated recungular parallelepi-
ped form and being disposed on said cylinder body so that
the central axis of the reservoir in an elongated direction
is biased relative to the central axis of the master cylinder,
said reservoir including an opening at the bottom thereof
in a plane passing through the central axis of the master
cylinder body for fluid communication between the mas-
ter cylinder body and the reservoir, an attachment hole
876
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
located adjacent to a wall of the reservoir away from the
central axis of the master cylinder and the opening, and at
least one bimd female screw adjacent to the attachment
hole extending downwardly from the inside of the reser-
voir,
a switch case including a switch therein with a lead extend-
ing from the switch, a flange attached to the lower part of
the switch case with a hole therein, and a screw, said
switch case being disposed in the reservoir such that a
lower end is sealingly situated in the attachment hole to
permit the lead attached to the switch to extend outside
he reservoir, and the screw is disposed to pass through
the hole of the flange and is fastened with the blind female
screw, and
a float disposed around the switch case to be vertically
moved in accordance with liquid level in the reservoir
said float having such dimensions that it is not located
above the opening so that the fluid passing through the
opening does not afl-ect the float, and means to actuate the
switch when the float is located beside the switch.
4437092
COLOR VIDEO DISPLAY SYSTEM HAVING
w . ^ PROGRAMMABLE BORDER COLOR
u kL^;. ^''"*'"' ^^^^ "'-5 Le''« C. Eggebrecht.
Rochester Minn.; David A. Kummcr. Boca Raton, Sd J«us
«„„.!T Coral Spnngs, both of Fla., assignors to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N Y
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,069
,,„ _ Int. a.J G09G y/2*
U.S. a. 340-703 ,^^^
mal display area and extending to all display edges of said
cathode-ray tube display; 6 "■ vuo
means operating in response to vertical and horizontal syn-
chronizing signals of said display and said display area
defining signal for generating a control signal having a
first state when a scanning beam of said cathode-ray tube
display IS scanning said normal display area and a second
state when said scanning beam is scanning said border
area; and
multiplexer means operating in response to said control
signal for applying said first data to said color cathode-ray
tube display when said control signal is in said first state
and said second data to said cathode-ray tube display
when said control signal is in said second state-
whereby a selected color may be provided in s^id border
area and memory limited to that necessary for storing
information to be displayed in said normal display area
4437 093
APPARATUS AND MElliOD FOR SCROLLING TFYT
AND GRAPHIC DATA IN SELECrEil?OR "oNS^F A
GRAPHIC DISPLAY
Sid^T^Z^ ^n '*■'''"' """ "*»'8»°' »» International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonlc, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,081
.,^ _ Int. a.3 G09G ///<J
U.S.a.340-7M .^^^
1. A color video display system comprising:
a color cathode-ray tube display;
central processing means for providing a signal defining a
normal display area and first data representing video
mformation to be displayed on said cathode-ray tube
display m said normal display area of said cathode-ray
tube display and second data representing a color of a
predefined border area completely surrounding said nor-
1. A method for scrolling, within a window, graphic and
graphic encoded text data prestored in rows of a display re-
fresh buff-er of a raster scan all-points-addressable video display
operable in a graphics mode, comprising the steps of
specifying in first and second machine registers opposite
corners of a window, the window bomprising a portion
only of a video display screen, and in a third machine
register the number of rows to be scrolled;
establishing a destination pointer addressing the row speci-
fied by said first machine register;
establishing a source pointer addre^ing a row offset from
the row specified in said first machine register by the
number of rows to be scrolled specified in said third ma-
chine register; and
moving a row bounded by said window within said window
in said display refresh buffer from the location addressed
by said source pointer to the location addressed by said
destination pointer, altering the source pointer and desti-
nation pomter by one row. and repeating the moving and
altering steps for each row to be scrolled.
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
877
4,437,094
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING INDICATORS FOR
SWITCHES
Joe W. Fish, Cherry Hill, N.J., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,513
Int. a.J H04Q 9/00; G08B 21/00
\}JS. a. 340—825.5 14 aaims
1. In a system which includes a plurality of switches and
indicator means associated with each switch, in combination:
means responsive to the actuation of solely one of the switches
for causing the indicator means associated therewith to
change from a first to a second condition; and
means responsive to the concurrent actuation of more than one
of the switches for preventing the respective indicator
means associated with said more than one switch from being
changed in condition.
4,437,095
SELECTIVE CALL RECEIVER HAVING TIMED POWER
SUPPLY
Masaaki Akahori; Takashi Ohyagi, both of Tokyo, and Shozo
Nishimura, Zushi, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon Electric
Co., Ltd. and Nippon Telegraph A Telephone Public Corpora-
tion, both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 326,321
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 1, 1980, 55-167966
Int. a.3 H04Q 9/14; H04B 1/16; G08B 5/22
U.S. a. 340—825.44 2 Gaims
Plr.--iFF^
vr
-IT
vr
decoded signal, said reception controller further generat-
ing timing signals for connecting and disconnecting the
power supply from receiver means and said display con-
troller means;
first switching means which controls the connecting and
disconnecting of the power supply to said receiver means
in response to said timing signals; and
second switching means which controls the connecting and
disconnecting of the power supply to the display control-
ler means in response to said synchronizing pulse signals.
4,437,096
CONCENTRATOR CIRCUIT INCORPORATING SOLID
STATE BILATERAL BRIDGE ARRANGEMENT
Barrie Brightman, and Frank NIertIt, both of Casselberry, Fla.,
assignors to Stromberg-Carlson Corp., Tampa, Fla.
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,593
Int. a.5 H03K 77/00. H04Q 3/52
U.S. a. 340—825.96 6 Claims
'>' El
I luntm WW! umu y^-^n
1. A concentrator circuit for selectively conveying signals
between a plurality of first terminals and a second terminal,
said concentrator circuit comprising:
A. a plurality of bilateral current gate means for selectively
coupling signals between the first terminals and the sec-
ond terminal, each bilateral current gate means including
a plurality of diodes connected to define input and output
junctions and first and second balance point junctions, a
first terminal being connected to each first balance point
junction, and the second terminal being connected to all of
said second balance point junctions, each of said input and
output junctions of each bilateral current gate means being
connected to a normally-open switch means;
B. floating bias means for producing a bias current; and
C. selection means connected to said floating bias means and
all of said switch means for selectively closing a pair of
said switch means to enable bias current from said floating
bias means to flow through one of said bilateral current
gate means, thereby enabling a signal input on the first
terminal associated with said bilateral current gate means
to be coupled to the second terminal.
1. A selective call receiver with display comprising:
receiver means which receives electromagnetic waves and
produces digital received signals;
display means to display received data;
display controller means for controlling said display means;
memory means which stores call numbers;
means responsive to a decoded signal to indicate the paging
of the receiver;
reception controller means powered by a power supply, said
reception controller means, upon receipt of the digital
received signals produced by the receiver means, generat-
ing synchronizing pulse signals and comparing said digital
received signals with said call number to provide said
4,437,097
BUOYANT ELECTRODE
John A. Hudson, Panama City, Fla., assignor to The United
States of America is represented by the Secretary of the Nary,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,251
Int. a.} B63B 21/56; HOIB 7/12
U.S. a. 340—852 7 Claims
1. A buoyant electrode of the type comprising a buoyant
core, includng a central strength member surrounded by cellu-
lar plastic flotation material, a conductive layer of helically
laid strands of wire formed around said core, and a forward
end connection for towing said electrode and for electrically
878
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
energizing said conductive layer, said electrode being charac- 4 437 099
ten^ by the improvement comprising: POLARIZATION CONVERTER FOR
said wire strands bemg formed of hard drawn aluminum; and ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
Erich Kandler, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Alctiengesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany '
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 246,122
192^3023561'**^' ■'"'"*•"''" ^^- "*"• *»' Germany, Jun. 24.
Int. a.3 HOIQ 15/24
U.S. a. 343-756 ,o cMm
annular clamping means for fixing together the aft ends of
said wire strands for combined rotational and sliding
movement of said aft ends relative to said core.
4,437,098
APPARATUS FOR ELECTRONICALLY READING
MECHANICAL METERS HAVING
NON-SIMULTANEOUSLY CHANGING DIGITS
Shiomo Rosinelc, Kiron; Isaac Rinltewich, Tel-Aviv, and Boris
Khurgin, Haifa, all of Israel, assignors to Matam, Ltd.. Tel-
Aviv, Israel
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,148
Int. a.' G08C 19/00. 19/36. 19/16
VS. a. 340-870.02 j^ claims
1. The method of forming a non-planar polarization grid
structure comprising, forming conductive lines on a disc of
planar insulation material, removing a pie-shaped portion of
said disc, and joining the edges of said disc where the pie-
shaped portion was removed to form a cone and the pattern of
said conductive lines as viewed from the apex of the cone
having the desired shape to obtain circular polarization.
1. Apparatus for detecting the position of first and second
members, each of which is movable to one of a given number
of positions, said apparatus comprising, for each member, first
means Iffective when actuated to sense the position of said
member; second means effective, when actuated, to sense the
position of said member, said first and second sensing means
being spaced apart, along the direction of movement of said
member, by a distance less than the distance between adjacent
positions of said member; means for actuating each of said first
sensing means, in sequence, means for actuating each of said
second sensing means, in sequence, a given time after actuation
of said first sensing means, said given time being greater than
the time it takes for both members to move between adjacent
positions; first means for storing a first number representotive
of the respective positions sensed by each of said first sensing
means; second means for storing a second number representa-
tive of the respective positions sensed by each of said second
sensing means; and means for comparing said stored numbers
and for selecting one of said stored numbers.
4,437,100
INK-JET HEAD AND METHOD FOR PRODUCnON
THEREOF
Hiroshl Sugitani, MacUda; Hiroto Matsuda, Yokohama, and
Masami Ikeda, Chiba, aU of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabu-
•hiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 385,092
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 18, 1981, 56-94884:
Jun. 24, 1981, 56-97923; Jun. 24, 1981, 56-97924; Jun. 24, 1981.
56-97925
lot a.J GOID J5/J8
UA a 346-1.1 16aaims
1. An ink-jet head comprising an ink flow path constituted of
a hardened film of a photosensitive resin composition provided
on the surface of a substrate, characterized in that a binding
auxiliary layer is interposed between the substrate surface and
the hardened film.
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
879
4,437,101
INK JET PRINTING APPARATUS
Yutaka Ebi; Takao Fukazawa; Toshio Kawakubo; Koichiro
Jinnai; Masanori Horike; Kyuhachiro Iwasaki; Chi^i
Ishikawa, and Toshitaka Hirata, all of Tokyo, Japan, assign-
ors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,652
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 11, 1981, 56-70526;
May 11, 1981, 56-70527; May 11, 1981, 56-70528; May 11, 1981,
56-70529
Int. a.} GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 346—75 32 Galms
at least one adjustable spring urging said thermal head as-
sembly toward said back roll with an adjustable force;
said thermal head assembly including a first surface for
contacting said recording medium and a second surface
opposite said first surface, said spring exerting a force
against said second surface and toward said back roll; and
a drive roller contacting said back roll at a position down-
stream of a position where said recording medium and
said printing sheet are sandwiched between said thermal
head assembly and said back roll to drive said back roll
during a recording operation.
4,437,103
INK-JET NOZZLE AND A METHOD FOR
MANUFACTURING SAME
Kunio Ikeda, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Company,
Ltd., Japan
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,229
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 16, 1981, 56-3728
Int. a.) GOID 15/18; B21D 53/00
U.S. a. 346—140 R 8 Claims
4 8 2 7
1. An ink jet printing apparatus comprising:
an ink ejection head for ejecting a jet of ink;
charging electrode means for electrostatically and selec-
tively charging ink droplets separated from the ink jet;
deflection electrode means for electrostatically deflecting
the charged ink jet;
a carriage for mounting thereon the ink ejection head, the
charging means and the deflection means and moving
reciprocatingly along a sheet of paper; and
a means for subjecting the charged ink droplets to an electric
field which is asymmetrical with respect to a predeter-
mined deflection plane in which the charged ink droplets
coming out from the charging electrode means are to be
deflected;
the asymmetrical electric field applying means being dis-
posed between the charging electrode means and the
deflection electrode means.
4,437,102
HEAT-SENSITIVE RECORDING APPARATUS
Toshiharu Inui, and Haruhiko Moriguchi, both of Kanagawa,
Japan, assignors to Fi^i Xerox Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 320,037
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 17, 1980, 55-160798
Int. a.5 GOID 15/10
VJS. a. 346—76 PH 3 Claims
1. A heat sensitive recording apparatus, comprising:
a thermal head assembly for selectively causing heat gener-
ating elements to generate heat according to image data;
a back roll for maintaining pressure against said thermal
head assembly to sandwich a thermally sensitive record-
ing medium and a printing sheet therebetween;
a rotatable back roll mounting arm for mounting said back
roll thereon, a position of said back roll being substantially
fixed by said back roll mounting arm during a recording
operation;
1. An ink-jet nozzle for use in an ink-jet printer, said nozzle
being generally in the shape of a disc provided with a through-
hole at its center as an ink passage, said nozzle comprising an
inner annular portion having a first hardness and an outer
annular portion contiguous to and integral with said inner
annular portion and having a second hardness, said first hard-
ness being substantially larger than said second hardness, said
inner and outer annular portions being comprised of an electro-
deposited material.
4,437,104
INK DISPOSAL SYSTEM FOR INK JET PRINTER
David M. Hudson, Chelmsford, Mass., assignor to Advanced
Color Technology, Inc., Chelmsford, Mass.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,780
Int. a.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. Q. 346-140 R 1 Claim
1. In an ink jet printer having a printing head and a movable
carriage carrying said printing head, an ink supply and disposal
system comprising
a disposable primary ink cartridge having an enclosed ink
supply chamber and a closed waste-ink storage chamber
separate from said ink supply chamber,
a flexible ink reservoir enclosed in said chamber.
880
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
a secondary ink container on said carriage having therein an
ink-receiving reservoir,
means including a flexible ink-supply conduit for transfer-
nng ink from said ink reservoir of said primary ink car-
tndge to said ink-receiving reservoir of said secondary ink
container,
collection means on said carriage for gathering waste ink
from said head,
flexible waste-ink duct means extending between said collec-
tion means and said storage chamber,
a pump having an air inlet and an air outlet,
a first conduit connected between said air oujlet and said
supply chanber operative to maintain said supply cham-
ber under continuous gaseous pressure,
a second conduit connected between said air inlet and said
waste ink storage chamber thereby to maintain said stor-
age chamber under reduced pressure, and
ink-absorbing material positioned within said waste ink
storage chamber.
dium; and means for advancing said recording medium in a
cross line direction relative to said light valve; the improve-
ment comprising
4,437,105
CASSETTE COMPRISING A CAPPING DEVICE AND/OR
A CLEANING DEVICE FOR A PRINTING HEAD OF AN
INK JET PRINTER
Gustov Mrazek, and Franz Obenaus, both of Vienna, Auatria,
awlgnors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 394,738
Gaims priority, application Austria, Jul. 24, 1981, 3283/81
Int. a.i GOID 15/18
\iS. a. 346-140 R , Claim.
additional means within said imaging means for coupling
light from Illuminated picture elements into areas on said
recording medium surrounding the predetermined posi-
tions for said Illuminated picture elements, thereby reduc-
ing illumination nulls between said picture elements.
4,437,107
SELF-IGNITING THYRISTOR WITH A PLURALITY OF
DISCRETE, HELD CONTROLLED ZENER DIODES
Per-Erik Jonsson, Bromma, and Per Svedberg, Viillingby, both
of Sweden, assignors to ASEA Aktiebolag, Vasteras, Sweden
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,255
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Oct. 8, 1980, 8007036
., o ^ '"*• ^'' ""*'' -^^Z^^' -^^Z^' 29/02. 29/40
U.S. a 357-38 4 Claims
— «
" t!iS"''>iiiiatirAmmaBiji I ij I Jl I u ui LW^it^'^^jHh ^^
1^ tin
=E=
^EZ^SSSZTZZZZZ
XL,-* Y
\'};:
'9'0.
'//,
I. A cassette comprising a capping device for the capping
and/or a cleaning device for the cleaning of the jet nozzle
surface of a pnnting head of an ink jet printer, the capping
device defining a capping position while the cleaning device
defines a cleaning position, said positions being accessible
through at least one window in a cassette wall, characterized in
that the cassette wall (7) comprising the window (9. 11) also
comprises a purging position (45) for the printing head (3)
which comprises a collecting device (46) for collecting ink
ejected from the printing head.
4,437,106
METHOD AND MEANS FOR REDUaNG
ILLUMINATION NULLS IN ELECTRO-OPTIC LINE
PRINTERS
Robert A. Sprague, Saratoga, Calif., assignor to Xerox Corpora-
tlon, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,697
Int. a.' GOID 15/14: G02F 1/01
U.S. a. 346-160 9 Claims
1. In an electro-optic line printer having a recording me-
dium; a multigate light valve for printing picture elements in
spatwlly predetermined positions along a printing axis; coher-
ant imaging means optically aligned between said light valve
and said recording medium, said imaging means including lens
means for imaging said light valve onto said recording me-
1. In a self-ignitable thyristor having a zener diode integral
with the thyristor, which zener diode bridges the junction of
the thyristor across whidh the off-state voltage appears and
determines the breakover voltage of the thyristor, one emitter
layer of the thyristor being located at one main surface of the
semiconductor body which forms the thyristor, with the zener
diode arranged adjacent to the same main surface and to the
emitter layer of the thryistor, the zener diode having a break-
down voltage influenced by the field geometry at a portion of
the PN junction of the zener diode located adjacent to said
main surface, the improvement comprising;
a plurality of zener diodes in the semiconductor body later-
ally separated from each other and from the base layer
adjacent said one emitter layer, each of said zener diodes
being connected via resistive means to said base layer of
said thyristor.
an electrically conducting screen means located over said
main surface of the thyristor to overiie said portion of the
PN junction of each of the zener diodes for influencing the
field geometry at said portion of the PN junction, thereby
influencing the breakover voluge of the thyristor,
said screen means being electrically connected to the main
electrode contacting said one emitter layer so as to have
substantially the same potential as said main electrode, and
an electncally insulating portion located between the screen
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
881
means and the main surface at least over said portions of
the PN junctions.
4,437,108
DOUBLE POLYSILICON CONTACT STRUCTURE
James R. Gardiner, Wappingers Falls; Stanley R. Makarcwicz,
New Windsor; Martin Revitz, Poughkeepsie, and Joseph F.
Shepard, Hopewell Junction, all of N.Y., assignors to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 164,647, Jan. 30, 1980. This application
Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 450,856
Int. a.J HOIL 29/04. 29/34. 23/48. 29/46
U.S. a. 357—59 1 Claim
> V * )■ ," ^yyyy '* / *' >* '^> -«
.' / / / ^ / / / . / ^ / / - / / . '
/ / / ,
Pom
.^
1. An improved double polysilicon contact structure for a
semiconductor device including at least two overlying polysili-
con conductors comprising:
A. a semiconductor substrate A,
B. a first silicon dioxide insulating layer 2 united to the
substrate,
C. a first conductive polysilicon layer 3 patterned on the first
insulating layer 2,
D. a first silicon dioxide dielectric layer 4 patterned on the
first conductive polysilicon layer 3,
E. a second dielectric layer 5 patterned on the first dielectric
layer 4 as an etch barrier to selected etchants, said second
dielectric layer being selected from the group consisting
of silicon nitride and aluminum oxide,
F. a second conductive polysilicon layer 7 superimposed, in
part at least, on the first conductive polysilicon layer 3,
said second conductive polysilicon layer enclosed by a
third dielectric layer 8, and
G. an electrically conductive contact 12' connected to the
second conductive polysilicon layer 7 wherein said sec-
ond dielectric layer 5 is patterned on said first conductive
polysilicon layer 3 to underlie the contact 12' established
to the second conductive polysilicon layer 7, whereby any
polysilicon voids existing in the second conductive
polysilicon layer do not electrically short the second
conductive polysilicon layers to the first conductive
polysilicon layer.
4,437,109
SILICON-ON-SAPPHIRE BODY WI^TH CONDUCHVE
PATHS THERETHROUGH
lliomas R. Anthony, Schenectady; Richard J. Connery, Liver-
pool, both of N.Y., and David F. Hoeschcic, Jr., Boyertown,
Pa., assignors to General Electric Company, Schenectady,
N.Y.
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 204.957
Int. a.* HOIL 29/06. 23/48
U.S. a. 357—68 10 Gaims
H
\
«^iM«4» nOIMUM^. MMMMCt WUMMt
14-
-/#
-/*
IS
-II
(a) a body of layered silicon-on-sapphire having
(i) top and bottom major opposed surfaces substantially
parallel to each other, and
(ii) an outer peripheral edge area of silicon and sapphire
interconnecting said major surfaces, said top miyor
surface being silicon and said bottom major surface
being sapphire; and
(b) a plurality of electrically conducting paths intercon-
necting said major surfaces, each of said paths compris-
ing a hole substantially filled with an electrically con-
ducting mass of unified particles, each hole having a
generally circular entrance aperture about 4 mils or less
in diameter and a generally circular exit aperture at
opposite ends thereof, said entrance aperture lying in
the plane of one of said major surfaces and having a first
diameter, said exit aperture lying in the plane of the
opposite major surface and having a second diameter
substantially equal to or less than said first diameter and
said hole having an aspect ratio in the range of from
about 2.17:1 to about 2S.S9:1, each path having an axis,
said axis being substantially perpendicular to the planes
of said major surfaces with the centers of said entrance
and said exit apertures being substantially colinear
therewith, and said paths being arranged in a substan-
tially periodic array, said array having a center line-to-
center line spacing substantially equal to twice said first
diameter.
4,437,110
CONVERGENCE DEVICE FOR A COLOR-CAMERA
Roger Hunaut, and Francois Dupont, both of Paris, France,
assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 341,179
Qaims priority, application France, Jan. 23, 1981, 81 01287
Int. a.3 H04N 5/26. 9/28
U.S. a. 358—41 7 Claims
*• *0
*«ri(
*»M,
g
1*^1 Ji
fc:
1. An article of manufacture comprising:
1. A convergence device for a color camera having a screen
divided into L groups of M lines each and N columns thereby
forming LN rectangles, and horizontal and vertical scanning
means adapted to each of the three fundamental colors, said
convergence device comprising
correction memory means storing 4LN words of "x" bits for
associating, with each of the "LN" rectangles of the
screen of the camera, a predetermined horizontal scanning
correction signal and a predetermined vertical scanning
correction signal adapted to each of two of the three
fundamental colors,
means for applying said scanning correction signals to uid
horizontal and vertical scanning means,
sequencer means coupled to said means for applying for
controlling the application of said correction signals to
said horizontal and vertical scanning means adapted to
said two fundamental colors, and
attenuation means coupled to said means for applying and
said scanning means for attenuating discontinuities exist-
ing between horizontal and vertical scanning correction
signals associated with adjacent lines of the same column.
882
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,437,111
COLOR TELEVISION CAMERA
TakayMhi Inai, Taluunattu; Teruo Saitoh, SaUo, and Hiuyuki
Saanoiniya, Kagawa, aJI of Japan, aicignon to Matsuibita
Electric Industrial Co^ Ltd^ Kadoma, Japan
Filed Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337,364
Claiau priority, application Japan, Jan. 16, 1981, 56-S264:
Jan. 16, 1981, S6-S265 ^J»*o*,
Int. a.i H04N 3/06
UA a 358-44 5 Claim,
a plurality of potential wells formed in each imaging cell;
and "
1. A color television camera comprising:
a pickup device having sensitivity in the visible light range
and at least a part of the infrared range,
an automatically detachable infrared-cut filter means dis-
posed in a light path which is leading to said pickup de-
vice,
a brightness detection means disposed nearer to an object
than said infrared-cut filter so as to detect brightness
change of the light coming into said light path for issuing
an output signal which varies between a first state when
brightness is over a predetermined level and a second state
when brightness is below the predetermined level,
a driving circuit part including a detector for detecting the
output signal of said brightness detection means and a
comparator for comparing a detected output signal of said
detector with a predetermined level, and a driving circuit
part for issuing a control signal responding to the result of
the comparing by the comparator,
filter driving means coupled to said driving circuit and
controlled based on said control signal for driving said
automatically detachable infrared-cut filter to be inserted
mto said light path leading to said pickup device at said
first state and driving the same out of said light path at said
second state, and
a video signal circuit coupled to said driving circuit and
controlled based on said control signal including a switch-
ing means to be switched in a manner to constitute a color
video signal producing circuit at said first state and a
monochrome video signal producing circuit at said second
sute.
a filter having filter elements positioned corresponding to
each potential well in such a manner as to provide differ-
ent spectral sensitivities to each potential well.
4.437,113
ANTI-FLUTTER APPARATUS FOR HEAD MOUNTED
VISUAL DISPLAY
David R. Lee, and Roberi B. McCreary, both of Mesa, Aria.,
assipiors to The United States of America as represented by
the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,894
Int. a.J H04N 5/74
U.S. a. 358-93 5 claims
r~^>"§
4,437,112
SOUD-OTATE COLOR IMAGING APPARATUS
Nobayodii Tanaka; SeUi Hashimoto, and Tetsuro Kuwayama,
ail of Yokohama, Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kai-
sha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,096
CUflM priority, appUcation Japui, Feb. 15, 1980, 55-17968-
Apr. 18. 1980, 55-51224; Apr. 21, 1980, 55-53302; Apr. 21. 1980,
55-53309
Int. a.J H04N 9/07
U A a. 358-44 24 cuims
1. A color imaging apparatus comprising:
a plurality of imaging cells which function as picture ele-
ments for forming an image signal;
^^^hK^^h**
1. An anti-fiutter apparatus for a head mounted visual dis-
play comprising in combination:
an image generation means for generating and projecting a
visual image,
a collimating means to receive said visual image from said
image generation means and to collimate said visual im-
age,
a reflecting means to directly receive said visual image from
said collimating means, said reflecting means is centered
about its axis of rotation to reflect said visual image there-
from,
a light transmission means to receive said visual image from
said reflecting means,
a display means which is directly connected to said light
transmission means to receive said visual image from said
light transmission means, said display means displaying
said visual image to provide a scene,
a position sensor means to generate a first position signal,
and a second position signal,
a computing means to receive said first position signal, said
computing means generating an image signal in response
to said position signal, said image signal being sent to said
image generation means, said computing means generat-
ing an image position signal, said computing means sub-
tracting said image position signal from said second posi-
tion signal to generate an error signal,
March 13. 1984
ELECTRICAL
883
an amplifier/controller means receiving said error signal and
generating a correction signal in response thereto, and,
an actuator means operationally connected to said reflecting
means, said actuator means receiving said correction sig-
nal, said actuator means rotating said reflecting means
about its center of rotation in response to said correction
signal.
4,437,115
OBJECT AND INSPECTION SYSTEM
HttJimc Yoshida, Tokyo, Japan, auignor to HiOlmc Industries
Ltd., Japan
Continuation-in-pari of Ser. No. 112,839, Jan. 17. 1980.
abandoned. This application Jul. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 396,166
Qaims priority, application Japan. Jan. 2S. 1979, 54-7930
Int. a.' H04N 7/li
U.S. a. 358—106 4 Gaims
OMJfCT
4,437,114
ROBOTIC VISION SYSTEM
Joseph A. LaRussa, Yorktown Heights. N.Y.. assignor to Far-
rand Optical Co.. Inc.. Valhalla. N.Y.
Filed Jun. 7. 1982, Ser. No. 385,465
Int. CI.' H04N 7/18
U.S. O. 358—101 7 Qairas
1. A robotic system for grasping a randomly oriented object,
comprising:
(a) grasping means for grasping said object;
(b) motor means for placing said grasping means at a desired
position and causing said grasping means to perform a
gripping function;
(c) camera means for forming a first image of said object;
(d) an optional train for conveying an image from a predeter-
mined point to said camera means, said predetermined
point being fixed relative to said grasping means;
(e) image means for containing a second image of said object
to be grasped;
(0 comparison means responsive to said first and second
images for comparing said first image to said second im-
age;
(g) first coupling means for coupling said image means to
said comparison means;
(h) second coupling means for coupling the output of said
camera means to said comparison means;
(i) image rotation means for causing rotation of said second
image with respect to the image produced by said camera
means, said comparison means being responsive to said
first and second coupling means to stop rotation of said
image rotation means when a coincidence in angular posi-
tion is detected between said second image and the image
produced by said camera means; and
(j) angular orientation means for generating an angular ori-
entation signal in respone to a detection of coincidence
between said second image and said image produced by
said camera means to generate an orientation signal indi-
cating the orientation of said object and providing said
orientation signal to said motor means to angularly orient
said grasping means with said object to be grasped.
&
1-
_J MIMf» L
mao 1
-r-l ^M.Mi
1. An object inspection system for sensing and indicating
defects in an object, comprising:
an image sensing device eflective to produce a video signal
representing said object;
a monitor television receiver for reproducing an image from
said video signal;
a processor including at least one of a differentiation circuit
and a level comparator, said differentiation circuit being
effective to produce an output having a characteristic
related to a change in said video signal, said level compar-
ator including means signal efTective for producing a first
signal when said characteristic represents a good portion
of said object and a second signal when said characteristic
represents a not good portion of said object;
a modulator responsive only to said second signal to produce
a modulated signal; and
a signal mixer eflective to mix said video signal with said
modulated signal and to cause blinking in poriions of said
image corresponding to said not good portions of said
object whereby said not good portions of said object are
clearly determined by said blinking portions of uid image.
4,437.116
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPARING DATA
SIGNALS IN A CONTAINER INSPECHON DEVICE
John W, Juvinall. Ottawa Laka, Mich., assignor to Owans-
Illinois, Inc.. Toledo, Ohio
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218.996
Int. a.i H04N 7/18
U.S. a. 388—106 15 Qaims
SAwruK
«^
cokvmhon
CIRCUIT
100-
""] tVCWT
CMMII*
DOOC
COUNTm
r
MMCK
l*'*<>«'WPt
even' OtTCTOK
—zy —
CLIA*
1. In an apparatus for detecting defects in an object including
a camera for generating a series of video signals each having a
magnitude proporiional to an amount of light received from a
particular point of inspection on the object, a circuit for gener-
ating a comparison signal representing a magnitude difference
between two of the video signals, said circuit comprising;
means responsive to the two video signals for generating a
comparison signal having a magnitude representing a ratio of
the one of the two video signals having the smaller magnitude
f
884
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
malnL'e" °" °' ''' '"° ^*'^° ^•«"^'' ^-"« '^^ '-«" --P PO^'-s are Included on the image display screen with-
0"l Joss of the image contents of said video signal.
4,437.117
X.RAY TELEVISION INSTALLATION FOR MONITOR
PHOTOGRAPHY
Joerg Haendle, and Heinz Horbaschek, both of Eriangen, Fed
2!"; '''^^«'''"f"y' "»«8nor8 to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft,'
Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,188
im'mvl^^'^'^' «PP"catlon Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 21.
Int. a.3 H04N 5/i2
U.S. a. 358-111 2 Qalms
4.437,118
PYROELECTRIC VIDICON WITH IMPROVED
SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO
r7J!*\f'"*t!;' ^V ^°'^' ^'^'^ ■"'«"«' to U.S. Philip.
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 14,665, Feb. 23, 1979
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 825,577 Aua. 18
1977. abandoned. This application Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No 175 477
Int. aj H04N 3/33
U.S. a. 358-113 2 Claim.
— — LEh
1. An x-ray television installation for monitor photography
compnsmg an x-ray tube having a ray path along which x-ray
energy is directed for producing an x-ray image, an x-ray
image mtensifier arranged in said ray path of said x-ray tube
and having an output fluorescent screen for supplying an inten-
siried optical image in accordance with an incident x-ray im-
age, a video camera optically coupled with said output fluores-
cent screen of said x-ray image intensifier for generating a
video signal in accordance with the optical image supplied
thereby, a video monitor comprising a video display unit hav-
ing an image display screen for displaying the video signal as a
visible image, a video amplifier connecting said video camera
with said video display unit so as to supply an amplified video
signal to the video display unit for display thereby, a synchro-
nizing pulse separation stage being connected with the video
camera for supplying a synchronizing pulse signal synchro-
nized with the video signal, a horizontal defiection stage and a
vertical deflection stage connected between said separation
stage and said video display unit for controlling the display of
the video signal thereby, a blanking stage synchronized with
said honzontal defiection stage and said vertical deflection
stage and controlling blanking of the video display unit at
honzontal and vertical retrace intervals during the display of
the video signal, and a photographic camera optically coupled
with the image display screen of the video display unit for
photographing the display of the video signal thereon, charac-
terized in that a pulse stage coupled with said synchronizing
pulse separation stage and with said video display unit gener-
ates unblanking pulses in synchronism with the operation of
the honzontal and vertical deflection stages so as to generate
visible bare on said image display screen of said video display
umt the bars being at the border of the image display screen
for bounding the visible image produced by said video signal
the photographic camera being so designed that the visible
images produced on the video display unit are photographed
adjacent one another with the bars eliminating unexposed
interstices between adjacent photographed images, and char-
actenzed in that mixing means is connected with the pulse
stage and the video amplifier, and supplies an output signal to
the video display unit, and that the deflection stages provide
sawtooth voltages having active sweep portions which are
substantially longer in duration than the duration of the active
sweep intervals of the video camera such that the visible bars
generated on the image display screen during such active
FLrWCK READ
PE0C8TAL SENCMTION
2. A method of reducing pedestal noise in a pyroelectric
vidicon of the type having a cathode and a target, said cathode
^X!^Tf '' ' '''■^'^"'=*^ P°'""'*«' **"""« ^'"^ge readout
such that the target potential is equal to a quiescent value after
image readout, said method comprising, after pedestal genera-
tion, the steps of:
set^ting the cathode potential below the reference potential;
scanning the target with an electron beam emanating from
the cathode for a time sufficient to reduce the target po-
tential to a value above the quiescent value.
4.437.119
INTER-FRAME ADAPTIVE PREDICTION SYSTEM FOR
TELEVISION SIGNALS
Shuichi Matsumoto. Tokyo; Yoshlnori Hatori. Kawauki:
HItom Murakami. Yokohama, and Hideo Yamamoto,
Sagamihara, all of Japan, auignors to Kokuud Denshin
Denwa Kabuahiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 386.575
Qaims priority, application Japan. Jun. 19, 1981, 56-94004
Int. a.3 H04N 7/12
U.S. a. 358-136 , Claim
^ ^O lamrtnn [-
1. An inter-frame adaptive prediction system for television
signals compnsmg: input tenninal means for receiving an input
television signal; memory means having a capacity large
enough to store the input television signal of at least one frame
at all times; intra-field prediction means for generating a pre-
diction value XiATOf the latest input picture element, through
using a picture element value in the same field as the latest
input picture element, read out from the memory means when
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
885
a value Xi of the latest input picture element of the television
signal is received; inter-field prediction means for generating a
prediction value X\k of the latest input picture element,
through using picture elements in the same field as the latest
input picture element and an immediately preceding field, read
out from the memory means when the value X| of the latest
input picture element is received; inter-frame prediction means
for generating a prediction value X|/;of the latest input picture
element, through using picture elements in the same field as the
latest input picture element, the immediately preceding field
and an immediately preceding frame, read out from the mem-
ory means when the value X| of the latest input picture ele-
ment is received; median selector means for comparing the
prediction values in terms of magnitude to select a prediction
value X|Af assuming a median; previous picture element opti-
mum prediction means for comparing absolute values,
|XoAf-Xo|, |XoAr-Xo| and |Xof-Xo|, of prediction errors
between the prediction values Xo.v. Xoa" and Xof. obtained
from the intra-field prediction means, the inter-field prediction
means and the inter-frame prediction means for a picture ele-
ment value Xo immediately before the latest input picture
element Xi and the picture element value Xo to select the
prediction means providing the smallest value, and for generat-
ing a prediction value X is of the latest input picture element
value Xi available from the selected prediction means; and
prediction generator means for newly generating a prediction
value X| of the latest input picture element X| on the basis of
a weighted mean of the prediction value Xi^/ obtained from
the median selector means and the prediction value Xis ob-
tained from the optimum prediction means for the latest pic-
ture element value Xi.
4,437,120
DRIVE LEVEL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR TESTING
KINESCOPES
Felta C. Farmer, Jr., Gas City, and Donald P. Knight, Marion.
both of Ind., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 5. 1982, Ser. No. 346,372
Int. CI.' H04N 7/02
U.S. CI. 358-139 6 Claims
4,437,121
VIDEO PICTURE PROCESSING APPARATUS AND
METHOD
Richard J. Taylor. London; Paul R. N. Kellar, Newbury, and
Neil R. Hinson, Petersfleld, all of England, aasignors to .Micro
Coniultant. Limited, Berkshire, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 246,970. Mar. 24, 1981. abandoned.
This application Jun. 6, 1983, Ser. No. 499,676
Qalmi priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. ID, 1980.
8011834
Int. a.' H04N 5/22
U.S. a. 358-160 23aalm.
"OTATEO iOUT(<jri
*.^^/>'V^ '«*I«»TO (input; RASTER
C'>^::^^-C^^---
1. A drive level control for testing a kinescope having an
element driven by a drive voltage and in which electron beams
are scanned in accordance with vertical synchronizing pulses
and vertical blanking pulses comprising:
first means for receiving said vertical blanking pulses and for
applying said vertical blanking pulses to said element;
second means for receiving said vertical blanking pulses and
converting said pulses to a voltage proportional to the
level of said vertical blanking pulses;
third means responsive to said vertical synchronizing pulses
for gating said second means in accordance with the initial
transition of said synchronizing pulses;
fourth means for providing a reference drive level;
fifth means responsive to said reference level and to said
proportional voltage for providing an error signal, said
first means being responsive to said error signal for main-
taining said drive voltage at a constant level.
1. A processing system for processing input television signals
to produce output television signals representing the same
picture as the input signals but with an orientation change
imparted to at least part of said picture, comprising;
storage means having relatively slow read rates for storing
elements of said input television signals representing indi-
^ vidual picture points;
address means for sequentially reading from said storage
means successive batches of said input signal elements
representing picture points included in respective two-di-
mensional areas of the picture, each said area of the pic-
ture having a horizontal dimension comprising a plurality
of picture points and a vertical dimension comprising a
plurality of lines of the input signal raster;
latch means having a relatively rapid read rate for temporar-
ily storing each batch of selected signal elements;
processing means for reading signal elements from said latch
means and for interpolating among said signal elements to
synthesise at least one signal element for the output televi-
sion signals from each batch of input signal elements; and
means for producing said synthesised signal elements in the
appropriate order in relation to the output signal raster to
produce the desired change in the television picture.
4,437.122
LOW RESOLUTION RASTER IMAGES
Brian F. Walsh. Etna, and David E. Halpert, Enfleld, both of
N.H., auignors to Xerox Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Sep. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 303,742
Int. a.J H04N 1/38. 5/14
U.S. a. 358—166 27 Claim.
1. A method of enhancing the reproduction of images repre-
sented by a plurality of pixels comprising the steps of
holding in a first storage consecutive lines of an image to be
reproduced, the pixels of the image being represented by
digital signals,
isolating a predetermined portion of the signals of each of
the image lines into a second storage means,
forming a pixel pattern from the isolated digital signals
including a center pixel signal surrounded by neighboring
pixel signals including pixel signals from the same line of
the image as the center pixel as well as pixel signals from
the lines above and below the center pixel,
generating an identifier uniquely describing the isolated
pixel pattern,
886
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
comparing the identifler with identifiers representing a plu-
rality of standard pixel formats, and
enhancing the central pixel in accordance with the particular
match of the isolated pixel pattern with a standard pixel
format.
4,437,123
DYNAMICALLY CONTROLLED HORIZONTAL
PEAKING SYSTEM
Wayne E. Harlan, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,531
Int. a.3 H04N 5/14. 5/21
U.S. a. 358-166 5 Qaims
jncsioiunoij T T ST
a peaking system input terminal;
means, coupled to said source, for delivering said video signals
to said peaking system input terminal;
means, responsive to said delivered video signals, for forming
an adjustably cored horizontal peaking signal output, said
forming means having a coring level control terminal, with
the depth of coring of said horizontal peaking signal output
effected by said forming means being dependent upon the
level of a potential appearing at said control terminal;
signal translating means having an input terminal and an output
terminal, and exhibiting a low pass characteristic having a
cutoff frequency lying below the middle of said band of
frequencies;
a direct current conductive coupling between said output
terminal and said control terminal;
a capacitor coupled between said input terminal of said signal
translating means and said peaking system input terminal;
means for developing a reference potential at a reference ter-
minal;
a transistor having a base electrode direct current conductively
coupled to said reference terminal, an emitter electrode
direct current conductively coupled to said output terminal
of said signal translating means, and a collector electrode
direct current conductively coupled to said input terminal of
said signal translating means; and
a signal combiner, responsive to said delivered video signals
and to said adjustably cored horizontal peaking signal out-
put, for developing peaked luminance representative signals;
wherein said signal translating means provides a filtered ver-
sion of said video signals at said output terminal with a
polarity such that said synchronizing pulses extend in a
conduction-enhancing direction for said transistor.
4,437,124
DYNAMIC CORING ORCUIT
Larry A. Cochran, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,750
Int. a.3 H04N 5/14
U.S. a. 358-166 3 CMnu
y<#^
leomnouo — i— i
- 0-4
"t.
ILUMII
SIGWU.
SOUHCC
i
^SE
f^^
m
/TBI
M\c
( «ss
flCTld
KL«r|
OETtCTOB I
8«K)
P»SS .
I ADJUSTABLY 1 F GAIN ~^ J % I „t,an 'l
PtAKlNG PCAKINC I SIGNAL I ILUMNANCEI
SGNaT — SIGNAL I— J COMBINER I - SIGNAL |—
I rowMER _ translator! I amplifier!
GAIN
CONTROLLED
PEAKING
SIGNAL
TRANSLATOR
LUHWANCE ^
SIGNAL
AHPLIFCR
CORING LEVEL
CONTROL VOLTAGE
SOURCE 20
1. In a television receiver including a source of video signals
which are representative of variations of the luminance of an
image between black and white extremes during periodic
image intervals, and which include, during intervening blank-
ing intervals, deflection synchronizing pulses extending to
peaks at a blacker-than-black level, said video signals occupy-
ing a predetermined band of frequencies; a dynamically con-
trolled horizontal peaking system comprising:
1. In an image reproduction system including a source of
luminance signals representative of variations of the luminance
of an image between black and white extremes; a dynamic
coring circuit comprising:
means, coupled to said source, for developing a cored ver-
sion of a signal representative of the high frequency con-
tent of said luminance signals, said cored version corre-
sponding to the difference between a linearly translated
version of said high frequency content representative
^ signal and a doubly clipped version of said high frequency
(Content representative signal; said developing means hav-
ing a coring level control voltage input terminal, with the
depth of coring effected by said cored version developing
means dependent upon the level of a coring level control
voltage applied to said input terminal; and
means, responsive to said luminance signals, for developing
said coring level control voltage; said control voltage
developing means comprising a low pass filter coupled to
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
887
said source, and means for applying the output of said low
pass filter to said input terminal with such a sense as to
increase the depth of coring with a shift of said low pass
filter output in the black direction and to decrease the
depth of coring with a shift of said low pass filter output
in the white direction.
rCgS^
,_r3L v-^ _ ,^ _
rffacueM^ ^«»t««
Oilttsi
^
AMaou
'» X
a*
1. A method of assigning a control value having one of two
complementary states to a transmitted digital signal arranged
in blocks of digital data and having a control signal with one of
two complemenUry states at a predetermined location in each
such block to identify the respective block as being of an odd
type or an even type, comprising
detecting errors occurring in said control signal;
sampling and storing the control signal, beginning at peri-
odic times when said blocks are expected to change over
from one of said odd and even types to the other thereof,
for a plurality of said blocks where the control signal
therein is detected to be free of errors;
judging whether there is a majority of blocks in which a
sampled and stored control signal has one or the other of
said complementary states;
providing as said control value an identifying signal whose
state is determined by the state of the judged majority of
the blocks; and
following a subsequent such periodic time and until a major-
ity of blocks in which a sampled and stored control signal
has one or the other of said complementary states is
judged, providing as said control value a supplemental
identifying signal based on a previously determined identi-
fying signal.
4,437.126
ELECTRONIC CINEMA CAMERA
Robert E. Gottschalk, Los Angeles, Calif., assignor to Panavi-
sion. Incorporated, Tarzana, Calif.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,157
Int. a? H04N 5/iO
U.S. a. 358—224 9 Gaims
1. A camera device for electronic cinematography compris-
ing, in combination: a housing, an objective lens assembly
supported on said housing and having an optical axis, a mov-
able device having a mirror and a partial mirror and a transpar-
ent glass mounted thereon and positioned in substantially the
same plane at an angle to said optical axis, means for moving
said device in a direction at right angles to said optical axis to
bring either of said mirrors or said transparent glass into align-
ment with said optical axis, a viewfinder eyepiece assembly
pivotally mounted on said housing to turn about a horizontal
axis, said assembly having elements positioned to receive light
from either said mirror or said partial mirror, a fixed mirror in
said housing positioned at an angle to said optical axis, a televi-
4,437,125
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING METHOD AND
APPARATUS
Kaichi Yamamoto, Zama, Japan, assignor to Sony Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,450
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 27, 1980, 55-150421
Int. a.J H04N 5/785
U.S. a. 358-167 14 Qaims
sion camera, and a movable iris device optically interposed
between said fixed mirror and said television camera.
4,437,127
DOCUMENT INFORMATION FILING SYSTEM
Kenji Hirose, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,656
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 31, 1980, 55-153274
Int. CI.J H04N 1/22
U.S. Q. 358-296 i, claims
"itccN
1. A document information filing system comprising:
a scanner for scanning a document to produce a document
information;
recording and reproducing means for recording and repro-
ducing document information and title information corre-
sponding to the document information in and from a
recording medium;
means for providing title information concerning document
information to be newly recorded in said recordmg me-
dium;
a storage section for storing various management informa-
tion for predetermined fields; and
deciding means for executing an auxiliary decision as to if
the title information reproduced by said recording and
reproducing means corresponds to a title information in
the various management information in said storage sec-
tion, a first decision as to if the title information provided
by said coupling means corresponds to a title information
in any of the various management information in said
memory section and a second decision as to if particular
information of the title information reproduced by said
recording and reproducing means coincides with particu-
lar information of the title information provided from said
title information providing means and providing an in-
struction to inhibit the recordmg of document information
when at least one of said auxiliary decision and said first
decision is unsatisfied and/or said second decision is satis-
fied.
888
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,437,128
SYSTEM AND METHOD OF RECORDING AND
REPRODLCING WIDE BAND CHANNEL
INFORMATION BY MEANS OF SEVERAL NARROW
BAND CHANNELS
Mechislao Sapkowski, Caracas, Venezuela, assignor to Manfred
Fred Honeck, Novato, Calif., a part interest
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,243
Int. a. J H04N 5/76
U.S. a. 358—335 25 Claims
%
i_llJ-^» ^M"*^
tending between a first reel and a second reel into a predeter-
mined tape path and take up a magnetic tape pinched and
driven by a capstan and a pinch roller onto said first reel
mount, first braking force applying means for applying a pre-
determined braking force to said second reel mount and a
second braking force applying means for applying a predeter-
mined braking force to said first reel mount, comprising a
single electromagnet operatively coupled to said idler mecha-
nism and said first and second braking force applying means
such that when a plunger of said electromagnet is at a first
position the drive of said reel mounts by said idler mechanism
and the brake of said first braking force applying means are
released while the brake to said first reel mount by said second
braking force applying means is enabled, and when said
plunger of said electromagnet is in a second position the drive
of said reel mount by said idler mechanism and the brake by
said first braking force applying means are enabled while the
brake by said second braking force applying means is released.
1. A method of recording and reproducing wide band chan-
nel information signals by means of several narrow band chan-
nels, comprising the steps of:
receiving said wide band channel information signals;
sampling said received wide band channel information sig-
nals so as to derive a plurality of narrow band channel
signals;
recording and reproducing said plurality of narrow band
channel signals to obtain a corresponding plurality of
reproduced narrow band channel signals;
shaping each of said plurality of reproduced narrow band
channel signals to obtain corresponding shaped output
signals; and
combining said corresponding shaped output signals so as to
recover and reproduce said wide band channel informa-
tion signals;
wherein said shaping step comprises limiting said plurality of
reproduced narrow band channel signals to provide corre-
sponding limiter outputs, discriminating said limiter out-
puts to provide discriminator outputs, and shaping and
time-centering said discriminator outputs to obtain said
corresponding shaped output signals.
4,437,129
MAGNETIC RECORDING AND REPRODUCING
APPARATUS ENABLING TAPE TRANSPORT IN THE
FORWARD AND REVERSE DIRECTIONS
Masashi Yoshida, Ibaraki; Hiyime Yokota, Katsuta; Mitsiyi
Aman, MIto, and Tatsuya Shigemura, Katsuta, all of Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,400
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 9, 1980, 55-92780
Int. Q\? GllB 15/66
U^. CI. 360—85 4 Qaims
EgRWATO
— - REVERSE
1. A magnetic recording and reproducing apparatus having
an idler mechanism, for rotating a first and second reel mounts
with a predetermined torque to pull out a magnetic tape ex-
4,437,130
CASSETTE ADAPTER FOR EIGHT TRACK MACHINES
John B. Hennessy, 1232 Albert Dr., Santa Rosa, Calif. 95405,
and Derek Lane, 738 Dexter St., Santa Rosa, Calif. 95404
Filed Dec. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 332,082
Int. a.3 GllB 5/aw
U.S. CI. 360—94 6 Gaims
1. An adapter for an eight track stereo system comprising:
a body, including a fiat transfer housing to be received in an
eight track tape player, and a cassette housing;
at least two vertically aligned cassette receivers pivotally
mounted in said cassette housing;
a transfer wheel in said transfer housing adapted to engage
the conventional drive capstan of an eight track system;
an upright capstan in said cassette housing;
rotary motion transmitting means connecting said transfer
wheel and said upright capstan;
a pick-up head carrier with at least one pick-up head thereon
mounted for vertical movement in said cassette housing;
means for moving said carrier into alignment with a selected
one of said cassette receivers; and
means for pivoting a selected one of said cassette receivers
into operative association with said upright capstan and
said pick-up head.
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
889
4,437,131
LOCKING DEVICE FOR THE TAPE CASSETTE
COMPARTMENT OF A MAGNETIC TAPE APPARATUS
Karl Hehi, Arthur-Hehl-Strasse 32, 7298 Lossburg 1, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333.915
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 23.
1980,3048790
Int. G.) GllB l/OO
U.S. G. 360-96.6 9 Qaims
1. A locking device for the tape cassette compartment of a
magnetic tape apparatus intended for storing and reproducing
information, which cassette compartment is mounted on a
chassis of the tape apparatus to be pivotable outwardly by the
action of a preloaded spring, on a pivot axis which is parallel
and proximate to a longitudinal side wall of the cassette com-
partment, the cassette compartment being arranged in the
aperture of a fiat front wall of the apparatus which is parallel
to the chassis and has an outer surface in the same plane as the
outer surface of the cassette compartment in its normal posi-
tion, the chassis carrying a detent slide which is provided with
a detent member and guided for straightline movements per-
pendicular to the pivot axis of the cassette compartment and
parallel to the plane of the front wall, said detent member
engaging a detent shoulder of the cassette compartment to
maintain the later in its norma! position, being disengageable
from the detent shoulder through a release movement of the
detent slide in opposition to the action of a detent return
spring, the improvement therein comprising:
a detent release button defined by a portion of the front wall
which is separated from the surrounding front wall along
a major part of its circumference, the attached minor part
of its circumference forming a bending hinge, so that a
distal portion of the detent release button is depressible
toward the inside of the apparatus; and
means defined by the depressible portion of the detent re-
lease button and the detent slide for driving the detent
slide in a release movement, in response to a depression of
the detent release button.
a supporting arm which is turned by a solenoid a prescribed
amount within a plane perpendicular to the surface of the
magnetic disk;
the improvement in that said solenoid is disposed with its
axis being substantially parallel to the surface of said mag-
netic disk and that said supporting arm is juxtaposed to the
disk surface along with said solenoid.
4,437,133
CURRENT SOURCE INVERTER
COMMUTATION-SPIKE-VOLTAGE PROTECTION
CIRCUIT INCLUDING OVER-CURRENT AND
OVER.VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Barry J. Rueckert, New Berlin, Wis., assignor to Eaton Corpo-
ration, Cleveland, Ohio
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,265
Int. CI.5 H02H 7/09 w
U.S. G. 361-33 7 Claims
-HHr
ftt
— r
<«
TT
j^3
4,437,132
FLEXIBLE MAGNETIC DISK DEVICE
Motohiro Shimaoka, Furukawa, Japan, assignor to Alps Electric
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,895
Gaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 7, 1980. 55-
142220[U]
Int. G.3 GllB 5/48
U.S. G. 360-105 3 a«Ims
1. In a flexible magnetic disk device wherein a magnetic
head and a loading pad opposing thereto are disposed on a
carriage in a manner to hold therebetween a magnetic disk
loaded rotatably and to be movable radially of the magnetic
disk and wherein the loading pad has its operation cntrolled by
1. In an adjustable frequency AC. motor control system
having a solid state inverter supplied by adjustable DC. volt-
age for applying adjustable frequency current to the AC.
motor input terminals and said inverter having low voltage
power devices for switching the current into the motor phases
and means for commutating the power devices in the proper
order, and said switching causing large voltage transients or
voltage spikes to be produced which would be impressed on
the motor and which might damage the inverter power de-
vices, the improvement comprising:
means for dissipating excess commutation energy so as to
keep the voltage spikes at a controlled level comprising:
a spike voltage clamp circuit connected to said input termi-
nals of the motor comprising:
resistor means for dissipating the commutation energy;
a turn-on turn-off switching device for connecting said
resistor means in circuit so as to perform its energy dissi-
pating function each time it is needed and for disconnect-
ing said resistor means therefrom when it has performed
its function;
voltage storage means for storing the voltage appearing at
said input terminals;
decoupling means between said input termmals and said
voltage storage means for decoupling said resistor means
from said input terminals whenever the voltage on said
890
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
input terminals falls below the voltage on said storage
means;
and clamp control means for sensing the voltage on said
storage means and being responsive to a predetermined
magnitude of voltage thereon for turning on said switch-
ing device to connect said resistor means in said circuit to
limit said voltage and for turning off said switching device
when said voltage has decreased to another predeter-
mined value thereby to control said voltage spikes to a
safe level.
4437 134
DISCHARGE CIRCUIT FOR RAPIDLY ELIMINATING
CHARGE TRAPPED IN A CAPAOTOR VOLTAGE
DIVIDER USED FOR MONITORING HIGH VOLTAGE
AC
Jean-Pierre Dupraz, Aix-Les-Bains, France, assignor to Societe
Anonyme dite: Alsthom-Atlantique, Paris, France
Filed Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,535
Claims priority, application France, Nov. 6, 1980, 80 23700
Int. CV H02H 7/16
U.S. a. 361-56 4 Qaims
a first circuit node;
an insulated gate field effect transistor coupled to said exter-
nal terminal and said first circuit node for transmitting the
input signal applied to said external terminal via a drain-
source path thereof to said first circuit node, a gate of said
first insulated gate field effect transistor being connected
to an output terminal of a pulse generator circuit generat-
ing a switch signal;
a resistance element inserted between said external terminal
and said insulated gate field effect transistor; and
an input circuit coupled to the first circuit node to receive
said input signal transmitted to said first input circuit node
via said drainsource path of said insulated gate field effect
transistor,
wherein said resistance element has a resistance value so set
that when an abnormal surge voltage having a voltage
level greater than a normal predetermined input signal
voltage level is applied to said external terminal, said
resistance element reduces a breakdown current flowing
through a semiconductor junction of said insulated gate
field effect transistor to a level lower than a breakdown
current level that causes breakdown of a gate insulating
film of said insulated gate field effect transistor.
.0/"
1. A discharge circuit for rapidly eliminating charge trapped
in a capacitor voltage divider used for monitoring high voltage
AC, said voltage divider comprising a capacitor column for
dropping nearly all of the high voltage and a base capacitance
connected in series therewith so that a small voltage appears
thereacross. the improvement wherein said discharge circuit
comprises a diode rectifier bridge comprising four diodes and
connected by its AC terminals in parallel with the base capaci-
tance, and two identical windings connected in parallel respec-
tively with two of the diodes of the bridge, and both of said
winding-shunted diodes being connected to the same one of
the AC terminals of the diode bridge.
4,437,136
ELECTROMAGNET
Etsuji Yamamoto, Hachioji; Kensuke Sekihara^ Shiiguku, and
Hideki Kohno, Suginami, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 389,075
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 24, 1981, 56-96699
Int. a.3 HOIH 47/00
U.S. a 361-146 11 aaims
ill
J±^
vutms
RESISTOR
■j?>l
PCMER
SOURCE
26
5t
^
POKCR
SOUCE
2t
4,437,135
SEMICONDUCTOR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT DEVICE
Masahiro Ogata, and Osamu Sakai, both of Kodaira, Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd. and Hitachi Microcomputer Engi-
neering, Ltd., both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 319,077
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 7, 1980, 55-155863
Int. Cl.^ H02H 9/04
U.S. a. 361-91 22 Oaims
1. A semiconductor integrated circuit device comprising:
an external terminal to which an input signal is applied;
1. An electromagnet comprising an electromagnet exciting
coil, a current detecting means for detecting the current flow-
ing through said coil, a control means for controlling the
current supplied to said coil in accordance with the output
from said current detecting means, and a heating means for
heating said current detecting means, said electromagnet char-
acterized in that said current detecting means is heated by said
heating means when said electromagnet is not on working.
4,437,137
ELECTRONIC DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM FOR AN
AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLE
Hanio Mochida, Kiyokawa, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Company, Limited, Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 432^83
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 14, 1982, 57-3323
Int. O.' HOIH 47/00
VS. O. 361—172 5 Claims
1. An electronic door locking system for an automotive
vehicle for locking/unlocking vehicle doors, the vehicle being
provided with vehicle devices, which comprises:
(a) a plurality of switches for outputting at least one prede-
termined door-locking octal coded digit and a sequence of
predetermined door-unlocking octal coded digits;
(b) an octal-binary code converter connected to a plurality
of said switches for converting the octal coded digits
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
891
inputted from said switches into the corresponding binary
coded digits;
(c) an address counter connected to said octal-binary code
converter for counting up a plurality of the binary-coded
signals outputted from said octal-binary code converter
whenever one of said switches is depressed and outputting
an address-designation signal in response to the number of
signals outputted from said octal-binary code converter;
(d) a memory unit connected to said address counter for
outputting a previously stored binary coded signal in
response to the address-designation signal outputted from
said address counter;
(e) a first comparator connected to said octal-binary code
converter and said memory unit for outputtting a signal
when one of the binary coded door-unlocking signals
outputted from said octal-binary code converter agrees
with one of the binary coded door-unlocking signals out-
putted from said memory unit in response to the respec-
tive address-designation signal outputted from said ad-
dress counter;
(0 a counter connected to said first comparator for output-
ting a signal when said first comparator outputs the prede-
termined number of binary coded signals;
4,437 138
FORCE SENSING MEANS AND METHOD OF
PRODUONG SUCH SENSING MEANS
Klaus Nicol, Adelheidstraase 13, D.6000 Frankfurt a.M.50, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignor to Klaus Nicol, Frankfurt, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,515
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 4.
1980, 3025362
Int. O.^ HOIG 7/00
U.S.O. 361-283 24 Oaims
(g) a first reset-set flip-flop connected to said counter for
outputting a door unlocking command signal when said
first counter outputs the signal;
(h) a second comparator connected to said ocul-binary code
converter and said memory unit for outputting a signal
when at least one binary coded door-locking signal out-
putted from said octal-binary code converter agrees with
at least one binary coded door-locking signal outputted
from said memory unit in response to the address-designa-
tion signal outputted from said address counter,
(i) a second reset-set flip-flop connected to said second com-
parator for outputting a door locking command signal
when said second counter outputs the signal; and
0) a door lock/unlock actuating solenoid connected to said
first and second reset-set flip-flops for unlocking the vehi-
cle doors when said first reset-set flip-flop is set and lock-
ing the vehicle doors when said second reset-set flip-flop
is set; and
(k) means for actuating at least one vehicle device to its
original disabled condition in response to the lock com-
mand signal generated from said second reset-set flip-flop.
1. A force sensing means comprising a capacitor arrange-
ment of at least two capacitor plates and one compressible
dielectric between at least two of said capacitor plates, the
improvement wherein the capacitor plates are a metallic cloth,
the warp threads and the weft threads of which define an angle
which yields to the influence of external forces, and the dielec-
tric is a macroscopically homogeneous, foamed, elastomeric
material.
4,437,139
LASER ANNEALED DIELECTRIC FOR DUAL
DIELECTRIC CAPAOTOR
James K. Howard, Morgan Hill, Calif., assignor to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 450,629
Int. O.^ HOIG 3/075. 7/00: HOIL 21/26
U.S. O. 361-313 22 Oaims
18. A capacitor structure comprised of a dual dielectric
between two electrodes wherein said dual dielectric comprises:
a first leakage current preventing dielectric layer adjacent a
first one of said electrodes; and
a second dielectric layer between said first dielectric layer
and a second one of said electrodes, said second dielectric
layer being an amorphous thin film layer of a ferroelectric
forming tiUnate or zirconate which is laser annealed to a
crysulline ferroelectric.
892
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,437,140
PRINTED CIRCUIT DEVICE
Sadahiro Ohyama, Chigasaki; Hiroshi Kato, Machida; Sadao
Yaguchi; Mikito Baba, both of Yokohama, and Morikazu
Okada, Atsugi, all of Japan, assignors to Mitsumi Electric Co.
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 231,585, Feb. 3, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 20,629, Mar. 14, 1979,
abandoned. This application Oct. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 433,729
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 28, 1978, 53-77340;
Jul. 10, 1978, 53-83785; Jul. 25, 1978, 53-90757; Aug. 14, 1978,
53-111304[U); Nov. 22, 1978, 53-144886; Dec. 4, 1978,
53-149075; Dec. 4, 1978, 53-149074
Int. a.3 H05K 01/18
U.S. a. 361—402 9 Claims
1. A printed circuit device comprising:
a ceramic base plate; and
a circuit pattern layer disposed on one surface of said base
plate, said circuit pattern layer comprising a plurality of
electric conductor layers and insulating layers in an alter-
nate stacked laminar-arrangement, said
electric conductor layers and said insulating layers each
having a predetermined pattern, a predtermined part of
said circuit pattern being constituted by a first conductor
layer, an intermediate conductor layer, a second conduc-
tor layer, a first insulating layer, and a second insulating
layer,
said intermediate conductor layer being stacked adjacent
said first insulating layer on one surface thereof and being
stacked adjacent said second insulating layer on the other
surface thereof, said first insulating layer being stacked
with said first conductor layer, said second insulating
layer being stacked with said second conductor layer,
said first and second insulating layers being connected and
forming an insulating enclosure which is disposed around
intermediate conductor layer in a cross section taken
along a plane perpendicular to the surface of the base
plate,
said first and second conductor layers being connected and
forming a conductor enclosure disposed around said insu-
lating enclosure in said cross section,
said intermediate conductor layer forming a conducting
layer electrically connected to a power supply terminal
mounted on said base plate,
said conductor enclosure forming an electric conductive
layer for grounding,
said intermediate conductor layer being apropriately formed
with narrow parts and wider parts in its extension,
coil parts being formed by said narrow parts, and capacitor
parts being formed by said narrow parts, said wider parts,
said insulating enclosure, and said conductor enclosure,
said coil parts cooperating with said capacitor parts so as to
constitute the equivalent of a low-pass filter on only one
surface of said base plate.
device package for solder attachment to a substrate compris-
ing:
(a) a support member having a centrally disposed chip con-
nect area, top and bottom surfaces and periphery forming
sides and walls forming notches in the sides of said support
member and a plurality of holes in said support member in
preselected patterns adjacent to the notched periphery
thereof;
(b) electrical metallizations on the walls of said notches and
plurality of holes of the support member, said metalliza-
tion of the notches forming metallized notches and said
metallization of the holes forming cylindrically shaped
electrical leads therethrough, said metallized notches and
holes for forming solderable connections between the
package and substrate;
(c) a plurality of wire bonding terminals selectively posi-
tioned on the support member adjacent said chip connect
area;
(d) a plurality of trace conductors having first and second
ends, said first ends electrically connected to said plurality
of wire bonding terminals; and
(e) a plurality of expanded terminal pads mounted on the top
and bottom surfaces of the support member, said ex-
panded pads of the top surface electrically connected to
the second ends of the trace conductors and together with
the expanded pads of the bottom surface electrically con-
nected to the notch and hole metallizations of the support
member in open communication with the metallized
notches and holes thereof whereby when the bottom pads
are soldered to the substrate, solder rises up the open
metallized notches and holes to form solder fillets therein
for electrical connection of the substrate and for visual
inspection thereof.
4,437,141
HIGH TERMINAL COUNT INTEGRATED aRCUIT
DEVICE PACKAGE
Jon S. Prokop, Richardson, Tex., assignor to Texas Instruments
Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,698
Int. C\? H05K 1/14
MS. a. 361—403 12 Qaims
1. A surface mounted high terminal count integrated circuit
4,437,142
LIGHTING nXTURE WITH SNAP REPLACEABLE BULB
FEATURE
Anthony C. Donato, Westfield, and Neil Russo, Howell, both of
N.J., assignors to Lightolier Incorporated, Jersey City, N.J.
Filed Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,077
Int. a.J HOIR 33/00
U.S. a. 362—226 8 Qaims
1. A lighting fixture for a PAR lamp or like bulb of the type
which includes a shallow body having a convex rear surface
including a rearwardly facing pair of generally fiat metallic
terminal strips, including portions arrayed in generally copla-
nar alignment perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of said
bulb, said fixture comprising a reflector housing, a socket
member mounted within said housing, said socket member
including an insulating body portion having a transversely
extending downwardly open cross channel, a pair of alignment
wings formed from said body |x>rtion, each said wing having a
undersurface portion merging with an opposite boundary of
said channel, said undersurfaces being generally concave and
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
893
convergmg upwardly and inwardly toward the geometric
center of said channel, said wings together defining a funnel
configuration leading into said channel, a pair of contact mem-
bers recessed within said channel and adapted to be connected
to a current source, said contact members each including a pair
of spring finger portions, the finger portions of each pair being
disposed at opposite sides of said channel, cam means on said
fingers positioned to coact with the terminals of said bulb for
spreading the fingers of each pair responsive to upward move-
ments of said terminal strips within said channel and retainer
portions on said fingers positioned to enter behind said termi-
nals strips and restrain said bulb after seating, against move-
ment outwardly of said channel.
\
4,437,143
RETRACTABLE HEADLAMP ASSEMBLY FOR
AUTOMOBILES
Motomu Hayashi, Okazaki; Atuo Ishlkawa, Toyota, and
Kazuyoshi Yukimoto, Kariya, all of Japan, assignors to Aisin
Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,366
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 22, 1981, 56-058383
Int. a.3 HOIG 1/06
U.S. a. 362-272 3 a^„,
op-
tion at which said headlamp projects out of the front hood
and is turned on. and a second position at which said
headlamp is retracted within said front hood and turned
off; and
adjustable stop means for determining said first position in
conformance with the slip angle of said angularly dis-
placed stop position of said motor.
4,437,144
HEIGHTADJUSTABLE SUPPORT ARM WITH A
PARALLELOGRAM LINKAGE
Werner Guenther, Bensheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,213
Qalms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 17
1981, 8121048[U]; Jul. 17. 1981, 8I2I076[U]
Int. C\? F21V 21/28
U.S. CI. 362-275 9 ci„„,
1. A height-adjustable support arm comprising:
a stationary first articulated head connected to a mounting
means for said support arm;
a second articulated head movable relative to said first artic-
ulated head;
a parallelogram linkage including and connecting said first
and second articulated heads, said parallelogram linkage
further including a tubular member forming a first leg of
said parallelogram linkage and a rod slidably guided in
said tubular member forming a second leg of said parallel-
ogram linkage;
a support bar connected to said second articulated head
having a free end to which a device to be supported is
attached; and
a flexible sheathing completely surrounding and covering
said second articulated head and said support bar, said
sheathing having an exterior diameter substantially equal
to the diameter of said tubular member and having one
end connected to said tubular member and an opposite end
connected to the supported device for permitting free
movement of said second articulated head and said sup-
port bar within said sheathing.
1. A retractable headlamp assembly for use on an automobile
frame having a front hood, comprising:
a bracket adapted to be mounted on the automobile frame;
a headlamp pivotably mounted on said bracket;
a lamp link fixed to said headlamp;
a motor mounted on said bracket and having a rotatable
shaft, said motor being de-energizable to stop said rotat-
able shaft within an angular interval between a normal
stop position and an angularly displaced position which is
angularly spaced through a slip angle from said normal
stop position;
a link mechanism operatively connected to and extending
between said lamp link and said routable shaft, said motor
being energizable to cause said headlamp to be angularly
moved through said link mechanism between a first posi-
4,437,145
SHOCK ABSORBING LAMP ASSEMBLY FOR BASELESS
CARTRIDGE BULBS AND THE LIKE
Philip C. Roller, Ashville, and Chris A. Suckow, Frewsburg, both
of N.Y., assignors to Truck-Lite Company, Inc., Falconer,
Filed Aug. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 410,957
Int. a.3 F21V 7/00
U.S. a. 362-306 19 Qalms
1. A shock absorbing lamp assembly for baseless cartridge
bulbs and the like for use as marker, signaling and driving
lamps for on and off road motor vehicles, trailers and the like,
comprising a rear backing lamp housing member serving as a
reflector and lamp housing having a forwardly facing cavity
bounded by a concavely-curved reflector surface defining an
optical axis, a lens cover member concentric with said optical
axis joined about its perimeter to the housing member to cover
894
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
said cavity, an elongated baseless cartridge lamp bulb having a
longitudinal bulb axis in said cavity having a glass envelope
providing a generally cylindrical central bulb portion concen-
tric with said bulb axis housing filament wire and a pair of
opposite generally flattened bulb end portions of smaller verti-
cal dimensions than the diameter of the cylindrical central
portion hermetically sealing about Hlament support pins so that
the glass envelope of the bulb rigidly supports the internal and
external portions of the filament support pins in fixed spatial
relationship, a baseless cartridge-type bulb mount assembly
defining forwardly extending substantially parallel arms and a
rearwardly spaced interconnecting base portion embracing the
flattened end portions of the bulb glass envelope and extending
in a U-shaped path in top plan generally rearwardly toward
said reflector surface from the bulb to support the same with
said bulb axis disposed horizontally and transversely intersect-
i& 2a
ing said optical axis, said concavely-curved reflector surface
having anchor formations and means fixing said interconnect-
ing base portion to said anchor formations, and said arms of
said bulb mount assembly being forwardly projecting verti-
cally and laterally flexible shock absorbing arms extending
parallel to each other generally perpendicular to said bulb axis
from said base portion formed of rubber-like material of about
60 durometer hardness, said shock mounting arms having
terminal receiving aisertures formed therein for receiving said
flattened end portions of the baseless bulb in frictionally con-
strained relation therein and having integral unitary portions
projecting rearwardly into reliably supported relation with
said base portion positioning said arms in parallel vertical
planes substantially maintaining the filament wire of said base-
less bulb horizontally disposed in proper focal position with
respect to said lens cover, member.
4,437,146
BOOST POWER SUPPLY HAVING POWER FACTOR
CORRECTION QRCUIT
Ralph F. Carpenter, Seattle, Wash., assignor to Pacific Electro
I>ynaniics, Inc., Redmond, Wash.
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,164
Int. a.J H02M 3/335
U.S. a. 363—21 17 Qalms
1. In a boost power supply having a diode-rectifying bridge,
an inductor, diode and filter capacitor connector in series with
said bridge, a shunting switch in parallel with the series combi-
nation of said diode and said filter capacitor, an improved
power factor correction circuit comprising:
current-sensing means for generating a current-indicating
signal indicative of the current flowing into said power
supply circuit;
reference waveform generating means producing first and
second reference waveforms, each a function of a sinusoi-
dal voltage applied to said bridge, said first reference
waveform being larger than said second reference wave-
form by a predetermined offset voltage; and
switch control means receiving said reference waveforms
and the output of said current-sensing means for closing
said shunting switch when the input current falls to said
second reference waveform and for opening said shunting
switch when said reference current rises to said first refer-
ence waveform.
4,437,147
RECnnER aRCUIT
Yoshio Takamura, Yokahama, and Akira Nakajima, Yokosuka,
both of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 379,042
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 19, 1981, 56-75178;
May 19, 1981, 56-75179; May 19, 1981, 56-75180; May 19, 1981,
56-75181; May 19, 1981, 56-75182; May 19, 1981, 56-75183
Int. a.3 H02M 7/ JO
U.S. CI. 363— 61 5 Claims
1. A rectifier circuit comprising:
a transformer having a primary winding for connection to an
AC signal source and a secondary winding having a
grounded center tap and first and second ends;
a first capacitor having a first end connected to said first end of
said secondary winding and a second end;
a first and second rectifiers, each having first and second ends,
said second end of said first rectifier and said first end of said
second rectifier being coupled to said second end of said first
capacitor, said first and second rectifiers being connected in
series in the same rectifying direction;
a second capacitor having a first end connected to said second
end of said second rectifier and a second end;
a third rectifier coupling said second end of said second
capacitor with said first end of said first rectifier, said third
rectifier being in series circuit with said first rectifier in the
same rectifying direction;
a third capacitor coupling a junction of said first and third
rectifiers to said second end of said secondary winding; and
a DC power source connected to a node between said second
capacitor and said third rectifier.
4,437,148
PEAK VOLTAGE CLAMPED POWER SUPPLY
Gabriel G. Suranyi, Rockaway, N J^ assignor to Western Elec-
tric Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 328,980
Int a.J H02P 13/26
UJS. a. 363—89 4 Claims
1. A circuit for efficiently stabilizing and limiting a direct
current voltage at an output thereof comprising:
means for supplying a first full wave rectified voltage;
filter means for stabilizing and reducing the ripple of the first
full wave rectified voltage;
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
895
a transistor having a collector terminal and an emitter termi-
nal coupled in series with the filter means;
means, coupled to the transistor, for biasing the transistor to
function in a lower power dissipating saturated mode over
a greater portion of the expected operating range of the
circuit when the output voluge of the circuit is less than
a predetermined maximum and for biasing the transistor to
function in a higher power dissipating unsaturated mode
S our*uT
over a lesser portion of said range when the output volt-
age of the circuit is substantially equal to the predeter-
mined maximum; and
means for supplying a second full wave rectified voltage
having a peak value different from the peak value of the
first full wave rectified voltage; and wherein the biasing
means includes a zener diode coupled to a base terminal of
the transistor and, in series through a biasing impedance
element, to the second full wave rectified voltage.
4,437,149
CACHE MEMORY ARCHITECTURE WITH DECODING
James H. Pomerene, Chappaqua, and Rudolph N. Recht-
schaffen, Scarsdale, both of N.Y., assignors to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,481
Int. C\J G06F 9/30. 13/00
U.S. a. 364-200 1, cuims
1. An information processing system including a central
processor and a hierarchical memory system comprising:
at least one low speed, high capacity main memory having a
relatively long access time and having a plurality of data
pages stored therein,
at least one high speed, low capacity Cache memory means
having a relatively short access time and adapted to store
a predetermined plurality of subsets of the information
stored in said main memory data pages, and
memory accessing control means for accessing data stored in
said hierarchical memory system,
instruction decoding means located in a communication
channel disposed between the main Memory and Cache
memory for transferring dau between said memories and
operative in conjunction with the memory access controls
to at least partially decode instructions being transferred
from Memory to Cache, and
means for storing said instructions in the Cache in at least
partially decoded form.
4,437,150
TOOL MANIPULATING METHOD AND APPARATUS
FOR MULTIPLE JOB PROCESSING
WiUitm V. Dahlgren, Jr., 240 Dolores, Apt. 138, San Francisco,
Calif. 94103; Uwis S, SilTerstein, 695 Connecticut Ave., #4,
San Francisco, Calif. 94107, and Edward W. Qaire, 5332
Shafter Ave., Oakland, Calif. 94618
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,559
Int. a.3 G05B 19/42; B23Q 17/IS
U.S. a. 364-474 jl Claims
1. A method of manipulating a tool of the type in which a
tool is positionally manipulated with respect to a workpiece
and in accordance with dimensional and copy information
supplied by a user, the dimensional and copy information
originating from a plurality of separate and distinct jobs
wherein the copy information includes a plurality of characters
including the steps of
generating a plurality of position and control parameters
which are based upon the user-supplied dimensional infor-
mation;
generating a plurality of copy parameters which are based
upon the dimensional information and the user-supplied
copy information;
generating a job reference parameter for each job which is
indicative of the physical location of the associated job on
the workpiece;
transferring the control, position, copy and job reference
parameters and the user-supplied copy information to a
control means;
transforming the position, control and job reference parame-
ters into drive signals wherein for each job the corre-
sponding drive signals arc referenced to the associated job
reference parameter;
selecting master font instructions, from a master font mem-
ory within the control means, which selected master font
instructions correspond to the characters in the user-sup-
plied copy information wherein the master font memory
stores a plurality of the master font instructions, each of
which prescribes tool movements to produce one of a
predesignated plurality of different characters;
modifying the selected master font instructions according to
the copy parameters;
converting the modified master font instructions into drive
signals wherein for each job, the corresponding drive
signals are referenced to the associated job reference
parameter;
transferring all drive signals to a tool manipulating means;
positioning the tool according to the position and job refer-
ence drive signals; and ^*
manipulating the tool in accordance with the control and
modified-copy instruction drive signals, so that each sepa-
rate and distinct job is performed on the same workpiece.
9. An apparatus for manipulating a tool with respect to a
workpiece in which a tool is manipulated by electronic means
and in accordance with dimensional and copy information
supplied by a user, the dimensional and copy information
originating from a plurality of separate and distinct jobs the
tool manipulating system comprising
an intelligent terminal for receiving the information from the
user, and for generating control, position and copy param-
eters, the terminal including
means for generating a plurality of different dimensional
layouts in accordance with the user-supplied informs-
896
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
tion, and for converting the generated layouts into
control, position and copy parameters and for generat-
ing a job reference parameter for each job which is
indicative of the physical location of the associated job
on the workpiece;
a control unit, which is communicatively coupled to the
intelligent terminal, the control unit receiving the control,
position, job reference, and copy parameters and the copy
information from the terminal, and supplying font infor-
mation to the terminal, the control unit including
font memory means for supplying a plurality of master
font deflnitions, each of which prescribes tool move-
ments to produce one of a predesignated plurality of
different characters;
processing means coupled to the font memory means for
interpreting the position and control parameters, for
selecting master font instructions from the master font
memory which correspond to the characters within the
user-supplied copy information, for modifying the se-
lected master font definitions according to the copy
parameters, and for generating drive signals in accor-
dance with control, job reference, and position parame-
ters and the modified master font definitions, wherein
for each job the corresponding drive signals are refer-
enced to the associated job reference parameter; and
mechanical tool manipulating means responsive to the drive
signals from the control unit, the mechanical tool manipu-
lating means including the tool and means for manipulat-
ing the position of the tool in accordance with the drive
signals, so that each separate and distinct job is performed
on the same workpiece.
4,437,151
COORDINATE MEASURING MACHINE INSPECTION
AND ADJUSTMENT METHOD
James J. Hurt, Bettendorf, and Susan K. Foss, LeClaire, both of
Iowa, assignors to Deere & Company, Moline, III.
Filed Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 368,950
Int. a.J GOIC 25/00
U.S. a. 364—571 7 Oaims
1. A method for determining the alignment of axes of a
coordinate measuring machine (CMM) having a probe mov-
able along the axes, the method comprising the steps of:
(a) installing an artifact on the CMM, the artifact having at
least two ends separated by a certain distance;
(b) moving the probe and at least one end of the artifact to a
plurality of positions defined by the artifact so that the
CMM generates a set of Cartesian coordinates coore-
spending to said plurality of positions;
(c) generating a set of distance equations, each distance
equation being for the distance between a first position
and a second position where said first and second positions
are defined by the artifact and wherein at least one of said
first and second positions is represented by one of said set
of Cartesian coordinates, each distance equation being in
terms of the CMM generated coordinates, the certain
distance and axis alignment error and scaling error factors
to be determined;
(d) determining said error factors by solving said set of
distance equations for said error factors; and
(e) adjusting the CMM according to the determined error
factors.
4,437,152
CONTROL ARRANGEMENT FOR MULTIFUNCTION
INDUSTRIAL MACHINE
Stephen H. Jones, LaFrance, S.C., assignor to Nordson Corpora-
tion, Amherst, Ohio
Filed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,749
Int. a.3 G06F 15/46: B65B 53/02
U.S. a. 364—138 4 Qaims
2. A method for controlling an industrial machine during an
operational cycle and for monitoring a plurality of variable
proportional control inputs comprising the steps of:
(a) recalling a maximum value for one of the control inputs;
(b) addressing the proportional control input corresponding
to the recalled maximum value;
(c) determining the proportional setting of the addressed
control;
(d) multiplying the determined proportion by the recalled
maximum value to determine a proportional value;
(e) controlling the industrial machine in response to the said
proportional value;
(0 repeating the steps (c) through (e) during at least a seg-
ment of the industrial machine operational cycle, whereby
changes in said proportional setting will effect changes in
machine control during at least said segment of the operat-
ing cycle.
4Clairas
4,437,153
APPARATUS CONTROL SYSTEM
Mituo Kamiyama, Tokyo, and Hirotoshi Namazue, Yokohama,
both of Japan, assignors to Kokusan Kinzoku Kogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,472
Int. a.3 G06F 15/46; B60R 25/10
U.S. a. 364—140
1. An apparatus control system, comprising:
an apparatus to be controlled;
a number presetter in the form of a switch board including a
certain number of pushbutton switches for delivering a
number code signal by depressing said pushbutton
switches sequentially and selectively in a desired order;
a first memory for storing a predetermined content repre-
senting a permanent code signal specifically selected be-
forehand for the said apparatus to be controlled;
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
897
a first comparator for comparing the permanent memory
content in said first memory with a first code signal gener-
ated at and delivered by said presetter;
a second memory for storing an arbitrary number code-
a second comparator being activated by said first compara-
tor upon a match between said first code signal and said
permanent code signal and for comparing a second code
signal generated by said number presetter with said arbi-
trary number code;
an address counter for delivering address signals to said first
switchover device, at switchover instant, causes the limit-
ing unit to reduce the amplitude and/or pulse duration of
and second memories upon reception of successive seg-
ments of said code signal fed from the presetter;
a first shift register for receiving output signals from the first
comparator; and
a second shift register for receiving output signals from the
second comparator;
said apparatus being brought into actuation or release upon
reception of the presetter's output number code signal and
the output signal from one of said shift registers only when
there is concurrence of output signals of said first and
second comparators.
the first control pulse signals rather than the second con-
trol pulse signals, whereby the second control pulses
regulate the electrical consumer.
4,437 154
DEVICE FOR GENERATING CONTROL SIGNALS WITH
A PRIMARY CONTROL UNIT AND AN AUXILIARY
CONTROL UNIT
Hermann Eisele, Schwieberdingen; Heinz Moller, Stuttgart, and
Manfred Schmitt, Heppenheim-Oberhambach, all of Fed
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stutgart.
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,093
Vm!m\m^^ «PP"cation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 20,
Int. a.3 G06F 15/46, 11/16. 15/16
U.S. a. 364-187 ,5 q^„,
1. A device for generating repeated control signals for an
electrical consumer, the device having:
a primary control unit which is connected to generate a first
control pulse signal;
an auxiliary control unit which is connected to generate a
second control pulse signal;
wherein the auxiliary control unit and the primary control
unit are connected to operate in parallel, and
wherein the second control pulse signal is phase shifted with
respect to the first control pulse signal;
an electrical consumer which is connected to the primary
and auxiliary control unit to receive continuously the first
and second control pulse to regulate the electrical con-
sumer;
a limiting unit to reduce the amplitude and/or pulse duration
of the second control pulse signals of said auxiliary control
unit;
an error recognition circuit connected to detect errors of the
primary control unit;
a switchover device connected to the error recognition
circuit, the primary control unit and the auxiliary control
unit; and
upon detection of errors by the error recognition circuit, the
4,437.155
CACHE/DISK SUBSYSTEM WITH DUAL AGING OF
CACHE ENTRIES
^^l ^. w."*'"' "'»^''"'«' ""J !^«"«n J, Thompson. Anoka,
both of Minn., auignors to Sperry Corporation. New York.
N.Y.
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 207,059
Int. a.J G06F 13/00
U.S. a. 364-200 8 claim.
l.ln a data processing system including a host processor for
issuing addressing signals specifying data to be accessed, a
mass memory, a cache store for storing segments, and a seg-
ment descriptor table for storing segment descriptors, there
being a segment descriptor associated with each data segment
in said cache store and including age information defining,
from the most recently accessed to the least recently accessed,
the relative lengths of time since each associated data segment
has been accessed, the system including means for transferring
to said mass memory the least recently accessed segments in
898
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
said cache store in order to make room for more data segments,
the improvement comprising:
means connected to said host processor, said mass memory
and said cache store for transferring from said mass mem-
ory to said cache store not only a data segment containing
data specified by said addressing signals but not resident in
said store, but also a number of additional segments; and,
age modifying means for modifying said age information in
said segment descriptors each time data segments are
transferred from said mass memory to said cache store to
produce modified age information, said modified age
information indicating that the data segment containing
the data specified by said addressing signals is the most
recently accessed data segment, and indicating that said
number of additional segments have an age intermediate
the most recently accessed and the least recently accessed.
4,437,156
PROGRAMMABLE CALCULATOR
Chris J. Christopher; Fred W. Wenninger, Donald E. Morris;
Wayne F. CoTington; Jerry B. Folsom; Joseph W. Beyers, all
of Loveland; John H. Nairn, and Jeffrey C. Osborne, both of
Longmont, all of Colo., assignors to Hewlett-Packard Com-
pany, Palo Alto, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 31,341, Apr. 19, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 835,371, Sep. 21, 1977,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 638,381, Dec. 8, 1975,
Pat. No. 4,075,679. This application Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No.
227,019
Int a.J G06F 9/06. 9/40. 3/023
VS. a. 364—200 4 Qaims
1. An electronic calculator comprising:
keyboard input means for entering one or more lines of one
or more alphanumeric statements each into the calculator;
memory means for storing alphanumeric information, in-
cluding one or more programs, each program comprising
a plurality of lines of one or more alphanumeric state-
ments entered from the keyboard input means;
processing means, coupled to said keyboard input means and
said memory means, for processing a said program of lines
of one or more alphanumeric statements stored in said
memory means;
output display means, coupled to said processing means, for
visually displaying alphanumeric information, including
the results of alphanumeric statements processing by said
processing means, to a user; and
magnetic tape reading and recording means for transferring
alphanumeric information between the memory means
and an external magnetic tape;
said keyboard input means including record memory control
means for initiating the recording of the contents of said
memory means onto said external magnetic tape and load
memory control means for initiating the loading of the
previously recorded contents of said memory means back
into said memory means;
said processing means including logic means responsive to
actuation of said record memory control means, during
processing of a program stored in said memory means, for
halting processing of that program and for causing the
contents of said memory means to be recorded onto said
external magnetic tape, said logic means thereafter being
responsive to actuation of said load memory control
means for causing the previously recorded contents of
said memory means then stored on the externa! magnetic
tape to be loaded into said memory means, said logic
means being operative, following loading into the mem-
ory means of the previously recorded contents of said
memory means, for causing said processing means to
commence processing of the program, processing of
which was halted in response to actuation of the recorded
memory control means, at the point in said program at
which processing was halted.
4,437,157
DYNAMIC SUBCHANNEL ALLOCATION
Jerome J. Witalka, Minneapolis; Duane G. Kurth, Anoka, and
Dairid J. Baber, Shoreview, all of Minn., assignors to Sperry
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 926,483, Jul. 20, 1978. This application
Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,585
Int. a.3 G06F 3/00. 3/04
U.S. a. 364—200 2 Claims
21 —
22
_jJO_
■A
100 I
37- 36-1 i
I li-"" IH Ih'" '"il
I I CMI I I CM2 I I CMS I I CIM I
riTTr
I
I
2»-
-^
_ _ I .'f I 1 H am. I I D-M hf»r
9
n— i*-
1. In a computer with means for initializing the operation of
said computer and with an Input/Output unit having a plural-
ity of Input/Output channels wherein one or more of said
Input/Output channels is each capable of maintaining a plural-
ity of independent asynchronous buffered Input/Output trans-
fers and having a controller capable of controlling said plural-
ity of asynchronous buffer Input/Output transfers through the
use of a plurality of Input/Output subchannels wherein each of
said plurality of independent asynchronous buffered Input-
/Output transfers is controlled through the use of a different
one of said plurality of Input/Output subchannels, the im-
proved apparatus for allocating each of said plurality of Input-
/Output subchannels to one of said plurality of Input/Output
channels and for conducting buffered Input/Output transfers
operative in accordance with Externally Specified Indexing
(ESI), an improvement to such apparatus according that each
of a plurality of Input/Output subchannels— each said Input-
MarcH 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
899
/Output subchannels being a designation of the hardware
resource, specifically the Buffer Control Words (BCWs) con-
tamed within I/O General Register (IGR). which designated
resource is dedicated to the control of communication upon an
Input/Output channel with a corresponding one of a plurality
of peripheral devices which share said Input/Output chan-
nel-are allocable, meaning assignable, to each of a plurality of
Input/Output channels-each said Input/Output channel
being a bandwidth limited physical communication path be-
tween said Input/Output apparatus and a multiplicity of pe-
ripheral devices,— said inprovement comprising
random access memory means, called a Channel Descriptor
Mack (CDS), for storing an allocation of each of said
plurality of Input/Output channels to a one of said plural-
ity on Input/Output subchannels, wherein said storing
means has a one addressable location corresponding to
each of said plurality of Input/Output subchannels
loading means, called a System Support Processor (SPS) for
entering said allocation of each of said plurality of Input-
/Output channels to said one of said plurality of Input-
/Output subchannels into said storing means and
control means responsively coupled to said storing means
for causing each of said buffered Input/Output transfers as
occur upon each of said plurality of Input/Output sub-
channels to physically transpire upon said allocated one of
said plurality of Input/Output channels;
whereby said hardware resource associated with each said
Input/Output subchannels, which resource is dedicated to
the control of communication upon an Input/Output
channel, is allocated, meaning distributed, in accordance
with said stored allocation to a one of said bandwidth
limited physical I/O channel communication paths-
whereby the designation of hardware resource within an
Input/Output apparatus operative in accordance with
Externally Specified Indexing is allocated, meaning dis-
tributed, to ones of bandwidth limited physical I/O chan-
nel communication paths in accordance with stores within
a random access memory means for storing.
4,437,158
SYSTEM BUS PROTOCOL INTERFACE QRCUIT
Peter H. Alfke, Los Altos Hills; Krishna Rallapali, San Jose,
both of Calif., and David MacMillan, Boston, Mass., assign-
ors to Advanced Micro Devices, Inc., Sunnyvale, Calif
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,453
Int. a.J G06F 3/02, 9/18
US. a. 364-200 5 Claims
+5V
lively comprised bus acknowledgement line output terminal
for relaying said received signal to subsequent peripheral units
only when it has not requested bus control or when it has
initiated an outstanding bus control request and also has fin-
ished accessing the bus in response to said received signal, an
interface circuit associated with each peripheral unit, respec-
tively for preventing a bus request confiict between said pe-
ripheral units, said associated interface circuit respectively
comprising:
logic means coupled to said bus acknowledgement line input
terminal as a respectively associated peripheral unit and to
said bus acknowledgement line output terminal of said
respectively associated peripheral unit for generating a
combinatorial logic output signal responsive to the signals
on said bus acknowledgement line input and output termi-
nals, and;
latching means coupled in series between said bus request
line and said bus request line terminal of said respectively
associated peripheral unit, and further connected to the
output of said logic means and said bus acknowledgement
line output terminal of said respectively associated periph-
eral unit, for latching itself into a first state in response to
a bus request from said respectively associated peripheral
unit and for unlatching itself from said first state when the
associated peripheral unit has received said but acknowl-
edgement signal if said associated peripheral unit has not
initiated any outstanding bus control request, and when
the associated peripheral unit has received said bus ac-
knowledgement signal and also has finished accessing said
bus in response to said received bus acknowledgement
signal if said associated peripheral unit has initiated said
outstanding bus control request.
(1) the latching into said first state by anyone of said
latching means causes all other latching means to be
also latched into said first state.
(2) a bus request signal is maintained over said bus request
line as long as any of said latching means is latched in
said first state.
(3) said central control unit discontinues said acknowl-
edgement signal over the bus acknowledgement line
only when all of said latching means have been respec-
tively unlatched, and
(4) in response to said acknowledgement signal from the
central control unit, all latching means latched in said
first state are sequentially unlatched in corresponding
order of the respective time of receipts of said acknowl-
edgement signal by their respectively associated penph-
eral units.
4,437,159
COOKING COMPUTER
Gerald F. Waugh, Shreveport, La., assignor to The Frymattcr
Corporation, Shreveport, La.
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,173
Int. a.J G06F 15/46: H05B 1/02
U.S. a. 364-400 ,7 cMm
1. In a computer system having a central control unit and a
plurality of peripheral units all being coupled to a common bus.
each of said peripheral units being further coupled in parallel
to said central control unit by a bus request line through a
respectively comprised bus request line terminal for requesting
the central control unit for control of said bus and each of said
peripheral units being further coupled in series to said central
control unit by a bus acknowledgement line to said central
control unit through a respectively comprised bus acknowl-
edgement line input terminal for receiving from said central
control unit a bus acknowledgement signal granting access to
said bus in response to a bus request, and through a respec-
11. A deep fat fryer comprising a frypot having heating
means located therein for heating shortening to a preselected
cooking temperature, means independent of said heating means
for sensing a temperature of said shortening in said frypot.
means for storing a cooking time, a means for timing a cooking
900
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
cycle of a product within said shortening using said cooking
time and periodically adjusting said coolcing time by applying
a time compensation factor to compensate for deviations of
said sensed temperature from said preselected temperature, the
magnitude of said periodic adjustments being proportional to
said time compensation factor and said deviation, means for
storing a signal determinative of the magnitude of said time
compensation factor for a given temperature condition, and
means for providing a termination signal indicative of the
termination of a cooking cycle.
4,437,160
PHOTON EMISSION IMAGING APPARATUS AND
METHOD
Alvin S. Blum, 2350 Del Mar PI., Fort Lauderdale, Fla. 33301
Filed Jul. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 173,962
Int. a.3 GOIT 1/20
MS. O. 364—414 14 Qaims
15
16-f ^
10'
-9
A7
»MT
HI
-p^
X
N
6 -'^-I SIGNAL POOCESSOU
3—1 0«TA PHOCCaSOB
STORE
3
orSPlAY
\
1. A system for imaging a distributed source emitting pho-
tons with scintillation means in the path of said photons to
provide light indications and a plurality of photodetector
means viewing said light indications in said scintillation means
comprising: signal processing means connected to said photo-
detector means for processing photodetector signal responses
to said light indications; data processing means; data storage
means; connecting means interconnecting said signal process-
ing means with said data processing means and said storage
means; said storage means is for storing known source location
data and a plurality of response data generated from said pho-
todetector means when said scintillation means was engaged
by emissions from sources in known locations; said data pro-
cessing means including means for comparing response data
from a source in an unknown location with said stored re-
sponse data from sources in known locations to determine
degree of matching and thereby the location of the unknown
source from the stored known source location data of the
matching stored response data when and if an acceptable cor-
relation is found; calibration means for providing to said stor-
age means said plurality of response data from sources in
known locations including, (a) calibration radiation source
means so disposed as to irradiate said scintillation means at a
plurality of locations simultaneously, (b) a first approximate
locating means for recording a first approximate location of
each calibration response data on the basis of the relative
position of each photodetector means and the signal thereon,
(c) center locating means for analyzing a plurality of first
approximate locations from a plurality of calibration radiations
to determine the locations of a plurality of centers of concen-
trations of said first approximate locations when calibration
scintillations are not uniformly distributed in said scintillation
means, (d) a second approximate locating means for recording
a second approximate location of each calibration response
data to correspond to the location of that center which is in
closest proximity to said first approximate location, and selec-
tion means for optionally discarding certain of the response
data on the basis of their differences from other response data
sharing a common location.
4,437,161
MEDICAL IMAGING APPARATUS
WUIiam Anderson, Glenview, III., assignor to Siemens Ganmui-
sonics Inc., Des Plaines, III.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,481
Int. a.3 G06F 15/42; H04N 5/14
U.S. a. 364—414 14 aalms
r
s«m wectuiic cucmrii »
"nrtwtirti
1® [m
I teL
r OMMia - counn
P;
■ - COmUTM - CMTEI ■--,
It! If!
IIKE
•[■Ml
I ^z=-
1. In a medical imaging apparatus containing
means for detecting radiation emitted from an object under
examination,
means associated with said detecting means for forming an
imaging signal from said radiation, said imaging signal
being composed of a sequence of individual image signals
each representing an individual radiation image of said
object under examination and said imaging signal contain-
ing a first individual image signal and second individual
image signals following said first individual image signal;
signal processing means for processing said imaging signal
and for forming a display signal thereof, and
display means for receiving said display signal and for dis-
playing a sequence of images of said object under exami-
nation,
the improvement wherein said signal processing means com-
prises
storage means for storing said first individual image signal,
thereby forming a reference image signal;
subtracting means for subtracting said reference image signal
from each of said second individual image signals, thereby
forming a difference imaging signal composed of a se-
quence of individual difference image signals; and
monitoring means receiving said difference image signal for
determining whether a portion of each of said second
individual image signals is different from said reference
image signal, said monitoring means issuing a change-of-
image signal indicative of a change of image intensity
distribution.
4,437,162
RESIDUAL LIQUID METER USING COMPUTER
RESPONSIVE TO MEASUREMENTS OF LIQUID LEVEL
AND FLOW
Yoshiaki Kato, Fujisawa, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor Com-
pany, Limited, Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,884
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 14, 1980, 55-
49339[U]
Int. C\? GOIM 13/26
MS. a. 364—442 13 Claims
1. A residual-fuel meter for an automotive vehicle, which
comprises:
(a) initial fuel setting means for presetting the initial quantity of
fuel within the fuel tank;
(b) consumed-fuel measuring means for measuring the fuel
consumed from the fuel tank;
(c) a microcomptuer for storing the quantity of initial fuel
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
901
preset by said initial fuel setting means and the quantity of
consumed fuel measured by said consumed fuel measuring
means and for calculating the quantity of residual fuel by
subtracting the consumed fuel quantity from the initial fuel
quantity; and
(d) a residual fuel indicator for displaying the residual fuel
quantity calculated by said microcomputer;
said consumed-fuel measuring means for measuring the fuel
consumed including a ball oscillation fiow meter compris-
ing:
(a) a cylinder bore;
e' \ I
INITIAL fUlL ^
WTTjNOMEANS
T
■^is
CONTKOLLCR
T"
HicRocatruTtii
(b) a ball movably disposed within said cylinder bore, the
specific gravity of said ball being almost the same as that of
the fuel, said ball being moved in the same direction as that
of fuel flow;
(c) a pair of position sensors including light-emitting elements
and light-receiving elements for respectively deriving sig-
nals whenever said ball blocks the light emitted from said
light emitting elements at either end of said bore;
(d) a two-way valve for reversing the direction of fuel flow in
response to the signals derived by said position sensors; and
(e) a counter for counting the number of the signals from said
position sensors to measure the quantity of How.
4,437,163
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SYMPTOM
DIAGNOSIS BY MONITORING VIBRATION OF SHAFT
OF ROTARY MACHINE
Nobuo Kurihara, Hitachiota; Yasuo Morooka; MiUuyo Ni-
sUkawa, both of Hitachi; Kiyoshi Miura, Ibaraki, and Yo-
shitoshi Nagahashi, Hitachi, all of Japan, assignors to Hiu-
chi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,846
Gaims priority, applicaUon Japan, Mar. 31, 1980, 55-40322
Int. a.3 GOIP 15/00
U.S. a. 364—508 21 Claims
low level permitting continuous operation of the rotary
machine;
monitoring the behaviour of said detected shaft vibration
signal within said safety region; and
determining the presence of a symptom of unusual operation
of the rotary machine on the basis of the result of monitor-
ing of the behaviour of said detected shaft vibration signal
within said safety region.
4,437,164
RIDGE CIRCUIT COMPENSATION FOR
ENVIRONMENTAL EFFECTS
Howard R. Branch, III, Northfleld, Conn., assignor to Bristol
Babcock Inc., Waterbury, Conn.
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,938
Int. a.5 G06F 15/20
U.S. a. 364-571 85 Oaims
1. A strain gauge transducer circuit comprising:
first and second strain gauges;
at least one resistor, said resistor and said strain gauges being
connected in series between the terminals of a power
supply;
means for reading the voltage drops across each resistor and
strain gauge; and
a computer to which are applied signals representative of the
voltage drops across each resistor and strain gauge, said
computer further comprising a processing unit and a mem-
ory unit, said memory unit containing a set of bridge
completion constants which in conjunction with the sig-
nals representative of said voltage drops is used by the
processing unit to calculate the output of a bridge circuit
that contains said strain gauges and is compensated for
zero point and span error at two temperatures.
1. A method of symptom diagnosis by continuously detect-
ing vibration of the shaft of a rotary machine and monitoring a
signal indicative of the detected shaft vibration for the diagno-
sis of the operating condition of the rotary machine, said
method comprising:
establishing a predetermined safety region in which said
detected shaft vibration signal is indicative of a relatively
4,437,165
OVERFLOW DETECTION FOR A DEHMAL
ARITHMETIC UNIT
Osamu Onodera, Hadano, Japan, auignor to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,167
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 11, 1980, 55-93950
Int. a.) G06F 7/48
U.S. a. 364-749 5 Claims
1. A data processing apparatus in which a decimal operation
is effected by means of a decimal arithmetic unit having an
operation width corresponding to a plurality of bytes, compris-
ing:
(a) a first register for holding information on the length of an
operand which is subjected to an arithmetic operation in
said decimal arithmetic unit;
(b) a second register for holding a byte position which con-
stitutes the least significant byte position for the arithmetic
operation:
(c) control signal generating means coupled to said first and
KMO O.G.— .V^
902
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
second registers for producing a control signal in accor-
dance with contents of said first and second registers; and
(d) overflow detecting means coupled to said decimal arith-
metic unit and said control signal generating means for
4,437,167
MULTIPLE HALF.LINE SPAONG ON A MINIATURE
PAGE
Kent R. Demke, Austin, and Jerold D. Dwlre, Round Rock, both
of Tex., assignors to Internationa] Business Machines Coroo-
ration, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,160
Int a.J G06F i/14
U.S. a. 364-900 5 q.,^
detecting presence of absence of an overflow by checking
a value of a particular byte of the output of said decimal
arithmetic unit which byte is designated by said control
signal.
4,437,166
HIGH SPEED BYTE SHIFTER FOR A BI-DIRECTIONAL
DATA BUS
Steven M. O'Brien, Norristown, Pa., assignor to Sperry Corpo-
ration. New York, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,768
Int. Q\? G06F 7/00. 3/04
U.S. a 364-900 10 Claims
1. In a processor driven word processing system including
mterface logic connecting a display, a display memory and a
main memory, the improvement in said interface logic com-
prising:
means for providing for display on the display a video out-
put data stream representative of an entire page of printed
text to be produced by the system, said dau stream com-
prising identical miniature character symbol constructe,
said identical miniature character symbol constructs com-
prising a matrix having upper and lower halves said upper
half being blank and said lower half being blank or not
blank as a function of the value of a bit stored in the
display memory indicative of the presence or absence of a
character in said main memory; and
means responsive to a predetermined attribute bit in said
display memory for displaying said miniature character
symbol constructs with their upper and lower halves
reversed for representing a half-line space between se-
quential lines of printed text or not.
8. A method of shifting a plurality of bytes of data on a
bi-directional data bus of the type having a plurality of byte
lines and input and output registers employing byte shifters of
the type having a single buffer register for each byte compris-
ing the step* of:
connecting each byte line of the daU bus to a byte shifter of
the type having an input port for each byte line,
enabling one of said input poru of each byte shifter.
storing the data byte being presented at the enabled input
ports in the buffer register of each of the byte shifters, and
transferring the daU bytes in the buffer registers of each of
the byte shifters to a byte line of the dau bus which is
4,437,168
COMMUNICATION CONTROL UNIT
Masahide Yanaahita; Hikani Oku, and Masato Maniyama, aU
of Yokomka, Japan, assignors to Nippon Telegraph * Tele-
phone Public Corp. of 1-6, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 228,802
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 4, 1980, S5-12171
Int a.} G06F 3/00
UA a. 364-900 MClalBS
INPUT
OOTPUT
4Ed~.
j-«r ./• L L .: — "" !• A communication control unit connected to a host com-
different from the byte Ime connected to the enabled input puter and a plurality of terminals or bet3two hSst^^-
' «* though communication lines including related lines having
March 13. 1984
ELECTRICAL
903
interfaces and basic processors for communication control
procedures and situations comprising:
(a) a status memory having a plurality of fields for each line,
the fields including at least an instantaneous status of the
communication lines, information of whether a transmis-
•ion data link or a reception data link has been established
between the host computer and the terminals or between
two host computers, a count data of the repetition times of
each basic process of the communication control proce-
dures, a predetermined upper limit value of repetition
times of each basic process, a transient count data of timer
pulse count fields for a timer circuit's checking of prede-
termined upper limit values for time over check, and
predetermined upper limit values for time over check;
(b) a timer circuit for updating the content of the timer piilse
count fields in the status memory in every predetermined
time period value, and providing trigger data when the
content of any one of the timer pulse count fields reaches
its own assoicated predetermined upper limit value for
time over check in the status memory;
(c) a trigger data registration circuit for storing a set of
information, including trigger data comprising a trigger
code and a line number, the trigger daU being provided
from the host computer, the lines or the timer circuit
according to the kind of trigger data;
(d) a status transfer logic for providing a predetermined
operation code responding to the combination of the
present status code in the sutus memory relating to the
line indicated by the line number in the trigger data and
the trigger code in the trigger daU provided by the trigger
data registration circuit;
(e) a memory having a fixed table for decoding the output of
the status transfer logic and providing an operation code
for each field relating to the sutus memory; and
(0 a plurality of buic processors operating each basic pro-
cess of the communication control procedure according
to the related field of the operation code provided from
the memory having a fixed table and the output of the
status memory and providing the outputs which are ap-
plied to the sutus memory, the host computer, and the
related line interface, and said plurality of basic processors
operating simulUneously with one another.
4,437.169
STAGE LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM
Difld R. Bertcnshaw, Chertsey; Edwin P. Lockwood, Brentford,
and Anthony R. Brown, London, all of England, assignors to
The Rank Organisation Limited, London, England
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,678
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 1, 1980.
8014562
Int. a.» G06F 3/05: H08B 37/02
U A a. 364-900 7 claims
1. A sUge lighting control system comprising
a main processor unit including a memory for storing infor-
mation relating to the dimmer levels necessary to produce
various lighting effectt.
a poruble controller having
a multiplicity of dimmer level control elements adjusuble
to define said information to be stored,
electrical contacu associated with each said control ele-
ment and whose sute is changed by adjustment of said
control elements, said contacu being connected in a
scanning circuit,
a local processor connected to the scanning circuit and
having a memory programmed to cause the local pro-
cessor cyclically to scan the control element contacu
and detect changes of sute therein,
an address memory for storing address dau relating to the
memory in the main processor imit.
means for selecting address dau from the address mem-
ory,
means for generating changed sute dau corresponding to
the changed sute of the contacu,
a multiplexer connected to said addreu selecting means
and said changed sute dau generating means for pro-
ducing a coded signal conuining the selected addreu
data and changed sute dau,
a display unit, and
mode selection means for selecting the writing of daU
from the poruble controller to the memory of the main
processor unit and the playback of information from the
main processor unit to the display unit, and
a low capacity cable link connecting the main processor unit
with the poruble controller for the transmiuion of the
coded signal and display information therebetween.
4,437,170
METHOD AND ORCUIT ARRANGEMENT FOR THE
ACCEPTANCE AND TEMPORARY STORAGE OF DATA
SIGNALS IN A SWITCHING SYSTEM
Gerhard Moachitz, Wolftauhausan, and Richard SchoonboTen,
Munich, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens
Aktiengesellschafl, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,616
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 24,
1980,3036034
Int CLi G06F 3/04
VJS. a 364-900 10 Claims
.1— s
L63
JL
rcc
m
cc
CPU
HM
1. A method for the acceptance and temporary storage of
daU signals supplied via line sections in a daU switching sys-
tem before processing or relaying of said dau signals to other
line sections, employing a dau communication control to
which the line sections are connected, said daU communica-
tion control having a connection memory for storing stariing
addresses of memory areas, and a memory arrangement which
allows memory areu to be made available to the line sections
for dau signal storage, comprising the steps of
supplying an address to the connection memory, which
address is the starting addreu of the memory area which
904
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
B available for the acceptance and temporary storage of
data signals supplied by a line section requesting data
signal storage; and
in response to the activation of a first memory area, supply-
ing to the data communication control the starting address
of the next available memory area allocated for the accep-
tance and storage of dau signals supplied by the next
requesting line section.
4,437,171
ECL COMPATIBLE CMOS MEMORY
Edwin L. Hudson, Santa Qart, and Stephen L. Smith, Sunny,
vale, both of Calif., assignors to Intel Corporation. Santa
aara, Calif.
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,617
Int. a.3 GllC 11/40
U.S. a 365-177 WQaims
CM» Man^*'
A/^r
^Ctonr
- -iv
itcCoii
dteC-siV)
1. In a metal-oxide-semiconductor (MOS) circuit, a buffer
for receiving a signal from an emitter-coupled-logic (ECL)
circuit and for converting said ECL signal to an MOS compati-
ble signal, comprising:
a comparator means for receiving said ECL signal and for
comparing it with a predetermined reference potential;
level shifting means, coupled to said comparator means, for
shifting the signal level resulting from said comparison;
amplification means for amplifying the signal shifted by said
level shifter, said amplification means coupled to said level
shifter; and,
reference potential means integral with said MOS circuit for
generating said predetermined reference potential,
whereby said ECL signal is converted to an MOS compati-
ble signal.
4,437,172
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY DEVICE
Figio Masuoka, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Nov, 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,320
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 8, 1980, 55/172915-
Dw. 8 1980, 55/172916; Dec. 8, 1980, 55/172917; Dec. 20,
1980, 55/180953; Jul. 30, 1981, 56/119780; Jul. 30, 1981,
Int. Q\? GllC 11/40
U.S. a. 365-182 25 Qaims
•^ 56 56
1. A semiconductor memory device comprising:
a memory cell which has
a semiconductor region of first conductivity type having an
impurity region of second conductivity type,
a first conductive layer formed on said semiconductor re-
gion with a first insulating film interposed therebetween,
a second conductive layer which is formed on said semicon^
ductor region with a second insulating film interposed
therebetween and which has a function of storing dau.
and
a third conductive layer which is formed on said second
conductive layer with a third insulating film interposed
therebetween and which is electrically insulated from said
first and second conductive layers; and
means for discharging an electron from said second conduc-
tive layer by field emission which includes
first means for applying a voltage of high level for erasing
data to said first conductive layer to erase the dau, and
second means for applying a voltage of low level to said
third conductive layer to erase the dau.
4,437,173
CORE MEMORY CONTROLLED BY AUXILIARY CORE
Jules E. Canel, Granada Hills, and Thomas J. Gilligan, Rolling
HilU Estates, both of Calif., assignors to Ampex Corporation.
Redwood City, Calif.
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 284,133
Int. a. J GllC 7/02
U.S. a 365-193 18 Claims
1. A core memory comprising:
a data storage suck including an array of daU storage cores
and a timing core coupled to receive subsuntially the
same magnitude of drive current as a selected dau storage
core;
a timing core sensing circuit coupled to sense the switching
signal output of the timing core and generate a feedback
switching signal corresponding thereto as the timing core
is switched by the drive current;
current drive circuitry coupled to drive a selected daU
storage core and the timing core with currents of suffi-
cient magnitude to switch the cores from one sute of
magnetization to another in response to current command
signals; and
a timing and control circuit responsive to address and daU
commands and to the feedback switching signal for gener-
ating the current command signals required to switch
selected dau storage cores.
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
905
4,437,174
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY DEVICE
Fi^io Muuoka, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Nov. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 320,937
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 19, 1981, 56/6172;
Jan. 19, 1981, 56/6173
Int. a.3 GllC 11/40
U.S. a. 365—218 6 Claims
steps of: supplying acoustic energy to said body of water;
sensing at a predetermined depth the pressure wave reflected
from said substrau beneath said body of water and the second-
ary pressure wave caused by a secondary reflection of said
pressure wave from the air-water interface and generating a
first signal indicative thereof; sensing at said predetermined
depth the panicle velocity of the water accompanying said
pressure wave reflected from said substrau and said secondary
pressure wave and generating a second signal indicative
thereof; filtering said second signal such that portions of said
second signal that have a frequency that is less than a first
n
1
HYOtWHONC
/
\ ^ mFuRn€n
'^J "DATA mOCfSS
f ING AND
KCOmiNO
1
1
V
r
.«
r
ACCtLemnTSH
— .
MTtvumm
«LTW
1
1
~»
i_
1. A semiconductor memory device comprising:
a memory matrix having a plurality of memory cells ar-
ranged in a matrix form, each of said plurality of memory
cells including
a semiconductor region of first conductivity type,
a source region and a drain region of second conductivity
type,
an erase gate formed on said semiconductor region with a
first insulating film interposed between said erase gate and
said semiconductor region,
a floating gate which is formed on said semiconductor re-
gion with a second insulating film being interposed be-
tween said floating gate and said semiconductor region,
said floating gate being capable of storing data and over-
lapping said erase gate, and with a third insulating film
being interposed between said floating gate and said erase
gate, and
a control gate which is formed on said floating gate with a
fourth insulating film being interposed between said con-
trol gate and said floating gate and said control gate being
insulated from said erase gate and said floating gate;
a row line commonly connected to said control gates of said
memory cells of each row of said memory matrix;
a column line commonly connected to said sources or drains
of said memory cells of each column of said memory
matrix;
an erase line commonly connected to said erase gates of said
memory cells of each column of said memory matrix;
first applying means for applying an erase voluge having a
high level to said erase gate of said memory cell to erase
data from said floating gate thereof, said memory cell
being connected to said row line, said column line and said
erase line which are selected;
second applying means for applying a volUge of a predeter-
mined level to said selected column line to detect a daU
erasure condition of said memory cells which is selected;
means for inhibiting supply of said erase volUge when a
current flowing through said column line is detected; and
third applying means for applying a volUge of low level to
said selected row line when daU is erased and when daU
erasure is detected.
4,437,175
MARINE SEISMIC SYSTEM
Albert J. Bcmi, Houston, Tex., atiigBor to Shell Oil Company,
Howton, Tax.
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,631
Int a.3 GOIV 1/36, 1/38
U.S. CL 367—24 10 Claims
1. A method of producing a seismic signal indicative of the
substrau beneath a body of water, said method comprising the
1 '
frequency are attenuated by said filtering to generate a third
signal, said first frequency being less than a second frequency
defined by the equation
/=C/2D
where
f: said second frequency,
C: wave propagation velocity for said body of water, and
D: said predetermined depth; and
combining said first and third signals to produce a signal indic-
ative of said substrata beneath said body of water.
4,437,176
METHOD OF OPTIMIZING SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO
IN SEISMIC EXPLORATION
Harry Mack, Irving, Tex., assignor to Mobil Oil Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,549
Int. a.i GOIV 1/36
U.S. a. 367—38 3 Gains
1. A method for exploring subterranean structures of the
earih having at least one reflection interface which has a
broadband acoustic wave reflection attenuation characteristic
which varies cyclically with the angle of acoustic wave inci-
dence, comprising the steps of:
(a) transmitting acoustic waves into the earth from a plural-
ity of sources located along the surface of the earih;
(b) detecting reflected acoustic waves from said reflection
interface at a plurality of receivers offset from said plural-
ity of sources along the surface of the earth;
906
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
(c) gathering said reflected acoustic waves into groups of
selected ofTset intervals;
(d) determining from said gathered acoustic waves at what
incidence angles, with respect to said subterranean inter-
face having said cyclical attenuation characteristic, said
acoustic energy is reflected with minimum attenuation;
(e) selecting a portion of said gathered acoustic waves which
have offsets from acoustic wave sources to acoustic wave
receivers such that the angle of incidence and reflection of
the acoustic waves from said interface arc substantially
equal to the incidence angles at which attenuation of
reflection acoustic waves at said interface is minimized;
(0 processing said selection portion of said gathered acoustic
waves using common depth point stacking to produce
signals having an improved signal-to-noise ratio; and
(g) producing seismograms from said signals.
4,437,177
SMALL-SIZED VIDEO OR AUDIO PICKUP DEVICE
HAVING A BEAM DEFLECTOR DISPOSED WITHIN A
FOCUSING DEVICE SUPPORT
Akinori Watabe, Yokohama; Susumu Yonezawa, Yokosuka, and
Yoshihani Tanaka, Omiya, aJI of Japan, assignors to Nippon
Telegraph A Telephone Public Corporation, Tokyo and Man-
sci Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Saitama, both of, Japan
Filed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,382
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 12, 1979, 54-145462;
Nov. 12, 1979, 54-155838[U]
Int. a.) GllB im
U.S. a. 369-45 26 Claims
1. A pickup device for use in an apparatus for reading video
and/or audio information recorded in an optically readable
structure on an information carrier, comprising:
a resiliently supported frame having a cylindrical hollow
support,
a beam generating means for generating a light beam,
a focussing lens disposed in an upper portion of the cylindri-
cal hollow support to focus the light beam generated by
the beam generating means into a beam spot on the surface
of the information carrier,
a first electro-magnetic controlling means arranged under
the cylindrical hollow suppori for moving the cylindrical
support upwardly and downwardly to control the size of
the beam spot formed on the surface of the information
carrier through the focussing lens,
a beam deflecting mirror fixedly mounted on said frame
within said cylindrical hollow support independently of
said cylindrical hollow support in vertical alignment with
the focussing lens between the latter and the first electro-
magnetic controlling means to deflect the light beam from
the beam generating means toward the focussing lens,
a second electro-magnetic controlling means for laterally
displacing the frame to control the place of the beam spot
on the surface of the information carrier, and
a photo-sensitive detector for converting the returning light
beam aAer reflection at the surface of the information
carrier into electrical signals.
4,437,178
RECORD PLAYER
Seiao Miyoshi, Neyagawa, and Bunitou Yamaguchi, Yawirta,
both of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Sep. 21, 1981. Ser. No. 304,339
Int. a.' GllB n/04. 25/04
U.S. a. 369-75.1 ,5 a^„.
1. A record player comprising:
a main body;
a turntable rotatably mounted on said main body for sup-
porting a record to be played;
a changer spindle extending upwardly from a central portion
of said turnUble for supporting a stack of records to be
lowered one-by-one to said turntable;
a dust cover pivotally mounted to said main body for selec-
tive movement between a closed position and an open
position; and
means for, when said dust cover is in said closed position
thereof, maintaining records supported by said changer
spindle in a horizonUl alignment, said means comprising
an opening formed in a central poriion of said dust cover,
a record presser member movably mounted in said open-
ing and biased for movement with respect to said dust
cover in a direction to press against the upper surface of an
uppermost record supported by said changer spindle
when said dust cover is in said closed position thereof, and
means for enabling vertical movement and for preventing
horizontal movement of said presser member with respect
to said dust cover, said enabling and preventing means
comprising recesses formed in one of said dust cover, said
presser member or a member adjacent said dust cover and
projections extending from another of said presser mem-
ber, said dust cover or said member adjacent said dust
cover, said projections fitting into said recesses, thereby
guiding vertical movement of said presser member with
respect to said dust cover and restraining relative horizon-
tal movement therebetween.
4,437,179
PHONO PICKUP CARTRIDGE
Kazuo Nishlkawa; Kiyoshi Sato; Hiroyuki Ichioo, and Keniti
Okura, all of Saitama, Japan, aaaignors to Pioneer Electronic
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 4, 1981. Ser. No. 270,462
Claims priority, application Japui, Jun. 9, 1980, 55-76694;
Jun. 9, 1960, 55-76695
Int. a.3 GllB 3/02. 3/44
MS. a. 369-172 7 cWms
1. A phono pickup cartridge comprising: a stylus unit having
moving coils, a cantilever coupled to said moving coils, at least,
three positioning surface members, and a substantially planar
tab member substantially perpendicular to said positioning
surface members, a first of said positioning surface members
being forward of said moving coils and a second and a third of
said positioning surface members being behind said moving
coils, said first positioning surface being perpendicular to said
cantilever, and said second and third positioning surfaces being
parallel to said cantilever; and a cartridge body having at least
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
907
three lateral exterior positioning surfaces and a substantially
planar upper surface perpendicular to said lateral surface, said
three positioning surface members being in resilient contact
with corresponding ones of said positioning surfaces of said
cartridge body when said stylus unit is mounted on said car-
ing said pickup arm in a first direction upon receipt of an
output from said pickup arm horizontal controlling means
and in the opposite direction upon receipt of an output
from said pickup arm reversing controlling means,
wherein said preset length of time corresponds to the
amount of time necessary to drive the pickup arm in the
opposite direction to compensate for the pickup arm over-
running said non-recorded portion on the disk af\er the
cessation of the lead-in command signal.
tridge body, a mounting position of said stylus unit on said
cartridge body being entirely determined by positions of en-
gagement of said positioning surface members with said corre-
sponding ones of said positioning surfaces and said tab member
with said upper surface.
4 437 180
APPARATUS FOR COIVTROLLING PICKUP ARM IN
RECORD OR VIDEO DISK PLAYER
Atsushi Takeuchi, Hanuunatsu, Japan, assignor to Nippon
Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha, Hamamattu, Japan
Filed Dec. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328.517
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 24. 1980, 55-182140
Int. a? GllB 17/06. 17/00
MS. a. 369—217 23 Claims
1. A pickup arm controlling apparatus for an audio record or
a video disk player, comprising:
lead-in position detecting means for detecting a non-
recorded portion of a disk onto which a stylus is to de-
scend during a movement of a pickup arm toward the
center of said disk;
reproduction-stari operating means for providing an operat-
ing signal;
pickup arm horizonUl controlling means for outputting a
lead-in command signal in response to the receipt of an
operating signal from the reproduction-stari operating
means, said lead-in command signal being ceased to be
outputted upon receipt of a detection signal from said
lead-in position detecting means;
pickup arm lifter controlling means for causing a pickup arm
lifter to descend from an uplifted position to a lowered
position upon receipt of said detection signal from said
lead-in position detecting means to thereby lower said
stylus onto said disk;
pickup arm reversing controlling means for outputting. for a
preset length of time after a cease of said lead-in command
signal delivered from said pickup arm horizontal control-
ling means, a pickup arm reversing command signal; and
pickup arm horizontal driving means for horizontally driv-
4.437,181
AUTOMATIC RECORD PLAYING APPARATUS HAVING
A TONE ARM POSITION DETECHNG DEVICE
Yukihiro Kishima, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Victor Com-
pany of Japan, Ltd., Japan
Filed Aug. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 182,407
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 27, 1979, 54-
117781M; Aug. 27, 1979, 54-117782[U]
Int. Q.} GllB 3/06
U.S. Q. 369-244 6 Claims
I. A record disc playing apparatus having a tone arm posi-
tion detecting device comprising:
(a) a code pari;
(b) a position detection part comprising a group of optical
reading elements dispcwed at spaced intervals with respect
to each other, one of the code pari and the position detec-
tion pari being mounted for movement through a plurality
of positions as a function of the position of the tone arm as
the tone arm moves between the periphery and the center
of the record disc, and scanning the other to detect the
position of the tone arm with respect to the apparatus;
(c) a plurality of rows of slou of various length length pro-
vided on the code part, said code pari being unevenly
divided in the direction of scanning to form short and long
division, the shori and long divisions conveying informa-
tion specifying an address, said address indicating the
position of the tone arm with a combination of existence
and non-existence of the slou of various length along each
row of said shori and long divisions, the shori divisions
being defined by offsetting ends of at least two of said
rows of slou of various length and disposed between said
ends at spaced positions with respect to each other in the
direction of the scanning, said shori divisions being lo-
cated on the code pari corresponding respectively to
particular positions of the tone arm, said rows of slou of
various length of the shori and long divisions being
aligned to said optical reading elemenU to be exposed
thereto as the tone arm moves; and
(d) an encoder producing binary address codes in response
to outpuu from said position detection part.
908
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
4,437,182
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERLEAVING
CONTROL SIGNALS
D«tW a. Lambert, New Fairfield, and Gary A. Profet, Water-
town, both of Conn., assignors to General DataComm Indus-
tries, Inc., Danbury, COnn.
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224^37
Int a.^ H04J i/l2
UA a 370-1 le.l 20 Qaims
storing at a transmitter a control signal for a channel to-
gether with an address for said channel,
generating at said transmitter a sequence of select signals
that are used to select for transmission either dau signals
or overhead signals, the select signals for the transmission
"W^
»f» r/SSs'
ts
SS2-
JlSo
KIM -(itini
/«o
— OiSvt
MO sKjUasau ,«
• CaMfX
1. In a time division multiplexer for multiplexing data and
control signals from a plurality of channels so as to produce a
single stream of signals on a transmission line, said stream
havmg a first set of time slots allocated to the transmission of
dau signals and a second set of time slots allocated to the
transmission of control signals, a method of transmitting the
control signals comprising the steps of:
monitoring the channels for a change in the control signals
associated with a channel,
when a control signal changes, transmitting the changed
control signal in at least one time slot in the second set of
time slots,
counting the number of changed control signals that are
transmitted,
after a specified number of changed control signals are trans-
mitted, transmitting at least one of the control signals
associated with one of said channels without regard to
whether there has been any change in the control signals
associated with said one of said channels,
repeating the steps of monitoring the channels, transmitting
the changed control signal and counting the number of
changed control signals that are transmitted, and
after a specified number of changed control signals are trans-
mitted, transmitting at least one of the control signals
associated with a different one of said channels without
regard to whether there has been any change in the con-
trol signals associated with said different one of said chan-
nels.
of control signals associated with individual data channels
(hereinafter CONTROL select signals) being distributed
throughout said sequence, and
responsive to each CONTROL select signal, transmitting
one bit of the stored control signal and its address.
4437 184
METHOD OF TESTING A DATA COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM
Robin M. S. Cork, Winchester, England, and Da?id B. Rose,
Raleigh, N.C., assignors to International Business Machines
Corp., Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,814
Int. a.3 G06F U/34
UA a. 371—19
3ClaijBS
4,437,183
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING
CONTROL SIGNALS
Gary A. Profet, Watertown, Conn., assignor to General Data-
Conun Industries, Inc., Danbury, Conn.
Fned Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,340
Int. C\? H04J i/l2
U.S. a. 370—110.1 10 Claims
1. In a bit-interleaved time division multiplexer for multi-
plexing data and control signals from a plurality of individual
dau channels so as to produce a single stream of signals on an
aggregate transmission line, said multiplexer including a frame
generator which generates select signals that are used to select
for transmission either daU from individual daU channels or
overhead signals including control signals, a method of trans-
mitting control signals associated with individual daU channels
comprising the steps of:
1. A method of testing the implemenution of any defined
portion of a daU communication system, said system having a
compuUtional model thereof constructed in a high level com-
puting language and said model having been compiled to pro-
duce an execuUble machine language program and said com-
munications system also including an element for logging trace
files of messages sent or received over said system, said method
comprising the steps of:
running an application program that requires the use of the
elements of said defined portion in said communications
system to be tested;
monitoring and logging messages sent and received by said
defined portion of said daU communications system dur-
ing the running of said application program, said logging
constructing trace files for logging in said element in said
system, each message having been constructed to have a
format determined by said defined portion of said commu-
nications system;
extracting relevant message related information from said
trace file and using said extracted message related infor-
mation as input daU for said execuUble machine language
program;
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
909
executmg said machine language program, the results of said
execution mdicating whether said messages were con-
structed correctly according to said communications
system requirements over said defined portion thereof
4,437,185
METHOD OF ERROR CORRECHON
Yoichiro Sako, and KenUro Odaka, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,262
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 20, 1980, 55-84425
Int. C\? G06F 11/ 10
U.S. a. 371-39 „ c,^„,
rWBn«7,
'f2n.7,
U^)(W.i;n.a
(Kei.j)[|j]
(^liy"""-'
Wi?n-«,
■Wi2M,
a-
■ ^Qaw-H
-Wcn-B.A
tTT^ — - Wifli.i-i?ui>>n»
<n~^ »Wlzn.4B(iWlB
Wot.j-7(4II.|),A
hCE>l — -Wl2n.5-I2(W.2),B
WttW-l2{ail.i),A
Wl»l'M?l«)>2).B
Wl»l'M2(IW'l).A
r— — I — -Q0i-i2(izD)
•WiaV2-/2(l«),A
■^ — -Wm>Z-l2(l7D>ij.B
Wi2n-J-/2(;M),A
■TPyl — »Wi?n.j-i2(i«.i),j
Wl2n.J-i2<»DJ.A
■ffTV— - Wl2nH-l2SIMJ, B
' W(Zn'7-(2(22B).A
<T>i — ► Wi/n-7-ttfaB.[),B
Wizn-Ni-mMBj.A
■fQ3*— ■ Wen.»-«(aixi), B
- ' -WOT'll-IZUSBhA
■WttMI-«U7M),B
^
1. A method of decoding transmitted digiul information
signals to correct errors occurring therein as a result of trans-
mission, wherein said information signals are received as
blocks of interleaved digiul data word signals and are applied
to a first decoder as first error-correcting blocks comprised of
a plurality of information word signals, a series of first check
word signals associated with said plurality of information word
signals, and a series of second check word signals associated
with said plurality of information word signals, said informa-
tion word signals, said first check word signals and said second
check word signals being interieaved, comprising the steps of:
decoding the received digiul data word signals in said first
decoder and correcting the decoded digiul information
word signals and said first check word signals by generat-
ing error syndromes using said second check word signals.
the corrected and decoded digital information word sig-
nals forming a block of interleaved word signals;
tagging a poinler code signal to each of said information
word signals of the block of interieaved word signals to
represent whether an uncorrected error remains in such
word signals;
delaying the tagged interleaved word signals of each such
block of tagged interleaved word signals in a deinterleav-
ing stage by respective different amounts so as to deinter-
leave such tagged interleaved word signals into a different
arranging order, thereby providing » second error-cor-
recting block;
decoding the digital information word signals of each such
second error-correcting block in a second decoder by
generating error syndromes using said first check word
signals, while, if at least one such word signal is deter-
mine to be erroneous, correcting at least one such erro-
neous word signal by said syndromes and said first check
word signals, then comparing, for each said second error-
correcting block in which at least one word signal is
determined to be erroneous, the number of erroneous
word signals as indicated by said pointer code signals with
a predetermined value and. if such number is less than said
value, clearing the pointer code signals associated with the
corrected erroneous word signals, but. if such number
exceeds such value, leaving such pointer code signals
uncleared; and
thereafter compensating any uncorrected erroneous word
signals as determined by said pointer code signals.
4,437,186
WASTE GAS APPARATUS FOR ELECTRIC FURNAC^
Kunihiro Inai, Takarazuka, J«pM, assignor to NIkko Industry
Co., Ltd., Hyogo, Jap«n
FiM Mar. 29, 1982. Ser. No. 362,989
Int. a.' F27D 7/00
U.S. CI. 373-9 4 cUd^
1. A waste gas recycling apparatus for an electric furnace
comprising:
a heat storage chamber;
a preheater bucket charged with scrap;
a first duct positioned between said electric furnace and said
heat storage chamber;
a second duct connected from said heat storage chamber to
said preheater bucket;
a recycling duct connected between said preheater bucket
and said first duct; and
an air inlet located at the juncture of said recycling duct and
said first duct and so arranged that hot waste gas from said
furnace and recycled gas from said preheater bucket are
mixed with air and fed through said first duct to said heat
storage chamber.
910
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1914
4,437,187
ELECTRIC FURNACE ARRANGEMENT
Enwt Riegler, Eniu, and Ernst Z^Jicek, Ottenshcim, both of
Austria, assignors to Voest-Alpine Aktiengesellscbaft, Unz,
Austria
Filed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423,223
Claims priority, application Austria, Oct. 9, 1981, 4348/81
Int. a.J F27D ///«
VS. a. 373-73 6 Gaims
assembly and said beam limiting device are fixed to said flanM.
independently of each other;
said flange is a bracket adjustable in position; and said
1. In an electric furnace arrangement, such as an electric arc
furnace, a plasma melting furnace and the like, and of the type
including a furnace cover, a furnace cover carrying structure,
and a lifting structure for raising and lowering said furnace
cover relative to said furnace, said lifting structure comprising
a stationary supporting post,
a lifting means arranged within said stationary supporting
post,
a lifting column engageable with and disengageable from
said furance cover carrying structure, said lifting column
being vertically displaceable by operation of said lifting
means, and
an upper bearing means and a lower bearing means for
guiding said lifting column on said stationary supporting
post, the improvement wherein
said lifting column is hollow and said stationary supporting
post is arranged within and peripherally surrounded by
said lifting column, whereby said lifting column and said
stationary supporting post are telescopingly displaceable
relative to each other by operation of said lifting means,
the improvement further comprising
a head plate closing said lifting column on an upper end
thereof, an upper end of said lifting means being articu-
lately connected with said head plate and a lower end of
said lifting means being articulately connected with one of
a base supporting said furance arrangement and a lower
end of said stationary support post.
4,437,188
X.RAY EMimNG ASSEMBLY COMPRISING A FLANGE
FOR ASSEMBLING A SHEATH ASSEMBLY AND A
BEAM LIMITING DEVICE
Marcel Le Sonn, Paria, France, aasignor to Thomaoii'^iSF.
Paris, France
FUed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,408
Claims priority, application France, May 8, 1981, 81 09229
Int. a.' G21K 1/Oa 1/02. 5/10
U.S. a. 378-205 14 ctaim,
1. In an X-ray emitting assembly, comprising a fiange for
assembling a sheath assembly and a beam limiting device,
operationally associated with one or more radiation detectors
situated in a radiology equipment stand, said flange is adapted
to cooperate with alignment means, so as to determine in a first
suge. the positioning of said flange with respect to the operat-
ing axis of one of the radiation detectors and. in a second stage,
to enable alignment along this axis of the operating axes of the
sheath assembly and of the beam limiting device; said sheath
bracket comprises a recess for receiving in a first phase a
leaded washer having a hole centrally therethrough and in
a second phase a centering means integral with said beam
limiting device.
4,437,189
SOUND SYSTEM FOR A MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
Richard L. Newman, Kline Rd., Pennellville, N.Y. 13132
Filed Jua. 2«, 1981. Ser. No. 277,997
Int. 0.1 H04R 1/02
UA a. 381-91 XI Claima
1. Apparatus for amplifying the sound of § musical imini'
ment that includes
a speaker that is arranged to be wired to the amplifier of a
musical instrument which contains a drive section ami an
output cone wherein one end of the cone forms the mouth
of the speaker,
a mounting bar attached to the mouth of the speaker lo that
the axis of the bar is aligned along one diameter of the
cone.
a microphone supported in the mounting bar with the body
of the microphone extending rearwardly Into the cone lo
that it U substantially enclosed (herein, and
connecting means for attaching the microphone to a public
address system.
March 13, 1984
ELECTRICAL
911
4,437,190
DEVICE FOR SWITCHING SIGNALS BY OPTICAL
MEANS AND AUTOMATIC SWITCHING UNITS
COMPRISING SAID DEVICE
RoBcnwaig, 17. Place d'Orion. Meudon-U-Foret, France
<i23<0), and Yves J. Robin-Champigneul, 4, Rue Georges
VMc, Paris, France (7S116)
K?r No. PCT/FR79/00102, § 371 Date Jul. 8, 1980. § 102(e)
One Jul. 8, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01028, PCT Peb.
iMe May IS, 1980
PCT Filed Nov. 8, 1979. Ser. No. 196.083
Int. a.} H04B 9/00
t;j.a45S-600 I6Ctaims
,^ ^
sc
ratal
aftBmot
wneumx
00
■mi
•^ndmtmi^M
1. A device for switching optically modulated signals con-
veyed by at least one link of N input links towards al least one
link of P output links, where N and P are integers greater than
one which may be the same or dinereni, comprising:
a transmit board including N optical sources each associated
with a designated input link for delivering an optical
signal reproducing the modulations of the signal delivered
by said input link,
a receive board including P optical receivers, each associ-
ated with a designated output link for supplying the out-
put link a signal reproducing the modulations of optical
flux incident thereon,
optical means for projecting the image of the transmit board
on each optical receiver,
each of said receivers comprising (a) an array of al least N
optical receptor cells having positions respectively conju-
gated with the positions of the optical sources of the
transmit board by means of the optical projection means
and (b) switching means for selectively transmitting to the
output link associated with said optical receiver signals
delivered by each of said receptor cells,
the transmit board including at least one supplemental refer-
ence optical source,
each optical receiver of the receive board being coupled to
a supplemental reference receptor cell exposed to optical
flux from said reference source,
the receive board including means for adjusting at least one
of (a) the position of each optical receiver and (b) the
position of the optical projection means in such a manner
that the reference cell coupled with the said optical re-
ceiver derives a signal of optimum level.
DESIGNS
MARCH 13, 1984
272.959
SWEATER OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
ElolM Walte, P.O. Box 72. Marshall, N.C. 28753. assignor to
Elolse Walte. Marshall. N.C.
Filed Nov. 26. 1980, Ser. No. 210,835
U.S. a. D2-44
272.962
BABY SHOE
Richard N. Clarvit. 10791 SW. 51st Dr., Miami, Fla. 33165
Division of Ser. No. 113.033, Jan. 17, 1980, Pat. No. Des.
267,441, which is a continuation*in-part of Ser. No. 99,602, Dec.
3, 1979, which it a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 810,584, Jun.
27, 1977. This application No*. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 322.048
U.S. CI. D2— 278
272 960
ATHLETIC HELMET OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Paul S. Vinson. 3170 Avant Rd., Macon, Ga. 31206
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 172,712
U.S. CI. D2—231
272,963
SHOE
Roberto Muller. 370 E. 76th St.. New York, N.Y. 10021, and
Antonio M. Sousa, 183 Highland St., Taunton, Mau. 02780
Filed Oct. 3. 1979. Ser. No. 81,522
U.S. a. D2-310
272,961
BABY SHOE
Richard N. Clarvlt, 10798 SW. 51st Dr., Miami, Ha. 33165
Division of Ser. No. 113,033, Jan. 17, 1980, Pat. No. 267,441, ^'^' ^' ^2— 310
which is a continuation'in-part of Ser. No. 99,602, Dec. 3, 1979,
which is a continuation>in-part of Ser. No. 810,584, Jun. 27,
1977. This application Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 322,046
U.S. a. D2— 278
272 964
HIGH CUT ATHLETIC SHOE
Roberto Muller Feigelstock, Scarsdale, N.Y., assignor to Pony
International, Inc., Secaucus, N.J.
Filed Jun. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 389,334
913
914
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
272,965 272 9^
272 969
ri»pvfi;!!?r Acr .. HOLDER FOR TOILETRV ITEMS
WiUi«» W. ward, aX. ll!:£ »f^r .. S«.d»™ a», *"^ ^"^ '"" ""• ^^ *"• ''°""«'» »«'• "'•
LJ.S. Ci. D3^76
272,967
DINING CHAIR
Arthur Umanoff, Ardsley, N.Y., assignor to Contemporary
Shells Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 207,989
VS. a. D6— 56
272,970
DISPENSER FOR SHEET MATERIAL
HideakI Hasegawa; Saburo Shibano, and Terutoshi Kancko, aU
of Tokyo, Japan, assignors to Riken Vinyl Kogyo KabushiU
Kaisha, Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 27235
U.S. a. D6— 96
March 13. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
915
272,971 272,973
FOOD CONTAINER COMBINED SIFTER AND CONTAINER OR THE LIKE
RH*r Tallon, Paris, Franct, aaalgnor to Cidtlctm, ParU, Frinet Pictar K. J. De Coster, Aalst, Belgium, assignor to Dart Indus-
Filed A^. 6, 1981. Ser. No. 251,130 tries Inc., Northbrook, III.
Claims priority, application Fruice, Oct. 9. 1910, 80 3139 Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,423
UAa.D7-16 U.S.aD7-47
r
imujiuir'
272,972
SIFTER OR THE LIKE
Pleler K. J. Dc Coster, Aalst, Belgium, auignor to Otrt IndM*
tries lac, Northbrook, 111.
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,421
t J. CI. D7-47
Mjl mem 13
272,974
HANDLE FOR COVERS OF COOKING UTENSILS
Thcophil Ryser, Beckenried, Switzerland, auignor to AMC
International Alfa Metalcraft Corporation AG, Rotkreuz,
Switicriand
Filed May 28, 1980, Ser. No. 154,159
VJS. a. D7-394
916
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
^^^^^ 272 077
COFFEE DISPENSER BAroirBiii
"^ LT' ''"^'•''' "'•' ■"'*"" ^" ^'"^ ^**^ •'r "2 ^' ^'''^'•■^ si,TRfp'*'of Kore., «.|^or to Top-
Filed Jan 29 1982. Scr Nn %U io^ ^"* * Company Ltd., Hong Kong, Hong Kong
VS. a. D7-3W ' ^ ^'' '^''' ^'*'^ ^ . , "'«» J"'- «. ««>. Ser. No. 280.774
aaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 23, 1981,
999047
U.S. a. D7— 350
272,978
BUFFET SERVER
Dan E. Gremponrez, West Bend, Wis., and David L. Painter,
Glenview, III., assignors to Dart Industries Inc., Northbrook,'
All*
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,566
U.S. a. D7— 357
272,976
BEVERAGE DISPENSER
Edward J. ULumiere, Woburn, Mass., assignor to Jet Spray
Corp., Norwood, Mass.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981. Ser. No. 334,874
U.S. a. D7— 311
^
March 13, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
917
^^'•^' 272,981
FOOD PROCESSOR SPRAY PAINT SHIELD
'"'Si ^ °~^ r" ^S'*'" ^•^y"^ KJ^. »»«' ^ Andrew C. J^tke, 6320 MMlen IM. SE., Salem, Oreg. 97301
Jap«, aMignor. to Matsuahita Electric Ind»trial Co., Ltd., FIM Feb. iClSS; Ser. No. 34M42
^^"^ •'■P" U.S. a. Dt-16
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,475
ClalHU priority, application Japan, Apr. 24, 1981, 56-17921
U.S. a. D7— 384
272,982
TORQUE WRENCH
Frank J. Rizzo, 16 Waveriy St, Ererett, Maas. 02149, and Bruce
M. Saitti, 11 Meadowbrook Rd., Do?er, Mass. 02030
Filed Mar. 13, 1981. Ser. No. 243,590
U.S. a. D8— 24
272,980
SICKLE GUARD STRAIGHTENING HAND TOOL
John M. Kapphahn, Rte. 1, Elbow Lake, Mian. 56511
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,025
U.S. a. D8— 14
272,983
TACKER
Howard W. Biddle, Histon, England, aaaignor to Ofrcx Gr««p
Limited, London, England
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 197,013
Qaiau priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 14, 1980.
U.S.a. D8— SI
918
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
*f2t994 272,987
Pr-i, IT «.^« ^ « n^^?^ ^J^^^^ CUTTER RAIL SUPPORT FITTING FOR A DOUBLE POST RAIL
FrMk E. Shaffer. 33 BmcH Dr, Newport Beach, Calif. 92660 FENCE UNIT OR THE LIKF
u J». U. D8— 52 U^^ Q^ D8— 354
272,985
SAW SHARPENING GUIDE
Cornells J. M. Beerens, 4(M2 Berkshire Rd., North Sunshine.
Victoria, Australia 3020
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,463
aalms priority, application Australia, Sep. 9, 1980, 81985
VS. a. D8— 71
272,988
COMBINED CONTAINER AND PUMP
Robert Podall, RIverwoods, and Henry Robertz, Chicago,
of III., assignors to Jovan, Inc., Chicago, III.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,444
U,S. a. D9— 300
272,986
COMBINED KEEPER AND COMBINATION LOCK WITH
RETRACTABLE CABLE UNIT
Joseph T. DeStefano, 12 Squawbrook Rd., North Haledon, N.J.
07508
Filed Sep. 25, 1978, Ser. No. 945,689
U.S. a. D8— 331
272,989
BOTTLE
Vittorio Moretti, Via Cavour 3, Erbusco (Brescia), Italy
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,758
Galms priority, application Italy, May 27, 1981, 6990/8irUl
U,S.a. D9~349 ' '
March 13, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
919
ili?° 272,993
r-.«i«- A c.^ ^ 11/ . .? U. . ^ PORTABLE CABINET DOOR ALARM
i^Tnifi^L •"'"'•' °'"°''"""°'*''^''*"""""*'*' ^''"« ^- ^*"' "»"« ^'^^ "»»« Koag, assignor to Mattel.
Inc., Toledo, Ohio i,^.^ Hawthorne, Calif.
■ 1 « o no_!l« ^"■* ^' ""• ^'' '^*" ^'•♦^ ™«> ^ M, 1981, Ser. No. 335.970
U.S. a. D9-355 u,s, q, dIO-106
272.994
272.991 PIERCED EARRING HNDING
COMBINED BOTTLE AND CAP Frank Seraplglia. 69 Russe St., Cranston, R.I. 02910
Donald V. R. Thompson, New York, N.V., assignor to Newburgh F'W Mar. 8, 1982. Ser. No. 356,191
Cosmetic Packaging Corporation, Newburgh, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,337
U.S. a. D9— 377
U.S. a. Dll— 86
0
272 992 272 995
ELECTRONIC INTRUSION ALARM TRANSMriTER FLAG
Ka W. Wong, Ngau Tau Kok, China, and Albert K. H. Am, L«roy C. Jones, P.O. Box 20142, Los Angeles, Calif. 90006
Wanchai, Hong Kong, assignors to Mattel, Inc., HawtlMrM, FUe4 Jul. 7, 1980, Str. No. 166,135
Calif. U.S. a. Dl 1—180
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,969
V£. a. DIO— 106
^
w
920
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
VEHICLE TRAILER *7i,j>99
Filed Apr 20 1981 Ser Nn 2^^ YM ^ . ''"**' ''■"• *' '•*^' ^'- ^0. 337,997
U.S. a. D12-102 ' • ^"'^^ , , ?!Sr '^,'1°'**^' application J.p«. Jul. 8, 1981, Sho-5«.30126
U>9. CI. D12^146
272,997
MOTORCYCLE SIDECAR
Duane L. Anderson, Grover City; Robert S. Qarke, Arroyo
Grande, and Uwis R. Morris, Grover City, all of Calif., as-
signors to First Champaign Corporation. Rantoul, 111.
Filed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 262J03
U.S. a. D12— 116
272 OM 273,000
VEHiSftidit „ VEHICLE TIRE
FIImI Ano ■y/i loai c »j -w.^ ,^« *"•" ^°^' *» *'»*» Ser. No. 318,196
,,cui™,HSs'.t;5.^jrA,2:F^:Sf^'..«.7«, «!5ss '^"^ ""^ "^ ^^ •• •-• ^i"
vs. CL D12-146 U^^ q_ D12-147
March 13, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
921
273,001
VEHICLE MOUNTED CAMPER UNIT
Alexander Fink, 80 Dogwood Rd., Boonton, N.J. 07005
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,463
U,S. a. D12— 156
273,003
VEHICLE WHEEL
Ulf K. SvanbMck, Lilla Edet, Sweden, assignor to Saab-Scania
Aktiebolag, Th)llhattan, Sweden
Filed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,029
Gaims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 26, 1981. 81'0779
U.S. a. D12— 211
273,004
WHEEL COVER
BJttrn E. A. Envall, VMnersborg, Sweden, assignor to Saab-
Scania Aktiebolag, Trollhattan, Sweden
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,803
aaimi priority, application Sweden, Jun. 30, 1981, 81-1494
U.S. CI. D12— 211
273,002
NOTE CLIPBOARD FOR AN AUTOMOBILE VISOR
Edward R. Schafer, 13023 Lockmoor Dr., Grand Blanc, Mich. ,„ «««
48439 '<9,w3
US a DljIIw/"'" "• ****• ^'' ^°' "*•*'* ''*•" McComas, West Babylon,\.Y., assignor to Fairchild
U.S.W. UK 191 Industries, Inc., Germantown, Md.
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,554
U.S. G. D12— 335
J
922
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
273,006
TWIN HEAT SINK FOR ELECTRONIC
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
Alfred F. McCarthy, Bclmoiuit, N.H.. Mdgnor to Aavid Engi-
Becriag, Inc, Laconia, NJi.
Filed Apr. 8, 19S1, Scr. No. 252^29
VS. a. D13— 23
273,008
SPEAKER
Hideaki bhizaki, Tokyo, Japan, aasignor to Pioneer ElectiMfe
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. U, 1981, Ser. No. 305,243
U-s'tTd '*"''*''' •PP"«««'o" J«PWi. Apr. 1, 1981, 56*137(»(U]
273,009
TACTILE ALERTING BRACELET
Robert B. Isaacs, Ottawa, Canada, assignor to Northern Tele*
com Limited, Montreal, Canada
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 347,231
tJ.S. a. Dl4->52
273,007
COMBINED PHONOGRAPH AND TAPE PLAYER OR
THE LIKE
Marianne Spottswood, 249 E. 48th St., New York, N.Y. 10017
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,680
VS. a. D14— 5
273,010
PORTABLE RADIO
Masanori Hamada; Yoshiyuki Saigo; Etsuko Ichiao, all of
Osaka, and Takao Okada, Kyoto, aU of Japan, assignors to
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,013
daioM priority, application Japan, Apr. 20, 1981, ^
17007(UJ
U.S. CL D14— 68
March 13. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
923
273,011
PORTABLE AIR COMPRESSOR
Wayne C. Dudley, Parkersburg, Iowa 50665
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 259,831
VS. Q. D15— 9
273,014
LINEN TESTER
BetUunin A. Cuoeo, 315 Prospect St.. East Longraeadow, Mass.
01028
Filed May 11. 1981, Ser. No. 262,784
U.S. a. D16— 135
273,015
273,012 ORGAN
SURVEILLANCE CAMERA HOUSING Thomas E. Kimble, Corington, Ky.. assignor to Baldwin Piano A
Edward Kozloski, Babylon Village, N.Y., assignor to Vicon Organ Company, Qncinnati, Ohio
Industries, Inc., Plainriew, N.Y. Filed Jun. 15, 1981. Ser. No. 273,462
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,488 U.S. Q. D17->5
U.S. a. D16— 2
273,013
ELECTRIC FLASH UNIT
Yoshiyuki Takematsu, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to F^|i Koeko
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan, a part interest
Filed Nov. 20, 1981. Ser. No. 323,473
CMm priority, appUcation Japan, May 20, 1981. SM21638
U4B. a. D16-42
273.016
PRINTING MACHINE
Etsao Hiraishi, Hiroshima, and Takeshi Shohoji, CUba, both of
Japan, assignors to Ryobi Ltd.. Hiroshima. Japan
Filed Jul. 9, 1982. Ser. No. 396,549
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 12, 1982, 57-823
VS. a. D18— 13
924
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
273,017 273 020
Pl.rr* H.^»r^ iT^""!!^^ INSTRUMENT NEWSPAPER VENDING MACHINE
PimeB«rtr.C Eco«e«. Fr«ce, ^ig^r to P^-ker Pe« Fr«.ce. J«k S. Chd.W«,. Huntlogton B««h, Clif., ^Z>r to K-J«:k
FiUrf I..I ic loan «u M i^«,. Engineering Company, Inc., Gardena, Calif.
U S a D19I2? ' ' • '*''°^' ''"«' '^"- »• »'W, Ser. No. 363,044
U.5. CI. D19-49 uj^^ Q^ P2^j__^
273,018
TRAY FOR HOLDING STATIONERY ARTICLES
Raul Barbieri, and Giorgio Marianelli, both of Via Fanifflni. 13.
20149 Milan, luly
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,895
Clainis priority, application Italy, Feb. 13, 1981, 20781
B/81[U]
UA a. D19— 75
273,019
NEWSPAPER VENDING MACHINE
Jack S. Chalabian, Huntington Beach, Calif., assignor to K-Jack ,„ „,,
Engineering Company, Inc., Gardena. Cailf ^,-,.. 2V3,U2I
Filed IVfar 29 1982^r No3« 043 NEWSPAPER VENDING MACHINE
VS. a. D20-T ' ^'^ ^'^^ S. Chalabian, Huntington Beach, Calif., assignor to K-Jack
Engineering Company, Inc., Gardena, Calif.
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,045
U.S. a. D20— 6
March 13, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
925
273,022 273.024
NEWSPAPER VENDING MACHINE GAME BOARD
^t^i^S!^^JlTT ?'^' ^"'vr **""'■ *" ^'^^^ •'""•• ^ ^•»«*' Vanderburgh. Ind., assigaor to Cougar Plastics,
fcagiiieering Company, Inc., Gardena, Calif. Inc., Evansrille, Ind.
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,046 Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355.798
U.S. a. D21— 31
V.S. a. D20— 6
273 023 '^•°*'
U S a DOS' ""• "• "^ ""■ "■'• "'^' ™S11' ■rJis'ltr'N.. 35,3..
' ^~^ Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom. Dec. 3, 1981. 81
1003 967
U.S. a. D21— 69
926
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
273,026 273^29
CHILD'S TOY EXERCISE TREADMILL
'^T^ .".P*r'»^*'T2[" ^^"^" ^*y' ^t^»^ tnd Peter D. Fred W. KoUeBberg. Rabtoo, Nebr, aieigBor to lastnuDeati for
JS? ** ?; "f 'iT' O-^' I»^<««, oeignort to Hestoir Ordliic Resevdhl I^TlJ^erpoi NX "•*™^*" "^
Kiddicrtft Liaritod, Surrey. England pUed Sep. 16, IMl. Ser. No. 302,488
Filed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,692 U.S. Q. D21-192 ' ' ' ' «• •~*''«'
Oalnu priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 3, 1981,
811003968
VS. a. D21— 69
273,030
273,027 DUMBBELL
TOY TABLE Howard A. Aadenon, Allegheny County, Pa., anignor to Leon-
Eugene J. Ecbterling, 22740 Macfarlane Dr., Woodland Hills, "^ Schwartz, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Calif. 91364 Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,1
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,264 ^•^' ^- D21-197
U.S. a. D21— 121
•,780
273,028
STUFFED TOY
Donna K. Finney, East Aurora, N.Y., assignor to The Quaker
Oats Company, Chicago, III.
nied Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,746
U.S. a. D21— 190
273,031
GOLF PUTTING AID
Luther G. SinUian, Ft Lauderdale, Fla., assignor to Command
Automation, Inc., Greenwich, Conn.
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,605
U.S. a. D21~234
«eeeeo»a«»
i0eeeeo*oo«(
iia««o»oaa9
March 13, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
927
^^<^2 273 JUS
Kir^JLT^S^ MS.SfJS'',?? 'lU"^" ^"''^^ fireplaoTdoor
ciJl^St^^T^^ r-^" '^'^ *° ^"•'^*" ^•^ "«"'•'' "'» '^''»*y^' >>^'»' Mich. 48219
^SS^l ^iT^?"i' ,« «« "•*• ^»»' ♦• ^•W' Ser. No. 174,9a
U.S a D22-19 ^•** ^' '^^^^^
' """""tiittnl
273,033
SWIMMING POOL CHEMICAL DISPENSER OR THE
LIKE
Arlon G. Sangster, Sterling, Mass., and Joseph J. Tepas, Jr.,
Easton, Conn., assignors to Olin Corporation, New Haven,
Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 257,051, Apr. 24, 1981. This
application Apr. 11, 1983. Ser. No. 484,826
U.S. a. D23— 3
273,036
VENTURI WALL FOR WET SEPARATORS AND THE
LIKE
Lennart Gustavsson, and Osten Maatta, both of S-Vaxjo.
Sweden, auignors to Flakt Aktiebolag, Nacka. Sweden
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220.734
Gainu priority, application Sweden, Jul. 4, 1980, 80-1336
U.S. a. D23— 163
r.~
273,034
FLUID FLOW CONTROL VALVE 273,037
David F. Higgins, Hereford, England, assignor to IMI Mould- GAS TURBINE FAN BLADE
ings Limited, Herford, England Paul R. Dodge, Mesa, Arir.. assignor to The Garrett Corpora-
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,814 tion, Los Angeles, Calif.
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 29, 1981, Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,299
W8704 vjs. a. D23-165
U.S. a. D23— 19
928
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13, 1984
273,038 273040
APPARATUS FOR CHIROPRACTIC THERAPY AND FUSED SaiCA SYRINGE NEEDLE
-.„„ ^ , « . MASSAGE Rand G. Jenkins, Fair Odes, and Norman W. WoUers, Davis,
Tenio Masuda, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to FVancc Bed Co.. both of CaUf., assignors to JAW Scientific, IncTRanSo
lofcyo, Japan Cordova, Calif.
II «! n ni^ ^ **• '••*• ^' '^"- ^""^^ "•«• ^^' 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,924
U.S.a. D24-^ U.S.a. D24— 25
March 13, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
929
273,045
BASEMENT WINDOW COVER
273,042
MASSAGE ROLLER
Willlan, G. J-Jr;. 1018 1^0 St. Lewiston Id 83501 Kert E. Artwick, Br^AsrlUe. Ohio, assignor to Questor Corpo-
riled Aag. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,636 ration, Tampa, Fla. -. r*-
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,417
U.S. a. D25~54
U.S. a. D24— 36
a
1 1
1 1
J
1
273,043
ICEPACK
Lois Rusch, 3626 Haddonfleld Rd., Pennsauken, N.J. 08109
Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,629
U.S. a. D24-43
273,046
METAL MOLDING FOR A WALL PANEL OR SIMILAR
ARTICLE
Michael D. Fisher, Mooreland; Thomas S. Flowers, and George
E. Fort, both of New Castle, all of Ind., assignors to American
Standard Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,698
U.S. a. D25— 74
273,041
CURVED aRCULAR ANASTOMOSIS SURGICAL
STAPLER
273,039 Douglas G. Noiles, New Canaan; Paul O. Rawson, Easton, and
HOUSING FOR A PORTABLE ELECTRONIC CONTROL Richard Yagami, Bridgewater, all of Conn., assignors to
FOR A INTRAESOPHAGEAL PACER United States Surgical Corporation, Norwalk, Conn.
James D. Behrens, Arvada, Colo., assignor to Associated Medi- Filed Oct 2, 1981, Ser. No. 308,086
cal Devices, Inc., Denver, Colo. U.S. Q. D24— 26
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 301,099
U.S. a. D24— 17
273,047
273,044 CORNICE MOULD
BABY BOTTLE HOLDER Robert Uoyd-Jones, Unit 2, 27 Sixth Ave., Sandgate. Brisbane,
WiUiam T. Holcomb, 2175 Mallul Dr., Anaheim, Calif. 92802 Queensland, Australia
., e ^ ..,. ^'i? °'*' ^' *^*' ^'- ^"- ^•'^^^ F"*" ^^- ^^ IWl, Ser. No. 331.553
U.S. a. D24-48 U.S. O. D25-79
■^
■*r.
"\^
1, TS?
^^ i i r
^
>,
^^
930
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 13. 1984
273,048 273 OSl
AUTOMATIC SAFETY ENTRY LIGHT SOAP DISH
II « r. n,Z!!jf "^^ ^' *'*^' ^'- '^°' ^^''•" »'"«' J"'- 7. IWI. Ser. No. 281.016
UAO. D26— 37 U.S. Q. D28— 76
273,049
COMBINATION DOOR LOCK DE-ICER AND TORCH
AND KEY RING
Siu L. Lara; Yuk-YIng Wong Chan, and King M. Chan, all of
Block 16, 3rd Floor. Shing Wan Industrial BIdg., 15-17 Sbing
Yip St^ Kwun Tong, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Filed Feb. 26, 1981. Ser. No. 238,629
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 9, 1980.
996484
U.S. a. D26— 38
V
273,052
SAFE FOR CURRENCY CASSETTES
Oyde R. Snodgrass, Paoli, Pa., assignor to Chubb Industries
Inc^ Toledo, Ohio
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,741
U.S. a. D99— 28
273,050
SMOKER'S PIPE 273,053
^^^ ^.* i*^"!!!!!"' ^^"r***' Conn., assignor to Puff Interna- ELA.STOMERIC MAGNETIZED KEY CONTAINER
tional '---^ ;•;«•. New York^ NY. Peter M. Hamborg, 457 Princeton Dr., Costa S^^!;.lS626
II « n nr7 i ' ' ^' ^°' "*''" "'«" Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,160
U A a. D27-3 ujs, a. D99-28
LIST OF PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 13TH DAY OF MARCH, 1984
Note —Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
A-Betong AB- See—
Osterberg. Thomas V., 4.437.017, CI. 290-52.000.
A. O. Smith Harvestore Products, Inc.: See-
Olson, George E., 4.436,473. CI. 414-310.000.
A/S Raufoss Ammunisjonsfabrikker: See—
Jacobsen. Kjell O.; Maire, Tore; Halvorsen. Rolf I.; Heie. Ingar H ;
Myhrvold. Eriing; and Berger. Ove R.. 4,436.034. CI.
102-334.000.
Strandli. Kaare R.; and Ostlie, Arne M.. 4,435.887, CI. 29-123.000.
Strandli. Kaare R., 4,436,035. CI. 102-364.000.
AB Karlstads Mekaniska Werkstad: See—
Andersson, Ingmar. 4.436.587. CI. 162-123.000.
AB Welin: See—
Nilsson. Per. 4.436.180. CI. 182-97.000.
Abe. Akira: See—
Iwao, Noriaki; and Abe. Akira, 4.435.916. CI. 46-201.000.
Abe, Masaru: See —
Suzuki. Yasuo; Abe. Masaru; and Tezuka, Toshiro, 4.436,130, CI.
I52-353.00R.
Abrams. Howard; and Allen. Barrington T.. to Pall Corporation. Pro-
cess for filtration of oil and gas well treatment fluids. 4,436,633, CI.
210-806.000.
Abramson. Edward A., to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company.
End capping an optical fiber. 4.436.366. CI. 350-96.200.
Acea Manodomestici S.r.l.: See—
Ferrighi, Antonietta. 4.436.499. CI. 425-195.000.
ACF Industries. Incorporated: See —
Bonds. James V ; and Orum, Paul R.. 4.436,279. CI. 251-86.000.
Achard. Serge, to S.A. Promocab. Dual sensitivity intrusion detection
system. 4,437.089. CI. 340-541.000.
Acme Resin Corporation: See —
Laitar. Robert A.. 4.436,881, CI. 525-504.000.
Acme Solar Works, Inc.: See—
Larsen. Raymond B.. 4.436,085, CI. 126-450.000.
Adamek, John A.: See—
Doery, Michael S.; Hanzlik, Edward W. C.; Adamek, John A.; and
McLaughlin, William J., 4,436.301. CI. 271-177.000.
Adams, Ladd M.: See—
Hayatdavoudi, Asadollah; and Adams, Ladd M., 4,436,166. CI.
175-65.000.
Adihart. Otto J., to Engelhard Corporation. Control system for hydro-
gen generators. 4,436,793, CI. 429-17.000.
Adoniev. Viktor A.: See —
Petrov. Lev N.; Adoniev, Viktor A.; and Kononov, Valery I.,
4,436,619, CI. 209-573.000.
Adrian. David L.; and Young, Sam H., to King. Frank J. Card carrying
microfilm and associated reading lens. 4,435,912, CI. 40-363.000.
ADS • Anker GmbH: See—
Schuldt, Gerhardt, 4,436,989, CI. 233-22.000.
Advanced Color Technology, Inc.: See-
Hudson, David M., 4.437.104. CI. 346-140.00R.
Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.: See—
Alfke, Peter H.; Rallapali. Krishna; and MacMillan. David,
4,437,158, CI. 364-200.000.
Agency of Industrial Science & Technology: See—
Hayashi, Yutaka; Yamanaka. Mitsuyuki; and Karaiawa, Hideyuki,
4,436,761, CI. 427-38.000.
Mitsuoka. Toyokazu, 4,437,045, CI. 318-361.000.
Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Kuffner, Kari; Marx. Paul; and Lastig, Wolfgang, 4,436,810, CI.
430.531.000.
Aggen, Alvin F. Material metering device. 4.436.226, O. 222-280.000.
Agrawal, Balkishan: See—
Andreini, Rockne J.; Mehlman, Stewart K.; Selinet, Ronald J.; and
Agrawal, Balkishan, 4,436,333, CI. 73-52.000.
Agri-Tech Ltd., Inc.: See—
Gorby. Oliver L., 4,435,996, CI. 74-713.000.
Aihara, Teuuo; Nakayama, Yaiuhani; Umeyama. Koichi; Sawada,
Kozo; and Shinohara, Mataaki, to Kaniai Paint Company, Limited.
Aqueous resin compoiilion. 4,436,849, CI. 323-301. 000.
Air Producu and Chemicals, Inc.: See-
Buck. Daniel M.; Sibley, Alan T.; and Kaiier, John J., 4.436,696, CI.
419-37.000.
Daly, Francis P.; and Wilhelm, Frederick C. 4.436.836. CI.
302-317.000.
Harwell, Howard L., 4,436,842, CI. 321-113.000.
Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Akagi, Motonobu; Nomura, luhi; Hattori, Kyo; and Kato, Kichiro,
4.436,070, CI. 123-440.000.
Hayashi, Motomu; Ishikawa. Atuo; and Yukimoto, Kazuyoshi,
4,437.143, CI. 362-272.000.
Akagi. Jiro. to Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho. Fuel injection
nozzle and holder assembly for internal combustion ensmes.
4.436.247. CI. 239-533.700. *
Akagi. Motonobu; Nomura. Isshi; Hattori. Kyo; and Kaio, Kichiro, to
Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha; and Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha.
Apparatus for controlling the proportion of air and fuel in an air-fuel
mixture of the internal combustion engine 4.436.070, CI. 123-440 000.
Akahori, Masaaki; Ohyagi. Takashi; and Nishimura, Shozo, to Nippon
Electric Co.. Ltd.; and Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Cor-
poration. Selective call receiver having timed power suddIv
4.437.095, CI. 340-825.440. ^^ ^
Akao, Mutsuo; and Kawata. Tadashi. to Fuji Photo Film Co . Ltd
Method for light-shielding a roll photographic film. 4.436.809. CI
430-501.000.
Akchurin, Rashid Z.: See—
Shevakin. Jury F ; Dobkin. Igor I.; Donskoi. Efim M : Manov,
Grigory L.; Zhdanov, Vasily V ; Berger, Elena S.' Popov, Va-
lery M.; Pavlov. Alexei A.; and Akchurin. Rashid Z , 4.435.H6,
CI. 29-33.00D.
Akiyama, Hiroyuki; Shimada. Sumio; Hirouwa. Kuninori. «nd
Kuwabara. Hideki, to Japan Styrene Paper Cnrporaiion Prorti for
producing pre-foamed particles of polyolefin rcsin 4.43/ ^ "A
521-58.000.
Akiyama. Masanori: See—
Taniguchi. Yoshiharu; Edano. Shigeki; and Akiyama. Matanon.
4.437.002. CI 250-338.000.
Aktiebolaget Bofors; See—
Mohlin. Kjeli, 4,436,017, CI. 89-14.00C.
Aktiebolaget SKF: See—
Hallerback, Stig L., 4.436,349. CI. 308189.00R.
Akzo NV: See—
Behnke. Joachim; and LofTelmann, Walter. 4,436,839. CI
521-64.000.
Akzona Incorporated: See—
Schroeder, Arnold; and Roskott, Lodewiik, 4,436,844. CI.
523-144.000.
Albany International Corporation: See-
Nicholson. Charles B., 4.435.891. CI. 29-157.00C
Albee, Paul J., Jr.; and Burdick. Patricia E.. to Allied Corporation Use
of ethylenc-vinyl acetate copolymers and oxidized high density
polyethylene homopolymcrs as processing aids for talc filled polypro-
pylene compounds. 4,436,863, CI. 524-451 000.
Albers, Arthur L. H. Lap device for wheelchair patients. 4.436.339, CI.
297-153.000.
Albert, Gordon H.; and Feinman, Harvey M., to Sealectro Corporation.
Badge reader using infrared light. 4,436,991, CI. 235-468.000.
Alcon Laboratories. Inc.: See-
York, Billie M.. Jr., 4.436.745. CI. 424-273.00R
Alejandro Llera, Santos A., to Precision Plastic Products Corp. Tamper
proof closure. 4,436,212. CI. 215-252.000.
Alfke, Peter H.; Rallapali, Krishna; and MacMillan, David, to Ad-
vanced Micro Devices. Inc. System bus protocol interface circuit.
4,437,158, CI. 364-200.000.
Allen, Barrington T.: See—
Abrams, Howard; and Allen, Barrington T., 4,436,635, CI.
210-806.000.
Allen, Fred E.; Thuener, Bruce W.; and Shadinger, Peter R., to Whea-
ton Industries. In-line rouiional casting apparatus. 4,436,500. CI.
425-290.000.
Allen, Linus S., to Mobil Oil Corporation Method for the determina-
tion of clay and mica concentrations in subsurface undstone forma-
tions through radioactive logging. 4,436,997. CI. 230-236.000.
Allen, Roland M.; and Kalocai, Andrew J., to West Company. The.
Apparatus for making molded anicles. 4,436,478, CI. 414-732.000.
Allied Corporation: See—
Albee. Paul J., Jr.; and Burdick, Patricia E., 4,436,863, CI
324-431.000.
Burdick, Patricia E.; and Rapp, Ronald J.. 4,436,150, CI. 324-8.000.
Flood, Paul W.; Mason, Charles D.; and Schulce, Stephen R.,
4,436,872, CI. 323-179.000.
Kasper, Alan H.; and Mathe, Istvan, 4,436,339, Q. 339-61. OOM.
Allis-Chalmers Corporation: See—
Oilgore, William H.. 4,433,979, CI. 73-168.000.
Alps Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Hori, Fumihisa, 4,436.031, CI. 101-93.170.
Shimaoka, Motohiro, 4,437.132, CI. 360-103.000.
Aluminum Company of America: See—
Hanley, Louis A.. II, 4,436,597, CI. 204-67.000.
McMonigle, Matthew J., 4,436,627, CI. 210^3.000. ^
Alvero, Ernesto J.: See-
Kelly, William R.; and Alvero, Ernesto J., 4,43^,394, CI. 334- 1. 000.
PI
PI 2
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13. 1984
ALZA Corporation: See —
Urquhan. John: Chandrasekaran. Santosh K : and Shaw, Jane E.,
4.436,741, CI. 424-267.000.
Aman, Mitsuji: See—
Yoshida. Masashi; Yokoia. Hajime; Aman, Mitsuji; and Shigemura,
Tatsuya. 4,437,129, CI. 360-85.000.
Amano. Takehiro; Yoshikawa, Kensei: Sano, Tatsuhiko; Ohuchi,
Kutaka; Ishigura, Michihiro; Shiono, Manzo; Fujita, Yoshiji; and
Nishida, Takashi, to Taisho Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.; and Kuraray
Co.. Ltd Process for producing l-(p-prenylphenyl)ethanol.
4,436,939. CI. 568-813.000.
American Hoechst Corporation: See—
Walls, John E.. 4.436.804. CI. 430-157.000.
Walls. John E., 4,436,807, CI. 430-331.000.
American Sports Equipment: See—
Fernandez, David, 4,436.305, CI. 273-73.00C.
American Standard Inc.: See—
Pierro, Joseph J., Jr.. 4,437,056, CI. 324-73.0AT.
AMF Inc.: See—
Freyrie. Leonardo. 4,436,047, CI. 114-102.000.
Ammermann. Eberhard: See —
Zeeh. Bcrnd; Goetz, Norbert; Ammermann, Eberh?.rd; and Jung.
Johann. 4,436,548. CI. 71-76.000.
AMP Incorporated: See—
Coldren. Daniel R.; and Schwenk. Dennis P.. 4,436.358, CI 339-
17.00C.
McCleerey. Earl W., 4,436,361, CI. 339-97.00P.
Ampex Corporation: See—
Canel, Jules E.; and Gilligan, Thomas J., 4,437,173. CI. 365-193.000
Miller. Jerry W.; and Rudnick, Paul J., 4.437.086, CI. 340-347.0DD.
Anderson, Edward M. Apparatus and method for separating a mixture
of two liquids. 4.436,630. CI. 210-744.000.
Anderson, Harold E. Self-standing marine riser. 4,436,451, CI
405-195.000.
Anderson, William, to Siemens Gammasonics Inc. Medical imaging
apparatus. 4,437,161, CI. 364-414.000.
Andersson, Bengt U. I.: See—
Larsson, Sven B.; and Andersson. Bengt U. I., 4,436,467, CI
411-34.000.
Andersson. Ingmar, to AB Karlstads Mekaniska Werkstad. Method for
producmg multilayer paper 4,436.587, CI. 162-123.000.
Andreev, Anatoly A.; Gavriiko, Igor V.; Gavrilov, Alexei G • Vere-
schaka, Anatoly S.; Zhed, Viktor P.; Padalka. Valentin G.; and
Sinelschikov. Andrei K. Coating for metal-cutting tools. 4,436,830,
CI. 501-96.000.
Andreini, Rockne J.; Mehlman, Stewart K.; Selines, Ronald J.; and
Agrawal, Balkishan, to Union Carbide Corporation. Process to pro-
duce low hydrogen steel. 4,436,553, CI. 75-52.000.
Andros Analyzers Incorporated: See—
Passaro, Robert E.; and Burough. Irvin G.. 4,437,004. CI
250-343.000.
Angeles Metal Trim Co.: See—
Davenport, Jeanne A.; Campbell. Robert L.; and Gallaway, James
F, 4,435,940. CI. 52-641.000.
Annen. Oskar; Egli. Hermann; and Zesiger. Karl, to Sandoz Ltd. Pro-
cess for producing dyed and anti-shrink treated wool. 4,436,521, CI
8-493.000.
Ante. Louis E.; Lindquist. Richard A.; and Roeschlein, Eugene R., to
United States of America, Navy. Simulator for testing sonobuovs.
4,436,049, CI. 1 14-254.000.
Anthony, Thomas R.; Connery, Richard J.; and Hoeschele, David F.,
Jr., to General Electric Company. Silicon-on-sapphire body with
conductive paths therethrough. 4,437,109, CI. 357-68.000.
Aoki, Masaaki: See —
Mochizuki, Taketoshi; Matsuo, Kazuya; Kudo, Mituo; Arai, Akira;
Yamada, Junichi; Shono, Keizi; Aoki, Masaaki; Ohmori, Masai-
chi; and Nishi, Genichiro, 4,435,962, CI. 62-175.000.
Aoki, Masahiro: See —
Omae, Takashi; Tanaka, Kisaburoo; Aoki. Masahiro; Hirayama,
Fumitoshi; and Izaki, Susumu, 4,436,554. CI. 75-128.00T.
Aoki. Miisugu. to Tokyo Kogaku Kikai Kabushiki Kaisha. Ophthalmic
instrument having a cross cylinder lens. 4,436,390, CI. 351-234.000
Aoki, Takashi: See—
Miyoshi. Hideo; Umeda, Tadashi; and Aoki, Takashi, 4,436,41 1, CI.
355-I4.00D.
Aotsuka. Yasuo: See—
Ohtsuka. Shuichi; and AoUuka, Yasuo, 4.436,802. CI. 430-100.000.
APM Corporation: See-
Morse. Milton, 4,436.965, CI. 179-184.000.
Applications Mecaniques et Robinetterie Industrielle: See-
Chiron, Alain, 4,436,281. CI. 2SI-30S.OOO.
Arai. Akira: See—
Mochizuki, Taketoshi; Matsuo, Kazuya; Kudo, Mituo; Arai, Akira;
Yamada, Junichi; Shono, Keizi; Aoki. Masaaki; Ohmori. Masai-
chi; and Nishi, Genichiro, 4.435.962. CI. 62-175.000.
Arai, Tohru: See —
FujiU, Hironori; and Arai. Tohru, 4,436,559, CI. 148-6.000.
Fujita, Hironori; Arai, Tohru; and Mizunc. Jiro, 4,436.560. CI.
148-6.000.
Araki. Tamio: See—
Yamaguchi, Yutaka; Koirumi, Nobuyuki; Anki, Tamio; Kojima,
Koichi; and Ikeda, Nobumasa, 4,436,131, CI. IS2-36I.0FP.
Arana Erana, Agustin. Molding sand blowers. 4,436.141. CI.
164-201.000.
Araoka, Katsumasa: See—
Nakaya, Shunichi; and Araoka, Katsumasa, 4,437,016, CI. 290-
Arbed S/A: See—
Metz, Paul, 4.436,763, CI. 427-47.000.
Argon Medical Corp.: See —
O-Neill, William J., 4,436,519, CI. 604-175.000.
Armco Inc.: See—
Seaburg, Paul A.; and Lautensleger, Richard W.. 4,435,932, CI
52-263.000.
Stone, Lester W., 4,435,937, CI. 52-520.000.
Armstrong World Industries. Inc.: See—
Ehrhart, Wendell A., 4,436,784, CI. 428-423.100.
Arnold, Dan M.; Smith, Harry D., Jr.; and Schultz, Ward E.. to Hal-
liburton Company. Borehole compensated KUT log. 4,436,996, CI.
250-256.000.
Arnold, Fred E.: See—
Tsai. Tsu-Tzu; and Arnold. Fred E., 4.436.886, CI. 526-257 000
Arnold, Wmfried, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Control system for a pulled
load, particularly agricultural tractor-and-ploogh control system.
4,437,048, CI. 318-663.000.
Arthur D. Little, Inc.: See—
McCullough, John E., 4.436,495, CI. 418-55.000.
Asahi Glass Company, Ltd.: See—
Yamabe. Masaaki; Higaki, Hiromichi; Shinohara, Toshio; Tanabe,
Hiroyukj; and Nakayama, Shunsuke, 4,436,772, CI. 427-379.000.
Yamabe, Masaaki; Higaki, Hiromichi; Shinohara, Toshio Tanabe
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama, Shunsuke, 4,436,773. CI. 427-380000
Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Koya, Masahiko; and Fukuoka, Yohei, 4,436,945, CI. 585-488 000
Matsuzaki, Kazuhiko; Iwaisako, Toshiyuki; and Masamoto, Junzo.
4.436.900. CI 528-490.000.
Asahi Kogaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kobayashi. Takeo. 4.436.397. CI. 354-465.000.
Negoro, Ikuo; and Iwanade. Hisao. 4,436,416, CI. 355-57 000
Suzuki, Kozaburo, 4,436,421, CI. 356-153.000.
Asami, Fumitaka, to Fujitsu Limited. Lock detecting circuit for phase-
locked loop frequency synthesizer. 4,437,072, CI. 331-I.OOA.
ASEA Aktiebolag: See—
Jonsson, Per-Erik; and Svedberg, Per. 4,437.107, CI. 357-38.000.
Ashby, Bruce A.; and Schroeter, Siegfried H., to General Electric
Company. Ultraviolet light absorbing agents and compositions and
articles containing same. 4.436.924, CI. 556-416.000.
Ask. Jonas W. Saw unit having mutually displaceable saw oarts.
4,436,009, CI. 83-72.000.
Asoyants, Grigory B.: See—
Lebedev, Vladimir K.; Kuchuk-Yataenko, Sergei I.; Sakhamov.
Vastly A.; Galian, Boris A.; Asoyants, Grigory B.; and Tishura.
Vladimir I., 4.436,974, CI. 219-66.000.
Aspisi. Christian; Calas, Bernard; Daunis. Jacques; Follet, Michel;
Jacquier, Robert; and Parello, Joseph, to Societe d'Expansion Scien-
tifique "EXPANSIA". Acrylic copolymers and their use in solid
phase peptide synthesis. 4,436,874, CI. 525-327.100.
Aspisi, Christian; Bonato. Marc; and Jacquier. Robert, to Societe d'Ex-
pansion Scientifique "EXPANSIA". Borane complexes. 4.436,919.
CI. 549-4.000. ...
Assay Tec Associates. Inc.: See-
Manning, Charles R., 4,436,819, CI. 436-1.000.
Ateliers et Chantiers de Bretagne-ABC: See—
Ninet, Jean-Louis; and Vaillant, Robert, 4,436,454, CI. 405-204.000.
Atkins, Terrance J.; and Field, Martin J., to General Motors Corpora-
tion. Fuel pressure regulator. 4,436,112, CI. 137-510.000.
Atlantic Richfield Company: See —
Emery. Leonard W.. 4,436.165, CI. 175-61.000.
Atsugi Motor Parts Company Limited: See—
Ichikawa. Mamoni; and Satake. Sachio, 4,436,318, CI. 280-104.000.
Aufderhaar, Ernst; Sprecher, Klemenz; and Zergenyi, Janos, to Ciba-
Geigy Corporation. Process for the production of 5<yano-and 5-car-
boxamido-5H-dibenz[b,f]azepines. 4.436.660. CI. 260-239.00D.
Augat Inc.: See—
Wey. Robert A.; and Roberts, Harold A.. 4,436.295. CI. 269-21.000.
Automatic Liquid Packaging, Inc.; See—
Weiler. Gerhard H.; and Pagels, Louis T.. 4.436.210. CI. 215-32.000.
Automation Industries. Inc.: See—
Stenabaugh, Donald D.. 4.436.692. CI. 376-204.000.
Vassalotti. Michael; and Obligado, Alvaro, 4.436.694, CI.
376-310.000.
Zezza, Louis J.; and Huaain. Iqbal. 4,436.693. CI. 376-272.000.
B & B Insulation. Inc.: See-
Harris, Kendall R., 4.436.868, CI. 524-783.000.
B. F. Goodrich Company, The: See—
Houck. Robert J.; and King, Kevin J.. 4,436.198. CI. 198-502.000.
Kramer. James H., 4,436,274. CI. 248-633.000.
Baardman. Frank; van Helden, Robert; and de Nie-Sarink, Margaretha
J., to Shell Oil Company. Process for the ring alkylation of an aniline.
4,436,937. CI. 564-409.000.
Baas. Albertus H.: See—
Nacken, Lambertus J. G.; and Baas, Albertus H., 4,436.706, CI.
423-65.000.
Baba, Kiyokazu; and Nishida, Kenji, to Kabushiki Kaisha Komattu
Seisakusho. Cam-operated multistroke feed mechanism. 4,436,199.
CI. 198-750.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 3
Baba, Mikito: See—
Ohyama. Sadahiro; Kato. Hiroshi; Yaguchi. Sadao; Baba. Mikito;
and Okada. Morikazu. 4.437.140. Ci. 361-402.000.
Baber, David J.: See—
Witalka, Jerome J.; Kurth. Duane G.; and Baber. David J.,
4,437,157, CI. 364-200.000
Babler, Fridolin, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Process for the coloration
of linear polyesters in the melt with perylenetetracarboxylic acid
bis-methylimide. 4,436,852, CI. 524-88.000.
Bade & Theelen GmbH See-
Magnus, Wolf; Braach, Otto; Fischer, Dirk; and Wippig, Werner.
4,436,448, CI. 405-143.000
Bailey, Daniel D : See-
Campbell. Robert L.; and Bailey. Daniel D., 4.436,075, CI
123-557.000.
Baker CAC, Inc.: See—
Goans. Kip B.. 4.436.105. CI. 137-1.000.
Baker International Corporation: See-
Brooks. Robert T.. 4.436.157. CI. 166-344.000
Baker Oil Tools. Inc : See—
Callihan. Rudy B.; and Stone, Lyndon R.. 4.436.151, CI.
166-154.000.
Baker. Ronald: See—
Kennington. Kerry S.; and Baker, Ronald. 4.436.002. CI. 81-57.200.
Balbis. Manuel G.; and King. Colin V . to Firestone Tire & Rubber
Company. The. Advanced profile radial tire having relatively high
innation pressure 4.436.127, CI. 1 52-209 OOR.
Balbo, Anthony M.: See—
Dorman. John G.; Balbo. Anthony M.; Randall. Charles E ; and
Sette. Robert A.. 4,436.184, CI. 187-29.00R.
Baico, Inc.: See —
Borner, Willy; and Jackson, Bernie F., 4,435,982. CI. 73-462.000
Baldwin. John J., to Merck & Co., Inc 3-Cycloalkylamino-2-OR-
propoxycyanopyridines. 4,436,740, CI. 424-263.000.
Ball Corporation: See—
Dugal, Jeffrey N.. 4.436,778. CI 428-36.000.
Nichols, C. Ross; and Miller. Edward C, 4.435,969, CI. 72-126.000
Ban, Itsuki; Shiraki, Manabu; and Egami, Kazuhito. Direct current
motor. 4,437,029, CI. 310-198.000.
Bando. Yoshihide; Tanaka, Toshiki; Honda. Sueaki; Takahashi. Yo-
shihiko; Tsuruyoshi. Kenichi; Kawashima. Katsumi; and Kishimoto.
Syuichi. to Omron Tateisi Electronics Co. Polarized electromagnetic
device. 4.437,078. CI. 335-81.000.
Banko. Anton, to Surgical Design Corporation Surgical cutting instru-
ment with release mechanism. 4.436.091. CI. 128-305.000
Bankovsky, Alexandr I.: See—
Vichkanova, Serafima A.; Shipulina. Ljudmila D.; Glyzin, Vladi-
mir 1.; Bankovsky. Alexandr I ; Pimenov. Mikhail G.; and
Boryaev. Klim I.. 4.436.732. CI. 424-180.000.
Bannon. Robert P., to Shell Oil Company. Adsorption process.
4.436.533. CI. 55-26.000.
Barbee, Robert B.; and Davis, Burns, to Eastman Kodak Company.
Polyester containers having improved gas barrier properties
4.436,895, CI. 528-288.000.
Barber. Franklin T.; See-
Wood, William E.; and Barber. Franklin T.. 4.436.902. CI.
528-501.000.
Barczak. Virgil J.; Perkins, Haywood A.; and Daigle, O. L. Process for
producing iron oxide weighting material from iron chloride solutions.
4.436.681. CI. 264-67.000
Barker. Dale E : See—
Dirksing. Robert S.; and Barker, Dale E.. 4.436.269. CI.
248-214.000.
Barker, James M., to Otis Engineering Corporation. Bridge plug.
4,436,150, CI. 166-31.000.
Barkoczy. Istvan: See—
Kaderjak. Gyula; Veres, Albert; Barkoczy, Istvan; and Lonscsak.
Janos, 4,436,954, CI. I74-128.00R.
Barlow, Gordon A.; Newcomer, John R.; and Bezark. Fred, to Gordon
Barlow Design. Strategy card game. 4,436.309. CI. 273-267.000.
Barnes. George D.. to Wilkinson Rubber Linatex Limited. Blending of
fluid materials. 4.436,433. CI. 366-152.000.
Barnowski, Reinhard Toilet flush tank. 4.435,859. CI. 4-324.000.
Barthold, Klaus: See—
Oppenlaender, Knut; Stork, Karl; and Barthold. Klaus, 4,436,639,
CI. 252-8.55E.
Barton, Lyndon O. Bridge bidding aid. 4,436,324, CI. 283-50.000.
Bartsch, Wolfgang: See—
Fauland. Erich; Kampe, Wolfgang; Stach, Kurt; and Bartsch,
Wolfgang, 4,436,742, CI. 424-269.000.
BASF Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Brandstetter, Franz; Muench, Volker; Naarmann, Herbert; and
Priebe, Edmund, 4,436,854, CI. 524-139.000.
Broecker, Franz J.; Gruendler, Karl-Heinz; Marosi, Laszlo;
Schwarzmann, Matthias; Triebskorn, Bruno; and Zirker,
Guenter. 4,436,833, CI. 502-176.000.
Harder, Wolfgang; Merger, Franz; and Towae, Friedrich,
4,436,668, CI. 260-463.000.
Hinselmann, Klaus; Naarmann, Herbert; Echte, Adolf; Heil, Ed-
uard; Nikles, Albert; Reffert, Rudi W.; and Hambrecht, Juergen,
4,436,870, CI. 525-53.000.
Oppenlaender. Knut; Stork, Karl; and Barthold, Klaus, 4.436,639,
CI. 252-8.55E.
Schuiz, Rudi; Puestel. Hubert; Weber, Georg; and Kuerten, Herib-
ert, 4.436.702. CI. 422-195.000.
Strehler, Hugo; Hoerauf, Werner; and Urbanek. Fnednch.
4.436.897. CI 528-323.000
Weitz, Hans-Martin; Fischer. Rolf; and Pohl. Hans H . 4.436.944.
CI 585-408 000
Zeeh. Bernd; Goetz, Norbert; Ammermann. Eberhard; and Jung.
Johann. 4.436,548. CI 71-76.000
BASF Farben & Fasern AG: See—
Batzill, Wolfgang; Diefenbach. Horst; Geist. Michael; and Schupp.
Eberhard. 4.436,878, CI. 525-438.000
Basic Machinery Co.. Inc.: See—
Kenworlhy. Samuel P.. 4.436.501, CI 425-308.000
Balz. Hans-Georg; Linke. Hans-Ralf; Stellner. Klaus; and Weimann.
Gunler. to Boehringer Mannheim GmbH Reactive asymmetrical
dicarboxylic acid esters and reagents for the investigation of cardiac
glycosides. 4.436.828. CI 436-545.000.
Batzill. Wolfgang: Diefenbach. Horst; Geist. Michael: and Schupp.
Eberhard, to BASF Farben & Fasern AG. Water-dispersible binders
for cationic electropaints, and a process for their preparation
4.436.878. CI. 525-438.000
Baum. Frank Multi-purpose traveling bag 4.436.189. CI. 190-108.000.
Baumgariner Papiers S.A.: See —
Lebet, Jean-Pierre. 4,436,517. CI. 493-45.000
Bausch & Lomb Incorporated See—
Chromecek. Richard C ; Friends. Gary D ; Wissman. Lawrence Y ;
and Yourd. Raymond A , III. 4.436.887, CI 526-263 000
Bax. Ronald F, to Diasonits (NMR) Inc Gradient power supply
4.437,053. CI 323-268.000.
Baxter Travenol Laboratories. Inc.: See—
Bellotti. Marc, Goldhaber. Richard P : Phillips, Earl G ; and Toch.
Theodore H . 4.436.620. CI 210-90 000
Bay. David L.. to GTE Products Corporation. Method of effecting
stabilized dimming of fluorescent lamps 4.437;040. CI. 315-20900R
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Bonse. Gerhard, 4.436.905. CI 544-182.000
Holmwood, Graham; Lurssen. Klaus: and Frohberger. Paul-Ernst.
4,436.907. CI. 544-335.000.
Marhold, Albrecht; and Klauke. Erich, 4.436.941. CI. 570-144000
Neuhaus, Karl-Friedrich; Muller-Albrecht, Horst; Dollhausen.
Manfred, and Perrey, Hermann. 4.436.570. CI 156-273 300
Rasshofer. Werner; Reichmann. Wolfgang; Richartz. Adolf; and
Dietrich. Manfred. 4.436.841. CI 521-106 000
Rauleder, Gebhard; and Waldmann, Helmut. 4,436.943, CI
585-357.000.
Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Fritzenwenger, Josef. 4.436.067. CI. 123-198 OOC.
Beard, Harold J Clarifier skimmer. 4,436.632. CI 210-776.000
Beard. Walter C High flow tilt valve with accelerating cam equipped
moveable cup 4.436.229. CI 222-402 220
Beck, Ernst: See—
Lenard. Peter; and Beck, Ernst, 4,436,000. CI 76-41.000
Becker. Herbert, to Metallwerk Max Brose GmbH & Co Drive unit for
a transport cable 4,436.250. CI 242-54.00R
Beckman Instruments. Inc : See-
Meyer. Richard C; and Carroll, Edward L.. 4.435.989, CI.
73-864.140.
Van Vliet, James G.; and Brown. James R . 4.436.994, CI.
250-207.000.
Becton Dickinson Company: See-
Kaufman, Joseph, 4.436,098, CI 128-766 000
Beecham Group Limited: See—
O'Hanlon, Peter J.; and Walker, Graham, 4,436,751, CI
424-283.000.
Beerens, Cornells J. M. Saw sharpening guide 4,435,999, CI 76-36.000
Beese, John G., to IMI Marston Limited. Reverse buckling bursting
disc. 4,436,218, CI 220-89.00A
Beever, William H., to Phillips Petroleum Company Poly(arylenc
sulfide) composition suitable for molding 4,436,865, CI 524-504 000
Beggs, William R ; and Crane, Barry D., to United Stales of America,
Air Force High energy single pulse laser calorimeter 4,436,437, CI
374-32.000.
Behnke, Joachim, and Loffelmann, Walter, to Akzo NV Process for
preparing polycarbonate-polyether-blockcopolymers 4,436,839. CI.
521-64.000.
Belfoure, Edward: See-
Miller, Kenneth F.; and Belfoure, Edward, 4,436,879, CI.
525-439.000.
Bell, Frank H., to Thiokol Corporation. Projectile for dispensing gase-
ous material. 4,436,036, CI. 102-367.000
Bell & Howell Company: See—
Orsinger, Winston A., 4,436,299, CI. 271-100.000.
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated: See—
Cottrell, Jennie L.; Davis, Richard A.; Harris, Susan K.: Jones,
Bernard R.; and Payseur, John Y., 4,436,963, CI 179-18 OOB.
Davis, Richard A.; Harns, Susan K.; and Jones, Bernard R.,
4,436,962, CI. I79.18.00B
Harmon, William R., Jr., 4,436,960, CI. I79-5I.OAA.
Hodgins, Martin G.; and Jordan, William J., 4,436,365, CI.
350-96 160
Khanna, Sarwan K ; and Khanna, Satya P., 4.436,648, CI
252-511.000.
Parrillo. Louis C; Reutlinger, George W.; and Wang, Li-Kong,
4,435.895. CI. 29-571.000.
Parrillo, Louis C; and Payne, Richard S , 4,435,896, CI. 29-571.000
Petr, David W., 4,437,087, CI. 340-347 ODD.
I(U(I () Ci — 34
PI 4
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Belloli. Archille. to Joule' Technical Corporation Method and means
for orienting bevel tipped needles and the like. 4.436,479. CI
414-757.000
Bellotti, Marc; Goldhaber, Richard P.; Phillips. Earl G.; and Toch,
Theodore H.. to Baxter Travenol Laboratories. Inc Integral hydrau-
lic circuit for hemodialysis apparatus. 4,436.620, CI. 210-90.000
Beloit Corporation: See—
Frye. Kenneth G ; Fitzpatrick, Donald C; and Karis, Arthur T
•4.436,302, CI. 271-202.000.
Beit, Kenneth W.. to Norland Corporation. Cardiac pacer havins active
notch filter system. 4,436,093. CI. I28-4I9.0PG.
Bemis Company. Inc.: See —
Cooper. Barry A.. 4.436.788. CI. 428-483.000.
Bendix Corporation. The: See—
Bolenbaugh. Daniel L.; and Wegh. John R., 4.436.187. CI
188-73 450.
Gamett. Jack L.. 4.435.924. CI. 51-327.000.
Ritsema. Irving R.; and Colpaert. James J., 4,436,186, CI
188-71.800.
Bennett, Robert W.: See—
Purvis, Fay A.; Bennett, Robert W ; and Ruth, Roger A., 4,436,487,
CI. 417-46.000
Bennett, William R. and Clere. Thomas M.. to Diamond Shamrock
Corporation. Narrow gap gas electrode electrolytic cell. 4.436.608
CI 204-265.000.
Bequette. Robert J.; Hobbs. Linda G.; and Scott. Joseph A., to Mead
Johnson & Company Stabilized estradiol cream composition
4,436,738. CI. 424-238.000.
Berfield. Robert C . to Shop-Vac Corporation. Noise reducing means
for vacuum cleaner. 4.435.877. CI. 15-326.000.
Berger. Elena S.: See—
Shevakin. Jury F.; Dobkin. Igor I.; Donskoi. Efim M.; Manov.
Grigory L.: Zhdanov. Vasily V.; Berger. Elena S.; Popov. Va-
lery M ; Pavlov. Alexei A.; and Akchurin. Rashid Z.. 4.435,886.
CI. 29-33 OOD.
Berger. Elisabeth J . See—
Haines. Richard M; Wong. Robert; and Berger. Elisabeth J.
4,436.848. CI. 523-426.000.
Berger. Ove R.: See—
Jacobsen. Kjell O.; Matre. Tore; Halvorsen. Rolf I.; Heie. Ingar H
Myhrvold. Eriing; and Berger. Ove R.. 4.436.034. ci!
102-334.000.
Berglund, Lennart H. A., to Boliden Aktiebolag. Method for recover-
ing useful products from waste products obtained when manufactur-
ing aluminium fluoride. 4.436,629, CI. 210-712.000
Bergwerksverband GmbH: See—
Richter. Ekkehard; and Reinke, Martin, 4.436.701. CI. 422-173.000
Berkhof. Hendrikus. to Honeywell B. V. Control system for a gas heated
water or air heater. 4.436.506. CI. 431-76.000.
Berkley. E. Bertram, to Tension Envelope Corporation. Reusable
envelope. 4,436.202. CI. 206-455.000. ^ »~
Bernacki. Stephen E.; and Kosicki, Bernard B., to Sperry Corporation.
Anisotropic plasma etching of semiconductors. 4,436.584, CI.
156-643.000.
^n';,'^i^'■i.. ■* • '° ^^•^" °'' Company. Marine seismic system
4,437,175. CI. 367-24.000.
Berning & Sohne; See—
Rohrig. Klaus. 4.435.945. CI. 53-589.000.
Berrer. Dagmar; Pissiotas, Georg; and Rohr, Otto, to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation Thiocarbamoylalkoxyphenylureas. 4,436.935. CI.
564-49.000.
Berrill. William H.; Boot. Herbert W.; and Hartshorn. Frank, to USM
Corporation. Shoe lasting machines. 4,435,869. CI. 12-12 000
Bertenshaw. David R.; Lockwood, Edwin P ; and Brown, Anthony R.,
to Rank Organisation Limited. The. Suge lighting control system.
4.437.169. CI 364-900 000. o o e. j
Berthold. Heinz, to Brueninghaus Hydraulik GmbH. Adjusting device
for axial and radial piston machines. 4,435.992. CI. 74-89.150.
Benin. Patrice, to VALEO Power assisted steering device for a vehi-
cle. 4,436,171. CI 180-148.000.
Berube. Richard G.: See—
Deyesso. Joseph P.; Sarser. David; and Berube. Richard G.
4,436,251, CI 242-56.00R.
B«t, Gerd; and Weikert. Norbert B., to Krampe & Co. Fertigung in
?43M46^1.'29S8"7'oOO ^""'"^ '°"" '"°' " ""*"*"* ""^^''"'
Best Lock Corporation: See-
Best. Walter E.; and Foshee, William R., 4,435.967. CI. 70-224 000
Best. Walter E.; and Foshee. William R.. to Best Lock Corporation.
Doorknob. 4,435.967. CI. 70-224.000.
Bethlehem Steel Corporation: See-
Swift. John E.. St., 4.437.054. CI. 324-51.000.
Beyerle. Rudi: See—
Schonafinger. Karl; Beyerle. Rudi; Bohn. Helmut; Just. Melitta
Martorana. Piero A.; and Nitz. Rolf-Eberhard, 4,436,743. CI.'
424-269.000.
Beyers, Joseph W.: See-
Christopher, Chris J.; Wenninger. Fred W.; Morris. Donald E.
Covington. Wayne F.; Folsom, Jerry B.; Beyers. Joseph W.'
Najm. John H.; and Osborne. Jeffrey C. 4,437,156, CI.
364-200.000.
Berark. Fred: See-
Barlow, Gordon A.; Newcomer, John R.; and Bezark. Fred
4.436.309. CI. 273-267.000.
Biehl, Reinhard; and Schmalbein, Dieter, to Bruker Analytische MeB-
technik GmbH. Specimen head for electron spin resonance and
paramagnetic electron resonance measurements. 4.437.063 CI
324-316.000. '
Bielomatik Leuze GmbH & Co.: See—
Kunzmann. Otto. 4.436.472. CI. 414-50.000.
Biermann. Peter: See—
Storandt. Ralf; Schcck. Georg; and Biermann, Peter, 4,436,321. CI.
280-612.000.
Big Inch Marine Systems. Inc.: See-
Miller. Jack E.. 4,436.325. CI. 285-18.000.
Biggs, Ian; and Goy, Ronald S., to Dunlop Limited. Rubber/polymeric
matenal composites. 4.436.774. CI. 427-40.000.
Billeter. Henry R.. to Sloan Valve Company. Four-way valve.
Bischofr. Peter G.: See—
Osborne. John R.; and Bischoff. Peter G., 4,436,593. CI. 204-15 000
Bishop. David C. to Ortho Diagnostic Systems, Inc. Leukocyte migra-
tion through antigen containing agaroses for immunocompetence
testing. 4,436,824, CI. 436-514.000.
Bissot, Thomas C; and Li, Stephen, to RCA Corporation. Method for
making a cathode, and method for lowering hydrogen overvoluae in
a chloralkali cell. 4.436,599, CI. 204-98.000
Black &. Decker Inc.: See-
Simpson, Frank F., 4,436.163, CI. 173-117.000.
Blagg, Leon, to Rolligon Corporation. Log skidder with load distribut-
ing boom attachment. 4,436,475, CI. 414-569.000.
Blenkush, Brian J., to Colder Products Company. Quick connect cou-
pling. 4,436.125. CI. 141-330.000. ^.onnecicou
Bloedorn. William H.: See—
"odicwsky. Wasly G.; and Bloedorn, William H.. 4.436.200. CI.
Bloem. Russell J.: See—
Smitka. Tim A.; Bunge, Richard H.; French. James C; and Bloem.
Russell J.. 4.436.750. CI. 424-279.000.
Blom, Eric D.; and Singer. Mark I., to Hansa Medical Products, Inc.
Voice prosthesis device and placement tool therefor. 4,435,853, CI.
J' 1 .300,
^'f'!?;,'^'^'" ^ Photon emission imaging apparatus and method.
4,437.160. CI. 364-414.000.
Blumcke. Alfred; Fischer. Peter; and Vahlensieck. Hans-Joachim, to
Dragerwerk Aktiengesellschaft. Silica gels incorporating insolubil-
ized reagents. 4.436.823. CI. 436-169.000.
Blumenkranz, James J., to R & G Sloane Mfg. Co., Inc. Spiral bifilar
welding sleeve. 4,436.988, CI. 219-544.000.
Bobsein, Rex L., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Catalyst composi-
tions. 4,436,948, CI. 585-532.000.
Bocquet, Jacques; and Werquin, Jean C. to Union Siderurgiquc du
Nord et de PEst dc la France. Cast cold rolling roll. 4,436,791. CI
428-682.000.
Boda, Janos: See—
Fercnczi, Gyorgy; Horvath, Peter; Toth, Ferenc; Kiss, Jozsef; and
Boda, Janos, 4,437,060. CI. 324-I58.00D.
Boden, Richard M.; Tyszkiewicz, Theodore J.; and Watkins, Hugh, to
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Phenylethylmethylcarbon-
ate mixtures containing same and organoleptic uses thereof
4.436.652. CI. 252-522.00R.
Bodine. Albert G. Sonic pile driver system employing resonant drive
member and phased coupling. 4.436,452, CI. 405-232 000
Boduch, Paul A.: See—
Rendulic. Francis J.; Trasavage. Robert K.; and Boduch. Paul A .
4.436.806. CI. 430-311.000.
Boehringer Mannheim GmbH; See—
Batz. Hans-Georg; Linke. Hans-Ralf; Stellner. Klaus; and Wei-
mann. Gunter. 4.436.828. CI. 436-545.000.
Fauland, Erich; Kampe. Wolfgang; Stach. Kurt; and Bartsch.
Wolfgang, 4.436.742, CI. 424-269.000.
Schaumann. Wolfgang; Kaiser. Fritz; Voigtlander, Wolfgang-
Hoyer. Edgar; and Neubert. Peter. 4.436.735. CI. 424-182.000
Boeing Company. The: See—
Gratzer. Louis B.; and Gillette. Walter B.. 4.436.263, CI.
Klees, Garry W., 4,435.958, CI. 60-204.000.
Russon, Darrel L.; and Wheeler, Warren H.. 4.436.007, CI.
Bohn, Helmut: See—
Schonafinger, Karl; Beyerle, Rudi; Bohn, Helmut; Just, Melitta;
Martorana, Piero A.; and Nitz, Rolf-Eberhard, 4,436.743, CI.
424-269.000.
Bolen, Charles E.: See—
Grossi, Anthony V.; Hahn, Louis T.; Marzocchi, Alfred; and
Bolen, Charles E., 4,436,767, CI. 427-138.000.
Bolenbaugh. Daniel L.; and Wegh. John R., to Bendix Corporation,
The. Disc brake assembly. 4,436,187, CI. 188-73.450.
Boliden Aktiebolag: See—
Berglund, Lennart H. A., 4,436,629, CI. 210-712.000.
Fahlstrom, Per A. H. H.; and Gorling, Karl G., 4,436.529, CI.
48-197.00R.
Bollmann, Heinz: See—
Zipp, Otmar; Bollmann, Heinz; Stutz, Herbert; and Scholz, Wolf,
gang, 4,436,869. CI. 525-51.000.
Bonato. Marc: See—
Aspisi, Christian; Bonato, Marc; and Jacquier, Robert, 4,436,919. .
CI. 549-4.000.
Bonds, James V.; and Orum, Paul R., to ACF Industries. Incorporated.
Stem connection for gate valve. 4,436,279, CI. 251-86.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
llSr's ^".'^^^' ^'«'"''" ■'"*'" ^ ""'^ Dinkelackcr. Paul H.. to
Union Special Corporation DifTerential feed mechanism for sewinc
machines. 4.436,045, CI. 1 1 2-3 1 3.000 ^
<r^" ^^'.t'"^' '" ^1^^' Aktiengesellschaft. Preparation of 4.mclhy|.
544-l'82'00o''"'''''^^ "■''^■*"''^"*"'''''"^'"" '♦•*i'>,905, CI
Boodman, Norman S.; Farr, Elvin L.; Osterholm. Robert J.; and Green
Neulan B. Ill to United States Steel Corporation Process for r":
moving solids from coal tar. 4,436.615. CI 208-177 000
Boot. Herbert W.: See—
'M35.8'^9."ari"i2.?SS'' ""•"" "*"■• '"' ""^'^*"'^"- ^■-"''•
Booth. John L; and Rittmaster. Peter A., to B<M>th ManufaciurinK
Company. Packaging machine. 4,435.941. CI. 53-475 000
Booth Manufacturing Company: See—
Booth, John L.; and Rittmaster, Peter A.. 4,435,941, CI 53-475 OTK)
Borg-Warner Corporation: See—
Overzel, John K., 4,437,050, CI 318-798.000
Smirl, Richard L., 4,436,193, CI. 192-107 OOC
^T.?hJ^'"^K?'^ Jackson, Bernie F., to Baico, Inc Machine and
method for balancing wheels. 4,435.982, CI 73-462 000
Borstelmann, Wolfgang, to Holstein und Kappert GmbH Process and
UMOOO "^"''"8 oxygen-sensiiive liquids 4,436,124, CI.
Boryaev, Klim I.: See—
Vichkanova, Serafima A ; Shipulina, I.judmila D ; Gly/in Vladi-
mir I.; Bankovsky, Alcxandr I.; Pimenov, Mikhail G.; and
Boryaev. Klim 1 . 4.436.732. CI. 424-1 80 (X»
Boukamp, Bernard A.: See—
Huggins, Robert A.; and Boukamp, Bernard A , 4,416 796 CI
429-112.000.
'^"lYs'-Ts OOr''"'' ^ '^Pf"'"'*'"'' ''"'■ t^uning stone panels. 4,436,078, CI
Bowen, Leslie J., to GTE Lab<nalorics Incorporated. Low voltaue
ceramic varistor. 4,436,650, CI. 252-518 (XK)
Bowes, Laurence B.; and Gray, Thomas J., to General Motors Corpora-
n "!,"..Y^„ "'"'*'' ™^y molding a.ssembly. 4,436,337, CI. 296-201 (XX)
Boyd, Phillip R ; Green, Gary K ; and Sumner, Barbara E, to United
states of America, Army. Meth(xl of preparing a mercury cadium
ic:"I',T''«^. '""^ ^"^ passivation and processing. 4,436,580, CI
1 30-0.16. U(Xj.
Braach, Otto: See—
^S':^'^: a.'liDTilsSii'' ^'""^"' ^"^- ""'' '^'f'f"«' '*''"'''•
Bradley, David J., to International Business Machines Corporation
Apparatus and method for scrolling text and graphic data in selected
p<irlions of a graphic display. 4,437,093, CI 140-726 000
Brady, Michael J ; Meyerson, Bernard S.; and Warlaumoni, John M., to
M3K7! CI. 43o'.5"{X)0 ^'*''*""*^'' Corporation. X-Ray mask
Braginski, Aleksander I.: See—
^4,43a,. ci: m.m.-o^'"' "" '*"'' ""«'"^'"- ^'^''""'^- ' •
Braley, William W. Ice-breaking hull. 4,436,046, CI 1 14-42 000
Branch, Howard R., III. to Bristol Babc.Kk Inc. Ridge circuit compen-
sation for environmental effects. 4,437,164, CI 364-571 000
Branchick Kenneth J.; Nalkin, Irving; and Suchanski, Mary R, i„
Cr2()4"l49lX)o"'^ Corporation. Metal removal process 4,436,601,
Brandensiein, Manfred: See—
Ernst, Horst M.; Brandenstein, Manfred; Walter, Lolhar; and
Olschcwski, Armin, 4,435,890, CI. 29-148.40R
Olschewski. Armin; Brandenstein, Manfred; and Kunkel, Heinrich,
4,436,516, CI. 464-128000.
Brandon, Ronald E. Segmented labyrinth-type shaft sealing system for
nuid turbines 4,4.36,31 1, CI. 277-27.000
Brandstetler, Franz; Muench, Volker; Naarmann, Herbert; and Priebc
Edmund, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft Self-extinguishinu thermo-
plastic molding material. 4,4.36,854, CI. 524-139.000
Braud, Societe Anonyme Francaise: See—
Deux, Alain; and Merant. Jean C, 4,435,950, CI 56-330000
Brendel, Gottfried: See—
Krennrich, Otmar; Brendel, Gottfried; and Pielsch, Hartmut
4,436,704, CI. 423-11.000. » >>nui.
Bridgestone Tire Co.. Ltd.: See—
Suzul". Yasuo; Abe. Masaru; and Tezuka. loshiro. 4.436.130. CI
Yamaguchi. Yutaka; Koizumi. Nobuyuki; Araki. Tamio; Kojima
Koichi; and Ikeda. Nobumasa. 4.436.131, CI. 152-361 OFP
Yamamoto. Tsuyoshi; Taniguchi, Norihisa; lida, Kazuyoshi and
Kondo, Yoshikazu, 4,436,179. CI. 181-210000
Brieger, Emmet F.. to GEO Vann. Inc. Well cleanup and completion
apparatus 4.436.155. CI. 166-297 000
Brighlman. Barrie; and Niertit. Frank, to Stromberg-Carlson Corp
Concentrator circuit incorporating solid slate bilateral bridge ar-
rangement. 4.437.096. CI. 340-825.960.
Bristol BabctK-k Inc.: See-
Branch. Howard R . III. 4.437,164. CI. 364-571.000.
British Telecommunications: See-
Moss. Rodney H.; and Faktor. Marc M.. 4,436.769. CI. 427-252 000
PIS
Brixius Darryl W , and Simms, John A . lo Du Pont de Nemours, E I
and Company Preparation of is«H.yanate-functional polymers con-
laining a terminal monosulfide group 4.436.KK5. CI 526-214 OOf)
Hrockway, Inc (NY) S«- . »-i a^o ^i*i««j
McCausland. Thomas W , 4.4.16.544. CI 65-174 120
Broddon, Alan J : See—
''c.!'T,r36,".rcf 2^i.?;;)'S;"' ^'-" '■ -"" "^••^''""' ^~
Broddon, Norman C Sir—
''c'M36,"rcf 2'^9i-?7roS"' ^'"" '' ""' ""''''""• ^"^-"
Broecker. Fran/ J; Gruendler, Kari-Heinz, Marosi, Uszio; Schwar/-
mann, Matthias; Tricbskorn, Bruno, and Zirker, Guentcr. to BASF
Aktiengesellschaft Preparation of methanol synthesis catalyst com-
prising /inc. copper and aluminum 4,436,833. CI 502-176 000
Broken Hill Proprietary Company Limited. The See—
fc (XX)"'^'''^ •*■ «"d Callcoii, Thomas G, 4,436,618, CI
Brooks. Robc-ri T , K, Baker In.crnaiional Corporation Utch mecha-
nism for subsea test tree 4,436,157. CI 166-144 (XX)
Brossman, James W Jr ; Nemeth, Carol A , and Shapiro. Alan K . to
4 ;3M74.'cr 4',V4P.(iS^ '^"'"""^ """'" ''""^ ^ """^ '^""-'^
Brown, Anthony R : See—
Bertenshaw David R; L<H.kw(H>d, Edwin P.; and Brown
Anthony R, 4,437,169, CI .164-900 000
Brown, Boveri & Cic AG: See-
RifC. Rolf; and Wct/el, Peter, 4,436,951. CI 174-52 OPE
Brown, Edmund J Srt— - • i-
^^^^'"m ofX)'"'^"' ^ **"'^ Brown, Edmund J, 4,436,.103, CI
Brown, James R.: Sec—
^2"50-^07 00o'""^ " ""'^ Brown, James R., 4,436,994, CI.
"T,Il5,86rCl"6-i'S" ""'' '^"' ^'^'^"' "^"^ ''""' ^"•""'■•'^^ayv
Hrudermann, Uwe; Kun/e, Karl-H , Krehl, Gunter. Linde, E Volker
and Loren/, Dieter R . to Everest & Jennings, Inc Chassis for invalid
wheelchairs 4,436.320, CI. 280-242 OWC
Brueninghaus Hydraulik GmbH: See—
Berthold, Heinz, 4,435,992, CI 74-89 150
Bruker Analytische MeBtechnik GmbH See—
Biehl, Reinhard; and Schmalbein, Dieter, 4,437,063, CI.
BrumricId, Elmer B Flying device 4.436.264, CI 244-1 53 OOR
Brunncr, Josef See—
Rock, Erich; and Brunner, Jo»ef, 4,436,357, CI. 312-138 000
Brunswick Corporation Set'—
McCormick, Daniel F , 4,436,443, CI 403-14 000.
Scheie, Carl E ; and Muma, G Arnold, 4,437,010, CI 2^0-459 100
Bryan, James B , to United Slates of America, Energy Telesconina
magnetic ball bar test gage. 4,435,905, CI. 33-181 OOR
Bubnis, Benard P.: Sec—
Pacey, Gilbert E.; and Bubnis, Benard P, 4 436 921 CI
549-352.000. -• ■^i
Buck Daniel M ; Sibley, Alan T.; and Kaiser, John J , to Air Products
and Chemicals, Inc Process for providing a uniform carbon distribu-
V!\",i"^'^"""'' '^"'"pacts at high temperatures 4,436,696, CI
419-57.000.
Bucksiaff Company, Inc., The: See—
^'iai";.™^" ^ '""^ '*''^' Thomas L., 4,436,342. CI.
^97-445.000.
Budd Company. The: See—
Kirsch, Paul A . 4,436,373. CI 350-296.000.
Budda Hajia Handotai Kenkyu Shinkokai: See—
Nishi/awa. Jun-ichi. and Shiota. Ikuo, 4,436,770, CI. 427-255 300
Budzich. Tadeusz, to Caterpillar Tractor Company. Pressure compen-
sated fluid control valve 4,436,019. CI 91-446 000
Budzich. Tadeusz, to Caterpillar Tractor Company. Dual input pres-
sure compensated fluid control valve. 4,436,020, CI 91-446 000
Budzich Tadeusz, to Caterpillar Tractor Company Pressure compen- •
i^i' .,, .nA'!!!!^"' ^"'"'^ ^"^ maximum flow adjustment. 4.436.115,
CI. I j7-5*»6. 100.
Budzich, Tadeusz: See—
Gold, Harold; and Budzich, Tadeusz. 4.436.111. CI. 137-498 000
Buffalo Color Corp : See—
Groita. Henry M; and Gaughan. Perry J.. 4.436.625. CI.
Buhler. Arthur; and Schutz, Hans U., to Ciba-Geigy Corporation.
Metalized dyes, their manufacture and use. 4,436,659. CI. 260-
146. OOR.
^"4'!43T369^CI.'350-'l3o'oOO '''''"" '"' '"'^ Stereoscopic lens system.
Bull, Michael J., to Shell Internationale Research Maatschappij B V
Process for preparing cyclopropane carboxylic acid ester derivatives
4,436,667, CI. 260-465.00D.
Bunge, Richard H.: See—
Smitka. Tim A ; Bunge. Richard H.; French. James C; and Bloem
Russell J.. 4.436.750. CI. 424-279 000
Bunkenburg. Joachim, to GCA Corporation Interferometer using
transverse deviation of test beam. 4.436.424. CI 356-156 000
Burdick, Patricia E.; and Rapp. Ronald J., to Allied Corporation
Stabilizing SBR latex in cement formulations with low molecular
weight polymers 4.436.850. CI 524-8.000.
PI 6
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Burdick. Patricia E.: See—
Albee. Paul J . Jr ; and Burdick. Patricia E.. 4.436.863. CI
524-451000
Burger, Helga: and Rossmann. Christian, to Henkel KGaA. Regenera-
tion of aqueous degreasing and cleaning solutions. 4,436.643 CI
252-135 000.
Burkle. Wolfgang; and Opiiz. Dieter. Tension shaft for winding frames
4.436,252. CI. 242-72 OOB.
Burlington Industries. Inc : See—
Sumner. John H.. 4.435.955. CI 57-409.000.
Burns. Richard D : See—
Moodie. Eldon E; and Burns. Richard D. 4.436.585. CI
156-73 100.
Burough. Irvin G. See—
Passaro. Robert E; and Burough. Irvin G., 4.437.004 CI
250-343.000
Burroughs Corporation: See—
Harvey. Edgar L , 4.437.037. CI 313-585 000
Burt Precision Products. Inc : See—
DiMartino. Michelangelo. 4.436.461. CI. 409-132.000.
Busch. George E.: See —
Schaap. A Paul; Busch. George E.; and Nolen. Robert L.. Jr
4.436.715. CI 423-579.000.
Buss. David L Metal trough 4.436.518. CI 428-595.000.
Bussell. Hugh M. Modified A-frame structure 4.435.929. CI 52-93 000
Bussmann. Alfons See—
Rammler. Roland; and Bussmann. Alfons. 4.436.588 CI
201-12.000.
Bye. Donald J ; Stanisireel. Harold P; and Lindenstruth. Werner, to
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC Apparatus and process for the
production of pile surface articles 4.436.503. CI. 425-384.000.
Bye. Donald J ; Stanistrect. Harold P; and Lindenstruth, Werner, to
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC Apparatus and process for the
production of pile surface articles. 4,436.687, CI. 264-164.000.
C-R-O. Inc.: See —
Kellogg. James D; and Mingesz, August C. 4,436.288. CI
266-69000.
Calas. Bernard: See —
Aspisi. Christian; Calas. Bernard; Daunis. Jacques; Follet, Michel
Jacquier. Robert; and Parello. Joseph. 4.436.874. CI. 525-327.100
Caldwell. Lawrence G.. to Ducon Company. Inc.. The. Pneumatic
stream divider 4.436.459. CI. 406-181.000.
Caldwell. T Francis, to Puzzle Specialties. Device for facilitating
assembly, storage and transportation of a jigsaw puzzle. 4,436,307, CI.
Calgon Corporation: See—
Ralston. Paul H.; and Whitney. Sandra L.. 4.436,628. CI
210-697 000.
Callaway. Milton A . to Simons U.S.A. Corporation. Air bed arranae-
ment 4.435.864, CI. 5-453.000.
Callcolt. Thomas G.: See—
Rigby. Geoffrey R. and Callcott. Thomas G., 4,436,618 CI
209-5.000.
Callihan, Rudy B.; and Stone. Lyndon R.. to Baker Oil Tools, Inc
Apparatus for well cementing through a tubular member. 4,436,151.
CI. 166-154.000.
Calton. Gary J.: See-
Wood, Louis L.; and Calton, Gary J.. 4,436,813, CI. 435-109.000.
Campbell, Robert L.; and Bailey, Daniel D., to Bailey, Daniel D Fuel
pre-heat device. 4,436,075. CI 123-557.000.
Campbell. Robert L : See-
Davenport. Jeanne A.; Campbell, Robert L.; and Gallaway, James
F., 4,435,940. CI. 52-641.000.
Campbell, Willis R.: See—
Freimuth. John H.; and Campbell, \VilIis R., 4,436 027 CI
100-88000.
Canada, Her Majesty the Queen in right of, as represented by the
Minister of National Defence: See—
Dyck, Walter R.; and Hay. Burns R.. 4,436,096, CI. 128-689.000
Canadian Gas Research Institute: See—
Galati, Antonio. 4,436,059. CI. 122-17.000.
Canadian Patents & Development Limited: See—
Gauthier. Michel; Hackett. Peter A.; and Willis, Clive, 4,436 709
CI. 423-437.000. ....
Canel, Jules E.; and Gilligan, Thomas J., to Ampex Corporation. Core
memory controlled by auxiliary core. 4,437,173, CI. 365-193.000.
Canella, Marco; and Sodini, Giancarlo, to E.N.I. Ente Nazionale In-
drocarburi. Method for extracting mycotoxins from vegetable flours
4,436,756, CI. 426-430.000. *
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Endo. Kiyonobu; and Nose, Noriyuki. 4,436,398, CI. 354-476.000
Inuzuka. Tsuneki; Ishida, Masato; Tanioka, Hiroshi; and Sakamaki
Hisashi. 4,436,408, CI. 355-I4.0OR.
Kashiwagi, Kazuo, 4,436,391, CI. 353-26.00R.
Komiya. Yutaka, 4,436,410, CI. 355-I4.00E.
Sugitani, Hiroshi; Matsuda, Hiroto; and Ikeda. Masami, 4,437 100
CI. 346-1.100.
Takahashi, Junichi; Sakane, Toshio; and Itch, Yuji. 4,436,388 CI
351-206.000.
Tanaka, Nobuyoshi; Hashimoto, Seiji; and Kuwayama. Tetsuro
4,437,112, CI. 358-44.000.
Cantada, Edilberto, to Singer Company, The. Gate bracketing cushion-
ing spring arrangement for a sewing machine. 4,436,043. CI
112-221000.
Cantrell. John L.: See—
" 4.43?'7Y/. CI. 4M'-T7r^""- "*^'^" ""■'■ ""'^ ^'"'^'"- •'°^" L •
Carbonaro, Antonio; and Ripani. Luciano, to Enoxy Chimica S p A
Process for polymerizing conjugate diolefins, and means suitable for
this purpose 4.436,884. CI. 526-1 1 1.000.
Caribou Fisheries. Inc : See-
Trilling. David M.; and Smadar. Yechiel, 4,436,759, CI
426-573.000.
Carl Freudenberg, Firma: See—
Schmilt. Wilhelm, 4.436.317. CI. 277-134.000.
Carl Manufacturing Co , Ltd.; See—
Mori, Chuzo. 4.435.906. CI. 33-185 OOR
Carl-Zeiss-Sliftung: See—
'"'^jJl"- H^««: and Mollring. Friedrich K., 4,436,385, CI.
Carlson. Francis M.. to Standard Oil Company. In-situ combustion
method for controlled thermal linking of wells. 4.436,153. CI.
Carlson, Gordon S.. to Sunbeam Corporation Electric blanket safety
circuit. 4,436,986, CI. 219-505.000. -niici saieiy
Carlston, •'"ckE., and Johnson. Harold W. Portable pane mountable
solar panel 4.436.084. CI. 126-429000.
Carnicom. William M.. to NL Industries. Inc. Invert emulsion well
servicing fluids. 4,436.636. CI. 252-8.50P.
Carpency. Joseph F.: See—
Dowd. Edward J . deceased; and Carpency, Joseph F., 4,436,540.
Carpenter, Ralph F., to Pacific Electro Dynamics, Inc. Boost power
^f '^Pjy J!f ^'"8 Po^" factor correction circuit. 4,437.146 CI
363-21.000
Carroll. Edward L.: See-
Meyer, Richard C; and Carroll, Edward L., 4,435,989, CI
73-864.140.
Carroll, Frank I.: See—
Stelz. Dale E^arroll. Frank I.; and Whaley. Wilson M.. 4,436,641,
CI. 252-68.000.
Carson. Franklin D.; and Gumert. William R.. to Carson Helicopters
Inc. Airborne gravity surveying. 4.435,981, CI. 73-382.00R.
Carson Helicopters. Inc.: See-
Carson. Franklin D.; and Gumert, William R . 4,435,981, CI. 73-
^Ti?r*f<"<; l^f","f' ^ ^ '^c'oMWe drill string device and method.
4,436, 158, CI. 166-377.000.
Cash, Daniel L.; and Stoddard. Frank L. Inert gas distributor attach-
ment for arc welding torches. 4.436,977. CI. 219-75 000
Cassella Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Schonafinger, Karl; Beycrle. Rudi; Bohn. Helmut; Just, Melitta
Martorana, Piero A.; and Nitz, Rolf-Eberhard. 4.436,743, Cl'
424-269000.
Castagnos. Leonce F.. Jr.: See—
Sayles. Scott M.; Castagnos, Leonce F., Jr.; Schrader, Charles H
Dillingham, Edward W.; and Scott, Richard P., deceased'
4,436,613,0.208-74.000.
Castleman, Bonnie L.; and Jean, Mary. Tennis teaching aid. 4,436,304,
CI. 273-29. OOA.
Castro, Robert M.: See—
Norris, Brian; and Castro, Robert M., 4,436,592, CI. 204-15 000
Caterpillar Tractor Company: See—
Budzich, Tadeusz. 4,436,019, CI. 91-446.000.
Budzich, Tadeusz, 4,436,020, Cl. 91-446 000
Budzich, Tadeusz, 4,436,1 15, Cl. 137-596.100.
Cavy, Claude; and Rolland, Marie L., to Commissariat a I'Energie
Atomique. Device for bringing about coincidence between the axis of
a measuring probe and a normal to the surface of a part to be con-
trolled. 4,437,012, Cl. 250-491.100.
Ceaser, Anthony V. Fluoride containing compositions for removal of
pollutants from waste waters and methods of utilizing same.
Ceelen, Theodorus M.; Jeromin, Lothar S.; and Wright, Lamont R., to
Xerox Corporation. Xerographic toner cleaning sution. 4,436,054.
Cl. 118-652.000.
Cellitti, Raymond A.: See-
Connelly, John J.; and Cellitti, Raymond A., 4,436,289, Cl.
Celmcr, Walter D.; Cullen, Walter P.; Shibakawa, Riichiro; and Tone,
Junsukc, to Pfizer Inc. Nargcnicin Ci. 4,436,747, Cl. 424-274.000.
Centre Electronique Horloger S.A.: See—
Choffat, Hubert. 4,435,986. Cl. 73-702.000. "
Cerami, Anthony, to Evreka, Inc. Monitor for continuous in vivo
measurement of glucose concentration. 4,436,094, Cl. 128-635.000.
Cesar, Jean-Pierre; and Charvet, Jean-Louis, to Compagnic Generale
des Etablissements Michclin. Bead rings for tires. 4,436,132, Cl
152-362.00R.
Chachowski. Rosemary K.: See-
Graham, Henry A., Jr.; Hawk, Johnna B.; and Chachowski, Rose-
mary K., 4,436,631, Cl. 210-772.000.
Chalmers, Samuel A. Power Uke ofTgear box. 4.435,990, Cl. 74-15.630.
Chandhoke, Mohanjit S., to Harris Graphics Corporation. Horizontal
bindery loader adaptor for feeding signatures into a vertical t>ocket.
4,436,297, Cl. 271-3.100.
Chandrasekaran, Sanlosh K.: See—
Urquhart, John; Chandrasekaran, Santosh K.; and Shaw. Jane E..
4,436,741, Cl. 424-267.000.
Chang, Hui-Huang. Universal multi-socket ratchet wrench. 4.436,004.
Cl. 81-60.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 7
^*1"18' Long F.. to Owens-Illinois. Inc Ribbed base cups. 4,436.216. Cl.
Chang. Melvin C; and Howell, John L.. to United States Steel Corpo-
4"436"552 Cl°7'5 4[ooo"''^^ operation with high pellet burdens
Chappell. Joseph S.: See—
Sasseville. Roland E.; Chappell. Joseph S.; and Corcoran. Daniel J .
Jr.. 4.435,965, Cl. 68-205 OOR.
Chans, Phillip S ; and Sweeney. Roy. to Chans. Phillip Stewart, a part
interest. Apparatus for positive vignetting. 4.436.400, Cl. 354-296 000
Chans, Phillip Stewart: See—
Charis. Phillip S.; and Sweeney. Roy, 4,436.400, Cl. 354-296.000.
Charles. Hugh G. Window insulation system. 4,436,137, Cl.
160-242.000.
Charvet. Jean-Louis: See-
Cesar. Jean-Pierre; and Charvet. Jean-Louis. 4.436,132, Cl. 152-
Chass. Jacob, to Pickering & Company. Inc. Linear dilTcrcntial trans-
tormer with constant amplitude and variable phase output. 4.437,019.
Cl. 307-83 000.
Chemischc Fabnk Grunau GmbH: See—
Kadelka. Friednch. 4.436.556. Cl. 106-90.000.
Chernosky. John E Keyless lock. 4.436.328, Cl. 292-67.000.
Chevron Research Company: See—
Olbnch. Hazel C; O'Rear. Dennis J ; and Zakarian, John A
4,436,614, Cl. 208-89.000.
Slemkc. Jeffrey E., 4,436,649. Cl. 252-51. 50A.
Yamaguchi, Elaine S., 4,436,640, Cl. 252-32 70E.
Cheynet et ses fils: See—
Cheynet, Rene. 4,436,121, Cl 139-116.000
Cheynet, Rene, to Cheynet ct ses fils Process for manufacturing an
elastic or non-elastic ribbon. 4,436, 1 2 1 , Cl. 1 39- 1 1 6.000.
Chijd, Edward T.; and Crouch, William B , to Texaco Development
Corporation. Process for gasifying solid carbon containing materials
4,436.530. Cl. 48-I97.00R.
Chimici Perdomini S.p.A.: See—
Perdomini. Luciano; Tonon. Elia; and Paronelto. Lanfranco
4,436,755, Cl. 426-15.000.
Chiron, Alain, to Applications Mecaniques ct Robinettene Industncllc.
Butterfly valve with an improved obturation device. 4,436,281, Cl.
Chloride Group Public Limited Company: See-
Cooper. Michael J.; and Parker, James, 4,436,795, Cl. 429-53.000
Choffat, Hubert, to Centre Electronique Horloger S.A Pressure trans-
ducer of the vibrating element type. 4,435,986. Cl. 73-702.000.
Cholod. Michael S., to Rohm and Haas Company. Copolyester of
polyethylene tcrephthalatc and sulfonyl diphcnol. 4,436,893, Cl
528-173.000.
Christidis, Yani; and Fournex. Robert, to RousscI Uclaf. Treatment of
gastric and gastro-duodenal disorders with derivatives of phenyl
aliphatic carboxylic acids. 4,436,752, Cl. 424-317.000.
Christie, George A.: See—
Kluge, Arthur F.; Sirosberg. Arthur M.; Whiting, Roger L. and
Christie, George A.. 4,436.914. Cl. 548-348.000
Christopher, Chris J.; Wenninger. Fred W.; Morns. Donald E Coving-
ton. Wayne F.; Folsom. Jerry B.; Beyers. Joseph W,; Nairn, John H
and Osborne. Jeffrey C, to Hewlett-Packard Company. Programma-
ble calculator 4.437,156, Cl. 364-200.000
Chromecek, Richard C; Friends, Gary D.; Wissman. Lawrence Y.; and
Yourd, Raymond A., III. to Bausch A Lomb Incorporated. N-Vinyl
lactam based biomedical devices. 4,436,887, Cl. 526-263.000.
Chumley, William M. Landscaping and seeding apparatus. 4,436,040.
Cl. 111-10.000.
Church, Kenneth: See-
Strong. William A.; and Church. Kenneth, 4,436,429, Cl 366-2.000
Strong, William A.; and Church, Kenneth, 4,436,431, Cl.
366-17.000.
Ciba-Gcigy AG: See—
Fryberg, Mario; and Weiss, Viktor, 4,436,811, Cl. 430-564.000.
Shcnnan, Christopher D.; and Fry, Michael W , 4.436,798. Cl
430-17.000.
Ciba-Geigy Corporation: See—
Aufderhaar, Ernst; Sprecher, Klemenz; and Zeraenyi, Janos.
4,436,660, Cl. 26O-239.0OD.
Babler, Fridolin, 4,436,852, Cl. 524-88.000.
Berrcr, Dagmar; Pissiotas, Georg; and Rohr, Otto, 4,436,935, Cl.
564-49.000.
Boray, Joseph C, 4,436,737, Cl. 424-225.000.
Buhler, Arthur; and Schutz, Hans U., 4,436,659. Cl. 260-I46.00R
Howell, Frederick H., 4,436,936, Cl. 564-409.000.
Hugelshofer, Paul; Zbinden, Peter; and Koci, Zdenek, 4,436,523,
Cl. 8-527.000.
Irving, Edward, 4,436,880, Cl. 525-504.000.
Pfaendlcr, Hans R., 4,436,661, Cl. 260-245.300.
Renfroc, Harris B.. 4,436.746, Cl. 424-273.00R.
Sasseville, Roland E.; Chappell, Joseph S.; and Corcoran, Daniel J.,
Jr., 4,435,965, Cl. 68-205.00R.
Sedelmeier, Gottfncd; and Scartazzini, Riccardo, 4,436,903, Cl.
544-016.000.
Zondler, Helmut; Lohse, Friedrich; and Moser, Roland, 4.436.892.
Cl. 528-117.000.
Ciciora. John A., to Nelson ft Johnson Engineering. Material compac-
tor utilizing a power transmission mechanism. 4.436.030. Cl.
100-268.000.
Claire. Edward W : See—
Dahlgren. William V., Jr . Silverstein, Uwis S ; and Claire Ed-
ward W., 4,437.150. Cl. 364-474.000
Clarke, William C: See-
Fields^ Ellis K.; and Clarke. William C . 4.436.940, Cl 568-857 000
Clayton. Harold K, Jr.. to Cooper Industries. Inc Encapsulated water-
r4T7 084"a"33T22*OOR'''* '^*^'" '"'^ '""*'°^ °^ manufacture
Clere. Thomas M : See—
Bennett, William R.; and Clere. Thomas M. 4.436,608, Cl
Clutter. James E Vehicle wheel splash guard. 4,436.319, Cl. 280-
Clyde Corporation; See—
MacDonald, Murdo A.. 4.436,197, Cl. 198-389 000
Coca-Cola Company, The: See—
Credle. William S., Jr., 4,436,493. Cl 417-393 000
Cocal. Inc : See-
Moore. Wiley I ; and Tassoni. Ronald L , 4,436,617, Cl. 209-3 000
A !?i?"i'-.i'"A7 ,«■ '" ^^^ Corporation Dynamic conng circuit.
4,4j7,l24, Cl. 3$8-166000
Cohen. Eric S Telephone lock. 4,436.967. Cl I79-189.O0R
Cohen. Georges; and Heroux, Jean, to Thomson-CSF Ultrahigh-fre-
9"/,",'^L"''"*'"'""'" ''"*' °^^^^ three-plate air type and uses thereof
4.437.074. Cl. 333-128.000
Colder Products Company: See—
Blenkush. Brian J.. 4.436.125. CI. 141-330000.
Coldren. Daniel R ; and Schwenk, Dennis P . to AMP Incorporated
Terminal tab intended for mounting on a circuit board. 4.436,358, Cl.
Cole. James H . to United States of Amcnca. Navy. Signal waveform
detector using synthetic FM demodulation. 4,436.425, Cl.
356-361 .000.
Coleman Company. Inc . The: See—
Hefling, Dennis V , 4,436.081, Cl I26-285.00A.
Colgate-Palmolive Company: See—
Gaffar, Abdul, 4,436,721, Cl 424-52 000.
Ramachandran, Pallassana N , and Peterson. Kenneth S , 4,436 637
Cl. 252-8.700
Zmoda, Barney J ; and Fessock. Paul J . 4,436,525. Cl 44-7 300
Collonia. Harald, to VDO Adolf Schindling AG. Setting device for the
controlled displacement of a stop connected with a setting member
4.436.069. Cl 123-339 000
Colpaert. James J See—
Ritsema, Irving R; and Colpaert, James J, 4,436,186. Cl
1 88-7 1 .800.
Combustion Engineering, Inc : See—
Wentzcll. Timothy H., 4,436,190, Cl I91.I2.20R.
Comitalonazionale Per Lienergia Nucleare: See—
Masotto, Ermanno; and Gagliardi. Sergio, 4,436.655 Cl
252-628.000 » . • ^^,
Commissanat a I'Energie Atomique: See—
Cavy. Claude; and Rolland, Mane L., 4.437,012. Cl. 250-491 100.
Compa^nie Francaise des Petroles: See—
Josien. Daniel; and Migliarese. Jean-Louis, 4,436,120 Cl
138-93.000.
Compagnie Generale des Etablissements Michelin: See-
Cesar, Jean-Pierre; and Charvet, Jean-Louis, 4,436,132, Cl. 152-
362.00R
Compagnie Industnelle des Telecommunications: See—
Tallon, Jacques, 4,436,998. Cl. 250-288.000.
Conger/Murray Systems, Inc.: See-
Murray, John A., 4.436.498. Cl 425-73.000.
Connelly. John J ; and Cellitti. Raymond A . to International Harvester
Co. Method and apparatus for controlling the atmosphere in a carbu-
nzing furnace utilizing a cascaded valving system 4.436,289, Cl
266-80.000
Connery, Richard J.: See-
Anthony, Thomas R.; Connery, Richard J.; and Hoeschcle, David
F.. Jr . 4,437,109, Cl. 357-68.000
Contour Med Partners. Ltd.: See—
White. David N., 4.436,684, Cl. 264-138.000.
Converse. Maurice Infant safety car seat 4,436,341, Cl. 297-250 000
Cook, William A., Fcarnot, Ncal E., and Geddes, Leslie A., to Purdue
Research Foundation. Exercise responsive cardiac pacemaker
4.436.092, Cl. 1 28-41 9.0PG
Cooper. Barry A . to Bemis Company, Inc. Composite stretch wrap
film 4.436.788. Cl 428-483 000
Cooper Industries. Inc.: See-
Clayton. Harold K., Jr., 4.437.084. Cl. 338-22.00R
Cooper. Michael J.; and Parker. James, to Chloride Group Public
Limited Company. Alkaline electric storage cells. 4,436,795. Cl
429-53.000.
Coose. James P.: See-
Morgan, Ira L.; Sudarshan. E C George; Mitchell. Alvin L .
Coose, James P.; Ellingcr, Hunter D.; and Jagger, James W .
4,437,006, Cl 25O-363.0OS.
Copplc, Kerry J., to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I , and Company Method
for making balanced low shrink tension polyolefin film. 4,436,888. Cl
526-348.100
Coquillart, Michel, to Mavilor Systemes. Rotor with a cooling device,
more particularly of the commuutor, for electric motors, and the
method and means for making this device 4,437,030, Cl 310-227 000
Corcoran, Daniel J., Jr : See—
Sasseville, Roland E ; Chappell, Joseph S., and Corcoran, Daniel J.,
Jr., 4,435.965. Cl. 68-205.00R.
PI 8
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Cork, Robin M S.; and Rose, David B., to International Business
Machines Corp Method of testing a data communication system
4,437,184, CI. 371-19.000.
Corneille, David M , to Corneille, David M. Thermionic cathode and
process for preparing the same. 4,436,651, CI 252-521.000.
Comell-Dubilier Electric Corporation: See—
Pitel, Ira J.. 4,437.043, CI. 315-308.000.
Coming Glass Works: See—
Howell, Robert G., 4,436,829, CI. 501-22.000.
Keck, Donald B., 4,436,368, CI. 350-96.330.
Corry, Stuart E.; and Grade, Lanny V., to Geolograph Company, The.
Apparatus for indicating critical torque load. 4,435,988, CI.
73-862.190
Cota, Albert O ; and Obray, Dean C Delayed vehicle starter 4,436,176,
CI 180-287.000
Cottrell, Jennie L.; Davis, Richard A ; Harris, Susan K.; Jones, Bernard
R ; and Payseur, John Y , to Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorpo-
rated. Implied principal addressing in a call coverage arrangement
4,436,963, CI I79-18.00B
Coura, Herbert R : See—
Tuchenhagen, Otto A. P.; Mieth, Hans O. E.; and Coura. Herbert
R , 4,436,106, CI. 137-240.000.
Covington, Wayne F : See—
Christopher. Chris J ; Wenninger. Fred W.; Morris, Donald E ;
Covington, Wayne F; Folsom, Jerry B.; Beyers, Joseph W.;
Nairn, John H.; and Osborne, Jeffrey C, 4,437,156, CI.
364-200.000.
Cox, Raymond G Tool for supporting and turning threaded members
4.436,003, CI. 81-57 430.
CR Industries: See —
Hatch, Seymour A.: and Morley, James P., 4,436,315, CI.
277-92.000
Craig, Clark E , to Keystone Consolidated Industries, Inc Motorcycle
saddle bag lock 4,435,966, CI 70-161.000.
Crane, Barry D : See—
Beggs, William R ; and Crane, Barry D., 4,436,437, CI. 374-32.000.
Crane, Walton B : See—
Nason, Frederic L.; and Crane. Walton B., 4,436,243, CI
229-27 000
Credle, William S.. Jr , to Coca-Cola Company, The. Self contained
pump and reversing mechanism therefor. 4,436.493, CI. 417-393.000
Crisp. Malcolm; and Lewis. Christopher, to Plessey Overseas Limited
Method of and apparatus for assessing coins. 4,436,196, CI 194-
lOO.OOA
Crompton & Knowles Corporation: See —
Faillace, Louie M., 4.437,046. CI. 318-571.000.
Cronan. Walter I. Guide member for a roller-type classifying machine.
4.436.208. CI 209-668 000
Cross. Henry F ; and Harman. Maurice, to Energy Equipment Co Ltd.
Method and apparatus enabling thermal energy recovery in combus-
tor operation. 4.436,057, CI. 122-4.00D
Crouch, William B : See—
Child. Edward T.; and Crouch. William B.. 4.436.530. CI. 48-
197 OOR.
Crowe. Robert E.. to Terrafix Erosion Control Products, Inc. Erosion
control blocks. 4.436.447. CI 405-76000.
Crowley. Burlon C: See—
Tetenbaum. Marvin T.; and Crowley. Burlon C, 4,436,862, CI.
524-445.000.
Crown Zellerbach Corporation: See-
Lane. Stanley C , 4,436,703, CI. 422-225.000.
Crutcher, John P.: See—
Vornberger, George F ; and Crutcher, John P., 4,436,237, CI
227-130.000.
Cullen, John S.; Incorvia, Samuel A.; and Vogi, James A., to Multiform
Desiccants, Inc Adsorbent cartridge 4.436,623, CI. 210-282 000.
Cullen, Walter P.: See—
Celmer, Walter D.; Cullen. Walter P.; Shibakawa. Riichiro; and
Tone. Junsuke, 4.436.747, CI. 424-274.000
Cummings, Robert J , to United States of America, Air Force. Wind-
blast head protector for use during pilot ejection from an aircraft.
4,436,262, CI 244-122.0AG
Cunningham, Patrick J. Cardiovascular exercise apparatus. 4,436,097.
CI 128-707.000.
Cuscurida. Michael: See—
Rowton. Richard L.; and Cuscurida. Michael. 4.436.843, CI.
521-167.000.
Dahl, James M.; Jacobs, Bernard B.; Lipovac, Joseph E.; Meglen,
Ralph A.; and Ward, Donald W., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Com-
pany, The. Mold and vent plug therefor. 4,436,497, CI. 425-28.00R.
Dahlgren, William V., Jr.; Silverstein, Lewis S.; and Claire, Edward W.
Tool manipulating method and apparatus for multiple job processing.
4,437.150. CI. 364-474.000.
Dai Nippon Toryo Co , Ltd.: See—
Yamabe, Masaaki; Higaki, Hiromichi; Shinohara, Toshio; Tanabe,
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama, Shunsuke, 4,436,772, CI. 427-379.000.
Yamabe, Masaaki; Higaki, Hiromichi; Shinohara, Toshio; Tanabe,
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama, Shunsuke, 4,436,773, CI. 427-380.000.
Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See—
Okamoto, Ichiro; and Toga, Yuzo, 4,436,896. CI. 156-332.000.
Daigle. O. L.: See—
Barczak, Virgil J.; Perkins, Haywood A.; and Daigle, O. L.,
4,436,681, CI. 264-67.000.
Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Mehren, Herbert, and Pamk, Ferdinand, 4,436.170. CI. 180-131.000.
Daiwa Can Company, Limited: See —
Nishida, Yoshiaki; Yano, Shunji; and Masuyama, Tadahiro,
4,436,594, CI. 204-33.000.
Daly, Francis P.; and Wilhelm, Frederick C, to Air Products and
Chemicals, Inc. Catalyst for the hydrodealkylation of alkylaromatic
compounds. 4,436,836, CI. 502-317.000
Dambroth, Jurgen, to Rux GmbH. Firma. Gardening device. 4,435,951,
CI. 56-400.050.
Danfoss A/S: See—
Zangenberg, Jan, 4,436,489, CI. 417-218.000.
Daniel Industries, Inc.: See—
Geisow, Bernard H., 4,436,280, CI. 251-229.000.
Daniels, Jesse: See-
Temple, William F.; and Daniels, Jesse, 4,436,484, CI. 416-178.000.
Darby, Kenneth S. Free-sail system sailboard simulator. 4,436,513, CI.
434-60.000.
Darling, Phillip H. Piston actuated, pilot valve operated breathing
regulator. 4,436,090, CI. 128-204.260
Darmouni, Corinne, to Thomson-CSF. Self-corrected electric filters.
4,437,075, CI. 333-167.000.
Darome, Inc.: See—
Botros, Radamis, 4,436,966, CI. I79-12I.00D.
Datakey, Inc.: See-
Flies, William P., 4,436,993, CI. 235-382.000.
Daunis, Jacques: See—
Aspisi, Christian; Calas, Bernard; Daunis, Jacques; Follet, Michel;
Jacquier. Robert; and Parello, Joseph, 4,436,874, CI. 525-327.100.
Davenport, Jeanne A.; Campbell, Robert L.; and Gallaway, James F.,
to Angeles Metal Trim Co. Metal building truss. 4,435,940. CI.
52-641.000.
Davis, Burns: See—
Barbee, Robert B.; and Davis, Burns, 4,436,895, CI. 528-288 000.
Davis. Richard A.; Harris. Susan K.; and Jones. Bernard R.. to Bell
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Call coverage arrangement.
4,436,962. CI. 179-18.0OB.
Davis. Richard A.: See—
Cottrell, Jennie L.; Davis. Richard A.; Harris, Susan K.; Jones,
Bernard R.; and Payseur, John Y., 4,436,963, CI. 179.18.00B.
Davis, Richard F., to Dayco Corporation. Curved mandrel for curing
polymeric hose and method. 4,436,690, CI. 264-313.000.
Davis, Roy A.; and Madison, Norman L., to Dow Chemical Company,
The. Polyoxazoline-modificd, paper coating. 4,436.789, CI.
428-537.000.
Davis, Sydney; and Malakhoff, Alexander. Transversely supported seal.
4,436,312,0.277-34.000.
Davy McKee Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Koschinek, Gunter; Wandel, Dietmar; Kretschmann, Bernd; and
Zinsser, Rolf, 4,436,688. CI 264- 176 OOF.
Davy McKee Aktiengesellschaft, Borsigalle: See—
Hofmann. Hansdieter; Rothe, Hans-Jochen; Skupin, Georg; and
Wolff, Konrad, 4.436,898, CI. 528-336.000.
Dayco Corporation: See —
Davis, Richard F., 4,436,690, CI. 264-313.000.
Dean, Mark E.; Eggebrecht, Lewis C; Kummer, David A.; and Saenz.
Jesus A., to International Business Machines Corporation. Coloi*
video display system having programmable border color. 4,437,092,
CI. 340-703.000.
Deere &. Company: See—
Gradmann, Gerhard, 4.436,065, CI. 123-179.00B.
Hauk, Klaus, 4,435,875, CI. 15-250.230.
Hurt, James J ; and Foss, Susan K., 4,437,151, CI. 364-571.000.
DeFilippis, John: See —
Mazza, Frank J.; and DeFilippis, John, 4,436,957, CI. I79-2.0EA.
Degremont: See—
Hoica, Radu, 4,436,605. CI. 204-225.000.
de Groot. Marius: See —
Leeuwma, Derk B.; and de Groot. Marius. 4.436,110, CI.
137-487.500.
Degussa Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Kleemann, Axel; Lehmann, Bernd; and Martens, Jurgen, 4,436,910.
CI. 546-245.000.
de Hek, Johan A., to Veco Beheer B.V. Process of eleclroforming
screen material. 4,436,591, CI. 204-11.000.
De Jong, Sijtze: See—
Smoot, Arren F.; and De Jong, Sijtze, 4,436,449, CI. 405-170.000.
Demirjian, Ara M.; and Solbes, Albert, to United States of America,
Energy. Apparatus for electrode current control in linear MHD
generators. 4,437,026, CI. 310-11.000.
Demke, Kent R.; and Dwire, Jerold D., to International Business
Machines Corporation. Multiple half-line spacing on a miniature
pa^e. 4,437,167, CI. 364-900.000.
de Nie-Sarink, Margaretha J.: See—
Baardman, Frank; van Helden, Robert; and de Nie-Sarink, Mar-
garetha J., 4,436,937. CI. 564-409.000.
Depp, Steven W ; and Sincerbox, Glenn T., to International Business
Machines Corporation. Optical fluid analyzing apparatus and
method. 4,436,420, CI. 356-128.000.
Deuschle, Steffi: See—
Nonnenmann. Manfred; and Deuschle. Steffi. 4,436,245. CI.
236-49.000
Deux, Alain; and Merant, Jean C, to Braud. Societe Anonyme Fran-
caisc. Fruit or berry harvesting device for in-line crops. 4,435.950. CI.
56-330.000.
de Vries, Jan, to Thomassen Amsterdam B.V. Gate valve with reinforc-
ing ribs. 4,436,282. CI. 251-329.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 9
de Wilde. Johannes, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Method of manufac-
turing a magnetic head unit. 4,435,900, CI. 29-603 000.
Deyesso, Joseph P.; Sarser, David; and Berubt, Richard G., to King
Instrument Corporation. Tape winding system. 4,436.251. CI. 242-
56,0OR.
Diamond Shamrock Chemicals Company: See—
Schick, Martin J.; and Knitter, Kathy A., 4,436.528, CI. 44-51.000.
Diamond Shamrock Corporation: See-
Bennett, William R.; and CIcre, Thomas M.. 4.436,608. CI.
204-265.000.
Branchick, Kenneth J.; Nalkin, Irving; and Suchanski, Mary R.,
4,436,601, CI. 204-149,000
Diasonics (NMR) Inc.: See—
Bax, Ronald F., 4,437,053, CI. 323-268.000.
Dick, Neil M., to 4-D Electronics Company, Inc. Coin collecting and
counting systems. 4,436,103, CI. 133-3.00D.
Didicr-Werke AG: See—
Eschner, Axel; Ganz, Rudolf; Tkotz, Gunter; Stein. Hermann; and
Kreuels, Klaus, 4,436,680, CI. 264-60.000.
Diefenbach, Horst: See—
Balzill, Wolfgang; Diefenbach, Horst; Geist, Michael: and Schupp,
Eberhard, 4,436,878. CI 525-438.000
Diepers, Heinrich, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Ultrasonic transducer
matrix having filler material with different acoustical impedance.
4,437,033, CI. 310-334.000.
Diery, Helmut, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Polymeric ethylene
oxide/propylene oxide or ethylene oxide/but ylene oxide ether car-
boxylic acids, a process for their preparation and their use. 4,436,933,
CI. 562-470.000.
Dietrich, Manfred: See —
Rasshofer, Werner; Reichmann, Wolfgang; Richartz, Adolf; and
Dietrich, Manfred, 4,436,841, CI. 521-106.000.
Dietz, Raymond L.; Featherby, Michael; and Margetts, Peter K., to
Johnson Matthey Inc. Silver-filled glass. 4.436,785, CI. 428-427.000.
DiGiacomo, Peter M.; and Dines, Martin B., to Occidental Research
Corporation. Layered organophosphorus inorganic polymers.
4,436,899, CI. 528-395.000.
Dillingham, Edward W.: See—
Sayles, Scott M.; Castagnos, Leonce F.. Jr.; Schrader, Charles H.;
Dillingham, Edward W.; and Scott, Richard P., deceased,
4,436,613, CI. 208-74.000
DiMartino, Michelangelo, to Burt Precision Products, Inc. Method and
apparatus for fabricating fusion reactor coils. 4,436,461, CI.
409-132.000.
Dines, Martin B.: See—
DiGiacomo, Peter M.; and Dines, Martin B., 4,436.899, CI.
528-395.000.
Dinka, Stephen K., to Pitman-Moore, Inc. Cell growth promoting
material. 4,436,816, CI. 435-240.000.
Dinkelacker, Paul H.: See—
Bonham, Richard T.; Sigiols, John P.; and Dinkelacker, Paul H.,
4,436,045. CI. 112-313.000.
Dipper, Barry: See-
Wood, Denis; Thomas. John F., Jr.; and Dipper, Barry, 4,436,371,
CI. 350-281.000.
Dirksing, Robert S.; and Barker, Dale E.. to Procter & Gamble Com-
pany, The Dispenser suspension means employing planar spring-
loaded detent. 4,436,269, CI. 248-214.000.
Dirnberger, Linus R.: See—
Ludwig, Richard H.; Quan, Wing C; Husson, Alan L.; Dirnberger,
Linus R.; and Polis, Marjorie J., 4,436,185, CI. 187-29.00R.
Dismukes, Newton B. Thrust generator for boring tools. 4,436,168, CI.
175-94.000.
Dobhan, Herbert: See—
Horling, Peter; Hetterich, Hermann; Dobhan, Herbert; and Klup-
fel, Norbert, 4,435,889, CI. 29-148.40C.
Dobkin, Igor I.: See—
Shevakin, Jury F.; Dobkin, Igor I.; Donskoi, Efim M.; Manov,
Grigory L.; Zhdanov, Vasily V.; Bcrger, Elena S.; Popov, Va-
lery M.; Pavlov, Alexei A.; and Akchurin. Rashid Z.. 4.435,886,
CI. 29-33.00D.
Doctor, Alan P., to Eltec Instruments. Inc. Differential pyroelectric
sensor with static discharge. 4,437.003, CI. 250-338.000.
Dodge, Marlow W.: See —
Johnson, Arthur L., Jr.; and Dodge, Marlow W., 4,436.227. CI.
222-382.000.
Doery. Michael S.; Hanzlik, Edward W. C; Adamek, John A.; and
McLaughlin, William J., to Xerox Corporation. Document restack
transport. 4,436.301. CI. 271-177.000.
Dohi, Takashi: See—
Shinozaki, Nozomu; Neki. Shigeo; and Dohi, Takashi, 4,437,061,
CI. 324-166.000.
Dolan. John E. Automatic toilet bowl cleaning device. 4,435,858, CI.
4-228.000.
Dollhausen, Manfred: See—
Neuhaus, Karl-Friedrich; Muller-Albrecht, Horst; Dollhausen,
Manfred; and Perrey, Hermann, 4,436,570, CI. 156-273.300.
Donahue, Gordon J., to Voplex Corporation. Pin support and mold for
foaming and curing resin exterior over ball core. 4,436,276, CI.
249-91.000.
Donato, Anthony C; and Rusio. Neil, to Lighlolier Incorporated.
Lighting fixture with snap replaceable bulb feature. 4,437,142, CI.
362-226.000.
Donelan, Edward J., to United States of America. Air Force. Optical
scanner for use in confined areas. 4,436,260. CI. 244-3.160.
Donnelly, Bernard J., to Thorburn Technics (International) Limited.
Eddy current testing apparatus including a two coil probe having
sandwiched windings 4,437,062, CI. 324-238.000.
Donnelly Mirrors, Inc.: See-
Wood, Denis; Thomas, John P., Jr.; and Dipper, Barry. 4,436,371.
CI. 350-281.000.
Donner, Siegmar; Strempler, Gunter; and Schmid, Manfred, to Klein-
dienst GmbH & Co.; and KG Maschinenfabrik. Sheet feeder.
4,436,298, CI. 271-10.000.
Donskoi, Efim M.: See—
Shevakin, Jury F.; Dobkin, Igor I.; Donskoi, Efim M ; Manov,
Grigory L.; Zhdanov, Vasily V.; Berger, Elena S ; Popov, Va-
lery M.; Pavlov, Alexei A.; and Akchurin, Rashid Z., 4,435,886,
CI 29-33.00D
Dorman, John G ; Balbo, Anthony M.; Randall, Charles E.; and Sette,
Robert A., to Westmghouse Electric Corp. Elevator system.
4,436,184, CI. 187-29.00R.
Dornier System GmbH: See-
Schmidt, Gunther; and Etzler, Carl-Christian, 4,436,259, CI.
244-3.100
Douglas, George H : See—
Studt, William L ; Zimmerman, Harry K.; and Douglas, George H.,
4,436,911, CI 546-291.000.
Dow Chemical Company, The: See-
Davis, Roy A.; and Madison, Norman L., 4,436,789, CI.
428-537.000.
Janiga, Eugene R., 4,436,875, CI. 525-385.000.
Dow Corning Corporation: See—
Mikami, Ryuzo; and Nakasuji, Katsuyoshi, 4,436,787, CI.
428-447.000
Dowd, Dorothy N., legal representative: See—
Dowd, Edward J., deceased; and Carpency, Joseph F., 4,436,540,
CI. 62-30.000
Dowd, Edward J., deceased (by Dowd, Dorothy N , legal representa-
tive); and Carpency, Joseph F., to Exxon Research &. Engineering
Co. Low pressure separation for light hydrocarbon recovery.
4,436,540, CI 62-30.000.
Downey, Robert C, Jr , to Harsco Corporation. Insulated slat.
4,436,136, CI 160-232 000.
Dragerwerk Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Blumcke, Alfred; Fischer, Peter; and Vahlensieck, Hans-Joachim,
4.436,823, CI. 436-169,000
Dran, Maurice; and Jamel, Bernard, to Saint Gobain Vitrage. Device
for manufacturing a healing glass plate. 4,436,575, CI 15M33 000.
Dravo Corporation: See—
Jaquay. Louis H.; and Venetti. Mark, 4,436,61 1, CI. 208-1 1.OOR.
Drocco, Amabile, to Sancassiano S.p.A. Kneading machine. 4,436,432,
CI. 366-95.000.
Drori, Michael. Method of manufacturing level vials 4,436,686, CI.
264-163.000.
Ducon Company, Inc., The: See—
Caldwell, Lawrence G., 4,436,459, CI. 406-181.000.
Dufour, Philippe; Predali, Jean-Jacques; Ranchin, Guy. deceased; by
Ranchin, Marc, legal heir; and by Ranchin, Genevieve, legal heir.
Process for the bieneficiation of phosphate ores. 4,436,616, CI.
209-3.000.
Dugal, Jeffrey N., to Ball Corporation. Multilayer tubular body with
uncentered barrier layer 4,436,778, CI. 428-36.000
Dunlop Limited: See —
Biggs, Ian; and Goy, Ronald S., 4,436,774, CI. 427-40.000.
Du Pont de Nemours, E I , and Company: See—
Abramson, Edward A., 4,436,366, CI. 350-96.200.
Brixius, Darryl W., and Simms. John A.. 4,436,885, CI. 526-214 000.
Copple, Kerry J., 4,436,888, CI. 526-348,100.
Ho, Chungfah H . 4,436,782, CI. 428-402.000.
Dupont, Francois: See—
Hunaut, Roger; and Dupont, Francois, 4,437,110, CI 358-41 000
Dupraz, Jean-Pierre, to Societe Anonyme dite: Alsthom-Atlantique.
Discharge circuit for rapidly eliminating charge trapped in a capaci-
tor voltage divider used for monitoring high voltage AC. 4,437,134,
CI. 361-56000.
Duracell Inc.: See—
Karpiloff. Kenneth M , 4,436,777, CI. 428-36.000.
Dwire. Jerold D.: See—
Demke, Kent R.; and Dwire, Jerold D , 4,437,167, CI. 364-900 000
Dyck, Walter R.; and Hay, Bums R., to Canada, Her Majesty the Queen
in right of, as represented by the Minister of National Defence
Portable digital heart rate meter/stethoscope. 4,436,096, CI
128-689.000.
E.N.I. Ente Nazionale Indrocarburi: See—
Canclla, Marco; and Sodini, Giancarlo, 4,436,756, CI. 426-430.000.
Eads, Harold O.; and Fowler, Ronald R , to O Ames Co. Hose hanger
4,436,267, CI. 248-75.000.
Eagle-Picher Industries, Inc.: See —
Long, Robert C; and Peters, Richard K., 4,436,574, CI
156-415.000.
Eastman Kodak Company: See—
Barbee, Robert B ; and Davis, Bums, 4,436,895. CI 528-288.000
Evans, Steven; and Elwood, James K , 4,436,799, CI. 430-17.000.
Kindt, Robert J.. 4,436,405. CI. 355-3.0TR.
Simmons. William J.; and Tinder, Richard, 4.436,404. CI. 3SS-
30SH.
Eaton Corporation: See-
Hastings, Jerome K., 4,437,079, CI. 335-170.000.
Rueckert, Barry J.. 4,437.133, CI. 361-33.000.
PI 10
LIST OF PATENTEES
Ebau. YoKhikazu: See—
Hinyu. Susumu. and Ebata. Yoshikazu, 4,436.042. CI. 1 12-217 KXJ
CMtO. SeigO: S^f—
Iguchi. Shigeru; and Ebalo. Seigo, 4,436.805. CI. 430-248 000
T^h . t d'- ''I^'^tS'"' •'y"»'»'-»"ro; Ishikawa. Chuji; and Hirala
IrillSV^SL^toS"""""^' "-'' '"" J*' """""« -nn-"'-
sniki Kaisha^ Method of charging molten metal mto a vertical die
casting machine. 4.436.140. CI IM- 120 000
EchJe. Adolf: S«-
Hinselmann Klauv Naarmann. Herbert; Echte. Adolf; Heil, Ed-
4it8'^i.'?i.1S3.^"'- '^'"^' ^ • ""^ "•""'-»»• ^""«"-
Edamatsu, Mttisuke: See—
Edano, Shigeki: See—
^"4"X^&.''cT?5S:338^""' ""^^"'^ """ ^'"^"""' ^-"--
Edelman. Robert R.: See—
''T50-'366mo" ^' *"*^ ^e'""*"' Robert R.. 4.437.007. CI
^^^H'i H^^P ^■' ■'' • 'V ^ Development Corporation. Apparatus
ci 7T81' OOo"' '■'""'"* " '" " "" " '"'"""• '"•^'"'*' 4.435.975.
^f)!',"^' '*"*^'* *i- -"u' • •" ^ ^ Development Corporation Apparatus
73-8^000"""* *'"^<'""^ properties of materials 4.435.976. CI
^473214? C?'1£iJo.ff ''"""" ^"""^^ "^'''•"••^- -"-« -'
Egami, Kazuhito: See—
^3\0.*m6S""^*' ^"""''"' '"** ^«""'' Kazuhilo. 4.437.029. CI.
Eggebrecht, Lewis C.; Sec-
Dean. Mark E; Eggebrecht. Lewis C; Kummer. David A. and
Saenz, Jesus A.. 4.437.092. CI. 340-703.000.
bgli, Hermann: See—
'^^"IwOOo"' ^*''" "*''™"""' ""'^ Zesiger, Karl, 4,436,521. CI.
Ehrhart. Wendell A , to Armstrong World Industries. Inc. Fr.Kess for
^nilZ? "'i^""-'?^ '^u'y''"^' '^^""'^^ '>"»««"'«^^ compHMng a
.r;:;frm":";S6.'r8^."S'V2T-42^.» "•'' '"^ ProduCs^resulSng
Eisele Apparate-und Geratebau GmbH: See—
Taddicken. Hermann. 4.436.041, CI. 1 12-1 10.000
£Lh r/rhH" r^"""; """'• ""'^ ^^'"*"- ^<«"f^'-'d- '«> Robert
Hosch GmbH Device for generating control signals with a nrimarv
Ekm loL" w""r"" T'^ri ^""'^"l """ 4.437,154, CI 364-r8 S
l?Jj^l ^' 91''"'"' •'"*'" ^ ""'' Braginski, Aleksander I,, to
United States of America, Air Force; and United Stales of America
suLrionL^^l'^ ""^ «PP-ralus utilizing crystalline compound
a^LP. '' l*^'*""""" ''"'""8 "'ended strain operating ranae
335^^2 16 000 "' ""'"' '"""' *1«8'«^«'*0" 4k437,080 (?|
Elastogran GmbH: See—
^ gang"473^Si! Cl" 525"5L«)o''"''' ""'"''^ ""' ^•'"'^- ^"'^-
Electric Power Research Institute, Inc. See—
Emery. Franklin T., 4,437.083, CI 336-65 000
Elephant Cham Block Company Limited: See—
Tsuda, Kinji. 4.436.333. CI. 294-82.00R
Ell Lilly and Company: See-
Hall, David A , 4,436.596. CI. 2O4-59.00R
"S-n^Oob*^*""'" ^ *"*^ Ro««.k, Paul R.. Jr.. 4.436.815. CI.
Kirst. Herbert A.. 4.436.733. CI. 424-180.000
Krumkalns. Eriks V.. 4,436,739. CI. 424-246 000
Osc. Earl E.. 4.436.734, CI. 424-181.000
Thibault. Thomas D.. 4.436.549. CI 71-90000
Wheeler. William J.. 4.436.912. CI. 548-233.000
Elkins. Stephen: See—
'^Cl"30-296"00^R °''*"' "'"*'" " ' '"'* ^"""''' ^'"'*'^"' ^'^^'-W.
Ellinger, Hunter D.: See—
^r^ V" ^•i?"!"?'''""' E C. George; Mitchell. Alvin L
?^xJ"^^ ^ Ellinger. Hunter D.; and Jasser Jamex W
4.437.006. CI 25O-363.b0S '"Sgcr. james w.,
Ellis. David G See—
^^tibJlOCn' ^"'''" ^"""^ ° • '"'' '''"''• ^"''"' *'*^*-564. CI. .
Ellis. Edward J.; and Salamone. Jmeph C. to Polymer Technology
Cr«*-'l»o"oOO "''^ "''"'■''"'*' celluloM polymer solutions. 4.436.730.
Ellison. Elmer L Mop head inslallalion tool. 4.436.332. CI. 294-1 OOR
Elliston. Thomas L to Hydra-Rig. Inc. Truck operito '. cab wiih
equipment control sution 4,436.177. CI. 180-324 000
E Uworth. Eugene W. Valve assembly. 4.436,108, CI. 137-375 000
Elmore, Carl L. 10 Kamyr. Inc. Method of producing kraft pulp usins
an acid prehydrolysis and pre-extraclion. 4.436.586. CI. 162-19 000
Eliec Instruments, Inc.: See— '
Doctor. Alan P.. 4.437.003. CI. 250-338.000.
El wood. James K.: See—
Evans. Steven; and Elwood. James K., 4.436.799. CI. 430-17.000.
March 13, 1984
Emi, Toshihiko: See—
Sakuraya, Toshikazu; Nakamura, Hideo; Harada, Nobuo Fuiii
Tctsuya; and Emi. Toshihiko, 4,436,287, CI. 266^47 000
Emoio, Masami, to Ricoh Company, Ltd. Exp<,sure process for use in
End.)^ Akir., |„ Ocxlo Shuwi Co, Lid. Ph»«ioloj,cilly .clivc novel
Endo, Haruyoshi: See—
Endo, Kiyonobu; and Nose. Noriyuki. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha
Endoh, Koichi, Tsuji. Nobuhiko; Nakamura. Keijiroh; Hamada To-
cal'bTa'lnr a ' bl!^ ^""^'' '" f^J' ^''^'"^- ^" ' L.d TrlSss of
435 14 000 '"*" analyzing apparatus 4,436,812, CI.
Endoh, Noboru: See—
Maruhashi, Kenji; Kojima. Ichiro; Qguchi. Yutaka Endoh
Noboru; and Satoh. Tetsuo. 4.436,663. CI 260-245 910
Energy Equipment Co Ltd : See—
Fn»Sh-^H J^"'*' ^' ""''.."■'"•an. Maurice, 4.436.057. CI. 122.4.00D.
bngelhard Corporation: See— *--^.ww>.
Adihart, Otto J., 4.436.793. CI. 429-17 000
Engleberi. Stephen M.: See—
" M'^'li;r3-6"7K^Cr42?-798'S«r"'"'^^ '■' '"' ^"«'"""- '^'^^"
Engler. Donald J.: See—
King. Frank R.; and Engler, Donald J.. 4.435.862. CI. 5-66 000
tnoguchi, Yuji: See — ^^'
Enoxy Chimica. S.p.A.: See—
^W^In^OOo'^"*""'"' '"'' '^''""'' ^"'^'■"°' 4.436.884, CI.
Enterra Corporation: See—
''ci."4 1^461)60^""'"'' '^"'^" ^ • '"** '*""'• •*"«" ^ • *-*36.487.
^ "r'ation ' A^n«^,'"1^ ^'"'"'' ^"^'l ^ ' '" "'"""^dyne General Corpo-
Cl 204-400 ax! '"«'""""8 electrochemical activity. 4.436.610.
Epson Corporation: See-
Koto. Haruhiko. 4.436.439, CI. 400-126 000
Erdmannsdorfer. Hans. Wagner, Manfred; and Weyh, Gerd, to Filier-
werk Mann & Hummel GmbH Method and device for removmg ^t
from exhaust gases. 4.436.535. CI. 55-96.000 '^"'oving sooi
£i «""" ^i^^"!!""- "«ro'<l; "nd Smetana. Michael, to Interna-
iSi' M36'S)t CT ?I%%"*°" ^"•"'^"' -"" «'«' """P*'
Erhardt. Rolf: See—
^^yi^iOOO ''""' ^*"** "^""^ '"** ^'''"'^'' '*°""' *'*"-952. CI.
Erickson. Eric D to University of Nebraska, The Board of Regents of
422-102 OOo'"' '"'*"' ^" '"'* '"*"'*^ °^ "*'"* ■' '♦•*^6*00. CI.
Erickson. John W.: See—
'**4"7086(»o"'*' °" '"** Erickson. John W.. 4.436.492. CI.
^'ci'"56"'l5%"*' ^ Multi-row crop harvesting attachment. 4.435.946.
^'«"ki'*i'rTI.'^^ ?^'p'*J"*'^\"' ^V'L'''?' ^'""' Lo«h«r; and Olschew-
ski. Arm n. to SKF Kugellagerfabriken GmbH. Method for produc-
non of plastic extrusion-coated bearing races for rolling bearings and
beanng races produced thereby. 4.435.890. CI. 29-148 40R
trven Dr Hubertus Josephus van Doorne: See—
van Doorne. Hubertus J , deceased, 4.435.997. CI. 74-796 000
Erwm Sick GmbH Optik-Eleklromk: See- ■»-'»o.uuu.
c i.^"«r' Re'"''"'''*' ""d Pfefferle. Dietmar. 4.436.364. CI. 350-6 600
Escher Wyss Akiiengesellschafi: See— --.^o.ouu.
Schuwerk. Wolfgang, 4.435.971. CI. 72-243.000
Krllnli/^i'' °f"',^ ?"'*'il(^ P""'- <^""'": Stein. Hermann; and
Kreuels. Klaus, to Didier-Werke AG Process for producing granu-
lar, fire-resistant material. 4,436,680, CI. 264-60 000
Eseifan. All H. to Sherwood Medical Company. Reagent mixing
systemandmethod 4.436.822, CI 436-164 000 »«="• ""••ng
ifi'J^''' "-'^^"^ E.; and Suggitt. Robert M.. to Texaco Develop-
fTeu. 5.XT1'. a.%!i9rS)r '^^ """'" °''°"*' «="»«"-«>"•
Eitad Products. Inc.: See—
Hird. Richard E.. 4.435.939, CI. 52-582.000.
Estel Hoogovens BV: See—
van den Bcmt. Johannes C. 4.436.508. CI. 432-214.000.
Eublisaement Texcontor: See—
Maltz. Javier E.. 4.436.731. CI. 424-18.000.
Elhyl Corporation: See-
Sanders. Robert N.. 4.436.708. CI. 423-329.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 11
Etoh. Yukihiro: See—
Tanaka. Toshiaki; Ushimura, Shoji; and Eioh, Yukihiro, 4,436,060,
CI. 123-41 100
Etzler, Carl-Christian: Sec-
Schmidt. Gunther; and Etzler. Carl-Christian, 4,436,259. CI
244-3.100.
Evans, Jeffrey L , to Ting Enterprises, Inc Fireplace and stove appara-
tus. 4,436,080, CI. 126-139.000
Evans, Steven; and Elwood, James K , to Eastman Kodak Company
Photographic products and processes employing novel nondifTusible
magenta dye-releasing compounds and precursors thereof 4,436,799,
CI. 430-17.000
Everest &. Jennings. Inc.: See—
Brudermann. Uwe; Kunze. Karl-H.; Krehl. Gunter; Linde, E.
Volker, and Lorenz. Dieter R., 4,436,320, CI 280.242.OWC
Evreka, Inc.: See—
Cerami, Anthony. 4.436.094, CI. 128-635.000.
Ex-Cell-O Corporation: Sec-
Powell, Thomas A., 4,436,460, CI 408-14.000.
Extraversion, Inc.: See—
Yiter, Willy, 4,436.135, CI. 160-135.000
Exxon Production Research Co : Sec-
Reed, Don C , 4,436,450, CI. 405-171.000.
Exxon Research & Engineering Co.: See—
Dowd, Edward J., deceased; and Carpency, Joseph F . 4,436.540.
CI. 62-30.000.
Feng. Tom; and Ghosh. Amal K , 4.436,765, CI. 427-74.000
Lipko, Robert J; and Laurent, Douglas J.. 4.436.520. CI
604-385.000.
Oyekan. Soni O ; and Swan. George A , 4.436.612. CI. 208-65.000.
Walker, Thad O.; and Matthews, Patricia C, 4,436,638, CI 252-
855R
Wright, Franklin J.. 4.436.834, CI. 502-201.000.
Fahlstrom, Per A. H. H.; and Gorling, Karl G., to Boliden Akiiebolag
Method for removing sulphur in conjunction with the gasification of
carbonaceous material in metal smelts. 4,436,529, CI 48-I97.00R.
Faillace, Louie M., to Crompton & Knowles Corporation. Extrusion
drive control system. 4,437.046, CI. 318-571.000.
Faktor, Marc M.: Sec-
Moss, Rodney H.; and Faktor, Marc M , 4,436.769. CI. 427-252.000.
Farmer, Felta C. Jr.; and Knight, Donald P.. to RCA Corporation.
Drive level control system for testing kinescopes. 4.437,120, CI.
358-139.000.
Farmhand. Inc.: See—
Lenertz, John B.; and Moore, Carroll E., 4,436,477, CI.
414-723.000.
Parr. Elvin L.: See—
Boodman, Norman S.; Farr. Elvin L.; Osterholm. Robert J.; and
Green, Neulan B , III, 4,436,615. CI. 208-177.000.
Farr. Glyn P. R., to Lucas Industries Limited. Hydraulic power boost-
ers for vehicle hydraulic systems. 4,435,960. CI. 60-547.100
Farr, Glyn P. R., to Lucas Industries Limited. Anti-skid hydraulic
braking systems for vehicles 4,436,348, CI. 303-115.000.
Farrand Optical Co . Inc.: See—
LaRussa, Joseph A , 4,437,114, CI. 358-101.000.
Fauland, Erich, Kampe, Wolfgang, Stach, Kurt; and Bartsch, Wolf-
gang, to Boehrmger Mannheim GmbH. 4-Hydroxy-2,1.3-benz-
thiadiazole compounds and /J-adrenergic method of use therefor.
4.436.742. CI. 424-269.000.
Fearnot. Neal E.: Sec-
Cook. William A.; Fearnot. Neal E.; and Oeddes, Leslie A..
4.436,092. CI. I28.419.0PG.
Featherby, Michael: See—
Dietz, Raymond L.; Featherby, Michael; and Margetts. Peter K.,
4.436.785, CI. 428-427.000.
Feinberg, Jay H.; and Knowles, Terrance, to Zenith Radio Corpora-
tion. Method for plating dielectric elements in an isolator and for
assembling the isolator. 4,436,240, CI. 228-122.000.
Feinman, Harvey M.: See-
Albert. Gordon H.; and Feinman. Harvey M., 4,436.991. CI.
235-468.000.
Feng, Tom; and Ghosh, Amal K., to Exxon Research and Engineering
Co. Method for forming indium oxide/n-silicon heterojunction solar
cells. 4,436.765. CI. 427-74.000.
Ferenczi, Gyorgy; Horvath. Peter; Toth. Ferenc; Kiu, Joisef; and
Boda. Janos. to Magyar Tudomanyos Akademia Muszaki Fizikai
Kutato Intezete. Method for deep level transient spectroscopy scan-
ning and apparatus for carrying out the method 4.437.060. CI. 324-
158.00D.
Fergason. James L. Light modulator, demodulator and method of
communication employing the same. 4.436.376, CI. 350-332.000
Ferguson. Harry D.. to General Signal Corporation. Electrical simula-
tion of percussive bell. 4,437,088, CI 340-384.00E.
Fernandez. David, to American Sports Equipment. Compoiite rein-
forced racket structure. 4,436.305, CI. 273-73.00C.
Ferrighi, Antonielta. to Acea Manodomestici S.r.l. Household hand-
device for use as meal-preuer to shape mincemeni into tieaki.
4,436.499. CI 425-195.000.
Feuock. Paul J : See—
Zmoda. Barney J.; and Feawck. Paul J.. 4,436,525, CI. 44-7.300.
Fiat Veicoli Industriali S.p.A.: 5w—
Formia. Antonio; and Filtri. Giorgio, 4,436,066, CI. I23-I93.00H.
Fides Treuhand GmbH: See—
Mohr. Ernst, 4,435,959, CI. 60-512.000.
•nd Field, Manin J., 4.436.112, CI.
Field, Martin J : Sec-
Atkins, Terrance J.;
137-510.000
Fields, Ellis K ; and Clarke, Wilham C , to Standard Oil Company
(Indiana) Photochemical method for preparing low molecular
weight olefin polymers and copolymers of 3-butene-l-ol 4.436,940
CI 568-857 000.
Figgie International Inc.: See-
Mitchell, Hal D ; and Walker, Donald R , 4,435,851, CI. 2-2000
Filterwerk Mann A Hummel GmbH See—
Erdmannsdorfer, Hans. Wagner, Manfred; and Weyh, Gerd
4,436,535, CI. 55-96.000
Filtri, Giorgio: See—
Formia. Antonio; and Filtri. Giorgio. 4.436.066, CI. 123-193 OOH
Fine, Dwight A : See-
Miles, Melvin H ; and Fine, Dwighl A , 4.436.590, CI 204-1 OOT
Finger, John F., to Sioux Steam Cleaner Corporation Cleaning appara-
tus. 4,436,113, CI. 137-565 000 BHH-"
Finnieston, Alan Upper arm brace 4,436,088, CI 128-77.000
Firestone Tire & Rubber Company, The: See—
Balbis, Manuel G ; and King, Colin V , 4.436,127, CI 152-209 OOR
Firth, Colin: Sec-
Slack, Ian D.; Ellis, David G.; and Firth, Colin, 4,436,564. CI.
156-42 000
Fischer, Dirk: Sec-
Magnus, Wolf; Braach, Otto; Fischer, Dirk; and Wippig, Werner,
4,436,448, CI 405- 143 000 HP •- .
Fischer. Horst; and Mollring. Friedrich K., to Carl-Zeiss-Stiftung
Specimen holder for inverted microscopes 4,436,385, CI
350-529.000 *^
Fischer, Peter: See—
Blumcke. Alfred; Fischer, Peter; and Vahlensieck, Hans-Joachim,
4,436,823, CI. 436-169 000
Fischer, Rolf See—
Weitz, Hans-Martin; Fischer, Rolf; and Pohl, Hans H , 4,436,944
CI. 585-408.000.
Fischer, Werner K , to Swiss Aluminium Ltd Anode superstructure of
a fused salt electrolytic cell and pot room fitted out with same
4,436,607, CI. 204-246 000
Fish. Joe W., to RCA Corporation System for controlling indicators
for switches. 4,437,094, CI 340-825 500
Fisher, Ernest P., Jr , and Welch, William R., to Otis Engineering
Corporation. Shifting tool. 4,436,152, CI. 166-214.000
Fitzpatrick. Donald C See—
Frye, Kenneth G ; Fitzpatrick, Donald C; and Karis, Arthur T .
4,436.302. CI. 271-202.000.
Flex-Kleen Corporation: See—
Robinson. James W., 4.436,536. CI. 55-341 OOR
Flies, William P.. to Datakey. Inc Electronic key 4.436.993, CI.
235-382.000.
Flood, Paul W ; Mason, Charles D.. and Schuize, Stephen R., to Allied
Corporation High impact molding compositions. 4.436.872, CI.
Flow Industries. Inc.: See-
Mercer, John E ; Olsen, John H ; and Elkins. Stephen. 4,435.902,
CI. 30-296.00R
FMC Corporation: See—
Jennerjohn, Dennis A.; and Jensen, Lyie B., 4,436,169, CI.
180-89.140.
Scherrer, Edward P., 4,436.444. CI 403-24.000.
Foglesong, Robert M.: See—
Arden, Terry D., and Foglesong, Robert M., 4,436,024, CI 99-
42 1. OH V.
Follet. Michel: See-
Aspisi. Christian; Calas, Bernard, Daunis, Jacques; Follet, Michel;
Jacquier. Robert; and Parello, Joseph. 4.436.874. CI. 525-327.100.
Folsom. Jerry B.: See-
Christopher, Chris J., Wenninger, Fred W , Morris, Donald E.;
Covington. Wayne F.; Folsom, Jerry B ; Beyers, Joseph W.;
Nairn. John H.; and Osborne, Jeffrey C. 4,437,156, CI.
364-200.000.
Fondacci, Jean-Luc. to Societe Nationale d'Etude et de Construction de
Moteursd'Aviation (S.N EC MA ) Device to regulate the fiow rate
of a liquid fuel supply system of a gas turbine engine 4.435,957, CI
60-39.281.
Fonio. Carlo, to Rockwell International Corporation. Feeder device for
folding machines. 4.436,296, CI 270-31.000
Forgac. John M.; and Hoekstra. Gerald B., deceased (by Hoekstra,
Edith, executrix), to Standard Oil Company (Indiana) In situ retort-
ing of oil shale with pulsed combustion 4,436,344, CI. 299-2 000
Formia. Antonio; and Filtri. Giorgio, to Fiat Veicoli Industriali S p A
Cylinder head for compreuion-ignition internal combustion engine
4.436.066. CI I23193.0OH.
Fortune. William S Modular storage system 4,436.355, CI. 312-270.000
Foshee, William R : See-
Beat, Waller E.; and Fothee. William R.. 4,435,967. CI. 70-224.000.
Foai. Susan K : See-
Hurt, James J.; and Fou, Susan K., 4,437,151. CI. 364-571.000.
Foster Wheeler Energy Corporation: See-
Stewart, Robert D.; and Otmble, Robert L., 4,436.507, CI
431-170.000.
4-D Electronics Company, Inc.: See-
Dick, Neil M., 4,436.103, CI. 133-3.00D.
Foumex. Robert: See—
Chnstidis, Yani; and Foumex. Robert, 4,436,752, CI. 424-317.000.
PI 12
LIST OF PATENTEES
Fowler, Ronald R.: See—
Eads Harold O ; and Fowler, Ronald R.. 4,436,267, CI 248-75 000
1"C S;-'**"*"^"^' '"^ '^'^^derung der Angewandren Forif^g
'^"^C^?,^: g'"755io?OA°"= ""' ^°'«'*'-^«"- C.rl-AI«.
'"'MeVhi' nf°f" ^• ""'^ '^'^y- •'"'y ^ • '° Monsanto Company.
Method of regulating concentration and distribution of oxygen in
Czochralski grown silicon. 4.436,577. CI. 1 56-6 1 7 OSP
lln^f*""' ^*'^"""" ^.- to Halliburton Company. Method of treating
r66-3oTocJo "* ""P'°y'"* '"°'""«^ treatment fluids. 4,436,156. cf
Freeouf. John L ; Haag. William J ; and Woodall, Jerry M., to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation Refractory structure and
process for the preparation thereof 4,436.768, CI 427-227 000
T.?!!!l!^;l°''"f "■ n"^ Campbell. Willis R.. to Sperry Corporation.
Stripper bar for roll baling machine. 4.436,027. CL l(»-88 00O
French. James C.: See —
Smitka. Tim A ; Bunge, R.chard H.; French, James C ; and Bloem,
Russell J., 4,436.750, CI. 424-279.000
Frey, John A., to Hoff-Slevens. Inc. Keg tapping apparatus having
improved retainer. 4,436.228. CI 222-400 700 * *^^ " """'"K
^'flTm™*''*"* '° ^^^ '"c ^«"" fo'' ""'boards. 4,436.047, CI
1 14-102.000.
Fried Krupp Gesellschaft mil beschrankter Haftung: See—
i^inT.nn^?"""''^' ""'^ '^""". Manfred. 4.436.697. CI
420-440.000.
Fnedrich, Ronald; and Muller. Manfred, to Fried. Krupp Gesellschaft
420-4^000" "'>^'""« Soldering alloy. 4,436,697, CI
Friends, Gary D.: See—
Chromecck, Richard C ; Friends, Gary D.; Wissman, Lawrence Y
and Yourd. Raymond A., Ill, 4.436.887, CI. 526-263 000
Fnto-Lay, Inc.: See—
^^°?\'<^^^"'^^ ^- ""'' ^''*""' Gordon R.. 4.436.458, CI.
Fritzenwenger. Josef, to Bayerische Motoren Werke Aktiengesell-
scnatt. tngine driven pump arrangement. 4.436,067. CI. 123-198 OOC
Frohberger, Paul-Ernst: See—
"°4Aib^i: cr&33^5"oTO "■ '^'""'" ""'^ ^'"^'^'i"- Paul-Ernst.
Fry, Michael W.: See—
^'!frn^1,£t'"**°P''^' ^' ""«* ^'■y- Michael W.. 4.436,798. CI.
430-1 7.000.
'^^;?ia^t436.8n. cr 43(J'^'6!^5bi° ^""-"''^^ ^°- ''''«'°«"P»'-
^Tl •^^""^'*' G i Fitzpatrick. Donald C; and Karis. Arthur T.. to
Beloit Corporation. Apparatus for slowing down and preventina
edge damage on moving sheets. 4,436,302. CI 271-202 000
ZL^^V I ?^''^'*'"•.^,"8"'^,J,• ""'l ^o'^^ Armin; to HofT-
260I245 7(X) Py"o'o(3.4-d](2Jbenzazepinones. 4.436.662. CI.
Frymasier Corporation, The: See—
^augh, Gerald F., 4,437,159. CI. 364-400.000.
.0 P«.S ^^^*^*1"PP- Ceroid, and Voigtsberger, Carl-Alexander,
^h!^„„ P C ^^ •t*!^'*^'!.''^* '"' Foerderung der Angcwandten For-
schung E. V Method and apparatus for locating leakages in pipes and
similar conduits. 4.435,974. CI. 73-40 50A
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Endoh Koichi; Tsuji, Nobuhiko; Nakamura. Keijiroh; Hamada.
Toshiyoshi; and Ishida, Keiichi, 4,436.812. CI. 435-14 000
Watanabe, Atsuo; and Uno, Masahiro, 4.436.428. CI. 356-432 000
Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.: See— •'•'"-^j^.uuu.
Akao, Mutsuo; and Kawata, Tadashi, 4.436.809. CI. 430-501 000
4n-T85 000*""*"' ""** 'shibashi. Michinori. 4.436.491. Cl.
Ohtsuka. Shuichi; and Aotsuka, Yasuo, 4.436.802, CI 430-100 000
[% ?,°,^^''*'"''""' '^^"^ ""'^ Igarashi. Akira. 4.436,920, Cl
j^"-227 .000.
''4&8,'ci"430-3"8S. ''''"'°'''' '"' '^*'"^"'"' *'''^''
Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.: See—
'"!ii; «!«*''*'■'■"• '""^ Moriguchi. Haruhiko. 4.437.102. CI. 346-
/o.OPH.
Fujii. Hiroshi: See—
Imamura. Yoshinobu; Kamei. Shigeki; Yamagata. Tetuo; and Fujii.
Hiroshi. 4.436.026, CI. 100-45.000.
Fujii. Takumi: See—
^'H^t^^^i^a^A •^"'''"o- Yoshinori; and Fujii. Takumi. 4.436.453. CI.
W3-263.000.
Fujii. Tetsuya: See—
Sakuraya. Toshikazu; Nakamura. Hideo; Harada. Nobuo Fuiii
Tetsuya; and Emi. Toshihiko, 4.436.287. CI. 266^7 000
Fujii. Toru: See—
Ikari. Kazuo; and Fujii. Toru, 4.436.382. CI. 350-458 000
Fujimura. Akira: See—
Miyazaki, Naomi; and Fujimura. Akira. 4,436.710. CI. 423-552 000
Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co.. Ltd.: See—
Horii. Isamu, 4,436.205, CI. 206-530.000.
Umehara. Kazuyoshi; Tanaka. Hirokazu; Uchida, Itsuo Kohsaka
Masanobu; and Imanaka. Hiroshi. 4,436.726. CI 424-177 000
FujiU. Hironon; and Arai. Tohru, to Kabushiki Kaisha Toyou Chuo
alloyV 4!l;?6.5';?'^ U°8-6'SSS"'"*"""« '""'^ '""P*"'°" ''°'^'
Fujiu. Hironori; Arai, Tohru; and Mizuno, Jiro. to Kabushiki Kaisha
Toyou Chuo Kenkyusho; and Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai Rika Denki
March 13, 1984
Seisakusho Process for manufacturing boridc disoersion coniwr
alloys. 4.436.560, CI. 148-6.000. oispersion copper
Fujita. Yoshiji: See—
Ainano Takchiro; Yoshikawa. Kensei; Sano. Tatsuhiko; Ohuchi.
Kutaka; Ishigura. Michihiro; Shiono. Manzo; Fujita. Yoihiii and
Nishida. Takashi. 4.436.939. CI 568-8 1 3 000 ^
Fujitsu Fanuc Limited: See—
'^ c72 19-M oSw'''' °''"**'' '^■"""'"' '"<^ '»''"• ^^**°' M36.975.
Fujitsu Limited: See—
Asami. Fumitaka. 4.437.072. CI. 33 1-1. OCA.
Fukase'^Hi^'If^'s""'^ Kokado. Masayuki. 4.437.021. CI. 307-270.000.
"°548-?4"6MO' ^"'"*'' "''°'*''' '"** "'S^hide. Eiji. 4.436.918. Cl.
Fukazawa, Takao: See—
Ebi Yulaka: Fukazawa. Takao; Kawakubo, Toshio; Jinnai. Koi-
chiro; Horikc, Masanori; Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro; Ishikawa. Chuji-
and Hiraia, Toshilaka. 4.437.101, Cl 346-75 000
Fukuhara, Seiichi: See—
Fukuhara, Toru to Nippon Kogaku KK. Focus detecting device in a
single lens reflex camera. 4.436,395, Cl. 354-406 000
Fukunaga, Masaaki: 5ee—
^ M3S'l^Cr74"8'!l2'oor°' ^°''^*''""'' ""'^ Fukunaga. Masaaki.
Fukuoka, Yohei: See—
Koya. Masahiko; and Fukuoka, Yohei, 4,436.945. Cl. 585-488 000
r!(rJ!,T^' ^'■'c'^"m"^''"\?'^'"^^'- ""'^ "'"Ko- Masaharu. to Sanden
corporation. Scroll manufacturing tool. 4,436.465. Cl 409-243 000
Fuminier. Claude; and Pierrel. Michel, to Ponl-A-Mousson S.A Due-
29^52T50o'°" '"'^ '^^ constricted end casing. 4.435.894, Cl.
^Tnlt^.""l!2'''' 'S°l"''': ,^y"'^*''- Matsuura. Masataka; and Wada.
JZr'^4,l)'^7,l^t,t%''^t ^"°-'"^" "^"''^ "^"" '^'^"'-^
Furth. Harold P : See—
Jardin Stephen C, Yamada. Masaaki; Furth. Harold P.; and
Okabayashi. Mitcheo. 4.436.691. Cl. 376-137 000
Furukawa Denchi Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Suzuki, Yuichi; and Sano, Ichiro. 4.435.885, Cl 29-2 000
Furukawa Denki Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Suzuki, Yuichi; and Sano, Ichiro, 4.435,885, Cl 29-2 000
Furukawa. Hiroshi; Saito. Yuichi; Imai. Akio; Yamamoto.' Keisaku
Takao. Hiroyoshi; and Yoshida. Nobuyuki, to Sumitomo Chemical
Se it S3^6"fr3' cf 5"2V'3U.te'^"'" ""' "'"^"^ '°' "^'P'""*
Furukawa, Hiroyasu: See—
Ushioda, Minoru; Ueno, Kenji; Furukawa. Hiroyasu; and Kobaya-
shi. Masahiro. 4.436.861. Cl. 524-425 000 « «.""»y»
Furuno. Yoshikuni: See—
^"ilif i'*,^^!'7i!.''','™"°' Yoshikuni; and Fukunaga. Masaaki.
*.4J0.3ol, Cl. 148- 1 2. OOF.
Furuoya, Itsuo; and Kitazawa, Yuzuru. to Takeda Chemical Industries.
4.436.671 CWW-465''3a)'^"'""* """'"''"''* aliphatic dinitriles.
G.A. Pfleiderer GmbH & Co.. KG: See—
Rother, Bruno; and Trommen. Hartmut. 4.436,78 1 . Cl 428-365 000
4!436 2?rci.'2l5.2^r6'So'" **'""" ^°'P°"'*°" Safety package.
Gaffal. Karl; and Klepp. Christian, to Klein. Schanzlin & Becker Ak-
tiengesellschaft. System for sealing passages in the walls of glandless
circulating pumps or the like. 4,436.950, Cl. 174-1 1 OBH
Gaffar. Abdul, to Colgate-Palmolive Company. Oral composition
having mole ratio of tetra (methylene phosphonaJe) to alkali metal
fluoride of at least 1.4:1. 4.436,721. Cl. 424-52 000
Gagliardi, Sergio: See—
^?^'!f-,'<. z^""""""' '"** Gagliardi. Sergio, 4.436.655. Cl.
252-628.000.
Gaither, Dolphard. Tire tool. 4.436.134. Cl. 157-1 300
s'h";id^4.43t65'9° grri'i'nS^.'''""^'' '""*'"" '^■"^ '=°"'^^""'«
Galian, Boris A.: See—
Lebedcv. Vladimir K.; Kuchuk-Yatsenko. Sergei I.; Sakhamov.
Vasily A; Galian. Boris A.; Asoyants. Origory B.; and Tishura.
Vladimirl. 4,436.974. CI. 219-66.000. " ■■•nura.
Gallaway. James F.: See—
^ F'453i;9«."ci: «-Srooa "■ '*°'*" '"• '"** ^'"'*'^' ■'"'""
Gamble. Robert L.: See—
^'!^,'7;«^" ^' •"'^ Gamble. Robert L.. 4.436.507. CI.
43 1 - 1 70.000.
Ganguly. Ashit K.; Liu. Yi-Tsung; and Mallams, Alan K.. to Schering
Corporation. 23-Demycinosyltylosin compounds, pharmaceutical
compositions and method of use. 4,436.729. Cl. 424-180000
Ganz. Rudolf: See—
Eschner Axel; Ganz. Rudolf; Tkotz. Gunter; Stein. Hermann; and
Kreuels. Klaus, 4,436.680. Cl. 264-60.000.
Garcia Philippe, to Micro-Mega S.A. Device for flxing drill bits into
433-129 OO) "^ "'°'°" '"°^ hand-held dentists' tools. 4.436.512. CI.
Gardiner James R^; Makarewicz. Stanley R.; Revitz. Martin; and
bhepard, Joseph F., to International Business Machines Corporation.
Double polysilicon contact structure. 4.437.108. Cl. 357-59 000
Gardner. Irving. Collar clasp. 4.435.880. CI. 24-49.0KC.
MARCH 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 13
Garner. Lloyd L.. to Globe Oil Tools. Inc Lubrication failure detection
system. 4,436,164, Cl. 175-39.000
Garnett. Jack L.. to Bendix Corporttion. The. Method of gnnding
workpieces 4,435,924. Cl. 51-327 000.
Garrett Corporation, The: See-
Under, Charles G., 4,436,481, Cl. 415-1 19000
Manfredo. Joseph N.; and Hirsch, Selwyn R.. 4.436,145. Cl
165-67.000.
Garrett. William R , to Smith international, Inc. Sleeved drill pipe.
4.436.118. Cl. 138-110.000.
Gaughan, Perry J.. See—
Grotta. Henry M.; and Gaughan. Perry J., 4.436.623. CI.
210-634 000.
Gaur, Santosh P.; Lechaton. John S.; and Srinivaun. Gurumakonda R.,
to International Business Machines Corporation Method for making
a base etched transistor integrated circuit 4,435,898, Cl 29-577 OOC
Gauthier-Lafaye, Jean; and Perron, Robert, to Rhone-Poulenc Indus-
tries. Preparation of carboxylic acids by carbonylation of alcohols
4,436,889. Cl. 562-519.000.
Gauthier, Michel; Hackett. Peter A ; and Willis. Clive. to Canadian
Patents & Development Limited Laser production of carbon- 13
based on CFjHCl 4,436,709, Cl 423-437 000.
Gavaler, John R.: See—
Ekin, John W ; Gavaler, John R.; and Braginski, Aleksander I ,
4,437,080, Cl. 335-216.000.
Gavriiko, Igor V : See—
Andreev, Anatoly A.; Gavriiko. Igor V.; Gavrilov, Alcxei G
Vereschaka. Anatoly S.; Zhed, Viktor P ; Padalka, Valentin G .
and Sinelschikov, Andrei K., 4.436,830, Cl 501-96.000.
Gavrilov, Alexei G.: See—
Andreev, Anatoly A.; Gavriiko, Igor V ; Gavrilov, Alexei G.;
Vereschaka, Anatoly S.; Zhed, Viktor P.; Padalka, Valentin G.;
and Sinelschikov, Andrei K., 4,436.830, Cl. 501-96.000.
GCA Corporation: See—
Bunkenburg, Joachim, 4,436,424, Cl. 356-356.000.
Weber. T. Jerome, 4,436,985, Cl 219-388.000.
Gebke, Klaus; Huhn, Fnedrich; and Lekulat, Rolf, to Kraftwerk Union
Aktiengesellschafl. Cooling plant 4,436,676. Cl. 261-151.000.
Geddes, Leslie A.: See-
Cook, William A.; Fearnot, Ncal E.; and Geddes, Leslie A.,
4,436,092, Cl. 128-4I9.0PG.
Geisow, Bernard H., to Daniel Industries, Inc Valve actuator mecha-
nism for lift-turn type valves 4,436,280, Cl. 251-229 000
Geissmann, Felix: See—
Molnar, Istvan; Thiele. Kurt; Geissmann, Felix; and Jahn, Ulrich.
4.436.913, Cl. 548-316.000.
Geist, Michael: See—
Batzill, Wolfgang, Diefenbach. Horst; Geist, Michael; and Schupp,
Eberhard, 4,436.878, Cl. 525-438.000.
Gelhard, Egon. Sensor for distance measurement by ultrasound.
4,437.032. Cl. 310-324.000.
General DataComm Industries. Inc.: See-
Lambert, David A.; and Profet, Gary A.. 4.437.182, Cl
370-110.100.
Profet. Gary A . 4,437.183, Cl. 370-1 10.100.
General Electric Company: See-
Anthony, Thomas R ; Conncry, Richard J.; and Hoeschele, David
F.. Jr.. 4.437,109, Cl. 357-68.000
Ashby, Bruce A.; and Schroeter, Siegfried H., 4.436.924. Cl.
556-416.000.
Graham, Donald E , 4,436,775, Cl 427-419 700.
Hepp. Leonard R , 4,436,860, Cl 524-394 000.
Krantz, Karl W., 4,436.846. Cl. 523-175.000.
Laghi, Aldo A , 4,436,496. Cl. 425-543.000.
Loucks, George R.. 4,436.876. Cl 525-394.000.
Miller. Kenneth F.; and Belfoure, Edward. 4,436,879, Cl.
325-439.000.
Moodie. Eldon E.; and Bums, Richard D., 4,436,585. Cl
156-73.100. .
Morais, Don; and Owen, Daniel V., 4,437.042, Cl. 313-289.000
Rea, Ike D . 4.436.463. Cl. 409-232.000.
Roberts. Victor D., 4,437.041, CI. 313-248.000.
Scott, Allen W., 4,433,993, Cl. 74-333.000.
Vaughn, Howard A., Jr., 4.436,831, Cl. 324-43.000.
Whitten, James R.. 4.436.995. Cl. 230-227.000.
General Mills, Inc.: See—
Lange. Donald A.; Hanson. Marc C; and Kriva. Kenneth J..
4.436,737, Cl. 426-438.000.
General Motors Corporation: See-
Atkins, Terrance J.; and Field, Martin J., 4,436,112, CI.
137-510.000.
Bowes, Laurence B.; and Gray, Thomas J., 4,436,337, CI.
296-201000.
Kuo. Hong-Hsiang, 4,436.037, Cl 1 10-243.000.
Vonnegut, George L , 4,436.485, Cl. 416-24I.00R.
General Signal Corporation: See-
Ferguson. Harry D., 4,437,088, Cl. 340-384.00E.
General Tire & Rubber Company, The: See-
Kuan. Tiong H ; and Sommer. John G , 4.436,837, CI. 324-260.000.
Gentry, Larry L.; Moss. Herbert H.; Panicker. Narayana N.; and Wada.
William T.. to Mobil Oil Corporation. Rotary transfer lubsyitems and
tensioning assemblies for a proccM vessel. 4,436,048, CI. 1 14-230.000.
GEO Vann, Inc.: Set—
Brieger, Emmet F., 4,436,133, CI. 166-297.000.
Vann, Roy R.; and George, Flint R., 4.436,134, Cl. 166-281.000.
Geolograph Company, The: See—
Corry, Stuan E and Grade, Lanny V , 4,433,918, Cl 73-862 190
Georg Fischer Aktiengesellschaft See—
Thalmann, Alfred; and Reich, Frtlz, 4,436,987, Cl 219-335 000.
Georae, Allan P.: See-
Hare, Alan L.; and George, Allan P, 4,436,984, Cl. 219383 000.
George Fischer Ltd.: See—
Rohr, Jakob. 4.436,133, Cl. 152-381 300.
George, Flint R.: See—
Vann, Roy R.; and George, Flint R , 4.436,154, Cl 166-281 000
Gerber Garment Technology, Inc : See—
Gerber. Heinz J.. 4,436,013, Cl 83-747 000
Gerber, Heinz J., to Gerber Garment Technology, Inc Reciprocating
cutting apparatus with theta dither 4,436.013, Cl 83-747.000
Gerber Products Company: See—
Spletzer, Barry L.; and Swiatlowski. George. 4,436,470, Cl
414-36.000 •
Gerber Scientiflc Products, Inc : See-
Logan, David J ; Webster, Ronald B ; and Sullivan, Daniel J.,
4.435,904, Cl 33-I4300K
Gerding, Thomas W Conduit support device 4,436,266, CI 248-
74 0OR
Geze GmbH See—
Storandt, Ralf; Scheck, Georg; and Biermann, Peter. 4.436.321, Cl.
280-612 000
Gfeller. Kari: See-
Koch, Cari, and Gfeller, Kari. 4,436,399, Cl. 334-139.000.
Ghosh, Amal K : See-
Feng. Tom; and Ghosh, Amal K . 4,436,763, Cl 427-74.000
Gieger, Hans-Joachim Housing loudspeaker 4,436,178. Cl.
181-151.000.
Gilbnde, Andrew J : See—
Simmonds, Robert C, Jr.; and Gilbride, Andrew J.. 4.436.771, Cl
427-284.000
Gilgore, William H., to Allis-Chalmers Corporation Apparatus for
testing valve actuators. 4,435,979, Cl 73-168 000
Gill, Harry A., Jr., to Raytheon Company. Current mirror source
circuitry 4.437,023, Cl. 307.29600R
Gill Industries, Inc : See—
Hayatdavoudi, Asadollah; and Adams, Ladd M, 4,436,166. Cl.
175-65 000
Gillette, Walter B.: See—
Gratzer, Louis B; and Gillette. Walter B. 4.436,263. Cl.
244-130.000
Gilligan, Thomas J : See—
Canel. Jules E.. and Gilligan. Thomas J., 4.437,173, Cl. 365-193.000
Girgis, Mikhail M , to PPG Industries, Inc Aqueous, adhesive coating
composition with a non-selfcrosslmkable elastomer for use with
niamentary materials. 4,436,866, Cl. 324-510.000.
Giulie, Joe D. Multiple positidn switch. 4,436,968, Cl 200-3.00R.
Glasser. Fredrik P.. and Gunawardane, Richard P., to National Re-
search Development Corporation Fertilizer material from apatite.
4,436,546, Cl 71-36.000.
Glattli, Hans-Heinrich: See—
Stoll, Kurt; and Glattli, Hans-Heinrich, 4.436.434, Cl. 368-65 000.
Glatz, John J. Hot wire anemometer flow meter 4,435,978, Cl
73-153.000
Glickman, Howard E ; Broddon, Alan J.; and Broddon, Norman C
Multiple-position hasp-type door check. 4,436.331, Cl. 292-270.000.
Globe Oil Tools, Inc : See-
Garner, Lloyd L., 4.436.164. G. 175-39,000.
Glyzin, Vladimir I.: See—
Vichkanova, Seraflma A ; Shipulina, Ljudmila D , Glyiin, Vladi-
mir I.; Bankovsky, Alexandr I.; Pimenov, Mikhail O.; and
Boryaev, Klim 1 , 4,436.732, Cl. 424-180.000.
Goans, Kip B., to Baker CAC, Inc. Valve actuator having an adjustable
collet lock. 4,436,103. Cl. 1 37- 1. 000.
Godo Shusei Co., Ltd.: See—
Endo. Akira, 4,436,723, Cl. 424-116.000.
Goetz, Norbert: See—
Zeeh. Bernd; Goetz, Norbert, Ammermann. Eberhard; and Jung,
Johann, 4,436,348, Cl. 71-76.000.
Goeize AG: See—
Vossieck, Paul. 4.436.314. Cl. 277-86.000.
Goi. Kouichi, to Laurel Bank Machine Co., Ltd Paper sheet stripper
device. 4,436,300. Cl. 271-107.000.
Gokel. George W.. to W. R. Grace k Co. Nitrogen-containing poly-
ether macrocycles with a sidearm containing neutral electron donor
groups. 4.436.664. Cl. 260-330.600.
Gold. Harold; and Budzich, Tadeusz. Hydraulic Aik valve. 4.436,111,
Cl. 137-498.000.
Goldhaber. Richard P See—
Bellotti, Marc; Goldhaber. Richard P.; Phillips. Earl O.; and Toch,
Theodore H , 4.436.620. Cl. 210-90.000.
Ooldhammer, Albert. Device for the press door of a baling preis.
4.436.029, Cl 100-230000.
Goldsmith, David S. Traction devices. 4,436,246, Cl. 238-14000.
Oonski, Joseph: See-
Silks, Walter; and Gonski. Joseph. 4.436,343, Cl. 299-39.000.
Goodman Equipment Corporation: See-
Silks, Walter; and Oonski, Joseph, 4,436,343, Cl. 299-39.000.
Goodyear Tire k Rubber Company, The: See—
Dahl, James M.; Jacobs, Bernard B.; Lipovac, Joseph E.; Meglen,
Ralph A.; and Ward, Donald W , 4,436,497. Cl 425-28 OOR
Schloman, William W., Jr., 4,436,833, Cl. 324-91.000.
PI 14
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Gorby. Oliver L.. to Agri-Tech Ltd.. Inc. Differential assembly for
vehicles. 4.435.996. CI. 74-713.000.
Gordon Barlow Design: See—
Barlow, Gordon A.; Newcomer. John R.; and Bezark. Fred
4.436.309, CI. 273-267.000.
Gordon. Bruce E.. to Raytheon Company. Apparatus for synthesizing
a signal by producmg samples of such signal at a rate less than the
Nyquist sampling rate. 4.437,066, CI. 328-14.000.
^°l^°r^J^"*^ ^ Adjustable, quick-release barrier clamp. 4,436.446,
CI. 403-384.000.
Gorling. Karl G.: See—
Fahlstrom, Per A. H. H.; and Gorling, Karl G.. 4.436.529. CI
48-I97.00R,
Gosudarstvenny Nauchnoissledovatelsky, Proektny I Konstruktorsky
Institut Splavov I Obrabotki Tsvetnykh Metallov "Giprotsvetmeto-
brabotka": See—
Shevakm, Jury P.; Dobkin. Igor I.; Donskoi. Efim M.; Manov.
Grigory L.; Zhdanov, Vasily V.; Berger. Elena S.; Popov. Va-
hery M.; Pavlov, Alexei A.; and Akchurin. Rashid Z.. 4.435.886.
CI. 29-33.00D.
Gotaverken Arendal AB: See—
Liden, Hadar. 4,436,050. CI. 1 14-265.000.
Gottlieb, Michael M., to Rogers Corporation. Bus bar assembly with
discrete capacitor elements. 4,436.953. CI. 174-72.00B.
Gottschalk, Robert E., to Panavision, Incorporated. Electronic cinema
camera. 4.437,126. CI. 358-224.000.
Gournay, Luke S.. to Mobil Oil Corporation. Method for locating low
resistivity pay sands using well logs. 4.435,977. CI. 73-152 000
Goy, Ronald S.. See-
Biggs, Ian; and Goy, Ronald S., 4,436.774, CI. 427-40 000
Grade, Lanny V.: See—
Corry, Stuart E.; and Grade, Lanny V., 4,435,988, CI. 73-862 190
Gradmann, Gerhard, to Deere & Company, Starter arrangement for
internal combustion engine 4,436,065, CI. I23-I79.00B.
Graham. Donald E.. to General Electric Company. Hard metal body
and method of making same. 4.436.775, CI. 427-419.700.
Graham, Henry A., Jr.; Hawk. Johnna B.; and Chachowski. Rosemary
K., to Ortho Diagnostic Systems Inc. Multiple particle washing
system and method of use. 4,436.631, CI. 210-772 000
Gratzer Louis B.; and Gillette, Walter B.. to Boeing Company, The
Aerodynamically contoured, low drag wing, engine and engine
nacelle combination. 4.436.263, CI. 244-130.000.
Gray. Thomas J.: See—
^-.or;^.^^"'^^"'^'^ ^ • ^"'^ °"y- Thomas J.. 4.436.337. CI.
296-201.000.
Green, Gary K.: See—
Boyd. Phillip R.; Green, Gary K.; and Sumner. Barbara E..
4,436,580, CI. 156-636,000.
Green. Neulan B.. Ill: See—
Boodman. Norman S.; Farr, Elvin L.; Osterholm. Robert J. and
Green. Neulan B.. III. 4.436.615. CI. 208-177.000.
Green. William D., Jr. Smoke generator. 4.436,100. CI. 131-330 000
Gnbauskas, Joseph F. Jr.: See—
Menconi. K. Anthony; and Gribauskas. Joseph F.. Jr.. 4.436 779
CI. 428-169.000.
Grossi, Anthony V.; Hahn. Louis T.; Marzocchi, Alfred; and Bolen
Charles E., to Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation. Slurry seal
T!',^ ,^,"*i?.8 acrylamide and rubber modified asphaltic emulsion.
4,436,767, CI. 427-138.000.
Grossi, Anthony V ; Hagelee. Leon A.; Hahn. Louis T.; and Marzocchi.
Alfred, to Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation, Aqueous emul-
sions of acrylamide and rubber modified asphalts. 4.436.864 CI
524-458.000.
Grotta. Henry M.; and Gaughan. Perry J., to Buffalo Color Corp
Method for purification of cresidine sulfonic acid by solvent extrac-
tion. 4,436,625, CI. 210-634.000.
Grow, Harry N.: See—
Zboralski. Jon A.; Grow, Harry N.; and Holschbach. Stephen E..
4.436.022. CI. 98-1 1 5.0LH.
Grube. Herbert E.: See—
Pornplun, William S.; and Grube. Herbert E.. 4,436,867. CI
524-503.000.
Gruber. George J., to Southwest Research Institute. Ultrasonic multi-
ple-beam technique for detecting cracks in bimeullic or coarse-
grained materials. 4,435,984. CI. 73-628.000.
Gruendler. Karl-Heinz: See—
Broecker. Franz J.; Gruendler. Karl-Heinz; Marosi, Laszio
Schwarzmann, Matthias; Triebskom, Bruno; and Zirker'
Guenter. 4.436.833. CI. 502-176.000.
Gnindfos A/S: See—
■'*5?f":.^'''* ^ • '^o'"o*«' Horst; and Nielsen. Kurt F.. 4.436.486.
CI. 417-45.000.
GTE Laboratories Incorporated: See—
Bowen. Leslie J.. 4.436.650. CI. 252-518.000.
^AAitni ci'427-39 000"'*' ^°^^^ ^" ""* ^'^^'^' ^"« A-.
GTE Products Corporation: See-
Bay. David L.. 4,437.040. CI. 3I5-209.00R.
Guenther. Werner, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Height-adjusuble
support arm with a parallelogram linkage. 4.437,144, C\. 362-275.000
Gulf Research &. Development Company: See—
^58?525obo'^"' E.; and Vayda. Adam V., 4,436.947, CI.
Gumert, William R.: See—
C^so"- FfanWin D.; and Gumert, William R.. 4,435.981. CI. 73-
Jo2.UUI\.
Gunawardane. Richard P.: See—
Glasser, Fredrik P.; and Gunawardane. Richard P.. 4.436.546. CI.
71-36.000.
Gunshor. Robert L.; Pierret, Robert F.; and Melloch. Michael R . to
Purdue Research Foundation. ZnO SAW Device having seoarate
comb transducer, 4,437.031. CI. 3 10-3 1 3.00B.
Gutman. David. Escape system. 4.436.181. CI. 182-236.000
°4!437'052'ci' 3°23^2m' 000°"'* ^'"""'^ ^°'^ ^'"''' "^^^ generator.
Haag, Willikm J: See—
%T3t68°Cl.fe7-y2robo'^"'"'" '■' ""' ^°^«"- ''"^ '^-
Hackett. Peter A.: See—
°'/!?."'lf," .^™' "''='""• •"«'" A = »"<* ^'"'»' C'«ve. 4.436.709.
CI. 423-437.000.
Hacndle. Joerg; and Horbaschek. Heinz, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft.
X-Ray television installation for monitor photography, 4,437,1 17, CI.
358-111.000.
Hafner. Udo; Herth, Harro; Kienzle. Wolfgang; Knapp. Heinrich
Krauss Rudolf; Lembke. Manfred; Paschke. Werner; and Sauer
Rudolf, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Electromagnetically actuatable
valve, in particular a fuel injection valve. 4.436,071. CI. 123-472 000
Hagelee, Leon A.: See—
Grossi. Anthony V.; Hagelee. Leon A.; Hahn. Louis T.; and Mar-
zocchi. Alfred. 4.436.864, CI. 524-458.000.
Hahn, Louis T.: See—
Grossi, Anthony V.; Hahn, Louis T.; Marzocchi, Alfred; and
Bolen. Charles E.. 4.436.767, CI. 427-138.000.
Grossi, Anthony V.; Hagelee, Leon A.; Hahn. Louis T.; and Mar-
zocchi. Alfred, 4,436.864. CI. 524-458.000,
Haines. Richard M,; Wong, Robert; and Berger, Elisabeth J., to Owens-
Corning Fiberglas Corporation. Aqueous co-emulsions of epoxy resin
and mineral oil. 4.436.848, CI. 523-426.000.
Haisma. Jan: See—
Hajime Industries Ltd.: See—
Yoshida. Hajime, 4.437,115. CI. 358-106.000.
Hall. David A., to Eli Lilly and Company. N-Substituted-2-(RHsulfinic
acid)-3-(S)-(acylamido)-4-oxo-azetidines and process. 4.436.596, CI
204-59, OOR.
^''n^^nt^' ^''* ^ • '° Aktiebolaget SKF. Rolling bearing. 4.436.349.
CI. 308- 1 89. OOR.
Halliburton Company: See-
Arnold, Dan M.; Smith. Harry D., Jr.; and Schultz. Ward E..
4.436.996. CI. 250-256.000.
Edwards. Arnold G.. 4.436.149, CI 166-120.000
Fredrickson. Sherman E.. 4.436.156. CI. 166-307.000
Halpert. David E.: See—
Walsh. Brian F.; and Halpert, David E., 4.437.122. CI. 358-166.000.
Halvorsen. Rolf I.: See—
Jacobsen. Kjell O.; Matre. Tore; Halvorsen, Rolf I.; Hcie. Ingar H
Myhrvold. Erling; and Berger. Ove R.. 4.436.034. ci."
Hamada. Hiroshi: See—
Yano. Kohzo; Hamada. Hiroshi; Inami. Yasuhiko; and Wada.
Tomio. 4.436.380, CI. 350-357.000.
Hamada. Toshiyoshi: See —
Endoh. Koichi; Tsuji. Nobuhiko; Nakamura. Keijiroh; Hamada.
Toshiyoshi; and Ishida, Keiichi, 4.436.812. CI. 435-14.000
Hambrecht. Juergen: See—
Hinselmann, Klaus; Naarmann, Herbert; Echte. Adolf Heil Ed-
uard; Nikles. Albert; Reffert. Rudi W.; and Hambrecht. Juergen,
Hamilton Industries, Inc.: See—
^•^^^1**5^;,^°" '^ • °^°^' """y N ; and Holschbach. Stephen E.,
4.436.022. CI. 98-11 5.0LH.
Hanley. Dean C: See—
Jacobson. Ronald L.; and Hanley, Dean C, 4,436.653, CI.
252-547.000.
Hanley. James O. Coin operated delivery system for vending machines.
Hanna, Terry J.: See—
Pellegrin. Michael T.; Hanna. Terry J.; and Thompson. Thomas K..
4.436.541. CI. 65-2.000.
Hansa Medical Products. Inc.: See—
Blom. Eric D.; and Singer. Mark I.. 4.435.853. CI. 3-1.300.
Hansen, Robert C; and Novorolsky. Paul G.. to Western Electric
Company, Inc. System using the telephone network to control locks
at a number of remote locations. 4.436.958. CI. I79-2.00A.
Hanson. Alan R. Rotary torque adapter. 4,436.005. CI. 81-177.00G
Hanson, Marc C: See—
Lange. Donald A.; Hanson. Marc C; and Kriva. Kenneth J.,
4.436.757. CI. 426-438.000.
Hanson. R. Edward. Apparatus for indicating creosote buildup in a
chimney. 4.437.090. CI. 340-613.000.
Hanyu. Susumu; and Ebata. Yoshikazu. to Janome Sewing Machine Co.
Ltd. Dual function sewing machine with a rouuble base. 4,436,042.
CI. 1 12-217. 100.
Hanzlik. Edward W. C: See—
Doery. Michael S.; Hanzlik, Edward W. C; Adamek. John A.; and
McUughlin. William J., 4,436,301, CI. 271-177.000.
Hapao, Norio: See—
Noji, Takashi; Hapao, Norio; and Obata. Yoshiharu, 4,437,011, CI.
250-486.100.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
Harada. Nobuo: See—
Sakuraya. Toshikazu; Nakamura. Hideo; Harada. Nobuo; Fujii.
Telsuya; and Emi. Toshihiko. 4.436,287. CI 266-47 (XJO
Harada, Seiki: See—
Sa^i Atsushi; Iwayanagi, Takao; Nonogaki, Saburo; Nishida.
Takashi; and Harada. Sciki, 4.436.583. cf 1 56-659, 100,
Harada. Yoshiaki. to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd Corona
generating apparatus 4.437.001. CI, 250-324,000
Harder. Wolfgang; Merger. Franz; and Towac. Friedrich. to BASF
2«i4«^ Preparation of carbonates, 4.436.668. CI
Hare. Alan L.; and George. Allan P.. to Tioxide Group PLC Electric
arc discharge apparatus. 4.436.984. CI. 219-383,000
ho'h^^n^'/"^ L^ • '" ^^\ Corporation, Dynamically controlled
horizontal peaking system, 4.437,123, CI. 358-166.000
Harman. Maurice: See—
Cross Henry F,; and Harman, Maurice. 4.436.057, CI, 122-4 OOD
Harmon William R,, Jr , to Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated
telephone ringing signal generator, 4.436.960. CI. 179-51 OA A
Harr. Josi. to Sandoz Ltd, Fungicidal compositions comprising N-
AAib-m^a'^u'mooo **"""'*^'''' '"'' ^"'f*' "^ ^"p'""
Harra. David J.; Turner. Frederick T ; and Hutchinson. Martin A . to
Varian Associates. Inc. Blocking shield and method for contouring
the thickness of sputter coated layers 4.436,602. CI 204-192 OOR
Harris Graphics Corporation: See—
Chandhoke. Mohanjit S.. 4.436.297. CI. 271-3 100
""43M68" a' 524.7"83^0Oo'^ Insulation. Inc Insulation composition
Harris. Susan K.: See—
Coitrell. Jennie L.; Davis. Richard A.; Harris, Susan K Jones
Bernard R.; and Payscur, John Y . 4.436.963. CI 179-18 OOB
M36.^?S I79-1?K' '""" "" ""' '"""• ^'''"' « •
Harrison, Don E.: See—
Radford. Kenneth C; and Harrison. Don E.. 4.436 677 CI
264-0,500, .-'•"».«'". v,i,
Harrison. Irene R,: See—
Stetson. Kurl A.; and Harrison. Irene R,. 4.436.419, CI, 356-35 500
Harsco Corporation: See-
Downey, Robert C , Jr, 4,436,136, CI 160-232,000
Hartley. Louis A.. II, to Aluminum Company of America. Method and
apparatus for producing aluminum in an electrolysis cell with uuarrv
tile lining. 4,436.597. CI. 204-67,000.
Hartshorn. Frank: See—
^"43i.8'!:9|"cri"i2,S'' ""*"" ^^ -"'^ """^''"^"- ^^""''-
Harvey. Edgar L.. to Burroughs Corporation. Display panel and keep-
alive arrangement therefor 4.437,037. CI. 313-585 000
Harvey Hubbell Incorporated: See-
Mather. David S.. 4,436.142. CI 164-337.000.
Harvill, Melvin J,: See—
Schmitl. Donald C; and Harvill. Melvin J . 4.436 195 CI
194-92 000.
Harwell. Howard L.. to Air Products and Chemicals. Inc. Alkyl poly-
'^^l^utn^*' *^ '■■"'"'y**"* '""'^ isocyanate reactions. 4.436.842. CI.
Hasegawa. Yutaka: See—
'^"'T'y''"'"' Shin-ichi; and Hasegawa. Yutaka. 4.436,414, CI.
Hashimoto. Osami: See—
°4'43'5907^cru'' ^"'"'"""' ^orimi; and Hashimoto. Osami.
Hashimoto. Sciji: See—
^4"437 n2"cM5^8'^44 00o''""'"' ^'^'' *"** ''"'*'•>"""• ''■""'"^"•
■Haskins. Delbcrt E.: See-
Murphy. Milford R.; and Haskins. Delbert E.. 4.436.018. CI. 91-
363. OOA.
Haskins Steve W., to International Telephone and Telegraph Corpora-
Vtq I mechanism for telephone instrument. 4,436,964, CI.
"4.437S79.'cr335'^r70.^'"" ^"'f^™"""- '^•«"*'*'-' """P '"^h
Hata. Shuji; Yamada. Toshio; and Murakawa. Katsuji. to Toyo Kogyo
r?w h^: Automobile transmission casing having reinforcement.
4.435.994. CI. 74-606.00R.
Hatch, Seymour A.; and Morley, James P., to CR Industries Two piece
seal adapted for simplified installation 4.436.315, CI. 277-92.000
Hatinguais, Philippe; Patoiseau, Jean-Francois; and Marcelon. Gilbert,
to Pierre Fabre S.A Compounds of the benzoxcpine series and
sulphur- and nitrogen-containing analogues; their processes for the
preparation of these products and the use thereof in the pharmaceuti-
cal field. 4.436.749, CI 424-278.000.
Hatori. Yoshinori: See—
Malsumoto. Shuichi; Hatori. Yoshinori; Murakami. Hilomi; and
Yamamoto. Hideo, 4,437,119. CI. 358-136.000
Haltori, Kyo: See—
'^''/?i'.^?«i"^*?*'"' Nomura. Isshi; Hatlori. Kyo; and Kato. Kichiro.
4.436.070. CI, 123-440.000.
Hauk. Klaus, to Deere A Company. Parallel arm windshield wiper
assembly. 4,435.875, CI. 15-250.230.
"VrlTnllS' ^fK^ ■ '° 'Rochester Instrument Systems, Inc. Wattmeter.
4,437,059, CI. 324-142.000.
PI 15
Hawk. Johnna H See-
Graham. Henry A. Jr.. Hawk. Johnna B,. and Chachowski. Rose-
mary K., 4.436.631, CI, 210-772,000,
Hay, Burns R.: See—
Dyck, Walter R ; and Hay. Burns R , 4,4.^6.096. CI 128-689 000
Hayase. Tomio: See—
Yamaguchi. Kalsunobu, Matsuoka, Sciithi Hayashida, Takayuki
and Hayase. Tomio. 4.436.532. CI 48-209 (W •»•>"•".
/J!i V ►r''ri."'i'*''!L"'*'S' '^'""' ■"'^ Y"'"m<)lo, K./uyoshi. to Aisin
bit' iS^uS; ati.lif^''''' '"'"•'"'' -^-"""^ ^- '"'"'"-
"rtus^s ';:4?;:;j;i?r";3?r7ti' ^""""""^' ■"""»'
Hayashi. Yutaka; Yamanaka. Miisuyuki; and Karasawa. Hidcyuki. to
Agent7 of Industrial Science k Technology; and Ministry of Interna,
tion. Trade & Industry Method for treatment of metal substrate for
42*7*8 OTO ''^'''■"*""'-"""'"'"'"« wmiconductor film 4.436,761. CI
Hayashida. Takayuki See—
Yamaguchi. Kalsunobu; Matsuoka. Seiichi, Hayashida, Takayuki-
and Hayase. Tomio. 4.436.532. CI 48-209 000 ^
Hayatdavoudi. Asadollah, and Adams. Ladd M . to Gill Industries. Inc
Downhole vortex generator and method 4.436.166. CI 175-65 000
Hazemeijer B V : See— •' oj-uuu
Lippcris. Joseph H. F. G . 4.436.241. CI 228- 124(100
Hebcrl, Francis A., to South Louisiana Contractors Inc Portable
pneumatic nail driving apparatus 4.436.235. CI 227-1 1 1 000
Hcfiing. Dennis V to Coleman Company, Inc . The. Damper assembly
for barbecue grill 4,436,081, CI 126-285 OOA ■"scmmy
HchI, Karl, Potent lomcter drive for displacement transducer of recinro-
eating unit 4,435,991, CI 74-89,200 rciipro
Hehl, Karl, L<Kking device for the tape cassette compartment of a
magnetic tape apparatus 4,437,131, CI, 360-96 600
Heie, Ingar H : See-
Jacobsen, KjellO. Matre. Tore; Halvorsen. Rolf I.; Hcie. Ingar H,;
l02-374"a)b ""*^ ^'^"' °^' "*■• *'*^*'0^*- CI.
Heil. Eduard; See—
Hinselmann. Klaus; Naarmann, Herbert; Echte. Adolf; Heil Ed-
. 4"";?6.?;i' ci.iSi^"'- ""''' ^^ -"^ "•'"''-•^'- ^""«"'
Heilig, Thomas, to Licentia Patent-Vcrwaltungs-GmbH, Communica-
tions system connecting circuit for controlling derivation of operal-
ing power from subscriber line current 4,436,961, CI 179-77 000
Heinemann Electric Company See—
Scanlon, William F,, 4.436,972, CI, 200-3l5.odo
Heismann, Richard A,, to Outboard Marine Corporation Mulching
adapter for rotary lawn mower, 4,435.949. CI 56-320 200
Hcitzmann. Michel: See—
"*i"i7; /^'y"""*^; ""d Heitzmann. Michel. 4.437.077. CI
333-245 000,
"^■.".«^^V'£L °"'y ^ Concrete form extender device 4,436.275 CI
249-47,000
Henderson, David Anti-theft picnic device, 4.436,214. CI, 220-18 000
Henkel KGaA: See—
'^"•[^r.'i.Ji^*''' '""^ Rossmann. Christian. 4.436.643, CI
232-135.000.
Hennessy. John B.; and Lane. Derek Cassette adapter for eight track
machines 4.437.130, CI 360-94 000
Henry, Raymond; and Heitzmann, Michel, to Thomson-CSF, Semicon-
?r"Se:s,t4T7.07f^,'3'33"275,S^' '"^""'^'^ '"'* '" '''«'"'^"°"
Hens. Carol us M : See—
''4.'S206.'cr2&-2"25"^'^~'" "* ^ '"' '"'^^^ ""'*" ''
Hepp. Leonard R . to General Electric Company. Reinforced thermo-
plastic composition. 4.436.860. CI. 524-394.000.
Hercules Incorporated: See—
Klosicwicz. Daniel W , 4.436.858. CI. 524-296.000
"^,o","Io1^AnI?'^"''y Fishing seat, rod holder and pail. 4,436.340. CI
2V7- 193.000.
Heroux. Jean: See—
Cohen. Georges; and Heroux. Jean. 4.437,074. CI. 333-128 000
Hershberger. Charles L,; and Rosteck. Paul R,. Jr,. to Eli Lilly and
Company Method for stabilizing and selecting recombinant DNA
containing host cells, 4.436.815. CI. 435-172.000
Herth. Harro: See—
Hafner, Udo; Herth. Harro; Kienzle. Wolfgang; Knapp. Heinrich
Krauss. Rudolf; Lembke, Manfred; Paschke, Werner, and Sauer
Rudolf. 4.436.071. CI. 123-472.000.
Hetterich. Hermann: See—
Horling. Peter; Hetterich. Hermann; Dobhan. Herbert; and Klup-
fel. Norbert. 4.435.889. CI. 29-1 48,40C
Heubner, Ulrich: See—
Priiiz. Bruno; Rockel. Manfred B.; Rudolph. Gunther; Heubner,
Ulrich; and Zoebe, Hugo. 4.436.790. CI. 428-675.000.
Hewlett-Packard Company: See—
Christopher. Chris J.; Wenninger, Fred W.; Morris. Donald E
Covington. Wayne F.; Foliom. Jerry B.; Beyers, Joaeph W '
Nairn. John H.; and Osborne. JelTrey C. 4,437,156. C\.
Higaki, Hiromichi See—
Yamabc. Masaaki; Higaki. Hiromichi; Shinohara. Toshio; Tanabe
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama, Shunsuke. 4,436,772, CI 427-379 000
Yamabe. Masaaki; Higaki. Hiromichi; Shinohara. Tothio; Tanabe.
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama, Shunsuke, 4,436.773, CI. 427-380.000
HMO ().(J - 35
PI 16
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Higashidc, Eiji: See—
Horn. Saloshi; Fukase, Hirmhi; and Higashidc. Eiji. 4.436.918. CI.
548-546 000
Higgins. William A ; and Perz. John S.. to Lubrizol Corporation. The.
Two-coitiponent urethane coating system. 4.436.855. CI. 524-145.000.
Higuchi. Vlasahiro: See—
Olcumura. Fumio; Higuchi. Masahiro; Kamei. Shun; and Miyauchi.
Masahiro. 4.436,783. CI. 428-411.000.
Hihara. Toshio: See —
Niwa. Toshio; and Hihara. Toshio, 4,436.906. CI 544-187.000.
Hill. James B; and Hill. Sally F. Baby carrier. 4.436,233. CI.
224-159.000.
Hill. Sally F : See—
Hill. James B.; and Hill. Sally F . 4.436,233. CI 224-159 000.
Hiller, Jeffrey H.; and Hiller. Stephen S. Assembly for steam heating or
cooking food products and its method of operation. 4,436.082, CI
126-348 000
Hiller, Stephen S.: See—
Hiller, Jeffrey H; and Hiller. Stephen S.. 4,436.082. CI.
126-348 000
Hinselmann. Klaus; Naarmann. Herbert; Echte, Adolf; Heil, Eduard;
Nikies, Albert; Reffert, Rudi W ; and Hambrecht. Juergen, to BASF
Aktiengesellschafi Production of molding materials containing poly-
phenylene ethers. 4.436.870, CI. 525-53.000.
Hinson, Neil R.: See-
Taylor, Richard J.; Kellar. Paul R. N.; and Hinson, Neil R..
4.437,121, CI. 358-160.000
Hirabayashi, Yasuji: See—
Urasaki, Takanori; Hirabayashi, Yasuji; Yoshida, Tugusi; and Inata,
Hiroo. 4,436,894, CI. 528-176.000.
Hiraga, Masaharu: See—
Fukushima, Eiji; Fukuhara, Seiichi; and Hiraga, Masaharu,
4,436,465, CI. 409-243.000.
Hirai, Yukio: See—
Tokuhisa, Masaaki; and Hirai, Yukio, 4.436.562, CI. 148-24.000.
Hirano, Tsumoru: See—
Yagihara, Morio; Hirano, Tsumoru; and Mihayashi, Keiji,
4,436,808,0.430-381.000.
Hirata, Minoru: See —
Imada, Isuke; Nagaoka, Akinobu; and Hirata. Minoru, 4,436,753,
CI. 424-331.000
Hirata, Toshitaka: See —
Ebi, Yulaka; Fukazawa. Takao; Kawakubo. Toshio; Jinnai, Koi-
chiro; Horike. Masanori; Iwasaki. Kyuhachiro; Ishikawa, Chuji;
and Hirata. Toshitaka. 4.437.101, CI. 346-75.000.
Hirayama. Fumitoshi: See—
Omae, Takashi; Tanaka, Kisaburoo; Aoki, Masahiro; Hirayama,
Fumitoshi; and Izaki, Susumu, 4,436,554, CI. 75-128.00T.
Hird, Richard E, to Estad Products. Inc. Panel locking means.
4,435,939, CI. 52-582.000.
Hirokawa, Toshio: See—
Tsuyama, Yoshito; Shimazaki, Yasumi; Kakita, Kazutoshi; and
Hirokawa, Toshio, 4,436,239, CI. 228-17.000.
Hirosawa, Kuninori. See—
Akiyama, Hiroyuki; Shimada, Sumio; Hirosawa, Kuninori; and
Kuwabara, Hideki, 4,436,840, CI. 521-58.000.
Hirose, Kenji, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Document
information filing system. 4,437,127, CI. 358-296.000.
Hirsch, Selwyn R.: See—
Manfredo, Joseph N; and Hirsch. Selwyn R., 4,436,145. CI.
165-67.000.
Hisao, Makino; and Sadao, Kozima, to Kaiyo Kogyo Co., Ltd. Multi-
stage water purification apparatus 4,436,675. CI. 261-77.000.
Hisey, Durward A., to HY-C Company Inc. Chimney cap. 4,436,021,
CI. 98-67.000.
Hitachi Kiden Kogyo, Ltd.: See—
Imamura, Yoshinobu; Kamei, Shigeki; Yamagata, Tetuo; and Fuiii,
Hiroshi, 4,436,026, CI. 100-45.000.
Hitachi, Ltd.: See—
Kokura, Satoshi; Nihei, Masayasu; Wachi, Hiroshi; Mashida,
Hiromi; and Senda, Kousaku. 4.436.982, CI. 219-130.510.
Kurihara, Nobuo; Morooka. Yasuo; Nishikawa. Mitsuyo; Miura,
Kiyoshi; and Nagahashi, Yoshitoshi. 4.437,163, CI. 364-508.000.
Matsuda, Tadahito; Okumura, Masahide; Yokouchi. Hisatake;
Ozasa, Susumu; and Kato. Yasuo, 4,437,008, CI. 250-396.00R.
Mochizuki, Taketoshi; Matsuo, Kazuya; Kudo, Mituo; Arai, Akira;
Yamada, Junichi; Shono, Keizi; Aoki, Masaaki; Ohmori, Masai-
chi; and Nishi, Genichiro, 4,435,962, CI. 62-175.000.
Muto, Nobuyoshi; Nagase, Hiroshi; Sakai, Keijiro; and Matsuda,
Yasuo, 4.437,051, CI. 318-808.000.
Narato, Kiyoshi; Ohisuka, Keizou; Inada, Tooru; and Watanabe,
Takashi, 4,436,699, CI. 422-68.000.
Ogau, Masahiro; and Sakai, Osamu, 4,437.135, CI. 361-91.000.
Ohe, Etsuo; Sugawara, Katsuo; Tani, Ititaro; and Tsukioka, Hideo,
4,436.654, CI. 252-574.000.
Okudaira. Sadayuki; Saida, Hiroji; Sakai, Yoshio; Nishimatsu,
Shigeru; and Suzuki, Keizo, 4,436,581, CI. 156-643.000.
Onodera, Osamu, 4,437,165, CI. 364-749.000.
Saiki, Atsushi; Iwayanagi, Takao; Nonogaki, Saburo; Nishida,
Takashi; and Harada, Seiki, 4,436,583, Cf 156-659.100.
Sekiya, Teruo, 4,435,970, CI. 72-239.000.
Takeuchi, Masato; Okada, Hideo; Tobita. Hirosi; Okabe, Sigeru;
Matsuda, Shinpei; Tonami, Munehiko; Tamura, Kohki; and
Nakajima, Fumito, 4,436,794, CI. 429-40.000.
Yamamoto, Etsuji; Sekihara, Kensuke; and Kohno, Hideki,
4,437.136, CI. 361-146.000.
Yoshida, Masashi; Yokota, Hajime; Aman, Mitsuji; and Shieemura
Tatsuya. 4,437,129. CI. 360-85.000.
Hitachi Metals, Ltd.: See—
Yamashita, Keitaro; and Kashiwagi, Hiromi, 4,436,055 CI
118-658.000.
Hitachi Microcomputer Engineering, Ltd.: See-
Ogata, Masahiro; and Sakai, Osamu, 4,437,135, CI. 361-91.000.
HMVH Corporation: See-
Holder. Morris E.. 4,436,526. CI. 44-IO.OOB.
Ho. Chungfah H.. to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company Oligo-
mer pellets of ethylene terephthalate. 4.436.782, CI 428-402 000
Hobbs. Linda G.: See—
Bequette. Robert J ; Hobbs. Linda G ; and Scott, Joseph A
4,436,738, CI. 424-238 000.
Hochanadel. Thomas A., to J. E. Grote Pepp-A-Matic Co., Inc. Pen-
dulum-type product slicing machine. 4,436,012, CI. 83-703.000.
Hochtief AG, vorm. Gebr. Helfmann: See-
Magnus, Wolf; Braach, Otto; Fischer. Dirk; and Wippig. Werner.
4,436,448.0 405-143.000.
Hodakowski, Leonard E.; and Wilson, Charles A., H, to Union Carbide
Corporation. Methods for controlling pests with substituted phenyl
thio(thiono)phosphates and the thio(thiono)phosphates. 4,436,736, CI
424-211.000.
Hodgins, Martin G.; and Jordan, William J., to Bell Telephone Labora-
tories, Incorporated. Data link using integrated optics devices
4,436,365,0.350-96.160. e e k
Hodlewsky, Wasly G.; and Bloedorn, William H., to Rexnord Inc. Low
friction flat-top article carrying chain 4.436,200. CI. 198-851.000.
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Diery, Helmut. 4.436,933. CI. 562-470.000.
Hoechsi-Roussel Pharmaceuticals Inc.: See—
Ong. Helen H.; and Profitt. James A., 4,436,748, CI. 424-275.000.
Hoeksira, Edith, executrix: See—
Forgac, John M.; and Hockstra, Gerald B., deceased, 4,436,344. CI.
299-2.000.
Hoekstra, Gerald B.. deceased: See—
Forgac, John M.; and Hoekstra, Gerald B., deceased, 4,436,344, CI.
299-2.000.
Hoerauf, Werner; See—
Strehler, Hugo; Hoerauf, Werner; and Urbanek, Friedrich,
4,436,897, O. 528-323.000.
Hoeschele, David F., Jr.: See-
Anthony, Thomas R.; Connery, Richard J.; and Hoeschele, David
F., Jr., 4,437,109, CI. 357-68.000.
Hoff-Stevens, Inc.: See—
Frey, John A., 4,436,228. CI. 222-400.700.
Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.: See-
Fryer, Rodney I.; Trybulski, Eugene J.; and Walser, Armin,
4,436,662. CI. 260-245.700.
Hoffmann, Richard; and Zobawa, Franz, to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft. Connector for printed circuit boards. 4,436,362, CI. 339-
103.00M.
Hofmann, Frank, to Walter Hofmann Maschinenfabrik, Firma. Ar-
rangement for pulsation-free feeding of a liquid medium. 4,436.230,
CI. 222-614.000.
Hofmann. Hansdieter; Rolhe. Hans-Jochen; Skupin. Georg; and Wolff,
Konrad, to Davy McKee Aktiengesellschaft, Borsigalle. Preparation
of spinnable polyamide from dinitrile. diamine, HjO with P contain-
ing catalyst. 4,436,898, CI. 528-336.000.
Hogg. John A. Frame for comb honey. 4,435.865, O. 6-2.00R.
Hoica, Radu, to Degremont. Bipolar electrode electrolysis apparatus.
4,436,605, CI. 204-225.000.
Holder, Morris E., to HMVH Corporation. Method for making an
artificial fuel log. 4,436.526. CI. 44-lO.OOB.
Holmwood. Graham; Lurssen. Klaus; and Frohberger. Paul-Ernst, to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Benzyl-pyrimidinylalkyl-ethers as plant
growth regulators and fungicides, and corresponding pyrimidinyl-
carbinols. 4,436,907, CI. 544-335.000.
Holschbach, Stephen E.: See—
Zboralski, Jon A.; Grow, Harry N.; and Holschbach, Stephen E.,
4,436.022, CI. 98-1 15.0LH.
Holstein und Kappert GmbH: See—
Borstelmann. Wolfgang, 4,436,124. CI. 141-5.000.
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Ebisawa, Masuo; and Suzuki, Tetsuya, 4,436,140, CI. 164-120.000.
Inoue, Kazuo; and Otsuka, Tsuneo, 4,436,172, CI. 180-219.000.
Morisono, Akira, 4,436,174, CI. 180-227.000.
Takahashi, Hirotake, 4,436,173, CI. 180-226.000.
Honda, Nobuyasu: See —
Ikeda, Toshimitsu; Honda, Nobuyasu; and Nakano, Tetsuya,
4.436,803. CI. 430-122.000.
Honda, Sueaki: See—
Bando, Yoshihide; Tanaka, Toshiki; Honda. Sueaki; Takahashi,
Yoshihiko; Tsuruyoshi, Kenichi; Kawashima, Katsumi; and
Kishimoto, Syuichi. 4,437,078, CI. 335-81.000.
Honda, Tadatoshi: See—
Matsuda, Fujio; Kato, Takazo; Honda, Tadatoshi; Terada,
Kazuhiro; and Kogure. Yasuo, 4,436,916, CI. 548-508.000.
Hondorp, Hugh L., to United States of America, Energy. Neutron and
gamma radiation shielding material, structure, and process of making
structure. 4,437,013, CI. 250-515.100.
Honeck, Manfred Fred: See—
Sapkowski, Mechislao, 4,437,128. CI. 358-335.000.
Honeywell B.V.: See—
Berkhof, Hendrikus, 4,436,506, CI. 431-76.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
Honeywell Inc.: See—
'*?50°162 1 2?''*' ^ • '"'' '^"'"""' ''°°''"" N., 4,436,370, CI
^Z'iln^^^ '? Veitscher Magnesitwerke-Actien-Gesellschafl Pris.
Hor^h^rH;lnf ser '"'''"'''^•^^''•'^■^' '«-"*^
H«r."p^"'^ u- ^°^'^- 1"'^ "orbaschek, Heinz, 4,437,1 17, CI 358-1 1 1 000
7di-93T70."' '" """^ ^"""'^ ^" • ^"^ S""" P"n'er 4.436.03,. a:
"°^!I^ ^''''^''°• l°^*''<^''- Chosaku; Kiba, Yasuo; Takeno Rvuko
Nakano, Joji; Nitta, Jun; Kishimoto, Sumiko; Murakam" Shohach^"
T uda Hisatsugu and Saikawa, hamu, to Toyama Chemical Co"
t^on i/,t-'?:'"'"°^"y'>-2.3-dioxopiperazine derivatives, ac'd addii
5M 2?8.^ '°^ ""'^ '"°^"* ^°' producing same. 4.436,921 CI.
Horiba, Ltd.: See—
Kinoshita, Dainichiro, 4,437,058, CI 324-120 000
Horie, Shigeru; Yamamoto. Yasuo; and Ikarashi. Takeo. to Mitsubishi
"°M36'»rd'°j«."s. '■'"""•'"""" ='•■■ '-"'■ *""»"' '■»
Horii, Kenju: See—
Kuroda. Takao; and Horii, Kenju, 4,435,897, CI. 29-572 000
Horn, Satoshi; Fukase, Hiroshi; and Higashide, Eiji, to Takeda Chemi-
cal Industries, Ltd. Method for production of liptide and its iniTr
mediate. 4,436,918, CI. 548-546.000. pcp"ae, and its inter-
Horike, Masanori: See—
^"ihiyo'H ^' iT" w""*""' '^^.'"*°' »^a«""''"b«- Toshio; Jinnai, Koi-
chiro. Honke, Masanori; Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro; Ishikawa, Chuj
andHirata. Toshitaka, 4,437,101.0. 346-75.000
°^L«^ '^'^•n'° ^^ ''''"'P* Corporation. Amplifier arrangement
4"l3°7yor??."3f^:2"54.(^"'""''"^ '' "^^^"^ °^ ^ -"-' -"«"
Horlmg. Peter. Hctterich, Hermann; Dobhan, Herbert; and Klupfel
Norbert, to SKF Kugellagerfabriken GmbH. Method and apparatus
148 40C^^ ^^"°" " '°"'"* ^"'"^ ^'«^ 4,435.889 CI. 29
Horvath. Peter: See—
Ferenczi Gyorgy; Horvath. Peter; Toth, Ferenc Kiss Jozsef and
Boda, Janos, 4,437,060. O. 324-158.00D '
Hoshino, Satoshi: See—
'"Talashi°4,43M82';'ci' ^^^ ^^'""^''- "'^^"'^ -'^ ^««-"-
" Kym5L'riv"riI)^i^' ^°'^'"' ^T""^ ^ • ^"'^ Englebert, Stephen M., to
ci. 4?8 19? «» ^°'P°""'°" Nonwoven wiper laminate 4,436,780,
Houck, Robert J., and King, Kevin J., to B. F. Goodrich Company
for omfmu'J?' '^" 'T"" *"';^*"8 ' P^^ *»'*^' *"dicator and adjE
CI ?98-502 00o"'"^ of a synchronous rip detector circuit. 4,436,198.
Howard. James K.. to International Business Machines Corooration
36MI3"^ '*"'""'"" ^°' ^"'' '^'"'•^"•"'^ capacilor 4 437!?59! c":
Howell. Frederick H., to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Alkylation and
aralkylationofaromatic amines. 4,436,936,0 564-409 000
Howell, John L.: See— -^rr.uuu.
Chang, Melvin C; and Howell, John L., 4,436,552, CI 75-41 000
WO orM^,?n"R?n''r*"i? °'"'' ^"^"^ Glass frS contS
WU3 or M0O3 m Ru02-based resistors. 4,436,829, O 501-22 000
Hoya Corporation: See— *^ uuu
M«.,i*,''c!.'' '*"°c ""'^ Kobayashi, Kunimitsu, 4,436,386, CI. 350-550 000
noyer, bdgar: See — ^^'
^""fcTpH ^°'^*!"^- ^""^'a ^"'^- Voigtiander, Wolfgang;
Hoyer. Edgar; and Neubert, Peter, 4,436,735, CI 424-182 OX)
Hoyrup, Sigurd J to Kliklok Corporation. Method and apparatusfor
folding carton fianges. 4,435,943. CI. 53-491 000 "PP""'"* 'or
Hudson, David M.. to Advanced Color Technology, Inc. Ink disposal
system for mk jet printer. 4,437,104. O. 346.14a00R '^
Hudson, Edwin L.; and Smith, Stephen L., to Intel Corporation ECL
Compatible CMOS memory. 4,437,171. CI. 365- 1 77 OM
.^''•i°J\'^^A '^.M."'"^'* ^""« of America, Navy. Buoyant elec-
trode. 4,437.097, 0. 340-852.000. "uuyiini cicc
Hudson, Sharon J. Jr to Sharon Manufacturing Company. Dual fluid
heat exchanger. 4,436,147, CI. 165-165.000
Hugelshofer, Paul; Zbinden. Peter; and Koci. Zdenek. to Ciba-Geigy
S^^" '°" 1'°*^",* '^°; 'he preparation of storage stable colorant
8 5^7a)o'°"' ultrafiltration and wet milling. 4.436,523, CI
"Krtf "p*^"' '^ •/n'^ Boukamp, Bernard A., to United Stales of
M36" 9^, Cr4¥9.n2:SS!; ''''°^" ^"^ ""''"^ '=°"'*"^'°^ '"""*
Hughes Aircraft Company: See—
Smay, John W., 4,437,047. CI. 318-649.000.
Hughes Tool Company: See—
Kennington, Kerry S.; and Baker. Ronald. 4.436,002. CI. 81-57 200
Witten. Raymond L.. 4.436.488. O. 417-53.000.
Huhn, Fnedrich: See—
^26Ni5'l'oOO' ""*""' ^"''^"'^^' ■"'^ Lekutat. Rolf. 4.436.676. CI.
Huhn. Karl; and Marwitz. Heinrich. to Wacker-Chemie GmbH Aque-
ous organopolysiloxane emulsiers and a process for treating organic
fibers therewith. 4.436.856. CI. 524-21 1.000. organic
Huling. Edwin. Low energy building. 4,435.928. CI 52-90 000
Hunaut, Roger; and Dupont, Francois, to Thomson-CSF. Convergence
device for a color-camera. 4.437.1 10, CI. 358-41 000
PI 17
Hurt, James J.; and Foss, Susan K., to Deere t Comoanv CoorH.n..*
Husain, Iqbal: See—
HusS"Ala''nTL-' """'"• ''''"' *•*''■'''• ^' "^272.000.
^ M^/^i^"'*'^"*p",- <?"'"• ^*"» ^ ■ ""*»"• A'«" L.; Dirnberger
H . ». T ? • 5"'* '^°''*- Marjoric J., 4.436.185. CI. 187-29 OOR
Hutchin. Richard A., to Iiek Corporation. Beam director fo^oDUd
ranging system 4,436,417, CI. 356-4 500 "'rector tor optical
Hutchinson, Franklin D.: See—
%^'o!293 0(»'"" ^ '"'' Hutchinson, Franklin D., 4,436,372, CI.
Hutchinson, Martin A : See—
"4:736'arCI 2^^:?5^;£r''^'"^'' ''' '"'^ ""•^'""-"- W-'" A..
HY-C Company Inc.: See—
Hisey, Durward A., 4,436.021, CI 98-67 000
Hydra-Rig. Inc.: See—
I . ^^"'*'°"; Thomas L. 4.436.177. 0 180-324.000
l',ml"A T°/"- '"^Satake. Sachio. to Nissan Motor Company
Limited; and Atsugi Motor Parts Company Limited VehiclTK
ichE7e;i;;:"s^:i'"^^''-""'" ^-^^^ ^'« ^' "^-^^
.chino.",5!^;uK'l'*'""^"- ^^■«"'"- ^•^^^•'"- C.'K5 O^^'""-
"S^,;5?^^g'%i'l^'^^'- "-V"^. and Okura,
Igarashi, Akira: See—
^"549-I2100o''*"'''""'" ''"• '"'^ '*'""*•'• '^*""' '♦•'♦^6.920, O.
Igarashi, Taizo: See—
""Z'Zli O.'^srofe"""' ^"'°' ""' ^'"«'"- Toshiyuki.
Iguchi. Shigeru; and Ebato, Seiao, to Mitsubishi Paper Mills Ltd
''Xrcf :3S.'S5o.'""^^" '''^''' """« .wo'Ton!:;rage'r:;!:
lida, Kazuyoshi: See—
Yamanioto Tsuyoshi; Taniguchi, Norihisa; Iida. Kazuyoshi and
iL ^°^^?' Yoshikazu, 4,436,179. CI. 181-210.000
Ikarashi, Takeo: See—
"cT'502'208 OOo""""""'"" ^""°' ■"'^ "'""'''• ''"'•'~' *-*36.835.
Ikari, Kazuo; and Fujii, Toru. to Olympus Optical Co.. Ltd. Retrofocus
type super wide angle lens system. 4.436.382. O. 350:458 000
4i'i7.02'8" O. 3f ™9r(JS) """"* '" ' ^ ""'"*•'»'« '"°«°'-
"'mrnu'^ar;,S"^^m°i' ^^4^7^ ^V^'iS S^t' '"' ' ""'''"^ ^°^
Ikeda. Masami: See—
^"ci"'346-"'lOo'"' '^'*""'*''" ""■°*°' '"'l "'«<!«• Masami, 4.437.100.
Ikeda. Nobumasa: See—
Yamaguchi. Yutaka; Koizumi, Nobuyuki; Araki. Tamio. Kojima,
IL M l^,"!'^"'' and Ikeda, Nobumasa, 4.436.I3I. CI. 152-361 OFP
trial ?o iV H \"r'"'"""' "r^"'"'' '" Matsushita Electric Indus-
MirJe^^sse'mbl^'&SS^r C^'/Kog if"" ""' "" ""'""' ""'^
Ikeda, Osamu: See—
Tomino. Naoki; Ikeda Osamu; Malsuzawa, Yoshio, and Inoue,
Hideya, 4,436,792, 0. 429-1.000. « tnuuc,
Ikeda, Toshimitsu; Honda, Nobuyasu; and Nakano. Tetsuya. to Mita
Industrial Co. Ltd Method of developing electr^tat.c fmage with
magnetic brush ear promoter 4,436,803, CI 430-122 000
Imada. Isuke; Nagaoka. Akinobu; and Hirau, Minoru. to Takeda Chem-
Imai. Akio: See—
Furukawa, Hiroshi; Saito. Yuichi; Imai, Akio; Yamamoto, Keisaku
J^^T,\. ^°^°^^'' ""'^ Yoshida. Nobuyuki, 4,436,873, C\
''"m1!,"u!;i ''>'*"°' '"'^ ^^^°!}' M''*"0' to Nippon Mining Co., Ltd
4''4tSo, O. S'lTixT' '^°'""^ '""^^ '^ '^ cl^trorefined
Imamura, Yoshinobu, Kamei, Shigeki; Yamagata, Teluo; and Fujii
CutetSj." ^"*'" ''°*^°' ^''^ Emptjcan crusher 4.436.026:
Imanaka. Hiroshi: See—
Uinehara. Kazuyoshi; Tanaka, Hirokazu; Uchida. Itsuo; Kohsaka
iw. ^ Masanobu; and Imanaka, Hiroshi, 4,436,726. CI. 424-177 000 '
IMI Marston Limited: See— '
Beese, John G., 4,436,218, CI. 220-89.00A.
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC: See—
''4%3'JS'ci: fSS"'"" ' "^ Lindenstruth, Werner.
^'4%3'S'7'ci: fSTMSb"'"" "^ '"' '-'"«*-"-''• ^^"'".
Tompsett, Alan J., 4,436,938, O 564-474.000
Inaba, Shosei, lo Victor Company of Japan Limited Disc cartridge
having a deUchable lid. 4.436.201. CI. 206-444 000
Inada. Tooru: See—
^"*\°' Kiyoshi; Ohtsuka. Keizou; Inada, Tooru; and WaUnabe
Takashi. 4.436.699. CI. 422-68.000 waunaoe.
PI 18
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Inti, Kunihiro, to Nikko Industry Co.. Ltd. Waste gas apparatus for
electric furnace. 4.437,186, CI. 373-9.000.
Inai, Takayoshi; Saitoh, Teruo; and Sannomiya, Hisayuki, to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd. Color television camera. 4.437.111, CI.
358-44.000.
Inami, Yasuhiko: See—
Yano, Kohzo; Hamada. Hiroshi; Inami, Yasuhiko; and Wada.
Tomio. 4.436.380, CI. 350-357.000.
Inata, Hiroo: See—
Urasaki, Takanori; Hirabayashi, Yasuji; Yoshida, Tugusi; and Inata,
Hiroo, 4,436.894. Ci. 528-176.000.
Incorvia, Samuel A.: See—
Cullen, John S.; Incorvia, Samuel A.; and Vogt, James A.,
4,436.623. CI. 210-282.000.
Independent Machmg Company: See—
Sanu Lucia. Jack; and Trapp, Kenneth, 4,436,249, CI. 242-I8.00R.
Industrie-Werke Karlsruhe Augsburg Aktiengcsellschaft: See—
Pache. Norbert; and Mazac, Karel, 4,436.980, CI. 219-123.000.
Ing. C. Olivetti & C , S p.A : See—
Knirsch, Franco, 4,436,801. CI. 430-73.000.
Simonotti, Lucio; and Motta. Carlo. 4.436,182, CI 186-37.000.
Innertsberger, Ernst: See—
Pirson, Ewald; Schmidlkofer, Jakob; and Innertsberger, Ernst,
4.436.647. d. 252-358.000.
Inoue, Hideya: See —
Tomino. Naoki; Ikeda. Osamu; Matsuzawa, Yoshio; and Inoue.
Hideya, 4,436,792. CI. 429-1 000.
Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated: See—
Inoue. Kiyoshi, 4,436,976. CI. 219-69.00V.
Inoue. Kazuo; and Otsuka. Tsuneo. to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Motorcycle having an engine with a turbo-supercharser
4,436,172, CI. 180-219.000.
Inoue. Kiyoshi, to Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated. Electroerosion
machming method and apparatus with automatic vibrations-sensing
electrode wear compensation. 4,436,976, CI. 219-69.00V.
Inoue. Mono; Hoshino. Satoshi; Namura. Hideki; and Watari. Takashi,
to Nippon Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha Constant ship speed control
method. 4,436.482, CI. 416-1.000.
Institut Elektrosvarki Imeni E.O.Patona Akademii Nauk Ukrainskoi
SSR: See—
Lebedev, Vladimir K.; Kuchuk-Yatsenko, Sergei I.; Sakharnov,
Vasily A.; Galian. Boris A.; Asoyants, Grigory B.; and Tishura,
Vladimir 1 . 4.436.974. CI. 219-66.000.
Intel Corporation: See —
Hudson. Edwin L.; and Smith. Stephen L., 4,437,171, CI
365-177.000
Liu, Wei-Ti; and Lee. Douglas J.. 4.437,025, CI. 307-475.000.
Rose. Donald K; and Silverman, Peter J., 4,436,579, CI
156-626.000
International Business Machines Corporation: See —
Bradley, David J . 4.437.093. CI. 340-726.000.
Brady. Michael J.; Meyerson. Bernard S.; and Warlaumoni. John
M.. 4.436.797. CI. 430-5.000
Cork. Robin M. S.; and Rose. David B., 4,437,184, CI. 371-19.000.
Dean, Mark E.; Eggebrechi, Lewis C; Kummer. David A.; and
Saenz. Jesus A.. 4,437,092, CI. 340-703.000.
Demke, Kent R.; and Owire, Jerold D., 4,437,167, CI. 364-900.000.
Depp, Steven W.; and Sincerbox, Glenn T., 4,436,420, CI.
356-128.000.
Ergler. James M.; Kohn, Harold; and Smetana, Michael, 4,436,001,
CI. 81-9.510.
Freeouf, John L ; Haag, William J.; and Woodall, Jerry M.,
4.436,768, CI. 427-227.000.
Gardiner. James R.; Makarewicz. Stanley R.; Revitz. Martin; and
Shepard. Joseph F.. 4.437,108, CI. 357-59.000.
Gaur, Santosh P.; Lechaton, John S.; and Srinivasan, Guruma-
konda R., 4,435,898. CI. 29-577.00C.
Howard. James K.. 4.437,139, CI. 361-313.000.
Kirkman, David H., 4,436,378, CI. 350-345.000.
Miersch, Eddehard F.; Pollmann, Kuri; Schettler. Helmut; and
Zuhlke. Rainer. 4,437.022, CI. 307-270.000.
Pomerene. James H.; and RechtschafTen. Rudolph N.. 4,437,149.
CI. 364-200.000.
Queener. Carl A.. 4.436.409. CI. 355-I4.0OR.
Rhodes. John H., Jr.; and Rosati. Alfonso A.. 4.436,403, CI. 355-
3.0SH.
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.: See —
Boden. Richard M.; Tyszkiewicz, Theodore J.; and Watkins. Huah,
4.436.652. CI. 252-522.0OR.
International Harvester Co.: See-
Connelly. John J.; and Cellitti. Raymond A., 4,436,289, CI.
266-80.000
International Telephone and Telegraph Corporation: See—
Haskins, Steve W., 4,436,964. CI. 179-164.000.
Mazza. Frank J.; and DeFilippis, John, 4,436,957, CI. I79-2.0EA.
Internationale Octrooi Maatschappij "Octropa" B.V : See-
O'Neill, Terence C, 4.436.014, CI. 83-762.000.
Inui, Toshiharu; and Moriguchi, Haruhiko, to Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.
Heat-sensitive recording apparatus. 4,437,102. CI. 346-76.0PH.
Inuzuka, Tsuneki; Ishida, Masato; Tanioka, Hiroshi; and Sakamaki,
Hisashi, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Image forming apparatus in-
cluding power switch operating means. 4,436,408, CI. 355-I4.00R.
Iowa State University Research Foundation, Inc.: See —
Urock. Richard C. 4.436,934. CI. 562-502.000.
Irelan. Robert L. One hand clamping device. 4.436,294, CI. 269-6.000.
Irving, Edward, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Heat-curable epoxide
resin compositions 4,436,880, CI. 525-504.000.
Ishibai, Isao; and Kobayashi, Kunimitsu, to Hoya Corporation. Binocu-
lars housing 4,436,386, CI. 350-550.000.
Ishibashi, Michinori: See—
Ishiyama, Masashi; and Ishibashi, Michinori, 4,436,491. CI
417-385.000.
Ishida. Keiichi: See—
Endoh. Koichi; Tsuji. Nobuhiko; Nakamura, Keijiroh; Hamada.
Toshiyoshi; and Ishida, Keiichi. 4,436.812. CI. 435-14.000.
Ishida. Masato: See—
Inuzuka. Tsuneki; Ishida, Masato; Tanioka, Hiroshi; and Sakamaki,
Hisashi, 4,436.408, CI. 3S5-I4.00R.
Ishigura, Michihiro: See—
Amano, Takehiro; Yoshikawa, Kensei; Sano, Tatsuhiko; Ohuchi,
Kutaka; Ishigura. Michihiro; Shiono, Manzo; Fujita. Yoshiji and
Nishida. Takashi. 4.436.939. CI. 568-813.000.
Ishii. Hisao: See-
Nomura. Yoshiyuki; Okuda, Kanemasa; and Ishii, Hisao, 4,436,975.
CI. 2I9-69.00W.
Ishii. Isao: See—
Nishizako. Shizutaka; Ishii. Isao; and Sakamoto. Yoshiaki.
4.436.831. CI. 501-119.000.
Ishikawa. Atuo: See—
Hayashi. Motomu; Ishikawa. Atuo; and Yukimoto. Kazuyoshi.
4.437.143. CI. 362-272.000.
Ishikawa. Chuji: See—
Ebi. Yutaka; Fukazawa. Takao; Kawakubo. Toshio; Jinnai. Koi-
chiro; Horike. Masanori; Iwasaki. Kyuhachiro; Ishikawa. Chuji;
and Hirata. Toshitaka. 4.437. 101. CI. 346-75.000.
Ishiyama. Masashi; and Ishibashi. Michinori. to Fuji Photo Film Co.,
Ltd.; and Nikkiso Co.. Ltd. Method of supplying hydraulic operating
fluid in diaphragm type. 4.436.491. CI. 417-385.000.
Isowa. Yoshikazu; Ohmori, Muncki; Mori. Kaoru; Ichikawa. Tctsuya
Nonaka. Yuji; Kihara. Keiichi; Oyama. Kiyotaka; Satoh. Heijiro; and
Nishimura, Shigeaki, to Toyo Soda Manufacturing Co.. Ltd.; and
Sajami Chemical Research Center. Addition compound of dipeptide
derivative and amino acid derivative 4.436.925. CI. 560-19.000.
Itek Corporation: See—
Hutchin, Richard A., 4.436.417. CI. 356-4.500.
Ito. Hiroshi: See—
Tamama. Hiroshi; Ozawa. Yukio; Miyazaki. Jingo; Ito. Hiroshi; and
Kinoshita. Toyohiro. 4,436.313. CI. 277-80.000.
Itoh. Yuji: See—
Takahashi. Junichi; Sakane, Toshio; and Itoh, Yuji. 4,436.388, CI.
351-206.000.
Itou. Takeo: See—
Takahara. Takeshi; Sato. Takeo; Itou. Takeo; and Tamatani.
Masaaki. 4.436,646, CI. 252-301. 40S.
Iwai, Fumio: See—
Seimiya, Ryubun; Iwai, Fumio; and Nosaka. Isao. 4.436.402. CI.
355-3.00R.
Iwaisako. Toshiyuki: See—
Matsuzaki. Kazuhiko; Iwaisako. Toshiyuki; and Masamoto. Junzo,
4.436.900. CI. 528-490.000.
Iwakura. Ken: See-
Sato. Kozo; Iwakura. Ken; and Igarashi. Akira. 4,436,920, CI.
549-227.000.
Iwanade, Hisao: See—
Negoro, Ikuo; and Iwanade, Hisao, 4,436,416, CI. 355-57.000.
Iwao. Noriaki; and Abe. Akira. to Tomy Kogyo Co., Inc. Toy vehicle
capable of changing size and shape. 4,435,916, CI. 46-201.000.
Iwasaki. Kyuhachiro: See—
Ebi, Yutaka; Fukazawa. Takao; Kawakubo, Toshio; Jinnai, Koi-
chiro; Horike, Masanori; Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro; Ishikawa, Chuji;
and Hirata, Toshitaka, 4,437.101. CI. 346-75.000.
Iwase. Yoshiyuki: See—
Umeda. Arihiko; and Iwase. Yoshiyuki. 4,436.891. CI. 528-111.000.
Iwata. Nobuo. to Ricoh Company. Ltd. Shiftable daisy wheel printer.
4.436.440. CI. 400-144 200.
Iwayanagi. Takao: See—
Saiki. Atsushi; Iwayanagi, Takao; Nonogaki, Saburo; Nishida,
Takashi; and Harada, Seiki, 4,436.583, CH 156-659. 100.
Izaki, Susumu: See—
Omae, Takashi; Tanaka, Kisaburoo; Aoki, Masahiro; Hirayami,
Fumitoshi; and Izaki, Susumu, 4,436,554, CI. 75-I28.00T.
J. A. Webb. Inc.: See—
Sobieniak. Mathew G., 4.436.609. CI. 204-267.000.
J B Development Corporation: See-
Edward. Robert M.. Jr.. 4.435,975. CI. 73-81.000.
Edward, Robert M., Jr.. 4.435.976. CI. 73-83.000.
J.C. Schumacher Co.: See —
McMenamin. Joseph C. 4,436,674, CI. 26I-64.00B.
J. E. Grote Pepp-A-Matic Co., Inc.: See—
Hochanadel, Thomas A.. 4,436.012. CI. 83-703.000.
Jackson. Bemie F.: See—
Bomer. Willy; and Jackson. Bemie F.. 4,435.982. CI. 73-462.000.
Jackson. Robert R.; and Klink. Jerome P.. to Owens-Corning Fiberglas
Corporation. Method of and apparatus for simuluneously packag'na
linear bundles of filaments into individual packages. 4.436,258, CL
242-I8.00G.
Jacobs. Bernard B.: See —
Dahl. James M.; Jacobs, Bernard B.; Lipovac. Joseph E.; Meglen,
Ralph A.; and Ward. Donald W . 4,436.497. CI. 425-28.00R.
Jacobs. Paul T., to Surgikos, Inc. Disinfecting and sterilizing composi- ~
lion. 4,436,754, CI. 424-333.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 19
Jacobs. Pierre; Poncelet. Georges; and Schutz. Alain Process for the
preparation of bridged clays, clays prepared by said process, and uses
for said clays. 4,436,832, CI. 502-84.000
Jacobscn. Kjell O.; Matre, Tore; Halvorsen, Rolf I.; Heie, Ingar H.
Myhrvold, Eriing; and Berger. Ove R.. to A/S Raufoss Ammunis-
jonsfabrikker. Smoke grenade with successive slow and fast buminn
charges. 4.436.034, CI. 102-334,000.
Jacobson, Jeff A. Blind cleaning device 4,435,874, CI. I5-2IO.OOA.
Jacobson, Ronald L.; and Hanley. Dean C, to Procter & Gamble
Company, The Stable liquid detergent compositions. 4,436,653, CI.
252-547.000.
Jacques, Roland; Reppelin, Michel; and Seigneurin. Laurent, to Rhone-
Poulenc Speciahtes Chimiques. Preparation of aromatic/aliphatic
nitriles. 4,436,669, CI. 26O-465.0OB
Jacquier, Robert: See—
Aspisi, Christian; Calas, Bernard; Daunis, Jacques; Follet, Michel
Jacquier, Robert; and Parello, Joseph, 4,436,874, CI. 525-327 100.
Aspisi, Christian; Bonato, Marc; and Jacquier, Robert, 4,436,919,
CI. 549-4.000.
■lagger, James W.: See—
Morgan. Ira L ; Sudarshan, E. C. George; Mitchell, Alvin L.;
Coose, James P.; Ellinger, Hunter D.; and Jagger, James W.,
4,437,006, CI. 250-363.00S.
Jahn, Ulrich: See—
Molnar, Istvan; Thiele, Kurt; Geissmann, Felix; and Jahn. Ulrich.
4.436.913. CI. 548-316.000.
James River/Dixie-Northern. Inc.: See—
Kuchenbecker. Morris W.. 4.436.206, CI. 206-625.000.
Jamet, Bernard: See—
Dran, Maurice; and Jamet, Bernard. 4,436.575. CI. 156-433.000.
Janiga. Eugene R.. to Dow Chemical Company. The. Curable poly-
meric compositions. 4.436,875, CI. 525-385.000.
Janome Sewing Machine Co. Ltd.: See—
Hanyu. Susumu; and Ebata, Yoshikazu, 4,436,042. CI. 112-217 100.
Japan Styrene Paper Corporation: See—
Akiyama. Hiroyuki; Shimada. Sumio; Hirosawa, Kuninori; and
Kuwabara. Hideki. 4,436,840, CI. 521-58.000.
Japanese National Railways: See—
Tamama. Hiroshi; Ozawa. Yukio; Miyazaki. Jingo; Ito, Hiroshi; and
Kinoshita, Toyohiro, 4,436,313, CI. 277-80.000.
Yamamoto, Tsuyoshi; Taniguchi, Norihisa; lida, Kazuyoshi; and
Kondo, Yoshikazu, 4,436,179, CI. 181-210.000.
Jaauay, Louis H.; and Venetti, Mark, to Dravo Corporation. Process
for heating recycle gas in oil shale retorting. 4,436,611, CI. 208-
II.OOR.
Jardin, Hans, to Webasto-Werk W Baier GmbH & Co Operating
mechanism for a tiltable sliding cover 4,436,338, CI. 296-223.000.
Jardin, Stephen C; Yamada, Masaaki; Furth, Harold P ; and Okabaya-
shi, Mitcheo, to United States of America. Energy Method and
apparatus for the formation of a spheromak plasma. 4,436,691, CI.
376-137.000.
Jean, Mary: See—
Castleman, Bonnie L.; and Jean, Mary, 4,436,304, CI. 273-29.00A.
Jefferys, Henry J. Shield for eaves drain gutter. 4,435,925, CI. 52-12000.
JENAer Glaswerk Schoti & Gen.: See—
Schnabel. Roland. 4.436.626, CI. 210-652.000.
Jennerjohn, Dennis A.; and Jensen, Lyie B., to FMC Corporation.
Elevating and tilting mechanism for crane cab. 4,436,169, CI.
180-89.140.
Jennings. Richard E . to Sperry Corporation Mechanism for pivoting
windrow shields into a vertical transport position. 4.435.948. cF
56-228000.
Jensen, LyIe B.: See—
Jennerjohn, Dennis A.; and Jensen, LyIe B., 4,436,169, CI.
180-89.140.
Jensen, Niels D.; Komossa. Horst; and Nielsen. Kurt F.. to Grundfos
A/S. Circulating pump unit. 4,436,486, CI. 417-45.000.
Jeong, Tae S. Device for gathering the pollen from a bee. 4,435,867, CI.
64.00R.
Jeromin, Lothar S.: See—
Ceelen. Theodorus M.; Jeromin. Lothar S.; and Wright. Lamoni
R. 4.436,054, CI. 118-652.000.
JGC Corporation: See—
Yamaguchi, Katsunobu; Matsuoka, Seiichi; Hayashida. Takayuki;
and Hayase, Tomio, 4,436,532, CI. 48-209.000.
Jinnai, Koichiro: See—
Ebi, Yutaka; Fukazawa, Takao; Kawakubo, Toshio; Jinnai, Koi-
chiro; Horike, Masanori; Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro; Ishikawa, Chuji;
and Hirata, Toshitaka, 4,437,101, CI. 346-75.000.
Jobe, William T., to Senco Products, Inc. Front gate and latch assembly
for the guide body of an industrial fastener driving tool. 4,436,236, CI.
227-123.000.
Johnson, Arthur L., Jr.; and Dodge, Mariow W., to Johnson Enter-
prises, Inc. Pump and tap assembly for beverage conuiners.
4,436,227, CI. 222-382.000.
Johnson Enterprises, Inc.: See —
Johnson, Arthur L., Jr.; and Dodge. Mariow W.. 4.436,227. CI.
222-382.000.
Johnson. Harold W.: See—
Carlston, Jack E.; and Johnson, Harold W., 4,436,084, CI.
126-429.000.
Johnson Matthey Inc.: See—
Dietz, Raymond L.; Featherby. Michael; and Margetts, Peter K..
4,436,785. CI. 428-427.000.
Johnson, Orville O. Cleaner for a tubular wick. 4.435,871, CI. 15-
I04.00R.
Johnson, Richard S.; and Potter, John K., to Lever Brothers Company.
Adjuncts for use in the manufacture of detergent powders. 4,436.644.
CI. 252-174.130. • >~
John, Bart. Housing and related mounting system for stereo systems on
motorcycles. 4,436,350. CI. 312-7.100.
Jones. Bernard B Injection-molded gaming token and process therefor
4.435.911, CI. 40-27.500.
Jones. Bernard R.: See—
Cottrell, Jennie L.; Davis, Richard A ; Harris, Susan K ; Jones,
Bernard R.; and Payseur, John Y., 4,436,963, CI. 179-18.00B
Davis, Richard A.; Harris, Susan K.; and Jones, Bernard R.,
4,436,962, CI. 179-18.00B.
Jones, Cecil R Controlled motion apparatus. 4,436,188, CI 188-378.000
Jones, Frank W. Slicing device for rounded food articles. 4,436,01 1 CI
83-425.300.
Jones, Frank W. Sectioning device for rounded food articles. 4,436,025.
CI 99-538.000
Jones, Lawrence J. Smoke detection and disconnection apparatus.
4,437,014, CI. 250-574.000. ^
Jones, Stephen H., to Nordson Corporation. Control arrangement for
multifunction industrial machine. 4,437,152, CI. 364-138 000
Jonsson, Per-Erik; and Svedberg, Per, to ASEA Akticbolag Self-ignit-
ing thyristor with a plurality of discrete, field controlled zener diodes.
4,437,107, CI. 357-38.000.
Joormann, Hendnk J. M ; Verweij. Hendrik; and Haisma, Jan. to US.
Philips Corporation Precision pressed glass object 4.436.381. CI
350-432.000
Jordan, William J.: See—
Hodgins, Martin G.; and Jordan, William J., 4,436,365, CI
350-96.160
Josien, Daniel; and Migliarese, Jean-Louis, to Compagnie Francaise des
Petroles. Inflatable internal pipe obturator with hardenable core.
4,436,120, CI. 138-93 000.
Joule' Technical Corporation: See—
Belloli, Archille, 4,436,479, CI. 414-757.000.
Joy Research Incorporated: See—
Reyner, Ellis M., 4,436,203, CI 206-524 800.
Jozic, Ljerka, to Wuelfing, Johann A Heterosulfonamides 4,436.908,
CI. 546-206.000.
Julius Blum Ges. m.b.H.: See-
Rock, Erich; and Brunner, Josef, 4,436,357, CI. 312-338 000
Jung, Johann: See—
Zeeh, Bernd; Goelz, Norbert; Ammermann, Eberhard; and Jung,
Johann, 4,436,548, CI. 71-76.000.
Just, Melitta: See—
Schonafinger, Karl; Beyerle, Rudi; Bohn, Helmut; Just, Melitta;
Martorana, Piero A ; and Nitz, Rolf-Eberhard. 4,436,743, CI.
424-269.000.
Juvinall, John W., to Owens-Illinois, Inc. Method and apparatus for
comparing data signals in a container inspection device. 4,437,1 16, CI.
358-106,000
Kabel-und Metallwerke Gutehofl'nungshuttc Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Roderburg, Harald. 4,435,968, CI 72-77 000
Kabushiki Kaisha Akashi Seisakusho: See—
Yamazaki, Shigetomo, 4,437,009, CI 250-396.0ML. •
Kabushiki Kaisha Cubic Engineenng: See—
Nakanishi, Motoyasu. 4,436,571, CI 156-384.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho: See—
Tanaka, Osamu; Takeba. Kazuhiro; Saiu. Hiroshi; Matsushita,
Yukinobu; and Koyabu, Koji, 4,436,563. CI, 148-26,000
Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho: See—
Akagi, Jiro. 4,436.247. CI 239-533,700,
Baba. Kiyokazu; and Nishida, Kenji, 4,436,199, CI. 198-750.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Medos Kenkyusho: See—
Ouchi, Teruo, 4,436.087. CI. 128-6.000
Kabushiki Kaisha Sato: See-
Sato. Yo; and Kashiwaba, Tadao, 4,436,573, CI. 156-384.000
Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha: See—
Kitano, Masuo, 4,436,436, CI, 368-204 000
Koto, Haruhiko, 4,436,439, CI 400-126 000
Ushikoshi, Kenichi, 4,436,435, CI 368-71,000
Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai Rika Denki Seisakusho: See—
Fujita, Hironort; Arai. Tohru; and Mizuno, Jiro, 4,436,560, CI
148-6,000,
Matsui, Kenji; and Teraoka, Fuminon, 4,436,255, CI, 242-l07,40A
Kabushiki Kaisha Toyoda Jidoshokki Seisakusho: See—
Seiki, Kazuo; Moiobayashi. Kozo; Yoshizawa, Toshio; Yoshida,
Yoshiaki; and Onoue, Keiji, 4,435,954, CI 57-408,000,
Kabushiki Kaisha Toyota Chuo Kenkyusho: See—
Fujita, Hironon; and Arai, Tohru. 4.436,559, CI 148-6,000.
Fujita, Hironori; Arai, Tohru; and Mizuno, Jiro. 4.436.560, CI
148-6.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Veno Seiyaku Oyokenkyuso See—
Ueno, Ryuzo; Sakota, Kazuyuki; Kawaia, Keiji, and Naito, Yo-
shiyuki, 4,436,670, CI. 260-46S.OOB,
Kadelka, Friedrich, to Chemische Fabnk Grunau GmbH, ProceM for
consolidating soil and frost protection layers produced thereby
4.436,556, CI. 106-90.000.
Kaderjak. Gyula; Veres, Albert; Barkoczy, Istvan; and Lonscsak,
Janos, Steel-cored aluminum cable 4,436,954, CI, I74-I28.00R,
Kadnikova, Galina I : See—
Pakhomov, Gennady N.; Luste. AniU Y.; Kadnikova. Galina I ;
and Kolesnik, Anatoly G.. 4,436,720, CI. 424-44.000.
Kaiser, Fritz: See—
Schaumann. Wolfgang, Kaiser, Fritz; Voigtlander, Wolfgang;
Hoyer, Edgar; and Neubert, Peter. 4.436.735. CI. 424-182 000
PI 20
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Kaiser. John J.: See-
Buck. Daniel M ; Sibley, Alan T ; and Kaiser. John J.. 4,416.696 CI
419-57,000.
Kaiyo Kogyo Co., Ltd See—
Hisao, Makino; and Sadao, Kozima, 4.436,675. CI. 261-77 000
Kakita, Kazutoshi: See—
Tsuyama, Yoshito; Shimazaki. Yasumi; Kakita. Kazutoshi and
Hirokawa. Toshio. 4,436.239. CI. 228-17.000
Kalocai. Andrew J,: See-
Allen. Roland M.; and Kalocai. Andrew J., 4.436 478 CI
414-752.000
Kalopissis, Gregoire; and Vanlerbcrghe. Guy. to L'Oreal. Cationic
surface-active agents. 4,436,909, CI. 546-248 000
Kamei, Shigeki: See—
Imamura. Yoshinobu; Kamei. Shigeki; Yamagata, Tetuo; and Fuiii
Hiroshi, 4.436.026. CI. 100-45.000.
Kamei, Shun: See —
Okumura, Fumio; Higuchi. Masahiro; Kamei, Shun; and Miyauchi
Masahiro. 4.436.783. CI 428-41 1.000
Kamiyama. Mituo; and Namazue. Hirotoshi. to Kokusan Kinzoku
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Apparatus control system. 4.437.153. CI
364-140.000.
Kamiyama. Shin-ichi; and Hascgawa. Yulaka, to Ricoh Company. Ltd
Toner collection device. 4.436,414. CI. 355-15.000.
Kampe, Wolfgang: See—
Fauland. Erich; Kampc. Wolfgang; Stach. Kurt; and Bartsch.
Wolfgang. 4,436.742. CI. 424-269 000
Kamyr, Inc.: See—
Elmore. Carl L.. 4.436,586. CI. 162-19.000.
Kandler. Erich, to Siemens Akticngcscllschafl. Polarization converter
for electromagnetic waves 4.437,099. CI 343-756.000
Kanegafuchi Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Ushioda. Minoru; Ueno. Kenji; Furukawa, Hiroyasu; and Kobaya-
shi. Masahiro. 4.436.861. CI. 524-425.000.
Kaneko. Yoshimasa: See—
Ozaki. Nobuo; and Kaneko. Yoshimasa. 4.436.468. CI. 41 1-248.000
Kansai Paint Company, Limited: See—
Aihara. Tetsuo; Nakayama. Yasuharu; Umcyama. Koichi; Sawada.
Kozo; and Shinohara. Masaaki, 4.436.849. CI. 523-501 000
Kanto Ishi Pharmaceutical Co . Ltd.: Sec—
Shimizu, Shigco; Takano, Hiroyuki; Yoshimura, Shoii and Takada
Kinji, 4,436,904. CI. 544-27.000
Kao Soap Co., Ltd.: See
Matsunaga. Kinjiro; Okumura. Takco; Naito. Sachio; and Tsu-
shima. Rikio. 4.436,722. CI. 424-70.000.
Yamamura. Masaaki; Igarashi, Taizo; and Ukigai, Toshiyuki,
Kapolyi. Laszio, to Tatabanyai Szenbanyak. Process for recovery of
aluminum from carbonaceous waste products. 4,436,550, CI. 75-
Karasawa, Hideyuki: &•<•—
Hayashi, Yutaka; Yamanaka. Mitsuyuki; and Karasawa. Hideyuki.
Karis, Arthur T.: See—
Frye. Kenneth G.; Fitzpalrick, Donald C; and Kans, Arthur T
4.436.302. CI 271-202.000
Karpiloff, Kenneth M . to Duracell Inc Method for making decorated
battery casings 4.436.777. CI. 428-36.000.
Karr, Michael A . Jr Fluid seal 4,436,316. CI. 277-124 000
Karwat. Heinz, to Linde Aktiengescllschaft Method for the removal of
acidic gases such as carbon dioxide from gaseous mixtures. 4.436,707
CI. 423-226.000
Kashiwaba, Tadao: See-
Sato. Yo; and Kashiwaba, Tadao, 4,436,573, CI. 156-384 000
Kashiwagi. Hidehiro. to Taiyo Denko Kabushiki Kaisha. Method of
treatment for recycling a waste film as a raw material and apparatus
therefor 4.436,104. CI. 134-63.000.
Kashiwagi, Hiromi: See—
Yamashita, Keitaro; and Kashiwagi, Hiromi, 4,436.055, CI.
1 10-658.000.
Kashiwagi. Kazuo, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Apparatus for project-
ing any selected image in a recording medium having images re-
corded thereon in at lea.st two lines 4.436,391. CI 353-26 OOR
Kasper. Alan H.; and Malhe. Isivan. to Allied Corporation. Electrical
connector termination system for quick field service. 4.436,359. CI.
339-61. OOM.
Kasien, Harold B. Neck ring mold apparatus for glass bottle manufac-
ture. 4.436.543, CI. 65-172.000.
Kasuga, Takuzo; Takaha.shi, Katsuhiko; and Nakashima, Tuneya.su to
AA^ri^n'^X, 9^c\.l]^ Thermoplastic polyester composition.
4,4Jo,o/7, CI. 525-437.000.
Kato, Hiroshi: See—
Ohyama, Sadahiro; Kato. Hiroshi; Yaguchi, Sadao; Baba. Mikito
and Okada. Morikazu, 4.437.140, CI. 361-402.000.
Kale. Kichiro: See —
Akagi, Motonobu; Nomura, Isshi; Haltori, Kyo; and Kato, Kichiro,
Kato, Takazo: See—
Matsuda, Fujio; Kato. Takazo; Honda. Tadatoshi; Terada
Kazuhiro; and Kogure. Yasuo. 4.436.916. CI. 548-508 000
Matsuda, Fujio; and Kato. Takazo. 4.436.917. CI 548-508 000
Kato, Ya.suo: See—
Matsuda. Tadahito; Okumura, Ma.sahide; Yokouchi, Hisatake
Ozasa, Susumu; and Kato, Yasuo, 4,437,008. CI. 250-396.00R '
Kato. Yoshiaki. to Nissan Motor Company, Limited Residual liquid
meter using computer responsive to measurements of liquid level and
now 4.437.162. CI. 364-442.000.
Kaloh. Mitsuo: .See—
Imamura. Tatsuo; and Kaloh. Mitsuo. 4,436,600, CI 204-140 000
Kaufrnan, Joseph, to Bccton Dickinson Company Needle assembly
with vein entry indicator. 4,436,f)98, CI. 128-766 000
Kaufman, Marvin L., to Mobil Oil Corporation Aromatic urea-based
Cl"5l8^W 000^"'^'" ^'^"^ '^""^ '""*""*' '-■ompositions 4.436,890,
Kawakubo, Toshio: See—
Ebi Yutaka; Fukazawa. Takao; Kawakubo. Toshio; Jinnai. Koj-
chiro; Honke. Masanori; Iwasaki. Kyuhachiro; Ishikawa. Chuii
and Hirata, Toshilaka, 4,437.101, CI. 346-75.000. '
Kawasaki Steel Corporation: See-
Sakamoto, Noboru; Yamashita, Itaru; Wada, Saloshi; Yano, Keni-
chi; and Oda, Suehiro, 4,436,981. CI 219-124 320 "
Sakuraya, Toshikazu; Nakamura. Hideo; Harada, Nobuo Fuiii
Tetsuya; and Emi. Toshihiko. 4.436.287. CI. 266-47 000 '
Tokuhisa. Masaaki; and Hirai. Yukio. 4,436.562. CI 148-24 000
Kawashima, Katsumi: See—
^"v*^": wL^^'^li''^' '^''"'•'"•' Toshiki; Honda, Sueaki; Takahashi,
Yoshihiko; Tsuruyoshi. Kenichi; Kawashima. Katsumi; and
Kishimoto, Syuichi. 4,437.078. CI. 335-81 000
Kawata, Keiji: See—
Ueno, Ryuzo; Sakota. Kazuyuki; Kawata, Keiji; and Naito. Yo-
shiyuki. 4.436.670. CI 260-465.00B.
Kawata, Tadashi: See—
Akao, Mutsuo; and Kawata. Tadashi. 4.436,809, CI 430-501 000
Kazama, Hidemichi: See—
^T-'/^V.I^'.M'o S^""*'* '^""«="' »"'* Kazama, Hidemichi. 4.436,685.
CI. 264-148.000.
KBL Corporation: See—
Zane. Peter L.; and Zane. Michael S., 4.436,232. CI 224-39 000
Keck Donald B.. to Corning Glass Works. Multiple core optical wave-
guide for secure transmission. 4.436,368. CI 350-96 330
Kellar. Paul R N.: See-
Keller Arnold, to Waldemar Link GmbH & Co. Hip joint prosthesis
4'435 854 CI fl'^n""*'*' '"'" **"" '"*'**""">' ""«' °f l^e femur.
Keller, Wolfgang; and Schrotter, Gerhard, to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schafi. Method of setting a stable melting zone in a semiconductor
crystalline r(xi during crucible-free zone melting thereof 4.436.578.
CI. 156-620.000.
Kellogg. James D.; and Mingesz. August C. to C-R-O, Inc. Metal
machining device with control circuit isolation. 4.436.288. CI.
266-69.000.
Kelly. Eugene L. Auxiliary feed hopper for permitting the trimming, in
a saddle binder of perfect bound books. 4.436.469. CI. 412-16 000
Kdly. James C; and Shurden. Charles H . to Starkvilie Tool & Die
Company. Method and machine for pre-forming and turnina aloves
4.436.231. CI. 223-40.000. ee •
Kelly. William R.; and Alvero. Ernesto J., to RCA Corporation. Sys-
tem and methcxi for controlling the exposure of color picture tube
phosphor screens. 4.436.394, CI. 354-1.000.
Kennedy, George W, to Senco Southeast. Inc. Frame fastener
4.436.234. CI. 227-4.000.
Kennington. Kerry S.; and Baker. Ronald, to Hughes Tool Company
Reversal mechanism for power tong. 4.436.002, CI. 81-57 200
Kenworthy. Samuel P.. to Basic Machinery Co., Inc. Apparatus for
making special brick shapes. 4,436,501, CI. 425-308.000.
Kern. Werner, to RCA Corporation. Structural defect detection.
Keystone Consolidated Industries, Inc.: See—
Craig, Clark E.. 4,435,966. CI. 70-161.000.
KG Maschinenfabrik: See—
Donner. Siegmar; Strempler, Gunter; and Schmid, Manfred,
4,436,298, CI. 271-10.000.
Khanna, Sarwan K ; and Khanna, Satya P.. to Bell Telephone Labora-
tories, Incorporated. Electrically conducting thermoplastic material.
Its manufacture, and resulting article. 4,436,648. CI. 252-511 000
Khanna. Satya P.: See—
Khanna, Sarwan K.; and Khanna, Satya P.. 4.436.648. CI.
Khurgin, Boris: See—
Rosinek, Shlomo; Rinkewich. Isaac; and Khurgin, Boris, 4,437.098.
CI. 340-870.020.
Kiba. Yasuo: See —
Hori, Takako; Yoshida, Chosaku; Kiba, Yasuo; Takeno, Ryuko
Nakano, Joji; Nitta, Jun; Kishimoto. Sumiko; Murakami. Shoha-
chi; Tsuda, Hisatsugu; and Saikawa, Isamu. 4,436,921. CI
544-238.000.
Kidde, Inc.: See—
Revay, Blaise. 4,436,159. CI. 169-28.000.
Thomas. William D., 4.436.456. CI. 406-19.000.
Kienzle. Wolfgang: See—
Hafner. Udo; Herth, Harro; Kienzle, Wolfgang; Knapp. Heinrich-
Krauss. Rudolf; Lembke. Manfred; Paschke. Werner; and Sauer,
Rudolf. 4.436.071, CI. 123-472.000.
Kihara, Keiichi: See—
Isowa, Yoshikazu; Ohmori. Muncki; Mori. Kaoru; Ichikawa. Tet-
suya; Nonaka, Yuji; Kihara, Keiichi; Oyama. Kiyotaka; Satoh,
Heijiro; and Nishimura. Shigeaki, 4.436,925. CI. 560-19.000
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 21
Kikuchi. Ko: See—
Makimoto, Mitsuo; Endo. Haruyoshi; Kikuchi. Ko; and Yamashita.
Sadahiko. 4.437.076. CI. 333-206000
Kilches. Helmut D ; Lugscheider. Walter; Riegler, Ernst; and Zajicek.
Ernst, to Voesi-Alpine Aktiengesellschaft Plasma melting furnace
arrangement. 4.436.290. CI. 266-158.000
Kim. Kwon S , to Star Manufacturing Co. Prefabricated panel con-
struction system 4,435.934, CI 52-309.700.
Kim, Syng N . to Wico Corporation Snap-in switch mountina struc-
ture. 4.436.971. CI. 200-295.000.
Kimberly-Clark Corporation: See—
Hotchkiss. Harry W.; Notheis, Patrick J.; and Englebert, Stephen
M., 4.436.780. CI 428-198.000.
Pomplun, William S; and Grube. Herbert E., 4,436,867. CI
524-503.000
Kindt. Robert J . to Eastman Kodak Company Apparatus and method
for registering related transferable images in accurate superposition
on a receiver member. 4.436.405, CI 355-3.0TR
King. Colin V.: See—
Balbis. Manuel G ; and King. Colin V., 4.436.127. CI. 152-209 OOR.
King. Frank J.: See-
Adrian. David L.; and Young. Sam H.. 4.435.912, CI. 40-365.000.
King, Frank R ; and Engler, Donald J., to Simmons Universal Corpora-
tion. Control arrangement and method for an adjustable bed
4.435,862. CI. 5-66.000.
King Instrument Corporation: See—
Deyesso, Joseph P.; Sarser, David; and Berube, Richard G ,
4,436,251. CI. 242-56.00R,
King, Kevin J.: See—
Houck. Robert J.; and King. Kevin J.. 4.436.198. CI. 198-502 000
Kinoshita. Dainichiro. to Horiba. Ltd. Indicating means for measuring
instrument 4.437,058. CI. 324-120 000.
Kinoshita. Keijiro. to Nissan Motor Co.. Ltd. Roller type planetary
gear having a preloading arrangement. 4.435,998, CI. 74-798.000.
Kinoshita, Toyohiro: See—
Tamama, Hiroshi; Ozawa. Yukio; Miyazaki. Jingo; Ito, Hiroshi; and
Kinoshita. Toyohiro. 4,436.313. CI. 277-80.000.
Kirkman. David H., to International Business Machines Corporation
Passive display module and system. 4,436,378. CI. 350-345.000.
Kirsch. Paul A., to Budd Company, The. Solar reflector panel
4,436,373, CI. 350-296.000.
Kirschbaum, Robert: See-
Smith, Paul; Lemstra, Pieler J.; Kirschbaum, Robert; and Pijpers,
Jacques P. L., 4.436,689, CI. 264-204.000.
Kirst, Herbert A., to Eli Lilly and Company. 4"- And 3-ester deriva-
tives of DMT and DMOT. 4,436.733, CI. 424-180.000.
Kishi. Akira: See—
Umezu, Hiroaki; Kishi, Akira; and Yamagami, Hiroshi, 4.435,927,
CI. 52-79.130.
Kishima, Yukihiro, to Victor Company of Japan, Ltd. Automatic
record playing apparatus having a tone arm position detecting device.
4,437,181, CI 369-244.000.
Kishimoto, Sumiko: See—
Hori, Takako; Yoshida, Chosaku; Kiba, Yasuo; Takeno, Ryuko;
Nakano, Joji; Nitta, Jun; Kishimoto. Sumiko; Murakami. Shoha-
chi; Tsuda. Hisatsugu; and Saikawa. Isamu, 4,436,921, CI.
544-238.000.
Kishimoto, Syuichi: See—
Bando. Yoshihide; Tanaka. Toshiki; Honda. Sueaki; Takahashi.
Yoshihiko; Tsuruyoshi. Kenichi; Kawashima. Katsumi; and
Kishimoto. Syuichi, 4,437,078, CI. 335-81.000.
Kiss, Jozsef See—
Fercnczi, Gyorgy; Horvath, Peter; Toth, Ferenc; Kiss, Jozsef; and
Boda, Janos, 4,437,060, CI. 324-158.00D
Kita, Yuichi; Sakamoto, Kentaro; and Sato, Takahisa. to Nippon
Shokubai Kagaku Kogyo Co.. Ltd. Method for manufacture of
high-purity phthalic anhydride. 4,436,922. CI. 549-251.000.
Kitano, Masao, to Toa Paint Co.. Ltd. Traffic marking paint. 4,436,845,
CI. 523-172.000.
Kitano, Masuo, to Shimauchi Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha; and Kabushiki
Kaisha Suwa Seikosha. Detection circuit for an electronic timepiece.
4.436.436, CI. 368-204.000.
Kitazawa, Yuzuru: See—
Furuoya. Itsuo; and Kitazawa, Yuzuru. 4.436.671. CI. 260-465.300.
Kitrell, John V., to Radio Engineering Service, Inc. Apparatus for
mounting electronics equipment. 4.436.351. CI. 312-223.000.
Klauke. Erich: See—
Marhold. Albrecht; and Klauke. Erich. 4.436.941, CI. 570-144.000.
Kleemann, Axel; Lehmann, Bernd; and Martens, Jurgen, to Degussa
Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the production of aqueous solutions of
sodium salts of a-amino carboxylic acids. 4,436,910. CI. 546-245.000.
Klees, Garry W., to Boeing Company, The. Turbine bypass turbofan
with mid-turbine reingestion and method of operating the same.
4,435,958. CI. 60-204.000.
Klein, Paul E., to Modcom, Inc. Orthodontic chain application tool.
4,436,510, CI. 433-4.000.
Klein, Schanzlin & Becker Aktiengesellschaft: See—
GafTal, Karl; and Klepp, Christian, 4.436,950. CI. 174-1 1.OBH.
Kleinberg, Leonard L., to United States of America, National Aeronau-
tics and Space Administration. Low noise tuned amplifier. 4.437.069.
CI. 330-109.000.
Kleindienst GmbH & Co.: See—
Donner, Siegmar; Strempler, Gunter; and Schmid. Manfred,
4.436.298, CI. 271-10.000.
Kleiner, Malvei See-
Ron. Moshe; Kleiner, Matvei; and Navon, Uri, 4,436,539, CI
62-4.000.
Kleinert. Karl W ; and Kleinert. Kenneth B Storage drawer with
retained partitions. 4.436.215. CI 220-22 300.
Kleinert. Kenneth B : See—
Kleinert, Karl W, and Kleinert, Kenneth B. 4.436.215 CI
220-22.300
Klepp, Christian: See—
Gaffal. Karl; and Klepp. Christian, 4.436,950, CI. 174-1 l.OBH
Kliklok Corporation: See—
Hoyrup. Sigurd J., 4,435,943, CI 53-491.000
Klink, Jerome P.: See-
Jackson, Robert R ; and Klink, Jerome P, 4,436,258. CI 242-
18.00G,
Klosiewicz, Daniel W.. to Hercules Incorporated Plasticized polydicy-
clopentadiene and a method for making the same 4.436.858. CI
524-296.000
Kluge. Arthur F ; Sirosberg, Arthur M ; Whiting, Roger L ; and Chris-
tie, George A Bcnzodioxane-imidazoline compounds as antihvDcr-
tensives 4,436,914, CI. 548-348.000.
Klukis, Edward L. Automatic corn sorting and inspection system.
4,436,207, CI. 209-577 000.
Klupfel, Norbert: See—
Horling, Peter; Hetterich. Hermann; Dobhan, Herbert; and KIud-
fel, Norbert, 4,435,889, CI. 29-148.40C.
KMS Fusion, Inc.: See—
Schaap, A. Paul; Busch, George E.; and Nolen, Robert L.. Jr ,
4,436,715, CI 423-579000
Knapp, Heinrich: Set'—
Hafner, Udo, Herth. Harro; Kienzle, Wolfgang; Knapp. Heinrich;
Krauss. Rudolf. Lembke, Manfred, Paschke, Werner; and Sauer.
Rudolf. 4,436,071, CI. 123-472 000.
Knickerbocker, Robert H . to Siemon Company. The Electrical con-
nectors and terminal connecting block 4,436,360, CI 339-97 OOP
Knight, Donald P.: See-
Farmer, Felta C. Jr.; and Knight. Donald P.. 4,437,120, CI
358-139 000
Knirsch, Franco, to Ing. C Olivetti & C, S.pA. Electrophotographic
recording element having an aniline sulphonephthelcin charge gener-
ator 4,436.801, CI 430-73 000 »• ^' » »«^ «^
Knitter, Kathy A.: See—
Schick, Martin J.; and Knitter. Kathy A.. 4.436,528, CI. 44-51.000
Knoll International, Inc : See—
Unger, Gotz W.. 4,435.882, CI. 24-265.00R.
Knopfel, Hans-Peter: See—
Muller, Hans; Knopfel. Hans-Peter; Mullcr, Felix; and Kreiz, Rolf
H, 4.436,814, CI. 435-162.000.
Knopp, Walter V., to Revere Copper and Brass, Inc Roll compacting
of polymer powders into fully dense products. 4,436,682, CI
264-70.000.
Knowles, Terrance: See—
Feinberg, Jay H; and Knowles, Terrance, 4,436,240, CI
228-122.000.
Kobayashi, Kunimitsu: See—
Ishibai, Isao; and Kobayashi, Kunimitsu. 4.436.386, CI. 350-550.000.
Kobayashi, Masahiro: See—
Ushioda, Minoru; Ueno, Kenji; Furukawa. Hiroyasu; and Kobaya-
shi. Masahiro. 4.436,861, CI 524-425 000
Kobayashi. Takeo. to Asahi Kogaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Photo-
graphic information display systems for use in photographic cameras.
4.436,397. CI 354-465.000
Kobe, Inc.: See-
Peterson, Daniel G.; and Erickson, John W., 4.436.492. CI
417-386.000
Koch, Carl; and Gfeller, Karl. Apparatus for transporting or position-
ing of a strip-shaped light-sensitive material with reference to a
picture window. 4,436,399, CI. 354-159.000.
Koch, Walter: See—
Senn, Georg; and Koch, Waller. 4,436,123. CI. 139-452000.
Koci. Zdenek: See—
Hugelshofer. Paul; Zbinden, Peter, and Koci, Zdenek, 4,436,523,
CI. 8-527.000
Kocmanck, Karl H., and Shambelan. Robert C, to RCA Corporation.
Controlled environment for diffusion furnace. 4.436.509. CI
432-253.000.
Koehler, Charles F. Method and apparatus for stacking for bars and the
like. 4,436,471, CI. 414-36.000.
Kogure, Yasuo: See—
Matsuda, Fujio; Kato, Takazo; Honda, Tadatoshi; Terada,
Kazuhiro; and Kogure, Yasuo, 4,436,916, CI. 548-508.000.
Kohn. Harold: See—
Ergler. James M.; Kohn, Harold; and Smeiana, Michael. 4,436.001,
CI. 81-9.510.
Kohno. Hideki: See—
Yamamoto, Elsuji; Sekihara, Kentuke; and Kohno, Hideki,
4,437,136. CI. 361-146.000.
Kohsaka, Masanobu: See—
Umehara, Kazuyoshi; Tanaka, Hirokazu; Uchida, Ittuo; Kohsaka,
Masanobu, and Imanaka. Hirothi. 4,436,726, CI. 424-177.000.
Koizumi. Nobuyuki: See—
Yamaguchi, Yutaka; Koizumi, Nobuyuki; Araki. Tamio; Kojima,
Koichi; and Ikeda, Nobumasa, 4.436,131, CI. 152-36 1. OFP.
Kojima, Ichiro: See—
Maruhashi, Kenji; Kojima. Ichiro; Oguchi. Yutaka; Endoh.
Noboru; and Satoh, Tetsuo, 4.436.663. CI 260-245.910
PI 22
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Kojima. Koichi: See—
Yamaguchi. Yutaka; Koizumi, Nobuyuki; Araki, Tamio; Kojima.
Koichi; and Ikeda, Nobumasa. 4.436.131, CI. 152-361 OFP
Kojima, Tatsuo: See—
Nakamura, Hiromichi; Urano. Haruya; Kojima. Tatsuo; and
Sekiwa, Mitsunao. 4,436.006. CI 83-13.000.
Kokado. Masayuki: See—
Sumi. Hideji; and Kokado. Masayuki, 4,437.021, CI. 307-270 000
Kokubo. Eiichi; and Osako. Kyoichi. to Laurel Bank Machine Co., Ltd.
Com discharge machine and panitioned carton. 4,436,102. CI.
133-2.000.
Kokura, Satoshi; Nihei, Masayasu; Wachi, Hiroshi; Mashida, Hiromi
and Senda, Kousaku, to Hitachi. Ltd. Two electrode welding with
different currents supplied to the electrodes. 4.436.982. CI
219-130.510.
Kokusai Denshin Denwa Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Matsumoto. Shuichi; Hatori. Yoshinori; Murakami, Hitomi; and
Yamamoto. Hideo. 4.437.119, CI. 358-136.000
Kokusan Kinzoku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. See—
Kamiyama. Mituo; and Namazue. Hirotoshi. 4.437.153 CI
364-140.000.
KolefT. Kolio. V/STOL Aircraft 4.436.261, CI 244-51 000
Kolesnik, Anatoly G.: See—
Pakhomov. Gcnnady N.; Lustc. Anita Y.; Kadnikova. Galina I
and Kolesnik. Anatoly G.. 4.436.720. CI. 424-44.000.
Komiya. Yutaka. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Image forming apparatus.
Kommm. Rolf Apparatus for monitoring exhaust cases. 4.436 504 CI
431-15.000. C7 e . .
Komossa. Horst: See —
Jensen. Niels D.; Komossa. Horst; and Nielsen, Kurt F., 4.436 486
CI. 417-45.000.
Kondo. Toshio. to Nippon Chuzo Kabushiki Kaisha. Method of and
apparatus for reclaiming molding sand. 4,436.138. CI. 164-5 000
Kondo. Yoshikazu: See—
Yamamoto. Tsuyoshi; Taniguchi. Norihisa; lida, Kazuyoshi and
Kondo. Yoshikazu. 4.436.179. CI. 181-210.000.
Konishiroku Photo Industry Co.. Ltd.: See—
Harada. Yoshiaki, 4,437.001, CI. 250-324.000.
Seimiya. Ryubun; Iwai, Fumio; and Nosaka, Isao, 4,436.402. CI
355-300R.
Kononov, Valery I.: See
Petrov, Lev N.; Adoniev, Viktor A.; and Kononov, Valery I
4,436,619. CI. 209-573.000. '
Konwitza, Vladimir: See—
Wittmann, Heinz; and Konwitza, Vladimir, 4,436,322. CI
280-614.000
Koper, James G.: See—
•^"il?*^- ^''/JAa^'J""*' ^ " ° • *"<* •^°P«'' •'»'"« G • *.436.423,
CI. 356-350.000.
Korzendorfer. Joseph E.: See—
Mayo. Henry C; and Korzendorfer. Joseph E., 4,436,330, CI.
Koschinek. Gunter; Wandel. Dietmar; Kretschmann, Bernd; and Zins-
ser. Rolf, to Davy McKee Aktiengesellschaft. Process for melt-spin-
ning of synthetic polymers. 4,436,688, CI. 264-I76.00F.
Kosicki, Bernard B.: See—
Bemacki. Stephen E.; and Kosicki. Bernard B.. 4,436,584, CI.
Koslow, Evan E.; and Edelman, Robert R.. to Koslow Technologies
Corporation. Large arrays of discrete ionizing radiation detectors
multiplexed using fluorescent optical converters. 4.437,007. CI.
250-366.000.
Koslow Technologies Corporation: See—
Koslow, Evan E.; and Edelman, Robert R., 4,437,007. CI.
250-366.000.
Kosuzume, Hiroshi: See—
Ohnishi, Haruo; Kosuzume, Hiroshi; Suzuki, Yasuo; and Mochida,
Ei. 4.436.724, CI. 424-101 000.
Koto, Haruhiko. to Epson Corporation; and Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa
Seikosha. Small printer. 4,436,439, CI. 400-126.000.
Kotter. Wolfgang, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Hydraulic valve mecha-
nism. 4.436.114, CI. 137-596.000.
Koya, Masahiko; and Fukuoka, Yohei, to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Method of hydro-dealkylation. 4,436,945, CI. 585-488 000
Koyabu, Koji: See—
Tanaka, Osamu; Takeba, Kazuhiro; Saita, Hiroshi; Matsushita,
Yukinobu; and Koyabu, Koji, 4,436,563, CI. 148-26.000.
Koyama, Shigeo: See —
Yamagata, Ryutaro; Kozuka, Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi
Koyama, Shigeo; and Sakai, Kazutada, 4,436,412, CI. 355-15 000
Kozaki, Syuichi: See—
Funada, Fumiaki; Kozakf, Syuichi; Matsuura. Masataka; and Wada
Tomio, 4.436,379, CI. 350-347.00E.
Kozuka, Nobuhiko: See—
Yamagau, RyuUro; Kozuka, Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi
Koyama. Shigeo; and Sakai.KazuUda, 4.436.412, CI. 355-15.000'
Kraftwerk Union Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Gebkc, Klaus; Huhn, Friedrich; and LekuUt, Rolf, 4,436,676, CI.
26 1 ■ 1 5 1 .000.
Kramer, James H., to B. F. Goodrich Company, The. Vibration damo-
ening support. 4,436,274, CI. 248-633.000.
Krampe A. Co. Fertigung in Bergbaubedarf GmbH: See-
Bat, Gerd; and Weikert, Norbert B., 4,436.346, CI. 299-87.000.
Krantz. Karl W.. to General Electric Company. Composition and
«^ 1 7< nnn ""P'"^'"* •*" properties of liquid media. 4,436.846, CI.
Krauss, Rudolf: See—
Hafner, Udo; Herth, Harro; Kienzle, Wolfgang; Knapp, Heinrich
Krauss Rudolf; Lembke, Manfred; Paschke, Werner; and Sauer'
Rudolf, 4,436,071. CI. 123-472.000.
Krehl. Gunter: See—
Brudermann. Uwe; Kunze. Karl-H.; Krehl, Gunter; Linde E
Volker; and Lorenz, Dieter R , 4,436,320, CI. 280-242 OWC
Krennnch. Otmar; Brendel. Gottfried; and Pietsch. Hartmut. to MeUll-
gesellschaft Aktiengesellschaft. Method of recovering uranium oxide
ajTii nnn^"* sodium uranyl carbonate solutions. 4,436,704, CI.
Kretschmann. Bernd: See —
Kc«chinek. Gunter; Wandel. Dietmar; Kretschmann. Bernd; and
Zinsser. Rolf. 4,436,688. CI. 264-1 76.00F
Kretz. Rolf H: See—
^u '!.' ]tl"o;^')?,P'fi' """s-Peter; Muller. Felix; and Kretz. Rolf
H.. 4.436.814. CI. 435-162.000.
Kreuels. Klaus: See —
Eschner. Axel; Ganz. Rudolf; Tkotz. Gunter; Stein, Hermann; and
Kreuels. Klaus. 4,436,680. CI. 264-60.000.
Kreuzburg, Eberhard; Von Der Pahle. Dietrich J.; Monsheimer. Rolf
Pneiderer. Ernst; and Taegcr. Tilman. to Universal Gesellschaft fur
Umweltlcchnik mbH; and Rohm GmbH. CRT Method of converting
and separating substances contained, dissolved or dissolvable in a
carrier liquid. 4.436.624. CI. 210-632.000.
Kriva. Kenneth J.: See—
"-"4.! 36.7°5rc? 4l6-4"8."cS."' "*'" "" ' ""' ''"^'' ''""*••' ''
Krowl. Thomas R.. to National Gypsum Company. Vinyl siding attach-
ment. 4.435.933. CI. 52-309. 100. r , J e
Krowl, Thomas R.: See—
'*"«ko^s'^E<l>^ard J.; and Krowl, Thomas R., 4,435,938, Q.
Krueger, Henry A. Forklift safety scope 4,436.374. CI. 350-302 000
Kruger. Robert A., to Thomson-CSF Broadcast. Inc. Method and
apparatus for imaging a body. 4,436,095, CI. 128-654.000
Krumkalns, Eriks V., to Eli Lilly and Company. Substituted l-lhia-3-
aza-4-ones 4.436.739, CI. 424-246.000.
Krupp-Koppers GmbH: See—
Petrovic, Vladan; and Rotthaus, Heinz. 4.436.589. CI. 201-41.000.
Kuan. Tiong H.; and Sommer. John G.. to General Tire & Rubber
Company. The. Coating rubber with a composition which resists
removal by water. 4,436.857. CI. 524-260.000
Kubota. Ltd.: See—
^\^l!f!PL Shigeaki; Nakamura. Norimi; and Hashimoto, Osami.
4,435,907, cr 33-366.000.
Kuchenbecker, Morris W., to James River/Dixie-Northem, Inc Re-
closable paperboard carton structure. 4,436,206, CI. 206-625 000
Kuchuk-Yatsenko, Sergei I.: See—
Lebedev, Vladimir K.; Kuchuk-Yatsenko, Sergei I.; Sakhamov,
Vasily A.; Galian, Boris A.; Asoyants, Grigory B.; and Tishura.
Vladimir I, 4,436,974, CI. 219-66.000.
Kudo, Mituo: See—
Mochizuki, Taketoshi; Matsuo, Kazuya; Kudo. Mituo; Arai, Akira;
Yamada, Junichi; Shono, Keizi; Aoki, Masaaki; Ohmori, Masai-
chi; and Nishi. Genichiro, 4,435,962, CI. 62-175 000
Kuerten, Heribert: See—
Schuiz, Rudi; Puestel, Hubert; Weber, Georg; and Kuerten, Herib-
ert, 4.436.702. CI. 422-195.000.
Kuffner. Kari; Marx. Paul; and Lassie, Wolfgang, to Agfa-Gevaert
Aktiengesellschaft. Color-photographic recording material contain-
ing non-diffusing electron donor precursor compounds. 4,436,810, CI.
430-551.000.
Kukacka, Lawrence E.: See—
Sugama, Toshifumi; and Kukacka, Lawrence E., 4,436,555, CI.
106-85.000.
Kukino, Yoshinori: See—
Miura, Mituo; Kukino, Yoshinori; and Fujii, Takumi, 4,436,453, CI.
405-263.000.
Kumagai, Tadanobu: See—
Sawabe, Masaki; and Kumagai, Tadanobu, 4,436,310, CI
277-11.000.
Kumar, Shri A.; Ljung, Bo H. G.; and Koper, James G., to Singer
Company, The. Ring laser gyroscope suspension. 4,436,423, CI.
356-350.000.
Kummer, David A.: See-
Dean. Mark E.; Eggebrecht, Lewis C; Kummer. David A.; and
Saenz. Jesus A.. 4,437,092, CI. 340-703.000.
Kunkel, Heinrich: See—
Olschewski. Armin; Brandenstein, Manfred; and Kunkel, Heinrich,
4,436,516, CI. 464-128.000.
Kunze, Karl-H.: See—
Brudermann. Uwe; Kunze. Karl-H.; Krehl. Gunter; Linde, E.
Volker; and Lorenz. Dieter R.. 4.436,320, CI. 280-242.0WC.
Kunzmann. Otto, to Bielomatik Leuze GmbH A Co. Sheet piling de-
vices. 4,436.472. CI. 414-50.000. *
Kuo, Hong-Hsiang, to General Motors Corporation. Continuous igni-
tion source for controlled disposal of combustible polymer waste in a
fluidized bed reactor. 4,436,037, CI. 1 10-245.000.
Kuraray Co., Ltd.: See—
Ainano, Takehiro; Yoshikawa. Kensei; Sano, TaUuhiko; Ohuchi,
Kutaka; Ishigura, Michihiro; Shiono, Manzo; Fujita. Yoshiji; and
Nishida, Takashi, 4,436,939, CI. 568-813.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 23
Kurihara, Nobuo; Morooka, Yasuo; Nishikawa, Mitsuyo; Miura, Kiyo-
shi; and Nagahashi, Yoshitoshi. to Hitachi. Ltd Method and appara-
tus for symptom diagnosis by monitoring vibration of shaft of rotary
machine. 4.437.163. CI. 364-508.000.
Kuroda. Takao; and Horii. Kenju. to Matsushiu Electronics Corpora-
tion. Method for fabricating solid-state image sensor. 4.435,897. CI
29-572.000.
Kurosaki. Shiro, to Sumitomo Electric Industries. Ltd. Process for the
production of an optical glass ariicle. 4.436,542. CI. 65-18.100.
Kurth. Duane G.: See—
Wiulka. Jerome J.; Kurth, Duane G.; and Baber. David J..
4.437.157, CI. 364-200.000.
Kurz. Robert A.: See-
Walsh. Edward J.; and Kurz. Robert A.. 4.437.082. CI. 336-58.000
Kushi. Kenji: See —
Nakazima. Atushi; Edamatsu, Mitisuke; and Kushi. Kenji,
4,436,764, CI. 427-54.100.
Kuwabara, Hideki: See—
. Akiyama, Hiroyuki; Shimada. Sumio; Hirosawa, Kuninori; and
Kuwabara, Hideki. 4.436.840. CI 521-58.000.
Kuwayama. Tetsuro: See—
Tanaka. Nobuyoshi; Hashimoto. Seiji; and Kuwayama. Tetsuro.
4.437.112. CI. 358-44.000
Kvasnikoff. Georges; and Voirin. Robert, to Societe Nationale Elf
Aquitaine (Production). Process for the production of sulphur with
increased energy recovery from a gas containing H^S. SOj. H?
and/or CO. 4,436.716, CI, 423-574.00R.
Kyle. James C. Terminal assembly. 4,436,955, CI. I74-152.0GM.
Kyusyu Refractories Co., Ltd.: See—
Nishikawa, Yasuo; and Takahashi, Hirokuni, 4,436,678, CI.
264-30.000
L. & C. Steinmuller GmbH: See—
Leikert, Klaus; and Rennert, Klaus-Dieter. 4.436.038. CI.
1 10-347.000.
Laghi. Aldo A., to General Electric Company. Mold for a liquid injec-
tion molding composition. 4.436.496. CI. 425-543.000.
Laing. David H.: See—
Robinsky. Eli I.; and Laing. David H . 4.436.633. CI 210-791.000
Laitar. Robert A., to Acme Resin Corporation. Polyurethane binder
compositions. 4,436,881. CI. 525-504.000.
Lalezari. Parviz, to Montefiore Hospital and Medical Center. Inc.
Process and reagents for antibody detection involving erythrocyte
agglutination 4,436.825. CI. 436-520.000.
Lambert. David A.; and Profct. Gary A., to General DalaComm Indus-
tries. Inc. Method and apparatus for interleaving control signals.
4.437.182. CI 370-110 100.
Lamkewitz. Falk; and Riedmaier. Josef, to Webasto-Werk W. Baier
GmbH & Co. Process and apparatus for determination and utilization
of a quantity of preheating energy 4.436.064. CI 123-142. 50R.
Landi den Hartog BV: See—
Lceuwma. Derk B.; and de Groot. Marius. 4.436.110, CI.
137-487.500.
Lane. Derek: See—
Hennessy. John B.; and Lane. Derek, 4,437,130. CI. 360-94.000.
Lane. Stanley C. to Crown Zellerbach Corporation. Lime slaker.
4.436.703. CI. 422-225.000.
Lang. Kurt: See—
Stahlecker. Fritz; Lang. Kurt; and Erhardt. Rolf. 4.435.952. CI.
57-18.000.
Lange. Donald A.; Hanson. Marc C; and Kriva. Kenneth J., to General
Mills. Inc. Cryogenic process for decortication and hulling of sun-
nower seeds. 4.436.757. CI. 426-438.000.
Lapatovich. Walter P.; Proud. Joseph M.; and Riseberg. Leslie A., to
GTE Laboratories Incorporated. Low pressure plasma discharge
formation of refractory coatings. 4.436,762. CI. 427-39.000.
Larock, Richard C, to Iowa State University Research Foundation,
Inc. Bicyclic prostaglandin analogs and method of synthesis.
4,436,934, CI. 562-502.000.
Larrea, D. Juan, to Perfil En Frio. S.A. (PERFRISA). Panel joining
system. 4.435.935. CI 52-461.000.
Larsen. Raymond B.. to Acme Solar Works, Inc. Solar collector assem-
bly and frame. 4,436.085. CI 126-450.000.
Larson. Daniel A., to North American Philips Electric Corp. Starting
arrangement for high-intensity-discharge sodium lamp. 4.437,039. CI.
315-60.000.
Larsson. Sven B.; and Andersson. Bengt U I. Easily releasable blind
rivets. 4.436.467, CI. 411-34,000.
LaRussa, Joseph A., to Farrand Optical Co., Inc. Robotic vision sys-
tem. 4,437,114, CI. 358-101.000.
Lassig, Wolfgang: See—
Kuffner, Karl; Marx. Paul; and Lassig. Wolfgang. 4.436.810. CI
430-551.000.
Lauer. Reinhard; and Pfefferle. Dietmar. to Erwin Sick GmbH Optik-
Elektronik. Piezoelectric apparatus for producing rotary oscillation
of a mirror. 4.436.364, CI. 350-6.600.
Laurel Bank Machine Co.. Ltd.: See —
Goi. Kouichi, 4.436.300. CI. 271-107.000.
Kokubo. Eiichi; and Osako. Kyoichi. 4.436.102. CI. 133-2.000.
Laurent. Douglas J.: See —
Lipko, Robert J.; and Laurent, Douglas J.. 4,436,520, CI.
604-385.000
Laurich-Trost, Victor R. Material handling apparatus. 4,436,183, CI.
I87-9.00E.
Lausch, H. Nevin: See—
Lindblom, Curtis H.; Lausch, H. Nevin; and Priepke, Edward H.,
4,436.248, CI. 241-101.700.
Lautensleger, Richard W.: See—
Seaburg. Paul A ; and Lautensleger, Richard W., 4,435,932, CI.
52-263.000.
Lawson, Peter, to Rockwell International Corporation. Wood planing
machine. 4.436.126. CI. 144-130.000.
Lebedev, Vladimir K.; Kuchuk-Yatsenko, Sergei I.; Sakhamov, Vasily
A.; Galian. Boris A.; Asoyants, Grigory B.; and Tishura, Vladimir I.,
to Institut Elektrosvarki Imeni E.O.Patona Akademii Nauk Ukrain-
skoi SSR. Pipe resistance butt welding apparatus. 4,436.974. CI.
219-66.000.
Lebet. Jean-Pierre, to Baumgartncr Papiers S.A. Apparatus for making
transverse flow cigaretic filters 4,436,517. CI. 493-45 000
Lechaton. John S,: See—
Gaur. Santosh P,; Lechaton. John S.; and Srinivasan. Guruma-
konda R,. 4,435,898, CI 29-577 OOC.
Lee. David R,; and McCreary, Robert B , to United States of America,
Air Force, Anti-llutter apparatus for head mounted visual display.
4.437.113. CI. 358-93 000 *^
Lee, Douglas J.: See-
Liu, Wei-Ti; and Lee, Douglas J , 4,437,025, CI. 307-475.000.
Lee, William B. Lighting system for rotauble toy. 4,435,917, CI.
46-228.000.
Leeuwma, Derk B.; and de Groot, Marius, to Landi den Hartog BV.
Pressure regulating systems. 4,436,110, CI. 137487.500.
Leggett & Piatt, Incorporated: See-
Lyons, Donald W . Jr.; and Wyatt, Everette L., 4,436,545, CI.
71-25.000.
Legille, Edouard: See-
Schmidt. Paul, and Legille, Edouard, 4,436,293, CI. 266-276.000.
Lehmann, Bernd; See—
Klecmann, Axel; Lehmann, Bernd; and Martens, Jurgen, 4,436,910.
CI. 546-245 000
Leikam, Vernon, Spheroid pig launcher, 4,435,872, CI, 15-104.06A.
Leikert, Klaus; and Rennert, Klaus-Dieter, to L & C. Steinmuller
GmbH, Method of preparing pulverized fuel withdrawn from a
primary fuel flow for a pulverized fuel pilot light by means of a sifter
device or a supplemental pulverizing plant 4,436,038, CI.
1 10-347 000
Lekutal, Rolf See—
Gebkc, Klaus; Huhn, Friedrich; and Lekutat, Rolf, 4,436,676, CI.
261-151.000.
Lembke, Manfred: See—
Hafner, Udo; Herth, Harro, Kienzle, Wolfgang; Knapp, Heinrich;
Krauss, Rudolf; Lembke, Manfred; Paschkc, Werner; and Sauer,
Rudolf, 4,436,071, CI. 123-472.000.
Lemelson, Jerome H. Sampling device 4,436,978, CI 2I9-121.0LC.
Lcmstra, Pieter J.: See-
Smith, Paul; Lemstra, Pieter J ; Kirschbaum, Robert; and Pijpers.
Jacques P. L., 4,436,689, CI. 264-204.000.
Lenard, Peter; and Beck, Ernst, to Vollmer Werke Maschinenfabnk
GmbH. Sharpening machine for saws. 4,436,000, CI. 76-41.000,
Lenertz, John B,; and Moore. Carroll E., to Farmhand. Inc, Quick
attachment carrier assembly 4,436,477, CI, 414-723.000.
Lerich. Joel Patient transporting device. 4.435.863. CI 5-81. OOB.
Le Sonn. Marcel, to Thomson-CSF X-Ray emitting assembly compris-
ing a flange for assembling a sheath assembly and a beam limiting
device 4.437.188. CI, 378-205,000,
L'Esperance. Francis A, Bifocal intraocular lens structure and spectacle
actuation frame, 4.435.856. CI. 3-13.000.
Lever Brothers Company: See —
Johnson. Richard S.; and Potter. John K.. 4.436.644. CI
252-174.130.
Verhagen. Laurentius A. M.; and Wamaar. Leendert G.. 4.436.760.
CI. 426-603.000,
Lewandowski. Edward F.; and Vrabec. John, to United States of
America. Energy. Parallel-wire grid assembly with method and
apparatus for construction thereof 4.437.034. CI. 313-348.000,
Lewis. Christopher: See—
Cnsp. Malcolm; and Lewis. Christopher. 4.436.196. CI. 194-
lOO.OOA.
Lewis. Norris E.; and Miller. Michael B.. to Litton Systems. Inc. Opti-
cal slip ring assembly. 4.436.367. CI. 350-96.200.
Li. Stephen: See —
Bissot. Thomas C; and Li. Stephen. 4.436.599. CI 204-98.000.
Liberty Carton Co : See—
Thorud. Stanley R . 4.436.354. CI 312-259.000,
Libit. Sidney M Dispenser having a triggcr-bulb pump. 4,436,225, CI.
222-207.000.
Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH: See—
Heilig. Thomas. 4.436.961. CI. 179-77.000.
Liden. Hadar. to Gotaverken Arendal AB. Semi-submersible vessel.
4.436.050. CI. 1 14-265.000.
Light Koki Co., Ltd.: See—
Shimizu, Fumio, 4,436,387, CI. 350-556.000.
Lightolier Incorporated: See—
Donato, Anthony C; and Russo, Neil, 4,437,142. CI. 362-226.000.
Likins. Merle R.. Jr.: See-
Stacy. Galen D.; and Likins. Merle R.. Jr.. 4,436,698, CI.
422-62.000.
Lile, James B.; and Mathes, Dan C, Jr. Christmas tree stand having
subilized clamping members. 4,436,272, CI. 248-527.000.
Lilliston Corporation: See-
Temple, William F ; and Daniels, Jesse, 4,436,484, CI. 416-178.000
Lin, Jiang-Jen, to Texaco Inc. Preparation of alkanols from synthesis
gu. 4,436,837, CI. 518-700.000.
PI 24
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Lin. Jiang-Jen. to Texaco Inc. Process for preparing alkanols and esters
from synthesis gas. 4.436.838. CI 518-700.000
Lindaberry Harold L.. to Pennwalt Corporation. Microencapsulated
insecticidal persistency through the use of gelatin. 4.436,719. CI
424-37.000.
Lindauer IDomier Gesellschaft mbH: See-
Bosch. Alfred. 4.435.884, CI. 26-93.000.
Lindblom, Curtis H.; Lausch, H. Nevin; and Priepke, Edward H., to
Sperry Corporation. Adjustable shearbar apparatus. 4,436.248. CI
241-101.700.
Linde Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Karwat. Heinz, 4,436.707. CI. 423-226.000
Linde. E. Volker. See—
Brudermann. Uwe; Kunze. Karl-H.; Krehl. Gunter; Linde, E
Volker: and Lorenz, Dieter R.. 4.436.320. CI. 280-242 OWC
Lindenstruth, Werner: See—
^^^.R","^'*^ •' • Slanistreet, Harold P.; and Lindenstruth. Werner.
4.436,503. CI. 425-384.000.
Bye. Donald J ; Stanistreel. Harold P.; and Lindenstruth. Werner.
4.436.687. CI. 264-164.000.
Linder. Charles G., to Gar«tt Corporation. The. Intake vortex whistle
silencing apparatus and methods 4.436.481, CI. 415-119 000
Lindley, William L. Ledge bed. 4.435.861, CI 5-65.000
Lindquist, Richard A.: See—
Ante Louis E.; Lindquist, Richard A ; and Roeschlein. Eugene R
4.436.049, CI. 1 14-254.000. *
Link, Vincent F.; and Yamasaki. George K.. to Westinghouse Electric
Corp. Hollow cathode lamp with improved stability alloy for the
cathode. 4.437,038, CI. 313-633.000
Linke, Hans-Ralf: See—
Batz, Hans-Georg; Linke, Hans-Ralf; Stellner. Klaus; and Wei-
mann. Gunter. 4.436.828, CI. 436-545.000.
Lion Corporation. See—
Yamamura, Masaaki: Igarashi. Taizo; and Ukigai. Toshivuki
4,436.527.0.44-51.000. ^
Lipko. Robert J ; and Laurent. Douglas J., to Exxon Research & Engi-
neering Co. Low gloss films of enhanced adhesion. 4.436,520, CI.
604-385.000.
Lipovac, Joseph E.: See—
Dahl. James M.; Jacobs, Bernard B.; Lipovac, Joseph E. Meglen
Ralph A.; and Ward, Donald W.. 4.436.497. CI 425-28 OOR
4.4^36.^1° ci'''22"8-124.S)6''' """"^'J" ^"^ Metal-ceramic joint.
Lisle Corporation: See-
Pool. James L., 4,435,873. CI. 15-105.000.
Litton Industrial Products. Inc.: See—
Muszynski. Jerome D.. 4.435.883. CI. 26-71 000.
Litton Systems. Inc.: See—
. \f ^'*' Norris E.; and Miller, Michael B.. 4.436,367. CI. 350-96 200
Liu. Wei-Ti; and Lee. Douglas J , to Intel Corporation. MOS Buffer for
receiving TTL level signals. 4,437,025, CI. 307-475 000
Liu. Yi-Tsung: See—
°M'3t729^Cl.'42ll8ai;;i0.^'-''""^= ""' '^""^'"''- ^"•" "^ '
Ljung. Bo H. G.: See—
Kumar. Shri A.; Ljung. Bo H. G.; and Koper. James G.. 4.436.423.
Lockheed Corporation: See—
Peaster. Bertram A.. 4.436.326. CI. 285-178.000.
Lockwood. Alan C. Cable clamping device integrally formed with
plastic molded electrical box. 4.436.952, CI 174-65 OOR
Lockwood. Edwin P.: See—
Bertenshaw. David R.; Lockwood. Edwin P.; and Brown
Anthony R,. 4.437.169, CI. 364-900.000.
Loffelmann, Walter: See—
Behnke. Joachim; and Loffelmann. Walter. 4.436.839, CI.
521-64.000.
Logan. David J.; Webster. Ronald B ; and Sullivan. Daniel J., to Gerber
T?'f!?Vl^.'''^°*'"'^'*- '"'^ Automated measuring scale. 4.435.904. CI
33-I43.00K.
Lohse. Friedrich: See—
^ r?i** o'b"^''""' ^°^^- Friedrich; and Moser. Roland. 4.436,892.
Long, Robert C; and Peters. Richard K.. to Eagle-Picher Industries.
Inc. Radial mandrel. 4,436.574. CI. 156-415.000
^4"436l'92^°M9^2U3°100*^'^ Corporation. Ribbon drive clutch.
Lonscsak, Janos: See —
Kaderjak, Gyula; Veres, Albert; Barkoczy. Istvan; and Lonscsak
Janos. 4.436.954, CI. 174-1 28.00R.
Loomis International Inc.: See —
Rathbum. Lloyd C. 4.436,334, CI. 294-86.300
L'Orcal: See—
'^^^248'00o'^^*°'^^' ""'^ Van'erberghe. Guy. 4,436.909. CI.
Lorenz, Dieter R.: See—
Brudermann, Uwe; Kunze. Karl-H.; Krehl, Gunter; Linde. E
Volker; and Lorenz. Dieter R.. 4,436,320, CI. 280-242 OWC
Loucks. George R., to General Electric Company Block copolymers
of polyphenylene oxides and stencally-hindered aromatic polycar-
bonates. 4,436,876. CI. 525-394.000.
Lowe, Gary D.: See—
McKenzie. Joe A.; and Lowe. Gary D.. 4,437,067, CI. 328-167 000
Lubrizol Corporation, The: See—
Higgins, William A.; and Perz. John S., 4.436.855. CI. 524-145.000.
Lucas Industries Limited: See—
Farr. Glyn P. R.. 4.435.960. CI. 60-547.100.
Farr. Glyn P. R.. 4.436.348. CI. 303-115.000.
Ludwig. Richard H.; Quan. Wing C; Husson. Alan L.; DimberBer
Linus R.; and Polis. Marjorie J., to Westinghouse Electric Coro'
Elevator system. 4.436.185. CI. 187-29.00R *^
Lugscheider. Walter: See—
Kilches. Helmut p.^Lugscheider. Walter; Riegler. Ernst; and
Zajicek, Ernst, 4,436,290, CI. 266-158.000
Lurssen, Klaus: See—
"4,436,9^; cr544!b^5"0TO "' ''''"'• ""^ ^^°*'^^8"- P»"»-Emst.
Luste, Anita Y.: See—
Pakhomoy, Gennady N.; Luste, Anita Y.; Kadnikova. Galina I.-
and Kolesnik, Anatoly G., 4,436,720, CI. 424-44 000
Lyman, Dale E.. to Mobil Oil Corporation. Extracting chromium (III)
a ^^54 00)*° °"* '*''*^ 2-ethylhexyl acid phosphate. 4.436.705,
Lyons, Donald W., Jr.; and Wyatt, Everette L.. to Leggett & Piatt
Incorporated. Process having the two-fold result of the disposal of
t'SoOO °^ ^"'^ '^^ production of fertilizer. 4.436.545, CI.
Maag Gear-Wheel & Machine Company Limited: See—
Sciberhch. Walter. 4.436,464, CI. 409-233.000
MacDonald, Murdo A., to Clyde Corporation. Article orientine anoa-
ratus. 4,436.197, CI. 198-389 000. oneniing appa
Mack, Harry, to Mobil Oil Corporation. Method of optimizing signal-
to-noise ratio in seismic exploration. 4.437,176. CI. 367-38 oSo
MacLcwi^orman J. Spill-resistant pet animal dish. 4,436,056, CI.
MacMillan, David: See—
^M37.'irCl"364!'2SS;.' '''^'"^ "' '^''^^""'"' °»^"'-
Madison. Norman L.: See—
^V-}!'.,^^^' *"'* Madison, Norman L.. 4.436.789. CI.
428-537.000.
""xHiSrci 350-sa" '''"'"' '^' "-'' ''■' ^"^ ^^"^"'-
Maeda Industries. Ltd.: See—
Ozaki, Nobuo; and Kaneko. Yoshimasa, 4,436.468. CI. 41 1-248 000
Maeda. Koji: See —
Suzuki. Sunao; and Maeda. Koji. 4.437.057. Q. 324-78 OOR
Magnus, Woin Braach. Otto; Fischer. Dirk; and Wippig, Werner, to
Hochtief AG, vorm. Gebr. Helfmann; and Bade & Theelen GmbH
A^cViV'^ machine for tunnels and galleries. 4.436.448. CI
4U5-143.000.
Magyar Tudomanyos Akademia Muszaki Fizikai Kutato Intezete- See—
Ferenczi Gyorgy; Horvath. Peter; Toth, Ferenc; Kiss, Jozsef and
Boda, Janos. 4,437.060. CI. 324-158.0OD
Maida. Osamu. to Nippon Kogaku K.K. Electrortash unit. 4.436.396. CI.
354-416.000.
Makarewicz. Stanley R.: See-
Gardiner. James R.; Makarewicz. Stanley R.; Revitz. Martin and
Shepard, Joseph F,. 4.437.108. CI. 357-59.000.
Makimoto. Mitsuo; Endo, Haruyoshi; Kikuchi, Ko; and Yamashita,
Sadahiko. to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd. Coaxial filter
4.737%6, Cr333'-206 0C»"^'°" "''^ '"'^'"^ ^ bottomed cylinder.
^f^u\- •'^Tfl c^V }^, M°"'>rch Marking Systems. Inc. Hand-held
labeler. 4.436.572. CI. 156-384.000.
Malakhoff. Alexander: See-
Davis, Sydney; and Malakhoff. Alexander. 4.436,312, CI.
277-34.000.
Mallams, Alan K.: See—
°*."f,"Jy^,„'^*'''' ^' ^'"' Y'-Tsung; and Mallams, Alan K..
4,436,729, CI. 424-180.000.
Mallet, Bernard, to Nadella. Articulation device having a double uni-
versal joint and a ball joint unit. 4,436,515, CI. 464-1 14.000
Maltz, Javier E., to Etablissement Texcontor. Semi-synthetic chitin
derivative, the process for its preparation, and therapeutic composi-
tions which contain it as active principle. 4,436,731, CI 424-18 000
Manfredo, Joseph N.; and Hirsch. Selwyn R., to Garrett Corporation,
T^e_Charge air cooler mounting arrangement. 4,436,145, CI.
Manley, Stephen C. Audio component coupler. 4,437.018. CI
307-38.000. . . ■^i-
Manning. Charles R.. to Assay Tec Associates. Inc. Ethylene oxide
process dosimeter. 4,436.819. CI. 436-1.000.
Manoski. Laurence A.: See—
Nordstrom, Eric W.; and Manoski, Laurence A.. 4.436 044 CI
112-286.000.
Manov. Grigory L.: See—
Shevakin. Jury F.; Dobkin. Igor I.; Donskoi. Efim M.; Manov.
Gngory L.; Zhdanov, Vasily V.; Berger. Elena S. Popov Va-
lery M.; Pavlov. Alexei A.; and Akchunn. Rashid Z.. 4,435.886
CI. 29-33.0OD.
Mansei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Watabe, Akinori; Yonezawa. Susumu; and Tanaka. Yoshihani.
4,437.177. CI. 369-45.000.
Manso, Hipolito S. Book holding device. 4.436.271. CI. 248-460000
Marbach, Andre: See—
Stein, Claude; and Marbach. Andre. 4.436.859, CI. 524-297 000
Marc. Michel. Shoe insole. 4.435.910. CI. 36-44.000.
Marcelon. Gilbert: See—
Hatinguais. Philippe; Patoiseau. Jean -Francois; and Marcelon.
Gilbert, 4.436.749, CI. 424-278.000.
March 13. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 25
Margetts, Peter K.: See—
Dietz. Raymond L.; Featherby, Michael; and Margetts, Peter K
4,436.785, CI. 428-427.000.
Margulies, Herman, to Sterling Drug Inc. Container and dispensing
plate for a roll of pre-moistened lowcleltes. 4,436,221, CI. 221-46.000.
Marhold, Albrecht; and Klauke, Erich, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft
Process for the isomerization of alkylbenzotrinuorides. 4,436 941 CI
570-144.000.
Marin, Manuel. Safety door. 4,435,921, CI. 49-395.(XX).
Marino, Frank J. Cargo restraining apparatus. 4.436.466, CI
410-1 18.000.
Marosi. Laszlo: See—
Broccker. Franz J.; Gruendler. Karl-Heinz; Marosi. Laszlo;
Schwarzmann. Matthias; Triebskorn. Bruno; and Zirker
Guenter. 4.436.833. CI. 502-176.000.
Mars Limited: See-
Taylor. Michael; and Withnall. Malcolm D N . 4.436.222 CI
221-223.000.
Marshall and Williams Company: See-
Williamson. John G.. Jr., 4,435,909, CI. 34-82.000.
Martens, Jurgen: See—
Kleemann, Axel; Lehmann, Bernd; and Martens, Jurccn, 4 4^6 910
CI. 546-245.000 . . • . . ,
Martin, John E. Leak resistant plug assembly. 4,436,1 17, CI 13K-89 (XX)
Martinez, Rafael. Multi-slop depth control. 4,436,462, CI 409-218 (XX)
Martorana, Piero A.: See—
Schonafinger, Karl; Beyeric, Rudi; Bohn, Helmut; Just, Mclilla;
Martorana, Piero A.; and Niiz, Rolf-Ebcrhard, 4,436,743 CI
424-269.000.
Maruhashi, Kenji; Kojima, Ichiro; Oguchi, Yulaka; Endoh, Noboru;
and Saloh, Tetsuo, to Nippon Oil Company. Ltd. Process for separat-
ing porphyrins 4,436,663, CI. 260-245 910
Maruyama, Masato: See—
Yamashita, Masahidc; Oku, Hikaru; and Maruyama, Masato
4.437,168, CI 364-900.000.
Maruzen Oil Co., Ltd.: Sec—
Sasaki, Takuma; Nakamichi. Kazuya; Tachibana, Yakudo and
Minami, Kiyoshi, 4,436,656. CI 260-1 12 OOR
Sasaki, Takuma; Nakamichi, Kazuya; Tachibana, Yakudo and
Minami, Kiyoshi, 4,4.36,657, CI. 260-1 12.(X)R.
Marvin Glass & AsscKiatcs: See—
Zaruba. John V.; and Tcr/ian, Roubcn T., 4,435,915, CI 46-12.000
Marwick, Edward F Larger contained nuclear explosion breeder
reactor systems. 4,436,695, CI. 376-317.000.
Marwilz, Heinrich: See—
Huhn, Karl; and Marwitz, Hcinnch, 4,436,856, CI. 524-211 000
Marx, Paul: See—
Kuffncr. Karl; Marx, Paul; and Lassig, Wolfgang, 4,436,810. CI
430-551.000 b 6 . . . «-i
Maryland Cup Corporation: Sit-
Winstead, Thomas W.. 4,436,679, CI 264-40 300.
Marzocchi, Alfred: See—
Grossi, Anthony V.; Hahn, Louis T; Marzocchi, Alfred and
Bolen, Charles E., 4.436,767, CI 427-138.000.
Grossi, Anthony V.; Hagelee, Leon A ; Hahn, Louis T.; and Mar-
zocchi, Alfred. 4,4.36,864, CI. 524-458 000.
Ma.samol(), Junzo: See—
Matsuzaki, Kazuhiko; Iwaisako. Toshiyuki; and Masamoio, Junzo
4,436,900, CI 528-490.000.
Mashida, Hiromi: See—
Kokura, Satoshi; Nihei, Masayasu; Wachi, Hiroshi; Mashida,
Hiromi; and Senda, Kousaku, 4,436,982. CI. 219-130.510.
Mason, Charles D.: See-
Flood, Paul W.; Mason, Charles D.; and Schuize, Stephen R.,
4,436,872, CI. 525-179.000,
Masotto, Ermanno; and Gagliardi, Sergio, to Comilatonazionale Per
Liencrgia Nucleare. Process for the continuous punficalion of con-
taminated fluids and for conditioning the resulting concentrates
4,436,655, CI 252-628.000.
Masuda, Masakazu; and Matsumoto, Hironori, lo Okumura Corpora-
tion. Method of excavating a pile hole and an apparatus therefor
4,436.167, CI. 175-72.000
Masui, Mikio: See—
Murasaki, Hiroshi; Ogawa, Masaya; Enoguchi. Yuji; and Masui,
Mikio, 4,436,406, CI. 355-3.0SH.
Masuoka, Fujio, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Semicon-
ductor memory device 4,437,172, CI. 365-182 000
Masuoka, Fujio, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Semicon-
ductor memory device. 4,437,174, CI. 365-218.000.
Masuyama, Tadahiro: See—
Nishida, Yoshiaki; Yano, Shunji; and Masuyama, Tadahiro,
4.436.594. CI. 204-33.000.
Matam. Ltd.: See—
Rosinck. Shlomo; Rinkewich. Isaac; and Khurgin, Boris, 4.437,098.
CI. 340-870.020.
Maihe, Istvan: See—
Kasper. Alan H.; and Mathe. Istvan, 4,436.359. CI. 339-61. OOM
Mather. David S.. to Harvey Hubbell Incorporated. Method and appa-
ratus for making ductile iron castings. 4.436.142. CI. 164-337.000
Malhes. Dan C. Jr : See—
Lile. James B.; and Mathes, Dan C. Jr., 4.436.272. CI. 248-527.000
Matre, Tore: See—
Jacobsen. Kjell O.; Matre, Tore; Halvorsen, Rolf I.; Heie. Ingar H.;
Myhrvold, Eriing; and Berger. Ove R.. 4.436,034, CI
102-334.000.
Malson, Waller T , to Metal Surfaces, Inc Electroplating bath and
method 4,4.36,595, CI 2()4-400fX) *
Malsuda, Fujio; Kalo, Takazo; H<.nda. Tadatoshi; Terada, Kazuhiro
and Kogure, Yasuo, to Mitsui Toalsu Chemicals. Inc Process for the
preparation of indoles 4.436.916, CI 548-508 OOT)
Malsuda. Fujirt; and Kalo. Takazo. to Miisui Toalsu Chemicals. Inc
Process for the preparation of indoles 4.436,917. CI. 548-508 000
Matsuda, Hiroto: Sec—
Sugiiani. Hiroshi; Matsuda. Hiroto; and Ikeda. Masami. 4.437,100.
CI 346-l.l(X).
Malsuda. Shinpei: See—
Takcuchi, Masalo; Okada. Hideo; Tobita, Hirosi; Okabe, Sigeru
Malsuda. Shinpci. Tonami. Munehiko; Tamura. Kohki and
Nakajima. Fumiio, 4.436,794. CI 429-40 000
Malsuda, Tadahilo; Okumura. Masahide, Yokouchi, Hisatake Ozasa
Susumu; and Kalo, Yasuo. to Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public
m'sS! Ci 2"5"S-39"'S'' ^"* ^'^'■""" ^""^ ''""•'"' 'y'"^'"
Malsuda. Yasuo: See—
Mulo. Nobuyoshi; Nagase. Hiroshi, Sakai. Keijiro; and Matsuda.
Yasuo, 4.437.05 1 . CI. 3 1 8-808 000
Malsui, Kenji; and Teraoka. Fuminori. lo Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai-
Rika-Denki-Seisakusho. Seatbeli retractor 4.436,255. CI 242-
Malsumoio. Hironori: See—
Masuda, Masakazu. and Malsumoto. Hironori. 4.436.167. CI.
Malsumoto, Shuichi, Haiori. Yoshinori. Murakami. Hitomi; and Yama-
moio, Hideo, to Kokusai Denshin Denwa Kabushiki Kaisha Inter-
frame adaptive prediction system for television signals 4.437,1 19, CI.
358-136.000.
Malsunaga. Kinjiro; Okumura. Takeo; Nailo. Sachio; and Tsushima.
Rikio. to Kao Soap Co . Lid Hair nnse composition 4,436.722. CI
Malsuo. Kazuya Sec—
Mochizuki. Takeloshi; Matsuo. Kazuya; Kudo. Mituo; Arai. Akira
Yamada. Junichi; Shono. Keizi; Aoki. Masaaki; Ohmori. Masai-
chi, and Nishi, Genichiro, 4.435.962. CI. 62-175.000.
Matsuoka. Hiroki: See—
Nakalsuka. Hirotaka; Mizuno. Toshiaki; Yamazoe. Hisamitsu and
Malsuoka. Hiroki. 4.436.074, CI 123-492.000
Malsu(>ka. Seiichi: See—
Yamaguchi, Kalsunobu, Malsuoka. Seiichi; Hayashida. Takayuki-
and Hayasc. Tomio. 4.436,532. CI. 48-209.000.
Matsushita Eleclnc Industrial Co . Ltd : See—
Ikeda. Nobuo; and Yoshimura. Hirofumi, 4,436,973. CI. 219-10 55F
Inai. Takayoshi, Saitoh, Tcruo, and Sannomiya, Hisayuki.
4.437,111. CI 358-44 000. ^
Makimoto. Mitsuo; Endo, Haruyoshi; Kikuchi, Ko, and Yamashita
Sadahiko, 4,437,076, CI 333-206 000
Miyoshi, Seizo; and Yamaguchi, Bunitsu, 4,437,178, CI 369-75 100
Nakamura, Hiromichi; Urano, Haruya; Kojima, Tatsuo and
Sekiwa, Milsunao, 4.436.006. CI 83-13 000.
Okada. Yoshio; Suzuki. Yoshiaki; Murakami. Ryohei; and Seeawa
Yoshiaki. 4.436.352. CI 312-228 000
Shinozaki. Nozomu; Neki. Shigeo; and Dohi. Takashi. 4.437.061.
CI 324-166.000
Matsushita Electronics Corporation: See—
Kuroda. Takao; and Honi. Kenju. 4.435.897. CI. 29-572000
Matsushita. Yukinobu: See—
Tanaka. Osamu; Takeba. Kazuhiro; Saita. Hiroshi; Matsushita.
Yukinobu; and Koyabu. Koji. 4,436.563. CI. 148-26.000
Matsuura. Masataka: See—
Funada. Fumiaki; Kozaki, Syuichi; Matsuura, Masataka; and Wada
Tomio. 4.436.379. CI 350-347.00E
Matsuzaki. Kazuhiko; Iwaisako. Toshiyuki; and Masamoto. Junzo. to
Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Process for deactivating
p<»lymerization catalyst. 4.436.900, CI 528-490.000
Matsuzawa. Yoshio: See—
Tomino. Naoki; Ikeda. Osamu; Matsuzawa. Yoshio; and Inoue.
Hideya. 4.436.792. CI. 429-1.000.
Matthews. Patricia C: See-
Walker. Thad O.; and Matthews. Patricia C . 4.436,638, CI. 252-
o. ??K ■
Mavilor Sysiemes: See—
Coquillari, Michel, 4,437,030, CI 310-227.000.
Maxwell, Richard Chemical treatment for oil wells. 4,436,148. CI
166-53.000
Mayer, KaH M.; and Schafer, Rudolf Device for the continuous mixing
of a dry finished mortar 4,436.430, CI. 366-13 000
Mayo, Henry C; and Korzendorfer, Joseph E , to United States of
America, Army Folding support with double-positive lock.
4,436,330, CI. 292-263.000 *^
Mazac, Karel: See—
Pache, Norbert; and Mazac. Karel, 4.436,980, CI. 219-123 000
Mazza, Frank J.; and DeFiIippis, John, to International Telephone and
Telegraph Corporation. Telephone security system for cordless
telephony 4,436,957, CI 179-2.0EA
McAlister, Roy E. Hot water supply tank assembly. 4.436,058. CI.
I22-I3.00R.
McCausland. Thomas W., to Brockway, Inc (NY). Aluminum bronze
glassmaking molds. 4,436.544, CI. 65-374.120.
McCleerey, Earl W.. to AMP Incorporated Hermaphroditic back shell
cover. 4,436.361, CI. 339-97 OOP.
McCormick, Daniel F., to Brunswick Corporation. Connecting rod
4.436.443. CI. 403-14.000.
PI 26
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
McCreary, Roben B.: See-
Lee. David R ; and McCreary. Roben B . 4.437,1 13. CI. 358-93.000.
McCulIough. John E . lo Anhur D Little. Inc Method of fabricating
two-piece scroll members for scroll apparatus and resulting scroll
members. 4.436.495, CI 418-55 000
Mclnerny. John Dispenser for fluids and paper towels. 4,436,224, CI.
McKeny. Stanley T . executor. See—
Meginnis, Charles E., deceased, 4,436.375. CI. 350-319.000.
McKenzie. Joe A . and Lowe. Gary D.. to United States of America.
Navy. Transient error reduction for stored charged circuits
4.437.067. CI. 328-167.000 *
McKillip, James B.; and Brown, Edmund J. Physical therapy apparatus
4,436,303. CI. 272-132.000.
McLaughlin. William J.: See—
Doery. Michael S ; Hanzlik. Edward W C; Adamek. John A.; and
McLaughlin, William J., 4.436.301. CI. 271-177.000.
McMenamin. Joseph C, to J C Schumacher Co. Vapor mass now
control system. 4.436,674, CI 261-64 OOB
McMonigle. Matthew J., to Aluminum Company of America. Magnetic
removal of impurities from molten salt baths. 4,436,627 CI
210-695.000.
McQueen, Sidney J. Hikers hatchet. 4,435,868. CI. 7-158 000
McVety, Ronald E.: See—
Shisler, Robert W.; and McVeiy, Ronald E., 4,436,242 CI
228-264000.
Mead Johnson & Company: See—
Bequettc, Robert J ; Hobbs, Linda G , and Scott, Joseph A
4,436,738, CI. 424-238.000.
Medical Packaging Corporation: See—
Nason, Frederic L.; and Crane. Walton B., 4,436,243, CI
229-27.000.
Meginnis, Charles E., deceased (by McKeny, Stanley T , executor), to
Pressure Products Company. Sight glass apparatus. 4,436,375, CI.
350-319.000.
Mcglen, Ralph A.: See—
Dahl, James M.; Jacobs, Bernard B.; Lipovac, Joseph E. Meglen
Ralph A.; and Ward, Donald W., 4,436,497, CI. 425-28.00R
Mehlman, Stewart K.: See—
Andreini. Rocknc J.; Mehlman. Stewart K ; Selines. Ronald J. and
Agrawal. Balkishan, 4,436.553. CI. 75-52.000.
Mehren. Herbert; and Panik. Ferdinand, to Daimler-Benz Aktiengesell-
schaft. Externally track-guided vehicle, especially for the local public
passenger traffic. 4,436,170. CI. 180-131.000.
Mclloch. Michael R.: See—
Gunshor, Robert L ; Pierret, Robert F.; and Melloch. Michael R ,
4,437,031, CI. 310-3I3.00B.
Meloy. Gilbert K., to Twinoak Products, Inc. Apparatus for cleansing
and disinfecting toilet tanks and bowls. 4,435,857, CI. 4-228.000.
Memorex Corporation: See —
Osborne, John R.; and Bischoff, Peter G., 4,436,593, CI. 204-15.000.
Menconi, K. Anthony; and Gribauskas, Joseph F., Jr. Modular surface
such as for use in sports. 4,436,779, CI. 428-169.000.
Merant, Jean C: See—
Deux, Alain; and Merant. Jean C, 4.435,950, CI. 56-330.000
Mercer, John E.; Olsen, John H.; and Elkins, Stephen, to Flow Indus-
tries, Inc. Anicuiated boom water jet cutting apparatus. 4,435,902,
CI. 3O-296.00R.
Merck & Co., Inc.: See—
Baldwin, John J., 4,436,740. CI. 424-263.000.
Merger, Franz: See-
Harder, Wolfgang; Merger, Franz; and Towae, Friedrich,
4,436,668, CI. 260-463.000.
Messina, Samuel E. Decoy. 4,435,913, CI. 43-3.000.
Metal Surfaces, Inc.: See—
Matson, Walter T., 4.436,595, CI. 204-40.000.
Meullgesellschaft Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Krennrich, Otmar; Brendel, Gottfried; and Pietsch, Hartmut
4,436,704, CI. 423-11.000.
Rammler, Roland; and Bussmann, Alfons, 4,436,588. CI
201-12.000.
Schnabel, Wolfram; Scheu, Ernst; and Serbent, Harry, 4.436.286,
CI. 266-44.000.
Metallurgie Hoboken-Ovcrpelt: See—
Viellefont, Jean F.; Hens, Carolus M.; and Tobback. Hubert J
4.436.606. CI. 204-225.000. '
Metal! werk Max Brose GmbH & Co : See-
Becker. Herbert. 4.436.250, CI. 242-54.00R.
Methode Electronics, Inc.: See—
Swisher, William F., 4,436,970, CI. 200-61.560.
Metro Hoist & Body Co.. Inc.: See—
Petretti. Anthony V.. 4.436.622. CI. 210-232.000.
Metz Paul, to Arbed S/A. Method of plating a wire with meUl.
Metzger. Thomas J. Locking mechanism. 4.436.329. CI. 292-150.000.
Meyer, Alfons. Apparatus for orderly transport and storase of flat
objects. 4,435,944, CI. 53-531.000.
Meyer, Hans U. Process for the capacitive measurement of lengths and
ofangles. 4.437.055. CI. 324-61. OOR.
Meyer. Richard C; and Carroll. Edward L.. to Beckman Instruments,
Inc. Plunger operated pipet. 4.435,989. CI. 73-864.140.
Meyerson, Bernard S.: See-
Brady. Michael J.; Meyerson, Bernard S.; and Warlaumont. John
M.. 4.436.797, CI. 430-5.000.
Meyman, Usher. Bracelet. 4,435,956, CI. 59-79.100.
Micro Consultants Limited: See—
''tmTii'dim'i^. '""' "" "*■■• '"' "'"""• ^^" ^-
Micro- Mega S.A.: See—
Garcia, Philippe, 4,436,512, CI. 433-129.000.
Miersch, Eddehard F ; Pollmann, Kuri; Schettler. Helmut; and Zuhike,
Rainer, to International Business Machines Corporation. Monolithi-
cally integrated push-pull driver. 4,437,022, CI. 307-270 000
Mieth, Hans O. E.: See—
Tuchenhagen. Otto A. P.; Mieth, Hans O. E.; and Coura Herbert
R, 4,436.106, CI. 137-240.000.
Migliarese, Jean-Louis: See—
Josien, Daniel; and Migliarese, Jean-Louis, 4,436.120, CI
138-93.000. ■**>.
Mihayashi, Keiji: See—
''4%'3M08. a"4V3"8lS. ^""""^ '"' '*'''^"''*' ''"^''
Mikami, Ryuzo; and Nakasuji, Katsuyoshi, to Dow Corning Corpora-
tion. Durable primer composition. 4,436,787, CI. 428-447 000
Miles. Melvin H.; and Fine. Dwight A., to United States of America,
vi^r,5?"^'^"°" °'"""''"'c «'ers using silver electrode. 4,436,590, CI.
204-1 .OOT.
Miller, Edward C: See—
Nichols, C. Ross; and Miller, Edward C. 4,435,969, CI. 72-126 000
r-i ;« ."l^ ' *" ^'* '"'^*' Marine Systems, Inc. Coupling. 4,436,325,
CI. 285-I8.000.
Miller, James A., to Morgan Adhcsives Company. Transmissive rertec-
^^! !.".«, ^'"* nacreous, pressure sensitive adhesive layer. 4,436,377,
CI. 350-345.000.
Miller, Jerry W.; and Rudnick. Paul J., to Ampex Corporation. Limited
look-ahead means. 4,437,086, CI. 340-347.0DD.
Miller. Kenneth F.; and Belfoure. Edward, to General Electric Com-
pany. Copolyester-carbonate blends. 4,436,879, CI. 525-439 000
Miller, Michael B.: See—
Lewis, Norris E.; and Miller, Michael B., 4.436,367, CI. 350-96 200
Mmami, Kiyoshi: See-
Sasaki, Takuma; Nakamichi, Kazuya; Tachibana, Yakudo and
Minami, Kiyoshi, 4,436,656, CI. 260-1 12.00R.
Sasaki, Takuma; Nakamichi, Kazuya; Tachibana, Yakudo and
Minami, Kiyoshi, 4.436,657, CI. 260-1 12.00R.
Mingesz, August C: See—
Kellogg, James D.; and Mingesz, August C, 4,436,288, CI.
Ministry of International Trade & Industry: See—
Hayashi, Yutaka; Yamanaka, Mitsuyuki; and Karasawa, Hidevuki
4,436,761, CI. 427-38.000.
Mitsuoka. Toyokazu, 4,437,045, CI. 318-561.000.
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Co.: See-
Paul, Fred R., Jr.; and Mrozinski, James S., 4,436,213, CI.
215-365.000.
Tullos, Robert N.; and Ostroff, Arthur, 4,437,049, CI. 318-696 000
Vanderwerf, Dennis F., 4,436,392. CI. 353-38.000.
Vanderwerf. Dennis F., 4,436,393, CI. 353-38.000.
Wyatt, Gerald A., 4,437,081, CI. 335-229.000.
Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Murasaki, Hiroshi; Ogawa, Masaya; Enoguchi, Yuji; and Masui.
Mikio, 4,436,406, CI. 355-3.0SH.
Oka, Tateki, 4,436,413, CI. 355-15.000.
Mirror Lite Company: See-
Schmidt, William P.; and Hutchinson, Franklin D., 4,436,372. CI.
350-293.000.
Misawa Homes K.K.: See—
Umezu, Hiroaki; Kishi, Akira; and Yamagami, Hiroshi, 4,435,927.
CI. 52-79.130.
Misawa, Nobuo. Automatic washing machine for shoes. 4,435,964, CI
68-19.200.
Miskin, Renold A. Directory holder. 4,436,442. CI. 402-73.000.
Miu Industrial Co.. Ltd.: See—
Ikeda, Toshimitsu; Honda. Nobuyasu; and Nakano. Tetsuya.
4.436,803, CI. 430-122.000.
Miyoshi, Hideo; Umeda, Tadashi; and Aoki, Takashi, 4.436,41 1, CI.
355-I4.00D.
Yamagata, Ryutaro; Kozuka, Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi;
Koyama, Shigeo; and Sakai, Kazutada, 4,436,412, CI. 355-15.000. "
Mitchell, Alvin L.: See-
Morgan, Ira L.; Sudarshan, E. C. George; Mitchell, Alvin L.;
Coose, James P.; Ellinger, Hunter D.; and Jagger, James W..
4,437,006, CI. 25O-363.00S.
Mitchell, Hal D.; and Walker, Donald R., to Figgie International Inc.
Flap hinge for a shoulder pad. 4,435,851, CI. 2-2.000.
Mitchell, John W., Sr. Molded dental press. 4,436.511, CI. 433-49.000.
Mitsubishi Chemical Industries Limited: See—
Niwa, Toshio; and Nagashima, Susumu, 4,436,522. CI. 8-524.000.
Niwa. Toshio; and Hihara, Toshio, 4,436,906, CI. 544-187.000.
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Motoki, Yoshiaki, 4,436,969, CI. 200-38.00R.
Nishizako, Shizutaka; Ishii, Isao; and Sakamoto, Yoshiaki,
4,436,831. CI. 501-119.000.
Sugimoto, Hiroshi, 4,435,987, CI. 73-862.170.
Suzuki, Sunao; and Maeda, Koji, 4,437,057, CI. 324.78.00R.
Yamaguchi, Hiroshi; and Negishi, Nobumasa, 4,436,503, d.
431-76.000.
Yamamoto, Sakuei; and Nishida, Mitsuhiro, 4,437,027. CI.
310-78.000.
March 13. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 27
Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company Inc.: See—
Horie, Shigeru; Yamamoto, Yasuo; and Ikarashi, Takeo, 4,436,835.
CI. 502-208.000.
Mitsubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Omae. Takashi; Tanaka. Kisaburoo; Aoki. Masahiro; Hirayama,
Fumitoshi; and Izaki. Susumu, 4,436,554, CI. 75-128.00T.
Mitsubishi Metal Corporation: See—
Nakamura, Hiromichi; Urano, Haruya; Kojima. Tatsuo; and
Sekiwa. Mitsunao, 4.436,006. CI. 83-13.000.
Mitsubishi Paper Mills, Ltd : See—
Iguchi, Shigeru; and Ebato. Seigo. 4,436,805. CI. 430-248.000.
Okumura, Fumio; Higuchi, Masahiro; Kamei, Shun; and Miyauchi,
Masahiro. 4,436,783, CI. 428-41 1.000.
Mitsubishi Rayon Company, Ltd.: See—
Nakazima, Atushi; Edamatsu, Mitisuke; and Kushi. Kenji,
4,436.764, CI. 427-54.100.
Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals, Inc.: See—
Matsuda, Fujio; Kato. Takazo; Honda, Tadatoshi; Terada,
Kazuhiro; and Kogure. Yasuo. 4.436,916, CI. 548-508.000.
Matsuda. Fujio; and Kato. Takazo. 4,436,917. CI 548-508.000.
Mitsumi Electric Co. Ltd.: See—
Ohyama, Sadahiro; Kato, Hiroshi; Yaguchi, Sadao; Baba, Mikito;
and Okada, Morikazu, 4,437.140. CI. 361-402.000.
Mitsuoka, Toyokazu, to Agency of Industrial Science & Technology;
and Ministry of International Trade and Industry. Method and appa-
ratus for controlling servomechanism by use of model reference
servo-control system. 4,437.045. CI. 318-561.000.
Miura. Kiyoshi: See—
Kurihara, Nobuo; Morooka, Yasuo; Nishikawa, Mitsuyo; Miura,
Kiyoshi; and Nagahashi, Yoshitoshi, 4,437,163. CI. 364-508.000
Miura, Mituo; Kukino, Yoshinori; and Fujii, Takumi, lo Takenaka
Komuien Co., Ltd.; and Takenaka Doboku Co., Ltd. Machine for
and method of hardening soft ground in depths. 4,436,453, CI.
405-263000.
Miyagi, Hideo, to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Method of
and apparatus for controlling the fuel feeding rate of an internal
combustion engine. 4,436,073, CI. 123-491.000.
Miyamoto, Kazumichi: See—
Nishihara. Yoshiki; and Miyamoto, Kazumichi. 4,436,683. CI.
264-107.000.
Miyauchi, Masahiro: See—
Okumura, Fumio; Higuchi, Masahiro; Kamei, Shun; and Miyauchi.
Masahiro, 4,436,783, CI. 428-411.000.
Miyazaki. Jingo: See—
Tamama. Hiroshi; Ozawa, Yukio; Miyazaki, Jingo; Ito, Hiroshi; and
Kinoshita. Toyohiro, 4,436.313, CI 277-80.000
Miyazaki. Naomi; and Fujimura, Akira, to Onoda Chemical Industry
Co., Ltd. Method of manufacturing potassium sulfate. 4,436,710, CI
423-552.000.
Miyoshi, Hideo; Umeda, Tadashi; and Aoki, Takashi, to Mita Industrial
Co., Ltd. Toner dispenser and detector for an electrostatic copying
apparatus. 4,436,411, CI 355-14 OOD
Miyoshi, Seizo; and Yamaguchi, Bunitsu, to Matsushita Electric Indus-
trial Co., Ltd. Record player. 4,437,178, CI. 369-75. 100.
Mizuno, Jiro: See—
Fujita, Hironori; Arai, Tohru; and Mizuno, Jiro, 4,436,560, CI
148-6.000.
Mizuno, Toshiaki: See—
Nakatsuka, Hirotaka; Mizuno. Toshiaki; Yamazoe, Hisamitsu; and
Matsuoka, Hiroki, 4,436,074, CI. 123-492.000.
Mizusaki. Yoshinobu. to Nissin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Fluid-quantity alarm-
ing devices for the master cylinder. 4,437,091, CI. 340-623.000.
Moba Holding Barnevcld B.V.: See-
van 't Slot. Kornelis, 4,435,879, CI. 17-11.000.
Mobil Oil Corporation: See-
Allen, Linus S., 4,436.997, CI. 250-256.000.
Gentry, Larry L.; Moss, Herbert H.; Panicker, Narayana N.; and
Wada, William T., 4,436,048, CI. 1 14-230.000.
Goumay, Luke S., 4,435,977. CI. 73-152000.
Kaufman, Marvin L., 4,436.890. CI. 528-93.000.
Lyman, Dale E., 4,436,705, CI. 423-54.000.
Mack, Harry, 4,437,176, CI. 367-38.000.
Mochida, Ei: See—
Ohnishi, Haruo; Kosuzume, Hiroshi; Suzuki, Yasuo; and Mochida,
Ei, 4,436,724, CI. 424-101.000.
Mochida, Haruo, to Nissan Motor Company, Limited. Electronic door
locking system for an automotive vehicle. 4,437,137, CI. 361-172.000.
Mochida Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See—
Ohnishi, Haruo; Kosuzume, Hiroshi; Suzuki, Yuuo; and Mochida,
Ei, 4,436,724, CI. 424-101.000.
Mochizuki, Taketoshi; Matsuo, Kazuya; Kudo, Mituo; Arai, Akira;
Yamada, Junichi; Shono, Keizi; Aoki, Masaaki; Ohmori, Masaichi;
and Nishi, Genichiro, to Shin Meiwa Industry Co., Ltd.; and Hitachi,
Ltd. Refrigerating apparatus. 4,435.962. CI. 62-173.000.
Modcom, Inc.: See-
Klein, Paul E., 4,436,310. CI. 433-4.000.
Mohlin, Kjell, to Aktiebolaget Bofon. Muzzle brake for artillery guns
4,436.017, CI. 89-14.00C.
Mohr, Ernst, to Fides Treuhand GmbH. Hot-gas piston-type engine and
use thereof in heating, cooling and power planu. 4,433,939. CI.
60-312.000.
Moller, Heinz: See—
Eisele, Hermann; Moller. Heinz; and Schmilt, Manfred, 4,437,134,
CI. 364-187.000.
Mollring. Friednch K : See-
Fischer. Horst; and Mollring, Friedrich K., 4,436,383, CI.
350-529.000
Molnar. Islvan; Thiele. Kuri; Geissmann, Felix, and Jahn, Ulrich, to
Siegfried Aktiengesellschaft. IH- and 2H- indazole derivatives.
4,436,913, CI 548-316.000.
Monarch Marking Systems, Inc.: See—
Makley. James A.. 4,436,572, CI. 156-384.000.
Monarch Wine Co., Inc.: See—
Zailsman, Efim. 4,435,942, CI. 53-489.000.
Monsanto Company: See —
Frederick. Roger A.; and Moody. Jerry W., 4,436,577, CI. 136-
6I7.0SP.
Monsheimer. Rolf: See—
Kreuzburg. Eberhard; Von Der Pahle. Dietrich J.; Monsheimer,
Rolf: Pdeiderer, Ernst; and Taeger, Tilman, 4,436,624, CI.
210-632000
Montedison S p.A : See—
Perdomini. Luciano; Tonon, Elia; and Paronetto, Lanfranco,
4,436,755, CI 426-15.000.
Montefiore Hospital and Medical Center, Inc : See—
Lalezari. Parviz, 4,436,825, CI. 436-520.000.
Moodie, Eldon E.; and Bums, Richard D., to General Electric Com-
pany. Methods for making connection insulators. 4,436,585, CI.
156-73.100.
Moody, Jerry W : See-
Frederick, Roger A.; and Moody, Jerry W., 4,436.577, CI. 156-
6I7.0SP
Moore, Carroll E See—
Lenertz, John B.; and Moore, Carroll E.. 4,436,477. CI.
414-723000
Moore, Wiley I ; and Tassoni. Ronald L , to Cocal, Inc Froth flotation
ore beneficiation process utilizing enhanced gasification and flow
techniques 4,436.617. CI 209-3.000.
Morais, Don; and Owen, Daniel V., to General Electric Company
Starting and operating circuit for gaseous discharge lamps. 4,437,042,
CI. 315-289.000
Morgan Adhesives Company: See-
Miller, James A., 4,436,377, CI. 350-345.000.
Morgan Industries, Inc.: See—
Smith, Glen H.. 4.436.278, CI. 251-130.000.
Morgan, Ira L.; Sudarshan, E. C. George; Mitchell, Alvin L.; Coose,
James P.; Ellinger, Hunter D.; and Jagger. James W , to Scientiflc
Measurement Systems, Inc. Method and apparatus for measunng
radiation in computer-assisted tomography and radiographic applica-
tions. 4,437,006, CI. 250-363 OOS
Morganson, Neal E.; and Vayda, Adam V., to Gulf Research & Devel-
opment Company Olefin oligomerization using boron trifluoride and
a three-component cocatalyst. 4,436,947, CI. 585-525.000
Mori, Chuzo, to Carl Manufacturing Co., Ltd Perforating jig.
4,435,906, CI. 33-185.00R.
Mori, Kaoru: See—
Isowa, Yoshikazu; Ohmori, Muncki; Mori, Kaoru; Ichikawa, Tet-
suya; Nonaka, Yuji; Kihara, Keiichi; Oyama, Kiyotaka; Satoh,
Heijiro; and Nishimura. Shigeaki, 4,436,925, CI. 560-19000
Mori, Kei. Sunbeam concentrating and collecting apparatus 4,436,083,
CI. 126-417.000.
Mori, Takashi, to Sumitomo Heavy Industries, Ltd Proceu for making
steel from direct-reduced iron 4,436,551, CI. 75-12000
Moriguchi, Haruhiko: See —
Inui, Toshiharu; and Monguchi, Haruhiko, 4,437,102, CI. 346-
76.0PH
Morino, Yukio, to Seiko Koki Kabushiki Kaisha. Distance detector
device. 4,436,418, CI. 356-1.000
Morisono, Akira, lo Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Vehicular
power unit supponing device. 4,436,174, CI. 1 80-227.000.
Moriey, James P.: See-
Hatch, Seymour A.; and Moriey, James P.. 4,436,315, CI
277-92.000.
Morooka, Yasuo: See —
Kurihara, Nobuo; Morooka, Yasuo; Nishikawa, Mitsuyo; Miura,
Kiyoshi; and Nagahashi, Yoshitoshi, 4.437,163, CI 364-308.000.
Morris, Charles K. Carton blank with integral handle 4,436,244, CI
229-52.00B.
Morris, Donald E.: See—
Christopher, Chris J.; Wenninger, Fred W.; Morris, Donald E ;
Covington, Wayne F.; Folsom, Jerry B.; Beyers. Joaeph W.;
Nairn, John H.; and Osborne, Jeffrey C, 4,437,156. CI
364-200.000.
Morse, Milton, to APM Corporation Scaling means for telephone
cover device 4,436,965, CI. 179.184.000.
Moschiiz, Gerhard; and Schoonhoven, Richard, to Siemens Aktien-
gesellschaft. Method and circuit arrangement for the accepunce and
temporary storage of data signals in a switching system. 4,437,170, CI
364-900.000.
Moscr, Roland: See—
Zondler, Helmut; LoHm, Friedrich; and Moier, Roland, 4,436,892,
CI. 528-117.000.
Mom, Herbert H.: See-
Gentry, Larry L.; Mom, Herbert H.; Panicker, Narayana N.; and
Wada, William T.. 4,436,048, CI. 114-230 000
Mom, Rodney H ; and Faktor, Marc M., to British Telecommunica-
tions. Metal organic vapor deposition procedure for prepanng group
III— V compounds on a healed substrate. 4,436,769, CI. 427-232.000.
PI 28
LIST OF PATENTEES
Moiobayashi, Kozo: See—
^iiU^^^r- ^<°«°baya5hi. Kozo; Yoshizawa. Toshio; Yoshida
iLf . L *S l'"'.^"'^ °"°"*' "^^'J'- •♦.435,954. CI. 57-408.000
Motoki Yoshiaki. to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Timing de
vice for time switch. 4.436.969, d. 200-38 OOR ^
Motor Wheel Corporation: See—
Sirader, Don S.. 4.436.139. CI. 164-1 12.000
Motta, Carlo: See—
MD^ T°"^"'; '-"^'°' ^"*^ ^°"''- C»'"'o- 4.436.182. CI. 186-37.000
MPD Technology Corporation: See—
Tunllon. Pierre P . 4,436.537. CI. 55-387.000
cltL?rnT '"''^ °'^"'"'' T""- '° ^^ Pf'i'iP* Corporation.
nS„ ^°"lP";'"«.a "pping device and/or a cleaning device for a
pnnting head of an ink jet printer. 4.437,105. CI. 346-140 OOR
Mrozinski, James S.: See—
''''2'l5-3«^axr ' "''■ ""'* '^'■°^'"'*''' ■''""« S.. 4.436.213. CI.
Muench. Volker: See—
Brandstetter Franz. Muench. Volker; Naarmann. Herbert; and
Priebe. Edmund. 4.436.854. CI. 524-139.000
Muller-Albrecht. Horsi: See—
^M*'^f'/^''I"o"''*"^''- Muller-Albrecht. Horst; Dollhausen
Muller Fdix s4- ^"^^' "'"■'"^""' '♦•■♦36.570. CI. 156-273.300.
'^"kI'%; i56£''"cT4l5-"62"^o£'"^ "*"""• ""'''• '"' ""''''• ««'^
"^li'ptJ^^D'- •^"opfel. Hans-Peter; Muller. Felix; and Kretz. Rolf H..
to PEC Process Engineering Company Method for the recovery of
enzymes after the treatment of starch-containing raw materials used
Alt .yi^ P'"^"'^""" °^ fermentation alcohol. 4.436,814. CI
Muller, Manfred: See—
'"'iSSoOOo""^'**' ^"'^ '^"""' ^'''^'^' ^.'♦36.697. CI.
'^sv«/mV!^r''.'""" y- •" ''^^'"'■C^^'"" Company. Fiber waste disposal
system for traveling pneumatic cleaners 4.435.876. CI 15-312 OOR
Multiform Desiccants. Inc.: See— -'i* wI^
Cullen. John S.; Incorvia, Samuel A.; and Voet James A
4,436.623. CI 210-282.000. * '^ '
Muma. G Arnold: See—
MnrS'^M^^'l^ • ""'^ ^r"""' ^ '^'"°''*' '♦•*37.0I0. CI. 250-459.100.
Muraishi. Masakazu. to Nissan Motor Company. Limited. Support
mechanism of swivel seat structure. 4.436.270. CI 248-416 000
Murakami. Hitomi: See—
Matsumoto. Shuichi; Hatori. Yoshinori; Murakami. Hitomi and
Yamamoto, Hideo. 4,437.1 19. CI. 358-136 000
Murakami, Ryohei: See
° vl^; \°''!l°;i!",'<"l'''J°?''*^'''- Murakami. Ryohei; and Scgawa.
Yoshiaki. 4.436.352. CI. 312-228.000
Murakami. Shohachi: See—
"°^!i!;/^'"*!^"■ X?'*''''t Cf'O"''"; Kiba. Yasuo; Takeno. Ryuko
Nakano. Joji; Nitta. Jun; Kishimoto, Sumiko; Murakami. Shoha^
544-238 000' """^"- ^"'^ Saikawa. Isamu. 4,436.921. CI.
Murakawa. Katsuji: See—
"c1.'7?-6O6 00r'^'^^' ^"''''"' ""'^ Murakawa. Katsuji. 4.435.994.
Muramatsu. Motoyasu: See—
'"4t36,0r2" Q.^ lf3"88.S'"'" ^"' '^""'"^•^"- ^°'°y-"-
Murasaki. Hiroshi; Ogawa. Masaya; Enoguchi. Yuji; and Masui. Mikio
to Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha. Paper feeder for recordinj;
apparatus. 4.436.406. CI. 355-3.0SH. recoraing
Murase. Hiroyuki: See—
Nakakobara. Takeshi; Sakaguchi. Kiyoshi; Ueda. Fumio; and Mu-
rase. Hiroyuki. 4.436.062, CI. 123-90.270
Murphy, Milford R. and Haskins, Delbert E., to Textron Inc. Multiple
loop control system 4.436.018. CI 91-363 OOA ■"""'P'c
^rn^L ^°^" '^ • '"Conger/Murray Systems. Inc. Apparatus for
curing concrete products. 4.436,498. CI. 425-73 000
Muszynski. Jerome D.. to Litton Industrial Products. Inc. Stretch ratio
4°;3r883"c'j."2'6-5r00?""""^ ^""°" "^'^ ^'^"^^'"^ '•p'—
moto;'t4'i7'5?i. Cr '?it8ofo(^''"'"'" '°' '^°"'^°"'"^ '"'^-"-
"^nrr.^"^" ^ • '""^ ^^'°^- °^"'^' ^ • '° ''''""P* Petroleum Company
Olefin conversion process. 4.436.949. CI. 585-664 000
Myhrvold. Eriing: See—
Jacobsen. Kjell O ; Matre. Tore; Halvorsen. Rolf I ; Heie. Ingar H
i02-374°ajb """^ ^'^"' ^^^ •*■• '♦•'♦3*-034. CI.'
Naarmann, Herbert: See—
Brandstetter Franz; Muench. Volker; Naarmann. Herbert and
Pnebe. Edmund. 4.436.854. CI. 524-139.000
Hinselmann Klaus; Naarmann, Herbert; Echte. Adolf Heil Ed-
4"it8m' ci.ISi^^"'- '^"'^' ^^ »"^ """^-'«- ^""«--
'^ r™!:^1I^7"1-' ^- o"l^?f • '^"^'■•"^ " • '° Shell Internationale
Research Maatschappij B. V. Process for the recovery of pentavalent
^^I'^'^JJl^'^O'^POunds from acid catalyst extracts. 4.436,706. CI
Nadella: See—
Mallet. Bernard. 4.436.515. CI. 464-114.000.
March 13, 1984
Nagahashi. Yoshitoshi: See—
Kurihara Nobuo, Morooka, Yasuo; Nishikawa. Mitsuyo Miura
Kiyoshi; and Nagahashi. Yoshitoshi. 4.437. 1 63 CI 364:508 OOO
Nagano Keiki Seisakusho. Ltd.: S«— .'°-'. »-i Jo^auB.iAW.
Yamaizumi. Kazuo. 4.436.494. CI. 417-403 000
Nagaoka. Akinobu: See—
Nagase. Hiroshi: See—
Nagashima. Susumu: See—
Niwa. Toshio; and Nagashima. Susumu. 4.436.522. CI 8-524 000
Nagati, Rashed N.. to Pennsylvania Engineering Cor^rat.on Mml-
Christopher. Chris J ; Wenninger, Fred W.; Morris. Donald E
Covington Wayne F.; Folsom. Jerry B.; Beyers JoMoh W •
3M.T6o.S5." "' '"^ "^"^""'^ ''''''' C.' 4:437,T5'J CI.'
Naito. Sachio: See—
Matsunaga. Kinjiro; Okumura. Takeo; Naito. Sachio and Tsu-
shima. Rikio. 4.436.722. CI. 424-70.000
Naito. Yoshiyuki: See—
Nakajima, Akira: See—
Naka^jfrnlTumiL^I^.-"' '^"''^*'"'- """"• ''''''•'*''' C' 3"-6I.OOO.
^ Mm^.*!!!' ^lw'°- °''^'*^' ""^•=°- 'r°''"«- "*^°si; Okabe. Sigeru
Matsuda. Shinpei; Tonami. Munehiko; Tamura. Kohki and
Nakajima. Fumito. 4.436.794. CI 429-40 000
Nakakobara. Takeshi; Sakaguchi. Kiyoshi; Ueda. Fumio and Murase
Hiroyuki. to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Rocker arm
NaTImich'i! KlzuTa't.-"" '^ "«'"^ ''*''''''• ^' '""'^270.
Sasaki. Takuma; Nakamichi. Kazuya; Tachibana. Yakudo and
Minami. Kiyoshi, 4,436,656. CI. 260-1 12 OOR
Sasaki. Takuma; Nakamichi. Kazuya; Tachibana. Yakudo and
Minami, Kiyoshi. 4.436.657. CI. 260-1 12.00R
Nakamura. Hideo: See—
Sakuraya. Toshikazu; Nakamura. Hideo; Harada. Nobuo Fuiii
Tetsuya; and Emi. Toshihiko. 4.436.287. CI. 266-47 000
Nakamura. Hiromichi; Urano. Haruya; Kojima. Tatsuo; and Sekiwa
Mitsunao to Matsushrta Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd.; and MiTsub^hi
8^ 13 OO) °" *"""'"« '"'^ "^''^ 4,436,006. Cl!
Nakamura. Keijiroh: See—
Endoh Koichi; Tsujj. Nobuhiko; Nakamura. Keijiroh; Hamada.
Toshiyoshi;andIshida. Keiichi. 4.436.812. Cl. 435-14 000
Nakamura. Norihiko; and Shibata. Yoshiaki. to Toyota Jidosha Kabu-
M36.S a. ife'lM^'^" °' ^" "'"""' '=°""'"«'°" -«*-•
Nakamura, Norimi: See—
°%Tm 5:^3^^?^^^ ^"""^ ""'^ ""^himoto. Osami.
Nakanishi. Motoyasu. to Kabushiki Kaisha Cubic Engineering. Printing
apparatus, 4.436.571. Cl. 156-384.000. * rrmiing
Nakano. Joji: See —
Hori. Takako; Yoshida. Chosaku; Kiba. Yasuo; Takeno. Ryuko
Nakano. Joji; Nitta. Jun; Kishimoto. Sumiko; Murakami, Shoha^
5^-238 000' "'*"«"• ""^ Saikawa. Isamu. 4.436.921, Cl.
Nakano, Tetsuya: See—
''M36,IotcT436.l"2."cS: ""'"'""^ ""' ^'"'^"°* '''''''''''
Nakano. Yoshitomo: See—
^'^^T^}^^- ■^al'^hi; and Nakano, Yoshitomo, 4.436.959, CI.
Nakashima. Tuneyasu: See—
^T4fb:S7tci72lA37m) ^^''''^'^°- ""^ Nakashima. Tuneyasu,
Nakasuji. Katsuyoshi: See—
^4*2^447 0(»^°' ^""^ Nakasuji. Katsuyoshi. 4.436.787, Cl.
^wtult "u'°'t''^- 1*,'""°' ■^°**''''''; Yamazoe. Hisamitsu; and
Ko»vnif'K"'v.^'v'° Nippondenso Co., Ltd.; and Toyota Jidosha
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Method and apparatus for controlling the
123-492ffi'°" '" '"""""'' *'°'"''""'°" «"8'ne. 4,436.074. Cl.
Nakatsuyama. Takashi; and Nakano. Yoshitomo, to Sony Corporation
Automatic telephone answering device. 4.436.959. Cl 179-6 090
SLk t""v ''''i.*"''o'^"°'"'' Katsumasa. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Power absorbing device for low-temperature
refrigerating machine. 4.437.016. Cl. 290-I.OOR pcra.ure
Nakayama. Shunsuke: See—
Yamabe. Masaaki; Higaki, Hiromichi; Shinohara. Toshio; Tanabe.
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama. Shunsuke, 4,436,772, Cl. 427-379 000
Yamabe, Masaaki; Higaki, Hiromichi; Shinohara. Toshio; Tanabe.
M,i,o ""°y"'": ^"^ Nakayama. Shunsuke, 4.436.773. Cl. 427-380.000.
Nakayama. Yasuharu: See— <~wu.
Aihara. Tetsuo; Nakayama. Yasuharu; Umeyama. Koichi; Sawada.
VI . "^ozo; and Shinohara. Masaaki. 4.436.849. Cl. 523-501 000
i''^'*'i' Sh'geo; and Sato. Shintaro. to Nissan Mot6r Co.; Ltd
72^327000 '"°**"'^'"8 ri"8-shaped meul parts. 4,435.973. Cl'
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 29
Nakazima. Atushi; Edamatsu. Mitisuke; and Kushi. Kenji. to Mitsubishi
Rayon Company. Ltd. Method and apparatus for surface-hardening
treatment of synthetic resin shaped articles. 4,436,764, Cl. 427-54 100
Nalkin, Irving: See —
Branchick, Kenneth J.; Nalkin, Irving; and Suchanski, Mary R..
4.436.601. Cl. 204-149.000.
Namazue. Hiroloshi: See —
Kamiyama. Mituo; and Namazue. Hirotoshi. 4.437.153, Cl.
364-140.000.
Namura. Hideki: See—
Inoue. Mono; Hoshino, Saloshi; Namura. Hideki: and Watari,
Takashi. 4.436.482. Cl. 416-1.000.
Narato. Kiyoshi; Ohtsuka, Keizou; Inada. Tooru; and Watanabc. Taka-
shi, to Hitachi. Ltd. Monitoring system for checking electric rotary
machine for local overheating. 4,436.699. Cl. 422-68.000.
Nason, Frederic L.; and Crane. Walton B.. to Medical Packaging
Corporation. Storage file for slides and tissue blocks. 4.436.243, Cf
229-27.000.
National Gypsum Company: See —
Krowl. Thomas R.. 4.435.933. CI. 52-309.100.
Rutkowski. Edward J.. 4.435.936. CI. 52-481.000.
Rutkowski. Edward J.; and Krowl. Thomas R.. 4,435,938, Cl.
52-521.000.
Sowinski. Gerard T.. 4,436.204. Cl. 206-525.000.
National Research Development Corporation: See—
Glasser, Fredrik P.; and Gunawardane. Richard P.. 4.436.546. Cl.
71-36.000.
Wickramasinghe, Hemantha K., 4.435,985. Cl. 73-642.000.
Navon. Uri: See-
Ron. Moshe; Kleiner. Matvei: and Navon. Uri, 4,436,539. Cl.
62-4.000.
Naylor, Carter G.. to Texaco, Inc. Oil recovery method utilizing glyc-
eryl ether sulfonates. 4,436.672, Cl. 260-5 12.00R.
Negishi. Nobumasa: See—
Yamaguchi. Hiroshi; and Negishi. Nobumasa. 4.436,505, Cl.
431-76.000.
Negoro, Ikuo; and Iwanade, Hisao, to Asahi Kogaku Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Mirror scanning control mechanism in variable magnification
type copying machine. 4.436.416, Cl. 355-57.000.
Neki, Shigeo: See —
Shinozaki. Nozomu; Neki, Shigeo; and Dohi, Takashi, 4,437.061.
Cl. 324-166.000.
Nelson. Garih C; White. Henry J.; and Nelson. Gerald B., to Papakube
Corporation. Auger feed arrangement for cubing machine. 4,436,502,
Cl. 425-331.000.
Nelson, Gerald B.: See-
Nelson. Garth C; White. Henry J.; and Nelson. Gerald B..
4.436.502. Cl. 425-331.000.
Nelson & Johnson Engineering: See —
Ciciora. John A.. 4.436.030. Cl. 100-268.000.
Nelson, Stanford C: See-
Walters. Anthony J.; and Nelson, Stanford C. 4.436.604, Cl.
204-196.000.
Nemeth, Carol A.: See—
Brossman, James W., Jr.; Nemeth. Carol A.; and Shapiro. Alan K.,
4.436.474. Cl. 414-417.000.
Nemetz, Herbert. Method and apparatus for aerobic decomposition or
drying of organic waste material. 4,436,817, Cl. 435-313.000.
Nepon, Juanita. Arthritis composition of matter, and methods of prepar-
ing and utilizing same. 4,436,723. Cl. 424-95.000.
Nesler. Todd G. Goggle. 4.435,852. Cl. 2-436.000.
Neubert. Peter: See—
Schaumann. Wolfgang; Kaiser. Fritz; Voigtlander, Wolfgang;
Hoyer. Edgar; and Neubert. Peter. 4.436.735. Cl. 424-182.000.
Neuhaus. Karl-Friedrich; Muller-Albrecht. Horst; Dollhausen, Man-
fred; and Perrey, Hermann, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for
bonding films. 4.436.570. Cl. 156-273.300.
Newbanks. James A. Guy wire protector device. 4.435,931. Cl.
52-147.000.
Newcomer. John R.: See —
Barlow. Gordon A.; Newcomer. John R.; and Bezark. Fred,
4.436.309. Cl 273-267.000.
Newman. Richard L. Sound system for a musical instrument. 4.437.189.
Cl. 381-91.000.
Nichols, C. Ross; and Miller. Edward C. to Ball Corporation. Spin-
flanger for beverage containers. 4.435.969. Cl. 72-126.000.
Nicholson, Charles B., to Albany International Corporation. Method of
manufacturing a sanitary fan spray nozzle. 4,435,891, Cl. 29-157.00C.
Nicol. Klaus, to Nicol, Klaus. Force sensing means and method of
producing such sensing means. 4,437,138, Cl. 361-283.000.
Nielsen, Kurt F.: See-
Jensen, Niels D.; Komossa, Horst; and Nielsen. Kurt F., 4.436.486.
Cl. 417-45.000.
Niertit, Frank: See—
Brightman. Barrie; and Niertit. Frank, 4,437,096. Cl. 340-825.960.
NIFCO. Inc.: See—
Waunabe. Koji. 4.436.253, Cl. 242-74. 100.
Yuda. Takuo; and Notoya, Yoshiaki. 4,436,273, Cl. 248-549.000.
Nihei, Masayasu: See—
Kokura, Satoshi; Nihei, Masayasu; Wachi, Hiroshi; Mashida,
Hiromi; and Senda, Kousaku. 4,436.982, Cl. 219-130.510.
Nihon Ceramic Co., Ltd.: See—
Taniguchi, Yoshiharu; Edano, Shigeki; and Akiyama, Masanori,
4,437,002, Cl. 250-338.000.
Nikkiso Co., Ltd.: See—
Ishiyama, Masashi; and Ithibashi, Michinori. 4.436,491. Cl.
417-385.000.
Nikko Industry Co.. Ltd.: See—
Inai. Kunihiro. 4.437.186. CI. 373-9.000.
Nikles. Albert: See—
Hinselmann. Klaus; Naarmann, Herberi; Echte, Adolf; Heil, Ed-
uard; Nikles, Albert; RefTert, Rudi W.; and Hambrecht. Juergen,
4.436.870. Cl. 525-53.000.
Nilsen. Carl J., to SWS. Incorporated. Apparatus for continuous laser
welding. 4,436.979, Cl. 2I9-I21.0LC
Nilson. Warren C; and Rabe. Thomas L.. to Buckstaff Company. Inc..
The. Furniture joint assembly 4.436.342, Cl. 297-445.000.
Nilsson, Per. to AB Welin. Method and a device for pivoting an accom-
modation ladder. 4.436.180. Cl. 182-97.000.
Ninet. Jean-Louis; and Vaillant. Robert, to Ateliers et Chantiert de
Bretagne-ABC. Device for positioning an ofT-shore platform on its
support structure. 4.436,454. CI. 405-204 000.
Nippon Chuzo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kondo. Toshio. 4.436,138. Cl 164-5.000
Nippon Electric Co . Ltd.: See—
Akahori. Masaaki; Ohyagi. Takashi; and Nishimura, Shozo,
4.437.095. Cl. 340-825 440.
Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Takeuchi, Alsushi, 4.437.180. Cl. 369-217.000.
Nippon Kogaku K.K.: See—
Fukuhara. Toru, 4.436.395. CI 354-406 000.
Maida. Osamu. 4,436.396, Cl 354-416000
Tomino. Naoki; Ikeda. Osamu; Matsuzawa. Yoshio; and Inoue,
Hideya. 4.436.792. Cl. 429-1.000
Nippon Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Inoue, Morio; Hoshino, Satoshi; Namura, Hideki; and Watari,
Takashi, 4.436,482. Cl. 416-1.000.
Nippon Mining Co.. Ltd.: See—
Imamura. Tatsuo; and Katoh, Mitsuo, 4,436.600. Cl. 204-140.000.
Nippon Oil Company. Ltd.: See—
Maruhashi. Kenji; Kojima. Ichiro; Oguchi. Yutaka; Endoh.
Noboru; and Saloh. Tetsuo, 4,436,663, Cl. 260-245.910.
Nippon Oil and Fats Co., Ltd.: See—
Yamamura, Masaaki; Igarashi. Taizo; and Ukigai. Toshiyuki,
4.436.527, CI. 44-51.000
Nippon Shokubai Kagaku Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Kita, Yuichi; Sakamoto, Kentaro; and Sato, Takahisa, 4,436.922. Cl.
549-251.000.
Nippon Soken. Inc.: See—
Tomita. Masahiro; and Takagi, Shigeru. 4,436.538. Cl. 55-482.000.
Nippon Steel Corporation: See—
Takahashi. Nobuyuki; Furuno, Yoshikuni; and Fukunaga, Masaaki,
4.436.561. Cl. I48-I2.00F.
Tsuyama. Yoshito; Shimazaki. Yasumi; Kakita. Kazutoshi; and
Hirokawa. Toshio. 4,436,239, Cl 228-17.000
Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation: See—
Akahori, Masaaki; Ohyagi, Takashi; and Nishimura, Shozo,
4.437.095. Cl. 340-825.440.
Matsuda. Tadahito; Okumura, Masahide; Yokouchi, Hisatake;
Ozasa, Susumu; and Kato, Yasuo, 4,437,008, Cl. 2SO-39600R
Watabe, Akinori; Yonezawa. Susumu; and Tanaka, Yoshiharu,
4,437,177, Cl. 369-45 000
Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corp. of 1-6: See—
Yamashita. Masahide; Oku, Hikaru; and Maruyama. Masato.
4,437,168. Cl 364-900.000.
Nippondenso Co.. Ltd.: See—
Nakatsuka. Hirotaka; Mizuno. Toshiaki; Yamazoe, Hisamitsu; and
Matsuoka. Hiroki. 4.436.074, Cl. 123-492.000.
Nishi, Cenichiro: See —
Mochizuki, Taketoshi; Matsuo, Kazuya; Kudo, Mituo; Arai, Akira;
Yamada, Junichi; Shono, Keizi; Aoki. Masaaki; Ohmori. Masai-
chi; and Nishi. Genichiro. 4.435.962. Cl. 62-175 000
Nishida, Kenji: See—
Baba, Kiyokazu; and Nishida, Kenji, 4,436,199, Cl. 198-750.000.
Nishida. Mitsuhiro: See—
Yamamoto. Sakuei; and Nishida. Mitsuhiro, 4,437,027, Cl
310-78.000.
Nishida, Takashi: See —
Amano. Takehiro; Yoshikawa, Kensei; Sano, Tatsuhiko; Ohuchi,
Kutaka; Ishigura, Michihiro; Shiono. Manzo; Fujita. Yoshiji; and
Nishida. Takashi. 4.436.939. Cl. 568-813.000.
Saiki. Atsushi; Iwayanagi, Takao; Nonogaki. Saburo; Nishida,
Takashi; and Harada, Seiki, 4,436,583, Cl 156-659.100.
Nishida, Yoshiaki; Yano, Shunji; and Masuyama, Tadahiro, to Daiwa
Can Company, Limited. Method of treating the surface of a metal
container. 4,436,594, Cl 204-33.000
Nishihama, Hitoshi: See—
Yamagata, Ryutaro; Kozuka, Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi;
Koyama, Shigeo; and Sakai, Kazutada, 4,436.412, Cl. 355-15.000
Nishihara, Yoshiki; and Miyamoto, Kazumichi, to Victor Company of
Japan, Ltd. Method for fabncating an information signal recorded
medium of the electrosutic capacity type. 4,436,683, Cf 264-107.000
Nishikawa, Kazuo; Sato, Kiyoshi; Ichino, Hiroyuki; and Okura. Keniti,
to Pioneer Electronic Corporation. Phono pickup cartndge
4,437,179. Cl. 369-172.000.
Nishikawa, Masatoshi. Method of manufacturing scissors and scissors.
4.435.901. Cl. 30-254.000.
Nishikawa. Mitsuyo: See—
Kurihara. Nobuo; Morooka. Yasuo; Nishikawa, Mitsuyo; Miura,
Kiyoshi; and Nagahashi, Yoshitoshi, 4.437,163. Cl. 364-508.000
PI 30
LIST OF PATENTEES
^Co'' Ud Mt'.^*/"* Takahash.. H.rokun.. lo Kyusyu Refraci«,rieN
CI 264-30000 repainng the inside of a furnace. 4.436.678.
Nishimalsu, Shigeru: See—
Okudaira. Sadayuki; Saida. Hiroji; Sakai. Ymhio; Nishimalsu
Shigeru; and Suzuki. Keizo. 4.436.581. CI. 156-643 000
Nishimura, Shigeaki: See—
Isowa. Yoshikazu. Ohmon. Muncki; Mori, Kaoru; Ichikawa. Tei-
suya; Nonaka Yuji; Kihara. Keiichi; Oyama. Kiyotaka; Saioh
^M?7i)95''cr3''-;6-8??'4^'' ■""'"'"^ '""^ ^"''"'""-- S^--
^'S^k*! V.Sv'-J'*''!; ''T- .""'^ Sakamoto. Yoshiaki. to M.tsubish.
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Calcined member for arc-cxtinauishina
chambers. 4.436.831. CI 501-1 19000 "rw-cxiinguismng
^436.770 CI 127 255S ""'^ '" '""""''"'■••"""K '"•^•hod.
Niwian Motor Co.. Ltd.: See—
Hayashi. Yoshima.sa. 4,436,061. CI. 123-41.740
Ichikawa. Mamoru; and Satake. Sachio. 4.436,318. CI. 280-104 000
Kaio. Yoshiaki. 4.437,162. CI 364-442.000 *««*^ii«.uuu.
Kinoshita, Keijiro. 4.435.998. CI. 74-798 000
Mochida. Haruo. 4.437.137, CI 361-172 000
Muraishi, Masakazu, 4.436.270. CI. 248-416 000
Nakazawa. Shigeo; and Sato. Shintaro. 4.435.973. CI 72-327 000
Shimizu. Tctsuo. 4.436.336. CI. 296-76.000.
^ CM23'4l''l'S'' ^''''''"""' ^''"J'- ""'^ ^'"*'' Yukihiro. 4.436.060.
Yamaguchi^ Noboru; and Satoh. Seiichi. 4.435.881. CI. 24-16 OPB
Nis.sin Kogyo Co.. Ltd.. See— lo^rn.
Mizusaki. Yoshinobu. 4.437.091. CI. 340-623 000
Nitta. Jun: ice—
"Z''J'^')"- \^*'"^'i- Chosaku; Kiba. Yasuo; Takcno. Ryuko
Nakano. Joji; Nitta, Jun; Kishimoto. Sumiko; Murakami. Shoha-
'i^iJaW^ Hisatsugu; and Saikawa. Isamu. 4,436.921. CI
Nilz. Rolf-Ebcrhard: See—
Schonafinger. Karl; Beyerlc. Rudi; Bohn. Helmut; Just. Melitia
424S9'oob ^" ""'^ ^"'' '^""■•Ebe'-hard. 4.436.743. Ci!
'^m^T'^^-'.^n" n^"*""'!)'"''' ^"'"'""' '" Mitsubishi Chemical Indus-
tries Limited Disperse dye composition. 4.436.522. CI 8-524 000
U^ a""^^"- ""'^ "'^""• I""'""- '" Mitsubishi Chemical InduMries
Ltd. Anthraquinone dyes for cellulose-containing fibers and process
for producing the same 4.436,906, CI. 544-187 000
NL Industries, Inc.: See—
Carnicom. William M.. 4.436.636. CI 252-8 50P
'^Tlturooo'"''"' ^' ""'^ ^'"'^^^^- ^"''"" C • ■♦.'♦36.862, CI
'^"ri;7i'!''t''''K "T%^T"' i"*^ °''*'"*' Yoshiharu. to Tokyo Shibaura
S^.hiif'* ""'"'"r'^""'^'* Radiation excited phosphor screen and
method for manufacturing the same. 4.437.01 1, CI. 250-486 100
nioien, Koljert L., Jr.: See
^A3'^•,7?5,cr'42?.""9'bS""«'^ ^' ^"' ^"'"- •*"*"" L.- Jr.,
^fj,t ^Pr*^"*"'- '^cf'"' ■''"■■'^"^'- ^'"^ ''^^^*^«' Marc, to Societe d'Op-
iquc. Precision Electroniquc et Mechanique, Sopelem Hoisting and
Nom^^rkshri"-'" " '""""*"' -"«■>• ^•♦36,05l, CI. 1 14 3^0%
''';i36S"i'l2a"^.'"''^ """""• •'^"^ "'^ •^"•"- •^-h*--
I:r36:-975,'c;ii9-^9^^'x;;'' ''^^■'"^- '""""«' "--"'"'"^ -«*^«i
Nonaka. Yuji: See—
Isowa. Yoshikazu; Ohmori, Muncki; Mori. Kaoru; Ichikawa, Tel-
s^ya; Nonaka. Yuji; Kihara. Keiichi; Oyama. kiyotaka Satoh
Nn„„,^™^""' Ji"* Nishimura Shigeaki. 4.436,925. CI 560-19.000 '
Nonnenmann, Manfred; and Deuschle, Steffi, to Suddeutsche Kuhler-
^^XZ^' Behr GmbH & Co KG. Pneumatic com?ol sy^I^m,
especially for vehicle heating systems. 4,436.245. CI. 236-49 000
Nonogaki. Saburo: See—
Saiki Atsushi. Iwayanagi, Takao; Nonogaki. Saburo Nishida
Takashi; and Harada, Seiki. 4.436.583. cf 156-659 1(»
Nordson Corporation: See—
Jones. Stephen H.. 4.437. 1 52. CI. 364- 1 38.000
Nordstrom. Eric W ; and Manoski. Uurence A., to Union Special
Corporation. Thread wiping device. 4.436.044. CI. 112-286 00)
Norland Corporation: See— ^oo.uw.
Belt, Kenneth W.. 4.436.093. CI. 128-419 OPG
4T3'5"9U.'ci.''4U2 iST""'" '^"""'■"-••"""8 <=« • '"= Fish lure.
Norman Manufacturing Co.. Inc.: See-
Norman. Bill K.. 4,435,914, CI. 43-42.120
wTrR* ^'' ^' ^'''""'"* ^'*' ^°^ ly-rishing. 4,436,254, CI. 242-
'"'T^i^?""/"*! *^""?' '*°**^ M., to Rohr Industries, Inc. Method
North Amencan Philips Electric Corp.- See—
Larson, Daniel A.. 4,437,039. CI. 315-60.000.
NoMka, Isao: See—
^3T^3'0OR "**""' '*'*'' ''"'"'°' '"** Nosaka. Itao. 4.436.402. CI.
March 13, 1984
Nose. Noriyuki: See—
Noth'l?s'**Palf^ickT*'A>e- '^"'*' ^"">'"'''' ♦•♦36.398. CI. 354-476.000.
Notoya. Yoshiaki: See—
Novorotky^ft^"'^:^^"- ''"'*""' ''*''•'''■ ^' '''■'^'^^
"ToOA '*"*^'' ^ ■ ""'' '*^"^"'^"''*''>'' •*»"' G . 4.436.958. CI. 179-
NSK-Warner K.K : See—
Yamamoto, Kazuo. 4.436,323. CI. 280-804 000
O. Ames Co.: See—
OaklS^i^Ss^'lnc" S^e- '"• ''"""*' «* ' *''''''''• C' ^♦S-'S.OOO.
Obata,tc:;hSu*^Se^-*''^*"'- ^' ''^'''"^
^TsJaM^ ""''""■ ^"""- ""'^ ^'^^' '^""'''haru. 4.437,011. CI.
Obenaus, Franz: See—
OblSllSrL-' °'""""" ''""''• *'*^'-'°'- ^' ^♦^■'♦OOOR
3"72!3ro:oOO*'*''*""''' '"'^ °''''8"'^"' ^'^""' ♦.♦36.694, CI.
Obray. Dean C See—
O-BrSl'sil^nM^ '.'"q °^'"^' ^"" ^ • ♦•♦36.176. CI. 180-287.000
""«"■ Steven M to Sperry Corporation High speed byte shifter for
a bi-directional data bus. 4.437.166. CI 364-WOOOO
Occidental Chemical Corporation: See—
'*"i570-'l45^K" °' ""*^ '*"'^'''- ^"^P''"' ♦•♦36.942, CI.
Occidental Research Corporation: See—
^«r39?O0o'''"" "^ • '"'' °'""' '^"■"" ^' ♦.♦36.899. CI.
Oda. Suehiro: See-
Sakamoto. Noboru; Yamashita. Itaru; Wada, Satoshi; Yano. Keni-
chi; and Oda. Suehiro. 4.436.981. CI. 219-124.320
Udaka. Kentaro: See—
Sako. Yoichiro; and Odaka, Kentaro, 4.437.185. CI. 371-39 000
Ogata. Masahiro; and Sakai. Osamu. to Hitachi. Ltd.; and Hitachi
d1':.:^r4';"7:i35^C«l'"3rS?.'oii' ^— ^-- --^-'ed cS
Ogawa. Masaya: See—
'^MS43lSS^.?rei3^|S^''^ ^-«-'"- Y"^'^ -'^ Masui.
Oguchi, Yutaka: See—
^n!^!!^''^'' •^"J'-^'^fyi'na- 'chiro; Oguchi. Yutaka; Endoh.
o-u r^"'^'^": »"«' Satoh, Tetsuo, 4.436,663. CI. 260-245.910
S^?S^'„ I" ^ • '"'* ^''"'^:' °"'"""' •" ^«^<-'">'" Group Limited
424-283 a» """"*'" antibacterial compounds 4.436.751. CI.
^Hi.Sri'.HT"*"*"; '^/"'"°- "^f"!' "'•"^°- ""'l Tsukioka. Hideo, to
Hitachi Ltd. Fire-retardani insulating oils. 4,436.654. CI. 252-574 000
Ohkawa, Takehisa. and Yoda, Kuniichi. to TDK Electronics Co. Ud
Magnetic recording medium. 4.436.786. CI 428-447 000
Ohmori. Ma.saichi: See— '
Mochizuki, Taketoshi; Matsuo, Kazuya; Kudo. Mituo; Arai. Akira:
Yamada. Junichi; Shono. Ke.zi; Aoki. Masaaki; Ohmori. Mas.^
chi; and Nishi. Genichiro. 4.435,962, CI. 62-175 000
Ohmori, Muncki: See—
Isowa, Yoshikazu; Ohmori. Muncki; Mori, Kaoru Ichikawa Tei-
EroTd'^i X"^'^ "'".r- \^"'=»"^ oVama.'Kiyo.akrSa7oh.
r»K u L^ °' '"i^ Nishimura. Shigeaki. 4.436.925. CI. 560-19.000
Ohnishi. Haruo; Kosuzume. Hiroshi; Suzuki. Yasuo; and Mochida. Ei
o Mochida Pharmaceutical Co.. Ltd. Method of producing y-globu-
4.43?724cY«4! 101*000 " """^ """'P*"'*^ ««"« produced ihlreby.
Ohta. Ma&afumi; and Sakai. Kiyoshi. to Ricoh Co.. Ltd. Multilayer
electrophotographic element containing a trisazo charge carrier
f.ar;en':f36Sc^r:3"i59.S^'."'°"' ""'"'^ «=""" •"-^" -"■
Ohtsuka. Keizou: See—
N!I"'o. Kiyrahi; Ohtsuka. Keizou; Inada. Tocru; and Watanabe.
Takashi. 4.436.699, CI. 422-68.000. ««»■■■«:.
Ohtsuka, Shuichi; and Aotsuka, Yasuo. to Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd
43a!o0000 '^* °*°*"''''^ developing method. 4.436.802. d.
Ohuchi. Kutaka: See—
^kT.I '^fu''*'"' 't?*'!!'l"*''c!^"***' S-no. Tatsuhiko; Ohuchi,
Kutaka; Ishigura, Michihiro; Shiono. Manzo; Fujita. Yoshiji and
Nishida. Takashi. 4.436.939. CI. 568-813.000 ™niji. ana
Ohyagi. Takashi: See—
^M3°{^5''r3'i-8?5%' """"'"^ ""^ ^»'''"»'"- S""-'
°OkI!i- lll','l''°' •^"•°- "*^«hi; Yaguchi. Sadao; Saba. Mikito; and
°c:'i4?7°[£"^i ?6f!S2"S3o^'"'"^ "^ ^''' """•«* '^'-"*' '''■
Okabayashi, Milcheo: See—
Jardin Stephen C. Yamada, Masaaki; Furth. Harold P.; and
Okabayashi. Mitcheo. 4.436.691. CI. 376-137.000.
Okabe. Sigeru: See—
Takeuchi. Masato; Okada. Hideo; Tobiia, Hiroti; Oktbe, Sigeru-
Matsuda. Shinpei; Tonami. Munehiko; Tamura, Kohki: and
Nakajima. Fumito, 4.436,794. CI. 429-40.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 31
Okada, Hideo: See—
Takeuchi, Masato; Okada. Hideo; Tobita. Hirosi; Okabe, Sigeru
Matsuda, Shinpei; Tonami, Munehiko; Tamura, Kohki and
Nakajima, Fumito. 4.436.794. CI. 429-40.000
Okada, Morikazu: See—
Ohyama, Sadahiro; Kato, Hiroshi; Yaguchi, Sadao; Baba, Mikito
and Okada, Morikazu, 4,437,140, CI. 361-402.000
Okada. Yoshio; Suzuki. Yoshiaki; Murakami. Ryohei; and Segawa.
Yoshiaki. to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Kitchen furnish-
ings. 4,436,352, CI. 312-228.000
Okamoto, Ichiro; and Toga, Yuzo, to Daicel Chemical Industries. Ltd
Polyester copolymer. 4.436.896. CI. 156-332 000
Oku. Hikaru: See—
Yamashita. Masahide; Oku. Hikaru; and Maruyama, Masato
4,437,168. CI 364-900.000.
Okuda, Kanemasa: See-
Nomura, Yoshiyuki; Okuda, Kanemasa; and Ishii, Hisao. 4.436.975
CI. 219-69.00W.
Okudaira. Sadayuki; Saida, Hiroji; Sakai, Yoshio; Nishimatsu. Shigeru
and Suzuki, Keizo. to Hitachi. Ltd. Uniform etching of silicon (doped
and undoped) utilizing ions. 4.436.581. CI. 156-643.000.
Okumura Corporation: See—
Masuda. Masakazu; and Matsumoto, Hironori. 4,436.167 CI
175-72.000.
Okumura. Fumio; Higuchi. Masahiro; Kamci. Shun; and Miyauchi
Masahiro. to Mitsubishi Paper Mills. Ltd. Thermosensitivc recording
material. 4.436,783, CI. 428-41 1.000.
Okumura, Masahide: See—
Matsuda. Tadahito; Okumura, Masahide; Yokouchi, Hisatakc
Ozasa, Susumu; and Kato, Yasuo, 4,437,008, CI. 250-396 OOR
Okumura, Takeo: See—
Matsunaga, Kinjiro; Okumura. Takeo; Naito. Sachio; and Tsu-
shima. Rikio. 4.436.722. CI. 424-70.000.
Okura. Keniti: See—
Nishikawa. Kazuo; Sato. Kiyoshi; Ichino. Hiroyuki; and Okura
Keniti. 4.437.179, CI. 369-172 000.
Okuyama, Shigeaki; Nakamura. Norimi; and Hashimoto. Osami. to
Kubota. Ltd. Machine body inclination detector device. 4.435 907
CI. 33-366.000.
Olbrich. Hazel C; ORear. Dennis J.; and Zakarian. John A., to Chev-
ron Research Company. Process for dewaxing and desulfurizine oils
4.436.614. CI. 208-89.000.
Olderaan. Wilhelmus F. T. C. to Wavin B.V. Apparatus for installins
a sealing ring. 4.435.888. CI. 29-235.000.
Olmsted. Gaylord S.; and Rosno. Gordon W., to Westinghouse Electric
Corp. Variable energy missile eject system. 4.436.016, CI. 89-1.809
Olschewski, Armin; Brandenstein. Manfred; and Kunkel. Heinrich. to
SKF Kugellagerfabriken GmbH. Cylindrical roller bearing support
for trunnions in fork eyes of universal joints. 4.436.516. CI
464-128.000.
Olschewski, Armin: See-
Ernst. Horst M.; Brandenstein, Manfred; Walter. Lothar and
Olschewski. Armin. 4.435,890. CI. 29-I48.40R
Olsen, John H.: See-
Mercer. John E.; Olsen. John H.; and Elkins. Stephen. 4.435.902.
CI. 30-296.00R.
Olson. Donald C. to Shell Oil Company. Method of removing hydro-
gen sulfide from gases utilizing a polyvalent metal chelate solution
and regenerating the solution in a fuel cell. 4.436.71 1. CI 423-
573.00G.
Olson. Donald C. to Shell Oil Company. Method of removing hydro-
gen sulfide from gases utilizing a polyvalent meUl chelate of nitrilo-
triacetic acid and electrolytically regenerating the solution. 4,436,712.
CI. 423-573.00G.
Olson. Donald C, to Shell Oil Company. Method of removing hydro-
gen sulfide from gases utilizing a polyvalent metal chelate of nitrilo-
triacetic acid and regenerating the solution in a fuel cell. 4,436.713.
CI. 423-573.00G.
Olson. Donald C, to Shell Oil Company. Method of removing hydro-
gen sulfide from gases utilizing a polyvalent metal chelate of nitrilo-
triacetic acid and electrolyticafiy regenerating the solution. 4.436.714.
CI. 423-573.0OG.
Olson. George E.. to A. O. Smith Harvestore Products. Inc. Drive
mechanism for a rotatable sweep arm. 4.436.473. CI. 414-310.000
Olympus Optical Co.. Ltd.: See—
Ikari. Kazuo; and Fujii. Toru. 4.436.382. CI. 350-458.000.
Maeda, Haruo. 4.436.383. CI. 350-469.000.
Osanai. Akira. 4.436.257. CI. 242-201.000.
Saitou, Sinichi. 4.436.256. CI. 242-200.000.
Taira. Akio. 4.436,384, CI. 350-515.000.
Tamagawa. Akira. 4,436.827. CI. 436-534.000.
Omae. Takashi; Tanaka. Kisaburoo; Aoki. Masahiro; Hirayama.
Fumitoshi; and Izaki. Susumu. to Mitsubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. High strength and high toughness welding material.
4.436.554. CI. 75-I28.00T.
Omron Tateisi Electronics Co.: See—
Bando. Yoshihide; Tanaka. Toshiki; Honda. Sueaki; Takahashi.
Yoshihiko; Tsuruyoshi. Kenichi; Kawashima, Katsumi; and
Kishimoto. Syuichi. 4.437.078. CI. 335-81.000.
O'Neill. Terenpe C. to Internationale Octrooi Maatschappij "Octropa"
B.V. Miter block. 4.436.014. CI. 83-762 000.
O'Neill. William J., to Argon Medical Corp. Removable hemostasis
vtlve. 4.436.519. CI. 604-175.000.
Ong. Helen H.; and Profitt. James A., to Hoechst-Roussel Pharmaceuti-
cals Inc. Benzolbjthiophenes. 4.436.748. CI. 424-275.000.
Onoda Chemical Industry Co.. Ltd.: See—
Miyazaki, Naomi; and Fujimura, Akira, 4,436.710, CI 423-552 000
Onodcra. Osamu, to Hitachi. Ltd OverHow detection for a decimal
arithmetic unit. 4,437.165. CI. 364-749 000.
Onoue, Keiji: See—
Seiki, Kazuo; Moiobayashi. Kozo; Yoshizawa. Toshio; Yoshida
Yoshiaki; and Onoue. Keiji, 4,435.954, CI 57-408 000
Ophofr Paul-Anhur; and Weinel, Johann. to Siemens Akiicngesell-
^«,., ^"'*'*P*"'^^ infrared gas analyzer. 4.437.005. CI
250-343.000.
Opitz, Dieter: See—
Burkle. Wolfgang; and Opitz. Dieter. 4,436,252. CI 242-72 OOB
Oppenlaender. Knut; Stork. Karl; and Barthold, Klaus, to BASF Ak-
tiengesellschaft. Ammonium salts of polymaleic acids and use as
corrosion inhibitors in water-in-oil emulsions 4,436.639. CI. 252-
8.55E.
Optimax III, Inc.: See—
Bukowski, Williaiti A., 4.436.369, CI. 350-130.000
O'Rear, Dennis J.: See—
°'I?'^'^^.w"J?,' 9 ORear. Dennis J.; and Zakarian, John A .
4,436,614. CI. 208-89,000.
Orsinger. Winston A. to Bell & Howell Company. Sheet feeding
device 4,436,299, CI. 271-100.000.
Onho Diagnostic Systems. Inc.: See—
Bishop, David C, 4.436.824. CI. 436-514 000
Graham. Henry A.. Jr.; Hawk. Johnna B.; and Chachowski, Rose-
mary K.. 4.436.631. CI. 210-772.000.
Orum. Paul R,: See-
Bonds. James V,; and Orum. Paul R.. 4.436.279. CI 251-86 000
Osaka. Susumu; and Toda. Minoru. to RCA Corporation Shutter
construction. 4.435.920. CI. 49-82.000.
Osako. Kyoichi: See—
Kokubo. Eiichi; and Osako. Kyoichi. 4.436.102. CI 133-2 000
Osanai. Akira. to Olympus Optical Co.. Ltd. Reel driving method for
tape recorder and a driving mechanism for its practice 4.436 257 CI
242-201.000. . . ,wi.
Osborne. Jeffrey C: See-
Christopher, Chris J.; Wenninger, Fred W,; Morris, Donald E •
Covington, Wayne F.; Folsom, Jerry B.; Beyers, Joseph W-
Nairn, John H.; and Osborne, Jeffrey C, 4.437.156. ci!
Osborne. John R.; and BischofT, Peter G.. to Memorcx Corporation
Self-aligned pole tips. 4.436.593. CI. 204-15.000.
Ose. Earl E.. to Eli Lilly and Company. Control of swine dysentery.
Osterberg. Thomas V.. to A-Betong AB Arrangement for hydroelec-
tric power plants. 4.437.017. CI. 290-52.000.
Ostcrholm, Robert J.: See—
Boodman. Norman S.; Farr, Elvin L.; Osterholm. Robert J.; and
Green, Neulan B.. III. 4.436.615. CI. 208-177.000.
Ostlie. Arne M.: See—
Strandii, Kaarc R.; and Ostlie. Arne M.. 4.435.887. CI. 29-123 000
OstrofT. Arthur: See—
Tullos. Robert N.; and Ostroff. Arthur. 4.437.049. CI. 318-696 000
Otis Engineering Corporation: See-
Barker. James M.. 4.436.150. CI. 166-31.000.
Fisher. Ernest P.. Jr.; and Welch. William R.. 4.436,152. CI
166-214.000. . , . *. K,,.
Otsuka. Tsuneo: See—
Inoue. Kazuo; and Otsuka. Tsuneo. 4,436.172. CI. 180-219 000
Otto Tuchenhagen GmbH & Co KG: See—
Tuchenhagen. Otto A P.; Mieth. Hans O. E.; and Coura. Herbert
R.. 4.436.106. CI 137-240.000.
Ouchi. Teruo. to Kabushiki Kaisha Medos Kenkyusho. Bioptic instru-
ment. 4.436.087. CI. 128-6.000.
Outboard Marine Corporation: See—
Heismann. Richard A.. 4.435,949. CI 56-320.200
Overton, William C. Jr.; and Steyen. William A.. Jr.. to United Sutes
of America. Energy. Apparatus for detecting a magnetic anomaly
contiguous to remote location by squid gradiometer and magnetome-
ter systems. 4.437,064. CI. 324-346.000.
Overzet. John K.. to Borg-Wamer Corporation Subilizing circuit for
controlled inverter-motor system. 4.437.050. CI. 318-798.000
Owen. Daniel V.: See—
Morais, Don; and Owen. Daniel V.. 4.437.042. CI. 315-289.000.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation: See—
Grossi. Anthony V.; Hahn. Louis T.; Marzocchi. Alfred; and
Bolen. Charies E.. 4.436.767. CI. 427-138.000.
Orossi. Anthony V.; Hagelee. Leon A.; Hahn. Louii T.; and Mar-
zocchi. Alfred. 4.436.864. CI. 524-458.000.
Haines, Richard M.; Wong, Robert; and Berger. Elisabeth J.,
4.436.848. CI. 523-426.000.
Jackson. Robert R.; and Klink. Jerome P.. 4.436.258. CI. 242-
18.00G.
Pcllegrin. Michael T.; Hanna. Terry J.; and Thompson. Thomas K..
4.436.541. CI. 65-2.000.
Owens-Illinoit. Inc.: See-
Chang. Long F.. 4,436.216. CI. 220-69.000.
Juvinall. John W.. 4.437.1 16. CI. 358-106.000.
Oyama, KiyoUka: See—
Isowa. Yoshikazu; Ohmori. Muncki; Mori. Kaoru; Ichikawa. Tet-
suya; Nonaka. Yuji; Kihara. Keiichi; Oyama. Kiyotaka; Satoh.
Heijiro; and Nishimura, Shigeaki. 4,436.925. CI. 560-19.000.
Oyekan. Soni O.; and Swan. George A., to Exxon Research and Engi-
neenng Co. Catalytic reforming proceu. 4,436,612. CI. 208-65000.
1040 O.G.— .^6
PI 32
LIST OF PATENTEES
OMki. Nobuo; and Kaneko. Yothimasa. to Maeda Induslries. Ltd. Ball
Ozau. Susumu: Set—
Maisuda, Tadahifo; Okumura. Masahide; Yokouchi. Hisatake
Omm. Suiumu; and Kato. Yasuo. 4.437.008. CI. 25O.396.00R '
Ozawa, Yukio: See—
Tamama. Hirofhi; Ozawa. Yukio; Miyazaki. Jingo; Ito. Hirothi; and
Kinoshita. Toyohiro. 4.436.313. CI. 277.80.000
Pacey. Gilbert E.; and Bubnis. Benard P.. to President and Trustees of
the Miami University. The Trinuoromethyl-substituled chrome-
S5-'352^mo" * *" '"*' "'*"'°*** °'" "*'"« "•"« 4.436.923. CI
Pache. Norbert: and Mazac. Karel. to Industrie-Werke Karlsruhe
4^tt*C^219"f2T(!!^'"" ^"*='"^ "' "*'*"» ""»"•-
Pacific Electro Dynamics, Inc.: See—
Carpenter. Ralph F.. 4.437,146. CI. 363-21.000
Padalka. Valentin G.: See—
Andreev Anaioly A.; Gavrilko. Igor V.; Gavrilov. Alexei G
Verwchaka Anatoly S.; Zhed. Viktor P.; Padalka. Valentin G."
and Sinelschikov. Andrei K . 4.436,830. CI. 501-96 000
Pigels. Louis T.: See—
Weiler. Gerhard H.; and Pagels. Louis T.. 4.436,210, CI. 215-32.000
PaJihomov Oennady N.; Luste. Anita Y.; Kadnikova. Galina I. and
Rolesnik. Anatoly G. Granulated treatment-and-prophylactic dental
preparation possessing anticarious effect. 4,436,720. CI. 424-44 000
Pako Corporation: See—
Sirunc. Gerald R.. 4.436,008. CI 83-42.000
Pall Corporation: See—
^^2\0^K)f>0x'"^' ""* '^"*"' ^"■""»'°" '''•• <.*36.W5, CI.
Panavision. Incorporated: See—
Gottschalk, Robert E., 4.437.126, CI. 358-224.000.
Panicker. Narayana N.: See—
'^'^n Lf,"y L; Moss. Herbert H.; Panicker. Narayana N.; and
Wada. William T. 4.436.048, CI. 114-230.000
Panik. Ferdinand: See—
Mehren. Herben; and Panik. Ferdinand. 4.436. 1 70. CI. 1 80- 1 3 1 000
Pannu. Jaswant S. Universal intraocular lens and a method of measurina
•n eye chamber size. 4.435.855, CI. 3- 1 3.000 *
Papakube Corporation: See—
''4.T3"6.50Tci.f25-3TfSS..""^^ '' "^ ^*"°"' °^'' ^'
Parello. Joseph: See—
Aspisi. Christian; Calas. Bernard; Oaunis. Jacques; Follet. Michel
Jacquier. Robert; and Parello. Joseph. 4,436.874, CI. 525-327. lOo!
rarker, James: See —
Cooper. Michael J.; and Parker. James. 4,436.795. CI. 429-53.000
Parks-Cramer Company: See—
Mulligan. William L.. 4.435.876. CI. 15-3I2.00R
Parman. David G.: See—
^f!!fJo#ii?^°'** ^' *"** P«nnan. David O.. 4.436,565. CI.
Paronetto, Lanfranco: See—
'*'I'ST«*< ^?''?JlP;.l2;i°"' ^"•' ■"*' P«ronetto. Unfranco.
*,*J0, 733. CI. 426-19.000.
Parrillo. Uuis C; Reutlinger. George W.; and Wang, Li-Kong, to Bell
Telephone Uboratones. Incorporated. Procesa for forming comple-
menury integrated circuit devices. 4,435,895, CI, 29-571 MO
Parnllo. Louis C ; and Payne. Richard S.. to Bell Telephone Uborato-
nes. Incorporated. Method for fabricating complemenury field effect
transistordevices. 4.435,896. CI. 29.571.000 cucucvi
Puchke, Werner: See—
Hafner. Udo; Herth. Harro; Kienzle. Wolfgang; Knapp, Heinrich;
& J.»t*?i'"'r235^5S: '•"'"''• ^*"^'^'~* ^-'
PwMroJRobcrt E.; and Burough. Irvin O.. to Androt Analyzers Incor-
porated. Modular gas analyzer. 4.437.004, CI. 250-343.000.
P»lel, Bhupendra P.: See-
^IStmoSS '■ "^ ''*'*'' ^•"'P*'^" ''• *.*36.«)3. CI.
Piterson Producu Limited: See—
Taylor, Eri<:, 4,436.401. CI. 354^3 1 2000.
Pmoiwau, fean-Francoif See—
*^oXr4.4?i's?a'V2ti;ii:^^^ "^ ^•'-'-'
PpmI. Fred R., Jr.; and Mrozinaki, James S.. to Minneaou Mining and
Manufactunng Co. ConMuncr Mving uiinper evident lenl wid imaged
nuM Wurth S.A.; See —
Shevakin. Jury F^ Dobkin. Igor I.; Donskoi. Efim M ; Manov,
Ongory L.; Zhdanov. V««i|y v.; Berger. Elena 8.; Popov. Va-
a 25J33 OOD "' " ^ ' '"*' ^^^^^'*' *«'»•<' 2 . M35.W6.
Payne. Richard S.: See—
Parrillo. Louis C.; and Payne. Richard S., 4.435.896. CI. 29-571.000.
Plywur. John Y.: See—
QMtrell, Jennie L; Davia. Richard A.; Harris. Sua«i K.; Jones.
Bernard R.; and Payseur. John Y.. 4.436.963, CI. I79.I8.00B.
PMitCT. Bertram A., to Lockheed Corporation. Fleiible coupling for
fluid duett. 4.436,326. Q. 28M 78.000 *^^
MARCH 13. 1984
PEC Process Engineering Company: See—
'*"H'%.4"3'6:^*i4''"crfj5.'!6ToS?"= '^"""' "'''- "^ '''^^ "^^^
Pellegnn. Michael T.; Hanna. Terry J.; and Thompson. Thomas K.. to
Owens^ornmg fiberglas Corporation. Methodfor production o(
mineral fibers. 4.436,541. CI. 65-2.000. "-i*"on 01
Pennsylvania Engineering Corporation: See—
Nagati, Rashed N.. 4.436.291. CI. 266-246.000
Pennwalt Corporation: See—
Lindaberry. Harold L.. 4.436.719. CI. 424-37.000.
li^^H'ii Luciano; Tonon.Elia; and Paronetto. Lanfranco. to Mon-
^.K r?iJ ** r- ■"'ICjiimici Perdomini S.p.A. Separation of fruit juice
wih fibers of an olefin polymer. 4.436,755, CI. 426- 1 5.000.
Perfil En Fno. S.A. (PERFRISA): See—
Larrea, D. Juan. 4.435.935. CI. 52-461.000.
Perkins, Haywood A.: See—
Perrey. Hermann: See—
'^lU'^f'L.'^'in""*™''' Muller-Albrecht. Horst; Dollhausen.
Manfred; and Perrey. Hermann. 4,436,570. CI. 156-273300
rerron, Robert: See —
*^562'-5[9a»'"* "'**"■ *"** '*"^' '*'**''• *'*^'"'' CI.
Perry, William E. Automobile hand control. 4,436,191, CI 192-3 OOS
Persson, Bengt A. Ventilation valve. 4,436,107, CI. 137-314.000. "
rerz. John S.: See —
Petetl!¥iSha!d'K*'sii*"** '*'"' ■'°'"' * " *'*^*''"' ^ 524-145.000.
^"5*6-4 ^"car ^ ""* "**""• '*'*^''*"' '^- *•♦'*•''*• CI.
Peterson. Daniel G.; and Erickson. John W.. to Kobe. Inc. Surface
power unit for a downhole pump. 4,436.492. CI. 417-386.000
Peterson. Kenneth S.: See—
"^ ci*252"8'700' ''•""""' ^■' '"** P^e^on. Kenneth S.. 4,436.637.
Peterson Manufacturing Co.: See—
Templeman. Arthur R., 4.436.445, CI. 403-189 000
Petr. David W • toBell Telephone Uboratories, Incorporated. Adapt-
ive differential PCM coding. 4.437,087. CI. 340-347 ODD
M?6:622"'a ^l^illioS'" "°"' * ^' ^°- '"" ""=•" •'"«"
Petrov. Lev N.; Adoniev. Viktor A.; and Kononov. Valery I. Method
S!eSSl"ir3T,6T9"'c7lw%tSo'"' "*'"""'• '°' •*^°""*''» '»•»
'**KL^'^*"= •"** .'^o"'»u»- Heinz, to Krupp-Koppen GmbH.
SM?a» P'"'«*""» «*' '°' coking P»nt. 4.436.589. a.
Peyrouset. Andre; and Spring, Francois, to Sociefc Nationaie Elf Aqui-
S /ISS. aiS'iSSio'"'"''""" "" ""■""'"«^«" "f
Pfannschmidt, Martin, to SMS Schloemann-Siemag AG. System for the
treatment of a continuoua meul web. 4,436.292, CI. 266-107.000
Pfefferle. Dietmar: See—
Lauer, Reinhard; and Pfefferle, Dietmar. 4,436,364, a. 350-6.600.
I^zer Inc.: See—
Celmer. Walter D.; Cullen, Walter P.; Shibakawa. Riichiro; and
Tone. Junsuke. 4.436.747. CI. 424-274.000.
Pfleiderer, Ernst: See—
'^ D^fi*"*! ^^•'•'i Von Der Pahle. Dietrich J.; Monsheimer.
?10.6320» *'"' ' *"** ''"•***'• '''"'""• *''*^*'W*' CI.
Phillips, Eari G.: See—
Beltotti. Marc; Ooldhaber, Richard P.; Phillipa. Earl G.; and Toch.
Theodore H.. 4.436.620, CI. 210.90.000. . «»« locn.
Phillips Petroleum Company: See—
Beever. William H., 4.436.865, CI. 524-504.000.
Bohaein. Rex L.. 4.436.948. CI. 585-532000.
Myers, John W,; and Strope. Daniel J., 4,436,949. CI. 585-664.000.
Sherk. Fred T. 4,436.901. CI. 528498.000. "^^m,.
^^X\?J^ ^' '^ '-"'•'»• W*'"* •*• J'- M36.698. CI.
Will. Donald R., 4.436,882. CI. 526-106.000.
Will. Donald R.. 4.436,883, CI. 526-106.000.
^S??'«»S^ ^•'' *^ ^•''*'' ''"Wklin T.. 4.436.902, C|.
'^eTTOlirciM^fooS'*'^^'^ "^"«'**"^ ^^^
Pipker, Ch«f|0 W., 10 Oiklwid Products Inc. Pressure vessel having a
pliirpJily of nilpring elem^nl*. 4,436,621. CI. 210.232.000.
Pi<;kfring A Company. Inc.; See—
Chass, Jacob. 4,437,019, CI. 307-83.000.
PIcquendar, Jean E.. to Thomson^lSF. FSK Demodutotor for fraquen-
cy-modulalion modem. 4,437,061, CI. 329-105.000.
Pierce Chemical Company: See^
Smith. Paul K.. 4.436,718. CI. 424-1.100.
Pierre Fabre S.A.: See—
Gilbert. 4.436,749, CI. 424.278.000.
Pierrel, Michel: See—
Fuminier. Claude; and Pierrel, Michel, 4.433,194, CI. 29-327.300.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 33
Pierrel. Roben F.: See—
Ounshor, Robert L.; Pierrel. Robert F.; and Melloch, Michael R.,
4,437,031, CI. 3 10-3 1 3.00B.
Pierro. Joseph J., Jr.. to American Sundard Inc. Cab signal lest set for
automatically testing the pickup coils and checking an amplifier of
cab signal equipment. 4.437.056, CI. 324-73.0AT.
Pielsch, Hartmul: 5m—
Krennrich, Oimar; Brendel. Gottfried; and Pielsch. Hartmul.
4.436.704,0.423-11.000.
Pijpers, Jacques P L.: See—
Smith. Paul; Lemstra. Pieler J.; Kirschbaum, Roben; and Pijpers,
Jacaues P. L., 4,436.689, CI. 264-204.000.
Pimenov. Mikhail G.: See—
Vichkanova, Serafima A.; Shipulina, Ljudmila D.; Olyzin. Vladi-
mir I.; Bankovsky. Alexandr I.; Pimenov. Mikhail G.; and
Boryaev, Klim 1 . 4.436.732. CI. 424-180.000
Pioneer Electronic Corporation: See—
Nishikawa, Kazuo; Sato. Kiyoshi; Ichino. Hiroyuki; and Okura,
Keniti, 4.437.179, CI 369-172.000.
Pirson. Ewald; Schmidlkofer. Jakob; and Innertsberger, Ernst, to
Wackcr-Chemie GmbH Self-emulsifiable aniifoams. 4,436.647, CI.
252-358.000
Pissiotas, Georg: See—
Berrer, Dagmar; Pissiotas. Georg; and Rohr, Otto. 4.436.935. CI.
564-49.000.
Piiel. Ira J., to Comell-Dubilier Electric Corporation. Lighting control
for high intensity discharge lamp 4.437.043. CI. 315-308.000
Piteo. Michael J., to R. E Phelon Company, Inc. Electronic speed
control for capacitor discharge ignition system. 4,436,076, CI.
123-602.000.
Pitman-Moore, Inc.: See—
Dinka, Stephen K.. 4.436,816. CI. 435-240.000.
Pitts, Loren: See—
Shahan. James E.; and Pills. Loren, 4,436.1 19. CI. 138-149.000.
Plasticisers Limited: See—
Slack, Ian D ; Ellis, David G.; and Firth, Colin, 4.436,364, CI.
156-42.000.
Plessey Overseas Limited: 5e«—
Crisp, Malcolm; and Lewis, Christopher, 4,436.196. CI. 194-
lOO.OOA.
Plym, Oscar W. Traffic safe pole. 4.435.930, CI. 52-98.000.
Pohl, Hans H : See—
Weitz. Hans-Manin; Fischer, Rolf; and Pohl. Hans H., 4,436,944.
CI. 585-408.000.
Pointer. Simon P. Tires for wheels. 4.436.128. CI. 152-209.00R.
Poisson. Leandre. Integrated window and thermal shutter assembly.
4.435.919, CI. 49-63.000.
Polls. Marjone J.: See—
Ludwig, Richard H.; Quan. Wing C; Husson. Alan L.; Dirnberger.
Linus R.; and Polls. Marjorie J.. 4,436,185, CI. I87.29.00R.
Pollmann, Kurt: See—
Miersch, Eddehard F.; Pollmann, Kurt; Schelller, Helmut; and
Zuhike, Rainer. 4.437,022. CI. 307-270 GOO.
Polymer Technology Corporation: See—
Ellis. Edward J.; and Salamone. Joseph C, 4,436,730. CI.
424-180.000.
Polyplastics Co., Ltd.: See—
Kasuga, Takuzo; Takahashi, Kalsuhiko; and Nakashima. Tuneyasu,
4,436.877. CI. 525-437.000.
Pomerene. James H ; and Rechtschaffen, Rudolph N.. to International
Business Machines Corporation. Cache memory architecture with
decoding. 4,437.149, CI. 364-200.000.
Pomplun. William S ; and Grube. Herbert E.. to KimbeHy-Clark Cor-
poration. Creping adhesives containing poly 2-ethyl-2-oxazoline.
4.436.867, CI. 524-503.000.
Poncelet, Georges: See—
Jacobs, Pierre; Poncelet, Georges; and Schutz, Alain, 4,436,832, CI.
502-84.000.
Ponl-A-Mousson S.A.: See—
Fuminier, Claude; and Pierrel, Michel. 4,435,894. CI. 29-527.500.
Pool. James L., to Lisle Corporation. Battery post and terminal cleaner.
4,435.873, CI. 15-105.000.
Popov. Valery M.: See—
Shevakin, Jury F.; Dobkin, Igor I.; Donskoi, Efim M.; Manov.
Origory L.; Zhdanov, Vasily V.; Berger, Elena S.; Popov, Va.
lery M.; Pavlov, Alexei A.; and Akchurin, Rashid Z., 4,435,886.
CI. 29.33.00D.
Potter, John K.: See—
Johnson. Richard S.; and Poller. John K.. 4,436.644, CI.
252-174 130.
Powell, Thomas A., to Ex-Cell-O Corporation. Automatic depth com-
pensating system. 4,436,460, CI. 408-14.000.
PPG Industries. Inc.: See—
Girgis, Mikhail M.. 4,436.866. CI. 524-5 lOOOO.
Wagner, Melvin P.. 4,436,847, CI. 523-203.000.
Precision Plastic Producu Corp.: See—
Alejandro Llera, Santos A., 4,436,212, CI. 215-252.000.
Precoul, Michel, to Sociele d'Eludes, de Realisations et d'Applications
Techniques (SERAT). Hollow charges with plural conical configura-
tions. 4,436,033, CI. 102-307.000.
Predali. Jean-Jacques: 5<v—
Dufour, Philippe; Predali, Jean-Jacques; Ranchin, Guy, deceased;
Ranchin, Marc, legal heir; and Ranchin, Genevieve, legal heir,
4,436,616, CI. 209-1000.
President and Trustees of the Miami University. The: See—
Pacey, Gilben E.; and Bubnis, Benard P.. 4.436.923. CI.
549-352000.
Pressure Products Company: See—
Meginnis, Charles E , deceased. 4,436,375. CI. 350-319.000.
Prevost, Marc: See—
Nollez, Jacques; Ragain, Jacques; and Prevost. Marc. 4.436.051, Q.
114-340.000.
Priebe. Edmund: See—
Brandstetter, Franz; Muench, Volker; Naarmann, Herbert; and
Priebe, Edmund, 4,436,854. CI. 524-139 000
Pnepke, Edward H See—
Lindblom. Curtis H.; LauKh, H. Nevin; and Priepke. Edward H..
4.436,248.0.241-101.700.
Prinz. Bruno; Rockel, Manfred B ; Rudolph. Gunlher; Heubner, Ulrich-
and Zoebe, Hugo, to Vereinigte Dcuisch Melallwerke AG. Gold-col^
ored coin material 4,436,790. CI 428-675 000.
Procter A Gamble Company. The: See—
Dirksing. Robert S; and Barker, Dale E.. 4.436,269. CI.
Jacobson. Ronald L.; and Hanley. Dean C. 4,436,653, CI.
252-547.000.
Profet, Gary A., to General DalaComm Industries. Inc Method and
apparatus for distnbuting control signals 4,437.183. O 370-1 10 100
Profet. Gary A : See—
Lambert. David A.; and Profet. Gary A., 4,437,182, CI.
370-110.100.
Profiit. James A.: See—
Ong. Helen H ; and Profiit, James A.. 4.436.748. O. 424-275.000
Prokop. Jon S.. to Texas Instruments Incorporated. High terminal
count integrated circuit device package. 4,437.141, CI. 361-403.000
Proud. Joseph M.: See—
Lapatovich, Waller P ; Proud, Joseph M ; and Riseberg, Leslie A..
4,436,762. O 427-39 000.
Prusak, John J., to RCA Corporation. Apparatus for grinding the back
surfaces of record molding stampers. 4.435,922. CI. 51-98.000
Prusak. John J.; and Patel, Bhupendra P.. to RCA Corporation Appa-
ratus for separating a replica from a matrix. 4,436,603. O.
Puestel, Hubert: See—
Schuiz, Rudi; Puestel. Hubert; Weber. Georg; and Kuerten. Herib-
ert, 4,436,702. CI 422-195.000
Purdue Research Foundation: See-
Cook, William A.; Feamot. Neal E.; and Geddes, Leslie A.,
4.436.092, CI. 128-4I9.0PG.
Gunshor. Robert L.; Pierret, Robert F ; and Melloch, Michael R .
4.437.031. O. 3 10-3 1 3.00B.
Purification Engineering, Inc.: See—
Wood, Louis L.; and Calton, Gary J., 4.436,813, O 435.109 000.
Purvis, Fay A.; Bennett. Robert W ; and Ruth, Roger A., to Enlerra
Corporation. Foam liquid concentrate supply system. 4,436,487, CI.
417-46.000
Puzzle Specialties: 5m—
Caldwell, T. Francis. 4.436.307. CI. 273.157.00R.
Ouan, Wing C. 5m—
Ludwig, Richard H , Quan, Wing C; Husson, Alan L.; Dirnberger,
Linus R ; and Polis, Marjorie J , 4,436,185, CI. I87-29.00R
Queener, Carl A., to International Busineu Machines Corporation. File
compaction apparatus and method for copiers. 4.436.409. CI. 355-
14.00R.
R. E. Phelon Company, Inc.: 5m—
Piteo, Michael J.. 4.436,076. CI. 123-602.000.
RAG Sloane Mfg Co., Inc.: 5m—
Blumenkranz. James J.. 4,436,988, CI 219-544.000
Raasch. Hans: 5m—
Schmid, Friedbert; and Raasch. Hans. 4.435,953, CI. 57-408.000.
Rabe. Thomas L.: 5m—
Nilson. Warren C; and Rabe. Thomas L., 4,436.342, CI.
297-445.000.
Racon Incorporated: See— "^
Stelz. Dale E.; Carroll. Frank I.; and Whaley. Wilson M.. 4,436,641,
O. 252-68.000.
Rader, Charles G ; and Robou, Stephen, to Occidenul Chemical
Corporation. Process for the caulyzed fiuorination of haloalkyi
aromatic compounds. 4,436,942, O 570-145.000.
Radford, Kenneth C; and Harrison, Don E., to Weslinghousc Electric
Corp. Nuclear fuel fabrication proceu. 4.436.677, CI. 264-0.300.
Radio Engineering Service, Inc.: See—
Kilrell. John V., 4,436.351, O. 312-223.000
Raftopoulos, Demelrios D.. to University of Toledo, The. Instrument
for meuuring the range of motion associated with a human body
joint. 4,436.099. CI. 128-782.000.
Ragailler, Franz. Sprayer. 4,436,160, CI. 169-74.000.
Ragain, Jacaues: 5m—
Nollez, Jacques; Ragain. Jacques; and Prevost, Marc, 4,436,051. CI.
1 14-340.000.
Ragland, Frank R., Jr., to RCA Corporation. Cathode-ray tube having
a temperature compensated mask-frame assembly. 4,437i)36. cT
313-402.000.
Rallapali. Krishna: See—
Alfke. Peter H.; Rallapali, Krishna; and MacMillan, David,
4,437,158, CI. 364-200.600.
Ralston, Paul H.; and Whitney, Sandra L., to Calgon Corporation.
Polyphosphoric acid as a scale and corrosion inhibitor. 4,436,628, CI.
210-697.000.
PI 34
LIST OF PATENTEES
Ramachandran, Pallassana N.; and Peterson. Kenneth S.. to Colgate-
Palmolive Company. Fabric softening heavy duty liquid detergent
i??'a T.'il* * mixture of water insoluble soap and clay. 4,436.637, CI.
Rammler, Roland; and Bussmann, Alfons. to Metallgesellschaft Aktien-
gesellschafl. Process for devolatilizing devolatilizable Hne-grained
M36788 CI 2ofT2 (WO ''°'' ''"'■*"'""* heatK:arrying material.
Ranchin. Genevieve, legal heir. See —
Dufour, Philippe; Predali. Jean-Jacques; Ranchln. Guy. deceased
4 436 676 cfl' '**"' ^^"' '""^ '^*"<='''"' Genevieve, legal heir!
Ranchin, Guy. deceased: See—
Dufour, Philippe; Predali, Jean-Jacques; Ranchin, Guy, deceased
4 436 61*6 'r?'^^* '^*"' ^'"' *"*^ '^""chin, Genevieve, legal heir!
Ranchin, Marc, legal heir: See—
Dufour, Philippe; Predali. Jean-Jacques; Ranchin. Guy, deceased
4 436 676 cV^' ''^^'' ^^"' ^"^ '^""chin, Genevieve, legal heir!
Randall. Charles E.: See—
Dorman, John G.; Balbo, Anthony M.; Randall, Charles E.; and
Sette, Robert A., 4,436.184, CI. 187-29.00R.
Rank Organisation Limited. The: See—
Bertenshaw. David R.; Lockwood. Edwin P.; and Brown.
Anthony R.. 4.437.169. CI. 364-900.000.
Rapp, Ronald J.: See—
Burdick, Patricia E.; and Rapp, Ronald J , 4,436,850, CI. 524-8 000
Rasmussen, Ole-Bendt. In situ precipiuted fibrous laminate and method
of producing same. 4,436,568, CI. 156-176.000.
Rasshofer. Werner; Reichmann, Wolfgang; Richartz. Adolf; and Die-
tnch, Manfred, to Bayer Akticngeseilschaft. Single-phase, storage-
stable polyol compositions containing salts and the use thereof in the
production of polyurethanes. 4,436,841. CI. 521-106.000.
Rathburn. Lloyd C. to Loomis International Inc. Releasing overshot
apparatus. 4.436,334, CI. 294-86.300.
Rauleder. Gebhard; and Waldmann. Helmut, to Bayer Aktiengesell-
?436 94?cr585°357*'^^'''''"'''*°" °^ 2.2-dicyclohexenylpropane.
Raverdy, ciaude Y.; and Veron, Serge, to Thomson-CSF. Pyroelectric
cf*313088 000^ ^*^^ "'^ '"'^ provided with such a target. 4.437,035,
Raychem Corporation: See—
Tight. Dexter C, Jr.. 4.436.566. CI. 156-56.000.
Raytheon Company: See —
Gill, Harry A., Jr., 4,437.023, CI. 307.296.00R
Gordon, Bruce E.. 4.437,066, CI. 328-14 000
Smith, Irl W., 4,436,426. CI. 356-369.000.
Razza. Aldo. Composite semirigid snow chain, without rear hookina
means, for motor vehicles. 4.436,129, CI. 152-213 OOA
RCA Corporation: See—
Bissot. Thomas C; and Li. Stephen, 4,436,599, CI. 204-98 000
Cochran, Urry A., 4,437,124. CI. 358-166.000
''"(T/i'iif^lJf ^' ^'' '"'' '^"'«*"' ^""'«^ P- M37.I20, CI.
Fish, Joe W.. 4,437.094, CI. 340-825.500.
Harlan, Wayne E., 4,437,123, CI. 358-166.000.
Kelly, William R.; and Alvero. Ernesto J., 4,436,394, CI. 354-1 000
Kern, Werner, 4,436.999. CI. 250-302.000.
'^^,T^"/,''aJ^"^' " • ""** Shambelan. Robert C. 4.436.509. CI.
432-253.000.
Osaka, Susumu; and Toda. Minoru, 4.435.920. CI. 49-82 000
Prusak. John J. 4.435.922. CI. 51-58.000.
'*lo4!'i94^000 ^' '"'* '*'"'' ^*'"P*"**" P' '♦.«6.603. CI.
Ragland. Frank R.. Jr.. 4.437,036. CI. 313-402.000.
228-''264^a»" W-: "d McVety. Ronald E.. 4.436.242. CI.
Wacyk. Ihor T.. 4,437,024, CI. 307-475.000
Xcm. ?43i:^?cri9^1?2'.So.^°'"'''"^ ^"'^'' «=»>•"«« '~«"«
Rebholz. Joseph J ; and Tamura. Poohsan N., to Honeywell Inc. Space
4.436!37o"cf 350^6?i2? ^°' "'"'*"' ambiguity function generator.
Rechtschaffen. Rudolph N.-. See—
'*°i21*?i'/;;I^^ " • '"'^ Rechtschaffen. Rudolph N., 4,437.149,
y-l- J04-200.000.
Reed, Don C. to Exxon Production Research Co. Apparatus and
4%?65!k) ci.'5S'5°niC°'*"'' '"°**"'" ''°'" »"'"""««^ P'P*-
Reed Industries, Inc.: See—
Sch^y^^nald C; and Harvill, Melvin J., 4,436,195, Cl.
Reffert. Rudi W.: See—
Hinselmann, Klaus; Naarmann. Herbert; Echte. Adolf; HeU, Ed-
4"??6,?7a^,.1S;3.«5''"' ''"* ^ = "«* """•"«='''• ^""«--
Regina. Ralph. Abrading tool. 4,435,923, Cl. 51-170.0TL
Reh, Carter K.: See—
Ro^. Edward; and Reh. Carter K.. 4,436,277, CI. 251-6.000.
Reich, Fnti: See —
ThaJmann. Alfred; and Reich, Fritz, 4,436,987. Cl. 219-535.000.
Reichmann, Wolfgang: See—
RM^ofer, Werner; Reichmann, Wolfgang; Richartz. Adolf; and
March 13, 1984
Dietnch. Manfred, 4,436,841. Cl. 521-106.000.
Reinke, Martin: See—
Richter, Ekkehard; and Reinke. Martin, 4,436,701, Cl. 422-173 000
Reiter, Paul C Method and apparatus for glycosylated hemoglobin
separating and measuring fractions. 4,436,820, CI 436-67 000
Rendulic, Francis J; Trasavage, Robert K.; and Boduch. Paul A., to W.
L?dr4%*6,S6, C? 4?0-3'rf.(S''""" '" """*"« P""'*' ^*'^"'»
Renfroe, Harris B to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Thromboxane synthe-
Sr.273a)R''' '^■'"'"'""•"'•2-<>-''n'd"olyl)indoles. 4,436,74 Cl.
Renken, Terry L.: See—
^t3r956,'ci."5^2'U"iS'' '''"' "" """ ^'"»' ^"» ^- ^'••
^",?3r9"28.'ci."5?(^2'i^"^"' ^"'' "" ""' "*""'• ^"» ^- J'-
'r43S31,'ci."5?i2^'.S3b.'""" ^ • ''' ""^ '^*'"'-- ^-y ^-
Rennert, Klaus-Dieter: See—
^nS47a)o"'" '"** •*""'"• "^''"s-Dieter, 4,436,038, Cl.
Reppelin. Michel: See—
'"4i"3"665,tr'^6(f4aB; '*'^''"= '"'' ^'«''"""- ^»«'«-
Reutlinger, George W.: See—
'T43?:89'?"<!?1.^29-5''7?SS«"' °'"«'= ^ = ""' ^"'»' »-'-'^°"«-
^^;gSim';^'an^^^t"9'*S'S?9"/'cS.^ °'"''"- ^""» ^^
Reutter Metallwarenfabrik GmbH: See—
Reutter. Heinrich. 4.436.219, Cl. 220-295 000
Revay Blaise, to Kiddc, Inc. Manual/electric activated squib actuated
discharge valve for fire extinguishers. 4,436,159, Cl. 169-28 000
Revere Copper and Brass. Inc.: See—
Knopp, Walter V.. 4.436.682. Cl. 264-70.000.
Revitz. Martin: See-
Gardiner James R.; Makarewicz. Stanley R.; Revitz, Martin; and
Shepard. Joseph F. 4.437.108. Cl. 357-59.000.
Rexham Corporation: See —
Seiden. Frederick C. 4.436.576, Cl. 156-543.000.
Rexnord Inc.: See—
"'l^f-Ml'obo*''*'^ ° ■ *"** ^'°«*°"'' ^"'""n H.. 4.436,200, Cl.
Reyncr, Ellis M., to Joy Research Incorporated. Tamper resistant
packaging device. 4.436.203, Cl. 206-524 800 ««»wni
Reynolds Metals Company: See—
^ISSr'obo'^""" T.; and Willett, John T., 4,436,598, Cl.
Rhodes, John H., Jr.; and Rosati, Alfonso A., to International Business
Machines Corporation. Guidance correction method and apparatus
for copy paper path in a copier. 4,436,403, Cl. 355.3.0SH
Rhone-Poulenc Industries: See—
°'<'i'-I''/r™'"' ■'**"• "«* P'^ro"' Ro*'*". 4.436,889, Cl.
302-319.000.
Rhone-Poulenc Specialites Chimiques: See—
''4S:66?,trl6(SS'5'"ol;B' ''"''''• ""'^ ^"^"'"""' ^"-''•
'tdS'o^rn'p;^^^c;^^T72f cr42lT7ro5b'^ ''''■'""^ '''°'''^
Ribi, Edgar E.; Schwartzman, Steven M.; and Cantrell, John L., to Ribi
AlVi^r^A^rf^'-r^'J^L^'"'- •**""«' <le«o«*'''«» endotoxin product.
»,4J0, /is, Cl. 424-177.000.
Ribi ImmunoChem Research. Inc.: See—
Ribi. Edgar E.. 4.436.727, Cl. 424-177.000.
" M3?7?8: Cl! 4'^iT77"^'"' ^'''"^ ^ = """ ^'"'»"- ^^h" ^'
Richartz, Adolf: See—
Rasshofer, Werner; Reichmann. Wolfgang; Richartz. Adolf; and
Dietnch. Manfred, 4,436.841, Cl. 521-lW.OOO.
Richter, Ekkehard; and Reinke, Martin, to Bergwerksverband GmbH
M3'6.TorciT22°-'i7'3 000''*"°** ^°' '""°^'"» ^^^ ^'°'" *"'« 8»»«-
Ricoh Company. Ltd.: See—
Ebi Yutaka; Fukazawa, Takao; Kawakubo. Toshio; Jinnai, Koi-
chiro; Honke, Masanon; Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro; Ishikawa, Chuii-
and HiraU, Toshitaka. 4,437,101, Cl. 346-75.000 '
Emoto, Masami, 4,436.415, Cl. 355-55.000
Ikeda, Kunio. 4.437,103, Cl. 346-140.00R
Iwata. Nobuo. 4.436,440. Cl. 400-144.200.
Kamiyama, Shin-ichi; and Hasegawa. YuUka, 4,436,414, CI.
3*3-15.000.
Ohta, Masafumi; and Sakai, Kiyoshi, 4.436,800, Cl. 430-59 000
. Satomi. Toyokazu; and Sakuma. Nobuo, 4,436,407, Cl. 355-1 1 000
Ricwil, Incorporated: See—
^f 5639 000'°'** ^' ""* P*™""' David O., 4,436,565, Cl.
Riedmaier, Josef: See—
Bui-4"if''^'?'.^'"'= ."^ Riedmaier, Joief, 4,436,064, Cl. 123.142.50R.
Rief, Rolf; and Wetzel, Peter, to Brown, Boveri A Cie AG. Semicon-
ductor power module. 4,436,951, Cl. I74-52.0PE.
RiMler Ernst; and Zajicek. Ernst, to Voest-Alpine Aktiengeaellschaft.
Electnc furnace arrangement. 4,437,187, Cl. 373-73 000
Riegler, Ernst: See—
Kilches. Helmut D.; LuMcheider, Walter; Riegler. Ernst: and
Zajicek. Ernst. 4,436,290rCI. 266-158.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 35
Rigby. Geoffrey R.; and Callcoti, Thomas G , to Broken Hill Propri-
eUry Company Limited, The Recovery of coal from coal handlins
operations. 4,436,618. Cl. 209-5.000
Rinkewich. Isaac: See—
Rosinek. Shiomo; Rinkewich, Isaac; and Khurgin. Boris. 4.437.098,
Cl. 340-870.020.
Ripani, Luciano: See— >
Carbonaro, Antonio; and Ripani, Luciano, 4,436,884, Cl
526-111.000.
Riseberg, Leslie A.: See—
Lapalovich, Walter P.; Proud, Joseph M.; and Riseberg. Leslie A ,
4.436,762. Cl. 427-39.000.
Rilsema. Irving R ; and Colpaert. James J., to Bendix Corporation, The
Disc brake assembly. 4.436,186, Cl. 188-71.800
Ritter, John C. Paint brush support. 4,436.217. Cl. 220-85 OOD.
Rittma.ster, Peter A.: See-
Booth, John L ; and Ritlmaster. Peter A , 4,435,941. Cl. 53-475 000
Robak, Edward; and Reh, Carter K. Torque pinch valve. 4,436.277. Cl.
251-6.000.
Robert Bosch GmbH: See-
Arnold, Winfried, 4,437.048, Cl 318-663 000
Eisele, Hermann; Moller, Heinz; and Schmitl, Manfred, 4,437,154
Cl. 364-187.000.
Hafner, Udo; Herlh, Harro; Kienzle, Wolfgang; Knapp, Heinrich;
Krauss, Rudolf; Lembke, Manfred; Paschke, Werner; and Sauer,
Rudolf, 4,436.071, Cl. 123-472.000.
Koller. Wolfgang, 4,436,114. Cl 137-596.000.
Stumpc, Werner, 4,436,347, Cl. 303-6.00R.
Robert, George R. Typewriter accessory device for bold face tytiina
4,436,441, Cl. 400-304.000.
Roberis, Harold A.: See—
Wcy, Robert A.; and Roberts, Harold A., 4,436.295, Cl. 269-21 000
Roberts, Victor D.. to General Electric Company Amalgam healing
system for solenoidal electric field lamps. 4.437.041, Cl. 315-248 000
Robin-Champigneul. Yves J.: See—
Rozenwaig, Boris; and Robin-Champigneul, Yves J., 4,437.190 Cl
455-600.000.
Robinsky, Eli I.; and Laing, David H. Filtration thickening method and
apparatus. 4,436,633, Cl. 210-791.000.
Robinson, James W., to Flex-!ileen Corporation Dust collecting filter
cartridge and attachment structure for suspending same from bag-
house lube sheet. 4,436,536. Cl. 55-341 OOR
Robota, Stephen: See—
Rader, Charles G.; and Roboia. Stephen, 4,436.942, Cl
570-145.000.
Rochester Instrument Systems, Inc.: See—
Hauplmann, Eric A., 4,437,059, Cl. 324-142 000.
Rock, Erich; and Brunner, Josef, to Julius Blum Ges. m.b.H. Pull-out
guide assembly for drawers, shelves or the like. 4,436,357, Cl
312-338,000.
Rockel, Manfred B.: See-
Prim, Bruno; Rockel, Manfred B ; Rudolph, Gunlher; Heubner,
Ulrich; and Zoebe, Hugo, 4,436,790, Cl. 428-675.000.
Rockwell International Corporation: See—
Fonio, Carlo, 4,436,296, Cl. 270-31.000.
Lawson, Peter, 4,436,126, Cl. 144-130.000.
Soclof, Sidney I., 4.435,899, Cl 29.577.00R
Roderburg, Harald, to Kabel-und Melallwerke Gulehoffnungshulie
Akiiengesellschafl. Apparatus for corrugating pipes. 4,435,968, Cl
72-77.000.
Roeschlein, Eugene R.: See—
Ante, Louis E.; Lindquisi, Richard A ; and Roeschlein, Eugene R.,
4,436,049, Cl. 114-254.000.
Rogers Corporation: See-
Gottlieb, Michael M., 4,436,953, Cl 174-72.00B.
Rohm GmbH: See—
Kreuzburg, Eberhard; Von Der Pahle. Dietrich J.; Monsheimer,
Rolf; Pfieiderer, Ernst; and Taeger. Tilman, 4,436.624, Cl
210-632.000.
Rohm and Haas Company: See—
Choiod. Michael S., 4,436,893, Cl. 528-173.000.
Staas, William H., 4.436.871. Cl. 525-64.000.
Rohr Industries, Inc.: See—
Norris, Brian; and Castro, Robert M., 4,436,592, Cl. 204-15.000.
Rohr, Jakob, to George Fischer Ltd. Cast vehicle wheel rim. 4.436.133,
Cl. 152-381.300.
Rohr, Otto: Set--
Berrer, Dagmar; Pissiotas, Georg; and Rohr, Otto, 4,436,935, Cl.
564-49.000
Rohrig, Klaus, to Berning & Sohne. Apparatus for girding package with
bonded synthetic-resin strip. 4.435,945, Cl. 53-589.000.
Rolland. Marie L: See—
Cavy. Claude; and Rolland, Marie L., 4,437,012, Cl. 250-491.100.
Roller, Philip C; and Suckow, Chris A., to Truck-Lite Company, Inc.
Shock absorbing lamp a.ssembly for baseless cariridge bulbs and the
like. 4.437,145, Cl. 362-306 000.
Rolligon Corporation: See—
Blagg. Leon, 4,436,475, Cl. 414-569.000.
Ron, Moshe; Kleiner, Malvei; and Navon, Uri, lo Technion Research
and Development Foundation Ltd. Method and apparatus for air-
conditioning by means of a hydrogen heat pump. 4,436,539, Cl.
62-4.000.
Rood, William E., Jr. Towed cotton retrieving belt assembly 4.435.947.
Cl. 56-28.000.
Rosali, Alfonso A : Sec-
Rhodes, John H . Jr ; and Rosali, Alfonso A , 4,436,403, Cl 355-
j.OSH
Rose, David B : See—
Cork. Robin M S ; and Rose, David B , 4,437.184. Cl 371-19000
Rose, David M.: See-
Rose, William; and Rose, David M , 4.436,308, Cl 273-237 000
Rose, Donald K ; and Silverman, Peter J , to Intel Corporation Method
of forming multiplexed magnetic bubble detectors 4 436 579 Cl
156-626.000.
'^'Tf • William; and Rose, David M Bingo game display 4,436,308, Cl
Rosenblum, Jack Method and apparatus for automobile actuated power
generation 4,437,015, Cl 290-1 OOR
Rosinek, Shiomo; Rinkewich. Isaac; and Khurgin, Boris, lo Matam,
Ltd. Apparatus for eleclronically reading mechanical meters having
non-simultaneously changing digits 4,437,098, Cl 340-870 020
Roskoit, Lodewijk: See—
Schroeder, Arnold; and Roskoit, Lodewijk, 4,436,844, Cl
523-144000
Rosno, Gordon W : See—
Olmsted, Gaylord S.; and Rosno. Gordon W.. 4.436.016, Cl
89-1809
Ross, Dennis W.: See-
Tucker, Jeffery R ; Ross, Dennis W ; and Tucker, Hartwell F
4,435,870, Cl 15-98 000
Rossmann, Christian: See-
Burger, Helga, and Rossmann, Christian, 4,436,643, Cl
252-135.000
Rosieck, Paul R., Jr : See—
Hershberger, Charles L ; and Rosieck, Paul R., Jr , 4,436.815. Cl
435-172.000
Rotelmann & Co , Firma: See-
Schmidt, Ulrich, 4,435,980, Cl. 73-198.000
Roihe, Hans-Jochen: See—
Hofmann, Hansdieler; Roihe, Hans-Jochen; Skupin, Geora and
Wolff, Konrad, 4,436,898, Cl 528-336 000
Rother, Bruno; and Trommen, Harimut, lo G A Pfieiderer GmbH &
Co , KG. Cenlrifugally cast pole comprised of a reinforced rewn for
supporting a light or the like upon an end thereof. 4,436,781, Cl
428-365.000
Rolthaus, Heinz: See—
Peirovic, Vladan; and Roiihaus, Heinz, 4,436,589, Cl 201-41 000
Rougeolle, Daniel, to Thomson-CSF Device for the recovery of a
clock signal from a binary signal 4,437,071, Cl 33 1-1. OOA
RousscI Uclaf: See—
Christidis, Yam; and Fourncx, Robert, 4,436,752, Cl. 424-317.000.
Rowton, Richard L.; and Cuscurida, Michael, lo Texaco Inc High-
resilience polyurelhane foams having improved resistance lo shrink-
age 4,436,843, Cl 521-167.000
Rozenwaig, Boris; and Robin-Champigneul. Yves J. Device for switch-
ing signals by optical means and automatic switching units compris-
ing said device. 4,437,190, Cl 455-600.000.
Rudnick, Paul J : See-
Miller. Jerry W ; and Rudnick, Paul J., 4,437,086, Cl. 340-347.0DD
Rudolph, Gunlher: See—
Prinz, Bruno; Rockel, Manfred B ; Rudolph, Gunlher; Heubner,
Ulrich; and Zoebe, Hugo, 4,436,790, Cl. 428-675 000
Rueckeri, Barry J., to Eaton Corporation. Current source inverter
commutalion-spike-voliage protection circuit including over-current
and over- voltage protection 4,437,133, Cl 361-33.000.
Russak, Michael A., lo United Slates of America, Energy Electro-
chemical photovoltaic cell having ternary alloy film. 4.436.558. Cl
Russo, Neil: See—
Donate. Anthony C ; and Russo, Neil, 4,437,142, Cl 362-226 000
Russon, Darrel L ; and Wheeler, Warren H , to Boeing Company, The
Automated feed for a punch press and method of ustna same
4,436,007, Cl. 83-23.000.
Ruth, Rojger A.: See-
Purvis, Fay A ; Bennett, Roberi W ; and Ruth, Roger A , 4,436,487,
Cl. 417-46.000.
Ruli Machinery Works Ltd : See—
Senn, Georg; and Koch, Walter, 4,436,123, Cl. 139-452.000.
Ruli-le Sirake, B V : See-
van Mullekom, Hubert P., 4,436,122, Cl. 139-435.000.
Rulkowski, Edward J , to National Gypsum Company. Metal stud
4,435,936, Cl 52-481.000.
Rulkowski. Edward J ; and Krowl, Thomas R., to National Gypsum
Company. Vinyl siding aiiachment 4,435,938, Cl. 52-521.000.
Rux GmbH, Firma: See—
Dambroth, Jurgen, 4,435,951, Cl 56-400.050.
Ryan, Wayne L., to Sireck Laboratories, Inc Simulated human plate-
lets from red blood cells. 4,436,821, Cl 436-10 000.
Saccucci, Michael R. Counting device. 4,436,990, Cl. 235-1. OOR.
Sadao, Kozima: See—
Hisao, Makino; and Sadao, Kozima, 4,436,675. Cl. 261-77.000
Saenz. Jesus A : See-
Dean, Mark E ; Eggebrechl. Lewis C; Kummer. David A.; and
Saenz, Jesus A., 4,437,092, Cl. 340-703.000.
Saida, Hiroji: See—
Okudaira, Sadayuki; Saida. Hiroji; Sakai. Yoshio; Nishimatsu.
Shiaeru; and Suzuki. Keizo. 4.436.581. Cl. 156-643.000.
Saikawa, Isamu: See—
Hon, Takako; Yoshida, Chosaku; Kiba, Yaiuo; Takeno, Ryuko;
Nakano. Joji; Niita, Jun; Kishimoio. Sumiko; Murakami, Shoha-
PI 36
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13. 1984
*^ Tsuda. HiMtsugu: and Saikawa. lumu, 4.436.921. CI.
Saiki. Alsushi; Iwayanagi. Takao: Nonogaki. Saburo; Nishida, Takashi
and Harada. Seiki. to Hiiachi, Ltd. Selective etching method of
polyimide type resin film. 4.436.583. CI. 1 36-639. 100.
Saint Gobain Vitrage: See
Dran. Maunce; and Jamet. Bernard, 4,436.575. CI. 156-433.000
Saita. Hiroshi: See—
Tanaka. Osamu; Takeba. Kazuhiro; Saita. Hiroshi; Matsushita,
Yukinobu; and Koyabu, Koji, 4.436,563. CI. 148-26.000.
Saito, Yuichi: See—
Furukawa. Hiroshi; Saito. Yuichi; Imai. Akio; Yamamoto. Keisaku
Takao, Hiroyoshi; and Yoshida. Nobuyuki, 4,436,873, CI.'
523-3 14.000.
Saitoh. Teruo: 5^*—
'"*'• Takayoshi; Saitoh. Teruo; and Sannomiya. Hisayuki.
Saitou. Sinichi. to Olympus Optical Co.. Ltd. Reel shaft/reel hub fitting
apparatus 4.436.256. CI. 242-200.000. "
Sajami Chemical Research Center. See—
Isowa. Yoshikazu; Ohmori. Muncki; Mori. Kaoru; Ichikawa Tet-
suya; Nonaka. Yuji; Kihara. Keiichi; Oyama, Kiyoiaka; Satoh.
Heijiro; and Nishimura. Shigeaki. 4.436,925, CI. 560-19000
Sakaguchi. Kiyoshi: See—
Nakakobara. Takeshi, Sakaguchi. Kiyoshi; Ueda. Fumio; and Mu-
rase. Hiroyuki. 4.436.062, CI. 123-90.270
Sakai, Kazutada: See—
Yamagata, Ryutaro; Kozuka. Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi
Koyama. Shigeo; and Sakai. Kazutada. 4.436.412. CI. 355-15 OOo'
Sakai, Keijiro: 5^—
Muto. Nobuyoshi; Nagase. Hiroshi; Sakai. Keijiro; and Matsuda.
Yasuo. 4.437.051. CI. 318-808.000.
Sakai, Kiyoshi: See—
Ohta. Masafumi; and Sakai, Kiyoshi. 4.436,800, CI. 430-59 000
Sakai, Osamu: See—
Ogata, Masahiro; and Sakai, Osamu, 4,437,135, CI. 361-91 000
Sakai, Yoshio: See—
Okudaira, Sadayuki; Saida, Hiroji; Sakai. Yoshio; Nishimatsu,
Shigeru; and Suzuki. Keizo. 4,436.581, CI. 156-643.000
Sakamaki, Hisashi: See—
Inuzuka. Tsuneki; Ishida, Masato; Tanioka. Hiroshi; and Sakamaki,
Hisashi. 4.436.408. CI. 355-I4.00R.
Sakamoto, Kenuro: See—
'^'it'A'i'f !lil?*''*'"°'°' ^"*^"°' •"<! Sato, Takahisa. 4,436,922, CI.
549-25 1 .000.
Sakamoto, Noboru; Yamashita, Itaru; Wada, Satoshi; Yano, Kenichi
and Oda, Suehiro, to Kawasaki Steel Corporation. Vertical down
fo? ;?36'9l^'^L'2f9T2i'35a """"' """ ""*"« ""^'""' '''""
Sakamoto, Yoshiaki: See—
^i'!i?!''«°ii ^'I''^'?^';ni^"• '"°' *"<* Sakamoto. Yoshiaki.
#,4J0,BJI. CI. SOI-1 19.000.
Sakane. Toshio: See—
^'i''.'.''^''JlJi"''^'''= Sakane. Toshio; and Itoh. Yuji. 4.436.388. CI.
331-206.000.
Sakhamov, Vasily A.: See—
^5^"* y^^T^ ^ Kuchuk-Yatsenko. Sergei I.; Sakhamov,
Vastly A; Gahan, Bons A.; Asoytnts. Origory B.; and Tishura,
Vladimir I.. 4.436,974, CI. 219-66.000.
Sako. Yoichiro; and Odaka, Kentaro. to Sony Corporation. Method of
error correction. 4.437.185. CI. 371-39.000. »««•"!
Sakota, Kazuyuki: See—
Ueno, Ryuzo; Sakou. Kazuyuki; KawaU, Keiji; and Naito. Yo-
shiyuki. 4.436,670. CI. 26O-465.00B.
Sakuma. Nobuo: See—
Satomi. Toyokazu; and Sakuma, Nobuo, 4,436,407, CI. 355-1 1 000
Sakuraya. Toshikazu; Nakamura, Hideo; Harada. Nobuo; Fujii. Tet-
suya; and Emi, Toshihiko, to Kawasaki Steel Corporation. Method
266-47*000*'"* '"^*'** '°' refining a molten iron. 4,436,287. CI.
Salamone, Joseph C: See—
^'I'^k.!^^** ■'• ■"** Salamone, Joseph C. 4.436.730, CI.
Salant. Richard. Route mapping device. 4,437,085. CI. 34O.286.00M
^fJ?"«:*i ^I'^^.Mvwi? ^'"" Enterprises Ltd. Plant technique.
^,^JO,347, CI. 71-76.000.
Sancassiano S.p.A.: See—
Drocco, Amabile, 4,436,432, CI. 366-95.000.
Sanden Corporation: See—
''"J'!f?!l'?^ J'j'= ''"'"'hara, Seiichi; and Hiraga. Maaaharu.
4,436,465, CI. 409-243.000 ™— ««u.
^r^*i?S^''J^ ^^-.^.'f^;!^'^ «*"" **■<* *"•> »"•• •"ribute nurkings.
4,436,306, CI. 273-146.000. *^
Sanders, Robert N., to Ethyl Corporation. Production of synthetic
zeoUtes. 4.436,708, CI. 423-329.000/ '
Sanderson, John R.; Renken, Terry L.; and Watts, Lewis W.. Jr., to
Texaco Inc. Alkane aceutes produced by oxidative etterirication of
^Zi^J^ZS^ • «^'*'y" containing a rare earth oxide. 4,436.926, CI.
56(V246.000.
Sanderson, John R.; and Watu, Lewis W.. Jr., to Texaco Inc. Alkane
aceutes produced by oxidative estehfication of olefins over thallium
borate. 4.436.927. CI. 560-246.000.
Sanderson. John R.; Renken. Terry L.; and Watt^ Lewis W., Jr., to
TcMco Inc. Alkane aceutes produced by oxidaUve esterification of
CI sSmSS?^^ »y««™ conuining oxides and borates. 4.436,928.
Sanderson, John R.; and Watts, Lewis W . Jr.. to Texaco Inc. Alkane
acetates produced by oxidative esterification of olefins over alkali
earth metal borates. 4,436,929, CI. 560-246.000.
Sanderson, John R.; and Walts, Lewis W.. Jr.. to Texaco Inc. Alkane
acetates produced by oxidative esterification of olefins over alkali
metal borates 4.436.930. CI. 560-246.000.
Sanderson John R ; Watts. Lewis W. Jr.; and Renken. Terry L., to
Texaco Inc. Alkane acetates produced by oxidative esterification of
olefins over certain oxide catalysts. 4,436,931. CI. 560-246.000
Sanderson. John R.; Vanderpool. Steven H.; and Watts. Lewis W . Jr..
'^ 1 i**^° '"'^ Alkane acetates produced by oxidative esterification
or olefins over ammonium borate in the presence of a carboxylale ion
source. 4.436.932. CI. 560-246.000. 7 «= • «
Sandoz Ltd.: See—
'^1'*f«; SS!"'' ^*''" "«""•""; •nd Zesiger, Kari, 4,436.521. CI.
8-493.000.
Harr, Josi, 4,436,744, CI. 424-272.000.
Valenti, Salvatore, 4.436,524. CI. 8-551.000.
Sannomiya, Hisayuki: See—
'"^'•-,J'''"y°**''' Saitoh, Teruo; and Sannomiya, Hiuyuki,
4,437,1 1 1. CI. 358-44.000.
Sano, Eiichi, to Tokyo Kogaku Kikai Kabushiki Kaisha. Ophthalmic
w."ilIS*.Il!«""^'"* *o'''«'>« dutMce detecting means. 4,436.389. CI.
331-208.000.
Sano, Ichiro: See—
Suzuki, Yuichi; and Sano, Ichiro, 4,435,885, CI. 29-2.000.
Sano, Tatsuhiko: See—
Amano, Takehiro; Yoshikawa. Kensei; Sano, Tatsuhiko; Ohuchi,
Kutaka; Ishigura, Michihiro; Shiono, Manzo; Fujita. Yoshiji; and
Nishida, Takashi, 4,436,939, CI. 568-813.000.
Santa Lucia, Jack; and Trapp, Kenneth, to Independent Maching Com-
pany. Winding system. 4,436,249, CI. 242-I8.00R.
Sapkowski. Mechislao, to Honeck, Manfred Fred, a part interest. Sys-
tem and method of recording and reproducing wide band channel
358 335 000 ''^ *"**"* of several narrow band channels. 4,437.128. CI.
Sarrine, Robert J.: See—
Enzer, Steven E.; and Sarrine. Robert J.. 4.436,610, CI. 204-400 000
Sarser. David: See—
't4^25{°?r''24?:565!)r ""^''^ "^ '*^"'"' '^'^'-'^ °'
Sasaki. Takuma; Nakamichi. Kazuya; Tachibana. Yakudo; and Minami,
Kiyoshi. to Maruzcn Oil Co.. Ltd. Novel antitumor glycoprotein
substance and its preparation. 4.436,656, CI. 260-1 I2.00R.
Sasaki, Takuma; Nakamichi. Kazuya; Tachibana. Yakudo; and Minami,
Kiyoshi, to Maruzen Oil Co.. Ltd. Antitumor glycoprotein substance
and preparation thereof 4.436.657. CI. 260-1 12.00R
Sasscville. Roland E.; Chappell, Joseph S.; and Corcoran. Daniel J.. Jr..
to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Apparatus for treating a porous, absor-
if-JftTJlJf^*' ^"*' * '°*'"*'>'« chemical composition. 4,435,965, CI.
68-205 .OOR.
Sauke, Sachio: See—
Ichikawa, Mamoru; and Sauke, Sachio, 4,436,3 1 8, CI. 280- 104 000
Sato, Kiyoshi: See—
Nishikawa. Kazuo; Sato, Kiyoshi; Ichino, Hiroyuki; and Okura,
Keniti, 4.437,179, CI. 369-172.000.
Sato, Kozo; Iwakura, Ken; and Igarashi, Akira. to Fuji Photo Film Co..
Ltd. Image recording members. 4,436,920, CI. 549-227.000
Sato. Kunihiko: See—
Suzuki, Yukio; Sato, Kunihiko; and Muramatsu, Motovasu.
4,436,072, CI. 123-488.000.
Sato, Shinuro: See—
Nakazawa, Shigeo; and Sato, ShinUro, 4,435,973, CI. 72-327.000.
Sato. Takahisa: Sfe—
•^'J*' Yuichi^kamoto. Kenuro; and Sato, Takahisa. 4,436.922. CI.
Sato, Takeo: See—
Takahara, Takeshi; Sato, Takeo; Itou, Takeo; and Tamatani.
Masaaki, 4,436,646. Q. 232-301. 40S.
Sato, Yo; and Kashiwaba, Tadao, to Kabushiki Kaisha Sato. Portable
label applying machine. 4,436,573, CI. 156-384.000.
Satoh, Heijiro: See—
Isowa, Yoshikazu; Ohmori, Muncki; Mori, Kaoru; Ichikawa. Tet-
suya; Nonaka. Yuji; Kihara. Keiichi; Oyama. Kiyotaka; Satoh.
Heijiro; and Nishimura. Shigeaki. 4.436,925. CI. 560-19.000.
Satoh, Seiichi: See—
Yamaguchi, Noboru; and Satoh. Seiichi, 4,435,881, CI. 24-16.0PB
Satoh, Tetsuo: See—
Maruhashi, Kenji; Kojima. Ichiro; Oguchi, Vutaka; Endoh,
Noboni; and Satoh, TeUuo, 4,436.663, CI. 260-245.910.
Satomi, Toyokazu; and Sakuma, Nobuo, to Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Electrophotographic reproduction of a three-dimensional object.
4,436,407, CI. 355-1 1.000.
Sauer, Rudolf: See—
Hafner, Udo; Herth, Harro; Kienzle, Wolfgang; Knapp. Heinrich;
Krauss, Rudolf; Umbke, Manfred; Paachke. Werner; and Sauer,
Rudolf. 4.436,071, CI. 123-472.000.
Sauereuig GmbH: See-
van Ouwerkerk, Wouter C, 4,436,032. CI. 101-120.000.
Sawabe, Maaaki; and Kumagai, Tadanobu. to ToyoU Jidosha Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha. Sealing device for joint. 4,436.310. CI. 277-1 1. OOO.
Sawada. Kozo: See—
Aihara. Tettuo; Nakayanu. Yasuhani; Umeyama, Koichi; Sa««da.
Kozo; and Shinohara. Masaaki. 4.436.M9. a. 523-301.000.
March 13. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 37
Sawyer, Daniel D ; and Thompson, Marvin J., to Sperry Corporation.
rff 'l^'lSi*"'**^"*'" ^'"' **"•' '»'"» of cache entries. 4,437,155, CI.
364-200.000.
Saxena. Arjun N. Multilevel metallization proceu for integrated cir-
cuits. 4,436,582. CI. 156-656.000.
^ti^,' ^°" ^ • Cwttgnos, Leonce F., Jr.; Schrader. Charles H.;
Dillingham. Edward W.; and Scott. Richard P.. deceased (by Scott.
Candice Chord, executrix), to Texaco Inc. Two stage catalytic crack-
ing process 4.436.613. CI. 208-74.000.
Scanlon. William F.. to Heinemann Electric Company. Circuit protec-
c\ ?nn!"f * '*'"'' ^"*''" ''* *""*"' ■"'^ terminals therefor. 4,436,972,
Scartazzini, Riccardo: See—
Sedelmeier, Gottfried; and Scartazzini, Riccardo, 4,436,903, CI
544-016.000.
Schaap, A. Paul; Busch, George E ; and Nolen. Robert L.. Jr . to KMS
Fusion. Inc. Storage and rcirieval of singici oxygen. 4.436.715. CI
423-579.000.
Schaefer, Rudolf Clamp joint for pipes. 4,436,327, CI. 285-364.000.
Schafer, Rudolf: See-
Mayer, Karl M.; and Schafer, Rudolf, 4,436,430, CI. 366-13.000.
Schall. William R. Globe-shaped bells with single-piece shells.
4.436,052.0. 116-148.000.
Schaumann, Wolfgang; Kaiser. Fritz; Voigtiander. Wol^ang; Hoyer.
Edgar; and Neubert. Peter, to Boehringer Mannheim GmbH. Ketals
of 3"'-dehydrocardenolide tridigiloxosides. 4,436,735, CI.
Scheck, Georg: See—
Storandt, Ralf; Scheck. Georg; and Biennann, Peter, 4,436,321, CI.
280-612.000.
Scheie, Carl E.; and Muma, G. Arnold, to Brunswick Corporation.
Method and apparatus for analyzing conditioner on a bowling lane
surface. 4.437.010. CI. 250-459.100.
Schering Corporation: See-
Ganguly. Ashit K.; Liu, Yi-Tsung; and Mallams, Alan K.,
4,436,729, CI. 424-180.000.
Scherrer. Edward P., to FMC Corporation. Mechanism for connecting
and disconnecting crane sections. 4,436,444, CI 403-24.000.
Schettler, Helmut: See—
Miersch, Eddehard F.; Pollmann, Kurt; Schettler, Helmut; and
Zuhlke. Rainer, 4,437,022, CI. 307-270.000.
Scheu, Ernst: See—
Schnabel, Wolfram; Scheu, Ernst; and Serbent, Harry. 4,436,286.
CI. 266-44.000.
Schick, Martin J.; and Knitter, Kathy A., to Diamond Shamrock Chem-
icals Company. Aqueous slurries of carbonaceous materials.
4,436.528,6.44-51.000.
SchifTner, Gerhard, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Sensor which is
sensitive to pressure, tension, torsion and heat and a process of opera-
tion. 4,436,422, CI. 356-349.000.
Schloman, William W., Jr., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The.
Phenol-melamine resins for improving rubber to metal adhesion.
4,436,853, CI. 524-91.000.
Schmalbein, Dieter: See—
Biehl, Reinhard; and Schmalbein, Dieter, 4,437.063, CI.
324-316.000.
Schmid, Eduard. Preuure dressing with cushion. 4,436,089. CI.
Schmid, Friedbert; and Raasch, Hans, to Suhlecker, Fritz; and Suh-
lecker, Hans. Opening roller unit for open-end spinning installations.
4,435,953, CI. 5^-408.000.
Schmid, Manfred: See—
Donner, Siegmar; Strempler, Ounler; and Schmid, Manfred,
4,436,298, CI. 271-10.000.
Schmidlkofer, Jakob: See— '
Pirson, Ewald; Schmidlkofer, Jakob; and Innertsberger, Ernst,
4,436,647, CI. 252-358.000.
Schmidt, Gunther; and Etzler. Carl-Christian, to Domier System
OmbH. Apparatus for the controlled advance and retraction of a
flexible pay-out connection fixed to a satellite body. 4,436,239, CI.
244-3. 100.
Schmidt, Paul; and Legille, Edouard, to Paul Wurth S.A. Rotary sup-
port for continuous casting ladles. 4,436,293, CI. 266-276.000.
Scnmidt. Ulrich, to Roielmann ft Co., Firma. Pipe-mounted valve-iyDe
flow meter. 4,433,9M. CI. 73-198.000.
Schmidt, William P.; and Hutchinson. Franklin D., to Mirror Lite
Company. Elliptical mirror for vehicular use. 4,436.372, CI.
Schmitt, Donald C; and Harvill, Melvin J., to Reed Industries, Inc.
Multi-coin chute mechanism. 4,436,195, CI. 194-92.000.
Schmitt, Manfred: See—
Eiaele, Hermann; Moller, Heinz; and Schmitt, Manfred, 4,437,134,
CI. 364-187.000.
Schmitt, Wilhelm, to Carl Freudenberg, Firma. Caaaette seal having a
counterring free from unrelieved internal streia. 4.436,317, CI.
277-134.000.
Schnabel, Roland, to JENAer Olaswerk Schott ft Gen. Capillary
diaphragms for use in diafiitration, 4,436,626, CI. 210^32.000.
Schnabel, Wolfram; Scheu, Ernst; and Serbent, Harry, to Melallgesell-
ichaft Aktiengeaellachaft. Proceaa of afterburning combustible con-
stiluenu of exhaust gaies from rotary kilns. 4,436,286, CI. 266-44.000.
Scbnadig Corporation: See—
Talley, Thomas H.; Sheets, Lee W.; and Wiley, Alvin F., 4,433,860,
a. 3-13.000.
Schneider, Charlca. Framelcis foam b«ae for upholsured seating furni-
ture and method. 4.43«.343, CI. 297-436.000.
Scholz. Wolfgang: See—
Zipp. Otmar; Bollmann, Heinz; Stutz, Herbert; and Scheie, Wolf-
gang. 4.436,869, CI. 525-51.000.
Schonafinger. Kari; Beyerle, Rudi; Bohn. Helmut; Just, Melitta; Mar-
torana. Piero A.; and Nitz, Rolf-Eberhard, to Cassella Aktiengesell-
schaft. 3-(N-<Lower alkyl>-N-(tetrahydro-3-thienyl S,5-dioxide)hyd-
nonimines. 4.436,743. CI. 424-269.000.
Schonwald, Siegfried, to Siemens Aktiengetellachaft Compresaor and
lubricating pump assembly. 4,436,490, CI. 417-372.000
Schoonhoven, Richard: See—
Moschitz, Gerhard; and Schoonhoven, Richard, 4,437.170, CI
364-900.000.
Schrader, Charles H.: See—
Sayles, Scott M.; Castagnos, Leonce F., Jr.; Schrader, Charles H.;
Dillingham, Edward W; and Scott, Richard P., deceased,
4.436,613. CI. 208-74.000. ««*"^.
Schreiber. Paul T.. to Tandy Corporation. Switchable bandpau filter.
4,436.956. CI 179.2.00C.
Schriever. Frederick G Self-aligning load leveling device. 4,436,268.
Schroeder, Arnold; and Roskoit, Lodewijk. to Akzona Incorporated.
Proceu for the manufacture of a foundry core or mould. 4,436.844,
Schroeter. Siegfried H.: See—
Ashby. Bruce A.; and Schroeter, Siegfried H.. 4.436,924, CI.
556-416.000.
Schrother, Gerhard, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Electromagnetic
switchgear. 4.437.020. CI. 307-135.000.
Schrotter. Gerhard: See—
Keller. Wolfgang; and Schrotter, Gerhard, 4,436.378. CI.
1 56-620.000.
Schruben, Johanna S.: See—
Steinbruegge. Kenneth B Schruben. Johanna S.; and Taylor, Lyie
H, 4,436,363, CI. 350-1600
Schuldi. Gerhardi. to ADS • Anker GmbH Cash drawer for cash
registers in tellers' stations, ules counters or the like. 4,436,989, CI.
235-22.000.
Schultz. Ward E.: See-
Arnold. Dan M.; Smith. Harry D.. Jr.; and Schultz, Ward E..
4.436.996. CI. 250-256000
Schulz. Rudi; Puesicl, Hubert; Weber, Georg; and Kuerten. Heribert. to
BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Reactor for hydrogenaling coal slurry.
4.436.702. CI. 422-195.000.
Schuize, Stephen R.: See—
Rood. Paul W.; Mason. Charles D.; and Schuize, Stephen R..
4.436.872. CI. 525-179.000.
Schupp, Eberhard: See—
Batzill, Wolfgang; Diefenbach. Horsi; Geist. Michael; and Schupp,
Eberhard, 4,436,878. CI 525-438.000
Schupp, Gerold: See—
Fuchs, Helmut V.; Schupp, Gerold; and Voigtsberger. Carl-Alex-
ander, 4,435,974, CI. 73-40.50A.
Schulz, Alain: See-
Jacobs, Pierre; Poncelet. Georges; and Schulz, Alain, 4,436,832, Q.
502-84.000.
Schulz, Hans U.: See—
Buhler. Arthur; and Schulz. Hans U., 4,436.659, CI. 26O-I46.0OR.
Schuwerk, Wolfgana. to Escher Wyu Aktiengesellschaft. Controlled
defiection roll with control arrangement. 4.435.971. CI. 72-243.000.
Schwartz. Hermann, to Siegfried Preyer. Photoelectric measurement of
moving filamentary material. 4,436,427, CI. 336-383.000.
Schwartzman, Steven M.: See—
Ribi, Edgar E.; Schwartzman, Steven M.; and Canlrell, John L..
4,436.728, CI. 424-177.000.
Schwarzmann, Matthias: See—
Broecker. Franz J.; Oniendler, Karl-Heinz; Marosi, LaszIo;
Schwarzmann, Matthias; Triebskom, Bruno; and Zirker,
Guenter, 4,436,833. CI. 302- 1 76.000.
Schwenk, Dennis P.: See—
Coldren, Daniel R.; and Schwenk, Dennis P., 4.436.358, CI. 339-
I7.00C.
Scientific Measurement Systems, Inc.: See—
Morgan, Ira L.; Sudarshan, E. C George; Mitchell, Alvin L.;
Coose, James P.; Ellinger, Hunter D.; and Jaggcr, James W.,
4,437,006. CI. 25O-363.0OS.
SCM Corporation: Ser—
Longrod, Scott J., 4.436,192, CI. 192-43.100.
Scott, Allen W., to General Electric Company. Control knob to shaft
assembly. 4,435,993, CI. 74-333.000.
Scott, Candice Chord, executrix: See—
Sayles, Scott M.; Castagnos, Leonce P., Jr.; Schrader, Charles H.;
Dillingham, Edward W.; and Scott, Richard P., dcccaicd,
4,436.613.0.208-74.000.
Scott, Joseph A.: See—
Bcquette, Robert J.; Hobbs, Linda G.; and Scott, Joseph A.,
4,436,738. CI. 424-238.000.
Scott, Richard P., deceased: See—
Sayles, Scott M.; Castagnos. Leonce F., Jr.; Schrader. Charles H.;
Dillingham, Edward W.; and Scott, Richard P., deceaaed,
4,436,613, CI. 208-74.000.
Scott, Robert J., to Union Carbide Corporation. Nonionic surfacunu
for automatic dishwasher detergents. 4,436,642, CI. 232-93.000.
Seaburg, Paul A.; and Luitensleger, Richard W., to Armoo Inc. Alter-
nating V-truas roof system and method of erection. 4,433,932, Q.
32-263.000.
PI 38
LIST OF PATENTEES
SeaJectro Corporation. See—
^'2wi«?O0O°" "' *"** '"einman. Harvey M.. 4.436.991. CI
^3?-349 00o"' ^"■**''"8u«h'ng cigar or cigarette. 4,436.101, CI
Sedelmeier. Gottfned; and Scartazzini, Riccardo, to Ciba-Gcigy Corvo-
ration^ Process for the production of 7 /3-substituted-3.unsubstituted-
J-cephem-4-carboxylic acid compounds. 4,436,903. CI. 544-016.000
aegaJ, David A.: See —
Segawa. Yoshiaki: See—
^''^a-Yoshio; Suzuki. Yoshiaki; Murakami. Ryohei; and Segawa.
Yoshiaki. 4,436.352, CI. 312-228 000.
Seguy. Bernard R. Method for reducing desorbent consumption in
recovery systems. 4,436.534, CI. 55-58.5)0
Seiberhch, Walter, to Maag Gear- Wheel & Machine Company Limited.
Clamping apparatus for a cutter. 4,436.464. CI 409-233 000
i iH: l^I,*''j?f' /-„''SPJ.*/S^"* attachment for the front end of a tractor
*.*jo.io^. CI. 172-810.000.
^&I'^f."''^^ :.'fif !?^*I?.*^°^""°" APP«"«"s for forming
bottom heat seals. 4.436,576. CI. 156-543 000
Seigneurin. Laurent: See—
Seiki. Kazuo; Motobayashi. Kozo; Yoshizawa. Toshio; Yoshida. Yo-
shiaki; and Onoue. Keiji. to Kabushiki Kaisha Toyoda Jidoshokki
MT5 9M CI 57^8°(«)"'"^ **'"" '" "'^""""'^ *P'""'"« """
Seiko Koki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Morino. Yukio. 4.436.418. CI. 356-1.000
Seimiya Ryubun, Iwai. Fumio; and Nosaka. Isao, to Konishiroku Photo
Industry Co.. Ltd. Copying machine. 4.436.402, CI 355-3.00R
Seki, Fumio, to Yoshida Kogyo K K. Apparatus for attaching fastener
elements onto a garment. 4,436.238. CI 227-149 000
Sekihara. Kensuke: See—
''M3"73°6.a'tl-lS.'(S."' '""""^^ '"' ''°''"°- "'^'^'-
Sekiwa. Mitsunao: See—
Nakamura. Hiromichi; Urano, Haruya; Kojima, Tatsuo and
Sekiwa, Mitsunao, 4.436.006, CI. 83-13.000
&'im cV*72"239'oob^''* '^°" "'""*'"* '*'^'" ^°' '°"*"« •"*"
Selines, Ronald J.: See—
Andreini. Rockne J.; Mehlman, Stewart K.; Selines. Ronald J. and
Agrawal. Balkishan. 4,436,553, CI. 75-52.000
m. L .^ • AA?r^i- !J.'"^'*'''«' q"'ck-release plumbness indicat-
ing apparatus. 4.435.908. CI. 33-376.000.
Senco Products, Inc.: See—
Jobe, William T., 4.436.236. CI. 227-123.000
^227^30 0)0°'°'*'^ ^' "'^ Crutcher. John P.. 4.436.237. CI.
Senco Southeast. Inc.: See—
Kennedy, George W.. 4.436.234. CI. 227-4 000
Senda. Kousaku: See—
"^fe™ ^"^c • ^'^5'' *^^y^^^- ^achi. Hiroshi; Mashida.
Hiromi; and Senda. Kousaku. 4.436.982. CI. 219-130 510
5»enn, Georg; and Koch, Walter, to Ruti Machinery Works Ltd Device
l°9.452'oa) '"^"'"'^ material for use on a loom. 4,436.123. CI.
Serbent. Harry: See—
^0*266^4 OOo""" ^^"' ^™*'' ""'' ^''*"'' "'"y- '♦•■♦^6.286.
Sette. Robert A: See—
Dorman, John G.; Balbo, Anthony M.; Randall, Charles E. and
Sette. Robert A.. 4.436.184. CI. 187.29.00R.
164^*00)"* "°"^°"'*' continuous casting apparatus. 4,436.143. CI.
Shadinger, Peter R.: See—
^M36?cS?C^:^4]?.2m(;6o'"" "*" ""' '""''"«"• '''•" •^•
^ M36;nTci.^l3l"?4j'il»^'" ^*"'""*' acoustical pipe insulation.
Shain, Guey-Ji Decorative flower pot. 4.435.918. CI. 47-79 000
Shambelan, Robert C : See—
'^43T 253*000*'' " ' *"** Shambelan. Robert C, 4.436,509. CI.
Shapiro. Alan K.: See—
^ 4T6"74. a"4r4:4l7.^(£^'.'"''''' '^^°' ^^ *"' ''"P'^°' ^'^ '^ '
Sharon Manufacturing Company: See—
Hudson. Sharon J.. Jr.. 4,436.147. CI. 165-165.000.
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Funada. Fumiaki; Kozaki. Syuichi; Matsuura, Masataka; and Wada.
Tomio. 4,436.379. CI. 35O-347.0OE.
Yano. Kohzo; Hamada. Hiroshi; Inami. Yasuhiko; and Wada,
Tomio. 4.436.380. CI. 350-357.000.
Shaw. Jane E.: See—
^'?l{^A'?i/°|i?^^™'^^""' ^"'o**" ^- ""<! Shaw. Jane E..
♦.4J6.741. CI. 424-267.000.
Sheads. Richard E.; and Segal. David A., to Union Carbide Corpora-
tion Two solvent process for preparation of esters of 3.5-dibromo-4-
hydronybenzonitnie. 4.436.665, CI 260-404 000 ">umu-.-
Sheett, Lee W See—
^ c'r^s-T? oST " ' ^''**"' ^^ ^ • *"** ^''**'' '^''''" ^' '♦•'♦^'••^o-
March 13, 1984
Shell Internationale Research MaatschappiJ B V See-
Bull. Michael J., 4,436.667, CI. 260-465.00D
^fi^^^'. h^^^^ ^ ^' ■"'^ Baas. Albertus H., 4.436.706. CI.
423-65.000.
Shell Oil Company: See—
Baardman, Frank; van Helden. Robert; and de Nie-Sarink. Mar-
garetha J.. 4.436.937. CI. 564-«)9.000
Bannon. Robert P.. 4.436.533. CI. 55-26.000.
Bemi. Albert J.. 4.437,175. CI. 367-24.000.
Olson. Donald C. 4.436.711. CI. 423-573.00G
Olson. Donald C. 4.436.712. CI. 423-573.00G
Olson, Donald C. 4.436.713. CI. 423-573.00G
Olson. Donald C. 4.436.714. CI. 423-573.00G.
Smoot. Arren F.; and De Jong. Sijtze. 4.436,449. CI. 405-170000
Smutny. Edgar J. 4.436.946. CI 58S-5 10.000.
Shennan. Christopher D.; and Fry. Michael W.. to Ciba-Geigy AG
Method of treating a dye image. 4,436,798. CI. 430-17 000
Shepard. Joseph F.: See-
Gardiner James R , Makarewicz. Stanley R.; Revitz. Martin; and
Shepard. Joseph F, 4.437.108. CI. 357-59.000
Sherk. Fred T. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Hydrocarbon wash
liquid for catalyst separation. 4.436.901. CI 528-498 000
Sherwood Medical Company: See—
Eseifan, Ali H.. 4.436.822. CI. 436-164.000
^^''"'7lI!i^"'^ Ky '^,°''w'"' '8°' ' • Donskoi. Efim M.; Manov. Grigory
L.; Zhdanov. Vasily V.; Berger, Elena S.; Popov. Valery M. Pavlov
Alcxei A.; and Akchurin, Rashid Z., to Gosudarstvcnny Na'uchnois-
sledovatelsky. Proektny I Konstruktorsky Institut Splavov I
Obrabotki Tsvetnykh Metallov "Giprotsvetmetobrabotka" Pipe-
welding mill for production of coiled pipes. 4,435.886. CI. 29-33 OOD
Shibakawa, Riichiro: See—
Celmer. Walter D.; Cullen. Walter P.; Shibakawa. Riichiro; and
Tone. Junsuke, 4.436,747, CI. 424-274.000.
Shibata, Yoshiaki: See—
^ mTloboo'°"^'''°' "*^ Shibata. Yoshiaki. 4.436.068. CI.
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Takahara Takeshi; Sato. Takeo; Itou. Takeo; and Tamauni.
Masaaki, 4.436.646. CI. 252-30 1.40S.
Shigemura. Tatsuya: See— s
Yoshida. Masashi; Yokota. Hajime; Aman. Mitsuji; and Shieemura
Tatsuya. 4.437.129. CI. 360-85.000. « snigemura.
Shigeru. Jhono. to Tempo G. Means for retaining jewelery for inter-
locking with precise preforms. 4.435.963. CI. 63-18.000
Shimada, Sumio: See —
Akiyama Hiroyuki; Shimada, Sumio; Hirosawa. Kuninori; and
Kuwabara.Hideki, 4,436.840. CI. 521-58.000.
Shimano Industrial Company Limited: See—
Shimano. Keizo. 4.435.983. CI. 73-493.000.
Shimano. ^eizo. to Shimano Industrial Company Limited. Handle stem
for a bicycle. 4.435.983. CI. 73-493.000
Shimaoka Motohiro. to Alps Electric Co.. Ltd. Flexible magnetic disk
device. 4.437.132. CI. 360-105.000.
Shimauchi Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kitano. Masuo. 4.436.436. CI. 368-204.000.
Shimazaki. Yasumi: See—
Tsuyama. Yoshito; Shimazaki. Yasumi; Kakita. Kazutoshi and
Hirokawa. Toshio. 4.436.239. CI. 228-17.000
Shimizu, Fumio. to Light Koki Co.. Ltd. Lens group shifting mecha-
nism for zoom binoculars. 4.436.387. CI. 350-556.0(5o
Shimizu. Shigeo; Takano. Hiroyuki; Yoshimura. Shoji; and Takada
f 4i'i9W. C^52^27'ooo''"™*^"''"' ^° ' ^''' Cephalosporins.
Shimizu. Tetsuo to Nissan Motor Company. Limited. Hatchback door
of a motor vehicle. 4.436.336. CI. 296-76 000.
Shin Meiwa Industry Co.. Ltd.: See—
Mochizuki. Taketoshi; Matsuo. Kazuya; Kudo. Mituo; Arai. Akira-
Yamada. Junichi; Shono. Keizi; Aoki. Masaaki; Ohmori. Masai-
chi; and Nishi. Genichiro. 4.435.962. CI. 62-175 000
Shinohara. Masaaki: See—
Aihara. Tetsuo; Nakayama. Yasuharu; Umeyama, Koichi; Sawada.
Kozo; and Shinohara. Masaaki. 4,436,849. CI. 523-501.000.
Shinohara. Toshio: See—
Yamabe. Masaaki; Higaki, Hiromichi; Shinohara, Toshio; Tanabe
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama. Shunsuke, 4.436,772. CI. 427-379 000
Yamabe. Masaaki; Higaki. Hiromichi; Shinohara. Toshio; Tanabe.
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama. Shunsuke. 4.436.773. CI. 427-380.000
Shinozaki. Nozomu; Neki. Shigeo; and Dohi. Takashi. to Matsushiu
4%'."o^i!"c'iiSiS^ooo':'' "^ '''^'°' '°' ""'"« "^'""«
Shiono. Manzo: See—
Amano Takehiro; Yoshikawa. Kensei; Sano. Tatsuhiko; Ohuchi.
Kuuka; Ishigura. Michihiro; Shiono. Manzo; Fujiu. Yoshiji; and
Nishida. Takashi. 4.436.939. CI. 568-813.000.
Shiota, Ikuo: See—
Nishizawa. Jun-ichi; and ShioU, Ikuo. 4.436,770, CI. 427-255.300
Shipulina, Ljudmila D.: See—
Vichkanova, Serafima A.; Shipulina. Ljudmila D.; Olyzin. Vladi-
mir I.; Bankovsky. Alcxandr I.; Pimenov. Mikhail G.; and
cu . .^7»c^- Klim I.. 4.436.732. CI. 424-180.000.
Shiraki. Manabu: See—
^^I(i?98 «»''"'''' ^*"*''"= *"** Eguni, Kazuhito, 4,437.029, CI.
^*')?!^iJ^°'*" ^i- •".** McVety. Ronald E.. to RCA Corporation.
MW 24""^! '228-264 000 °** °^ '^"°^<^™i 'e*dles8 components.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 39
Shiue. Chyna-Yann; and Wolf. Alfred P.. to United Sutes of America.
Energy. '■F-4-Fluoroantipyrine. 4.436,717, CI. 424-1.100.
Shono, Keizi: See—
Mochizuki, Taketoshi; Matsuo, Kazuya; Kudo, Mituo; Arai. Akira;
Yamada. Junichi; Shono, Keizi; Aoki. Masaaki; Ohmori. Masai-
chi; and Nishi. Genichiro. 4.435,962. CI. 62-175.000.
Shop-Vac Corporation: See—
Berfield. Robert C. 4.435.877. CI. 15-326.000.
Shore. John H Gate valve. 4.436.283. CI. 251-174.000.
Shurden. Charles H.: See-
Kelly. James C; and Shurden. Charles H.. 4,436,231, CI.
223-40.000.
Sibley. Alan T.: See-
Buck. Daniel M.; Sibley. Alan T.; and Kaiser. John J.. 4,436.696. CI.
419-57.000.
Siegfried Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Molnar, Istvan; Thiele. Kurt; Geissmann. Felix; and Jahn. Ulrich.
4.436.913. CI. 548-316.000.
Siegfried Preycr: See-
Schwartz. Hermann. 4.436.427. CI. 356-385.000.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Diepers. Heinrich. 4.437.033. CI. 310-334.000.
Guenther. Werner. 4.437.144, CI. 362-275.000.
Haendle. Joerg; and Horbaschek, Heinz, 4,437,1 17, CI. 358-1 1 1.000.
Hoffmann, Richard; and Zobawa, Franz, 4,436,362. CI 339-
I03.00M.
Kandler. Erich, 4,437,099, CI. 343-756.000.
Keller, Wolfgang; and Schrotter, Gerhard, 4,436,578, CI
156-620.000.
Moschitz, Gerhard; and Schoonhoven, Richard, 4,437,170, CI
364-900.000.
OphofT, Paul-Arthur; and Weinel, Johann, 4,437,005, CI.
250-343.000.
Schiffner, Gerhard. 4.436.422. CI. 356-349.000.
Schonwald, Siegfried. 4,436,490, CI. 417-372.000.
Schrother, Gerhard, 4,437,020, CI. 307-135.000.
Veith, Werner, 4,437,044, CI. 315-366.000.
Siemens Gammasonics Inc.: See-
Anderson, William, 4,437,161, CI. 364-414.000.
Siemon Company, The: See-
Knickerbocker. Robert H.. 4.436.360. CI. 339-97.00P.
Sigiols. John P.: See—
Bonham. Richard T.; Sigiols. John P.; and Dinkelacker. Paul H..
4,436,045. CI. 112-313.000.
Silks. Walter; and Gonski. Joseph, to Goodman Equipment Corpora-
tion. Continuous mining machine having contour cutters. 4,436,345.
CI. 299-59.000.
Silverman. Peter J.: See-
Rose. Donald K.; and Silverman, Peter J., 4,436,579. CI.
156-626.000.
Silverstein, Lewis S.: See—
Dahlgren. William V.. Jr.; Silverstein. Lewis S.; and Claire. Ed-
ward W.. 4.437.150. CI. 364-474.000.
Simjian, Luther G. Check controlled metering device. 4.436,992, CI.
235-381.000.
Simmonds, Robert C, Jr ; and Gilbride, Andrew J., to USM Corpora-
tion. Method of lasting shoes. 4,436,771, CI. 427-284.000.
Simmons, Louis D., to United States of America. Air Force. Hermetic
package using membrane seal. 4,436.220. CI. 220-359.000.
Simmons Universal Corporation: .See—
King. Frank R.; and Engler. Donald J.. 4.435.862. CI. S-66.000.
Simmons. William J.; and Tinder, Richard, to Eastman Kodak Com-
pany. Sheet handling apparatus. 4.436.404, CI. 355-3.0SH.
Simms. John A.: See—
Brixius. Darryl W.; and Simms, John A.. 4.436.885. CI. 526-214.000.
Simon. Hans. Cable socket with traction relief for the housings of
electric machines. 4.436.265. CI. 248-56.000.
Simon. Joseph A. Process for forming integral spindle-axle tubes.
4.435,972. CI. 72-256.000.
Simonotti. Lucio; and Motta. Carlo, to Ing. C. Olivetti ft C, S.p.A.
Apparatus for depositing valuables in envelopes with automatic
envelope dispensing. 4,436,182, CI. 186-37.000.
Simons U.S.A. Corporation: See—
Callaway, Milton A., 4,435,864, CI. 5-453.000.
Simpson, Frank F., to Black & Decker Inc. Arrangement for converting
rotary motion to reciprocatory motion. 4.436.163. CI. 173-117.000.
Sims. James O. Method of manufacture of hydraulic cylinders utilizing
bronze overlays for engaging surfaces. 4.435.893. CI. 29-412.000.
Sincerbox, Glenn T.: See-
Depp. Steven W.; and Sincerbox, Glenn T.. 4,436.420, CI.
356-128.000.
Sineltchikov, Andrei K.: See—
Andreev. Anatoly A.; Gavriiko, Igor V.; Gavrilov, Alexei G.;
Vereschaka, Anatoly S.; Zhed. Viktor P.; Padalka. Valentin G.;
and Sinelschikov, Andrei K.. 4,436,830. CI. 501-96.000.
Singer, Barry M., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Pyroelectric vidicon
with improved signal-to-noise ratio. 4,437,118, CI. 358-113.000.
Singer Company. The: See —
Cantida, Edilberto, 4.436,043, CI. 112-221.000.
Kumar. Shri A.; Ljung, Bo H. G.; and Koper. Jamet G., 4,436,423,
CI. 356-350.000.
Singer, Mark I.: See—
Blom, Eric D.; and Singer, Mark I., 4,435,853, CI. 3-1.300.
Sioux Steam Cleaner Corporation: See-
Finger. John P., 4,436,113, CI. 137-565.000.
SKF Kugellagerfabriken GmbH: See-
Ernst. Horst M.; Brandenstein, Manfred; Walter. Lothar and
Olschewski, Armin. 4.435.890, CI 29-148 40R.
Horling, Peter; Hetterich, Hermann; Dobhan, Herbert; and KIud-
fel. Norbert. 4,435.889, CI. 29-148.40C.
Olschewski, Annin; Brandenstein, Manfred; and Kunkel, Heinrich.
4.436.516. CI. 464-128 000
Skrzec, Adam E.. to Suuffcr Chemical Company. Fluid bed process for
preparing phenylphosphonous dichlondc. 4.436.673. CI. 260-543 OOP
Skupin, Georg: See—
Hofmann, Hansdieter; Rothe. Hans-Jochen; Skupin. Geors and
Wolff, Konrad, 4,436.898, CI. 528-336.000.
Slack. Ian D.; Ellis. David G.; and Firth. Colin, to Plasticisers Limited
Reinforcement product for use in cement boards and a method of
manufacturing said product and boards. 4.436.564. CI. 156-42 000
Sloan Valve Company: See—
Billeter. Henry R.. 4.436.116, CI. 137-625.470.
Smadar. Yechiel: See-
Trilling. David M.; and Smadar. Yechiel. 4.436.759, Q.
Smay. John W . to Hughes Aircraft Company. System for autonomous
earth-pointing acquisition of a dual-spin satellite. 4,437,047. CI.
318-649.000
Smetana. Michael: See—
Ergler. James M.; Kohn. Harold; and Smetana. Michael. 4.436.001
CI. 81-9.510
Smirl. Richard L.. to Borg- Warner Corporation. Variable pulley trans-
mission. 4.436.193. CI. 192-107.00C.
Smith. Glen H.. to Morgan Industries. Inc. Disconnecuble valve motor
drive. 4.436.278. CI. 251-130.000.
Smith, Harry D.. Jr.: See-
Arnold. Dan M.; Smith. Harry D.. Jr.; and Schultz. Ward E
4.436.996. CI. 250-256.000.
Smith International. Inc.: See—
Garrett, William R.. 4.436.118. CI. 138-110.000.
Smith, Iri W.. to Raytheon Company. High-precision reflectometer
4.436.426. CI. 356-369.000.
Smith. Paul; Lemstra. Pieter J.; Kirschbaum. Robert; and Pijpers,
Jacques P. L.. to Sumicarbon B V. Proceu for the production of
polymer filaments having high tensile strength. 4.436.689. CI
264-204.000.
Smith. Paul K.. to Pierce Chemical Company. lodinatins reaaent
4.436.718. CI. 424-1.100.
Smith, Stephen L.: See-
Hudson, Edwin L; and Smith. Stephen L., 4.437.171. CI
365-177.000.
Smith. Wayne G. Gun and resilient loop projectile therefor. 4.436.077.
CI. 124-18.000.
Smitka. Tim A.; Bunge, Richard H.; French. James C; and Bloem.
Russell J., to Warner-Lambert Company. 12'-Hydroxyverrucarin J
and iso-satratoxin H. 4.436,750. CI. 424-279.000.
Smolarek. James, to Union Carbide Corporation. Shell and tube heat
exchanger. 4.436.146. CI. 165-111.000.
Smoot. Arren F.; and De Jong, Sijtze, to Shell Oil Company Drill ship
pipe capture 4.436.449, CI. 405-170.000.
SMS Schloemann-Siemag AG: See—
Pfannschmidl, Martin, 4,436,292, CI. 266-107.000.
Smutny. Edgar J., to Shell Oil Company. Preparation of propylene and
butylene dimers using palladium cyanide as catalyst. 4,436,946. CI
585-510.000.
Sobieniak. Mathew G., to J. A. Webb, Inc. Electrolytic cell having an
elastomeric sheet covering the cell base. 4,436.609, CI. 204-267.000.
Societe Anonyme dite: Alsthom-Atlanlique: See—
Dupraz. Jean-Pierre, 4,437,134, CI. 361-56.000.
S.A. Promocab: See—
Achard, Serge. 4.437.089. CI. 340-541.000.
Societe Chimique des Charbonnages S.A.: See-
Stein. Claude; and Marbach. Andre. 4,436.859. CI. 524-297.000.
Societe de Recherches Industnelles: See—
Picart. Francois. 4,436.915. CI. 548-432.000.
Societe d'Etudes. de Realisations et d'Applications Techniques
(SERAT): See—
Precoul, Michel, 4.436,033, CI. 102-307.000.
Societe d'Expansion Scientifiquc "EXPANSIA": See—
Aspisi, Christian; Calas. Bernard; Daunis. Jacques; Follet, Michel
Jacquier, Robert; and Parello. Joseph. 4.436.874. CI. 525-327. 100.
Aspisi. Christian; Bonato. Marc; and Jacquier. Robert. 4.436.919.
CI. 549-4.000.
Societe d'Optique, Precision Electronique et Mechanique, Sopelem:
See—
Nollez. Jacques; Ragain. Jacques; and Prevost. Marc. 4.436.051. CI
1 14-340.000.
Societe Nationale d'Etude et de Construction de Moteurs d'Aviation
(S.N.E.C.M.A.): See—
Fondacci, Jean-Luc. 4.435,957. CI. 60-39.281.
Societe Nationale Elf Aquiuine: See—
Peyrouset. Andre; and Spring. Francois. 4.436.658. CI. 260-122.000
Societe Nationale Elf Aquitaine (Production): See—
KvasnikofT. Georges; and Voirin. Robert. 4.436.716. CI. 423-
574.00R.
Soclof, Sidney I., to Rockwell International Corporation. Method of
producing lateral transistor separated from substrate by intersecting
slots filled with substrate oxide. 4,435.899. CI 29-S77.00R
Sodini. Giancarlo: See—
Canella, Marco; and Sodini, Giancarlo, 4,436,756, CI. 426-430.000.
PI 40
LIST OF PATENTEES
Soibet. Albert: See—
c-i-2f"'.'^'*"'.^il1 ^ • •"<* ^"**- '^"*"- *.<37.026. CI. 310-1 1.000.
soiomy. L*o A. Eleclnc water healer with upwardly inclined zigzas
nowp.«h.4.436.9g3. CI. 219-306.000. * *
Somerfleck. Harold H.. lo United Sute« of America. Navy. Method for
MWsSp'cli'TSncS''*' '"' "^"*^^ *'"''''' "'"'^'' "<*"'"**
Sommer, John G.: See—/'
Kuan. Tiong H.; and Sommer. John G.. 4.436,857. CI. 524-260 000.
Sony Corporation: See—
'*'V^«?XJIir** T«kMhi; and Nakano. Yo«hilomo. 4.436.959. CI.
I '"•6.090.
Sako. YoKhiro; and Odaka. Kenuro, 4.437.185. CI. 371.39.000
Yamamoto. Kaichi. 4.437.125. CI. 358-167.000
South Louisiana Conlracton Inc : See—
Hebert. Francis A . 4.436.235. CI. 227-1 1 1.000.
South Ptain* Sheet Meul. Inc.: See—
Willingham. James T., 4.436.457. CI. 406- 1 16.000.
Southwest Research Institute: See—
Gniber. George J . 4.435,984. CI. 73-628.000
Sowinski. Gerard T . to National Gypsum Company. Drywall joint
compound pM;kaging. 4.436.204. CI. 206-525.000.
Sperry Corporation: See—
**r?^i'™'*^'" ^- ■"<* •'"*'cki. Bernard B.. 4,436,584, CI.
156-643.000.
'"ToO.Bfboo"*'" " ■ '"*' ^•'"'**"' ^'"'^ ^- M36.027, CI
Jennings, Richard E.. 4,435,948. CI. 56-228.000.
4.4jo,^4B. CI. 24l-im.700.
O'Brien. Steven M.. 4.437.166. CI. 364-900.000
^?!2;*I^.9HIl'*' ^' •"<* Thompson. Marvin J.. 4.437.155. CI
364-200.000.
'^M3N^/7"cr3i2(5.C °'"'~ ""' ""^ •*••"'• ^^'^ ''
Spletzer. Barry L.; and Swiallnwski. George, lo Gerber Products
A^r*!vL *'•"'' ''■'^■'* ^^*'^" "n** unloadcr 4.436,470. CI.
4 1 4* 3o. 000.
Sprague. Robert A., lo Xeros Corporation. Method and means for
Jr'iST'iiliJS)!"*"*'" """* '" e'et'ro-opli*: line printers. 4.437.106.
^1. 34o*lo0.000.
Sprccher, Klemenz: Sw—
"""iA^^: CI.Tw.2'3SSd"' '"*'"*'"^ •"' ^'»"'^*' '"""•
Spring. Francois: See—
Peyrousel. Andre; and Spring. Francois. 4.436.658. CI. 260-122 000
Snnivasan, Gurumakonda R.: See—
^V^'- }*lt^"^}* !*• Lech«lon. John S.; and Srinivasan. Guruma-
konda R.. 4.435.898. CI. 29.577.OOC. '^urum.
Staan Enterprises Ltd.: See—
Sampson. Michael J.. 4.436.547. CI. 71-76.000
W^iid. 4;T6.?7|.'cf «^^^^ '^""'""^ ""'*'"'-" '^'y'""-
Stach. Kurt: See—
March 13. 1984
Fauland. Erich; Kampe. Wolfaang; Stach. Kurt; and Bartsch.
Wolfgang. 4.436.742. CI. 424-269.000.
Stacy. Galen D; and Likins. Merle R . Jr.. to Phillips Petroleum Com-
KJ'i.,!^ forward carbon black reactor control. 4.436,698. CI
422-62.000.
^'!!l!f^'[*Ki''L''- L^«- J^"";. ••«l Erhardt. Rolf, to Stahlecker. Fritz;
ISihi'S. MM:9lrcf ^^^^^^^^^^^^ '"' ' "'""*^ '"" *"*""*"»
Stahlecker. Fritz: See—
c. u?*'r'**'J'"***^"' "^ R«««h. Hans. 4,435,953. CI. 57-408.000.
slanlecker. Hans: See—
Schmid. Friedberi; and Raasch. Hans, 4.435.953. CI. 57-408.000
« 1^*^ ^"^^' ^-"'»' •'''"• '"<* E'»««r<l«. Rolf. 4.435.952. CI,
Slwnicarbon B.V.: See-
Smith. Paul; Lemstra, Pieter J.; Kirechbaum. Robert; and Pijpers.
JK(|ues P. L.. 4.436.619. CI. 264-204.000. ^^
Woudstra. Oerrit. 4.437.065, CI. 324^25.000.
Sundard Oil Company: 5«f—
Carlson. Francis M.. 4.436.153. CI. 166-260.000.
Sundard Oil Company (Indiana): See—
Fields. Ellis K.; and Clarke. William C. 4.436.940. CI. 568-857.000.
wK'oOo" ■ "**•""•• 0*"'<* B.. deceased. 4,436.344. CI,
Stanistreet. Harold P.: See—
*'4.4S!3o3l'ci* S^SmMo"""" ** ' ""* ^•"***"*'""''' ^"•'"•
""/vS^^^/ir JiS^iV!^"*'"'** •* ! "«' Lindenstrulh. Werner.
4,436.617, CI, 264-164.000,
Star MMufacturing Co.: See-
Kim. Kwon S.. 4,435.934. CI. 52-309.700.
Surkville Tool * Die ComiNuiy: See—
'^mJ^MO* ^' Shurdcn. Charles H.. 4.436.231. CI.
SUHfTer Chemical Company: See—
Skriec, Adam E.. 4,436,673, CI 260.S43.OOP
Sl«n. Claude: and Marbach. Andre, to Socieie Chimique des Charbon.
nagcs S.A. Polynorbomenes cured with isocyanates and optionally
wilh polyols. 4.43«.«59. a. 524-297.000. "P»wnaiiy
Slein. Hermann: See—
Eichner, A«el; Ganz, Rudolf; Tkolz. Gunter; Slein. Hennann; and
Kreuels, Khus. 4.436.6M), CI. 264-60.000.
Sleinhrucggc Kenneth B ; Schruhcn. Johanna S.; and Taylor. Lyie H
lo Weslinghousc Electric Corp Broadband anijrcncci.on coaling for
infrared transmissive maieriaU 4,436,363. CI 350-1.600
Stelling. Desi D Oven supporting apparatus incorporating slidable
cookware support. 4.436.356. CI. 312.281.000
Slellner. Klaus: See—
Balz. Hans-Georg; Linke. Hans-Ralf; Slellner. Klaus and Wei-
mann. Gunier. 4.436.828. CI. 436-545 000
Slclz. Dale E.. Carroll. Frank I.; and Whalcy. Wilson M.. lo Racon
Incorporated Refrigcralion liquid with blue leak indicator and nro-
cess of using same 4.436.641. CI. 252-68.000
Slemkc. JcfTrey E.. to Chevron Research Company. Grease composi-
lion wiih improved low shear stability 4.436.649. CI. 252-51 50A
Stenabaugh. Donald D.. lo Automation Industries. Inc. Plug for reactor
pressure vessel nozzle. 4.436.692. CI 376-204 000.
^'^'?^^"^^"""'' ^ • "'' •*""'"« drum tree planter. 4.436.039. CI.
1 1 1-2.0U0.
Sterling Drug Inc.: See—
Margulies. Herman. 4.436.221. CI. 221-46.000.
Stetson. Karl A.; and Harrison. Irene R.. to United Technologies Cor-
poration. Optical strain gauge 4.436.419. CI. 356-35 500
Stewart. Glenn D Method and apparatus for automatically synchroniz-
ing multiple engines, 4.435.961. CI 60-719 000
Stewart. Robert D; and Gamble. Robert L.. to Foster Wheeler Energy
Corporation Fluidized bed reactor utilizing zonal fluidization and
anil-mounding air distributors. 4.436.507. CI. 431-170000
Sleycrl. William A . Jr.: See—
^ XVJ",";^^'*'" ^ • •'' • "^ S'^y"'- ^'"'"n '^ • J' . 4.437.064. CI.
i24-J4o,UuO.
Stoddard. Frank L.: See—
«.^ii*^t**''.'^'"i'I^V • •"'l?"^?."''' ''"''•' L . 4.436.977. CI. 219-75.000.
^Ai ^r,^"** °''"''* H»n*-Heinrich. Pneumatic timer 4.436.434. CI
J0B-03.UUU.
Stone. Lester W to Armco Inc. Concealed fastener support for inter-
locked channel section panels. 4.435.937. CI. 52-520000
Stone. Lyndon R.: See—
^'I'li!'"."*.. ^''^ ^' '"'' ^•°"«' ^y"*"" R- M36.I5I. CI.
I DO- 1 34,UlX).
Storandt. Ralf; Scheck. Georg; and Bicrmann, Peter, to Geze GmbH
tiecirically releasable safely ski binding. 4.436.321. CI 280-6 1 2.000
stork, Karl: See —
°»;jf "'??"<*! iv"^""': Stork. KaH; and Barthold. Klaus. 4.436.639.
CI. 232-B.S5t.
Strader. Don S.. to Motor Wheel Corporation. Method and apparatus
for manufacture of brake drums. 4.436.139, CI. 164-1 12 000
r!II^'iI'i,''"i!? \l^"'^P*^^'- ^""^ ^ • '° -^/S Raufoss Ammunisjons-
labnkker. Method of making projectile. 4,435.887, CI. 29123 000
Strandh. Km/c R . «o A/S Raufoss Ammunisjonsfabrikker. Tubular
projectile. 4.436.035. CI. 102-364.000.
Streck Laboratories. Inc.: See—
Ryan. Wayne L.. 4.436.821. CI. 436-10.000.
Strehler. Hugo; Hoerauf. Werner; and Urbanek. Friedrich. to BASF
Akiiengesellschaft. Preparation of polycaprolaclam with aqueous
:53S97.a''52T?23.SS"'*''*'" '"' *="''°'«='*'" °"»°'"*"-
Strempler, Gunter: See—
'^4^7([29?T27I-ia'"' """""^ "^ *=""•'*'• ^'"''«*'
Stromberg -Carlson Corp.: See—
Brightman. Barrie; and Niertit. Frank. 4.437,096, CI. 340-825.960
Strong. William A.; and Church. Kenneth, lo Strong, William A. Slurry
production system. 4,436,429, CI. 366-2.600.
Strong, William A.; and Church. Kenneth, to Strong. William A. Slurry
production system. 4,436,431, CI. 366-17.000
St rone, Daniel J.: See—
Myers, John W.; and Strope, Daniel J., 4,436,949, CI. 585-664000
Sirosberg, Arthur M.; See—
Kluae. Arthur F.; Strosberg. Arthur M.; Whiting. Roger L.; and '
Christie, George A.. 4.436.914. CI, 548-348.000
Siruben. Francis L. Ridge roof 4.435.926. CI. 52-3.000.
Strunc, Gerald R. 'f Palo Corporation. Photographic nim web culler
and method. 4.436,008, CI, 83-42.000.
*'!£•;, ^'"'fr" b' Zimmerman. Harry K,; and Douglas. George H., to
c^iTT/ic; ^°'*'* ^'*^ Heterocyclic amidinoureas. 4.436,911, CI.
546-29 1 .000.
Stumpe. WeiTier. to Robert Bosch GmbH. Preuure medium brake
system having a dual-valve control. 4.436,347, CI. 303.6,OOR.
Stutz, Herbert: 5er—
Zipp, Otmar; Bollmann, Heinz; Stuiz, Herbert; and Scholz, Wolf,
gang, 4,436,869. CI. 525-5 1 .000,
Suchanski. Mary R.: See—
^ M'3i5oi. a 20tl4i.SS.''*"' "''"* *^ *•*""'•'"• ^"^ "• ,
Sucliow, Chris A.: S«e—
Roller. Philip C.; and Suckow. Chris A.. 4,437.145. 0. 362-306.000.
Sudarshan. E. C, George: See—
Morgan. Ira L; Sudarshan. E, C, George; Mitchell, Alvin L.;
Suddeulsche Kuhierfabrik Julius Fr. Behr GmbH A Co. KG; See-
vl!J*?r!!S?' ^•"''«*: •"<' Deuschle, Sleffl. 4.436.245, CI.
23O-49.000.
Sugama. Todiifumi; and Kukacka. Lawrence £.. lo United Sutcs of
America. Energy. Magnesium photphale glass cemenu with ceramic-
lype properties. 4.436.555, CI, 106-85.000
March 13. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 41
Sugawara. Katsuo: See—
Ohe. Elsuo; Sugawara. Katsuo; Tani. Ititaro: and Ttukioka. Hideo.
4.436.654, CI, 252-574.000
Suggitt. Robert M.: See—
Esiabrook. Lawrence E: and Suggitt. Robert M.. 4.436.531. CI.
48.197,0OR.
Sugimoio. Hiroshi. to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaitha. Device for
correcting torque delected by an electric dynamometer. 4.435.987.
CI 73-862.170
Sugitani. Hiroshi; Matsuda, Hiroio; and Ikeda. Masami. to Canon
Kabushiki Kaisha. Ink-jei head and method for production thereof,
4.437.100. CI. 346-1.100
Sullivan. Daniel J.. Se^—
Logan, David J,; Webster. Ronald B,; and Sullivan. Daniel J..
4,435,904, CI 33-I43.00K.
Sumi. Hideji; and Kokado. Masayuki. to Fujitsu Limited. Line driver
circuit 4,437,021, CI 307.270.000.
Sumimoto. Takashi: See—
Watanabc, Kenichi; and Sumimoto. Takashi. 4,436,175. CI,
180-254 000
Sumitomo Chemical Co,. Ltd,: See—
Furukawa. Hiroshi; Saito, Yuichi; Imai, Akio; Yamamoto. Keisaku;
Takao. Hiroyoshi; and Yoshida. Nobuyuki. 4.436.873. CI,
525-314.000,
Sumitomo Electric Industries. Ltd.: See—
Kurosaki. Shiro, 4.436.542. CI. 65-18.100,
Sumitomo Heavy Industries. Ltd,: See-
Mori. Takashi. 4.436.551. CI, 75-12,000.
Sumner. Barbara E,: See—
Boyd. Phillip R,; Green, Gary K,; and Sumner. Barbara E..
4.436.580. CI 156-636.000
Sumner. John H,. to BuHington Industries. Inc, Method and apparatus
for producing open-end-spun novelty yarns, 4,435,955, CI.
57-409.000
Sunbeam Corporation: See-
Carlson. Gordon S . 4.436.986. CI. 219-505.000.
Sunbeam Plastics Corporation: See—
Gach. Peter P.. 4,436,21 1. CI, 215-216.000.
Suranyi, Gabriel G,, to Western Electric Co,, Inc. Peak voltage
clamped power supply, 4.437.148. CI, 363-89,000.
Surgical Design Corporation: See—
Banko. Anton. 4,436,091. CI. 128-305.000.
Surgikos, Inc: See-
Jacobs. Paul T,. 4,436.754, CI, 424-333.000.
Suzuki, Keizo: See—
Okudaira, Sadayuki; Saida. Hiroii; Sakai. Yoshio; Nishimatsu,
Shigeru; and Suzuki, Keizo, 4,436,581. CI, 156-643,000.
Suzuki. Kozaburo, to Asahi Kogaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Polaris
axis finder 4.436,421, CI, 356-153,000
Suzuki, Sunao; and Maeda. Koji. to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha,
Frequency detection system, 4.437.057. CI, 324-78,OOR,
Suzuki. Tetsuya: See—
Ebisawa. Masuo; and Suzuki. Tetsuya, 4,436,140, CI, 164-120,000,
Suzuki. Tuneo: See—
Emura, Koji; Suzuki. Tuneo; and Kazama, Hidemichi, 4.436.685.
CI, 264-148,000
Suzuki, Yasuo; Abe. Masaru; and Tezuka, Toshiro, to Bridgestone Tire
Co., Ltd. Pneumatic radial tire having an excellent side-cut resistant
property. 4,436,130. CI, I52-353,00R,
Suzuki, Yasuo: See—
Ohnishi, Haruo; Kosuzume, Hiroshi; Suzuki. Yasuo; and Mochida,
Ei. 4.436.724. CI. 424.101.000,
Suzuki, Yoshiaki: See—
Okada, Yoshio; Suzuki, Yoshiaki; Murakami. Ryohei; and Segawa.
Yoshiaki, 4,436,352, CI, 312-228.000.
Suzuki, Yuichi; and Sano, Ichiro, to Furukawa Denchi Kabushiki
Kaisha; and Furukawa Denki Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Proceu and
apparatus for manufacturing storage battery plates. 4.435.SSS, CI.
29-2.000.
Suzuki. Yukio; Sato, Kunihiko; and Muramatsu, Moloyasu, lo Toyou
Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha. Fuel injection control in an internal-com-
bustion engine. 4,436.072, CI. 123-418.000.
Svedberg, Per: See—
Jonsaon. Per-Erik; and Svedberg. Per. 4.437,107, CI. 357-38.000.
Swan, George A,: Ser—
Oyekan, Soni O,; and Swan, George A., 4,436,612, CI. 208-65.000.
Sweeney, Roy: See—
Charis. Phillip S.; and Sweeney, Roy, 4,436,400, CI. 354-296,000,
Swiatlowski, George; See—
Spletzer, Barry L,; and Swiatlowski. George, 4.436,470, CI.
414-36.000.
Swift, John E,, Sr., to Bethlehem Steel Corporation. Adaptor lo facili-
tate teslina of a lamp holder, 4,437,054, CI, 324-51,000.
Swisher, William F,, to Methode Electronics. Inc. Switch assemblies.
4.436.970, CI, 200-61,560.
Swiss Aluminium Ltd,: See—
Fischer, Werner K., 4,436.607. CI. 204-246.000.
SWS, Incorporated: See—
Nilsen, CaH J., 4,436,979, CI. 2I9-I2I.0LC,
Tabereaux, Alton T.; and Willetl. John T., to Reynolds Metals Com-
pany. Alumina reduction cell. 4.436.598, CI. 204^7.000.
Tachlbana, Yakudo: 5**—
Sasaki, Takuma; Nakamichi, Katuya; Tachibana, Yakudo; and
Minami, Kiyothi, 4,436.656, CI. 26O.II2.0OR.
Sasaki, Takuma; Nakamichi. Kacuya; Tachibana. Yakudo; and
Minami. Kiyoihi. 4^36,637. CI. 260.1 12.00R.
Taddicken, Hermann, to Eisele Apparaie-und Geratebau GmbH At-
tachment for feeding reinforcing back buttons to a sewini machine
4.436.041. CI. 112-110.000 * >n«.mnc.
Taeger, Tilman: See—
Krcuzburg. Eberhard; Von Der Pahic, Dietrich J ; Monsheimer.
Rolf; PHeiderer. Ernst; and Taeger. Tilman. 4.436.624. CI
210-632.000.
Taira, Akio. lo Olympus Optical Co.. Ltd Binocular stereo-micro-
scope. 4,436.384. CI 350-515.000.
Taisho Pharmaceutical Co.. Ltd : See—
Amano, Takehiro; Yoshikawa. Kensei: Sano, Tatsuhiko; Ohuchi.
Kutaka; Ishigura, Michihiro; Shiono, Manzo; Fujita, Yoshiji and
Nishida, Takashi. 4,436.939. CI 568-813.000
Taiyo Denko Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kashiwagi. Hidehiro. 4,436,104, CI 134-63,000
Takada, Kinji: See—
Shimizu, Shigeo; Takano, Hiroyuki; Yoshimura. Shoji; and Takada.
Kinji. 4.436.904. CI 544-27,000,
Takagi. Shigeru: See—
Tomita. Masahiro; and Takagi, Shigeru, 4,436.538. CI 55482 000
Takahara. Takeshi; Sato, Takeo; Itou. Takeo. and Tamatani. Masaaki,
to Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Green-emitting phosphor for
cathode-ray tube. 4.436.646. CI. 252.301,405, • »- "^
Takahashi. Hirokuni: See—
Nishikawa. Yasuo; and Takahashi. Hirokuni. 4.436,678. CI,
264-30.000.
Takahashi, Hirotake, to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha Shaft
drive apparatus for motorized iwo.wheeied vehicle 4,436,173, CI.
180-226,000,
Takahashi, Junichi; Sakane, Toshio; and Itoh. Yuji, to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha Eye-fundus camera provided with automatic focusing func*
lion. 4,436.388. CI. 351-206,000.
Takahashi. Katsuhiko: See—
Kasuaa. Takuzo; Takahuhi, Katsuhiko; and Nakashima, TuneyaM.
4,436,877. CI 525-437.000. '
Takahashi, Kensuke Apparatus for cooking food and extracting smoke.
4.436.023. CI 99-400 000
Takahashi. Masanori; and Uehara. Hidehiko, to Yamaha Haisudoki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Exhaust meant for marine propulsion unit.
4.436,514, CI. 440-89.000.
Takahashi. Nobuyuki; Furuno. Yoshikuni; and Fukunaga, Masaaki, to
Nippon Steel Corporation Press-formable high strength dual phase
structure cold rolled steel sheet and process for producing the same.
4.436.561, CI. I48-I2.00F r m
Takahashi. Yoshihiko: See—
Bando, Yoshihide; Tanaka. Toshiki; Honda, Sueaki; Takahashi,
Yoshihiko; Tsuruyoshi. Kenichi; Kawashima, Katsumi; and
Kishimoio, Syuichi, 4,437.078, CI. 335-81,000.
Takamura. Yoshio, and Nakajima, Akira. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha Rectifier circuit, 4,437,147, CI, 363-61.000
Takano, Hiroyuki: See—
Shimizu. Shigeo; Takano, Hiroyuki; Yoshimura. Shoji; and Takada.
Kinji, 4,436.904. CI. 544-27.000.
Takao. Hiroyoshi: See—
Furukawa. Hiroshi; Saito. Yuichi; Imai, Akio; Yamamoto, Keisaku;
Takao, Hiroyoshi; and Yoshida. Nobuyuki. 4,436,873. CI
525-314.000.
Takeba, Kazuhiro: See—
Tanaka, Osamu; Takeba, Kazuhiro; Saiu, Hiroshi; Matsushita,
Yukinobu; and Koyabu. Koji. 4,436,563, CI, 148-26,000,
Takeda Chemical Industries, Limited: See—
Furuoya, Iisuo; and Kitazawa, Yuzuru. 4,436,671, CI, 260-465,300,
Horii. Satoshi; FukaK, Hiroshi; and Higashidc. EUi. 4,436.918, Q
548-546.000,
Imada, Isuke; Nagaoka, Akinobu; and Hirata, Minoru, 4,436,753,
CI. 424-331.000.
Takenaka Doboku Co., Ltd,; See—
Miura, Mituo; Kukino, Yoshinori; and Fuiii. Takumi, 4,436.453, a.
405-263.000.
Takenaka Komuien Co., Ltd.: See—
Miura, Mituo; Kukino, Yoshinori; and FiOii. Takumi, 4.436.433. CI,
405-263.000
Takeno, Ryuko: See—
Hori. Takako; Yoshida. Chosaku; Kiba. Yasuo; Takeno, Ryuko;
Nakano, Joji; Nitia, Jun; Kishimoio, Sumiko; Murakami, Shoha-
chi; Tsuda, HiuUugu; and Saikawa. Isamu, 4,436,921, Q,
544-238.000.
Takeuchi, Alsushi, to Nippon Oakki Sciio Kabushiki Kaisha, Appara-
tus for controlling pickup arm in record or video disk player,
4.437.180, CI. 369-217,000,
Takeuchi. Maaaio; Okada. Hideo; Tobita. Hiroai; Okabe. 8t|cni; Mat-
suda, Shinpei; Tonami. Munchiko; Tamura. Kohki; and Nakajima.
Fumito, to Hitachi, Ltd, Molten carbonau fticl cell, 4.436,794, a
429-40,000.
Tallcy, Thomas H.; Sheets, Lee W.; and Wiley, Alvin P., to Schnadia
Corporation. Sprinj suspension for sofa-bad. 4.433.16a CI, 5-13.000.
Tallon, Jacques, to Compagnic Indusirielle das Telaoommunicaiions.
Helium leakafe detector, 4,436,998, CI, 250-288,000,
Tamauwa. Akira, to Olympus Optical Co. Ltd, Detacling particle
agglutination with vessel having inclinad, stepped bottom sarfaoc
M36,827, CI, 436-534.000.
Tamama, Hiroshi; Ozawa. Yukio; Mivaiaki, Jingo; Ito. Hiroshi; and
Kinoshita, Toyohiro, lo Japanese National Railways, Device for
■calina apropeiler shaft against invasion of sea water, 4,436.313, CI.
PI 42
LIST OF PATENTEES
Tamtuni, Muaaki: See—
Twnura. Kohki: See—
TtkeuchK M«ato; Okada. Hideo: Tobita. Hirosi; Okabe. Sigeru-
Matjuda. Shinpei; Tonami. Munehiko; Tamura. Kohki; and
Nakajima. Fumito. 4.436,794. CI 429-40 000 ••*•""•"• ■"«
Tamura. POohsan N,, See—
^'i5^\^b2m^^ ^' '"** ^'""'"' '*°°''"" '^^ ^'^^^'^'O' CI.
Tanabe. Hiroyuki: See—
^^M.I'^J ^*""^'"C,"J«^'"• "''"""Chi; Shinohara. Toshio; Tanabe.
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama. Shunsuke. 4.436.772. CI. 427-379 000
u!t^' ?^"^'",:, *!'«■'''• "'ro'"'chi; Shinohara. Toshio; Tanabe.
Tan.k."Ekiiu'"i?-i'"'"""'' ^''""*"'"* *'*'''"^' C'- «7-38O.00O.'
^Tf« "'k'^""^*?'''' "'""""''*• "'rokaiu; Uchida. Itsuo; Kohsaka.
Tanaka^KSroo'li-"""""- "''""'• ^•'''•'2*- ^' «*-''^«»
°?^m.l!K"*'^T'"f'"c "^'"buroo; Aoki. Masahiro; Hirayama.
Fumitoshi; and Izaki. Susumu. 4.436.554. CI. 75-128 OOT
TfJon K^h'^^'l'' "'«*'r°'2' ^'J'- «"<^ Kuwayama. Tetsuro. to
S3?.1I2 Cr358!44^(S^'" ^°"'-"'"' =°'°^ """«'"« •PP""-
^vSt;«iP"'"^v'^'''f '''•., "^"zuhiro; Saita. Hiroshi; Matsushita.
Yukinobu; and Koyabu. Koji, to Kabushiki Ka.sha Kobe Seiko Sho
Flux for overlay welding. 4.436.563. CI. 148-26.000.
Mo.!l; ^"''''' 'J'^imura Shoji; and Etoh. Yukihiro. to Nissan
mSi.io) '""^' ^"*'"' ''°°''"« ^y*'*"" ^.'♦Je.oeo. CI
Tanaka. Toshiki: See—
^'v^°^ K^L**" t'^^' ''"''"?''"• ''"°**'''''= "o"'!"- Sueaki; Takahashi.
Yoshihiko; Tsuruyoshi. Kenichi; Kawashima. Katsumi; and
Kishimoto. Syuichi. 4.437.078. CI. 335-81.000.
Tanaka. Yoshiharu. See—
^*ifi:w'a"m^5^^'- '"""•"= '"^ ^'"""' Y«hiharu.
Tandy Corporation: S«—
Schreiber. Paul T.. 4.436.956. CI 179-2 OOC
Tani. Ititaro: See—
°M3t6"5°4.|'ft«"74'^"°^ ■"'"'• """°^ *"** ^-'''°'"' H**'^-
Taniguchi. Norihisa: See—
Yamamoto, Tsuyoshi; Taniguchi. Norihisa; lida. Kazuyoshi' and
Kondo. Yoshikazu. 4.436.179. CI. I8I-2IOOOO
1^\iZ^r Yoshiharu; Edano. Shigeki; and Akiyama. Masanori. to
250.338^'""' • Py'°*'«^'"'^ '"f"«d «nsor. 4.437.002. C°
Tanioka, Hiroshi: See—
'"Hi"s;L'h.^:;3t.y8%'l%^5'Trci0R"^^^ "*^°^''^ '"' ^""""'"'''
Tassoni. Ronald L.: See—
T.,.Ko°°''c^''i^ ' • """IJwson'. Ronald L.. 4.436.617. CI. 209-3 000
Tatabanyai Szenbanyak: See— . »-■ *v/t j.wu.
Kapolyi. Laszlo. 4,436.550. CI. 75-IO.OOR
Taylor. Lyie H.: See—
Taylor. Michael; and Withnall. Malcolm D. N.. to Mars Limited
TDK Electronics Co.. Ltd.: See—
Ohkawa. Takchisa; and Yoda. Kuniichi, 4,436.786. CI. 428-447 000
Technion Research and Development Foundatioii Ltd. S«.-
62-4 OTO ^"*''*'' ■"** '^"'°"' '^"' *'*36.539. CI.
Teijin Limited: See—
'''SSS;.'?4^T854.^;t2'8?7i JS"^'^ ''"''''"• ''"«'»'= •"«' ""•-•
V^''unT','^"h'l!lf •* • '° ''''^"°'i '^«""f«c«"ring Co. Stud anchor for
4O3T89000 "on-round extension base. 4,436,445. CI.
Tempo G: See—
Shigeru.Jhono, 4,435,963, CI. 63-18.000
Tension Envelope Corporation: See—
Berkley. E. Bertram, 4,436.202. CI. 206-455.000.
Terada, Kazuhiro: See—
MattudJu Fujio; Kato. Takazo; Honda. Tadatoshi; Terada.
Kazuhiro; and Kogure. Yasuo, 4.436,916, CI. 548-508 000
leraoka, Fuminon: See —
Matsui. Kenji; and Teraoka. Fuminon. 4,436.255. CI. 242-107 40A
Terrafix Erosion Control ProducU. Inc See- I07.40A.
Crowe. Robert E.. 4.436,447, d. 405-76.000
Tenian, Rouben T.: See—
Zaruba. John V.; and Terzian. Rouben T., 4,435.915 CI 46-12 000
Tetenbaum Marvin T.; and Crowley. Burlon C. to NL ndusirie^ Inc
Thermally suble thickener. 4.436.862. CI. 52^445.000.
March 13. 1984
Texaco Development Corporation: See—
^'I'JroS**'"'' """' '"** ^'°'"^^' ^'"*"" ^ • *''*36.530. CI. 48.
^4?[970bR*'*""" ^ ' ""^ ^"***"' '*°'*" '^•' *'*36.531. CI.
Texaco Inc.: See-
Lin. Jiang-Jen. 4.436.837. CI. 518-700.000.
Lin. Jiang-Jen. 4.436.838. CI. 518-700.000.
Naylor. Carter G.. 4.436.672. CI. 260-512.00R
52!T67 000*'"** ^' ""*^ Cuscurida. Michael. 4.436.843. CI.
^"6j2'46.b(» *"" ** ' '"'' ^'"'' ^*" ^ • "''• *'«6.927. CI.
Sanderson. John R.; Renkcn. Terry L.; and Watts Lewis W Jr
4.436.928. CI. 560-246.000. ' ■"••
^"5"6a.2*w',b6a*'" ** ' '"'' ^'"*' ^"^^ ^ • "''•• '♦•'♦36.929. CI.
^"S'wboo'''" ^ '"** ^'"•' *^*" ^ • •''•• ^•'♦^^.'SO. CI.
^t3r95i.'a."5£i2^'Sb^"" ^ • ''' "'^ •^-''-- -^-y L-.
'TM56.i°32"cr 5^6^:2:6^'; '•'^"' " = "«* ^'"»' ^-« ^-
^"Jll^' ^°" ^ • Castagnos. Leonce F.. Jr.; Schrader Charles H
Prokop. Jon S.. 4.437.141. CI. 361-403.000.
Textron Inc.: See—
'^3W*(X)A^''^°''^ "^ • '"** ""'''"*• ^'"*" ^' *'<36,0I8, CI. 91-
Tezuka. Toshiro: See—
^"f5'2-353 WR ^^' ^'""'' ""'^ ^""'"' '^°*^"°- *.*36.130. CI.
^."i.V"'*^*.'- • •!; • '° y"'''<* S""" of America. Air Force. Equalizer
28 OOR '*' '"'dependent amplitude control. 4.437.073. CI 333-
^'htfii3«^'c'l.'2\^j7T,5).'"'"""" ""' ^«-'""''- ''"P'-y
Thalmann Alfred; and Reich. Fritz, to Georg Fischer Akticnaesell-
xt?l , ^f''' connection for plastic pipe. 4.436.987. CI. 219-535 000
^cS'i.X?«,?,:,'f.^'ii'"' '^^""^' ™^.«.™a
Thiele. Kurt: See—
■^M'^^'itci: ui^"^: °''""»""' '^*"''= '"'' ^'»"'' ^•-'•^
Thiokol Corporation: See—
Bell. Frank H., 4.436.036. CI. 102-367.000.
Thomas. John F., Jr.: See—
^a^^ss^-^si'.oS""""' ■'°''" '^ • "'' • '"'* ^*'''*'' ^'"y- '♦•*36.37i.
Thomas. William D to Kidde. Inc. Pneumatic communication system
for banking and the like. 4.436.456. CI. 406-19 000
Thomassen Amsterdam B.V.: See—
de Vrics. Jan. 4.436.282. CI. 251-329.000.
4°26^549"6oo''°'"^ ^ ^"**' conditioning composition. 4.436.758. CI.
Thompson. Marvin J.: See—
^^^mSoOOTo''' ^' ""*' '"'°'"P«'"' '^■"''n J- M37.I55. CI.
Thompson. Thomas K.: See—
T4!&^ Cl.t5 JoS.""*- ^'"^ '■' "^ ^''°'"'^"- ^''°'"" '^-
Thomson-CSF: See-
Cohen. Georges; and Heroux. Jean. 4.437.074. CI. 333-128 000
Darmouni. Corinne. 4.437.075. CI. 333- 1 67.000 '
3"37-245'o(»"°"'*' '"** "C'«2'n*nn. Michel. 4,437.077, CI.
Hunaut. Roger; and Dupont. Francois. 4.437.110. CI. 358-41 000
Le Sonn. Marcel. 4.437.188. CI. 378-205.000
Picquendar. Jean E.. 4.437.068. CI. 329-105.000.
Raverdy Claude Y.; and Veron, Serge. 4.437.035. CI. 313-388.000
Rougeolle. Daniel, 4,437.071. CI. 33I.1.00A ■"J-»o»uw.
Thomson-CSF Broadcast. Inc.: See—
Kruger. Robert A.. 4.436.095. CI. 128-654.000.
Ihorbum Technics (International) Limited: See—
Donnelly. Bernard J.. 4.437.062. CI. 324-238.000.
3°2"2i59000 ^' '° ^''*"^ ^"°" ^°- *'''••''''«• *'*36.354. CI.
Thuener. Bruce W.: See—
. ^M36.mar4l?-2m(;6o'"'" ^^ ""^ '*"'*"«"• *•*•- *••
Tieleman. Rudolf J Poultry eviscerating tool. 4,435,878. CI. 17-11 000
f 4'36?6i!'ci'^15t5rO(S''^''*'" '^'^""°" '^*"'"*"'"« '='°'"-
Tinder. Richard: See—
^'TSh*' ^'"'"" ^ • ■"** '^"^*'' R'c»»'d. 4.436.404. CI. 355-
Ting Enterprises, Inc.: See—
Evans. Jeffrey L.. 4.436.080. CI. 126-139.000.
Tioxide Group PLC: See-
Hare. Alan L.; and George. Allan P., 4.436,984. CI. 219-383.000.
MARCH 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 43
Tishura. Vladimir I.: See—
Lebedev. Vladimir K.; Kuchuk-Yatsenko. Sergei I.; Sakhamov,
Vasily A.; Galian. Boris A.; Asoyants. Gngory B.; and Tishura.
Vladimir I.. 4.436.974. CI. 219-66.000.
Tkotz. Gunter: See—
Eschner. Axel; Ganz. Rudolf; Tkotz, Gunter; Stein. Hermann; and
Kreuels. Klaus. 4,436.680. CI. 264-60 000
TMC Corporation: See—
Wittmann. Heinz; and Konwitza. Vladimir. 4,436,322. CI
280-614.000.
Toa Paint Co.. Ltd.: See—
Kitano, Masao, 4.436,845. CI. 523-172.000.
Tobback, Hubert J.: See—
Viellefoni, Jean F ; Hens, Carolus M ; and Tobback. Hubert J .
4.436.606. CI. 204-225.000.
Tobita. Hirosi: See—
Takeuchi. Masato; Okada. Hideo; Tobita. Hirosi; Okabe, Sigeru;
Matsuda, Shinpei; Tonami. Munchiko; Tamura, Kohki and
Nakajima. Fumito. 4,436.794. CI. 429-40.000.
Toch. Theodore H.: See—
Bellotti. Marc; Goldhaber. Richard P.; Phillips. Earl G.; and Toch.
Theodore H.. 4.436.620. CI. 210-90.000.
Toda, Minoru: See-
Osaka. Susumu; and Toda. Minoru. 4.435.920, CI. 49-82.000.
Toga. Yuzo: See—
Okamoto, Ichiro; and Toga. Yuzo. 4.436.896. CI 156-332 000.
Tokuhisa, Masaaki; and Hirai. Yukio. to Kawasaki Steel Corporation.
Basic bonded fluxes for submerged arc welding having an excellent
removability of slag at a narrow groove. 4.436.562, CI. 148-24.000.
Tokyo Kogaku Kikai Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Aoki. Mitsugu. 4,436.390. CI. 351-234.000.
Sano. Eiichi. 4,436,389, CI 351-208.000.
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Hirose, Kenji, 4.437,127. CI 358-296.000
Masuoka. Fujio, 4.437.172. CI. 365-182.000.
Masuoka, Fujio. 4.437.174. CI. 365-218.000.
Nakaya. Shunichi; and Araoka, Katsumasa, 4.437.016. CI. 290-
I.OOR.
Noji. Takashi; Hapao. Norio; and Obata, Yoshiharu, 4.437.01 1. CI.
250-486.100.
Takamura. Yoshio; and Nakajima, Akira. 4.437.147. CI. 363-61.000.
Tomino, Naoki; Ikeda, Osamu; Matsuzawa. Yoshio; and Inoue, Hideya,
to Nippon Kogaku K.K. Container device for planar battery
4.436,792, CI 429-1.000.
Tomita. Masahiro; and Takagi. Shigeru, to Nippon Soken. Inc. Filter
for cleaning exhaust gases from diesel engine. 4.436.538. CI
55-482.000.
Tompsett. Alan J., to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC. Manufacture
of amines. 4.436.938, CI. 564-474.000.
Tomy Kogyo Co.. Inc.: See—
Iwao. Noriaki; and Abe, Akira. 4.435.916. CI. 46-201.000.
Tonami. Munehiko: See —
Takeuchi, Masato; Okada, Hideo; Tobita. Hirosi; Okabe. Sigeru;
Matsuda, Shinpei; Tonami, Munehiko; Tamura. Kohki; and
Nakajima. Fumilo, 4.436,794, CI. 429-40.000.
Tone. Junsuke: See—
Celmer. Walter D.; Cullen. Walter P.; Shibakawa. Riichiro; and
Tone. Junsuke. 4.436.747. CI. 424-274.000.
Tonon. Elia: See—
Perdomini. Luciano; Tonon. Elia; and Paronetto. Lanfranco.
4.436.755, CI 426-15.000
Toth. Ferenc: See—
Ferenczi. Gyorgy; Horvath. Peter; Toth. Ferenc; Kiss. Jozsef; and
Boda. Janos, 4.437,060, CI. 324-I58.00D.
Towae. Friedrich: See-
Harder. Wolfgang; Merger, Franz; and Towae. Friedrich,
4.436.668, CI. 260-463.000.
Toyama Chemical Co.. Ltd.: See—
Hori. Takako; Yoshida. Chosa|cu; Kiba. Yasuo; Takeno. Ryuko;
Nakano. Joji; Nitta. Jun; Kishimoto. Sumiko; Murakami. Shoha-
chi; Tsuda. Hisatsugu; and Saikawa. Isamu. 4.436.921. CI.
544-238.000.
Toyo Kogyo Co.. Ltd.: See—
Hata. Shuji; Yamada. Toshio; and Murakawa. Katsuji. 4.435.994.
CI. 74-606.00R.
Watanabe, Kenichi; and Sumimoto. Takashi. 4.436.175. CI
180-254.000.
Toyo Soda Manufacturing Co.. Ltd.: See—
Isowa. Yoshikazu; Ohmori, Muncki; Mori. Kaoru; Ichikawa. Tel-
suya; Nonaka. Yuji; Kihara. Keiichi; Oyama. Kiyotaka; Satoh,
Heijiro; and Nishimura, Shigeaki, 4.436.925. CI. 560-19.000.
Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Akagi, Motonobu; Nomura. Isshi; Hattori. Kyo; and Kato. Kichiro.
4.436.070. CI. 123-440.000.
Nakamura. Norihiko; and Shibata. Yoshiaki. 4.436.068. CI.
123-310.000.
Suzuki. Yukio; Sato. Kunihiko; and Muramatsu. Motoyasu.
4.436.072. CI. 123-488.000.
Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Miyagi. Hideo. 4.436.073. CI. 123-491 000.
Nakakobara. Takeshi; Sakaguchi. Kiyoshi; Ueda, Fumio; and Mu-
rase. Hiroyuki. 4.436.062. CI. 123-90.270.
Nakatsuka. Hirotaka; Mizuno. Toshiaki; Yamazoe. Hiumitsu; and
Matsuoka. Hiroki. 4.436.074. CI. 123-492.000.
Sawabe. Maaaki; and Kumagai. Tadanobu. 4.436.310. CI.
277-11.000.
Transidyne General Corporation: See—
Enzer, Steven E ; and Sarrine, Robert J , 4.436.610. CI 204-400 000
Trapp, Kenneth: See-
Santa Lucia, Jack; and Trapp. Kenneth. 4.436.249. CI 242- 1 8 OOR
Trasavage. Roben K : See—
Renduhc, Francis J ; Trasavage, Roben K ; and Boduch, Paul A .
4.436.806. CI. 430-311.000. . -u « .
Triebskorn. Bruno: See—
Broecker. Franz J; Gruendler, Karl-Heinz; Marosi. Laszio;
Schwarzmann. Matthias; ' Tnebskom, Bruno; and Zirker
Guenter. 4.436.833. CI 502-176 000
Trilling, David M.; and Smadar. Yechiel, to Caribou Fisheries. Inc
Production of shaped food products. 4.436.759. CI. 426-573 000
Trion Industries Inc.: See—
ThalcnfcId, David R., 4,436.209. CI. 211-57.100.
Trommen, Hartmut: See—
Rothcr, Bruno; and Trommen. Hanmut, 4.436.781. CI 428-365 000
Truck-Lite Company. Inc.: See-
Roller. Philip C ; and Suckow. Chris A.. 4.437. 145. CI. 362-306 000
Trybulski. Eugene J : See-
Fryer, Rodney I.; Trybulski, Eugene J . and Walser, Armin.
4,436,662, CI 260-245 700
Tsai, TsuTzu, and Arnold, Fred E., to United States of America, Air
Force 2-Phcnyibanzothiazole polymers. 4.436.886. CI. 526-257.000
Tsuda, Hisatsugu: See—
Hon, Takako; Yoshida. Chosaku; Kiba, Yasuo; Takeno, Ryuko;
Nakano. Joji; Nitta. Jun; Kishimoto. Sumiko; Murakami, Shoha-
chi; Tsuda, Hisatsugu; and Saikawa, lumu, 4,436.921. CI
544-238.000.
Tsuda. Kinji. to Elephant Chain Block Company Limited Hand oper-
ated hoist having improved means controlling free roiatfon of a load
sheave 4.436.333, CI 294-82.00R.
Tsuji. Nobuhiko: See—
Endoh, Koichi; Tsuji, Nobuhiko; Nakamura, Keijiroh; Hamada,
Toshiyoshi; and Ishida, Kciichi, 4,436,812, CI 435-14.000
Tsukioka, Hideo: See—
Ohe, Etsuo; Sugawara. Katsuo; Tani. ItiUro; and Tsukioka. Hideo.
4.436.654. CI. 252-574.000.
Tsukishima Kikai Co., Ltd : See—
Yamaguchi. Katsunobu; Matsuoka, Seiichi; Hayashida. Takayuki
and Hayase, Tomio, 4,436,532, CI 48-209 000
Tsuruyoshi, Kenichi: See—
Bando. Yoshihide; Tanaka, Toshiki; Honda, Sueaki; Takahashi,
Yoshihiko; Tsuruyoshi, Kenichi; Kawashima, Katsumi; and
Kishimoto, Syuichi, 4,437,078, CI. 335-81 000
Tsushima, Rikio: See—
Matsunaga, Kinjiro; Okumura, Takeo; Naito, Sachio; and Tsu-
shima. Rikio. 4.436.722. CI. 424-70.000
Tsuyama. Yoshito; Shimazaki. Yasumi; Kakita. Kazutoshi; and
Hirokawa. Toshio, to Nippon Steel Corporation Method and appara-
tus for manufacturing spiral pipe 4.436.239, CI 228-17.000
Tuchenhagen, Otto A P ; Mieih, Hans O E ; and Coura. Herbert R . to
Otto Tuchenhagen GmbH A Co. KG. Pipeline switch with leakage
control and cleanable leakage cavity 4.436.106. CI 137-240.000
Tucker. Hartwell F.: See-
Tucker. Jeffery R.; Ross. Dennis W ; and Tucker. Hariwell F.
4.435.870. CI. 15-98.000.
Tucker. Jeffery R ; Ross, Dennis W ; and Tucker, Hartwell F Floor
machine. 4.435,870, CI. 15-98.000
Tucker. Myron B. Portable storage device and table. 4.436.353. CI.
312-241.000
Tullos. Robert N.; and OstrofT, Arthur, to Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing Company. Stepper motor controller. 4.437.049. CI
318-696.000.
Turillon. Pierre P.. to MPD Technology Corporation. Modular hydride
container. 4.436.537, CI. 55-387 000
Turner, Frederick T.: See—
Harra, David J.; Turner, Frederick T.; and Hutchinson, Martin A.,
4.436.602. CI. 2O4-192.O0R.
Twinoak Products. Inc.: See—
Meloy. Gilbert K.. 4.435.857. CI. 4-228.000.
Tyszkiewicz. Theodore J.: See—
Boden. Richard M.; Tyszkiewicz. Theodore J.; and Watkins. Hugh.
4.436.652. CI. 252-522.00R.
Uchida. Itsuo: See—
Umehara, Kazuyoshi; Tanaka, Hirokazu; Uchida, Itsuo; Kohuka.
Masanobu; and Imanaka. Hiroshi, 4.436.726, CI. 424-177.000.
Ueda. Fumio: See—
Nakakobara. Takeshi; Sakaguchi. Kiyoshi; Ueda. Fumio; and Mu-
rase. Hiroyuki. 4.436.062. CI. 123.90270.
Uehara. Hidehiko: See—
Takahashi. Masanori; and Uehara. Hidehiko. 4.436.514. CI.
440-89.000.
Ueno, Kenji: See—
Ushioda. Minoru; Ueno. Kenji; Furukawa. Hiroywu; and Kobaya-
shi. Masahiro, 4,436,861, CI. 524-425.000.
Ueno. Ryuzo; Sakota. Kazuyuki; Kawau. Keiji; and Naito. Yothiyuki.
to Kabushiki Kaisha Veno Seiyaku Oyokenkyuso Proceu for pro-
ducing hydroxybenzonitriles. 4.436.670. CI. 260-465.00B.
Ukigai. Toshiyuki: See—
Yamamura. Masaaki; Igaraihi. Taizo; and Ukigai. Toshiyuki.
4.436.527. CI. 44-51.000.
Umeda. Arihiko; and Iwase. Yothiyuki. to Texaco Inc. Modined po-
lyoxyalkylenepolyamine curing agents for epoxy rains. 4.436.891. CI.
528-111.000.
PI 44
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Umeda. Tadashi: See—
M«>«hi. Hideo; Umeda. Tada$hi; and Aoki. Takaihi. 4.436.41 1. CI.
Umehara. Kazuyoshi; Tanaka. Hirokazu; Uchida. luuo; Kohuka,
I ^^^S?*"' V^ ''»>«n«k«. Hiroshi, to Fujiaawa Pharmaceutical Co..
Ltd. N-Acyipeptide compound, processes for the preparation thereof
and the pharmaceutical compositions. 4,436,726. CI. 424-177 000
Umeyama. Koichi: See—
Aihara. Tetsuo; Nakayama. Yasuharu: Umeyama, Koichi; Sawada,
Kozo; and Shinohara. Masaaki. 4.436,849. CI. 523-501 000
Umezu, HirMki; Kishi. Akira; and Yamagami, Hiroshi, to Misawa
"o™** ^.K. Modular building structure and module for it. 4.435.927,
Unger. Gotz W.. to Knoll IntemationaJ, Inc. Assembly for holding and
tensionmg a webbing. 4.435.882, CI. 24.265.00R.
Union Carbide Corporation: See—
Andreini, Rockne J.; Mehlman. Stewart K.; Selines, Ronald J.; and
Agrawal, Balkishan, 4,436,553. CI. 75-52.000
"^''^.'T^^^""*' ^ • ■"<* ^•'»°"' Chtrles A., II, 4,436.736, CI.
424-2 1 1 .000.
Scott. Robert J., 4,436,642, CI. 252-95.000.
^^ItMO^OOO*^^ ^' '"*' ^'*'' ^•""^ ^- *'*'*'**5' CI
Smolarek. James, 4,436,146, CI. 163-111.000
Wheeler. Thomas N.. 4.436.666. CI. 260-455.00B.
Union Siderurgique du Nord et de lEst de la France- See—
Bocquet. Jacques; and Werquin, Jean C, 4,436,791, CI. 428-682.000
Union Special Corporation: See—
^436cJ5'*cf'f ^" ^'*'°'*' ^°''" •* = ""** Dinkelacker, Paul H.,
^°,^^-^^^?7*A^"^ ^■' ■"** Manoski, Laurence A., 4,436.044. CI.
1 12-286.000.
United States of America
Air Force: See—
^fflilWO^"" ^' '"** ^""*' ^'^ ^' *'*^*'*"' c'
Cummings, Robert J., 4,436,262, CI. 244-I22.0AG
Donelan. Edward J.. 4.436.260. CI. 244-3.160
"4,437!S,.'^i ?3'5 '216 o!S)'" "" ' "" ^"*'"*'"' '''*''"'^*' '•
^58-Sfoa) ^' "^ '^cCreary, Robert B.. 4.437.113, CI.
Simmons, Louis D.. 4,436,220, CI. 22O-3S9.000
Thai. Herbert L.. Jr., 4,437.073. CI. 333-28.00R
Tsai. Tsu-Tzu; and Arnold. Fred E., 4.436,886, CI. 526-257.000
Army: See—
^/?;/«Jl''^.'^ .°'""- ^"y ^- "^ Sumner, Barbara E.,
4,436,580. CI. 156-636.000.
Mayo, Henry C; and Korzendorfer. Joseph E.. 4.436.330, CI
292-263.000.
Energy: See—
Bryan, James B.. 4,435,905, CI. 33-I8I.OOR.
Demirjian. Ara M ; and Solbes, Albert, 4,437,026, a. 310-1 1 000
Hondorp, Hugh L., 4,437,013, CI. 250-515.100.
""i^'l^,^^" ^■'' ""* Boukamp. Bernard A., 4,436.796, CI.
429-1 12.000.
Jardin, Stephen C; Yamada. Masaaki; Furth, Harold P.; and
Okabayashi, Mitcheo, 4,436,691, CI. 376-137.000
^V^TTSifi* "*"** ^■' '"*• ^"^' ■'°''"' <.*37,034, CI.
°cr324-346'o00^ ' ^'' "** ^*'^"*' ^'"'"" ^' ^'' *'*^^'°**'
Russak, Michael A., 4,436,558, CI. 148-1.500.
S»»^»5^j Chyng-Yann; and Wolf. Alfred P.. 4.436.717. d.
^^'ffS^, Toshifumi; and Kukacka. Lawrence E., 4,436,555, CI.
106-85.000.
Wood, Richard F.; and Young, Rosa T., 4,436.557, CI. 148- 1 500
National Aeronautics and Space Administration: See—
Kleinberg. Leonard L., 4,437.069, CI. 330-109.000.
Navv' Slftf"
"t 4':^3Jo^: brlliiiSj/cia''' ^^ •"' '*'*^'"*^"- ="»*~
Cole, James H., 4,436,425, CI. 356-361.000.
Hudson, John A., 4,437.097. CI. 34O-8S2.000.
^35^67000'* ^" '"** ^**' ^*^ °' *'*"'°*^- CI.
Miles, Melvin H.; and Fine, Dwight A.. 4,436.590. 0. 204-1 OOT
Somerfleck. Harold H.. 4.436.565. CI. 156-217.000
.. - ^illiams. Ralph E., 4.436,766. CI. 427-96.000.
U.S. Philips Corporation: 5m—
de Wilde. Johannes, 4,435,900, CI. 29-603.000.
Horl, Manfred. 4,437.070. CI. 330-254.000.
Mrazek. Ousuv; and Obenaus. Franz. 4.437.105, CI. 346-140.00R
Smaer. Barry M.. 4.437.118. CI. 358-113.000.
United Sutes Steel Corporation: See—
Boodman. Norman S.; Farr. Elvin L.; Otterholm. Robert J.; and
Green. NeuJan B.. III. 4,436.615. CI. 208-177.000.
.. Chang. Melvin C; and Howell, John L., 4,436,332, a. 73-41.000.
United Technologies Corporation: See—
Stetson. Karl A.; and Harrison. Irene R.. 4.436.419. Q. 336-33.300
Universal GesellschaA fur Umwelttechnik mbH: See—
Kreuzburt Eberhard; Von Der Pahle. Dietrich J.; Monsheimer.
210^3200?*'*'' *™* ''"'*'"• ''"''"^' *'*36,624. a.
University of Nebraska, The Board of RegenU of the: See—
Enckson. Eric D.. 4.436.700, CI. 422-102.000
University of Toledo, The: See—
Raftopoulos, Demetrios D., 4,436.099, CI. 128-782.000
Uno, Masahiro: See—
i.DA^T*^*'^' '^'*"i°= '"^ ^'*°' Mmhiro, 4.436.428. CI. 35^432.000.
uPA Technology, Inc.: See—
Weinstock, Jacques, 4,437,000, CI. 230-308.000.
Urano, Haruya: See—
N^iamura. Hiromichi; Urano, Haruya; Kojima. TaUuo; and
Sekiwa. MiUunao, 4,436,006, CI. 83-13.000.
Urasaki, Takanori; Hirabayashi, Yasuji; Yoshida. Tugusi; and Inata.
Miroo. to Teijin Limited. Novel wholly aromatic copolyester. pro-
S336,;H Slr8!'°76.ol!o"~'' '"*' """ '"*''-»'"^ «»"«^™'"-
Urbanek. Friedrich: See—
"?1?6:897"T528!S!3'S). ^'""^ ""* "'^"'''' ''"«•"«"•
^'f V*?a' i°^"' Chtndrasekaran. Santosh K.; and Shaw, Jane E.. to
Jel^ly'^4536jS!'c?':?-W65^"""'*""« '^^'"^'^ ""-
Ushikoshi. Kenichi. to Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha. Analog and
digital display timepiece. 4,436,435, CI. 368-7 1 .000.
Ushimura, Shoji: See—
^ rr''f;7??''i'Jl)$'' '^••»''""'*' Shoji; and Etoh, Yukihiro. 4,436.060.
Ushioda, Minoru; Ueno. Kenji; Furukawa. Hiroyasu; and Kobayashi,
Masahiro. to Kanegafuchi Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Polyvi-
ny chloride conuining alkyl acrylate and alkyl methacrylate sequen-
.,iw"51.P°'y'"'"^«* thereon. 4.436,861, CI. 524-425.000.
USM Corporation: See—
^4"i'JuM"iT.?V,5S?'' "'"*" ^' •"** Haruhom, Frank.
4,435,869, CI. 12-12.000.
^'Tj'?°i"ii'jJ5?'*'* ^ ■ •'' • ""^ G'Ibride, Andrew J.. 4,436.771, CI.
Usui Kokusai Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Usui. Masayoshi, 4.436.063, CI. 123-90.610.
Usui, Masayoshi, to Usui Kokusai Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Push rod
Xinrr4K3,'cM23!9oSKr' '"'* °"" ""'"'•' '=°'"''""*°"
Vahlensieck, Hans-Joachim: See—
^'i43t82j'?r'i3^T69'^^^^^^^ "" '''"'*''""=''• ""-^o-hin..
Vaillant, Robert: See—
., , '^'"*i' J"n-Lo"'»; and Vaillant. Robert. 4.436.434. Cl 405-204 000
Valenti. Salvatore. to Sandoz Ltd. After treating composition for direct
or reactive dyeings on cellulose. 4.436,524. Cl. 8-551 000
«i"i'i1*A;!?''" ^ Apparatus for cutting fusible material. 4,436.010, CI.
oj-l 7 1 .000.
VALEO: See-
Benin, Patrice. 4.436,171, Cl. 180-148.000.
Vance. Ershell C. Univerully positionable low profile mine drilling
machine and method. 4,436.455, Cl. 405-303.000
van den Bemt, Johannes C, to Estel Hoogovens BV. Ceramic burner
5?.' K*,' ???!£I^"'y ''°' • ho»-WM« stove for a blast furnace. 4,436,508.
Cl. 432-214.000.
''*^72"9SOo'' ^"'*''* ^'' "'•'^■'•n« implements. 4,436.161. Cl.
Vanderpool, Steven H.: See—
'•jtM56.«2"ci: 5^& ''*^*" "^ "^ ^"^ ^» ^-
Vanderwerf. Dennis F . to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Com-
M. »«"i?i'"i°.", « J3Sf' '°" ^°' •" overhead projector system.
*,*iO,^yi, Cl. 333-38.000.
Vanderwerf. Dennis F.. to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Com-
M36 3S''cr353.3ToW *'°" ^°^ " overhead projector system,
van Doome. Hubertus J., deceased (by van Doome, Martinus P J H
executor), to Erven Dr. Hubertus Josephus van Doome. Automatic
continuously variable transmission. 4.435.997. Cl. 74-796 000
van Doome, Martinus P. J. H.. executor: See-
van Doome. Hubertus J., deceased, 4,435,997. Cl. 74-796.000
van Helden. Robert: See—
Baardman. Frank; van Helden, Robert; and de Nie-Sarink, Mar-
garetha J.. 4.436.937. Cl. 564-409.000.
Vanlerber^he, Guy: See—
'^*2I^'SbVv5™*°''*' •"** Vanlerberghe. Guy. 4.436.909, Cl.
van Mullekom. Hubert P., to Ruti-te Strake, B.V. Device for inserting
a thread into the weaving shed of a pneumatic weaving machine by
meansofaflowingfluid. 4,436.122, CI. 139-435.000.
Vann, Roy R.; and George, Flint R., to Geo Vann, Inc. Method for
controlling subsurface blowout. 4,436,154, Cl. 166-281 000
van Ouwerkerk. Wouter C, to Saueretsig GmbH. Rotary screen print-
ing apparatus. 4,436,032, Cl. 101-120.000.
van 't Slot, Komelu, to Moba Holding Bameveld B.V. Modelling or
packing device for fowl. 4,433.879, Cl. 17-1 1.000.
Van Vliet. James G.; and Brown, James R., to Beckman Instruments,
i"f;. £!!,°'2.7"'"1P''*' <letector protection device and method.
4,436,994, Cl. 230-207.000.
^Yi^'JS^^A ,'^'3i!iJ? ° '^*"*** *•'« suspension system.
'I'Jw.***. CI. 296-39.000.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 43
Varian Associates, Inc.: See—
Harra, David J.; Turner. Frederick T.; and Hulchimton. Manin A..
4.436.602. Cl. 2O4-I92.00R.
Vary. Philip. Hydro-turbine device for generating electricity 4.436.480.
Cl. 4I5-2.00R.
Va«.salotti, Michael; and Obligado, Alvaro. to Aulomalion InduMrics.
Inc. Nuclear reactor cavity dccnntammalion machine. 4.436,694. Cl
376-310.000.
Vaughn. Howard A.. Jr.. to General Electric Company. Silicone rcsin
coaling composition containing an ultraviolet light abMirbing agent
4,436,851. Cl 524-43.000. * *
Vayda, Adam V.: See—
Morganson, Neal E.; and Vayda, Adam V.. 4.436.947. Cl.
585-525.000.
VEX) Adolf Schindling AG: See—
Collonia. Harald, 4.436.069, Cl. 123-339.000
Veco Beheer B V.: See—
de Hek, Johan A., 4,436.591. Cl. 204-1 1.000.
Veith. Werner, to Siemens Akticngcscllschafl. Flat cathode ray lube
and method of operation. 4.437.044, Cl. 315-366.000.
Veitscher Magncsitwerke-Aciien-Gesellschafl: See—
Horak. Josef, 4.436.144. Cl. 165-9.100.
Venetii, Mark: See—
Jaquay. Louis H ; and Venelti. Mark. 4.436.61 1. Cl. 208-1 l.OOR.
Vereinigle Dcutsch Metallwerke AG: See-
Prim. Bruno; Rocket, Manfred B.; Rudolph. Gunlhcr; Heubner.
Ulrich; and Zoebe. Hugo. 4.436.790, Cl. 428-675.000.
Veres, Albert: See—
Kaderjak. Gyula; Veres, Albert; Barkoczy, Isivan; and Lonscsak.
Janos. 4,436,954. CI. I74-I28.00R
Vereschaka. Anatoly S.: See-
Andrecv. Anatoly A.; Gavriiko, Igor V.; Gavrilov. Alexei G.;
Vereschaka. Anatoly S.; Zhcd. Viktor P.; Fadalka. Valentin G.;
and Sinclschikov. Andrei K.. 4.436.830. CI 501-96.000.
Verhagcn. Laurentius A. M.; and Warnaar. Lccndcrl G.. to Lever
Brothers Company. Low-caloric spread based on a low-mclling
butterfal fraction. 4.436.760. Cl. 426-603.000.
Veron. Serge: See—
Raverdy, Claude Y.; and Veron. Serge, 4.437.035, Cl. 313-388.000.
Verweij. Hendrik: See—
Joormann. Hendrik J. M.; Verweij. Hendrik; and Haisma, Jan,
4,436,381, Cl. 350-432.000.
Vichkanova. Sirafima A.; Shipulina, Ljudmila D.; Glyzin, Vladimir I.;
Bankovsky, Alexandr I.; Pimennv, Mikhail G.; and Boryaev, Klim I.
Medicated compound for treating diseases infected by virus of the
herpes group. 4,436.732. Cl. 424-180 000.
Victor Company of Japan Limited: See—
Inaba. Shosei, 4.436,201, Cl. 206-444 000.
Kishima, Yukihiro, 4,437.181, CI 369-244.000.
Nishihara. Yoshiki; and Miyamoto. Kazumichi. 4.436.683. Cl.
264-107.000
Viellefonl. Jean F.; Hens, Carolus M.; and Tobbatk, Hubert J., to
Metallurgie Hoboken-Overpell. Electrolysis apparalas. 4.436.606. Cl.
204-225 000.
Voesl-Alpine AkliengesellschaA: See—
Kilches. Helmut D; Lugscheider. Walter; Riegler. Ernst; and
Zaiicek. Ernst. 4,436,290, Cl 266-158.000.
Riegler, Ernst; and Zajicek, Ernst, 4,437,187, Cl. 373-73.000.
Vogi, James A.: See—
Cullen. John S ; Incorvia, Samuel A.; and Vogi, James A.,
4,436,623. Cl. 210-282.000.
Voigtiander. Wolfgang: See—
Schaumann. Wolfgang; Kaiser. Fritz; Voigtiander. Wolfgang;
Hoyer. Edgar; and Neubert. Peter. 4.436,735. Cl 424-182.000.
Voigisberger, Carl -Alexander: See—
Fuchs. Helmut V.; Schupp. Ceroid; and Voigisberger. Carl-Alex-
ander. 4.435.974, Cl. 73-40. 50A.
Voirin, Robert: See—
Kva-snikofT, Georges; and Voirin, Robert, 4,436,716, Cl. 423-
574.00R.
Vollmer Werke Ma.schinenfabrik GmbH: See—
Lenard, Peier. and Beck, Ernst, 4,436,000, Cl. 76-41.000.
Von Der Pahle. Dietrich J.: See—
Kreuzburg. Eberhard; Von Der Pahle. Dietrich J.; Monsheimer,
Rolf; Pfleiderer, Ernst; and Taeger, Tilman, 4,436,624, Cl.
2 10-632 000.
Vonnegut, George L., to General Motors Corporation. Turbine wheel
with integral DS blades and equiaxed hub. 4.436.485. CI 416-
241.00R.
Voplex Corporation: See-
Donahue. Gordon J.. 4.436.276, Cl. 249-91.000.
Vomberger. George F.; and Crulcher. John P.. to Senco Products, Inc.
Automatic firing system for pneumatic tools. 4,436,237, Cl.
227-130.000.
Vossieck, Paul, to Goetze AG Slide ring seal with spring to radially
bias in opposite radial directions. 4.436.314. Cl. 277-86.000.
Voznick, Henry P.. to Wahl Instruments, Inc. Multiple probe tempera-
lure measuring system and probes therefor. 4,436,438, Cl.
374-165.000.
Vrabec, John: See—
Lewandowski, Edward F.; and Vrabec, John, 4,437,034, Cl.
313-348.000.
W. R. Grace & Co.: See—
Gokel, George W., 4,436.664. Cl. 260-330.600.
Rendulic, Francis J.; Trasavage, Roberi K.; and Boduch, Paul A.,
4,436,806, Cl. 430-311.000.
Wiichi. Hiroshi: See—
Kokura. Saioshi: Nihci. Masayasu; Wtchi. Hiroshi; Mashida,
Hiromi; and Scnda. Kousaku, 4,4.^6.982, Cl 219-130 510
Wacker-Chemie GmbH; See—
Huhn. Karl, and Marwiiz, Heinrich. 4.436.856, Cl 524-211 000.
Pirson, Ewald; Schmidlkofer, Jakob; and Innertsherger. Ernst.
4,436.647. Cl 252-358.000
Wacyk, Ihor T.. to RCA Corporation Actively controlled input buffer.
4.437.024. Cl. 307-475.000
Wada. Satoshi: See-
Sakamolo. Noboru; Yamashita. Itaru; Wada. Satoshi; Yano. Keni-
chi; and Oda, Suehiro. 4.436.981. Cl 219-124.320
Wada. Tomio: See—
Funada. Fumiaki; Kozaki. Syuichi; Malsuura. Masaiaka; and Wada,
Tomio. 4.436.379. Cl 350-347 OOE.
Yano. Kohzo; Hamada. Hiroshi; Inami. Yasuhiko; and Wada,
Tomio. 4.436,380, Cl 350-357.000.
Wada. William T See-
Gentry. Larry L ; Moss. Herbert H.; Panicker. Narayana N.; and
Wada, William T.. 4,436.048, CI 1 14-230.000
Wagner, Manfred: See—
Erdmannsdorfer. Hans; Wagner, Manfred; and Weyh. Gerd,
4,436.535. Cl 55-96.000.
Wagner, Mclvin P . to PPG Industries, Inc Rubber compositions.
4.436.847, CI 523-203 000
Wahl Instruments, Int : See—
Voznick, Henry P . 4,436,438, Cl. 374-165.000.
Waldemar Link GmbH & Co : See-
Keller, Arnold. 4.435.854. Cl. 3-1.913.
Waldmann. Helmut: See—
Rauleder. Gebhard; and Waldmann. Helmut, 4.436.943. Cl.
585-357.000
Walker. Donald R.: See-
Mitchell. Hal D.; and Walker. Donald R., 4,435,851, Cl. 2-2.000
Walker. Graham; See—
O'Hanlon. Peter J; and Walker. Graham. 4.436.751, Cl.
424-283000.
Walker, Thad O.; and Matthews, Patricia C , lo Exxon Research A
Engineering Co Additive composition for release of stuck drill iMpe.
4,436.638. Cl. 252-8.55R.
Walls. John E.. to American Hoechst Corporation. Light-sensitive
polymeric diazonium condensates and reproduction compositions
and materials therewith 4,436,804, Cl 430-157.000
Walls. John E.. lo American Hoechst Corporation. Developer composi-
tion with sodium, lithium and/or potassium salts for developing
negative working imaged photographic material. 4.436,807, cf
Walser. Armin: See-
Fryer. Rodney I ; Trybulski. Eugene J.; and Walser. Armin.
4.436.662. Cl 260-245.700.
Walsh. Brian F ; and Halperl. David E.. to Xerox Corporation Low
resolution raster images. 4.437.122. Cl. 358-166 000
Walsh, Edward J.; and Kurz. Robert A., lo Westinghouse Electric
Corn. Apparatus for continually upgrading transformer dielectric
liquid. 4,437.082. Cl. 336-58.000.
Waller Hofmann Maschinenfabrik, Firma: See—
Hofmann, Frank. 4.436.230. Cl. 222-614.000.
Waller. Lolhar: See-
Ernst, Horsi M.; Brandensiein, Manfred; Waller. Lolhar; and
Olschewski. Armin. 4,435,890, Cl. 29-I48.40R.
Walters. Anthony J ; and Nelson. Stanford C. lo Wallers, Anihony J.
Descaler for systems employing water as a heal transfer ageni.
4,436,604. Cl 204-196.000.
Wandel. Dietmar: See—
Koschinek, Gunter; Wandel. Dietmar; Kretschmann. Bernd; and
Zinsser. Rolf, 4.436.688. Cl. 264-176.00F.
Wang Associates: See—
Wang. Chia-Gee. 4.436,826, Cl. 436-323.000.
Wang. Chia-Gee, to Wang Associates. Tagged immunoaaaay. 4,436,826,
Cl. 436-525.000.
Wang, Li-Kong: See—
Parrillo, Louts C; Reullinger, George W ; and Wang, Li-Kong,
4.435,895,0.29-571.000. • «-•
Ward, Donald W.: See—
Dahl. James M.; Jacobs, Bernard B.; Lipovac, Joseph E.; Meglen,
Ralph A.; and Ward. Donald W.. 4.436,497, Cl. 425-28.00R.
Warlaumoni, John M.: See-
Brady, Michael J ; Meyerson, Bernard S.; and Warlaumoni, John
M., 4,436,797, CI. 430-3.000.
Wamaar, Leendert G.: See—
Verhagen, Laurentius A. M.; and Wamaar, Leenderi G., 4,436,760,
Cl. 426-603.000.
Wamer-Lamberi Company: See—
Smilka, Tim A.; Bunge, Richard H ; French, James C; and Bloem,
Russell J., 4,436,730, CI. 424-279.000.
Warner, Philip E. Left-handed lellerer 4,435,903, Cl 33-23.00D.
Watabe, Akinori; Yonezawa, Susumu; and Tanaka. Yoahiharu, lo Nip-
pon Telegraph A Telephone Public Corporation; and Manaei Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha. Small-sized video or audio pickup device having a
beam deflector disposed within a focusing device support. 4,437,177,
Cl. 369-45.000
Watanabe, Alsuo; and Uno, Masahiro, lo Fuji Electric Co., Lid.
Photoacoustic spectrometer. 4.436.428, Cl. 336432.000.
Watanabe, Kenichi; and Sumimoto. Takaihi, lo Toyo Kogyo Co.. Lid.
Front wheel suspension for a front engine-front wheel drive automo-
bile. 4,436.173. Cl. 180-234.000.
PI 46
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 13, 1984
Waunabe. Koji. to NIFCO. Inc Device for clamping one terminal end
of a tape in a tape reel. 4.436,253. CI. 242-74.100.
Watanabe, Taka.shi: See—
Naraio. Kiyoshi; Ohisuka. Keizou; Inada. Tooru; and Watanabe
Taka.shi, 4.436.699. CI 422-68.000
Watari. Takashi: See—
Inoue. Mono; Hoshmo, Satoshi; Namura. Hideki; and Watari
Takashi. 4.436.482, CI. 416-1.000
Watkins. Hugh: See—
^436 652*' C? ^VCY^'^"^'"- Theodore J.; and Walkins. Hugh.
^!'.?'?:.™"^'*'- '° ^""and pIc Helicopter rotors. 4.436.483. CI.
416-143.000.
Watts. Lewis W.. Jr.: See—
Sanderson, John R ; Rcnken. Terry L.; and Watts. Lewis W . Jr
4.436.926. CI. 560-246.000.
Sanderson. John R.; and Watts. Lewis W.. Jr. 4.436 927 CI
560-246.000. •'.-Jo.'^'. «_i.
Sanderson. John R ; Renken. Terry L.; and Watts, Lewis W Jr
4.436.928. CI. 560-246.000. ' '
Sanderson. John R.; and Watts. Lewis W.. Jr.. 4 436 929 CI
560-246.000. ■».«»Jo.^z^». ci.
Sanderson, John R; and Watts. Lewis W.. Jr.. 4.436 930 CI
560-246.000. jo-'J". '-i
Sanderson. John R.. Watts. Uwis W.. Jr.; and Renken. Terry L..
4.436.931, CI. 560-246.000.
Sanderson. John R.; Vanderpool. Steven H ; and Watts. Lewis W
Jr.. 4.436.932. CI. 560-246.000.
^4.4^7". is" a. ^36i^'.0OO*'" ^°'P°""°"' ^^^ <^°°'""8 computer.
Wavin B.V.': See—
Olderaan. Wilhelmus F. T C. 4,435,888. CI 29-235 000
Webasto-Werk W. Baier GmbH & Co. See—
Jardin, Hans, 4.436.338. CI. 296-223.000.
Lamkewitz. Falk; and Riedmaier. Josef. 4.436.064. CI. 123-142 50R
Weber, Georg: See—
Schulz. Rudi; Puestel, Hubert; Weber, Georg; and Kuerten, Herib-
ert.4.436.702. CI. 422-195.000. ucricn. nerio
Weber. T. Jerome, to GCA Corporation. Apparatus for heat treatine
semiconductor wafers. 4,436.985. CI. 219-388 000
Webster, Ronald B.: See—
^ M3"5.S!'c1."'33.U?SJk* '^°"*''* ^ ' """ ^""'^'"' °*"*'' ^ •
Wegh. John R.'See—
^.'!o'',^"fI'A °*"'«' ^' '"«• ^cgh. John R.. 4.436.187. CI
188-73.450.
Weikert. Norbert B.: See—
Best. Gerd; and Weikert. Norbert B.. 4.436.346. CI. 299-87 000
^1 rL'^w^ iJt*«'*'od for joining webs of aseptic pouches. 4.436.567.
CI. 136-158.000.
Weiler. Gerhard H.; and Pagels, Louis T., to Automatic Liquid Packag-
ing. Inc. Threaded cap for severing a closure from a hermetically
sealed container. 4.436.210. CI. 215-32.000
Weimann. Gunter: See—
Batz. Hans-Georg; Linke. Hans-Ralf; Stellner. Klaus; and Wei-
mann. Gunter. 4,436,828. CI. 436-545.000.
Weinel. Johann: See—
°^'I«^'.,^'"'^"*"'^' ^"'l Weinel. Johann. 4.437.005. CI.
250-343.000.
Weinstock Jacques, to UPA Technology. Inc. Aperture piece and
method for calibrating backscatter thickness measuring instruments
tor measunng concave workpieces. 4.437.000. CI. 250-308 000
Weiss, Viktor; See—
Fryberg. Mario; and Weiss. Viktor. 4.436.811. CI. 430-564.000.
weitz. Hans-Martin; Fischer. Rolf; and Pohl. Hans H.. to BASF Ak-
Ji^faf 1^ ,^ Preparation of o-xylene and ethylbenzene. 4.436,944.
%-l. 3B3-4UB.000.
Weitzel. Harold B ; and Parman. David G.. to Ricwil. Incorporated.
Method of making a heating device for utilizing the skin effect of
alternatina current. 4.436,565, CI. 156-49.000
Welander, Walter E. Positive drive differential for vehicle includinit
tractors 4,435,995. CI. 74-71 1.000. mciuaing
Welch. William R.: See—
'"'^'11% .f'^' ''• •''• ""'l ^«'ch. William R.. 4.436.152. CI.
166-214.000.
Wells. John R . to Wescor. Inc. Method and apparatus for separating
cellsby sedimentation velocity. 4.436,634. CI. 210-800.000
Wenninger. Fred W.: See—
Christopher. Chris J.; Wenninger. Fred W.; Morris. Donald E
Covington Wayne F.; Folsom. Jerry B.; Beyers, Joseph W..'
Vzlfr^,;!^" "• '"'^ Osborne. Jeffrey C. 4.437.156. CI.
364-200.000.
Wentzell. Timothy H.. to Combustion Engineering, Inc. Torsionless
multiple connector reel device. 4,436,190, CI. 191-12 20R
Werquin. Jean C: See—
Bocquet. Jacques; and Werquin. Jean C, 4,436,791, CI. 428-682.000
Wescor. Inc.: See —
Wells. John R., 4.436.634. CI. 210-800.000
West Company. The: See—
'^'4l4l75'2°00O** ^ ' '"'^ Kalocaj. Andrew J.. 4,436.478, CI.
Western Electric Co.. Inc.: See—
^'m3T4"74 'cI^NmIVoOo'"*'*'' ^'°' ^''' ""' ^*"''''°' ^^ ^'
Hwuen, Robert C; and NovoroUky, Paul G., 4,436,958, CI. 179-
Suranyi. Gabriel G.. 4.437.148. CI. 363-89.000
Wesiinghouse Electric Corp.: See—
Dorman. John G ; Balbo. Anthony M.; Randall. Charles E and
Sette. Robert A. 4.436.184. CI. 187-29.00R
Gyugyi. La.szlo. 4.437.052. CI. 323-210.000.
^'?^, ^Xi"^' ^ • ""'^ Yamasaki. George K.. 4.437.038. CI.
313-633.000.
Ludwig. Richard H.; Quan. Wing C; Husson. Alan L.; Dimberger
Linus R ; and Polis. Marjorie J.. 4.436.185. CI. 187-29 OOR
Olmsted, Gaylord S.; and Rosno, Gordon W., 4,436,016. CI.
o9- 1 .809.
Radford. Kenneth C; and Harrison. Don E.. 4.436.677 CI
264-0.500. '
''^^.'S^]! cT3?o'i:&'"'""- '°'"""'' '^ -"^ ^'•^'°^- ^y'^
Walsh, Edward J.; and Kurz, Robert A.. 4,437.082. CI. 336-58.000
West land pic: See —
Watson. Kenneth. 4.436.483. CI. 416-143 000
Wetzel. Peter: 5^^—
Rief. Rolf; and Wetzel. Peter. 4.436.951. CI. 174-52 OPE
Wey. Robert A.; and Roberts. Harold A., to Augat Inc. Vacuum chuck
for holding filaments. 4.436.295. CI. 269-21 OO)
Weyh. Gerd: See—
Erdmannsdorfer. Hans; Wagner. Manfred; and Weyh. Gerd.
4,4Ju,535, CI. 55-96.000.
Whaley, Wilson M.: See—
^'^f' ?/Jlf ^S"""""' ''""'' ' • »"<^ Whaley. Wilson M.. 4.436.641,
CI. 252*68.000.
Wheaton Industries: See—
Allen. Fred E.; Thuener. Bruce W.; and Shadincer Peter R
4.436.500. CI. 425-290.000. onaainger. reter K.,
Wheeler. Thomas N.. to Union Carbide Corporation. Biocidal enol
?^'^«^n° ^"'^'■'••'■*^y'^'°""'*""''°"^ compounds. 4.436.666. CI.
Wheeler. Warren H.: See—
Russon. Darrel L.; and Wheeler. Warren H.. 4.436.007. CI.
83-23.000.
Wheeler. William J., to Eli Lilly and Company. 7-[2-(2-Aminooxazol-4-
yl)-2-(oximino)acetamido cephalosporin antibiotics and intermediates
therefor. 4,436.912. CI. 548-233.000.
White David N . to Contour Med Partners. Ltd. Method of forming
implantable prostheses for reconstructive surgery. 4.436.684, CI.
264-138.000.
White. Henry J.: See—
''tS5?2"ci.?25-3Tl'iS,.""'' '■' "' '^^'""' °""^ «•
Whiting. Roger L.: See—
Kluge. Arthur F.; Strosberg. Arthur M.; Whiting. Roger L. and
Christie. George A.. 4.436.914. CI. 548-348.000.
Whitney. Sandra L.: See—
•Ralston, Paul H.; and Whitney, Sandra L.. 4.436.628. CI.
210-697.000.
Whitten. James R.. to General Electric Company. Fiber optics trans-
%!/• l"" sensing parameter magnitude. 4,436.995. CI. 250-227 000
Wickramasinghe. Hemantha K.. to National Research Development
Corporation. Acoustic coupling device. 4,435.985. CI. 73-642 000
Wico Corporation: See-
Kim, Syng N.. 4,436.971. CI. 200-295.000.
Widmer. Peter. Apparatus for carrying out an anaerobic fermentation
of organic solid matter for the purpose of extracting a combustible
gas. 4,436.818, CI. 435-316.000.
Wilder. David M. Roll mill for reduction of moisture content in waste
material. 4.436,028. CI. 100-121.000.
Wiley. Alvin F.: See—
Talley, Thomas H.; Sheets, Lee W.; and Wiley. Alvin P.. 4,435.860.
CI. 5-13.000.
Wilhelm. Frederick C: See—
^^J/^; fj-,^J^ ^- ""'^ ^''helm, Frederick C, 4,436.836, CI.
502-317.000.
Wilkinson Rubber Linatex Limited: See-
Barnes. George D., 4.436.433, CI. 366-152.000.
Willett, John T.: See—
Tabereaux, Alton T.; and Willett. John T.. 4,436,598, CI.
204-67.000.
William H. Rorer. Inc.: See—
Studt. William L.; Zimmerman, Harry K.; and Doualas. Georae H
4,436.911,0.546-291.000. .'Jcorgen..
Williams. Lonnie M.. to Williams Panel Board Company. Method of
disassembling wooden pallets. 4,435.892, CI. 29-239.000
Williams Panel Board Company: See-
Williams, Lonnie M.. 4.435.892. CI. 29-239.000.
Williams, Ralph E.. to United Sutes of America. Navy. Plated bridge
step-over connection for monolithic devices and method for makins
thereof 4,436.766, CI. 427-96.000.
Williamson. John G., Jr., to Marshall and Williams Company. Auto-
matic lint screen. 4.435,909, CI. 34-82.000.
Willingham. James T.. to South Plains Sheet Meul, Inc. Suction pipe.
4.436.457. CI. 406- 1 1 6.000.
Willis. Clive: See—
Gauthier. Michel; Hackett. Peter A.; and Willis, Clive. 4.436,709,
CI. 423-437.000.
Wilson. Charles A., II: See—
"42t2lTca)^^"*''* E.; and Wilson, Charles A., II, 4,436,736, CI.
March 13, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 47
Wilson. Gordon R : See—
Wisdom. Lawrence W.; and Wilson. Gordon R.. 4.436.458. CI.
^i'*P,"; ,i^"y ^ Device for recording the dispensing of Huids.
4.436.223. CI. 222-36.000.
Winstead. Thomas W.. to Maryland Cup Corporation. Method and
apparatus for generating foamed thermoplastic materials. 4.436.679.
CI. 264-40.300.
Wippig. Werner: See-
Magnus. Wolf Braach, Otto; Fischer, Dirk; and Wippig, Werner
4.436.448, CI. 405-143 000. *
Wisdom. Lawrence W.; and Wilson. Gordon R.. to Fnto-Lay. Inc
Liquid-sohd contacting apparatus. 4,436,458, CI. 406-135.000
Wissman. Lawrence Y.: See—
Chromecek. Richard C; Friends. Gary D.; Wissman. Lawrence Y
and Yourd, Raymond A.. III. 4.436.887. CI. 526-263.000
Witalka, Jerome J.; Kurth. Duane G.; and Baber. David J., to Sperry
Corporation. Dynamic subchannel allocation. 4.437.157 CI
364-200.000.
Withnall. Malcolm D. N.: See-
Taylor. Michael; and Withnall. Malcolm D. N.. 4.436.222. CI.
Witt. Donald R . to Phillips Petroleum Company. Polymerization
process utilizing a catalyst prepared by aging of a chromium-contain-
ing gel at high pH. 4.436.882. CI. 526-106.000.
Witt. Donald R.. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Polymerization using
a support formed by heating silica gel in inert atmosphere. 4.436.883.
Witten, Raymond L., to Hughes Tool Company Below motor pressure
compensation system for submersible pump. 4,436,488 CI
417-53.000.
Wittmann. Heinz; and Konwitza. Vladimir, to TMC Corporation
Locking mechanism. 4,436,322, CI. 280-614000
Wojcik, William. Process for customizing glass greeting cards and glass
greeting card product. 4.436.776, CI. 428-14.000.
Wolf Alfred P.: See—
Shiue, Chyng-Yann; and Wolf Alfred P., 4.436,717, CI. 424-1 100
Wolff, Konrad: See—
Hofmann, Hansdieter; Rothe, Hans-Jochen; Skupin, Geore and
Wolff, Konrad. 4.436.898. CI. 528-336.000.
Wong. Robert: See—
Haines. Richard M.; Wong. Roberi; and Berger. Elisabeth J
4.436.848. CI. 523-426.000.
Wood. Denis; Thomas. John F.. Jr.; and Dipper, Barry, to Donnelly
Mirrors. Inc. Vehicle mirror assembly. 4.436,371. CI. 350-281.000.
Wood. Louis L.; and Callon. Gary J., to Purification Engineering. Inc.
Immobilized microbial cell composition for making L-asparlic acid
4.436.813. CI. 435-109.000.
Wood. Richard F.; and Young. Rosa T.. to United Stales of America.
Energy. Modified laser-annealing process for improving the quality
of electrical P-N junctions and devices. 4.436.557. CI. 148-1.500
Wood, William E.; and Barber. Franklin T.. to Phillips Petroleum
Company. Removal of contaminants in liquid purification. 4.436.902
CI. 528-501.000.
Woodall. Jerry M.: See—
Freeouf John L.; Haag, William J.; and Woodall. Jerry M
4.436,768, CI. 427-227.000.
Woodings, Roberi T. Method and apparatus for opening blast-furnace
tap holes. 4,436,285, CI. 266-45.000.
Woudstra, Gerrit. to Stamicarbon B.V. Arrangement for monitoring
cathodically protected structures. 4.437.065, CI. 324-425.000.
Wright, Franklin J., to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Iron-thal-
lium catalysts for use in CO hydrogenation and process of preparina
the catalysts. 4.436.834. CI. 502-201.000. f f b
Wright, Lamont R.: See—
Ceelen. Theodorus M.; Jeromin. Lothar S.; and Wright. Lamont
R. 4.436.054. CI. 118-652.000.
Wuelfing, Johann A.: See—
Jozic. Ljerka. 4.436.908. CI. 546-206.000.
Wyatt. Everette L.: See-
Lyons. Donald W., Jr.; and Wyatt, Everette L.. 4,436.545. CI.
71-25.000.
Wyatt. Gerald A., to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company.
Rocking armature transformer relay. 4.437.081, CI. 335-229.000.
Xerox Corporation: See—
Ceelen, Theodorus M.; Jeromin. Lothar S.; and Wright. Lamont
R., 4.436.054. CI. 1 18-652.000.
Doery. Michael S.; Hanzlik. Edward W. C; Adamek. John A.; and
McLaughlin. William J.. 4.436.301. CI. 271-177.000.
Spraguc. Robert A.. 4.437.106, CI. 346-160.000.
Walsh. Brian F ; and Halpert, David E.. 4.437.122. CI. 358-166.000.
Yagihara. Morio; Hirano. Tsumoru; and Mihayashi, Keiji. to Fuji Photo
Film Co., Ltd. Silver halide color photographic light-sensitive mate-
rial. 4.436,808, CI. 430-381.000.
Yaguchi, Sadao: See—
Ohyama, Sadahiro; Kato, Hiroshi; Yaguchi. Sadao; Baba. Mikito;
and Okada. Morikazu. 4,437,140. CI. 361-402.000.
Yamabe, Masaaki; Higaki. Hiromichi; Shinohara. Toshio; Tanabe.
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama. Shunsuke. to Dai Nippon Toryo Co.. Ltd.;
and Asahi Glass Company. Ltd. Anticorrosive coating process.
4.436,772,0.427-379.000.
Yamabe. Masaaki; Higaki. Hiromichi; Shinohara. Toshio; Tanabe.
Hiroyuki; and Nakayama. Shunsuke. to Dai Nippon Toryo Co., Ltd.;
and Asahi Glass Company Ltd. Anticorrosive coating process.
4.436.773,0.427-380.000.
Yamada. Junichi: See—
Mochizuki. Takeioshi; Matsuo, Kazuya. Kudo, Miluo, Arai, Akira;
Yamada, Junichi: Shono, Keizi; Aoki, Masaaki; Ohmori. Masai-
chi; and Nishi, Genichiro, 4,435,962, CI. 62-175 000
Yamada, Masaaki: See—
Jardin. Stephen C; Yamada, Masaaki; Furth, Harold P and
Okabayashi, Milcheo, 4.436.691. CI. 376-137.000.
Yamada, Toshio: See—
Hala, Shuji; Yamada. Toshio; and Murakawa. Katsuji. 4.435 994
CI. 74-606 OOR
Yamagami. Hiroshi: See—
Umezu, Hiroaki; Kishi, Akira; and Yamagami, Hiroshi, 4.435,927.
Yarnagaia, Ryutaro; Kozuka, Nobuhiko; Nishihama, Hitoshi; Koyama,
Shigeo; and Sakai, Kazulada, to Mita Industrial Company Limited.
Cleaning device for use on an electrostatic copying apparatus.
Yamagata, Tetuo: See—
Imamura, Yoshinobu; Kamei, Shigeki; Yamagata, Tetuo and Fuiii
Hiroshi, 4,436,026, CI 100-45 000
Yamaguchi, Bunitsu: See—
Miyoshi, Seizo; and Yamaguchi. Bunitsu. 4.437.178. CI. 369-75 100
Yamaguchi. Elaine S.. to Chevron Research Company. Glycolate
diihiophosphonc acids, metal salts thereof and oil compositions
containing the salts 4.436.640. CI 252-32 70E.
Yamaguchi, Hiroshi; and Negishi. Nobumasa. to Mitsubishi Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Device for detecting fiame in open-type combus-
lor and oxygen density of indoor air 4.436,505. CI 431-76 000
Yamaguchi. Katsunobu; Matsuoka, Sciichi; Hayashida. Takayuki and
Hayase. Tomio. to JGC Corporation and Tsukishima Kikai Co..
Ltd , a part interest Process for convening solid wastes to gases for
use as a town gas 4,436,532, CI. 48-209.000
Yamaguchi, Noboru; and Satoh, Seiichi, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd
Harness clip. 4,435,881, CI 24-160PB
Yamaguchi. Yulaka; Koizumi. Nobuyuki; Araki. Tamio; Koiima. Koi-
chi; and Ikeda, Nobumasa, to Bridgeslone Tire Co., Ltd. Pneumatic
radial lircs. 4.436,131, CI. 1 52-361. OFP.
Yamaha Hat&udoki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Takahashi. Masanori; and Uehara, Hidehiko, 4,436,514, CI
440-89.000.
Yamaizumi, Kazuo. to Nagano Keiki Seisakusho. Ltd. Plunger pump
4.436.494. CI. 4I7.403.0(» * ^ ^
Yamakawa Industrial Company, Limited: See—
Emura, Koji; Suzuki, Tuneo; and Kazama, Hidemichi, 4,436.685.
CI. 264-148000
Yamamoto. Etsuji; Sckihara. Kensuke; and Kohno. Hideki, to Hitachi
Ltd. Electromagnet. 4.437.136. CI. 361-146.000
Yamamoto. Hideo: See—
Malsumoto, Shuichi; Hatori, Yoshinori; Murakami, Hitomi; and
Yamamoto, Hideo, 4,437,119, CI 358-136.000
Yamamoto, Kaichi. to Sony Corporation. Digital signal processing
method and apparatus 4.437.125, CI 358-167000
Yamamoto, Kazuo, to NSK-Warner KK Locking device for a moving
anchor of a seat belt. 4,436,323. CI. 280-804.000.
Yamamoto. Keisaku: See—
Furukawa, Hiroshi; Sailo, Yuichi; Imai, Akio; Yamamoto, Keisaku;
Takao, Hiroyoshi; and Yoshida, Nobuyuki, 4,436.873, CI
525-314.000
Yamamoto, Sakuei; and Nishida, Mitsuhiro. to Mitsubishi Dcnki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Molded submersible motor. 4,437,027. CI. 310-78.000.
Yamamoto. Tsuyoshi, Taniguchi, Norihisa; Iida, Kazuyoshi; and
Kondo. Yoshikazu, to Japanese National Railways; and Bndaesione
Tire Company Limited. Noise control apparatus. 4.436.179. CI.
181-210.000.
Yamamoto, Yasuo: See—
Horie. Shigeru; Yamamoto. Yasuo; and Ikarashi. Takeo. 4.436.835.
CI. 502-208.000.
Yamamura. Masaaki; Igarashi, Taizo; and Ukigai, Toshiyuki. to Kao
Soap Co.. Ltd.; Lion Corporation; and Nippon Oil and Fats Co., Ltd
Stabilizer for mixed fuels. 4,436,527. CI. 44-51.000
Yamanaka, Mitsuyuki: See—
Hayashi, Yulaka; Yamanaka, Mitsuyuki; and Karasawa. Hideyuki.
4.436.761. CI. 427-38.000.
Yamasaki, George K.: See-
Link, Vincent F.; and Yamasaki. George K.. 4.437.038. CI
313-633.000.
Yamashita. Itaru: See-
Sakamoto. Noboru; Yamashita. Itaru; Wada. Satoshi; Yano, Keni-
chi; and Oda, Suehiro, 4.436,981. CI 219-124.320
Yamashita. Keitaro; and Kashiwagi. Hiromi. to Hitachi Metals. Ltd.
Developing apparatus 4.436,055, CI. 118-658.000.
Yamashita, Masahide; Oku, Hikaru; and Maruyama, Masato, lo Nippon
Telegraph St Telephone Public Corp. of 1-6. Communication control
unit. 4.437.168, CI. 364-900.000.
Yamashita, Sadahiko: See—
Makimoto, Mitsuo; Endo. Haruyoshi; Kikuchi, Ko; and Yamashiu.
Sadahiko. 4,437.076. O. 333-206.000.
Yamazaki, Shigelomo, to Kabushiki Kaisha Akashi Seisakusho. Scan-
ning electron microscope or similar equipment. 4.437.009. CI. 250-
Yamazoe, Hisamitsu; See—
Nakatsuka, Hirotaka; Mizuno. Toshiaki; Yamazoc. Hisamitsu; and
Matsuoka. Hiroki. 4.436.074. CI. 123-492.000.
Yano, Kenichi: See-
Sakamoto, Noboru, Yamashiu, luru; Wada, Satoshi; Yano, Keni-
chi; and Oda. Suehiro. 4.436.981. CI. 219-124.320.
PI 48
LIST OF PATENTEES
^^k:JU°i!''u *[*^^' *^"°*^*- '"•'"'• Y«uhiko; and WkU. Tomio. to
CI mj'sTWO E'ectrochromic display device. 4,436.380,
Yano, Shunji: See—
Yoda, Kuniichi: See—
V L°*'''?r*- '^"•'chisa; and Yoda. Kuniichi. 4,436.786. CI. 428-447.000
Tokota, Hajime; See —
Yoshida. Masashi; Yokou. Hajime; Aman. Milsuji; and Shigemura.
Tatsuya, 4,437,129. CI. 360.85.000.
Yokouchi. Hisatake: See—
Matsuda. Tadahito; Okumura. Masahide; Yokouchi. HisaUke
Ozasa. Susumu; and Kato. Yasuo. 4.437.008. CI. 25O.396.00R "
Yonezawa. Susumu: See—
Yoos. Charles J Appliance supports. 4.436.335. CI. 296.24.00R
4:i;6";76''S'474-f^oS."" '" "«*«-•"" or an excavator.
York. Billie M.. Jr.. to Alcon Laboratories. Inc. Method of inhibiting
aldose reductase activity. 4.436.745. CI. 424-273 OOR
Yoshida. Chosaku: See—
^°^-J*^*^°' Yoshida. Chosaku; Kiba. Yasuo; Takeno. Ryuko
Nakano. Joji; Nitta. Jun; Kishimoto. Sumiko; Murakami. Shoha-
chi; Tsuda. Hisatsugu; and Saikawa. Isamu. 4.436.921 CI
544-238.000. '
Yoshida. Hajime. to Hajime Industries Ltd. Object and inspection
system 4,437.115. CI. 358-106.000 H^""n
Yoshida Kogyo K K: See—
Seki. Fumio. 4.436.238. CI. 227-149000.
Yoshida. Masashi; Yokota. Hajime; Aman. Mitsuji; and Shigemura.
Tatsuya. to Hiuchi. Ltd. Magnetic recording and reproducing appa-
?i«!!I!l''t".*,'"P* transport in the forward and reverse directions.
4.437.129, CI. 360-85.000.
Yoshida. Nobuyuki: See—
Furukawa. Hiroshi; Saito. Yuichi; Imai. Akio; Yamamolo. Keisaku
Takao, Hiroyoshi; and Yoshida, Nobuyuki, 4,436.873 Cl"
525-314.000.
Yoshida, Tugusi: See—
Urasaki. Takanori; Hirabayashi, Yasuji; Yoshida, Tugusi; and Inata
Hiroo, 4,436.894,0.528-176.000.
Yoshida, Yoshiaki: See—
Seiki. Kazuo; Motobayashi, Kozo; Yoshizawa, Toshio; Yoshida.
Yoshiaki; and Onoue, Keiji. 4.435.954. Cl. 57-408 000
Yoshikawa. Kensei: See—
Amano Takehiro; Yoshikawa. Kensei; Sano, Tatsuhiko; Ohuchi,
Kutaka; Ishigura. Michihiro, Shiono, Manzo; Fujita. Yoshiii- and
Nishida. Takashi, 4,436,939. Cl. 568-813.000.
Yoshimura. Hirofumi: See—
Ikeda. Nobuo; and Yoshimura, Hirofumi, 4,436,973, Cl. 219-10 55F
Yoshimura. Shoji. See—
Shimizu. Shigeo; Takano. Hiroyuki; Yoshimura. Shoji; and Takada.
Kinji. 4.436.904. Cl. 544-27.000.
Yoshizawa, Toshio: See—
^w'- 5^"°- Motobayashi, Kozo; Yoshizawa, Toshio; Yoshida,
Yoshiaki; and Onouc. Kciji. 4.435,954, Cl. 57-408.000
Young. Rosa T.: See—
Wood. Richard F.; and Young. Rosa T., 4.436.557. Cl. 148-1.500.
loung, Sam H.: See —
Adrian. David L.; and Young, Sam H.. 4,435.912. Cl. 40-365.000
Yourd. Raymond A., Ill: See—
Chromecek, Richard C; Friends. Gary D.; Wissman. Uwrence Y.
V ?.",.."'*'• '^«y'"on<l A.. III. 4.436.887. Cl. 526-263.000.
n!\Z^\VZ3^^^*'"^°"- '"<= Port«We display system. 4.436.135.
s-l. I0U-IJ3.U00.
Yuda. Takuo; and Notoya, Yoshiaki. to Nifco Inc. Fastening means for
rearview mirror in automobile interior. 4.436.273. Cl. 248-549 000
Yukimoto, Kazuyoshi: See—
"71t5'u'i'°A?'"i!l^ Ishikawa. Atuo; and Yukimoto. Kazuyoshi.
March 13, 1984
Zajicek. Ernst: See—
Kilches. Helmut D.; Lugscheider. Walter; Riegler. Ernst; and
Zaiicek. Ernst. 4.436.290/0. 266-158.000. • cmsi. ana
Riegler. Ernst; and Zajicek. Ernst. 4.437.187. Cl. 373-73.000.
2Ukanan. John A.: See—
T435:6."4"c1. f08-?9.5S" ^""^ '■' "•' ^'~"' '°'"' ""■'
Zaitsman, Efim, to Monarch Wine Co.. Inc. Method and apparatus for
4.4?r942fcr53^8*90(» "'" '*'"*' ' '"'••P*^* <=°^''*"« '»«•"»•
Zane. Michael S.: See—
Zane. Peter L; and Zane. Michael S.. 4.436,232. Cl. 224-39.000.
Zane. Peter L.; and Zane. Michael S.. to KBL Corporation. Bracket for
motorcycle lock. 4.436.232, Cl. 224-39 000
ZanMnberg, Jan, to Danfoss A/S. Control device for a liquid pump
with adiusuble pumping volume 4,436,489, Cl. 417-218 000
Zanch, Milan S. Stnnged instrument bridge 4.436,015, Cl. 84-298 000
Zaruba, John V ; and Terzian, Rouben T.. to Marvin Glass & Associ-
ates. Hanging doll house structure. 4,435,915, O. 46-12.000
Zbinden, Peter: See—
"ci''?5°27 OOo""'" ^'''"**'"' '*"*'■• "^ ^°^*' ^««*^' 4.436,523.
Zboralski. Jon A.; Grow. Harry N.; and Holschbach. Stephen E.. to
Hamilton ndustries. Inc Fume hood incorporating high efficiency
auxiliary air plenum. 4.436,022, Cl 98-1 I5.0LH. • • "^ ' ^""^^
Zeeh. Bernd; Goetz. Norbert; Ammermann, Eberhard; and Jung, Jo-
Zeisky, Andre L. Clip-on bookmark. 4,436,053, Cl. 116-237.000.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See—
^*22^[f2 000^ "■' *"** Knowles. Terrance, 4,436.240. Cl.
Zergenyi. Janos: See—
'^ mI^SS: C1."2S)-2'3'9'5Sd"' "'^"""^ ""' ^'»"^'' ^•"°^
Zesiger. Karl: See—
^T-Ai'}^"' ^*''' "'""•""= '"** ^'»"' •'"'• M36.52I. Cl.
Zezza, Louis J.; and Husain, Iqbal, to Automation Industries, Inc.
Non-impacting loose rod storage canister. 4,436,693, Cl. 376-272.000.
Zhdanov, Vasily V.: See
Shevakin, Jury F.; Dobkin, Igor I.; Donskoi, Efim M.; Manov,
Gngory L.; Zhdanov, Vasily V.; Berger, Elena S.; Popov, Va-
^r\^V,'^Xl°''' '^'*"' ^■' "'«* Akchurin, Rashid Z.. 4.435.886,
Zhed. Viktor P.: See—
Andreev Anatoly A.; Gavrilko. Igor V.; Gavrilov. Alexei O-
Ver«»chaka. Anatoly S.; Zhed, Viktor P.; Padalka, Valentin O.;'
and Sinelschikov, Andrei K, 4,436,830, Cl. 501-96000
Zimmerman, Harry K.: See—
^'M36*9'i'l'ci^^?9'il OOO'"' "'"^ ^' *"** °°"«'"' °*°'«* "•
Zinsser, Rolf: See—
KMchinek, Gunter; Wandel, Dietmar; Kretschmann, Bernd; and
Zinsser, Rolf, 4.436,688, Cl. 264-1 76.0OF.
Zipp, Otmar; Bollmann, Heinz; Stutz, Herben; and Scholz, Wolfgang,
to Elastogran GmbH. Production of closed-cell polyurethane inold-
ings having a densified surface zone. 4,436,869, Cl. 525-51.000
Zirker, Guenter: See—
Broecker, Franz J; Gruendler, Karl-Heinz; Marosi, Laszio;
Schwarzmann, Matthias; Triebskom, Bruno; and Zirker
Guenter, 4,436,833. Cl. 502-176.000.
Zmoda. Barney J.; and Fessock. Paul J., to Colgate-Palmolive Com-
pany. Fuel gel for charcoal or wood fires. 4,436,525, Cl. 44-7.300.
Zobawa, Franz: See—
^°/l?ISlvi ^'^^'^' ■"♦I Zobawa, Franz, 4,436.362. Cl. 339-
I03.00M.
Zoebe. Hugo: 5^—
Prinz. Bruno; Rockel. Manfred B.; Rudolph. Gunlher; Heubner.
UliTch; and Zoebe. Hugo, 4,436,790. Cl. 428-675.000.
Zondler, Helmut; Lohse, Friedrich; and Moser, Roland, to Ciba-Oeiay
Corporation. Imidazolides. 4,436,892, Cl. 528-1 17.000.
Zuhlke, Rainer: See—
***^"^!}' Eddehard F.; Pollmann, Kurt; Schettler, Helmut; and
Zuhlke, Rainer, 4,437,022. Cl. 307-270.000.
LIST OF REISSUE PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 13th DAY OF MARCH. 1984
Note —Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance «vith city and telephone directory practice).
Flatland. Lloyd P. Dental handpiece connector. Re. 31.537. Cl. Justice. [>ouglas E : See—
433-82.000. Holdiman, Joseph W.; and Justice, Douglas E, Re 31,536, Cl.
Holdiman, Joseph W.; and Justice, Douglas E. Metal cladded window c^ki-i.^i!;?'! °°° /- c ■ u
products. Re. 31,536, Cl. 49-501.000. JS 200 * ^ ""'" ""** '""*'°** *' ^''"'' *=*•
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Aavid Engineering, Inc.: See—
McCarthy, Alfred F., 273,006, Cl. DI3-23.000.
Akita. Tsugio; and Nagayama, Shinichi. to Matsushita Electric Indus-
trial Co., Ltd Food processor. 272.979, 3-13-84, Cl. 07-384.000.
Allen, John. Rail support fitting for a double post, rail fence unit or the
like. 272,987, 3-13-84, Cl. 08-354.000.
AMC International Alfa Metalcraft Corporation AG: See—
Ryser, Theophil, 272,974, Cl. D7-394.000.
American Cyanamid Company: See-
Woodruff, Keith. 273,032, Cl. 022- 19.000.
American Metal Ware Co.: See-
Miller, Gordon R.. 272,975, Cl. 07-309.000.
American Standard Inc.: See—
Fi^cr, Michael D.; Rowers, Thomas S.; and Fort, Georse E.
273,046, Cl. 025-74.000. *
Anderson, Duane L.; Clarke, Robert S.; and Morris, Lewis R., to First
Champaign Corporation. Motorcycle sidecar. 272,997, 3-13-84, Cl.
Anderson, Howard A., to Schwartz, Leonard. Dumbbell. 273,030.
3-13-84,0.021-197.000.
Artwick, Kert E., to Queslor Corporation. Basement window cover
273,045, 3-13-84, Cl. 025-54.000.
Associated Medical Devices, Inc.: See—
Behrens, James O., 273,039, Cl. O24-I7.000.
Au, Albert K. H.: See-
Wong, Ka W.; and Au. Albert K. H.. 272.992. Cl. DIO-106.000.
Baldwin Piano A Organ Company: See—
Kimble, Thomas E., 273,015, Cl. OI7-5.000.
Barbieri, Raul; and Marianelli, Giorgio. Tray for holding stationery
articles, 273,018, 3-13-84, Cl. 019-75.000.
Beerens, Cornells J. M. Saw sharpening guide. 272,985, 3-13-84, Cl
D8-7I.000.
Behrens, James 0., to Associated Medical Devices, Inc. Housing for a
portable electronic control for a intraesophageal pacer. 273,039,
3-13-84,0.024-17.000.
Bertrac, Pierre, to Parker Pen France. Writing instrument. 273,017,
3-13-84,0.019-49.000.
Biddle, Howard W., to Ofrex Group Limited. Tacker. 272,983, 3-13-84,
Cl. D8-5I.00O.
Booker, Gary. Fireplace door. 273,035. 3-13-84, Cl. D23- 1 28.000.
Bryant, Peter D.: See-
Emms, Norman R.; and Bryant, Peter D., 273,025, Cl. 021-69.000.
Emms, Norman R.; and Bryant, Peter D., 273,026, Cl. D2 1 -69.000.
Celle, Inc.: See—
Runyon, Richard, 273,051, Cl. D28-76.000.
Chalabian, Jack S., to K-Jack Engineering Company, Inc. Newspaper
vending machine. 273,019, 3-13-84, Cl. D20-6.000.
Chalabian. Jack S.. to K-Jack Engineering Company, Inc. Newspaper
vending machine. 273,020, 3-13-84, Cl. D20-6.000.
Chalabian, Jack S., to K-Jack Engineering Company, Inc. Newspaper
vending machine. 273,021, 3-13-84, Cl. D20-6.000.
Chalabian, Jack S., to K-Jack Engineering Company, Inc. Newspaper
vending machine. 273,022, 3-13-84, Cl. D20-6.000.
Chalabian, Jack S., to K-Jack Engineering Company, Inc. Newspaper
vending machine insert. 273,023. 3-13-84. Cl. D20-8.000.
Chan, Chung K.. to Mattel, Inc. PorUble cabinet door alann. 272,993,
3-13-84,0.010-106.000.
Chan, Chung K., to Mattel, Inc. Automatic ufety entry light. 273,048,
3-13-84. Cl. 026-37.000.
Chan, Kina M.: See-
Lam, Siu L.; Wong Chan, Yuk-Ying; and Chan, King M., 273,049,
Cl. 026-38.000.
Chubb Industries Inc.: See—
Snodgrau. Clyde R.. 273,032. Cl. D99-28.000.
Cidelcem: See—
Tallon, Roger. 272.971, Cl. D7-I6.000.
Clarke, Robert S : See—
^275S?: o'"Dr2-Vi65S^''''' ''°'"" '^ ""' '*°"**' ^"" '*••
Clarvit, Richard N. Baby shoe 272,961, 3-13-84, Cl. D2-278 000
Clarvit. Richard N. Baby shoe 272.962. 3-13-84. Cl. 02-278.000.
Command Automation, Inc.: See—
Simjian, Luther G., 273.031. Cl. 021-234.000.
Contemporary Shells Inc.: See—
UmanofT, Arthur. 272.967, Cl. D6-56.000.
Cougar Plastics, Inc.: See—
Emae, James M , 273,024, Cl. 021-31.000.
Cuoco, Benjamin A. Linen tester. 273,014, 3-13-84, Cl. 016-135 000
Dan Industries Inc : See—
De Coster. Pieter K. J , 272,972, Cl. 07-47 000.
De Coster, Pieter K. J., 272,973. Cl. 07-47.000.
Gremponrez, Dan E.; and Painter, David L.. 272,978, Cl. 07-
De Coster, Pieter K. J., to Dart Industries Inc Sifter or the like
272,972, 3-13-84, Cl. 07-47.000.
De Coster, Pieter K. J., to Dart Industries Inc. Combined sifter and
container or the like 272.973, 3-13-84, Cl 07-47.000.
DcSlcfano, Joseph T. Combined keeper and combination lock with
retractable cable unit. 272,986, 3-13-84, Cl D8-33 1.000.
Oodae, Paul R., lo Garrett Corporation, The. Gas turbine fan blade
273,037, 3-13-84. Cl. D23- 165.000
Dudley, Wayne C Portable air compressor. 273,01 1, 3-13-84, Cl. 015-
9.000.
Echterling, Eugene J. Toy table. 273,027, 3-13-M. Cl. 02 1-12 1.000.
Emge, James M , lo Cougar Plutics, Inc. Game board. 273,024, 3-13-84
Cl D21-3I.0O0.
Emms, Norman R.; and Bryant, Peter 0 , to Hestair Kiddicraft Limited
Child's toy. 273,025, 3-13-84, Cl. D2 1-69.000.
Emms, Norman R.; and Bryant, Peter D , to Hestair Kiddicraft Limited
Child's toy. 273,026, 3-13-84, Cl. D2 1 -69.000.
Envall, Bjorn E. A , to Saab-Scania Aktiebolag Wheel cover. 273 004
3-13-84, CI.0 1 2-2 11. 000.
Erkelenz, Johannes F., to Top-Qua & Company Ltd. Bacon arill
272,977,3-13-84,0 07-350.000. *
Fairaizen, Igal. Convertible sofa. 272,968, 3-13-84, Cl. 06-61 000
Fairchild Industries. Inc.: See—
McComas. Jean, 273,005, Cl. 012-335.000.
Fink, Alexander. Vehicle mounted camper unit. 273,001, 3-13-84, Cl
D 1 2- 156.000.
Finney, Donna K., to Quaker Oats Company. The. Stuffed toy 273.028
3-13-84. Cl 021-1 90.000.
First Champaign Corporation: See—
Anderson, Duane L.; Clarke, Robert S.; and Morris, Lewis R ,
272,997,0.012116 000.
Fisher, Michael D.; Flowers, ThomM S.; and Fort, George E, to
American Standard Inc. Meul molding for a wall panel or similar
article. 273,046, 3-13-84, Cl. D25.74.00i5.
Flakt Aktiebolag: See—
Gustavsson, Lennart; and MaatU, Osten, 273,036, Cl. 023-I63 000
Flowers, Thomu S.: See-
Fisher, Michael O.; Flowers. Thomas S ; and Fort, Georie E
273,046, Cl. 025-74.000. *
Fort, George E.: See-
Fisher, Michael D.; Rowers, Thomas S.; and Fort, Grartc E..
273.046. Cl. D25-74.000. ^
France Bed Co.: See—
Muuda, Teruo, 273,038, Cl. D24-03.000
Fuji Koeko Corporation: See—
Takemauu, Voshiyuki, 273.013. Cl. DI6-42.000.
Garrett Corporation, the: See-
Dodge. Paul R.. 273.037, Cl. D23165 000.
Gremponrez, Dan E.; and Painter, David L., to Dart Industries Inc
BufTet server. 272.978, 3-13-84, Cl. D7-357.000.
PI 49
PI 50
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Guslavsson. Unnart; and Maatta. Osten. to Flakt Aktiebolag. Venturi
wall for wet separators and the like. 273.036. 3-13-84. CI. D23-
163.000.
Hamada. Masanori; Saigo. Yoshiyuki; Ichino. Etsuko; and Okada
Takao, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Portable radio
273.010. 3-13-84. CI DI4-68.000
Hamborg. Peter M. Elastomeric magnetized key container. 273 053
3-13-84. CI D99-28.000.
Hasegawa. Hideaki; Shibano. Saburo; and Kaneko. Terutoshi. to Riken
27S70^°-!^84.''cl'"D6-%.S^^'" '"^'""^' '°' **•"' """"""
Hestair Kiddicraft Limited: See-
Emms, Norman R ; and Bryant. Peter D.. 273.025, CI. D2 1 -69.000
Emms, Norman R.; and Bryant, Peter D.. 273.026, CI. D2 1-69 000
Higgins. David F., to IMI Mouldings Limited. Fluid flow control
valve. 273,034, 3-13-84. CI. D23- 19.000.
Hiraishi, Etsuo; and Shohoji, Takeshi, to Ryobi Ltd. Printing machine.
273,016, 3-13-84, CI. DI8-13.000.
Holcomb, William T. Baby bottle holder. 273,044, 3-13-84, CI. D24-
48.000.
Ichino, Etsuko: See—
Hamada, Masanori; Saigo, Yoshiyuki; Ichino. Etsuko; and Okada
Takao, 273.010, CI. D14-68.000
IMI Mouldings Limited: See—
Higgins. David F.. 273.034. CI. D23-I9.000.
Instruments for Cardiac Research. Inc.: See—
Kullenberg. Fred W., 273.029. CI. D2I-192.000.
Isaacs. Robert B.. to Northern Telecom Limited. Tactile alerting brace-
let. 273.009, 3-13-84. CI. DI4-52.00O.
Ishizaki. Hideaki. to Pioneer Electronic Corporation. Speaker 273 008
3-13-84. CI. D 14- 30.000
J&W Scientific. Inc : See-
Jenkins. Rand G ; and Wohlers. Norman W., 273,040, CI. D24-
Jackson, William G. Massage roller. 273,042, 3-13-84, CI. D24-36 000
Jenkins, Rand G.; and Wohlers, Norman W.. to J&W Scientific Inc
Fused sihca syringe needle. 273,040, 3-13-84, CI. D24-25.000.
Jet Spray Corp : See—
LaLumiere, Edward J., 272,976, CI. D7-3II.000
Jones, Leroy C. Flag. 272,995, 3-13-84, CI. Dll- 180.000.
Jovan, Inc.: See —
Podall, Robert; and Robertz. Henry. 272.988. CI. D9-300 000
Justice, Andrew C. Spray paint shield. 272,981, 3-13-84, CI. D8-I6 000
K-Jack Engineering Company, Inc.: See—
Chalabian, Jack S., 273,019, CI. D20-6.000.
Chalabian, Jack S., 273,020, CI. D 20- 6 000.
Chalabian, Jack S., 273,021, CI. D20-6.000.
Chalabian, Jack S., 273.022, CI. D20-6.000.
Chalabian, Jack S., 273,023, CI. D20-8.000.
Kaneko, Terutoshi: See—
Hasegawa, Hideaki; Shibano, Saburo; and Kaneko, Terutoshi,
272,970, CI. D6-96.000.
Kapphahn, John M. Sickle guard straightening hand tool. 272,980,
3-13-84, CI. D8- 14.000.
Kaufman, Mark S., to Puff International Industries, Inc. Smoker's pipe
273,050, 3-13-84, CI. D27-3.000.
Kimble, Thomas E., to Baldwin Piano & Organ Company. Orcan
273,015, 3-13-84, CI. D 17-5.000. f j 6
Kozloski, Edward, to Vicon Industries, Inc. Surveillance camera hous-
ing. 273,012, 3-13-84, CI. D16-2.000.
Kullenberg, Fred W , to Instruments for Cardiac Research, Inc. Exer-
cise treadmill. 273,029, 3-13-84. CI. D21-192.000.
^^h'f^'^A^^f^^^^'^ •' ' •" ■'*' ^P"y ^°^ Beverage dispenser. 272,976,
j-i3*o4, CI. D7-3II.OOO.
Urn, Siu L.; Wong Chan, Yuk-Ying; and Chan, King M. Combination
'joorlock de-icer and torch and key ring. 273,049, 3-13-84, CI. D26-
jo.UUU.
Lloyd-Jones, Robert. Cornice mould. 273,047, 3-13-84, CI. D25-79 000
Maatta, Osten: See—
Gustavsson, Lennart; and Maatta, Osten, 273,036, CI. D23-I63 000
Marianelli, Giorgio: See—
Barbien, Raul; and Marianelli, Giorgio, 273,018, CI. DI9-75 000
Masuda, Teruo, to France Bed Co. Apparatus for chiropractic therapy
and massage. 273,038, 3-13-84, CI. D24-03.000.
Matsushiu Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.: See—
Akita, Tsugio; and Na^ayama, Shinichi, 272.979, CI. D7-384.000.
Hamada, Masanori; Saigo, Yoshiyuki; Ichino, Etsuko; and Okada,
Takao, 273,010. CI. DI4-68.000.
Mattel, Inc.: See-
Chan, Chung K., 272,993, CI. D 10- 106.000.
Chan, Chung K., 273,048, CI. D26-37.000.
XM ^°!1^' "^f, • ""<* ^^- '^'^^ ^ " • 272,992, CI. DIO- 106.000.
McCarthy, Alfred F., to Aavid Engineering. Inc. Twin heat sink for
electronic semiconductor devices. 273.006. 3-13-84. CI. D13-23.000.
McComas, Jean, to Fairchild Industries, Inc. Aircraft. 273,005, 3-13-84,
CI. Di2-335.000.
'^2fe7??^3"-8;,•a°D^ocS^.'^"''' ""^^ ^ ^^^ ''^^^^^
Moretti, Vittorio. Bottle. 272,989, 3-13-84, CI. D9-349 000
Morris, Lewis R. See-
Anderson, Duane L.; Clarke, Robert S.; and Morris. Lewis R
272,997, CI. D 12- 11 6.000.
Muller Feigelstock, Roberto, to Pony International. Inc. High cut
athletic shoe. 272.964, 3-13-84, CI. D2-3 10.000.
Muller, Roberto^ and Sousa. Antonio M. Shoe. 272,963, 3-13.84, CI.
Nagayama, Shinichi: See—
Akita, Tsugio; and Nagayama, Shinichi, 272,979, CI. D7-384 000
''r?7\9"9f sv84,'cr'Di';-i^"(5S^ '"'"^'"^ "*"""' ^'•"^^
Newburgh Cosmetic Packaging Corporation: See-
Thompson, Donald V R., 272,991, CI. D9-377 000
Noiles, Douglas G^Rawson, Paul O ; and Yagami, Richard, to United
States Surgica Corporation. Curved circular anastomosis surgical
stapler 273,041. 3-13-84, CI. D24-26.000.
Northern Telecom Limited: See-
Isaacs, Robert B., 273,009, CI. DI4-52.000.
Ofrex Group Limited: See—
Biddle, Howard W., 272,983, CI. D8-5 1.000.
Okada, Takao: See—
Hamada. Masanori; Saigo, Yoshiyuki; Ichino. Etsuko; and Okada.
Takao, 273,010, CI. DI4-68.000.
Olin Corporation: See—
San^r. Arlon G.; and Tepas, Joseph J., Jr.. 273,033, CI. 023-
Owens-Illinois, Inc.: See-
Strand, Gordon A., 272,990, CI. D9-355.000
Painter, David L.: See—
Gremponrez, Dan E.; and Painter, David L., 272,978 CI D7-
357.000.
Parker Pen France: See—
Bertrac, Pierre, 273,017, CI. DI9-49.000.
Pioneer Electronic Corporation; See—
Ishizaki, Hideaki, 273,008, CI. DI4- 30.000
Podall, Robert; and Robertz, Henry, to Jovan, inc. Combined container
and pump. 272,988, 3-13-84, CI. D9-300.000.
Pony International, Inc.: See—
Muller Feigelstock, Roberto, 272,964, CI. D2-3 10.000
Puff International Industries, Inc.: See-
Kaufman, Mark S., 273,050, CI. D27-3.000
Quaker Oats Company, The; See—
Finney, Donna K., 273,028, CI. D2 1-190.000.
Questor Corporation: See—
Artwick, Kert E., 273,045, CI. D25-54.000.
Rawson, Paul O.: See—
'^273!b4l! cf D24°26ar'°"' **'"' °' ""* ^•*""*' '^*'^''"'*'
Riken Vinyl Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
"^#«^«*'J;*'l"'''' Shibano, Saburo; and Kaneko, Terutoshi,
272,970, CI. D6-96.000.
'^'5?i°'rf/'"'' ■' • *"'' Smith, Bruce M. Torque wrench. 272,982, 3-13-84.
CI. D8-24.000.
Robertz, Henry: See—
Podall, Robert; and Robertz, Henry. 272.988. CI. D9-300.000
-.l^'JSC; ^^^^"'^' 'o Celle. Inc. Soap dish. 273.051, 3-13-84. CI. D28.
76.000.
Rusch. Lois. Ice pack. 273.043. 3-13-84. CI. D24-43 000
Ryobi Ltd.: See—
Hiraishi, Etsuo; and Shohoji, Takeshi, 273,016, CI. D 1 8- 13 000
Ryser, Theophil to AMC International Alfa Metalcraft Corporation
^V,/?^'*^ '°'' covers of cooking utensils. 272,974, 3-13-84, CI.
D7-394.000.
Saab-Scania Aktiebolag: See —
Envall, Bjom E. A., 273.004. CI. D12-2I 1.000.
Svanback, Ulf K.. 273.003, CI. D 12-2 11.000.
Saigo, Yoshiyuki: See—
Hamada. Masanori; Saigo. Yoshiyuki; Ichino. Etsuko; and Okada.
Takao, 273,010, CI. DI4-68.000.
Sangster. Arlon G.; and Tepas, Joseph J.. Jr.. to Olin Corporation.
Swimming pool chemical dispenser or the like. 273,033, 3-13-84. CI.
D23-3.000.
Schafer, Edward R. Note clipboard for an automobile visor. 273,002,
3-13-84, CI. D12-19I.OOO.
Schwartz, Leonard: See-
Anderson, Howard A., 273,030, CI. D21-197.000.
Serapiglia, Frank. Pierced earring finding. 272,994, 3-13-84, CI. Dll-
86.000.
Shaffer, Frank E. Small headed cable cutter. 272,984, 3-13-84, CI.
iJo-32.UUO.
Shibano, Saburo: See —
Hasegawa, Hideaki; Shibano, Saburo; and Kaneko. Terntoshi.
272,970. CI. D6-96.000.
Shohoji. Takeshi: See—
Hiraishi. Etsuo; and Shohoji. Takeshi. 273.016, CI. DI8-13.000.
Simjian, Luther G., to Command Automation, Inc. Golf putting aid
273,031. 3-13-84, CI. D2 1 -234.000.
Simon, Lawrence A. Camera bag. 272,965, 3-13-84, CI. D3-33.000
Smith, Bruce M.: See—
Rizzo, Frank J.; and Smith, Bruce M., 272,982, CI. D8-24.000.
Snodgrass, Clyde R., to Chubb Industries Inc. Safe for currency cas-
settes. 273.052, 3-13-84. CI. 099-28.000.
Sousa, Antonio M.: See—
Muller, Roberto; and Sousa. Antonio M., 272,963, CI. D2-3 10.000
Southern Case, Inc.: See-
Ward, William W., 272,966, CI. D3-76.000.
Spottswood, Marianne. Combined phonograph and tape player or the
like. 273.007, 3-13-84, CI. D14-5.000. »- i- /
Strand. Gordon A., to Owens-Illinois, Inc. Bottle. 272,990, 3-13-84, CI.
Sumitomo Rubber Industries Limited: See—
Nagayasu, Hideaki, 272,999, CI. DI2-146.000.
Takehara, Kenji, 272,998. CI. D 1 2- 146.000.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
PI 51
Takehara, Kenji, 273,000, CI. D 1 2- 147.000.
Sussman. Howard. Holder for toiletry items. 272.969. 3-13-84. CI.
D6-86.000.
^Tn'si' CI ^D ' '° ^"''"^'"''' '^'"'e'»'«« Vehicle wheel. 273.003.
^'J','!'!!^"" "^"J'- '° Sumitomo Rubber Industries. Ltd. Vehicle tire
272.998. 3-13-84. CI. D12-I46.000.
Takehara. Kenji. to Sumitomo Rubber Industries. Ltd. Vehicle tire
273.000, 3- 1 3-84, CI. D 1 2- 1 47.000.
Takematsu, Yoshiyuki, to Fuji Koeko Corporation, a part interest
Electric flash unit. 273,013. 3-13-84. CI. DI6-42.000.
Tallon, Roger, to Cidelcem. Food container. 272.971, 3-13-84 CI
D7-16.000.
Tepas, Joseph J., Jr.: See—
Sangster, Arlon G.; and Tepas, Joseph J., Jr., 273,033, CI. D23-
Thompson, Donald V. R., to Newburgh Cosmetic Packaging Corpora-
tion. Combined bottle and cap. 272,991, 3-13-84, CI. D9-377 000
Top-Qua & Company Ltd.: See—
Erkelenz, Johannes F.. 272.977. CI. D7-350.000.
Trabue. Thomas M.; and Villalon. Augusto. Vehicle trailer 272 996
3-13-84. CI. D 1 2- 102.000. ' *
Umanoff. Arthur, to Contemporary Shells Inc. Dining chair 272 967
3-13-84, CI. D6-56,000.
United Stales Surgical Corporation: See—
"TUCMK c"f'D24°26.fer""' ""' °^ ""' "'»""'• '^-''"«'-
Vicon Industries, Inc.: See—
Kozloski, Edward, 273,012. CI. DI6-2.000
Villalon. Augusto: See—
"^"^"^homas M., and Villalon, Augusto, 272,996. CI. DI2-
^'?«*?1',f?i!i^ Athletic helmet or similar article 272,960. 3-13-84 CI
U2-23 1.000. *
^3-1*3-8% D2-44 000' ^'°'"' ^'*""" °' *''"''" '"''^'^ ^'^•"''
^"f3-8^*crD3^76(»0^°"'^"" ^'^' '"^ ^""^""^ ""^ "^,966.
Wohlers. Norman W.: See—
•'<^"^'D^R»"d ° ' '"'^ Wohlers. Norman W.. 273.040, CI. D24-
Wong Chan. Yuk-Ying: See—
^ Cl' D260'8 a» * '^'""' '^"''■'^'"»' ""'^ ^*"'"' "^'"S M , 273,049.
Wong, Ka W.; and Au, Albert K H . to Mattel, Inc. Electronic mtru-
sion alarm transmitter. 272,992, 3-13-84, CI. DIO-106 000
Woodruff, Keith, to American Cyanamid Comoany Insect feeding
slation or similar article. 273,032, 3-13-84, CI D22-19000
Yagami, Richard: See—
LIST OF PLANT PATENTEES
Klemm, Siegfried. Carnation named Mintop. 5,204, 3-13-84, CI. 70.000. "^ moOO ^'^^^"'"^ Carnation named Kleronstar. 5.206. 3.13-84. CI.
Klemm. Siegfried. Carnation named Klemorac. 5.205. 3-13-84, CI. ''"Edal! IS'5",!o3^cr68.000
70.000.
"^S's-f/ *84. Cl^"8 Mo'"*'" * ^*'^*'""««^ Exacum affine pot plant.
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
ISSUED MARCH 13, 1984
Note— First number, class; second number, subclass; third number, patent number
CLASS2
2 4,43S.ISI
436 4,43S,tS2
CLASS3
iJ 4,435,833
I.9I3 4.43S,SS4
13 4,43S.8SS
4,435.156
CLASS4
22> 4,435,(57
4,435,858
324 4,435,859
CLASSS
13 4,435.860
65 4,435,861
66 4,435,862
SI B 4,435.863
453 4,435,864
CLASS6
2 R 4,435,865
4 R 4.435,866
4,435,867
CLASS7
158 4,435,868
CLASS!
4,436,521
4,436,522
4.436,523
4,436,524
CLASS 12
4,435,869
CLASS 19
4,435,870
4.435,871
4,435,872
4,435,873
4,435,874
4.435,875
4,435,876
4,435,877
493
524
527
551
12
98
104 R
104.06 A
105
210 A
250.23
312 R
326
CLASS 17
11 4,435,878
4,435.879
CLASS 24
16 PB 4,435,881
49 KC 4,435,880
265 R 4.435.882
CLASS 26
71 4.435,883
93 4,435,884
CLASS 29
2
33 D
123
148.4 C
148.4 R
157 C
233
239
412
432.2
527.5
571
572
577 C
577 R
603
4,435,885
4,435,886
4,435,887
4,435.889
4,435.890
4.435.891
4,435,888
4.435,892
4,435,893
Re.3 1,535
4.435.894
4.435.895
4.435.896
4.435.897
4,435.898
4,435.899
4.435,900
CLASS 30
254
296R
4.435,901
4,435.902
CLASS 33
23 O 4.435,903
143 K 4.435.904
181 R 4.435.905
IIS R 4.43S.906
3M 4.435.907
m 4,435.901
CLASS
82
27.5
365
3
42.12
7.3
10 B
51
12
201
228
79
197 R
209
63
82
395
501
34
4.435,909
36
4,435,910
40
4,435,91 1
4,435,912
43
4,435,913
4,435.914
44
4,436,525
4,436,526
4,436.527
4.436,528
46
4,435,915
4,435,916
4.435.917
CLASS 47
4.435,918
CLASS 48
4,436,529
4,436,530
4.436,531
4,436,532
CLASS 49
4,435,919
4,435,920
4,435,921
Re.31,536
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
I
CLASS
I
CLASS
CLASS SI
58 4,435.922
170 TL 4,435.923
327 4,435.924
CLASS S2
3
12
79.13
90
93
98
147
263
309.1
309.7
461
481
520
521
582
641
4.435,926
4,435,925
4.435,927
4,435.928
4,435,929
4,435,930
4,435,931
4,435,932
4.435,933
4,435.934
4,435,935
4,435.936
4,435,937
4,435.938
4,435,939
4,435,940
CLASS 93
475 4,435,941
489 4.435.942
491 4,435,943
531 4,435.944
589 4,435,945
CLASS 99
26
4,436,533
58
4,436.534
96
4.436,535
341 R
4,436.536
387
4,436.537
482
4.436.538
CLASS 9«
15.6 4,435.946
28 4,435,947
228 4,435.948
320.2 4,435,949
330 4,435,950
400.05 4,435.951
CLASS 97
18 4.435.952
408 4.435,953
4,435.954
409 4,435.955
CLASS 99
79.1 4.435,956
CLASS
39.281
204
512
547.1
719
4
30
175
18
2
18.1
172
374.12
19.2
205 R
161
224
25
36
76
90
77
126
239
243
256
327
60
4,435.957
4,435,958
4,435.959
4,435,960
4,435,961
62
4,436.539
4,436.540
4,435,962
63
4.435.963
69
4,436,541
4,436,542
4.436.543
4,436.544
68
4,435,964
4,435,%5
70
4,435,966
4.435,967
71
4,436.545
4.436,546
4,436,547
4,436,548
4,436,549
CLASS 72
4,435,968
4,435,969
4,435,970
4.435,971
4,435,972
4.435,973
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
I
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS 73
40.5 A
81
83
152
155
168
198
382 R
462
493
628
642
702
862.17
862.19
864.14
4,435.974
4,435,975
4.435,976
4,435.977
4,435,978
4,435,979
4,435,980
4,435,981
4,435,982
4.435,983
4,435,984
4,435.985
4,435,986
4,435,987
4,435,988
4,435,989
CLASS 74
15.63
89.15
89.2
553
606R
711
713
796
798
4,435,990
4,435,992
4,435,991
4,435,993
4,435,994
4.435.995
4,435,996
4,435.997
4,435,998
CLASS 79
10 R 4,436,550
12 4,436,551
41 4,436.552
52 4,436.553
128 T 4,436,554
CLASS 76
36 4,435,999
41 4,436,000
CLASS 11
9.31 4,436.001
57.2 4,436.002
57.43 4.436.003
60 4.436.004
177 O 4.436.005
CLASS 13
4,436,006
4,436.007
13
23
42
72
171
425.3
703
747
762
4,436.008
4.436,009
4.436,010
4,436.01 1
4,436,012
4,436,013
4,436,014
CLASS M
298 4.436.01 S
CLASS 89
1.809
14 C
CLASS
363 A
446
CLASS
67
115 LH
CLASS
400
421 HV
538
4.436,016
4,436,017
91
4,436,018
4,436,019
4,436,020
99
4.436,021
4.436.022
99
4.436.023
4,436.024
4.436.025
CLASS
45
88
121
250
268
CLASS
93.17
120
307
334
364
367
85
90
245
347
2
10
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
110
217.1
221
286
313
CLASS
42
102
230
254
265
340
148
237
652
658
72
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
4D
13 R
17
CLASS
41.1
41.74
90.27
90.61
142.5 R
179 B
100
4,436,026
4.436,027
4,436,028
4,436,029
4,436,030
101
4,436,031
4,436,032
102
4,436,033
4.436,034
4,436,033
4,436,036
106
4,436,555
4,436,556
110
4.436,037
4,436,038
111
4,436,039
4.436.040
112
4,436,041
4,436,042
4,436,043
4,436,044
4.436,045
114
4,436,046
4,436,047
4,436.048
4.436,049
4,436,050
4,436,051
116
4,436.052
4,436.053
US
4,436,054
4,436,055
119
4,436,056
122
4,436.057
4,436.058
4,436,059
123
4,436.060
4,436.061
4,436.062
4.436.063
4.436.064
4.436,065
19} H
198 C
310
339
440
472
488
491
492
557
602
4.436.066
4.436.067
4.436.068
4.436.069
4.436.070
4.436,071
4.436.072
4.436.073
4,436.074
4.436.075
4.436.076
CLASS 134
18 4.436.077
CLASS 129
13 R 4.436,078
CLASS 136
121 4.436,079
139 4,436.080
285 A 4,436.081
348 4,436.082
417 4,436.083
429 4,436.084
450 4.436.083
CLASS 128
6 4.436.087
77 4.436,088
155 4,436,089
204.26 4.436.090
305 4,436.091
419 PG 4.436.092
4.436,093
635 4,436.094
654 4.436.095
689 4,436,096
707 4.436,097
766 4.436.098
782 4.436.099
CLASS 131
330 4,436.100
349 4.436,101
CLASS 133
2 4,436,102
3D ^ 4,436,103
CLASS 134
4.436,104
CLASS 137
63
1
240
314
375
413
487.5
498
510
565
596
596.1
625.47
89
93
no
149
4,436,105
4,436,106
4,436,107
4,436,108
4,436,109
4,436,110
4,436,111
4,436,112
4,436,113
4,436,114
4,436,115
4,436,116
CLASS 131
4,436,117
4,436,120
4,436,118
4.436,119
CLASS 139
4,436,121
4,436,122
4,436,123
CLASS 141
4,436,124
4.436,125
CLASS 144
4,436,126
CLASS 148
4,436,557
4,436.558
4,436.559
4.436,560
4,436.561
4,436,562
4,436.563
CLASS 192
209 R 4,436.127
116
435
452
5
330
130
1.5
6
12 F
24
26
213 A
353 R
361 FP
362 R
3813
4.436,128
4.436.129
4,436,130
4,436.131
4,436,132
4.436.133
CLASS 196
42
4.436.564
49
4.436.S6S
56
4.436.566
73 1
4.436.585
158
4.436.567
176
4.436.568
217
4.436.569
273.3
4,436.570
332
4.436.896
384
4.436.571
4.436.572
4.436,573
415
4.436.574
433
4.436.575
543
4,436.576
617 SP
4.436,577
620
4.436.578
626
4.436.579
636
4.436.580
643
4.436.581
4,436.584
656
4.436.582
659.1
4.436.583
CLASS 197
13
4,436.134
CLASS 160
135
4,436.135
232
4,436,136
242
4,436.137
CLASS 162
19 4,436,586
123 4.436,587
CLASS 164
5
112
120
201
337
440
4.436.138
4,436.139
4,436.140
4.436.141
4.436.142
4.436.143
CLASS 169
9.1 4.436,144
67 4,436.145
III 4,436,146
165 4,436,147
CLASS 166
31
4.436.150
53
4.436.148
120
4,436,149
154
4.436,151
214
4,436,152
260
4,436,153
281
4,436.154
297
4,436.155
307
4,436.156
344
4,436,157
377
4,436,158
CLASS 169
28 4,436.159
74 4.436,160
CLASS 172
49.5 4,436.161
810 4.436.162
CLASS 173
117 4,436,163
CLASS 174
II BH
52 PE
6SR
72 B
128 R
152 OM
4,436.950
4,436,951
4,436.952
4,436,953
4,436,954
4.436,955
CLASS 179
39 4,436,164
61 4.436.165
PI 53
PI 54
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
63
72
94
4,436.166
4.436.167
4.436.168
CLASS 179
2 A
2C
2EA
609
18 B
SI AA
77
121 D
164
184
189 R
4.436,938
4.436,936
4.436.957
4,436.959
4,436.962
4,436.963
4.436.960
4.436.961
4.436.966
4.436.964
4.436.965
4.436,967
CLASS IM
89.14
131
148
219
226
227
254
287
324
4.436.169
4.436.170
4,436.171
4.436.172
4.436.173
4.436.174
4.436.175
4.436,176
4.436,177
151
210
CLASS Ml
4.436.178
4,436.179
CLASS 1«2
97 4,436.180
236 4.436.181
CLASS IM
37 4,436.182
CLASS ir
9E 4.436.183
29 R 4.436.184
4.436.185
CLASS IM
71.8 4.436.186
73.45 4.436.187
378 4.436.188
CLASS 190
108 4,436.189
CLASS 191
12.2 R 4.436.190
CLASS 192
3 8 4,436.191
43.1 4,436.192
107 C 4,436.193
CLASS 194
63 4.436.194
92 4,436,195
100 A 4.436.196
CLASS 198
389
502
750
851
4.436.197
4,436.198
4.436.199
4.436.200
CLASS »0
5 R 4436,968
38 R 4,436,969
61.56 4,436,970
295 4,436,971
315 4,436,972
CLASS 201
12
41
4,436,588
4,436,589
CLASS 204
I T 4,436,590
II 4,436.591
15 4.436.592
4,436,593
33 4,436,594
40 4,436,595
59 R 4,436.596
67 4.436.597
4.436.598
98 4.436.599
140 4.436.600
149 4,436,601
192 R 4,436.602
194 4.436,603
196 4.436.604
225 4.436.605
4.436.606
246 4,436,607
265 4,436,608
267 4,436,609
400 4,436,610
CLASS 206
444 4.436,201
455 4,436.202
524.8
525
530
625
4,436,203
4,436,204
4,436,205
4,436,206
CLASS 20«
II R 4,436,611
65 4,436,612
74 4,436,613
89 4,436,614
177 4,436,615
CLASS 209
3 4,436,616
4,436,617
5 4,436,618
573 4,436,619
577 4,436,207
668 4,436,208
CLASS 210
90 4,436,620
232 4,436,621
4,436,622
282 4.436.623
632 4.436.624
634 4.436.625
652 4.436.626
695 4.436,627
697 4,436,628
712 4,436,629
744 4,436,630
772 4,436,631
776 4,436.632
791 4.436,633
800 4,436,634
806 4,436,635
CLASS 211
57.1 4,436,209
CLASS 21S
32 4,436.210
216 4.436,211
252 4,436,212
365 4,436.213
CLASS 219
10.55 F
66
69 V
69W
75
121 LC
123
124.32
130.51
306
383
388
505
535
544
4.436,973
4,436,974
4,436,976
4,436,975
4,436,977
4,436,978
4.436,979
4,436,980
4.436,981
4,436,982
4,436,983
4.436,984
4.436.985
4.436.986
4.436.987
4.436,988
CLASS 220
18
22.3
69
85 D
89 A
295
359
4.436,214
4.436.215
4,436.216
4,436,217
4,436,218
4,436,219
4,436,220
CLASS 221
46 4,436,221
223 4,436,222
CLASS 222
36
183
207
280
382
400.7
402.22
614
40
4,436,223
4,436,224
4,436,225
4,436.22«
4,436,227
4,436.228
4,436.229
4,436.230
CLASS 223
4.436,231
CLASS 224
39 4,436.232
159 4,436,233
CLASS 227
4 4,436,234
III 4.436,235
123 4,436,236
130 4,436.237
149 4,436,238
CLASS 22S
17 4,436,239
122 4,436,240
124 4.436,241
264 4,436,242
CLASS 229
27 4,436.243
52 B 4.436.244
CLASS 23S
R 4.436.990
4.436.989
4.436,992
4,436,993
4,436,991
CLASS 236
4,436,245
I
22
381
382
468
49
CLASS 238
14 4,436.246
CLASS 239
533.7 4,436,247
CLASS 241
101.7
4.436,248
CLASS 242
18 G
4,436,258
18 R
4,436.249
54 R
4.436.250
56 R
4.436,251
72 B
4.436.252
74.1
4.436.253
84.21 R
4.436,254
107.4 A
4,436,255
200
4,436,256
201
4,436,257
CLASS 244
3.1
4,436.259
3.16
4.436.260
51
4.436.261
122 AG
4.436.262
130
4.436,263
153 R
4,436,264
CLASS 24a
56
4,436,265
74 R
4,436,266
75
4,436,267
188.3
4,436.268
214
4,436,269
416
4,436,270
460
4,436,271
527
4,436,272
549
4,436,273
633
4,436,274
CLASS 249
47
4,436,275
91
4,436,276
CLASS 230
207
4,436,994
227
4,436,995
256
4,436,996
4,436,997
288
4,436,998
302
4,436,999
308
4,437,000
324
4,437,001
338
4,437.002
4,437,003
343
4,437,004
4,437,005
363 S
4,437,006
366
4,437,007
396 ML
4,437,009
396 R
4,437,008
459.1
4,437,010
486.1
4,437,01 1
491.1
4,437,012
515.1
4,437.013
574
4.437,014
6
86
130
174
229
305
329
CLASS 251
4,436,277
4,436,279
4,436,278
4,436,283
4,436,280
4,436,281
4,436,282
CLASS 252
8.5 P
8.55 E
8.55 R
8.7
32.7 E
51.5 A
68
95
135
174.13
179
301.4 S
358
511
518
521
4,436.636
4.436.639
4.436.638
4.436.637
4.436.640
4,436.649
4,436,641
4,436.642
4.436.643
4.436.644
4,436,645
4,436,646
4,436.647
4,436,648
4,436,650
4,436.651
522 R
547
574
628
4,436.652
4.436,653
4.436,654
4.436.655
CLASS 256
35 4,436.284
CLASS 260
112 R 4,436,656
4,436,657
122 4,436,658
146 R 4,436,659
239 D 4.436.660
245.3 4,436.661
245.7 4.436.662
245.91 4.436.663
330.6 4,436.664
404 4.436.665
455 B 4,436,666
463 4,436,668
465 B 4,436,669
4,436,670
465 D 4,436,667
465.3 4,436,671
512 R 4,436,672
543 P 4,436,673
CLASS 261
64 B 4,436,674
77 4,436.675
151 4.436.676
CLASS 264
0.5
30
40.3
60
67
70
107
138
148
163
164
176 F
204
313
45
47
69
80
107
158
246
276
4.436.677
4.436,678
4,436,679
4,436,680
4.436.681
4,436.682
4.436.683
4.436.684
4.436,685
4,436,686
4,436,687
4,436,688
4,436,689
4,436,690
CLASS 266
4,436,286
4,436,285
4,436,287
4,436,288
4,436,289
4,436,292
4,436,290
4,436,291
4,436,293
CLASS 269
6 4,436,294
21 4,436,295
CLASS 270
31 4,436,296
CLASS 271
3.
10
100
107
177
202
132
4,436,297
4,436,298
4,436.299
4.436.300
4.436,301
4,436,302
CLASS 272
4,436,303
CLASS 273
29 A 4,436,304
73 C 4,436,305
146 4,436,306
157 R 4,436,307
237 4,436,308
267 4,436,309
CLASS 277
4,436,310
4.436,311
4,436,312
4,436,313
4.436,314
4,436,315
4,436,316
4,436.317
CLASS 280
4,436,318
4,436,319
4,436.320
4,436.321
4,436.322
4.436,323
II
27
34
80
86
92
124
134
104
154.5 R
242 WC
612
614
804
CLASS 283
50 4.436,324
CLASS 285
18 4.436.325
178 4.436.326
364 4.436.327
CLASS 290
1 R 4.437.015
4.437.016
52 4.437.017
CLASS 292
67 4.436.328
150 4.436,329
263 4.436.330
270 4.436.331
CLASS 294
1 R 4.436.332
82 R 4.436.333
86.3 4.436.334
CLASS 296
24 R 4.436.335
76 4.436.336
201 4.436.337
223 4.436.338
153
193
250
445
456
CLASS 297
4.436.339
4.436.340
4.436.341
4.436.342
4,436.343
CLASS 299
2 4.436.344
59 4.436.345
87 4.436.346
CLASS 303
6 R 4,436.347
IIS 4.436.348
CLASS 307
38 4.437.018
83 4.437.019
135 4.437.020
270 4.437.021
4.437.022
296 R 4.437.023
475 4.437.024
4.437,025
CLASS 308
189 R 4,436,349
CLASS 310
4,437,026
4,437,027
4,437,028
4,437,029
4,437,030
4,437,031
4,437,032
4.437,033
11
78
198
227
313 B
324
334
CLASS 312
7.1
223
228
241
259
270
281
338
4.436.350
4.436.351
4.436.352
4.436.353
4.436.354
4.436.355
4,436,356
4,436,357
CLASS 313
348
4,437,034
388
4,437,035
402
4,437,036
585
4,437,037
633
4,437,038
CLASS 315
60
4,437,039
209R
4,437,040
248
4,437,041
289
4,437.042
308
4,437,043
366
4.437.044
561
571
649
663
o9q
798
808
CLASS 318
4,437,045
4,437,046
4,437,047
4,437.048
4,437,049
4,437.050
4,437,051
CLASS 323
210 4,437,052
268 4,437.053
CLASS 324
51 4,437.054
4,437,055
61 R
73 AT
4,437,056
78 R
4,437,057
120
4,437,058
142
4,437,059
158 D
4.437.060
166
4.437.061
238
4.437.062
316
4,437,063
346
4.437.064
425
4.437.065
CLASS 328
14 4.437.066
167 4.437.067
CLASS 329
105 4.437.068
CLASS 330
109 4.437.069
254 4.437.070
CLASS 331
1 A 4.437.071
4.437.072
CLASS 333
28 R 4.437.073
128 4.437.074
167 4.437,075
206 4,437,076
245 4,437,077
CLASS 335
81 4,437,078
170 4,437,079
216 4,437,080
229 4,437,081
CLASS 336
58 4,437,082
65 4,437,083
CLASS 338
22 R 4,437,084
CLASS 339
17 C
4,436,358
61 M
4,436,359
97 P
4,436,360
4,436,361
103 M
4,436,362
CLASS 340
286 M
4,437.085
347 DD
4,437,086
4,437,087
384 E
4.437,088
541
4.437,089
613
4,437,090
623
4,437,091
703
4.437,092
726
4,437,093
823.44
4,437.095
825.5
4.437.094
825.96
4.437.096
852
4.437.097
870.02
4.437.098
CLASS 343
756 4.437,099
CLASS 346
1.1
75
76 PH
140 R
160
4,437,100
4,437,101
4,437,102
4,437,103
4,437,104
4,437,105
4,437,106
CLASS 350
1.6
6.6
96.16
96.20
96.33
130
162.12
281
293
296
302
319
332
345
347 E
357
432
458
469
515
529
550
556
4,436,363
4,436,364
4,436,365
4,436,366
4,436,367
4,436,368
4,436,369
4,436,370
4,436,371
4,436,372
4.436,373
4,436,374
4,436,375
4,436.376
4,436,377
4,436,378
4,436,379
4,436,380
4,436,381
4,436.382
4,436,383
4.436,384
4,436,385
4,436.386
4.436.387
CLASS 351
206 4.436,388
208 4.436.389
234 4.436.390
CLASS 353
26 R 4.436.391
38 4.436.392
4.436,393
CLASS 354
4,436,394
4,436,399
4,436,400
4,436,401
4,436,395
4,436,396
4,436,397
4,436,398
159
296
312
406
416
465
476
CLASS 355
3R
3SH
3TR
II
14 D
14 E
14 R
IS
ss
57
4,436,402
4,436,403
4,436,404
4,436,406
4,436,405
4,436,407
4,436,41 1
4,436,410
4,436,408
4,436,409
4,436,412
4,436,413
4,436,414
4,436,415
4,436,416
CLASS 356
I 4,436,418
4.5 4,436,417
35.5 4,436,419
128 4,436,420
ISl 4,436,421
34i 4,436,422
390 4,436,423
396 4,436,424
361 4,436,425
369 4,436,426
3t9 4,436,427
432 4,436,428
CLASS 317
38 4,437,107
S» 4,437,108
«• 4,437,109
CLASS 358
41
44
9)
101
106
111
m
m
139
IfO
IM
167
224
296
339
4,437,110
4,437,111
4,437,112
4,437,113
4,437,114
4,437,115
4,437,116
4,437,117
4,437,118
4,437,119
4,437,120
4,437,121
4,437,122
4,437,123
4,437,124
4,437.125
4,437.126
4,437,127
4,437,128
CLASS 360
19
M
96.6
109
33
9i
91
146
172
283
313
402
403
226
272
275
306
4.437,129
4,437,130
4,437,131
4,437,132
CLASS 361
4,437,133
4.437.134
4.437.135
4.437.136
4.437,137
4.437.138
4,437.139
4,437,140
4,437,141
CLASS 362
4.437,142
4,437,143
4,437,144
4.437.145
CLASS 363
21 4,437,146
«1 4,437,147
It 4,437,148
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
138
140
187
200
400
414
442
474
508
571
749
900
177
182
193
218
CLASS 364
4,437,152
4,437,153
4,437,154
4,437,149
4.437.155
4.437.156
4.437.157
4.437.158
4.437.159
4.437,160
4,437,161
4,437,162
4,437,150
4,437,163
4,437,151
4,437,164
4,437,165
4,437,166
4.437.167
4.437.168
4.437.169
4.437.170
CLASS 365
4.437.171
4.437,172
4.437.173
4.437.174
CLASS 366
2 4,436.429
13 4,436,430
17 4,436.431
99 4.436.432
152 4.436.433
CLASS 367
24 4.437.175
38 4.437.176
CLASS 368
65 4.436.434
71 4.436.435
204 4.436.436
CLASS 369
45 4.437.177
75.1 4.437.178
172 4.437.179
217 4.437.180
244 4.437.181
CLASS 370
110.1 4,437,182
4.437.183
CLASS 371
19 4.437.184
39 4.437.185
9
73
32
165
137
204
272
310
317
205
91
CLASS 373
4.437.186
4,437.187
CLASS 374
4.436,437
4,436,438
CLASS 376
4,436,691
4,436,692
4,436,693
4,436,694
4,436,695
CLASS 378
4,437,188
126
144.2
304
73
14
24
189
384
76
143
170
171
195
204
232
263
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
381
4,437,189
400
4,436,439
4,436,440
4,436,441
403
4,436,442
403
4,436,443
4,436,444
4,436,445
4,436,446
405
4,436,447
4,436,448
4,436,449
4.436,490
4,436,451
4,436,494
4,436,452
4,436,493
PI 55
303
19
116
135
181
4,436,455
CLASS 406
4,436,456
4,436,457
4,436,458
4,436,459
CLASS 408
14
4,436.460
CLASS 409
132
218
232
233
243
4.436.461
4.436.462
4.436.463
4.436.464
4.436.465
CLASS 410
118
4.436.466
CLASS 411
34
4.436.467
248
4.436.468
CLASS 412
16 4.436.469
CLASS 414
36 4.436.470
4.436.471
50 4.436.472
310 4.436.473
417 4.436.474
569 4.436.475
690 4.436.476
723 4.436.477
752 . 4.436.478
757 4.436.479
CLASS 415
2 R 4.436.480
119 4.436.481
CLASS 416
I 4.436.482
143 4.436,483
178 4,436,484
241 R 4,436,485
CLASS 417
45 4.436,486
46 4,436,487
53 4,436,488
218 4,436,489
372 4,436,490
385 4,436,491
386 4,436,492
393 4,436,493
403 4,436,494
CLASS 418
55 4,436,495
CLASS 419
57 4,436,696
CLASS 420
440 4,436,697
CLASS 422
62 4,436,698
68 4,436,699
102 4,436,700
173 4,436,701
195 4,436,702
225 4,436,703
CLASS 423
II
54
65
226
329
437
552
573 O
574 R
579
4,436,704
4,436,705
4,436,706
4,436,707
4,436,708
4,436,709
4,436,710
4,436,711
4,436,712
4,436,713
4,436,714
4,436,716
4,436,715
CLASS 424
1.1
18.0
37
44
52
70
95
101
116
177
4,436,717
4,436,718
4,436,731
4,436,719
4,436.720
4.436.721
4,436,722
4,436,723
4,436,724
4,436,725
4,436,726
4,436.727
4.436,728
ISO
181
182
211
225
238
246
263
267
269
272
273 R
274
275
278
279
283
317
331
333
4.436.729
4.436.730
4.436.732
4.436.733
4.436.734
4.436.735
4.436.736
4.436.737
4.436.738
4.436.739
4.436.740
4.436.741
4.436.742
4.436.743
4.436.744
4.436.745
4.436.746
4.436.747
4.436.748
4.436.749
4.436.750
4.436.751
4.436.752
4,436,753
4,436,754
CLASS 425
28
73
195
290
308
331
384
543
15
430
438
549
573
603
38
39
40
47
54.1
74
96
138
227
252
255.3
284
379
380
419,7
4,436,497
4,436,498
4,436,499
4,436,300
4,436,501
4,436,302
4,436,503
4,436,496
CLASS 426
4,436,755
4,436,756
4,436,757
4,436,758
4,436,759
4,436,760
CLASS 427
4,436,761
4,436,762
4,436,774
4,436,763
4,436.764
4.43^765
4,436,766
4,436,767
4.436,768
4,436,769
4,436,770
4,436,771
4,436,772
4,436,773
4,436,775
CLASS 428
14 4,436,776
36 4,436,777
4,436,778
169 4,436,779
198 4.436,780
365 4,436,781
402 4,436.782
411 4,436,783
423.1 4,436,784
427 4,436,785
447 4,436,786
4,436,787
483 4,436,788
537 4,436,789
595 4,436,518
675 4,436,790
682 4,436,791
CLASS 439
1 4,436,792
17 4,436,793
40 4,436,794
53 4,436,795
112 4,436,796
CLASS 430
9 4,436,797
17 4,436,798
4,436,799
99 4,436,800
73 4,436,801
100 4,436,802
122 4,436,803
197 4,436,804
248 4,436,803
311 4,436,806
331 4,436,807
381 4,436,808
901 4.436.809
551 4,436,810
564 4.436,811
CLASS 491
_15 4,436,904
76 4,436,505
4,436,506
170 4,436,507
CLASS 432
214 4,436,908
293 4,436,909
CLASS 433
4 4,436,510
49 4,436,511
82 Re.31,537
129 4,436,512
CLASS 434
4,436,513
CLASS 435
4,436,812
4,436,813
4,436,814
4,436,815
4,436,816
4,436,817
4,436,818
CLASS 436
4,436,819
4,436,821
4,436,820
4,436,822
4,436,823
4,436,824
4,436,825
4,436,826
4,436,827
4,436,828
60
14
109
162
172
240
313
316
I
10
67
164
169
514
520
525
534
545
CLASS 440
89 4,436,514
CLASS 455
600
4,437,190
CLASS 464
114 4,436,515
128 4,436,516
CLASS 493
45 4,436,517
CLASS 501
22 4,436,829
96 4,436,830
119 4,436,831
84
176
201
208
317
700
58
64
106
115
167
144
172
175
203
426
501
8
43
88
91
139
145
211
260
296
297
394
425
443
491
498
903
504
510
783
CLASS 502
4,436,832
4,436.833
4.436.834
4.436.835
4.436.836
CLASS 518
4,436.837
4,436,838
CLASS 521
4,436,840
4,436,839
4,436,841
4,436.842
4.436.843
CLASS 523
4,436,844
4,436,845
4,436,846
4,436,847
4,436,848
4,436,849
CLASS 534
4,436,890
4,436,851
4,436,832
4,436,853
4,436,854
4,436,855
4,436,856
4,436,857
4,436,858
4,436,859
4,436,860
4,436,861
4,436,862
4,436,863
4,436,864
4,436,867
4,436,865
4,436,866
4,436,868
CLASS 525
51 4,436,869
93 4,436,870
.64 4,436,871
179
314
327.1
389
394
437
438
439
504
4,436,872
4.436.873
4,436,874
4,436,875
4,436,876
4,436,877
4,436,878
4,436,879
4,436,880
4,436,881
CLASS 526
106
III
214
257
263
348.1
4,436,882
4,436,883
4,436,884
4,436,885
4,436,886
4,436,887
4,436,888
CLASS 528
93 4,436,890
1 1 1 4,436,891
117 4,436,892
173 4,436,893
176 4,436,894
288 4,436,895
323 4,436,897
336 4,436,898
395 4,436,899
490 4,436,900
498 4,436,901
901 4,436,902
CLASS 544
27 4,436,904
016 4,436,903
182 4,436,905
187 4,436,906
238 4,436,921
335 4,436,907
CLASS 546
206 4,436,908
245 4,436,910
248 4,436,909
291 4,436,911
CLASS 548
233 4,436,912
316 4,436,913
348 4,436,914
432 4,436,915
508 4,436,916
4,436,917
546 4,436,918
CLASS 549
4 4,436,919
227 4,436,920
251 4,436,922
392 4,436,923
CLASS 556
416 4,436,924
CLASS 960
19
246
4,436,929
4,436,926
4,436,927
4,436,928
4,436,929
4,436.930
4.436.931
4.436,932
CLASS 562
470
502
519
4.436.933
4.436,934
4,436,889
CLASS 564
49 4,436,935
409 4,436,936
4,436,937
474 4,436.938
CLASS 568
813 4.436.939
857 4.436,940
CLASS 970
144 4,436,941
145 4,436,942
CLASS 888
357 4,436,943
408 4,436,944
488 4,436,945
510 4,436,946
529 4,436,947
532 4,436,948
664 4,436,949
CLASS 604
175 4,436,519
385 4,436.520
PI 56
CLASSIFICATION OF DESIGNS
D2-
D3—
D7-
272,959
272.910
27S 272.9*1
272.9*2
310 272,9*3
272.9*4
33 272.9*3
76 272,M*
36 272.9*7
272.9*1
272.969
272,970
16 272.971
47 272.972
272.973
309 272.973
231
61
16
96
31
32
71
331
D9-
311 272.9H
330 272.977
337 272.971
314 272.979
394 272.974
14 272,910
16 272.9*1
24 272.M2
272.913
27^914
272.9*3
272.9*6
334 272.9*7
300 272.9M
349 272.9*9
333 271990
377
DIO- 106
Dll-
DI2-
DI3-
•6
110
102
116
146
147
136
191
211
333
23
272,991
272.992
272.993
272,994
272,993
272.996
272,997
272.99*
272.999
273,000
273,001
2734)02
273,003
273.004
273.003
273!006
DI4-
D13-
DI6-
D17-
DII—
DI9-
D20-
3
30
32
6*
9
2
42
133
3
13
49
73
6
273,007
•
273,023
17
273.039
273,00*
D2I-
31
273,024
25
273.040
273,009
69
273,023
26
273.041
273X>10
273,011
273,012
121
190
273,026
273.027
273.02*
36
43
4*
34
273,042
273.043
273,013
273,014
192
197
273,029
273,030
D25-
273.044
273,043
273,013
234
273,031
74
273,046
273,016
D22-
19
273.032
79
273,047
273.017
D23-
3
273,033
D26-
37
273.048
273.011
19
273,034
31
273.049
273X»9
128
273,033
D27-
3
273.030
273,020
163
273,036
D28-
76
273,031
273«1
163
273,037
D99-
28
273.032
273,022
D24-
03
273.03*
273.083
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS
p.—
6*
3,203
70
3,204
3,203
3,206
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX
OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
(U.S. Sutes. Territorie* and Armed Force*, the Commonwedth of Puerto Rico, and the Canal Zone)
Alabama |
Alaska 2
American Samoa 3
Arizona 4
Arkansas 5
California 6
Canal Zone 7
Colorado %
Connecticut 9
Delaware 10
District of Columbia 1 1
Florida 12
Georgia 13
Guam 14
Hawaii 15
Idaho 16
Illinois 17
Indiana ig
Iowa 19
Kansas 20
Kentucky 21
Louisiana 22
Maine 23
Maryland 24
Massachusetts 25
Michigan 26
Minnesota 27
MissiMippi 28
Missouri 29
Montana 30
Nebraska 31
Nevada 32
New Hampshire 33 •
New Jersey 34
New Mexico 35
New York 35
North Carolina 37
North Dakou 38
Ohio 39
Oklahoma 40
Oregon 41
Pennsylvania 42
Puerto Rico 43
Rhode Island 44
South Carolina 43
South Dakou 46
Tennessee 47
Texas 4g
Utah 49
Vermont .."^ 50
Virginia 51
Virgin Islands 52
Washington 53
West Virginia 34
Wisconsin 55
Wyoming 56
U.S. Air Force 57
U.S. Army 58
U.S. Navy 59
as t!rillS'^li"e!l!i2iln^^^^^^ •ccording to above key. Refer to patent number in body of the Official Oaiette to obuin detail*
PATENTS
4.433.947
4,433,969
4.436.336
4.436.010
4.436.481
4.436.030
4.437,113
4,436,0*0
4,436J72
4,436,962
4,436,431
9 : 4,433,904
4,433.870
4,436.013
4.433.874
4,436,192
4.433.940
4,436,214
4,433,943
4,436,228
4.433.963
4,436,229
4,433.978
4.436.360
4.433,982
4,436,747
4,433.989
4,437,046
4,436.016
4,437.182
4,436,048
4.437.183
4.436,034
01 : 4.433,893
4,436,097
4,436,398
4.436,143
04 : 4,433,866
4,436,226
4,433.908
4,436.243
4,436,038
4,436,262
4,436,108
4.436.277
4,436,138
4.436.303
OS : 4.433.914
4,436,303
4.436,429
4,436,306
06 : Re.31.337
4,436,330
4,433,899
4,436,333
4,433.903
4,436,420
4.436,0*2
4,436.311
4.436,0*3
4.436.331
4.436,090
4.436,366
4,436.139
4,436,382
4.436.176
4,436.592
4.436.188
4,436.393
4.436.234
4.436.602
4,436,308
4.436.614
4.436.400
4.436,634
4,436,438
4.436,640
4,436.449
4.436,673
4.436,432
4.436.674
4.436.461
4,436.741
4.436,492
4.436.783
4,436,302
4.436,796
4,436,379
4,436,819
4,436,390
4,436,988
4,436.393
4,437,013
4,436.649
4,437,023
4,436,6*4
4.437,023
4,436,822
4.437.066
4,436,899
4.437,067
4,436,914
4,437,0*3
4,436,932
4<433.t63
4.436.968
08
09
10
12
13
4,436,983
4,436,994
4,437,004
4,437,047
4,437,049
4,437.066
4.437.106
4.437.126
4.437,130
4,437,139
4,437.130
4.437,138
4.437.171
4.437,173
4,436,403
4,436,409
4,436,963
4,437,0*0
4,437,136
4.436,076
4,436,190
4,436,304
4,436,419
4.436,692
4,436^694
4,437,007
4,437,164
4.436.011
4.436,023
4,436,324
4,436,366
4,436,399
4,436,689
4.436,838
4,433.833
4,433,923
4,436,088
4,436,116
4,436,189
4,436.234
4.436.329
4.436.480
4,436,309
4,436,376
4,436,990
4,436,992
4,437,003
4,437,092
4,437,093
4,437,096
4.437,097
4,437,160
4,436.036
16
17
4,436.195
4.436.326
4.436,484
4.436,493
4,436,780
4,436,333
4,433,857
4,435,860
4,435.n2
4435,915
4,435.«)1
4,433,93*
4,435,941
4,433,949
4,435,966
4,435.967
4,436,044
4.436,045
4.436,075
4,436,119
4,436,193
4,436,210
4,436,225
4,436,227
4,436,240
4,436,246
4.436.289
4,436.307
4.436^309
4.436,315
4,436,344
4,436,345
4,436,359
4,436,374
4,436,446
4,436,460
4,436,469
4,436,473
4,436,534
4,436,536
4,436,543
4,436,604
4,436,620
4,436,695
4,436,718
4,436,779
4,436,UI
4,436,940
4,436,938
4,436,970
4,436,971
4,436,986
4,437,010
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
4,437,034
4,437,042
4,437,030
4.437,0*4
4,437,161
4,435,853
4,435.922
4.436.049
4.436.092
4.436.186
4,436,187
4,436,211
4,436,242
4,436,319
4,436.4*5
4.436,349
4,436.596
4,436,603
4,436,6«
4,436,733
4,436,734
4,436,738
4,436,739
4,436,778
4,436,815
4,436,860
4,436.879
4.436,912
4,437,031
4,437,120
4.437,123
4,437,124
IU.3I,S36
4,435,873
4,436,169
4,436,444
4,436,436
4,436,934
4,437,151
4.436,077
4,436,0*1
4.436,445
4,436,545
4,436,641
4,435,993
4,436,039
4,436,105
4,436,235
4,436.632
4,436,70*
4,437,159
4,437,090
4,435,926
23
4.436.220
4.436.312
4.436.580
4.436,664
4,436,679
4,436,758
4,436,813
4,437,053
4,437,054
4,437,069
4,435,910
4,436,224
4.436,232
4,436.251
4,436,260
4.436,293
4,436,302
4,436,417
4,436,426
4,436,441
4,436,495
4.436.584
4,436.650
4,436,730
4,436,759
4.436,762
4,436,771
4,436,a06
4,437,018
4,437,026
4,437X>40
4,437,104
IU.3 1,533
4,433,852
4,435,865
4,435.972
4.436.037
4,436,0*4
4,436,139
4,436,147
4,436,197
4,436,217
4,436,268
4,436,275
4,436.337
4,436,372
4.436,463
4,436,470
4,436,383
4.436,610
4,436,621
4,436,713
4,436.723
PI 57
PI 58
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
4.436,750
4,436.775
4.436.789
4,436,875
4,436,885
4,437,116
4,435,871
4,435,995
4A36jOOi
4.436.008
4.436.015
4.436.125
4.436.194
4.436.213
4,436,354
4,436,370
4,436.392
4.436.393
4,436.477
4,436,630
4.436.757
4,436.788
4.436.993
4,437,081
4,437.155
4.437.157
4.436.231
4,436.964
4,435,851
4,436.003
4,436,021
4,436,202
4,436,233
4,436.266
4.436,331
4.436.518
4.436,577
4.436.727
4.436.728
4,436,343
4,436,351
4,436,700
4,436.821
4.435.91 1
4,435,919
4.437.122
4.435.856
4.435.895
4.435.896
4.435.903
4.436.043
4,436.098
4.436.184
4.436.185
4.436,203
4.436.208
4.436.221
4,436,249
4,436,423
4,436.462
4,436.500
4.436.507
4.436.525
4.436.537
4.436.540
4.436.612
4.436.631
4.436.637
4.436,645
4,436,652
4.436.662
4.436.682
4.436.691
35
36
4,436,721
4.436,729
4.436.748
4,436.765
4.436.793
4.436.804
4.436,824
4,436,834
4,436,836
4,436,850
4,436,872
4,436,890
4,436.957
4.436.965
4.436.978
4.436,979
4.436.999
4.437.013
4.437.014
4.437,024
4.437,037
4,437.039
4.437,043
4,437,087
4,437,094
4,437.142
4,437.148
4.435,868
4,436.155
4.436.294
4,436.437
4,437.064
4.435.858
4,435.880
4.435,891
4,435,898
4,435,913
4,435,933
4,435.936
4.435.938
4.435.942
4.435.956
4.435,961
4.436.053
4,436,091
4,436,094
4,436,101
4,436,103
4,436,112
4,436.146
4.436,204
4,436.209
4.436.261
4.436,271
4,436,276
4,436.297
4.436,301
4,436,311
4.436.328
4,436,340
4,436.365
4.436,368
4.436.369
4,436.404
4.436.405
4,436,424
4.436,466
4.436,496
4.436.528
4.436.530
4,436,555
4,436.558
4.436,586
37
38
39
4.436.609
4,436,622
4,436.623
4,436,635
4.436.642
4,436.693
4.436,717
4,436.746
4.436,768
4,436,777
4,436,797
4.436,799
4,436,820
4,436,825
4,436,826
4,436,829
4,436,846
4.436.851
4.436.876
4.436.887
4,436.924
4,436,942
4,436.%7
4.436,991
4,436,995
4,437,000
4,437,019
4,437,038
4,437,041
4,437,059
4,437.108
4.437,109
4.437.114
4.437,118
4,437,145
4,437,149
4,437,189
4,435,876
4,435,955
4,435.965
4.436,501
4,436,552
4,436,597
4,436,665
4,436,690
4,436,736
4,436,776
4,436,782
4,436,960
4,435,946
4,435,996
4,435.932
4,435,937
4,436,012
4,436,019
4,436,020
4,436,099
4,436,111
4,436,115
4,436,136
4,436,143
4,436,162
4,436,183
4,436,198
4,436,215
4,436,216
4,436,236
4,436,237
4,436.258
4.436.269
4.436.274
4.436.335
4.436.341
40
41
42
4.436.376
4,436.471
4.436.475
4.436.377
4.436.474
4.436.319
4.436.497
4,436,478
4,436,533
4.436.541
4,436,487
4,436,613
4,436.565
4,436.498
4,436.636
4.436,567
4.436.513
4.436.638
4,436.572
4.436.520
4,436.672
4.436.574
4,436,544
4,436.71 1
4.436.601
4,436,611
4,436,712
4.436.608
4,436,615
4,436,713
4.436.625
4,436,617
4,436,714
4.436.651
4,436.627
4,436,745
4.436.653
4.436.628
4,436,754
4.436.767
4,436,677
4,436,766
4.436^7
4.436.696
4,436,837
4.436.848
4.436.719
4,436,838
4.436.853
4.436.740
4,436.843
4,436,855
4.436.784
4.436.868
4,436,857
4.436.816
4.436.888
4,436,864
4.436.842
4.436.926
4,436,886
4.436.862
4.436.927
4,436,923
4.436.863
4,436.928
4,435,872
4.436,866
4,436,929
4,435,934
4,436.871
4,436,930
4,435,988
4.436,893
4,436,931
4,435,990
4,436,911
4,436,932
4,436.024
4,436,947
4,436,946
4,436,109
4,436,972
- 4,436,956
4,436,134
4,437,036
4,436,996
4,436,149
4,437,052
4.436.997
4,436,153
4,437,056
4.437.006
4,436,156
/ 4,437,073
4,437,141
4,436,166
4,437,082
4,437,167
4,436,283
4,437,083
4,437,175
4,436,488
4,437,166
4,437,176
4,436,681
43 : 4,436,212
49 : 4,435,917
4,436,698
45 : 4,435,909
4,436,036
4,436,865
4.436,040
4,436,095
4,436,882
4.437.152
4,436,442
4,436,883
46 : 4.436.113
50 : 4,435,928
4,436,901
47 : 4.435.929
51 : 4,433,925
4,436,902
4.436.223
4,436,100
4,436,948
4,436.526
4,436,191
4,436,949
4,436.557
4,436,330
4,436,977
4.436.895
4,436,367
4,435,864
48 : 4.435.861
4,436,425
4,436,028
4.435.912
4,436,455
4,436,207
4.435.975
4,436,569
4,436,332
4.435.976
4,436,705
4,436,510
4.435.977
53 : 4,435,902
4,436,955
4.435,984
4,435,958
4,435,862
4.436.002
4,436,007
4,435,877
4.436.018
4,436,263
4,435,882
4.436.118
4.436,278
4,435,948
4.436,148
4,436,553
4,435.979
4,436,150
4,436,703
4.435.981
4,436,151
4,437,146
4.436,001
4,436,152
54 : 4,436,267
4,436,027
4,436,154
4,436,375
4,436,046
4,436,157
4,436,666
4.436,052
4,436,164
55 : 4,435,883
4,436,117
4,436,165
4,435,924
4,436,181
4,436,168
4.436,022
4,436,248
4,436,177
4,436,093
4,436,285
4,436,264
4,436,200
4,436,291
4,436,279
4,436,206
4,436.299
4,436,280
4,436,288
4,436,358
4,436,316
4,436,339
4,436,361
4,436,325
4,436,342
4,436,363
4,436,334
4,436,443
4,436,373
4,436,450
4,436,867
4.436.394
4.436,457
4,437,079
4.436,459
4.436.458
4,437.133
DESIGN PATENTS
04
06
273.037
272.984
272.987
272.995
272.997
273.019
273.020
273.021
273.022
273.023
273.027
08
09
12
273.040
273.044
273.051
273.033
273.039
273.041
273.050
272.961
272.962
272.969
13
16
17
19
21
273.031
272.960
273.042
272.973
272.988
272.996
273.024
273.046
273.01 1
273,015
23
26
27
31
33
34
272,976
272,982
273,014
273,033
273,002
273,035
272,980
273,029
273,006
272,986
36
273,001
273,032
273,043
272,963
272,964
272,967
272,991
273,005
273,007
273,012
37
39
41
42
44
55
273,028
272,959
272,966
272.990
273.045
272.981
273.030
273,052
272,994
272,978
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : O— 1984
CHANGE OF ADDRESS FORM
COMPANY NAME OR AOOITIONAL AOOReSS LINE
^
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
Mail this form to: NEW ADDRESS
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office SSOM
Washington, D.C. 20A02
(or) COUNTRV
Attach last subscription
label here.
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
SUItCRIPTION CROCK FORM
ENTER MY SUBSCRIPTION TO;
® %
Domestic; @ $
Fortign.
NAME— FIRST. LAST
COMPANY NAME OR AOOITIONAL AOORESS LINE
jj
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
(or) COUNTRY
I I I I I I I I I I I
Q Rtmittanct Enelottd (Maki
chtcki payabit to Suparln-
ttndtni of Oocumants)
Q Chargt to my Oopotit
Account No
MAIL OROER FORM TO:
Suptrinttndtnt of Oecumtnt*
Govtrnmant Printing Offica
Wathington, O.C. 20402
Vol. 1040 Number 3
c
'^rii o»
OFHCIAL
GAZEHE
Of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
Route to
PATENTS
March 20, 1984
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
Malcolm Baldrige, Secretary
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
Gerald J. Mossinghoff, Commissiorier
U.S.
DEPARTMENT
OF COMMERCE
Patent
and
Trademark
Office
PUBLISHED WEEKLY BY AUTHORITY OF CONGRESS
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
March 20, 1984 Volume 1040 Number 3
CONTENTS
Pige
Patent and Trademark OfTice Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1040 OG 24
Reissue Applications Filed |040 OG 24
Requests for Reexaminations Filed 1040 OG 24
Errata 1040 OG 24
Patent Suits 1040 OG 25
Patent Certificates of Correction |040 OG 27
Disclaimers 1040 OG 27
Disclaimers and Dedications 1040 OG 27
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries |040 OG 28
Condition of Patent Applications 1040 OG 29
Reexaminations 931
Reissue Patents Granted (31,538) 935
Plant Patents Granted (5,207) 937
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,437,191) 939
Chemical (4,437,861) 1 175
Electrical (4,438,290) |289
Design Patents Granted (273,054) 1373
Index of Patentees pi |
Indices of Reissue, Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees PI 50
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues and Reexaminations) pi 53
Designs and Plants PI 56
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors
Patents (Including Reissues) PI 57
Designs and Plants PI 58
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form Back Page
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documente, Government
Printing Office. Washington, D.C., 20402, to whom all lubtcriptiont should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), iuued weekly.
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at $1.00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color. S8 .00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Addrea
orders to the Commissioner of Patenu and Trademarks, Washington, D.C.. 20231.
Printing authorized by Section 1 l(a)3 of Title 33, U.S. Code P.T.O.
PARENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
OG 5*2 o^n'^wP????!, *" ** ^^^' Gazette t^x 1022
0.a 52 on Sept. 28. 1982. REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION FILED
Domestic PCT fees were increased on Oct. 1 1982 bv
xd^d'^^^^r ^^ ^-^^ ^^^ was published at ^°^. "«**' ^^ CFR 1.11(c). The requeste for re-
19M /rSri!^ ^^ ^^'^ ^?^ Assembly effective Jan. 1. "^ P':"'*^ " '^ "^^^ E«umning oSup,. Copi« of S^
oft ^ ^*" amioimced at 1037 O.G. 12 on Dec. 13 J^"?^ "'* «'*'«' P*P«" niay be obtained by wWna S^
1983. TJie search fee for the European Patent OffiS wm ^**, '^*^°' established in the Rdes (37 CFR 1 zKb))
OG ^«rFe?'2/ V^"" ""^ ^amiouncS^Lr loS ceived''*hnor"TL'"'" "^ ^'^ P-tTo'^e^S not re-
•tL '°-..^V J'^- ^ ' l*"' "°^** ^"^^ •* considered to be constructive no.
The current schedule of PCT fees is as follows: Jl« »^ ^^P^^^ owner nnd ree«min.ti<^ ^7^ ?3^
Transmittal fee « o< nn ™ l-248(aX5) and 1.525(b)). ^ ^^ ^
Search fee * ^^^'^ 3^10.349, Reexam. No. 90/000 497 Reaii«,t«H. pa
U.SJ'atent and Trademark Office as ^r.^'^'.?].'^/'". APPa£JtUS a5S^ETHOD
Searchmg Authority FOR CEMENTING WALL LINERS Joe R BroS?
' ^^^f^'yfP^r",**?* P"°^ us. national ?t!i' ^"^' f ^^"^- ^"8^^' Tool ck. Houston Tk!^'
S^^g AuAority CoUim. Owner of R«oS^ wS^J^L&S
BM.C fee (first 30 pwes) 2,5 oo Co., PIumileadv«£; P. ' *«'""'«'■ » * « Equipment
X o^'Sr. ^«.<*" ""' ,„ , ASli'^', ^tS^ ^°.?'^'«'- ««-«'«'^ "*•
Designadoii fee (for e«^h nitionai ' ' OXY RP«Nl^^,i$;£iXJS?^'CES USING EP-
or regk.n.J office) "_. . ,ooo K nB^l«\S^w5?I^'^J*'»™ '^'^'^BON-
Jan. ju, 1^84. Commissioner 0/ Patents ^mey or Agent: Hill, van Santen. et al S On- 250
a«</ Trademarks. R«l««»ter: Owner ' *' ^P' ^^'
. 4,249^1, Reexam. No. 90/000.495 Reaue«t«>H- i.«
«U».>^PUC..„.s™^ CL^NBg.'^B''&-™OPBU^35
.d"^ ri^ siii!;*' r*.-^ ■""-^'» ""• Js:," ''*""■■ '"•■™' ^- *^- ^'- °f'^^.'^^^r:
ea oeiow m open to inspecuon by the general public in the ^-''^^^ ^
mdKated Examuung Groups and copies may be obtained by . 4.2W.»M. Reexam. No. 90/000 506 Reau«iterf. P.K
P.ymg the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)). "^ '^ i' '^*1' ^I- 53/451. FORM-RLI^EALTytcklG
3,645335, Re. S.N. 570.011. Filed Jan 11 1984 ri i^° METHOD AND APPARATOS; RoSrt C
coos. tx. Gp.: 164 4,305,091, Reexam. No. 90/000.504 Requested- Feb
fc^i™^?^,^*""''.-'- An"™""*. Owner of Record: Melbourne. Fl^ ^ ' '^"««"- "«™ CofP-
W... Attorney or Agent: Douglas B. Henderson. Ex. 4.7|^, r ^.^ 000.508. Reouested: Feb.
DU^r.^'^'ifLAVORS FOR SMOKING PRO- VULSIVE DISORDERS. Irviig Fish eVi/ ^e? of
SbiS^V-V"^ ^";j *? '^i' ^^^«" of Record: /»A% Record: New York Univeriity]N^Yo^k.NY aS™«v
s^';^ei"t;^^et^Nx'^-5p.:t3r^^ - ^««' Sw^r= ^"''^ * '^'^' ^^ o^:^ i^i^R^r^^
METHODS OF MAKING SAME JoL G^Jia^^ Emrt.
Frkn^TS^^iiSLJlJljp^Ur ^"°™*^ ^' ^«-^- "^'ijf ^--« to Patent No. 4.406.092 to Charles W
Lake et al. of Okla. for 'SURFACE CLEANING
1040 OG 24
March 20. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG 25
MACHINE' appearing in the Official Gazette of
Sept. 27. 1983 should be deleted since no patent was
granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4.428,446 to Akira Kimura
et al. of Japan for 'MOTOR VEHICLE EQUIPPED
WITH ENGINE NOISE EMISSION PREVENT-
ING DEVICE* appearing in the Official Gazette of
Jan. 31, 1984 should be deleted since no patent was
granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,431.694 to John T.
Balkwill of Calif, for 'MULTIFIBER DESIGN
FOR MICROCHANNEL PLATES' appearing in
the Official Gazette of Feb. 14, 1984 should be de-
leted since no patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,433,074 to David H.
Hawes of S.C. for 'DISCONTINUOUS FIBER
PRETREATMENT appearing in the Official Ga-
zette of Feb. 21, 1984 should be deleted since no pa-
tent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4.433.101 to William H.
Gibby, Jr. of N.J. for 'BLENDS OF VINYL HA-
LIDE-POLYLEFIN GRAFT COPOLYMERS
AND ABS POLYMERS' appearing in the Official
Gazette of Feb. 21, 1984 should be deleted since no
patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,433,169 to Hans-Joachim
SchoU of Germany for 'DIAMINES AND A PRO-
CESS FOR THEIR PREPARATION' appearing in
the Official Gazette of Feb. 21, 1984 should be de-
leted since no patent was granted."
Patent Suits
Notices under 35 U.S.C. 290; Patent Act of 1952
3455,944, Anatole J. Sipin. MASS FLOW ME-
TERING MEANS; 3,485,091, sarae; 4,187,721, James E.
Smith. METHOD AND STRUCTURE FOR FLOW
MEASUREMENT, filed Sept. 1. 1982, DC, S.D.N. Y.,
Doc. 82-Civ-5796. Micro Motion. Inc. v. Anatole J. Sipin
Co., Inc.
3,485,098. (Sec 3,355,944.)
3,807,713, Respiratory Care, Inc., BOTTLE CON-
TAINING FLUID FOR INHALATION THERAPY
APPARATUS; 3^64,544, s«Bie, ELECTRIC HEAT-
ING UNIT FOR LIQUID; 3,903,216, lame, INHALA-
TION THERAPY APPARATUS; 3,915,386, aame,
NEBULIZER; 4,187,951, same, BLOW MOLDED
BOTTLE WITH DIFFUSER AND METHOD FOR
MAKING SAME; 4,217,328, same, METHOD OF
BLOW MOLDING A BOTTLE WITH A DIFFUS-
ER; D. 257,763, same, BOTTLE, filed July 23. 1982,
D.C.. N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 82 C 4575. Respiratory
Care, Inc. v. Walter G. Comett, III, et al
3364,544. (Sec 3307,713.)
3303,216. (Sec 3307,713.)
3315386. (Sec 3307,713.)
4,070363, Peter D. Petroff. INFILTRATION-IN-
FLOW SEWER LINE ANALYZER; 4311,111, tame,
filed July 2. 1981. D.C.. W.D.N.C. (Charlotte), Doc. C-
C-8 1-0265. Condor Systems, Inc., et aL v. Environmental
Leasing. Inc. et aL
4,100397, Bobbie D. Peacock, STEP CONSTRUC-
TION EMPLOYING INSERTABLE FASTENER
HAVING DEFORMABLE PROJECTIONS, filed Oct.
6, 1983, D.C.. W.D. Mo. (Kansas City), Doc.
83-1107-CV.W-6, M. A. Industries, Inc. v. Clay and
Bailey Mfg. Co.
4,103360, Haas and Schenken. MIRROR HOLDER,
filed June 8. 1982. D.C.. CD. Calif. (Los Angeles). Doc.
82 286S. Cobbs Mf^ Co. v. Hollywood Accessories Ca, et
al Plaintiff's Notice of Stipulation dismissing action
with prejudice entered on June 28, 1983.
4,109343, Weis and Vander Meulen, TROLLEY
WHEEL ASSEMBLY, filed Aug. 22. 1983. D.C.. N.D.
Ga. (AtlanU). Doc. C83-1752A. C L Frost A Son, Inc.
V. Tri-II, Inc.
4,109,437, Player and Barton. BUILDING PANEL,
filed Dec. 30, 1983, D.C., N.D. Tex. (Dallas), Doc.
3-83-2305 G, Howmet Aluminum Corp. v. Mason Corp,
4,114,804, Jones and Sherman. COUNTERFEIT DE-
TECTION MEANS FOR PAPER COUNTING, fiM
Dec. 15, 1981, D.C.. N.D. 111. (Chicaao), Doc. 81 C
6989, Brandt, Inc. v. William Crane, aoing business as
Money Processing Consultants. Same, filed Mar. 9, 1982,
D.C., CD. Calif (Los Angeles), Doc. 82 1159. Billcon
International, Inc. v. Brandt. Inc., et aL
4,131,195, Scott Paper Co.. DISPOSABLE. COM-
PACTABLE MOISTURE IMPERVIOUS PACKAGE
FOR PREMOISTENED SHEETS, filed Sept. 30. 1983,
D.C Del. (Wilmington), Doc. 83-649, Scott Paper Co. v.
Riegel Textile Corp.
4,133319. Robert C Parsons, METHOD OF MAK-
ING DECORATIVE PANELS, filed Oct. 19, 1983.
D.C. N.D. Tex. (Dallas), Doc. CA3.83-1783-C, Joe F.
Miller v. Raid Parker and Cynthia Parker, doing business
as Glass Etch Design.
4,144,594, Melvin H. Chapman, FILIGREED BELT
AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME, filed Oct. 23,
1981, D.C, W.D. Okla. (Oklahoma City), Doc.
CIV-81-1472-W, Amsco Corp v. Nocona Belt Co. Judg-
ment by default that all claims of Pat. No. 4.144,594 are
invalid and unenforceable. Pat. No. 4,114,594 is not in-
fringed by the manufacture, use or sale of plaintiff's
belts. FUed Apr. 19, 1982.
4,147,896, Cannon and O'Neill, FIXED SPEECH
BUFFER MEMORIES FOR SIGNALLING WITH-
OUT AN ORDER WIRE, filed Dec. 6. 1983. D.C,
M.D. Fla. (Orlando). Doc. 83-966-CIV.ORL-ll,
Comtech Communications Corp. v. Electronics Corp. of Is-
rael Ltd.. et aL
4,172359, Haas and Schenken, TIMEPIECE WITH
ELECTRONIC CHIME GENERATOR, filed Aug. 10,
1983. D.C. E.D. Pa. (Philadelphia). Doc. 83-3874.
Drugor Associates v. Franx Hermle A Sohn. et aL
4,173310, Lineberry. Buckner and Harris. METHOD
AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING BRICK, filed
Apr. 20, 1981, D.C. M.D.N.C (Greensboro), Doc.
C-81-172-G, Auto-Systems and Service, Inc. v. Clarksville
Machine Works, Inc. Stipulation of Dismissal with preju-
dice filed by Plaintiff on Dec. 1. 1981.
4,175323, William G. Friend, METHOD AND AP-
PARATUS FOR OCCULT BLOOD TESTING IN
THE HOME, filed Nov. 28, 1983, D.CN.J. (Newark).
Doc. 83-4536D, Warner-Lambert Ca y. C A Fleet Ca.
Inc
4,184,429, Max Widmer, CONSTANT BEVEL DOC-
TOR BLADE AND METHOD AND APPARATUS
USING SAME, filed Oct. 26. 1982. D.C. E.D. Pa.
(Philadelphia), Doc. 82-4712. Max Daetwyler Corp. v. R.
Meyer.
4,187,721. (Sec 3355344.)
4,187,951. (Sec 3307,713.)
4,188325, James G. Farrar. MONITOR FOR DI-
VERS TO AVOID DECOMPRESSION, filed Nov. 25.
1983, D.C. S.D. Fla. (Miami), Doc. 83-6834<:iV.JLK,
Aquatechnology, Inc v. Diners Unlimited, Inc
4,189,664, Richard L. Hirschfeld. POWER CON-
TROL UNIT FOR AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF
POWER CONSUMPTION IN A LIGHTING LOAD,
filed Sept. 13. 1983. D.C, S.D. Ohio (Dayton), I>oc.
3-83-9S6. Voltage Control Corp. v. Staeo Powemeties. Inc
4,191390, John J. Sundheim. METHOD AND AP-
PARATUS FOR CLEANING CARPETS AND
1040 OG 26
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
f¥^if^J^^^^° CLEANING FLUID, filed Sept
16, 1983, DC. Ore. (Eugene), Doc. 83-6416-E, Winder
Industrie^ Inc.. et aL v. AmoU K Ballweber. doing bust-
nessas Ballweber Industries. Defendants are permwiently
enjoined from further infringing U.S. Pat. No. 4 191 590
per Consent Decree and Judgment filed Dec. 21,' 1983.
r.^J^:S?'.i°ij" ^ Savage, Jr., LENS CLIP AND
^^^ f^^ot'-fSS^ L'°"T" UNIT ASSEMBLY, Wed
J£V ^u- ''?2. D.C.. CD. Calif. (Los Angeles), D^. S
5845, Visual Communications Co.. Inc. v. Data Display
June'??' 1983 ^'^^ *"** Consent Judgment entered
fKi^JSlr,?!?™' *"** "°' DOCUMENT PROCESS-
ING SYSTEM AND METHOD, filed Dec. 23 1982
Sf •:'iS>?*- T*^^^' ^ CM.n-2utk,Banc:ec:
Inc. V. ROI Consulting. Inc.
r^/iSyS!', ^iS"*^" * ^^^' MICROCOMPUTER
CONTROLLED GAME, filed Mar. 5, 1981 DC
SD.NY^. Doc. 81-Civ-1288, Milton Bradley (Sy.
Kingsford Ltd. et al. Defendants are permanently
enjomed from mfringing Pat. No. 4,207,087 per Jude-
ment entered Dec. 17, 1981. ^ *
4»211,111. (See 4,070,563.)
4,213,028, Arend Wolf, ELECTRIC HEATING DP.
n^^^^?!'^u^^}^\^ WINDOWS fitedSL 5 l?8l
D.C^ N.D. Ohio (Toledo). Doc. 83-1097, Audiowx Corp
V. Dana Corp. "^
4,217,328. (See 3,807,713.)
«v^i";..B°5*^** Ji ,®«*"'"' LADLE HEATING
SYSTCM, filed Sept. 19, 1983, D.C., E.D. Ky. (Lexina-
ton). Doc. 83-300, Thermecon. Inc. v. Hotwork Mfg. Co..
Inc.. et aL ■'*
«/^^I**' ^"*^ Bromley, HAND-HELD TWO-
rViiXf.^ ELECTRONIC FOOTBALL GAME
S!?;^^'^??l^^^^^^^™ONIC SIMULATED FOOT-
BALL GAME AND METHOD; 4,249.744 ume.
S^MF ^^.L^'i: ELECTRONIC SPORTS ACHON
GAME fUed Feb. 19, 1981, D.C.. CD. Calif (Los
Anaeles), Doc. 81-0848, Entex Industries. Inc. v. Coleco
Industries, Inc.
pn*^?:J?-?'»?'?*; ^ro'n^«y. electronic SIMULAT-
m^.oS?^]^^^^,?^^^ ^ND METHOD, filed Feb.
10, 1981, D.C, S^^DN.Y., Doc. 8 l-Civ-081 7, Cb/eco In-
^Wu^^'^'^c- ^.- itCiv-0818, Coleco Industries v!
Tandy Corp. Same, filed Feb. 10, 1981, D.C, S.D.N Y
Doc. 81-C1V-0819. Coleco Industries, Inc. v. Entex Indus-
tries, Inc. Suae, filed Feb. 10. 1981. D.C. S.D.N. Y.
Doc. 81;C.v.0820. Coleco Industries. Inc. v. Mattel. Inc.
81-CIV.0821, Co/m> Industries v. Conic Investment Co..
8liifS!^'"^/'^'M?' J'8»'P.C.. S.D.N.Y.. Doc.
Il;2 i.^' ^^l<^o Industries. Inc. v. Bambino. Inc.
ffSl-O?!? rf ?'. »981. D.C. S.D.N.Y., Doc.
Il£ *?.?1' ^'l'^'' industries, Inc v. Tudor Games, Inc.
r^.^^ /^f ?'^ ^'?*' P^' S.D.N.Y.. Doc.
81-Civ^825. Co/eco Industries, Inc. v. Enterprex Interna-
tjonal Corp. Same, filed Feb. 10. 1981. D.C. S.D.N Y
Doc. 81-CIV-0827. Coleco Industries, Inc v. Tiger Elec-
S.p.N.Y., Doc. 81-C1V-0828. Coleco Industries, Inc. v!
n?"^i?M*^'^ Co/p Same, filed Feb. 10. 1981.
2; ' IBl^^r ^ 81-Civ.0822. Coleco Industrie^
Inc.w Pro-Quality Electronic Ca. Ltd Notice and Order
of Voluntary Dismissal without prejudice filed by Plain-
s'vv^^^^'ol'^- S*^ *"«» Peb. 10. 1981. D.C,
S^D.N.Y., Doc. 81-Civ-0826, Coleco Industries v. Bamei
July 27, 1981.
frinang Pat. No. 4:249,735 p^r"c^^t"j"idg!^nrfilSi
4,249,735. (See 4,249,734.)
4,249,744. (See 4,249,734.)
4053,624, Robert E. Colbert, WELDING WIRE
m^^^^^S?: ^oi^^ •'*♦ '982. DC. S.D. Ohio
^ayton) Doc. CO-82-242. National-Standard Ca v. Ho^
D«. 20 1 983 °^ Dismissal with prejudice filed
4,2544^29, Robert H. Popper. Jr.. APPARATUS fob
f.^f^o?V'S?,'^P^^WEffFoF A BINDER, mrf^y
13 1983. D.C CD Calif (Los Angeles). D<;c^ml
J. S. Popper. Inc. v. Selzee. Inc.
o,?'?'^'**'' ^°^ R- Haan. ENDPLATE STOP FOR
SILAGE DISTRIBUTOR, filed Sept 1 1983 Dr
1^/^- (Philadelphia). D^x:. 83-42??:- wS ^^e
Distributor. Inc. v. Lancaster Level-Flo. Inc
4,278,414, Weisner and Walls. APPARATUS FOR
MAKING PLASTIC SKYLIGHTSV JJSSSl umf
IMPROVED SKYLIGHT, filed &X^m2, DC*
^n^T'ii ^?W^^' ^ 82-530 Orl-Civ-R. W^
Corp. V. Sun-Tek Industries. Inc
4,298,601, Alan N. Howard. METHOD AND fop
My NATIONS FOR THE "niEATME?^ OF^BK^-'
JhS?^ r^'W^^i'. ^f' ^^N.Y. (Buffalo). Doc.
W-628C. Cambridge Plan International v. Republic Drug
^» ^,SL^ administratively, without prejudice, on
Oct. 25, 1983. Sune, filed Nov. 7. 1983. D.C. Nev (Us
Vegas). Doc. CV-LV-83-754 RDF. Cambridge Plan h-
temational v. Stanford International, Inc., et at
ovc!?''i?l. ?°''*^^ *"'* Robertson. BARBECUE
OVEN, filed Jan. 6. 1984, D.C. E.D. Mo (St Louis^
Doc. 84-33C(3). B B Robertson Ca v. ^yidB kA
d Associates, Inc.. et aL *
f^-fnSsf^* f^iilibiS"^*'' ^^ MONOAZO DYE-
sTUFFS; 4,378,970, same, RED MONOATn
fiih^^S^l^ ACID'dYEsWfS FOR roLY^^
K!' J^lfrrLl?"' ?;^- E-^ p»- (pw23;i^hb),
Corp. Pat. Nos. 4,312,808 and 4,378.970 are valid. Defen-
^t IS enjomed permanently from further infringing Pat.
Nos. 4312.808 and 4.378.970 during their iSexpired
terms. Dated Jan. 5. 1984. «=Aptrca
•iii'S'^^Ao'^'^^-'? ^ Holmes, TRACTION SPLINT,
Cci^^ifiW^r^' I^C. W.D.N.C. (Charlotte), Doc!
4,344,261. (See 4,278,414.)
yx,i^^^xJ°^ R- Saron, FLEXIBLE LIGHT
M S^f,w?tP^JX? ^^P- ^^ Nov. 9. 1983. d" .
N.D. 111. (Chicago). Doc. 83 C 8030. Key MedicaL Inl
V. Lee's Enterprises. Inc.. et aL
4^7,564, John D. HoUey. SWEEPER BRISTLE
AND METHOD OF MAKING, filed Aug. 18 198?
ac Colo. (Denver). Doc. 83-Z-1480, Holley Enginee^
ing Co.. Inc. V. Western Sling Ca. Inc. et aL
^4^3«,475, Ho and flippy. ENCLOSED DISC
P<^ Y.^, ^'I" IMPROv/l5 AIR FLOW, ffled DeT
li\?^L^-^^' ^^ ^^- (San Jose), Doc. 083-20427
WAI, Pnam Corp. v. Atasi Corp.
4,373,277, Edward Cucheran, CUTTER EXTEN-
SION CONE, filed Oct. 18. 1983 D.C. ED. vTSot-
oi^gi^ 83-694.N. / A. LaPorte. Inc v. Nhrfalk
r^f^2t^* Ramun and Ramun, MATERIAL IL\N-
DLING AND SHEARING ATTACHMENT FOR A
BACKHOE. filed Oct. 11. 1983, D.C^£n. (oSuth)
Doc. 5-83-299. Allied Gator. Inc v. UBounty ^. ffi.'
4,378,970. (See 4,312,808.)
»**:S*'Z^' ^^^ N ^"t«' STANDARDIZED INTER-
FACE FOR Aa)USTIC BAR TYPEWRITERS. Si
June 21, 1983. D.C. CD. CaUf. (Los Anaeles) Doc
CV834020 TJH. Cord, Ltd v. SCM^rp. ^ ^' ^^
D. 257,763. (See 3,807,713.)
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correction for the Week of Mar. 20, 1984
D. 265,857
4,390,202
4,406,002
4,415,587
3,299,203
4,390,930
4,406,401
4,416,032
4.081.091
4,391,955
4,406,696
4,416,572
4.277.822
4.392.386
4,407,271
4,416.649
4,280.179
4.393.677
4,407,981
4.417.144
4,325,245
4.394.674
4,408,835
4,417,720
4.328,932
4.394.763
4,409,126
4,420,343
4.336.413
4.395.048
4,409.562
4,420,389
4,349,600
4,395,764
4.409.819
4,420,573
4,350,183
4,396,910
4,409.856
4,421,138
4,350,795
4,397,052
4,410,230
4,421,259
4,359,563
4.398,194
4,410,234
4,421,462
4,360,205
4,399,020
4,410,356
4,421,818
4,366,071
4.399.208
4,411.372
4,421,919
4,369,357
4,399,249
4,412,211
4,422,846
4,373.600
4,399,436
4,412,222
4,423,448
4,374.364
4,402,281
4,412,972
4,423,932
4.379,185
4,403,179
4,413,147
4,424,343
4.379,335
4.404.022
4,413,186
4,424,843
4,379,874
4,404,311
4,413,666
4,425.144
4,382,871
4,404,384
4,413,718
4,425,380
4,384,219
4,404,533
4,414,219
4,425,421
4,386,508
4,405,023
4,414,668
4,425,422
4,387,357
4,405,177
4,414,864
4,425,551
4.388.412
4,405,907
4,415,405
4,426,083
4.389,678
4,405,982
4,415,458
4,426,130
Disclaimers
3,613,818.— Geory* E Schubert. Aurora; Lloyd D.
Swayze. Yorkville; and John B. Waggoner. Joliet, 111.
EMERGENCY SUPPLY SYSTEM FOR VEHI-
CLE HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS. Patent dated
Oct. 19, 1971. Disclaimer filed Jan. 16, 1984, by the
assignee. Caterpillar Tractor Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1, 2, 3, and 4
of said patent.
3,952,510.— Wayne A. Peterson. Joliet, 111. FLOW SENS-
ING AND CONTROL APPARATUS. Patent dated
Apr. 27, 1976. Disclaimer filed Jan. 16, 1984, by the
assignee, CaterpillarTractor Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1, 2, and 3 of
said patent.
4.190,235.— Wf///ow C DelL Washington, D.C. FLUID-
IZED BED LADLE HEATING METHOD AND
APPARATUS. Patent dated Feb. 26, 1980. Dis-
claimer filed June 6, 1983, by the assignee, The Cadre
Corp.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1, 2, 4, 31 and
33 of said patent.
4,324,839.— /?o^rr B. Frye, Menands, N.Y. SILICONE
RESIN COATING COMPOSITION. Patent dated
Apr. 13, 1982. Disclaimer filed Dec. 27, 1983, by the
assignee. General Electric Co.
The term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 29, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
4,341,550.— Ferenc M. Pallos. Walnut Creek; Mervin E
Brokke. Moraga and Duane R. Ameklev. Sunnyvale,
Calif. HERBICIDE COMPOSITIONS. Patent dated
July 27, 1982. Disclaimer filed Dec. 15, 1983. by the
assignee, Stauffer Chemical Ca
The term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 2, 1993,
has been disclaimed.
4,382,186.—^. Stuart Denholm. Lincoln; William A.
Frutiger, Beverly; and Kenneth £. Williams, Andover,
Mass. PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR CON-
VERGED FINE LINE ELECTRON BEAM
TREATMENT OF OBJECTS. Patent dated May 3,
1983. Disclaimer filed Jan. 4, 1984, by the assignee,
Sony Corp. of America.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
Disclaimers and Dedications
Des. 260,418.— 5w«/ev Z Baker. Cuyahoga County; and
Benjamin H. Baker, Geauga County, Ohio. ADHE-
SIVE TRAP FOR RODENTS. Patent dated Aug.
25, 1981. Disclaimer and Dedication filed Dec. 12,
1983, by the assignee, / T. Eaton d Ca. Inc
Hereby disclaims and dedicates to the Public the en-
tire term of said patent.
3,959,624.— WoZ/er Kaslow. New York, N.Y. CODED
MERCHANDISING COUPON. Patent dated May
25, 1976. Disclaimer and Dedication filed Nov. 15,
1983, by the inventor.
Hereby disclaims and dedicates to the Public the re-
maining term of said patent.
1040 OG 27
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
tojLi£iSM^^ [;;>" -nuijed in patents. With one exception. . noted
maintain collections of earlier issued patents The ^ 1^. n^.^L™'*""*' *^* «>"«tion8 arc orianized in
of these coUecUons varies from UbraiVto Ubrarv ^ "^ £ln v '^^ sequence.
S! ^^".P-t^fi of only recent years^to Jl o^i^f HImTn S/:?'„ "^"^ ^^' «»P'" ^o" «ther micro-
thepatents issued since 1790. °' !H"/" rcader-pnnters or from the bound volumes in oa-
These patent collections are open to public use and ^(y^il^I '^^■^ are generally provided for a fee.
faS^ t ^^^K^'^"^ Depository LiELies. Ei aSditb^.^f am^a f he S^tL'" '^' '^^. °^ P*^«"» collections
fen the publications of the U.S. Patent ClassiStion ^u!?J -^^ Depository Libraries and in their
System (e.g. The Manual of ClassificaS Inctei to he n?T °^»^7'c« ^o the public, anyone contemplating u«S
U.S Patent Classification. ClassSion DeL^io„« tw f ^^^"^ '* ^ P*^*'"^" '^raiy is adviwd t^^^^^
t^L"Sl P'^S^** ^^~«^ staTa^SS. in thS? JS TJtVert'l^^T'' ^'^^^ i^collection JSSl^SS^
to aid the public m gaining effective access to informal ^'^"^ mconvemence.
5f'' Name 0/ Library
Aiaoama Auburn University Libraries Telephone Contact
. . Birmingham Public Library . (205) 826-4500 Ext.21
Sacramento: California Sute Library' ' ill^} 626-7555 Ext. 273
San Diego Public Library (916)322-4572
Detowire Newttk:Univenity of Delaware (303)571-2122
'^ ^l^iiS^^-^ '^ '■■■■■■■■■ : : : P l??11^
InHi.n- Springfield: Illinois State Library' '. glJ) 269-2865
Indiana Indianapolis-Marion County Pubic 'Lihr-rv ^^17) 782-5430
MMMchmem Boston Public Libran- <301) 454-3037
Mich-ga, Anj .Ajhor: E„gto«™g tr.n.p<;^^„„ lJ,- ; y^ — ^ ;^ ■ ■ • (617) 536-5400 E,,. 265
-,. Detroit Public Library (313) 704-7494
St. Louis Ihiblic Librwy ^ (816) 363-4600
w„ , (314) 241-2288 Ext. 390.
Montana «"^;;J^°"^« College of Mineral Science and Technology ^^'' ^'^
pgSr- S^^'S^'lJ^bTJiS^^^^ (^SslJJtf???
New Mexico Albuquerque: University of New" Mexico Vihr,rv ^^^^^ 733-7815
New York AWy: iJew York State Libr^ ^ (^O^) 277-5441
Buffalo and Erie County Public Li'b'rarv (^'8) 474-5125
g±s^bri:r3^-"^i^'---^^-:.^ ^^>^
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries' .' .' ::::::: J^IS Jm «S
^. , . Toledo/Lucas County Public Librarv ^°'*^ 422-6286
Oklahoma StiUwater: Oklahoma sScUnivS Libra;v *'^> ^55-7055 Ext. 212
p«u„y.v.^ ^^ sp™g. .jj^ c^gSSS^, ::::;:;;;:;: ; P|:!SI
ntttburjh: Omiegie Library of PitSgh y.'. ?.\t\ Ji!" '5'
Rhode lahnd terc'S'biifSij'"^' "'""^'^'^ ^-^^ ""i^«^i^' ^ ^ ^'^^) ^tl\
Dallas Public Library (^^) 845-2551
MUwaukee Public Library (6^8) 262-6845
p™^^^*:lS^.^^&^,<=^SSK^^ifig^^ search S„pp„;.-,„fon«.!orsIL*!;!x which
■CoUactxia organiwd by nbject matter.
1040 OG 28
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, AatiaUnt Commiagioiwr
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Aiaittut CommiMioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF Febnuur 18, 1984
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual Filing Date of Oldest
New Caie Awaiting Action
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY. GROUP 1 10-D. E. TALBERT, Director 10-28-82
Inorganic Compounds; Inorganic Compositions; Organo-Metal and Organo-Metalloid Chemistry; Metallurgy; Metal-
lurgical Apparatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices.
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. GROUP 12a-C. E. VAN HORN, Director 7-16-73
Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Coametics;
Steroids; Oxo and Oxy; Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides.
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY. PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP 140-J O THOMAS, JR., Director 1-05-83
Synthetic Resins; Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions; Synthetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Part) e.g.. Coating; Molding;
Ink; Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding, Shaping, Treating Process, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and Textile Treatmg Compositions.
COATING, LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY, GROUP 160-S. N. ZAHARNA, Director 7-26-82
Coating: Processes, Apparatus and Misc. ProducU; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Materials; Adhesive
Bonding; Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; and Photography.
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, CSROUP 170-
R. F. WHITE, Director 1-16-76
Fertilizers; Foods; Fermentation; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and Starch; Paper Making; Glass Manufac-
ture; Gas; Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purirication; Distillation; Preserving; Liquid, Gas,
and Solid Separation; Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS. GROUP 210-S. W. ENGLE, Director 1-03-82
Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors;
Switches; Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION, GROUP 225-KENNETH L. CAGE, Director 6^1-81
Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, Communications, Op-
tics; Radar; Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser
Devices; Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special, Fuel, Explosive and Tnermic Composi-
tions; Thermal and Photoelectric Batteries.
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION, STORAGE. AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230-EARL LEVY. Director 7-06-81
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; Data Processing, Computation and Convenion;
Storage Devices and Related Arts.
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING, AND MEASURING, GROUP 240-
G. M. FORLENZA. Director 3-17-82
Receptacles; Bearings; Joint Packing; ConduiU; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures; Textile Spinning; Cleaning;
Food Treating; Agiuting; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical InstrumenU; Sound Recording; Image Projectors;
Web Feeding; Winding and Reeling; Cable HoisU; Measuring and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Material Handling;
Shaft; Impellers; Rotary Fluid Motors.
ELECTRONIC COMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES, GROUP 250-S. S. MATTHEWS, Director 930-80
Semi-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component CircuiU; Wave Transmiuion
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measuring.
DESIGN, GROUP 290-KENNETH L. CAGE, Director 1-14-71
Industrial Arts; Household. Personal and Fine Arts. ^
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA, GROUP 310-B. R. GRAY, Director 6-04-81
Conveyors; HoisU; Elevators; Article Handling ImplemenU; Store Service; Sheet Feeding; Dispensing; Fluid Sprin-
kling; Fire Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids; Boats;
Ships; Aeronautics; Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment.
MATERIAL SHAPING, ARTICLE MANUFACTURING. TOOLS. GROUP 320-STEPHEN G KUNIN, Director 6-21-82
Manufacturing Processes, AssembUng, Combined Machines, Special Article Making; Metal Deforming; Sheet Metal
and Wire Working; Metal Fusion-Bonding. Metal Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividing; Work and
Tool Holders, Woodworking; Tools; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchering; and Books and Printed Matter.
AMUSEMENT, HUSBANDRY. PERSONAL TREATMENT, INFORMATION. GROUP 330-
R. E. AEGERTER. Director 11-04-76
Amusement and Exercising Devices; Projectors; Animal and Plant Husbandry; PlanU; Harvesting; Earth Workina and
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Printing; Typewriters; Infor-
mation Dissemination.
HEAT, POWER. AND FLUID ENGINEERING. GROUP 340-D. J. STOCKING. Director 11-20-81
Power Plants; Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumps; Heat Gener-
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Gearing;
Fluid Handling and Control; Lubrication.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS. TEXTILES, MINING AND GEARING, GROUP 350-
A. L. SMITH. Director 7-23-81
Building Structures; Racks; Cabinets; Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Couplings; Joints; Miscel-
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineering; Earth Drilling; Mining;
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Macnine Elements; Clutches.
ExpiratioB of patsats: The patents within the range of numbers indicated below expire during Febrxiary 1984, except those which
may have had their terms curtailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, issued after the dates of the
range of numbers indicated below, may have expired before the full term of 17 yean for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the
?rovifions of 35 U.S.C. 151.
atentt Numbers 3.302.213 to 3,307,199, inclusive
Plant Patents Numbers 2,707 to 2,722 inclusive
1040 OG 29
REEXAMINATIONS
MARCH 20, 1984
Mttter encloMd in heavy brackets [ J appear* in the patent but form* no part of thii reexamination ipeciflcation; matter printed in italics indicates
additions made by reexamination.
Bl 3,560,287 (173rd)
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROTECTING
INSULATED PIPE
Robert W. Helling, Greeley, Colo., uaignor to Ceel>Co., Lake-
wood, Colo.
ReexuiiliMtion Request No. 90/000,130, Dec. 24, 1981.
Reexunination Certificate for Patent No. 3,560,287, iiiued Feb.
2, 1971, Ser. No. 634,347, Apr. 27, 1967.
Int. a.} B29D 23/10
VJS. a. 156—218
Claimt 1, 2, 9 and 11 are determined to be patenUble as
amended:
Claims 3-8, 10, and 12-16, dependent on amended claimi,
are determined to be patenuble.
1. A process for rendering a nonporous substrate water
repellent comprising treating said substrate with a composition
consisting essentially of an alkyl polysiloxane having the for-
mula:
N
pEDl
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1-7, having been Anally determined to be unpatenta-
ble, are cancelled.
[1. A method for ensheathing an insulated pipe with a
smooth-surfaced, impermeable sheet of tough, strong, syn-
thetic resin having the characteristics of high-impact polysty-
rene formed to a thickness in the range of approximately 0.030
to 0.060 inch and prepared as a rectangular member having a
length of a selected module and a width exceeding the circum-
ference of the pipe insulation by an amount sufficient to pro-
vide for a lap and including the steps of:
curling the sheet to a permanent curl having a radius which
will snugly embrace a predetermined range of sizes of pipe
insulation with the edges wrapped;
wrapping the sheet about a straight section of the pipe;
lapping the longitudinal edges of the sheet as the wrap is
completed; and
welding the contacting surfaces of the lapped edges with a
fluid cement having therein a solvent of the said resin
whereby to effect substantially hermetic seal of the insula-
tion within the sheath. J
•Si— O-
I
[wheeinj wherein n is an integer greater than I, R| is a lower
alkyl radical conuining from 1-7 carbon atoms, and R2 is
hydrogen, a lower alkyl radical containing from 1-7 carbon
atoms, or an aryl radical containing about 6 carbon atoms, an
organic solvent, and a mineral acid selected from the group of
sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, aromatic sulfonic acids, ali-
phatic sulfonic acid and hydrochloric acid, said acid is present
in an amount about 2.3% to 30% based on the weight of said
polysiloxane.
Bl 3,788,284 (175th)
FEEDBACK MODULATION OF EXHAUST GASES IN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
Conrad O. Gardner, 22905 108th West, Edmonds,, Wash. 98020
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,390, Jun. 2, 1983.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,788,284, iasued Jan.
29, 1974, Ser. No. 255,327, May 22, 1972.
Int. a.3 P02B 33/00; P02M 25/06
U.S. a. 123—571
Bl 3,579,540 (174th)
METHOD FOR PROTECTING NONPOROUS
SUBSTRATES AND FOR RENDERING THEM WATER
REPELLENT
Howard G. Oblhausen, 82 Graymoor Ln., Olympia Fields, 111.
60461
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,439, Aug. 30, 1983.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,579,540, issued May
18, 1971, Ser. No. 772,856, Not. 1, 1968.
FUed Aug. 30, 1983, Ser. No. 772,856
Int. a.} C08K 5/42
VS. a. 523—169
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 1-11 and 15-18 is confirmed.
Claim 12 is determined to be patentable as amended:
Claims 13 and 14, dependent on amended claims, are deter-
mined to be patentable.
1. In an internal combustion engine having an intake mani-
fold, and a feedback path coupled between said exhaust mani-
931
932
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
fold and said intake manifold for recirculating exhaust gases
from said exhaust manifold to said intake manifold;
mMns for modulating the rate of How of exhaust in said
feedback path, said means comprising:
timing means including a pulse source for generating first
control signals;
modulator circuit means includmg a multivibrator circuit
responsive to said first control signals for providing valve
control signals, and,
valve means disposed in said feedback path and responsive
to said valve control signals for modulating the rate of
flow of exhaust gases in said feedback path.
Bl 3,806,340 (176th)
MEAT COATED PRODUCT
Hugh C. Pahner, Rutland, England, asiignor to Kal Kan Foods.
Inc., Vernon, Calif. ^^
Reexaminatioa Requctt No. 90/000,057, Aug. 17, 1981
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3^08,340, iacued Apr
30, 1974, Ser. No. 162,022, Jul. 12, 1971.
„ » ^ '"*• ^-^ ^^^ ^/^ft ^Z''* i/iS
VJS. a. 426—92
"^ np4:?M,MlS^^^^^'^^'^^™N. IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1-17 having been finally determined to be unpatenta-
ble, are cancelled.
Cl. An animal food product having the substantia] appear-
ance, flavor and aroma of meat tissue in the form of discrete
bite-sized pieces comprising cores enclosed within covers of
substantial thickness encasing the surfaces and tenaciously
bonded around, concealing and masking the taste and appear-
ance of said cores, said covers comprising a substantial quan-
tity of natural meat materials as animal tissue solids to provide
the flavor, taste and aroma characteristics of meat tissue of
high palatabUity, and masking said core material, said cores
being formed of material of generally lower palatability and
composed in substantial part of starch-containing cereal alone
or admixed with animal meals or fish meals ]
New claims 6-9 are added and determined to be patentable.
1. A stirrup machine for bending of stock material such as
bars, wires, metal strips or the like and forming individual, bent
pieces therefrom, the machine comprising:
advancing and reversing means for selectively advancing
feed of the stock material which is to be bent and revers-
ing feed of the stock material which has been bent-
support means for supporting the stock material to be bent-
first operating means connected to said support means for
enablmg said support means to be moved forward or
backward with respect to the stock material;
bending means mounted on said support means for bending
the stock material, said bending means being connected to
said first operating means and being movable with said
support means; and
shearing means mounted between said advancing and re-
versing means and said bending means for shearing the
stock material at a desired location subsequent to bending
and reversal thereof, whereby after said stock material has
been bent, said advancing and reversing means can be actu-
ated to reverse the stock material to a position adjacent said
shearing means, so that upon actuation of said shearing
means, the bent piece is cut from the stock material close to
the bend, thereby reducing stock material waste.
Bl 4,266,731 (178th)
DUMP SPREADER
Charlea S. Mua«), Jr., Bath, N.Y., aaiignor to Alr-Flo Maonfkc-
turing Co., Inc., Prattaburg, N.Y.
Reexaminatioo Request No. 90/000,356, Mar. 28, 1983
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,266,731, issued May
12, 1981, Ser. No. 83,688, Oct. 11, 1979.
Continnation-in-part of Ser. No. 36,771, May 7, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 966,202.
Dec. 4, 1978, abandoned.
No. 83,688
Int a.3 AOIC 19/00: EOlC 19/20
U.S. a. 239—676
Bl 3,991,600 (177th)
STIRRUP MACHINE
X^'^io""^" ''°~" "• '^ ""^ '^' "•'-^
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,331, Feb. 17, 1983
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,991,600, issued No?
16, 1976, Ser. No. 597,372, Jul. 18, 1975.
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Not. 15, 1974, 83429/74
„ o ^ - '"*• ^-^ *21D 7/02. 7/08
U.S. a. 72—203
The patentability of claim 5 is confirmed.
Claim 1 is determined to be patentable «s amended:
Claims 2-4. dependent on amended claims, are detennined
to be patentable.
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1-3, having been fuially detennined to be unpatenta-
ble, are cancelled.
Cl- A dump spreader tnick body having hopper-shaped side
walls slopmg downward to a wide bottom conveyor that can
drive at different speeds and extends beyond a rear end of said
body, said dump spreader comprising:
a. a single rear door for both dumping and spreading mate-
nal from said body;
b. a fixed rear wall connected between said side walls at said
rear end of said body and extending vertically to provide
support for said rear door;
c. said fixed rear wall having an opening approximately the
width of said conveyor and extending vertically from said
conveyor upward to about one-half to three-quarters of
the height of said rear wall;
March 20, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
933
d. said door being large enough to close said opening and
being mounted for vertical movement on said rear wall
over said opening;
e. a hydraulic drive powerful enough for moving said door
vertically against the resistance of material loaded in said
body or lying on said conveyor under said door after
partially dumping material from said body; and
f. said hydraulic drive being operable for setting said door at
variable low heights above said conveyor for metering the
flow of said material from said body during spreading and
for raising said door above the top of said fixed rear wall
for fully opening said opening for dumping material
quickly. J
Bl 4,338,654 (179th)
VARIABLE SPOT STAGE UGHT
Richard Logotbetis, 631 Johnson A?e., Bohemia, N.Y. 11716
ReezuBluation Request No. 90/000,355, Apr. 4, 1983.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,338,654, issued Jul.
6, 1982, Ser. No. 183,058, Sep. 20, 1980.
FUed Apr. 4, 1983, Ser. No. 183,058
Int. a^ F21V 29/00
\}S. a. 362—268
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION. IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1 and 2, having been finally determined to be unpat-
entable, are cancelled.
[1. A stage light comprising:
(a) a frame, having a forward direction towards which the
light is to be beamed, and a reward direction opposite the
forward direction,
(b) an incandescent lamp movably mounted within the frame
and located towards the rear of the frame,
(c) a reflector placed adjacent and to the rear of the lamp
and on the same movable mounting as the lamp having
general hemispherical coverage of the lamp generally
parabolic contours to capture and beam the light from the
rear of the lamp in the forward direction,
sos^
S04
(d) a variable aperture iris fixedly mounted to the frame and
positioned forward of the lamp to control the amount of
light from the lamp and reflector passed in the forward
direction by means of varying the aperture size,
(e) an objective lens system located forward of the iris to
accept and focus the light passed through the iris, and
(0 means for linking the lamp and reflector on the movable
mounting to the iris to automatically adjust the iris aper-
ture with the movement of the lamp and reflector for
nuuumum forward light transmission with each setting of
the lamp and reflector position. J
c
REISSUES
MARCH 20, 1984
Matter enclosed in heavy brackeu [ ] appears in the original patent but forms no part of this reissue specification; matter printed in italics
indicates additions made by reissue.
^
Re. 31,538
GOLF GLOVE
Anthony J. Antonious, 205 E. Joppa Rd., Unit 1603, Towson,
Md. 21204
Original No. 3,588,917, dated Jun. 29, 1971, Ser. No. 840,347,
Jul. 9, 1969. AppUcation for reissue May 4, 1983, Ser. No.
491,552
Int. a.J A41D 79/00
U.S. a. 2—161 A
cal control circuit for controlling said movable member, compris-
ing:
a remote-control box including a plurality of fluid valves and
means for operating said fluid valves;
a converter box including a plurality of pressure switches;
each of said pressure switches including movable means having
an electrical contact;
30 Claims
1. An athletic glove comprising.- a hollow flexible body
member having an access opening, a front portion and a back
[portions] portion, said front portion including a palm area and
-said-beck portion including a knuckle area and a palm heel area
located adjacent said knuckle area and between the front and
back portions; glove stalls for [at leastj four fingers and a
thumb of £the wearer] a wearer's hand projecting from the
body member; the back portion being provided with [anj a
deep vent portion in the access opening, the deep vent portion
extending from the [end ofj access opening in the body mem-
ber to approximately the [stallsj knuckle area; first elastic
means located in the back portion between the glove stalls and
the access opening [, J; [a] an elongated flexible fastening tab
extending from one edge of the deep vent portion of the access
opening; a complementary fastener located on the back portion
adjacent the opposite edge of the deep vent portion of the access
opening [on the back portion], said flexible fastening tab and
said complementary fastener in combination providing multi-
adjustable, separable hook and loop locking means for closing the
deep vent portion; the flexible fastening tab and complementary
fastener are located on opposite sides of the deep vent portion
adjacent the knuckle area and positioned between the thumb stall
and the palm heel area so that when the tab and complementary
fastener coact to span and close the deep vent portion, direct pull-
ing forces are applied to the back portion and the palm heel area
to attain and retain a taut fit across the back and palm portions of
the glove; and second elastic means in conjunction with the
back portion adjacent the flexible fastening tab.
Re. 31,539
REMOTE-CONTROL DEVICE FOR A CRANE
VtMBk P. Spalluto, PiscaUway, N J., assignor to Garden SUte
Engine A Equipment Co., Inc., South Plainfield, N J.
Original No. 4,307,810, dated Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 106,374,
Dec. 21, 1979. AppUcation for reissue Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No.
431,739
iBt a.3 B66C 13/42
U.S. a. 212—160 8 Claims
7. A remote-control assembly for controlling a crane or the like
having a movable member, wherein said crane includes an electri-
each of said pressure switches being formed by a separate hous-
ing for enclosing said movable means and said electrical
contact;
a plurality of fluid lines connecting said fluid valves to operate
the movable means in each of said pressure switches; and
a plurality of electric lines connecting the electrical contacts of
said pressure switches to said electrical control circuit on said
crane for operating said movable member.
Re. 31,540
SEPARATION OF HIGH GRADE MAGNETITE FROM
FLY ASH
Robert G. Aldrich, Maniius, N.Y., assignor to Halomet, Incor-
porated, Manlius, N.Y.
Original No. 4,319,988, dated Mar. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 146,697,
May 5, 1980. AppUcation for reissue May 26, 1982, Ser. No.
382,150
Int. a.3 B02C 23/14
VS. CI. 209—172.5 11 Claims
1. A high purity magnetite derived from fly ash which is the
product of coal combustion obtained by:
[(a) subjecting fly ash to dry magnetic separation;
(b) forming a slurry comprising the magnetic fraction ob-
tained from said dry separation;]
[(c)] (a) subjecting a slurry derived from fly ash [such
slurry] to a flrst wet magnetic separation;
[(d)] (b) screening the magnetic fraction from said flrst wet
magnetic separation;
[(c)] (c) subjecting the oversized particles to grinding;
[(0] (d) screening the products from said grinding step;
[(£)] (') subjecting the passed material from the screening
steps [(d) and (0] (b) and id) to a fmal wet magnetic
separation; and
[(h)] (/) separating a high purity magnetite from said final
wet separation.
935
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED MARCH 20, 1984
niustratknu for plant patents are usually in color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,207
ALSTROEMERU NAMED STAULAS
Jacob ?an Andel, Aalsmeer, Netherlands, assigDor to B. V.
HandeiskwekerU, M. C. van StaaTercn, Aalsmeer, Nethcr-
FUed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 416,841
lot a.i AOIH 5/00
VS. a. Pit.— 68 1 Clain
1. The new and distinct alstroemeria cultivar substantially as
herein shown and described, characterized by the distinctive
light purple coloration of the flowers with white coloring on
about the inner third of the inside petals, and by the sturdy and
relatively long peduncle for each of the flowers.
herein shown and described, characterized by the distinctive
bluish-purple coloring of the flowers, and by the light yellow
coloring toward the base of each of the inside petals and the
bright longitudinally extending pencil stripes on the base of
each inside petal to near the tip end thereof.
5,208
ALSTROEMERU CULTIVAR NAMED STALLUC
Jacob Tan Aodcl, Aalsmeer, Netherlands, assignor to M. C. B. V.
Handelskweke M. C. fan StaaTeren, Aalsmeer, Netherlands
FUed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 416^42
Int CL' AOIH 5/00
VJS. a. Pit— 68 1 Claim
1. A new and distinct alstroemeria cultivar substantially as
5,209
HIBISCUS PLANT NAMED "ANNE ARUNDEL"
Robert H. Darby, OaknoU, Apt. S^2, 701 Oaknoll Dr.. Iowa
City, Iowa 52240
FUed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 422,878
Int a.} AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit— 68 1 Claim
1. A new and distinctive cultivar of hibiscus substantially as
herein shown and described, having a pink flower of elegant
form and substance, a plant of great landscape value, blooming
profusely from midsummer to frost.
937
PATENTS
GRANTED MAR. 20, 1984
ERRATA
For Sec
CLASS PATENT NO.
502-169 4,438.019
502-341 4.438.021
436-053 4.438, 1 86
PATENTS
GRANTED MARCH 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
M37,191
IMPLANT OP CERAMIC MATERIAL
JoMpb M. fan der Zd, Zwaag, and Uaat dc Groot, Heemitede,
both of Netberlandt, aiiigiion to Delphi Dental IndoftriM
B.V^ Lc Hoorn, Netiwrlands
Filed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 364,975
Claiflu priority, appUcatioa Netherlands, Apr. 3, 1981,
8101674
Int. a.3 A61P l/OO
U.S. a. 3—1 5 Clalns
K^
1. A medical implant compatible with bone and similar tissue
and exhibiting improved strength when subjected to cyclic
bending and tensile stresses comprising a hollow cylindrical
ceramic body composed of a material selected from the group
consisting of alumina, sintered tricalcium phosphate, and bi-
oactive glass ceramic having a glass matrix containing calcium
phosphate, said body being longitudinally compressed by
means of a metallic member extending longitudinally through
a central portion thereof and by compression means affixed to
each end of said metallic member to provide a constant com-
pressive force sufficient to prestress the material of said body
wherein the compressive force exterted against said ceramic
body is lower than half the sum of cyclical tensile stress and
cyclical compressive stress to which the implant will be sub-
jected under normal conditions before implanting the same.
SiOj
B2OJ
NajO
CaO
P2O5
40-«0
8-1 S
15-30
8-30
0-8
•continued
K20
0-ao
Li20
0-10
MgO
0-9
AI2O) -»- ZfO} + NbsOs
0-8
U:03 + T«:05 + Y2O3
0-8 ind
Fj
0-15
the glass or glass-ceramic having substantially the same ther-
mal expansion coefficient as that of the metal core, wherein the
improvement comprises adding TiOj in an amount from 0.3 to
3 mole% to make up a total of 100 mol% glass composition to
■*«r"
regulate the degree of biological activity of the glass or glass-
ceramic represented by a saturated pH-value at the time when
the glass or glass-ceramic is immersed in a simulated physiolgi-
cal solution, with no substantial change of the thermal expan-
sion coefficient of the glass or glass-ceramic.
4,437,193
PROTRUSIO CUP
ladong Oh, 8S1 Lyndon St., South Pasadena, Calif. 91030
FUed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,024
Int a.) A61F 1/04
MS. a. 3—1.912 18 Claims
4,437,192
IMPLANTS OF BIOLOGICALLY ACTIVE GLASS OR
GLASS CERAMIC CONTAINING TITANU
Takamitsu Fi^in, Tokyo; Makoto Ogino; Michio Kariya, both of
Yokohama, and Takeo Ichimura, Tokyo, all of Japan, auign*
on to Nippon Kogakn K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Continnation of Ser. No. 270,988, Jun. 4, 1981, abandoned. This
appUcation Mar. 16, 1983, Ser. No. 476,041
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 11, 1980, 55-77841
Int a.i A61F l/OO. 1/24
UJS. G. 3—1.9 3 Claims
1. An improved implant comprising a biocompatible metal
core coated with a layer of a biologically active glass or glass-
ceramic having a composition consisting essentially of by
mol%:
1. A protrusio cup which can be implanted u a unit in the
acetabulum comprising:
an acetabular cup adapted to be received within the acetabu-
lum;
said acetabular cup having an inner concave bearing surface
of generally part spherical configuration defining a cavity
which opens at a mouth, said bearing surface being
adapted to receive a femoral head and slidably cooperate
therewith;
said acetabular cup having an outer surface;
a protrusio shell having a part spherical annular segment
receiving a circumferentially extending annular region of
the acetabular cup adjacent the mouth of the acetabular
cup and flange means adjacent one end of the annular
segment projecting generally radially of the annular seg-
939
940
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
ment and adapted to engage the bony region around the
acetabulum, the other end of the annular segment of the
protnuio shell being open with the acetabular cup extend-
ing through the opening;
means for mounting the protrusio shell on the acetabular cup
prior to implantation whereby the acetabular cup with the
protrusio shell mounted thereon can be implanted as a unit
in the aceubulum; and
said mounting means including a circumferentially extend-
ing groove formed in the outer surface and lying entirely
within the annular region of the acetabular cup which
receives at least a portion of the annular segment of the
protrusio shell.
standing wall for collecting and retaining bodily excre-
ment is formed,
(c) manually activated means positioned adjacent said exte-
rior surface of said material of said second end and ouUide
of said interior area of said ring-shaped portion of said
bedpan for producing gas for inflating said ring-shaped
portion of said bedpan, said inflating means generally
4437 194
INTRAOCULAR LENS ASSEMBLY
Gregory L. Haha, Montciair, Calif., aaiignor to Optical Radla-
tloB Corp., Aznaa, Calif.
FUed Feb. 25, 1982, Scr. No. 352,390
lat aj A61F 1/16. 1/24
MS. a. 3—13 30 ciaiiM
1. An intraocular lens assembly for implantation into the
human eye comprising:
(a) a lens body; and
(b) a pair of haptic positioners for contacting eye tissue to
thereby hold the lens body in position in the eye. each
such haptic positioner comprising a filament connected at
both ends to the edge of the lens body for forming a closed
loop extending away from the lens body, the closed loop
bemg narrower at the end adjacent the lens body and
wider at the end remote from the lens body, with the
remote end of one of such loops facing the remote end of
the other loop.
being positioned on said exterior surface of said second
end such that
said inflating means can be readily reached and manually
activated by a medical attendant after said bedpan is
positioned beneath said bedfast patient, and
gas released when said inflating means is manually acti-
vated flows into said ring-shaped portion to inflate the
same.
4,437,195
SELF-INFLATING BEDPAN
Ralph W. Mangels, 345 N. Arizona Atc., Chandler, Ariz. 85224
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,128
lot CV A61H 9/00
UAa4-456 ^Claims
1. A disposable, self-inflating bedpan comprising
(a) a closed, generally ring-shaped, flexible and inflauble
portion constructed from a fluid imprevious material to
produce a curved, pan-shaped configuration when said
portion is inflated, said ring-shaped portion enclosing and
defining an interior area and having
(i) a first end generally positioned under the sacrococcyg-
eal area of a bedfast patient, and
(ii) a second end generally positioned beneath and span-
ning any space between the upper leg areas of said
bedfast patient,
said material having an exterior surface area,
(b) a fluid impervious flexible panel connected to said ring-
shaped portion and spanning said interior area thereof
such that when said ring-shaped portion is inflated a self-
supporting fluid-tight reservoir having a continuous up-
4437 196
SUPPORT DEVICE FOR HELPING A PERSON TO GET
OUT OF A BATHTUB
Pierre A. G. Louis, 38, Rue Ginoux, 75015 Paris, France
FUed Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 369,285
aaims priority, appUcation France, Oct. 14, 1981, 81 19296:
Jan. 4, 1982, 82 00022
Int a.3 A47K 3/12
U.S. a 4-564 ,8 Claim.
1. A self-operated support device which helps a person to
get out of a bathtub, comprising essentially one water supply
jack (11) supplied under pressure with the supply water from
the bathtub and one handle (13) (or a harness) set in motion by
said jack, characterized in that said handle (13) (or harness) is
mounted on a lever (12) hinged towards one of its ends around
an axis (14), the routing of said lever (12) being controlled by
said jack which exerts force, at one end (19) thereof, on said
lever, the other jack end (17) being hinged thus allowing the
conjugated hinging motions of said lever (12) and said jack(ll).
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
941
4,437,197
FOLDING SOFA-BED MECHANISM
MelTio P. Spitz, Bcrerly HUls, CaUf., assignor to Kinematic
Industries, Inc., Whittier, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Scr. No. 264,269, May 18, 1981, Pat
No. 4,398,311. This appUcation No?. 18, 1981, Scr. No. 322,337
Int a.J A47C 17/14
U.S. CL 5—13 15 Claiou
actuating said reciprocating means so as to cause said toggle
link and said work support surface to move rearwardly.
GE
26
JIk ?<^tf ,//
28b
6
^ /o2a
1. In a folding sofa-bed construction including a bed frame
having a plurality of frame sections, one of which is an inner
head section and another an adjacent body section, said sec-
tions being pivotally interconnected in end-to-end relation for
selective unfolding movement to an extended coplanar bed-
forming position and folding movement to a folded retracted
sofa seat-forming position in which the body section is dis-
posed generally horizontally along the base of the sofa frame
and the head section extends generally upright in a space at the
rear of the sofa seat, and mechanism for supporting and con-
trolling the movements of said frame sections during move-
ment of the bed frame to said extended and retracted positions,
the improvement comprising:
an inner head section fabricated to provide two frame struc-
tures which are pivotally interconnected in end-to-end
relation and the outermost of said frame structures is
pivotally connected in end-to-end relation to the frame
structure of the adjacent body section.
4,437,198
METHOD OF ARTICULATING A WORK SUPPORTING
SURFACE
Alphonsc C. Kulik, Ipswich, Mau., assignor to USM Corpora-
tion, Farmington, Conn.
FUed Oct. 27, 1981, Scr. No. 315,414
Int a.3 A43D 23/04
U.S. a. 12—145 9 Claims
1. A method of articulating a work support surface in a
machine comprising:
attaching said work support surface to a first end of a sup-
port arm;
joumalling a first axis through a second end of said work
support arm and through a slot in a pair of frame members
secured to said machine;
emplacing an arrangement of toggle links with said first axis
and a fixed position second axis, said arrangement of
toggle links having a common axis connecting them;
extending an extended member from said first axis to a recip-
rocating means secured to a frame portion of said ma-
chine;
4,437,199
CARPET CLEANING DEVICE
Peter Wnlf, Ennepetal, and Annegret ScUecht Wnppertal, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Vorwerk k Co. Inter-
holding GmbH, Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,498
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 11,
1981, 3114753
Int a.3 A47L ;;//«
U.S. a. 15—49 R 6 Oaims
1. In a carpet cleaning device having a housing and driven
brush rollers, the rollers extending in both sides of a dnve
point, and wherein said rollers are replaceably seated on a shaft
in the housing, the device comprising:
a drive gear located at said drive point, and having claws
extending from both sides of a hub of said drive gear;
head pieces on both sides of said hub having bayonet slou
therein and being rotatable about said shaft;
said brush rollers including means engageable into said bayo-
net slots of said head pieces;
coupling bushings integrally extend from said head pieces
toward said drive gear,
ball bearings operatively disposed in said housing adjacent
said coupUng bushings, said bushings passing through said
ball bearing and having free ends; and wherein
said brush rollers and said hub of the drive gear are rotatable
about said shaft; and
said free ends of said coupling bushings having coupling
claws operatively engaging with said claws of said hub.
4,437,200
APPARATUS FOR CONTINUOUS DEHYDRATION
YoshUuun Sando, and Hiroshi Ishidoshiro, both of Wakayaau,
Japan, assignors to Sando Iron Works Co^ Ltd., Wakayana,
Japan
FUed Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347,958
ClaiBM priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 25, 1981, S6>26610
Int a.} F26B 13/04
U.S. a. 15—306 A 3 Claims
1. An apparatus for continuous dehydration of a cloth com-
prising two pairs of axially extending rubber rolls with the axes
thereof arranged in parallel relation, the rolls in each said pair
being pressed against one another and said pairs of rolls being
spaced apart an axially extending tubular seal plate with the
axis thereof in parallel relation with the axes of said pairs of
rolls and said aed plate is positioned between said two pain of
942
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
rubber rolls with the surface of said seal pUite disposed in
pressure contact with each of the rubber rolls of said pairs, said
seal plate is provided with a pair of oppositely disposed slits
extoiding in the axial direction of said seal plate and aligned
with the contact surfaces of said pairs of rubber rolls, and an
end plane seal plate blocking each of the end planes of each of
said rubber rolls so as to form in combination with said rubber
4a — a — oa.
rolls a closed chamber containing and enclosing said tubular
seal pUte from the exterior of said rubber rolls, and means for
mamtaining one of high pressure and reduced pressure within
said tubular seal pUte so that cloth passed in turn between the
contacting surfaces of one of said pairs of rolls, through the
shts m said seal plate and then between the contacting surfaces
of the other said pair of rolls can be dehydrated.
4,437^1
SOOT BLOWER
G«ld F. ZdewflU, Erie, Pa^ aadgnor to White ConsoUdated
ladutrica, Inc^ Cacrelaad, Ohio
Filed Not. 13, 1581, Ser. No. 321^6
iBt aj F23J 3/02
UAai$-316R 26CtoiM
1. In a soot blower of the long retracting type including a
travehng carriage rotaubly supporting a lance tube and mov-
able m an advancmg and retracting direction along a prcdeter-
mmed horizontal path of travel between a forwardmost work-
mg position and a rearwardmost non-working position, means
to impart a horizontal motion to the traveling carriage and a
routional motion to the lance tube, which comprises
(a) a motor means,
(b) horizontal drive means associated with said motor means
whereby operation of the motor means energizes the
horizontal drive means to advance and retract the travel-
mg carriage along the predetermined horizontal path of
travel, and
(c) a rotary drive means mounted on said traveling carriase
for routing said lance tube,
(d) said rotary drive means being mechanically coupled to
said motor means through said horizontal drive means
wherd>y operation of the motor means provides a driving
mput for the rotary drive means,
(e) said rotary drive means including independent control
means for controlling the rotational velocity and direction
of roution of the lance tube independently of the speed
and direction of travel of the traveling carriage.
4,43732
AUTOMAnC WALL CLEANING MACHINE
vTu!^?^!!^^'''!^'** ^■•^ ■"■••^ to MhwWihi
^i^ "^ ^^ '^°" EBglDeering Serrice Co.. Ltd.
and Gcnshi-Ryokn Daiko Co., Ltd.. aU of Tokyo, Japui
Filed Aug. 11, 19«1, Ser. No. 291.916
Int 0.3 A47L 11/202
UAai5-320 gcialnis
5. An automatic wall cleaning machine comprising:
a frame including means for spacing said frame from a wall-
a rotary brush rotatable about an axis fixed to said frame- '
a water sprayer fixed to said frame; and
a suction device fixed to said frame, said suction device
comprising:
(a) a disk,
(b) suction producing means,
(c) a suction conduit communicating one side of said disk
with said suction producing means, and
(d) a plurality of trapezoidal elastic suction leaves connected
to the periphery of said disk, each of said leaves having a
first relatively narrow end connected to the periphery of
said disk, a second relatively wide end longitudinally
opposite said first end and side walls connecting said ends,
wherein said side walls of adjacent ones of said leaves
contact one another, wherein said second ends of said
leaves he in a plane spaced from said disk,
whereby said one side of said dUk, said leaves and said wall
define a vacuum space when said machine is positioned
adjacent said wall.
8. The machine of claim 5 including:
a longitudinally extending reinforcing rib on each of said
leaves;
drive means for moving said frame; and
remote control means for changing the direction of move-
ment of said machine.
4^7.203
(XEANING HEAD FOR WALL WASHING MACHINES
John A. Wimer. 701 S. Loieme Are., Baltfaore. Md. 21224
Flkd Jan. 8. 1982, Ser. No. 386.429
Int CLJ A47L 7/00
VS. a 15-322 7 oatai
1. A cleaning head for a wall washing machine or the Uke
comprising a sheU, conduit means connected with the shell to
deliver cleaning and rinsing fiuids thereto selectively and to
withdraw such fluids in a continuing cycle of operation, a fluid
dirtnbution manifold extending longitiidinaUy of the sheU and
bemg within the sheU during normal operation and having one
end thereof pivotaUy connected with the sheU so that the
manifold is swingable with relation to the sheU to a sponge
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
943
insert release position, a retainer means on the shell to releas-
ably secure the other end of the manifold in said normal use
position within the shell substantially parallel to the longitudi-
nal axis of the cleaning head, a replaceable sponge insert for the
cleaning head of a size to engage within the shell and being
longitudinally recessed to receive said manifold below the
working face of the sponge insert and being bodily swingable
with the manifold to and from said release position, said re-
tainer means comprising a single removable fastener element
engageable with the other end of the manifold and with one
end wall of the shell, the manifold comprising a single tube
section having one end portion screw-threaded, the fastener
element comprising a screw engaging the screw-threads of the
manifold, and said one end of the manifold being shaped to
provide a transverse bight adapted for connection with said
conduit means within said shell, said bight forming the pivot
element for the manifold, and a coacting anchored pivot ele-
ment within the shell engaging the bight to maintain it on a
fixed pivot axis relative to the shell.
4.437.204
VACUUM CLEANER HOUSING
Wieland Giihne, Reniacbcid, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aiiignor to
Vorwerk A Co. Interholdhig GmbH, Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Mar. 22. 1982, Ser. No. 360,499
Clafans priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Apr. 11,
1981. 3114752
Int a.J A47L 9/00
VS. a. 15—325 6 dainu
1. In a vacuum cleaner housing having a handle mount, a
socket opposite said mount, and a covering which cushions
side surfaces of the housing, the improvement wherein said
covering comprises
a wall of semi-rigid material in the form of a cap, said cap
being placed on said housing from said socket, said wall
extending in self-supporting manner at a distance from
sidewalls of said housing, said cap being centered in form-
engaging manner on a cylindrical surface of the socket.
said cap having an edge zone on the handle mount side,
the improvement ftuther comprising
a supporting rib disposed peripherally about said housing,
and wherein
said cap is supported for longitudinal displacement in spaced
position by said supporting rib.
4.437.205
VACUUM CLEANER NOZZLE LIFT DEVICE
DaTid G. Kolaad, Sandstone TowaiUp, Pine Connty. Minn^
anlgnor to WUrlpool Corporation, Benton Harbor, Mteh.
FUed Mar. 11, 1982. Ser. No. 357,135
Int a.J A47L 5/34
VS. CI. 15—354 16 dalau
9. In a vacuum cleaner nozzle having a housing defining an
air suction passage, rear wheels for supporting a rear portion of
the housing for rolling movement of the nozzle on a subjacent
surface to be cleaned, and a U-shaped front wheel assembly
including a support having a rear bight pivotally mounted to
the housing, a pair of forwardly extending legs, and wheels
rotatively carried on a forward distal end portion of said legs
to roUingly engage the subjacent surface forwardly of said rear
wheels, an improved front-wheel height adjuster comprising:
a lifter movably connected to a leg of said support forwardly
of said bight;
means movably mounting said lifter to a portion of the hous-
ing; and
means movably carried by the housing for selectively mov-
ing said lifter including a user-operated ratchet means for
swinging said support about the axis of said bight to selec-
tively raise and lower the front wheels and thereby adjust
the angular disposition of the nozzle housing relative to
said subjacent surface, said ratchet means comprising a
lever pivotally mounted to the housing and having a foot
pedal actuation portion, a ratchet wheel rotatably
mounted to the housing and having notches and ratchet
teeth, a cam rotatable with said ratchet wheel, means
responsive to a depression of said foot pedal actuation
portion of the lever for selectively engaging said ratchet
teeth to advance the ratchet wheel a rotational step u an
incident of each depression of the foot pedal actuation
portion and a cam follower connected to said lifter for
selectively moving the lifter in accordance with the rota-
tional position of said cam.
4,437.206
MULTIPLE REUSABLE TUBULAR CASING. AND
APPARATUS AND PROCESS FOR USING SAME IN THE
PRODUCnON OF CASELESS (SiONLESS) PARBOIL OR
RAW SAUSAGES
Heinz Beekcr, Zurich, Switierland, aadgnor to Aahland Food
Technology Holdings SA.
Division of Ser. No. 201,155, Oct 27, 1980, Pat No. 4.371.554.
This application Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 428.020
Claiau priority. appUcatioa Switieriand, Nor. 9. 1979.
10067/79
Int 0.1 A22C 11/Oa 13/00
VS. a. 17—1 F 23 Claim
1. A sausage casing capable of multiple reuse for the produc-
tion of caseless sausage, the casing comprising a tube formed of
944
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
a porous polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) membrane, said
membrane havmg a microstnicture made up of nodes intercon-
nected by fibrils, said PTFE membrane having sufficient po-
rosity to permit venting radiaUy through said tube the steam
water vapor and other gaseous fluids released during process-
ing from the sausage present within said tube, said PTFE
membrane also having a surface texture to provide easy release
of the processed sausage from said tube following processing
while mamtaining the integrity of the sausage surface and the
sausage as a whole, the gaseous fluid flow paths through the
node and fibril microstnicture of said membrane limiting the
extrusion of solid or liquid sausage material through the mem-
brane dunng filling of said tube, said PTFE membrane also
having
associated with each of the cutting elements to provide
a predetermined force for holding each cutting element
m fixed position as the element is inserted in the meat to
be tenderized.
4,437,206
MEAT TENDERIZER
Jacob Sampson, 6138 N. Ctark St, Chicaso, DL 60660
Continuation-in-pul of Ser. No. 177,278, Ana. 11 1980 P«L
No. 4,3604>52. TTii. appUcatlon Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,518
iBt a.3 A22C 9/00
UA a 17-26 ^ Claim.
^'^fSlfl^J',^?"^"*^"^ ' to 650 seconds, as determined per
ASTM Method D-726-58 Method A using a 1.00 sq. inch
test area, 4.88 m. head of water, and represents the time in
seconds to flow 100 cm3 of air through the test area.
(u) a Bubble Pomt pressure of about 3 to 60 psig, as deter-
mmed per ASTM Method F-316.70, using anhydrous
methanol at 21' C. and a test area of 9.6 sq. cm., and
(u) a Water Entry Pressure of about 7 to 600 psig, as deter-
nuned by the following procedure: using the apparatus
employed in the MuUin's Burst Test (Fed. Std. 191
Method 5512) the pressure of water is raised to a test level'
over a period of approximately 10 seconds, held at that
evel for 30 seconds, and the lowest presence or absence of
iMkage IS visually determined, the Water Entry Pressure
bemg the pressure level at which leakage is determined to
occur.
1. A meat tenderizing machine comprising a pair of surfaces
m spaced parallel relation for passage of the meat therebe-
tween, each surface having a plurality of longitudinally spaced,
crosswise extendmg ribs projecting from the surface whereby
the meat is engaged therebetween during passage of the meat
between the surfaces, and means for moving the surfaces for
travel of the adjacent surfaces in the same direction but with
the nbs of one surface moving relative to the other to stretch
the meat dunng passage between the surfaces while being
engaged between said ribs, the surfaces comprising a pair of
rolls mounted for rotational movement, the rolls being in the
fomi of fnisto-conical members of substantially the same cone
angle, with the base of one fnisto-conical member positioned
alongside the apex of the other fnisto^onical member
whereby adjacent peripheral surfaces travel at substantially the
same RPMs.
4,437,207
MAGNEnC, FORCE-UMITED APPARATUS FOR
TENDERIZING MEAT
Henry M. Rots, The Uwn, Nokesrille, Va. 22123
FUed Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,835
Int a.J A22C 9/00
UA a. 17-25 „ ctai„„
4,437,209
STUFFING METHOD
Herve Duroyon, BeauTaii, Fruice, asiignor to Union Carbide
Corporation, Daabnry, Conn.
FUed Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,664
Int a.3 A22C U/OO
U.S.a.17-49 jcUdm.
1. An apparatus for tenderizing meat comprising
support means for supporting meat to be tenderized,
a purality of cutting elements comprising relatively thin
bladn with cuttmg edges for piercing and cutting meat,
means for mounting each of the cutting elemente for inde-
pendent, force-limited insertion into the meat,
said means for mounting comprising magnetic means
M*
1. In a method of stuffing flowable product using a stuffing
machme of the type compatible with a range of stuffing pres-
sures associated with fully soaked casing, and of the type
havmg a double clipper which constricts the stuffed product
by means of a pair of gates, separates the gates, then applies a
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
945
pair of clips, said method comprising the steps of stretching the
casing with an internal sizing means to esublish a holdback
force and to stretch the casing to about iu recommended
stuffed sircumference to thereby cause the casing to take a
temporary set, interposing a sealing ring near the end of the
stuffing horn and over the casing to prevent backup of flow-
able product, establishing a distance between the sealing ring
and the sizing means to establish a casing angle therebetween
which increases the holdback force to cause the stuffing of the
casing to a desired circumference, the improvement compris-
ing adapting said stuffing machine to stuff controllably pre-
moisturized casing by translating the sealing ring away from
the sizing ring after stuffing and during or before gathering to
reduce the casing holdback force as evidenced by reduced
casing angle, thereby to prevent pressure buildup beyond
accepublc limits in the stuffed product during said constricting
and separating.
4,437,210
BRIDGE TOP STOP FOR SLIDE FASTENERS
Takco Fukuroi, Uozu, Japan, assignor to Yoshlda Kogyo K.K.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,195
Claims priority, appUcatlon Japan, May 30, 1980. 55-
75372[U1
Int Q\? A44B 19/36
U A a 24-435 2 Claims
1. A bridge top stop for a slide fastener including a pair of
stringer tapes each provided with a reinforced edge for carry-
ing a row of cooperating interlocking fastener elements and a
slider reciprocable along the reinforced edges for taking the
fastener elements into and out of coupling engagement to open
and close the slide fastener, said bridge top stop comprising:
(a) a body adapted to be clamped to the reinforced edges
astride the stringer tapes;
(b) said body including a sidewall inwardly curved to define
a substantially inverted U-shaped opening receptive of the
front portion of the slider and a pair of plates connected at
one edge by said sidewall, each of said plates including a
pair of laterally spaced first and second wing portions
extending away from said opening, said first wing portions
and said second wing portions in confronting pair forming
jointly with said sidewall a pair of grooves for receiving
therein the reinforced edges, respectively;
(c) bulged rib projecting from said sidewall along said open-
ing and extending longitudinally along said sidewall; said
bulged rib defming a recess that grips said reinforced
edges of the stringer Upes to secure the bridge top stop
thereto, said bulged rib projecting progressively into said
U-shaped opening in a direction from ends to the mid-por-
tion of said sidewall to trace a crescent shape, and said
recess having a depth progressively increasing in a direc-
tion from ends to the mid-portion of said sidewall; and
(d) each confronting pair of said wing portions having ridges
disposed on the respective free ends thereof and extending
longitudinally along one of said grooves for clamping
engagement with one of the stringer Upes.
4,437,211
DEVICE FOR LOCKING TOGETHER STACKED
OBJECTS
WUU Dorpannd, Elae, Fed. Rep. of Gerauuy, assignor to Graaff
KG, Elie, Fed. Rep. of GcnMny
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 114,543, Jan. 23, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcatlon Jan. 1, 1981, Sw . No. 279,488
Claims priority, appUcatioa Fed. Rep. of Gcraany, Jnl. 5.
1979, 2927231
Int a.3 A44B 21/00
U.S. a. 24-287 7 QSaSatM
1. A device for locking together two stacked objecU, the
lower object having a plate at ite upper end and the upper
object having a plate at iu lower end, the two plates being in
superposed relation when the objectt are stacked and each
plate having a non-circular opening identical to and in registry
with the opening in the other plate, the locking device com-
prising:
(a) a housing, the top wall of the housing being the plate of
the lower object, the housing having a support surface
within it and two side walls, each side wall having a front
edge and one of the front edges having two pockets,
(b) a bolt within the housing movable vertically and rotat-
ably with respect to the housing, the bolt having a head
piece shaped to pass through the plate openings when the
bolt is in a first angular orientation but not when the bolt
is in a second angular orientation,
(c) a structural unit coaxial with the bolt and movable verti-
cally with the bolt, the structural unit being rotauble with
respect to the bolt and to the housing and having a sup-
porting shoulder which does not engage the support sur-
face of the housing when the structural unit is in a first
angular orientation but does engage the support surface
when the structural unit is in a second angular orienution,
(d) two levers for simultaneously moving the bolt and struc-
tural unit vertically between extreme upper and lower
positions, movement of the bolt and structural unit up-
wardly while they are in their first angular orienutions
passing the bolt head piece through the opening in the
plate of the lower object and elevating the supporting
shoulder above the housing support surface, one of said
levers being arranged to route the structural unit to iu
second angular orientation so that the supporting shoulder
engages the housing support surface to maintain the struc-
tural unit and bolt in their raised positions, and the other of
said levers being arranged to route the bolt to its second
angular orienution, after an upper object is stacked on the
lower object with the bolt head piece passing the opening
in the plate of the upper object, so as to lock the two
objecU together, and
(e) the two leven extending out of the housing between the
side walls thereof during vertical movement of the bolt
and structural unit, both levers being located with each of
the two pockeu in the housing when the bolt and struc-
tural unit are in each of their two extreme positions, re-
spectively, and also in their second angular orienutions.
946
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437^12
CLASP FOR GARMENTS, IN PARTICULAR FURS
jDcrgeo Stahl; Wilhelm Schmter, and Wilhdm Wegner, aU of
Fnnktnrt aoi Main, Fed. Rep. of GcmuBy, aMi^MNv to Gold-
Bad Silber-Schddcustalt Obcntdn Fnux Rdicfaaiwr, Idar-
ObcntdB, Fed. Rep. of Germaay
Filed No?. 17, 1981, Scr. No. 322,163
Claimi priority, appUcattoo Fed. Rep. of Gcnnany, Dec. 1,
Int. CLi A44B IS/Oa 1/18
UAa24-«« MCIatas
supported by and between both rotor supports, and means
including a chuck forming part of the turbine-rotor support
means for engaging and selectively partially routing a turbine
rotor supported thereby; said tool-supporting means compris-
mg a main slide and fued horizontal ways for iu travel parallel
to the rotor axis, a secondary sUde carried by said main slide
and guided for horizontal action normal to the rotor axis,
riveting means including an orbital riveting head carried by
1. Hook element of a clasp for garments, in particular furs,
which IS used in conjunction with an eye element having an
eye ring, the hook element consisting of:
(a) a base plate having holes therein for fastening to a gar-
ment;
(b) a narrow integral ridge extending in the vertical axial
direction and mounted on base plate (a), base plate (a) and
narrow integral ridge (b) having a fued positional rela-
tionship;
(c) a hold-down arm, which is elastically movable in a direc-
tion normal to base plate (a), connected on one end to
elongated narrow integral ridge (b) so as to form a pas-
sageway between narrow integral ridge (b) and hold-
down arm (c);
(d) a first recess and a second recess provided in narrow
integral ridge (b), the first and second recesses facing onto
the passageway between narrow integral ridge (b) and
hold-down arm (c), a locking web being formed by the
portion of narrow integral ridge (b) between the end
thereof and the first recess, the second recess being posi-
tioned further in the passageway than the first recess and
being located in the region of narrow integral ridge (b) at
the connection between hold-down arm (c) and narrow
integral ridge (b), a positioning web being formed by the
portion of narrow integral ridge (b) where the second
recess is located; and
(e) an entrance slit provided in the passageway between
hold-down arm (c) and the locking web,
the hook element, when engaged in the passageway, can slide
between the first and second recesses and iU motion is stopped
by the locking web or the positioning web depending upon its
direction of movement.
said second slide and oriented normal to the rotor axis, an
induction-heating element and movable support therefor such
that said element may be positioned in and out of induction-
heating relation with a blade tenon in advance of a tenon-form-
mg cycle of riveting-head action on the blade tenon, and a tie
rod for selectively connecting said secondary slide to the
cross-brace rail on a transverse alignment close to but offset
from the rotor axis.
4,437,214
NON.MACHINING METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A
SOUD-BOTTOMED OR INTERNALLY FLANGED
BEARING RACE
Armin Olachewski, SchweinAirt; Manfred Brandcnatein, Ens-
■enhcim; Lothar Walter, SchweinAirt; Peter Horling, Main-
berg; Hermann Hetterich, Heidenfeld, and Heinrich Kunkel,
SchweinAirt, all of Fed. Rep. of Gcnnany, aaiignon to SKF
Kngeliagerfabriken GmbH, SchweinAirt, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,873
Clainu priority, application Fed. Rep. of Gcrmuy, Jan. 31.
1981, 3103343 *
Int a.J B21K 1/04
UA a. 29-149.5 DP SOaima
8
^s^T^^Rq
4,437,213
MEANS FOR TENON-FORMING A SHROUD TO A
TURBINE ROTOR
In W. Reeae, Trenton, and Nello B. Coapapmcd, Yardrille,
both of NJ., aMignon to Tranaamcrica DeLa?al lac, Prince-
ton, N J.
Filed Aog. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 409,600
Int CL^ B23P 23/04
UAa.29-33K 24Claima
1. A tenon-forming machine for peening a blade tenon to
secure a shroud band to a bladed turbine rotor, comprising
means for supporting a turbine rotor on a horizontal axis at two
locations ofTset on opposite axial sides of the axial region of a
rotor stage at which shroud bands are to be secured to adjacent
blades of the stage, tool-supporting means on one Uiterally
offset side of the horizontal axis of turbine-rotor support, an
elongate horizontally oriented cross-brace rail on the other
lateral side of the horizontal axis of turbine-rotor support and
1. A method for the non-machining manufacturing a bearing
race comprising the steps of: punching a flat roundel from band
material, forming by non-machine working a concentric annu-
lar groove into one of the two planar surfaces of the roundel,
the opposite planar surface of the roundel being supported on
a flat supporting surface and deep drawing the roundel into a
bearing race having a floor section, in a die, with a punch
concentricaUy engaging with iU end face that portion of the
roundel's planar surface encompassed by the annular groove,
said punch having a punch diameter at iU end face equal to or
larger than the diameter of the radially inner edge and smaller
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
•if
than the diameter of the radially outer edge of the annular
groove.
4^7,215
THRUST BEARING WITH TAPERED LANDS
SUfahiro None, Toyota; Tatmhiko Foknoka, Aiehi, and
HidMdd Soginra, Okaaki, aU of Japan, aadgnort to Taiho
Kosyo Co., Ltd., Aichl, Japu
Diriaion of Ser. No. 204,521, No?. 6, 1980, Pat No. 4,326,758.
niia application Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,646
Claims priority, appUcation Japwi, Dec. 25, 1979, 54-167602
Int a? B21D 53/10
MS, a 29-149.5 R 3 Qaina
16 14
II 13
1. A method of producing a thrust bearing having tapered
lands formed in a bearing face of said bearing, comprising the
steps of:
punching a half-completed bearing part from a metallic plate
material by a press working, said half-completed bearing
part having, on both sides thereof, annular bearing faces
extending around a central bore for receiving therein a
rotating shaft, said half-completed bearing part further
having a plurality of said Upered lands disposed in at least
either one of said annular bearing faces;
applying a hardening treatment to said bearing faces for
hardening surfaces of said tapered lands;
lapping upper portions of said Upered lands for forming, in
said upper portions, flat planes lying on an equal plane;
and
buffing said tapered lands having flat planes toward a prede-
termined circumferential direction so that said flat planes
are gently angled and all acute angle comers of said U-
pered lands are rounded.
4,437,216
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A HEAT EXCHANGER
FOR COOLING AND HEATING PURPOSES
Kari G. Jonason, VMsteria, Sweden, assignor to Granges Metall-
▼erken Akticbolag, Vitoteris, Sweden
per No. PCr/SE79/00153, 9 371 Date Mar. 12, 1980, S 102(e)
Date Mar. 12, 1980, PCT Pnb. No. WO80/00228, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 21, 1980
PCT Filed JnL 11, 1979, Scr. No. 190,886
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jul. 13, 1978, 7807818
Int a^ B23P 15/26
U.S. CL 29— 157J A 7 Claims
an advancing path, said method comprising: advancing a line
of tubes alternating with surface-enlarging means through a
heating zone and a cooling zone utilizing a first drive means
acting in an advancing direction, uniting said tubes and said
surface-enlarging means in said heating and cooling zones, and
discharging united tube element pieces and surface-enlarging
means from the cooling zone by means of a second drive,
which is moved reciprocally as a unit in the path, the second
drive means exerting a force on the line of tubes and surface-
enlarging means acting opposite to the advancing direction so
as to subject the line to a compressive force during advance of
the line through the heating zone and the cooling zone, said
metal strips having peaks brought into intimate contact with
said tubes by heating during passage through the heating zone
and by the compressive force.
4,437,217
COMPOSITE CERAMIC HEAT EXCHANGE TUBE
Paul G. Lallaye; John W. BJeridic, and Robert A. Penty, aU of
Cape Elizabeth, Me., assignors to Hague International,
Portland, Me.
Dirision of Ser. No. 150 J88, May 19, 1980, Pat No. 4,332,295.
This appUcation Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,650
Int a.J B23P 15/26
U.S. a. 29—157.4 8 Claims
1. A method of fabricating a composite heat exchange tube
having a porous thermal shock resistant ceramic main tube
body, said method comprising the steps of, providing ceramic
end inserts which are to form a seal at each end of the heat
exchange tube and which are made of a more dense ceramic
material than the main tube body, disposing the inseru in
respective ends of the main tube body and depositing a thin
ceramic liner within the main tube body, which liner is substan-
tially impervious to fluids flowing within the tube at pressures
at least up to 500 p.s.i.
4,437,218
PORTABLE OIL WELL TURBINE COLLAR REMOVING
DEVICE
Whetstine B. Pridy, 2762 Blume, Los Alamitos, Calif. 90720
FUed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 372,211
Int CLi B23P 19/04
U.S. a. 29—240 10 Claims
1 1 3T II II It V
it U I? li H
^r?
1. A method of manufacturing heat exchangers comprising
tubes with substantially rectangular cross-section alternating
with intermediate surface-enlarging means in the form of
pleated thin metal strips, which are joined to each other by
heating under mutual compression, the starting material used
being tube element pieces and surface-enlarging means of
predetermined length, the tube element pieces and surface-
enlarging means mutually engaging with adjacent long sides in
1. An apparatus that includes an elongate chassis having
forward and rearward ends onto which a length of oil well
tubing having a collar secured on a first threaded end thereof
may be positioned to have said collar removed therefrom, said
removed collar transported to said rearward end of said chassis
if found suiuble for future use, said collar removably gripped
on said rearward end and moved forwardly as said length of
tubing is routed to screw said collar on a second threaded end
of said tubing, with said length of tubing then removed from
said apparatus, said apparatus including:
a. a pair of longitudinally spaced transverse crou pieces
supported on said chassis;
948
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
b. a first pair of transvene arms that extend outwardly from
said chassis onto which arms said length of oil well tubing
with said collar on said first end may be disposed to be
rolled towards said chassis;
c. first means for receiving said length of tubing with said
collar on said first end from said first pair of arms and
lowering said length of tubing to rest on said pair of cross
pieces where it may be rolled to a centered longitudinally
extending position thereon;
d. second means for raising said length of tubing with said
collar on said first end to a predetermined elevation above
said chassis, with said collar adjacent said forward end of
said chassis;
e. third means for rotating said length of tubing at said prede-
termined elevation;
f. fourth means for removably holding said collar stationary
as said length of tubing is rotated at said predetermined
elevation to unscrew said collar from said first threaded
end;
g. fifth means for transporting said collar that has been
removed from said length of tubing to said rearward end
of said chassis;
h. sixth means for removably holding said collar stationary
in a reversed position adjacent said rearward end of said
chassis, said sixth means supported on said chassis and
longitudinally movable thereon, said collar being screwed
onto said second threaded end when said length of tubing
is rotated and said sixth means is moved forwardly;
i. seventh means for raising said length of tubing with said
collar on said second threaded end thereof to a first ele-
vated position;
j. a pair of second transverse arms that extend outwardly
from said chassis in a direction opposite to said first pair of
arms, said second pair of arms receiving said length of
tubing from said seventh means and so supporting said
length of tubing with said collar on said second end that
said length of tubing may be rolled outwardly on said
second pair of arms to a position remote from said appara-
tus, with said first, second, third and seventh means at
least being power operated;
k. power means for supplying power to said first, second,
third and seventh means; and
1. manually operated control means for independently sup-
plying power from said power means to said first, second,
third and seventh means to permit them to operate inde-
pendently of one another.
tuted of a hub having at least two trunnions, a roller in the form
of a spherical segment mounted on each trunnion, a substan-
tially fiat ring having sides, and of slightly elastically deform-
able material, said ring having a central opening and at least
two inwardly opening recesses bordering said central opening
and defmed by the material of the ring, said central opening
and recesses comprising a space to receive the assembled inte-
rior universal joint assembly within the ring, and seat means in
each recess for engaging said rollers and maintaining said
rollers in an assembled position on the trunnions, said seat
means in each recess comprising, a pair of generally symmetri-
cal elastically deformable spaced apart tongues connected to
the material of the ring in the recess, each tongue having a
concave interior surface, said concave surfaces facing toward
each other to receive and engage a roller therebetween, said
tongues projecting axially of the ring beyond the sides of the
ring and terminating at ends spaced apart a distance slightly
less than a diameter of the spherical segment of a roller so that
the assembled interior assembly of the universal joint can be
mounted in the retainer and can be removed from the retainer
by moving the retainer axially relative to the assembled inte-
rior assembly of the universal joint.
4,437^20
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISMOUNTING
TRUNNION BEARINGS
OrM A. Gregory, 5334 N. Henry Bhd., Stockbridge, Ga. 30281
FUed Jul. 19, 1982, Scr. No. 399,708
Int. a.3 B23P 19/00
U A a. 29-426.5 5 cUdma
4,437,219
APPARATUS FOR RETAINING AND INSTALLING AN
INTERIOR ASSEMBLY OF A UNIVERSAL JOINT
JacqiMi Dore, Colombes, France, aasignor to Societe Anonyme
Automobiles Otroen and Societe Anonyme Automobiles
Peugeot, both of Paris, France
FUed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,308
Claims priority, appUcation France, Dec. 20, 1979, 79 31323
Int. C\? B23Q 1/00
U.S. a. 29—283 5 Claims
1. A retainer for the interior assembly of sliding universal
joinu of the type which includes an interior element consti-
3. Apparatus for dismounting a trunnion bearing from a
universal joint of the type having a crossed-pin member or
spider to each pin of which member a yoke is mounted for
pivotal movement by means of trunnion bearings having outer
races secured to the arms of each yoke overlaying the ends of
the pins and with each yoke arm having a pair of threaded
holes straddling a pin of the crossed-pin member in which bolts
may be threaded in securing the trunnion bearing race thereto,
and with the apparatus comprising, in combination, a plate to
be placed against a proximal trunnion bearing on one yoke
with an inner pair of plate holes sized and located for bolts to
be passed therethrough and threaded into the pair of threaded
holes of the proximal arm of the one yoke and with a pair of
outer threaded plate holes located so as to be aligned with the
arms of the other yoke, and a pair of threaded dismounting
bolts of a length more than sufficient to be threaded into said
plate outer holes with the plate placed against the proximal
trunnion bearing and into engagement with the other yoke
arms, whereby the apparatus need be mounted to only one side
of a universal joint in dismounting a trunnion bearing from the
other joint side by threading the dismounting bolts into the
plate against the other yoke arms until the trunnion bearing on
the one yoke arm distal the plate has been urged at least par-
tially therefrom.
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
949
4,437,221
PROCESS FOR INSERTING POINTS IN A MANDREL
Bruno Bompard, and Alain Bruyere, both of Lyons, France,
assignors to Commissariat a I'Energie Atomiqe, Paris and
Societe J. Brochier A Fils, ViUeurbanne, both of, France
FUed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,755
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jul. 16, 1981, 81 13868
Int. CV B23P 19/00
U A a. 29-429 4 Claims
1. A process for the inseriion of points to a supporting man-
drel made at least in part form from a material able to receive
the pointe by direct insertion under pressure in order to form
rows of points aligned in accordance with the generatrixes of
the mandrel, wherein it comprises rotating step by step the
supporting mandrel, simultaneously making by means of a
single working head a perforation for receiving a point and the
insertion of a point in a perforation made beforehand in the
same row and producing a given relative displacement parallel
to the closet generatrix of the mandrel between the working
head and the mandrel, at least once every complete revolution
of the mandrel.
4,437,222
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING TAPE GUIDES FOR
RECORDING AND/OR REPRODUCING APPARATUS
Yozaburo Umehara, 2-8'6, ShakiUUmachi, Nerima*ku, Tokyo,
Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 76,827, Sep. 19, 1979,
abandoned, which is a dirision of Ser. No. 940,198, Sep. 7, 1978,
Pat. No. 4,228,940. This appUcation Aug. 18, 1981, Scr. No.
293,991
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 14, 1977, 52>
124344[U]; Mar. 3, 1978, 53-24344
Int a.i B22D 11/126
U.S. a. 29—527.4 15 Claims
fisi'SK'^.??;-"""' •'•'^
(b) applying a surface layer of nonmagnetic hard material to
said base body along said cylindrical surface;
(c) forming microscopic tips on said layer with the pattern of
said tips extending substantially linearly in a direction
transverse to the axial direction of said body so that said
layer will have a surface roughness of 0.2 to 0.6 ^Rmax;
and
(d) fine-finishing the microscopic tips to round the same
while substantially maintaining said surface roughneu.
4,437,223
APPARATUS FOR DEBANDING COILED STRIP
Andrew J. Petros, Oakdale, Pa., assignor to Masta Machine
Company, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 354,968
Int. a. 5 B23P 23/00; B23C 1/00
U.S. a. 29-564J 17 claims
1. An apparatus for removing tightly encircling bands from
the peripherics of coils of material, such as, coils of metallic
rolled strip comprising:
support means for supporting a banded coil,
a frame having a first pinch roll transversely engageable
with a band on a banded coil supported on said support
means,
band severing means adjacent one side of said roll and in-
cluding a cutting instrument with means for causing said
cutting instrument to engage the band and sever it,
pinch means on said frame movable into engagement with
said roll from said one side to pinch a severed band end
therebetween, and
rotary drive means to route said roll such that a band
pinched between said roll and said pinch means is fed
outwardly away from a coil from which the band was
severed.
suiGf tLiryt
4,437,224
TOOL CHANGER FOR A REVOLVING CUTTING PRESS
Walter Bredow, and Gerhard Otto, both of Alfeld, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, aasignors to C. Behrens AG, Alfeld, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,151
CUdms priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 15,
1980,3005667
Int. a.J B23Q 3/155
U.S. a. 29—568 13 n«t—
1. In a revolving press, a combination comprising a press
frame; a turntable tumably mounted on said preu frame; tool
holder means adapted to carry a punch, said tool holder means
, . ^. . , , ^ • . ... having an axis and being mounted in an opening of the tumta-
I. A method of manufacturing a tape guide for Upe cassette We for reciprocation Jfong said axis wlSe bdng prevented
of a recordmg or reproducmg apparatus, compnsmg the steps from turning about said axis and movable with the turntable
\ . , . between a working and an exchange position; means connected
(a) forming a base body of nonmagnetic material having a to said press frame above said tumuble for releasably engaging
cylindrical surface; uid tool holder means and means for moving the latter, when
950
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
in said exchange position, in direction of said axis into or out of
said opening; said tool holder means including at an upper end
thereof a tool holder head, said moving means comprising a
guide member operatively connected to said press frame and
having an axis parallel with said axis of the tool holder means
in the exchange position of the latter, said guide member being
movable along its axis while being prevented from turning
semiconductor layer portion not implanted with said
material is single crystallized with a seed of said single
crystalline insulation substrate and at the same time the
non-single crystalline semiconductor layer portion im-
planted with said material is rendered an insulation mate-
rial.
> '27b
4,437.225
METHOD OF FORMING SOS DEVICES BY SELECTIVE
LASER TREATMENT AND REACTIVE FORMATION OF
ISOLATION REGIONS
YoaUUia Mizntanl, Tokyo, Japan, aaiigDor to Tokyo ShflMora
DeaU Kaboahiki Kaisha, Japu
FUed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,583
daims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 28, 1981, 56-11086
iBt CI.3 HOIL 21/263. 21/26
U.S. a 29-576 B % Ctaimi
M I I t,M I
i
^/>//».
V
1. A method of fabricating semiconductor devices compris-
ing the steps of:
forming a non-single crystalline semiconductor layer on a
single crystalline insulation substrate,
ion-implanting selectively material, which reacts with said
semiconductor layer to form insulating material, into said
semiconductor layer; and
^>plying an energy radiation or a heat treatment to said
semiconductor layer, whereby the non-single crystalline
4,437,226
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING NPN TYPE LATERAL
TRANSISTOR WITH MINIMAL SUBSTRATE
OPERATION INTERFERENCE
Sidney L Soclof, San Gabriel, Calif., aadgnor to RockweU Inter-
national CorporatioB, El Scgnndo, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 239,749, Mar. 2, 1981. This application Dae.
16, 1982, Ser. No. 450,309
Int CL' HOIL 21/31
MS. a 29-577 R i cWb
about the same and carrying at an end thereof facing said tool
holder head gripping means movable between a position en-
gaging said tool holder head and a releasing position; and
support means mounted on said press frame and movable in a
direction transverse to said axis of said tool holder means for
supporting the latter when said gripping means is in said releas-
ing position.
1. A method for forming an array of sub-micron dimen-
sioned NPN-type hiteral transistors on a substrate doped P-
type, wherein each transistor is formed comprising the follow-
ing steps:
masking the substrate to outline a pair of boundary regions
for each semi-array of active regions to comprise a transis-
tor;
slotting the substrate in said boundary regions to a given
depth to form spaced apart slots removing any masking
material from the substrate;
angle evaporating etch resist to cover the active regions of
the substrate between slots; and the edges of said slots to
a depth less than said given depth by way of the slots;
etching away the substrate below said depth less than the
given depth sufficiently to separate the semi-arrays of
active regions from the substrate except at spaced apart
locations therealong;
oxidizing the substrate to fill in the portions etched away and
the slots;
slotting the substrate orthogonally to the first mentioned
slots to provide second slots with orthogonal pairs of slots
defuiing active regions for the respective transistors;
doping the regions defined by orthogonal pairs of slots P-t-
through a single corresponding edge of each of the second
slots and driving in the P+ doping;
doping of said last mentioned regions through both edges of
each slot of said second slots N-t- and driving in the N-(-
doping;
oxidizing the substrate to completely isolate said active
regions from the substrate; and,
establishing electrical connections to the outer N-|- regions
and inner P+P region.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
931
4,437,227
METHOD OF MAKING IMPROVED TUNNEL
BARRIERS FOR SUPERCONDUCIING J08EPHS0N
JUNCnON DEVICES
WUIiaa E. FUuBory, Norriatoim; Richard M. Josephs, WiUow
Gfore; Barry F. Stda, Dreahen Taing^^Mw Wang, Norria-
town, tad Peter L. Young, North Wales, aU of Pa., aaaipiori
to Sparry Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 437,386
Int a.i HOIL 39/22
U.S. CL 29—589 14 Claims
M 23 »
JlM ddUmkwk
yiAgy
has a good wettability to said gUss material of low melting
point and exhibits a bonding strength in cooperation with said
glass material, which strength is greater than that of said sili-
con pellet, on a lower surface of said silicon pellet to which
said glass material of low melting point is to adhere.
1. The method of manufacturing electrodes and a tunnel
barrier junction therebetween for Josephson superconducting
devices without removing the devices in process from a vac-
uum chamber, comprising the steps of:
providing an insulating substrate in a vacuum chamber,
evaporating and depositing on said substrate a base electrode
layer of superconducting material comprising lead,
depositing over the exposed surface of said base electrode
layer a tunnel barrier layer,
evaporating and depositing on top of said tunnel barrier
layer the counter electrode layer of superconducting
materia] comprising lead to complete two electrodes and a
tunnel barrier layer therebetween without removing the
substrate from said vacuum chamber,
said counter electrode layer being deposited in the presence
of an inert gas atmosphere in said vacuum chamber at a
partial vacuum preuure to provide a counter electrode
Uyer which is vertically conductive and transversely
non-conductive,
removing said substrate from said vacuum chamber,
providing a lift-ofT photoresist pattern on top of said counter
electrode layer which defines the area of said counter
electrode over the tunnel barrier junction of said Joseph-
son superconducting devices,
returning said substrate to said vacuum chamber,
depositing an insulating layer on top of said counter elec-
trode layer and said lift-off photoresist pattern,
removing said substrate from said vacuum chamber,
removing said lift-off pattern leaving areas of said counter
electrode over said tunnel barrier junction exposed,
providing a photoresist pattern comprising an open aperture
over portions of said counter electrode layer which is
over said tunnel barrier junctions,
returning said substrate to said vacuum chamber, and
depositing a conductive path in said open aperture of said
photoresist pattern to provide a Josephson junction super-
conducting device.
4^7,228
METHOD OF MOUNTING A SIUCON PELLET ON A
CERAMIC SUBSTRATE
Hidehani Yanamoto, Tokyo, and Hiroshi Tauneao, Sayama,
both of Japan, aaaigBon to Hitaehi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Flkd Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,863
ClaiflM priority, appUcation Japu, Oct 1, 1980, 55-135869
Int a.} HOIL 21/36
U.S. a. 29—590 7 Oain
7. In a method of manufacturing a semiconductor device in
which a silicon pellet is bonded to an insulation substrate by
means of a gUus material of a low melting point, the improve-
ment comprising forming an adhesion rdnforcing film which
4,437,229
METHODS OF MARKING AND ELECTRICALLY
IDENTIFYING AN ARTICLE
Joel R. Bitler, AUentown; Michael W. Bodnar. Macungie; Ray-
mond H. Booth, Walnutport; Daniel J. Roman, Bethlehem;
Fred J. Schneider, Northampton; Philip W. Seltzer, Bethle-
hem, and George F. Wilkinson, Jr., Northampton, all of Pa.,
assignon to Weitera Electric Company, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Dirision of Ser. No. 101,042, Dec. 6, 1979, Pat. No. 4,344,064.
This appUcation May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,129
Int a^ GOIR 77/00
U.S. a 29—593 3 Claims
1. A method of making electronic articles, said articles in-
cluding substrates and circuit elements supported by such
substrates, wherein said circuit elements are tested and said
articles are selectively grouped and marked based on the out-
come of such tests, which comprises:
forming at least one distinct resistive element of a first rela-
tively low resistive value on each such substrate, said at
least one distinct resistive element being functionally
separate from any such circuit elemenu, said first resistive
value of said at least one resistive element identifying such
article as one of a first group of at leut two groups of said
articles as may be determined by said tesU;
testing said articles;
applying energy to at least one such distinct resistive ele-
ment on the substrate of any of said tested articles with
respect to which such testing has determined that such
articles are not of such first group, such energy altering
said first resistive value to a second relatively high resis-
tive value with respect to such first resistive value; and
prior to further steps involving a selective treatment of the
articles of such first group, measuring the resistive value
of such at leut one distinct resistive element of such tested
articles to detormine whether such articles ara of such first
group of articles.
952
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,230 4.437J31
MOTOR HAVING EVSULATIONLESS ARMATURE METHOD OF MAKING AN ELECTROCHEMICAL CELL
u n .^ ^ . ^^?fECnONS HAVING A SAFETY VENT CLOSURE
M-S*?"*^. S?°l?^°' asiignor to AlUed Corporation, Ronald L. Zupandc, Parma Heights, Ohio, anignor to Union
Morris Townahip, Morris County, N J. Carbide Corporation, Danbnry. Conn.
FUed JiJ/'' lf«; Ser No^399,665 DiTision of Ser. No. 190,990, Sep. 26, 1980, Pat No. 4^29,405.
IT « n ^o_«», ^ ^ . ^ ™* tppUcation Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 344,944
UJ». CI. 29— 597 6 Claims Int a.^ HOIM 2/72
UA a. 29-623 J 3 Claims
1. A method of manufacturing a rotor for a dynamoelectric
machine, comprising the steps of:
providing an armature shaft having a slotted armature core
mounted thereto;
placing a plurality of conductive windings in slots of said
slotted armature to form at least a two-layer winding, each
said slot containing at least an upper conductor and a
lower conductor, each said upper conductor having an
upper terminal portion and each said lower conductor
having a lower terminal portion, said upper terminal por-
tion and said lower terminal portion bdng disposed adja-
cent a first end of said armature shaft;
bending each said lower terminal portion toward said shaft
at a first portion adjacent said armature core and away
from said shaft at a second portion adjacent a free end of
said lower terminal to form a first body portion directed
towards said shaft and a first end portion parallel to said
shaft;
bending each said upper terminal portion away from said
shaft at a third portion adjacent a free end of said upper
terminal portion and bending each said upper terminal
portion towards said shaft at a fourth portion adjacent said
third portion and distal to said armature core to form a
second body portion parallel to said shaft, a fu^t transition
portion directed toward said shaft, and a second end
portion parallel to said shaft;
installing a commutator on said armature shaft adjacent said
first end of said shaft;
urging each said second end portion radially towards said
shaft to force each said second end portion against each
said first end portion and to force each said first end por-
tion against said commutator, each said first body portion
and each said second body portion defining a gap therebe-
tween; and
bonding said second end portion to said first end portion and
bonding said first end portion to said commutator;
whereby said rotor may be manufactured without the provi-
sion of an insulating body between said upper terminal
portion and said lower terminal portion.
1. A method for assembling an electrochemical cell having a
safety vent closure which comprises the steps:
(a) providing a metal cell housing comprising a container
having an open end, a closed end and an upstanding cir-
cumference;
(b) inserting a cathode collector shell into said container,
said cathode collector being in contact with the inner
upstanding circumference of the container thereby adapt-
ing the container as the positive terminal of the cell;
(c) disposing a separator within and in contact with the inner
circumference of the cathode collector shell;
(d) inserting a multimember anode comprised of a first half-
cylindrical annular member and a second half-cylindrical
annular member, each of said members have an inert
electrically conductive metal screen disposed against their
inner surface wall, said first and second cylindrical half
annular members being disposed in an opposing fashion
such that an axial cavity is formed therebetween;
(e) disposing an electrically conductive spring strip into the
axial cavity between the screen-backed anode members
such that said strip resiliently biases the two anode mem-
bers via said strip so as to provide a substantially uniform
and continuous pressure contact over the inner wall of the
anode members;
(0 securing a fu^t metal cover over the open end of said
housing, said first cover having at least one vent orifice;
(g) securing a second metal cover to the open end of the
cell's housing and placing said second metal cover over
said first metal cover wherein at least one metal tubular
member is secured to said second cover and surrounds the
vent orifice defined in said first cover;
(h) feeding the liquid cathode/electrolyte of the cell through
the vent orifice into the housing;
(i) force fitting a deformable member into the vent orifice
thereby providing a fluid-tight seal over said vent orifice;
and
(j) placing a layer of sealant having adhesion to metal within
said metal tubular member over the deformable member
and the area of the first metal cover defining the vent
orifice and surrounded by the tubular member.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
953
4,437,232
ELECTRONIC PARTS MOUNTING APPARATUS
Shigeni Araki, Katano; Yasuo Taki, Hirakata; Kazuhiro Mori;
Yosiiihiko Misawa, both of Katano, and Souhei Taaaka,
Hirakata, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushiu Electric In-
dustrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
DivUion of Ser. No. 115,279, Jan. 25, 1980, Pat. No. 4,327,482.
This application Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351.312
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 25, 1979, 54-7764
Int. a.} H05K 3/34. 13/04
VS. CI. 29—740 1 Claim
1. An apparatus for carrying and placing components onto a
board or the like, comprising:
a body frame fixed at a position on a plane;
a rod means movably supported on said body frame for
movement in vertical and horizontal directions with re-
spect to the plane;
a first movable means connected to said rod means for mov-
ing said rod means in the vertical direction with respect to
the plane;
a second movable means connected to said rod means for
moving said rod means in the horizontal direction with
respect to the plane;
a suction tool provided at a lower end of said rod means for
picking up a component;
a suction means connected to said suction tool for supplying
a vacuum to said suction tool when said suction tool is
carrying a component;
at least one pair of positioning pawls rotatably mounted on
said rod means and having free ends for grasping and
IXMitioning a component therebetween when the free ends
are moved towards each other;
means for rotating said positioning pawls in synchronization
with the movement of said rod means for causing the free
ends to move away from each other when said rod means
is in a lowered position to pick up a component and for
causing the free ends to come close to each other when
said rod means is in a raised position to bring the free ends
into engagement with a component picked up by said
suction tool; and
a pair of electrodes, one on each of the positioning pawls for
contacting each other and abruptly conducting a predeter-
mined level of current therebetween when said free ends
of said positioning pawls move clower to each other than
they move when a component is located therebetween,
whereby an instantaneous signal indicating the absence of
a component is directly produced.
4,437,233
FASTENER SLIDER HOLDING DEVICE
Keiidii Yoshieda, and Yoshitaka limura, both of Toyama, Japan,
asaignors to Yosiiida Kogyo K. K., Tokyo. Japan
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 283,107
Clainu priority, application Japan, Aug. 8, 1980, 55-112489
Int. a.3 A21H 37/06
U.S. a. 29—768 6 Claims
1. A fastener slider holding device comprising a fastener
slider holder having a slider mount on an upper portion and a
recess in a lower portion on one side thereof, a spring-loaded
sliding member slidably mounted in said slider holder for
upward and downward movement and normally biased down-
wardly, a slider holding lever rockably mounted in said slider
holder and having an engaging pawl at the forward end
thereof, an operation rod for moving said sliding member
upwardly and downwardly and means associated with said
sliding member for rocking said slider holding lever between a
' Mf^,
first position in which said engaging pawl completely disen-
gages from a pull tab located on a slider when said slide hold-
ing lever moves upwardly and a second position in which said
engaging pawl engages in the hole in said pull tab when said
rocking member moves downwardly.
4,437,234
TRUSS ASSEMBUNG GANTRY
Jack L. Thornton, P.O. Box 222400, Carmel, CaUf. 93922
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,534
Int. a.3 B23P 79/00, 11/00
U.S. a. 29—798 6 Claims
1. A truss joist assembling apparatus, comprising:
platform means including an elongated planar bed for sup-
porting truss joist components when disposed thereon in a
predetermined truss configuration, said platform means
further including,
roller track means including flanged beams disposed at
longitudinal sides of said bed defining horizontal verti-
cally spaced confronting surfaces;
upstanding track means extending longitudinally of said bed
adjacent its respective longitudinal sides for forming, in
combination with said bed, lateral and vertical boundary
limits of a truss joist;
gantry means including a drum overlying said upstanding
tracks for movement longitudinally of said platform
means, said gantry means further including,
vertical frame means disposed on opposing sides of said
platform,
said drum having a shaft joumalled by said vertical frame
means; and,
a plurality of pressure roller means vertically movably sup-
ported by said vertical frames in contact with said roller
track means for vertically moving said drum toward and
away from said upstanding track means.
1040 O.G.— 38
954
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M37,235
INTEGRATED CIRCUIT PACKAGE
Cfcttdler H. McItct, Tonpe, Artz^ uUvtor to HoMyweU la/or-
■atioB Syttou lac^ Phoenix, Ariz.
DiTiriooof S«r. No. 221,103, Dec. 29, 1980, Prt. No. 4,363i)76.
This applicatiofl Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,234
The portion of the tern of this patent rabaequeat to May 3, 2000
between the roUers having a gap slightly larger than the
thicknett of the metal stock, and
VS. a. 29—840
lat a.3 H05K 3/34
IClaim
1. Method of mounting an integrated circuit chip having an
active face having outer edges, a back face and a plurality of
input/output terminals on the active face thereof with a plural-
ity of flexibe beam leads, each of said leads having an inner and
an outer lead site, with the inner lead site of each lead being
bonded respectively to an input/output terminal of the inte-
grated circuit chip, on a substrate having a top surface with a
chip pad formed on the top surface and a plurality of outer lead
pads associated with the chip pad comprising the steps of:
preheating the substrate to a first temperature range at
which a given thermosetting plastic becomes tacky
placmg a preform comprised of a segment of the web <^ted
with the thermosetting plastic which pUwtic is electrically
insulating and thermally conductive on the chip pad to
cause the preform to adhere to the pad, said preform
substantially covering the chip pad;
placing the integrated circuit chip on the preform, active
face down, and applying a force to the back of the chip to
initiate encapsulation of the active face, and portions of
the leads proximate the input/output terminals of the chip
in the thermosetting plastic of the preform;
heating the substrate, chip and preform to a second tempera-
ture for a first predetermined period of time to partially
cure the thermosetting plastic of the preform to cause the
plastic to flow around the inner portions of the leads
between the active face of the chip and the chip pad;
positiomng the chip whUe the plastic is partially cured so
that the outer lead bonding site of each beam lead substan-
tially overlies the outer lead pad to which it to be bonded-
thermocompressively bonding the outer lead bonding sites
of the leads to the outer lead pads to place the leads under
compression; and
heating the thermopUwtic material to a third temperature for
a second predetermined period of time to substantially
cure the thermosetting plastic.
4,437,236
SOLDER BONDING PROCESS
Joacph A. Oiwald, Jr., Mechanicsbnrg, Pa., aadgnor to E. I Do
Poat dc NemMin and Company, WUmlagton, Del.
Pltod Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,715
iBt a.3 HOIR 43/02
VS. a 29-879 g Q,,,^
1. Process for producing an electrical terminal from flat
metal stock coated with a thin layer of solder, tin, gold, gold
aUoys, palladium or palladium alloys comprising
a. feeding the coating metal stock into a nip of at least one
pair of pressure rollers from a strip guide means, said strip
guide means controlling the position of the metal stock
between the rollers,
b. cold rolling solder wire onto the metal stock at ambient
temperature without the presence of a flux on the metal
stock as it is fed between the pressure rollers, the nip
c. thereafter stamping and fonning the metal stock to pro-
ducean electrical tenninal with a thickened solder layer in
a predetenmned location on the terminal.
4,437,237
SWING SAW FOR CUTTING METAL CONDUIT
Li^^C. Ducret, 28 Lockwood Dr., Old Greenwich, Coim.
FUed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 406,104
Int a.J B27B /9/7¥
UA a 30-90 J loctato.
«-ij^^
J7 jB^"
^ML ^ftf
\A IS
3^C^
vli ^3
r:^— — _. K*'*'
/^^i^^^^-^TT^v^;
10
ly "^X^ '\^ ^"^^^i
t 1 ■<3(P>'J,,.^. J VP
'.-4---
in^;Ap<^^jS^ '^?^a
Ut.
31'
1. A hand tool for cutting elongated materials comprising,
an elongated body portion having a forward end, a rear end
and a clamping jaw supporting extension,
an elongated saw blade supporting element having a handle
portion and being pivotally mounted on the body portion
adjacent the rear end of said portion, for movement of said
blade supporting element in a plane perpendicuhu- to its
pivoting axis,
an elongated saw blade,
means connecting said blade to the blade supporting ele-
ment,
means for effecting cutting motion of the blade in said per-
pendicular plane relative to the blade supporting element,
a first clamping jaw adjustia>ly mounted on said jaw support-
ing extension,
a clamping lever comprising an elongated handle portion
and at least one forwardly positioned second clampins
jaw means, and
means pivotally mounting said lever on the body portion
adjacent the forward end thereof,
the body portion, the handle portion of the blade supporting
element and the handle portion of the clamping lever
being so juxupoaed that they can be grasped by one hand
of a tool operator for simultaneously clamping the work
and biasing the saw blade toward said work in a cutting
plane perpendicular to the pivoting axis of the bUuie sup-
porting element.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
955
4,437»238
TOOL FOR SEVERING LEAD CANING
Joka P. CnliMM, 5920 GMrgia A?e^ N.W., WMhington, D.C.
20010
Filed Fab. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 352,055
bt CL^ B26B 7/(X>
VS. CL 30—272 A 11 Clalmi
the arm with respect to the support, said resilient means being
coupled to the arm and the support for maintaining in Ann
contact the first and the second elements, in order to define a
geometrical axis of rotation for the arm, that is stationary with
respect to the support, and detection means associated with the
arm and the support, wherein the first element of the connec-
tion means defines a portion of a substantially cylindrical sur-
face and the second element includes two edges adapted to
remain in contact with two generating lines of the portion of
the cylindrical surface, said geometrical axis being defmed by
the intersection of two geometrical planes passing through said
generating lines and being perpendicular to the portion of the
cylindrical surface.
1. A tool for severing lead canning and the like comprising
a body portion forming a handle, a shaft joumaled on the body
portion and projecting therefrom substantially normal to the
axis of said body portion, power means operatively coupled
with the shaft causing it to oscillate rapidly around the longitu-
dinal axis of the shaft, and a blade fued to the leading end of
the shaft and having a leading cutting edge extending at right
angles to and on opposite sides across the axis of oscillation of
the shaft, whereby downward pressure on said handle is trans-
mitted axially along the longitudinal axis of said shaft and
axially to said leading cutting edge during the cutting opera-
tion.
4,437,239
GAUGE FOR THE DIMENSIONAL CHECKING OF A
MECHANICAL PIECE
Mario Poaiati, Bologna, Italy, aMigBor to Flnike Italiana Mar*
poai S.pAm S. Marino di BcntifogUo, Italy
Filed Dee. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,935
Claims priority, applicatioB Italy, Dec. 23, 1980, 3599 A/80
Int a.3 GOIB 7/12
VS. a 33—143 L 14 Claims
1. A gauge for the dimensional checking of a mechanical
piece, comprising an enclosed support, a gauging arm movable
with respect to the support, a feeler element connected to the
arm to touch the piece to be checked, connection means in-
cluding a first element fixed to the arm, a second element fixed
to the support, and resilient means, the first and the second
element allowing limited rotatory gauging displacements of
4,437,240
TELEMETRY GAGE SYSTEM
Richard O. Juengel, Romeo; John D. Begin, Warren, and John
Khalaf, Lifonia, all of Mich., assignors to The Valaroa Corpo*
ration, Troy, Mich.
Cootinnatioa of Ser. No. 182,226, Aug. 28, 1980, Pat No.
4,320,623. This application Nor. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,129
The portion of the tern of this patent sabaeqaent to May 11,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int CL> GOIB 7/02
VS. a. 33—172 E 3 OaiaH
1. In a system having at least one movable member operative
to perform various tasks upon a workpiece using various com-
ponents selected from a component storage device, at least one
of the components comprising gaging means for performing
gaging of the workpiece as preselected ones of the various
tasks, the gaging means being wireleuly associated with and
having a housing body shaped so as to be held by the movable
member during gaging of the workpiece and held by the stor-
age device when not being used for gaging, the gaging means
including transducer means mounted in the housing body
operative for generating an electrical signal related to a dimen-
sional characteristic of the workpiece whenever the housing
body is moved by the member to a predetermined position
relative to the workpiece, the improvement comprising:
converter means in the housing body comprising switohing
means having a control input coupled to the transducer
mean for receipt of the electrical signal and a plurality of
light emitting diodes coupled to the switohing means and
mounted about a peripheral portion of the housing body,
the switohing means operative upon receipt of the electri-
cal signal to cause the plurality of light emitting diodes to
emit an optical signal substantially in a 360 degree pattern
from the housing body; and
receiver means separate from the housing means, positioned
at any point intersected by the 360 degree pattern of
optical signal emission for remote reception of the optical
signal and for converting the optical signal to an output
signal indicative of the dimensional characteristic.
956
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M37,241
MEASURING INSTRUMENT AND METHOD
JcroM H. LenelMii, 85 Rector St, Metndwm N J. 08840
CoatiBiutioo-io-pui of Ser. No. 68,609, Aug. 22, W79,
■IwndoiMd. This appUcatioa Jnn. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,630
lot a.} GOIB 3/18
UA a 33-166 WCtainu
4,437,242
FLEXIBLE GAUGE FOR INSIDE DIMENSIONS
BUly J. Battle, BlrmiBgiiaiii, Ala., aadgnor to United States Pipe
and Foundry Coni|Mny, Birmingiiam, Ala.
FUed Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 412,427
Int a.3 GOIB 3/50
U& a 33-178 B 3cwnis
1. A measuring instrument comprising:
a support,
first and second work surface contacting means supported
by said support,
means for moving said first surface contacting means with
respect to said support and an article positioned between
said first and second surface contacting means to cause
said first surface contacting means to engage a first por-
tion of the surface of said article while an opposite portion
of said article is engaged by said second surface contacting
means,
means for sensing movement of said first surface contacting
means and generating an electrical analog signal which
varies in accordance with the movement of said first
surface contacting means,
analog-to-digital conversion means for receiving and digitiz-
ing said electrical analog signal and generating digital
signals indicative of the degree of movement of said first
surface contacting means with respect to said support,
microminiature electronic circuit synthetic speech signal
generating means operable for generating speech signals
of words of numbers including the numbers "0" to "9",
and
first control signal generating means connected between said
analog-to-digital conversion means and said microminia-
ture electronic speech signal generating means for receiv-
ing digital signals generated on the output of said analog-
to-digital conversion means and operable to output con-
trol signals for controlling the operation of said micromin-
iature electronic circuit synthetic speech signal generating
means to cause the latter to generate a chain of synthetic
speech signals defming a sequence of numbers which are
indicative of measurements made by said device,
force sensing means connected to said first surface contact-
ing means and operable to generate a measurement indi-
cating control signal upon sensing a force applied between
said first surface contacting means and a workpiece, and
means for applying said measurement indicating control
signal to said first control signal generating means to cause
the latter to control the operation of said microminiature
electronic circuit synthetic speech signal generating
means to generate a plurality of synthetic speech signals
which are indicative of the distance between said first and
second surface contacting means when a workpiece is
disposed therebetween and said first and second surface
* contacting means are in contact with opposite surfaces of
said workpiece and when said first surface contacting
means engages one surface of said workpiece with a pre-
determined, and
means for receiving and transducing said synthetic speech
signals to sounds of words defming a sequence of numbers
which indicate the measurement made by said measuring
instrument.
1. A gauge for determining the acceptance or rejection of a
cylinder having a predetermined opening, said predetermined
opening of said cylinder having a permissable tolerance varia-
tion from a predetermined minimum inner diameter thereof,
said gauge comprising a first flexible cylindrical sleeve and a
second flexible cylindrical sleeve, said first flexible cylinder
forming a partial interior liner for said second flexible cylindri-
cal sleeve and being attached to said second flexible cylinder in
an underlying relationship, said first flexible cylindrical sleeve
having an outer diameter equal to the minimum permissible
inner diameter of said opening in said cylinder and said second
flexible cylindrical sleeve having a thickness equal to one-half
the permissible tolerance variation of said opening in said
cylinder.
4,437,243
GYROSCOPIC INSTRUMENT
Robert L. Brown, Buena Park, Calif., assignor to AMF Incorpo-
rated, White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 235,931
Int. a.3 GOIC 19/38. 19/28. 19/26
UA a. 33-302 21 Claims
-^ !;^^)
1. The combination comprising:
a body;
a gyroscopic rotor carried by said body and driven rota-
tively relative thereto about a spin axis;
a connection mounting said rotor to said body in a relation
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
957
transmitting pivotal movement about a sensing axis
through the body to the rotor and enabling precessing
movement of the rotor relative to the body about an axis
of precession in response to said pivotal movement about
the sensing axis;
a caging means for retaining said rotor against precessing
movement from an initial position and releasable to free
the rotor for precessing movement;
means for timing the interval during which said rotor pre-
cesses from said initial position to another position, and
means for deriving an indication of the rate of precession
from the time required for said precession.
drag, means for resiliently mounting said trail planer on said
frame, and a cylindrical levelling roll having projecting trail
4,437044
METHOD FOR SUCKING UP SOIL OR SLUDGE BY
MEANS OF A SUCTION HOPPER DREDGE AS WELL AS
A SUCnON DREDGE FOR APPLYING THE METHOD
Pictcr Verboom, Alblasserdam, Netherlands, anignor to IHC
Holland N.V., Papcndrccht, Netherlands
FUed Sep. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 418,673
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, Sep. 17, 1981,
8104293
Int. a.J E02F 3/88
U.S. a. 37—63
3 Claims
1. In a suction dredge having a suction pipe and drag head
and provided with loosening means for loosening soil or sludge
positioned in front of the inlet opening of the drag head seen in
the dragging direction; the improvement in which said loosen-
ing means are disposed at such a distance from the inlet open-
ing of the drag head that the gases liberated by the loosening
operation remain substantially out of the suction action of the
drag head, said loosening means being secured to a frame
which extends downwardly from the suction pipe a substantial
distance from the inlet opening of the suction pipe, said loosen-
ing means comprising a plurality of injection nozzles, and
means acting between said frame and said pipe for swinging
said frame upwardly to a raised inoperative position and down-
wardly to a lowered operative position about a horizontal
pivot by which said frame is secured to said pipe.
4,437045
MEANS FOR MAKING A SKI TRAIL
Tapio Nigmcla, Linnatie 10D5, KittUa, Finland 99100
FUed Not. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 443,162
Claims priority, appUcation Finland, Dm. 3, 1981, 813868
Int a.} EOIH 4/00
U.S. a. 37—222 3 Caaims
1. A ski trail making apparatus comprising a frame, adapted
for attachment e.g. behind a snowmobile, a drag for levelling
out old ski trails and tracks, linkage arms pivotally attached to
the frame for suspending the drag therefrom, said drag being
adjustable in the vertical direction and free to rise upwardly if
an obstacle is encountered, a traU planer having traU making
blades located side-by-side on said frame disposed behind said
^
1 2
i-rSii
939 l6_ 9 9 ^' 5
groove depressor rims thereon disposed behind said trail
planer for supporting said apparatus.
4,437046
PRESSING AND CREASING APPARATUS
John R. Sanko, Altoona, Pa., assignor to Paris Manufacturing
Company, Inc., Brockway, Pa.
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309042
Int. a.5 D06F 71/40; D06C 5/00
U.S. a. 38—25 11 Claims
1. In a finishing machine for a pants-like garment having a
support base, a longitudinal-horizontally extending permeable
bag carried by said support base for receiving and positioning
a garment therealong, means for applying hot steam and air
through said bag to the inside of the garment to expand it,
means carried by said support base for internally engaging and
then folding-over material of the expanded garment to form
preliminary creases therealong, means for thereafter applying
heat and externally applying pressing force to the preliminary
creases for forming final creases along the material of the
garment, and said means for folding-over material of the ex-
panded garment having means for moving it out of engage-
ment with the material before pressing force is externally
applied to the preliminary creases by said second-mentioned
means.
4,437047
APPARATUS FOR FEEDING LAUNDRY TO AN
IRONING MACHINE
WUhclm Wiebesiek, Vlotho, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Herbert Kannegieascr GnhH k Co., Voltho, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Apr. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 372050
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 16,
1981, 3119600
Int a.i D06F 67/04
U.S. a. 38—143 12 Claims
1. Apparatus for feeding laundry articles to an ironing ma-
chine or the lUce, wherein the laundry articles are suspended on
two grippers of a conveyor device disposed transversely in
front of and offset in height in relation to a feed conveyor
leading to the ironing machine and, starting from an operating
station (A) situated at the side of the working width of the feed
conveyor, are conveyed by the conveyor device to a position
938
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
c«triUy in front of the loading pocition of the feed conveyor,
Md wherein the two ghppen of the conveyor device are
dttpoMd on a rope drive capable of controlled driving and can
be moved u such a manner that the leading gripper, in the
conveying direction, pulli the rear gripper in tow behind it via
the laundry article, while at the same time pulling the Utter
Uut, characterised in that the drive device used for the rope
dnve (14) is a geared polechanging motor (15) having two
•peeds and a smooth speed range transition, that the towina
conveymg of the Uundry article (10) begins when the geared
a» 13 n V 19
4*437)249
CONVERSION OF MODERN SHOTOUNS INTO
MUZZLELOAOING SHOTGUNS
FIW Mu. 18. 19t2, Sar. No. 359.272
VS, a 42-51 , ctatai
9S> tax ij
•> «>, s«n6-. la
-11
motor (15) is smoothly changed up to the high speed, that
•witch means (51. 52. 53) changes the geared motor (15) down
to Its low speed at a moment of time in the course of the towing
conveying, and that after the complete tensioning and center*
ing of the laundry article (10). which are effected at low speed
the geared motor (15) remains switched on at a predetermined
torque adjusted to the transioning or tautening force accept-
able for the Uundry article (10) and at zero rotational spe^.
for the purpose of maintaining the tensioning. untU the Uundry
article is transferred to a feed conveyor (12).
4.437,248
VreWER SIMULATING TELEVISION RECEIVER
Hubtftos Ramme, Graf-AdoUlrtraaae 25, 5758 Frdndenberg.
Fed. Rep. of Gcmaay
Filed Job. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,466
lot C1.3 G03B J/00
UAa40-364 iictata.
1. A inversion plug for removable insertion into a standard,
umnodified shotgun having a conventional chamber and barrel
for convertmg the shotgun into a muzzleloading firearm, said
plug comprising: a cylindrical rear portion conforming to the
shape of the shotgun chamber and having a tapered rear shoul-
der for engaging a cartridge rim receiving portion of the cham-
ber; a reduced dUmeter forward portion extending forwardly
from the plug rear portion into close fitting engagement with
the bore of the shotgun barrel; said plug forward portion hav-
ing a mam bore with an outward flare at the front end thereof
for receivmg black powder when the firearm is loaded as a
muzzleloader; said plug rear portion having a Upered bore
therein for receiving a primer and a passageway connecting
said pnmer bore with the main bore in said plug forward
portion; said Upered rear shoulder of said plug rear portion
having a circumferential cut-out therein allowing an ejector
mechanism of said shotgun to bypass said plug, thereby avoid-
mg ejection of said plug by the ejector mechanism; said plug
rear portion having a circumferentially oriented groove
therem and an annular sealing means in said groove; and said
plug rear portion having a tapered slot in the rear end thereof
mtersecting said primer bore for aiding in the removal of a
pnmer positioned in said primer bore.
1. A viewer simulating a television receiver, comprisina-
a housmg; *
a substantially punctiform light source in said housing-
a hght-diff-using screen in a wall of said housing centered on
an axis, said Ught source being located on said axis at a
distance from said screen;
a supply of operating current connectable to said lisht
source; and ^
transport means in said housing for supporting a coherent
transparent earner of positive images in an area between
said screen and said light source for translumination by
divergent rays from the Utter and enlarged direct projec-
tion upon said screen, said transport means including an
actuator accessible from outside said housing for advanc-
mg said carrier along a path crossing said axis at an inter-
section separated from said light source by less than half of
said distance, said housing being devoid of any focusing
lens, said carrier being Uie only element traversed by said
rays between said light source and said screen.
4,437.250
REVOLVER
Pter C. Bcretta, Brcada. Italy, aarignor to Fabbrlca d'Aml P
Beretta S.pji., Italy
FIUdJuL 16, 1981, Scr. No. 283.819
Claima priority, appUcatk» Italy, JoL 18, 1980. 5187 A/80
lot a.) F41C I/OO
U A a. 42-59 13 ctataM
1. A revolver of the type having an opening for the lateral
displacement of a routable drum and comprising a body in-
cludmg first and second main members that are removably
connected to each other, said first member comprising a handle
and an underguard and a snap-fuing mechanism defmed by at
least a trigger and a hammer, said second member comprising
a stem, a barrel, sighting means, a firing pin and a routable
drum with means for blocking and unblocking thereof, charac-
terized in that at the extremity of said underguard of said first
member there is provided a tongue for mortise-like engage-
ment in a seat provided in a shoulder arranged at the base of
said second member, an upper part of said handle and a rear
terminal of said second member being provided with corre-
sponding and mating inclined surfaces, said handle and said
second member have coaxial transverse openings for the ac-
ceptance of an arresting spine for the mutual blocking of said
first and second members, and means for eliminating pUy
between said second member and said handle, said transverse
openings for said arresting spine coinciding with an axis of
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
959
rotation of said hammer, said axis being defined by a sleeve pin
truuvenely mounted between two ears provided in the upper
quality, said cylindrical member including a plurality of longi-
tudinally extending through holes therein, to coincide with the
>
«'
1
t
\
zt-Q"''
3--.
^HJ\
'--f^
2)^ IrTr
"^fi^
\\
15,-. / o
Ito
^ir< "
—^
II 11
part of said handle, said openings provided in said second
member being coaxial with said sleeve pin.
4.437.251
FULL GAIN TWIST RATCHET RIFLING
Richard M. Gorman, 3420 W. Danbury St., Apt. C-106, Phoenix,
Aril. 85023
CoatinaatloB*iB-pert of Ser. No. 130,383, Mar. 14, 1980, Pat.
No. 4.308,681. This application Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332.801
The piMrtion of the term of this patent rabaequent to Jan. 5, 1999,
has been ditflalwifd,
let a.) F41C 21/00
MS. a. 42—78 10 CUdms
chambers in a revolver cylinder, for the reception of an ammu-
nition cartridge in each of said chambers.
4.437,253
FISHERMAN'S HAND TOWEL AND METHOD
Duane W. Kinnear, R.D. 1„ East Springfield, Pa. 16411
Filed Apr. 4, 1983, Scr. No. 481.918
Int a? AOIK 97/04
U.S. a. 43—1 8 CUlns
1. A fisherman's towel for wiping hands at a fishing site
immedUtely before handling bait in the process of each baiting
of a line to prevent the bait from acquiring human odors from
such handling, said towel consisting essentially of a piece of
damp toweling impregnated with an amount of anise odor
containing substance which leaves a residual anise odor on the
fisherman's hands which is in part picked up by the bait in
amount sufficient to muk any of said human odor acquired by
the bait from said handing.
9. In a rifled barrel with means for seating a projectile
therein, said rifled barrel having minor and miyor-radius por-
tions measured from the bore-axis, and having therebetween
spin-imparting edges on the rifling, in combination: improved
ratchet rifling with a full gain twist in the form of a bore por-
tion having a smooth bore for initially receiving and holding a
projectile without marring the projectile followed by a gradu-
ally emerging ratchet rifling contour with each spin-imparting
edge being progressively deepened by said minor-radius por-
tions "falling" inward toward said bore axis and producing a
projectile-seating increasing in predetermined proportion to
twist along the barrel.
4.437.252
RAPID LOADING DEVICE FOR A REVOLVER
Carloa E. CMtellaBoa Maaero. Miami, Fla., aaaignor to Aida
CwtellaMM KwaaiUak. Miami, Fla.
Filed Jw. 16. 1981, Ser. No. 225.629
lat 0.1 F42B 39/04
MS. CL 42—89 5 Claim
1. A rapid loading device for a revolver comprising, a gener-
ally cylindrical member formed of a conventional synthetic
cellular foam material having a very great compressibility
4,437,254
LONGUNE BAITING
E?erett G. Fancey; John V. Peters, and Ruaaell E. Tucker, all of
St. John's, Canada, aaaignors to Nordco Limited, St. John's,
20 Claims
FUed Jon. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,912
Int a.J AOIK 79/00. 83/00, 91/00
U.S.a43-4
1. A fuh hook baiter comprising,
(a) a hook support means having a hook supporting portion
of itt length adapted to support a gang of hooks in a
side-by-side spaced relationship which is fued for baiting
with their hook ends free for baiting,
(b) bait support means adapted to support bait during hook-
ing of the bait, said bait support means being disposed
960
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
laterally opposite and co-extensive with at least a portion
of said hook supporting portion of said hook support
means,
(c) guide means engaging said bait support means and
adapted to guide the bait support means along a baiting
path whereby bait supported on the bait support means is
applied substantially simultaneously to a plurality of the
hooks in the gang of hooks.
iii. metallic reflecting particles,
•aid balls and said particles suspended in said oU, and
[.::f-^
4,437,255
FISH DETECTING SYSTEM
Dorian Reed, 13231 Northfleld Bird., Oak Park, Mich. 48237
FUed Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,466
Int. a.J AOIK 93/00
UA a 43-17 loctainu
c. a light emitting diode containing cartridge insertable
through one of said access means in one of said hollow
areas.
1. A fish detecting system for use with fishing tackle, com-
pnsmg: signal sending and signal receiving means, said signal
sendmg means mcluding a spherical, bouyant housing contain-
mg a radio transmitter, a battery disposed in a lower portion of
said housmg and forming a source of power for said transmit-
ter, a normally open switch disposed in a circuit between said
battery and said transmitter, a plunger movable radially of said
sphere between first and second positions in a path passing in
proximity to said switch, said plunger including a magnet
operable to move said switch to a closed position to actuate
said transmitter when said magnet moves into proximity of said
switch and to hold said plunger in a first position when said
switch IS m said normal position and fastening means including
an attaching portion on said plunger to receive a fishing line
formmg part of said tackle, said signal receiving means includ-
mg a radio receiver operable at a point remote from said signal
sendmg means to receive a signal from said transmitter and
activate an alarm upon movement of said plunger from said
first towards a second position upon pull on said fishing line
4,437,257
™^^^ PLASTIC nSHING LURE BODY HAVING A
CONTROLLED DENSITY AND A ONE-PIECE WIRE AND
A METHOD FOR ITS MANUFACTURE
sSrr ^' """*' ''^^ ''""•"•° ^' ^''**" ^■"•y* ^^**™'-
FUed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263^97
Int a.J B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 43-42.45 jj c^to.
4,437,256 ^
UNIVERSAL FLOAT LURE
Walter Kulak, 98 Oakdale Village, North Bnuflwick, N J. 08902
FUed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 258,959
iBt a.3 AOIK 85/01. 93/00
Uf CI. «-17.5 12 cud^
1. A float-lure kit comprising
a. an elongated main body section having at least two hollow
areas therein and access means to said hollow areas from
outside said main body section,
b. a self-contained lure cylinder insertable through one of
said access means into one of said hollow areas, said cylin-
der comprising therein
I. OU, r
ii. one or more metal balls and
1. A method of making a foamed plastic fishing lure body
having a controlled density and a one-piece wire located along
the vertical central longitudinal plane of the body, with a mold
assembly having a first plate and a second plate and groove
means for accommodating portions of the wire adapted to be
located m face-to-face relationship relative to each other, said
first and second plates each having at least one cavity and
groove means for accommodating portions of the wire, said
cavities forming a body cavity having the outline shape of the
lure body when the first and second plates are located in face-
to-face relationship comprising: positioning the one-piece wire
on the first plate by placing portions of the wire in the groove
means of the first plate to locate the wire over the cavity in the
first plate, closing the mold assembly by mounting the second
plate on the first plate to locate the cavity of the second plate
m registration with the cavity of the first plate and locate the
wire m the groove means of the second pUte thereby locating
the wire along the vertical central longitudinal plane of the
body cavity, holding the mold assembly in iu closed position,
mtroducmg plastic materials into the body cavity, through a
passageway in the mold assembly said plasUc materials react-
mg to form a foamed plastic fiUing the body cavity and sur-
roundmg the wire extended through said body cavity, allow-
ing gas to exhaust from the body cavity through vent means in
the mold assembly during the reaction of the plastic materials
and fiUmg of the body cavity with foamed plastic, terminating
the exhaust of gas from the body cavity and continuing the
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
961
reaction of the plastic materials to increase the density of the
foamed plastic in the body cavity, opening the mold assembly
by separating the first plate from the second plate, and remov-
ing the foamed plastic body and wire from the mold assembly.
4. A fishing lure body made according to the method of
claim 1, said lure body having a plastic body, said body having
a nose and tail, a one-piece wire located along the vertical
central plane of the body, said wire having a first loop pro-
jected from the nose, a second loop projected downwardly
from a mid-section of the body, and a third loop projected
from the tail.
4,437,258
nSHING LEADER HOLDER
GUbcrt AUard, 11 McLean, Alymer, Quebec, Canada J9H 6A4
FUed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,735
Claims priority, appUcatlon Canada, Nov. 18, 1981, 390330
Int. a.J AOIK 97/00
VJS. a. 43—57.1 5 Qaims
4,437,259
TURTLE TRAP AND PROCESS OF TRAPPING TURTLES
Hugh K. Holyoak, Rte. #1, Alapaha, Ga. 30130
FUed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,014
Int. a.3 AOIK 69/10
VJS. a. 43—105 3 Claims
1. A turile trap comprising: a cage having a porous submerg-
ible portion with an open top, means for supporting said cage
with said porous portion submerged in water, a trip board
disposed over said open top of said cage, means for moveably
supporting said trip board for pivoting to release a turile from
said trip board through said open top and into said cage, said
trip board being disposed in spaced relationship above the
water level of the water in said cage, and a ramp disposed
adjacent one end of said trip board and protruding at an incline
into the water exteriorly of said cage for providing, with said
trip board, a walkway for a turile entering the trap; hinge
means connected to opposite end portions of said trip board
and platforms disposed over said means for supporting said
cage, said hinge means being connected respectively to said
platforms for permitting pivoting of said trip board.
4,437,260
DOMINO TOPPUNG TOY
TakaaU Yothlda, Tokyo, Japan, aisigDor to Yothlda Kogeisha,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jan. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 384^4
Int. a.3 A63H 33/00
U.S. a. 46—1 R
Saaims
1. A fishing leader holder consisting of:
an outer cylindrical tube,
an inner cylindrical tube rotatable within the outer tube, and
a cylindrical securement part slidable within the inner tube,
the inner and outer tubes having mutually alignable slots
along their lengths, and the securement part having a
radially disposed projection passing through both of the
slots and means on the securement part for releasably
securing fishing leaders such that when the securement
part is slid into the inner tube the fishing leaders are re-
tracted into the inner tube.
1. A domino toppling toy for toppling a plurality of domino
pieces in domino trains located at different vertical elevations,
comprising:
a carriage for transporting at least one intermediate domino
piece and adapted to move up and down;
first means for applying an upward force to move said car-
riage upwardly;
second means for holding said carriage at a lower position
against the upward force applied to the carriage by said
first means;
third means for disabling said second means to hold said
carriage at said lower position; and
fourth means for stopping the upward movement of said
carriage after said third means disabled the operation of
said second means, whereby said third means is actuated
by the last domino piece in a lower domino train, and the
first domino piece in an upper elevational domino train is
toppled down in response to a toppling of said at least one
intermediate domino piece which is caused by a shock
exerted when said fourth means stops said upward move-
ment.
4,437,261
YO-YO WTTH TWIST-RESISTANT STRING
Patrick MacCarthy, 37 Mines Park, Golden, Colo. 80401
Contlauation-in-part of Ser. No. 138,729, Apr. 9, 1980, Pat. No.
4,290,224. This appUcation Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,797
Int. a.' A63H 1/30
U.S. a. 46—61 13 Claims
1. A toy capable of combined rotational motion about a
horizontal axis and translational motion in a vertical direction,
comprising:
an axel;
a first disc connected at a center point to said axel;
a second disc connected at a center point to said axel;
a twist-resistant support connected at one end to said axel at
a position between said first disc and said second disc;
wherein said support has a twist-resistance such that a length
962
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
of said support of about 40 inches supporting a weight of
about 30 grams will undergo no more than about 30 revo-
lt
tached from said one of said first or said second magnetic
members and becoming magnetically attached to the
other of said first or said second magnetic member.
lutions of twisting when subjected to a torque of 0.5 gram
inch.
4.437.263
SYSTEM FOR HEAT STORAGE PARTICULARLY FOR
USING IN AGRICULTURE
Aharon NIr, RchoTot; Abraham J. Amiel, Moihav Ramrt Mdr.
ud Jonathan M. Krant, Neas Zioaa. aU of Israel, aadgnon to
Yeda Research * Derelopmcnt Co. Ltd^ Rehovot. Israel
Filed Ang. 28, IWl. Ser. No. 297.363
Oafaia priority, appilcatloa Israel. Sep. 4, 1980, 60969
Int a.3 AOIG 9/24. 13/06
VS. a 47-1 R 13 ci,^
4,437.262
MAGNEnC AMUSEMENT DEVICE
TakaaU Kaga, Tokyo, Japui, aaiignor to Tomy Kogyo Co- Inc^
Japan
Flkd Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 359,160
ClalM priority, application JapM^ Mar. 18, 1981, 56.38832
lat CL^ A63H 33/26
UA a 46-242 ,2 claim.
~*ii
1. A system for use in agriculture for the underground stor-
age of heat in soU and for the predetermined release of the
stored heat in response to both daily and seasonal demands for
the heat, comprising three stratified layers of fiuid conduiu
located at shallow, intermediate and deepest depths below the
surface of the soil, and means for circulating heated fluid
through said conduits and between said conduiu in said three
layers.
1. An amusement device which comprises:
chousing;
a first magnetic member movably mounted on said housing,
said first magnetic member capable of moving in a first
cyclic pathway with respect to said housing;
a second magnetic member movably mounted on said hous-
ing, said second magnetic member o^iable of moving in a
■econd cyclic pathway with respect to said housing;
motor means associated with said first magnetic member and
said second magnetic member for continuous moving said
> members in their respective said pathways;
each of said first and second cyclic pathways are circular
pathways and are located adjacent to one another on said
housing;
the orbital speed of said first magnetic member in iu path-
way being greater than the orbital speed of said second
magnetic member in its pathway;
said first and said second magnetic members capable of being
located in association with each other at a point of associa-
tion of their respective pathways;
an object formed of a ferromagnetic material so as to be
attracted to and temporarily magnetically attachable to
each of said magnetic members;
said object c^Mible of being temporarily magnetically at-
tached to one of said first or said second magnetic mem-
bers u said one of said first or said second magnetic mem-
bers moves in its cycUc pathway and when said first and
said second magnetic members are located at said point of
MBodation said object fiirther capable of becoming de-
4.437,264
. HYDROPONIC APPARATUS AND METHOD
Richard S. Cariialc, P.O. Box 307, Rye, N.Y. 10580
Filed May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 368^98
tot aJ AOIB 79/00: AOIG 31/00
VS. CL 47—58 4
X-
J^
h^
ff
^
1. The method of supplying nutrient liquid to a plant grow-
ing system comprising a series of many planten that are essen-
tially alike and that are disposed at a common level, the system
including a supply line extending from a supply point to the
planters in succession, including the steps of first supplying a
first nutrient liquid to the supply line at the supply point under
pressure so that the planters receive nutrient liquid to progres-
sively lower levels in relation to their distances from the supply
point due to attenuation of pressure along the supply line,
interrupting the sun>ly of liquid for equalizing the leveb of
liquid in the planters, thereafter supplying a second nutrient
liquid different from the first at the supply point so that the
planters receive such second nutrient liquid to progressively
lower levels in relation to their distances from the supply point,
and interrupting the supply of the second liquid for equalizing
the levels of liquid in the planters, thereby to develop a range
of different nutrient liquids in the successive planters.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
963
4,437.265
SAFETY GUARD
JaroM Twro, 254 Spancar PL, Ri?ardalc N.Y. 10471, and
Patar Ndaoa, 2825 Schvz Ava^ Brou, N.Y. 10465
FDad Mar. 1, 1982. Ser. No. 353,283
tot. CL' E06B 3/68
U.S.CL49— 57 Idaim
1. A safety guard apparatus for instaUation into the frame of
a window or the like, comprising:
first and second support elements, said elements having
means for connecting said elemenu to said frame,
a plurality of bars having opposed ends, said ends being
secured to said first and second support elements, said bars
being disposed in spaced relationship and having means
for adjusting said bars to a predetermined length, and
means for locking said bars to said predetermined length and
preventing said length from being shortened, said means
for unlocking including a means for unlocking, said means
for locking being positioned on at least one of said bars,
whereby said means for locking maintains said plurality of
bars at said predetermined length thus aiding in maintain-
ing the integrity of the means for connecting said first and
second support elements to said frame, said plurality of
bars including
a first elongated member having one end secured to said first
support element and having a receiving end, said first
support element having an elongated central chamber
open at said receiving end,
a second elongated member having one end joined to said
second support element and having an opposed insertable
end capable of being inserted into said chamber at said
receiving end of said first member in sliding mating reUi-
tionship, said second member being capable of being with-
drawn from said first member,
whereby each of said bars may be adjusted to said predeter-
mined length,
said first elongated member having a first cross-sectional
area and said second elongated member having a second
cross-sectional area, said first area being larger than said
second area, said first member forming a shoulder with
said first member at said receiving end, and
wherein said means for locking is mounted to said second
member and positioned abutting said shoulder,
whereby said shoulder absorbs longitudinal pressure from
said second member and said second member is prevented
from passing farther into said chamber, and wherein said
means for locking includes
a flexible sleeve portion mounted to said second member and
positioned so as to abut said shoulder,
a flexible grip mounted around said sleeve portion, said grip
having a longitudinal slot and two opposed flanges ex-
tending from said grip on either side of said slot, said
flanges forming opposed bolt holes, one of said flanges
forming a nut-gripping cavity around the bolt hole of said
first flange, a nut capable of being held immobile in said
cavity being poaitioniBd in said cavity, and a bolt having a
threaded shaft, said shaft being positioned in said bolt
holes and threaded to said nut, said bolt having a bolt head
forming a keyway capable of receiving a key, said shaft
being positioned in said bolt holes with said head posi-
tioned outside the flange opposite the flange holding said
nut.
whereby when a key matching the keyway is inserted into
the keyway and is turned in a bolt-tightening direction,
the flanges of the grip are drawn together and the grip
pressures the sleeve portion into pressured immobile rela-
tionship with said second member, and when the key is
turned in an opposite direction, the sleeve portion is re-
leased.
4,437.266
WEATHERSTRIPPING KTT FOR SLIDING WINDOWS
WUbnr L. KaUer, 9320 Idyl PL, lakaalda, CaUf. 92040
Cootinnatioa of Ser. No. 132.694, Mar. 21, 1980, abudooad.
This appUcation Jan. 12, 1982, Sar. No. 338^59
Int. CL^ E06B 7/16
VS. CL 49—493 14 ri.i—
1. A weatherstripping kit for sliding windows that are in-
stalled within opposing window channels defined by side chan-
nel walls, for movement parallel to an adjacent stationary
panel, comprising:
a first elongated weatherstripping holder for attachment to a
said side channel wall for holding weatherstripping in
contact with said sliding window for providing a seal
between said channel wall and said window over the
width of said window when said window is closed; and
a second elongated weatherstripping holder for attachment
to said sliding window at the end of the window adjacent
the stationary panel for holding weatherstripping in
contact with said stationary panel for providing a seal
between said window and said panel over the length of
said window;
wherein the first elongated holder includes a flat attachment
surface running the length of the first holder for engage-
ment with said side channel wall;
wherein the first elongated holder is shaped to define a
T-slot running the length of the first holder for holding
weatherstripping, facing in the same direction as the flat
attachment surface and extending beyond the attachment
surface in said same direction for holding said weather-
stripping in contact with said sliding window when the
attachment surface is attached to the outside of said side
channel wall;
wherein the second elongated holder includes an attachment
wall having an elongated flat attachment surface on the
front holder for engagement with said adjacent end of said
sliding window; and
wherein the second elongated holder includes an extension
wall running the length of the second holder and inclined
rearwardly at an acute angle from the attachment wall;
and wherein the second elongated holder is shaped at the
extended end of the extension wall to defme a T-«lot
running the length of the second holder for holding wea-
therstripping and facing in a direction that is ninety de-
964
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
grees from the direction faced by the attachment surface
for holding said weatherstripping in contact with said
stotionary panel when the attachment surface is attached
to the end surface of said adjacent end of said sliding
window.
4,437^7
SINGLE PASS SIZING TOOL AND MACHINE
INCXUDING WEAR COMPENSATION MEANS
William G. Corley, Dearborn Heights, Mich^ assignor to Ex-
CeU-O Corporation, Troy, Mich.
Filed Feb. 24, 1M2, Ser. No. 351,685
lat a.3 B24B 33/00
UA a 51-34 R 8 Claims
workpiece positioned parallel to the direction in which
the workpiece is transported as the workpiece U conveyed
through a work station;
lifting the workpiece from the means for conveying, rotating
the workpiece to a position a second pair of parallel sides
m a direction parallel to the direction in which the work-
piece is transported, and lowering the workpiece back
down to the means for conveying;
grinding the edges of the second pair of parallel sides of the
workpiece positioned parallel to the direction in which
the workpiece is transported as the workpiece is conveyed
through a work station;
polishing the edges of the second pair of parallel sides of the
workpiece as it passes through a work station;
lifting the workpiece from the means for conveying, rotating
the workpiece to position the first pair of parallel sides in
a direction parallel to the direction in which the work-
piece is transported, and lowering the workpiece back
down to the means for conveying; and
polishing the edges of the first pair of parallel sides of the
workpiece as it passes through a work station.
1. A single pass abrasive tool attachable to a hollow machine
spindle means and useful for sizing a workpiece bore to a given
diameter comprising:
a hollow tool body having a first open end adapted for
msertion inside said machine spindle means and a second
open end facing the workpiece bore, an arbor member
slidable axially in the tool body and having a threaded end
adjacent the first open end of said tool body and a tapered
end adjacent said second end, abrading means carried by
at least one of said tool body and arbor member having a
rued smgle pass cutting diameter selected to produce said
given diameter during a single pass axial and rotary move-
ment through the bore, said abrading means being radially
movable with respect to the tool body in response to axial
movement of the arbor member for wear compensation
purposes, and a wear compensation shaft rotatable in said
tool body, said shaft having a first threaded end extending
into the first open end of said tool body into threaded
engagement with said threaded arbor end inside said tool
body and having a second driven end extending out of said
first open end inside said machine spindle means for rota-
tion therein by shaft drive means, whereby axial sliding
movement can be imparted to said arbor member by rotat-
ing said wear compensation shaft to reset a worn diameter
of said abrading means to the original single pass cuttina
diameter. *
4,437,269
ABRASIVE AND POUSHING SHEEI^
George Shaw, Saffron Walden, England, assignor to S.Iji.C.O.
Limited, Saffron Walden, England
FUed Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 175,586
,«2!?^ priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Aug. 17, 1979.
7928717; Jun. 16, 1980, 8018597
Int. a.3 B24D 11/02
U.S. a 51-358 15 cuj^
4,437,268
BEVELING APPARATUS
GMtwro Rigfaetti, Pesaro, Itdy, assignor to Hoyne Industries,
Inc., Rolling Meadows, m.
DirisioB of Ser. No. 16737, Jul. 9, 1980, Pat. No. 4,375,141.
This appUcation Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 428,108
lot a? B24B 1/00
UA a. 51-327 4 cu,,^
1. A method for grinding the edges of a workpiece having at
least two pairs of parallel sides comprising:
conveying the workpiece through a series of sequential
work stations;
grinding the edges of a first pair of parallel sides of the
8. An abrasive system including a pad adapted to be con-
nected to a sanding tool, and an abrasive sheet arranged to be
removably secured to the pad; the abrasive sheet comprising a
backing layer carrying an abrasive on one side thereof with a
textUe material being adhered to an opposite side thereof, said
textile material being made from woven or knitted yam having
filament loops or curls extending from its surface remote from
the backing layer; and the pad having a woven fabric base
layer which retains rows of spaced loop-engaging or curl-
engaging members in the form of monofilament stalks having
unhooked ends which extend in different inclined directions
from the base layer for releasable securing engagement with
the loops or curls of the textile material.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
963
4,437,270
ABRADING TOOL
Warren L. Langitraat, Cottage Grove, Minn., assignor to Min-
nesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
ContiBuation of Ser. No. 123,448, Feb. 21, 1980, abandoned,
wUch is a continuation of Ser. No. 914,197, Jon. 12, 1978,
•budoned. This appUcation Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,748
Int a.} B24B 17/00
U.S. a. 51—364 5 CUdns
1. In combination, a length of finishing material coated with
pressure-sensitive adhesive and having opposite terminal end
portions, and an abrading tool, said tool comprising:
a wheel of a firm material having an axis, a rim having a
cylindrical outer surface, surfaces fixed relative to said
wheel defining an axially extending slot transverse of and
opening through said rim, said slot including inner and
outer portions with said inner portion being narrower than
said outer portion and being defined by parallel opposed
surfaces fixed relative to said wheel and spaced to closely
receive one of said terminal end portions of said length of
finishing material therebetween while affording move-
ment of said terminal end portion into and out of said inner
portion, said wheel including means adapted for engage-
ment by a drive assembly to rotate said wheel about said
axis in a first direction; and
a support strip of elastic, resilient cellular material having a
thickness of over 0.3 centimeter, a compression-defiection
reading of up to 90 kilopascals, first and second ends, a
leading end portion including said first end, a major por-
tion including said second end, a skin layer having a
contact surface with a surface pattern adapted for releas-
able engagement with the pressure-sensitive adhesive on
said length of finishing material, and a surface opposite
said contact surface fixed to said wheel with said major
portion extending around said cylindrical surface, said
second end adjacent said slot, and said leading end portion
in the outer portion of said slot; the contact surface on said
leading end portion being disposed at an obtuse angle with
respect to the adjacent contact surface on said major
portion, being disposed at an angle with respect to a radius
of said wheel of between 10 to 33 degrees, and being
spaced from the adjacent surface of said wheel defining
the outer portion of said slot to provide clearance for the
end portion of a said length of finishing material;
said length of finishing material being adhered to said
contact surface by said pressure-sensitive adhesive with
one of said terminal end portions projecting into the inner
portion of said slot, said inner portion of said slot being
disposed at a greater angle with respect to the radius of the
wheel than the contact surface on the leading end portion
of said strip to direct and press the adhesive coating on the
strip of finishing material into firm engagement with the
contact surface on said leading end portion of said suppori
strip, and adhesion of the pressure-sensitive adhesive on
said finishing material to said contact surface and one of
said opposed surfaces defming the inner portion of said
slot providing the only means for attaching said length of
finishing material to said tool.
4,437,271
SURFACE TREATING PAD HAVING A RENEWABLE
SURFACE
Thomas R. McAvoy, StUlwatar, Minn., isiigDor to Mhuasota
Mining and Maaufoeturing Company, St. Paul, Mian.
FUad Mar. 14, 1979, Ser. No. 20,314
lot a.i B24D 11/00
U.S. a. 51—400 6 ClalM
1. A layered surface treating pad having a plurality of re-
newable working surfaces comprising in combination:
(1) a base layer which is about 3 mm to about 13 mm thick
and which has a top substantially flat face and a bottom
substantially fiat face; and
(2) a stack comprising a plurality of thin layers of lofty
non woven abrasive material adhesively removably fas-
tened to said bottom substantially fiat face, each layer of
said stack having a thickness in the range of about O.S mm
to about 20 mm, said layers being adhesively removably
fastened to each other in said stack such that a force
required to delaminate said layers in use is on the order of
9 to 450 grams per 25 mm width, said base layer and said
stack providing a unitary layered pad which is capable of
maintaining such unity during use and which permiu each
thin layer to be easily separated therefrom to expose a
fresh treating surface of the next layer, when desired,
without damage to the remainder of the pad.
4,437,272
INSERT FOR FOLDABLE CONCRETE BUILDING
CONSTRUCnON WTTH PIVOT CONNECTIONS,
INTEGRAL UFTING BAR, AND BUILDING HEIGHT
CONTROL BAR
Delp W. Johnson, 240 Oakriew Dr.. Saa Carlos, CaUf. 94070
FUed Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 343,438
Int. a.3 E04B 1/344. 1/35: E04G 21/14
U.S. a. 52—64 9 Claims
1. An insert device for hingeably connecting an overlying
ceUing slab to an underlying wall slab in folding slab con-
structed buildings, which device, simultaneously with a lifting
operation, articulates a supporting anchor located at the top
edge of said wall, into position to receive a bearing anchor in
said ceiling slab, and the portion of said device within the
thickness of said ceiling slab, transfers the vertical loads from
upper modules to lower modules in said building, said device
comprising:
966
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
a OMthu extending verticaUy through said overlying ceiUng
•lab, down into a clearance notch in the hinged edge of
•aid underlying wall «lab. •aid Hat bar portioned pen>en-
dicuiar to and adjacent to said hinged edge; and in addi-
tion, a ahaped bar extending through the upper portion of
•aid flat bar, said shaped bar extending horizontaUy thru
•aid flat bar, and thence downward from sides of said flat
bar to a location near the lower surface of said overlying
slab; and said shaped bar there terminating in a hook, and
said hook engages reinforcing bars in said overlying slab-
and m addition, a pivot bar embedded at the mid thickneM
of said underlying waU slab, extends thru a vertical slotted
hole m said flat bar. and said slotted hole extending down-
ward toward the bottom end of said flat bar. and the
overaU length of said slotted hole being at least enough to
permit said pivot bar to move away from said overlying
stab, the distance required to permit the said hinged edse
of said underlying waU slab to rotate freely under the
lower surface of said overlying iUb when said overlying
•lab u elevated; and in addition, an acceu notch u formed
m upper portion of said overlying slab, adjacent to said
flat bar. and said access notch a of such size and poution
to provide access to attach a lifting connection to said
shaped bar adjacent to said flat bar; and in addition, at
least one support anchor within said underlying wall sUb.
said support anchor engaging said pivot bar with a slip fit
bole, and said support anchor positioned flat against the
Mde of said flat bar, and one edge of said support anchor
bemg coplanar with the said hinged edge of said underly-
ing wall slab; and said support anchor is secured to at least
one reinforcing bar in said underlying waU sUb; and in
addition at least one bearing anchor within said overlying
cahng slab, said bearing anchor positioned flat against the
Mde of Mid flat bar. and said bearing anchor being secured
to said flat bar by at least one bar extending thru said flat
bar and said bearing anchor; and one edge of said bearing
anchor being coplanar with the lower surface of said
overlying slab, and in an erected position, said bearing
anchor resting on said support anchor.
wall framing member secured at one end to opponte ends
of the floor framing members so that said outer wall fram-
ing members are spaced apart and paraUel to each other,
each outer wall framing member having a length equal to
substantially one half of the height of a convential living
•pace, •
a peaked roof support extending between and secured to the
other ends of the outer wall framing memben
a horizontally extending ceUing stud secured to said roof
support at a position intermediate the ends of the roof
support and so that said ceihng stud is spaced upwardly
from the floor joist by an amount equal to the height of a
convenuonal living space, said ceiling stud forming a
frame for a subsequent horizontal extending ceUins wall
partition, and « •
a first and second vertically extending inner wall studs, said
mner wall studs having one end secured to said floor joist
and their other ends secured to said roof support at a
position spaced inwardly from one outer wall framing
member so that said other end of said first inner wall stud
mtersects said roof support at a position closely adjacent
to one end of said ceUing stud and so that said other end of
said second inner wall stud intersecto said roof support at
a position closely adjacent to the other end of said ceUing
stud, said inner wall studs forming a frame for subsequent
vertically extending wall partitions, said inner wall studs,
said ceiling stiid and said floor joUts together forming a
substantially rectangular area having a height equal to the
height of a conventional living space.
TRUSS CONSTRUCTION
Robert Heitaaa« Brighton, Mich. 48116
CntiiMatkNi.iii.part of Scr. No. 254,535, Apr. 15, 1981. Iliis
applicatton Jan. 29, 1981, Scr. No. 278,726
.,„ _ Int CLJ E04B 7/02
UAa52-93 4cial«
4,437,274
BUILDING PANEL
Donald H. Slocnm, VUla Park; Albert W. Schairbaum, St
Oiarle^ and WllUun M. Curtis, Genoa, all of lU., aidviors to
Mmmltt Corporation, Chicago, III
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,166
lat a.} E04D 1/00
UA a 52-105 „ ctata.
\J^'
1. A truM system for constructing the frame for an upper
level of a dwelling comprising:
a plurality of preassembled planar and rigid trusses, said
tnwM being spaced apart and lying in substantiaUy paraUel
at least two adjacent tinsses of said pluraUty of trusses being
substantially identical to each other, said at least two
adjacent trusses each comprising:
an elongated floor joist, said joist comprising a pair of elon-
^ted spaced and parallel floor stiids and a pluraUty of
croas braces extending between and secured to said floor
studs,
a pair of elongated outer wall framing membera, each outer
1. A unitary building panel formed of composite wood fi-
brous material having generaUy paraUel. inner and outer faces
outlined by opposite ends and by upper and lower edges, said
opposite ends of said panel adapted to closely face the end of
an adjacent panel in the same course, said outer face having a
large lower portion adapted for exposure to the weather with
a substantiaUy greater surface area than a narrow upper surface
portion having a relatively smaUer. substiutiaUy planar, sur-
^fV^ •***P***' ^ underUe a generaUy planar lower portion
of the mner face of one or more of said panels laid up in a next
higher course, said lower surface area of said outer face being
deeply embossed to resemble a plurality of shingle-lUce ele-
mentt laid up in a common course with each of said shingle lUce
elementt separated from an adjacent element by a groove
Upered from a shallow depth adjacent an upper end adjacent
said narrow upper surface portion teward a maximum depth
opening into said lower edge of said panel, one of said opposite
ends having a lateraUy outwardly projecting integral spacer
adjacent an end of said smaUer narrow upper surface portion
extending lateraUy outwardly from said one of said opposite
ends to provide an expansion space of a width generaUy simUar
to the width of said grooves between a lower portion of said
one end and an adjacent end of an adjacent panel positioned m
the same course.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
967
4,437,275
COLLAPSIBLE SELF.SUPPORTING STRUCTURES
Tbaodora R. Zaiglar, Oxoa HUl, Md^ aaaignor to Nooudic
Stmctvaa, Inc., AlcxaBdria, Va.
DlTiikNi of Sar. No. 45^46, Jut 4, 1979, Pat No. 4,290^44,
which ia a contiaiiatioa of Sar. No. 919,131, Job. 26, 1978,
•bandoMd, which is a contianatioB of Ser. No. 763,701, Jaa. 28,
1977, abandoMd, which ia a diviaioB of Sar. No. 704J11, Jul. 13,
1976, Pat No. 4,026,313. Thia appUcatlon Aug. 7, 1981, Scr. No.
291,067
The portloB of the tern of thia patent subsequent to Jul. 13,
1993, has been disclahned.
lot a.) E04H 12/18
VJS. CL 53—109 18 Claina
1. A plurality of assemblies of crossed rod elements for
forming a self-supporting structure, said assembly comprising,
in combination:
a first series of at least three rod elements pivotally con-
nected at their inner ends to define a central inner apical
point and lying substantiaUy in a common plane;
a second series of at least three rod elements pivotally inter-
cotmected at their inner ends to define a central outer
apical point which is in spaced registry with said central
inner apical point;
the outer ends of said first series of rod elements defining
further outer apical points and the outer ends of said
second series of rod elements defining further inner apical
points, said further outer apical points defining the comers
of a polygon having a pair of opposite, parallel sides; and
said first and second series of rod elements being disposed in
crossed relations such that the two inner further apical
points on each one of said pair of opposite, parallel sides
are more closely spaced than the corresponding outer
further apical points but with the inner further apical
points on the remaining sides being spaced the same u the
corresponding outer fiirther apical points arranged in
interconnected relation with alternate rows of said central
outer apical points lying on the same side of the structure
whUe the remainder of the rows of the central outer apical
points lie on the opposite side of the structure, and with
said opposite, parallel sides in parallel relation whereby to
define a flat structure.
4,437,276
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE PERFORMANCE OF
A SUPPORTING FUNCnON IN A PASSAGE
Jargaa Goldberg, Mlttelwcg 15, D*7801 UnUrcfa, Fad. Rap. of
Gcmaay
Filed Sap. 29, 1981, Scr. No. 307,082
ClataM priority, appUcatioB Fad. Rap. of Gcmaay, Oct 2,
1980, 3037177
lat ai E04B 1/41
VS. CL 52— 125 J 49 ClaiM
1. A device for peforming a supporting function in a passage
having an open end of predetermined cross sectionid area
comprising:
(a) a plug which i^ expandable to aaid predetermined cross-
sectional area and contractible to a lesser crocs-sectional
area, said plug having an outer end which is adapted to be
located in the region of the open end of the passage and an
inner end which is adapted to be located internally of the
passage;
(b) an adjusting member for adjusting the cross-sectional
area of said plug, said adjusting member engaging said
plug in the regions of said outer and inner ends and being
operative to lengthen and shorten said plug in axial direc-
tion thereof to thereby respectively reduce and increase
the croM-sectional area of said plug, and said adjusting
member having threaded portions in the regions of said
outer and inner ends; and
(c) threaded sleeves srranged in the regions of said outer and
inner ends and receiving respective ones of said threaded
portions, said threaded portions and threaded sleeves
being designed in such a manner that a predetermined
rotation of said adjusting member causes said threaded
portions to advance by difTerent amounu, and the respec-
tive seu of threaded portions and threaded sleeves having
difTerent thread diameters.
4,437477
Patent Not Issued For This Number
4,437,278
WALL PARTITION LOCKING SYSTEM
DoMld K. TboiiM, Jr.. 1710 Laaral St, Paaadcaa, Calif. 91030
FUad Feb. 22, 1982, Scr. No. 350J21
lat a> B21B Sl/08; B21C 1/04. 1/12
U.S. a. 52—239 7 OaiaH
1. A locking system for uniting two modular wall partitions
normal to each other wherein each partition includes vertical
end portions two spaced panels each respectively forming
outer and iimer wall surfaces, spacer means to maintain said
panels in spaced relationship, said locking system comprising:
an elongated first frame member generally H shaped in
968
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
cross-section having a coplaner wall partition receiving
inner and outer channel formed by a pair of spaced paral-
lel legs, said channels divided by a cross member extend-
ing between said legs and said legs of said outer channel
extending around one of said end portions and engaging
the outer and inner wall surfaces of a first wall partition;
an elongated second frame member which includes a gener-
ally U shaped portion in cross section forming a wall
partition receiving channel for a second wall partition
normal to said first wall partition, said U shaped portion
formed by a pair of spaced parallel legs and including a
base member, and said legs of said outer channel extending
around one of said end portions and engaging the outer
and inner wall surfaces of said second of said partitions.
!--«
gated planks of urethane thermal insulating material, said
courses of planks being joined together by adhesive and verti-
cally disposed pins which extend into the planks in adjacent
courses, the course of planks in contact with said foundation
being joined end to end by adhesive and horizontally disposed
pins extending into the ends of adjacent planks, the outer
surface of said outer layer being coated with a layer of hard.
waterproof material formed of fiber filled mortar, an inner
layer extending in substantially parallel spaced relationship to
said outer layer, said inner layer being formed from blocks of
refractory material, said refractory material being formed by
ceramic tile joined by mortar joints, and a reinforced concrete
core completely filling the space between said inner and outer
layers and being adhered thereto.
6" oe23ig^
4A '
said second frame member also includes a generally T
shaped portion in cross section projecting from said base
member forming a coplaner inner and outer channel be-
tween said base member and the top of said T with the
plane of said channels running normal to the plane of said
wall receiving channel of U shaped portion;
a portion of said elongated first frame member adapted to
frictionally interfit within a portion of second frame mem-
ber; and
removable locking means including a portion in said first
elongated frame member and a portion in said second
elongated frame member which when united will draw
said frame member toward each other and maintain the
first and second partitions in interlocked relationship one
normal to the other.
4,437,279
THERMALLY INSULATED TANK STRUCTURE AND
METHOD FOR FORMING THE SAME
John E. Macaleese, Watertown, N.Y., iMignor to Stebbins
EagbMeriog and Manufacturing Co., Watertown, N.Y.
FUcd Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,246
Int. Q\? E04B 1/32
UA a 52-247 ,7 cwms
16. A thermally insulated tank structure secured to a founda-
tion comprising a tank sidewall secured to the foundation and
defining an enclosed tank chamber, said tank sidewall includ-
ing an outer layer formed from superimposed courses of elon-
4,437,280
CABINET PANEL CONNECTOR
Da?ld L. Collier, 255 NW. 96th Ave., Portland, Oreg. 97229
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,891
lot. a.3 E04B 7/00
U.S. a 52-285 ,1 Claim.
32 t J* ,ib
1. In combination with a pair of panels to be connected
together, one panel provided with a mounting slot extending
inwardly from one side edge thereof and the second panel
provided with a locking bore, a panel connector comprising:
(a) a body member,
(b) a base member connected integrally to and projecting
from said body member, the base member configured to
slidably enter said mounting slot from said one side edge,
with the body member projecting from the surface of said
one panel facing said second panel, the base member also
configured to engage said one panel to secure the base
member and body member against movement in the direc-
tion of the surface of said one panel facing said second
panel,
(c) a locking pin associated with said body member arranged
to intercept said bore in the second panel and thereby
lockably interconnect said second panel and the body
member secured to said one panel, and
(d) second panel support means on the one panel arranged to
engage the side of the second panel opposite said body
member to prevent movement of the second panel away
from the body member and disengagement from the lock-
ing pin.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
969
4,437,281
WALL CONSTRUCTION PREFABRICATED FROM
SELF-CONNECTABLE ELEMENTS
Jacques L. A. Sec, NeuUly-iur-Scine, and Sylrain V. L. Cbe-
Ttiinc, Themcricourt, both of France, aislgnort to Honeycomb
Panelf Patents Association Inc., MaUbu, Calif.
FUcd Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 345,136
Claims priority, appUcation France, Feb. 3, 1981, 81 02036
Int. a.3 E04C l/OO
U.S. a. 52—309.1 9 Claims
bers in the area between said legs and poinu, said retainer
portion metallic members being disposed perpendicular to the
plane of said bight, the spacing of said disul end portions being
variably responsive to compression and release to an expanded
condition of said central expansion member.
1. A wall construction prefabricated from self-connectable
elements divided each into four compartments by cross-pieces
and each comprising ribs forming diagonals, characterized by
first and second hollow elements, the first hollow clement
comprising a square frame forming also cross-pieces and diago-
nal ribs, said hollow element having on one side protruding
fingers for cooperating with a facing plate formed with holes
corresponding to the protruding fingers, the diagonal ribs
protruding on other side of the frame and being each formed
with a least one notch complementary to that of the similar
diagonal ribs carried by the second element, the second ele-
ment being made in the same manner as the first element but
closed on its side opposite to that from which protrude the
diagonal ribs so that said second element forms a facing sur-
face.
4,437,282
INSULATION SUPPORT HANGER
Michael B. O'Brien, 23 Shelbume Rd., Yonkers, N.Y. 10710
Filed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 386,190
Int. a.3 E04B 2/00
U.S. a. 52—407 2 Claims
1. An insulation hanger device adapted to be applied by
one-handed operation of an installer into mounted position
between opposed parallel wooden surfaces, such as the sur-
faces of adjacent studs or joists, comprising an integral length
of resilient metallic bar stock material, said material being bent
to define a central bight or loop portion defining an expansion
member generally U-shaped in plan and including spaced,
generally parallel legs, the spacing between said legs being
such as to permit the same to bie squeezed toward each other by
the hand of an installer, a linear rod member extending out-
wardly from the end of each said leg, said rod members being
in co-axial alignment, the distal ends of said rod members
defining sharpened points, the combination including retainer
portions defined by metallic members affixed to said rod mem-
4,437,283
SINGLE-PLY ROOnNG SYSTEM
Louis J. Bcnoit, 1893 Highland Pkwy., St. Paul, Minn. 55116
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 358,175, Mar. 15, 1982. This
appUcation Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 432,033
Int. a.3 E04B i/00
U.S. a. 52—410 12 Claims
1. Roofing system sealing member for use in a roofing system
having a roof covering sheet formed of a material and having
a length and a width, comprising, in combination; a covering
member formed from a material, with the material being suffi-
ciently flexible to allow its application over irregular shapes
and being able to withstand the expansion and contraction of
the roof, with the covering member having a longitudinal
length dimension and a fu^t edge and a second edge defining a
lateral width dimension therebetween, with the lateral width
dimension being substantially less than the width of the roof
covering sheet; a tape having sufficient fiexibility to allow its
application over irregular shapes and able to withsund the
expansion and contraction of the roof and the roof sheet, with
the tape having a longitudinal length dimension and a first edge
and a second edge defining a lateral width dimension therebe-
tween, with the width of the Upe being larger than the width
of the covering member and being substantially less than the
width of the roof covering sheet, and with the tape having a
first surface adhered to the covering member with the first
edge of the covering member being located laterally inwardly
of the first edge of the tape forming a first sealing edge and
with the second edge of the covering member being located
laterally inwardly of the second edge of the upe forming a
second sealing edge, and with the tape having a second, ex-
posed surface for adherence to the roof sheet; with the Upe
being fabricated with the covering member as a composite unit
off the job site allowing its efficient manufacture and installa-
tion; wherein when a first composite roofing system sealing
member intersects with a second composite roofing system
sealing member to form troughs, the first and second sealing
edges formed by the upe which extend beyond the covering
member and the covering member of the first sealing member
adhere to the roof sheet adhering surface of the Upe of the
second sealing member to act as seam sealers in the troughs
created at the intersection of the roofing system sealing mem-
bers.
970
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M37,284
SNAP^N FALSE MUNTIN SYSTEM
JttMt T. Cribbea, Mednnicsbwg, and WUlian J. Icbter, Camp
HIU, both of Pa^ aadgnon to Capitol Prodncts Corporatioa.
Meeluuikabttrg, Pa. .^ -,
FOed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 175,127
lot. a.i E06B 3/70
VS. a. 52-456 J ciMlm
ber and head member is provided with a groove facins
towards the center of the framework, the grooves between the
legs of the posts facing toward said center, the outer faces of
the portions of the base and head members adjacent the
grooves are inclined to extend parallel to said inclined faces of
said posts, and said wall panels are thin walled panel sections
havmg mtumed flanges along all edges inclined to correspond
^1 H ^«P«tive inclined surfaces of the posts, base mem-
bers and head members, said flanges at their outer edges being
provided with folded back lip portions which engage with J
snap-flt in the grooves of the respective posu. base members
and head members.
4,437,286
P.il'J'Ji^ ^^^ ^^^^ FASTENER ASSEMBLY
Paul R, Ntogirire, Lo. Angelea, Calif , aarigiwr to PleloB Corpo.
ration, Santa Ana, Calif. ^^^
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,181
,i« ^ - Int a^ E04B ;/i«
UA a 52-506 ,7 0^
1. A false muntin assembly for a window having a peripheral
sash, a glazing pane with a single light and a glazing bead
holding said glazing pane in position in said sash comprising (a)
an extruded false muntin bar having a central hole and channel
extendmg into the hole from the back side of said bar and at its
apex slightly narrower than the diameter of said central hole
said bar being shaped at its end to fit either the glazing bead or
an intersection with another said bar. (b) a pin connector dis-
posed m the cttitral hole of the ends of said bar for connection
of said bar with either the glazing bead or another said bar at
an mtcrsection. and (c) a metal clip having a head, two angu-
larly spaced-apart legs projecting therefrom, each leg ending
in a flange, said clip being adapted to snap-fit its head in the
channel and central hole of said bar whereby said pin connec-
tor and clip can be snapped on in substantially the same manner
so that when said chp is adhered to the glazing panel in proper
alignment said false muntin assembly is releasably attached
thereto and forms a multi-light effect.
4,437,285
BUILDING STRUCTURE
Inge Aoderson, and Ronny Johansson, both of PI. 3322 B
Askimitcr. Sweden 430 21 '
IJis per appUcation tuea Apr. 2/, 1981, Ser. No. 336,358
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden. Anr. 29. 1980. 8003222
PCT No. PCT/FCi at 81/00127, §371 Date Dec. 22, 1981.
§ 102(e) Date Dec. 22, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO 81/03194 PCT
Pub. Date No?. 12, 1981
lat CI.i A47F 5/00; E04B 2/60
VS. a. 52-Wl ^ Claims
1. A modular wall panel fastener assembly for securing
accessory items to a fibrous compressible panel member with a
flexible cover comprising:
a mounting base having a cavity;
an open loop helical penetrating member secured at one end
to, and extending from, the mounting base cavity to termi-
nate in a relatively sharp tip for penetrating the flexible
cover of the panel member with a minimum of damage,
the loops of the heUcal member being embedded in the
fibrous panel member; and
a grommet member having a base with an opening and a
hollow tubular projecting member extending from the
base to provide an opening extending through the grom-
met member, the projecting member U of a configuration
that is capable of extending within the mounting base
cavity depending on the thickness of the accessory item,
the penetrating member being diametrically smaller than
the tubular projecting member and routable relative
therein for a guiding insertion through the grommet mem-
ber opening into the panel member.
1. A building structure incorporating a framework of verti-
cal posts, interconnected by base members and head members
and with separate wall panels fitted in the spaces between the
posts, base members and headmembers, comprising each post
has an approximately H-shaped cross-section having legs and a
web between the legs forming oppositely disposed grooves,
the outer face of each leg is inclined inwardly, each base mem-
4,437,287
CEILING PANEL
Thomas C. HalfUcer, Tapclo, Mlaa., avigBor to Emenoo Eiee-
trie Co., St Louis, Mo.
Filed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,190
lat a.J E04B 1/82. J/38. 1/74
UA a 52-588 jcwm
1. In a ceiling comprised of rectangular metal ceiling panels
havmg a face panel and a back panel spaced from one another,
the side and end margins of each said face and back panel being
defined by the bend of a lip integral with said panel, the Ups of
said back and face panek being joined to form side and end
walls connecting said face and back panels, the improvement
comprising each end margin of said back panel's extending
beyond the end margin of said face panel along the said end
waU, the end lip of said back panel extending in a direction
toward said face panel and the end Up of said face panel along
said end margin being bent upwardly and then outboardly to
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
971
form a channel bottom, thence toward said face panel at an
obtuse angle with respect to said channel bottom to defme an
outboardly tending channel wall, thence toward said back
panel to face-to-face engagement with said back panel end lip.
4,437,288
LATnCE-TYPE STRUCTURE, PARTICULARLY MAST
SUPPORT OF ANTENNA
Yvea F<riaiac and FMeric N. B. Hong, both oTSaiM Amand les
Eanx, France, aaaigaon to Laboratoire d'Etodes ct de Recber-
ches Chiadqiiea L.E.R.C., France
FUed Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,674
Claiffla priority, appUcatioB Fnuicc, Dae 1, 1980, 80 25454
Int CL> E04H 12/00
V&, CL 52-637 7 daims
lUce containers comprising, a machine frame, labelUng means
mounted on the frame for applying labels to the bottle, capping
means mounted on the frame for applying caps on the bottle,
bottle support means mounted on the frame, bottle feeding
means for feeding bottles successively onto said bottle support
means and removing said bottles therefrom, means for convey-
ing said bottle suppori means to a labelling position adjacent
said labeUing means and under said capping means, cap support
means mounted on said frame, cap feeding means for succes-
sively feeding said caps to said cap support means, cap orient-
ing means mounted on said frame for orienting said cap sup-
port means having caps thereon with respect to a predeter-
mined position, cap holding meant mounted on said frame for
engaging and holding a cap in the oriented position and con-
veying it to a bottle on said support means and depositing the
cap onto said bottle, and power drive means for synchronously
driving the above said means.
4,437,290
MACHINE FOR CRIMPING IN A CONTROLLED
ATMOSPHERE
Jean-Charles Marchadour, La FeuUleraic, Kerbascol, St Jean
TroUmon, France (29120 Pont I'Abbc)
FUed Oct 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,304
Claims priority, appUcation France, Oct. 17, 1980, 80 22241
lat a.} B65B 31/02
VS. a. 53—97 4 Claims
1. A lattice type structure, which comprises:
(a) a plurality of cyUndrical, continuous uprights disposed in
paraUel Uke the parallel edges of a regular prism, and
(b) a pluraUty of rigid reinforcing panels connecting in two's
said uprights.
(c) said panels comprising at least one pair of cylindrical
sleeves having integral open socket means for holding
reinforcing crosspieces, said sleeves having planar end
faces with said uprights passing through said sleeves and
said faces; the inner diameter of said sleeve being larger
than the inner diameter of the socket means and the inter-
section of the axis of the socket means and the axis of said
sleeve being at or near the intersection of one of said end
faces with said sleeve axis, whereby reinforcing cross-
pieces may be inserted through said one end face, into said
sleeve and thence into and through a said socket means;
and reinforcing crosspieces engaged in said socket means
for connecting said pair of sleeves together.
4,437,289
AUTOMATIC KIACHINE FOR CAPPING AND
LABELLING BOTTLES OR LIKE CONTAINERS
Jeaa Badia, Bordaan, lYaMe, aaaivMir to EtabUascaMBts Lar-
rienbadiB "U GlroiidlM", U Booacat FtaMe
Filed Nof. 2, 1981, Sar. No. 317,314
dalBH priority. appttcatioB Rraoee, Nor. 7, 1980, 80 23821
lat CL> B67B S/00: B65B 7/28 61/00
VS. CL 53—64 5 Claiu
I. Machine for automaticaUy capping and labelling bottles or
I ,'7
27
9 23 26 lOa ipe
1. In a machine for crimping sub-assemblies in a controlled
atmosphere, comprised of a frame forming support for a crimp-
ing head routed about a vertical axis and for a device for
supplying and evacuating the sub-assemblies to be assembled,
moving in a plane substantially perpendicular to the said axis
and partly beneath said head, said device and the frame coop-
erating to form an enclosure surrounding the crimping head
and a source of vacuum or of neutral gas connected to said
enclosure, the said enclosure being shaped at least for part in an
element of the frame mobile with respect to the fixed remain-
der of the frame,
means for pivotally mounting said element on said frame
about a lateral axis parallel to the axis of roution of the
crimping head forming a door to be closed in tight manner
on a front surface of join arranged on said fixed frame, and
the said crimping head is mounted to rotate in a support,
means for pivotaUy mounting said support to the frame to
pivot out of the enclosure about a lateral axis parallel to
972
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
and transversely opposite the pivot axis of said door and
on opposite side of said crimping head axis, said support
comprising a bracket for supporting the crimping head for
iu positioning in or pivoting out of said enclosure.
connection of one end of the tether to the head and the
other end of the tether to the ring.
4,437,291
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR STOPPERING
MODinED BOTTLES WITH A ONE-PIECE CORKING
MEANS
Eflm Zaitsman, Brooklyn, N.Y., assignor to Monarch Wine Co.,
Inc., Brooklyn, N.Y.
DIfision of Ser. No. 223,894, Jan. 9, 1981, abandoned. This
appUcation Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 369,191
Int. a.J B67B 1/04. 3/22. 7/20
U.S. a. 53-319 2 Claims
4,437,292
APPARATUS FOR SEALING CONTAINERS
Hermann Buri, and Beat Karth, both of Kirchberg, Switzerland,
assignors to Nyffeler, Corti AG, Berne, Switzerland
FUed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,699
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 23
1980, 8014020[U] ^ *
Int. a.J B67B 7/28
U A a 53-357 7 claims
1. An apparatus for stoppering a bottle having an elongated
neck portion with a mouth and an annular flange thereon near
the mouth, utilizing a molded one-piece elastomeric corking
means having an elongated, generally circular cylindrical
stopper, insertable with frictional engagement into the mouth
of the bottle, a head connected to the stopper, an annular
circumferential ring positioned and spaced below the head as
molded and being concentric with the stopper, the internal
diameter of said ring being slightly smaller than the external
diameter of said annular flange on the bottle, a flexible elon-
gated tether having one end connected to the ring and the
other end connected to the head for joining said ring to said
head, the tether being in a folded state as molded and having a
length substantially greater than the distance between said one
end and said other end in the folded state of the tether, the
tether in its folded state not extending away from the axis of
the stopper by a distance greater than the radius of the ring, the
tether being long enough to permit the cork to be withdrawn
(tpm the mouth of the bottle while the tether is unfolded and
while the ring is captive on the bottle and to move far enough
away from said mouth to permit pouring of the liquid contents
from the bottle, and at least one short frangible bridge connect-
ing the folded tether to another element of the corking means,
said stoppering apparatus comprising:
(a) nieans for holding the corking means in alignment and
orienution above the mouth of an open bottle for stopper-
ing of said bottle;
(b) means for driving the stopper into the mouth of the bottle
and for lowering the ring toward but not over the flange
on the bottle; and
(c) means for thereafter forcing the ring downwardly over
the annular flange causing the ring first to expand as it
passes over the flange and then to constrict after it has
passed the flange and causing at least one frangible bridge
to break, thereby releasing the tether to permit the stopper
to move away from the mouth of the bottle except for the
1. Apparatus for sealing a thin cover coated with thermo-
plastic material to a rim of a container, of the type comprising
a heauble sealing head and a resiliently yielding pressing mem-
ber together adapted for transmitting pressure and heat to said
cover, said pressing member including two or more super-
posed cup springs having radially inner portions fixed to said
sealing head and radially outer portions, said cup springs hav-
mg a relaxed state in which said springs are conically disposed
with said radially outer portions being spaced axially out-
wardly of said sealing head, wherein the improvement com-
prises:
a spacer piece disposed between said radially inner portions
of the one of said cup springs remotest from said sealing
head and of at least another one of said cup springs, said
spacer piece having a smaller outside diameter than said
one of said cup springs, whereby a clearance space is
created between said cup springs.
4,437,293
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING A
RECLOSABLE PACKAGE
Philip A. Sanborn, Jr., Spartaoburg, S.C., assignor to W. R.
Grace A Co., Cryo?ac Di?., Duncan, S.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 65^0, Aug. 9, 1979, Pat No.
4,240,241. Thif appUcation Not. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,440
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 23,
1997, baa been disclaimed.
iBt a.J B65B 31/02. 61/18
UA a 53-412 2 Claims
C^V. ''5— VSl af
1. A method for making a reclosable package from thermo-
plastic materials comprising the steps of:
(a) providing a formable web, a covering web, and a closure
strip;
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
973
(b) forming a cavity with a peripheral flange in said forming
web so that said closure strip remains on a portion of said
peripheral flange;
(c) advancing the forming web and closure strip towards
each other;
(d) sealing the lower surface of the closure strip to the form-
ing web longitudinally in the direction of travel of the
forming web;
(e) indenting a portion of said closure strip by the application
of heat and pressure at intervals spaced apart by approxi-
mately the desired length of the package;
(0 placing a product in said cavity;
(g) covering said product with said covering web;
(h) evacuating the space between said webs;
(i) sealing the webs together with longitudinal and trans-
verse seals, one longitudinal seal being adjacent and paral-
lel to but spaced apart from the closure strip with the
closure strip within the periphery of the seals, and the
transverse seals being made across the closure strip where
a portion of the strip had been indented; and
(j) sealing the upper surface of the closure strip to the cover-
ing web.
4,437,294
VOLUMETRIC BATCHING DEVICE FOR PROVIDING
PREDETERMINED BATCHES OF A FLUENT
MATERIAL
Andrea RomagnoU, San Lazzaro di Savena, Italy, assignor to
I.M.A.-Industria Macchlne Automatiche-S.p.A., Ozzano
EmUia, Italy
FUed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,123
Gaims priority, appUcation Italy, Apr. 17, 1980, 3389 A/80
lot. a.} B65B 9/02
VJS, a. 53—553 2 Claims
1. A volumetric batching device providing predetermined
batches of a fluent material in a packaging machine, compris-
ing: a cylindrical dispensing drum having a periphery and
rotating about a horizontal axis, said drum having a plurality of
radially outwardly open pockets and a plurality of radially
movable pistons, each of said plurality of pistons being associ-
ated with and defining a respective one of said pockets; means
for supplying the material to be dispensed into the pockets, said
supplying means being arranged near said drum; a smoothing
element positioned near a top dead center point of said drum;
and means for guiding a filter paper strip around and in a
direction of rotation of said drum from said smoothing element
to a position at a bottom dead center point of said drum from
which the predetermined batch of the material is forwarded to
a packaging station; means for moving each piston between a
first position of a maximum distance to the periphery of the
drum in which first position the piston passes the top dead
center point of said drum and is located below the supplying
means for receiving the predetermined batch of the product
and a second position of a minimum distance to the periphery
of the drum in which second position the piston passes the
bottom dead center point for discharging the predetermined
batch of the material, each of said pistons having an inside
hollow cylindrical space and an outer perforated portion fac-
ing the periphery of the drum and defming the respective
pockets so as to provide ventilation of the pocket into the inner
cylindrical space of each piston and thereby preventing adher-
ing of the material to the outer portion of each piston.
4,437,295
AUTOMATIC HEADER HEIGHT CONTROL
MerUn A. Rock, Bettendorf, Iowa, assignor to International
Harvester Co., Chicago, III.
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,481
Int. a.3 AOID 75/28
U.S. Q. 56— lOJ 24 Claims
7. An automatic header height control apparatus for use
with a header of a farm implement, the height of which header
can be adjusted relative to the ground therebeneath, said appa-
ratus comprising: means for continuously sensing the height of
th? header above ground; means for selecting a desired height
of the header above ground; and multifunction electrical cir-
cuit means, coupled to said sensing means and said selecting
means (a) for continuously determining any difTerence error
between the selected height and the sensed height, (b) for
determining the directi-^n of the difference error, up or down,
(c) for continuously generating a train of electrical correction
pulses at a predetermined constant frequency, each electrical
correction pulse of said train of pulses having a constant ampli-
tude and a duty cycle directly related to the amount of differ-
ence error, (d) for supplying said electrical correction pulses to
solenoid operated valving means to cause same to supply and-
/or relieve a pulse of pressurized fluid to a mechanism for
raising or lowering the header for each electrical correction
pulse received and (e) for repeatedly determining the differ-
ence error and direction of the difference error, and cyclically
generating correction pulses and supplying said correction
pulses to the solenoid operated valving means to move the
header in intermittent pulses toward the selected height,
thereby automatically to control the height of the header
above ground.
4,437,296
DRAPER PICK-UP TINE
Victor B. Erdraan, Leatbbridgc, Canada, assignor to Victory
Equipment Limited, Lcthbridgc, Canada
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 108,562, Dec. 31, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,938
Int. a.3 AOID 77/00
U.S. a. 56-^100 8 Claims
1. A pick-up tine assembly for use with drapers, pick-up belts
or the like which constitutes a flexible supporting surface;
comprising a supporting surface engaging base portion, a tine
extending from said base portion and means on the underside
of said base portion to prevent said tine assembly from inadver-
tent turning relative to the plane of said supporting surface,
when attached thereto, said means including at least one edge
sharpened rib extending across said underside of said base and
projecting from the plane thereof, said base portion including
a dome-shaped supporting surface engaging element, a tine
974
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
attaching block formed upon the upper side of said element,
'*^S ^^"T****"* upwardly and outwaidly from one end of
said block, clampmg means detachably securing said assembly
to the supportmg surface in any radial position relative to the
plane of said supporting surface whereby said tine extends and
is mauitamed m any desired radial direction reUtive to the
plane of said supporting surface, said clamping means includ-
ing a screw threaded bolt, a relatively large head on said bolt
having a flat outer surface and a domed inner surface, said bolt
extendmg through said supporting surface, with the domed
Uie routional velocity of the first and second cages from M
durmg the transient starting to 1:2 during operation, guiding
means bemg also provided on the second machine for the wires
of said first group, disposed externally of the cage, on both its
extremities, and fastened with the same and oriented copU-
narly to the roution axis of said second cage.
4,437,298
APPARATUS FOR JOINING TEXTILE THREADS WITH
THE AID OF COMPRESSED AIR, FOR MOUNTING ON
AN AUTOMATIC WINDING MACHINE
Ferdinando Tmzri, tnd M«iro Premi, both of Sdo' . Itely.
aaiignors to Meidan S.pji., Sale' , Italy
FUed Jul. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 386,681
Ctolms priority, appUcation Italy, Jan. II, 1981, 22268 A/81
„ « ^'■** ^'' ^^" <^^/^' "^IH ^^yoa- D02J J/OS
UA a 57-22 UCtolma
inner surface engaging one side of said supporting surface, said
base portion of the tine assembly being concave, said tine
assembly being situated on the other side of said supporting
surface, said bolt engaging through said base portio^i. and
screw threaded clamp means engaging the upper end of said
bolt and clamping said tine assembly to said supporting surface
and urging said supporting surface into said concave base
whereby the flat outer surface of the bolt head is substantially
flush with said one side of said supporting surface, and the said
nb embeds within said supporting surface.
4,437,297
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING METALUC CORDS IN
LAYERS
Alberto Veapaaiani, Milan, Italy, aadgnor to Sodeta'
Pneumatici Pirelli S.p.A., Milan, Italy
FUed Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,367
Claima priority, appUcation Italy, Feb. 26, 1981, 19994 A/81
I"t- CI.^ D07B 3/04. 3/12. 7/02
lis. a. 57—9 ,Q Q^ijj^
..■ :'^A>/.y
"u «
1. An apparatus for producing metallic cords for reinforcing
elastomenc structures, comprising a central core and at least
one crown layer, the wires of each crown layer being mutuaUy
helical and parallel and wound on the layer radially inwardly
therefrom and on the central core, said apparatus comprising
first and second double-twist type machines disposed in tan-
dem, each of said machines consisting essentially of a cage
rotatable around its own axis and of a cradle which is disposal
m the cage and co-axial therewith, and freely rotatable around
Its own axis, the first cradle being adapted to support delivery
bobbm or bobbins of a first group of wires for forming said
crown layer, the second cradle being adapted to support deliv-
ery bobbm or bobbins of a second group of wires for forming
a central core on which a crown layer of wires is to be wound
said apparatus comprising also a preforming device adapted to
deform permanently be bending the wires of said first group
and a device reciprocaUy coupling said first and second ma-
chine which IS adapted to maintain during operation a constant
raoo of 1:2 between the rotation velocities of the first and
second cages, said apparatus being characterized by the fact
that said couplmg device allows variation of said ratio between
1. An apparatus for joining textile threads with the aid of
compressed air, designed for mounting on an automatic wind-
mg machme provided with means for inserting both the yams
to be jomed together fixMn the same side of the apparatus, and
with a power take-off for operating the apparatus, comprising
a support structure with a block in which a lateraUy and fron-
tally open mixing chamber substantially of V cross-section is
formed, an aperture opening centrally at the base of said cham-
ber and connected by way of a shut-off valve to a compressed
air source, a cover carried by a support movably mounted in
said structure so as to frontally close said chamber, means for
controlling the movement of said cover from a rest position
withdrawn from the chamber to a frontal closure position
therefor, means synchronised with said cover movement con-
trol means for causing said shut-off valve to open for a prede-
termined time when the cover is in the position in which it
closes the chamber, fixed guides for posiUoning the threads to
be jomed together, locking members for the threads consti-
tuted by fixed and mobile elements, members constituted by
fixed and mobile blades for cutting the free ends of the threads,
and means for controlling the mobile elements of the locking
members and the mobile blades of the cutting members in
synchronism with the movement of the cover, characterised in
that said structure is provided with two opposing walls which
are parallel to each other and to the longitudinal axis of the
mixing chamber and disposed at a distance respectively in front
of and behind the block comprising said chamber, the thread
positioning guides being provided in said walls in aligned pairs
to receive the threads to be joined together along parallel axea
perpendicular to the axis of the chamber and passing to the side
of this latter, the two guides provided in the wall disposed in
front of the chamber being at different heights, on said waU
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
975
disposed in front of the chamber there being mounted rocking
means for crossing-over the threads in the region between said
waU and the mixing chamber, the mobile and fixed elemenU of
the members fox locking the threads and of the mobile levers
for adjusting the length of the free ends of the threads being
mounted on the wall disposed behind the block comprising the
mixing chamber in positions corresponding to the positioning
guides provided in this wall, on the same wall there being
mounted a member for operating the shut-off valve, the cutting
members being disposed at the two sides of the mixing cham-
ber with the mobile blades rigid with the support for the cham-
ber closure cover, in said structure there being mounted a
control drum which is rotatable about iu axis, can be coupled
to said power take-off of the winding machine, and is provided
with a plurality of cam profiles for controlling the movementt
of the members for crossing-over the threads, the mobile ele-
menu of the members for locking the threads, the mobile
levers for adjusting the length of the free ends of the threads,
the operating member for the shut-ofT valve and the cover with
the mobile blades of the members for cutting the threads.
4,437,300
DEVICE FOR THE CONTINUOUS SPINNING OF
TEXTILE YARNS
Louis VlgBOB, Gaatfa, Switaarlaad, Maifaor to HabarMa Hit-
paoo SA, Veraiar-G«B«?e, SwitierlaBd
FUad Not. 34, 1981, Sar. No. 334,943
Clatas priority, appUcatloB Fad. Rap. of Gamaay, Dae. 8,
1980, 3046180; Dec. 12, 1980, 3046932; Doc. 16, 1980. 3047275
Int a.J DOIH 1/06. 1/20, 7/66
VS. a. 57-74 10 dilBM
11-
12
<9
4,437,299
APPARATUS FOR JOINING TEXTILE THREADS WTTH
THE AID OF COMPRESSED AIR
Ferdinaiido Tmai, and Maoro Preml, both of Salo' , Italy,
aaaignors to Mesdan S.pji., Salo' , Italy
FUed Jna. 10, 1982, S«r. No. 387,147
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Jnn. 16, 1981, 22356 A/81
Int a.} B65H 69/06
VS. a. 57—22 8 Claims
1. In a device for continuous spinning of textile yam includ-
ing a spindle, a member for providing twist in the yam. said
member defining a yam guiding opening for guiding the yam
moving towards the spindle, means for mounting said member
for rotation about the spindle axis independently of the spindle,
spindle drive means for rotating the spindle, and drive means
for rotating said member, the improvement comprising a free-
wheel arranged between said member and said drive means for
rotating the member, for allowing the member to rotate more
rapidly than the member drive means.
4,437,301
METHOD OF MAKING YARN
Paul W. Eschenbach, Moora, and Andre M. Goineau, Spartan-
burg, both of S.C., aaaignors to Millikan Raaearch Corpora-
tion, Spartanburg, S.C.
FUed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,558
Int a.3 D02G 3/Oa 3/04
VS. O. 57-289 3 ciainu
•0
"^^.<.e^" ,.
'f.
I
, •• t. ^^
'•y--- - IT
/Tq,
Q
1. An apparatus for joining textile threads with the aid of
compressed air. provided with a mixing chamber, means for
feeding a burst of compressed air into said chamber for a prede-
termined time, and means which during the joining operation
lock the threads to be joined at the points in which they enter
the apparatus, characterised by incorporating a device for
checking the tearing strength of the joint zone of the two
threads comprising at least one mobUe member arranged to act
on the loop formed by the joined threads with a predetermined
traction force at an intermediate point between the locking
points at the apparatus inlet, control means for said mobile
member which are operated so that they travel through a
predetermined outward and return stroke, and a yieldable
coupling diqxMed between said mobUe member and said con-
trol means, said joint being set to yield when said predeter-
mined traction force is exceeded.
.1 ^
u
it
1. The method of producing an entangled, composite, multi-
976
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
filament synthetic yam comprising the steps of: supplying a
multifilament, partially oriented, synthetic core yam and a
multifilament, partially oriented, synthetic effect yam, heating
both the core and effect yams, drawing the core yam after
heating, drawing the effect yam after heating at a draw ratio
greater than the draw ratio of the core yam, supplying the
drawn effect yam directly without texturing to an air jet at a
first rate, supplying the drawn core yam directly without
texturing to the air jet at a second rate, entangling the untex-
tured core and effect yams in the air jet and taking up the
commingled yam from the air jet.
first thrust-related parameter determined by said main fuel
control unit in accordance with the setting of the throttle lever
4,437,302
FALSE TWISTING AIR NOZZLE
MeUi Anahara, Kariya, and Hiroshi Omori, Aichi, both of Ja-
pan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Toyoda Jidoshokki
Seisakusho, Aichi, Japan
Filed Jan. 19, 1983, Ser. No. 459,131
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 20, 1982, 57-7269;
Dec. 4, 1982, 57.183824[U]; Dec. 6, 1982, 57-184579rU]; Dec.
11,1982,57-217566
Int. a.J DOIH 7/92: D02G 1/04
U.S. a. 57—333 21 Claims
>>
., .,.,
'
w""'*-*!
""-"^'^
T^ 1 ,^
■>*»*^
' — :>
',
•* 16
31
' / ■'/
%
(^ "^ 1
^■^
' ^-^^
y/
y'/yy.
«./
1. A false twisting air nozzle comprising:
a fiber bundle passage for allowing a fiber bundle to pass
therethrough, said fiber bundle passage including an inlet,
a smaller-diameter hole portion, and a larger-diameter
hole portion which are arranged in series;
at least one air injection hole having end opening tangen-
tially and downstream in said larger-diameter hole por-
tion; and
at least one air passage disposed adjacent to said smaller-
diameter hole portion and in communication with said
larger-diameter portion.
is calculated and used to produce a first trim setting during
non-steady state operation of the engine.
4,437,304
STRUCTURE FOR CONTROLLING OPERATIONS OF
SECONDARY AIR SUPPLY MEANS AND THROTTLE
OPENER IN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE FOR
MOTORCYCLES
Yasuo Ikenoya, Kawagoe; Shuso Ueda, Asaka, and MasaAuni
Araki, Kawagoe, all of Japan, assignors to Honda Giken
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,334
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 24, 1981, 56-212713
Int. a.3 FOIN 3/22
U.S. a. 60-290 1 ctaln
4,437,303
FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A GAS TURBINE
ENGINE
Hugh F. Cantwell, Littleover, England, assignor to Rolls-Royce
Limited, London, England
FUed Nov. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 320,126
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Not. 26. 1980.
8037966
iBt Q\} F02C 9/26
U.S. a 60-39J81 sctaims
1. A fuel control system for a gas turbine engine comprising
transducers for producing signals related to parameters of the
engine, including at least one thrust-related parameter, a throt-
tle lever on which a desired engine thmst may be set, a main
steady-sute fuel control unit which determines a value of a
first said thrust-related parameter corresponding with the
setting of the throttle lever and controls the fuel fiow to the
engine to maintain the actual value of the first thrust-related
parameter determined from a transducer signal at least approx-
imately equal to the value determined by the fuel control unit,
and a trimmer device which provides a more accurate control
of engine thrust by trimming the fuel flow demanded by the
main fuel control unit, the trimmer incorporating a model of
said main fuel control unit in which the predicted value of said
1. A structure for controlling operations of a secondary air
supplying means and a throttle opener in an internal combus-
tion engine for motorcycles in which an internal combustion
engine is mounted on a main frame and includes suction and
exhaust systems, an exhaust gas cleaning means for supplying
secondary air to said exhaust system so as to clean an exhaust
gas flowing therethrough, a carburetor provided in said suc-
tion system and including a throttle valve, and a throttle
opener provided on said carburetor and adapted to open said
throttle valve slightly while said internal combustion engine is
rotated at a low speed, said stmcture comprising a secondary
air supply passage communicated with said exhaust system, a
control valve adapted to control a flow rate of the secondly
air flowing through said secondary air supply passage, a first
electromagnetic valve for opening and closing said secondary
air control valve, a second electromagnetic valve for control-
ling an operation of said throttle opener, a power source circuit
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
977
for connecting said first and second electromagnetic valves to
a power source, and a switch used in common with said sec-
ondary air supply means and said throttle opener, provided in
said power source circuit, and adapted to detect such a vehicle
speed of said motorcycle that is not higher than a predeter-
mined level and thereby shift the operations of said first and
second electromagnetic valves, whereby said secondary air
control valve is closed with the operation of said throttle
opener rendered ineffective at the same time.
4,437,306
EXHAUST GAS CLEANING DEVICE OF INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Yasno Dccooya, Kawagoe; Kanan Iwaahita, Sakato, and Hikam
Kimiira, Koganci, all of Japan, aadgnors to Honda Glkea
Kogyo Kabnshiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Sw. No. 428,793
Claims priority, appUcation Japui, Not. 25, 1981, 56-188555;
Dec. 9, 1981, 56-197888
Int a.5 POIN 3/30
U.S. a. 60—293 6 Claims
4,437,305
EXHAUST GAS CLEANING SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Yasuo Ikenoya; Masafumi Araki, both of Kawagoe, and Yod
Shimizu, Wako, all of Japan, assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,330
Chdms priority, application Japan, Dec. 17, 1981, 56-204302
Int. a.J FOIN 3/30
U.S. a. 60—293 1 Claim
1. In an exhaust gas cleaning system for internal combustion
engines which is provided with a secondary air feed system
connected to an exhaust port of an intemal combustion engine
and a reed valve device mounted midway of the secondary air
feed system and opened on an exhaust pulsation pressure aris-
ing in the exhaust port at the time of internal combustion
engine operation to feed an exhaust gas cleaning secondary air
to the exhaust port, the improvement characterized in that the
secondary air feed system has an upstream side secondary air
passage through to the atmosphere and a downstream side
secondary air passage formed on a thick wall zone of the
intemal combustion engine proper and connected through to
the exhaust port, the reed valve device has a valve casing
installed on the circumference of the engine proper, an inflow
port connected to the upstream side secondary air passage, and
an efflux port connected to the downstream side secondary air
passage, the valve casing is partitioned internally into an up-
stream chamber provided adjacently to the engine proper and
connected through to the inflow port and a downstream cham-
ber provided on a side away from the engine proper across the
upstream chamber and connected through to the efflux port, a
reed valve body to allow a secondary air to flow from the
upstream chamber to the downstream chamber on an exhaust
pulsation pressure in the exhaust port is arranged between both
the upstream and downstream chambers.
1. In an intemal combustion engine having a plurality of
exhaust systems which are made different in length from each
other and comprise a plurality of exhaust ports formed in an
engine main body and separately communicated with a com-
bustion chamber above a single cylinder and exhaust pipes
communicated with said plural exhaust ports respectively, an
exhaust gas cleaning device wherein secondary-air supply
pipes are communicated with said plural exhaust systems re-
spectively and further connected with reed valve means
adapted to open and close in response to the pulsation pres-
sures of the exhaust gas in said plurality of exhaust systems
communicated with said secondary-air supply pipes.
4,437,307
PRIORFTY FLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
Tadeusz Budzich, Moreland Hills, Ohio, assignor to Caterpillar
Tractor Company, Peoria, 111.
FUed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,035
Int. a.3 F15B 13/0%
UA a. 60—427 18 Claims
1. A priority flow control system supplied from a source of
pressure fluid and connected to exhaust means said priority
flow control system including a priority valve assembly opera-
978
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
ble to control a load and at least one other valve assembly said
other valve assembly having a housing connected to a fluid
motor, control orifice means in said housing interposed be-
tween said source of pressure fluid and said fluid motor, fluid
flow control means in said housing, first control means opera-
ble through said fluid flow control means to maintain a pres-
sure differential across said control orifice means at a con-
trolled constant level, and second control means having first
means responsive to maximum fluid flow from said source of
pressure fluid and second means operable through said fluid
flow control means and said first control means to vary the
level of said constant pressure differential whereby the level of
said constant pressure differential can be progressively low-
ered by said second means once fluid flow from said source of
pressure fluid will approach its maximum flow output and flow
demand of said priority flow control system will exceed said
maximum flow output.
M37.308
ROTARY HEAT ENGINE
Victor H. Flaeber, Artarmon, Anatralia, assignor to Thermal
SyatOH Liarited, Cayman Iilaads, British Weit lodiea
POed Dec 12, 1580, Ser. No. 215,824
ClaiBH priority, appUcation Aottralia, Aug. 18, 1980, PE5095
lat a.J POIK 7/36
UAa60-5l4 29CIafaii
4,437,309
PNEUMATIOHYDRAUUC SYSTEM FOR HYDRAUUC
ACTUATOR
OaaaiB Snzaki, ToyohasU; Koaio Yamagndii, Okaiald, aad
Mcgum YaauBMto, Toyokawa. aU of Japaa, aMieaon to
Toyooko Kogyo Kaboihiki Kaiiha, Japaa ^^
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 253,151
Claims priority, appUcatkM Japan, Apr. 22, 1980, 55-53959
lat a.3 B60T 13/00
UA a 60-547.1 4 0,^
1. A method of operating a rotary external combustion
engine having a stator therein defining a working space,
wherein energy is suppUed to the working space by means of a
vaporizable heat-transfer medium, which comprises
(1) in a compression cycle wherein the working space vol-
ume decreases, compressing gaseous heat-transfer medium
present in the wbrking space;
(2) generating externally of the working space heated heat-
transfer medium under a pressure such as to maintain the
medium in the liquid state;
(3) injecting into the compressed gaseous medium in the
working space said heated pressurized liquid medium,
whereby part of the liquid medium spontaneously vapor-
iiet, the remainder remaining as liquid, and raises the
internal energy of the working space;
(4) in an expansion cycle, allowing the volume of the work-
ing space to increase thereby driving the rotor, and
causing some recondensation of the vaporized medium to
occur:
(5) exhausting a mixture of liquid and gaseous heat-transfer
medium from the working space and leaving in the work-
ing space residual heat-transfer medium;
(6) receiving said exhausted mixture of Uquid and gaseous
heat-transfer medium in a trap; and
(7) recycling heat-transfer medium in the liquid sute from
the trap to step (2) for the generation of further pressur-
ized heated Uquid heat-transfer medium.
1. A pneumatic-hydraulic system for driving a hydraulic
actuator under control of hydraulic pressure converted from
pneumatic pressure, said system comprising,
a single pneumatic-hydraulic converter which includes a cylin-
der casing provided with inlet and outlet ports, and a
plunger reciprocably disposed within said casing to subdi-
vide the interior of said casing into a hydraulic chamber in
open communication with said inlet and outlet ports and a
pneumatic chamber for connection to a pneumatic pressure
source, said hydraulic chamber having a displacement ca-
pacity for storing a predetermined amount of hydraulic fluid
necessary for producing at least one reciprocating motion of
said hydraulic actuator during forward movement of said
plunger into said hydraulic chamber;
a supply passage connected with said outlet port for supplying
the pressurized hydraulic fluid from said hydraulic chamber
to said actuator, and a return passage connected with said
inlet port for returning the hydraulic fluid discharged from
said actuator to said hydraulic chamber;
first change-over valve means arranged in its first position to
connect said pneumatic chamber to the pneumatic pressure
source for effecting the forward movement of said plunger
and arranged in its second position to connect said pneu-
matic chamber to atmospheric pressure for effecting back-
ward movement of said plunger;
second change-over valve means for switching over the hy-
draulic connections of said supply and return passages to and
from said actuator when said first change-over valve means
is maintained in iu first position;
a hydraulic fluid reservoir disposed at its lower portion within
said return passage to store the discharged hydraulic fluid
therein and being provided at its upper poriion with an air
breather, the capacity of said reservoir being substantially
the same as or larger than the displacement capacity of said
hydraulic chamber, and
check valve means disposed withm said return passage be-
tween said inlet port and said reservoir for permitting the
flow of hydraulic fluid from said reservoir into said hydrau-
Uc chamber and for interrupting the reverse flow of hydrau-
lic fluid from said hydraulic chamber.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
979
4,437,310
TANDEM MASTER CYLINDER WITH A PRESSURE
REGULATING VALVE FOR AN AUTOMOIWE
VEHICLE BRAKE SYSTEM
KataUro Merita, Yokohaau, aad Hitadd Kabota, FiUiiawa,
both of Japan, aaaigaors to Niiaaa Motor Conpaay, Uialtad,
YokohaBM, Japaa
FIW Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,487
uSSS^ ^"^^^^ appUcation Japan, Apr. 24, 1980, 55-
55199[Uj
lat a.J B60T U/20
UA a 60-562 Mdahas
D
j~
'. "^ -.j'™ •.
chamber through a radial
ary piston.
passage formed in said seoond-
4,437,311
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE FLOW OF
EXHAUST GAS IN AN INTERNAL OOMBUCTION
ENGINE WITH A TURBOCHARGER AND A CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
KcBiI IwaaMto, NiaUo, aad KatnUro OMta, SoawaMcU,
both of Japaa. aari^on to Nlppoa Sokaa, lac, Niahio, Japaa
FIW May 4, 1982, Ser. No. 374,894
Claiais priority, appUcattoa Japaa, May 7, 1981, 56-065031
lat a. J FOIN 5/04: F02B 37/00
U A a 60-602 s r^,i—
1. A tandem master cylinder in a hydraulic brake system for
an automotive vehicle comprising:
a cylinder housing having an axially extending bore therein;
primary and secondary pistons axially aligned within said
cylinder housing bore in tandem relationship with each
other for movement in response to application of a braking
force;
primary and secondary pressure chambers defmed within
said bore by said primary and secondary pistons, said
primary chamber being located between said primary and
secondary pistons, and said secondary chamber being
defined by an end of the cylinder housing bore and said
secondary piston and communicating with respective
front wheel cyUnders via a single secondary port;
a fluid reservoir communicating with said primary and sec-
ondary pressure chambers for supplying working fluid
thereto; and
a single pressure control valve assembly provided in said
secondary piston, said valve assembly including a bore
formed in said secondary piston and extending along the
longitudinal axis thereof, a thrusUble cylinder having an
axially extending opening therein and an annular project-
ing portion defining first and second chambers between
the outer periphery of said thrusting cylinder and internal
periphery of said secondary piston bore, a valve member
and a valve seat incorporated with said thrusting cylinder
for motion therewith, said first chamber communicating
with said primary pressure chamber via said opening and
a space between said valve member and said valve seat,
said thrusting cylinder being movable between a first
initial position wherein said valve seat is spaced from said
valve member to permit fluid flow therethrough to estab-
lish fluid communication between said primary pressure
chamber and said first chamber and a second position
wherein said valve seat abuu said valve member for
blocking fluid communication between said primary pres-
sure chamber and said first chamber, said thrusting cylin-
der being responsive to the pressure difference between
said first chamber and said primary pressure chamber for
alternating the valve position between said first and sec-
ond position; and
a single primary pori communicating with rear wheel cylin-
ders, said primary port communicating with said first
1. An apparatus for controlling the flow of the exhaust gas in
an internal combustion engine including a turbocharger having
a compressor in an intake duct and having an exhaust gas
driven turbine in an exhaust duct connected to the compressor,
a catalytic converter arranged in the exhaust duct downstream
of the turbine, and a throttle valve arranged in the intake duct
between the engine and the compressor to control the engine
output, said apparatus comprising a bypass passage which
bypasses the turbine and which extends between the upstream
and downstream sides of the turbine, a waste gate valve unit
which controls the amount of the exhaust gu passing through
the waste gate valve unit, an actuator for actuating the waste
gate valve unit, which has first and second pressure chamben
separated by a spring biased diaphragm, and a thermal switch-
ing valve unit which selectively connects one of the pressure
chambers of the actuator with the atmosphere or the intake
duct downstream of the throttle valve, the other pressure
chamber of the actuator being connected to the intake duct
downstream of the compressor and upstream the throttle valve
by means of a conduit which is connected to an atmospheric
pressure area via a restriction.
4,437,312
RECOVERY OF POWER FROM VAPORIZATION OF
UQUEFIED NATURAL GAS
Ouvlas L. Newtoa, BetUchca^ aad Deaais L. Falal, Schaacka-
Tllle, both of Pa., aaiipMrs to Air Prodacti aad f^iMJrah.
lacn AUaatowB, Pa.
FIM Mar. 6. 1981, Sw. No. 241,183
lat a. J FOIK 77/00
U.S. a 60-648 s ciaiw
1. A method for recovering net power from the vaporization
of liquefied natural gas against multicomponent streams, which
method comprises the steps of:
(a) at least partially liquefying a first multicomponent stream
with said Uquefied natural gas as the Uquefied gas is v^wr-
ized.
(b) phase separating said first multicomponent stream of step
(a) into a vapor phase, which is further cooled to Uquefac-
tion against vaporizing liquefied natural gas, and a liquid
phase, which is pumped to an elevated pressure.
(c) pumping said liquefied vapor phase multiooraponent
980
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
stream of step (b) to an elevated pressure and combining
the same with the liquid phase from the phase separation,
(d) warming and at least partially vaporizing said first multi-
component stream by cooling and at least partially lique-
fying a second multicomponent stream, ^
(e) heating and fully vaporizing said first multicomponent
stream,
(f) expanding said heated and vaporized first multicompo-
nent stream through a first expander,
(g) recovering power from said first expander,
(h) recycUng said expanded first multicomponent stream to
be at least partially liquefied.
signal from said temperature rate controller and a second
signal from said drum level controller, and means for
producing a control signal based on either said first or
second signal,
said control signal being fed to damper positioner means
which adjusts the angle of a damper control system in-
cluding an isolation damper and a bypass damper for an
HRSG based on the value of said control signal.
j^sep^
MTUUlW*
«WMTD
rwfuM
^
" at
at
3
iti
!»
«^
— HtilTllM
UMnOM moooiTu
•TMUM *^
(i) pumping said at least partially liquefied second multicom-
ponent stream to an elevated pressure,
0) heating and vaporizing said second multicomponent
stream,
(k) expanding said second multicomponent stream through a
second expander.
0) recovering power from said second expander, and
(m) recycling said expanded second multicomponent stream
to be at least partially liquefied by heat exchange with said
first multicomponent stream.
4,437,313
HRSG DAMPER CONTROL
Bruce D. Taber, Boxford, and James B. Wagner, Maiden, both
of Mass., assignors to General Electric Company, Lynn,
Mass.
FUed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,436
Int. CL^ POIK J3/02. 23/06
U.S. a 60-665 10 Claims
1. An apparatus for controlling the operation of a steam
turbine system for a combined cycle power plant comprising:
a damper control,
a temperature rate controller, and
a drum level controller,
said damper control comprising means for receiving a first
4,437,314
ATOMIZER NOZZLE FOR CONTINUOUS FUEL
INJECnON
Karl-Heinz Coiiin, Wehrheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Kldcluier-Httmboldt-Deutz AktiengeseUschaft, Cologne,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,518
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 16.
1980, 3026832
Int. a.3 F02C 7/18
U.S. a. 60-738 2 Claims
1. An atomizer nozzle arrangement specifically used for
continuously injecting fuel into a combustion chamber of a gas
turbine engine, wherein the nozzle atomizes the fuel without
utilizing moving parts and with minimum utilization of intake
air, the nozzle arrangement comprising in combination:
an air intake communicating with the combustion chamber;
a vaporizor tube within the combustion chamber;
a nozzle body positioned within the vaporizor tube in spaced
relating therewith to define a space therebetween through
which space a portion of the intake air passes; the nozzle
body having a bore therethrough for delivering fuel there-
through, the bore having a fuel outlet of a smaller diame-
ter than the bore, from which outlet a spray of fuel is
ejected;
a circular chamber in the nozzle body and positioned down-
stream from the outlet, through which chamber the spray
of fuel passes, the chamber having a back wall through
which the outlet of the bore passes;
an annular body having a hollow interior and disposed in the
circular chamber in spaced relation to the back wall of the
chamber to define a space between the back wall of the
chamber and annular body; the hollow annular body
having an axial opening coincident with the axis thereof
which opening is aligned with but spaced from the outlet
of the bore and through which the spray of fuel and air
from said hollow annular body pass; the hollow annular
body having a front wall and a rear wall each of which
have concave portions adjacent the axial opening;
an opening communicating the space between the back wall
of the chamber and the annular body with the space be-
tween the vaporizor tube and nozzle body for pressure
equalization;
an air supply conduit connected radially with the interior of
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
981
the hollow annular body for supplying pressurized air
thereto, and
means for interrupting air flow through the air supply con-
duit so that the air supply can be stopped when the tem-
perature of the combustion chamber reaches operating
temperature.
4,437,315
FLEXIBLE BAG COOLING ARRANGEMENT
Albert F. Rica, Stockton; Lloyd F. Hay, Oakdalc; John R.
Heron, DanriUe; John R. Webber, and Steven A. Recht-
steiner, both of Stockton, all of Calif., assignors to FranRica
Mfg. Inc., Stockton, Calif.
DiTision of Ser. No. 286,065, Jul. 23, 1981, Pat. No. 4,384,463.
This appUcation Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 451,722
Int. a.3 F25D 13/06
U.S.a.62-63 5 Claims
compressing the evaporated working fluid in said first
branch;
desuperheating the compressed working fluid;
merging the working fluid evaporated in said second branch
with the desuperheated working fluid;
compressing the merged working fluids; and
condensing the last-mentioned compressed working fluid by
transferring the energy to a second working fluid whose
energy is significantly increased.
4,437,317
HEAD PRESSURE MAINTENANCE FOR GAS DEFROST
Fayez F. Ibrahim, NUca, Mich., aadpior to Tyler Refrigeration
Corporation, NUes, Mich.
FUed Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,473
lat a.J F25B 41 /Oa- F25D 21/06
U.S. a. 62—81 49 ciaiBS
1. A method for cooling a heated flowable material in a
flexible bag comprising the steps of:
(a) moving the bag in a carrier through a cooling area;
(b) dispensing a cooling medium about the bag as it is moved
through the cooling area;
(c) tilting the carrier in a first direction to lower a first
portion of the bag relative to a second portion of the bag.
altering the shape of the bag and increasing the amount of
material in said first bag portion; and
(d) tilting the carrier in a second direction to lower said
second bag portion relative to said first bag portion, alter-
ing the shape of the bag and increasing the amount of
material in said second bag portion.
4,437,316
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING
WASTE ENERGY
Darid Dyer, Auburn, Ala., and James L. Wise, Depere, Wis.,
assignors to Technology Marketing Inc., Newport, R.I.
FUed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,774
Int. a.5 F25B 7/00
VJS. a. 62—79 55 Claims
— j^
-j»
44-
• > ^SLZ
-op-
L^
^
T
T-
1. In a refrigeration system having a compressor means for
compressing refrigerant fluid, a compressor discharge conduit
for conducting compressed refrigerant gas to a condenser
means in which the compressed refrigerant gas is condensed to
a liquid; and an evaporator means connected between said
condenser means and said compressor means to provide refrig-
eration by evaporating liquid refrigerant from said condenser
means and for returning the refrigerant gas formed to the
intake of said compressor means; the improvement comprising:
defrost conduit means for selectively conducting gaseous
refrigerant during a defrost cycle from said compressor
discharge conduit to said evaporator means for defrosting
said evaporator means;
a selectively controllable valve means connected in said
compressor discharge conduit downstream from the con-
nection of said defrost conduit means to said discharge
conduit and upstream from said condenser means, said
controllable valve means operably maintained m substan-
tially opened position during a refrigeration cycle; and
an operator associated with said selectively controllable
valve means for closing said valve means at the start of a
defrost cycle for immediately increasing the preuure of
the refrigerant gas within said defrost conduit means up to
a predetermined level at the start of a defrost cycle, and
said controllable valve means operable thereafter for
substantially maintaining by modulation an increased
pressure in said defrost conduit means throughout said
defrost cycle.
of:
1. A method for waste heat recovery comprising the steps
separating a common supply of working fluid into first and
second branches;
evaporating the working fluid in said first and second
branches by means of first and second independent waste
heat sources to increase the energy of the evaporated
working fluids in each of said branches;
4,437,318
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM AND METHOD
BertU R. L. Werjefelt. 277 Kaha St^ KaUua. Hi. 96734
FUed Sep. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 73,612
Int. a.} F25D 17/06
VS. a. 62—93 12 rial—
1. An aircraft cabin humidification system for humidifying a
fresh air mass entering the cabin, said system comprising:
982
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
(a) removal means for at least partially removing moisture
from an air mass;
(b) replacement means for at least partially replacing said air
mass with firesb air, said replacement means including
means for exhausting said air mass from said cabin and said
/*
COLO
HEATER
MY
tin
L _ _
aircraft and for maintaining said moisture on said aircraft;
and
(c) humidification means for humidifying said fresh air by
adding at least a portion of said removed moisture to said
fresh air.
M37.319
BEVERAGE DISPENSING DEVICE
Vtuk M. laoBeUi, SpartiBbiirg, S.Cm aidgnor to Tannetics,
lac^EricPa.
ContiBoatioB of Ser. No. 316^73, Oct 30, 1981, abudoned.
lUs appUcatioB May 26, 1983, Ser. No. 497,437
lat CL^ F25C 1/00; F25D 3/00
VS. CL 62—138 2 Cbinii
1. A refrigeration system for cooling a beverage as said
beverage is drawn from a keg comprising:
a container having a vertically extending wall and a top and
bottom;
an evuponXOT coil carried adjacent the wall of said container
extending vertically from adjacent the bottom of said
container to adjacent the top of said container;
refrigeration condensing means circulating a refrigerant
through said evaporator coil cooling said container,
a beverage dispensing coil centrally carried within said
container extending vertically from adjacent the bottom
of said container to adjacent the top of said container;
water carried within said container,
a temperature sensor immersed in said water and being
operably connected to said refrigeration condensing
means for mainuining said water at a predetermined tem-
perature;
said beverage dispwwing coil having a predetermined out-
" ! diameter so at to iMOvide a ^Mce between said inside
wall of said container and said beverage dispensing coil
for allowing a bank of ice to build up on said inside wall;
said elongated temperature sensor extending vertically
downwardly in a space between said ice bank and said
beverage dispensing coil from adjacent the top of said
container to adjacent the bottom thereof for activating
said refrigeration condensing means responsive to prede-
termined changes in the temperature of said water;
said elongated vertically extending temperature sensor per-
mitting the thickness of said ice bank to build up substan-
tially for handling peak load use of said system while
ensuring that said ice bank does not touch said beverage
dispensing coil;
a manually operated tap carried adjacent the top of said
container connected to one end of said beverage dispens-
ing coil;
tubular means connecting said keg to said other end of said
beverage dispensing coil so that upon opening said tap,
beverage from said keg flows through said dispensing coil
for being cooled prior to flowing out said top, and
a power driven propeller means carried within said beverage
dispensing coil for moving said water carried in said con-
tainer in a circular motion for wiping said ice bank for
melting said ice bank for cooling said water and said
beverage dispensing coil, said flow path being substan-
tially unimpeded between the output of said propellor and
said ice bank.
4,437,320
TRANSPORTER AIR CHILLER
Claet E. Eklond, 1347 W. Trenton A?e., Orange, Calif. 92667
Filed May 11, 1982, Ser. No. 377,079
Int a.3 F25B 27/00
VS. a 62-236 7 Chfais
1. A transporter air chiller for cooling foodstuffs in airborne
storage and serving carts comprising:
(a) a unitized vapor cycle refrigeration apparatus having a
pair of refrigeration systems within a single frame and a
common air flow arrangement for providing product
cooling by removing heat through a refrigerant cooling
agent;
(b) an alternating circuit electrical power circuit integral
with said first refrigeration system for activating cooling
and providing air flow by electromotive means;
(c) an alternating current and a direct current electrical
power system integral with said second refrigeration
system for cooling, storing and providing air flow of said
coDunon arrangement;
(d) an air damper within said air flow arrangement rotatably
attached on one side to said frame for isolating air flow
from said first and second refrigeration systems allowing
cooling effect from either circuit not in concert; and,
(e) an insulated compartment in said chiller for housing the
high pressure side of said refrigeration systems providing
thermal isolation from the balance of said apparatus due to
inherent low heat transfer characteristics while allowing
ambient air to circulate through said refrigeration systems.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
983
4,437,321
ABSORPTION COOLING AND HEATING SYSTEM
Sctnro Aiai, SUmiio, Japu, iMigMr to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Filed Sep. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 416,042
ClaloM priority, appUcatton Japan, Sep. 11, 1981, 56*142309
lat a.J F25B 13/00
VS. a 62-324J 8 Qatau
ing therethrough to provide sufficient cooling for con-
densing gaseous refrigerant directly in each section;
an inlet means into the condenser section for providing a
passageway for flow of refrigerant into the shell side of
the condenser section;
at leMt one orifice means in the partition means for provid-
ing a passageway for the flow of the refrigerant from the
condenser section to the flash subcooler section, said
orifice means sized and positioned to regulate refrigerant
flow between the condenser section and the flash sub-
119 '"• ■'
1. In an absorption cooling and heating system comprising:
a generator;
two outdoor heat exchangers;
an expansion valve for cooling;
an expansion valve for heating;
an expansion valve for defrosting;
two indoor heat exchangers;
a pressure reducing valve for solutions;
a solution pump; and
a plurality of valves for switching between channels;
wherein the fu^t of said two outdoor heat exchangers func-
tions as a condenser, said two indoor heat exchangers
function as evaporators and the second outdoor heat
exchanger functions as an absorber in a cooling mode,
wherein said first indoor heat exchanger functions u a
condenser, said two outdoor heat exchangers function as
evaporators and said second indoor heat exchanger tone-
tions as an absorber in a heating mode, and wherein said
two outdoor heat exchangers function as condensers and
said second indoor heat exchanger functions as an ab-
sorber in a defrosting mode; the improvement comprising:
a heat accumulator located downstream of the expansion
valve for defrosting and serving as a channel for a refrig-
erant; and
heat pipe means having a heat releasing end inserted in said
heat accumulator and a heat source end inserted in a wute
heat flue of a burner for heating said generator, whereby
in a defrosting mode a refrigerant flowing from the con-
densers and having iu pressure reduced by the expansion
valve absorbs the waste heat of the burner for heating the
generator through said heat accumulator, to be heated
thereby and vaporize.
cooler section to provide a selected preuure difference
between the condenser section and the flash subcooler
section which is sufficient to ensure that a portion of any
liquid refrigerant normally flowing from the condenser
section through the orifice means to the flash subcooler
section is flashed in the subcooler section to absorb heat
from the remaining liquid refrigerant which flows into the
flash subcooler section; and
an outlet means from the flash subcooler section for provid-
ing a passageway for the flow of the refrigerant out of the
flash subcooler section.
4,437,323
WARP KNirriNG MACHINE WITH WEFT INSERTION
MAGAZINE AND SUBSTRATE PROVISION
ARRANGEMENT
Gerhard HIttal, Rodgan; Hnbartw MUd, HaMaMtaaa; Fran
Elgl, Obartahauaaa, aod Weraar Lmfv. HaaaeMtaaa, all of
Fed. Rep. of Gensaay, aaaiptorf to Karl Mayar TeztUauM*
cUnca (kbrik GnbH, Obartshaasaa, Fad. Rap. of GarMiy
Filed Sap. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,129
Claims priority, appUcatkw Fad. Rap. of Ganuay, Oet 12,
1981, 3140480
lat CLi D04B 23/06
VS. a 66—84 A 11
4,437322
HEAT EXCHANGER ASSEMBLY FOR A
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Richard E. ErtlBger, LlTerpool. N.Y.. aaaigMir to Carrier Corpo-
ratloo, SyraeMS, N.Y.
Filed May 3, 1982, Sar. No. 373,983
lat a^ F2SB 39/02
VS. CL 62—504 is ri«t...
1. A heat exchanger assembly comprising
a shell enclosing a heat transfer tube bundle to form a shell
and tube type heat exchanger;
a partition means inside the shell for dividing the tube bundle
into at least a condenser section and a flash subcooler
section with each section having a number of tubes pass-
1. A warp knitting machine for delivering weft threads and
a substrate at a relative acute angle along a weft path and a
aeparate, substrate path to a needle bed having a needle bar,
said machine comprising:
984
.OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
a weft thread magazine for transversely laying said weft
threads across the breadth of said machine in parallel on
said weft path, upstream of said needle bed, said weft path
and needle bar being on opposite sides of said substrate
path;
a substrate providing means for deUvering said substrate
along said substrate path;
a holding means, having at least one barrier aperture, for
limiting the mobility along at least one of said paths, said
holding means and needle bar being on opposite sides of
said substrate path; and
at least one forwarding means for protruding through said
barrier aperture into said weft path and separating a lead-
ing one of said weft threads and bringing it to the down-
stream side of said needle bed.
4,437,324
APPARATUS FOR TREATING A CLOTH
CONTINUOUSLY WITH THE USE OF
LOW-TEMPERATURE PLASMA
Yoshikazu Sando, Wakayama; Tokqju Goto, Nara; Itsuo Ta>
naka, Osaka; Hiroshi Ishidoshiro, and Matsuo Minakata,
both of Wakayama, all of Japan, assignors to Sando Iron
Works Co., Ltd., Wakayama, Japan
FUed Dec. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 452,786
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 6, 1982, 57-818
Int. a.3 D06B 3/ 12, 23/00
VS. a. 68—5 E 2 Claims
thereafter spinning the fabrics to effect centrifugal dis-
placement of water from the fabrics during the spin mode;
an electronically commutated motor for driving said agiut-
ing and spinning means, said electronically commutated
motor comprising a stator, a multi-stage winding arrange-
ment associated with said stator and including a plurality
of winding stages adapted to be electronically commu-
tated in a plurality of preselected sequences, and rotatable
means associated with said stator and adapted for selective
magnetic coupling relation with said winding stages so as
to be rotatably driven thereby, said rotatable means being
rotatably driven in one direction during the spin mode in
response to the electronic commutation of at least some of
said winding stages in one of the preselected sequences
and being rotatably driven in the one direction and an-
other direction opposite thereto during the wash mode in
response to the electronic commutation of said winding
stages in another of the preselected sequences; and
means for driving said agitating and spinning means from
said rotatable means.
1. An apparatus for treating a cloth continuously with the
use of low-temperature plasma, comprising a reactor provided
with seal mechanisms which can allow continuous taking in
and out of a cloth to be treated through the reactor while
maintaining the interior of the reactor under a reduced pres-
sure, a plurality of cloth guide rolls provided up and down in
the reactor for transporting the cloth zigzag forming snaky
undulations, a plurality of partition walls provided up and
down alternately in the reactor for forming zigzag cloth pas-
sages to transport the cloth therebetween forming snaky undu-
lations, a gas supply opening provided in the vicinity of the
cloth outlet of the reactor for jetting a gas to the zigzag cloth
passages, a pair of electrode plates provided adjacent to the gas
supply opening for producing low-temperature plasma with
combined use of high frequency electric wave applied thereto
and the gas jetted from the gas supply opening, and a vacuum
duct provided in the vicinity of the cloth inlet of the reactor.
4,437,325
LAUNDRY MACHINE
Doran D. Hershberger, Sycamore, Hi., assignor to General
Dectric Company, Fort Wayne, Ind.
Division of Ser. No. 304,536, Sep. 22, 1981, which is a division of
Ser. No. 77,784, Sep. 21, 1979, Pat No. 4,327,302. This
appUcation Apr. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 487,922
lat CL^ D06F 23/04. 37/40
VJS. a. 68—23.7 23 Ckims
12. A bundry machine adapted for operation in at least a
wash mode and a spin mode comprising:
means for agiuting water and fabrics to be laundered
thereby to wash the fabrics during the wash mode and for
4,437,326
BULGE FORMING METHOD AND APPARATUS
Ame H. Carlson, 2202 "A" St., Tacoma, Wash. 98402
FUed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,838
Int. a.J B21D 22/10
VJS. a. 72—62 31 Claims
.^-^li
1. Bulge forming apparatus, comprising:
annular die means defining a central opening and presenting
a radially inwardly directed annular die face;
support means for supporting an annular workpiece within
said central opening, in close proximity to said annular die
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
98S
face including upper and lower support members for
contacting upper and lower ends of the workpiece; and
means for pressure feeding molten metal into the workpiece,
for both heating the workpiece and pressing it radiall)^
outwardly into forming contact with the die face, to con-
form the workpiece to the shape of the die face.
4,437,327
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR
aRCUMFERENTIALLY GROOVING THIN-WALLED
CYLINDRICAL METAL OBJECTS
James A. Madden, GaincsTUlc, Fla<^ assignor to General Electric
Company, GalnesviUe, Fit.
. FUed Jan. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,199
Int. a.} B21D 17/04
U.S. a. 72—94 37 Clahns
1. An improved apparatus for progressively circumferen-
tially grooving a thin-walled cylindrical object having a first
axis and an open end, said apparatus comprising:
a source of said objects;
means for removing said objects from said source and deliv-
ering them along a circular path about a fixed second axis
in spaced relation to each other, the rate of movement of
said objects along said path being essentially constant;
means for supporting and for permitting rotation of each
object about said first axis, as the object moves along said
path;
rotating means rotating about a fixed third axis for engaging
each object to progressively form a radially inwardly
extending, circumferential groove in the wall thereof as
the object rotates while moving along said path, said
second fixed axis spaced apart from said third fixed axis,
said object rotating about its first axis more than one
revolution while in engagement with said rotating means
thereby permitting said progressive forming; and
means for removing each object from said path following
formation of said circumferential groove.
4,437,328
CRANKSHAFT GLAZE OR SMOOTH ROLLING
MACHINE
Helmut Wittkopp, and Valentin BUschgens,>both of Erkelenz,
Fed. Rep. of Gemany, assignors to Wilbelm Hegenscheidt
GcseUschaft mbH, Erkelenz, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,190
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 7,
1981, 3108780
Int CL^ B21H 7/00
VJS. a. 72—110 4 Claims
1. A crankshaft rolling machine comprising a base, means on
said base for mounting a crankshaft for rotation about a fixed
axis, a least one rolling fixture movably mounted on said base,
said fixture including rolling dies, a pair of crank assemblies
each having a main pin mounted on said machine, said main
pins being rotatable about parallel axis, said crank assemblies
each including a crank pin oft'set from the axis of its said main
pin, adjustable connecting means interposed between said
crank pins and said main pins of each said crank assembly for
variably offsetting said crank pins in a radial direction from the
axis of said main pins, motion transmitting means coupling
each said crank pin to said rolling fixture, and drive means
connecting said crank assemblies for synchronously rotating
said main pins about said parallel axis.
4,437,329
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING TWISTED TUBES
Ehno W. Geppelt, and WUUara H. Poore, both of TuIm, Okla.,
assignors to Delta Umited, Tulsa, Okla.
FUed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,143
Int a.J B21D 7/00. 11/14
U.S. a. 72—299 3 Claims
L.J=^
1. A method of manufacturing a spiraled tube comprising:
(a) positioning an elongated cylindrical mandrel within a
tube;
(b) grasping the tube adjacent the first end with a motor
driven headstock;
(c) grasping the tube adjacent the second end with a non
routing tailstock;
(d) forming at least one point of reduced resistance to tor-
sional force on the wall of the tube, which step may be
accomplished before or after steps (a) and (b);
(e) rotating the headstock by means of said headstock motor
to initiate and extend the formation of at least one spiral
groove in the tube, the mandrel defining the minimum
interior diameter of the spiraled tube so formed;
(0 driving a first and a second lead screw by means of said
headstock drive motor;
(g) advancing said tailstock towards said head stock by
1040 O.G.— 39
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
coupling laid firit lead screw to said UU stock to compen-
•ate for the reduction in length of the tube as the spiral
groove is formed;
(h) supporting a heating element adjacent the tube;
(0 advancing said heating element towards said beadstock
by means of said second lead screw whereby said heating
element u positioned adjacent the area of the tube wherein
•piral groove is formed as the tube is rotated to raise the
tTM of formation of the spiral groove to a temperature
above ambient and below the melting point of the tube
material.
PMsing through the axis of this element being formed by an arc
of a curve, said inner element being placed inside the outer
element; and roUmg means, such as balls, being disposed in the
housings formed by the pairs of grooves of the outer element
and of the mner element, these rolling means being retained in
wmdows of a cage disposed between the inner element and the
outer element;
said process comprising the step of:
forging said inner element by a single precise forging opera*
toon, particularly cold or semi-hot forging, by forming said
4.437330
METHOD OF MAKING A TMN-WALLED BEARING
BUSHING
Amta Olacfaewdd. ScfaweinAirt; Herauum Hetterieh. Heiden-
feld, and Peter Horiiog. Mainberg, aU of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
muiy. aMignon to SKF Kngellagerfkbriken GmbH, Schwein-
nut, Fed. Rep. of Gcrauoy
WtWob of Scr. No. 218,520, Dec. 22, 1980, Pat No. 4,377J13.
ndi applicatioa Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423,129
imSsSn*'' '^"*****" ^*^ ^' '^ Germany, Dec. 22.
lat a.J B21D 22/00
UAa72-358 iCUdm
mner element with two dies having an imprint corre-
spondmg to the shape complementary to that of the parts
of the mner element to be formed and having a single joint
plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the inner ele-
ment and located so as to contain the pointo of the bottoms
of the grooves of the inner element the furthest away from
the axis, said mner element being forged with a cylindrical
surface portion extending from said joint plane and contin-
ued on each side by spherical surface portions for mating
with the corresponding spherical inner surfaces of the
cage.
1. A deep drawmg method for making a thin-walled bearing
Dushmg from a Hat circular member comprising a cylindricd
s eeve section and a bottom section closing one end of the
sleeve section having an outer peripheral rim at the juncture of
the sleeve and bottom sections of small cross sectional radius
consistmg of the steps of cold pressing the bottom section and
deep drawmg the sleeve section in a single press stroke in the
bore of a generally cylindrical die by a drawing ram engaging
in the bore of the die and a cooperating counter ram portioned
at the open end of the die confronting the bottom section, and
uniultaneously unpressing an annular groove in one face of the
bottom section closely adjacent the junction of the bottom and
Sleeve sections to effect radial outward displacement of the
materia^ m the bottom section into the area of the peripheral
nm and uniform compression thereof in this area.
4,437,331
— i!23!P^^ TRANSMISSION COUPLING AND A
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING SUCH A COUPLING
Jaeqaes Dore, Cokmibea. Fnoce, aaignof to A>tom>Ul« CI-
tfon and AatoiMMka Peageot, both of Paris, Fnact
Filed Dae. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,577
Oatai priority. appUeatioa Fnmn, Jan. 2, 1981, 81 00025
.,„ « Irt. aJ B21IC //7tf
UAa72-360 jcUdm
1. A procos for manufacturing an inner element of a univer-
ttl couphng having an outer element integral with a first shaft
having a spherical cavity inside which are formed grooves
uid mner dement integral with a second shaft and having aii
externa^ surface m which grooves are also formed, equal in
number to those of the outer element, the section of the bot-
toms of the grooves of the inner element through a plane
4,437,332
ULTRASONIC THICKNESS MEASURING INSTRUMENT
Wclitrd J. Plttaro, Wait Redding, Com., aaaignor to Krautii.
ramer-BnuBOB, Inc., Lcwistown, Pa.
FUed Sep. 30. 1982, Ser. No. 429,127
Int CL^ GOIN 29/00
VS. a 73-1 DV ,2 ctata.
^
4t 4«
EVALUATION
UNIT
MAOOUT
Mf
'44
1. A dual-element ultrasonic probe comprising in combine-
tion a pair of elongated plastic coupling means arranged in
substantiaUy paraUel juxUpoution in slightiy spaced acousti-
cally isolated relation, each of said coupling means acting u a
delay line for ultrasonic signals passing therethrough between
respective oppositely disposed end surfaces, each such cou-
pling means having a respective electroacoustic transducer
element coupled to a respective first end surface and the oppo-
site second end surfaces of both coupling means adapted to be
coupled for simultaneous acoustic conUict with a woricpiece.
the improvement comprising:
one of said coupling means characterized by length L having
a refiector disposed at a longitiidinal distance X from its
•econd end surface for partiaUy refiecting ultrasonic sig-
nals tivnsmitted from its respective first end surface dis-
posed tiusducer element, and
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
■\
987
the other coupling means characterized by length equal to gases, which radiation changes during knocking combus-
L-2X. tion;
conveying said radiation to a processing device; and
4,437,333
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ASBESTOS FIBER
RELEASE POTENTIAL
Da?M Haada, Soirthflald, Mich., aaaivMr to Clayton Eaviiw
mmM CoMdturts, Inc^ SootUMd, Mich.
Filed Ju. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 383,689
lat CLi GOIN 3/38
VJS. CL IS—U 18 ClaioM
«*•
ascertaining from the detected radiation the knock-signal
energies for each cycle.
4,437335
GAUGE AND METHOD OF DETERMINING THE
EXISTENCE OF IRREGULARTTIES IN A SURFACE OF
AN ARTICLE
Donald C. Gates, Troy, Mich., aaaigaor to Antarcs EogiBeerint,
Inc., Troy, Mick.
FUad Dec 2, 1981, Ser. No. 336.728
lat a^ GOIB 5/28
VJS. CL 73-37.9 26
1. Portable test apparatus for in situ testing of the asbestos
fiber release potential to ambient air of an asbestos containing
composition comprising an impact member adapted to impact
the exterior surface of the composition, means for operating
said impact member so u to cause it to repeatedly impact a
selected area of the exterior surface of the composition over a
given time interval and cause a release of asbestos fibers to
ambient air representative of the asbestos fiber release potential
of the composition, and a collector system comprising one or
more filters disposed adjacent the area of impact each having
an open collection face exposed to ambient air for collecting
released asbestos fibers in ambient air.
d-i'
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING
KNOCKING COMBUSTION
Weraar Laareai, Aachaa, Fed. Rep. of Genaaay. aaiigDor to
Fkaai Piachiagar, AadMa, Fed. Rep. of Genaaay
FUad Fab. 12, 1983, Ser. No. 348,360
OaiaH priority, appUeatioa Fad. Rep. of Genumy, FA. 13,
1981, 3108345
lat CU GOIL 23/22
VA a 73-38 22 CUbm
1. A method of detecting knocking combustion during the
operation of an extemaUy auto-ignited internal combustion
engine, said method comprising the steps of:
detecting the radiation emitted by the combustion chamber
19. A gauge for determining the existence of irregularities in
a surface of an article comprising;
a housing;
a probe means having a flukl outlet for the paiMge of fluid
under pressure therethrough;
means mounting said probe means within said bousing for
movement between a neutral position and a sensing posi-
tion;
a sensor means for detecting the pressure of the fluid in said
sensing position of said probe means;
a thrust rod being reciprocally movable and engageable with
said probe means for selectively urging said probe means
towards said sensing position;
^
988
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
■aid fluid outlet of said probe means being closely parallel to
the movement of and opening away from said thrust rod;
said mounting means including a pivot joint for allowing
said probe means to pivot between said neutral position
and said sensing position;
•aid pivot joint comprising a female pivot means fixedly
secured with said housing and a male pivot means;
said probe means being operatively connected to said male
pivot means;
said female pivot means including a radially inwardly ex-
tending first fiange, said male pivot means including a
second flange extending outwardly and radially there-
from, said second flange being seated upon said first flange
and within said female pivot means whereby said second
flange of said male pivot means rocks within said female
pivot means so as to pivot said probe means between said
neutral position and said sensing position; and a micro
switch disposed within said housing for sensing when said
probe means is pivoted beyond said sensing position.
4,437,337
VISCOELASTOMETER
Wdter J. Fenrlck, Medicine Hat, Cunda. aaiignor to Her
M^eaty the Queen is right of Canada, u repreicDtcd by the
Miniater of National Defence, Canada
FUed Oct 6, 1981, Ser. No. 309,164
Clainu priority, application Canada, Aug. 31, 1981, 384906
Int. a.3 COIN 11/10. 13/02
U.S. a 73-54 8 cMm
4,437,336
DEVICE OF INTEGRATING A SMALL AMOUNT OF
FLOW OF FLUID FOR LEAK DETECHON
Takeahi Abe, Yoltohama, Japan, aasignor to Ricoh Co. Ltd
Japan
FUed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,318
Clainu priority, appUcation Japan, Not. 20, 1979, 54-150456'
Aug. 14, 1980, 55-111991 ^^'
Int. a^ GOIM 3/28; G08B 21/00
U.S. a 73-40.5 R 4 q^
"' ^» I ^^y 1 I
-,-^-^ — =^^— . — I
60
tSrouni^f Kre
ITBWATIMf
--^ZJ"
r
SENJCR
>"
1. Apparatus for measuring and displaying a viscoelastic
efTect m a liquid as a reproducible force/time signature which
can be related to the viscosity and elasticity of the liquid, said
apparatus comprising a resilient, deflectable cantilever extend-
ing from a rigid support, a rigid rod extending downwardly
from the cantilever, a sample cup adapted to contain a liquid
sample, means for moving the sample cup at a selected rate
between an upper position at which the rigid rod is immersed
to a predetermined depth in a liquid contained in the sample
cup and a lower position at or before which occurs relaxation
and separation of a filament of the liquid which forms between
the ngid rod and the surf"ace of the liquid during movement of
the sample cup from the upper position toward the lower
position, strain sensing means associated with a portion of the
cantilever intermediate the rigid rod and the rigid support for
sensing the strain which occurs during the formation and
subsequent relaxation and separation of the filament, and dis-
p ay means associated with the strain sensing means for dis-
playing the sensed strain as a function of time to provide a
reproducible force/time signature which can be related to the
viscosity and elasticity of the liquid.
1. A device for integrating a small amount of flow of fluid
comprising:
(a) flow measuring means capable of generating a series of
pulses, a space between the pulses being varied in inverse
proportion to the measured flow rate of fluid;
(b) a timer (51) arranged to generate periodic tiiiiing signals
for a decidmg unit time interval for taking a measurement;
(c) first mtegrating means (61) connected to receive and
count the series of pulses from said flow measuring means
and to be reset by the respective timing signals from said
tuner, said first integration means producing correspond-
mg values of the measured flow rate to which the counted
number of pulses per unit time interval pertains-
(d) a leakage decision unit (50-1) for comparing the corre-
sponding value of the measured flow rate from said first
integrating means with a predetennined reference value
corresponding to a normal lower limit for the rate of flow
usually consumed and providing a leakage detection sig-
nal at a time when the corresponding value of the mea-
sured flow rate is less than the reference value; and
(e) second integrating means (62, 63) for integrating the
corresponding value of the measured flow rate from said
nrat mtegrating means in response to the leakage detection
signals from said leakage decision unit.
4,437 J38
SPARK PLUG MICROWAVE ADAPTER
Scott E. WUaon, Ann Arbor, Mich., aaaignor to Jodon Engineer-
ing Aaaociatea, Inc., Ann Arbor, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 192,728, Oct. 1, 1980,
abandoned. Thia appUcation Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,205
Int. a.3 GOIM 15/00
VS. a 73-116 ,4 ctataia
*fr^
1. An adapter for coupling microwave energy into a com-
bustion chamber of an internal combustion engine through a
spark plug of the type which includes an insulator housing and
a spark conduction path, said adapter comprising means
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
shaped so as to be adapted to be removably and snugly re-
ceived over the spark plug insulator housing, and a microwave
antenna mounted on said means and adapted to be coupled to
a source of microwave energy for transmitting said microwave
energy through said means and through the spark plug insula-
tor housing into the engine chamber in a waveguide transmis-
sion mode.
4,437,339
LINEARIZING AND CONTROL aRCUTT FOR AIR
FLOW RATE METER
Ulrich Drews, Vaihingen; Peter Rappa, Karlarube, and Peter
Werner, Wiemaheim, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aasignors
to Robert Boaeb GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,090
Clainu priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Gemaay, Oct. 11,
1980,3038498
Int. a.! GOIM 15/00
VS. Q. 73—118 5 Clainu
AK ISTAXE TUBE
fJETWORK
aZ
TIMER
Or
ii/"
m^
1. An electronically controlled circuit for air flow measure-
ment comprising:
an air intake tube
an air flow rate meter device in the air intake tube and
producing an output, and
a linearizing circuit layout responsive to the output of the
device, the linearizing circuit layout functioning to pro-
duce an output in accordance with different voltage divid-
ers determining point-slope values selected by the output
of the device for voltage-to-current conversion, whereby
a total current is formed from the sum of individual cur-
rents dependent on the respective voltage dividers.
4,437,340
ADAPTIVE AIR FLOW METER OFFSET CONTROL
Caaba Caere, YpaUanti, and WUliara C. FoUmer, Uvonia, both of
Mich., aaaignors to Ford Motor Company, Dearborn, Mich.
FUed No?. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,287
Int. a.3 GOIM 15/00
VS. O. 73—118 14 Clainu
X
52
AIR MASS
fLOWMfTfH
r.fcU'
l-CHANttHAfT
POSITION
SENSOK
/-»
^— •tXHAUST
5. A method for calibrating an air flow meter for an internal
combustion engine capable of operating in a closed-loop mode
and an open-loop mode comprising:
operating the internal combustion engine in a closed loop
mode so as to achieve a desired air fbel ratio;
sensing the exhaust gas to determine the actual air fiiel ratio;
determining any difTerence between the actual and desired
air fUel ratio, the leakage of air downstream of the air flow
meter being a function of said difference; and
adjusting the fiiel supply so that the air ftiel ratio is adjusted
toward the desired air Aiel ratio thereby compenuting for
any leakage of air downstream of the airflow meter.
4,437,341
APPARATUS FOR MEASURING AN INJECTION
AMOUNT
Shinao Ito, Aichi; Tateahi Kate, Ai^o; Takumi Noma, Okaaaki;
Soichiro Sttgimoto, Okaaaki, and Seigi Toiyania, Okaaaki, all
of Japan, aaaignors to Nippondenao Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
FUed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,427
Clainu priority. appUcation Japan. Apr. 21, 1981, 56-60414
Int. a.) GOIM 15/00
VS. a. 73—119 A 1 Claim
1. An apparatus for measuring an injection amount compris-
ing:
an injection chamber to be charged with liquid injected from
an injection device under measurement;
a prime mover for driving the injection device;
a liquid injection regulator operable in response to the rota-
tion angle of a shaft of the prime mover, said liquid injec-
tion regulator having two seal sections for sealing said
injection chamber and a liquid discharge port, respec-
tively, and a control valve, said control valve having
portions thereof which constitute p^rts of the two seal
portions, wherein when discharging the liquid, said con-
trol valve departs from said injection chamber to release
said two seal sections to thereby connect the injection
chamber to the discharge port and after completion of the
discharge of liquid, returns to said liquid injection cham-
ber while sealing said liquid discharge port to thereby
raise preuure in said irvjection chamber;
a displacement member which displaces in accordance with
a change in the volume of said injection chamber;
a displacement detector which converts a displacement of
the displacement member into an electrical signal; and
an arithmetic unit which arithmetically processes the electri-
cal signal from the displacement detector to display an
injection amount of the liquid injected from the injection
device under measurement.
4,437,342
DUGNOSTIC SYSTEM FOR DETECTING FAULT IN
FUEL SYSTEM OF ENGINE HAVING ELECTRONIC
FUEL INJECnON SYSTEM
Akio Hoaaka; Akito Yanamoto, and Katauaori OaUaga, aU of
Yokoauka, Japan, aaaignors to Niaaan Motor Co., Ltd., Yoko-
hama, Japan
FUed Jun. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 388,606
Clainu priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 8, 1981, 56-105677
lat a.> GOIM 15/00
VS. a. 73—119 A 6 Clahns
1. A fault diagnostic system for detecting faults in a fuel
system of an engine with an electronic fuel injection system,
comprising:
means for determining the ii^jection quantity of fUel iigected
990
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
by iiyector means by summing the length of the iiyector
opening time of each injection,
means for measuring the residual quantity of fuel remaining
in a fuel tank for the engine,
means for calculating the consumption quantity of fuel re-
moved from the fuel tank by calculating the amount of a
decrease of the residual fuel quantity measured by said
residual quantity measuring means,
checking means which receives information on the fuel
uuecuon quantity from said fuel injection quantity deter-
4*437,344
COMPOUND UQUID PLOW METER WITH PACT
u/mi ^ CROSSOVER CHARACTERISTIC
William G. KoJalalMa. Talla«M, Ala^ aMigMr to
Water Meter CoapaBy, TallaMea, Ala.
Piled Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,132
.,„ _ lat a.J GOIP 7/00
UA a 73-197 5c^
/MO
0«»yt*v "]
DATA itttmrtn
2S00
fflfe-^
. tt^
mmmg means and information on the fuel consumption
quantity from said fuel consumption quantity calculating
means, calculates the difference between the fuel injection
quantity of a predetermined time interval and the fuel
consumption quantity of the same time interval, checks if
the difference is within a predetermined permissible range
and produces an abnormal signal when the difference ii
outside the range,
indicating means for producing a fault signal indicative of
the existence of a fault in response to said abnormal signal.
4,437,343
AIRSPEED SENSING SYSTEMS
\!H ^ P**."^ Lymlagton, and G«rffrey R. Witt, Dorset
JSitiSSTkiSr' '•"-■''• '^ '^-^''
POed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,800
81^3* '*^'**^' '**"***'°" ^"**«* Kingdom, Mar. 24, 1981,
iTc ^ ,, . lata^GOlC 27/70
UA a 73-182 ^c^
AIRFLOW
I
S--
10
X
1. An airspeed sensing system comprising:
a tube arrangement which in use is exposed to airflow, said
tube arrangement including a first tube and a second tube
ahgned with one another, said first tube having a first
open-ended portion to face substantially directly into said
airflow and said second tube having a second open-ended
portion to face in substantially the opposite direction
a restricted passage connecting said first and second iwr-
tion^ the diameter of said passage being smaU rebtive to
the diameters of said first and second portions;
a resistive element disposed within said restricted passage
for the purpose of deriving a temperature measurement
and
means for obtaining an airspeed indication in dependence on
pressures m said first and second portions, respectively.
u M>
1. A compound Uquid flow meter, comprising-
a. a first flow path between an inlet and an outlet, including
a first meter accurate over a first range of flow rates above
a predetermined flow rate;
b. a second flow path between the inlet and the ouUet, in-
cludmg a second meter accurate over a second range of
now rates below and overlapping said fa%X range-
c. first valve means controlling the flow through said first
meter and biased toward closed position, said valve means
beuig subject to the pressure difference between the inlet
and the ouUet, said pressure difference being effective to
open the valve means against its bias when the pressure
difference exceeds a predetermined value corresponding
to a flow rate in the overlapping portion of said ranges;
d. second valve means conti-oUing the flow through the
second meter, said second valve means being movable
between a muumum flow position and an open position
and being moved toward said open position by the flow
through said second meter;
wherein the improvement comprises:
e. means mounted on the first valve means and movable with
rwpect thereto in response to the pressure difference
between the inlet and the ouUet, said last-named means
being effective when the pressure difference exceeds a
value shghtiy smaller than said predetermined value to
mitiate movement of the second valve means toward ito
muumum flow position, said initial movement of said
second valve means being effective to increase the pres-
sure difference to said predetermined value even though
the flow rate remains constant, so that opening movemrat
of the first valve means u initiated and movement of both
the first and second valve means continues until Uie first
vdve means reaches its open position and the second
valve means reaches its minimum flow position
4,437,345
GAS FLOW MEASURING DEVICE
Tsuneyukl Egami, Alchi; Hiaaai Kawai, ToyohaaU; Tokio
Kohama, Niahio, and Hideki ObayaaU, Okazaki, aU of Jaaan.
•Mlgnora to Nippon Sokea, Inc., Nishio, Japan
Plied Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,450
OataM priority, appUcatkM Japan, Apr. 1, 1981, 56-49803
„„ _ I«taJG01P7/«
UA a 73-204 ^ch^
*• A gas flow measunng device comprising an electric heater
uistaUed m a pipe tiirough which a gas to be measured flows,
a first temperature dependent resistor instidled at the down-
stream side of the electric heater within said pipe, a second
temperatiire dependent resistor instidled at a position substim-
tiaUy free from heat produced from said electric heater within
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
991
said pipe, and a measuring circuit for measuring the flow of a
gas to be measured by using output signals of said electric
heater and first and second temperature dependent resistors,
wherein said meuuring circuit includes a reference resistor
circuit for forming a bridge having diametrical nodes
together with said first and second temperature dependent
resistors, a constant voltage adding circuit having a resis-
tor and a constant current source connected in parallel
with the reference resistor circuit to provide a constant
current thereto for applying a constant voltage to one of
a means which cooperates with switch means mounted in a
stationary position in opposition to said float over the upper
end of the meuuring container, said switch acting to close the
milk supply valve and to open the milk discharge valve when
contacted by the upper end of the float, the distance between
the lower end of said float and the maximum milk level in said
measuring container when said float is contacted with the
switch, being large relative to the spacing of the lower end of
said float from the bottom of said measuring container.
said diametrical nodes of the bridge, a differential ampli-
fier circuit having two inputs for amplifying the differen-
tial voluge between the other of the diametrical nodes of
said bridge and the output of said constant voltage adding
circuit at said one of said nodes, the resistor of said con-
stant voluige adding circuit being connected between one
of said nodes and one of said inputs, and an electrical
amplifier circuit for amplifying the output voltage of said
differential amplifier circuit and for controlling the volt-
age to be applied to said electric heater and said bridge.
4,437,346
MILKMETER MEASURING THE WEIGHT OF THE
QUANTITY OF MILK ISSUED BY A COW, AND DEVICE
FOR TAKING SAMPLES ADAPTED FOR USE WITH
SAID MILKMETER
Jan Kummer, Oostergrachtswal 91-95, 8921 AB, Leeuwarden,
Netherlaadi
FUed No?. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,612
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Not. 14, 1980,
8006246; May 13, 1981, 8102359
Int a.3 GOIF 77/00
U.S. d 73—221 12 Oaims
»«?»i U <NC*i M^^S
1. A milkmeter for intermittanUy determining the weight of
a quantity of milk issued by a cow during milking, comprising
a measuring container, a supply valve and a discharge valve for
supplying and discharging the milk to and from the container
respectively, an elongated float movable freely in a vertical
direction in said measuring container, in response to the level
of milk therein, the upper end of said float being provided with
4,437,347
SHUT-OFF ACTUATING DEVICE
Robert J. Broniky, New BaltioMirt: Dauis B. Clark, Flat Rock;
Jeffk«y A. McKaen, Dttroit, and WUUaai A. Pnybylakl,
Dearborn, all of Mich., aadgnors to Michigaa CoosoUdatod
Gas Company, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,377
Int. a.) GOIF WOO
U.S. a. 73—272 R 23 Oains
1. In a fluid flow device having a flow-sensing apparatus
including linkage means operable in response to said fluid flow,
said apparatus being adapted to prevent said fluid flow through
said device when said linkage means is inoperative, the im-
provement comprising shut-off means for rendering said link-
age means inoperative and actuating means for selectively
actuating said shut-off means, thereby preventing said fluid
flow through said device, said shut-off means further including
a stop member interferingly engageable with said linkage
means and biasing means biasing said stop member into said
interfering engagement with said linkage means, said actuating
means including an actuating arm engageable with said stop
member to hold said stop member out of said interfering en-
gagement with said linkage means, said actuating arm being
selectively moveable out of said engagement with said stop
member, thereby allowing said biasing means to urge said stop
member into said interfering engagement with said linkage
means.
4,437,348
ULTRASONIC IMAGING APPARATUS
Hiroshl Sasaki, Ootawara, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaora
Deaki KabusUki Kaiaha, Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 386,081
ClaioH priority, application Japan, Jnn. 8, 1981. 56-86902
Int Ci} GOIN 29/00
U.S. CL 73—625 13 OaiM
1. An ultrasonic imaging apparatus comprising:
an ultrasonic transducer comprised of a plurality of ultra-
sonic transducer elements;
drive means for supplying drive pulses to the transducer
elements of the ultrasonic transducer to cause ultrasonic
beams to be emitted from the transducer elements;
prestage filtering means connected to the transducer ele-
nsents to receive from the transducer elements echo sig-
nals corresponding to echo waves and filter the echo
signals respectively in accordance with itt different fre-
quency characteristics;
composing means for composing filtered echo signals from
992
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
the presuge filtering means to obtain a composite echo
signal;
variable band pass filtering means connected to the compos-
ing means to filter the composite echo signal therefrom in
accordance with its varying filtering characteristics,
thereby to sequentially extract echo signal components
correspondmg to said different frequency characteristics-
4^7^50
«. ,.^0*TEX FLOW METERING APPARATUS
HiM^ TMiirii; Ichiro Ito; Maaashl Hlrayttmi, ud Tetsuo
iffL ^ ^^^^'^^ '''**^ tMignora to Yokogawa Hokushin
Electric Corporatioii, Tokyo, Ja|MUi
FUed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,078
CtaiiM priority, appUcation Japui, Oct. 6, 1981, 56-159060
.,o « « Int. a.3 GOIF 7/i2
UA a 73-861.24 ^^Mm
■MLStw hen
puLstB heaw-»
1 '^^P' haaii-i
Signal processing means connected to the variable band pass
filtering means to convert the echo signal components
therefrom into a tomographic signal; and
display means connected to the signal processing means to
display the tomographic signal therefrom as a tomo-
graphic image.
4,437J49
VORTEX FLOW METER FREQUENCY ADJUSTMENT
Robert D. Joy, Cedar Rapids, Iowa, aaaignor to Ford Motor
Company, Dearborn, Mich.
"^ &M6?iMr*^'' ^ ^^* ^"^ ^' "• ^^^' § *°^'^
per FUed Sep. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 434,141
intO.^G01¥ 1/32
VS. a 73-86U2 J cUdm,
//
■■■sry^^^
i > , , > >^'y> / /
^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^
1. A device for generating vortices in a bounded fluid stream
compnsmg:
a fluid flow duct means for passing a fluid stream;
a generator means for generating vortices positioned in said
duct u the fluid stream;
an adjustment means for varying the cross sectional area of
the fluid flow adjacent said generator means; and wherein
said generator means and said adjustment means include-
an elongated plate member having a rotationally movable
axis of elongation with respect to the direction of flow of
the fluid, so that a difierent cross section can be presented
to the fluid flow.
1. A vortex flow metering apparatus, comprising converter
means, said converter means comprising
a first conversion amplifier having an input and an output
a second conversion amplifier having an input and an output
an operator circuit having an input and an output, and means
for connecting said outputs of said first conversion ampli-
ner and of said second conversion amplifier to said input
of said operator circuit;
detector means, said detector means comprising
a vortex generator having an axis and defining a concavity
a first piezoelectric sensor disposed within said concavity
a second piezoelectric sensor disposed within said concav-
'tyi
means for connecting said first piezoelectric sensor to said
input of said fii st conversion amplifier, and
means for connecting said second piezoelectric sensor to
said input of said second conversion amplifier- and
wherein said first piezoelectric sensor and said second piezo-
electric sensor are selectively arranged at to points along said
axis of said vortex generator whereat ratio of noise component
due to vibration of said vortex generator according to distur-
bance vibration and ratio of noise component due to duct strain
according to disturbance vibration are substantially equal, and
ratio of signal component due to vortex dynamic lift andT ratio
of signal component due to disturbance vibration are different
from each other, whereby signals from said first and second
piezoelectric sensors are applied to said inputs of said first and
second amplifiers, and after processing thereat, supplied to said
input of said operator circuit, thereby to remove noise compo-
nents caused by disturbance vibrations.
4,437,351
CONTROL STICK FORCE TRANSDUCER
Harold J. McGrann; John F. Om, and Matthew C. PallaTer, aU
of Phoenix, Ariz., assignors to Sperry Corporation, NY, N Y
FUed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,415
. , « ^ '°*' ^-^ ^^^ ^/^<J' B«C U/04
U.S. a. 73—862.05 9 cta|„^
1. A zero-moment force transducer apparatus adapted for
use with an aircraft manual control member and disposed
between a grip handle portion and lower portion of a control
member and disposed along a normally vertical axis, compris-
ing:
a first pUte connected with said grip handle portion;
a second plate spaced apart from said first plate and con-
nected with said lower control portion; said first and
second plate* being disposed in normally parallel horizon-
tal planes and normally aligned along said vertical axis-
at least three elongated laterally compliant columns connect-
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
993
ing said first plate with said second plate and which to-
gether therewith define at least three parallelogram con-
figurations disposed in planes parallel with said vertical
axis and each column having compliances such that one of
said plates may be reflected relative to the other in all
lateral directions upon corresponding forces being applied
to said one plate;
a platform disposed intermediately of said first and second
plates;
a common inductive pick-off means having a first part con-
nected with said first plate and a second part mounted on
said platform and connected with said platform for pro-
viding output signals representative of said relative lateral
deflection of said plates in response to lateral forces ap-
plied to said grip handle portion, said pick-off further
being substantially non-respective to moments about said
vertical axis, and
an acceleration responsive mass and pivoted rod means
connected with said mass, said rod means coupled with
said first plate for inducing forces on said first plate to
compensate for corresponding acceleration forces acting
on said grip handle portion.
4,437,352
APPARATUS FOR MEASURING BELT TENSION
Albert H. Deborde, and Michel F. Volland, both of Bourgoin
JaUieu, France, assignors to Saurer-Diederichs (Societe Ano-
nsme), Bourgoin JaiUeu, France
FUed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,828
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jan. 30, 1981, 81 02186
Int. a.' GOIL 5/06
U.S. a. 73—862.47 16 Claims
ends formed with respective generally parallel end plates
having structure edges facing transversely in the same
direction and generally defining a plane, one of said end
plates having a face;
a two-arm lever pivoted on said housing between said ends
and having an abutment arm extending transversely be-
tween said ends and a measuring arm extending generally
longitudinally of said housing and having an arm edge
lying between said structure edges and facing transversely
opposite to said structure edges;
pivot means supporting said lever on said housing for angu-
lar motion about an axis transverse to said housing be-
tween two end positions with said one arm edge lying on
opposite sides of said plane;
spring means braced between said abutment arm and said
face of said one end plate for urging said lever into the end
position with said arm edge between said plane and said
housing; and
means including a pointer and indicia on said lever and
housing for indicating the angular position of said lever.
4,437,353
PRESSURIZED CONTAINER TESTING APPARATUS
R. Dean Hameriinck, 620 Pope St., St. Helena, Calif. 94574
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 375,999
Int. a.J GOIN 1/22
U.S. a. 73—863.81 11 Qaims
8. An apparatus for measuring the tension in a straight strand
such as a belt, said apparatus comprising:
an elongated housing having a pair of opposite longitudinal
1. Apparatus for piercing a cork sealing off the neck of a
bottle adapted to contain a liquid therein comprising:
a housing having guide means thereon for receiving a bottle
and aligning said bottle so that said bottle is disposed in an
upright position with the cork sealing off the neck of said
bottle having its upper surface exposed to the atmosphere
wherein said guide means includes a top wall on said
housing having a tapered slot therein for receiving the
neck of a bottle;
a cylinder having an internal movable piston therein dis-
posed on said housing above said guide means, said piston
carrying a downwardly extending hollow cork piercing
needle having an eye at the lower end fluidly communicat-
ing with a longitudinally extending opening therein and its
longitudinal axis aligned with substantially the center of
said cork upper surface, said piston being movable from a
first position whereby the point of said needle is disposed
above the upper surface of said cork to a second position
whereby said needle pierces said cork and the eye thereof
enters said bottle below the lovi-er surface of said cork; and
including a handle pivotally connected to said cylinder
having linkage means interconnecting said handle to said
piston whereby said piston is movable between its first and
second positions by pivotal movement of said handle.
994
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4^7,354
TORQUER ASSEMBLIES FOR GYROSCOPE
APPARATUS
NicholM R. CmpMU Cheltealuuii, England, aidgiior to Smiths
UHtaitriei PnbUc Limited Company, London, England
FUed JbL 20, IWl, Ser. No. 285,193
^Oaims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jul. 29, 1980.
Int. a.3 GOIC 19/30
VS. a. 74-5.46 ,1 ctalma
first two gears being mounted slighUy "fioating". character-
ized in that the "floating" gear (2) is pivotobly mounted for
rotation about its axis X, but without freedom for axial move-
ment, on a rigid body (20) itself pivotably mounted about the
common axis Y, perpendicular to X, of the two gears (3, 5)
with which the floating gear (2) is in engagement, with free-
dom for axial movement along this axis Y.
;ffy /SV,fi^ 62
H^ ffO
4,437,356
GEAR
Mlklhani Imazalke, 26-1 Niahl, 2<home, Tezokayama, Snmio-
•U-ku, Oiaka, Japan
FUed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,358
.1 ., ^ ,. '"*• ^' "^ -^^/Oa 5S/J4
V£. a 74-411 ,2 ctata.
^ .sa yof^ -^j^^f7 72> y£ ^/ao
1. A torquer assembly for producing a restoring force on a
rotatab e member of gyroscope apparatus, about an axis sub-
stantially at right angles to the axis of rotation of the rotatable
member, wherein the torquer assembly comprises: a permanent
magnet assembly; means mounting said permanent magnet
assembly with said rotatable member so as to produce a maa-
netic field directed substantially radially of the axis of rotation
or said rotatable member; an electric coil assembly including an
annular member of magnetic material fixedly mounted with
said gyroscope apparatus radially outwards of said permanent
magnet assembly, and a plurality of coils mounted on the inner
suri^ace of said annular member within the field of said perma-
nent magnet assembly, a part of the magnetic field produced by
said coils being directed through said annular member
4,437,355
BEVEL GEAR POWER TRANSMiniNG GEAR TRAINS
Andre Bordat, RueU Malnuison, France, assignor to Construe.
tions Mecaniques de Normandie, Paris, France
FUed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,609
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 29, 1980, 80 09702
. , o ^ '"*• ^'^ *■"" ^^^^' ^^^06. 57/00. 1/14
U A a 74-385 5 ciai^
1. Bevel gear power transmitting gear train comprising a
first bevel gear coupled to a driving shaft, a second bevel gear
coupled to a driven shaft with axis perpendicular to that of the
dnving shaft and engaging with the first one. a third loose
bevel gear coaxial with the second one and engaging with the
first one and a fourth loose bevel gear coaxial with the first one
and engagug with the second and with the third, one of the
1. A one-piece, integrally molded plastic gear for precision
apparatus such as timepieces and acoustic devices and having
elastically deformable teeth to provide cushioning properties
to reduce noise and vibration during use, comprising a main
body, two circumferential rows of teeth extending from said
mam body, said rows of teeth being axially offset with the teeth
m one row being circumferentially offset relative to the teeth
m the other row, each of said teeth having a terminating end
portion and a longitudinally extending leg portion, each of said
leg portions extending at an acute angle greater than zero
degrees relative to a radial line of said gear, each of said termi-
natmg end portions defining a complete and integrally formed
gear tooUi. said leg portions of each of said teeth in each of said
rows being circumferentially spaced from one another a dis-
timce which is greater than the circumferential width of each
of said leg portions such that adjacent offset leg portions are
cu-cumferentially spaced from one another, whereby said teeth
are elastically deformable in a circumferential direction to
thereby reduce noise and vibration without inpairing the preci-
sion of the gear for use in precision apparatus.
4,437,357
DOUBLE LEVER ASSEMBLY FOR BICYCLE SPEED
CONTROL
Nobuo OaUd, and Mikio Howkawa, both of Onka. Japu.
assignors to Maeda Indoftriea, Ltd^ Onka, Japu ^^
Filed No?. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,125
Claims priority, applicatioo Japan, Not. 28, 1980, 55-168393
Int a^ B62K 23/06: G05G 9/00/ F16H 7/22
UA a. 74-475 3 ci„^
1. A double lever assembly for bicycle speed control com-
prising
a first shaft supported by a mounting block,
a first or rear derailleur operating lever mounted on said first
shaft.
a second shaft supported by said mounting block.
NfARCH 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
993
a second or front derailleur operating lever mounted on said
second shaft, and
said second shaft being inter-connected with said first shaft
through motion converting mechanism so that said second
lever is reciprocated within a limited range in synchro-
nism with pivotal movement of said first lever.
4,437,358
TRANSMISSION WITH TORQUE CONVERTER AND
LOCK UP CLUTCH WITH LUBRICATION AND
PRESSURIZATION SYSTEM
Seitokn Knbo, Toyota; Koi^iro Kuramochi, Okaaaki, and Tatsuo
Kynshima, Toyota, all of Japan, aaaignors to Toyota Jidosha
Kabuahlki Kaiaha, Toyota, iwpuk
FUed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,351
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 4, 1980, 55-91379
Int Q.3 B60K 41/02
U.S. a. 74—867 2 Claims
1. An automatic transmission for an automotive vehicle,
comprising:
(a) a gear transmission mechanism which comprises a lubri-
cating system and which can provide a plurality of speed
stages according to a selective supply of actuating hydrau-
lic fluid pressure thereto;
(b) a hydraulic fluid pump which provides a supply of pres-
surized hydraulic fluid;
(c) a torque converter, which has two ports, the interior of
which is filled with hydraulic fluid supplied from a se-
lected one of said two ports, and which incorporates a
lock up clutch which is selectively engaged or disengaged
according to changing over of supply of hydraulic fluid
pressure thereto between said two ports;
(d) a hydraulic fluid pressure control system which controls
said gear transmission mechanism so as, according to
operational parameters of said vehicle, to set said gear
transmission mechanism to one or another of said plurality
of speed stages;
(e) a line hydraulic fluid pressure control valve which re-
ceives a supply of pressurized hydraulic fluid from said
hydraulic fluid from said hydraulic fluid pump and which
provides a supply thereof, regulated to a line hydraulic
fluid pressure level, to said hydraulic fluid pressure con-
trol system as a source of line pressure;
(0 > first throttle element;
(g) a torque converter hydraulic fluid pressure control valve
which:
(gl) receives a supply of pressurized hydraulic fluid from
said hydraulic fluid pump in paraUel to said line hydraulic
fluid pressure control valve via said fvst throtUe element;
and
(g2) provides a supply thereof to said torque converter as a
source of torque converter hydraulic fluid pressure for
filling the interior of said torque converter with hydraulic
fluid and for selectively either engaging or disengaging
said lock up clutch, said supply of torque converter hy-
draulic fluid pressure being regulated to a torque con-
verter hydraidic fluid pressure level by said torque con-
verter hydraulic fluid pressure control valve performing
the action of, when said supply thereto of hydraulic fluid
from said hydraulic fluid pump is pentiful, diverting there-
from a release flow of hydraulic fluid; and
(h) a second throttle element;
(i) said release flow of hydraulic fluid, when available, being
supplied to said lubricating system of said gear transmis-
sion mechanism, and also said torque converter hydraulic
fluid pressure being supplied to said lubricating system of
said gear transmission mechanism via said second throttle
element;
0) whereby said torque converter hydraulic fluid pressure is
always maintained at a level proportionally reduced as
compared with said line hydraulic fluid pressure level,
and, when said hydraulic fluid pump is producing a plenti-
ful amount of flow of hydraulic fluid, and said torque
converter hydraulic fluid pressure control valve is thus
releasing a fairly large release flow of hydraulic fluid as
diverted from said plentiful supply of hydraulic fluid from
said pump, said lubricating system of said gear transmis-
sion mechanism is thus receiving an ample flow of lubri-
cating hydraulic fluid, this ample flow being made up both
of said release flow of hydraulic fluid, and also of said
flow of hydraulic fluid from said torque converter hy-
draulic fluid pressure as provided through said second
throttle element; but, when said hydraulic fluid pump is
producing rather a small flow of hydraulic fluid, and said
torque converter hydraulic fluid pressure control valve is
not releasing any substantial release flow of hydraulic
fluid as diverted from said supply of hydraulic fluid from
said pump, said lubricating system of said gear transmis-
sion mechanism is still receiving a certain definite small
amount of lubricating hydraulic fluid, from said torque
converter hydraulic fluid pressure as provided via said
second throttle element.
4,437,359
WINE WAITER'S CORKSCREWS
Andre Df;Joux, 15, rue Tiikanal, 75015 Paris, and Bruno De-
inoulez, 76 Boulevard Koenig, 92200 NeuUly, both of France
FUed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,454
Claimi priority, appUcation France, May 23, 1980, 80 11499
Int a.> B67B 7/04
U.S. a. 81—3.38 A 4 Claims
1. A corkscrew for removing a cork from the mouth of a
bottle comprising a flat elongated handle having fvst and
second ends, auger means positioned between said first and
second ends and pivotally attached to said handle, and extrac-
996
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
tion lever means secured to said handle about pivot means
located at one of said first or second ends, said extraction lever
means comprising first and second levers, each secured at one
end thereof to said handle at said pivot means, said first lever
including a first notch and said second lever including a second
notch, and said first and second notches being located at first
and second unequal distances away from said pivot means,
whereby after screwing said auger into said cork, upon posi-
tioning the notch least distant from said pivot means against
said bottle mouth, said handle is pivoted about said pivot
means causing a first partial extraction of said cork from said
bottle mouth, with subsequent complete removal of said cork
from said bottle mouth being facilitated by thereafter position-
mg the other notch most distant from said pivot means against
said bottle mouth and pivoting said handle about said pivot
means, causing a second total extraction of said cork, via said
auger pivoting about said pivot means, out of said bottle mouth
in a two-step removal operation.
selective locking means for maintaining said needles in their
said non-tattooing position,
and means at the forward end of said frame means for en-
M 30
4,437,360
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLED STOPPER
EXTRACTION FROM AND REINSERTION IN
SPARKLING WINE BOTTLES
HaJ C. Becker, 4104 Sumter Sq., Fort Collins, Colo. 80525
FUed Feb. 23, 1983, Ser. No. 469,198
Int. a.3 B67B 7/06. 7/44
U.S. a. 81-3.44 2 ci^^
1. Apparatus for controlled stopper extraction from and
reinsertion m sparkling wine bottles comprising:
(a) bifurcated tensile engaging means, having two parallel
member means spaced apart by a closed curved end, and
having oppositely disposed free handle ends for tensilely
increasing and decreasing said spacing;
(b) one said member means defines a compound hole means
of two contiguous holes, one hole for passing a stopper
head and the other for slidably engaging said stopper body
and stopper head lower edges;
(c) a second said member means defining a hollow opposing
said other contiguous hole for simultaneously engaging
said stopper top as said one said member means other hole
slidably engages said stopper body.
4,43731
TATTOOING GUN
Lester M. Steckel, Box 235, Taylor, Nebr. 68879, and Valeria J.
Thomsen, P.O. Box 457, BurweU, Nebr. 68823
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,776
Int a.3 B43K 5/00: A61D 1/00
UA CI. 81-9J2 2 Claims
1. An animal tattooing gun comprising,
» a frame means having rearward and forward ends,
a plurality of tattooing needles selectively movably mounted
at the forward end of said frame means,
said needles being movable between a rearward non-tattoo-
ing position to a forward tattooing position,
resilient means operatively connected to said needles for
selectively rapidly moving said needles from their said
non-Uttooing position to their said tattooing position
whereby said needles will penetrate a portion of the ani-
mal to create tattoo openings therein.
gagement with the animal and operatively connected to
said locking means whereby sufficient pressure thereon
will disengage said locking means to cause said needles to
move to their said tattooing position.
4,437,362
TOOLS FOR HANDLING MAGNETIC ARTICLES
Jerry C. Hurst, Reading, Pa., assignor to Western Electric Co..
Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,942
Int. a.3 B25B 9/02. 11/00
U.S. a 81-43 5 c^
1. A tweezer tool for handling a magnetic article, compris-
ing:
first and second elongated tweezer members, joined at one
end and biased apart and tapered to substantially free ends
where at least a portion of said first member is movable
toward and away from a corresponding portion of said
second member;
a substantially non-magnetizable and planar means for hold-
ing an article, said means having an aperture to pass flux
therethrough and being associated with the free end of the
second member whereat said means is interposed between
the first member and contact with a surface of the article
for releasably holding the same in cooperation with a
magnetic field, said article being movable laterally along
said holding means; and a substantially permanent magnet
having a major and a minor portion and being
affixed to the free end of the first member, said magnet
having only the minor portion formed and aligned to enter
the aperture in the holding means, said magnet being of
sufficient strength and being removably applied by opera-
tion of the first member in stages to:
pick up an article by establishing the magnetic field of
sufficient strength relative to the weight and material of
the article and to any opposing external forces acting
thereupon that said article is preferentially attracted to
the holding means when the tool is applied to pick up
the article, and
to release an article from the tool by withdrawing the
magnet and the field, the article being restrained by the
holding means until gravity and any other opposing
external forces overcome the attraction of the with-
drawing field and said article separates from the tool.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
997
4,437,363
DUAL CAMMING ACTION JAW ASSEMBLY AND
POWER TONG
Charles W. Hayacs, Spring, Tex., assignor to Joy Manufactur-
ing Company, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed JuB. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,293
Int. a.3 B25B 17/00
U.S. a. 81—57.18 25 Claims
1. A jaw assembly for use in a power tong for axially rotating
an axially elongated body which comprises:
a jaw frame carried by the power tong for movement into
and out of engagement with said axially elongated body;
a cam follower means connected to said jaw frame and
adapted to cooperate with a cam surface portion of said
power tong to impart a primary camming action of the
jaw frame into and out of engagement with said axially
elongated body, and;
a die assembly slidably mounted to said jaw frame allowing
relative motion between itself and said jaw frame in at
least two directions along a camming surface of contact
with said jaw frame and cooperating with said jaw frame
providing a second camming action which radially in-
creases the force of said die assembly against the axially
elongated body independently of the primary camming
action of the jaw frame upon engagement with said body
and said relative motion in either of said at least two
directions.
4,437,364
NUT WRENCH
Werner W. Martinmaas, 3461 CashiU Blvd., Reno, Nev.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,027
Int. a.} B25B 13/12
U.S. a. 81—179 20 Qaims
89509
1. In a wrench for rotating a fastener having angularly re-
lated flat surfaces surrounding an axis of rotation, said wrench
having a handle, a first jaw member with a first gripping face
and a second jaw member with a second gripping face effec-
tively parallel to said first gripping face, and said faces defining
a forwardly open jaw to slidably engage extensive parts of
opposite flat surfaces of a fastener to turn said fastener during
forward rotation of the wrench, and improvement which
permits the wrench to be reverse rotated without turning the
fastener, said improvement comprising:
the second jaw member provides a slideway which diverges
from the first jaw member toward the front of the jaw;
a slide member mounted for fore-and-afl movement along
said slideway, said slide member having said second grip-
ping face thereon which engages a substantial part but less
than the entirety of one of said flat surfaces of a fastener,
and said second gripping face terminating at a rear face
that extends toward the slideway at an angle^to the second
gripping face, said rear face defining the frotit of a recess
which also has a lower defining surface, the dimensions of
said recess being great enough and the rehtionship be-
tween said rear face and said lower defining surface being
such that during reverse rotation of the wrench an apex of
a fastener may be received in said recess free of contact
with either defining surface thereof;
and spring means on the wrench lightly biasing said slide
member rearwardly to a normal position;
the angle of divergence of the slideway, the length of the
second gripping face, and the forward travel of the slide
member being such that reverse rotation of the wrench
while engaged with opposite flat surfaces of a fastener
causes one of said flat surfaces to pivot about the slide
member apex between said second gripping face and said
rear face while the fastener apex that defines the rear of
said one of said flat surfaces is received in said recess free
of contact with the slide member and thus cam the slide
member forwardly against the bias of the spring means a
sufficient distance that the jaw members span said fastener
apex and the directly opposite fastener apex during said
reverse rotation, whereby the jaw members overndc said
opposite apices and the spring means returns the slide
member to its normal position with the second gripping
face in engagement with the next flat surface of the fas-
tener.
4,437465
SCREWDRIVER
Yigal Y. Yaari, 42 Kirkwood Rd., Brighton, Mau. 02135
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,203
Int. a.3 B25G 7/00
U.S. a. 81—436 2 Claims
1. A screwdriver capable of being operated manually or
automatically comprising:
a shank, a tip formed at the free end of the shank adapted to
engage the head of a screw,
998
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
a handle permanently fwcd on the other end of the shank by
which the screwdriver may be operated manually,
said handle having a weU, non-circular in croM section
extending axially in the handle from the handle end re-
mote from the shank,
and a coupling having one end with a cross-sectional shape
that conforms to the cross-section of the well and fitting
snugly mto the well but removable therefrom so that the
screwdriver may be operated manually without interfer-
ence from the coupling, said coupling having a second end
that IS adapted to be engaged by the chuck of a power drill
so that the screwdriver may be powered by a power drill
when the coupling is connected both to the power drill
chuck and the handle.
4,437,366
«...« TOOL CARRIER FOR PORTABLE LATHE
WUIiam H. Artie, Rancho Cordora, Callf^ asrignor to Tri Tool.
Inc., Rancho Cordova, Calif.
FUed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,680
Int a.3 B23B 3/22. 29/00
UAa.82-4C ^cMm
engage the female gibs in camming relationship along the
bevel surfaces to thereby cause clamping together of a
respective tool holder bottom surface and an associated
tool slide when they are in assembled position; each tool
holder includmg a first aperture extending parallel to its
respective tool slide and parallel to the tool holder side
edges, and means therein for engaging the threads of a
threaded shaft; a rotatable threaded shaft extending
through each said aperture, each shaft being retained in
fixed axial position relative to a tool slide to which it is
connected; and means for rotating each shaft to move
each tool holder relative to and parallel with its respective
tool slide when at least a single gib bracket associated
therewith is loosened from its clamping position; at least
one of said tool slides including an elongated undercut slot
area in its slide surface extending along its length- the
respective tool holder associated with said tool slide in-
eluding the slot area including a second aperture extend-
ing normal to said first aperture and terminating at its
bottom surface opposite said undercut slot area, said sec-
ond aperture being adapted to receive an elongated cut-
ting tool; whereby said undercut area prevents interfer-
ence between said tool slide and a cutting tool that is
positioned in said second aperture so as to extend beyond
the bottom surface of the respective tool holder
4,437,367
PROCTSS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
CUTTING FEED OF BAND SAW MACHINES
Karl Hamer, Rebrtrasae 10, 8302 Angwil, Switzerland
FUed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,985
^«ta« priority, appUcation Switzerland, Mar. 27, 1980,
U.S. a. 83—13
Int aj B23D 53/00
21Clainu
(^.
1. In a portable lathe for preparing pipe ends for welding
including a hollow tool carrier rototable about a longitudinal
cutting axis of symmetry; a mandrel shaft extending axially
through the tool carrier; a pipe engaging mandrel on the distal
end of said mandrel shaft; means for expanding the mandrel
into a pipe engaging position to secure the lathe in an adjust-
ab y set location relative to a pipe end; said tool carrier rotat-
able relative to said mandrel shaft and moveable towards and
away from the distal end of the mandrel; the improvement
compnsing:
said tool carrier comprising three radially extending circum-
ferentially spaced arms each including a flat tool slide
facmg towards a pipe end position; each tool slide includ-
ing a tool holder slide surface; a clamp means for releas-
ably secunng a tool holder to the slide surface; each tool
slide includmg parallel opposed female bevel gibs extend-
ing along the side edges of the tool slide to form a dovetail
tool slide; each tool holder connected to a respective tool
slide including upstanding side edges extending normal to
the respective tool slide surface parallel to the side edges
of the tool slide, and a tool slide engaging bottom surface;
each tool holder including female bevel gibs in its upstand-
ing side edges extending parallel to the gibs in the sides of
a respective associated tool slide; each clamp means com-
pnsmg a pair of gibs brackets removably secured to the
opposite side edges of a respective tool holder and includ-
mg male bevel gibs at its opposite edges, said brackets
each spanmng the distance between respective female gibs
ui a tool slide and associated tool holder; said gibs all
mcluding a bevel surface inclined from the center line of a
respective tool slide and tool carrier extending toward the
outer edges of the slide and carrier towards the abutting
tool holder and tool slide surfaces; said male gibs being
complementary in form to the female gibs and arranged to
•? On
1. A method for controlling the cutting feed speed of band
saw machines equipped with a toothed saw band to attain an
optimum feed velocity with substantial constant safety against
straying, comprising the steps of empirically determining
under predetermined conditions an acceptable optimum cut-
ting force representing a desired cutting force value, calculat-
ing from said acceptable optimum cutting force the corre-
sponding residual tensile stress in the saw band, and continu-
ously maintaining the saw band under said residual tensile
stress withm the critical zone of the teeth by measuring the
actual value of the cutting force, comparing the actual cutting
force value with the desired cutting force value, and adjusting
the actual cutting force in case of differences between the
actual and desired cutting force value to thereby maintain an at
least approximately constant value of said residual tensile stress
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
999
and therewith obtain substantially optimum feed velocity dur-
ing cutting of the workpiece.
detecting a variance in the thickness at an edge portion; pulling
the sheet material at the cutting station taut across iu length;
4,437,368
APPARATUS AND METHOD OF REDUCING TREES TO
FIREWOOD
Nicholas L. Bennett, Rte. #3, AbUene, Kans. 67410
FUed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,556
Int a^ B27B 1/00
VS. a. 83—13 3 Claims
3. A process for reducing trees to firewood comprising the
steps of:
(a) placing at least one tree log upon a plurality of detachable
upright yoke support means having a U-shaped top and
spacedly positioned along an angle iron frame means to
elevate the tree log above the ground;
(b) cutting the tree log between a predetermined pair of
contiguous yoke support means, depending on the length
of firewood desired, by a chain saw means;
(c) cutting additionally the tree log between at least one
more predetermined pair of contiguous yoke support
means by the chain saw means;
(d) removing the cut tree log of step (b) from a portion of the
plurality of yoke support means;
(e) detaching the upright yoke suppori means which were
holding the cut tree log of step (d) in order to have easier
access to the additionally cut tree log of step (c); and
(0 removing the additionally cut tree log of step (c) from a
remaining portion of the plurality of yoke suppori means.
4,437,369
SHEET MATERUL CUTTING METHOD AND
APPARATUS
Charles E. Brocklehurst, and Bruce H. Cooper, both of Fountain
Inn, S.C., assignors to Opelika Manufacturing Corporation,
Chicago, III.
Filed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,709
Int a.) D06H 7/02
VJS. a. 83—18 15 Claims
1. A method of cutting sheet material across its length, the
sheet material having bands of varying thickness extending
across its length comprising the steps of advancing the material
from a supply along its length through a predetermined path
toward a cutting station; detecting variances in the thickness of
the sheet material at opposite edge portions of the sheet mate-
rial at predetermined positions ahead of the cutting station;
stopping each edge portion of the sheet material independently
of the other edge portion at the cutting station in response to
cutting across the sheet material at the cutting station while the
sheet material is pulled taut.
4,437,370
METHOD FOR THE OPERATION OF A
CROSS^lUmNG APPARATUS
Helmut PhUipp, and Wilfried Kurth, both of Dusseldorf, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Jagenberg Werke AG, Dussel-
dorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,613
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 23,
1980,3039983
Int a.3 B26D 7/00
U.S. a. 83—23 3 Claims
M.',
m.
it
B
1. In the cutting of a continuous web such as paper or card-
board into sheets employing a cross-cutting apparatus compris-
ing conveyor rolls, a pair of parallel cross-knives and a sheet
outfeeder, the improvement in the start-up or restarting of the
apparatus which comprises moving the cross-knives to a posi-
tion not interfering with the free passage of the web, surting
the apparatus up by setting the conveyor rolls in rotation, and
bringing the cross-knives into the cutting position only after
the leading end of the web has been introduced in full web
width into the sheet outfeeder.
4,437,371
METHOD FOR CUTHNG POLYMERIC BELT BODY
Anderson W. Howerton, Nlxa, and Mark P. Foley, Springfield,
both of Mo., assignors to Diyco Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 210,991, Nov. 26, 1980, Pat No. 4368,656.
This appUcation Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,536
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 18,
2000, has been diKlaimed.
Int a? B26D 3/00
U.S. a. 83—54 4 Claims
1. In a method of cutting a polymeric endless power trans-
mission belt body which has a plurality of endless V-belt ele-
ments fastened in spaced side-by-side relation by an endless
structure to define alternating projections and grooves in said
belt body, said grooves having side walls defined by facing
surfaces of an immediately adjacent pair of belt elements, said
method comprising the step of cutting said endless structure
with a cutting knife to define a plurality of endless belts each
1000
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
having at least one belt element; the improvement comprising
the steps of, disposing a support in a stationary position, fasten-
mg said knife at a fued position on said support, providing a
pair of freely routable wheels disposed substantially in a recti-
linear path with said knife and aligned therewith for supporting
and guiding said belt body during cutting, disposing said knife
and the outer portions of said wheels against said facing sur-
faces of a particular groove during said cutting step, utilizing
said outer portions of said wheels as the sole means to engage
said belt body to provide said supporting and guiding, rotat-
ably supporting said wheels on said support, and moving said
belt body relative to said knife in cutting engagement with said
structure, said knife cooperating with said wheels during said
moving step to provide precise cutting through said structure
at the base of said particular groove.
a direction substantially perpendicular to the feed path of
said material; and
a piston rod connected to said movable axle;
(d) a double-acting hydraulic cylinder connected to said
piston rod to move said movable cutter in the perpendicu-
lar direction;
(e) a reciprocating mechanism for moving said travelling
assembly along said guide rods at substantially the same
speed as said material, said reciprocating mechanism in-
cluding:
a crank lever afTixed at one end to said drive shaft-
a flying slide rotatably supported at the other end of said
crank lever by an axle;
a slide link slidably fitted to said flying slide, one end of said
Imk being pivotably supported on the shearing machine-
and '
a connecting link rotatably connecting the other end of said
slide link to said travelling assembly, rotation of said crank
lever causing said slide link to oscUlate and said connect-
ing link to reciprocate to drive said travelling assembly
and "
(0 a two-way rotary valve to charge or discharge a working
fluid into or from said double-acting hydraulic cylinder
said two-way rotary valve being opened or closed by said
adjustable-speed motor in coordination with and at sub-
stantially the same cyclical period as movement of said
reciprocating mechanism.
4,437,372
SHEARING MACHINE
Hideo Ishigami, Kawasaki, and Nobuo Tohei, Mishima, both of
Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Meidensha, Tokyo.
Japan — > .^ .
^ FUed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,327 4,437,373
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 20, 1980, 55-181080 ARRANGEMENT FOR PERFORATING OR CUTTING
Int. a.^ B23D 25/06; B26D 1/60 FOILS
U.S. a. 83-320 4 Qjjj^ Leonard Van Der Meulen, 17, Rue M'^ayram V, Tuni el
Menzah V, Tunisia
FUed Jul. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 401,327
ioS*^JIlii^*^' ■»""**»» ^^ Rep- o' Gemumy, Jul. 30,
1981, 3130090
Int. a.3 B26F J/18
U.S. a. 83-346 21 cMm
» 2!
1. A shearing machine having a movable cutter and a fixed
cutter coacting to cut ofl^a continuously fed material into given
lengths, comprising:
(a) an adjustable-speed motor, having a drive shaft, for driv-
ing the shearing machine,
(b) at least one guide rod mounted on frame means to guide
the movable and fixed cutters in a direction generally
parallel to the feed path of said continuously fed material-
(c) a traveling assembly reciprocable along said guide rod'
said travelling assembly including:
a travelling case;
a fixed-cutter holder secured to an end of said case fixedly
supporting the fixed cutter thereon;
a niovable-cutter holder supporting the movable cutter on
the case;
a movable axle supporting said movable-cutter holder, said
movable axle being movable within said travelling case in
1. An arrangement for perforating foils, particularly of syn-
thetic plastic material, comprising
an elongated cutter; and
a counter element, said elongated cutter and said counter
element being movable relative to one another in a direc-
tion of elongation of said cutter and also toward one
another, said cutter being provided over its entire length
with an uninterrupted cutting edge, and said counter
element being composed of a plurality of rollers movable
about their axes and located adjacent to one another, so as
to provide for selective perforating or cutting.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1001
4,437,374
TUBE CUTTING APPARATUS
John J. Borzym, 4820 SchoolbeU La., Birmingham, Mich. 48010
Division of Ser. No. 270,298, Jun. 4, 1981, Pat No. 4^2,644,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 119,241, Feb. 7, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,294,147. ThU appUcation Jan. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 461,850
Int a.J B23D 27/00, 25/04
VS. a. 83—454 7 Claims
fm -;
&
{•'*'
jl Jp
¥
1. Apparatus for severing an elongate workpiece, compris-
ing:
a blade for severing said workpiece;
a pair of opposed jaws for clamping said workpiece therebe-
tween;
first and second means for respectively mounting said die
jaws for reciprocating movement toward and away from
each other between an open release position and a closed
clamping position;
cam means coupled with said mounting means for applying
a preselected value of force to said first and second mount-
ing means whereby to cause said jaws and said mounting
means to shift to said closed position thereof; and
means coupled with said cam means for limiting the magni-
tude of force applied by said cam means to said first and
second mounting means to said preselected value thereof.
4,437,375
MOLDED FRAME MAKER MITRE BOX WITH CLAMPS
James Elmore, Simsbury, and Robert F. West, West Simsbury,
both of Conn., assignors to The Stanley Works, New Britain,
Conn.
FUed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,477
Int. a.J B27G 5/02
UJS. a. 83—762 12 Claims
1. A mitre box especially adapted for making frame pieces
comprising:
A. a support member integrally formed from synthetic resin
and including a platform portion providing a generally
planar upper surface, a comer post extending upwardly
therefrom and having right angularly disposed vertical
faces bordering said upper surface of said platform por-
tion, clamp posts spaced to the opposite sides of said upper
surface of said platform portion from said vertical faces of
said comer post and extending upwardly from said plat-
form portion, and a saw guide post extending upwardly
from said upper surface of said platform portion between
said clamp posts on the side thereof opposite from said
comer post, said comer post having a channel therein
extending transversely therethrough and downwardly
thereinto from its top surface, said channel bisecting the
90* angle defined by the cooperating vertical faces of said
comer post, said saw guide post having a channel extend-
ing transversely therethrough and downwardly thereinto
from its top surface, said saw guide post channel being
aligned with said comer post channel so that a saw blade
may be guided by said channels to cut the end of a work-
piece extending parallel to and abutting either one of said
comer post vertical faces at substantially a 45* angle, said
comer post having a second vertical channel therein
spaced from said first mentioned channel and extending
transversely therethrough and downwardly thereinto
along a line perpendicular to one of said right angularly
disposed vertical faces of said comer post, the clamp post
cooperating with said one vertical face having a channel
therein aligned with said second channel of each comer
post, said channel of said clamp post extending trans-
versely therethrough and downwardly thereinto from the
top surfaces thereof, whereby a saw blade may be guided
by said second channel of said comer post and said chan-
nel of said clamp post to cut the end of an associated
workpiece extending parallel to said one vertical face at
substantially a 90' angle;
B. clamp assemblies adjustably mounted in said clamp posts,
each said clamp including an elongated member having its
longitudinal axis extending perpendicularly to the cooper-
ating face of said comer post and threadably engaged in its
post for adjustable movement towards and away from the
cooperating vertical face of said comer post, the end of
said elongated member adjacent said comer post having a
clamping face for engagement with the associated work-
piece to hold it against the cooperating face of said comer
post.
4,437,376
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING AND RELEASING
PRESSURE OF A TOOL ON A WORKPIECE
David L. FUnt, 4430 Asbury Dr., Toledo, Ohio 43612
Filed May 19, 1982, Ser. No. 379,651
Int a.} C03B 33/12
U.S. a. 83— 886 20 Claims
1. Mounting apparatus for holding a tool for forming a mark
on a workpiece manipulated by hand under the tool, said
apparatus comprising means forming a flat supporting surface
for the workpiece, a mounting stand affixed to said surface-
forming means, a release arm extending from said stand over
said surface, a tool-supporting arm extending from said stand
over said surface in the same direction as said release arm, tool
holding means carried by said supporting arm, pressure means
engagable with said supporting arm and said stand to urge the
outer end of said supporting arm toward said surface, and
means engagable with one of said release arm and said support-
ing arm and extending between said release arm and said sup-
porting arm to enable said supporting arm to be manually
moved away from said surface when it is desired to remove the
10Q2
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
workpiece from contact with the tool held by said tool holding
means of said suj^rting arm.
4,437,377
DIGITAL ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
Tiayoahl Mitarai, Yokohana, and Kunio Sato, Tokyo, both of
Japan, aadgBors to Caaio Conpater Co., Ud^ Tokyo, Jaaaa
FIW Apr. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 370,088
Claiiaa priority, appUcatioa Japan, Apr. 30, 1981, 56^220;
Apr. 30, 1981, 56-66221
Int CL^ GIOH 1/00
UA a 84-1.01 10 ctalms
1. A digital electronic musical instrument comprising:
a plurality of musical tone generating means, each musical
tone generating means generating digitized musical tone
dau representing a plurality of musical tones;
composing means for digitally composing said digitized
musical tone data generated from ail of said plurality of
musical tone generating means;
operating means coupled to said composing means for selec-
tively compressing or expanding the composed musical
tone data in accordance with the composed musical tone
data from all of said musical tone generating means; and
output means including digital to analog converting means
coupled to said operating means for converting the com-
posed expanded or compressed musical tone data into an
analog signal corresponding to a musical sound.
8. A digital electronic musical instrument comprising:
a plurality of musical tone generating means, each musical
tone generating means including means for generating
digitized musical tone data and digital envelope data, the
digitized musical tone data being envelope-controlled in
accordance with said digital envelope dato;
first composing means for digitally composing said digitized
musical tone data generated from ail of said plurality of
musical tone generating means;
second composing means for digitally composing said digital
envelope data generated from all of said plurality of musi-
cal tone generating means;
setting means for setting compressing or expanding levels in
accordance with the composed envelope data produced
from said second composing means;
operating means for compressing or expanding the com-
posed musical tone data from said first composing means
m accordance with said compressing or expanding level
set by said setting means;
digital to analog converting means;
means for supplying the compressed or expanded digitized
musical tone daU output from said operating means to said
digital to analog converting means; and
amplifying means for amplifying an output signal from said
digital to analog converting means as a function of said
compressmg or expanding level set by said setting means
to thereby effect compression or expansion of said outout
signal. '^
4,437,378
ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
HldMkl IsUda, Tokyo; TomoUaa Isiiikawa, Kawaaoe: KoJi
Yamaaa. and TakeUko Kayahara, both of Tokyo, aU of Japan.
aMlgnon to Caaio Computer Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 361,474
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 30, 1981, 5645631:
Mar. 30, 1981, 5645632; Mar. 30, 1981, 5645633
Int a.3 GIOH i/06
UA a 84-1.18 5 CW^
1. An electronic musical instrument comprising:
a plurality of performance keys,
a bar code reader for reading bar code data from a recording
medium on which predetermined tone data including at
least pitch data and duration daU are printed in the form
of bar codes,
memory means for digitally storing pitch data correspond-
ing at least to the bar code data read out by said bar code
reader,
selection means for specifying first and second performance
modes,
first control means which operates when said first perfor-
mance mode is specified by said selection means, said first
control means comprising a plurality of display members
each arranged to indicate a different one of the perfor-
mance keys,
first read out means responsive to operation of the perfor-
mance key indicated by the associated display member,
for reading out from said memory means pitch informa-
tion corresponding to the next pitch to be played,
display control means operative to discriminate from other
display members, the display member of that performance
key which corresponds to the pitch information read out
by said first read out means and to activate said display
member,
second control means which operates when said second
performance mode is specified by said selecting means,
said second control means comprising second read out
means which sequentially reads out the pitch daU stored
in 'said memory means in intervals following the duration
dato corresponding to the pitch data, and
sound generating means which generates a sound in accor-
dance with the pitch dato and the duration dato read out
by said second read out means.
4,437,379
ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT OP
WAVEFORM MEMORY READOUT TYPE
Takatoshi Okomnra. Haauunatni, Japan, awignor to Nippon
Gakki Scizo KaboiUki Kaiaha, Hanamatsn, Japan
FUed Oct 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,110
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, No?. 29, 1980, 55-168442
Int a.3 GIOH 1/06
UA CI. 84-1 J2 3 ctai„,
1. An electromc musical instrument comprising:
keyboard means having a plurality of keys which are divided
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1003
into a plurality of tone ranges, each of said tone ranges
including one or more adjacent keys respectively;
memory means for storing at least two waveforms of a
number smaller than the number of said tone ranges, one
of said stored waveforms being a reference waveform
which is a musical tone waveform corresponding to a
specific one among said tone ranges and a second of said
at least two stored waveforms being a difference wave-
form whose waveshape is the difference between said
reference waveform and a waveform which is a musical
tone waveform corresponding to a highest tone range
among said tone ranges divided by a factor proportional
to the numerical difference between said specific one tone
range and said highest tone range;
form whose level attenuates during note duration in a
stepped nuumer in response to said division signals.
HM
whereby said sound pressure signal and said tone signal
are used to generate a sound signal.
address signal generating means for generating an address
signal having a repetition period corresponding to a tone
pitch of a depressed key and for supplying said address
signal to said memory means so that said reference wave-
form and said difference waveform respectively having
the periods equal to said repetition period are read out
from said memory means;
coefficient generator means for producing a coefficient
having a value proportional to the numerical difference
between said specific one tone range and the tone range
corresponding to said depressed key;
multiplier means for multiplying said difference waveform
by said coefficient to generate a modified waveform; and
means for adding said modified waveform to said reference
waveform to produce a musical tone waveform corre-
sponding to said depressed key.
4,437,381
METRONOMIC SIGNALLING DEVICES AND METHOD
OF TEMPO SIGNALUNG
Shin H. Chen, 1725 N. LeClaire Ave., Chicago, 111. 60639
FUed Jol. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,378
Int Q\} GlOB n/00
U.S. a. 84-484 15 Oaims
4,437,380
MUSICAL ENVELOPE-PRODUCING DEVICE
Tetsuo Yamaguchi, Kawasaki, Japan, aaiignor to Tokyo
Shibaura Dcaki Kabnihiki Kaiaha, Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 331,077
Claims priority. appUcation Japan, Dec. 17, 1980, 55-178424
Int Q\} GIOH 1/02
U.S. a. 84— 1J6 10 Claims
1. A musical envelope-producing device comprising:
(a) memory means for storing a plurality of note dato includ-
ing first musical performance dato representing note pitch
and second musical performance dato representing note
duration;
(b) read-out means for selecting and reading out the note
dato from said memory means;
(c) first processing means, connected to said memory means,
for receiving the first musical performance dato and gen-
erating a tone signal according to the first musical perfor-
mance data;
(d) second processing means, connected to said memory
means, for receiving the second musical performance dato
and dividing the note duration represented by the second
musical performance dato into a plurality of time compo-
nents represented by division signals, said division signals
comprising a plurality of signals of different periods; and
(e) envelope circuit means, responsive to said tone signal and
said division signals, for producing a stepped, sound pres-
sure signal representing a stepped musical envelope wave-
S » 31 S2 "
1. A silent metronomic pulsing device, comprising;
a housing having an opening;
a soundproof relatively soft, yieldably movable transmission
pad fixed across said opening and having a texture accen-
tuated face projecting outwardly from said housing for
tempo-signal-imparting engagement with a user, and a
surface of substantial area facing inwardly into said hous-
ing;
transducer means comprising a disk-like member fixed to
and movable with said inwardly facing surface of the
soundproof pad and covering a major portion of said area;
dynamoelectric means carried in part fuedly on said mem-
ber and in part fixedly on said housing and operable for
pulsing said member and thereby actuating said pad for
tempo signal transmission to the user without acoustical
interference;
and electrical means for operating said pulsing means and
including means for selectively controlling the pulsing
tempo of the pulsing means.
1004
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,382
BOMB DISPOSAL DEVICE
Ynko? Yerasfaalmj, Rechov Hapartisanim 3, Petach TilcTa.
land
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,897
Claima priority, appUcation Israel, Sep. 14, 1980, 61035
Int a.3 F42D 5/04; F24B 33/06; E06B 9/00
U.S. a 86-1 B 10 Claims
tors on the muzzle side of where said first impedance is
connected across said conductors;
whereby current is commutated to said first impedance to
suppress muzzle arcing.
1. A bomb disposal device, comprising:
a high-strength outer housing formed with a first opening
and a second opening on opposite sides thereof, both
leadmg into its interior;
pivotal mounting means for said outer housing to permit
pivoting same about a horizontal axis from an upright
position wherein said first and second openings are in
substantial vertical alignment, to a horizontal position
wherem they are in substantial horizontal alignment;
an mner, open-ended container within said housing and fixed
with respect to said mounting means such that the con-
tainer's open end is disposed upwardly and underiies said
housmg first opening in the upright position of the hous-
ing;
and a cover within said housing and fixed with respect to
said mounting means to overlie the open end of the con-
tainer;
said cover being of larger dimensions than said housing first
openmg such that in the event of explosion of a bomb
within said container while the outer housing is in its
upright position, the cover wUl be blown against said
housing first opening to close same and thereafter to direct
the force of the explosion vertically downwardly through
the housing second opening.
4,437,383
MUZZLE ARC SUPPRESSOR FOR ELECTROMAGNETIC
PROJECTILE LAUNCHER
'^,1L^JP*^5*"'''^ ^'°"8h, and George A. Kemeny,
WUkins Township, AUegheny County, both of Pa., assignors
to Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,861
Int. a.3 F41F I/OO
COOUIC
I cooiiac
4,437,384
GUN MOUNT
Douglas P. Tassie, St George, Vt., assignor to General Qectric
Company, Bnrlington, Vt.
FUed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,716
Int a.3 F41F 2J/04
U.S. a. 89-37 A 7 claims
1. An electromagnetic projectile launcher comprising-
a pair of generally parallel conductors having a breech and
a muzzle end;
means for conducting current between said conductors and
tor accelerating said projectile;
a source of high current connected to said conductors;
a first unpedance disposed across said conductors adjacent
the muzzle end thereof;
a second impedance disposed in at least one of said conduc-
1. A mount, for an apparatus having a longitudinal axis,
having three axes of rotation with respect to a reference plane
composing:
a zenith axis which is perpendicular to said reference plane,
a train axis which is perpendicular to a tilted plane which is
at an angle to said reference plane,
an elevation axis which is parallel to said tilted plane,
said mount including:
a support which is parallel to said reference plane;
a base which is joumaled to said support for rotation
about said zenith axis;
a train ring which is joumaled to said base in a plane
which is parallel to said tilted plane for rotation about
said train axis;
an elevation ring which is joumaled to said train ring in a
plane which is perpendicular to said tilted plane for
rotation about said elevation axis;
first drive means fixed to said support and coupled to said
base for orienting said base about said zenith axis; and
second drive means fixed to said support and coupled to
said train ring for orienting said train ring about said
train axis;
said first and second drive means being independently and
concurrently operable to independently and concur-
rently drive said base and said train ring respectively.
4,437,385
ELECTROHYDRAULIC VALVE SYSTEM
Kenneth D. Kramer, and Edward H. Fletcher, both of Waterloo,
Iowa, assignors to Deere A Company, Moline, 111.
FUed Apr. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 364,373
Int a.J F15B 13/16
UA CI. 91-361 20 Claims
1. A system for controlling a double-acting hydraulic cylin-
der having extension and retraction chambers separated by a
piston in the cylinder, comprising:
a valve assembly comprising a first pilot-operated propor-
tional-type poppet valve for controlling fiuid communica-
tion between pump and the retraction chamber, a second
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
lOOS
pilot-operated proportional-type poppet valve for con-
trolling fluid communication between the retraction
chamber and a reservoir, a third pilot-operated propor-
tional-type poppet valve for controlling fluid communica-
tion between the extension chamber and the reservoir and
a fourth pilot-operated proportional-type poppet valve for
controlling fluid communication between the pump and
the extension chamber;
a plurality of solenoid-operated pilot valves, each pilot valve
operating one of the poppet valves;
^ "-^j^,
stroke and a pneumatic chamber for actuating said operating
rod according the pressure in said chamber, said method com-
prising the steps of continuously monitoring the actual position
of said operating rod during each stroke thereof, recording a
limit position reached by said operating rod in each stroke, and
modifying the speed at which said operating rod travels
towards said limit position of said stroke during each stroke
when said operating rod reaches a position which lies a prede-
termined amount in front of said limit position reached during
the preceding stroke.
4,437,387
INTEGRAL ACTUATOR AND SEQUENCING VALVE
Robert L. R. Beck, Seattic, Wash., assignor to The Boeing
Company, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,252
Int a.5 F15B 15/22
U.S. a. 91—401 7 ri.iT
I ZJ
n rt it li *t 2* M -30
position-sensing means for sensing the position of the cylin-
der and for generating a feedback signal indicative
thereof;
operator-controlled means for generating a command signal
representing a desired position of the piston relative to the
cylinder; and
control circuit means for generating an error signal derived
from the feedback and command signals and for energiz-
ing selected ones of the pilot valves to operate corre-
sponding ones of the poppet valves to move the cylinder
and reduce the magnitude of the error signal.
4,437,386
PNEUMATICALLY OPERATED SERVO-MOTOR AND
CONTROL METHOD THEREFOR
Hans Baumgartner, Viersen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Pierburg GmbH A Co., KG, Neuss, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 393,301
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 18,
1981, 3128486
Int. CI.3 F15B 9/03
VJS. a. 91—363 R 11 GaiiBs
1. A method of controlling a pneumatically operated servo-
motor having an operating rod with a substantially linear
1. An integral actuator and sequencing valve, comprising:
an elongated housing including first and second end walls
and sidewall means defining a chamber within said hous-
ing having a first diameter portion which extends axially
inwardly of the housing from the first end wall to a mid-
portion of the chamber, a second and larger diameter
portion extending axially inwardly of the housing from
the second end wall of the chamber to such mid-ponion of
the chamber, and a shoulder at the mid-portion of the
chamber where the two diflerent diameter portions of the
chamber meet;
a piston within said chamber having a piston head adapted to
slide within the first diameter portion of said chamber, a
piston rod connected to the piston head and extending
therefrom through the chamber and out through an open-
ing in the second end of the housing, and passageway
means in the piston communicating one side of the piston
head with the other;
an inlet port communicating with said chamber closely
adjacent the first end wall of the housing and a radial
outlet port communicating with the chamber at a location
axially between said shoulder and the second end wall of
the housing;
passageway means communicating a portion of the outlet
port that is located outside of the chamber with a portion
of the inlet port which is located outside of such chamber,
said passageway means including check valve means per-
mitting flow from the outlet port to the inlet port and
preventing flow through said passageway means from the
inlet port to the outlet port, and said passageway means
extending generally axially through the sidewall means of
the housing;
a sleeve slidably received within the larger diameter portion
of the chamber, said sleeve including a shoulder contact-
ing inner end portion and a sidewall closure portion which
extends across and blocks the outlet port when the sleeve
is against the shoulder, and an inner end portion which is
in the travel path of the piston head;
a sleeve biasing spring positioned to bias the sleeve towards
and into contact with the shoulder; and
a piston return spring positioned to bias the piston into a
retracted position adjacent the first end wall;
wherein the piston head, the closure sleeve, and the chamber
are dimensioned such that when the piston is retracted and
1006
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
presture fluid is introduced into the chamber through the
inlet port, such fluid will move the piston through the
chamber until the piston head makes contact with the
portion of the sleeve which is in the travel path of the
piston head, and then further introduction of fluid will
move both the piston and the sleeve together, until the
piston has reached the end of iu stroke and is fully ex-
tended; and
wherein the closure portion of the sleeve is positioned away
from the outlet port when the piston is fully extended and
the outlet port is in fluid receiving communication with
the piston rod side of the piston head, whereby fluid com-
munication is established through the chamber, from the
inlet port to the outlet port.
differential across said single pilot valve means remains con-
stant at said constant predetermined level.
M37,389
AXIAL PISTON PUMP HAVING BARREL BIASING
MEANS
WUliuB L. KUne, Galena, OUo, awigiior to The iOiBc MannfiK-
taring Company, Galena, Ohio
FUed Feb. 10, 1982, Scr. No. 347,511
lat a.i POIB WOO
UA a 91-499 9cufai«
4,437 J88
DUAL INPUT PRESSURE COMPENSATED FLUID
CONTROL VALVE
Tadensz Bndzich, Morelaod Hills, Ohio, aaiignor to Caterpillar
Tractor Company, Peoria, III.
Filed Ang. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,605
Tie portion of the term of this patent sabaeqnent to Mar. 13,
2001, has been diackimed.
Int CI.J F15B 13/04
UA a. 91-446 ,5 Claim.
1. A fluid energy translating device including a housing
havmg mlet and outlet passages, a port plate mounted in said
housmg and havmg inlet and outlet ports communicating with
said mlet and outlet passages in said housing, a rotaUble cylin-
der barrel abutting said port plate, having an axis of rotation
perpendicular to said port plate and dcflning a centrally dis-
posed through bore and a plurality of cylinders arranged about
such axis of roUtion, each cylinder having an axis spaced from
and parallel to such axis of rotation, a piston in each cylinder,
cam means for reciprocating said pistons as said barrel routes'
a drive shaft extending coaxiaUy through said barrel and rotat-
ably supported in said housing, means for rotatobly coupling
said barrel and said drive shaft, compression spring means
operably disposed between said barrel and said drive shaft for
providing a substantially constant force biasing said barrel
against said port plate notwithstanding axial movement of said
barrel over a limited distance and means for adjusting such
biasing force.
13. A dual input valve assembly operable to control fluid
flow to and from a fluid motor subjected to an opposing or
aidmg load, said valve assembly having first valve means oper-
able to provide first and second control orifice means to meter
fluid flow to and from said fluid motor, throttling control
means operable to selectively throttle fluid flow to and from
said fluid motor, single pUot means having means responsive to
pressure differential across said first and said second orifice
means and operable through said throttling control means to
mamtain a reUtively constant pressure differential at a prese-
lected constant level across said single pilot valve means and to
maintain a constant pressure differential across said first and
said second control orifice means during control of said oppos-
ing or said aiding load, first pressure signal transmitting means
operable to transmit control pressure signal from down stream
of said first control orifice means to controller means, second
pressure signal transmitting means operable to transmit control
pressure signal from down stream of said second control ori-
fice means to said controUer means, said controller means
havmg means responsive to an electrical pulse type signal and
means operable to modify said pressure signal transmitted from
said first and said second signal transmitting means, whereby
Uie level of said constant pressure differential acting across said
first and second control orifice means can be varied with re-
spect to said electrical pulse type signal while said pressure
4,43730
POWER-SERVO BOOSTER
RyiUI Ohta, Sdtaoia, Japan, aasignor to Jidoaha Kiki Co- Ltd„
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jon. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,438
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 25, 1980. 55-
105316[U]
Int. a.J F16J I/IO; F15B 9/10
UAa.92-84 4CtaI„
1. In a power-servo booster wherein a fitting member pro-
vided at the end of a push rod is slidably fitted in a connection
hole m a pow^r piston and reaction force which acu on the
push rod is transmitted to an input shaft via a reaction disk, the
improvement wherein:
said fitting member is made cylindrical and cup-shaped and
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1007
has a closed disk-shaped bottom over an entire cross-sec-
tion of said fitting member in a plane extending through a
central axis of said fitting member;
said reaction disk is disposed within said cylindrical fitting
member;
an entire outer cylindrical surface of said reaction disk is
completely surrounded by an inner cylindrical surface of
said fitting member;
an annular groove is formed in an outer periphery at the
bottom of said connection hole in said power piston;
a portion of said power piston within said annular groove
projects toward said push rod;
said fitting member in which said reaction disk is disposed is
fitted into said connection hole so that said reaction disk
can contact with an end surface of the projecting portion
of said power piston and a peripheral end of said fitting
member can fit into said annular groove; and
an annular gap is formed between said fitting member and
the bottom of said annular groove to allow for deforma-
tion of said reaction disk.
4,437,392
SWEEPING AIR STREAM APPARATUS AND METHOD
Ronald D. StoafTer, SU?er Spring, Md., aaaipm to Bowles
Flnidlcs Corporation, Silver Spring, Md.
per No. PCrAJS80/00368. % 371 Date Dae. 17, 1980, \ 102(a)
Date Dae. 15, 1980, PCT Pnb. No. WO80/02262, PCT Pub.
Date Oct 30, 1980
PCT FUed Apr. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 220,068
The portion of the tern of this patent sabaoQuant to Fab. 17,
1998, has been disriaimad.
Int. a.} B60H 1/24
U J. a. 98—2.08 22 Claims
4,43731
AIR CONDITION CONTROL APPARATUS WITH
INDOOR AND OUTDOOR AIR SELECTION MODES
FOR AUTOMOBILES
Oaana Egncfai, Ai^o, and Tomonori Fukui, Kariya, both of
Japan, assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
FUed Dec. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 326,414
Claina priority, appUcation Japan, Dae. 2, 1980, 55-170716
Int. a.J B60H 1/00, 3/00
UA a 98-2.01 5 Claims
1. An air-condition control apparatus for an automobile
including an air conditioning unit in which the upstream side is
selectively communicated to the ouuide or inside of the auto-
mobile compartment and the downstream side is communi-
cated to the inside of the automobile compartment, an actuator
for selectively taking in air from the outside of the compart-
ment and from the inside of the compartment in said air condi-
tioning unit, and a detector for generating an analog electrical
signal in accordance with impurity componenU of air taken in
from the outside of the compartment, wherein said air condi-
tion unit further comprises a control means for controlling said
actuator in accordance with the electrical signal generated
from said detector, said control means for producing a refer-
ence level from the minimum value of the detector output
during the period of time when the detector is energized to the
tiote when the detector is deenergized and comparing an out-
put of said detector with said reference level, thereby fixing
said actuator to a stote of intaking air from the inside of the
compartment when the compared differential value exceeds a
first predetermined value and returning the actuator to a stete
of intaking air from the outside of the compartment when the
compared differential value becomes smaller than a second
predetemined value, the second predetermined value being set
to be smaller than the first predetermined value.
1. In an air flow system having a source of air under prenure
flowing through a channel coupled to an outlet element and
the air is issued to the ambient environment in a sweeping air
stream pattern, the improvement comprising an air powered
oscillatory member, said oscillatory member being a vane
having a longitudinal axis normally aligned with the direction
of air flow through said channel, and means securing the
downstream end only of said oscillatory member in fixed rela-
tion to said outlet element with the upstream end of said oscil-
latory member being free and oscillatable, solely by air flow,
between a pair of extreme positions to each side of said longitu-
dinal axis, said extreme positions being short of contacting said
outlet and said channel and causing the air to iuue in a sweep-
ing air stream pattern from said outlet element.
4,43733
ASSEMBLY COMPARTMENT ARRANGED BETWEEN
AN ENGINE COMPARTMENT OR TRUNK AND A
SPLASH PANEL OF A MOTOR VEHICLE
Albert Stolz, Tttbingan, and ManfM Mordaii, Siadelflngea,
both of Fed. Rep. of Gemaay, aaaignors to Daimler-Baaz
AktiengascUschaft, Stottgart, Fad. Rap. of Gemaay
FUad Jna. 16, 1981, Sar. No. 274,175
Claims priority, appUcation Fad. Rap. of Garmaay, Jna. 21,
1980, 3023236
Int. a.i B60H 1/28
US. a. 98—2,17 17 Oairns
1. An assembly compartment for a heating/ventilating and-
1008
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
/or air conditioning system arranged between an engine com-
partment or trunk and a splash panel of a motor vehicle com-
prising an air inlet slot means for enabling a supply of fresh air
into the compartment; aggregate means accommodated in the
compartment for affecting air deflecting and air distributing of
the supply of fresh air into an interior space of the vehicle;
jacket means accommodating at least a portion of the aggre-
gate means are provided for enhancing separation, deflection,
and conducting of water extracted from the fresh air; means
are arranged on an underside of the aggregate means for direct-
ing a flow of the supply of fresh air from the assembly com-
partment to the interior space of the vehicle in an upwardly
oriented direction; an area forward of the splash panel for at
least one of a filter means and an evaporator for an air condi-
tioning means; duct means in said area for feeding water accu-
mulated therein to a lower end of the assembly compartment;
water drainage means at a lowest point of the assembly com-
partment for enabling a drainage of water separated and
drained by the jacket means and duct means; the jacket means
having a divided construction and including a lid means re-
movable so as to define an installation opening for the jacket
means to permit access to said filter means and/or said evapo-
rator for an air conditioning means whereby water is extracted
from the supply of fresh air and access to said area of the jacket
means from the exterior of the motor vehicle is facilitated.
4,43735
SPAGHETTI AND FOOD COOKER
Richard L. Speaker, 113 E. Brentwood Rd., Greenaboro, N.C.
27403
Filed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 364,900
Int. a.3 A47J 27/10
U.S. a. 99—355 10 Claims
4,437,394
DIRECTIONAL AIR FLOW FAN
Artiiur K. Tateishi, 25 Warrender, Apt. 202, Toronto, Ontario,
Canada
FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,778
Int. a.^ F24F 13/16
U.S. a. 98-10 V 18 cuunis
1. A spaghetti and food cooker comprising; a first chamber
and a second chamber in side by side juxtaposition to each
other for retaining a fluid in each chamber, means for con-
trolled heating the fluid in each chamber, and an elongated
perforated food-retaining compartment having means for load-
ing and unloading spaghetti or food into and out of said com-
partment, a pair of brackets longitudinally spaced from each
other and pivotally mounted above said chambers, said brack-
ets each having distal ends, said distal ends of said brackets
having compartment-retaining means thereon for securing said
food-reuining compartment thereon, means for pivoting said
pair of brackets with said food-retaining compartment secured
thereon into and out of each of said chambers by oscillatory
movement of said brackets, and means associated with at least
one of said brackets for rotating said compartment while re-
tained in said chambers.
4,437,396
AIR HEATED SANDWICH BIN
Robert F. Plattner, Spring Lake; Raymond J. Arend, and John
A. VerBerkmoes, both of Grand Haven, all of Mich., assignors
to Bastian Blessing Co., Inc., Grand Haven, Mich.
Filed Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 425,430
Int. a.J A23B 4/04: B65G 55/00
U.S. a. 99-475 20 Claims
1. A fan structure having a housing, a fan blade rotatable
within said housing, a plurality of vanes adapted to oscillate
relative to said housing, oscillation means for oscillating said
vanes, a drive system for driving said oscillation means, a
motor for operating said drive system and said fan blade, a
motor control switch and a control mechanism independent of
said motor control switch for connecting and disconnecting
said oscillation means with said motor through said drive
system to turn on and to turn off oscillation of said vanes, said
drive system comprising a rotating drive wheel, a longitudi-
nally fixed drive shaft adapted to reciprocate said oscillation
means, and a pickup wheel rotationally coupled to said drive
shaft and moveable therealong to and away from a drive
pickup position with respect to said drive wheel, said control
mechanism comprising spring means for sliding said pickup
wheel along said drive shaft to the drive pickup position to
rotate said drive shaft and to connect said oscillation means
with said motor for turning on the oscillation of said vanes, an
adjusuble control member for sliding said pickup wheel along
said drive shaft away from said drive pickup position to discon-
tmue further rotation of said drive shaft and disconnect said
oscillation means from said motor for turning off the oscillation
of said vanes, and a lock position for releasably locking said
pickup wheel away from said drive pickup position.
1. A heated, moist air sandwich bin for maintaining sand-
wiches therewithin sufficiently moist and at pre-selected ele-
vated temperatures comprising:
a housing, said housing including a front wall, a rear wall, a
top, a pair of opposite side walls and a floor, said front
wall defining an open front service opening substantially
across the width of the bin through which sandwiches
may be inserted and withdrawn;
sandwich support means for storing sandwiches within said
bin above said floor and below said service opening for
easy access to the sandwiches through said service open-
ing, said floor dividing said bin into an upper sandwich
storage compartment and a lower compartment and defin-
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1009
mg with said side walls air flow passages for permitting
heated, moist air in said upper compartment to flow into
said lower compartment;
blower means in said lower compartment, air humidifier
means in said lower compartment upstream of said blower
means, air discharge nozzle means extending substantially
across the width of and below said service opening for
discharging a humidified air stream across said service
opening into said upper compartment, duct means com-
municating said blower means with said air discharge
nozzle means and air heater means in said duct means for
heating the air to be discharged through said nozzle
means, whereby said blower means forces air in said lower
compartment through said duct means, across said air
heater means and through said nozzle means into said
upper compariment; and
air directing means for creating a dome of moist heated air
over the sandwiches in the bin positioned at said service
opening and including air deflecting means located down-
stream of said air discharge nozzle means and extending
into said upper compartment to intercept air discharging
from said discharge nozzle means and to direct the flow of
heated air discharging said nozzle means away from said
service opening and into the housing to create and main-
tain said dome of heated moist air over the sandwiches in
the bin while further creating turbulent zones of heated,
moist air outside the dome for minimizing heated, moist
air escape through said service opening.
4437,397
AUTOMAnC PICKLE INJECHNG APPARATUS
Keiichi Kawai, AmagasaHshi, Japan, assignor to FuUba Denki
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Osakashi, Japan
FUed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 365,087
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 2, 1981, 56-50195:
Jan. 25, 1982, 57-10491
lat. a.3 A23B 4/02
U.S. a. 99-533 10 Qginu
vt ■- ■■ ■-^-n
-t
the respective needle means for enabling a suspension of
the needle means from the bottom of the tank;
a cylindrical guide means displacably mounted on each of
said sleeve means for guiding the respective needle means
into the meat, said cylindrical guide means including a
first end portion and a free end portion;
a valve means disposed at the free end portion of said guide
means, said valve means being movable along the axial
length of the respective needle means between an upper
and lower position so as to close and open said at least one
opening such that when said valve means is at a lowermost
position, it closes said at least one opening, thereby per-
mitting no pickle to be discharged therethrough; and
a valve holding means for urging said valve means to stay at
the valve closing position.
4,43738
ROTATING-DRUM MACHINE FOR PEELING
TOMATOES
Antonio Savi, Parma, Italy, assignor to Offlclnc Meccanicbe
Savi Antonio S.p.A., Parma, Italy
Filed Jul. 8. 1982, Ser. No. 396,453
Claims priority, application Italy, Sep. 18, 1981, 29073/81[Ul
Int. a.3 A23N 7/O0
U.S. a. 99-587 6 Qaims
1. An automatic pickle injecting apparatus for supplying
meat with a pickle, the apparatus comprising:
a vertically movable tank adapted to contain said pickle;
said tank being transversely disposed with respect to a feed-
ing path of said meat;
a plurality of needle means for enabling an injection of said
pickle into the meat, each of said needle means having a
first end adapted to be connected to the tank, a terminat-
ing end, and a passageway opening into the tank for per-
mitting said pickle in said tank to pass therethrough, said
passageway communicating with at least one opening
provided at the terminating end of each of said needle
means;
a plurality of sleeve means mounted on said tank and respec-
tively surrounding at least a portion of an axial length of
1. A rotating-drum machine for peeling tomatoes or the like,
comprising: a routing drum including twin-cheeked channels
defined by a movable cheek and a fixed cheek disposed periph-
erally about said drum; means for conveying unpeeled toma-
toes into the channels; a cutter device having a revolving
serrated tracer-wheel mounted to perforate skins of said toma-
toes; cam means for gradually drawing said cheeks together to
gently and gradually squeeze and separate pulp from the perfo-
rated skin, the cam means working in opposition to a magnet
means for holding the cheeks apart, the magnet means being
located between an outer surfact of said drum and an outer
surface of the movable channel-cheek, wherein said movable
channel-cheek is mounted to oscillate during contact with the
cam means and includes a roller on an outer face thereof; a
deflector device mounted to contact the roller subsequent to
ejection of the peeled tomato from the channels and discharge
thereof down an exit-chute, said deflector fixedly located to
move said roller from a position concurrent with one circum-
ference imposed by radius R to a position concurrent with that
imposed by smaller radius r, thereby opening the movable
channel-cheek; the magnet means aflixed to the outer surface
of said routing drum for retaining the movable cheek in open
position.
1010
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4AytJ399
TWINE-WRAPPING MECHANISM FOR MECHANISM
FOR A LARGE ROUND BALER
Richard W. Koaiag, Ottunwa, Iowa, aaalgaor to Deere A Com-
paay, MoUae, DL
Flkd Majr 28, 1982, Scr. No. 382,890
lat CL^ B30B 13/18
M37,400
STAMPING DEVICE
Charlea W. EUla, 2371 Beach St, Bellmire, N.Y. 11710
ContiBaatioB of Ser. No. 219,019, Dec 22, 1980,
lUs appUcatkM Nov. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 444,737
lat a.J B41J l/Ol i/40, 19/18
MS. CL 101—18 11
U.S. CL 100-^
7Claiflii
1. In an automatic twine wrapping mechanism for a cylindri-
cal baler having a bale forming chamber, said mechanism
comprising:
a twine-dispensing mechanism for dispensing twine into the
bale forming chamber of said baler for wrapping around a
bale being formed therein, said dispensing mechanism
including a twine arm movable back and forth in front of
the bale forming chamber between first and second posi-
tions,
hydraulic drive means for cycling said twine arm back and
forth in front of said bale forming chamber, said drive
means including a double acting cylinder, a hydraulic
pump connected to said cylinder, and pump drive means
for selectively driving said pump, and a control valve
interconnectol between said cylinder and said pump, said
valve having a valve control arm movable between a first
valve control arm position permitting said twine arm to be
driven from the first to said second twine arm position and
a second valve control arm position permitting said twine
arm to be driven from said second to said first twine arm
position, and
a control means (1) for initiating a twine wrapping cycle by
automatically actuating said pump drive means and by
positioning said valve control arm in said first valve con-
trol arm position responsive to the formation of bale of a
predetermined diameter in said chamber, and (2) for deac-
tivating said hydraulic drive means following wrapping of
twine around said bale, said control means including (1) a
drive control linkage having an engaged position for
engaging said pump drive and a disengaged position for
disengaging said pump drive, (2) means for biasing said
drive control linkage into said engaged position, (3) a
latch for locking said drive control linkage in said disen-
gaged position, and (4) a bale size linkage movable respon-
sive to the change in diameter of a bale in said chamber
between a first position corresponding to when the bale
chamber is empty or when a bale has a diameter less than
a predetermined value and second position corresponding
to when a bale in the chamber has a diameter greater than
a predetermined value;
the improvement comprising:
said control means including a latch control linkage con-
necting said bale size linkage and said latch and having
a plurality of settings for determining the bale diameter,
in excess of said predetermined value, at which said
latch is unlocked, and
a manual control linkage remotely actuable from opera-
tor's station for said baler and connected to said latch
for unlocking said latch and for positioning said value
control arm in said first value control arm position.
1. A stamping device for a workpiece, the combination
comprising:
a baseplate having a top surface;
a slide rigidly coupled to said baseplate top surface and space
therefrom, said slide having a ratchet-like edge;
a carriage slidably coupled to said slide and supporting a
punch holder, said punch holder having a longitudinal axis
substantially perpendicular to said top surface and adapted
to receive a punch therein for stamping the workpiece;
indexing means, coupled to said carriage and slide, for mov-
ing said carriage in predetermined increments longitudi-
nally relative to said slide and baseplate to selectively
position said punch holder over the workpiece, said index-
ing means including a manually-operated, rotatable knob
coupled to a drive gear which is in turn coupled to said
slide ratchet-like edge, and
means for coupling said slide to said baseplate in first and
second positions, said first position locating said punch
holder over said baseplate and said second position locat-
ing said punch holder past an edge of said baseplate.
4,437,401
SEPARATOR PLATE FOR TYPE BAND PRINTER
Hont Heinrich, Stuttgart; Giiater R. Herrmaaa, Siadelflngea,
aad Manfred Sdunidt, Deckeapfrona, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, an igaon to lateraational BusineM Machiaea Cor-
poratioo, Armoak, N.Y.
CoattBuattoa-ia-part of Ser. No. 362,424, Mar. 26, 1982,
abaadooed. Thii appUcattoa Aag. 11, 1983, Ser. No. 522,249
Claiaia priority, applicatioa Fed. Rep. of Gcrnaay, Apr. 23,
1981, 3116127
lat a.} B41J 1/20
U.S. a. 101—93.14 3 aaioH
1. A type band printer for printing characters on a print line
comprising:
an endless type band;
a platen contiguous with said endless type band for guiding
said endless band;
a plurality of type elements affixed to said endless type band
and lying in the same plane as said print line;
means for moving said endless type band in a direction
parallel to the print line;
print paper;
means for feeding said print paper,
an inked ribbon located between said paper and said endless
type band in the same plane as said plurality of type ele-
ments;
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1011
means for feeding said inked ribbon parallel to said endless
type band;
a hammer plate, located on the opposite side of said inked
ribbon from said endless type band and said platen, having
an opening therein located in the same plane as said plural-
ity of type elemenU;
a print hammer head capable of being thrust through said
opening in said hammer plate so as to drive said print
paper and said ribbon onto one of said plurality of type
elements; and
an elastic separator plate, composed of polyester foil be-
tween 0.2 mm and O.S mm thick, located between said
print paper and said inked ribbon for preventing said inked
ribbon from contacting said print paper during those times
. when either the inked ribbon or the print paper is being
fed, by exerting a force caused by iu inherent elasticity on
said print paper in a direction away from said inked ribbon
and said platen, and toward said hammer plate, said elastic
separator plate comprising,
a longitudinal fold line substantially coextensive with the
bottom of said print line for maintaining said print paper
against said hammer plate across the entire width of said
print paper,
an upper edge substantially coextensive with the bottom
of said print line,
side arms located at the ends of said upper edge, said side
arms interposed between said print paper and said rib-
bon for preventing said print paper
from contacting said ribbon in the areas of said side arms,
and
an opening located between said side arms and bounded
by said upper edge, whereby said print hammer head is
thrust through said opening in said elastic separator
plate.
the groove defining a beginning, or starting printina line
(41, 42),
printing by the plate on the respective cylinder being inter-
rupted at the groove resulting in gaps of printed subject
matter, parallel to the axis of roution of the plate cylinder,
and being printed by the respective plate;
an inker (13, 14; 54, 55; 96, 97) associated with each cylinder
to provide ink thereto;
said system comprising
means for selectively printing on a substrate either continu-
ously, e.g. in a single color, or in two colors with a gap, or
interruption in the region of the groove for at least the
width of the groove defining said gap comprising
means (30; 70-73; 81; 111. 113; 125-127; 137-139) for selec-
tively locating the circumferential position of the first and
second printing cylinders with respect to the web to place,
selectively,
4,437,402
ROTARY PRINTING MACHINE SYSTEM WITH
OPTIONAL CONTINUOUS WEB PRINTING
Hcnaaaa Fischer, Augsburg, Fed. Rep. of Genaaay, assignor to
M.A.N.-RolaBd Druckmaschinea Aktieaaesellschaft, Offen-
bach am Main, Fed. Rep. of Gcrmaay
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,883
Clains priority, appUcatioa Fed. Rep. of Genaaay, May 5,
1981, 3117663
lat a.i B41F 5/16
U.S. a 101—181 14 Claims
1. Rotary web printing machine system, for printing on a
substrate web (40) having
first and second plate cylinders (3, 4; 50; 51; 94-102-104;
95-103-105; 121-124; 129-132),
in which the second plate cylinder is located down-
. stream— in the direction of movement of the web through
the machine system— of the first plate cylinder,
each plate cylinder having a clamping groove (5, 6) parallel
to the axis of roution of the plate cylinder to receive a
printing plate thereon, the printing plate in a zone adjacent
(a), for printing continuous subject matter without a gap, the
printing line (41) defined by the plate on the first cylinder
and the printing line (42) defined by the plate on the
second cylinder at longitudinally shifted locations by at
least the distance of the width of the gap (43) between
succeeding printing lines (41) defined by the plate on the
first cylinder to effect, in mode (a) continous printing of
subject matter on the web (40) without interruption of
subject matter due to the presence of the clamping
groove; or
(b), to permit multi-color printing with unprinted gaps on
the substrate web (40),
the printing line (41) defined by the plate on the first cylinder
and the printing line (42) defined by the plate on the
second cylinder in registration to effect printing in mode
(b) by the two printing cylinders with a gap (43) of printed
subject matter on the web at the location of the clamping
groove.
4,437,403
SYSTEM FOR ADJUSTING PRINTING PLATES
MOUNTED ON PLATE CYLINDERS
Harry M. Greiaer, OfTeabach am Main, Fed. Rep. of Genaaay,
assignor to M.A.N. Rolaad DruckaiaBchiacB Aktieagesell*
schaft, Fed. Rep. of Genaaay
FUed Sep. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 418,094
Claian priority, appUcatioa Fed. Rep. of Genaaay, Sep. 16.
1981, 3136704
lat a.J B41F 13/24
MS. a. 101-248 10 Claims
1. An automatic control system for adjusting the printing
plates mounted on the plate cylinders of a printing press having
a plurality of plate cylinders comprising, in combination,
automatic means for adjusting the plate cylinders in response
to at least one register control signal for aligning the
printing plates in register with another for the combined
printing operation,
means for automatically measuring the positions of the in-
diviudal printing plates with respect to the press frame to
obtain relative position signals,
means for automatically comparing the relative position
signal for at leut one of the printing plates to at leut one
corresponding predetermined reference position signal to
1012
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
generate at least one said register control signal, the refer-
ence position signal being preselected as a relative position
signal for which the printing plates are substantially in
register with one another for the combined printing opera-
tion, so that the means for adjusting tends to bring the
printing plates in register with one another for the com-
bined printing operation, and
••5(»<1 Mufu- Mmm^
^" X.^" X./'y
nm0^^/r
-Jlf
■^ 3^" — r
' :::: i M i
—'ff
^^—M. , V» ,
means for selecting a particular printing plate to defme the
corresponding reference position signal so that the corre-
sponding register control signal for the selected printing
plate is substantially zero,
wherein the means for selecting has means for comparing
the relative position signals and wherein the means for
selecting selects the printing plate having a minimum
relative position signal.
4,437,404
ELECTRIC DATA RECORDER
WUliam P. Barbour, Colunbia, Md., acdgnor to DBS, Inc.,
Randolph, Man.
FUed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423,017
Int. CL' B41F 1/04
UAa.l01-2«9 7CtainM
1. In a data recorder of the type comprising an upstanding
main frame, a roller platen carried on the frame, a fork pivoted
on the frame arranged to sweep the platen from a home posi-
tion horizontally through a substantially erect plane printing
path and return, a gate including a bed for carrying a form to
receive a printing impression, said gate pivotally mounted to
swing between an open loading position and a closed printing
position, means biasing the gate towards open position, electric
motor means for driving said form to sweep the platen through
said printing path including a crank engageable in a slot in the
fork for driving the same, and switch means for controlling the
energization of said motor, the improvement comprising:
means to cause imprinting of said form by said motor means
solely during the printing stroke and to then interrupt the
said driving connection between the fork and the motor
means;
spring means acting on the fork to restore the same to a
location placing the platen in home position once the
driving connection is interrupted; and
means to effect reesublishment of the driving connection in
readiness for a subsequent cycle of operationi
4,437,405
APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING INK TO THE INK
PLATE OF A METERING MACHINE
Werner Haug, Langnau, Switzerland, auignor to Frama AG.
Switzerland
FUed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,179
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Apr. 30. 1981.
2838/81
Int a.3 B41F 31/00
U.S. a 101-349 aetata.
1. An apparatus for transferring ink to a metering head of a
metering machine having a casing substantially surrounding
the metering head, comprising:
the casing having a side wall with a side wall opening
therein;
a fixed bearing bolt connected to the machine and extending
in the casing;
an interchangeable roller support having a hollow shaft
portion engaged through said side wall opening and coaxi-
ally onto said bearing bolt, said support having a handle
portion and an end portion;
a protective sleeve having an inside diameter large enough
to permit passage of said ink storage roller, connected to
the casing side wall and extending into the machine from
said oasing side wall opening;
an ink storage roller rotaubly mounted to said hollow shaft
portion, said side wall opening being large enough to
permit passage of said ink storage roller, said ink storage
roller having an axial opening therethrough forming a
bearing sleeve therein rotatably mounted on said hollow
shaft portion;
at least one ink transfer roller mounted on a frame which is
pivouble about an axle which is coaxial with said bearing
bolt and being engaged with said ink storage roller, said
protective sleeve extending over said ink storage roller
and having a lateral opening for permitting contact be-
tween said ink storage roller and said ink transfer roller;
and
locking means connected between said casing and said inter-
changeable roller portion for locking said interchangeable
roller support with ink storage roller thereon in said side
wall opening.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1013
4437 406
INKING APPARATUS FOR AN OFFSET PRESS
Koldchi Hasegawa, and Tiugio Toklta, both of Ibwagi, Japui,
assignors to Komori Printing Machinery Co., Ltd., Japan
FUed Jun. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 389,831
Clatas priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 12, 1981, 56-144339
Int. C\? B41F il/00
MS. a 101-350 2 Oalm.
4,437,407
»?S2? ^^ CONTROLLING THE CLAMPING OF
PRINTING PLATES IN CORRECT REGISTER ON THE
PLATE CYLINDER OF AN OFFSET PRINTING
MACHINE
Burkhardt Win, and Alfred Preuss, both of Munich, Fed. Rep
of Germany, assignors to Grapho Metronic Mess- und Resel-
technUt GmbH A Co. KG, Munich. Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423.236
198?313M65'**^' ■'''""**°" ^^ "•«•• »' Germany. Sep. 30,
Int a.3 B41F l/iO
U.S. a 101-409 7 Clatas
1. An inking apparatus for an offset press, comprising:
a fountain roller having ink thereon;
a first vibrator roller disposed adjacent said fountain roller
and spaced apart therfrom;
a ductor roller interposed said fountain roller and said first
vibrator roller, said ductor roller being reciprocably mov-
able between said fountain roller and said first vibrator
roller for intermittently transferring ink from said fountain
roller to said first vibrator roller;
a plate cylinder rotatable in a predetermined direction;
a first roller group and a second roller group, each of said
first and second roller groups comprising a plurality of ink
form rollers held in contact with said plate cylinder, each
of said first and second roller groups further comprising a
second vibrator roller held in contoct with said plurality
of ink form rollers; said first roller group being located
upstream of said second roller group with respect to said
predetermined direction;
a third vibrator roller;
a first distributor roller interposed said first vibrator roller
and said third vibrator roller, said first distributor roller
being held in contact with said first vibrator roller and
with said third vibrator roller;
three second distributor rollers one of said three second
distributor rollers being held in contact with said second
vibrator of said first roller group, an other of said three
second distributor rollers being held in contact with said
second vibrator of said second roller group, and an inter-
mediate one of said three second distributor rollers being
interposed said one and said other of said three second
distributor rollers, said intermediate one of said three
second distributor rollers being held in contact with said
one and said other of said three second distributor rollers;
a third distributor roller held in contact with said intermedi-
ate one of said three second distributor rollers and with
said third vibrator roller;
a fourth vibrator roller held in contact with said other of said
three second distributor rollers and
a fourth distributor roUer interposed said third vibrator
roller and said fourth vibrator roller, said fourth distribu-
tor roller being held in contact with said third vibrator
roller and with said fourth vibrator roller.
1. Device for controlling the clamping of printing plates in
correct register on the plate cylinder of an offset printing
machine by means of clamping bars which arc arranged in the
cylinder channel and on which one end in each case of a print-
mg plate can be held by gripping strips and which are movable
m the peripheral direction of the cylinder by means of tighten-
ing screws which arc screwed into the clamping bars and are
supported on cither wall of the channel, in which the displace-
ment of the clamping bar holding the front edge of the plate is
controllable with respect to the plate cylinder by means of
electncal indicator arrangements having a feeler extending in
the direction of movement, characterised in that the electrical
indicator arrangements (17, 24) with the feeler (18) are fastened
to the plate cylinder (10) in the cylinder channel (11). the
sensing tip of the feeler (18) lines up with a specific region of
the front edge of the printing plate (1). and the positions of the
images (4) on the printing plate (1) have a fixed relationship to
the specific region (3) of the front edge of the pnnting plate.
4,437 408
DEVICE FOR APPLYINGINDICIA TO AN ELASTIC WEB
Edward J. Arkans, Schaiunburg, lU., assignor to The Kendall
Company. Boston, Man.
FUed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,707
Int. a.' B41C 1/02
U.S. a. 101-426 J ctata
1. A method of determining the amount of tension in an
elastic web, by applying indicia in a first, repetitive, geometric
form along the lengths of elastic webs stretched into an elon-
gated shape, such that in stretching use of the webs after print-
ing, said indicia in said first form represent s predetermined
amount of tension being applied to the webs regardleu of the
1014
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
degree of stretch variation of different web« when each is
stretched to attain said predetermined amount of tension, com-
prising the stqM of:
predetermining the amount of tension the indicia in said first
form will indicate after printing:
longitudinally stretching an elastic web to said predeter-
mined amount of tension, irrespective of the length of
stretch required to be imparted to the wd) to attain said
predetermined amount of tension by suspending the web
between a feed means and a retaining roll, the retaining
roll having high friction characteristics on the outer sur-
face thereof, the elastic web being formed into a loop
between the feed means and the retaining roll;
maintaining said predetermined amount of tennon in the
web completely and entirely independently of elongation
in the web. or variations in the elongation of the web, or
speed of travel of the web from the feed means over the
retaining roll, or rotational speed of the retaining roll,
consisting solely of the steps of locating a floating roll on
the loop, applying a downward bias to the floating roll
equal to said predetermined amount of tension by attach-
ing a weight to the floating roll, and dampening the float-
ing roll to mitigate fluctuations in the floating roll caused
by passage of the elastic web loop around the floating roll,
whereby a portion of the web on the retaining roll having
high friction characteristics is stretched to a degree equal-
ing said predetermined degree of tension regardless of the
degree of elongation imparted to the web to attain the
degree of stretch equaling said predetermined degree of
tension; and
printing said indicia in said first geometric form while the
web is stretch to said predetermined amount of tension by
passing the web through a nip defined by the retaining roll
and a print roll and while the web is stretched as aforesaid
on the retaining roll, said indicia, after the web is relaxed
and allowed to return to an unstretched condition, assum-
ing a second geometric form which is other than said first
geometric form, said first and second geometric forms,
when compared, being readily visually perceived as being
different.
body continuously crumbles away at the region of said
axial channel means upon penetration of the projectile
body at the heterogeneous resistance;
said axial channel means possessing at said intermediate
4437409
SPIN-STABILIZED SABOT PROJECTILE FOR
OVERCOMING A HETEROGENEOUS RESISTANCE
Pknrc Frtjmmd, Walliiellea, Switxerlawi, uti^Mr to Werk*
awgrnaachlncnfiabfik Oerlikon-Biihric AG, Zurich, Switzer-
land
Coatinaatioo of Ser. No. 34,768, May 7, 1979, «K«.MliMifii, TUa
appUcatioB Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,664
OaioM priority, appUcation Switzerland, May 30, 1978,
5870/78
Irt. a.3 F42B 11/24, 13/16
UA a. 102-364 5 ciaima
1. A spin-stabilized sabot projectile for overcoming a hetero-
geneous resistance, comprising:
sabot means;
a projectile body carried by said sabot means;
said projectile body having an axial channel means for ob-
taining an increased radial effect of splinters or the like
from the projectile body upon fragmentation thereof after
penetration of said heterogeneous resistance;
said axial channel means containing an incendiary charge;
said projectile body having a specific weight of at least 17
gr/cm*;
said axial channel means having a forward end region and an
intermediate region;
said forward end region of said axial channel means having
a larger diameter than said intermediate region;
said projectile body having a front region;
a ballistic hood means for closing said front region of said
projectile body;
said axial channel means possesses at said forward end re-
gion a diameter amounting to approximately 40% of the
diameter of the projectile body, such that the projectile
region a diameter amounting to approximately 20% of the
diameter of said projectile body; and
said axial channel means being filled with said incendiary
charge such that the penetration depth of the projectile is
conformed to the radial effect of said projectile.
4,437,410
PIVOTAL SUDABLE VEHICLE END ENCLOSURE
DaTid A. StoUer, Sr., Dunwoody, Ga.; James C. Robertson,
Ypsilanti, and Tibor Matyas, NorthTille, both of Mich., as-
sigBors to Portec, Inc., Oak Brook, 111.
Filed Oct 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,307
Int a.3 B61D 3/02: B60J 5/10
U.S. CL 105—378 15
1. An end enclosure for a transport vehicle having a floor
and two side walls defining a vehicle interior therebetween
terminating in an end opening, at least one elevated deck
spaced above said floor and having lateral edges spaced in-
wardly from said side walls and a front edge juxt^xMed said
end opening, said enclosure comprising a pair of door assem-
blies adapted to be displaced between a closed position overly-
ing said end opening and an opened position ^Mced outwardly
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
lOlS
of a respective one of said deck Uteral edges and dUposed fully
withm said vehicle interior, said door assemblies each includ-
ing a plurality of vertically duposed adjacent panels bounded
by an inner and outer panel, hinge means intermedute and
pivotally jommg adjacent ones of said panels, an elongated
support member disposed within said vehicle interior in a
horizontal plane, said support member having an end portion
duposed outwardly beyond said deck front edge and joined in
a continuous curved manner with side portions respectively
duposed above and outwardly of said deck lateral edges^
means fixedly mounting said support member reUtive said
deck, mnns suspending said door assemblies from and out-
wardly of said support member, said suspension means includ-
ing a plurality of hanger assemblies attached to said panel
hinge means, said hinge means including male and female hinge
elements jomed by a hinge pin. said hanger assemblies each
provided with a pair of opposed horizontal offset elemenU
projecting outwardly toward each said door assembly and
engaging opposite ends of said hinge pins to captively support
said door assemblies, said hanger assemblies each provided
with a tracking element disposed within said support member,
and panel guide means carried by the bottom of said door
assemblies cooperating with guide means adjacent said vehicle
floor, said guide means adjacent said vehicle floor including an
upstandmg raU extending substantially continously throughout
the extent of displacement of said two door assemblies, said
panel guide means including a plurality of individual spaced-
apart guide pins projecting downwardly from said panels and
straddling said raU, forward and rearward bumpers projecting
mwardly from said inner and outer panels respectively, for-
ward and rearward stops mounted inwardly of said vehicle
side walls adjacent said floor guide means and respectively
engaged by said forward and rearward bumpers when each
said door assembly is fully disposed in said opened position,
said forward stop mounted at a position selected to engage said
rearward bumper when each said door assembly is fully dis-
posed m said closed position wherby, lateral force applied to
any one of said panels concurrently displaces all said panels of
lU respective said door assembly between said closed and
opened positions.
4,437,411
MULTI-POSmON STUDENT TABLE
Ronald M. Maxwell, Leland, Mich., assignor to General Equip-
BMBt MaauCacturers, Jackaon, Mias.
Piled Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255^07
iBt a^ A47F 5/12
UA a 108-1 13 Claims
1. Apparatus for rigidly positioning a top panel at a first or
a second height comprising: a base; first engagement members
secured to said base; a top panel providing a work surface
adapted to be positioned at one of said heighu relative to said
base; first and second side supporU hingedly mounted to said
base in spaced relation and movable between a first storage
position in which said supports lie flat within said base and said
top panel is supported by said base, and a second position in
which said supportt are raised and said top panel is supported
by said first and second support means at a height above said
first position; brace means for rigidly securing said first and
second support means in said raised position; and manual latch
means comprising a reciprocable latch member slidably carried
on the under surface of said top panel and manually moveable
between a Utch position and a release position for rigidly
securing said top panel to said base at said first height by
coupling to said first engagement memben when said side
supports are placed in said storage posiUon and for rigidly
secunng said top panel to said side supporU when the same are
placed m said second posiUon and said Utch member is in said
latch position.
4,437,412
FOLDING PALLET
Jerrold A. Trantsch, New UaboB, Wis.. aasigBor to Laer Maan-
nctaring Conpuiy, Inc., New Lisbon, Wis.
Filed Ju. 8. 1982, Sar. No. 386,236
., « « '■*• ^'' ^^^ ^^/'^' ^♦^ ^^/oa- M«> 1/n
UA a 108-56.1 13 ctaii^
1. A folding pallet comprising:
(a) a pair of base memben disposed in parallel reUUon;
(b) a pair of top side members duposed in parallel relation
above the base members;
(c) a pair of front vertical posu routably mounted at their
ends to the base members and top side members, one front
post extending from one base member to the top side
member above it and the other front post extending from
the other base member to the other top side member above
it, -the posts being tubular, having a cylindrical exterior
surface and a cylindrical interior surface;
(d) a pair of back vertical posts routably mounted at their
ends to the base members and to the top side members, one
back post extending from one base member to the top side
member above it and the other back post extending from
the other base member to the other top side member above
it, the posu being tubular, having a cylindrical exterior
surface and a cylindrical interior surface;
(e) a pair of top cross rods, one cross rod attached to and
between the front posu near the top ends thereof and the
other top cross rod attached to and between the back
posu near the top ends thereof;
(0 a pair of bottom cross rods, one cross rod attached to and
between the front posU near the bottom ends thereof and
the other cross rod attached to and between the back postt
near the bottom ends thereof;
(g) a bottom tray pivotally mounted to a bottom cross rod
for roution from a horizontal position in which the tray
coven a substantial portion of the area at the bottom of
the pallet between the front and back posU and a vertical
position in which the tray is substantially parallel to the
back posu. whereby the pallet may be folded from an
erected position in which the posts, base members, top
side members, and cross rods generally define the shape of
a rectangular parallelepiped to a folded position by raising
the tray from iu horizontal to iu vertical position and
drawing either pair of diagonally opposite back poau and
front posu toward each other until the pallet collapses to
a substantially flat configuration;
wherein the top side memben are formed as U-shaped chan-
nels, having a vertical web section and a horizontal lower
flange and a horizontal upper flange extending therefrom,
and each top side member including, for each vertical post
1016
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
rotatably mounted to the top side member, an opening in
the lower horizontal flange which is slightly larger than
the outside diameter of the post, through which the post
passes, a ferrule on the lower flange extending upwardly
from the opening and having a cylindrical interior with a
diameter slightly larger than the outside diameter of the
post, and another ferrule on the upper flange extending
downwardly concentric with the lower ferrule and hav-
ing an outside diameter which is slightly less than the
inside diameter of the post, whereby each post will be held
between the two ferrules with which it is engaged so that
it cannot be moved laterally but can rotate about its own
axis, and
wherein the base members are formed as U-shaped channels
having a central vertical web section and a horizontal
lower flange and a horizontal upper flange extending
therefrom, and each base member including, for each
vertical post which is rotatably mounted to the base mem-
ber, an opening in the upper flange of the base member
which is slightly larger in diameter than the outside diam-
eter of the post, through which the post passes, a ferrule
on the upper flange extending downwardly from the
opening and having a cylindrical interior with a diameter
slightly larger than the outside diameter of the post, and a
ferrule on the lower flange extending upwardly concen-
tric with the ferrule on the upper flange and having a
cylindrical exterior with a diameter slightly less than the
inside diameter of the post, whereby each post will be held
between the two ferrules with which it is engaged so that
it cannot be moved laterally but can rotate about its own
axis.
4,437,413
FOLDING STRUCTURE EMPLOYING A SARRUS
LINKAGE
Edward D. O'Brian, 2125 W. Falmouth, Anaheim, CaUf. 92801,
and Charles Phelan, Tustin, Calif., auignors to Edward D.
O'Brian, Anaheim, CaUf.
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,060
Int. a.3 A47B i/OQ
U.S. a. 108—111 13 Claims
1. A folding structure including a six member Sarrus linkage
having two opposed links and two sets of connecting links,
each of said sets including two separate links, the connecting
links of each of said sets having adjacent edges hingedly con-
nected to one another, a first connecting link of each of said
sets being hingedly connected to a first of said opposed links,
the second connecting link of each of said sets being hingedly
connected to the second of said opposed links, said sets of
connecting links being spaced from one another, in which the
improvement comprises:
a control link means pivotally connected to said second of
said opposed links,
a motion transmitting link means pivotally connected to said
control link means and to a connecting link of one of said
sets of connecting links,
said control link means and said motion transmitting link
means being connected to one another and to said Sarrus
linkage so that said control link means may be pivoted
relative to said one of said opposed links and so that such
motion of said control link means will be transmitted in
order to cause relative movement between said opposed
links so as to move said opposed links toward one another
as said structure is being folded and so as to move said
opposed links away from one another as said structure is
being unfolded.
4,437,414
FOLDING TABLE FOR WALL MOUNTING
Tony Brescia, Liverpool, and Ross Deacon, Syracuse, both of
N.Y., assignors to Syroco, Inc., Syracuse, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,137
Int. a.3 A47B 5/04
U.S. a. 108—134 10 Claims
'{' ' ' ^ ' ^
20
I
szJ-
y
/lO
^50
30
\
1. A wall mountable folding toble adapted for positioning
substantially flush against a vertical wall in a first position and
generally orthogonal thereto in a second, rotated position, said
table comprising:
a generally planar table surface having top and bottom sur-
faces and side frame members on opposite sides thereof
defining a space therebetween and under said table sur-
face;
at least one wall mountable support bracket adapted to be
secured against a generally vertical wall and pivotally
connected to said table for the support thereof and being
constructed of a size affording its receipt substantially
within the area of the side frame members in said space
therebetween;
first and second support arms pivotally connected to said
side frame members at one end and to said suppori bracket
at an opposite end, each of said support arms having an
intermediate pivot connecting upper and lower portions
of said support arm for permitting relative rotation there-
between and relative to said table surface and said support
bracket;
said upper portion of said support arm being received against
said botom table surface when said top table surface is
oriented generally orthogonal to said support bracket in
said second position;
said side frame members of said folding table including
latching means for locking said arms in a supporting posi-
tion relative to said table surface when said table surface is
oriented generally orthogonal to said support bracket in
said second position;
said latching means including a slot formed in at least one of
said side frame members and a sliding member mounted
therein for rectilinear movement relative to said adjacent
support arms for the engagement thereof;
at least one of said adjacent support arms including a slot
formed therein for receiving said slide member of said
latching means mounted upon said side frame member for
the locking of said support arm by the rectilinear move-
ment of said latching means and wherein said latching
means is positioned adjacent said intermediate pivot of
said adjacent support arm when said upper support arm is
received against said bottom table surface;
said lower portion of said support arm depending from said
intermediate pivot in direct structural relationship be-
tween said bottom table surface and said support bracket
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1017
when said top table surface is oriented generally orthogo-
nal to said support bracket in said second position; and
said support arms being constructed of a width substantially
no greater than the width of said Uble side frame members
for the foldable receipt of said support arms adjacent said
side frame members in said space therebetween when said
table is pivoted into said first position against said vertical
wall.
4,437,416
APPARATUS FOR PYROLYZING
YosUaki Ishii; Tsutomn Kumc; NaoyoaU Aado, and Sbosaku
Fqjiiiaml, all of Kaaagawa, Japan, assignors to Ageocy of
Industrial Science and Technology, Tokyo, Japan
Dirision of Ser. No. 199,543, Oct. 22, 1980, Pat No. 4^44,373.
This appUcation May 26, 1982, Ser. No. 382,350
Claims priority, appUcation Japu, Oct 30, 1979, 54-139271;
Oct. 30, 1979, 54-139272
Int a.3 F23D 7/00. F23G l/QO
MS, a. 110-245 7 Claims
4,437,415
BURNER BLOCK ASSEMBLY FOR INDUSTRIAL
FURNACES
Lyie S. Spielman, Rockford, 111., assignor to EcUpse, Inc., Rock-
ford, HI.
FUed Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,758
Int. a.J F23L 5/00
U.S. a. 110—182.5 4 Claims
1. For use with a furnace having a metal shell and a refrac-
tory lining on the inner side of the shell, a burner block assem-
bly having, in combination, a hollow annular member closed at
both ends to define an annular cooling chamber and adapted to
project through a hole in the shell and into the lining with one
end of the member disposed adjacent the shell, said member
having a predetermined rate of thermal expansion and haing an
inner wall which defines a central opening with the opening
being conical and becoming smaller in cross section from said
one end to the other end, said member also including a radial
flange overlapping the shell around the entire periphery of the
hole and adapted to be attached to the shell, a burner block
made of refractory material and having an inner portion pro-
jecting into said opening, the cross sectional shape of said inner
end portion being conical and complemental to the cross sec-
tional shape of said opening whereby the end portion is seated
against said inner wall, said burner block having a rate of
thermal expansion significantly different from said predeter-
mined rate, and means mounting said block on said annular
member and including resilient means urging said inner end
portion axially inwardly and firmly against said inner wall
while permitting relative axial movement caused by the difler-
ent rates of thermal expansion, said annular member having at
least one inlet port and at least one outlet port to permit a
cooling fluid to be circulated through said chamber thereby to
remove heat from said annular member.
1. An apparatus for effecting pyrolyzation in a two-bed
fluidized pyrolysis system, said apparatus comprising:
a pyrolysis reactor of the fluidized bed type with sand as the
fluidized medium;
a combustion reactor of the fluidized bed type including a
lower portion for receiving sand from said pyrolysis reac-
tor and an upper portion where combustion is efTected and
into which sand is lifted from said lower portion;
coupling conduit means for coupling an upper part of said
pyrolysis reactor with said lower portion of said combus-
tion reactor, and for coupling said upper portion of said
combustion reactor with a lower part of said pyrolysis
reactor;
means for sensing physical factors concerning the sute of
fluidization and including:
means for sensing the pressure difference between the free
boards of said two reactors;
means for sensing the pressure difference between said
upper and lower portions of said combustion reactor;
and
means for determining the levels of fluidized beds of said
two reactors by measuring the pressure difference be-
tween the upper and lower portions of the respective
said fluidized bed of each said reactor;
control means for regulating the values of said physical
factors; and
sand lifting means for lifting sand upwardly from said lower
portion of said combustion reactor into said upper portion
of said combustion reactor and including:
a lifting conduit coupling said lower portion and said
upper portion;
nozzle means for injecting pressurized gas into a lower
end of said lifting conduit;
a ring gap means surrounding said nozzle through which
air is blown around the nozzle;
means for regulating flow rate of gas injected through said
nozzle; and
regulating means for regulating flow rate of air blown
from said ring gap means.
1040 O.G — 40
1018
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4^7^17
ENVraONMENTALLY SAFE PROCESS FOR DISPOSING
OF TOXIC INORGANIC CN-CONTAINING SLUDGE
RovD. Roberts, CUm, CUif^ aidgnor to Texaco lac^ White
PlaiM, N.Y.
Filed Not. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 441,470
Int. CL' F23G 7/04
VS. CL 110-344 jg ctatae
JBS^tiKtm.,
section having a peripheral wall for the combustion and/or
pyrolysis of the waste producte and a sUtionary section be-
tween said rotary section and a recuperator and having a
penpheral wall for guiding exhaust fumes generated in said
furnace from the rotary section; said recuperator including
means for causing the exhaust fumes to How in a sUte of heat
exchange with a heat-carrier Huid for exploiution of the heat
thus recovered; the improvement which comprises a circuit for
recovery of the heat of the furnace, said circuit conducting a
flow of heat-carrier fluid in the direction extending from said
recuperator toward the peripheral wall of one or both of said
t K 21 1
m
1. A pollution abatement process for a toxic inorganic CN-
contaming sludge comprising
(1) mixing together the toxic CN-containing sludge from (6)
and a liquid hydrocarbonaceous fuel to produce a fuel
mixture;
(2) reacting the fuel mixture from (1) by partial oxidation
with a free-oxygen containing gas and a temperature
moderator m the reaction zone of a free-flow partial oxi-
dation gas generator at an autogenous temperature in the
range of about 1700" to 3000* F. and a pressure in the
range of about 10 to 200 aUnospheres to produce an efflu-
ent gas stream substantially comprising H2, CO, CO2, at
jMst one gas from the group consisting of H2O, CH4, H2S,
COS, N2, and Ar, and containing particulate carbon, ash
«nd trace amounts of HCN, HCL and NH3;
(3) mtroducing the effluent gas stream from (2) into a gas
quCTch coolmg and/or scrubbing zone, and producing a
carbon-water dispersion containing dissolved formic acid
and a separate stream of raw synthesis gas, reducing gas or
fuel gas; * *
(4) resolving said carbon-water dispersion in a decanting
zone to produce a carbon-liquid hydrocarbonaceous fuel
slurry and water containing free and combined cyanides;
halides of ammonium or a metal selected from the group
sodium, calcium, iron, nickel, and mixtures thereof; for-
mates; sulfides, tiiiocyanates; ammonia; and metal constit-
uents selected from the group consisting of nickel, vana-
dium, iron, and mixtures thereof;
(5) mixing at least a portion of the water from (4) at a tem-
peratiire m the range of about 125* to 200* P., and a pH in
the range of about 7 to 9 with a ferrous salt thereby con-
verting a substantial portion of said cyanides to iron cya-
mdes, adding a base to increase the pH to a value in the
range of about 9-1 1, and precipitating said toxic inorganic
CN-containing sludge in said water; and
(6) separating the suspended CN-containing sludge from the
water in a separating zone.
stationary section and said rotary section of said furnace and in
the direction returning from said peripheral wall toward said
recuperator to preheat the fluid in said recuperator, wherein
said circuit comprises juxUiposed tubes connected in parallel
between a distnbutor duct and a collector duct, which ducts
arc arranged opposite and parallel to one another longitudi-
nally with respect to said furnace, wherein said tubes, with
sheet metal elemento welded therebetween, form a casing
delimitmg the volume occupied by the fumes within said fur-
nace, and wherein some of said tubes at least partially form a
stationary front closing ofl'said furnace at an extremity thereof
remote from said recuperator.
4,437,419
INCINERATOR
^^^^ ^^^^*^ ^'■- ■"*«~" *<> Pyro-Gen Corp.,
FUed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,608
. , o ^ '■*• ^' ^^^ ^/oo. 5/oa 7/00
vs. a 110-259 35 ctata.
— — SOLIOLINeSAREWiSTE STREAM
t> AIRaOW
■ LlOUe METAL FlflW
WkTERFLOW
=«0 STEAM FLOW
-— — ELECTRICITY
;irnMiiiwrwi«i::.inijT<:<ir»<:;iTi-v
feHRbpER^J* 4>-|fARMFltLbS(!)RLAN0flLL|
BTOftuSC ^pm*o
HEAT EXCHANGER I ^
(wrmtjjifn'
4,437,418
METHODS OF AND APPARATUS FOR TREATING
WASTE PRODUCTS
Pwl GaillaiuM, Ivry-nr-Sdac, and Pierre Kariathi, Grenoble,
bott of FVttce, aarisMTS to Lair Liqnide. Sodcte Anonyme
Ponr LJetade et LexpWtrtlon dea Proc«let George. Clande,
Puis, Irance
Filed No?. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,251
a«ta8 priority, appiieation Fhnce, Dec, 5, 1900, 80 25901
Int CL> F23G 5/06
VS. a 110-246 7 ctai^
1. In apparatiis for treating waste products of the type com-
pnsmg an mcmerator furnace including at least one rotary
rTpJ SYSTEM I ISAWWEJ.
lFIL?ER;4>^ClgffATw| g^
fSfBAraSV-*' I ** *i>
ISAIWGEI ^
ialuhwhJhi
T^'
CONDENSING
tBqtwent
*> IINDUCTION BIOWERI
POWER
^S
ffi"
1. A waste incinerating and resource reclaiming device,
comprising:
A. a substantiaUy closed flue chamber having walls, a draft
air inlet, a waste inlet, a flue gas outlet, and a combustion
zone between said draft air inlet and said flue gas outlet;
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1019
B. rapport means for receiving and maintaining unbumed
waste in said combustion zone;
C. burned waste conveying means for feeding burned waste
from said combustion zone to a position above said draft
air inlet, so that air drawn through said draft air inlet
separates said burned waste into heavy and light fractions
as said wute drops from said position; and
D. first and second conveyor means, respectively disposed
in the paths of said heavy and light fractions, for sepa-
rately conveying said heavy and light fractions from said
flue chamber.
1. A work manipulating mechanism for use with a sewing
machine having a frame including a work supporting bed, said
frame supporting a pressor bar, a needle bar, a sewing needle
supported on the end of said needle bar, means for supporting
sud needle bar for endwise reciprocation in the formation of
stitches, and actuating means for implementing endwise recip-
rocation of said needle bar, said work manipulating mechanism
comprising:
a pair of spaced apart rollers;
means for rouubly supporting said rollers in conUu;t with
work material supported on said work supporting bed,
said supporting means including a substantially rectilinear
peripheral frame;
a fint shaft routably supported by said peripheral frame
paralleling said rollers;
means for connecting said shaft to said rollers to transmit
rotation of one to the other;
a first drive means carried by said peripheral frame and
operatively connected to said first shaft for transmitting
selected rotation to said rollers;
a second shaft supported by said peripheral frame parallel to
said first shaft;
a bridge extending above said rollers and slidably supported
by said first and said second shafts;
means on said bridge for connecting said bridge to said
presser bar for support thereof;
and a second drive means supported by said bridge and
operatively connected to said peripheral frame for selec-
tively moving said peripheral frame relative to said
bridge.
4,437,421
VARIABLE PULL OFF FOR BOBBIN THREAD
Ralph E. JohnaoB, ConveBt Station, N J., aMipMr to The Slnfsr
Compuy, Stanford, Cou.
Continnation of Ser. No. 204,424, No?. 6, 1980, abudoMd. Tkia
appUcatioB Sop. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 414,556
Int a» D08B 3/02. 27/22. 27
VS. a. 112—158 R s Claims
4,437,420
DRIVE ROLL MONOGRAMMER
KMUMth M. Johnson, Weitflcld, N J., aarignor to The Singer
Coapnny, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,861
Int a^ D05C 1/02
VS, a 112—103 4 aaims
1. In a sewing machine having a bed and stitch forming
instrumentalities including a thread carrying needle, said nee-
dle having an endwise reciprocating motion imparted thereto
so that said needle will penetrate a work piece supported by
said bed, a feed dog for efTecting movement of the work piece
in cooperation with said needle, said needle being capable of
having a jogging motion imparted thereto which is lateral to
the direction of said movement of the work piece to produce
zig zag stitches, a loop taker adapted to operate in cooperation
with said needle in the formation of lockstitches and having a
bobbin accommodating cavity, a thread carrying bobbin dis-
posed in said cavity, a bobbin thread tensioning device associ-
ated with said bobbin for tensioning bobbin thread u it is
pulled from said thread carrying bobbin, said bobbin thread
following thread paths of varying length between said thread
tensioning device and the different laterally jogged positions of
said needle penetration; an arrangement for pulling thread
from said thread carrying bobbin to Effect uniform zig zag
stitches comprising: (a.)
a movable bobbin thread pull-ofT member having a thread
engaging surface transverse to said thread paths, said
thread engaging surface having different portions ar-
ranged for engagement with said bobbin thread in each of
the different laterally jogged positions of needle recipro-
cation; (b.)
means for effecting movement of said bobbin thread pull-ofT
member in a fixed path cyclically and in timed relation
with said stitch forming instrumentalities, and with said
different portions of the thread engaging surface each
partaking of an extent of movement different from other
portions while in engagement with said bobbin thread; (c.)
whereby said bobbin thread pull-off member is effective to
pull from said bobbin an amount of bobbin thread subse-
quent to each different laterally jogged position of said
needle penetration which amount of bobbin thread pull-
off is substantially proportional to the extent of movement
of said thread engaging portion in engagement with said
bobbin thread.
4,437,422
STOP CONTROL MECHANISM FOR FEEDING A
MATERIAL TO A WORK PERFORMING MACHINE
JoUo B. Torrta, 981 Arapahoe St^ Los Anaslai. Calif. 90006
FUod Fab. 22, 1982, Sar. No. 350,979
lat a> B65H 63/02. 63/06. 25/00: D05B 69/36
VS. a. 112—272 7 ri><—
1. As an article of manufacture, a control switch for inter-
rupting the operation of a power driven sewing machine in
which a fabric bias binding strip-material is fed to a work
performing attachment operatively associated with said ma-
chine, and wherein the operation of said control switch is
1020
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
responsive to the presence of one or more predetermined
abnormal conditions of said binding strip-material, said switch
comprising:
a supporting bracket frame structure;
an elongate fixed switch member mounted on said bracket;
an elongate rocker arm switch member hingedly mounted
between its ends on said bracket, and axially extending
generally along the fixed switch member;
a first set of operatively associated contacts respectively
mounted on said switch members on one side of the hinge
mounting;
a second set of operatively associated contacts mounted on
said switch members on the other side of the hinge mount-
ing; and
said sets of contacts being so arranged that when the
contacts of one of said sets is closed, the contacts of the
other set will be open.
formed thereon adjacent to said first peripheral segment
on one side thereof;
(iii) a third peripheral segment having a first radial projec-
tion formed thereon; and
(iv) fourth and fifth peripheral segments having blank
surfaces thereon disposed between said second and
third peripheral segmente and between said first and
third peripheral segmenu, respectively;
(c) a stationary blade means fixably secured to the frame-
work of the sewing machine;
(d) a second shaft disposed parallel to said first shaft;
(e) pivotably movable blade means operably connected to
said second shaft;
(0 a second rachet means disposed on said second shaft and
axially movable relative thereto so as to selectable engage
said first rachet means, said second rachet means compris-
ing a second partial gear having:
(i) a first peripheral segment having teeth thereon;
(ii) a second peripheral segment having a second radial
projection formed thereon; and
(iii) a third peripheral segment having a second cam sur-
face formed thereon disposed between said first and
second peripheral segments; and
(g) electrically operable means for moving said second
rachet means along said second shaft so as to engage said
first rachet means,
whereby:
(h) upon actuation of said electrically operable means, said
teeth on said first and second partial gears engage each
other to rotate said movable blade means to an operable
position relative to said stationary blade means;
(i) thereafter, said first cam surface comes into sliding
contact with a tooth on said first partial gear to slowly
rotate said movable blade means to cooperate with said
stationary blade means to perform the thread trimming
operation; and
(j) thereafter, said first radial projection comes into sliding
contact with said second radial projection and said second
cam surface to rotate said second rachet means in the
direction opposite the direction in which it rotated during
the thread trimming operation.
4,437,423
THREAD TRIMMING DEVICE FOR A SEWING
MACHINE
Masayuki Yamazawa, AichI, Japan, asiignor to Alain Seiki
Kabiuhiki Kaisha, Aichi, Japan
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,210
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 26, 1981, 56-28149
Int. a.3 D05B 65/02
VS. CL 112-292 2 Claims
"12^&^
4,437,424
PARTIALLY RESTRAINED ARRANGEMENT FOR THE
MAST AND SAIL OF A CRAFT POSSESSING INHERENT
STABILITY
Douglas W. Lord, Orlando, FIjl, asiigiior to Julian C. Renfro.
Winter Park, Fla.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 269,486, Jon. 2, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation Jon. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 507,459
Int. a.3 B63B 15/00
U.S. a. 114-91 21 Claims
1. A thread trimming device for a sewing machine, said
device comprising:
(a) a first shaft rotably driven by the main shaft of the sewing
machine;
(b) a first ratchet means disposed on said first shaft and
rotable therewith, said first ratchet means comprising a
first partial gear having:
(i) a first peripheral segment having teeth thereon;
(ii) a second peripheral segment having a first cam surface
1. In a wind propelled boat of the sailboard type, a generally
cone-shaped sail mounting member secured on the deck of the
boat, a portion of said generally cone-shaped member being
designed to receive the base of a mast such that it will be
movable only for a limited angular extent around interior
portions of said generally cone-shaped member, means for
securing a lower part of the mast in the apex of said generally
cone-shaped member, the front interior of said generally cone-
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1021
shaped member being relatively straight across, with said front
interior merging by the use of rounded contours with interior
portions to each side of said front portion, thereby to define
preesublished locations therein, such that the mast can be
moved to a preestablished location that is forward and to the
left, or to a preesublished location that is forward and to the
right, the interior of said generally cone-shaped member also
presenting a rounded location in the aft center such that the
mast can be supported and restrained by an interior surface of
said generally cone-shaped member when the mast has been
moved into any of a plurality of selected positions.
4,437,425
AIR FLOW DIRECnON INDICATOR
Nils H. Unden, Euingekroken 8, S-11265 Stockholm, Sweden
FUed Dec. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,642
CUdms priority, appUcation Sweden, Dec. 16, 1980, 8008835
Int. a? B63H 9/04
U.S. a. 114-102 5 CMau
run spaced rearwardly of said spar and wherein said forward
and rear runs extend between said tip and root member and
cooperate to structurally support and subilizc said spar such
that opposite and counteracting forces provided by the for-
ward and rear runs relative to the spar maintains the spar erect
and prevente the spar from significantly bending or from de-
veloping and "S" curve shape; a skin covering operatively
interconnected between said spar and said rear run of said
flexible line member means and including first and second
opposite sides that effectively form a variable camber wing air
foil with leading and trailing edges; a slat disposed externally
of and adjacent to the leading edge of said variable camber
wing air foil and movably mounted on the forward run of said
flexible line member means, said slat having a trailing edge
normally spaced from said spar for defining slot means therebe-
tween for efTectively increasing the lift and consequently the
thrust of said wing type air foil assembly, said slot means
1. An airflow direction indicator for sailboards having a
mast mounted to be tiltable in all directions relative to the
sailboard and provided with a sail having its front edge formed
to a tunnel which is slipped onto the mast and is tumable
relative thereto to suit the sail curvature, characterized by a
fitting supporting a wind vane rotatably mounted on a mount-
ing shaft forming an acute angle with the main longitudinal
direction of the fitting and tunnel, respectively, the fitting
being adapted to be secured to the forward portion of the
tunnel to follow the movements of the tunnel relative to the
mast, and said wind vane having its main longitudinal direction
provided substantially parallel with the longitudinal direction
of the fitting and being biased to return to a substantially verti-
cal, neutral position adjacent the fitting, whereby the vane will
indicate changes in the direction of the flow of air around the
forward edge of the sail, the angle of the mounting shaft to the
longitudinal direction of the fitting and tunnel, respectively,
being about 20* to 60', the main portion of the wind vane being
situated above the mounting shaft in the neutral position of the
vane, the vane being counterbalanced to be biased to return to
its neutral position, the wind vane having the shape of a wing
with a substantially straight backward edge which is substan-
tially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the fitting and
tunnel, respectively, when the vane is in its neutral position.
4,437,426
WING TYPE AIR FOIL ASSEMBLY
Ronald D. Latiiam, Apex, N.C., assignor to FibergUus Unlim-
ited, Inc., Durham, N.C.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,025
Int. a.3 B63H 9/04; B64C 9/24
VJS. a. 114—103 9 Claims
1. A relatively simple and effective wing type air foil for a
vessel that utUizes wind to drive the same, comprising: a wing
type air foU assembly including an elongated spar; a tip mem-
ber secured about a top portion of said spar; a root member
secured to a lower portion of said spar and spaced from said tip
member; flexible line member means secured to and between
said root member and said tip member for supporting and
subilizing said spar, said flexible line member means including
opposite and counteracting forward and rear runs with said
forward run being spaced forwardly of said spar and the rear
functioning to direct a relatively high speed flow of air
through said slot means for meeting and joining a system of air
passing over the upper surface of the variable camber wing air
foil for effectively increasing the speed of the flow of air pass-
ing over the upper surface of said variable camber wing air foil
resulting in the air flow passing across the upper surface of the
variable camber wing air foil remaining in conUct therewith
over a greater portion of the upper surface of the variable
camber wing air foil whereby by delaying the time that the
passing air separates from contact with the upper surface of
said variable camber wing air foil resulte in the wing type air
foil assembly experiencing greater lift and thrust; mounting
means for movably mounting said spar and the wing type air
foil assembly to said vessel; and control means operatively
connected to said wing type air foil assembly for enabling the
same to be moved relative to said vessel for enabling the wing
type air foil assembly to be selectively oriented with respect to
the directions of the wind.
4,437,427
BREAK BOLLARD
Johannes J. MampaeU, 98 Abeclstraat, 3329 AG Dordrecht,
Netherlands
FUed Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,522
Chdms priority, appUcation Netherlands, Feb. 20, 1981,
8100866
Int. a.} B63B 2J/06; E02B 3/22
U.S. a 114-218 3 Claims
1. An improved break bollard including
a base plate having a central threaded bore and being
adapted to be anchored to a stationary support,
a central post having a removable enlarged cap on one end
and a sole plate on an opposite end, and
1022
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
threaded bolt means for securing said central post and said
sole plate to said base plate
wherein the improvement comprises:
an aperture in said sole plate aligned with the central
threaded bore in said base plate;
a threaded portion along one end of said bolt means engaged
in said central threaded bore;
a first head portion on said bolt means terminating said
threaded portion;
a second head portion at the other end of said bolt means,
said second head portion being of larger diameter than
a horn for receiving air from said resonant chamber for
producing sound waves; and
a passage for receiving air from said resonant chamber.
said passage being larger in cross-section than said
resonant chamber.
said first head portion and adapted to engage the sole plate
around the periphery of said aperture;
a weakened region of incipient fracture on said bolt means
between said first and second head portions; and
said threaded bolt means being tightened into said base plate
for retaining the sole plate on said base plate; and
said weakened region of incipient fracture being fractured in
response to excessive force on the central post whereby
the first head portion on said bolt means and its attached
threaded portion in said base plate may be removed by
roution of said first head portion which is located beneath
the weakened region of incipient fracture.
4,437,428
DEVICE FOR GENERATING SOUND WAVES AT
RELATIVELY HIGH FREQUENOES
Volkwia Hoflfeliicr, GrUlgMW 11. A-1110 Wien, Austria
Filed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,910
Clafaia priority, application Awtria, Mar. 20, 1981, 1338/81
iBt a.3 B06B 1/00; G08B 3/00
UA a. 116-137 R 9 ctaiB,
1. A device for generating sound waves for use with a motor
vehicle, said device comprising:
a fnistoconical body;
means for mounting said body on said motor vehicle; and
a flue pipe within said body adapted for channelling an air
stream to generate sound waves, said flue pipe comprising:
an inlet funnel for initially receiving said air stream;
a blowing passage for receiving air from said inlet funnel;
a resonant chamber for receiving air from said blowing
passage;
a sharp edge in said resonant chamber for interrupting the
flow of said air stream;
4,437,429
ANIMAL UTTER
Joel GolditeiB, Anbler, and Albert Abrevaya, Chalfont, both of
Pa^ aadgMft to AqMriun Phamacenticala, Inc., Perkasic
FUed Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 289,864
Irt. CLJ AOIK 1/015
UA a 119-1 WCIalBM
1. A method for reducing ammonia odor from sorptive,
non-colloidal granular aluminosilicate containing animal litter
which comprises adding uncalcined hydrated zeoUte to said
litter in an amount effective to reduce the ammonia odor.
4,437,430
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRAINING CATO TO
USE A TOILET BOWL
Martha G. DeBardcleben. 219 Mercer St., Prijiccton, NJ.
06540
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,559
iBt CL^ AOIK 29/00
U.S. a 119-1 1 OtiBi
1. A toilet apparatus for training cats to use a toilet bowl
comprising:
a unitary plastic receptacle means for holding cat litter mate-
rial, including a substantially vertical back wall and a
sloping floor;
a substantially flat flange attached to said receptacle means,
said sloping floor extending from the bottom of said back
wall upwards towards said flange;
aperture means in said receptacle means for draining said
receptacle means, said aperture means being sufliciently
large enough to drain said receptacle means of liquid, but
small enough to prevent any substantial portion of said cat
litter material from passing therethrough, said aperture
means comprising holes in said sloping floor; and,
attachment means for attaching said receptacle means to a
standard commode so that said receptacle means sits sub-
stantially inside of said commode, said attachment means
being attached to said substantially flat flange and includ-
ing an overtopping tab means for engaging the front exte-
rior poriion of said commode bowl, said tab means com-
prising a single wide overlapping tab,
wherein said receptacle means takes up no more than ap-
proximately one-sixth of the open area of the top of said
bowl and is located towards the front of said bowl so that
said commode may be used by human beings without
necessitating removal of said apparatus.
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1023
11. An apparatus for transporting downstream migrating fish
past hydroelectric generating facilities comprising; an artificial
stream current creating means including conduit means and
water jets located in the reservoir of a hydroelectric facility
water storage dam; a water transporting means extending over
or around said generating facilities; means for directing and
attracting downwardly migrating fish into said conduit means;
diverting means for diverting said artificial stream into said
conduit means; said water transporting means bypassing said
dam to a terminating point at the tailrace located in the stream
below said generating facility.
METHOD AND APPARAtS FOR DIVERSION np ? *^?! T** ""^ '"*^P^* *^ ^»'»* '"^^P^ » f°'ded
DOWNSTREAM JnG^TTOG ISJ^i^IS pSh °T ^^^ "^^ ^"^' ^°'^^« '^' "»° «'"^» ^^^ "^^ first part
D.TU L. KoS^i^^SrR^S^^^ f"** «"*! "^"^ sub-part is folded along said second folding
Htod NoVTSlL Z: sTA ""^ :? '^'' ■* "^"^' perpendicularly to said first sub-part «,d
iBt CLJ E02B 8/08 ^**" '°™"'8 ■ ^**> extending in the elongated direc-
VJS. a. 119—3 20 Claima r°" °'" "'*^ ^^"^ *°** 'P**'"^ inwardly from the edges of said
first part extending in the elongated direction thereof, a block-
like birdseed member being retained on a contact surface
formed by said first part and said first sub-part of said support-
ing and retaining member by means of the bonding agent
holding the seeds together with said web formed by said sec-
ond sub-part extending into said birdseed member, said block-
like birdseed member having a first surface in contact with said
supporting and retaining member, a second surface opposite
said first surface and facing outwardly from said supporting
and reUining member, and side surfaces extending between
said first and second surfaces, said web formed by said second
sub-part extending outwardly from said first sub-part for a
dimension equal approximately to half the dimension of said
birdseed member between said first and second surfaces
thereof, at least one web reinforcing and support strap secured
to said web formed by said second sub-part along said second
folding line and with said web extending perpendicularly to
said first part said web reinforcing and support strap extends
from said web into contact with said first part of said support-
ing and retaining member, and said block-like birdseed member
has a first end spaced in the elongaled direction of said blank
from the first end thereof and a second end adjacent the second
end of said blank so that each of said first and second parts of
said blank has a portion extending in the elongated direction of
said blank between said birdseed member and said first end of
said blank which is free of said birdseed member, said means
for attaching comprises each of said first and second parts
having a separate slot-shaping latching eyelet which is formed
by a first slot-shaped portion extending at an oblique angle to
said first and second folding lines and toward said first end of
said blank from the lateral edge of the corresponding one of
said first and second parts extending in the elongated direction
thereof and a second slot-shaped portion extending from said
first slot-shaped portion in the corresponding one of said first
and second parts toward the first end of said blank with said
second slot-shaped portion centreed in the corresponding one
of said first and second parts and disposed in generally parallel
relation with the elongated direction of said blank, and the end
of said second slot-shaped portion spaced from said first slot-
shaped portion being spaced from the first end of said blank.
4,437,433
POULTRY BROILER CAGE
W. A. J. NUbof, Hattem, Netherlands, aiaigDor to U. S. Indiia-
tries, Inc., Stamford, Conn.
FUed Jan. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 342,889
Int a.3 AOIK 31/00. 31/04
UA a 119-18 24 Claims
1. A bird-feeding member comprising a supporting and
retaining member and a quantity of birdseed which is retained
thereon and held together by a bonding agent, means for at-
taching said bird-feeding member into the ban of a birdcage
wherein the bird-feeding member comprises a supporting and
retaining member of an elongated strip-shaped blank with a
first end and a second end spaced apart in the elongated direc-
tion thereof with said first end being T-shaped, said blank
having a first folding line extending between the first and
second ends and dividing said blank into co-extensive elon-
gated fust and second parts, said second part having a second
folding line extending from said second end toward and spaced
from said first end, said second folding Une dividing said sec-
ond part into elongated co-extensive first and second sub-parts
with said first sub-part extending between said first and second 1. A confinement area for rearing poultry including opposed
foldmg hoes and said second sub-part spaced from said first sides and a floor movable longitudinally with resp«;t toVZd
4,437,432
BIRD-FEEDING MEMBER
Fritx H. Immcyer, Hamburg, and Michael Wesche, Reinbek,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aisignors to Dr. Inuncyer
GnbH, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302^85
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 16,
1980, 3034875; Aug. 25, 1981, 8124828[U]
Int a.} AOIK 39/01
UA a. 119-18 6 Claims
1024
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
confinement area to load poultry into and unload poultry out
of said confinement area, wherein the improvement comprises:
first and second generally horizontal support rails secured
generally opposite one another to said opposed sides of
said confinement area;
first and second tension pulling means extending along said
first and second rails, respectively;
means for moving said first and second tension means longi-
tudinally with respect to said rails;
means for guiding said tension pulling means on a path along
said rails, said guide means including a plurality of support
bars each extending between and secured to said first and
second tension pulling means; and
a fiexiblc poultry-supporting floor material supported in
trampoline-like fashion between at least one of said sup-
port bars and said tension pulling means, whereby move-
ment of said tension pulling means moves the floor mate-
rial and further whereby longitudinal pulling forces are
borne by said tension pulling means rather than said flexi-
ble floor.
said hinges being continuous throughout the length of said
side portions and bottom portion.
4,437,435
AUTOMATIC ANIMAL FEEDER
Sheldon D. Schule, 1313 B<wton, aarkston. Wash. 99403
FUed Feb. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 470,210
Int. a.3 AOIK 5/02
U.S. a. 119-51.13 4 Claims
4437 434
REMOVABLE POULTRY NEST BOTTOMS OF
VARIABLE WIDTHS
Walter G. Daiis, Hall County, Ga,, assignor to NesTler Corpo-
ration, Cincinnati, Ohio
FUed May 11, 1983, Ser. No. 493,652
Int. a.J AOIK 31/16
U.S. a 119-45 R 5 Claims
1. A removable poultry nest bottom of variable width, to be
selectively placed within poultry nests of various sizes com-
prising:
said nest bottom consisting entirely of synthetic resin
molded in one piece;
a rigid bottom portion of rectangular shape having two
opposite sides and two opposite ends;
at least two rigid side portions;
integral sheet material hinge means respectively connecting
said side portions to said sides of said bottom portion so
that said bottom portion and side portions lie in a common
plane in the normal unstressed condition of said hinges,
with said side portions being on opposite sides of said
bottom portion;
said bottom portion and side portions being constructed of
planar sheets having a thickness substantially greater than
the thickness of said hinge means, and further having
coplanar flat top surfaces in the unstressed normal posi-
tion;
a plurality of rib means extending downwardly from the
bottom surface of said side portions and said bottom por-
tion for reinforcing said sheets and spacing said sheets
away from the support surfaces of the nest;
said hinge means being sufficiently thin and flexible to per-
mit resilient movement of said side portions between the
normal position and a position extending upwardly at
right angles to said bottom portion selectively without
material fatigue; and
1. An automatic device to periodically feed animals without
human intervention, comprising, in combination:
A base having a planar circular bottom structurally carrying
an upstanding side wall about its periphery and having
means to support a storage disc thereabove and a disburse-
ment slot defined therethrough inwardly adjacent its
periphery;
a medial adjustment element, having an annular body with
external diameter slightly less than the internal diameter
of the vertical side wall of the body, pivotably carried on
the bottom of the base and defining a disbursement slot
therethrough inwardly adjacent the periphery of the an-
nular body, said disbursement slot being no larger than the
disbursement slot defined in the base and pivotable there-
over;
means cooperatively communicating between the base and
the medial adjustment element to limit the pivotable mo-
tion therebetween to substantially the arcuate distance
between two sucessive feed reservoirs;
a flat, circular storage disc, supported on the body and
carried a spaced distance above the medial adjustment
element, having a plurality of spaced storage reservoirs
arcuately arrayed inwardly adjacent its periphery and
communicating through the storage disc, each reservoir
having associated normally closed gravity activated valv-
ing means openable when the reservoir passes over the
disbursement orifice in the medial adjustment element;
and
motor means carried by the base rotate the storage disc
relative thereto at predetermined speed.
4 437 436
ANTIKNOCK ADDITIVe' COMPOSITIONS AND
UNLEADED GASOLINE CONTAINING SAME
L. B. Graiff, Houston, Tex., and John L. Laity, Modesto, Calif.,
assignors to Shell Oil Company, Houston, Tex.
FUed Oct 4, 1982, Ser. No. 432,587
Int. a.3 P02B 47/04
U.S. a. 123-1 A 5 Claims
1. An improved method of operating a spark ignition inter-
nal combustion engine which comprises burning in said engine
an unleaded gasoline which has been transported to the engine
through a gasoline distribution system which includes rusted
steel lines and/or has been stored in an automobile fuel tank
which includes a temeplate internal surface coating, said un-
leaded gasoline containing as a primary antiknock compound
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
102S
from about 0.005 to about 0. 1 gram manganese per gallon as
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT) and
containing as a co-antiknock compound which is unreactive
with rusted steel or temeplate from 5 to about 60 moles of
benzoylacetone or methyl benzoylacetone per mole of manga-
nese and optionally a suitable corrosion inhibitor.
4,437,438
REOPROCATING PISTON ENGINE
Gerhard Mcderer, KeUerstrassc 7, Allenberg/BDR, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,292
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 13.
1980,3030615
Int. a.J F02B 75/32
UA a. 123-48 B 11 Claims
4,437,437
DUAL-EXPANSION INTERNAL COMBUSTION CYCLE
AND ENGINE
Frederick L. Erickson, 2610 Bosworth Dr., Fort Wayne, Ind.
46805
Division of Ser. No. 180,135, Aug. 21, 1980, Pat. No. 4,325,331,
and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 959,795, Nov. 13, 1978,
abandoned. This appUcation Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,221
Int. a.3 P02B 59/00
U.S. a. 123-42 ^ 53 Qaims
1. An internal combustion engine, comprising in combina-
tion
(a) a central power block defining between forward and
after end plates and fluid-tight engine volume;
(b) a main crankshaft arranged to deliver mechanical power;
(c) first chamber defining means movable within said engine
volume to define opposed second and fourth chambers of
variable and complementary volumes;
(d) second chamber defining means reciprocally movable
within said first chamber defining means to define op-
posed first and third chambers of variable and comple-
mentary volumes, said second chamber defining means
being connected to said main crankshaft wherein motion
of said second chamber defining means is orbital with
respect to said main crankshaft and providing in its motion
consequent motion of said first chamber defining means;
(e) first poriing means providing fluid communication be-
tween said first and second chambers, the flow of fluid
through said first poriing means being controlled by the
movement of said second chamber defining means;
(0 second poriing means providing fluid communication
between said second chamber and the atmosphere, the
flow of fluid through said second poriing means being
controlled at least in part by the movement of said second
chamber defining means;
(g) fuel/air mixture supply means to provide a fuel/air mix-
ture to said first chamber;
(h) induction poriing means to control the flow of said
fuel/air mixture from said supply means into said first
chamber, said induction porting means having a configu-
ration and location in said after engine plate such that it is
open by the motion of said first chamber defming means
and closed by the motion of said second chamber defining
means; and
(i) ignition means arranged to ignite said fuel/air mixture in
said first chamber.
1. A reciprocating piston engine comprising at least one
cylinder and a piston movable back and forth therein along a
cylinder axis, which piston is connected to a crank shaft, rout-
able about a crank shaft axis, through a linkage including a first
connecting rod pivoully connected to said piston by a piston-
sided connecting rod bearing, and a second connecting rod
pivotally connected to said crank shaft by a crank shaft-sided
connecting rod bearing wherein said second connecting rod is
longer in length than said first connecting rod, and a swinging
lever pivotally support at one end for movement about a pivot
axis essentially parallel to said crank shaft axis and at its other
end hingedly connected to both of said connecting rods
through a common joint, said two connecting rods having a
total length being larger than a distance between said piston-
sided connecting rod bearing and a path of said crank shaft-
sided connecting rod bearing when said piston is in its top dead
center position, and said pivot axis having a location and said
swinging lever having a length being so chosen that at the top
dead center position of said piston said common joint is dis-
placed a substantial distance from said cylinder axis and is
located on a side of said cylinder axis same as said pivot axis of
said swinging lever and so that during initial portion of move-
ment of said piston away from its top dead center position said
common joint approaches said cylinder axis and so that during
a subsequent portion of the movement of said piston away from
its top dead center position said common joint crosses said
cylinder axis so as to then be located on the opposite side of
said cylinder axis from said pivot axis of said swinging lever.
4,437,439
VALVE TAPPET
Walter SpeU, Ingolstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to INA
Walzlager Schaeffler KG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 228,176, Jan. 26, 1981. This appUcation Jua.
22, 1982, Ser. No. 390,813
CUins priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 22,
1980,3006644
Int. a.3 FOIL 1/24
U.S. a. 123—90.56 11 ClaiBM
1. A valve tappet for internal combustion engines with an
overhead cam shaft moveably mounted in a sliding guide
directly between a cam and a valve stem and which is designed
as an automatic play compensating element comprising an
outer part and an inner part guided in one another for longitu-
1026
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
dinal displacement and enclosing between them a pressure
chamber connected by a non-return valve to an oil storage
chamber with an inner surface charged with oil from a lubri-
cating system of an engine, the outer part cooperates with the
sliding guide and the cam and the inner part cooperates with
the valve stem, the oil stroage chamber with an upper portion
and a lower portion being arranged inside the outer part so that
it extends exclusively in the radial direction around the inner
part and having in its lower portion an oil feed bore and at least
one oil transfer bore to the pressure chamber, an oil carrying
passage adjoining the oil feed bore inside the oil storage cham-
ber opening freely into the oil storage chamber in the upper
portion thereof, the oil carrying passage being formed by the
inner surface of an outer wall of the oil storage chamber and by
a sheet metal element corresponding with the said inner sur-
face.
4,437,440
AUXILIARY COMBUSTION CHAMBER PREHEATING
DEVICE
SUb SbzdU, and ToshiUko Sato, both of Aichi, Japan. aMimori
to NGK Spark Plug Co^ Ltd^ Aichl, Japu
Filed Job. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 50,410
Irt. CLJ P02N n/00
UA a 123-145 A 7CtaiB.
1. An auxiliary combustion chamber preheating device hav-
ing a glow plug for a diesel engine, comprising:
a metal shell threadedly mountable on the engine;
a center electrode having a rod-like configuration;
a tubular heat generating element having an open end and a
closed end, said element made of nonmetallic resistance
material and inserted into and connected to the metal shell
at the open end thereof;
electrical connecting means for electrically connecting a
lower end surface of the center electrode and an inner
wall portion of the closed end portion of the heat generat-
ing element;
an electrical conductive layer on an outer wall portion of the
heat generating element contacting said metal shell;
said electrical connecting means includes carbon powders
and a space defined by the center electrode and said con-
necting means within the tubular heat generating element
is filled with non-oxidizing electrical insulative material
selected from the group consisting of silicon nitride
(Si3N4), boron nitride (BN) or aluminum nitride (AIN);
and
said electrical connecting means further includes a ceramic
sleeve member disposed on the bottom wall of the closed
end of the heat generating element.
4,437,441
ROTARY ALTERNATING PISTON GAS GENERATOR
Claude C. F. Meaioox, Nogeat snr Mame, France, assignor to
Sodete Nationals d'Etude et de Coastructioa de Meteors
d'AviatioB "S.N.E.CAlJi.", Paris, Fhucc
Ffled Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,105
Claims priority, appUcatioa Friucc, Feb. 6, 1980, 80 02540
Int a.J F02B 53/06
UA a 123-213 yctaiag
""'\"''-' li I'l i' I I
^p7^ii-M-^-vr-.i-VJ^
1. A variable volume gas generator for charging a self-con-
tained power turbine having heat engines for generating hot
compressed gases comprising:
a first and second module each forming a heat motor for the
production of the hot compresed gases;
a third module connected to said fu»t and second modules
and which forms an air compressor to charge the heat
engines, said modules comprising a fixed housing delimit-
ing an annular space;
a plurality of pistons which rotate in the same direction in
said annular space, wherein said pistons are mounted in
each module;
first and second rods diametrically connecting said pistons in
pairs;
a first and second shaft which are coaxial wherein the fust
rod of each module is mounted on the fust shaA and the
second rod of each module is mounted on the second shaft
and wherein the air compressor module operates on a two
stroke cycle and the fust and second gas generator mod-
ules, which are charged with compressed air from the
compressor, operate on a four stroke cycle; and
a rotary crown having a plurality of poru through which the
rods are disposed, wherein in each module the annular
space in which the pistons move is delimited by the hous-
ing and the rotary crown, and which provide the angle of
clearance for the rods for the pistons to advance and
recede, and a transmission mechanism wherein said crown
is attached by said transmission mechanism to the shafts
and wherein the shafts are in integral part of the piston
rods.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1027
4,437^442
AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLE ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
HlroaU YaMfMhl, YokoMdu, Japaa, Mdvwr to NiMta Motor
Cmmmv. UaUtad, Yokohaau, Japaa
Filed Fab. 13, 1981, Sar. No. 234,582
OalBH priority, appUcatioa Japu, Fab. 15, 1980, 55*16610
IM. a^ FD20 i7/02
M&, a 123—417 5 n.\w^
«• orr
aMi'
WKT
into iu associated cylinder and a conduit leading to the iiOec-
tion opening, and pressure booster means associated with said
valve and connected between said conduit and the pump for
boosting the pressure at the opening from the medium prenuie
produced by the pump to a higher pressure required for f^l
injection via the opening, the preuure booster means associ-
ated with said valve being composed of a stepped piston hav-
ing oppositely oriented end faces of unlike effective area, a
housing in which the piston is slidably mounted and presenting
a first working chamber associated with the larger end face of
the piston and communicating with the pump, and a second
1. An automotive engine control system for controlling fliel
supply and ignition spark timing of an engine having a means
for cutting ofT the fuel supply during engine operation, com-
prising:
(a) a throttle valve position detecting means for detecting
the position of a throttle valve and operative to indicate a
closed sute of said throttle valve;
(b) an engine speed detecting means for detecting engine
speed;
(c) an engine cooling water temperature detecting means for
detecting engine cooling water temperature;
(d) a spark advance angle calculating means for calculating
an optimum spark advance angle of said igaition spark
timing with respect to a top dead center position of each
piston of said engine from said engine speed detecting
means while said throttle valve position detecting means
detects the closed sute of the throttle valve;
(e) a ftiel supply cutoff deUy decision means for deciding to
delay actual ftiel supply cutoff when (a) uid speed detect-
ing means detectt the engine speed exceeds a first prede-
termined engine speed characteristic based upon the cool-
ing water temperature detected by said temperature de-
tecting means, and (b) said position detecting means de-
tectt a change in the throttle valve position from an open
sute to a closed sute, said first predetermined engine
speed characteristic being higher than a second predeter-
mined engine speed characteristic wherein the f^l supply
is resumed;
(0 a delay executing means responsive to said delay decision
means for providing a predetermined delay prior to actual
fbel cutoff; and
(g) a spark advance angle retarding means operative to
retard the optimum spark advance angle calculated by
said calculating means while said delay executing means
executes the predetermined delay of the actual fuel cutoff.
4,437,443
FUEL INJECnON DEVICE
Patar HoAaaer, WoUibvg, Fad. Rap. of Garaaay, aaslfaor to
VoUtswagaawark AG, WoUIAarg, Fad. Riy. of Ganuuy
FUad Dae. 17, 1981, Sar. No. 331^84
OalBM priority, appUcatioa Fad. Rap. of Garanay, Dae. 20,
1980,3048347
lat a.) F02M 39/(30. 47/02
U A CL 123—446 9 OalaM
1. In a fuel injection system including at leut one injection
pump delivering fuel at a medium delivery pressure, at least
one ftiel injection valve associated with a respective engine
cylinder and having a ftiel iiyection opening for ii^ecting fbel
working chamber associated with the smaller end face of the
piston and communicating with the associated conduit, and
spring means biasing the piston in one direction in the housing,
the improvement wherein: said piston comprises a first piston
segment presenting the larger piston end face and a second
piston segment separate from said first segment and presenting
the smaller piston end face; said second segment comprises
valve means for selectively blocking conununication between
said conduit and the pump; and said spring means comprise
two springs each acting separately on a respective one of said
segmentt.
4,437,444
FUEL INJECnON PUMP FOR A DIESEL ENGI?^
Saishl Yaaahara, Yokosoka, Japan, aaaifpor to Niaaaa Motor
Cofltpaay Ltd., Kaaagawa, Japaa
FUad Dae. 16, 1981, Sar. No. 33U28
CUlBW priority, appUcatioa Japan, Dae. 19, 1980, 55-180008;
Mar. 5, 1981, 56-31680; Mar. 5. 1981. 56^1681
lat a^ F02M 59/00
U.S. a. 123—458 6 ClalM
1. A fuel injection pump for a diesel engine, comprising:
(a) a fuel tank for containing fuel;
(b) a housing defining a chamber;
(c) a ftiel passage interconnecting the fuef tank and the
chamber;
(d) a feed pump located along the fuel passage for driving
fiiel from the fuel tank toward the chamber,
(e) a plunger pump connected to the chamber for supplying
fbel from the chamber to the engine;
(0 an overflow passage having one end connected to the
chamber and the other end connected to the fuel tank for
returning a part of fbel from the chamber to the fuel tank;
(g) a fbel return passage having one end connected to the
chamber and the other end connected to the fuel tank for
returning a part of fiiel from the chamber to the fuel tank;
and
1028
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
(h) an emergency valve interposed in the fuel return passage
for selectively closing and opening the fuel return passage
said first additional increment being determined depend-
ing upon the detected warm-up condition;
calculating, in response to said second and third electrical
signals, a second additional increment of the fuel-feeding
rate of the engine, said second additional increment, after
starting of the engine, being decreased to zero with the
lapse of time at a controllable speed of decrease, and said
speed of decrease of the second additional increment
being changed depending upon the third electrical signal-
and *
correcting the fuel-feeding rate of the engine in accordance
with said calculated first and second additional incre-
ments.
207
to reduce the rate of fuel supply to the engine when the
emergency valve opens the fuel return passage.
4,437 445
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
FUEL FEEDING RATE OF AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Hiroshi Takahashi; Yukio Suzuki; MasasU Matsuo; Hironobu
Obo, aU of Toyota; Shuzo Yoahida, Ai^jo; Kazuo Ueda, Ka-
riya, and Motoharu Sueishi, Toyota, aU of Japan, assignors to
Toyota Jidodu Kabnshiki Kaisha, Toyota and Nippondeoso
Co^ Ltd^ Kariya, both of, Japan
FUed Aug. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 407,562
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 13, 1981, 56-125984
Int. a.J P02D 5/00
VS. a 123-491 9 ctatas
1. A method for controlling the fuel-feeding rate of an inter-
nal combustion engine having a throttle valve, comprising the
steps of:
detecting the warm-up condition of the engine to generate a
first electrical signal which indicates the detected warm-
up condition;
detecting whether the engine is starting or is not starting to
generate a second electrical signal which indicates the
detected result;
detecting whether the throttle valve u in the idle position or
IS not in the idle position to generate a third electrical
signal which indicates the detected results;
calculating, in response to said first electrical signal, a first
additional increment of the fuel-feeding rate of the engine.
4,437446
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED FUEL INJECTION
SYSTEM
Shigenori Isomura; Akio Kobayashi; Katsushi Kato, all of Ka-
riya; Ichiro Kowada, and Sachio Nishii, both of Toyota, all of
Japan, assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya and Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, both of, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 155,385, Jun. 2, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 358,923
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 27, 1979, 54-81663
Int. a.3 P02B 3/00
U.S. a. 123-492 3 cudms
1. An electronically controlled fuel injection system for
internal combustion engines comprising:
an air flow sensor including a potentiometer for detecting an
amount of air flow to an engine at a position upstream of
a throttle valve disposed in an intake pipe of said engine
and generating a corresponding output voltage;
control means including a controller having fuel injection
amount compensating means responsive to said output
voltage of said sensor to generate a pulse signal; and fuel
injection valve means responsive to said pulse signal from
said controller to inject said engine with an amount of fuel
corresponding to a pulse width of said pulse signal; and
a fuel enrichment circuit responsive to said output signal of
said air flow sensor for feeding, when said amount of air
flow changes in a direction to decrease, a signal com-
manding an increase in fuel amount which is proportional
to the rate of said change to said compensating means, said
fuel enrichment circuit including a delay circuit compris-
ing a resistor and a capacitor for generating an output
voltoge indicative of a change in said sensor output volt-
age with a predetermined delay, a buffer amplifier for
delivery said delay circuit output voltage, and a differen-
tial amplifier circuit for receiving and differentially ampli-
fying said air flow sensor output voltage and buffer ampli-
fier output voltage, whereby the rate of increase in said
fuel injection amount is proportional to said difference
between the sensor output voltage and the buffer amplifier
output voltage.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1029
4,437,447
EXHAUST RECYCLE TO CARBURETOR OF AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Charles R. Johnson, 543 Robinbood Dr., Aurora, Ohio 44202
FUed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 421^96
Int. a.J P02M 25/06
UA a. 123-568 5ciatau
disconnecting said secondary orifice from said auxiliary outlet
and a second position communicating said secondary orifice
1. In an internal combustion engine having an exhaust mani-
fold, and a float-controlled down-draft carburetor including a
booster venturi means for injecting gasoline into the carburetor
wherein said booster venturi is positioned above the throttle
plate of the carburetor, the improvement comprising,
(a) an attenuator means which places said exhaust manifold
in unvalved but restricted open fluid communication with
said exhaust manifold, said attenuator means comprising,
(i) an attenuator chamber, and
(ii) baffle means within said chamber to attenuate the
velocity and lower the pressure of exhaust gases in said
exhaust manifold,
(b) intake conduit means of predetermined diameter to place
said chamber in open fluid communication with said ex-
haust manifold, and,
(c) supply conduit means of predetermined diameter placing
said chamber in open fluid communication with said car-
buretor, the outlet of said supply conduit being positioned
directly laterally opposite from said booster venturi so as
to heat it by directly impinging recycled exhaust gases
thereupon, the amount of said recycled gases to the carbu-
retor being greater than 2 percent but less than 10 percent
by volume of exhaust gases generated by said engine.
with said auxiliary outlet and disconnecting said secondary
orifice from said outlet.
4437 449
ARROW PROJECTING HANDBOW
Michael P. Attanasio, 1156 Glenwood Blvd., Schenectady. N.Y.
12308
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,462
Int. a.3 F41B 7/00
U.S. a. 124-22 j2 Claims
4437 448
DUAL FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
Henry C. BUUngsley, Waukegan, III., assignor to Outboard
Marine Corporation, Waukegan, lU.
Division of Ser. No. 175,348, Aug. 4, 1980, Pat. No. 4,375,795.
This appUcation Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 450,901
Int. a.J F02B 7/02
VS. a. 123-577 5 ctalms
1. A fuel supply system comprising a carburetor including an
air/fuel induction passage including a main supply jet and a
secondary orifice, a first fuel supply including an auxiliary
outlet, communicating with said main jet, communicable with
a source of a first fuel, and operable to supply the first fuel to
said main jet and to said auxiliary outlet, a second fuel supply
communicable with a source of a second fuel, and including an
outlet, and a control valve including a valve chamber which is
closed to the atmosphere and which is connected to said sec-
ondary orifice, to said auxiliary outlet of said first fuel supply,
and to said outlet of said second fuel supply, said control valve
also including a valve member movable between a first posi-
tion communicating said secondary orifice with said outlet and
1. An improved handbow comprising:
(a) a frame;
(b) a handle extending laterally from the frame when the
frame is in an upright position;
(c) an opening in the frame through which an arrow may be
supported and shot;
(d) an elastic bowstring secured at its opposite ends to the
frame;
(e) a pair of spaced stops extending rearwardly of the frame
for terminating the forward movement of the bowstring to
provide a uniform application of force to an arrow upon
its release from the bowstring the stops being disposed
substantially vertical when the frame is in the upright
position; and
(0 one of the stops including means for engaging the arm of
an archer to stabilize the handbow during shooting.
4,437,450
PORTABLE COOKING GRILL
WUUam L. ConoeUy, 463 Kenwood Ave., Ottawa, Ontario.
Canada K2A 0K8
FUed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,326
Int. a.3 F24B 3/00
VS. a. 126-30 2 Claims
1. A portable cooking stand for use in an open fireplace
comprising:
1030
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
(«) a post;
(b) at least one grill assembly swingably and slidably
mounted on said post and projecting laterally therefrom;
(c) adjustably movable means for supporting the grill assem-
bly at any position longitudinally along the post; and
(d) post anchoring means for securing the cooking stand
adjacent the front open wall of a fireplace, when the lower
end of the post rests on the fireplace hearth, said anchor-
ing means comprising a pair of plates each having an
(c) A monolithic ceramic substrate catalytic combustor
mounted in a sleeve,
(d) a loading door on the firebox moveable between open
and closed positions relative to the first opening in the
firebox and having openings to provide a primary supply
of air to the combustion chamber;
(e) a smoke relief door coupled to the loading door for
closing the smoke relief opening when the loading door is
closed;
(0 a means for supplying secondary air to the combustion
chamber near the catalytic combustor, comprising a first
tube and a second tube, the first tube communicating
between the exterior of the firebox and the combustion
chamber within the second tube, the second tube being
substantially vertical and open to the combustion chamber
at the top and bottom ends thereof, the top end being near
the catalytic combustor; and
(g) a turret mounted on the stove having an opening covered
by a sight glass disposed above and in registration with the
catalytic combustor and spaced apart from the second
chamber.
aperture therein adjacent one end thereof shdably to re-
ceive the post, an uppermost one of said plates having a
hooked end portion curving around a corresponding end
portion of the lowermost plate and bolt means threaded
through the lowermost plate and abutting the lower sur-
face of the uppermost plate for pressing the uppermost
plate against the undersurface of the lintel extending
across the fireplace opening at the upper portion thereof
to thereby anchor the cooking stand in position.
4,437,451
STOVE WITH CATALYTIC COMBUSTOR AND BYPASS
C^arica P. Wysong, Birmingham, Ala., assignor to Atlanta Stove
Works, Incn Athuta, Ga.
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,253
iBt a.3 P24C 1/14
U A a 126-77 3 ctoin.
4,437,452
ROTARY CONTINUOUS ASH DISCHARGE STOKER
David C. Reachly, MoBroe, Mich., aadgnor to Detroit Stoker
Company, Mooroc, Mich.
CoBtiBaatioB of Ser. No. 62,327, JnL 31, 1979, absBdoned. This
application Apr. 11, 1983, Ser. No. 482,015
lat CL3 F23H 9/00
U.S. a 126-182 34 Chlmg
nc;
*v>r
1. In a rotary stoker or the like having an inner wall forming
a fiimace combustion chamber, a grate on which burning fuel
is supported and means to admit air from below the grate to
said fuel, an improved air supply system comprising:
a central stationary section and an outer rotating ring form-
ing said grate and defining a continuous fuel supporting
surface across said central stationary section and outer
rotating ring;
at least two separate air planums located under said grate to
supply pressurized air to the fiiel continuously throughout
the extent of travel of said fiiel along the continuous fiiel
supporting surface, said grate forming the upper wall of
each said separate air plenum;
air supply means to supply pressurized air to said plenums;
means to separately control the air pressure suppUed to each
air plenum; and
means for seaUng the outer periphery of said grate along said
inner wall.
3. A stove comprising:
(a) a firebox forming a combustion chamber and having first
and second openings to the exterior of the firebox;
(b) a second chamber having an opening for connection to a
flue and communicating with the combustion chamber
through:
(i) a smoke relief opening located proximate to the first
opening;
(ii) a sleeve; and
(iii) a bypass communicating with regions at each end of
the sleeve;
4,437,453
PLASTIC PIPE HEATER
Eogene A. Temple 1492 Gieacoe Ave., Highland Park, IlL
60035, and Normaa F. PeatUn, 6870 W. 176th PL, Tfadey
Park, m. 60477
Filed Dec 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453«485
lot CL^ F23C 5/00
UJS. CL 126— 271 J R 7 n.i—
1. A device for heating pUstic pipe comprising
an outer tubular member,
an inner tubular member mounted inside and spaced from
>
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1031
said outer tubuUu- member, said inner tubular member
having a plurality of perforations therein and forming an
opening which extends completely through the device for
inserting therethrough the plastic pipe to be heated;
end cap means to connect the ends of said inner and outer
tubular members to thereby provide a closed annukr
4,437,454
MECHANICAL DRAFT CONTROLLER WITH VENT
DAMPER
Thomas E. Hayea, Goshen, Ind., aaaignor to Johnson Service
Company, MUwankee, Wis.
FUcd Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,166
Int a.J F23N 3/06
U.S. a. 126—293 16 Claims
14. In a fuel burning heating appliance having a firebox, a
flue and a draft hood coupling said firebox to said flue and
having an aperture in a wall thereof, a method for maintaining
an optimum draft value in said draft hood for supporting com-
bustion in said firebox while reducing draft hood heat loss, said
method comprising: closing said aperture over a predeter-
mined range of normal operating draft values, said range de-
fined by lower and upper draft value limits, and thereby pre-
venting the introduction of ambient air into said draft hood;
opening said aperture when said draft value is outside of said
predetermined range; substantially opening said flue when said
draft value is less than said lower draft value limit or substan-
tially closing said flue when said draft value exceeds said upper
draft value limit; and selectively opening and closing said flue
downstream from said aperture over the predetermined range
of normal operating draft values in response to changes
therein, wherein said flue is more open when said heating
appliance is operating at said lower draft value Umit than when
operating at said upper draft value limit.
4,437,455
STABILIZATION OF SOLAR FILMS AGAINST HI
TEMPERATURE DEACTIVATION
Cliatoa F. Jefhnoa, MiUbora, N J., aMigMN* to Eagelhaid
Corporatioa, Iselia, N J.
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,448
lat a.i B32B 5/16
UA a. 126—417 16 ClaiM
Km c^,,«^j^t^aaaMn fua •rm HMKo*
chamber between said inner and outer tubular members;
and
inlet conduit means adapted for connection to a source of
heated air, said inlet conduit means communicating with
said closed annular chamber between said inner and outer
tubular members.
1. A solar energy collector comprising, in combination
(a) a substrate component selected from the group consisting
of quartz, silicate glass, and a stainless steel;
(b) a solar absorptive layer consisting essentially of an oxide
mixture of copper, cobalt and manganese; over
(c) an interUyer comprising platinum in contact with said
solar absorptive layer and said substrate.
4,437,456
HEAT COLLECTOR
Michael A. Merrigaa, Santa Onx, N. Mcx., aadgnor to The
United States of America as represented by the United States
Department of Energy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,288
Int. CL^ F24J 3/02
U.S. a 126—433 13 n.i-^
10. A method of collecting heat energy comprising:
(a) allowing heat energy to evaporate a first liquid from a
wick means located within a sealed housing in the pres-
ence of a noncondensable gas, the density of said noncon-
densable gas being greater than the density of a mixture of
vapor of said first liquid and said noncondensable gu so
that said mixture rises;
(b) condensing said vapor on a condenser means so as to
recover said first liquid on said wick means and so as to
provide heat to a second liquid located within said con-
denser means;
(c) allowing said noncondesable gas to continue iu motion
along a path which is separate from substantially all of said
first liquid; and
(d) allowing said noncondensable gas to merge with vapor of
said first liquid in the space adjacent to said wick means.
1032
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
11. A method according to claim 10 wherein said heat en-
ergy is solar energy and including also the step of recovering
heat from said second liquid.
4,437,457
ARTinCIAL SPHINCTER WITH IMPROVED PRESSURE
CONTROL VALVE
Robert E. Trick, and Vaughao B. Weeka, both of Racine, Wia.,
■ssignora to Medical Engineering Corporation, Racine, Wis.
Filed Apr. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 372,436
Int a.^ A61B WOO
UAa.l28-lR 6 Claim.
^^ ^zx
k^^,V.V//.vy//y,v,vyy/;^
5. An artificial sphincter comprising an inflatable balloon for
closing a body passage, a pump for transferring inflating fluid
to the balloon to pressurize and inflate it to collapse the body
passage, and a pressure control valve for controlling the pres-
sure in the balloon, said pressure control valve comprising:
(a) a valve jacket having an inlet and an outlet, said inlet
communicating with the pump, and the outlet communi-
cating with the inflatable balloon;
(b) a valve housing positioned in said jacket, said housing
having an open top and bottom and an inwardly directed
shoulder partially closing said top;
(c) a poppet mounted in said housing between the inlet and
the outlet; said poppet having an upwardly extending stem
and a base with a sealing edge mounted on the top of said
base, said poppet also having an internal passage extend-
ing from an inlet through the base and to an outlet in the
side wall of the stem;
(d) an elastic band circumferentially positioned about the
stem and removably closing the outlet of the passage; and
(e) yieldable means exerting a force upon said poppet urging
It toward the open top of the housing so that the sealing
edge will be in sealing contract with the underside of the
shoulder closing said valve.
4,437,458
LARYNGOSCOPE
Michael S. Upsher, 2957 Adeline Dr., Burlingame, Calif. 94010
FUed Not. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 324,887
Claims priority, application European Pat. Off., Nov. 27.
1980, 80 107427.9 ♦ • * .
Int. Q\} A61B 1/06
U.S. a. 128-11 Waalms
power source, a blade having a forwardmost end and a rear-
wardmost end, the latter defining a mounting base; and means
forming part of said handle and part of said mounting base for
disengagably connecting said base with said handle, the im-
provement comprising: a light source carried by said handle; a
light guide carried by said blade and extending from its base to
its forwardmost end; and a cooperating arrangement forming
part of said handle and part of said base for causing said power
source to energize said light source when said blade is disenga-
gably connected with said handle, said cooperating arrange-
ment including a passage in said handle, electrical connection
means for coupling said light source with said power source,
said electrical connection means being disposed within said
passage so as not to extend outwardly of said passage, said
arrangement also including a projecting member carried by the
base of said blade for engaging said electrical connection
means when said blade is disengagably connected with said
handle in order to cause said power source to energize said
light source, said blade including said projection being one
type of laryngoscope blade and said handle including an ar-
rangement separate from said last-mentioned arrangement for
cooperating with a second, different type of blade which
carries its own light source such that said second blade is
disengagably connectable with said handle such that said sec-
ond arrangement causes the power source in said handle to
actuate the light source carried by said second blade while not
causing said power source to actuate the light source carried
by said handle.
4,437,459
HEMI-SUNG
Deborah Slavetskas, 5 Laine Q., Appalachin, N.Y. 13732
Filed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 428,181
Int. a.3 A61F 5/40, 13/00
U.S. a. 128-94 9ci.i^
A laryngoscope having a handle including an electrical
1. A sling for supporting the hand, shoulder, elbow and
upper and lower arm of a patient comprising:
(a) elbow containing means for enclosing the elbow of the
arm to be supported, made of flexible material;
(b) first strap means having first and second ends and a
flexible middle portion therebetween, attached at both
ends to the elbow containing means;
(c) second strap means, having first and second ends and a
flexible middle portion therebetween, attached at the first
end to the elbow containing means;
(d) third strap means, having two ends and a flexible middle
portion therebetween, the middle portion being attached
to the middle portion of the first strap means at a point
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1033
along the length of the middle portion of the first strap
means, the point of attachment being chosen to fall in
mid-chest of the patient;
(e) The length of the first strap means being chosen such that
the first strap means can comfortably pass from its first
end at the elbow containing means with the patient's
elbow therein, across approximately the middle of the
patient's chest, around the patient's neck and shoulder on
the side opposite the arm to be supported, and down
across the patient's shoulder blades and back to the second
end at the elbow containing means;
(0 The second end of the second strap means attaching to
the middle portion of the first strap means at a point lo-
cated on the center line of the patient's back;
(g) The length of the second strap means being chosen such
that the second strap means passes from the elbow sup-
porting means over the patient's shoulder to the first strap
means, and the patient's arm is supported by the elbow
containing means, holding the upper arm in a natural
position without strain on the shoulder joint;
(h) hand supporting means comprising: a body adapted to
enclosing the back of the patient's hand made of flexible
material, adjustable wrist strap means for securing the
body at one end to the patient's wrist, palm strap means
for securing the body to the patient's hand, crossing the
palm of the hand across the base of the fingers; and fasten-
ing means for attaching the body to the ends of the third
strap means;
(i) the ends of the third strap means being adapted to adjust-
ably mate with the fastening means of the hand supporting
means, whereby the patient's hand is supported in a natu-
ral functional position in supination, with the hand in an
adjustable position higher than the elbow.
\ •:_: r^f-
1. In a single stage breathing apparatus, a demand valve
comprising a valve body having a diaphragm chamber, an
outlet means from said chamber for connection to a face mask,
a diaphragm clamped within said chamber and being displace-
able by pressure changes therein, and an inlet portion con-
nected to said chamber comprising a plurality of body parts
providing an inlet for admission of compressed breathable gas,
a valve seating, a valve member urged into engagement with
the valve seating, means for moving the valve member away
from the seating when suction is applied to the outlet means to
enable the breathable gas to pass from the inlet to the outlet
means, and by-pass means enabling the breathable gas to by-
pass the valve member and seating and thereby reach the outlet
means to provide an emergency supply of breathable gas in the
event of the valve member becoming lodged in the closed
position, the by-pass means including a flow passage sized to
allow a predetermined volumetric flow rate of breathable gas
at a pressure within a predetermined range, a first chamber
communicating with the sized flow passage and an orifice
leading from the inlet to said first chamber, and a constant
pressure reduction valve comprising a piston, one end of which
is adapted to close said orifice leading from the inlet to said
first chamber, biasing means urging the piston in a direction to
open said orifice, means normally restraining the piston from
movement by the biasing means but operable in an emergency
to permit movement of the piston to open said orifice, another
end of the piston forming a wall of a second chamber having a
greater cross-sectional area than the cross-sectional area of the
first chamber, and the piston having a bore therethrough com-
municating said first and second chambers enabling breathable
gas under pressure to pass between said first and second cham-
bers to control the pressure of breathable gas in the first cham-
ber within the predetermined range when the constant pres-
sure reduction valve is open.
4,437,461
VALVE RESPIRATOR DEVICE
MitcbeU H. Greenberg, 796 Sport Hill Rd., Easton, Conn. 06612
Filed Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 368,934
Int. C\} A61M 16/00
U.S. a. 128—205.24 24 Qaims
4,437,460
BREATHING APPARATUS
Michael H. Glynn, Basingstoke, England, assignor to Sabre
Safety Limited, England
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 308,993
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 17, 1980,
8033674
Int. a? A62B 7/04
U.S. a. 128—204.26 4 Qaims
1. A valve respirator device comprising a housing having a
bore extending ther^'in, said housing also having first, second
and third passage means each having one portion communicat-
ing with said bore and a second portion communicating with a
first, a second and a third port, respectively, wherein said first
port is adapted to be in fluid communication with a source of
gas, said second port is open to the ambient atmosphere and
said third port is adapted to be in fluid communication with a
patient's respiratory system, movable means in the form of a
readily replacable rotatable cylinder mounted in said bore
having a first recess in alignment with said first and third
passage means; and a second recess in alignment with said
second and third passage means, both recesses being located in
the cylinder's periphery and isolated from each other, for
alternately establishing fluid communication, first between said
first port and said third port during a portion of a rotational
cycle of said cylinder when said first recess is in fluid commu-
nication with both said first passage means and said third pas-
sage means and then between said second port and said third
port during a second portion of said rotational cycle during
which time said second recess is in fluid communication with
both said second passage means and said third passage means,
such that when said first port is in fluid communication with
said third port, said patient inhales the gas passing through said
first port and when said second port is in fluid communication
with said third port, said patient is able to exhale gas there-
through to the atmosphere, means for controlling the amount
of gas passing through each of said ports, with said means for
controlling the passage of gas through said second port com-
prising adjustable valve means, capable of being adjusted while
the device is in operation to control the patient's rate of exhala-
tion and means for regulating the rotation of said cylinder and
thereby the time intervals during which said first port and said
second port, respectively, are in fluid communication with said
third port.
1034
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
4.437.4d2
PNEUMATIC HEAD HARNESS
*!!lf2^ '*'^''' ^"*^ ■** ^J^ ®- Nettdaad, HoUud, both
of N.Y^ aMisMMTs to Flsgfe lateraatioiial Inc. WiUooghby,
Ohio
FIW Not. 19, 1581, Ser. No. 322,775
lit a.1 A67B mo8
UA a 128-207 „ ctatau
means secured to at least one end of said tubins so m to
secure said tube to said body; and
said ring being made of an elastomeric material havina a
durometer in the range of 75-85.
4*437464
ELECTROSURGICAL GENERATOR SAFETY
APPARATUS
James J. Oow, Englewood, Colo., aaaignor to CJt Bard. lae.
Murray Hill, N J. ^^ ^
FIW No?. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,423
.,o ^ iBt CLJ A61B /7/i9
UA a 128-303.14 ,octal«.
1. An inflauble head harness for holding a device in position
on the head of a user, said harness comprising:
(a) at least one extensible tubular member in the form of a
loop, said extensible tubular member including a longitu-
dinally elastically extensible outer tube and an inHatable
mner tube positioned within said outer tube, said inner
tube bemg substanually inelastic in comparison with said
outer tube; and
(b) means connectable to a source of pressurized fluid to
permit the admission to and discharge from said tubular
member of pressurized fluid to selectively increase and
decrease the diameter of said loop.
4,437,463
SECURING DEVICE FOR TUBE INSERTABLE IN BODY
CAVITY
Bernard Aekerman, Metuchen, N J., aaaigiior to Ackrad Ubora-
tories. Inc., Garwood, N J.
Piled Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,611
Int CL^ A61M 2J/02
UA a 128-207.17 ,o cud^
1. In an electrosurgical system having an electrosurgical
generator for providing electrosurgical power at an operating
frequency, an active electrode for applying said electrosurgical
power to a patient, active electrical circuit means for connect-
mg m a first electrical circuit said active electrode and said
generator for supplying current from said generator to said
active electi-ode and return electiical circuit means for retum-
mg said current in a second electrical current from said patient
to said generator, the improvement comprising,
safety apparatus for preventing patient bums, comprising,
means responsive to the current flowing in said first circuit
and responsive to the current flowing in said second cir-
cuit, for inserting an electrical impedance in series with
said first circuit and said second circuit when said current
flowing in said first circuit is not subsUmtially equal to the
current flowing in said second circuit, said impedance
having a magnitude sufficient to reduce the current flow-
ing m said first circuit and said second circuit to a value
low enough to prevent patient bums.
1. A device for securing a tube extending from a body, said
device comprising:
a thin-waUed tubing of elastomeric material;
a ring formed of a rigid tubular section;
a noose formed by the passage of said tubing through said
^ rmg. said noose being adapted for encircling said tube
without occluding same; said tubing being of such a size
that when pulled to a snug fit flattens out against the waU
of said tube, thereby increasing the surface contact area
and thus the totid frictional force between said tube and
said tubmg resulting in a secure slip-proof grip of said
noose about said tube extending from said body;
the ends of said tubing being flexibly extendable about a
portion of said body for engagement with each other by
4,437,465
MEDICAL TREATMENT SEWING MACHINE
Reiahi Nomoto, Kaoagawa; Masahiro Akimoto, Hino, and
Maiayoshi Takahashj, Sagamihara, aU of Japan, aaaignoiB to
Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuatioa of Ser. No. 148,595, May 12, 1980, abuidoDed.
lids appUcation Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,774
ClaiBis priority, application Japan, May 17, 1979, 54-60642
Int CL^ A61B 17/06
UA CI. 128-340 gcUd„
1. A sutunng machine for surgical operations, comprising a
suturing mstrument; a conti-ol device; means for clamping the
edges of the human parts to be sewn up, said suturing instra-
ment having a needle carrying a thread, said clamping means
mcludmg guide means for guiding the suturing instrument
thereon along the parts to be sewn up, said suturing instrument
mcludmg a base, a needle holder tumably mounted on said
bMe, the needle being secured to the needle holder, a loop
taker havmg a hook and tumably mounted on the base and
operative for catching a thread loop formed on the needle,
means to supply a predetermined amount of the thread to the
needle, first transmission means adapted for reciprocating
movement relative to the human parts to be sewn up and
connected to the needle holder, second transmission means
adapted for reciprocating movement relative to the human
parts to be sewn up and connected to said loop taker, and third
transmission means adapted for reciprocating movement rela-
Uve to the human parte to be sewn up and connected to said
supply means; said base of the sutiiring instrument being
formed with groove means which are adaped to engage with
the guide means of the clamping means so as to move the
sutunng mstiunent along the human parte clamped in the
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1033
clamping means during the suturing operation; said control
device including a fluid source, switching means operatively
connected thereto and electric circuit means controlling said
■witching meant; a plurality of hydraulic cylinders connected
to said fluid switching means and each having a rod reciproca-
ble in a respective cylinder, each respective rod being con-
nected to the first transmission means, second transmission
means and third transmission means, respectively; and a manu-
ally operated switch for activating said electric circuit means
which sequentually operate said switching means which cause
the sequential movement of the respective rods relative to the
assigned cylinders to sequentially operate said first, second and
third transmission means which respectively operate the nee-
dle so that it penetrates the human parte clamped in said clamp-
ing means, the loop taker catching the thread loop from the
needle and the thread supply means supplying the thread to the
needle to form up a suturing seam in the human parte to be
sewn up while the suturing instrument is guided on the guide
means along the human parte clamped in the clamping means.
4,437,466
CARDIAC PACER WITH IMPROVED BATTERY
SYSTEM, OUTPUT CIRCUrrRY, AND EMERGENCY
OPERATION
Stanley H. Saolsoa, Miami; Edward A. Schroeppel, Miranar,
and Peter P. Taiwan, Miaad, all of Fla., avignors to Cordis
Corporation, Miaod, Fla.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,467
Int a.) A61N im
U.S. a 128-419 PS 2 Clains
>H™!i-B-fag;-«
1. A battery powered implantable tissue stimulator of the
type having stimulating logic means and output means for
producing output stimulation pulses on a lead at a given rate,
pulse width and amplitude determined by said stimulating
logic, wherein the improvement in the battery circuit com-
prises
a main battery with a terminal,
an emergency battery,
means interconnected between said batteries for steering
current to said battery terminal from both said batteries
when the voltage level of said main battery drc^ below a
predetermined level,
a first capacitive element connected to said terminal in paral-
lel wiUi said main battery,
a diode, and
a second capacitive element connected via said diode to said
terminal in parallel with said main battery, said terminal
being connected to power said output means, and the
junction of said diode and said second capacitive element
being simultaneously connected to power said stimulating
logic means at the same time u said output means,
whereby said stimulating logic power supply is isolated
from the output power supply to minimize the effect of an
output stimulation pulse on the voltage powering said
stimulating logic means.
4,437,467
APPARATUS FOR MONTTORING FETAL HEARTBEAT
AND THE LIKE
Joel N. Heifer, Chaahirc, and Phillip W. Klai. Walllagford, both
of Conn., aaaignon to American Home Prodacts Corporatioa,
New York, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,799
lat a^ A61B im
U.S. CL 128—642 6 ClabM
1. An apparatus for use in monitoring fetal heartbeat and the
like, comprising:
a tubular member having a distal end adapted to be inserted
through the vagina and cervix of a women in labor,
an electrode assembly movably mounted in the tubular mem-
ber, the assembly having a coil being adapted to be rout-
ably introduced into the skin of a fetus for attachment
thereto to permit the electrode assembly to detect a biosig-
nal from a fetus;
means for transmitting a signal detected by the electrode
assembly;
means for applying a rotary force to turn the coil in response
to a linear force applied by a user to the applying means
for introducing the coil into the fetal skin; and
means for yieldably resisting the linear force applied by the
user for enabling the user to sense resistance to the turning
of the coil whereby the user may detect that the coil has
penetrated the fetal skin.
4,437,468
ULTRASOUND SCANNING SYSTEM WITH
SEMI-INDEPENDENT TRANSDUCER ARRAY
Paul D. Soranaoa, Blaine, and Dale A. Dlekaoa, FHdky, both of
Mian., aarigDort to Medtroolc, Inc., Mianaapolia, MIbb.
FUed Sep. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 414,704
lat a.i A61B lom
U.S. a. 128—660 7 CUdM
1. An ultrasound scanning system for scanning the human
back comprising:
a housing;
1036
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
means for mounting the housing relative to a human back for
movement m a movement plane generally parallel to a
plane of the back;
a linear array of transducer shoes;
each transducer shoe being mounted on a plunger-
the plungers being slidably mounted in the housing for
movement generally perpendicular to the movement
plane while each shoe moves along a respective move-
ment Ime;
nn^x^ 4,437,470
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING BLOOD
PRESSURE --wir
JeM-Loofa Prort, Gener., Switzertend, assignor to BstteUe
Memorial Institute, Carouge, Switiertand
Continuation.in-p«rt of Ser. No. 181,620, Aug. 26 1980
77S^ priority, auction Switzertand, Aug. 28, ^,
UA a. 128—679
c^^
T<?i>#60UC£IJ
Int. a.3 A61B 5/02
i
10 Qaims
7
T
21
R^lETT
9
CONVESTER I
E8TEH I
i/'c» }— JDiaPL»r|
each transducer shoe having a transducer for ultrasound
scannmg of the back; and
bias means mounted in the housing for urging each plunaer
toward the back for maintainin| transduce' contact :?h
the back, each plunger moving independently of the oth-
ers and mdependent of the position of the housing, which
remains out of contact with the back
o«o^ 4,437,469
SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING CHARACTERISTICS OF
, . ^ BLOOD FLOW
S^'^anraSTu.^" «-sb-Presbyteri«..St. Luke',
FUed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191^7
.,o ^ Int a.3 A61B 5/Q2
U.S. a. 128-672 ^^^
Prisinl rs^ps'^Jf ""'"""^ " '""°"'^ ''^ P— . -n-
(a) temporarily blocking the flow of blood on an extremity
preL^ute;"""" ' ^' ^' '^' "'"'"'"^•°" °f ^^""8^"'
(b) applying a photosensitive element to an illuminated skin
area of said extremity, downstream of the flow-blockin«
S'5S'ri?o^xr^"^^^^"^"'^'^^^"^"^^^^
(c) continuously measuring an output signal of said photo-
^ZT '^'^T'' --^P^^^ntative of the instantaneous
transparency of sa.d skin area, during a period of progres-
sive relaxation of said astringent prwsure-
(d) averaging said output signal to obtain a mean-transpar-
ency curve plotted against time;
(e) measuring several values of said astringent pressure at
nstanty corresponding to respective points of said mean-
transp^ency curve; and
(0 calculating a predetermined fraction of the sum of said
several values as an indication of systolic blood pressure.
4 437 471
IMPLEMENT FOR MEASURING SKIN TEMPERATUHF*!
Jeffrey Nelson, 20 Allison Rd., Newport NeTv. ^'^^
FUed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,061
U.S. a 128-7^'"' ^"" ^^/^' ^'^^ ^^/^^ , ^
SQaims
4-r ~ »r»Qu Oiuf
tii'O' rue au.r I
1. A method for measuring a blood circulation characteristic
a living body havmg an unobstructed blood flow, simulta-
neously wuh said measurement of electrical impedii,rmeJ.
S.'r' "'"""' '" ^' ^y- "'^ Pa-ingW^SuS^f
impedance measurement and also the values of blood pressure
measurement, each in the form of an electrical signal, through
a processor and determining from the electrical ii^ce 2d
blood pressure signals electrical signals representing«dd blood
circulation characteristic.
Ji t r""^ for indicating the sUte of relaxation or tension of
an individual with respect to a particular optimum predeter-
mined temperature of the individual as measured by the indi-
vidual's fmgertip skin temperature comprising:
a thermally conductive planar surface-
''*l**'Tf"""' '!r"^'''* "*»"'^ ^^'^ indicators located
on said planar surface, one indicator only becoming visible
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1037
when the individual's fingertip skin temperature is less
than the predetermined temperature, and the second indi-
cator only becoming visible when the individual's skin
temperature is greater than the predetermined tempera-
ture; and
a plurality of temperature sensitive liquid crystal relaxation
cues located on said planar surface, said relaxation cues
becoming visible only when the skin temperature of the
individual is less than that of the predetermined tempera-
ture of the individual, wherein said temperature sensitive
liquid crystal indicators indicate the proximity of the
individual's fingertip skin temperature to that of the prede-
termined temperature and said temperature sensitive re-
laxation cues assist the individual in attaining the predeter-
mined temperature by allowing the individual to recall
certain learned relaxation techniques.
detecting vibrations emitted from a moving joint in at least
the subsonic frequency range, and
^ ^ ^
— 'i^ 5 i U
r - •
> r "
1 1
{MnrrEm*
'i
tf~i j»pf muivtn
^'2SS\-^
^^ mcoK
4,437,472
APPARATUS FOR COLLECONG FLUIDS
Henry Naftulin, 8341 N. Kenton Ave., Skokie, 111. 60076
Continiuition-in*part of Ser. No. 275,498, Jun. 19, 1981,
•budoncd. This •pplication Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 428,143
Int. a.J A61B 5/00: B65D 33/00. 81/00
U.S. a. 128—767 7 Claims
analyzing the detected emissions to determine whether or
not a predetermined pathological condition exisu.
4,437,474
METHOD FOR MAKING MULTICONDUCTOR COIL
AND THE COIL MADE THEREBY
Charles A. Peers-Trevarton, Coral Springs, Fla., assignor to
Cordis Corporation, Miami, Fla.
Filed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 399,063
Int. a.' A61N 1/04
U.S. a. 128-784 5 cudms
iMmm<4^V)NM»#\\VV\^^^
m
1. In combination with a flexible container used to collect
and defibrinate blood therein, an insitu fibrin filter means posi-
tioned within said container and in communication with the
outlet port of said container for collecting fibrin prior to ite
entry into said outlet port, comprising: a perforated inner tube
member having an upper end extending into said outlet port,
and a lower end extending into said container; and reticulated
foam insert secured around said inner tube member, said inner
tube member being sealed at its other end so as to preclude the
entry of blood thereinto.
4,437,473
ORTHOPEDIC DUGNOSTIC PROCEDURES AND
APPARATUS THEREFOR
Raymond A. B. MoUan, Holywood, Ireland, assignor to National
Research De? elopment Corporation, London, England
FUed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,516
Cbdffls priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 3, 1981,
8110528
Int CV A61B 5/12
U.S. a. 128—773 6 Claims
1. An orthopaedic diagnostic procedure comprising the
steps of:
1. A method for making a multiconductor coil having an
outer diameter equal to the diameter of a winding mandrel plus
the diameter of wires being coiled with homogeneity of the
insulating coating and the insulation between the wires pe-
served, said method comprising the steps of: winding a first
uninsulated wire conductor on a winding mandrel with a pre-
determined spacing between adjacent turns of the coil of wire
conductor, coating the uninsulated coil of wire conductor with
an insulating coating, repeating the above two steps for each
additional wjre conductor to be included in the multiconductor
coil, and after the insulating coating on each wire conductor
coil has dried and/or solidified, screwing each additional coil
into the first coil to form a multiconductor coil having the
desired homogeneity of the insulating coating and of the insu-
lation between adjacent turns in the multiconductor coil.
4,437,475
TRANSVENOUS CARDIOVASCULAR INTEGRATED
LEAD ANCHORING SLEEVE, PROTECTOR, AND
PERMANENT LEAD INTRODUCER STOP GAP
Darid L. White, Wyoming, Minn., assignor to Medtronic, Inc.,
MinneapoUs, Minn.
FUed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,469
Int. a.} A61N 1/04
U.S. a. 128—785 4 Claims
1. A body implanuble lead comprising:
a conductor having a proximal end and a distal end;
an insulating sheath of body compatible material having an
outside diameter, covering said conductor;
an electrode having an outside diameter greater than the
outside diameter of said insulating sheath, coupled to said
distal end of said conductor;
an electrical connector having an outside diameter greater
than the outside diameter of said insulating sheath, cou-
pled to said proximal end of said conductor; and
1038
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
an anchoring sleeve fabricated of a pliant, compressible
material, having a proximal end, a distal end, a circumfer-
ential suture groove completely encircling said anchoring
sleeve and a lumen with an inside diameter greater than
the outside diameter of said insulating sheath, through
which said insulating sheath passes, said electrode and said
electrical connector each having an outside diameter
greater than the inside diameter of the lumen of said an-
choring sleeve whereby said anchoring sleeve is perma-
nently attached and slideably mounted about said insulat-
ing sheath.
M37,476
PRINS REACTION PRODUCTS OF DnSOBlTTYLENE,
DERIVATIVES THEREOF. ORGANOLEPTIC USES
THEREOF AND PROCESSES FOR PREPARING SAME
Richard M. Bodea, Monmouth Beach, N J., aaaignor to Interna-
tiooal Flavors A Fragraacci Inc^ New York, N.Y.
DifWoa of Scr. No. 280,683, JuL 6, 1981. This appUcation Jun.
24, 1982, Scr. No. 391^4
Iirt. CL' A24B i/12
UACL 131-276 j ctafai
\
Jl/
8LC PROFILE FOR EXAMPLE I .
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma or taste
of a smoking tobacco or smoking tobacco article component
comprising the step of adding to a smoking tobacco composi-
tion or smoking article component an aroma or taste augment-
ing or enhancing quantity of at least one prins reaction product
or a derivative thereof defined according to a structure se-
lected from the group consisting of the structures: ■.
4«437,477
MAKE OF UNTT COMPRISING A CONTAINER AND AN
APPUCATOR CLOSING THE CONTAINER
Jeu-Lmris H. Gaerct, Paria, F^smc, aaainor to "L'Orcal".
Paris, FriuKC
Filed May 11, 1982, Ser. No. 377,172 '
aaiBH priority, appUcatioB France, Jon. 1, 1981, 81 10785
lat CL^ A45D 40/30
UAai32-88J llOalmt
«-H
1. In a make-up unit comprising:
(a) container means for liquid make-up;
(b) a neck to said container means;
(c) means defining a withdrawal opening of said container
means;
(d) detachable applicator means adapted to enter said neck;
(e) make-up applying means adapted to draw off liquid
make-up from said container means, to transport it, and to
spread it on a surface to be made up, said make-up apply-
ing means including means stoppering said withdrawal
opening of the said container means in a substantially
leakproof manner when the container is closed by means
of the applicator means; and ^
(0 wiper lip means bounding said withdrawal opening and
arranged to grip the make-up applying means, the said
make-up applying means and said withdrawal opening
each having a non-circular cross section which prevents
rototion of said make-up applying means relative to said
wiper lip means when gripped thereby, the improvement
wherein said applicator means comprises;
(g) first and second elements fitted one within the other;
(h) means interconnecting said first and second elemenU so
that one thereof is capable of relative motion with respect
to the other, said first element carrying said make-up
applying means; and
(i) means on said second element for releasably engaging said
neck of the container.
RO
>^^ «KI /
wherein one of the dashed lines is a carbcm-carbon double
bond and the other of the dashed lines is a carbon-carbon single
bond and "R" represents hydrogen or acetyl.
4,437,478
COIN COUNTING AND DISPENSING APPARATUS
Hiroahi Abe, Tokyo, Japan, aaaignor to Aaahi Seiko K«iin«hiir|
Kaiaha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed JaL 1, 1981, Scr. No. 279,426
OaiBM priority, appUcatioB Japan, JaL 8, 1980, 55-92280
lat a.3 G07D S/02, 9/04
U A CL 133-5 R 3 rui^
1. A coin dispensing apparatus comprising a hopper for
holding a supply of coins, a rotary disc in said hopper that is
inclined to the horizontal and has coin engaging means on an
upper face thereof, said rotary disc being routable in one
direction to carry coins upward from near the bottom of the
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1039
hopper, a delivery knife near the top of the disc to which coins
are delivered by the rotary disc for guidance to a delivery
chute and which has a substantially upwardly facing surface
that the coins engage edgewise, a counter roller having a
periphery edgewise engageable by coins, mounting means
whereby the counter roller is carried for free rotation about iu
axis and for bodily motion transversely to its axis downwardly
towards and upwardly away from a defined position in which
the counter roller is spaced from said surface by a distance less
than the diameter of a coin of predetermined denomination,
said counter roller being biased downwardly to be moved
upward from said position by passage along said surface of a
coin of said denomination, and electrical switch means respon-
sive to movement of said counter roller out of said position for
coimting each coin that passes the counter roller, said coin
dispensing apparatus being characterized by:
handling equipment to be loaded and unloaded into said
first chamber; and
(A) said switch means comprising a pair of elements between
which there is a slot that opens in a pair of opposite direc-
tions and which cooperate to produce an output upon
entry into said slot of an actuating member; and
(B) an actuating member connected with said mounting
means to be moved in one of said opposite directions by
upward movement of the counter roller and in the other
of said opposite directions by downward movement of the
counter roller, said actuating member being arranged to
enter said slot upon movement of the counter roller out of
said position and to move freely in said slot in said one
direction so that the counter roller can be passed by coins
substantially larger in diameter than said coin of predeter-
mined denomination.
4,437,479
DECONTAMINATION APPARATUS FOR
SEMICONDUCTOR WAFER HANDLING EQUIPMENT
Jaaa Bardiaa, Mcalo Park, and Mikel Goazalez, Saa Joae, both
of Calif., aaaigaors to Atcor, Monataia View, Calif.
FUcd Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,765
lat a.} BOOB 3/02
U.S. a. 134-68 8 Claims
1. A device for decontaminating semiconductor wafer han-
dling equipment, comprising:
a first chamber adapted to receive semiconductor wafer
handling equipment the first chamber including,
an activatible means for applying decontamination liquid
to handling equipment in the first chamber;
means for restricting contaminants from handling equip-
ment to the first chamber, which means includes a
generally leakproof first door covering an opening into
said chamber, and
means for draining decontamination liquid from the first
chamber; means for opening said first door to allow
O- 'I 14
-\\
a second chamber adapted for receiving handling equipment
from said first chamber, the second chamber including
means for directing a drying fluid to handling equipment
therein.
4,437,480
MECHANISM FOR TIGHTENING AND REINFORCING
THE JOINT OF A FOLDING STRUCTURE
Emmett O. Husa, 1614 N.W. 85th, Seattle, Wash. 98117
FUcd Jul. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 396,155
lat a.J A61H 3/02; F16C U/10
U.S. a. 135—74 3 Claims
2. In a folding crutch structure, comprising:
first and second sections of a load carrying stile, each includ-
ing an end portion, wherein at least the end portion of the
second section is tubular;
connector means for connecting the two sections together in
a manner permitting said sections to be moved between a
first position in which the two sections are generally
aligned with each other and a folded position in which
each section is adjacent the other section, said connector
means comprising a first end piece connected to the end
portion of the first section, a second end piece which is
telescopically received within the tubular end portion of
the second section, a link position between said first and
second end pieces, pivot pin means connecting the ends of
the link to said end pieces in a manner permitting said end
pieces, and the first and second sections connected
thereto, to be pivotally moved between a first position in
which they are axially aligned with the link and a second
position in which they are both substantially perpendicu-
lar to the link and adjacent one another, stop means for
preventing telescopic movement of the second end piece
completely outfrom the tubular end portion of the second
section, and releasable lock means carried by said second
end piece and engagable with the tubular end portion of
the second section for locking the two sections together in
said use position, said lock means including a depressible
lock button; and
a joint tightening and reinforcing mechanism, comprising a
collet member attached to the end portion of the first
section and including a plurality of collet jaws which
extend axially endwise beyond the end of the end portion
1040
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
of said first section, and external threads on the collet
member axially inwardly of the collet jaws, and a cam ring
which is slidably mounted on the tubular end portion of
the second section, and which includes an internally
threaded end portion, adapted for mating engagement
with the external threads on the collet member, and a cam
portion spaced axially inwardly of the threaded portion,
whereby when the two sections are telescopically to-
gether and axially aligned, and the cam ring is screwed
onto the collet member, its cam section exerts a radially
inwardly directed squeezing force on the collet jaws,
bringing them into tight frictional engagement with the
tubular end portion of the upper section, so as to, in that
manner, structurally reinforce and tighten the joint be-
tween the two sections.
close the exit port in a closed position and to open the exit
port in an open position;
(e) water-soluble band means;
(0 a first band support finger secured to the post and adapted
to receive the water-soluble band;
4 437 4g|
SELF-ACTUATING DRIP VALVE
John M. Chamberlin, 2800 Dunsinane Rd., Penaacola, Fla.
32503, and John R. Ouunberlin, 1767 Ensenada Dos, Pensa-
cola Beach, Fla. 32561
FUed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,315
Int a.3 E03B 7/12
UA a. 137-60 26aainM
(g) a second band support finger secured to the shuttle and
adapted to receive another end of the band; and
(h) biasing means between the post and the shuttle urging the
shuttle to the closed position, the band opposing the
spring means and keeping the shuttle in the open position
until the band breaks in response to water.
4,437483
FLUID.PRESSUREOPERABLE RELAY VALVES '
Glyn P. R. Farr, Warwickshire, England, assignor to Lucas
Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
FUed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,401
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jon. 18, 1980.
8019956 •
Int a.J F16K U/14
M&. a. 137—85 12 CUUffls
1. A self-actuating drip valve for attachment to a standard
faucet to prevent freezing of exposed water pipes comprising:
a housing defining a normally closed chamber removably
attachable to said faucet;
valve seat means, said valve seat means being adjacent said
faucet and a portion of said housing when said housing is
secured to said faucet;
a double-walled bellows fillable with a liquid between said
walls having a proximal end attached to said housing and
a distal end remote from said housing;
valve means extending substantially coaxially within said
bellows in all positions of said valve means and having a
proximal end for mating with said valve seat means and a
distal end attached to said distal end of said bellows
whereby said valve is moved away from said seat when
said liquid in said bellows freezes.
56 55
4437 482
WATER-SENSmVE PROBe' VALVE FOR USE WTTH A
GAS LEAK DETECTOR
Loren C. Harrison, 8607 Danby Are., Whittier, Calif. 90606
FUed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,146
Int. a.' F16K 13/04
U.S. a. 137-67 15 cudms
1. A cutoff valve for water-sensitive instruments comprising:
(a) a base having an inlet and an outlet;
(b) a case, removably secured to the base;
(c) a post secured to the base and extending into the case, the
post having an exit port in communication with the outlet
and opening in the case;
(d) a shuttle received on the post for translation along it to
1. A fluid-pressure-operable valve comprising a housing
having an inlet port, an outlet port, and an exhaust port, an
inlet valve for controlling communication between said inlet
port and said outlet port, an exhaust valve for controlling
communication between said outlet port and said exhaust port,
a control member in the housing for controlling sequential
operation of said valves in response to a control force on said
control member, said inlet valve comprising an inlet valve
member and an inlet seating which surrounds said inlet port,
said inlet valve member being engageable with said inlet seat-
ing, and a spring for urging said inlet valve member towards
said inlet seating in opposition to the effect of fluid pressure at
said inlet port, said exhaust valve comprising an exhaust valve
member and an exhaust seating provided on said control mem-
ber, said exhaust valve member having an exhaust valve face
which is engageable with said exhaust seating, said exhaust
valve member being relatively movable with respect to said
control member, and said inlet and exhaust valve members
comprising a single integral valve component.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1041
4,437,484
UnLTFY WATER SYSTEM WTTH A PRESSURELESS
STORAGE CONTAINER, PARTICULARLY FOR SOLAR
INSTALLATIONS
Karsten Laing, KaiseraUec 51, 7500 Karlsruhe; OUTcr Laing,
Weissdomweg 14, 7400 Tubingen; NUiolaus Laing, Hofener
Weg 35-37, 7148 Remseck 2, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, and
Ludwig Ludin, Kesselackerweg, 5611 AngUkon, Switzerland
FUed Mar. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 358,883
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Mar. 16, 1981,
1755/81
Int. a.3 F04B/ 7/00
U.S. a. 137—99 5 Qaims
facing convex, outer surfaces substantially unobstructed to
forward and reverse flows, respectively, through said valve,
said first valve element being maintained in an unseated condi-
tion by impingement of forward fluid flow against said outer
surface thereof and being seated in part by reverse flow
through said conduit, past said outer surface, thereof, thereby
creating a low pressure area adjacent thereto, said second
valve element being unseated by impingement of reverse flow
against said outer surface thereof and seated by excessive
forward flow through said conduit, past said outer surface
thereof, thereby creating a low pressure area over said second
valve element outer surface.
4,437,486
LINE REMOVABLE VALVE STRUCTURE WITH
PIPELINE SUPPORT MEANS
Giuseppe Bianchi, Cava Manara, Italy, assignor to Grove Valve
and Regulator Company, Oakland, Calif.
Filed Apr. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 366,682
Claims priority, appUcaHon European Pat. Off., Jan. 28, 1982,
82830018
Int. a.J F16K 51/00
U.S. a. 137—315 6 Claims
1. A warm water storage system for supplying warm water
under pressure to a network including a warm water storage
tank where the pressure above the water level in the tank is
equal to ambient pressure, a pressurized cold water supply
connecting with a cold water region of the tank, and a warm
water takeoff region of the tank connecting with said network,
characterized in having a warm water booster pump posi-
tioned between said warm water takeofi" region and said net-
work, and in having a positive displacement cold water motor
connected to said booster pump and positioned between the
cold water supply and the cold water region such that the
pressure of said cold water supply will drive the motor to in
turn drive the booster pump such that pressure in the cold
water supply is transferred to said network.
4,437,485
CHECK VALVE
Robert B. Goodman, West Hartford, Conn., assignor to United
Technologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 219,753, Dec. 23, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Nov. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 441,895
Int. C1.3 F16K n/iO
U.S. a. 137—220 7 Claims
1. A valve for checking reverse flow and excessive forward
flow therethrough, said valve including a housing defining a
flow conduit therethrough, and first and second valve ele-
ments disposed in said housing and characterized by said flow
conduit being defined substantially by said first and second
valve elements and said housing, each of said first and second
valve elements including means interiorly thereof which sup-
port said valve elements for independent reciprocation thereof
within said housing by the impingement of fluid flow there-
against, said first and second valve elements having oppositely
'^=:^'
1. A line-removable valve structure comprising;
a pipeline-supporting cage and a valve cartridge; said cage
comprising:
a pair of parallel, thick steel end plates with flow passages
therethrough;
a series of studs interconnecting said end plates;
a nut threaded onto at least one end of each of said studs;
hub members carried on the outboard sides of said end plates
around said flow passages for installing said cage into a
pipeline; and
linear, hydraulic ram force-applying members connected
between said end plates for selected limited separation
thereof upon loosening of said threaded nuts;
said valve cartridge comprising:
a valve body with flow passages therethrough and a mov-
able valve closure member for blocking and unblocking
said flow passages;
said valve body being receivable between said thick end
steel plates; and
seals rings for sealing between the ends of said valve body
and said end plates around said flow passages; and
said valve structure including;
separate telescoping, cylindrical guide means axially extend-
ing between said end plates so as to enable limited relative
axial movement of said end plates and preventing relative
radial movement thereof.
1042
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,497
UGIIT7«iING PROTECTED CHECK-TYPE DRAIN VALVE
IVttk E. MttwM, Marietta, Gil, airifMr to Lockheed Corpo-
ration Bvbaak, QUif.
F1W Aas. 31, Wtl, Ser. No. 297,712
lat 0.1 P16K 43/00
U A 0. 137-322 ( ri,i»T
1. A drain valve assembly for a fuel tank comprising:
a bousing secured to a waU of said tank and disposed inter-
nally of said tank;
an opening in a wall of said housing for the flow of liquid in
said tank therethrough;
a cylinder slidably mounted in said housing and under a
force normally tending to position it whereby it overlies
and blocks said housing opening; and
a piston slidably mounted in said cylinder, said piston being
defined at its end inwardly of said tank by a surface having
an area substantially greater than the area of the surface at
Its outer end and located between said cylinder and said
housing to resist said normal force and to overlie and
block said housing opening, said piston having a longitudi-
nal passage extending therethrough allowing pressure
externally of said tank to act on and against the interior of
said cylinder and said greater area piston surface to main-
tain said cylinder out of the overlying and blocking posi-
tion, and simultaneously to move said piston to the overly-
mg and blocking position and an overpowering force on
the outer end of said piston is required to move it relative
to said cylinder so as to maintain said cylinder and said
piston out of its position of overlying and blocking said
housing opening as aforesaid.
4,437 488
SOLENOID VALVE FOR HOT MELT MATERUL
D. Tagtwt, Padflc Gro?c awl Robert E. Ta»ut,
CMr^id>>tk of Cyif., iMipiora to Lockwood Teefaoical Inc.,
Moattfcy, Calif.
Fltod May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,040
I«t a.3 F16K 49/00: B05B 1/30
UAai37-.334 ,ctai„
1. A valve for hot melt material comprising a rigid body
formed of thermally conductive material and having an exter-
nal front surface, said body defming a bore having a cylindric
portion bounded by a concave cylindric wall and being dis-
posed inward of and in spaced apart relation to said front
surface surface, said bore having a passage communicating
between said cylindric portion and said front surface, an insert
disposed in said cyUndric portion, said passage having an inside
dmiension sufficiently large to afford introduction of said insert
therethrough, said insert having an outer surface sized and
shaped for disposition in said cylindric portion in heat conduct-
ing relation to said cylindric waU, said insert defming a central
cylindric passage concentric with said outer surface and with
said passage, means mounted in said passage adjacent said front
surface and spaced from said insert for defining a valve seat in
axial alignment with said central cylindric passage in said
insert, a valve member having a cylindric stem extending
through said central cylindric passage and a tip engagable with
said seat for arresting flow through said seat, said stem having
an outer diameter less than the inner diameter of said central
cylindric passage so as to form a substantiaUy annular channel
between said stem and said central cylindric passage, said
annular channel having a radial extent suflRcientiy large to
afford free movement of said stem relative said central cylin-
dric passage and sufficienUy smaU so that hot melt material in
said annular channel has insufficient thickness to cause signifi-
cant impedance to heat energy flow therethrough, said body
defining a conduit for delivering hot melt material to said
annular channel at the end thereof remote from said valve seat,
means for supplying heat energy to said body, and means for
selectively reciprocating said valve body from an arrest posi-
tion at which said tip is engaged with said seat and a flow
position at which said tip is spaced from said seat.
6. A solenoid valve for controlling fluid flow comprising a
body defining a bore, means disposed in said bore for forming
a fluid discharge passage, said passage forming means having a
seat surrounding said discharge passage, an elongate valve
stem having a tip for cooperating with said seat to arrest fluid
flow through said discharge passage, said stem having a por-
tion remote from said tip that extends exterioriy of said body,
a magnetic core part fixed to said portion, a coU circumscribing
said core part such that energization of said coU moves said
valve tip away from said seat to afford fluid flow through said
discharge passage, a coil support member rigid with said coil
and having a first threaded part concentrically circumscribing
said stem, a second threaded part rigid with said body and
complementally engagable with said first threaded part so that
rotation of said coil support member relative said body moves
said coil toward or away from said seat, means for selectively
locking the relative rotational position of said first and second
threaded parts, means rigid with said coil for limiting move-
ment of said core part in response to energization of said coil,
and means for resUiendy biasing said stem away from said
limiting means and into engagement with said seat
4,437,489
GAS FLOW CONTROLLER
Michael A. Caiale, Newark, Del., aaaignor to Hewlett-Packard
Company, Palo Alto, Calif.
FUed Dec. 24, 1981, Set. No. 334,417
Int. a.J F16K 31/02
UAai37-487J 4Ctai^
1. Apparatus for controlling the flow of a gas so as to main-
tain a constant mass flow to a load, comprising
a first valve having an input to which gas under pressure
may be applied and an output,
means defining a volume V having an inlet port coupled to
the output of said first valve and an ouUet port,
pressure signal producing means including a transducer for
producing, when activated, an electrical signal represent-
ing the pressure in said volume V,
means for placing said first valve in an open position during
a first portion of each of a plurality of successive cycles
and for placing it in a closed position during the remainder
of each cycle, each cycle having a duration At,
means defining a reference volume Rk,
a second valve having an input coupled to the outlet port of
said volume V and an output coupled to said reference
volume Rk
means placing said second valve in a closed position during
the said first portion of each cycle, for a second portion
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1043
occurring immediately thereafter, and during the last
portion of each cycle and placing said second valve in an
open position between the second and last portions of
each cycle,
a third valve having an input coupled to said reference
volume Rpand an output to which a load can be coupled,
means for placing said third valve in an open position when
said second valve is closed and placing said third valve in
a closed position when said second valve is open,
means activating said pressure signal producing means dur-
ing the second portion of each cycle so as to produce a
signal representing the pressure Ya in said volume V when
said first and second valves are closed,
4:
I t$m tmmn \
1
means activating said pressure signal producing means dur-
ing the last portion of each cycle so as to produce a signal
representing the pressure P5 in said volume V when said
first and second valves are closed,
means responsive to the signals V4 and P^ for deriving a
control signal representing the mass flow m through the
volume V equal to
{PA-PaVt^y/RT
wherein R is the universal gas constant and T is the tem-
perature of the gas in the volume V, and
control means responsive to said control signal for control-
ling the flow of gas through said fu^t valve so as to main-
tain the mass flow m at a predetormined set value.
4,437,490
REED VALVE ASSEMBLY
Robert J. Deoien, aad Rick Schilbe, both of Loadon, Canada,
•Mipiors to Walter Air Eqnipncnt Ltd., London, Canada
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 306,947
ClaiBs priority, appUcatioB Cauda, Jul 6, 1981, 381132
lat CL^ F16K 15/14
MS. CL 137—512.4 2 Claims
(b) a second base member having an exterior surface and an
interior face;
(c) mounting means for securing said first and second base
members together with their respective interior faces
abutting each other;
(d) at least one elongated reed having a flat intermediate
portion disposed between a fust free portion and a second
free portion;
(e) a central depression in the exterior face of at least one of
said first and second base memben for receiving said flat
intermediate portion of said reed and clamping said inter-
mediate portion between the interior faces of the first and
second base members;
(0 said first base member having a first recess complemen-
tary with the contour of said first free end portion of the
reed to allow free flexure thereof into and out of the first
recess and to allow the passage of a fluid through the first
recess when the first free end portion is flexed into same
and having a first inlet passage overlapped by said second
free end portion of the reed;
(g) said second base member having a second recess comple-
mentary with the contour of said second free end portion
of the reed to allow flexure thereof into and out of the
second recess and to allow the passage of a fluid through
the second recess when the second free end portion is
flexed into same and having a second inlet [>assage over-
lapped by said first free end portion of the reed;
(h) each of said first and second recesses communicate re-
spectively with a first ouUet opening means and second
ouUet opening means, whereby each associated recess and
outlet opening means form a passage through the respec-
tive base members;
(i) each of said first and second inlet passages of each of the
first and second base members is disposed in the bottom of
an associated depression having a depth greater than that
of said central depression, and
(j) a valve seat projecting from the bottom of each of the
inlet passage depressions and having a distal seating sur-
face against which the associated first and second free end
portion of the reed abuts to prevent flow of fluid through
the associated first and second inlet passages.
4,437,491
VALVE PISTON
Darid E. Brown, 236 W. 17th St, Eric, Pa. 16S12
Filed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,358
lot a? P16K 15/00
MS. CL 137—540
6ClaiBH
1. A reed valve assembly comprising, in combination:
(a) a first base member having an exterior surface and an
interior face;
1. A valve having a body with a generally cylindrical cavity
having an inlet and an outlet adapted to be connected in a fluid
line,
a valve seat in said cavity around said outlet,
a valve plunger in said cavity said plunger having a gener-
ally flat generally circular end adapted to rest on said
valve seat,
said plunger having an outside contoured surface joining
said flat end,
said outside surface being contoured so that an arc follows
said contour when said arc has a center of curvature at
any point on the outer periphery of said flat end and said
arc has a radius passing through a plane extending perpen-
1044
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
] ">« fluid dynamic pressure thereon; and
4437492
POPPET CHECK VALVE
Juliao S. Taylor, 8300 SW. 8, Oklahoma aty, Okla. 73108
Filed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,287
iBt aj F16K 15/06
VS. a 137-543.13 4 cuum.
1. A check valve, comprising:
a housing having a fluid passageway therethrough and hav-
mg a valve seat normal to the axis of the passageway;
poppet valve means for closing the passageway in response
to fluid flow in one direction,
said poppet valve means including a poppet valve having
a head provided with a seat for sealing with the housing
valve seat,
said poppet valve having a coaxial polygonal-shaped
shank projecting downstream from its head;
poppet valve guide means for maintaining said poppet valve
m axial alignment with the passageway and preventing
angular rotation of the poppet valve relative to the hous-
ing,
said poppet valve guide means including a plurality of
webs projecting into the fluid passageway from the
inner wall surface of said housing for maintaining said
poppet valve head coaxial with the housing valve seat
said webs each having an inwardly projecting lug at its
end portion opposite the housing valve seat;
a shank guide supported by said webs coaxial with the fluid
passageway on the upstream side of said web lugs
said shank guide having a bore complemental with the
penphery of said shank permitting longitudinal sliding
movement of said shank relative to said shank guide-
resilient means mterposed between said shank guide and said
poppet valve head for biasing said poppet valve toward
said housing valve seat; and,
means preventing angular rotation of said shank guide rela-
tive to said housing.
«-l
a selectively removable regulator plate means laterally-dis-
posed withm said chamber on said sleeve member and
over said by-pass passage to permit adjustment of said
control valve to a given constant flow rate.
4437494
MAINS INSERTION
Douglas C. Soper, Dorchester, and Brian Gould, Hoddlesdon,
DwTren, both of England, assignors to British Gas Corpora-
tion, London, England
FUed Jun. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 390,080
8II89S* '"^°'^*''' «PPMaition United Kingdom, Jun. 19, 1981,
Int. a.3 F16L 55/18
UA a. 138-97 5CW^
/fi'ui ^ S9 S2 67''^63l
4,437,493
CONSTANT FLOW CONTROL VALVE
Koniteni Okuda, and Jun Morita, both of c/o Oral Engineerins
Company Limited, 10-8, Kamiochiai 3<home, Shinjuku-kiJ
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 409,342
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 19, 1981, 56-128808
Int. a.3 F15D 1/02
UAa 138-45 2CIaims
1. A constant flow control valve, which comprises:
a valve body formed with a chamber;
a cyUndrically-shaped sleeve member disposed in said cham-
ber and deflning a by-pass passage therebetween, said
sleeve member being provided with at least one aperature
m fluid communication with said by-pass passage;
a needle rod co-axially disposed within said sleeve member
to define a main flow passage;
a cylindrically-shaped piston-type body including a main
flow onfice slidably disposed within said sleeve member;
a spring member disposed within said chamber of said con-
1. In a method for replacing a section of an existing fluid
transportation main without disrupting fluid flow to individual
service Imes connected to the section until such time as an
individual service line is to be disconnected from the section
and re-connected to a replacement main, the steps of:
initially removing a portion of the existing main adjacent one
end of the section to be replaced to thereby present a free
end on the section;
maintaining fluid flow between the existing main and the
section to be replaced by means of a bypass line during the
removal of said portion;
inserting a length of a smaller replacement main into the
section to be replaced through the free end of the latter,
the internal end of the replacement main being open to
flow of fluid whereby the section to be replaced and the
inserted replacement main are in fluid communication;
mterconnecting the replacement main and the existing main
for fluid flow; and thereafter
removing said bypass line and allowing fluid to flow from
the existing main and into the section to be replaced solely
through said internal end of the replacement main
whereby individual service lines may subsequently be
isolated and connected directly to the replacement main
without disrupting fluid flow to other service lines.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
104S
4437^495
^ ^ FU«I Sep. 15. 1981, Ser. No. 302,373 ™*' S? a^ ^'^ ^ml^'"^^
^^^Ojtos priority. appUeation United Kingdom, Sep. 20, 1980, UA Q. 141-1 ^^^ ^^^^ 23 Claim.
Int. a? F16L 9/16
U.S. a. 138—144
5 Claims
V
-JP-CEMENTITIOUS MATERIAL
INCORPORATING MULTIPLE
SUPERPOSED LAYERS OF
ORGANIC FILM
M
1. In a pipe length,
an innermost cylindrical layer in the form of a steel pipe
which defines the passage of the pipe length,
a layer adjacent to and concentric with the steel pipe in the
form of a helical winding of a cementitious material incor-
porating multiple, superposed, layers of network rein-
forcement of fibrillated organic film, said helically-wound
layer being in a post-cracked condition and exhibiting
multiple fine cracks in one surface when incorporated in
the pipe length, and
a cylindrical weight-coating of concrete bonded to, and
surrounding the helically-wound layer, bonding to the
helically-wound layer being enhanced by the penetration
of components of the concrete into the said multiple fine
cracks of the cementitious material of the said layer.
4437496
PAPERMAKERS FABRICS HAVING EQUALIZED WARP
SEW-UP
Charles E. Thompson, Raleigh, N.C., assignor to Huyck Corpo-
ration, Wake Forest, N.C.
FUed Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 359,095
Int. a? D03D 15/00: D21F 1/10
U.S.a.l39-383A 5 cuto.
J 2 3 4
a X
-
-
X
■
b ^
X
-
■A
e -
X
d -
X
• X
-
V
\
-
X
^
« X
-
f '
-
1. An endless loop monoplanar papermakers* fabric formed
of warp and weft yams interwoven in a repeating sequence of
first and second adjacent balanced weave patterns which pat-
terns, alternate in the direction of the warp yams, wherein said
first weave pattem is characterized by the presence of warp
yams having, in a first sequence, difTering numbers of interlac-
ings and wherein said second weave pattem is characterized by
said warp yams being woven in a second sequence of numbers
of interlacings, said second sequence of numbers of interlacings
being the reverse of said first sequence so that the total number
of interlacings in the combined first and second weave pattens
is equal for all warp yams.
n
or"
'<•«.
^
r
77777777777777777777777777777
6. Apparatus for filling a container or the like with flowabic
matenal to a predetermined level using ultrasonic energy com-
prising:
means for holding the container in position to receive the
material;
means for initiating a flow of material into the container;
source means disposed adjacent to the conuiner for direct-
ing bursts of ultrasonic energy toward the container to be
filled, the bursts being spaced apart at intervals;
echo sensing means disposed adjacent to the container;
a gate which opens at a predetermined delay with resp«;t to
a burst of ultrasonic energy, the delay corresponding to
the time required for the burst to travel to the predeter-
mined level and for its echo to return to the echo sensing
means;
means for sensing the passage of an echo of a burst through
the gate when the gate is open, the sensing of the echo
being at the time the flowable material has attained the
predetermined level; and
means for terminating the flow of material into the container
in response to the sensing of the echo of a burst of ultra-
sonic energy at the predetermined delay.
19. A method for filling a container or the like with flowable
material to a predetermined level using ultrasonic energy com-
prising the steps of:
initiating a flow of material into the container;
directing burste of ultrasonic energy toward the container to
be filled, the bursts being spaced apart at intervals;
sensing an echo at a predetermined delay with respect to a
burst of ultrasonic energy when the predetermined level is
reached;
terminating the flow of material into the container in re-
sponse to the sensing of the echo of a burst of ultrasonic
energy at the predetermined delay; and
directing a jet of gaseous fluid against the surface of the
material being flowed into the container to displace bub-
bles, foam and the like on the surface of the material in the
container to insure that a true surface is presented to the
bursts of ultrasonic energy.
4,437,498
CARTON niXING APPARATUS
Uwreocc A. Pankratz, St Paul, and Donald G. Comica, Io?er
Gro?e Heights, both of Miui., assignors to Liqulpak Intema-
tional. Inc.. St. Paul, Minn.
FUed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319.691
lat a.3 B67C 3/02
UA a 141-89 23 Claims
1. A container filling apparatus for filling an open top con-
tainer with a predetermined quantity of a liquid food product,
the container filling apparatus comprising:
1046
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
a fill tank for holding the liquid;
a vertical passage having an inlet at an upper end communi-
cating with the fill tank and having an outlet at a lower
end firpm which the liquid is dispensed into the container;
a pumping chamber connected to the vertical passage by an
inlet port and an outlet port for drawing liquid from the
fill tank through the vertical passage and the inlet port
into the pumping chamber and for pumping the liquid
from the pumping chamber through the outlet port and
the vertical passage to the outlet;
a vertically oriented, linearly movable valve member ex-
tending along a vertical axis downward through the fill
tank and the vertical passage, the valve member having a
portion which permits liquid flow from the fill tank
through the vertical passage and to the inlet port to the
pumping chamber when the valve member is in a first*
position along the vertical axis and which blocks liquid
flow from the fill tank through the vertical passage and to
the inlet port to the pumping chamber when the valve
member is in a second position along the vertical axis, and
M37y499
COMPUTER GONTROLLED SENSOR FOR BEVERAGE
DISPENSER
DoMid Deiraie. SycaaMMv, DL, aaaiaMr to Et«vw«, iDCn Wait-
BMMt,IIl.
FOed May 11, 1961. 8m. No. 262,129
iBt 0.1 BC5B 1/42
VS. a 141—95 1 ciata
ISEtffiJfiJ" I
the valve member having a portion which blocks liquid
flow from the pumping chamber through the outlet port
and the vertical passage to the outlet when the valve
member is in the first position and which permits liquid
flow from the pumping chamber through the outlet port
and the vertical passage to the outlet when the valve
member is in the second position;
drive means for driving the pumping chamber to cause the
pumping chamber to draw liquid into the pumping cham-
ber through the inlet port and to pump liquid from the
pumping chamber through the outlet port to the outlet;
and
valve actuator means for moving the valve member along
the vertical axis, the valve actutor means being coordi-
nated with the drive means to cause the valve member to
be in its first position when the drive means causes the
pumping chamber means to draw liquid into the pumping
chamber means and to cause the valve member to be in its
second position when the drive means causes the pumping
chamber means to pump liquid from the pumping cham-
ber means to the outlet
1. An automatic dispenser for small, medium and large cups
including, a stand on which the cups can be placed, small,
medium and large sensors mounted on the stand to sense small,
medium and large cups, a micro-processor electrically con-
nected to said small, medium and large sensors to receive
electrical signals therefrom, and a dispensing valve mounted so
as to dispense beverage into said cups connected to said micro-
processor and controlled thereby, including an electrical erase-
able memory connected to said microprocessor for storing
information as to the time required to fill the small, nMwtinm
and large cups, including means for establishing the time to
respectively fill the small, medium and large cups connected to
said micro-processor, and said means for establishing the time
to fill comprises a Hall sensor connected to said micro-proces-
sor and responsive to a magnet
4^7,500
TREE CinriNG MECHANISM IN A TREE HARVESTER
Andre Laroac, Maounic, Camida, Mafgnor to Boreal Hydranlic
Equipment, Macandc, Canada
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,204
Int. a.i AOIG 23/08
VS. CL 144-34 R u
.ir^;^
^"^^n^
7. A felling head for use in a tree harvester comprising: a
main frame; means on the main frame for gripping a tree to be
harvested; first and second rotary cutting devices mounted on
the main fnmt beneath the gripping means, the first cutting
device overlying the second cutthig device and qjaoed a short
distance therefrom; means for rotating the cutting devices;
means for moving said cutting devices relative to the frame to
cut through a tree held by the gripping means; and means for
removing the cut portion of the tree located between the
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1047
cutting devices in a manner to permit continued movement of
the cutting devices through the tree.
4,437,501
CONTOURED DUNNAGE CUTTER
JaiMi W. Canada. Beasemer, and Jamea W. Uyton. Ftehondale.
both of Ala., aaaigmm to United Statas Pipe and Fooadry
Company. Biradngbaai. Ala.
Filed May 26, 1982, Ser. No. 382,014
Int CL^ B27C 5/00
U.S. a 144-136 R 4Clatas
Ut
1. A contoured dunnage cutter for forming at least one
arcuate concave cut at a predetermined location on at least one
plane surface of a work piece; said dunnage cutter comprising
a shaft mounted cutter head, a drive motor coupled to the shaft
of said cutter head, said drive motor and said cutter head being
mounted on a support plate, one edge of said support plate
being pivotally mounted to a base, means to route said plate,
motor and cutter head through a predetermined arc of about
120* with a reciprocal movement in and against the direction
of the longitudinal axis of said work piece, and means for
positioning one surface of said work piece in the arcuate path
of said cutter head, said means for positioning including means
for guiding said work piece, means for stopping said work
piece at a predetermined location and means for holding down
said work piece, whereby said cutter head is driven by means
of said drive motor to form said arcuate concave cut in said
work piece.
4,437,502
TRAILER MOUNTED LOG SPUTTER
PmiI L. Stam, Box 74. Meriden. Iowa 51037
Filed Jan. 3, 1983, Ser. No. 455,216
lat a' B27L 7/Oa- A47J 49/02
VS. CL 144—193 A
17Claiais
4,437,503
TREAD CONHGURATION FOR PNEUMATIC VEHICLE
TIRES
Haas Sdtx, langfahagwi; Hefas-Dleter Racfa, Garbaea; Hauar
Pieper, aad Udo Prwicha, both of r^«t>-h.g- aU of Fad.
Rep. of Gcraaay, aasigBors to CoatiBcMd Gaaud-Worfcc
Aktiwgesallachaft, Haaorer, Fed. Rep. of GerMay
Filed Sep. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 419,414
ClalBH priority. appUcatioa Fad. Rep. of Geranay, Oet 2,
1981, 3139256
The portioB of the tern of this patent sobaaqoeat to Jan. 10,
2001, has baea dlaclaiaMd.
lat CLJ B60C 11/06. 11/08
VS. a 152—209 R s n.i—
D
t)
^!^Ty/TsTy^ I
(
vi!^i^e:y,
95 ^^9/'
1. A trailer mounted log splitter comprising:
trailer means;
log-splitting means attached to the tongue portion of said
trailer means;
trailer box means pivotally attached to said trailer means;
and
means for opentively connecting said log-splitting means to
said trailer box means for pivoting said trailer box means
between raised and lowered positions.
1. A tread configuration for the radially outwardly located
peripheral surface of a pneumatic vehicle tire used as a spare
tire to replace a regular tire that went flat for example, said
tread configuration comprising in combination:
transverse ribs respectively extending transverse to the cir-
cumferential direction of said tire; and
circumferential ribs at least some of which respectively
extend at an angle to the circumferential direction of said
tire, said circumferential ribs interconnecting said trans-
verse ribs in such a way as to define a plurality of separate
recesses therewith, with at leut one boundary line of each
of said recesses being formed by an edge of one of said
transverse ribs; with the narrower dimension of each of
said transverse and circumferential ribs being approxi-
mately i to I of the circumferential dimension of an a4ja-
cent recess; the number of said transverse and circumfer-
ential ribs being such that when viewed in the circumfer-
ential direction of said tire, several recesses are disposed
next to one another, and a plurality of recesses are dis-
posed one after the other, said peripheral surface of said
tire being divided into at least two segments; within a
given segment the circumferential dimension of said re-
is constant and the circumferential dimension of
1048
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
said transverse ribs is constant, while the circumferential
dimension of said recesses, and the circumferential dimen-
sion of said transverse ribs, of a given segment differ from
those of a successive segment to obtain a high noise deliv-
ery, and especially to obtain a number of tones which very
penetratingly affect the ears of the driver, such that said
transverse ribs which are separated from each other by
adjacent recesses are indispensible in the tread configura-
tion in a need to cooperate and interact with each other
accordingly.
4^7,504
TIRE-PRESSURE REGULATING SYSTEM
Werner Stumpe, Komweftheim, Fed. Rep. of Gcmumy, assignor
to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Gemumy
FUed Mar. 4, 1982, Scr. No. 354,580
Oaiffls priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 5,
1981, 8106194[U]; Dec. 9, 1981, 3148729
lot. a.} B60C 29/00
\i&. a. 152-427 12 Claims
1. A housed tire-pressure regulating system for varying the
tire pressure of motor vehicles, said system having a tire-pres-
sure control valve which is normally closed disposed on the
vehicle wheel to be monitored said control valve being oiser-
ated by a vehicle operator to control tire-pressure variation,
characterized in that said tire-pressure control valve includes a
seat valve controlled by work surfaces via a piston member
having a closing body, said control valve further including a
throttle valve means, said throttle valve means arranged to
modify a pressure difference of said tire pressure which flows
through said control valve, said difference being utilized for
pressure-actuation of said seat valve.
4,437.505
DRAPERY CLOSURE
Patricia Rodgers, 17291 Buttonwood, Fountain Valley, Calif.
92708
FUed Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,380
Int. a.J A47H 2i/01
U.S. a. 160—126 4 Claims
27 2710
26b 32
folded members, and said second pleat section being
formed by a second pair of folded members;
a second pleat formed along the adjoining edge of said sec-
ond panel, said second pleat being defmed by first and
second parallel pleat sections integrally formed as part of
said second panel, said first pleat section being formed by
a first pair of folded members, and said second pleat sec-
tion being formed by a second pair of folded members;
securing means comprising at least one male fastening mem-
ber and at least one corresponding female fastening mem-
ber, wherein one fastening member is mounted to said
second pleat section of said first pleat and the other fasten-
ing member is mounted to said second pleat section of said
second pleat, whereby said securing means is interposed
within said pleats, wherein said second pleat section of
said first pleat is interposed between said first and second
pleat sections of said second pleat, and said second pleat
section of said second pleat is interposed between said first
and second pleat sections of said first pleat, whereby said
adjacent vertical edges of said panels are joined substan-
tially throughout their length.
4,437,506
CURTAIN DRAWER ARRANGEMENT
Koichi Ogita, Tokorozawa, Japan, assignor to Yokota Co., Ltd^
Japan
FUed Aug. 6, 1981, Scr. No. 290,736
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 2, 1981, 56*102225
Int. a.3 A47H 1/00, 5/00
VJS. a. 160—331 6 Claims
1. A curtain drawer arrangement comprising:
(a) a rail of generally inverted U-shape in vertical cross-sec-
tion having a pair of tracks on the sides of a longitudinal
opening, said U-shaped rail having therein a plurality of
spaced, linearly extending conductors,
(b) a motor-driven mechanism comprising:
(i) a motor beneath said rail and having an output shaft,
(ii) a travelling portion in said rail having driven wheels
engaging said pair of tracks, having resiliently urged
means engaging said rail above said tracks for urging
said wheels against said tracks, and having brushes
engaging sad conductors in said rail,
(iii) means connecting said motor to said travelling por-
tion, and
(iv) power transmission means including gears for trans-
mitting power from said motor output shaft to said
driven wheels.
1. A drapery or curtain structure in combination with a
securing means, comprising:
a drapery or curtain structure having at least two panels,
thus defining a fu^t and second panel positioned adjacent
each other to provide adjoining vertical edges;
a fu^t pleat formed along the adjoining edge of said first
panel, said first pleat being defined by first and second
parallel pleat sections integrally formed as part of said first
panel, said first pleat section being formed by a first pair of
4,437,507
MOLDING MACHINE
Robert J. Seeley, P.O. Box 4065, Elmira, N.Y. 14904
FUed Aug. 11, 1981, Scr. No. 292,034
Int. a.3 B22C 15/08. 25/00
VJS. CL 164—173 7 Claims
1. A molding machine for producing molds, said machine
comprising:
a frame;
a squeeze chamber assembly rotatably mounted in said
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1049
frame, said squeeze chamber assembly including a squeeze
chamber flask in which respective molds are produced;
a flrst pattern mounting block associated with said squeeze
chamber assembly and movable relative thereto and to
said flask, said flrst pattern mounting block forming a first
movable wall of said flask;
a flrst pattern mounted on said first pattern mounting block
and facing said flask;
means associated with said squeeze chamber assembly for
moving said first pattern and said first pattern mounting
block relative to said flask and to said squeeze chamber
assembly;
means associated with said frame for rotating said squeeze
chamber assembly, said flrst pattern mounting block, uid
flrst pattern, and said means for moving same relative to
said frame;
8 second pattern mounting block opcratively connected to
said frame and movable relative thereto and into and out
of said flask so as to form a second movable wall of said
flask remote from said flrst movable wall or first pattern
mounting block;
a second pattern mounted on said second pattern mounting
block and facing said flask;
means associated with said frame and said second pattern
mounting block for moving said second pattern and said
second pattern mounting block relative to said frame and
to said flask; and
a sand blow chamber assembly which is permanently con-
nected with the squeeze chamber assembly, and has a
blow chamber which is in communication with a source of
sand and is in constant communication with said flask for
supplying sand thereto.
inner and outer surfaces for establishing additional pas-
sages for said lubricant; and
means for supplying said lubricant to said outer lubricant
receiving surface comprising at least one chamber extend-
4437 508
CONTINUOUS LUBRICATION CASTING MOLDS
Michael J. Pryor, Woodbridge, and Derek E. Tyler. Cheshire,
both of Conn., iMignors to Olin Corporation, New Haven,
Conn.
Continuation of Scr. No. 84,768, Oct. IS, 1979, Pat. No.
4,363,352. This application Jul. 6. 1982, Scr. No. 395.163
The portion of the tern of this patent subsequent to Dec. 14,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.> B22D 11/07
VJS. a 164-418 13 Qaims
1. A casting apparatus for continuously casting molten met-
als or alloys comprising:
a continuous lubrication catting mold, uid CMting mold
including a permeable casting mold section defining an
inner casting surface and an outer lubricant receiving
surface extending over subsuntially the entire length of
said casting mold section;
said permeable casting mold section comprising a porous
body having a continuous open pore fraction associated
therewith for esublishing passages for said lubricant;
■aid casting mold section further including a plurality of
discrete, parallel-sided feed holes extending between said
ing along substantially the entire length of said outer
lubricant receiving surface;
whereby said lubricant continuously transfers from said
passages onto said inner casting surface along substantially
the entire length thereof
4.437,509
METHOD FOR CONTROL OF BILLET STRIPPING
Max Ahrcns, Irvine, Calif., and Manfred Haiuig, Meerbusch,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bochler Aktiengesell*
achsft, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303.787
aalms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 1,
1980. 3037048
Int. a.} B22D 11/16
U.S. a 164-454 10 Qaims
1. A process for the control of the withdrawal of a casting
from a cooled, horizontal, continuous cuting mold composed
of a material of elevated heat conductivity, which includes the
steps of delivering metallic melt to the mold discontinuously,
withdrawing the casting from the mold in a series of steps
following formation of a cuting skin, and, after each with-
drawal step, pushing the cuting back by a partial step, wherein
the improvement comprises the steps of meuuring the expan-
sion or contraction of a wall of the mold in conuct with the
cuting skin and controlling the withdrawal of the cuting in
response to the meuured expansion or contraction.
4,437,510
HEAT PIPE CONTROL APPARATUS
Richard T. Martorana, Readiag, Mass., assignor to The United
States of America as rapreseated by the Secratary of the Navy,
Washington. D.C.
Filed Mar. 29. 1982. Scr. No. 363.168
Int. a.J F28D 15/Oa- P28F 13/08
VJS. a. 165—32 1 Qain
1. A heat pipe contro apparatus comprising:
an outer cuing,
an inner casing inside of and spaced apari from said outer
cuing,
wick means positioned between said inner and outer casings,
KMO O.G
lOSO
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
a plurality of holes in the periphery of said inner casing.
a separator in said inner casing dividing said inner casing into
a heat input section and heat sink section,
an aperture in said separator,
a heat source,
a condensable fluid in said heat pipe and movable upon
vaporization by said heat source from said heat input
section through said aperture to said heat sink section
wherein said fluid is condensed and absorbed by said wick
means.
closure means for preventing vapor flow from said heat sink
section through said aperture to said heat input section,
said closure means comprising a stopper attached by a leaf
spring to the side of said wall within said heat sink section
whereby vapor flow from said heat input section through
said aperture moves said stopper to open said aperture,
and
said outer casing and said inner casing having means defln-
mg a capillary restriction seal in the space therebetween,
said capillary restriction seal being located approximately
midway between the ends of said inner casing.
4,437,511
SOLAR ENERGY ABSORPTION AND DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEM WITH FULL SOLAR, SOLAR ASSIST, AND
HREPLACE HEAT EXCHANGER MODES
John P. Sheridan, 5008 N. d5th St., Arlington, Va. 22207
Filed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 220,237
Int. a.J F25B 29/00
U.S. a. 165-485 3 cw^
energy impinging on the roof, said roof and chamber config-
ured to define an upper region of the chamber to which the
solar heated air in the chamber rises, said system comprising:
a conventional heating and air conditioning system in the
building, including a furnace with an evaporator, blower
means, and air distribution and air return ducting leading
to and from enclosed areas of the building;
an elongate collector duct in the upper region of the cham-
ber extending lengthwise of the chamber and having a
longitudinally extending slot therein for entry of the solar
pre-heated air from the chamber into the collector duct-
a supply duct having an inlet connected with the collector
duct for supplying solar pre-heated air to the air return
ducting of the conventional heating system for distribu-
tion of the heated air to the enclosed areas;
said slot in the collector duct having a cross-section greater
than the cross-section of the inlet to the supply duct to
insure that all of the highest temperature air in the cham-
ber IS induced into the collector duct and thus the supply
duct; *^ '
a blower in the ducting for drawing air from the chamber
and through the collector duct and supply duct and forc-
ing the air through the distribution ducting;
damper means at the juncture of the supply duct and con-
ventional return ducting for selectively closing off flow
from one of the supply duct and return ducting and open-
ing the other to the blower; and
thermostatically controlled means in the chamber and in the
enclosed areas to (a) automatically operate the damper
means to admit solar heated air from the chamber to the
distribution ducting and to deenergize the furnace when
the temperature of the solar heated air in the chamber is
above a first predetermined value, (b) admit air from the
conventional air return ducting while precluding flow of
air from the collector duct and to energize the furnace
when the temperature is below a second predetermined
value, and (c) admit solar heated air from the chamber
through the air return ducting directly to the furnace and
to energize the furnace when the temperature of the solar
heated air in the chamber is between said predetermined
values.
1. A system for controlling the environment in a building via
a combination of air pre-heating and pre-cooling means auto-
matically controlled and programmed by energy sensing de-
vices integrated into a single system, said building having a
roof exposed to solar radiation and forming the upper surface
of a chamber containing a body of air which is heated by solar
4,437,512
HEAT EXCHANGER ASSEMBLY
Robert F. DeVore, Dallaa, Tex., aisignor to HarKo Corporation.
CMnp HIU, Pa.
Filed Not. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 444,341
Int. a.3 F24F nm
UA a. 165-122 18 ctai^
1. A heat exchanger assembly for air-cooled heat exchanging
and having a top, a bottom, a front end, a back end, a right side
and a left side:
(a) a plurality of air flow units arranged and supported in a
longitudinal end-to-end assembly, each air flow unit in-
cluding the following associated components:
(i) a substantially vertical fan mounting wall having a hole
therein;
(ii) a fan mounted for roution in said hole,
(iii) a venting wall operative to direct air blown back-
wardly by said fan up and out said top, said venting wall
situated in back of said fan mounting wall and including
right and left portions and an inclined portion extending
from adjacent the bottom of said fan mounting wall to
the top of said heat exchanger,
(iv) right and left air inlets situated in front of said fan
mounting wall,
(v) an air inlet zone between said right and lef* air inleU
from which air is drawn to said fan, through said hole,
and into a venting zone defined by said venting walls,
and
(vi) a bottom wall portion closing off the bottom of said
air inlet zone,
(b) right and left heat exchangers extending lengthwise
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
lOSl
along Mid heat exchanger assembly and respectively cov-
ering uid right and left air inlets of said air flow units and
respectively covering said right and left portions of said
venting wall of at least one of said air flow units,
(c) a support supporting said air flow units and said heat
exchangers, and
MFL ITL ^
which receives the air supply blowing device and near
the opposite end section connected to the section of flue
apparatus;
(b) An inner corrugated galvanized sheet meul flue core
wherein
(i) the corrugated section of uid flue core is encapsulated
with means to effect closure with said outer wrapping
and said flue core which is substantially free from direct
contact along substantially its entire longitudinal extent
with the inside surface of uid outer wrapping and
(ii) said inner core has non-corrugated end sections pro-
truding beyond each end of uid encapsulating outer
wrapping, one of uid non-corrugated end sections
being said end section connected to the discharge pipe
of the gas furnace and the other non -corrugated end
section being uid end section connected to the section
of flue apparatus, thereby fitting uid heat recovery
apparatus into uid combustion discharge system; and
(c) at least a pair of semicircular baffles mounted in valleys
of the corrugations of uid inner core,
each spaced one from the other along the axial length of
the corrugaiions and each being on the opposite side
from one another,
the peaks of uid baflles being in contact with the inner
surface of uid outer wrapping and substantially parallel
to the openings in uid outer wrapping to thereby per-
mit unidirectional flow of air over the entire corrugated
surface,
uid at least one pair of baflles being respectively posi-
tioned near the opening which receives the air supply
blowing device and the air discharge opening.
(d) coupling means for coupling uid fans together for rota- a ^7 ..^
tion in unison and in parallel and wherein said fans are nFWATFpitir appadatiic
adapted to cause air flow through uid right and left heat ^r^ 1 b ^ » ^> .. i? APPARATUS
exchangers into uid air inlet zones bv wav o?uid r?.h ^'°' "' ?»•"«!'. ^j"' Tex., auignor to Otl. Englnaering
exchangers into uid air inlet zones by way of uid right
and left air inlets, through uid holes into uid vent zones
and out the top of uid vent zones and wherein uid right
and left portions of the venting walls of more than one of
said air flow units are tapered inwardly and backwardly.
4,437,513
HEAT RECOVERY APPARATUS
Joaeph Cutiglioni, 80 Stavda Rd.. and Paul RoMnthal. 143
Woodgate Rd., both of Middletown, N.J. 07748
Continuation of Ser. No. 911,975, Jun. 2, 1978, abandoned. ThU
application Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 341,139
Int. a.3 F28D J/Oa- F28F 1/42
U.S. a. 165-154 8 cialma
Corporation, Dallu, Tex.
Filed Jun. 17, 1982. Str. No. 389,259
Int. a.J E21B i¥//6, 4i/l2
U.S. Q. 166-53
5 ClaioM
1. A combustion discharge system wherein: A heat recovery
apparatus for flue gas is connected at an end section thereof to
a gas furnace at the discharge pipe of the gas furnace and is
connected at the opposite end section thereof to a section of
flue apparatus, said heat recovery apparatus comprising:
(a) An encapsulating galvanized outer wrapping having
(i) an opening which receives an air supply blowing de-
vice near the end section connected to the discharge
pipe of the gas furnace and
(ii) an air discharge opening 180* apart from said opening
1. A system for controlling operation of a fluid operated gas
lift valve having a pressure dome for lifting liquids in a tubing
located in a cased gas well producing through the casing-tub-
ing annulus and through a gu outlet at the wellhead compris-
ing:
a controller having a cooperable valve and valve seat therein
controlling flow from the gas outlet of the well to the
pressure dome of the gas lift valve;
means in said controller responsive to casing-tubing annulus
pressure for opening said valve in response to annulus
preuure reducing to a selected value and doting said
1052
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
valve in response to annulus pressure rising to a selected
value;
regulator means controlling pressure in said pressure dome
when said controller valve is closed;
choke means in series arrangement with said regulator
means and positioned downstream thereof limiting flow
through the regulator means when open;
means connecting said choke means with said tubing; and
check valve means in the gas outlet preventing back flow of
production gas into the annulus.
2. A dewatering system for a cased gas well having a tubing
located therein and producing through the casing-tubing annu-
lus and through a gas outlet at the wellhead comprising:
a diverter valve for diverting liquids from the well into the
tubing comprising,
a housing having a flowway therethrough with its outlet
communicating with said tubing,
a cooperable valve member and valve seat controlling flow
through the flowway,
a pressure responsive member exposed on one side to pres-
sure exterior of the housing and controlling operation of
said valve member in response to changes in pressure
exterior of the housing, and
means effective on the other side of and urging said pressure
responsive member towards valve closed position with a
consunt force sufficient to maintain the valve member
closed when the liquid exterior of the tubing drops below
a selected level to prevent lifting gas passing through the
diverter valve;
a fluid operated gas lift valve having a pressure dome and
havmg its outlet connected to the tubing for gas lifting
liquids diverted to said tubing by said diverter valve; and
a control system comprising;
a controller having a cooperable valve and valve seat therein
controlling flow from the gas outlet from the well to the
pressure dome to the gas lift valve,
means in said controller responsive to casing-tubing annulus
pressure for opening said valve in response to annulus
pressure reducing to a selected value and closing said
valve in response to annulus pressure rising to a selected
value,
regulator means controlling pressure in said pressure dome
when said controller valve is closed,
choke means in series arrangement with said regulator
means and positioned downstream thereof limiting flow
through the regulator means when open,
means connecting said choke means with said tubing, and
check valve means in the gas outlet preventing back flow of
production gas into the annulus.
upwardly and downwardly relative to the other in a rela-
tion jacking a well casing downwardly along said axis; and
at least one blowout preventer beneath said rig floor opera-
ble to close off unwanted upward flow of well fluid from
the well and having a portion which projects laterally
outwardly away from said axis at a location circularly
between said mousehole and one of said structures of the
jacking mechanism.
4,437,515
POSITIONING OF WELL PIPE JACK IN A RIG
George I. Boya<Uieff, Anaheim, and Andrew B. Campbell, San
Marino, both of Calif., assignors to Varco International, Inc.,
Orange, Calif.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,111
Int. a.3 E21B 7/20
U.S CI. 166-77 ,5Ctaims
10. In a ng for dnlling a well along a predetermined axis, the
combination comprising:
a rig floor;
a tubular mousehole extending downwardly beneath the
level of the rig floor and generally parallel to said axis at
a location ofl"set in a predetermined horizontal direction
therefrom and adapted to receive and hold a section of
pipe which is to be added to or has been removed from a
drill string;
jacking mechanism for moving a well casing along said axis
and including flrst and second pipe supporting units at
least one of which is accessible above the rig floor and a
plurality of structures extending downwardly beneath the
level of said rig floor at different sides of said axis, said
structures including power operated piston and cylinder
mechanisms for moving one of said pipe supporting units
4,437,516
COMBINATION RELEASE MECHANISM FOR
DOWNHOLE WELL APPARATUS
Darryl W. Cockrell, Houston, Tex., assignor to Baker Interna-
tional Corporation, Orange, Calif.
FUcd Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,085
Int a.3 E21B W12. 23/00
U.S. a. 166-120 IS ctaims
1. Apparatus for insertion in a well conduit to form a seal
between said conduit and a member disposed in said conduit,
said apparatus comprising:
an elongated tubular mandrel, and first and second spaced
apart seal urging means disposed therearound;
resilient seal means disposed around said mandrel between
said seal urging means;
at least one of said seal urging means being axially movable
with respect to said mandrel and said other seal uring
means to force said seal means radially outwardly into
forcible engagement with said conduit; and
means interconnecting said mandrel with said seal urging
means, said interconnecting means including release
means responsive to selective application of an axial force
on said mandrel or roution of said mandrel to effect rela-
tive movement of said mandrel to release said seal means
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
10S3
"jZ^f^^ZS^:!!^^^^ '°^-5^' -^^°^^'-= • --^^ •" •''"'ting relationship with
means being movable relative to said mandrel and said seal
urging means to adjust the amount of axial force or rota-
tion for effecting release of said seal means.
4,437,517
SLIP MECHANISM FOR SUBTERREANEAN WELLS
David C. Bianchi, Conroe, and Talraadge L. Crowe, Houston,
both of Tex., assignors to Baker International Corporation,
Orange, Calif.
Filed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,972
Int. a.3 E21B 33/128: E21B 33/129
U.S. a. 166—120 17 Claims
3. A tool operatively connected to an inner conduit received
within an outer conduit in a subterranean well having means
for anchoring said tool to said outer conduit to prevent axial
movement in both directions, said tool comprising: a set of
peripherally spaced, radially expandable first slip elements for
engaging the outer conduit to prevent movement in a first
direction and a set of peripherally spaced, radially expandable
second slip elements for engaging the outer conduit to prevent
movement in a second opposite direction; first and second
housing elements movable relatively towards each other;
means for urging said first and second slip members radially
outward into engagement with said outer conduit upon move-
ment of said first and second housing elements relatively
said first housing element to urge said first housing element in
a first direction toward said second housing element; means for
preventing axial movement of said member relative to said
second housing element in a second opposite direction; and
means for attaching said first slip elements to said second
housing element so that said first slip elements upon engage-
ment with the outer conduit prevent said second housing ele-
ment from moving in said first direction with said member
when said member moves in said first direction whereby said
second slip elements will not be dislodged from engagement
with said outer conduit.
4,437,518
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING THE
PRODUCTIVITY OF AN OIL WELL
Albert V. Williams, Los Angeles, Calif., assignor to Norman
Gottlieb and Aileen Williams, both of Long Beach, Calif.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,294
Int. a? E21B 43/24. 43/25
MS. a. 166-248 14 Qaims
>'
1. A method of increasing the productivity of an oil well
comprising:
lowering an excitation apparatus through the casing of said
well to a level at which said apparatus is submerged in oil;
causing said apparatus to emit ultraviolet radiation into the
surrounding oil; and
causing said apparatus to vibrate mechanically, thereby
providing a mechanical energy input to said oil.
9. An apparatus for treating an oil well to increase its pro-
ductivity comprising:
resonator means for producing mechanical vibrations in
response to one or more input signals of selected frequen-
I0S4
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
cies and thereby providing a mechanical energy input to
surrounding oil; and
radiation means including a gas discharge tub for emitting
radiation into the surrounding oil.
4,437^19
REDUCTION OF SHALE OIL POUR POINT
Chang Y. Cha, and Harry E. McCarthy, both of Golden, Colo.,
aaiignora to Occidental Oil Shale, Inc., Grand Junction, Colo.
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,987
Int a.3 E21B 43/247. 43/34; ClOG J/02
VS. a. 166-259 ,4 c,.|„.
during the course of production the bum preferentially moved
to a second linkage channel at the top of the coal seam:
a method of sealing the georeactor comprising the steps of
establishing a mud injection pipe at the surface of the earth
mto the casing of the first well,
affixing a mud deflector to a string of tubing,
affixing a mud screen to the mud deflector, the mud screen
being of lesser diameter than the casing,
lowering the tubing into the first well wherein the mud
deflector is positioned adjacent to the second linkage
/•/<# cAi fa Ar/ttoi^neiti
—^
IK MIS M
2. A method for lowering the pour point of shale oil pro-
duced from a Tosco II retorting process, the method compris-
ing.
blending with such a Tosco II process-produced shale oil a
crude shale oil recovered from in situ retorting of oil shale
in a subterranean in situ oil shale retort containing a frag-
mented permeable mass of particles containing oil shale by
advancing a combustion zone through the fragmented
mass by introducing an oxygen-supplying gas to the frag-
mented mass on the trailing side of the combustion zone
and withdrawing an off gas from the fragmented mass on
the advancing side of the combustion zone, whereby gas
flowing through the combustion zone^ tranfers heat of
combustion to a retorting zone in the fragmented mass on
the advancing side of the combustion zone and wherein
kerogen in oil shale in the retorting zone is decomposed to
produce gaseous and liquid products including crude shale
oil, the ratio of the Tosco II process-produced shale oil to
the in situ process-produced shale oil being no greater
than 1:1.
4. A blended shale oil composition comprising in admixture
a crude shale oil recovered from an in situ oil shale retort and
a crude shale oil recovered from a Tosco II retorting process
wherein the crude shale oil recovered from an in situ oil shale
retort is present in an amount sufficient for forming a blended
shale oil composition having a pour point less than the pour
point of the crude shale oil recovered from the in situ oil shale
retort.
channel and the mud screen is positioned from a point
adjacent to the bottom of the tubing and extending up-
ward to a position overlapping with the casing,
injecting sealant mud into the mud injection pipe,
injecting gas into the tubing, the gas being under a pressure
less than that of the column of mud in the annulus between
the tubing and the casing,
continuing injection of gas with the resultont gas drive forc-
ing the mud into the second linkage channel and into the
connected void space created by subsidence.
4,437,520
METHOD FOR MINIMIZING SUBSIDENCE EFFECTS
DURING PRODUCTION OF COAL IN SITU
Xentea T. Stoddard, Den?er, Vesper A. Vaseen, Wheat Ridge,
and Ruel C. Terry, Denver, all of Colo., assignors to In Situ
Technology, Inc., Golden, Colo.
FUed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,378
lat a.J E21B 33/13%, 43/247
U.S. a. 166-261 4Ctatas
1. In production of coal in situ wherein at least a pair of wells
has been drilled from the surface of the earth into an under-
ground coal seam and a first linkage channel has been esub-
Ijshed through the coal thus connecting the wells; and wherein
the coal has been set afire with combustion sustained by inject-
ing an oxidizer into a first well of the pair and removing the
products of reactions through the second well of the pair;
wherein as combustion proceeds and the georeactor grows iii
lateral extent resulting in roof fall and subsidence; and wherein
4,437,521
SUBSEA WELLHEAD CONNECTION ASSEMBLY AND
METHODS OF INSTALLATION
Emmett M. Richardson, Duncanville; Angelos T. Chatas, Dallas,
and Joseph R. Padilla, Houston, all of Tex., assignors to
Mobil Oil Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,901
Int a.} E21B 43/01
U.S. a 166-341 17 Claims
1. A subsea wellhead connection assembly for establishing
fluid communication and production capability between a
manifold system situated within a subsea work enclosure and
an adjacent subsea wellhead located in a generally wedge-
shaped well bay, comprising:
conduit means for fluidly connecting the wellhead and the
manifold system, the conduit means having one end ex-
tending substantially horizontally and the other end ex-
tending downwardly;
wellhead connector means fluidly connected to the down-
wardly directed end of the conduit means for releaaably
connecting the conduit means to the wellhead upon
downward movement of the assembly to esublish fluid
communication therebetween;
manifold system connector means fluidly connected to the
horizontal end of the conduit means for releasably con-
necting the conduit means to the manifold system upon
lateral movement of the manifold system connector means
to esublish fluid communication therebetween; and
a guide frame rigidly secured to the wellhead connector
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
loss
means for supporting the manifold system connector
means and the conduit means, and for vertically orienting
the wellhead connector means over the wellhead and
horizontally aligning the manifold system connector
means with the manifold system, wherein the wedge-
shaped well bay is defined by rigid vertical dividers sup-
ported on the marine floor, the vertical dividers extending
along radially aligned planes so as to define opposite sides
camming means for outwardly urging said radially expandable
locking dogs, said camming means being shiftable in said first
4,437,522
SELECTIVE LOCK FOR ANCHORING WELL TOOLS
William F. Krause, Jr., Spring, and Mark E. Hopmann, Hous-
ton, both of Tex., assignors to Baker Oil Tools, Inc^ Orange,
Calif.
FUed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,674
Int. C\? E21B 23/02
VS. a. 166—382 22 Qaims
1. A lock for securing a well tool in a selected one of a
plurality of identical landing nipples in a well conduit, said lock
comprising: an annular housing having means thereon for
supporting said well tool; a plurality of radially expandable
locking dogs for engaging said nipple to secure said well tool
thereto when subjected to axial loads in either direction; an
outwardly urged inwardly collapsible means engagable with
said nipple upon outward expansion to prevent movement of
said annular housing in a first axial direction relative to said
nipple; an axially shiftable member movable in said first axial
direction relative to said annular housing from a position ini-
tially in compressive engagement to hold said collapsible
means in an inwardly retracted position and having means for
engaging said nipple during movement of said lock in a second
opposite axial direction to release said collapsible means; and
of a radially inwardly tapered well bay, and wherein the
wedge-shaped sides of the guide frame are tapered simi-
larly to the tapered well bay sides and said sides of the
guide frame are sufficiently spaced apart and extend for a
sufficient length and height to provide alignment of the
guide frame as it is moved laterally during installation for
orientation of the wellhead connection assembly over the
wellhead.
direction relative to said annular housing upon engagement of
said collapsible means with said nipple.
4,437,523
LAWN EDGING DEVICE
Joe A. bbell, 837 Argus, Milan, Tenn. 38358
FUed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,653
Int. CV AOIB 1/24
VS. a. 172—13 1 Claim
1. A device for edging lawns around concrete walkways,
said device comprising:
(a) An elongated handle member having a first end and a
second end, said first end including a grip portion for
allowing the operator of said device to securely grip said
handle member, said second end having an aperture there-
through for allowing the operator of said device to extend
his foot therethrough;
(b) an anvil means attached to said second end of said handle
member for receiving the foot of the operator of said
device, said anvil means including a generally flat upper
surface having a forward end and a rearward end and
shaped so as to receive the entire bottom of the foot of the
operator of said device, said upper surface of said anvil
means having a longitudinal axis, said anvil means havmg
a raised, transverse member attached to said upper surface
substantially adjacent the rearward end thereof for engag-
ing the heel of the foot of the operator of said device; and
10S6
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
(c) a blade member having an upper edge for being attached
to said anvil means substantially in line with said longitudi-
nal axis of said upper surface of said anvil means and
havmg a curved lower edge for being forced downward
and rotated forward through the lawn adjacent the con-
crete walkway, said blade member having a first side for
being directed toward the concrete walkway as said lower
edge is forced downward and rotated forward through
the lawn and having a second side for being directed
against the lawn as said lower edge is forced downward
and routed forward through the lawn, said blade member
including a cutting edge on said first side adjacent said
lower edge for cutting through the lawn as said blade
member is forced downward and rotated forward through
the lawn, said first side of said blade member being con-
caved and said second side of said blade member being
convexed for causing said cutting edge of said blade mem-
ber to be urged against the concrete walkway as said blade
member is forced downward and rotated forward through
the lawn, thus causing a slicing scirrors action, said lower
edge of said blade member being serrated.
to a second portion of the guide structure in a relation
shifting said drilling unit between said drilling position
and a laterally offset position in which said drilling unit is
shifted to a side of said axis.
4,437,524
WELL DRILLING APPARATUS
George I. Boya^jiefT, Aoaheim, and Joseph A. R. Picard, Foun-
tain VaUey, both of Calif., assignors to Varco International.
Inc., Orange, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 167,758, Jul. 14, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 350,081
iBt aj E21C I J/00
VS. a. 173-43 22 Claims
9. Well drilling apparatus comprising:
a drilling unit including an element adapted to be connected
to the end of a drill string for rotation therewith about the
axis of the string, and a motor operable to drive said
element and the connected string rotatively about said
axis; and
means movably mounting said drilling unit and including an
elongated guide structure which extends essentially paral-
lel to said axis and which in a predetermined drilling
position of the unit guides it for movement along said axis
relative to said guide structure;
said mounting means including a connection mounting a first
portion of said elongated guide structure, carrying said
drilling unit, for movement with the drilling unit relative
4,437.525
HAND HELD WATER DRILUNG APPARATUS
Tom A. O'Hanlon, Tacoma; Peter L. Madonna, Redmond, and
Gearld F. Wallace, Federal Way, aU of Wash., assignors to
Flow Industries, Inc., Kent, Wash.
FUed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,797
Int. a.} E21B 7/J8
U.S. a 175-218 ,0.1^
1. A drill for drilling hard materials comprising:
an inlet connectable to a source of high pressure fluid; and,
a high pressure swivel connected to said inlet for allowing
roution relative to said inlet; and,
a nozzle for forming high pressure cutting jets when sup-
plied with high pressure fluid; and,
a supply tube connecting said high pressure swivel and said
nozzle for supplying said nozzle with high pressure fluid;
and,
motor means for rotating said nozzle; and
flushing means for removing chips from any hole bored by
said drill; and,
means connecting said flushing means to the outside of said
supply tube.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1057
4,437,526
MILLING TOOL FOR FORMING RECESSES IN
MASONRY, CONCRETE AND SIMILAR MATERUL
STRUCTURES
Peter Gioor, ZoUikerberg, Switzerland, assignor to HUti Aktien-
gcsellschaft, Scfaaan, Uechtenstein
FUed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 327,045
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 8,
1980, 3046190
Int. a.J E21B 9/24
U.S. a. 175-346 g Claims
mg units including a single weighing cradle, at least two hold-
mg hoppers, memories corresponding to said holding hoppers
respectively, means for distributing the content of said cradle
to each of said hoppers, and means for writing the weight
signal corresponding to the content of said cradle into each of
said memories before said content is distributed to said hopper,
said combination selecting circuit including a circuit for pro-
1. Milling tool for forming a recess, such as an undercut in a
borehole, in structures made of masonry, concrete and similar
materials, comprising an axially elongated tool shaft, a milling
head mounted on said tool shaft, said milling head having
cutting edge members located on the outside surface thereof,
wherein the improvement comprises an axially elongated bear-
ing pin extending axially outwardly from said tool shaft with
the axis thereof disposed parallel to and offset laterally from
the axis of said tool shaft, said milling head is mounted on an
extends around said bearing pin outwardly from said tool shaft
and said milling head is freely routable about said bearing pin,
said milling head has a bore formed therein into which said
bearing pin fits, the diameter of the bore in said milling head
being greater than the outside diameter of said bearing pin, and
the point on said bearing pin spaced most remote from the axis
of said tool shaft defining, during rotation of said tool shaft, an
envelope curve which projects beyond the cross-section of the
bore within said milling head at least at one location, the di-
mension of the eccentricity of the axis of said bearing pin
relative to the axis of said tool shaft is in the range of 5 to 25%
of the working diameter of said milling head defined by the
outside diameter of the cutting edge members on said milling
head.
4,437,527
COMBINATION WEIGHING MACHINE
Michinobu Omae, Akashi, and TakasU Hirano, Kobe, both of
Japan, assignors to Yamato Scale Company, Ltd., Hyogo,
Japan
Filed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,326
Int a.J GOIG 19/32
VS. a. 177-25 3 CMm
1. A combination weighing machine comprising a plurality
of weighing units each weighing a plurality of articles and
producing weight signals indicative of the weighte thereof
respectively, a common collecting chute, and a combination
selecting circuit for receiving said weight signals, summing
them in accordance with predetermined mathematical combi-
nations and electing a specific combination providing a sum
which satisfies a predetermined condition, each of said weigh-
ducmg a set of output signals which specify said memories
which have provided those weight signals constituting said
combination satisfying said predetermined conditions, and said
machine further including first gating means for responding to
said output signals to discharge the contents of said holding
hoppers corresponding to said specified memones into said
collecting chute.
4,437,528
VEHICLE WITH VARIABLE UNDERCARRIAGE
GEOMETRY
Wolfgang Koehler, KarUruhe; Hans-Joachim Blocher, Metzin-
gen, and Eberbard Weiss, Pfullingen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Kemforschunpzentrum Karlsruhe, Karls-
ruhe, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 387,971
Qtims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, No». 25.
1981, 3146661
Int. a.} B62D 53/00
U.S. a. 180-9.5 4 cuUto
C=:S4]0
1. A vehicle with variable undercarriage geometry, compris-
ing: a vehicle body, at least two elongated undercarriage sup-
port beams pivoully linked to said body, each having propul-
sion means associated therewith, a pivot motor mounted on
said vehicle body and extending into said undercarriage coaxi-
ally with the pivoting axis of the associated support beam and
being operatively connected to the associated support beam for
pivoting said support beam, and a drive motor mounted on said
support beam and having an output operatively associated
with said propulsion means for operating said propulsion
means to propel said vehicle, both pivot and drive motors
being disposed essentially within the outline of said undercar-
riages.
1058
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,529
DETACHABLE HINGE ASSEMBLY
Mark R. Fralisb, BerUn, Wis., assignor to IngersoU Equipment
Co., Inc., Winneconne, Wis.
FUed May 3, 1M2, Ser. No. 373,870
Int a? B62D 25/10
VS. a. 180-69 C 8 Clainu
direction transverse to the directions of extent of said axle
shafts and support structure for supporting said differen-
tial mechanism on said housing frame; and,
(e) connecting means for detachably securing said differen-
tial mechanism to said housing frame.
4,437,531
ELECTRICAL POWER STEERING SYSTEM
Sumio Urabe, Shiga, Japan, assignor to Toyo Umpanki Co., LtiL,
Osaka, Japan
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,793
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 25, 1981, 56-152407
Int. a.3 B62D 5/04
U.S. a. 180-79.1 11 Claims
5. A detachable hinge assembly for mounting a hood relative
to the frame of a tractor comprising a first, generally L-shaped
member secured to the hood, a second, generally Z-shaped
member secured to the frame of the tractor, said L-shaped
member defining an opening in its vertical leg portion and a
second opening in its horizontally extending leg portion, said
Z-shaped member comprising a first leg extending into the'
opening of said upwardly extending leg portion of the first
member and a second leg disposed through the opening in said
second leg portion of the first member, the openings in said
L-shaped member and the corresponding leg portions in said
Z-shaped member being defined so that the movement of the
hood is restricted in the upper and sidewise directions relative
to the frame member of the tractor.
4,437,530
VEHICLE AXLE ASSEMBLY
Simon A. De Young, Lyndhurst, and Charles C. Gray, Chardon,
both of Ohio, assignors to Euclid, Inc., Qeveland, Ohio
PCT No. PCT/US81/00094, § 371 Date Jul. 16, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 16, 1982
PCT Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 417,764
Int. a.J B60B 35/16; F16H 35/00
U.S. a. 180-75 17 Qaims
8. A driving axle assembly comprising:
(a) a differential mechanism;
(b) first and second axle shafts driven from said differential
mechanism and projecting therefrom;
(c) first and second spindle assemblies surrounding and
supporting respective projecting portions of said first and
second axle shafts;
(d) a housing frame disposed between and fued to said
spindle assemblies, said housing frame defining a differen-
tial mechanism receiving opening within which said dif-
ferential mechanism is disposed, said opening oriented in a
1. An electrical power steering system comprising:
a steering wheel;
a first shaft having an axis and coupled to sttid steering wheel
for rotation therewith;
a second shaft axially aligned with said first shaft;
coupling means for coupling said first and second shafts for
at least limited relative rotation from a neutral position
with respect to one another;
linearly movable means for moving linearly in response to
relative rotation of said first and second shafts from said
neutral position;
detection means for detecting the amount of linear move-
ment of said linearly movable means and providing a
detection signal proportional to the amount of said linear
movement; and
servo means responsive to said detection signal for rotating
said second shaft until said neutral position is obtained.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1059
4,437,532
STEERING FORCE CONTROLLER FOR A POWER
STEERING DEVICE
KcUchi Nakamura, Kariya; Kyoauke Haga, Anjo, and Yutaka
Mori, Toyokawa, all of Japan, aaaignors to Toyoda Koki
Kabufhiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Filed Jun. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 393,350
Clainu priority, application Japan, Jul. 13, 1981, 56-109644
Int. a.) B62D 5/06
VS. a. 180-142 8 c,„„.
signal to said braking means, and a sensor which has first and
second sensor output terminals and is operable to deliver at
said first sensor output terminal an angular misalignment signal
representing the angle between the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle and said guideline and to deliver at said second sensor
output terminal an actual departure signal representing the
actual lateral departure of a predetermined point of the longi-
tudinal center line of the vehicle from said guideline,
the improvement residing in that said circuit arrangement
comprises
a processor having a first input terminal adapted to be con-
nected to said first sensor output terminal, a second input
terminal adapted to be connected to said second sensor
output terminal, a third input terminal, and a constant-
defining circuit defining a constant which depends on the
contour of said vehicle in plan view and on said maximum
emergency stopping disunce.
wwwwvwwwwww
=&-"
1. A steering force controller for a power steering device
having a fiuid control system, comprising:
a linear solenoid valve provided in said fluid control system
of said power steering device for controlling an output
torque relative to an input torque;
an input torque sensor for detecting a value of said input
torque applied to said power steering device;
an output torque sensor for detecting a value of said output
torque generated by said power steering device;
auxiliary input sensing means for detecting a value of at least
one auxiliary control input;
control circuit means connected to said input torque sensor,
said output torque sensor and said auxiliary input sensing
means for obtaining an objective output torque value
based upon said input torque value and said at least one
auxiliary control input value and further, for calculating a
control output value based upon said objective output
torque value and said detected output torque value; and
solenoid drive means connected to said control circuit means
and said linear solenoid valve for controlling said linear
solenoid valve in response to said control output value
applied from said circuit means, whereby said output
torque generated by said power steering device is con-
trolled to follow said objective output torque value.
4,437,533
SYSTEM FOR MONITORING THE COURSE AND FOR
CONTROLLING THE BRAKING OF A FREELY
MOVABLE VEHICLE, PARTICULARLY AN
INDUCnVELY STEERED VEHICLE, AND VEHICLE
WITH SUCH A SYSTEM
Hartwig Bicrkarre, Hamburg; Gottfried Klinger, Bad Brara-
stadt; Jttrgen Radeloff, Norderatedt, and Bcmd-Hendrik Rust,
Kayhttde, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaiignon to Firma
Jungheinrich Untcmehmentuerwaltung KG, Hamburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 338,904
ClaioM priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 18.
1981, 3110499
Int a.) B62D 1/24
VS. a. 180-168 22 Claims
1. In a circuit arrangement for initiating an emergency brak-
ing operation of a vehicle traveling along a guideline which
extends at the center of a path defined by obstacles on at least
one side, which vehicle comprises a steerable driven wheel,
means defining a maximum steering angle for said driven
wheel, travel drive means for driving said driven wheel, brak-
ing means arranged to effect an emergency braking of said
vehicle within a predetermined maximum emergency stopping
dbtance in response to the delivery of an emergency braking
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
a maximum departure signal generator connected to said
third input terminal and operable to deliver to said third
input terminal a maximum departure signal representing a
maximum lateral departure of a predetermined point on
said longitudinal center line from said guideline in depen-
dence on said maximum steering angle and the width of
said path of travel
said processor being operable to compute a maximum 'per-
missible lateral departure of said predetermined point of
said longitudinal center line from said guideline in depen-
dence on said actual lateral departure signal, said maxi-
mum departure signal, said angular misalignment signal,
and said consunt, and to deliver to said braking means
said emergency signal when said maximum permissible
lateral departure exceeds said actual lateral departure by
less than a predetermined value.
4,437,534
SNOW VEHICLE
James E. Grinde, Anoka, Minn., assignor to Yamaha Hatsudoki
Kabusbiki Kaisha, Iwata, Japan
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,946
Int. a.i B62M 27/02
VS. a. 180-190 36 Claims
1. A small, lightweight vehicle having frame means, a front
ski supported for steering movement by said frame means, an
endless driving belt, power means, carried by said frame means
for driving said driving belt, said driving belt having a drive
1060
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
portion thereof positioned for engaging the terrain over which
said vehicle is operated for driving said vehicle therealong, the
improvement comprising suspension means for supporting said
drive belt and said frame means for relative pivotal movement
about an axis that extends generally longitudinally of said
frame means so that an operator may lean said frame means
relative to said driving belt without changing the area of en-
gagement between said driving belt and the terrain, said axis
being defined by a pair of spaced pivot points that lie within
the area encompassed by said drive belt.
4,437,535
THREE.TRACK MOTORCYCLE WITH CAMBERING
MAIN FRAME
Frank J. Winchell, Orange Lake, and Klaus O. Winkelmann,
Troy, both of Mich., assignors to General Motors Corpora-
tion, Detroit, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 182,751, Aug. 29, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 402,220
Int. a.^ B62D 61/08
U.S. a. 180-215 7 aaims
said wheel, an outer ring (2) provided with a fixing nange (4)
for fixing to a wheel suspension strut, and a pair of rings (6) of
rolling elements (7) interposed between said rings (2,5) and
able to roll on tracks (8,10,11) on said rings (2,5), said inner ring
(5) being rigidly mounted on a shaft (38) provided with a
shoulder (41) for axially fixing said inner ring (5), wherein said
inner ring (5) has at its opposite ends a first (42) and a second
(35) conical surface respectively, these surfaces being coaxial
and directed in opposite directions, said first conical surface
(42) being engageable with a complementary third conical
surface (43) formed on said shoulder (41) coaxially with re-
1. A three- wheel cambering vehicle comprising a front
steenng fork assembly rotatable about an inclined steering axis,
a steerable front road wheel mounted on the lower extremity
of said fork assembly for rotation about an axis transverse to
said steering axis, manual steering means fixed to an upper
portion of said fork assembly, a cambering main frame having
a forward support mounting said steering fork assembly for
pivotal movement about said steering axis, a rear carriage,
forward and rearward pivots pivotally supporting said cam-
bering main frame for left and right cambering movement with
respect to said rear carriage about a centralized roll axis, a pair
of laterally spaced road wheels operatively supporting said
rear carriage, vehicle engine means for driving said rear
wheels and rigidly secured to and extending^ forwardly from
said rear carriage to form a forward portion thereof, said
forward pivot supported by and extending forwardly of said
engine means, said cambering frame having a forward portion
pivotally mounted on said forward pivot, said cambering frame
extending upwardly and rearwardly from said forward pivot
over said engine and rear carriage into connection with said
rearward pivot, a seat on said cambering main frame for sup-
porting a vehicle operator and laterally spaced footrest means
secured to said rear carriage for receiving the feet of said
operator when seated on said seat to permit said operator to
directly use said engine means and rear carriage as a ground
and instinctively balance said main frame when cambered.
spect to a cylindrical surface (44) coaxial to said shaft (38)
including at one end (45) of the said shaft (38), a centering ring
(49) mounted coaxially with respect to said cylindrical surface
(44) and being provided with a complementary fourth conical
surface (50) engageable with said second conical surface (35),
axial thrust means (51) for pressing against and holding said
centering ring (49) in position on said shaft (38).
5. A support assembly (1) according to claim 1, wherein said
shaft (38) is integrally formed with a ball joint (47) operable to
transmit a couple from a half-shaft of said vehicle to said shaft
(38).
4,437,537
VEHICLE FOR SUPPORTING HANDICAPPED
OCCUPANTS
Donald L. Ausmus, 14131 E. 39th Ter„ Independence, Mo.
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,353
Int. a? B62D 61/06; A61G 5/04
U.S. a. 180-313 WOainu
4,437,536
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY FOR VEHICLE WHEELS
Franco Colanzi, and Vittorio Donn, both of Turin, Italy, assign-
on to RIV-SKF Offidae, Turin, Italy
FUed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 372,962
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, May 18, 1981, 67655 A/81
Int a.3 B60B 37/00: B60K 17/22
U.S. a. 18(V-254 15 Claims
1. A support assembly (1) for a wheel of a vehicle, particu-
larly for a driving wheel of a road vehicle, comprising at least
one inner ring (5) provided with a flange (29) for fixing to the
1. An occupant operated motor driven vehicle for support-
ing a handicapped occupant, such as, a paraplegic, comprising
in combination:
(a) a vehicle comprising a frame supported on at least one
front wheel and at least one rear wheel and including
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1061
structure for supporting a handicapped occupant in said
vehicle;
(b) at least one support foot rotatably attached to said vehi-
cle adapted to swing forwardly of said vehicle and contact
the vehicle support surface for supporting said vehicle in
a forward tilt when said foot is locked in stationary posi- ^•^' CI- 181—145
tion;
(c) support foot positioning means connected between said
foot and said frame operative to position said foot at vari- .
ous angles to said vehicle;
(d) occupant operated driving means for operating said
support foot positioning means to position said foot at
various angles to said vehicle, and
(e) means for locking said foot in a desired angular position
to support said vehicle and occupant in a forward angular
position.
4,437,539
SPEAKER ENCLOSURE
Lawrence M. Festa, 238 C^on St., Laguna Beach, CaUf. 92651
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,540
Int. a.' H05K 5/00
7 Claims
4,437,538
EAR-CAP
Ingemar Ohisson, Katarinaviigen 18, Stockholm, Sweden S-116
45, and Sten J. L. Wolf, Dinviksviigen 1, Ronninge, Sweden
S-144 00
Filed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,460
Int. CV A61F 11/02: H04R 25/00
U.S. a. 181-129 9 Claims
1. Ear protecting means for protecting the auditory canal of
the ear from sound vibrations within a predetermined fre-
quency range comprising:
an earcap including sound absorbing means for absorbing
sound of said predetermined frequency and sound trans-
mitting means for transmitting ambiant sount vibrations to
said auditory canal and to said sound absorbing means,
a housing for said earcap having a recessed portion there-
within,
said sound absorbing means comprising a sound-damping
cavity within said earcap for damping sound of said prede-
termined frequency, said cavity being defined by the
recessed portion of said housing and a perforated disc
element having perforations adapted for admitting sound
of said predetermined frequency to said cavity for damp-
ing therewithin; and
said sound transmitting means comprising an ear cushion of
sound-transmitting material having an inner surface
adapted to bear on the outer auditory canal of the ear and
an outer surface disposed against the perforated portion of
said perforated disc element so that sound vibrations en-
tering the auditory canal must first pass through said
cushion of sound transmitting material and so that sound
vibrations of said predetermined frequency passing
through said cushion also pass through said perforated
disc element into said cavity for damping therewithin.
1. A speaker enclosure adapted for use with a speaker system
including a bass speaker, a mid-range speaker, and a tweeter,
said speaker enclosure comprising:
a housing having oppositely disposed side walls, top and
bottom walls, a rear wall, and a front wall;
said front wall being formed having a plurality of sections,
including at least an upper section and a lower section,
which are angularly disposed relative to each other;
a bass-reflex port formed in said lower section;
a mid-range port formed in said upper section;
an intermediate partition positioned within said housing;
said intermediate partition defining a rear bass-reflex cham-
ber in which said bass speaker is mounted, whereby low
bass-frequency tones from said bass speaker are transmit-
ted through said bass-reflex port which communicates
with said bass-reflex chamber; and
a forward mid-range chamber, said mid-range speaker being
mounted to said intermediate partition, whereby mid-
range-frequency tones are transmitted into said mid-range
chamber and through said communicating mid-range port;
said tweeter being mounted to said front wall so as to emit
high-frequency tones outwardly from said enclosure.
4,437,540
LOUD-SPEAKER
Naoyuki Murakami, and Hiroshi Zyo, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Naoyuki Murakami, Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 192,187, Sep. 30, 1980, Pat. No. 4^1,346.
This application Mar. 7, 1983, Ser. No. 472,958
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 4, 1979, 54-127325;
Aug. 30, 1980, 55-120187
Int. a.) H05K 5/00
U.S. a. 181-147 2 Claims
1. A loudspeaker, comprising:
(a) a casing for accommodating therein speaker units, said
casing being enclosed, except for an open front part, by
four side walls and a back wall;
(b) a sounding horn provided in the open front pari of said
casing, said sounding horn having a throat opening lying
1062
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
in a plane substantially parallel to said back side wall and
being symmetrical about a line perpendicular to said back
side wall;
(c) a plurality of speaker fitting panels mounted around and
behind said throat at an angle to the plane of said throat
diverging in the direction of said throat, the forward edges
of said fitting panels defining a plane coincident with the
plane of the throat opening, and a back fitting panel
mounted on said speaker fitting panels, parallel to said
back side wall, behind said throat; and
(d) a plurality of speaker units intensively mounted on said
speaker fitting panels around and behind said throat open-
ing, and a back speaker unit mounted on the said back
fitting panel, the total area of the entire diaphragms of said
speaker units being substantially equal to, or larger than,
the area of said throat opening, the sound wave radiating
direction of said speaker units mounted on said speaker
fitting panels' being concentrated on a single imaginary
point behind the plane of said throat opening, hence
within the ambit of the space defined by said speaker
fitting panels and on the said line perpendicular to the
back about which the said throat opening is symmetrical,
and the sound wave radiation direction of said back
speaker unit being along said line.
portions of said panels being provided with kerfs for respec-
tively receiving portions of said spline, each of said panels
having a fabric adhered to a front face thereof and cut Hush
with the longitudinal edge portions thereof but nevertheless
concealing the joint between the abutting front longitudinal
4,437,541
CONTROLLED DISPERSION SPEAKER
CONnCURATION
Skip D. L. Cross, P.O. Box 2410, Alexandria, Va.
Filed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,101
Int. a.3 H05K 5/00
U.S. a. 181—151
edge portions, the fabric being formed of non-woven staple
fibers needle-punched in a first needle-punching operation, the
fabric having linear ribs formed in another needle-punching
operation, and the ribs extending longitudinally of the mounted
panels.
4,437 543
CONTROL SYSTEM FORCAGE SUPPORTED BY
ARTICULATED BOOM
6 Qaims **""' ^°^"' LoretteyiUe; Paul Michaud, Ancienne-Lorette, and
Martin Pemicka, Loretterille, aU of Canada, aisignors to
Poudrier Frere Ltee, Quebec, Canada
FUed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,516
Int. a.J B66F 11/04
U.S.a.182-2 9cudai«
1. A speaker comprising:
an enclosure formed by first and second parallel, spaced-
apart, planar baffies, said enclosure being acoustically
open on at least two sides;
first speaker means mounted to said first baffle;
acoustically absorptive material secured between said first
and second baffles; and
the spacing between said first and second spaced-apart baf-
fles is less than one-fourth of the wavelength of the highest
frequency to be reproduced by said speaker system.
4,437,542
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANEL AND MOUNTING SYSTEM
Raymond W. Yeager, Pataskala, and Mark R. Weitzman, To-
ledo, botii of Ohio, assignors to Owens-Coming Fiberglas
Corporation, Toledo, Ohio
FUed Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,797
Int a.3 E04B 1/82
UA a. 181-290 19 Claims
1. An acoustical treatment for a wall comprising an elon-
gated generally H-shaped spline mounted on the wall in paral-
lel relationship thereto and a pair of elongated generally rect-
angular sound absorbent panels mounted on the wall in cooper-
ative engagement with said spline respectively on opposite
sides thereof and in abutting relationship with each other at
front longitudinal edge portions thereof, the longitudinal edge
1. A control system for a personnel carrier attached to a
boom which is displaceable by pressure fluid, said control
system comprising three hand operable control handles axially
rotatable in a limited clockwise or counter-clockwise direction
to cause said boom to be elevated or lowered respectively, a
control valve associated with each of said control valve associ-
ated with each of said control handles and having at least one
adjustable pressure fluid control component therein to control
the displacement of said boom, a movable linkage secured at
one end to each of said control handles and at an opposed end
to said fluid control component whereby rotation of said con-
trol handles causes displacement of said control component to
regulate said pressure fluid which in turn controls the displace-
ment of said boom, said boom being a two-section articulated
boom, two of said handles being horizontally mounted for an
operator's right and left hand, each of said two handles con-
trolling the displacement of a respective one of said boom
sections, and a third of said control handles being vertically
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1063
mounted and controlling the rotational displacement of a turret
base onto which said boom is secured whereby to displace said
boom along an arc of a circle.
4437 544
SERVICE PLATFORM FOR A LADDER
Harold R. Anderson, Winchester, and Roland M. Hamilton,
Groton, both of Mass., auignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Air Force.
Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 468,628
Int. a.i E06C 7/16. 7/14
\3S. a. 182-120 9 ciij^
platform, both side members being pivotably connected to
the underside surface of said top platform;
a support frame including two support side members joined
together at one end in a V-shaped configuration with an
apex at one end and two separated members at the other
end, the two separated members being pivoubly mounted
to the underside of said top platform, said support frame
further including a V-shaped block rigidly mounted be-
tween the two support side members at the apex;
a leveling bar including an elongated member with an arcu-
ate shape, said leveling bar being pivoubly mounted at its
center point on the apex of the support frame with the
ends of the leveling bar extending beyond the apex;
a raised platform rigidly mounted on the outside of the two
support members above the V-shaped block;
an adjustment bar including an elogated bar with a slot along
its centerline located toward one end of the adjustment
bar said adjustment bar being pivotably mounted at its
other end on the leveling bar approximately midway
between the one end of said leveling bar and the center
point of the leveling bar;
a bolt means rigidly mounted in said raised platform and
slidably mounted in the slot of the adjustment bar; and
a nut means threadably engaging said bolt means for secur-
ing said adjustment bar in a fixed position.
1. A service platform for a ladder comprising:
a frame upon which a user stands;
a pair of extended arms fixedly attached to said frame, said
extended arms having rung slots therein for receiving a
ladder rung;
a bearing attached to each of said extended arms, said bear-
ing having a slot therein for receiving said ladder rung;
a support lever attached to each of said bearings, said sup-
port levers having a rung slot therein for receiving said
ladder rung and bore means therethrough; and
a support bar attached to said support levers through said
bores means.
4,437,546
FIRE ESCAPE DEVICE
Gerald P. Marinoff, 8 Rockford Dr., West Nyack. N.Y. 10994,
and W. Dorwin Teague, Nyack, N.Y., assignors to Gerald P.
Marinoff, West Nyack, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,882
Int. a.J A62B 1/12
U.S. a. 182-233 9 ciaimM
4,437,545
STEP LADDER
Erneit Pardee, Newport, N.Y., assignor to Charles Mankouski.
MiddleriUc, N.Y.
FUed Not. 30, 1981. Ser. No. 325,983
Int a.} E06C 7/44
\}S. a. 182—171 2 Claims
1. A step ladder for use on an uneven surface, comprising:
a top platform including a generally rectangularly-shaped
member with an imderside surface;
a step frame including two step side members and a plurality
of cross members located between the two side members
and being rigidly affixed thereto, each cross member being
located substantially parallel to one another and to the top
1. A fire escape device comprising a housing, a reel jour-
nalled for rotational movement within said housing, a cable
fixed at one end thereof to said reel being wound upon said reel
with the other end thereof extending through an opening in
said housing, means carried by said housing for connecting said
device to a fixed position on an elevated structure, harness
means carried at the free end of said cable for supporting a
human body, a sump reservoir within said housing, positive
displacement fluid pump means carried by said housing for
pumping fluid from said sump reservoir through an orifice, said
pump means having a rotor, means coupling the rotor of said
pump with said reel for retarding and impeding free routional
movement of said reel and at a controlled rate of speed in
direct proportion to the amount of fluid being pumped through
said orifice, said means coupling the rotor of said pump with
said reel comprises a ring gear carried by said reel for roution
therewith, a shaft joumalled for rotation within said housing
1064
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
and coupled with the rotor of said pump for driving said rotor
when said shaft is routed in a first direction, and a planetary
gear system coupled between said ring gear and said shaft for
causing rotation of said shaft in said first direction when said
reel is rotated in a direction for unwinding of said cable, free
wheeling bearing means joumalling said shaft so that when
said shaft is rotated in a second direction opposite to said first
direction, said rotor will not be driven, and a cover plate
mounted over the exit port of said pump, said orifice being
formed in said cover plate, and wherein said orifice is dimen-
sioned so as to control the rate of fiow of fiuid therethrough
and thereby the rate or retardation of said reel, whereby the
rate of retardation of said reel is independent of the viscosity of
said fluid.
4,437 547
FRICTION LINING WEAR INDICATORS FOR
SHOE-DRUM BRAKES
George A. Harmer, Solihull, England, assignor to Lucas Indus-
tries Limited, Birniinghun, England
Division of Ser. No. 116,668, Jan. 29, 1980, Pat. No. 4,344,509.
This application Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,276
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 15. 1979
7905321
Int. a.J F16D 66/02
U.S. a. 188-1.11 ,2 aalms
1. A friction lining wear indicator for a brake shoe of a
shoe-drum brake, said brake shoe including a platform and a
friction Immg carried by said platform for engagement with a
rotatable drum, said platform having axial edges and a depres-
sion formed in one of said axial edges by displacement of a
portion of said one edge in a radial direction away from said
fnction lining, said friction lining having a first face for engage-
ment with said platform and a second face for engagement
with said drum, a portion of said first face of said friction lining
in the region of said displaced portion of said edge being un-
modified, said friction lining wear indicator comprising a sen-
sor mounted on said brake shoe, an indicating means adapted
to be actuated when the thickness of said friction lining is less
than a predetermined value, mounting means for mounting said
sensor on said shoe, said mounting means being located in said
depression, and retaining means associated with said mounting
means for co-operating with said shoe to retain said sensor in a
position of use adjacent said lining.
4,437,548
SHOCK ABSORBER
Maiahiro Ashlba, Kanagawa, Japui, assignor to Tokico Ltd.,
Kawasaki, Japan
Contiaaation of Ser. No. 240,791, Mar. 5, 1981, abandoned. This
application Jun. 16, 1983, Ser. No. 503,650
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 12, 1980, 55-
32192[U]
Int a.J F16F 9/i42
"f?u"r^ 21 Claims
1. A shock absorber, comprising:
a hollow outer cylinder having an open and a closed end;
a hollow inner cylinder having an open and a closed end, the
open end thereof being inserted into the open end of the
outer cylinder;
a guide member for guiding the inner cylinder slidably in the
outer cylinder in the axial direction of the cylinders;
a first annular plate having a first annular surface and an
opposing second annular surface, said first annular plate
being abutted against the open end of said inner cylinder
at the first surface thereof;
a shearable stop plate in the form of an annulus, said stop
plate having a first annular surface and an opposing sec-
ond annular surface, and being abutted against an inner
periphery of the second surface of the first annular plate at
an outer periphery of the first surface thereof;
a second annular plate having a first annular surface and an
opposing second annular surface, said second annular
plate having a slightly smaller outer diameter than the
inner diameter of said first annular plate, and being abut-
ted against an inner periphery of the second surface of the
stop plate at an outer periphery of the first surface thereof;
a cylindrical damping force generating member for generat-
ing a damping force, said damping force generating mem-
ber having a first end face abutted against the second
surface of said second annular plate, a second end face
opposing the first end face, and an axially penetrating
onfice at a radially central portion thereof so as to throttle
the now of hydraulic fiuid from a chamber in the outer
cylinder to a chamber in the inner cylinder, the penetrat-
ing orifice of the damping force generating member being
smaller than apertures of said first and second annular
plates and of said stop plate; and
a tubular supporting member fixed to the inner cylinder near
the open end thereof, said supporting member presenting
an axial bore penetrating said supporting member and
adapted for receiving said damping force generating mem-
ber and said second annular plate therewithin, such that
said damping force generating member and said second
annular plate may be axially guided toward said stop plate,
and said supporting member having an annular end face at
its inner periphery abutted against the outer periphery of
the second surface of said stop plate so as to hold an outer
periphery of said stop plate in cooperation with said first
annular plate, such that the stop plate is adapted in such a
manner that, when an impact shock given to the shock
absorber to contract it is not greater than a predetermined
magnitude, the stop plate retains the damping force gener-
ating member in the axial bore of the supporting member
at the inner periphery of the second surface of said stop
plate against a force not greater than a predetermined
magnitude axially exerted to the damping force generating
member in response to the shock, and that, when an im-
pact shock given to the shock absorber to contract it is
greater than the predetermined magnitude, the stop plate
is sheared off in a generally circular shape at a portion
between the held outer periphery which is supported by
said first annular plate at the first face of the stop plate and
an inner periphery by a force greater than the predeter-
mined magnitude axially exerted on the inner periphery of
the second surface of said stop plate from the damping
force generating member through said second annular
plate in response to the shock, such that the damping force
generating member is detached from the axial bore of the
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
106S
supporting member and moved into the inner cylinder
permitting the hydraulic fluid in the chamber of the outer
cylinder to fiow substantially freely into the chamber of
the inner cylinder through the penetrating bore of the
supporting member.
4,437,550
INDUSTRIAL VEHICLE DRIVING APPARATUS
Koji Nozawa, Higashikunime, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,820
Gaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 12, 1980, 55-126809
Int. a.3 B60K 41/24, 41/28
U.S. a. 192—324
4 Claims
4,437,549
SUITCASE
Richard B. Gibbs, 11548 Thurston ar., Los Angeles, Calif.
90049
Filed Mar. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 128,635
Int. a.^ A45C 7/00
U.S. a. 190—109 1 Qaim
1. A suitcase for supporting and carrying personal belong-
ings comprising:
(a) coextensive spaced-apart first and second panel means;
(b) means circumscribing said first and second panel means
to define an interior region;
(c) a generally firm pad means disposed within said interior
region between the spaced-apart first and second panel
means;
(d) a textile non-elastic skirt having an interior border joined
to the border of the pad means and an exterior border
fastened to the interior wall of said means circumscribing
the panel means at a location closer to said first panel
means than to said second panel means, said pad means
and skirt dividing said interior region into first and second
compartments, said skirt having a width between its inte-
rior and exterior borders greater than the normal distance
from the border of said pad means to said interior wall
such that when said first panel means is uppermost, said
pad means is suspended by said skirt in a first position
approximately midway between said first and second
panel means so that said first and second compartments
have comparable volumes, said pad means being movable
upwardly from said first position to a second position
against said first panel means to be substantially flush
therewith thus providing said second compartment with
almost the entire volume of both compartments; and
(e) means for "providing access to each compartment,
whereby when said pad means is in said first position,
clothing and articles can be packed in said first compart-
ment and held by said pad means and skirt in the upper
half of said interior region whether or not said second
compartment is empty or full, and whereby when said pad
means is in said second position, identical dthough smaller
suitcases can be received in said second compartment in
nesting relationship.
1. A driving apparatus for an industrial vehicle comprising:
(a) a torque converter;
(b) a transmission;
(c) a torque converter housing for protecting said torque
converter, said torque converter housing defining a space
therein;
(d) a transmission housing for protecting said transmission,
said transmission housing being connected in series with
said torque converter housing;
(e) an output shaft of said transmission, one end of said
output shaft being disposed within the space defined by
said torque converter housing; and
(0 a center brake device for applying a braking force to said
output shaft, said center brake device being disposed at
the end of said output shaft housed within the space de-
fined by said torque converter housing.
4,437,551
HYDRODYNAMIC TORQUE CONVERTER
Joachim Gimmler, Dittelbrunn, and Bcmd Scbfider, Miianer-
stadt, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Fichtel A
Sachs AG, Schweinfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 285,985
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 7,
1980, 3029860
Int. a.3 F16H 45/02
U.S. O. 192—3.28 6 Claims
1. Hydrodynamic torque converter comprising a converter
housing, a pump wheel, a turbine wheel and a guide wheel
located within said housing, said pump wheel, turbine wheel
and guide wheel interact in a fluid cycle and are rotatable
relative to one another, said pump wheel and said turbine
wheel have a torque transmission path between them, a con-
trollable bridging clutch arranged between said pump wheel
and said turbine wheel and disposed in parallel relation to the
torque transmission path therebetween, a torsional vibration
spring damper located in the torque transmission path of said
bridging clutch, wherein the improvement comprises a friction
damper connected in parallel to said torsional vibration spring
damper, said pump wheel is fixed to said converter housing,
said converter housing having an end face forming a clutch
countersurface, said bridging clutch includes a clutch disc
coaxial with and axially slidable relative to said turbine wheel,
said clutch disc is rouuble over a limited angle of rotation
relative to said turbine wheel, said clutch disc is positioned
between said turbine wheel and said end face of said converter
housing, said torsional vibration spring damper includes sev-
eral springs distributed over the periphery of said clutch disc,
stops on said turbine wheel and on said clutch disc projecting
1066
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
toward one another, said springs positioned between said
stops, said friction damper includes an axially elastic disc hav-
ing a radially inner region fixed to said turbine wheel, said
radially outer region having friction facings thereon, and said
axially elastic disc prestresses said clutch disc and is torsion-
resistant in the circumferential direction.
termined distance with their projections arranged close to
each other;
a change-over member capable of entering into and retract-
ing from the turning paths of said two springs, said
change-over member being shiftable between a position in
which it engages said projection of said first spring, a
position in which it engages said projection of said second
spring and another position in which it engages said pro-
jections of both springs, said change-over member being
arranged to cut off transmission of rotation of said driving
shaft to said driven members when the change-over mem-
ber is in each of said engaging positions;
a ring member connected to said projection of said first
spring, said ring member being provided with a plurality
of engaging parts for engagement with said change-over
member, said engaging parts being arranged on the outer
circumference of said ring member;
spring means for urging said change-over member in the
direction of engaging said second wrapped spring; and
a retaining ring which is arranged to be coupled with said
projection of said second wrapped spring to route to-
gether with said spring, said ring being provided with a
sht which is arranged to engage said change-over member
and with an end face for keeping said change-over mem-
ber in a position engaging said projection of said first
wrapped spring against said spring means until said
change-over member comes to engage said slit.
4,437,552
SPRING CLUTCH DEVICE .
Masamichi Toyama, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Japan
Filed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,321
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 24, 1980, 55-149657;
Dec. 17, 1980, 55-178604 * 4,437,553
Int a.3 F16D 21/04. 13/08; G03B 3/10 „„u,rt C^SS'J^k "'^ p^^^*^^'^"^^
- Hubert Geisthofr, Lohmar, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
U.S. a. 192—26
2 Claims jean Walterscheld GmbH, Lohmar, Fed. Rep. of Geniuuy
Filed Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 330,792
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Dec. 19
1980,3047891 r. ««. i*.
Int a? F16D 41/06. 41/12
U.S. a. 192-46 14 Claims
li »4 74 "i
1. A spring clutch device comprising:
a driving shaft connected to a drive source and arranged to
be rotatable;
a first driven member rototably supported around said driv-
ing shaft;
a second driven member supported to be concentrically
rotatable on the extension of said driving shaft;
a first wrapped spring wound into a coil like shape around
the outer circumference of said driving shaft, said spring
having one end thereof connected to said first driven
member and being arranged to transmit the rotation of
said driving shaft to said first driven member, said spring
being provided with a projection formed at the other end
thereof;
a second wrapped spring wound into a coil like shape
around the outer circumference of said driving shaft, said
spring having one end thereof connected to said second
driven member and being arranged to transmit the rou-
tion of said driving shaft to said second driven member,
said spnng being provided with a projection formed at the
other end thereof;
said first and second wrapped springs being wound in direc-
tions opposite to each other and being spaced at a prede-
1. A freewheeling clutch assembly comprising a driving
member, a driven member, clutch engaging means operatively
interposed between said driving and driven members to effect
driving engagement therebetween and to disengage said mem-
bers for free-wheeling operation when said driven member
overruns said driving member, and re-engagement means for
urging said clutch engagement means into driving engagement
between said driving and driven members, said clutch engage-
ment means comprising pawl means pivotally mounted on one
of said driving and driven members and ratchet means on the
other of said members adapted to be engaged and disengaged
by said pawl means, said re-engagement means comprising
resilient means affixed to said other of said driving and driven
members for pivoting said pawl means into driving engage-
ment with said ratchet means when said driving member com-
mences to overrun said driven member.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1067
4,437,554
FLUID SHEAR COUPLING APPARATUS
Paul J. Haeck, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to Household Manu-
facturing Inc., Prospect Heights, 111.
FUed Jua. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,211
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 13,
2000, has been dlMlaimed.
Int. a.J F16D 35/00, 43/25
VJS. a. 192—58 B 19 Claims
4,437,555
MULTIPLE DISK CLUTCH WITH SPRING CONTROL
UFT
Dagwin Tomm, Schweiafbrt, and Erich Scheer, Eaebenidorf,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Fichtel A Sachs
AG, Scbweiafurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Oct 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,741
Clainu priority, appUcatioB Fed. Rep. of Gcrmaoy, No?. 3,
1980, 3041341
Int. a? F16D 13/56. 13/75
U.S. a. 192— 70J1 11 daias
]3_i2
1. A fluid shear coupling apparatus which comprises:
a driving member including a disc-shaped poriion having a
front side and a rear side, the front side including a first
shear surface;
a driven member defining a working chamber within which
said driving member is received, said driven member
including a first shear surface configured and positioned
complementary to the first shear surface of said driving
member to define a fluid shear chamber therebetween and
cooperable with shear fluid in the fluid shear chamber to
transmit torque between said driving member and said
driven member;
mounting means for mounting said driven member to said
driving member and rotatable about a common axis;
a shear fluid reservoir;
first flow means for providing flow of shear fluid between
said reservoir and the working chamber;
second flow means, separate from the working chamber and
said reservoir, for providing flow of shear fluid from a
first, radially-outward location of the working chamber
directly to a second, radially-inward location of the work-
ing chamber when shear fluid is contained within the
working chamber, the second, radially-inward location
being radially within the fluid shear chamber; and
control means for providing at least a first condition during
which shear fluid moves through said first flow means
from said reservoir to the working chamber to cause
coupling of said driving member and driven member and
a second condition limiting shear fluid in the working
chamber to cause reduced coupling.
1. Multiple disk clutch, such as a double disk clutch, includes
a housing, a flywheel acting as a counter-pressure plate, an
intermediate plate spaced from said flywheel, a first clutch disk
positioned between said flywheel and intermediate plate, a
spring-loaded pressure plate spaced from said intermediate
plate on the opposite side thereof from said first clutch disk, a
second clutch disk positioned between said intermediate plate
and said pressure plate, said first and second clutch dislu ar-
ranged to be mounted on a shaft so that said disks route with
the shaft and are axially movable relative to the shaft, spring
means connected to said intermediate plate for lifting said
intermediate plate, said spring means including a lifting dis-
tance limiution device and an automatic readjustment device
functioning in accordance with the wear on said first clutch
disk, wherein the improvement comprises that said spring
means includes a spring member acting on said intermediate
plate in the direction of the engagement of the clutch while the
clutch is being engaged, a lifting spring for lifting said interme-
diate plate, said lifting disunce limiUtion device and readjust-
ment device located one behind the other and disposed in
parallel with said lifting spring, and said spring member having
at least one spring disposed parallel to said lifting spring and
connected to said pressure plate.
4,437,556
THROW-OUT BEARING FOR CLUTCHES, ESPECIALLY
FOR MOTOR VEHICLES
Manfred Brandenstein, Eussenheim, and Leo Miiller, Easlebca,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aasigDors to SKF Kugellager-
fabriken GmbH, Schweinfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,337
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 24,
1980, 8014056
Int. a.3 F16D 23/14
VJS. a. 192—98 15 Claims
75 K
1. In a throw-out bearing for clutches comprised of a guide
element held to a clutch or drive housing, a movable pari
having a bore within which the guide element extends, the
1068
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
bore having a diameter greater than that of the guide element,
the movable part being supported on the guide element by
flexible means, the improvement wherein said flexible means
comprises conical annular projection means extending from at
least one end of said movable part radially inwardly to the
guide element for supporting said movable part on the guide
e ement, said projection means being shaped to wipe said guide
element on relative axial movement between the movable part
and guide element.
4,437,557
COIN COLLECTION FOR VENDING MACHINES
Richard Kolbl. and Bemd MehJan, both of Henieden, Fed. Rep
of Germany, assignors to Sielaff GmbH A Co., Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 30, IMl, Ser. No. 307,294
19S*M37W6"*^' ""*"***^°" ^^ "•"• °' Germany, Oct. 8,
iBt a.3 G07F 9/00
U.S. a. 194-1 D ,0 Claims
lower inclined surface engageable by said hinged portion
during movement of said swivel plate from its coin release
position back to its rest position.
4^7,558
COIN DETECTOR APPARATUS
Raymond Nicholson, 817 Industrial Dr., Elmhurst, lU 60126
Mi'ch!49507°' '*"''*'■' *^* '*''""'* ^*' ^^^ ^"°'' "••"*^'
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 387,820, Jun. 14, 1982. This
application Jun. 8, 1983, Ser. No. 502,290
Int. a.J G07F 3/02
U.S. a. 194-97 R 7 ^^
1. A com collector for a vending machine having a credit
mdicator with a reset member movable to reset the credit
indicator and a coin return bolt movable through a full stroke
comprising:
means defining a coin return channel having an inlet for
receiving at least one coin;
a swivel plate pivotally mounted over said inlet having a rest
position obstructing a passage of the coins to said return
channel and a coin release position for opening said inlet-
means connecting said swivel plate to the return bolt for
transmitting motion of the return bolt to said swivel plate;
means connecting said swivel plate to the reset member for
moving the reset member with movement of said swivel
plate out of its rest position;
position control means associated with said swivel plate for
obstructing said inlet during a First portion of the full
stroke of movement of the return bolt as said swivel plate
IS moved out of its rest position to move the reset member
to reset the credit indicator and for orienting said swivel
plate into its coin release position with movement of the
return bolt through a remaining portion of its full stroke-
said means defining a coin return channel comprising a wall
defining an arcuate upper space above said swivel plate,
said swivel plate connected to a shaft rotetably mounted
to said wall, said swivel plate having opposite edges each
movable adjacent and along said wall in said arcuate
space;
said swivel plate including a hinged portion rototobly
mounted to a remainder of said swivel plate over said coin
return channel inlet and spaced from said shaft, a support
element connected to a bottom surface of said swivel plate
to support said hinged portion, a stop lever roUtobly
mounted to said wall having a stop surface engaged with
said hinged portion during said first portion of the full
stroke of the bolt and released from said stop face during
said remainder of the full stroke, said stop lever having a
1. In a coin tester for comparing a test coin to a sample coin,
including coil assembly means for creating a magnetic field
means for locating the sample coin within the magnetic field'
means for passing the test coin through the magnetic field, and
means for evaluating the quality of the null created by the test
com as It passes through the magnetic field, the improvement
comprising, single coin nolder locating means for establishing
a position for a portion of the periphery of the sample coin,
means associated with the locating means and the coil assembly
for relatively moving the holder and coil assembly to insert a
sample com and hold the sample coin in a predetermined
position, the sample holder means having a ramp surface for
guiding the test coin through the magnetic field, the angle of
the ramp surface being the same as for the sample coin, thereby
to cause the test coin to enter the magnetic field to the same
extent as the sample coin.
4 437 559
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REMOVING
NON-RECnnED CAPSULES FROM A CAPSULE
RECnnCATION AND TRANSPORT DEVICE
ClMrles E. Ackley, Sr., Oreland, and Charles E. Ackley, Jr.,
Philadelphia, both of Pa., assignors to R. W. Hartnett Com-
pany, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Sep. 1, 1978, Ser. No. 939,066
Int a.J B65G 47/24
U.S. CI. 198-397 22 Claims
1. In a capsule rectification apparatus adapted to rectify
capsules having body portions and having cap portions which
are of greater diameter than said body portions, and wherein
an introduction means is provided from which a multiplicity of
capsules may be introduced into said rectification apparatus,
and wherein a rectification means is disposed for rectifying
said capsules in dispositions in which the said cap portions, are
oriented toward one side of a predetermined path and in which
said body portions are oriented toward another side of the
predetermined path as said capsules are moved along said
predetermined path and wherein occasional capsules are some-
times improperly positioned in a non-rectified manner with
their cap and body positions reversed, the combination which
comprises:
(a) means positioned adjacent said predetermined path for
contactmg said improperly positioned capsules as they are
earned along said predetermined path; said means (a)
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1069
comprising pick-off means located adjacent said predeter-
mined path and engagement means for grasping said im-
properly positioned capsules, said engagement means
being shaped in such manner so as to grasp only improp-
erly positioned capsules while not being capable of grasp-
ing properly positioned capsules and said engagement
means comprises cap portions grasping means carried by
said pick-ofT means for grasping cap portions of non-recti-
fied capsules, wherein said cap portion grasping means
comprises a plurality of cut-out grasping elements spaced
apart from each other around the periphery of said pick
ofT means, said grasping elements being shaped and dimen-
sioned to firmly grasp a cap portion therein, but being
dimensioned such as to be incapable of grasping a body
portion therein, and wherein said pick-off means is posi-
tioned alongside a portion of said predetermined path
where the body portions of properly rectified capsules are
to be located, whereby said cap portions grasping means is
adapted to grasp any non-rectified capsule having its cap
portion disposed into the same direction as the body por-
tions of said properly rectified capsules and
"A ^ 1/
(b) means for removing said improperly positioned capsules
from said path, said removing means including a stripping
means for stripping capsules from said engagement means.
11. A method for transporting and rectifying capsules of the
type having body portions and having cap portions of greater
transverse dimension than said body portions, wherein said
capsules are arranged in a plurality of adjacent rows which
extend in a transport direction and wherein said capsules are
rectified in dispositions in which the cap portions of a row of
capsules face a predetermined direction and in which the body
portions of said capsules face in substantially opposite direc-
tion, and wherein capsules are sometimes improperly posi-
tioned in non-rectified manner with their cap and body por-
tions reversed,
the steps which comprise providing a capsule engagement
means, shaping said capsule engagement means in such
manner so as to grasp only non-rectified capsules while
being incapable of grasping said properly rectified cap-
sules, grasping said non-rectified capsules with said en-
gagement means and the grasped non-rectified capsules
from the array while allowing the properly rectified cap-
sules to continue in said array.
4,437,560
APPARATUS FOR CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF
TRANSPORT OF PAPER STACKS OR THE LIKE
Wolfram Wolf, Bilscn, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
E.C.H. Will (GmbH k Co.), Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,282
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 24,
1981, 3111415
Int. a. J B65G 47/26
U.S. a. 198—457 25 Gaims
1. Apparatus for changing the direction of transport of at
least some of a series of successive commodities, comprising a
first conveyor arranged to advance the commodities of said
series along a first path; a second conveyor arranged to ad-
vance commodities along a second path which is at least sub-
stantially coplanar with and is inclined with reference to said
first path; and means for transferring commoditiet^ from said
first path into said second path, including openable and clos-
able tongs rotatable about an axis which is adjacent to and
inclined relative to said paths, said tongs extending into por-
tions of said first and second paths, means for rotating said
tongs about said axis, and operating means for opening and
closing said tongs so that a commodity advancing along said
first path can enter said tongs before the tongs closes to trans-
fer the thus engaged commodity into said second path as a
result of rotation about said axis, said tongs compnsing a first
jaw and a second jaw disposed at a level above said first jaw.
said first jaw having a surface arranged to engage a commodity
to be transferred and coplanar with said paths and said operat-
ing means comprising means for moving said second jaw rela-
tive to slid first jaw, said rotating means comprising a rotary
shaft whose axis coincides with said axis and which is con-
nected with said second jaw. said first jaw having an axial
passage with an outline complemenury to the cross-section of
and axially movably receiving said shaft, said shaft and said
first jaw having means for transmitting torque from said shaft
to said first jaw and vice versa in each axial position of said
shaft.
4,437,561
AUTOMATIC CONTINUOUS WEIGHING MACHINE
Eiichi Hasegawa, Kobe, and Shoji YanuM), Akashi, both of
Japan, assignors to Yamato Scale Company, Ltd., Hyogo,
Japan
FUed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351 J64
Gaims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 3, 1981, 56-30891
Int G.1 GOIG U/00
U.S. G. 198—504 3 GaioH
1. An automatic continuous weighing machine, compruing a
plurality of endless conveyers driven at the same speeid. and a
plurality of weighing units, each weighing unit operatively
1070
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
coupled to one of said conveyers, respectively, for sensing
weights of articles carried on said conveyers, each of said
conveyers including a plurality of endless circulating members
arranged m parallel, characterized in that said endless circulat-
ing members of the respective conveyers are arranged in mutu-
ally parallel intervening fashion, whereby said conveyers each
have a common article transporting path, each of said endless
direction of the conveyor, and a conical surface narrowing
toward the roof and having an axis coinciding with the axis of
rotation of said chain wheel.
IB M 1.2.3
4,437,562
CHAIN BUCKET CONVEYOR
Manfred Koppers, Duisburg; Karlheinz Bohnes, Bochum, and
Heinz Kunzer, Heme, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Boctaumer Eisenhutte GmbH A Co. KG, Bochum, Fed. Rep
of Germany
Filed No?. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,716
loS'^iSi'i""*^' "W""**®" ^^' KeP- of Germany, Nov. 18,
IWU, 3043431
Int a.J B65G J9/08
U.S. a 198-733 ,7ci^^
i'^ ■'i-i ]'f^'''f'^
1. A central chain flight conveyW^r an underground exca-
vation, compnsing a substantially U-shaped forward conveyor
part at the side of a sole and open toward a roof; a return
conveyor part at the side of backfilling and closed in a substan-
tially channel-like manner, said return conveyor part being
nonnal to said forward conveyor part; an endless chain mov-
able m said conveyor parts and including a flight chain member
and a plurality of flights mounted thereon so that said chain
member extends centrally of said flights and said flights move
m one of said conveyor parts in a substantially horizontal
position and in the other of said conveyor parts in a substan-
tially vertical position; means for transporting said chain from
one to the other of said conveyor parts with turning of said
flights from one to the other of said positions and including
actuating stations, a rotary chain wheel having chain pockets
and arranged at said actuating stations rotatable about an in-
clined axis which ascends toward the roof and backfilling and
IS located in a vertical plane transverse to the longitudinal
4,437,563
INSTALLATION FOR MONITORING AN ENDLESS
CLOTH CONVEYOR BELT
Marcel Oriol, 85 Bd Jean Jauret, 92100 Boulogne, France
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,328
QaJms priority, application France, Jul. 30, 1980, 80 16836
Int. aj B65G 15/00
VS. a. 198-810 5 ctainu
-A
_/ / «OTw«ci tiiauJi
vn* i.ur Nt««
Circulating members having a plurality of article supporting
subsections arranged at predetermined intervals in the length-
wise direction, said article supporting subsections belonging to
each conveyer being aligned laterally to form article support-
ing sections of said conveyer, said article supporting sections
of the respective conveyers being arranged sequentially in
senes along said article transporting path to allow themselves
to move at least vertically, independently of each other
— if jj ' — 77 — .T'".^^. " -T
cowtniM. tmwMM ^^
-0 "H -H
O uwca LUr
O LOHMLIW
tiWML tTanoa t»c)
1. An insullation for monitoring the state of an endless
conveyor belt driven by belt driving means, said installation
comprising:
a plurality of closed conductive control buckles transversely
disposed on said belt and distributed at spaced-apart loca-
tions along the path of said belt;
a plurality of fixed monitoring stations distributed at spaced-
apart locations along the path of said belt and each of said
monitoring stations being coupled with at least a detector
assembly having at least a transmitter and a corresponding
pick-up for detecting the passsage of said control buckles
at each said monitoring station;
a central station to which each said monitoring station is
connected for transmitting signals comprising information
pertaining to the state of said control buckles and pertoin-
ing to the state of each said monitoring station, said central
station comprising:
a central unit for receiving said signals;
programmed counters for counting the total numbers of
impulses received between pairs of successive signals
corrwponding to successive control buckles and re-
ceive<H)y said central unit from each of said monitoring
stations, and for comparing said total numbers to refer-
ence total numbers so as to deliver, in case of any dis-
crepancy, signals corresponding to defective control
buckles;
belt stop control means connected with said said central
unit and for ordering said conveyor belt to stop when
said central unit has received signals corresponding to
defective buckles or monitoring stations;
display means connected with said central unit and for
indicating the sute of said control buckles and monitor-
ing stations;
manual control means for inhibiting, when actuated, at
least a signal corresponding to a defective control
buckle or monitoring station;
automatic means for authorizing the continuation of the
operation of said belt when said central unit receives
signals corresponding to defective control buckles or
monitoring stAions after inhibition of said signals by
said manual control means;
and wherein:
said control buckles are arranged in spaced apart pairs of
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1071
control buckles, with the control buckles of each pair are
being mounted cross-wise on said belt;
each said detector assembly having a pair of transmitter and
pick-up couples, each said transmitter and pick-up couple
being arranged on the path of one control buckles of each
said pair of control buckles, so as to generate a detection
signal when an uncut control buckle passes opposite one
of said pair of transmitter and pick-up couples;
said installation further comprising a plurality of pairs of
closed conductive reference buckles, which are mounted
at close spaced-apart locations lengthwise on a portion of
said belt and the buckles of each said pair of reference
buckles being mounted cross-wise on said belt portion, for
giving a reference number to each said monitoring station
and to each pair of said control buckles passing succes-
sively opposite each said detector assembly coupled to
each monitoring station;
each said monitoring station comprising a buffer memory for
storing information on the state of the buckles of a de-
tected pair of control buckles, and a coding circuit for
generating said coded detection signals, in coded form,
each of said coded detection signals comprising said refer-
ence number of the corresponding monitoring station and
said information on the state of the corresponding de-
tected pair of control buckles;
all monitoring stations being connected to said central sta-
tion by a single common conventional telephone line;
said central unit of said central station comprising a pro-
grammable memory emitting at regular intervals coded
scanning signals for scanning successively, through said
telephone line, said monitoring stations and receiving
successively in response, through said telephone line, said
coded detection signals from said monitoring stations, the
buffer memory of each of which is emptied in response to
the first coded scanning signal received after storage of
information corresponding to the state of a detected pair
of control buckles;
said central station further comprising a central control
block connected to said central unit and comprising an
active memory for storing, at the starting of said installa-
tion, information relating to said reference numbers of said
pairs of control buckles and said monitoring stations and
information relating to said reference total numbers which
correspond to the total numbers of coded scanning signals
transmitted to each of said monitoring stations between
two successive coded detection signals corresponding to
two successive pairs of control buckles and received by
said central unit from the corresponding monitoring sta-
tion;
said informations corresponding to said reference numbers
and stored in said active memory being compared in said
central station to said informations comprised in said
coded detection signals received by said central unit so
that said display means, which is common to all said pairs
of control buckles and to all said monitoring stations,
indicates in succession the reference numbers and states of
said pairs of control buckles and in succession the refer-
ence numbers and states of said monitoring stations;
said information corresponding to said reference total num-
bers and stored in said active memory being compared to
said total numbers of impulses, each of which correspond-
ing to a coded scanning signal, and which are counted in
said counters between the reception of two successive
coded detection signals corresponding to two successive
detected pairs of control buckles, so that said display
means indicates, in case of any discrepancy, the number of
the monitoring station that has not detect^ any passage of
a pair of control buckles, the two buckles of which being
defective; and
said central control block is connected to said manual con-
trol means for inhibiting any comparison of information
comprised in a coded detection si^ial and corresponding
to a reference number of a pair of control buckles or of a
monitoring station the state of which has been displayed as
defective, when said manual control means are actuated.
4 437 564
CONVEYOR DRIVE FRAME
Manfred Redder, Bergkamcn-Oberaden; Horat Linke; Dieter
Griindken, both of Lunen, and Helmut Temme, Waltrop, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to GcwerkschafI Eisenhutte
Westfalia, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 198,081, Oct. 17, 1980, abandoned.
This applicaHon Nov. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 443,834
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 24,
1979, 2942916
Int. a.^ B65G 2i/02
U.S. a. 198—834 9 claims
1. A drive frame for a scraper-chain conveyor, comprising:
a pair of generally parallel side plates;
a chain drum and a drive shaft therefor;
a pair of aligned bearing bushes routably supporting said
drive shaft of said chain drum, said bearing bushes being
mounted in apertures in said side plates and being welded
to said side plates, respectively, an inner axial end face of
each bearing bush being substantially coplanar with an
inner surface of said respective side plate and having a
radially outwardly extending collar at an outer axial end
thereof, an axial dimension of each of said bearing bushes
being slightly greater than a wall thickness of said respec-
tive side plate, each of said side plates having an outer
surface with a recess which surrounds said aperture in that
side plate, each of said recesses engaging said collar of said
associated bearing bush, each of said bearing bushes hav-
ing an axially outwardly extending flange at a peripheral
edge of its collar; and
a pair of roller bearings for said bearing bushes, a width of
said roller bearings being less than said wall thickness of
said respective side plates.
4,437,565
CONVEYOR CHAIN
Aulls VatJa, Eura, Finland, assignor to Lonnstrom Oy, KoyHo,
Finland
Filed Dm. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,480
Claims priority, application Finland, Dec. 22, 1980, 804001
Inta.3B65G;7/J$
U.S. a. 198—851 2 Claims
rfif ----,iW'^'"---ir
--"-(iff'^-
^'^Biv --rr
9
1. A conveyor chain formed of a plurality of inner and outer
links, each link comprising a pair of substantially rectangular
planar side plates, one of said pair of links having a pair of
1072
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
spaced sleeves and the other of said Hnks having a pair of
spaced trunnions, said sleeves and trunnions being seated adja-
cent their ends respectively in said side plates, said sleeves and
trunnions being welded to one surface of the respective side
plates, and said side plates having a pair of flanges projecting
from the surface of said plates to which said sleeves and trun-
nions are welded, said flange projecting along the longitudinal
edges of said plates a distance at least equal to the extension
created by said welds.
hermetically sealing said package, and allowing said package
to stand at a temperature at least as high as room tempera-
4,437,5«6
CHILD PROOF CONTAINER
Darid J. SiahJer, Parma Heights, Ohio, assignor to A Packaging
Serrice Company, Inc., Valley View, Ohio
Filed Jul. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 403,859
Int. aj B65D 83/00. 5/38. 85/00
UA a. 206-1 J
ture for a time sufficient to provide complete sterilization
of the contents of said package.
4437 568
9 Qaims .„. *^^J?«<;ENCY HRE AND SMOKE SAFETY KIT
9^S6 °"'* ^'** ^- '*'"'•" ^^^ ^^f-
Filed Aug, 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,785
Int. a.J B65D 69/00
U.S. a. 206-223 4 Claims
1. A container resistant to accidental opening comprising
an outer housing, an inner tray, actuator means for selec-
tively positioning said inner tray to a first position and a
second position; and locking means for locking said tray in
said first position;
said locking means including a protruding locking member
included in said inner tray disposed generally contiguous
to a locking member receiving port of said outer housing
comprising an extended sleeve having an extent greater
than said protruding locking member to inhibit accidental
deflection of said locking member from said sleeve, said
locking member being resiliently urged towards said re-
ceiving port for close locking reception in said port at said
first position.
4,437,567
STERILE PACKAGE AND METHOD OF MAKING
DtTid K. H. Jeng, Lake Zurich, III., assignor to The Kendall
Company, Boston, Mass.
FUed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,320
Int a.J B65D 81/28; A61L 2/18
UA a. 206-210 jctaims
1. The method of sterilizing a product which comprises
placing the product incorporating in the package a first
sterilization medium comprising a solution containing 0 01
to 0.1% by weight of hydrogen peroxide in an inert liquid
solvent in the absence of a second sterilizing medium,
1. A rectangular emergency kit for use in fire, flame or
smoke situations comprizing in combination:
a rectangular metal box with an earring handle;
a front on said box;
a hinged lid means, all comers on said box are given a radii-
two hasps for closure attached by locking means to the lid
means and right side, first aid instructions are attached or
printed on the inside and outside of said lid means;
a smoke and fire alarm and self-contained batteries ^e ac-
comodated in the top space;
next is a three inch space defined by a shelf extending from
back to the lid means;
stored on the shelf are:
two rolls of two inch tape,
an air horn,
a can of flourescent red paint,
two heavy duty sponges,
a glass cutter,
a flashlight,
a second space four inches in width defined by a back to lid
means shelf;
on the second shelf are:
two respirator masks,
two folded florescent red triangles preprinted with the
signal and word "help",
two pair of flame resistant goggles,
a first aid kit,
a third space defined by the bottom of the box to accomo-
date:
two pair of fire resistant pants,
two pair of fire resistant gloves,
two pair of flame resistant jackets,
two pair of water and flame resistant boots,
two rods to hold the above items, and
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1073
a fire extinguisher attached by fastening means to the left
exterior of the box.
4 437 569
SHIPPING CARTON WITH CASE KNIFE PROTECnON
FOR INNER CARTONS
John F. Sorenson, St. Paul, Minn., assignor to Champion Inter-
national Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 398,678, Jul. 13, 1982. ThU
application Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,000
Int a.^ B65D 65/26
U.S. a. 206-601 1 Claim
&
1. A package comprising in combination:
(a) a corrugated paperboard shipping carton comprising:
(i) a plurality of side walls interconnected at comer fold
lines to form a tubular container;
(ii) a pair ofinner end closure flaps foldably connected to
each end of a first opposed pair of said side walls along
first fold lines;
(iii) a medial fold line extending across each one of said
first opposed pair of said side walls, said medial fold
lines being parallel to said comer fold lines and extend-
ing between said first fold lines;
(iv) outer end closure flaps foldably connected to each end
of a second opposed pair of said side walls along second
fold lines;
(v) said inner end closure flaps being folded to a carton
closing position wherein ones of each pair of said inner
end closure flaps diverge away from each other to cause
inward bowing of each one of said first opposed pair of
said side walls along said medial fold lines; and
(vi) said outer end closure flaps being folded to a carton
closing position overlying said inner end closure flaps,
and means for securing said outer end closure flaps to
said inner end closure flaps to close said carton and to
hold said inner end closure flaps in said diverging posi-
tions whereby the inward bowing of said first opposed
pair of side walls is retained; and
(b) a plurality of rectangular containers disposed in said
shipping carton, said containers being arranged serially in
face-to-face contact with each other within said shipping
carton with endmost ones of said containers being en-
gaged by the inner surfaces of said medial fold lines, said
containers further having end walls engaging the inner
surfaces of said second opposed pair of side walls on said
shipping carton, and there being interior voids within said
shipping carton adjacent each of said comer fold lines of
said shipping carton which voids are created and main-
tained by reason of said medial fold lines retaining said
endmost containers spaced apart from said comer fold
lines, said voids being sized so as to allow knife blade
cutting of said shipping carton adjacent said comer fold
lines without damaging said containers.
4,437^70
SHIPPING CARTON WITH CASE KNIFE PROTECnON
FOR INNER CARTONS
John F. Sorenson, St. Paul, Minn., assignor to Champion Inter-
national Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Jul. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,678
Int. a.' B65D 65/26
U,S. a. 206-601 6 Claims
I
1. A package comprising in combination a corrugated paper-
board shipping carton containing a plurality of product car-
tons, said shipping carton comprising:
(a) a series of side walls connected together along comer
fold lines to form a tubular container;
(b) pairs of inner end closure flaps foldably connected to
opposite ends of a first opposed pair of said side walls;
(c) pairs of outer end closure flaps overlapping said inner
end closure flaps and foldably connected to opposite ends
of a second opposed pair of said side walls along straight
fold lines;
(d) said inner end closure flaps each being connected to each
of said first opposed pair of side walls along bowed fold
lines with a medial portion of each bowed fold line being
closer to an outer free edge of the respective inner end
closure flap than end portions of said bowed fold line;
(e) a medial fold line on each of one of said first opposed pair
of side walls extending between said medial portions of
said bowed fold lines; and
(0 each of said first opposed pair of side walls being bowed
inwardly of said container along said medial fold lines, and
each of said inner end closure flaps being bowed out-
wardly of said container whereby side edges of said inner
end closure flaps are inwardly offset from said straight
fold lines when said end closure flaps are folded to a
container-closing position said bowing of said first op-
posed pair of side walls and said inner end closure flaps
being operable to offset said product cartons disposed in
said container from the comer fold lines defining side
edges of said first opposed pair of side walls and from said
straight fold lines wherein the container can be cut proxi-
mate the corner fold lines and proximate said straight fold
lines without risking damage to said product cartons.
4,437,571
THIN SHEET SORTING APPARATUS
Hideo Ohmura, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaiira
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
FUed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,846
Oalms priority, application Japan, Oct. 13, 1980, 55-14193
Int. a.J B07C 5/344
U.S. a. 209—551 9 Claims
1. A thin sheet sorting apparatus comprising:
sheet transfer means for transfering a first group of sheets
including a given number of sheeu one by one from a
reservoir of unsorted sheete to a sheet transport path;
sheet inspection meant, disposed along said sheet transport
path, for inspecting the sheeU transferred from said sheet
transfer means, and discriminating among three classes of
sheets including efl^ective sheets, counuble unidentifuble
sheets, and uncounuble unidentifiable sheete;
1074
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
sheet allotting means, disposed along said sheet transport
path and through said sheet inspection means, for allotting
the eflective sheets and a group of sheets including both of
the countable and uncounuble unidentiriable sheets,
which were discriminated by said sheet inspection means,
to an effective sheet section and a rejected sheet section,
respectively;
countmg means, connected to said inspection means for
detecting whether there are no uncountable unidentifiable
sheets and in response to such a determination, producing
a no-uncountable sheet signal;
shelf, said releasable securing means being associated with
said base portions of said barrier means and including
means for engaging said longitudinally extending shelf
members in at least two positions, said positions including
an article retaining position and an article access position;
said barrier means also including a pair of end members
joined by a planar barrier, one of said base portions being
integral with each of said end members such that at least
a part of said base portions is adapted to extend down-
wardly between longitudinally extending shelf members,
said engaging means being integrally associated with said
downwardly extending part of said base portions.
4,437,573
BOOM RACK FOR HANDLING AND POSITIONING
CARGO TIE DOWN EQUIPMENT
Frank Garoffolo, Westport, Conn., assignor to Aviatec, Inc.,
Westport, Conn.
Filed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,225
Int. a.J B66C 23/20
U.S. a. 212-263 11 Claims
collation means, connected to said detecting means and said
counting means, for collating the sum of the number of the
effective sheets and the number of the counuble uniden-
tiflable sheets with a set number in response to a no-
uncounuble sheet signal from said detecting means and
producing in response thereto a collation signal indicative
of completion of the sorting of said first group of sheets
from said reservoir; and
sheet supplying means, connected to said collation means,
for supplying a second group of sheets having said given
number from said reservoir to said sheet transfer means in
response to the collation signal from said collation means.
4,437,572
SHELF RETAINER
Howard O. HofTman, Elmhurst, 111., assignor to Sears, Roebuck
and Co., Chicago, III.
Filed Jon. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,493
Int. a.J A47F 5/00
MS. a. 211-86 8 Qaims
1. A boom rack of the type adapted for handling and posi-
tioning cargo tie down equipment, comprising:
A. A base fulcrum mount;
B. A tube coupling pivoted to said base fulcrum mount upon a
horizontal axis;
C. An inverted J-shaped tube secured within said tube cou-
pling at its foreshortened end and extending upwardly, out-
wardly and downwardly with respect to said tube coupling;
and
D. A counter-weighted cable having its free end extending
through said inverted J-shaped tube, so as to engage and
support a cargo net hook outwardly thereof.
1. A unitary retainer for linear and angular adjustable instal-
lation on a shelf having longitudinally extending openings
defined by spaced apart longitudinally extending shelf mem-
bers, comprising:
barrier means adapted to be positioned along an edge of said
shelf, said barrier means including a pair of base portions
supporting said barrier means on said edge of said shelf,
said barrier means serving to retain articles on said shelf;
and
means for releasably securing said barrier means to said
4,437,574
TAMPER-RESISTANT BOTTLE CAP
William Ruklic, 549 Chcatnut U., Beecher, 111. 60401
Filed Oct 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,307
Int a.i B65D 41/46
U.S. a. 215—247 25 Claiins
1. A tamper resistant closure cap for a cylindrical receptacle
open at one end and having a peripheral outwardly-projecting
catch at the open end. said cap having a top wall comprising:
(a) an annular platform having a pair of radially-spaced,
peripherally-extending collars depending from its bottom
surface, the inner of said depending collars having an
outer diameter substantially the same as the inside diame-
ter of said receptacle but gauged for engagement with the
inner surface of the receptacle, and the outer one of said
depending collars being gauged to fit the open end of the
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1075
receptacle and having latch means on its inner surface
gauged for snap-fit engagement with the catch means of
said receptacle;
1. A countertop mini-garbage can, comprising, in combina-
tion, a container and a pivoted cover upon a top of said con-
tainer for selectively closing a top opening of said container,
said container comprising four vertically elongated side walls
and a horizontal bottom wall, said container being of a size and
shape for receiving a conventional paper milk carton, amd
means for grasping and upwardly lifting said carton outward
of said container, said means comprising a vertically elongated
opening made through a pair of opposite said side walls, a thin,
stretchable rubber film adhered all around an edge of each said
openings for sealing an interior space of said container, and in
use being stretchable in a vertical direction; a receptacle on an
underside of said cover, said receptacle containing a replace-
able deodorant; and said cover having a projecting tab on a
front edge thereof.
second portion covering said container open end, said
cover means including an opening in said fiange portion
extending a predetermined portion of the periphery
thereof, said flange portion being selectively engageable
(b) means for removing the outer one of said depending
collars of said closure cap; and
(c) the top wall having an annular filler opening therein, and
a closure plug being provided for said opening.
4,437,575
COUNTERTOP MINI-GARBAGE CAN
Geraldine L. Hahn, 351 189th St., Miami Beach, Fla. 33160
Filed Feb. 7, 1983, Ser. No. 464,685
Int. a.3 B65D 25/14
U.S. a. 220-1 T 1 Claim
with said lip in any desired relative rotational orienution.
whereby said opening may be placed in or out of registra-
tion with said conduit means upper end. thereby permit-
ting or blocking communication with the vessel contents
through the conduit and cover means.
4,437,577
DOUBLE SECONDARY SEAL FOR FLOATING ROOF
TANKS
James F. Myers, First A Curtis A»e., Thorofare, N J. 08086, and
Lloyd C. Thoemke, 3737 Chichester Are., Bootbwyn, Pa.
19061
Filed Sep. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 414,871
Int. a.3 B65D 67/207
U.S. a. 220-224 19 ci,i,n.
4,437,576
DRINKING VESSEL WITH SELF-CONTAINED STRAWS
Richard L. Bamiak, Morgan Gulf Rd., Turin, N.Y. 13473
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,385
Int. a.3 B65D 41/26, 25/38. 8/02
U.S. a. 220-90.4 5 Claims
1. A drinking vessel comprising, in combination:
(a) liquid container means having a bottom wall and a side
wall extending from said bottom wall to an open end
defined by a circular lip having a constant, symmetrical
width about its entire periphery;
(b) conduit means extending through said side wall between
an open lower end communicating with the interior of
said container means in the area of said bottom wall and an
opeii upper end in the area of said lip; and
(c) cover means having a circular, symmetrica] flange por-
tion adapted for frictional. releasable sealing engagement
with said lip about the peripheral extent thereof, and a
1. A secondary seal for a liquid storage tank having a cylin-
drical sidewall and a floating roof comprising
a weather shield means extending upwardly and outwardly
from the floating roof to normally seal the peripheral
junction between the roof and the sidewalls,
the weather shield means terminating upwardly in a flexi-
ble wiper which is normally in contact with tank side-
wall;
a vapor barrier means extending about the weather shield
means to prevent the passage of vapors through the
weather shield means,
the vapor barrier means defining a log space outwardly of
the weather shield means; and
a resilient reserve seal means positioned within the log space
to provide a reserve seal between the weather shield
means and the tank sidewall when the flexible wipers do
not contact the tank sidewall.
1076
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,578
CONTAINER AND CLOSURE MEANS FOR STORAGE OF
RADIOACTIVE MATERIAL
Heinz Bienek, Oberhausen; Rudolf Finkbeiner, Ratingen, and
Wllhelm Wick, Essen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Steag Kernenergie GmbH, Essen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 390,956
Claims priority, application Fed Rep. of Germany, Feb. 9 1982
3204300
Int. a.J B65D 51/18
U.S. a. 220-256 29aalms
outer dispensing opening, said inner shell having an inside
guide section forming a guide passage leading to said inner
dispensing opening and a cut-off blade defining one side of
said inner dispensing opening;
biasing means between said shells to move said outer shell to
an at-rest position with respect to said inner shell to cover
said inner dispensing opening with said outer shell to
prevent dispensing via said inner dispensing opening until
said inner shell is held against movement and a turning
force is applied to said outer shell to aline said inner and
outer dispensing openings; and
ejecting means arranged to move relative to said shells to
bear against a portion of said strip in said guide passage to
advance said strip through said alined inner and outer
dispensing openings and remove the dosage from the strip
by cutting the strip on said cut-off blade.
12. A storage device consisting of a container for the final
storage of radioactive substances and a cover for the container,
wherein one of the container and cover consists of a material
selected from ceramic and metallic material, and wherein the
container and cover are suitably ground on their seating areas
which cooperate with each other, and a prestressing device is
provided which is supported on the container and engages the
cover, this prestressing device prestressing the cover against
the seating area of the container.
4,437,580
DISPENSER FOR SKEWERED FOODS
Wayne Ferrin, Sanford, N.C., assignor to Frieda Boosalis, Fay-
etteville, N.C.
Filed May 21, 1982, Ser. No. 380,768
Int. a.J B65H 29/34
U.S. a. 221-75 „ ciid„„
4,437 579
DRUG DISPENSING APPARATUS AND REMOVAL
TOOL
Donald R. Obland, 6750 S. Qermont St., Littleton, Colo. 80122
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,196
Int. a.i B65D 83/04
U.S. a. 221-25 14 Claims
1. A child-proof dispenser for a strip of drugs and the like
comprising:
a container having an inner compartment for enclosing a
coiled strip of drugs, said container including separate,
interfitting, inner and outer shells, said inner and outer
shells having relcasably interlocking central hub portions
holding said shells together and supporting said outer shell
to rotate relative to said inner shell, said inner shell having
an inner dispensing opening and said outer shell having an
1. Dispensing apparatus for sequentially dispensing a plural-
ity of articles comprising:
(a) a housing including discharge means for discharging said
articles;
(b) at least one dispensing cartridge removably disposed
within said housing adapted for storing said articles in
superposed relationship with respect to one another, said
cartridge including
(i) a frame having a pair of vertical side members;
(ii) a plurality of support means associated with said side
members for supporting said articles in superposed
relationship with respect to one another within said
cartridge; and
(iii) guide means associated with said support means for
guiding an article displaced from one support means to
the next subjacent support means or from the last sup-
port means to the discharge means; and
(c) displacing means operatively associated with said dis-
pensing cartridge for displacing said articles from said
support means.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1077
4,437 581
PUMP MOTOR MASTER CONTROL
William R. Coker, Lilbum, Ga., auignor to Nordson Corpora-
tion, Amherst, Ohio
FUed Not. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 324,672
Int. a.3 B67D 5/08
VS. a. 222-54 s Qaims
disposed in the metering chamber and a plate valve having
bores for the passage of the product is mounted for axial dis-
placement in the metering chamber, the plate vaJve being
configured to close the outlet opening during filling of the
metering chamber and the inlet openings during emptying of
the metering chamber.
tM" S^
4,437,583
DRIBBLE RING
Rodney J. O'Connor, College Station, Tex., assignor to Romec
Environmental Research A DcTclopmcnt, Inc., College Sta-
tion, Tex.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,547
Int. a.' B67D 1/16
U.S. a. 222-108 15 aHmM
1. In a hot melt adhesive dispensing arrangement having an
adhesive tank, a heater for heating the tank, a pump for pump-
ing molten adhesive from the tank, and a motor for driving the
pump, a master control for preventing the operation of the
motor until the adhesive has reached a dispensable molten sute
comprising:
a master control circuit having an input and having means for
enabling the operation of the motor in response to the pres-
ence of a condition at the input for a finite delay interval
equal to a predetermined period of time;
means for sensing the temperature of the tank;
a heater control coupled to the temperature sensing means and
to the heater and operable to energize the heater when the
temperature of the Unk falls below a predetermined temper-
ature; and
means for producing said condition at the input of the master
control circuit when the heater is not energized, whereby, as
the adhesive is heated by the Unk and each period of time
during which the heater is not energized increases in dura-
tion, said predetermined period of time is reached and the
operation of the motor is enabled.
1. An apparatus for capturing liquid dripping down the sides
of a liquid container, which comprises:
an absorbent material wrapped around the outside of a liquid
container; and
said absorbent material being impregnated with a chemical
agent selected to chemically neutralize the liquid dripping
down the sides of the liquid conUiner.
4,437,582 4,437,584
DEVICE FOR DISPENSING PASTE-LIKE SUBSTANCES TOOTHPASTE DISPENSER
Florian Diimer, Dilsseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to St«Pi>en T. Connors, Sale, and Harvey, Kenneth, WUmslow, both
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany °' England, assignors to Colgate-Palmolive Company, New
Filed Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,225 ^ork, N.Y.
Qalms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 23, ^^^ ^"B- 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,289
1981, 3137760
U.S. a. 222—94
Int. a.} B05B 11/04
r\
U.S. a. 222—137
Int. a.J B67D 5/52
6 Claims
8Gainis
/^ // // J / J^l^L^
■B
1. A device for dispensing paste-like substances from tubes
comprising: a metering chamber having a base which is pro-
vided with inlet openings and side walls with an outlet opening
and which has means screwable onto the tube, an axially dis-
placeable plunger comprising an externally operable pushrod is
1. A dispenser for delivering two products comprising
a container having a neck and a bottom closure,
a tube movably extending through said neck into the con-
tainer and having a plunger and outlet outwardly of the
container and a pipe within said tube and extending below
said tube.
1078
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
a first uni-directional movable semi-flexible plate disposed in
said container,
first ratchet means connected to said tube and extending
through said first plate for moving said first plate to dis-
place a first product in said container towards said tube,
a second uni-directional movable semi-flexible plate in said
container, and
second ratchet means on said pipe extending through said
second plate for moving said second plate to displace a
second product into said pipe.
4,437,585
DISPENSERS
Stewart Banks, Derby, Engtand, awignor to Appor Limited,
Derby, England
Filed Mar. 12, IWl, Ser. No. 242,870
Clainii priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 15, 1980.
8008837 •
Int. a.J B67D 5/06
U.S. a. 222-181 5 Claim.
said pipette and for removably securing the compression
chamber of said pipette in a fixed position and means for
engaging and moving said compressing means by a prede-
termined distance to dispense a fixed amount of liquid;
the improvement wherein said actuating means includes
moving and sealing means, operable during receipt of said
pipette, for sequentially: (1) moving said piston with said
1. A dispenser including a delivery mechanism for dispens-
ing measured quantities of material contained in the dispenser,
means for adjusting the measured quantity dispensed at each
operation of the dispenser, and means mounting the adjustment
to be accessible from externally of the dispenser at a rear loca-
tion thereof, so that when the dispenser is mounted on a wall or
other support the adjustment means is inaccessible to an opera-
tor until the dispenser is removed from the wall or other sup-
port, the dispenser including a separable mounting plate
adapted to be secured to a supporting structure and having
means for slidably receiving the dispenser so as to mount the
same on the mounting plate, and releasable latch means being
provided to enable disengagement of the dispenser from the
mounting plate whereby to permit access to said adjustment
means, said latch means comprising a resilient projection ear-
ned by said mounting plate and resiliently biased into a locking
position in which it engages with a portion of the dispenser, the
projection being resiliently deformable away from said locking
position to a retracted release position by use of a special tool
engageable with the latch member through an access opening
formed in the dispenser or in the mounting plate.
4,437,586
MECHANICALLY ACTUATED PIPETTE DISPENSER
Richard L. Columbas, Rocliester, N.Y., aasignor to Eastman
Kodak Coapuy, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,931
Lit CL^ B67D 5/06: GOIF J 1/06
VS. a. 222-181 8 Claim.
1. In a dispenser including
a pipette comprimg means at a first end for containing
liquid for dispensing, a compression chamber in fluid
communication with said first end, compressing means,
including a piston, for providing fluid compression within
said chamber, and means for venting said chamber to the
atmosphere, and
actuating means including mounting means for receiving
chamber in a vented condition, to a predetermined start-
ing position relative to said mounting means while said
actuating means is stationary with respect to said com-
pression chamber, and (2) thereafter sealing said venting
means,
whereby said piston is automatically initialized without
dispensing any of the liquid contained by said pipette.
4,437,587
SQUEEZE BOTTLE FOR PRODUONG AN
ARBTTRARILY DIRECTED LIQUID STREAM
Walter Duering, Zurich, Switzerland, assignor to Duering AG.
Daellikon, Switzerland
FUed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,963
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 3, 1980, 5117/80
Int. a.3 B65D 37/00
U.S. a. 222-207 „ cialBs
1. A squeeze bottle, comprising a bottle body having bottle
body wall means (1) made of a material sufficiently flexible for
squeezing, said bottle body enclosing a bottle volume having a
first longitudinal central axis (7), separation means (2) forming
an overflow edge (3) in said bottle for separating said bottle
volume into a first larger chamber and into a second smaller
bottle neck chamber (4), bottle content discharge means hav-
ing a second longitudinal central axis (8) and including a bottle
mouth (5) forming part of said second bottle neck chamber (4),
said bottle mouth (5) extending away from said second bottle
neck chamber (4) opposite said separation means (2), said
discharge means further including nozzle means (6) opera-
tively mounted in said bottle mouth (5) for discharging a quan-
tity of liquid from said squeeze bottle, said second longitudinal
central axis (8) crossing said first longitudinal central axis on
the side of said nozzle means (6) outside said bottle body (1)
and enclose an acute angle (a) smaller than 50*, whereby the
bottle content may be squeezed out as a stream directed in
substantially any desired direction, and wherein said separation
means (2) forms a double walled restriction in said bottle body
wall means, said restriction extending into said bottle body
between said larger chamber and said smaller bottle neck
chamber.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1079
4,437 588
ACCUMULATIVE PRESSURE PUMP
Joseph J. Shay, Watcrbury, Conn., assignor to Ethyl Products
Company, Richmond, Va.
FUed Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,368
Int. a.} B65D 47/34
U5. a 222-321 15 Claims
in fluid communication with the cartridge receiving body for
drawing material from the cartridge, comprising:
(A) an elongate body having a side wall and first and second
ends;
(B) an integral one-piece bottom wall deuchably connected
to said side wall by a peripherally extending reduced
thickness web and normally closing off said first end;
(C) a top cap removably receivable on said second end and
normally disposed in sealing relationship therewith;
30-
1. In a pump dispenser adapted to be attached to a container
holding a liquid to be dispensed, the combination comprising:
(a) means defining a cylindrical pump body having a first
section and a second section, said second section being of
a smaller diameter than said first section;
(b) a first piston received in said first body section and hav-
ing an attached first stem means having a fluid passage
therein extending out of said body section;
(c) a second piston received in said second body section and
having an attached second stem means having a fluid
passage in its lower portion and a solid upper portion
normally contacting said first stem means to close the fluid
passage therein;
(d) a third seal piston attached to said second stem means
between said first piston and said second piston, and hav-
ing an outwardly flared skirt that makes a sealing engage-
ment with the uppermost portion of the interior wall of
said second body section when said third seal piston is
moved to its lowermost position;
(e) a dip tube means having its upper portion passing
through an opening of larger diameter than said dip tube
that is provided in the lower end of said second body
section, the dip tube upper end being coupled to said
second piston and movable therewith; and,
(0 means provided on the wall of said second body section
to cooperate with said second piston to permit air en-
trapped in said first and second body sections to be dis-
charged through the opening in the lower end of said
second body section into the air space of said container
upon the priming of the pump.
(D) said second end being receivable on the cartridge receiv-
ing body of the dispenser when said top cap is removed;
(E) said bottom wall having a diameter less than the internal
diameter of said body, freely resting on the fluid contenu
of said cartridge in spaced relationship with the sidewall
of said body upon being detached from said first end of
said wall; and
(F) said top cap being receivable on said first end in air
permeable relationship thereto when said cartridge is
received on the cartridge receiving body of the dispenser.
4,437,590
POSmVE EXPULSION FLUID STORAGE TANKS
Anthony J. LaBruna, Clarence, N.Y., assignor to Textron Inc.,
Proridcnce, R.I.
FUed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,458
Int. a.J B67D 5/00
U.S. a. 222-386.5 6 Claims
4,437,589
DISPENSING CARTRIDGE
Oiarles Potter, Stow, Ohio, aasignor to Go^o Industries, Inc.,
Cnyahoga FaUs, Ohio
Continnation of Ser. No. 177,269, Ang. 11, 1960, abandoned.
This appUcatkm Jol. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 401,856
Int a.> B65D 88/54
VJS. a 222-327 3 Claims
1. A two-piece cartridge for storage and transporution of a
fluid and use with a dispensing device of the type which in-
cludes a cartridge receiving body and a vacum inducing pump
1. In a tank of the type which is adapted to be initially sub-
stantially filled with a supply of fluid to be expelled therefrom
by means of fluid pressure forces acting against a diaphragm
which has a side wall portion and convex crown portion
shaped to initially lie snugly against an approximately one-half
portion of the interior surface of said tank and a rim portion
anchored to a mid-portion of said tank, whereby upon admis-
sion into said tank of said fluid pressure forces said supply fluid
may be substantially completely expelled therefrom by way of
an exit in response to rolling inversion of said diaphragm into
a reverse shaped configuration fitting against the opposite
one-half portion of the interior surface of said tank, the im-
provement comprising:
said side wall portion being of progressively increasing
sectional thickness leading from said rim portion toward
1080
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
said crown portion, said crown portion being of progres-
sively decreasing sectional thickness leading radially in-
wardly from said side wall portion toward the center
thereof, and said rolling inversion of said diaphragm com-
mences adjacent said rim portion.
4,437,591
DISPENSER FOR, IN PARTICULAR, PASTY
SUBSTANCES
Alfred Ton Schuckmann, Kevelaer, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Colgate-Palnolive Company, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,406
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 28.
1980, 3007480
Int. a.3 GOIF 11/00
mounted on said valve body, the other open end constitut-
ing a discharge orifice of said device; and a tubular pas-
sage connecting said two open ends;
(b) an obturating member lodged stationary in said tubular
passage and having an obturating head for obturating said
discharge orifice hermetically from the outside, when said
tubular actuating member is in a closed position,
(c) anchoring means extending radially in said tubular pas-
sage in an anchoring zone thereof axially spaced from said
other open end of said actuating member, and holding said
obturating member and said actuating member in engage-
ment with one another in said zone, and
(d) spring means associated with said tubular actuating mem-
U.S. a. 222—391
7 Claims
«wiN n w n
M OF o n
4,437 592
SELF-SEALING ACTUATING DEVICE FOR MOUNTING
ON A DISCHARGE VALVE OF A PRESSURIZED
CONTAINER
Luigi D. Bon, 141 Feldstrasse, 4M3-Aarbiirg, Switzerland
FUed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,083
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Dec. 21, 1979,
11369/79; May 16, 1980, 3819/80
lot a.} B65D 83/14
MS. a. 21l-4ai.\2 15 ctalms
1. A self-sealing actuating device adapted for being mounted
on the valve body, having an outlet channel, of a self-closing
discharge valve of a pressurized container from which a liquid
product is to be dispensed with the aid of a propellant in liquid,
pasty or foamy condition, which actuating device opens auto-
matically when an external part thereof is moved in a given
direction, and comprises
(a) as said external pari, a tubular actuating member having
two open ends, a first one of which is destined to register
with the said outlet channel, when said actuating device is
1. A dispenser, particularly for pa^ty substances, which
comprises a tubular housing with a dispensing mouthpiece at
one end and a piston which is displaceable inside the housing
towards the mouthpiece to force material out of the mouth-
piece by means of an operating handle located at the mouth-
piece end and a draw member linking the operating handle to
the piston wherein the draw member is formed as a rod which
is coupled with the piston via an unidirectionally-operating
ratchet arrangement, the rod being coupled to one arm of a
double-armed rocking lever mounted in the housing and whose
other arm forms an operating pressure surface, and wherein the
rocking lever is enclosed in the area of its shorter arm in a step
whose hollow side walls are provided with bearing openings
for snapping in of the rocking lever's journals and whose
longer arm protrudes above the step in such a way that it
overlaps a portion of surface of an upperfront wall of the
housing on which a spring braces itself
ber and adapted for biassing said actuating member
toward said closed position when said actuating member is
brought into an open position;
said actuating member being axially displaceable relative to
said obturating member, between said anchoring zone and
said other second open end thereof, between said open
and said closed positions,
whereby, when said tubular actuating member is moved
toward the open position, by an axial force directed away
from said discharge orifice, against bias applied to said
tubular member by said spring means being compressed,
said obturating head protrudes out of said discharge ori-
fice and frees said discharge orifice in the form of an
annular gap.
4,437,593
OVERCAP FOR SPICE CANISTER
Joseph J. Bollock, in, Atherton, Calif., assigoor to Three Sis-
ters Ranch Enterprises, Sao Carlos, Calif.
FUed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,609
lot. a.3 B65D 83/06
U.S. a. 222-541 4 Claims
1. In combination, a cap having a central top first disc, a
thin-walled substantially cylindrical first skirt depending from
adjacent the periphery of said first disc, said first skirt being
scored and weakened in a circumferential first line spaced
downwardly from the top of said first skirt and in a second line
joining said first line and extending down to the bottom edge of
said first skirt, a tab attached to said first skirt adjacent said
second line, an upper internal circumferential bead on said first
skirt between said first line and said disc, a lower internal
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1081
circumferential second bead on said first skirt below, but adja-
cent, said first line, a fitment having a second disc formed with
sifter holes and a short peripheral depending second skirt, the
exterior of said second skirt being cylindrical and of an outer
radius to seal tightly against the inside of said first skirt immedi-
ately below said first disc, the interior of said second skirt
terminating in an internal third bead, and a container having a
neck, the exterior of said neck having a fourth bead near its top
shaped to fit inside the top of said second skirt and a first
groove below said fourth bead shaped to receive said third
bead, a fifth bead and a sixth bead vertically spaced from said
fifth bead, each of said fifth and sixth beads having shoulders
on their lower edges, said first and second beads fitting under
the shoulders of said fifth and sixth beads, respectively, said
first skirt sealing the contents of said conuiner from deteriora-
tion by exposure to air both when said first skirt is inUct and
also after the portion of said first skirt below said first line has
been torn away, the maximum radii of said fifth and sixth beads
being about equal to the outer radius of said second skirt
whereby said first and second beads may slide over said second
skirt.
4,437,594
RETAINABLE CLOSURE
Clyde D. Sprague, Lilbum, Ga., assignor to Nordson Corpora-
tion, Amherst, Ohio
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,543
Int. a.3 B65D 47/00
U.S. a. 222-544 6 Claims
1. A retainable closure for selectively atmospherically isolat-
ing a passageway in a fitting, the closure comprising:
a retainer;
an elastic cover secured to said retainer, said cover being
selectively positionable between a first and a second posi-
tion, when in said first position said cover sealingly
contacts an orifice in which the passageway terminates so
as to atmospherically isolate the passageway, and when in
the second position said cover is retainable removed from
the orifice so as to allow unimpeded passage past the
orifice and wherein said retainer is connected to the fit-
ting, said retainer comprises an eyelet, a washer and a
grommet washer, and said cover being elongate and hav-
ing opposite ends, one of said ends is sandwiched between
said eyelet and said washer, and other of said ends of said
cover is sandwiched between said washer and said grom-
met washer so that said cover is secured to said retainer so
as to loop towards said orifice.
4,437,595
FEEDING APPARATUS FOR HSH AND OTHER
ANIMALS
Perry SteTCos, West Corioa, aod Robert E. Brown, Rosemead,
both of Calif., assignors to A.F.C.S., Inc., aty of lodustry,
CaUf.
FUed Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347,895
lot a.3 AOIK 5/02
U.S. a. 222—642 3 Claims
1. Dispensing apparatus for dispensing an associated fluent
material which comprises:
at least first and second housing means for receiving the
fluent material, each housing means having a top and a
bottom, said bottom having an opening therein;
a slide member having at least first and second openings
therein, said slide member being mounted for movement
adjacent to said bottoms of each of said first and second
housing means between a first position wherein said open-
ings of said first and second housig means and said first
and second openings respectively of said slide member are
in a: least partially registered relationship to allow passage
of the fluent material through said openings, and a second
position wherein said openings are not in registered rela-
tionship and passage of a fluent material out of said hold-
ing means is prevented;
adjusuble solenoid means for moving said slide member
including throw adjusting means to allow control of said
at least partially registered relationship of said openings;
first timing means connected to control said adjusuble sole-
noid operating means to move said slide member from said
second position to said first position and back to said
second postion for a predetermined time period; and
second timing means connected to initiate operation of said
first timing means at a chosen time of day.
4,437,596
ASSEMBLY FOR MOUNTING A WATER BOTTLE CAGE
ON A CYCLE FRAME
WUliam B. Shook, Bremen, Ohio, aasigoor to Thurston, Inc.,
Columbus, Ohio
FUed Jul. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,663
Int. a.} B62J 11/00
MS. a. 224-39 8 Claims
1. A wire cage for receiving a bottle or the lUie in combina-
tion with an assembly for mounting it on a support; said wire
cage being formed with a socket into which the bottle is in-
serted and removed therefrom and including longitudinally-
extending back wire sections along which the bottle slides
during insert and removal; said mounting assembly including a
cradling block for receiving the wire sections, and fastening
means for fastening the block to the support and engaging the
wire sections rearwardly of the forwardmost surfaces thereof
so as to clamp the wire sections to the block in a manner not to
interfere with the sliding movement of the bottle thereon; said
back wire sections being disposed in lateraUy-spaced relation-
ship, said fastening means of the mounting assembly compris-
ing a screw which is passed between the back wire sections
1040 O.G.— 42
1082
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
through the block and which has a clamping head for engaging
the wire sections, said wire sections being provided with op-
posed notches to form a countersink socket for the screw head
so it will be below the surfaces of the wire sections engaged by
said bottle and will also preclude longitudinal and torsional
movement of the wire sections relative to the cradling block.
4,437,597
MOUNTING APPARATUS FOR A DIRT BIKE
Ricbard H. Doyle, 901 S. 6th Ave., Sp 406, Hacienda Heights,
Calif. 91745 ^^
FUed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 281,024
Int CL' B60R 9/JO
VS. a. 224-42.45 R ^ Claims
(b) a back wall extending inwardly from said inner surface at
said back end,
(c) a pair of side walls extending inwardly from said inner
surface at opposite sides of said main body portion be-
tween said front and back ends,
(d) a generally planar inner wall fixed to said back and side
walls and spaced from said inner surface to define a com-
partment with said inner surface, back and side walls, said
compartment having an opening at said front end for
receivmg currency and other valuable papers for storage
in said compartment.
1. Mounting apparatus for a vehicle having a plurality of
wheels having tires thereon which comprises:
support means,
a first generally U-shaped member for preventing movement
of the vehicle in a first generally horizontal direction by
engagement with one of said tires, said first generally
U-shaped member being carried on said support member,
means for preventing movement in a second generally hori-
zontal direction which is opposite to said first direction by
engagement with the one tire,
said means for preventing movement in a second generally
horizontal direction comprising at least a second generally
U-shaped member which is pivotally mounted on said
support means, said second generally U-shaped member
having first and second legs disposed in spaced generally
parallel relationship and having a pivot axis extending
substantially in a plane defined by said first and second
generally parallel legs thereof, said second generally U-
shaped member having a mid-section disposed intermedi-
ate said first and second legs thereof, said second generally
U-shaped member being dimensioned and configured for
motion about said pivot axis between first and second
positions, said second U-shaped member being disposed
with said mid-section thereof disposed in contacting rela-
tionship with an associated tire of the associated vehicle in
said first position and disposed away from said associated
tire in said second position,
said means for preventing motion in a second generally
horizontal direction further including a third generally
U-shaped member, and
means for pivotally mounting said third generally U-shaped
member.
(e) a front wall extending inwardly from said inner surface at
said front end, said front wall being substantially spaced
from said opening,
(0 first attaching means for releasably securing one end of a
belt to said back end, and
(g) second attaching means for more permanently securing
the other end of the belt to said front end so that when the
belt is attached to said first attaching means in its normal
wearing position around a person's waist, a portion of the
belt extends from said opening to said front wall to con-
ceal and cover said opening.
4,437,599
BICYCLE/WHEELCHAIR CARRIER
Harold G. Jordening, 1541 E. UPalma, Anaheim, Cdlf. 92804
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 35U28
Int a.3 B60R 9/00; B62H 3/00
U.S. a. 224-319 2 Claims
7/
'&
4,437,598
BELT BUCKLE
Eym B. Hull, 49 Plcasaot St, Northboro, M«i. 01532
Filed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 365,036
iBt a.J A45C 1/04
UA a 224-163 jctoi^
1. Buckle for use with a belt comprising:
(a) a main body portion having a front end, a back end, and
a generally planar outer wall with an inner surface.
1. A device for adapting a vehicle-mountable bicycle carrier
with its projecting horizontal support pieces on which there
rests a bicycle cross bar, the adaptation permitting the carrying
of a collapsed wheelchair having two rearwardly projecting
horizontal hand grips wherein the adaptation includes an ex-
tensible member which lies horizontally on the projecting
bicycle support pieces, the extensible member having targer
and smaller telescoping pieces, the improvemente comprising:
a cross-piece attached to the end of the smaller telescoping
piece, a generally U-shaped member joined to the cross-
piece at each end of each leg of said U-shaped member
with the base of said U-shaped member with the base of
said U-shaped member spaced from said cross-piece, said
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1083
base serving as a support for the handgrips of a wheelchair
said cross-piece functioning to prevent the hand grips
from moving off said base transport of the wheelchair,
the larger piece of the extensible member having a ring
attached to iu bottom surface, the ring functioning to
contain a loop of cable which supports the front end of the
collapsed wheelchair, the ring further functioning as a
projection to inhibit the horizontal extensible member
from moving sideways off the bicycle support pieces.
2. On a bicycle carrier frame having two projecting pieces
spaced apart which normally function to support the bicycle,
attachments to the projecting pieces to allow the carrying of a
collapsed wheelchair comprising:
a horizontal piece perpendicular to and connecting the pro-
jecting pieces, the horizontal piece functioning as a stiff-
ener to the two projecting pieces of the bicycle carrier,
two "U" shaped configurations, a first "U" shaped hanger
configuration, lying substantially in a vertical plane, being
attached to the underside of one of the projecting pieces of
the bicycle carrier and lying in said vertical plane which
includes the projecting piece, the attachment points being
the tops of the legs of the "U", the bottom of the first "U"
shaped piece serving as a hanger support for the wheel-
chair hand grips; at each of the two comers of the first
"U" there being attached a horizontal bar extending gen-
erally parallel to said stiffener toward the other projecting
piece of the bicycle carrier and together forming the legs
of the second "U" shaped piece, each bar formed at its end
to provide for one pin to be threaded through the ends of
each, a means for locking the pin in place, the pin being
the base of said second "U", the pin functioning to prevent
the wheelchair hand grips from jumping off the bottom of
the first "U".
and operative for respectively transporting the wires from the
wire supply means through and beyond the respective means;
and electrical control circuit means including two guide rolls
of electrically conductive material and insulated from the
ground each arranged between the respective wire supply
means and said wire feed means cooperating with said wire
feed means so that, upon interruption of wire feed from one of
said wire supply means to one of said nozzles, said control
circuit means cause transport of wire from the other supply
means to and beyond the other of said nozzles to thus produce
a continuous wire feed.
4,437,600
CONTINUOUS WIRE FEED ARRANGEMENT FOR
STAPLING APPARATUS
Rudolf StSrr, Karl-Marx-Stadt, German Democratic Rep., as-
dgDor to Veb Kombioat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz" Leip-
dg, German Democratic Rep.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 273,552, Jun. 15, 1981,
abuidoned. This appUcation Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 283,020
Claims priority, appUcation German Democratic Rep., Jun.
17, 1980, 221882
Int. a.) B65H 17/04
VJS. a. 226-108 8 Cbdms
4,437,601
ADJUSTABLE WIRE GUIDE
Frank W. Brooks, Dayton, Ohio, assignor to FlexAlast Com-
pany, WUmington, Del.
FUed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,823
Int. a.3 B65H 57/00
U.S. a. 226-199 s Claims
1. A wire guide means, comprising:
a frame;
at least two pairs of rollers, each pair being mounted in said
frame such that rotational axes of said rollers are parallel
to each other and in a plane perpendicular to an intended
centerline location of a wire to pass between said rollers of
said pairs, said pairs of rollers being disposed in different
planes such that said axes of each of said pairs are posi-
tioned at spaced angular locations with respect to said
axes of others of said pairs about said intended centerline
location;
each of said rollers including a rigid support member and a
pin projecting from said support member; and
a camming plate mounted perpendicular to and for rotation
about said intended centerline location, said camming
plate having a central opening through which a wire may
pass and which is substantially concentric with said in-
tended centerline location, and a plurality of arcuate slote
at equal angular and radially spaced locations about said
intended centeriine location, each of said slou receiving a
different one of said pins such that rotation of said cam-
ming plate causes equal inward or outward axial transla-
tional movement of said rollers with respect to said in-
tended centerline location whereby said rollers may be
positioned to engage a wire to position a centerline thereof
coincident with said intended centerline location.
1. A continuous wire feed arrangement for feeding wire to a
stapling apparatus or the Uke, comprising two wire supply
means; two wire guide nozzles respectively arranged along
paths leading from the respective wire supply means to a wire
cutting and transmitting device; wire feed means positioned
between said wire supply and said guide nozzles in said paths
4,437,602
NAIL DRIVING TOOL
Jerone A. Kacmuurek, 9409 Graad DifiiioB A?c^ CtertlMd,
Ohio 44125
FUed Aag. 4, 1978, Ser. No. 93U04
Int a.) B25C 1/02
UJS. CL 227—147 2 rui—
1. A naU driving tool comprising:
(a) an elongated tubular guide member formed by a waU
surrounding a nail receiving guideway, said guide member
having a driving end forming an opening from which a
1084
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
nail IS driven and an opposite end, said guide member wall
extendmg continuously about said opening and formed
from a material which is transparent to electromagnetic
radiation in the visible spectrum thus permitting a nail in
said member to be observed from outside of the guide
member, said guide member wall deHning an internal nail
guidmg surface extending at least part way through said
guideway from said opening toward said opposite end;
(b) an elongated driver member defining a rigid nail engag-
ing surface at one end and a rigid anvil-like surface at its
opposite end adapted to be struck with a hammer, said
driver member defining a body extending into said oppo-
site end of said guide member and shaped to generally
conform to the shape of said guideway; and,
(c) positioning means frictionally engaged between said
driver member and said guide member for limiting move-
ment of said driver member relative to said guide member,
said positioning means including an elastomeric cup-
shaped element defining a bore for receiving one end of
the guide member and an aperture, said driver member
extending through said aperture and frictionally engaging
said cup-shaped element.
4,437,603
AUTOMATIC WIRING MACHINE FOR PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARDS
Mamoni Kobayashi, Hadaoo; Kai^i Ishige, Kanagawa; Hideakj
Sasaki; Mitiiikiyo Tani, both of Hadano, and Yashubiko
pwakami, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,458
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 7, 1980, 55-130
Int. a.J H05K 13/06
MS. a. 228-4J J Claims
1. An automatic wiring machine for a printed circuit board
comprising an X-Y uble carrying the printed circuit board to
be applied with wirings and movable in X and Y directions,
and a head located above said X-Y table and rotatably sup-
ported by a nuin console of the machine to route about an axis
perpendicular to the surface of said X-Y table, said head being
mounted with a wire guide unit for guiding the feed of a wire
for wiring to the surface of said printed circuit board, a bond-
ing unit for bonding at a bonding point the wire fed from said
wire guide unit to a conductor pattern on said printed circuit
board by heating and depressing the fed wire, and a cutter unit
for cutting away the wire at a site deviating from said bonding
pomt to said wire guide 'unit, said wire guide, bonding and
cutting units being mounted on said head for linear movement
along lines which are inclined with respect to said axis, and the
actmg points of said wire guide, bonding and cutter units on
the pnnted circuit board being substantially concentrated on
said axis; further comprising a monitoring optical pipe for
visual monitoring of the printed circuit board surface, said
optical pipe passing along the rotation axis of said head.
4,437,604
METHOD OF MAKING FINE WIRE
INTERCONNECnONS
Ely Razon, Hatboro, and Dan Vllenski, Horsham, both of Pa.,
assignors to Kulicke A SofTa Industries, Inc., Horsham, Pa.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,336
Int. a.3 B23K 20/10. 20/00
U.S, a. 228-179 4ctaims
1. A method of making uniform fine wire interconnections
between conductive pads on a semiconductor device and con-
ductive terminals on a substrate employing a capillary type
bonding tool comprising:
providing a fine wire in the capillary wedge bonding tool of
the type having an annular working face with the end of
the fine wire bent under the working face,
making a first wire bond to attach said bent end of said fine
wire to a first conductive pad on said semiconductor,
moving said bonding tool away from said first conductive
pad while paying out said fine wire to make a first fine
wire loop interconnection between said first conductive
pad and a first conductive terminal,
clamping said fine wire relative to said bonding tool,
making a second wire bond by attaching said fine wire to
said first conductive terminal to provide a first fine wire
interconnection between said conductive pad and said
conductive terminal,
determining the angular direction of said first fine wire
interconnection,
releasing said clamped fine wire,
moving said capillary wedge bonding tool a short vertical
and horizontal distance from said second bond to pay out
a bent end of fine wire under the working face of said
capillary wedge bonding tool,
clamping said fine wire to prevent relative movement of said
fine wire in said capillary bonding tool,
determining the angular direction between the next conduc-
tive pad on said semiconductor device and the next con-
ductive terminal on said substrate to be interconnected by
said fine wire, and wherein the included angle between
said first wire interconnection and said second fine wire
interconnection is between 15 degrees and 60 degrees, and
moving said capillary wedge bonding tool substantially
horizontally away from said first and said second wire
bonds along a path which is substantially equal to the
determined angular direction between said next conduc-
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
108S
tive pad and said next conductive terminal on said sub-
strate to be interconnected by said fine wire to provide the
end of said fine wire bent under said capillary bonding
tool oriented in a proper angle direction for the next first
wire bond on said next conductive pad.
4,437,605
METHODS OF AND APPARATUS FOR PUMPING
SOLDER
John G. Tucker, Lexington, and Hugh A. WelU, Winston-Salem,
both of N.C., assignors to Western Electric Co., Inc., New
York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,835
Int. a.J H05K 3/34
U.S. a. 228-180 R Uaaims
1. A method of pumping solder in a soldering operation,
which comprises:
supporting a roUtable shaft for rotation solely in suppori
means located above an upper surface of a molten solder
bath such that the solder in the solder bath does not
contact the support means;
suspending the rotatable shaft and an impeller on the shaft
from the suppori means and into a container for holding
the molten solder bath;
rotating the shaft and the impeller to pump solder in the
molten solder bath to a molten solder discharge position;
and
precluding the solder at the upper surface of the molten
solder bath from making any significant contact with the
rotating shaft as the solder is pumped to the molten solder
discharge position.
4,437,606
BEVERAGE PACKAGE AND PRODUCTION BLANK
WITH IMPROVED LOCKING FEATURES
Earl J. Graser, Monroe, La., assignor to MaaTillc Senice Corp.,
Denver, Colo.
FUed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362^13
Int. a.3 B65D 5/02. 71/00
U.S. a. 229-40 4 Oairas
1. A wrap-around style beverage package for a plurality of
cans or bottles of beverage, the package surrounding the cans
or bottles and having locking means on overlapping first and
second margins of the package, comprising:
(a) the first margin having a primary male adjustable locking
portion comprising two oversized position tabs and two
undersized position tabs; and
(i) the second margin having primary female adjustable
locking portions engaged by the primary male adjust-
able locking portions of the first margin and comprising
two oversizMJ position slots positioned for engagement
with the oversized position tabs on the first margin and
two undersized position slots positioned for engage-
ment with the undersized position ubs of the first mar-
gin;
(b) the second margin having secondary punch-style arrow-
shaped male locking tabs; and
(i) the first margin having secondary punch-style, female
locking openings engaged by the secondary punch-style
male locking tabs; and;
^^Vfe"
■A^
\."f.
B ••
W^W'
:r I
"^'•^-i'"::
MB^r^'^m
Wi
<»
(c) the first margin having teriiary punch-style, arrow-
shaped male locking tabs on each side of the primary male
adjustable locking portion; and
(i) the second margin having teriiary punch-style female
locking openings on each side of the primary female
adjustable locking portions engaged by the tertiary
punch-style male locking tabs.
4,437,607
MAIL BOX SIGNAL
Edward Negosta, 4803 Old Branch A?e., Camp Sprinn, Md.
20031
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,287
Int. Q\? B65D 91/00
U.S. a. 232—35 10 Claims
1. A mail box having a door, bottom, and an end having a
signal means;
a control means operative on said signal means responsive to
door position;
the improvement comprising:
a first signal member (18) having a plurality of spaced signal
areas:
a second signal member (36) having alternate concealing and
revealing areas movable to alternately register with said
spaced signal areas of said first member in respective
relative concealing or revealing positions of said first and
second signal members to conceal or reveal said signal
1086
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
areas; said revealing areas of said second signal member
being slots therethrough and said concealing areas com-
prising areas intermediate adjacent slots;
said signal members being of the same color except for color
contrast of said spaced signal areas.
4,437,609
AUTOMATIC DAMPER DEVICE
Arne Johannson, Skovde, Sweden, assignor to Svensk Identveck*
ling HandeUbolag, Skdvde, Sweden
FUed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,162
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden, May 15, 1981, 8103068
Int a.i F24F 13/10
UA a. 236-49 J Claims
4 437 608
VARIABLE AIR VOLUME BUILDING VENTILATION
SYSTEM
Robert B. Smith, 4915 Monona Dr., P.O. Box 6141, Madison,
Wis. 53716
Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 379,111
Int a.3 F24F 13/04
U.S. a. 236-13 9aaims
1
20 12 II
\
i' « M «^S) 'J
c5^
;&-^
1. A ventilation system for a building comprising:
(a) a supply duct;
(b) a return duct;
(c) a supply fan, having an inlet and an outlet connected to
the supply duct, which is driven by an AC electric motor;
(d) a return fan, having an inlet and an outlet connected to
the return duct, which is driven by an AC electric motor;
(e) a connecting duct extending from the outlet of the return
fan to the inlet of the supply fan;
(0 means responsive to a condition indicative of the ventila-
tion demands of the building for providing electrical
power to the motors driving the supply and return fans at
a frequency varying in response to the condition sensed in
the building to change the speed of the fans in a manner
which tends to restore the condition to a pre-selected
value;
(g) an outside air duct extending from an intake communicat-
ing with the atmosphere outside the building to connec-
tion to the return duct at a position ahead of the inlet of
the return fan;
(h) a flow sensor positioned in the outside air duct to sense
the air velocity therein and provide an output signal indic-
ative thereof;
(i) damper means in the outside air duct responsive to a
control signal for controlling the resistence to flow there-
through and thereby controlling the velocity of air flow in
the outside air duct;
0) outside air duct control means, receiving the output signal
from the flow sensor and connected to provide a control
signal to the damper means, for controlling the damper
means in response to the rate of flow in the outside air duct
to maintain a substantially constant flow velocity in the
duct, whereby the flow rate through the outside air duct
may be set to match the expected flow rate of air ex-
hausted from the building being ventilated.
1. An automatic damper device for use in a ventilation duct
(1) comprising,
a paddle wheel (2) positioned in said duct and including a
shaft (3) attached to said paddle wheel for attachment to
said duct for free rotation relative thereto, said shaft being
at right angles to said duct axis;
means (16) coupled to said paddle wheel for controlling the
rotation thereof;
a sensor (15) positioned within said duct upstream of said
paddle wheel; and,
a thermostat (14) coupled to said sensor and said control
means whereby said sensor and said thermostat actuate
said control means, in response to changes in temperature
in said duct.
4,437,610
REVERSIBLE QUICK CHANGE NOZZLE HOLDER FOR
SPRAY GUNS
WiUi Huber, and Manfred Metz, both of Altstiitten, Switzer-
land, assignors to J. Wagner AG, Altstiiten, Switzerland
FUed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,568
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany. Dec. 10.
1980,3046464
Int a.3 B05B 15/02
UA a. 239-119 27 Claims
1. A nozzle assembly for spray guns comprising a cylindrical
base body assembly having an internally threaded bore for
attachment to the outlet end of a spray gun, the base body
assembly having an axial recess therein at an end opposite the
threaded bore and open thereto, a nozzle mount received in
said recess, a nozzle received in said nozzle mount a cover nut
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1087
having an axial end wall with an outlet orifice therethrough,
the outlet orifice having an opening larger than the maximum
dimension of a spray stream from the nozzle when the cover
nut is affixed to the base body assembly in operative position
and said opening being less than the maximum dimension of the
nozzle mount, the cover nut receivable on the base body as-
sembly, a quick thread connection between the cover nut and
base body assembly, the thread connection providing first and
second rotational positions of the cover nut with respect to the
base body assembly, the cover nut end wall enclamping the
nozzle mount between the base body assembly and cover nut
axial end when the cover nut is in the first position with respect
to the base body assembly, the nozzle mount freely removable
from the recess when the cover nut is in the second position
with respect to the base body assembly, aligned radial openings
on the base body assembly and cover nut communicating to
said recess, a projection on said nozzle mount projecting
through said openings and the opening on the cover nut having
a circumferential dimension to allow rotation of the cover nut
between the first and second positions without interference
with the projection.
body adjacent the flange for receiving a nut which it located
ouuide of the wall.
4,437,611
SELF PROTECTING SPRAY NOZZLE
Alfired A. GUroy, Richmond, Canada, assignor to MacMUlan
Bloedel Limited, Vancouver, Canada
Continuation of Ser. No. 181,408, Aug. 26, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,817
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 10, 1979,
7935179
Int. a.J B05B 1/32. 12/12. 13/06
U.S. a. 239—453 4 Oaims
1. A spray nozzle for spraying a liquid inside of a conduit
through which a corrosive or dirty fluid flows comprising a
tubular body formed from heat resistant thermoplastic material
with a central bore, an inlet at one end and an outlet orifice at
the other end, a plunger formed from heat resistant thermo-
plastic material having a stem slidably mounted within the
tubular body, the plunger having an enlarged head at one end
of the stem located outside the tubular body and adjacent the
outlet orifice so that the boundaries of the outlet orifice acts as
a plunger seat, a bushing fixed within the tubular body to guide
the plunger stem during its movement, an aperiured disk fixed
to the free end of the stem within the tubular body and slidable
within the body, a sleeve positioned within the tubular body
between the bushing and the disk, the sleeve limiting move-
ment of the disk toward the bushing when opening the plunger
to control the size of the outlet orifice opening in the nozzle,
thermoplastic spring means including a coil spring made from
a ribbon of polyester material loosely positioned about the stem
between the bushing and the disk to normally bias the plunger
stem in a direction toward the inlet to have the plunger head
close the outlet orifice, the spring means capable of being
overcome by water under pressure entering the inlet of the
tubular body, and acting on the plunger head from within the
tubular body to move the plunger head away from the tubular
body to open the outlet orifice, and a mounting means on the
nozzle for use in mounting the nozzle just inside a wall of the
conduit so as to interrupt the flow of fluids therein as little as
possible, said mounting means including a flange laterially
projecting from the plunger seat which is located inside the
wall and a threaded poriion on the outer surface of the nozzle
4,437,612
FLOTATION NOZZLE
Stephen Russ, Point Claire, and Don McAnespic, Montreal,
both of Canada, assignors to Midland-Ross Corporatioa,
OeTcland, Ohio
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,916
Int a.3 B05B 1/14
U.S. a. 239—556 14 Claims
1. A nozzle for impinging fluid against a web traveling
adjacent thereto, comprising a housing having a wall which
helps define a chamber through which fluid is circulated,
under pressure, and a plurality of orifices disposed in the wall
and communicating with the chamber and through which fluid
passes from the chamber for impingement against the traveling
web, and characterized by means for directing fluid from the
plurality of orifices in a desired direction, including means for
positioning the plurality of orifices so that the resultant vector
(R) of vectors (V, VI) representing velocities due to sutic and
dynamic fluid pressure at the orifices, is in said direction, and
an annular ridge surrounding each of said orifices and project-
ing from the wall of the housing in a direction opposite the
chamber.
4,437.613
PARTICLE SPREADER APPARATUS
Floyd V. Olson, Rte. 2, Sherbum, Martin County, Minn. 56171
Filed Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,886
Int a.J AOIC 17/00; AOIF 25/18
U.S. a. 239—688 7 Claims
1. A pariicle spreader apparatus for use in the equal distribu-
tion of pariicles, the apparatus comprising:
(a) panicle holding means for receiving pariicles that are to
be distributed;
(b) output means operably associated with said pariicle
holding means for allowing pariicles in said pariicle hold-
ing means to exit therefrom;
(c) pariicle dispersal means for urging pariicles to exit from
said pariicle holding means through said output means;
(d) dispersal guide means operably associated with said
output means for supporiing and guiding pariicles that
have exited through said output means for a preselected
distance from said output means before dispersing such
pariicles;
1088
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
(e) drain means operably associated with said particle hold-
ing means for allowing particles to exit from said particle
holding means through said drain means when said parti-
cle dispersal means is not urging said particles to exit
through said output means; and
(0 deflection means for urging particles away from said
drain means when said particle dispersal means is urging
particles to exit through said output means.
4,437,614
ELECTROSTATIC AIR ATOMIZATION SPRAY
COATING SYSTEM
Theodore Gircowski, Parma, Ohio, assignor to Sinks Manufac-
turing Company, Franklin Park, III.
FUed Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 425,884
Int CL^ BOSS 5/02
MS. a. 239-691 8 cud„„
irregularly shapes major surfaces of a maximum diameter not
more than about three times the minimum diameter, said maxi-
mum diameter being less than about one-inch, said particles
having a particle size distribution including at least about 15
wt. percent greater than one-quarter inch maximum diameter,
at least about 40 wt. percent greater than 1/32 inch but less
than one-quarter inch in maximum diameter and not more than
about 30 wt. percent smaller than 1/32 inch in maximum diam-
eter, which comprises
a. grinding the cellulosic material using a two-stage hammer-
mill having screens in both stages containing a majority of
smaller holes of about one-half inch diameter and a minor-
ity of larger, triangularly shaped holes approximating a
triangle with sides of 1.3-1.7 inches, and
b. removing from the ground material sufficient dust and
fine particles to reduce the percentage of product having
a particle size below 1/32 inch to not more than about 30
wt. percent.
4,437,616
WINDING HBER REINFORCED PIPE FTITINGS
Gerald M. Magarian, Cypress, and Ralph S. Friedrich, Hennosa
o fV,*^.? °' ^*'' ■"'P'O" to Ameron, Inc., Monterey
Park, Calif. '
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,292
Int. a.3 B65H 54/64. 81/08
U.S. a 242-7.02 53 cudm.
1. In an air atomization electrostatic spray coating system
having a hand held spray gun, of the type wherein a How of
atomizing air to said gun is sensed by an air flow sensor for
controlling energization of a high volUge power supply for a
charging electrode on said gun, the arrangement being such
that when the gun is triggered on and an air flow occurs the
power supply is energized, and vice versa, the improvement
comprising a bypass valve which is manually manipulatable to
selectively bypass a flow of air to said gun around said air flow
sensor to permit air atomization spraying with and without
electrostatics.
4,437,615
PROCESS FOR PREPARING ANIMAL BEDDING
PaWck W. Whitenun, Reston, Va., assignor to Recycled Paper
Bedding, Inc., Reston, Va.
Division of Ser. No. 291,482, Aug. 10, 1981, Pat No. 4,378,756,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 74,238, Sep. 10, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,985
Int. a.J B02C 18/286. 19/12
MS. a 241-24 4 cuin„
1. A method for winding a fiber reinforced plastic pipe
fitting having a straight run and a lateral branch comprising:
holding a mandrel for the fitting so that the axis of the run
passes through a point P;
positioning a delivery ring in an X-Y plane for translation in
X and Y directions in the X-Y plane;
translating the delivery ring in the X-Y plane while alter-
nately:
rotating the mandrel around an A axis through the point P
and parallel to the X direction;
rotating the mandrel around a B axis through the point P
and parallel to the X direction; and
delivering at least one fiber roving to the delivery ring;
and
continually delivery at least one fiber roving from the deliv-
ery ring to the mandrel as the mandrel routes alternately
around the A and B axes.
1. A process for preparing animal bedding comprising subdi-
vided newsprint consisting essentially of flat particles with
4,437,617
WINDING APPARATUS FOR FILAMENTARY
MATERIAL HAVING MEANS FOR WINDING A
TRAILING END OF THE RLAMENTARY MATERUL IN
CLOSE ORDER UPON A PACKAGE
Max L. Cardcll, Shelby, N.C, aadgnor to Fiber Industries, Inc..
Oiarlotte, N.C.
Continnatioa-in-pwt of Ser. No. 258,309, Apr. 28, 1981,
•bMdoned. This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,911
I"t aJ B65H 54/02. 54/22
UA a 242-18 EW 12 Claims
1. A winder for winding packages of filamentary material,
comprising:
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1089
means for rotating a package about a longitudinal axis to
wind-up filamentary material which is fed thereto,
traversing means for traversing the filamentary material
along the package axis to produce a helical winding of the
filamentary material, and
controlling means for engaging the filamentary material
prior to the completion of a winding sequence to cause the
trailing end of the filamentary material to be wound for a
plurality of turns in non-helical, close-order relationship
on the package to resist subsequent unraveling of the
filamentary material, said controlling means comprising a
movable arm including a contact edge oriented generally
parallel to a plane defined by the traversing movement of
the filamentary material, said arm being mounted for
movement toward and away from such plane to contact
the filamentary material and displace same out of said
traversing means, said contact edge including a stop for
constraining the filamentary material for winding in a
non-helical, close-order relationship onto the package.
4,437,618
SPOOL DISPENSER
Daniel J. Boyle, Hartland, Wis., assignor to Champion Interna-
tional Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Jul. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 396,164
Int. a.3 B65H 75/18. 75/14
MS. a. 242—71.8 21 Claims
17^
8. A spool dispenser comprising a fh>nt wall panel and a rear
wall panel, a side flap extending from the outer edges of each
front and rear wall panels and foldable relative thereto along a
fold line and a side flap extending from each inner edge of the
front and rear wall panels and foldable relative thereto along a
fold line, a first side wall panel interposed between the inner
side flaps extending from the front and rear wall panels and
foldable relative thereto along a fold line, a second side wall
panel extending from the outer side flap panel and foldable
relative thereto along a fold line.
4,437,619
CATENARY CONTROLLER
Hall Cary, c/o 8074 Hubbwd VaUey Rd., Scrille, Ohio 44273,
and John F. Marquard, Strongsrille, Ohio, auignors to Hall
Cary, Scrille, Ohio, a part interest
FUed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 260,912
Int. a.i B65H 23/20
MS. a. 242— 7SJ1 14 Claims
1. Apparatus for maintaining a catenary-like section of trav-
eling material suspended between a support point and a rotat-
ing reel collecting or dispensing the material comprising:
a stepping motor for rouubly driving the reel in discrete
angular motions of generally uniform magnitude;
a multifrequency ultrasonic transducer positionable in
spaced relation from the catenary-like section and opera-
ble in the pulse/echo mode to sense the position of the
section, the transducer providing an output signal indica-
tive of the section position relative to the transducer, the
said output signal being derived in part from a reflected
portion of a radiated interrogation pulse generated by the
transducer, the interrogation pulse comprising a sequence
of ultrasonic signals of different frequencies, at least a
portion of one of said ultrasonic signals being reflected by
the catenary-like section back to the transducer to consti-
tute said reflected portion from which said output signal is
derived; and
a control means responsive to the transducer output signal
for regulating the frequency of discrete angular motions of
the stepping motor driver reel to maintain the catenary-
like section at a predetermined position relative to the
transducer.
4,437,620
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR GATHERING RINGS
OR WIRE RODS INTO COILS
Masalchi Oxawa, Kimltsn, Japan, assignor to Nippon Steel
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,420
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 13, 1981, 56-55223
Int. a.} B21C 47/00
MS. a. 242—83 7 dalma
■4..
/
p"
m
H
fk
A
a^2
?M M 1
c^SJ
fF^^ i ' '
mi^
:^=^T^
J8-
II
-4S
M M
1. A method of gathering together rings of wire rod into a
coU comprising:
1090
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
dropping continuously supplied rings of wire rod from the
delivery end of a conveyor around a sail in a gathering tub
positioned beneath the delivery end of the conveyor and
having a lateral side open, the saU having a vertically
extending main segment movable only up and down in
said tub and a Uteraily movable vertically extending seg-
ment movable from an original position adjacent the main
segment both up and down and laterally while maintain-
mg iu vertical orientation; and
after a given quantity of rod rings has been gathered on the
sail to form the coil, lowering the main segment while
keeping it vertically oriented to a level where the top
thereof is below the coil, moving the laterally movable
segment laterally through the lateral open side of the tub
while maintaining its vertical orientation to a down-ender
positioned adjacent the sail, moving the main segment up
while maintaining its vertical orientation to the initial
position for immediately starting to gather the continu-
ously supplied rod rings into the next coil, lowering the
laterally movable segment in the down-ender for remov-
mg It from the formed coil, and while in the lower posi-
tion, moving it laterally to a position beneath the original
position and then raising the laterally movable segment to
the original position to make up the complete sail again, all
the while mainuining the laterally movable segment in its
vertical onentation, and while continuing to gather falling
rod rings into the next coil.
2. An apparatus for gathering together rings of wire rod into
coils, which comprises:
a gathering tub adapted to be positioned beneath the deliv-
ery end of a rod-ring conveying means and having one
lateral side open;
a sail in said tub for receiving the rod rings therearound, said
sail having a vertically extending main segment movable
only up and down in said tub, and a vertically extending
laterally movable segment movable both up and down and
laterally while maintaining its vertical orientation from a
position adjacent said main segment to a position spaced
away from said main segment through the laterally ooen
side of said tub;
means connected to said main segment for moving said main
segment only up and down; and
further means connected to said laterally movable segment
for movmg said laterally movable segment both up and
down and laterally in both the raised and lowered posi-
Uons of said laterally movable segment.
folded inoperative position and a non-folded operative posi-
tion, comprising:
a reel shaft defining an axis of rotation:
a tenon formed on an end face of said shaft for rotation about
said axis, said tenon including a notched step at its outer
end including a first camming surface disposed generally
parallel to said shaft axis;
a handle member including a groove, pivot means mounting
said handle on said tenon for pivotal motion about a han-
dle member axis disposed substantially normal to said
tCTon and said shaft axis, and further disposed to one side
of said shaft axis;
a trigger member mounted on pivot means on said handle
member for pivotal motion in said groove about an axis
disposed substantially normal to both said shaft axis and
said handle member axis, said trigger member being
formed with a second camming surface for coaction with
said first camming surface so that said first camming sur-
face exerts a force against said second camming surface
when said foldii^ handle is moved into the operative
non-folded position, said trigger member being located
substantially in a plane which includes said shaft axis in
said non-folded position and having another surface posi-
tioned substantially opposite said first and second cam-
ming surfaces of said non-folded position, said handle
member including surface means bearing against said
another surface, for exerting a reactive force against said
another surface when said folding handle is moved into
said non-folded position to counteract said exerted force,
the interaction of said first camming surface with said
second camming surface and said another 'surface with
said surface means causing said trigger member to be
CMited within said groove and firmly wedged between
said tenon and said handle member, when said folding
handle is moved into said non-folded position, thereby
rendering said handle rigidly mounted on said tenon in
said operative position.
4,437,622
WIRE ROLLER
Merle J. Heider, Humboldt, Iowa, aatignor to Jet Co., Inc^
Humboldt, Iowa
FUed Oct i4, 1980, Scr. No. 196,657
lat a.3 B65H 75/42
UAa242-«6,5R ictatei
4,437,621
HANDLE FOLDING DEVICE FOR nSHING REEL
Aldnori Sdnmoto, Tokyo, Japan, aaaigDor to Daiwa Seiko Inc^
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec 15, 1981, Ser. No. 330,812
Claims priority, appUcatioa Japan, Jan. 27, 1981, 56-10449
lat a^ AOIK %9/(Xi: G05G 1/00
UAa242-84.1J 4Ctaj^
^^
1. A trigger-actuated folding handle for fishing reel having a
1. A wire roller, comprising
a frame,
means for supporting said frame on a vehicle,
a wire receiving spool,
means for routably supporting said spool on said frame, and
power means for routing said spool, said power means
including an electric motor having an output shaft,
means for supporting said motor on said frame adjacent
said spool, and
coacting drive means on said motor output shaft and
spool, said coacting drive means being operative to
rotate said spool in response to operation of said electric
motor,
said means for supporting said ftame on a vehicle including
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1091
clamp assembly, comprising
an upper clamp jaw including a pair of upstanding later-
ally spaced apart upper leg members, means rigidly
interconnecting said upper leg members, a pair of upper
foot portions secured to and extended forward ly from
upper portions of said upper leg members thereby to
overlie the top of a vehicle bumper when said upper leg
members are engaged against a rear wall of said bumper
and a pair of depending flanges on the forward ends of
said respective pair of upper foot portions for engage-
ment with an upper front edge of said bumper,
said frame being rigidly connected to said upper clamp
jaw,
a lower clamp jaw including an inverted generally U-
shaped structure including a pair of generally upstand-
ing lower leg members interconnected adjacent their
upper ends and including a pair of forwardly extended
lower foot portions at the lower ends thereof and up-
standing flanges on forward ends of said lower foot
portions for engagement with a lower front edge of said
bumper,
means for pivotally connecting said leg members of said
upper and lower clamp jaws together with said foot
portions extending outwardly therefrom in vertically
spaced apart relation for receiving a vehicle bumper
therebetween, said means for pivotally connecting said
leg members together comprising a plurality of verti-
cally spaced apart holes in each of the upstanding upper
leg members of the upr>er clamp jaw and a hole in each
of the lower leg members of the lower clamp jaw regis-
tered with selected ones of the holes in the upper leg
members and an elongated pivot pin inserted into and
removably secured in said selected registered holes, said
leg members thereby being constrained to relative piv-
otal movement about the longitudinal axis of said pivot
pin and
torque application means comprising a screw means car-
ried on the leg members of one of said clamp jaws and
positioned for operative engagement with the leg mem-
bers of the other clamp jaw thereby to pivot the lower
leg members rearwardly and downwardly apart from
the upper leg members and thereby urge the lower foot
portions upwardly and rearwardly in clamping engage-
ment on a vehicle bumper.
wheel and protractive force is exerted on the safety belt
webbing in excess of a predetermined threshold amount, and
4,437,623
INTEGRATED WEBLOCKER WITH PROGRAM PAWL
RETRACTOR
Manfred Wydcr, Rowland Heights, Calif., awignor to American
Safety Equipment Corporation, Troy, Mich.
FUed Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 420,713
Int a.3 A62B 35/02; B65H 75/46
\i&, a 242— 107 J 10 Claims
1. In an inertia-responsive safety belt locking retractor for a
vehicle having a frame mounted to the vehicle, a reel rotatably
mounted on the frame having a safety belt webbing wound
thereon for protraction and retraction, a multiple toothed
ratchet wheel fixedly mounted to said reel, a locking pawl
means for engaging the ratchet wheel to prevent protractive
rotation of the reel and protraction of the safety belt webbing
in an emergency, and a weblocker including clamping means
mounted on the frame and having the safety belt webbing
passing operably therethrough for selectively clamping the
safety belt webbing against further movement relative to the
clamping means, the improvement comprising the provision of
an improved safety belt webbing protractive force sensing and
weblocker actuating means comprising:
a rotatably mounted pawl assembly for carrying said pawl
means and having limited rotatimial movement relative to
the retractor frame between deactivated and activated posi-
tions, said pawl assembly rotating to the activated position
when said locking pawl means is engaged with said ratchet
i. — ly ,8i r" ;l
a weblocker actuator for actuating said weblocker to di-
rectly clamp the safety belt webbing passing therethrough
against further protraction in response to said pawl assem-
bly rotating to the activated position.
4,437,624
POSITIONING REEL
Irwin Rosenberg, Ann Arbor, MidL, assignor to Aero-MotiTc
Mfg. Co., Kalamazoo, Mich.
FUed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,637
Int a^ B65H 75/4S
VS. CL 242— 107J 11
1. A suspension positioning apparatus comprising: a housing;
a non-rotating shaft variably positioned along the axis thereof
within said housing; a spool rotationally mounted on said shaft
and adapted to receive a suspension cord therein, said spool
including at least one first engagable projection on a lateral
surface thereof; first biasing means coupled to said spool for
rotationally urging said spool in a first direction of rotation
about said shaft, said first direction of rotation representing the
direction of suspension cord take-up; a first disk rotationally
positioned along said shaft and including a first surface in
facing relation and in contact with the lateral surface of said
spool, wherein said first surface includes at leMt one second
engagable projection thereon for engaging said first projection
when said spool rotates in a second direction representing the
direction of suspension cord pay-out, and wherein said first
disk is movable along the axis of said shaft in responM to the
displacement of said shaft; a second disk fixedly positioned in
1092
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
NfARCH 20, 1984
said housing along said shaft and adapted to contact and fric-
Uonally engage a second surface of said first disk in inhibiting
the rotation thereof; and adjustable control means positioned
on a side of said housing and coupled to said shaft for displac-
ing said shaft along its axis in positioning said first disk in
selective engagement with said second fixed disk/or control-
ling the rotation of said spool in said second direction of rota-
tion when said first and second projections are engaged.
4,437,625
COIL ADAPTER REEL
Eugene R. VtnSlckle, Rte. #3, Box 190, DoTer, Tuscarawas
County, Ohio 44622 . »-ww«wm
Filed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,380
lot a.3 B65H 49/00
UA a 242-129 ^cUdnu
follows a first path when said torque is exerted, and fol-
lows a second path in the absence of said torque, said
a switching element for changing over said drive, arranged
to be actuated by reciprocating movement of said lever
poruon along said second path,
characterized in that said actuating element comprises at
v^.
1. An improved reel construction of the type adapted to be
mounted on the hub of a machine for holding and dispensing a
coil of wire, said construction including:
(a) hub means for mounting the improved reel on a machine
nuD;
(b) a plurality of spaced, radially outwardly extending base
plates mounted on the hub means;
(c) an upstanding post mounted on 'each of the base plates
and extending generally parallel to the axis of the hub
means;
(d) a locking hole formed in each of the base plates adjacent
tne post;
(e) arm means mounted on each of the posts for removably
holdmg a coil of wire, each of said arm means including a
sleeve tclescopically movably mounted on a respective
P<Mt, and an inverted L-shaped rod attached to said deeve-
and '
(0 each of said rods having an outwardly extending portion
spaced from and parallel with the base plates providing a
coil receiving zone therebetween when the arm means is
ui a coil holding position, and a lower portion engageable
in the base plate hole to secure the arm means in the coil
holding position.
4,437,626
MECHANISM RESPONSIVE TO ROTATION STOPPAGE.
Ghislanns M A. M. AidenhoTen, EtadhoTen, Nethertands, as-
signer to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y
PUed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,906
81wSr ^"^^^ WMcation Netherlands, Feb. 16, 1981,
^^Kr^ ^^^IS^^ ^^^^^ ^» ^^^ ^"B ^^/^^
u A u. 242—186 25 Oaiiiu
1. A recording and/or ptayback apparatus comprising a
drive system for transporting a recording medium, a compo-
nent which rotates m response to transport of the medium, and
a device for changmg over the drive system upon stopping of
roution of the component, said device comprising
a lever having an actuating portion,
an actuating element frictionally coupled to said component
and arranged to exert a torque on the lever when the
component routes,
mnns for imparting reciprocating movement to the lever
dunng operation of the drive system, said lever and means
arranged such that during said movement said portion
least one cam arranged to engage said lever as a result of
pivotmg of the actuating element responsive to rotation of
the component, said lever sliding along said cam during
reciprocation, and *
the device includes a guide element for guiding said lever
portion along said first and second paths during reciproca-
4,437,627
INTEGRATED POWER PLANT INSTALLATION
SYSTEM
James R. Mwrehead, Bellerue, Wash., assignor to TTie Boeing
Company, Seattle, Waah. ^
FUed Mar. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 357,746
., o ^ '"*• ^-^ ^^^ ^7/7« 33/00
U.S. a 244-54 ,2 Ctalm.
1. An underwing powerplant instalhition system comprising:
a powerplant;
strut means for securing said powerplant to the wing of said
aircraft;
a plurality of aircraft wing bracket fittings including a first,
forwardly extending fitting secured to a front wing spar, a
pair of laterally spaced dependent fittings secured to said
front wmg spar, and a fourth dependent fitting secured to
a rear wing spar;
first lug means including a pair of laterally spaced lugs se-
cured to the upper rear edge portion of said strut means
for aligned matmg with said pair of laterally spaced de-
pendent wing bracket fittings;
linkage means having one end thereof secured to the remain-
der of said plundity of aircraft wing bracket fittings; and
second lug means including a third lug secured to the upper
surface of said strut means mid-way along the longitudinal
extend thereof for engagement with a first one of said
linkage means, and a fourth lug secured to the lower rear
edge portion of said strut means for engagement with a
second one of said linkage roeans.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1093
4,437,628
POSITION AND RESTRAINT SYSTEM FOR
AIRCREWMAN
Marcus Schwartz, Warmhiftcr, Pa., aaaignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Na?y,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Jun. 29, 1979, Ser. No. 53,465
Int. a.3 B64D 25/02. 25/06
U.S. a. 244—122 AG 3 Claims
and said seat back portion is disposed in its seat back
mode, and disappearing behind said seat back portion
1. A system for positioning and restraining an aircrewman in
an aircraft ejection seat catapulted by a thrust motor compris-
ing, in combination:
a torso harness suit including lap belt means formed to be
releasably connected at one end to the seat, and shoulder
strap means;
retracting means formed to be secured to the seat including
restraint strap means releasably connected at the outer
ends to said shoulder strap means;
inflatable vest means formed to be worn by the aircrewman
and positioned beneath the front and shoulder portions of
said suit adjacent to said lap belt means and said shoulder
strap means for forcing upper and lower torso of the
aircrewman against the back of the seat; and
control means operable by the aircrewman for emergency
escape including first actuator means connected to said
retracting means for concomittantly retracting said re-
straint strap means and inflating said vest means, and
second actuator means formed to be connected to the
thrust motor for initiating ejection a predetermine time
after operation of said first actuating means;
whereby the aircrewman's spinal column is positioned as
near as possible along the direction of seat ejection.
4,437,629
SEAT STRUCTURE HAVING AN ADJUSTABLE SEAT
BACK AND SUPPORT SHELF ESPECIALLY FOR
ACCOMMODATING PARACHUTE PACKS
Martio W. Roine, Federal Way, Wash., assignor to The Boeing
Company, Seattle, Wash.
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,520
Int CL^ B64D 11/06
U.S. a. 244^122 R 15 Claims
1. Seat structure, comprising:
a seat bottom portion;
a seat back portion; and
means movable between first and second positions, and
operatively connected to said seat back portion along the
lower edge portion of said seat back portion, for serving as
a support platform projecting forwardly of said seat back
portion when said means is disposed in said first position
when said means is disposed in said second position and
said seat back portion is disposed in its seat back mode.
4,437,630
SPRAY BOOM APPARATUS FOR APPLYING
CHEMICAL DISPERSANTS TO OCEAN OIL SPILLS
James C. Jefferies, Chandler, Ariz., assignor to Biegert Avia-
tion. Inc., Chandler, Ariz.
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,260
Int. a.3 B64D 1/18
U.S. a. 244—136 1 Claim
1. In combination with a transport aircraft, said aircraft
including
a fuselage having an exterior aerodynamic surface,
wings attached to the fuselage,
a hold formed within the fuselage for receiving and carrying
cargo during flight of said aircraft, and
an entranceway formed in the fuselage for loading and un-
loading cargo into and from the hold,
boom and nozzle spray apparatus for in-flight adaptation of the
aircraft for aerial swath spraying, said boom and nozzle appa-
ratus generally
permitting said aircraft to be modified for aerial spraying by
extending a spray boom while in flight over a designated
spraying area so that aerodynamic drag which would be
caused by having the boom extended during flight to and
from the designated spraying area is eliminated,
eliminating having to structurally modify the aircraft during
installation of said boom and nozzle apparatus,
being quickly and conveniently installed in said cargo hold
so the aircraft can be rapidly fitted with said apparatus and
take flight,
being readily removed from the aircraft after installation
therein and instaUed in a second transport aircraft, and
reducing corrosion of the wings and fuselage of the aircraft
which occurs when corrosive chemicals are dispensed by
said apparatus,
and including
(a) a support frame.
1094
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
(b) an elongate substantially rigid spray boom carried by said
support frame and having
(i) a fluid conduit,
(U) a plurality of fluid dispensing apertures spaced along
said spray boom in fluid communication with said con-
duit and each shaped, contoured and dimensioned to
spray fluid into the air, and
(iii) an imaginary longitudinal axis,
(c) anchoring means for fixedly detachably securing said
support frame in said cargo hold of the aircraft, said an-
chonng means generally being utilized in combination
with cargo securing means normally provided with the
aircraft in said cargo hold such that structural modiflca-
tion of the aircraft is avoided during installation of said
boom and spray apparatus in said cargo hold,
(d) connector means for attaching a source of fluid carried
on said aircraft to said conduit such that fluid from said
source can flow into and through said conduit when de-
sired and be discharged through said apertures in said
spray boom,
(e) means carried by said frame for moving said spray boom
between at least two operative positions after said frame
anchoring means has been utilized in combination with
said cargo securing means to make fast said frame in said
cargo hold,
(i) a first operative position with said boom stored in said
cargo hold, and
(u) a second operative position with said boom positioned
outside of and spaced away and laterally from said
fuselage with said imaginary longitudinal axis of said
boom at an angle with respect to the direction of travel
of the aircraft when airborne such that spray dispensed
through said apertures of said boom forms a generally
elongate planar swath having an imaginary longitudinal
axis generally parallel to said direction of travel of the
aircraft, a portion of said frame extending from said
hold through said entranceway to support said boom in
said second operative position.
the other end of the thrust rod being pivotally linked
directly to the slat;
•cover means on the thrust rod extending for its length and
completing the wing surface when the slat is held in a
retracted position;
an arc-shaped guide rail connected to the slat; and
a guide means running in engaging relation with the rail and
being connected to the wing.
„ 4,437,«2
l^^^I^^^^ ^^ RAILROAD TRACK ORCUITO
Robert D. Paacoe, Upper St. Ctalr Township, Allegheny County.
Pa„ asaignor to American Standard Inc., Swiasvale, Pa.
Filed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,424
Int. a.3 B61L 27/00
U.S. a. 246-34 R g ^^^
4,437,631
DRIVE FOR LEADING EDGE FLAPS OF AIRCRAFT
WINGS
WUhelm Martens, Delmenhorst, and Homayoun Dilmaghani,
GcMd, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Vereinigte
Flugtechnische Werke Fokker GmbH, Bremen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Apr. 17, IMO, Ser. No. 141,008
Vm%6m*'' Wlication Fed. Rep. of Genmmy, Apr. 20,
Inta.3B64CJ/J0
VS. a. 244-214 2 Ctaims
1. In a wmg for an aircraft and having one or more leading
edge slats, there being a common drive shaft for the slats a
dnve and actuating mechanism comprising:
gear means, drivingly connected to the drive shaft;
a crank arm connected to be driven by the gear means
a thrust rod linked with one end direcUy to the crank arm
1. In a track circuit for a railroad track section, including an
alternating current energy source coupled to the rails at one
end of said section for normally supplying steady energy
through said rails, a track relay connected to said rails at the
other end of said section and responsive only to steady enerey
received through said rails for registering an unoccupied sec-
tion, and a code transmitter means controlled by said track
relay to be activated when a train occupies said section, reset
apparatus comprising,
(a) a counting means operable for counting successive input
clock pulses and responsive to a preselected total count
for generatmg an output pulse of clock pulse duration and
resetting to initiate a new count,
(b) a first switching means coupled to said counting means
and operable for alternately producing continuous first or
second gating signals in response to reception of succes-
sive output pulses from said counting means.
(c) a first and a second gate means controlled by said first
switching means to be alternately enabled by said first and
second gating signals, respectively,
(d) each gate means coupled for alternately receiving code
pulses a the code rate of said code transmitter means,
when active, and operable when enabled for applying
corresponding clock pulses successively to said counting
means, ^
(e) a repeater relay having two control windings and opera-
ble alternately between first and second positions only as
said windings are alternately energized, and
(0 driver circuit means controlled by said counting means
and coupled by said code transmitter means when active
for normally alternately energizing said repeater relay
windings and responsive to the reception of an output
pulse from said counting means for inhibiting the energiza-
tion of the repeater relay winding then coupled by said
code transmitter means to hold said repeater relay in its
existing position during that and the next subsequent clock
pulse periods,
(g) said repeater relay further coupled when a train occupies
said section for coding the energy supplied by said source
to said section rails, said coded energy being periodically
modified at the end of each preselected total count by a
lengthened energy pulse to which said track relay re-
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1095
sponds when said section is unoccupied to restore the
supply of steady energy to said rails.
4,437,633
ELASTIC FASTENING CLAMP FOR ROUND BARS OR
CABLES OF VARIOUS DIAMETERS
Guy Andre, Scyssinet-Parisct, France, assignor to A. Raymond,
Lorrach, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,190
Int. a.3 F16L 3/22
U.S. a. 248—68 R 4 Oaims
1. An elastic fastening clamp operable to secure round bars
of various diameters onto a support plate, comprising two side
walls joined together in U-shaped manner by a bottom plate,
said side walls being provided at their free ends with a flexible
holding tongue integral therewith and angled downwardly
therefrom towards the center of a fastening space formed by
the bottom plate and side walls, said tongues each being
formed with a holding rim at the lower end thereof, each of
said side walls being provided with a flexible support wall
angled downwardly from the upper area of the side walls, said
support walls haying lower rims terminating approximately
centrally between the holding rims of the tongues and the
bottom plate, the adjacent holding rims of the tongues and the
adjacent lower rims of the support walls being normally
spaced apart from one another and defining a gap at the center
of the holding space, said bottom plate having a relatively flat
upper surface and provided with a groove at the center thereof
parallel to the side walls, said groove being substantially less in
width than the spacing between the side walls and wider than
said gap and operable to laterally support a plurality of differ-
ent sized round bars to be held in place in said clamp.
4,437,634
PLASTIC SACK HOLDER
Thomas P. Hambleton, Pine Bush, N.Y^ asaignor to Interna-
tional Paper Company, New York, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 296,945
Int. a.3 A63B 55/04
U.S. CI. 248—97 22 Cldms
having a pair of integral handles and a body portion terminat-
ing in a base portion, said device comprising:
(a) a base member;
(b) a pair of side wall members attached at their lower ends
to said base member;
(c) a rear wall member attached to each of said side wall
members;
(d) means to engage the handles of said plastic sack, said
means comprising a pair of spaced apart knob-like protu-
berances attached to the outer side and near the upper
edge of each of said side wall members; wherein the
height of said side wall members is slightly le&s than the
height of the plastic sack to be loaded therein and wherein
the mtemal perimeter of said base member is at least equal
to the perimeter of the base of said plastic sack when said
sack is in an open position and ready for loading.
4,437,635
PANTOGRAPH UNKAGE SYSTEM
Due T. Pham, Birmingham, England, anignor to National Re-
search Development Corporation, London, England
FUed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,426
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jan. 26, 1981,
8102311
Int a.' F16L 3/00
VJS. a. 248—122 4 Claims
«'»
1. A manipulator comprising a pair of pantographs intercon-
nected to serve as opposed links of a parallelogram linkage, the
pantographs in turn having first and second arms each ofwra-
tive as a parallelogram linkage, means for maintaining inter-
connections of the parallelogram linkages in fixed relative
relationships and means for imparting linear input movement in
all three dimensions to the pantographs whereby three dimen-
sional movement of a tool or the like suitably secured to the
pantographs may be occasioned whUst maintaining its spatial
orientation constant.
1. A device to hold open for loading a limp plastic sack
4,437,636
SELF-ORIENTATING FLUID CONTAINER DEVICE
Anthony Mazzurco, 7 Elsmerc PL, East Northport, N.Y. 11731,
and Richard L. MiUer, Diz HiUs, N.Y., aaaignors to Anthony
Mazzurco, East Northport, N.Y.
FUed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,219
Int a? A47F 5/12
VJS. a. 248—137 4 Claims
1. A self-orienting fluid container device, comprising in
combination, a stationary base having an outer support ring,
support legs depending from said outer support ring and a 1st
pair of diametrically opposed notches formed in said outer
support ring; an outer gimbal frame having an outer gimbal
ring with a 1st pair of radially outwardly extending diametri-
cally opposed spurs which pivotally seat in said 1st pair of
opposed notches, and a second pair of diametrically opposed
1096
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
notches formed in said outer gimbal ring spaced 90 degrees
from sajd 1st pair of spurs; an inner gimbal frame having an
inner gimbal nng with a second pair of radially outwardly
extendmg diametrically opposed spurs which pivotally seat in
said second pair of opposed notches, and a depending basket
for removably supporting a Huid container; and a selective
locking mechanism for automatically retaining the Huid con-
tainer in a fixed orienution when grabbed for drinking, com-
prising an mverted receptacle positioned on the bottom of said
basket, a handle slidably coupled to a support leg for lifting the
ffiSS^BHW^^ ^^'
JtS
device to raise the fluid container for drinking, an arm extend-
ing from said handle, and an upwardly extending prong at the
end of said arm. said prong engaging said receptacle with the
Iiftmg of the handle to prevent rotation of the container with
rwpect to the device whenever it is desired to lift the con-
tainer, and said prong disengaging from said receptacle upon
lowenng of said handle to replace the device, whereby Uie
device will pivot in mutually orthogonal axes to maintain the
container in a vertical orientation when placed down and the
device will keep the container fixed when picked up.
4,437,637
SUPPORT STAND
Royd E. Buachbom Long Lake, uid Glen D. Hansen, Maple
Plain, both of Minn., assignors to Veda, Inc., Long Lake,
Mion.
DiTisionof Ser. No. 115,608, Jan. 28, 1980, Pat. No. 4,320,825.
This application Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,318
Int. a.3 F16M ;i/oo
U.S. a. 248-163 A 7 claims
second leg means in an adjusted position relative to the cross
means said first and second lock means being releasable
whereby the width of the stand can be adjusted, each of said
first and second leg means being adapted to engage a support
m the location, and arm means connected to the cross means
adapted to be attached to the object to hold the object above
the location, said arm means having a downwardly and out-
wardly directed first portion connected to one end portion of
the cross means, and a generally horizontal second portion
connected to the first portion, said second portion located
below Md extended generally parallel to the cross means, said
first and second portions of the arm means being fixed in an
upright plane extended along the length of the cross means
and means on the second portion to support an object between
the cross means and second portion of the arm means.
4,437,638
ARRANGEMENT FOR FASTENING A MONITOR TO A
TEXT STATION
Konrad ScheibenpHug, Germering, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
rignor to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed.
Kep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,242
imXlH^T*^' WUcatioB Fed. Rep. of Genmrny. Apr. 15,
Int. a.J BOID ^7/0?
U.S. a 248-282 , ^Udms
r
1. Apparatus for fastening a screen monitor to a text printing
machine having a housing, comprising an upright column
positioned to one side of said machine housing, an extension
arm extendmg kterally outward from the longitudinal axis of
said column, a first bushing connecting means between one end
of said extension arm and an upper end of said column such
that said extension arm is swivelably disposed relative to said
column, a second bushing connection means between the other
end of said extension arm and said screen monitor such that
said screen is mounted for swiveUble movement relative to
said extension arm other end, wherein said first bushing means
compnses a bush disposed on said column, a pin shaft extend-
ing through said bush and securing said bush to said column a
pin connected at one end to said pin shaft and extending up-
ward therefrom, a connector surface portion formed on said
extension arm disposed over said bush, and a shoulder screw
for clampmg said connector surface portion onto said bush and
bemg threadably received in an upper end of said pin.
1. A stand for supporting an object above a location com-
prising, cross means extended generally horizontal across the
object, said cross means having opposite end portions, each
end portion having a passage, first leg means connected to said
cross means, said first leg means having a first member ex-
tended mto the passage in one end portion of the cross means
first lock means mounted on the cross means engageable with
said first member to hold the first leg means in an adjusted
position relative to the cross means, second leg means con-
nected to said cross means, said second leg means having a
second member extended in the passage in the other end por-
Uon of the cross means, second lock means mounted on the
cross means engageable with said second member to hold the
4,437,639
SELF-ADJUSTING SELF-LOCKING HANGER FOR
PICTURES AND THE LIKE
AlTin W. Stein, 2237 LosaatiTillc Ave., Clnciuuti, Ohio 45237
FUed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,377
Int a.3 F16M 13/00
UA CI. 248-558 ,cw».
I. A self-adjusting hanger for mounting pictures and the like
to a vertical wall surface comprising a wall mount member
having means to fixedly mount it to the wall surface and a
picture mount member having means to fixedly mount it to the
rear surface of the picture along the vertical center line
thereof, each of said members having cooperating arcuate
surfaces by which one of the members may pivotaUy rest on
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1097
the other member and rotate with respect thereto to allow the 4.437 mi
picture to hang straight, said wall mount member including a MOLD FOR RETORDED DISC
mountmg pUte and circular rim forming one of said arcuate Dtrld Stafitsky, Plainsboro, and Ernest A. BereL RobbiniTUl^
surfaces extendina outwardlv frnm ««- — i^ r. r ._ . i^»k -# »j . '. 'J^' "tiwi a. ncrcs, KoDbinsTUIe,
surfaces extending outwardly from one major surface of said
plate, said rim being configured to abut the wall surface to
space said plate therefrom, said picture mount member includ-
ing a semi-circular cut-out forming said other surface, said rim
mating within said cut-out, portion of said rim forming a key
both of N J., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York. N.Y
FUed Sep. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 418,809
Int. a.J B29D 77/00
U.S. a. 249-79 23 daims
portion, said cut-out including a notch dimensioned to mate
with said key portion to prevent relative rotation between said
members, said mounting means further including means for
attaching the wall mount member in first orientation where
said key portion engages said notch to prevent relative rotation
between said members and a second orientation wherein said
key portion and said notch are unmated to permit relative
rotational movement between said members.
4,437,640
BRAONG UNIT FOR CONCRETE FORMWORK
Otto Heinzle, Gotzis, Austria, assignor to Schalungsverleih
Helnzle AG Attstatten CH-9450, Switzerland
Filed Nov. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 322,087
Claims priority, application Austria, No?. 25, 1980, 5759/80
Int. a.3 B29H 5/02
U.S. a. 249-20 5 Claims
1. A mold for molding a recorded disc comprising:
a base plate having inner and outer surfaces,
a cap plate having inner and outer surfaces mounted on the
base plate with the inner surface of said cap plate in op-
posed mating relation with the inner surface of the base
plate, said cap plate having a mold cavity in its outer
surface, and a plurality of separate sets of interconnected
grooves in its inner surface, and
means in said base plate for providing a flow of temperature
control medium to each of said sets of grooves including
separate inlet and outlet passages to each set of grooves.
4,437,642
UFT SYSTEM FOR TILT-UP WALLS
Neil L. Holt, Foster aty, CaUf., auignor to The Burke Cora-
pany, San Mateo, Calif.
DIrision of Ser. No. 199,944, Oct. 23, 1980, Pat. No. 4,367^92
This application Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,575
Int. a.^ B28B 7/28
U.S. a. 249-175 2 CW^
1. A bracing unit for securing formwork sections to a false-
work structure supporting the formwork or to a previously
poured section of a concrete structure, comprising a pressur-
ized fluid inflatable and expandable hose positionable against
the outside surface of the formwork section and a rigid abut-
ment member supporting said hose and for securing said hose
against the outside surface of the formwork structure whereby
said hose and rigid abutment member are placed against the
formwork sections with said hose in the deflated condition and
then said hose is inflated and expanded for applying a uniform
contact pressure against the formwork sections and pressing
the formwork sections against the falsework structure or the
previously poured section.
1. An apparatus for forming a recess about the upper end of
an anchor embedded in a concrete slab, said apparatus com-
prising: a body shell of hollow configuration, said shell having
a smooth convex side and an open concave side opposite said
convex side; a receptacle formed in said body and opening
through the convex side thereof, said receptacle extending
inwardly into a mid-portion of the open concave side whereby
voids are provided in said shell to either side of said receptacle,
said receptacle being complemental in shape to the upper end
of the anchor for receipt of the anchor and frictional engage-
ment therewith, said receptacle having a distal end with shoul-
ders adapted to be seated on the upper end of an anchor re-
ceived therein and an opening affording visual access to the
interior thereof to determined whether or not an anchor re-
ceived therein is seated; and, a top engaged with the body shell
to close the open concave side thereof, said top being releas-
1098
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
able from the shell to afTord access to the opening in the recep-
tacle and the voids to either side of the receptacle.
M M4 *» «•
1. A blowout preventer comprising
a body having a bore extending therethrough and aligned
opposed ram guideways extending outwardly from said
bore through said body,
a pair of bonnets positioned on opposite sides of said body in
covering relationship to the outer openings of said ram
guideways,
each bonnet having a central cylinder therein, a pair of side
cylinders and a pair of openings at each end of said side
cylinders, said side cylinders and openings extending
through the bonnet in parallel relationship to said central
cylinder, said central cylinder being axially aligned with
its guideway,
a ram in each of said guideways,
a rod connected to each ram and extending through the ram
guideway and terminatmg m a piston within the bonnet
cylinder,
a pair of studs secured within the body spaced to the sides of
each ram guideway and extending therefrom in parallel
relationship to be received in the openings and side cylin-
ders in the bonnet,
means responsive to pressure coacting with said studs in said
side cylinders to move said bonnets toward and away
from said body supported on said studs and to pretension
said studs when the bonnet is held against said body,
a nut threaded on each stud to secure the bonnets to the
body,
said pressure responsive means including
a flange extending radially outward from each of said studs
in said side cylmders, and
means for supplying fluid under pressure to said side cylin-
ders at opposite sides of said flange.
4,437,644
ELECTRICALLY OPERABLE VALVE
Gottlieb Wilmers, Neuenstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Audi NSU Auto Union AktiengeseUscliaft, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Jul. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 173,406
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 6,
1979, 2931874
Int a.3 F16K 31/04
U.S. a. 251—11 3 Claims
1. An electrically operable valve comprising:
a housing having a damper chamber, a fluid inlet, a fluid
outlet with a valve seat and a fluid path therebetween;
a movable valve body arranged for cooperation with said
valve seat,
a damper piston slidable within said damper chamber,
a rod for connecting said valve body to said damper piston,
the movement of said rod being damped by said damper
piston, said rod being of the magnetostrictional type
which changes its longitudinal dimension when an elec-
tromagnetic field is applied to it for lifting said valve body
4,437,643
RAM-TYPE BLOWOUT PREVENTER
WUliam L. Brakhage, Jr., and William M. Taylor, both of Hous-
ton, Tex., assignors to Cameron Iron Works, Inc., Houston,
Tex.
FUed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,231
Int. a.3 E21B 3i/06
U.S. a. 251—1 A 5 Claims
off said valve seat; a spring means for urging the valve
body against the valve seat; and
a coil for applying said electromagnetic field to said device.
4,437,645
ELECTRICALLY DRIVEN FLOW CONTROL VALVE
ASSEMBLY
Issbi Nomura, Aichi, and Motonobu Akagi, Kariya, both of
Japan, assignors to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kariya,
Japan
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,976
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 20, 1981, 56-24769;
Feb. 20, 1981, 56-24770
Int. a.2 F16K 31 m
U.S. a. 251—65 2 Claims
1. An electrically driven flow control valve assembly with
comprises:
a body having an inlet pori and an outlet port;
a hollow iron core, disposed coaxially within said body,
having at least one communicating hole for communicat-
ing said inlet and outlet ports through the interior of said
iron core;
a slide valve disposed on the outside of said iron core for
sliding movement axially therealong, said slide valve
having an electromagnetic coil wound thereon, and in-
cluding at least one valve hole which overlaps said com-
municating hole to control the effective opening degree of
said communicating hole as the slide valve slides for regu-
lating the degree of communication between said inlet and
outlet ports;
a pair of permanent nugnets so arranged that the magnetic
flux produced thereby passes through the windings of said
electromagnetic coil at a right angle;
a ferromagnetic member for forming a magnetic circuit for
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1099
the magnetic flux produced by said permanent magneU;
and
a pair of springs for biasing said slide valve and for deliver-
ing an energizing current to said electromagnetic coil;
said slide valve being retained at a predetermined position by
said springs when said electromagnetic coil is in the de-
energized state, and being driven slidably along said iron
core against the force of said springs in response to energi-
zation of said electromagnetic coil by the energizing cur-
rent;
said valve hole being so formed in said slide valve as to
deliver a predetermined initial flow quantity through the
effective opening of said communication hole when said
slide valve is retained at said predetermined position with
said electromagnetic coil in the de-energized sute, and to
temporarily increase and then decrease the flow quantity
through the effective opening of said communication hole
as said slide valve is driven slidably along said iron core
with an increase in the energizing current following exci-
tation of said electromagnetic coil.
4,437,647
QUICK CONNECT-DISCONNECT COUPLING FOR
FLUID LINES
Lm H. Cruse, Ozark, Mo., assignor to Foster Manufacturina
Company, Springfield, Mo.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 104.307, Dae. 17, 1982,
abandoned. This application Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385 J58
Int. a.' CUD 7/00
UA a. 251-149.9 47 Claims
/ot
4,437,646
DISCHARGE VALVE FOR CONCRETE PUMPING
APPARATUS
Da?id E. Bigelow, Milwaukee, and Terry Timmerman, Grafton,
both of WISm assignors to Construction Forms, Inc., Ccdar-
burg, Wis.
Filed Not. 2, 1981. Ser. No. 317,245
Int. a.J P16K 51/06: G05G 1/04
UA a 251-145 12 Claims
1. A valve apparatus adapted to be connected in a concrete
pumping system comprising a tubular valve body having oppo-
site ends adapted to be releasably secured in fluid tight connec-
tion within a high pressure pumping line, said valve body
having a discharge opening in one side thereof, said discharge
opening have a rectangular shape including a longitudinal
length greater than the circumferential length,
a valve pipe secured to said opening and having a corre-
sponding rectangular cross section corresponding to said
opening and forming an extension of said opening, said
valve pipe having an outer substantially planar sealing end
surface,
a valve closure plate means having a substantially flat sealing
surface adapted to abut said planar sealing end surface to
seal said pipe,
a linkage means connected to said valve closure means and
said valve body and including an operating member pivot-
ally mounted for moving said valve closure means be-
tween a first closed position abutting said planar sealing
end surface and a second open position spaced from the
plane of the sealing end surface to fully open said dis-
charge opening.
1. A connect-disconnect coupling which comprises a female
member, a sleeve which encircles said female member, said
female member and said sleeve being relatively movable, a
plug which is dimensioned to telescope into one end of said
female member, locking means on said female member and
complementary locking means on said plug that selectively
respond to telescoping movement of said plug into said one end
of said female member and to relative movement of said sleeve
and female member into plug-locking position to lock said plug
m position within said one end of said female member and that
respond to relative movement of said sleeve and female mem-
ber to plug-unlocked position to release said plug for move-
ment away from said female member, and interacting means on
said sleeve and on said female member which require relative
movement of said sleeve and said female member in a progres-
sive but not necessarily continuous direction of movement
between said plug-unlocked position and at least one of two
predetermined plug-locked positions to cause said locking
means on said female member to coact with said complemen-
tary locking means on said plug to lock said plug in position
within said one end of said female member, said interacting
means requiring relative movement in said progressive but not
necessarily continuous direction of movement to occur in a
predetermined sequence from said plug-unlocked position to a
fim predetermined plug-locked position and then to a further
predetermined plug-locked position whenever said relative
movement is to be from said plug-unlocked position to and
through said two predetermined plug-locked positions and
then back to said plug-unlocked position, said interacting
means preventing accidental relative movement of said sleeve
and said female member in the return direction of movement
between said further predetermined plug-locked position and
either said plug-unlocked position or said first predetermined
plug-locked position.
4,437,648
BELT TENSIONING TOOL
E. R. Thorn, Farmington Hills, and Brent Tbom, Northville,
both of Mich., assignors to Van F. Belknap Co., Wixom, Mich.
FUed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,837
Int. a.^ B66F i/24
U.S. a. 254-93 R , ctaim
1. An endless belt tensioning tool for tensioning an endless
belt that passes around a plurality of spaced apart pulley means
with one of said pulley means being mounted for adjustable
movement relative to the other pulley means, said belt tension-
ing tool comprising:
an actuator assembly including an extensible rod means;
a reaction assembly mounted to one end of said actuator
assembly, said reaction asembly including a first adapter
1100
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
member which is engageable with one of said pulley
means;
a slidable assembly mounted to said extensible rod means,
said slidable assembly including a second adapter member
which is engageable with another of said pulley means;
said first adapter member being releasably mounted on a
reaction arm member and said second adapter member
being releasably mounted on a slidable arm member, and
said adapter members including pulley engaging ends
which extend in opposite directions;
said reaction arm member and slidable arm member being
parallel and said slidable arm member being slidably mov-
able along a track in said reaction arm member;
said reaction assembly including an open generally cylindri-
cal hub member mounted to said one end of said actuator
assembly, said reaction arm member being mounted to the
outer periphery of said hub member with the longtudinal
axis of said reaction arm member being laterally offset
from the longtudinal axis of said extensible rod means, said
around and in said outer tube to position said inner tube, coiled
wire and outer tube in fixed position one to the other.
reaction arm member extending in a cantilevered fashion
away from said hub member and said one end of said
actuator asssembly, said slidable assembly including a
mounting block mounted to said extensible rod means,
said slidable arm member being mounted to the periphery
of said mounting block with the longitudinal axis of said
slidable arm member also being laterally offset from the
longitudinal axis of said extensible rod means, said slidable
arm member extending in a cantilevered fashion away
from the mounting block and said one end of said actuator
assembly and slidably engaging the track in said reaction
arm member, and said mounting block being positioned
within said open hub member when said rod means is fully
retracted; and
said second adapter member being movable relative to said
first adapter member in response to extension of said rod
means for thereby causing selective movement of said
adjusubly mounted pulley means and tensioning of said
belt.
4 437 649
EXOTHERMIC CUTTING ELECTRODE
Perry J. Rieppel, Worthington, and Paul E. Moore, Lancaster,
both of Ohio, assignors to Arcair Company, Lancaster, Ohio
Continuation-in-iMrt of Ser. No. 274,118, Jun. 26, 1981, Pat. No.
4,391,209. This appUcation Apr. 27, 1983, Ser. No. 488,917
Int a.J B23K 35/02
U.S. a. 266-48 5 Claims
4,437,650
BRIQUETTE MELTING APPARATUS
Jan H. L. van Linden, Hampton Township, Allegheny County,
Pa., assignor to Aluminum Company of America, Pittsburgh,
Pa.
Filed Feb. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 470,476
Int. a.J F27B 3/18
U.S. a. 266-144 TQalms
1. Apparatus for melting relatively large floating units of
metal scrap in a molten melting media, the units having oxide
films and solid and gaseous inclusions on and near the surfaces
of the units as well as layers of freshly melted metal after the
units enter the melting media, the apparatus comprising:
a bay for heating the molten media,
a bay for pumping the media from the heating bay to a
circular charging bay,
a circular charging bay for receiving large floating units of
metal scrap, and a rotor means located in said bay for
moving the media therein at a velocity sufficient to re-
move the surface layers of the floating units such that new
metal is continuously exposed to the melting media with-
out the floating units being submerged in the media,
means for preventing the floating units from moving with
the media in the charging bay,
a bay for collecting skim material,
inlet and outlet troughs extending tangentially to and from
the circular charging bay for directing molten media
respectively to the charging bay from the pumping bay,
and from the charging bay to the skim collecting bay,
means for directing molten media from the skim collecting
bay to the heating bay, and
a combustion chamber located adjacent the charging bay for
burning organic material washed from the floating units
by the molten media.
1. In an exothermic cutting electrode of the type comprising
an inner tube around which is wrapped a continuous length of
wire in a helical fashion covered by an outer tube, the improve-
ment comprising a plurality of random indenUtions disposed
4,437,651
COOLING PLATE FOR BLAST-FURNACES
Jean Cordier, Dunkerque, and Pierre RoUot, Dunkerque Malo
les Bains, both of France, assignors to Union Sidenirgique du
Nord et de I'Est de la France, Paris, France
FUed No?. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,281
Claims priority, appUcation France, No?. 7, 1980, 8023805
Int C\? C21B 7/10
U.S. a. 266-193 5 Claims
1. A cooling plate arrangement for use in a blast furnace, the
plate being of cast iron and having a plurality of longitudinally
arranged cooling tubes disposed within said plate and issuing
from said plate on a common first side of said plate in the
region of the upper and lower ends of said plate, said cooling
plate arrangement further having a refractory lining afixed to
a second side of said plate, said second side being opposite said
first side, the improvement comprising means for adapting to
horizontal and vertical deformations in said plate, said adapt-
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1101
ir^c^itsth^r^^'^o-fS^^^^^^^^ jJiurr'" ^-ts ^^"^'-'-'^ '"--• ^-
generally right angles to each other, with the ^c,^^^^^ TrU? ?k ? "''^ ^^ *"** '*"* °"''^' P'P* <«> "^^^^ « "°'
the grooves forming projections, !S th^t the gr<^v« fS^ fl) of [he v"esil ^°""P°"^'"« '^^^''" °' '»>« "PP«^ Po^fon
the bending without cracking of the plate in response to heat
engendered deformations in the horizontal and vertical direc-
tions and simultaneously improve the afixing of said refractory
lining to said second side of said plate.
4,437,652
VESSEL FOR THE TREATMENT OF MOLTEN METAL
Richard A. Weber, Moers, and Carl-Heinz SchUtz, Duisburg,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Thyssen Aktien-
gesellschaft Vorm.Augiist Thyssen-Hutte, Duisburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 401,207
Qaims priority, appUcation European Pat. Off., Jul. 27. 1981
81 105 911.2
Int. a.3 C21C 7/10: C22B 9/04
UA a. 266-275 4cu,^
4.437,653
FLUID-nLLED ENGINE MOUNT DEVICE
ToshUiiko Kakimoto, Tokyo, Japui, assignor to Nissan Motor
Company, Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,836
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 17, 1981, 56-21664
Int. a.J F16F 5/00
U.S. a 267-140.1 8 Claims
27b
?7
20
1. A vessel for the continuous treatment of molten metals
under reduced pressure, according the circulation process,
especially for degassing steel melts, this vessel being provided,
m its bottom, with an inlet pipe which dips into the molten
metal, and an outlet pipe for the molten metal which has been
treated, this outlet pipe being located so that it is spatially
separated from the inlet pipe and, in particular, dipping into the
molten metal, wherein the lower portion (2) of the vessel is
widened, from the upper portion (1) of the vessel, towards the
vessel-bottom (6), in a manner such that the diameter of the
vessel-bottom (6) running through the axes of the inlet and
outlet pipes (7 and 8) exceeds the corresponding diameter of
the upper portion (1) of the vessel, and exceeds the diameter of
1. A fluid-filled engine mount device comprising:
first and second base plate members which are spaced from
each other and connected to a power unit side and a
vehicle body side, respectively;
a block made of elastic material, interposed between said
first and second base plate members and being formed
with a cavity;
a partition plate member located in the vicinity of and
spaced from said first base plate member, said partition
plate member defining a fluid chamber on the elastic block
cavity side and an auxiliary chamber on the opposite side
relative to said fluid chamber, said auxiliary chamber
being defined by a diaphragm member connected to said
first base plate member, said partition plate member being
formed with an orifice through which said fluid chamber
is in communication with said auxiliary chamber, said
fluid chamber and at least a part of said auxiliary chamber
being filled with a fluid; and
an elastic support member for connecting said partition plate
member with said first base plate member, said elastic
support member including a secured section through
which said elastic support member is secured to said first
base plate member, and a generally annular section lo-
cated inside of the inner wall surface of said elastic block
cavity and inside of said first base plate member in the
radial direction, and located between said secured section
and the peripheral section of said partition plate member.
4,437,654
VISE WTTH INTERCHANGEABLE JAW MEMBERS
Pietro Chiappetti, 5341 Hawley A?e., Los Angties, CaUf. 90042
Continuarion of Ser. No. 357,061, Mar. 11, 1982, abandoned.
ThU appUcation Jun. 21, 1983, Ser. No. 505,896
Int a.) B25B 1/24
U.S. a. 269-283 j Claims
1. A vise for holding a workpiece in compression, compris-
ing:
a vise body, said body including a base, a support housing
mounted on said base, a fixed jaw on said support housing,
a movable jaw, and a mechanism for moving said movable
jaw in facing relation to said fixed jaw;
a pair of support blocks, one on said fixed jaw and one on
said movable jaw, each of said support blocks having a
pair of vertically extending ribs on the longitudinally
opposed sides thereof and a longitudinally extending hon-
J102
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
zontal ledge thereon, and having a generally flat front
vertical surface extending between said pair of ribs, said
ribs defining a corresponding pair of laterally outwardly
open and vertically oriented slots disposed in positions
spaced rearwardly from said front vertical surface by the
thickness of said ribs; and
a pair of interchangeable jaw members, each of said inter-
changeable jaw members having a front working surface
and a generally flat rear vertical surface, and a pair of
generally L-shaped locking arms at longitudinally op-
posed sides of said rear vertical surface, said locking arms
each having a first leg portion extending generally rear-
wardly from said rear vertical surface for a distance
greater than the thickness of said ribs on said support
blocks and a second leg portion extending generally later-
the entire thickness of the stack and through the top sur-
face of the suck; and,
conveyor means circulating into and out of said first and
second frames for alternately introducing one of said first
and second support platforms with a full stack into said
first frame and for subsequently removing the empty
support platform out of said first frame;
s a »i D a R
the other of said support platforms being positioned for
cooperation with said piercing means in said second frame
while the one of said first and second support platforms is
positioned for cooperation with said at least one vertically
movable pick-up head in said first frame.
ally inwardly and having a size and shape relative to the
size and shape of said slots on said support block for loose
fitting locking reception of said locking arms of each of
said jaw members with respect to said pair of vertically
extending ribs on one of said support blocks, so that each
of said interchangeable jaw members may be engaged to
one of said support blocks to fit loosely thereon and
moved downwardly by sliding until the sliding is
stoppped by contact of said interchangeable jaw member
with said longitudinally extending horizontal ledge,
whereby said front vertical surface of said support block
and said rear vertical surface of said jaw member are
placed in a facing abutting relation when said front verti-
cal surface of said jaw member is subjected to a rear-
wardly directed compressive force.
4,437,656
SHEET FEEDING DEVICE
Shigeyoshi Onoda, Kawaaaki, and Tateki Nagaoka, Yokohama,
both of Japan, aaaignors to Canon Kaboahiki Kaiaba, Tokyo
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 64,896, Aag. 8, 1979, abandoned. Thla
appUcatioB Jon. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,856
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 29, 1978, 53-105150
iBt CLJ B65H 3/34
UA a 271-10 30 Claims
4,437,655
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING
FLEXIBLE SHEETS FROM A STACK
Caspar A. H. Byttebier, Grote Heerweg 64, B-8749 Waregem-
Beveren, and Jozef Vangheluwe, Roeselare, both of Belgium,
assignors to Caspar A. H. BUttebier, Waregem-Beveren,
Belgium
FUed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 260,988
Claims priority, application Belgium, May 12, 1980, 1/9815
Int, C1.3 B65H 3/22
U.S. a. 271—3.1 Ig Claims
1. An apparatus for separating flexible sheets individually
from a stack of flexible sheets in successive separating cycles,
comprising: '
a first frame;
at least one vertically movable pick-up head in said first
frame for successively separating said sheets individually
from the top of a stack;
means for lowering said at least one pick-up head onto the
top of a stack of flexible sheets;
means for removing each separated sheet out of said appara-
tus;
fu^t and second vertically movable platforms each for sup-
porting a stack;
at least one stack holder adapted to be fitted vertically
through at least the entire thickness of a stack;
a second frame;
means in said second frame for piercing a stack with at least
one stack holder in at least one place vertically through
1. A sheet feeding device attachable to and detachable from
a predetermined part of an image forming machine, compris-
ing:
means for accommodating sheets;
a supporting member, provided in said sheet accomodating
means, for supporting a stack of sheets to be fed there-
from, means for pivotally supporting said supporting
member at a rear portion thereof with respect to the direc-
tion of the feed and means urging a front portion thereof
upwardly;
a rotatable feed roller, at a fixed position, for feeding the
sheets one by one, said feed roller having an incomplete
circular cross-section with a segment thereof cut away,
wherein the cut-away portion of the roller, when feeding
is not taking place, is opposed to the topmost sheet of the
stack of sheets, and upon feeding operation, the circular
section of the roller is in contact with the topmost sheet to
feed it;
a register roller for synchronizing the sheet fed out by said
feed roller with an image to be formed therein; and
a displacing member, so disposed relatively to said circular
section of the roller as to be downwardly movable with
the rotation of the feed roller, and to displace the topmost
sheet downwardly to a predetermined position before said
feed roller is brought into contact with the topmost sheet,
said displacing member maintaining, during non-feeding, a
state of non-contact with the topmost sheet.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1103
4,437,657
SUCnON CUP APPARATUS FOR FEEDING A SHEET
FROM THE BOTTOM OF A STACK
Martin Sclak, Des Plaines, UK, assignor to Astro Machine
Corp., 111.
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,573
Int. a.3 B65H 3/06
UA a 271-100 12 ctal^
1. In feeding apparatus for feeding sheet material one at a
time from the bottom of the stack of the same, said apparatus
including a horizontal support for a stack of sheets, sucking
means for reuining on said horizontal support a vertical sUck
of sheet material, said horizonul support terminating short of
the front end of the stack to provide a feed opening exposing
the front end portion of the bottom sheet in the stack, support
ledge-forming means confronting said feed opening for sup-
porting the weight of the front end of the sUck of sheets,
means for withdrawing the bottommost sheet from the bottom
of the suck through said feed opening and including suction
cup means for engaging the bottom surface of the exposed end
portion of the bottommost sheet in the stack and by force of
suction therefrom and pullinjg the same downwardly from the
suck through the feed opening, the improvement in movable
support structure for said suction cup means and including
carrier means bodily movable between an initial lowered posi-
tion to a raised position where the suction cup means carried
thereby initially conUcts and then pushes upwardly against the
exposed end portion of the bottommost sheet in the suck,
mounting means upon which said suction cup means are di-
rectly supported, said mounting means being mounted for
pivotal movement upon said carrier means so that the suction
plane of the mouths of said suction cup means can be adjusted
to different angles of inclination relative to said carrier means,
and position control means for controlling the position and
inclination of said mounting means on said carrier means by
raising said carrier means to a position where the suction cup
means on said mounting means initially engages the bottom
surface of the bottommost sheet of the stack, with the suction
plane thereof parallel to the sheet, and then raising the same a
small distance further while tilting said mounting means on
said carrier means in a direction away from the said support
ledge-forming means and without any substantial horizonul
movement thereof away from said support ledge-forming
means, and following which said carrier means is lowered to
pull the front end of the bottommost sheet past said support
ledge-forming means with a wiping contact thereof to with-
draw only the bottommost sheet from the stack.
4,437,658
BOTTOM SHEET FEED SYSTEM
Raymond E. Olson, Pompaao Beach, Fla., assignor to Profold,
Inc., Pompano Beach, Fla.
FUed Jnl. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,486
Int 0.3 B65H 3/52
UA a 271-125 7 0.,^
1. A bottom sheet feed system for automatically feeding a
stack of sheets, comprising:
a slanted feed surface slanted between 15* and 45* and hav-
ing means for receiving the stack of sheets;
a first aperture in the feed surface at a location to be beneath
the stack of sheets;
a rouubic agiutor wheel formed of a plurality of evenly
spaced freely routing agiutor rollers beneath the feed
surface and partially projecting upwardly through said
first aperture, the agiutor rollers being evenly spaced
from a central axis of the wheel and along a circle, the
rollers being spaced from one another and being posi-
tioned beneath the feed surface such that when the rollers
strike a bottom-most sheet, it is partially lifted from its rest
position on the feed surface;
all of the rollers being of the same dimensions and of the
same material having a coefficient of friction sufTicicntly
low to prevent wrinkling or bending the boitom-most
sheet;
a peripheral surface of the freely routing rollers of the
agiutor wheel being slightly convex and formed of a
fiberous material;
first drive means for rotating the agitator wheel in a direc-
tion of feed;
at an edge of the feed surface a feed nip means being posi-
,.^'
tioned for permitting feed of a single bottom sheet from a
leading edge of the suck of sheeu;
said feed nip means comprising a rouuble feed wheel sub-
suntially beneath the feed surface and a stationary reurd
surface adjacent the feed wheel;
a spacing of the feed nip means being adjusuble by provid-
ing an adjustment means for moving the retard surface
relative to the feed wheel;
second drive means connected for driving the feed wheel in
the feed direction;
the edge at which the feed nip means is located composing
a second aperture in the feed surface;
the sutionary retard surface of the feed nip means compris-
ing a sutionary retard wheel mounted below and in a
pocket portion of a support member having a perpendicu-
lar abutment surface against which uppermost sheets of
the stack of sheeu abut, and wherein lower-most sheets of
the suck are fanned along the retard wheel, said retard
wheel being dimensioned to contact no more than a |"
thick stack of the bottom-most sheeU; and
the sheet feed system being capable of handling at least
10,000 sheets per hour.
4,437.659
ROTARY DRUM FOR PROCESSING SHEET
MATERIALS
Christopher D. Caron, Longmont, and Donald W. Scbaefer,
Lakewood, both of Colo., aasignors to International Business
Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 191,582, Sep. 29, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcatiofl Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,722
Int a.3 B65H 29/32
U.S. a. 271-276 7 Claim,
1. In a document transport system wherein flexible recungu-
lar sheeu are loaded in seriatim onto a transport mechanism for
1104
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
transport through a processing station, and are unloaded from
said transport mechanism, the improvement comprising:
a transport mechanism including a low inertia rotary vac-
uum drum;
said rotary vacuum drum having a cylindrical surface for
supporting the sheets;
said cylindrical surface having a plurality of elongated slots
with a plurality of communicating ports disposed in said
V
<•
4,437,660
WORD PROCESSOR— CONTROLLED PRINTER
OUTPUT SCANNER MECHANISM
Elliot N. Tompidns, and Shemian S. Kline, both of San Antonio,
Tex., assignors to Datapoint Corporation, San Antonio, Tex.
FUed Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,808
Int. a.3 B65H 43/08
U.S. a. 271—290 10 Claims
1. A word processor-controlled printer output bin apparatus
having a scanning means comprising:
a word processing bin module having a plurality of output
bins for receiving printed documents from a word proces-
sor;
a scanning means for scanning the plurality of output bins,
said scanning means having a signal generating means and
a signal detector means to detect a signal from the signal
generating means to determine from interruptions in the
signal as each output bin is scanned the presence or ab-
sence of documents in an output bin to provide an indica-
tion to a word processor-controlled printer of the avail-
ability of the output bin for receipt of documents and the
amount of documents it is capable of receiving.
4,437,661
FOOTBALL KICKING TRAINER TOY
John P. Chavez, 1522 S. Lamar St., Lakewood, Colo. 80226
FUed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,012
Int. a.' A63B 67/00
U.S. a. 273—55 R 2 Claims
1. An improved football kicking trainer employing a goal-
post of the type having a base adapted to rest upon an underly-
ing surface, a standard connected to the base and extending
upwardly therefrom, a support arm extending laterally of the
standard and connected to the sUndard near the upper end of
the standard, a cross-bar connected centrally to the support
arm and extending transversely to the standard and to the
support arm in a substantially horizontal plane and offset later-
ally from the standard, and a pair of upright bars attached near
opposite ends of the cross-bar and extending upwardly there-
from in substantially independent relationship to deflne in
combination with the cross-bar a U shaped frame in a substan-
tially vertical plane through the cross-bar; and employing a
flexible impact damping means for receiving the force of a
.^
slots, said elongated slots being configured into groups
with each group having a different population of commu-
nicating ports and operable to generate different pressure
zones on said surface;
a low vacuum, high flow blower operable to evacuate the
interior of said drum; and
a motor coupled to said drum and operable to rotate the
drum.
light weight football when, in use, such a football is directed
through the U shaped frame, wherein the improvement com-
prises: each upright having attached at its upper end a pivoted
extension arm extendable upward and in a direction rearward
of said goal po«t,
said impact damping means being suspended from each said
extension arm substantially solely under force of gravity
on the side of the U shaped frame opposite from the direc-
tion of lateral extension of the support arm from the stan-
dard such that the impact damping means is spaced apari
from the cross-bar by at least the length of said suppori
arm for creating a horizontal ball reception area between
the cross-bar and impact damping means.
4,437,662
STRING LOAD APPORTIONED RACKET
Tsai C. Soong, 1839 Jackson Rd., PenAeld, N.Y. 14526
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 228,577, Jan. 26, 1981, Pat No.
4,333,650, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 136,907,
Apr. 3, 1980, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 120,160, Feb. 11, 1980, abandoned, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 68,572, Aug. 22, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,592
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 8, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 A63B 51/00
VJS. CL 273—73 D n Claims
1. A racket having a hand grip joined to a frame supporting
a string network having transverse and longitudinal strings
extending throughout a ball-hitting region spaced from said
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1105
grip, said frame having a shank region extending from said grip
and flaring outward in a throat region and a generally oval
region extending around said ball-hitting region, said racket
comprising:
a. at least a central plurality of said longitudinal strings
having a strung length at least 30% longer than the lon-
gest transverse string in said network;
b. said central plurality of longer longitudinal strings includ-
ing at least one-third of all the longitudinal strings in said
ball-hitting region; and
c. said longer longitudinal strings being strung with at least
30% more tension than said transverse strings.
4,437,663
GOLF CLUB
Qem C. Crisci, 1103 S. Croton Ave., New Castle, Pa. 16103
FUed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,274
Int. a.3 A63B 53/J4
U.S. a. 273— 81 J 5 Chdms
able in a plane disposed substantially perpendicular to the
playfield board for propelling the ball into rolling engagement
with the playfield board along the intersection thereof with
said plane, first drive means coupled to said frame for effecting
continual rotational movement thereof through a predeter-
mined range of movement thereby to vary the orienution of
said plane and the direction in which the ball may be propelled
along the playfield board, second drive means coupled to said
ball propelling means for effecting propelling movement
thereof in said plane, and control means coupled to said first
9
L
1. A two-part golf club comprising a lower portion and an
upper portion, a hand grip on said upper portion and a club
head on said lower portion, means for movably securing said
upper and lower portions together wherein said means com-
prises a plug secured in the end of one of said club portions, an
elongated pin extending from said plug, a sidewardly extend-
ing tab on the free end of said pin, a lock fitting having an
opening therethrough, a slot in the side of said opening and
said lock fitting secured in the end of other said club portions,
the ends of said club portions having said plug and said lock
fitting arranged for mutual engagement, a recessed area in said
lock fitting comprising a ramp in the form of a partial spiral, an
offcenter annular shoulder adjacent said ramp, said tab slidable
on said ramp and against said annular shoulder to a locked
position when said portion having said plug and pin is rotated.
■•^%-^
and second drive means and including the first and second
actuating means, said first actuating means being responsive to
reception of a ball in said receptacle means for actuating said
first drive means and for enabling said second actuating means,
said second actuating means being selectively operable after
enablement thereof for actuating said second drive means, said
control means including deactuating means responsive to pro-
pelling movement of said ball propelling means in said plane
for deactuating said first drive means and disabling said second
actuating means.
4,437,664
PIN BALL GAME WITH OSOLLATING SHOOTER
Max Wiczer, Skokie, and Albin Peters, Chicago, both of 111.,
assignors to Wico Corporation, NUes, lU.
Filed No?. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 326,172
Int. a.3 A63F 7/02. 7/26
U.S. a. 273—121 A 18 Claims
1. Ball control apparatus for use in a pin ball game including
a playfield board on which a pin ball rolls for engagement with
one or more targets, said ball control apparatus comprising a
frame mounted for rotational movement about a predeter-
mined axis, receptacle means carried by said frame for rotation
therewith and adapted for receiveing a ball coaxially with said
axis, ball propelling means carried by said frame for rotation
therewith and disposed for engagement with a ball disposed in
said receptacle means, said ball propelling means being mov-
4,437,665
DICE BOX
Ora Cotter, 7 Bet Horon St., Tel Baruch 69987, Israel
FUed Feb. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 347,358
Int. a.3 A63F 9/04
U.S. a. 273—138 R
5 Claims
1. Pattern generating apparatus comprising:
a housing defining first and second parallel planar surfaces,
1106
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
said surfaces being formed with apertures arranged in
facing registration and defining a plurality of sockets; and
a plurality of pattern bearing elements universally routably
retained in said plurality of sockets, each element defining
pairs of parallel opposite pattern bearing planar surfaces,
said elements being arranged with respect to said sockets
such that, when said housing is disposed adjacent a flat
surface, each of said pattern bearing elements engages said
surface and is universally rotatable thereby so that when
one of said pattern bearing surfaces lies parallel to said
first parallel planar surface the opposite parallel pattern
bearing surface is caused to lie parallel to said second
parallel planar surface whereby a clear pattern indication
is displayed through said apertures.
4,437,666
MECHANICALLY PROGRAMMABLE CHESS PLAY
INDICATOR
John J. Moylan, 658 Aipuni St., Honolulu, Hi. 96821
FUed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,380
Int. a,3 A63F 3/02
U.S. a 273-141 R 3 claims
1. A mechanically programmable chess play indicator, com-
prising:
a flattened supporting body,
an elongated pointer pivotally mounted on said supporting
body for free spinning rotation sweeping a. circular area
thereof.
a plurality of objects colored to correspond to the white and
black chessmen and arrayed in concentric circles sur-
rounding the pivotal mounting of said pointer and in
equally circumferentially spaced relation to each other,
with the objects corresponding to the white chessmen
being interchangeable with each other in one circle and the
objects corresponding to the black chessmen being inter-
changeable with each other in the other circle, the positions
for said objects in said circles exeeding the total number
of chessmen represented by said objects in said circles
whereby desired ones of said positions are unsupplied
with said indicia corresponding with the conventional
chessmen so that, when said pointer comes to rest not
aligned with one of said objects having such indicia, said
pointer may be indexed in the chosen direction of rotation
until it reaches alignment with one of the said objects, the
number of positions unsupplied with indicia before a
pariicular indicium is reached determining the relative
probability of that indicium becoming aligned with said
pointer of each play,
a plurality of knight positions also being provided on said
body at positions individually alignable with said pointer,
each of such knight positions being occupied by an
indicium indicating a possible knight move whereby,
when the first spin of said pointer indicates a knight is to
be moved, a second spin causes the pointer to become
aligned with one of said knight positions and thus indicate
the move to be made by such knight,
and wherein a plurality of move extent positions are also
provided on said body at positions individually alignable
with said pointer, each of which is occupied by a number
indicating the number of consecutive squares on the
chessboard which chosen queen and bishops and rooks
are to move whereby, when the first spin of said pointer
indicates a queen or bishop or rook or pawn is to be
moved, another spin causes the pointer to become aligned
with one of said move extent positions and thus indicate
the number of squares the indicated piece is to move, and
wherein a checkerboard having nine alternating light and
dark squares is provided on said body centered on the
pivotal mounting of said pointer whereby, when the first
spin of said pointer indicates a king or queen or bishop or
rook or pawn is to be moved, another spin causes said
pointer to indicate the direction the indicated piece is to
move.
4,437,667
GEOMETRIC GAME
Ronald L. Miller, 7300 Cascade Rd., Grand Rapids, Mich. 49508
Filed Apr. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 366,607
Int. a.3 A63F 9/08
U.S. a. 273—153 S 11 Ctaims
2 .
2 Z 2 2 2 2
A [a I A B B [B I
1. A game comprising:
a playing unit having a multi-faced geometric configuration,
each face of said playing unit having a plurality of affixing
facets, all of said faces having an identical number and
arrangement of said facets, said playing unit having twist-
ing means for maintaining said facets in a single unit and
allowing any linear combination of said facets on any one
of said faces to be twisted so as to be disposed on a differ-
ent face and simultaneously changing the location of
corresponding facets on corresponding faces;
a plurality of markers, each marker carrying one of a plural-
ity of indicia, at least some of said indicia being orientata-
ble, said plurality of indicia having more distinguishable
indicia than the number of said faces of said playing unit;
affixing means for repeatedly removably affixing each of
said individual markers to each of said facets, said markers
being selected and affixed by a player to said facets of said
playing unit to provide a recognizable pattern of indicia as
a desired starting configuration, the playing unit being
twisted by the player with said markers affixed thereto to
disorganize said player selected configuration of said
markers while said markers remain affixed to said unit,
said playing unit being twisted by the player to return said
markers to the player selected starting configuration;
whereby said markers can be affixed to said facets in any
desired combination by a player and be removed from said
playing unit when said player selected starting configura-
tion is reproduced or to commence a new pattern of play
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1107
prior to termination of the previous pattern of play, and
reaffixed to said facete in a different combination.
4,437,668
PUZZLE POST TOY
Duoy E. SimpMn, BdtiiBore, Md.; David M. Wttliains, New
York« N.Y.; Richard A. ChMc, Baltimore, and Uwrenee B.
Gnibb, Monkton, both of Md., assignors to Johnson A John-
ion B$by Products Compuy, New Brunswick, SJ.
FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 385,146
Int. a.J A63F 9/J2
UJS. a. 273—156 16 Clidms
1. A puzzle toy comprising:
a generally planar base;
a post upstanding from said base;
a plurality of pieces, each having a planar aperture for fitting
around said post and a bottom for resting on said base;
said pieces each having an axial direction perpendicular to
said planar aperture and each piece projecting onto a
plane perpendicular to said axial direction a closed geo-
metric figure, said geometric figure having a long dimen-
sion;
each of said pieces projecting said geometric figure having a
different long dimension;
at least one of said geometric figures being circular and at
least one of said geometric figures being non-circular;
said aperiure of each piece being large enough to accommo-
date each of the other pieces having a smaller long dimen-
sion and not large enough to accommodate any other
piece having a larger long dimension;
whereby said pieces may be stacked onto said post in any
order and, by sufficient manipulating without removal
from said post, can be made to assume a stable configura-
tion in size order about said post.
4,437,669
GOLF PRACnCE PUTTING TRACK
David T. Pelz, 25 Tamarisk Cir., Abilene, Tex. 79606
FUed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 428,337
Int a.) A63B 69/36
U.S. a. 273—186 C 4 Claims
1. A golf putting practice apparatus for providing a visual,
audible, and tactual indication of an improper stroke compris-
ing a putting track formed of a pair of rails, L-shaped in cross
section, spaced apart forming a channel and adapted to accom-
modate a putter head between them, said rails being arcuate in
shape, having the lowermost portion at the center of each of
said rails and the uppermost portions at each of the ends
thereof, the radius of curvature of said arcuate rails approxi-
mating the path of a putter head during a normal putting
stroke; said rails further including a series of indicia lines on the
upper surface thereof and perpendicular to the longitudinal
axes of said rails, said indicia lines being adapted to cooperate
with a similar indicia line on a putter head to provide a visual
indication of the position of said putter head with respect to
said rails during the entire putting stroke whereby deviation of
the putter head from a line perpendicular to the longitudinal
axis of said rails will cause the said indicia line on said putter
head to be at an angle with respect to said series of indicia lines
>^ ,
on said rails, said apparatus furiher including means for adjust-
ing the position of said rails with respect to each other thereby
varying the width of said channel within which said putter
head is stroked so that diviations of said putter head from a
straight line perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of said
channel will cause said putter head to strike the side of said
rails providing an audible and a tactual indication that said
putter head has not followed a straight line defined by said
rails.
4,437,670
CARD GAME
Ullian D. Simon, 2000 S. Eads St., ArUngton, Va. 22202
Continuation of Ser. No. 268,578, May 29, 1981, abandoned.
This application Dec. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 452,794
Int. a' A63F 1/04
U.S. a. 273—296 2 Gaims
■■SI
/^
■■[Iff^
njHui
[^
^f
rroi
SI
]■■■
hu
1. A card game for a plurality of players comprising
a first deck of cards including foriy three cards,
a Tvnx decorative back surface on each of the first deck of
cards,
a different playing surface on each of the first deck of cards,
an investment opportunity depicted on the playing surface
of each of forty of said first deck of cards with a different
opportunity shown on each card,
a second deck of cards having the same number of cards as
the TvnX deck of cards,
a second decorative back surface on each of the second deck
of cards different from the first decorative back surface so
that the first and second decks of cards are distinguishable
from each other.
1108
OITICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
a difTerent playing surface on each of the second deck of
cards,
an investment opportunity depicted on the playing surface
of each of forty said second deck of cards with a different
opportunity shown on each card and being in one-to-one
correspondence with the playing surface on each of the
forty cards in said first deck of cards whereby the playing
surfaces of the forty cards in said second deck of cards are
identical to the playing surfaces of the forty cards in said
first deck of cards,
three of the first deck of cards and a corresponding three of
the second deck of cards are maverick cards with three
different maverick opportunites depicted on the respec-
tive playing surfaces thereof,
a plurality of game tokens being of equal value and being
equally distributed among the plurality of players,
a plurality of containers for holding game tokens,
a plurality of game winning cards randomly selected from
said first deck of cards at an initial point in the game and
being placed, with playing surfaces down, under the plu-
rality of containers with one winning card for each con-
tainer,
a broker selected from among the players, an auction session
conducted by the broker to auction the forty-three cards
in said second deck to the players in response to highest
bids paid by the tokens of the player who made the highest
bid, said paid tokens being randomly placed in the con-
tainers,
a selling session among the players wherein the cards of said
second deck may be purchased for said tokens,
a trading session wherein the cards of said second deck may
be traded among the players,
a recall session wherein the broker uses the first deck of
cards from which the winning cards were initially re-
moved to recall one by one the corresponding cards of the
second deck until all of the second deck cards are surren-
dered except the winning cards, and
the winning cards under the token containers being exposed
face up to be matched with corresponding cards held by
the players who receive the tokens in such containers
whereupon a game winner is indicated by the player
amassing the most tokens.
4,437,671
DUELING INTERACTIVE TARGET SYSTEM
Theodore N. Bnach, Minneapolis, Minn., aisignor to Caswell
International Corporation, Minneapolis, Minn.
, Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Scr. No. 346,504
lat a.3 F41J 5/00
U A CL 273-372 7 ctaims
I— !2£_l// N I /oe I// \T Fwtw
'> f ' ^ — r~f \ \ '
40
-J
c:
of said series connect into said electrical circuit whereby
when any target is struck a display indication is provided
by said indicator means.
4,437,672
GOLF GAME SIMULATING APPARATUS
Robert J. Amuutroot; George E. Gcrpheide, both of SaH Lake
aty, Vtah, and Robert F. WUsob, deccMcd, late of Sdt Ldce
aty, Utah (by Robert D. Wilson, personal rcprescntatlTe),
assignors to Robert D. Wilson, Salt Lake aty, Utah, personal
representative of Robert F. Wilson, deceased
FUed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,622
Int. a.3 A63B 69/36
UA a 273-185 B 20 Claims
1. Apparatus for simulating the playing of golf comprising:
a support defining a tee area from which a golf bail may be
driven by a player utilizing a golf club;
a target screen disposed in front of the tee area for receiving
balls driven from the tee area and from which balls will
rebound;
first sensor means including means for calculating the speed
of a ball and including means for detecting the direction of
travel of said ball driven from the tee area toward the
screen;
first computing means (response) responsive to said first
sensor means for producing an estimate of the distance of
travel and ultimate resting position the driven ball would
have if allowed free flight;
a cup disposed in front of the tee area close to said target
screen into which rebounded balls may fall, said cup
having an upper rim that is generally flush with a floor
surface placed between said target screen and tee area
support;
second sensor means for detecting when a ball falls into said
cup; and
logic means for indicating a holed-out condition when said
second sensor means detects a ball in said cup and when
the first computing means determines that the ultimate
resting position of the driven ball is within a predeter-
mined distance from a golf hole location, said golf hole
location being representative of the location of a simulated
golf hole towards which the player has driven the aolf
ball. •
1. A hit indicating apparatus for a multiple target shooting
range, comprising, in combination:
an electrical circuit, including;
power means;
indicator means;
at least two target means, each of which includes hit sensor
means, said sensor means including an input lead and an
output lead, said sensor means joined in a series array so
that the initial input and fuial output leads of said sensors
4,437,673
SEALING DEVICE
YoshlakI Miyamoto, FukusUma, Japan, assignor to Nippon Oil
Seal Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,404
Ctaims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct 21, 1980, 55-
150340[U]
iBt a.J F16J J5/16. 15/34
U A a 277-65 7 Ctaims
1. A sealing device for sealing the gap between two rela-
tively rotatable machine members such as a rotating shaft
extending through a housing with a gap therebetween com-
prising: a first seal member mounted on the rotating shaft to be
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1109
rotated thereby having a substantially axially extending body
portion and a radial component formed integral with and
extending radially outwardly from said body portion, said
body portion forming an annular groove on the radially outer
surface thereof; a second seal member mounted on said housing
in cooperating sealing relationship with said first seal member
comprising, a reinforcement member made of metal plate
extending substantially radially in said gap. a seal lip made of
resilient rubber provided at the radially inner end of said rein-
forcement member and extending radially outwardly at an
substantially right angle formed between said recess side-
wall and bottom wall;
(c) Wherein said elastomeric sealing device is disposed be-
tween said resilient anti-extrusion device and said first
area.
4,437,675
CHUCK WITH CENTRIFUGAL FORCE COMPENSATION
C. Fred Koenig, III. Montgomery, Ohio, assignor to The Warner
A Swascy Company, Qevcland. Ohio
Filed Jul. 12. 1982, Ser. No. 397,622
Int a.3 B23B 31/14
U.S.a279-lC 10 Ctaims
angle with respect to the shaft and in sliding conUct with said
radial component of said first member, and an axially extending
radially inner circumferential surface on said radially inner end
of said reinforcement member; and a cylindrical axial compo-
nent extending axially from said body portion of said first
sealing member and offset radially outwardly therefrom to
form a narrow annular space between the radially outer cir-
cumferential surface of said cylindrical axial component and
said inner circumferential surface of said reinforcement mem-
ber.
4,437,674
FLUID SEALING DEVICES
George K. Fling, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Vougbt Corporation.
Dallas, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 189,548, Sep. 22, 1980, Pat No. 4,380,342.
This appUcation Sep. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 414,700
The portion of tiie term of tills patent subsequent to Apr. 19,
1990, has been disclaimed.
Int a.J F16J 15/09
UA a 277-188 A 6 Ctaims
1. Apparatus for forming a fluid seal between mating sur-
faces of first and second members movable with respect to
each other wherein said second member separates a first area
containing a fluid at a first pressure and a second area contain-
ing a fluid at a second, lower pressure, said second member
having a recess formed therein, said recess having a bottom
wall and a side wall extending substantially perpendicularly
from said bottom wall and forming a substantially right angle
therewith, said apparatus comprising:
(a) an elastomeric sealing device contained within said recess
in one of said mating surfaces and contacting the other of
said mating surfaces;
(b) a resilient anti-extrusion device which is more rigid than
said sealing device and which is substantially a right trape-
zoid in cross-section contained within said recess, the
longer leg thereof confronting said elastomeric sealing
device. Uie longer base thereof contacting said other of
said mating surfaces, the shorter leg thereof confronting
said recess sidewall. the shorter base thereof confronting
said receu bottom wall, the right angle formed between
said shorter base and said shorter leg mating with the
7. A chuck having a plurality of chuck jaws and a centrifugal
counterbalance associated with each jaw, said centrifugal
counterbalance comprises:
a first lever pivoted about an axis;
connecting means for connecting said first lever to an associ-
ated chuck jaw for moving said first lever and said chuck
jaw in unison;
a second lever pivoted about the same axis as said first lever;
latch means movable between a latched position, locking
said first and second levers for movement together in one
direction, and an unlatched position, permitting indepen-
dent movement of said first and second levers;
a counterweight movable from a stop position, engaging and
moving said latch means to an unlatched position, to a
position, not engaging said latch means and where said
latch means is in a latched position, and movable outward
under centrifugal force to apply force to said second lever
which is transmitted thru said first lever to said chuck
jaws providing centrifugal force compenwtion.
4,437,676
MOBILE TRAVEL TRUNK
John V. KitreU, 4639 Holdrege, Uncota, Ncbr. 68503
FUed Sep. 23. 1982. Scr. No. 422,003
lat a.} B62D 61/00
U.S. a. 280-78 g Ctaims
1. A mobile travel trunk, comprising,
a trunk means having rearward and forward ends, a top. a
bottom and opposite side walls which define a compart-
ment area,
means on the forward end of said trunk means for securing
said trunk means to a vehicle,
a wheeled-suspension means operatively secured to said
bottom of said trunk means,
said rearward end of said trunk means having a trapezoidal
shaped opening formed therein defined by upper and
lower edges and a pair of side edges,
said rearward end of said trunk means having a U-shaped Up
at said upper edge and said side edges of said opening,
a trapezoidal shaped door pivotally mounted at the rearward
end of said trunk means along the lower edge of said
1110
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
opening and being movable between open and closed
positions,
said door having upper and lower t^igfs and a pair of side
edges,
said door having a U-shaped lip at its upper edge and at its
side edges which are adapted to be received by said U-
shaped lip at the upper and side edges of said opening
when said door is in its closed position,
hinge means pivotally securing said door to said trunk
means.
said hinge means including a spring assembly whereby said
door may be moved generally radially outwardly and
upwardly with respect to said trunk means against the
urging of said spring assembly to permit said U-shaped lip
on said door to clear said U-shaped lip on the rearward
end of said trunk means during opening and closing opera-
tions of said door, said spring assembly urging said door
downwardly in the closed position thereof, and
a latch assembly having a latch member mounted adjacent
the lower edge of said door and releasably engaging a
latch plate connected to said bottom wall for preventing
upward movement of said door in the closed position.
4,437,677
HAND AND/OR FOOT PROPELLED VEHICLE
Haig Ksayian, Box 52, Bear Tavern Rd., Titusville, N J. 08560
FUed Feb. 9, 1982, Scr. No. 347^6
Int. a.3 B62M 1/12
VS. a. 280—234 45 Claims
1. A wheeled vehicle adapted to be propelled by a rider
comprising:
a frame,
at least one front and rear wheel rotatably mounted on said
frame;
a tiller tube, having a pair of handle bars at one end thereof
and a pair of foot pedals at the other end thereof for
oscillatory movement of said tiller tube about an axis;
drive means passing about a plurality of pulleys on said
frame and at least one unidirectional clutch when driven
by said drive means turns at least one of said pulleys;
said drive means including at least a length of cable, the ends
of which are anchored to a sheave rotatably mounted to
said tiller tube;
means for steering said vehicle in any position of the work-
ing cycle of said tiller tube;
means for moving said sheave along said tiller tube so as to
go from a high-speed drive flevcl ride condition) to a low
speed drive (hill climbing condition) and vice-versa; and
means for locking and unlocking said sheave in any position
along said tiller tube.
4,437,678
VEHICULAR SUSPENSION
Barry J. Schultz, 738 Highbury Rd., Glen Waverley, Victoria
3150, Australia
per No. PCr/AU81/00102, § 371 Date Mar. 31, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 31, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00445, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 18, 1982
PCT FUed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 367,236
Qaims priority, application Australia, Aug. 6, 1980, PE4905
Int. a.i B62K 25/08
U.S. a. 280—276 11 Claims
^T
1. A vehicle comprising a chassis: at least one wheel; a
suspension including a telescopic suspension strut having first
and second members telescopically coupled together and a
compression spring mounted to resiliently resist inwardly
telescopic movement of said members, the first member being
connected to the chassis and the second member having said
wheel connected thereto for rotation relative thereto; disc
brake means for applying braking torque to said wheel and
comprising a disc mounted for rotation with said wheel and a
disc brake caliper unit, said unit being mounted on an arm
pivotally connected to the suspension strut at the axis of rota-
tion of the wheel; and suspension adjustment means comprising
a first hydraulic piston and cylinder unit coupled between the
second member of the suspension strut and the caliper unit or
arm and arranged to pressure hydraulic fluid in the first hy-
draulic piston and cylinder unit proportionately to the braking
torque applied by said brake means to said wheel, said suspen-
sion adjustment means including a second hydraulic piston and
cylinder unit which is operable to compress said spring only in
response to increased pressure in said hydraulic fluid generated
in response to braking torques being applied to said wheel, and
wherein, when there is no braking torque applied by said brake
means to said wheel, flexure of the suspension does not cause
variations in the pressure of hydraulic fluid.
4,437,679
TUBE STRUCTURE FOR BICYCLE AND MOTORCYCLE
FRAMES
TuUio Campagnolo, Via delta ddmlca, 36100 Vicenza, Italy
FUed Apr. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 365,910
Oaims priority, application Italy, Apr. 15, 1981, 21177/81;
Apr. 15, 1981, 21178/81; Jun. 19, 1981, 22435/81
lot a.} B62K 19/02
VJS. a. 280—281 R 16 Claims
1. Light and strong tube structure for frames of bicycles and
motorcycles, said tube structure having a cross section having
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
nil
a variable wall thickness wall, said structure being comprised
by at least two interconnected layers of different materials, at
1. A truck-trailer connection for connecting a four-wheel
trailer having a center-pivoted front axle to a towing truck,
including in combination:
a pair of generally coplanar links,
a first pair of spaced-apart swivel joints by moving them
symmetrically inwardly or outwardly with respect to the
truck's central fore-and-aft axis connecting said links to
said trailer's front axle, said jointe being equally spaced
from the center pivot of that front axle, and
a second pair of spaced-apart swivel joints connecting said
links to said truck, said second pair of jointt being closer
together than said first pair, and equidistant from the
central fore-and-aft axis of said truck so that in a normal
straight-ahead position of said truck and trailer, said links
converge forwardly such that imaginary lines of extension
of the links intersect a remote forward generally vertical
instantaneous turning axis, and including
means associated with the swivel joints on the truck for
adjusting the separation of those joints to provide selec-
tively variable towing behavior and turning characteris-
tics by control of the remote forward turning axis.
4,437,681
INFLATOR FOR A PROTECnVE INFLATABLE
CUSHION SYSTEM
Gary V. Adams, Brigham Qty, and Fred E. Schneiter, Ogden,
both of Utah, assignors to Thiokol Corporation, Chicago, MI.
Continuation of Ser. No. 152,921, Jun. 3, 1980, abuidoaMl. This
appUcation Jun. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 392,210
Int. a.1 B60R 21/10
VJS. a. 280-733 7 claims
1. A gas generator located on a support strap of a safety
harness of a vehicle restraint within a safety cushion thereof for
inflating said safety cushion, said gas generator comprising:
a body having the form of a thin, flat rectangular package
and including plural side-by-side, elongated combustion
chambers having longitudinal axes which lie in a common
plane and extend substantially parallel to the sides of said
recungular package having the longer dimensions, each
of said combustion chambers being filled with gas generat-
ing material and including filtering, cooling and pH-
adjusting screens, said generator body further including
^.^'•^^''rV"
least one said layer being metallic and at least another said
layer having a preferential direction of tensile strength.
4,437,680
ADJUSTABLE TWO-BAR LINKAGE FOR A
FOUR-WHEEL TRAILER
Leonard B. Della-Moretta, 1796 Russell PI., Pomona, Calif.
91767
DiTUion of Ser. No. 240,199, Mar. 3, 1981. This application Sep.
28, 1982, Scr. No. 425,566
Int. a.3 B62D 53/00
U.S. a. 280-460 R 2 Qaimt
r>H/«^,;„-j,M
an Igniter having a longitudinal axis and being commonly
located with respect to and in communicating relation
with at least two of said chambers, each of said chambers
having an outlet formed in said generator body, said outlet
being in direct communication with the interior of said
cushion for inflating said cushion; and
ignition means for said igniter.
4,437,682
OUTRIGGER FOR USE IN WHEEL-TYPE VEHICLE
Masao Yokoyama; Masaharu Kon, and Hiroshi Ota, aU of
Komatsu, Japan, assignors to KabosUki Kaisha Komatsu
Seisakusho, Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,449
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 29, 1980, 55/153466
Int. a.3 E02P 3/75
U.S. a. 280-764.1 3 cMau
1. An outrigger for use in a vehicle having wheels and an
axle, comprising:
a support member fixedly secured to uid axle;
a first link pivotally mounted at one end thereof to said
support member;
a second link pivotally mounted at one end thereof to said
support member, said first and second links being in paral-
lel to each other;
an earth contacting member having a first section extending
at right angles with the normal travelling direction of the
vehicle just behind one of the wheels, a second section
extending at right angles with said first section towards
the front end of the vehicle along the inside of said one of
the wheels and a third section projecting upwards from
said first section;
the other end of said first link being pivotally connected to
said earth contacting member at an upper end of said third
section and the other end of said second link being pivot-
ally connected to said earth contacing member; and
hydraulic cylinder means pivotally connected at one end
1112
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
thereof to said support member and at the other end to
said earth contactng member.
4,437,684
AUTOMATIC SEATBELT SYSTEM
Shigeni Moriya; Akio Yoahida, both of Toyota; Muneham Mat-
■nnami, Seto; Tatsushi Kubota, Okazaki; Hlrodii Tsuge,
Chiryu, and Yqji Nishlmnra, Nagoya, all of Japan, auigDort
to Toyota Jidoaha Kogyo Kabmrfiiki Kaiaha and Kahii«ii«ici
Kaiitaa Tokai-Rika-Denki-Seiaaluaho, both of Seiiaknsho,
Japan
FUed Oct 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,687
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct. 17, 1980, 55-
147940[U]
Int. a.3 A62B 35/02
VS. a. 280-804 4 Claima
4,437,683
AUTOMATIC SEATBELT SYSTEM
Shigeni Moriya; Akio Yoahida, both of Toyota; Yoshihiro Haya-
shi, Kasugai; Tatsushi Kubota, Okazaki, and Hiroshi Tsuge,
Chiryu, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha and Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai-Rika-Denki-
Seisakuaho, both of Aichi, Japan
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,069
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 9, 1980, 55-128214[U1
Int. a.3 B60R 21 /JO
U.S. a. 280— 804 6 Claims
1. An automatic seatbelt system for automatically fastening
shoulder and lap seatbelt webbings about an occupant in a
motor vehicle, comprising:
a shoulder guide rail substantially extending in a longitudinal
direction of the vehicle along a roof side portion of a
vehicle body;
a shoulder guide member slidably coupled with said shoul-
der guide rail and guiding an end portion of the shoulder
seatbelt webbing;
a lap guide rail substantially extending in the longitudinal
direction of the vehicle along an inner surface of a vehicle
door;
a lap guide member slidably coupled with said lap guide rail
and guiding an end portion of the lap seatbelt webbing;
a reversibly rotatable sprocket wheel fixed to the vehicle
body;
a flexible Upe having a plurality of openings along the longi-
tudinal direction thereof and meshed with said sprocket
wheel, said flexible tape extending continuously along the
vehicle body at least from said shoulder guide member to
said sprocket wheel and connected with said shoulder
guide member at one end portion thereof; and
a flexible wire extending continuously along the vehicle
body at least from an end of said flexible tape to said lap
guide member and connected with the end of said flexible
tape at one end thereof and said lap giiide member at the
other end thereof; said flexible wire being loosely con-
^ nected with said flexible Upe so that said flexible wire
relatively moves with respect to said flexible tape for a
predetermined distance.
2. An automatic seatbelt system for automatically fastening
shoulder and lap seatbelt webbings about an occupant in a
motor vehicle, comprising:
a shoulder seatbelt webbing defined by an upper portion
having a single outer webbing extending from a roof side
portion to a rear lower portion of a door of the vehicle and
a lap seatbelt webbing defined by a lower portion of said
outer webbing;
a shoulder guide rail substantially extending in a longitudinal
direction of the vehicle along the roof side portion of a
vehicle body;
a shoulder guide member slidably coupled with said shoul-
der guide rail and guiding an end portion of the shoulder
seatbelt webbing;
a lap guide rail substantially extending in the longitudinal
direction of the vehicle along an inner surface of the
vehicle door;
a lap guide member slidably coupled with said lap guide rail
and guiding an end portion of the lap seatbelt webbing;
a first sprocket wheel fixed to the vehicle body;
a second sprocket wheel fued to the vehicle body;
a single driving means for rotating said first and second
sprocket wheels;
a flexible shoulder tape having a plurality of openings along
the longitudinal direction thereof, said shoulder tape being
connected with said shoulder guide member and extend-
ing continuously along the vehicle body at least to said
first sprocket wheel with which said shoulder tape is
meshed; and
a flexible lap tape having a plurality of openings along the
longitudinal direction thereof, said lap tape being con-
nected with said lap guide member and extending continu-
ously along the vehicle door and vehicle body at least to
said second sprocket wheel with which said lap tape is
meshed.
4,437,685
BOOK INDEX MARKERS
Jose Valencia, 3329 Amy St., Apt #4, San F'randaco, CaUf.
94110
FUed Apr. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 371,000
Int a.3 B42D 9/00; B42F 21/00
VJS. a. 281—42 5 Claims
1. An index marker in combination with a book, said book
having categorized information compUed on the pages thereof
in a known sequence, said index marker comprising a plurality
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1113
of sheett of material interieaved with the pages of the book and
h»ving a peripheral portion projecting beyond the pages of the
book, said projectmg portions including indicia corresponding
with the sequence of categories on the pages of the book, said
projecting portions being oriented in shingled relation to en-
able observation of the indicia and access to the projecting
portions to facilitate opening the book to the desired page, and
means removably securing the plurality of sheeu to the book to
enable easy assembly of the index marker with the book and
removal therefrom for use with another book without damage
tubes to be axially removed from and replaced in said
plate;
f each of said coupler tubes having an encircling collar
g. said collars having outside diameters substantially larger
than said tube holes; *
h. studs secured to said collars at equiangular spacing around
Mid collars to be parallel with the axes of said coupler
tui)es;
i. said plate having stud holes arranged at equiangular posi-
tions around said tube holes for receiving said collar studs
J. said stud holes and said tube holes being large enough
relative to said coupler tubes and said collar studs to allow
eccentric, axial, and inclination adjustment of said coupler
tubes relative to said plate; and
k. nuts on said studs securing said collars to said plates to
hold said coupler tubes in an adjusted position for connec-
tion to said pipes and said jumper.
4,437,687
WATERPROOF ASSEMBLY OR SEALING AN
APERTURE HOUSING A CONDUIT
ng the sheets and book m assembled relation including a fas- Int Q iwUn i/^J* "^ *
tener extending through projecting peripheral portions of the U.S Q 285-42 ^
sheets adjacent each end of the spin7 of the book, and book ^ Claims
spine engaging means connected with said fasteners, said spine
engaging means including a right angle rigid member having
one leg engaging the exterior of the spine of the book and the
other leg including an eye engaging the fastener, each fastener
including a telescopic screw threaded post assembly to rigidly
clampmgly engage the eye of the anchor.
4,437,686
ADJUSTABLE AND REPAIRABLE FLOW DIVERTER
FOR FOOD PROCESSING EQUIPMENT
Ctortnce W. Wingate, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Fluid Opera-
tioni A Equipment Inc., North Chili, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,496
Int a.3 F16L 25/00
UA a 285-12 7ctal«.
2. Apparatus for providing an extension of an exhaust con-
duit of a building through an aperture in a roof of a building
the roof having upper and lower surf-aces, and for providing a
seal around the aperture and between the exhaust conduit and
the upper surface of the roof to prevent access of moisture into
the aperture, said apparatus comprising
an exhaust conduit extension having upper and lower ends,
said upper and lower ends each including external threads
said conduit extension being comprised of sheet metal and
being adapted to extend through the aperture, and said
lower end of said conduit extension being adapted to be
connected to said exhaust conduit of the building and for
providing and extension of the exhaust conduit, through
the aperture in the roof,
a restraining member threaded onto said lower end of said
conduit extension, at least a portion of said restraining
member engaging said lower surface of the roof,
a collar surrounding the upper end of said conduit extension.
said collar including a peripheral edge,
a resilient seal adapted to surround said aperture and to be
located between said peripheral edge of said collar and the
upper surface of the roof, said resilient seal comprising a
disc including a planar surface, and
means for forcing said peripheral edge of said collar against
said planar surface of said resilient seal for providing a seal
around said aperture, said means for forcing said collar
against said resilient seal including a threaded member
threadably supported on said upper end of said conduit
extension and adapted to force said collar against said
1. An adjustable and repairable flow diverter for food pro-
cessing equipment, said diverter including a mounting plate
supporting junctions for variable interconnection of pipe^
leading to said plate and a movable jumper connecUble be-
tween said junctions at said plate for variably interconnecting
said pipes, said diverter comprising:
a. said junctions being fonned as coupler tubes mounted on
said plate;
b. said coupler tubes having means at one end for connectina
to said pipes;
c. said coupler tubes having means at another end for con-
necting to said jumper;
d. said plate having tube holes arranged to receive said
coupler tubes;
e. said tube holes being larger than the ouuide diameter of
said coupler tubes and large enough to allow said coupler
1040 O.G.— 43
1114
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
resilient seal and to force said resilient seal against the roof
when said threaded member is threaded onto said upper
end of said conduit extension.
4,437,688
RISER PIPE JOINT
J«iB« H. Kranwr, Akron; Roy L. Omdorff, Jr., Kent, both of
Ohio, and Jamei M. Stephens, GrandTiew, Mo., astignora to
The B. F. Goodrich Company, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 25, 1W2, Ser. No. 342,447
Int a.J F16L 77/00, 27/12
VS. a. 285-9S 2 Claims
rality of circumferentially spaced radially extending ports
between said abutment thereon and said second circumferen-
tially extending grooves to interconnect said chamber with the
internal bore of said inner tubular member.
4,437,689
REUSABLE END FITTING
Mark B. Goebel, Holyoke, and Kenneth E. Ufebm, Hampden,
both of Mast., assignors to Tlteflex Corporation, SpringHeld,
FUed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,650
Int. a.3 F16L 33/22
U.S. a. 285-246 ,3 ctai„„
1. A universal joint for use in connecting a pair of axially
spaced risers that are subjected to torsional twisting forces,
each of said nsers having a plurality of conduits, swivel means
and slip joint means interconnecting conduits in one riser to
conduits in an adjacent riser, said slip joint means being located
off-center of said risers, each of said slip joint means having a
longitudinally extending inner tubular member and a longitudi-
nally extending outer tubular member, each of said tubular
member having a flanged end for connection to adjacent con-
duits, an annular abutment on the intermediate portion of said
longitudinally extending inner tubular member, said inner
tubular member having a first circumferentially extending
groove on the one end portion of said inner tubular member
that IS opposite said flanged end. a circumferential extending
groove on the periphery of said annular abutment, said inner
tubular member having a second circumferentially extending
groove spaced between said abutment and said flanged end a
distance from said abutment that is at least equal to the distance
that said first groove is spaced from said abutment, an annular
seahng member of elastically deformable material bonded to
Mch of said grooves, each of said annular sealing members
having an outer surface frictionally engaging an adjacent inner
surface of said outer tubular member, said outer longitudinally
extendmg tubular member having an enlarged intermediate
portion that cooperates with said inner tubular member to
define a chamber with axially spaced annular shoulders, said
annular abutment of said inner tubular member received by
said chamber and operative to selectively abuttingly engage
said annular shoulders, the inner periphery of the end portion
of said outer tubular member remote from said flanged end of
said outer hibular member has a recessed portion to receive an
annular seal that abuttingly and slidingly engages the outer
periphery of said inner tubular member between said flanged
«id of the inner tubular member and said second circumferen-
tially extending groove, said outer tubular member has a plu-
rality of radiaUy extending ports that interconnect said cham-
ber with atmosphere via the external surface of said outer
tubular member, and said inner tubular member having a plu-
1. A two-piece end fitting comprising an elongated insert
means havmg at least an annular barb on one end and a connec-
tor on the other end, said insert having a hose clamping barbed
section between said barbed end and said connector end, said
barbed section extending from the barbed end toward the
connector end and terminating in an annular locking ridge
with a shear surface, said locking ridge being followed by a
first threaded section, collar means having a collar shell and a
second threaded section with a sealing shoulder therebetween,
said shoulder and said ridge cooperating to form an annular
sheanng edge when said first and second threaded sections are
m a closed position, said barbed section having dimensions
which receive and fit into a hose, said second threaded section
havmg a length relative to the length of said barbed section
such that when said first and second threaded sections mesh a
hose fitted into said collar shell projects beyond said shell and
over said shoulder whereby a pilot end section of said hose is
formed, the relative dimensions of said insert means, collar
means and hose being such that said collar shell pulls said pUot
end over said barbed section as said first and second threaded
sections are turned and close upon each other thereby shearing
a tip ofsaid hose between said shoulder and said ridge which
occurs responsive to the travel ofsaid sections when said first
and second threaded sections are turned upon each other, at
which time said collar fits over and surrounds said barbed
section with said end section of said hose therebetween.
4,437,690
HIGH PRESSURE HOSE SWIVEL CONNECTOR
Edwin H. Drath, 1218 S. Patton, Arlington Heights, HI. 60005
FUed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,802
Int. a.3 F16L 27/00
UA a. 285-272 jdaia.
1. A high pressure hose swivel connector, comprising:
a pair of body members, each of which has a fint and a
second end;
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
Ills
each ofsaid members having a respective blind end passage
bore opening through iu first end;
one of said members having means at its first end for con-
necting its bore with a high pressure source;
the other of said members having means at iu first end for
connecting iu bore with a high pressure hose;
each of said members having adjacent to iu second end a
blind end cross port communicating with the inner end of
the passage bore of the member and opening from a side
face of the member;
said side faces being flat and slidably engaged in a common
flat interface plane joint and with said cross poru concen-
trically aligned, so that a continuous high pressure pas-
sageway is provided by way of said bores and ports;
one ofsaid side faces having an annular rabbet groove which
opens into the associated cross port and also opens toward
the opposite side face;
an O-ring pressure sealing ring mounted in said groove;
the dimensions of said O-ring and the dimensions of said
groove being predetermined and corelated to assure that
the O-ring will be under sealing compression when said
faces are in slidable engagement but the inside diameter of
the O-ring will remain free from obstructing said passage-
way through said ports;
and a bolt having a shank of a smaller diameter than said
poru and extending concentrically through said poru and
through apertures through the blind ends of said porU,
and said bolt acting to press said members together and
said faces into swivelling sliding engagement and placing
said O-ring under compression so as to maintain said
interface plane joint free from pressure loss from said
passage.
4437 692
PROTECTIVE HASP FOR PADLOCK
Darid HalopofT, Los Angeles, Calif., assignor to Holmcs-Hally
Industries, Los Angeles, Calif.
Continuation-in-put of Ser. No. 158,827, Jun. 12, 19t0,
abandoned. This appUcation Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,240
Int a.J E05C 5/02
UA a 292-57 6 0Mim
4,437,691
CONNECTOR FOR CORRUGATED TUBING
Ralph M. Laney, 6511 Marsol Rd. Bld.-6 Apt.-323, Mayfleld
Heights, Ohio 44124
FUed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,792
Int. a.3 F16L 17/Oa WOO. J9/08
VS. a. 285-353 6 Claims
1. A connector for connecting a corrugated tube to a
threaded object such as a pipe or a fitting without requiring
modification of the ends of the tube, comprising:
a ferrule surrounding the tube at the endmost corrugations
of the tube, the ferrule engaging the corrugations such
that relative axial movement between the ferrule and the
tube is not possible;
a nut disposed about the tube and having portions engage-
able with the ferrule, the ferrule being disposed intermedi-
ate the ferrule-engaging portions of the nut and the object
to which the tube is to be secured; and
a seaUng member disposed within the nut and adjacent the
end of the tube, whereby the sealing member wiU be
compressed in use between the end of the object and the
ferrule to establish a fluid-tight seal.
1. A protective hasp for a padlock and iu shackle comprising
a back plate having fastening means therein, a cover plate
spaced from the back plate when in a closed position and
forming a space therebetween, and a pair of laterally spaced
pivot ubs having captive ends on adjacent faces of each plate
mounted so that the Ubs of one pair lie adjacent respective Ubs
of the other pair forming seu of adjacent pivot ubs on respec-
tive opposite sides of the hasp with free ends of pivot ubs on
one plate in close proximity to the opposite plate and within
said space between the plates, axially aligned pivot holes in the
pivot Ubs substantially midway between opposite ends of
respective Ubs, and a latch bolt slidably mounted in the pivot
holes whereby to pivoudly assemble said plates so that adja-
cent faces of the respective plates face each other in locked
position, said latch bolt having a slidable locking thrust be-
tween extending locked position on one side ofsaid hasp and a
withdrawn position from said side ofsaid hup. a pair of spaced
locking ubs of substantially the same height as the pivot ubs
on the adjacent face of each plate mounted so that the locking
Ubs of one pair lie adjacent respective locking Ubs of the other
pair forming laterally spaced seU of adjacent locking ubs with
shackle holes in each set of locking ubs in substantial align-
ment, each set of locking ubs being receptive of a padlock
shackle at a location spaced inwardly from side edges of the
cover plate, free ends of locking ubs on one plate being in
close proximity to the opposite plate when the cover plate is in
locked position, said shackle holes being substimtially midway
between opposite ends of the respective Ubs, said cover plate
having one edge portion extending beyond and covering said
pivot ubs, that portion ofsaid cover plate adjacent one of said
edge portions extending beyond and covering said locking ubs
and adapted to cover the padlock shackle and substantially
cover the padlock body when said padlock is engaged with
either set of locking ubs, a transverse projection on the latch
bolt intermediate opposite ends and mounted within the space
between said seu of pivot ubs, said projection in respective
extended and withdrawn positions of the latch bolt having a
position adjacent the respective set of pivot tabs, said projec-
tion having a slot therein for reception of the seu of adjacent
locking tabs whereby upon reception of the padlock shackle
the latch bolt is locked in either extended or withdrawn posi-
tion with the projection beneath the padlock shackle and the
cover plate is simuluuieously locked to the back plate in a
position of protection for said padlock.
1116
/
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M37.693
THERMALLY RESPONSIVE LATCHING DEVICE AND
METHOD OF MODIFYING A LATCHING DEVICE
M«lwtaIUjMi Codec IndiiMpolii, laiL, Mdgnor to VoB Dgpriji,
iBCn iMUanapoUs, lad.
Fltod May 13, 1981, Scr. No. 263,110
lat a.3 E05C 1/02. 15/02: ¥OS? 15/20
UA CL 292-191 n ciaima
and extending toward said sliding panel and with the hinge axis
being in the path of sliding movement of said sliding panel and
being horiiontal for swinging movement of said bar in said
plane, a roller roUtably mounted on the extending end of said
bar and being located in rolling contact with said sliding panel
for rolling along said sliding panel when said sliding panel is
moved toward and away from said security bar while said
security bar is undergoing ita swinging movement, and a stop
mounted on said sliding panel in the path of movement of said
roller and at an elevation relative to the elevation of said hinge
axis to upwardly support said security bar in a downwardly
swung and thereby secured position for restraining said sliding
panel against said sliding movement.
1. Thermally-responsive means for preventing unlatching of
a latching and unlatching device for a door, bulkhead, latch or
the like, in combination with such a device having a base, and
latch means, coupled to said base and movable, relative to said
base, along a pathway between a first, latching position, and a
second, unlatching position, wherein said thermally-responsive
means comprises:
a plate, slidably coupled to said base, in adjacency to said
latch means, for free, slidable movement thereof, in first
and second opposite directions, (a) gravitationally and
obstructively into traverse of said pathway, for preventing
movement of said latch means fully along said pathway,
and (b) counter-gravitationally out of traverse of said
pathway, for permitting movement of said latch means
fully along said pathway; wherein
said plate has side edges on opposite sides thereof; and
retainer means, coupled to said base, (a) having surfaces
which obstruct said side edges and. consequently, prevent
movement of said plate, in either of said first and second
opposite directions, into traverse of said pathway and,
responsive to exposure of said retainer means to a given
temperature, (b) for releasing said, plate whereby the
latter is free to move gravitationally and obstructively, as
aforesaid, into traverse of said pathway.
4,437,694
SLIDING DOOR WITH SECURITY APPARATUS
Renaldo C. Lillo, 441S Wright Ave., Radiie, Wis. 53405
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,845
iBt a? E05C 3/04
U.S. a 292—235
6 Cliims
t
1, ^ "' 1
-'■»- I
-*•
ff
i
f4^
— *
1. A sliding door with security apparatus, comprising a
sliding door track, a sliding door panel slidably mounted on
said track in the longitudinal plane of said track, an upright
member spaced from said sliding panel and on said longitudinal
plane, a security bar hingedly mounted on said upright member
4,437,695
KNOB RETAINER BLOCKER MECHANISM
William R. Foabee, Indianapolis, Ind., anignor to Beat Lock
Corporation, Indianapolis, lad.
FUed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 338,091
Int a.J E05C 21/00
UA a. 292-352 13 Ctoimi
1. Knob retainer-blocking mechanism for a lock set having
inside lock set mechanism and having an
outside knob mounted on a knob sleeve, comprising
an outside knob retainer movable transversely of the sleeve
between a forward knob-retaining position and a rearward
knob-release position,
said retainer being in the form of a plate mounted for diamet-
rical sliding movement in said sleeve and having a central
opening including a thrust-receiving forward border and
side borders which define blocker-engaging surfaces at
opposite sides of a central area of said opening,
a retainer biasing spring having a bight portion in thrust-
transmitting engagement with said forward border and
having side legs extending into stressed engagement with
opposite portions of the knob sleeve and straddling said
central area of the retainer plate opening.
a blocking plunger mounted for movement axially within the
knob sleeve between a blocking position in which it ex-
tends through the central area of said retainer plate open-
ing in blocking relation with said blocker engaging sur-
faces so as to block movement of the knob retainer from
its knob-retaining position to its knob-release position and
a non-blocking position in which it is withdrawn from said
opening and permits such retainer movement, and
plunger control means for positioning said plunger in its
blocking position when the lock set is installed in a door
and is conditioned to prevent lock bolt retraction by the
outside knob, said control means being inaccessible from
the outside of the door when the door is closed, and said
plunger being releasable to its non-blocking position in
response to manipulation of the inside lock set iiM»rimnigm
NfARCH 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1117
4,437696
MOVABLE TRUCK BUMPER
Gerald J. Straab, 6969 Madden Rd., Dexter, Mich. 48130
Filed Oet 9, 1981, Ser. No. 309,929
Int CL^ B60R 19/04
UA a 293-118 11 ctalmg
automobile, said first tubular housing having an open
outer end;
b. a first arm telescopically disposed in said fust tubular
housing, said first arm having a first and a second end;
c. first pivot means movably disposed in said first tubular
housing for pivotally connecting said first end of said first
arm to said first tubular housing and permitting said first
arm to be extended out of said open outer end of said first
tubular housing and then pivoted upward to an upright
position;
d. first locking means for rigidly locking said first arm into
said upright position relative to said first tubular housing;
and
e. a second arm having a first end connected to said second
end of said first arm for extending laterally along the side
of said first automobile when said first arm is in said up-
right position.
S4' ^104
1. A vertically moveable bumper comprising a lift base
rigidly attachable to a vehicle frame, said lift base substantially
vertical in orientation,
a vertically moveable lift frame substantially vertical in
orientation mounted on said lift base,
a first set of guide means providing fore and aft positioning
of the lift frame relative to the lift base,
said first set of guide means comprising pads located be-
tween said lift frame and said lift base to accept fore and
aft compressive loading therebetween during pushing
engagement of the bumper and to provide sliding fric-
tional engagement in unloaded condition, and rollers to
retain said lift frame and Uft base in said sliding frictional
engagement, said rollers being unloaded during compres-
sive fore and aft loading of the pads,
a second set of guide means providing lateral positioning of
the lift frame relative to the lift base,
energizable means connecting said lift base to said lift frame
and adapted to raise said lift frame relative to said lift base,
and.
remote control means operable to actuate said energizable
means from within cab of said vehicle.
4,437,698
FUEL SAVING DEVICE FOR INCREASING FUEL
MILEAGE ON A MOVING VEHICLE
Anthony T. Tantalo, Apt. 4 43 Portland Pkwy., Rocbeater, N.Y.
14621
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,489
Int. a.3 B62D 35/00
U.S. a. 296—1 S 10 Claim
4,437,697
RETRACTABLE AUTOMOBILE SIDEGUARD
Paul R. Hinojos, 1302 W. Amelia, Phoenix, Ariz. 85009
FUed Aug. 19, 1982, Scr. No. 409,656
Int a^ B60R 19/00
VS. a. 293—118 12 aainu
1. a fuel saving device for increasing fuel mileage on a mov-
ing vehicle comprising:
(a) a housing mounted on top of said moving vehicle,
(i) said housing having an air intake opening at the front of
said housing and an exhaust opening at the rear of said
housing for the fiow of air therethrough.
(b) a motor driven rotor disposed within said housing and
positioned in cooperative relationship with said air intake
opening and exhaust opening of said housing so that said
rotor rotates at various rotational speeds in response to a
forward wind pressure generated when said vehicle is
moving in a forward direction, and
(c) rotor drive means for routing said rotor at a greater
speed than said various routional speeds to decrease said
forward wind preuure at said intake opening of said hous-
ing.
1. A retractable side guard assembly for use on an automo-
bile to protect door panels or the like, said assembly compris-
ing in combiiution:
a. a first assembly including a first tubular housing for rigid
attachment to the bottom of a fuvt automobUe approxi-
mately perpendicularly to the plane of a side of said first
4,437,699
MONOCOQUE TRAILER OR BODY SIDE
CONSTRUCTION
MMk A. Lewis, Sioux Oty, Iowa, and MUcc R. Spencer, Hub-
bard, Nebr., asaignon to WUsoa TraUer Co^ Sioux Qty, Iowa
FUed Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,554
lot di B62D 33/04
VS. CL 296—181 9 ri.i—
1. A monocoque body wall having a horizontal length and a
vertical height, said waU including a plurality of elongated
upstanding panel memben having upstanding opposite side
marginal strips, said panel memben being spaced along said
waU and including adjacent laterally overlapping longitudinal
side marginal strips, one side marginal strip of each pair of
1118
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
overlapped wde marginal strips being generally planar and the
other Riargina] strip of each pair of overlapped side marginal
stnp. being slightly laterally offset to one side of the corre-
spondmg panel member and including laterally spaced gener-
ally coplanar opposite longitudinal marginal border portions
«nd a longitudmally extending central channel portion dis-
posed between and formed integrally with said border por-
uons, said channel portions opening toward said one marginal
stnp, and securing means securing at least longitudinally
spaced portions of each of said border portions to correspond-
ing portions of said one overlapped strip, said wall including a
lower longitudinal marginal portion defined by the lower ends
or said panel members, a rub rail extending along said lower
13
marginal portion including a vertical outer flange, a lower
inwardly projecting horizontal flange carried by the lower
marginal portion of said verticl outer flange, an upper inwardly
projecting horizontal flange carried by said vertical flange a
spaced distance below the upper marginal edge of said vertical
flange, and an intermediate inwardly projecting horizontal
flange earned by said vertical flange spaced intermediate said
upper and lower flanges, said intermediate and lower flanges
being adapted to receive corresponding ends of floor beams
therebetween and the lower ends of said panel members being
downwardly abutted against said upper flange and being se-
cured to the mner surface of the upper portion of said vertical
nange disposed above said intermediate flange.
4,437,700
COLLAPSIBLE OR FOLDING CHAIR
S^',^''"'^ ^ ^^^y St., Toronto, Ontario, Canada
IVloR iP2
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 284,131
iBt a.J A47C 4/28
\3S.CL2Sn-4S 7Ctainu
which said seat-supporting rails are in substantial side-by-side
relation to an erect position in which said seat-supporting rails
are spaced apart in chair-deflning relation, and reversely a
unitary armrest and backrest supporting structure extending
between said pairs of legs front to rear at each side, pivot
means pivotally securing each said uniury supporting struc-
ture to the uppermost portion of each respective leg only, on
an axis located outwardly of and below the uppermost extent
or the adjacent inner seat-supporting rails for swinging move-
ment upon said legs from said collapsed position wherein each
said unitary supporting structure is separated from said adja-
cent inner seat-supporting rail to said erect position wherein
each said unitary supporting structure is in substantial upstand-
ing abutment therewith in chair-defining relation, and re-
versely, each said unitary supporting structure including a
remrorcing member projecting inwardly thereof and there-
along and so upwardly spaced from iu said pivot axis as to
move into and out of overlying engagement with the upper-
most surface of said adjacent inner seat-supporting rail when
swung from said collapsed position to said erect position and
reversely.
4,437,701
Jf^?**^"^^"^^ DEVICE FOR ROCIUNG CHAIR
SiT£.'*':°''^'^«^=^*^^^™ACrABLE FOOTOOT
Ned W. Mizelle, High Point, N.C., ..rignor to The L«w Com-
PMy, AltaVista, Va.
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,727
Int. a.3 A47C //O^
UA a 297-85 3, cMm
\
1. In a collapsible chair including a front pair and rear pair of
crossed, pivotally intcrconijected legs having a common pivot
txis extending from front to rear, a seat-supporting rail extend-
ing between said pairs of legs front to rear at each side with
Mch such seat-supporting raUs secured to the uppermost por-
uon of each leg and inwardly thereof and in substantially
pw^lel relation to one another for swinging movement with
stid legs about said pivot axis from a collapsed position in
1. For use on a motion chair, which includes:
a base having longitudinal left and right side rails and a
transverse front rail;
a rocking portion including:
4 rocker cam unit having left and right rockers rockably
supported on said side rails, and a transverse front rail
fixedly mounted relative to said rockers;
a body-supporting portion for supporting a portion of the
chair-user's body;
a motion chair mechanism mounting said body supporting
portion upon said rocker cam unit for movement be-
tween two positions in which the character of support
offered said portion of the chair-user's body differs
substantially so as to provide a sense of greater control
in one of said positions so that the ability of the rocking
portion to rock is desired, and so as to provide a sense
of lesser control in the other of said positions so that the
ability of the rocking portion to rock is not desired; and
means associated with said motion chair mechanism for
selectively moving said body-supporting portion to,
from and between said positions of greater and lesser
control by operating said motion chair mechanism, this
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1119
selectively moving means including a transversally
extending torque bar which is rotated about its own
longitudinal axis clockwise and counterclockwise
through an arc in order to operate said motion chair
mechanism,
a rocker-blocking device, comprising:
a first generally longitudinally extending train of pivotally
connected links having one end adapted to be pivotally
secured to the rocker cam unit and another end adapted to
be pivotally secured to said torque bar, so that as said
torque bar is rotated in the angular sense which causes said
body-supporting portion to be moved to said position of
greater control said first train of pivotally connected links
is toggled about said torque bar and as said torque bar is
rotated in the angular sense which causes said body-sup-
porting portion to be moved to said position of lesser
control said first train of pivotally connected links is de-
toggled from about said torque bar;
said first train of pivotally connected links including means
defining a longitudinally elongated slot having an upper/-
rear end and a lower/front end; and
a second generally longitudinally extending train of pivot-
ally connected links, having one end adapted to be pivot-
ally secured to said base and another end adapted to be
pivotally secured to the rocker cam unit, relative to the
rear of said one end of the first train of pivQtally con-
nected links, with the first and second trains of pivotally
connected links crossing past one another between their
respective ends;
said second train of pivotally connected links including
means defining a longitudinally elongated wedge element
which has upper and lower edges which converge toward
one another rearwardly of said wedge element so that said
wedge element is taller toward the front of the chair and
shorter toward the rear of the chair;
said wedge element being disposed through said slot means
so that a variably, located, longitudinally short band of
said wedge element lies within said slot means;
the dimensions and spatial orientations of said wedge ele-
ment and said slot being such that when said first train of
links is toggled about said torque bar by operation of said
selectively moving means, the band of said wedge element
which lies within said slot means is located toward the
rear of the chair and is so short and so centrally disposed
relative to the length of the slot, that said rocking portion
of the chair is free to be rocked on said base and when said
first train of links is de-toggled from about said torque bar
by operation of said selectively moving means, the band of
said wedge element which lies within said slot means is
located toward the front of the chair and is so tall that its
upper and lower edges are in contact with the upper/rear
and lower/front ends of the slot means, respectively, and
said first and second trains of links, together, thus, consti-
tute a substantially rigid, longitudinally aligned strut
which is active both in tension and compression between
the rocker cam unit and the base to prevent rocking of the
rocking portion of the chair upon the base.
4,437,702
ADJUSTABLE PATIENT CORRECTIVE SUPPORT
APPARATUS
A. Richard Agorta, 45^ 218th St, Baysidc, N.Y. 11361
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,280
iBt a.J A47C 3/00
MS. a. 297—284 7 ClaiiBS
1. An adjustable, patient corrective, support comprising:
(a) a resilient body receiving member;
(b) at least one rigid supporting panel spaced from said body
receiving member;
(c) a plurality of spaced spring members secured at one end
to the rigid panel and extending into the space between
the rigid supporting panel and the body receiving mem-
ber;
(d) at least one pair of opposed spaced elongated flexible
straps extending over and coupled to the free ends of the
spring members;
(e) sloU in the rigid panel adjacent each of the spring mem-
bers to receive the free ends of the flexible straps there-
through; and
(0 fastening means, carried by the rigid panel to secure the
four ends of said at least one pair of straps in any desired
position along their length and individually dispose the
free ends of the springs at any one of a wide number of
angles with respect to the plane of the rigid panel.
4,437,703
SEAT BACK RECLINING MECHANISM
Tsutomu Nishikori, and Yasuo Yoahikl, both of Hiroshima,
Japan, assignors to Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd. and Delta Kogyo
Co., Ltd., both of Hiroshima, Japan
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,513
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 20, 1980, 55-131379
Int. a.3 A47C 1/024; E05D U/10
U.S. a. 297—362 9 Qaims
1. A seat back reclining mechanism for a car seat including
a seat bottom and a seat back which is connected with the seat
bottom for adjustment in an inclination angle with respect to
the seat bottom, said reclining mechanism including stationary
bracket means attached to said seat bottom, movable bracket
means attached to said seat back and connected pivotably with
said stationary bracket means, lock plata means movably con-
nected with said stationary bracket means and having first gear
teeth means, said movable bracket means having second gear
teeth means, coarse, adjusting means for actuating said lock
plate means so that said first gear teeth means is engaged with
said second gear teeth means to thereby effect coarse adjust-
ment of inclination angle of said movable bracket means, ad-
justing movement producing means for producing a seat back
inclination angle changing movement, fine adjusting means for
operating said adjusting movement producing means to effect
fine adjustment of the inclination angle of said seat back, lock-
ing means for locking said adjusting movement producing
means, interconnecting means for interconnecting the locking
means with the fine adjusting means so that said locking means
is actuated through said fme adjusting means to unlock said
1120
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
adjusting movement producing means when said fine adjusting
means is actuated in one direction to thereby allow movement
of the adjusting movement producing means whereby the
mclination angle of the seat back can be adjusted through
operation of the fme adjusting means in said one direction.
4^7,704
MODULAR FURNITURE WITH REMOVABLE OUTER
FABRIC
Vlgen M. Hofscpiaaa, Lot Angeles, Calif, aarigDor to Vlrar,
Incorporated, Glcndalc, Calif.
FUed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,408
Int a.J A47C 4/02
U.S. a. 297-140 8 Claim.
1. An item of furniture comprising:
(a) at least one integral, contoured interior element;
(b) an inner lining disposed in contacting relationship with
and substantially covering said interior element, said inner
lining comprised of a material, having a relatively low
coefficient of friction and which, when under tension, is
capable of stretching approximately twice in each of its
length and width dimensions as when not under tension
(c) a readily removable and replaceable outer material dis-
posed in a slidable relationship with and substantially
covering said inner lining;
(d) means for removably securing said outer material to said
interior element,
whereby said inner and outer materials fit conformly with
respect to the contours of said interior element and said
outer material is able to slide easily over said inner lining,
and is readUy removable from and replaceable over said
interior element.
ment between a raised or closed position and a depending or
open position, said mechanism comprising:
a routable shaft mounted against said rear end member and
mwardly of and longitudinally parallel to said longitudinal
edge of said sideboard and beneath said bed portion of the
truck box, a rear end of said routable shaft extending
ouuide said rear end member of the truck box;
front and rear bell crank levers mounted to front and rear
ends, respectively, of said routable shaft;
bracket means mounted adjacent a rear end of said sideboard
and having a plate surface substantiaUy parallel to said
rear end member and extending inwardly of said longitu-
dinal edge and ouuide said rear end member;
a linkage arm pivoully connected between a depending end
of said rear bell crank lever and a point on said plate
surface of said bracket means such that the longitudinal
center line of said linkage arm lies ouUide the longitudinal
axis of said roUUble shaft when said sideboard is in the
raised or closed position; and
hydraulic cylinder means articulately mounted at an end
thereof below said bed portion of the truck box and adja-
cent the front end of said rouuble shaft, said hydraulic
cylmder means having a piston end articulately coupled to
said front bell crank lever for imparting roUtional motion
to said routional shaft;
said rear bell crank lever having stop means mounted
thereon for stopping roution of said routable shaft, in a
sideboard closing direction, at a position wherein the
longitudinal center line of said linkage arm lies ouUide the
longitudinal axis of said roUUble shaft.
4^7,706
HYDRAUUC MINING OF TAR SANDS WTTH
SUBMERGED JET EROSION
Herbert S. Johnaon, OakTille, Caiuda, aadgnor to Golf Canada
Limited, Toronto, Quada
J^ed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,333
Int CLJ E21C 4 J/ JO
VS. a 299-7 22 daiina
4,437,705
SELF-LOCKING TRUCK SIDEBOARD LIFT AND DUMP
MECHANISM
G«>rge J. Heberlein, 1701-33rd Ave., Greenlcy, Colo. 80632
CoMinaation-iB-part of Ser. No. 66,939, Apr. 4, 1980,
abandoned. This application Oct 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,613
Int a^ B60P 1/26
UAa298-lR jCtaim.
1. A self-locking truck sideboard lift and dump mechanism
for use with a truck box having a bed portion, front and rear
end members, and at least one sideboard pivotally mounted
along a longitudinal edge thereof to the bed portion for move-
1. A method of recovering bitumen from unconsolidated
bitumen-bearing formations including tar sands, comprising:
(a) introducing into said formation at least one nozzle pro-
jecting at least one jet of aqueous hydraulic mining fluid at
high velocity through a liquid medium towards said for-
mation, said jet having a forward component;
(b) bringing said nozzle into proximity with said formation,
said jet impinging thereon with sufficient velocity to
erode said formation and subsUutially separate said bitu-
men from other constituenU of said formation;
(c) advancing said nozzle towards said formation as it erodes
to separate further quantities of bitumen; and
(d) recovering said separated bitimien.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1121
4*437,707
*.^-..» SPRAYING NOZZLE ARRANGEMENT
G«d Bjrt, Sprockhdrel, od Giinter Dingoadi, Btee., both of
iViJS: "? 5«™"y' •miwton to Kn«pe A Co. FertiguBg
to Bergbubadarf GmbH, Haoo, Fed. Rqi. of Germany
FUed Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,722
198L3r2M4r'*^' •^"''*'"' ^'^ ^' "^ ^"""y* J"». ".
Int CV E21C 35/22
UA a 299-81 ,3 ctata.
roller equipped with cutters and a plurality of water spray
nozzles earned by support means which does not roUte with
11 11
1. A spraying nozzle arrangement for a cutting roller for use
m a mining machine and rouuble in a pre-determined direc-
tion, the cutting roller having at least one cutting member
having a penphery and provided with at least one cutting bit,
the arrangement being mounted on said cutting member in the
vicinity of the associated cutting bit and comprising a spraying
nozzle having a central axis; and a nozzle shield enclosing said
spraying nozzle and mounted coaxially therewith and having
an upper face facing outwardly of said nozzle, said upper face
Upenng in a direction opposite to said pre-determined direc-
tion starting from the periphery of the cutting member and
extending to the region located below said upper face, said
nozzle shield having in said predetermined direction a stream-
like shape and defming said predetermined direction a front
portion facing towards said cutting bit, said front portion being
of a wedge-shape and terminated at iu end facing said cutting
bit with a rounded surface, wherein said upper face Upers in
such a fashion that it forms a first portion sloping from said
penphery at a first angle, and a second portion sloping from
the end of said first portion at a second angle relatively larger
than said first angle.
the roller wherein the support means comprises at least one
narrow plate-like component fitted into a groove in the roller.
4,437,709
YOKE APPARATUS
Noel Underman, 227 S. Locuat St, McComb, Miaa. 39648
FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,943
., « ^ *■*• ^'^ ^^^ ^^/-Jft J9/10
U.S. a 308-219 4 0^
4,437,708
CUTTING DEVICES FOR MINING AND TUNNELLING
MACHINES
Wilhelm Stoiteftm, Kamen-HeereB-WerTe, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, aaaignor to Gewerkaehaft Eiaenhntte WeitfUia. Laaen.
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Ang. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 404,734
io2*^«i^*^' •PpUcatioB Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 27,
Int a.J E21C 35/22
UA a 299-81 9ci„„
1. A cutting device comprising in combination, a rouuble
1. A yoke collar apparatus for use with splined couplinas
comprising: *^ • '
a. a subsuntially circular yoke body, having a first U-shaped
half section and a second U-shaped half section, said first
and second U-shaped half sections connecuble to one
another;
b. a pair of parallel edge portions integrally connected in
perpendicular relationship to the back portion of each of
said U-shaped sections, said pair of edge portions and said
back portion defining an open ended continuous circular
channel means within said yoke body;
c. a plurality of roller bearing means." each individually
mounted in equally spaced openings on the inner surface
in said edge portions and extending into said channel
means for engaging a rouuble body within said channel,
providing a substantially frictionless surface between said
rouuble body and said bearing means, each bearing
means of one edge portion being positioned opposite a
beanng means of the second edge portion.
4,437,710
INFLATABLE, INERT GAS-PURGED, WELDING
CHAMBER
Jamea M. MacFarlaod, FMerica, and Bernard W. Kappc, Cam-
den, both of Del, aaaignora to The United Sutes of America as
reprcaented by the Secretary of the Air Force, WasUagtoa,
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,930
Int a.3 B23K 20/00. 35/38.- A62B 15/00
UA a 312-1 J Claim,
1. A welding chamber assembly for welding workpiecet.
1122
OITICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
made of a metal which is susceptible to atmospheric contami-
nation during welding, in an air-free, inert gas environment,
said welding chamber assembly comprising:
a. a wall subassembly which includes:
a rigid wall member made of metal;
means, associated with said wall member, for selectively
permitting the passage of workpieces and other items
through said wall member, wherein this means includes:
an opening through said wall member; a door member
attached to an external surface of said wall member and
selectively movable to cover, and to uncover, said
opening; and means for releasably holding said door
member in a position covering said opening;
means, made of fluid-impervious material, for seeing
through said wall member, with this means associated
with said means for selectively permitting the passage
of workpieces and other items through said wall mem-
ber, wherein said means for seeing through said wall
member includes an opening through said door member
with a window and a welding lens in said opening;
means, associated with said wall member, for permitting
manipulation and welding of said workpieces, wherein
this means includes: at least two port holes in said wall
member; a glove made of fluid-impervious material
connected to each said port hole, with each glove selec-
tively positionable forwardly of, or rearwardly of, said
wall member; and a hole in said wall member for a lead
of a welding torch, with said hole configurated, dimen-
sioned, and sealed, such that it is fluid-tight when said
lead is in said hole; and
»#«rMM«»
^trwdima
M^
Brirnw
»«*^ '«»
means, associated with said wall member, for supporting
said workpieces and other items passed through said
wall member, wherein this support means includes a
metal shelf which is attached to a rear surface of said
wall member, which extends rearwardly therefrom, and
which is disposed below said means for permitting the
passage of workpieces and other items through said
wall member;
b. a collapsible member, which comprises a translucent
reusable bag made of fluid-impervious material, releasably
attached to a flange located on the rear surface of said wall
member, with said collapsible member and said wall sub-
assembly defining a fluid-impervious welding chamber
which houses said means for supporting said workpieces
and other items passed through said wall member and
which also houses said means for permitting manipulation
and welding of said workpieces;
c. means, associated with said fluid-impervious welding
chamber, wherein this means includes: means, including
an air suction device, for attaining a partial vacuum in
conuiunication with said collapsible member, whereby
said member is thereby collapsed; means for removably
loading and releasably binding said collapsed member,
wherein this means includes: padding disposed on. and
selectively around, said collapsed member; a plurality of
hooks fixedly attached to said wall member, and a cord
releasably engaged to said hooks and disposed such as to
criss-cross and be in contact with said padding and said
collapsed member; and means for purging any air remain-
ing in said partially air-evacuated, removably loaded, and
releasably bound, collapsed member, wherein this air
purging means includes a source of inert purging gas in
communication with said collapsed member;
d. means, associated with said fluid-impervious welding
chamber, for introducing inert gas into said chamber to
replace said air evacuated from said chamber; and
e. means for supporting said wall subassembly, said col-
lapsed member, said means for introducing inert gas into
said chamber, and a source of inert gas for use in welding.
4,437,711
MOVABLE STORAGE UNIT CONTROLS
Dean L. Dahnert, Fort Atkinson, Wia^ aadgnor to SpaccMver
Corporation, Fort Atkinsoii, Wii.
FUed May 28, 1962, Scr. No. 382,999
Int CLJ A47B 53/00
U.S. a. 312-201 „ ctafai.
' K AIHJC I
I TC^ 1
1 01.0' START tiSLE
,'SIWSYSTCM
/
y, START tOLtl
Otxit'T
START
AlSLt »
STOP J
AISLES ^?» AISI.E 4 ?* j AISLES
-j:!
Ouo"
STOP aSIS'a
tfuCMT
STABT
S
fr
1. Storage apparatus comprising:
a series of storage units at least some of which have storage
faces and some of which are selectively movable for creat-
ing an aisle between a pair of units for access to the faces
of the separated storage units,
guide means for guiding said units in a direction normal to
said storage faces,
reversible motor driven means mounted on respective units
for driving the unit selectively in one direction or the
other and a controller for each motor responsive to alter-
nate control signals by energizing and determining the
driving direction of the motor,
a plurality of structurally similar programmable control
modules at least one of which is mounted on each movable
storage unit and one of which acts as a system controller
(SC) module, each of said modules including digital pro-
cessor means,
at least one limit position sensing means on each storage unit
which means is in an operated stote when it is in proximity
with any of an adjacent movable unit or a stationary unit
and is in an unoperated sute when spaced from any of said
units,
at least one manual start switch mounted on each movable
storage unit for selection of the desired access aisle,
first circuit means for transmitting resync pulses, generated
by the processor means in said SC module with a constant
interval between them, to the processor means in the other
control modules simultaneously,
second circuit means interconnecting said modules for trans-
mitting serial data bits out of said SC module and from one
control module on a storage unit to the next one,
third circuit means interconnecting said control modules for
transmitting serial data bits from module to module and
into said SC module,
the processor means in each control module on a movable
storage unit responding to receipt of a resync pulse by
initiating definition of a sequence of time slots in each of
which a bit can be transmitted,
the processor means in the control module of the storage
unit whose start switch has been operated responding to
operation by causing the bits for a digital code word
corresponding to the numerical identification of the unit
to be transmitted serially to said SC module in successive
time slots while said start switch is being operated and the
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1123
ss^bTtrsS-gtiTdS^rn^cl^^^^^^^ iriisr oTi'd^ 't' *- -'^ ^°"^--°""^ '--«-'-
e«:h of the control mcidule. on the movable un'u for the '" **'"« symmetrical side-to-side and
processor means on the unit to compare said code word
with lU own identification code to determine the direction
m which iu storage unit should move,
the processor means sensing that its limit position sensing
means is unoperated responding by causing the one of said
•Itemate control signals to be applied to said motor con-
troller that causes said storage unit to be driven until the
umit sensing means on said unit is operated.
4,437,712
CABINET SYSTEM
John W. WisBlnger, 239 Mitchell Rd., New Cntle, Piu 1610S
FUed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281^43
Int. a.J A47B 67/02
UA a. 312-246 ,4c,.„„,
end-to-end, and each drawer being, when unfolded, generally
m the shape of a broad cross.
1. A modular wall mounted cabinet system, comprising:
a mountmg bracket adapted to be secured to a wall; and
at least two cabinet unite adapted to be supported by said
bracket;
said cabinet unite and mounting bracket having complemen-
tarily engageable hanger means, said hanger means being
adapted to support each of said cabinet unite in either of
two distinct orienutions, said cabinet unite being sup-
ported by said hanger means in side-by-side relation, said
distmct orientations for said cabinet unite being inverted
positions, said hanger means including oppositely facing
slot means on each of said cabinet unite and Ub means on
said mounting bracket, said tab means being selectively
engageable with said slot means to support each of said
cabinet unite in either of said inverted positions.
4,437,713
TREE ORNAMENT CONTAINER
Bobble R. RoMh, 621 Onowich Way, Bdtiiiiore, Md. 21221
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Scr. No. 335,704
Int. a.J A47B 43/Oa- B65D 5/22
UA a. 312-259 , ctalB
1. In a Christmas tree ornament container of corrugated
paper board having an optmsided box with a plurality of
shelves therein for holding drawers, and a plurality of said
drawers having Christmas tree ornament separators therein,
each said drawer having a plurality of Ubs, fold-up sides and
fold-up ends held by insertion of ubs in slote, each of said
fold-up sides and fold-up ends being a double part, with a fold
line between each of the double-parte of the sides and of the
ends, a respective pair of locking flaps held between each of
said double-part fold-up sides and fold-up ends, the improve-
ment comprising: each said shelf being a fold-around rectangu-
lar tube with ends abutting and proportional for stacked fitting
4,437,714
PORTABLE BAR-CABINET
Gordon K. Struck, 11848 26th Aft. South, Seattle, Wash. 98168
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Scr. No. 332,921
Int. a. J A47B 57/00. 81/00
MS. a. 312-281 ,7 Claim,
1. A portable bar-cabinet comprising:
a top. bottom, two sidewalls and two endwalls, together
defining a cabinet having an inner space;
said top including a major opening for receiving a removable
ice tub having an upper boundary which is substantially
flush with the upper surface of the top when the tub is in
said major opening;
said top also including a plurality of minor openings offset
outwardly from the tub opening for receiving removable
holders;
said cabinete inner space including a tub receiving space
below the major opening and a storage space outwardly
adjacent the tub receiving space;
a pair of counter panels;
hinge means connecting the counter panels to the cabinet
substantially where the endwalls intersect the top, for
swinging movement between a folded position in which
the counter panels extend over the cabinet top and a
counter forming, in use position in which the counter
panels project laterally outwardly like wings from oppo-
site sides of the cabinet top;
support means for supporting said counter panels in their
counter forming positions;
handle means carried by one of the sidwalls of the cabinet,
enabling the cabinet to be picked up and carried like a
suitcase when the counter panels are in their folded posi-
tions; and
means forming a pair of stifTener beams which extend later-
1124
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
ally across the bar-cabinet where the endwalls of the
cabinet intersect the bottom of the cabinet, said stifTener
beams providing stiffness to both the endwalls and the
sidewalls, and also presenting an upper support surface on
which at least some of the removable containers rest, so
that the weight of such containers and their contents are
not carried by the top.
4,437,715
RACK SUPPORTING CHANNEL AND STOP
Thomas E. Jenkins, LouisTille, Ky., assignor to General Electric
Company, Louisville, Ky.
Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,107
Int. a.3 A47B 88/00
U.S. a. 312-348 6 Qaims
one of said curved portions of said channel member so as
to permit lateral movement of said stop member relative
to said channel member thereby faciliuting the lateral
insertion of said stop member in said trackway during
assembly;
whereby longitudinal loads applied to said stop member by
the rack-supporting members resulting from outward
movement of the rack are opposed by the interaction of
said rigid central body portion of said stop member and
said retainer means of said channel member.
4,437,716
ELECTRinED WALL PANEL SYSTEM
Gordon J. Cooper, Alto, Mich., assignor to Westinghouse Elec-
tric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,525
Int. a.} HOIR 39/00
U.S. a. 339-4 7 cudms
1. In a structure providing a chamber having a front opening
and side walls, wherein there is an article-holding rack carried
by rack-supporting members for inward and outward move-
ment of the rack relative to the structure, a rack-supporiing
channel and stop arrangement comprising:
a rack-supporting elongated channel member mounted to
the side wall of the chamber having a side wall portion
and upper and lower curved wall portions converging
toward each other to define an open-ended, elongated
internal trackway of generally C-shaped cross section
adapted to receive the rack-supporting members with one
end of said trackway facing the front opening of the cham-
ber; said channel member including retainer means formed
near said front-facing end of said channel member rigidly
extending into said trackway; and
a stop member extending into said front-facing end of said
channel member to limit the outward travel of the rack-
supporiing members in said trackway, said stop member
comprising:
a cap portion of enlarged cross section abuttingly engaging
said front-facing end of said channel member;
a neck poriion of reduced cross section extending from said
cap portion into said trackway;
a rigid central body portion received in said trackway rig-
idly joined to said cap poriion by said neck portion; said
central body portion extending laterally toward said side
wall portion of said channel member behind said retainer
means, said retainer means extending between said central
body portion and said cap poriion thereby limiting out-
ward movement of said stop member relative to said
channel; and
a lateral positioning member extending from said central
body portion and adapted to flex longitudinally relative to
said central body poriion and to rigidly oppose lateral
motion relative to said central body poriion; said position-
ing member being flexibly movable between a normal
position and an assembly position and self-biased to its
normal position, said positioning member when in its
normal position being received in and substantially span-
ning said trackway between the uppermost and lowermost
interior portions of said curved wall poriions of said chan-
nel member thereby limiting lateral movement of said stop
member relative to said channel member, and when in its
assembly position being sufficiently remote from at least
1. A power distribution system for an electrified, open office,
space dividing wall panel system, said power distribution sys-
tem comprising:
at least two planar space dividing wall panels having sub-
stantially veriical side edges, each of said space dividing
wall panels including a terminal block adjacent each
upper comer thereof and a wireway adjacent the top edge
of each of said panels interconnecting said terminal
blocks;
an extension member extending outwardly of said panel
from said terminal blocks having at least three arcuate
electrical contacts thereon;
a suppori post mechanically interconnecting and supporting
said at least two planar panels; and
a cylindrical conducting cap having at least three concentric
ring contacts on the underside thereof constructed and
arranged to coact with said at least three electrical
contacts on adjacent extension members to transfer elec-
trical power from one space dividing wall panel to an
adjacent space dividing wall panel.
4,437,717
RACK MOUNTABLE PRIMARY POWER AC PLUG
James L. Korzik, Palm Harbor, ud Thomas Wisnun, Largo,
both of Fbu, assignors to Paradyne Corporatioa, Largo, Fla.
FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,543
Int CL^ H05K 1/18
VJS. a. 339—17 LC 8 Claims
1. A device for use in combination with a rack mounted card
cage to supply power to a printed circuit card when disposed
in the rack mounted card cage, which includes:
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1123
a plug means coupled to lead means connectable to a source of
primary power;
a printed circuit card having receiving means to provide a
mating relationship with said plug means and to provide
power to said card;
a back plane supported by said card and functionally separate
from said receiving means;
bers for effecting electrical connection in solderiess fash-
ion directly between adjacent devices or between the
associated devices and the printed circuit board:
and a protective enclosure overfilling said spacer members
for securing the same in said stacked array on the associ-
ated printed circuit board.
4,437,719
CONNECTOR FOR AUTOMOTIVE IGNITION DEVICES
Yoshlmi Miyamoto, Toyota, Japan, assignor to Nippondenso
Company Limited, Kariya, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 138,920, Apr. 10, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jun. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 386,399
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 13, 1979, 54-074354
Int CL^ HOIR 13/52
U.S. a. 339-91 R 10 Claims
an M-board supported by the card cage for coupling with said
back plane when said card is disposed in said cage; and
wherein said receiving means and said plug means function to
provide primary power to said card separate from said M-
board and back plane.
4,437,718
NON-HERMETICALLY SEALED STACKABLE CHIP
CARRIER PACKAGE
George J. Selinko, Lighthouse Point, Fla., assignor to Motorola
Inc., Schaumburg, 111.
FUed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,498
lat a.i HOIR 9/09
U.S. a. 339-61 M 5 claims
1. A connector for an ignition device, comprising a housing
which includes a base portion formed with a notch and secured
to said ignition device and a cylindrical upstanding portion
having an open end at the upper end thereof, a first terminal of
a female type embedded in said base portion of the housing
below the other end of said upstanding portion and electrically
connected to said ignition device, a second terminal of a male
type attached to an end of a conductor which extends through
the interior of said upstanding portion of said housing to make
an electrical connection with said female terminal, the inner
diameter of said upstanding housing portion being greater than
the inner diameter of said female terminal and the diameter of
said male terminal being greater than the diameter of said
conductor, an insulative sealing body of an elastic material
axially extending from said open end to the other end of said
upsUnding portion and radially extending from the circumfer-
ence of said conductor to the inner walls of said upstanding
portion to fluid-tightly seal said conductor, and a cup-shaped
member of an insulative material having a pawl for engaging
the notch of said base portion to hold the cup-shaped member
in pressure conuct with said sealing body so that the sealing
body maintains an intimate, fluid-tight contact with the surface
of the conductor and the inner walls of said upstanding housing
portion.
1. An improved stackable chip rSrrier assembly for use in
electronic apparatus which will accommodate a plurality of
vertically stacked integrated circuit devices on and provide
solderiess electrical connection to a printed circuit board,
including in combination:
a stacked array of interfitting spacer members of substan-
tially equal size and dimension, each spacer member hav-
ing a centra] cavity for accommodating a respective asso-
ciated integrated circuit device therein, and a plurality of
elongated slots positioned around the periphery of said
spacer member and extending therethrough;
a plurality of elastomer conductive interconnecting bars
captivated within said elongated slots of said spacer mem-
4,437,720
SCREWLESS TERMINAL
Werner Harbauer, Schwandorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aadgnor
to Siemens AktiengeseUschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,615
Claims priority, appUeation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Not. 24,
1980, 30ai33
lot a^ HOIR 4/48
VJS. a. 339—95 D u Qdms
1. A screwless wiring or connecting terminal comprising a
housing, a leaf-type clamping spring configured and secured in
the housing so that a first end of the spring can be tensioned
from an uncocked position into a releasable cocked position in
which the first end of the spring extends toward an adjacent
portion of the spring, and a detent disposed in the adjacent
portion of the spring configured to releasably retain the first
end of the spring in the cocked position, there being a predeter-
1126
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
mined clearance between the first end of the spring and the
interior of the housing in the cocked position of the spring such
that a conductor can be inserted therebetween without having
toAMPIaeor-
4,437,721
CONNECTION TERMINAL FOR ELECTRICAL
CONDUCTORS
Hans-Josef Kollmann, Minden; Lothar Henneraann, Enger, and
Wolfgang Hohorst, Minden, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Wago Verwahungsgesellschaft mit beschrankter
Haftung, Minden, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,447
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Sep. 11.
1980, 3034570; Apr. 1, 1981, 3112969
Int. a.3 HOIR 4/00
U.S. a 339-97 P 5 Claims
1. A connection terminal for an electrical conductor com-
prising:
a. a body made of an electrical insulating material, said body
having a seat formed therein for receiving said conductor;
b. a current strip in said body; and
c. a clamping spring movably mounted in said body, said
clamping spring having a generally U-shaped portion
which defines a pair of clamping arms, said clamping
spring being movable in a plunger-like manner to an oper-
ative position wherein when said conductor is received in
said seat the inner edges of said arms engage said conduc-
tor and the outer edges of said arms engage said strip to
electrically connect said conductor to said strip through
said arms.
4,437,722
COAXIAL CABLE TAP
Edward A. Biaacfai, HnmnclstowB, Pa., i
porated, Harriaborg, Pa.
ContianatioB of Ser. No. 139,035, Apr. 10, 19W,
This appUcatioB Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,586
lot CL^ HOIR Um
UAa339-97P jctataM
to overcome any spring tension, the first end and the housing
being adapted when in the uncocked position of the spring to
engage a conductor inserted therebetween.
1. A coaxial cable connector for connection with a coaxial
cable having a center conductor, insulation sheath surrounding
the center conductor, an outer conductor extending along the
insulation sheath and an outer insulating jacket covering the
outer conductor, said coaxial cable connector comprising:
first and second matable housing means having channel
means along which a section of the coaxial cable is to be
disposed;
first probe means mounted in said first housing means and
second probe means mounted in said second housing
means;
said first and second probe means having conductive means
secured in dielectric means defining cable-penetrating
means, said conductive means having conical portion
means, axial segment means, and base means contiguously
joining said axial segment means and said conical portion
means, said axial segment means having a diameter there-
along less than said base means, said dielectric means
secured on said axial segment means extending rearwardly
from said base means and having first and second section
means, said first section means having an outer diameter
substantially the same as the diameter of said base means
and said second section means having a tapered outer
surface;
said first probe means stationarily mounted in an opening in
said first housing means with said cable-penetrating means
extending into the channel means thereof;
said second probe means movably mounted in an opening in
said second housing means with cable-penetrating means
normally disposed within the opening and out of the chan-
nel means;
first operating means connected between said first and sec-
ond housing means to move said housing means together
with the section of the cable in said channel means causing
said cable-penetrating means of said first probe means to
penetrate through the outer insulating jacket, the outer
conductor, within the insulation sheath with the conical
portion means electrically connected to the center con-
ductor during the mating of said housing means together,
said first section means of said dielectric means being
disposed in the insulation sheath while the second section
means engages the outer conductor and outer insulating
jacket thereby insulating the conductive means of said
first probe means in connection with the center conductor
from the outer conductor; and
second operating means connected to said second probe
means for moving said second probe means along the
opening in said second housing means after the housing
means have been mated together causing the cable-pene-
trating means of said second probe means to penetrate
through the outer insulating jacket, the outer conductor,
within the insulation sheath with the conical portion
means engaging the center conductor, said first section
means of said dielectric means being disposed in the insu-
lation sheath while the second section means engages the
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1127
outer conductor and outer insulating jacket thereby insu-
latmg the conductive means of the second probe means in
connection with the center conductor from the outer
conductor.
4,437,723
THREE-ROW CONNECTOR FOR MASS TERMINATING
FLAT CABLE
Ronald S. Narozny, Panorama Qty, Calif., aadgoor to Tbomai
* Bctts Corporation, Raritan, N J.
FUed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 22136
Int. a.3 HOIR U/20
UAa.339-99R 24 Claims
U-shaped channel having parallel sides, one of the parallel
sides attached to a side of said connector means by an
attaching means, the outer surface of the leg connecting
the two parallel sides of said U-shaped channel projectmg
below the surface of the bottom of said connector means.
4,437,725
JUNCnON CONNECnONS FOR MODULAR WIRING
SYSTEMS
Daniel G. Eaby, Mt Joy; WilUan B. Long. Camp Hill, and John
R. Shuey, Carlisle, aU of Pa., aaslgnors to AMP Incorporated.
Harriiburg, Pa.
FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249.518
Int. a.J HOIR 13/514
UA a. 339-156 R 15 Claims
1. An electrical connector for insulation-piercing termina-
tion of fiat multiconductor cable, said connector comprising an
elongate housing supporting electrical contact elements in at
least first, second and third laterally spaced parallel rows, each
said contact element including a first end portion of insulation-
piercing type and a second end portion, laterally opposite ones
of said second end portions in said first and third rows being in
corresponding first longitudinal positions, said second end
portions in said second row being in second longitudinal posi-
tions diflerent from said first positions, all of said first end
portions being in non-corresponding longitudinal positions.
4.437.724
SYSTEM FOR SHIELDING MASS-TERMINATED FLAT
RIBBON CABLE
Labomir J. Volka, Holbrook, N.Y.. assignor to Burroughs Cor-
poration, Detroit, Mich.
Conthmatlon of Ser. No. 134.522. Mar. 27, 1980. Pat No.
4,345,811. This appUcatlon Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,556
Int a.3 HOIR 4/66, 23/12. 23/38
UA a 339-143 R 14 Claims
1. A shielding system for a flat ribbon cable, a shield layer of
electrically conductive material being disposed in generally
longitudinal relationship with one side of said flat ribbon cable,
a readily severable jacket of flexible insulating material encom-
passing said flat ribbon cable and said shield Uyer. a section of
said shield Uyer folded back, said shielding system comprising:
connector means for connecting said flat ribbon cable; and
an electrically conductive clip crimped upon said folded
back section of said shield layer, said cUp comprising a
1. An electrical junction connector which is intended for use
in a power distribution system of the type comprising distribu-
tion cables having cable conductors therein, cable connectors
on the ends of said cables, junction connectors at the electrical
junctions in said system, and tap connectors, said cable connec-
tors and said up connectors being coupled to said junction
connectors, said junction connector comprising a junction
connector housing having oppositely directed cable connector
receiving faces and having a tap connector receiving face, said
housing having cable connector terminals therein proximate to
said cable connector receiving faces and having Up connector
terminals therein proximate to said Up connector receiving
face, said cable terminals being mateable with complementary
cable terminals in said cable connectors, said Up terminals
being mateable with complementary Up terminals in said Up
connector, said Up terminals being selectively connected to
said cable terminals to provide Up connections to said cable
conductors, said junction connector being characterized in
that:
said junction connector housing has a plurality of side-by-
side parallel feed-through conductors therein extending
between said cable connector receiving faces, said cable
terminals being on the ends of said feed-through conduc-
tors,
said housing has a plurality of rigid Up conductors therein,
each of said Up conductors having a first end which is
connected to one of said feed through conductors, said Up
conductors extending from said feed-through conductors
to said Up connector receiving face and having said Up
terminals on their ends,
at least one of said Up conducton having an intermediate
portion which extends laterally of said first and second
ends whereby said second end is parallel to, and offset
from, said first end, and said second ends are arranged in
a cluster at said Up connector receiving face.
1128
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437.726
FLEXIBLE PIN
Roger T. Lambert, Fridley, Mian^ aHigaor to Omoetics, Inc^
Mimwapolis, Mino.
FUed Job. 14, 1962, Ser. No. 387,969
lat. a.3 HOIR 11/22
MS. a. 339-252 P « cUUmt
being not greater than 10 mm, the external layer being
at least 0.2 mm thick and amounting to approximately 2
to 50% of the toul wall thickness of said envelope tube.
1. For use with a tubular receiving connector member, a
flexible pin used in conjunction therewith, comprising:
(a) an elongated sheet metal member having first and second
portions defining a longitudinal axis;
(b) said first portion having a barrel shape in which the
lateral edges thereof are bent towards each other with a
gap formed therebetween;
(c) said second portion cantilevered integrally from said first
portion and extending away from said first portion gener-
ally in the direction of said longitudinal axis, said second
portion having a pair of fingers disposed in confronting
relationship, one of which is the mirror image of the other,
each finger being bent towards the other about a first
radius and upon each finger being formed to the Ungent of
a second and shorter radius, conforming said finger to said
second radius until the tips of said fingers approach each
other, the greatest transverse projection of said fingers
being greater than the barrel diameter.
4,437,728
PHOTo^wrrcH
Shigeo Ohaahl, Tokyo, Japan, asrignor to Nihon Kalbeikl Kosyo
Kabuahiki Kaiaha, Tokyo, Japui
FUed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,761
Clalma priority, application Japan, Sep. 30, 1980, 55-
Ittt a.3 G02B 7/26
U.S. a. 350-96J0 9CIalnu
2»» ar
4,437,727
QUARTZ GLASS ENVELOPE TUBE
Norbcrt Treber, Kriftel, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaaignor to
Heraeua Quarzachmelze GmbH, Hanau, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jun. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 384,467
Claima priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 21.
1981,3128698
Int. a.J G02B 5/14; C03C 25/02: F16L 9/14
U.S. a. 350-96 J 13 ctainu
1. A photo-switch comprising: a switch case; a first and a
second photo-transmissive body introduced into said switch
case and having ends arranged in parallel with each other; a
third photo-transmissive body which is bent to have parallel
ends opposing said ends of said first and second photo-trans-
missive bodies; a shielding member adapted to shield the ends
of said first and second photo-transmissive bodies from each
other; and a switching means operable in accordance with the
operation of a handle rockably mounted on said switch case, in
such a manner that, when said ends of said third photo-trans-
missive body are brought to oppose said ends of said first and
second photo-transmissive bodies with a small gap therebe-
tween or into contact with the same, said shielding member is
moved away from said ends of said first and second photo-
transmissive bodies whereas, when said ends of said third
photo-transmissive body are moved away from said ends of
said first and second photo-transmissive bodies, said shielding
member is brought into the space between the ends of the first
and second photo-transmissive bodies to optically insulate
them from each other, thereby to selectively interrupt the
transmission of light between said first and second-photo-trans-
missive bodies.
1. Quartz glass envelope tube for the production of a light
guide fiber blank, in the form of a laminate, the internal layer
consisting essentially of fused r6ck crystal or quartz sand and
the external layer of synthetic quartz glass, the total tube wall
thickness of said tube being not greater than 10 mm, the exter-
nal layer being at least 0.2 mm thick and amounting to approxi-
mately 2 to 50% of the total tube wall thickness.
5. A rod for the formation a light guide fiber consisting
essentially of:
(a) an internal quartz glass rod itself consisting essentially of
(1) a core
(2) a sheath disposed about said core; and
(b) a quartz glass envelope tube disposed about said internal
quartz glass rod itself consisting essentially of
(1) an internal layer consisting essentially of fused rock
crystal or quartz sand;
(2) an external layer consisting essentially of synthetic
quartz glass, a total tube wall thickness of said tube
4,437,729
OPTICAL FIBRE CABLES
Colin S. Parfree, and Peter Worthlngton, both of Southampton,
England, aaaignon to Intcmatiooal Standard Electric Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,692
Claima priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jun. 26, 1980.
8021035
Int CL^ G02B 5/16
\}S. a. 350-96.23 2 dainu
1. An optical fibre cable comprising in combination
an optical fibre,
a closed metallic tubular conductor surrounding said optical
fibre, said closed tubular conductor being formed from a
pre-sized C-section tube,
a tensile strength member surrounding said closed tubular
conductor,
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1129
copper tape disposed on the ouuide of said tensile strength
member,
a dielectric layer surrounding said copper tape, and
a sheath disposed on the outside of said dielectric layer.
4,437,731
UQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY DEVICE
RyoicU Sodo, Yokoanka; Fua^}! Shoji; Takaahi Watanabc, both
of Yokohama; Kenkichi Suzuki, Mobara, and Michio Oooc,
HitiKhi, aU of Japan, aaaignon to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,680
Claims priority, appUcation Japui, Jun. 18, 1960, 55-81452;
Not. 7, 1980, 55-155784
Int. a.J G02F 1/13
U.S. a. 350—340 11 Claima
3 2
4,437,730
CAMERA ADAPTER
TrammeU Pickett, 7053 Placida Rd., Englewood, Fla. 33533
Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,777
Int. a.3 G02B 7/02
U.S. a. 350—257 6 Claima
1. A lens mount configured to permit relative movement
between the camera axis and lens axis while maintaining the
image plane and focal plane in substantially parallel relation
relative to each other: said lens mount comprising a housing to
operatively retain an adjustment means in limited movable
relation relative to a stop means, said adjustment means com-
prising an inner and outer movable disc held in a fixed spaced
reUtion relative to each other by a movable disc spacer dis-
posed therebetween, a movable lens mounting ring to opera-
tively receive a lens thereon coupled to said outer movable
disc, said inner and outer movable disc, said movable disc
spacer and said movable lens mounting ring each including a
centrally disposed aperture formed therein, each said central
disposed aperture coaxially aligned relative to said other cen-
trally disposed aperture, said stop means comprising an inner
stop plate including a centrally disposed stop aperture formed
therein affixed to said housing, said movable disc spacer being
movably disposed within said stop aperture such that the outer
periphery of said movable disc spacer is engagable with the
periphery of said stop aperture as said adjustment means is
moved relative to said housing and said inner stop plate to limit
the lateral movement of said adjustment means relative to said
housing.
1. A liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal
layer interposed between a pair of substrates with electrodes
formed thereon, which comprises an alignment film being
provided on each of opposing surfaces of the pair of substrates
by mixing at least one compound selected from the following
group A of organosilicon compounds represented by the gen-
eral formulae (1) to (4) with at least one compound selected
from the following group B of organomeullic compound
represented by general formula (5) in an atomic ratio of metal-
lic atoms in organo-metallic compound to silicon atoms in
organosilicon compounds of 1/10-8/1, dissolving the mixture
in an organic solvent, applying the resulting solution to the
substrate, and curing the solution;
Oroup A:
C,H2,+iSi(OR)3
C,H2,+ iSi(ORh -
C/H2/+1
CmF2«+|(CH2hSi{OR)3
CmF2«+|{CH2)2Si(OR)2
C/H2/+1
(!)
(2)
(3)
(4)
where 1= 1-10, m=4-24, n= 10-26, and R represenu an alkyl
group having not more than 10 carbon atoms.
RO-
/OR
I
Me-O-
I
OR
(S)
where Me is Ge, Ti, or Zr; R represenu an alkyl group having
not more than 10 carbon atoms and k= 1-30.
4,437,732
WIDE MAGNIFICATION-VARIABLE RANGE ZOOM
LENS SYSTEM
Shozo lahiyama, HacUoJi, Japan, aaaignor to KoniaUrokou
Photo Induatry Co^ Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 3, 1961. Ser. No. 269,769
Claims priority. appUcation Japui, Jun. 5, 1980. 55-74865
Int a^ G02B 15/14
MS. a. 350—427 5 Claims
1. In a zoom lens system comprising a first lens group having
a positive focal length, a second lens group having a negative
1130
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
focal length, a third lens group having a positive focal length
a fourth lens group having a negative focal length and a fifth
lens group having a positive focal length in the order from the
Object side, a wide magnification-variable range zoom lens
system characterized in that over the entire range of focal
length:
a partial lens system consisting of said first and second lens
. groups has a negative focal length and another partial lens
system consisting of said third through fifth lens groups
has a positive focal length;
when focal length of the entire zoom lens system is varied
from the shortest to the longest length, said first lens
group IS moved toward the object side to accelerate in-
crease of imaging magnification of said second lens group-
said second and third lens groups are moved in the direction
to increase imaging magnification levels of their own-
said fourth lens group is moved to accelerate increase of the
imaging magnification level of said partial lens system
consisting of said third through fifth lens groups-
WIDE
TELE
said fifth lens group is moved in the direction to increase the
imaging magnification level of its own; and the airspaces
reserved between the individual lens groups satisfy the
following conditions:
dTi.2(0/df>0
dT2.3(0/df<0
<JT3.4(0/df>0
dT4.5(0/df<0
wherein the reference symbols are defined as follows-
in focal length of the entire zoom lens system
Tij(0: airspace reserved between the ith lens group and the
jth lens group when the entire zoom lens system has a
focal length f
dTij(0/df: variation ratio of Tij(0 relative to f.
4,437,733
. ZOOM LENS
'^'*TZ^ T.k«»>«W, Kawaadd; Kunio Konno, Tokyo, and
TosUhiro Sasaya, Kawaaaki, aU of Japan, assignors to Nippon
Kogaku K.K., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 2, 1581, Ser. No. 280,102
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 11, 1980, 55-93804
lat a.3 G02B 15/16
UA a 350-427 j^ cud«.
a high zoom ratio of about 6 to 10, comprising, a magnification
changing system mcluding, in succession from the object side
a first lens means as a focusing portion having a positive refrac'
tive power, a second lens means as a variator portion having a
negative refractive power and movable along the optical axis
to thereby change chiefly the focal length, and a third lens
means as a compensator portion having a negative refractive
power and maintaining the image plane fluctuated by move-
ment of said variator portion at a predetermined position, and
s sTem "' '^'^^ succeeding said magnification changing
consisting essentially of a fourth lens means as a forward
relay group having a positive refractive power and a fifth
lens means as a rearward relay group having a positive
refractive power,
said fourth lens means consisting of, in succession from the
Object side, a positive lens component having its surface of
sharper curvature facing the image side, a biconvex ce-
mented positive lens component having a cemented sur-
face convex to the image side and a positive lens compo-
nent havmg Its surf-ace of sharper curvature facing the
object side, said fifth lens means consisting of a cemented
positive lens component having a cemented surface con-
vex to the object side and a positive lens component,
wherein said zoom lens satisfies the following conditions-
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
1 7
<-^'*
' C24
<-r^
^ < 2.4
0.5
<^
<2.0
60
> VAP-
VAN> 30
60
> VBP-
VBN>20
0.7
<f<
1.5
1.0
<^
< 5.0
(6)
1. A zoom lens which is compact and light in weight, which
has a large aperture ratio of about 1:1.2 to 1:1.6, and which has
where R^ represents the radius of curvature of the ce-
mented surface of the cemented lens component in said
fourth lens means, VAPand v^at represent the Abbe num-
bers of a positive lens and a negative lens, respectively,
forming said cemented lens component in said fourth lens
means, R^ represents the radius of curvature of the ce-
mented surface of the cemented lens component in said
fifth lens means, i/^pand v^w represent the Abbe numbers
of a positive lens and a negative lens, respectively, form-
mg said cemented lens component in said fifth lens means.
F|»' represents the focal length of the entire system at the
wide angle end, fs represents the focal length of said fifth
lens means, D represents the principal plane spacing be-
tween said fourth lens means and said fifth lens means. Re
represents the radius of curvature of the object side sur-
face of the positive lens component in said fifth lens
means, and Bf represents the back focal length.
4(437 734
LENSES CAPABLE OF CLOSE-UP PHOTOGRAPHY
Ynteka liznka. Tokyo, Japan, aadgnor to Nippon Kogaku K.K.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,524
Claintt priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 27, 1980, 5S-lltf923
Int CL' G02B 9/62. 13/02
U A CL 350-454 9 n.!,..
1. A lens system capable of focusing continuously from
rnfmite distance to close distance comprising, in the order from
the object side,
a converging first lens group disposed at a fixed distance
from an image plane,
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1131
a diverging second lens group disposed movably along the
optical axis thereof for focusing, and
a converging third lens group disposed at a fued distance
from the image plane,
said diverging second lens group maintaining paraxial rays
exiting therefrom substantially parallel throughout all the
range of focusing,
said first, second and third lens groups satisfying the follow-
ing condition formulae:
Ml
n rt r»V4 Ti
|VL r« rr r^ rt no rn rn m rw ri»
10<fi/|f2|<1.4
1.6Sf3/|f2|S2.2
wherein, fi, f2 and fj are focal lengths of said converging first
lens group, diverging second lens group and converging third
lens group, respectively.
4,437,735
INVERTED TELEPHOTO TYPE WIDE ANGLE
OBJECTIVE OF LARGE RELATIVE APERTURE
Kikuo Momiyama, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabu-
•hiki Kaitha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,709
Oainis priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 22, 1981, 56-7134
Int a.' G02B 9/64. 13/04
U.S. a. 350-458 5 Qairas
1. An inverted telephoto type wide angle objective of large
relative aperture comprising:
three lens groups, from front to rear, the first lens group
having a negative refractive power and having, front front
to rear, a positive meniscus lens of convex curvature
toward the front, a negative meniscus lens of convex
curvature toward the front, a negative meniscus lens of
convex curvature toward the front, a positive lens and a
negative meniscus lens of convex curvature toward the
front, the second lens group having a positive refractive
power and having a cemented bi-convex lens, and the
third lens group having a positive refractive power and
having, from front to rear, a cemented lens of a positive
lens and a negative lens, a cemented lens of a negative leiu
and a positive lens, and two positive lenses.
4,437,736
SUN VIEWING APPARATUS
Daniel R. Janodk, Sr., RJ). #1, Box 45-A, Hawlty, Pa. 18428
Continuation-in-part of Sar. No. 107^36, Dae. 26, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Sap. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423,164
Int a.) G02B 23/01 23/16
MS. CL 350—538 4 ClaiM
1. A prefocused solar viewing apparatus self contained in a
cubicle container comprising:
a. means for admitting solar rays comprising a first aperture
in a first side of said cubicle
b. an objective lens
c. a first tou! reflecting prism in the plane of said first lens
d. a second reflecting prism
e. a magnifying field lens
f. a third reflecting prism in the plane of said field lens
g. means for reflecting light
h. a viewing surface
i. means to observe sun viewing surface which comprises a
second aperture essentially larger than said first aperture
in a second side of said cubical perpendicular to said first
side,
j. a light shielding container wherein said elemenu are
fixedly mounted whereby solar rays are admitted into said
container through, a, by pointing said first aperture at the
sun, said rays are admitted by, b, into a first plane and
reflected by. c, into a second plane thereby striking said
second prism, d, and reflected thereby into said magnify-
ing field lens e causing said light rays to strike the third
reflecting prism f and reflected thereby onto said reflect-
ing means, g, and reflected thereby onto said viewing
surface h visable from outside said container by means, i,
without direct impingement of the solar rays upon the eye
of the user.
4,437,737
SCREEN AND METHOD OF EYE EXAMINATION USING
SAME
Byron C. Rasmuasen, 1035 N. Emporia, Wichita, Kaas. 67214
FUed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,666
Int a.} A61B 3/02
MS. a. 351—237 6 Claims
1. A screen apparatus for having light and more contruting,
brighter and clearer indicia reflected from the screen from a
light and indicia source in the examination of the direct visual
acuity of a patient having a refraction apparatus mounted over
the eyes as in the nature of eyeglasses on the patient comprising
a frame; a screen constructed and adapted to reflect light
1132
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
mounted on said frame, said combined frame-screen having a
structure generally defimng a parabola with respect to a cross
swtton Md essentially including a radius approximately equal
to the dist«,ce the eyes of the patient are from the comSied
screen-frame; and a mounting means attached to said frame and
cipable of permitting positioning of the combined frame-
scr^ about both a vertical and a horizontal axis to direct liaht
to the eyes of the patient through the refraction apparatus, Zd
mounting means comprises a cross member having a horizontal
arm connected to a vertical arm said horizontal arm pivotaUy
attachmg to the frame such as to enable horizontal pivotation
of the combined screen-frame member about the horizontal
axis; a bracket member mounted to a stationary object and
Son°^f r."''^*'? 'Z!^'' ^*"^"^ *™ allowing^rti J pivota
tion of the combined screen-frame about the pivotation con-
n^ung pomte of the vertical arm and the bracket member, said
aSS?«nH^'. ?V °^?* ^'!r' *"** ^^ ^«*'"» "•^ between
J^rLf^i ]l ' *"** '"*' ^^"^^ °^ «^** "S*'^ «"d indicia
source from the screen is approximately equal to the distance
the eyes of the patient are from the screen.
4 437 738
OPTICAL ROLLFICHE READER
91I07,^\^Uiani R. Limborg, Torrance, Calif.; Robert A. Nord-
IHH' n^T^^^ ^^-^ •«* J-y Smith, ni. S^tM
v!Sf"LS"'7^*~*" *° "«^ ''•** Yoder, HI; Donald
Yoder, both of Tostiii, Calif.; Arthnr B. Willi,, decea^ Lo.
S2??£!f " ^li* TST" ■«* '^ Co«p«^^5^
?T.. r?**.^' '''*" ^' ^"^^ '»*'' 0' Whittler, Calif.; Peter
CoMi.».tion of S^. No. 141.456, Apr. 18, 1980, abwidoned.
Tliis appUcation Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,748
. T o ^ « '"*• "•' ^^8 ^^/^^' 2J/22
UAa353-26R „ ^^
film to allow instantaneous reversal of driving said film
without backlash, *
(e) brake means operatively connected to the tensioning
means for engaging said supply/takeup rollers when ex-
cessive tension is present in the film, and
.uT^T^ "°""^ °" "*** supply/takeup rollers such
that said brake means engages a supply/takeup roller only
when such roUer is used as a supply roller and fUm is being
withdrawn therefrom.
4 437 739
PORTABLE MAP DISPLAY DEVICE
VfS: ^S??' ^~*" ^''^ ^^^-^ ■"*«"«' to Larry L. Bdl,
Utica^ Mich., a part interest
FUed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,165
„^ ^ Int a.^ G03B 23/08
U&a353-27R 3c^
nho»^?J1?^ ^°u ^^ '^*'^« °^ microcopy recorded on
photograph film or the like comprising:
(a) a pair of supply/takeup rollers spaced apart and provid-
mg a projection zone in that portion of the film which
passes from one roller to the other,
(b) means in said projection zone for opticaUy projecting and
entorgmg a selected area of said microcopy to project an
enlarged image of said area,
(bb) screen means for viewing the enlarged projected micro-
(c) fihn driving means on opposite sides of said projection
zone for dnvmg said fUm therethrough in either diiwtion.
(d) tenaonmg means responsive to slack in the film posi-
tioned between said driving means and said supply/takeup
roUers for tensioning said film to eliminate slack in said
1. A portable display device comprising a rectangular box-
like housing, a hinged lid on said housing in the form of a
hinged frame supporting a rearview projection screen, a sup-
port rod member fixedly mounted in said housing, a hoDow
drum mounted rotatable around said support rod member and
axially displaceable along said support rod member, said hol-
low drum having a peripheral cut-out portion with a microfilm
riche module insert removably and interchangeably disposed in
said penpheral cut-out portion of the drum, said microfilm
fiche module insert having a curvilinear frame supporting a
microfilm transparency, said curvilinear frame of said micro-
film fiche module insert and said peripheral cutout portion of
said hollow drum being provided with interengageable attach-
ment means, Uluminating means fixedly mounted on said sup-
port rod within said drum for Uluminating a portion of said
microfilm transparency of said microfilm fiche module insert
lens means mounted in said housing proximate to said drum'
and optically aligned with said Uluminating means for project-
mg on said rearview screen an image of said Uluminatcd por-
tton of said microfilm transparency, a pivotable sector knob
edgewise projecting through a slot in said housing, a sleeve
member rototably disposed around said support rod member,
said sleeve member having an end attached to said pivotable
sector knob and another end attached to an end of said drum by '
sliding coupling means, a bifurcated member slidably engaging
said drum at each end thereof, a manually actuated lever at-
tached to said bifurcated member and having an end projecting
through a second slot in said housing whereby said drum is
longitudinally displaceable along its axis of rotation as a result
of longitudinal displacement of said manuaUy actuated lever
said drum is rotatable around said support rod member as a
result of pivoting said second knob, and coK>rdinate reference
markmgs co-operate with said pivotable sector knob and said
manuaUy actuated lever for controUably indexing a predeter-
mmed portion of said microfihn transparency with said Ulumi-
natmg means and said lens means.
March 20, 1984 '
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1133
4,437,740
QUICK RETURN BEAM SPLITTER FOR A SINGLE LENS
REFLEX CAMERA
Takathi Suzuki, Yokohama, and Suturau Ito, Tokyo, both of
Japan, aaaignon to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 407,473
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 18, 1981, 56-29168
lot a.) G03B 7/099
VS. a. 354-476 s Claims
1. A quick return beam splitter for a single lens reflex camera
comprising:
a transparent substrate member;
a metal reflecting film of relatively high reflection factor
formed on a portion of the surface of said transparent
substrate member; and
a reflecting film of relatively low reflection factor formed on
that portion of the surface of said transparent substrate
member on which said metal reflecting film is not formed.
4,437,741
LIGHT MEASURING DEVICE FOR A SINGLE LENS
REFLEX CAMERA
YuuhlM Sato, Kanagawa, Japan, anignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 400,080
daims priority, application Japan, Jul. 28, 1981, 56-118889
Int. a.3 G03B 7/08
VS. a. 354-479 5 Qaims
1. A light measuring device for a single lens reflex camera
having a swinging mirror, comprising:
(a) light sensitive means;
(b) an auxiliary mirror positioned behind said swinging mirror
to conduct a light beam passed through said swinging mirror
to said light sensitive means, the reflection surface of said
auxiliary mirror being divided into a plurality of regions and
being shaped such that said light beam after reflection from
the regions is divided into respective parts which go to
different directions from each other; and
(c) light beam selecting means for conducting one of the light
beams from said plurality of regions to said light sensitive
means.
4,437,742
CAMERA CAPABLE OF AUTOMATICALLY
RESPONDING TO DATA CODED ON HLM
Nobuyuki Taniguchi, Sakai, Japan, assignor to Minolta Camera
KabushUd Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,957
Claims priority, applicatioB Japan, Oct. 9, 1980, 55-141302;
Oct. 9, 1980, 55-141303; Oct. 29, 1980, 55-152579
lat a.i G03B 7/00
U.S. a. 354—21 3 cialBS
^
EH CH
□ 00 □[□[□ 0
Xii
*H IH 91 95 300
ypjB^noo 000 0 0) \d 00000000 o| n
•h 30(n) m» 30(n-i)
FMi
rs
1. A camera capable of automatically responding to film
speed data received from a film to be loaded in the camera
comprising:
means for receiving digital dau represenutive of the film
speed from the film;
means for storing the digital film speed daU received by said
receiving means;
a digiul calculating means, responsive to the digiul dau
stored in said storing means, for calculating digital expo-
sure information;
means for generating predetermined invariable digital dau
represenutive of a consunt film speed capable of being
substituted for the digiul daU to be stored in said storing
means;
means for automatically adopting said invariable digiul daU
to substitute it for the digital daU from the film when said
storing means is incapable of storing the digital dau from
the film;
means for digiully displaying the result of the calculation by
said calculating means; and
means for controlling the exposure of the camera in accor-
dance with the result of the calculation by said calculating
means.
4,437,743
SIGNAL PROCESSING SYSTEM
ShiiUi Sakai; NobuhUto Shinoda; Takao Kiaoahita, all of Tokyo,
and Kazuya Hosoe, Kunitachi, aU of Japan, assignors to
Canoa KabushUd Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,599
ClaliBs priority, application Japan, Oct 23, 1980, 55-149074
lat a.} G03B 3/ JO
VS. a. 354 402 9 Claims
1. A signal processing system comprising:
(A) signal integrating-ty])e radiation-sensitive means for gener-
ating a signal corresponding to an integrated value of radia-
tion during an integrating time;
(B) means for controUing said integrating time;
1134
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
(C) processing means for processing an output signal from said
sensitive means; and
(D) threshold level controlling means connected to said inte-
grating time controlling means for controlling a threshold
level of signal processing at least at a part of said processing
means on the basis of said integrating time.
4,437,744
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL APPARATUS FOR
CAMERA
Nobuhiko Tend, and Kenichi Magariyaou, both of Tokyo, Ja-
pu, aasignors to Nippon Kogaku K.K^ Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jan. 22, 1W2, Ser. No. 341,809
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jan. 30, 1981, S6-12306
Int. a.3 G03B 7/097
U A a 354-142 7 a,^,^
said zoom lens on either side of and transverse to the
optical axis of said zoom lens, said first and second reflec-
tors being movable to change the acute angle included
therebetween;
(c) third and fourth reflectors facing said flrst and second
reflectors, respectively, and said zoom lens;
(d) said reflectors being operable to divide the light entering
said zoom lens into two separate beams;
Q^i%a
^=0:
O ^Ct 2S
7. An automatic exposure control apparatus for a camera
provided with an automatic focusing apparatus with which the
object distance is detected and the photographic lens is moved
to a position m focus to the object by a driving system, said
exposure control apparatus comprising:
(a) means for measuring the luminance value of the object-
(b) first settmg means for setting the diaphragm value of the
lens to a value in the range of the minimum diaphragm
value to the maximum diaphragm value in response to said
measunng means;
(c) second setting means for setting the diaphragm value of
the lens to a value in the range of from a certain deter-
nuned diaphragm value at which a determined depth of
focus can be given to the lens to the maximum diaphragm
value m response to said measuring means;
(d) operating means for enabling said automatic focusing
apparatus to operate;
(e) means for selecting any one of the diaphragm value set by
said first setting means and the diaphragm value set by
said second setting means, said selecting means being
disposed to select the diaphragm value set by said second
setting means in response to the operation of said operat-
mg means;
(0 means for controlling the diaphragm in accordance with
the selected diaphragm value; and
(g) means for determining an exposure time from said se-
lected diaphragm value and said luminance value of the
object.
4,437,745
THREE DIMENSIONAL CAMERA SYSTEM
Stephco lUJaal, 5600 Riverdale Afe^ Bronx, N.Y. 10471
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 432,029
iBt CL} G03B 35/10
UA a 354-117 g CjJj^^
1. A stereo optics apparatus, comprising
(a) a zoom lens attachable to a camera body and having an
operating element operable when moved in first and sec-
ond directions to increase or decrease the focal length of
said zoom lens;
(b) first and second spaced apari movable reflectors facing
(e) first electrical motor means for operating said operating
element of said zoom lens;
(0 second electrical motor means for moving said first and
second reflectors;
(g) said motors being operated in synchronism such that said
included angle is increased or decreased by said second
motor means as said focal length is decreased or increased,
respectively, by said first motor means.
4,437,746
PHOTO METERING DEVICE FOR SINGLE LENS
REFLEX CAMERA
KeUi Ikemori, Yokohama, Japan, asdgnor to Canon KabusUki
Kaiflha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,838
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 9, 1981, 56-53592
Int. a? G03B 7/00
U A a 354-»79 5 ciai^
1. A photo metering device for a single lens reflex camera
comprising:
(a) a photographic optical system for forming an object
image on an image receiving means;
(b) a photo sensor for receiving light from the object;
(c) a biconvex condenser lens system arranged between said
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
113S
image receiving means and said photo sensor, and having
a first spherical surface and a second spherical surface;
(d) first reflective means formed on the center zone of said
first spherical surface; and
(e) second reflective means formed on the center zone of
said second surface arranged so that light from the object
image is reflected by said first reflective means and said
second reflective means and directed to the photo sensor.
4,437,747
DEVICE FOR MOUNTING AN ELECTRONIC FLASH
UNIT
Misato Ohno, Chiba, and Kefji Ohsawa, Yokohama, both of
Japan, aaaignors to Nippon Kogaku K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 369,005
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 21, 1981. 56-
57655[U] r— K , ,
Int. a.3 G03B 15/05
UA a. 354-126 8 Claims
1. A device for mounting an electronic flash unit on a camera
of the type having film-rewind operating means, accessory
supporting means adjacent to said operating means, and a
terminal for transmitting a signal to the flash unit, said device
comprising a body having first means disposed to engage said
accessory supporting means so as to support the body thereon
and having second means for fixing the body to said camera,
said body also having means for supporting said flash unit
thereon at a position away from said film-rewind operating
means and having means for electrically connecting said flash
unit to said terminal when the flash unit is supported on said
body.
4437748
HIGH ILLUMINATION FLASHBULB ARRAY WITH
FIRING SEQUENCE CONTROL MEANS
Richard H. KeUy, Isaaquah, Wash., aigieiior to The United
States of America u represented by the Secretary of the Air
Force, Washington, D.C.
FUed Dec 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,217
Int. a.3 G03B l5/0i
UA a 354-132 1 Claim
'' '' f '' '' >/=^
I
TT
1. A high Ulumination flashbulb array with firing sequence
control means comprising
a power bus.
a ground bus
an array of m strings of flashbulbs connected in parallel
between said power bus and said ground bus, each string
of flashbulbs comprising n flashbulbs connected in series,
m and n being integers,
a switch means in series with each said string of flashbulbs,
said switch means being comprised of silicon controlled
rectifiers,
a pulse generator for generating a pulse train having a given
PRF, said pulse generator comprising an IC timer having
means for varj^njg the PRF thereof,
an n stage shift register each successive stage thereof being
outputted to control a discrete successive switch means in
said array in response to said pulse train, said shift register
being an IC serial to parallel converter, the output of each
said shift register sUge being connected to a discrete
silicon controller rectifier gate,
amplification means comprised of an IC HEX inverter buf-
fer/divider for amplifying the outputt of said shift regis-
ter,
a control circuit controlling said pulse generator and said
shift register to effect sequential firing of said strings of
flashbulbs in response to off, power, arm and fire signals,
and
an arm circuit, said arm circuit comprising a diode con-
nected between each said silicon controlled rectifier gate
and a grounded normally closed relay conuct, said relay
conuct being opened in response to control circuit arm
and fire operational sequences, said arm circuiu applying
a ground to the gate of said silicon controlled rectifier
during off and power control circuit operative sequences
and removing said ground during arm and fire operational
sequences thereby preventing firing from spurious signals.
4,437,749
nLM TRANSPORTING ARRANGEMENT FOR
CAMERAS
Gabriele Ehgartncr, PuUac^ and Gabriel Vondrovsky, Munich,
botii of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aasignora to Agh-Gc?aert AG,
LererkuaeB, Fed. Rep. of Gemany
FUed Aug. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 405^38
Claint priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 26.
1981, 3133774
lat a.} G03B 1/24
U.S. a. 354-214 16 CUUbi
I. A film transporting arrangement of a camera, comprising
a film transporting handle;
a perforation wheel having a predetermined number of teeth
and arranged to engage a perforated film in a film mouth
of a cassette inserted or insertable in a camera and to move
the fUm out of the cassette, said perforation wheel being
rotatable in an open camera by hand;
a polygonal disk connected with said perforation wheel and
having a plurality of surfaces and a number of comers
corresponding to the number of teeth of said perforation
wheel; and
two arresting arms pretensioned relative to one another, said
arresting arms engaging the surfaces formed between two
neighboring comers of said polygonal disk and corre-
1136
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
•ponding to said suffices between two neighboring cor-
ners so as to press said polygonal disk and thereby said
perforation wheel to a respective angular position.
M37.750
ADJUSTABLE DIOPTER TYPE FINDER OPTICAL
SYSTEM
Kaao Ikari, Hachiooji, JaQu, aasignor to Olynpus Optiad
Co^ Ltd^ Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jon. 1, 1982, Scr. No. 383,840
Claims priority, appUcatioa Japu, Jan. 8, 1981, 56-87736
Int a.J G03B 19/12
UAa354-155 4Ctata,
tween said film transport handle and said perforation wheel
so that said perforation wheel is always held or brought into
such and angular position in which one of ito teeth engages
ui a perforation hole of a film initial portion lying in the fUm
mouth of a cassette insertable or inserted in the camera.
«..™.. M37,752
SAPFTY DEVICE FOR CAMERA AND ACCESSORY
AJdr. Ak-dd; Mdcoto Katium.; Maaaharu KawwBuni. lu of
J«M««wa; Sidgem Kamata, Tokyo, and Syoichiro Saito,
iKanagawa, aU of Japui, aadgnofi to Canon KabosUki Kalaha.
Tokyo, Japan — «».
FUed Not. 29, 1982, Set. No. 445.158
Int a.i G03B 17/00
VS. a. 354-289.12 7 Claim.
I I l""i IMI I
t I' -{la* — J-8il-rrtrsfiJr . ™^«PU,-i
1. An adjustable diopter type finder optical system compris-
mg an eyepiece comprising a first lens component having
negative refractive power and a second lens component having
positive refractive power, said finder optical system being
arranged to make diopter adjustment by moving both of said
first lens component and said second lens component in the
same direction along the optical axis both with different
amounts of movements.
M37,751
FILM TRANSPORT ARRANGEMENT WTTH
PERFORATION WHEEL FOR CAMERA
Dieter Engelamami, Uateriiaching; Hubert Hackenberg, Holz-
UrcheiM Peter Lennaan, Nariag; Kari Wagner, and Siegfried
ZoW, both of Munich, aU of Fed. Rep. of^nnany, a^riffKn
to Agfi-Geraert AG, Lererkusen, Fed. Rep. of GtmrnUT^
FUed Aug. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 405,100
198lf3S377r*^' '"""*''" ^*^ ^- »' ^'•""y' Aug. 26,
Int a.3 G03B 1/24
VS. CL 354-214 „ ^Udm
1. A device for detecting the conductivity of camera and
accessory signal terminals through which an electrical signal u
given or received between electrical circuits in a camera and in
an accessory attiu:hed thereto, comprising:
means for detecting the failure to estoblish adequate conduc-
tivity across said signal terminals and for producing a
discnmination signal representing whether or not the
conductivity is adequate when said camera and said acces-
sory signal terminals are in conUwt with each other; and
annunciating means responsive to said discrimination signal
for producing an annunciation signal.
4,437,753
^^^jy^ ^^ SUPPORTING A CAMERA AGAINST
THE STERNUM OF THE PHOTOGRAPHER
Robert E. Dnnn, P.O. Box 1579, Cupertino, Calif. 95015
FUed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,214
Int a.3 G03B 17/00
VS. a. 354-293 13 ^^^
1. A film transport arrangement for a camera, comprising
a fihn transport handle; *^ *
a perforation wheel having a plurality of teeth and arranged to
engage a perforated film accommodated in a cassette having
a film mouth and inserted or insertable in the camera, and to
move the film from the cassette; and
means for adjusting said perforation wheel and arranged be-
1. A camera support for stabUizing a camera against the
body of a photographer, comprising:
a pedestal for mounting the camera, said pedestal having a
portion thereof extending rearwardly of the camera;
a fu^t arm adjustably joined to said pedestal;
shoulder support means for engaging the shoulder of the
photographer, said shoulder support means being attached
to the end of said first arm remote from said pedestal;
March 20, 1984
GENERAL A>JD MECHANICAL
1137
a second arm adjustably joined to said portion of said pedes-
tal extending rearwardly of the camera; and
sternal support means for engaging the sternum of the pho-
tographer, said sternal support means being attached to
the end of said second arm remote from said pedestal.
4,437,754
APPARATUS FOR TRANSFERRING TONER IMAGES
Hemann Idsteia, Oeitrich-WIakel, Fed. Rep. of Gemaay,
aaalgnor to HoechM AktlengeaeUschaft, FraakAirt an Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Aug. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 413,544
Claims priority, appUcatlon Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 16.
1981,3136659
Int a.} G03G 15/00
VS. a. 355—3 TR 17 cUdmi
said image-carrying member in a region wherein said
circumferential surface moves upwardly,
means, located above said routional axis in the region of the
uppermost portion of said circumferential surface of said
image-carrying member, for cleaning the circumferential
surface to remove excess developing liquid, for directing
the excess developing liquid toward said extreme of said
circumferential surface, and for discharging the excess
developing liquid removed from said member onto said
lateral end surface to cause the excess developing liquid to
travel downwardly on said lateral end surface during
roution of said image-carrying member under the influ-
ence of gravity, and
f
j y y-^ ^j2!
'a^*
1. Apparatus for transferring toner images from a moving
photoconductor to an image carrier comprising:
(a) a cylinder mounted for rotation,
(b) means for securing at least a portion of said image carrier
about the circumferential surface of said cylinder,
(c) a support table having an upper portion thereof supporting
said photoconductor, said upper portion movable in a linear
fashion adjacent said cylinder,
(d) means for mounting said cylinder and Uible for pressure
contacting said image carrier and said photoconductor upon
movement of said upper portion of said ublc, and
(e) means for synchronizing the linear speed of said upper
portion of said table with the tangential speed of said image
carrier secured to said cylinder.
4.437.755
UQUID HANDLING APPARATUS FOR AN
ELECTROSTATIC COPIER
Jnnlchl Saknrayama, and Tamotra Magome, both of Kawasaki,
Japan, aasignors to Canon KabuaUki Kaiaha, Tokyo, Japan
Contlnuatioa of Ser. No. 31,945, Apr. 20, 1979, abuidoaed. This
appUcatlon Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,670
Claima priority, appUcatlon Japan, Apr. 28, 1978, 53-51834;
Aug. 31, 1978, 53-106716
Int a.J G03G 15/ia 21/00
VS. CL 355—10 s ri.i«M
1. An image forming apparatus comprising:
a rotatably supported drum-shaped image-carrying member
having a circumferential surface on which a latent image
is formed and a generally continuous lateral end surface
extending generally perpendicularly to the routional axis
of said image-carrying member and bounded only by an
extreme of said circumferential surface, said rotational
axis extending generaUy horizontaUy,
means for forming the latent image on the circumferential
surface, said latent image forming means being located
adjacent said image-carrying member in a region wherein
said circumferential surface moves downwardly,
means for developing the latent image at a developing sta-
tion with a developing liquid, said developing means being
located below aaiid rotation axis of said image-carrying
member,
means for transferring the developed image onto a transfer
material, said transferring means being located acUacent
/n
r
m '
'i ^
L
A
ip-^
\ ***
1
i«^
^^
1 —
—
—
— — — ._
\
.^
liquid guide means including a rod-Uke member disposed in
contact with or in close proximity to said image-carrying
member in the region of a portion of said circumferential
surface at said extreme thereof and of said lateral end
surface bounded by said extreme, said rod-Uke member
extending in the direction of movement of said image-car-
rying member in the region of said developing means and
guiding the excess liquid away from said lateral end sur-
face of said image-carrying member at a position adjacent
said developing means, thereby preventing the exceu
liquid from contacting the circumferential surface of said
image-carrying member downstream of the developing
sution with respect to the movement direction of said
image-carrying member.
4.437,756
DOUBLE-SIDE IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS
Kazuo Kawaknbo, Chigaaaki; Katsnaki ForaicU, Yokohama;
Kiyokazu Namekata, Maddda; Hidetoahi Tanaka, Mnaa-
shino; Yashikuni TohyaaM, Yokohama; TosUroa Kaaamnra;
Tomohiro Aoki, both of Yokohama, and Toahio Hoama, To-
kyo, aU of Japan, aasignors to Canon K*hu«h»fi Kaiaha, To-
kyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 219,510, Dec 23, 1980, abaadoiMd.
This appUcatlon Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,579
Claims priority, appUcatloB Japan, Dae. 28, 1979, 54-171343;
Dec. 28, 1979, 54.171344« Dec. 28, 1979, 54-171345; Dae. 28,
1979, 54-171346
Int a.) G03G 15/00
VS. a. 355—14 R 17 n»i—
1. A double-side image forming apparatus, comprising:
image forming means for effecting image formation on both
faces of sheet-shaped image bearing members;
means for storing said image bearing members having an
image on a first face thereof;
means for selecting the number of image bearing members to
be subjected to said image formation; and
control means for effecting image formation by said image
forming means in a fvnt mode on the first face of each of
said selected image bearing members, then temporarily
storing said selected image bearing members in said stor-
1138
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
tge means, and for effecting image formation by said
image forming means in a second mode on the second face
of each of said selected image bearing members;
said non-image-forming portion of said roUUble member
faces said cleaning means.
^^if^.r
4,437,758
AUGNMENT APPARATUS
Akiyofhi Suzuki, Tokyo, Japui, anignor to Canon Kabuthlkl
Kaliha, Tokyo, Japan
CoutiBuatioa-in-part of Scr. No. 195,490, Oct 9, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Feb. 23, 1982, Scr. No. 351,456
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct. 17, 1979, 54-134458
Int. a.J G03B 27/52
U.S. a 355--41 4CIaIma
wherein said control means is adapted, in response to a
particular signal received during said first mode and be-
fore the number of image formations reaches said selected
number, to effect image formation in the second mode on
the image bearing members stored in said storage means.
4,437,757
IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS WITH CLEANING
MEANS
ShigeUro Konori; Hiaashi Sakamaki, both of Yokohama;
Hiroyuki Hattori, Mitaka; Tothihide lida; Koichi Miyamoto,
both of Tokyo, and Kazumi Umezawa, Yokohama, all of Ja-
pan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
DiTiaion of Ser. No. 893,825, Apr. 5, 1978, Pat. No. 4,270,857,
which is a division of Ser. No. 860,457, Dec. 14, 1977, which is
a continuation of Ser. No. 588,228, Jun. 19, 1975, which is a
diTisiOB of Ser. No. 583,247, Jan. 3, 1975, Pat. No. 4,009,955,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 461,104, Apr. 15, 1974, which
is a continuation of Ser. No. 258,820, Jun., 1972, Pat No.
3,804,512. This appUcation Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,209
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 3, 1971, 46-38917[U];
Jun. 3. 1971, 46-38918[U]; Jun. 9, 1971, 46.48632[U]; Jun. 10,
1971, 4641195; Jun. 10, 1971, 4641196; Jun. 10, 1971,
4641197; JuB. 21, 1971, 4644611; Aug. 30, 1971, 4646740
lat a.} G03G 2J/00
VJS. a. 355-15 3 ciaima
1. An apparatus for aligning a mask having a circuitpattem
and an alignment mark thereon, and a sensitive member having
an alignment mark thereon into a predetermined positional
relation by using the two alignment marks, comprising:
a mask holder for supporting said mask;
a support member for supporting said sensitive member;
means for moving at least one of said mask holder and said
support member relative to the other during an alignment
operation to align a mask supported on said mask holder
and a sensitive member supported on said support mem-
ber;
an optical system in which during alignment operation said
mask and said sensitive member are in a conjugate relation
with each other with respect to non-sensitizing light and
said mask and said sensitive member are in a defocused
relation with each other with respect to sensitizing light;
means for detecting the relative positional relation between
the alignment marks on said mask and said sensitive mem-
ber using non-sensitizing light; and
means for selectively exposing the alignment mark on said
sensitive member to sensitizing light during the alignment
operation.
1. An image forming apparatus comprising:
a rotatable member;
means for forming a latent image on said rotatable member,
said rotatable member having a portion which is not used
for latent image formation;
developing means for applying a developer to the latent
image on said routable member to form a toner image;
means for transferring the toner image onto a transfer mate-
rial;
means for cleaning said rotatable member to permit reuse of
said member for image formation; and
means for detecting a predetermined roUtional position of
•aid routable member and for stopping said routable
member at the detected predetermined position where
4,437,759
CONTACT PRINTER
Hidekatu Mizukami, Kyoto, and Yoahihiro Machida, Joyo, both
of Japan, aasignors to Dainippon Screen Seize Kaimfiifld
Kaisha, Kyoto, Japan
Filed Sep. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 418,379
Claims priority, appUcation Japui, Sep. 17, 1981, 56-145625:
Sep. 17, 1981, 56-145626
lat CL^ G03B 27/20
VS. a 355—91 11 Claims
1. A contact printer wherein a spring roller is adapted to
route on its own axis and to roll over a transparent plate, and
wherein a flexible airtight sheet is wound round the spring
roller and the free end of the flexible airtight sheet is fixed to
the front end of the transparent plate so that the flexible air-
tight sheet may be extended to cover the transparent plate by
rolling the spring roUer rearwards, the improvement in that the
distance between the transparent plate and the spring roller is
gradually reduced by guide means, as the flexible airtight sheet
is extended or the spring roller roUs rearwards over the trans-
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1139
parent plate, so that the distance between the transparent plate
and the point of contact of the flexible airtight sheet to iu own
rolled part wound round the spring roller is maintained sub-
stantially to a fixed value.
4,437,760
REUSABLE ELECTRICAL OVERLAY MEASUREMENT
ORCUIT AND PROCESS
Cbristoper P. Ausschnitt Southport Conn., assignor to The
Perkin-Elmer Corp., NorwaUi, Conn.
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,862
Int a.J G03B 27/32. 27/42
U.S. a. 355-133 15 cinimf
ond level conductive layer to remove the second conduc-
tive layer after use.
4,437,761
REFRACnVE INDEX TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Harry Kroger, Sudbury, and Richard A. Soref, Newtoo Centre,
both of Mass., aasignors to Sperry Corporation, New York,
N,Y,
PUed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248.614
Int a.J GOIJ 5/0%. 5/58
UA a 356-44 20 Claims
ii^
<r
1. An apparatus for measuring temperature comprising:
means for guiding light having a first index of refraction ni;
and
sensor material having first and second surfaces, a tempera-
ture dependent index of refraction n:, and a smoothly
varying absorption characteristic to reduce reflections
from said second surface, said first surface aligned with
said light guiding means to form a dielectric interface
therebetween whereby light incident to said interface is
reflected therefrom with an intensity that varies with
temperature.
4,437,762
CONTROL OF DETECTOR GAIN HYSTERESIS IN A
SINGLE BEAM SPECTROPHOTOMETER
Thomas J. Glenn, Irrine, and WUbur I. Kayc, Corona del Mar.
both of Calif., assignors to Beckman Instruments, Inc., FuUer-
ton, CaUf.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334^06
Int. a.3 GOIJ 3/Oa- HOU 40/00
U.S. a. 356-326 2 aalns
1. A reusable electric overlay measurement base pattern
comprising:
(a) a pair of current pads forming first and second pads
adapted to be contacted by point contacts;
(b) a first conductor of controlled width extending between
said first and second pads;
(c) a pair of voluge pads forming third and fourth pads
suiuble for contacting by point contacts;
(d) two second conductors extending from said third and
fourth pads to said first conductor, said second conductors
contacting said first conductor at a predetermined spac-
ing;
(e) a fifth pad disposed adjacent and spaced from said first
conductor approximately at the midpoint between said
two second conductors;
(0 a second level conductor extending between said fifth pad
and said first conductor; the misalignment of said second
level conductor being detected by measuremenu using
said five pads;
(g) all of said four pads which are interconnected, along with
said fifth pad, being made of a metal which is resistant to
an etchant which can be used in conjunction with a sec-
^l^Jk"-^---*
SlJSpJ^rtf-
1. A single beam spectrophotometer comprising:
a light source for illuminating a sample with light energy;
a photomultiplier detector for receiving light energy from
the sample and generating an output signal proportional
thereto, the photomultiplier including a photo-emissive
cathode receiving incident light, a plurality of dynodes for
multiplying electrons emitted by a cathode, and an anode
at which the output current signal is derived;
means conditioning the single beam spectrophotometer
during instrument "on" or "operating" intervals for mea-
suring the sample, said conditioning means including
means for energizing the light source and for supplying
dynode volUge to the photomultiplier dynode;
a separate light source proximate the detector; and
means operative during normal instrument "ofT" or "idle"
intervals, when the instrument is not conditioned for
meuuring a sample, (1) to energize the separate source
1140
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
and hence illuminate the photomultiplier cathode and (2)
to supply dynode volUge to the photomultiplier dynode.
discrete samples to obtain said further color samples, each
said further color sample comprising a portion of a de-
4,437,763
CONTROL OF DETECTOR GAIN HYSTERESIS IN A
SINGLE BEAM SPECTROPHOTOMETER
WUbur I. Kaye, Corona del Mar, Califs aisignor to Beckman
iBStnuBents, Inc., Fnilertoo, Calif.
FUed Dec. 2S, 1981, Ser. No. 335,021
Int a.3 GOIJ 3/00: HOIJ 40/00
U A a. 356-326 3 Claims
-\
*HJ-— - t wt r~J - — » -,
, ■ I I I H iH Qirmiaur ' — i 74--, i i
1. A single beam spectrophotometer comprising:
a light source for illuminating a sample with light energy;
a photomultiplier detector for receiving light energy from
the sample and generating an output signal proportional
thereto, the photomultiplier including a photo-emissive
cathode receiving incident light, a plurality of dynodes for
multiplying electrons emitted by a cathode, and an anode
at which the output current sig^ is derived;
means conditioning the single beam spectrophotometer
during instrument "on" or "operating" intervals for mea-
suring the sample, said conditioning means including
means for energizing the light source and for supplying
dynode voltage to the photomultiplier dynode; and
means operative during normal instrument "off" or "idle"
intervals, when the instrument is not conditioned for
measuring a sample, to illuminate the photomultiplier
cathode and to supply dynode voltoge to the photomulti-
plier dynode.
rived sample differentially combined with a portion of an
adjacent derived sample.
4,437,765
DISPERSION TURBINE
Hans-Peter Sceger, Ballrechten-Dottingea, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, aaiignor to Ystral GmbH, Ballrechten-Dottingen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 354,133
Int a.J BOIF 5/12
UA CL 366->264 16 Claims
4,437,764
ELECTRICAL COMPENSATION FOR
MISREGISTRATION OF STRIPED COLOR HLTER IN A
COLOR IMAGER WTTH DISCRETE SAMPLING
ELEMENTS
Peter A. Levine, West Windsor, and Allen L. Limberg, Titus-
Tille, both of N J., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
FUed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,582
Int. a.J H04N 9/07
U.S. a 358—44 7 claims
1. A color television camera comprising:
an imager having discrete sensing elements arrayed in col-
umns and rows;
a color stripe filter interposed in the optical path to said
imager, so its stripes project to respective columns of
sensing elements;
means for deriving from said imager discrete derived sam-
ples of the respective colors of the information imaged on
the imager, which samples are subject to cross-color er-
rors owing to misregistration of the projected stripes and
the columns of sensing elements; and
means for generating further color samples with reduced
cross-color errors, including means for re-sampling said
1. In a vertical axis dispersion turbine which has a stator
consisting of a stator tube with a lower end, an essentially
cylindrical guide ring of larger diameter than said tube
mounted thereon generally concentric with the lower end
portion of the stator tube and extending below said lower end
to define an annular chamber through which a medium to be
mixed and dispersed may flow, an axial rotor shaft which is
freely rotatable in the stator tube and has a rotor at its lower
end with several blades inside the guide ring to draw the me-
dium from above into and downwardly through the guide ring
and dispersion means through which the medium flows, the
improvement comprising:
the stator tube and the rotor shaft cooperate to define a
substantially annular passage which is unobstructed
throughout its length and at its lower end;
the relationship of the rotor blades to the lower end of the
stator tube causes the downward flow of the medium
through the guide ring to provide a venturi effect that
produces a negative pressure in said annular passage;
and the dispersion means consists of a dispersion element
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1141
which is mounted on the guide ring in a plane transverse
to the rotor shaft near the blades of the rotor and which is
constructed and arranged for axial flow of the medium
therethrough so as to reduce rotational flow of the me-
dium and enhance the venturi effect.
4,437,766
MIXER HAVING TWO FEED WORMS DEFINING
UPPER AND LOWER MIXING REGIONS WTTH AN
INTERMEDUTE EQUIUBRIUM ZONE
Rudolph Joachim, Weil der Stadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Werner A Pflciderer, Stnttgart, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,216
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Gwmaay, Mar. 18,
1981, 3110437
Int. a.' BOIF 7/iO
U.S. a 366—287 7 Claims
1. A mixer comprising a conical mixing vat having a wall
tapering downwardly and having a discharge outlet near the
lower end thereof, means for introducing material to be mixed
into said vat at the top thereof, a first mixing worm driven in
rotation about its axis and in revolving movement within said
vat proximate said wall, said first mixing worm having an
upper region of relatively small pitch and a lower region of
relatively large pitch and defining between said iipper and
lower regions a neutral conveyance zone, and a second mixing
worm driven in rotation about its axis, said second mixing
worm being centrally disposed in said vat with the axis of the
second mixing worm concentric with the axis of said vat, said
second mixing worm extending downwardly from the top of
the mixing vat up to and into said neutral conveyance zone,
said second mixing worm being cylindrical and having an
outer diameter in close proximity with the outer diameter of
said first worm, said fvst and second mixing worms being
driven in respective directions of rotation to each convey the
material in the vat.
4,437,767
LOWER SUPPORT FOR SINGLE SCREW MIXER
Richard A. Hargis, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to Day Mixing
Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Mar. 4, 1983, Ser. No. 472,073
Int a.> BOIF 7/30
U.S. CL 366—287 7 Claims
1. In a mixer having an inverted, truncated cone for a mixing
chamber having also a top and a bottom, a horizontal orbit arm
rotatable at a relatively slow speed about the axis of the mixer
within the upper region thereof and with the outer end of said
arm moving adjacent the inner periphery of said chamber, a
mixing screw disposed parallel to the inner periphery of said
chamber and rotatable on its own axis at a relatively high
speed, coupling means attaching the upper end of said screw to
the outer aid of said orbit arm so as to permit linear movement
between said screw and said arm, motor drive and gear means
to rotate said orbit arm at its said slow speed and said screw at
its said high speed, and a lower support for said screw, the
improvement which is characterized by: said lower support
comprising a rotatable vertical support shaft attached to the
bottom of said chamber, an extension fued on the lower end of
said screw, a connecting shaft having one end freely received
within said extension and the other end adjacent the upper end
of said support shaft, and connecting means connecting said
-^^iTiT
support shaft to said connecting shaft so as to permit a rocking
movement therebetween while ensuring that said support shaft
and said connecting shaft will rotate together at said slow
speed only, said extension on said screw rotating about said
connecting shaft at said high speed, whereby deflections im-
parted to said screw by the forces encountered during mixing
are accommodated via said coupling means and said connect-
ing means while said support shaft and said connecting shaft
rotate at said slow speed only.
4,437,768
MOVEMENT STRUCTURE FOR AN ELECTRONIC
TIMEPIECE
KeiUi Miyasaka, Tanashi, Japan, assignor to Citiien Watch
Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,812
Clainu priority, application Japan, Apr. 11, 1980, 55-47565;
Jul. 22, 1980, 55-99415; Jul. 22, 1980, 55-99417; Sep. 12, 1980,
55-126991
Int CL^ G04C 23/02 '
U.S. a. 368—88 20 Claims
PL ATI
ANODE OmNECTING
INSiiATJNG
CONfJECTiNO
PLATE 90
«0 132 IS2
sixroRizo
1. A movement structure for a miniature analog type of
electronic timepiece powered by a battery and having time
indicating hands, a crystal vibrator, an electronic circuit elec-
trically coupled to said crystal vibrator for producing time-
keeping signals, a time correction switch mechanism which is
externally actuatable for producing correction signals to be
applied to said electronic circuit unit to provide time correc-
tion signals, a stepping motor comprising a coil, a coil core, a
1142
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
•totor and a rotor, said stq)ping motor being responsive to said
timekeeping signals for periodically rotating said rotor and also
responsive to said time correction signals to correct time indi-
cated by said hands, and a wheel train coupled to said rotor for
transmitting the motion thereof, said movement structure
comprising:
a baseplate having a central area and first, second, third and
fourth areas surrounding said central area; and
a wheel train bridge positioned over said central area of the
baseplate and secured to said baseplate, such as to provide
a space between said wheel train bridge and said baseplate.
with said wheel train being contained within said space;
said time correction switch mechanism being positioned in
the first area of said baseplate, said electronic circuit unit
being positioned in the second area of said baseplate, said
crystal vibrator being positioned in the third area of sid
baseplate, and said stepping motor being positioned in the
fourth area of said baseplate, with said battery being posi-
tioned such as to substantially cover said wheel train, said
electronic circuit and said crystal vibrator, and with said
stepping motor coil being positioned directly above said
stepping motor rotor and stator.
to MoBtm Rado
4*437,770
TIMEPIECE
Pnd Gogniat, Bicniie, SwitiertaBd,
S^ LoBgean, SwitzerlaBd
Filed Not. 30, 1902, Ser. No. 443,731
O^ priority, appliotkM SwitnriaMi, Dec 2, 1981,
iBt CL^ G04B 37/Oa 19/06. 37/08
4,437,7«
ELECTRONIC TIMEPIECE
MMthani Shida; Makoto Ueda; Shi^i Otawa; Maaaaki Mandai,
ttd KatSBhiko Sato, all of Tokyo, Japui, aMignon to Seiko
iMtrnoMoti k Electronic* Ltd^ Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jol. 10, 1900, Ser. No. 168,321
Clalma priority, appUcatkm Japu, Jul. 13, 1979, 54-89008
lot CL^ G04C 3/00
UA a 368-204 16 Ctaliiii
1. A timepiece comprising a workpiece movement control-
ling a dial, the movement being housing in a lower part of a
watch case and crystal applied over at least a portion of its
periphery against an upper edge of the lower part, wherein a
housing u provided below the periphery of said crystal, said
housing being formed by said upper edge having a surface
inclined toward the inside of the case and the surface on the
periphery of the crystal opposite said inclined surface, and a
gasket placed and deformably held in said housing below said
periphery of said crystal.
OfClll*TIM
eweoii
OUUTI 1
e»T»T«. 1
\
rMOUCNCT
SIVIOM
<^
1 ,
4
nmu
cincuir
1
a
— » 1 r
COtlT*0U.IM
aneuiT
1 r
5
f*
.
miviM
emcuiT
IIOTOII
'1 ,
OCrCCTHW
ancuii
4,437,771
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDIRECT
MEASUREMENT OF THERMAL ENERGY
Loigi Cazzaniga, Milan, Italy, latigDor to Cazzaain S.p.A^
Milan, Italy
FItod Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 337,959
Claims priority, appUcttioB Italy, Sep. 30, 1981, 24233 A/81
lot CL^ GOIK 17/06
UA a 374-39 WCtaima
1. An electronic timepiece comprising: a power source; a
quartz crystal oscillating circuit for generating a high fre-
quency output signal; a dividing circuit connected to receive
the high frequency output signal and operative to frequency
divide the output signal into predetermined lower frequency
signals; a wave shaping circuit connected to receive a plurality
of lower frequency signals from the dividing circuit for pro-
ducing a pluraUty of control signals; a controlling circuit con-
nected to receive the control signals from the wave shaping
circuit for controlling a driving circuit to produce a driving
signal having an intermittent signal portion having one signal
component effective when applied to the coil of the stepping
motor for flowing driving current from the power source
through the coil and another signal component effective to
connect one terminal of the coil to the other terminal thereof
•o as not to make the driving current zero; a stepping motor
connected to receive the drive signal fttwa the driving circuit;
and a detecting circuit for detecting the voltage output of the
power source and operative to change the duty ratio of the
intermittent signal portion in response to the detected output.
1- An apparatus for indirect measurement of the thermal
energy supplied to a plurality of zones by flow of a heat carry-
ing fluid from a common heating system wherein a plurality of
valves control the supply of the heating fluid to the respective
zones, the ^>paratus cciaprising:
a heating fluid temperature sensor for sensing the tempera-
ture of the heat carrying fluid being distributed to the
zones,
memory means containing a plurality of heat transfer coeffi-
cientt which are proportional to unit heat transfer rates of
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1143
heat transfer devices in the zones relative to correspond-
ing temperatures,
means responsive to the heat carrying fluid temperature
sensor for selecting one of the memorized heat transfer
coefficients,
preset heating capacity coefficient means for generating
heating capacity coefficienu of the corresponding
zones, and an electronic processing circuit including a fre-
quency generator and variable multiplier means respon-
sive to the selected heat transfer coefficient and the zone
heating capacity coefficients for generating series of
pulses having frequencies corresponding to heat consump-
tion in the respective zones.
4,437,772
LUMINESCENT DECAY TIME TECHNIQUES FOR
TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT
Thaddens V. Sanulskl, 4013 StilwcU St., Pittsburgh, Pa. 15214
CoBtinnation-iB-part of Ser. No. 73,841, Sep. 10, 1979, Pat. No.
4,245,507. This applicatioB Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 213,827
iBt. a.J GOIJ 5/00. 9/00: GOIK 11/20
MS. a. 374-129 29 Claims
LIGHT
SOUfKE
CIRCUITRY
^24
X-
<,A
^-A-^^'.
ee.
1L
OeTECTOR
PROCESSOR
CIRCUITRY
-30
1. A temperature probe comprising:
an optical fiber bundle having at least one optical fiber;
a temperature sensitive luminescent element having time
dependent light emission properties having at least two
different time emission components, said temperature
sensitive element being attached at one end of said bundle
and being adapted to be implanted in such material whose
temperature is to be measured;
light source located proximate the other end of said bundle,
said light source having a given frequency spectrum for
transient exciution of said temperature sensitive lumines-
cent element;
means proximate said other end for separating the light
passed from said source toward said temperature sensitive
element from that being emitted from said temperature
sensitive element; and
light responsive detection and analysis means located proxi-
mate said other end of said bundle, said light responsive
detection means including means for detecting and analyz-
ing said at least two different time emission componenu
emitted by said temperature sensitive luminescent element
as a function of the change in temperature of said tempera-
ture sensitive element.
said element having two main surfaces which are substan-
tially parallel to each other and to said length and delim-
ited by edges, said main surfaces being perpendicular to an
axis Z' which is inclined at an angle of between + 30* and
- 30* with respect to the optical axis Z of said quartz
crystal;
at least one first group of four electrodes disposed on said
element, parallel to said length, said electrodes being
disposed on said two main surfaces of said element, adja-
cent the edges thereof;
means for applying two different voluges to two of said
electrodes that are disposed on the same main surface and
to two of said electrodes that are located opposite each
other on different main surfaces so as to cause said element
4,437,773
QUARTZ THERMOMETER
Radoir DiBgar, St. AbMb; Jcu-Gcorges Michel, aod Claude-
Eric LcBCBbcricr, both of NcBchatel, aU of SwitzerlaBd, at-
lipMwi to Aaolab S.A., Neochttcl, SwitMriaad
Filed ABg. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,777
ClalBM priority, appUcatioB SwitacriiBd, Aog. 29, 1980,
6508/80; Apr. 21, 1981, 2588/81
IbL CL^ GOIK 11/22
VS. a. 374—117 15 ri.iT
1. A quartz thermometer comprising:
a resonator including at least one elongate element made
from a quarU crystal, the length of said element being
subatantially parallel to the X axis of said quartz crystal.
to vibrate torslonally and to emit a signal, the frequency
variations of which are a substantially linear function of
temperature;
means for supporting said element for said torsional vibra-
tion; and
an electronic circuit for processing said signal emitted by
said resonator, said circuit comprising:
a reference frequency oscillator; and
means for comparing the frequency of the signal emitted
by said resonator and the signal emitted by said refer-
ence frequency oscillator and for producing an indica-
tion of the temperature to which said resonator is sub-
jected from the difference between the frequencies of
these signals.
4,437,774
DRILLING BTT BEARINGS
Daryl A. Schnlti, R.R. 2, Box 9^A, Renaiclacr, lad. 47979
FUed Jbb. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 392,992
iBt a.i FI6C 19/28
MS. a. 384—92 10 Claim
1. A drilling bit comprising a frame having a leg
said leg having a central journal and an annular journal
concentric with, radially outward of, and axially coexten-
sive with said central journal, said central journal having
an outer face and said annular journal having inner and
outer faces,
a cutter rotatably mounted on said leg having an outer collar
with an inner face located outward of said annular journal
and an inner collar with inner and outer faces disposed
between said central and annular journals,
an outer bearing means between said inner face of said outer
collar and said outer face of said annular journal,
an intermediate bearing means between said inner face of
1144
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
said annular journal and said outer face of said inner col-
lar, and
an inner bearing means between said inner face of said inner
collar and said outer face of said central journal.
4,437,775
DOT PRINTER HEAD
Kuniakl Ochiai, Mishima; Masuni Horii, and Hideluzu IihU,
both of Shlzuoka, all of Japan, aasignors to Tokyo Dectric
Co^ Ltd^ Tokyo, Japan
FUcd Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 403,284
Claims priority, application Japan, Ana. 14, 1981, 56-
120894{U]
Int a.J B41 J 3/12
\}&. CL 400-124
spaced from one another in a plane which includes the
central axis of the dot printer head;
(d) a guide body which receives said plurality of needles,
said guide body having a plurality of guide holes in a
surface thereof perpendicular to the axis of the printer
head, each of said guide holes being composed of an oval
portion which extends in the radial direction of the dot
printer head and which slidably receives one of said nee-
dle caps and a circular portion disposed radially out-
wardly of the oval portion, the circular portion of each
guide hole being in communication with the oval portion
of each guide hole and the diameter of the circular portion
of each guide hole being greater than the width of the oval
portion of each guide hole and greater than the diameter
of the needle spring recited in subparagraph (0;
(e) a needle spring rest mounted in said guide body perpen-
dicularly to the central axis of the dot printer head, said
needle spring rest having a plurality of guide holes therein
each of which slidably receives and guides one of said
needles; and
(0 a needle spring surrounding each of said needles and
bearing at one end against said needle spring rest and at
the other end against one of said plurality of needle caps,
each of said needle springs serving to urge the associated
one of said needle caps towards the associated one of said
armatures.
5 Claims
■'<
-^-^^^\
■^^^l^
4,437,776
PRINTING MECHANISM
Hirofiimi Hirano, Arakawa, Japan, aaiignor to Canon Denshi
Kabushiki Kaisha, Saitama, Japan
FUed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,101
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 30, 1981, 56-46635
Int a.} B41J 1/34
U,S. a. 400—142
3Clainu
ijjrtW^
1. A dot printer head comprising:
(a) a plurality of electromagnets arranged in annular form
around the central axis of the dot printer head, each of said
plurality of electromagneu having an armature opera-
tively associated therewith;
(b) a plurality of flat needle caps, each of which has an
elongated cross-section in the radial direction of the dot
printer head, one of said needle caps being associated with
each of said plurality of electromagnets in position to be
driven by the armature thereof in the direction of the axis
of the dot printer head;
(c) a plurality of needles, the non-working end of each of
said plurality of needles being bent in the radial direction
of the dot printer head and embedded in an associated one
of said needle caps, the working ends of said plurality of
needles being aligned with one another and equi-distantly
1. A printing mechanism for printing characters on a record-
ing medium, such as a paper sheet, that is fed in a feeding
direction, said mechanism comprising:
a type drum mounted for rotation in a plane that extends
perpendicularly to the feeding direction and for transla-
tion in a shift direction extending along a line on which
characters are to be printed on the recording medium;
a plurality of character type carried on said type drum; and
control means for simultaneously causing one of said type to
strike said recording medium and translating said type
drum in said shift direction, said control means comprising
a pinion gear flxed to said type drum for rotation there-
with and a rack gear extending in said shift direction and
selectively engageable with said pinion gear, wherein said
type drum is translated in said shift direction during rota-
tion thereof when said rack gear engages said pinion gear.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1143
4,437,777
PRINTER HAVING PLURAL TYPE WHEEL ASSEMBLY
FumiUia Hori, Tamayama, Japan, auignor to Alpi Electric Co^
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,308
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 2, 1981, 56-12981
Int. a.} B41J 1/34
UA q. 400-154J 11 cialnu
1. A printer comprising a carriage adapted to be shifted
along a line to be printed and carrying a plurality of type
wheels each having a plurality of type elements spaced around
respective areas of its circumference, selection means con-
nected with said type wheels for rotating them and shifting
them laterally within said carriage for bringing a respective
area of any one of said type wheels into a printing position,
impact means including a hammer movable along a line to be
printed to bring said hammer into a printing position opposite
the selected area for impacting a record medium between said
hammer and any type element in said printing position, carry
means interconnecting said impact means and said carriage for
moving them unitarily along the line to be printed, return
means for returning said carriage and said impact means to
their initial position for the stort of printing of the next line, and
control means responsive to a particular rotary position of at
least one of said type wheels for operating said return means by
the actuation of said carry means with said at least one type
wheel being placed in said particular rotary position.
4,437,778
TAPE CASSETTE HAVING MEANS FOR ADJUSTING A
TAPE SEGMENT LENGTH FOR A THERMAL PRINTER
Takao Miyuhita, Atsugi; Hidckuni Aizawa. and Tom Taka-
ndya, both of Yokohama, aU of Japan, auignors to Sony
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,700
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 11, 1980, 55-178144
Int. a.3 B41J 33/14
U.S. a. 400-208 11 Claims
having a segment extending between said reels, the length
of said segment being adjustable;
tape drawing means slidably moveable within said housing
means for adjusting the length of said segment and includ-
ing at least one sliding member moveable within said
housing means in a direction parallel to said segment of
Upe and having a portion thereof' always positioned
within said housing means and having an end section, a
connecting member connected to said end section, and a
second projecting portion having a free end and extending
from said connecting member at an opposite side of said
housing means and being substantially parallel to said first
projecting portion; and
first guide means attached to said free end of the second
projecting portion of said Upe drawing means for slidably
moving therewith in said direction parallel to said segment
of Upe with respect to said housing means as the Upe
drawing means moves within said housing means for
guiding said segment of upe and for adjusting the length
thereof used for printing.
4,437,779
REPLACEABLE RIBBON CARTRIDGE
WUlie GofT, Jr., and WUUam M. Jenkins, both of Austin, Tex.,
assignors to International Business Machines Corporation,
Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,479
Int a.' B41J 31/10
U.S. a. 400-208 3 Claims
1. Apparatus for replacing an off the print element carrier
ribbon supply cartridge in a printer having a movable print
sUtion comprising:
means for maintaining a portion of said ribbon external of
said cartridge, said external ribbon being positioned in
operative relation to the print sUtion;
a pair of means located on either side of the cartridge for
severing said external portion of ribbon from the ribbon
remaining in the cartridge;
said means for maintaining comprising two flexible guide
means each connected on one end to the printer adjacent
one pair of said means for severing, and at the other end to
said print element carrier, one on each side thereof, for
movement therewith; and
means for splicing said external portion of ribbon to ribbon
in a replacement cartridge.
mg:
1. A Upe cassette for use with a printing apparatus, compris-
housing means including a first projecting portion at one side
thereof;
first and second reels roUtably mounted in said housing
a Upe having a pigment thereon wound about said reels and
4,437,780
CYLINDRICAL PLATEN PRINTER WITH IMPROVED
PAPER GUIDE
WcadeUn Weber, Siegen, and Manfred Rosenthal, Kirchea, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aMigMrs to U.S. PhUipa Corpora-
tioa, New York, N.Y.
Filed No?. 12, 1981, Sar. No. 320,778
Claims priority, appUeatkm Fed. Rap. of Ganumy. Nov. 19,
1980,3043630
bt CLi B41J 13/16
MS, CL 400—642 20 ClaiM
1. A printing mechanism comprising a circular cylindrical
1040 O.G
1146
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
platen defining an axial direction, means for guiding and feed-
ing a record carrier around the platen, and a printing member
mounted to be displaceable in said axial direction between
extreme positions, characterized in that said means for guiding
and feeding comprises:
a plurality of hold-down devices movable in a direction
substantially tangential to the platen surface, and trans-
verse to said axial direction, between an engaging position
and a deflecting position, in said engaging position said
surface of the first cover to form a flrst edge part adjacent
the inner edge thereof and overiapping the back surface of
the second cover to form a second edge part adjacent the
inner edge thereof, said first cover having a first pair of
holes at said first part, said second cover having a second
pair of holes at said second edge part, said first and second
pairs of holes being located along a line which extends
transversely across said back part, said back part being
attached to the flrst and second covers along the longitu-
dinal edges of the flrst and second edge parts, the area
extending between the first pair of holes and the area
extending between the second pair of holes being unat-
tached, and
(d) flexible binding prong means extending through the first
pair of holes, along the interior surface of the back part,
and also extending through the second pair of holes, the
binding prong means having a flrst free end with an eye
for receiving a second free end of the prong means to
allow for sliding engagement of the prong means through
the eye to form a closed loop.
devices engaging the platen such as to hold an inserted
record carrier against the platen, in said deflecting posi-
tion said devices being lifted off" the printing platen and
forming guides which define a path followed by the lead-
ing edge of a record carrier being inserted around the
platen, and
control means for moving said devices between said posi-
tions, responsive to the printing member being in one of
said extreme positions.
4,437,781
RING BINDER
Rolf Weihe, and Georg Welhe, both of Kreuztal-Femdorf, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siplast SiegerUnder GmbH.
Krenztal-Femdorf, Fed. Rep. of Gcrmaoy
Continuation of Ser. No. 853,101, No?. 21, 1977, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 777,316, Mar. 14, 1977,
«I»wioned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 596,831, Jul. 17,
1975, abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 433^67
Jan. 16, 1974, abandoMd. Iliis appUcation May 6, 1982, Ser. No.
375,561
1973*23o56r*^' •«rfi«tioB Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 18.
Int a.3 B42F WOO, 13/06
U A a. 402-8 5 cud^
4,437,782
SPUNEO HUB ASSEMBLY FOR CONNECTING TWO
SHAFTS
Hubert Geitthoff, Lohmar, Fed. Rep. of Germany, anignor to
Jean Walterscheid GmbH, Lohmar, Fed. Rep. of Germaoy
FUed Dec. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 454.233
Claimi priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Gcnnany, Jan. 14.
1982, 3200846 ^' ^
Int a.3 F16D 1/12
UA a 403-13 4 0,1^
1. A nng bmder for perforated paper stock comprising.
(a) a flrst cover having exterior and interior surfaces and an
inner edge,
(b) a second cover having exterior and interior surfaces and
a mner edge spaced from the inner edge of the flrst cover.
(c) a back part of flexible sheet material connecting the first
and second covers and forming a flexible back strip which
spans the space between inner edges of the first and sec-
ond covers for allowing the covers to move between an
open coplanar position and a closed, generally spaced,
parallel position, said back part overlapping the back
1. A spline assembly for connecting together a pair of shafts,
particularly for connecting together a power takeoff shaft of a
tractor and a drive shaft of an agricultural implement, one of
said shafts being a splined hub and the other being a splined
shaft, comprising: hub spline means on said splined hub; a
cylindrical inner centering surface extending between the
termination of said hub spline means and an end of said splined
hub; shaft spline means on said spUned shaft arranged to be
placed in torque-transmitting engagement with said hub spline
means and having an outermost diameter, said cylindrical
centering surface being formed with a diameter corresponding
to said outermost diameter to guide said splined shaft into
engagement with said splined hub; an opening extending
through the wall of said splined hub having a ball located
therein, said ball being arranged to have a segment thereof
project inwardly into said hub to effect engagement of said ball
with said splined shaft; said opening being positioned relative
to said hub spline means so that said baU will engage between
said shaft spline means when said splined shaft is arranged in
engagement with said splined hub with the axial distance be-
tween the center of said opening and said end of said splined
hub being equal to or smaller than the axial length of said
cylindrical inner centering surface.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1147
4,437,783
DEVICE FOR THE DETECnON OF THE POSITION OF
THE THRUST REVERSER OF A TURBOJET ENGINE
Y?M R. Halia, Melua, and Rene M. J. Heraea, Combs la ViUe,
both of Fhmce, asiigBors to Sodete Natioaale d'Etude et de
ConstructioB de Moteurs d'AviatioB, S.N.E.C.M.A., France
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286^86
Claims priority, appUcation France, Aug. 11, 1980, 80 17640
Int. a.i F16B 1/00
U.S. a 403-27 s ctains
apatr of spaced flange means creating a flrst coplanar surface
for welding to a support structure and an imperforate second
web section to be perforated by a self drilling threaded futener
integrally connected to the first surface by strut means, said
second web section being generally parallel with said first
surface, said strut means extending on both extremities of said
spaced flange means interconnecting the flanges with the im-
perforate second web section, the strut means including a
knee-like joint which includes a bend line about which the strut
can be transformed to change the spatial relationship between
the flrst section and second surface in a predetermined but
accurately controlled fashion.
4,437,785
ELASTOMERIC SEALING MEMBER
Guy S. Puccio, Snyder, N.Y., aaaigBor to Acne Highway Prod-
ucts Corp., Amherst, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 460,923
Int. a.» EOlC 11/10
U.S. a. 404-64 ig Claims
1. A device to detect the position of a thrust rcverser of a
turbojet engine and iu locking means, having a hook element
integral with a moving part of the thrust reverser which moves
in rectUinear translation, mechanical locking means and a
stationary electric detection means for detecting the position of
the hook element with respect to the mechanical locking
means comprising: (a) a stationary support element; (b) locking
means pivotally mounted on the stationary support element so
as to pivot about a ftfst axis, the locking means having an arm
extending therefrom on one side of the first pivot axis, a strap
extending therefrom on the opposite side of the flrst pivot axis,
and an axle mounted on the strap so as to be engageable with
the hook element; (c) control means connected to the arm to
pivot the locking means about the first pivot axis; and (d) a
lever pivotally mounted on the locking means to pivot about a
second pivot axis which extends parallel to the first pivot axis,
the lever having a first lever arm extending into the path of
movement of the hook element and a second lever arm which
actuates the electric detection means such that when the thrust
reverser is in its locked position the hook element contacu the
first lever arm to actuate the electric detection means.
4,437,784
ADJUSTABLE SHIM SYSTEM
VnadB C. PetertoB, St Charlea, IU., asslgBor to DUnois Tool
Worki Inc., Chicago, HI.
FUed Jan. 28, 1982, Sw. No. 343,623
lat a.i P16B 37/02
VS. a 403-408 4 Claims
28a
1. An adjustable shim device for use in accurately control-
Ung the distance between a support structure and a workpiece
to be fastened to the support structure, the device including
1. An elastomeric sealing member positionable in an expan-
sion joint for use in sealing the same, said sealing member
comprising an elongated tubular body having a length com-
mensurate with the length of the joint to be sealed and having
a substantially uniform cross section throughout iU length and
a plurality of interconnecting internal support members for
providing support to said body and for controlling resistance
to compression thereof in a direction transverse to iu length,
said body including a top wall, a bottom wall, and a pair of
opposed side walls, each of said side walls being adapted to
bear tightly against the sides of said joint, each of said top and
bottom walls including downwardly directed V-shaped por-
tions which cause deflection of the associated wall to occur in
a downward direction when transverse compression forces are
applied to the side walls, the interconnecting internal support
members including upper and lower spaced apart ribs and right
and left spaced apart stniu, the upper and lower spaced apart
ribs extending from one side wall to the other and each rib
including a generally downwardly directed V-shaped element,
the ends of the upper ribs joining the side walls at locations
above the midpoint of the side walls and the ends of the lower
rib joining the side walls at locations below the midpoint of the
side walls, and the right and left spaced apart strutt extending
between the top wall and the bottom wall, each strut including
upper and lower generally straight portions, the upper ends of
the upper portions joining the top wall at spaced apart loca-
tions and the lower ends of the upper portions joining the
upper rib at spaced apart locations between the ends thereof,
the spacing between the upper ends of the upper portions of
the spaced apart strutt either being the same or slighUy greater
than the spacing between the lower ends of the upper portions,
and the lower portions of the strutt extending downwardly and
outwardly from the upper rib to locations intersecting the
bottom waU. the spacing between the upper ends of the lower
portions of the spaced apart strutt being less than the spacing
between the lower ends of the lower portions.
1148
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,786
ARTIFiaAL SEAWEED
John P. Morriiroe, 283 Park Dr^ Palatine W. M067
FUcd JnJ. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 39S,618
Int OJ E02B 3/04
VJS. a. 405—24
4^7,788
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE ADVANQNG OF
A SUDING FORM
Heini T. Walbr&U. Norditrane 75, Boon 1, Fed. Rep. of Gw •
many (5300)
15 Claims FUed Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,487
192*3!iMi?*^' WUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany. Nof . 17,
Int. a.3 E21D n/04
VS. a. 405—146
22Claiflu
3-27 31 6
1. Artificial seaweed for deployment on lake bed bottoms
and the like to build thereon deposits from particulate material
suspended in the water which comprises an anchor having a
plurality of elongated flexible particulate material receiving
tubes positioned in laterally spaced side-by-side relation, means
spanning the spaced tubes connected thereto along the length
thereof and arranged to be held Uut against the lake bottom
when the tubes arc deployed, and a plurality of rows of buoy-
ant Angers anchored at their bottom ends to said means and
having free upper ends for rising in the water to levels below
the surface thereof, and said Angers being spaced apart in a
plurality of rows exposing the surfaces of the Angers to the
water for trapping suspended particulate material to build up
said deposits on the bottom.
4,437,787
PLASTIC CHEESE MOLD
Dirk C. H. Tan der Plocg, Ond-Beyerland, and Hendrikns M.
'•■•ria, Rotterdam, both of Netiieriands, aaaignors to Albany
latcmatiooal Plastic B.V., Netherlands
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,450
Int a.J B29C I/OO. 15/00; AOIC 25/13
UAa.425-84 .Claims
1. A method for advancing a sliding form upon the lining of
a gallery or tunnel, which comprises a formwork body extend-
mg m the longitudinal direction of the gallery or tunnel and
substantially parallel to its working face, an end form which
closes off the front side of the annular space contained between
the working face of the gallery or tunnel or an outer shell
arranged there and the formwork body and a supporting struc-
ture which bears at least the formwork body, characterized by
the fact that, at least in the region of the roof of the gallery or
tunnel, the parU of the formwork body which are filled at the
back with liquid concrete and the parts of the formwork body
which rest against concrete which has not yet hardened, are
rigidly supported on the supporting structure and that, after
sufficient hardening of the concrete, transfer is cfTected to an
elastic supporting of the formwork body on the supporting
structure.
4,437,789
METHOD AND MEANS FOR PROTECTING BURIED
CABLE FROM RODENT DAMAGE
Allen B. Kasiewicz, Rumson, N J., assignor to GK Technologies.
Incorporated, Greenwich, Conn.
FUed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,359
Int a.J E02D 29/10: F16L 1/02. 57/00
UA a 405-156 16CUdms
1. A cheese mold of plastics material comprising: at least two
matching shells each having an integral bottom member, said
two shells and the bottom members when coupled together
forming a hollow mold having a substantially constant integral
cross-section along its length and with a bottom closure, said
shells having a moisture permeably layer securely attached to
their inner walls, said mold having at least one ouUet opening
for removing whey; said bottom members having a hinged
connection therebetween and having adjacent thereto an annu-
lar recess and a hollow follower container member having
edges frictionally engaged with said mold in said annular re-
cess.
1. The method of laying rodent-protected cable from a
forwardly moving vehicle having (1) a cable supply-reel sup-
port from which unprotected cable can be continuously paid
out and (2) a sheath-material reel support from which a strip of
flexible sheath material can be continuously paid out, the strip
being of width between lateral edges more than sufficient to
circumferentially envelop the cable at desired ultimate radial
offset from the cable, which method comprises continuously
paying out from said supports a supply of cable and a supply of
sheath material at a rate coordinated with forward movement
of the vehicle, supporting the sheath material at substantially
said offset beneath the cable and for a predetermined longitudi-
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1149
nal zone of travel of cable and sheath material, the sheath
entering said zone in substantially flat condition and being
formed into upwardly dished enveloping contour around the
cable as it travels through said zone, centrally supporting the
cable with respect to the progressively enveloping sheath,
completing the sheath-envelopment of the cable by lapping the
edges of the sheath, admitting a continuous flow of hardenable
cementitious material between lateral edges of the sheath to All
the sectional area defined by the sheath just prior to sheath-
edge lapping to complete the envelopment, and guiding the
thus-Ailed and ensheathed cable to ground-supported at-rest
position behind the vehicle while the vehicle is moving for-
ward, whereby the cementitious material may harden in situ to
become a rodent-protective sheath.
4,437,790
BUOYANCY COMPENSATOR
Tlmotiiy N. Trop, 139 Elmwood Dr., Naperrille, III. 60540
FUed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423.221
Int a.J B63C 11/18. 11/02
MS. a. 405—186 21 Cblms
1. A buoyancy compensator, comprising:
an enclosure for containing air including a vest portion
adapted to be worn on the user's chest and a back portion
adapted to be encircle the back of the user;
an inflation means for allowing the user to inflate said enclo-
sure, said inflation means including an elongate hose in
fluid communication with the interior of said enclosure,
said inflation means further including a manually operable
valve for controlling the fluid flow through said hose;
an exhaust means for exhausting air from said enclosure,
mounted on said enclosure and communicating with the
interior of said enclosure, said exhaust means including a
valve operable to release air under pressure from said
enclosure; and
means for automatically opening said exhaust means valve
when said inflation hose is extended forcefully away from
the user.
4,437,791
CLAMP FOR HYDRAUUC HOSE BUNDLES
Graeme E. Reynolda, 10859 Church La., Houston, Tex. 77043
FUed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 364.998
Int a.} E02B 3/00
MS. a. 405—195 11 Claims
1. In a marine hydraulic control system for an offshore
oilwell platform, a clamping device adapted to secure a hy-
draulic hose bundle to a tubular riser system, said hydraulic
hose bundle extending between the well platform and a subsea
control pod, comprising:
a generally cylindrical clamping body having an axial pas-
sage through said body for receiving such a hydraulic
hose bundle;
said clamping body being formed of first and second gener-
ally semi-cylindrical body members, each of said first and
second body members having a seiA-cylindrical interior
wall portion;
pivotal mount means operably connected with said first and
second members and mounting said first and second body
members for pivotal movement between an open position
and a closed position;
first clamping means mounted with said first and second
body members for securing said first and second body
members in said closed position about such hydraulic hose
bundle with said interior wall portions of said body mem-
bers in secure engagement with such hydraulic hose bun-
dle;
second clamping means mounted with one of said first and
second body members independently of said first clamp-
ing means and extending laterally from said one body
member for removably attaching said generally cylindri-
cal clamping body to said tubular riser system;
said second clamping means including an arm formed ex-
tending laterally from said body member, said arm having
at its outer end a base member wider than said arm;
tubular riser system mount means adapted for attachment to
said tubular riser system; and
said tubular riser system mount means having a groove
formed therein for receiving said base member of said arm
^so;^
to removably attach said clamping body to the tubular
riser system.
7. In a marine hydraulic control system for an oflshore
oilwell platform, a clamping device adapted to secure a hy-
draulic hose bundle to a wireline extending between the well
platform and a subsea control pod, comprising:
a generally cylindrical body having an axial passage through
said generally cylindrical body for receiving such a hy-
draulic hose bundle;
said generally cylindrical body being formed of first and
second generally semi-cylindrical body members, each of
said first and second body members having a semi-cylin-
drical interior wall portion;
pivotal mount means operably connected with, said first and
second body members and mounting said first and second
body members for pivotal movement between an open
position and a closed position;
first clamping means mounted with said first and second
body members for securing said first and second members
in a closed position about such hydraulic hose bundle with
1150
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
said interior wall portions of said body members in secure
engagement with such hydraulic hose bundle;
second clamping means mounted with one of said first and
second body members independently of said first clamp-
ing means and extending laterally from said one body
member for releasably attaching said generally cylindrical
clamping body to such wireline extending between the
well platform and subsea control pod;
second clamping means including a first yoke extending
laterally from said one body member and having a groove
to receive the wireline;
a second yoke and yoke mount means attached to said body
and mounting said second yoke for pivotal movement
with respect to said first yoke, said second yoke having a
groove alignable with said groove in said first yoke, the
combined size of said alignable grooves being sufficient to
cause a bulge in such cable to prevent relative movement
of said cable; and
yoke connector means for releasably connecting said first
and second yoke together with the wireline positioned in
said aligned grooves in said first and second yokes.
M37,7W
PROTECTING MEANS
Altaa H. Meay, 1 Hoo?er St, North AriingtoB, N J. 07032. nd
Deanl* L. Palmer, 61 Dooglaa Dr., Towm», N J. 07082
RIed May 4, 1M2, Ser. No. 374,731
lat CLi E02B 3/22
UA a 405-212 ,j ctai..
tx:
4,437,792
VERTICALLY MOVING PLATFORM SUPPORTED ON
LEGS
Francois Durand, Antibes, France, and Auguste Smulders, Ge-
Be?i, Switzerland, asiignors to Societe Anonyme Engrenaaes
et Reducteurs, Vellzy Villacoublay, France; a part interMt
FUed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,695
Claims priority, application France, Oct 13, 1980, 80 21804
Int Q\? E21B 7/12
U.S. a. 405-198 2 Claim.
O
1. Means for protecting a water-bound and partially water-
submerged object, such as a boat, pile, float, pillar, or the like,
from ice- or impact-caused damage, comprising:
means for buoyant flotation thereof substantially upon the
surface of water; and
means for coupling said flotation means in spaced-apari
circumjacency to such object; wherein
said flotation means comprises means (a) for defining, and
substantially circumscribing, a water-surface area which is
exposed to the ambient atmosphere about such object, and
(b) which is yieldable, (1) in response to a pressured en-
gagement thereof by an ice formation, to enlarge said area,
and (2) to exhibit resilient deformation upon being im-
pacted; and
said flotation means comprises a plurality of individual flota-
tion devices, each one of said flotation devices having
means for tethering thereof separately to such object.
4437 794
PYRAMIDAL OFFSHORE STRUCTURE
R. Leroy Grimsley, and Len J. Gawel, both of Ponca Gty, Okla.,
aasignon to Conoco Inc., Ponca Qty, Okla.
FUed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,425
lat a.) B63B 35/U
U A a 405-224 ,« cblma
1. In a platform having legs vertically movable relative to
the pUtform, each leg having a double rack thereon and two
rows of pinions one engageable with each rack of one of the
legs; the improvement comprising a pinion carrier for each
row of pinions, a link for each pinion carrier, each link being
pivotally connected at one end to the platform and at the other
end to its associated said pinion carrier, the links being located
substantially in the medial plane of the teeth of the racks and
pmions, and means detachably interconnecting the lower ends
of the legs for verticaUy swinging movement about horizontal
axes reUtive to the platform in raised positions of the legs, said
axis being parallel to but spaced from the plane defined by the
teeth of said double rack, whereby rotation of the correspond-
ing pinions swings the leg vertically about said axis.
1. An offshore support structure comprising
(a) a substantially horizontal flotation adjustable section
NfARCH 20, 1984
rk^i
GENERAL ANEKMECHANICAL
llSl
containing at leut 3 flotation adjustable members, each of
said memben having means to adjust its buoyancy,
wherein each of said members is connected at each end to
other flotation adjustable members wherein each connec-
tion of members form an apex point,
(b) at least 3 upper support members connected at the lower
end thereof to the horizontal flotation adjustable section at
the apex poinu thereof, wherein all upper support mem-
bers substantially mutually join to form a common upper
apex, wherein the geometric configuration of any 2 adja-
cent upper support members and the horizontal flotation
adjustable center section forms an isosceles triangle, and
(c) at least one substantially horizontal platform connected
to and supported by said upper support members at a level
above the water line.
rial from the storage container when a pre-selected quan-
tity of the material is present in the first receptacle;
isolating the first receptacle from the storage container
subsequent to termination of the delivery of pulverized
material thereto;
introducing a premurized gas to said first receptacle and
coupling the discharge from said first receptacle to a
source of pressurized gas to pneumatically transfer the
contents of the fint receptacle into a second receptacle
during the isolation of the first receptacle from the storage
container;
4,437,795
MINE ROOF ANCHOR ASSEMBLY
Clande C. White, Birmingham, Ala., aasignor to Birmiogham
Bolt Company, Birmingham, Ala.
FUed No?. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,490
Int a.J E21D 21/00, 20/02
U.S. CI. 405—299 10 riri«if
liWW««^«iswi!|M,j||||i!!j|M^^^^
_!
^C^
1. A mine roof anchor assembly including
(a) an elongated bolt having a head at one end and threaded
for a portion of ite length at the other end
(b) an expansion anchor mounted on the threaded end of said
bolt
(c) said expansion anchor including a wedge member thread-
edly engaged with the threaded end of said bolt, and an
expansion member through which said wedge member
passes to urge said expansion member into gripping en-
gagement with the mine roof
(d) said expansion anchor further including a bail member
secured to one end of said expansion member
(e) said bail member including a first upwardly extending
portion and a second portion extending inwardly from the
upper end of said first portion and in overlying relation to
said wedge member, to limit the upward movement of said
elongated bolt relative to said expansion member, and
(0 mine roof-engaging means carried by the inwardly ex-
tending second portion of said bail member
(g) said mine roof-engaging means and bail member being
deflected in a direction to urge the former into impinging
engagement with the mine roof under force of said elon-
gated bolt engaging the inwardly extending second por-
tion of said bail member.
isolating the second receptacle from the first receptacle
when the contenu of the first receptacle have been trans-
ferred thereto;
pressurizing the second receptacle subsequent to the isola-
tion thereof from the first receptacle;
causing the material in the pressurized second receptacle to
flow into a feed chamber in which an intermediate pres-
sure is maintained between the pressure in said second
receptacle after pressurization thereof and the pressure in
said pressurized container; and
delivering the material from the feed chamber to a pressur-
ized container.
4,437,797
PNEUMATIC MAIL STATION FOR THE DELIVERY,
PNEUMATICALLY DECELERATED RECEPTION AND
TRANSrr OF PNEUMATIC DISPATCH CASES
Hans J. Kardiaal, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, asaignor to
Siemens AktiengcicUschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. R^. of
Germany
FUed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,420
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Gernuuy, Jan. 19.
1981, 3102248
Int a^ B65G 5J/32
VJS. CL 406—110 21 rimim^
4437 796
PNEUMATIC TRANSPORT PROCEDURE AND
APPARATUS
Leon UlveUng, Howald; Edonard LegUlc, Luxembourg, and Jean
Boe?er, Beiiem, aU of Luxembourg, aaaignors to Paul Worth
SA., Luzemboorg, Luxembourg
FUed Jun. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 158,612
Claims priority, appUcation Loxembourg, Jun. 15, 1980,
81388
Int a.} B65G 53/66
VJS. CL 406—25 21 daims
1. A method for transferring a controlled quantity of pulver-
ized material from a storage container at atmospheric pressure
into a pressurized container, comprising the steps of:
deUvering pulverized material from the storage container
into a first receptacle;
continually measuring the weight of material delivered into
the first receptacle and terminating the delivery of mate-
C3}
1. A pneumatic mail station for the transmission, reception
and transit of pneumatic dispatch cases, comprising two tube
sections for coupling with an incoming and an outgoing for-
warding tube path, wall means providing mutually opposite
1132
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
limiting walls of the pneumatic maU station at which the re-
spective tube sections are located, said wall means having an
mward transfer opening means for pneumatic dispatch cases to
be sent out and an outward transfer opening means for re-
ceivcd pneumatic dispatch cases at the same limiting walls,
earner means disposed between the limiting walls and having
a reception tube chamber («, 23) for the reception of pneumatic
dispatch cases which can be introduced into alignment with
the tube section associated with the incoming forwarding tube
path, said reception tube chamber (8, 23) having closure means
effective at one end of the reception tube chamber for creating
an air pUlow which decelerates an incoming pneumatic dis-
patch case and an air conduit (10, 20) pneumatically connect-
mg the tube section associated with the incoming forwarding
tube path to the tube section associated with the outgoing
forwarding tube path in the reception position of the reception
tube chamber (8, 23), characterized in that the reception tube
chamber (8, 23) has said closure means at the end thereof closer
to the outgoing forwarding tube path, said carrier means hav-
mg a second tube chamber (9, 22) which extends parallel to the
reception tube chamber (8, 23) and U displaceable in common
with It. said second tube chamber (9, 22) being in alignment
with the two tube sections (3, 29; 6, 30) in one position and
being m alignment with the inward transfer opening means in
another position; and in that the air conduit (10, 20) joins at one
end with the reception tube chamber (8, 23) and can be dis-
placed in common with said reception chamber (8, 23) and the
second tube chamber (9, 22) in such manner that, given the
posiaon of the second tube chamber (9, 22) in alignment with
the two tube sections, the communication of the air conduit
(10, 20) at least with the tube section (3, 29) associated with the
outgoing forwarding tube path is blocked but, in contrast
thereto, is released at the position of the reception tube cham-
ber (8, 23) in alignment with the two tube sections.
M37,799
PIPELINE TRANSPORTATION SYSTEM
Henry Ua; Donald L. GfbMm; David H. S. Chcag. tad JuBCi E.
Rathke, aU of CotomUa, Mo^ anignora to IV Oratora of the
UniTcraity of MiaMwri, Colnmbia, Mo.
CoBtiBiiatioa of Ser. No. 839.254, Oct 4, 1977, abudoned. Thii
appUcatioB Jon. 25, 1979, Ser. No. 51,493
iBt a.J B6SG 51/04
VS. a. 406-198 , cudm
4,437,798
VALVE FOR DISCHARGE OUTLET AND ACTUATING
MEANS THEREFORE
Dwnia J. ScUpper, St Charles, Mc, aadgnor to ACF Indns-
triea. Inc., New York, N.Y. ^^
Filed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,052
Int CL^ B65G 53/46
UA CL 406-119 15 ctaima
1. In a hydraulic capsule pipelining system comprising a
pipeline adapted for flow therethrough of a carrier liquid, and
cargo-carrymg capsules adapted to be transported through the
pipehne by the carrier liquid, and cargo-carrying capsules
adpated to be transported through the pipeline by the carrier
liquid flowing through the pipeline; means for pumping the
earner liquid through the pipeline in the direction for transport
of the capsules, said pumping means comprising at least one
segment of length of the pipeline constituting a pump cylinder
the capsules being tnmsported through the pipeline being
adaptwi to pass endwise through said pump cylhider from one
end thereof to the other and at least some of the capsules
havmg a reUtively close fit in said pump cylinder to act as
pistons m said pump cylinder for pumping the carrier liquid
through the pipeline in the direction for transport of the cap-
sules, and means for driving said close-fitting capsules acting as
pistons through said pump cylinder in said direction for pump-
ing the earner liquid in said direction, said driving means
comprising electrically energized means along said pump cyl-
mder for producing an electromagnetic field in said pump
cylinder for linear propulsion of said close-fitting capsules
acting as pistons through said pump cylinder in said direction
m response to said field, said close-fitting capsules acting as
pistons forcing the carrier liquid ahead of them through the
pump cylinder as they are driven through said pump cylinder
by said driving means, said driving means comprising coil
means surrounding said cylinder and means for supplying said
coU means with multiphase alternating current, at least the
surface of the capsules acting as pUtons being electrically
conductive, the driving means acting as a linear induction
motor for propulsion of the capsules acting as pistons through
the cyUnder, said pump cylinder being electrically nonconduc-
tive, of short length reUitive to the overall length of the pipe-
Ime, Its mternal diameter being smaUer than the internal diame-
ter of the pipeline and such as to provide a relatively close fit
for the capsules acting as pistons, and there being a gradual
transition from the internal diameter of the pipeline to the
mternal diameter of the cyUnder at the inlet end of the cylin-
der, each capsule being formed to act as a piston in the cylinder
and comprising a cargo-carrying cylindrical container of ferro-
magnetic material covered on the outside with a material of
higher electrical conductivity.
1. Valve means provided in a discharge opening defined by
taterally spaced outlet slope sheets; said valve means being
movable into a closed position blocking communication be-
tween an outiet compartinent and a discharge conduit; said
valve means comprising a segment of an arc which in said
closed position spans the distance between outiet slope sheets
and is roautable to an open position located generally below
one of said outlet slope sheets; said arcuate segment being
•ctuated by a gear means engaging said segment at an area
located generally in the mid-portion of said arcuate segment;
««id gear means attached to actuating means extending to at
least one side of the outlet.
4,437,800
CUTTING TOOL
MaMtada Arakl, Haada, and YaUo Taaaka, Aichi, both of
Japan, aaaignon to Nippon OU aad Fata, Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FIW Ang. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,108
Claima priority, application Japan, Sep. 3, 1980, 55-121200
Int CL^ B23G 1/20
VS. CL 407—119 2 n.i«i,
1. A cutting tool consisting of a pUte-shaped body compris-
ing a smtered cermet tayer and a sintered body kyer contain-
mg high density boron nitride or diamond, said sintered cermet
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1133
layer constituting the center portion of the plate-shaped body
and being surrounded and adhered at the side surface or at the
U
^
side surface and upper and lower surfaces with the sintered
body layer.
1. A chuck assembly for securely but releasably retaining a
cutting tool centered within the chuck assembly comprising:
a chuck body having an outer surface a rearwardly Upering
internal bore and a radial aperture extending through the
body between the outer surface and the internal bore;
a rearwardly Upering compressible collet mounted within
the internal bore of the chuck body, said collet including
a tool-receiving bore extending axially through the collet
and a transverse bore extending between the outer surface
of the collet and the axial collet bore for securely retaining
and centering the tool within the chuck body's internal
bore;
means for mounting the collet within the internal bore of the
chuck body and for compressing the compressible collet
to secure the tool centered therein by urging the collet and
tool rearwardly into tight engagement with the rear-
wardly Upering internal bore of the chuck body;
means coupled to said collet, but not to the chuck body, for
releasably retaining a tool within said axial collet bore
when said tool is mounted within said compressible collet
which is in turn mounted and compressed within internal
bore of the chuck body; and
means for securing the chuck body directiy to the tool when
mounted within the tool-receiving bore of said collet, said
means including a member coupled to the chuck body and
passing through the collet to engage the tool.
4,437.802
BORING TOOL HAVING A DETACHABLE CUTTING
BLADE
John J. Hall, Jr., 13 Rldgwood Rd.. WaUingford. Conn. 06492
Filed Sep. 14. 1981. Ser. No. 302.165
Int a.} B23B 41/02: B26D 1/12
VS. a. 408—197 7 Claims
1. A boring tool comprising:
a cylindrical head having a front end and a cylindrically
shaped outer surface, said head including a groove for
removing chips extending longitudinally rearwardly from
said front end and being open radially to said outer sur-
face, said groove including a planar surface having a
recess therein for receiving a detachable cutting blade,
said recess having a floor extending longitudinally rear-
wardly from said front end to a stop surface at the rear
thereof for preventing rearward movement of said blade,
said recess extending radially outwardly to the outer
surface of said head, said blade having an interior surface
for seating on said recess floor and having a cutting edge
protruding from the front end of said bead, said interior
blade surface and said floor including at least one mating
4.437.801
HIGH TORQUE CHUCK ASSEMBLY AND COLLET
Da?id L. Lewis. Darien, III., aasignor to The Bcndix Corpora-
tion. Sonthfleld, Mich.
DiTision of Ser. No. 2.118. Jan. 9. 1979, Pat. No. 4.266.895. Thii
application Sep. 2, 1980. Ser. No. 183,489
The portion of the tern of this patent subsequent to May 12,
1998, has been disclaimed.
lat a.i B23C 5/26; B23B 31/04
VS. a. 409—232 3 Claims
protrusion and slot extending longitudinally for permit-
ting longitudinal advancement of said blade surface with
respect to said floor and for retaining said seated blade
against radial outward movement, and including a plate
for releasably securing said blade against transverse move-
ment out of said recess, said blade including an outer
surface that is substantially flush with said groove surface,
said plate being positioned in overlying relationship adja-
cent said blade outer surface and said groove surface, said
plate being held in place by releasabie fastening means.
4,437,803
SPINDLE SQUARING TOOL
William M. Volna, 1808 Quincy St. NE., Minneapolis. Minn.
55418
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376.565
Int a.) B23C 9/Oa- B23Q 17/16
VS. a. 409—218 11 Claims
1. An instrument for measuring and squaring the spindle and
collet of a vertical milling machine to be perpendicular with
the machine Uble or work surface comprising
(a) a first cylinder member adapted for securing along an axis
coaxial to said spindle with said collet, having a portion
thereof protruding from said collet;
(b) a pivotal second member that contains a portion of said
first member which protrudes from said collet, said sec-
ond member having routional and axial freedom reUtive
1134
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
to said first member and with negligible radial clearance
about said first member, and said second member having a
pivotal axis which is perpendicular to the axis of said first
member;
(c) a main frame which supports said second member alone
said pivotal axis of said second member, said main frame
having at least two surface contact points along a line that
defin« an axis which is perpendicular to said pivotal axis
of said second member; and
(d) an indicator affixed between said main frame and said
pivotal second member to quantify relative motion about
said pivotal axis of said second member.
4*437,804
MOUJmNG ELEMENT FOR MOUNTING OBJECT TO
SUPPORT STRUCTURE
Altar FfacherWelnhaJde 34. D.7244 Wddtthtai 3, Tumlingen,
reiL Kep. of Gcrmaoy
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,354
imm^'**^' •PPU«tioB Fed. Rep. of Germany. Jun. 14.
„„ _ Int CL^ FISB J3/14
UA a 411-59 ,5CW^
the pin member by means of a tool having a swaging anvil
adapt^ to engage the tubular member and gripping means
adapted to grip a gripping portion of the shank portion, the
gnpping means including a plurality of jaw members having a
plurality of teeth with a preselected pitch, the tool being actu-
able to apply a relative axial tensile force between the pin
member and the tubular member whereby the tubular member
IS swaged mto the predetermined number of the grooves on the
shank portion of the pin member, the improvement comprising
M d pin member with at least said predetermined number of
said combination grooves being annular combination locking
and breakneck grooves, each of said predetermined number of
said combination grooves being defined by first and second
radially outwardly diverging sidewalls. said first sidewall
being positioned closer to said head than said second sidewall
a selected one of said combination grooves being located at a
predetermined location proximate the outer end of the tubular
member and adapted to receive the material of the tubular
member as it is swaged onto the shank portion whereby the
,fl.^ 'nountmg element for mountin an object on a support
structure having a mounting hole, comprising an elonSted
suS^HnT' """H^' *'^'^'"* '"'° * "°""«"« hole of a
ISJ^ilJ "! *""* ''*'^"« * longitudinal openijg; and an
elongated expander member inseruble into said longitudinal
?iEf~K^r'°.K ? "P*"'* ***** expansion sleeve member and to
thereby fix the latter m the mounting hole of the support stnic
wit;hf **'^1*' '"/,'"'*' '^•"8 P^°^'**«J ^>th a thread
•Tv of JTv" 'T^ T^'^!' ""** ■ predetermined pitch, a plural-
Wn/S^ and a plurality of valleys, said expander member
being also provided with a further thread which has a pitch
corr«ponding to the pitch of said first-mentioned thread Ltd a
pointed profile, said further thread of said expander member
being arranged both on said plurality of peaks and in saS
plurality of vaUeys of said first-mentioned thr^of^dex^
aer member. *^
shank portion will fracture at said selected one of the grooves,
any one of said combination grooves being capable of function-
ing as said selected one of said combination grooves when
located at said predetermined location while said pulling tool
exerts the relative axial tensUe force on said pin member, said
gripping portion of the shank portion located at the end oppo-
site side head and having a plurality of different grooves
adapted to be gripped by the gripping means of the tool, said
different grooves having a shape different from that of said
combmation grooves whereby said different grooves wUl not
effectively function as a breakneck groove, said combination
grooves and said different grooves having the same pitch as
said preselected pitch whereby said teeth can engage both said
combination grooves and said different grooves separately or
simultaneously said combination grooves and said difTerent^
grooves having substantially no transition portion at the area 6f
their juncture such that the last of said combination grooves
and the first of said different grooves are separated bv saic
preselected pitch. '
4,437,805
MULTIGRIP FASTENER
WJter J. Siiiitii^ Waco, Tex, aadgnor to Hock Maaufacturina
CoatiBiiatioii-in-ptft of Ser. No. 26,652, Apr. 3, 1979
UMBdoncd, which ia a coatiiiiuitioii.iB-pwt of Ser. No 899 591
Apr. 24, 1978, Pat No. 4,208^^3. lid. wUcatiS J«! XlSl
Ser. No. 228,600
„„ _ lat a.3 F16B /9/aO
UA a 411-361 ,0,.
1. In a two piece fastener for fastening a plurality of work-
SirSJ^^^^r ^*\'?" ^°'''P««« ha Va thickiea.^^-
ing from a determinable minimum to a determinable maximum
thickness, compnsmg a pin member having a head and a shank
portion having a plurality of grooves thereon and a tubular
SSS^S^ '°iL^V^^ "'° '~='^« engagement with a
predetenmned number of the grooves on the shank portion of
4,437306
OVERLOAD MECHANISM FOR THE SYSTEM OF A
BOTTOM SILO UNLOADER
George E. Olaon, Arlington Helghta, HI., aaaigiior to A. O. Smitii
Harreatore Prodocta, Inc., Arlington Heights, lU.
DiTiaioB of Ser. No. 205,461, Not. 10, 1980, Prt. No. 4,386,695.
Thla appUcatiofl Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,414
„„ _ Int. CLi B65G 65/46
UA a 414-307 4cUdm.
1. In a bottom silo unloader mechanism, a sweep auger
disposed to rotate about the center of the sUo and having a
drive unit for rotiiting said sweep auger, an overload mecha-
March 20. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
IISS
nism connected in the drive unit and including a drive member,
a drive pawl operably connected to the drive member and
disposed to move in a reciprocating path, a rouuble ratchet
having a series of teeth to be engaged by the drive pawl, said
drive pawl acting to engage said teeth and incremenully route
said ratchet in one direction, a holding pawl engaged with said
teeth to prevent rotation of the ratchet in the opposite direc-
tion, a shaft operably connected to the ratchet and disposed to
rotate with the ratchet, a sprocket connected to the inner end
of the shaft and having a plurality of teeth, a tumuble mounted
for rotation with respect to the silo and located at the center of
the silo, a plurality of spaced driving elements disposed on said
turntable and engageable with the teeth of said sprocket for
rotating said turntable in accordance with rotation of said
sprocket, said sweep auger being mounted on said turntable
and disposed to rotate therewith about the axis of said silo, and
resilient means interconnecting the drive pawl and the drive
member, whereby interruption of rotation of the sweep auger
due to engagement of the sweep auger with a densely packed
area of stored material will cause compression of said resilient
means and enable said drive pawl to move in said reciprocating
path without corresponding rotation of said ratchet, said over-
load mechanism having the capability of permitting the sweep
auger to oscillate and back away in a reverse direction from
said densely packed area.
forwardmost end extending upwardly and its rearmost,
wheeled end elevated above ground for transport.
4,437,807
WHEELED TRAILER FRAME CARRYING UNTT
ATTACHMENT FOR LIFT TRUCK
Lyno F. Perrott, Portland, Oreg., aasignor to Scott S. Corbett,
Jr., Portland, Oreg.
CoBtiniiation of Ser. No. 174,519. Aug. 1, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 412,504
Int. a.3 B66F 9/J8
VS. a. 414—620 20 Claims
\^M
1. A trailer frame carrying unit for carrying the empty elon-
gated wheeled frame of a trailer of the detachable cqrgo con-
tainer type having a wheel assembly mounted adjacent its
rearmost end, the trailer frame carrying unit comprising, in
combination with a powered vehicle mounting a vertically
movable carriage:
(a) an elongated boom secured at one end to the carriage for
pivotal movement between horizontally and vertically
extending positions,
(b) power means engaging the boom for moving the latter
between said positions, and
(c) trailer frame holding means mounted on the boom and
arranged to releasably clamp a trailer frame thereto, to
move the secured trailer frame vertically by moving the
carriage vertically, and to move the trailer frame between
horizontal and vertical positions by pivoting the boom
between horizontally and vertically extending positions,
the holding means including a base mounted on the boom
and a pair of spaced apart frame-engaging clamp jaw
members mounted on the base for movement one toward
and away from the other to a clamping position closely
adjacent each other for releasably clamping between them
the thickness dimension of the frame of a trailer,
(d) said boom and trailer frame holding means configured
and arranged to clamp the trailer frame forwardly of the
wheel assembly for moving the clamped trailer frame
selectively between its normal ground-supported horizon-
tal position and a substantially vertical position with its
4,437,808
APPARATUS FOR CAUSING A UNTT GUIDED ON
RECTILINEAR RAILS TO MOVE GRADUALLY AND A
FORKUFT EQUIPPED WTTH SUCH A UNTT
Rene Loodos, and Jcan^Loc Barberaau, both of Saiat-JauHda-
Braye, Fraacc, aasivrars to Compagnic Gcaeralc dc Maavtaa-
tioB at de Stockage, Paris, Fraacc
FUad Apr. 12, 1982, Sw. No. 367,522
Claims priority. appUcation France, Apr. 27, 1981, 81 08304
Int. a.i B65G 1/06
U.S. a. 414—667 7 Claims
r4- v4^
ft-'/ -■■'''^^ '
1. An apparatus for causing a load to be moved gradually in
either of two directions between two end positions, said appa-
ratus comprising: a load support, rectilinear rails for guiding
said support for movement along said rails, said support having
a rectilinear slot, said slot being elongated perpendicularly to
the direction of movement of said support and being open at
both its end, toothed wheels driven in opposite directions,
mounted on either side of a a neutral central position of the
slot, each wheel bearing an eccentric crankpin which engages
in the slot to drive it while it runt through a half-circumference
around the toothed wheel and said crankpins altomatoly en-
gaging said slot so as to drive it alone while running through a
half-circumference.
4,437309
TURNING GEAR INTERLOCK
Norman E. Nutter, LuMnborg, Mass., aaaignor to Gaaaral Elec-
tric Company, Lyon, Maas.
Filed Dee. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336^00
Int. a^ FOID 15/12. 21/00
VJS. CL 415—41 7
1. A turning gear apparatus for a turbomachine of the type
including a rotor and a motive fluid admission valve, said
motive fluid admission valve mechanically connected to a
hydraulic valve control manifold; the turning gear including a
movable gear carriage for selectively engaging with and disen-
gaging from a rotor ring gear wherein the turning gear fiirtber
includes;
a turning gear interlock housing hydraulically connected to
the valve control manifold; and.
1156
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
a spool valve axially slidable within the interlock housing for
selectively blocking and porting hydraulic Huid through
said housing; the spool valve being connected to the turn-
ing gear carriage whereby in the engaged position the
interlock housing is ported thereby preventing pressuriza-
tion of the valve control manifold and in the disengaged
position the interlock housing is blocked to permit pres-
surization of the valve control manifold.
4y437,810
COOLED VANE FOR A GAS TURBINE ENGINE
Eric W. J. Pearcc, Derby, Engiaiid, anignor to RoUa-Royce
Limited, London, Enghud
FUed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,616
811M0? ^'^^^ •PPUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 24, 1981,
Int a.' POID 5/18
VS. a 415-115 3 ctata.
tively, and control circuit means responsive to said first and
second sensing means for controlling the one pump to be
alternately energized between said first and second liquid
levels and wherein the other pump includes third and fourth
sensing means for providing third or high and fourth or low
liquid level signals, respectively, and control circuit means
responsive to said third and fourth sensing means for control-
img the other pump to be energized between said third and
36^2
1. A cooled vane for a gas turbine engine comprising a
hollow aerofoil having a leading edge region and a trailing
edge region, said aerofoil including convex and concave flanks
having opposed faces defming a hollow interior, at least one
coolmg fluid entry tube extending spandwise of and located
within said hollow interior of said aerofoil, said tube being
spaced from the opposed faces of said convex and concave
flanks to define a clearance therebetween, said tube having
apertures for supplying a cooling fluid into said clearance to
impmge upon and cool said opposed faces of said convex and
concave flanks, an unrestricted aperture means in the trailing
edge region of said aerofoil having communication with said
clearance for discharging cooling fluid, and a flow metering
insert extending spanwise of said aerofoil between opposed
faces of said concave and convex flanks of said aerofoil adja-
cent the trailing edge region thereof for metering the cooling
air from said clearance to said unrestricted aperture means,
said flow metenng insert having a hairpin-shaped cross section
defined by a pair of limbs and into which a trailing edge of said
tube projects to form a seal therewith, said limbs of said flow
metenng insert defining two accurately predetermined flow
areas for cooling fluid leaving said clearance to be discharged
through said unrestricted aperture means, a first one of said
flow areas controlling leaving of said fluid from said clearance
between said cooling tube and one of said opposed faces and a
second one of said flow areas controlling leaving of said fluid
from said clearance between said cooling tube and a second
one of said opposed faces of said convex and concave flanks of
said aerofoil.
fourth liquid levels; the improvement comprising that the
control circuit means for the one pump includes step memory
means havmg first and second states or positions, the sute of
said memory means being changed between the first and sec-
ond sutes upon receipt of each of said first liquid level signals
for conditiomng the control circuit means to alternately initiate
and inhibit the operation of the one pump upon receiving said
first liquid level signal whereby said second liquid level may be
positioned either higher or lower than said fourth liquid level
4,437,812
SINGLE.PUMP MULTIPLE STROKE PROPORTIONING
FOR GRADIENT ELUTION UQUID
CHROMATOGRAPHY
Ahmad Abu-Shumays, Loa Altoa; John C. Hehner, Menlo Park,
and Stephen J. Lochetti, Berkeley, aU of Calif., assignors to
Varian Associates, Inc., PaJo AJto, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 796,782, May 13, 1977, abandoned.
This appUcation Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,426
Int a.3 F04B 49/00; B67D 5/46
U.S. a. 417-53 14 ctaim.
10— f
It- «
X
SLUT fouirw y
ji-j wut winin-
^^•s«Wi
T
I »estTi
■ IIFi I .[ E
M
Hill HSI^igi I
» — ■ i
>*-f«iaM wmm i
0WP6I
WTH eii»c I
,,~na»nmm art
hje'ctoi ~|
=r
coyii
3:
E 1 ^ Wl~
M-wtawtnTininr eoiiirti/
OtTCCtOI
■~x —
4,437311
SUBMERSIBLE PUMP WITH ALTERNATE PUMP
OPERATION CONTROL MEANS
^^ 'r7^.v^«""^ ^""" ^""*«^ ^i**^'^ ami
Tomoyuki Shibata, Yokohama, aU of Japm^ auigaor, to
Ebara Corporation and Ebara Densan, Ltd., both of Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jon. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 163,948
Int a.3 P04B 49/04
UA a. 417-8 lOCWma
1. A pump control system employing two pumps for pump-
mg out the liquid in a reservoir or the like wherein the one
pump mcludes first and second sensing means for providing
first or high and second or low liquid level signals, respec-
w-i comctai i
iC.
tWMtOCI 1
RESERVOIR I.
A "^
-7 1::^ TO COLUMN
'"" 104 \tZ OUTLET VALVE
1. In a high pressure, high performance Uquid chromatogra-
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1157
phy system a method for providing gradient proportioning of
a plurality of solvent components, said system comprising:
a plurality of solvent reservoirs, each of said reservoirs
containing a particular one of said solvent components,
a single reciprocating pumping means.
proportioning valves for admitting said solvent components
into said pumping means from said reservoirs during fill
strokes of said pumping means according to a pro-
grammed concentration distribution that may vary for
different fill strokes, and
a mixing structure into which said pumping means can de-
liver said plurality of solvent componenu, said gradient
proportioning method comprising utilization of a pumping
cycle that provides accurate proportioning near zero and
one hunhundred percent concentration, said method in-
cludes a plurality of fill strokes, with a selected concentra-
tion distribution of more than one of said solvent compo-
nents being permitted in said pumping means during less
than all of the fill strokes of said pumping cycle and,
during a said fill stroke in which a selected concentration
is created, actuating the said proportioning valve for the
higher concentration solvent prior to the activation of the
said proportioning valve for the lower concentration
solvent.
4,437,813
GAS RECEIVING AND TRANSMimNG SYSTEM
Walter B. Ingram, Hageratown, Md., assignor to Frick Com*
pany, Waynesboro, Pa.
Filed May 4, 1982, Ser. No. 374,820
Int a.3F04B 77/00
U.S. CI. 417—53 17 Claims
cm
1. A system for receiving relatively high moisture content
raw gas from a location and pumping it in a relatively dry
condition to an outlet, comprising an oil injection type rotary
compressor, an internal combustion engine connected to drive
said compressor, first pipe means for carrying said raw gas to
the inlet of said compressor, second pipe means for carrying
raw gas to said engine, third pipe means for carrying oil to said
compressor, fourth pipe means leading from said compressor
to a separator housing, means in said fourth pipe means for
intermingling the fluids discharged from said compressor,
means in said separator housing for separating the gas from the
oil and water mixture, means for discharging dry gas from the
upper portion of said separator housing, discharge means from
the lower portion of said housing for the mixture of oil and
water, means for returning a predetermined major portion of
said oil and water mixture to the third pipe means to said
compressor, means for diverting the remainder of said oil and
water mixture, heat exchange means between said means for
diverting the remainder and said engine thereby raising the
temperature of said diverted remainder of said oil and water
mixture, a dehydrator housing, means carrying said diverted
remainder to said dehydrator housing, pump means for draw-
ing liquid from the lower portion of said dehydrator housing,
means connected to the upper portion of said dehydrator
housing for creating a vacuum therein whereby water vapor is
removed from the oil and drawn off from said dehydrator
housing, and means for returning the water-free oil from said
pump means of said dehydrator housing to said third pipe
means to said compressor.
4,437,814
DREDGE PUMP DRIVE SYSTEM
John F. Kalbac, St Louis, Mo., assignor to Delta Dredge and
Pump Corporation, St Louis, Mo.
FUed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,488
Int a.i P04B 17/00
U.S. a. 417—351 4 Claims
1. In a dredge pump having a pump housing and an impeller
within said housing, the improvement comprising a shaft upon
which said impeller is mounted, said shaA projecting through
and beyond said housing on both sides of said impeller; two
drive motors outside said housing, one rigidly coupled to one
end of said shaft and the other, to the other end of said shaft, to
drive said shaft, hence said impeller, and mounting means for
mounting said drive motors, said mounting means comprising
angularly spaced supports to which said drive motors are
connected, pads, each including an elastomeric block bonded
to and sandwiched between inner and outer flat plates, one of
each of said plates being connected to one of said supports, the
flat plates on the supports of each of the motors lying in sub-
stantially a common plane and the said plates on the supports
of the two motors lying in substantially parallel planes, fued
structures on opposite sides of said pump housing, each having
mounting flats spaced and arranged complementarily to pads
on its respective side of the pump housing, the other of said
plates of each pad being connected to a flat of one of said
structures, the pad plates closest to the housing on opposite
sides of the pump housing facing one another, whereby in
response to axial movement of the impeller shaft, hence the
motore, one set of pads is in compression, the other, in tension
and in response to turning moment of said motors, both seu are
in shear.
4,437,815
PUMP, AND AN APPARATUS INCORPORATING THE
PUMP FOR INFUSING UQUID MEDICINE
John K. McMoUen, "Carragh" 11 Mount Aboo Park, Flaahgy,
Bcltet BTIO ODJ, Northern Ireland
per No. PCr/GB80/00150, § 371 Date May 15, 1981, i 102(c)
Date May 15, 1981, PCT Pnb. No. WO81/00e88, PCT Pnb.
Date Apr. 2, 1981
per FUed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 269,042
ClaiiH priority, appUcation United Ungdoai, Sep. 27, 1979,
7933486
Int a^F04B; 7/0#
U.S. CL 417—418 6 OaiM
1. A pump comprising a casing defining an elongate cham-
ber, inlet and outlet valves conununicating with the chamber,
a piston coaxiaUy movable in the chamber, and an electromag-
net controlling movement of the piston via an armature, the
outlet valve also being controUed by the electromagnet via a
valve armature;
characterised in that the inlet and outlet valves are balls
1158
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
made from a material having ferromagnetic properties and
seatt made of non-magnetic materia] and magnets tension-
mg the balls of said inlet and outlet valves against their
•eate when in a closed position, and in that power means
for openmg said balls from their seats, comprise for said
mlet valve a force equivalent to a hydraulic force caused
by coaxial movement of the piston in the chamber, said
piston and said ouUet valve being operated against the
now of liquid by the excitation of the single electromag-
net, a piston lock magnet providing a biasing force on the
piston thereby to inhibit unintentional movement of the
piston, and said outlet valve remaining closed in response
to adverse inlet or outlet pressure conditions to prevent
madvertent flow of liquid.
4,437,816
VARIABLE VOLUME POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT
ROTARY PUMP
Damto A. Magec, Marshalltown, and Charles E. McCubbln,
Melboarae, both of Iowa, anignora to Ounhan-Bush, Inc.,
yVett Hartford, Conn.
FUed Mar. 21, IMO, Ser. No. 132,712
Int. a.J P04B 19/02
U-S. CI. 417-4W 4ci^
-, fJ
1. An improved variable volume rotary pump comprising:
a pump housing having a cylindrical bore,
a cylinder block having a diameter on the order of said pump
housing bore and being mounted concentrically within
said bore for roution about iu axis,
circumferentially spaced inlet and outlet ports within said
housing opening radially to said bore.
said cylinder block being provided with an axial opening,
at least one diametric passage of rectangular cross-section
extending through said cylinder block,
a piston member of corresponding rectangular transverse
cross-section slidably and sealably positioned within said
diametnc passage and having a cross-section correspond-
mg to but bemg slightly smaller than that of said diametric
passage, said piston member bearing a square slot within a
side face thereof mtermediate of its ends and facing axially
towards one end of said cylinder block and forming two
connected rectangular cross-section pistons on respective
sides of said rectangular slot,
a square drive block carried within said piston member slot.
means for mounting said square drive block within said
cylinder block for rotation eccentrically relative to the
axis of said drive block,
motor means for driving said cylinder block about its axis of
roution, and
annular grooves carried by said pump housing within said
cylindrical bore opening respectively to said inlet and said
outlet port but being separated from each other by lands
such that said at least one diametric passage of said cylin-
der block opens alternately to said grooves during contin-
uous rotation of said cylinder block;
whereby, said rectangular cross-section pistons reciprocate
within said cylinder block at least one diametric passage to
pump fluid from said inlet port to said outlet port with said
assembly preventing piston rotation and contact between
pistons, with increased contact area between said pistons
and said drive block to reduce wear, noise and fatigue of
said pistons,
and wherein said motor drive shaft bears a cylindrical drive
coupling rotauble therewith, said drive coupling termi-
nating at the end remote from said electric drive motor in
a rectangular cross-section axial projection, and a drive
plate comprising a rectangular cross-section slot on the
side opposite that bearing the square projection received
within the axial opening of square transverse cross-section
of said cylindrical block, and said pump further compris-
ing transverse end plates for closing off said pump housing
cylindrical bore, one annular seal member carried by said
cylindrical drive coupling on the outer periphery thereof
and bearing at one end on a second annular seal member
mounted to the end plate through which said drive motor
shaft projects, and a compression coil spring concentri-
cally surrounding the cylindrical drive coupling and inter-
posed between said drive plate and said one annular seal
member and biasing said annular seal member carried by
the cylindrical drive coupling against the annular seal
member Hxed to said one end plate and for pressing the
square face of the drive plate into the square opening
within the cylindrical block to maintain driving engage-
ment between said cylindrical drive coupling and the
cylindrical cylinder block and for maintaining said at least
one diametric passage in alignment with the inlet and
outlet ports of said pump housing during rotation of said
cylinder block about its axis towards said pump housing
during rotation of the cylinder block about its axis
4,437317
TWO CYLINDER VISCOUS MATERIAL PUMP
Wolfgang Metzclder. Ibbenbiiren, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Friedrich Wllh. Schwing GmbH, Heme, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 205,296, No?. 10, 1980, abandoned.
This application JuJ. 20, 1983, Ser. No. 515,450
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 27,
I'oO, 3024139
Int aj F04B 39/08
UA a. 417-507 6 0Mim
46'*8i"
1. A viscous materia] pump comprising:
a pair of conveying cylinders (16, 17). one of said conveying
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
11S9
cylinders being arranged above the other in a common
plane with axes of the cylinders, along which the material
is conveyed, being horizontal and lying parallel to each
other;
an inlet valve housing (18) connected to said conveying
cylinders;
a viscous material supply source (41) mounted on a side of
said inlet valve housing laterally of the common plane of
said conveying cylinders;
an outlet valve housing (23) connected intermediate said
inlet valve housing (18) and a delivery conduit (26) for
conveying the viscous material and extending horizon-
tally from said outlet valve housing;
a pair of inlet valve means (27, 27fl) mounted on said inlet
valve housing for controlling the passage of the viscous
material from said supply source (41) to said conveying
cylinders (16, 17), said inlet valve means extending hori-
zontally from a side of said inlet valve housing opposite
that on which said viscous material supply source is
mounted and extending normal to the conveying axes of
the cylinders, one of said inlet valve means being arranged
above the other on said inlet valve housing in a common
plane; and
a pair of outlet valve means (24, 25) mounted on said outlet
valve housing (23) adjacent said delivery conduit for
controlling the passage of viscous material to said delivery
conduit (26), said outlet valve means (24, 25) extending
horizontally from said outlet valve housing parallel to said
conveying axes, one of said outlet valve means being
arranged above the other in a common plane with said
delivery conduit extending between said pair of outlet
valve means.
said trailing well volume until the trailing well volume is
blocked from communication with said inlet port means.
4,437,819
CONTROLLABLE VANE PUMP
Johann Merz, BopHngen, Fed. Rep. of Gemaay, assignor to
Zahnradfabrlk Friedrichshafea, AG, Friedrichshafea, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed May 19, 1982, Ser. No. 379,935
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Gcmuuiy, Job. 6.
1981, 3122598
Int a.J F04C 2/Oa 15/04
U.S. a. 418-26 6 Claims
4,437,818
OIL-FREE ROTARY COMPRESSOR
Roger C. Weatiierston, 58 Bridle Patii, WUliamsviUe, N.Y.
14221
FUed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,766
Int. a.3 POIC 1/08: F04C 18/00
MS. a 418—9 9 Claims
14 a II
1. In an adjustable vane cell pump having a rotor, a plurality
of radially displaccable vanes slidably mounted on the rotor, a
control ring in sliding contact with the vanes enclosing fluid
displacing spaces therebetween, means biasing the vanes into
said sliding contact with the control ring, a housing formed
with an internal surface and means pivotally supporting the
control ring in the housing exclusively at a pivot point for
angular adjustment to vary flow rate, the improvement resid-
ing in sealing means including an arcuate sealing portion (30) of
the internal surface concentric with the rotor (5) mounted
radially opposite the pivot point, a sealing element (21, 32)
having opposite ends, and means pivotally mounting one of
said ends of the sealing element on the control ring (6). the
other of the ends of the sealing element being held in contact
with the sealing portion on the housing (2).
I. A rotary compressor comprising:
a housing defining two working chambers;
mating impellers rotatably mounted in each working cham-
ber;
each impeller having at least two profiles;
each profile containing only one lobe and only one well, the
well volume in any one profile in fluid communication
with the well volume in any other profile of each impeller;
each of said lobes occupying a constant axial position;
inlet port means in direct fluid communication with all of
said profiles;
outiet port means for cyclically and alternately coacting
with each of said working chambers to deliver a continu-
ous gas discharge; and
the arcuate extent of each profile and the angular displace-
ment between adjacent profiles on the same impeller being
such that as a leading well volume in one of said profiles begins
to engage with the lobe of its mating profile to stari precom-
pression of the gas therein at inlet pressure, the trailing well
volume in the profile adjacent said first profile is still in com-
munication with said inlet pori means, whereby the pressure of
the gas in said leading well volume is increased above that in
4,437,820
SCROLL TYPE FLUID COMPRESSOR UNIT WITH
AXIAL END SURFACE SEAUNG MEANS
Kiyoshl Terauchi, Iscsaki, and Masaharu Hiraga, Hof^TO, botii
of Japan, assignors to Sanden Corporation, Gunma, Japan
FUed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,291
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 30, 1980, 55-
140393[U]; Sep. 30, 1980, 55-140394[U]
Int a.' F04C 18/02. 27/00; F16J 15/16
U.S. a. 418—55 7 Claims
1. In a scroll type fluid compressor including a pair of scroU
members each comprising an end plate and a spiral wrap ex-
tending from one side of said end piite, said spiral wrap having
a groove formed in the axial end surface thereof along the
1160
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
spiral curve, said spiral wraps intcrfitting at an angular and
radial offset to make a plurality of line contacts which define at
least one pair of Huid pockeu. drive means operatively con-
nectwl to one of said scroll members for orbiting said one scroll
member relative to the other scroll member and preventing
rotation of said one scroll member to change the volume of the
nuid pockets, the improvement comprising:
at least one closed portion intermediate the ends of said
groove to divide said groove into at least two separate
grooves to block Huid flow in said groove; and
seal elements loosely fitted within said groovw on both sides
of said closed portion, said closed portion preventing
deformation and bending of said seal elements.
4,437,821
SHAFT SEAL FOR PUMP MEANS
n?V^ ^^V",^^^^ "'■'*"' •*»'8"*»f **» MiUubishi Denki
KabushikJ Kaiaha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 20, IMl, Ser. No. 284,538
lat a.J P04C 15/00; FIW J5/32
4,437,822
RADIAL SEALING MEANS FOR USE WITH. AND IN
COMBINATION WITH, A SLCyiTED ^iSi?
Jeremy Schwartz, Someraet, and Raymond FWck, Wert Windaor
SrS*^ 1?V^*^ ^^^*y' "^ "^ N J., ttrignors to Inger-
■oU-Raod Company, WoodcUff Lake, N J.
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,996
. , o « '"*• ^-^ ^^^ ^^^0^-' FWC 27/00
U.S. a. 418-122 4,c^
10; HOUSING
7.>//.///x///../.T.W7^W^
vs. a. 418—104
3Cbim8
14 — :
1. A pump means comprising:
a cylindrical housing means having a hollow interior open at
one end thereof and having an inlet port and an outlet port
in the cylindrical wall of said housing;
an annular disc over the open end of said housing means for
closmg said hollow interior so as to form a working cham-
OCT;
a rotor means rotatobly mounted within said working chamber
with the axis of roution eccentric to the axis of said working
chamber
vane means radially shiftably mounted on said rotor means and
havmg out edge portions constantly slidably abutting the
mner penpheral surface of said housing means for urging
fluid from said inlet port to said outlet port;
frame means to which said housing means and said annular disc
are fued;
shaft bearing means on said frame means;
a shaft having a bearing supported ptirtion and rotatably
mounted m said bearing means and extending into said work-
ing chamber through the center opening of said annular disc
means, the portion of said shaft within said working chamber
being splined;
said rotor being fuedly mounted on said splined portion of said
shaft;
an oU seal means secured at its outer surface of the inner pe-
riphery of the center opening of said annular disc means and
havmg an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of
the splmed portion of said shaft; and
a spacer means tightly fitted on said shaft with the outer pe-
nphcry sealingly engaging said oU seal means for hermeti-
cally sealing said working chamber, said spacer means ex-
tendmg along the length of said shaft only from said splined
portion to said bearing supported portion.
r^LI^lu \^JT' '"'""« " substantially radial slot
formed therem which slot extends axially of the rotor, radial
sealing means, for insertion in said slot for effecting fluid seal-
mg externally of said rotor, comprising:
first means comprising an elongate element, such as a seal a
vane, or the like, for slidable disposition and radial move-
ment, of at least a portion thereof, within said rotor slot-
and '
second means, for interpositioning thereof between said flrst
means and said slot, for biasing said first means outwardly
relative to said slot; wherein
said first and second means have keying means cooperative
for constraining said first and second means against a
relative longitudinal or axial movement therebetween in
either of opposite longitudinal or axial directions-
said «»ond means comprises a leaf spring of a given length-
and '
said elongate element has an inner surface, of approximately
said given length, for confrontingly engaging said leaf
spring;
one of said first and second means has means defining kev-
ways therein; and
the other of said first and second means has means defining
keys thereon; *
said keys and keyways being defined intermediate said given
lengths of said leaf spring and said inner surface, and
defining a pair of points of mutual contacting engagement
which mamtain a given, unaltering, radial alignment
therebetween during slidably radial movement of said
element in said slot.
4,437,823
ROTARY MACHINE WITH AN AXIALLV MOVING
PARTITION
Rein K. Tlgane, Tallin, U.S.S.R., aMignor to UprtTlenie SuUtar-
no-Tekhnicheakikh Rabot, Tallin, U.S.S Jl.
PCT No. PCr/SU80/00040, § 371 Date Not. 10, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Not. 10, 1960, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01934, PCT Pub
Date Sep. 18, 1980
PCT Filed Feb. 29, 1960, Ser. No. 217,111
lat a.j poic 1/oa- P04C woo
UA a 418-219 7 ctai^
1. A rotary machine construction for use in pumps, compres-
sors and motors, comprising a sUtor defining a housing having
a cyhndncal working chamber therein, a rotor rotational in
said chamber, a shaft fued to the rotor and having one end
extendmg externally of the housing, said rotor comprising a
disk driven rotationally, said disk having peripheral, circum-
ferentially disposed surfaces in sliding contact with interior
surfaces of said housing defining said chamber, the disk having
a major side having a flat surface and an opposite major side
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1161
having an eccentric flat surface extending radially inwardly
from a peripheral edge of the disk and having two symmetrical
surfaces as continuations of the eccentric flat surface extending
away from said eccentric flat surface, the two symmetrical
surfaces defining two portions on said opposite major side
merging smoothly with the eccentric flat surface and extend-
mg progressively axially away from the eccentric flat surface
to the edge of the disk at part of the edge of the periphery
thereof, said two symmetrical portions thereby having a thick-
ness progressively reducing axially toward said part of the
edge of the periphery of the disk, a radial partition mounted for
movement axially of said shaft and disposed relative to said
opposite major side of the disk dividing the working chamber
into two separate chamber working spaces continuously vary-
ing in volume as the disk is rotated, means resiliently continu-
ously biasing the partition into contact with said opposite
major side of said disk radially of said eccentric flat surface,
said two symmetrical surfaces configured for each effectively
camming the partition each through 180* and reciprocably
actuating the partition as the disk is routionally driven and the
partition functions as a cam follower, and means on said hous-
ing defining two circumferentially spaced ports each in corn-
charged with a different material and having an input and
an output end portions;
a pressing chamber located at the output end portions of said
compartments;
a forward pressing piston means mounted for sliding into
and out of said pressing chamber for compacting said
ptrticulated materials during such forward motion;
a pair of side pressing piston means having pressing surfaces
and mounted for moving into and out of said pressing
chamber from opposing directions, said opposing direc-
tions being perpendicular to the direction of motion of
munication with a corresponding one of said chamber working
space for functioning alternatively as an inlet or outlet in de-
pendence upon the direction of rotation of the disk, said hous-
ing having two opposed flat walls defining said chamber, one
of said walls having a slot in which said partition reciprocates
internally of the housing, said housing defining a second cham-
ber defined by said one flat wall and another flat wall of the
housing and disposed axially spaced from said partition, a
second disk in said second chamber fixed to said shaft con-
structed similar to the first-mentioned disk and disposed on
said shaft routed 180* relative to the first-mentioned disk and
having symmetrical surfaces of the first-mentioned disk with
said one wall therebetween and the disk portions of reducing
thickness being rotated 180' relative to each other, said parti-
tion being disposed extending through said slot into said cham-
ber to define therein two separate working spaces in conjunc-
tion with said symmetrical surfaces of the second disk, said
partition having edge face surfaces in sliding contact with
corresponding symmetrical surfaces of the individual disks and
reciprocably actuated by each disk in a respective correspond-
ing opposite direction of reciprocation as the disks are rotated,
and means mounting the second disk for rotation with said
shaft and free to move axially on said shaft.
4,437,824
APPARATUS FOR MAKING PARTICLEBOARD BY A
CONTINUOUS EXTRUDING TECHNIQUE OF
PARTICULATED MATERIALS
Joaef Palotai, Budapert, Hungary, aaaignor to Cbemokompiex
Vegyipari Gcpea Berendezcs Export-Import Vallalat, Buda-
peat, Hungary
FUed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 259,819
lot a.3 B29J 5/00
VJS. a. 425-131.1 5 Claim.
1. Apparatus for the continuous manufacturing of a pressed
multilayer product from particulated materials, comprising:
a multicompartmented hopper means for receiving said
particulated materials, each compartment is adapted to be
said forward pressing piston means wherein said side
pressing piston means compact said particulated materials
from said opposing directions;
an output canal means for receiving said compacted material
and feeding same away from the region of said pressing
chamber upon the action of said forward pressing piston
means and of said pair of side pressing piston means,
wherein said hopper means comprises at least a pair of
compartments located on each side of said forward press-
ing piston means, and wherein heating means are provided
along said output canal means.
4,437,825
BLOW MOLDING APPARATUS
leuan L. Harry; Suppayan M. Krishoakumar, both of Naakua;
Walter R. JoUy, Merrimack; Martin H. Bwk, BrookUuc, aU
of N JI., and John F. E. Pocock, GraTenbruch, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, aaaignors to The CoBtiaentai Group, Inc., Stamford,
Cobb.
DiTiaion of Ser. No. 321,152, Not. 13, 1981, Pat. No. 4,409,161.
This appUeatiOB Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 432,039
iBt aj B29C J 7/07
VS. a. 425-145 7 Qaimi
16
S^'V
1. A blow molding apparatus comprising a blow mold in-
cluding blow mold halves, means for moving said blow mold
halves between a closed blow molding position and an open
1162
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
combined blown artide discharge and preform receiving posi-
tion, a stretch rod and a blow head in constant alignment with
one of said mold halves, means movable laterally relative to
said one mold half for effecting discharge of a blown article
from between said blow mold halves and the positioning of a
preform between said blow mold halves in transverse align-
ment therewith, sensor means for sensing when a preform is in
transverse alignment with said blow mold halves, means actu-
ated by said sensor means for transversely shifting the preform
into a seated position within said one blow mold half, and
means for advancing said stretch rod into the preform seated
within said one blow mold half and the blow head to a position
adjacent the preform before mold closing is completed.
4,437,826
RICE-BODY SHAPING DEVICE FOR ROLLED SUSHI
Akitomi Tezuka, 5-11, KinuU 3-chome, Setagaya-Ku, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jul. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 403,532
Int a.3 B29C 7/00, B29D 3/00
U.S. a 425-182 2 Claims
ing configuration with respect to each other such that at least
one of said at least one beatable member is located between and
a lu an 1 sin' 11*
in heat exchange with each juxtaposed pair of said nozzle
blocks.
4,437,828
SCREED BAR ASSEMBLY
Da?id L. Egger, 1270 Lynwood St., LaHabra, Calif. 90631
FUed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,190
Int a.3 B28B J/29, 21/92; EOlC 19/00. 19/22
UA a. 425-458 WCtaim.
1. A rice-body shaping device for a rolled sushi comprising
a hollow square frame, a base having a width insertable into the
hollow frame which is fuedly provided with a stopper member
of a size larger than the said width on the lower side thereof
and is provided on the upper side thereof with plural semi-
cylindrical notches in parallel arrangement, a ram member
having a width insertable into the said hollow member and
plural projections provided on the lower side thereof which
are arranged at such intervals that, when inserted into the
frame, the projections are made to come at the center of the
respective semi-cylindrical notches provided on the said base,
and a push cover of a width insertable into the said hollow
member which is provided on the lower side thereof with
notches synunetrical to the said semi-cylindrical notches of the
said base.
1. A screed support assembly comprising
a screed bar support,
a screed bar mounted in said support for vertical adjustment.
first and second support legs positioned outwardly of said
support, and
means for mounting at least one of said legs to said support
for motion relative to said screed bar, whereby the posi-
tion of said one leg relative to the other of said legs and
relative to the screed bar may be adjusted.
4,437,827
SPINNING MANIFOLD WITH SERIAL NOZZLE
BLOCKS
Helmut Modeiiak, Malntal; Giinter Koachinek, Dietzenbach;
Rolf Zinsser, Heosenstanun; Richard Prebier, Frankfurt am
Main, and Bemd Kretsdunann, Kahl, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Dary McKee Aktiengesellsciuft, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,249
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 3.
1981,3113495 ^ *
Int a.3 DOID 1/06
UA a 425-378 S 7 Oaias
1. A spinning manifold for melt-spinning synthetic high
molecular weight polymers comprising, an elongated hollow
member for the conduction of a heating medium and at least
one vertical nozzle shaft having heauble walls, said nozzle
shaft having a plurality of serially arranged separately dis-
mountable nozzle blocks and at least one separately dismount-
able beatable member, said at least one heatable member ex-
tending the width of said nozzle shaft, said at least one heatable
member and said nozzle blocks being arranged in an altemat-
4,437,829
ROLL-OUT FLAME DFTECFOR FOR SWIMMING POOL
HEATER FUEL GAS CONTROL
ManriB E. Baker, 815 Ewing Ave., NashriUe, Tenn, 37203
FUed Oct 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,403
Int CL^ F23N 5/02
VS. a. 431-21 ( n.i—
« i>
1. In a swimming pool heater having a combustion chamber
and a control chamber separated by a fire wall having a lower
edge, burner tubes extending from the control chamber into
the combustion chamber beneath the lower edge, a fluid ftiel
supply, a control valve connected in fluid communication
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1163
between the fuel supply and the burner tubes and adapted to be
opened and closed to the flow of fluid fuel to the burner tubes,
and an electrical control circuit operably connected to the
control valve for opening and closing the control valve, a
flame detector device, comprising:
(a) a base,
(b) a pair of electrical conUcU,
(c) insulated mounting means supporting said electrical
contacte at longitudinally spaced positions on said base.
(d) an elongated thermal fuse element having opposite ends
and adapted to melt at a predetermined termperature
substantially less than the temperature of the flame pro-
duced by the burner tubes,
(e) suspension means holding the opposite ends of said fuse
element between, and in electrical communication with,
said pair of electrical contacts and spaced from said base,
(0 an inextensible linear member extending along said fuse
element and having opposite ends connected to said sus-
pension means to prevent stretching of said fuse element,
(g) means mounting said base on the fire wall within the
control chamber so that said fuse element extends substan-
tially along and proximate to the lower edge of the fire
wall, for sensing any roll-out flame from the combustion
chamber beneath the fire wall into the control chamber,
and
0>) means connecting said electrical contacts in said electri-
cal control circuit so that the control valve functions
normally while said fuse element is unbroken, but said
control valve is closed when said fuse element ruptures.
4437 830
BURNER AND PILOT* VALVE SAFETY CONTROL
SYSTEM
Lewis K. Harris, and BUlie S. Bumis, both of Tulsa, Okla.,
Msignors to CombustioB Engineering, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
FUed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,558
Int a.3 F23Q 9/08
UA a. 431-54 sQalms
valve element to permit flow of fuel from the supply
through the third chamber and into the second chamber
and to the pilot burner where its combustion generates the
heat which develops the force in the closed system and the
mechanical movement of the piston within the housing,
and an arrangement within the housing for the piston of the
closed fluid pressure system to engage the movable valve
elemenU and overcome their spring forces to maintain the
elemenu unseated and release the manual control which
had temporarily unseated the second valve element.
4,437,831
BURNER HEAD
Michael F. C. Brooker, Steven J. McKerihen, both of Toronto;
Hashmukrai D. Attwala, Scarborough, and Antonio L. Cau-
tillo, Toronto, aU of Canada, assignors to Aero Environmental
Limited, Toronto, Canada
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,346
Int. a.i F23C 5/08; B05B 3/00
U.S. a. 431-177 2 Claims
1. A system for controlling the fuel to a burner and its pilot,
including,
a supply of fluid fuel,
a main burner adapted to be connected to the supply of fuel,
a pilot burner adapted to be connected to the supply of fuel,
a housing containing a first chamber adapted to be con-
nected to the main burner,
a second chamber in the housing connected to the pilot
burner and the first chamber through a valve,
a third chamber in the housing connected to the fuel supply
and the second chamber through a valve,
a flrst valve element normally closed by being spring-urged
to seal between the first and second chambers,
a second valve element normally closed by being spring-
urged to seal between the second and third chambers and
arranged to be unseated by engagement with the first
valve element.
a closed fluid pressure system arranged to respond to com-
bustion at the pilot burner and to generate movement of an
included piston element within the housing,
means for temporarily and manually unseating the second
1. A flame spreading gas burner comprising in combination;
a gas delivery tube, a gas delivering nozzle adjacent the end of
said tube, an air passing inner nozzle plate, an air passing outer
flame spreading plate, a turbulator, and an air delivery duct
surrounding the foregoing parts, said nozzle plate surrounding
said tube adjacent to and upstream of said nozzle, said flame
spreading plate closing the end of said tube, said nozzle plate
and said flame spreading plate being spaced and at right angles
to the cylinder-axis of said tube, said nozzle being that part of
the tube between the plates is circumferentially perforate be-
tween said nozzle plate and said flame spreading plate, said air
delivery duct having an air discharge opening circumference
greater than that of said nozzle plate and said spreading plate to
provide relatively narrow circumscribing air passage therebe-
tween; said turbulator being in the form of a set of radially
disposed and uniformly skewed vanes surrounding said gas
delivery tube spaced upstream from said nozzle plate and said
spreading plate; the end of said gas delivery tube lying approxi-
mately in the centre of said nozzle plate and said spreading
plate, said plates being closely adjacent; the area of said air
discharge opening and the area of said nozzle plate and of said
spreading plate are each at least predominately circular, said
spreading plate being of a greater diameter than said nozzle
plate, said greater diameter being occupied by a ring of air
apertures, said nozzle and spreading plates being spaced apart
a distance only approximately equal to that of the perforations
in said tube.
1164
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
4,437.832
LAMP WICK EQUIPMENT FOR A COMBUSTION
APPARATUS
Kazunori Amano, Niitsu, and Youichi Sekiwaga, Kamo, both of
Japan, aasignore to Toshiba Heating Appliances Co^ Ltd.,
Kamo, Japan ^ -
FUcd Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 422,197
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 15, 1981, 56-
153261[U]
Int. a.J F23D 8/24
VS. a. 431—304 8 Claims
1. A lamp wick equipment for a combustion apparatus which
comprises:
a cylindrical lamp wick whose peripheral wall is provided
with at least one opening;
a cylindrical auxiliary lamp wick holder which is fitted
around the lamp wick and comprises an engagement hole
formed at that spot on the peripheral wall of said auxiliary
lamp wick holder which faces said opening of the lamp
wick;
a lamp wick holder which comprises a cylindrical body
fitted around the auxiliary lamp wick holder, and an en-
gagement pawl which is so elastically supported as to be
normally advanced into the inside of said cylindrical
body, to be retractable therefrom, and to project into the
engagement hole of the auxiliary lamp wick holder fitted
into said cylindrical body to effect engagement between
the lamp wick and lamp wick holder; and
a lamp wick-removing device comprising at least one leg
member which is inserted between the auxiliary lamp
wick holder and the lamp wick holder to retract the en-
gagement pawl from the engagement hole, thereby disen-
gaging the lamp wick from the lamp wick holder.
4,437.833
INFRARED RADIATING BURNER ARTICLE
Frank D. Mertz, Bergenfleld, N J., assignor to Red-Ray Mano-
taetaiing Company, Inc., CUffiride Park, N J.
FUed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 233,851
Int. a.J F23D 13/14
VJS. CL 431—329 7 Claims
30 40
red radiation, connectable to means for mixing air and gas and
supplying such air/gas mixture thereof, comprising:
(a) a housing, having a restricted inlet opening in communi-
cation with an enlarged opening extending therethrough,
through which the air/gas mixture may be fired;
- -Qy) means for diffusing the air/gas mixture upon firing
thereof through the housing opening so as to generate
substantial pressure in such air/gas mixture, secured in the
housing opening in the path of movement of the air/gas
mixture upon firing thereof through the housing opening,
said diffuser means including a plate confronting said inlet
opening to form a slit orifice along the sides thereof;
(c) a refractory grid, positioned in the housing opening in the
path of movement of the air/gas mixture therethrough
upon firing thereof through the housing opening, at a
point beyond the location of the diffusing means in such
path, such that the air/gas mixture is fired through the
refractory grid, which refractory grid includes a surface
thereof facing outwardly from the housing;
(d) means for igniting the air/gas mixture, upon firing
thereof through the refractory grid, at the outwardly
facing surface of the refractory grid such that the flame
heats the outwardly facing surface of the refractory grid
so as to generate infrared radiation thereby;
(e) means for reverberating infrared radiation generated by
the refractory grid, secured to the housing so as to be
spaced from the outwardly facing surface of the refrac-
tory grid in the path of infrared generated thereby, said
reverberating means being a screen lying in a spaced
relationship to said refractory grid;
(0 means for enabling the article to be detachably connected
to the means for mixing and supplying the air/gas mixture,
said means for detachably connecting said article includ-
ing external threads mounted on restricted portion of said
housing, said restricted portion having a restricted open-
ing directing said air/gas mixture to said diffusing means
for delivery to said opening; and
(g) said housing having tapered walls, adjacent said slit
orifice between said orifice and said refractory grid.
4,437334
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR TREATING
GRANULAR MATERIAL
Alfredo Vogel, Malvern, England, assignor to Cosworth Re-
search and Development Limited, United Kingdom
FUed Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 330,864
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 16, 1980,
8040281; Not. 23, 1981, 8135225
Int CL^ F27B IS/Oa 15/18. 5/02
VJS. a. 432—14 25 Claims
* •&^» *
. . 1- A method of reclaiming used foundry sand containing an
1. An mfrared radiatmg burner article for generating infra- organic binder comprising the steps of separating a mass of said
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
116S
sand from castings, placing the mass of sand in a stationary
container and providing a supply of combustion supporting gas
to the container wherein to reclaim the sand the mass of sand
IS maintained without agitation in the container whilst permit-
ting the gas to percolate through the sand and whilst the sand
is held in a treatment temperature range of 250* C. to below
4,437,835
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING THE
RATE AT WHICH GASES ARE BLOWN INTO A ROTARY
KILN
CloTis L. Martin, Sao Jeronimo, Brazil, assignor to Acos Finos
PiratinI S.A., Porto Alegre, Brazil and Metallgesellschaft
Aktiengesellschafl, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 398,800
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 18.
1981. 3128556
Int a.3 F27B 7/00
UA a 432-103 12 Claims
OKODEfl — '
pncsstfn
1. A method of measuring the rate at which gases are blown
in streams into a rotary kiln, said method comprising the steps
of:
(a) introducing said gases into said kiln in respective streams;
(b) intercepting each of said streams with a constriction
before the stream enters said kiln;
(c) pneumatically tapping each stream behind the respective
constriction to generate a differential pressure between
the pressure of each stream upstream of the respective
constriction and a static second gas pressure, said differen-
tial pressures representing the flow rate of the respective
streams into said kiln;
(d) transducing each differential pressure into respective
electrical signals on said rotary kiln whereby each signal
represents the flow rate of the respective stream; and
(e) tapping said electrical signals from said rotary kiln by slip
rings on said kiln and stationary taps engaging said slip
rings.
5. An apparatus for measuring the rate at which gases are
blown in streams into a rotary kiln, said apparatus comprising:
means for introducing said gases into said rotary kiln in
respective streams and including ducts traversed by the
respective streams;
respective constrictions in said ducts traversed by said
streams;
respective means connected to each duct upstream of the
respective constrictions for detecting respective differen-
tial pressures between the pressure of each stream up-
stream of the respective constriction and a static second
gas pressure, said differential pressures representing the
flow rate of gases in the respective streams;
transducer means on said rotary kiln responsive to said
differential pressures for transducing the respective differ-
ential pressures into respective electrical signals represent-
ing the flow rate of the respective streams;
slip rings on said rotary kiln receiving said electrical signals;
and
Stationary taps engaging said slip rings for tapping said
electrical signals from said rotary kiln.
4,437,836
PHOTOPOLYMERIZABLE DENTAL COMPOSITIONS
Robert Schmitz-Josten, Cologne; CarUiaas SiUing, Odeatkal;
Wolfgang Podszun, Cologne; Bruno BSmer, Leverkusen;
Manfi^d Borgardt, Wuppertal, and Michael WaUcowiak,
LeTerkusen, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer
AktiengeseUschaft, Uverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 413,643
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 4,
iyol| 3135113
Int. a.J C08F 2/50
U.S. a. 433-199 13 Claims
13. In the formation of a dental prosthesis, filling or coating
comprising forming a composition comprising
(a) at least one ethylenically unsaturated photopolymeriz-
able monomer,
(b) at least one photoinitiator selected from the organic
mono- or di-carbonyl compounds and
(c) a photoactivator,
shaping said composition and then polymerizing said
composition under the influence of light, the improvement
which comprises employing as said photoactivator at least
one alkylaminoarylsulphonyl compound of the formula
SO2-X
in which
Rl and R2 each independently is a hydrogen atom or an
alkyl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl. aralkyi or
alkaryl group which has 1 to 11 carbon atoms and is
optionally substituted by at least one hydroxyl, amino,
epoxy, urethane, urea, ester or ether group, or R| and Rj
together from a 3- to 6-membered ring, which optionally
contains nitrogen, oxygen or sulphur as a hetero-atom,
R3 independently of Ri, has any of the meanings given for
R I or is a group of the formula
Rl
R2
\
<
.CH-.
R4 and R5 each independently is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl
or alkenyl group which has 1 to ID carbon atoms and is
optionally substituted by halogen, or a halogen atom, or
R4 and R3 are in ortho-positions relative to one another and,
together with the aromatic nucleus, form a 4- to 8-mero-
bered ring, and
X is an alkyl or alkenyl group which has 1 to 10 carbon
atoms and is optionally substituted by a hydroxyl, amino,
urethane, urea or ester group, or is a group of the formula
— N
/
i
\
wherein
R« and R7, independently of R| and R2. have any of the
meanings given above for R| and Rj.
1166
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M37,837
EDUCATIONAL AID AND METHOD OF USING SAME
Shirley I. SckMttler, S311 W. Bcrteai^ Ckkago, DL 60641, and
EUbot GOiooa. 77 N. MkUgu A?c^ Chicago, IlL 60611
FOcd Dec. 11, IMl, Ser. No. 329,728
lat CL^ G09B 17/00
UA a 434-178 8 n««—
n
-A -5
"^-.9
f^
m.
»•' 12- iWt ,Ml /m .V
•■r-A ftarS a s^.,.
displaying the second one of said sentence indicia to the
learner,
requesting the learner to read said second sentence to facili-
Ute the decoding of said second indicia;
displaying the third one of said sentence indicia to the
learner;
requesting the learner to read said third sentence to facilitate
the decoding said third alphabetic indicia; and
repeating the displaying and requesting steps for the fourth
and any additional ones of said sentence indicia;
whereby each subsequent sentence indicia includes at the
most only one new alphabetic indicia representing a single
new high-frequency word to be learned and possibly some
alphabetic indicia representing one or more previously
learned high-frequency words.
s-' <a m. ,»? m, m
4,437,838
APPARATUS FOR PREPARING EXAMINATIONS
Robert T. Taober, and Randolph T. Taober, both of Eric, IHl,
aaiignors to TTK Commnaication Products, Erie, Pa.
FUed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,736
Int a.3 G09B 1/10
VS. a 434-363 2 Claimi
^TTTTT 1
1. A method of using an educational aid for facilitating the
instruction of learners in the ability to rciad comprising, in
combination:
an ordered set of instructional elements for use seriatim
according to a teaching plan, each element including:
background means having indicia thereon;
said indicia including an ordered series of sentence indicia;
a first one of said sentence indicia including a first alphabetic
indicia representing a first single high-frequency word to
be learned and at least a first rebus indicia representing a
word equivalent cooperating with the high frequency
word to help form a first sentence to facilitate the decod-
ing said first alphabetic indicia in accordance with a teach-
ing plan;
a second one of said sentence indicia including a second
alphabetic indicia representing said single high-frequency
word to be learned for repetition purposes and at least a
second rebus indicia representing a word equivalent coop-
erating with the high frequency word to help form a
second sentence to facilitate the decoding said second
alphabetic indicia in accordance with the teaching plan;
a third one of said sentence indicia including a third alpha-
betic indicia representing a second single high-frequency
word to be learned and at least a third rebus indicia repre-
senting a word equivalent cooperating with the second
high-frequency word to help form a third sentence to
facilitate the decoding said third alphabetic indicia in
accordance with the teaching plan, wherein said third one
of said sentence indicia includes a fourth alphabetic indicia
representing said single high-frequency word to be
learned for reinforcement purposes;
a fourth one of said sentence indicia including a fifth alpha-
betic indicia representing said second single high-fre-
quency word to be learned for repetition purposes and at
least a fourth rebus indicia representing a word equivalent
cooperating with said second high-frequency word to
help form a fourth sentence to facilitate the decoding said
fifth alphabetic indicia in accordance with the teaching
plan;
displaying the fu^t one of said sentence indicia to the learner
according to the teaching plan;
directing the attention of the learner to said first alphabetic
indicia representing said single high-frequency word to be
learned for explaining said word to the learner,
Jl,
0000000000000 obolo o olo o
v-i^
O
o
o
o
o
o
1. Equipment for preparing an examination of a plurality of
questions comprising a plurality of rectangular cards each
carrying a single question and with space for non-reproducing
administrative information such as instructions for grading
answers and records of student response to the question, said
cards being of uniform size having along the left-hand margin
a vertical row of a plurality of uniformly spaced holes and an
index mark of reproducible ink indicating the top Une and the
left-hand margin of the question, and a card holder comprising
a strip of length equal to or greater than the length of the page
on which the examination questions are to be assembled, said
strip having a left-hand margin underlying and covered by the
left-hand margin of the cards and a plurality of uniformly
spaced pins registering with and frictionally gripping the holes
in the cards, the cards being laid single fashion on the strip with
the holes over the pins and with the question on each card
exposed and with the remainder of the card covered by the
card containing the following question, whereby a photocopy
of the cards assembled on the card holder after placing on the
photocopy the reproducible number for each question on iu
index mark provides a master copy of a page of examination
questions which may be reproduced to provide multiple cop-
ies.
4,437,839
CHALKBOARD WITH HINGED CHALK RAIL
John H. Stenpd, 117 N. Blanco, Coleauui, Tea. 76834
FUcd Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,417
iBt CL^ B43L 21/04
VS. a. 434-417 14 Oalm
1- In a chalkboard having a board presenting an indicia
receiving front surface with upright lateral margins,
a chalk rail comprising
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1167
a ledge coextensive with the chalk rail and adjacent the
lower margin of the indicia receiving board and of suffi-
cient transverse width to receive markers and erasers,
upright fianges projecting perpendicularly from the lower
end portions of the upright lateral margins of said board
adjacent the ends of said chalk rail,
hinge pins rotatably connecting said ends of said rail to the
flanges so as to permit pivotal movement of said rail rela-
tive to said board, and
4,437341
OUTBOARD JET DRIVE STEERING MECHANISM
Richard C. StaUman, 1311 Dayton A?e., Alancda, Calif 94501
FUed Not. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 317,999
iBt a.J B63H 11/02
VS. a. 440-42 4 ctali^
1. A steering control apparatus for an outboard engine
driven jet boat comprising
a boat hull having a bottom adapted to plane along the
surface of the water,
a jet outboard propulsion apparatus having means defining a
water inlet port and means defining a water outlet port,
said water inlet port having an upper lip and a lower lip]
means defining a conduit disposed along said hull beginning
proximate the stem of said hull and extending longitudi-
nally forward in said hull,
said upper lip of said water inlet port disposed proximate the
extended upper surface of said conduit, and said lower lip
of said water inlet port disposed proximate the extended
bottom surface of said hull,
means for extending said conduit stermvard proximate said
inlet port comprising
a channel top member having a pair of side skirts depending
downwardly therefrom to partially enclose said upper lip
_ of said inlet port, and
means for preventing entrainment of air into said inlet port
during a turning maneuver of said jet boat.
4,437340
SWIMMING WHEEL APPARATUS SURlJK^'fSvinr
Maknm I. FlUppoa, 102 OaUand Are., Jersey Qty, N J. 07306 Terr««« P r«»»«r aiiuJn i- lil t
Filed Oct 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316.771 i^W "^ •' ^'•' ^^•
UA a 440-27 '"*-^-^^«»^^/^ ,^.._.. ^•'^'':'A.?AS';i^^^«^>«
lat. a.J A63C 15/00
means for limiting pivotal movement of said rail between an
up position folded contiguous and substantially parallel to
said board and a down position substantially perpendicu-
lar to said board whereby said chalkboard is packagable
for shipment in ite up position and functions in its down
position to provide the supporting ledge,
upright frame members at said upright lateral margins of said
board,
said upright flanges being integral with the lower end por-
tions of the frame members.
2Claijiu
U.S. a. 441—65
6Claims
1. A swimming wheel apparatus comprising in combination:
a ftwne; a pair of hollow pontoons separated by said frame and
made an integral part thereof, so that said pontoons and said
frame together physically touch and support a reclining rider;
a paddle wheel powered by said rider for propelling said craft
on a water surface, said paddle wheel disposed on straight
beams extending from and colinear with said pontoons; a pair
of stimips disposed at one end of said pontoons for said rider's
feet, wherein means to steer said craft include a mechanism to
tilt said paddle wheel, said mechanism utiUzing a manually
rotatable knob connected by a flexible shaft to a screw which
supporto a bearing block which fiuther supports one end of a
paddle wheel shaft.
1. A device for faciUtating an enhancing bodysurfing,
adapted to receive a hand of the surfer, and selectedly support-
ing one or both hands of the surfer so that the upper arms and
head of the surfer are raised somewhat during surfing,
whereby increased speed and buoyancy through the water are
provided, the device comprising:
an elongated, buoyant planar member having iU widest
portion at an>roximately the midpoint of the length
1168
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
thereof and with the sides of the member curving in-
wardly toward the front and rear to provide a streamlined
configuration;
a compartment located at the upper forward end of said
planar member, the major portion of said compartment
being located forwardly of a transverse horizontal midline
of said planar member, said compartment having an open-
ing in the rear thereof to receive the hand of the surfer
with the heel of the palm of the surfer being located upon
said planar member at approximately said transverse midl-
line thereof, that portion of the upper surface of the planar
member adjacent said compartment opening thus defining
a support surface for the heel of the palm of the surfer,
there being a substantial portion of said planar member
trailing rearwardly of said support surface; and
a top on said compartment extending upwardly and rear-
wardly from the forward end portion of the planar mem-
ber, to define a streamlined, generally arched outer sur-
face extending approximately to and above said planar
transverse midline, thus to form an additional, second
support surface for the other hand of the surfer;
whereby said planar member support surface is employed by
one hand of the surfer during surfmg to raise somewhat
the upper arms and head of the surfer, thus to increase
buoyancy and speed through the water, the other hand of
the surfer being selectively placed upon said compartment
top or trailing alongside the body of the surfer.
means from said first compartment to said second compart-
ment.
4,437,843
DEVICE FOR SELF-ACTING UMITATION OF SPEED OF
ASCENDING DIVERS
Thco Biric, Qnellcnweg 11, 8531 Markt Eribach, Fed. Rep. of
Gcmiaay
per No. PCT/DE81/00075, § 371 Date Jan. 22, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 22, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO81/03313, PCT Pub.
Date Not. 26, 1981
per FUed May 22, 1981, Scr. No. 344,082
Claims priority, appUcatioii Fed. Rep. of GcmiaBy, May 24,
1980, 3019993; Jul. 24, 1980, 3028070
lot a.! B43C 9/12
VS. a. 441-96 17 Clalnis
1. Apparatus for limiting the ascending speed of a diver in
air-filled diving equipment comprising means defining a cham-
ber, a separating means dividing said chamber into a first com-
partment and a second compartment, communicating means
communicating said first compartment with the inner space of
said diving equipment, said separating means being movable so
as to provide variable volumes for said first and second com-
partments, a restriction means between said first and second
compartments, a check valve between said first and second
compartments, and a valve means comprising a closure mem-
ber connected to said separating means and movable with said
separating means, said valve means further comprising a valve
seat cooperable with said closure member for opening and
closing said valve means, said valve means being operably
connected with the inner space of said diving equipment so
that when said valve means is open, the pressure within the
inner space of said diving equipment is relieved to decrease the
rate of ascent of said diver, said valve means being opened
when the pressure in said first compartment exceeds a value
which is related to the passage of fluid through said restriction
4,437344
METHOD OF MAKING ORGANIC-RETINA
(PYROELECTRIQ VIDICON
Ferdinand C. Petite, Alexandria, and Gerald Klaubcr, Frede-
rickaburg, both of Va., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Wash-
ington, D.C.
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,921
Int. a.} HOIJ 3J/49
U.S. a. 445—5 3 Claims
Ua L—n TM-TMM Of TUM »l«.l COHTWiM |
c""e«t ti)««piT M» ion nimtm I
IDUCWITIIM WMnT, n
'tMrTt#,|
[lucfo turn tow
Jny^
1. A method of making an organic-retina vidicon which
includes the following steps:
(a) make a glass tube envelope, insert the electron gun, the
getters, and other electrodes in the lower two-thirds of the
envelope, bond to the envelope a temporary faceplate to
produce a tube assembly;
(b) vacuum pump the assembly;
(c) bake the assembly;
(d) allow the assembly to cool;
(e) place the assembly in an inert atmosphere;
(0 make an organic-retina faceplate and place in the inert
atmosphere containing the assembly;
(g) remove the temporary faceplate and bond the organic-
retina on the tube envelope to produce a new assembly;
(h) vacuum pump the new assembly;
(i) bake the lower two-thirds of the new assembly;
0) heat the getters to degas same;
(k) activate the electron gun cathode by heating same;
0) activate the retina by heating with anode current;
(m) bake the lower two-thirds of the new assembly while
continuing anode current;
(n) discontinue anode current, fire getters;
(o) electron beam scrub the retina and other tube electrodes;
(p) tip-off the envelope.
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1169
4,437345
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING A GAS-HLLED
DISCHARGE TUBE FOR USE AS TRANSIENT
PROTECnON
C. Ame Schleinuuui-Jensen, Stockholm, Sweden, assignor to Til
Industries, Inc., Copiague, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Scr. No. 308,485
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 17,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.J HOIT 21/00
U.S. a 445-39 6CMm
pressure parallel to the axis of said shaft mounted for
exerting said pressure as a relative force acting on said
second rings (27.29; 127,129; 227,229) of both said bear-
ings.
1. A method for manufacturing a gas-filled discharge tube,
designed, e.g., as transient protector, conUining tube compo-
nentt comprised of at least two electrodes and an insulating
body holding the electrodes joined vacuum-tight, with the
electrodes and the insulating body dimensioned and arranged
in such a way that at least one discharge gap is present in the
tube, comprising the steps of:
A. sealing at a suitable temperature the components of the
tube at substantially atmospheric pressure in a light gas
mixed with another gas which, in view of the intended
function of the tube is desirable and heavier than the
first-mentioned gas, and
B. reducing the pressure exteriorally of said tube below
atmospheric pressure so as to obtain a pressure lower than
that pressure at sealing temperature, while simultaneously
lowering the temperature to such extent that the heavy
gas can only to an insignificant degree penetrate the tube
walls through diffusion and/or effusion, whereas the en-
closed light gas can diffuse and/or be effused through the
walls such that, as a result of the partial or total pressure
difference, it will migrate through the walls of the tube,
thus causing a reduction in the total gas pressure inside the
tube.
4,437346
SPEED LIMITING ROTARY COUPLING
Istnu Ragaly, SchwicberdiBgen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgut, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198367
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct 23,
1979, 2942737
lot a.) F16D 7/06
VS. a. 464-36 14 claims
I. Electric generator for a motor vehicle, having a shaft
driven from the vehicle engine, having a fan for cooling the
generator and having, seated on said shaft a friction coupling
for driving said fan with a speed-limiting drive characteristic
for said fan, which fan comprises:
first and second bearings each having rolling bearing ele-
ments, a first bearing race ring (26,28; 126, 128; 226,228)
supported on said generator shaft and a second bearing
race ring (27.29; 127.129; 227,229) affixed to said fan;
said first and second ring of each said bearing being consti-
tuted so as to held said bearing elements, as the Utter roll,
at a constant spacing from said generator shaft, and
spring action pressure-producing means (37) for exerting
4,437347
FLEXIBLE COUPLING
Michael M. Calistrat, SykesriUe, Md., auignor to Koppers
Company, Inc., Pittoburgh, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 146,253, May 5, 1980, abandoned. ThU
application Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395369
Int. a.5 F16D 3/74
U.S. a 464-74 6 Claims
1. An improved flexible coupling for transmitting torque
between a driving and driven shaft, comprising:
(a) a plurality of elastomeric elements;
(b) first hub means fixed to a shaft, said first hub means
having blade means comprised of a plurality of blades
engaging said elastomeric elemenU;
(c) sleeve means comprised of a plurality of cylindrical
segmenu having radially inwardly extending straight end
portions circumferentially arranged about said first hub
means, the end portions of adjacent segments abutting
over a substantial area thereof, said segments being posi-
tioned radially toward said blade means to maintain said
plurality of elutomeric elemenu in engagement with said
blades during rotation of said coupling;
(d) retainer means having chamfered guide means engaging
said sleeve means; and
(e) second hub means fixed to a second shaft placed in sub-
stantial alignment with said first shaft, said second hub
means having chamfered guide means engaging said
sleeve means and being fued to said retainer means by
futening means, whereby rotation of one of said hub
means will cause rotation of the other hub means through
said elastomeric elemenU.
1170
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
DERAILLEURPM A Bicvn P f^^" ^° '*^'* ''"^"'** *"** "^^'P^ »° adjustobly engage and
Company Limited, Onlta, Japan
Filed Mar. 9, IMl, Scr. No. 241,642
OaiBM priority, application Japan, Mar. 15, 1980, 55-33684;
Sep. 19, 1980, 55.134347[i;]; Sep. 19, 1980, 55.134348[in; Sep.
19,1980,55-134349(1;] ^ '
Int a.) F16H 9/00
UA a 474-82 Mdainif
immediately adjacent to each other and extending along said
belt from the cut end.
1. A derailleur for shifting a chain among the sprockets of a
multisUge sprocket assembly comprising:
(a) a fixing member fixed to a frame of the bicycle;
(b) a derailleur body being provided with a four link parallel-
ogram mechanism comprising a support member, a pair of
linkage members connected pivoubly to said support
member, and a movable member which has a chain guide
and is connected pivotobly to said linkage members, and
with a return spring for biasing said movable member
unidirectionally with respect to said support member,
said deraUleur body being supported swingably with respect
to said fixing member through said support member, said
chain guide at said derailleur body being supported swing-
ably with respect to said movable member, said movable
member and chain guide having therebetween a tension
spring, said spring biasing said derailleur body counter-
clockwise with respect to said fixing member, a member at
said derailleur body operable with respect to said support
member thereat, having a future for a control wire which
is operated to transform said derailleur body against said
return spring and move said chain guide axially of said
sprockets, and swing said derailleur body with respect to
said fixing member against said tension spring, to move
said chair guide radially of said sprockets; and
(c) an intermittent feed mechanism interposed between said
fixing member and said derailleur body, said mechanism
being operated by said wire to swing said derailleur body
intennittendy corresponding to the speed change stages
with respect to said fixing member, and to transform said
derailleur body after a swinging motion thereof
4,437350
PROCESS OF MANUFACTURING OF REINFORCED
CORRUGATED CARDBOARD TYPE PACKAGING
CONTAINER
Maaayuki Ono, Saitama, Japan, aadgnor to Kabnahiki ic«tfi«^
Tomoku, Hokkaido, Japan
FUed Oct 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,817
ClalBU priority, application Japan, Oct 14, 1980, 55-142482
Int CL^ B31B J/74. 49/02
U.S. a 493-89 3ctoi^
4.437,849
REPLACEMENT DRIVE BELT
Wiafred M. Berg, Eait Rockawty, N.Y., aaaignor to Wilfred M.
Berg, iBCn Eaat Rockaway, J4.Y.
Filed Jna. 12, 1979, Ser. No. 47,716
lat CL? F16G 7/00
UA a 474-256 15 Clalma
1. A replacement drive belt comprising an elongated belt
portion of indeterminate length adapted for being cut adjacent
to one end for forming loops of varying sizes and having cou-
pling means for connecting its opposite ends, said coupling
means comprising a first elongated ratchet tie having immedi-
ately adjacent ratchet teeth and extending from the belt end
1. A process of manufacturing a reinforced corrugated card-
board-type of packaging container, comprising the steps of
providing a corrugated core liner and a pair of side Uners,
adhering one side surface of the corrugated core liner to one
side liner with an aqueous adhesive solution, applying an aque-
ous adhesive solution to the other side surface of the corru-
gated core liner, further applying a reinforcing agent to pro-
duce a reinforced region, adhering the other side liner to the
other side of the corrugated core liner, heating the two side
liners and the corrugated core liner, thereby adhering the side
liners and the corrugated core liner together by gelatinizing
the aqueous adhesive solutions to form a corrugated cardboard
while the reinforcing agent remains unhardened, forming
scored lines in said reinforced region before the hardening of
the reinforcing agent is completed, and folding the corrugated
coardboard in said reinforced region to form a packaging
container.
4^37351
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING AND
SETTING UP LARGE SIZE SUT-BOXES
Stea A. Saleabo, BefUngBirttti 3, 244 00 KifU^a, Sweden
FUed Jn. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,691
OaiBM priority, application Sweden Ju. 25, 1980, 8004702
bt a.> B31B 5/02
MS, CL 493—124 9 0.1—
6. An an>aratus for handling and settiag up hrge slit-boxes
of the type in which the slit-box is formed by a generally
tubular slit-box blank having sides, two of which sides have
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1171
exposed bottom inner flaps connected thereto and two other
Md« of which have opposed outer bottom flaps connected
thereto, comprising; a magazine for receiving a pile of gener-
uly flat slit-box blanks, a catcher means displacable between a
fint position above the magazine and a second position to the
side thereof for setting up Uie slit-box by successively engaging
the uppermost slit-box blank in the magazine and moving the
same to a setting up position, said catcher means including a
catcher carriage which u dUplaceable between a position
above the magazine and setting up position, said catcher car-
nage including a first set of catcher devices intended to engage
one of the sides of the slit-box blank which faces upwardly and
»lso engage the bottom flap connected to the first said side.
a rear panel, said reply envelope sheet joined along a
transverse line to said second enclosure sheet;
(b) folding the composite sheeu to superpose the reply enve-
lope rear panel with the reply envelope frxsni panel;
(c) bonding the longitudinal edges of the front and rear reply
envelope panels to form a reply envelope pocket;
(d) further folding the composite sheett to position the reply
envelope, first enclosure sheet and second enclosure sheet
between the front and rear panels of the outer envelope
sheet;
(e) bonding the longitudinal edges of the outer envelope
front and rear panels to form an outer envelope pocket
containing the reply envelope, first and second enclosure
sheeU; and
(0 whUe the outer envelope flap is open, simultaneously
separating the reply envelope from the second enclosure
sheet, and the first enclosure sheet from the outer enve-
lope rear panel, to thereby provide an envelope containing
separate first and second enclosure sheets, and a separate
preformed reply envelope.
which bottom flap is an outer bottom flap, fiirther catcher
devices positioned to engage another side of the slit-box blank
adjacent to the first said side, which second side also faces
upwardly when the slit-box blank is positioned in the maga-
zine, means for moving the catcher carriage between said two
positions, means for actuating the catcher devices and means
for controlling operation of the catcher devices so that the
second catcher devices associated with the second side of the
slit-box container disengage that side before the first set of
catcher devices disengage the first said side, means for folding iiJ! n io«-^m9
m the two inner bottom flaps into the space between the two •»*-«»2
opposed outer bottom flaps and means for folding in the outer
bottom flaps over the folded in inner bottom flaps.
4,437,852
METHOD OF PRODUCING MAILER WTTH SELF
CONTAINED REPLY ENVELOPE
Kurt E. Volk, Jr., Wertport; Eyerett H. Herbert Fairfield, and
John W. Stenner, Orange, aU of Conn., aMlgnors to Knrt H.
Volk, Inc., MUford, Conn.
FUed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,320
Int a.) B31B 49/04
UA a. 493-216 19 Claims
4,437353
SEAM SEAUNG DEVICE AND TECHNIQUE
Bruce E. Metz, Wilmington, Del., aasigsor to Atbeaa Controls
Inc., Plymouth Meeting, Pa.
FUed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,336
Int a.) B65B 9/08
5 Qaiflu
1. A method for producing an article suitable for mailing
that consists of an outer envelope containing a plurality of
enclosure sheett and a preformed reply envelope, the meUiod
comprising the steps of:
(a) mating in a superposed aligned configuration a first com-
posite sheet consisting of:
i. an outer envelope sheet defining a flap, a front panel and
a rear panel, and integral therewith
it. a first enclosure sheet joined along a tivnsverse line to
said rear panel;
and a second composite sheet consisting of:
i. a second enclosure sheet and integral Uierewith
ii. a reply envelope sheet defining a flap, a front panel, and
1. An arrangement for producing a sealed seam of a plastic
package, which plastic package is formed in part by pulling at
least a portion of a sheet of plastic material, which has fint and
second edge sections, through a forming means whereby said
first edge section is guided to form an overlay section wiUj said
second edge section, comprising in combination: heat seal bar
means disposed to come in contact along said overlay section.
wiUi Uie side of tiie plastic material which becomes the ouuide
of the package u said plastic material moves along said heat
bar means, said heat seal bar means formed to generate heat
and transfer said heat to said overlay section of said plastic
material; tongue element means formed and disposed to fonn a
slit between a first side thereof and said heat seal bar means;
and flexible heating means secured to said fint side of said
tongue element and disposed to come in contiKrt along said
overhiy section, with the side of the plastic material which
becomes the inside of the package to transfer heat to said
overlay section of said plastic material as said plastic material
moves within said slit whereby a seam can be rapidly formed
along said overlay section in response to the direct heat Uvns-
fer from said heat seal bar and to the direct heat transfer from
said flexible heating means.
1172
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4y437354
TAPE ROLL HOLDER HAVING TAB FORMING DEVICE
Jack P. Kaoop, 326 ATcnlda Arbolci, Saa Joae, Calif. 95123
Filed Aag. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,533
lat a.3 B26F 3/02
U.S. a 493-353 i daiai
1. In combination, a dispenser of adhesive tape and a device
for forming a tab in the tape, comprising,
roll holder means for supporting a roll of the tape, said roll
holder means having a forward upwardly extending tear-
off station establishing a tajje dispensing path, and
a molded polymer one-piece tab forming device detachably
connectable to said roll holder means in said tape dispens-
ing path, said device having a pair of upwardly extending
forward and rearward stmts and a spring, said struts hav-
ing upper and lower extremities, respectively, and being
connected together at said lower extremities by said
spring, said struts being biased by said spring to diverge
upwardly whereby said extremities normally are in a
spaced open position in the direction of said tape dispens-
ing path, said forward strut being movable in the tope
dispensing path toward said rearward strut against the bias
of the spring to a closed position proximate to the tear-ofT
stotion of the roll holder to thereby form a tob in said tope,
said tear-off stotion of the roll holder means having inte-
grally formed internally disposed anchor members, said
rearward strut of said device extending into the interior of
said tear-ofr stotion and detachably engaging said anchor
means whereby to enable rapid coupling of the device to
the dispenser without tools, said upper extremity of the
forward strut having at least one integral tang on the side
thereof between the struts and defming therewith a slot,
and an inverted hook shaped member having one portion
detachably engaged with said tang within the slot and
extending forwardly over the upper extremity of the
forward strut, the forward end of said member being
serrated to provide a tope cutting edge.
4,437,855
REDUCnON OF CUTOFF LENGTH FOR FOLDING
MECHANISMS
Lee BalkB, Dallaa, Tex., aarignor to Pabliihen Eqaipmcot
Corporatioii, CaiToUtoa, Tex.
CoatiBuatioo of Ser. No. 133,342, Mar. 24, 1900, ^»miiliMifd,
lUa appiicadoB Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,159
lot CL^ B65H 45/16
U.S. a 493—424 3 cbimi
1. A method of reducing the cutoff length of an existing
paper cutting and folding unit operable only at a single cutoff
length, said folder having a main frame, a folding cylinder
rototably supported thereon, a cutting cylinder rototably sup-
ported thereon at a fixed non-changeable distance from said
folding cylinder, said folding cylinder including a body portion
supporting a synchronously timed tucking blade intemaUy
thereof, operable pin assemblies mounted adjacent the outer
periphery of said body portion, and adjustable bands mounted
to define at least a portion of the outer circumferential surface
of said folding cylinder, said cutting cylinder including a body
portion supporting cutting aasemblks in pockets formed ad>-
cent the outer periphery thereof, the steps comprising,
removing said pin assemblies and adjustable bands from said
body of said folding cylinder, and removing said cutting
assemblies from said pockets formed in said body of said
cutting cylinder, reducing the diameter of said body of
said folding cylinder by permanently removing material
therefrom, increasing the size of said pocketo formed in
said cutting cylinder by permanently removing material
from the body thereof, reinstalling said pin assemblies and
adjustoble bands upon the body of said folding cylinder,
reinstalling the cutting assemblies in said pockets in said
body of said cylinder, and resupporting said cutting and
folding cylinders within said main frame with at least one
of said cylinders repositioned with respect to the other
upon said main frame at a different, non-changeable dis-
tance from the other thereof shorter than their original
distance from one another.
4,437,856
PERITONEAL CATHETER DEVICE FOR DIALYSIS
Alberto Valli, Via CappeUetta, 29, CogUate (ProTiace of Mi-
laao), Italy
FUed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,495
lat a.J A61M 25/00. 1/03
U A a 604—29 4 Claims
1. A peritoneal catheter device for dialysis comprising a
rigid catheter portion of elongated tubular shape having an
interior, a length, a distal and a proximal end thereof and a
plurality of openings spaced apart from each other along the
entire length of the catheter portion, said tubular catheter
portion being closed at said distal end and defining a cul-de-
sec, a longitudinal partition wall extending within said catheter
portion along the entire length thereof and dividing the cathe-
ter interior into two separated delivery and discharge conduits,
supply and discharge ducts for a dialysing liquid connected at
said proximal end of said rigid catheter portion with said sepa-
rated conduits, an inflatable and expandable membrane gener-
ally of tubular shape surrounding said catheter portion
throughout its length and fixed near said distal and proximal
end to define an expandable chamber between said catheter
and said inflatable and expandable membrane adapted to be
March 20, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1173
filled with dialysing liquid, said inflatable membrane having
perforations defining means for the passage of said dialysing
liquid therethrough and in use expanding to a substantially
balloon-like shape, said catheter being adapted in use to be
mierted in a body cavity such as the peritoneal cavity between
the bends of the intestine to deliver and draw the dialysing
liquid through the openings of said catheter.
4,437357
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRAVERSING BLOOD
VESSELS
Seth Goldateia, Betfaesda, Md., and Robert Jooea, Woodbridge,
Va., aaiignon to The United SUtet of America as rvpreaeated
by the Secretary of the Departmeat of Health and Homaa
Senricca, WasUagton, D.C.
FUed Mar. 19, 1979, Ser. No. 22,219
lat a.3 A61M 25/00
UAa604-53 2CIaima
form a communicating path between said chambers as a
result of deflection of at leut a portion of said disc away
from said tubular barrel means, and
said bore being essentially free of radially inwardly extend-
ing protrusions whereby said plunger may move freely
and euily through said bore.
4,437 J59
HYDRAUUC SYRINGE DRIVE
Craig M. WUteboose, New HaTca; Nigel Cox, Cheahirc; Allaa
G. Bart Eaat Harea, and Daniel R. Sayder, New Havea, aU of
Cobb., aarigaora to DRS lafoiioB Systems, lac. New Hafca,
Coaa.
FUed Aag. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 287^61
lat a.i A61M 1/00
UA a. 604-131 23 Claims
1. The method of gaining access to a relatively inaccessible
region of a blood vessel comprising entering the vascular
system with the leading end of a primary flexible catheter tube,
at a point of entry remote from said region, working the pri-
mary catheter tube through the vascular system so that its
leading end approaches said region and then everting a second
flexible catheter tube contained within said primary tube from
the leading end of the primary tube to approach more closely
to said region.
4,437,858
SEPARATOR DISC AND HYPODERMIC SYRINGE
INCORPORATING THE SAME AND METHOD
Peria J. Ty, 3640-B S. Mala St, Saate Ana, CaUf. 92707
ContiBuatioa-iB-part of Ser. No. 869,798, Jaa. 16, 1978,
abaadooed. This appUcatioa Apr. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 370,688
lat a.> A61M 5/18
MS, a 604-90 19 ctaina
1. An automatic drive for a hypodermic syringe having a
barrel for containing a fluid medicament and a plunger adapted
to eject said medicament, the drive comprising a housing,
means in said housing for supporting a syringe in operative
position, first and second variable volume chambers each
having a movable wall element, a conduit interconnecting said
chambers to constitute a constant voluem capacity, a substan-
tially incompressible fluid filling said capacity, means associ-
ated with the first chamber for forcing fluid contained therein
into the second chamber, a syringe driver associated with one
of the movable wall elemenu and operativeiy engageable with
the syringe plunger, means biasing the movable wall element of
the second chamber in a fluid-expelling direction, adjustoble
means associated with the conduit for accurate metering of the
fluid flow from the second chamber to the first chamber, said
adjustoble means automatically operative to adjust the fluid
flow during the operation of said automatic drive to maintain
said fluid flow constant responsive to ambient pressure and to
pressure changes upstream and downstream of said adjustoble
means.
1. Apparatus for separately storing and admixing at least two
materials, comprising:
at least one tubular barrel means having an eflective bore of
essentially uniform diameter along the length thereof, a
plunger at one end of said tubular barrel means adapted to
be moved through said tubular barrel means,
disc means positioned in said tubular barrel means and in
sealing engagement with the wall thereof along the pe-
■ riphery of said disc and operative to divide said tubular
barrel means into at least two separate chambers,
said disc being so constructed and arranged as to be response
to pressure and/or force conditions on one side thereof to
4,437360
DISPOSABLE DLiPER WITH ELASTICIZED LEG
OPENINGS
Wayae C. Sigl, and Ridtord H. Frick. both of Neeaah, Wis.,
aaaigaora to Kimberly-Clark Corporatioa, Neeaah, Wis.
FUed Aag. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 294343
lat a.i A41B 13/02
VS. a. 604-385 7 ctalBM
1. In a disposable diaper having an absorbent batt interposed
between a fluid permeable facing sheet and a fluid impervious
backing sheet and having a generally hour glass shape with a
narrow centrally disposed croteh portion and wider wais.band
portions at the ends thereof, the improvement comprising,
prestretched elastic means extending along the length of tho
diaper at each side, said elastic disposed outboard of the absor-
bent batt in the croteh portion and across the laterally extend-
ing ears of the absorbent batt in the waistband portions of the
diaper, adhesive means for securing said elastic to at least one
of said facing sheet and backing sheet substantially along the
1174
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
entire length of said diaper, said adhesive being applied in the
fonn of longitudinally spaced apart concentrations, said con-
centrations in the waistband portion being substantially larger
and more closely ^Mced than said concentrations in the crotch
March 20, 1984
■fOL
portions of the diaper to substantially decrease the retractive
force of the stretched elastic in the waistband portions to
thereby reduce gathering thereof and diminish undesirable
elastic creep.
CHEMICAL
M37^1
CX)AL-DEASHING PROCESS
Tetaw bhimka; HinMhl Hotta. and Yoddchika Niahlmora. aU
of Kyoto, JaiMn, aarignors to Dai-IcU Kogyo Seiyaka Co..
Ltd., Kyoto, Japan
FUed Feb. W, 1983, Scr. No. 467,063
CUms priority, application Japan, Feb. 19, 1982, 57-26586:
\t^^ '^•^*^' ''*• '•' ''•^ '^•^ ^^' »'^
I"t a. J ClOL 5/04. 10/06
UAa44-lR idaim
1. A process for deashing coal containing inorganic impuri-
Ues which comprises the steps of:
preparing an aqueous suspension of fmely divided particles
of coal mixed with said impurity particles;
adding to said suspension an effective amount of a water-sol-
uble or water-dispersible copolymer having a molecular
weight from about 100,000 to about 30.000.000 of a hydro-
phUic monomenc unit having a solubility in water greater
than 15% by weight at 20* C. and a hydrophobic mono-
menc umt havmg a solubility in water less than 10% by
weight at 20* C, the proportions of said hydrophilic unit
and said hydrophobic unit in said copolymer being a ratio
from 99: 1 to 20:80 paru by weight;
flocculating said coal particles selectively as floes while
leavmg the remainder containing said inorganic impurities
suspended; and ok
recovering said floes from said suspension.
4,437,862
WATER.PROOF BRIQUETTE AND METHOD FOR
PRODUCnON THEREOF
Kyn B. Whang, Seool, Rep. of Korea, assignor to latematioaal
Monopoly Aasodation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,541
Claims priority, application Japu, Oct 6, 1981, 56-158127
Int a.3 ClOL 5/10, 11/00
UA a 44-6 „ Qjj^
10. A method for production of a water-proof briquette
Which comprises mixing an oxidizing agent with powders of a
combustible solid material, adding a solution of brittle nitrocot-
ton and/or ceUulose aceute to the mixture followed by further
mixing, compression-molding the resultant mixture and then
applying «t least once a solution of brittle nitrocotton and/or
ceUulose aceUte on the surface of the molded product
product of dispersing a ground North Carolina type peat with
a mouture of 20-50% by weight in a fuel oil mixture of No. 6
fuel oU (40-50%) and No. 2 fuel oil (10-20%) and aerating said
peat to entrap air in the composition.
4,437,864
o.-^i^;^^ ^^'"^ ^ REACTOR CONTAINER,
PARTICULARLY FOR THE GASIRCATION OF FOSSIL
FUELS
IWiier Gorris, Ratingen; Josef Hibbcl, Oberhanaen; Ulricb
Gerhardns, Obcriiausen, and Heiarich Scheve, Oberiuiuan.
iL :/Z. 5*?- "' *^™"y. assignors to Karrena GmbH,
Ditoseldorf; Rnhrchemi AG, Oberiuosen and Rohrkohlc AG
Essen, aU of, Fed. Rep. of Germany
PCT No. PCT/DE81/000a, § 371 Date Not. 9, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Not. 9, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02743, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 1, 1981
PCT Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321.171
l^wJSm^' "PPllcatlon Fed. Rep. of Germany. Mar. 14,
Int a.3 ClOJ 3/20
U-S. CI. 48-62 R jjcta^
4,437^63
PEAT FUEL SLURRY
Brooks M. Whltdinrit 1983 Hoods Creek Dr., New Ben. N.C.
»560jmd Donald F. Qemena, 1701 SnIgraTe Rd., GreenriUe,
N.C 27834
Filed Feb. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 346,161
Int a.3 aOL 1/32
U.S. a 44-51
3ClalBM
•"a —
(WW
vemM % CMKM n» co»l, umkti, nm. uo aooe
•acnT vouTu eamiir
1. A peat ftiel composition (30 to 50% peat) which is a
1. A plant for the gasification of fossil fuels which includes a
reactor container and a further plant component attached to
said container, said reactor container having a longitudinal
axis, a flreproof lining which determines the inner crou-sec-
Uonal area of said container, a discharge opening and a con-
necting part extending outwardly from said discharge opening,
said connecting part having an outer casing surrounding a
fireproof lining thereof and forming an annular space therebe-
tween;
wherein, the improvement comprises an intermediate ring
interposed between said connecting part and said further
plant component for attaching said connecting part to said
ftirther plant component, said intermediate ring including
a fireproof lining having a reduced inner crou-sectional
area at a portion thereof which is lem than the inner cross-
sectional area of the fireproof lining of said reactor con-
tainer, said reduced cross-sectional area being the smallest
cross-sectional area of the connection between said reac-
tor container and said further plant component;
and wherein said intermediate ring farther includes an outer
casing surrounding the ftfeproof lining thereof and fonn-
ing an annular space therebetween, the outer casing of
said intermediate ring having one end adjacent the outer
casing of said connecting part and being sealingly engaged
therewith;
and which plant farther comprises a support structure at-
tached to the outer casing of said intermediate ring and the
fireproof lining of said ring for suspending the fireproof
lining of said intermediate ring.
1175
1176
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M37,M5
FLEXIBLE BACiONG MATERIAL FOR USE IN COATED
ABRASIVES
Dhan N. Parekh, WUliamsTUle, and Panl R. Schweyen, Tons-
wuda, both of N.Y^ Miigiion to Cirbonuidaiii AbrasiTe
Conpaoy, Niagara Falls, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 27, 1982, Scr. No. 412,149
Int CL» C09K 3/14
\i&. a. 51—298 21 aains
1. Flexible sheet material comprising:
(a) a straight warp fabric, including:
(i) an array of warp yams that extend generally parallel to
one another in a first plane, '
(ii) an array of weft yams that extend generally parallel to
one another in a second plane adjacent and parallel to
said first plane, said weft yams extending generally
transversely of said warp yams, and
(iii) a stitching yam network joining said array of warp
yams and said array of weft yams to one another;
(b) a dipsize of flexible polymeric material that coats and at
least partially impregnates all yams of said straight warp
fabric;
(c) an intermediate filling coat of phenol formaldehyde
resin/latex;
(d) an outer filling coat of phenol formaldehyde resin;
(e) an adhesive coat overlying said outer filling coat securing
abrasive grains;
(0 said sheet material being heat set and exhibiting not more
than about 6.0 percent elongation in the direction of the
warp yams when subjected to a load less than that re-
quired to rupture the fabric and not exceeding 170 pounds
per inch of fabric width.
said water, and discharging the filter water from said filter
means.
4,437,867
REMOVAL OF UNDESIRED COMPONENTS FROM
GASES
Bernard J. Lemer, 727 Orchard HUl Dr., Pittsburgh, Pa. 1S238
CoBtinnation of Ser. No. 796,198, May 12, 1977, abandoned.
This appUcatioa Aug. 23, 1978, Ser. No. 936,078
Int a.3 BOID 45/06, 50/00
VJS. a. 55—233 c n.i—
4,437,866
POLLUTION HARNESS
Harry Pweblo, 4009 E. 131st St, QeTcland, OUo 44105
FUed Aug. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 409,731
Int a.3 BOID 47/00
VS. a. 55—85 11 Claims
7. A process for controlling pollution resulting from flue
gases like coal as produced from a combustion furnace, the
steps comprising a source of combustion of flue gases like
smoke, delivering said smoke to a first collector chamber and
separating larger size entrained particles from said smoke in
said chamber, delivering the smoke from said first collector
chamber to a second collector chamber, bringing the smoke in
said second collector chamber into contact with a jet-like
water spray in said chamber, selectively feeding a chemical
mixture into said second collector chamber in the vacinity of
said jet-like water spray, delivering said smoke from said sec-
ond collector chamber into a third collector chamber, said
second and third collector chambers each being at least par-
tially filled with water and continuously introducing water
into said second collector chamber and delivering the water in
said second collector chamber by gravity, to said third collec-
tor chamber, delivering the water from said third collector
chamber to a filter means and filtering entrained particles from
3. Apparatus for the continuous removal of mist from a
mist-laden gas flowing at a high velocity comprising a gener-
ally horizontal flow channel through which said gas is con-
ducted generally horizontally, a plurality of generally vertical,
fibrous, high-voidage, non-capillary, free-draining bodies in-
terposed in said flow channel, said bodies being anisotropic
with respect to gas flow and gas-flow resistance, said bodies
being disposed so that a portion of said gas flows through one
or more of said bodies and another portion of said gas is de-
flected by one or more of said bodies, said bodies removing and
draining, along the bodies generally vertically, the mist from
said gas during the flow through and deflection, and means for
suppressing the reentrainment of mist drained from said bodies
into said gas.
6. A scrubber for gas containing contaminants including a
generally horizontal flow channel, having walls for confining a
fluid in a generally horizontal path and being open at ito oppo-
site ends, for conducting said gas in a generally horizontal
stream, a plurality of rows of spaced generally vertical baffles
interposed in said channel in the path of said stream, each of
said baffles being composed of fibrous, high-voidage. non-
capillary, free-draining material, and being of substantial
length and width, said bodies being anisotropic with respect to
gas flow and gas-flow resistance, there being open space be-
tween each of said baffles and the bafHes immediately adjacent
to said each of said baffles in said channel, the baffles in each
row being displaced along their row with reference to the
baffles of an adjacent row. a portion of said gas passing
through the baffles on which it impinges and a portion of said
gas being deflected by the baffles on which it impinges, the
deflected gas following a tortuous path through said flow
channel, means for introducing a liquid into said gas in a region
of said stream and/or channel such that contact of said baffles
by said liquid will result, said contaminants in the gas passing
through the baffles being captured by said liquid, and means
for draining the liquid containing the captured contaminants
from the gas passing down the baffles.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1177
4,437368
CONTROLLED EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR LOW
TEMPERATURE ENCLOSURE
Ronald H. Kuhlman, N56 W21640 SUver Spring Rd., Meno-
monae Falls, Wis.
FUed May 24, 1982, Scr. No. 381,031
Int a.i F25D 17/06
U.S. a, 62—411 15 Claims
1. An exhaust apparatus for a cold storage enclosure means
having an exhaust opening comprising a coupling chamber unit
adapted to be mounted in sealed relationship within said open-
ing, said exhaust chamber unit having an exterior movable
closure means adapted to be moved between an open and
closed position and having an interior insulated barrier wall
means defining a vapor sealed closure to the coupling chamber
between the closure means and the barrier wall means, opening
means in said chamber to actuate said closure means and to
remove said barrier wall means, and a small heating means
coupled to the chamber unit and operable with the closure
means in the closed position to hold the temperature in said
chamber at least at the temperature necessary to ensure opera-
tion of said opening means and said heating means constructed
and arranged to permit essentially free flow of air from the
enclosure.
4,437,869
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MULTIFILAMENT
GLASS STRAND
Jacques Lecron, Challes las Eaux; Maxirae Manera, Jacob
BeUecombette; Jean'Paul Faure, Chignin, and Jean-Pierre
Renaudia, Cognin, all of France, assignors to Sodete Vetrotcx
Saint-Gobain, Chambery, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 377,903, May 13, 1982, Pat No.
4,391,618, which is a continuatioa-in-part of Ser. No. 207,712,
Nov. 17, 1980, abandoned. This appUcation May 3, 1982, Ser.
No. 374,478
Claims priority, appUcation France, No?. 20, 1979, 7928538;
May 14, 1981, 8109633
Int a.i C03B 37/025
U.S. a. 65—1 26 Claims
1. Apparatus for the manufacture of continuous filaments
having differing cross sections by mechanical attenuation of a
molten mineral material such as glass, comprising a bushing
adapted to be heated by Joule's effect and having a source of
supply of glau. a gas blower device directed towards the
bottom of the bushing and means for attenuating the said fUa-
menu, characterized in that the bottom of the said bushing has
a lower wall surface comprising a multiplicity of fiberizing
centers divided into at least two different categories, each
center comprising a zone perforated by a group of orifices, the
centers of one category comprising means for producing one
filament per center and the centers of another category com-
prising means for producing a plurality of filamenu per center.
4,437,870
OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE HBER COOLER
Roger A. MUler, Painted Post N.Y., assignor to Coming Glaas
Works, Coming. N.Y.
FUed Not. 5, 1981, Scr. No. 318,375
Int a.' C03B 37/025
U.S. a. 65—12 2 Claims
1. An apparatus for drawing a single optical fiber compris-
ing, in order of relative location:
a solid glass preform having at one end thereof a softened
root portion wherein the preform crou-sectional area
Upers to the crou-sectional area of said single fiber,
means situated along said fiber below said root portion for
measuring the diameter of said fiber,
means for cooling said fiber,
means for applying protective coating material to said fiber,
and
means for drawing said fiber, characterized in that said
means for cooling said fiber comprises
an elongated, vertically oriented tube through which said
fiber is drawn, the top of said tube being below said diame-
ter measuring means,
a cylindrically-shaped porous member surrounding said
fiber at the bottom end of said tube,
a chamber surrounding said porous member,
means supplying coolant gu to said chamber, whereby said
coolant gas flows inwardly through said porous member
and upwardly along said fiber, and
means situated at the top of said tube for exhausting said
coolant gas.
1040 O.G.-
1178
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M37371
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR BENDING GLASS
SHEETS
HaroU A. McMaiter, 420 Water SU WoodriUc, OUo 43469*
NorwM C Nitaehke, 9102 Bock R<L, udJohB S. NUachkc.
324 E. SeeoBd, both of Perryibwg. OUo 43551
DIftto. of Scr. No. 118,822, Feb. 5, 1980, Prt. No. 4,282,026,
which if a eoatiaiiatioB of Scr. No. 872,201, Jan. 25, 1978,
■bMdoMd. TUs appikatioo May 14, 1981, Scr. No. 263,626
iBt CL^ O03B 23/035
UA a 65-104 4Cta,^
1. Apparatus for bending glass sheets comprising: a heating
chamber for heating glass sheets to a sufficiently high tempera-
ture to permit bending thereof; a conveyor for conveying glass
sheets through the heating chamber; a holder for receiving a
heated glass sheet from the conveyor; said holder having a
downwardly facing surface of a predetermined shape against
which a difTerential gas pressure supports the heated sheet of
glass received from the conveyor in preparation for bending; a
mold having a generally open center and a curved shape over
at least a substantial portion thereof with a greater curvature
than said predetermined shape of the holder surface; and means
for providing relative movement between the mold and the
holder such that the mold is positioned below the holder to
receive the heated glass sheet from the holder for substantial
sag bending of the glass sheet on the mold solely under gravity.
3. A method for bending glass sheets comprising: heating a
glass sheet to a sufRcienUy high temperature for bending;
supporting the heated glass sheet against a downwardly facing
holder surface of a predetermined shape; and releasing the
glass sheet from the holder surface onto a curved mold having
a generally open center and at least a substantial portion with
a greater curvature than said holder surface such that the glass
sheet bends substantially on the mold solely under gravity.
imity to a flat platen in communication with a source of
' vacuum;
drawing a vacuum through the platen so as to retain the
glass sheet on the platen;
vertically separating the platen and the glass sheet carried
thereon from the support means;
bringing into vertical alignment with and beneath the glass
sheet held on the platen a shaping mold having a contour
defining the desired contour for the glass sheet; and
releasing the glass sheet from the platen so as to fall onto the
shaping mold and conform to the contour defined by the
shaping mold.
13. An apparatus for shaping glass sheets comprising:
furnace means for heating glass sheets to a softened condi-
tion;
support means for supporting glass sheets;
conveyor means for transferring heated glass sheets to the
support means;
a platen having a flat perforated plate and having an en-
closed interior space in communication with a source of
vacuum;
means for transferring the platen into and out of close prox-
imity to the support means so as to lift the glass sheet from
the support means by means of vacuum;
a shaping mold having upwardly facing shaping surfaces
defining the desired curvature and corresponding to the
shape of the glass sheets; and
shuttle means for alternately bringing the platen and the
shaping mold into and out of superimposed vertically
spaced relationship to each other, wherein the shaping
mold in the superimposed position is supported at an
elevation below the platen so as to receive and shape a
glass sheet dropped from the platen.
4,437372
APPARATUS FOR BENDING AND TEMPERING GLASS
Harold A. McMaater. 420 Water St, WoodrlUe, Ohio 43469:
NonuB C. Nitechlu, 9102 Bock Rd., Pcrrysborg, Ohio
43551, aad John S. Niteehlte, 324 E. Second, Pcrryiborg.
Ohio 43551
DiTiaion of Scr. No. 118,822, Feb. 5, 1980, Pat No. 4,282,026,
which ia a continaatioB of Scr. No. 872,201, Jan. 25, 1978,
abttMloncd. TUa application May 29, 1981, Scr. No. 268J35
Int CLJ C03B 23/023. 23/025
UJS. a 65-104 19 Claims
1. A method of shaping glass sheets, comprising the steps of:
beating a glass sheet to approximately its softening point;
suppcming the heat-aoftened glass sheet in an essentially
horizontal orientation on support means;
Mnging the upper surface of the glass sheet into close prox-
4,437,873
METHOD OF INHIBITING ALGAE
Albert SJocrdanu, Cincinnati, Ohio, aaaignor to McrreU Dow
Phannaccnticalfl Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
Continnation-in-part of Scr. No. 246,569, Mar. 23, 1981, Pat
No. 4,336,054, which ii a continuation-in-part of Scr. No. 95,347,
Not. 19, 1979, abandoned. TUa application Apr. 15, 1982, Scr.
No. 368,546
Int a^ AOIN 33/04
U.S. a 71-67 5 dniM
1. A method of inhibiting the growth of algae which com-
prises contacting said algae with an algal inhibiting amount of
an a-substituted amine having the formula
Y
I
HjN— CH— (CHih— CH-NHi
I
CH}
wherein
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1179
Y is selected from the group consisting of CH2F. CHF2 and
C«CH; and
the salu and individual optical isomers thereof.
4,437,874
TRI-MIXED ALKYLSULFONIUM SALTS OF
N-PHOSPHONOMETHYLGYLCINE AND THEIR USE AS
PLANT GROWTH REGULATORS AND HERBiaDES
George B. Large, Orinda, Calif., aaaignor to SteufTcr Chemical
Company, Wcatport Conn.
Continnation-in-part of Scr. No. 324,284, Nov. 25, 1981, Pat
No. 4376,644, wUch is a continuation-in-part of Scr. No.
212321, Dec. 4, 1980, Pat No. 4315,765. This appUcation Jun.
21, 1982, Scr. No. 389356
The portion of the term of this patent rabacquent to Feb. 16,
1999, has been diaclaimed.
Int a.» C07F 9/38; AOIN 57/00
U3I. CL 71—87 39 Claims
1. A compound having the formula
Rj O O O
R2— S(0),*© P— CH2NHCH2COH
R| HO
where Ri, R2, and R3 represent C1-C12 alkyl, and n is zero or
one, wherein no more than two of Ri, R2 or R3 are identical.
19. A method of controlling undesirable vegetation compris-
ing applying to the vegetative in post-emergent state an herbi-
cidal composition comprising an herbicidally effective amount
of a compound having the formula
R3 o o o
R2— S(0),®© P-CH2NHCH2COH
Rl HO
where Ri, R2, and R3 represent Ci-Q alkyl, and n is zero or
one, wherein no more than two of Ri, R2 or R3 are identical,
and an inert diluent carrier.
4,437375
2,4>DISUBSnTUTED-5-THIAZOLE-CARBOXYUC
ACIDS AND DERIVATIVES
Robert K. Howe, Mdgeton, and Len F. Lee, St Charica, both of
Mo., aaaignors to Monsanto Company, St Louis, Mo.
Continnation-in-part of Ser. No. 140335, Apr. 14, 1980,
abandoned, which ia a contlnttation-in-part of Scr. No. 27359,
Apr. 9, 1979, abandoned, which is a continBation-in-part of Scr.
No. 906,183, May 15, 1978, Pat No. 4,199306. This appUcation
Apr. 22, 1981, Scr. No. 256326
Int CLJ AOIN 43/02. 43/56. 37/18. 37/44
U.S. CL 71—90 24 Claims
1. A method for selectively preventing the growth of weeds
in the presence of com or sorghum crop plants which com-
prises applying to the crop plant locus an effective amount of
acetamide herbicide selected from the group consisting of
2-chloro-2',6'-diethyl-N-<methoxymethyl)acetanilide, 2-
cUoro-2',6'-diethyl-N-(butoxymethyl)acetanilide, N-(ethox-
yineethyl>-N-(2-ethyl-6-methyl- 1 -cyclohcxen- 1 •yl)-2-
chloroacetamide,N-(ethoxymethyl>-N-(2,S-diniethyl-l-cyclo-
penten- l-yl)-2-chlomacftamidc, 2-chloro-N-(ethoxymethyl)-
6'-ethyl-o-acetotoluidide, the eUiyl ester of N-chloroacetyl-N-
(2,6-diethylphenyl)glycinc 2-cUoro-2',3'-dimethyl-N-<tso-
propyl)aoetanilidc 2-cUoro-2',6'diethyl-N-(pyrazolyhnethyl-
)aoetaiiilidc 2-cUoro-6'-trifluoromeithyl-N-<isopropoxyme-
thyl)acetanilidc 2-chloro-2'niethyl-6'-trifIuoromethyl-N-(iso-
propoxymethyl)acetani1ide, 2<hloro-2'-niethyl-6'-methoxy-N-
(isopropo»yinethyl)ar<tanilide, 2-cUoro-2'-methyl-6'-
niedioxy-N-(propoxymethyl)acetanilidc 2-chloro-2'-methyl-
6'-ethoxy-N-(propoxymethyl)aoetanilide and 2-chloro-2'-
i80butoxy-6'-methyl-N-<pr(^xymethyl)acetanilide, 2<hloro-
2'-isobutoxy-6'-ethyl-N-(ethoxymethyl)acetanilide and 2-
chloro-2'-methyl-6'-trifluoromethyl-N-(ethoxymethyl)aoetani-
lide, said crop planu having been germinated from seeds
treated with a safening eflective amount of a compound of the
formula
?
R— C—C-C-OR'
/ \
I
X
wherein X is selected from the group consisting of chloro,
brorao, iodo and fluoro, R is haloalkyi with up to 3 carbons, R'
is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, agricultur-
ally accepuble cations, alkyl with up to 10 carbon atoms,
lower alkenyl with up to 10 carbon atoms, lower alkynyl with
up to 10 carbon atoms, alkoxyalkyl with up to 10 carbon atoms,
haloalkyi and, with up to 10 carbon atoms phenyl.
4337376
2,4-DISUBSnTUTED-5-THIAZOLE-CARBOXYUC
ACIDS AND DERIVATIVES
Robert K. Howe, Bridgeton, and Len F. Lee, St Charica, both of
Mo., assignors to Monsanto Company, St Louis, Mo.
Contlnuatloa-ia-part of Scr. No. 140335. Apr. 14, 1980,
abandoned, wUch is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 27359,
Apr. 9, 1979, abandoned, wUch is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 906,183, May IS, 1978. Pat No. 4,199306. This appUcation
Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256335
Int a.» AOIN 43/02. 43/56. 37/18. 37/44
UJS. a. 71—90 22 Claims
1. A method for selectively preventing the growth of weeds
in the presence of com or sorghum crop plants which com-
prises applying to the crop plant locus an cfTective amount of
herbicide selected from the group consisting of 2-chloro-2',6'-
diethyl-N-(methoxymethyl)acetanilide, 2<hloro-2',6'-diethyl-
N-<butoxymethyl)acetanilide, N-(ethoxymethyl)-N-(2-ethyl-6-
methyl-1 -cyclohcxen- l-yl)-2'Chloroacetamide, N-(ethoxyme-
thyl)-N-(2,5-dimethyl- 1 <yclopenten- 1 -yl)-2<hloroacetamide,
2-chloro-N-(ethoxymethyl)-6'-ethyl-o-acetotoluidide, the
ethyl ester of N-chloroacetyl-N-(2,6-diethylphenyl)glycine,
2-chloro-2',3'-dim^yl-N-(isopropyl)acetanilide, 2<hloro-
2',6'-diethyl-N-(pyrazolylmethyl)acetanilide, 2-chloro-6'-tri-
fluoromethyl-N-(isopropoxymethyl)acetanilide, 2-chloro-2'-
methyl-6'-trifluoromethyl-N-(isopropoxymethyl)acetanilide,
2-chloro-2'-methyl-6'-methoxy-N-(isopropoxymethyl)acetani-
Ude, 2-chloro-2'-methyl-6'-methoxy-N-(propoxymethyl-
)acetanUide, 2-chloro-2'-methyl-6'-ethoxy-N-(propoxymethyl-
)acetanilide and 2-chloro-2'-isobutoxy-6'-methyl-N-(propox-
ymethyl)acetanilide, 2-chloro-2'isobutoxy-6'-ethyl-N-(ethox-
ymethyl)acetanilide and 2<hloro-2'-methyl-6'-trifluorometh-
yl-N-<ethoxymethyl)acetanilidc said crop plana having been
germinated from seeds treated with a safening cfTective
amount of a compound of the formula
O
II
R— C"C-C-OR'
/ \
'C
wherein X is selected firom the group consisting of chloro,
bromo, iodo and fluoro, R is haloaUcyl with up to S carbons and
R' is benzyl.
1180
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,877
l^l-FLUORCM-HALO-S^UBSnTUTED PHENYL)
HYDANTOINS AND USE
Eiki Nagano, NiflUnomiya; ShnnicU Hashimoto, Toyonaka;
Ryo Yoihida, Kawaniihi; HiroaU Matnunoto, Toyonaka, and
Katnizo KamotUta, Osaka, aU of Japan, assignors to
Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited, Osaka, Japan
FUed Jon. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 387,275
Claims priority, application Japu, Jun. 16, 1981, 56-93315:
Dec. 4, 1981, 56-196035; Dec. 4, 1981, 56-19036
Int a.i AOIN 43/9a' C07D 471/04. 513/04
MS. a. 71—90 |g Qjii^
1. A compound of the formula:
4,437379
OXIME DERIVATIVES FOR PROTECTING PLANT
CROPS
Werner Fbry, Basel; Henry Martin, Allschwil, both of Switzer-
land, and Georg Pissiotas, Urrach, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Qha-Geigy Corporation, Ardsley. N.Y.
DiTision of Ser. No. 68,263, Aug. 20, 1979, Pat No. 4,353,935.
This appUcation Jul. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 398,164
9201^ P^"^*y' •PPllcation Switzerland, Aug. 31, 1978,
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/38: O07D 209/48
U.S. a. 71-96 5 Q,,^
1. A compound of the formula
Ar— C— CN
II
N-0-CH2— Rg
wherein
Ar is 1-naphthyl or
wherein X is a chlorine atom or a bromine atom, Y is — CH2— ,
— S— or — SO2— and R is a C1-C4 alkyl group, an allyl group
or a propargyl group.
17. A method for controlling weeds which comprises apply-
ing a herbicidally cfTective amount of the compound according
to claim 1 to the area where the weeds grow or will grow.
18. A compound of the formula:
wherein X is a chlorine atom or a bromine atom and Y is
— CH2— , — S— or — SO2— .
4,437,878
DIHYDROTHIOPHENECARBOXYLATES AND THEIR
USE FOR CONTROLLING UNDERSIRABLE PLANT
GROWTH
Rolf-Dieter Acker, Uimen; Phillip A. Rossy, Ludwigdiafen;
Gerhard Hamprecht, Weinheim, and Brano Wuerzer, Otter-
stadt, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aasignors to BASF Aktien-
gMfllschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 480,895
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 31,
1jW2, 3211851
Int CL^ AOIN 43/02: C07D 333/24
UA a 71-90 8 Claims
1. A dihydrothiophenecarboxylate of the formula
Ri
R2
in which
Rl is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy or halogen, and
R2 is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and
Rg is phthalimido or tetrahydrophthalimido.
5. An antidote composition for use in safening plants against
the harmful effects of potent herbicides which comprises (1) an
antidotally effective amount of a compound according to claim
1 and (2) a carrier.
4,437,880
N'-PHENYL-N-METHYLUREA DERIVATIVES
Jnnya Takahashi, Nishinomiya; Ichiki Takemoto, Takarazoka;
Katsozo KamotUta, Osaka; Ryo Yoshida, KawanlsU;
Hamhiko Katoh, and Sdzo Somida, both of Nishinomiya, aU
of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited.
Osaka, Japan
FBed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 269,851
Claims priority, application Japu, May 28, 1980, 55-71938
Int a^ AOIN 47/30: C07C 127/19
UACL 71-120 8 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
CH3
/
NH-C-N
II \
O A
R'OjC NH-CO— NH— r2. (I)
o
s
where R> and R2 are each Ci-Cio-alkyl, C2-Cio-alkenyl,
C2-Cio-alkynyl, Ci-Cjo-haloalkyl, C2-Cio-alkoxyalkyl,
C2-Cio-alkylthioalkyl or C3-C7-cycloalkyl, or are each phenyl
which is unsubstituted or substituted by halogen or C1-C4.
alkyl, or are each unsubstituted or halogen-substituted benzyl,
and Rl may furthermore be hydrogen.
wherein R is a hydrogen atom or a C1-C4 alkyl group. X is a
C3-C4 alkylene group or a C3 alkenylene group, Y is a hydro-
gen atom or a chlorine atom, A is a methyl group or a methoxy
group and the substituted ureido group is present at the m- or
p-position to the group of the formula:
O-"-
7. A method for controlling or exterminating weeds which
March 20. 1984
CHEMICAL
\ 1181
comprises applying a herbicidally effective amount of at least
one of the compounds according to claim 1 to the area where
the weeds grow or will grow.
4,437381
AaCULAR FERROMAGNETIC ALLOY PARTICLES
AND PROCESS FOR PRODUCING SAID PARTICLES
Akio Mishima; Yoshiro Okuda; Tosiharu Harada; Akira
Mukaizaka, and Tomoyuki Imai, all of Hiroshima, Japan,
assignors to Toda Kogyo Corp., Japan
FUed Jul. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 513,866
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 31, 1982, 57-134016;
Aug. 30, 1982, 56-151467
Int a.3 B22F 9/22
U.S. a. 75—0.5 AA 15 Claims
100
(Alomlc%l
1. Acicular ferromagnetic alloy particles doped with silicon,
chromium and nickel.
4,437383
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING METAL POWDER
ToshUdko Kttbo, Namekata; Minora IcUdata, Otsu; Toahiyukl
Kawai, Nishinomiya; Sadao Yonchara, Katano; YoshUyaa
Koiwai, and KazuhUto Eado, both of Yokohama, aU of Japan,
assignors to SumitouM Metal ladustriss, Ltd., Osaka and
Nippon OU Co. Ltd., Tokyo, both of, Japan
FUed Feb. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 466317
Chdms priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 12, 1982, 57-21818
Int CL^ B22F 9/08
U.S. CI. 75—03 C 8 Claims
1. A process for producing metal powder by impinging an
atomizing medium against a molten metal in a state isolated
from the ambient air, said atomising medium consist essentially
of an alcohol having 1-4 carbon atoms and water and the
weight ratio of said alcohol to water is within the range of
2-70:98-30.
4,437,882
FERROMAGNETIC POWDER TREATED WITH AN
ORGANIC SILANE COMPOUND
Shizuo Umemura; Akihiro Matsuf^Ji; Masashl Aonuma; TatsiUi
Kitamoto, and Hi^ime Miyatsuka, aU of Kanagawa, Japan,
assignors to Fuji Photo FUm Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Jul. 26, 1983, Ser. No. 517304
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 26, 1982, 57-129024
Int a.3 B22F 9/22
U.S. a. 75—0.5 R 17 CUdms
•-/I
ItlTltl SITUttTIOII mWtTIUTKW
T 1 1 1 r T-
s 10 a » a M
9. A process for producing a ferromagnetic metal powder,
comprising the steps of:
reducing an iron compound selected from the group consist-
ing of nickel-doped iron oxyhydroxide, nickel-coated iron
oxyhydroxide, nickel-doped iron oxide and nickel-coated
iron oxide in a reducing gas, to provide a reduced metal
powder including nickel in an amount of 3 to 30 atomic %
based on the atomic % of iron present in the reduced
metal powder; and
treating the reduced metal powder with an organic sUane
compound to provide a silane-treated powder.
4,437,884
ORE ROASTING WITH RECYCLE OF GASES
Raymond Hawryluk, Upper St. Clair; Qyde R. Johnson, Clays-
riUe, both of Pa., and N. Henri Masarky, Tenafly, NJ.,
assignors to Union OU Company of California, Los Angeles,
CaUf.
Conthiuation of Ser. No. 205,788, Nov. 10, 1980, abandoned.
ThU appUcation Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 412,779
Int a.3 C22B 1/02: COIG 39/00
U.S. a. 75—7 13 Claims
1. A process for reducing organic matter emissions during
the oxidative roasting of metal sulfides in a furnace which is
heated by fuel burners, and which has a plurality of hearths in
a veriical configuration, wherein at least a portion of higher-
temperature gases formed during the oxidation is recycled to a
lower-temperature, lower portion of the furnace.
1182
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,885
METHOD FOR THE PHYSICAL SEPARATION OF A
MEFALUC PHASE AND SCORIAE IN AN INDUCnON
FURNACE
GeorgM Bolie, Paria, Fhnce, iMigBor to Conpagnk GcRcrale
dci Maticrcs NadMini (Cogens), Vdlzy VUlacoablay
Vnace
FIW Aag. 31, 1882, Ser. No. 413,457
Claint priority, appUcatkM Fhuce, Sep. 3, 1961, 81 16783
Lrt. CLi C22C 4/00
UAa7$-10R WCtaimi
1. Method for the separation in an induction furnace of a
metalhc phase and scoriae contained in a crucible essentially
transparent to an electromagnetic field maintained within said
mduction furnace, which comprises subjecting the materials:
m a first zone to an induction current of suflficiently high
power and frequency to permit the direct coupling of this
mduction current with the materials in this first zone, so as
to maintain the scoriae in the molten stote,
then, in a second zone, adjacent to the preceding one, to an
induction current of such power or frequency, or both
that direct coupling between the induction current and the
scoriae is no longer permitted.
is either a material selected from the group of materials
consisting of calcium, aluminum, boron, silicon, calcium
oxide, aluminum oxide, boron oxide, and silicon oxide,
or IS a mixture of two or more of these materials; the
weight of said second quantity being 10% or less than
the weight of said first quantity; and
(a3) a third quantity of carbon, said third quantity being at
least the equivalent mol weight of said first quantity of
magnesium oxide plus said second quantity of carbide
forming material;
then
(b) heating the resultant mixture within a reducing furnace at
a pressure between about 5 and 200 torr and at a tempera-
ture of at least 1600* C. so as to effect a first reaction to
g;enerate carbide from the selected carbide forming mate-
rial and the carbon, and a second reaction to reduce the
magnesium oxide by the carbide thereby generating mag-
nesium vapor while regenerating the carbide formine
material;
and then
(c) cooling the magnesium vapor rapidly by adiabatic expan-
sion thereof so as to generate metallic magnesium.
4,437^87
PRODUCnON OF ALUMINUM METAL FROM
ALUMINA BAUXITES AND CLAYS BY FIRSTLY
PRODUCING A PURIFIED ALUMINUM
MONOCHLORIDE
Darid Weston, 34 Parkwood Ave., Toronto, Ontario, Canada
(M4V 2X1)
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 253,639, Apr. 13, 1981. This
appUcation Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 426,971
Int CL^ C22B 21/02
U.S. a 75-68 B 10 Claims
M00ucTi(>«j» >^llr>iia .in
4,437886
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURE OF METALUC
MAGNESIUM
Hirohiaa Miura, Oicazald; Hiroshi Saton, and Toahio Natnmie,
both of Toyota, Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha ic«i«n.h»rf
Kaiaha, Toyota, Japan
Filed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,267
Claims priority, application Japan, May 6, 1981, 56-68025
Int CL^ C22B 26/22
VS. a. 75-67 R 8 cMniB
I wmnn t»LHi uiot ft »i«i 1^
nC
UTIAII
■ «tl CHt-OIIMftT ..
rninatTuii MtrciMLi it iimk- iwcm
onauntt •» ntimu nSmiMi
<m—mmm wum. ntm oumutim Mian
ttifeiafMaMn* MaiittiM •> •mhcmm,
■•MM M*n UUnit fM> MM MMiTiai'
orrioMi. Ml ar aataiTtr iiLicTn nam tmmr
caaaianaa a» aaanw. mcM.aaai «m lei
i
•'
^i™
tMCBTIAUT
tios vfTM mmmMtom
HkMiMTID
MSOS
■ceiiavieAi. m^mt
nm ■■■evai or tokiM
Qrrfwy"
TTWr
IWnt CMMHfpBCMOl
atkTNC AltOSIWlM
CHtoitaartM
aici- aieu- ee- on
MfenaaiCAi ncait
rem atMovaL Of tonst
e«nrtafti««er eotiv e«
•T MtPIM CM trmtm THMMH
H«t 09 wveutiusn eaai ar
t>ueoa etcaaioc aap enatvevat. 9mm
wt tncaM •* ffaaaaia TNaauaa HOiTta
MTaaf aLuiKauii kCTJn coaviariaa
•ciGoa otuatN 10 silicom hctai.
MS TMceit MMiaMa «miai to
•arr ALuMiawM-aiuaoi
MOLTta MTAL - TO aiuMiawii-
VLieoa AkkOT MotuoTioa
•at tracsH aici aae eo
T0 »uai ALuaiaun iiiTat
tioaueTioM
r-Ms)^
K)
1. A process for manufacture of metallic magnesium, com-
prising the steps, performed in the specified order, of:
(a) mixing together:
(al) a first quantity of magnesium oxide;
(a2) a second quantity of a carbide forming material which
1. The process steps for the production of aluminum metal
from the group of materials consisting of alumina, bauxites and
clays and said materials containing at least AI2O3 minerals in
the group consisting of AI2OJXH2O and AhOsJSiO: 2H2O
and free moisture and said AI2O3 minerals containing chemi-
cally combined H2O comprising: subjecting the said materials
to calcination in the temperature range of about 625* C. to
1500' C. to produce a calcined product substantially free of
said chemically combined H2O and said free moisture; subse-
quently subjecting the said calcined product to at least a mass
chlorination stage in the presence of chlorination agent se-
lected from the group consisting of CI2, COCI2, and AICI3 and
reducing agent selected from the group consisting of C and CO
and in the temperature range of about 1200* C. to 1600* C. to
March 20. 1984
CHEMICAL
1183
produce a gas stream wherein the said AI2O3 has been con-
verted to gaseous AICI and said gas stream contains said AICI,
and at least CO2 and CI2; subsequenUy passing the said gas
stream through at least one bed selected from the group con-
sisting of charcoal and devolatilized coke and in the tempera-
ture range of about 1200* C. to 1600* C. to converi said CO2 to
CO to produce a first modified gas stream containing at least
said AICI and CI2, and said CO; subsequenUy passing the said
first modified gas stream through molten aluminum metal in
the temperature range of about 1200* C. to 1600* C. to convert
the said CI2 to AICI to produce a second modified gas stream
containing at least the said AICI and CO; subsequently lower-
ing the temperature of the said second modified gas stream to
within the temperature rang of about 670* C. to 1050* C. to
produce molten aluminum metal and a third modified gas
stream containing AICI3 and said CO.
grams per ml at a ratio of at most eight parts of nitric acid
to one part of said photographic liquid wute;
(c) digesting said mixture during a period between 0.7 and
1.5 hours at a temperature between 55* C. and 65* C;
(d) filtering through a porous ceramic filter the digested
mixture and washing the filtrate at room temperature;
(e) the filtered residue is collected in a ceramic dish and
heated therein to a temperature of about 65* C. for about
0.5 hours;
*0-CONUiNa« «OliO
I 5*a***M
hUTwA njClBib CAtCMMb ruWMG COCWiNb
4^437,888
PREPARATION OF TTTANIUM/ALUMINUM ALLOYS
Gilbert Jecker, Schiltigheim, France, assignor to Rhone-Poulenc
Specialites Chimiquca, Courbe?oie, France
Filed May 5, 1982, Ser. No. 375,099
Claims priority, application France, May 6, 1981, 81 08975
Int. a.3 C22C 7^/00
U.S. a. 75—84.4 28 Claims
1. A process for the production of an admixture of metals in
metallic state and a cryolite mineral comprising (1) reducing an
alkali metal fluotitanate with aluminum at an elevated tempera-
ture which is below that at which vaporization of products of
said reduction occurs, said reduction occurring in the presence
of an alkali metal oxide reactive flux, (2) solubilizing with
water fluorine compounds formed during said reduction which
are in admixture with a dispersion of metallic titanium and
aluminum also formed during said reduction, (3) separating
said titanium and aluminum from said aqueous solution of
solubilization of step (2), (4) contacting said aqueous solution
of solubilization from which said metallic titanium and alumi-
num have been separated with a mineral acid to form a cryolite
mineral, and (5) recovering said cryolite mineral.
16. A process for the production of an admixture of metals in
metallic state and a cryolite mineral comprising (1) coreducing
an admixture of an alkali metal fluotitanate, aluminum and at
least one halide of a metal M wherein M is selected from the
group consisting of vanadium, zirconium, chromium, niobium,
tantalum and iron at an elevated temperature which is below
that at which vaporization of products of said coreduction
occurs, said coreduction occurring in the presence of an alkali
metal oxide reactive flux, (2) solubilizing with water fluorine
compounds formed during said reduction which are in admix-
ture with a dispersion of metals in metallic state also formed
during said reduction, (3) separating said metals in metallic
state from said aqueous solution of solubilization of step (2), (4)
contacting said aqueous solution of solubilization from which
said metallic titanium and aluminum have been separated with
a mineral acid to form a cryolite mineral, and (5) recovering
said cryolite mineral.
4,437,889
METHOD OF RECOVERING SILVER FROM SOLID AND
UQUID PHOTOGRAPHIC WASTE
EUodoro Paladoa-Mcadon, Calle Ceatro. Saata Sofia QTA.
Giaercli, Caracas, Veaeaela (1060)
CoBtiaaatkM of Ser. No. 290,694, Aag. 6, 1981, abaadoaed. This
appUcatioa JaL 15, 1983, Ser. No. 514^351
lat CL> C22B 11/00
VS, a. 75—118 P 4 OaiBH
1. A method of recovering silver from a silver-containing
photogn4>hic liquid fixer waste, comprising:
(a) heating the silver-containing photographic liquid fixer
waste to a temperature between about 45* C. and 65* C;
(b) mixing under agitation said heated silver-containing
photogr^>hic liquid waste with aqueous nitric acid at a
6S% ooncentratioD and having a specific density of 1.40
(0 subjecting the heated filtered residue to a further heating
suge in a temperature ranging between about 600* C. and
700* C. until said residue turns into a gray solid;
(g) fusing at a graphite crucible said gray solid during be-
tween about 0.4 and 0.6 hours in a temperature between
about 900* C, and 1000* C; and
(h) dumping the fused product directiy from the graphite
crucible into water at room temperature to solidify it,
obtaining a 99.5% purity silver.
4,437,890
METHOD OF THE PREPARATION OF HIGH DENSTTY
SINTERED ALLOYS BASED ON IRON AND COPPER
Tadao Hayaaaka, Chiba; Masahiro Suzuki, Adacbi; Shigeni
Ozawa, Tokiwadaira, and Yoshiaki Takeya, Matiuhidai, aU of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi Powdered Metals Co., Ltd., Japan
Coatiauation of Ser. No. 170,991, Jul. 18, 1980, abaadoaed. This
appUcation Mar. 21, 1983, Ser. No. 477,365
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 28, 1979, 54-096389
Int. a.J B22F 3/00
VS. a 75—244 26 Claims
20
I-
A
•^OT 1, ti i% 55 ^!-
■ONQN CONTENT N TtC SNTCKEO MtfEIMt. 1%)
1. Method of preparing a high density iron and copper based
sintered aUoy from alloy material composed mainly of iron and
by weight up to 50% copper, 0-0.5% carbon, 0-3% nickel, and
0-1.5% molybdenum in which boron is added to the alloy
material in an amount of no less than 0.03% and sufficient to
suppress or limit the copper growth phenomenon of the copper
present during sintering, and then sintering the aUoy material.
4,437,891
OIL-ATOMIZED LOW-ALLOY STEEL POWDER
MaaaUde Uadao, Nara; Eyiro Tamara, Hirakata; laana
Karaaoao, Yaauto-Kooriyaau; Miaora IcUdate, Ohtia, aad
ToaUUko Kabo, Ckiba, all of Japaa, aaai^on to SaadtoaM
Metal ladutriaa, Ltd., Osaka, Japaa
Filed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,565
daisM priority, applkatkia Japaa, Feb. 24, 1981, 56-26476
lat O.) B22F 1/00: C22C 38/11 38/22
VS. a. 75—251 10 OaiaH
1. An oil-atomized low-aUoy steel powder having improved
1184
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
compressibility, compactibility and hardenability, the chemical
composition of which after decarbuhzation is:
C: no greater than 0.02%,
Mn: 0.3-2.0%,
Oxygen: no greater than 0.10%,
one or more of
Cr: 0.1-2.0%, Mo: 0.05-1.0%,
f '0
"" 6 9
\
v
g 6 8
M
\
X
z
UJ
UJ 67
^
0:
O
66
0
QC
)l Q(
32 OC
3 QC
)4 0
35
Ni: 0. 1-2.0%, Cu: 0.2-2.0%,
V: 0.03-0.5% and Nb: 0.05-0.5%,
the balance substantially iron,
the powder having a green density of 6.9 g/cm^ or more and a
Rattler value of 1.0% or less when the powder is mixed with
0.8% of zinc stearate as a lubricant and then is compacted at a
pressure of 5 ton/cm^.
4,437393
USE OF SOY POLYSACCHARIDES AS A THICKENING
AGENT FOR ALKAU SIUCATE ADHESIVES
Thomas L. Krinski, Granite Qty, m., and Charles E. Coco, Saint
Louis, Mo., assignors to Ralston Purina Company, St. Louis,
Mo.
FUed Feb. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 470,408
Int a.} C04B 19/04
U.S. a 106-80 26 Claims
1. A silicate containing adhesive composition comprising an
aqueous solution of an alkali metal sUicate containing a soy
polysaccharide material in an amount effective to thicken said
solution and improve the adhesive properties thereof.
4437894
SIZING COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING A FORMIC
AaD SALT, PROCESSES, AND PAPER SIZED WIH THE
COMPOSITIONS
Ralph W. Emerson, Sr., Boston, Mass., assignor to The Plasmine
Corporation, Portland, Me.
FUed Not. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 442,319
Int a.J C08L 93/04
U.S. a. 106-238 39 Claims
4437892
MARINE ANTIFOUUNG COATING COMPOSITION
Jeffrey R. Kelsey, Ashford, England, assignor to The British
Petroleum Company Limited, London, England
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246384
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Mar. 27, 1980.
8010350
Int. a.3 C09D 5/14
U.S. a. 106-15.05 8 Claims
1. A marine anti-fouling surface coating composition com-
prising components
(1) from 5 to 55% wt of a polymer having 1 to 50% by
weight of functional groups selected from the group con-
sisting of carboxylic acid, anhydride and acid chloride
groups capable of reacting with amine groups to form a
three dimensional polymer network,
(2) from 2 to 10% wt of a hydrocarbyl polyisocyanate which
is not, in itself, a cross-linking agent for the polymer of (1)
above, wherein the hydrocarbyl group has from one to ten
carbon atoms,
(3) from 5 to 35% wt of a hydrocarbyl tin compound having
the formula RaSnX wherein R is the hydrocarbyl group
having from one to ten carbon atoms and X is oxygen or
sulfur,
(4) from 0 to 20% wt of an epoxy compound, and
(5) from 0 to 80% wt of a pigment, wherein components (1),
(2) and (3) interact in use according to the foUowing
sequence of reactions
(a) the hydrocarbyl polyisocyanate and the hydrocarbyl
tin compound react to form a carbamate or thiocarba-
mate,
(b) the carbamate or thiocarbamate hydrolyses to an
amine and the original hydrocarbyl tin compound, and
(c) the amine and the polymer having functional groups
react to give a surface coating.
=^.»
-f
TOSTOUHTia
1. A sizing composition which comprises sizing -effective
amounts of a rosin that is modified with from about 5 to 50
percent, based on the weight of the rosin, of an organic acidic
compound selected from the group consisting of an alpha,
beta-unsaturated aUphatic acid containing from about 3 to 6
carbon atoms, an anhydride thereof, and their mixtures; ammo-
nia in amounts sufficient to enhance the sizing characteristics
of the composition; ammonium formate effective to, and in
amounts sufficient to, enhance the sizing characteristics of the
composition; and containing amounts of the modified rosin,
ammonia and ammonium formate sufficient to provide the
composition with a total acidity of at least about 1,000 parts per
million.
4,437,895
MIXTURE OF VEGETABLE OILS BASED ON JOJOBA
OIL AND COSMETIC COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING
THE MIXTURE
Constantin Koulbanis, Paris; Qnang L. N'Guyen, Antony; Ar*
lette Zabotto, Paris, and Joaiane Plot, Aulnay-soas*Bois, aU
of France, assignors to Sodetc Anonymc dite: L'Oreal, Paris,
France
FUed JuL 20, 1982, Ser. No. 400^1
Claims priority, application Frimce, JuL 23, 1961, 8114366
Int 0.3 C08L 91/00: C09D 3/26; A61K 7/4i
U.S. CL 106—245 IQ o.i—
1. An oxidation stable mixture comprising S-9S percent by
weight of jojoba oU, the remainder being a member selected
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1183
from the group consisting of hazelnut oil, mango oil, coffee
bean wax, karite butter, soya oil, palm oil, maize germ oil and
mixtures thereof.
4,437,896
SYNTHETIC ASPHALT MIXTURES AND PROCESSES
FOR MAKING THEM
John F. Partanen, 612 W. Kiva Ave., Mesa, Ariz. 85202
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 432,091, Sep. 30, 1982,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 268,363,
May 29, 1981, abandoned. This appUcation Feb. 8, 1983, Ser.
No. 465,013
Int a.J C08L 95/00
U.S. a. 106—273 R 20 Qaims
1. A synthetic asphalt composition, consisting of a mixture of
gilsonite and a tall oil product.
5. A modified synthetic asphalt composition consisting of a
mixture of gilsonite, a tall oil product, and additive material for
modifying the composition to provide desired properties se-
lected from the group consisting of aggregate, petroleum as-
phalt, and reclaimed rubber.
4,437,897
FABRICATION PROCESS FOR A SHALLOW
EMITTER/BASE TRANSISTOR USING SAME
POLYCRYSTALLINE LAYER
Bernard M. Kemlage, Kingston, N.Y., assignor to International
Business Machines Corporation, yirmonk, N.Y.
Filed May 18, 1982, Ser. No. 379,535
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/425, 21/265. 21/225
U.S. a. 148—1.5 9 Claims
1. A process for forming a transistor having a shallow emit-
ter region and a narrow intrinsic base region and an extrinsic
base region using the same polycrystalline silicon layer com-
prising the steps of
depositing a layer of polycrystalline silicon on a semicon-
ductor substrate provided with a subcoUector, epitaxy,
isolated regions, and oxide surface with holes open in the
oxide surface for the extrinsic base, intrinsic base and
emitter region,
thermally oxidizing the surface of the polycrystalline silicon
layer,
implanting the base impurity into the polycrystalline silicon
layer,
defining and removing the surface oxide layer and the poly-
crystalline silicon layer from the subcoUector reach-
through area,
depositing a sUicon nitride layer,
depositing a sUicon dioxide layer,
opening the silicon dioxide layer the sUicon nitride layer and
the thermal oxide layer to define the intrinsic base and the
emitter area,
thermally oxidizing the polycrystalline layer and driving the
base impurity downwardly into the epitaxial layer to form
the extrinsic base region and the intrinsic base region,
etching the thermal oxide in the emitter area in an isotropic
etch,
ion implanting the emitter impurity into the emitter area of
the polycrystalline sUicon layer,
thermally oxidizing to drive the emitter impurity inwardly
into the epitaxial layer to form the emitter region, and
opening the collector, extrinsic base and emitter contact
openings and forming the conductive metallurgy.
4,437398
METHOD AND AGENT FOR PASSIVATING IRON AND
STEEL SURFACES
Hermann Drosdziok; Jiirgen Gcke, both of Dusscldorf, and
Hans G. Germscheid, Ratingen, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Henkel KommanditgeseUschaft auf yUctien, Dus-
seldorf-Holthausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
PCT No. PCr/EP81/00128, § 371 Date Apr. 5, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 5, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00665, PCT Pub.
Date Mar. 4, 1982
PCT FUed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 369,022
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 27,
1980, 3032226
Int a.3 C23F 7/08
U.S. a. 148-6.15 R 14 dahns
1. Method for passivating iron and steel surfaces with the aid
of aqueous, alkaline reacting solutions which contain corrosion
inhibitors, consisting essentially in that the metal surface is
treated with solutions which contain from 0.5% to 5% by
weight of a combination, giving a clear solution in water, of
(a) one or more maleic acid monoalkylamides having from 6
to 14 carbon atoms in said monoalkyl,
(b) one or more alkanolamines having from 2 to 12 carbon
atoms,
(c) one or more phosphonic acids which have complexing
properties, the weight ratio of maleic acid monoalkyla-
mide to alkanolamine being 1.0.3 to 1:10 and the weight
ratio maleic acid monoalkylamide to phosphonic acid
being 1:0.01 to 1:0.5 and the pH value of the solution being
between 7.5 and 10.5.
4,437,899
METAL BILLET CUTnNG APPARATUS AND METHOD
Joseph Rokop, Pittsburgh, and Nikolaus Rokop, Bridge?iUe,
both of Pa., assignors to Rokop Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jul. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 516,907
Int a.3 B23K 7/02
U.S. Q. 148—9 R 11 Claims
1. In a metal processing apparatus wherein an elongated
stand of metal is severed as it moves along a pass line by cutting
means which is operative to cut the strand transversely of said
pass line into bUlets of a given length, the improvement com-
prising:
a material removing means located at a fixed position with
respect to the longitudinal extent of said pass line and
operable to engage an exterior surface of said strand of
metal moving on said pass line along at least one continu-
ous line of action extending throughout the lateral extent
oT said exterior surface for removing material from said
exterior surface as said strand moves along said pass line in
a manner that the material removal efTected by said mate-
rial removing means at the location of any such transverse
severing progresses transversely of said exterior surface
from one lateral side of said strand to the other lateral side
thereof as said strand moves along said pass line.
1186
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,900
THERMAL MECHANICAL TREATMENT FOR
ENHANCING HIGH TEMPERATURE PROPERTIES OF
CAST AUSTENmC STEEL STRUCTURES
Ruzica PetkoTic-Luton, Englewood, N J^ inignor to Exxoo
Research aod Engineering Co., Florluun Parit, N J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 334,651, Dec. 28, 1981, abandoned.
This appUcation Jan. 5, 1983, Ser. No. 455,881
Int a.3 C21D 7/14
U.S. a. 148-12 E 10 Claims
1. A method for improving the high temperature properties
of cast austenitic steel structures, the method comprising:
(a) heating the structures to at least the temperature at which
chromium carbides go into solution, but below the tem-
perature where incipient melting occurs;
(b) maintaining the structures at such temperature for an
effective amount of time;
(c) hot working the structures by applying from about 15%
to 60% plastic deformation; and
(d) cooling the structures at a rate less than about 100' C./hr
to allow recrystallization of the grains to occur such that
the resulting average grain size is from about 45 ^m to
about 180 ^m.
4,437,902
BATCH-ANNEALED DUAL-PHASE STEEL
Jolin W. Pickens, Strongirille; Jolin K. Abraluun, BroadTiew
Heiglits; Raymond E. Mintos, Warren, and MilUceat H.
Thomas, Broadiiew Heights, aU of OUo, assignors to Repub-
lic Steel Corporation, OeTeland, Ohio
FUed Oct 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,510
Int a.3 C21D B/10
U.S. a 148-12 F 11 ctain.
4,4374K)1
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVED HEAT
TREATMENT OF ALUMINUM ALLOY ROD
Bobby C. Gentry, Temple, Ga., assignor to Southwire Company,
oa.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,988
Int CV C21D 1/00, 9/62
U.S. a. 148-11.5 A 13 Claims
7. A method for the thermal treatment of an intermediate
metallic rod product comprising the steps of:
(a) continuously advancing an elongated metallic rod prod-
uct along a predetermined path,
(b) passing an electrical current through said elongated rod
product to elevate the temperature thereof to a predeter-
mined solution heat treating temperature in a first heating
zone,
(c) continuously advancing the elongated metallic rod prod-
uct through a second heating zone and heating the rod
product therein by thermostatically controlled radiant
heaters and accumulating an extended length of the metal-
lic rod product therein in multiple wraps only partially
around a pair of roUtable cylinders within the second
heating zone and having parallel axes in a horizontal
plane,
(d) maintaining the continuously advancing elongated metal-
lic rod product within the second heating zone until solu-
tionizing is completed,
(e) continuously advancing the elongated metallic rod prod-
uct through a cooling zone, and
(0 cooling the continuously advancing elongated metallic
rod product to room temperature after solutionizing is
completed.
'<! AMWALlMC TtHPtHAniU-*
1. A method of making a dual-phase rolled steel product
which has ultimate tensile strength of at least 80 ksi, yield/ulti-
mate tensile ratio not higher than about 0.65 and at least about
18% total elongation, comprising: establishing steel in ingot
form having a composition consisting essentially of 0.03 to
0.2% carbon, 0.65 to 2.0% manganese, 0 to 0.75% silicon, 0.4
to 1.5% copper, 0.6 to 1.5% nickel, 0 to 1% molybdenum, 0 to
0. 1 5% tungsten, 0 to 0. 1 % aluminum, balance iron and inciden-
tal elements, subjecting said steel to rolling, including hot
rolling, to convert said steel to tightly coiled, rolled strip,
batch annealing said coiled strip in an enclosed region, by
heating said coiled strip to within an alpha plus gamma region
of said steel, at a temperature not higher than about 1400* F.,
thereafter cooling the coiled strip within the range of about 25*
to 100* F. per hour, and thereby producing the above-
described rolled steel product, which comprises a matrix phase
that is chiefly ferrite, and bodies of a second phase that are
chiefly martensite distributed in said matrix.
4,437,903
METHOD FOR PRODUCING TWO-PHASE HOT
ROLLED STEEL SHEET HAVING HIGH STRENGTH
AND LOW YIELD RATIO
Takashi Fnrukawa, and Michio Endo, both of Kanagawa, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jan. 19, 1983, Ser. No. 459,145
Claims priority, appUcation Japu, Jan. 28, 1982, 57-12277
Int a.) C21D 8/04
VS. a. 148—12 F 5 Claims
-«--UM(ll1«klliMillB.umi.lMUI
U
M Ik JP'rVl at ai'
m
1. A method for producing high-strength, low yield ratio
two-phase hot rolled steel sheets having a tensUe strength of at
least about 52 kg/nun^ which comprises:
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1187
hot rolling a steel composition comprising:
0.03%-0.12% C
0.7%-1.0% Mn
0.01%-0.9% Si
0.01%-0.1% Al
O.0005%-0.005% B
less than 0.006% N and which is about equal to the B
content
with a finishing temperature FT as defined by the formula:
FTi'C.) - 953 - 400 X (C %) - 133 X (Mn %) +
40 X (Si %)
+40
-20
(by weight %)
cooling the hot rolled sheet thus obtained to a temperature
not higher than 300* C. with an average cooling rate of 20*
to 200* C./second and coiling the steel sheet thus cooled.
4,437,905
PROCESS FOR CONTINUOUSLY ANNEALING A
COLD-ROLLED LOW CARBON STEEL STRIP
lUiime Nitto, and Hiromitsu Naitoh, both of Kltakyuahu, Ja-
pan, assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 139,275, Apr. 10, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,053
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 5, 1979, 54-156844:
Dec. 5. 1979, 54-156845
Int a.' C21D 1/48
U.S. a. 148—16 11 ciaioM
lOOO
800
Cm 400
200
(09a,efio)
B(08.G00>|
07 OB 09 10 II
coweusncN air ratio (mi
4,437,904
METHOD FOR IMPROVED HEAT TREATMENT OF
ELONGATED ALUMINUM ALLOY MATERIALS
Joseph MacCraven, Bremen, Ga., assignor to Southwire Com-
pany, CarroUton, Ga.
DiTision of Ser. No. 332,992, Dec. 21, 1981. This appUcation
Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,380
Int CL^ C21D 1/40
VJS. a 148—13.1 21 Claims
1. A method of heat treating aluminum wire material after
cross section reduction thereof, comprising the steps of:
(a) continuously advancing an elongated aluminum wire
material along a predetermined path,
(b) passing an electrical current through said elongated
aluminum wire material sufficient to heat said elongated
aluminum wire material to a temperature of at least 650
degrees F. and within the annealing temperature range of
the aluminum wire in a first heating zone,
(c) continuously advancing the elongated aluminum wire
material through a second, a4justable heating zone having
a temperature of at least 650 degrees F. and below 850
degrees P., and controlling the second, adjustable heating
means to rq>idly change the temperature of the wire from
the first zone so as to complete annealing of the wire
during a brief residency period thereof within the second
heating zone,
(d) continuously advancing the elongated aluminum wire
material through at least one cooling zone.
1. A process for continuously annealing a cold-rolled low
carbon steel strip, comprising the continuous steps of:
introducing a cold-rolled low carbon steel strip into a direct
fired furnace, in which a fuel is burnt in a combustion air
ratio of 0.8 or more, but lest than 1.0 to produce a gaseous
combustion product, and in which furnace said steel stnp
is heated in said gaseous combustion product atmosphere
at an average heating rate of from 30* to 100* C./second in
the temperature range of from 500* C. to the Ac3 point of
said steel strip, whereby a layer of oxides is formed on the
surface of said steel strip, said oxides having a thickness
limited to 1,000 angstroms or less;
introducing said heated steel strip into a reducing atmo-
sphere which consisu essentially of a mixture of 4% or
more of hydrogen gas and the balance consisting of nitro-
gen gas and which has a dew point of 10* C. or less and in
which atmosphere the temperature of said steel strip is
maintained in the range of from 700* C. to the Ac3 point of
said steel strip for 10 seconds or more, whereby said layer
of oxides is reduced;
cooling said reduced steel strip to a desired temperature in
such a manner that the cooling operation is started from a
temperature of at least 600* C. of said steel strip and car-
ried out at an average cooling rate of from 10* to 300*
C./second by bringing a cooling medium, consisting of a
mixture of a gas and a liquid, into contact with said steel
strip; and
subjecting said cooled steel strip to a treatment for eliminat-
ing a layer of oxides which has been formed on the surface
of said steel strip during said cooling operation;
wherein said air combustion ratio refers to the ratio of the
amount of air in volume supplied to combust a predeter-
mined amount of fiiel to the amount of air in volume
stoichiometrically necessary for completely burning the
predetermined amount of fuel.
4,437,906
FLUX COMPOSITION FOR ELECTRO-SLAG OVER-LAY
WELDING OF A CYLINDRICAL VESSEL WITH A STRIP
ELECTRODE
J■^{i Tatdahi. Chiha; Takaharv laUkawa, IcUhara; Shonbwo
Nakano, Mobara, and Nobora Nlahiyaan, Ichihara, aU of
Japan, assizors to KawaaaU Steal Corporation, Kobe, Japaa
FUad Mar. 14, 1983, Sar. No. 475,362
ClaiBH priority, application Japtt^ Mar. 26, 1982, 57-47302
laL CL^ B23K 35/34
VJS. CL 14»-2< 2 Clalw
1. A flux composition for horizontal electro-slag over-lay
1188
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
welding a stainless steel on a circumferential inner surface of a netic field and. imparting mechanical vibration, tn «irf ««
now 07.^0.^" "'V ''"r ^'r^*' ""'*^ "'"^^°"^« « "^^'^ ""^'^ whiinSd^nr^er^^terS^^LTsS^^ "^^^^
flow of molten slag and metal with an outer electro-magnetic » •« »"o magneuc
field, which contains 50-60% by weight of CaF:, 10-20% by
ratio of CaO/Si02 of at least 0.50.
4437 907
AMORPHOUS ALLOY FOR USE AS A CORE
Takashi Sato, and Tsutomu Ozawa, both of Kawasaki, Japan,
anignora to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,241
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 6, 1981, 56-32345
Int. a.3 HOIF 1/04
U.S. a. 148-31.55 17 Claims
1. An annealed amorphous alloy for use as the core of elec-
tric-power transforming machines and devices, wherein said
annealed alloy has an essentially amorphous structure, an ex-
tremely low watt loss, a high thermal stability in respect to the
magnetic properties and amorphous structure, a small change
in the magnetic properties depending upon the temperature,
and exhibits a very low increase in watt loss and a very low
decrease in magnetic flux density after aging, and is composed
of the chemical formula of Fe«SiftBcCrf, said parameters a, b, c,
and d being the following atomic percentages:
a = from 74 to 79%
b=from 10 to 19%
c=from 6 to 13%
d=fromOto 3.5%
with the proviso that a-f-b-»-c-|-d= 100%;
wherein the decrease in magnetic flux density after anneal-
ing in terms of:
4437,909
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING A GRAIN-ORIENTED
SIUCON STEEL SHEET OR STRIP HAVING
EXCELLENT MAGNETIC PROPERTIES
Kensoke Mori, HimciJi; Hiromi Matsumoto, Kitakyushu; Yozo
Suga, Kitakyushu; Tadashi Nakayama, Kitakyushu, and
Fumio Matsumoto, Kawasaki, all of Japan, assignors to Nip.
pon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 381,878
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 30, 1981, 56-83072
Int. a.J HOIF J/04
U.S. a. 148-111 8 cMm»
1. A process for producing a grain-oriented silicon steel strip
or sheet, wherein a silicon steel slab containing from 2.0 to
4.5% by weight of sUicon and not more than 0.080% by weight
of carbon is subjected to hot-rolling and then to cold-rolling,
the cold-rolling being carried out in either one step or two
steps to obtain a thickness of a final product, an intermediate
annealing being carried out between the two cold rolling steps,
decarburization annealing being carried out, and, after apply-
ing an annealing separator, fmal high-temperature annealing
being carried out so as to form a {l 10} <001 > texture, char-
acterized in that during hot rolling said sUicon slab is subjected,
at a temperature range of from 850* C. to 1 160* C, to at least
one pass in which the axial lines of the top working roll and the
bottom working roll are non parallel, and as a result of these
working rolls being non parallel, the grain-oriented electro-
magnetic steel sheet or strip has no streaks and has a high
magnetic flux density.
Bi after gaid aging - Bi before said aging
B\ before said aging
X I00(%)
does not exceed 3%, and,
wherein said alloy is annealed at a temperature of from 350*
to 430* C. in a magnetic field higher than the coercive
force of said alloy.
4,437,908
METHOD OF TREATING A MAGNETIC MATERIAL
Kiyoahi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inone-Japu Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
FUed Oct 10, 1980, Ser. No. 195,928
Claims priority, appUcatiOB Japan, Oct 13, 1979, 54-132130:
Oct 13, 1979, 54-132131 '
lat CU C2ID 1/04
UACL 148-108 lldaliiis
1. A method of treating a preshaped magnetic material in the
manner to improve its magnetic properties, comprising: plac-
ing said magnetic material in an essentiaUy unidirectional mag-
4,437,910
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING GRAIN-ORIENTED
ELECTROMAGNETIC STEEL SHEET
Tadao Nozawa, Mnnakata; Takaaki Yamamoto, Kitakyushn;
Tadashi Nakayama, Kitakyosho; Ftamio Matsnmoto, Kitakyu-
shu, and Satohiro Hayami, Yokohama, aU of Japan, assignors
to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267^55
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jon. 4, 1980, 55-75033
Int CL^ HOIF J/04
VJS. a. 148-112 10 Claims
1. In a process for producing a grain-oriented sUicon steel
sheet with secondary recrystaUized grains having a high de-
gree of (I10)[001] orienution and increased magnetic flux
density by a secondary recrystaUization anneaUng of a sUicon
steel sheet having a primary recrystaUized structure, the im-
provement wherein the secondary recrystaUization proceeds
towareds the primary recrystaUized grain region and is com-
pleted over the entire area of the steel sheet whUe a tempera-
ture gradient of not less than 2* C/cm is generated in any
direction of the shori width direction, longitudinal direction or
intermediate direction of said first two directions of the steel
March 20. 1984
CHEMICAL
1189
sheet at the boundary region between the primary recrystal-
lized grain region and the secondary recrystaUized grain re-
gion formed upon reaching the secondary recrystallizing tem-
perature.
10. A grain-oriented silicon steel sheet with secondary re-
crystallized grains having a high degree of (1 10)[001] orienta-
tion and increased magnetic flux density produced by a process
in which a sUicon steel sheet having a primary recrystaUized
structure is primary recrystaUization annealed in such a man-
4,437,912
AMORPHOUS MAGNETIC ALLOYS
Hiroshi Sakakima, Hirakata; Mitsuo Satomi, Katano; HaruAimi
Senno, Yamatokoriyama, and EUchi Hirota, Hirakata, aU of
Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
FUed Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,560
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, No?. 21, 1980, 55-164978
Int. a.J C22C 79/00
U.S. a. 148—403 4 Claims
TEMPERATURE GRADIENT ("C-tml
ner that the secondary recrystaUization proceeds toward the
primary recrystaUized grain region and is completed over the
entire area of the steel sheet, while a temperature gradient of
not less than 2' C./cm is generated in any direction of the shori
width direction, longitudinal direction or intermediate direc-
tion of said fu^t two directions of the steel sheet at the bound-
ary region between the primary recrystaUized grain region and
the secondary recrystaUized grain region formed upon reach-
ing the secondary recrystallizing temperature.
i«aMc%)
1. Amorphous alloy consisting of 60-94 atomic % of at least
one of Fe, Co and Ni, and 2 to 20 atomic % of niobium, the
balance being at least one other metal selected from the group
consisting of Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Ta and Ru.
4,437,913
COBALT BASE ALLOY
Yutaka Fukui, and Tetsuo Kasbimura, both of Hitachi, Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-pari of Ser. No. 98,665, Not. 29, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,514
Oaims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 4, 1978, 53-149135
Int a.3 C22C 79/07
U,S. a. 148—408 10 Claims
4,437,911
BETA ALLOYS WITH IMPROVED PROPERTIES
Lucas J. Delaey, Bertem, Belgium, assignor to LeuTcn Research
A DcTelopment V.Z.W., LouTain, Belgium
FUed Jul. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 400,017
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, Jul. 30, 1981,
8103612
Int a' C22C 9/04; C22F 7/0*
U.S. CL 148—402 12 Claims
1. A shape memory beu copper alloy with improved fatigue
strength properties and with an adjustable Ms-temperature,
consisting essentially of 4-40% by weight of Zn, 1-12% by
weight of Al, 0.01-2% by weight of Co, 0-8% by weight of
Mn, 0-4% by weight of Ni and the balance Cu, said alloy
showing on heating to a first temperature a transition from an
(alpha-l-beta)-region, an (alpha -l- beta +gamma)-region or a
(beta-t-gamma)-region to a beta-region, said alloy having an
average grain size of less than 200 /im and containing cobalt-
and aluminium bearing precipitates, the average size of which
is less than 10 fim and which are insoluble in the alloy below a
second temperature that is higher than said fuvt temperature.
'}•■■
"C
ill ! \
V»'.
4?..'
1
**•
"6 ^61 61 OJ 04
TlUTBiC%l«WfcUTeMC%t'&l«HMC%l , j^„^xi
CUICMCIU
1. A cobalt base cast alloy consisting essentially of. by
weight, 0.15 to 2% carbon, less than 2% silicon, less than 2%
manganese, 5 to 15% nickel, 18 to 35% chromium, 3 to 15%
tungsten, 0.003 to 0.1% boron, 0.01 to 1% niobium, 0.01 to 1%
titanium, 0.01 to 1% zirconium, less than 10% iron, less than
1% tantalum, less than 1% hafnium and the remainder substan-
tially cobalt, wherein the carbon (C), niobium (Nb), titanium
(Ti) and zirconium (Zr) contenu are so selected as to satisfy
the following equation:
Ti (atomic %) + Nb (atomic %)
+ Zr (atomic %)
C (atomic %)
X Zr(wt%) -0.01 to 0.17
1190
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
and wherein there exist eutectic carbides and secondary car-
bides precipitated by an age-treatment in uniformly dispersed
form m the vicinity of grain boundaries whereby growth of the
secondary carbides U suppressed; said alloy having a creep
rupture strength of higher than 4.3 Kg/mm2 in 1.000 hours
creep rupture at 982* C. and a reduction of area of at least 34%
in 100 hours creep rupture at 982* C.
f. reducing the pressure of said curing medium in said cham-
ber within said tire casing;
g. moving said radially movable segmenu radiaUy outward
out of engagement with said tread belt body;
4,437^14
METHOD OF PRODUCING SHEATHED CABLES
AND/OR TRANSDUCERS AND A DEVICE FOR
CARRYING 0?JT THIS METHOD
Franz Frischen, Kreppe 26, D.8359 Ortenburg-Dorftach, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,455
1981*310910°"*^' ■*"'""**°" ^^' "*"• °' G«™«"y. Mar. 10,
Int. a.3 HOIB 13/26
U.S. a 156-54 20 Claim.
n ii'iV_. •
. n"
^..Htt::!
7T-7..
;a
■•s^^rl
IK
»s^^; »
2,8«
13 M
0 a
II l-i J-l l-N l-l
1. A method of producing sheathed cables comprising:
bending a sheet material into a tube;
forming outwardly radial flanges of said tube parallel to an
axis of said tube;
gripping said flanges in frictional engagement by a gripping
means; «»- rr e.
separately inserting at least one lead and an insulating mate-
rial into said tube;
drawing said flanges in a radial direction against an abut-
ment, whereby a diameter of said tube is reduced and said
insulating material is simultaneously compressed;
inserting a cover band over said insulating material prior to
said drawing of said flanges;
welding said tube along a seam parallel to said axis of said
tube.
h. opening said mold; and
i. removing said tread belt from said tire casing.
4,437,916
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING EDGE GUARDS
Robert Adell, NotI, Mich., iMignor to U.S. Product Derelop-
ment Company, Sonnyrale, Tex.
FUed No?. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,510
Int a.3 B31F 7/00; B29C 79/00; B32B i7/00; B23P 14/00
VS. a. 156-222 2 Claiios
4,437,915
METHOD OF CURING REMOVABLE TREAD BELT
Paul E. Appleby, Cuyahoga Falls, and Max D. Brinidey, North
Canton, both of Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear Tire A
Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,448
Int. a^ B29H 7 7/02; B60C 11/02; B29H 21/04
US. a. 156-126 „ ctatatt
1. A method of cunng an annular replaceable tread belt body
of uncured resilient material having reingorcing cords of high
modulus material comprising:
a. mounting said annular tread belt body on a radially outer
surface of a precured tire casing having a curing medium
chamber therein;
b. supporting said tire casing in a segmental mold having
radially movable segments for engagement with said tread
belt body;
c. closing said mold;
d. transmitting a curing medium at high temperatures and
pressures into said chamber within said tire casing to press
the radially outer surface of said tread belt body into
molding contact with said segments;
e. curing said tread belt body in said mold at predetermined
temperatures and pressures for a predetermined period of
time;
1. The method of making an insulated, self-retaining metallic
edge guard of the type comprising a metal channel of generaUy
U-shaped cross section having an interior and an exterior and
mner and outer legs, including beads at distal ends of the legs,
via which self-retention forces are appUed to an edge of an
object on which the edge guard is to be instaUed, and protec-
tive insulation on the interior of the channel to insulate the
metal of the channel from an edge of the object on-which the
edge guard is to be instaUed and with the exterior of the chan-
nel being exposed to view when in use, said insulated metaUic
edge guard being made from a strip of metal on one side of
which the protective insulation is applied to completely cover
said one side, said method comprising applying a protective
layer of a material different from that of said protective insula-
tion to a side of the metal strip opposite that to which the
protective insulation U appUed to thereby completely cover
said other side, roU forming the strip, including the protective
March 20. 1984
CHEMICAL
1191
insulation and the protective layer into a U-shaped cross sec-
tion of desired configuration to form said inner and outer legs
and to form said beads by outwardly reversing the distal ends
of the legs so that the protective insulation lines the entire
interior of the U-shaped channel, and the protective layer the
entire exterior except at said beads where the protective insula-
tion, instead of the protective layer, is visible on the exterior of
the roll-formed edge guard, and then when the edge guard is
put to use, removing the protective layer from the exterior of
the channel to reveal the metal of the channel to view.
ment which comprises preheating said secondary backing
fabric in the course of the running of said fabric, by a heater at
a position upstream of said pressure roll, and thereafter passing
said preheated fabric through an expander roll at a position
downstream of the heater and upstream and adjacent to said
pressure roll for opening and removing wrinkles from said
preheated fabric by the expander roll prior to the pressing
together of said fabric and said asphaltic composition-backed
carpet by said pessure roll.
4,437,917
CONTROL OF BULK IN AIR LAID HBROUS WEBS
Thomas M. Tao, Neenah, WU. and WUUam C. Bean, Lancn,
Wig., aifignort to James Riner/Dixie-Northem, Inc., Nor-
walk. Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 219,613, Dec. 24, 1980, abuidoned.
This appUcation Mar. 15, 1983, Ser. No. 475,617
Int a.3 B32B i7/00
U.S. CI. 156—296 12 Claims
l/
29
^32
'31
r3«
1. A method of increasing bulk of dry-formed fibrous webs
during their manufacture, comprising the steps of:
forming a loose web of fibers dispersed on a forming wire in
a zone under temperature and humidity conditions that
cause the loose web to have a moisture content of more
than 4% by weight;
partially drying the loose web to reduce the moisture con-
tent of the web to less than 4% by weight; and
subjecting the loose, partially dried web to compaction or
consolidation to impart some strength to the web.
4,437,919
ADHESIVE TOPCOATED POLYESTER MATERIAL AND
PROCESS FOR INCORPORATING SAME INTO RUBBER
Edward J. Powers, LouisTiUe, Ky., assignor to Fiber Industries,
Inc., Charlotte, N.C.
FUed Jun. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 391,909
Int a.J D02G 3/02. 3/36
UJS. a. 156—329 12 Claims
1. A multi-filament polyester fibrous material for incorpora-
tion into rubber which bears a lubricant topcoat comprising the
combination,
at least about 5% to about 50% by weight, based on the
weight of the topcoat, of a dissolved, active isocyanate
compound, and at least about 20% by weight, based on
the weight of the topcoat of an endcapped silicone glycol
copolymer.
10. In a process for preparing a polyester reinforced rubber
article wherein a multi-filament fibrous material is coated with
an RFL latex, is heated and a layer of rubber is applied and
cured on the thus treated fibrous material, the improvement
comprising: providing on said polyester multi-filament fibrous
material prior to coating with said RFL latex a topcoat, said
topcoat comprising the combination of:
at least about 3% to about 50% by weight, based on the
weight of the topcoat, of a dissolved active isocyanate
compound, and
at least about 20% by weight, based on the weight of the
topcoat of an endcapped silicone glycol copolymer.
4,437,918
METHOD OF MAKING A CARPET TILE
4,437,920
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCT TRANSPORTATION IN
■^uji^sr^oLtinf isi'iit:; rz:^ ss ^^^^ ^^^"^^^^^ :2:s?/to M.tsubuh, juko.
SLT-v i^ i™ ^^ Mrignors to Nippon OU gy^ KabushUd Kaisha, Nagasaki, Japan
r«-IIIn.««-«;c!f\i« ^.^n^ A« «^ «<Mii u. .. ^ FUed Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368,856
CoBtinnatioB of Ser. No. 254,044, Apr. 14, 1981, abandoned. n.t—. ..i^-i*. . -n^L i a in «Aa. >^ •»■.»
nus ^ipUcation Feb. 24/1983. Ser. No. 4^9,296 ^^"^ ^^\^nTZi^^m^7^i ' '
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 25, 1980, 55-51654; u « „ 186-406^ i n..-
May 10, 1980, 5541235 ^•^- "' »»*-*»-^ » CW»
iBt CL^ B32B 31/08, 31/26
U.S. a. 156—322
2Claims
1. In a method of making an asphaltic composition-backed
carpet tUe including feeding a carpet onto a conveyor through
a roU guider from a carpet feeding section, advancing the
conveyor with the carpet along a feedpath, directing a heated
thermoplastic asphaltic composition backing onto the carpet as
it is fed along the conveyor and wppXying it to the carpet so as
to form an asphaltic composition-baicked carpet on the con-
veyor, feeding a secondary backing fabric through a cloth
guider along its course of running from a secondary backing
fabric feed section onto the asphaltic composition-backed
carpet and pressing them together by a pressure roU to form a
laminated carpet belt material, cooling the Uuninated carpet
belt material and cutting it into selected lengths, the improve-
r
— i _d
1
1. A tire forming machine mounted on a base and including
thereon a forming drum and a transport apparatus for trans-
porting green tire or an intermediate assembly body for green
tire, the transfer apparatus including transfer means for holding
said green tire or body and movable in the axial direction of the
forming drum, a pair of circular plates which are paraUel to
each other and attached to said transfer means, a plurality of
shafts rotatably mounted on said circular plates at substantially
equal intervals in the circumferential direction and positioned
on a circle concentric with the circle of said circular plates.
1192
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
levers fixed on said shafts to pivot therewith, product-holding
means connected to said levers for holding said green tire or
body, an angular lever fixed to each of said shafts and pivotable
therewith, link members connecting said angular levers in
pairs, said angular levers and said link members being mutually
combined to form a number of parallelogram links having
mutually cooperatuve movement, and at least one driving
means for swinging said angular levers to thereby open and
close said product holding means upon said green tire or body.
4,437,921
PRESS FOR GLUING FOOTWEAR ELEMENTS
Luden Bichet, Dravel, France, assignor to Anver SJi., Maisons-
Alfort, France
FUed No?. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 440,727
Claims priority, application France, No?. 25, 1981, 81 22024
Int. a.3 BdOB 75/00
UA a. 156-475 9 Claims
ture being sufficiently low to nuceleate precipitated oxy-
gen, and
heating said wafer to a second high temperature at a rate
lower than 2' C./minute, said second high temperature
1. A press for gluing footwear elements to each other com-
prising a tank, means for supporting an article of footwear in
said tank, a flexible pocket adapted to envelope at least the
portion of said article of footwear which includes said foot-
wear elements which are to be glued to each other, wherein
the improvement comprises a jack including a cylinder and a
piston movable in said cylinder, said piston being adapted to be
moved by the application of a pressurized pneumatic fluid to
one surface of said piston, the opposite surface of said piston
communicating with a liquid supply in said tank, whereby
movement of said piston is operable to force said liquid under
pressure against said flexible pocket to cause said flexible
pocket to conform to the contour of the footwear elements
which are to be glued to each other whereby to cause said
elements to become glued to each other, and means for movmg
said piston to a retracted position when the pneumatic pressure
on said piston is relieved.
925'C
REMOVE turn
being sufficiently high to grow the precipitated oxygen
nucleated at said low temperature to a size which ensures
survival of the precipiuted oxygen in subsequent process-
ing.
4,437,922
METHOD FOR TAILORING OXYGEN PREaPITATE
PARTICLE DENSmr AND DISTRIBUnON SIUCON
WAFERS
Bernard K. BischofT, Putnam VaUey; William J. Patrick, Fish-
kill, and Thomas H. Stnidwick, Wappingers Falls, all of N.Y.,
assignors to International Business Machines Corporationi
Annonk, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,448
Int a.3 HOIL 21/322. 21/324
U.S. a. 156-603 10 Claims
1. A method for tailoring oxygen precipitate particle density
and distribution in a silicon wafer, comprising the steps of:
heating the silicon wafer to a first high temperature at a rate
higher than 10* C./minute, said first high temperature
being sufficiently high to reduce the number of pre-exist-
ing oxygen clusters,
keeping said wafer at said fust high temperature for a period
sufficient to allow outdifTusion of oxygen,
allowing said wafer to cool,
annealing said wafer at a low temperature, said low tempera-
4,437,923
MULTICOLOR PRINTING PLATE JOINING
William J. Waters, ae?eland, Ohio, assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Adminstrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
FUed Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 425^3
Int. a.3 B44C J/22; C23F 1/02; B41M J/00; B21D 39/00
U.S. a. 156-630 9 Claims
1. A method of making a plate for multicolor printing com-
prising the steps of:
(a) providing first and second plates each having a top and
bottom surface;
(b) forming in the bottom surface of said first plate patterns
of the images to be printed;
(c) forming a plurality of aperiures extending through said
fu^t plate, said aperiures being distributed within said
patterns;
(d) forming in said bottom surface of said second plate a
plurality of ink distribution channels, each channel having
a shape such as to enclose all the aperiures of a respective
pattern when the plates are juxtapositioned;
(e) forming at least one ink input pori in eiach distribution
channel;
(0 coating each ink distribution channel of said second plate
with a liquid removeable solder mask;
(g) coating said bottom surface of said second plate with
solder;
(h) pressing the bottom surface of said second plate against
the top surface of said first plate;
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1193
(i) heating said plates for a time period sufficient to fuse them
together;
(0 flowing a solder mask dissolving liquid through the porte,
aperiures and channels of said plates to remove said solder
mask whereby a solder-joined multicolor printing plate is
produced.
4,437,924
METHOD OF MAKING RNE-LINE DIE
Walter Weglin, Belle?ue, Wash., assignor to Jerobce Industries,
Inc., Redmond, Wash.
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,906
Int. a.i C23F J/02; C03C J5/00. 25/06; B44C J/22
U.S. a. 156—651 13 Claims
122
^
W^
es
^_^IS2 IS4^ T=>
1. A method for fabricating a precision die by chemical
milling the working f^ce of a^ etchable workpiece form a
plurality of raised die elcmept^ separated and bounded by a
plurality of cavities, said meth^ comprising the steps of:
a. forming an etchant-resisumt surface pattern of boundary
grooves penetrating slightly into the working face of an
etchable workpiece outwardly proximate and substan-
tially conforming to a desired configuration for die ele-
ment precursors; and,
b. selectively etching said workpiece in regions outwardly
bounded by said boundary grooves to undercut said
grooves and form recessed cavities outwardly proximate
and substantially conforming to the complementary con-
figuration of said die element precursors.
4,437 925
ETCHED-SOURCE STATIC INDUCnON TRANSISTOR
Adrian I. Cogan, Waltham, Mass., assignor to GTE Laboratories
Incorporated, Waltham, Mass.
Di?ision of Ser. No. 320,242, No?. 12, 1981. This appUcation
Sep. 12, 1983, Ser. No. 531,373
Int. a.3 HOIL 2J/306; B44C J/22; C03C J5/00; C23F J/02
U.S. a. 156—653 4 Claims
etching source grooves in said opposite-type epitaxial layer
at the location of said source windows;
depositing one-type impurities on the surface of said source
grooves;
diffusing said one-type impurities into said opposite type
epitaxial layer to form a diffused region, said diffused
region extending to form a channel to said one-type epi-
taxial layer;
removing said thin silicon dioxide layer from each of said
gate windows; and
depositing metal and patterning gate electrodes and source
electrodes in said gate windows and said source windows
respectively.
1. A method for forming a gate-source structure for a static
induction transistor, said method comprising the steps of:
growing a high resistivity epitaxial silicon layer of one con-
ductivity type on a semiconductor substrate also of said
one conductivity type;
growing a high resistivity epitaxial silicon layer of opposite
conductivity type on said one-type epitaxial layer;
forming a silicon dixode layer on said opposite-type epitaxial
layer;
opening parallel source windows and gate windows in said
silicon dioxide layer;
growing a thin silicon dioxide layer in said source windows
and said gate windows;
protecting said gate windows by photolithographic masking;
removing said thin silicon dixode layer in each of said source
windows;
removing said protective photolithographic masking from
said gate windows;
4,437,926
METAL ALLOY WTTH HIGH CATALYTIC ACTIVITY
Jean-Louis Bamabe, Chatou, France, assignor to Regie Na-
tionale des Usines Renault, Boulogne-Blllancourt, France
I>i?ision of Ser. No. 166,400, Jul. 7, 1980, Pat. No. 4,384,891.
This appUcation Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,543
Int. a.3 HOIL J/22; B22D 25/00; BOIJ 2J/J8; C25F 3/08
U.S. a. 156-654 4 QaUns
1. A method for producing an alloy consisting essentially of:
iron: 40-80% by weight
nickel: 0-40% by weight
Chromium: 0-40% by weight
carbon: 0.02-0.1% by weight
at least one platinum group metal: 0.05-2% by weight
comprising melting under vacuum or in air, said alloy having
a carbon content of between 0.02 and 0. 1% and a platinum
metal content from 0.05 to 2%, treating the resulting
product by annealing at a temperature of about 1 150* C,
then forming into thin elements such as sheets, wires, or
chips, which are subjected in turn to successive annealing
at a temperature between 1050* C. and 1 150* C. and heat-
ing again between 400* C. and 800* C. for a period of time
between 30 minutes and 10 hours producing sensitization
to intergranular corrosion; then cleansing the surface of
the alloy and subjecting to intergranular corrosion in an
acid bath of chloronitric type, producing rapid microfissu-
tation, then immersing in a 20% aqueous hydrochloric
acid for two minutes and heating in a solution of between
5% and 30% oxalic acid at a temperature between 60* and
90* C. for about two hours, then oxidizing the resulting
product at about 350* C.
4,437,927
DISSOLUTION OF METALS UTILIZING A LACTONE
Kwee C. Wong, Youngstown, Ohio, assignor to Dari Industries
Inc., Northbrook, lU.
FUed Aug. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 524,965
Int. a.J C23F 7/00; B44C J/22; C03C JS/OO 25/06
U.S. a. 156—666 21 Claims
1. A method of metal dissolution which comprises contact-
ing a metal with an aqueous solution containing from about 0.2
to about 4.5 gram moles per liter of sulfuric acid, from about
0.25 to about 8 gram moles per liter of hydrogen peroxide and
a catalytically effective amount of a lactone.
4,437,928
DISSOLUTION OF METALS UTILIZING A GLYCOL
ETHER
Kwee C. Wong, Youngstown, Ohio, auignor to Dari Industries
Inc., Northbrook, lU.
FUed Aug. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 525,070
Int. a.' C23F 7/00,- B44C J/22; C03C 75/00, 25/06
U.S. a. 156—666 19 Claims
1. A method of metal dissolution which comprises contact-
ing a metal with an aqueous solution containing from about 0.2
to about 4.5 gram moles per liter of sulfuric acid, from about
0.25 to about 8 gram moles per liter of hydrogen peroxide and
a catalytically effective amount of a glycol ether.
1194
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,929
DISSOLUnON OF METALS UTILIZING
PYRROLIDONE
Kwee C. Wong, Yoangrtown, Ohio, assignor to Dart lodnstrica
Ibc^ Nortfabrook, 01.
Filed Aug. 22, 1983, Scr. No. 525,071
IbL CL3 C23F 7/00; B44C 1/22: C303C WOO. 25/06
VS. CL 156-666 21 Claims
1. A method of metal dissolution which comprises contact-
ing a metal with an aqueous solution containing from about 0.2
to about 4.5 gram moles per liter of sulfuric acid, from about
0.25 to about 8 gram moles per Uter of hydrogen peroxide and
a catalytically effective amount of a pyrrolidone.
4,437,933
APPARATUS FOR TREATING RADIOACTIVE UQUID
WASTES
Ryozo Klkkawa, Hitachi, and Masald Takeshima, Komae, both
of Japu, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continnation of Ser. No. 238,041, Feb. 25, 1981, ^kan^wifd.
This application Jul. 16, 1982, Scr. No. 398,853
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 26, 1980, 55-23622
Int a.3 BOID 1/26. 1/28; G21F 9/08. 9/20
UA a. 159-17 R 6CIainis
4,4374)31
DISSOLUTION OF METALS
Mocnes L. Ellas, Canfield, and Walter L. Burger, Salem, both of
Ohio, assignors to Dart Industries Inc., Northbrook, 111.
FUed Aug. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 525,078
Int. a.3 C23F 1/00; IMC 1/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06
UA a. 156-666 13 ctainM
1. In a process for the dissolution of metals in which a metal
is contacted with an aqueous solution containing free chloride
or bromide ions, from about 0.2 to about 4.5 gram moles per
liter of sulfuric acid and from about 0.25 to about 8 gram moles
per Hter of hydrogen peroxide, the method of increasing the
metal dissolution rate of the solution in the presence of chlo-
ride or bromide ions to a value higher than that obtained by
such a solution free of any chloride and bromide ions, which
method comprises adding an effective amount of a diol pro-
moter having the general formula:
HO— C— CSC— C— OH
where Ri, R2, R3 and R4 can be either H, CH3, OC2H5 or
OC3H8.
4,437,932
DISSOLUTION OF METALS UTILIZING A FURAN
DERIVATIVE
Kwee C. Wong, Youngstown, Ohio, assignor to Dart Industries
Inc., Northbrook, HI.
FUed Aug. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 525,080
Int a? C23F 1/00: B44C 1/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06
UAa 156-666 23CIaims
1. A method of metal dissolution which comprises contact-
ing a metal with an aqueous solution containing from about 0.2
to about 4.5 gram moles per Uter of sulfuric acid, from about
0.25 to about 8 gram moles per Uter of hydrogen peroxide and
a catalytically effective amount of a furan.
uw
4,437,930
DISSOLUTION OF METALS UTILIZING
e-CAPROLACTAM
Kwee C. Wong, Youngstown, Ohio, assignor to Dart Industries
Inc., Northbrook, DL
Filed Aug. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 525,072
Int a.3 C23F 1/00; B44B 1/22; C03C 15/Oa 25/06
VS. a. 156-666 15 Claims
1. A method of metal dissolution which comprises contact-
ing a metal with an aqueous solution containing from about 0.2
to about 4.5 gram moles per hter of sulfuric acid, from about
0.25 to about 8 gram moles per hter of hydrogen peroxide and
a catalytically effective amount of £-caprolactam.
KMWFDI iiA
ii-:iK'
1:
2^^ ^^j?r T Tape
masTC
COMZNTIUrOR
^
<BSSSm
^ tHD lEUSE
1. An apparatus for treating radioactive liquid waste from
atomic power plant, which comprises:
a low electroconductivity liquid v^e concentrator of the
pressurized evaporation type, for e^porating a low elec-
troconductivity liquid waste with outside steam as a heat
source at high temperature,
a high electroconductivity liquid waste concentrator of the
vacuum evaporation type, for evaporating a high electro-
conductivity liquid waste with the steam generated by
evaporation of the low electroconductivity liquid waste,
a laundry liquid waste concentrator of the vacuum evapora-
tion type for evaporating a laundry liquid waste with
steam generated by evaporation of the low electroconduc-
tivity liquid waste,
means for supplying steam generated by evaporation in said
low electroconductivity liquid waste concentrator to said
high electroconductivity liquid waste concentrator as a
heat source for low electroconductivity liquid waste con-
centration,
means for supplying steam generated by evaporation in said
low electroconductivity liquid waste concentrator to said
laundry liquid waste concentrator as a heat source for
laiudry Uquid waste concentration,
a low electroconductivity liquid waste condenser for con-
densing the steam from said low electroconductivity liq-
uid waste concentrator, said high electroconductivity
liquid waste concentrator and said laundry liquid waste
concentrator,
a high electroconductivity Uquid waste condenser for con-
densing the steam from said high electroconductivity
Uquid waste concentrator,
a laundry liquid waste condenser for condensing the steam
from said laundry liquid waste concentrator, and
means for demineralization of condensed low electrocon-
ductivity liquid waste, high electroconductivity liquid
waste and laundry liquid waste.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1195
4,437,934
METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CONSISTENCY OF
TOMATO PRODUCTS
Philip E. Nelson, W. Lafayette, Ind., and Norihisa Takada,
Gumma, Japan, assignors to Purdue Research Foundation,
West Lafayette, Ind.
FUed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 417,184
Int a.3 BOID 1/00; A23L 1/212
VS. a. 159-47.1 9 Claims
to COMfMCII
INfVT
J
i
8 -1
'SSBiP
J
X
L » — j «tf1l«CT0IHTt«"}-»
I mriMcraiiiTcii 1- >o ^-v , L,
' b<3 — r— ^ 1 »ULPEII
xc-moctHIB
CONCINTUrt
"^
NMr
wurfii
1
ymvi '
V
a
I.
1. A process for manufacturing tomato products to an estab-
lished consistency standard, comprising the steps of:
introducing into a system a tomato extract feedstock having
an initial precipitate weight ratio and an initial Brix level,
measuring the initial precipitate weight ratio and initial Brix
level of the tomato extract feedstock.
calculating an expected precipitate weight ratio of the to-
mato product selected for manufacture from the tomato
extract feedstock,
computing an expected Brix level of the tomato product
selected for manufacture from the tomato extract feed-
stock, and
concentrating the tomato extract feedstock while measuring
the Brix level thereof until the expected Brix level is
achieved.
paper forming process on a paper making machine comprising
the steps of:
attatching a security device consisting of a plastic film dif-
fraction grating to one surface of a carrier web of water-
dispersible paper;
positioning the carrier paper and security device relative to
a predetermined position on a base paper web of less
porous web density than said carrier web during the depo-
sition and dewatering of said base paper web from a water
suspension of said base paper fibers; and
dispersing the carrier paper web to integrally join the secu-
rity device to said one surface of the base paper.
4,437,936
PROCESS FOR UTILIZING WASTE HEAT AND FOR
OBTAINING WATER GAS DURING THE COOLING OF
INCANDESCENT COKE
Richard A. Jung, Gummersbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Hartung, Kuhn A Co. Maschinenfabrik GmbH, Dusseldorf,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 361,053
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 27,
1981, 3112256
Int a. J ClOB 27/00. 39/02. 39/04
VS. a. 201—39 7 Claims
4,437,935
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING
SECURITY FEATURES IN PAPER
Frederick G. Crane, Jr., Dalton, Mass., assignor to Crane and
Company, Dalton, Mass.
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,850
Int. a.} D21D 3/00; D21H 5/10
VS. a. 162—103 2 Claims
1. A method for producing identifiable paper during the
1. A process for utilizing waste heat and for obtaining water
gas during the cooling of incandescent coke ejected from a
chamber oven, this process comprising two stages, in which
(a) in a first sUge, dry -cooling is eflected with a cooling gas,
wherein the cooling gas enters the lower region of a cool-
ing zone, rises by counterflow through the coke falling in
the cooling zone, thereby absorbing heat, flows out from
the cooling zone in the upper region thereof, is recooled in
a heat sink and is then cleaned, and is recirculated into the
lower region of the cooling zone, and
(b) in a second suge, at a lower coke temperature relative to
the first stage, the coke is wet-cooled with water sprayed
in a quenching zone, whereupon the cooled coke is dis-
charged via a discharge zone,
including, in the first stage according to (a), forming a mix-
ture of water gas and water vapor which is used as the
cooling gas, and wherein, in the second stage according to
(b), the water vapor formed during evaporation of the
water sprayed into the quenching zone is conveyed
through the coke, portion of said water vapor being
drawn off from there, discharged into the environment
after cleaning and/or fed back into the quenching zone
and wherein a portion of said water vapor is conveyed
through the coke into the cooling zone located above the
quenching zone and reacts with the coke to form said
mixture of water gas and water vapor.
1196
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,437,937
CONTINUOUS TRICKLE.DOWN DISTILLATION UNIT
FOR PRODUONG HYDRATED ALCOHOL
Thomas F. McGraw, 9034 Ashmeade Dr., Fairfax, Va. 22032
FUed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 327,135
Int. a.3 BOID 3/28; C07C 29/80
VJS. CL 202—160
4CIaiiiu
^V^.
4,437,938
PROCESS FOR RECOVERING ETHYLENE OXIDE
FROM AQUEOUS SOLUTIONS
VUay S. Bhise, BloomAeld, N J., and Robert Hoch, Ridgewood,
N.Y., anignora to The Halcon SD Group, Inc., New York,
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,153
Int. a.3 BOID 3/34; C07D 301/32
U.S. a. 203-14 5 Claims
c.-^
— r
Jhi,* PrtflMT*
Tl
:4
-1—
a)
26
Purilieafieii
and Bv-Pfodwcti
1. A process for recovering ethylene oxide from aqueous
solutions comprising:
(a) contacting said aqueous solution of ethylene oxide with a
solvent comprising carbon dioxide in the near-critical or
super-critical state to selectively absorb ethylene oxide
relative to water and;
(b) separating the ethylene oxide-containing carbon dioxide
of (a) from the ethylene oxide-depleted aqueous solution
and thereafter;
(c) recovering the ethylene oxide from the separated ethyl-
ene oxide-containing carbon dioxide of (b).
1. A continuous trickle-down distillation unit for producing
hydrated alcohol comprising:
means for containing a fluid mixture, said fluid mixture
including alcohol and water;
a single, compact, elongated housing operably connected to
and below said fluid mixture containing means for receiv-
ing said fluid mixture therefrom;
means situated within said elongated housing for increasing
the surface area with which said fluid mixture comes in
contact with as it passes therethrough, said surface area
increasing means being in the form of a labyrinth-like
structure made up of small fragments of material incapable
of reacting with the constituents of said fluid mixture;
an electrical heater element operably connected within the
bottom of said elongated housing for heating the interior
of said housing and said labyrinth-like structure to a pre-
determined temperature, and means operably connected
to said heater element for controlling said electrical heater
element so as to maintain said predetermined temperature,
said predetermined temperature being in the range of
170*- 180* F., whereby alcohol-predominant vapors rise in
said housing;
means in direct communication with said elongated housing
for condensing said alcohol-predominant vapors into
hydrated alcohol, said condensing means including a
chamber and a plurality of fin-like elements protruding
from said chamber for passively cooling said chamber;
means operably connected to said chamber for directing said
hydrated alcohol out of said distillation unit, said directing
means including a plate extending partially within said
chamber for receiving said hydrated alcohol and directing
said hydrated alcohol through an output line; and
means operably connected to said elongated housing for
directing remaining liquid constituents of said fluid mix-
ture out of said distillation unit, said remaining liquid
constituent directing means including means situated
within said housing in the form of a cone-shaped element
adjacent said heater element for preventing said remaining
liquid constituents of said fluid mixture from contacting
said beater element during the distillation process.
4,437,939
PROCESS FOR SEPARATING ETHYLENE OXIDE FROM
AQUEOUS SOLUTIONS
Vyay S. Bhiae, Bloomfield, N J., and Robert Hoch, Ridgewood,
N.Y., assignors to The Halcon SD Group, Inc., New York,
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 284,153, Jul. 17, 1981. This
appUcation No?. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,966
Int. CV BOID 3/34; C07D 301/32
U.S. a. 203-14 6 Claims
Hccircia Gas
24
1
)
»*«*« PfMSwrt
1
eiKytant Oittft
PuriticatiO"
Oatdt
J fftcreit woftr
Impuntist
e"« Bv - P'OducH
1. In a process for recovering ethylene oxide from aqueous
solutions wherein carbon dioxide at near-critical or super-criti-
cal conditions extracts ethylene oxide and thereafter the ex-
tracted ethylene oxide is separated from the carbon dioxide by
distillation at sub-critical conditions, the improvement com-
prising adding an amount of a gas or gases to said carbon
dioxide sufficient to provide a critical temperature for the
carbon dioxide-ethylene oxide-added gas mixture at the top of
said distillation column between 32* C. and 75* C.
4,437,940
PROCESS FOR AUTOMATIC AND CONTINUOUS
VAPORIZATION AND CONDENSATION
Robert Sussmeyer, Brussels; Alain PluTioage, Irchonwelz, and
Christian Moenaert, Brussels, all of Belgium, assignors to
Ateliers Sussmeyer SPRL, Belgium
FUed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,223
Claims priority, appUcatioB Firaacc Jnn. 4, 1981, 81 11054
lot CL^ FOID 9/02
U.S. a 203—49 4 Claims
1. An automatic and continuous vaporization and condensa-
tion process for the fractionation of a mixture comprising at
least one liquid volatile fraction comprising the steps of contin-
uously circulating a vapor of the volatile fraction, superheating
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1197
said continuously circulating vapor, injecting said superheated
vapor into the mixture to be fractionated to which it releases its
superheated heat for vaporizing at least one liquid fraction
condensing and collecting a portion of the vapor of volatile
fraction and controlling the ratio of condensed and recircu-
lated volatile fractions so that a substantially constant amount
thereof is continuously circulated and superheated.
4437942
METHODS FOR PRODUCING PRINTING PLATES, AND
PRINTING PLATES PRODUCED THEREBY
Max DMtwyler, Langenthal, Switzerland, aaaignor to MDC Max
IMtwyler AG, Bleienbach, Switzcrlaod
ContinuatiOD-in-part of Ser. No. 279383, Jul. 1, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337^61
Qaims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Jul. 10, 1980,
5290/80
lot a.J C25D 1/20. 5/00
U.S. a. 204—6 62 Claims
l>S>TNQk»
1. In a method of producing a wrap-on printing plate with
first and second clamping bars along opposite sides thereof for
installation on a printing cylinder, the improvement compris-
ing in combination the steps of:
providing a layer defining a printing plate body;
forming from marginal portions of said layer, along opposite
sides thereof, first and second foundations for said first and
second clamping bars, respectively;
providing said first and second clamping bars on said first
and second foundations by interatomic bonding between
said first and second foundations and said first and second
clamping bars, respectively; and
finishing said printing plate body and clamping bars.
4,437,941
SEPARATION OF HYDROCARBON AND ALCOHOL
AZEOTROPIC MIXTURES BY DISTILLATION WITH
ANHYDROUS AMMONIA
Stanley J. Marwil, Bartlesville, OkUi., assignor to PhilUps Pe-
troleum Company, BartlesviUe, Okla.
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 376,075
Int. a.3 BOID 3/36; C07C 7/06. 29/82
U.S. a. 203—50 15 aaims
'"'t'
t
-4tC
-IOC
li^ c:
4,437,943
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BONDING METAL
WIRE TO A BASE METAL SUBSTRATE
Alexander F. Beck, Hamdcn, and Joseph Winter, New Haven,
both of Conn., aasignors to OUn Corporation, New Havea,
Conn.
FUed Jul. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 167,178
Int. a.i C25D 5/02. 5/08
U.S. a. 204—16 20 Claims
-r-aVr^s
^a
1. A process for separating an azeotropic mixture compris-
ing a hydrocarbon and an alcohol which comprises:
adding to the azeotropic mixture an effective amount of
anhydrous ammonia and, under distillation conditions,
removing a vapor phase comprising the hydrocarbon,
ammonia and no more than a minor amount of the alcohol,
and removing a liquid phase comprising the major portion
of the alcohol.
1. An apparatus for bonding a substrate to a lead wire com-
prising:
means for supporting said substrate and said lead wire in an
overlappiing relationship and in physical contact with
each other; and
means for electrodepositing a spot of material over at least a
portion of said substrate and said lead wire to fuTnly bond
said physically contacting substrate and lead wire.
1198
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M37,944
PROCESS OF MAKING LON&UFE THIN METAL
PLATE FOR AUTOMOBILE BODIES
Roberto Bmiio, and Mafrimo Mcmmi, both of Rome, Italy,
■MigBon to Zincrokaid S.pjL, Toria, Italy
OMtinoation-iB-part of Ser. No. 173,234, JaL 28, 1980,
•bawloaed. This appUcatioa Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,112
lat a.3 C25D U/3%
UA a 204-27 5Chtas
1. A process for producing sheet steel for long life motor
vehicle bodies, comprising the steps of:
depositing a layer of zinc on only one face of the sheet steel,
and
thereafter simultaneously applying to both faces of the sheet
steel a chrome-chromic oxide coating, said coating being
applied by electrodeposition from an aqueous solution
comprising, per liter: from 0.05 to 1 ml of H2SO4 at 96%-
from 20 to 100 g of CrOj; and from 0.5 to 3 g of CrFa. '
4437945
PROCESS FOR ANODIZING ALUMINUM FOIL
Mary A. Sells, Seymour, and John W. Scott, Clinton, both of
Tenn., assignors to Sprague Electric Company, North Adams,
Mass.
FUed Aug. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 528,182
Int. a.3 C25C 11/08, 11/12. 11/16
UA a. 204-35 N sctatas
1. In an improved process for electrochemically anodizing
aluminum electrolytic capacitor foil including the formation of
a hydrous oxide layer on said foil before anodizing, then anod-
jzmjg said foil and repeatedly interrupting said anodizing to
subject the foil to a stabilizing treatment in a mildly alkaline
borate bath of at least 80* C, the improvement comprising
carrying out said anodizing in a bath containing monosodium
phosphate and having a pH of 3.5 to 5.0.
mg/m2, nickel in an amount of 1 to 50 mg/m2, cobalt in an
amount of 1 to 500 mg/m^, copper in an amount of I to
100 mg/m^, and molybdenum in an amount of 1 to 500
mg/m2, by means of cathodic electrolytic decomposition
applied to an aqueous solution containing the correspond-
ing metal salt, to such an extent that portions of said de-
° '0 20 30 40 50 60
WEIGHT OF NICKEL DEPOSIT LAYEB (m,/m'.
scaled surface of said steel strip are covered by said metal-
he nuclei and the remaining portions of said steel strip
surface are free from said metallic nuclei and are exposed
to the atmosphere; and
immersing said steel strip having said metallic nuclei in an
aqueous solution of a phosphate to form a phosphate
coating on said steel strip surface.
4437 948
COPPER PLATING PROCEDURE
Yutaka Okinaka, Madison; Craig G. Smith, North Plainfleld,
and Uwrence E. Smith, Plainfleld, aU of N J., assignors to
BeU Telephone Uboratories, Incorporated, Murray HiU, N.J.
FUed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,266
Int a.J C25D 3/38
MS. a. 204-52 R jj ctal^
4,437 946
STABILIZATION OF ALUMINUM ELECTROLYTIC
CAPACITOR FOIL
Walter J. Bernard, WiUiamstown, Mass., aasignor to Sprague
Electric Company, North Adams, Mass.
FUed Aug. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 528,183 -
Int. a.3 C25C 11/08. 11/12. 11/18
UAa.204-35N 4 cuims
1. A process for stabilizing anodized capacitor foU compris-
ing passing said foil from an ariodization step through a stobiliz-
mg bath containing a borate solution at a temperature of at
least 80* C. and at a pH of 8.5 to 9.5 for from 2 to 8 minutes, and
reanodizmg, the cycle of said stabilizing and reanodizing being
performed at least twice.
n in
UOK CMKIIT OCniTr (■«/»>)
mo
4,437,947
COLD ROLLED STEEL STRIP HAVING AN EXCELLENT
PHOSPHATIZING PROPERTY AND PROCESS FOR
PRODUCING THE SAME
Takao Saito, Himeji; Jyun-ichi Morita, Chita; KUti^i Hiroac,
Tatsuno, and Akitosi Kato, Tokai, aU of Japan, assignors to
Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
ContinnatiOB of Ser. No. 235,734, Feb. 18, 1981, abandoned.
This appUcation Sep. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 418,382
Claims priority, appUcatioa Japan, Feb. 21, 1980, 55-20851
Int a,J C25D 5/44
UAa204-35R 5 ctaims
1. A process for producing a cold-rolled steel strip having an
excellent bonding property with a corrosion-resistant paint
coating, comprising the steps of:
descaling at least one surface of a cold-rolled steel strip
substrate to such an extent that the surface becomes sub-
stantially free from carbonaceous and oxide substances;
forming metallic nuclei scattered on said descaled surface of
said cold-rolled steel strip substrate by depositing at least
one transition elementary metal selected from the the
group consisting of manganese in an amount of 5 to 300
1. A process for electroplating copper including the step of
passing current through an anode, electroplating bath and
cathode with a given current density at the surface of the
anode characterized in that the surface of the anode consists of
active oxide, said active oxide consisting of oxide of two met-
als, iridium and tantalum in which the composition of the oxide
of two metals range from 20 to 90 mole percent iridium, re-
mainder tantalum.
4,437,949
ELECTROLYSIS OF TIN COMPLEXES
Frank S. HoUand, Haacl Grove Stockport, England, assignor to
Manchem, Limited, Manchester, England
FUed Jan. 6, 1983, Ser. No. 456,317
Clafans priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jan. 7, 1982,
8200354
Int a.3 C25C 5/02
U.S. a 204-59 M 13 Claims
1. An electrolytic method for the separate recovery of ele-
mental tin and of an organic 'onium compound of the formula
Cat+X- from a water-insoluble Cat+ halogenotin complex
produced as a by-product in the manufacture of organotin
halides by the direct reaction of tin with an organic halide in
the presence of said Cat +X- compound, wherein Cat+ repre-
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1199
sente a positively-charged organic cation and X - represents an
inorganic anion, which method comprises passing an electric
current through an electrolyte system between an anode which
about 25 to 125 microns and consisting of both reinforcing
members and sacrificial members.
[
is solely in contact with an aqueous anolyte and a cathode
which is solely in conUct with a water immiscible catholyte
containing said water-insoluble complex.
4,437,950
METHOD OF CONTROLLING ALUMINUM
ELECTROLYTIC CELLS
Yojl Arita, and Yuzo Seo, both of Yokohama, Japan, auignors to
Itsubishi KeUdnzoku Kogyo KabushUd Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,781
Int a.i C25C 3/06, 3/20
U.S. a. 204-67 6aaims
1. A method for controlling an aluminum electrolytic cell
comprising the steps of detecting an increase or decrease in the
quantity of alumina presenting in the bath or metal in said
electrolytic cell in the solid sute by calculating the difference
between the quantity of alumina supplied to said electrolytic
cell during an interval between an instant at which a previous
anode effect has occurred or was anticipated to occur and an
instant at which a present anode effect occurs or is anticipated
to occur, and the quantity of alumina consumed during said
interval, and increasing or decreasing the quantity of electric
power supplied to said electric cell corresponding to the result
of said detection.
4,437,951
MEMBRANE, ELECTROCHEMICAL CELL, AND
ELECTROLYSIS PROCESS
Thomas C. Bissot, Newark, Del.; Walter G. Grot, Chadds Ford,
Pa., and Paul R. Resnlck, WUmlngton, Del., assignors to E. I.
Du Pont dc Nemours A Co., WUmlngton, Del.
Continuatioa-ln-part of Ser. No. 330,606, Dec. 15, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuatioa-in-part of Ser. No. 319,991,
Not. 12, 1981, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 225,641, Jan. 16, 1981, abandoned. This appUcation Dec. 21,
1982, Ser. No. 451.991
Int a.J C25B 1/34. 13/04. 13/08
U.S. a. 204—98 82 Claims
1. A membrane which is impermeable to hydraulic flow of
liquid, which comprises at least two layen of fluorinated poly-
mer which have — COOR or — S2W ftinctional groups, where
R is lower alkyl and W is F or CI, adjacent said layers being in
adherent contact with one another, and a web of support
material embedded therein, there being at least a first said layer
of polymer whose functional groups are —COOR functional
groups and a second said layer of polymer whose functional
groups are —COOR or — SO2W functional groups, each said
polymer with —COOR groups having an equivalent weight of
770 to 1250, and any said polymer with — SO2W groups hav-
ing an equivalent weight of 900 to 1400, the total thickneu of
said at least two layers of fluorinated polymer used in prepara-
tion of said membrane being in the range of about SO to 250
microns, said web of support material having a thickness of
4,437,952
COEXTRUDED MULTILAYER CATION EXCHANGE
MEMBRANES
Roger A. Smith, Kennett Square, and Michael S. Withers, Laad-
enberg, both of Pa., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours A
Co., Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 336,849, Jan. 4, 1982,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 298,600,
Sep. 2, 1981, abandoned, which Is a continuatioB of Ser. No.
225,653, Jan. 16, 1981, abandoned. This applicatioB Oct. 25,
1982, Ser. No. 436,422
Int. a.J C25B 1/34, 13/02
U.S. a. 204-98 23 Gaims
1. A process for the preparation of a multilayer cationic ion
exchange membrane by heating at least two subsuntially in-
compatible meit-fabricable fluorinated polymers containing
pendant side chains having functional groups selected from
sulfonyl and carboxyl to a temperature above the melting point
of the polymers, bringing the molten polymers into conuct
while each is at a temperature above the melting point of the
polymer, coextruding the polymen into a composite film,
cooling the resulting composite to a temperature below the
melting points of each of the films, and subsequently convert-
ing the functional groups to ionizable functional groups.
4,437,953
PROCESS FOR SOLUTION CONTROL IN AN
ELECTROLYTIC ZINC PLANT QRCUTT
OUver M. G. Newman, Moonah; David J. Palmer, Kia^toa
Beach, and Robert V. Pammenter, UndisAune, all of Austra-
lia, auignors to Electrolytic Zinc Company of AustraUuia
Limited, Melbourne, Australia
Filed May 18, 1982, Ser. No. 379.491
Int. a.3 C25C 1/16
U.S. a. 204—119 13 Claims
1. In a process for controlling the water balance and the
concentration of impurity (I) in an electrolytic zinc plant cir-
cuit in which zinc is precipitated from an aqueous solution (A)
containing zinc sulphate using a compound (R) conuining zinc
oxide as the precipitant in a selective zinc precipiution (SZP)
process plant, thereby producing precipiutcd solids (S) con-
taining basic zinc sulphate and a zinc depleted solution (Y), the
solids (S) being returned to the said circuit, and where the
impurity I comprises at least one member of the group magne-
sium, manganese, chloride, sodium, and potassium, the im-
provement which comprises reducing the volume of zinc
depleted solution Y returned daily to the said circuit in associa-
tion with the solids S by using a compound R which has an
average particle size in the range of S to 150 ^m.
4,437,954
FUELS PRODUCTION BY PHOTOELECTROLYSIS OF
WATER AND PHOTOOXIDATION OF SOLUBLE
BIOMASS MATERIALS
Anthony F. SammeUs, NaporrUls, and Michael R. St. Joha,
Giicago, both of U., aasipMn to lastltate of Gas Twhaology.
Chicago. lU.
FUad Jan. 19. 1981, Sar. No. 278,378
Int a.J C25B 1/04, 15/08; BOIJ 19/08
U.S. a. 204-129 32 Claims
1. A proceu for fuels production by photoelectrolysis of
water and photooxidation of water soluble biomass product
avoiding molecular oxygen evolution comprising:
passing an aqueous electrolyte comprising oxidizable biomau
product selected from the group consisting of monosaccha-
rides, polysaccharides, lignins, their partially oxidized prod-
ucts, and mixtures thereof in contact with both electrodes of
a plurality of solid photochemical diodes of the type selected
from the group consisting of Schottky-type metalized appro-
1200
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
priately doped p-type semiconductor, Schottky-type metal-
ized appropriately doped n-type semiconductors, appropri-
ately doped p-n type semiconductors, and mixture thereof,
said oxidizable biomass product oxidizing more cathodically
than oxygen and having a decomposition potential more
negative than said semiconductor;
-X
h^
OXIBiZtO
•lOHXM Mower
component comprising the steps of selectively etching a major
portion of the brittle component from the exposed surfaces of
the composite, sufficiently peening the exposed surfaces of the
composite to essentially deplete the latter of the brittle metal
component and to spread the relatively malleable matrix metal
on the exposed surfaces, and thereafter chemically removing
residual particulates of the brittle component from the exposed
surface so as to provide a surface on the composite consisting
essentially of the malleable matrix metal for reception of an
adherent plating of the corrosion resisUnt material.
4 437 957
CATHODIC OR ANODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM AND
METHOD FOR INDEPENDENTLY PROTECTING
DIFFERENT REGIONS OF A STRUCTURE
Jonathan P. Freeman, Dorset, Ohio, auignor to Freeman Indus-
tries, Inc., Dorset, Ohio
FUed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,298
Int. a.3 C23F 13/00
U.S. a. 204-147 23aiiiiis
optically illuminating said semiconductor portion(s) of said
photochemical diodes producing hydrogen as the cathodic
reaction of said photochemical diode and producing oxi-
dized biomass product as the anodic reaction of said photo-
chemical diode;
removing molecular hydrogen from said electrolyte; and
separately removing oxidized biomass product from said elec-
trolyte.
4,437 955
COMBINED AC AND DC ETCHING OF ALUMINUM
FOIL
Jesse S. Shaffer, Columbia, S.C, assignor to U.S. Philips Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 5, 1983, Ser. No. 510,530
Int a.J C25F 3/04
VS. a. 204-129.4 4 Qaims
1. A process for the electrolytic etching of aluminum capaci-
tor foil comprising pre-etching said foil by immersing said foil
in a first aqueous electrolyte bath containing, by weight, from
1-6% of HCl, 0-2% of H3P04and 0-2% of HNO3 while being
subjected to an AC of a current density of 0.1-2.0 amps/cm'
and a frequency of 15-100 Hertz while said first electrolyte
bath is maintained at a temperature of 30*-60* C. until a loss of
weight of said foil of at least about 0.05 mg/cm2 is achieved
and then, without removing the HCl from said foil, etching
said foil by immersing said foil in a second aqueous electrolyte
bath containing, by weight, 18-26% of NaCl and either
0.3-2% of Na2S04 or 1-4% of boric acid while being sub-
jected to DC of a current density of 2-5 amps/cm^ while said
second electrolyte bath is maintained at a temperature of about
80*- 100* C. until a total loss of weight of said foil of at least
about 7 mg/cm^ is achieved.
4,437,956
METHOD FOR PREPARING SURFACES OF METAL
COMPOSITES HAVING A BRTITLE PHASE FOR
PLATING
Cameron W. Coates, Knoxrille, and Thomas J. Wilson, Clinton,
both of Tenn., assignors to The United Stetes of America as
represented by the United States Department of Energy,
Washington, D.C.
FUed May 19, 1982, Ser. No. 379,799
Int a.3 C23F 1/02; C25F 3/08; C25D 5/38
VS. a. 204-129J5 4 Claims
1. A method for preparing the surfaces of a two-phased
naetal composite for a plating with a corrosion-resistant mate-
rial when the composite is formed of a relatively brittle refrac-
tory metal or carbide particulate component in a matrix of
metal of greater maUeability than the brittle metal or carbide
1. A system for protecting a structure immersed in an elec-
trolyte using at least two protection units located adjacent to
different regions of the structure comprising:
a first protection unit comprising:
first means for applying a continuously adjustable rectified
alternating current voltage between the structure and at
least a first electrode which is immersed in the electro-
lyte and spaced apart from the structure;
a first reference cell located in the electrolyte to produce
a direct current voltage between the first reference cell
and the structure;
first measuring means coupled to the first reference cell to
measure the potential between the first reference cell
and the structure; and
first control means coupled between said first measuring
means and said first applying means for continuously
adjusting said first applying means to control the level
of the rectified alternating current voltage applied by
said first applying means in accordance with the level of
the potential measured by said first measuring means;
and
a second protection unit comprising:
second means for applying a continuously adjustable recti-
fied alternating current voltage between the structure
and at least a second electrode which is immersed in the
electrolyte and spaced apart from the structure;
a second reference ceU located in the electrolyte to pro-
duce a direct current voltage between the second refer-
ence ceU and the structure;
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1201
second measuring means coupled to said second reference
cell to measure the potential between said second refer-
ence cell and the structure; and
second control means coupled between said second mea-
suring means and said second applying means for con-
tinuously adjusting said second applying means to con-
trol the level of the rectified alternating current voltage
applied by said applying means in accordance with the
level of potential measured by said second measuring
means,
wherein the first and second protection units are essentially
independent of one another in their operation and are
located adjacent to different regions of the protected
structure so that the level of alternating current voluge
applied between the structure and the first electrode and
the structure and the second electrode will be indepen-
dently established by the first and second control means in
accordance with the respective potentials measured by
said first and second measuring means.
ing of benzophenone compounds represented by a for-
mula;
4,437 958
DEVICE AND METHOD FOR SEPARAHNG OXYGEN
ISOTOPES
Stephen D. Rockwood, and Robert K. Sander, both of Los
Alamos, N. Mex., assignors to The United Sutes of America
as represented by the United States Department of Energy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Jan. 11, 1978, Ser. No. 868,586
Int. a.3 SOU 19/12
U.S. a. 204—157.1 R 17 Gaims
J^
k>r siKMAUM en.1
:^
"OV> CILt
iMMItTI
MIRIIOII
10. A method for separating isotopes of oxygen in oxygen
gas, which comprises the steps of:
a. generating laser radiation at approximately 193 nm;
b. filtering said laser radiation, to produce interaction radia-
tion approximately coincident with dissociative absorp-
tion bands of the oxygen isotope to be separated and
preferentially absorbed thereby;
c. irradiating the oxygen gas with said interaction radiation
to preferentially photodissociatc oxygen molecules con-
taining the oxygen isotope to be separated in the oxygen
gas thereby producing oxygen atoms enriched in te oxy-
gen isotope to be separated; and
d. combining said oxygen atoms with a scavenger to form a
product separable from the oxygen gas and enriched in the
oxygen isotope to be separated.
II
4,437 959
PHOTOPOLYMERIZABLE COMPOSITION BASED ON
EPOXY COMPOUND
Shuzi Hayase, Kawasaki, and Shuichi Suzuki, Yokohama, both
of Japan, auignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushikl Kai*
sha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 421,733
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 30, 1981, 56-153746
Int. a.3 C08F 2/50; C08G 59/68
U.S. a. 204—159.11 12 Qaims
1. A photopolymerizable composition comprising:
an epoxy compound;
a curing catalyst including at least one aluminum compound
having at least one organic radical directly bonded to the
aluminum atom, and at least one a-ketosilyl compound;
and
at least one photosensitizer selected from the group consist-
(where each R is independently a halo group, an alkyl
group, an aromatic group or a substituted aromatic group,
an n is an integer from 0 to 5). and thioxanthone com-
pounds represented by a formula:
(where R and n have the same meanings as above).
4 437 960
METHOD FOR THE CROSSLINKING OF
CATHODICALLY DEPOSITABLE COATING AGENTS
Hans-Gwirg Zengel, KleinwalUtadt; Hilde Kerstcn, Erienbach,
and Helmut Miigerlcin, Obemburg, aU of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Akzo, N.V., Amhara, Netherlands
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,562
Qaimi priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 17,
1980, 3047525
Int. a.' C25D 13/06. 13/10
U.S. a 204-181 C 16 Claims
1. Method for the crosslinking of cathodically deposiuble
coating agents, optionally containing pigment, dyestufT. filler,
solvent, varnish adjuvant or additional crosslinking compo-
nents, based upon a water-soluble or dispersible nitrogen based
cationic resin, at least partially present as salt, comprising
contacting a cationic resin having a molecular weight of at
least 1000, containing 2 to 20 equivalenu of double bonds per
1000 g with at least one member selected from the group
consisting of sulfur, sulfur donor compounds and mixtures
thereof as vulcanization accelerators, thereby obtaining a coat-
ing mixture, electrophoretically depositing said coating mix-
ture onto an object, and hardening at temperatures above 120*
C.
4,437,961
METHOD FOR SEQUENTULLY PROCESSING A
MULTI-LEVEL INTERCONNECT ORCUIT IN A
VACUUM CHAMBER
Donald E. Routh, and Gian C. Sharma, both of Huntsilllc, Ala.,
assignors to The United Sutes of America as represented by
the Administrator of the National Aeronautics and Space
Administration, Washington, D.C.
FUed Aug. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 409,679
Int. a.J C23C 15/00
VS. a. 204—192 EC 7 Claims
1. A method for processing multi-level interconnections for
microelectronic circuits comprising:
providing a processed wafer device having a first meul
contact layer, an insulating layer over said meul contact
layer, and a photo resist pattern applied over said insulat-
ing layer defining a via to be formed in a subsequent step;
providing a vacuum chamber;
providing an RF sputtering means and DC mangetron sput-
tering means arranged in operable position for sputtering
in said vacuum chamber;
placing said processed wafer device in said chamber and
sequentially performing the following steps in said vac-
uum chamber without exposure to the atmosphere;
1202
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
forming said via by etching through said insulating layer of
the wafer device according to said photo resist pattern by
means of RF sputtering;
removing any remaining photo resist on said wafer device by
utilizing RF sputtering while said wafer device remains
continuously in said vacuum chamber;
cleaning said wafer device and removing remaining oxide
from the wafer device after removing the photo resist by
r r
lib:
II L.
ot:a
oooo
°z
Kj\^\y\^
at least one fixed stator and at least one rotatably mounted
rotor,
drive means for rotating the rotor adapted to be driven by a
flowing fluid,
a pair of fued electrodes extending across said interior
chamber,
a matrix of modules, each module comprising bistable mag-
netic means having a reversing polarity when exposed to
an increasing magnetic field and having respective posi-
tive and negative leads, affixed to one of said rotor and
stator and magnetic field generating means provided on
the other of said rotor and stator, and
circuit means coupling said positive and negative leads of
said modules to respective ones of said electrodes;
whereby upon a fluid being caused to flow through said
interior chamber, said drive means effect rotation, of said
rotor with respect to said stator whereupon said modules
are exposed to continuous excursions in magnetic field
strength to generate a voltage which is impressed across
said electrodes to electrolyze water coming into contact
with the same.
sputtering said wafer device with said RF sputtering
means while said wafer device is continously processed in
said vacuum chamber; and
depositing a layer of interconnect material on the wafer
device in place while continuously in said vacuum cham-
ber by means of magnetron sputtering, thereby filling said
via to make electrical connection with said metal contact
layer.
4,437,962
DIAMONDLIKE FLAKE COMPOSITES
Bmce A. Banks, Ohnsted Township, Cuyahoga County, Ohio,
■MigDor to The United SUtes of America as represented by
the Admioistrator of the National Aeronautics and Space
AdministratioB, Washington, D.C.
FUed May 17, 1983, Ser. No. 495,381
Lit CL' C23C 15/00
U.S. a 204-192 C 18 Claims
1. A method of making a composite material comprising the
steps of
depositing carbon on a surface,
removing flakes of said carbon from said surface, and
mixing said flakes with a matrix material to form the com-
posite material.
4,437,963
APPARATUS FOR ELECTROLYZING WATER
DsTld R. Yeoman, 869 Concourse Village West, Bronx, N.Y.
10451
FUed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,812
Int CL^ C25B 1/04. 15/08; P03B 13/10. 13/12
\3S. a 204-229 iQ claims
4437,964
ASSEMBLY FOR SPOT* FEEDING ALUMINA TO AN
ELECTROLYTIC TANK FOR THE PRODUCnON OF
ALUMINUM
Jean-Louis Gerphagnon, and Qaude Wolter, both of St. Jean De
Maurienne, France, assignors to Aluminium Pechlney, St.
Jean de Maurienne, France
FUed May 19, 1983, Ser. No. 496,244
Chdms priority, application France, May 27, 1982, 82 09700
Int. a.3 C25C 3/14. 3/22
U.S. a. 204-245 4 Claims
4. A system for spot feeding alumina into a tank for produc-
ing aluminum by electrolysis of alumina dissolved in molten
cryolite, comprising; a hopper over the tank, crust breaking
means for malcing a hole in the crust of solidified electrolyte,
which covers the surface of the tank in normal operation, and
alumina feed control means for feeding controlled doses of
alumina into the hole, said hopper having a bottom aperture for
discharge of the alumina, an impervious case positioned verti-
cally in said hopper, said case having an open upper end sub-
stantially at the level of the upper portion of the hopper, said
case, in spaced relation below the open upper end, having two
substantially parallel depending branches, a first branch down-
1. Apparatitt for the electrolysis of water, comprising: wardly opening outside the hopper, and the second branch
an elongated tube; opening inside the hopper, in the immediate vicinity of the
"^iT^ ^ assembly provided at one end of said tube aperture for the discharge of alumina, the crust breaking means
definmg an mterior chamber constituting an extension of being positioned detachably in the first branch of the case, and
said tube, said electrolysis assembly including. the alumina feed means being positioned detachably in the
MUtKlH
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1203
second branch of the case, and a support overlying and gener-
ally sealing the open upper end of the case, the crust breaking
means and the alumina feed means being fixed to said support
with the support being common to the feed means and the
crust breaking means, said support, feed means, and crust
breaking means being removable from the hopper as a unit.
4,437,965
REINFORCED LEAD ANODE FOR THE ELECTROLYTIC
PRODUCnON OF ZINC FROM SULPHATE SOLUTION
AND PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION THEREOF
NoSl Dreullr, Alain Van Ceulen, and Claude Enscbe, all of
Donai, France, anignors to Compagnie Royale Asturienne dcs
Mines, Bmssels, Belgium
FUed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,195
Claims priority, appUcation Fraoce, Mar. 18, 1981, 81 05396
Int a.' C25B 11/00
U.S. a. 204-290 F 7 Claims
1. In a lead anode for producing zinc from aqueous solutions
of zinc sulphate, the improvement wherein said lead anode
comprises a thin, generally flat reinforcing member and an
active part comprising argentiferous lead coated on said rein-
forcing member, said reinforcing member being made of a
metal selected from the group consisting of titanium and zirco-
nium, and said argentiferous lead coating comprising a layer on
each side of said reinforcing member, the two layers being
joined along their peripheral edges and the total thickness of
the two layers being greater than the thickness of said reinforc-
ing member.
surfaces and being of a pre-determined thickness posi-
tioned between said membranes;
(e) solution intake means associated with said chamber;
(0 solution evacuation means associated with said chamber
and at a distance from said intake means;
(g) said fractionating chamber including a plurality of
spaced parallel strips for dividing said chamber into a
plurality of compartmenu of subsUntially equal volume,
said strips having a thickness equal to said chamber thick-
ness adapted for maintaining said membranes said pre-
determined thickness apart;
(h) said solution intake means including a first compartment
4,437,966
SPUTTERING CATHODE APPARATUS
Lawrence L. Hope, Stow, and Ernest A. Davey, Peabody, both of
Mass., assignors to GTE Products Corporation, Stamford,
Conn.
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,958
Int a.3 C23C 15/00
U.S. a 204-298 5 Claims
1. In a sputtering cathode apparatus for the deposition of a
thin film on a substrate which is moved relative to the appara-
tus and including planar sputtering means and means for excit-
ing the planar sputtering means, the improvement comprising
a sputtering cathode target associated with said sputtering
means, said target having a predetermined plasma sputtering
area in the form of a closed convoluted electron path defining
a target area larger than the planar area of the substrate, said
substrate motion being confmed to an area within said defined
target area, and said predetermined plasma sputtering area
including multiple plasma legs separated by non-emissive re-
gions therebetween.
associated with said first surface and having a depth less
than said chamber thickness and spanning said plurality of
said strips for distributing said solution to said compart-
ments;
(i) said solution evacuation means including a second com-
partment associated with said second surface and having a
depth less than said chamber thickness and spanning said
plurality of said strips for evacuating said solution; and,
0) said chamber having partition elements located on one
hand along one side of said chamber to separate said intake
means from said evaucation means and on the other hand
along the opposite side for the purpose of bounding the
evacuation means in the vicinity of the first membrane.
4,437,967
APPARATUS FOR ELECTROPHORETICALLY
FRACnONATING A SOLUTION
Victor Sanchez, RamomrUle-Saiot-Agne; Patrick Espenan, Tou-
loose; Ernest Casademont Montgiscard, and J. Pierre La-
fUUc, Saint-Orens, aU of France, assignors to Centre NatioDal
de la Recherche Sdeatifiqae, Paris, France
FUed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,408
Claims priority, appUcatioB France, No?. 7, 1980, 80 23952
lot a? BOID 13/02
U.S. CL 204—301 10 Claims
1. An electrophoretic fractionating apparatus for separating
solutions containing dissolved substances, in particular solu-
tions containing proteins, comprising:
(a) a frame;
(b) first and second opposed electrodes mounted to said
frame and extending therefrom and including means for
generating an electric field between said electrodes;
(c) first and second opposed semi-permeable membranes,
each of said membranes being adjacent one of said elec-
trodes;
(d) a fractionating chamber having first and second parallel
4.437,968
BOILER APPARATUS
Robert H. EUiott, Jr., Fort Washington, Pa., assignor to Zcrpol
Corporation, Fort Washington, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 185^50, Sep. 10. 1980. which U
a division of Ser. No. 65,816, Aug. 13, 1979. abandoned, which is
a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 907,190, May 18, 1978,
abandoned. This appUcation Dec. 10. 1981. Ser. No. 329,514
Int a.J BOID 13/02: C02F 1/02
U.S. a. 204—301 1 Claim
1. Apparatus for use in treatment of wastewater effluent
from an industrial process wherein a steam component, a useful
industrial chemical, and a treated water stream having a low
concentration of impurities is generated from wastewater fed
to said apparatus, comprising: boiler means for receiving and
heating said wutewater under pressure to produce an impure
concentrate and a steam component, said impure concentrate
1204
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
comprising a boiler dissolved solids containing component
substantially free of suspended solids and a boiler sludge com-
ponent containing suspended solids; bolwdown means having
first means communicating with said boiler means for remov-
ing said sludge component, said blowdown means further
including means for removing said sludge from said first
means; and second means for removing said dissolved solids
containing component from said boiler means and for treating
said dissolved solids containing component to form said treated
water stream and a useful industrial chemical wherein said
second means further includes (A) controller means for mea-
suring the conductivity of said dissolved solids containing
component and in response to said conductivity withdrawing
said dissolved solids containing component from said boiler
means, (B) means for controlling the rate of flow of said dis-
solved solids containing component withdrawn from said
boiler means in response to said controller means, (C) third
means having a central chamber for receiving said flow of said
dissolved solids containing component, end chambers defined
by ion-permeable membranes separating said central chamber
from said end chambers, said end chambers containing elec-
trodes, and means for flowing a direct current from the elec-
trodes transversely through said membranes and said cham-
bers, said third means for diluting the concentration of said
component entering said central chamber to form said treated
water stream and for forming an industrial chemical in said end
chambers, (D) means for introducing said dissolved solids
containing component into said central chamber and (E) means
for removing said treated water stream from said central cham-
ber and said industrial chemical from said end chambers.
connected to said conductive layer, and a fusible link con-
nected in series with said electrical conductor.
4,437,970
DEVICE FOR DETERMINING IONIC ACnVITY
Masao KiUUinu; Otunn Scshimoto; Kikuo Kubotera, and Akin
Yamaguchi, all of Scitanu, Japan, assigDora to Figi Photo
Film Co., LtiL, Kanagawa, Japan
FUcd Jun. 2, 1983, Ser. No. 500,600
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 2, 1982, 57-94575
Int a.J GOIN 27/46, 27/58
MS. a. 204—412 19 Claims
4,437,969
OFFSET-GATE CHEMICAL-SENSITIVE nELD-EFFECT
TRANSISTORS (OG-CHEMFETS) WITH
ELECTROLYTICALLY-PROGRAMMABLE
SELECTIVITY
Arthur K. CoWngton, Newcastle upon Tyne, and Alastair Sib-
bald, Whitiey Bay, both of England, assignors to Coming
Glass Works, Coming, N.Y.
FUed Apr. 8, 1982, Set. No. 366,721
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 9, 1981,
8111198
lot a.3 C12Q 1/00: GOIN 27/46
U.S. a. 204—403 8 Claims
a
1. In a device for determining ionic activity composed of
plural pairs of solid electrodes each pair having an ion-selec-
tive layer selectively responsive to a specific predetermined
ion as the outermost layer of the solid electrodes and one
porous bridge formed thereon for achieving, after supplying a
test solution and a reference solution to said pairs of solid
electrodes, the electrical conduction between both electrodes
in each said pair by the permeation of the solutions through the
porous bridge, the improvement comprising said plural pairs of
solid electrodes, each electrode pair having one electrode on
each of two sides and having a different ion-selective layer, at
least one liquid distribution porous member provided for each
said side of plural pairs of solid electrodes so that said liquid
distribution porous member covers at least partially all the
electrodes at each said side, and said bridge disposed on or
between said liquid distribution members.
4-
7. A field-effect device comprising a semiconductor sub-
strate, a source region located in a first surface of said sub-
strate, a drain region located in said first surface and spaced
apart from said source region, an electrical insulator material
overlying at least a portion of said source and drain regions and
the surface of the substrate lying between said regions, a gate
conductor disposed over said insulator material between said
source and drain regions, said gate conductor extending later-
ally along said first surface to a region remote from said source
and drain regions, the width of that portion of said gate con-
ductor in said remote region being greater than the width of
said gate conductor in the region of said source and drain
regions, at least a portion of said lateral extension of said gate
conductor being covered by at least one electroactive material
suitable for the detection and measurement of chemical proper-
ties to which the device is exposed, an electrical conductor
4,437,971
ELECTROCHEMICAL OXYGEN SENSOR,
PARTICULARLY FOR EXHAUST GASES FROM
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Herbert Csanitz, Bietigheim-Bissingen, and Helmut Weyl,
Schwiebcrdingen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,518
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 21,
1980, 3023337
Int. a.3 GOIN 27/46
U.S. a. 204-427 14 Claims
1. In combination with an exhaust system of an internal
combustion engine having an exhaust component (E) subject
to vibration,
an electrochemical sensor to determine the oxygen content
of gases, particularly of exhaust gases from an internal
combustion engine, said sensor having
a body (11) of solid electrolyte material;
a layer-like porous measuring electrode (14) applied to a first
surface region of the body;
means including another surface region of the body defining
a hollow chamber (21);
a layer-like reference electrode (22) located on said other
surface region of the body and positioned within the
hollow chamber (21), said hollow chamber being open to
ambient air, the oxygen of which providing a reference
gas;
and comprising
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
120S
movable granules (39) loosely retained and located in at least
part of said hollow chamber (21) in which the layer-like
reference electrode (22) is located, said granules being
inert with respect to oxygen and having a surface hardness
which is at least as great as that of the layer-like reference
electrode (22).
4,437,972
PROCESS FOR CO-PROCESSING COAL AND A
PARAFFINIC MATERIAL
Francis J. Derbyshire, Ewing, N J., and Philip Varghese, New-
town, Pa., assignors to MobU Oil Corporation, New York,
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,438
Int. a.3 ClOG 7/00. 1/06, 3/00
U.S. a 208-8 LE 21 Claims
1. A process for treating a mixture comprising coal and a
paraffinic feedstock, said process comprising: thermally react-
ing said mixture in a thermal reaction zone to form an effluent
comprising a solids fraction, a polar asphaltenic liquid fraction
derived substantially from said coal and a paraffinic liquid
fraction, said paraffinic liquid fraction containing a sufficient
paraffin content derived from said feedstock to promote sepa-
ration of said polar asphaltenic fraction from said paraffin
liquid fraction, cooling said effluent to precipitate said polar
asphaltenic fraction and separating said solids fraction and
precipitoted polar asphaltenic fraction from said paraffinic
liquid fraction.
temperature sufficient to maintain said reaction rone tem-
perature and recycling the heated materials into the lower
part of said reaction rone to maintain said temperature
therein;
(d) withdrawing said hydrogen coal-derived material con-
taining gas and liquid fractions from the upper part of said
reaction rone, and phase separating said material into
gaseous and liquid fractions;
(e) passing said liquid fraction from said phase separation to
a liquid-solids separation step, from which an overhead
liquid stream normally boiling above about 550* F. and
containing a reduced concentration of particulate solids is
heated to said temperature above the reaction rone before
recychng said heated coal-derived liquid into the reaction
zone; and
(0 recovering hydrocarbon gas and increased yield of low
boiling hydrocarbon liquid product from the proceu.
^-^4^7,974
COAL LIQUEFACnON PROCESS
Ryobei Minarai, Chiba; Shoio Okamura; YosUhiko Snnami
both of Ibaraki; Taki^ji Ho«>i, Kawasaki, and Takuo Kanou!
Tokyo, aU of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Metal Industries.
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Jun. 17. 1982. Ser. No. 389,566
Claims priority. appUcation Japan, Jun. 29, 1981, 56-99647
iBt a.J ClOG 1/06
U.S. a 208-10 17 Claims
1. A coal liquefaction process comprising a coal liquefaction
step to contact finely divided coal with molecular hydrogen
and a solvent in the presence of a catalyst to provide a slurry,
and a separation step to separate the resulting slurry into a
gaseous component, a liquid component and a solid residue,
characterized by further comprising a metal bath gasification
step to gasify a carbonaceous solid material by blowing an
oxygen gas and said solid residue onto a molten metal bath
through a non-immersing lance, and with fine powdery solids
which are derived from the molten metal bath and recovered
from the generated gas in said metal bath gasification step
being introduced to said liquefaction step and used as said
catalyst.
4,437,973
COAL HYDROGENATION PROCESS WITH DIRECT
COAL FEED AND IMPROVED RESIDUUM
CONVERSION
Derk T. A. Huibers, Pennington, and Paul H. Kydd, Lawrence-
▼Ule, both of N J., assignors to HRI, Inc., Gibbsboro, N J.
FUed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,660
lat. a.3 ClOG 1/08
MS. a. 208—10 23 Claims
1. A process for hydrogenation of coal to produce hydrocar-
bon Uquid and gaseous products, comprising:
(a) pressurizing particulate coal which has been dried to a
moisture content of less than about S W % and feeding it
at temperature below about 600* F. directly, without
further heating into a pressurized backmixed type reaction
zone containing coal-derived liquid and hydrogen;
(b) passing the coal along with said coal-derived liquid and
hydrogen upwardly through said reaction zone which is
maintained at 700'-975* F. temperature and 1000-5000
psig hydrogen partial pressure to rapidly heat the cool and
convert it to hydrogenated coal-derived material;
(c) heating recycle hydrogen and a recycle coal-derived
hydrogen liquid normally boUing above about SSO* F. to a
4,437,975
MANUFACTURE OF LUBE BASE STOCK OIL
Bernard M. GUlespie, Pitman; Michael S. SarU, Haddonfleld,
and Kenneth W. Smith, Woodbury, aU of N J., assignors to
MobU OU Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 74,361, Sep. 10, 1979, abandoned,
which is a dirision of Ser. No. 862,460. Dec. 20. 1977, Pat No.
4,181,598, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 817,309,
Jul. 20, 1977, Pat No. 4,137,148. Tliis appUcation Sep. 30, 1982,
Ser. No. 430,180
Int a.J ClOG 47/16, 65/12
U.S. a. 208-87 4 cialais
1. In a process for preparing a lube base stock oil from a
deasphalted short residuum of a waxy crude, said deuphalted
shorty residuum having a pour point substantially higher than
-1-30* F., said process comprising de waxing said deasphalted
short residuum and recovering a dewaxed residuum having a
pour point from about -25' F. to not higher than -»-30' F., the
improvement, whereby increasing the yield of said dewaxed
residuum, which comprises:
catalytically dewaxing said deasphalted short residuum by
contact, in the presence of hydrogen, with a dewaxing
catalyst contained in a dewaxing zone, said dewaxing
catalyst comprising an aluminosilicate zeolite having a
sUica/alumina ratio of at least about 12 and a Constraint
Index of about 1 to about 12, said contacting being at a
temperature from 500* to about 675* F. and at a hydrogn
partial pressure at the reactor inlet of about ISO- 1300 psia,
and cascading the effluent from said dewaxing zone to a
hydrotreating zone wherein it is contacted with a hydro-
1206
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
NfARCH 20, 1984
treating catalyst at a temperature of 500* to 575* F.,
thereby increasing the oxidation stability of said dewaxed
residuum.
M37^6
TWOOTAGE HYDROCARBON DEWAXING
HYDROTREATING PROCESS
Stephen M. Oleck, Moorettown, and Robert C. Wilson, Jr^
Woodbury, both of N J., asrignors to MobU OU Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
DfrWon of Ser. No. 290,759, Aug. 7, 1961. This application Sep.
13, 1962, Ser. No. 417,765
Int CL' ClOG 65/02. 45/12
U A CL 206—97 iq Claims
1. A process for catalytically dewaxing and hydrotreating a
waxy hydrocarbon fraction boiling within the approximate
range of 400* to 1050* F. to provide a lubricating oil of high
viscosity index which comprises:
(a) contacting said fraction with a dewaxing catalyst under
conditions sufficient to effect at least a partial dewaxing of
said fraction; and
(b) contacting the reaction product thereby obtained with
hydrogen and a hydrotreating catalyst comprising one or
more zeolites selected from the group consisting of ZSM-
5, ZSM- 11, ZSM-23, and ZSM-3S. blended with a refrac-
tory inorganic oxide to form an extrudate, said extnidate
having a metal hydrogenation component present therein
in a concentration of metal in elemental, oxide, or sulfide
form of between about 0.05 and about 25 percent by
weight and a concentration of zeolite in said extrudate of
between about 5 and about 40 percent by weight.
4,437,977
CONTROL OF A CATALYTIC CRACKING UNTT
Gary L. Funk, BartieariUe, Okla^ assignor to PhllUpa Petroleum
Company, Bartiesiille, Okla.
FUed Sep. 29, 1962, Ser. No. 427,260
Int a.3 BOIJ 8/26: ClOG U/18
UA a 206-113 16 cialma
I. Apparatus comprising:
a reactor;
a fractional distillation column;
means for supplying a feed to said reactor;
means for removing the products produced by the cracking
of said feed from said reactor and for supply the thus
removed products as a feed to said fractional distillation
column;
cooling means;
an accumulator,
means for withdraM>ring an overhead stream from said frac-
tional distillation column and for supplying the thus with-
drawn overhead stream through said cooUng means to
said accumulator;
means for withdrawing a liquid stream from said overhead
accumulator, for returning a first portion of the thus with-
drawn liquid stream to an upper portion of said fractional
distillation column as an upper external reflux and for
withdrawing a second portion of the thus withdrawn
liquid stream as an overhead product stream;
means for withdrawing a sidedraw stream from an interme-
diate portion of said fractional distillation column,
wherein at least a portion of said sidedraw stream is uti-
lized to provide a side draw product stream;
means for withdrawing a bottoms product stream from a
lower portion of said fractional distillation column,
wherein a portion of the thus withdrawn bottoms product
stream may be recycled to said reactor;
means for esUblishing a first signal representative of the
actual internal reflux to vapor ratio in said upper portion
of said fractional distillation column;
means for establishing a second signal representative of the
actual internal reflux to vapor ratio in said intermediate
portion of said fractional distillation column;
means for estoblishing a third signal representative of the
actual flow rate of product removed from said fractional
distillation column in said overhead product stream and
said sidedraw product sti-eam which has a boiling point
above a specified boiling point in response to said first and
second signals;
means for estabUshing a fourth signal representative of the
actual flow rate of said bottoms product stream;
means for summing said third signal and said fourth signal to
establish a fifth signal representative of the total flow rate
of product withdrawn from said fractional distillation
column which has a boiling point above said specified
boiling point;
means for establishing a sixth signal representative of the
flow rate of the portion of said feedstream to said reactor
which has a boiling point above said specified boihng
point;
means for establishing a seventh signal representative of the
flow rate of any portion of said bottoms product stream
recycled to said reactor;
means for summing said sixth signal and said seventh signal
to establish an eighth signal representative of the total
flow rate of feed to said reactor which has a boiling point
above said specified boiling point;
means for establishing a ninth signal representative of the
amount of the feed flowing to said reactor which has a
boiling point above said specified boiling point which is
converted to a product having a boiling point below said
specified boiling point (Conversion) in response to said
fifth and eighth signals;
means for establishing a tenth signal representative of a
desired Conversion;
means for comparing said ninth signal and said tenth signal
and for establishing a eleventh signal which is responsive
to the diflerence between said ninth signal and said tenth
signal; and
means for manipulating a process variable associated with
said reactor in response to said eleventh signal to thereby
maintain the actual Convenion represented by said ninth
signal substantially equal to the desired Conversion repre-
sented by said tenth signal.
4,437,976
CRACKING CATALYST COMPOSITIONS FOR
REDUCnON OF SULFUR CONTENT IN COKE
Arthur W. Oieiter, Cherry Hill; Harry A. McVeigh, Belle
Mead, and WUlian A. Sto?er, Woodbury, all of N J., awign-
on to MobU OU Corporation, New York, N.Y.
OiTWoa of Ser. No. 945^67, Sep. 26, 1978. Thia appUeatkw
May 3, 1962, Ser. No. 374,454
lut a' BOIJ 29/10: ClOG 11/05. 47/18
U.S. CL 206—120 9 OaiaH
1. A cyclic fluidized catalytic cracking process, character-
ized by reduced emissions of sulfur oxides in regenerator stack
gases, wherein a hydrocarbon feedstock containing organic
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1207
sulfur compounds u subjected to cracking under fluidizing
conditions with a high-activity fluid cracking catalyst in a
reaction zone, cracking catalyst deactivated by coke deposiu is
separated from cracked hydrocarbon reaction zone effluent
and regenerated to high activity in a catalyst regeneration zone
by burmng the coke deposiu from the fluid catalyst in contact
with an oxygen-conuuning gas stream, and regenerated fluid
catalyst is recycled to the reaction zone, said process compris-
ing the cracking of the hydrocarbon feedstock containing
orgamc sulfur compounds in the presence of a regenerabic
fluid cracking catalyst, said cracking catalyst comprising a
base cracking catalyst comprising a rare earth exchanged
zeolite Y contained in a matrix therefor, co-impregnated with
rare earth oxides, and a metal selected from chromium, manga-
nese, cobalt, mckel and platinum group metals, said rare earth
oxides being present in amounts between about 1 and 10 wt
percent above the exchange capacity of said base material, said
chromium, manganese, cobalt and nickel components being
present in amounts between about 0.05 and 5 wt percent as Uie
oxides, and said platinum group metals in amounte between
about 0.1 and 200 ppm of metal.
4,437,979
SOLIDS QUENCH BOILER AND PROCESS
Heman N. Woebcke, Stiunford, Conn.; Arju H. Bbojwani,
UwrencevUle, NJ., and Robert J. Gartaide, Aubnradale,
Maaa., assignora to Stone * Webster Engineering Corp.,
Boston, Mass.
DlrWon of Ser. No. 165,784, Jul. 3, 1960, Pat No. 4,356,151,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 82,162, Oct 5, 1979
Pat No. 4,351,275. This appUcation Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No.
345,099
Int a.3 ClOG 9/32
MS. a 208-153 5 ci,|„
.••»
1. In a TRC process wherein hydrocarbon feed of hydrosul-
fiirization residual oU, together with enU-ained inert soUds and
diluent gas, are passed through a cracking zone witiiin a tiier-
mal cracking reactor for a residence time of 0.05 to 2 seconds
to produce a stream of reactor effluent, wherein Uie tempera-
ture in said cracking zone is between 1300* F. and 2500* F.. and
after which said reactor effluent is quench cooled. Uie im-
provement comprising a process for sequentially quenching
the reactor effluent including the steps of:
a. inti-oducing particulate solids into the effluent stream in
the first quenching zone to partially quench the effluent;
b. passing the composite sti«am of partially quenched efflu-
oit and particulate soUds in indirect heat exchange reU-
tionship with a coolant in the second quenching zone to
further cool Uie composite stream of effluent and particu-
late solids;
c. separating the quenched and cooled gas from Uie particu-
late solids after the effluent and particuUte solids have
PMaed in indirect heat exchange relationship wiUi the
coolant; and
d. returning Uie separated particuUte solids for reintroduc-
tion to the effluent stream leaving Uie reactor.
4,437,960
MOLTEN SALT HYDROTREATMENT PROCESS
^li: "J^/' ^^■~*' ^*^ •^ Raymund P. Skowronaki,
Woodland HUla, both of Calif., aaaignon to RoekweU Intenuh
tioaal Corporation, EI Scgundo, Calif.
FUed Jul. 30, 1962, Ser. No. 403,693
Int a.J ClOG 49/02: BOIJ 23/92
U.S. a. 208-235 g ci,i^
1. A hydrotreating process for sulfur, asphaltene and metal
removal from a carbonaceous material which comprises:
(1) mtroducing a carbonaceous material and an organic
hydrogen donor solvent into a mixing zone;
(2) introducing the resulting solution of carbonaceous mate-
rial in organic hydrogen donor solvent into a reaction
zone containing a molten medium comprising potassium
hydroxide and water, said water being present in an
amount of about 16-33 wt. % based on Uie combined
weight of said potassium hydroxide and water, said potas-
Slum hydroxide and water being present in a combined
amount of about 50-300 wt. % based on the weight of said
carbonaceous material;
(3) introducing hydrogen into said reaction zone in an
amount sufficient to provide a pressure in said reaction
zone within the range of about 10 to 300 atinospheres;
(4) reactmg said carbonaceous material and hydrogen at a
temperature in Uie range of about 350*-550* C. for a
period of time of about 1 minute to 2 hours;
(5) recovering desulfurized, deasphalted and demetallized
hydrotreated producu comprising about 90-98 wt. % of
liquid hydrocarbonaceous producU having a sulfur con-
tent reduced by at least about 80% from Uie sulfur content
of said carbonaceous material, an asphaltene content re-
duced by at least about 60% from the asphaltene content
of said carbonaceous material, a metals content reduced
by at least about 90% from Uie metaU content of said
carbonaceous material, and less than about 1 wt. % of
gaseous hydrocarbonaceous productt;
(6) separating from said liquid hydrocarbonaceous producto
an organic hydrogen donor solvent;
(7) recycling said organic hydrogen donor solvent to said
mixing zone;
(8) removing from said reaction zone a portion of spent
molten medium;
(9) adding water to Uie removed portion of spent molten
medium to form an aqueous slurry of solids comprising
potassium sulfide, heavy metal salts, ash and soUd organic
matter in a concentrated aqueous potassium hydroxide
solution containing about 34-50 wt. % water;
(10) separating said soUds from said concentrated aqueous
potassium hydroxide solution;
(1 1) tilting said solids wiUi water to dissolve said potassium
sulfide and to leave undissolved heavy metid salts, ash and
solid organic matter;
(12) separating said undissolved heavy metal salts, ash and
solid organic matter fixjm Uie aqueous solution resulting
from dissolving said potassium sulfide to form a clarified
aqueous solution of potassium sulfide,
(13) carbonating said clarified aqueous solution of potassium
sulfide to remove hydrogen sulfide Uierefrom and to pro-
duce a carbonated solution comprising potiusium carbon-
ate;
(14) reacting said carbonated solution wiUi calcium hydrox-
ide to precipitate calcium carbonate and regenerate an
aqueous solution of potassium hydroxide;
(15) separating said calcium carbonate from said aqueous
potassium hydroxide solution;
(16) partiaUy dehydrating both said concentrated aqueous
potassium hydroxide solution from step (10) and said
1208
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
aqueous potassium hydroxide solution from step (15) to
provide a potassium hydroxide solution containing about
16-33 wt. % water; and
(17) recycling said potassium hydroxide solution containing
about 16-33 wt. % water to said reaction zone.
M37^]
IMMOBILIZATION AND NEUTRALIZATION OF
CONTAMINANTS IN CRUDE OIL
Stephen M. KoTach, Ashland, Ky^ aadgoor to Ashland OIL Inc»
Ashland, Ky.
Filed Not. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 443,413
Int a.3 ClOG 29/04. 29/06
VJS. a. 208-253 13 ctalmi
ture of fine coal particles, and inorganic solid refuse parti-
cles in a liquid mixture comprising water and petroleum
oil,
(c) conveying said solids-liquid mixture onto said upper
surface of said coarse coal filter cake to form a layer of
fine coal and refuse above said coarse coal filter cake,
(d) spraying water from water spray means onto said fine
coal-refuse layer,
whereby a major portion of said water and a major portion of
said refuse pass through said coarse coal filter cake means and
a major portion of said petroleum oil and a major portion of
said fine coal particles remain above said filter cake means and
recovering the fine coal.
ic!
j^
a
I
mm.
uorrivi
I
X
■
i
^
1. A method for deactivating alkaline contaminants and
metal contaminants in crude oils prior to affecting catalytic
conversion of fractions thereof which comprises:
contacting a crude oil with one or more metal compounds
selected from the group consisting of titanium, zirconium,
and indium compounds immediately prior to or during
distillation thereof, whereby residual alkaline material in
said crude oil is neutralized and vanadium is reacted to
form a reaction product having a melting point above the
maximum temperature of a downstream catalytic conver-
sion operation, and recovering a residual fraction of said
crude oil boiling above 32.2* c. (630* F.) comprising metal
contaminants reduced in deactivating affect upon a down-
stream contacted zeolite conversion catalyst at an ele-
vated temperature.
4,437,983
FROTH FLOTATION METHOD FOR RECOVERING
ZIRCONIUM MINERALS
Vojiito? PetroTich, 1935 W. SchUler St., Chicago, lU. 60622
Filed Sep. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 416,285
lat a.J B03D I/I4
VS. a. 209-166 2 Claims
1. In concentrating by froth flotation of zirconium ores,
which includes the subjecting of said ore material when finely
ground to froth flotation process in the presence of alkylaryl
and aryl glycolic acid or its sodium salt promoter-collector; the
step of adding to the mineral slurry an amount of the order
from 0.05 to 0.5 kg per ton of ore treated of said alkylaryl or
aryl glycolic acid sodium salt; said addition to aqueous disper-
sion of ore produce a froth flotation product of zirconium
mineral value by continuing agitation and aeration of the aque-
ous dispersion of ore, and separating and recovering the zirco-
nium mineral value as float froth concentrate product.
4,437,984
MULTIPLE HYDROCYCLONE APPARATUS
Stephen J. King, Qearwaten Bruce S. Moffatt, Largo, and Joho
C. Stewart, St Petersburg, all of Fla., aaaignon to Clark A
Vicario Corporation, Pinellas Park, Fla.
FUcd Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,773
lat a.J B03D 45/ J2
VJS. a. 209—211 27 Claims
4,437,982
SEPARATION OF CLAY FROM COAL
George E. Waaaon, Eighty Four, Pa., anignor to Conoco Inc.,
Wilmington, Del
Filed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,151
Int CL^ B03B 1/00
VS. CL 209—5 14 Claims
1. A method of separating refuse fitm a mixture of fine coal
particles and refuse particles comprising the steps of:
(a) providing a coarse coal filter cake means having an upper
surface,
(b) forming a solids-liquid mixture comprising a solids mi*.
1. Multiple hydrocyclone apparatus of the type having:
(a) a plurality of elongated, vertically extensive hydrocy-
dones disposed side by side in a plurality of loop-like
arrays, said plurality of arrays including an innermost
array and at least one outer array surrounding said inner-
most array;
March 20. 1984
CHEMICAL
1209
(b) means for conducting feed stock to the inlett of said
hydrocyclones;
(c) means for conducting rejected stock from the reject
outleu of said hydrocyclones, such means including a
reject manifold disposed below said hydrocyclones; and
(d) means for conducting accepted stock from the accept
outlets of said hydrocyclones, such means including an
accept plenum disposed above said hydrocyclones, means
for maintaining a partial vacuum within said accept ple-
num, means for spraying accepted stock from the accept
outlets of said hydrocyclones into said accept plenum and
an accept outlet pipe communicating with said accept
plenum and extending downwardly therefrom in the space
bounded by the innermost one of said arrays of hydrocy-
clones;
wherein the improvement comprises disposition of said inner-
most array and said accept outlet pipe to provide a clearance
between such pipe and the hydrocyclones of said innermost
array so that said accept outlet pipe and said innermost row of
hydrocyclones cooperatively define a walkway space of suffi-
cient size to accommodate a humahn operator and means for
permitting entry of a human operator to said walkway space
during operation of the hydrocyclones without removal of any
of said hydrocyclones, said accept outlet pipe including an
outwardly flaring transition section adjacent said accept ple-
num, the wide end of said transition section being disposed at
the top thereof, said transition section extending outwardly of
said accept outlet pipe above said walkway space.
and second members reciprocable transversely of said path,
means between said members for moving said members in
opposite directions with respect to each other, and drive means
for reciprocating said members.
4,437,985
CONTAINER DEFECT MONITORING SYSTEM
James J. Hinds, LeGrange; John C. HoefUch, and George C.
Koloddej, both of Oak Park, all of lU., assignors to National
Can Corporation, Chicago, 111.
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,798
Int a.J B07C 5/02. 5/342
VS. a. 209—538 22 Claims
1. A monitoring device for inspecting the condition of the
surface of articles moving along a path comprising a color
monitor positioned adjacent said path, fu^t means for remov-
ing an article from said path, second means for positioning said
article into general alignment with said color monitor, third
means for indexing a preselected point of said surface with
respect to said color monitor, said color monitor producing a
signal indicative of the condition of said surface at said prese-
lected point, and ejector means for ejecting said article when
said signal is outside preselected limits, said fust and second
means cooperating to return said article to said path when said
signal is within said preselected limits, and said fmt means
returning said article to said path and thereafter removing
another article from said path, said first means including first
1040 O.G.
4,437,986
SEPARATING DEVICE AND CARTRIDGE THEREFOR
Charles K. Hutchios; Donald I. Thornton, and Richard H. Pey-
ton, all of East Prorideace, R.I., assignors to Fram Corpora-
tion, East Providence, R.I.
Filed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,613
Int a.5 BOID 27/10
VS. a. 210-130 13 cuiau
1. Separator cartridge for separating immiscible componenu
of a liquid mixture comprising a casing having inlet and outlet
connections adapted for communication to a liquid flow sys-
tem, an annular coalescing medium within said casing for
causing the liquid component to be separated from said mixture
to agglomerate into liquid dropleu, said coalescing medium
having inner and outer surfaces, a sump defined within said
casing for collecting the liquid to be separated from the liquid
mixture, means in said casing for deflecting liquid flow through
said inlet connection to the outer surface of said coalescing
medium, a separating medium coaxial with said coalescing
medium and located downstream of the latter so that the liquid
mixture flows through the coalescing medium before reaching
the separating medium, said liquid mixture flowing from the
inner surface of said coalescing medium to said separating
medium while allowing at least some of the coalesced liquid
droplets of the Uquid to be removed from said mixture to
deposit in said sump, the surface of said separating medium
being a material repellant to the liquid to be removed from said
mixture so that dropleu of the liquid to be removed deposit on
said surface and fall into said sump while the other liquid of
1210
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
said liquid mixture passes therethrough, and pressure differen-
tial responsive means opening to permit said liquid mixture to
bypass said separating medium when pressure differential
across said separating medium attains a predetermined level,
said pressure differential responsive means closing when the
pressure differential drops below the predetermined level.
tached to the top of the wall at their bottom portion and
the center stack at their upper portion;
a pressure differential sensor means for monitoring the air
pressure within the inner pressurizing chamber and the
gas pressure within the gas chamber;
an air injection means operated by the pressure differential
sensor means for injection of pressurized air into the inner
pressurizing chamber between the gas membrane and the
pressurizing membrane causing the controlled expansion
of the inner chamber via the downward movement of the
gas membrane means toward the sludge within the storage
container to maintain and regulate the pressure of the gas
at a predetermined level produced by the anaerobic pro-
cess and collecting between the top of the sludge and the
bottom of the gas membrane;
gas exhaust means for removing the gas stored in the gas
chamber, the exhaust means communicating with the gas
chamber and the outside of the storage container; and
a bleed-off valve communicating with the inner chamber for
permitting air to flow from the inner chamber to the
outside of the digester.
M37,987
ANAEROBIC DIGESTER GAS COLLECTION AND
STORAGE SYSTEMS
MarriB L. Thomton, 509 SE. Fourth, Ankeny, Iowa 50021, and
Arthur J. Boyt, Jr., 4602 Kingman, Des Moines, Iowa 50311
FUed Jul. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 394,405
iBt CL^ C02F 11/04: C12M 1/02
UA a 210-137 jctaim.
/• 'O
V777Z7777777T7.
•777777777,
VTTZ^
1. In an anaerobic sludge digester storage container having a
wall communicating with a floor forming a storage container
for holding sludge with a fixed outer cover overlying the
storage tank, the tank having a sludge inlet and outlet with a
center stack communicating with the storage container there-
below, the improvement comprising:
a flexible gas membrane means extending between the wall
and the center stack and over and above the storage con-
tainer, in a configuration forming a gas tight seal between
the sludge and the outer cover from the wall to the center
stack of the outer cover, forming a gas chamber;
a pressurizing membrane means extending over the top of
the gas membrane means and between the gas membrane
means and the outer cover extending between the wall
and the center stack, for creating an inner pressurizing
chamber between the top surface of the gas membrane
means and the bottom surface of said pressurizing mem-
brane means, said two membranes being sealingly at-
4,437,988
PLATE SEPARATOR CONSTRUCTION AND METHOD
William James, 1483 Pine KnoU La., Mamaroneck, N.Y. 10543
DiTlaion of Ser. No. 289,152, Aug. 3, 1981, Pat No. 4,337,561.
This appUcation Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,971
Int a.3 C02F 1/40: BOID 21/00
UA a. 210-237 8 Claims
1. A liquid separator and plate stack combination compris-
ing:
a housing having opposite side walls spaced from each other
by a selected distance;
a stack of a plurality of spaced corrugated and intercon-
nected plates defuiing tortuous paths therebetween and
made of resilient material;
said stack having an undistorted stack length and stack
width, with one of said stack length and stack width being
substantially similar to said selected distance between said
housing side walls;
said stack having one of a distorted stack length and dis-
torted stack width respectively so that said stack is inseri-
able between said housing side walls
said stack with undistorted side length and side width pro-
vided between said housing side walls and closely associ-
ated with each side wall by the resiliency of said pUte
material; and
suspension means engaged with said stack for supporting
said stack in such a way to produce said at least one of a
distorted stack length and distorted stack width.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1211
4,437,989
APPARATUS FOR COLLECTING SUBSTANCES
FLOAnNG ON AN EXPANSE OF LIQUID
Bernard Valibouae, Grenoble; Albert Bonazzi, Gieres, both of
France, assignors to Societc Anonyme dite: Alsthom-Atlanti-
que, ParU, France
FUed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,762
Claims priority, appUcation France, May 30, 1980, 80 12062
Int. on? BOID 2i/00
UJS. a. 210— 242J 5 Claims
absent from the pleaU on the blood side of said membrane; one
suppori member of each contiguous pair being provided with
at least one transverse slot which extends the full thickness of
said one support member and in which the plastic material of
said one support member is completely absent; said slot being
in substantial alignment with one of said ports for directing the
OIALTUTC
M
fK^
J
'^
^/'
•LOOO
OUT
1. An apparatus for removing and collecting a light liquid
from a water surface and being borne by a ship hull moving
through the water, said apparatus comprising:
a long narrow separator plate mounted to the outside of the
ship hull, separate therefrom and extending lengthwise
away from the ship hull and forming an acute angle 6
forwardly in the direction of ship movement with the
centerline of the ship hull, said separator plate being par-
tially submerged widthwise within the water,
a collector trough being mounted against the side of the
ship's hull abovethe surface of the water laterally spaced
inboard of said separator plate and ahead of the rear end of
said separator plate for collecting said light liquid sepa-
rated from the water surface, said collector trough com-
municating with a chamber internally of said ship's hull,
and wherein said partially submerged separator plate is
inclined downwardly and rearwardly widthwise relative
to the direction of hull movement at an acute angle a such
that at a relatively fast hull speed, the light liquid rebounds
against the bottom of the separator plate and is thrown
forwardly and sidewise into the air toward the side of the
ship huU and above the coUector trough for separation
from the water and collection thereby.
4,437,990
SEMIPERMEABLE MEMBRANE MASS TRANSFER
APPARATUS HAVING SLOTTED SUPPORT MEMBERS
Alexander S. Bonanyl, Newport Beach, CaUf., assignor to
American Ho^ital Snpply Corporation, ETanston, Hi.
Continnation of Ser. No. 44,072, May 21, 1979, nbuidoned,
which is a continiiation-iB'part of Ser. No. 779,577, Mar. 21,
1977, abandoaed. This appUcation Dec. 18, 1981, Ser. No.
332,324
iBt CL^ BOID 31/00
MS. a. 210—321.3 4 Claims
1. A mass transfer apparatus for use in hemodialysis and
ultrafiltration comprising a housing; a semi-permeable mem-
brane disposed within said housing; said membrane being
folded to form a stack of accordion pleats and being so con-
structed and arranged that two separate fluid chambers for
blood and dialysate are thereby formed with said dialysate
chamber being on one side of said membrane and said blood
chamber on the other; ports provided by said housing for
directing the flow of blood and dialysate into and out of the
respective chambers; and a plurality of discrete planar support
members of open-mesh plastic m^erial associated with said
membrane; said discrete support members each being flat and
unfolded, of generaUy rectangular outline, and of substantiaUy
the same size, and bieing arranged to provide a pair of said
members in superimposed contiguous relation within each
pleat only on the dialysate side of said membrane, and being
flow of blood into and out of said blood chamber; said trans-
verse slot extending from an edge of said one support member
facing towards said blood flow directing poru and terminating
short of the opposite edge of said one support member,
whereby, the portions of said one support member bordering
said slot remains structurally integrated with each other.
4,437,991
nLTER APPARATUS
MInoru Tashiro, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Bunri Indastry Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,270
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 28, 1981, 56^726
lot a? BOID 25/38
U.S. a. 210—413 23 Claims
1. A filter apparatus for filtering a liquid containing solid
materials comprising:
a filter member made of a flexible sheet having a number of
though holes which prevent passage of solid materials
while allow passage of the liquid thereby filtering the
liquid;
at least one wiper which has an oil-resistant material plate
and is slidably arranged over the surface of the filter
member on the Uquid inlet side to scrape off the solid
materials deposited on the surface of the filter member
upon sliding movement thereof;
at least one second wiper which has two oil-resistant mate-
rial plates and is siklably arranged over the surface of the
filter member on the liquid outlet side; and
driving means for sliding the first and second wipers over
the surfaces of the filter member at the same speed and in
the same direction so that the first and second wipers
sandwich the filter member on both itt sides and the first
wiper is interposed between the oU-resistant material
plates of the second wiper.
1212
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4MnM2
PROCESS FOR CONTROLLING AN AERATION TANK IN
AN ACTIVATED SLUDGE SEWAGE TREATMENT
Ynido Saito; Shoimike Nogita; Syoji Wataaabe, and Keqji Baba,
aU of Hitachi, Japan, aMignon to Hitachi, Ltd^ Tokyo, Japan
Cootiniiation of Ser. No. 149,995, May 15, 1980, abandoned.
This application Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,110
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 16, 1979, 54-59153
Int CL' C02F 3/J2
U.S. a. 210-603 7 Claim,
prises a dicarbohydrate, prior to contact of the hydrocarbon
composition with the sand.
4,437,994
EXTRACnON OF METAL IONS FROM AQUEOUS
SOLUTION
Richard W. Baker, Bend, Orcc assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Interior,
Washington, D.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 890,149, Mar. 27, 1978,
abandoned. This appUcation Ang. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 177,976
Int a.J BOID J3/00
VS. a. 210-638 ,0 cwm.
1. A process for controlling an aeration tank in an apparatus
for sewage treatment by activated sludge which apparatus
includes an aeration tank for stirring and mixing inflow sewage
with activated sludge and a gas containing oxygen, a sedimen-
tation tank for settling a mixed liquor from the aeration tank,
thereby concentrating and separating sludges converted by
assimilating action of microorganisms upon organic matter in
the sewage, a gas blowing means for supplying the gas contain-
ing oxygen into the aeration tank, and a sludge return means
for returning the sludge concentrated and separated in the
sedimentation tank to the aeration tank, said process compris-
ing the following steps:
(a) a step of measuring a concentration of carbon dioxide of
an effluent gas from the aeration tank at the sewage inflow
side of the aeration tank,
(b) a step of measuring a concentration of nitrous oxide of an
effluent gas from the aeration tank at the sewage outflow
side of the aeration tank, and
(c) a step of controlling the aeration rate at the sewage
inflow side corresponding to the side of measuring the
concentration of carbon dioxide from the aeration tank by
the gas blowing means, thereby making the measured
concentration of carbon dioxide equal to a predetermined
value and
(d) a step of controlling the aeration rate at the sewage
outflow side corresponding to Uie side of measuring the
concentration of nitrous oxide from the aeration tank by
the gas blowing means, thereby making the measured
concentration of nitrous oxide equal to a predetermined
value.
1. A process for extraction of selected ions of metals from an
aqueous feed solution and deposition of said ions in an aqueous
product solution comprising:
circulating said feed solution into the lumens of a multiplic-
ity of hollow fibers, the walls of said fibers consisting
essentially of a microporous anisotropic membrane having
pores of about 0.01 to 0.04 micron in diameter at each
surface and pores of about 2 to 10 microns in diameter in
the interior, and said membrane having a water-immisci-
ble organic liquid comprising a complexing agent specific
for said ions substantially completely filling, and retained
within, the pores thereof, and
circulating said aqueous product solution over the outer
sides of said fibers,
whereby a complex is formed between said complexing
agent and said ions in the feed solution followed by diffu-
sion of said complex through the organic liquid in the
pores of the membrane, and subsequent liberation of said
ions in the product solution.
4,437,993
PREVENTION OF PENETRATION OF OILY
HYDROCARBONS INTO SAND
Walter Uodorfer, Kassd; Fritz Wagner, Stockheim, awl Wal-
tkcr Schnlz, Vecfata, all of Fed. Rep. of Gcmaay, aasigiiors to
WiatenhaU AG, Kassd aod GescUschaft tar Biotectaaologis-
che FonchuBg mbH, Bronswick, both of. Fed. Rep. of Get-
ouuy
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,996
Clains priority, appUcatkw Fed. Rep. of Gcmuy, Sep. 22,
1980, 3035685 '» '^ --^
Iirt. CL^ E02B 15/04
VJS. CL 210-431 u daims
1. A method for preventing the pqietration of an oily hydro-
carbon composition into dry or moist sand comprising the step
of q>raying the sand with a thin layer of an aqueous solution or
dispersion of glycolipids, whose hydrophilic component com-
4,437,995
TREATMENT OF GEOTHERMAL BRINE
SULFATE-RICH FLUIDS TO FACILITATE THE
PRECIPITATION OF SILICA
Robert W. Rex, La Habra, Calif., aasignor to RepnbUc Gcother-
mal, Incn Santo Fe Springs, Calif.
Filed Mar. 23, 1983, Ser. No. 477,954
Int CL3 C02F J/52
UA a 210-714 9ciain.
1. A method for controlling the precipitotion of silica from
geothermal brine supersaturated with silica comprising the
steps of: adding into said brine a liquid rich in sulfate ion and
thereby forming, by reaction o: said sulfate-rich liquid and salts
contained within said brine, a fine, metal sulfate colloidal sus-
pension containing adsorbed silica sotids; and separating said
suspension and adsorbed silica solids from said brine.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1213
4,437,996
PROCESS FOR TREATING CYANIC UQUID
CONTAINING COPPERG) CYANIDE COMPLEX ION
Michihide Okngawa, Nishiaomiya, Japan, assignor to Dalnichi-
Nlppon Cables, Ltd., Hyogo, Japan
FUcd No?. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 442,915
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, No?. 27, 1981, 56-191318
Int a.J C02F 1/58
VJS. a 210—718 9 Claims
1. A process for treating a cyanic liquid containing copper(I)
cyanide complex ion which comprises heating the liquid at a
temperature of not lower than 200* C. in the presence of a
water-soluble metal hydroxide.
4,437,997
CLARinCATION OF AMMONIUM POLYPHOSPHATE
SOLUTIONS
Alan M. Dobry, Chicago, lU., assignor to Standard OU Company
(Indiana), Chicago, lU.
Continuation of Ser. No. 251,294, Apr. 6, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 950,974, Oct. 13,
1978, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
781,625, Mar. 28, 1977, abandoned. This appUcation Jun. 14,
1982, Ser. No. 387,824
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct 19,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int a.} BOID 21/01
U.S. a. 210—727 11 Claims
1. A process for the removal of suspended carbonaceous
material from an aqueous ammonium polyphosphate solution
wherein (i) said solution contains from about 10 to about 90%
by weight of the total P2O5 in a polyphosphate form, (ii) said
solution has a pH above about 4.S, (iii) said solution is prepared
by the molecular dehydration and subsequent or concurrent
ammoniation of wet-process phosphoric acid, (iv) said solution
ranges in grade from about 8-27-0 to about 13-37-0, and (v) said
carbonaceous material results from organic impurities in said
wet-process phosphoric acid which char during said molecular
dehydration, which process comprises the steps of:
(a) mixing said ammonium polyphosphate solution with an
aqueous solution of a cationic terpolymer of about 75 mole
% of acrylamide, about 23 mole % of diallyIdi(2-hydrox-
yethyl)ammonium chloride, and a small amount of dime-
thyldiallylammonium chloride, said terpolymer having a
molecular weight in excess of about 10,000, and wherein
the amount of said terpolymer is efTective to promote the
flocculation of said carbonaceous material and said mixing
is carried out at a temperature in the range from about 33*
to about 200" F.;
(b) holding the resulting mixture at a temperature in the
range from about 33* to about 200* F. for a period of time
effective to permit the separation of said mixture into an
upper layer of flocculated carbonaceous material and a
lower layer of clarified ammonium polyphosphate solu-
tion; and
(c) separating said lower layer of clarified ammonium poly-
phosphate solution from said upper layer of flocculated
carbonaceous material.
7. The process as set forth in claim 1 wherein an aqueous
solution of at least one anionic polymer selected from the
group consisting of anionic, water soluble organic polymers, is
additionally added to said mixture of ammonium polyphos-
phate solution and aqueous cationic terpolymer solution,
wherein the amount of said anionic polymer is from about
0.001 to about 0.1% by weight based on the weight of said
ammonium polyphosphate solution, and wherein said anionic
polymer is added to the ammonium polyphosphate solution
sulnequent to the addition of said cationic terpolymer.
4,437,998
METHOD FOR TREATING OIL SANDS EXTRACHON
PLANT TAILINGS
Raymond N. Yong, Beacoosfleld, Canada, aasignor to Snacor,
Inc., Toronto, Canada
FUed Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,083
Claims priority, appUcatfon Canada, May 19, 1981, 377832
The portion of the term of this patent sabseqnent to Aug. 16,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 C02F 1/54; O08L 3/02
U.S. a. 210—728 12 Claims
'&aitm
/^fe^i^A
1. A process for achieving an internally surcharged sludge
layer in a fines-containing body of water comprising the steps
of:
(A) partially-treating any fmes-containing aqueous material
to be discharged into said body of water by mixing into
the aqueous material 25-75 ppm of a hydrolyzed starch
additive, which additive is obtained by the aqueous hydro-
lysis of the starch in the presence of one or more metal
salts;
(B) depositing the partially-treat«d aqueous material result-
ing from step (A) into a holding/settling pond having a
sufficient volume to provide a residence period for the
partially-treated aqueous material within the range of six
months to two years;
(C) withdrawing sludge from beneath a clarified water layer
in said holding/settling pond and mixing into said sludge
23-173 ppm of the hydrolyzed starch additive;
(D) admixing sand into the mixture resulting from step (C);
and
(E) discharging the mixture resulting from step (D) into the
body of water.
4,437,999
METHOD OF TREATING CONTAMINATED
INSOLUBLE ORGANIC SOLID MATERIAL
Sherman T. Mayne, Goldhlll, N.C., aasignor to Gram Research
A De?elopment Co., Charlotte, N.C.
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,849
Int CL^ C02F 1/32
VS. a. 210—748 19 Claims
1. A method of treating insoluble organic solid resin mate-
rial, that contains a contaminating material, to oxidize said
organic material and isolate said contaminating material, com-
prising feeding said contaminated insoluble organic solid mate-
rial into a body of water, simultaneously applying ultraviolet
light and ozone to said water while agiuting said water to
distribute said ozone therein, continuing said applying of ultra-
violet light and ozone while agiuting said body of water for
sufficient time to oxidize said organic material substantially
into water and carbon dioxide, thereby leaving said contami-
nating material as either soluble material in solution in said
water or as precipiuted insoluble material or as both.
1214
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438,000
METHOD OF FILTRATION USING SEMIFLUIDIZED
BEDS
Uaas-tMBg Fan, Manhattan, Kaas^ and Edward H. Han, Hous-
ton, Tez^ aadgnors to Kamas State Univenity Research
Foondation, Manhattan, Kawr,
Filed Aug. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 405,612
Int a.3 BOID 23/10
MS. CL 210-786 iq cudnw
m
•
M
^
/
«
.
/
M
■
>
M
m
^
2
a.
4
H
«
1 *
•
•
«
■h
1
« « n t»
1. The method of filtering particulate solids from a fine
solids-containing fluid flowing upwardly through a semifluidi-
zation filtration chamber having a porous fluid distributor
across the lower portion thereof, a porous medium retainer
across its upper portion, and a semifluidized body of filtration
medium captivated therebetween, said medium during the
filtration being in the form of an upper packed section extend-
ing downwardly from said retainer and a fluidized section from
the bottom of said packed section to said distributor, the bot-
tom surface of said packed section providing an interface with
said fluidized section, wherein the improvement comprises:
(a) in a first phase of a filtration cycle providing a packed
section of at least sufficient downward extend to prevent
breakthrough of the filtered solids as they are removed
from said fluid by the packed section with concentration
of the removed solids adjacent the interface between the
packed and fluidized sections;
(b) continuing said filtration in said first phase without ap-
preciably increasing the percent of said medium in said
packed section until a filter cake of removed solids has
accumulated across the packed section interface, said
solids acciunulation having taken place while the upward
velocity varied between opposite adjacent wall portions
of said packed section interface, said accumulated filter
cake in one area adjacent a wall portion of said chamber
containing a larger accumulation of solids than in an other
area of thereof adjacent an opposed wall portion of said
chamber so that upward fluid flow is diverted from said
one area to said other area; and
(c) in a second phase continuing said filtration with the fluid
flow predominately through said other area to deposit
additional medium together with filtered solids beneath
said other area with a progressive increase in the down-
ward extend of said packed section along said opposed
wall portion, said second phase being continued until at
least the major part of the total medium is in said packed
section, said first and second phases being carried out
without changing the position of said medium retainer
within said filtration chamber.
4,438,001
OILING AGENT FOR TREATING SYNTHETIC HBERS
Aldra Sozold, and nunitoshi Snginra, both of Gamagorishi,
Japan, aasignors to Takcmotoynshi Co. Ltd., Aichi, Japan
per No. PCr/JP81/00082, § 371 Date Dec. 3, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 3, 1982
per Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 448,911
Int CL3 D06M 13/18. 13/30. 13/38. 00/00
VJS. a. 252—8.7 15 ciMim
1. An oiling agent for treating synthetic fibers which com-
prises
(I) 0.05 to 5% by weight of one kind or two kinds or mere
of fluorine-containing ionic surfactants expressed by the
following general formula:
C,F2,±i-A-B
wherein
A: a group selected from the group of — CF2— ,
— O— (CH2)m— (m: integer of 1-3),
-0-CH2-CH-CH2-. -S02.NH.C3H6-
OH
B: -S03M> O/k), -COOM2,
k: number of valency of metal M'
M': Na, K, Ca, Mg, Ba
M2: Na, K
-®N-R3.xe, -N-CH2COOe
R2 Rz
R1-R3: alkyl of 1-20 carbon atoms
X: CI, Br, I, R4SO4
R4: CH3 or C2H5
n: integer of 4-14;
(II) 30 to 99.95% by weight of a poly(oxyethylene-oxypro-
pylene) ether derivative having a molecular weight of
1,000 to 10,000, obtained by adding ethylene oxide and
propylene oxide to a monohydric or polyhydric alcohol of
1 to 20 carbon atoms;
(III) 0 to 30% by weight of a nonionic surfactant; and
(IV) 0 to 40% by weight of a mineral oil having a viscosity
at 30* C. of 5 to 30 est or a fatty acid ester having a molec-
ular weight of 300 to 700 or mixtures thereof.
4,438 002
SURFACTANT FLOODING SOLUTION
Vernon H. Schieyelbein, Houston, and Paul Zabczuk, Dallas,
both of Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,430
Int. a^ C07C 143/Oa' BOIF 3/00; E21B i/Oft 43/16
VJS. a. 252-8.55 D g Claims
1. An aqueous treating solution for injection into an under-
ground hydrocarbon formation to increase hydrocarbon re-
covery, comprising:
about 80% to about 99% by weight of water disposable in
the formation;
about 40% to about 85% of total solute by weight of petro-
leum sulfonate surfactant disposed in the water;
about 10% to about 40% of totid solute by weight of a
solubiUzer compound disposed in the water, said solubi-
lizer selected from the group consisting of alkylpolyalk-
oxyalkyl sulfate alkylpolyalkoxyalkyl sulfonate, alkylaryl-
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1213
ffl'^^d'^*'^' ''^^''' *""* alkyarylpolyalkoxyalkyl sul- improvement consisting of blending with said lubricant a
about 1% to about 35% of total solute by weight of dicyclo- "Z'^H^n^V^'^f "°°""' °^ " '"*' °"^ polyoxyethyl-
pentadiene sulfomite disposed in the water ene ester of the formula: ^
4,438,003
SKATING SURFACE
Elmer O. Nathaniel, 9178 Villaridge, St. Louis, Mo. 63123, and
John Eibert, Jr., 1076 Humber Cir., St. Louis, Mo. 63129
Continuation of Ser. No. 850,953, Not. 14, 1977, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 751,607, Dec. 17, 1976, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 652,802, Jan. 27, 1976,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 508,985, Sep. 25,
1974, abandoned. This application Aug. 21, 1978, Ser. No.
935,485
Int. a.J ClOM 7/14
U.S. a. 252—12 1 Claim
LUBRICANT^
2z22Z
7
RESINOUS MATERIAL
R-C-O— (CH2CH20),H
wherein R is an alkyl group having from 1 1 to 17 carbon atoms
and n is 18 to 22, said ester having a molecular weight ranging
from 1000 to 1200.
3. A diesel engine lubricant comprising an oil having an SAE
viscosity of 50 and a total base number ranging from about 50
to about 100 provided by the presence therein of effective
amounts of conventional alkaline detergents-dispersants in-
cluding overbased calcium sulfonates and carbonates, said
lubricant having improved spreadability resulting from the
incorporation tiierewith of a spreadability improving amount
of a polyoxyethylene ester of the formula:
R-C-0-(CH2CH20),H
wherein R is an alkyl group having 17 carbon atoms, n is 20
I. A flat non-refrigerated surface-forming member for ice and said ester has a molecular weight in the range of 1100 to
skating purposes formed of resinous material in the class con- 1 170.
sisting of high density polyethylene, polypropylene and fluori-
nated polyethylene, and a lubricant provided upon said mem-
ber and forming a film thereon, said lubricant being a solution
consisting essentially of approximately three parts by volume
of water and approximately one part by volume of a water
soluble agent from the class consisting of glycerin, ethylene
glycol, butylene glycol, propylene glycol, diethylene glycol,
trimethylene glycol, tetramethylene glycol, and pentamethyl-
ene glycol.
4,438,004
FUSED METALLIC FRICnON MATERIALS
Paul A. Myers, Crawfordsville, Ind., assignor to Raymark In-
dustries, Inc., Trumbull, Conn.
FUed Dec. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 447,149
Int. a.-! ClOM 7/04. 7/26. 7/52
VJS. a. 252—12 29 Claims
1. A method for making friction material members compris-
ing the steps of:
preparing a mixture of sinterable metal particles, carbonaceous
material and curable polymeric resin, the mixture compris-
ing at least about 50 percent by weight of sinterable metal
particles and sufficient curable polymeric resin to coat and
bond the metal particles and carbonaceous material;
placing the mixture in a mold;
curing the resin to form the mixture into a piece in a solid
preformed shape corresponding to the shape of the mold;
and thereafter
heating the preformed piece sufficiently to carbonize the resin
and fuse the metal particles into a sintered metal matrix.
4,438,005
MARINE DIESEL ENGINE LUBRICANT OF IMPROVED
SPREADABILITY
Bcqjamin H. Zoleski, Beacon, and Rodney L. Sung, Fishklll,
both of N.Y., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 224,414, Jan. 12, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation Dec. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 450,606
Int 0.3 ClOM 1/40
VJS. CL 252—33.4 3 Claims
1. In a process for improving the spreadability of a diesel
engine cylinder lubricant comprising an oil having an SAE
viscosity of 50 and having a total base number ranging from
about 50 to 100 provided by the presence therein of effective
amounts of conventional alkaline detergent dispersants, the
4,438,006
PERFLUORINATED ALIPHATIC POLYALKYLETHER
LUBRICANT WITH AN ADDITIVE COMPOSED OF AN
AROMATIC PHOSPHINE SUBSTITUTED WITH
PERFLUOROALKYLETHER GROUPS
Carl E. Snyder, Jr., Trotwood, and Christ Tamborski, Dayton,
both of Ohio, assignors to The United Stitfes of America as
represented by the Secretary of tiie Air Force, Washington,
D.C.
FUed Sep. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 418,113
Int. a.3 ClOM 1/10
U.S. a. 252—49.9 10 OaiaM
1. A lubricant composition comprising (1) a base fluid con-
sisting essentially of a mixture of linear fluorinated polyethen
having the formula
R/0(CF2CF20WCF20)^/
wherein R/is CF3 or C2F5, m and n are integers whose sum is
between 2 and 200 and the ratio of m to n is between 0 1 and 10;
and (2) a corrosion inhibiting amount of an aromatic phosphine
with perfluorinated polyalkylether substituenu having the
formula
RyORyCF2-H3j
wherein KjOK/— is a perfluoroalkyletber group containing at
least one ether linkage.
1216
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438,007
PERFLUORINATED ALIPHATIC POLYALKYLETHER
LUBRICANT WITH AN ADDITIVE COMPOSED OF AN
AROMATIC PHOSPHINE SUBSTITUTED WITH
PERFLUOROALKYLETHER GROUPS
Carl E. Snyder, Jr^ Trotwood, and Christ Tambonki, Dayton,
both of Ohio, aiiignora to The United States of America as
represented by the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington,
FUed Sep. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 418,116
Int a.J ClOM J/10
UA a 252-49.9 10 Claims
1. A lubricant composition comprising (1) a base fluid con-
sisting essentially of a mixture of linear fluorinated polyethers
having the formula
C3F7[CF(CF3)CF20],,CF2CF3
wherein n is an integer having a value of 5 to 50 and (2) a
corrosion inhibiting amount of an aromatic phosphine with
perfluorinated polyalkylether substituents having the formula
m
RjORjCFz
wherein R/OR/— is a perfluoroalkylether group containing at
least one ether linlcage.
4,438,008
LUBRICANT, CONTAINING ESTERIHED
ETHYLENE/ACRYUC ACID OR ETHYLENE/MALEIC
ACID COPOLYMERS AS THE ACTIVE INGREDIENT,
FOR MOULDING CHLORINE-CONTAINING
THERMOPLASTICS
Dieter Oeder, Weisenheim; Walter Ziegler, Edingen; Manfred
Daeuble; Wolfram Dietsche, both of Frankenthal; Albert
Hettche, Hessheim, and Stefan Weiss, Neckargemuend, aU of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft,
Lodwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,276
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 26,
1981,3107245 '
Int CL^ ClOM 3/12
UAa252-56R fiOaims
1. A lubricant for molding chlorine-containing thermoplas-
tics and combined in an amount of 0.1 to 5 phr with said chlo-
rine-containing thermoplastic, which contains ethylene/acry-
lic acid or ethylene/maleic acid copolymers esterified, in a
molar ratio of carboxyl groups to alcoholic hydroxyl groups of
from 1.0.2 to 1:1, with Ci-C2o-aliphatic alcohols which may or
may not contain ether groups, the copolymers, prior to esterifi-
cation, having a mean molecular weight of from 500 to 10,000
and containing from 2 to 15% by weight of acrylic acid or
from 1 to 8% by weight of maleic acid as copolymerized units,
the percenuges being based on copolymer.
silicates, phosphates, chlorides, carbonates and mixtures
thereof;
(b) from about 1 to about 35% by weight of a surfactant
mixture of (i) about 0.5 to about 5% by weight of a sorbi-
tan nonionic surfactant selected from the group consisting
of sorbitan monolaurate, sorbitan monooleate, sorbitan
trioleate and mixtures thereof; (ii) from about 0.5 to about
30% of at least one other nonionic surfactant; and (iii)
from about 0.5 to 3.0% by weight, of an ethoxylated
sorbitan nonionic surfactant, said mixture having an HLB
of from 8.5 to 10.5;
(c) from about 5 to about 60% by weight of a solvent se-
lected from the group consisting of isoparafTmic hydro-
carbons having a boiling range of from 98'-210' C, low
odor petroleum solvents having a boiling range of from
195"'-250' C, kerosene, d-Limonene and mixtures thereof;
and
(d) the balance water.
16. A water-in-oil detergent emulsion to be applied to fabrics
as a laundry pre-spotting composition contained in a pressur-
ized aerosol container comprising from 95 to 80% by weight of
a composition comprising:
(a) from about 1 to about 30% by weight of a salt selected
from the group consisting of citrates, gluconates, borates,
silicates, phosphates, chlorides, carbonates and mixtures
thereof;
(c) from about 1 to about 35% by weight of a surfactant
mixture of (i) about 0.5 to about 5% by weight of a sorbi-
tan nonionic surfactant selected from the group consisting
of sorbitan monolaurate, sorbitan monooleate, sorbitan
trioleate and mixtures thereof; and (ii) from about 0.5 to
about 30% of at least one other nonionic surfactant, said
mixture having an HLB of from 8.5 to 10.5;
(c) from about 5 to about 60% by weight of a solvent se-
lected from the group consisting of isoparafTmic hydro-
carbons having a boiling range of from 98*-210' C, low
odor petroleum solvents having a boiling range of from
195'-250' C, kerosene, d-Limonene and mixtures thereof;
and
(d) the balance water and from 5 to 20% by weight of a
propellent.
4,438,010
SOAP TABLET INCLUDING PERFUME-CONTAINING
PLASTIC CORE AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING SAME
Jerome I. Lindauer, Hillsdale; Ira D. HiU, Locust, and Arthur L.
Liberman, Highlands, all of N J., assignors to International
Flavors ft Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,263
Int CL^ CUD 3/50. 9/44
U.S. a. 252-91 2 Claims
4,438 009
LOW SOLVENT LAUNDRY PRE-SPOTTING
COMPOSmON
Jeanne A. Brusky, and Rodney W. Schrader, both of Racine
Coonty, Wis., assi^iors to S. C. Johnson A Son, Inc., Racine,
Wis.
FUed Aug. 14, 1981. Ser. No. 293,049
Int CiJ CllD 1/7Z 1/825. 3/04, 3/42
UA a 252-90 16 Claims
1. A water-in-oil detergent emulsion to be applied to fabrics
as a laundry pre-spotting composition comprising:
(a) from about 1 to about 30% by weight of a salt selected
from the group consisting of citrates, gluconates, borates,
1. A detergent bar comprising:
(i) an aromatized plastic core comprising a polymer in the
solid phase and imbedded in said polymer an aromatizing
agent which is compatible with said polymer;
(ii) surrounding said plastic core and in intimate contact with
the surface area of said plastic core, and adhering to said
plastic core, a detergent composition existing in the solid
phase, said detergent composition having a defined outer
surface;
the quantity of aromatizing agent within the plastk core, the
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1217
physical properties of the plastic core, and the physical proper-
ties of the detergent composition surrounding the plastic core
being such that the aromatizing agent is transported at a steady
state from the plastic core into said detergent composition past
the outer surface of said detergent composition and into the
environment surrounding said detergent bar, said aromatizing
agent being compatible with said detergent composition, said
detergent bar being produced by the process consisting essen-
tially of the steps of:
(a) forming a thermoplastic polymeric pellet having imbed-
ded therein aromatizing agent;
(b) Collecting a plurality of said aromatized polymeric pel-
lets and forming the plurality of aromatized thermoplastic
polymeric pellets into an aromatized thermoplastic core
by means of fusion of the plurality of pellets in a mold; and
(c) propelling a detergent composition in the fluid state in
such a manner as to cause said detergent to surround the
aromatized plastic core; and
(d) causing the detergent composition surrounding the aro-
matized thermoplastic polymeric core to harden.
4,438,011
METHOD FOR STERILIZING SOFT CONTACT LENS
John G. B. Howes, Hertford Heath, England, assignor to Smith
and Nephew Associated Companies Limited, England
FUed Nor. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,710
Qaims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Dec. 18, 1980,
8040532
Int a.3 CllD 1/84. 3/48
U.S. a. 252—106 10 Claims
1. A method of sterilizing a soft contact lens, which com-
prises contacting said lens for sufficient time to effect steriliza-
tion with a substantially isotonic, aqueous solution having
small or no propensity to cause ocular irritation, said solution
comprising a sterile aqueous solution of 0.00125 to 0.0025% of
a chlorhexidine salt and sufficient nonionic tonicity adjusting
agent to render the solution substantially isotonic, said tonicity
adjusting agent containing ionic species producing a tonicity
equivalent to not more than a 0.3% solution of sodium chlo-
ride.
of sodium and potassium, x is a number from 0.7 to 1.5 and
y is a number from 0.8 to 6, and
(B) from 0.5% to 6% by weight of a practically water-
insoluble nonionic aliphatic surface-active compound
having a turbidity point of a 1% solution in water of
below room temperature, in water, said aqueous suspen-
sion being capable of being pumped after 24 hours of
standing.
12. An aqueous suspension having a pH of between 7 and 12
of water-insoluble, calcium binding aluminosilicates with im-
proved subility against settling consisting of
(A) from 20% to 42% by weight on the anhydrous basis of
at least one crystalline, fmely-divided, water-insoluble
silicate compound having a calcium binding power of
from 100 to 200 mg CaO/gm when measured at 22* C. for
15 minutes according to the Calcium Binding Power Test
Method described in the specification and a primary parti-
cle size of from 0. 1^ to 30^ having the formula, combined
water not shown
(M20),.Al:03.(Si02)>.
where M is a member selected from the group consisting
of sodium and potassium, x is a number from 0.7 to 1 .5 and
y is a number from 0.8 to 6,
(B) from 0.5% to 6% of a practically water-insoluble non-
ionic aliphatic surface-active compound having a turbid-
ity point of a 1% solution in water of below room temper-
ature, and
(C) a content up to 0.5% by weight, sufficient to exhibit an
antifoaming effect, of antifoaming agents selected from
the group consisting of foam-reducing soaps, silicones and
triazine derivatives, in water, said aqueous suspension
being capable of being pumped after 24 hours of standing.
4,438,012
STABLE AQUEOUS SUSPENSION OF
WATER-INSOLUBLE, CALOUM-BINDING
ALUMINOSIUCATES AND NONIONIC SUSPENDING
AGENTS
Dieter KiUiling, Monheim Rhld.; Huppertzl Josef, Diisseldorf-
Holthausen; Peter Krings, Krefeld, and Herbert Renter,
HUden Rhld., aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hen-
kel KomnumditgeseUschaft auf Aktien, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-fai-part of Ser. No. 620,387, Oct 7, 1975, Pat No.
4,072,622. This appUcation Dec. 14, 1977, Ser. No. 860,619
Claims priority, appUcation Austria, Oct. 10, 1974, 8151; Fed.
Rep. of Germany, Jnn. 19, 1975, 2527388
Int a.3 BOIF 3/12: CllD 1/72. 3/12. 17/08
U.S. a. 252—131 12 Claims
1. An aqueous suspension having a pH of between 7 and 12
of water-insoluble, calcium binding aluminosilicates with im-
proved stability against settling consisting of
(A) from 20% to 42% by weight on the anhydrous basis of
at least one crystalline, finely-divided, water-insoluble
silicate compound having a calcium binding power of
from 100 to 200 mg CaO/gm when measured at 22* C. for
IS minutes according to the Calcium Binding Power Test
Method described in the specification and a primary parti-
cle size of from O.lfi to 30^ and having the formula,
combined water not shown
(M20)x.Al203.(Si02)^
where M is a member selected from the group consisting
4,438,013
PHOSPHORYLATED AND THIOPHOSPHORYLATED
POLY(OXYALKYLATED) HYDRAZINES AND
SELECTED ADDUCTS AND THEIR USE AS CORROSION
INHIBTTORS
Gregory W. Grynkewich, West Hafen, Conn., assignor to OUn
Corporation, New Haven, Conn.
FUed May 27, 1983, Ser. No. 499,039
Int a.J C23G 1/06. 1/18; O07F 9/02
U.S. a. 252—146 33 Claims
1. A composition comprising the reaction product of a poly-
(oxyalkylated) hydrazine and at least one compound selected
from the group consisting of a phosphorylating agent, a thio-
phosphorylating agent, and mixtures thereof, wherein said
poly(oxyalkylated) hydrazine has the formula:
R
I
H-(-OCHCH2)»
H-(-OCHCH2),
R
\ /
N— N
/ \
R
I
(CH2CH(»xH
(CHjCHCHiH
E
wherein each R is individually selected from hydrogen, lower
alkyl groups having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms and phenyl; and
the sum of w, x. y, and z is from about 4 to about 25, and
wherein the mole ratio of said poly(oxyalkylated) hydrazine to
said compound being from about 0.1:1 to 10:1.
\
1218
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438,014
NONIONIC SURFACTANTS FOR AUTOMATIC
DISHWASHER DETERGENTS
Rob|«JJcott, New Chy, N.Y, MrigMr to Unio. C^bide
Flkd Feb. 16, 1582, Scr. No. 349,174
„„ ^ Int. CL> CllD //(J(J
VS. a. 252-174J1 , Q^j^
1. A method of washing dishes comprising washing them in
a mechamcal ^shwasher with an aqueous solution comprising
a nomomc surfactant having a cloud point of 20*-30* C and
having the formula:
R— O— A:^B— H
wherein R is 2^ylhexanol or n-octanol; A is an oxypropyl-
ene group; x is 8 or 9; and B is a random mixture of oxyethylene
and oxypropylene groups with the molar ratio of oxyethylene
to oxypropylene groups being about 3:1; in a dishwasher deter-
gent exhibitmg low-foaming, good wetting and scouring hav-
mg a chlonne retention of at least 15 percent, and not needing
an auxiliary foam suppressor.
ponent (b). if present, with an aqueous solution of component
(a) and component (d) if present, at room temperature, then
successively adding under continuous mixing a calcium chlo-
nde solution, an aluminum hydroxide solution and a waterglass
^iT^u "ajnounts sufficient to form said component (0 in
situ, fo lowed by adding component (c). if present,1tnd compcv
nent (e) if present, and recovering said stable, aqueous cleanbs
agent composition. v«iiug
4,438,015
LAVATORY CLEANSING BLOCK
Otto Haber, Wioterthnr, Switzerland, aadgnor to Lerer Broth-
ers Compuiy. New York, N.Y.
Filed Ang. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 408,988
81^* '**^*'' ■'**^*^**" ^"**«» K-gdom, Aug. 24, 1981,
. , « « Irt. as CllD 3/37. 1 7/00
UA a 252-174J4 ^ cWm.
1. A process for preparing a Uvatory cleansing block in-
tended for immersion in the cistern of a lavatory bowl or
unnal, comprising the steps of melting a mixture of 1-25 parts
by weight of a copolymer of vinybnethy! ether and maleic
0. 1 and 2.0 and 50-99 parts by weight of a solid, water-soluble
nomomc surface active compound, heating the melt further to
raise the temperature to about 125--135- C, and keeping it at
Am level to effect esterification to such an extent that the
resulting blocks do not have a tendency to flocculate in use,
foUowed by coolmg and adding as desired builders and other
mgredients before solidification, casting the liquid product into
forms where it soUdifies upon further cooling to form blocks or
tablets of about 20-150 grams.
4,438,017
SCDjnLLATION UQUID COMPATIBLE WITH HIGH
PERFORMANCE UQUID CHROMATOGRAPHY
SOLVENTS
"^"S JS^^T*™"*^ '^"^ *«•"«• »"f er. Md Harold
tion, Morris Township, Morris County, N J.
FUed Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 425,422
.Tc ^ « iBt a.3 O09K ///05
U.S. a 252-301.17 4cWmi
1. A liquid scintUlation composition having a substantially
umform counting efficiency when mixed with specimens com-
pnsmg radio-togged compositions in a solvent/water mixture
over a wide range of solvent/water ratios comprising
*"ti?n°""*' "<J"'d capable of capturing energy from radia-
at least one fluor compound;
optionally one low molecular weight alcohol; and
a surfactant consisting essentially of a oxyalkylated straight
Cham alcohol or acid.
4,438,016
STABLE AQUEOUS CLEANING AGENTC AND A
PROCESS FOR THEIR PRODUCnON
pJPr**',^!'"*"^' ■*• «""»«*»* DiKh. Haan, both of
reo. Kep. of Germany, aaiigDort to Henkel KomaianditaeseU-
■chall aaf Aktiea, DoMeldorf-Holthauien, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
Duay
FUed Mar. 16, 1983. Ser. No. 475,869
192r32400W**^' •^"**°" ''«*• ^' »' Gennany, Oct 29,
InUCiiCllD 3/ J2
UAa.252-174J5 g ciaima
1. A process for the production of a stable, aqueous cleaning
agent composition comprising (a) a surfactant-effective
amount of a surfactant selected from the group consisting of
non<hlonne stable anionic surfaceants, non-chlorine stable
nomomc surfactants, chlorine-stable anionic surfactants, chlo-
nne-stable nonionic surfactants and mixture thereof, (b) from 0
to an abrasively-effective amount of at least one abrasive com-
ponent, (c) from 0 to a blcaching-cffective amount of an active-
chlorme-relcasmg compound and (d) from 0 to an effective
amount of dyes and (e) from 0 to an effective amount of fra-
granctt, with (0 a further suspending-effective amount of an
amorphous calcium aluminum silicate precipitated in situ
where an effective amount of at least one of component (b) and
component (c) is present, comprising the steps of mixing com- a
4,438 018
»«w ^r!!^^ CATALYZED* PREPARATION OF
POLYOXYALKYLENE SURFACTANTS FOR PHENOLIC
FOAM STABILIZATION
Richard L. F^ntzel, Qearwater, Fla., assignor to The Celotex
Corporation, Tampa, Fla. v^iwwx
Continuation of Ser. No. 113,841, Jan. 21, 1980, abandoned. Iliis
application Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319^68
. , o ^ Int. as BOIF ; 7/32. J 7/36
UA a. 252-356 » Claim.
1. A process for preparing a surfactant for cellular foams
comprising reacting a cyclic nitrogenous vinyl monomer and
an estenfied unsaturated dibasic acid by free radical addition
polymerization in the presence of
(a) a polyoxyalkylene adduct having the formula
H— polyoxyilkylene ch«in),R.
wherein R is an organic or inorganic radical and t is the
number of polyoxyalkylene chains reacted onto R,
(b) an organic or inorganic per-compound, and
(c) a metal catalyst selected from the group consisting of
ferrocene, acetylferroccne. benzoylferrocene, cobalto-
cene, l.I'-diacetylferrocene. l.r-ferrocenebis-(diphenyl-
phosphine), nickelocene, hafnocene dichloride, fer-
rocenecarboxaldehydc, mixtures of said ferrocene com-
pounds and other transition metal compounds containing
a metal having an atomic number of 21 to 30. and a mix-
ture of compounds selected from the group consisting of
iron ai) sulfate and iron ail) sulfate, iron (11) sulfate and
iron ail) chloride, manganese ai) acetylacetonate and
manganese ail) acetylacetonate, cobalt ai) benzoate and
cobalt ail) acetylacetonate. copper O) acetete and copper
(II) acetylacetonate, and vanadium aiD acetylacetonate
and vanadium (TV) oxide acetylacetonate, to provide a
foam surfactant composition, wherein the major compo-
nent of said foam surfactant composition comprises the
product formed from the reaction of said cyclic nitroge-
nous vinyl monomer and unsaturated diester onto said
polyoxyalkylene adduct.
35. A surfactant for ceUular foams comprising the product of
free radical addition polymerization of a cyclic nitrogenous
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1219
vinyl monomer and an esterified unsaturated dibasic acid in the
presence of
(a) a polyoxyalkylene adduct having the formula
H— polyoxyalkylene chain)rR,
wherein R is an organic or inorganic radical and t is the
number of polyoxyalkylene chains reacted onto R,
(b) an organic or inorganic per-compound and
(c) a metal catalyst selected from the group consisting of
ferrocene, acetylferrocene, benzoylferrocene. cobalto-
cene, l.l'-diacetylferrocene, l.r-ferrocenebis-(diphenyl-
phosphine). nickelocene. hafnocene dichloride. fer-
rocenecarboxaldehyde. mixtures of said ferrocene com-
pounds and other transition metal compounds containing
a metal having an atomic number of 21 to 30, and a mix-
ture of compounds selected from the group consisting of
iron (IT) sulfate and iron (IIT) sulfate, iron (II) sulfate and
iron ail) chloride, manganese (II) acetylacetonate and
manganese ail) acetylacetonate, cobalt (II) benzoate and
cobalt ail) acetylacetonate. copper (I) acetate and copper
(IT) acetylacetonate. and vanadium (III) acetylacetonate
and vanadium (IV) oxide acetylacetonate, wherein the
major component of said polymerization comprises the
product formed from the reaction of said cyclic nitroge-
nous vinyl monomer and unsaturated diester onto said
polyoxyalkylene adduct.
4,438,019
CATALYST FOR THE POLYMERIZATION OF OLEFINS
BASED UPON MAGNESIUM AND TRANSITION METAL
Daniel C. Durand, and Pierre M. Mangin, both of Martignes,
France, assignors to BP Chimie, Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 63,123, Aug. 3, 1979, abandoned, which
is a continuation of Ser. No. 850,230, Not. 11, 1977, abandoned,
wUch is a continuation of Ser. No. 363,037, May 23, 1973,
abandoned. This appUcation Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,354
Claims priority, appUcation France, May 25, 1972, 72 18595
Int a.3 C08F 4/64. 4/68
VS. CL 502—169 1 Claim
1. The method of preparing pre-oxidized solid catalysts
which can be used in the polymerization of olefins having the
formula CH2^CHR in which R is hydrogen or an alkyl group
containing 1 to 8 carbon atoms consisting essentially of react-
ing magnesium, a monohalogenated hydrocarbon selected
from the group consisting of chlorine and bromine derivatives
of a saturated hydrocarbon and a transition metal compound
having the general formuht MX4-m(OR)m wherein X is chlo-
rine, R is an alkyl group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, m is
a whole number or fraction thereof from 0 to 4 and M is a
transition metal selected from the group consisting of titanium
and vanadium at a temperature within the range of —20* to
ISO* C. for a time sufficient to react the magnesium, monohalo-
genated hydrocarbon and the compound of the transition
metal, and then contacting the solid magnesium and transition
metal compound resulting from the previous reaction with an
oxidizing compound selected from the group consisting of
chlorine, bromine and iodine to completely convert the transi-
tion metal to its original valence, in which the magnesium,
monohalogenated hydrocarbon and transition metal com-
pound are reacted in amounts such that:
(a) the ratio between the number of molecules of the mono-
halogenated hydrocarbon and the number of magnesium
atoms is within the range of 0.S to 10, and
(b) the ratio between the number of molecules of transition
metal and the number of magnesium molecules is less than
0.S
whereby the activity of the catalyst after oxidation is not
substantially modified and the oxidized catalyst can be
stored and used in the presence of air.
4,438,020
CATALYST SUITABLE FOR PREPARING ALDEHYDES
Mohammad M. Habib, Allison Park, and Wayne R. Pretnr,
Gibsonia, both of Pa., aMlgnora to Gulf Research A DcTciop-
ment Company, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 289,404, Aug. 3, 1981, Pat No.
4,361,706. This appUcation Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 417,534
Int a.3 BOIJ 3J/02
VS. a. 252—162 34 Claims
1. A novel catalyst composition comprising (1) cobalt, (2)
iodine and (3) a ligand containing phosphorus atoms separated
by a sterically constrained carbon-cariwn bonding, the molar
ratio of cobalt to said ligand being in the range of about 1 :2 to
about 7:1. and the molar ratio of cobalt to iodine being in the
range of about 1:1.15 to about 1:15.
4,438,021
CATALYST FOR DEHYDROCOUPUNG OF TOLUENE
OR XYLENE
Yoshio Okada; Takashi Terauchl; Makoto Naoki, and Masato-
shi HUio, aU of Iwaki, Japan, assignors to Kureha Kagakn
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. IS, 1982, Ser. No. 358,214
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 27, 1981, 5646018;
Mar. 27, 1981, 56-46019; Mar. 27, 1981, 5646020
Int a.} BOIJ 23/06
VS. a. 502—341 1 Claim
1. A catalyst for dehydrocoupling of toluene or xylene,
consisting essentially of an activated catalyst composition
represented by the general formula d):
ZoaTllPe
(IX
where a denotes a number in a range of 0.25 to 5; b is 1 and c
denotes a number necessary for fulfilling the respective aver-
age atomic valencies of Zn and Tl in the oxidation states in
which they exist in the composition.
4,438,022
LUBRICATING OIL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING
POLYETHER POLYAMINE ETHANES
Curtis B. Campbell, Rodeo, Califs assignor to ChcTron Research
Company, S^ Francisco, Calif.
FUed Jul. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 403,606
Int a.} ClOM 1/32
VS. a 252— 51 J R 9 Claims
1. A lubricating oil composition comprising a major portion
of oil of lubricating viscosity, and a minor amount of hydro-
carbyl polyoxyalkylene polyamine ethane of molecular weight
from about 300 to about 2500; wherein said hydrocarbyl group
contains from 1 to about 30 carbon atoms, said polyoxyalkyl-
ene moiety comprises 1 to 30 oxyalkylene units selected from
oxyalkylene units having from 2 to about 5 carbon atoms, said
ethane moiety contains from about 2 to about 8 carbon atoms
and said polyamine moiety comprisesfrom about 2 to about 12
amine nitrogen atoms and from about 2 to 40 carbon atoms.
4,438,023
OXYGENATED TRICYCUC DERIVATIVES OF
NORBORNANE AND USE OF SAME AS PERFUMING
INGREDIENTS
Werver Skorianetx, Dardafay, and GilBthcr OhlofT, Bcracz,
both of Switaarland, amigann to Flrmeaich 8A, GewTa,
FUed Apr. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 366,552
Claiw priority, appUcatioa Switaerlaad, May 21, 1981,
3315/81
lirt. CL^ CllB 9/00: OOTD 311/78
VS. CL 252—522 R 7
1. Compounds of formula
1220
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
.OD
(D
wherein symbol X represents a divalent radical of formula
— C«CH-CH3
— CH2
7. A perfuming composition containing as perfuminir inffre-
dient 0.1% to 20% of a compound of formula (I) as set forth in
claun 1.
4,438,024
STABLE UQUID DETERGENT COMPOSITIONS
iS*P^-il;'?"r' ^^S"' ^~'" ^' ^*°' Cincinnati,
Si S!!i i Jf«>«*e». Wyoming, aU of Ohio, assignors to
me Procter A Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
FUed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,876
f?-^?^'*' 5 Claim.
1. A stable liquid detergent composition that recovers, after
rreezmg to a smgle isotropic phase by 50* F., comprising-
W a C12-16 alkyl dimethylamine oxide surfactant-
(b) an alcohol polyethoxylate sulfate surfactant of the for-
mula R*0(C2H40)^S03M wherein R* is an alkyl radical
contaming from about 12 to about 18 carbon atoms, m is
from about 1 to about 4. and M is a compatible cation;
(c) from about 15% to about 25% by weight of a water-solu-
ble mtnlotnacetote detergency builder capable of seques-
tenng calcium and magnesium ions in water solution-
(d) from about 2% to about 4% by weight of monoethaiiol-
amme;
(e) from about 4% to about 7% by weight of a hydrotrope
se ectwl from the group consisting of the water-soluble
salts of toluene sulfonate, xylene sulfonate, cumene sulfo-
nate, and mixtures thereof; and
(0 from about 55% to about 80% by weight of water- said
composition containing from about 8% to about 17% by
weight of amine oxide and alcohol polyethoxyUte sulfate
surfactants, provided the molar ratio of amine oxide to
alcohol polyethoxyUte sulfate is from about 0.8 to about
1.2. and containing from about 25% to about 37% by
w«ght of^the amine oxide and alcohol polyethoxylate
sulfate surfactants and the water-soluble nitrilotriacetate
builder.
R-CH-CCX)M'.
SO3M2
in which R is an alkyl group having from 12 to 16 carbon
atoms and M« and M2 are each independently from the
other a cation selected from the class consisting of magne-
sium ion JMg+ + and substituted or unsubstituted anSo-
mum ions, and •"""«-
(a-2) up to 80% by weight of a water-soluble salt of an
fomdT'*^ ^'"^ *^** ""*' represented by the general
R-CH-COOR'
SO3M3
in which R has the same meaning as defmed above. R> u
an alkyl group having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms and M3 is
a cation mdcpendently selected from the same class as
defined for the symbols M> and M2 above, and
from 85 to 50 parts by weight of a component (b) which is a
d^thanolamide of a higher fatty acid, said fatty acid having
about 1 1 to about 15 carbon atoms on an average m a moSe
4,438 025
DETERGENT COMPOSITIONS
i!Sil?S' ^"""ir^, Seiiti Ota, Chib., mid SeUuko
Tabato, TacUkawa, aU of Japan, assignors to Uon Corpora-
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453,691
Claims priority, application Japan, Dm. 30, 1981, 56-210654
.T o ^ ^ ^-^ C"^ ^/^* ^^665. 1/52
UA a 252-545 , ci.^
1. A detergent composition suitable for washing glassware
without leaving water spots, and having excellent detergency
and foammg characteristics, said composition consisting essen-
tially of:
from 15 to 50 parts by weight of a component (a) composed of
(a-1) at least 20% by weight of a water-soluble neutral salt of
an a-sulfonated fatty acid represented by the general
formula
4,438,026
^^ _,*?^JC*^I>EWATERING COMPOSITION
Edwaid G T^kowskl, WiUimnsTllle, N.Y., assignor to AlUed
Utrporation, Morris Township, Morris County, N J
Filed Feb. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 470,342
II « /^ SI- ^S^^^ ^/^< ^/68. 3/43: C23G 5/02
KJA. u. 252—545 j Claims
scn'tidl '°'''*°^''"^'*^^* ^^J^S composition comprising es-
(a) 1.1.2-trichIoro.l,2,2-trifluoroethane. and containing
(b) from about 0.05 to about 0.5 weight percent linear dode-
cylbenzene sulfonic/amine salt and
(c) from about 0.05 to about 0.5 weight percent of polyphos-
phone ester acid anhydride comprising a reaction product
of an aliphatic alcohol of 4-12 carbon atoms and the
dimenc phosphoric acid derived from P2OS and
(d) from about 0.05 to about 1 weight percent of a demulsi-
fier selected from Uie group consisting of (i) acctylenic
diols and mixtures thereof witii (ii) aliphatic primary alco-
hols of su to twelve carbon atoms and (iii) phosphate
til-esters having carbon substitiienu of Uiree to twelve
carbon atoms.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1221
4,438,027
CHLORINATED ALKYLAROMATIC BASED
COMPOUNDS AND NEW UQUID DIELECTRICS
Hcarl Mathais, Jarrie; Raymond Commandeur, VizUle, both of
France; Achlllc Pontoglio, and Sergio Nebel, both of Brescia,
Italy, assignors to PCUK Produits Chimiqucs Ugine Kuhl-
maBB, Paris, France
ContinnatioB of Ser. No. 243,143, Mar. 12, 1981, abandoned,
which is a coBtinBation of Ser. No. 57,982, Jul. 16, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,082
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jul. 27, 1978, 78 22216;
Feb. 20, 1979, 79 04259
Int. a.) HOIB i/^¥
MS. a. 252—581 9 Claims
a urea
inorganic compound capable of hydration, and
polymer.
2. The fire retardant plastic of claim 1 wherein said anhy-
drous inorganic compound is anhydrous borax.
OOKHI
JOOKMi,j
«0*C
3. The fire retardant plastic of claim 1 in which said inor-
ganic compound which releases water when heated is selected
from the group consisting of borax decahydrate, borax penu-
hydrate and boric acid.
Tfmptroturt
1. Liquid dielectrics of formula:
(I)
CH2—
(CH3)y
(CHl\y-X))^
4,438,029
SYNTHETIC PEPTIDES
Bruce W. Erickson, Goster, N.J., and Tony E. Hugli, San
Diego, Calif., assignors to Research Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 870,713, Jan. 19, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 762,427, Jan. 25,
1977. ThU appUcation Feb. 21, 1979, Ser. No. 13,176
Int. a.' C07C 103/52
U.S. a. 260-112.5 R 17 Claims
1. Ala-Ser-His-Leu-GIy-Leu-Ala-Arg-Oly.
where n. x. y and z have value 1 or 2.
4. An insulating fluid comprising one or more compounds
according to the formula of claim 1 in admixture with one or
more compounds of the general formula:
(2)
in which a varies from 2 to 4. b varies from 0 to 2 and R is an
aliphatic hydrocarbon radical containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms
and an acid acceptor.
4,438,028
nRE RETARDANT AND COMPOUNDS BASED
THEREON
Hans-Bemd Schndttmann, Langenhorster Str. 30, 5620 Velbert,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Alfons Thier, Rosbach, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Charles M. Wiersma and Jack G.
Wiersma, botii of Grand Rapids, Mich., by said Alfons Thier
FUed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,544
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 12,
1981, 3100626
Int. a.' C09K 3/28
U.S. a. 252-609 «7 Claims
1. A fire retardant plastic comprising:
a plastic resin composition combined with monoammonium
phosphate, ammonium polyphosphate, an inorganic com-
pound which releases water when heated, an anhydrous
4438 030
ANTIBODIES TO IMMUNOGENIC PEPTIDES AND
THEIR USE TO PURIFY HUMAN HBROBLAST
INTERFERON
David J. Ganfleld, Gementon, N J.; Michael W. HunkapiUer,
San Gabriel, CaUf.; Ernest Knight, Jr., and Bruce D. Korant,
botii of Wilmington, Del., auignors to E. I. Du Pont dc Ne-
mours and Company, WUmington, Del.
Dirision of Ser. No. 172,466. Jul. 25, 1980, Pat. No. 4,341,761.
ThU appUcation Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,743
Int. C\? C07C 103/52: A61K 45/02
U.S. G. 260-112.5 R 2 Claims
1. A process for purifying human fibroblast interferon con-
Uined in a liquid phase mixture of proteins, comprising (i)
contacting the protein mixture with antibodies produced in
response to the peptide having the amino acid sequence:
(X-Ser-Tyr-A«i-Leu-I-eu-01y-Phe-Leu-Gln-Arg-
Ser-Ser-Atn-Phe-0ln-Y-01n.Ly»-Leu-Leu),
wherein:
X is selected from Met and Ser,
Y is selected from His and Cys, and
n is 1 to 12;
and forming an interferon-antibody complex; (ii) separating the
intcrferon-antibody complex from the liquid phase; and (lii)
separating the interferon from the antibody.
1222
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,43M31
N^ALKYLSULFONYD-L-PROLINE AMTOE AND
NKALKYLSULFONYL).2^ARBOXYUC ACID
w,^ AMTOE-INDOLINE DERIVATIVES
^^"^^'^^^^Vf MalTern, and Scott J. Childreas, PhUadel-
phia, both of P.^ assignors to American Home Products
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
. « .^ISLF^- ^' *'*2, Ser. No. 351.716
IT « ??* S^^/^''^^' ^^^^^ ^77/%- C07C J03/52
UAa.260-112JR 23 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
^CjC ^(CH2),
R? N— C— CO— NHSOjR
or
^rH—
I
A-*CH— CO
I
Rl
CO-NHSO2R
wherein:
m is 0 or 1, and m is 1 when X is S;
n is 1 or 2;
X is — CH2— or S;
R is methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, or iso-propyl;
R7 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, 'phenyl, or substi-
tuted phenyl;
Rg is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
R9 is hydrogen, hydroxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy. or
halogen;
RlO is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
Rl is hydrogen, lower alkyl. 'phenyl, substituted phenyl,
phen-lower alkyl. substituted phen lower alkyl, amino
lower alkyl, or perfluoroalkyl;
A is:
M3M32
UNIQUE T.LYMPHOCYTE LINE AND PRODUCE
n.-!^ «, ^ .. '^^^'VED THEREFROM
iS.f iJ?*^ ■** ^^^^ G. Qoan, both of Los Angeka,
Continuation of Ser. No. 229,900, Jan. 30, 1901, abmnkmed. TWs
i^ r^ , fSS^**"" ''■^ ^ ^'•3' Ser. No. 456,177
V^^J^V.^i^ ^^^ ^^/^- «» I/9J: C07G 7/00
u A u. 260—112 R 22 Claims
1. A method for producing in isolatable amounts an excre-
tory protem produced by a T-lymphocyte,
la said method comprising:
cultivating as a single cell suspension the Mo cell line in a
nutnent medium, whereby said excretory proteins are
produced and excreted into said nutrient medium.
14. A protem composition comprising erythroid potentiating
factor m an amount of at least about 50,000 units/mg.
4438033
^^JS52i^ CHIRAL PHOSPHINES, METHODS FOR
THEIR PREPARATION, CATALYTIC SYCTEMS
CONTAINING THEM AND CATALYTIC PR^^is IN
WHICH THEY ARE USED '^'^ *^
JJ^chetti, Sassari and Giovanni A. Faedda, Sassari, aU of
Italy, assignors to ConsigUo Nazionale DeUe Ricerche, Rome,
FUed No?. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 442,679
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Dec. 4, 1981, 25463 A/81
„„ _ lot a.3 C09J i//00
UA CI. 260-239.55 C 5 q^
1. New steroidal chiral phosphines of formula:
lb
(I)
R2-S-(CHR3V
'■X>
wherein R represents a phosphorated group selected between
(CH2),-CH-NH-, or
COR3
,XD""'T'°'''-
P{C6H5)2 and /
■CHjPCCiHsh
O -*-CH2P(C6H5)2
in which:
R2 is hydrogen or R4CO- where R4 is hydrogen, lower
alkyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, phen lower alkyl or
substituted phen lower alkyl;
R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, beiizoyl, or substituted benzoyl;
R* IS SRi 1 where Ri 1 is hydrogen, lower alkanoyl, benzoyl'
substituted benzoyl, benzoxycarbonyl, or substituted ben-
zoxycarbonyl;
R5 is hydroxy, lower alkoxy or amino;
Y is hydrogen, halogen, a lower alkyl group, or a lower
alkoxy group;
p is 0 or 1;
q is 0-3; and
r isOor 1.
4438 034
PROCESS FOR PREPARING LACTAM MAGNESIUM
HALIDES
Albert Y. Gamer, Manchester, Mo., assignor to Monsanto Com-
pany, St Louis, Mo.
Filed Jan. 10, 1983, Ser. No. 456,702
Int CL^ O07D 223/10
U.S. a 260-239J R 34 q^,^
1. A method of preparing a lactam magnesium halide com-
pnsmg the steps of:
a. Reactively admixing magnesium, hydrocarbon haUde, and
lactam m the presence of a cyclic ether solvent, wherein the
nahde is either chloride or bromide; and
b. removing the cycUc ether and the hydrocariwn residue.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1223
3. The method of claim 1 wherein said lactam is caprolac-
tam.
4,438,035
METHOD OF PREPARING BENZOTHIAZEPINE
DERIVATIVES
Mitsunori Gaino, Omiya; Ikuo lyima, Urawa; Shigeni Ni-
shimoto, MiDoh; Kuichiro Ikeda, Onoda, and Tokuo Fi^ii,
Yamaguchi, all of Japan, assignors to Tanabe Seiyaku Co.,
Ltd., Oaaka, Japan
FUed Dec. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 445,964
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 7, 1981, 56-197358
Int. a.3 C07D 281/02
VS. a. 260— 239 J B 12 Claims
1. A method of preparing a benzothiazepine derivative of the
formula:
\-OR
N i
I '°
CH2CH2N(CH3)2
(I)
OCH3
wherein R is hydrogen or acetyl, or a pharmaceutically accept-
able acid addition salt thereof, which comprises condensing a
compound of the formula:
(11)
OCH3
wherein R is the same as defined above, with 2-(dime-
thylamino)ethyl halide either in the presence of potassium
hydroxide in acetone or in the presence of potassium carbonate
in a solvent selected from acetone, lower alkyl acetate, a mix-
ture of acetone and water and a mixture of lower alkyl acetate
and water, and if required, further converting the product into
a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
4,438,036
/3-LACTAM ANTIBIOTICS THEIR PREPARATION AND
THEIR USE
Darid F. Corbett, Reigate; Robert Southgate, Wamham, and
Steven Coulton, Cranleigh, aU of England, aaaignors to Bee-
cham Group IJmitwl, England
FUed Oct 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,491
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Oct 25, 1980,
8034453
Int a' C07D 487/04
VJS. a. 260— 245 J T 5 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a compound of the for-
mula (II):
(U)
COjH
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or in vivo hydrolyzable
ester thereof, wherein R' is azido, amino or hydroxy, or is a
group of the sub-formula (a):
-OCOR'
M
wherein R^ is hydrogen or C^ alkyl, aryl or aryl (Ci^) alkyl;
and R" is hydrogen or — S(0)j,R2, wherein x is zero or one and
R2 is C1.6 alkyl, unsubstituted or monosubstituted by amino,
di-(Ci^ alkyl) amino, Ci^ alkyl amino, acylamino, hydroxy,
Ci^ alkanoyloxy, C\^ alkoxy, benzoyl, Ci^-alkanoyl or car-
boxy or an ester or pharmaceutically accepuble salt thereof;
C24 alkenyl, unsubstituted or monosubstituted by hydroxy,
C|.6 alkoxy, acetamido, propionamido or carboxy or an ester
or pharmaceutically accepuble salt thereof; C2.«alkynyl; Ci^
alkanoyl; phenyl, naphthyl, pyrrolyl, furyl, tetrazolyl, thienyl,
indolyl, thionaphthyl, benzofuryl, imidazolyl or thiazolyl, each
of which being unsubstituted or monosubstituted by C 1.3 alkyl,
phenyl, nitro, amino or phenyl substituted by halogen, C1.3
alkoxy or acetamido; phenyl Ci^ alkyl, unsubstituted or mono-
substituted by halogen, C1.3 alkoxy. nitro or acetamido; pyrro-
lyl Ci^-alkyl, unsubstituted or monosubstituted by phenyl or
Ci.3-alkyl; thienyl C1.6 alkyl, unsubstituted or monosubstituted
by phenyl or C1.3 alkyl; furyl Cu alkyl, unsubstituted or mon-
osubstituted by phenyl or C1.3 alkyl; tetrazolyl Ci^-alkyl,
unsubstituted or monosubstituted by phenyl or C].3-alkyl;
imidazolyl Ci^ alkyl, unsubstituted or monosubstituted by
phenyl, nitro, amino or C1.3 alkyl; thiazolyl C|^ alkyl, unsub-
stituted or monosubstituted by one or more phenyl, nitro,
amino or C1.3 alkyl; phenyl C\^ alkanoyl; phenoxy C1.6 alkan-
oyl; or benzoyl; which comprises the reaction of an ester of a
compound uf the formula (111):
(in)
C02H
wherein the stereochemistry at C-8 is inverted compared to
that at C-8 of the compound of the formula (II), with
(a) a compound of the formula (IV):
R*-H
OV)
wherein R* is azido or a group of the sub-formula (a);
(b) a compound of the formula (V):
R'0.C0.N=N.C0.0R6
(V)
wherein R^ and R^ are independently C\^ alkyl, aryl-Ci4
alkyl or aryl; and
(c) a compound of the formula (VI):
(0),R' (VD
P-(0);„R«
(0),R'
wherein 1, m and n are independently zero or one and R^.
1224
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
R' and R' are independently C|^ alley], aryl Cj^ alkyl or
aryl and thereafter if necessary:
(i) reducing a compound of the formula (II) wherein R' is
azido to form a compound of the formula (II) wherein R'
is amino; or
(u) hydrolyzing a compound of the formula 01) wherein R'
is a group of the sub-formula (a) to form a compound of
the formula 01) wherein R' is hydroxy.
OH O
R2— C— CRJ— C— R*
and with a second ketone compound of the formula
4438 037
OXIDAnON OF AROMAnC COMPOUNDS TO
QUINONES BY USE OF SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE
Thomtt F. Rutledge, Avalon, N J., assignor to ICl Americas
Ibc^ Wilmington, Del.
FUed Aug. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 412,140
iBt a.3 C307C 45/28. 50/18
UAa260-385 7 cudnM
1. A method for the preparation of anthraquinones which
comprises oxidizing corresponding anthracenes dissolved in an
inert organic solvent in the presence of an aqueous solution of
sodium hypochlorite as oxidizing agent and maintaining the
pH of the process at from about 4.5 to about 8.0.
4438 038
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF OIL-SOLUBLE
METAL SALTS
JoMph Petronella, Old Bridge Township, Middlesex County,
N J., assignor to Nuodex Inc., Piscataway, N J.
Continnation-in-part of Ser. No. 234,514, Feb. 17, 1981, Pat No
4,337,208. This appUcation May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 378,022
Int a.3 C07F 1/08. 15/04. 15/06; CllC 1/00
VS. a 260-^U ,0 Claims
1. In the process for the production of oil-soluble metal salts
wherein a reaction mixture that comprises a polyvalent metal,
an organic monocarboxylic acid having 5 to 18 carbon atoms,
water, and an inert, water-immiscible organic solvent is heated
m the presence of oxygen for a period of time sufficient to form
the metal salt of said monocarboxylic acid, the improvement
wherein the reaction between the polyvalent metal and the
monocarboxylic acid is carried out in the presence of an alkali
metal salt catalyst.
6. The process of claim 1 wherein the alkali metal catalyst
comprises 30% to 70% by weight of an alkali metal salt com-
ponent selected from the group consisting of alkali metal salts
of mineral acids, alkali metal salts of monocarboxylic acids
having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and mixtures thereof and 30% to
70% by weight of an ammonium salt component selected from
the group consisting of ammonium salts of mineral acids, am-
monium salts of monocarboxylic acids having 1 to 4 carbon
atoms, and mixtures thereof
OH O
R^— C— CR3— C— O— r5
where R and R2 are halogen substituted or unsubstituted
monovalent hyudrocarbon radicals, R3 is selected from the
group consisting of hydrogen, hydrocarbyl, halohydrocarbyl,
and acyl, all not having more than 8 carbon atoms and taken
together with R2 forms together with the carbon atoms to
which they are attached a cyclohydrocarbon substituent of not
more than about 12 carbon atoms and chloro, nitro, acyl,
cyano and carboxy ester substituted cyclic hydrocarbon sub-
stituents, K* is a radical selected from the class consisting of
radicals having not more than about eight carbon atoms se-
lected from the group consisting of hydrocarbyl halohydrocar-
byl, cyanoalkyl, and amino and R' is selected from the group
consisting of monovalent hydrocarbon radicals, amino, ether
and polyether moieties of the formula.
30
-<C^2^)rR
where q varies from 2 to 4 and v varies from 1 to 20 and R^
is a monovalent hydrocarbon radical; said first reaction prod-
uct then being reacted with a diol of the formula
HO— R^-OH
to produce the second and final catalyst reaction product
where R^ is a divalent hydrocarbon radical of 2 to 20 carbon
atoms.
4438 039
TITANIUM chelate' CATALYST FOR SIUCONE
COMPOSITIONS
Melrin D. Beers, Schenectady, and Richard P. Sorprenant,
Troy, both of N.Y., assignors to General Electric Conpany.
Waterford, N.Y.
Filed JoL 2, 1980, Ser. No. 165,327
iBt a.3 O07F 7/28
VS.CL2tO-4293 25 Claims
1. A titanium chelate catalyst for room temperature vulcan-
izable silicone rubber compositions which does not form nod-
ules upon standing prior to cure comprising a first reaction
product of a titanium compound of the formula,
Ti(OR)4
with a first ketone compound of the formula.
4438 040
PROCESS FOR MAKING AMINOPOLYCARBOXYLIC
AOD CHELATES OF IRON
Katherine H. Svatek, Lake Jackson; David A. Wilson, Rich-
wood, and Freddie Griffin, Jr., Missouri City, aU of Tex.,
assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midhmd, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 184,848, Sep. 8, 1980, Pat. No.
4,364,871. This appUcation May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,519
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 21,
, 1999, has been disclaimed,
lat a.3 C07F 15/02
U.S. a 260-439 R 9 cui^
1. A process for producing a ferric-ammonium-chelate of an
aminopolycarboxylic acid wherein an oxide of iron is reacted
with an aminopolycarboxylic acid chelant in the presence of a
base, which comprises: (1) providing a mixture in water of
ammonia together with said chelant in a molar ratio of ammo-
nia to chelant of at least 1.05 but not more than 1.5, (2) adding
to said mixture said oxide of iron at less than 1 mole of iron per
mole of chelant, (3) heating said mixture to a reaction tempera-
ture within the range of from about 85' to about 105* C, (4)
maintaining said reaction temperature for a time sufficient to
complete the reaction, (5) cooUng said mixture to a tempera-
ture within the range of from about 45* to 80* C, (6) introduc-
ing ammonia to said mixture in sufficient amount to dissolve
and to maintain in solution the iron chelate so formed, (7)
cooling said chelate solution to room temperature and (8)
oxidizing any ferrous ion present in said chelate solution to the
ferric ion.
NfARCH 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1223
4,438041
PROCESS FOR PREPARING ESTERS OF CYANOACETIC
AODS
KaocBobn Matsui; Shinichiro Uchiumi; Mitsno Takahashi;
Hideki Asada, and Masani Korahashi, all of Ube, Japan,
assignors to UBE Industries, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 384,417
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 9, 1981, 56-87471
Int a.J C07C 720/00, 121/16. 121/46 121/66
VS. a. 260—164 9 Claims
1. A process for preparing an ester of cyanoacetic acid with
an alcohol selected from the group consisting of an aliphatic
alcohol, a substituted aliphatic alcohol having a nitro group or
a halogen atom substituent, an alicyclic alcohol and a substi-
tuted alicyclic alcohol having a nitro group or a halogen atom
substituent which comprises reacting
(i) a cyanoaceUldehyde acetal represented by the genera!
formula
OR'
R
I /
NCCHCH
\
OR'
wherein R is a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a substi-
tuted alkyl group having a nitro group or a halogen atom
substituent, a cycloaklyl group, a substituted cycloalkyl
group having a nitro group or a halogen atom substituent,
a phenyl group, a substituted phenyl group having a nitro
group or a halogen atom substituent, an aralkyl group, and
a substituted aralkyl group having a nitro group or a
halogen atom, and R' is an alkyl group, a substituted alkyl
group having a nitro group or a halogen atom substituent,
a cycloalkyl group, a substituted cycloalkyl group having
a nitro group or a halogen atom substituent, a phenyl
group, a substituted phenyl group having a nitro group or
a halogen atom substituent, an aralkyl group, a substituted
aralkyl group having a nitro group or a halogen atom
substituent and the two R' groups can be linked to form a
bridging alkylene group;
(ii) hydroxylamine; and
(ill) an alcohol selected from the group consisting of an
aliphatic alcohol, a substituted aliphatic alcohol having a
nitro group or a halogen atom substituent, an alicyclic
alcohol and a substituted alicyclic alcohol having a nitro
group or a halogen atom substituent,
with each other at a temperature of 50* to 150* C, the amount
of said hydroxylamine being within the range of 0. 1 to 10 moles
per one mole of said cyanoacetaldehyde acetaT, to form said
ester of cyanoacetic acid.
or an amide having the formula:
Ar— A— CONH2
(III)
in the presence of a fluorinated siliceous catalyst, said catalyst
having been prepared by (i) impregnating a particulate silica
prepared by the precipitation of sodium silicate with sulfuric
acid, with a dilute aqueous solution of hydrofluoric acid, said
hydrofluoric acid solution having a concentration in HF of less
than about 5% by weight and the ratio by weight of the hy-
drofluoric acid contained in said aqueous solution thereof to
the silica being less than about 5%, followed by (ii) drying the
catalyst thus impregnated.
4,438,042
PREPARA'nON OF AROMATIC/ALIPHATIC NTTRILES
Roland Jacques, Ales; Michel ReppeUn, CoUonges-an-Mont-
d'Or, aod Lanreat Seigneurin, Salindrcs, aU of France, assign-
ors to Rhone-Pottlenc SpedaUtes Chimiques, Courbevoie,
France
FUed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,226
Claims priority, appUcation France, May 15, 1982, 81 09695
Int a.J C07C 120/10
VS. CL 260—465 B 18 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of an aromatic or aliphatic
nitrile having the formula:
4438 043
PROCESS FOR PREPARATION OF DI- OR
TRIFLUOROMETHOXYPHENYL KETONES OR DI- OR
TRIFLUOROMETHYLTHIOPHENYL KETONES
Michel Desbois, RUUeux, France, assignor to Rhone-Poulenc
SpeciaUtcs Chimiques, Courbevoie, France
FUed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 392,886
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 22, 1982, 82 6903
Int a.J C07C 121/75. 45/43, 149/00
VS. a. 260-465 F 12 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of di- or trifluoromethox-
yphenyl ketones or di- or trifluoromethylthiophenyl ketones
comprising reacting a di- or trihalomethoxybenzene or a di- or
trihalomethylthiobenzene with a trihalomethylated aromatic
or aliphatic compound in the presence of boron tnfluonde m
an amount such that the absolute pressure of boron trifluoride
within the reaction vessel exceeds 1 bar and in the presence of
hydrofluoric acid as a solvent; and hydrolyzing the resultant
product.
4,438,044
DI-L-CYSTEINE L-MALATE AND PROCESS FOR THE
PRODUCnON THEREOF
Ichiro Chibata, Suita; AkihUto Sumi, Ashiya; Osamu Ohtsuki,
Nagaokakyo, and Nozomu Izutsu, Yao, aU of Japan, assignors
to Tanabe Sciyaku Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 284,119
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 31, 1980, 55-106280
Int a.3 C07C 51/02
U.S. a. 260—501.12 9 Claims
1. Di-L-cysteine L-malate of the formula:
(HS-CH2-CH(NH3) + -COOH]2.( - OOC—
CHOH— CH2— COO-)
2. A process for the preparation of di-L-cysteine L-malate
which comprises reacting 2 mole of L-cysteine mineral acid
salt with more than 0.9 mole of L-malic acid in the presence of
an alkali metal hydroxide and collecting the resulting crystal-
line di-L-cysteine L-malate.
Ar— A— CN
(D
wherein Ar is a benzene radical and A is a direct chemical
bond or a hydrocarbon radical having from 1 to 6 carbon
atoms, comprising heating to a temperature ranging from
about 450* C. to about 550* C. a formamide or formanilide
having the formula:
4,438,045
AMPHOTERIC SURFACTANTS
Edward C. Y. Nieb, and Carter G. Naylor, both of Austin, Tex.,
assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 449,957
Int a.3 CUD 1/88; C07C 101/20
VS. CL 260—501.13 22
1. A composition of matter of the general formula:
OH CH3
I I
ROCH2CHCH2 + NCH2CH2CH2NHCCH2CH2OO -
CHj O O
Ar-A-NHCHO
01) wherein R is selected from the group consisting of a linear
1226
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
alkyl, a branched alky! and an alkylaryl containing from 8 to 20 and from about 60% to 65% of an alkoxyalkvl diohenvl Dhoa-
carbon atoms. phate having the formula: ^ ^ V y pno»-
12. The composition of matter of the general formula:
OH CHj
I I
ROCH2CHCH2 + NCH2CH2OCCH2CH2CO-
CH3 o o
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of a linear
alkyl, a branched alkyl and an alkylaryl of 8 to 20 carbon
atoms.
O
II
RiO— P— OCH2CH2R2
O
i.
4,438,046
QUATERNARY AMMONIUM SALTS
Edward L. Grew, Huntingdon, England, and Nigel D. V. Wilson,
Midlothian, Scotland, assignors to Glaxo Group Limited,
London, England
FUcd Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 372,850
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 30, 1981,
8113416; Aug. 14, 1981, 8124864
Irt. a.3 C307C 87/68: C12F 5/00
MS. a. 260-501.15 9 Claims
1. Crystalline lignocaine benzyl benzoate hydrate.
4,438 047
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF AN AQUEOUS
3-CHLORO•^SULFOPROPIONIC KCID REAGENT
Martin M. Tessler, Edison, and Dennis V. Neigel, Whitebouse
Station, both of N J., assignors to National Starch and Chemi-
cal Corporation, Bridgewater, N J.
^ Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 208,371, Not. 19, 1980,
abandoned. This application Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,129
Int. a.' C07C 143/02
U.S. a. 260-513 R 9 Qaims
1. A process for preparing an aqueous 3-chloro-2-sulfopro-
pionic acid reagent, which comprises the steps of:
(a) forming a reaction mixture by adding acrylic acid to
chlorosulfonic acid maintained at about 45* to 130* during
said addition;
(b) heating said reaction mixture at about 60* to 130* C. to
form anhydrous 3-chloro-2-sulfopropionic acid reagent;
and
(c) adding water to said anhydrous reagent maintained at
about 65* and below 100* C; said water being added in an
amount sufficient to decompose said unreacted chlorosul-
fonic acid and to dilute said anhydrous reagent to a solids
content of about 50-95% by weight, based on total rea-
gent solids.
wherein Ri is a phenyl radical and R2 is an alkoxyalkyl radical,
which comprises:
(a) heating about 2 moles of an alcohol characterized by a
boUing point above about 170* C. and having the formula:
R2CH2CH2OH
with a catalytic amount of from greater than about 1.5
mole percent to about 2 mole percent based on the alcohol
of sodium hydroxide in an aqueous solution under vacuum
to distill ofF the water present in the mixture and form a
sodium alkoxide;
(b) adding about 1.0 mole of a triphenyl phosphate of the
formula:
(RiO)3P=0
to the reaction mixture under a nitrogen atmosphere and
maintaining the temperature at about 100* C. with agiu-
tion for about an hour;
(c) heating the reaction mixture at 100* C. to 140* C. under
vacuum to remove aromatic and aliphatic alcohols from
the reaction mixture; and
(d) distilling the filtrate in a wiped film still under vacuum
and at a temperature below the decomposition tempera-
ture of said mixed phosphoric acid ester composition to
obtain the desired product.
4438 049
CARBURETOR ENGINE IDLE SPEED AIR BYPASS
Edward A. Ammons, Plymouth, Mich., assignor to Ford Motor
Company, Dearborn, Mich.
FUed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,053
Int. a.3 PD2M 3/06
U.S. CI. 261-42 8 Claims
^A>
4,438 048
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF MIXED
PHOSPHORIC AOD ESTER COMPOSITIONS
Joseph H. Finley, Metucben, and Hsiang P. Liao, Princeton,
both of N J., assignors to FMC Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa.
FUed Oct. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 432,603
Int a.' C07F 9/09
U A a. 260-982 3 Claims
1. A process for the manufacture of a mixed phosphoric acid
ester composition comprising by weight less than about 4% of
a triphenyl phosphate; from about 30% to about 35% of a
phenyl dialkoxyalkyi phosphate having the formula:
O
I
so
RiO— P— OCH2CH2R2
O
I
CH2CH2R2
1. An engine idle speed air flow control for a carburetor
having an air induction passage and a throttle valve mounted
for a rotatable movement across the passage between a closed
engine idle speed position and a wide open position to control
the flow of air therethrough, the passage being open to air at
one end and adapted to be connected to the engine intake
manifold at the other end, an engine idle speed air bypass
channel connecting the induction passage on opposite sides of
the throttle valve for the bypass of air around the throttle valve
when the throttle valve is in a closed position, the control
comprising
a two-stage bypass control valve in the channel spring biased
to a closed position blocking the channel and movable
through one stage to an open position to open the channel,
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1227
a variable volume flow-through passage located in the
valve connecting air to opposite sides of the valve at all
times for another stage of operation, and means for vary-
ing the volume of flow through the valve passage to
control the bypass of air.
4438,050
METHOD FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF VERY DENSE
OXIDIC NUCLEAR FUEL BODIES
Wolfgang Dtfrr, Henogenaurach; Gerhard Gradel, Erlangen,
and Martin Peebs, Bubenreutb, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Kraftwerk Union Akticngesellscfaaft, Miilbeim,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 190,981
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 28.
1979, 2939415
Int a.3 G21C 3/62
U A a 264-0^ 12 Claims
•set
1. Method for the manufacture of very dense oxidic nuclear
fuel bodies of UO2 with additions of rare earth oxides which
act as a neutron poison in the relatively large amount of more
than 4% to 10% by weight, comprising the following steps:
(a) Mixing of the nuclear fuel powder with more than 4% up
to 10% by weight powder or rare earth oxide which acts
as a burnable neutron poison,
(b) pressing the mixture into blanks,
(c) sintering the blanks in an oxidizing atmosphere at 800* to
1400* C. for a time of 15 minutes to 2 hours, and
(d) sintering the blanks, which had been subjected to sinter-
ing in an oxidizing atmosphere, in a reducing atmosphere
at temperatures above 1650* C. for a time of 30 minutes to
4 hours.
4,438,051
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG A TRANSLUCENT
/3-SIALON SINTERED PRODUCT
Mamoni Mitomo; Yusuke Moriyoshi; Toshikazu Sakai, and
TosUaki Osaka, aU of Sakura, Japan, assignors to National
Inttitnte for Researches in Inorganic Materials, Ibaraki,
Japan
FUed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 387,779
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 6, 1981, 56-105301
Int. a.3 C04B 35/58. 35/64
MS. a. 264^12 6 Claims
99% and a particle size of at most 200 microns and fine pow-
ders of aluminum oxide and silicon oxide having a high purity
of at least 99% in such a proportion as to form /3-SlALON of
the formula Si6.2Al202Ns.2 where z is from I to 4.2, and hot-
pressing the mixture in a nitrogen atmosphere at a temperature
of from 1500* to 1850* C. under pressure of from 10 to 1500
kg/cm^.
70
90
50
12 5 4 5 6
4,438,052
PROCESS AND DEVICE FOR PRODUCING BILAYER
VESICLES
Hans G. Weder, E. Merck, Postfach 4119, 6100 Darmstadt 1,
Fed. Rep. of Germany; Otmar ZunbiUU, Wolfenshisssen; Reto
Scbwendener, Arosa, both of Switzerland, and Manfred MUs-
mann, Bielefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Haas
Georg Weder, Zurich, Switzerland
FUed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,993
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Jan. 16, 1980,
340/80
Int. a.3 BOIJ 13/02; BOID 13/00
VS. a. 264—4.6 7 aains
1. A process for producing a translucent /3-SIALON sin-
tered product, which comprises mixing fine powders of sUicon
nitride and aluminum nitride having a high purity of at least
1. A process for producing unilamellar bilayer vesicles of
substantially homogeneous size from a colloidal solution com-
prising mixed micelles of a bilayer-forming substance and a
detergent,
the process comprising removing the detergent from the
micelle-conuining colloidal solution by means of flow-
through dialysis whereby the colloidal solution is dialyzed
against a dialysis liquid in a chamber whose walls are at
least partially formed by a semi-permeable membrane,
wherein the dialysis liquid is moved along the outer side of
the semi-permeable membrane in laminar flow in at least
one channel at a sufficient velocity to ensure that the
detergent concentation in the dialysis liquid, on at least
90% of the active surface of the membrane, is at most 10%
of the detergent concentration in the micelle solution in
contact with the other side of the membrane, and wherein
a homogeneous detergent concentration is maintained in
the micelle solution by the movement of the latter.
7. A dialysis device for carrying out the process of claim 1,
comprising a chamber (4) for the micelle solution, the walls of
said chamber being at least partially formed of a semi-permea-
ble membrane; means for moving the micelle solution in the
chamber; at least one flow-through compartment for the dialy-
sis liquid, which compartment has an inlet and an outlet for the
dialysis liquid and is separated from the chamber (4) by a
semi-permeable membrane (1); continuous guide elements {5fl)
in contact with the membrane (1) and arranged in the flow-
through compariment such that the dialysis liquid can be
moved along the surface of the membrane (1) in a laminar flow,
said guide elements forming at least one channel which is in
contact with the active surface of the membrane and extends
continuously therealong from said inlet to said outlet and
within which the dialysis liquid is guided along said membrane.
1228
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M38,053
MAKING A FIBRILLATED SYNTHETIC-RESIN STRAND
Karl-Hdiiz Buke; EUadwtk HeriBg; Wilfried Ltfbel, all of
Karl-Marx-Stadt; Dieter Pollack; Giiater Wiedemann, both of
Drcadcn; Ute Grell, Malchow, and logo Schiiler, Pima-
Copitz, all of German Democratic Rep^ aasignori to For-
•chnngrinfltitnt fUr Teztiltechnologie, Karl-Marx-Stadt, Ger-
man Democratic Rep.
FUed Apr. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 367,071
Claims priority, appUcation German Democratic Rep., Apr.
12, 1961, 229183
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 264—25 16 Claims
^•<at aA
former oven in response to the sensed sheet thickness for
maintaining the temperatures of said web of thermoform-
able material at predetermined temperature levels so u to
thereby obtain a requisite blow-up of the material.
1. A method of making a flbrillated strand, said method
comprising the steps of:
compressing a mass of a powder of a high polymer of a
predetermined density into a substrate having a density
smaller than that of said high polymer and having a multi-
plicity of gas-filled voids;
playing a laser beam only on a spot on said substrate to melt
the high-polymer at the spot and simultaneously heat the
gas of said voids to explosively enlarge same;
relatively displacing said beam and said substrate so that
same is melted along a path into a porous strand extending
along said path in said substrate;
cooling said substrate at said path after irradiation by said
beam to resolidify said porous strand;
separating the resolidified strand from said substrate; and
at least uniaxially stretching the separated strand.
4,438,054
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING AND
CONTROLLING FOAM SHEET BLOW-UP IN A
THERMOFORMER OVEN
M. James Holden, Canandaigua, N.Y., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct 20, 1982, Ser. No. 435,590
Int. a.J B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 264-40.6 17 Claims
^'
1. A method of measuring and controlling foam plastic sheet
blow-up by regulating the operation of a thermoformer oven
responsive to measuring of the thickness of a continuous sheet
of a thermoformable foam plastic material which is conveyed
through said thermoformer oven towards a thermoforming
installation; comprising:
(a) sensing the sheet thickness of the thermoformable mate-
rial at a plurality of locations within said thermoformer
oven;
(b) and regulating the temperatures within said thermo-
4,438,055
METHOD OF MAKING A CERAMIC ARTICLE AND
ARTICLES MADE BY THE METHOD
Jan H. Van der Veldea, Apeldoorn, Netherlands, aaaignor to
Esmil, B.V., Netherlands and Hoeke Ea^neeriag, N.V., Bd-
gimn
Continuation of Ser. No. 84,131, Oct 12, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 916,009, Jan. 16, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,429
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlanda, Jun. 21, 1977.
7706797
Int CV B29J 1/00
U.S. a. 264—44 7 Claims
1. A method of making a ceramic article comprising the
steps of preparing a mixture of (a) 40 to 65% (by weight) of
clay consisting essentially of aluminum silicate, Fe203 and
CaO of which more than 10% (by weight of the clay) is a
fraction consisting of particles of size greater than 2^ and (b) an
organic fraction which is obtained from domestic waste after
separation therefrom of metal parts, coarse material and mate-
rial in sheet form, said organic fraction having a screen analysis
as foUows (% by weight)
particle size
<4nun
60-73%
particle size
4-6 nun
23-35%
particle size
6-30 nun
4-10%
particle size
>-10mni
absent
and having a moisture content of 2S to 30% by weight and
being substantially free from glass panicles of size greater than
2 mm, shaping said moisture into a body, and drying and firing
the shaped body.
4,438,056
METHOD FOR PRODUCING A CORRUGATED PIPE
HAVING A SMOOTH LINING OF FOAM PLASTIC
Bernard J. Bast Bethlehem, Pa., assignor to Bethlehem Steel
Corporation, Bethlehem, Pa.
Dirision of Ser. No. 166,660, Jnl. 7, 1980, abandoned. Thia
appUcation Jnl. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,214
Int a.3 B29D 27/04
U.S. a. 264-45.2 7 Clidms
« /*.
r^
1. A method for producing a smooth-lined corrugated pipe
which comprises:
(a) applying a plastic foaming mixture to the internal surface
of a corrugated pipe progressively along its entire length,
(b) pressing a sheet liner in the form of an expandable cylin-
der against the plastic foaming mixture, and
(c) maintaining the pressure until the foaming mixture has
substantially solidified.
March 20. 1984
CHEMICAL
1229
4,438,057
AIRHLTERS
Jarl Snndaeth, 23 Lennox Gardeaa, London S.W. 1, England
FUed Jul. 21. 1981, Ser. No. 285.473
Claima priority, appUcation United Kingdom, JuL 23. 1980.
8024020; Feb. 3, 1981, 8103255
Int a.J B29C 27/00
U.S. a. 264-46.5 AOMimM
P 15
1. A method of making a filter element of the type employ-
ing a block of deep pleated paper comprising the steps of
providing bottom and top end support members of relatively
rigid material each end member having a rectangular
peripheral portion defined by first and second pairs of
opposed peripheral edges and, within it, an opening for air
flow,
providing a first pair of side walls, the first pair of edges of
the peripheral portion of the members and the end edges
of the first pair of side walls being connected by hinge
connections along at least two pairs of adjacent edges,
placing the bottom and top members and said first pair of
walls around a block of deep pleated paper with the sides
of the pleau extending generally parallel to the first pair of
side walls,
connecting the previously unconnected pair or pairs of
edges of said members and first pair of side walls, the
connection being formed by interengaging elemenu at the
adjacent edges,
forming from an elastomeric material settable in situ a sec-
ond pair of side walls extending over and sealing the ends
of the pleats of the block, the second pair of side walls
. extending between the end members at corresponding
opposite, second edges of their peripheral portions and
between the adjacent side edges of the first pair of side
walls with which they effect a seal, and
forming also from an elastomeric material settable in situ
peripheral flanges at the first pair of peripheral edges of
the peripheral portion of both end members in sealing
relationship with the adjacent edges of the fint pair of side
walls, the flanges sealing the side pleats of the pleated
paper, and embedding the interengaging elements.
4,438,059
ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE FIBER GLASS
ARTICLES AND SHEETS
Robert E. Mollmaa, Moreland HUls, Ohio, and Ralph SUva,
Springboro, Pa., aasignora to Molded Fiber Glaas Companies,
Ashtabula, Ohio
FUed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,530
Int a.3 B29G 1/00
U.S. a. 264-105 6 Claims
1. A method of making an electrically conductive laminate
comprising,
providing a thermoset resin,
adding sufficient carbon black to the material to give the
material the desired electrical conductivity,
adding a pigmenution material to said carbon black and
polymer to partly overcome the pigmenution effect of the
carbon black,
mixing said carbon black and pigmenution material,
said pigmenution material being in the form of tiUnium
dioxide in the amount of 15% to 30% by weight, to com-
pletely disperse the carbon and pigment in the resin,
and adding a catalyst to the material to form a paste, adding
the paste to fiber glass and curing the resin.
4,438,058
EXPANDING PROCESS
Yoshio Tanaka, No. 7-6, Shibaya 2<%one, Shibuya-kn, Tokyo.
Japan
FUed Mar. 8. 1982, Ser. No. 356,240
OaiBH priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 9, 1981. 56-33550
lot a.i B29D 27/00
VS. a. 264—51 11 Oains
1. Process for blowing expandable resin particles, which
comprises expanding said resin particles in the presence of
surfactant in an amount of O.S to 10% by weight based on the
particles.
4,438 060
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG CROSS-SECHONALLY
STABLE, HYGROSCOPIC HBERS AND HLAMENTS
HAVING A CORE-JACKET STRUCTURE
Ulrich Reinehr; Ton! Hcrbertz, both of Dorraagea, and Her-
mann-Josef Jungverdorben, GreTenbroich, aU of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, aasignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 210,467
Qaims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 28,
1979, 2947824
Int a.3 DOIF 6/18
U.S. a. 264-206 s Claims
1. A process for the production of hygroscopic polyacrylo-
nitrile filaments with fibers containing at least 80% by weight
of acrylonitrile uniu which filaments or fibers have a core-
jacket structure and uniform round to oval cross-sectional
profiles from hydrophobic, filament forming synthetic poly-
acrylonitrile polymer containing at least 80% by weight of
acrylonitrile uniu by a dry-spinning process which comprises
addition of a substance to the spinning solvent which
a. has a higher boiling point than the spinning solvent used,
b. is readily soluble with the spinning solvent and with
water,
c. is a non-solvent of the polymer to be spun; and
d. is selected from the group consisting of polyhydric alco-
hols, sugars and glycols, and addition of another subsunce
which
a. is soluble in the non-solvent of the polymer to be spun
b. is soluble in the solvent to the polymer
c. remains dissolved in the non-solvent for the polymer
during solidification of the filaments,
d. is insoluble in water,
e. does not evaporate to any significant extent during the
spinning process, and
f is selected from the group consisting of polycarbonate,
polystyrene, polyvmyl aceute and cellulose aceute to the
system in quantities of 1 to S% by weight, baaed on poly-
men solid/spinning/non-solvent carrying out the spin-
ning process in such a way that the non-solvent does not
evaporate to any significant extent in the spinning duct
and washing out the non-solvent from the solidified file-
menu.
1230
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M38,06l
TUBE INSERTING MACHINE
SimoB J. Rlchter, Marietta, Ga., and Ardaahof A. Aykanian,
Rancbo Paloa Verdes, Califs anignora to The Coca-Cola
Conpaay, Atlanta, Ga.
Filed Not. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 444,358
lat CL^ B29C 6/02
MS. a. 264-249 35 dalnw
1. An apparatus for automatically inserting a tubular article
within each of a sequence of containers at the same predeter-
mined positions therein comprising:
means for sequentially conveying said containers through a
work station;
means for temporarily arresting the conveyance of said
containers when any one of said containers reaches said
work station;
means for supporting a supply of tubular articles at a transfer
sution adjacent said work sUtion; and
reciprocating rod means for engaging a tubular article at said
transfer station and carrying said tubular article therewith
into said predetermined position within a container at said
work station as said rod means moves in a forward direc-
tion, and leaving said tubular article at said predetermined
position as said rod means moves in a reverse direction.
4,438,062
IN-MOLD COATING METHOD
Richard M. Griffith, and Henry Shanoild, both of Akron, Ohio,
aadgnora to The General Tire A Rubber Cmnpany, Akron,
Ohio
FUed Apr. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 484,760
Int CL^ B29C 1/00. 9/00
MS. CL 264—255 2 daims
-^m
1. The method which comprises, in a heated compression
mold having two halves forming a cavity for molding, (1)
placing a SMC (sheet molding compound) charge in the cavity
of one of said mold halves, (2) forcing one of said halves
against the other while providing essentially parallelism be-
tween the mold halves as the mold is closed to spread the SMC
throughout the mold, to mold the SMC and substantially to
cure the SMC to form a molded FRP (glass fiber remforced
plastic) part. (3) slightly separating said mold halves and inject-
ing an IMC (in-mold coating) composition onto the outer
surface of the FRP part, (4) reclosing the mold halves while, in
substantially the first or initial portion of said mold reclosing,
skewing one of said mold halves relative to the other to effect
a scissoring action between the mold halves with the fulcrum
being essentially at about said IMC injection port and where
said IMC was injected in order or sweep or wipe said IMC
composition across the surface of the SMC part and, in the
latter portion of said mold reclosing, effecting at least substan-
tial parallelism between the mold halves to complete the coat-
ing of the SMC with the IMC composition, and (5), in said
finally closed mold, curing said IMC to said FRP, said IMC
composition at least essentially completely coating the outer
surface of said FRP part with a minimum thickness of said
IMC composition.
4,438,063
PRESS ROLL AND MANUFACTURING METHOD
THEREFOR
Masayoshi Suguri, FiUisawa; Kazuo Yamada, Kawaiaki, and
Masaaki Nandate, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Kinyoaha
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,139
Int. a.J C08K 3/34
U.S. a. 264-311 10 Ciaimi
1. A press roll, comprising:
an inorganic stone powder containing as a main component
Si02, AI2O3, or a mixture of Si02 and AI2O3; and,
a non-cellular polyurethane having a Shore D hardness of
over 70* which is obtained by reacting an organic isocya-
nate with one or more organic compounds having a func-
tional group which reacts with said isocyanate, wherein at
least 10% by weight of said organic compounds comprises
a polyether having more than three functional groups.
4,438 064
INJECnON MOLDING PROCESS FOR SYNTHETIC
RESIN AND ITS APPARATUS
Shigem Tsutsnmi, Yonezawa, Japan
Filed Not. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 440,569
Claims priority, qipUcation Japan, Nov. 20, 1981, 56-185450
Int. a.3 B29F 1/03, 1/08
MS. a. 264—328.15 4 Claims
1. A process for injection molding a fused synthetic resin
into a cavity comprising the steps of:
heating and fusing a synthetic resin in a runner and a gate
which communicate with each other;
injecting fused synthetic resin from said runner and gate into
a cavity which communicates with said gate; and
forcibly supplying a cooling medium into a cooling chamber
projecting into the runner and the interior of the gate;
whereby the fused synthetic resin is cooled and solidified
within the gate to close the gate after the resin has been
injected into the cavity.
2. An injection molding apparatus for synthetic resin com-
prising:
a pair of molds defining a cavity;
a gate communicating with said cavity;
a runner communicating with said gate;
heater means for beating and fusing resin in the gate and the
runner;
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1231
cooling means disposed in said runner and extending into
said gate for locally cooling the area of the gate; and
actuating means to actuate the cooling means every time an
injection molding operation is carried out whereby fused
resin in the gate can be cooled and solidified in order to
close the gate.
4438 065
AIR EJECnON OF MOLDED CONTAINERS
Paul Brown, Orangerille, Canada, assignor to Husky Ii^ectioB
Molding Systems Ltd., Bolton, Canada
FUed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,891
Int. a.' B29C 7/00
MS. a. 264-335 3 cuims
1. A method of operating an injection-molding apparatus for
ejecting a cup-shaped workpiece with a closed front end and a
rearwardly facing rim from a tapering core around which the
workpiece has been molded with said rim resting on an annular
zone surrounding said core, comprising the steps of
(a) directing a first stream of a gaseous fluid from the surface
of said core into the interior of a freshly molded work-
piece for initiating a separation of said workpiece from
said core, thereby creating a peripheral gap therebetween;
and
(b) thereafter directing a second stream of a gaseous fluid
from said annular zone forwardly toward said rim for
completing the separation of said workpiece from said
core.
4,438 066
ZERO TO LOW MAGNETOSTRICnON, HIGH
COERaVITY, POLYCRYSTALLINE, CO-PT MAGNETIC
RECORDING MEDIA
Joseph A. Aboaf, PeekskiU, N.Y.; Erik Hokhohn, Stamford,
Conn., and Sigrid R. Herd, Pawling, N.Y., assignors to Inter-
national Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 280,144
Int. a.i C22C 79/07
U.S. a. 420-435 12 Claims
line film of Co and Pt, having a magnetostriction value of from
about - 35 X 10-' to a smaller positive value near substantially
zero magnetrostriction to about ±10x10-* in accordance
with the formula CojrPt^ where x (Co) is up to about 90 at. %
of said material and the value y (Pt) is within the range of about
10 to about 30 at. % of said material whereby alteration of the
magnetic sute of said material in response to extraneous me-
chanical forces is averted.
4,438,067
TEST STRIPS FOR ANALYZING DISSOLVED
SUBSTANCES
Iqbal Siddiqi, Veyrier, Switzerland, assignor to BatteUc Memo-
rial Institute, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 193,271, filed u PCT EP/00035. May
16, 1979, publUbed as WO 79/01081, Dec. 13, 1979, § 102(c)
date Dec. 27, 1979, abandoned. This application Apr. 28, 1982.
Ser. No. 372,796
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, May 17, 1978.
5334/78
Int. a.' GOIN 21/78: C12Q 1/54. 1/26. 1/28 1/30: C12N
11/04: GOIN 35/22
U.S. a. 422—56 7 Claims
1. A test strip for analyzing for a substance dissolved m an
aqueous test solution which can be a biological fluid, said test
strip comprising:
an inert nonabsorbent base strip forming a support; and
a layer of solid spherical hydrophilic beads composed of a
semipermeable polymer and coated onto and bonded to at
least one surface of said support, said beads being in mutu-
ally contacting relationship in said layer to define pockets
between mutually contacting beads and said support in
which reproducible quantities of aqueous test solution can
be reuined, said beads being formed with microvacuoles
containing at least one reagent located within the beads
and retained therein such that said substance or a com-
pound generated by said substance can penetrate into said
beads to effect a color-change of said beads,
a plurality of reagents being provided in said beads at sites
and under conditions such that the different reagents are
held apart during storage and being allowed to react
mutually only upon contact with said test solution.
4438 068
TEST-TUBE ASSEMBLY FOR IMMUNOASSAYS
UTILIZING MAGNETICALLY ATTRACTABLE
PARTICLES
Gordon C. Forrest, Ingatestone, England, assignor to Technicon
Instruments Corporation, Tarrytown. N.Y.
FUed No?. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,245
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Nov. 13, 1979.
7939214
iBt a.3 COIN 33/54
MS. a. 422-61 14 cUiBu
/\-
i k
ATOMIC % PLATINUM
/^ ■ » » ■ ■
1. A thin film magnetic recording medium for recording
magnetic transitions representative of dau said thin film mag-
netic recording medium consisting of a sputtered polycrystal-
1. A two-part test-tube assembly for use in immunoasuys
utilising magnetically attracUble particles, which comprises:
(a) a plurality of test-tubes mounted in a planar support
member and fixedly held relative thereto, and the lower
portions of the tubes projecting below the support mem-
ber by a fixed distance; and
(b) a substantially planar base member having magnet means
permanently located therein;
1232
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
the support member and the base member being releasably
couplable together to form a unitary assembly in which the
bottoms of the test-tubes are held adjacent the base member,
the assembly being manually invertable (in use) whilst remain-
ing unitary to decant liquids from the tubes whilst retaining
magnetically attractable particles within said tubes under the
influence of the magnet means.
4,438,069
SYSTEM FOR TEMPERATURE CONTROL OF A CLAUS
SULFUR UNIT THERMAL REACTOR
Lee G. Petemuui, FloMooor, Dl^ and Raymond J. Staebcl,
Houston, Tex., auignors to Atlantic Richflcld Company,
Philadelphia, Pa.
FUcd Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,912
Int. aj COIN 33/00
VJS. a. 422-62 6 Claims
.:5fl
1. A sulfur plant for converting hydrogen sulfide into water
and elemental sulfur comprising:
at least two successive reaction zones, which are a first
reactor zone adapted to receive a first hydrogen sulfide-
containing stream and a molecular oxygen-containing
stream and a second reaction zone adapted to receive a
first reaction product stream from said first zone and a
second hydrogen sulfide-containing stream, where in said
first reaction zone said first hydrogen sulfide-containing
stream is contacted during operation with said molecular
oxygen containing stream at conditions sufficient to oxi-
dize hydrogen sulfide to form said first reaction product
stream containing sulfur dioxide, which is a reaction prod-
uct of at least a portion of hydrogen sulfide in said hydro-
gen sulfide-containing stream and molecular oxygen in
said molecular oxygen-containing stream, and where in
said second zone, said first reaction product stream is
contacted with a second hydrogen sulfide-containing
stream at conditions sufficient to form a second reaction
product stream containing water and elemental sufur
made from at least a portion of said second hydrogen
sulfide-containing stream and said first reaction product
stream;
a first means for measuring amount of hydrogen sulfide in
said first hydrogen sulfide-containing stream which dur-
ing operation would enter said first reaction zone and
transmitting to a third means a hydrogen sulfide-amount
signal indicative of said amount of said hydrogen sulfide;
a second means for measuring amount of molecular oxygen
which during operation would enter said first reaction
zone and transmitting to said third means a molecular
oxygen-amount signal indicative of said amount of said
molecular oxygen;
a said third means for comparing said hydrogen sulfide-
amount signal and said molecular oxygen-amount signal
and for transmitting to a fifth means a comparison signal
dependent, at least in part, upon both said hydrogen sul-
fide-amount signal and said molecular oxygen-amount
signal;
a fourth means for determining temperature within said first
reaction zone and for transmitting a temperature signal
indicative of said temperature to said fifth means;
a said fifth means for varying relative amount of hydrogen
sulfide to molecular oxygen which during operation
would enter said first reaction zone in response to two
signals: said temperature signal and said comparison sig-
nal; whereby a temperature control strategy can be fol-
lowed to maintain temperature in the first reaction zone to
some desired value.
4,438,070
PACKED COLUMN THERMAL REACTOR FOR AN
ANALYTICAL INSTRUMENT
Donald E. Stephens, Palo Alto, and Thomas D. Sharpies, Ather*
ton, both of Calif., assignon to Beckman Instmments, Inc.,
FnUerton, Calit
FUed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,379
Int a.^ COIN 31/08
VS, a. 422-70 1 ctoin,
1. A reactor for an automated analyzer, said reactor com-
prising:
an elongate straight column including an interior surface
defining a column bore;
a noble metal electroplated onto said interior surface;
externally threaded fittings on each end of said column for
establishing fluid communication between said bore and
said analyzer, said fittings being no wider than the width
of said column;
a pluarality of inert particles packed within said bore; and
a packing support disc at each end of said column, said
packing support disc having a plurality of small openings
therein to allow fluid passage from one side of said disc to
the other side of said disc, said openings small enough to
retain said inert particles in said bore.
4,438,071
FLUID CATALYST REGENERATION APPARATUS
Anthony G. Vicken, and DsTid A. Lonas, both of Arlington
Heights, m., aaiignon to UOP Inc., Des Plainet, lU.
DiTisiott of Ser. No. 301,923, Sep. 14, 1961, Pat. No. 4,364,849.
TUa application Aug. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 407,681
Int a.J F27B 15/08; BOIJ 21/20, 29/38; ClOG 11/18
U.S. CL 422—109 5 Claims
1. Apparatus for regenerating a coke contaminated, fluid
catalyst which apparatus comprises in combination:
(a) a vertically oriented combustion chamber;
(b) a disengagement chamber located superadjacent to and
above said combustion chamber;
(c) a high level catalyst collection section at the bottom of
said disengagement chamber;
(d) a first conduit effecting communication between said
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1233
combustion chamber and said disengagement chamber
having at least one outlet opening positioned above said
high level catalyst collection section so that catalyst will
flow from said first conduit into said high level catalyst
collection section;
(e) a low level catalyst collection section at the bottom of
said disengagement chamber separated from said high
level catalyst £ollection section by means of baffles such
that the level of a fluidized catalyst bed filling said high
level catalyst collection section will be maintained higher
than the level of a fluidized catalyst bed maintained in said
low level catalyst collection section;
(0 a shell and tube beat exchanger of vertical orientation.
changer into said low level catalyst collection section can
flow to said lower portion of said combustion chamber;
(i) a fluidizing gas inlet conduit connected to a bottom por-
tion of the shell side of said heat exchanger, such that
fluidizing gas can pass into said shell side and maintain a
fluidized catalyst bed therein;
(j) inlet and outlet conduits connected to said tubes of said
heat exchanger, such that a cooling fluid can flow through
said tubes.
'^\ '''■'■ i" >■'■•*!'' ..'t
»*99»9f9't0 e»f9lftt
/'
•$0»mt (*'«//*'
'\
tt 4- ^
f
r-
remote from said combustion and disengagement cham-
ber, having a catalyst inlet in the shell side of said heat
exchanger and the upper end of the shell being in open
communication with the bottom of said low level catalyst
collection section;
(g) a hot catalyst conduit connecting said high level catalyst
collection section of said disengagement chamber with
said shell side heat exchanger inlet, such that hot regener-
ated catalyst can flow from said disengagement chamber
to said heat exchanger;
(h) a cooled catalyst conduit connecting the bottom of said
low level catalyst collection section with a lower portion
of said combustion chamber, such that cooled catalyst
which overflows from said shell side of said heat ex-
4,438,072
CONTINUOUS STREAM MIXER HAVING VARIABLE
DWELL TIME CHAMBER WITH AUGER
Joseph L. Nothnagel, Saukrille, Wis., aasignor to Freeman
Chemical Corporation, Port Washington, Wis.
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350361
Int. a.J C08J 9/00; BOIF 13/10, 15/04; B29D 27/02
U.S. a. 422—133 8 CUtes
1. An apparatus for mixing together materials which are
reactive with one another, said apparatus comprising:
a source of a first material;
a source of a second material;
a source of a third material;
first and second conduit means coupled respectively to said
first and second sources of material and means for convey-
ing said materials from said sources through said conduit
means and controlling the quantity of material conveyed
from said sources;
mixing conduit means coupled to said first and second con-
duit means;
mixing means coupled to said mixing conduit means
whereby said materials are mixed together;
an elongate, generally cylindrical dwell chamber coupled to
said mixing means whereby mixed materials flowing
therethrough will react for a time dependent on the length
of said dwell chamber;
a dispensing means coupled to said dwell chamber;
a third conduit means coupled to said source of said third
material and to said dispensing means;
said dispensing means including valve means arranged to
permit said mixed material to be selectively discharged
therefrom to two separate locations through two path-
ways established within said valve means,
said third conduit means being coupled to said valve means
in such a manner that said third material may be selec-
tively flowed through either of said pathways whereby
mixed material may be washed from one pathway while
the other pathway is used for discharge of said nuterial.
1234
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
4,438,073
VAPOR PHASE POLYMERIZATION APPARATUS FOR
OLEFINS
KutadcU Kubo, Tokyo; YaniHMiike Miyazaki, MMliida;
Manoni Yodiikawa, Kawasaki, aad MltiUi Miyodii,
Kaaagawa, aU of JaiMo, anigiiort to Nippon OO Company.
Ui, Tokyo, Japan -r— ,,
Filed Oct. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315.616
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct 31, 1980, 55-152224
Int. a.i BOIJ 12/02
UA a 422-135 7ctai^
II
.13 r- ^iiHi:3-' e
tVWJ^
1. In a vapor phase polymerization apparatus for olefins
constituted by a hoiizontal type hollow cylindrical vessel
having a centrally located driving shaft, the improvement
comprising a plurality of cells whose upper portions are open
to the inner surface of the lower portion of said vessel, said
cells having vertical side walls extending downwardly from
the curved bottom wall of the vessel, means defming small
holes m said vertical side walls and means for feeding a storting
olefin gas into said vessel through said cells.
4438 074
CONTINUOUS POLYMERIZATION REACTOR
Maaon S. Wilt, Borger, Tex., aasignor to PhilUpa Petroleum
Company, Bartlesrille, Okla.
FUed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,644
Int a.J SOU 14/00, 19/18
U.S. a. 422-135 5ciaima
position of said means for creating said second turbulent
zone;
means for introducing said olefinic monomer into said first
conduit means to thereby introduce said olefmic monomer
mto the periphery of said first and second turbulent zones;
a second conduit means extending from the lower portion of
said vessel to the upper portion of said vessel substantially
along a second portion of the wall of said vessel, wherein
said second conduit means has a fluid outlet at the position
of said means for creating said first turbulent zone and at
the position of said means for creating said second turbu-
lent zone, wherein said first portion of the wall of said
vessel is substantially diametrically opposed to said second
portion of the wall of said vessel;
means for introducing initiator into said second conduit
means to thereby introduce said initiator into the periph-
ery of said first and second turbulent zones; and
means for removing the reaction producte from said vessel.
4438 075
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR THE PRODUCHON
AND MAINTENANCE OF A FLUIDIZED LAYER IN
HETEROGENEOUS SYSTEMS
Helmut von Branchel, Irolsdorf-Splch; Georg Schreiber, Co-
logne-Rodenkirchen, and Heinz Schroeder, Witten/Ruhr, aU
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, asiignors to Dynamit Nobel Aktiea-
gesellschaft, Troiadorf , Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 713,583, Aug. 11, 1976, abandoned,
which ia a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 681,474, Apr. 29,
1976, abandoned. Thia appUcation Jun. 5, 1978, Ser. No. 912,309
Oaima priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 29.
1975,25189757
Int. a.3 BOID 11/04
U.S. a. 422-189 5 0,.,^
1. A reactor for contacting olefinic monomer and initiator in
a continuous polymerization process, said reactor comprising:
a vessel, having an upper portion and a lower portion,
wherein a longitudinal axis extends from said lower por-
tion to said upper portion;
radial turbine means for creating a first turbulent zone in said
vessel;
a first axial turbine means for creating a second turbulent
zone in said vessel;
a first conduit means extending from the lower portion of
said vessel to the upper portion of said vessel substantially
along a first portion of the wall of said vessel, wherein said
first conduit means has a fluid outlet at the position of said
means for creating said first turbulent zone and at the
3. An apparatus for the production and maintenance of a
fluidized layer in a heterogeneous system which comprises a
vertical contact column having a plurality of successive, verti-
cally arranged fluidizing cells and inlet means located at one
end of said contoct column for cocurrently introducing a liquid
and a solid and/or gas into one end of said column to provide
a heterogeneous mass stream containing the liquid as a continu-
ous phase and the solid and/or gas as the disperse phase, the
continuous phase having a density different than that of said
disperse phase, a plurality of plates arranged superimposed and
inclined in opposition to each other with respect to a horizon-
tal plane, each of said plates covering the inside cross-section
of the column in each two plates inclined in opposition to
another forming a fluidizing cell therebetween; in the region of
the lower end of each plate a fluid flow connecting means
placing the space above the plate in communication with the
space below the plate and in the region of the upper end of
each of the plates, a discharge means for discharging a portion
of the heterogeneous mass stream from a space below the plate
and having a flow resistance different from the flow resistance
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
123S
of said fluid flow connecting means, the difference in flow
resistance between the fluid flow connecting means and the
discharge means providing means for estoblishing a preuure
gradient across each plate positioned between two fluidizing
cells, whereby the heterogeneous mass stream is caused to flow
from one fluidizing cell to the next fluidizing cell with a verti-
cal rototional motion being imparted to the heterogeneous
mass stream within each of the fluidizing cells of the column,
said motion being further promoted by the force of gravity due
to the difference in density of the continuous and disperse
phases, another inlet means for introducing a gas into the space
above the lower plate of the two plates providing a fluidizing
cell therebetween, said another inlet means directing the gas
along said lower plate and means located at the other end of
said column for discharging a resultant homogeneous mass
stream from the other end of said column.
4.438.076
METHOD OF EXTRACTING GOLD AND SILVER FROM
AN ORE
Hartmut Pietach, Bad Homburg; Wol^ang TUrke, Scbbneck;
Emat BarcDther, Butzbacb; Fritz Kiimpf, and Hubert Bingi,
both of Liiacn, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaaignors to
Metallgcaellschaft AG. FraakAirt am Main and Vereinigte
Aluminum- Werke AG, Bonn, both of. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 391,959, Jun. 24, 1982, abandoned.
TMs appUcation Aug. 12, 1983, Ser. No. 523.022
Clalou priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 3,
1981, 3126234
Int. a.3 C22B 11/08
U.S. a. 423—30 8 aaima
1. A method of recovering at least one element selected from
the group which consiste of gold and silver from an ore con-
taining same, comprising the steps of:
forming a slurry of the ore in an aqueous alkali cyanide
solution; and
maintaining said slurry in a turbulent stote at a pressure of 23
to 130 bar by passing it through a tube reactor in continu-
ous unidirectional flow, while injecting oxygen of a purity
of at least 90% into said slurry in said tube reactor at said
pressure so that the CN/O2 molar ratio is at most 0.7 at 25
bar and 0.7 g/1 NaCN and is lower at higher pressures
whereby said element is leached from said ore.
4.438,077
TWO STAGE SELECTIVE OXIDATIVE LEACH METHOD
TO SEPARATELY RECOVER URANIUM AND
REFRACTORY URANIUM-MINERAL COMPLEXES
Tien-Fung Tsui, Richardaoa, Tex., aaaignor to MobU OU Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
FUed Apr. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 372.419
Int. a.» COIG 43/Oa 31/Oa- C22B 60/02. 34/22
\JJS. a. 423—7 19 CUdma
1. An improved process for the recovery of uranium and
other minerals from uranium ore wherein part of the uranium
is present as refractory uranium-mineral complexes, the pro-
cess comprising;
a. subjecting the uranium ore to mild oxidative carbonate
leach fluid to dissolve and remove uranium values other
than the refractory uranium-mineral complexes;
b. subsequently subjecting the uranium ore to an oxidative
chemically severe acid leach system to dissolve and re-
move the refractory uranium-mineral complexes; and
c. separating and recovering the uranium and other mineral
species in the leachate fluids.
4.438.071
RECOVERY OF GADOLINIUM AND GALLIUM OXIDES
Darid NalewiOek. Wait Seaaca. N.Y.. aaaipMr to AUiad Corpo-
ration, Morris TownaUp, Morria Cowrty, N J.
FUad Dae. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 4S1.296
iBt a.> coiG is/oa coif 17/00
U.S. a. 423—21.5 7 ClalM
1. A method for recovering gadolinium and gallium oxides
from by-product material which contains both of these oxides
and various impurities comprising the steps of:
(a) dissolving the gadolinium and gallium oxide in • strong
mineral acid that does not yield compositions which react
adversely with an ion exchange resin used in separation of
the gallium oxide,
(b) filtering the solution of (a), isolating the filtrate, adding a
compound generating oxalic acid ion and precipiuting the
gadolinium as oxalate from said filtrate,
(c) separating, washing and drying the precipiuted gadolin-
ium oxalate,
(d) converting the gadolinium oxalate salt from step (c) by
calcining the recovered gadolinium oxalate to yield gado-
linium oxide,
(e) contacting the filtrate from step (b) with an ion exchange
resin contoining a quaternary ammonium functionality,
eluting the resin with an acid having a concentration in the
range 6-12 N and thereafter eluting the resin with an acid
having a concentration of about 1 N to elute the gallium
fraction,
(0 reacting the filtrate containing the gallium fraction eluted
in step (e) with a compound generating oxalic acid ion and
precipitating the gallium oxalate by basifying the acidic
filtrate solution,
(g) washing and drying the gallium oxalate salt and gallium
hydroxide which precipiutes from step (0, and
(h) calcining the precipiute of step (g) to form gallium oxide.
4,438,079
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURE OF ARSENIOUS
ANHYDRIDE
Tadaahi Nakano; Hiroyuki Tamnra, and NaoU Kubo, aU of
Niihama, Japan, aaaignon to Sumitomo Metal Mining Com-
pany Lbnited, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,154
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 30, 1981, 56-454443;
Sep. 11, 1981, 56-142485
Int a» COIB 27/Oa 29/00
VJS. a 423—87 26 Claima
1. A method of manufacturing arsenious anhydride from an
arsenic sulfide-containing substance, said method comprising
the steps of
(a) extracting arsenic from the arsenic sulfide-containing
subsUnce by conUu;ting the arsenic sulfide-containing
substance with a copper sulfate-containing aqueous solu-
tion to thereby produce an extract solution containing
arsenious acid together with an extraction residue,
(b) oxidizing the extract solution obtained in step (a) in the
presence of at leut 1 g/l of copper ions to convert most of
the arsenious acid therein to arsenic acid and thereby
provide an oxidized solution,
(c) contacting the oxidized solution obtained in step (b) with
a weak reducing agent to form crystals of arsenious anhy-
dride, and
(d) recovering said crystals of arsenious anhydride formed in
step (c).
1236
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
MSMM
PROCESS FOR OXIDIZING THALLIUM (I) TO
THALUUM (in)
Braec K. McEmii, HopcwcU, nd Robert D. Norris, Crubnry,
both of N J^ aMignon to FMC Corporttloii, PUljMlelphla, Pa.
Filed Dec. 6, 1M2, Ser. No. 447^7
Int CI.J OOIG Hm
MS, a 423—112 9 Claims
1. In the process for oxidizing ions of thallium (I) contained
in a reaction solution to thallium (III) using hydrogen peroxide
as the oxidizing agent wherein the improvement comprises
removing at least part of the thallium (III) from the reaction
solution during the oxidation process.
4,438,M1
PROCESS FOR THE PURIFICATION OF CYCUC
CHLOROPHOSPHAZENES
Ham-Peter Rieck, Kelkheim, Fed. Rep. of Gcmuuiy, aaaignor to
Hoechst Aktiengesellachaft, Fed. Rep. of Gcmany
Filed Oct. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 437^82
Claima priority, appUcatioo Fed. Rep. of Germany. Not. 11,
1981, 3144751
iBt Q\? COIB 25/10
U.S. CL 423-300 16 Claima
1. A process of substantially suppressing or completely
preventing a change of color during i>olymerization of an
oligomeric chlorophosphazene of the formula
(N=PC1R),
in which n is an integer of from 3 to 8, and
R is phenyl, C|-C6-alkyl, or chlorine, which comprises
treating the oligomeric chlorophosphazene with sulfur
dioxide or a sulfur oxide chloride.
granules by reacting magnesium oxide or magnesium carbon-
ate with nitric acid in the presence of water, comprising the
combination of steps of:
(a) forming a suspension of magnesium oxide or magnesium
carbonate in melted magnesium nitrate hexahydrate at a
suspension temperature in excess of 90* C. up to about
120* C;
(b) adding a nitric acid solution to said suspension at a tem-
perature in excess of about 90* C. and up to about 120* C.
while stirring said suspension to obtain a Uquid reaction
mixture, whereby additional magnesium nitrate hexahy-
drate is formed in said mixture, said nitric acid solution
having a concentration of about 53 weight percent to
about S8 weight percent acid;
(c) filtering said liquid reaction mixture at a temperature in
excess of about 90* C. and up to about 120* C. to obtain a
clear magnesium nitrate hexahydrate filtrate; and
(d) discharging as a product fraction a quantity of said clear
filtrate approximately corresponding to the amount of
magnesium oxide or magnesium carbonate introduced in
step (a).
4438 082
PLATINUM GOLD CATALYST FOR REMOVING NOjt
AND NH3 FROM GAS STREAMS
Joseph C. Dettling, Jackson; William F. Carr, Monmouth Junc-
tion; Ronald M. Heck, Frenchtown, and James M. Chen,
Rahway, all of N J., assignors to Engelhard Corporation,
laelin, N J.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,450
iBt a.' COIB 21/00, 21/26; SOU 8/00. 8/02
U.S. a. 423—235 7 Claims
1. A process for reducing oxides of nitrogen while maintain-
ing an effluent free of anunonia in a gas stream containing at
least about 0.8 moles of ammonia for each mole of NOj, pres-
ent, at least 2 mole % of oxygen, comprising the step of passing
the gas stream over a catalyst containing an amount of noble
metal which is effective to catalyze the reduction of nitrogen
oxides to nitrogen, wherein the noble metal consists essentially
of from about 0.001 to about 5.0 percent platinum and from
about 0.0005 to about 2.5 percent gold by weight of support
and noble metal and the temperature of the gas stream is main-
tained within a range in which the noble metal catalyst is
effective to decompose ammonia.
4438084
MANUFACTURE OF HYDROXYLAMMONIUM SALTS
Gnenther Rapp, Ludwigriiafen; Erwln Thomas, Frcinsheim, and
Rolf Muenater, Speyer, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaaignors
to BASF Akticngeacllschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 119,927, Feb. 8, 1980, abandoned,
wUch is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 942,890, Sep. 18,
1978, abandoned. Thia appUeation Dec. 17, 1982, Ser. No.
450,581
Claims priority, appUeation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 27,
1977, 2743344
Int. a.J COIB 21/20
U.S. a. 423—387 6 Claima
1. A process for the manufacture of hydroxy lammonium
salts conducted in a passivated reaction vessel which is non-
corroding, insensitive to impact and shock, resistant to aging
and easily processable, which possesses high mechanical
strength and which does not release materials detrimental to
the course of reaction into solution; said process comprising
the catalytic reduction of nitric oxide with hydrogen in a dilute
aqueous mineral acid in the presence of a suspended platinum
catalyst at an elevated temperature in a passivated reaction
vessel, wherein the walls of the reaction vessel consist of essen-
tially copper-free molybdenum-containing austenitic chromi-
um-nickel steel, which consists of from 16 to 28% by weight of
chromium, from 10 to 50% by weight of nickel, from 1 to 4%
by weight of molybdenum, at most 0.05% by weight of carbon,
and 0.12% to 0.5% by weight of nitrogen, remainder iron said
reaction vessel having been passivated by exposure to the
process for the manufacture of hydroxylammonium salts for
about 200 hours, whereby no materials detrimental to the
course of reaction are released on exposure to the process.
4,438 083
PROCESS FOR PREPARING MAGNESIUM NITRATE
HEXAHYDRATE AND FOR THERMALLY STABILIZING
AMMONIUM NITRATE USING MAGNESIUM NITRATE
HEXAHYDRATE
Michael H. WiUems, and Winiried J. W. VemOJa, both of Gc-
leen, Netherlanda, aaaignors to Stamicarbon B.V., Geleen,
Netherlanda
FUed Sep. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 418,547
Claims priority, appUeation NetherUuda, Sep. 17, 1981.
8104284
Int. a.3 COIF 11/14
VS. CL 423—266 9 Claima
1. Process for preparing pure magnesium hexahydrate suit-
able as a subilizer for thermally stable ammonium nitrate
4438 085
PREPARATION OF DIHYDROXYALUMINIUM
SODIUM CARBONATE
Jeffrey L. Kauftnan, Mulgrave, AuatraUa, aaaignor to Nicholaa
Proprietary Limited, Victoria, AuatraUa
per No. PCr/AU81/00036. § 371 Date No?. 23. 1981, $ 102(c)
Date Not. 23, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02728. PCT Pnb.
Date Oct 1. 1981
PCT Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 325,422
Claima priority. appUeation United Kingdom, Mar. 28. 1980,
8010521
Int. a.J COIF 7/Oa- A61K 33/06. 33/08. 33/10
VS. a. 423—419 P 13 Claims
1. A method of preparing dihydroxyaluminum sodium car-
bonate, which comprises:
synthesizing said dihydroxyaluminum sodium carbonate by
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1237
reactmg an aluminum salt selected from the group consist-
mg of aluminum chloride, aluminum nitrate, aluminum
sulfate, aluminum aceute and alum with a stoichiometric
excess of sodium carbonate in a ratio of at least 10 parts by
weight sodium carbonate to said aluminum salt in a basic
aqueous medium containing sodium hydroxide in an
amount sufficient to ensure the presence of no sodium
bicarbonate in solution but in an amount which does not
permit the pH of the solution to exceed 10.5 at a tempera-
ture ranging from 40* to 80* C;
precipitating dihydroxyaluminum sodium carbonate and the
salt formed from sodium ion and the anion of the alumi-
iium salt reactant from the aqueous medium with substan-
tially all of the unreacted sodium carbonate being retained
in the aqueous medium at least until separation of said
precipiuted sodium salt is effected; and
washing said precipiuted dihydroxyaluminum sodium car-
bonate free of coprecipitated sodium salt, thereby obtain-
ing the desired dihydroxyaluminum sodium carbonate
product.
(c) a choke positioned within said reactor; and
(d) means for producing reciprocating movement of said
choke along the longitudinal axis of said reactor during
operation of said reactor; and
(2) reciprocating said choke while producing carbon black
said reciprocation sufficient to disrupt flow of reactantt.
4438 086
METHOD FOR PREPARLATION OF GRAPHITE
FLUORIDE BY CONTACT REACTION BETWEEN
CARBON AND FLUORINE GAS
MUioni Aramaki; Yasuahi Kita; Hiahagi Nakano, and Shiro
Moroi. aU of Ube, Japan, aaaignors to Central Glaas Company
Limited, Ube, Japan
FUed Sep. 1, 1982. Ser. No. 413.889
Claims priority. appUeation Japan. Sep. 2. 1981. 56-136963
Int. a.J OOIB 31/04. 9/08. 31/30
U.S. a 423-448 15 Claima
1. A method of preparing a graphite fluoride, which is ex-
pressed by (CFx)n where x is in the range from 0.1 to 1.4, by
heterogeneous contact reaction between a solid carbon mate-
rial and fluorine gas, the method comprising the steps of:
placing a carbon material in the form of pieces smaller than
about 10 mm in or on a holder so as to form a layer of the
carbon material in or on said holder, said holder having a
plurality of openings through which said fluorine gas can
permeate into and pass through said layer of the carbon
material;
introducing said holder into a reaction vessel such that gas
passages are left around said holder; and
keeping the carbon material in or on said holder heated at a
temperature in the range from about 200* C. to about 550*
C; without agiuting said carbon material and, simulta-
neously forcibly passing said fluorine gas through said gas
passages in the reaction vessel thereby allowing a portion
of said fluorine gas to permeate into said layer of the
carbon material through said openings of the holder and
pass through said layer, whereby said reaction takes place
not only at the surfaces of said layer of the carbon material
but also in the interior of said layer.
4.438 088
PREPARATION OF ANTIMONY
TRIFLUORODICHLORIDE AND FLUORINATION OF
FLUORINATABLE HYDROCARBONS AND
HALOCARBONS THEREWITH
John D. WeaTer, Lake Jackson, Tex., assignor to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
PUad Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357.342
Int. a.i COIB 7/24
UA a. 423-466 16 Claima
1. A process for making antimony trifluorodichloride com-
prising dispersing antimony trifluoride in a liquid organic
medium and contacting the dispersed antimony trifluoride
with an amount of chlorine up to an amount equimolar to the
antimony trifluoride, wherein the liquid reaction organic me-
dium is selected from a group consisting of fluorinauble hy-
drocarbons, fluorinauble halocarbons and perfluorocarbons,
under conditions such that antimony trifluorodichloride is
prepared.
4,438,089
PROCESS FOR OXIDIZING THALUUM (D TO
THALLIUM (III)
Lance R. Byera. East Windaor, N J., aaaignor to FMC Corpora-
tion, PhUadclphia, Pa.
FUed Dec. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 447^68
Int. a.J COIG 15/00
U.1 a. 423-624 14 Claima
1. A method of oxidizing a thallous compound to a thallic
compound consisting essentially of reacting the thallous com-
pound with hydrogen peroxide in a solvent at a pH of less than
9.
4,438.087
CARBON BLACK PROCESS
John R. Caaperson. BartlaariUa. Okla.. aaaignor to PhUUpa
Petroleum Company. BartlaarUle, Okla.
DiTiaion of Ser. No. 274.029. Jun. 16, 1981, Pat No. 4.406.862.
Thia appUeation Sep. 29. 1982. S«r. No. 4r.248
Int a.i COIB 31/02; C09C 1/48
VS. a. 423-450 10 Claims
1. A method for producing negative tint residual carbon
black comprising
(I) introducing carbon black reactanu under carbon black
producing conditions into a carbon black reactor said
carbon black reactor comprising:
(a) a mixing section with conduit means for the introduc-
tion of reactants;
(b) a reaction section positioned downstream of the mix-
ing section and in open communication therewith;
4,438,090
METHOD OF PREPARING AN INSECTiaDE
CONTAINING BORIC ACID
Alan D. Brite, 5147 W. Jefrersoa Bird., Loa Angelaa, CaUf.
90016
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 24,962, Mar. 29, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 870,740,
Jan. 19, 1978, abandoned. This appUeation Apr. 29, 1982, Str.
No. 372.948
Int a» GOIN 31/Oa 31/22. 33/48; AOIN 59/14
U.S. a. 424-7.1 7 Claim
1. A method of preparing an insecticide containing an insec-
ticidally cfTective amount of boric acid which comprises:
milling boric acid to a particle size between about 100 to
about 400 mesh;
blending said boric acid particles with effective amounu of
a member selected from the group consisting of magne-
sium stearate, silica gel, and tricalcium phosphate, and
with a taste deterent efTective amount of sucrose octa-ace-
Ute or denatonium benzoate, and with a non-white pow-
dered pigment of sufficient quantity to color the insecti-
cide sufficiently soon after said boric acid is milled so that
said boric acid particles remain smaller than about 100
mesh; and
electrically charging said blend to induce an electrosutic
charge on the discrete particles of the insecticide.
1238
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
BROMHEXINE DELAYED-RELEASE
PHARMACEUTICAL FORM
Peter Grnber, Biberach; Jocfaca Sckmid, Warthaoiea; Horat
Leduer, and Eckhan Baacr, both of Biberach, all of Fed.
Rep. of Genmuiy, aMigaon to Dr. Kari Tloaae GmbH, Bibe-
rach an der Rias, Fed. Rep. of Geraiaay
Filed Juo. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,760
daims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Gcnaaay, Jal. 7.
19«1, 3126703
The portion of the term of thia pateat sabaeqaeat to Jan. 4, 1999,
haa been diaclaimed.
Int CL^ A61K 9/22. 9/24
VS. a. 424-21 28 Claima
1. A composition for the delayed release of bromhcxine
which comprises (i) spheroid particles or tablets comprised of
(a) bromhexine and/or acid addition salts thereof and (b) at
least one pharmacologically acceptable acid or acidic sub-
stance, the total amount of acid substance from acid addition
salts present and the acid or acidic substance being in a ratio of
at least 2 mols to 1 mol of bromhexine, and (ii) a coating sur-
rounding said spheroid particles or Ublets, said coating being
comprised of from about 50 to 100 percent by weight of lac-
quers insoluble in gastric juices and soluble in intestinal juices
and from about 0 to 50 percent by weight of lacquers insoluble
in gastric and intestinal juices and said coating being present in
an amount of from about 2 to 30 percent by weight, based upon
the weight of the spheroid particles or tablets.
sizing microorganisms belonging to the genus Corynebacte-
rium, said o-l,3 glucanaae being one prepared from an 0-1,3
•I <•>>«
>•-!,> V*
glucanase-biosynthesizing microorganism belonging to the
genus Pseudomonas. ^
4^438,092
5-AMINO-N-<3.CHLORO- 2.METHYL., OR
^FLUOROPHENYL).l,3.DIMETHYL.lH.PYRAZOLE-4-
CARBOXAMIDES AND USE AS AN ANTI-CONVULSANT
Dietrich Schweiaa, and Ivan C. Nordin, both of Holland, Mich.,
aadgnors to Warner-Lambert Company, Morria Plains, NJ.
Diriaion of Ser. No. 192,407, Sep. 30, 1980, Pat. No. 4,346,097.
Thia appUcatioB Jan. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,344
Int a.3 A61K 31/415; C07D 231/38
US. a. 424-273 P 6 Claims
1. 5-Amino-N-(3-chlorophenyl)-l,3-dimethyl-lH-pyrazole-
4-carboxamide, and the phannaceutically acceptable acid addi-
tion salts thereof.
4. A pharmaceutical composition useful for treating convul-
sions in a warm-blooded animals consisting essentially of an
effective amount of 5-amino-N-(3-chlorophenyl>l,3-dimethyl-
lH-pyrazole•4-carboxamide, or the phannaceutically accept-
able acid addition salts thereof, in combination with a phanna-
ceutically acceptable carrier.
4,438,094
COSMEnC FORMULATIONS CONTAINING
OXYETHYLATED DIPHENYLAMINES AS SUN SCREEN
AGENTS
Kant Oppeolaender, Lodwigahafea; Raiaer Striclder, Heidel-
berg; Karl Seib, Weinheim, aad Panl Naegele, Neahofea, aU of
Fed. Rep. of Gcnaaay, aadgaors to BASF Aktieagesellachaft,
Ladwigriufea, Fed. Rep. of Germaay
Filed Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,417
Claims priority, applicatioa Fed. Rep. of Gcnaaay, May IS.
1981,3119385
lat a.J A61K 7/42. 7/035
VS. a. 424-59 4 Qaiau
1. A sunscreen composition comprising from 0.1 percent to
15 percent, based upon the total weight of the composition, of
an N-oxyethylated diphenylamine sunscreen agent of the for-
mula
4,438,093
ORAL COMPOSITION CONTAINING DEXTRANASE
AND a-1,3 GLUCANASE AND A METHOD FOR
PREVENTING AND SUPPRESSING ORAL DISEASES
USING THE SAME
Kazao Shimada, Naiutado; Maaataka Akiyama, Kaaoi^i, aad
Maaami Sndo, Mitoyo, all of Japaa, aaaigaors to The Re-
search Fooadatioa for Microbial Diseaaca of Oaaka Uaiver-
sity, Oaaka, Japaa
Filed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 364,182
Claiais priority, applicatioa Japaa, Apr. 3, 1981, 56-51004
lat CL^ A61K 7/28. 37/48
VS. CL 424-50 7 Oaima
1. An oral composition synergistic at pH 6.5 which com-
prises a phannaceutically acceptable carrier, dextranase and
a-1,3 glucanase, said dextranase and said a-1,3 glucanase both
being present in an amount of 0.5 to 100 enzyme units per gram
of said oral composition, said dextranase being present in an
enzyme unit ratio of 1:2 to 2:1 relative to said a-1,3 glucanase,
said dextranase being one prepared from dextranase-biosynthe-
wherein R U (CH2— CH2— 0)«— H and n u an integer from 1
to 25, a cosmetic carrier selected from the group consisting of
a solution, an oil, a cream, a salve, a lotion, a gel and a powder
and auxiliary agents selected from the group consisting of
thickeners, emulsifiers, preservatives and fragrances.
4*438,095
NEW COSMETIC COMPOSFHONS FOR HAIR OR SKIN
CONDITIONING, AND THE APPUCATION THEREOF
Jeaa-Fraacois GroUler, Paria, aad Joaiaae AUee, Pierrefltta,
both of Fraace, aaaigaors to Sodete Aaoayaie dite: L'Orcal,
Paria, FhuMC
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,313
Claims priority, applicatioa Flnaacc, Mar. 18, 1980, 80 05985
lat a.3 A45D 19/00: A61K 7/06. 31/74. 47/00
VS. a. 424-70 6 ClaiaH
1. A non-detergent, non-foaming cosmetic composition for
conditioning the hair or skin consisting essentially of two
separate liquid phases for admixture at the time of use, one of
said liquid phases comprising an aqueous phase containing a
soluble cationic polymer and the other of said phases compris-
ing an oily phase, said aqueous phase being present in an
amount ranging from 2-50 volume percent of said composition
the balance being said oily phase, said soluble cationic polymer
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1239
being present in an amount ranging from 0.2 to 50 weight
percent based on the total weight of said composition and said
oily phase comprising 25 to 100 volume percent of a vegeUble
4,438,096
PEARLESCENT SHAMPOO
John C. Prestos, Chicago, III., aaaignor to Heleac Curtis ladus-
tries. Inc., Chicago, lU.
Filed May 27, 1982, Ser. No. 382,421
Int. a.5 A61K 7/06
V.S. a. 424-70 ,7 cud„„
1. In an improved pearlescent shampoo containing water
and ati efFective amount of a cleansing, surface active agent
wherein the improvement comprises myristyl myristate pres-
ent in a crystalline state and in an amount of about 0.2 to about
2.5 weight percent as the pearlescing agent.
4,438,097
COCODIOSIS VACCINES
Martin W. Shirley, Huntingdon, England, aasignor to National
Research Defclopmeat Corporation, Loadoa, England
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,922
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 5, 1980.
8028676
Int a.3 A61K 39/012
U.S. a. 424-88 12 Claims
1. A process for the production of an attenuated strain of £
necatrix. which comprises:
passaging a pathogenic E necatrix in embryonated eggs for
from about 20 to about 60 passages.
(a) applying to said bum wound a spray of a culture of
Candida Knueii;
(b) continuing application of said spray of Candida Krustii to
said bum wound until a crust forms covering said bum
wound;
(c) allowing healing of said bum wound and regeneration of
skin beneath said crust; and
(d) allowing said crust to spontaneously detach from said
bum wound.
4,438,098
HEAT TREATMENT OF A NON-A, NON-B HEPATITIS
AGENT TO PREPARE A VACONE
EdwanI Tabor, RockvUIe, and Robert J. Gerety, Potomac, both
of Md., aaaigaors to The Uaited States of America as repre-
aeated by the Secretary of the Department of Health aad
Humaa Serrices, Waahiagtoa, D.C.
FUed Jaa. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,026
lat a.3 A61K 39/29
VS. a 424-89 2 Claims
4,438,100
STERILIZED PRESERVED, STABLE
MUCINE-CONTAINING SOLUTIONS
Erik Balslc?, Fredensborg; Srean S. Haaaea, Virum, aad Eraat
L. Pedenea, Taastnip, all of Deamark. aaaigaon to A/S
Orthaaa Kemiak Fabrik, Kastnip, Deamark
PCT No. PCr/DK81/00043, § 371 Date Dec. 28, 1981, § 102(c)
Date Dec. 28, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02977, PCT Pub
Date Oct. 29, 1981
PCT Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 336^57
mS^^^i? lit nSSl""" "^^"^ ^''' "' ''~' ""^
lat. a.' A61K 35/38. 33/40
U.S. a. 424—104 29 q,,^
1. An aqueous mucine-containing composition, in particular
for application to human mucous membranes and/or for use u
an ophthalmic soluUon, comprising a non-human mammalian
mucine selected from the group consisting of buccal and gM-
trointcstinal mucines, the composition having a viscosity of at
the most 50 relaUve to water, as measured with an Oswald
viscosimeter, said composition being sterilized and containing
an oxidizing bactericide preservative which is present in a
physiologically tolerable concentration with respect to the
application of the composition.
I
9
UMt
Na«-M
40-
4,438,101
ANTIBIOTICS
Roger J. Poaaford, Dorkiag, aad Tboaiaa T. Howarth, Ewhurtt
both of Eaglaad, aaaigaors to Beachan Group Limited, Ea-
glaad
DlriaioB of Ser. No. 731,928, Oct. 13, 1978, abaadoaed. Thia
appUcatioD Sep. 22, 1978, Ser. No. 944,808
lat a.J A61K 35/00
VS. a. 424-114 gg oalBM
1. A pharmaceutical composition for treating bacterial infec-
tions in humans and animals which comprises a synergistically
effective amount of a compound of the formula:
1. A method of treating the agent of human non-A, non-B
hepatitis to render it incapable of causing infection which
consists essentially of heating said agent contained in serom or
plasma at about 60* C. for about 10 hours and recovering said
treated agent.
KX)2H
CHj-N
/
,CR4R5R«
\
CR4RsR«
4,438,099
BURN TREATMENT
Vittorio Asariti, Loa Ficua 239-Saa laidro, Una 27, Pcra
Filed Dec 9, 1981, Ser. No. 328^15
lat a^ A61K 35/70
UA a 424-93 3 Claims
1. A method for treating bum wounds comprising:
or a phannaceutically acceptable salt thereof wherein R4 is
hydrogen. R5 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms and
R« is phenyl unsubstituted or substituted by a substituent se-
lected from the group consisting of halogen, alkyl of 1 to 4
carbon atoms, alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms and hydroxyl, and
an antibacterially effective amount of amoxycillin or a pharma-
ceuticaUy accepuble salt thereof, in combination with a phar-
maceutically acceptable carrier.
1240
OmciAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
4,438,102
METHOD OF PROMOTING TISSUE GROWTH
Sairaton CmaeU New York, N.Y^ aisignor to Giro's Touch,
Ud^ New York, N.Y.
FOed Aug. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 406,869
lat a.3 A61K 31/19. 33/40
UA a 424-130 MCtaliM
1. A method of promoting the growth of normal dermal and
epidermal tissue in mammals which comprises topical treat-
ment of a mammal in need of such promotion with a composi-
tion comprising from 25 to 40% by weight of a mixture con-
taining thioglycolic acid and 65% to 85% dilute ammonium
hydroxide at a pH of from 8.5 to 1 1 together with:
Glycerine: 0.15 to 0.25%
Citric Acid: 0.095 to 0.29%
Hydrogen Peroxide: 0.0097 to 0.014%
Solvent: 0.39 to 0.78%
Lower Alkanol: 0.78 to 1.95%
Gelatin: 1.17 to 2.73%
and water, all percentages pased on the total weight of the
composition.
R4CO. wherein R4 is as previously defined. H-Ars. H-Lys.
H-Phe or H-Tyr.
B U -(D)Ala-,
D is a residue of formula
-N— CH— CO—
I I
Rs CH2
4,438,103
ORGANIC COMPOUNDS
WUfried Bauer, Magden; Francois Cardinaux; Rene Huguenin,
both of Reinach; Jaoos Pless, Basel, and Edmond Sandrin,
Riehcn, all of Switzerland, assignors to Sandoz Ltd., Basel
Switzerland '
ConHnuation of Ser. No. 762,646, Jan. 26, 1977, abandoned. This
appUcation Dec. 2, 1977, Ser. No. 856,617
Claims priority, applicatioB Switzerland, Feb. 2, 1976
1266/76; Jun. 14, 1976, 7524/76; Jun. 14, 1976, 7525/76; Jul.
13, 1976, 8955/76; Jul. 13, 1976, 8956/76; Jul. 19, 1976.
9206/76; Jul. 19, 1976, 9208/76; Aug. 25, 1976, 10763/76; Aug.
25, 1976, 10764/76; Sep. 23, 1976, 12064/76
lilt. a.J A6IK 37/00: C07C 103/52
U-S. a. 424-177 19 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
A-B-Gly-D-E
wherein A is a residue of formula
(R«)«
wherein
R5 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
R6 is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, nitro, alkyl of 1 to
4 carbon atoms or alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and
z is 1 or 2,
E is
(i) -Met-X, -Uu-X, -Nle-X, -Nva-X. -Ile-X, or '
or CH3-S(0)fl-CH2-CH2-CH
wherein X is
/
•N or —OR"
R"
\
NH-
{« = 1 or 2)
CO— X
and each of R', R", and R'" independently signifies hydro-
gen or alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or
(ii) a residue of formula
R2
^ >-CH2-C-CO-
NHZ
wherein
R| is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
R2 is hydrogen or, together with Ri. forms an ethylene bridge,
and
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or an R4CO—
group, wherein
R4 is a saturated or unsaturated branched or unbranched alkyl
residue of 1 to 17 carbon atoms, phenyl or phenylalkyi of 7
to 12 carbon atoms in which the phenyl residue can be
mono- or disubstituted with fluorine, chlorine or bromine,
alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or alkoxy of 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
whereby the R3O group is in a position meta- or para- to the
— CH2— C— CO— residue.
NHZ
Z is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, alkenyl of 3 to 5
carbon atoms, cyclopropylmethyl, cyclobutylmethyl,
-N-CH-CH20R'3
R? Rg
wherein
R3' « hydrogen or R4CO— , wherein R4 is as previously
defined,
R7 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and
R8 is (a)
-(Ch2)2-CH3, -CH
\
CH3
CH3
/
— (CH2)3— CH3. — CH2— CH
CH3
CH3
-CH-CH2-CH3.
CHj
(b) — (CH2);n— CH2OR3' wherein R3' is as previously
defined, and m is from 0 to 6,
(c)
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1241
— CH— OR'3
I
CH3
wherein R3' is as previously defmed,
(d) -CH2-S-H.
(c)
-(CH2),-CH2-S-R9
(O),
wherein R9 is alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, r is 0, 1 or 2,
and s is 0, 1 or 2,
(2) the D-configuration when E is other than as defmed in I
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt or complex form thereof
4,438 104
ENDORPHINS HAVING PLACENTAL OR PANCREATIC
ORIGIN
Charles D. Kimball, and John C. Houck, both of Seattle, Wuh.,
assignors to Endorphin, Inc., Seattle, Wash.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 293,118, Aug. 17, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 109,233, Jan. 3,
1980, Pat. No. 4,316,895. This appUcation Jul. 1, 1982, Ser. No.
394,340
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 23,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.J A61K 37/00; C07C 103/52
U.S. a. 424—177
2 Claims
(0 — (CH2)4— NH2, — (CH2)4— NHCOR4, wherein R4 is ^ '^" endorphin peptide having a molecular weight by
as previously defmed, ^xmao acid analysis of about 14,000 daltons. having an infrared
spectrum substantially as shown in FIG. 5, and having an
amino acid analysis substantially as follows:
-(CH2)3— NH-C
\
NH2
— CH2-
r;
N
H
— CH2-
o
H
(g) — {CH2)«— CONH2, wherein n is 1 or 2,
(h) — (CH2)if— COORio, wherein n is as previously de-
fined, and Rio is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon
atoms, or
or (iii) a residue of formula
Amino Acid
Nanomoles
Asptrtic «cid
9.4
Threonine
6.2
Serine
10.1
Oluumic acid
16.0
Proline
6.3
Glycine
18.6
Alanine
12.S
Valine
6.0
Methionine
\A
Itoleucine
2.6
Leucine
7.1
Tyrosine
I.I
Phenylalanine
43
Histidine
3.6
Lysine
7.i
Arginine
2.8
Total
115.4
said peptide being immunoreactive against beta-endorphin
rabbit antisera and displacing Naloxone from opiate receptors
in brain tissue.
r ■
— N— CH— CH2 4,438,105
,_„/ \ 4'-IODODERIVATIVES OF ANTHRACYCLINE
(CH2),^ ^O GLYCOSIDES
' I Antonino Suarato; Sergio Penco; Federico Arcaraoue, and Anna
O M. Casazza, all of Milan, Italy, assignors to Farmaitalia Carlo
Erba S.P.A, Milan, Italy
wherein n and R7 are as previously defined, whereby the A ^^*^ ^'"'* **' ^^^' ^'■- ^^' 3*8»415
and D residues possess either the L- or D.L-configuration ,, e ^ ..,- ^i'^'^ *^^^^ ^^^^^' ^^" ^^^^^
and the residue E possesses ^•^' "' ♦24—180 5 Claims
(1) the L-, D- or D.L-configuration, where E is ^ ^^ anthracycline glycosidic compound of the general
formula I.
NH-
CH3-S(0)a— CH2— CH2-CH or
CO— X
— N— CH— CH20R'3 where
R? R»
Rg U — (CH2),— CH2— S— R9
(0)r
r is 1 or 2 and s, X, R3', R7 and R9 are as previously defined
or
1040 O.G.— 47
wherein R is a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group.
1242
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
5. A method of inhibiting the growth of a tumor selected
from the group of P388 leukemia or Gross leukemia, said
method comprising administering to a host afflicted with said
tumor a therapeutically effective amount of an anthracycline
glycoside as claimed in claim 1.
4438 106
INCLUSION COMPOUND OF EICOSAPENTAENOIC
ACID OR DOCOSAHEXAENOIC ACID WITH
CYCLODEXTRIN
Masakatstt Wagn; ShoicUro Hayuhi, and KooicU Kodama, all
of Iwaki, Japan, assignors to Kureha Kagaku KabiisUki Kai-
sba, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 393,314
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 16, 1981, 56-111439
Int. a.3 A61K 31/70
UA CI. 424-180 4Ctaims
1. An mclusion compound of cyclodextrin and one or more
compounds selected from the group consisting of eicosapenta-
enoic acid, docosahexaenoic acid, alkali metal salts thereof
and C| to C4 alkyl esters thereof.
4,438,107
AMINOGLYCOSIDES AND USE THEREOF
Isamu Watanabe, Higashimurayama; Takashi Yamaguchi, To-
kyo; Kazuhiro Kamiya; Toshihito Mori, both of Higa-
•himurayama; Hamao Umezawa; Sumio Umezawa, both of
Tokyo, and Tsutomu Tsuchiya, Yokohama, all of Japan, as-
^gnors to Kowa Company, Ltd., Aichi and Zaidan Hojin
Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenkyu Kai, Tokyo, both of, Japan
Filed Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,812
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 29, 1981, 56-117856
Int. a.3 A61K 31/70; C08B 37/00
VS. CI. 424-180 4 cMm
1. A compound of the following formula
(I)
NH2
OiU
wherem one of R, and R2 represents a hydrogen atom and
the other, a methyl group, R3 represenu a hydrogen atom
or an ammo acyl group having 2 to 5 carbon atoms, R4
represents a lower aikyl group substituted by one or two
substituents selected from the class consisting of hydroxy
and amino groups, or a hexopyranosyl group whose hy-
droxy groups may be substituted by amino groups,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
4438 108
ANTI-THROMBOTICUM BASED ON
POLYSACHARIDES, METHOD FOR PREPARATION
AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
Adrianus L. M. Sanders, Uden; Dirk G. Menleman, Oss; Huib-
wt C. T. Moelker, Megen; GUsbert W. K. yan Dedem, and
Fnaeois E. A. ran Houdenho? en, both of Heesch, aU of Neth-
erlands, assignors to Akzo N.V., Amhem, Netherlands
FUed May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,581
81^51? ^'^^^^ WMcation Netherlands, May 21, 1981,
Int a.3 A61K 35/14; C08B 37/10
VS. a. 424-183 g cj^
3. An antithrombotically effective heparinoid, which is a
mixture of oligo- and polysaccharides from residues of glucu-
romc aad, iduronic acid, glucosamine, galactosamine, and
Milfated and acctylated derivatives thereof, said heparinoid
(a) a molecular weight between 2000 and 40,000 daltons with
a mam peak between 2500 and 15,000 daltons
(b) a specific rotation ([a]iP^ between +25* and +80';
(c) a nitrogen content between 1.5 and 4% by weight;
(d) a sulphur content between 5 and 7.5% by weight;
(e) a content of ionic groups in meq/g between 3 and 5;
(0 a content of sulphamido groups in meq/g between 0.5 and
1. 3;
(g) a glucosamine content in meq/g of 0.5 to 1.5;
(h) a galactosamine content in meq/g of 0.0 to 0.1; and
(i) an idose (iduronic acid)/glucose (glucuronic acid)-ratio of
0.5 to 3;
said heparinoid having
(1) an anti-coagulation activity (USP) of less than 10 interna-
tional units per mg;
(2) a negligible thrombin activity (less than 1% of that of
hepann USP);
(3) an anti-Xa activity of less than 20% of that of heparin,
usually between 2.5 and 15%;
(4) an anti-thrombotic activity (Umetsu model) with an ID50
of roughly 2 to 8 mgAg i.v.;
(5) a bleeding activity which hardly increases at all over a
wide dosage range (up to 300 mg/kg i.v.);
(6) a benefit/risk ratio which is 10-40 times more favourable
than that for heparin USP having regard to the anti-
thrombotic activity as compared with haemmorrhagic
acuvity, and *
(7) half value time which is at least twice as long as that of
hepann USP.
6. Pharmaceutical composition having anticlotting activity
which compnses an anticlotting effective amount of a com-
pound of claim 3 in a pharmaceutical acceptable carrier.
4438 109
TYLOSIN DERIVATIVES
Hjunao Umezawa; Sumio Umezawa, both of Tokyo; Tsutomu
Tsuchiya, and AUhiro Tanaka, both of Kanagawa, all of Ja-
PM, assignors to Zaidan HoJin Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenkyu
Kai, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 285,747
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 25, 1980, 55-101933-
Aug. 28, 1980, 55-118915; Nov. 6, 1980, 55-156263; Jan. 6, 1981
56-573; Jan. 6, 1981, 56-574; Jan. 6, 1981, 56-575; Feb. 25, 1981,
56-26457; Jun. 19, 1981, 56-93782
Int. a.3 A61K 31/70; C07H 17/08
VS. a. 424-180 ,5 cui,^
1. A compound derived from tylosin having the formula
0=
wherein R represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl group;
Ri represents a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, a tetrahy-
drofuranyloxy group, a tetrahydropyranyloxy group, a tet-
rahydrothiofuranyloxy group, a tetrahydrothiopyranyloxy
group, an aUcanoyloxy group, an arylcarbonyloxy group, an
araUcylcarbonyloxy group, a lower alkylthiomethyloxy group.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1243
a substituted or unsubstituted heterocyclic thio group, a mono- ing compound is from about 1:5 to about 1:50.000 paru by
or di-lower alkylamino lower alkylthio group, or a group of weight respectively
the formula
CH3
O—
CH30 cx:hj
wherein R4 represents a hydroxyl group or an alkanoyloxy
group; R2 represente a hydrogen atom, a hydroxyl group, or an
alkanoyloxy group; R3 represents a hydroxyl group or an
alkanoyloxy group; and *_i_4 represents a single bond or a
double bond but, when Rj is a hydrogen atom, represents a
double bond.
11. An antibiotic composition comprising a therapeutically
effective amount of a tylosin derivative of claim 1 in combina-
tion with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
4,438,110
CHEWING INSECT TOXICANT COMPOSITIONS
Hafez M. Ayad, Cary, N.C., assignor to Union Carbide Corpora-
tion, Danbury, Conn.
This application Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,668
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 278,722, Jun. 29, 1981, now
abandoned.
Int. a.' AGIN 57/02. 47/28
VS. a. 424-217 37 Claims
1. A chewing insect toxicant composition comprising a
non-toxic carrier and an insecticidally effective amount of (1) a
I -(mono-substituted phenyl)-3-benzoyl urea compound having
the formula:
R2
in admixture with (2) a phosphorous-containing compound
having the formula:
(RY^T— P
wherein:
R is:
an alkyl group having no more than ten carbon atoms, or
aryl or aryl substituted with alkyl or alkoxy;
R] and R2 are independently:
hydrogen, or halogen;
R3 is:
halogen,
an alkyl, haloalky, alkoxy, or
haloalkoxy group having no more than
eight carbon atoms,
a pyridyloxy group, or
a halopyridyloxy group;
Y and Q are independently:
oxygen.or
sulfur; and
xis:
zero, or
one
wherein the weight proportion ratio of the I -(mono-substituted
phenyl)-3-benzoyl urea compound to the phosphorous contain-
4,438,111
PROSTANOID COMPOUNDS AND PHARMACEUTICAL
FORMULATIONS
Eric W. ColUngton, Welwyn; Peter HaUett, Buntingford, aad
Christopher J. Wallis, Royston, all of England, assignors to
Glaxo Group Limited, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 223,316, Jan. 8, 1981, abandoned. This
application Sep. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 419,520
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 9, 1980,
oUUUo9o
Int. a.3 A61K 31/535. 31/54; C07D 413/12. 417/12
VS. a. 424-246 g claims
1. A compound of the formula
^^CH2XR'
0v
in which
A represents
X is cis or trans — CH=CH— or — (CH2)2— ;
R' is straight or branched C1.7 alkyl bearing as a terminal
substituent — COOR'O where R'O is a hydrogen atom,
Ci^ alkyl or C7.10 aralkyl;
Y is a saturated heterocyclic amino group which has 5-8
ring members, and optionally contains in the ring one or
more — O— ,— S— .— SO2— .— NR'* — . or C(OH)R'
substituents;
wherein R'^ is a hydrogen atom. C1.7 alkyl or aralkyl having
a C\^ alkyl portion. R* is a hydrogen atom, C1.7 alkyl,
phenyl or aralkyl having a Cm alkyl portion; and said
saturated heterocyclic amino group is optionally substi-
tuted by one or more Cm alkyl groups;
R^ is the group:
— *lk
Ri'
where alk is C1.3 alkylene;
Z is O, or S;
R'l is a hydrogen atom; Cm aUiyl; Cm alkoxy; aryl or
phenylalkoxy or phenylalkyl having a C1.3 alkyl portion,
wherein the aryl portion is optionally substituted by C1.3
alkyl, C1.3 alkoxy or halogen; aryloxy; Cs-7 cycloalkyl;
halogen or nitro; and the physiologically acceptable salts
thereof.
8. A composition comprising a compound u claimed in
claim 1, 2, 3 or 7 with one or more pharmaceutical carriers.
1244
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
4 438 112
PROSTANOID COMPOU!sn)S AND PHARMACEUTICAL
FORMULATIONS
Eric W. CoUington, Welwyn; Peter HaUett, Bnntingford; Chris-
topher J. Walljfl, Royston, and John Bradshaw, Ware, aU of
England, assignors to Glaxo Group Limited, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 223,315, Jan. 8, 1981, abandoned. This
application Sep. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 419,521
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 9. 1980.
8000697
Int. a.3 A61K 31/53. 31/54: C07D 295/14
MS. a. 424-244 g cudms
1. A compound of the formula
4,438 113
7-ACYLAMINOCEPHALOSPORANIC KCTD
DERIVATIVES
Takao Takaya, Kawanishi; Hisashi Takaiogi; Masayoshi Mu-
rata, both of Osaka, and Akiteru Yoshioka, Kyoto, all of
Japan, assignors to FiOisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,161
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Dec. 31, 1980,
8041635; Mar. 23, 1981, 8108991; Sep. 1, 1981, 8126500
Int a.3 A61K 31/545: C07D 501/56
U.S. a. 424-246 n ctatais
1. 7-Acylaminocephalo8poranic acid derivatives of the for-
mula:
^CH2XR'
in which
A represents
ORf ORJ
or
(a)
0>)
X is cis or trans — CH=CH— or — (CH2)2— ;
R' is straight or branched C1.7 alkyl bearing as a terminal
substituent -COOR'O where R is a hydrogen atom. Ci^
alkyl or C7.10 aralkyl;
Y is a saturated heterocyclic amino group which has 5-8
ring members, and optionally contains in the ring one or
more -0-, _S-. -SO2-, -NR>*-. or C(0H)R6
substituents; wherein R'*is a hydrogen atom, C1.7 alkyl or
aralkyl having a Cm alkyl portion, R* is a hydrogen atom,
C1.7 alkyl, phenyl or aralkyl having a Cm alkyl portion;
and said saturated heterocyclic amino group is optionally
substituted by one or more Cm alkyl groups;
R* is a phenalkyl group having a C1.3 alkyl portion and a
phenyl portion substituted with C1.3 alkylthio, C1.3 alkyl-
sulphinyl. C1.3 alkylsulphonyl, C1.3 alkanoylamino, ben-
zoylamino, phenylalkyl having a C1.3 alkyl portion,
aminosulphonyl having the amino group optionally substi-
tuted by one or more Cio alkyl groups, C1.3 al-
kanoylaminosulphonyl having the amino group optionally
substituted by C1.3 alkyl, phenylsulphony having the
phenyl portion optionally substituted by C1.3 alkyl, nitro,
tetrazol-S-yl, thienyl, or phenyl substituted by R' where
R5 is Cm alkyl, Cm alkoxy, halogen or phenyl;
and the physiologically acceptoble salts thereof.
8. A composition comprising a compound as claimed in
claim 1, 2, 3 or 7 with one or more pharmaceutical carriers.
wherein
R* is amino or protected amino,
R2 is carboxyflower)alkenyl, protected carboxy(lower)alke-
nyl, lower alkenyl, cycIo(lower)alkenyl or lower alkynyl,
R3 is a heterocyclicthiomethyl which may have substituents
selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl and
carboxy(lower)alkyl,
R* is carboxy or protected carboxy,
R' is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and
X is halogen,
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
17. A pharmaceutical antimicrobial composition comprising
an effective amount of a compound of claim 1 or a pharmaceu-
tically acceptable salt thereof in association with a pharmaceu-
tically acceptoble, substantially non-toxic carrier or excipient.
4 438 114
iS-LACTAM ANTIBIOTICS
Michael Boberg; Dieter Hifbich; Karl G. Metzger, and Paul
Naab, all of Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,632
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 17,
1981,3137038
Int. a.3 A61K 31/535: C07D 498/04
U.S. a. 424-248.51 12 Claims
1. A yS-lactam of the formula
II
C
Z— N
I
CH2
\ /n N-CO-NH-CH-
-CH2
B
CH2
/
COOE
or a hydrate thereof,
in which
R represents a hydrogen atom or a methoxy group,
n is 1 or 2,
Z represents a group of the formula
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
124S
H
\
(
C— N—
thereof and a pharmaceutically acceptoble carrier selected
from the group consisting of lactose, starch, mannitol. sucrose,
wherein R' denotes a phenyl group which is optionally
substituted by halogen, alkyl or alkoxy having 1 to 4
carbon atoms, nitro, cyano, 1 or 2 hydroxy! groups, S-
alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkyl-sulphonyl having
1 to 4 carbon atoms or CH3OOC— ; or denotes a thienyl
or furyl group which is optionally substituted by halogen,
NO2, alkyl or alkoxy-carbonyl having 1 to 4 carbon
atoms, S— Ci to C4 alkyl, C| to C4 alkylsulphonyl, Ci to
C4-alkyl-sulphinyl or CH3COOCH2— , or denotes a pyri-
dyl group;
or, when n is 1,
Z can also represent a cyclopropyl, furyl, pyridyl, thienyl, or
benzthiazol-2-yl radical, or a 1, 3, 4-thiadiazol-2-yl radical
which is optionally substituted in the S-position by sec-
butyl, trifluoromethyl, methylthio, i-propylthio or me-
thylsulphonyl,
B represents a phenyl, hydroxyphenyl, cyclohexadienyl,
furyl, thienyl, pyrrolyl, imidazolyl, thiazolyl, isothiazolyl,
isoxazolyl or thiadiazolyl group,
T denotes an alkyl— CO— O—, pyridinium,
aminopyridinium, carbamoylpyridinium or carbamoyloxy
group, an —S— phenyl group which can be substituted, or
a tetrazolylthio or thia-diazolylthio group which is option-
ally substituted by alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, by
CF3 or by CH2COOH; and
E represents a hydrogen atom, a pharmaceutically accept-
able ester grouping, a salt-forming cation or a protective
group, or represents a negative charge when T contoins a
quaternary nitrogen.
11. A method of combating bacterial illnesses in human and
non-human animals which comprises administering to the
animals an antibacterially efTi^ctive amount of a compound or
hydrate according to claim 1.
4438 115
COMPOSITIONS ANd'mETHODS FOR TREATING
DISEASES IN aRCULATORY ORGANS
Hlroyukl Nagano; Mitiro Takagi; Noboru Kubodera, all of
Saitama; Isao Matsunaga, Tokyo; Tamotsu Yamazaki,
Saitama; Hlroyukl Nabata, Tokyo; Kazushige Sakai, Tokyo,
and Shun-ichi Hata, Kanagawa, all of Japan, assignors to
Chugai Seiyaku Kabushikl Kalsha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,077
Qalms priority, application Japan, Jun. 13, 1980, 55-79043
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/48
U.S. a. 424—250 15 Claims
1. A composition for treating diseases in circulatory organs
which comprises a piperazine compound of the formula:
QC-
C00R2
or'
(wherein Ri is a lower alkyl group; R2 is a hydrogen atom or
a lower alkyl; and A is a straight or branched alkylene) or a salt
PRESSLAE
NOMAL
NORMAL
NCM«L
-20
l^Ln^ iSm
•o
-aO'
-30
30
•C
70
(mnl
kaolin, crystalline cellulose, tolc, calcium carbonate and mag-
nesium stearate.
4,438,116
QUINOXALINYLOXY-AMINO-PROPANOL
COMPOUNDS WITH BLOOD PRESSURE LOWERING
AND /3-BLOCKING PROPERTIES, THEIR USE AND
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING
THEM
Carl H. Ross, Viemheim; Wolfgang Kampe, Heddesheim; Wolf-
gang Bartsch, Viemheim; Glsberi Sponer, Hemsbach, and
Egon Roesch, Mannheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Boehringer Mannheim GmbH, Mannheim, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 153,308, May 27, 1980, abandoned.
This application Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,894
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 31,
1979, 2922084
Int. C1.J C07D 241/44. 241/42: A61K 31/495. 31/505
U.S. a. 424—250 21 Claims
1. An aminopropanol compound of the formula
OR3
O— CH2— CH— CH2— B
N
I
R4
N O
wherein
Ri and R2 are individually selected from hydrogen and
lower alkyl; or
R| and R2 together represent an alkylene radical of between
2 and 4 carbon atoms;
R3 is hydrogen or acyl in the form of an acid residue of an
hydrocarbon aliphatic carboxylic acid containing 2 to 6
carbon atoms, an aromatic carboxylic acid or of an aro-
matic carboxylic acid substituted with up to two substitu-
ents selected from halogen, lower alkyl or lower alkoxy
radicals;
R4 is hydrogen or lower alkyl optionally including one
substituent selected from hydroxyl, hdogen or lower
alkylthio; and
B is alkylamino which optionally carries on the alkyl moiety
a phenyl and/or a phenoxy radical optionally substituted
by one of halogen, hydroxyl, lower alkyl, lower acyl,
lower alkylthio, acylamino, aminocarbonyl, lower alkoxy,
lower alkenyloxy, phenoxy, lower alkenyl, lower alkylsul-
phonyl, lower alkylsulphinyl or haloalkyl; or
is a phenyl-, naphthyl-, pyridyl-, pyrimidyl-, or ben-
zimidazolinyl-oxymethylpiperidine radical, optionally
B
1246
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
substituted by at least one of halogen, hydroxyl or lower
alkyl, hydroxyl alky] or carboxyamido alkyl. or by lower
alkoxy, lower acyl. amino, carboxamido. lower alkanecar-
boxamido or lower alkylsulphonylamino; wherein the
acyl radicals or acyl moieties in either B definition are in
the form of an acid residue of an hydrocarbon aliphatic
carboxylic acid containing 2 to 6 carbon atoms, an aro-
matic carboxylic acid or of an aromatic carboxylic acid
substituted with up to two substituents selected from
halogen, lower alkyl or lower alkoxy radicals, the piperi-
dme radical in each case being fixed to the propanol chain
by its nitrogen atom;
and the pharmacologically acceptable salts thereof
2. A pharmaceutical composition with blood pressure lower-
mg and ^-blocking properties comprising a pharmaceutically
acceptable carrier and, in effective amount, an aminopropanol
compound as claimed in claim 1.
4438118
SUBSTITUTED IMIDAZOf 1,2-8 IP YRIMIDINES AND
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING
THEM
Helmut Stiihle; Herbert KSppe; Werner Kununer, aU of Ingel-
beta; Ktous Stockhaus, Bingen; Wolfram Gaida, Ingelbeim.
and Wolfgang Hoefke, Wiesbaden, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger'
many, assignors to Boehringer Ingelheim KG, Ingelheim am
Rhein, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 389,284
198lf3124^18'^*^' •"'""****" *'•*'• "•"• °' G«™»ny. Jun. 24,
Int a.3 C07D 467/00: A61K 31/505
Ui5. CI. 424-251 ^^ cWnu
1. A compound of the formula
r^^
5
N
i
4,438,117
2^UBSTITUTEDTHIO-4.5.DIARYLPYRIMIDINES
Sanl C. Cherkofiky, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
oe Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Dei.
FUed Sep. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 183,336
Int. a.3 A61K 31/505: C07D 239/22
U.S. a. 424-251 18 ^tai^
1. A compound of the formula
wherem R represents a phenyl group having from 1 to 3 sub-
stituents selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, fiuo-
nnc, chlonne and bromine atoms and methyl and trifluoro-
methyl groups, the substituents being identical or different, or
a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt
thereof.
Rj N
SRi
wherein
R|=mono or polyfiuoro C1-C2 alkyl or C1-C2 alkyl;
R2 and R3 independently = 3-pyridyl or
"i>
4438 119
METHOD FOR ALLEVUTION OF EXTRAPYRAMIDAL
MOTOR DISORDERS
"2!l*^-,^"f"' ^'«"^e' "«« Leslie A. Riblet, Mt. Vernon,
both of Ind., assignors to Mead Johnson A Company, Evans-
▼ille, Ind.
FUed Dec. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 452,686
lat. a.3 A61K 31/505
1. A method for alleviation of extrapyramidal motor disor-
ders which comprises administering a non-toxic therapeuti-
cally effective dose of buspirone or a pharmaceutically accept-
able acid addition salt thereof to a mammal in need of such
treatment.
4,438,120
PYRIDOINDOLOBENZODUZEPINE TRANQUILIZERS
PMthasarathi R^jagopalan. WUmington, Del., assignor to E. L
Du Podt de Nemours A Company, WUmington, Del
*^i^«. p. «. OCH„ OCH.CH3. S(0,,CH3, or , '^^)Si^'^>ti^r^,f,t
A(Ci-C2 alkyl)amino; U.S. Q. 424-256 14 Claims
n-0, 1 or 2; 1. a compound of the formula:
Y=H or CI provided when Y=CI,
X must=Cl;
provided R2 and R3 cannot both be phenyl; provided also that ^
jp-Rs I, a = double bond
X I (I II. a = single bond
R2 = CI-/ V „d Rj = CH3O-/ \_,
then R, cannot=CF2CHF2; or a pharmaceutical suitable salt
thereof
13. A method for treating arthritis or alleviating pain in a
^mal which comprises administering to the mammal an
effective antiarthritic or analgesic amount of a compound of
claim 1.
R3— N
N
N-R
wherein
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1247
a is a single or double bond; provided that when a is a single
bond, the ring fusion is of the trans-configuration;
Ri, R2, R4 and Rs independently are H, alkyl of 1 or 2 car-
bon atoms, CF3, CI, F or Br;
R3 is H or alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R is H, alkyl of 1 to 10 carbon atoms, (CH2)«C(0)R6,
(CH2)„CH(OH)R6'. (CH2)„CONR8R9, (CH2)„(C3.7 cy-
cloalkyl), (CH2)>iadamantyl,
(CH2)„-/ y .or(CH2)„0-/ Y ;
n is 1 to 8;
R6 is H, OH, OR7, C1.3 alkyl, C3^ cycloalkyl, or
(CH2)«-/ y :
R6' is H, C1.3 alkyl, C3.6 cycloalkyl,
(CH2),
<y'
m is O to 3;
R7 is CH3 or C2H5;
Y is H, CH3. OCH3 or NO2;
Rg and R9 are independently H, CH3 or C2H5, or.^
Rg and R9, together, are — CH2CH2OCH2CH2— ;'and
X is H2, O, or S, provided that when X is O or S, then a is
a double bond; and provided further that when X is H2, a
is a single bond, and R|, R4 and Rs are H, then R2 c4mnot
be CF3 when R is CH3 or
,CH.^,
and R2 cannot be CI when R is
"O^
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
12. A method for tranquilizing a mammal which comprises
administering to a mammal in need of such treatment a tran-
quilizing effective amount of a compound of claim 1, claim 2,
claim 3, claim 4, claim 5, claim 6, claim 7, claim 8, claim 9 or
claim 10.
4,438,121
ISOQUINOLINE AMIDOXIME DERIVATIVES
Daniel Obitz, Antony, France, assignor to Synthelabo, Paris,
France
FUed May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 381,749
aaims priority, appUcation France, May 26, 1981, 8110428
Int a.J A61K 310/47: C07D 217/02
\}&. a. 424—258 6 Claims
1. A heterocyclic amidoxime derivative of the formula:
NOH
R— CH— C
I \
R' NH2
wherein R' represents hydrogen or methyl, and R represents
l-oxo-lH-isoquinolin-2-yl or 4<hloro-]-oxo-lH-isoquinolin-
2-yl, and— when R' represents methyl— racemates and enantio-
mers of such a compound, and pharmaceutically-acceptable
acid addition salts thereof
6. A method for the treatment of a patient suffering from a
complaint of the central nervous system or for the treatment of
depression which comprises administering to the patient an
amount of a heterocyclic amidoxime derivative of the gcneraJ
formula depicted in claim 1, or a pharmaceutically-acceptable
acid addition salt thereof, effective to ameliorate the condition
of the patient.
4,438,122
COMBATING FUNGI WITH
1-PHENOXY-2.PYRIDINYL-ALKANOLS
Graham Holmwood, Wuppertal; Paul-Ernst Frobberger, Lefer-
kusen; Wilbelm Brandes, Leichlingen, and Volker Paul, So-
lingen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, auignort to Bayer Ak-
tiengeselUchaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 161,636, Jun. 20, 1980, which U a
continuation of Ser. No. 937,650, Aug. 28, 1978, abandoned. This
application Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,749
Qainu priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 20,
1977, 2742173
Int. a.3 A61K 31/44: C07D 213/30
U.S. a. 424—263 8 Claims
1. A l-phenoxy-2-pyridinylalkanol of the formula
in which
R is alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; or phenyl optionally
substituted with halogen;
Y each independently is halogen, alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon
atoms, halogenoalkyl with up to 2 carbon atoms and up to
3 halogen atoms, alkoxy with up to 2 carbon atoms,
phenyl, phenoxy or phenylalkoxy or phenylalkyi with I or
2 carbon atoms in the alkyl part; and
n is an integer from 0 to 2.
4,438,123
OPHTHALMIC COMPOSITIONS OF CARBONIC
ANHYDRASE INHIBITORS FOR TOPICAL
APPUCATION IN THE TREATMENT OF ELEVATED
INTRAOCULAR PRESSURE
Robert L. Smith, Lansdale, Pa., assignor to Merck A Co., Inc.,
Rahway, N J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 128,439, Mar. 4, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,273
Int. a.5 A61K 31/425
U.S. a. 424—270 12 Claims
1. An ophthalmic composition for lowering intraocular
pressure comprising from 0.01 to 2% by weight of a mono
alkali metal salt of a dibasic carbonic anhydrase inhibitor and
an ophthalmologically acceptable carrier for topical applica-
tion, where the carbonic anhydrase inhibitor is selected from
the group consisting of N-[S-(amino-sulfonyl)-3-methyl- 1,3,4-
1248
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
^"^"^^'■^(^H^ylideneJ-acetainide; N-[5-(ainii,o-sulfonyI)-
U,4-thiadiazo .2-yI]propanamide; N-[5-(ainino8uIfon yl). 1 .3,4-
thiadiazol-2-yl]butanamide and 5-benzenesulfonamido- 1 3 4-
thiadiazol-2-sulfonainide.
4 438 124
CYSTEINE DELIVERY SYSTEM
Alton Meister, New York, and Joanne M. WiUianison. Rooae-
Teh laland, both of N.Y., aaaignors to Cornell Research Foun-
dation, Inc., Ithaca, N.Y.
DiTisionof Ser. No. 233,564, Feb. II, 1981, Pat. No. 4,335,210.
This appUcation Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368,905
Int a.3 A61K 31/J95
U.S. a. 424-270 , Qjj^
1. Method of combatting poisoning associated with the
lessenmg of the glutathione content of cells of an in vivo sys-
tem which comprises administering to the cells and amount of
L-2-oxothiazohdme-4-carboxylate sufficient to increase the
glutathione content of said cells.
Ri4 is Ci-Cjalkyl or NH(Ci-C3alkyl), and
Ri5 and R|6, each independently of the other, are Ci-Cial-
kyl. ' ^
6. A method of controlling and/or protecting plants from
attack by phytopathogenic microorganisms, which method
compnses applying to said plants or to the locus thereof a
microbicidally effective amount of a compound according to
claim 1. , *
4438 125
ARYLAMINE DERIVATIVES AND USE AS
MICROBiaOES
'^'SI'u'I"'^'*' ^■*'*"' Wolfgang Eckhardt, Lorrach, and Peter
Riebli, Basel, aU of Switzerland, assignors to aba-Geiay
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y. *^
Division of Ser. No. 285,652, Jul. 21, 1981, Pat. No. 4,377,587.
This appUcation Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 417,232
aaims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 25. 1980
5709/80; Jul. 25, 1980, 5710/80 * '
Int. a.3 AOIN 3 7/34: C07C 121/78
U.S. a. 424-269 , ^tai^
1. A compound of the formula
Ar— N
/
R
I
CH— CN
4,438,126
LOWER ALKANOIC AQD DERIVATIVES OF
^'°^°fv^J?i^^"NES AND ALDOSE REDUCTASE
INHIBITING COMPOSITIONS THEREOF
Ikuo Ueda; Masaaki Matsuo, both of Toyonaka; Susumu Satoh.
Ik^ and Takao Watanabe, Mukou, all of Japan, assignor^
to FH^isawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 155,185. Jun. 2, 1980, Pat. No. 4,370,340.
This appUcation Aug. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 409,089
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 12, 1979, 54-74239
„ o ^ '"*• ^'^ ^^'^ ^'^^/^^: A«1K 31/42
U.S. CI. 424-272 3 a^
I. A compound of the formula:
\
C— B
II
O
wherein
R is hydrogen or methyl,
Ar is one of the aromatic groups
Rs Ri
-;£I>
1-,.
wherein
Rfl' is phenyl,
R2 is halogen,
R3 is carboxy or lower alkoxycarbonyl,
Ya is oxygen,
AisCi-C6alkylene,
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
3. An aldose reductase inhibiting pharmaceutical composi-
tion which comprises, as an effective ingredient, at least one
compound of the formula:
wherein
Ri is Ci-Csalkyl, Cj-Csalkoxy or halogen,
R2 is NO2 or NH2,
R3 is hydrogen. d-Csalkyl, Ci-Csalkoxy or halogen.
R4 IS hydrogen or Ci-Caalkyl,
Rs is hydrogen or Ci-Csalkyl, and
Rfi is hydrogen, Ci-Cjalkyl or halogen;
B is C3-C4alkyl, C2-C4alkenyl, cyclopropyl, 2-furyl, 2-tet-
rahydrofuryl, ^-(C|-C2alkoxy)ethyl or the group CH2Z
m which «»- »- ^ •
Z is lH-I,2,4.tria2olyl, metiiylsulfonyl, X— R,3, OSO2— R,i
or-N(R,5)(R,6),inwhich ^ '*
X is oxygen or sulfur,
Ri3 is an alkyl. aUcenyl or alkynyl group, each containing at
most 4 carbon atoms.
A-R3
wherein
Ra' is phenyl,
R2 is halogen,
R^ is carboxy or lower alkoxycarbonyl,
Ya is oxygen,
AisCi-Cfialkylene,
or pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof with a pharma-
ceutically acceptable carrier.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1249
4438 127
PHARMACOLOGICALLY ACTIVE COMPOUNDS
Graham J. Durant; Charon R. Ganellin, both of Welwyn Garden
City, and Rodney C. Young, Bengeo, aU of England, assignors
to Smith KUne A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Gar-
den aty, England
Division of Ser. No. 291,196, Aug. 10, 1981, Pat. No. 435,419,
which is a division of Ser. No. 65,478, Aug. 10, 1979, Pat. No.
4,308,275, which is a division of Ser. No. 914,329, Jun. 12, 1978,
Pat. No. 4,189,488, which U a division of Ser. No. 773,590, Mar.
2, 1977, Pat. No. 4,118,502. This appUcation Mar. 7, 1983, Ser.
No. 472,434
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Mar. 11, 1976,
09750/76
Int. a.' A61K 31/42: C07D 263/34
U.S. a. 424—272 8 Oaims
1. A compound of the formula
?
Het-(CH2)m— Y— (CH2)„— NH-CaNR
wherein Het is an oxazole, isoxazole or triazole ring, which
ring is optionally substituted by lower alkyl, halogen, lower
alkoxy, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, hydroxymethyl or amino; m
is 0, 1 or 2 and n is 2 or 3 provided that the sum of m and n is
3 or 4; Y is sulphur, methylene or oxygen; R is hydrogen,
lower alkyl or Het— (CH2)m— Y— (CH2)«— where Het, m, n
and Y are as defined above; Q is — CO2H or — SO2H; or a
pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
8. A method of inhibiting gastric acid secretion which com-
prises administering internally to an animal a compound of
claim 1.
4,438,128
CARDIOACTIVE ARYLOXYPROPANOLAMINES
Fritz Wiedemann, Weiheim-Liitzelsachsen; Wolfgang Kampe,
Heddesheim; Karl Dietmann, Mannheim, and Gisbert Sponer,
Laudenbach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Boehr-
inger Mannheim GmbH, Mannheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,543
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 23,
1980, 3023369
Int. C\? A61K 31/415: C07D 231/54
U,S. a. 424—273 N 5 Oaims
1. An aryloxypropanolamine of the formula
Rii
R,^
/^~\
•
1
1
1
RlH
R=^
V
-OCH2CHCH2— N— X— N
OH Rs R6
A
1
1
R4
1
R7
<,Rio
•R9
Rs
wherein
Ri, R2, R3 and R4 each independently is hydrogen, chlorine,
bromine, fluorine, CM-alkyl, cyano, carboxamido, hy-
droxyl, C2.5-alkenyloxy or phenyl-CM-alkoxy,
Rs and Re each independently is hydrogen or C\^-a\Vy\,
X is an ethylene or propylene radical,
A is an indazole connected to the — X— N(R6) — chain
through a carbon atom,
R7, Rg. R9> Rio and Rn each independently is, or two of
them together are, hydrogen, amino, CM-alkyl or C2.S-
alkenyl;
or a pharmacologically compatible salt thereof.
3. A composition for combating cardiac and circulatory
diseases comprising an amount effective therefor of a com-
pound or salt according to claim 1 in admixture with a pharma-
cologically acceptable diluent.
4,438,129
USE OF CLOTRIMAZOLE TO TREAT HERPES
LABIALIS
Isaac R. McGraw, Newtown, Pa., auignor to Pennwalt Corpora-
tion, PhUadelphia, Pa.
Filed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,121
Int. a.3 A61K 31/415
U.S. a. 424—273 R 2 ClaUns
1. A method of treating herpes 1 infections of the labial area
in mammals comprising topically administering to the mammal
in need of said treatment an effective amount for treating the
herpes I virus of a composition of l(o-chloro-a,a-diphenylben-
zyl) imidazole or its salts and at least one pharmaceutically
acceptable carrier, wherein the compound is from about 0.01
to about 95% by weight of the composition.
4,438,130
ANALGESIC 1-OXA-, AZA- AND THIA-SPIROCYCLIC
COMPOUNDS
Lester J. Kaplan, Kalamazoo, Mich., assignor to The Upjohn
Company, Kalamazoo, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 320,635, Nov. 12, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,462
Int. a.5 A61K 31/34, 31/35: COnH 307/94. 311/96
U.S. a. 424—274 26 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
N— C— A
(CH2)m K J ,Ri
0)
(CH2),
/
\
wherein
p is a whole number integer 0, 1 or 2 and n is a whole number
integer 1, 2, or 3, so that the resulting cycloaliphatic ring
containing them has six (6) carbon atoms;
m is 3 or 4;
A is a single chemical bond (-), — (CH2)^ where q is a
whole number integer 0 to 4 or — CH(CH3)— ;
X and Y are independently selected from the group consist-
ing of hydrogen, a halogen having an atomic number of
from 9 to 35, trifluoromethyl, nitro, methoxy, hydroxy,
azido, C| to C3-alkyl, phenyl, methanesulfonyl, cyano,
amino, Ci to C3-alkoxycarbonyl, Ci to Cs-alkanoyloxy,
Ci to C3-carboxyacylamino (— NHC(=0)R4 where R4 is
hydrogen or Ci to C2-alkyl);
R is hydrogen or C| to C3-alkyl;
Ri and R2. taken separately, are each hydrogen, C\ to C3-
alkyl or allyl;
R| and R2. taken together with the nitrogen to which they
are bonded complete a ring selected from the group con-
sisting of azetidinyl, pyrrolidinyl and piperidinyl;
E is oxygen or sulfur;
Z is selected from the group consisting of oxygen, bivalent
sulfur and sulflnyl;
provided that when p is 2, n is 1, m is 3, A is — (CHi)^
where q is 1, R is methyl, R| and R2 are taken together
with the nitrogen to which they are bonded to complete a
pyrrolidinyl ring, E is oxygen, Z is oxygen, and the rela-
tive stereochemistry is (Sa,7a,8/3), then X and Y taken
together on the phenyl ring cannot be chlorine on the 2-
and 4-positions of the phenyl ring, or a pharmacologically
acceptable salt thereof
17. A composition useful in pharmaceutically effective dos-
age unit form for alleviating pain in warm blooded animals
which comprises a compound of claim 1 in combination with a
pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
1250
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438 131
n-CYANO-l, n-DIPHENYL-AZAALKANE
DERIVATIVES, THEIR PREPARATION AND DRUGS
CONTAINING THEM
Oskar Ehmiaiui, Mannheim-Neulieniislieiiii; Manfred Ru-
chack, Weiaenheim am Sand; Jowf Griea, Wachenheim; Rolf
Kretzschmar, Gnienstadt; Hans D. Lehmann, Hirschberg;
Ludwig Friedrich, Bruehi; Dirk Wuppemiann, Ftviiuheini;
Frank Zinunenaaan, Neustadt; Weraer Seitz, Plankstadt;
Hana J. Treiber, Bruehi; Ferdinand Dengel, Wilhelmafeld;
Wolfram Frank, Heidelberg; Hans-Georg Kurbjuweit, Wein-
heim-Hohensachsen, and Claus D. MueUer, Viemheim, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 3«3,501
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 10.
1981, 3114497; Nov. 6, 1981, 3144150
Int. a.3 A61K 31/335. 31/275: CfTJC 121/78
U.S. a. 424—278 15 q,,^
1. An a>-cyano-l,a)-diphenyl-azaaIkane derivative of the
formula I,
R6
K.^O~r"'"~^"'"''
substituted on the phenyl moiety by phenyl, halogen,
CM-alkyl or halogen-substitutcd-CM alkyl, or R' is
phenyl or phenyl substituted by halogen, phenyl. Cm
alkyl or halogen-substituted-CM alkyl,
L' represents an amino group or an alkylamino or dialkyl-
amino group containing Ci^ alkyl groups.
X is a -CH2-CH2-, -CH=CH-. -CH2-C(CH3)2-,
— (CHahC— CH2— or a cyclopropylene group,
A is a trans- or cis— CH=CH— , — C»C— or a — CH-
2— CH2— group.
R2 represents hydrogen with o- or /3-configuration. a methyl
or ethyl group,
R3 is hydrogen, Cm alkanoyl-. benzoyl or benzoyl whose
phenyl group is substituted by halogen, phenyl. Cm alkyl
or halogen-substituted-CM alkyl. or tri-(CM^alkyl-silyl
group.
R*. R5 stand independently from each other for hydrogen or
a Cm alkyl group.
B represents a methylene group, oxygen or a — NH-grouo
and *^
R<* is a Cm straight or branched alkyl group, phenyl or
phenyl substituted by halogen, phenyl. Cm alkyl or halo-
gen-substituted-CM alkyl.
R7
R8
Where R', R2, r3. r6 r7 ^^ r8 ^re identical or different and
each IS hydrogen, halogen, hydroxy!, trifluoromethyl. C1-C4-
alkyl, nitro, Ci-C4-alkoxy or Ci-Q-alkylmercapto, and two
radicals m adjacent positions can together form a methylenedi-
oxy, ethylenedioxy or 1,3-dioxatetramethylene group, R* is
straight-chain or branched, saturated or unsaturated alkyl of 9
to 20 carbon atoms, R5 is hydrogen or Ci-C4-alkyl and m and
n are identical or different and each is from 2 to 4. and salts
thereof with a physiologically tolerated acid.
15. The method of treating cardiovascular disorders in a
patient suffering therefrom which comprises administering an
effective amount of an a)-cyano-l,a)-diphenyl-azaalkane deriv-
ative of the formula 1 according to claim 1.
4,438,132
4^XO-PGl2 COMPOUNDS, THEIR USE IN INHIBITION
OF THROMBII AND THEIR PRODUCnON
Gaza Galambos; Vilmos Simonidesz; Istran Szekely; Jozsef
iTanics; Krisztina Kekesi; Gabor Kovacs; Istran Stadlen
Peter Kormoczy, and Karoly Horrath, all of Budapest, Hun-
gary, assignors to CHINOIN Gyogyszer es Vegyeszeti Ter-
mekek Gyara Rt., Hungary
FUed Apr. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 368,013
Claims priority, application Hungary, Apr. 14, 1981,
2251/9oo *
Int. a.3 A61K 31/557; C07D 307/935
U.S. CI. 424-285 39 cudms
1. A compound of formula I
4438 133
THERAPEUTICALLY EFFECTIVE DERIVATIVES OF
CYS'^NE
Dante Nardi; Alberto T^ana; Gianni Motta; Pietro Cazzulani.
and Gabriele Graziani, aU of Milan, Italy, aaaignort to Recor.
dati S.A., Chiasso, Switzerland
FUed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 392,806
QiSSlS* ^^^' "PpUcation United Kingdom, Jul. 7, 1981,
8120907
Int. a.J C07C 143/78. 125/073; A61K 31/18. 31/27
U.S. a. 424-300 ,0 ctatai
1. An amino/amide derivative of cystine having the struc-
tural formula (I):
NHR
I
NH-OCCHCH2— S-|—
CH2-N-CH3
(D
R^O A-(
o -{ II
wherein R is benzyloxycarbonyl or tosyl, or a pharmaceuti-
cally acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
5. A method for eliciting an antitussive response in a warm-
blooded mammal, comprising administering to a warm-
blooded mammal in need of such treatment, an antitussively
effective amount of an amino/amide derivative of cystine
having the structural formula (I):
R*
A— C C— B— R'
R2^ "^OR^^RS
wherein
Q is a -COORi, -CH2-OH. -CO-L' group.
R is hydrogen, a pharmaceutically accepuble cation. Cm
alkyl. C3.10 cycloalkyl. phenyl-CM-alkyl which can be
NHR
I
NH-0CCHCH2— sH—
CH2— N-CH3
(0
J2
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
12S1
wherein R is benzyloxycarbonyl or tosyl, or a pharmaceuti-
cally acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
4,438,134
USE OF TOLNAPTATE TO TREAT HERPES LABIALIS
Isaac R. McGraw, Newtown, Pa., assignor to Pennwalt Corpora-
tion, PhUadelphia, Pa.
FUed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,119
Int. a.3 A61K 31/27
U.S. a. 424—300 2 Qaims
1. A method of treating herpes 1 infections of the labial area
in mammals comprising topically administering to the mammal
in need of said treatment an effective amount for treating the
herpes 1 virus of a composition of 0-2-naphthyl-m,N-dimeth-
ylthio carbanilate and at least one pharmaceutically acceptable
carrier, wherein the compound is from about 0.01 to about
95% by weight of the composition.
4,438,135
l-(3,4-BIS-(3-(LOWER
ALKOXYCARBONYL)-2-THIOUREIDO)-PHENYL-l-
PHENYLTHYLENES
Alfred W. Chow, Radnor, Pa., assignor to SmithKline Beckman
Corporation, PhUadelphia, Pa.
Filed Jan. 7, 1983, Ser. No. 456,199
Int. a.3 C07C 157/12; A61K 31/325
U.S. a. 424—300 11 Qalms
1. A chemical compound of the formula:
CH2
NH— C— NH— C02Alk
S
II
NH— C— NH— C02Alk
2— CH=CH(CH2)»i— . where n is an integer from 0 to 4; —X-
— (CHiip — , where p is an integer from 3 to 7; — CH2 — X-
— iCH2)q—, where q is an integer from 2 to 6; — CH2— CH-
2-X-(CH2)m-, and -CH=CH-(CH2)3-;
wherein X is — O— or — S— ;
COQ is COOH, a physiologically acceptable carboxylate
salt, a branched or unbranched C1-C5 alkyl ester or
CONHSO2CH3;
and wherein said bicyclo(2,2.1)hepUne or hept-2Z-ene is
substituted at the 6-position by a grouping of the formula:
— C(R)=NNHC0— (NH)a-R';
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of hydro-
gen, unsubstituted C|-C|o branched or unbranched ali-
phatic hydrocarbon residues, and C|-Cio aliphatic hydro-
carbon residues substituted by Ar, where Ar represents a
monocyclic aromatic hydrocarbon or pyridyl residue, or
such a residue substituted by one or more substituents
selected from the group consisting of halogen, halogen
substituted branched or unbranched C1-C3 alkyl groups,
sulphonamido groups, amino groups, hydroxy and
Ci-C|oalkoxy;
a is 0 or I; and
R' is selected from the group consisting of unsubstituted
C)-C|o branched or unbranched aliphatic hydrocarbon
residues, Ar and Ci-C 10 branched or unbranched aliphatic
hydrocarbon residues substituted by — Ar, — OAr, or
— SAr.
25. A method of treating thrombotic disorders, anaphylactic
disease states and conditions requiring anti-inflammatory treat-
ment in patients which comprises administering to the patient
an amount of a compound according to claim 1 which is effec-
tive to inhibit thromboxane activity in the patient.
in which:
R is hydrogen, halo. CM-lower alkoxy. CM-lower alkyl or
CM-lower alkylthio. and
Alk is, each, Ci.6-lower alkyl.
4. An anthelmintic composition comprising an anthelmintic,
nontoxic quantity of a compound of the formula:
NH— C— NH— C02Alk
S
NH— C— NH— C02AIk
in which:
R is hydrogen, halo. CM-lower alkoxy. CM-lower alkyl or
CM-lower alkylthio. and
Alk is Ci.6-lower alkyl, combined with a pharmaceutical or
veterinary carrier therefor.
4,438,136
PROSTAGLANDINS
Robert L. Jones, and Norman H. WUson, both of Edinburgh,
Scotland, assignors to National Research Development Corpo-
ration, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 21937, Sep. 3, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 419,206
Gaims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jan. 5, 1979,
7900369
Int. a.i C07C 103/27; A61K 31/24
U.S. a. 424—309 32 Oaims
1. A compound which is a bicyclo(2.2,l)heptane or hept-
2Z-ene which is substituted at the S-position by a group of the
formula — R' — COQ, where R' is selected from the group
consisting of Q-Cg alkyl; — CH2— CH=CH— (CH2)in— .
wherein m is an integer from 1 to 5; — CH2— CH-
4,438,137
PESTiaDAL COMPOSITIONS EMPLOYING AMITRAZ
WITH STABILIZER
Keith Allan, Loughborough, England, assignor to FBC Limited,
Hauxton, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 179,588, Aug. 21, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Jun. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 393,277
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdcm, Sep. 20, 1979,
7932636
Int. a.i AOIN 33/02
U.S. a. 424—330 6 Claims
1. A liquid insecticidal and acaricidal composition compris-
ing a solution of from about 0.5 to 35% w/v l,5-di-(2,4-dime-
thylphenyl)-3-methyl-l,3,5-triazapenta-l.4-diene and from
about 1 to 3% w/v of a carbodiimide selected from the group
consisting of dicyclohexylcarbodiimide and di-(2,6-diiso-
propylphenyl) carbodiimide. **
4,438,138
REDUCTION OF CHOLESTEROL WITH
META-CHLORO a-T-BUTYLAMINOPROPIOPHENONE
Warren C. Stem, Raleigh, N.C., assignor to Burroughs WeU-
come Co., Research Triangle Park, N.C.
Filed Dec. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 447,412
Int. a.J A61K 31/135
U.S. a. 424—330 8 Claims
1. A method of reducing cholesterol levels in a human in
need thereof, which comprises administering to said human an
effective, non-toxic, cholesterol-lowering amount of a com-
pound of the formula (I)
1252
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
o
n
C— CH— CH3
I
NHC(CH3)3
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
(I)
4 438 139
POLYMERIC DIFFUSION MATRIX CONTAINING
ESTROGENS
Alec D. Keith, Miami, Fla., and Wallace Snipes, State College,
Pa., assignors to Key Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Miami, Fla.
Continuation of Ser. No. 281,391, Jul. 8, 1981, abandoned, which
IS a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 217,400, Dec. 17, 1980, Pat
No. 4,321,252, and Ser. No. 167,729, Jul. 11, 1980, Pat. No. '
4,291,014, and Ser. No. 109,242, Jan. 3, 1980, abandoned, which
IS a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 2,565, Jan. 11, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 439,0^
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep 22
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.5 A61L 15/03: A61K 31/79, 31/74
MS. a. 424-28 ,3 q^^,
1. A self-supporting polymeric diffusion matrix for the sus-
tained release of a pharmacologically acceptable estrogen in
order to deliver said estrogen to a patient and provide said
patient with a uterine wall maintenance effect, said matrix
comprising from about 1 to about 60% of a polar plasticizer,
from about 6 to about 30% by weight polyvinylalcohol, from'
about 2 to about 30% by weight polyvinylpyrrolidone, and a
pharmaceutically effective amount of the estrogen to provide a
sustained release of said estrogen over a prolonged period.
a
I
- CH2-CH-
-(I)
(lb)
Oc)
wherein
n is 2 or 3,
W represents a bond, — O— or — NH— ,
Ri represents H or — CH3,
R2 and R2' each independently represent lower alkyl having
from I to 3 carbon atoms,
R3 represents linear or branched alkyl having from I to 18
carbon atoms,
X represents from 5 to 95 weight percent,
y represents from 5 to 95 weight percent, and
z represents from 0 to 20 weight percent, with x+y-|-z being
equal to 100 weight percent.
4,438 141
thiazolidine'derivatives
Yutaka Kawamatsu, Kyoto, and Takeshi Fujlta, Takarazuka,
both of Japan, assignors to Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 258,554, Apr. 29, 1981, Pat. No. 4,340,605,
which is a division of Ser. No. 62,512, Jul. 27, 1979, Pat. No.
4,287,200. This application Jul. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 396,093
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 4, 1978, 53-95673
Int. a.3 C07D 277/32: A61K 31/425
U.S. a. 424-248.51 10 Qaims
1. A thiazolidine derivative of the formula:
4438 140
SALTS OF AOD DYES AND COPOLYMERS HAVING
TERTIARY AMINE FUNCnONS, PROCESS FOR
PREPARING SAID SALTS AND MAKEUP COSMETIC
COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
Michel GuiUon, Bourg-La-Reine; Jean Mondet, Sevran; Chris-
tos Papantoniou, Montmorency, and Qaudine Vandenboss-
che, Aulnay-Sous-Bois, all of France, assignors to Societe
Anonyme dite: L'Oreal, Paris, France
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,809
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 18, 1980, 80 08742
Int. a? A61K 7/04. 7/021
U.S. a. 424-451 ,6 ctai^
1. An acid colorant salt of an acid colorant salified by a
copolymer having a tertiary amine function, said acid colorant
being selected from the group consisting of Red 21 D and C,
Orange 5 D and C. Red 27 D and C, Orange 10 D and C, Red
3 D and C, Acid Red 7 D and C, Red 2 D and C, Red 4 D and
C, Acid Red 8 D and C, Acid Red 33 D and C, Acid Yellow
5 D and C, Acid Yellow 6 D and C, Acid Green 5 D and C,
Acid Yellow 10 D and C. Acid Green 3 D and C, Blue 1 D and
C, Blue 2 D and C and Violet 1 D and C. and said copolymer
having the formula
-C-R2-0-/ \_CH2-CH C«0
\a^ae/ S NH
i.
\ /
C
I
o
wherein R' is thienyl, furyl or a group of the formula:
R3
\
N—
where R3 and R* are the same or different and each is lower
alkyl or R3 and R* are combined with each other either di-
rectly or as interrupted by an oxygen atom to form piperidono,
morpholino or pyrrolidino; R2 means a bond or a lower alkyl-
ene group; L' and L2 are the same or different and each is
hydrogen, lower alkyl or L' and O are combined to form an
alkylene group.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1253
4,438,142
PHARMACEUTICAL COMBINATION
Ralph Vinegar, Chapel Hill, N.C., assignor to Burroughs Well-
come Co., Research Triangle Park, N.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 354,160, Mar. 5, 1982. This
application Sep. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 418,979
Int. a.' A61U 31/485
U.S. a. 424—260 8 Gaims
1. An analgesic preparation comprising codeine or a phar-
maceutically acceptable salt thereof and l-(l-3-benzodioxol-5-
yl)-2-pyrrolidinone wherein the ratio of codeine or a pharma-
ceutically acceptable salt thereof to the compound of formula
I l-(l-3-benzodioxal-5-yl)-2-pyrodidinone is in the range of
1:10 to 1:50.
4,438,144
AMINO AOD PREPARATION AND THERAPY FOR
TREATMENT OF STRESS AND INJURY
George L. Blackburn, 100 Memorial Dr., Cambridge, Mass.
02142
Continuation of Ser. No. 174,189, Jul. 31, 1980, abandoned. This
application Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,125
Int. a.3 A61K 31/195
U.S. Q. 424—319 5 Qaims
1. A method of nutritional therapy for a patient suffering
from physical injury or metabolic stress, said patient having a
normalized urinary nitrogen excretion of at least about 15
gr/dayand having at the same time at least a partial dysfunc-
tion of the gastrointestinal tract in order to at least partially
sustain protein synthesis in said patient comprising parenterally
administering to said patient an effective nutritional therapy
amount of an amino acid parenteral composition in which 70 to
100% of the amino acid content consists of the branched chain
amino acids, leucine, isoleucine and valine in relative propor-
tions a:b:c wherein a, b and c are independent of each other and
have a value from 1 to 2 to provide effective nutritional ther-
apy for said patient.
4 438 143
1-ARYLOXY-3-ALKYLAMINO-2-PROPANOLS AND
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING
THEM
Herbert KSppe; Werner Kummer; Helmut StMhle; Gojko Mua-
cevic, all of Ingelheim, and Werner Traunecker, Miinster-
Sarmsheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Boehr-
inger Ingelheim KG, Ingelheim am Rhein, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 383,624, Jun. 1, 1982,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 254,510, Apr. 15,
1981, abandoned. This application Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No.
420,796
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 25,
1980 3015991
Int. C1.J A61K 31/275: C07C 121/80
U.S. a. 424—304 9 Gaims
1. A compound of the formula
(I)
Rl— CO— NH
V-O— CH2— CH— CH2— NH— R3
OH
wherein
Rl represents a linear or branched alkyl of from 1 to 20
carbon atoms;
R2 represents a hydrogen or halogen atom, a linear or
branched alkyl or alkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or
a divalent group — CH=CH— CH=CH— or — (CH2-
)„—, in which n is an integer of from 3 to 5, with the free
valences bonded in the o-position relative to one another;
and
R3 represents a linear or branched alkyl of from 3 to 10
carbon atoms, with the provisos that R3 is not tert.butyl
when Rl is ethyl or propyl and R2 is a hydrogen atom and
that R3 is not isopropyl when Ri is propyl and R2 is hydro-
gen,
or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt
thereof.
8. A method for the treatment or prophylaxis of diseases of
the coronaries, for the treatment of hypertension, or for the
treatment of cardiac arrhythmia, which comprise administer-
ing to a warm-blooded animal or human an effective amount of
a compound of claim 1.
4,438,145
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF A FOOD-STUFF
CONSISTING OF A STUFHNG ROLLED IN A WRAP
Arie Bakker, Gouda, Netherlands, auignor to Bamach, B. V.,
Lekkerkerk, Netherlands
Continuation of Ser. No. 245,196, Mar. 18, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 40,766, May 21, 1979,
abandoned. This application Dec. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 450,111
Gaims priority, application Netherlands, May 26, 1978,
7805735
Int. G.' A23L 1/3J
U.S. G. 426—297 1 Gaim
1. The method of wrapping an elongate edible stuffing of
generally circular cross section with a T-shaped edible wrap
embodying an elongated rectangular crossbar and a rectangu-
lar stem extending continually and symmetrically therefrom,
said stem having a width dimension parallel to the length of the
crossbar, with the length of the elongated stuffing approxi-
mately equalling the width dimension of the stem and with the
diameter of the circular cross section of the edible stuffing
approximately equalling the width of the elongated rectangu-
lar crossbar, said method comprising depositing the T-shaped
wrap on a continuously-moving, normally flat, flexible con-
veyor belt of a width exceeding the length of the crossbar of
the T-shaped wrap with the crossbar centered transversely of
the conveyor belt and leading the stem with respect to the
direction of movement of the conveyor belt; at an intermediate
point along the travel of the conveyor belt beyond the place of
deposit of the wrap on the conveyor belt, depositing the stuff-
ing on the crossbar of the wrap with its longitudinal axis coin-
ciding with the longitudinal axis of the crossbar and centered
thereon with respect to its ends and sides; at an intermediate
point along the travel of the conveyor belt beyond the place of
deposit of the stuffing on the wrap, with the aid of transverse-
ly-spaced guides, sutionary with respect to the direction of
movement of the conveyor belt, having transversely-spaced,
opposed concave side surfaces situated at a spacing corre-
sponding to substantially the length of the stuffing and hori-
zonul surfaces parallel to the conveyor belt spaced therefrom
by a distance corresponding substantially to the diameter of the
stuffing, folding the marginal portions of the conveyor belt
1254
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
upwardly about the opposite ends of the stuffing and inwardly
against the top of the stuffing to thus fold the end portions of
the crossbar of the wrap upwardly about the ends of the stuff-
ing and inwardly into engagement with the top of the stufTing-
at an intermediate point in the travel of the conveyor belt
beyond the place of folding the conveyor belt upwardly and
inwardly, allowing the conveyor belt to return to its normally
flat position, leavmg the end portions of the crossbar of the
wrapper folded upwardly about the ends of the stuffing in
engagement with the top of the stuffing; and at an intermediate
ppint m the travel of the conveyor belt following return of the
conveyor belt to its flat position, with the aid of means posi-
tioned above the conveyor belt stationary with respect to the
movement of the conveyor belt, frictionally engaging the end
portions of the crossbar of the wrap in engagement with the
top of the stuffing to constrain the top of the partially wrapped
stuffing relative to the movement of the conveyor belt such
that movement of the lower part of the partially wrapped
stuffing with the conveyor belt rolls the stuffing and crossbar
of the wrap about the longitudinal axis of the stuffing relative
to the stem of the wrap to thus coil the stem of the wrap about
the stuffing and the end portions of the crossbar and wrap
(1) forcmg the mixture through an orifice under a spray
pressure sufficient to finely atomize the mixture, and
(2) contacting the atomized mixture with a gaseous drying
medium at an elevated temperature, to thereby produce
a substantially dry powder devoid of an effective
amount of surface tension reducing agents.
4438 146
METHOD FOR PREPARING COOKED WHEAT
PRODUCT
Ronald W. Colby, Peru, III., and Arnold Spicer, Santa Ponsa,
Spain, assignors to New Generation Foods, Inc., Reno, Ney
FUed Mar. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 358,789
lot a.3 A23L 1/18: A21D 8/00
U.S. a. 426-448 ,3 ^^^
Ji3
1 A method for preparing an expanded wheat product
conipnsmg the steps of grinding whole wheat, adding moisture
to the ground wheat, uniformly distributing the moisture in the
ground wheat to make a dough, conducting the dough to a die
heating the dough by passing it through the die at a rate suffi^
cient to generate heat and steam in the dough without any
external heat source to the die and cook the dough in the die to
condition the wheat and extruding the dough into a lower
pressure zone to flash steam and expand the dough.
4,438,147
FOAMING CREAMER AND METHOD OF MAKING
SAME
Paul L. Hedrick, Jr., Plain Qty, Ohio, assignor to Sodete
d Assistance Technique pour Produits Nestle SJi^ Lausanne.
Switzerland *-™uuw,
FUed Jun. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 392,229
II « ri"^5li!^ ^^^' ^"^ ^^^' ^L ^/OO. 2/40
T ?' *^'^° 30 Claims
1. A method of making a foaming creamer comprising:
(a) forming a liquid mixture comprising water and solids
said mixture being devoid of an effective amount of sur-
face tension reducing agents, said solids including at least
about 5% non-dairy fat, at least about 30% water-soluble
non-dairy carbohydrate, and between 0% and about 50%
dry skim milk, there being present in said solids an effec-
Uve amount of a proteinaceous foam stabilizer;
(b) blendmg an inert gas to gassify said mUture; '
(c) homogenizing said mixture; and
(d) spray-drying said mixture, after said gas-blending and
homogenizing steps, by: «»— © «
4,438 148
PROCESS FOR MAKING An'iMPROVED DRY INSTANT
PUDDING MIX
Joseph D O'Rourke, Cranbury, NJ., and Jay H. Katcher,
D«ver, DeK, assignors to General Foods Corporation, White
FUed Jan. 10, 1983, Ser. No. 456,685
f , «, ^ .. '"*• ^-^ ^^^ ^/^*7. 1/195
U.S. a 426-579 7 q^,^
1. A process for making an instant pudding mix comprising
the following steps in the stated order:
(a) pregelatinizing and drying a starch in a manner effective
to produce a pregelatinized starch particle size distribu-
tion wherein at least 40% by weight of the starch has a
particle size of about 63 microns or greater;
(b) grinding and controlling said dry, pregelatinized starch
in a manner effective to produce a ground starch particle
size distribution wherein:
(i) between at least 1% and up to 10%, by weight, of said
pregelatinized starch has a particle size greater than
about 63 microns, but
(A) less than about 1%, by weight, of said pregelati-
nized starch has particle sizes greater than about 105
microns.
(B) less than about 3%. by weight of said pregelatinized
starch has particle sizes greater than about 88 mi-
crons, and
(C) less than about 6%. by weight of said pregelatinized
starch has particle sizes greater than about 74 mi-
crons,
(ii) between about 55% and about 80%, by weight, of said
starch has particle sizes less than about 38 microns, and
at least 10%. by weight of said starch, has particle sizes
less than about 20 microns;
(c) apportioning a quantity of said ground, pregelatinized
starch in a manner effective to constitute between about
5% and about 25%, by weight of the pudding mix;
(d) combining said apportioned starch with sugar, setting,
and flavoring components wherein:
(i) said sugar component is between about 25% and about
85% by weight of the pudding mix,
(A) between 15% and about 40% of said sugar compo-
nent is powdered sugar, and
(B) at least about 90% of the sugar component has
particle sizes less than 74 microns; and
(ii) said setting component is between about 1% and about
5%, by weight of the pudding mix and said setting
component consists essentially of an alkali pyrophos-
phate and an alkali orthaphosphate;
(e) blending said combined components;
and
(0 packaging said blended, combined componenU.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1255
4,438,149
SPREADABLE WATER-IN-OIL EMULSION BASED ON A
HIGH-MELTING BUTTERFAT FRACTION AND A
UQUID OIL
Laurentitts A. M. Verfaagen, Ylaardingen, and Janos Bodor,
Voorburg, both of Netherlands, aMlgnors to Lever Brothers
Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,715
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, Apr. 2, 1981,
8101639
Int. a.3 A23D 3/00. 3/02
VJS. a. 426—603 17 CUims
1. An edible spreadable water-in-oil emulsion comprising:
(i) an aqueous phase having a pH of from 4.0 to 7.0 and
constituting at most 70 percent by weight of the total
emulsion;
(ii) a fatty phase containing
(a) a liquid oil which at 10* C. is substantially free of solid
fat crystals and
(b) a butter stearin fraction having the following solid fat
contents:
N|o=50-80; N20=25-45; N35=3-18
wherein the ratios between the components of the fatty
phase are such as to impart to the fatty phase the follow-
ing solid fat contents:
Nio= 15-40; N20=8-20; N35=0-5.
4,438,150
PROCESS FOR PREPARING AN INSTANT BABY
CEREAL PORRIDGE PRODUCT
Scott Gantwerker, LaGrange, and Slai Leong, Buffalo Grove,
both of lU., assignors to The Quaker Oats Company, Chicago,
lU.
FUed Sep. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 416,190
Int. a.3 A23L 1/10; A21D 8/06
U.S. a. 426—625 7 Claims
1. A process for preparing a dry, gelatinized, cereal porridge
product capable of being instantly prepared as a hot or cold
cereal porridge comprising:
a. preparing a slurry of cereal flour having a Mesh size less
than U.S. Mesh size #40, and water in which the flour is
present in an amount of from 14 to 30% inclusive based on
the weight of the slurry;
b. gelatinizing the cereal flour slurry by heating until such time
as the gelatinized cereal flour-water mixture has achieved a
temperature in the range 180*-212' F. and the viscosity of
the gelatinized cereal mixture is greater than 20,000 cps as
measured on a RVT Brookfield viscometer at 50 rpm using
spindle #7;
c. subjecting the gelatinized cereal mixture to mechanical shear
of sufficient intensity and duration to reduce the viscosity of
said gelatinized cereal mixture to a viscosity less than 10,000
cps as measured on a RVT Brookfield viscometer at 50 rpm
using spindle #5 yielding a reduced viscosity gelatinized
cereal mixture; and
d. dehydrating on a drum drier the reduced viscosity cereal
mixture to a moisture in the range 2.0 to 9.0% inclusive, and
pulverizing the dehydrated material thereby forming the dry
gelatinized cereal product.
4,438,151
PROCESS FOR DURABLY MODIFYING A SHAPED
SYNTHETIC POLYMER ARTICLE
Taturo Yamaguchl, Ikeda, and Norihiro Minemura, TakatsukI,
both of Japan, assignors to TeUla Limited, Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 158,731, Jua. 12, 1980. This application
Feb. 16, 1983, Ser. No. 466,864
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 26, 1979, 54-79613
Int. a.i B05D 3/06
U.S. a. 427—36 15 Claims
1. A process for durably modifying a shaped synthetic poly-
mer article, comprising the steps of:
(a) applying, onto at least a peripheral surface portion of a
shaped synthetic polymer article:
(1) 0.1 percent to 40 percent, based on the weight of said
shaped article, of a compound (A) selected from the group
consisting of styrene, vinyltoluene, allyl cinnamate, allyl
phenol, allyl phenylether. allyl glycidylether, sodium
p-styrene-sulfonate, diallyl terephthalate, diallyl iso-
phthalate, N,N'-dialIyl pyromellitimide, N.N'-dimethallyl
pyromellitimide, N,N'-dicrotyl pyromellitimide, N,N'-
diallylbenzophenone-3,4,3',4'-tetracarboxylip acid bis-
imide, N,N'-dimethylallylbenzophenone-3,4,3',4'-tetracar-
boxylic acid bis-imide, N,N'-dicrotylbenzophenone-
3,4,3',4'-tetracarboxylic acid bis-imide, N,N'-diallylbu-
tane-l,2,-3,4-tetracarboxylic acid bis-imide, N.N'-dime-
thylallylbutane-l,2,3,4-tetracarboxylic acid bis-imide,
N,N'-dicrotylbutane-l,2,3,4-tetracarboxylic acid bis-
imide, N,N'-diallylbenzamide, N.N'-dimethallylbcnza-
mide, N,N'-dicrotylbenzamide, N.N'-diallylterephthala-
mide, N,N'-dimethallylterephthalamide, N,N'-dicrotyl-
terephthalamide, N,N'-diallylisophthalamide, N,N'-dime-
thallylisophthalamide, N,N'-dicrotylisophthalamide,
N,N'-dial!yladipamide, N,N'-dimethallyladipamide, N.N'-
dicrotyladipamide, N,N,N',N'-tetraallylisophthalamide,
N,N,N',N'-tetramethallylisophthalamide. N,N,N',N'-tet-
racrotylisophthalamide, N,N',N"-triallyltrime8ic acid
amide, N,N',N"-trimethallyltrimesic acid amide,
N,N",N"-tricrotyltrimesic acid amide, N,N,N',N',N".N"-
hexallyltrimesic acid amide, N,N,N'.N',N",N"-hexame-
thallyltrimesic acid amide, N.N.N',N'.N".N"-hexacrotyl-
trimesic acid amide, N,N'-diallyltrimellitamideimide,
N,N'-dimethallyltrimellitamideimide, N,N'-dicrotyl-
trimellitamideimide, N,N,N'-triallyltrimellitamideimide,
N,N,N'-trimethallyltrimellitamideimide, N,N,N'-tri-
crotyltrimellitamideimide, ethylene-bis(N-allyltrimellitic
acid imide), hexamethylene-bis(N-allyltrimellitic acid
imide)amide, dodecamethylene-bis(N-methallyltrimellitic
acid imide)amide, the compounds of the formula:
^ ^ r^
A— N ^~(f\r'^ ^~^
wherein A represents a member selected from allyl, meth-
allyl and crotyl radicals, triallyl isocyanurate trimethallyl
isocyanurate, tricrotyl isocyanurate, tetraliyi urea, tet-
ramethallyl urea, tetracrotyl urea, ethyleneglycol bis-
allyl-ether, ethyleneglycol bis-methallylether, ethylene-
glycol bis-crotylether, tetramethylene glycol bis-
allylether, tetramethyleneglycol bis-methallylether, tet-
ramethyleneglycol bis-crotylether, neopentyleneglycol
bis-allylether, neopentyleneglycol bis-methallylether, neo-
pentyleneglycol bis-crotylether, triallyloxypropane,
trimethallyloxypropane, tricrotyloxypropane, tetrakisal-
lyloxymethlymethane, tetrakismethallyloxymethylme-
thane, tetrakiscrotyloxymethylmethane, triallyl cyan-
urate, trimethallyl cyanurate and tricrotyl cyanurate;
(2) then applying 0.05 percent to 20 percent, based on the
1256
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
weight of said shaped article, of at least one compound (B)
selected from acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, acrylamide,
methacrylamide, N-methylolacrylamide. monopolye-
thyleneglycol acrylate, monopolyethyleneglycol methac-
rylate, monopolyethyleneglycoltrimethylammonium ac-
rylate and methacrylate, acryloxyethylammonium chlo-
ride, acryloxyethyldimethylbenzylammonium chloride,
monoethyleneglycolphosphonium acrylate and methacry-
late, methoxypolyethyleneglyco! acrylate and methacry-
late, polyoxyethyleneglycol methacrylate, and the com-
pounds of the formula:
O O
CH2=C-C-Y-0-(^X-{g)-0-Y-C-C=:CH2
Z 2
./
wherein X represents a member selected from the radicals
of the formulae.
H
delivering said carrier gas containing oxygen and entrained
chlorinated silicon compound into the presence of an
7\f
0
0
J—
t.CI
''
CH3 O
I ' "
— C— , — C— and — S— ;
t i II
H CH3 O
electric arc, generated by an alternating voltage between
5,000 and 10,000 volts, within the light bulb.
4,438 153
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR THE VAPOR
V . DEPOSITION OF MATERIAL UPON A SUBSTRATF
fZ7T ' '"""'^' "^^"^'"^ ^'°'" '^^ '^'^^^ °f '^"^ Edu^dPtakhiuov, Forest HUU,N.Y.. assignor to W^Hec-
formulae tronlcs Die Corporation, Bronx, N.Y.
-(CH,CH,o> ^™"2i"!l"*P"* "'Ser. No. 237,670, Feb. 14, 1981, Pat. No.
-(CH2CH20)„- 4,351,855. This appUcation Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,186
Int. a.3 B05B 1/24: C23C 13/00
U.S.a.427— 37 inn-i-..
-(CH2CH-0);„-{CH2CH20)„- *" "■*'»»
m which n denotes an integer of from 5 to 50 and m denotes an
integer of from 1 to 20; and Z represents a member selected
from a hydrogen atom and methyl radical, which is capable of
imparting at least one function selected from the group consist-
ing of anti-static, perspiration-absorbing, anti-soiling, water-
absorbing, moisture-absorbing, water-repellent, oil-repellent,
anti-piliing, anti-snagging, anti-flaming, anti-melting, anti-bac-
tenal, bonding property enhancing and dyeing property-
enhancing to said shaped article; and
(b) copolymerizing said compounds (A) and (B) in said
shaped article.
ARC STABIUZER
DIRECT- f ft-
CURRENT^ 9 =
SOURCE I 0.
THERMAL REGULATOR
£4:1:
SUBSTRATE
-ELECTRODE BOOT
-ELECTRODE HOLDER
4,438,152
PROCESS OF GASEOUS OPALIZATION OF LIGHT
BULBS
Jean-Paul Barbier, Fontenay-le-FIeury, and GUbert Urouyer,
Orgenis, both of France, assignors to LAir Liquide, Societe
Anonyme pour lEtude et i'Exploitation des Procedes Georges
Claude, Paris, France
FUed May 5, 1982, Ser. No. 375,085
Qaims priority, application France, May 20, 1981, 81 10059
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 15,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 B05D 3/04. 7/22: C03C 17/345
U.S. a 427-37 7 Qaims
1. A process for the gaseous opalization of light bulbs by
producing a silica film on the inner surface of the light bulb
comprising: '
entraining a chlorinated silicon compound selected from the
group consisting of monochlorosilane, dichlorosilane.
trichlorosilane and silicon tetrachloride in a dry carrier
gas containing oxygen;
1. A method of depositing a material upon a substrate, com-
prising the steps of:
juxtaposing said substrate with a gap between two elec-
trodes spaced apart in a vacuum chamber;
drawing an initial vacuum in said chamber of a maximum of
10-6 torr;
fonning a pool of material in a molten state between said
electrodes;
striking an arc with a voltage of 70 to 120 volts and a current
of 100 to 250 amperes at least in part between said pool
and at least one of said electrodes spaced from said pool,
thereby vaporizing material from said pool and depositing
vapor of said material on said substrate which is in spaced
relationship with said arc and in the path of vapor of
material formed from said pool; and
maintaining the vacuum during the deposition of said mate-
rial upon said substrate at a maximum of 10-' torr.
4438 154
METHOD OF FABRICATING AN AMORPHOUS
SILICON nLM
Kazuhisa Kato, Atsugi, and Masuv Yasui, Yokohama, both of
Japan, assignors to Stanley Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japu
FUed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,826
Int a.3 C23C 11/00
U A a. 427-39 5 Claims
1. A method of forming an amorphous silicon film photosen-
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1257
sitive receptor surface adapted for electrophotography, said
method comprising the steps of:
(1) into an evacuated reaction chamber containing a dis-
charge electrode, a substrate onto which said amorphous
silicon film is to be deposited facing said discharge elec-
trode, and a second electrode supporting said substrate, a
reaction gas containing silicon hydride, introducing a gas
into said reaction chamber at a rate such that the ratio
(FA') of the total flow rate (F) in liters per minute of gas
4,438,156
MONO-PARTICLE MAGNETIC DISPERSION IN
ORGANIC POLYMERS FOR MAGNETIC RECORDING
Andrew M. Homola, Morgan Hill, and Max R. Lorenz, San
Jose, both of Calif., assignors to International Business Ma-
chines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,406
Int. a.3 HOIF 10/02
U.S. a. 427-57 8 oalmi
GAS
|l«MI
i^
jiMr
introduced relative to the volume in liters (V) of said
reaction chamber is at least 0.01 min-'; in combination
with
(2) supplying a high frequency power across the facing
electrodes in said chamber such that the power density,
determined by the ratio of the supplied electric power
relative to the discharge electrode's surface area, is at least
0.3 W/cm2, thereby causing decomposition of said reac-
tion gas and deposition of an amorphous silicon film on
said substrate by glow discharge.
4,438,155
FABRICATION OF COMPOSITE METAL WIRE
Kazumichi Kawai; Yasuo Kanekb; Keizo Abe; Hideo Matsuo;
Yoshinori Kishi; Yasuhiko Miyake, and Yoshihiro Matsu-
yama, all of Hitachi, Japan, assignors to HiUchi Cable Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 95,281, Nov. 19, 1979, Pat. No. 4,291,64*,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 937,830, Aug. 29, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,148
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 31, 1977, 52-104447;
Sep. 6, 1977, 52-106922
Int. C\? B05D 3/14
U.S. a. 427—49 10 Qaims
K)
1. A method of fabricating a composite metal wire compris-
ing the steps of: subjecting a core of hard metal to pretreat-
ments including alignment, polishing, and cleaning and then to
preheating; maintaining constant tension in the pretreated core
at a constant low tension of between 5% and 50% of its bi-eak-
ing tension to improve adhesion between the core and a clad-
ding material; introducing the pretreated constant low tension
core into an extruder; and extruding a cladding of soft metal
around the core while maintaining the constant low tension in
the core.
1. A method of manufacturing a magnetic coating composi-
tion containing magnetic particles, comprising the steps of:
leaching the dry magnetic particles in an acid to form a
slurry;
adjusting the pH of the said slurry to between 3 and 4 to
produce a positive electrostatic charge on said magnetic
particles;
adding to said slurry a dispersion of colloidal particles hav-
ing a pH between 3 and 4, the colloidal particles having a
negative electrostatic charge thereon;
mixing said slurry with said dispersion in a water-based
system, the opposite charges on said particles causing the
colloidal particles to be attracted to and irreversibly bond
to the magnetic particles;
removing the coated magnetic particles from said water-
based system; and
dispersing said coated magnetic particles in a water-free
organic liquid binder system for application to a substrate,
said colloidal particles coated on said magnetic particles
preventing said magnetic particles from agglomerating to
thereby improve the magnetic properties of said magnetic
coating composition.
4,438,157
PROCESS FOR FORMING MNOS DUAL DIELECTRIC
STRUCTURE
Roberto Romano-Moran, Centerville, Ohio, assignor to NCR
Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 213,764, Dec. 5, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 83,499, Oct. 10, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 396,995
Int. Q.J HOIL 21/316. 21/318
U.S. Q. 427—93 i Claim
1. A process for forming continuously in the same furnace
1258
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
deposition tube a silicon dioxide, silicon oxynitride and silicon
nitride memory device dielectric structure on a silicon sub-
strate comprising:
thermally oxidizing the silicon substrate in the furnace tube
in a dry oxygen ambient atmospheric pressure in the range
of 700*-850' C;
forming immediately thereafter the silicon oxynitride layer
on the silicon dioxide using gaseous reactants in the pro-
portion (l-3):2:7 of N2O, dichlorosilane and ammonia,
said ammonia being introduced first into the furnace tube
to prevent spurious deposits during this step, at the same
temperature used for forming the silicon dioxide layer and
a pressure of 400-600 millitorr; and
forming immediately thereafter the silicon nitride layer on
the silicon oxynitride by cutting off the N2O gas supply to
the furnace tube and using the gaseous ammonia and
dichlorosilane in the ratio of (3-4): 1 at the same tempera-
ture and same range of pressure used for forming the
silicon oxynitride layer.
(c) suspending said optical material above the surface of said
volume of coating solution;
(d) lowering said optical material into said coating solution;
(e) maintaining said optical material within said coating
solution for a predetermined time such that the tempera-
ture of said material generally equals the temperature of
said solution;
(0 progressively withdrawing said optical material out of
said volume of coating solution;
(g) suspending said optical material above said coating solu-
tion within said saturated atmosphere for a predetermined
time;
(h) withdrawing said optical material from said saturated
atmosphere;
whereby a more uniform coating is provided on said optical
material.
4,438,158
METHOD FOR FABRICATION OF ELECTRICAL
RESISTOR
Charles W. Eichelberger, Schenectady, and Robert J. Woj-
narowsld, Qifton Park, both of N.Y., assignors to General
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 220,937, Dec. 29, 1980, Pat. No. 4^77,505.
This application Oct. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 437,046
Int. OJ B05D 5/12; HOIC 7/00
U.S. a. 427-101 11 Claims
1. A method for preparing an electrical resistor, comprising
the steps of: combining a curable polymeric binder and finely-
divided particles, having a particle size of less than 50 microns,
of at least one member of the group consisting of the brown
oxide of molybdenum and the brown, purple, blue and yellow
oxides of tungsten; adjusting the amount of said oxides to be
about 60-80 volume percent of the mixture of said oxides and
said binder and sufficient to provide a desired bulk resistivity
after curing; applying the resulting admixture to a substrate;
and curing said binder.
4,438,160
METHOD OF MAKING A ROTARY BALL DISPLAY
DEVICE
ReUi Ishlkawa; Masaki Saito; Toshio Mori, and Hidemasa
Tamura, all of Kanagawa, Japan, assignors to Sony Corpora-
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 17, 1983, Ser. No. 458,546
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 18, 1982, 57-5806:
Jan. 18, 1982, 57-5807 *
Int. aj G09G 3/00.- B05D 7/00
UA a 427-214 , Claims
4,438,159
COATING PROCESS
Hermann Weber, Tarzana, Calif., assignor to Techslght Corpo-
ration, Wlhnington, Del.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,362
Int. a.3 G02B J/10; B05D 1/18
UA a 427-162 5 Claims
1. An improved method for coating an optical material
comprising the steps of:
(a) providing a volume of coating solution in an enclosed
housing;
(b) providing an atmosphere substantially saturated with
said coating solution;
1. A method of making a rotary ball display device which
comprises:
providing a plurality of ball members each having a hemi-
spherical surface of a color different than the other hemi-
spherical surface thereof,
coating said ball members with a thin coating,
settling the coated ball members into a low viscosity liquid
to form a layer of coated ball members, said thin coating
being insoluble in said low viscosity liquid,
pouring a high molecular weight hardenable coating mate-
rial soluble in said low viscosity liquid into said coated ball
members to cover said layer,
removing said low viscosity liquid,
hardening said hardenable coating material,
dissolving away said thin coating from said ball members to
leave cavity portions thereabout, and
introducing a high resistivity liquid into said cavity portions.
4,438,161
IRON-CONTAINING REFRACTORY BALLS FOR
RETORTING OIL SHALE
Lyie W. PoUock, BartlesviUe, Okla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, Bartlesrille, Okla.
DiTislon of Ser. No. 209,926, Nov. 24, 1980, Pat. No. 4,371,481,
which is a division of Ser. No. 9,627, Feb. 6, 1979, Pat. No.
4,360,565, which is a division of Ser. No. 837,130, Sep. 28, 1977,
Pat. No. 4,160,719. This appUcation Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No.
430,627
iBt a.3 B05D 7/00; B32B 15/02
VS. a. 427-215 5 claims
1. A process for preparing iron-containing ceramic balls,
containing about 10 to 90 weight percent iron and the balance
a high refractory ceramic-alumina, which comprises:
(a) tumbling iron shot with finely divided powdered refrac-
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
12S9
tory-grade alumina of about 5 to 10 micron particle size
and with sufficient water to provide an alumina coating on
each said shot,
(b) heating said alumina coating iron shot to a temperature of
about 2800* F. to 3400* F. for a time sufficient to result in
said iron-containing ceramic balls, and
(c) cooling said iron-containing ceramic balls in the substan-
tial absence of molecular oxygen,
wherein said iron-containing ceramic balls contain in cross-sec-
tion a metallic iron core and a ceramic-alumina over-coating.
4,438,163
PAD WITH SHAPE ADAPTING PROPERTIES
Karl G. B. Anderason, Halmstad, Sweden, assignor to Dual Bila
AB, Halnstad, Sweden
FUed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,082
Claims priority, application Sweden, May 30, 1980, 8004063
Int. a.3 B32B 23/02
UA a. 428-35 ,j Claim.
1. A configuration conforming pad comprising at least two
adjacently located superposed layers of flexible material,
joined together at the surrounding outer edge portions thereof,
each of the layers including an atuched tongue-shaped flap
defined by cuts in the layer from which it is formed, said
tongue-shaped fiaps being disposed in overlapping relationship
and adapted to be folded out of the plane of their respective
layers along the line of attachment and slideably and overlap-
pingly repositioned to substantially surround and conform to
an object placed in the pad.
4,438,162
MODinED lONOMER BLEND AND APPLICATION
THEREOF
Wayne F. Nelson, Akron, Ohio, assignor to A. Schulmaa, Inc.,
Akron, Ohio
DiviiloB of Ser. No. 260,180, May 4, 1981, Pat. No. 4,371,583.
This application Sep. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 419,528
Int a.J B32B 31/Oa 27/20
VS. a. 427-318 6 Claims
1. A process for preparing a metal edging with a tough,
non-glossy adherent coating or inlay which comprises prepar-
ing a modified ionomeric blend consisting essentially of an
intimate admixture of (1) about 20 to 60 percent of an ethylene-
propylene rubber, in which ethylene is the predominant com-
ponent, (2) about 40 to 80 percent of a copolymer containing
ethylene uniu and carboxylic acid containing units, said co-
polymer containing between about 25 and 98.5 percent ethyl-
ene units and between about 1.5 and 30 percent acid containing
unite, and said carboxylic acid units being from 10 to 100
percent neutralized with metallic ions, and (3) an effective
amount up to about 10 percent of an ultraviolet stobilizing
coloring material selected from the group consisting of
(1) carbon black, and
(2) a pigment plus an ultraviolet sUbilizer, with or without
an antioxidant,
cleaning the metal edging, heating the metal edging and flow-
ing said blend onto a cleaned, heated surface of said metal.
4,438 164
CONTAINERS FOR X-RAY RLMS OR THE LIKE
Josef Pfelfer, UnterhachiBg, and Aitni Rheude, Munich, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Agfa-Gcvaert Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusea, Fed. Rep. of Gcmany
Continuation of Ser. No. 134,925, Mar. 28, 1980, abandoned.
ThU appUcation Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 341,193
Qairas priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 30.
1979,2912668
Int. a.J G03B 41/16; B32B 15/08; B65D 85/48
VS. a. 428—35 22 Claims
1. A container for a sheet-like film, particularly a container
wherein a film is inserted between two spaced-apart walls,
comprising carrier means consisting essentially of two sheet-
like carriers flanking the film; a fluorescent stratum mounted
on at least one of said carriers and disposed intermediate said
one carrier and the film between said carriers; a magnetic first
layer mounted on a first one of said carriers; and a second layer
mounted on a second ohe of said carriers, said layers attracting
one another so that said stratum is biased against the film.
1260
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438,165
SIMULATED STAINED AND LEADED GLASS
WINDOWS
Donald R. Butler, Newport Beach, Califs assignor to Stained
Glass Overlay, Inc., Mission Viejo, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 158,919, Jun. 12, 1980, Pat. No
4,335,170, wliicli is a continuation of Ser. No. 962,123, No?. 20,
1978, abandoned. This application Jun. 10, 1982, Ser. No.
386,987
Int. a.3 B32B 17/10; B44F 1/06
U.S. a. 428-38 5 Qaims
J/
1. A simulated stained and leaded glass window structure
comprising:
a. a pane subsUntially clear glass or plastic having a smooth
first side and a smooth second side;
b. A plurality of lead strips adhered to the first side of the
pane and forming closed design segments thereof;
c. a plurality of polyester plastic film segment coatings hav-
ing on one side, color coatings simulating stained glass and
on their undersurfaces, a pressure-sensitive adhesive coat-
ing affixed to the second side of the pane coinciding with
the closed design segments, thereby imparting color
thereto; and
d. a plurality of second lead strips adhered to the second side
of the pane in coincidental alignment with the lead strips
adhered to the first side of the pane, and overlaying the
joint lines between adjacent plastic film segment coatings.
4,438,166
STRUCTURAL LAMINATE AND METHOD FOR
MAKING SAME
David G. Gluck, and Leon F. Barry, both of St. Petersburg, Fla.,
assignors to The Celotex Corporation, Tampa, Fla.
FUed Feb. 4, 1983, Ser. No. 463,786
Int. a.3 B32B 5/20. 5/28. 31/12
U.S. a. 428-113 20 Claims
(4) each layer of glass fibers is substantially parallel to the
facing sheet, and
(5) the network of glass fibers is secured to the adhesive
coating of the facing sheet through attachments be-
tween the adhesive coating and glass fibers of the net-
work proximate to the adhesive coating.
4,438,167
NOVEL POROUS FABRIC
Eckhard C. A. Schwarz, Neenah, Wis., assignor to Biax Fiber-
film Corporation, Neenah, Wis.
Division of Ser. No. 85,228, Oct. 15, 1979. This application Nov.
6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,578
Int. a.3 B32B 3/10
U.S. a. 428-138 4aaims
1. A porous fabric comprised of a web of elongated synthetic
thermoplastic fibers imbedded in a film of a synthetic polymer,
said web of elongated synthetic fibers imbedded in said film of
said synthetic polymer being biaxially stretched, said thermo-
plastic fibers and said synthetic polymer exhibiting a difference
m aqueous contact angle of at least 5* and a difference in initial
tensile modulus of 5000 psi between a web of said thermoplas-
tic fibers and a film of said synthetic polymer when individu-
ally stretched, said porous fabric having surface openings of at
least 100,000 perforations per square inch.
4,438,168
COMPOSITE HEAT SHIELD
Olivier Testard, Bures sur Yvette, France, assignor to Commis-
sariat a TEnergie Atomique, Paris, France
Filed Jul. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 400,888
Oaims priority, application France, Jul. 30, 1981, 81 14868
Int. a.3 B32B 23/02
U.S. a. 428-193 9 Qaims
1. A heat shield comprising at least one thermally insulating
assembly formed by a reflecting layer and a spacing layer,
wherein the spacing layer is made from tulle, and wherein the
spacing layer and the reflecting layer are welded to one an-
other at their edges.
13. A structural laminate comprising:
(a) a rigid foam having two major, substantially planar,
substantially parallel surfaces, one of the major surfaces of
the rigid foam being attached to a planar facing sheet, the
facing sheet having an adhesive coating disposed on the
inner surface thereof and interposed between the facing
sheet and the rigid foam, and
(b) a network of glass fibers wherein:
(1) the glass fibers are distributed in the rigid foam,
(2) the glass fibers are greater than one foot in length,
(3) the glass fibers are arranged in layers.
4,438,169
COLORED OPAQUE PRINTING OF TEXTILE FABRICS
USING DYESTUFFS
John Y. Daniels, Pineville, N.C., and James C. Stevenson, Rock
Hill, S.C, assignors to Springs Industries, Inc., Fort MilL
S.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 429,794, Sep. 30, 1982, which is
a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 294,782, Aug. 20, 1981,
abandoned. This application Oct. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 4354*49
lot. a.3 B32B 3/00
VS. a. 428-196 12 Claims
1. A printed textile fabric formed of interengaged yams of a
predetermined color, selected areas of said fabric having
printed pattern areas of predetermined color contrasting with
the color of said yams, said printed pattern areas being substan-
tially opaque and thus unaffected by the color of said yams,
and said pattern areas comprising an opaque coating covering
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1261
acid monomers on ethylene-propylene-dicyclopentadiene ter-
polymer rubber, said surface layer containing up to 10 parts by
weight of pigment per 100 parts of graft copolymer composi-
tion.
Japan,
cured water insoluble polymer binder affixed to said yams and
bonding said opacifying pigment to the yarns, and a dye color-
ing said polymer binder and thereby imparting said predeter-
mined color to the printed area.
4438 170
ELECTROSENSITIVE RECORDING MATERIALS WITH
HETEROGENEOUS SURFACE TOPOLOGY
John P. McCue, Holyoke, Mass., assignor to Philip Morris
Industrial Incorporated, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,610
Int. a.3 B44D 1/16; GOID 15/08
U.S. a 428-207 6aalms
1. In electrosensitive recording materials of the type includ-
ing (a) a substrate web, (b) an intermediate colored layer on a
surface of the substrate web, and (c) a vacuum-deposited metal
layer over the intermediate layer, which recording materials
develop an image when portions of the metal layer are vapor-
ized when subjected to electric current from a printhead in
contact therewith to thereby expose portions of the colored
intermediate layer,
the improvement wherein:
(1) the substrate is a web of paper of plastic film with a
first surface having a smoothness of 20 or less Sheffield
units and an ink absorption characteristic providing a
brightness loss of 10 to 40 units;
(2) the intermediate layer is on the first surface of the
substrate web and includes
(a) a thermally stable organic film-forming binder,
(b) small-sized solid parrticulates having a particle size range
of 0.1 to 2.0 microns average diameter, and
(c) large-sized solid particulates having a particle size range
of 2 to 39 microns with a median particle size of 3 to 12
microns,
the binder forming a film adhering the small-sized and large-
sized particulates to the first surface of the substrate, the partic-
ulates being partially embedded in the film with the large-sized
particulates having portions protruding from the film and
extending beyond portions of the small-sized particulates pro-
truding from the film, the intermediate layer thereby having a
heterogeneous surface topology formed by the small-sized
particulates dispersed within agglomerates of the large-sized
particulates; and
(3) the vacuum-deposited metal layer is a thin even layer
of metal extending over and conforming to the hetero-
geneous surface topology of the intermediate layer.
4.438,172
HEAT RETAINING SHEET
Ando Katsutoshl, and Nishiura Elichl, both of Otsu,
assignors to Toray Industries, Inc., Tokyo, Japan
per No. PCr/JP81/00115, § 371 Date Jan. 27, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 27, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO81/03S03, PCT Pub
Date Dec. 10, 1981
PCT Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 354,097
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 28, 1980, 55-72516:
Dec. 2, 1980, 55-169176
Int. a.5 B32B 27/02. 27/36
U.S. a. 428-220 32 ci,|^
1. A heat retaining sheet comprising a web formed by mutu-
ally bonding fibers containing polybutylene terephthalate, said
fibers having a definite fiber length, being substantially un-
drawn and substantially uncrimped and having an average
fineness of up to about 15 denier and a fineness distribution
ranging from 0.001 to 40 denier, said web having area shrink-
age in boiling weter of up to about 20%.
4,438,173
TRUXIAL FABRIC
Wayne C. Trost, Rockford, lU., assignor to Barber-Colman
Company, Rockford, 111.
FUed Jul. 21, 1983, Ser. No. 515,786
Int. a.i B32G 7/08
VS. a. 428-221 15 cuia.
NEDDIES SNEDOEO
NEDOLES SHEDDED
"W« flLLIK IS
UnSERm)
4438 171
COEXTRUDED PRODUCT OF AES-THERMOPLASTIC
GRAFT COPOLYMER
John M. Wefer, Newtown, Conn., assignor to Unlroyal, Inc.,
New York, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,599
Int a.3 B32B 7/02. 27/08
VS. a. 428—215 7 Claims
1. A coextnided product having a total thickness of from 25
to 500 mils, and at least one surface layer having a thickness of
SMEODIK
SEQUEna
1. A pliable, triaxial fabric comprising at least three seu of
interwoven, angularly intersecting parallel yam courses, at
least one of said seto including at least one unsubilized yam
course substantially free of interwoven relationships with
intersecting yam courses, the remaining yam courses being
substantially interwoven with intersecting yam courses, said
fabric being weavable on a conventional, bi-plain triaxial fab-
ric-forming machine.
1262
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438,174
POLYESTER ANTISTATIC LAMINATE MATERIALS
Brace R. Whewell, 7 Singers Clow, Henley-on-Tluunes, Oxford-
shire, England
FUed May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,783
Clnins priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 14, 1981,
8121590
Int a.J B32B 7/00
\i&. a. 428-2*7 9 Claims
(ethylene-imine), said primer coating having a topcoating
thereon comprising a vinylidene chloride polymer in admix-
ture with an anti-static proportion of a low molecular weight
glycol, said vinylidene chloride top coating retaining its inher-
ent heat seal characteristics.
1. An anti-static laminate material comprising
a thin polyester resin layer,
an electrically conductive mesh disposed within said resin
layer at or immediately below its operationally upper
surface,
said electrically conductive mesh being selected from the
group consisting of glass cloth tissue, impregnated with a
dispersion of carbon particles, and thin carbon-fibre mesh,
and
one or more backing layers of polyester resin and/or con-
ventional fibre-glass.
4,438,177
CURED PRESSURE SENSITIVE ADHESIVES
William D. Potter, Bishop's Stortford Herts, and Sinan B. Kia-
mil, Harlow, both of United Kingdom, assignors to Smith and
Nephew Associated Companies Ltd., London, England
FUed Jun. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 389,009
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jiin. 17. 1981.
81-18666 '
Int. a.3 B05D 3/06
UA a 428-355 16 Claims
1. Process for the preparation of an adhesive layer on a
substrate which comprises applying to a substrate a composi-
tion of an acrylate rendered curable by the presence of a cross-
linking agent and curing it by electron beam radiation charac-
terised in that the curable composition consists essentially of a
liquid alkyl acrylate polymer having a K value of 10 to 30 and
a polyfunctional acrylate or methacrylate crosslinking agent
said liquid alkyl acrylate polymer containing copolymerisable
polyfunctional acrylate or methacrylate monomer units to
provide an additional crosslinking agent.
14. An industrial tape carrying a cured acrylate pressure
sensitive adhesive made by the process of claim 1.
15. A surgical dressing carrying a cured acrylic pressure
sensitive adhesive made by the process of any claim 1.
4438 175
SYNTHETIC HLM WITHA PAPER-LIKE SURFACE AND
METHOD OF FORMING SAME
Charles R. Ashcraft, Victor, and Kurt D. Albertson, Macedon,
both of N.Y., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
FUed Apr. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 489,426
Int. a.3 B32B 3/26. 7/02
U.S. a 428-315.5 23 Claims
1. An oriented polymeric fUm structure comprising:
at least one layer of a thermoplastic polymeric matrix mate-
rial, within which is located a strata of voids, positioned at
least substantially within at least a substantial number of
said voids at least one void-initiating solid particle which
is phase-distinct and incompatible with said matrix, the
void space occupied by said particle being substantially
less than the volume of said void, with one generally
cross-sectional dimension of said particle at least approxi-
mately a corresponding cross-sectional dimension of said
void, at least one surface of said layer being of a paper-
like, non-even, micro-rough, microcrater-containing
lamellae-like, random textured, ink-acceptable configura-
tion.
4438 178
ADHESIVE ACnVATED POLYESTER HBROUS
MATERIAL
Edward J. Powers, LouisvUle, Ky., assignor to Fiber Industries,
Inc., Charlotte, N.C.
Filed Oct 27, 1982, Ser. No. 437,043
Int. a.5 D04H 1/58: B32B 27/34: D02G 3/00
U.S. a. 428-289 n Claims
1. A multi-filament polyester fibrous material for incorpora-
tion into rubber which is coated with a finish comprising, as
the active ingredient, a composition of the formula: R —
(O— CH2CHOH— CH2— Cl);c wherein R represents the resi-
due of a polyhydric alcohol or polycarboxylic acid and con-
tains up to 20 carbon atoms and x represents a number greater
than one.
4,438,176
THERMOPLASTIC COATED HLMS WITH ANTI-STATIC
PROPERTIES
Robert H. Steiner, Rochester, and Robert E. Touhsaent, Fair-
port, both of N.Y., assignors to MobU OU Corporation. New
York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 970,719, Dec. 18, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Jan. 12, 1983, Ser. No. 457,533
Int a.} B32B 27/00
UACL428-349 2 Oaims
1. A multi-layer thermoplastic film of improved anti-static
characteristics consisting essentially of a film substrate consist-
ing essentially of polypropylene having coated on at least one
surface thereof a primer coating consisting essentially of poly-
4 438 179
RESIN PARTICLES WTTHMAGNETIC PARTICLES
BONDED TO SURFACE
Jitka Sole, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow Chemical
Company, Midland, Mich.
FUed Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 345,305
Int C\? B32B 5/16
MS. a. 428—407 2 Claims
1. A synthetic resinous particle having a diameter of from
about 1-150 microns, the particle having bonded to the surface
thereof a coating comprising a magnetic layer, the magnetic
layer being of flocculated magnetic particles being bonded to
the surface thereof, the bonding layer comprising a water
swellable polymer grafted to the surface of the particle.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1263
4438 180
PROCESS FOR COATING NYLON ¥IIM WITH
VINYLIDENE CHLORIDE COPOLYMERS
Theodore J. Lang, and Bernard J. Kershaw, both of Kingston,
Canada, assignors to Du Pont Canada Inc., Mississauga,
Canada
FUed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,492
Qaims priority, application Canada, Aug. 27, 1981, 384698:
Dec. 1, 1981, 391235
Int a.' B23B 27/08
U.S. a. 428-475.8 10 Claims
1. A nylon film coated with a vinylidene chloride copoly-
mer, said film having been prepared by a process comprising:
(a) coating the nylon film with an aqueous dispersion of a
vinylidene chloride copolymer while keeping the nylon
film under sufficient machine and transverse direction
tensions to prevent curling, to form a primer-coated film,
said vinyldiene chloride copolymer having a crystallinity
index of less than 1.15, when dry, after 30 days' storage at
20* C, and a crystallinity index, when dry, between about
1.05 and 1.20 when stored for 48 hours at 40* C;
(b) drying the primer-coated film to remove substantially all
of the water from the dispersion, while maintaining the
primer-coated film under said machine and transverse
direction tensions and at a drying rate sufficiently high to
prevent curling of the primer-coated film;
(c) coating the primer-coated film with an aqueous disper-
sion of a vinylidene chloride copolymer which, when dry,
is capable of developing crysuUinity to a level sufficient
that the crystalline vinylidene chloride copolymer so-
formed resists atuck by an organic solvent, as measured
by the Solvent Haze Test, said organic solvent being
capable of dissolving vinylidene chloride copolymers
having a crystallinity index of less than 1.05, to form a
vinylidene chloride copolymer coated film; and
(d) drying the vinylidene chloride copolymer coated film.
4438 182
METHOD OF DETERMINING BATTERY LIFE
Harold A. Papaziaa, Littieton, Ohio, assignor to The United
States of America as represented by tiic Secretary of tiie Air
Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,496
Int a.> HOIM 6/00
U.S. a. 429-91 4c|.tais
1
B^rreJ9y
<:=^
■(0
^f£ctcrpic
CQMSTANT
S£/VSOI^
T7
VfMOTe
0/Sf>i4y
1. A method of determining the status of a battery compris-
ing the steps of:
measuring a dielectric constant of an electrolyte of the bat-
tery;
comparing the dielectric constant obtained during said mea-
suring to predetermined values, the predetermined values
indicating battery status at the measured dielectric con-
stant; and
outputting the status of the battery based upon said step of
comparing the measured dielectric constant to said prede-
termined values.
4 438 181
ELECTRONIC COMPONENT BONDING TAPE
Jon M. Schroeder, 4327 EsUte Dr., Stockton, Calif. 95209,
assignor to Jon M. Schroeder, Stockton, Calif.
FUed Jan. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 224,668
Int. a.3 HOIL 23/48
U.S. a. 428-571 7 Claims
1. An integral, preformed tape for thermocompression bond-
ing comprising:
a tape of conductive material with first bonding surface and
a pressure pad surface opposite to the bonding surface
with a contact pad bonding pressure pad protruding from
said pressure pad surface, said tope having formed thereon
a chip bonding site wherein apertures are formed through
said tope to estoblish longitudinal edges of an electrically
conductive lead, said lead having a contact pad terminal
end region for bonding to an electrical contoct pad formed
on a surface of an electronic component chip, said contoct
pad bonding pressure pad being formed from a material
which is harder than said tape material in the thermocom-
pression bonding temperature range and located so as to
protrude from said pressure pad surface at said contact
pad terminal end region.
4,438,183
PHOTOELECTROCHEMICAL CELL HAVING
PHOTOANODE WITH THIN BORON PHOSPHIDE
COATING AS A CORROSION RESISTANT LAYER
Richard J. Baughman, and David S. Ginley, botii of Albuquer-
que, N. Mex., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by Uie United Stotes Departinent of Energy,
Wuhington, D.C.
FUed Aug. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 411,396
Int a.3 HOIM 6/36
U.S. a. 429-111 8 Claims
1M KjMCN)^/ jmK^moHif
1. In a photoelectrochemical cell device comprising a
photoanode, the improvement comprising a film of boron
phosphide on said photoanode as a stoble photoclectrode layer
and as a corrosion resistant protecting film for said photoa-
node, whereby the surface of said photoanode is rendered
resistant to electrocorrosion and photocorrosion and thereby
stobUized and simultaneously provided with photoresponse
properties.
1264
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438,184
SEALED PASSAGE FOR A NEGATIVE TERMINAL
THROUGH A METAL WALL, AND ELECTRIC CELL
USING SAID SEALED PASSAGE
Bernard Chenaux, Poitiers, France, assignor to Gipelec, LeTal>
lois-Perret, France
FUed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,436
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jul. 21, 1981, 81 14151
Int. a.3 HOIM 2/06
U.S. a. 429—181 6 Claims
1. A sealed passage for a negative terminal through a metal
wall, wherein the sealing between said terminal and the metal
wall is provided by a glass seal, and wherein at least that por-
tion of the terminal which comes into contact with the glass
seal is covered with a layer of at least one electrically insulat-
ing oxide.
tive member, an electrically insulating layer applied on the
second photoconductive layer, said sheet-like conductive
member being completely covered with said first and second
photoconductive layers and the insulating layer, whereby
corona ions do not flow directly into said sheet-like conductive
member when said member is exposed to a corona discharge,
said process including the steps of: forming a primary electro-
static charge image of the document; subjecting the insulating
layer side of said photosenstive screen simultaneously to an
imagewise exposure corresponding to the image of the docu-
ment and to an electrostatic charge while the first photocon-
ductive layer is maintained highly resistive in an imagewise
dark portion; subjecting at least the first photoconductive layer
of the screen to a uniform exposure so as to form a primary
charge image having a high surface potential and trapped
capacitively across the insulating layer in a stable manner, any
other portion of the screen being free from any charge; posi-
tioning a charge retentive member opposite the insulating layer
side of said photosensitive screen; and forming a secondary
electrostatic charge image on the charge retentive member by
projecting an ion stream toward the charge retentive member
through the photosensitive screen from the side of the first
photoconductive layer, while the first photoconductive layer
is maintained highly conductive, whereby any charge which
might deteriorate the primary charge image on the screen is
inhibited from deposit on the first photoconductive layer and
the ion stream is modulated in accordance with the primary
charge image on the screen.
4 438 185
HYDROPHILIC POLYMER COATED MICROPOROUS
MEMBRANES CAPABLE OF USE AS A BATTERY
SEPARATOR
Henry T. Taskier, Fanwood, N J., assignor to Celanese Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 174,146, Jul. 31, 1980, Pat No. 4,359,510.
This application Sep. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 414,747
Int. a.3 HOIM 2/16
U.S. a 429-250 4 Claims
1. A process for rendering a normally hydrophobic micropo-
rous membrane hydrophilic and reducing the electrical resis-
tance thereof which comprises applying a coating to the sur-
face of said membrane in a manner sufficient to achieve a
coating thickness when dry of from about 1 to about 25 mi-
crons, said coating being selected from the group consisting of
cellulose esters, and polyvinyl alcohol, and impregnating said
membrane with a surfactant in a manner and in at least an
amount sufficient to render the membrane hydrophilic in the
absence of said coating.
4438 186
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESS AND
PHOTOSENSmVE SCREEN FOR USE IN SUCH
PROCESS
Eiichi Sato, Tama; Akira Shimizu, Fuchu, and Kazuhisa
Yanagisawa, Mitaka, all of Japan, assignors to Olympus
Optical Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 913,907, Jun. 8, 1978, abuidoned. This
application Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,588
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 9, 1977, 52^118;
Jun. 17, 1977, 52-71142; Jun. 17, 1977, 5^71143; Jun. 17, 1977,
52-71144; Jun. 17, 1977, 52-71145; Jun. 17, 1977, 5^71146
Int a.J G03G 15/00
VS. CL 430-53 22 daioii
1. A process for electrophotographically forming a dupli-
cated copy of a document with the aid of a photosensitive
screen defined by an electrically conductive sheet-like member
having a plurality of fine apertures, a first photoconductive
layer applied on one side of the conductive memeber, a second
photoconductive layer applied on the other side of the conduc-
4,438,187
PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSTHON FOR
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY WTTH
CHLORONAPHTHOQUINONES
Akira Fushida, Suita, and Yoshiaki Kato, Hirakata, both of
Japan, assignors to Mita Industiial Co. Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,331
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 6, 1981, 56-50579
Int. a.3 G03G 5/06. 5/07. 5/09
VS. a. 430-81 7 Claims
1. A photosensitive plate for electrophotography, consisting
essentially of an electrically conductive support and a photo-
sensitive layer thereon, said photosensitive layer comprising
100 parts by weight of polyvinylcarbazole, 10 to 30 parts by
weight of a perylene pigment represented by the following
general formula
(2)
Ri— N
N-R2
wherein Ri and R2 is a hydrogen atom or a substituted or
unsubstituted alkyl or aryl group,
and 10 to 30 parts by weight of 2,3-dichloro-l,4-naphthoqui-
none.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
126S
4438 188
METHOD FOR PRODUCING PHOTOSENSTTIVE RLM
FOR ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHY
Michiro Shimatani, Fqjisawa, and Toyoki Kazama, Yokosuka,
botii of Japan, assignors to FuH Electric Company, Ltd.,
Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Jun. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 387,221
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 15, 1981, 56-91753;
Sep. 24, 1981. 56-150946; Sep. 24, 1981, 56-150948
Int a.3 G03G 5/082
UA a. 430-128 9Ctain«
7 4
4,438,190
PHOTOSENSTTIVE RESIN COMPOSTHON
CONTAINING UNSATURATED MONOMERS AND
UNSATURATED PHOSPHATES
Toshiaki Ishlmani; Katsushige Tsukada, and Nobuyuki HayasU,
aU of Hitachi, Japan, assignors to Hitachi Chemical Com-
pany, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,765
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 4, 1981, 56-31808:
Mar. 10, 1981, 56-34779
Int a.3 G03C 1/68
U.S. a 430-281 14CUdms
^
rhi
t-
^
Q~"
I
1. In a method of producing a photosensitive film on a sub-
strate surface including generating a glow discharge in a space
between a cylindrical conductive substrate coaxially supported
by a rotatable support arranged in a reaction chamber and a
cylindrical electrode coaxially opposed to the surface of said
cylindrical conductive substrate to decompose a reaction gas
introduced into said reaction chamber, said method comprising
previously cleaning said surface of said substrate, and supply-
ing or exhausting said reaction gas to or from said space be-
tween said substrate and said electrode so as to be uniformly
dispersed in an axial direction of at least said substrate.
4,438,189
RADIATION-POLYMERIZABLE MIXTURE AND
PHOTOPOLYMERIZABLE COPYING MATERIAL
PREPARED THEREFROM
UWch Geiuler, FrankAut, and Walter Herwig, Bad Soden, botii
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst AktiengeseU-
Khaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Aug. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 407,488
CUims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 28,
1981,3134123
Int a.3 G03C 1/68
VS. a. 430—280 24 Claims
1. A radiation-polymerizable mixture consisting essentially
of (a) a compound which has at least two terminal ethyleni-
cally unsaturated groups and which can form a crosslinked
polymer by free radical initiated chain addition polymerization
(b) a polymeric binder which is insoluble in water and at least
swellable in aqueous alkaline solutions, (c) a radiation-activau-
ble polymerization initiator, and (d) a compound which is
thermally crosslinkable with a material selected from the
group consisting of the polymeric binder (b), the polymeriza-
tion product of compound (a), and itself, and which, if the
crosslinking groups of said compound (d) are epoxy groups,
has at least three epoxy groups.
1. A photosensitive resin composition for the preparation of
a solder resist comprising:
(a) at least one compound selected from the group consisting
of benzotriazole, benzimidazole, benzothiazole, deriva-
tives thereof and and salts thereof, the derivatives of
benzotriazole, benzimidazole, and benzothiazole being
those obtained by substituting one or more hydrogen
atoms in said compounds with one or more alkyl groups,
aryl groups, nitro groups, amino groups, hydroxyl groups,
carboxyl groups or halogens,
(b) an unsaturated organic phosphate compound having
photopolymerizablc ethylenically unsaturated bonds se-
lected from the group consisting of acid phosphoxyethyl
methacrylate, 3-chloro-2-acid phosphoxypropyl methac-
rylate, bis(methacryloxyethyl)phosphate, acryloxyethyl
phosphate, bis(acryloxyethyl)phosphate, bis(2-chloroe-
thyDvinyl phosphate and l,2-bis(carboxyallyl)ethyldibu-
tyl phosphate,
(c) 20 to 40 parts by weight of a vinyl copolymer,
(d) 20 to 80 parts by weight of a photopolymerizablc unsatu-
rated compound having at least one terminal ethylene
group, and
(e) 0.5 to 10 parts by weight of a sensitizer and/or a sensitizer
system other than component (a) capable of initiating
polymerization of components (b) and (d) upon irradiation
of actinic light; the amount of component (a) being about
0.001% by weight or more and the amount of component
(b) being about 0.001% by weight or more based on the
weight of the photosensitive resin composition.
4,438,191
MONOLTTHIC INK JET PRINT HEAD
Fnnk L. Qoutien Robert N. Low, both of Corrallis, and Paul
H. McOeUand, Monmouth, aU of Oreg., auignors to Hewlett-
Packard Company, Palo Alto, CaUf.
FUed Not. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 443,971
Int a.J GOID 15/18
VS. a. 430-324 12 Claims
1. In a method for constructing a monolithic bubble-driven
ink jet print head having a substrate and a heat source attached
to said substrate for producing bubbles, the steps comprising:
1266
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
forming an electrically conductive foundation surrounding
said heat source, said foundation attached to said sub-
strate;
applying a first resist over said substrate and said heat
source;
exposing said first resist to define a wall over said founda-
tion, said wall forming a perimeter surrounding said heat
source;
removing those portions of said first resist where said wall is
to be located;
depositing a first metal layer onto said foundation to form
said wall;
forming a conductive surface over the remaining portions of
said first resist which are contained within said perimeter;
applying a second resist over said conductive surface;
exposing said second resist to define an orifice;
depositing a second metal layer over said wall and said
conductive surface; and
stripping away said first and second resist and those portions
of said conductive surface formed over said first resist, to
provide a monolithic print head with a void therein de-
fined by said wall and said metal layer, and to provide an
orifice in said second metal layer, said void communicat-
ing with said orifice.
4,438,192
PHOTORESIST STRIPPER CX>MPOSrnON AND
METHOD OF USE
Wesley L. Archer, Midland, Mich.; Vicki A. Lynn, Indianapolis,
Ind., and Susan M. Dallessandro, Midland, Mich., assignors
to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
FUed Feb. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 465,975
Int. a.J B08B 3/08; CUD 7/50; C23G 5/02
U.S. a. 430—329 9 Claims
1. A composition suitable for stripping cross-linked photore-
sist polymer which comprises methylene chloride containing
methanol and methyl formate, each in amounts of from about
1 to about 10 percent by volume of the total mixture, providing
that the total amount of methanol and methyl formate is at least
about 5 and not more than about 10 volume percent of the total
mixture.
4 438 193
SILVER HALIDE PHOTOSENSFTIVE COLOR
PHOTOGRAPHIC MATERIAL
Morito UemunM Kenichi Klshi; Satoshi Nakagawa, and Shi^i
Klda, all of Hino, Japan, assignors to Konishiroku Photo
Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,962
Gaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 27, 1980, 55-188974
Int. a.3 G03C 1/46. 7/26
U.S. a. 430— 505 9 Qaims
1. A silver halide photosensitive color photographic material
comprising a coupler of the formula
4,438 194
SILVER HAUDE COLOR PHOTOGRAPHIC
PHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIAL
Fumlo Hamada, Fussa, Japan, asslgBor to Konishiroku Pboto
Industry Co., Ltd.« Japan
FUed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,914
Qaims priority, appUcatlon Japan, Mar. 20, 1981, 5642117
Int CL^ G03C 1/46
U.S. a. 430—505 4 Clalnv
1. A silver halide color photographic photosensitive material
comprising a base having thereon a non-photosensitive inter-
mediate layer sandwiched between a high-sensitive silver hal-
ide emulsion layer and a low-sensitive silver halide emulsion
layer both having a nondiffusion coupler that forms substan-
tially the same color and having photosensitivity in substan-
tially the same spectral region, said non-photosensitive inter-
mediate layer having been incorporated therein with a nondif-
fusion coupler that forms substantially the same color as that
formed by the nondiffusion coupler contained in said high-sen-
sitive emulsion layer and whose coupling speed is not greater
than that of the nondiffusion coupler contained in said high-
sensitive silver halide emulsion layer.
4438 195
PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING MATERUL
CONTAINING A DEVELOPER COMPOUND
FViedrich-Wilhehn Kunitz, Leverkusen, and Karl-Wilhelm
Schranz, Odenthal, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Agfa-Gevaert AktiengeseUschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Nov. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 438,965
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 14,
1981, 3145288
Int. a.3 G03C J/06
U.S. a. 430—566 7 Qaims
1. In a photographic recording material comprising at least
one light-sensitive silver halide emulsion layer and at least one
layer containing a silver-halide-developer compound contain-
ing at least one amino group, the improvement according to
which the silver-halide-developer compound is contained in
the layer in salt form bound to an ion exchanger.
Coup
I
O
I
Coup
I
PUG
(A)
(B)
wherein Coup (A) is a non-diffusion type coupling component
(A) bonded to the oxygen atom at a position which enables
Coup (A) to form a colored or colorless compound as a result
of coupling with and releasing from an oxidized color develop-
ing agent. Coup (B) is a diffusion type coupling component (B)
which is bonded to the oxygen atom in a position which ena-
bles Coup (B) to split off from said Coup (A) and form a cou-
pling reaction product with said oxidized color developing
agent, and PUG is a development inhibitor which is released
when Coup (B) undergoes said coupling reaction.
4^438 196
IMMOBILIZATION OF BIOCATALYSTS ON
GRANULAR CARBON
Oreste J. Lantero, Jr., Goahen, ImL, anlgnor to MUes Labora-
tories, Inc., EUdiart, Ind.
FUed Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 425,942
Int a.3 C12P 19/2a- C12N J 1/02. 11/08, 11/06
VS. Q. 435—96 18 dainis
9. An immobUized enzyme conjugate comprising porous,
granular, activated carbon having a particle size of from 12 to
40 mesh on the U.S. sieve series, pore dimensions of from 35 to
1,000 A in radius and a surface area of from 200 to 600 m^/gm
as a support having attached thereto the reaction product of a
polyamine compound having pendant amine groups, an amine
reactive material which is a multifunctional aldehyde, a multi-
functional organic halide, a multifunctional anhydride, a multi-
functional azo compound, a multifunctional isothiocyanate or
a multifunctional isocyanate whose unreacted amine reactive
groups have been reacted with free amine groups of the en-
zyme to bind it thereto.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1267
4,438,197
COMPOUND DC-38-V AND PROCESS FOR
PRODUCTION THEREOF
Fusao Tomlta, Machlda; Yuzuni Matsuda, Koganei; Kunikatsu
SUrahata; Keiichi Takahashi, both of Machlda; Hirofumi
Nakano; Tomoyuu Sato, both of Machida; ShiUi Okubo.
Matsudo, and Nobuo Nakamura, Machlda, all of Japan, as-
signors to Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japln
Divisionof Ser. No. 175,324, Aug. 4, 1980, Pat. No. 4,340,725.
This application Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 369,000
dains priority, application Japan, Aug. 3, 1979, 54-98656
Int. Q.3 C07G lJ/00
U.S. Q. 435-119 4 q,,,^
1. A process for producing a compound of the formula
CHjO
and which is characterized by an infrared absorption spectrum
substantially as shown in FIG. 1, an ultraviolet absorption
spectrum substantially shown in FIG. 2, a molecular weight of
494 determined by mass spectrometry and a molecular formula
of C27H26O9, which comprises culturing a microorganism
belonging to the genus Streptomyces which is capable of pro-
ducing said compound, in a nutrient medium until substantial
antibacterial activity is detected in the culture liquor and there-
after recovering said compound therefrom.
4,438,200
METHOD FOR THE PREPARATION OF
CLUCOSYLRANFERASE
Martin A. Taubman, Newton, and Daniel J. Smith. Natick. both
of Mass assignors to Forsyth Dental Infirmary for Children.
tioston, Mass.
Filed Sep. 13. 1982, Ser. No. 416,869
Int. a.5 C12N 9/70
U.S.Q. 435-193 14 Claims
1. A method for preparing glucosyltransferase (GTF) useful
for immunization against dental caries, which method com-
pnses:
(a) culturing Streptococcus mutans in a medium conUinina
glucose and dialyzable nutrienu. to form a mixture of
culture cells and supernatant, the supemaUnt conuinina
GTF; "
(b) removing the culture cells and recovering the culture
supernatant containing the GTF;
(c) admixing the supernatant conuining the GTF with a
water-insoluble polyglucan in solid particulate bead form,
for a time period sufficient to provide for the binding of
!?ti*'"' ^° ^^^ polyglucan bead material, to provide a
GTF-polysaccharide bead complex;
(d) recovering the GTF water-insoluble bead complex from
the supernatant;
(e) washing the GTF water-insoluble polysaccharide com-
plex to remove unbound GTF and medium compounds
from the polyglucan bead material;
(0 conucting the GTF water-insoluble polyglucan bead
complex with a denaturing solvent, to break the bond
between the water-insoluble polyglucan and the GTF, to
provide a GTF-denaturing solvent mixture;
(g) recovering the water-insoluble polyglucan bead material-
and
(h) concentrating the GTF and purifying the GTF by gel
filtration in the denaturing solvent.
4 438 198
BIOCHEMICALLY ACTIVE MATRIX FOR USE IN A
BIO-ARTinCIAL ORGAN
Gottfried Schmer, Seattie, Wuh., assignor to Trimedyne, Inc.,
Arlington Heigbto, lU.
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,073
Int. Q.J C12N 11/10. 11/02. 11/06; C12M 1/40
U.S. 0.435-178 joctatau
1. A biochemically active matrix suitable for use in a bio-
artificial organ comprising at least one biochemically active
enzyme covalently bonded to the surface of a carrier matrix of
organochemically cross-linked fibrin through a reactive group
of the enzyme which is not essential for its enzymatic activity
and suspended in a medium of agarose which irreversibly
solidifies below 37* C.
4438 199
MEASURING COMPOSITION
Naoto Miwa, Ibaragi, and Hiroahi NakiUima. UJi, both of Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Petrochemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo and
UnitUta Ltd., Aniagasakl, both of, Japan
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,245
Claims priority, application Japan, May 26, 1980, 55-69880
Int. a.J C12N 9/04. 9/10; C12Q 1/32. 1/48
U.S.a. 435-190 3cui^
1. An analytical composition, consisting of:
from 0.1 to 20 ji/ml glucokinase and from 1 to 20 ;i/ml
gluco8e-6.pho8phate dehydrogenase either one or both of
said enzymes being thermostable and being obtained by
extraction of a species of thermophilic bacteria.
4,438,201
AMIDOHYDROLASE HAVING ABILITY TO
DEPANTOTHENYLATE AN ANTIBIOTIC
Katouro Kubo, FUisawa; Yasuo Fukagawa, Karaakura, and
Tomoyuki Ishikura, Chigaaaki, all of Japan, assignors to
Sanraku-Ocean Co., Ltd., Tokyo. Japan
FUed Jul. 1. 1982. Ser. No. 394,169
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 1, 1981. 56-101161
Int. a.3 C12N 9/80; C12P 17/18; C12R 1/465
U.S. Q. 435-228 4 ^Mm
1. Amidohydrolase, having the ability to depantothenylatc
antibiotic OA-6129A represented by the formula
CHj-CHj
COOH
S-CHr-CH:-NH-CO-CH2-CHj
OH CHj
I I
•NH-CO-CH-C-CH:-OH
CH}
but no substantial ability to deacetylate antibiotic PS-5 repre-
sented by the formula
1268
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
CH3— CH2
CX)OH
S— CH2— CH2— NHCOCH3
said amidohydrolase being produced by a carbapenem-produc-
ing microorganism of the genus Streptomyces.
4,438^2
STABLE, BASE SERUM COMPOSITIONS AND
PREPARATION THEREOF
Philip V. Engler, Tairytown, ud Steven N. Buhl, Nyack, both of
N.Y., aasignora to Tcchnicon Inttnunents Corporation, Tarry-
town, N.Y.
FUed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,791
Int. a.J COIN 3S/J6. 33/48: C09K 3/00
U.S. a. 436—8 31 Qainu
1. A method for preparing a stable, consistent serum having
clear optical qualities and improved fllterability without signif-
icant loss of macromolecular lipid components which com-
prises the steps of insolubilizing a component or components of
said serum by reducing the pH of said serum by an acid addi-
tion treatment, separating said insolubilized component or
components from the serum and stabilizing the separated
serum by raising the pH of said separated serum.
4,438,203
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINATION OF
LUBRICANT STABILITY
Henry Wohltjen, Burke, Va.; Paul J. Sniegoski, and Harold
Ravner, both of Bethesda, Md., auignora to The United Sutes
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,356
Int. a.3 COIN 33/30
VS. a. 436-60 10 Claims
7BBCs4l
KTCCTMC
ta
4,438,204
DETERMINATION OF GLYCOSILATED HEMOGLOBIN
Rolf Deeg, Seeshaupf, Urban Schmitt, Tutzing, and Joachim
Ziegenhom, Stamberg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Boehringer Mannheim GmbH, Mannheim, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 426,510
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct 16,
1981, 3141146
Int. a.3 GOIN 33/72. 33/66
U.S. a. 436—67 12 Claims
1. A process for the determination of glycosilated hemoglo-
bin in a blood sample containing hemoglobin comprised of
both glycosilated and non-glycosilated hemoglobin comprising
the steps
liberating the glycosilated and non-glycosilated hemoglobin
from erythrocytes in the blood sample, and
differentiating the glycosilated and non-glycosilated hemo-
globin by reaction with haptoglobin, and
determining the glycosilated and/or the non-glycosilated
portion of the hemoglobin.
4,438,205
PROCESS FOR SAMPLING AND ANALYSIS BY THIN
LAYER CHROMATOGRAPHY
Didier J. Saint-Leger, Paris, and Andre Abrioux, Drancy, both
of France, assignors to "L'Oreal", Paris, France
FUed Jul. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 397,861
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 30, 1981, 81 14816
Int. a.J GOIN 31/08. 33/92
U.S. a. 436—71 7 Claims
6. A method for determining the stable lifetime of a lubricant
when subjected to oxidizing conditions comprising the steps
of:
disposing a sample of the lubricant under test in an oxidation
ceU;
heating the cell to the oxidation temperature of the lubricant;
bubbling oxygen at a constant flow rate through the cell;
detecting the concentration of combustible gas in the oxygen
flowing out of the cell; and
measuring the time elapsing until the onset of a rapid in-
crease in the concentration of combustible gas.
1. A process for sampling and analyzing at least one mixture
of substances by thin layer chromatography, said process com-
prising the steps of:
(a) sampling the said mixture by means of a non-adsorbent
solid support;
(b) depositing the thus sampled mixture on a chromatogra-
phy plate by pressing the said non-adsorbent suppori, by
its face which bears the mixture to be analyzed, directly
against an edge zone of the said chromatography plate;
(c) bringing the said edge of the chromatography plate into
contact with a solvent or a mixture of solvents, so as to
cause the migration of the mixture on the chromatography
plate and the separation of the constituents of the said
mixture; and
(d) developing the said plate for at least one of the qualiutive
and quantitative analysis of the constituents of the mixture
by keeping the said suppori pressed against the chroma-
tography plate until the mixture to be analyzed has essen-
tially migrated entirely out of the said suppori.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1269
4,438,206
METHOD FOR DETERMINAHON OF
FORMALDEHYDE
Motoo Nak^ima, and Kiyoshi Mizusawa, both of Noda, Japan.
■isignors to KUckoman Corporation, Noda, Japan
FUed Nov. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 441,926
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Nov. 19, 1981, 56-184492
Int. a.J GOIN 21/64. 21/77
VS. a. 436-130 4 cMm
bmdmg conditions with a sufficient amount of an antibody to
fibnnopeptide A and radioactively labelled fibrinopeptide A
thereafter, antibody bound fibrinopeptide A is separated from'
the unbound fibrinopeptide A and radioactivity measured, the
improvement comprising using as the inhibitor for thrombin an
mhibitor selected from the group consisting of D-phenylala-
nyl-L-propyl-L-N-I2( 1 -chloro-7-guanidohepUne-2-one)] the
hydrochlonc acid addition salt thereof; the hydronouric acid
addition salt thereof, the acetic acid addition salt thereof and
the citric acid addition salt thereof
so 00 ISO (ngi
Ou*NTfrvoFro«*»u)ewDE
1. In a method of formaldehyde determination by measuring
the fluorescence of a fluorescent substance formed by allowing
a formaldehyde-conUining solution to react with an acetylace-
tone reagent capable of forming said fluorescent substance
from formaldehyde, the improvement comprising measuring
the fluorescence in the presence of a serum albumin.
4438 207
RADIOIMMUNOASSAY FOR CANNABINOIDS
Kenneth E. Fahrenholtz, Bloomfleld, and John E. Heveran,
Fairfield, both of N.J., assignors to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.,
Nutley, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 79,125, Sep. 26, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 254,022
Int. a.3 GOIN 33/54; C07G 7/00; C07D 311/78
UA a 436-543 15 Claims
5. An immunogen comprising bovine serum albumen and
(6aR, 10aR)-4-[(6a,7, ID, IOa-tetrahydro-6,6,9-trimethyl-3-pen-
tyl-6H-dibenzo[b,d]pyran- 1 -yl)oxy]butanoic acid.
4,438,208
REGION-SPEOnC DETERMINANTS FOR VITAMIN K
DEPENDENT BONE PROTEIN
Leonard J. Deftos, Del Mar, and Bayard D. Catherwood, San
Diego, both of CaUf., assignors to The Regents of the Univer-
sity of CaUfomia, Berkeley, CaUf.
FUed May 27, 1982, Ser. No. 382,844
Int a.J GOIN 33/54. 33/56. 33/58; O07C 103/52
VS. a. 436-542 jg ctal^
1. An oligopeptide capable of competing with hBGP for an
antibody specific for hBGP which comprises:
an amino acid sequence of from 10 to 16 amino acids,
wherein terminal sequences of said oligopeptide include
the terminal amino acids of hBGP and up to three amino
acids can be substituted with different amino acids, except
that not more than one amino acid substitution can involve
an exchange other than Phe and Tyr or Glu and Gla.
4,438,209
RADIOIMMUNOASSAY FOR HBRINOPEPTIDE A
Larry D. Moder, St Loois, Mo., assignor to MaUinckrodt Inc..
St Louis, Mo.
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,152
Int a.3 GOIN 33/56. 33/58 33/60
UA a 436-542 11 Claims
1. In a competitive radioimmunoassay method for determin-
ing the concentration of fibrinopeptide A in plasma wherein
firat, a sample of blood is collected, the thrombin in said sample
is inhibited by an inhibiting amount of a thrombin inhibitor and
plasma is separated from said sample, and second, a sample of
said plasma is contacted under radioimmunoassay competitive
4,438,210
TRANSPARENT COLORLESS GLASS-CERAMICS
ESPECTALLY SUITABLE FOR USE AS STOVE
WINDOWS
Hermann L. Rittler, Coming. N.Y., assignor to Coming Glass
Works, Coming, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 451,283
Int a.' C03C 3/22
VS. a. 501-4 , cui„
1. A transparent, essentially colorless glass-ceramic article
containing ^-quartz solid solution as the predominant crysul
plane having a composition wherein MgO is essentially absent
and consisting essentially, expressed in terms of weight percent
on the oxide basis, of
Si02— 65-75.
Li20— 1-4,
AI2O3- 15-25,
ZnO— 0.5-2.
Na20 and/or K2O— 0-2,
Ti02— 2-6,
Zr02— 0-2,
BaO— 0-2.5,
F-0-1.2,
Fc2O3->0.01-<0.1.
4,438,211
OPTICAL AND OPHTHALMIC GLASS WITH
REFRACnVE INDICES ND>1.58. ABBE NUMBERS > 45
AND DENSITIES < 2.75 G/CM^
Karl Menneraann, Taunusstein; Gcorg GUemeroth. and VoUunar
GeUer, both of Mz. Finthen, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Schott Glaswerke, Mainz, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,401
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Gemany, Oct 2.
1981, 3139212
Int a.i C03C 3/08
VS. a. 501-65 15 ciaia,
1. A borosilicate glass composition suiuble for use as an
eyeglass lens, characterized by having a refractive index nd of
about 1.58-1.60, an Abbe number vd>50, a density pS2.75
g/cm3, and an excellent aptitude for chemical hardening, con-
sisting essentially of the foUowing composition, in weight
percent:
Si02
31-65
B2O3
2-14
AI2O3
0-3
SIOj + B2O3 + AI2O3
62-73
Li20
6-13
Ni20
(M
KjO
(M
Li20 + NtjO + K2O
7-13
c«o
1-19
MgO
0-11
CaO-t-MgO
6-22
Ti02
0-8
Z1O2
0-9.
Ti02 + Zf02 being present in an sniount lufficient to exhibit
laid refractive index. Abbe number,
and density rtnget; and
ZnO
up to 2.3
2. Glass according to claim 1, having a dennty or2.SO-2.7S
1270
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
g/cm^ and being further characterized by the following com-
position, in weight percent:
Si02
58-64
B2O3
4-9
AI2O3
0-3
Si02 + B2O3 + AI2O3
66-73
Li20
S-13
S»jQ
0-2
K2O
0-2
Li20 + Na20 + K2O
10-13.5
MgO
0-6
CaO
7-14
MgO + CaO
9-17
Ti02
1.5-7
Zr02
1-6
Ti02 + Zr02
4-8.
4,438^14
SEMICONDUCnVE CERAMIC MATERIALS WITH A
VOLTAGE-DEPENDENT NONLINEAR RESISTANCE,
AND PROCESS FOR PREPARATION
Maiarn Masuyama, Haninamachi; Susumu Hirooka, Tak«aki«
and Nobatatsu Yamaoka, Hamoamachi, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Taiyo Yoden Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed No?. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 441,219
Clainu priority, application Japan, Nov. 24, 1981, 56-189596
Int. a.3 C04B 35/46
US. a. 501-136 3 Claims
U 10
4,438,212
FLUORINE-FREE CAICIUM-ALUMINOSIUCATE
GLASSES
William D. Potter, Bishops Stortford; Andrew C. Barclay, Har-
low; Reginald Donning, Parbold near Wigan, and Richard J.
Parry, Southport, all of England, assignors to Pilkington
Brothers P.L.C., England
FUed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 392,668
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 3. 1981.
8120581
Int a.3 C03C 3/04. 12/00
U.S. a. 501-73 10 Claims
1. A fluorine-free calciumaluminosilicate glass consisting
essentially of 25 to 35% silica. 27 to 35% calcuim oxide, 25 to
40% alumina, 0 to 4% of alkali metal oxide selected from
lithium oxide, sodium oxide and potassium oxide, and 0 to 5%
of titanium oxide with a total content of lithium, sodium, potas-
sium and titanium oxides of 0.5 to 9%, and with a ratio of
calcium oxide to silica of 0.7:1 to 1.0K).7, said glass being in
particulate form in which the individual particles have a parti-
cle size of less than 100 microns.
w
1. A semiconductive ceramic material with a voltage-
dependent nonlinear resistance consisting essentially of 100
mole parts of Sr(i _jf)Ca,Ti03, where x is a numeral from
about 0.01 to about 0.50, from about 0.01 to about 3.00 mole
parts of at least one metal oxide selected from the group con-
sisting of Nb205. Ta205. WO3, U2O3. Ce02, Nd203, Y2O3.
Sm203, PreOii and Dy203, and from about 0.02 to about 2.50
mole parts of Na20.
4,438,213
MAGNETIC HEAD SUDER MATERIAL AND METHOD
FOR PRODUONG THE SAME
Mitsnhiki Furukawa; Michito Miyahara; Takashi Kitahira;
Kiyohito Misumi; Masaharu Shiroyama, all of Fukuoka, and
Toshiaki Wada, Osaka, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon
Tungsten Co., Ltd.. Fukuoka and Sumitomo Special Metals
Co., Ltd., Osaka, both of, Japan
Filed Aug. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 413,311
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 31, 1981, 56-137358
Int, a.J C04B 35/56. 35/58
VS. a. 501-92 1 Claim
4,438,215
AcnvrrY enhancement of high silica
ZEOLITES
Ralph M. Dessau, Edison, and George T. Kerr, Lawrencerille,
both of N J., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York,
FUed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,175
Int. a.3 BOIJ 29/28
VS. CL 502-71 8 claims
1. A method for enhancing the acid activity of a high silica
crystalline zeolite material having a silica-to-alumina mole
ratio greater than 100 wherein said crystalline material has
been synthesized from a reaction mixture containing tetraalk-
ylammonium ions which comprises calcining said as synthe-
sized crystalline material at a temperature of from about 200*
C. to about 600* C. for a period of time ranging from about 1
to about 48 hours, contacting said calcined crystalline material
with aluminum chloride vapor at a temperature of from about
100* C. to about 600* C, hydrolyzing said aluminum chloride
contacted crystalline material by contacting the same with
water and calcining said hydrolyzed crystalline material in
order to obtain a crystalline material having an enhanced acid
activity.
5. A crystalline zeolite material having enhanced activity
prepared by the method of claim 1, 2, 3 or 4.
fwrll*
a I 0-2 0-s
1. Magnetic head slider material consisting of 5 ~ 10 percent
by weight of silicon, 1.3~7.8 percent by weight of tungsten
sUicide and the balance being ^icon carbide.
4,438^16
PROCESS FOR IMPROVED ACITVATED CARBON
HAVING AN ALUMINUM-HEAVY METAL SPINEL
Dennis J. Kampe, Parma, and Srinivasan Sarangapani, Cleve-
land, both of Ohio, assignors to Union Carbide Corporation,
Danbury, Conn.
FUed Jon. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,988
Int. a.i HOIM 4/96. 4/88. 4/04; C25B 11/06
U.S. a. 502—101 6 Claims
1. In a method for producing an activated carbon having an
aluminum-heavy metal spinel comprising a first heat treatment
that activates carbon and/or decomposes the soluble netal salts
to their oxides or spinels, the improvement comprises the
selection of at least twice the stoichiometric amount of alumi-
num with respect to the heavy metal for the spinel.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein the amount of aluminum
is from two to four times the stoichiometric amount.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein the spinel is C0AI2O4.
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1271
4,438,217
CATALYST FOR OXIDAHON OF PROPYLENE
Masahiro Takata; Ryi^i Aokl, and Takahisa Sato, aU of Himeii,
Japan, assignors to Nippin Shokubai Kagako Kogyo Co., Ltd..
Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 454,611
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 6, 1982, 57-406
Int. a.J BOIJ 21/08. 23/78, 23/84. 23/88
VS. a 502-205 3 cui„„
1. A catalyst for the oxidation of propylene, said catalyst
having the composition represented by the following formula
M0flWi3icFerfA,B/CpAOx
wherein
A represents at least one element selected from the group
consisting of nickel and cobalt,
B represents at least one element selected from the group
consisting of alkali metals, alkaline earth metals and thal-
lium,
C represente at least one element selected from the group
consisting of phosphorus, arsenic, boron and niobium,
D represents at least one element selected from the group
consisting of silicon, aluminum and titanium,
a. b, c, d, e, f, g, h, and x respectively represent the atomic
ratios of Mo, W, Bi, Fe, A, B, C, D, and O,
a is from 2 to 12
b is from 0 to 10,
the sum of a and b is 12,
c is from 0. 1 to 10.0,
d is from 0. 1 to 10.0,
e is from 2 to 20,
f is from 0.005 to 3.0,
g is from 0 to 4,
h is from 0.5 to 15 and
X is a number determined by the atomic valences of the
individual elements,
and being molded in the shape of a hollow cylinder having an
outside diameter of 3.0 to lO.O mm, an inside diameter 0. 1 to 0.7
times the outside diameter and a length 0.5 to 2.0 times the
outside diameter.
4,438,219
ALUMINA CATALYST STABLE AT HIGH
TEMPERATURES
John T. Brandenburg, Port Neckes, Tex., and John M. Crone,
Jr., FIshkUl, N.Y., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains,
FUed Oct 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,824
., o ^ '■*• ^•' ^" ^'/02' 21/04. 21/12. 23/10
VS. CI. 50^-333 22 Claims
1. A method of preparing a catalytic article comprising the
steps of contacting a substrate and aluminum metal with an
aqueous solution of an alkali hydroxide, and an alkali aluminate
for a pcnod of time sufficient to form an adherent film of
alumina on said substrate; separating said substrate with said
adherent film of alumina from said solution; then heating said
substrate and said film of alumina under calcming conditions
until said alumina film develops a desired porosity and surface
area; and then contacting said calcined alumina fUm with a
matenal which ameliorates the reduction in surface area and
loss of structural integrity of said calcined alumina fUm during
subsequent heating.
4,438J18
CATALYST FOR SULPHUR REMOVAL FROM
HYDROCARBONS
PhiUp M. Boorman; Tristram Chivers; Donald F. Tavares, and
Kalabeerappa N. Mahadev, aU of Calgary, Canada, assignors
to Alberta OU Sands Technology and Research Authority,
Edmonton, Canada
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,843
Int a.' BOIJ 23/04. 27/04
VS. a. 502-220 8 claims
1. A process for producing a catalyst composition, compris-
ing:
slurrying together, in an aqueous solution, (a) a sulphide of a
transition metal selected from the group consisting of iron,
vanadium, molydenum, copper and mixtures thereof, (b) a
sulphide of an alkali metal selected from the group consist-
ing of sodium and potassium, and (c) a hydroxide of an
alkali metal selected from the group consisting of sodium
and potassium;
impregnating the slurry onto a catalyst support;
drying the slurry and support at an elevated temperature;
sulphiding the dried mixtures; and
heating the sulphided mixture to remove excess sulphide
therefrom.
4,438,220
POLYURETHANE FOAM-HLLED FOAM RESISTANT
TO COMBUSTION AND METHOD OF PRODUONG
SAME
Roland N. Fracalossi; Walter V. V. Greenhouse, and Michael S.
Buchanan, aU of Baltimore, Md., auignors to Wm. T. Burnett
ft Co., Inc., Baltimore, Md.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 274,726, Jun. 18, 1981, Pat No.
4,385,131. This application Aug. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 409,030
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 24
> 2000, has been disclaimed.
Int a.} C08G 18/14
UA a 521-55 9 Claim,
1. A combustion-retardant polyurethanc foam structure
obtained through the steps of (a) obtaining particles of flexible
polyurethanc foam; (b) admixing said particles of (a) with solid
combustion-retardant material; (c) uniformly applying to said
admixture of (b) a liquid flexible polyurethanc foam-forming
material containing a reactive polyol and a polyisocyanate; (d)
foaming said foam-forming material (c) with water to provide
a flexible foam having bonded therein said polyurethanc foam
particles and said solid combustion-reUrdant material; the
relative amounts of materials in said foam structure being such
that for each 100 parts by weight of polyurethanc foam parti-
cles, about 100 to 200 parts by weight of said combustion-
retardant material and about 30 to 75 parts by weight of said
foam-forming material are used.
4,438,221
POLYURETHANE FOAM-HLLED FOAMS AND
METHOD OF PRODUCING SAME
Roland N. Fracalossi; Walter V. V. Greenhouse, and Michael S.
Buchanan, all of Baltimore, Md., assignors to Wm. T. Boraett
* Co., Inc., Baltimore, Md.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 274,726, Jua. 18, 1981, Pat No.
4,385,131, and Ser. No. 409,030, Aug. 18, 1982. This appUcation
May 23, 1983, Ser. No. 497,034
The portion of the term of this patent sabseqoeat to May 24,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 C06G 18/14
VS. a. 521-55 IS oalrns
1. A foam-filled polyurethanc foam structure obtained
through the steps of
(a) obtaining particles of flexible polyurethanc foam;
(b) admixing said particles of (a) with a solid material;
(c) uniformly applying to said admixture of (b) a Uquid
flexible polyurethanc foam-forming material containing a
reactive polyol and a polyisocyanate;
(d) foaming said foam-forming material of (c) with water to
1272
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
provide a flexible foam having bonded therein said poly-
urethane foam particles and said solid material;
the relative amounts of materials in said foam structure being
such that for each 100 parts by weight of polyurethane foam
particles, about 40 to 200 parts by weight of solid material and
about 30 to 75 parts by weight of foam-forming material are
used, said solid material being inert to said foam and foam-
forming material.
4,438,222
HEAT RESISTANT EXPANDABLE PLASTIC PARTICLES
AND MOLDED ARTICLES PRODUCED THEREFROM
Masao Nakagawa, Takasago, and Tatehiko Nishida, Ibaraki,
both of Japan, assignors to Kanegafuchi Chemical Industry
Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 299,201, Sep. 3, 1981, abandoned. This
application Jan. 14, 1983, Ser. No. 458,053
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 13, 1980, 55-127624
Int a.J C08J 9/J8
U.S. a. 521—60 5 Claims
'ZZ7
Z
1. A process for producing heat resistant, expandable plastic
particles, which comprises subjecting a mixture containing
15-55 weight % of an a-alkylstyrene selected from the group
consisting of a-methystyrene, a-ethylstyrene, a-n-propylsty-
rene and a-iso-propylstyrene and 45-85 weight % of another
monomer polymerizable with the a-alkylstyrene, to emulsion
pxjlymerization in an aqueous medium in the presence of an
emulsifying agent and a radical polymerization catalyst to
obtain a polymer latex; separating and drying the polymer
latex to obtain a powdery polymer; pelletizing the powdery
polymer; and incorporating 3-15 weight % of a volatile blow-
ing agent in the polymer pellets.
4,438,223
BLOWING AGENT COMPOSITION CONTAINING ZINC
FORMATE AND METAL SALT ACTIVATOR
Byron A. Hunter, Alpine, Utah, assignor to Uniroyal, Inc., New
York, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 524,945
Int. a.3 C08J 9/08
VS. a 521-92 2 Claims
1. A composition comprising a gas expandable polymer and
a blowing agent composition comprising :
(a) zinc formate, and
(b) a compound having the formula MmX, wherein M is
sodium or potassium; X is chlorine, bromine, iodine, CO3,
HCO3. SO4. SO3. S2O3, NO2, SCN, OCN, BO2, HBO3,
HPO4, PO4 or H2PO4, and m is an integer representing the
valence of X; or a compound having the formula M„' Kp,
wherein M' is alkali metal, calcium, lead or zinc, R is
organic mono- or polybasic acid having 1-18 carbon atoms
and from 0 to 2 nitrogen atoms, or a benzenesulfonyl or
toluenesulfonyl radical; and n and p are integers represent-
ing the valences of R and M', respectively or whole frac-
tions thereof.
4,438,224
METHOD FOR THE PREPARATION OF STYRENE
POLYMER FOAM AND FOAM PREPARED THEREBY
Kyung W. Suh, Granville; David C. Krueger, Reynoldsburg, and
Burch E. Zehner, Pataskala, all of Ohio, assignors to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 426,414, Sep. 29, 1982. This application
Aug. 15, 1983, Ser. No. 523,216
Int. a.3 C08J 9/14
U.S. a. 521—146 1 Claim
1. A synthetic resinous thermoplastic foam prepared in ac-
cordance with the hereinbefore described method wherein an
alkenyl aromatic thermoplastic synthetic resinous elongate
foam body having a machine direction and a transverse direc-
tion, the body deflning a plurality of closed noninterconnect-
ing gas-containing cells therein, the cells having an average
cell size of from about 0.1 to 1.2 millimeters, the foam body
being of a generally uniform cellular structure and being with-
out discontinuities, the body being without substantial varia-
tion in average cell size when cell size is measured by averag-
ing cell diameter across the minimum cross-sectional dimen-
sion of the body (i.e., such as by ASTM Method D2842-69),
the elongate body having a cross-sectional area of at least 8
sqiiare inches and having a minimum cross-sectional dimension
of at least 0.25 inch, the foam body having a water vapor
permeability not greater than 1.8 perm inches as measured by
ASTM Method C355-64 Procedures for Desiccant method, a
density of from about 1 to about 5 pounds per cubic foot with
the further limitation that the cells contain a blowing agent
which has a permeability through the alkenyl aromatic resin-
ous polymer of not greater than 0.017 times the permeability of
nitrogen through the body, a Ci to C3 monohydric alcohol and
the blowing agent having a thermal conductivity of 0.08 Brit-
ish thermal units-inch per hour per square foot per degree
Fahrenheit, wherein the foam is prepared by extrusion employ-
ing a blowing agent selected from the group consisting of
(1) a mixture of from about 5 to 20 weight percent isopropyl
alcohol, from about 5 to 50 percent chlorodifluorome-
thane, and from about 30 to 70 percent dichlorodifluoro-
methane;
(2) a mixture of from about 5 to 50 percent of an ethanol.
methanol or mixtures thereof, from about 5 to 50 percent
of chlorodifluoromethane, and about 30 to 70 percent
dichlorodifluoromethane;
and mixtures thereof, all percentages being by weight.
4,438,225
POLYESTER POLYOLS FROM BISHYDROXYMETHYL
TRICYCLO COMPOUNDS AND CAPROLACTONE AND
POLYURETHANES BASED THEREON
Dwight Peerman, Minnetonka, Minn., assignor to Henkel Cor-
poration, Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed Apr. 12, 1983, Ser. No. 484,320
Int. a.3 C08G J8/14. 18/32; C07C 69/66
U.S. a. 521—172 15 Claims
1. Polyester polyols formed by the reaction of a bishydrox-
ymethyl tricyclo compound of the formulae:
HO CH2— [- \ I -]-CH20H
HO CUt'^^^ly^
and alkoxylated derivatives thereof with a caprolactone in a
March 20. 1984
CHEMICAL
1273
molar ratio of bishydroxymethyl tricyclo compound to ca-
prolactone between about 1:1 and 1:20.
7. Urethane linked reaction products derived from at least
one polyester polyol of claim 1 and at least one polyisocyanate.
4,438,226
POLYURETHANES DERIVED FROM 1,4-LACrONES OF
3,6-ANHYDRO-2,3,4,5,6.PENTAHYDROXYHEXANOIC
AQD
StoU K. DirUkov, and Connie J. Schneider, both of Midland,
Mich., auignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
Mich.
FUed Apr. 22, 1983, Ser. No. 487,475
Int. a.5 C08G 18/14. 18/32, 18/64
U.S. a. 521—175 17 Oaims
1. A polyurethane comprising the reaction product of
(a) a 1,4-lactone of 3,6-anhydropentahydroxyhexanoic acid;
and
(b) an organic polyisocyanate.
7. A polyurethane which corresponds to the formula.
C
I
CHO
I
•CH
n J
I CH '
O
l:
CHO-
I
■CH2
O O
II II
■CNH— R— NHC-
I
R^Jr J
-R2
wherein
R is a 2+c valent hydrocarbyl radical;
R> is H or
O
II
— CNH— RNCO;
R2i
IS
?
C-
I
CHOH
I O or
•CH
J
I CH
O I
LCHO—
I
CH2
R' is separately in each occurrence — N=C=0 or
O
II
C
I
CHO
I
•CH
I CH '
O I
LCHO
I
CH2
o o
II II
-CNH— R— NHC-
I
R^Jr J
•R2
c is between about 0 and 8; and
n is between about 1 and 50,000.
4438 227
COMPOSITION AND METHOD OF MASKING
James B. Nail, San Diego, and Jeffery J. King, Orange, both of
Calif., assignors to Ronald Jay Braharas, San Diego, Calif.
FUed Oct. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 432,451
Int a.5 C08L 1/18; B05D 1/32. 5/00
U.S. a. 524-33 16 Gaims
1. In the manufacture of an electrical or electronic compo-
nent which includes the application of a varnish or other insu-
lating and sealing compound to the surface of said component
by either dipping, brushing or spraying method, a process, for
preventing the adhesion of said compound to certain areas of
said component and for conditioning them for good electrical
contact, which comprises:
prior to said application, contacting said areas with a mask-
ing hydrophobic mixture comprising essentially:
a volatile organic solvent sufficient to solvate the mixture;
nitrocellulose;
a formaldehyde based resin, and
a phosphate fire retardant;
applying said compound to said surface;
curing said compound and carbonizing said mixture by
heating said component to at least 93* C; and
brushing away said carbonized mixture and overlying com-
pound from said areas.
4 438 228
nLLED AND PLASTiaZED BLENDS OF LINEAR LOW
DENSITY POLYETHYLENE
Timothy T. Schenck, Wilmington, Del., auignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours and Company, WUmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 176,783, Aug. 11, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,418
Int. a.i B32B 27/30; C08L 23/08. 23/16
U.S. a. 524—109 76 Claims
1. A composition consisting essentially of (a) from about 5 to
about 55% by weight of at least one copolymer of ethylene
with at least one a-olefin comonomer said comonomer con-
taining from 4 to 10 carbon atoms, the ethylene content of said
copolymer being from about 75 to about 98% by weight, the
comonomer content of said copolymer being from about 2 to
about 25% by weight, and the melt index of said copolymer
being from about 0.1 to about 150; (b) from about 2 to about
12% by weight of at least one plasticizer selected from the
group consisting of processing oils, epoxidized oils, polyesters,
polyethers and polyether esters; and (c) from about 40 to about
90% by weight of filler.
1040 O.G.-^8
4,438,229
THERMOPLASTIC COMPOSITION
Yoshitugu FHJimori, Tokorozawa; Yasuo Takabori, Shiki;
HiUine Sakano, Hirakata, and Akitoshi Ito, Nabari, all of
Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Naugatuck Co., Ltd., Osaka
and Honda Motor Co., Ltd., Tokyo, both of, Japan
FUed Sep. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 415,870
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 9, 1981, 56-143076;
Nov. 12, 1981, 56-182127
Int. a.3 C08L 69/00
U.S. a. 524—109 7 Claims
1. A thermoplastic composition having improved weld
strength which comprises a blend essentially consisting of:
(A) 20 to 80% by weight based on the weight of A and B of
a thermoplastic polycarbonate resin;
(B) 80 to 20% by weight based on the weight of A and B of
a graft polymer obtained by grafting at least one aromatic
vinyl compound and at least one member of the group
consisting of vinyl cyanides and alkyl unsaturated carbox-
ylates onto a conjugated diene rubber or a mixture of a
conjugated diene rubber with a copolymer of at least one
1274
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
aromatic vinyl compound and at least one member of the
group consisting of vinyl cyanides and alkyl unsaturated
carboxylates, the copolymer being present in an amount of
not more than 90% by weight on the basis of the com-
bined amount of the graft polymer and the copolymer; and
i
,W,^/^^^^.>>^^,,,,-^^^
(C) a polyolefln or a plasticizer having a light transmission of
not less than 70% when determined on a 20 micron film
prepared from a solution of the plasticizer (0.25 g) and
acrylonitrile-styrene copolymer (weight ratio of acryloni-
trile and styrene, 30:70; 0.75 g) in acetone (10 ml), the
weight proportion of the blend, (A)+(B), and the polyole-
fln or the plasticizer (C) being 100:0.2-20.
4,438,230
CARBOXYLATED NITRILE RUBBER/PVC/NYLON
FLUX BLENDS
Herbert F. Schwarz, Samia, Canada, assignor to Polysar Lim*
ited, Ontario, Canada
FUed Not. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 444,975
Int a^ C08K 5/37; C08L 27/06, 33/18. 77/00
MS. a 524-151 21 Claims
1. A vulcanizable polymer composition comprising a poly-
mer blend and a curative system, said polymer blend being a
flux blend of (i) from about 5 to about 50 parts by weight of
polyvinyl chloride, (ii) from about 35 to about 75 parts by
weight of a carboxylated nitrile rubber, (iii) from about 5 to
about 50 parts by weight of a nylon having a melting point of
less than about 210' C, the total of (i), (u) and (iii) being 100
parts by weight, (iv) from about 1.5 to about 4 parts by total
weight of one or more stabilizers for (i), and (v) from about
0.25 to about 3 parts by total weight of one or more antioxi-
dants for (ii), said parts of (iv) and (v) being per 100 parts total
of (i), (ii) and (iii).
4,438,232
CARBOXYLATED ACRYLATE STYRENE BUTADIENE
ADHESIVES
Ivan S. Lee, Brights GroTe, Canada, assignor to Polysar Lim-
ited, Ontario, Canada
FUed Aug. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 406,888
Int. a.3 C08L 93/00. 9/08
VJS. a. 524-272 15 Qaims
1. A pressure sensitive adhesive composition comprising the
latex of a polymer formed by polymerizing:
(a) from about 40 to about 10 weight percent of a vinyl or
vinylidene monoaromatic monomer which may be unsub-
stituted or substituted by a Cm alkyl radical or a chlorine
or bromine atom;
(b) from about 45 to about 70 weight percent of a C4.4 conju-
gated diene;
(c) from about 1 to about 5 weight percent of a Ca^ethyleni-
cally unsaturated mono- or di-carboxylic acid or a mixture
thereof; and
(d) from about 5 to about 30 weight percent of a Ci-g alkyl
ester of acrylic or methacrylic acid; wherein the total of
(a), (b), (c) and (d) is 100 weight percent.
13. A substrate coated with from about 15 to about 60 g/m^
of a pressure sensitive adhesive composition comprising a
polymer formed by polymerizing:
(a) from about 40 to about 10 weight percent of a vinyl or
vinylidene monoaromatic monomer which may be unsub-
stituted or substituted by a Cm alkyl radical or a chlorine
or bromine atom;
(b) from about 45 to about 70 weight percent of a C4.6 conju-
gated diene;
(c) from about 1 to about 5 weight percent of a Cs^ethyleni-
cally unsaturated mono- or di-carboxylic acid or a mixture
thereof; and
(d) from about 5 to about 30 weight percent of a Ci.g alkyl
ester of acrylic or methacrylic acid; wherein the total of
(a), (b), (c) and (d) is 100 weight percent.
4,438,231
HIGH IMPACT STRENGTH, FLAME RETARDANT
POLYCARBONATE COMPOSITION
Ping Y. Lio, NaperriUe, lU., assignor to General Electric Com-
pany, Mt. Vernon, Ind.
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,948
Int a.3 C08K 5/42: C08L 51/06. 69/00
VS. a. 524-161 11 caalms
1. A flame retardant molding composition which comprises:
(a) from about 70 to 85 parts by weight of a high molecular
weight polycarbonate resin;
(b) from about 10 to 30 parts by weight of a copolycarbonate
of tetrabromobisphenol-A and bisphenol-A;
(c) from about 1 to 5 parts by weight of a multiphase com-
posite interpolymer comprising an acrylate and a methac-
rylate;
(d) from about 0.5 to 5 parts by weight of a copolymer of a
C2.3 olefin and a C1-3 acrylate;
and
(e) an effective amount of a flame retardant alkali metal salt.
4,438,233
FAST CRYSTALLIZING
POLYALKYLENETEREPHTHALATE RESIN
COMPOSITIONS
Chung J. Lee, Sheboygan, Wis., assignor to Plastics Engineering
Company, Sheboygan, Wis.
FUed Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,570
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 21,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.J C08L 67/02
U.S. a. 524—299 16 Claims
1. A fast crystallizing molding composition comprising es-
sentially:
a. a polyalkyleneterephthalate in which the alkylene group
has 2-4 carbon atoms;
b. a complex of LiX and a polymeric compound having at
least two recurring units having the formula — CH2C-
H2O — , the amount of said complex being enough to give
a proportion of 0.05-4 percent by weight of LiX based on
the weight of said polyalkyleneterephthalate, wherein X is
Br, CI or I.
4,438,234
COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING A THERMOPLASTIC
RESIN AND A VINYL ETHER MOLD RELEASE AGENT
NUes R. Rosenquist, ETsnsriUe, and Garland G. Lee, Mt. Ver-
non, both of Ind., assignors to General Electric Company, Mt
Vernon, Ind.
FUed Dec. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 449,983
Int a.3 O08L 69/00
VS. a. 524—378 18 CiaiBn
1. A composition which consists essentiaUy of a thermoplas-
tic resin selected from the group consisting of aromatic poly-
carbonates, polyesters, polysulfones, polyethersulfones, poly-
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1275
amides, polysulfldes, polyacrylates, polyurethanes, polyole-
flns, polyvinylhalides, acrylonitrile butadiene styrenes, butadi-
ene styrenes and methacrylate butadiene styrenes and a mold
release effective amount of a vinyl ether of the formula
R-O— CH2=CH2
wherein R is alkyl of about 14 to about 36 carbon atoms, inclu-
sive.
4438,235
TERTIARY ALKANOLAMINES TO INCREASE
VISCOSITY OF nLLED LIQUID POLYMERS
Bemardu Brizgys, Southgate, Mich., assignor to BASF Wyan-
dotte Corporation, Wyandotte, Mich.
FUed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,153
Int a.' C08L 75/08 ^
VS. a. 524—700 12 Claims
1. A fllled liquid polymer comp>osition comprising a liquid
polymer having a molecular weight of about 100 to about 2000
and containing at least two active hydrogen atoms as deter-
mined by the Zerewitinoff Method, an inorganic filler, selected
from the group consisting of calcium carbonate, hydrated
aluminum silicate, hydrated magnesium silicate and titanium
dioxide, said inorganic filler present in the amount of about 5
percent by weight to about 50 percent by weight, based on the
weight of said liquid polymer and a tertiary alkanolamine
having in each chain 2 to about 8 carbon atoms, wherein said
tertiary alkanolamine is selected from the group consisting of
alkyl dialkanolamine, dialkyl alkanolamine and trialkanola-
mine, said teniary amine present in the amount of 0. 1 percent
to about 2 percent by weight based on the weight of said
inorganic filler.
4,438,236
COMPOSITIONS OF MELT-PROCESSABLE POLYMERS
HAVING IMPROVED PROCESSABILITY
Frederic N. Cogswell, Welwyn Garden aty; Brian P. Griffin, St
Albans, and John B. Rose, Letchworth, all of England, assign-
ors to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC, London, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 207,708, Nov. 17, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,386,174. This appUcation Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,462
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Nov. 30, 1979,
7941364; Nov. 30, 1979, 7941365
Int. a.3 CD8L J/08; C08G 18/00. 59/19. 83/00
VS. a. 525—165 10 Qaims
1. A melt-processable polymer composition comprising from
0.5 to 5.0% by weight of the composition of at least one poly-
mer capable of forming an anisotropic melt and at least one
other melt-processable polymer characterised in that the tem-
perature range over which the polymer can form an aniso-
tropic melt and the temperature range over which the melt-
processable polymer may be melt processed overlap, with the
proviso that the other melt-processable polymer may not be-
come melt processable until blended with the anisotropic-melt-
forming polymer.
4,438,237
THERMOPLASnC MOLDING MASSES OP
STYRENE-ACRYLONTTRILE AND POLY AMIDE
Franz Brandstetter, Neustadt; Juergen Hambrecbt Heidelberg;
Rudolf H. Jung, Worms, and Gerhard Lindcnschmidt Lei-
men, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Aktien-
geseUscbaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,648
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 17,
1981, 3105653
Int a.' C08L 77/00
VS. a. 525—183 6 Claims
1. A thermoplastic molding mass comprising, based on a 100
parts of (a) -I- (b):
(a) 95 parts by weight to 99 parts by weight of a copolymer
of styrene and/or a-methylstyrene with acrylonitrile
wherein the copolymers contain 25 percent by weight to
35 percent by weight of acrylonitrile in polymerized form,
(b) 1 part by weight to 5 parts by weight of a polyamide
made from
(1) 8 percent by weight to 13 percent by weight of adipic
acid/hexamethylene diamine salts and
(2) 92 percent by weight to 87 percent by weight of a salt
of piperazine and a mixture of decane dicarboxylic acids
and azelaic acids in a mole ratio of 80:20 to 92:8.
4,438,238
LOW DENSITY COPOLYMER COMPOSITION OF TWO
ETHYLENE-a-OLEnN COPOLYMERS
Nobuo Fukushima, OoUu; Shuji Kitamura, Ibarakl; KiyohUco
Nakae, Nishinomiya; Tadatoshi Ogawa, Takatsuki; Koeo
Kotani, and Hidckazu Hosono, both of Toyonaka, all of Ja-
pan, assignors to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,428
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 30, 1981, 56-14038;
Jan. 30, 1981, 56-14039; Jan. 30, 1981, 56-14040; Jan. 30, 1981,
56-14041; Jan. 30, 1981, 56-14042; Jan. 30, 1981, 56-14043; Jan.
30, 1981, 56-14044
Int. a.^ C08F 297/08: C08L 23/06. 23/08
U.S. a. 525—240 23 Claims
1. An ethylene-a-olefin copolymer composition excellent in
transparency and strength and having a density of 0.915 to
0.929 g/cm^, a melt index of 0.02 to 50 g/10 min. and a melt
flow ratio of 35 to 250, which comprises 10 to 70% by weight
of an ethylene-a-olefin copolymer A and 90 to 30% by weight
of an ethylene-a-olefin copolymer B; said copolymer A having
a higher molecular weight than copolymer B and being a
copolymer of ethylene and an a-olefin of 3 to 18 carbon atoms
and having a density of 0.895 to 0.935 g/cm^ an intrinsic
viscosity of 1.2 to 6.0 dl/g, the number of short chain branch-
ing per 1000 carbon atoms (hereinafter abbreviated as
"S.C.B.") of 7 to 40 and a (weight average molecular weight)/-
(number average molecular weight) value of 2 to 10; said
copolymer B being a copolymer of ethylene and an a-olefin of
3 to 18 carbon atoms and having a density of 0.910 to 0.955
g/cm^, an intrinsic viscosity of 0.3 to 1.5 dl/g, S.C.B. of 5 to 35
and a (weight average molecular weight)/(number average
molecular weight) value of 2 to 10; said copolymer A and said
copolymer B being selected in order to satisfy a condition that
(S.C.B. of said copolymer A)/(S.C.B. of said copolymer B) is
0.6 to 1.7.
14. A composition of copolymers of ethylene and an a-olefin
of 3 to 18 carbon atoms, having first and second component
groups, said first component group having a higher molecular
weight than said second component group, having the follow-
ing properties:
(1) density of 0.915 to 0.929 g/cm^
(2) intrinsic viscosity [tj] of 0.7 to 4.0 dl/g,
(3) melt index of 0.02 to 50 g/IO min.,
(4) S.C.B. being 5 to 45,
(5) W/N/ namely g,,* being at least 0.8, where [ij]/ is an
intrinsic viscosity of a linear polyethylene having the same
weight average molecular weight measured by a light
scattering method,
(6) (S.C.B. of the first component group)/(S.C.B. of the
second component group) being 0.6 to 0.8 where the two
component groups are prepared by consolidating frac-
tions obtained by column fractionation in two portions of
lower and higher molecular weight components, said
portions being selected so that the weight ratio of the two
portions corresponds to the weight ratio of lower and
higher molecular weight components calculated from the
gel permeation chromotography curve,
(7) the second components have a density of 0.910 to 0.9SS
g/cva}, an intrinsic viscosity of 0.3 to 1. 5 dl/g and S.C.B.
of 5 to 35,
(8) the first componenu have a density of 0.895 to 0.933
1276
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
-^cm', an intrinsic viscosity of 1.2 to 6.0 dl/g and S.C.B.
olFs^to 40, and
(9) the second components are 30 to 90% by weight and the
first components are 70 to 10% by weight.
(a) at least one aromatic dicarboxylic acid or a reactive
derivative thereof; and
(b) at least one dihydric phenol represented by the general
formula
4,438,239
MICROSPHERE COATED SUBSTRATE CONTAINING
REACTIVE ALDEHYDE GROUPS
Alan Rembauin, Pasadena, and Richard C. K. Yen, Glendale,
both of Calif., assignors to California Institute of TechnoloEy,
Pasadena, Calif.
FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,898
Int. a.3 C07G 7/00: C12N ;;/0&- B05D 3/06; C08F 16/34
U.S. a. 525-54.1 9 claims
1. A coated article comprising:
a synthetic organic resin substrate, said resin being capable
of developing covalent bonds during high energy radia-
tion;
a continuous layer of contiguous, tangential, individual mi-
crospheres having an uniform diameter between 100 Ang-
stroms and 2000 Angstroms bound to the surface of the
substrate by covalent bonds formed between the resin and
the microspheres by means of high energy radiation graft-
ing of the microspheres to the surface of the resin sub-
strate, said microspheres consisting essentially of the addi-
tion polymerized polymer of an unsaturated aldehyde
containing 4 to 20 carbon atoms.
8. A composition comprising an adduct of the article of
claim 1 with a material selected from aldehyde reactive prote-
ins, pharmaceuticals and fluorescent chromophores.
4 438,240
POLYAMIDE ELASTOMER
Chiaki Tanaka, Chita; Shinobu Nakashima, Nagoya, and
Makoto Kondow, Konan, all of Japan, assignors to Toray
Industries, Incorporated, Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 25, 1983, Ser. No. 497,864
Claims priority, application Japan, May 27, 1982, 57<90212
lat a.3 C08F 2%3/04: C08G 69/4%; C08L 77/00
U.S. a. 525-420 20 Claims
1. A polyether-ester-amide consisting essentially of about 5
to 50 weight percent of polyamide segment (A) and about 95 to
50 weight percent of poiyether ester segment (B), and having
a melting point not lower than 160* C, a Shore hardness in the
range of 80A to 45D, a tensile modulus in the range of 100 to
1,000 kg/cm2 and an elastic recovery at 50% elongation of not
less than 70%,
said polyamide segment (A) having been obtained from:
a C6-C20 aliphatic diamine (A-1): and
at least one dicarboxylic acid (A-2) selected from the
group consisting of C6-C13 aliphatic dicarboxylic acids,
terephthalic acid and hexahydroterephthalic acid, pro-
vided the total number of carbon atoms of said diamine
and said dicarboxylic acid is not less than 16,
said poiyether ester segment (B) having been obtained fronj:
a poly(alkylene oxide) glycol (B-1) having a ratio of car-
bon atom number to oxygen atom number of not
smaller than 2.3 and having a number average molecu-
lar weight in the range of 300 to 5,000; and
a C4-C20 dicarboxylic acid (B-2).
wherein:
R is independently selected from halogen radicals, monova-
lent hydrocarbon radicals, and monovalent hydrocar-
bonoxy radicals;
R' is independently selected from monovalent hydrocarbon
radicals;
X is selected from cycloalkylidene radicals containing from
at least 8 to about 16 ring carbon atoms;
n is independently selected from whole numbers having a
value of from 0 to 4 inclusive; and
m represents a whole number having a value of from 0 up to
the number of replaceable hydrogen atoms present on X.
4,438,242
RETARDATION OF POLYMER BUILDUP IN
MONOVINYL AROMATIC SUSPENSION
POLYMERIZATION USING SULFUR TRIOXIDE AS
REACTOR COATING
William J. Scttineri, and John M. Hensler, botii of Midland,
Mich., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
Mich.
FUed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,264
Int a.3 C08J 9/26, 9/28
U.S. a. 526-62 7 ciu^
1. In suspension polymerization of monovinyl aromatic-
polymers in a reactor wherein polymer buildup occurs on the
internal surfaces of the reactor, the improvement which com-
prises contacting the internal surfaces of the reactor with at
least about 0.01 gram of sulfur trioxide per gallon of reactor
volume prior to said suspension polymerization, whereby
further polymer buildup is retarded.
4,438,241
HEAT RESISTANT POLYARYLATES
Victor Mark, Evansrille, and Charles V. Hedges, Mt. Vernon,
botii of lad., assignors to General Electric Company, Mt.
VemoB, Ind.
FUed Dec 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453,106
Int a.J C08G 63/18. 63/66. 63/68
UA a. 525-444 32 Claims
1. Polyarylate compositions exhibiting improved heat resis-
tance comprised of (i) at least one polyarylate prepared by
reacting:
4438,243
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING RANDOM ETHYLENE
TERPOLYMER
Norio Kashiwa; Yoshinori Morita, and Michihani Suga, all of
Iwakuni, Japan, assignors to Mitsui Petrochemical Industries,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 85,584, Oct 17, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,721
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct 18, 1978, 53-127305
Int a.3 C08F 2/06. 10/02
U.S. a. 526—125 10 Claims
1. A process for producing a random terpolymer of ethylene
and alpha-olefins having at least 3 carbon atoms in the presence
of a catalyst composed of (1) a titanium catalyst component
having a surface area of at least 20 m Vg and comprising from
0.5 to 10 parts by weight of titanium, 15 to 30 parts by weight
of magnesium, 50 to 70 parts by weight of halogen and. option-
ally, about 0.1 to 50 parts by weight of an electron donor; said
titanium catalyst component having a halogen/titanium weight
ratio of from 3 to 200, and a magnesium/titanium mole ratio of
from 3 to 90 and a surface area of at least 20 m Vg and (2) an
organoaluminum catalyst component in a hydrocarbon solvent
at a temperature above the melting point of the terpolymer
formed, under such conditions that the resulting copolymer
dissolves in the hydrocarbon solvent; characterized in that said
terpolymer consists essentially of
(A) 92 mole% to 99 mole% of ethylene,
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1277
(B) 0.3 mole% to 7 mole% of an alpha-olefin with 3 or 4
carbon atoms, and
(C) 0.3 mole% to 7 mole% of an alpha-olefin with 6 to 12
carbon atoms, the total of the proportions of the mono-
mers (A), (B), and (C) being 100 mole%.
4438,244
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF POLYMERS AND
COPOLYMERS OF VINYL CHLORIDE
Gilbert Sielfeld, and Paul Sunder-Planmann, botii of Marl, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Chemische Werke Huels, AG,
Marl, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,608
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 22,
1981, 3120358
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 11,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.J C08F 2/20. 14/06
U.S. a. 526—202 11 aaims
1. In a process for preparing a polymer or copolymer of
vinyl chloride by suspension polymerization using a suspension
stabilizer and a monomer-soluble free radical catalyst, the
improvement wherein the suspension stabilizer is 0.1-0.5% by
weight, based on the amount of monomer, of a copolymer of
65-85 molar percent of 2-isopropyl-A2-oxazoiine and 35-15
molar percent of 2-methyl-A^-oxazoline, having a viscosity
number of 35-80 ml/g, measured at 25* C. in an isopropanol/-
water mixture (50 volume percent of isopropanol) in a concen-
tration of 0.5% (weight/volume of solution).
4,438,245
POLYMERS CONTAINING AROMATIC SULFONIC
ACID ESTER OR AMIDE GROUPS
Masato Satomura, Saitama, Japan, assignor to Fuji Photo Film
Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Oct. 16, 1973, Ser. No. 407,034
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 18, 1972, 47-103550
Int. a.3 C08F 12/30. 16/30 20/50 28/04
U.S. a. 526—286 19 Claims
1. A functional group containing homopolymer or copoly-
mer having aromatic sulfonic acid ester or amido groups, said
homopolymer or copolymer containing therein monomer units
of the general formula
I
R1SO2XR2OC— R3
CH2
I
R1SO2XR4OCO— C— R
CH2
R9 tJ
R2is
-f CH^irf CH2lf . -f CH^»rf CH:^. -CH2CH2-fOCH2CH2l)r.
CH3 CH2CI
-CH2CH2-fSCH2CH2^.
-^CH^rtCH2^0— / \-fCH2l)r.
CH3 \^^
...Z^.
or -f CH2^r-^ -J-(CHiin,
I
R3 is a hydrogen atom or a methyl group;
R4is
-CH2CH2-. -CH2CH2CH2- -CH2CH- -CH2CH-.
CH2CI CH3
-CH2CH2(OCH2CH2), -CH2-CH- or
C2H$
-CH2CH-tOCH2CH1)r;
CH3 CH3
Rs is — CH2)m;
m is 0 or 1;
n is 1, 2, 3 or 4;
X is — O— , — S— , — NH— or — NRi&— ;
Rg is a hydrogen atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, a
fluorine atom H— CH2)« H— CH2)«0— , a nitro group, a
sulfo group or a carboxy group; and
R9 is a hydrogen atom, a bromine atom, a fluorine atom, a
chlorine atom, H— CH2)«, H— CH2))iO— , a nitro group, a
sulfo group, a carboxy group, a cyano group, a phenyl
group, an acetyl group, a phenoxy group, or a benzoyl
group; and
Riois
R1SO2XR5— / \-C-R3
\— ■/ CH2
wherein
Riis
H-tCH2ljr or
o--
and in the case of said copolymer, polymerized units of unsatu-
rated comonomer copolymerizable with said monomer.
1278
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4 438 246
4.VINYL.2.METHYLENE BUTANEDIOIC ACID
COMPOUNDS
Rodney D. Bush, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to The Procter A
Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
DiTision of Ser. No. 290,907, Aug. 7, 1981. This application May
27, 1983, Ser. No. 499,052
Int. a.' C08F 20/42
VS. a. 52<J-298 5 ciai,„
4. A polymer prepared by the free radical polymerization of
a compound selected from the group consisting of
.|..^^oR ^^^^nc; wc=n
wherein R is selected from H, C1-C18 alkyl, substituted alkyl,
ary] or substituted aryl.
gano-mercuric compound per part of alkali metal carboxylic
acid salt.
4,438,249
BIODEGRADABLE POLYURETHANE UREA ACYL
SEMICARBAZIDES FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
BIODEGRADABLE ALLOIMPLANK
Tatyana E. Lipatova, ulitsa Rozy Luxemburg, 15. k». 14;
Dmitry V. VasUchenko, ulitsa Seraflmovioha, 7. kv. 26; Ge-
orgy A. Pkhakadze, ulitsa Vladimirskaya, 48a. k?. 16, and
Xenya L. Konoplitskaya, ulitsa Florentsii 10« kv. 102. all of
Kiev, U.S.S.R.
Continuation of Ser. No. 252,552, Apr. 9, 1981, abandoned. This
application Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,429
Int. a.J C08G 18/ JO. 18/38
UA a. 528-61 2aai«s
1. Polyurelhane urea acyl semicarbazides for preparing
biodegradable alloimplants having the general formula- (— N-
H-R1-CONHNHCONH-R2-NHCO-O-R3-CON-
H-R2-NH-CO-)„
Rl is selected from the group consisting of
4,438,247
PREPARATION OF REGIOREGULAR
POLYFLUOROETHYLENES AND PRODUCTS
THEREOF
Rudolf E. Cais, Long VaUey, N J., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
FUed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,297
Int. a.3 C08F 8/00, 8/26, 14/18. 14/22
UA a. 526-249 18 Qaims
1. A process useful for forming regioregular polymers com-
prising the steps of (1) polymerizing by a free-radical reaction,
a fluoroethylene monomer having a chemically bonded block-
mg substituent comprising at least one blocking group to pro-
duce a precursor polymer and (2) replacing said blocking
substituent which is chemically incorporated in said precursor
polymer with hydrogen atoms, wherein (a) said blocking sub-
stituent stabilizes the free-radical formed during said free-radi-
cal reaction on said monomer, and (b) blocks bond formation
during said polymerization between carbon atoms having said
blocking substituent.
15. A regioregular polyfluoroethylene polymer comprising a
polyfluoroethylene having asymmetric building blocks
wherein less than 3 percent of said building blocks are in a
spatial orientation that differs from the orientation of the ma-
jority of said building blocks comprising said polyfluoroethy-
lene wherein the substituents on said polyfluoroethylene con-
sist essentially of atoms chosen from the group consisting of
hydrogen and fluorine.
_CH-.-CH-. -CH- .-CH- .
CH3 CH2C6HJ. CH2CX:OCH3 CH2OH
-CH- ,-CH- .-CH- .
CH2CH(CH3)2 CH2C6H4OH (CH2)2SCH3
-CH2-CO-NH-CH2-. -CH-CO-NH-CH- .
I I
CH2C6H5 CH2C6HJ
-CH-CO-NH-CH-. -CH-CO-NH-CH2-.
CH3 CH3 CH2C6H5
— CH— CO— NH— CH—
I I
CH2C6HJ CH2OCOCH3
-CH-CO-NH-CH-CO-NH-CH2-
CH3 CH2C6H3
wherein n is from 5 to 24 R2 is selected from the group consist-
ing of — (CH2)6-, -C6H4— CH2— C6H4;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of — (CH2
)4-0- 14. -(CH2)4-0-2 1 .
4 438J48
TRIMERIZATION CATALYSTS AND
ORGANO-MERCURY COMPOUNDS AS CO-CATALYSTS
FOR THE PREPARATION OF NONCELLULAR
POLYURETHANE ELASTOMERS
Donald L, Christman, Grosse He, and Bernard A. MerkI, River-
Tiew, both of Mich., assignors to BASF Wyandotte Corpora-
tion, Wyandotte, Mich.
FUed Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 451,080
Int. a.3 C08G 18/22
MS CI. 528-57 ^5 q^
1. A process for preparing a noncellular polyurethane elasto-
mer which comprises reacting, in the absence of a blowing
agent, an organic polyisocyanate with an organic compound
having at least two Zerewitinoff active hydrogen atoms in a
ratio of from 1.0 to 1.2 equivalents of isocyanate groups per
equivalent of active hydrogen atoms in the presence of a cau-
lytically effective amount of a co-catalyst composition com-
prising an organo-mercuric compound and an alkali metal
carboxylic acid salt in a weight ratio of from 1 to 5 parts or-
4438 250
SUSPENSIONS OF isOCYANATO UREAS IN
ISOCYANATE PREPOLYMERS, A PROCESS FOR THEIR
PRODUCTION AND THEIR USE IN THE PRODUCTION
OF HIGH MOLECULAR-WEIGHT POLYURETHANE
PLASTICS
Gerhard Groglen Otto Ganster, botii of Uverkusen, and Klaus
Recker, Cologne, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Uverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 112,481
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 23.
1979,2902469 '• • .
Int. CV C08G 18/38
U.S. a. 528-66 3 Claims
1. A suspension of
(a) an isocyanato urea corresponding to the following gen-
eral formula:
OCH-R-NH-CO-NH-R-NH-CO-NHl-
«R-NCO
wherein
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1279
R represents a difunctional aromatic radical obtained by
removing the isocyanate groups from an aromatic diiso-
cyanate and
m represents 0 or an integer of 1 to 5,
in
(b) an isocyanate prepolymer corresponding to the follow-
ing general formula:
D— O— CO— NH— A— NCO),
wherein
A represents a radical obtained by removing the isocya-
nate groups from an organic diisocyanate,
D represents a radical obtained by removing the hydroxyl
groups from an n-functional polyhydroxyl compound
having a molecular weight of from 500 to 8000. and
n represents an integer from 2 to 4, said suspension being
liquid at room temperature or being liquefiable by heat-
ing to at most 80* C.
is not a polyethylene glycol, and which has a molecular weight
of less than 250 and is free from nitrogen atoms.
4,438,253
POLY(GLYCOLIC ACID)/POLY(ALKYLENE GLYCOL)
BLOCK COPOLYMERS AND METHOD OF
MANUFACTURING THE SAME
Donald J. Casey, Ridgefleld, and Kennetii R. Hufflnan, Stan-
ford, both of Conn., assignors to American Cyanamid Com-
pany, Stamford, Conn.
FUed Nov. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 411,306
Int. a.) C08G 63/06
U.S. a. 528—86 12 Claims
1. A multiblock copolymer useful for the manufacture of
bioabsorbable surgical articles comprising the formula:
4,438,251
POLYURETHANE POLYMERS COMPRISING
MACROCYCLIC CROWN ETHERS IN THE POLYMER
BACKBONE
John E. Herweh, East Hempfield Township, Lancaster County,
Pa., assignor to Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster,
Pa.
FUed May 16, 1983, Ser. Nn. 494,975
Int. a.' C08G 18/32
U.S. a. 528—73 16 Qaims
1. Polyurethane polymers comprising macrocyclic poly-
ether moieties in the polymer backbone, said polymers being
obtained from the reaction of
(a) a crown ether of the structure
OAr
I
O O
II II
-(OCH2Cir(-OR->ir-0-(-CCH20-tsr-C-
OAr
wherein R represents an alkylene group and Ar is an aromatic
group, the poly(glycolic acid) content is about 80 to 85 per-
cent, the poly(oxyalkylene) content is about 20 to 15 percent I
and m are the same or a different positive integer, and n is 23
to 91.
where n=l-3; Ri=— CHOHR5, R2, R3. and R4 indepen-
dently =H or CH3, and Rs = H or a straight or branched
chain alkyl group having from 1-13 carbon atoms; pro-
vided that when Ri is in the 3'-position, Rf is in the 3"- or
6"-po8ition, and when Ri is in the 4-position, R|' is in the
4"- or 5"-po8ition, and further provided that the ring
positions of R2', R3', and R4' in relation to Ri' are the same
as those of R2. R3 and R4 in relation to Ri; and
(b) a suitable diisocyanate.
4,438,254
PROCESS FOR PRODUaNG EPOXY RESINS
George A. Doorakian, Bedford, and Marsha A. Paul, Natick,
both of Mass., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company,
Midland, Mich.
Filed Feb. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 470,107
Int. a.3 C08G 59/62. 59/68
U.S. a. 528—89 20 Claims
1. In a process for preparing an advanced epoxy resin by
reacting
(a) a compound bearing an average of more than one vicinal
epoxide group per molecule with
(b) a polyhydric phenol or thiophenol, in the presence of a
catalytic amount of a tetrahydrocarbyl phosphonium salt,
the improvement wherein the reaction is conducted at a tem-
perature less than about 175° C. and in an essentially anhydrous
medium.
4 438,252
POLYMER-MODIHED POLYOLS
WUUam G. CarroU, Lancashire; Peter Farley, Manchester, and
Raymond J. Marklow, Cheshire, all of England, assignors to
Imperial Chemical Industries Limited, London, England
Filed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 398,885
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Aug. 8, 1981,
8124506; Mar. 29, 1982, 8209218
Int a.J C08G 18/38 18/48. 18/52
VS. a. 528—75 9 Claims
1. A polymer-modified polyol comprising a dispersion in a
first polyol which has a molecular weight of at least 1000, an
average functionality of more than 2, and a Hydroxyl Number
of less than 150, of the reaction product of a polyisocyanate
and a second polyol which is either (a) a polyethylene glycol
having a molecular weight of up to 600 or (b) a polyol. which
4,438,255
ACYLOXY TERMINATED
COPOLYESTER-CARBONATES
NUes R. Rosenquist, EvansviUe, Ind., assignor to General Elee-
trie Company, Mt. Vernon, Ind.
FUed Dec. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 450,810
Int. a.} C08G 63/64
VS. a. 528—176 26 Claims
1. A composition comprising an aromatic copolyester-car-
bonate chain terminated with at least one residue represented
by the general formula
(R),
(Z),
wherein:
each R is independently selected from monovalent hydro-
carbon radicals, substituted monovalent hydrocarbon
radicals wherein at least one replaceable hydrogen atom
1280
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
of said monovalent hydrocarbon radicals has been re-
placed with an inorganic atom or group, and halogen
radicals;
a represents a whole number having a value of from 1 to 3
inclusive;
n represents a whole number having a value of from 0 up to
and including the number of replaceable hydrogen atoms
present on the ring carbon atoms of the aromatic nuclear
residue; and
Z is independently selected from radicals represented by the
general formula
Rl—C— O— and
II
O
R'— P— C— O—
II
o
wherein R' is selected from bulky or rigid monovalent
hydrocarbon radicals selected from branched alkyl radi-
cals, cycloalkyl radicals, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl radi-
cals, aryl radicals, aralkyl radicals, and alkaryl radicals,
and bulky or rigid substituted hydrocarbon radicals se-
lected from branched alkyl radicals, cycloalkyl radicals,,
alkyl substituted cycloalkyl radicals, aryl radicals, aralkyl*
radicals, and alkaryl radicals.
4,438^56
COPOLYAMIDE ACID AND COPOLYIMIDE
Takayuki Ohta, Tokyo; Yukio Yanaga, and Seiichi Hino, both of
Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Chemical
Industries, Limited, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 6, 1983, Ser. No. 482,417
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 24, 1983, 57-69145
Int. a.^ C08G 73/10
U.S. a 528-188 scMma
1. A copolyamide acid consisting essentially of repeating
units represented by the general formulas:
mixture comprising a diamine component containing at least 70
mole % of m-xylylene diamine and a dicarboxylic acid compo-
nent containing at least 80 mole % of adipic acid at atmo-
spheric pressure, comprising the steps of:
(a) heating and melting the dicarboxylic acid component to
produce a molten dicarboxylic acid component;
(b) adding part of the diamine component to the molten
dicarboxylic acid component from step (a) in an amount to
bring the molar ratio of the diamine component to the
dicarboxylic acid component to within the range of from
0.900 to 0.990 in the reaction mixture while raising the
temperature of the reaction mixture to a temperature in
the range of from a temperature lower than the melting
point of the resulting polyamide to a temperature higher
than said melting point by a degree not exceeding about 5*
C, said temperature being such that the reaction mixture
is maintained in a uniformly fluidized state throughout the
process;
(c) after the addition of the diamine in step (b) has been
completed, raising the temperature of the reaction mixture
to a temperature higher than the melting point of the
resulting polyamide by a degree of about 10* to 35* C; and
(d) adding the remainder of the diamine component to the
reaction mixture maintained at the temperature defined in
step (c) in an amount to bring the overall molar ratio of the
diamine component to the dicarboxylic acid component to
within the range of from 0.995 to 1.005 to complete the
polycondensation reaction.
O
II
NHC
COOH
O ^^^
CNH-^/ V>
COOH
.CH3\
(A)
(N //
4,438,258
HYDROGELS
Neil B. Graham, Bearsden, England, assignor to National Re-
search Development Corporation, London, England
Filed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 387,817
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 12, 1981,
8118088; Jun. 12, 1981, 8118089; Jun. 12, 1981, 8118090
Int. a.3 C08G 63/66, 65/02
U.S. CI. 528-361 32 Qaims
1. A hydrogel, which comprises:
polymerized moieties derivable from (i) at least one unsatu-
rated cyclic(thio) ether of the formula:
R2
V R3
and
O J
/ o
COOH
zO:
COOH
'-0-
(B)
m which the repeating unit (A) and the repeating unit (B) are
present m a molar ratio from 20:80 to 80:20, and which has a
loganthmic viscosity number (tj,>,a) of 0.5 dl/g— 10 dl/g mea-
sured m N.N-dimethylformamide at a concentration of 0.5 g/dl
and at a temperature of 30° C.
4,438,257
PROCESS FOR PREPARING POLYAMIDE WITH
MOLTEN DICARBOXYLIC AOD COMPONENT
Aklra Miyamoto; Senzo Shimizu; Masahiro Harada; Tamotu
Ajiro, and Hideki Kara, aU of Kanagawa, Japan, assignors to
Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 451,397
Claims priority, appUcation Japui, Dec. 25, 1981, 56-211767
Int a.3 C08G 69/28
UA a. 528-347 12 cudms
1. A process for preparing a polyamide from a reaction
wherein
Ri, R2 and R4, which may be the same or different, each
represent hydrogen or a substituted or unsubstituted hy-
drocarbyl or hydrocarbyloxy group;
R3 represents a substituted or unsubstituted methylene, eth-
ylene, or 1,3-propylene group;
R5 represents a monovalent polymerizable group;
Q represents an oxygen or sulfur atom; and
X represents:
O
II
-(CH2)a(O)ft(C)c00rf-
wherein Y represents an oxygen atom or an — NR^— group
wherein R^ represents any of the values which Ri may assume;
a is 0 or 1; b is 0 or 1; c is 1 or 2; d is 0 or 1; with the proviso
that at least one of b or d is 1, and (ii) at least one hydrophilic
homo- or copolymer.
32. A hydrogel, which comprises: a polymerizate derived
from the reaction of polyethylene oxide with an acrolein tetra-
mer of the formula:
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1281
c\.n
C00CH2
4 438 259
(VINYLARYDALKYL POLYSULnDE POLYMERS
Victor E. Meyer, and Thomas E. Dergazarian, both of Midland,
Mich., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland.
Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 339,820, Jan. 18, 1982,
abandoned. This application Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 426,559
Int. a.^ C08G 75/00
U.S. a. 528-388 22 Claims
1. A curable polysulfide polymer as represented by the
general structure
4,438.262
HIGHLY DIELECTRIC POLYSACCHARIDES
Ichiki Murase, Ibaraki; Fumio Fujita, Osaka; Toshihiro Ohnl-
shi, TakaUuki, and Toshifumi Tamura, OUu, all of Japan,
assignors to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited, Osaka.
Japan
Filed Sep. 30. 1982, Ser. No. 429,282
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 6, 1981, 56-159647;
Aug. 27, 1982, 57-149449
Int. a.J C08B 11/155 31/08. 37/02
U.S. a. 536—43 15 Qaims
1. A process for manufacturing a highly dielectric organic
compound which comprises reacting a water-soluble polysac-
charide or a derivative thereof with a dihydroxyalkylating
agent to form a dihydroxyalkylatc and then cyanoethylating
the dihydroxyalkylatc with acrylonitrlc.
Z-[S«R]mS«-Z
L.[{S,R)iS,-Z)p
wherein each R is independently a polyvalent organic
polyradical with each valence residing on a carbon atom; each
Z is independently (vinylaryl)alkyl. inertly substituted (viny-
laryOalkyl or a noncrosslinking monoradical, provided that a
sufficient proportion of Z contain a (vinylaryl)alkyl moiety to
enable the polymer to cure to a material that does not cold
flow; 1 and m are independently zero or a positive integer; n is
a number from about 2 to about 8 provided that when m is zero
and each Z is vinylbenzyl, then n is at least 3; and p is zero or
a positive integer which is the difference between the valence
of R and two.
4,438,260
SISOMiaN COMPOUNDS
Uwe Petersen, Leverkusen; Peter SUdler, Haan; Oswald Lockh-
off, Leverkusen; Hans-Joachim Zeiler, Velbert, and Karl G.
Metzger. Wuppertal. all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Bayer Aktiengesellscbaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,401
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 17,
1981, 3101376
Int. a.J C07H 15/22
U.S. CI. 536-13.9 2 Qaims
1. A compound, which is l-N-([R,S,R,S]-6-Amino-2.3,4,5-
tetrahydroxy-hexyloxy-carbonyO-sisomicin or a salt thereof
2. A compound, which is l-N-(3-Amino-2,2-bis-[hydrox-
ymethyl]-propyloxycarbonyl)-sisomicin or a salt thereof
4,438,261
ANTICOAGULANT SUBSTANCE
William E. Bamett, Qearwater, Fla., assignor to Riker Labora-
tories, Inc., St. Paul, Minn.
Division of Ser. No. 151,163, May 19, 1980, Pat. No. 4,351,938.
This application Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 384,032
Int. Q.3 A61K 31/725
U.S. Q. 536—21 3 Qaims
1. A chemically partially depolymerized heparin product
which has
(1) a weight average molecular weight of from about 2,000
to 4,000 daltons, when determined by HPLC using 1.5
molar aqueous sodium chloride as the mobile phase and
dextrans as the standard,
(2) a polydispersity (D) of less than about 2.5, and
(3) analyzable reducing end groups of which a majority are
anhydromannose groups.
4.438.263
CELLULOSE GRANULES AND PROCESS FOR
PRODUONG THE SAME
Erwin E. Morse. Berlin. N.H.. assignor to James River Corpora-
tion of Virginia. Richmond. Va.
Filed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 405,992
Int. CV C08B 1/00: D21C 9/00. 9/18
U.S. Q. 536-56 20 Qaims
1. A process for producing essentially pure cellulose gran-
ules which comprises:
treating finely-divided particles of essentially pure cellulose
with an agglutinating reagent in aqueous solution which
promotes agglutination of said particles;
causing said panicles to agglutinate and mechanically sepa-
rating the agglutinated cellulose particles from the suspen-
sion medium leaving a wet mass of agglutinates;
washing said wet mass with water until said agglutinating
reagent has been removed therefrom, leaving a second
wet mass consisting essentially of agglutinated cellulose
particles and water; and
removing the water from said second wet mass by a non-
evaporative procedure wherein coalescence of said agglu-
tinated particles is prevented and said agglutinated parti-
cles dry into discrete granules of essentially pure cellulose.
18. Essentially pure cellulose granules suitable for use as an
excipient in tableting, characterized as a mass of discrete gran-
ules of essentially uniform size and character and by the fol-
lowing properties:
a flow rate greater than about 5 grams per second, as mea-
sured in a Flo-Graph tm through a | inch orifice;
a size such that between about 15 to about 80 percent is
retained on a 100 mesh screen when 25 grams is sieved in
a Ro-Tap tm apparatus for 25 minutes;
a compressibility measured as hardness in Strong-Cobb units
of at least 20 to No-Break when 0.4 gram of material
predried at 105 degrees Centigrade is compressed into
7/16 inch diameter ublets under 1000 pounds load and the
tablets tested in Model 2E Schleuniger hardness tester;
a disintegration time in water without agitation of between
about 2 and about 20 seconds for ublets prepared as
above; and
a bulk density of less than about 4 ml./gm.
1282
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438,264
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
HYDROXYETHYL METHYL CELLULOSE
Klaut Balaer, Waisrode; Helwig Tueboer, Hanau, and WUhelm
Oppemami, Bomlitz, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
nany
FUed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423,272
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 14,
1981, 3140813
Int. a.3 C08B U/193
U.S. CL 536^91 4 QXfAxo%
1. A process for the production of hydroxyethyl methyl
cellulose having a flocculation point of at least 100* C, which
comprises reacting alkali cellulose with ethylene oxide in the
presence of methyl chloride with a molar ratio of methyl
chloride to air-dry cellulose amounting to 6-12, alkalisation
and hydroxyethylation being carried out in liquid methyl chlo-
ride; and isolating the hydroxyethyl methyl cellulose formed.
R'-
J-
-R2
Rl8
N
R^-
}
-CH2-
i
^R'"
4,438,265
ESTERS OF
7-SULFENYLIMINOCEPHEM-4-CARBOXYLICAaDS
Tetsuo Hiraoka, and Takeo Kobayashi, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Sankyo Company LimitMl, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 907,772, May 14, 1978, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 779,907, Mar. 21, 1977,
abandoned. This application Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,763
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 5, 1976, 51-37958
Int. a.3 C07D 501/14
U.S. a. 544-29 6 Qaims
1. tert-Butyl 3-methyI-7-paranitrophenylsulfenylimino-3-
cephem-4-carboxylate.
6. parabromophenacyl 6-ortho-nitrophenylsul-
fenyliminopenicillanate.
N
wherein the dotted lines are both single bonds,
R'* is amino or Cm althylthio or halogen,
R" is hydrogen or halogen provided that both R'* groups
cannot be anfino,
R' and R2 is hydrogen or halogen, CMalkyl, CMalkylthio,
Cm alkoxy and R3 and R* are hydrogen, halogen, C2.4
alkenyl, €2^ alkenyloxy, nitro, cyano, hydroxy or mer-
capto except that R' to R4 may not all be hydrogen and
when R', R2 and R^ are hydrogen, R* may not be hy-
droxyl.
4,438,266
TRIAZOLOPYRAZINAMINES USEFUL AS ADJUNCTS
TO RADUTION THERAPY
George D. Hartman, Lansdale, Pa., assignor to Merck A Co.,
Inc., Rataway, N.J.
FUed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 379,232
Int a.J C07D 487/04; A61K 31/495; C07D 241/20
U.S. a. 544-350 3 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
4438 268
LIQUID CRYSTAL SUBSTANCES
Horst Zaschke, Plectz der Volkerfreundschaft 3, 4020 Halle;
Wolfgang Schafer, auf dem Viewitt 31, 1500 Potsdam; Hans-
Joachim Deutscher, Veszpremerstr. 15, 4020 Halle; Dietrich
Demus, Valchonweg 22, 4020 Halle, and Gerhard Pelzl, Block
170/2/21, 4020 Halle, all of German Democratic Rep.
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,288
Qalms priority, application German Democratic Rep., Sep.
29, 1980, 224159; Sep. 29, 1980, 224160
Int a.3 C07C 69/753; C07D 239/26. 239/28; C09K 3/34
U.S. a. 544-315 12 Qaims
1. A liquid crystal trans-6-n-alkyldecalin 2-carbonic acid
ester of the general formula
N
I
N
XX
CI -, NO2
wherein R'=C4H9,
<t
-0-
wherein R is hydrogen or methyl and pharmaceutically ac-
ceptable acid addition salts thereof
R' = C5H11. -OC,H2*+i. —CI. -Br. -CN. -H
4,438,267
MONOHETERORING COMPOUNDS AND THEIR USE
Susan M. Daluge, 297 Azalea Dr., Chapel Hill, N.C. 27514, and
Panl M. Skonezny, 1513 Cotherttone Dr., Durham, N.C.
27712
Filed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,644
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 11, 1980, with
W3«135 „=4to9
Int. a.J C07D 239/47. 239/49 R*=— H, —CI.
VS. CI. 544-309 1 Claim 12. A liquid crystal trans-6-n-aIkyldecalin-2-carbonic acid
1. A compound of the formda ester of the general formula
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1283
wherein R'=C„H2«+i
R2 =
""-O-"'
^QhO^-hQh;>
4,438,271
2-ETHYLSULFONYL PYRIDINE 1-OXIDE
DERIVATIVES
Allyn R. Bell; Arthur M. P. Dowcyko, both of Cheshire, and
John A. Minatelli, Watertown, all of Conn., auignors to
Uniroyal, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Not. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,550
Int. a.J C07D 211/72. 211/84. 213/62
U.S. a. 546-294 3 atim
1. 2-[l-(2,6-DichlorophenyI)ethyl8ulfonyl]pyridine 1 -oxide.
4438 272
SPIRO-(FLUOREN-9,4'-IMIDAZOLIDINE)-2',5'-DIONES
Billie M. York, Jr., Fort Worth, Tex., assignor to Alcon Labora-
tories, Inc., Fort Worth, Tex.
Filed Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368,631
Int. a.J C07D 235/02
U.S. a. 548-308 14 Claims
1. A spiro-(fluoren-9,4'-imidazolidinc)-2', 5'-dione or phar-
maceutically acceptable salt thereof having the formula
R3 = — C,H2,+ i. — OC„H2,+ i. — OCOOC„H2„+i. — SCnH2fl+i.
—CI. —Br, — CN, -NO2. -H,
with
n=l to 10
R*=— H, —CI, -C2H5.
4,438,269
4-DIMETHYLAMINOPYRIDINIUM
CHLOROCHROMATE
Frank S. Guziec, Jr., Las Cruces, N. Mex., assignor to Thiokol
Corporation, Chicago, 111.
Filed Aug. 9, 1982. Ser. No. 406,585
Int a.3 C07F 11/00; C07B 3/00; C07D 333/22. 309/12
VJS. a. 546—9 1 Claim
1. 4-dimethylaminopyridinium chlorochromate.
4,438,270
a-HALOMETHYL DERIVATIVES OF a-AMINO AQDS
Philippe Bey, Strasbourg, and Michel Jung, lUkirch-Grafren-
staden, both of France, assignors to Merrell Toraude et Com-
pagnie, Strasbourg, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 53^)37, Jul. 2, 1979, abandoned, which
is a continuation of Ser. No. 814,765, Jul. 11, 1977, abandoned.
This appUcation Jun. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 392,051
Int a.3 C07D 211/76. 223/10
VJS. CL 546—243 4 Claims
1. A compound having the formula
NH2
\
Y— C C«0
I I
(CH2),-NH
Where
x= hydrogen, fluoro, methylthio, methylsulfmyl, and meth-
ylsulfonyl, and
y = fluoro, methylthio. melthylsulfmyl and methylsulfonyl.
4,438,273
ISOIMIDE CONTAINING OLIGOMERS
Abraham L. Landis, Northridge, Calif., auignor to Hughes
Aircraft Company, El Scgundo, Calif.
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,317
Int a.5 C07D 307/66. 307/90. 307/77
U.S. a. 549—303 11 Claims
1. A polymerizable isoimide-containing oligomer prepared
by:
(a) reacting a carboxylic acid anhydride having the formula:
? ?
C C
/ \ / \
O R O
\ / \ /
I I
where R is a tetravalent organic group containing 2 to 27
carbon atoms, with a functional amine having the formula:
H2N-R1-X
wherein R| is a divalent organic group containing 1 to 20
carbon atoms and X is a radical selected from the group con-
sisting of — C-CH, — CH=CH2. — CN, and
O R4
II I
— O— C— C—CHj
where R4 is H or CH3; and
wherein Y is F2CH— , F3C or CI2CH— ; and n is the integer 3 (b) dehydrating the product under conditions to form an
^^ ^- isoimide-containing oligomer having the formula:
1284
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
X— Rt— N=C CasN— Ri— X
/ \ / \
O R O
\ / \ /
c c
II li
o o
where Ri and X are defined above.
4,438,276
PROCESS FOR SYNTHESIZING
N-ISOPROPYL-N'.0-CARBOMETHOXYPHENYLSUL.
PHAMIDE
NIcolo Stabile, Pavia; Raimondo Motta, Milan, and Giancarlo
Gosso, Desio, all of Italy, assignors to Oxon Italia S.p.A.,
Milan, Italy
Filed Jul. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 397,878
Claims priority, application Italy, Jul. 17, 1981, 23001 A/81
Int. a.3 C07C 143/7H
U.S. CI. 560-13 4 a.i„s
1. A process for synthesising N-isopropyl-N'-o-carbome-
thoxyphenylsulphamide, characterised in that sulphuric chlo-
rohydrin is reacted with a pyridic base, which also acts as the
solvent, at a temperature of between - 10° C. and 50° C. in
accordance with the reaction:
4,438,274
ANTIATHEROSCLEROTIC FUROCHROMONES
Ronald B. Gammlll, Portage, Mich., assignor to The Upjohn
Company, Kalamazoo, Mich.
Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 378,700 2
Int. a.3 C07D iU/7%
U.S. a. 549-387 4 cwms
I. A furochromone of formula I
(1)
N + CISO3H
N.SO3 +
N.HCl
wherein Rj is Cm alkyl; »
wherein R2 is C 1.6 alkyl; and
wherein R3 is — O— CO— R4, wherein R4 is C1-C4 alkyl.
where R is H or CH3;
anthranilic acid methyl ester is added at a temperature of
between 0° and 60° C. in accordance with the reaction:
N.SO3 +
O
II
C— O— CH3
NH2
(2)
4,438,275
COMBATING ARTHROPODS WITH NOVEL BENZYL
ESTERS
Reinhard Lantzsch; Albrecht Marhold, both of Uverkusen;
Wolfgang Behrenz, Overath, and Ingeborg Hammann, Co-
logne, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 30,579, Apr. 16, 1979, Pat. No. 4,310,540.
This application Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,440
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 5,
Int. a.3 C07D 317/44
U.S. a. 549-434 3 q,^
1. A benzodioxole of the formula
O
II
C-0-CH3
NH— SO3H.N
isopropylamine is added at a temperature of between 0" and 60*
C. in accordance with the reaction:
in which
R, R' and R2 each is hydrogen or halogen but at least one is
halogen, and
Z is CH2CI, CH2Br, CH2OH, Br or CHO.
'NH— SO3H.H2NCH
CH3
a dehydrating agent is added at a temperature of between 20*
and 80° C. in order to effect the reaction:
March 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
128S
o
N
C— O— CH3
/
NH— SO3H.H2N— CH
CH3 —
(4)
o
H20
and
CH3
O
II
C— O— CH3
B' represents a group of formula
— CH—
0R9
/
NH— SO2— NH— CH
\
CH3
CH3
and the product obtained is precipitated by dilution with water
and recovered by filtration.
4,438,277
HYDRONAPHTHALENE DERIVATIVES
Akira Terahara; Kiyoshi Hamano; Yoshio TsuJita, and Minoru
Tanaka, all of Hiromachi, Japan, assignors to Sankyo Com-
pany. Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 256,243, Apr. 21, 1981, Pat. No. 4,361,515.
This application Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368,673
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 22, 1980, 55-53057
Int. a.3 C07C 69/73^. 69/734. 69/03
U.S. a. 560—119 6 Claims
1. Compounds of formula (Id):
in which R' represents a hydrogen atom or a straight or
branched chain C2-C6 alkanoyl group, a group of formula
— CH—
I
X
in which X is as defined above, or a group of formula
— C-
I
O
R*«0
(Id)
4 438 278
POLYMERIZABLE ETHYLENICALLY UNSATURATED
AMIDE COMPOUNDS
Ignazio S. Ponticello, Rochester; Kenneth R. HoUlster, Pitts-
ford, and Richard C. Tuites, Rochester, all of N.Y., assignors
to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 157,600, Jun. 9, 1980, which is a division of
Ser. No. 85,138, Oct. 15, 1979, which U a divUion of Ser. No.
971,463, Dec. 20, 1978. ThU application Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No.
wherein: 3'^°'°°*
R represents an alkali metal or a straight or branched chain jj § a 560—205 °* 6 Clai
C,-C4 alkyl group; ', ' ^ '^^ ^^^ ^f ,,,, fo^„,,^
R' represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group;
R*" represents a hydrogen atom or a straight or branched
chain Ci-Ce alkanoyl group;
A' represents a group of formula CH2«C— C— X— R'— NR*— C— CHiR'
R O
-CH—
0R8
in which R^ represents a hydrogen atom, a straight or
branched chain C1-C4 alkyl group or a straight or branched
chain C2-C6 alkanoyl group, a group of formula
wherein R is hydrogen or methyl; —X— is — NR*— or — O— ;
R' is cyano or
?
-CR2
wherein R^ is alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms; R^ is alkylene of 1
to 12 carbon atoms, arylene of 6 to 12 carbon atoms, arylenebi-
salkylene of 8 to 32 carbon atoms, alkylenebisarylene of 13 to
34 carbon atoms, arylenealkylene of 7 to 24 carbon atoms or
cycloalkylene of 4 to 12 carbon atoms; and R^ is hydrogen or
in which X represents a halogen atom, or a group of formula alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
— CH—
I
X
1286
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4 438,279
FIBER-GRADE TEREPHTHALIC ACTD RECOVERED
FROM THE EFFLUENT FROM PARAXYLENE
OXIDATION IN ACETIC ACID AND THE CATALYTIC
HYDROGENATION OF THE OXIDATION EFFLUENT IN
THE PRESENCE OF METALLIC PLATINUM FAMILY
METALS
Uwrence G. Packer, Lisle, lU., and Edward J. Schlossmacher,
Erie, Pa., assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Chi-
cage. 111.
Continuation of Ser. No. 306,959, Sep. 30, I98I, abandoned. This
application Dec. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 453,487
Int. a.i C07C 57/7(5, 51/42
U.S. a 562-116 9 ciainu
1. A process for the recovery of terephthalic acid of fiber-
grade quality directly from the fluid effluent obtained (a) by
C2talytically oxidizing p-xylene in the liquid phase at a temper-
ature from 170- C. to 225* C. with air as the source of oxygen
and m the presence for 1.0 weight part of p-xylene from 2.0 to
10 weight parts of an acetic acid solution as the reaction sol-
vent containing 0.4 to 22 milligram atoms of cobalt per 1.0
gram mole of p-xylene for each milligram atom of cobalt from
0.05 to 2.0 milligram atoms of manganese and for each milli-
gram atom of total cobalt and manganese from 0.5 up to 1.5
milligram atoms of bromine; (b) heating the resulting fluid
oxidation effluent comprising about 3 to 20 weight percent
water and about 97 to 80 weight percent acetic acid to a tem-
perature of from 260° C. up to 320' C. under a pressure sufli-
cjent to maintain a liquid phase of acetic acid and in the pres-
ence of sufficient acetic acid to dissolve all solids present in
said effluent at the temperature range of 260* C. to 320' C. ; (c)
contacting the resulting solution and with hydrogen gas in' the
amount to provide its partial pressure of from 1.0 up to 15
kg/cm2 with a platinum family metal catalyst; (d) cooling the
hydrogen treated solution to precipitate terephthalic acid
therefrom; (e) separating the precipitate from the acetic acid
mother liquor; comprising about 97 to 80 weight percent acetic
acid, and about 3 to 20 weight percent water; (0 washing the
separated precipitate with fresh acetic acid; comprising about 3
to about 20 weight percent water and about 97 to about 80
weight percent acetic acid; and (g) drying the washed precipi-
tate.
4,438^1
SELECnVE PRODUCnON OF
MONOALKANOLAMINES FROM ALKYLENE OXIDES
AND AMMONIA OVER AQDIC INORGANIC
CATALYSTS
^'^uu' ^^"^"i:,?" ^''"""' '^"•' ■••'8"°'' *» Texaco Inc..
White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 24, 1983, Ser. No. 460,505
Int. a.3 C07C 85/ J8
U.S. a. 564-477 g CW^
1. An anhydrous process for preparing monoalkanolamines
which comprises reacting an alkylene oxide with an excess of
ammonia in the presence of an acidic inorganic catalyst se-
lected from the group of catalysts consisting of silica-alumina,
zeolites, molecular sieves and acid clays.
4,438,282
PREPARATION OF SULHDES
Hartmut Lardon, Ludwigshafen, and Guenther Seybold, Neu-
hofen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF
Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 391,105
198l'3125920^*^' ''"'""*^°" ^^' "*"• °' Germany, Jul. 1,
Int. a.3 C07C 149/30. 149/10
UA CI. 568-58 21 Claim.
1. A process for the preparation of a sulfide of the formula
R'-S-r2
where R> and R2 can be identical or different groups and each
IS alkyl of 1-8 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 5-8 carbon atoms,
aralkyl or alkylaryl of 7-12 carbon atoms, or phenyl or chloro-
phenyl, or where R' and R2 as alkylene groups together with
the adjacent sulfur atom also form a 5.membered or 6-mem-
bcred heterocyclic ring, each of the above groups being unsub-
stituted or substituted by oxo, chloro, nitro, cyano or alkyl or
alkoxy of 1-7 carbon atoms each, which process comprises:
reducing a sulfoxide of the formula
o
R'-S-R2
n
4438 280
BIS^MALEAMIC AQD) DERIVATIVES OF TRIAMINES
Walter J. Monacelli, St. Petersburg, Ha., assignor to Plastics
Engineering Company, Sheboygan, Wis.
Division of Ser. No. 267,379, May 26, 1981. This appUcation Jul.
12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,056
Int. a.3 C07C 101/453
U.S. a. 562-t57 3 ^^^
1. A bis(maleamic acid) derivative of a triamine having the
formula:
'CH— CO
I „.
CH— COOH
Q-NH2
where R' and R2 have the above meanings, by reacting it
with an amine derivative of the formula
H2N-XR3
where X is oxygen or
H
I
•N-.
m
m
wherein Q is a trivalent benzenoid aromatic radical.
and 9} is hydrogen, a sulfonic acid group or an acyl group
of a carboxylic acid, or with its ammonium salt, the car-
bonyl groups which may be present in R' and R2 being
converted to ketoximes in the case in which R^ is hydro-
gen and X is oxygen, and to the hydrazones in the case in
which R3 is hydrogen and X is
— N— .
I
H
MARCH 20, 1984
CHEMICAL
1287
4,438,283
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
HYDROXY-KETONES
Karl H. Schulte-Elte, Oncx; Roger L. Snowden, Grand-Lancy,
and Bernard L. MuUer, Geneva, all of Switacrland, aasignors
to Firmenich SA, Geneva, Switzerland
FUed Jun. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 391,996
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 24, 1981,
4842/81
Int. a.' CD7C 45/51
U.S. a. 568—403 4 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of hydroxy-ketones having
formula
(Ia.b)
possessing a double bond in one of the positions indicated by
the dotted lines which comprises treating with at least a stoi-
chiometric amount of a strong base, in an inert organic solvent,
a diallyl carbinol of formula
(ID
HO' HO
4 438 285
PROCESS FOR THE CATALYTIC HYDROGENATION OF
1-4-BUTYNEDIOL TO 1-4 BUTANEDIOL
Franco Codignola, Buenos Aires, Argentina, assignor to S.I.S-
.A.S. Societa Italina Serie Acetica Sintetica S.p.A., Milan,
Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 184,838, Sep. 8, 1980, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 49,245, Jun. 18, 1979, abandoned.
This application Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,913
Qairas priority, application Italy, Jun. 16, 1978, 24649 A/78
Int. a? C07C 31/20. 29/17
U.S. a. 568—861 7 Claims
1. A process for producing 1-4 butanediol comprising react-
ing 1-4 butynediol with hydrogen in the presence of a catalyst
comprising ruthenium and palladium in a weight ratio of about
4:1, at a temperatui^ of from 60* to 180* C. and at a pressure of
between 1 to 50 bars.
4,438,286
SUBSTITUTED ESTERS AND ALCOHOLS
Gohfu Suzukamo; Mitsuhisa Tamura, both of Osaka, and
Masami Fukao, Shiga, all of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo
Chemical Company, Limited, Osaka, Japan
Filed Oct. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 433,443
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 16, 1981, 56-166075;
Oct. 16, 1981, 56-166076; Oct. 16, 1981, 56-166077; Oct. 16,
1981, 56-166078; Oct. 16, 1981, 56-166079
Int. CI.3 C07C 33/02. 31/125
U.S. CI. 568—840 3 Qaims
1. A substituted diene alcohol represented by a general
formula:
CH3
CH3
\
(
/
CH— CH«CH— X
4,438,284
CATALYSTS FOR OXIDATIVE COUPLING OF
PHENOLS
Robert M. Strom, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow Chemi-
cal Company, Midland, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 241,969, Mar. 9, 1981,
abandoned. This application May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 378,674
Int. a? C07C 39/14
U.S. a. 568—730 14 Qaims
1. A process for preparing by an oxidation coupling reaction
a carbon-carbon coupled or carbon-oxygen coupled condensa-
tion product of a substituted phenol of the formula
wherein X represents a group of the formula
CH3
— CH-Ci
I
CH2OH
«CH2 or — C
CH2OH
CHj
C— CHj,
which has E configuration when X represents a group of the
formula
— C
CHj
C— CH3
I
CH2OH
R R| R R]
-OH or Rl— (r jV
^'
OH
wherein each R is hydrogen, halogen or Ri, and each Ri is a
substituent having up to 10 carbons selected from the group
consisting of hydrocarbon, halohydrocarbon and hydrocar-
bonoxy comprising contacting the substituted phenol with an
oxygen-containing gas under oxidative coupling conditions in
the presence of a heterogeneous catalyst comprising cobalt
present in an oxidation state suitable for forming oxidatively
coupled reaction products.
4,438,287
PREPARATION OF ALCOHOLS
Tamotsu Imai, Mount Prospect, III., aasignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, III.
Continuation-in-pari of Ser. No. 248,385, Mar. 27, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 93,461,
Nov. 13, 1979, abandoned. This application Aug. 25, 1982, Ser.
No. 41U13
Int. Q.J C07C 29/76
U.S. Q. 568—909 11 Qairas
1. A process for the selective pref>aration of an alcohol
hydroformylation product to the substantial exclusion of an
aldehyde from a dehydrogenatable aliphatic paraffinic hydro-
carbon possessing from 2 to about 30 carbon atoms which
comprises the steps of:
(a) dehydrogenating said aliphatic paraffinic hydrocarbon in
a dehydrogenation zone in the presence of from about 0.01
1288
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
to about 2.0 wt. % of a noble metal of Group VIII of the
Periodic Table in the elemental metallic state, from about
0.1 to about 5.0 wt. % of at least one element selected
from Groups lA and IIA of the Periodic Table present in
an oxidation state and from about 0.01 to about 5.0 wt. %
of at least one element selected from Groups IVA, VA
and VIIB of the Periodic Table present in an oxidation
state composited on a porous alumina or silica carrier
material to produce a reaction product comprising vapor-
ous light ends and a liquid dehydrogenation effluent mix-
ture comprising both aliphatic olefinic hydrocarbons and
aliphatic paraffmic hydrocarbons;
(b) transferring said vaporous light ends and said liquid
dehydrogenation products to a gas-liquid separation zone-
(c) separatmg said vaporous light ends from said liquid
dehydrogenation effluent mixture comprising both ali-
phatic olefinic and aliphatic parafflnic hydrocarbons;
(d) passing said liquid dehydrogenation effluent mixture
without any separation of said aliphatic olefinic hydrocar-
bon from aliphatic parafflnic hydrocarbon to a hydrofor-
mylation zone;
(e) hydroformylating said liquid dehydrogenation effluent
mixture at hydroformylation conditions which include a
temperature in the range of from about 50 to about 350* C.
and a pressure in the range of from about 10 up to less than
300 atmospheres by treating said mixture with carbon
monoxide and hydrogen in the presence of both a hy-
droformylation catalyst consisting essentially of a rho-
dium carbonyi compound and a promoter comprising a
tnalkyl-substituted amine in which all three of said alkyl
moieties are substituted to the nitrogen atom of said amine-
and '
(0 recovering the selectively produced alcohol.
4,438,288
DEHYDROGENATION OF HYDROCARBONS WITH A
HALOGEN CONTACTING STEP
Taniotiu Imai, Mt. Prospect, III., and Chi-Wen Hang, San
Rafnel, Cnllf., aMignore to UOP Inc., Des Piainea, lU.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 477,699, Mar. 22, 1983, which
l« a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 326,969, Dec. 2, 1981
abandoned. This application May 19, 1983, Ser. No. 496,146
Int. a.3 C07C 5/23: BOIJ i7/22
U.S. a 585-379 ,3 c^„,
1. A process for dehydrogenating hydrocarbons which
comprises the steps of:
(a) contacting a dehydrogenatable hydrocarbon in a dehy-
drogenation zone with a catalyst comprising a platinum
group component, an alkali or alkaline earth component
and a porous support material to produce a dehydroge-
nated hydrocarbon and a used catalyst;
(b) contacting said used catalyst from step (a) above in a
catalyst regeneration zone with a halogen component to
produce a regenerated catalyst containing added halogen
component; and
(c) contacting a dehydrogenatable hydrocarbon in a dehy-
drogenation zone with said catalyst from step (b) above to
produce a dehydrogenated hydrocarbon and a used cata-
lyst.
12. A process for regenerating a dehydrogenation catalyst
comprising a platinum group component, an alkali or alkaline
earth component and a porous support material with com-
pnses:
(a) burning carbon from the used catalyst at about 850* F.
with a regeneration gas stream containing between about
0.3 and 0.8 mol % oxygen, and
(b) contacting the catalyst with a halogen component to
provide a catalyst containing added halogen component.
4438 289
REDUCnON OF CYCLOPENTADIENE FROM
ISOPRENE STREAMS
Richard M. D'Sidocky, Ravenna, Ohio, assignor to The Good-
year Tire k Rubber Company, Alcron, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 350,913, Feb. 22, 1982, Pat. No. 432,004
This appUcation Jul. 1, 1983, Ser. No. 510,471
Int. a.3 C07C 7/01 7/12
U.S. a. 585-827 4 cud,„
1. A process for the removal of small amounts of cyclopenta-
diene (CPD) from a C-5 hydrocarbon stream which comprises
contacting said stream with activated carbon.
ELECTRICAL
- 4 43g 290
FAST RESPONSE THERMOCOUPLE SURFACE PROBE
Alfred E. Wells, Jr., Rochelle Park, and James H. Casillo,
Towaco, both of N.J., assignors to Thermo Electric Co., Inc.,
Saddle Brook, N.J.
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 388,695
Int. a.3 HOIL 35/28
U.S. a. 136—221 9 aaims
/■
f'*^?» r,f« •,>,ii__
7----~rz:—
^
^^ :
■ "w^'j ' 1 v^^^y ""
T^
^\
l|^^PPb:j=ii
substrate surface, said insulative layer having a surface
opposite said substrate;
an ink composition design fabricated upon at least a portion
of said insulative layer surface, said ink composition in-
cluding a polymer having at least 75% by weight of a
powdered metal dispersed therein; and
a second conductor, of a material different from said first
conductor and from the powdered metal of said ink com-
position, plated onto at least a portion of each of said ink
composition design and also onto said substrate surface,
and forming a single thermocouple junction by contact or
said second conductor with said substrate conductor.
• »
1. A thermocouple, comprising:
a cylindrical body having a top surface with said top surface
having first and second transverse crossing slots, with a
first strip of resilent thermocouple material of a first type
having end portions extending from the top surface
towards the bottom surface of said body and having a
bowed central portion positioned above and parallel to
said first slot, to form a leaf type spring, a second strip of
resilent thermocouple material of a second type having
end portions directed from the top surface to the bottom
surface of said body and having a bowed central posi-
tioned above and parallel to said second slot to form a leaf
type spring, whereby said bowed central portions are
transvere to and cross each other and as crossing are in
contact to form a thermocouple portion with said slots
operative to allow said bowed portions to flatten and
expand outwardly without contracting said body via the
spring action when said strips are forced against a surface
upon which a temperature measurement is to be made.
4,438,292
WATERPROOF HOUSING ASSEMBLY FOR
GEOPHONES
James C. Woodall, Houston, Tex., assignor to Mark Products,
Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Aug. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 411,467
Int. a.3 GOIV 1/16
U.S. a. 174-52 R 3 Claims
4,438,291
SCREEN-PRINTABLE THERMOCOUPLES
Charles W. Eichelberger, Schenectady; Robert J. Wojnarowskl,
Ballston Lake, and Abraham Auerbach, Albany, all of N.Y.,
assignors to General Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,966
Int. a.3 HOIJ 35/12
U.S. a. 136—236 R 20 Oaims
1. A waterproof housing and geophone assembly comprising
a housing having an elongated cavity, a geophone in the cav-
ity, means mounting the geophone in the bottom portion of the
cavity, a two conductor cable extending into the cavity having
a first section with the. outer sheath and insulation stripped
from the two conductors part of the way back from the end
and a second section adjacent the first with the sheath removed
from the insulated conductors, a body of elastomeric material
in the cavity having a first pair of spaced openings through
which the uninsulated first section of the cable extends to be
connected to the geophone, a second pair of spaced openings
connected to the first pair in which the second section of the
cable is located, and a single opening connected to the second
pair in which a portion of the sheathed cable is located, and
means to compress the body of elastomeric material into seal-
ing engagement with the housing and with the uninsulated
conductors, the insulated conductors, and the outer sheath of
the cable to prevent water from entering the portion of the
housing containing the geophone even if the outer sheath and
the insulation on the conductors develop a leak outside the
housing.
1. A thermocouple comprising:
a substrate of a first conductor, said substrate having a sur-
face;
a layer of insulation fabricated upon at least a portion of said
4 438 293
CABLE WITH IMPREGNATED FIBER STRENGTH
MEMBER FOR NON-SLIP CLAMPING
Othmar Voser, M»riken, Switzerland, assignor to Kupferdraht-
Isolierwerk AG Wlldegg, Wildegg, Switzerland
Division of Ser. No. 186,386, Sep. 11, 1980. This application
Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,341
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 18, 1979,
8444/79
Int. a.J H02G 15/06. 7/06
U.S. a. 174-79 14 Qaims
1. A composite cable comprising a tensile load carrier ele-
ment, an overhead cable, a common protective covering en-
closing said carrier element and said overhead cable and unit-
ing the same, and connecting means transferring a tensile load
to said carrier element, said covering comprising two channels,
one for said carrier element and one for said overhead cable,
said carrier element comprising a bundle of synthetic fibres
having smooth surfaces and a tensile strength in excess of 200
kg/mm^, a modulus of elasticity in excess of 3000 kg/mm^, and
1289
1290
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
an elongation at rupture of less than 10%, said fibres, in order
to reduce the risk of slippage in connecting regions of said
carrier element due to their smooth surfaces, being impreg-
nated at least over at least the connecting regions thereof, with
a material uniting the fibres of the element and, when subjected
ment consisting of a thermo-plastic, cross-linked material, said
element having a shape memory and being shrinkable toward
a previous shape when subjected to a shrinking process.
4 438,295
REMOTE TEMPERATURE CONTROL ACTIVATION
APPARATUS
Paul D. Hales, P. O. Box 7573, High Point, N.C. 27264
Filed Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 383,538
Int. a.i H04M 11/00
U.S.a.l79-2A WCtoiiM
no TsurraoHt
to compressive and/or bonding stress exceeding its ultimate
strength for such stress, breaking down into a powder within
the stressed areas and being broken down into a powder within
the connecting regions thereby causing within such regions a
wedgmg action both between the individual fibres of the bun-
dle as well as at the exterior surface of the bundle as a whole.
4438 2SM
CABLE SLEEVE WITH AN ENTRANCE SOCKET OF
SHRINKABLE MATERIAL
Hans J. Meltsch, Germering, and Jan Rost, Traubing, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,295
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 11,
1981, 3104916; European Pat. Off., Jul. 1, 1981, 81105109.3
Int. C\? H02G 15/04
U.S. a. 174-88 R 40 Claims
1. Apparatus for remote temperature control activation of a
structure comprising: a remote code receiving means, a signal
transmitting means, said signal transmitting means communi-
cating with said code receiving means, a signal receiving
means, said signal receiving means distant from and communi-
cating with said signal transmitting means, signal analyzing
means, said signal analyzing means communicating with said
signal receiving means, said signal analyzing means including
resisting means and thermostatic switch means, said resisting
means communicating with said thermostatic switch means,
said resisting means being preset to activate said thermostatic
switch means upon receiving a predetermined large plurality
of signals, each signal corresponding to a conventional tele-
phone ring from a single telephone call, and temperature influ-
encing means, said temperature influencing means communi-
cating with said signal analyzing means whereby said tempera-
ture influencing means is activated by said code receiving
means.
1. In a cable sleeve having a longitudinally extending joint
and a cable entrance socket at each end of the sleeve, said cable
entrance socket consisting of a shrinkable material and receiv-
ing a liner element having an axis and having external axially
extending recesses for receiving portions of the cables being
introduced into the cable entrance socket, and said socket
having sealing material for forming a seal between the material
of the socket and sheath of the cable engaged by the cable
entrance socket, the improvements comprising the liner ele-
4,438,296
MULTIMESSAGE AUTOMATIC TELEPHONE POLLING
METHODS AND APPARATUS
Fred J. Smith, PlanUtion, Fla., assignor to Digital Products
Corporation, Fort Lauderdale, Fla.
FUed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 182,943
Int. a.3 H04M i/46
U.S. a. 179-6.02 33 claims
1. Automatic announcement apparatus comprising:
means for recording on a record media a plurality of mes-
sages, each of said plurality of messages being recorded in
sequence and including a designation code uniquely defin-
ing that message, said means for recording including mag-
netic recorder means, microphone means selectively con-
nectable to said magnetic recorder means for recording a
message on said record media, means for selectively sup-
plying one of a plurality of unique designation codes to
said magnetic recorder means for recording on said record
media and means responsive to an actuation of said micro-
phone means for indicating that said means for selectively
supplying one of a plurality of unique designation codes to
said magnetic recorder means must be actuated;
means for selectively reproducing from said record media
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1291
one message at a time including said unique designation
code, said reproducing means having a playback station at
which a next message to be reproduced is positioned;
memory means for storing a plurality of data words, each
data word defining a particular operation and including
bit information representing a designation code corre-
sponding to one of said plurality of messages; and
processor means for reading each of said plurality of data
words in a sequence from said memory means, said pro-
cessor means comparing said bit information representing
a designation code corresponding to one of said plurality
a second voice coil inserted into said second air gap; and
a diaphragm coupled to said first and second voice coils and
driven by said first and second voice coils.
4,438 2SW
SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING AND TESTING SUBSCRIBER
LOOPS
Harvey Rubin, Morristown, N.J., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, NJ.
Filed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 399,185
Int. a.' H04M i/26: H04B i/46
U.S. a. 179-175.2 R 9 a,i„,
of messages in each data word read with said unique
designation code of said next message to be reproduced as
positioned at said playback station and attempting to
execute said particular operation defined by said data
word and to reproduce said next message to be repro-
duced by said reproducing means only if an affirmative
comparison of said bit information and said designation
code of said next message is present, said processor means
reading a following data word from said memory means
without attempting to execute said particular operation
defined for a data word for which a negative comparison
resulted.
4,438,297
DYNAMIC SPEAKER
Sinichiro Kawamura, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Hitachi,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,445
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 28, 1980, 55-166538
Int. a.3 H04R 9/02
U,S. a. 179—117 4 Oaims
1. A system, cooperatively arranged with wire center test
trunks, for accessing and testing subscriber loops in response to
an access request and a test request provided by a system user,
said system comprismg
first microcomputer means (2000) for receiving and convert-
ing said access request and said test request into a corre-
sponding access task and test task,
second microcomputer means (2200), responsive to said first
microcomputer means, for processing said access task,
third microcomputer means (e.g., 2101), responsive to said
first microcomputer means, for processing said test task,
and
a switching network (2700), interposed between said third
means and said trunks and responsive to said second
means, for interconnecting one of said loops, via one of
said trunks, to said third means.
4,438,299
ON-LINE TELEPHONE TROUBLESHOOTING
APPARATUS
William L. Tomim, 520 S. Green Oaks a., Addison, 111. 60101
Filed Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,645
Int. CI.) H04B i/46
U.S. a. 179— 175J F 6 Claims
TIO
1. A dynamic speaker comprising:
first, second and third magnetic poles arranged in at least
three layers in spaced relation with each other;
a first magnet arranged between said first and second mag-
netic poles;
a second magnet arranged between said second and third
magnetic poles;
a fourth magnetic pole interposed between the magnetic
path of said first magnetic pole and the magnetic path of
said third magnetic pole for forming first and second air
gaps within said respective magnetic paths;
a first voice coil inserted into said first air gap;
eomut.
ornet
M»_ J
1. Telephone station isolating apparatus for electrical con-
nection in circuit across the "tip" line and the "ring" line
1292
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
between the "central office" and the "customer station" sides
of a telephone network in order to facilitate testing for faults,
said apparatus comprising: termination circuit means including
a termination resistor and a blocking diode connected in series
with each other and arranged to be connected in shunt circuit
across the "tip" and "ring" lines with the diode thereof dis-
posed for blocking conduction in the direction from the "tip"
to the "ring" line; first control circuit means arranged to be
connected in series circuit in the "tip" line between said termi-
nation circuit means and the "customer station", said first
control circuit means including a blocking diode and a voltage-
responsive selective-conduction device connected in parallel
with each other with the diode thereof disposed for blocking
conduction in the direction from the "customer station"; and
second control circuit means arranged to be connected in
series circuit in the "ring" line between said termination circuit
means and said "customer station" line, said second control
circuit means for including a blocking diode and a voltage-
responsive selective-conduction device connected in parallel
with each other with the diode thereof disposed for blocking
conduction in the direction from the "central office" line.
4438J01
MOVABLE MEMBER MEMBRANE SWITCH
Anthony J. Van Zeeland, Crystal Lake, HI., assignor to Oak
Industries Inc., Rancho Bernardo, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 401,075, Jul. 23, 1982, Pat. No. 4,405,841.
This application Mar. 25, 1983, Ser. No. 478,693
Int. a.3 HOIH 15/00
U.S. a. 200—16 C
3 Oaims
4 438J00
PROTECTIVE COVER FOR TELEPHONE PUSH
BUTTON ARRAY
Milton Morse, Fort Lee, N.J., assignor to APM Corporation,
Englewood, N.J.
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,757
Int. a.J H04M 1/23
U.S. a 179-184 6 Qaims
-fiO.
^MMWh^
1. A slide switch using membrane technology including a
substrate having spaced contacts thereon, a spacer positioned
upon said substrate and contacts and having an opening therein
which extends over an area in register with at least a portion of
said spaced substrate contacts, a slide member positioned for
movement in said spacer opening, a membrane positioned upon
said spacer and having an opening therein in alignment with
said spacer opening, a contact formed on the surface of said
membrane facing said substrate and at least in part overlapping
the opening in said spacer, said slide member being movable
between positions to connect said membrane contact with one
or more of said substrate contacts, and an operating member
positioned upon said membrane and having means extending
through said membrane opening into engagement with said
slide member to cause operation thereof.
4,438,302
ELECTRICAL SHORTING SWITCH ASSEMBLY
INCLUDING A LAST TO OPEN LAST TO CLOSE
ARONG SWITCH
Robert M. Hruda, Horseheads, N.Y., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,484
Int. a.3 HOIH 3/00. 33/66
U.S. a. 200-17 R 6 Claims
1. A protective cover for the push-button array of a push-
button telephone set, comprising:
a flexible elastomeric sheet having a grid of upwardly-
directed pockets, each of said pockets being defined by
substantially vertical side-walls rising above the main
plane of said sheet and an upper top portion extending
across the tops of said vertical walls, the adjacent vertical
walls of adjacent pockets being spaced from each other;
said pockets thereby extending above the said plane of
said sheet and being open at the lower end for snugly
receiving each of the buttons of said array and thereby
overiying the corresponding array of push-buttons on said
telephone; said top portion of each said pocket being
provided with an upwardly protruding portion, the lateral
periphery of which is inward of said vertical walls; said
pockets being elastically depressible independently of one
another toward their open ends, to permit individual
displacement of the underlying telephone set push-buttons
received in said pockets; said sheet including a skirt por-
tion extending laterally beyond said grid and said sheet
being continuous between its lateral edges, whereby said
entire push-button array is overlaid by said cover and
thereby protected from spillage of liquids or other envi-
ronmental hazards.
1. An electrical shorting switch assembly for connection
across an electrolytic cell as a bypass shorting switch in paral-
lel with the electrolytic cell comprising:
(a) a plurality of hermetically sealed switch modules which
are connected in electrical parallel with respect to each
other and to the electrolytic cell, with one of the switch
modules comprising an arcing switch module which is the
last-to-open and lost-to-close switch module;
(b) switch operating means which permits sequential opera-
tion of the arcing switch module relative to the other
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1293
switch modules, including means for determining that the
arcing switch module is the last-to-open and last-to-close.
4 438 J03
ASSEMBLY FORMING INTERnTONG SOCKET AND
PLUG FOR CONNECnON TO A QRCUIT IN WHICH
THE SOCKET IS MOUNTED, WITHOUT THE ORCUIT
OPENING
Louis Astier, 51 avenue du General de Gaulle, Meudon la Foret,
France 92360
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,398
Gaims priority, application France, Apr. 14, 1980, 80 08280
Int. a.3 HOIH 27/00
U.S. a. 200-51.1 9 Oaims
sliding type contacts lying substantially in a same plane
parallel to said direction of insertion.
I8d 40
1. An assembly forming an interfitting socket and plug for
connection to a circuit in which the socket is mounted, without
the circuit opening, wherein:
(a) the socket comprises:
(1) a body made of insulating material and provided with
an outwardly open housing;
(2) a switch located in said housing near the bottom
thereof and having two contact elements which are
borne by conducting blades allowing series connection
of the switch to the circuit through said body by being
embedded in said insulating material, one of said blades
having a rectilinear free end part projecting from said
insulating material near the bottom of the housing and
forming a substantially rectilinear elastic member bear-
ing one of the contact elements so as to allow the return
of the switch into position of closure by an elastic return
force and to form a contact by pressure; and
(3) two first branch contact elements integral with said
conducting blades and projecting from said insulating
material on two opposite side walls of the housing inside
said housing; and
(b) the plug comprises:
(1) a push element made of insulating material for opening
the switch against said elastic return force when the
plug is inserted into the outwardly open housing, said
push element having a front end adapted for engage-
ment with said elastic member which extends in a trans-
verse direction with respect to the direction of insertion
of the plug into the socket, and said push element hav-
ing opposite side faces guided along said opposite walls
of the housing, whereby the push element occupies
virtually the whole width of the housing; and
(2) two second branch contact elements located on said
opposite side faces of the push element and borne by
conducting blades allowing connection of said second
branch contact elements to respective conductors
through said push element by being embedded in the
insulating material thereof, each second branch contact
element coming into contact with a respective first
branch contact element for a penetration of the plug less
than that necessary for opening the switch, so that each
pair constituted by a first branch contact element and a
corresponding second branch contact element forms a
sliding contact, said pressure type contact and said
4 438 304
DOUBLE THROW SNAP ACnON SWITCH
Maruice E. Kennedy, Crystal Lake, III., assignor to Cherry
Electrical Products Corporation, Waukegan, III.
Filed Oct. 1, 1982. Ser. No. 432,250
Int. a.3 HOIH 21/40
U.S. a. 200-67 D 14 Qaims
1. A snap action switch, comprising:
an electrically conducting terminal plate having at least one
aperture formed therethrough;
an electrically conducting stationary contact spaced from
said terminal plate;
an electrically conducting contactor means disposed be-
tween said terminal plate and said stationary contact,
said contactor means including a snap action dome having at
least one cantilevered spring arm for supporting the dome
in a Stable position in spaced relation to said stationary
contact and in conductive contact with the terminal plate;
and
pushbutton means mounted over said terminal plate for
engaging said dome through said aperture and flexing the
dome away from the terminal plate and against the station-
ary contact when the -pushbutton means is pressed, the
dome returning to its stable position when the pushbutton
means is released.
4,438,305
FIRE RESISTANT PRESSURE SWITCH
James R. Johnson, Johnson County, Kans., assignor to Sor, Inc.,
Olathe, Kans.
FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,783
Int. C1.3 HOIH 35/40
U.S. a. 200—83 J 3 Claims
1. A fire resistant switch device responsive to the pressure of
a fluid medium, said device comprising:
a housing having a tubular end for connection with the fluid
medium;
a pressure responsive piston in said housing supported for
movement therein between first and second positions;
a switch element;
actuating means for effecting a first condition of said element
when said piston is in said first position and a second
condition of the switch element when said piston is in said
second position;
yieldable means for urging said piston toward said first
position;
a metal fitting insertable in the said end of said housing, said
1294
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
fitting located on the opposite side of said piston from said
switch, said fitting including
(a) a pressure port therethrough for communication with
the fluid medium, said port having opposite ends includ-
ing an inlet end for the fluid medium,
(b) a flexible metal diaphragm overlying the end of said
port opposite the inlet end and having its periphery
generally coincident with the periphery of the fitting,
(c) a metal ring member overlying said diaphragm and
having its periphery generally coincident with the pe-
riphery of said diaphragm,
drive piston and a movable drive cylinder enveloping said
drive piston to define a drive displacement cavity; and
pressure generating means for generating an expulsion of
gaseous medium into said drive displacement cavity.
(d) the adjoining peripheries of said fitting, diaphragm and
ring member all being joined together by a continuous
weld seam providing a pressure tight connection sealing
off the housing from the fluid medium which will re-
main effective in the event of high temperature destruc-
tion of other components of the device,
(e) a movable disk assembly within said ring member and
disposed to respond to movement of said diaphragm
caused by pressure changes in the medium and operable
to move said piston in response to movement of said
diaphragm thereby to actuate said piston between said
first and second positions.
4,438,307
ELECTRIC VACUUM SWITCH
Hans-Joachim Lippmann; Gerhard Peche, and Hans Bettge, all
of Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktien-
gesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 111,668, Jan. 14, 1980, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 820,796, Aug. 1, 1977. This appUcatioo
Mar. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 480,899
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 27.
1976,2638700 /» »• .
Int. aj HOIH 33/66
U.S. a. 200-J44 B 8 Qaims
12 Ji
4,438,306
CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER OPERATING MECHANISM
HAVING A CHEMICAL OPERATOR WITH A
STATIONARY PISTON
Ronald W. Crookston, Penn Township, Westmoreland County,
and Iran T. Bumey, Plum, both of Pa., assignors to Westing-
house Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,605
Int. a.J HOIH 33/42
UA a. 200-148 F 6 Claims
1. An electric circuit interrupter, comprising:
a pair of separable contacts;
operating means operatively connected to said contacts for
opening and closing said contacts;
drive means operatively connected to said operating means
for driving the operating means including a stationary
1. An electric vacuum switch comprising in combination:
two cup-shaped switching contact components comprising
electrically conductive material and which each have a contact
carrier with a base and a cylindrical jacket-shaped wall and
having a wall at an end side facing away from the base; a
contact ring which is placed onto the wall at the end side
facing away from the base and which has a ring-shaped contact
surface; the cylindrical wall being divided up into segments by
means of radial slots running obliquely to a central axis of said
contact components; the electrical conductivity being sud-
denly reduced at least by a factor of 3 at the junction from said
contact carrier to said contact ring by providing the ring with
a contact material which has an electrical conductivity lower
than that of the carrier at least by the factor 3; said contact
carrier comprising primarily copper and the contact ring com-
prising a chrome matrix with an impregnation metal primarily
comprised of copper; at least upper portions of the jacket-
shaped cylindrical wall being formed of said impregnation
metal and being joined to said contact ring by a back casting of
the impregnation metal of the contact ring onto said upper
portions, and at least said upper portions of the wall being
soldered by a solder layer onto remaining portions of the
contact carrier such that said solder layer is arranged deep and
away from the contact ring whereby influencing of solder
vapor upon the arc is minimized.
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1295
4,438,308
PUFFER PISTON ORCUIT BREAKER
Gerhard Kbmer, Schriesheim, and Volker Rees, Darmstadt, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BBC Brown, Boveri A
Company, Limited, Baden, Switzeriand
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,709
Qalms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 25,
1980, 3015946
Int. a.J HOIH 33/70
U.S. a. 200-148 A 29 Qaims
;
1. A puffer piston circuit breaker having a stationary and a
movable contact, at least one of which is tubular in form, and
a piston-cylinder puffer assembly fixedly connected with the
movable contact such that there is relative displacement of the
puffer piston and cylinder toward each other during a discon-
necting action to obtain a flow of quenching gas for extinguish-
ing the electrical arc created during the disconnecting action,
wherein the improvement comprises a supplemental piston-
cylinder assembly which defines a compression space, and
means actuated by the current during the disconnecting action
for causinq said supplemenul piston-cylinder assembly to
compress said compression space and thereby provide addi-
tional quenching gas to said flow of quenching gas.
4,438,309
TOOL HOLDER FOR MANIPULATOR ARM
Ernst Zimmer, Friedberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Kuka Schweissanlagen A Roboter GmbH, Augsburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,262
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 12,
1981, 3105105
Int. OJ B23K JJ/28
VJS. a. 219—86.7 14 Claims
1. A tool holder for a manipulator, said holder comprising:
a tool shaft extending along and rouuble about a main axis
and having a tool-shaft end provided with a pivot defining
a transverse axis;
a tool carried on said pivot and displaceable relative to said
tool shaft about said transverse axis;
a support adjacent said tool;
a stack of guide rings coaxially surrounding said tool shaft
adjacent said pivot, roUtionally fixed on said tool shaft,
and formed with at least two throughgoing guide-ring
passages each having a radially outwardly opening pas-
sage end, two of said guide rings defining a pair of axially
spaced annular confronting guide-ring surfaces;
a connector ring rotatable on said stack between said guide-
ring surfaces at the outwardly opening ends of said guide-
ring passages and having one axially directed connector-
ring surface axially directly confronting one of said guide-
ring surfaces and an oppositely axially directed connector-
ring surface axially directly confronting the other of said
guide-ring surfaces, said connector ring being formed
with respective radially inwardly open grooves confront-
ing the opening into said outwardly opening ends of said
guide-ring passages;
means including respective fluid lines connected between
said grooves and said tool for feeding a fluid from said
passages through said tool;
connector means for securing said connector ring to said
tool-shaft end for joint rotation of same about said main
axis;
an electrical conductor connected to the guide ring of said
one guide-ring surface;
a flat contact element secured to one of said one surfaces and
axially flatly engageable with the other of said one sur-
faces, whereby current can be transmitted between said
connector ring and said guide ring of said one guide-ring
surface by said contact element;
means including a piston-and-cylinder assembly and a spring
engaged between said connector ring and the other of said
guide-ring surfaces for pressing said one surfaces and
contact element together axially; and
means including an electrical line connected between said
connector ring and said tool for feeding electricity
throu^ said connector ring to said tool. <
4,438,310
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDUCTIVELY
HEATING VALVE SEAT INSERTS
John F. Cachat, QeTeland, Ohio, assignor to Park Ohio Indus-
tries, Inc., Oeveland, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 349,037, Feb. 16, 1982, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 147,829, May 8, 1980,
abandoned. This applicatioB Jun. 13, 1983, Ser. No. 501,755
lot a.i H05B 6/4a 6/14
U.S. a. 219—10.43 8 Claims
1. A method of inductively heating a conical valve seat
surface of a valve seat insert coaxially aligned within a bore in
an engine component, said insert having a lower coefficient of
thermal expansion than said engine component, said method
comprising the steps of: providing a ring inductor having a
face generally matching said valve seat surface; positioning
said inductor in generally axially aligned relation to said valve
teat insert with the said face located opposite and spaced a
selected distance from said valve seat surface; energizing said
inductor to inductively heat said valve seat surface; and shield-
1296
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
ing the portion of said engine component immediately sur-
roundmg said insert from penetration and inductive heating by
stray flux generated by said inductor during the said enereizina
thereof. *
4438 312
METHOD OF AND DEVICE FOR CONDUCTING
MACHINING CURRENT TO A WIRE-ELECTRODE
TOOL IN A WIRE<:UTriNG ELECTROEROSION
MACHINE
KJyoshJ Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,012
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 4, 1980, 55-77677rul
Int. a.i B23P 1/JO. J/J2
U.S. a. 219--69 W 7 Claim.
4,438,311
INDUCTION HEATING COOKING APPARATUS
Yoshihisa Tazima; Masayuki Morishima, both of Kiryu; Hiroshi
Okumura, and Shin-ichi Kasahara, both of Ashikaga, all of
Japan, assignors to Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd., Moriguchi and
Tokyo Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd., Gunma, both of, Japan
Filed Jun. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 163,088
. ^"" Pi^'Of^ty' application Japan, Jul. 5, 1979, 54-85638; Jul.
5, 1979. 54-85639; Jul. 5, 1979, 54-85640
Int. a.i H05B 6/06
U.S. a. 219-10.49 R 26 Qaims
1. An mduction heating cooking apparatus, comprising:
power supply means for supplying an electric power,
high frequency oscillating means being supplied with said
electric power for causing high frequency oscillation
during predetermined intervals, said high frequency oscil-
lation being caused during an oscillation interval and
being stopped during a non-oscillation interval,
induction heating coil means coupled to said high frequency
oscillating means for receiving a high frequency current
from said high frequency oscillating means for generating
a high frequency alternating magnetic field for induction
heating a load by said alternating magnetic field,
oscillation detecting means for detecting the output of said
high frequency oscillating means during a time corre-
sponding to a said non-oscillation interval, and
means responsive to the oscillation detected output from
said oscillation detecting means during said time of detec-
tion for stopping said high frequency oscillation by said
high frequency oscillating means during the intervals
when high frequency oscillation is normally produced.
1. A traveling-wire electroerosion machine, comprising-
drive means for axially moving a wire-electrode tool which
is tautly stretched from a supply site to a collection site,
along a predetermined path continuously extending be-
tween said supply and collection sites througb-the region
of a workpiece; y
power supply means having a pair of otitptn terminals for
feeding a machining current between_^ moving wire-
elect^rode tool and said workpiece across a machining gap
Hooded with a liquid machining medium; and
a device for conducting said machining current to said mov-
ing continuous wire electrode tool from said power sup-
ply means, the device comprising:
a brush block electrically connected to one of said output
terminals and having a planar current-conducting sur-
face disposed at a location in said predetermined path
for making sliding electrical contact with said axially
moving wire-electrode tool,
a rotary shaft secured to said brush block and having an
axis of rotation generally perpendicular to said planar
current-conducting surface, and
motor means drivingly coupled to said rotary shaft for
rotating said brush block about said axis to rotationally
tnove said planar current-conducting surface in tangen-
tial sliding contact with said axially moving continuous
wire-electrode tool.
4,438J13
ELECTROSLAG WELDING METHOD
Anatoly N. Safonnlkov, and Anatoly V. Antonov, both of Kle?,
U.S.S.R., assignors to Institut Elektrosvarki Imeni EO
Patona and Akademii Nauk Ukrainsko, both of, U,S.S.R.'
per No. PCr/SU80/00116, § 371 Date Feb. 18, 1982. § 102(e)
Date Feb. 18, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00110, PCT Pub
Date Jan. 21, 1982
PCT Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 355,595
Int. a.J B23K 25/00
U.S. a. 219-73.1 6 Qaim.
1. A method for electroslag welding of metal segments by a
large-section electrode, comprising the steps of esublishing a
slag bath, fusing an electrode and edges of the metal segments
being weld-jomed, filling with the metal being fused an inlet
metal mould and the gap between the edges of the metal seg-
ments, and subsequently removing an inlet shrinkhead,
wherein the improvement comprises the electrode being, in
establishing the slag bath and filling with metal the inlet metal
mould, fused at a rate lower than the electrode fusion rate in
filling with metol the gap between the edges of the metal
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1297
segments being weld-joined at constant electrical parameters 4438 315
of the electroslag welding, and a brittle interiayer between the HIGH SELECTIVITY PLASMA ETCHING APPARATUS
Hiroyasu Toyoda; Hiroyoshi Komiya, and Hideaki lukura, all
of Kanagawa, Japan, assignors to VLSI Technology Research
Association
Division of Ser. No. 183.710, Sep. 3. 1980. Pat. No. 4,348,557.
This application Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,407
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 12, 1979, 54-163006
Int. a,3 B23K 9/00; C23F 1/02
U,S. a 219-121 PE 4a»im*
inlet shrinkhead and the weld being formed in the course of
welding, the weld being made so that it has a low electrical
resistance.
W
r
f'
c*
, pJ^/f.'
4,438,314
WELD PIN APPLICATOR DEVICE HAVING
AUTOMATIC RELOAD
Charles Giannone, Babylon, N.Y., assignor to Duro-Dyne Cor
poration, Farmingdale, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,247
Int. a.J B23K 9/20
U.S. a. 219—98
1. A parallel-plate type gas plasma etching apparatus for
preferentially etching a workpiece having a multilayer struc-
ture composed of layers of Si and S1O2, comprising: a reactor;
a pair of parallel-plate electrodes disposed in said reactor, one
of said electrodes being adapted to receive a workpiece dis-
posed thereon; means for supplying said reactor with an etch-
ing gas consisting of CHF3 at a pressure of 10 mJorr to 100
mTorr; and rf power generator means for applying rf power
between said electrodes in a cathode-coupling mode by a rf
power generator to cause said etching gas to assume a plasma
^'«"ns state, the output frequency of said rf power generator means
being limited to a range of 400 KHz to 10 MHz, and wherein
the one of said electrodes upon which said workpiece is dis-
posed is connected to a high voltage output terminal of said rf
power generator and the other of said electrodes is grounded
4,438,316
NOISELESS COMBUSTION AND PLASMA CUTTING
ARRANGEMENT
Ulrich Ackermann. and Eggo Ratsch, both of Berlin, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Versuchsanstalt f. Deutsche For-
schunp-u Luft-u Raumfahrt e.V, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,365
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 10,
1980, 3042347
Int. a.3 B23K 9/00
U.S. a. 219-121 PC 11 Qalms
13
5. A weld pin attachment apparatus comprising a frame, an
elongate, horizontally disposed ground electrode mounted on
said frame, a carrier beam disposed above said electrode in
parallel spaced relation thereto, a weld head assembly movably
mounted on said beam and including a weld electrode shiftable
toward and away from said ground electrode, upwardly di-
rected receiver track means on said assembly for storing a
plurality of pins and feeding same to said weld electrode,
orienting hopper means on said frame for storing a supply of
said pins and delivering same in oriented condition at a down-
wardly directed discharge station, stop means at said discharge
station blocking downward flow of said pins from said station,
and means on said receiver track means for clearing said stop
means from said blocking position responsive to movement of
said weld head assembly along said carrier beam to move said
receiver track into registry with said discharge station, thereby
to refill a stack of pins into said receiver track.
n-
- - _i.
±----^-
-_
¥
-,zp
-13
13
1. Low-noise flame and plasma arc cutting arrangement,
comprising: cutting means above an associated honeycomb-
type bench for supporting a workpiece. said bench being di-
vided into a plurality of individual cells that are substantially
higher than they are wide for reducing noise occurnng during
cutti^ng of the workpiece; said cells in the bench having walls
comprising reverberating material; said cells having a depth
for permitting multiple reflections of sound against said walls
of reverberating material so that sound generated below the
workpiece is repeatedly reflected against the inside surface of
1298
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
the cells and become thereby diminished, said walls being
substantially free of sound absorbing material, noise reduction
occurring by said multiple reflections of sound.
4438J17
PULSE ARC WELDING MACHINE
Shlgeo Uegiui; Hirotsugu Komura, both of Hyogo, and Taki^i
Mizuno, Aichi, all of Japan, asiignore to Mitsubiahi Denki
Kabuflhiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,263
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 8, 1980, 55-93069;
Jul. 8, 1980,55-93077; Jul. 8, 1980, 55-93086
iBt a.J B23K 9/09
\}&. a. 219-130.51 5 Qaims
second comparing means for comparing a fixed reference
value with said sixth control signal; and
pulse peak current setting means for controlling said pulse
current source for setting a pulse peak current of said
pulse current in response to an output of said second
comparing means.
4,438,318
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR AUTOMATICALLY
CONTROLLING WELDING CONDITIONS FOR USE IN
AN ARC WELDING MACHINE
Hideo Suzuki, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Okamura Corpora-
tion, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Nov. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,879
Int. a.3 B23K 9/10
U.S. a. 219-137 PS ^ 4 Claim.
1. A pulse arc welding machine comprising;
a wire feeding unit for feeding a wire electrode to a base
material to be welded;
a base current source for supplying a base current between
said wire electrode and said base material;
base current setting means for controlling said base current
source;
a pulse current source for supplying a pulse current super-
posed on said base current flowing between said wire
electrode and said base material;
means for detecting an arc voltage of an arc discharge be-
tween said wire electrode and said base material;
integrating means for integrating an output of said arc volt-
age detecting means;
wire feeding speed instructing means for providing a first
control signal representative of a desired wire feeding
speed;
wire feeding speed setting means for controlling said wire
feeding unit in response to said first control signal;
first function generating means for producing, in response to
said first control signal, a second control signal representa-
tive of said arc voltage as a function of said first control
signal;
first comparing means for comparing an output of said inte-
grating means with said second control signal;
pulse width setting means for producing a third control
signal representative of a pulse width in response to an
output of said first comparing means;
second function generating means for producing, in response
to said first control signal, a fourth control signal repre-
sentative of a pulse frequency as a function of said fii»i
control signal;
pulse frequency setting means for producing, in response to
said fourth control signal, a fifth control signal indicative
of a pulse frequency, said fifth control signal being applied
to said pulse current source for controlling a frequency of
said pulse current;
means for detecting a sum of said base current and said pulse
current and providing a signal representative of said sum;
amplifying means for amplifying said signal representative of
said sum of said base current and said pulse current;
pulse peak current selecting means for producing a sixth
control signal representative of a current during a pulse
peak period in response to said third and fifth control
signals and an output of said amplifying means;
HiAtH I
»H*Sf L_, V01T»««
CMTROLLCal— > MMLITM
1. A method for automatically controlling welding condi-
tions for use in an arc welding machine, wherein an ignition or
turn-on phase of a thyristor is controlled by an output of a first
potentiometer to which a fixed voltage is applied, thereby
controlling a welding voltage and a welding current, the im-
provement which comprises the steps of:
(a) detecting a difference between voltoges of movable ter-
minals of the first potentiometer and a second potentiome-
ter which are coupled together at one end directly and
coupled at a second end through a voltage follower cir-
cuit, by a differential amplifier to which the two voltages
of the movable terminals are input;
(b) turning movable terminals of the second potentiometer
and a third potentiometer which are operated synchro-
nously by a motor so that the voltage difference detected
between the movable terminals of the second and third
potentiometers may be zero;
(c) storing the output of the third potentiometer to which a
fixed reference voltage is applied, into a memory;
(d) feeding the output read out of the memory and the output
of the third potentiometer into the differential amplifier;
(e) detecting the voltage difference between the two outputs
by the differential amplifier; and
(0 turning the movable terminal of the second potentiometer
according to the detected voluge difference by the motor,
while the first potentiometer is replaced by the second
potentiometer in order to control the ignition phase of the
thyristor.
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1299
4,438,319
PROCESS FOR WELDING METAL ARTICLES
Roger Blot, Montigny-CormeillM, France, aieignor to L'Air
Liquide, Socicte Anonymc pour I'Etude et I'Exploitation dee
Procedee Georgec Claude, Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 217,665, Dec. 18, 1980, abandoned.
This application Aug. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 405,166
Ctoirae priority, application France, Dec. 27, 1979, 79 31773
Int. a.) B23K 9/09
U.S. a. 219-137 PS 4 Qaimi
1. A process for pulsed-arc welding a metal article in a
non-horizontal position, comprising the steps of:
supplying a substantially constant base current having a base
current level to a consumable flux coated or cored wire in
the torch, the flux being of the basic type, and the substan-
tially constant base current being sufficient to establish an
ac between the electrode and the article;
supplying to the electrode current pulses having a maximum
current level and a substantially constant frequency, the
current pulses being sufficient to produce a transfer of
metal in which no short circuit occurs between the elec-
trode and the articles; and
protecting the arc and the pulsed transfer of metal with an
inert gas.
sensitive medium and to form visual markings thereon,
and
(c) a lapped ceramic substrate for supporting uid thermal
printhead in contact with said thermally sensitive medium
with said planar face subsuntially parallel to the longitudi-
nal axis of said platen said lapped ceramic substrate being
configured to avoid contact with said thermally sensitive
medium.
4438 320
THERMAL PRINTING APPARATUS HAVING A
THERMAL PRINTHEAD SUBSTRATE WITH SPEOAL
GEOMETRY FOR BI-DIRECTIONAL PRINTING
Thomu R. Woodard, Austin, and Kenneth L. Martin, Houston,
both of Tex., assignors to Texas Instruments Incorporated,
Dallas, Tex.
Filed Oct. 9, 1979, Ser. No. 82,443
Int. a.} HOSB 1/00
U,S. a. 219—216 2 Gaims
4,438,321
nXING DEVICE FOR COPIER
Roland Moraw, Wiesbaden, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankftirt am Main, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Mar. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 354,550
Qalms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 11.
1981, 3109164
Int. a.' G03G li/2Q; H05B i/02
U.S. a 219-216 9 Claims
.» .(^^isssr) .J
'1S^.^^\*!'^>i''»*>'M^M^'Uw£^Mm.
• r • ^ ■ p-^^ -y-^^ -yi^ViVrn
1. A fixing device for an electrophotographic copier, com-
prising a heater plate for fixing the toner image of a recording
support passing over the surface of said heater plate, wherein
said heater plate comprises a multiple-layered laminate includ-
ing:
a contact layer for contacting the recording support;
a heating layer;
at least first and second heat-insulating layers, one provided
on either side of said heating layer, said heat-insulating
layers being selected so as to provide for a lower heat
capacity of said heater plate during the heating-up opera-
tion and until it reaches the working temperature than the
heat capacity during continuous operation; and
a heat-accumulating layer, wherein said first insulating layer
is adjacent to said contact layer and said second insulating
layer is in contact with said heat-accumulating layer,
4,438,322
CERAMIC COATED ELECTRIC HEATER ASSEMBLY
FOR TOOLS
Frank Sylvia, Columbia, Md., assignor to Pace Incorporated,
Laurel, Md.
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,224
Int. a.J H05B i/40: B23K i/02: HOIC ///¥«
U.S. CI. 219—236 3 cI,i,bs
"CTT
1. Thermal printing apparatus comprising:
(a) a cylindrical, rotatable platen for supponing a thermally
sensitive medium,
(b) a thermal printhead, movable from left to right and right
to left with respect to the platen, with a substantially
planar face adapted to contact portions of said thermally
1. A heater assembly for tools having a heated tip compris-
ing:
(a) a tubular metal base having an open end adapted to
receive and hold the end of a tool tip in heat conductive
relationship therewith.
1300
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
(b) a coating of insulating material on a portion of the exte-
rior of said base,
(c) a length of resistance-type wire wound on said coated
portion and around said base,
(d) lead wires connected to respective ends of said resistance
wire, each of said lead wires being in lapped relationship
to the respective end of said resistance wire and including
a first portion lying between several turns of resistance
wire and said insulating coating, a second portion overlay-
ing said several turns of said resistance wire, said second
portion in turn being wrapped with at least one additional
turn of said resistance wire to form a terminal therewith,
and
(e) a coating of insulating material on said resistance wire
and said terminal formed at each end of said wire to seal
same from the deleterious effects of the atmosphere.
4 438 323
CARPET SEAMING TAPE ACTIVATOR
Kenneth B. Milnes, Box 134, Meadowbrook, Pa. 19046
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,507
Int. a.3 D06F 75/08; H05B 1/00
U.S. a. 219-243 16aaims
at a predetermined time to produce a first electrical signal
corresponding to the actual kettle temperature; and
controlling means, connected to said heater means and said
measuring means, for determining into which one of a plu-
rality of predetermined temperature ranges the actual kettle
temperature falls, in response to the first electrical signal,
and for controlling said heater means so as to maintain said
ELECTRIC UK/ T j I
HEATER / * ~ I
THERMOCOUPLE 34
1. Carpet seaming apparatus comprising:
a heating means having an enclosed tunnel, said tunnel being
adapted to receive a heat-activated adhesive tape through
said tunnel;
said heating means having an insulated bottom, said bottom
comprising means for supporting the tape while the Upe is
within the tunnel;
an electrical heating element disposed within the tunnel; a
heat reflecting means, mounted within the tunnel and
above the heating element;
at least one strut disposed, within the tunnel, between the
heating element and the bottom; and
a thermocouple, disposed within the tunnel and positioned
to sense the temperature of the heat-activated adhesive
tape.
4,438,324
ELECTRIC RICE COOKER
Ryuho Narita; Keqji Yamamori, both of Nagoya; Hiroyuki
Oota, Iwakura, and Tenitaka Aoshima, Toyohashi, all of
Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha,
Kawasaki, Japan
FUed NoY. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 443,893
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 21, 1981, 56-207332;
Dec. 21, 1981, 56-207333; Dec. 27, 1981, 56-207334
Int. a.3 F27D 11/02
U.S. a. 219-441 10 Claims
1. An apparatus for electrically cooking rice with an appro-
priate amount of water, said apparatus comprising:
a cooking kettle for containing the rice and water;
a removable lid covering the top of said kettle;
electrical heater means provided adjacent to the outside sur-
face of said kettle, for heating said kettle and the contents
thereof;
thermal insulating frame means for supporting and enclosing
said kettle and said heater means;
measuring means for measuring the actual kettle temperature
cooking kettle at least once at a suitable temperature for a
first predetermined time interval at the beginning of cooking
operation based on which predetermined temperature range
said actual kettle temperature falls, whereby the rice in said
cooking kettle effectively absorbs water at the suitable tem-
perature in the beginning of the cooking operation in accor-
dance with the actual kettle temperature.
4,438,325
TUBULAR ELONGATED INJECnON MOLDING
ELECTRIC HEATING ELEMENT WTTH SPACER CLIPS
Jobst U. Gellert, 7A Prince St., Glen Williams, Canada
FUed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,154
Oaims priority, application Canada, Dec. 10, 1981, 392020
Int. Q.3 H05B 3/06
U.S. a. 219-536 5 Qaims
1. The combination of a spacer clip and a tubular elongated
injection molding electric heating element, the spacer clip
comprising an endless band having a rectangular shaped cross
section which forms an opening therethrough, the diameter of
the opening being greater than the diameter of the heating
element whereby an end of the heating element may be in-
serted through the opening and the band slipped along the
heating element to a predetermined position, the band being
crimped around the heating element whereby a first portion of
the band is forced into contact against the outer surface of the
heating element and a second portion of the band is shaped to
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1301
form a radially extending finger, the band being formed of a
material having a combination of the necessary strength and
pliability whereby the contact between the first portion of the
band and the heating element secures the clip in said position
and in a predetermined orientation against longitudinal or
rotational motion relative to the heating element and the finger
has sufficient rigidity to provide a miminum spacing from a
body against which the finger projects at least equal to the
length of the finger.
4,438,326
SYSTEM FOR PERFORMING TRANSACTIONS
Yasuo Uchida, Takatsuki, Japan, assignor to Omron Tateisi
Electronics Company, Kyoto, Japan
Filed Jun, 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,793
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 24, 1980, 55-86279
Int. a.3 G06F 15/30; G07F 7/08
U.S. a. 235-379 17 Qaims
consecutive ones of said pulses corresponding to the widths
of consecutive bars, respectively, of said bar code label, the
durations of consecutive intervals between said pulses corre-
sponding to widths of consecutive ones of said spaces, re-
spectively, said bar code label including at least one charac-
ter including a plurality of said bars and spaces;
(c) measuring the durations of each of a plurality of said pulses
and intervals of at least said one character of said bar code
label to produce a plurality of digital duration numbers
represenutive of said plurality of durations, respectively,
and storing said plurality of digital duration numbers;
(d) computing a first reference number;
(e) comparing each of said digital duration numbers to said first
reference number and producing a first binary number hav-
» »«
rz^
JBULJtaJ
5. A transaction performing system operable by a customer
for executing one of a plurality of transactions, each of said
transactions requiring the sequential performance of a plurality
of function steps by said customer, said system also including
clerk operable malfunction detection and correction means,
said system comprising:
electronic memory means having stored therein a plurality
of transaction procedure step messages and a plurality of
textual messages representing possible system malfunc-
tions and corrective procedures therefor;
electronic display means capable of displaying said textual
messages;
first means operable by said customer to cause said display
means to display sequentially the transaction procedure
step messages to instruct said customer to perform each
function step of a desired transaction; and
second means operable by said clerk, when a malfunction is
detected, to cause said display means to display a textual
message which identifies the cause of said detected mal-
function and provides instructions for correcting said
malfunction.
ing a plurality of bits corresponding, respectively, to the bars
and spaces of said character, each of said bits being equal to
said first logical state if a corresponding one of said digital
duration numbers is less than said first reference number,
each of said bits being equal to said second digital state if a
corresponding one of said digital duration numbers is greater
than said first reference number;
(0 determining if said first binary number is an acceptable
number in accordance with a predetermined criteria, and
decoding said first binary number, if it is acceptable, to
determine what said character is; and
(g) adjusting the value of said first reference number by a
predetermined amount if said first binary number is not
acceptable and repeating steps (e) and (0-
4438,327
BAR CODE READING SYSTEM AND METHOD
Robert E. Smith, Tucson, Ariz., assignor to Burr-Brown Re-
search Corporation, Tucson, Ariz.
FUed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370^73
Int. a.J G06K 7/10
VS. a. 235-462 20 Claims
1. A method of reading a bar code label, said method com-
prising the steps of:
(a) producing an analog signal in response to scanning of the
bar code label, said analog signal including signals represen-
tetive of amounts of light reflected from bars and spaces of
the bar code label, the widths of said bars and spaces being
representative of whether said bars and spaces represent first
or second logical states;
(b) amplifying and shaping said analog signal to produce a raw
data signal including a plurality of pulses, the durations of
4,438,328
CARD READER FOR READING INFORMATION
CARRIED ON TAG CARDS
Masaaki Kuranishi, and Yasuhiko Togo, both of
Yamatokoriyama, Japan, auignors to Sharp Kabushiki Kai-
sha, Osaka, Japan
FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,156
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 25, 1980, 55-134910
Int. aj HOIM 1/48
VJS. a. 235-181 9 Claims
1. A card reading assembly for reading cards having infor-
mation stored thereon at locations spaced along a first dimen-
sion of said card, comprising:
a travel path along which said cards unidirectly pass, said
cards passing along said path with their first dimension
parallel to the direction of said path;
a plurality of travel stops disposed along said path to block
said path and thereby interrupt movement of said cards
therealong;
1302
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
means for sequentially driving said travel stops to step said
card along said path; and
ing means during the dwell period, except for a second
time interval substantially equal to the first;
(e) sampling said spurious output during the second time
interval;
(0 obtaining a second integral by integrating the sampled
spurious output during said second time interval; and
(g) subtracting the second integral from the first to obtain
the integral of the true fiuorescence measuring signal
substantially free from said spurious contribution.
4438 330
WAVEFRONT SENSOR EMPLOYING A MODULATION
RETICLE
John W. Hardy, Lexington, Mass., assignor to Itek Corporation,
Lexington, Mass.
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,554
Int. a.3 GOlU 1/20
U.S. a. 250-201 11 Claims
reading means juxtaposed to said travel path for reading the
information stored at each location on said card as said
card is stepped along said path.
OISTQRTEO
INPor
*«VEFIWNT
ECTOM ARRAY 22
4,438,329
MINIMIZING THE EFFECT OF SPURIOUS
PHOTODETECrOR CURRENTS IN FLASH
SPECTROFLUORIMETRY
Michael A. Ford, Maidenhead, and Brian B. Leather,
Beaconsfield, both of England, assignors to Perkin-Elmer
Limited, Buckinghamshire, England
Filed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,072
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 5, 1981,
8113636
Int. a? GOIN 21/64
U.S. a 250-459.1 15 Qaims
U (3 so 19
fS&^?'^ DISTORTION
OSPUCES UOHT FROM
eSTECTOR SICMALS NOW
OISPLACEO IN TIME
1. A relatively simple two-dimensional wavefront sensor,
comprising:
a. an optical system for focusing an incident wavefront to a
focal point;
b. a modulation reticle positioned substantially at said focal
point, and a drive means for driving the modulation reticle
in linear oscillation along a single axis, said modulation
reticle having a modulation pattern thereon in which at
least one light transmissive area and at least one light
opaque area thereon is separated by at least two oblique,
relative to said single axis, lines of demarcation such that
the precise time of modulation of light at the focal point is
dependent upon both the x and y position of the light with
respect to the oblique line of demarcation; and
c. a first detector means for detecting the wavefront, which
has passed through said transmissive area and expanded
from said focal point, at a two dimensional array of zones
in the expanded wavefront and for producing an output
signal indicative of the light detected in each zone.
of:
1. A method of flash spectrofluorimetry comprising the steps
(a) subjecting a sample under analysis to a succession of
high-intensity flashes of exciting radiation arranged to
provide a near continuum in the spectrofluorimetric re-
gion of interest and allowing a dwell between consecutive
flashes that is at least one order of magnitude greater than
the duration of a single flash;
(b) deriving through fluorescence measuring means an elec-
trical output signal in response to the fluorescence excited
in the sample by each flash, substantially the whole of said
output signal occuring in a first time interval that includes
a flash duration and representing a composite signal in that
it includes a spurious contribution due to standing current
in said fluorescence measuring means;
(c) obtaining a first integral by integrating the composite
signal during said first time interval;
(d) disabling the spurious output of the fluorescence measur-
4438 331
BULK SEMICONDUCTOR SWITCH
Steven J. Davis, Hayward, Calif., assignor to Power Spectra,
Inc., Fremont, Calif.
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,683
Int. a.^ HOIJ 40/14
U.S. a. 250—211 J 7 Claims
/ 1 r
"T-T
i.>«>>«^
«c»«
,- fsiot.&ti^)
^ Vj.~ leKV
^11 C»e«)
1. Apparatus for switching kilovolt magnitude voltages in
times of the order of one nanosecond or less, the apparatus
comprising:
a block of electrical insulating material;
two microstrips of electrically conducting material of thick-
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1303
ness 1-3 /im, collinearly positioned and spaced apart from
one another by a gap of 1-3 mm, both microstrips being
mounted on one side of the insulating material block;
a substantially rectangular block of solid semiconductor
material having a length of at least twice the length of the
microstrip gap and being doped with boron at a concen-
tration of between lO'Vcm^and lO'Vcm^, with the semi-
conductor block being maintained in electrical contact
with the two microstrips and lying across the microstrip
gap;
a voltage source electrically connected to the two micro-
strips to impress a substantially constant voltage of at least
5 KV between the microstrips;
cryogenic cooling means adjacent to the semiconductor
block for cooling the block to a temperature TS230' K.
and '
a source of pulsed radiation producing a radiative beam
output of 10-100 nanojoules. the radiation beam being
directed at the microstrip gap and the semiconductor
block lying between the microstrip gap and the pulsed
radiation source.
rately connected to said radiation passage structure for
detecting at least one radiation conductive signal from the
plurality of detector elemenu.
4,438,333
NOISE ERASING APPARATUS TOR STIMULABLE
PHOSPHOR SHEET
Masanori Teraoka; Takao Koraaki, and Sciji Matsumoto, all of
Kanagawa, Japan, assignors to FiOi Photo FUm Co., Ltd.,
Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,795
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 16, 1981, 56-4889
Int. a.J GOIT 1/U
U.S. a. 250-327.2 ^ claims
4438J32
DETECTOR FOR AN ELECTRON MICROSCOPE
Siegried Lichtenegger, Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignor to U.S.
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 308,732, Oct. 5, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 137,865, Apr. 7, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Feb. 9, 1983, Ser. No. 465,087
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Apr. 13, 1979,
7902963
Int. a.3 GOIN 23/00
U,S. a. 250-310 11 Claims
1. In an arrangement wherein stimulable phosphor sheets for
use in a radiation image recording and reproducing system arc
taken up one at a time out of a stimulable phosphor sheet
reservoir containing stimulable phosphor sheets and each is
loaded into a cassette used for the recording of a radiation
image,
a noise erasing apparatus for stimulable phosphor sheeu
comprising an irradiation means for emitting noise erasing
light, which is provided between the aperture of said
stimulable phosphor sheet reservoir from which said
stimulable phosphor sheets are taken up and the section at
which said stimulable phosphor sheeu are loaded into said
cassettes.
1. An electron microscope comprising:
first means for generating an electron beam, second means
for providing a specimen in alignment with said electron
beam, and detection means for detecting radiation occur-
ring from interaction between said specimen and said
electron beam, said detection means comprising:
a plurality of separated detector elements for detecting
different types of radiation placed in surrounding location
about said specimen, each of said detector elements in-
cluding at least one flexible optical conductor having a
light funnel with a first larger end facing said specimen
and said light funnel being integral with said optical con-
ductor, and an entrance screen sensitive to radiation to be
detected and positioned at said first larger end, said en-
trance screen including a luminescent layer facing said
specimen and a reflector layer overlying said luminescent
layer, said luminescent layer and said reflector layer being
deposited on an entrance side of said light funnel facing
said specimen,
a radiation passage structure serving as a wall seal optically
coupled at ends remote from said specimen to all of said
optical conductors for each of said detector elements, said
radiation passage structure being an optically transmissive
material of high refractive index, and
means responsive to at least one of said detector elements for
enabling display of information from said specimen, in-
cluding an adjustable diaphragm means which is sepa-
4,438,334
GAMMA CAMERA COMPRISING A LOCALIZING
SONTILLATION INTENSIHER
Michel Jatteau, Lesigny; Pierre H. Lelong, GentUly, and Jean
Pergrale, Paris, all of France, assignors to U.S. Philips Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,015
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 29, 1980, 80 09669
Int. a.J GOIT 1/20
U.S. a. 250-363 S lo Qalms
1. In a gamma camera which comprises: a scintillation crys-
tal; a protecting window which is transparent to scintillation
radiation produced in the crystal disposed adjacent said crys-
tal; a light intensifier for receiving scintillation light from said
crystal through said window; an optical guide for scattering
light from the intensifier; and a scintillation localizer, compris-
ing an array of photodetectors having input faces directed
toward the optical guide; the improvement wherein said light
intensifier comprises a mosaic of juxuposed, identical intensi-
1304
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
fier modules, each having a magniflcation of approximately
one, and each of said modules comprising a photocathode
disposed adjacent the scintillation crystal and a screen disposed
adjacent the optical guide, wherein each module of the intensi-
fier is a proximity focussed diode tube, and wherein the local-
izer comprises a network of photomultipliers.
4,438 335
DETECTOR HEAD MOUNTING APPARATUS
Raymond L. Meeder, Palos Heights, III., assignor to Siemens
Gammasonics, Inc., Des Plaines, 111.
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,635
Int. a.J GOIT 1/20; G21K 1/02
U.S. a. 250—363 S 4 Oalms
1. Apparatus for pivotally mounting a detector head includ-
ing a collimator onto supporting structure of a radiation detec-
tor comprising:
means for mounting the head onto the supporting structure
for rotation about a selected one of a first trunnion axis
and a second trunnion axis; and
means for selecting the axis about which the detector head
can rotate whereby the head will be rotatable about the
axis which passes nearest to the center of gravity of the
head;
wherein the axis selecting means is activated by the weight of
the collimator.
(d) a second radiation source spaced from the other of said
surfaces of said workpiece for emitting a second beam;
(e) a second corpuscular-optical lens system for directing
said second beam in the direction opposite said first direc-
tion along said path towards said other surface of said
workpiece;
(0 an image receiver with a receiver surface;
(g) said second radiation source and said image receiver
being arranged adjacent said path on the side of said sec-
ond corpuscular optical lens system remote from said
workpiece supporting means; and
(h) a beam switch arranged in said path and between said
second radiation source and said image receiver on the
one hand and said second corpuscular-optical lens system
on the other hand for interlacing said first and second
beams along said path;
4 438,336^
CORPUSCULAR RADIATION DEVICE FOR
PRODUONG AN IRRADIATION PATTERN ON A
WORKPIECE
Wolfgang D. Riecke, Baden.Baden, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Fraunhofer-Gescllschaft zur Fordening der an-
gewandten Forachung e.V., Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,339
Int. C\? HOIJ 37/147. 37/26. 37/30
U.S. a. 25(K-398 ig Qaims
1. A corpuscular radiation device for producing an irradia-
tion pattern on a workpiece comprising:
(a) means for adjustably supporting a workpiece having
opposed major surfaces, and at least one partially irradia-
table object and a free beam passage opening;
(b) a first radiation source spaced from one of said surfaces
of said workpiece for emitting a first beam;
(c) a first corpuscular-optical condenser lens system for
directing said first beam in one direction along a path
towards said one surface of said workpiece;
(i) said second corpuscular-optical lens system being adapted
to function as an electron microscope system for directing
said first beam towards said receiving surface of said
image receiver and to function as an electron scan micro-
scope for directing said second beam towards said first
radiation source; and
(j) said beam switch being adapted to deflect the beam pro-
duced by the first radiation source so that the corpuscular
microscopic image drafted by the second corpuscular
optical lens system is incident upon the receiver surface of
the image receiver; and
(k) said beam switch also being adapted to deflect the beam
produced by the second radiation source to the axis of the
second corpuscular lens system.
4438,337
APPARATUS FOR THE PURinCATION OF WATER BY
ULTRAVIOLET RADIAHON
Francis Forrat, Grenoble, France, assignor to Commissariat a
I'Energie Atomique, Paris, France
Filed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,211
Gains priority, appUcation France, Feb. 26, 1981, 81 03834
Int. C\? GOIN 21/01
U.S. a. 250-436 4 Qaims
1. An apparatus for the purification of water, wherein it
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
130S
compriaes at least one pipe traversed by the liquid to be puri-
fied, said pipe having at least one ultraviolet lamp and an
electrovalve electrically connected in series with the lamp and
placed upstream of the latter, the resistance of the electrovalve
being substantially equal to the load impedance of the lamp,
wherein the apparatus further comprises a plurality of pipes
transversed by the liquid to be purified, the lamp-electrovalve
assemblies of each pipe being electrically connected in parallel,
and the assembly being supplied with a power by a single solar
cell collector.
4,438,338
LOW PROFILE OPTICAL COUPLING FOR AN
OPTOELECTRONIC MODULE
Robert M. Stitt, and NeU P. Albaugh, both of Tucson, Arii.,
udgnort to BuiT>Brown Research Corporation, Tucson, Ariz.
FUed Not. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,475
Int a.J G02F 1/28
VS. a. 250—551 7 Claims
1. A fiber optic module comprising a substrate bearing con-
ductive surface portions parallel to a first plane, an optical
fiber, and an optoelectronic device located substantially or-
thogonal to said first plane comprising two electrodes and
having a planar light-coupling surface portion coupled to said
optical fiber;
one of said conductive surface portions of said substrate
being electrically connectable to a signal processing cir-
cuit mounted on said substrate;
first flexible conductive means for providing an electrical
connection to said one of said conductive surface portions;
metal deformable device mounting means including a first
portion substantially parallel with said first plane and a
second movable portion substantially orthogonal to said
first plane for providing optical alignment and mechanical
support for and electrical contact to said optoelectronic
device; and
second flexible conductive means of the same type as said
first flexible conductive means attached to one of said
electrodes of said optoelectronic device for electrically
coupling said electrode to one of said conductive surface
portions, said second flexible conductive means being
attached to said optoelectronic device when its planar
light-coupling surface portion is substantially orthogonal
to said first plane.
4,438,339
LOW AXIAL STIFFNESS THRUST BEARING
James D. McHugh, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Dirision of Ser. No. 164,071, Jan. 30, 1980, Pat. No. 4425,583.
This appUcation Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,171
Int. a.J n6C i2/04 7/04
UJ5. a. 290—1 R 7 Claims
1. A turbine-generator set comprising:
a gas turbine;
said gas turbine including a drive shaft supported by radial
bearings;
a generator;
said generator including a central shaft supported by other
radial bearings;
a clutch mechanism effective for coupling said drive shaft
and said central shaft;
a thrust bearing on said drive shaft effective for generally
aligning said drive shaft;
a low axial stiffness thrust bearing on said central shaft;
said low axial stiffness thrust bearing including means for
permitting an axial float of said central shaft sufficient to
axially align said central shaft when said clutch mecha-
nism is disengaged and to prevent the development of
destructive axial force due to thermal expansion of said
drive shaft and said generator when said clutch mecha-
nism is engaged;
said low axial stiffness thrust bearing including a housing
having a generally cylindrical space formed therein;
a generally cylindrical thrust collar located coaxially within
said cylindrical space, an axial length of said cylindrical
space being substantially greater than an axial length of
said thrust collar whereby first and second fluid chambers
are disposed in said cylindrical space at opposite sides of
said thrust collar, said thrust collar being axially movable
within said cylindrical space over a predetermined dis-
tance; and
fluid circuit means for supplying fluid under pressure to said
first and said second fluid chambers;
jtf ^ li ** ^
said fluid circuit means including means for urging said
thrust collar toward a predetermined axial location within
said cylindrical space.
7. A turbine-generator set comprising:
a gas turbine;
said gas turbine including a drive shaft supported by radial
bearings;
a generator;
said generator including a central shaft supported by other
radial bearings;
a clutch mechanism effective for coupling said drive shaft
and said central shaft;
a thrust bearing on said drive shaft effective for generally
aligning said drive shaft;
a low axial stiflhess thrust bearing on said central shaft; and
said low axial stiffness thrust bearing including means for
permitting an axial float of said central shaft sufficient to
axially align said central shaft when said clutch mecha-
nism is disengaged and to prevent the development of
destructive axial force due to thermal expansion of said
drive shaft and said generator when said clutch mecha-
nism is engaged.
4,438,340
DOMESTIC ELECTRIC GENERATOR AND STEAM
HEATING PLANT
Dennis L. Armiger, 94 Chautaugua Rd., Arnold, Md. 21012
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 286,989, Jul. 27, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation No?. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,420
Int a.3 PDIK 17/02. 17/06
U.S. a. 290—2 11 daims
1. A method of generating heat and electricity for building
use comprising:
(a) providing a furnace having a plenum chamber with a
combustion chamber therein, said furnace generating hot
air;
(b) placing a steam generating boiler in said combustion
chamber;
(c) connecting a turbine to said boiler, pauing the steam
1040 O.G.-49
1306
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
NfARCH 20, 1984
from said turbine through coils in said plenum chamber in
said furnace to supply a secondary heating source;
(d) said turbine driving an electric generator; and
"^
g=tel
■.Id
Mii-
-PTT
-^~^7^U^:
(e) feeding electricity from said generator into the building's
electrical service.
and an input shaft mechanically coupled to said first out-
put shaft for driving said alternator from said heat engine;
rectifying means electrically coupled to said electrical out-
put terminals of said alternator and responsive to alternat-
ing current from said alternator to produce direct current;
battery means having power terminals;
switcher means having first input terminals coupled to said
rectifying means, second input terminals coupled to said
power terminals of said battery means and output termi-
nals;
coupling means for coupling said output terminals of said
switcher means to said input terminals of said electrical
motor;
switcher control means coupled to said switcher and respon-
sive to the activation thereof to selectively connect said
battery means and said rectifying means in a predeter-
mined electrical mode across said output terminals of said
switcher means;
said electrical alternator having no elemental iron in its
magnetic circuit.
4,438,341
METHOD OF AN APPARATUS FOR VARYING THE
LOAD ON AN A.C. GENERATOR
Harold Winterbottaam, Fern Howe, Braithwaite, Keswick, Cum-
bria, England (CA12)
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,882
Int. CL3 H02P 5/40
VJS. a. 290—44 9 Claims
4,438,343
WAVE POWER GENERATOR
John P. Marken, 525-149 W. El Norte Pkwy., Escondldo, Calif.
92026
FUed No?. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 440,968
Int. a.' F03B J3/12
U.S. a 290-53 8 Claims
f
'B??7WTia
77/»»i8
'■*Q^>«
1. A method of varying the load on an A.C. generator in
accordance with the speed of rotation thereof, including the
steps of: detecting the period of each half cycle of the genera-
tor; calculating the percentage of conduction required in each
half cycle in accordance with a predetermined law which
relates the load to the speed of rotation; and gating the current
flow to the load in each following half cycle in accordance
with the percentage of conduction calculated.
4438,342
NOVEL HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
Keith E. Kenyon, 14435 Hamlin St, Van Nays, Calif. 91401
Cootinoation of Ser. No. 149,978, May 15, 1980, abandoned.
This application May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,518
Int. a.3 B60L JJ/12
U.S. a. 290—45 9 Claims
1. An apparatus for converting the pitch and roll motions of
a floating marine body into mechanical energy, comprising:
a housing having means defming a fixed horizontal oscilla-
tory axis, said housing adapted for mounting on a buoyant
structure for floating on a body of water;
a first input shaft and a second input shaft coaxially mounted
in said housing and including unidirectional coupling
means for constraining said first and second shafts for
counter rotation about said oscillatory axis;
first counterweight means mounted eccentrically on said
first shaft and including means for restraining rotation of
said shaft relative thereto in a first direction;
second counterweight means mounted eccentrically on said
second shaft and including means for restraining rotation
pf said shaft relative thereto in a second direction; and
an output shaft drivingly connected connected to both said
first and second input shafts for unidirectional rotation
upon oscillatory motion of either one of said housing and
said counterweights.
1. A hybrid heat-engine, electrical motor power plant, in-
cluding:
a heat engine having a first output shaft;
an electrical motor having input terminals for connection to
a source of electrical power and having a second output
shaft for coupling to a mechanical load;
an electrical alternator having electrical output terminals
4,438,344
SWTTCHED RECnFIER DISC FOR EDISON SOCKETS
Donald Albert, Higguoai, and Anthony M. TrenagUo, Water-
bury, both of Cobd., assignors to Miracle Products, Inc.,
Middlebnry, Conn.
FUed May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 381,957
Int a.3 H02J 1/00; H05B 37/02
U.S. a. 307—146 20 Claims
1. A switching device insertable into a current carrying light
March 20. 1984
ELECTRICAL
1307
with full power in a second mode comprising: * convener.
(a) first and second electrically conductive planar contacts;
(b) an insulative spacer separating the first and second planar
contacU. the insulative spacer being at least partially
composed of elastomeric material;
(c) a means to secure the first and second planar contacts to
the insulative spacer;
(d) a diode disposed between the first and second planar
contacto so that, in the first mode, the diode is electrically
in series with the planar contacts and all of said current
passes through said diode; and
ft-*
(e) a pressure switching arrangement connected in series
with the planar contacts and including switch means,
whereby when the planar contacts are not compressed
together, said switch means remains open and said first
mode is established, and the switching arrangement closes
when the planar contacts are compressed against the
insulative spacer by a predetermined amount thereby
closing said switch means to establish direct electrical
continuity between the planar contacto, thereby providing
two paths for said current to simutaneously take, one said
path including said diode and another said path bypassing
said diode, thereby establishing said second mode.
4438345
TRANSISTOR PULSE DRIVE CONTROL CIRCUTT
Rainer Daagschat, landsham. Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Siemens AktiengeseUschaft, BcrUn and Munich, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,719
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 11.
1980, 3030322
Int a.J H03K 3/26. 3/33
VJS. a. 3m— no lo claims
jiruiL/
1. Electronic control circuit for the horizontal deflection of
a television set and for controlling a switched circuit element,
including an output transistor for furnishing the output current
of the control circuit and having a control electrode being
addressed by at least one control signal producing a time-varia-
ble current through the control electrode, comprising a pro-
grammed digital memory delivering a series of pulses and
generating the control signals for driving the control electrode
of the output transistor, and a choke connected between said
memory and the control electrode of the output transistor for
carrying the control signals to the output transistor, said mem-
ory being binary programmed in such a manner that the con-
trol signals are formed from the series of pulses delivered by
said memory and by said choke with a waveform required for
4,438J46
REGULATED SUBSTRATE BUS GENERATOR FOR
RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY
Patrick T. Chuang, Cupertino; Paul D. Keswick, San Jose, and
Jtttny L. Linden, Sr., Sunnyvale, aU of Calif., assignors to
AdTsnced Micro Dericcs, Inc., Sunnyvale, CaUf.
FUed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,589
Int. a^ H03L }/0a- H03K 3/017
VS. a. 307—297 17
nvtfnoe
MMO
onLunw
WVCTTIH
»NVrn-
MTFO
.^uf
f*° fm,
Jm^
JML.
■wsr
uoouutm
K
KiciuTaii
1. A regulated substrate bias generator for use in a capacitive
charge storage integrated circuit memory device formed on a
semiconductor substrate and having an external voltage sup-
ply, said generator comprising;
a. means for generating first and second timing signals;
b. charge pumping means disposed for pumping charge from
said substrate in response to said first and second timing
signals, and for generating an output bias voltage on an
output terminal thereof;
c. voltage regulation means disposed between said output
terminal of said charge pumping means and reference
potential input terminals of said means for generating, said
voltage regulation means being disposed for providing a
reference potential on an output terminal thereof that
regulates the amount of charge pumped from said sub-
strate as a function of the magnitude of the generated bias
voltage;
said voltage regulation means including:
d. voltage clamp circuit means disposed for clamping said
generated bias voltage to a limited negative value, said
voltage clamp circuit means having an input terminal
coupled to the output of said charge pumping means and
an output terminal;
e. a modulator circuit means having an input terminal cou-
pled to said output terminal of said voltage clamp circuit
means, and an output terminal; and,
{. a generator circuit means having an input terminal coupled
to said output terminal of said modulator circuit means,
and an output terminal coupled to reference voltage input
terminals of said means for generating, said generator
circuit means being disposed for supplying said reference
potential in response to the output of said voltage clamp
circuit means as modified by said modulator circuit means.
1308
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4»438,347
DEVICE FOR CHANGING THE ELECTRICAL aRCUTT
CONnGURATION OF INTEGRATED
SEMICONDUCTOR ORCUTTS
Gerhard Gdiriiig, Unterhachiiig, Fed. Rep. of Germany, anignor
to SiemeBs AktieageMllicliaft, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Aog. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,112
Clainis priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 13.
1980,3030620 /. •• .
Int CL^ HOIL 27/01: H03H 2/00
U A CL 307-308 $ daiaia
4,438349
HYSTERESIS CIRCUTT HAVING A STABLE OUTPUT
FREE FROM NOISE SUPERPOSED ON INPUT SIGNAL
Maaaihi Shoji, Tolcyo, Japan, aadgnor to Nippon Dectric Co^
Ltd., Tolcyo, Japan
FUed Oct 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,537
Clainis priority, appUcation Japan, Oct 29, 1980, 55-151796
Int a.J H03K 5/24, 5/153
VS. CL 307-362 15 cialmi
^'iSSiV
M^hMfLjf 4-
VoutTS^Jjout
1. Device for changing the electrical circuit configuration of
integrated semiconductor circuits on chips for the adjustment
and trimming of circuit parameters, comprising circuit connec-
tions selectively disposed in the circuit configuration of the
integrated semiconductor circuits, said circuit connections
being accessible from outside the circuit chips and being me-
chanically openable without mechanically and without electri-
cally stressing and modifying the circuit chips, an integrated
semiconductor circuit having electrical interference signals
caused by stored mechanical stresses, an evaluation circuit
following said semiconductor circuit, and a balancing resistor
network disposed in said evaluation circuit, said circuit con-
nections being in the form of bridges connected to resistors of
said resistor network and being mechanically openable for
selectively adjusting resistance values of said resistor network
anii compensating said interferoice signals.
4,438 J48
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED AVALANCHE
PHOTODIODE OPTICAL RECEIVER QRCUTT
Paul W. Casper, Melbourne, and William B. Ashley, Indialantic,
botii of FUl, aasigBors to Harris Corporation, Qeveland, Ohio
FUed Oct 6, 1978, Ser. No. 949,231
Int a.J H03K 3/42: HOIJ 7/24
VS. CL 307-310 13 claim.
1. A comparator comprising first and second input terminals,
an output terminal, a first transistor having a control electrode
connected to the first input terminal, a second transistor having
a control electrode connected to the second input terminal,
said first and second transistors being interconnected to form a
differential amplifier, a first load connected to the first transis-
tor, a second load connected to the second transistor, a phase-
inverter, means for supplying an output of said differential
amplifier to said phase-inverter, first switching means for es-
toblishing a first conduction path in parallel with said first load,
said first switching means being controlled by an output of said
phase-inverter, second switching means for establishing a
second conduction path in parallel with said second load, said
second switching means being controlled by an input to said
phase-inverter, and means for coupling the output of said
phase-inverter to said output terminal.
4,438,350
LOGIC aRCUTT BUILDING BLOCK AND SYSTEMS
CONSTRUCTED FROM SAME
Joseph J. Shepter, New Haven, Conn., auignor to Scientific
Circuitry, Inc., Conn.
Dirision of Ser. No. 852,594, No?. 17, 1977, Pat No. 4,257,008,
which is a dirision of Ser. No. 382,981, Jul. 26, 1973, abandoned.
This appUcation Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,635
Int CL> H03K 19/00
U.S. a. 307-440 10 Claims
■M4
UTILIZOTION k^'
cmcuiT
1. An avalanche photodiode circuit comprising:
an avalanche photodiode for receiving a light signal and
generating an electrical output in response thereto;
a thermistor-containing voltage divider network; and
a first resistor; and wherein
said voltage divider network is electricaUy separated from
said avalanche photodiode except for said first resistor
which is connected therebetween.
*M
1. A logic system which includes a plurality of identical
logic circuit building blocks, each referred to as an M Circuit,
said system comprising:
a plurality of M Circuits each of which responds to transi-
tions of a two level, binary input signal to provide a mem-
ory and a logic function which has a complete truth table
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1309
for every possible combination of input signal transitions
or changes in logic level at a pair of input terminals A and
B, each of said M Circuits comprising gating means hav-
ing two inputt connected to said A and B input terminals,
respectively, and a set-reset flip-flop means having ite set
input connected to the output of said gating means, its
reset input connected to said B input terminal and its set
and reset outputs connected respectively to output termi-
nals Q and Q of said M Circuit, said Q and Q output
terminals providing complementary binary outputs for
any combination of binary inputs applied at said A and B
input terminals, whereby said M Circuit is a four terminal
device which responds to each transition of said input
signal at said A and B terminals to provide outputs at said
Q and Q terminals in accordance with ite truth ubie func-
tion, said plurality of M Circuite being connected in a
linear array for processing serial or parallel data received
on a plurality of N input lines, said plurality of M Circuite
being equal in number to said plurality of N input lines,
each of said M Circuits having ite A input terminal cou-
pled to one of said input lines, with the B input of the first
M Circuit in the linear array being coupled to a reset line
and individual means connecting each of the B inpute of
the second and remaining M Circuite to an output terminal
of the preceding M Circuit, whereby the last M Circuit in
said linear array wUl be activated when an input has oc-
curred on each of said input lines to thereby provide an
output signal.
4,438,351
GALUUM ARSENIDE MIS INTEGRATED aRCUTTS
Fritz L. Schuermeyer, 1759 Southriew Dr., YeUow Springs,
Ohio 45387
FUed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,754
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 1,
2000, has been disclahned.
Int aJ H03K 17/687, 3/356, 19/00
VS. a. 307—450 5 Claims
1. An integrated circuit using metal insulator semiconductor
field effect transistors (MISFET) of the buried channel type in
which the semiconductor comprises an active layer of gallium
arsenide (OaAs), each transistor having a source, a drain, and
at least one gate, with a gate insulator of a material which
provides large interface trap sutes. the region of the active
layer under the gate having a doping and being of sufficient
thickness so that when there is a direct connection between the
source and gate providing zero direct-current bias a depletion
layer extends only partly through said region and the transistor
is therefore conducting, said integrated circuit comprising:
at least one inverter circuit with load means and an active
transistor in series across a direct current bias supply with
a node between them, the drain and source of the active
transistor being coupled to said node and to a terminal of
said bias supply respectively, an input connection to the
gate of the active transistor, means to electrically set a
threshold voltage for bias at the gate of the active transis-
tor via said interface trap states, and to maintain said
threshold voluge by signals above a cutoff frequency at
said input connection which may vary between a given
high level substantially equal to the bias potential at said
source such that an initial high-level signal charges said
interface trap states and the internal between high-level
signals is sufficiently short to maintain the charge.
2. An integrated circuit using metal insulator semiconductor
field effect transistors (MISFET) of the buried channel type
having large interface trap states in which the semiconductor is
qallium arsenide (OaAs), each transistor having a source, a
drain, and at least one gate, said integrated circuit comprising:
two inverter circuits, each inverter circuit having load
means and an active transistor in series across a direct
current bias supply with a node between them, the drain
and source of the active transistor being coupled to said
node and to a terminal of said bias supply respectively, an
input connection to the gate of the active transistor, means
to electrically set a threshold voiuge for bias at the gate of
the active transistor via said interface trap sutes, and to
maintain said threshold voltage by signals above a cutofT
frequency at said input connection which vary between a
given high level substantially equal to the bias potential at
said source such that an initial high-level signal charges
I c
I
Vm
^ti
HE-
said interface trap states and that interval between high-
level signals is sufficiently short to maintain the charge:
wherein said inverter circuite are connected as two branches
of a lateh, with direct cross coupling from said node of
each branch to the gate of the active transistor of the other
branch.
4,438,352
TTL COMPATIBLE CMOS INPUT BUFFER
Michael M. Mardkha, Santo Monica, CaUf., assignor to Xerox
Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 155,721, Jun. 2, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Aug. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 408,579
Int a.i H03K 19/003. 19/092. 19/094. 5/02
VS. a. 307—475 3 Claims
1. A TTL compatible CMOS input buffer for converting an
input signal at TTL levels to an output signal at CMOS levels
comprising:
a transmission gate coupled to receive said input signal and
having a high impedance during input level transitions and
a low impedance during steady high and low input signal
conditions,
a first transistor connected between said transmission gate
and the power supply,
a second transistor connected between said transmission gate
and ground,
the gates of said first and second transistors connected to
said input and
third and fourth transiston connected in series between the
power supply and ground, the gates of said third and
1310
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
fourth transistors connected to the connection between
said second transistor and said transmission gate, the out-
put point of the buffer being the connection point between
said third and fourth transistors.
i2l circuit with a variable injector current
SOURCE
Jan Sano, Tokyo; Maiahide Aoyama, and Da^iro Kubo, both of
Yokohama, all of Japan, anignora to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
KabiMhiki Kaiaha, Japan
Filed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,617
Chdms priority, appUcatioD Japan, May 14, 1980, 55-63641
Int a.J H03L 5/00: H03K 19/091
\}&. a 307-477 16 Clainu
gain stages, having an inherent offset voltage, and includ-
ing
means for integrating during the first half of a selected cycle
the negative of said error component, which is produced
in response to the initialization of said M gain stages, and
integrating during the second half of said selected cycle
both the positive of said error component, which is pro-
JL
e-
IT
a^'
'ifdf^IV* <W-\7 "TLu^
5
duced in response to said input signal, and the positive of
said input signal multiplied by each of said programmable
gains of each of said M gain stages;
wherein the negative of said error component is integrated
once for each integration of the input signal, whereby the
effects of said offset voltages of each of said M gain sUges
are eliminated.
CONTROL SIGNAL I
1. An I^L logic circuit comprising:
a logic section including at least one I^L unit circuit with a
transistor for injector and a driving transistor; and
supply means for supplying said PL unit circuit with an
injector current in response to a control signal which is a
function of a desired operating speed of said PL unit
circuit, said injector current always being large enough to
operate said PL unit circuit.
4,438,354
MONOLmnC PROGRAMMABLE GAIN-INTEGRATOR
STAGE
Yuaof A. Haque, San Jose; Vikram Saletore, Cupertino, and
Jcffk«y A. Schnler, Saratoga, all of Calif., asaignors to Ameri-
can Microsystema, Incorporated, Santa Clara, Calif.
FUed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,870
Int aJ H03G 3/00: H03K 5/00: G06G 7/1%
MS. a 307-493 lo Claims
1. An electronic gain-integrator stage having an input termi-
nal for receiving an input signal and having an output terminal,
comprising:
M operational amplifier gain sUges connected in series
where M is a selected integer varying from 1 to K, where
K is the maximum number of gain stages, said M opera-
tional amplifier gain stages each having a programmable
gain and an inherent offset voltage and said Mth gain stage
having an output lead which provides an output signal
which includes an error component which is a function of
said offset voltages of said M operational amplifier gain
SUges;
an operational amplifier integrator stage connected to said
4,438,355
PHASE CANCELLER FOR CARRIER RECOVERY
NETWORK
Vasil Uzonoglu, EUicott Oty, Md., assignor to Communications
Satellite Corporation, Washington, D.C.
Dirision of Ser. No. 134,735, Mar. 27, 1980, Pat No. 4,368,542.
This appUcatioB May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,603
Int a.J H03K 5/153. 3/26
VS. CL 307—511 6 Claims
1. Apparatus for cancelling phase shifts in a signal having
frequency variations and associated phase shifts comprising, a
substrate formed of a first type of semi conductor material, a
base region formed of a second semiconductor material adja-
cent to said first semiconductor material, a pair of junctions
formed in said base region, one of said junctions receiving said
signal and acting as an emitter of minority carriers in said base
region, the other of said junctions acting as a collector, and a
pair of ohmic contacts on said second semiconductor material
and disposed on opposite sides of said respective emitter and
collector junctions wherein an applied electric field between
said ohmic contacts caused emitted minority carriers injected
into said base at said emitter junction to drift toward said
collector at a controlled rate determined by said applied elec-
tric field to vary the phase shift of said signal across said appa-
ratus.
March 20. 1984
ELECTRICAL
1311
4,438,356
SOLID STATE RELAY aRCUTT EMPLOYING MOSFET
POWER SWITCHING DEVICES
Kenneth H. Fleischer, Los Angeles, Calif., aasignor to Interna-
tional Rectiflcr Corporation, Los Angeles, Calif.
FUed Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 361,184
Int a.} H03K 17/687
VS. a. 307—571 18 Claims
rrrNlt^'
T-vsu
1. A solid state relay employing a MOSFET device as its
power switching element; said solid state relay comprising an
input circuit for receiving low voltage, low power input
switching signals which vary between an on value and an off
value; an oscillator circuit connected to said input circuit for
producing a relatively high frequency output in response to
said on value switching signal; a control circuit for applying
and removing gate voltage to said MOSFET device and cou-
pling means for coupling said control circuit to said high fre-
quency output; said control circuit including control transistor
means connected to the gate of said MOSFET device and
operable to discharge the gate capacitance of said MOSFET
device when said control transistor means is conductive; ca-
pacitance means coupled between the gate of said control
transistor means and said coupling means for rendering said
control transistor means nonconductive in the presence of an
output from said coupling means; and circuit means including
a diode directly connecting the output of said coupling means
to the gate of 3aid MOSFET device and to said control transis-
tor means, whereby said circuit means including said diode can
cause cjMrfging of the gate capacitance of said MOSFET de-
vice/(mly when said control transistor is nonconductive.
4,438,357
LEVEL SENSITIVE RESET CIRCUIT FOR DIGITAL
LOGIC
Michael F. Wicnienskl, Antioch, HI., assignor to Baxter Trave-
nol Laboratories, Inc., Deerfleld, III.
Filed Jun. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 389,429
Int a.3 H03K 17/28
VS. a. 307—597 18 Claims
logic circuit and for switching the bisubie device into a
second state only when said logic circuit is in iu reset
condition whereby said output reset signal is terminated;
whereby a functional output from the digital logic circuit
is prevented unless the digital logic circuit is in its reset
condition when the system is activated.
4,438J58
MEANS FOR SUPPRESSING VIBRATION
IN A DEVICE DRIVEN BY A SMALL ELE<
Yutaka Shiscki; Junichi Yagi, both of Kanagav
Miura, Tokyo, all of Japan, aasignors to
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 25, 1978, Ser. No. 9
Chdms priority, application Japan, Nov. .'
Int a.J H02K 5/24
U.S. a. 310—51
NOISE
MOTOR
asuyuki
139605
Claims
y^=^
1. An electric motor comprising:
an output shaft;
said motor being provided with a field magnet having a
north pole and a south pole which are diametrically op-
posed;
said shaft supporting an armature and extending transversely
through the field provided by said poles;
means urging said shaft in a direction diametrically trans-
verse to a line connecting said north and south poles of
said field magnet whereby vibration of said shaA is sup-
pressed;
the angle between the direction of said means urging said
shaft and said line connecting said north pole and said
south pole lies in the range of from 30* to 90*; and
the direction of the said means urging the output shaft is
normal to said line connecting said north and south |x>les.
SRS5?"
1. A system for resetting a digital logic circuit, which com-
prises:
a switch operable to provide a first signal when a predeter-
mined condition has occurred;
a bistable device operable to receive said first signal and to
provide an output reset signal when the device is in a first
state, in response to said first signal;
a digital logic circuit to be reset coupled to the output of the
bistable device for receiving the output reset signal;
feedback means coupled from said digital logic circuit back
to said bistable device for sensing the state of the digital
4,438^59
DYNAMOELECTRIC MACHINE STRUCTURE AND
METHOD
Neal B. Royer, St. Louis, Mo., aasignor to Emerson Electric Co.,
St Louis, Mo.
Filed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 36837
Int. a.i H02K 11/00
U.S. a. 310—68 R 12 Claims
1. A dynamoelectric machine for a ceiling fan, comprising:
an end shield having an axial opening in it;
a shaft having a hollow bore through it immovably mounted
in the axial opening of said end shield, said shaft having a
first end and a second end, the first end of said shaft being
attached to said end shield and said second end including
means for mounting at least one additional device to said
shaft, said hollow bore permitting electrification of said
additional device;
a stator assembly mounted to said end shield and indepen-
dently supported thereby, said sutor assembly including a
core of magnetic material having a central opening
through it defining a bore, a pluraUty of winding receiving
slots opening on said bore, and windings in said slots;
1312
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
a rotor assembly mounted on said shaft and rotatable with
respect thereto, said rotor assembly including a rotor
having an axial opening in it. and a hub having an axial
opening through it, said hub including an external diame-
ter and an internal diameter, a first bearing positioned
along the axial opening in said hub between said hub and
said shaft, a second bearing along the axial opening in said
hub between said hub and said shaft and spaced from said
first bearing, said rotor being mounted to said hub along
the external diameter of said hub; and
retainer means for mounting said rotor assembly on said
shaft positioned near the second end of said shaft.
4,438,360
DRIVING DEVICE FOR EFFECTING LINEAR MOnON
Kurt Held, Alte Str. 1, D.7728 Trossingen 2, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 346,138
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 10.
1981,3114591
Int. a.3 H02K 7/06
U.S. a 310-83 1 Claim
4,438,361
STEPPER MOTOR HAVING ROTOR WITH LIMITED
AXIAL MOVEMENT
Hany G. MaaaoB, Priacetoii, IimL, aMigBor to IMC MaoMtici
Corp., Jericho, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351^19
lat Qi? H02K 7/06
UA 0,310-90 6CtalM
4oy_
1. A stepper motor comprising:
a stator,
a rotor rotatable with respect to the stator, the rotor having
a shaft formed with a non-threaded axial bore,
bearing attachment means carried by the stator,
a pair of bearings carried by the bearing attachment means
for rotatably supporting the rotor shaft, and
a stud frictionally, but non-threadably, fixed within the shaft
bore, the stud having an enlarged head extending radially
beyond the external contour of the shaft into axial align-
ment with at least part of one of the bearings,
whereby engagement between the stud head and the bearing
( limits the amount of axial movement of the rotor with
respect to the bearing.
4,438,362
SELF-STARTING, DIRECT CURRENT MOTOR WITH
PERMANENT MAGNETS OF VARIED MAGNEHC
STRENGTH
Fred A. Brown, Woodstock, N.Y., aasignor to Rotron, Incorpo*
rated, Wooditock, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 409,712
Int a.J H02K 21/12
U.S. a 310—152 8 caaiina
1. An electrically operated driving device for eflecting
linear motion using an electric motor, comprising a non-fer-
rous bell-type armature having an axially extending hollow
armature shaft with an internal thread, an elongated threaded
spindle extending through and in threaded engagement with
said hollow shaft and said threaded spindle being axially dis-
placeable relative to said hollow armature shaft when said
shaft is rotated.
1. A self-starting, direct current motor comprising
first and second relatively rotatable members;
at least one winding and at least one salient pole on the first
member;
at least one radially magnetized permanent magnet having a
surface defining an arcuate sector of one magnetic polarity
and facing the first member across an air gap, the arcuate
sector extending less than 360% the sector being a continuous
single piece of magnetic material
said motor having at least one cogged position at a first angular
relationship of the first and second members at which rela-
March 20. 1984
ELECTRICAL
1313
tive rotational forces between the first and second members
are in equilibrium when the winding is energized;
said permanent magnet in said arcuate sector having circum-
ferentially varying magnetic strength defining a location of
increased magnetic strength nearer one end of the arcuate
sector than the other end thereof in the circumferential
direction; and
said salient pole and said location of increased magnetic
strength being located to attract said first and second mem-
bers away from said cogged position to an at-rest relative
angular position that is angularly removed from the cogged
position.
4,438,363
ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED MECHANICAL
POSITIONING DEVICE
Rudolf Babitzka, Khrchberg, and Emit Linder, Mtthlacker, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH,
Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,677
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 23,
1980, 3039973
Int. a.3 H04R ; 7/00: HOIL 41/0%
U.S. a. 310—328 13 Claims
passage therethrough, each of the layera in said stack
being not greater than 4 mils in thickness, each of said
layers being poled to have an electrically positive surface
and an electrically negative surface, said layers being
positioned such that adjacent surfaces have like electrical
polarities;
a first electrode connected to said electrically positive sur-
faces;
a second electrode connected to said electrically negative
surfaces;
means for applying a potential difference between said first
and second electrodes to produce an electric field in each
said layer, said electric field causing a force in each said
layer along the length of said stack for positioning the
load; and
preload means wherein said preload means includes:
an actuator rod passing through said central passage;
a preload spring connected to said actuator rod; and
means, connected to said actuator rod. for urging said
preload spring against said stack.
1. Electrically controlled mechanical positioning device of
a movable element (3) which is electrically controllable to.
selectively, permit or inhibit movement under influence
and control of an applied electrical signal, having
a support (1);
means (2) defining a guide-way in the support and guiding
movementof the element,
and comprising, in accordance with the invention, a plural-
ity of piezoelectric disks (6) stacked adjacent each other to
form a stack assembly (5) in columnar form located within
said element (3);
said element (3) having an elastically deformable portion;
said guide-way (2) having walls surrounding and retaining
said movable element (3), said piezoelectric disks being
secured within said element and. in dependence on a
characteristic of an electrical signal applied to said stack
assembly, expanding axially, and applying a deforming
force to the elastically deformable portion which, in turn,
applies a clamping force against the walls of the guide-
way and, upon change of characteristics of the electrical
signal, releasing the deforming, and hence clamping force
and permitting movement of the movable element (3) in
the guide-way.
4,438,364
PIEZOELECTRIC ACTUATOR
Rodney Morison, HuntingtoB Beach, Calif., assignor to The
Garrett Corporation, Lot Angeles, CaUf.
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,478
Int a.J HOIL 41/10
U.S. a. 310—328 19 Claims
1. An actuator for producing a force on a load in response to
a single polarity D.C. voltage, comprising:
a stack of layers of a piezoelectric material having a central
4,438,365
SPARK GAP FOR LINE TRANSIENT PROTECTION
Paul J. Atkinson, Buffalo Grove, lU., assignor to Zenith Radio
Corporation, Glenriew, III.
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,640
Int. Q\? H02H 1/04, 9/06
U.S. a. 313—325 10 Qaims
TO RECEIVER
^?m
1. For use with electronic equipment coupled to a first
power line which is at earth ground and to another power line
which is at an elevated potential, a spark gap. comprising:
a first conductive pad adapted to be coupled to one power
line;
a second conductive pad adapted to be coupled to the other
power line and spaced from the first pad so as to define a
first gap therebetween; and
a third conductve pad adapted to be coupled to earth ground
and spaced from said first and second pads so as to define
a second gap which intersecu said first gap.
1314
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438,366
CATHODE-RAY TUBE DRIVING APPARATUS
YanUi Kamata, Hitachi, Japan, aasignor to Hitachi, Ltd., To-
Icyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 22, IMl, Ser. No. 285,734
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 23, 1980, 55-99906
Int CLJ HOIJ 23/34
VS. a. 315-1 15 Claims
1. In an apparatus for driving a cathode-ray tube which
includes at least one cathode, a grid associated with said cath-
ode, and an anode, and a power supply connected to said
cathode, grid and anode, the improvement comprising voltage
regulating means connected to said power supply in series with
said cathode for supplying a regulated voltage of predeter-
mined value approximately equal to the voltage of said cathode
which produces a predetermined high value of image lumi-
nance in said cathode ray tube, whereby the cathode driving
voltage is reduced.
4,438,367
HIGH POWER RADIO FREQUENCY ATTENUATION
DEVICE
Quentin A. Kerns, Bloomingdale, and Harold W. Miller, Win-
field, both of m., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the United Sutes Department of Energy,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,996
Int a.i HOIJ 25/10
VS. a. 315-5.41 5 Claims
'^i,. ,,./« '^"»
1. A radio frequency resistor which attenuates unwanted RF
energy of a first resonant mode, while passing desired RF
energy of a second resonant mode, comprising:
a central core for conducting radio frequency energy;
first and second sets of spaced-apart plates of metal alloy
having a magnetic permeability greater than 1000, dis-
posed about said central core;
said first and second sets of plates spaced apart so as to form
a gap therebetween; and
first and second conductive shield means disposed about said
first and said second sets of plates, respectively, and the
gap between said first and said second sets of plates posi-
tioned to lie at point along said central core where the
unwanted RF energy of said second resonant mode has a
current "««««nin
5. In a charged particle accelerator having a resonator tank
disposed in the path of the charged particles, a conductive drift
tube disposed within said resonator tank to lie in the path of
said charged particles, corona rolls attached to each end of said
drift tube to form gaps between said drift tube and said resona-
tor tank, means for energizing said conductive drift tube with
wanted RF energy of a first resonant mode such that current
maxima of said wanted RF energy are located at said gaps, first
and second sets of spaced-apart high magnetic permeability
plates disposed about said drift tube central core, said first and
said second sets of plates spaced apart so as to form a gap
therebetween, first and second conductive shield means dis-
posed about said first and said second sets of plates, respec-
tively, and the gap between said first and said second sets of
plates positioned to lie at points along said central core where
unwanted RF energy of a second resonant mode has a current
maxima.
4,438 J68
PLASMA TREATING APPARATUS
Hanihiko Abe; Hiroahi Harada; Masahiko Denda; Koichi
Nagasawa, and Yoshio Kono, all of Itami, Japan, assignors to
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,730
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Nov. 5, 1980, 55-156086
Int a.3 HOIJ 7/46. 19/80
VS. a. 315-39 2 Claims
IT 17
1. A plasma treating apparatus comprising:
an air-core coil for generating a stotic magnetic field which
is axially uniform;
a high-frequency waveguide for generating a high-fre-
quency electromagnetic field which is irregular in the
axial direction of said air-core coil;
a plasma generating glass tube disposed in said high-fre-
quency waveguide and adapted to be supplied with a gas
whereby said electromagnetic field and said magnetic
field cause an axial acceleration plasma flow in said tube;
a plasma reaction bath held under a vacuum for receiving
said plasma flow which is generated axially in said glass
tube;
a substrate platform disposed in said reaction bath for sup-
porting a substrate to be treated at a right angle with
respect to the plasma flow; and
a magnetic field generating coU disposed outside of said
reaction bath for shaping said plasma flow.
4,438,369
UNITARY LIGHT SOURCE COMPRISING COMPACT
HID LAMP AND INCANDESCENT BALLAST FILAMENT
John M. Hicks, Peon HUls Township, AUcghcny County, and
Joseph C. Engel, Monrocrille, both of Pa., assignors to North
American PhiUps Electric Corp., New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 282^35, Jul. 10, 1981, ahaadoncd. This
appUcation JoL 14, 1983, Ser. No. 513,259
lot CL^ HOIJ 7/44
VS. a 315—49 4 Claims
1. A unitary light source for operation from a source of AC
energizing potential, comprising an HID lamp, a light-emitting
starting and operating circuit therefor, and input terminals for
connection to a source of AC energizing potential; said light
source providing iUuimination during the warm-up period
required for said HID lamp and also after short periods of
power interruption when said HID lamp is hot and thus diffi-
cult to start
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
131S
said HID lamp comprising an arc-enclosing envelope having
spaced electrodes sealed therethrough and operable to
sustain a high intensity discharge therebetween; and
said light emitting starting and operating circuit comprising:
an incandescent tungsten filament ballast device having two
end portions;
a fiill-wave rectifier having two input terminals and two
output terminals, one end portion of said filament ballast
device being connected to one input terminal of said full-
wave rectifier, the other end portion of said filament
ballast device and the other input terminal of said full-
wave rectifier being connected respectively to the unitary
light source input terminals, and said HID lamp electrodes
being connected respectively to the output terminals of
said full-wave rectifier;
low impedance path means connected in parallel with said
input terminals of said full-wave rectifier, for passing
current through said ballast when said HID lamp is not
operating, said means being actuated responsive to a pre-
determined potential developed across said input termi-
nals of said full-wave rectifier during each half cycle of
said AC energizing potential, which predetermined poten-
tial is greater than the maximum potential developed
across said input terminals of said full-wave rectifier when
said HID lamp is operating, to provide a path of low
electrical impedance which parallels said input terminals
of said full-wave rectifier,
a pulse generating circuit connected in parallel with said
input terminals of said full-wave rectifier, for providing a
high sUrting voltage pulse for said HID lamp, said pulse
generating circuit comprising an output terminal consti-
tuting a high-voltage electrode operatively associated
with said HID lamp, arranged such that actuation of said
low impedance path means, in response to a potential
across said input terminals of said full-wave rectifier
greater than said predetermined potential, triggers said
pulse generating circuit to generate a high voltage pulse of
magnitude sufficient to ionize the atmosphere within said
arc-enclosing envelope of said HID lamp;
and
an HID lamp keep-alive and starting-aid having an input
connected across said light source input terminals and an
output connected across said output terminals of said
full-wave rectifier, said keep-alive and starting-aid com-
prising means for storing DC energy of the same polarity
as the output of said full-wave rectifier upon initial energi-
zation of said light-source, said DC energy being of prede-
termined charge and magnitude suflicient to sustain a
discharge in said HID lamp for a short period during
starting thereof and during periods of conduction minima
of said full wave rectifier.
4,438,370
LAMPaRCUTT
Robert W. AUiagton, Uncobi, Nebr., assignor to ISCO, Inc.,
Lincoln, Nebr.
FUed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240,090
lot a.} H05B 41/36
VS. a 315-106 79 Claims
n
1. Apparatus comprising:
an enclosure having at least one envelope portion capable of
transmitting light therethrough;
said enclosure containing gas, an anode and a cathode;
said cathode and anode being spaced a predetermined dis-
tance apart within said conuiner;
means for establishing potentials between said anode and
cathode suflicient to initiate and sustain an arc within said
gas, whereby light is emitted by said gas during operation
of said apparatus and an anode-cathode current flows
between said anode and cathode;
means for applying an AC potential across said cathode,
whereby an AC current flows through said cathode in
addition to said anode-cathode current; and
means for controlling the electrical power applied to said
cathode to maintain the AC potential across said cathode
at a value that maintains a predetermined relationship
between the AC potential drop across said cathode and
the AC current through the cathode during the operation
of said apparatus.
4,438,371
SOURCE OF CHARGED PARTICLES BEAM
Shigeyuki Hosoki, Hachioji; Masaaki Futamoto, Tsukui; Ushio
Kawabe, Nishitama; Tohni Ishitani, Sayama, and Hifumi
Tamura, Hachioji, aU of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,417
Gaims priority, appUcation Japan, May 22, 1981, 56-76502
Int a.5 HOIJ 7/24
VS. a. 315—111.81 12 Claims
1. A source of charged particles comprising: a charged
particles generating chamber; a tip disposed inside the charged
particles generating chamber, the tip material being carbides,
nitrides or di-borides of at least one of elements Ti, Zr, Hf, V,
Nb and Ta or hexa-borides of at least one of rare earth metal
1316
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
elements of atomic number 57 to 70; a supporter for supporting
the tip; a source for supplying material to be ionized; a first
electrode for producing a field near the tip to draw out the
charged particles generated; a second fclectrode for accelerat-
ing and converging the charged electrodes drawn out by the
first electrode; a first electric source connected between the tip
and the first electrode; a second electric source connected
between the first and second electrodes; and a switching means
for changing virtually simultaneously a relative polarity be-
tween the tip and the first electrode and between the first and
second electrodes so as to make the field positive or negative to
accelerate and converge the charged particles as desired.
4,438,372
MULTIPLE LOW-PRESSURE DISCHARGE LAMP
OPERATING ORCXHT
Anton Zuchtriegel, Taufkirchen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Patent-Treuhand GcMlUchaft fur elektrische Gluhlampen
mbH, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 193,254, Oct. 1, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,413
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 16.
1979, 2941822
Int. aj H05B 37/02
UA a 315-224 24CUima
primary and the first and second control windings form
secondary windings;
a first bus (SI) connecting said common junction (8) to the
second terminals of the plurality of inductances, and
hence through the inductances to the second electrodes
(6) of the lamps;
a second bus (S3) connecting one of the connection means
(1) on the d-c source (5) to the first electrodes (7) of the
lamps,
capacitor means (C2) in one of said buses to isolate d-c from
the lamp electrodes (7, 6);
a control circuit to control said two transistors (Tl, T2) for
alternate conduction or blocking condition and to supply
high-frequency alternating power to the lamps, including
connection means (9a. 96) between the emitters and bases of
the transistors (Tl, T2) and the first and second control
windings (L2, L2' . . . L3, U' . . . ),
and a starting circuit (10) connected to the base of one (T2)
of the transistors including means (20) for energizing said
starting circuit upon connection of the lamp operating
circuit to a power source;
wherein the main winding (LI) and the first and second
control windings (L2, U) are wound on a common core;
and
the first and second control windings (L2, L2' . . . ; L3, L3'
. . . ) of the respective plurality of inductances are, respec-
tively, connected in series, and the series-connected re-
spective first and second control windings are connected
in briding circuit relationship across the base-emitter paths
of the respective transistors (Tl, T2). with said connection
means (9a. 9b) interposed therein.
1. Low-pressure discharge lamp operating circuit for con-
nection to a plurality of discharge lamps (3, 3' . . . 3'») having
first and second electrodes (7, 6),
said circuit comprising
connection means (1, 2) for connection to a d-c source (5);
a self-excited push-pull oscillator circuit including
two serially connected transistors (Tl, T2) of the same con-
ductivity type, connected across the d-c source and hav-
ing a common junction (8);
a plurality of individual separate series resonance starting
circuits (4, 4' . . . ), connected to said serially connected
transistors (Tl, T2), each having a first terminal con-
nected to the second electrode (6) of a respective lamp of
the plurality of lamps,
wherein the individual series resonance circuits (4, 4' ... )
each include
a separate individual ballast inductance having a main wind-
ing (LI, LI' ... ) serially connected by a first terminal
with the second lamp electrode (6) of a respective lamp,
and a separate individual capacitor (CI, CI' ... ) serially
connected to the main winding of the individual ballast
inductance, and coupled in parallel to the respective lamp,
said ballast inductances including inductively coupled first
control windings (L2, L2' . . . ) and second control wind-
ings (L3, L3' . . . ) to form, with the main windings, indi-
vidual transformers, in which the main winding forms the
4,438,373
LOW PRESSURE METAL VAPOR DISCHARGE LAMP
Yodiio Watanabe, Koutou; Mlkiya Yamane, and Teniichi
Tomura, both of Knnitachi, ail of Japan, asiignora to Hitachi,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 158,264, Jan. 10, 1980, Pat. No. 4,335,331,
which if a continuation of Ser. No. 932,546, Aug. 10, 1978,
abandoned. Thia appUcation Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 383,94«
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 10, 1977, 5^95041;
Sep. 28, 1977, 52-115622; Sep. 28, 1977, 52-115623; Sep. 28,
1977,5M15624
Int a.J H05B 41/16
VS. a. 315—334 g CUdna
1. A low pressure metal vapor discharge lamp comprising an
outer glass envelope defining an enclosed discharge space; an
inner glass tube disposed within said envelope and having an
open end and a closed end; a cathode disposed within said tube;
a plurality of anodes disposed within said envelope ouuide said
tube; and circuit means for simultaneously applying voltage to
the anodes, said circuit means including ballast means in the
form of a single ballast connected in common to said anodes to
provide current stabilization and means connected between
said anodes for shunting discharge current in equal amounts to
each of said anodes, said discharge current being regulated by
said common single ballast.
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1317
4,438,374
CONTROL OF ELECTRIC DISCHARGE LAMPS FOR
SCANNING PURPOSES
Helmut Karius, Schdnkirchen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Dr.-Ing. Rudolf HeU G.m.b.H., Kiel, Fed. Rep. of Germany
PCT No. PCr/DE80/00174, § 371 Date Jul. 13, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 13, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/01802, PCT Pub
Date May 27, 1982
PCT FUed Not. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 403,512
Int. a.' H05B 4I/J6
UA a 315-362 4 cutais
1. A method for prevention of caUphoresis actions in the
case of electric discharge lamps operated by direct current, in
particular during their utilisation in picture transmission appa-
ratus with nonpunctiform illumination of the original portions
which are to be scanned, characterised in that the lamp incan-
descence period is measured in a first polarity during a first
picture transmission and is stored, that the polarity is reversed
before beginning a second picture transmission, that the lamp
incandescence period in the second polarity is equally mea-
sured and stored, that the difference between the first and
second incandescence periods is esublished and stored, and
that a balance quantity of the total incandescence period is
established in this manner during all subsequent transmissions
under consideration of the polarity which, being compared to
the incandescence period of the last transmission, reverses the
polarity of the lamp voltage before the following transmission
only if the last incandescence period had been longer than the
carry-over stored.
to an input (SI) to a dc volUge (Vs) variable at a lower fre-
quency at an output (1), comprising
(a) a filter (LS.CF) connected between said input and out-
put;
(b) switch means (1) having an output (6) connected in series
with said input, said filter, and said circuit output and on
that side of the filter which is connected to said input, for
conducting during each cycle of the ac voltage for a
period of time in accordance with the desired dc output
voltage;
(c) means for receiving a reference signal (112,VREF) pro-
portional to the desired dc output voltage; and
(d) control means (11,12) connected to said switch means (I)
for operating said switch means and thus controlling the
output dc voltage (VS), having an input (at 112) for re-
ceiving said reference signal (VREF), and an input (121)
connected to said switch means (I);
said control means including means for establishing (12) a
mean value of a voltage at said switch means output (6)
during a cycle of input ac volUge, and including an
output (to 14) connected to said switch means for oper-
ating said switch means, said control means operating
said switch means in accordance with and slaved to
instructions from said reference signal and proportional
to a mean value of said voltage at said switch means
output (6).
4,438,376
VARLiBLE SUP CONTROLLER FOR AN AC MOTOR
Marlen Vamo?itsky, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,350
Int. a.J H02P 5/4a 5/46
UA a. 318-78 2 Claims
4,438J75
ELECTRIC aRCUIT FOR CONVERTING AN AC
VOLTAGE INTO A DC VOLTAGE OR A VOLTAGE
VARIABLE AT A LOWER FREQUENCY
Joseph CoUneau, and Jean Y. Maheo, both of Paris, France,
assignors to Thomson-Brandt, Paris, France
FUed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,799
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jan. 8, 1980, 80 00307
Int. a.3 HOIJ 29/70. 29/76
U.S. a. 315-408 19 Qaims
1. An electrical circuit for converting an ac voltage applied
1. A variable slip control system for an AC motor compris-
ing:
means for generating a voluge signal proportional to the
shaft speed of said AC motor;
variable gain amplifier means for controlling the ratio be-
tween motor shaft speed and stator frequency and thus the
slip and for receiving said shaft speed signal and providing
a signal proportional to sutor frequency which is depen-
dent on commanded gain;
means for providing a DC starting signal to said variable
gain amplifier means;
pulse width modulation signal generator means for routing
optically encoded means at a speed proportional to said
frequency signal and for scanning the last-mentioned
means and opticaUy decoding information thereon into
electrical pulse width modulation switching pulses which
are supplied to appropriate switches in an inverter;
said inverter supplying variable frequency and variable
magnitude power to the lUtor of said AC motor.
1318
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,43M77
STOP CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR BRUSHLESS DC
MOTOR
MiMaki Sakai, and Mitragn Yoshihiro, both of Atiugi, Japan,
aMignora to Sony Corporatioo, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 4, 1981, Scr. No. 270,219
Clalau priority, appUcatioa Japan, Jan. 6, 1980, 55-76806
Int a.J H02K 29/02
MS. a 318-254 15 chta.
OfCU/T ~-jg
6' -K«
f6
1. A drive control circuit for a brushless DC motor compris-
ing bidirectional-rotation driving circuit means for applying
current in either of two opposite directions to said motor;
servo circuit means providing a servo output signal for said
dnvmg circuit means to control the phase and speed of said
motor; rotation detecting means for providing a phase signal
whose magnitude and polarity indicate the electrical rotational
angle of said motor; amplifier means amplifying said phase
signal and providing an output voltage that varies according to
said phase signal; and controllable switching means having a
first condition for normally providing said servo output signal
to said driving circuit means, and a second condition for apply-
ing said output voltage to said driving circuit means in a sense
to brake said motor.
4,438,378
MOTOR DRIVE APPARATUS
Toaio Tanaka, Gunma, Japan, aaaignor to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushikj Kaisha, Kawaaaki, Japan
FUed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,626
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 30, 1981. 56-
11057[U]; Jun. 25, 1981, 56-93974[U]
Int a.3 H02P 1/22
U.S. a 318-280 4 Claims
collectors of said 1st and 2nd transistors being respec-
tively coupled to opposite terminals of said motor;
a second flip-flop having 3rd and 4th transistors of a second
conductivity type opposite to said first conductivity type,
emitters of said 3rd and 4th transistors for being coupled
to a return of said power supply, the collector of the third
transistor being coupled to the collector of the first tran-
sistor and the collector of the fourth transistor being cou-
pled to the collector of the second transistor;
power switch means positioned on a power supply line of
said power supply, for conducting a power of said power
supply to said 1st through 4th transistors;
first coupling means /or coupling the base of said 3rd transis-
tor to the collector of said 4th transistor, said first cou-
pling means having a first time constant which retards a
potential variation passing through said first coupling
means;
second coupling means for coupling the base of said 4th
transistor to the collecdtor of said 3rd transistor, said
second coupling means having a second time constant
which retards a potential variation passing through said
second coupling means, said first time constant being
longer than said second time constant such that said 1st
and 4th transistors conduct and said 2nd and 3rd transis-
tors are cut off" at a time when said power switch means
first conducts current from said power supply, said con-
ductor by said 1st and 4th transistors causing current to
flow in a first direction through said motor causing it to
operate in said first direction; and
trigger switch means, coupled to said 4th transistor, for
rendering said 4th transistor non-conductive when said
trigger switch means is activated, thereby stopping cur-
rent flow through said motor to stop it, and then causing
said 3rd transistor to conduct in response to said first time
constant thereby causing current to flow in said second
direction through said motor, causing it to operate in said
second direction.
4,438J79
METHOD OF DAMPING A STEPPING MOTOR
DaTid Chiang, DIx Hills; Moai Chu, Setauket, and Solomon
Manber, Sands Point, aU of N.Y., assignors to MSS Associ-
ates, Short Hills, N J.
FUed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,625
Int. a.3 G05B 19/40
U.S. a. 318—685 11 Claims
\
010-5
RK)
R22x
Rza,
s«
IW4~:;
90
R90
s
0S0~
Sffi
T
<-«*)
1. A motor drive apparatus for driving a reversible motor
first in a first direction, then stopping it and then driving it in
a second direction opposite to said first direction, comprising:
power switch means for receiving current from a power
supply and passing that current in a closed state thereof or
blocking current in an open state thereof;
a first flip-flop having 1st and 2nd transistors of a first con-
ductivity type, a base of said 1st transUtor being coupled
to a collector of said 2nd transistor, a base of said 2nd
transistor being coupled to a collector of said 1st transis-
tor, emitters of said 1st and 2nd transistors being coupled
to, said power switch means for receiving current there-
from when said switch means is in said closed state and the
COWTWOt, UWIT-CU
1. In a stepping motor having a rotatable stator magnetic
field for driving the rotor, the method of damping the oscUla-
tions of the rotor which occur when the rotatable stator mag-
netic field is stopped upon arriving at a desired rotational
position comprising a first step of measuring quantities related
to the instantaneous velocity of the rotor due to the oscillations
of the rotor about the desired rotational position, a second step
of modifying the stator magnetic field by at least a rotational
displacement from the desired rotational position in a direction
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1319
opposite to the direction of the oscillation by an amount which 4,438,381
is a continuous function of the instantaneous velocity, and a SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR SYSTEM
third step of thereafter returning the stator magnetic field to John H. Field, II, NorfoUi, Mass., assignor to Sigma Instni-
the desired stopping position. ments. Inc., Braintree, Mass.
Continuation of Scr. No. 72,323, Sep. 4, 1979, abandoned, which
U a continuation of Ser. No. 742,690, Not. 17, 1976, Pat. No.
4,255,696, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 654,400,
Feb. 2, 1976, abandoned. This application Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No.
345,617
Int. C\? G05B 19/40
U.S. a. 318-696 % Claims
4438,380
STEPPING MOTOR EXCITATION aRCUITRY
Robert G. Kaseta, Stow, Mass., assignor to Data General Corpo-
ration, Westboro, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 917,564, Jun. 21, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,512
Int. a.i G05B 19/40
U.S. a. 318—696 4 Claims
♦ 18V .ICV O*
1 ' '
1. A disk storage system having movable transducer means
for writing data onto or reading data from a surface of one or
more storage disks, said system comprising
a stepping motor system for positioning said movable trans-
ducer means relative to a surface of said one or more
storage disks, said stepping motor system comprising a
stepping motor having a plurality of excitation windings
capable of having current pulses supplied thereto for
moving said stepping motor in discrete steps;
means coupling said stepping motor to said transducer
means for moving said transducer means in discrete steps;
current drive circuits associated with each of said windings
and responsive to an input driver signal for supplying
current to its associated winding when said input driver
signal is supplied thereto, each said current drive circuit
including
a first circuit including switching transistor means respon-
sive to said input driver signal and having a pair of preci-
sion resistance means in the collector circuit thereof for
supplying a substantially constant voltage at the junction
of said precision resistors;
a regulated power supply means for supplying power to said
first circuit;
a second circuit comprising a transistor circuit means having
a substantially constant base-to-emitter voltage, said asso-
ciated winding being placed in the collector circuit
thereof and resistance means being placed in the emitter
circuit thereof, said second circuit having substantially
greater power requirements than those of said first circuit
and being responsive to said substantially constant voltage
for supplying a substantially constant current to said asso-
ciated winding independently of the winding resistance
when said driver input signal is supplied to said first cir-
cuit; and
an unregulated power supply means for supplying power to
said second circuit.
JH
1. A synchronous motor system responsive to input pulses,
comprising a motor including a stator and a rotor movable
relative to each other about a common axis, said stator having
a plurality of radially directed stator poles, said poles having
stator teeth arranged in a circle around the axis, said rotor
having a plurality of rotor teeth arranged about the axis, said
rotor teeth being permanently magnetized, a plurality of wind-
ing means on said stator poles for inducing magnetic fields in
said poles in radial directions, each of said poles having at least
one winding; and circuit means coupled to said winding means
and responsive to input pulses, said circuit means including a
plurality of switches each connected in series with one of said
winding means; said circuit means including driver means
coupled to said switches and responsive to the pulses for ren-
dering a plurality of said switches conductive simultaneously
and energizing said connected winding means simultaneously
so that each switch when conductive carries only the current
for inducing magnetism in one pole, and so that the pulses
energizing the windings all have levels of substantially the
same absolute value.
4,438,382
THREE PHASE AC MOTOR CONTROLLER
Michael Vuckorich, EUzabeth; Maynard K. Wright, Bethel
Park, and John P. Burkett, South Huntington Township,
Westmoreland County, aU of Pa., auignors to The United
States of America as represented by the Department of En-
ergy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Jun. 30, 1981, Scr. No. 279,501
Int. a.' H02P i/20
U.S. a. 318—744 4 Claims
1. A motor controller for applying power to a reversible
multiphase AC motor through power switch means which are
adapted to reverse the phase excitation of the motor in both a
running and braking mode of operation, comprising in combi-
nation:
forward and reverse command signal means;
first and second cross coupled logic circuit means respectively
implementing forward and reverse command signal chan-
nels coupled between said command signal means and said
power switoh means,
wherein each of said fuit and second logic circuit means com-
1320
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
prises means for mutually exclusively coupling a first control
signal to said power switch means to effect a predetermined
direction of rotation of said motor and respective plugging
circuit means for braking said motor, said plugging circuit
means including pulse signal generator means becoming
operable in response to a predetermined logic signal level of
said first control signal to output a second control signal of
a predetermined pulsewidth to inhibit further operation of
the logic circuit means of the respective signal channel for
duration of the pulsewidth of said second control signal and
thereby deactivate said power switch means for said prede-
termined direction of rotation and additionally coupling said
second control signal to the logic circuit means of the other
signal channel to reactivate said power switch means for the
opposite direction of rotation for the duration of the pulse-
width of said second control signal which causes said motor
to brake,
wherein each logic circuit means additionally includes first and
second tandemly connected multi-input logic gates, said
logic gates having the output of said first logic gate coupled
to one input of said second logic gate and wherein one input
out during such momentary interruptions, and said circuit
comprising:
a magnetic motor starter relay including an actuating coil and
a set of normally-open main contacts connected for energiz-
ing the motor from the main power source;
a starting circuit for initially energizing said actuating coil
from the main power source;
a storage capacitor and a DC power supply connected for
charging said storage capacitor and maintaining the charge
when the main power source is available;
an auxiliary contact arrangement operable following initial
energization of said actuating coil to disconnect said actuat-
%-^"
K
«-i
i'i
11-5 MhTja ;22_: j-^fc ^^„
of said first logic gate is coupled to said first control signal,
said pulse signal generator means of the other signal channel
being coupled to another input of said first logic gate for
coupling its respective second control signal thereto, and
additionally including circuit means coupled from the out-
put of said pulse signal generator means of the respective
signal channel to another input of said second logic gate of
the respective signal channel to enable said second logic gate
when the pulse generator means of the respective signal
channel is inoperative, said second logic gate thereby cou-
pling said first control signal to said power switch means but
becoming inhibited upon said pulse signal generator means
of the respective signal channel being triggered to deactivate
said power switch means for said predetermined direction of
rotation, and
wherein said first logic gate of each logic circuit means com-
prises an OR gate and said second logic gate comprises an
AND gate, and additionally including logic inverter means
coupling the output of said signal generator means of the
respective signal channel to said another input of said AND
gate.
ing coil from the main power source and to connect said
actuating coil for energization from said storage capacitor
and said DC power supply such that, upon subsequent mo-
mentary interruption of the main power source, energy
stored in said capacitor maintains said actuating coil of said
motor starter relay energized until restoration of the main
power source; and
said DC power supply being arranged to initially provide a
relatively higher voltage to ensure actuation of said motor
starter relay and, subsequent to full actuation of said motor
starter relay, to provide a relatively lower voltage at least
sufficient to hold said motor starter relay in an actuated
condition.
4438383
ROCK CRUSHER MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR
PREVENTING RELAY DROP OUT
J. Eugene Edwridge, RiduBood, Va^ aisignor to Etheridge
Electric Inc^ Richmond, Va.
Filed JoL 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,947
lot a.} H02P 5/28
VS. CL 318—799 12 Claims
1. A motor control circuit for operating a motor driving a
load which cannot be started under load but which fnaintains
sufficient momentum to resume normal operation upon resto-
ration following momentary interruption of a main power
source, said circuit serving to prevent motor starter relay drop
4438384
GENERATION INDICATING APPARATUS FOR
VEHICLE ALTERNATORS
Yoshio Akita, Ichlnomiya; Toahinori Maruyama, Kariya, and
Katsnya Mnto, Okazaki, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon-
denso Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
FUed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 294,822
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 29, 1980, 55-119413
Int. a.3 H02J 7/16
VS. a 320—48 4 Claims
1. A generation indicating apparatus in a charging system
having an alternator, a voltage regulator and a battery, said
generation indicating apparatus comprising:
a generation detecting circuit connected to receive an output
of said alternator for determining a generation condition
of said alternator and for producing a detection signal
when the generation condition reaches a predetermined
condition after the start of an engine;
indicator means for indicating the generation condition of
said alternator;
a drive circuit including a drive transistor circuit for operat-
ing said indicator means, said drive circuit having an input
terminal connected to said generation detecting circuit
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1321
and an output terminal connected to said indicator means,
said drive circuit operating said indicator means to indi-
cate that said alternator is in a non-generating condition
until said detection signal is received from said generation
detecting circuit and to indicate that said alternator is in a
generating condition after said detection signal is re-
ceived; and
a protection and reset circuit for forcedly stopping the oper-
ation of said drive circuit upon occurrence of an abnormal
voltage on a line connected between said output terminal
of said drive circuit and said indicator means and for
resetting said drive circuit to recover a normal operation
after said abnormal voltage is removed,
said protection and reset circuit including
370)
OSOLLAOR
CIRCUIT U.
output voltage of the AC generator and a thyristor for control-
ling the field current in accordance with the difference be-
tween a reference voltage and the voltage detected by said
detector means, said automatic voltage regulation system ftir-
ther comprising:
synchronous point detector means for detecting a synchro-
nous point of the output voltage of said AC generator;
a microprocessor for computing a firing angle of said thy-
ristor in accordance with the difference between said
reference voluge and the voluge detected by said voluge
detector means and producing a signal representing the
computed firing angle at the time of detection of the
synchronous point; and
firing control means for turning on said thyristor in response
to the firing angle signal at the firing angle computed by
said microprocessor.
4,438,384
STATIC VAR GENERATION FOR TRANSMISSION LINE
COMPENSATION OF SUBSYNCHRONOUS
RESONANCE
Laszlo Gyugyi, Penn Hills, Pa., assignor to Westinghouse Dsc-
trie Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300^41
lat a.} H02J S/16
U.S. a. 323-210 2 Claims
an abnormal voltage detecting circuit for detecting said
abnormal voltage on said line,
an oscillator circuit for producing a pulse signal having
predetermined on and off periods, and
a control circuit connected to said abnormal voltage detect-
ing circuit, said oscillator circuit and said drive circuit and
for providing said pulse signal as a control signal to said
drive circuit thereby to turn on and off said drive transis-
tor of said drive circuit upon detection of said abnormal
voltage by said abnormal voltage detecting circuit,
wherein the conduction of said drive transistor is limited
to the on period of said pulse signal to protect said drive
transistor and said abnormal voltage is gradually removed
through the conduction of said drive transistor.
4438385
AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATION SYSTEM FOR
AC GENERATOR
Hiroyasu Sato; Kazuaki Yamamoto, both of Hitachi, and
Hiroaki Aotsu, Nakaminato, all of Japan, assignors to Hita-
chi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380343
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 26, 1981, 56-78656
Int. a.J H02P 9/00. 9/10
VS. a 322—28 5 Claims
1. A static VAR generator and network subilizer compris-
ing:
(a) a reactance means disposed for connection into an AC
network;
(b) a frequency monitoring means for measuring the period
of the network voluge and comparing it to the period of
a reference voltage cycle to detect subsynchronous reso-
nance in said AC network;
(c) a control means connected to said reactance means and
said frequency monitoring means for connection of said
reactance means into said AC network to damp subsyn-
chronous resonance in said AC network.
-m
-t9
1. In an automatic voltage regulation system for an AC
generator, having voltage detector means for detecting an
4,438387
TURN-ON CONTROL SYSTEM FOR VOLTAGE DROP
COMPENSATORS
FMcrick Rohatin, 166-10 - 15th Dr., WUtestona, N.Y. 11357
FUed Job. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271302
lot a.} G05F J/24
VS. CL 323—260 lo Claims
1. A turn-on control system for voltage compensation means
being fed from incoming service lines, said system comprising,
in combination:
compensating transformer means including primary winding
means and secondary winding means, said secondary
winding means being connected in series with said service
lines;
variable voluge corrective transformer means connected
across said primary winding means for feeding corrective
1322
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
power thereto and thence to induce into said secondary
winding means corrective voltage;
voltage detection control means having automation respon-
sive to the presence of line voltage, for disconnecting said
variable voltage transformer corrective means from its
input lines upon occurrence of a power blackout and for
placing said variable voltage corrective transformer
means as a damping load across said primary winding
means, said secondary winding means acting as a primary
winding means and said primary winding means acting as
a secondary winding means while said variable voltage
corrective transformer means is so connected and said
current electrode coupled to said output terminal, and a
control electrode coupled to said output terminal; and
a current mirror for receiving the portion of the bias current
voltage detection control means disabling itself, its auto-
mation and said compensating transformer means;
means responsive to restoration of power for setting said
variable voltage corrective transformer means to its low-
est voltage compensating point;
and means operative subsequently to settling of said variable
voltage corrective transformer means to its lowest voltage
compensating point for reconnecting said variable voltage
corrective transformer means to its input and for effecting
restoration of said primary winding and secondary wind-
ing means to their normal respective functions whereupon
said voltage detection control means, its automation and
said compensating transformer means are restored.
4,438,388
SINGLE STAGE 0PERA110NAL AMPLIFIER VOLTAGE
REFERENCE
Robert D. Lee, Denton, Tex^ aarignor to Motorola, Inc.,
SchauBborg, DL
Filed Dec 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,838
iBt CL' G05F 3/20
VS. a. 323—313 11 Claims
1. A single stage operational amplifier voltage reference for
providing a selected output current at a predetermined output
voltage via an output terminal, the voltage reference compris-
ing:
first voltage biasing means for providing a bias voltage
substantially equal to said predetermined output voltage;
a constant current source for providing a bias current sub-
stantially equal to said selected output current;
a first transistor of a first conductivity type having a first
current electrode coupled to said constant current source
to conduct a portion of said bias current, a second current
electrode, and a control electrode coupled to the bias
voltage provided by said first voltage biasing means;
a second transistor of said first conductivity type having a
first current electrode coupled to said constant current
source to conduct a portion of said bias current, a second
conducted by said first transistor, and providing said
output current via said output terminal equal to a prede-
termined multiple of said received portion of the bias
current.
4,438,389
METHOD FOR UTILIZING THREE-DIMENSIONAL
RADIATED MAGNETIC FIELD GRADIENTS FOR
DETECIING SERVING FAULTS IN BURIED CABLES
Alten J. A. De Sa, Goaforth, England, aarignor to Gcodate
Limited, Eagiand
FUcd Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 179,278
Claima priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 18, 1979,
7928837; Aug. 22, 1979, 7929258
Int CL^ GOIR 3 J/08; GOIV 3/ J J
VS. CL 324—52 10 Claims
1. A method of monitoring the performance of an elongate
electrically conductive cable sheath and its serving, including
the steps of injecting a signal of predetermined frequency into
the sheath, in order to produce a standing wave on the sheath
and its serving, and examining the standing wave profile in
amplitude and gradient of the resulting magnetic H field, to
detect a coincident change in amplitude and gradient which is
indicative of a fault, comparing the H field examined with the
K field produced by a sheath having no fault, determining the
position of distortion in the examined 17 field from that com-
parison and determining the position of a fault from the posi-
tion of the distortion.
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1323
4,438,390
TANDEM SENSING ZONES FOR IMPROVED
SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO IN PARTICLE ANALYZER
Walter R. Hogg, Miami, Fla., assignor to Coulter Electronics,
Inc., Hialcah, Fla.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 24«,755
Int a.3 GOIN 27/00
UA a 324-71.1 18 Claims
electrode means and said wire means for electrically sensing
such electrical parameters, and spinner-type storage means for
storing said wire means and for paying out said wire means
with a spinner-type action to accommodate movement of said
sensing means between said locations while said wire means
remains electrically coupled with respect to such structure,
".JSWiT ___ /»Ri«.._L /«?_
1. A particle analyzing apparatus for detecting properties of
particles, said particle analyzing apparatus including a first
vessel for holding a conductive liquid having a suspension of
said particles, a second vessel for holding a conductive liquid,
a flow cell having an aperture formed therethrough to provide
a constricted liquid passageway between said first vessel and
said second vessel, means for moving a quantity of the conduc-
tive liquid from said first vessel through said aperture and into
said second vessel, means for providing current through said
aperture, the improvement comprising:
an arrangement, including said flow cell, of alternately ar-
ranged sensing electrodes and dielectric plates wherein
each dielectric plate can defme a separate particle sensing
zone, there being at least three of said sensing electrodes
and at least two of said dielectric plates with one of said
sensing electrodes being sandwiched between the two said
dielectric plates, said flow cell being formed by said di-
electric plates and at least said sensing electrode sand-
Mdched therebetween with said aperture passing there-
through;
means electrically coupled to a pair of sequentially located
said sensing electrodes on opposed sides of each of at least
two said dielectric plates to separately detect electrical
pulses produced by particles passing through each of the
said dielectric plates;
means for delaying at least all but the last of said electrical
pulses for each particle so that said electrical pulses occur
simultaneously; and
means for summing said simultaneous electrical pulses;
whereby an improved signal to noise ratio is achieved.
said spinner-type storage means including a spool about which
said wire means is wound, said spool being non-rotating during
such paying out of said wire means therefrom, said wire means
having an electrical pigtail-like end portion emanating at said
spinner-type storage means electrically connected with said
sensing means.
4,438,392
DEVICE FOR SAMPLING AND HOLDING THE
CARRIER FREQUENCY OF SHORT DURATION PULSES
Bo A. Morwing, ASA Station, Sweden, assignor to Telefonak-
tiebolaget L M Ericsson, Stockholm, Sweden
per No. PCr/SE80/00312, § 371 Date Jul. 31, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 31, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01616, PCT Pub.
Date Jun. 11, 1981
PCT FUed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 287,711
Claims priority, appUcation Sweden, Dec. 4, 1979, 7909984-2
Int CL^ GOIR 23/ J4
VS. a. 324-79 R i claim
^^^rSwrrcH
m,muroR
i\4
AND HOLD -^
1
Ui
OSC
offeucnce
OF AMP
(COMPAMnH)
4,43831
ELECTRICAL SURVEY APPARATUS AND METHOD
WITH SPINNER-TYPE CONDUCTOR SUPPLY
Joseph W. Rog, Medina, Ohio; Charles G. Waits, HanoTer Park,
and Kari W. Nicholas, Roselle, both of U., assignors to Harco
Corporation, Medina, Ohio
Cootinaation of Ser. No. 972,041, Dec. 21, 1978, ^ipaHtfAnfil
This application Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,167
Int a.J GOIV 3/15: GOIR 31/02; GOIN 27/00; GOIB 7/02
VS. a. 324—71.1 45 Claims
1. An apparatus for making electrical surveys of structures
contained in an electrolyte, said apparatus comprising elec-
trode means for obtaining information of an electrical parame-
ter of the electrolyte proximate the structure at a plurality of
locations, wire means having one end portion electrically
coupled with respect to such structure to receive information
of an electrical parameter of the structure at a reference loca-
tion with respect thereto and for transmitting an electrical
signal proportional to the electrical parameter of the structure
at the reference location, sensing means connected with said
1. A carrier frequency sample and hold circuit comprising
switching means controllably switching between a first input
adapted to receive a carrier frequency pulse signal of low duty
cycle, a second input and an output, frequency discriminator
means for converting the carrier frequency signal to an analog
signal having an amplitude which is a function of the frequency
of an input signal, said frequency discriminator having an input
connected to the output of said switching means and an output,
,an analog track and hold means periodically switchable be-
tween a track and hold mode in synchronism with said switch-
ing means, said analog track and hold means having an input
connected to the output of said frequency discriminator means
and an output, a difference amplifier means having fuit and
second inputs connected respectively to the outputs of said
frequency discriminator means and said track and hold means
and an output, voltage controlled oscillator means for emitting
a signal having a frequency related to the ampUtude of a re-
ceived signal, said voluge controlled oscillator means having
an input connected to the output of said difference amplifier
means and an output connected to the other input of said
1324
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
switching means, and utilization means connected to the out-
put of said voltage controlled oscillator means.
a feedthrough capacitor capacitively coupling said electrode
to said first flange; and
4,438,393
PHASE-METERING DEVICE
Leonid M. Moskalik, nlitia Molodezhaaya, 13, lev. 177; Vladi-
mir E. RyadcUkov, nlitia Gagarina, 28, Ict. 59; Aoatoly P.
Byko?, nlitia Stroitelaaya, 6, k?. 16; Vladimir P. Knlesh,
nlitia Stroitelnaya, 6, kr. 29; Staniila? I. Opasov, ulitu
Chkalova, 11, k?. 11, and Anatoly A. Orlo?, Naberezhnaya
TiiolkoTikoso, 22, kr. 82, aU of ZhnkoTsky, MoikoTikoi
oUaiti, U^^JL
Filed Ang. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 294,026
Int a.J GOIR 25/00
U A CL 324-83 D 4 ctaima
CqUI«. TMIMHISSION
; ,10 OUTW eWKOUCTOd
/'I4 FL4NCE
' Pvltl iittrihittr
Sifitet tisfila^
PhcuiMtt drent
H S
II FLtNOe
14 CAPACITIVtLY
OOUPLCO SENSO*
output means coupled to said feedthrough capacitor for
providing an output signal proportional to and having a
substantially reduced magnitude from said pulsed current.
PtvtrHUl cnHtr
1. A phase-metering device comprising: first and second
input signal source; N-1 phase-shift circuits at N exceeding
two and a phase-shift of each circuit being w/N radians, said
N- 1 phase-shift circuits being electrically-connected in series,
an input of the first circuit being connected to the second input
signal source; N phase converter units each having positive
and inverted outpute and two pulse outputs, first inputs of said
units being connected to the first input signal source, a second
input of the first phase converter unit being coupled to the
second input signal source, while second inputs of the other
phase converter units are connected to the outputs of the
respective phase-shift circuits; a pulse distributor whose inputs
are connected to outputs of said phase converter unite; a re-
versible counter whose inute are connected to the outpute of
said pulse distributor; a digital recorder coupled to the outpute
of said reversible counter.
4,438 J95
CURRENT TRANSFORMER HIGH VOLTAGE PROBE
UTILIZING COPPER SULFATE WATER RESISTOR
Charlei R. Mcaenahan, Albuquerque, N. Mex., anignor to The
United Statei of America u repreicnted by the Secretary of
the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,865
Int a^ GOIR 15/02: HOIC 11/00
U.S. a 324-127 2 Claim
4,43834
CAPACmVELY-COUPLED INDUCTIVE SENSOR
Carl A. Ekdahl, Albuqaerqne, N. Mex., anignor to The United
Statu of America ai represented by the United States Depart-
meat of Eoergy, Washington, D.C.
FOed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,490
Irt. CL^ GOIR 19/28, 15/00
UJS. a 324-126 1 ciafai
1. A capacitively coupled inductive sensor for detecting a
pulsed current generated in a coaxial transmission line having
an inner and outer conductor comprising:
first and second flanges formed in said outer conductor of
said coaxial transmission line;
an insulator disposed between said first and second flanges
capable of insulating between a portion of said first and
second flanges;
an annular inductive channel formed in said second flange
contiguous to said insulator, so that current flowing be-
tween said first and second flanges flows around said
insulator and said annular inductive channel;
an electrode disposed in said first flange adjacent said insula-
tor such that said electrode is ci^Mcitively coupled to said
second flangr.
^
_i
•
s
-1
I
i
y^
Hit"
euwmtfr
ttumet
!
VMM
^»
L
M
/
) 1
oteiLf
»4fP€
etmmtMT 1 —
1
1. A device for measuring fast high voltage pulses compris-
ing
a current transformer having a primary winding and a sec-
ondary winding,
a copper sulfate water resistor connected in series with said
primary winding,
means for connecting the series arrangement of said resis-
tance means and said primary winding across a source of
voltage to be measured, the secondary winding output of
said current transformer being a function of the voltage at
said source of voltage, and
an oscilloscope, said oscilloscope being connected to receive
and display the secondary winding output of said current
transformer.
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1325
4>438J96
LOW COST VOLT/AMPERE METER WTTH UQUID
CRYSTAL DISPLAY
John D. Hamdcn, Jr., and William P. Komnunpf, both of Sche-
nectady, N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company. Sche-
nectady, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,491
Int a.' GOIR 1/22, 15/08
UA a, 324-127 23 Claims
a spring carried in said housing for yieldingly biasing said
plunger along said axis relative to said housing,
said spring including a winding that grips said stud,
said winding being characterized in that it has an axis that
is at an angle to the longitudinal axis of said spring when
«*
^
^
Sf
T
lit
M
JL
1. A volt/ampere meter comprising:
a flux coupling means;
a plurality of conductors for carrying alternating current to
an electrical appliance, one of said conductors establishing
a conduction path through said flux coupling means so as
to form a primary winding for said flux coupling means;
a secondary winding wound on said flux coupling means and
having one end thereof coupled to a second one of said
plurality of conductors;
a first plurality of prongs coupled, respectively, to one end
of each one of said plurality of conductors, respectively,
and adapted to be inserted into a power receptacle;
a socket adapted to receive a second plurality of prongs,
each of said plurality of conductors, respectively, electri-
cally coupling each prong of said first plurality, respec-
tively, to each prong of said second plurality, respec-
tively;
liquid crystal display means comprising a plurality of display
segmente;
switching means adapted to be selectively coupled either to
the other end of said secondary winding or to said one of
said conductors;
a voltage divider network coupled between said switching
means and said second one of said plurality of conductors;
and
passive circuit means coupling a separate Up, respectively,
on said voltage divider network to a separate segment,
respectively, of said liquid crystal display means such that
selected segments of said liquid crystal display means are
energized in accordance with voltage amplitude on said
switching means.
said spring is unstressed so that said spring forces said
plunger to one side against an inner surface of said
housing,
whereby electrical contact between said plunger and said
housing is improved.
4,43838
POSITION DETECITNG SIGNAL GENERATOR
Tsunehlro Maruo, Yokohama, and Masaomi InagakI, Yachlyo,
both of Japan, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,185
Qalms priority, application Japan, Oct 22, 1980, 55-147706
Int a.J GOIP 3/66. 3/42
VJS. a. 324-173 24 claims
-QNO
4,43837
TEST PIN
Joaathon H. Katz, Brookllne, Mass., anignor to Teradyne, Inc.,
Boston, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 107,027, Dec. 26, 1979. This application
Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,436
Int a.3 GOIR 1/06
VJS. a. 324-158 P 2 Claims
1. A test pin comprising:
a tubular shaped housing,
a plunger with a contacting end and a body portion that is
slidably mounted within said housing along the longitudi-
nal axis of said housing,
said plunger including, at ite other end, a stud having a
width in a direction transverse to said axis that is smaller
than that of said body portion, and
1. Apparatus for generating a phase signal corresponding to
a reference phase of a movable body relative to a sutionary
body, comprising:
position signal generating means associated with at least one
of said movable body and said sutionary body for gener-
ating a position signal corresponding to the position of
said movable body relative to said sutionary body;
speed signal generating means associated with at least one of
said movable body and said sutionary body for generating
a speed signal corresponding to the speed of movement of
said movable body relative to said sutionary body;
differentiating means for difTerentiating one of said position
signal and said speed signal to produce a differentiated
signal; and
phase signal generating means for generating said phase
signal corresponding to a reference phase of said movable
body relative to said sutionary body in response to said
difTerentiated signal and the other of said position signal
and said speed signal.
1326
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M38499
EDDY CURRENT TESTING DEVICE FOR METAL TUBES
OR PIPES HAVING A QUICK RELEASE COUPLING
WITH A BAYONET LOCK
Kari Sctambl; Eberhard HSppner, both of Eriangen, and Hans
KastI, Neustadt, all of Fed. Rep. of Gcrmaoy, aisignora to
Kraflwerk Union AktiengetellicliafI, Mfilheim, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Aug. 22, 1979, Ser. No. 68,549
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Auo. 28.
1978,2837486
Int a.3 GOIN 27/72. 27/82
\3S. CL 324—220 5 Claims
1. Probe for eddy-current testing of tubes, the probe having
a coil form mechanically and electrically couplable to a thrust
hose for moving the probe through the tubes to be tested,
comprising an elongated support member having a central
cavity containing electrically conductive cables therein, a
tubular jacket flexible in radial direction and formed with a
plurality of substantially axially extending leaf-springlike fms,
said jackets and said fms surrounding said support member and
having an end thereof disposed adjacent the coil form and
another end thereof facing away from the coil form, a plug
forming part of a quick-release coupling with a bayonet lock
being located at said other end of said jacket facing away from
the coil form and forming a connection for the probe to the
thrust hose.
4438 400
METHOD FOR SUPPRESSION OF ACOUSTIC RINGING
IN NMR MEASUREMENTS
Steven L. Patt, GiUette, N J., assignor to Varian Associates,
Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
FUed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,576
Int. CL3 GOIR 33/08
U.S. a. 324-312 6 Gaims
by inverting the sense of said first axis through rotation of
180* with respect to said first axis, whereby said progres-
sive loss of phase coherence is reversed,
(d) permitting the progressive approach to phase coherence
among said rotating magnetic vectors,
(e) detecting a spin echo resonance signal of said resonators,
said signal possibly containing transients of instrumental
origin arising from steps (a) and (c),
(0 storing said resonance signal,
(g) repeating the steps (a) and (b) and inverting the sense of
said first axis by rotating said coordinate systems through
180* with respect to said first axis, said rotation accom-
plished about said second axis, said rotation sense opposite
said selected sense and repeating the steps (d) through (e),
(h) adding the signal stored in step (0 with the signal de-
tected in step (g) to form a cumulative signal free of tran-
sients arising from said 180* rotations of steps (c) and
reinversion of step (g),
(i) repeating steps (a) and (b) and inverting the sense of said
first axis by rotation of said magnetic vector about a third
axis, said axis orthogonal to said first and second axes and
said 180* rotation having second selected sense whereby
said loss of phase coherence is reversed and repeating
again steps (d) and (e),
0) subtracting the signal detected in step (i) from the cumu-
lative signal obtained at step (h) and storing said cumula-
tive signal,
(k) repeating steps (a) and (b) and inverting the sense of said
first axis by rotation of said magnetic vector through 180*
about said third axis, said 180* rotation in sense opposite
said second selected sense and repeating steps (d) through
(e).
0) subtracting the signal detected in step (k) from said cumu-
lative signal obtained and stored at step (j) and storing said
new cumulative signal, whereby ringing incident to step
(a) repeated at step (g) is canceled against the ringing
experienced at steps (i) and (k).
4,438,401
SYSTEM FOR DETECTING A CABLE BURIED UNDER
THE SEABED
Yoshinao Iwamoto, FVjumi; Shizuo Suzuki, Yokohama, and
Yuichi Shirasaki, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Kokusai
Denshin Denwa Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 168,402
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 31, 1979, 54-98656
Int. a.3 GOIV 3/08. 3/165. 3/38; GOIB 7/J4
U.S. a. 324-326 9 Claims
"-fHZ-rfi^ I 68-X70-J
^ 66A ; 668 '
T T fl A
1. A method of gyromagnetic resonance spectroscopy oper-
ative upon an assembly of gyromagnetic resonators immersed
in a polarizing magnetic field, said field directed along a first
axis, wherein the magnetization vectors of said gyromagnetic
resonators precess about said polarizing magnetic field, com-
prising the steps of
(a) tipping the magnetic vectors 90* from said first axis, said
tipping accomplished by routing said magnetic vector
about a second axis, said second axis orthogonal to said
first axis and said rotation of selected sense, whereby said
magnetic vectors rotate in a plane orthogonal to said first
axis,
(b) permitting the progressive loss of phase coherence
among said rotating magnetic vectors for an interval of
timeT,
(c) reversing the sense of rotation of said magnetic vectors
VCMCU
mtgrXK
ruNcai-
nmm
1. A system for detecting a cable comprising;
(a) means for applying an alternating current in the cable to
be detected so as to produce magnetic flux around the
cable,
(b) a vehicle
(c) a three dimensional flux detector having three detector
elements each having cosine sensitivity characteristics
mounted on said vehicle, the maximum sensitivity direc-
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1327
tion of each element being perpendicular to one another,
and the maximum sensitivity direction of one of the detec-
tor elemenu being directed in the vertical direction,
(d) means for separating the output signals of each of said
detector elemenU into a DC component which is caused
by the earth's magnetic field and an AC component which
u caused by said alternating current,
(e) means for determining the direction of the cable from the
DC and AC output componenU of two detector elemenU
which have their directivity in the horizontal plane,
(0 means for determining the horizontal distance and the
vertical distance between the cable and the cable detect-
ing system from the AC output signals of each of the
detector elemenU on the principle that the magnitude of
the flux is inversely proportional to the distance to the
cable and the direction of the flux is in the tangential
direction of the circle having the center on the cable.
4438 402
ELECTROSTATIC TRANSDUCER FOR LENGTH
MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
Donald L. CuUen, Worthington, and John A. Robertson, ChUli-
cothe, both of Ohio, assignors to Autech Corporation, Colum-
bus, Ohio
FUed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,845
Int. a.3 GOIN 27/60
UA a. 324-452 37 Claims
mg a reset-indicating state in response to the occunwjce of
a magnetic field of said one polarity in the winding, and
assuming a fault-indicating state in response to the occur-
rence of a magnetic field of said opposite polarity in said
winding;
reset circuit means coupled to and operable from alternating
current m the electrical conductor for developing a unidi-
rectional current in said magnetic winding between said
end terminals in said one direction whereby said status
indicating means is conditioned to said reset state; and
n^ ""^J^
s^^
3«S,'%S**'-
«^^t_^
f-
rr,
i^&f
"^^^
*'■ Vi
tnp circuit means coupled to and operable from alternating
current in the electric conductor and responsive to occur-
rence of a fault current in the conductor during either
portion of the alternating current cycle for developing a
unidirectional current in said magnetic winding between
said end terminals in said opposite direction whereby said
Status indicating means is conditioned to said fault indicat-
ing state,
1. An electrostatic transducer adapted for a length measure-
ment system used to measure the length of material moving
along an intended measurement path said transducer compris-
ing: "^
a corona discharge electrode disposed to be out of contact
with said material;
a reference electrode substantially surrounding the intended
path of moving material; and
a charge sensing electrode also substantially surrounding the
intended path of moving material and disposed a predeter-
mined distance from said corona discharge electrode, said
charge sensing electrode being substantially surrounded
by said reference electrode, and both said sensing and
reference electrodes also being disposed out of contact
with the path of relatively moving material.
4,438,403
FAULT INDICATOR WTTH COMBINED TRIP AND
RESET WINDING
Edmund O. Schweitzer, Jr., 1002 Dundee Rd., Northbrook, Dl.
FUed Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 290,012
Int a.J GOIR 19/14. 31/02
UA a 324-133 17 Claims
1. A fault indicator for indicating the occurrence of a fault
current in an electrical conductor of an alternating current
distribution power system, comprising, in combination:
means including a magnetic winding having end terminals
for producing a magnetic field in response to an applied
current, said field being of one polarity in response to
current applied to said winding in one direction between
said end terminals, and of opposite polarity in response to
current applied to said winding in the opposite direction
between said end terminals;
status indicating means in magnetic communication with
said magnetic winding, said status indicating means assum-
4,438404
SIGNAL SAMPLING SYSTEM
Harald PhUipp, Aloha, Oreg., assignor to Tektronix, Inc., Baa-
verton, Oreg.
FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 337,041
Int. a.5 H03K 5/13:17/28
U.S. a. 328-63 ,2 cta,^
OPTII
EXTl...
mooei
8TAirr_
SUNAL
40-1
CLOCK
KM I
xroMi
DELAY.
QATA
LiSTor
QOCRATON
2fi
42
i3L.8TO«ULUS
,44
-r^To aAMn.a(
1. A sampling time base, comprising:
means for generating clock edges at a predetermined fre-
quency;
digital timing means for generating a digital delay signal
substantially coincident with the Nth clock edge of a
predetermined number N of clock edges, thereby estab-
lishing a digital timing interval from the first to the Nth
clock edge;
analog timing means responsive to said digital delay signal
for initiating an analog timing signal substantially coinci-
dent with said Nth clock edge; and
means for generating a sampling pulse at the end of a prede-
termined analog timing interval of said analog timing
signal.
1328
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438405
FREQUENCY DISCR^INATING DEVICE
Nobnharn Yazawa, and YMunori Salufpiclii, both of Ituni,
Japu, aifignon to Nippon GUutiu Bocld Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,273
Clalmi priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 12, 1980, 55-110521:
Aug. 12, 1980, 55-110525; May 8, 1981, 56-69617
Int a.3 H03B 79/Oa H04Q 3/00; H03K 5/26
UA a 328-152 10 Oaima
17
u
H
UMTOthl^
gfi?
.VWVE
FJEQ. _ FRpi.
300
U.
dIscSmnating
u
1. A frequency discriminating device, comprising:
a first frequency divider for frequency dividing a carrier
signal of a received signal which is amplitude-modulated
with one of two adjacent frequencies;
a frequency mixer receiving a frequency-divided output
from said first frequency divider and said amplitude-
modulated signal;
a first low-pass filter coupled to an output of said frequency
mixer for passing only a difference component between
the frequency of said output of said first frequency divider
and the modulation frequency of said amplitude-
modulated signal;
a second low-pass filter having an input coupled to an output
of said first low-pass filter;
a phase comparator receiving an output of said first low-pass
filter and receiving an output of said second filter for
detecting a phase difference therebetween;
a second frequency divider for frequency dividing an output
of said second filter; and
a frequency division ratio switching circuit receiving a fre-
quency-divided output of said second frequency divider
and an output of said phase comparator, for setting a
frequency division ratio of said first frequency divider.
gain amplifier means arranged to receive a signal from the first
fiher means and controlled by first digital function controller
means, second filter means arranged to receive the signals from
the two first programmable gain amplifier means, two second
programmable gain amplifier means arranged to receive the
two signals from the second filter means and controlled by
second digital function controller means, means for adding the
output signals from the two second programmable gain ampli-
fier means, third filter means arranged to receive the signal
from the adding means and control frequency derivator means
arrange to control the first, second and third filter means and
the first and second digital function controller means, the
control frequency derivator means being controlled by a cen-
tre frequency control input signal, and a bandwidth control
input signal.
4438 407
INTEGRABLE DEMODULATOR FOR DIGITAL SIGNALS
MODULATED ONTO CARRIERS
Hartmut Kemmesiea, Puchheim-Bhf, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and Munich,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 9, 1979, Ser. No. 19,136
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 16.
1978, 2811488
Int. a.3 H03D 3/lH: H03K 9/00, 13/00
MS. CL 329—50 6 Claims
4438 406
SIGNAL PROCESSING MEANS ACTING AS A
FREQUENCY RANGE TRANSLATOR AND AS A nLTER
Michael A. McCormick, HucknaU, and Peter Gladdish, Hoi-
brook, both of EngUmd, assignors to RoUs-Royce Limited,
London, England
FUed Oct 5, 1982, Ser. No. 432^24
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Oct 15, 1981,
8131074
Int a.J H03B 19/06: H03F 3/68
U.S. a. 328—167 14 claims
fWBUOCf
;4fe^CnMaun)
|4»^(FIITI«)
-camsiciuiwiis
1. Signal processing means comprising first filter means
arranged to receive an input signal, two first programmable
5. A demodulator for digital signals modulated onto a carrier
as input signals, comprising:
a shift register including a signal input, a clock input and a
plurality of outputs;
a clock connected to said clock input and operable to pro-
duce clock pulses;
input signal means including a signal receiving input for
receiving the modulated digital signals, an output con-
nected to said signal input of said shift register, a bistable
flip-flop connected to said clock and to said signal receiv-
ing input and controlled by the clock pulses and the modu-
lated digital signals and including a signal output consti-
tuting said output of said input signal means, and gating
means including a first input connected to said signal
receiving input, an output connected to said signal input of
said shift register and a second input connected to one of
said outputs of said shift register for asynchronous clock-
ing of asynchronously-received input signals;
said input signal means operable to extend the duration of an
input signal for said shift register for scanning the input
signal in response to said clock pulses;
a flip-flop output circuit; and
logic means connected to said plurality of outputs of said
shift register and to said flip-flop output circuit for com-
bining the signals of said plurality of outpuu and operating
said flip-flop output circuit.
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1329
4,438408
SIGNAL ATTENUATING APPARATUS
Afflbroz K. Skrofandc Bethesda, Md., and Carl A. Evert Alex-
•Bdria, Va., assignors to Harrey HubbeU Incorporated,
Orange, Conn.
FUmI Aug. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 408,900
Int a^ H03G 7/00. H03H 7/24
UAa330-51 9ci«intt
1. Apparatus for providing a predetermined gain or loss to
electrical signals, comprising:
signal attenuating means including an input terminal and an
output terminal for attenuating the electrical signals re-
ceived at the input terminal thereof and providing the atten-
uated electrical signals at the output terminal thereof,
a feedback circuit coupling the attenuating means output ter-
minal to the attenuator input terminal and including a first
switching device for selectively feeding back the attenuated
signal to said attenuator input,
output circuit means having an input and an output for produc-
ing output signals at the output thereof having amplitudes
which are functions of the attenuation provided by said
attenuating means,
first circuit means connected in parallel with said attenuating
means for coupling said attenuating means input terminal to
the input of said output circuit means,
a second switching device selectively connecting said attenuat-
ing means output to the input of said output circuit means,
whereby said output circuit means selectively feeds the
attenuated electrical signal produced by said attenuating
means to said input of said output circuit means,
each of said first and second switching devices having an open
and a closed state and being operative such that the appara-
tus provides a gain or loss in amplitude of the electrical
signals received thereby.
4,438,409
ACTIVE EQUALIZER
Yuushi Katsumata, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Sony Corpora-
tion, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,334
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 27, 1981, 56-27793
Int a.3 H03F 1/34
U.S. a. 330—107 9 Claims
1. An active equalizer for selectively increasing and decreas-
ing to a desired degree the amplitude of selected frequencies of
an input signal, comprising:
an input terminal for receiving said input signal and an output
terminal for providing an equalized output;
an input resistance;
inverting means having an inverting input connected to said
input terminal through said input resistance and an output
connected to said output terminal;
a feedback resistance connected between said inverting input
and output of said inverting means;
active filter means responsive to said selected frequencies and
having at least one filter output and at least one filter input;
means for selectively connecting each said filter input to said
input terminal for increasing said amplitude, and to said
output terminal for decreasing said amplitude; and
variable resistance means connecting each said filter output to
said inverting input for varying said degree to which said
amplitude is selectively increased and decreased.
4,438,410
VARIABLE GAIN AMPLIHER
Uurencc E. Ome, 4 Eubar Qr., BUIerica, Mass. 01821
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,844
Int. a.3 H03G 3/18: H03C 1/26
U.S. a. 330-278 3 claims
«»*
"im
::^'.'> ;■» L
1. A variable gain amplifier apparatus comprising in combi-
nation:
a first and second transistor amplifier means to receive an
input signal, said input signal comprising an AC input
signal and a noise signal, said first and second transistor
amplifier means respectively having an input terminal,
said input terminal of said first transistor amplifier means
being connected to said input terminal of said second
transistor amplifier means by a first and second capacitor,
the common junction of said first and second capacitor
forming an input terminal, said input signal being applied
to said input terminal,
a signal detector means connected to the output of said
second transistor amplifier means, said second transistor
amplifier means amplifying said input signal to provide an
amplified output signal, said signal detector means receiv-
ing said amplified output signal from said second transistor
amplifier means, said signal detector means rectifying said
amplified output signal to provide DC voluges in re-
sponse thereto,
a charge storage means connected to said signal detector
means to receive said DC voluges, said charge storage
means storing said DC voluge to provide a DC bias
volUge to the input of said first transistor amplifier means,
said DC bias voluge varying directly with said input
signal, said first transistor amplifier means providing an
output voluge in response to said input signal and said DC
bias voluge, said first transistor amplifier means maintain-
ing a constant input^output signal ratio over a wide dy-
namic range of said input signal.
1330
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M3M11
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATING METHOD AND
APPARATUS FOR THERMALLY STABILIZING
AMPLIFIER DEVICES
Michael D. RaMn, Swatogi, awl Paag T. Ho, Monntaia View,
both of Califs aMJgnori to Ford Aeroapace A Commnnications
CoryoratiOB, Detroit, Mich.
Filed JbL 20, IMl, Ser. No. 284,755
lat CL^ H03F 3/04
MS, CL 330—289 10 daiiM
'»>
a.c. output signal whose frequency is a function of the value of
a control signal thereto, a frequency/d.c. signal converter
connected for producing a d.c. output signal which is a func-
tion of the frequency of the oscillator output signal, a signal
comparator having two inputs and an output, first signal con-
ducting means connected for applying to one comparator input
a signal corresponding in value to the converter output signal,
and connecting means connected for applying to the oscillator
a control signal corresponding to the signal at the comparator
output, the circuit arrangement further including an a.c. signal
source, a second frequency/d.c. signal converter connected
•oe-
cacDCf
MLtMf
a
■ lOTM
MOOUL*
roa
isrs„
1. For use in a power supply to an amplifier device, said
amplifier device being operative to exhibit monotonic instabil-
ity of at least one operating parameter at a constant bias on a
large signal electrode with varying temperature and being
operative to exhibit stability of said parameter with pre-deter-
mined controlled variation of said bias on said large signal
electrode as a function of temperature, an apparatus for con-
trolUng variation of power supply output, said power supply
output for application at said large signal electrode of said
amplifier device, said apparatus comprising:
bias monitor circuit means, said bias monitor circuit means
being coupled to receive as a sensed input signal a parame-
ter representative of ambient temperature, said bias moni-
tor circuit being operative to convert said ambient temper-
ature sensed input signal into an electric signal representa-
tive of a thermal value for use in regulating said power
supply output; and
feedback signal generating means, said feedback signal gen-
erating means being coupled to receive said electric signal
for varying said power supply output to follow said pre-
determined controlled variation of electrode bias on said
large signal electrode as a function of temperature,
wherein said feedback signal generating means includes a
DC-to-DC converter circuit comprising a DC source, a
switching means for chopping said source to form and AC
voltage waveform, and rectifier and filter means to con-
vert said AC voltage waveform to a DC output voltage,
and wherein said feedback signal generating means further
comprises a reference voltage source, a voltage compara-
tor circuit connected to compare said control signal with
said reference voltage source and to generate an error
signal, a width modulator circuit connected to receive
said error signal and, in response to said error signal, to
control the pulse width of output signals of said switching
means.
.
FIMT
aanom
-I
r»
fJ
FIMT
LOW
FWT
OWHUKM
<
-J
\\
— 1
-^ n». M
COWfRTCX
-^ «ww
^t
^5
1^
■CM 1
^m h
noa
OtWUTW
^11
<1
~~'
<
TMK
ecwtna
"■
^12
1
COHTMl UXFI
for producing a d.c. output signal which is a function of the
frequency of the a.c. signal produced by the source, and sec-
ond signal conducting means connected for applying to the
other comparator input a signal corresponding in value to the
second converter output signal, the improvement wherein
there are at least two said control loops, and said second con-
ducting means comprises adjustable signal control means con-
nected between the output of said second converter and the
other input of said comparator of each said loop for applying to
each said associated comparator input a signal which differs in
value from and varies in proportion with the output signal
from said second converter.
4,438,413
SERIAL MINIMUM SHIFT KEYED MODULATOR
INCLUDING NOTCH AND BANDPASS FILTERS
Carl R. Ryan, GUbert, Ariz., aaaignor to Motorola Inc., Schaum*
burg, lU.
FUed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,419
Int a.3 H03C 3/00; H04L 27/12
U.S. CL 332—16 R 10 Claima
3S
J7
CCl)
BAND PASS
FILTER
"C30"
nCl)
4,438,412
OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY CONTROL LOOP
Christopher W. Malioowaki, and Heinz Rinderle, both of HeU-
bromi. Fed. Rep. of Germany, aadgnora to Telefunken Elec-
trooic GnbH, Heilbronn, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuatioo of Ser. No. 85^33, Oct 16, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcatioB Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,994
Claims priority, appUcatioa Fed. Rep. of Gennany, Oct 16,
1978, 2844936; Oct 16, 1978, 2844939; Oct 16, 1978, 2844938;
Oct 16, 1978, 2845005; Oct 16, 1978, 2845006
Int CL^ H03L 7/16
UA a. 331—2 7 Claims
1. In a circuit arrangement including at least one control
loop composed of a controllable oscillator for producing an
1. A serial minimum-shift keyed modulator comprising:
(a) biphase modulator means having a first input for receiv-
ing a serial bit stream of data, a second input for receiving
a relatively high frequency carrier, and an output for
supplying the carrier biphase modulated by the serial bit
stream;
(b) a conversion filter coupled to said biphase modulator
means and providing a minimum-shift keyed signal, said
conversion filter including
(1) a notch filter having a notch adjacent to the carrier
frequency and in the frequency spectrum of the biphase
modulator, and
(2) a bandpass filter having a bandpass positioned to ex-
tend above and below the carrier frequency for the
biphase modulated carrier, said notch and bandpass
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1331
niters being coupled together to form the conversion
4,438,414
TONE CONTROL aRCUIT
Denis Blachot Haussmann, France, assignor to Tbomsoo<SF.
Puis, France
FUed Not. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,494
Claims priority, appUcation France, No?. 14, 1980, 80 24231
Int a.J H03H 7/03
UAa.333-28T ^cUdms
said combinations of thin fUm pads into and out of opera-
tion to esublish said large attenuation steps, and for actu-
ating the phase-controlling means of said phase-controlled
attenuator to establish said small attenuation steps;
and means for connecting said attenuators in tandem to
combine said large and small attenuation steps;
whereby a range of attenuation over a broad frequency band
18 provided with said small steps esublished monotoni-
cally between said large attenuation steps and with high
resolution and accuracy.
201
7 ' '
11 43
40
i '23 44
4,438,416
PICOSECOND DELAY DEVICE
NonnM H. SchlUer. Queens, and Robert R. AlAuo, Bronx, both
or N.Y., assignors to Hamamatsn Corporation, Middlesex.
N J.
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,486
Int a.» HOIP 9/00
U.S. a. 333-160 g cia,^
I 1
1. A tone control circuit for connecting an input terminal
with a high impedance input circuit, said tone control circuit
mcludmg at least two parallel channels with each of said chan-
nels mcluding an electronic potentiometer having a low impe-
dance output wherein each of said at least two parallel chan-
nels further comprises, a passive filter with each passive filter
compnsing a series element and a parallel element wherein said
series element is connected between the output of each elec-
tron potentiometer and said high impedance circuit in such a
manner that said parallel element of each of said filter is formed
by the parallel association of the series elements of the other of
said passive filters of said at least two parallel channels.
4 438 415
DIGITAL PROGRAMMABLE ATTENUATOR
Samuel Hopfer, BrooUyn, N.Y., assignor to General MicrowaTe
Corporation, Farmingdale, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,737
Int a.J HOIP J/22
VS. a 333-81 A 20 Claims
1. A delay device for use in deUying the time of arrival of an
electrical signal at fixed incremente in the picosecond range
and startmg at a time interval in the picosecond range, said
delay device comprising a plurality of three port electrical
connectors fuedly coupled together in series relationship, the
construction and physical length of each port of each connec-
tor being such as to produce a time delay in the picosecond
range of an electrical signal passing through, whereby an
electrical signal introduced into any one port and emerging
through any other port will be delayed in time in accordance
with the total number of ports through which the signal is
passed.
1. A digital programmable attenuator for microwave signals
over a broad band of frequencies, said attenuator comprising:
a programmable phase shiftless resistive pad attenuator for
switching large steps of attenuation including a plurality
of pads of thin resistive films corresponding to said differ-
ent large steps of attenuation, and means for switching at
high speed different combinations of said resistive pads
into and out of operation;
a programmable broadband phase-controlled attenuator for
switching a plurality of small steps of attenuation, includ-
ing means for controlling at high speeds the phase thereof
to establish said small attenuation steps;
means for digitally programming the actuation of said atten-
uators into operation separately and together, including
means for actuating said resistive pad attenuator to switch
4438 417
FILTER QRCUrr UTILIZING A SURFACE ACOUSnC
WAVE nLTER
Kiyoftami Yamashita, Yokosuka, and ToshUcazu Kodama, Yoko-
hama, both of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Dcnki
KabushUd Kaisha, Kaaagawa, Japan
FUed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,426
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 17, 1980. 55-80865:
Feb. 25, 1981, 56-25445
Int a.5 H03H 9/125. 9/64
UA a 333-193 3 dm^
*«/r
1. A surface acoustic wave band-pass filter circuit compris-
ing: a surface acoustic wave filter device including a piezoelec-
1332
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
trie substrate, and a uniform transducer and a weighted trans-
ducer which are disposed apart each other on a surface of the
substrate, the uniform transducer comprising a first comb
electrode and a second comb electrode, the first comb elec-
trode having a first plurality of fmger electrodes, and a first bus
bar, bridging each end of said first plurality of electrodes, said
second comb electrode having a second plurality of electrodes,
said second plurality of electrodes being one less than the
number of finger electrodes of a comb of a uniform transducer
of a surface acoustic wave filter device designed to represent a
frequency response which has a constant amoount of attenua-
tion in a transmit band of the device, and a second bus bar
bridging each end of said second plurality of finger electrodes,
an inductance element connected to the weighted transducer
of the surface acoustic wave device to compensate a ca-
pacitance existing in the transducer connected to the
industance element; and
means for adjusting Q-factor of the resonant circuit formed
by said inductance element and the capacitance of the
surface acoustic wave filter device and for optimizing a
flatness of a frequency response in the pass band of the
band pass filt?r circuit.
4,438 418
LOW-WATTAGE SOLENOID
James A. Neff, Bloomfield Township, Oakland County, Mich.,
assignor to Mac Valves, Inc., Wixom, Mich.
FUed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,784
Int a.J HOIF 7m
U.S. a. 335—255 3 Claims
1. A solenoid assembly, including, a support frame having a
transverse member and a pair of leg members, a solenoid coil
mounted within the support frame, a flux plate releasably
mounted between the support frame leg members for retaining
the solenoid coil in the support frame, a pole piece movably
mounted in one end of an axial bore through the solenoid coil
and through the flux plate, a solenoid armature movably
mounted in the other end of said axial bore through said sole-
noid coil, and guide means for guiding the movement of the
pole piece and armature in the axial bore through the solenoid
coil, characterized in that said guide means includes:
(a) a first bushing mounted on the flux plate, and having a
transverse flange which is seated against an outer trans-
verse face of the flux plate, and an integral tubular body
which extends inward through the flux plate and into the
axial bore in the solenoid coil and telescopically along the
pole piece and in sliding contact therewith; and,
(b) a second bushing mounted on the support frame and
having a flange seated on an outer transverse face of the
support frame transverse member and an integral tubular
body that extends inward through the support frame
transverse member and telescopically along the solenoid
armature and in sliding contact therewith.
4,438,419
SERIAL RING ACTUATOR
Edward F. Helinski, Johnson Qty, N.Y., assignor to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation, Armonlt, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 402,484
Int a.3 HOIF 7/0%
U.S. a. 335—261 9 ri,!,..
1. A linear solenoid device comprising
stator means including
a plurality of magnetizable annular stotor pole members
having aligned central openings including a pair of end
stator pole members and at least one intermediate pole
member axially spaced from and separated by axial gaps
between said end pole members,
flux generating means comprising a single cylindrical coil
means between said end pole members and surrounding
said intermediate pole member,
said cylindrical coil means having a central opening coax-
ial with said central openings of said stator pole mem-
bers,
means including casing means forming a magnetic path
between said end pole members for flux generated by
said coil means when energized, and
armature means freely movable axially within said central
opening of said pole members and said coil means includ-
ing
a plurality of magnetizable annular armature pole ele-
ments disposed in axially spaced relationship,
said armature pole elements being concentric with said
stator pole members so as to form a plurality of axially
spaced annular air gaps with said stator pole members,
said armature pole elements being dimensioned and ar-
ranged to be received simultaneously in said central
openings of said stator pole members,
said armature pole elements having a length whereby
when said armature means is at a rest position said
armature pole elements each have a portion at one end
in a partial overlap relationship with one of said stator
pole members and an opposite end having an axial
separation from the near edge of an adjacent one of said
stator pole members, and
an armature support body axially spacing said armature
pole members,
said armature support body having portions of non-mag-
netizable material separating said armature pole ele-
ments.
4,438,420
ELECTROMAGNETIC ACTIVATION DEVICE
Heinz Leiber, Oberriexingen, and Alwin Stegmeier, Schwiebcr*
dingen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert
Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 423,578
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 3.
1982, 3107619
Int a.3 HOIF 7/06
U.S. a. 335—275 10 Claims
1. An electromagnetic activation device for valves compris-
ing a magnetic body, a hinged armature fastened on one side to
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1333
said body and a valve actuation rod connected to said arma-
ture, a leaf spring connected at one end to said magnetic body
and having a free end, said hinged armature attached to said
1. A mounting bracket for a transformer of the type having
a core structure having a center opening and a winding wound
around a portion of said core, the improvement wherein said
bracket comprises:
a U-shaped base portion having a foreward end and a rear-
ward end;
a vertical channel extending upwardly from the forward end
of said U-shaped base portion;
first and second members extending forwardly from a re-
spective outer side of the upper portion of said vertical
channel, said first and second members including respec-
tive downwardly facing surface portions disposed in the
same plane; and
third and fourth members extending outwardly from a re-
spective outer side of the rear portion of said U-shaped
base portion, said third and fourth members including
respective upwardly facing surface portions, located in a
plane parallel to the plane in which the first and second
members are located.
faulty condition when a faulty condition of at least one of
said items is detected by said detecting step;
measuring the lapse of time after the display of said faulty
condition is initiated by said displaying step; and
.^
tYfic
free end of said leaf spring having an attachment point on one
side of a single pole magnetic body and said hinged armature
extends into the magnetic body while leaving a guide air gap
between said armature and said magnetic body.
4,438421
MOUNTING BRACKET FOR A TRANSFORMER
Earl A. Leach, Jr., MasonviUe, N.Y., assignor to The Bendix
Corporation, Southfleld, Mich.
FUed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423,355
Int a.3 HOIF 15/02
UAa336-65 6Claims
-r^RST^
generating a voice to give a warning of said faulty condition
inside said vehicle compartment when the lapse of time
measured by said measuring step exceeds a predetermined
time.
4,438,423
DEVICE FOR PRODUCING AN OPTICAL OR ACOUSTIC
SHIFT INSTRUCTION
Bemhard Stier, KeUcheim-Fischbach, Fed. Rep. of GcrmaBy,
assignor to VDO Adolf SchindUng AG, Frankfurt am Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,973
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 9.
1981,3108920
Int a.J B60Q 1/26: B60K 23/00
U.S. a. 340—52 R 7 n,i,^
4,438,422
WARNING METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR VEHICLES
Tadao Nojiri, Oobu; Keqji Kanemaru, Chiryu; Takayoahi Ni>
shUtawa, Kariya; Masahiro Matsuyana, Kariya, and Yoji Ito,
Kariya, aU of Japan, assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd.,
Kariya, Japan
FUed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,253
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 5, 1980, 55-123821
Int a.3 B60Q i/00; G08B 21/00
U A CL 340-52 F 7 Claims
1. A warning method for vehicles comprising the steps of:
detecting the condition of each of a plurality of items of a
vehicle which are to be monitored;
displaying, inside a vehicle compartment of said vehicle, a
1. In a device for producing an optical or acoustic shift
instruction in which a speed-of-roution signal is fed to a first
threshold switch for connecting an upshift signal indicator and
to a second threshold switch for connecting a downshift signal
indicator, the device being adapted to cooperate with a gas
pedal of a vehicle, the improvement comprising
an AND gate arranged behind the first threshold switch,
a gas-pedal position switch being connected to said AND
gate at an input side of the latter such that when the gu
pedal is depressed only slightly it is connected to the
upshift signal indicator, and
means comprising a third threshold switch in parallel to the
two other said threshold switches, being connected di-
rectly with said upshift signal indicator and for becoming
conductive when the maximum permiuible speed of rota-
tion is reached.
1334
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438^24
ELECTRIC APPARATUS FOR A VEHICLE SAFETY
DEVICE
Toihio Yami, A^Jo, Japu, aMignor to Nippondemo Co^ LtiL,
Karijra, Japan
FUcd Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,555
dalma priority, appUcation Japan, Oct 2, 1980, 55-138141
Int CL^ B60Q 1/00
\i&. a. 340—52 H 7 Claims
"15
A
Li^.
6.rht:;;:r-
W'^im
rw-
&ix' f-"
+«z
Ag
1. An electric apparatus for a vehicle safety device including
a power supply circuit, sensor means for sensing collision of a
vehicle, and a plurality of triggering means fed by said power
supply circuit through said sensor means for triggering at least
one vehicle safety device upon actuation of said sensor means,
said electric apparatus comprising:
a plurality of resistors;
a plurality of recorder means each thereof comprising elec-
tric circuit means connected in parallel with one of said
plurality of resistors and for actuation by a high potential
difference across said one of said plurality of resistors, the
recorder means being actuated when a large electric cur-
rent flows through said one of said plurality of resistors by
way of an associated one of said plurality of triggering
means upon the actuation of said sensor means, and per-
manently remains in the actuated state;
said plurality of resistors having one end thereof connected
in common to an end of said sensor means and the other
end thereof connected to one of said plurality of trigger-
ing means and
output terminals connected to outputs of said electric circuit
means of said plurality of recorder means.
4,438425
MULTIPLE SIGNAL TRANSMTTTING APPARATUS FOR
AUTOMOBILES
Takashi Tfochida, Chiryu; Nobuo Kondo, .A^Jo; Kazukiyo
Okada, Koaai, and Yntaka Oknda, Kariya, aU of Japan, as-
signora to Nippoodenao Co^ Ltd., Kariya, Japan
FUcd Ang. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,431
Claima priority, appUcation Japan, Ang. 21, 1980, 55-114923
Int CL^ B60Q 1/00
MS. CL 340-55 7 Claims
1
J
1 (
*^^-*
1. A multiple signal transmitting apparatus for automobiles
comprising:
a plurality of switches mounted on a steering wheel of an
automobile;
a multiplexing circuit mounted on said steering wheel for
multiplexing signaJs from said switches to generate a
multiplexed signal;
at least one light-emitting means mounted obl a surface of
said steering wheel facing a means for supporting said
steering wheel, said light-emitting means being assigned
with a discrimination signal which differs depending on a
mounting location on the steering wheel, said light-emit-
ting means being responsive to said multiplexed signal
together with said discrimination signal from said multi-
plexing circuit to generate a light signal;
at least one light-sensitive means mounted on a surface of
said support means facing said light-emitting means for
receiving said light signal when said light-emitting means
is aligned with said light-receiving means due to a rotation
of said steering wheel to generate a signal corresponding
thereto; and
a decoder circuit arranged on a vehicle body of said automo-
bile for decoding an output signal of said light-sensitive
means to generate signals corresponding to the signals
from said plurality of switches and said discrimination
signal indicative of a routional position of said steering
wheel.
4,438,426
ELECTRONIC KEY ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Joey B. AdUns, Willowick, Ohio, assignor to Darrell E. Issa,
Geveland, Ohio
FUed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,820
Int Q.} B60R 25/04
U.S. a. 340—64
14aainis
W^h.
1. A passive-instant vehicular anti-theft system comprising:
an alarm control means for selectively actuating and deactu-
ating an alarm device;
entry detecting means for detecting entry into the vehicle,
the entry detecting means being connected with the alarm
control means to actuate the alarm device substantially
immediately upon entry into the vehicle, whereby the
anti-theft system is instant;
a decoder means for decoding encoded signals, the decoder
producing an enable signal in response to decoding a
signal encoded with a preselected code signal;
ignition enabling means for selectively enabling an ignition
to be operated, the ignition enabling means being opera-
tively connected with the decoder means to enable the
ignition in response to the enable signal;
an alarm disabling means for selectively disabling the alarm
control means, the alarm disabling means being opera-
tively connected with the decoder means to disable the
alarm in response to the enable signal;
automatic reset means for causing the ignition enabling
means to disable the ignition and the alarm disabling
means to enable the alarm control within a preselected
duration of ceasing operation of the ignition, whereby the
anti-theft system is passive;
an electrical jack mounted to receive an electric plug from
the exterior of the vehicle, the jack being operatively
connected with the decoder means such that the decoder
is adapted to receive encoded signals therefrom; and
an electronic key including an encoder means which pro-
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1333
duces a signal encoded with said preselected code and a
plug which is adapted to be received in the jack such that
the encoder is operatively connected with the decoder,
whereby the anti-theft system is undefeauble by mechani-
cal lock picking, hot wiring, short circuiting, or the like.
4,438,427
DECODER AND METHOD UTILIZING PARTIAL AND
REDUNDANT DECODING
Kcnichi Mlura, Saratoga, Calif., aasignor to Fi^itsu Limited,
Kawasaki, Japan
FUcd Jul. 20, 1978, Ser. No. 926,950
Int. a.} H03K W24
U A a 340-347 DD u Claims
sion detection means, and said alarm means and being
secured to the board, said plate assembly means defining
said opaque chamber means for permitting the transmis-
WTUMOKTI
ttMAU
1. In a method for decoding a digital input signal having a
plurality of bits, the steps of: partially decoding the input signal
by combining predetermined ones of the bits together to pro-
vide intermediate signals corresponding to decoded subsets of
•the input signal, at least one of the predetermined bite of the
input signal being included in more than one of the subsete of
said signal, applying the intermediate signals to a plurality of
bus lines which extend past a plurality of logic blocks, and
combining in the logic blocks predetermined ones of the inter-
mediate signals from the bus lines to provide output signals as
a predetermined decoding of the input signal.
4,438,428
MULTIPLE FUNCTION PERSONAL SECURITY ALARM
John W. Ober, Hiram, Ohio, and John M. Ferry, Garrett Ind.,
aaaignors to Omnitronics Research Corporation, Barberton,
Ohio
FUcd Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,242
Int a.3 G08B 19/00, 17/00
U.S. a. 340—521 29 Claims
1. An alarm having multiple functions for the security of an
individual within a preselected area, the alarm having a board
mounting substantially all electrical componente, comprising:
switch means for selecting among the functions the alarm
performs;
smoke detection means for optically detecting the presence
of smoke in the preselected area including a light source
for generating light, a light sensor for detecting light and
opaque chamber means, said light sensor being positioned
within said opaque chamber means in substantially per-
pendicular alignment to a longitudinal axis of transmission
of light through said opaque chamber means from said
light source, said opaque chamber means receiving light
from said light source and isolating said light sensor from
detecting light from said light source;
intrusion detection means for detecting an unauthorized
intrusion into the preselected area;
alarm means for communicating to the individual the pres-
ence of a potential security threat; and
plate assembly means housing said switch means, said intru-
sion of light from said light source to said light sensor
upon the presence of a preselected concentration of smoke
in said opaque chamber means from the preselected area.
4,438,429
EMERGENCY SIGNAL TRANSCEIVER FOR DISABLED
CAR
Scung M. Park, 210-29 Itacwon-dong. Yongsaa-ku, Seoul, Rep.
of Korea
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,907
Int a? G08B 1/08
U.S. a. 340—539 6 Claims
1. An emergency alarm system for a vehicular radio trans-
ceiver having a transmitter unit, a receiver unit and an antenna
comprising:
comparator means for deriving as an input from said re-
ceiver a repetitive series of digital pulses;
automatic gain control means, connected to receive the
output signal of said receiver, to adjust the noise level of
the output signal and to couple the adjusted signal to the
comparator means as a reference level input signal;
first multivibrator means coupled to receive the output of
said comparator means as an input and to provide a series
of pulse signals of predetermined duration as an output
signal;
counter means, coupled to receive as inpute the output of
said comparator means and the output of said first multivi-
brator means, for counting the output pulses from said
comparator means to determine when a preselected num-
ber of pulses has been received and for passing a digital
pulse and the output pulse of said first multivibrator to a
pair of iu output terminals at this time;
1336
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
NAND gate means for receiving the outputs of said counter
and providing an output signal therefrom;
second multivibrator means for providing a pulse output in
response to the output signal of said NAND gate;
driver means, to which the output of said second multivibra-
tor is coupled, for increasing the power of its input signal;
indicating means for receiving the output pulse signal of said
driver means and for providing an external indication of
its reception of a pulse signal.
4,438,430
ALARM SYSTEM
Alfred G. Young, Joppa, Md.; Leon F. Slocomb, Jr., Wilming-
ton, Del., and Francis V. Bugg, Towson, Md., assignors to
Acroaeal Window Corporation, Annapolis, Md.
FUed Sep. 3, 1981, Scr. No. 299,069
Int a.3 G08B 13/08
VJS. a. 340—547 11 Claims
1. In an alarm system for detecting the unauthorized move-
ment of a closure member which selectively opens and closes
an opening wherein a fixed framework is associated with said
opening and a movable framework is associated with said
closure member and wherein at least a portion of each of said
fixed framework and said movable framework is hollow, said
alarm system including a switch mounted in one of said frame-
works, a magnetic actuating member mounted in said hollow
portion of the other of said frameworks for actuating said
switch in accordance with the proximity of said actuating
member to said switch, and alarm means electrically connected
to said switch for actuation thereby upon actuation of said
switch, the improvement being said switch and said alarm
means being completely concealed within its said hollow
framework, said switch being a magnetically biased proximity
sensor, said switch having contacts, and including latching
means for maintaining said switch contacts closed after being
initially closed by said actuating member.
4438 431
ELECTRONIC DEVICEHAVING WARNING MEANS
Shigeni Toyomura, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,959
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 16, 1980, 55-65712
Int. a.3 G08B 21/00
VS. a. 340—663 2 Claims
a clear-key for introducing a clear-signal into said elec-
tronic device to clear the input data;
printing means for printing an output related to the input
data in said key input means;
power source means for supplying electric power to said
printing means;
detection means for detecting an output related to the elec-
tric power supplied from said power source means, and
for generating a signal based on the detection; and
means for inhibiting data input from said key input means
into said printing means upon receipt of the detection
signal from said detection means,
wherein said inhibiting means includes a plurality of gate
circuits which prevent said key input means from intro-
ducing data signals when said inhibiting means is receiving
the detection signal from said detection means.
r-
■IT MMO
■=: — rrr=o-
'■^
I
123.
ir~f
CfNTUl.
MOetMIM
UNIT
iM
MINTH
'I
1. An electronic device for producing a warning comprising:
key input means for introducing data signals as input data
into said electronic device, said key input means including
4,438 432
INFORMATION DISPLAY APPARATUS
Ivan B. Hurcum, Chippenluun, England, assignor to Westing-
house Brake and Signal Company Limited, England
FUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,894
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jan. 19, 1980.
8001871
Int. a.3 H04Q 9/00
U.S. a. 340-825 J5 g Claims
M
'Ofif'
tl'lCT tUIIT
irri
Uttm
not
I
Sttcx
3*1
*CCt'T
trrii
37
\3S
I.
utri/t
fOUttJ
ucxe mrtum-roii
"T lOOrr- ii» Mr</i
I
\lTOU
lutna
., DictonociUM
'" OUKtriO)!
1. An information display system comprising a mimic dia-
gram having a plurality of locations for the selective display of
information, each said location having a unique address code,
multiplex data transmission means linking said locations to
information supply means arranged to supply multiplexed
messages consisting of an address code portion and a message
portion, a connector socket mounted in the diagram at each
said location, a plurality of interchangable standard plug-in
display module assemblies each comprising a connector plug
for mating with any one of the connector sockets, said plug
being connected to address comparison means for, responsive
to a correct address, gating a message information portion
through information gating means to information decoding
means connected to drive information display means, each
module assembly further including an address programming
means which is settable to provide the correct address to said
comparison means corresponding to that allocated to the par-
ticular location at which the module assembly is plugged-in.
4,438,433
MULTIADDRESS PAGER WITH A CALL STORAGE AND
PRIORITY PAGING OPTION
George W. Smoot, Sunrise, and PhUip P. Macnak, PlaaUtion,
both of Fla., assignors to Motorok, Inc., Schaiunburg, Dl.
FUed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,799
Int a.} G08B 5/22
U.S. a. 340—825.44 17 dainis
1. A pager for receiving simUarly-coded incoming calling
signals which include user-designated emergency-type calls
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1337
and non-emergency-type calls, wherein the emergency-type
calls require immediate response and non-emergency-type
calls can be responded to later at the convenience of the user of
the pager, comprising:
means for decoding incoming signals and for distinguishing
VMSBBKSaZ
decoded emergency-type calls from non-emergency type
calls;
means for generating an alert signal in response to an emer-
gency-type call; and
means for storing an indication of non-emergency-type calls
for the generation of a subsequent alert signal.
4438 434
SELF-SEQUENONG DATA BUS ALLOCATION SYSTEM
Thomas D. Wason, Raleigh, N.C., assignor to Cain Encoder
Company, GrecnriUe, N.C.
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,396
Int. a.3 H04Q 9/00
VS. a. 340—825.51 g Claims
4^jQ=(yi
b'h
n=(r
la. Ik;
Md=o
~I5
1^
H4
1. A self-sequencing data bus allocation system for obtaining
data from a plurality of data communication devices in accor-
dance with a prescribed sequence and without separately ad-
dressing each data communication device, said data communi-
cation devices being of the type which are activated by the
receipt of power at a prescribed level to transmit data out
along a data line, then become deactivated when all available
data has been transmitted and cease to draw current, said
system comprising:
(a) an electrical power source having a multi-line, main electri-
cal cable emanating therefrom;
(b) said multi-line, main electrical cable including a supply line
and at least one data line;
(c) a plurality of multi-line electrical cable branches, each of
said branches having at least a supply line and at least one
data line connecting the corresponding lines of said main
electrical cable with one of said data communication de-
vices;
(d) a plurality of control means, each of said control means
being connected to at least the supply line in one of said
cable branches, whereby said power source is connected by
said control means with a first one of said control means for
the activation of the corresponding data communication
device and thereafter interconnected with the succeeding
downstream control means;
(e) each of said control means including:
(i) a switching means positioned in the cable branch sup-
ply line between said main cable supply line and said
communication device being served by said branch
cable and being operable between a normal "ofT" posi-
tion and a second "on" position responsive to the re-
ceipt of a prescribed signal for temporarily connecting
said corresponding data communication device to said
main electrical cable and supplying power thereto;
(ii) a current sensing means in said cable branch supply
line for detecting the level of current being supplied to
the corresponding one of said data communication
devices;
(iii) a control signal being generated by said current sens-
ing means and transmitted through said main cable to
the switching means of the next downstream control
means responsive to a drop in the current below a pre-
scribed level; and
(iv) the switching means of the control means correspond-
ing to the communication device which has just been
read being returned to said normal "off" position re-
sponsive to the sensing by said sensing means that the
current through said branch cable has dropped below a
prescribed level.
4,438,435
TWO-WAY RANGING SYSTEM
Giinter Htffgen, Komwestbebil, and Hinricb Ecklundt, Ludwlp-
burg, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to International
Standard Electric Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,342
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 23,
1980, 3027823
Int. a.3 GOIS 9/02
U.S. a. 343—7.3 18 Claims
TIAlltMIT- WCHvl
yi/u
TIBIHW ilH.
rrSwtfwr
A
y\A_rL A
EwSffwir
1. A two-way ranging system comprising:
an interrogator to transmit an interrogation signal to a tran-
sponder, said transponder transmitting a reply signal to said
interrogator after a fixed delay following the reception of
said interrogation signal, said interrogation signal and said
reply signal each including, as transmitted and as received, a
pulse pair having a predetermined spacing therebetween and
a third pulse spaced from said pulse pair a predetermined
time interval, said third pulse having a leading edge steeper
than the leading edge of the pulses of said pulse pair; and
evaluating means disposed in said interrogator responsive to
said third pulse in each of said interrogation signal and said
reply signal to provide a distance measurement between said
interrogator and said transponder, said distance measure-
ment and said reply signal being accomplished only if said
pulse pair has said predetermined spacing and said third
pulse is spaced from said pulse pair said predetermined
interval.
.'040 O.G.— 50
1338
\
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4438,436
MILLIMETER WAVE MONOPULSE COMPARATOR
CIRCUIT
Em-I R. Murpky, Scottidde, Ariz^ uiignor to Motorola Inc.
SdunuBbarg, 111.
FUed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327^34
lat CLJ GOIS WOQ
means for connecting said fifth, sixth, seventh and eighth
microstrip lines to said monopulse guidance system.
U.S. CL 343—16 M
4,438,437
DUAL MODE BLADE ANTENNA
Patoida L. Burgmyer, Great Neck, N.Y., assignor to Hazeltine
3 Claims Corporation, Conunack, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301.542
Int CL^ HOIQ n/16. 1/28
U.S. a 343-770 J Claims
1. In a millimeter wave radar system of the type having a
monopulse antenna array comprising four antenna elements
and a guidance system for utilizing monopulse guidance sig-
nals, a millimeter wave monopulse comparator comprising:
a low dielectric constant substrate having a ground plane
disposed on a first side thereof;
a first hybrid junction disposed on a second side of said
substrate;
first and second microstrip lines disposed on said second side
of said substrate, said first and second microstrip lines
being connected to said first hybrid junction, said first and
second microstrip lines having first and second predeter-
mined electrical lengths;
means for connecting said first and second microstrip lines to
first and second elements of the monopulse antenna;
a second hybrid junction disposed on said second side of said
substrate;
third and fourth microstrip lines disposed on said second side
of said substrate, said third and fourth microstrip lines
being connected to said second hybrid junction, said third
and fourth microstrip lines having third and fourth prede-
termined electrical lengths;
means for connecting said third and fourth microstrip lines
to third and fourth elements of the monopulse antenna;
a third hybrid junction disposed on said second side of said
substrate;
a fourth hybrid junction disposed on said second side of said
substrate;
first, second, third and fourth interconnection lines disposed
on said second side of said substrate connecting said first,
second, third and fourth hybrid junctions, said first, sec-
ond, third and fourth microstrip lines lying external to a
closed figure formed by said interconnection lines and said
hybrid junctions, said interconnection lines being short,
straight, high impedance microstrip lines;
fifth and sixth microstrip lines disposed on said second side
of said substrate, said fifth and sixth microstrip lines being
connected to said third hybrid junction and being external
to said closed figure;
seventh and eighth microstrip lines disposed on said second
ade of said substrate, said seventh and eighth microstrip
lines being connected to said fourth hybrid junction and
being external to said closed figure;
channel lines disposed on said second side of said substrate
running substantially parallel to said microstrip lines and
said interconnection lines;
channel means in contact with said channel Unes for forming
a conductive enclosure of predetermined dimensions
about said microstrip lines and said interconnection lines;
and
1. An antenna for radiating a signal of given wavelength
comprising:
(a) a printed circuit board having first and second opposing
sides;
(b) first and second folded slat monopoles on the first side of
said board and spaced apart by less than one-quarter of the
given wavelength;
(c) first and second microstrip feed lines on the second side
of said board, said first line terminating in a first radiator
port associated with said first monopole and said second
line terminating in a second radiator port associated with
said second monopole; and
(d) means for applying in-phase and quadrature components
of the signal to said first and second lines, respectively.
4,438 438
METHOD FOR DISPLAYING A BATTLE SITUATION
Egidius Arena, Achim; Christoph Hampe, Ganderkesee; Ingo
Karlowsky, Bremen; Manfred Meyersieck, Daverden; Hans
D. Schwarz; Norbert Anding, both of Bremen, and Reinhard
Uisterer, LUienthal, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Fried. Knipp GeseUschaft mit beschrinkter Haftung, Essen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219.819
aalms priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 24.
1979, 2952315
lat a.' GOIS 3/02
U.S. a 343-451 WCIalmi
1. Method for displaying a battle situation under consider-
ation and indication of the movement and position of friendly
forces and with the position and motion behavior of targets
being determined from angle and distance information derived
at the observing or display station, comprising the steps of:
providing an electronic display device for the display of said
battle situation;
furnishing angle and distance information of targets which
radiate wave energy by means of at least one passive
bearing and distance measuring system;
from said angle and distance information, calculating the
position, course and speed of every target per time inter-
val and indicating the calculated position, course and
speed on said display as respective motion vectors;
determining the path of the targets from given time intervals
from said angle and distance information about the targets,
and displaying the determined target paths on said display
device;
associating specific markers with the targeU as a result of
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1339
determined changes in position of the targets and deter-
mined characteristics of signals received from the passive
bearing and distance measuring systems, and displaying
said markers at the associated target positions; and
calculating uncertain measurement regions for the position
of each target from the measuring tolerances of the angle
and distance information and displaying said uncertain
measurement region around the displayed marker for the
associated target.
4,438,439
SELF-SURVEY MEANS
James S. Shreve, Fairfax, Va., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Array, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,828
lot a? GOIS 5/06
U.S. a. 343—449 15 Claims
_— '-^'*
tween a line connecting said transmitting station and said
passive sUtion and the set of lines connecting said trans-
mitting sution with said set of scatterers;
determining a set of angles »/>„ said set of angles, i//i, lying
between a line connecting said passive sution and said
transmitting station and the set of lines connecting said
passive sution and said set of scatterers; and
calculating a set of ranges r„ utilizing said sets of differential
times t„ said angles 0/, and said angles \in, by
calculating a first set of values, v,, each member of said first
set of values obtained by multiplying the speed of light,
the corresponding member of said set of difTerential times,
t„ and the sine of the sum of the corresponding member of
said set of angles, d„ and the corresponding member of
said set of angles, )/>/,
calculating a second set of values, x/. each member of said
second set of values obtained by summing the sine of the
corresponding member of said set of angles. ©,, and the
same of the corresponding member of said set of angles.
Xi, and subtracting the sine of the sum of the correspond-
ing members of said sets of angles, ©/ and ii<„ and
calculating said set of ranges, r,. by dividing the correspond-
ing members of said first set of values, v,. by the corre-
sponding members of said second set of values, x/-
4438 440
PRINT-DISTORTION COMPENSATING DEVICE FOR
THE INK JET PRINTING APPARATUS
KoicUro Jlnnai, and Yutaka Ebi, both of Kawasaki, Japan.
assignors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Japan
FUed Not. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325.302
Oairas priority, application Japan, Not. 26, 1980, 55-167165;
Not. 29, 1980, 55-168182
Int. a.J GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 346—75 10 Claina
ClOCll
rmu
aCNdUTon
U FMguCNCvljl
J«_
DATA t
fRINT
OUDCfl
IX
CMIOM
carfxMTiNc
cmcuiT
6^ /urn'iK r-™"-
IPC louncd 1,
M
ICHtCIl ^L>I[
laCMIOTOII
-\atni
-rli-
ov. nsfT
USADIHb
Auti-B
as
/
i1 0MI4I- m^KJIOHKL
AUTtNUA tUTTtHV
II ar ANTCHI^ mTTSKAJ
1. A method for a passive sution to locate itself relative to a
transmitting sution transmitting a narrow pulsed scanning
beam by utUizing reception of pulses directly from the trans-
mitting sution and reception of reflected pulses from a set of
scatterers S/, comprising the steps of:
determining a bearing of said transmitting sution from said
passive sution by routing a direction finding antenna in
azimuth untU a first nuU position is indicated by said direc-
tion finding antenna;
measuring a set of differential times t/. each member of said
set of difTerential times being the difference in time mea-
sured between reception of a pulse directly from said
transmitting sution and reception of said pulse via reflec-
tion from a member of said set of scatterers;
determining a set of angles Oh said set of angles lying be-
1. An ink jet printing apparatus for forming images or char-
acters on a recording medium by deflecting ink droplets within
a series thereof through any one of a multitude of deflection
steps according to basic charging codes comprising:
ink ejection means for ejecting a jet of ink through a nozzle
and breaking up said ink jet into ink dropleu;
charging electrode means for charging said ink dropleU; in
response to printing signals;
charging-phase checking electrode means for checking the
charging-phase by detecting a charge on said charged ink
dropleu;
a pair of deflection electrode means for deflecting said
charged ink dropleu and adapted to be connected to a
high voluge direct current source;
a gutter for collecting the unused ink;
an ink supplying and withdrawing pump for supplying ink to
said ink ejection means and withdrawing said unused ink
collected in said gutter;
a recording medium conveyor for conveying the recording
medium on which the charged ink dropleu impinge to
form the images or characters thereon; and
compensation means for compensating for distortion of the
printing position of said ink dropleu caused by an influ-
ence of neighboring ink droplets, said compensation
means including memory means storing signals corre-
sponding to various compensating amounu for each of a
predetermined number of neighboring ink droplets, each
1340
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
of said compensating amounts corresponding to the de-
gree of deflection of the associated ink droplet, and means
for reading out said compensating amounts and control-
ling the addition or non-addition of said compensating
amounts to said basic charging codes depending on the
presence or absence of ink droplets neighboring an ink
droplet to be charged.
4,438 441
MOSAIC RECORDER WITH IMPROVED TRANSDUCER
Jaa Bolmgren, Vaellingby, and Keoth NUsson, Akeraberga, both
of Sweden, aadgnors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin A
Mnaich, Fed. Rep. of Gcmany
FUed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,986
Clainu priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 8,
1981,3114224
iBt a.J GOID 15/18
UACL 346-140 R 5 Claims
means for depositing toner particles on said record medium
as it is drawn past a first position by said motive means;
means for fixing said toner particles onto said record me-
dium as said record medium is drawn past a second posi-
tion by said motive means, said second position being
spaced a fixed distance subsequent to said first position;
means for terminating the deposit of said toner particles on
said record medium at a selected time; and
delay means for terminating the operation of said motive
means a predetermined time after said selected time.
1. In a mosaic recorder having a recording head with a
plurality of nozzles disposed in rows for ejecting droplets of
recording liquid for printing alphanumeric characters and
images in punctiform representation, each nozzle having a
piezoelectric transducer associated therewith having a mov-
able free end for forcing said recording liquid through said
nozzles upon selected activation of said transducers, the im-
provement comprising a bilaminar comb-like piezoplate hav-
ing a plurality of teeth forming said transducers, said plate
having a carrier layer adjacent to said recording head and a
piezoceramic layer, said piezoceramic layer for each of said
transducer teeth terminating a distance from said free end of
said transducer such that a fraction of said transducers respec-
tively overlying said nozzles consists solely of exposed carrier
layer, said fraction of said transducers being hghter and thinner
than a remainder of said piezoplate.
4,438 442
ELECTROGRAPHIC RECORDING APPARATUS WITH
DELAYED PAPER DRIVE TERMINATION
Roger D. Erickson, Denver, Colo., aadgnor to Honeywell Inc.,
MimwapoUf, Mian.
FUed Oct 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,578
lot a.^ GOID /5/Otf
UA a. 346-153.1 6 Claims
•lit
r-
I
I
-^z\
4438 443
METHOD OF RECORDING INFORMATION ON A
MEDIUM IN THE FORM OF ELECTRICAL SIGNALS
Vitaly S. Doe?; lodf M. Kotelyansky, both of Moscow; Valery
B. Kravchenko, Fryazino; Yakov A. Monosov; Valery A.
ShakhunoT, both of Moscow, and Jury L. Kopylov, Fryazinoi
•11 of U.S.S.R., assignors to Institut Radiotekhniki I Elek-
troniki Akademii Naiik SSSR, U.S.S.R.
FUed Oct 13, 1981, Ser. No. 314,079
Int a.3 GOID 15/06. 15/12
U.S. a. 346-153.1 20 Claims
%
1
1*
TT
~i I *
A.
/ZZM
1= -- '-^-V
/ y y A y /
T
1. An electrographic recording apparatus comprising:
a record medium;
motive means for driving said record medium at a predeter-
mine linear speed;
1. A method of recording of information on a medium in the
form of discrete electrical signals, comprising the steps of:
forming a working layer of said medium by substantially
uniformly dispersing particles having a dipole moment in
a thermoplastic binder, said particles adapted to alter in
special orientation in a softened sUte due to said dipole
moment,
applying a substantially uniform thermal field to at least a
portion of said layer, to heat said portion above the soften-
ing temperature of the binder,
after ceasing application of said thermal field, applying a
vector field to said portion of said layer with vector lines
of said vector field being oriented substantially perpendic-
ular to the surface of said working layer and said vector
field being applied until the individual particles of said
portion are substantially aligned along the vector lines,
resulting in a change of optical density of said portion of
said layer,
at least one of said thermal and vector fields being generated
by converting the discrete electrical signals conveying the
information to be recorded, and
after ceasing application of said vector field, cooling said
portion to a temperature below, the softening temperature
of said binder, to fix the information being recorded.
4,438,444
MULTI-STYLUS HEAD
Kenya Komada, Yokohama, and Yni-Knan Tan, SagamUiara,
both of Japan, assignors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Not. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,261
Claims priority, appUcation Japu, Not. 20, 1979, 54-151271
Int a.i GOID 15/06
UA a. 346—155 4 Claims
1. In an electrographic recording multi-stylus head having a
\
March 20. 1984
ELECTRICAL
1341
plurality of styli aligned in at least one row and divided into
plural groups, and a plurality of segmented electrodes aligned
in at lest one row, each of said groups of styli corresponding to
a respective at least two of said segmented electrodes, wherein
said groups of styli and said segmented electrodes are adapted
to form an electrostatic image on a surface of a dielectric layer
of a recording material by applying a voltage between the styli
in each of the groups of said styli and the respective at least
two segmented electrodes, the improvement comprising:
3ii
_L_
H 1-
m
:^
r^ ^
—man-
-■4. ita
4,438,446
DOUBLE BARRIER DOUBLE HETEROSTRUCTURE
LASER
WoB-Tien Tsang, New ProTidencc, N J., assignor to BcU Tele-
phone Laboratories, locorporatad, Murray HiU, NJ.
FUed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,237
Int a.J HOIS i/7« i/19
U.S. a. 357—17 n Claims
A t
each group of styli having a leading end stylus and a trailing
end stylus arranged in a recording and scanning direction,
wherein the leading and trailing end styli of each stylus
group are each spaced apart in a same predetermined
direction from the centers of the respective at least two
segmented electrodes corresponding thereto by a prede-
termined distance (AS) such that each stylus group is
offset in said predetermined direction relative to said
centers of said respective segmented electrodes by said
predetermined distance.
4,438,445
VARIABLE CAPACITANCE DIODE AND METHOD OF
MAKING THE SAME
Alexander Colquhoun, HeUbronn-Sontheim, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, and Erhard Kohn, Ithaca, N.Y., aMignors to Tele-
funken Electronic GmbH, HeUbronn, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,468
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 30,
1980, 3028820
Int a.J HOIL 29/92. 29/48
UJS. a. 357—14 17 Claims
1. A variable capacitance diode comprising a low resistance
semiconductor substrate, and epitaxial layer arranged on said
semiconductor substrate, and a barrier layer arranged in or on
the major surface of said epitaxial layer opposite the major
surface adjoining said semiconductor substrate; and wherein
said epitaxial layer includes a relatively thin surface region
which extends directly beneath the barrier layer and which is
less heavily doped than an adjoining very thin intermediate
region, and a further region which extends from said interme-
diate region to said substrate and has an impurity concentration
which decreases towards said semiconductor substrate.
1. A light emitting device comprising an active layer having
a first bandgap, first and second cladding layers having first
and second conductivity types, respectively, and second and
third bandgaps, respectively, said active layer being intermedi-
ate said first and second cladding layers, a first barrier layer
intermediate said first cladding layer and active layer and
having a first conductivity type, said first barrier layer having
a fourth bandgap, and being directionally graded so that said
fourth bandgap increases as the barrier layer-active layer inter-
face is approached; said first bandgap being smaller than said
second and third bandgaps and said fourth bandgap being
greater than said second and third bandgaps; and electrical
contacts to said first and second cladding layers.
4 438 447
MULnLAYERED OPTICAL INTEGRATED CTRCUFT
John A. Copcland, III, Fair HaTen, and Stewart E. MUlcr,
Locust both of N J., assignors to BcU Telephone Laborato-
ries, Incorporated, Murray HiU, NJ.
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 339,849
Int a.3 HOIL 31/12
UJS. a. 357—19 15 Claims
7. An electro-optic integrated device comprising a substrate
having a plurality of epitaxial layers grown thereon, at least
three of said plurality of epitaxial layers being primary layers,
a first primary layer being grown with a bandgap suiuble for
optical detection, a second primary layer being grown with a
wider bandgap suiuble for the generation of light that can be
detected by said first primary layer, and a third primary layer
being grown with a bandgap that is larger than the bandgap of
either of said first or second primary layers, at least two re-
gions of said plurality of layers being electrically isolated, a
first electrode means for esublishing an electrical connection
to the first primary layer in one of said two regions, and a
second electrode means for establishing an electrical connec-
tion to the second primary layer in a second of said at least two
regions, said first, second and third primary layers having at
least one barrier layer between adjacent primary layers with a
bandgap greater than either of said adjacent primary layers.
1342
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438,448
ZIG-ZAG V-MOS TRANSISTOR STRUCTURE
Aba L. HarringtoB, Gleadale; Richard AIUmni, Lm Angeles,
tad VladiiBir RodoT, North HoUywood, aU of Calif., avigBora
to TRW lac. Lot Aagelei, Calif.
Filed Jol. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,131
Int a.J HOIL 21/302. 29/04. 29/78
UA a 357-23 24Clainu
1. In a V-MOS transistor having source, body and substrate
regions, a V-groove configuration comprising:
a first set of parallel V-grooves disposed through the source
and body regions and into the substrate region; and
a second set of parallel V-grooves which are disposed at an
intersecting angle with respect to said first set of V-
grooves, and are also disposed through said source and
body regions and into said substrate region, and are inter-
leaved among said first set of grooves such that one end of
each V-groove in said second set is in contact with one
end of an adjacent V-groove in said first set and the other
end of each said V-groove in said second set is in contact
with one end of the other adjacent V-groove in said first
set.
surface of said semiconductor material, and a relatively
low resistivity region;
a semiconductor region of a second conductivity type oppo-
site to the first conductivity type contacting the semicon-
ductor material at said major surface thereof and closely
spaced from said relatively low resistivity region;
an insulating fdm including a relatively thick portion and a
relatively thin portion, the relatively thin portion being
formed so as to cover the major surface of said relatively
high resistivity region and being susceptible to electro-
static breakdown; and
an electrode formed on said relatively thin portion, spaced
from said relatively high resistivity region and electrically
connected to said semiconductor region;
the PN junction formed between said semiconductor region
and said semiconductor material having a backward
breakdown voltage lower than the electro-static break-
down voltage of said relatively thin portion of the insulat-
mg fdm below said electrode; and further including
a first additional electrode contacting said region of low
resistivity at a surface of said semiconductor material
opposite said major surface, and including a second addi-
tional electrode disposed on said semiconductor material
and contacting said semiconductor region of high resistiv-
ity while being connected to said first additional elec-
trode.
4438 449
FIELD EFFECT SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE HAVING A
PROTECTIVE DIODE WTTH REDUCED INTERNAL
RESISTANCE
Koji Usuda, Tokyo, Japan, aaiignor to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed May 21, 1980, Ser. No. 151,985
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 3, 1967, 42-13079
Int a.J HOIL 27/02
UACL 357-41 2 Claims
4,438450
SOLID STATE DEVICE WITH CONDUCTORS HAVING
CHAIN-SHAPED GRAIN STRUCTURE
Tan T. Sheng, Berkeley Heights; Ashok K. Sinha, and SheUa
Vaidya, both of New Proridence, all of N J., assignors to BeU
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 98,979, Not. 30, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,149
Int a.3 HOIL 23/48. 29/44. 29/46. 29/62
UA a. 357-48 i Claims
1. A solid state device including a first layer having a first
surface and a pattern of electrically conducting lines thereon,
each of said lines comprising a single layer of like material,
each of said single layers comprising a succession of grains
forming a chain-shaped structure, each of said grains extending
from side to side and from top to bottom of the respective one
of said single layers, said line having a length much greater
than said width to permit the formation of a significantly long
chain of grains therein.
1. A semiconductor device comprising:
a semiconductor material of a first conductivity type includ-
ing a relatively high resistivity region extending to a major
4,438,451
DUAL-STANDARD SECAM/PAL COLOR TV RECEIVER
WTTH AUTOMATIC CONTROL OF OPERATING MODE
Werner Hinn, ZoUlkerberg, Switzerland, and Mark B. Knight
Somerrille, N J., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York,
FUed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,211
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 29, 1981,
Int CL^ H04N 9/50. 9/42
MS. a. 358-11 g ctai^
1. In a dual-standard color television receiver having multi-
ple operating modes and subject to alternative reception of (a)
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1343
composite color television signals inclusive of a chrominance
component encoded in a SECAM format and (b) composite
color television signals inclusive of a chrominance component
encoded in a PAL format; said SECAM-encoded chrominance
component being accompanied by lead-in osciUations of a first
subcarrier frequency during a terminal segment of the blanking
poriion of alternate active line intervals, and lead-in oscilla-
tions of a second subcarrier frequency during a similarly timed
terminal segment of the blanking portion of the intervening
active line intervals; said PAL-encoded chrominance compo-
nent being accompanied by bursu of reference oscillations of a
third subcarrier frequency, said burstt occupying a period of
the blanking portion of each active line interval which corre-
sponds in timing to an initial part of each of said terminal
segments; apparatus comprising:
l^^:^
^
an FM detector responsive to the received signals;
means for generating line rate pulses having leading edges
delayed relative to the beginning of said initial part of said
terminal segments and trailing edges substantially coincid-
ing with the termination of said terminal segments;
means, responsive to an output of said FM detector and to
said line rate pulses, for developing a control signal indica-
tive of the relationship between the amplitudes of (a) the
, output developed by said FM detector during alternate
appearances of said line-rate pulses and (b) the output
developed by said FM detector during the intervening
appearances of said line rate pulses;
means, responsive to said control signal, for controlling the
operating mode of said dual-standard color television
receiver.
approximation of the values of those samples of said first signal
which must be interpolated to form said second signal, com-
prising:
a clock signal generator coupled to 'the source of said first
signal for generating a second signal sampling clock signal
at a second frequency selected such that the ratio of said
first and second frequencies is substantially equal to the
quotient of integers, whereby said sample poinu recur in
blocks in which the first samples of said first and second
signals within a block occur substantially simultaneously
and the last sample pointt of said first and second signals
within each block occur substantially simultaneously, and
wherein the number of samples of one of said first and
second signals within each of said blocks exceeds the
number of samples of the other of said first and second
signals whereby the times of occurrence of said second
signal samples move between the times of occurrence of
the samples of adjacent first sample points over the dura-
tion of one of said blocks;
delay means coupled to receive said first signal for delaying
said first signals to form at least second and third delayed
signals delayed from said first,
differencing means coupled to said delay means for forming
difference signals representing the difference in amplitude
between successive delayed signals;
multiplying means coupled to said differencing means for
receiving said difference signals and for multiplying said
difference signals by a running variable to form weighted
difference signals;
running variable generating means coupled to said multiply-
ing means and to said clock signal generating means for
generating said running variable indicative of the time
position of each new sample between successive samples
of said first signal; and
summing means coupled to said multiplying means for sum-
ming together said weighted difference signals.
4,438,453
CONSTANT LIGHT GREYSCALE GENERATOR FOR CRT
COLOR CAMERA SYSTEM
Lawrence E. Alston, Chelmsford, Mass., assignor to Polaroid
Corporation, Cambridge, Mass.
FUed Jan. 21. 1982, Ser. No. 341,317
Int a.J H04N 1/46. 5/84
U.S. a. 358—78 24 Claims
4438 452
TRANSCODER FOR SAMPLED TELEVISION SIGNALS
Kerns H. Powers, Princeton, N J., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
CoBtinBation of Ser. No. 262,619, May 11, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continoation-in-part of Ser. No. 230,384, Feb. 2, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation Ang. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 411,907
Int a.3 H04N 9/493
UJS. CL 358—13 7 CUims
1 1 tfg I c
• ■L
fi
-<&,
JBi.
■XI •-
OU KH- '
m
2. A transcoder for transcoding a first television signal sam-
pled at a first frequency (Fl) into a second sampled signal by
■-^
17. A method of obtaining a hard copy of a video frame
represented by periodic video signals which lie within a prede-
termined range of amplitudes that defme N levels of brightness
comprising the steps of:
comparing the amplitude of the video signals with a refer-
ence signal level to provide a select output signal when
the amplitude of the video signals is at least equal to the
amplitude of said reference signal;
shifting the reference signal level through N levels corre-
sponding to the N levels of brightness defined by the
1344
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
predetennined range of video signal amplitudes at a fre-
quency functionally related to and synchronized with the
periodic frequency of the video signals;
controlling the intensity of a display screen to provide a
two-level brightness distribution with the upper of said
two levels of brightness occuring in response to said select
output signal from said comparator; and
exposing a sheet of photosensitive material to said display
screen.
4438 454
ADJUSTABLE CORING CIRCUIT PERMimNG
CORING EXTINCnON
Robert L. Shanley, n, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Continiuition-in.part of Ser. No. 363,856, Mar. 31, 1982. This
appUcatioo Jan. 25, 1983, Scr. No. 460,846
iBt a.3 H04N 9/535
UA a. 358-31 6 Claims
»i;i^'
♦*a
1. A system for effecting an adjustable amount of coring of
signals derived from a source comprising:
first signal translating means, having an input coupled to said
source, for linearly transUting said signals;
second signal translating means, having an input coupled to
said source, for non-lincarly translating said signals; said
second signal translating means comprising a multistage
limiting amplifier for developing a hmited version of said
signals, said limiting amplifier including respective input
and output amplifying stages coupled in cascade;
means, responsive to the outputs of said first and second
signal translating means, for developing a cored version of
said signals corresponding to the difference between a
linearly translated version of said signals and a limited
version of said signals;
a bias voltage source;
a first current source transistor, having base, emitter and
collector electrodes, for supplying operating current to
said input ampUfying stage;
a second current source transistor, having base, emitter and
collector electrodes, for supplying operating current to
said output amplifying stage;
means for connecting the respective base-emitter path of
said first and second current source transistors in series
across said bias voltage source;
first and second control transistors, each having base, emit-
ter and collector electrodes, said first and second control
transistors being of mutually opposite conductivity types;
means for connecting the collector-emitter path of said first
control transistor in shunt with the base-emitter path of
said first current source transistor;
means for connecting the emitter-collector path of said
second control transistor in shunt with the series combina-
tion of the base-emitter paths of said first and second
current source transistors;
a source of variable DC voluge; and
means for rendering the base electrodes of both of said first
and second control transistors responsive to said variable
DC voltage.
6. Apparatus in accordance with claim 1, for use with a
source of luminance signals in a television receiver, wherein
the signals subject to coring comprise horizontal peaking sig-
nals derived from said luminance signal source.
4,438 455
SOLID-STATE COLOR IMAGER WITH THREE LAYER
FOUR STORY STRUCTURE
Masatoflhi Tabei, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Fi\Ji Photo FUm
Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 330,928, Dec. 15, 1981,
abandoned. This appUcation Jul. 8, 1983, Ser. No. 512,052
Int. a.3 H04N 9/07
U.S. a. 358-44 ,3 ci,te„
1. A solid-state color imager, comprising:
a solid-state base comprised of an array of electrical switch-
ing elements arranged on portions of said base in sets of
three; J
a first layer of insulation inatM^l positioned over said base;
a first photosensitive layeT^fl^rimposed on said first layer
of insulation material, said photosensitive layer being
comprised of a top transparent electrode sublayer, a back
mosaic electrode sublayer, and a photoconductive sub-
layer positioned between said top and back sublayers, said
back mosaic electrode sublayer being segmented into an
array of portions corresponding to said electrical switch-
ing elemente on said base, and each segmented portion of
said back mosaic electrode sublayer being electrically
connected with one of said electrical switching elements
from said sets of three elements on said base;
a second layer of insulation material positioned over said
first photosensitive layer;
a second photosensitive sublayer superimposed over said
second layer of insulation material, said second photosen-
sitive sublayer being comprised of a top transparent elec-
trode sublayer, a back transparent mosaic electrode sub-
layer, and a photoconductive sublayer positioned between
said top and back sublayers, said back mosaic sublayer
being segmented into an array of portions vertically corre-
sponding to said portions of said first photosensitive layer,
wherein each back mosaic electrode sublayer portion is
electrically connected to one of said electrical switching
elements from said sets of three on said base;
a third layer of insulation material positioned on said second
photosensitive layer; and
a third photosensitive layer superimposed on said third layer
of insulation material, said third photosensitive layer being
comprised of a top transparent electrode sublayer, a back
transparent mosaic electrode sublayer and a photoconduc-
tive sublayer positioned between said top and back sublay-
ers, said back mosaic sublayers being segmented into an
array of portions vertically corresponding to said portions
in said second photosensitive layer, wherein said back
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
134S
mosaic sublayer portions are electrically connected to one
of said electrical switching elements from said sets of three
on said base, said first, second and third photosensitive
layers being sensitive to and absorptive of different ranges
of the visible wavelength spectrum, whereby electrical
signals from said photosensitive layers represent light
intensities of three different color ranges.
4,438,457
HIGH RESOLUTION IMAGER EMPLOYING
STAGGERED SENSOR STRUCTURE
Jagdiah C. Tandon, Fairport, N.Y^ Narayan K. Kadekodl, Tor-
rance, CaUf.; Abd-El-Fattah A. IbraUm, Palos Vcrdei Ea-
tates, Calif.; Roland J. Handy, Northridge, Calif., and JaaMS
C. Stoffel, Rocheiter, N.Y., aaaignon to Xerox CorporatloB,
Stamford, Conn.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,742
lot a> H04N 3/14
VJS. a. 358—213 4 Claim
41-^
4,438,456
TIME BASE CORRECTOR
Tadaaki Yoshiaaka, Hadano, Japan, aaiignor to Sony Corpora>
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 360,904
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 28, 1981, 5645754
Int a.^ H04N 5/06
VJS. a. 358—148 13 Claima
1. A time base corrector for removing time base errors from
composite color video signals comprising:
input circuit means for receiving incoming composite color
video signals which include horizontal sync signals;
horizontal sync separating means connected with said input
circuit means for separating said horizontal sync signals
from said incoming composite color video signals;
write clock and write start pulse generating means for gener-
ating write clock and write start pulses in synchronism
with said horizontal sync signals separated from the in-
coming composite color video signals;
read clock and read start pulse generating means having an
input for receiving reference video signals and being
operative to generate read clock and read start pulses on
the basis of said reference video signals;
memory means into which said incoming color video signals
are written for temporary storage in response to said write
clock and write start pulses and from which the temporar-
ily stored color video signals are read in response to said
read clock and read start pulses;
means connected with said read clock and read start pulse
generating means for providing added sync and sub-car-
rier signals and inserting said added sync and sub-carrier
signals in said color video signals read from the memory
means; and
phase control means for varying a phase of said separated
horizontal sync signals with which said write clock and
write start pulses are synchronized in accordance with a
change in the relative phase of said read start pulses and
said added sync signals.
T— T
3- 1
S-''
DIMKTION
I M> I m 1 1
«*~r
3
1. A high density charge coupled device imaging array (58)
on a single integrated circuit chip comprising a first row (60) of
photosites deposited on said integrated circuit chip, said photo-
sites being sensitive to applied light information, a second row
(62) of photosites deposited on said integrated circuit chip
immediately adjacent to and contiguous with said first row of
photosites, said second row of photosites being offset from said
first row of photosites approximately one-half the length of the
individual photosites on said first row such that said second
row of photosites are sensitive to applied light information
intermediate the photosites in said first row of photosites, said
first and second rows of photosites comprising a bilinear array
of photosites, a first storage register (72) deposited on said
integrated circuit chip adjacent to said first row (60) of photo-
sites to receive and store the bits of light information detected
by said first row of photosites (60) and converted to electronic
charge information, wherein the improvement is characterized
by:
a second storage register (68) deposited on said integrated
circuit chip adjacent to said row (62) of photosites to
receive and store alternate bits of light information de-
tected by said second row of photosites and converted to
electronic charge information,
a third storage register (70) deposited on said integrated
circuit chip adjacent to said second storage register (68) to
receive and store the remaining bits of light information
detected by said second row of photosites and converted
to electronic charge information,
a fourth storage register (74) deposited on said integrated
circuit chip adjacent to said first storage register (72) to
receive and store alternate intermediate bits of light infor-
mation detected by said first row (60) of photosites, con-
verted to electronic charge information and received by
said first storage register (72).
a fifth storage register (76) deposited on said integrated
circuit chip adjacent to said fourth storage register (74) to
receive and store the remaining bits of light information
detected by said first row (60) of photosites converted to
electronic charge information and received by said first
storage register (72), and
wherein said second (68). third (70), fourth (74), and fifth
(76) storage registers comprise a quadrilinear array such
that all four registers contain the detected light informa-
tion from one line of scan at the same time.
1346
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
4,438,458
DATA DISPLAY DEVICE
WoUkug MiiiMdier. Mniiicli, Fed. Rep. of Genway, aigigiior to
Siemens AktieogeteUicliaft, Bcrlia and Maokh, Fed. Rep. of
Gcnaaay
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,958
198I*310M0l'**^' '**"'"**°" ^*^ ^^' °' G«™»»y. Feh. !«.
Int a^ H04N 5/64. 5/655
UAa358-254 jcWm.
nents of the system that affect all sUtions. and additional con-
trol and indicator means for deenergizing the entire copier
4;;^^h3 J^^&^
1. Data display device, comprising a plate-shaped flat pedes-
tal part having a rectangular base with four sides, front, rear
and lateral edges, and an upper surface having a recess formed
therein parallel to said lateral edges, a plate-shaped screen part
bemg disposed on top of said pedestal part and having a given
surface area facing away from said pedestal part, a lower
surface, front and rear edges and narrow sides, a display field
substantiaUy taking up said given surface area, an extended
swivel arm support having one end being pivotable along an
axis m vicmity of said upper rear edge of said pedestal part and
another end bemg pivotable along the axU in vicinity of said
lower rear edge of said screen part for supporting said screen
part on said pedestal part, said axes being parallel to said upper
rear edge of said pedestal part, said swivel arm being movable
into a position m said recess flush with said upper surface of
said pedestal part, said screen part being pivotable into a per-
pendicular position with respect to said pedestal part with said
swivel arm m said flush position dUplaying a continuous planar
frontal surface, and said screen part being pivotable into a
paraUel position with respect to said pedestal part with said
swivel arm m said flush position and said screen part resting on
said pedMtal part with said narrow sides of said screen part at
least substantially m alignment with two of said sides of said
pedestal part.
system in response to unacceptable malfunction thereof and
indicating the source of malfunction.
4,438,440
ENGRAVING APPARATUS AND METHOD
Lester W. Buechler, 3193 Plainfleld Rd., Dayton, Ohio 45432
Filed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 422,651
Int. a.3 H04N 1/24
US. a. 358-299 ^ claim.
4438459
MULTIPLEX PHOTOCOPIER SYSTEM WTTH
PORTABLE SCANNER
Alfred B. Leriae, P.O. Box 9516, Washington, D.C. 20016
DJTtolon of Ser. No. 84,851, Dec. 4, 1979, and Ser. No. 925,290,
Jul. 17, 1978, Pat No. 4,251,153, sidd Ser. No. 925,290, is a
contiBuation-in-part of Ser. No. 718,260, Aug. 27, 1976, Pat
No. 4,182,569, and Ser. No. 775,480, Mar. 8, 1977, aliandoned.'
This application May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 378,577
Int a.3 H04N 1/20
UA CL 358-258 „ Qi^
1. A copier system having plural independanUy operable
optical reader sutions and a fewer number of developer mech-
anisms for producing hard copy reproductions of visual images
read by said optical reader stations, malfunction indication and
control means, said malfunction indication and control means
mcludmg monitoring means for those operating components of
the system that affect only individual reader stations for detect-
mg malfunction of those components, and control and indica-
tor means for each station for deenergizing only the affected
stations m response to unacceptable malfunction thereof and
indicating the source of malfunction of the affected stations
and additional monitoring means for those operating compo^
1. Apparatus for engraving cells in the surface of a gravure
printing cylinder, comprising an engraving head, means sup-
portmg said head for relative movement adjacent the surface,
said head including a shaft and an engraving stylus, means on
said shaft and supporting said stylus eccentrically of the axis of
said shaft, said stylus supporting means including an arm hav-
mg a transverse hole extending generally tangent to the arc of
oscillation of said arm. a stylus support holder extending
within said hole, means extending generally radially outwardly
within said arm and releasably securing said holder to said arm,
spnng means rigidly secured to said head and supporting said
shaft and said stylus for oscUUtion, and power operated drive
means for oscillating said shaft and said stylus.
4,438,461
INTEGRATED INPUT/OUTPUT SCANNER FOR
ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT PROCESSING
William D. Turner, San Marino, and Robert A. Sprague,
Saratoga, both of Calif., assignors to Xerox Corporatioii.
Stamford, Conn.
FUed Oct 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,301
Int a.3 H04N 1/22
UAa358-302 12CIaims
1. An integrated input/output scanner for generting a first
group of data samples to represent the information content of
a subject copy and for exposing a photosensitive recording
medium in accordance with a second group of data samples
representing picture elements of an image; said scanner com-
prising
an optically transparent electix>-optic element;
an array of photodetectors;
March 20. 1984
ELECTRICAL
1347
an array of individually addressable elecUodes distributed in
spaced apart relationship laterally of said electro-optic
element adjacent a longitudinal surface thereof;
a substrate for supporting said photodetector array and said
electrode array;
means for transmitting a Ught beam in a generally longitudi-
nal direction through said electro-optic element, said light
beam being coUimated laterally of said electro-optic ele-
ment;
4t438,4<3
TRACKING CONTROL SYSTEM
Hitoshi Sdcamoto, Zuna, Japmi, aasipor to Sony Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,199
Claims priority. appUcation Japan, Ang. 6, 1980, 55-107938
Int 0.1 GllB 21/10
UJS. a 360-lOJ 15 OainM
" rw — I p— I ''
fB^
xt
rv^mwc
means for imaging said subject copy onto said photodetector
array without any appreciable mixing with said light
beam, whereby said photodetectors generate said first
group of data samples;
means for supplying said second group of data samples;
means for applying said second group of data samples to said
electrodes for spatially modulating said light beam in
accordance with said picture elements; and
means for focusing said modulated light beam on said re-
cording medium to expose said recording medium in
accordance with said image.
4,438,462
DOCUMENT IDENTinCATION EMPLOYING
EXCHANGE-ANISOTROPIC MAGNETIC MATERIAL
Eberhard Koester, Franlcenthal; Joachim Haclc, Ludwigriufen,
and Manfred Stenerwald, Franltcnthal, aU of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to BASF AlctiengeseUschaft, Lodwipha-
fen. Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,629
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 13,
1979, 2950129
Int a.J GllB 25/04
MS. CL 360—2 4 Claims
Hi
Ht
^*m
1. An apparatus for reproducing information signals re-
corded in successive parallel tracks extending obUquely on a
record Upe, which apparatus includes transducer means re-
peatedly scanning across the Upe generally in a direction along
the tracks for reproducing the signals recorded therein while
the Upe is advanced longitudinally at a selected reproducing
speed which is any arbitrary ratio n of a normal reproducing
speed, and transducer deflecting means responsive to a drive
voltge for deflecting said transducer means in a direction trans-
verse to said direction along the tracks; a tracking control
system comprising means for determining the value of said
ratio n; means for extracting, from said value of the ratio n, the
values m and 1 of an integer and a fraction, respectively, which,
when added to each other, provide a sum equal to said ratio n;
means for forming relatively large and small head jump volt-
ages which respectively correspond to said value m and a
value (m- 1); means for providing a reproduced phase of the
output of said transducer means in correspondence to a specific
position along a track; means for forming a reference phase on
the basis of said value 1; discriminating means for determining
whether said reference phase is in leading or lagging relation to
said reproduced phase; means responsive to said discriminating
means for selecting one of said large and small head jump
volUges; and means operative at the end of each said scanning
for including the then selected one of said large and small head
jump volUges in said drive voluge appUed to said transducer
deflecting means for determining the next one of said tracks to
be scanned.
8
1. A process for authenticating recording media which are to
be safeguarded against falsification and which possess a layer
of exchange-anisotropic magnetic material whose Neel tem-
perature Tn is lower than the Curie temperature 1c of the
ferromagnetic or ferrimagnetic component wherein this layer
of the recording medium is successively
(a) recorded with a sequence of signals,
(b) heated to a temperature T2 which is below Tc and above
(c) cooled to a temperature Ti which is below T2, and
(d) exposed to a magnetic AC field which decreases to zero
and whose strength is at least four times as great as the
coercive force of the magnetic material present and sub-
sequently
(e) the residual magnetic recording is determined and com-
pared with the sequence of signals recorded under (a).
4,438,464
METHOD FOR EDITING OF PCM SIGNAL AND
APPARATUS THEREOF
Kentaro Odaka, Tokyo, Japan, aasignor to Sony Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,139
Claims priority, appUcation Japu^ Jan. 25, 1980, 55/165571
Int a.3 GllB 27/02. 5/00
U.S. a. 360—13 10 n«<i—
1. Apparatus for editing PCM signals by reproducing a
plurality of fust dau sections from a first recording medium
and recording a plurality of second dau sections on a second
recording medium, each of said fvst and second dau sections
including a respective plurality of daU series and respective
first and second error code series, said apparatus comprising:
reproducing means for reproducing one of said first daU
sections from said first recording medium;
first decoder means for receiving said reproduced first daU
section and for producing a respective plurality of daU
series and first and second error code series ordered in a
first alignment as a first output;
1348
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
recording/reproducing means for recording on and repro-
ducing from said second recording medium a second data
section composed of a respective plurality of dau series
and first and second error code series ordered in a second
alignment;
second decoder means for receiving said reproduced second
data section, for reordering its respective plurality of data
series and first and second error code series from said
second alignment into said first alignment, and for produc-
ing the same as a second output;
multiplexer means for selectively outputting a selected one
of said first and second outputs as a third output including
received first and second error code series; and
encoding means for receiving said third output, for generat-
ing generated first and second error code series, for reor-
dering said plurality of data series and selected first and
second error code series into said second alignment and
for recording the same onto said second recording me-
dium, said encoding means including
first delay means for delaying once said plurality of data
series and said received first error code series by a first
predetermined period from said received second error
code series;
4<4384tt
TRACKING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR AN
INFORMATION SIGNAL RECORDING AND
REPRODUCING APPARATUS
Ryusuke Moriya, Hadano; Takeo Eguchi, Hadani, and Takeo
Ohba, Sagamitaani. aU of Japan, assignors to Sony Corpora-
aon, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 261,455, May 7, 1981. This
appUcation Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,255
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 13, 1980, 55-176411
Int. a.3 GllB 5/02
U A a. 360-22 ,0 Claim,
M ■»,
-riP^
second delay means for delaying twice said once delayed
plurality of data series with respect to each other by a
plurality of second different predetermined periods;
first error code generation means for generating a first gen-
erated error code series in response to said once delayed
plurality of data series;
first selection means for selecting a selected one of said once
delayed received first error code series and said generated
first error code series in response to a selection of said first
and second outputs;
second error code generation means for generating a second
generated error code series in response to said twice de-
layed plurality of data series and said selected one of said
once delayed received first error code series and said
generated first error code series;
second selection means for selecting a selected one of said
received second error code series and said generated
second error code series in response to a selection of said
first and second outputs; and
third delay means for delaying said selected one of said
received second error code series and said generated
second error code series by said first predetermined per-
iod.
1. Apparatus for simultaneously recording information sig-
nals m at least four successive, parallel channel tracks on a
record medium, comprising: •
processing means for processing said information signals and
for distributing said information signals into at least four
channels;
at least four transducer means corresponding to said at least
four channels for recording said information signals from
said at least four channels in said at least four channel
tracks on said record medium, with first and second adja-
cent ones of said at least four channel tracks having the
information signals recorded therein with different azi-
muth angles; and
delay means for delaying the information signals recorded in
one of said first and second channel tracks relative to the
information signals recorded in the other of said first and
second channel tracks.
4438 466
D.C. CONTROLLED ADJUSTABLE RAMP SIGNAL
GENERATOR AND METHOD
Joim S. Fawkes, and Walter F. Umholtz, both of San Jose,
Calif., assignors to Ampex Corporation, Redwood Qty, Calif.
FUed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 364,735
Int. a.J GllB 5/47. 5/02
U.S. a. 360-66 17 Claims
L-J;; i».Jfi
HI.
R.
^ I6-;R2
'fJLIMITER[-
16- :r2 m
IT-^ — ¥—^
1. A circuit for generating a D.C. controlled adjustable ramp
signal, comprising:
an adjustable D.C. reference volUge source having an out-
put coupled to provide a desired adjustable D.C. reference
voltage;
a ftfst means having an input coupled to receive said adjust-
able D.C. reference voltoge and having an output coupled
to provide a predetermined ratio thereof;
an integrating means having an inverting input coupled to
receive a positive or negative D.C. input step voltage for
responsively coupling said inverting input to said adjust-
able D.C. reference voltage or ground, respectively, hav-
ing a non-inverting input coupled to said output of said
first means for receiving said predetermined ratio of said
a
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1349
adjustable D.C. reference voltage and having an output
coupled to provide said ramp signal in response to said
D.C. input step voltage; and
said integrating means being further coupled to receive said
adjustable D.C. reference volUge and to limit a maximum
value of said ramp signal provided thereby to a value
determined by said adjustable D.C. reference voltage.
4,438,467
MAGNETIC DISK TRACK FOLLOWING SERVO BURST
AMPLITUDE DROP COMPENSATION
Karl H. Schaller, Herrenberg, and Volker Zinunermann, Sindel-
fingen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignora to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,939
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 22,
1981, 3120327
Int. a.3 GllB 5/58. 21/10
U.S. a. 360—77 5 Claims
rro.
"ft "Hi
:;i
Tf="
T
jU
1^^
tape cassettes from said magazine with the attitute thereof
aligned in the same direction and which forwards the
respective tape cassettes sequentially towards said tape
cassette treating means maintaining said aligned condition.
1. A method of compensating for decreases in the amplitude
of servo signals read from a magnetic record for the track
following control of a magnetic head, said servo signals ap-
pearing in periodic bursts, comprising the steps of
detecting the amount of said signal amplitude decrease in
each said burst,
generating a complementary oppositely directed correction
signal, and
adding said complementary correction signal to said servo
signal prior to use of said servo signal for track following
control.
1980,
1980,
55.
55.
9Clalns
4,438,468
TAPE CASSETTE TRANSFERRING MACHINE
Hidcaki Kamei, Kyoto; KazoUko Yanaaaka, Yawata; Hamhiko
Fi^isawa, Kyoto, and Shinichiro Oda, Osaka, all of Japan,
assignon to Hitachi Maxell, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 266,389
Qains priority, appUcation Japan, May 20,
69637[U]; May 20. 1980, SS-69638[U]; May 20,
69639[U]; May 20, 1980, 55-69640[Ul
lot a.3 GllB 15/68
MS. a 360—92
1. A recording tape cassette machine for transferring tape
cassettes towards a tape cassette treating machine which treats
tape cassettes sequentially which comprises:
means for receiving at least one movable magazine container
having a chamber for accommodating a plurality of re-
cording tape cassettes, each of which stands paraUel in a
side-by-side relationship with a vertical attitude, aligned in
the same direction;
means for discharging said tape cassettes from said magazine
simultaneously; and
a cassette transferring means which receives each of said
4,438,469
DEFLECTABLE TRANSDUCER MOUNTING ASSEMBLY
Takeo Ohba, Sagamihara, and Hlrohisa Koga, Zama, both of
Japan, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,786
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 30, 1980, 55-136014
lat a.^ GllB 21/18
U.S. a. 360—109 IS Claims
1. A deflectable transducer mounting assembly for mounting
a transducer on a member, comprising first deflectable means
having a first end to be coupled to said member so as to be
cantUevered therefrom and a free end on which said transducer
is mounted, said first deflectable means being deflectable in
response to drive signals supplied thereto; and a pair of second
deflectable means being deflectable in response to drive signals
supplied thereto, said pair of second deflectable means being
disposed at said first end of said Tvcti deflectable means to
sandwich said first end therebetween and. when assembled
with said member, said pair of second deflectable means is
secured to said member.
13S0
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M38^70
MAGNEnC HEAD OF MAGNEHC RELUCTANCE
EFFECT TYPE AND A METHOD FOR MAKING THE
SAME
TakeiU Stwada. Yokohaon; Ko Yoseda; Akin Shinmi, both of
Kawanki; Hirokazu Goto, Tokyo, aod Shuzo Abiko, Chi-
chibo, all of Japaa, aaiignon to Caaon ifahn^iitki K«i«h^
Tokyo and Caaoa DeosU Kabnshlki Kaiaha, Saitama, both of
Japaa
FUed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,708
lat a.i GllB 5/12. 5/30, 5/42: HOIF 7/06
UA a 360-113 3Ctaiau
vertically to the center of the flat coil on the coU substrate
to form a single integrated perpendicular recording maa-
netic head.
4,438 472
ACTIVE ARC SUPPRESSION FOR SWTTCHING OF
DIRECT CURRENT CIRCUTTS
George K. Woodworth, Manaaua, Va., aadgnor to IBM Corpo-
ration, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,744
lat a.3 H02H 7/22
U.S. a. 361-13 4 Claim.
1. A magnetic reluctance effect type magnetic head compris-
mg:
support means made of nonmagnetic material; and
magnetic sensor means formed on said support means of
magnetic reluctance effect material that varies in electric
resistance in respone to a magnetic field, said magnetic
sensor means being formed in a generally U-shape, having
legs and a base contact, said legs of which defme a pair of
lead sections each having a width of Wi at the top portion
thereof and said base contact of which defines a plurality
to triangular wave-like sections, connecting the bottom
portions of said legs in series, each having a width of W,;
the width Wj being greater than the width W,.
4,438 471
MAGNETIC HEAD FOR PERPENDICULAR MAGNETIC
RECORDING SYSTEM
Mitsomasa Oshiki, Yokohama, and Suaumu Kawakami, Tama,
both of Japan, aasignora to Fi^itsu Limited, Kawaaaki, Japan
FUed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,406
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 13, 1979, 54-162324
Int. Q\? GllB 5/14, 5/20
UA a. 360-125 16 Claims
TWO TERMINAL SUPPRESSOR
1. An active arc suppression circuit connected in parallel
with a first and second contacts of a relay switch to be pro-
tected while switching DC currents, said switch having a
characteristic delay for opening said contacte and having said
first contact connected to the positive terminal of a DC power
supply and said second contact connected to a load, compris-
ing:
an NPN bipolar transistor having its collector connected to
said first contact and its emitter connected to said second
contact, and a base;
a capacitor connected between said collector and said base
of said transistor having a capacitance sufficiently large to
require an interval longer than said characteristic delay to
charge up, for passing load current from said first contact
to said base when said contacts are opened, turning on said
transistor to shunt said load current around said contacts
until said capacitor charges up after said characteristic
delay, at which time said transistor turns off;
a diode having its cathode connected to said base and its
anode connected to said emitter of said transistor, for
quickly discharging said capacitor when said contacts are
closed;
whereby arcs which may occur across said contacts upon
opening are suppressed.
-, — (1 r ')
fO-2
-I.
--I
1. A perpendicular recording magnetic head comprising:
(a) a pole substrate member having a first surface forming a
transducer face and a second surface opposite thereto, the
pole substrate member being formed of first and second
non-magnetic substrate portions with corresponding side
edges for bonding, and a main pole of a thin ferromagnetic
film formed on the side edge of said first substrate portion
with the corresponding side edge of the second substrate
portion bonded thereto; and
(b) a coil substrate member having a coil substrate with a
magnetic portion in contact with the main pole thin film
and a flat coil formed on the surface of said coil substrate,
the pole substrate member being bonded at the second
surface thereof to said coil substrate member wherein the
main pole thin film in the pole substrate is positioned
4 438 473
POWER SUPPLY FOR AN INTRINSICALLY SAFE
CIRCUrT
James C. Cawley, Venetia; Michael D. DiMartino, Library;
Thomas J. Fisher, MunhaU; Roger L. King, and Marcus H.
Uhler, both of Pittsburgh, aU of Pa., assignors to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the
Interior, Washington, D.C.
FUed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,247
Int. a.3 H02H i/08
U.S. Ci. 361—18 4 Claims
1. A binary controlled current interrupter circuit to safely
control the supply of power to a remote electrically operated
load located in an explosive atmosphere comprising:
input and output terminals for the interrupter, said output
terminals being electrically connected to the load in the
explosive atmosphere;
means to sense the current level rate of change between the
interrupter's input and output terminals to output a signal
should the detected current rate of change exceed a prede-
termined level;
means to sense the voltage level drop across a sampling
section between the input and output terminals of the
interrupter to output a signal should this levd exceed a
predetermined volUge level;
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
13S1
flip-flop switch means actuated by the output signal from 4,438,475
either the current level rate of change means or the volt- ULTRA-HIGH SPEED PROTECTIVE RELAY
age sensing means to output a responsive signal; APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SINGLE
delay means actuated by a signal from the flip-flop switch POLE SWTTCHING
means for delaying the turn on of the load initially or after ^^^ H. Haley, MoarocTUk, Pa., assignor to Wastiaghonse
any subsequent interruptions of power thereto, sai^ delay Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
means providing for the turn oft" of power to the load ''**••* ^"S* ^ *'*^' ^^- ^o. 404,170
several times more rapidly than iu turn on of power; and *"*• ^'^ H02H 3/26; GOIR 31/06
U.S. a. 361—82
48 Claims
O
-NUM-
\
IVOUUITOI*
V«.TM(ium.t
OCUITFOII
TKNON.
4,438,474
CURRENT LIMTTER AND VAR GENERATOR
UTILIZING A SUPERCONDUCnNG COIL
Derek A. Paice, MurrysriUe, Pa., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,524
lot a.3 H02H 9/02
MS. a 361—58
21 Claims
1. A current limiting device, comprising:
a plurality of unidirectional voltage means interconnected so
as to have an input connected to an electrical power
source for producing a constant polarity voltage at output
terminals thereat;
current generating means for producing a current in a super-
conducting impedance means; and
superconducting impedance means connected in series cir-
cuit relationship with said current generating means, said
series circuit being connected to said output terminals,
thereby slowing down the rate of current rise produced by
said electrical power source.
^^:^--S§-
a pass transistor switch means to control the signal output of
the interrupter and response to the output signal from the
flip-flop and delay means to cease the supply of electrical
energy to the load should either the predetermined sensed
circuit rate of change means or the voltage levels be
reached.
1. A protective relay for determining the location of a fault
on the conductors of a three-phase ac electrical transmission
line, comprising:
means for providing first, second, and third incident-wave
signals representative of the current produced on each
conductor by a fault-launched incident traveling wave
arriving at the relaying point from a first direction;
means for providing first, second, and third forward-wave
signals representative of the current produced on each
conductor by a fault-launched forward traveling wave
arriving at the relaying point from a second direction;
comparator means for comparing said first, second, and
third incident-wave signals with, respectively, said first,
second, and third forward-wave signals to provide an
indication of the direction to the fault and to provide an
enable signal when the fault is in said first direction;
first filter means for filtering said first, second, and third
incident-wave signals to provide a modal signal represent-
ing the total current produced on the transmission line by
a first propagational mode of said first incident traveling
wave; and
discriminator means for processing said first, second, and
third incident-wave signals, said modal signal, and said
enable signal to provide an indication of the location of
the fault.
4,438,476
SELECTABLE INTEGRATING CHARACTERISTIC
TIMER FOR PROTECTIVE RELAYS
Thomas B. Breen, Laasdowne, Pa., assignor to General Dectric
Company, King of Prussia, Pa.
Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 378,589
Int. a.3 H02H 3/093
U.S. a. 361—96 10 Claims
1. A selectable characteristic timer which measures the time
duration of an applied signal representative of the normal or
abnormal conditions of a portion of the transmission line asso-
ciated with the protective relay, said characteristic timer mea-
suring the time duration of the applied signal relative to a
quantity representative of the frequency of the power source
supplying the transmission line, said characteristic timer com-
prising:
(a) a clock source for developing a clock signal having a
reference frequency;
(b) a divider counter for receiving the clock signal and
generating a clock pulse train comprising a plurality of
pulses having a predetermined pulse repetition rate pro-
portional to the frequency of the power source;
13S2
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
(c) an up/down digital counter for receiving the applied and
clock pulse train signals having a digital content that is
altered in response to the presence and the absence of the
applied signal at a rate determined by the repetition rate of
the clock pulse train, the up/down counter generating a
first digital signal representative of its digital content;
(d) selectable means for selecting one or more second digital
signals each representative of a desired angle within the
range of 0 to 180 degrees of one cycle of said power
source;
tn I \imifi I .L^ MM
(e) comparator means rendered effective by said applied
signal and responsive when effective to the first digital
signal and one or more of the second digital signals for
generatmg a SET signal when the first digital signal is
equal to or greater than one of the second digital signals-
and, *
(0 means responsive to the SET signal for developing an
output signal for the characteristic timer that extends past
termination of said SET signal.
4438 477
COMBINATION POWER 'aND COMMUNICAnON UNE
PROTECTION APPARATUS
John M. Cawley, East IsUp, N.Y^ assignor to Tn Industries.
Inc., Copiague, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 23, 1M2, Ser. No. 410,307
lat a.3 H02H 9/06
UA a 361-119 , Claims
"ho»
1. A combination power and communication line protection
apparatus comprising:
(a) a housing;
(b) a power plug disposed in said housing, said plug having
at least three terminals adapted to be received by a power
receptacle having two power line terminals and a ground
terminal and be in electrical conductive contact with each
of said terminals;
(c) a power receptacle disposed in said housing and con-
nected in parallel with said power plug, said power recep-
tacle being adapted to receive a mating power plug from
equipment to be protected;
(d) first overvoluge protection means connected from one
of said power line terminals to the other of said power line
terminals for providing a low resistance current conduct-
ing path when the voluge thereacross exceeds a predeter-
nuned value;
(e) a pair of communication line receptacles having at least
two electrically conductive paths therebetween disposed
in said housmg, each of said communication line recepto-
c es being adapted to receive a mating communication line
plug therein; and
(0 a second overvoltage protection means having two line
electrodes and a ground electrode, each said line electrode
being connected to one of said respective communication
lines, said ground electrode being connected to said power
plug and power receptacle ground terminals.
4438 478
POWER SUPPLYING APPARATUS
Kouszou Miiteuyama, Yokohama, Japu.. a«dgnor to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,516
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 10, 1981, 56-124120
Int. a.J HOIH 47/10
U.S. a 361-152 5 cuu,^
J KATtR }^—
1. A power supplying apparatus which comprises:
transformer means for converting a high voltage into a low
voltage;
non-regulated power supplying means, connected to an
output end of said transformer means, for supplying a
no-load voltage higher than a full-load voltage;
at least one electromechanical converting means, connected
to said non-regulated power supplying means, for instan-
taneously supplying an output greater than a rated output
upon reception of an instantaneous voltage higher than a
rated voltage from said non-regulated power supplying
means, said at least one electromechanical converting
means requiring for its initial operation a mechanical force
larger than a mechanical force required in a steady state
operation;
at least one load means connected to said non-regulated
power supply means; and
control circuit means, connected to said output end of said
transformer means, for supplying a control signal to said
at least one electromechanical converting means so as to
connect said at least one electromechanical converting
means to said non-regulated power supply means so that
the voltoge close to the no-load voltage may be instanu-
neously supplied thereto, said control circuit means then
supplying a control signal to said at least one load means
so as to further connect said at least one load means to said
non-regulated power supply means so that a substantially
rated voltoge may be supplied to said at least one load
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1353
means and to said at least one electromechanical convert-
ing means.
with the atmosphere in which the capacitor is placed each
fissure scoring both the dielectric material and said conductive
4438479
SELF-CONTAINED ANTISTATIC ADAPTER FOR
COMPRESSED GAS DUST BLOWING DEVICES
Lionel H. Schwartz, Short Hills, N J.; Scott W. MiUer, Strat-
ford, Conn., and Christopher N. Scverud, Jr., Den?lUe, N J.,
aaaigDors to Falcon Safety Products, Inc., Mountainside, N J.
FUed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,559
Int a.3 H05F 2/00
UA a 361-213 11 Claims
face with the electrical continuity of the fissured conductive
face being maintained.
1. A self-contoined anti-stotic adapter for attochment to a
compressed gas dust blowing device, said adapter for entrain-
ing air with a stream of gas from said blowing device and
ionically charging this gaseous mixture to reduce forces of
stotic attraction on surfaces to be dusted, the adapter compris-
ing;
a housing;
securing means to secure the adapter to said blowing device;
an ionizing chamber formed within the housing, the ionizing
chamber comprising:
an inlet at an upstream portion of the ionizing chamber to
conduct a stream of gas from said blowing device and to
entrain air in the gas stream,
a radioactive source to ionize the mixture passing through
the ionizing chamber, the radioactive source being se-
cured and enclosed within the ionizing chamber to physi-
cally shield the radioactive source and to confine the
radioactive emissions primarily to within the ionizing
chamber,
an outlet nozzle located at a downstream portion of the
ionizing chamber to direct the stream of the ionizing
mixture;
a front shell;
secondary securing means to secure the housing to the front
shell;
a rear shell pivotally connected with the front shell, the front
shell and rear shell together forming an enclosure for said
blowing device; and
actuator means connected integrally with at least one of the
shells to actuate said blowing device when the front shell
and rear shell are squeezed together.
4438 481
DOUBLE LAYER CAPACITOR
Jeffrey PhilUps, Arlington Heights, and Hiroshi Takel, Wheel-
ing, both of 111., assignors to United Chemi-Con, Inc., Rose-
mont. 111.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,311
Int. a.5 BOIJ 21/02: HOIG 9/00
U.S. a. 361-433 ♦ Claims
"^
'>'mi'y]
<\J/sK\k\<\\
1. An electrical capacitor comprising a housing, a pair of
electrodes in said housing, one of said electrodes being com-
posed of a mixture of carbon particles and an electrolyte and
the other electrode being composed of a mixture of lead metal
and the same electrolyte, and an ionically conductive separator
means between and in contact with said pair of electrodes,
electronically separating said electrodes from each other,
wherein the electrolyte comprises a solution of soluble sulfate
salts of concentration in the range from 0.5 to 5 molar at an
acid pH preferably not greater than 2.
4438 482
ILLUMINATING DEVICE
Thomas B. Leon, 4028 Norton Atc., Oakland, CaUf. 94602, and
Michael D. Arpin, 6427 Thomhill Dr., Oakland, CaUf. 94611
FUed May 31, 1983, Ser. No. 498,692
Int. a.3 F21L 15/08
U.S. a. 362—103 3 Claims
4,438,480
CAPACmVE HYGROMETER
Bernard Cbambaz, Seyssins; GUles Delapierre, Scyuinet, and
Louis Dcstannea, Eybeos, aU of France, assignors to Commis-
lariat a TEiiergie Atomiquc, Paris, France
FUed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,603
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jul. 9, 1980, 80 15263
Int a.3 HOIG 7/00
U.S. a. 361—278 7 Claims
7. A capacitor constituted by a layer of dielectric material
between two conductive faces, wherein one of the conductive
faces, together with the dielectric material have numerous
random fissures bringing the dielectric material into contact
1. A shoe mounted lighting device comprising:
a generally U-shaped member adapted to engage a shoe
proximate the heel thereof.
1354
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
at least one battery,
means defining a container connected to said U-shaped
member, said container adapted to house at least one
battery,
means defining a first receptacle connected to said U-shaped
member proximate the side of said U-shaped member, the
axis of rotation of said receptacle projecting outwardly to
the side of said shoe when said U-shaped member is en-
gaged thereon,
an incandescent light source,
a rigid extension member having longitudinal axis of rota-
tion, a first end and a second end comprising
a plug member attached proximate said first end of said
extension member, said plug adapted to engage and be
received by said first receptacle with said longitudinal axis
of roution being coincident with the axis of rotation of
said receptacle,
a second receptacle attached proximate said second end of
said extension member and adapted to receive and engage
said incandescent light source, and
means for electrically connecting said incandescent light
source to said container and said battery.
cessed portion of the battery jar and to resist displacement of
the enclosure body on the battery jar cover and to inhibit entry
of foreign material into the interior of the enclosure body.
4438 483
UTILITY HANDLAMP a'nd'cHARGING COMPONENT
MEANS THEREFOR
John E. Gulliksen, Shrewsbury; Roy A. Guimond^ Holden;
Charles F. Daly, Boylston, and William H. Hamilton, Lincoln,
all of Mass., assignors to Koehler Manufacturing Co., Marl-
borough, Mass.
FUed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 363,660
Int. a.^ F21L 7/00
U.S. a. 362—183 10 Claims
1. A utility hand lamp construction including a battery jar
formed with a front side, a rear side and barrel shaped end
portions joining the front and rear sides, a portion of the rear
side lying between the barrel shaped portions being vertically
recessed, battery cell members received in the battery jar and
being electrically connected to one another internally of the
battery jar to provide negative and positive battery terminals,
a battery jar cover permanently secured to the top of the
battery jar having positive and negative batter> terminals
extending therethrough, an enclosure body detachably fas-
tened at the upper side of the battery jar cover, resilient clip
means integrally formed with the enclosure body and extend-
ing downwardly in spaced relation to the said vertically re-
cessed portion of the rear side of the battery jar for resiliently
securing the hand lamp to a supporting member in suspended
relationship therewith and to force a flexible supporting mem-
ber into an undulating configuration to increase frictional
engagement, the upper side of the battery jar cover being
formed with a continuous retaining wall lying in spaced rela-
tion to the edge of the battery jar cover, the enclosure body
being formed at an under side thereof with continuous mating
edge means which is fitted around the said retaining wall, light
source means received in the enclosure body and electrically
connected through a switch to the negative and positive bat-
tery terminals, said retaining wall and mating edge means of
the enclosure body cooperating to locate the resilient clip
means in a desired spaced relationship to the vertically re-
4,438,484
LIGHTING BOLLARD FOR USE IN AN URBAN
ENVIRONMENT
Joseph Winden, Grand Rapids, Mich., assignor to Urban Sys-
tems Streetscape, Inc^ Grand Rapids, Mich.
FUed Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,009
Int. a.3 F21V 29/00
U.S. a. 362-267 31 Claims
I. A vandal resistant, low elevation lighting bollard for
providing indirect lighting in an urban environment compris-
ing:
a slipfitter steel base adapted for anchoring in an area requir-
ing illumination, said slipfitter steel base comprising a steel
base plate with means for anchoring connected thereto
and an upstanding steel support flange welded thereto;
a welded one-piece steel housing, said housing being re-
ceived on said slipfitter base, said upstanding support
flange having exterior dimensions smaller than the interior
dimensions of said housing whereby said support flange is
slidably received in said housing;
means for fastening said housing to said slipfitter base;
a one-piece window disposed below eye level in said hous-
ing, said window extending flush with a side of said hous-
ing and said window being formed from a tough impact
resistant polycarbonate material.
4438,485
EFnOENCY SWITCHING-MODE POWER SUPPLY
William C. Voigt, 1970 Harrison St^ San Francisco, Calif. 94103
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,449
Int. a.3 H02M 3/3iS
U.S. a. 363—21 10 Clainu
1. A switching mode, regulated power supply of the self-
oscillating type wherein energy stored in the primary induc-
tance of a transformer is delivered to the load during the fly-
back period of a cycle, for converting power from a direct-cur-
rent source, which may be unregulated, into regulated direct
current, at stabilized, selected voltage levels, comprising:
a first transistor;
a first transformer having a primary winding and at least one
secondary winding, the fvst end of the primary winding
being connected to the direct current source;
a first resistor the first end of which in connected to the
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1355
emitter of the first transistor, the second end of which is
connected to the direct current source return;
a first capacitor the first end of which is connected to the
second end of the first transformer's primary winding;
a first diode the first terminal of which is connected to the
second terminal of the capacitor, the second terminal of
which is connected to the junction of the emitter of the
first transistor and the first end of the first resistor such
that current flow through the capacitor wUl flow through
the diode during the flyback period;
a second resistor the first end of which is connected to the
junction of the first capacitor and the first diode, the
second end of which is connected to the first end of the
first resistor;
first control means for controlling the turn-off of the first
transistor in response to a command signal;
and said capacitor, said inductor means receiving energy
from said capacitor at a rate dependent upon the repeated
opening and closing of said second switch; and
~1
V
»-
3
-3
^101
<%
B
ON- TIM
CON1IM
T3 "m
means for initiating current flow in the base of the first
transistor at the beginning of each cycle and for maintain-
ing said current flow until terminated by the first control
means in response to a command;
means for rectifying the voltages produced during flyback of
the primary of the first transformer;
means for sensing the rectified voltages and for generating
an error signal which is proportional to the difference in
the rectified secondary voltages and a suble reference
voltage;
means for generating a command signal in response to the
error signal such that the first control means terminates
base current flow in the first transistor at the correct time
to control the primary current build-up in the primary of
the first transformer so that the energy delivered to the
secondary with each pulse is similarly controlled, thereby
regulating the output voltage.
4438 486
LOW LOSS SNUBBErVoR POWER CONVERTERS
Angelo Ferraro, StUlwater, N.Y., assignor to General Electric
Conpany, Schenectady, N.Y.
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,372
Int a.J H02H 7/12: H02M 7/537
MS. a. 363—56 11 ctainu
1. A low loss snubber for providing stress relief to a first
controllable semiconductor switch comprising:
a series combination of a diode and a capacitor connected
across said first switch, said diode poled to conduct cur-
rent to charge said capacitor when said first switch opens;
and
an energy retrieval converter for removing energy from said
capacitor when said first switch is closed including
a second controllable semiconductor switch;
means responsive to the conductive sute of said first switch
and coupled to said second switch for repeatedly opening
and closing said second switch when said first switch is in
the closed position;
inductor means coupled in series with said second switch
means coupled to said inductor means for receiving energy
from said inductor means and transferring said energy to
an external load.
4438 487
DIGITAL PHASE-SHIITING ORCUIT
Jyoji Kawai, Hyogo, Japan, assignor to Mitsubishi Denki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 389,066
Claims priority, application Japan. Aug. 19, 1981, 56-169876
Int. a.J H02M 7/155
U.S. a. 363-129 7 Oaia,
1. A digital phase-shifting circuit for igniting sequentially
plural thyristors connected across a polyphase power supply,
comprising:
(a) a first binary N bit counter triggered by clock signals
with frequency of 2^x6 times that of said power supply.
(b) a second counter composed of a divide-by-six ring
counter triggered by a most significant bit signal of said
first counter.
(c) an N bit-first digital comparator for comparing a binary
output signal consisting of N biu with less significant N
bits of a phase reference signal consisting of N -i- 2 bits and
generating an output signal in the case where said binary
output signal consisting of N bits is larger than said less
significant N bits of said phase reference signal,
(d) an exclusive OR circuit generating three types of phase
signals having a binary 2 bit phase difference of every 60*
from one another and effecting a repeating operation of
180* period by utilizing an output signal consisting of 3
bits derived from said second counter as the input,
(e) a second digital comparator having three types of 2 bit
constructions comparing phases with each other by utiliz-
ing more significant 2 biu selected from three types of
binary output signals consisting of 2 biu generated from
said exclusive OR circuit and said phase reference signal
consisting of N -I- 2 biu as the input signal, and
(0 three same type pulse circuiu functioning to correspond
13S6
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
each output signal from said three types of second digital
comparators havdng a different phase of every 60* from
each other to each output signal from said second counter
consisting of 3 bits by dividing separately said output
signals with every 1 bit at the time when an output signal
from said flrst digital comparator is applied to said second
digital comparator as the input and generating two types
of output pulse signals from binary signals consisting of
the respective bits of said second counter, respectively.
4,438,488
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM WITH A SLAVE
COMPUTER USING DATA REGISTERS AS THE SOLE
OPERAND STORE
Shigeki Shibayama, and Kazuhide Iwata, both of Yokohama,
Japan, aaiignon to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaiiha,
Kawaaakl, Japan
FUed Jun. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 160,490
Clalnu priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 26, 1979, 54/79662
Int. a.J G06F 9/38. 15/332
U.S. a. 364—200 8 Claims
1. In a data processing system including a host central pro-
cessing unit and a host main memory, a slave computer con-
nected to said host central processing unit and said host main
memory said slave computer comprising:
(a) a set of data registers providing the sole operand storage
capability of said slave computer;
(b) arithmetic logic operating means, coupled to said data
registers and having an operation cycle time shorter than
the memory cycle time of said host main memory, for
performing computations involving the operands in said
data registers and for computing addresses for a said host
main memory;
(c) DMA interface means connected to said host main mem-
ory, to said dau registers, and to said arithmetic logic
operating means for transferring data from said host main
memory directly to said arithmetic logic operating means
through said data registers and for directly loading the
results of computations by said arithmetic logic operating
means into said host main memory;
(d) microprogram control means connected to said arithme-
tic logic operating means and to said DMA interface
means for controlling the operation of said microprogram
control means and said DMA interface means;
(e) input/output interface means connected between said
central processing unit and said microprogram control
means to transfer command information from said host
central processing unit to said microprogram control
means; and
(0 clock circuit means connected to said arithmetic logic
operating means and to said microprogram control means
for generating slave computer system clocks which oper-
ate independently of any clock signals in said host central
processing unit or in said host main memory.
4,438,489
INTERRUPT PRE-PROCESSOR WFTH DYNAMIC
ALLOCATION OF PRIORITY LEVELS TO REQUESTS
QUEUED IN AN ASSOQATIVE CAM
Haof J. Heinrich, Klrchheim, and Dieter Schiitt, Munich, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, asiignora to International Busineas
Machines Corporation, Amonk, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,606
Claims priority, appUcation European Pat Off., Sep. 27, 1980.
80105870.2
lot a.} G06F 9/00. 9/46
VJS. a. 364-200 6 Claims
1 iWJti ",1 _ "•I
1. A priority level controlled interrupt handler unit for
pre-processing interrupt requests from plural interrupt sources
having different assigned priorities, said unit including plural
processing elements (PE) having means for comparing an
interrupt priority level preallocated to the unit with an inter-
rupt level of an incoming interrupt request, means for buffering
incoming interrupt requests when a comparison match occurs,
means for generating and buffering real addresses associated
with incoming requests, each address designating a starting
address of a routine for servicing the respective incoming
request, and at least one instruction address register means in
which real addresses are staged for initiating servicing rou-
tines, wherein the improvement comprises,
common control means (6 to 10; FIG. 2) for initializing said
unit by assigning interrupt levels (LV) to said processing
elements and for establishing level masking conditions
(MA), and for producing control signals (e.g. X4/X4,
Xll/Xll, X16/X16) from which other control signals
(e.g. X5/X5, X9/X9, XIO/XIO, X12/X12, X15/X15) are
generated individually in the processing elements,
associative storage means (5) in said common control means
and a main bus (38) connecting the output of the associa-
tive storage means to all PE's,
means for storing interrupt requests in the associative stor-
age means, each request including an interrupt level, and
for selecting requests for transfer to a PE by means of an
associative search operation relative to an associated inter-
rupt level (e.g. LV=i) designated by the common control
means,
control registers (RPE, OPE) in each processing element
and means connecting the control registers to be set by the
common control to show the status of each PE as neutral,
standard, reserve, or old, the old status identifying a PE
having an overflow in its means for storing interrupt
requests, means for indicating when a standard processing
element associated with a specific interrupt level (i) over-
flows, or is otherwise blocked, and means in the common
control for selecting and assigning a neutral PE as a re-
serve processing element for that level, and
blocking means (X4, X16) in the common control for block-
ing servicing of interrupt requests which are queued in
PE's having assigned level priorities lower than requests
currently being serviced or, if a reserve PE has been
allocated to a current interrupt level, for blocking the
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1357
processing of the interrupt requestt in that reserve PE
until all interrupt requests of the old PE assigned to said
current level have been processed.
4,438 490
CLOCK CONTROL OF A CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT
FROM A MONITOR INTERFACE UNTT
Richard P. WUder, Jr., North BUIerica, Mass., assignor to
HoneyweU Information Systems Inc., Waltham, Mass
FUed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,564
Int. a.J G06F JJ/3a J/04
VS. a. 364-200 6 CM^
4,438,491
COMPUTER HAVING PLURAL IC CHIPS WITH EACH
CHIP INCLUDING A TRANSCEIVER
Janas N. Constant, 1603 Duibiiry Dr., Claraaont, CaUf. 91711
FUad Oct 14, 1980, Str. No. 196,201
Int a.i G06F J3/00
UA a 364-200 30 Claims
eu/p
I Mu mtium mia i .
1. A data processing system includes a plurality of subsys-
tems, a main memory, a central processor unit (CPU), a cache
and a plurality of I/O controllers, all coupled in common to a
system bus, said CPU also being coupled to said cache by a
separate bus,
a monitor interface unit is coupled to said system bus, said
cache by a cache bus and said CPU by a CPU bus for
monitoring information transferred over said system bus,
information transferred between said CPU and said cache
and internal CPU information, a monitor is coupled to said
monitor interface unit for receiving hit signals indicative
of predetermined information for generating dau process-
ing system performance data, apparatus in said monitor
interface unit generates a stop clock signal having a fixed
predetermined cycle time, said stop clock signal being
applied to said CPU via said CPU bus, said CPU having
clock control means responsive to sutes of said stop clock
signal for starting and stopping a CPU clock signal result-
ing in a CPU clock signal cycling at said fixed predeter-
mined cycle time which causes the starting or stopping of
the CPU operation, said apparatus comprising:
a mode switch for generating a clock stop enable signal;
first one-shot multivibrator means responsive to said CPU
clock signal, said clock stop enable signal and a potenti-
ometer resistance value setting for generating a first and a
second stretched pulse signal wherein said first and said
second stretched pulse signals are complementary signals;
first latch means responsive to said CPU clock signal and
said first stretched pulse signal for setting an output of said
fint latch means to a first state;
second one-shot multivibrator means responsive to said
second stretched pulse signal for generating a delayed
stretched pulse signal;
second latch means responsive to said clock stop enable
signal, said delayed stretched pulse signal and said second
stretched pulse signal for generating a stop reset signal,
said first latch means being responsive to said stop reset
signal for setting said output to a second sute;
third latch means enabled by a reset switch signal and re-
sponsive to the generation of a predetermined hit signal
for setting an output of said third latch means to a first
state; and NOR gate means responsive to said outputs of
said first and third latch means for generating said stop
clock signal to said CPU.
TUHMseeivm
TMMMSCeiveA
1. In a computer with monolithic IC chips interconnected
for data transfers, the improvement to reduce the number of
interconnections between chips including:
at least some IC chips with a first chip area devoted to one
or more logic circuiu, a second chip area devoted to
interfacing means, and a third chip area devoted to at leut
one of a transmitter and receiver connected between said
logic circuits and said interfacing means,
said interfacing means comprising one or more pads each
connected to a conductor for carrying analog signals for
interconnecting said IC chips,
said transmitter for receiving first signals from said logic
circuits and providing second signals to said interfacing
means, and
said receiver for receiving third signals from said interfacing
means and providing fourth signals to said logic circuiu,
said transmitter and receiver including means for handling
analog signals.
4,438,492
INTERRUPTABLE MICROPROGRAM CONTROLLER
FOR MICROCOMPUTER SYSTEMS
WiUiam J. Harmon. Jr., San Jose; John R. Mick, Cupartiao, and
Vernon Coleman, Oakland, aU of CaUf., assignors to Ad*
finead Micro Derices, Inc., Sunnyvale, CaUf.
FUad Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,323
Int. a.J G06F 3/04
U.S. a. 364—200 10
MCMMnuCTOI
-SS^fC
_^^
■ci
'SSSf
1. A microprogram controller having output means for
generating through said output means microinstruction ad-
dress signals used to access a program memory element con-
taining a plurality of microinstructions, there being a first
register means connected to said memory element for receiv-
13S8
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
ing and temporarily holding microinstructions accessed from
said memory element by said microinstruction address signals
and bus means for communicating a portion of said accessed
microinstruction from said first register means to said micro*
program controller, said microprogram controller comprising:
input means connected to said bus means for receiving in-
struction words and data words;
decode means connected to said input means for receiving
said instruction words to generate therefrom a plurality of
control signals;
first address generating means, having second register means
and incrementing means operably interconnected to pro-
vide sequentially incremented address signals;
storage means responsive to said control signals for selec-
tively storing address signals; and
first multiplex means, connected to said input means, said
first address generating means and said storage means, for
selectively coupling said input means, said first address
generating means, and said storage means to said output
means in response to said control signals, said first address
generating means and said storage means further con-
nected to a first multiplex output terminal means for re-
ceiving signals therefrom in response to said control sig-
nals;
whereby said microinstruction address signals are generated.
4,438,493
MULTIWORK MEMORY DATA STORAGE AND
ADDRESSING TECHNIQUE AND APPARATUS
Da?id E. Gushing, Chebnaford, and PhiUp E. Stanley, Westboro,
both of Mass., assignors to Honeywell Information Systems
Inc., Waltham, Mass.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Scr. No. 280,720
Int. a.3 G06F li/00
U.S. a. 364—200 8 Claims
has a logical address corresponding to a physical address
of said physical word of dau in which it is stored and
whereby said reading of said N multiple consecutive logi-
cal words of data does not require any address increment-
ing or decrementing to read any group of said N multiple
consecutive logical words of daU and wherein a first
through N-1 logical words of data, within any said
group of said N multiple consecutive logical words of data
as read from said memory, is located in the same relative
position within said physical words of data without re-
quiring any aUgnment of said logical words of daU within
said data output means.
7. A memory for retrieving N multiple consecutive logical
words of data in parallel, said memory comprising:
A. a plurality of physical words of data, each of said plural-
ity of physical words of data being of a length sufficient to
contain N of said logical words of data;
B. addressing means for addressing a specified one of said
plurality of physical words of dau by using an address of
a first of said N multiple consecutive logical words of data
to be read from said memory, said memory having stored
therein N multiple copies of each of said logical words of
data, except for a first and last N- 1 logical words of data;
and
C. data output means for receiving said N multiple consecu-
tive logical words of data from said specified one of said
plurality of physical words of daU read from said memory
in the time required to read one of said physical words of
data and wherein each of said physical words of data
contains N multiple consecutive logical words of data
having N consecutive logical addresses and wherein said
first of said N multiple consecutive logical words of data
4,438494
APPARATUS OF FAULT-HANDLING IN A
MULTIPROCESSING SYSTEM
David L. Budde, Portland; David G. Canon, HUUboro, both of
Oreg.; Anthony L. Comiah, Essex, England; Brad W. Hoder,
David B. Johnson, both of Portland, Oreg., and Craig B.
Peterson, Portland, Oreg., auignors to Intel Corporation,
Santa Clara, Calif.
Filed Aug. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 296,025
Int. a.3 G06F U/00
U.S. a. 364-200 10 Claims
M
...J43
112,
1. In a data processing system in which a switching matrix
provides electrical interconnections between horizontal
MACD buses and vertical ACD buses connected in said matrix
by means of nodes, a fault-handling mechanism comprising:
an error-reporting matrix including horizontal Bus Error
Report Lines (BERLs) and vertical Module Error Report
Lines (MERLs),
said BERLs being associated with said MACD buses such
that all nodes sharing an MACD bus are connected with a
BERL,
said MERLs being associated with said ACD buses such
that all nodes sharing an ACD bus are connected with a
MERL; and,
error-reporting means connected at the intersection of one
of said MERLs and one of said BERLs,
said error-reporting means including receiving means con-
nected to said MERL for receiving first error messages,
said first error messages being transmitted over said one
MERL.
said error-reporting means further including propagating
means connected to said receiving means and said one
BERL, responsive to said receiving means for propagat-
ing second error messages over said one BERL to other
error-reporting means located at said other nodes in said
matrix.
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
13S9
4,438 495
TOMOGRAPHY WINDOW-LEVEL GAMMA
FUNCnONS
'^^II'JF'.P'"'^ Waukesha; Edwvd W. Andrews, Brookfleld,
ud Nallaswamy Srinlvasao, Waukeaha. all of Wis., assignors
ing said digital values to analog video signals to which
said television means respondh by displaying the image.
to Gcnnvl Electric Conpwiy, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed No?. 13, 1981, Scr. No. 321,008
. , o ^ Int a.3 G06F 15/42: H04N 5/14
U.S. a. 364-414
4438 496
^i^5E"°'^'^ ^^^ INJEcrioN FEEDBACK CONTROL
METHOD FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
>. r, . v.??"J? °f •.' "•■■^•Mstsuyama, Japui, assignor to Diesel
4 Claims Klki Co., Ltd., Saitama, Japan
FUed Jun. 3, 1981. Ser. No. 269,878
Galms priority, application Japan. Jun. 11. 1980. 55-78691
Int a.^ P02M 51/06: P02D 5/02
U.S. a 364-431.05 ,5 cw..
1. Computed tomography apparatus comprising refresh
memory means for storing an array of digiul CT numbers
having values in a predetermined range wherein the values
correspond to the intensities of the pixels that compose an
x-ray image, means for converting digital values related to the
CT number values to corresponding analog video signals,
television means responsive to said video signals by displaying
an optical version of said x-ray image, means for selecting the
level and width of a window which width is defined between
an upper limit CT number and a lower limit CT number that is
designated as the window black value, and means for convert-
mg said CT number values within the window to gamma
corrected values before they are converted to video signals,
said last-named means including:
gamma lookup table storing memory means whose addresses
contain a lookup ubie of digital gamma corrected daU
values for the respective CT numbers within said range,
said gamma lookup table memory means having address
input means and a data output port,
a window-gamma lookup UbIe memory means having a port
for daU input coupled to the output port of said gamma
lookup table memory means and having address input
means,
address producing means responsive to occurrence of a
vertical blanking pulse for said television means by pro-
ducing a sequence of addresses to said window-gamma
lookup table memory means,
variable rate address generator means operative concur-
rently with said address producing means to provide a
sequence of addresses to said gamma lookup uble mem-
ory means, said last-named addresses being provided at
such rate that the last gamma lookup uble address is
addressed at the same time that the last window-gamma
lookup table address corresponding to said upper window
limit is addressed, said gamma lookup table memory
means responding to an address by output of gamma
correction data at the address to the address in said win-
dow-gamma lookup table memory means that is currently
being addressed by said address producing means, and
subtractor means operative after termination of a vertical
blanking interval to subtract said window black value
from successive CT number values that are stored in said
refresh memory, the CT number difference values result-
ing from subtraction of CT number values within the
window constituting addresses to said memory storing
said window-gamma lookup table, said memory respond-
ing to successive addresses by output of the gamma cor-
rected digital values corresponding to the CT number
difference values at video rate to said means for convert-
1. A method for controlling the injection of fuel being in-
jected into at least one cylinder of an internal combustion
engine through a fuel injection valve having a nozzle holder
and a nozzle needle arranged within said nozzle holder, said
method comprising the steps of: (1) detecting the lift amount of
said nozzle needle of said fuel iiyection valve by means of a
nozzle needle lift sensor arranged within said nozzle holder; (2)
detecting fuel pressure present in an injecting fuel passage in
said nozzle holder by means of a pressure sensor; (3) arithmeti-
cally calculating an actual value of fuel iiyection quantity from
the detected values of nozzle needle lift and fuel pressure in
said injecting fuel passage by means of electronic computer
means; (4) detecting the values of factors indicative of the
operating condition of said engine; (5) arithmetically calculat-
ing a required value of fuel iiyection quantity from the de-
tected values of said factors by means of electronic computer
means; (6) arithmetically calculating the difference between
said calculated required value of fuel ifyection quantity and
said calculated actual value of fuel injection quantity; and (7)
controlling the quantity of fuel to be injected into said cylinder
during the next fuel injection with reference to said calculated
difTerence.
4,438,497
ADAPTIVE STRATEGY TO CONTROL INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Frederick G. Willis, Ana Ariwn Richard R. Radtkc, Plymouth;
Joseph ElUsoD, Detroit; Steven R. Fozo, Westlaod, sod Glenn
A. Kern, Ann Arbor, all of Mich., aasignors to Ford Motor
Company, Dsarbom, Mich.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Scr. No. 285,221
Int. a.J GOIM 15/00; G05B 15/02; PD2B 5/02
UA a 364-431.05 ^ Claims
1. A method for controlling the performance of a spark
ignited automobile internal combustion engine using exhaust
gas recirculation, the engine being responsive to the magnitude
of engine control parameters, said method including the steps
of:
esublishing a duration of time to determine the frequency of
updating the engine control parameters;
determining the energy density output of the engine over the
1360
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
first duration of time, wherein energy density output is the
energy output divided by the distance traveled during the
first duration of time;
maintaining a history of distance traveled and energy output
during a plurality of successive consecutive durations of
time;
estimating the magnitude of energy density output of the
engine during the next duration of time;
establishing a lookup table for EGR and spark advance as
functions of engine torque, engine speed, and en^e en-
ergy density;
selecting a value from the table as a function of the estimated
energy density for use during the next duration of time;
and
controlling the engine EGR and engine spark advance in
accordance with the value selected from the table as a
function of the estimated energy density thereby improv-
ing engine operation for higher efficiency.
4,438,498
POWER SUPPLY OUTPUT MONITORING METHOD
AND APPARATUS
Stephcv M. Sckel, Bca?erton; Rodney G. Strange, Aloha, and
Robert F. Verrinder, BeaTcrton, all of Oreg., aaaignon to
Tektronix, Inc., Beaverton, Oreg.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,476
iBt a.3 GOSF 1/02
U.S. a. 364—483 10 Claims
r:^^r>
providing voltage-supplying and current-supplying operating
modes, a power supply monitoring apparatus, comprising:
means for providing digital numbers representative of power
supply voltage and current limit values;
means for producing in one of said pair of control circuits
one of the voltage and current limit values in accordance
with said digital numbers, wherein the control circuit
producing the limit value is in a balanced sute while the
other control circuit is in an unbalanced state;
means for detecting which one of said pair of control circuits
is in a balanced state; and
means for providing a digital number to a display device in
accordance with the detected balanced control circuit,
wherein the displayed digital number is proportional to
the particular limit value being produced.
4,438,499
FRACTIONAL DISTILLATION PROCESS CONTROL
Bruce A. Jensen, Bartlesfille, OkUu, assignor to Phillips Petro*
leum Company, BartlesTllle, Okla.
Division of Ser. No. 184,845, Sep. 8, 1980, Pat No. 4,316,255.
TUs appUcation Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,453
Int a.J G06F W46; G05B 11/42: BOID 3/42
U.S. a. 364—501 6 Claims
-U
n
JL
•• •* iV — c — ^
•»-^-€>»-'-eKM „
jf- •'— 1 — ' '^ — ^^^^'
■n-^ „ 1 ., I
3, k ^
w
IM
J-A.
2. In a power supply having a pair of control circuits for
1. A method for controlling a fractional distillation process
comprising the steps of:
establishing a first signal representative of the concentration
of at least one component in a first product stream with-
drawn from said fractional distillation process;
establising a second signal representative of the desired
concentration of said at least one component in said first
product stream;
applying said first signal and said second signal to a first
controller means to thereby establish a third signal which
is responsive to the difference between said first signal and
said second signal;
establishing a fourth signal representative of the concentra-
tion of at least one component in a second product stream
withdrawn from said fractional distillation process;
establishing a fifth signal representative of the desired con-
centration of said at least one component in said second
product stream;
supplying said fourth signal and said fifth signal to a second
controller means to thereby establish a sixth signal respon-
sive to the difference between said fourth signal and said
fifth signal;
establishing primary first tuning constants for said first con-
troller means for use when said first controller means
controlling a primary process variable;
establishing secondary first tuning constants for said first
controller means for use when said first controller means
in controlling a secondary process variable;
establishing primary second tuning constants for said second
controller means for use when said second controller
means is controlling said primary process variable;
establishing secondary second tuning constants for said
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1361
second controller means for use when said second control-
ler means is controlling said secondary process variable;
designating said first product stream as a primary product
stream;
supplying said primary first tuning constants to said first
controller means;
storing said secondary first tuning constants in memory;
supplying said secondary second tuning constants to said
second controller means;
storing said primary second tuning constants in memory;
manipulating said primary process variable in response to
said third signal; and
manipulating said secondary process variable in response to
said sixth signal.
c. combinatorial logic gate means having at leut two inputt
coupled to said register plural outputs to combine the said
register outputt into an effectively irregular binary feed-
back signal;
d. selecuble inverter means, effectively including a control
input and a signal input coupled with said gate means to
effectively receive said binary feedback signal, providing
an output therefrom which is effectively coupled to said
register data signal input;
4438500
RAPID VOLATILITY ANALYZER
Michael J. Collins, Matthews; Bernard W. Cruse, Jr., Indian
Trail, and Ronald J. Goetchius, Charlotte, all of N.C., assign-
ors to CEM Corporation, Indian Trail, N.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 603,354, Aug. 11, 1975,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 381,087,
Jul. 20, 1973, Pat. No. 3,909,598. This application Apr. 13, 1979,
Ser. No. 29,883
Int a.3 G06F 15/46: GOIN 5/04
U.S. a. 364—567 30 Claims
'" >.o ,„ ▼ "H
-G
ncuiAvi '
OVIK
lumO'
««
T
1 ':
?
nuw
'uni
-
u>c
,**
*>
1
C«J
y
1
.« y
e. sute sequence detector means, having an input coupled to
said register plural outputs, effective for at least producing
a first level signal at an output therefrom for a shift regis-
ter sequence which comprises a continuum of properly
irregular binary states, and a second level signal at said
output therefrom for a shift register sequence which com-
prises a continuum of substantially constant disallowed
binary states, said level signals coupled to said control
input of said selectable inverter means, whereby said
second level signal in conjunction with the said selecuble
inverter means produces relative inversion of the binary
feedback signal.
1. An apparatus for measuring the volatile content of sub-
stances comprising electronic weighing means, microwave
heating means including an enclosed heating chamber and a
microwave energy source transmitubly connected therewith,
dau acquisition and apparatus control means and information
readout means, said electronic weighing means being at least
partially positioned within said microwave heating means, said
apparatus control means being electrically connected to and
preset to sequentially actuate said weighing means and micro-
wave heating means, said daU acquisition and apparatus con-
trol means being furiher set to periodically sense said elec-
tronic weighing means a plurality of times and to provide an
electrical output signal represenutive of said weight sensing,
said daU acquisition and apparatus control means further hav-
ing means for projecting the anticipated weight change during
said microwave heating to produce a further electrical output
signal proportional to the anticipated weight change, said
electrical output signals being electrically connected to said
information readout means.
4,438,502
OUTPUT PROCESSING SYSTEM FOR A DIGITAL
ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT
Hugh M. Fox, 61 Eutville Ter., Harrogate, and Peter H. Sut-
cUffe, 71 Warwick Rd., New Bamet both of England
ContlnuaHon of Ser. No. 199,902, filed u PCT GB79/00208,
Dec. 10, 1979, published as WO 80/01215, Jun. 12, 1980,
§ 102(e) dated Jul. 21, 1980, abandoned. This appUcation Aug.
20, 1982^ Ser. No. 409.801
Qaims priority appUcation United Kingdom, Dec. 11, 1978,
47901; Aug. 7, 1979, 7927450
int. C1.J G66F 1/02: GIOH 1/06
U.S. a. 364-718 2 Claims
4438 501
ANTILATCHUP PSEUDORANDOM BINARY SEQUENCE
GENERATOR
Harold J. Weber, 20 Whitney Dr., Sherbom, Man. 01770
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,844
Int a.} H03K 3/84: H03B 29/00
\5S. a 364-717 11 Claims
1. Antilatchup pseudorandom binary sequence generator
means providing an irregular continuum of binary sutes
whereby said generator includes at least:
a. source of effective clock signal;
b. binary shift register means including a clock input thereto
coupled with said source, having at least one daU signal
input and plural effectively paralleled outputs;
L..
' IWlIf Bfl
njw M
• *MWBf •
nr tim nt.
1. a sound producing system for a polyphonic electronic
musical instrument, the system being responsive to digital input
signals relating at any given time to frequency, amplitude and
waveform selection for each of the notes sounding concur-
rently at that time and comprising:
an input signal digital storage circuit for storing said digital
1362
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
input signals and means for loading said digital input
signals into said storage circuit;
a wave shape digital storage circuit containing tabular digi-
tal information representative of each of a plurality of
wave shapes;
a dau processing circuit comprising data register and adder
means;
means interconnecting the digital storage circuits and the
date processing circuit for the transfer of information
therebetween;
a microcode instruction register;
storage means storing at least one fixed sequence of microin-
structions;
microinstruction address sequencing means operable in each
one of a consecutive series of sample periods of equal
duration to cause in each sample period the sequential
loading into said microcode instruction register of the
entirety of one fixed sequence of microinstructions with-
out dependence on the input signals present during said
sample period;
means connecting said microcode instruction register to said
storage circuits and to said data processing circuit
whereby signals from said microcode instruction register
control the transfer of information between said circuits
and the manipulation of information within said ciruits so
as to calculate the current value of all notes sounding
within said sample period;
a converter circuit comprising a register and a digital to
analogue converter; and
means applying said current value to said converter circuit
so as to produce an analogue signal representative of the
required sound during said sample period.
being offset by an amount related to the azimuth selected
vw said azimuth selector means and (b) providing digital
data read from said first and second memory areas defin-
ing a waveform to be synthesized;
converter means, coupled to said cyclic memory addressor.
for converting said digital data read from said first and
second memory areas into an analog signal of a form
suitable for coupling to said VOR equipment.
4f438,504
ADAPTIVE TECHNIQUES FOR AUTOMATIC
FREQUENCY DETERMINATION AND MEASUREMENT
D«Tid L. Farln, Little SUm, N J^ aaflgM>r to BeU Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Mnrniy Hill, N J.
FUed Jun. 15, IMl, Ser. No. 273,612
Int a.3 G06F 15/34
UAa3«-724 jcta,^
»fc-IK
4438 503
WAVEFORM SYNTHESIZERS
Robert A. White, Shepperton, and Ralph W. YeU, Hampton,
both of England, aaaignora to The Secretary of State for Indus-
try in Her Britannic Majesty's GoTemment of the United
Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland, London,
England
FUed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,202
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, May 13, 1980,
8015877
Int a.J G06F 15/31
UA a 364-721 14 Oafa,.
e**eje.
^Sa^/Si
1. A waveform synthesizer for calibrating VOR equipment,
comprising:
a memory having first and second separately addressable
areas, the first area having digital data stored therein
representing a frequency modulated component of a stan-
dard VOR waveform and the second area having digital
data stored therein representing an added sine wave com-
ponent of a standard VOR waveform;
azimuth selector means, adapted to be manipulated by an
operator, for selecting an azimuth to be simulated by said
synthesizer;
a cycUc memory addressor, coupled to said azimuth selector
means and to said memory, for (a) addressing the first and
second memory areas, the address of the second area
1. A method of tuning an adaptive variable to the frequency
of a signal component in an input signal including the steps of
a. forming a predicted value of the input signal using derived
signal quantities of past input signal values wherein at least
one derived signal quantity is weighted in accordance
with an adaptive variable,
b. comparing the present value of the input signal to the
predicted value to generate an error signal,
c. using at least one of the derived signal quantities and said
error signal to produce a correlation between the pre-
dicted value and the signal component of said input signal,
and tuning said adaptive variable by changing said adapt-
ive variable incrementally based on said correlation in a
manner to have a prescribed relationship to the frequency
of the signal component in said input signal and to reduce
the magnitude of said error signal, and
d. checking the magnitude of the input signal and allowing
the preceding steps to be repeated when the magnitude of
the input signal exceeds a prescribed threshold.
4438 505
ELECTRONIC DIcrioNARY AND LANGUAGE
INTERPRETER WITH AUTO-SEARCH KEY FOR
DERIVING A FULL-LENGTH WORD AND ITS
ASSOOATED TRANSLATION WORD BASED ON A
PARTIAL WORD ENTERED
Shigenobu Yanagiuchi, Tenri, and Mitnhiro Saizi, Kyoto, both of
Japan, assignors to Sharp ic«Kn«i.nrt Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
FUed Feb. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 119,662
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 9, 1979, 54-14813
Int. a.3 G06F 15/3%
U.S. a. 364-900 11 data.
1. An electronic word conversion device wherein a first
word or words represented in a first language are entered to
obtain a second word or words represented in a second lan-
guage equivalent to the first word or words, comprising:
input means operable for entering a partial word in said first
language, said partial word containing at least one charac-
ter;
means for storing a plurality of full-length words in said first
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1363
language and their associated translated words in said
second language;
means for addressing the storing means so as to search the
plurality of full-length words and their associated trans-
lated words;
means for selecting at least one of said full-length words
containing letters corresponding to the lettera contained
within said partial word;
auto-search means responsivt to a single actuation of an
auto-search key for selectively driving said means for
selecting to repetitively enable said addressing means to
select a plurality of full-length words having one or more
characters common to the partial word and the translated
words corresponding to said full-length word;
display means, responsive to said means for selecting, for
indicating each full-length word and its associated trans-
lated word selected by said addressing means; said full-
length words and their associated translation words being
separated in said storing means from adjacent full length
words and their associated translation words by first sepa-
ration code information, said first separation code infor-
mation being used by said addressing means to locate the
beginning of each full-length word in said storing means;
and
auto-search enable flip-flop being set to selectively activate
said auto-search means; said device, when said auto-search
means is disabled by resetting said flip-flop to place said
device in a single scanning mode, displaying only a single
full-length word and its associated translation.
tivation of said lighu, said light control computer including
memory means;
(c) interface means connecting said light control computer to a
message storage computer including message entry means,
message display means, and a message memory for the stor-
age of the texte of messages therein; and
(d) said light control computer being programmed to effect:
(1) the activation of a message waiting light in response to
the entry of the text of a message into said entry means and
the entry and execution by the message computer of a
message waiting command including the identification
code corresponding to said light; and
(2) the deactivation of said light in response to the entry into
said entry means and the execution by said message com-
puter of a message delete command including said identifi-
cation code corresponding to said light.
4,438;S07
INPUT SIGNAL CONTROL DEVICE
Yosbinori Nak^hna, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No, 233,947, Feb. 12, 1981,
abandoned, which U a continuation of Ser. No. 51,986, Jun. 25,
1979, abandoned. This appUcation Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No.
300,804
Int. a.3 G06F 3/12
U.S. a. 364-900 8 Qaims
CM|.
CHl
OH'
F«sT sTuoee T
, - ,|i ..,5
4438 506
MESSAGE WATTING LIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Alan R. Strom, Roeland Park, Kans., assignor to H A K Com-
puter Corporation, Kansas aty. Mo.
FUed Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 290,375
Int CL3 G06F 15/2(k H04M l/OO
UA a 364-900 10 Claims
"1 '•miiio SniOK
^^^
itKf
OerECTOl
— r--
*v
^"SKf
*^CO«ITI..
iT«gL
cur.
vffirT?=r
T
1
HMT
BONTaOL
CMCUT
co«iT»a.
l^psas*.
m^S
1. A message waiting light control system for activating and
deactivating message waiting lights in response to the storage
and deletion of texts of messages in a message storage com-
puter, said system comprising:
(a) a plurality of message waiting Ughto positioned respectively
at a plurality of stations, each light upon being activated
indicating the existence of a message for an occupant of the
station at which said light is positioned, each light being
associated with a unique identification code;
(b) a message waiting light control computer operatively con-
nected to said lighto and controlling the activation and deac-
1. An interface device of the type for sequentially applying
to a printer information for controlling said printer, said infor-
mation being transmitted on common data buses and strobe
lines from a source device whose data processing speed is
faster than that of said printer, said information for controlling
said printer consisting of digital data signals transmitted on said
common data buses and strobe pulses for identifying the opera-
tions to be performed by said printer transmitted on said strobe
lines, said interface device comprising:
(a) a storage means in which each address location has a
storage location for storing a digital signal therein which
is connectable to said common data buses, and a storage
location for storing a strobe pulse which is connectable to
said strobe lines;
(b) a first control means which is connected to at least one of
said strobe lines and which is responsive to a strobe pulse
on said at least one strobe line so as to generate a write-
timing pulse in response to which said information for
controlling said printer is stored and an input-address
changing pulse;
(c) an input-address control means for specifying an input
address of said storage means into which said information
for controlling said printer is to be stored, and for chang-
ing an input address specified in response to said input-
address changing pulse; and
(d) an output-address control means for specifying an output
address of said storage means from which said information
1364
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
for controlling said printer may be sequentially read out in
the order said printer information is stored in said storage
means.
4,438,508
MAGNETO-OPTICAL MEMORY ELEMENT
Marlies Umer- Willie, Hamburg, and Peter Hansen, Appea, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 132,747, Mar. 24, 1980. This
appUcation May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 268,027
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 27,
1979, 2911992
Int CL3 GllC 13/06
U.S. a. 365—122 8 Claims
1. A magneto-optical memory element comprising: a non-
magnetizable substrate; and
an amorphous layer provided on the substrate, said layer
comprising an alloy of a rare-earth metal and a transition
metal, said alloy having a uniaxial magnetic anisotropy;
Characterized in that the alloy comprises at least one atomic
percent tin.
5. A magneto-optical memory element comprising:
a nonmagnetizable substrate; and
an amorphous layer provided on the substrate, said layer
comprising an alloy of a rare-earth metal and a transition
metal, said alloy having a uniaxial magnetic anisotropy;
characterized in that the alloy further comprises tin.
4,438,509
TRANSDUCER WTTH TENSIONED-WIRE
PRECOMPRESSION
John L. Bntler, Marshfleld; Thomas R. Egan,^ South Dartmouth,
both of Mass.; Kenneth Rodberg, East Proridencc, R.L, and
Arthur E. Clark, Adelphi, Md., assignors to Raytheon Com-
pany, Lexington, Mass.
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,518
lat a.3 H04B 17/00; H04R 17/00
VS. a. 367-156 8 Claims
a pair of wires attached to and between said bars, each wire
being attached to said bars on opposite sides of said rod;
means for providing tension in each of said wires;
said bars providing a compressive force on said rod in re-
sponse to the tension in said wires; and
means for measuring said tension in each of said wires from
the resonant frequency of each wire in response to the
frequency of said electrical signal.
4,438,510
DISK PLAYER SYSTEM HAVING A DISK SUCKING
FUNCnON
Toyosakn Matsomoto, Hamamatsu, Japan, assignor to Nippon
Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha, Hamamatsu, Japan
FUed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 301,091
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 19, 1980, 55-129183;
Sep. 19, 1980, 55-132231[Ul; Sep. 19, 1980, 55-132232[Ul; Sep.
19, 1980, 55-132233[U]; Sep. 19, 1980, 55-132234[U]; Sep. 19,
1980, 55-132235[U]; Sep. 19, 1980, 55.132236[U]; Oct. 16, 1980,
5M47688[U]; Oct. 16, 1980, 5M47689[U]; Oct. 16, 1980, 55-
147690[U]; Oct. 16, 1980, 55.147691[U]; No?. 19, 1980, 55-
165523[U]; Nov. 19, 1980, 55-165524[U]
Int. a.3 GllB 17/00. 25/04
U.S. a. 369—271 23 Claims
1. A disk player system having a vacuum function compris-
ing:
a turntable;
means for driving said turntable;
a disk vaccuum member located on the tumuble of a config-
uration defining a suction space between said disk vacuum
member and a disk when the disk is placed on the turnta-
ble;
means provided in said disk vacuum member for defining a
suction channel which communicates with said suction
space at one end and with the atmosphere about a center
spindle of the turntable at the other end;
a check valve provided in said suction channel; and
a vacuum device capable of being detachably connected to
said turntable at about said center spindle for reducing
pressure in said suction space and thereby causing said
disk to be drawn to said disk vacuum member, said vac-
uum device adapted for disconnection from said turntable
when said disk is reporduced.
1. Apparatus for providing compressive stress to a trans-
ducer magnetostrictive rod comprising:
a pair of bars;
said rod having its ends in contact with said pair of bars;
means for providing an electrical signal to said nugnetostric-
tive rod;
4,438,511
PACKETIZED ENSEMBLE MODEM
Paiil Baran, Menlo Park, Calif., assignor to Telebit Corporation,
Cupertiao, Calif.
FUed No?. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,744
lot CL^ H04J 11/00. 4/00
U.S. CL 370—19 10 Claims
10. In a modem utilized for transmitting source digital infor-
mation and for receiving destination digital information over a
communication medium utilizing a plurality of carriers located
within the passband of the communication medium, the im-
provement comprising:
means for measuring the transmission characteristics of said
communication medium constructed from
means for transmitting said source digital information on
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
selected ones of said carriers at a predetermined amplitude
level and for a predetermined period,
means for analyzing signal corruption caused by communi-
cation medium impairmenu to received carriers carrying
said destination digital information by comparing received
data patterns with known good data patterns, and
Jtx.
vtcTon r
OtriMEM t*
tlSNAL
[XTRACTM
10'
ocxxxxc
20-,
co..,TiLt«To,Hg'*ffoy.e,
jla.
MNCRATOR/
HYMID
224
14
52 C
i_26^
REFERENCE
^ COmiECTM/
* OENEMTOR
IMIMIN*
OEMimWNT
?q^ .
LOMIM
DOCK
.28
•4- — I LOioiNdTI— •
♦-i*JDOCK -»
means for avoiding use of at least a selected one of said
carriers for transmission of said source digital information
in the event said analyzing means indicates said one of said
carriers is subject to impairments to said communication
medium affecting transmission of data.
1363
4,438,513
SHORT WAVELENGTH FREE ELECTRON LASER
USING LOW ENERGY ELECTRONS
Luis R. Elias, Goleta; John M. J. MMicy, and Todd I. Smith,
both of Palo Alto, aU of CaUf., assignors to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy.
Washington, D.C.
FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,649
Int a? HOIS 3/00
U.S. a 372-2 4 cuim.
e-Nv
4,438 512
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VERIFYING
STORAGE APPARATUS ADDRESSING
Michael H. Hartung; Richard E. Rieck, and Gerald E. Tayler,
aU of Pima County, Ariz., assignors to International Business
Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300.414
Int a.J G06F 11/00
ViS. a 371-60 1, ctatas
1. The machine-implemented method of operating a volatile
random access data storage unit including a first plurality of
addressable data storage registers;
the steps of:
aUocating said first plurality of addressable registers into a
second plurality smaller than said first plurality of groups
of said addressable registers, each group having a given
number of said addressable registers;
addressing each of said groups of addressable registers as a
single group and accessing individual ones of said address-
able registers in said group in a predetermined sequence
including all but a last one of said addressable registers
that would be next accessed by any reference to said dau
storage unit;
initializing the signal state of all said last one addressable
registers in a given reference sute; and
before accessing said addressable registers in said dau stor-
age unit presetting an address for a group to be accessed
for enabling said predetermined sequence such that said
last one addresuble registers are never normally accessed
whereby any access to said one addressable registers
indicates one error condition.
1. A continously tunable apparatus for the production of
intense coherent optical radiation comprising:
(a) a laser cavity resonator, said resonator having a longitu-
dinal optical axis and two opposed mirrors aligned at
opposite ends of said axis to reflect radiation generated in
said resonator;
(b) means for producing a first DC velocity modulated
electron beam and directing said first electron beam along
said axis of said resonator;
(c) means for establishing a sutic periodic magnetic field
uniformly transverse to and symmetric about a portion of
said axis of said cavity resonator and through which said
first DC velocity modulated electron beam passes, said
first DC velocity modulated electron beam and said sutic
periodic magnetic field interacting to produce a tunable
intense continuous electromagnetic pump field oscillating
between said mirrors and along said optical axis of said
cavity.
4,438,514
SURE-START WAVEGUIDE LASER
Peter P. Chenauaky, Avon; Leon A. Newman, South Windsor,
and ErroU H. Drinkwater, Portland, aU of Conn., assignors to
United Technologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,236
Int a.3 HOIS 3/03
UA a 372-64 4ci,|^
1. In an RF discharge waveguide laser including first and
second RF electrodes;
an insulating plate disposed between said first and second
electrodes;
a plurality of optical waveguides formed in said plate;
means for resonating optical radiation within said plurality
of optical waveguides;
the improvement comprising:
at least one coupling channel formed in said plate, said at
least one coupling channel communicating between at
leut two of said plurality of optical waveguides.
1366
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
M3M15
PROTECTION OF GRAPHITE ELECTRODES
Dietger DuBkelmann, Bocbolt; Helmnt Jaunicfa, Raesfeld, and
JoMf ScUfCuth, Bocholt-Bwio, aU of Fed. Rep. of Gennany,
aadgnon to Fowco Trading A.G., Char, Switzerland
Filed Jon. 28, 1982, Scr. No. 392,463
Claiau priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Jon. 26, 1981,
8119714
iBt a.} H05B 7m
U.S. a. 373—88 9 ciaimi
portions, said contact clamps extending upwardly at least
to a level above said baking zone where the unbaked
electrode paste is not affected by heat from the furnace;
(b) a surrounding cylindrical body arranged externally about
said upper portion of said contact clamps;
(c) a thrust member arranged externally about said lower
portion of said contact clamps;
(d) pressure producing means disposed between said thrust
member and said contact clamps for pressing said contact
clamps toward the electrode; and
(e) at least one contact clamp being individually suspended
and slidable with respect to the other said contact clamps
and said cylindrical body.
1. A method of treating the surface of a hot graphite elec-
trode to provide a protective coating thereon comprising the
steps of:
(a) disposing the electrode along an axis;
(b) advancing at least one generally arcuate spray unit
towards a side of the electrode to a spraying position
adjacent a side of the electrode where the centre of the arc
is generally coincident with the axis of the electrode; and
(c) from the spraying position of the unit, spraying matter
comprising a graphite-wetting fusible matrix material and
a refractory material from said at least one spray unit
generally towards the centre of the arc to provide a pro-
tective coating on the adjacent side of the electrode.
4,438,516
MEANS FOR AN ELECTROTHERMAL SMELTING
FURNACE
Harald Krogvud, GJettum, Norway, aaiignor to Elkem a/s,
Oak), Norway
FUed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,688
Claims priority, appUcation Norway, Jul. 25, 1980, 802265
Int a^ H05B 7/107
U.S. a. 373—97 13 ctaimg
r?///^
1. A holder assembly for self-baking electrodes of an electro-
thermal smelting furnace, said electrode hving a baking zone
for baking unbaked electrode paste introduced above the bak-
ing zone, comprising:
(a) a plurality of contact clamps comprising upper and lower
4438 517
INTERFEROMETRICALLY TUNED LASER
RESONATOR
Lloyd C Bobb, Willow Gro?e; Michael Rankin, Hatboro, and
Gerald D. Ferguson, Yardley, aU of Pa., aaiignon to The
United States of America ai repreaentcd by the Secretary of
tiie Nairy, Waahington, D.C.
FUed Not. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 210^02
lat a.3 HOIS 3m
U.S. a. 372—99 11 cudma
1. An interferometrically tuned laser resonator comprising,
in combination:
optical means for emitting polarized radiation of fluorescent
lines of a first polarity in opposite directions along a first
optical axis when energized by a first signal;
switching means positioned to pass the radiation in one of
the directions and for changing the first polarity to a
second polarity when energized by a second signal;
first reflector means positioned to receive the radiation from
said switching means for passing the radiation of the first
polarity along the first optical axis, and for reflecting the
radiation of the second polarity as a useful output along a
second optical axis angularly displaced from the first
optical axis;
second reflector means positioned to receive the radiation
from said first reflector means for reflecting the radiation
back along said first optical axis;
third reflector means positioned to receive the radiation in
the other of the directions for interferometrically reflect-
ing selected ones of the fluorescence Unes back along the
first optical axis; and
controUer means connected to said optical means and said
switching means for providing said first and second sig-
nals in timed sequence, the elapsed time between the first
and second signals being sufficient for the radiation of the
first polarity to reach a useful output level.
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1367
^^^^^ 4,438,518
RffiraOD FOR PROTECTING FORMING BUSHINGS
J^ ^'J^ '" ^' ™^' ■«' R***-^ A. Peridna, aU of
w^JW Ohio, aarigMn to Oweas-Comiag Flberglas Corpo-
nrtfcm, Toledo. Ohio ^^ ^^
FU«I Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 405350
„„ _ lut a' C03B 5/02
UA a 373-39 jcWm.
"^'^S'fOiS'
1. a process for forming molten glass in a melting furnace
contammg a body of electrically conductive molten glass
having bushmgs made of a refractory or nobel metal and a
bushmg finng circuit, and having electrodes made of a dissimi-
lar metal and an electrode firing circuit,
applying electrical current to the bushing firing circuit to
cause heating of the bushings by resistive heating,
applying electrical current to the electrode firing circuit to
cause electrical current to flow between the electrodes
through the molten material to cause heating of the mol-
ten material by Joule efTect and,
simultaneously applying a positive or anodic direct current
bias to the bushings, including the step of biasing the
bushmg firing circuit with the electrode firing circuit, to
protect the bushings from cracking.
4,438,519
NttTHOpS, AND APPARATUS, FOR TRANSMTTTING
HIGH-BTT-RATE DIGTTAL DATA IN POWER LINE
COMMUNICATION MEDU HAVING HIGH
HARMONIC NOISE CONTENT
Saijjay K. Boae, SchenectMly. N.Y., aadgnor to General Electric
Company, ScheBactady, N.Y.
Filed May 4, 1981, Scr. No. 260.432
I»t a» H04L 27/JO
UA a. 375-1 35 cuibu
1. A method for transmitting binary data, comprising the
steps of:
(a) providing a variable-frequency transmitter having a
predetermined center frequency;
(b) selecting a bit time interval in which a bit of said binary
data is to be transmitted;
(c) causing the transmitter instantaneous frequency to be at
the center frequency at the beginning and end of each bit
time interval;
(d) continuously varying without discontinuity the instanta-
neous transmitting frequency at least once during a bit
time interval to a maximum frequency greater than the
center frequency and then to a minimum frequency leu
than the cotter frequency, with the maximum frequency
and the minimum frequency respectively occurring at
one-quarter and three-quarters of the bit time interval, to
transmit a first binary condition; and
(e) continuously varying without discontinuity the instanU-
neous transmitter frequency at least once during a bit time
taterval to a minimum frequency less than the center
frequency and then to a maximum frequency greater than
the center frequency, with the minimum frequency and
maximum frequency respectively occurring at one-quar-
ter and three-quarters of the bit time interval, to transmit
a second binary condition.
4,438,520
SYSTEM FOR REGENERATING A DATA WORD ON A
COMMUNICATIONS RING
Jerome H. Saltier, Wabaa, Mass., aadgnor to Maaaachuaetts
Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Mass.
FUed Jul. 22, 1981, Scr. No. 285^00
.,«.,— Int a^ HOW 6/02
VS. a 375-1 5 Claim.
1. A system for regenerating a n-bit dau word on a commu-
nications nng signal path, said system having a nominal system
clock rate, comprising:
A. means for receiving said n-bit dau word and generating
an n-cycle derived clock signal and an n-bit derived dau
word from said received dau word,
B. means for generating a local dau word from said derived
dau word, said local dau word corresponding to said
derived dau word delayed by i periods, each of said
periods being approximately equal to the period associ-
ated with the nominal system clock rate,
C. means for generating an n-cycle transmit clock signal
from said derived clock signal, said transmit clock signal
including n-i cycles at the same rate as the (i-»-l)'*
through the n'* cycles of said derived clock signal fol-
lowed by i cycles at said system clock rale, where i u
greater than or equal to one, and less than or equal to
n-1, ^
D. means for generating an n-bit transmit dau word from
laid transmit clock signal and said local dau word, each
bit corresponding in time to a correspondingly positioned
cycle of said transmit clock signal and having a bit value
corresponding to the correspondingly positioned bit value
of said local dau word, wherein said transmit dau word is
said reclocked n-bit dau word.
4,438.521
AUTOMATICALLY ADAPTIVE TRANSVERSAL HLTER
AntiHmy Mattd^PhlWclphl,, P... ..rigMr to RCA Corpora.
tioB, New York, N.Y.
PUcd JuB. 7, 1982. Scr. No. 385,920
Int a^ H04B 3/JS
VJS. a. 375—16 7 ctatos
5. In an adaptive equalizer for equalizing distortion in a
received signal and comprising N-stage deUy line means, and
first means for sampling said received signal to provide sam-
ples and for seriaUy entering said samples into said delay line
means, and first logic means responsive to the samples con-
1368
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
Uined in said delay line stages to generate a scaled error signal
and comprising N second logic means each responsive to the
sample in an associated one of said N delay Une stages and to
said scaled error signal to produce a weighted sample, said first
logic means further comprising summing means for summing
all of said weighted samples after each entry of a new sample
into said delay line means, decision making means responsive
to each of the sums from said summing means to output a
selected quantized output signal, and second means for deter-
mining and scaling the difference between said first and quan-
tized output signals to produce said scaled error signal, and in
which said second logic means comprises:
MUKtCf
imamumjm
oriBnBiitia.
first multiplier means for multiplying the sample in an associ-
ated delay line stage by said scaled error signal to produce
a first scaled output signal;
accumulating means for accumulating the values of succes-
sive blocks of M first scaled output signals;
third means for scaling said accumulated first scaled output
signals;
second accumulating means for accumulating said scaled
accumulated first scaled output signals at every Mth sam-
ple to produce a weighting tap signal; and
second multiplying means for multiplying said weighting tap
signal by the value of the sample in the associated delay
line Stage to produce said weighted sample.
4,438,522
METHOD FOR ENCODING ANALOG SIGNALS USING
PCM DIFFERENCE CODE WORD FOR FORMING A
CODE WORD OF SPEOHED LENGTH
BJoern Bluethgen, CeUe, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaiigDor to
Polygram GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germaoy
FUcd Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,595
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 12,
1979, 2941452
iBt a^ H03K 13/22
VS. CI. 375—27 10 Claimi
1. A method for encoding analog signals for storage and
transmission thereof in digital form for reducing the digital
signal flow comprising the steps of:
sampling momentary values of said analog signal;
converting the sampled momentary values of said analog
signal into a series of pulse code modulated code words;
forming a corresponding series of pulse code modulated
difference code words from pairs of successive pulse code
modulated code word in said series, the length of each
pulse code modulated difference code word together with
one auxiliary code element indicating polarity forming a
reference code word having a predetermined constant
length which is selected to be less than a mff^imum possi-
ble length of a pulse code modulated difference code
word;
constantly comparing the respective lengths of the combina-
tion of said pulse code modulated difference code word
and said auxiliary code element with the length of said
reference code word;
abbreviating a pulse code modulated difference code word
...OKOOER
S!t^\^s^(/m^
compared with said reference code word when the length
of said combination exceeds the length of said reference
code word, such that said combination is abbreviated to
less than or equal to said reference code word length; and
adding a second auxiliary code element indicating code form
to the abbreviated code word and to the length of said
reference code word as required for identifying one of
two alternative types of code form.
4,438,523
DIFFERENTIAL DIGITAL MODULATION AND
DEMODULATION SYSTEM WITH AN ANALOG
SIGNAL-DEPENDENT SAMPLING CLOCK
Hana Brandl, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Gemuuy, aiiigiior to Sic-
mens Aktiengeaellichaft, Berlin 4 Munich, Fed. Rep. of Gcr*
many
FUed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,794
Claims priority, applicatioD Fed. Rep. of Germany, No?. 27,
1980, 3044765
lot. a.3 H04B 12/04
U.S. CL 375—30 18 Gains
1. A differential digital modulation and demodulation system
comprising:
a means for analog to digital conversion of an analog input
signal including
a first digital modulator to which said analog input signal
is supplied for converting said analog signal into a digi-
tal signal to be transmitted,
a sampling clock for controlling said first digital modula-
tor, said sampling clock having and being controlled by
a sampling clock generator,
a second digital modulator to which said analog input
signal is supplied for generating a tracking error signal,
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1369
a means for generating a control signal for said sampling
clock generator from said tracking error signal of said
second digital modulator, said control signal increasing
the frequency of said sampling clock generator upon an
increasing tracking error si^ and reducing the fre-
quency of said sampling clock generator upon a de-
creasing tracking error signal;
a means connected to an output of said first digital modula-
tor and to said sampling clock for generating a signal
block containing a plurality of digital signal bite corre-
sponding to said analog signal and a bit group identif^^g
the sampling clock frequency employed for generating
said digital signal bits in encoded form; and
a means for digital to analog conversion of said signal block
including
a means for separating said signal block into componento
consisting of said digital si^ bitt and said bit group,
a digital demodulator for converting said digital signal bits
into an analog signal corresponding to said analog input
signal,
a clock generator for controlling said digital modulator,
a clock frequency memory for receiving said bit group
and for controlling said clock generator such that said
clock generator supplies a frequency for controlling
said digital demodulator which corresponds to the
frequency in said means for analog to digital conversion
which was employed for generating said digital signal
bits.
intervals and follows after a present dibit interval having a
length of two symbol intervals, and beginning midway said
present dibit interval.,is equal to (ir/2) rad. if the first logic
value is regenerated in the present dibit interval, that the deci-
sion threshold for the second dibit interval is equal to (»/4)
rad. if the second logic value was generated in the present dibit
interval and, in a preceding dibit interval in which the first
logic value was generated, the phase difference was positive
(negative) and the number of symbol intervals between said
preceding dibit interval and the present dibit interval is even
(odd), and that the decision threshold for the second dibit
internal is -(n/i) rad, for the remaining cases in which the
phase difference wu negative and the number of symbol
intervals is even, or vice versa.
4.438328
REVERBERATION APPARATUS
TakMhl SUbata, Kawdrara, and MmmU NtaUmwa. Tokyo,
both of Japu, aiiiffon to Sony Corporatkw, Tokyo, J^aa
FUed Doe. 22, 1981, S«r. No. 333,587
18^fUl "****'' ■•'"*'***" '"^ "**• ^' *•*>• W-
bt di GIOH 1/02
VS. a 381—63 g orf—
4.438,524
RECEIVER FOR ANGLE-MODULATED CARRIER
SIGNALS
Dirk MidlwUk, HU?enaai, Netherlands, aadgnor to U.S. PhiUps
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,597
Claims priority, application Netherlaada, May 27, 1981,
8102595
Int a^ H04L 27/J8
VS. a 375-80 3 ri.1,^
//
Spring
Tyft
11 13
•"f^O OWUT ^ilB^»(,).4J
1. A receiver for angle-modulated carrier signals, the re-
ceiver comprising an input circuit for deriving the transmitted
angle-modulated carrier signal from a transmission channel, a
reference carrier circuit, a demodulation circuit coupled to Uie
input circuit for demodulating the transmitted angle-
modulated carrier signal with the reference carriers for gener-
ating first and second demodulated signals, and a regeneration
circuit for determining the instantaneous phase from said first
and second demodulated signals, the receiver further compris-
ing a decision circuit for producing regenerated binary data
signals from the instantaneous phase, characterized in that the
reference carrier circuit in the receiver comprises a carrier
oscillator, the frequency of which is approximately equal to the
frequency of the carrier oscillator of the transmitter, that the
decision circuit in the receiver determines the phase difference
between the end of a period, which is two symbol intervals
long and has a length of 2T, and the beginning of a second
period, which is two symbol intervals long and has a length 2T,
that the decision circuit is arranged for generating a first logic
value if the phase difference exceeds a decision threshold and
for generating a second logic valve if the phase difference falls
short of said decision threshold, that the decision threshold for
a second dibit interval, which has a length of two symbol
1040 O.O.— SI
1. A reverberation apparatus, comprising:
a signal input terminal to be supplied with an input signal;
delay circuit means having input and output terminals;
said delay circuit means input terminal being connected to
said signal input terminal;
a spring type reverberator having input and output termi-
nals, the input terminal of which is connected to the out-
put terminal of said delay circuit meaiu;
summing means having a pair of input terminals and output
terminal, the pair of input terminals being respectively
connected to said signal input terminal and the output
terminal of said spring type reverberator, and the output
terminal of said summing means having a desired rever-
beration sound produced thereat; and
said delay circuit means producing a delay time such that a
relatively high level spring type reverberation sound
signal produced by the spring type reverberator appean at
the output terminal after said delay time relative to appli-
cation of the input signal.
4,438,526
AUTOMATIC VOLUME AND FREQUENCY
CONTROLLED SOUND MASKING SYSTEM
Richard O. IVMnlla, St Paal, Mlaa^ aMi^or to Coawad
Corporatloa, St Paal, Miaa.
Filed Apr. 36, 1982, Sar. No. 372,033
lat a^ GIOK 11/00
VS. CL 381—73 10 Orf—
2. A sound masking system comprising means for generating
a random noise spectrvm; a pluraUty of primary filters for
separating the random noise spectrum into signal components
of predetermined frequencies; a plurality of divide circuits,
each said divide circuit being operative for receiving an associ-
ated signal component from among said signal components at
a divide input pori thereof; amplification means, said amplifica-
tion means receiving an output from said divide circuits for
driving a sound generating means in correspondence with said
output; at leut one microphone for sensing sounds in the ambi-
ent sound environment and providing an electronic signal in
1370
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
oomspoodence therewith; an input amplifier for amplifying
■aid electronic rignal; a plurality of secondary filten for receiv-
ing the amplified electronic signal and separating said elec-
^P°jc aiffial into predetermined frequency components
thereof; said secondary filter providing input signals to a plu-
rality of electronic detector circuity said plurality of error-
detecting circuits operative for receiving signals from said
("
r
1
1
f"
ss.
J
-*T!t
1
•!?#
1
i
f"
1
MM
onan
U ,
r~
ftl
I
LI l!f=n r ■ ■ ■ I
— ""^f -r- iSV — KTtra — mvSm -i
nnm cwti
^
l«
^«
c
t;
electronic detector circuits and feeding an error signal in cor-
respondence with the output of said detector circuits to the
denominator input ports of said plurality of divide circuits,
wherd>y said divide circuits vary the output amplitude of said
signal components to said amplification means for automati-
cally adjusting the volume of the sound masking system
throughout the frequency spectrum thereof.
to HUmU, Ltdn
M3M2t
CHANNEL SELECTION SYSTEM FOR AN ELECTRONIC
TUNER
TngM Itaidd, KoMtan, Jap«
Tokyo, Japaa
RM Aog. 3, 1112, Sar. No. 40M49
ippUcatiM Japan, Att, C IMl, 86-U2497
iBt ai H04B J/26
VJS. CL 495— 1S2 3 <
r^^^
SIGNAL RESPONSIVE AUTOMATIC CONTROL FOR
AUDIO EQUIPMENT
Wmitm P. HaauwMd, 7472 DafaMr. St Looia, Mo. 63130
Filed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 365jm
Irt. CLJ H04M lJ/00: H03G 3/20
VS. CL 381—107 13
r»,nM II
^^ns
'" /
«dsd
1. A device for automatically muting an audio signal, com-
prising:
means for providing an electrical signal having at least first
and weoood voltage levels;
means for sensing said first and said second voltage signal
levels;
meant operatively connectabk to an audio amplifier for
providing distortion free attenuation control of the audio
output of said amplifier,
meant operatively connected to said first and second voltage
tenting meant for predeterminedly operating said control
■Booat, taid operating meant automatically providing at
leatt first and second attenuation control voltage signal
levels in response reqwctively to said first and second
voltage signals levels; and
means for adjusting at least one of said first and second
attenuation control voltage signal levels operatively con-
nected to said predeterminedly operating
1. A channel selection system comprising:
(a) a tuner having a local oscillator and a mixer for mixing
the output of said local oacillator and a received signal and
generating an intermediate frequency signal,
(b) a variable frequency divider for frequency-dividing the
output of said local oscillator and either increasing or
decreasing the ratio of frequency division in accordance
with a control signal,
(c) a reference oscillator,
(d) a phase comparator for comparing the phatet of the
output of said variable frequency divider and the output of
said reference oscillator and feeding a comparison output
back to said local oscillator thereby to keep phase syn-
chronization between said both outputs,
(e) a frequency discriminator for receiving said intermediate
frequency signal and generating a discrimination signal
correqxmding to a difTerenoe between the frequency of
said intermediate frequency signal and a lefeienoe fre-
quency,
(f) a first control circuit for siqjplying to said variable fre-
quency divider a first control signal for either increasing
or decreasing the frequency division ratio of said variable
frequency divider so that said discrimination signal ap-
proaches its center value when said discrimination signal
is larger than a first prescribed value,
(g) a second control circuit for supplying to said variaUe
frequency divider a second control signal for cauaing a
variation of the frequency division ratio opposite to the
variation given by taid first control signal when said dis-
crimination signal it leai than a teoond preacribed value,
and
(h) a delay circuit provided between at les«t one of said first
and second contrcri circuits and said variable frequency
divider and for canting a dday at the rite time of at leatt
one of said first and second control signals while caostng
no delay at the falling time of said at least one control
signal signal
March 20, 1984
ELECTRICAL
1371
4,438,929 4,438,ff30
TA^ «^ ui HL """^EP^^^^w ADAPTIVE CROSS-POLARIZATION INTERFERENCE
1SlL!Sr"*7!f^J!P^,"*^*"^^^ CANCELLATION SYSTEM
'■'^^JitTSiir NO. 337,897 "^{^SSSTiS^^
IT « n M«_«on ^ "••" ^^^^ ^ CLJ H04B 1/W
UAa499-190 idata UAa499-278 8
'IN 9 1— (
i I»0UT
1. A TV tuner circuit compriting: a VHP RF amplifier
having a MOS PET with first and second gates, a source and
a drain, said first gate thereof being coupled to a VHP signal
input terminal; a UHF RP amplifier having a MES PET with
first and second gates, a source and a drain, said first gate
thereof being coupled to a UHP signal input terminal; a switch
means having a common terminal, a first terminal for selecting
VHP signal receiving and a second terminal for selecting UHP
signal receiving; a mixer for converting either VHP RP signal
or UHP RP sipial into an IP signal; an AOC voltage source
coupled to said respective second gates of said MOS PET and
said MES PET through resistors; a DC source voltage input
terminal connected to said common terminal of said twitch
means and to an input terminal of said mixer, and an IP signal
output terminal connected to an output terminal of said mixer,
wherein said source and drain of said MOS PET are connected
to said first terminal of said switch means through retittors,
and said drain of said MES PET is connected to said second
terminal of said switch means; and wherein said respective
sources of said MOS PET and said MES PET and connected
to ground through retittors, and said source of said MES PET
is connected to said DC source voltage input terminal through
a resistor.
1. An adaptive interference cancellation arrangement of the
type including
cancellation means responsive to at least one first control
signal for translating a first corrupted signal into a fint
output signal substantially comprised of a desired signal
component of the first corrupted signal, the cancellation
meant alto retpontive to at leut one second control signal
for translating a second corrupted signal into a second
output signal substantially comprised of a desired signal
component of the second corrupted signal.
correlation means jointly responsive to the first and second
output signals for combining the first and second output
signals to generate both a first correlation signal and a
second correlation signal, and
control means for adjusting at least one predetermined cha-
racterstic of first correlation signal to generate at least one
first control signal and for adjusting at leut one predeter-
mined characteristic of the second correlation signal to
generate at leut one second control signal.
the arrangement characterized in that the combining meant
includet
oscillator means for generating first and second clock signals
in an orthogonal relationship with each other,
switching means for periodically adjusting the phase of the
first output signal in response to the first and second clock
signals to generate a plurality of phase adjusted compo-
nents of the first signal u a first multiplexed signal.
means for combining the second output signal with the fint
multiplexed signal to generate a third output signal,
a square law device for detecting the power in the third
output signal to generate an output signal representing the
power envelope of the third output signal, and
a quadrature detector coupled to the square law device and
retpontive to the first and seqpnd clock signals for gener-
ating^ the second correlation signal.
DESIGNS
MARCH 20, 1984
273,054 ' 273,055
HUNTING GLOVE SIMULATIVE UMBRELLA
JUMt BriuoB, Jr^ Angngta, Gt^ aiiigDor to Genera L. Brio- Spencer Lee, 5517 Robertson A?e^ Sacramento, Calif. 05821
**^ """^^ 7^ . ™^ Oe*- 1'. 1«1. Ser. No. 312,380
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 187,426 U.S. a D3-6 ^.''***^
U.S.CLD2— 376
273,056
BOAT SEAT BOX CONSOLE OR SIMILAR ARnCLE
Richard C. Lennon, 1018-28tii St, Siou Qty, Iowa 51104
FUed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,219
U.S. a D3—40
273,057
LUGGAGE DESIGN
Ira R. Katz, Naahrille, and Robert P. Davia, Lebanon, both of
Tenn., aiiignort to Hartmaan Luggage Compaay, Lebanon,
Tenn.
FUed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,489
U.S. a D3— 71
1373
1374
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
273,058
LINT REMOVER
NkkolH D. Mdbjr. Gmd Btaac, Mkk^
Profccli CorporrtioB, PBt, Midt
„„ _ nW Ai» «, im, S«. No. 290,723
to
273,0(1
ROCXING CHAIR
Aldwta K. Goff, Rte. 2, Bex 31-0, OeUockMe, Ga. 31773
,T« ^ _ ™^D«. 17. Wtl.Sw. No. 331,437
UA a. D6— 49
273,099
UNT REMOVER
Nicholw D. McKajr, Gmd Bine, MieL,
ProdMts Corporatta, FUrt, Mich.
.,„ _ WW Ai» «, 1901, Ser. No. 290,725
VS. a. D4— 23.1
273/M2
SOAP DISPENSER
Jijiee E. RidMrdaoo, Weitport, Con., MrigMr to Waterbory
Conpaaict. Im., Waterbvjr, Con.
273,00
SHEET MATERIAL DISPENSER
Doiigiai K. Girtwvd, U12, Giwt Onbridge Rd., Eidleld, MM-
2734M0
^ „ ^^C^INED DESK AND SEAT UNIT Filed Feb. 10. 1901. Ser No. 233.142
*jj^HN^C.H«eC..tie207,1050P.l.a.,Rd.Sto. ^C^ WioH^, ^^^i^ij^i^l^l^ 20^ tm.
FUed Dee. 10, 1981. Ser. No. 329.544
VS.CL
99(212
UjS.aD6-96
March 20, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1375
273,064 2734M(
u_ m*.--* ».-J*2?' '>'"*«W8*» TABLE OR SIMILAR ARnCLE
HnnrRfliMit, Pwli, Fhnee. aerivMr to BEGHIN^Y SJL, Edwnd H. Knde, m, 338 Ple«nt PI
TbaaailM, Fknee Mmb. 03632
FUed Aat. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 2974M1 Filed Jn. 19. 198L Ser No. *^^«^
VJSt CL D6 96
AfOn Ceaterrilk,
"■^U^
273,065
DISPLAY BOOTH
RaliMl T. Baetoe, Atlnta, Ga^ aedgaor to LesB^tt it Piatt,
lacorporatad, Carttaaie, Mo.
FUed JaL 2, 1900. Ser. No. 165.363
VJS. CL D6— 132
273,067
SHELF UNIT
JaaMa G. Efaaa, 17999 North St, Vaadalia, Mkb. 49095
FDed Oct 2, 1981, Ser. No. 308.069
U.8. CL D6— 186
1376
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
273,068
DISPENSER FOR CANS OR BOTTLES
Willini 8. SpoMT, Rofwdl, Gil,
ratiiM, Oaytoa, OUo
„„ ^ »'n«l Ai» 27, 19tl, 8«. No. 2M,»7
UA CL D6— 18S
273,072
*«^ w .« SLEEPWEAR HANGER
tolWMcadCorpo- Joha H. Btm, Emt Graad Rapids, nd Efcratt L.
Zeelttd, both or MidL, aHigMn to Joha ThoMt Batti. IM.
Zodaad, Mich. »«»,•«.,
.re ^ _™««M"M.MW.Sw.No.3S7345
U A CL 06—254
^
^
^ —
273,069
FURNITURE TOP
Job a. Yaager, Fairfield, Ohio, aMigaor to Haailltoa Sorter Co
lac, Fairfield, Ohio **
. , „ ^ FIWJbL 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,054
U.S. CL D6— 192
273,073
SLEEPWEAR HANGER
Joha H. Bat^ Eaet Graad Rapids, aad Ererett L. Doester,
zcdaad, both of Mich., assigaors to Joha Tboaias Batts. laiL.
Zeeiaad, Mich. —m^wc,
,,„ Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 357^51
VS. a D6— 254
273,070
WORK TABLE TOP
JohaH. Welsch, Moscow, aad Rodaejr Braacher, WIlkes-Barre,
hott of Pa., asdgaort to MetropoUtaa Wire Corporation.
Willces-Barre, Pa. i-- — ,
., c ^ Filed Doc. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,994
VS. a. D6— 192
273,074
REMOVABLE CANOE^ARRIED COOLER
Kenneth G. Mathiea, 33980 Oakdak, Ufoala, Mich. 48154
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,119
VS. CL D7— 77
2734r71
PILLOW
Udlle Stark. Pfae VOIage II. Box 127, Hobart, lad. 46342
„„ Filed Not. 17, 1981. Ser. No. 322,219
VS. CL D6— 201
/?— =^
March 20, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1377
273,075
TURNING UTENSIL FOR BARBECUES
Shawa A. Haydea, 22 Stadiaai Rd., Methaea, Mass. 01844
Filed Oct 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,549
VS. CL D7— 106
273,077
DETENT COUPLED DRILL BTT CHUCK OR THE LIKE
Mehia C. BeU, 10614 Sheldon Woods Way, Elk Grofe, Calif.
95624
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,340
U.S. a. D8— 10
273,078
HEAD FOR A TOOL FOR APPLYING A?«) REMOVING
CYCLE TIRES
Stig B. BdrebMck, Lyagby 12, S-240 13 Genarp, Sweden
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,601
Clainu priority, application Fed. Rep. of Gennaay. Mar. 17.
1981, URA 289/81
VS. a. D8— 31
273,076
HANDLE FOR A KTTCHEN TOOL
Nigel F. Bodflsh, SolihnU, England, assignor to GiU-Mentor
Limited, Great Britaia
FUed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 291,731
Claims priority, appUcatioa Uaited Kiagdom, Feb. 3, 1981,
998728
VS. CL D7— 395
n
273,079
* BUFFER
Howard IbaraU, Hadenda Heights, Calif., assigaor to Orioa
ladnstries. Inc., Compton, Calif.
FUed No?. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,932
VS. CL D8— 62
1378
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
273,080 yT3JM9
TURNING BLOCK FOR GLASS PANELS OR THE LIKE GLAMcSrTKM
B-g--CBr-b«nr.4«SE«lyRi..U.,«tao^Pta. Mdl^Tlo-- B--K 47«'SlrR^ F.^^
FIM Mar. 2S, IMl, Scr. No. 247,235
VS. CL DO-71
28303
„„ nW Die. 24, 1981, 8«. N©. 334,3M
VJS. CL 08—98
O (
•^
o_ e
273,083
WOOD WORKING PLANE
Iirlag Slouc, 42, Sqnan MargacrUc, Box 73, 1040 BtmnIs.
BclgiuB — — -»
FUmI Dm. 21, 1981, Scr. No. 333,431
8l5l0010W*°^' ■•''*'**** "■**** '^'■«*«» J"- !•. «•».
U.S. a D8— 101
273,081
SHARPENING STONE HOLDER FOR KNIFE
SHARPENER
Arthur L. LctIm, P.O. Box 800, WilliamsTille, N.Y. 14221
Flkd No?. 30, 1981, Scr. No. 325,759
VJS. CL D8— 93
o
273,084
ELECTRICAL OUTLET COVER PLATE AND CLOSURE
Duicl P. HMkd, Knklctowi, Pa., MrivMr to Sqwvc D Co»
pcay, Palattec, DL
Filed Oct 1, 1981, Scr. No. 307,407
U.S.aD8-353
March 20, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1379
273,085
SPACER FOR FERTILIZER TUBING
HalMj J. WdMrc, QwjwMt, Okie Mri^or to
Fadai Coapuy, Im^ Owfwum, Okie
Filed Mar. M, 1981, Scr. No. 244,041
U.S.aDt-354
273,088
VEGETABLE HOLDER
Hard- °— *-"-* ^-Jiiina Hakw. rir.Maiiaorto
en, lacn Dvkaa, NXX
FDcd No?. 13, 1981, Scr. No. 321,082
UJ.aD8-^9S
Mold-
273,086
UNFIARY WATER SKI ROPE HANDLE AND REEL
Ncfl F. CoicMa, 2225 9lh St SE., Wiator Harcn, Fla. 33880
Filed Aag. 24, 1981, Scr. No. 295,563
U.S.aD8..358
273,089
LOUVRE OPENER
Albert Cole, Keewick, Eaglaad, aaei^or to TheriBoforce Lia-
itod, Caoibria, Easlaad
Filed Sep. 15, 1981, Scr. No. 302,604
aabM prtority, appUcatioa Uaitod Klaadom. Apr. 3. 1981,
81/999793
U.S. a. D8— 400
273,087
GEODESIC DOME CONNECTOR
JaaetaJokBaoa,aBdDeaBiiO.JokBeoa.botkorRte.3,Box 273,090
105D, Nortt Bruek. Miw. 55M6 THRESHOLD SEAL FOR A DOOR ASTRAGAL
FDcd Aaa. 14, 1981, Scr. No. 292,952 RayiMMd E. lapcrial, P.O. Box 368, Rkkwwd. lad. 47374
FDcd Not. 6, 1981, Scr. No. 318,734
VS. a D8— 400
Uj5.aDft-382
1380
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
HOLE PLUG OR THE LIKE jmnur^n^iu^n ». « ™
WKV'i--
za
uuum-n-tynttmwamitMma:
'3B1
273,095
VISUAL MARKER
Herbert C. Schnlze, P.O. Box 6070, Incline Village, Ner 89450
Filed Feb. M, 1981, Ser. No. 237,245
U.S. CL DIO— 109
273,092
BOTTLE
Edward J. Kretz, Toledo, Ohio, assignor to Owens-Illinois. Inc.
Toledo, Ohio ^ ^
FUed Ang. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,610
U.S.CLD9— 389
273,096
FLAG
Peggy L. Cooper Inks, Rte. 9, Box 222, London, Ky. 40741
FUed Feb. 21, 1978, Ser. No. 879,819
VS. a. Dll— 175
273,093
PILL DISPENSER
Hans-Goran Londen, and Nils-Ake W. Temerot, both of SSder-
tilie, Sweden, assignors to Astn-Syntex Scandinavia Ak-
tiebolag, Sodertiljc Sweden
Filed Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,548
aaims priority, appUcation Sweden, Mar. 19, 1981. 81-693
U.S. a. D9U.389
;
March 20, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1381
^^ 273,097 j^« inn
ALL POSITION TRACTOR FOR MOUNTING A TOOL POWER Amisrrrn Rfrvrr v
SUCH AS A WELDING. CUITING OR GOUGING TORCH WilUa. H. ZlSTwiSJ^iS^ ««..- a^
i^^li^^^^y^ST' aU of Ohio, assignors to Arcair VfM JnTTo, l«rsrNo!i2,097
company, Lancaster, Ohio u^. q. D12— 111
Filed Jnn. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,090
U.S. CL D12— 36
273,098
AUTOMOBILE
Teruhiko Ohhashi, Hanuunatsn, Japan, assignor to Suxuki
Motor Co. Ltd., Kamlmura, Japan
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,829
U.S. a. D12— 90
273,101
MOTORCYCLE CRUISE CONTROL
CecU M. Kiser, Jr., 304 N. Main, Newkirk, Okla. 74647
DiTlsion of Ser. No. 8,978, Feb. 2, 1979, Pat No. D. 267,085.
This appUcation Oct 16, 1981, Ser. No. 311,992
U.S. a. D12-174
273,102
WHEEL
Richard R. Woodward, Yaldiag, England, assignor to GKN Kent
Alloys Limited, En^and
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,162
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 7, 1981, 81
999832
U.S. CL D12— 209
273,099
TRAILER
Kerin E. Koch, 47 Kinkaid Atc^ North Plympton, State of South
Anstralia, AnstraUa
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,641
U.S. CL D12— 105
^
1382
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
273,103 .yn iac
uJ^ MATERIAL APPUCATION COOTROLLER hOlSmAKER
ponooa, AMMnt, OUo Kaiiha. Tokyo. Ja^
„ ?!!i!V'****'' •M»««««on JapM, Mtt. 13, 1981, 56.10424
UJS. C3. D14— 30
273,104 273107
nied Jnn. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,286 poed Dec 4 IMO «m> Ma *ii iwct
\j»o, \JL 014^53
273,105
CASSETTE TAPE RECORDER
Hirotaka bni, Tokyo, Japan, aMigaor to Pkmea* Electronic
CorporatkM, Tokyo, Japan
FIM Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305^01
., ?^,r*°^' ■W"'***"" J«P^ Apr. 8, 1981, 56-14899
U.S. d D14— 6
273,108
TELEPHONE INSTRUMENT
Cari-Ane Breger, Stockkoia^ Sweden aviffor to Telcfonak-
tMolaget L M ErkwM, Stockkola^ Sweden
Flkd Dec 4, 1980, Ser. No. 2134)92
Claims priority, appiicatkM Sweden, Jnn. 11, 1980, 80001185
VJS, G, D14'^43
^sa
1__]
I
MMI1»
March 20, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1383
273,109 273.112
COMBINED CONTROL DEVICE AND DISPLAY UNIT DISPLAY CONSOLE
FOR TELEPHONE EXCHANGE Josepk SUwkowiU, Sndbnry; Gilbert G. F^yklnnd, Winckeitor.
Stockkoiai, Sweden, aarisMT to Telefonak. ud Vance A. Parker, F^andngkaa, aU of Mml, aHlMor* to
tiabolaget L M ErlcHon, Stockkolii, Sweden Telesis Corporation of Delaware, lac, WUnrinston. DeL
.T fi r, «• JS* '"• ^* "•*• ^- ^"- ^^" "" J"»- »«. !•«. S«- No. 17MW
UA a D14— 58 UA a D14-103
Garl-Ane
273,110 273,113
TELEPRINTER KEYBOARD AND TELEPHONE OPTICAL SCANNER HOUSING OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Donald M. Genaro, Hawortk, and Alvin R. TiUey, Red Bank, RnMeU D. Knoll, Catlin, nt, aadgnor to HnrletrooAltair, Inc,
botk of N J., aaiisBon to Tdetype Corporation, Skokie, 01. Danirille, DL
Filed No?. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,335 Filed No?. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325^11
UA a D14-.58 UA Q. D14-116
273,114
COMBINED MICROWAVE OVEN AND REFRIGERANT
273,111 UNIT
COMBINED DATA INPUT TERMINAL AND ACOUSTIC ^^^^^ Daadgaer, Esbjcrg, Denmark, anigDor to A/S Veetfroat,
COUPLER Esbjcrg, Denmark
TakasU Hirata; Kmfo Hiroae, both of Yokobama, and Hirohiko ^^^^ '■■l 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,682
Katayaau, Kawasaki, aU of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabn- Cl*lw Priority, application Denmark, Jaa. 28, 1981, 158/81
AIM Kaislm, T<^o, Japan ^•S* CL D15— 88
Filed JnL 28, 1981, Ser. No. 287,867
Oalms priority, application Japan, Feb. 9, 1981, 564666
UA CL D14— 101
1384
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20, 1984
PMV, CotaS-Tliid/ ^^ ^ ^^ ^^ ^^ both «fJ.p«i,.«|gBon to Coo. KdHrtIldKirf«ta, Tokyo,
UAaOlS^'*^''''^'*'"''"-^'^ J^ FIW No.. 30. 1981. St. No. 325323
r~ priority. ■PpUartloo Japui, Jim. 2, 1981. 56*24159
VS. CL D18— 7
273,116
VARIABLE SPEED BELT DRIVE
Robert O. Hnff, Piedmont, S.C.; Edward F. Krome, Jr., and
Gebns Bamifirtber, both of Colambiis. IimL, anigiiora to ReU-
ance Electric Conpttiy, Colombas, lad.
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,010
VS. CL D15— 148
273,119
INK JET PRINTER
Daniel T. Noonan, Irring. Tex., aaaignor to The Mead Corpora-
tion, Dayton, Ohio
. , o ^ PUed Mar. 8, 1982. Ser. No. 355.448
VS. CL D18—13
273.120
STAMP
Katiami Ito, Nagoya, Japan, aadgnor to ShacUhata Indutrial
Co., Ltd^ Japan
Piled Oct 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313.217
aaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 21, 1981, 56-16969
VS. CL D18— 15
273,117
TYPEWRITER FOR EUROPEAN LANGUAGES
Taro Kaaagi. Tokyo, and Ke^ji Tamada, Kodaira, both of Japan,
aiiisnon to SUver Seiko Limited, Japan
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,871
IT ?!SVJ^*^' ■»"«*»o» J"!*", Jan. 20, 1982, 57-1831
VS. CL Dl»— 1
March 20, 1984 U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1383
273,121 vnitA
Charie. R^iS^rSSi:!!?^ f'^^lSl n „, ^^"^ SURFAcS^lSi A GAME BOARD
vwMe. KawMM. 8073 Keatwood A?e^ Loa Aagelei. Calif. John S. Craft, EIUiTllle. Mo. '^'^^^
PUed Dec 23 1981 JW isi« tM«icn ., » ^ ^ ™^ ''*• ^^ **^ *«• No. 348,731
VS. CL D18--15 w3.«0 U A CL D21— 34
273,122
HAND OPERATED LABEL APPLYING MACHINE
Yo Sato, Tokyo, and Tadao Kashiwaba, Iwate. both of Japan,
anignon to ic«i«n«KiM Kaigim Sato, Japan
FUed Jnn. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,767
dalnif priority, application Japan. Dec 8. 1981. 56-54272
U.S. CL D18--19
273.125
ANIMAL nCURE TOY
Shinrokn Nakao, Kanagawa; Yoahiyara lahil, and Kiyoahi Ho-
ihino, both of Tokyo, aU of Japan, amignon to Combi Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,909
ClainM priority, application Japan, Sep. 17. 1981, 5641077
U.S. CL D21— 150
273 123 273.126
NEWSPAPER VENDING RACK OR SIMILAR ARTICLE p^er J Tnr-. iSS'iJIil^lS ^i!£S a i
PVeJ^.Gore.Dalla.Tex.a..i.nortoGam«ttCo.,Inc.Roch. 't.flSr^id'illJriSL.'?^^-^
' • Filed May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,439 """^ ^j^* ?J2, w ,« ^ .«
UJS. CL D20— 6 ™** "'"• *• ^'**' ^' No. 280.559
Term of patent 14 yean
Int a. D21— 2i<«
U.S. CL D21— 234
1386
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
FIM Oct 2, IMl, 8m. No. JOMtS
U A a D24-.26 •--.—
273,128
HANDLE FOR A TOILET SEAT OR THE LIKE
Rob«rt T. Roddick. S22 Hfll St. Sn Vnmdaco, CUif. 94114
Flkd Mn. 19. 1981, Ser. No. 245.363
VS. CL D2»-71
March 20, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1387
273.133
URINAL
273.135
»- . ^ .». .. DISPOSABLE DOUCHE HAG
UA a D24!IS "^ "• '"*' ^' ''"• '^^^ *^-«- °- "^^
^a^
- h^
273.131
SURGICAL STAPLER
DoogiM G. NoUflc, Now Cmmi; Pnl O. Rawww. Ewtoi^
Richard Yasud. BridgBwatMr, aU of Cont, a«i|
United Stataa Sorgical Corporatioa. Norwalk. Cooa.
Filed Oct 2. 1981. Ser. No. 308.087
VS. a D24— 26
to
273.129
ACUPUNCTURE POINT LOCATOR
Robert M. Kmz. LaGraafe; KeaMtii Hartaaa. DeKaib. aad
HaroU Worbjr. Maple Parit, aU of IlL. MdvMTi to Meridia U
Corporatioa. SkoUe, m.
FDed Jaa. 19. 1981. Ser. No. 226.197
VS. a. D24— 8
273.132
CORDLESS VIBRATING MASSAGER
Alaa Motoff, 6 York Dr.. Edtooa. N J. 08817
Filed Jaa. 18. 1981. Ser. No. 274.763
VS. a D24^1
273.136
WALL PANEL
Joee Varela. 1728 W. 33rd PL, Hialeak. Fla. 33012
FUed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,377
U.S. a D25— 80
273,134
MEDICAL CONTAINER FOR INJECTABLE
SUBSTANCES
Loais T. Pageis. HaM>?er Park, IlL. aieisBor to Aatoautic
Uqaid PackagiBS, lac, Arliagtoa Helghta, lU.
FUed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299^08
VS. a. D24— 56
:>c
DC
DC
DC
DC
273,137
WALL PANEL
Joee Varela, 1725 W. 33rd PL, Hialeak, Fla. 33012
FDed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356.378
U A a D25-80
5c
g
5:
S
&
2
zc
X
2
S
yr-
s
1388
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 20. 1984
to P.CF. Undtod,
273,138 yn i^i
SUPPORT FOR A CANDLE AND THE LIKE HArensm
rfato TraMworU DfUwerj Aml, SMrtkfMd, Mich. Enaiaiid «-*— ••,
3W57»0
VS. CL D28— 13
273,139
FISHING UGHT
Lumy H. Cuiadjr, 709 EoeraM Gvden, North Uttle Rock,
Ark, 72118
Filed Dec 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,180
VS. CL D26—61
273,142
SHAMPOO SUPPORT DRAIN
Sub a. Brigff, Rte. 1, Box 71AM, Knun, Tex. 76240
Filed Mw. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,777
VS. a. D28— 20
273,140
TABLE LAMP
Kittioa Maaa, Kowloon, Hong Kong, aaiigiior to Chmig Mel
Metal * Plaetk Factory Ltd., Kowloon, Hong Kong
PDed Oct 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,352
lOOwT ''*°^' ■''"*"**~ ^■**** Kingdom, Aag. 12, 1981,
U.S. a D26— 93 0
March 20. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1389
273,143 173141
CUnCLE DEVICE FACE MASK
^i?!^^ ^^ ^*^ ^' otOtnumy, aarignor to A. W. Uwranee G. Ponal, Highland Park. DL.
Filed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 399,053 mmi Dec 14. 19il Sw Na aan^ii
jjj^!^Prtority, appUcatlon Fed. Rep. of Gennany, May 11. VS. d D29T ^ ' " "* ^^^^
VS. a D28— 57
to
273,146
VACUUM CLEANER INTAKE MEMBER
Grace Farr, 5699 Wedeklnd Rd., Sparki, Nev. 85431
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299^53
U.S. a D32— 31
273,147
SERVICE STAND FOR AUTOMOTIVE SERVICE
STATION
Landli I?enon, 8411 81it St Sooth, Cottage Grote, Mlna.
55016
Filed Nor. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319^02
U.S. a D34— 6
273,144
> CUTICLE DEVICE
AzeiJankewiti, FHrth, Fed. Rep. of Gennany, aMignor to A. W.
Faber-Gaiteil, Nuremberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed JnL 16. 1982. Ser. No. 399.054
Caalms priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 14,
1982,7901
U.S. a D28— 57
273,148
COLLAPSIBLE CLEANING CART
Roee L. Lcrma. 2895 Freeman PL, Fkvmoat Qdlf . 94536
Filed Oct 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,847
VS. a D34-21
3>
^<C
LIST OF PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 2arH DAY OF NfARCH. 1984
hfam-AfiMMdfaMopntaice with the fint linificaiit daneter or word oT the
(to •ooordBioe with dty ead tdepl»S*i»rtory pmak*^
A.P.C&, Inc.: Sm-
A rfftSt £S[1L"^ l^^r?" *^ h ^".»5. a 222^2.000.
A. O. Somh HarveMore ProdoctB, Inc.: Sm-~
. J'!?^ °??^ ^ M37,I06, a 414.3O7.00a
A Peekasiiig Service Cciiiinay, lac.: Stt—
Sahkr. Devid J., 4,43>,5«, CL 206-1.300
A. Raymond: Sm—
. ^Andre, Ouy, 4,437,633. CL 24C.68.00R.
A/S Orthana Keoiik Pabrik: Stt—
"cftiElW oS^ ^"" *■' "** *'«***«* E™* L.. 4,431,100
A. Schulman, Inc.: S«r—
*w ^^^^y*l!?* ^^ *^38,162. a. 427-318.000
Abe. Hanihiko; Harada, Hinwhi; Deada, Matahika Nagaaawa. KoichL
and Kono. YoaUo. to MttnMahi DeaU KabuahildKaiaha. pi«^
treating apparatu. 4,438,36S. Q. 313-39.000.
Abe. Hiroahi. to Aaahi Seiko Kaboahiki Kakha. Coin couadas and
dispmiaf apprntus. 4,437,478. a 133.5.00iL
Abe.Kdzo:SM—
^^ hf'^^J^**^ Y"«»; Abe. Kelxo; Matno. Hideo;
Kidu. Yoahfflori; Miyake. Yamhiko; aad Matwyuaa. Yoahihiio.
4.438,155.0.427-49.000. «~™ro.
Ab^ Takedii. to Ricoh Co. Ltd. Device of mtegratinc a mall amount
*5["°S[.**'*2** **" ^^ detection. 4.437,336, a 73-40.50R.
Abiko. Shuio: Sa*^
Sawada, TakeaU; Yoaeda, Ko; Shiami. Akin; Goto. Hirokazu; aad
AWko. Shuzo. 4.438,47a Q. 360-1 13.000 ~™»— . «»
Ate^, Joaeph A.; Klokhofaa, Erik; aad Herd, Sigrid R., to lateraational
Bwrineai Machiaei CorporaiioiL Zero to faw ■wyt^i^r.ttriftri^^ w,!,
coemvity, polycryMalliae, Co-Pt magnetic lecordiu madia.
4,438,066,0.420435.000. »-i»«« "^"^ "*»»•
Abraham, John K.: S^«—
"^J?* '*^..l?'' A^«»»». J<^ K.; Mtatua, Raymond E.; and
Thomas. MilUcent H.. 4.437,902. 0. 148-12.00P.
Abrevava. Albert: Sm—
Aw-2™*I*^ '°f^ "^ Abievaya. Albert. 4,437,429. a 119-1.000.
Abriotti. Andre: &»—
^^^7?ffib ^^^'^ ' ' "** A**™*"*. A«»». 4,438.205. O.
Abo-ffliua»y^ Alunad; Hehner. John C; and Lnchetti, Stephen J., to
Varian Aaaociatea, Inc. Single-pan^ multi^ stroke propntioaint
. !Z 9"^^ ^<»B liquid chrooiatogFaphy. 4,437,812, 0. 417-53.00d!
ACP Indoitriei, Inc.: Sit—
Sdmiper, Dennii J., 4,437,798, O. 406-119.000
Acker, Rolf-Dieter. Romy. Phillip A.; Hamprecht, Gerhard; and Wu-
ener, Bnmo. to BASF AktiengeadbchafL DihydrotUopbeaecar-
^^-1^ 5?*-,^^ '" controlling underwable plant growth.
4,437.878. O. 71-90.000
Ackerman. Bernard, to Ackrad Laboratoriea, In& Securing device for
tube inaertaUe to body cavity. 4,437,463, a 128-207.170.
Ackermann. Ulrich; aad Ratacn, Eggo, to Vemichaaaatalt f. Deotache
Porachnaga-u Lufl-u Raumfahrt e.V. Noiaelem """"Hittion aad
Idaama cutting arrangement 4,438316, CL 219-121.0PC
Ackley, Chariet E., Jr.: Saa—
A«*lg^ChartB8 E., Sr.; and Ackley, Charlea E., Jr., 4.437,559. 0.
^^' °*''3?1- ^*' "^ A«*'«y' Clarke E.. Jr.. to R. W. Hartnett
Conqiany. Metiwd and apparatus for removing non-ractifled «^Ttnlft
miflSSr^ 'wtification and ttwaport device. 4,437,555. O.
Ackrad Laboratories. Inc.: St*—
Ackerman. Bernard. 4,437.463. 0. 128-207.170
Acme n^iway Products Corp.: Sia^
Puocio. Guy S.. 4,437,783, a 404^.000.
Aooa Rnoe Piratini &A.: Stt—
Martin, Oovis L.. 4.437.835. a 43M03.00O
Acroaeal Window Corporation; Sm—
''TaUwS.iiSsssS' '^ "•• "■■■ -»«■■«* V,
Adama. Gvy V.; and Schneiter. Pred E.. to Thiokol Corporation.
Ijfljrtg for a protective inflatable cushion syttem. 4,437581, a
Adell, Rctart, to U.S. Product Devekmieat Company. Method of
manufhctnrittg edge guards. 4,437,916, a 156-222:bOO
Adler, Peter K., deoeaMd: Sn
"T"^!.tel.^ ^'J^^"^"!^ ^">»" ^i Nordmeyer, Robert
A.; and Smith. Jay, m. 4,4377738. a 353-26.00R.
Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.: Sm—
4,438,346, O. 307-297.000
Aero Environmental iii<*H- ^tt
Brooker, Michael P. C; McKeiihen. Steven J.; Attwda. Haalmink-
A .!JL?' S? ^5?^ ^"^"^ ^ 4,437,831, a 431-177.000
Aero-Motive I4tp Co.: Sm—
Roaenberf, Irwto. 4,437,624, O 242-107.300
Agency of Induatrial Irimnr and Technology: Sm—
IsU. YosUaki; Knme, Tsutomn; Ando, NaoyoaU; and PaHnamL
Shosakn. 4,437,416, O. 1 10-245.000. ^^ rj^umm,
Agb-Gevaert AG: S«v—
^^SSSuoS**"****' ■** ^***"*^y' °*'*** 4,437.749. O.
Pjigdwnann. Dieter; Hackenberg, Hubert; Lermann. Peter Wac-
A ^ Jf • ^S^ 2*** SiefWei 4,437,751. O. 354-214.000
Agn-Gevaert Aktiengesdiachaft: Sw—
'^O^isO-ISoOo'^'"'*'^ "^ ^^^"'^ Karl-Wilhetai. 4,438,195.
A ^'^"' i^' ^ *'*•«*«' A**'' M38.164, O. 428-35.000.
^.4.'o29?:2tfSo^ ^"^ ~™^ "«^ ■"P'^
AhroM. Max; and Haiiaig. ManfM. to Bodiler Aktieageaellachaft
A i5l*^ 5* **^' ^ ""*» stripping. 4,437,509. O 164454.000.
Aide CastfUanos Kwasniak: Sm—
Castellanos Manero. Carlos E. 4,437,25^ O. 42-89.000.
Air Products and Chemicals, Inc.: Sm—
Nwjtoj^Oiarles L.; and Putoi. Dennii L.. 4,437,312, O.
Aiato SdU kaboahiki Kaiaha: &a^
Nomura. IsaU; and Akagi. Motonobo. 4,437,645, O 251-65.000.
Yamazawa. MasayuU. 4,437,423, O. I1^292.000.
Aizawa, Hklekuai: Sis^
MiyaaUta, Takao; Aizawa, Hidekuai; and Takamiya. Toni.
4,437.778,0.400-208.000 ta—iy^ lorv.
Ajiro, Tamotii: Saa—
Miyamoto, Akin; Shimini, Senzo; Harada. Mmahiro. Aiifo.
. .. . ^^fi?*^ •«* **^ "id*"^ 4.438.257. O 528-347.000
Akademii Nauk Ukratoako: Ssa^
Safoonikov, Anatoly N.; and Antonov. Anatoly V., 4,438,313, O.
Akagi, Motonobu:
Au w?"?^ ^ "^ ^^"f^ Motonobu. 4,437,645, O 251-65.000
Akaahi, AUra; Katsuma, Makoto; Kawamura, Masaharu; Kamata.
Shiferuj and Saito, Syukhiro, to Canon g«*«nAi|^ Kakha. Safety
device for camen and aooemory. 4,437,752, a 354-289.000.
Anmoto, Masahiro:Sa»—
Nomoto, Rdshi; Akimoto, Masahiro; and Takahaahi MmayoahL
4,437,465. O. 128-340X100 — — «. mmmyfMO,
Aldta, Yoahk>; Maruyaau, ToaUnori; and Muto, Katsoya, to Nippon-
denao Co.. Ltd. Generation *"««i^»Ht appantw for vahick attana-
ton 4,438,384, O. 32O48.0O07 ^^ ^^
Akiyama, Maaataka- St»—
Shhaada, Kano; AUyama. Maaataka; aad Soda m— it
4.438/)93, a 424-50.000. """"^ *««■ "■"»»•
Akzo N.V.: Sm—
Saaden, Adriaaus L. M.; Meulemaa. Diit G.; Modker, HuibertC
Albaay International Plmtic B.V.: Sm—
^'^jdwPtoejjDirk C R; and Tameria. Hendrikus M.. 4,437,787.
Albauch. NeO P.': Sm-
A«„^**^ ^••Jf"' Albaugh. Ndl P.. 4.438438. a 250-551.000.
^^Sf!2LP??^2l** I''"'?'*'**'' ^^'^y '^^ to MinKk Products.
A 5!!!*^ 2*'^**' ** ^*«» ""•"•^ 4^5«'3H a 307-146.000
Alberta OU Sands Technology and Reaeareh Authority: 5w^
Boorman. PUhp M.; Chhm. Tristram; Tavana, DoMid P.; and
AH**'*'!?^'JF"'*««'"W» N., 4,438,218, a 30^22aOOO
Albertaon, Kurt D.: Sai—
A»tojj,^abartos R.; and Albertaon. Kurt D., 4,438,175, O
Alcoo Laboratoriea, Inc.: &*—
^ York. BUlie M., Jr., 4,438,272. a 548-301X00
Akienhoven. Ohklania M. A. '
nism responsive to rotation „,
mechaniam 4,437.626, a 242-1
Alfuo. Robert R.:&w—
*^^i«^l2J™" •*•' "»* ^"^^ *o*«< *•• M38,416, a
333-160000
1.772,0. 948-301.000
. M., to U.S. Philips CorpocMion. Mocha-
PI I
PI 2
LIST OF PATENTEES
NfARCH 20, 1984
Allm, Kdth, to FBC Limited. Poticidal oompontkmt employina
•nutntt with rtibilizer. 4,438,137, a. 424-330.00a »* ' »
Alhrd, Gilbert Fiahing leader bolder. 4,437458, CL 43-57.100.
AUec Jooaae: See—
°!fS*^/wi?°*''""*^ ■"* ^"«' J<*««^ 4,438,0m, CL
424-70.000.
ABoi, LJoyd E.; and Riblet, Lealie A., to Mead Johaaon * ConuMny.
Metbod fw aUeviatxm of eztrapyramidaJ motor diaordera. 4,438,119,
CL 424-251.000.
ADea, MaJcobn L..- See—
DelOreco. Angela O.; Allen, Malcolm L.; and Jacobaen. Ronald
L., 4,438,024, Q. 252-545.000. -*»«. *M»naia
Allied Corporation: 5^e^
Oreutmann, Hana. 4,437,230, Q. 29-597.000.
Mg*"^ Agun;^Ig)etter«, Daniel; and Edelatein, Harold. 4,438.017,
Nalew^jek. IHvid, 4,438,078, Q. 423-21.500.
T^lkowaki. Edward O., 4,438,026, CL 252-545.000.
^SiSow**" ^' ^ '*^' ^^ ^''"^ *'*'^*- ♦•*^''3'0' CI
Allbon, Richaird: Sm—
Harrington. Alan L.; Alliaon. Richard; and Rodov, Vladimir.
4.438,448, a. 357-23.000. »uu™,
Alpa Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Hori. Fumihiaa, 4,437,777, Q. 400-154.200.
Alaton. Lawrence R, to Polaroid Corporation. Conatant light gxeyacale
generator for CRT color camera system. 4,438,453. a. 358-78.000.
Alummium Pechiney: See—
Ge^a^m, Jean-Louia; and Wdter, Claude, 4,437,964. a.
Aluminum Company of America: See—
van Linden. Jan H. L., 4,437,650, Q. 266-144.000.
Amano, Kazunori; and Seldwaga. Youichi, to Todiiba Heating AppU-
M37,8M:'ci.''43ioSt(SS* ""'•^ '** ■ """"^ -pp*^
American Cyanamid Company: See—
^^•«PSS^ '■' "^ Huffinan. Kenneth R., 4.438,253, Q.
928-sO.UUU.
American Home Producta Corporation: See—
Heifer, Joel N.; md King. Phillip W., 4,437,467, Q. 128-642.000.
?12MiL^ ' "^ ^'^"'^ **" •'•• *.*38.031. a. 260-
American Hoapital Supply Corporation: See—
Bonanyi. Alexander S., 4,437,990, Q. 210-321.300.
American Microaystema, incorporated: See—
^^» ilTJ^ ^^5^' ^*™°' •«' Schuler, Jefftey A.,
4,438,354, CL 307-493.000.
American Safety Equipment Corporation: See—
Wyder, Manfred, 4,437,623, a. 242-107.200.
American Standard Inc.: See—
Paacoe, Robert D., 4,437,632, Q. 246-34.00R.
Ameron, Inc.: S^e—
Magarian, Gerald M.; and Friedrich. Ralph S., 4,437.616, CI.
242-7.020.
AMF Incorporated: See—
Brown, Robert L., 4,437J43, Q. 33-302.000.
AmieL Abraham J.: See—
AMP Incorporated: Siee—
Kanctai. Edward A., 4,437,722. Q. 339-97.00P.
^'3w!?W Ooi^""*' ^*"^ ^ ' "** *^"*^' '**'" *" *'*"'^^'
Ampex Corporation: See—
^''sJ&.OOo" *■' "^ Umholtz. Walter P.. 4,438.466, a.
Anahara. Mei^ and Omori. Hiroahi, to Kabushild Kaiaha Toyoda
iT^^f^ Seiaakuaho. Falae twiating air nozzle. 4,437,302, Q.
Anderaon. Harold R.; and Hamilton. Roland M., to United Statea of
AmaiM^ Force. Service platform for a ladder. 4,437,544, Q.
1B2-I2U.UUU.
^ar»48?0W *"** '<>'>«"•«»' Ronoy. Building structure. 4,437,285,
Anderaaon, Karl G. B., to Duni Mia AB. Pad with ahape adaotina
propertiea. 4,438,163, Q. 428-35.000. ^ ""Pong
Anding. Norbert: See—
^^S*S^"*'^.C''™*°P'*J Karlowsky, Ingo; Meyenieck,
Manftedj Schwarz. Hana D.; Anding. Norbert; and Leiaterer,
Remhard. 4.438.438. CL 343-45L00a^ «»«erer,
Ando. Naoyoahi: Sm^
la^ Voahiaki; Kome, Tantomu; Ando, Naoyoahi; and Fujinami.
Shoaaku, 4,437,416. a 110-245.000. ^^^
Ando, Tetaao: &»—
Tamura. Hiaaahi; Ito, Ichizc^ Hirayama, Maaaahi; and Ando. Tet-
suo. 4.437.350, CL 73-861.240. ""-«». «» '«». i«
Andre. Guv, to A. Raymond. EhMtic bstening clamp for round ban or
* •*"«• <iyviom diameter*. 4,437,633. Q. M-ilUOOR.
Aadiewa, Edward W.: See—
CoOina. Arthur K.; Andrewa. Edward W.; and Srinivaaan. Nallaa-
wamy. 4.438.495, CL 364414.000.
Antarea Enmneering, Inc.: Set
Galea, DooaldC, 4,437435. O. 73.37.90a
Antonov, Anatoly V.: 5^e—
S^o™;*ov, Anatoly N.; and Antonov, Anatoly V., 4,438,313, Q.
• l?P"/3. 1UU>
Anver S.A.: See—
Bichet, Lucien. 4,437,921, CL 156475.000.
Aoki, Ryuji: See—
^"ISt^J^f^^' ^^ *^y^ ■«* *^' Takahiaa. 4.438,217, CL
502-205.000.
Aoki, Tomohiro: See—
Kawakttbo, Kazuo; Furuichi, Katsuahi; Namdata, Kiyokazu:
Tanaka. Hidetoahi; Tohyama, Yaahikuni; Kaaamura, Toahiroi
Aota, Tomohiro; and Honma, Toehio, 4,437,756, a. 35M4.00R.
Aonuma, Maaaahi: See—
Umemura. Shizuo; MaUufiiji, Akihiro; Aonuma, Maaaahi;
Kitamoto, Tatauji; and Miyatouka. Hajime, 4,437,882, Q. 7^
Aoahima, Terutaka: See—
Narita, Ryuho; Yamamori, Keqji; Oota, Hiroyuki; and Aoahima.
Terutaka, 4,438.324, Q. 219441.000 AOHuma.
Aotau, Hiroaki: See—
4,438,385, CI. 322-28.000.
Aoyama. Maaahide: See—
^-477^000*^*°^ Maaahide; and Kubo. Dayiio. 4,438,353, a.
APM Corporation: See-
Morse, Milton, 4,438,30a Q. 179-184.000.
Appleby, Paid E.; and Brinkky, Max D., to Goodyear Tire * Rubber
tS^^-LT"*- "*«*«1 of curing removable tread belt 4,437,915, Q.
190-126.000.
Appor Limited: 5^e—
Banks. Stewart. 4,437,585, Q. 222-181.000.
Aquanum Pharmaceuticala, Inc.: See—
OoUatem, Joel; and Abrevaya, Albert, 4,437,429. a 1 19-1.000.
Araki. Maaannm: See
"^^ ]&?**= "**^ ^""^ ■«' ^'■'^ Maaafiimi. 4,437,304. a.
"^ffi XSJ**' ^'*'* Maaafumi; and Shimizu. Yozi. 4.437,305, CL
Araki, Maaatada; and Tanaka, Yukio, to Nippon OU and Fata. Co.. Ltd.
Cuttmg tool. 4,437,80a Q. 407-1 19.000. "«'■■». '-o- "O-
Arab, Shi^ru; Taki, Yaauo; Mori, Kazuhiro; Miaawa, Yoahihiko; and
Tanaka, Souhei, to Matauahita Electric Induatrial Co., Ltd Elec-
tronic parta mounting apparatua. 4,437,232, CL 29-740.000.
Aramaki, Minoru; Kita. Yaauahi; Nakano, Hiahagi; and Moioi, Shiio, to
Central Glaaa Company Limited. Method for preparation of graphite
Vl??^.''L"*°*^ reaction between carbon and Huorme aas.
4,438,086, a. 423448.000. ^^ "^
Arcair Company: S^e—
RieppeL Perry J.; and Moore, Paul E., 4,437,649, CI. 26M8.000.
Arcamone, Fedenco: See—
Suarato. Antonino; Penco, Sergio; Arcamone, Federico; and
Caaazza. Anna M., 4,438,105. CL424-180.00a ^^
Archer, Wealey L.; Lynn, VicU A.; and Dalleaaandro, Suaan M to
Dow ChOTical Company, The. Photoreaist atripper compoaition'and
method of use. 4.438, 192, Q. 43O-329.00O. i~»u™i «w
Arend, Raymond J.: See—
"^"°f i,^^JE' ^'*™*' **yn»«xl J-; MK» VerBerkmoea, John
A., 4,437,396, CI. 99-475.000. ^^
^^*;!?*^ "^Ef- <^r»toP'>J Karlowaky, Ingo; Meyerneck.
Manfred; &hwarz^kana D.; Anding. Norbert; and\dater4, ReiT-
?f^ 5°, '^n?** . *^PP 0«eU«5l««ft mit beachrankter Haftung.
Method for displaying a battle aituation. 4.438,438, Q. 343-451.000:
Anta, Yoji; and Seo. Yuzo, to Itsubiahi Keikinzoku Kc^o KabuahiU
^f^SJ ?l^|fc?** of ««t«>lling aluminum electrolytic cella. 4,437,95a
Cl. 204-67.000.
Arkma, Edward J., to KendaU Company, The. Device for applying
indicia to an elaatic web. 4,437,408, Cl. 101426.000.
^?"*™!J**J^*S!? '•' Owphode. George E.; and Wilaon, Robert P.,
deoeaaed (by Wilaon, Robert D., personal repreaentativeX to Wilson.
Robert D., personal representative of Robert F. Wilson, 'J-'-'^iif^
Golf Game simulating apparatus. 4,437,672, Q. 273-185.00B.
Armiger. Dennis L. Domestic electric generator and steam ti— *<«««
plant 4,438,340, Q. 290-2.000. ^^ ^^
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: See—
Herweh. John E., 4,438,251, CL 528-73.000.
Arpin, Michael D.: See—
'^.rfif^SS" ^' "** ^'^ *^*^ ^' M38,482, a.
J02- 103.000.
Asada, Hideki: See—
Matoui. Kanenobu; Uchiumi. Shinichiro; Takahashi. Mitsuo; Asada.
A •. ^f"^*!!? 5l!f^^^ ^•■••^ 4,438,041. a. 26(M64.000.
Asahi Seiko KabushiU Kaisha: Se«^
Abe, Hiroahi, 4,437,478, Q. 133-5.00R.
'^43?32ra JwS'Sb:^ ^"""^ cooling and heating .y«em.
^^^^ *5^ *•• •»«* Albertaon, Kurt D., to MobU Ofl Corpora-
^^n^^.^ Tl!?5 5fP"-'«ke wrface and method of forming
same. 4,438,175. Q. 428-31Si00. ^
Arigj^Ntajhiro, to Tokico Ltd. Shock tbtoibtt. 4.437,548, a
Ashland Food TechnohMy Hoklings S.A.: See—
Becker, Heinz. 4,437J06, Q. l^LOOF.
Ashland Oil, Inc.: Sieu.
Kovach, Stephen M.. 4,437,981, CL 208-253.00a
March 20. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
Ashley. William B.: See—
sSSio'oS. ^^ "** ^^^' ^"^ *• *'*'''^' ^
AstiwOouis. Assembly forming interfitting socket and plug for con-
nection to a ctrcmt m which the socket is mounted, withoutX
AS^.!in^*- ♦.♦3«.303, a. 200.51.1TO.
Astro Machine Corp.: See—
SeWc Martin. 4,437,657, Q. 271-100.000.
Asulab S.A.: See-
Atcor:See—
AtelSSttJSS SPig?S!^ "*""'• *•'"•'''• °- '^•«»-
^7s^So.ci&s^sr^ "^ "^ '^'"^ ^^•"^'
Athena Controls Inc.: See—
Metz, Bruce E., 4,437,853, Q. 493-302.000.
Atkinson, Paul J, to Zenith Radio Corporation. Spark gap for Une
transient protection. 4,438,365, Q. 313-325.000.
Atlanta Stove Works, Inc.: See—
*.. ^.y^». Charles F., 4,437,451, a. 126-77.000.
Atlantic Richfield Company: See—
** wSfoOO** ° ' ""** ^'**'*'' **y"°°** '•• ♦.♦3«.0«. Cl.
^*12432000*"*^' ** "^^^ projecting handbow. 4,437,449, Cl.
Attwala, Hashmukrai D.: See—
Brooker, Michael F. C; McKerihen. Steven J.; Attwala, Haahmuk-
A„Hi »5?iri ■«',C«"tiUo, Antonio L., 4,437,831, Cl. 431-177.000.
Audi NSU Auto Umon Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Wilmers, Gottlieb, 4,437,644, Cl. 251-11.000.
Auerbach, Abraham: See—
Eichelberger, Charlea W.; Wojnarowaki, Robert J.; and Auerbach.
Abraham, 4,438,291, Cl. 136.236.00R. '^uerDacn.
TS^S^Aki];^^ '°' •"'"~'*^« •^^'^'"^ °~"P"''
Ausschnitt Christoper P.. to Perkin-Elmer Corp.. The. Reusable elec-
S5S3°o5 """""^^ *^*""' ■"<* proceaa. 4,437,760. Cl.
Autech Corporation: See—
C'^jJ^W L.; and Robertaon, John A., 4,438,402, a.
Automobilea Citroen: See—
Dore, Jacquea, 4,437.331, Cl. 72-360.000.
Automobilea Peugeot: See—
Dore, Jacquea, 4,437,331, Q. 72-360.000.
Aviatec, Inc.: See—
Garoffolo, Frank, 4,437,573, Cl. 212-263.000.
Ayad, Hafez M., to Union Carbide Corporation. Chewing insect toxi-
cant compoaitiona. 4,438, UO,a. 424-21 7.000.
Aykanian, Ardaahua A.: See—
'"jJj^^Sigm J.; and Aykanian, Ardaahua A., 4,438,061, Q.
AzMriti, Vittorio. Bum treatment. 4,438,099, Cl. 424-93.000.
B. F. Goodrich Company, The: See—
"^^rS. 2i5^oSo^' ''°' "-' ''' "^ ^"^"^ '™ M •
Baba, Kemi: See-
Babitzka. Rudolf; and Linder, Ernat, to Robert Boach GmbH. Electri-
3lS328000° '»«=•"*»»<»' positioning device. 4,438,363. Q.
Baker International Corporation: See—
^l66l?20o5o" ^''' *"* ^"*'*' '^■'°^«» L' *.«7.517, Q.
Cockrell. Darryl W., 4,437,516, Cl. 166.120.000.
Baker. Marvin E. RoU-out flame detector for swimming pool heater
fuel ma control 4,437,829, a. 431-21.000. -""^ i~" ""wr
Baker OU Tools, Inc.: See—
^^"^^o^J^ ^•' ''•• "** Hopmann, Mark E., 4,437,522, Q.
10^382.000.
Baker, Rjchard W., to United Sutes of America, Interior. Extraction of
metal ions from aqueous solution. 4,437,994, a. 210-638.000
BakkCT, Arie, to Bamach, B. V. Process for the preparation of a food-
Kif\.S^SSf*^ **' • f*"^^ rolled in a wrap. 4,438,145, Q.
42^297.000.
Ball. Larry L.: See-
Haslmi. John R., deceased. 4,437,739, a. 353-27.0OR.
Balser, Klaus; Tuebner.Helwig; and Oppermann, Wilhehn. to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the production of hydroxyethyl
methyl ceUuloae. 4,438,264, a. 536-91.000. y»™»yeuiyi
Bdalev, Erik; Husen, Svenn S.; and Pedersen. Ernst L.. to A/S Or-
^ '^*T^,f ?SJ[*;„*'*""»^ preserved, stable mucineK»ntaining
solutions. 4,438, lOa Q. 424-104.000. ^^
Bamach, B. V.: See—
Bakker, Arie. 4.438.145. Q. 426-297.000.
Banke, Karl-Hanz; Hering. Elisabeth; LobeL Wilfried; Pollack. Dieter
2iS?Tf^^.**^i.°^' "'?/?^ *'*>'^' »^' »o Forachungsin-
sSd. M38:^.'s'S£S:oor^ * ""^^ •y-thetss.
PI 3
"^HS's^A^' "* ""?** 5i*^ °^ America, National Aeronautics
a S^'Joc"'^'^ Diamondlike flake composites. 4.437.962,
^18f.So"*' ^ ^^^ ^^^- D****"** 4,437.585. Q.
^8,^'a'°3T^i»'^"'°" '^"'^ «-"*>»* »«»«»
Barber-Colman Company: See—
Troat. Wayne C. 4,438, 1 73, Q. 428-22 1 .000.
Barbereau, Jean-Luc: See—
^^iSSblOK^' "** »•'*»««•'». J«M-Luc 4,437,808, a.
Barbier, Jean-Paul; and Lerouyer. Gilbert, to L'Air Liquide. Societe
^^SJ^ '^^^ « I'Exploitation dea Proc2to O^
«7!37 bro*" ° *****"* *''*""»»o» °f «»ht bulbs. 4.438.152. o!
^"mSoJ*" ^ ' *° °^' ^ ^^^ '*•" '**"*" 4.437.404, Cl.
Barclay, Andrew C: See-
Potter. William D; BarcUy. Andrew C; Dunning, Reginakl; and
n -. ^"P'' '^•'^ ■' • 4.438,212. a. 501-73.000^ -"W^o. «»
Banlina, Juan; and Gonzalez, Mikel, to Atcor. Decontamination apoa-
rajuforMmiconductor wafer handling equipment 4.437.4797a.
Bareuther. Ernst: See—
^^}^ "5^"*' I^J"' Wo"»^: Bareuther. Ernst; Kampf.
Fntf; and Bmgs, Hubert. 4.438^076^ a. 423-30.000.
Baraabe. WLouis, to Regie Nationale des Usinea Renault Metal
I1.S ^..•"•hcatalyttt activity. 4.437,926, O. 156-654.000.
"S.'J&i^i^S^/fo^"'"'*^ ^"^ ^'*~'^' •«*•
^*MS?:576:crl2o!-90.SS^« ^""' ^^ .elf<ontained straws.
Barry, Leon F.: See—
BartSlrfco^^aJsii:? ^' ^ "' *'*'«''^ « ^"•••^«»
^'Su^^'b'^^P*' ^o*f*»n«; Bartsch, Wolfgang; Sponer,
'i^.^u^^K^*^ '^••"^ Cl. 424.25(0: '^•
BASF Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Acter, Rolfpieter; Roasy, Phillip A.; Hamprecht Gerhard; and
Wuerzer, Bruno. 4,437.878, Q. 71-90.000.
Biandstetter. Franz; Hambrecht Juergen; Jung. Rudolf H.; and
Lindenschmidt Gerhard. 4.438.237. Cl. 525-183.000.
^™",' 9*'^ R««:hack, Manfred; Gries, Josef; Kretzschmar.
Rolf; Lehmann, Hans D.; Friedrich, Ludwig; Wuppennann.
Dirk; Zimmermann, Frank; Seitz. Werner; freiberi Hans J
Denael. Ferdinand; Frank. Wolfram; Kurbiuweit Hans<ieorEi
and MueUer. CUus D.. 4.438.I3I, Cl. 424-278.000. "~"^^'»'
''SS462!*Cl'^^2*0a)'' '°^'^' "" '•*^'''*' ^*«^-
^ff^'.Jif^'"' "** Seybold, Guenther. 4.438.282. Q.
300-98.000.
0«ier, Dieter; Ziegler. Walter; Daeuble. Manfred; Dietscbe. Wol-
.TSin"^*^'*' ^*'^ ■°** "^"^ Stefan. 4.438,008. Q, 252-
So.OOR.
'^<!f'4?3"38?oS)^°'°**' ^™^ "** ^''*"«*'' *°«"' 4.438.084,
BASF Wyandotte Corporation: See—
^gys. Bemardas, 4,438.235. Cl. 524-700.000.
528?7axP°^** L.; and Merkl. Bernard A.. 4.438,248. Q.
Bast Bernard J., to Bethlehem Steel Corporation. Method for produc-
Bastian Bleaaing Co., Inc.: See—
Battelle Memorial Institute: See—
Prost Jean-Louis, 4,437.470, a. 128-679.000.
Siddifli. Iqbal. 4.438,067, Cl. 422-56.000.
Battle, BUly J., to United States Pipe and Foundry Company. Flexible
gauge for uiside dimensions. 4.437,242. Q. 33-178.00B ^^
Bauer, Eckhart: See—
°sS'4:;r69tsi2i?i^.'^*^' "°"^ "" ^^' ^^-
Bauer. Wilfried; Cardinaux. Francois; Huguenin. Rene; Pless. Janoa;
?^«?JS°5S' Edmond. to Sandoz Ltd. Organic compounds.
4.438,103, a. 424-177.000. ^^ v-umpounos.
Baughman, Richard J.; and Ginley. David S.. to United States of Amer-
ua. Energy. Photoelectrochemical cell having photoanode with thin
^^j|*g5>h»d« coating aa a corroeion reaiatant Uyer. 4,438.183. Q.
Baumgartner, Hana, to Pierburg GmbH * Co.. KG. Pneumatically
oj»M«^Mrvo-motor and control method therefor. 4.437.386, CL
Baxter Travenol Laboratoriea, Inc.: See—
Wicnienaki. Michael F.. 4.438,357, Cl. 307-597.000.
Bayer AktiengeaeUachaft: See—
Domer, Florian, 4,437,582, Q. 222-94.000.
PI4
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
OrMler, Oeriiard; Oantter, Otto; and Recker, Klana, 4,438,25a Q.
S28-<6.000.
Hofanwood, Onham; Prohberger, Pwil-Enist; Brutdo, WUhdm:
and Panl. Volker. 4,43«,122, a 424-263.000.
Laatach, Remhard; Mariwld, Albrecbt; Behrenz, Woifniig: and
Hammaan. Innborg, 4,43»a75, CL S4M34.000. ^^
PetefMn. Uwe; Stad]er, Peter; Lockhoff, Orvald; Zdler. Hana-Joa-
chim; and Metuer. Karl O., 4.438,2«), CL S36-13.90a
Remelir, Ulrich; Hefbertz. Tom; and JongveidoftMn, Hermann-
Joief. 4,438.060. Q. 264-206.000.
Sctamttz-Joaten. Robert; Sulnig, Carlhant; Podazun. Wolfgang;
Boner, Bnmo; Borgardt. Manfred; and Walkowtak. Mkhad^
4.437.836. Q. 433-199.000. «»«."«.
BBC Brown, Boveri k Company. Limited: St*
Koni«. Gerhard; and Reea. Volker, 4,438,308, a. 200.148.00A.
Bean, Wilham C: See—
Tao, Thomas M.; and Bean, William C, 4,437,917, a. 156-296.000.
Beck, Alexander P.; and Winter, Joaeph. to Olin Corporation. Method
and mantus for bonding metal wire to a bate metal cubatrate
4,437;543;a. 2O4-I6.00O. ••««™w
Beck, Martin R: Sw—
Harry, leuan L.; Krishnakumar, Suppayan M.; JoUy. Walter R.;
^!^.^i^ "•= •«* ^°^^ Jo*" F E.. 4,437,825, CI.
425-145.000.
Beck, Robert L. R., to Boeing Company, The. Integral actuator and
lequendng valve. 4.437.387, a. 91-401.000.
Becker. Hal C. Apparatni for controlled stopper extraction from and
remsertioo in sparkling wine bottles. 4,437,36a CI. 81-3.440.
Becker, Heinz, to Ashland Pood Technology Holdings S.A. Multiple
reusable tubular casing, and aroaratus and process ^ using same in
M37S6!'c?T7-Lior'~ ^^°^^ P-rt«U or raw sausages.
Bwlrman lastniments. Inc.: See—
Glenn, Thomas J.; and Kaye, Wilbur I., 4,437,762, Q. 356-326.000.
Kaye, Wilbur I., 4,437,763, Q. 356-326.000.
Stephens, Donald E; and Sharpies, Thomas D., 4,438,070. Q.
422-70.000.
Bedin, Jean, to Etablisaements Larrieubedin "La Girondine". Auto-
matic machine for cuiping and labelling bottles or like containers
4,437 J89, a. 53-64.000.
Beecham Group Limited: See—
'M&3?S?2S^24^a^'*' ''^■' "^ "^"^ ^^^
P<»JwJ. Roger J-: •«» Howarth, Thomas T., 4,438,101. a.
Bern, Melvin D.; and Surprenant, Richard P., to General Electric
J^i Cr'2S?9.Ma^ "•'^^ '°' ""^ compo«tion.
Begin, John D.: See—
'"S*^4 ^^ ^' ^«"' ^°^ D.; and Khalaf, John, 4,437.240,
CL 33-172.0OE.
Behrenz, Wdfnng: See—
Lmtzach. Reinhard; Marhokl, Albrecht; Behrenz, Wolfgang; and
Hammann, Ingeborg, 4,438,275, Q. 549-434.000. ^^
BdL Allyn R.; Doweyko, Arthur M. P; and Minatelli, John A., to
i^X^ J^.\. t^i)!^°°y^ pyridine l-oxide derivatives.
4,438,271, a. 546-294.000.
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated: See—
Cais, Rudolf E,, 4,438,247, Q. 526-249.000.
QgdamWohn A., HI; and Miller, Stewart £.. 4,438,447. d
Favin. David L., 4.438.504. CL 364-724.000.
Rubin, Harvey, 4,438,298, a. 179-175.20R.
Sto^jaT.; Sinha. Ashok K.; and Vaidya. Sheila, 4,438.45a Q.
aeinberMr, Michael L., 4,438,53a Q. 455.278.00a
TsMig. Won-Tien. 4.438,446. Q. 357-17.000.
Bendiz Corporation, The: &e—
Leach, Earl A., Jr., 4,438,421. O. 336^.00a
Lewis, David L., 4,437,801, Q. 409-232.000.
Boucek, Jeanne A.; and Schrader, Rodney W.. to S. C. Johnson ft Son,
SSi^**'^*"* Uundry pre-qwtting oompoaitioa. 4,438,009, Q.
292-90.000.
Bennett, hTicbolaa L. Apparatus and method of reducing trees to fire-
wood 4,437.368. Q. 83-13.000.
Benoit, Louis J. Single-ply roofbg system. 4,437,283, Q. 52-4ia000.
Beres, Ernest A.: See—
Stovi^y, David; and Beres, Ernest A., 4,437,641, a. 249-79.000.
^$3^2?^. V25rsr "* ^»' ^ ^^^p'*^^ "^"^ •*•»
Beiiiard, Walter J., to Sprague Electric Company. Stabilization of
alummum electrolytic capacitor foil. 4,437,946, CL 2O4-35.00N.
B«tjOm!; and Diugoach, Gnnter. to Krampe * Co. Fertigung in
E^ljanbedarf GrabR Spraying nozzle arrangement 4,437J07, a.
Best Lock Corporation: S^e—
o Jf*?'**'-?'™" *•• ♦.♦37,695. a. 292-352,00a
Brfhiehem Steel Corporation: See—
Bast. Beniard J.. 4,438,056, a 264-45.200.
, Haas: See—
a.
Bey, Phibppe; and Jung, Michel, to Merrell Toraude et Com
a-Haloinethyl derivatives of a-amino acids. 4,438,2'
546-243.000.
Blue. Vyay S.; and Hoch. Robert, to Hakxn SD Group, inc.. The.
V?STJ^ 'Sf'JTlSi «*'>y'«>e onde from aqueous solntiooa.
4.437.938, Q. 203-14.000.
Bl2«0^y S.; and Hoch, Robert, to Haloon SD Group, Inc., The.
Process for scnarating ethylene oxide from aqueous solotioM.
4.437.939, Q. m-XAJoSn. ^^^ wiuim*
Bhojwani. Aiju H.: See—
Woebcke, Herman N.; Bhojwani. Aiju H.; and Oartaide. Robert J..
4.437.979.0.208-153.000. w-™«e, iMwen j..
Bianchi. David C; and Crowe, Tahnadge L., to Baker International
r9iy^^- ^^ mechanism for subterreanean wells. 4,437,517, CL
166-120.000.
Bianchi, Edward A., to AMP Incorporated. Coaxial cable tao
4,437,722, a. 339-97.00P. ^
Bianchi, Giuseppe, to Grove Valve and Regulator Company. Line
removable valve structure with pipeline support means. 4,437.486, CL.
Biax FiberfUffl Corporation: See—
Schwarz, Eckhard C. A., 4.438,167, Q. 428-138.000.
Bichet, Lucien. to Anver S.A. Press for gluing footwear elements.
4.437,921, CI. 156-475.000. «««»».
Biegert Aviation, Inc.: See—
Jefferies, James C, 4,437,630, Q. 244-136.000.
Bienek, Heinz; Finkbeiner, Rudolf; and Wick. Wilhehn, to Steag Ker-
nenergie GmbH. Container and closure meaiu for storase of radioac-
tive material. 4,437.578, Q. 220-256.000. ^^
Biwkarre, Hartwig; Klinger, Gottfried; Radeloff, Jurgen; and Rust.
Bemd-Hendrik, to Jungheinricb Untemehmensuerwaltung KG,
Ftrma. System for monitoring the course and for controUmg the
braking of a freely movable vehicle, particularly an inducSvely
"Sf«» vdhicle, and vehicle with such a system. 4,437,533, CL
1 8(V 168.000.
Biselow, David E.; and Timmerman, Terry, to Construction Forms,
^- j^^** ^*'^* 'o' «>ncrete pumping apparatus. 4,437,646, Q.
Bijttebier, Gaspar A. H.; and Vangheluwe, Jozef, to Byttrtier, Gaspar
A. H. Process and apparatus for separating flexible sheeU from a
stack. 4,437,655, CL 2TN3.100. ^^
Billingsley, Henry C, to Outboard Marine Corporation. Dual fbel
supply system. 4,437,448, CI. 123-577.000.
Bings, Hubert: See—
Pietsch, Hartmut; Turke. Wolfgang; Bateuther, Ernst; Kampf,
Fritz; and Bings, Hubert, 4.43C076, Q. 423-30.000.
Bmks Manufacturing Company: See—
Garcowski, Theodore. 4.437,614. Q. 239-691.000.
Birle, Theo. Device for self-acting limiution of speed of ascendinc
divers. 4.437,843, CI. 441-96.000 -«;c««ng
Birmingham Bolt Company: See^
Wfite. Claude C, 4,437,795, Q. 405-259.000.
Bischoff, Bernard K.; Patrick, William J.; and Strudwick, Thomas H..
to International Business Machines Corporation. Method for tailoring
oxygen precipiute particle density and distribution silicon wafers.
4,437,922, Q. 156-603.000.
Bittot, Thomas C; Grot, Walter G.; and Resnick. Paul R., to Du Pont
de Nemours, E. I., and Conmany. Membrane, electrochemical celL
and electrolysis procew. 4.437.951. Q. 204-98.000.
BiUer. Joel R.; Bodnar, Michael W.; Booth. Raymond H.; Roman,
Daniel J.; Schneider, Fred J.; Seitzer, Philip W.; and Wilkinson.
George P.. Jr., to Western Electric Company. Inc. Methods of mark-
ing and electricaUy identifying an article. 4,437.229, CI. 29-593.000.
Bjerklie, John W.: See—
Blachot. Denis, to Thomson-CSF. Tone control circuit. 4.438.414. CL
333-28.O0T.
Blackburn. George L. Amino acid preparation and therapy for treat-
ment of stress and iqjury. 4.438,144, CL 424-3 19.00a
Blocher, Hans-Joachim: See—
Koehler, WoUnng; Blocher, Hans-Joachim; and Weiss, Eberhard.
4,437,528, €1180-9.500.
Blot, Ro^, to L'Air Liqtude, Societe Anonyme pour I'Etude et I'Ex-
ploitatton des Procedes Georges Claude. Process for weldina metal
articles. 4,438,319, Q. 219-1310PS. ^^
Bluethgen, Bjoem, to Polygram GmbR Method for encoding analog
signals using PCM difference code word for forming a code word Of
specified l^th. 4,438,522, Q. 375-27.000.
Bobb, Lloyd C; Rankin, Michael; and Ferguson, Gerald D., to United
States of America, Navy. Interferometncally tuned laser resonator.
4,438,517, a. 372-99.000. -™i«or
Boberg. Michael; Habich, Dieter; Metzger, Kari G.; and Naab, PauL to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. ^Lactam antibiotics. 4,438,114, CL
424-248.510.
Bochumer Eisenhutte GmbH k Co. KG: See—
Koppers, Manfred; Boimes, Karlheinz; and Kunzer, Heinz.
4,437,562. Q. 198-733.000. ^^
Boden, Richard M., to Interaatiopal Flavors k Fragraaoea Inc. Prias
reaction products of diisobutykoe, derivatives thereof, organoleptic
^.s^^ ■"** ?«»«•«• for preparing same. 4,437;476, Q.
131-276.000.
Bodnar, Michael W.: See—
Bitler, Jod R.; Bodnar, Michael W.; Booth, Raymond H.; Roman,
Daaid J.; Schaeider, Fred J.; Seitzer, Philip W.; aad Wilkiaaoa.
George F., Jr., 4,437,229, Q. 29-593.000.
March 20. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
Bodor, Jaaos
^^SoSooT^^"* ^' **■' *^ ***"• "'"*^ M38,149. a.
Boehler Aktiengeaellschaft: See—
Ahrens. Max; aad Hakng, Manfred. 4.437,509, a. 164454.000.
I KG: See—
PIS
Boehriager luelheim
Koppe. Herbnt; Kuairaer, Werner; Stable, Helmut; Muacevic,
S,.lft'f*T"r*'^l,'^f°«''*'*"-»*3.a42*:3O4.0^^
^r "^^ l^P^ Herbert; Kummer, Werner; Stockhaus,
Boehriager Mannheim GmbH: Sss^
'a 43«V00O°""' "'**^ "^ Ziegenhom. Joachim. 4.438,204.
^^ H.; Kamne, Wolfganft Bartsch, Wolfgang; Sponer,
Otabert; and Roesch. Egon, JaS%. 1 16, Q. 424-25a00ft
WMdemann. Fntz; Kampe, Wolfgang; Dietmann, Karl; and
^ . Sooner. Gisbert 4.438.128! a. 42Z!275^^001SL^
Boemg Company. The: See-
Beck. Robert L. R.. 4,437,387, Q. 91-401.000.
Moorelwad, James R., 4,437,627. Q. 244-54.00a
Rome, Martm W., 4,437,629, Q. 244-122.00R.
Boever, Jean: See—
^Jgjj Leon; Legille, Edouard; and Boever, Jean. 4,437,796, Q.
Bohnes, Karlheinz: See—
'^5«?ai«t73^oor ^"^ "^ '''^' ««*«•
Bolfflgren, Jan; and Nilsson, Kenth, to Siemens Aktiengeaellschaft.
Monic recorder with improved transducer. 4,438,441, Q. 346-
BobEe, Georgw, to Compagnie Generate des Matieres Nucleaires
(CMenu). Method for the physical separation of a metallic phase and
scoriae in an induction fUmace. 4,437';885. Q. 7MaOOR
Bomer, Bruno: See—
Schmitz-Joeten, Robert; Suling, Carlhans; Podszun, Wolfgani-
Bompard, Bruno; and Bruyere, Alain, to Commissariat a rEneraie
Atomiqr. and Societe J. Brochier * Fils. Process for inserting poiatt
ia a maadrel. 4,437,221, Q. 29-429.000. *^
Bon, Lui|d D. Self-sealing actuating device for mounting on a discharte
n^' "'iRf???^, ooatainer. 4,437,592, Q. 222.«>2. 120.
BoprmM, Philip M.; Chivers, Tristram; Tavarea. Donald P.; and Maha-
dev. Kalabeerappa N., to Alberta OU Sands Technology and Re-
J33?218ra1&-g8SSf '" ""*" '^'^ "^ "ySJocarttons.
Boosalis, Frieda: S(»-
Ferrin. Wayne, 4,437.580, Q. 221-75.000.
Booth, Raymond R: See—
Bito, Jod It; Bodaar, Michael W.; Booth, Raymond H.; Romaa,
DanW J^ Schneider, Fred J.; Sdtzer, Philip W.; and WiKoi
Oeorae P., Jr., 4,437,229, Q. 29-593.000. ^^
Bordat, Andre, to Constructions Mecaniques de Normandie. Bevel tear
poww tryasmitting cear trains. 4.437.555, Q. 74-385.000.
Boreal Hydraulic Equipment: Ses^
Laraa^ Andre, 4,437,50a CI. 144.34.00R.
Borordt, Maafked: See—
Schmitz-Jojten, Robert; Suliao. Carihaas; Podszun, Wolfgang;
?2?f5'iP^?*5,?71^ **''^*«*^ "^ Walkowiak. Miclkad,
4,437,836, Q. 433-199.000.
BcwBMyi, Alexander S., to American Hospital Supply Corporation.
Seaupermeable membrane mass- traasfer apparatus haviaa stotted
support members. 4,437,990, Q. 210-321.300^ *
Borzym. John J. Tube cutting apparttus. 4,437,374, Q. 83-454.000.
Boae, Saiuay K., to General Electric Company. Methods, and apnara-
tus. for tranmittiiu hi|h-bit-rate digital dau in power line oommuni-
?5??*/J5f™* Mving Ugh harmonic noise content. 4,438,519, Q.
375-1,000.
Botteghi. Carlo; Gladiali. Serafino G.; Marchetti. Mauro; and Faedda.
Otovuni A., to Consiglio Nazionale Delle Rioerche. Steroidal^iirai
phosnhinea, methods f&r their preparatioa, catalytic syttems coataia-
cf. MoSsSfMC**^ processes la which they are used. 4.438.033.
Bowles Fluidics Corporatioa: See~
StoufTer. Ronald D., 4.437.392. Q. 98-2.080.
BwacWefT, Omrge I.; aad CampbeU. Aadrew B., to Varco Intema-
timaL Inc. Posittoning of weU pipe jack in a rig. 4,437,515, a.
10^77.000.
^7'^'u9^P^ *•• "*• '****^ ^°^ ^ *•• to Varoo Inteniatioaal,
fee. WeU drill&g apparatus. 4,437,524, Q. 173-43.000.
^SStB^i^^t^S'^S^.^^'"**^'^ Corporation. Spool dis-
penser. 4,437,618, a. 242-71.800.
Boyt, Arthur J., Jr.: See—
'^ISoOO^ L.: aad Boyt. Arthur J., Jr., 4,437.987. Q.
BP Chimie: Ss»-
°m£J69.0oS" C.; aad Maagia. Pierre M.. 4.438/)I9, Q.
Bndahaw, J(^: See—
ColUutOB, Eric W.; Halktt. PMcr; Wallk, Chrteoeher J aad
^ BoSAmw, Joha. 4.438.112, CL 424-244!oob.^^'^ '
ihaaH) *«?mM Jay: See—
n-u^ 'SSLi'."^.*"^.'!?^ '• *'«8J27. a 524.33.00a
Bnkhue. WiOkiB L, Jr^ aad Taylor. WilUoa M., to Canerai boa
Worb, lac. Ram-type blowout preveatar. 4,437,643, CL 2SI-I.00A.
Bimd«b«» Joha T.; aad Croae. John M.. Jr . to TexK» lac. Aluaiaa
H^^ZS^*^^ temp«tures. 4.438.219, Q. 5(n-333.O0a
rSfSf^ Manfred; and Muller, Leo. to SKF Kufdlagerftbrikea
dStiiSrs'iSsfC '"**-' -i«wiy^-5rr
firandenstein, Manfred: See^
^^iTH ^^ Brwdenstein, Manfred; Walter. Lothar; Horl-
a 29^ Sdp"™ Hermann; and Kunkd. Heiarich. 4,437J14,
Brandes. Wilhdm: Sae-
Hohn««>od. Graham; Prohberger, Paul-Ernst; Brandea, Wilhdm;
aad PauL Volker. 4.438,122. a. 424-263.000. ^^ ^^
'ArZ^H'J^lTV^ Aktieagesdhchaft DifTerentid digitd modu-
Ution aad demodulatwn system with an aadog sisaaMetMBdeat
samphng dock. 4.438,523. Q. 375-3aOOO. ^^ "v^-^
BrsndstettCT, Pntoi Hambrecbt. Juergen; Jung. Rudolf H.; and Lin-
denschmidt, Gerhard, to BASF AkSengeaeBschaft Tbennopla^
g5«jy ™«^ o'«y««>e-«aykmitrile and polyamide. 4,438!237"a.
Bradow. Wdlier, aad Otto, Gcriiard. to C. Bdueas AG. Tool changer
for •revolving cutting press. 4,437,224, a. 29-568.000. ^^
Breea, Tbomas B., to Generd Electric Coopaay. Selectable iategratiac
chsrtctenstic tim« for protective rdays. 4,438,476, a. 361-9i.o5a
Brescia, Toay; aad Deacoa, Rosa, to Syrooo, lac. Foldiag table for wall
mounting. 4,437.414, Q. 108-134.000. ^^ »«c w w«i
Bnnkky. Max D.: See—
»^*!^^!^ ^^"^ Brinkky. Max D.. 4.437,915. Q. 156-126.000.
% wS), CI SS^ Jrfjwepwujg an insecticide containing boric add.
British Gas Ccvporation: See—
p^.^S^^lS"'^*^ • "^ ^"^ ^"*^ 4,437,494, Q. 138-97.000.
British Petroleum Compaay Liaiited. The- See—
Kelsey, Jeffrey R. 4.437.892. Q. 106.15.05a
Bnz«ys. Beraardas, to BASF Wyaadotte Corporation. Tertiary alka-
a^ttooW"*^ ""^"^^ °' ""«* "«"^ polymers. 4.438^35.
BrocUehurst. Charles E.; aad Cooper, Bruce H.. to Opdika Manuftc-
?53??3SfSlK8.(m" -derid cutting method and apparatus
®"?^i;if^^'' ^^'■^ D*"™* "•: McKeen. Jeffrey A.; aad Przybyl-
ski. William A., to Midii|an Consolidded Gas OMaiMa^ ttJurff
actuatug device. 4.437l47rci. 73.272.00R
Brooker. Michael F. C; McKerihen, Steven J.; Attwda, Haduaukrd
?itS'h2"S!!S7.8if!:T43'i:i;?.or ^^^^^^ ^«-
^MS,60ira.M6.!99.So'''^ '^'"' '^"^'* "*" »^
Brown, David E. Vdve piston. 4,437,491. Q. 137.54a000.
Brown, Fred A., to Rotron. Incorporated. Self-starting, direct current
M3t36ra. fSSffio.'"'^ "^ ""^ "*-^ «~^
Brown, James R.; aad Siroas, Kariis A. Coavetdoa of modwa shotiuas
mto muzddoadiai shotguas. 4,437,249. Q. 4^5 1 .OOa
Brown, PauL to Husky ideetioa MokUag Systems Ltd. Air eiection of
molded containers. 4.438^5. 0/264^35 OOa «^»«5«» oi
Brown. Robert E.: See—
Stevoj^ Perry; and Brown. Robert E., 4,437,595, Q. 222-642.00a
t^yiStS. 3^3(2.000^ I-corporated. Oyro^x^ic instrument
*™»o, Roberto; and Memmi. Massimo, to Zincroksid S.p.A. Process of
SSSoM *"'*'* ^^ "*'*' ****** '" •uiomobik bodies. 4.437,944. a.
Bruyere, Alain: See—
Bompard, Bruno; and Bruyere, Alain, 4,437,221. d 29-429.000.
Buchanan, Michad S.: See—
''ncdpssi, Rolaad N.; Greeahouse, Wdter V. V.; aad Buchaaaa,
Michad S., 4,438,22a Q. 521-55.000. -«»Mn.
^1??'?^ J*****^ N.; Greeahouse, Wdter V. V.; aad Buchaaaa.
^ Michad S.. 4.438.221, a 521-55.000. «»"«»iian.
Budde, David UCtnoa. David O.; Cornish, Aathoav L.; Hoder, BtmI
W.; Johasoe. David B.; and Petama. Craig B.. to latd Corporttiaa.
O^SSo 000^*''***"*^ to • multiprooassiag system. 4,438.494,
Budzich. Tadeusz. to Caterpillar Tractor Compaay. Priority flow
control system. 4,437,307, (Sl(M27.O0O. ^^"'^^ """'' "***
Budzich, Tadeusz, to Caterpillar Tractor Compaay. Dud iaput vim-
sure oompeasated fluid control vdve. 4,437.388. a. 91-446.00a
"SSSwoS*" ^ Engraving apparatus aad method. 4.438,46a d
B\iu.PnBckiv.:See—
Youag, Alfred G.; Skwoaib. Leoe P., Jr.; aad Bugg, Praaofa V..
4;438,43a CL 340-547.000. ^* ^^ '
BuhL Stevea N.: See—
Ender, PhUip V.; aad BuhL Stevea N.. 4,438J02. O. 4364JIX0.
"^}l!l to^;*««»>« Eq"i|»«t ComwadoB. R«iactioB of cotofT
teagth for fblding mechankms. 4.437,85ra. 493.424.00a
Bullock. Joseph J., ni. to Three Sistws Raaeb EalerprMS. OvHom fbr
^sploe caaistar. 4.437,593. a 22^54l.00a v^^-^v wr
Buari ladustry Ca. Ltd.: See—
Tadiiro. Miaon!. ♦.♦37.991. a 2ia413.00a
Wdter L., 4,437.931, a
L.;
Burav, Wdter L.:
EUas. Moeae
IS6466.00a
Burgmyer. Patricia L., to HaieMae Corporaliao.
4.438.437, a 343.77a00a
Dud
PI 6
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
Am. Hermami; and Ktfth. Bat. to Nyffeler, Corti AG. ApiMntas for
•mBm ooBtmim. 4,437.292, a. 53.357.00a PP««"»or
Burke CoauMny, The: See—
Hoh, Neil L., 4,437,642, Q. 249-175.000.
Borkett, John P.: See—
^tS^ SISvSSr «•"«- "-^ -' B»^ '<*. p..
Blimey, Ivta T.: See—
CrodortM. Ronald W.; and Bumey, Ivan T., 4,438,306. a. 200-
14e.0Ur.
Burr-Brown Reaearch Corporation: See—
Smith. Robert E., 4,438,327, CL 235-462.000.
Stit^ Robert M.; and Albwigh. Neil P.. 4.438.338. Q. 250-551.000.
Borrooght Corporation: &»—
Votta. Lubomir J.. 4.437,724. CL 339.143.00R.
Borroughs Wellcome Co.: See—
Stem. Warren C. 4.438.138. Q. 424-330.000.
Vmegar, Ralph. 4.438,142, CL 424-260.000.
Bumit, Billie S.: See—
». **!T^ hf^ *^' "^ 8"'™' ^^^ S., 4,437,830. Q. 431-54.000.
Burt Allan O.: See—
^**'?°."^ Craig M.; Cox, Nioel; Burt Allan O.; and Snyder,
Daniel R., 4,437,859, a. 6O4.iyr000. ^
Butch, Theodore N., to Caswell International Corporation. Duelins
mteractive target tyitem. 4,437,671, a. 273-372.000.
Buachbom, Floyd E.; and Hansen, Olen D., to Veda, Inc. Sunwrt
•tand. 4,437.637. Q. 248-163.00A. ^^^
Buachgens, Valentin: See—
n!?fn'oaD*^^ *** Buachgena, Valentin, 4,437,328, Q.
Bush. Rodney D., to Procter * Gamble Company, The. 4.Vinyl-2-
methylenebutanedioic acid compound*. 4.438,246, Q. 526-298.000.
Butler, Dean S.. deceased: See—
Headley, James E. R.; Limburg. William R.; Nordmeyer. Robert
A.; and Smith. Jay, UI, 4,437.738, a. 353.26.0OR.
Butler, Donald R., to Stained Glass Overlay, Inc. Simulated stained and
leaded glass windows. 4,438.165, Q. 428-38.000.
Birtler, John L.; Egan. Thomas R.; Rodberg, Kenneth; and Clark.
Arthur E., to Raytheon Company. Transducer with tensioned-wire
precompression. 4,438,509, CL 367-156.000.
^J^ M°^ ^■' ^ '^C Corporation. Process for oxidizing thallium
(D to thaUium ail)- 4.438,089, Q. 423-624.000. ^^
Bykov, Anatoly P.: See—
^^'^ *-**°^ ^' *y«dchikov, Vladimir E.; Bykov, Anatoly
Ji 4,"JS!59^!^2Zi3^^' '^^^ '■' •«• °'"»^' '^'y
C. Behrens AG: See—
^ » "iS^V ^"l*^ "** ^^^ Gerhard, 4.437.224. Q. 29-568.000.
C.R. Bard. Inc.: See—
Crow. James J.. 4.437.464. Q. 128-303. 140.
Cachat John P.. to Pait Ohio Industries, Inc. Method and apparatus for
inducovely heating valve teat inserts. 4.438.310. Q. 219-10430.
Cam Encoder Company: See—
r> ^•^. Thomas D.. 4.438.4H Q. 340-825.510.
Cais. Rudolf E., to Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated. Prepa-
533?44t 3*?2S«'0(S"^^"°^^'"" ""* "^"^ ""^^
CaUfomia Institute of Technology: See—
r-i«^f!*S^^^'°** X?^ ^""^ ^ ^' M38.239. Q. 525-54.100.
4l43%47!a*46i74000 °"*" ^^°°P"y' ^ ^'^^^ coupling.
Camatm Iron Works, Inc.: See—
*'?Jl'^y""^ ^ • '' : "«* '''■y'o'' W"""" M., 4.437.643, Q.
231-l.UOA.
Campbell. Andrew B.: See—
^^^LP^''^ ^' "^ Campbell. Andrew B.. 4,437,515, a.
16^77.000.
CMPpbell, Curtis B., to Chevron Research Company. Lubricating oil
S??F?^)^ containing polyether polyamine ethanes. 4,438,022, Q.
Canada, Her Msjesty the Queen in right of, ss represented by the
Mmister of National Defence: See—
Fenrick. Walter J.. 4.437,337, CL 73-54.000.
Canada. James W.; and Uyton, James W., to United States Pipe and
fS'SS?' Comply. Contoured dunnage cutter. 4,437,501, 07144-
I36.00R.
Canalizo, Carlos R., to Otis Engineering Corporation. Dewaterins
•ppwstus. 4,437.514, Q. 166-53.?0a ^ v.^»i~nu«n. i/ewaiermg
Canon Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Hirano, Hirofumi, 4,437,776, CL 400-142.000.
^^f??!^ Ti^'**^ Yoneda, Ko; Shinmi, Akira; Goto, Hirokazu: and
Abd«).Shuzo, 4,438,470, a. 360-113.000
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha: Sce^
AluHhi, Akira; Katsuma. Makoto; Kawamura, Masaharu: Kamata.
augeru; and Satto, Syuichiro. 4,437.752, Q. 354-289.000.
ncemoa Keui. 4,437.746, Q. 354-479.000.
Kjiwakubo, Kaaio: Furuichi, Katsushi; Namekata. Kiyokazu;
Tanaka. HKfetoshi; Tohyama, Yashikuni; Kasamura, Toshiroi^
Aob, Tomoluro; and Honma. Toshio. 4,437.756. Q. 355-14.00R.
Komon, Shigehiro; Sakamaki. Hisaahi; Hattori. Hiroyuki; lida.
l^m^cifiSi5&. ^^ "^ """^"^ ''•"^
Momiyama. Kikno. 4,437,735, Q. 35<M58.000.
Onoda, Shigeyoahi; and NasK)ka. Tatdd, 4.437.656^ CL 271-lOiOOa
Sakai. Shiqji; Shiooda, Nobuhiko; Kinoshita, Takao: and Hoaoe.
Kazuya, 4,437,743, Q. 354-W2.000. ^^
Sakurayama, Junichi; and Magome, Tamotsu. 4.437,753, CL
355-10.000.
Sato, Yasuhisa. 4,437,741, Q. 354-479.000.
Sawada, Takeshi; Yoneda, Ko; Shinmi, Akira; Goto, Hirokazu; and
Abiko, Shuzo, 4,438,470, Q. 360- 1 1 3.000.
Suzuki. Akiyoshi, 4,437,758, Q. 355-41.000.
Suzuki. Takashi; and Ito, Susumu, 4,437,740, CL 354476.00a
Toyama, Masamichi, 4,437,552, Q. 192-26.000.
Toyomura. Shigeru, 4,438,431, Q. 340-663.000.
Cantwell. Hugh F., to Rolls-Royce Limited. Fuel control system for a
gas turfome engine. 4.437,303, Q. 60-39.281.
Cuakh. Nicholas R., to Smiths Industries Public Limited Company
n^S^SLS^^ '^^ «y«»«>pe apparatus. 4,437.354. Q. 74-11460;
Capitol Products Corporation: See—
Cribben. J«n« T.; and Ichter, William J.. 4.437.284. Q. 52-456.000.
Carborundum Abrasive Company: See—
'*^lS98So" ^" ■*****'*y*^ *^ *•• 4.437.865. Q.
Cardell. Max L., to Fiber Industries, Inc. Winding apparatus for lUa-
mentary material having means for winding a trailing end of the
filMiHito^material in close order upon a packager4.437,617, a.
Carrtinaui, Francois: See—
Bauer, Wilfried; Cardinauz, Francois; Huguenin, Rene: Pless.
^ .. /■™*5,"«* Sandrin. Edmond, 4,438,103, CL 424-177.000.
C«*«e. Rjchard S. Hydroponic apparatus and method. 4,437,264, CL
^J^OOo"* "' *^** f"™"* method and qiparatus. 4,437,326, CL
Caron. Chrittopher D.; and Schaefer, DonaM W., to International
Busmess Machmes Corporation. Rotary drum for processins sheet
materials. 4,437,659, a.771.276.000. " proceismg sneet
Carr, WiUiam F.: See—
Doling. Joseph C; Carr, WiUiam F.; Heck. RonaU M.; and Chen.
James M., 4,438,082, a. 423-235.000. ."w-nen,
Carrier Corporation: See—
^ ^f^?I' ^^J"^ E., 4,437,322, Q. 62-504.000.
CvroU, WiUiam G.; Farley, Peter, and Marklow. Raymond J., to
4^58^2.0^75500^ '''^•**- P*>'yn.er-«odified polyols.
Cation. David G.: See—
^^^ 5f ^ h' ^^"^ ^^ 0-; Cornish. Anthony L.; Hosier.
2J*^^;vJ?-S5?°°' ^^ ^' "«* Pet«»on. Craig B., 4,438,4H
d. 364-200.000.
Cary, Hall; and Marquard, John F., to Cary, HalL a part interest
75.510
Catenary controller. 4,437,619, O. 24^75.;
Casademont Ernest: See—
^l^,^Ktot; Espenan, Patrick; Cassdemont Ernest; and U-
faiUe, J. Pierre, 4,437,967, O. 204-301.000.
^S^,^*^' ^;',*^/J*2!!li5"-^''^ Company. Gas How controUer.
4,437,489, O. 137-487.500.
Casazza, Anna M.: See—
Suarato, Antonino; Penco, Sergio; Arcamone, Federico; and
Casazza. Anna M.. 4.438.105, 0424- 180.000.
Casey, Donald J.; and Huffoun. Kenneth R., to American Cyanaoud
Company. Poly(glycolic acid)/poly(alkylene glycol) block copoly-
mers and method of manufacturing the same. 4,438,253, O.
CasiUo, James H.: See—
^^^^^^ ^•' ''' •"* ^^••^' •'•»«• H-. M38,29a a
1 3^22 1 .000.
Casio Computer Co., Ltd.: See—
Ishida. Hideaki; Ishikawa. Tomohisa; Yamana, Koji: and Kayahara.
Takehiko, 4.437.378. O. 84-1.180. ^^^
Mitarai. Tsuyoshi; and Sato. Kunio. 4.437.377. O. 84-1.01O
Casper. Paul W.; and Ashley. William B.. to Harris Corporation. Tem-
pm^ compcauated avalanche photodiode optical receiver ciicoit
4,438.348. O. 307-310.000.
Casperson. John R.. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Carbon black
process. 4.438,087. O. 423-450.000. ^^
Castellanos Manero. Carlos E. to Aida Castellanos Kwasniak. Rapid
loading device for a revolver. 4.437,252, O. 4^89.000.
Casti^ioni. Joseph; and Rosenthal, Paul. Heat recovery apparatus.
4,437,513, O. 16M54.000. ^"^
Caswell International Corporation: See—
Busch, Theodore N., 4,437,671, O. 273-372.000.
Caterpillar Tractor Company: See—
Budzich, Tadeusz, 4,437,307, O. 60427.000.
Budzich. Tadeusz. 4.437.388. O. 91-446.000
Catherwood. Bayard D.: See—
^^i^.ifSS^ '•' ■** Catherwood, Bayard D., 4,438,208, a
436-542.000.
CautiUo, Antonio L.: See—
Brooker, Michael F. C; McKerihen, Steven J.; Attwala, Haahmuk-
rai D.; and Cautillo, Antonio L., 4,437,831. 0. 431-177.000.
Cawley. James C; DiMartino. Michael D.; Fisher, Thomas J.; King,
Roger L.; and Uhkr, Marcus H., to United States of America, Inte-
"<7, fow" wpply for an intrinsically safe circuit 4,438,473, O.
361-18.000.
Cawley, John M., to TII Industries, Inc. Combination power and
communication line protection apparatus. 4,438,477, CL 361-1 19.000.
CaTTamga, Loigi, to Carraniga S.p.A. Method and ^maratus for indi-
rect measuremeat of thermal energy. 4,437,771, CL 374-39.000.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
Cazzaniga S.p.A.: See—
^^^^Cg.^^.437,771, O. 374-39.000.
NanU, Dante; Taiana, Alberto; Motta, Gianni; CazzulanL Pletro
and Grwiani. dUbriele. 4.438.133. O. 424-300.000^ '
Celanese Corporation: See- -^^"".ww.
n iJ*^' "*^ "r- *'*3«.'W. CI. 429-250.000.
Celotex Corporation, The: See—
S^if'L'^J^ ^•' ♦'*38.018. O. 252-356.000.
CEM cSlio«.^:°^ ^' "^ "■' *'*"''«^ CI. 428-113.000.
"^l^i^JStaifSSl^Sr" ^- ''■• "" °^'^"' ^'^^
Central Glass Company Limited: See—
Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique: See—
r*?ii •,Xlf"''= f*P!?"' ^•^^^ Casademont Ernest; and U-
ftille, J. Pierre, 4,437,967, 0.204-301.000. '' «» "
^jSS5.^^'S**.**'?F^y' '^■^ ^ • *° 0«»Wental Oil Shale, Inc.
ReductiOT of s^oU pour pout 4.437.519, CI 166-259000.
Chambaz. Beiwd; DeUpierre, GiUes; and Destannes. Louis, to Com-
CI*36N27*8 0W *** ^'<»»«»«»« Capacitive hygrometer. 4.438.480,
Chamberlin. John R.: See—
^^5oOob'°'" **' *"** Chamberlin. John R., 4,437.481, O.
Champion International Corporation: See-
Boyle, Daniel J., 4,437,618. CI. 242-71.800.
Sorenson. John F.. 4.437.569, CL 206-601.000.
Sorenson, John F., 4,437,570 O. 206-601.000.
Chase, Richard A.: See—
Simpson, Danny E.; WiUiams, David M.; Chase, Richard A.; and
Gnibb. Uwrenoe B.. 4,437,668, CI. 273- 1 56.000.
Chatas, Angelos T.: See—
^1i£2b2O0O*^ "** Sunder-Plassmann. Paul, 4,438,244, CL
Ctonokomplex Vegyipari Gepes Berendezet Export-Import Vallalat:
Palotai, Joztef. 4.437,824. CI. 425-131.100.
Chen. Jamet M.i See—
"& W3&%^2"SS5^"*'^ Ronald M: and Oien.
Chenauiky, Peter P.; Newman, Leon A.; and Drinkwater, ErroU H.. to
MT5i4^a*^t-irooo!^'^"*'°" '"-^ ^'"*»^ '^■
Choiaux, Bernard, to Oipelec. Sealed passage for a negative terminal
S5?8t84r(r!S9-TSbS' *»«^ -" «^ -id Sled passage.
Chen^ David H. S.: See—
Liu, Hennr; Oibwn. DonaU L.; Cheng, David H. S.; and Rathke,
Jtmes E., 4,437,799, O. 406.198JOODr ^^
Cherbjftky, Saul C. to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
ClJ;St^1SlSSJffcy:^'Py'*»^^ a. 424251.ffio^
Cherry Electrical Products Corporation: See—
Kennedy, Maniice E., 4,438,304, CL 20^67.00D.
iS!!£[i AT^" W.;McV«gh, Harry A.; and Stover, William A., to
MobU OU Corporation. Cnclan| catalvst compositions for reduction
of sulftir content ui coke. 4,437;978, O. 208-lfcOOO
Cbevanne, Sylvain V. L.: See—
^2-3S?!S ^ ^''' "^ C'*^"™' Sy'^**" V- L- 4,437J81, O.
Chevron Resinrch Company: Set—
CampbelL Curtis B., 4,438,022, O. 252-51.50R.
Cluanjt David; Chu, Moai; and Manber, Solomon, to MSS Associates.
ru^^ °L^^ • 'W^ "»*or. 4,438,379, O. 318-685.000.
af5S-28yoOO" aterchangeable jaw members. 4,437.654,
Chibiita, Ichi^; Sumi. Akihiko; Ohtsuki, Osamu; and Izutsu, Nozomu,
to Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd Di-L^ysteine L^^malate and pioMHfor
tte production thereof. 4,438,044, d 260.50l!«O '^^
ChiUiess. Soott J.: See—
^fgg^Michael W.; and Chiklrass. Soott J., 4,438,031, O. 260-
CHmoiN Oyomser es Veyyeszeti Tennekek Gyara Rt: Si»-
Gatambos. &za; Stoof^ Vihnoa; Szeki^y. Istvan; Ivamcs,
Joiaef: Kdrni, Krisztina; Kovacs, Gabor; StkUer, l^u^Kor-
chiveiTStiSfSi!:? ""^ '^'' ^'^^''"^ a: i£:»5.S.
Bommaa. Philip M.; Chivert, Tristram; Tavares, DonaU F. and
n^ ^I^^J^'^^^'rm ^•' ♦•♦"^ Cl!5S!:22O00O '
Cbpw, Alfred W to Sm^th^line Beekman Corporation. l-(3.4.BisK3.
?43iu35, a*!!gBS5sy'>^»'»**>««^>p^^^^
Christaan, DonaldL.; imd Merid. Bernard A., to BASF Wyandotte
Corporation. Trinerizatioa catalysts and orgaao-mocury oom-
pponds as oo<atalyat> for the nraparMion of aonoeUular polyure-
.1 ^^ 4*438,241, a 32157.000 ^^^
PI 7
Chu, Mosi: See—
°JSJ,g5JJ* Chu, Mosi; and Manber, Solomon. 4.438.379. O.
Chuang. Patridt T.; Kes%wck. Paul D.; and Unden. Jefftw L Sr to
random access memory. 4.438.346r O. 307-297 000 •'"^'^ '"
Chupi Seiyaku Kabushiki KaiahTsse-
Napno, HiroyiAi; Takagi, Mitiro; Kubodera. Noboru; Matsunaga.
Isap; Yammki. Tamotsu; Nabata. Hiroyuki; SakaL Kazushue^
m^^ ^ Shun-ichi. 4.438,115, O. 424-250000 "™^*'
Ciba-Geigy Corporation: See—
^°77.'96M0*'' **"^ "**^* *^ '**"*°»^ 0«>'f . M37.879. O.
"ali^'.OOO ''*^'' ^°*'»^ ■»** ^^*^ *•«"• M38,125,
Oro't Touch. Ltd.: See—
Gaoci. Salvatore. 4.438,102. O. 424-130.000,
Qtizen Watch Company Limited: See—
^ 'A"Si°^.i:i3%.^°1S?.r«.^'"'-''°°^'«'°-^
Clark, Dennis B.: See—
Bfonskv, Robert J.; Clark, Dennis B.; McKeea. Jeffrey A and
ri. I, r^^y>fki Willie A., 4.437,347, CI. 73.27IobR ^ ^" "^
Clark ft Vicano Corporation: See—
'^.fe75S,'S. k.21 iSS: ""^ '■' "** '•*"•«• '«*" c..
Clayton Environmental Consultants, Inc See—
Hands. David, 4,437.333, CL 73-12.000.
Clemens, Donald P.: See—
^%*l!oS ^"^°^ ^ • "** Clemens. Donald F., 4,437,863, O.
Ooutier, Fi^ L.; Low, Robert N.; and McClelland, Paul H to
CL^SoSKOOO* ^"""^ Monolithic ink je. prinTfi^T M38,i9?
^^P^-^°"J^i!S**/^"**^ "^^^"^ ' • "> U"**! Sutes of Amer.
ica. Energy. Method for preparing surfaces of metal composites
oii'3?V5""'* phase for jpLlting. 4.437,956, O. 204.129.3W "^
Coca-Cola Company, The: See—
^iSx^wT ' ' '"** ^y"**"*^ Ardashus A., 4,438,061, O.
CockreU, Darryl W., to Baker International Corporation. Combination
rd^uKhamsm for downhole weU apparatus. 4,437,516 O.
Coco, Charles E.: See—
'^lo&ooo""** ^''' "^ *^****' °^'" ^•' ^•♦"•W'' CI.
Qxlignol^Frtnco, to S.I.S.A.S. Socieu Italina Serie Acetica Siatetica
Ut^SSS. iA^tlS'&tiUl^r^ °' ^-^utyr^l to
Cogan. Adrian I., to GTE Laboratories Incorporated. Etched-touroe
r, *^*^ ">duction transistor. 4,437,925, O. 156553.000.
J&' f "Tlf™ ^■'' 2!^ "'*" P ; ■*! *<»«• John B., to Imperial
Chemical Industries PLC. Compositions of melt-prooe^sable nSy-
Cn'KTi^&'S'*?''?? PI°**r""'y M38,236 d. 52M65.00r'
Colanzi, Franco; and Donn, Vittorio. to RIV-SKF OfHcine. Support
aisembly for vehicle wheeU. 4,437,536 O. 1 80-254.000. ^^^
wZ'v??^ ^ : »d Spioer, Arnold, to New Generation Foods, Inc.
Methg^ preparug cooked wheat product 4.438,146, O.
Co'gJJ' John P. Tool for severiag lead caaiag. 4,437,238, O. 30-
Coleman. Vemon: See—
Colgate-Palmolive Compaay; See—
^^M2?137 (»?**" '^''' "^ "^*^' ^^""'^ M37.584. O.
von Schuckuann. Alfied, 4,437,591, O. 22^39I.000.
CoUneau, Joseph; aod Maheo, Jean Y., to Thomson-Brandt Electric
circuit for omiverting an AC voltage into a DC voltage or a voltaM
n \^iS."T |o*««;?«l««»cy. 4,43^375. O. 315-401000. ^^
Sffif '^JSrii cabinet panel connector. 4,437,280 O. 52-285.000
CoUin. Karl-Heinz, to Kkickner-HumboUt-Deute Aktieagesdlschaft.
Atond^ nozzle for continuous ftiel iiUection. 4,4*37.314. ~C1.
CoUingtOB. Eric W^Hallett Peter; and Wallis. Christopher J., to Glaxo
toJlSjln; o'^SSaSS"^ '^ Ph^-ceutical fomiula-
CoUington. Eric W^; Hallett Peter, Wallis. Christopher J.; and Bnd-
shaw. Joha. to Glaxo Oroop Limited. Prostaaoid .y—rw^tt aad
n ^^S^JT*^*^ formulations. 4.438.112. O. 424-244.000.
CoUias. Arthur K.; Aadrews. Edward W.; aad Sriaivasaa. NallMwamv
to Oeaeral Electric CooMay. Tooography wiadow-level ■«»««
ftiaetioas. 4.438.495, 5164414000^ w«ww.»vw gamma
CoUhM, Michael J.; Crnae. Bernard W.. Jr.; aad OoMchlua,Roaaki J to
CTM ^^poratioB. Rapid volatility; aaalyier. M3M0O <?
^%lllS?^^/*2f"**^^ *^ ^*^ ^ Teleftiaken Electronic
AASMya^51^S!Sr''^
Columbus, Rkhard L., to EMbaaa Kodak Conpny. MadMkaUv
•ctiiated pipette dispeaser. 4,437,586, a 222^181^ ^"'
PIS
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20. 1984
ComlMftioa Eagiiieeriiig, Inc.: See—
Hurk. Lewis K.; and Bomit. Billie S., 4.437,830, CL 431.54.000.
Conwnmdfar, Raymond: See—
Mathaii, Hori; Comnuodeur, RAvmood; Pdatoglio. Achilk: and
Nebd. Serno, 4,438.027, a. 232-381.000.
Conmannat a I'Eneifie Atomkie: See—
Bompaid. Bnino; and Bniyere. Alain. 4.437.221, Q. 29-429iX».
rnnnniiaaiiat a I'Energie Atomiqne: See—
Caianibaz. Beniaid; Ddmierre, Oillea; and Destannes. Louis.
4.438.48a a. 361-278!o3a ^^
Forrat. Francis. 4.438.337. O. 230436.000.
Tcsurd. OUvier, 4,438.168. CL 428-193.000.
Communications Satellite Corporation: See—
Uzunoglu. Vasil. 4.438.3SS, a. 307-511.000.
Compagnie Ocnerale de Manutention et de Stockage: Sec^
Londoe. Rene; and Barbereau, Jean-Luc. 4.437.808. a.
414-667.000.
Compacnie Oenerak des Matieres Nucleaires (Cogema): See—
Bo&e, Georges, 4,437,885, a. 7Ma00R.
Compagnie Royale Aaturienne des Mines: See—
Drenlle. Noel; Van Cenlen. Alain; and Eusd)e. Claude. 4.437.965.
a. 2O4-29O.00F.
Compagnuoci. Nello B.: See—
Re«e, Ira W.; and Compagnncd. NeUo B.. 4.437.213. a. 29-
33.00K.
Coonelly, William L. Portable cooking grill. 4.437,450, CI. 126-30.000
Connor, Terrence E. Surfing device. 4,437,842. CI. 441-65.000.
Connors. Stephen T.; and Harvey. Kenneth, to Colgate-Pshnoiive
Company. Toothpaste dispenser. 4,437.584. Q. 222-13r000.
Conoco Inc.: See—
Orimsley, R. Leroy; and Oawel. Len J.. 4.437.794, 0. 405-224.000.
Wasson. Oeorae R. 4.437,982. Q. 209-5.000.
Cooaiglio Nazionde Oelle Ricerche: See—
Botteghi. Carlo; Oladiali. Serafino O.; Marcbetti, Mauro; and
Faedda. Giovanni A.. 4,438.033, Q. 260-239.55C.
Constant, James N. Computer having plural IC chips with each chip
including a transceiver. 4.438.491. CI. 364-200.000.
Construction Forms, Inc.: See—
Bigelow, David E.; and Timmerman, Terry. 4.437.646, Q.
251-145.000.
Constructions Mecaniques de Nonnandie: See—
Bordat. Andre. 4.437.355, a. 74-385.000.
Continental Group, Inc.. The: See-
Harry, leuan L.; Krishnakumar, Suppayan M.; Jolly. Walter R.;
Beck. Martin H.; and Pocock, John F. £.. 4,437,825, Q.
425-145.000.
Continental Gummi-Werke Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Seitz, Hans; Rich, Heinz-Dieter, Pieper, Henner and Frerichs.
Udo. 4.437.503, Q. I52-209.00R.
Conwed Corporation: See—
Thomalla. Richard O., 4.438.526. Q. 381-73.00a
Cooper, Bruce H.: See—
Biocklehurst, Charles E.; and Cooper. Bruce R. 4.437.369. CL
83-18.000.
Cooper. Gordon J., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Electrified wall
panel system. 4.437,716, Q. 339-4.000.
Copeland. John A., ni; and Miller, Stewart E., to BeU Telephone
Laboratories. Incorporated. Multilayered optical integrated aremi.
4.438.447, Q. 357-19.000.
Cofbett. David F.; Southgate. Robert; and Coulton. Steven, to Bee-
cham Group Limited. ^-Lactam antibiotics thdr preparation and
their use. 4.438.036. Q. 26O-245.20T.
Corbett, Soott S., Jr.: See—
Perrott, Lynn F., 4,437.807, O. 414-620.000.
Cordier, Jean; and RoUot. Pierre, to Union Siderurgique du Nord et de
rEst de la France. CooUng plate for blast-ftimacea. 4.437,651. Q.
266-193.000.
Cordis Corporation: S<»—
Pwn-Trevarton. Charles A., 4,437.474, CL 128-784.000.
'tm;4?S' >'^'S;s^ =*^ *^^ -* ^"*-- '~" •
Coriey, William G., to Ex-Cell-O Corporation. Single pass sizing tool
and machine inchiding wear compensation means. 4,437.267. CL
Cocneil Research Foundation, Inc.: See~-
Meister. Alton; and ^dhamson. Joanne M.. 4.438.124. Q.
424-270.000.
CofBiea, Donald O.: See—
PulnfiE. Lawranoe A.; and Comiea, Donald O.. 4.437.498, CL
141-89.000.
ConiBg Glaas Works: Ss»—
. ^^'Sif?i2ft-J^^" ^'^ ■«* S**^ Alastair. 4,437.969, CL
204^103.000.
Miller, Roger A.. 4.437.870, CL 65-12.000.
Rittler. Hermmm L.. 4.438.21a CL SOM.O0O.
Coniah, Anthony L.: See—
Aidde, David L.; Canon. David O.; Conish. Anthony L.; Hosier.
Bnd W.; Johnson. David B.; and PeterKm. Craig B.. 4,438.494.
CL 364-200000. —.-•»., ftr»«,«>^.
Coaler. Ora. Dice boi. 4,437.665. CL 273-138.00R.
Coawocth Beaearch and Devckmiicat Liniled: ,
Vogel. Alftedo. 4.437,834. ^L 432-1400a
Coabar Electraoica, Inc.: &*—
Hogg. Wahcr R., 4.438.19a a 324-71.10a
Coulton. Steven: See—
Covington, Arthur R.; and Sibbald. Alastair, to Coming GIms Works.
Offiiet-gate chemical-sensitive fleU-effect transistors (OG-CHEM-
SS?3 000 **~*^y**'*"y-P«VM>™*»»*e selectivity. 4.437,969. Q.
Coi. Nifiel: See—
Whitehouse. Craig M.; Cox. Nigd; Burt. AUan G.; and Snyder.
Daniel R., 4,437,859. Q. 604.OU)00.
Crane and Company: See-
Crane. Frederick O.. Jr.. 4.437.935. CL I6M03.000.
Crane. Frederick G., Jr., to Crane and Company. Method and apparatus
for providing security features in paper. 4.437.935, Q. 162-1(»!000.
Cribben, James T.; and Ichter, WiUiam J., to CapiUd Products Corpora-
tion. Snap-on false muntin system. 4.437.284. Q. 52-456.00a
Crisci. Clem C. Golf club. 4.437.663. Q. 273-81.200.
Crone. John M.. Jr.: See—
^'Sl??!^^ ^°^ '^' "** ^^^^>^ •'o'" M.. Jr., 4,438.219. a
502-333.000.
Crookston. Ronald W.; and Bumey. Ivan T., to Westinghouse Electric
Corp. Circnit interrupter open^ing mechanism having a chemical
operator with a stationary piston. 4,438.306. Q. 2OO-14S.0OF.
Cross, Skip D. L. Controlled dispersion speaker coofimiration.
4.437.541. a. 181-151.000. ^^ ^^^ ««in»Hi«wn.
Crow, James J., to C.R. Bard. Inc. Electroeurgical aenerator safety
spparatus. 4.437.464, Q. 128-303.140. "^ ^
Crowe. Tahnadge L.: See—
^*V^^^J^ ^= '"* ^^«»**- Tahnadge L.. 4.437.517. CL
Cruse. Bernard W., Jr.: See-
Collins, Michael J.; Cruse. Bernard W.. Jr.; and Goetchius. Ronak)
J. 4,438.500, a. 364-567.000. v«»c«ni«., ,«««ki
Cruse, Lee H., to Foster ManufiKturing Company. Quick coonect-dis-
connect coupling for fluid Unes. 4,437,647, Q. 251-149.900.
Csanitz, Herbert; and WeyL Hehnut, to Robert Bosch GmbR Electro-
chemical oxygen sensor, particularly for exhaust gases from combus-
tion engines. 4,437,971. Q. 204-427.000
Csere. Csaba; and FoUmer, William C, to Ford Motor Company.
Adaptive air flow meter ofbet control. 4.437,340, Q. 73-118.0007
Q^ Donald L.; and Robertson. John A., to Autech Corporation.
HectroMatictransducer for length measurement system. 4,438,402.
a. 324-452.000.
Curtis. WiUiam M.: See—
SkKum. Donald H.; Schairbaum. Albert W.; and Curtis. WiUiam
M., 4.437.274. CL 5M05.000.
Qtthing, David E.; and Stanley, PhUip E., to HoneyweU Information
Systems Inc. Multiwork memory datt storage and addressing tech-
nique and apparatus. 4.438.493. CL 364-2O0!00O.
Daeuble. Manfred: Smi—
Drier, Dieter; Ziegler, Waher, Daeuble, ManfM; Dietache, Wol-
ftim; Hettche, Albert; and Weiss. Stefiui. 4.438.008. CL 25^
56.00R.
Dahnert. Dean L.. to Spacesaver Corporation. Movable storage unit
controls. 4.437,71 1. CL31^2Ol.O00.
Dai-Ichi Kogyo Sei)«ku Co.. Ltd.: See—
Ishizuka. Tetsuo; Hotta. Hiroshi; and Nishimura. Yoshichika.
4,437,861, CL 44.1.00R
Dsimler-Benz AktiengeaeUschaft: See—
Stolz. Albert; and Mordau. Manfted. 4.437.393. Q. 98-2.170.
Dainichi-Nippon Cables. Ltd.: See—
Okngawa, Michihide, 4,437.996. Q. 210-718.000.
Dainippon Screen Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Mizokami. Hidekatu; and MacUda. YoaUhiro. 4.437.7S9. Q.
355-91.000.
Daiwa Seiko Inc.: See—
Sakumoto. Akinori. 4.437.621. Q. 242-84.10J.
DaUessandro. Susan M.: See—
Archer, Wesley L.; Lynn. VicU A.; and DaUeasandro. Susan M..
4,438,192. CL 430-329.000.
Daluge. Susan M.; and Skonezny, Paul M. Monoheteroring oompoonds
and their uae. 4.438,267. CL 544-309.000.
Daly, Charles F.: See—
GuUikaen. John E.; Ouimond, Roy A.; Daly. Chaike F.; and
Hanulton, WUUam H.. 4.438.483. CL 36M83.00a
Danfichat. Rainer, to Siemens AktiengeaeUschaft Transistor pulse
drive control circuit 4.438,345. CL 307-270.00a
Daniels. John Y.; and Stevenson. James C. to Springs Indnatries, Inc.
Cplorad opaque printing of textile fiMca using dycstnflb. 4,438,169.
a. 428-196.000.
Dart Induatries lac.: See—
Ehaa. Moenes L.; and Burger. Walter L.. 4.437.931. CL
156-666.000
Wong, Kwee C. 4.437.927. CL \5M66JO0O.
Wong, Kwee C. 4,437.928. 0. 156-666A».
Wong, Kwee C. 4,437.929. a l5&U6Xm.
Wong, Kwee C. 4.437.93a CL 156466.000
Wong. Kwee C. 4.437,93^ CL 1564664X».
Data General Corporation: 5u
Kaseta. Robert G.. 4,438,31a CL 318-696An.
Datapohit CorpotationT Sae—
Tompkins. EUiot N.; and KUne,
27l-290:00a
Sherman S., 4,437,66a CL
Datwj^er, Mtairto MDC Max Datwyler AG. Methods Cor pndndng
Prindiunlatea. and printing phtta pcodnoed thoeby. 4,437.942, <1
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
Davey, Ernest A.: See—
at29SloO^ ^' "^ °"'*^' ^™* ^•' *'*".966, CI.
%* a a' 2£2'n"wF.'*'*^ '~ ^"^ ".nioonductor switch.
°!!iJ!^*!^ °.V^ Nesfier Corporation. Removable poultry nest
bottoms of variable widths. 4,437.434. a. 119-45.00R
Davy McKee AktiengeaeUschaft: S^ "^»w».
Day l£S5?cl,Si?'£5!^ "^ ♦•♦"•«". CL 425-378.00S.
Hawaloft^ Anderson W.; and Foley, Marii P., 4,437^71. Q.
DBS, Inc.: See—
Barbour, WUliam P., 4,437,404, a. 101-269.000.
Deacon, Ross: See—
r^^'??^ ^*?/' ■** De«5on. Ross, 4,437.414. Q. 108-134.000
DeBardeld>en, Martha G. Method and apparatus for trainhit cato to use
a todet bowl. 4.437,430, Q. 1 19-1.0007^ ^^ cais to use
Drtorde. Albert H.; and VoUand, Michel F., to Saurer-Diederichs
goc|«^Anojyme). Apparatus for measuring belt tension. 4,437,352,
°t25'-'\^' ^^^^^- •«• Ziegenhom, Joachim, to Boehhnger
Deere k Company: See—
Koning. Richard W., 4,437,399, CI. 100-4.000.
9lSi OOo"*** ^' "** '^***='*'' Edward H., 4,437.385. a.
Deftos. Leonard J.; and Catherwood, Bayard D., to University of
Cahfomia, The Regentt of the. Region-raecific determinana for
vitamm K dependent bone protein. 4,438,2(», Q. 436-542.000.
de Oroot, Klaas: See—
n«/^***^i^' '<*«pi» '^ ; ■«> de Otoou Klaas, 4.437,191. CI. 3-1.000.
DOS, Daniel W.; and Kemeny, George A., to Westinghouse Electric
4A^'.3t^ wil^r^' '" electromagnetic projectile Uuncher.
^37.359?Cr'8?^3Sr"°"'"' ^™°° ^"** '*'"**^* coricsciews.
DeUey, Lucas J., to Leuven Research A Development V.Z.W. BeU
slloys with improved properties. 4,437,911, CI. 148-402.000.
Deluierre. GUles: See—
^M«)."cn6f-25S3r*' '^' "^ °-*^"' ^^
DdOreco, Aj^la p.; AUen, Malcolm L.; and Jacobsen, RonaU L.. to
SS?4.438^'S.'g?ffi&?^- "^'^ "''•^ '^««'» ^^■
'%i!*MS'7.SS^2«)itt'* ^""^ "^'^ '" • '""•^•^
Delphi Dental Industries B.V.: See—
T^}^f^Ifli°^^ 1;= "^ de Groot Klaas, 4,437,191. a. 3-1.000.
oelta Dredge and Pump Corporation: See—
Kalbac John F., 4,437,814. a. 417-351.000.
DelU Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
DelS^SSSi^i^^ ■** ^****"^ ^""°' *'*"''°3' CI- 297-362.000.
°^^og°° W; •«» Poore. WUliam H., 4.437,329. CI.
Donm. Roben J.; and SchUbe. Rick, to Webster Air Equipment Ltd.
Reed valve assembly. 4,437,490, Q. 137-512.400. ^^
Demus. Dietrich: See—
^*!^ 5???!? Schafer, Wolfgang; Deutscher, Hans-Joachim;
Donus, Dietrich; and Pdzl. Gerhard. 4,438,268, Q. 544-3I3;oS.
uenda, Masamko: See—
Ate, HaruUko; Harada, Hiroshi; Denda, Masahiko; Nagasawa.
Kwchi; and Kono. Yoshio. 4,438,368, a. 31^39.000.
DenneL Ferdmand: See—
Etanami. Oskar. RMchack. Manfred; Gries. Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; I^hmann. Hans D.; Friednch. Ludwig; Wuppermann.
Dirk; Zimm»mann. Frank; Sdtz. Werner; TreibernSmTj!^
Donel. Ferdinand; Frank. Wolfhun; Kurbjuwdt. HansOeorg
ukd MueUer, Claus D.. 4.438.131, Q. 424-278.000. *
Dwbyahir^ Francis J.; and Vargheae. PhUip. to MobU OU Corporation.
goMjifor»-processing coal and a paraflinic material. 4;437,972.
Dermzarian, Thomas E: See—
sS^nOK ^' "** ^^V***^ Thomas E.. 4.438.259, a.
De Sa. Altai J. A., to Geodate Limited. Method for utilizing thiee-di-
?''!J?^2^'^.°*f^ **" i^lients for detecti^ serving
fcjUtt u buned cables. 4:438,389, Q. 324-52.000.
Pwbois. Michel, to Rhone-Poulenc SpedaUtes Chimiques. Process for
prepaFBtion of di- or trifluoromethoxyphenyl ketones or di- or tri-
fluoromethylthiophenyl ketones. 4.438,043, a. 26O-465.0OF
Desnoulez. Bruno: See—
D^teuxj Andre; and Desnoulez. Bruno, 4,437,359, Q. 81-3.38A.
Deasau. Ralph M.; and Ken. George T, to Mobil OU Corporation.
^^o^enhanoement of high sUica zeoUtes. 4.438^15. a.
Da^naes, Louis: Sae—
°3SSrf'.n"S^,Sf!SE?'™' ®"«^ ■«» Dertunes. Louis,
4.438.4ta CL 361-278.000. ^^
Detroit Stoker Company: See—
Reachly. David C, 4.437,452, Q. 126-182.000.
PI 9
°?*!2!'i°*'*5-: ^- ^""«» P: Heck. RonaU M.; and Chen.
James M.. to EngeUiard Corporation. Platinum goU catalyst for
dSSS'iKS^^^ sS^*" "~~ *'*'''°*^ ° *^^«»-
Z-chke. Horst; Schafer, Wolfgang; Deutscher, Hans-Joachim;
DevlTSHii?*?^ ■** ^' ^^i"^ 4,438068, Q. 544-315.000
oevale. DonaM, tc Everpure, Inc. Computer oontroUed sensor for
beyersM di^enser. 4,437,499, a. 141^;9l000. ^^ ^^
4!i3?^5?2?a:*r65-?22Sor """"''''"^ "-^ ««»«»««' -«wy
'^aiSX'Jl^.fib.'g.^^^Jo^^
Dickson. Dale A: See—
*'iSS.o5l^ °' "^ ^^'^ ^^ ^' *•*"•**•• CI
Diesel KUu Co., Ltd.: See—
Ohie, Tomonori. 4.438.496, Q. 364431.050.
Dietmann, Karl: See—
Wtedemann. Fritz; Kampe, Wolfgang; Dietmann. Kark and
p. SPOSf.«*««.M38Jlfi:a.42lSt.00ir^
Dietsche. Wolfram: See—
°filS;-%S^i?*5^*"?=S'*^*& '^•»^' Dietache. Wol-
fijj^^Hettche. Albert; and Weiss, Stefan. 4.438,008, Q. 25^
Digital Productt Corporation: See—
Smith, Fred J.. 4,438,296. a. 179-6.020.
Pilmaghani, Homayoun: Set
'^3Sl4.0W**'^ "^ DUmaghani. Homayoun. 4,437,631, Q.
DiMartino. Michael D.: See—
Cawley, James c.; DiMartino, Michael D.; Fisher. Thomas J
rv ^^/S*^. k' "»** ^^^^' M»reus H.. 4.438.473. Q. 361-18 000*
to AsuW) S A. Quaru thermometer. 4,437.773, Q 374-117TO
^''tX^pS-' !l*""^'-?^ J ■ '° ^^ CbiiijCoB.
^1\^ Polyurethanes derived from 1,4-lactones of 3,6«nhydro-
jj^3'*'£^^^)gro«yhexanoic add. 4.438,226, Q. 521-175.000.
Kiewert Eva; and Disch. KarUieinz, 4,438,016. Q. 232-174 250
I^n../«J»«.Mi»d Witt Geoffrey R., to Peniy A Giks Tiinsduo«
Limited. Au-speed sensin| systems. 4,437,343. Q. 73-182.000.
Djprdjevich, Ljubomir; and Sadove. Max S., to Rush-Prtsbyterian-St.
^."^•-^•dical Center. System for determining characteristics of
blood flow. 4,437,469, Q. 128-672.000. ^^ waraciensocs or
DlunMch. Gunter: See-
Best Oerd; and piugosch, Gunter. 4.437.707, Q. 299-81.000.
uobry, Alan M.. to Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Clariflcation of
ammonium TOlypho^ate solutions. 4.437,997. a. 2 10-727.000.
Immeyw. Fritt H^and Wesche, Michael, 4,437.432. a. 1 19-18.000.
Dr.-Ing. Rudolf HeUG.m.b.H.: See— •'••••uui/.
Karius, Hehnut 4.438.374. a. 3 1 5-362.000.
Dr. Karl Thomae GmbH: See—
°^4:;T69!rsi2i?i^^'»"' "^'^^ -^ ^- ^•'•
Doev. Vitaly S.; K<M«lyusky. losif M.; Kravchenko. Valery B.; Mono-
jov, Yakov A.; Shakhunov. Valery A.; and Kopytov. Jur^ L.. to
InsotutRadiotekhnUd I Elektroniki Akademii Nidk SSSR. Method
of recmding mformation on a medium in the form of electrical sia-
nals. 4.43M43. Q. 346- 1 53. 100. "w^mcai sig
Donn. Vittorio: See—
Colanzi, Franco; and Donn. Vittorio. 4,437,536. CL 180-254.000.
Doorakian, George A.; and Paul, Manha A., to Dow Chemical Com-
M8-W0W '*''°**" '**' producing epoxy reains. 4.438.254. a.
Dore. Jacques, to Societe Anonyme AutomobUes Qtroen; and Sodete
Anonyme AutomobUes Peugeot. Aroaratus for retaining and instaU-
mg an mterior assembly of a universal joint 4,437 J 19, CT 29-283.000
Dore, Jacoues. to AutomobUes Qtroen; and AutomobUes Peuceot.
Umversal transmission coupUna and a noceas for manufiKturtait
such a coupbng. 4,437.33 1 . 072-360.000 «•«"«»«*
Domer. Ftenan. to Bayer AktiengmeUachafL Device for dapeMinc
psste-hke substances. 4,437,582. d. 222-94^000. — !»««»»
Doremund. WUh. to GraafT KG. Device for kxking together stacked
objects. 4,437.21 1. CI. 24-287.000. "^ ^^
Dorr, Wolfgang; Gradel. Gerhard; and Peehs, Martin, to Kraftwcrk
Union AktiengeseUsdiaft. Method for thTmuufkmi^ of va?da^
oxKhc nuclear fuel bodies. 4,438/)3a a. 264-0.500
Dow Chemical Company, The: See—
'^Sl^'^i^fa'^ ""■' "^ ''•"--^ ^ ^••
"J¥1^X'<^ ^'' "** Schndder. Connie J., 4.438,226. a
9^1-1 79.0UI.
DogslMjj^George A.; and Paul, Martha A., 4,438.254. a
^Sf L.Y5S? ^' ■■** Dergazarian, Thomas E., 4,438^59. Q.
9Z5-3W.UUI.
^iSSoOo""^ J-; ««» Hensler, John M.. 4,438J42. CL
Sole Jitka, 4'438.179, Q. 428-407.000.
Strom, Robert M., 4,438.284, Q. 568-730.000.
Weaver, John D., 4.438.088. a 423-466.000
mo
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
Doweyko. Afthar M. P.: See—
^A^^, ^ ^S!f^!:J^^ **• '' : •«' Minttelli, John A..
4.438,271. CL 346-294.000.
^^nMlSt^ "• Moaatmg appugtw for « dirt bike. 4,437,597, a.
^^7^J^^ **• ***•' P"«w« •»« •wivel connector. 4,437,69a Q.
213-272.000.
Dfcolle. Noel; Van Ceulen. Alain; and Euaebe, Claude, to Compaanie
Ki^ Aatofienne dea Miner Reinforced lead anode for tbe ekctto-
lytic production of zinc firora lulphate lolution and proceaa for the
prepuation thereof. 4.437,965, Q. 2O4.29O.00F.
°!?!5 J^*^ **?»»• *****^ "x" Werner, Peter, to Robert BoK:h
OmbH. Lmearizing and control circuit for air flow rate meter.
4.437.339.0.73-118.000.
Drinkwater, ErroU H.: See—
Chenauaky, Peter P.; Newman, Leon A.; and Drinkwater, ErroU
H.. 4.438,514, Q. 372-64.000.
Droadziok. Hermann; Oeke, Jurgen; and Oermacheid, Hans O.. to
Henkel Kommanditgeiellachaft auf Aktien. Method and agent for
paaaivating iron and iteel nirfaces. 4,437,898. Q. 148-6. 15R
DRS Infbaion Systems. Inc.: See—
Whitehouse. Craig M.; Cox. Nigel; Burt. Allan O.; and Snyder,
Daniel R.. 4.437.859. Q. 604-131.000.
D'Sidocky. Richard M., to Goodyear Tire St Rubber Company. The.
Reduction of cyclopentadiene from iaoprene streams. 4.438.289. CI.
585-827.000.
Du Pont Canada Inc.: See-
Lang. Theodore J.; and Kershaw. Bernard J.. 4.438.180. Q.
428-475.800.
Ducret. Lucien C. Swing saw for cutting metal conduit 4,437.237. d.
30-90.200.
Doering AO: See—
Duering. Walter, 4.437,587. Q. 222-207.000.
Duering. Walter, to Duering AO. Squeeze bottle for producing an
arbitrarily directed liquid stream. 4.437.587. CI. 222-207.000.
Dunham-Bush. Inc.: See—
Magee. Dennis A.; and McCubbin, Charles E. 4.437.816. CI.
417-465.000.
Duni Bila AB: See—
Anderason, Karl O. B., 4.438.163. Q. 428-35.000.
Dunkelmann, Dietger, Jaunich, Hebnut; and Schiflarth. Josef, to
Foaeco Trading A.O. Protection of graphite electrodes. 4.438,515.
CI. 373-88.000.
Dunn, Robert E. Apparatus for supporting a camera against the ster-
num of the photographer. 4.437,753, CI. 354-293.000.
Dunning. Reginald: See-
Potter, William D.; Barclay, Andrew C; Dunning. Reginald- and
Parry, Richard J., 4,438,212. CI. 501-73.000.
Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company: See—
Bissot, Thomas C; Grot, Walter G.; and Resnick. Paul R..
4.437.951, a. 204-98.000.
Cherkofsky, Saul C, 4.438.117. Q. 424-251.000.
Ganfield. David J.; Hunk^>iller. Michael W.; Knight. EmeM. Jr.;
and Korant. Bruce D.. 4.438.030. CI. 260-112.505/
Oswald. Joseph A.. Jr.. 4.437.236. Q. 29-879.000.
Raiagopalan. Parthaaarathi. 4,438,120. Q. 424-256.000.
Schenck, Timothy T.. 4.438,228, Q. 524-109.000.
Smith. Roger A.; and Withers. Michael S., 4,437.952. Q.
204-98.000.
Durand. Daniel C; and Maiuin. Pierre M.. to BP Chimie. Catalyst for
the polymerization of olenna baaed upon mmgru^mn uid transition
metaL 4,438.019, a. 502-169.000.
Durand. Francois; and Smukters, Auguste, to Societe Anonyme En-
grenagea et Reducteurs. Vertically moving platform supported on
legs. ^437.792, Q. 405-198.000. "^^
Durant. Graham J.; Ganellin. Charon R; and Young. Rodney C. to
Smith Kline ft French Laboratories Limited. Pharmacologically
active cooapounds. 4.438.127. a. 424-272.000.
Duro-Dyne Corporation: See—
Giannone. Charles. 4.438.314. CI. 219-98.000.
Duroyon. Herve, to Union Carbide Corporation. StufRns method.
4.437.209. a. 1749.000. ^
Dyer. David; and Wise, James L., to Technology Marketing Inc.
M^$°l"** ipparatus for recovering waste energy. 4,437.316. CI.
62-79.000.
Dynamit Nobel Aktiengeaellschaft: See—
von Branchel. Hehnut; Schreiber. Oeorg; and Schroeder. Heinz.
4.438.075.0.422-189.000.
E.C.H. WiU (OmbH ft Co.): See—
Wolf. Wolfram. 4.437.560. Q. 198457.000.
Eaby. Daniel G.; Long, William B.; and Shuey. John R.. to AMP
Incorporated. Junction connections for moduUur wirins systems.
4.437.^725. Q. 339-156.0OR. ^^ '^^
Eastman Kodak Company: See—
Columbus. Richard L., 4.437.586. CI. 22M81.000.
PontKelk), Ignazio S.; HoUister, Kenneth R; and Tuites, Richard
C. 4.438,278, Q. 560-205.000.
Efaara Corporation: See—
Iwata. Minoni; Murata. YukJo; and Shibata, Tomoyuki. 4.437,811.
a. 417-8.000.
Ebara Denaan, Ltd.: See—
Iwata. Minoru; Murata. Yukio; and Shibata. TomoyuU. 4.437.811.
CL 417-8.000.
Ebi, Yutaka: See—
Jinnai. Koichira, and Ebi. Yutaka. 4.438,440. CL 346-75.000.
Eckhardt, Wolfgang: See—
Hubele, Adolf; Eckhardt. Wolfgang; and Riebli. Peter. 4,438.123,
a. 424-269.000.
Ecklundt. Hinrich: See—
Hofgen, Gunter; and Ecklundt, Hinrich. 4.438.435, Q. 343-7.300.
Edipae, Inc.: Set
Spiehnan. Lyle S., 4.437.415. CL 1 10-182.SOa
Econ Incorporated: 5«r
Foeter. Kenneth J.. 4,437,277. Q. 52-202.000.
Edelstein. Harold: See—
Mallik. Arjun; Koetters, Daniel; and Edelstein. Harold. 4,438.017.
CI. 252-301.170.
Egami. Tsune^ruki; Kawai. Hisaai; Kohama. Tokio; and Obayashi,
Hideki. to Nippon Soken. Inc. Gas flow measuring device. 4.437.345.
a. 73-204.000.
Eguu Thomas R: See-
Butler. John L.; Egan. Thomas R.; Rodberg. Kenneth; and Clark.
Arthur E.. 4.438,509. Q. 367-156.000. ~™^ "» ^"^
Egger. David L. Screed bar assembly. 4,437,828. CI. 425-458.000.
Eguchi. Osamu; and Fukui. Tomonori. to Nippondenao Co.. Ltd. Air
condition control u>paratus with indoor and outdoor air selection
modes for automobdes. 4.437.391. Q. 98-2.010.
Eguchi. Takeo: See—
^^J^,^[U"'^' Eguchi. Takeo; and Ohba. Takeo. 4.438.465. Q.
360-22.000.
■, Gabriele; and Vondrovsky. Gabriel, to Agfa-Oevaert AG.
,J'?°,..'^P*"*"« arrangement for cameras. 4.437.749. Q.
354-214.000.
Ehrmann. Oskar; Raschack, Manfred; Oriea. Josef; Kretzschmar. Rolf;
Lehmann, Hans D.; Friedrich. Ludwig; Wuppermann. Dirk; Zim-
mermann, Frank; Sdtz. Werner; Treiber, Hans J.; Dengel. Ferdinand;
Frank, Wolfram; Kurfojuweit, Hans-Georg; and Mueller. Claus D.. to
BASF Aktiengesellschaft O-Cyano-l. O-diphenyl-azaalkane deriva-
Jy^ Jgr PrepmtJon ind drugs containing them. 4.438.131. Q.
Eibert, John. Jr.: See—
N«g«niel. Elmer O.; and Eibert. John, Jr.. 4.438.003. Q.
Eichdberger. Charles W.; and Wojnarowski, Robert J., to General
Electnc Company. Method for fabrication of electrical resistor.
4.438.158. a. 427-101.000.
Eichelberger, Charles W.; Wojnarowski. Robert J.; and Auerbach,
Abraham, to General Electric Company. Screen-printable thermo-
couples. 4.438.291. Q. 136-236.00R ^ ^^
Eigl. Franz: See—
Hittel. Gerhard; Muhl. Hubertus; Eigl. Franz; and Langer. Werner.
4.437.323. CI. 66-84.00A.
Eiichi. Nishiura: See—
Katsutoshi. Ando; and Eiichi. Nishiura. 4,438,172. CI. 428-220.000.
Ekdahl. Carl A., to United Sutes of America, Energy. Capacitively-
coupled inductive sensor. 4.438.394, CI. 324-126.000.
Eklund. Claes E. Transporter air chiller. 4,437,320. Q. 62-236000.
Elaschuk. John T. Collapsible or folding chair. 4.437,700, Q
297-45.000.
Electrolytic Zinc Company of Australasia Limited: See-
Newman, Oliver M. G.; Pahner. David J.; and Pammenter. Robert
v.. 4.437.953, a 204-119.000.
Elias. Luis R; Madey, John M. J.; and Smith, Todd I., to United States
of America. Navy. Short wavelength free electron laser using low
energy electrons. 4.438,513, Q. 372-2.000.
Elias. Moenes L.; and Burger, Walter L., to Dart Industries Inc. Disso-
lution of metals. 4.437.931. CI. 156-666.000.
Elkem a/s: See
Kromud. Harald. 4.438.516. Q. 373-97.000.
Elliott. Robert H.. Jr.. to Zerpol Corporation. Boiler umaratus.
4.437.968.0.204-301.000. ^*^
Ellis. Charles W. Stamping device. 4.437.400. O. 101-18.000.
Ellison. Josmh: See-
Willis. Frederick G.; Radtke. Richard R; Ellison. Joseph; Fozo,
Steven R; and Kern. Glenn A.. 4.438.497. Q. 364431.050.
Ehnore. James; and West, Robert F.. to Stanley Works. The. Molded
frame maker mitre box with clamps. 4,437.375, d. 83-762.000.
Emerson Electric Co.: See—
Halfaker, Thomas C. 4.437.287. a. 52-588.000.
Royer, Neal B.. 4.438.359. O. 3ia68.00R
Emerson, Ralph W.. Sr.. to Phnmine Corporation, The. Sizing composi-
tions containing a formic acid salt, processes, and puier sized win^
compositions. 4.437.894. Q. 106-238.000.
Enander. Frederick A. Ultraaonic control of filling a container.
4.437.497. Q. 141-1.000. ^
Endo. Kazuhiko: See—
Kubo. Toahihiko; Ichidate. Minoru; Kawai. Toahiyuki; Yonehara.
Sadao; Koiwai. Yoahihisa; and Endo. Kazuhiko. 4.437,883, CL
75.0.50C.
Endo. Michio: See—
Furukawa. Takashi; and Endo, Michio. 4.437.903. Q. 148-12.00F.
Endorphin. Inc.: 5tc
Kimball. Charies D.; and Houck. John C. 4.438.104. CL
424-177.000.
EngeL Joseph C: See-
Hicks, John M.; and Engel. Joaeph C. 4,438.369. CI. 315-49.000.
Engelhard Corporation: See—
Dettling. Joseph C; Can. William F.; Heck. Ronald M.; and Chen,
James M.. 4.438.082. CL 423-235.000.
Jefferson. Clinton F.. 4.437,455. CL 126417.000.
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
^.43735. S.SM00355 ^'"«*"* ^^ '>^ pick-up Ffch;??a5ns?ii.*"'*^° "♦-•03«»
Pill
192-3.280.
^SSSLf'JSrK^'.**' HoneyweU Inc. Electiographic raoordi-. P"'«ie I«te^natii'Li.:&i?""
K^of** -^^ ^ -^ve JSSnS^iSS:^. yr,^^ E; STNetteland. Loyal O.. 4.437.462. O
E.p^'StriSt;!" »•• ♦•*"'«^' a 26444.00a
E^^^'^'^^^^^'^^^^SrSS^' Ernes, and U.
Etabhssements Lyrieubedin "U Girondtae''^&;^
EthiSS*pf^'*r'2*'' °- "-S^oSa
BtDendge Electric. Inc.: Set
p.i.JS*™*iF*i^- Eugene, 4,438.383. CL 318-799 000
Fi-kSSRSJ&:*s£!-^"'°^^'*'«>^
»«ek, Hei« nnkbeiner. Rudolf; and Wick. Wilhehn. 4.437.578.
> HeiaL Pii
CI. 22a^2^b00.
BphHTand
f!l%-^ror,7^^,'^-^^^^^^ J^ -—. - Ohloff. Ounther, 4.43^3. O. 252-
*^'iS:^j!^f7"??^ *r-^ „.'^^437'5Sr??4ii5Soo'" "^'^ ob>ct u, «^^
4.438.04fa 26Sm2 000^ pBosphorK «»1 „t„ oonpoaitioBs.
Firmenich SA: See^
»«gj«. «-«„; ^ ouoff, o»,a», 4.4JtM3. a. JSl
«y' "oducls Company: See—
EucS'L'!^'- '*•*"•"*• °- 22W2I000.
printing. 4.437.40^™ mf.Tff iK?" ^* "P'""-' continuous web
Eusebe. Claude: See—
""S^MabOF" ^«' '^ «- Eus.be. Cl.«te. 4.437.965.
Everpure. Inc.: See—
EvJrSriA°sSi*'*"'**'' ° '♦'■»'•«»•
'wSSl^OO.'^'^' ""•■' '^ ^'^ Car' A., 4,438.408. Q.
Ex-Cell-O Corporation: See-
ExiS'SL!!lftiS-i'*"'2«'. CI. 51-34.00R
"*^J«*««h Md Engineering Co.: See-
P-^^^T^^'.'^^- '^^'^.OOE
FJ5r&^^A.^£:f^°«-««^
'^J?5"%,*^°- ^■■- ^ ^y- a-- C. 4.437.53a Q. ^SS^'F^^^^'^^'^'^'^'^^^''
^y'fe Nod; Van Ceulen. Alain: and Eu.rf-.ri...^.^.,,«.- Fiiher. TT^ms J. li^'
Fiiher. Thomas J.. „._
^;f}»y.Jiam C; DiMartino, Michad D Pkw -n .
Tsini<aioira«l Y^TPSUi ^ ** ^ ^*^ F.; Wang.
"^^^^Sid^h^^rl^"^ Corporation. MethodSf
M38,356. a!Mr7-571 oS^ MOSFET power switching devices.
Fletcher. Edward R: See—'
KnyiJ. ^nneth D.; and Fletcher. Edw«d R. 4.437.383. Q.
Flexiblast Company:
Sk5o.ooa '>«*«»"»«>-"y for c«>«bi,K*i, MsBTa "^""^ "-^tj,;™,^ «,.,.,^ ^ ,„.^
-«~ — — / • 'ww^i*. inc.: j«f —
RjMTCh Foundation. m«
4.438,00a a. 210-786.000.
l"c&r^ ^- \f"'^^' C» 2M-IW.O0O.
'■°"'1^77-!S8.S?'•^'»«^'^
L. Apparatus for controlling and re
'*'TJ* M37.376. a. 83486.000
p^ , , - -.---,-r,». a. 361-213.000. »"*• 4.437 323 ri n^-VTiTSST^ "^ ^•' **^ ^'
'Carroll. Willi... n. b.-i... ... . .^
Fannaitdia Carte Elba S.p.A: oee-
FMC Corporation: «„—
tel: *;*°**A; *'*3«.0«9. CI. 423-624.000.
423ni2.00a ' '^**^ ****« D., 4.438.0Mt CL
annaitdia Carte Elba S.p.A: See- utHwll^ 15^ f "»«• '''«'«^ N. B.. to Ld»rato4« d'Eti>d« m h.
ftaw«W AnderKm W; and Foley. Mark P.. 4.437.371. Q.
FoUmer. William C: See—
Caere. Csaba; and FoUmer. William C. 4.437 34a a 7i.i ii imn
lAeroapace ft Communic«ior??Lrii2i?7? "• ^*-' '•«».
^^^ps5*s=..- :^^^^M^^
^r^^liJoCcnS!^.^S^ -«ermin«ibn and meaiiS- ^^J^Hl^S^ I^^S.'SLVS'idiiStaS'SSL
FBC Lifflitad: See— Ammons. Edward A.. 4.438.049 CL iAiui im
Ferguson. Gerald D.: See- '^^T*^ P""**? to Commiiartora ranis' i^li^ .
vioer. jou w.. and P«v J«h- k« ^ ^« «. Oidar; Wiartamami ^ter; OfdL Ute; and SehSarVlaJJ;
• "'**" ^-^ "«* ''"H" '«*» M.. 4^438,428. Q. 34O.52I.00a
1040 0.0.-_52
4,43l/»3, CL 264-23.000
PI 12
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
Fofsyth Dental Infinnary for Children:
Taubman. Martin A.; and Smith. Daniel J.. 4,438,20a CI.
43S-193.000.
Fortin. Paul; Michand. Paul; and Pemicka. Martin, to Poudrier Frere
Ltee. Control tyiteni for cage supported by articulated boom.
4.437.S43. a. 182-2.000.
Fory, Werner, Martin. Henry; and Piiaiotas, Georg. to Oba-Geigy
Corporation. Oxime derivativet for protecting plant cropa. 4,437,879,
a. 71.96.000.
Foaeoo Trading A.O.: See—
Dnnkelmann, Dietger; Jaunich, Helmut; and SchifEuth, Joaef,
4.438,315, a. 37^88.000.
Foahee, William R., to Best Lock Corporation. Knob retainer blocker
•o^nh^ni^ 4,437,693, Q. 292-3310a).
Foster, Kenneth J., to Econ Incorporated. Thermal insulatioo structure
for windows. 4.437 J77, Q. 3^2O2.00a
Foster Manufacturing Company: See-
Cruse, Lee R. 4,437,647, Q. 231-149.900.
Fox. Hugh M.; and SutdifTe, Peter H. Output processing system for a
dig^ dectionic musical instrument 4,438,302, Q. 364-718.000.
Fon>. Steven R.: See-
Willis, Frederick O.; Radtke, Richard R; Ellison. Joseph; Fozo,
Steven R; and Kern. Olenn A.. 4,438.497, Q. 364-431.030.
FracakMsi. Roland N.; Greenhouse, Walter V. V.; and Buchanan.
Michael S.. to Wm. T. Burnett it Co., Inc. Polyurethane foam-filled
foam resistant to combustion and method of producing same.
4,438,220, a. 521-55.000.
FracakMSi, Roland N.; Greenhouse. Walter V. V.; and Buchanan,
Michael S., to Wm. T. Burnett ft Co., Inc. Pdyurethane foam-filled
foams and method of producing same. 4,438,221, Q. 521-55.000.
Fraliah. Mark R, to Ingenoll Equipment Co., Inc. Detachable hinge
assembly. 4,437,5297C1. 180^.00C.
Fram Corporation: See— _. . ^
Hutchins, Charles K.; Thornton. Donald L; and Peyton. Richard
H., 4,437,986, Q. 210-130.00a
Frama AG: See—
Haug. Werner, 4,437,405, Q. 101-349.000.
Frank. Wolfram: See—
Phrmaiin, Qakar; Raschack. Manfred; Gries, Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; Lehmann. Hans D.; Friedrich. Ludwig; WuK)ermann.
Di^ Zimmermann. Frank; Sdtz. Werner, Treiber, Hans J.;
Dengel, Ferdinand; Frank. Wolfiam; Kurbjuweit. HansOeorg;
andMueUer, Claus D.. 4,438,131, Q. 424-278.000.
FranRJca Mfg. Inc.: See— , . _
Rica, Albert F.; Hay, Lloyd F.; Heron, John IL; Webber, John R;
and Rechtsteiner, Steven A. 4,437,315, Q. 62-63.000.
Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Forderung der angewandten Forschung
e V • See
Rkckc. Wolfgang D., 4,438,336, Q. 250-398.000.
Freeman Chemical Corporation: See—
Nothnagel, Joseph L., 4,438,072, Q. 422-133.000.
Freeman Industries, Inc.: See-
Freeman. Jonathan P., 4,437,957, CI. 204-147.000.
Freeman, Jonathan P., to Freeman Industries, Inc. Cathodic or anodic
protection system and method for indraendently protecting different
regions of a structure. 4,437,957, CI. 204-147.000.
Frentzel, Richard L., to Celotex Corporation. The. Metal catalyzed
preparation of polyoxyalkylene surfactants for phenolic foam stabili-
zatira. 4,438.018, Q. 252-356.000.
Frerichs, Udo: See—
Seitz. Hans; Rach. Heinz-Dieter, Pieper, Henner; and Freruhs,
Udo, 4,437,503, Q. 152-209.00R.
Freymond. Pierre, to Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik Oerlikon-Buhrle AG.
Spin-stabilized sabot orojectile for overcoming a heterogeneous
resistance. 4,437,409, Q. 102-364.000.
Frick Company: See—
Inmm, Walter B., 4,437,813, Q. 417-53.000.
FrickTRaymond: See—
Schwartz. Jeremy; and Frick. Raymond. 4.437,822, Q.
418-122.000.
Frick, Richard H.: See—
Si^ Wayne C; and Frick. Richard H., 4,437,860, G. 604-385.000.
Fried. Krupp Gesellachaft mit beschrankter Haftung: See—
Arens, Egidius; Hampe, Christoph; Karlowsky, Ingo; Meyersieck.
Manfred; Schwarz, Hans D.; Anding, Norbert; and Leisterer,
Reinhard. 4,438.438, Q. 343-451.000.
Friedrich, Ludwig: See-
Ehrmann. Oskar; Raschack. Manfred; Gries, Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; Lehmann, Hans D.; Friedrich, Ludwig; Wuppermann.
Dirk; Zimmermann, Frank; Seitz, Werner; Treiber, Hans J.;
Dengel, Ferdinand; Frank. Wolfram; Kurbjuweit, Hans-Georg;
andMueUer, Oaus D., 4.438,131, Q. 424-278.000.
Friedrich, Ralph S.: See— _
Magarian, Gerald M.; and Friedrich. Ralph S.. 4.437,616, CI.
24^7.02a
Friedrich Wilh. Schwing GmbH: See—
Metzelder, Wolfgang, 4,437,817, Q. 417-507.000.
Friachen, Franz. Mmod of producing sheathed cables and/or trans-
ducers and a device for carrying out this method. 4,437,914, CI.
136-S4.00a
Frohberger, Paul-Ernst: See—
Hofanwood. Graham; Frohberger, Paul-Ernst; Brandes, Wilhebn;
and Paul Volker, 4,438,122. CL 424-263.000.
Fnini, Dennis L.: See —
Newtoo. Charles L.; and Fuini. Dennis L., 4^437,312, CI.
6O448.00a
Fuji Electric Company, Ltd.: See—
Shimatani, Michiiro; and Kazama, ToyoU. 4,438.188, CL
43O-128.00a
Fuji Photo Fihn Co., Ltd.: See—
Kitaiima. Masaa, Seshimoto, Osamu; Kubotera, Kikno; and
Yamaguchi. Akira. 4,437,970. CL 204412.00a
Satomura. Masato. 4,438,243, CL 326-286.000.
Tabei. Maaatoahi. 4,438,433. CL 338-44.000.
Teraoka, Masaaori; Komaki, Takao; and Matsumoto, Se^i.
4.438.333. Q. 230-327.200.
Umemura. Shizuo; Matsuf^ji. AkiUro; Aonuma, Maaashi;
Kitamoto, Tatsi^i; and Miyatsuka. lUihne. 4.437,882, Q. 73-
0.S0R.
Fujii. Tokuo: See—
Gaino, Mitsunori; lijima. Ikuo; Nishimoto, Shigeru; Dceda. Kui-
chiro; and Fujii. Tokuo. 4,438.035, Q. 260-239.30B.
Fvyimori, Yoshitugu; Takabori. Yasuo; Sakano, Hiuimr, and Ito, Akito-
shi. to Sumitomo Naugatuck Co., Ltd.; and Honda Motor Co.. Ltd.
Thermo^astic composition. 4,438.229, Q. 524-109.000.
Fi^jinanii, Shosaku:See—
Ishii. Yoshiaki; Kume, Tsutomu; Ando. Naoyoshi; and Piyinami,
Shosaku. 4,437,416, Q. 110-245.000.
Fujisawa. Haruhiko: See—
Kamei, Hideaki; Yamanaka. Kazuhiko; Fiyisawa, Hamhiko; and
Oda, Shinichiro, 4,438,468, Q. 360-92.000.
Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See—
Takaya, Takao; Takasugi. Hisaahi; Murata. Mauyoshi; and Yoshi-
oka. Akiteni. 4,438,113, Q. 424-246.000.
Ueda, Ikuo; Matsuo, Maaaaki; Satoh. Susumu; and Watanabe.
Takao, 4,438,126, O. 424-272.000.
Fujita, Fumio: See—
Murase, Ichiki; Fujita, Fumio; Ohnishi. Toshihiro; and Tamura,
Toshifkmii. 4,438^62, Q. 53643.000.
Fujita, Takeshi: See—
Kawamatsu, Yutaka; and Fujita. Takeshi, 4.438.141, Q.
424-248.510.
Fujitsu Limited: See—
Miura, Kenichi, 4,438,427. a. 340-347.0DD.
Oshild, Mitsumaaa; and Kawakami, Susumu, 4,438,471, C
360-125.000.
Fuiiu, Takamitsu; Ogino, Makoto; Kariya, Michio; and Ichimura.
Takeo, to Nippon Kogaku K.K. Implants of biologicaUy active glass
or glass ceramic containing titania. 4,437,192, CI. 3-1.900.
Fukagawa, Yasuo: See—
Kubo, KaUuro; Fukagawa, Yasuo; and Ishikura, TomoyuU,
4,438,201, a. 435-221000.
Fukao, Masiuni: See—
Suzukamo, Gohfii; Tamura. Mitsuhisa; and Fukao, Masami,
4,438,286, Q. 568-840.000.
Fukui. Tomonori: See—
Eguchi. Osamu; and Fukui. Tomonori. 4,437,391, Q. 98-2.010.
Fukui, Yutaka; and Kashimura. Tetouo, to Hitachi, Ltd. Cobalt base
alloy. 4,437,913, CL 148408.000.
Fukuoka, Tatsuhiko: See—
Nozue, Shigehiro; Fukuoka, Tattuhiko; and Sugiura, Hideaki.
4,437,215, CI. 29-149.50R.
Fukuroi, Takeo, to Yoshida Kogyo K.K. Bridge top stop for shde
fasteners. 4,437.210, Q. 24435.000.
Fukushima. Nobuo; Kitamura. Shuji; Nakae, Kiyohiko; Ogawa,
Tadatoshi; Kotani, Kozo; and Hosono. Hidekazu, to Sumitomo
Chrmvrfi^ Company, Limited. Low density copdymer compointion
of two ethylene-a-olefin copolymers. 4.438,238, O. 525-240.000.
Funik, Gary L., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Control of a catalytic
crackina unit 4,437,977, Q. 208-113.000.
FuruichirKatsushi: See— . „, .
Kawakubo, Kazuo; Furuichi, Katsushi; Namduta. Kiyokam;
Tanaka, Hidetoshi; Tohyama. Yashikuni; Kasamura. Toshirou;
Aoki. Tomohiro; and Honma. Toshio. 4.437,756, CL 3S3-14.00R.
Furukawa, Mitsuhiki; Miyahara. Michito; Kitahira. Takaahi; Misumi,
Kiyohito; Shiroyama, Masaharu; and Wada, Toahiaki, to Nippon
Tungsten Co., Ltd.; and Sumitomo Special Metab Co., Ltd. MametK
hoidslider matoial and method for producing the same. 4,438,213,
a. 501-92.000.
Furukawa. Takaahi; and Endo, Michio, to Nippon Steel Corporation.
Method for producing two-|riiMe hot rolled steel sheet having high
* strength and low yield ratio. 4,437,903, Q. 148-12.00F.
FuscoTJohn A., deceased: See—
Headley, James E. R; Limburg, William R.; Nordmeyer. Robert
A.; and Smith, Jay, IH. 4.4377738. CL 353.26.00R
Fushida, Akiia; and Kato, Yoshiaki, to Mita Industrial Co. Ltd. Photo-
sensitive composition for electrophotography with chloron^>h-
thoquinones. 4,438,187, Q. 430-81.000.
Futaba Denki Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kawai. KdicC, 4,437,397, Q. 99-533.000.
Futamoto, Maaaaki: See —
Hosoki, Shigeyuki; Futamoto, Maaaaki; Kawabe, Ushio; IsUtani,
Tohru; and Tamura, Hiliimi, 4,438.371, CL 315-111.810.
Gaida, Wolfram: See— „. „ ^.
Stable, Hehnut; Koppe, Herbert; Kummer, Werner, Stockhraa,
Klaus; Gaida, Wolfrain; and Hoefke. Wolfgang, 4,438,118, Q.
424-251.000.
Gaino, Mitsunori; Ujima, Dmo; Nishimoto. Shiaeni; Ikeda, Knchuo;
and Fuiii. Tokuo. to Tanabe Setyakn Ca. Ltd. Method of prepanag
benzodiazepine derivatives. 4.438.033, CL 260-239.3(S.
Oalamboa, Gaza; Simonidesf, VOmoa; Snkely, Istvan; Ivnuca, Jooef,
Kekeai. Krisztina; Kovacs. Qtbor, Stadler, latvan; Kocmoczy. Peter,
MA.CH2a.9M LISTOFPAraNTCES
ai«»«*««»ones. 4.438,27< a. 349-38>3oO. ^»*«'»«c»«t)tic Oeashi-Ryoku Daiko Co.. Ltd.- See-
jM;^??^4i»-onR;a.You..R^C.. oiSltr"' "'"""" ""^ "" -^•^^-
AntibadiesTi,S,iuS)Sic2i^r!S^^ ^^^^^^S^t^SS^S^SS:^^^
Oaasto. Otto: See- ^ ^' «^U2.XR. j,^ Bdwttd; and Oeratv Rnh«t i aa*»,^ ^
O^roffoU), Prank, to Avial
olS^&i^^^^ .,.37,373. a. 2
oariS^sssirrLi!''''**' °- ^'°-«««»-
^S-SSSJ S;; Sii2S"of^SSSl?L'^ °*!acr* »«^ o^
M37!33r&^3-37!9S^ "•«'^*>" «• • •«*«* of an article.
°^^Fl*:«^JS^ciS,:^£^^^^ A,, to Owen.
»ffi25?52r^s?'"*^ ^*sr •-* '^ ^
lS^^w^^^°»»^ For«*Sg mbH See-
^?<3;Sg? ^'^' """^ «d^»lJ wfc. 4.437.993,
Oewrluchaft Eisenhutte WestfUia: See-
Stolteftns, Wilhdm. 4,437,708, 0^299-81 000.
oJ|t«SrcWi.5Sr* °~* ^ «w«. Vow, """^^^ >: - oiBoc Eii^,. 4,«rn,. a
^D«2RSL^^~ ' Oipelec: See—
»^5J3jf D., ^ s«p™^ Riel^d P.. 4.43M39. a OMi^ti^o
260429.300.
ISS.SS^K.. 4.438.319, Q. 375-1.000.
^y^^M^^^r^ ^-^ «- S'^vasan, Nalla.
oiSaoi.Sr'- '^■•' "^ ^oJ"""^ Robert J., 4.438.138.
H«jden.^ Jdt, D., J,.; and Komnanpf, William P., 4,438,396. Q.
Hw*ber|er, Doran D., 4,437,323, Q. 68-23 700
Jenkmi, -ftomas E.. 4,437,713 Q 312-348 OM'
teJ^/ • ^*^^i' a. 324.161.000 ^^•
^^0^!^^,^^^^^^' CI. 323444.000.
jSI^SoO "" *•••«* Lee, Garhnd O., 4,438.234. Q.
Ros«quist. NUes R, 4,438,233. Q. 328-176.000 «*f™. "««« M..
i, — ' r?r~»'~ *^-t %*j',J54, a. 89-37 oqa
oJilldE^SSI^if^i:*^^^^^ ci 3,lSioo.
aenml Equipment Manufkrtuim: See—
JS?^'^S!li^t5«'^".a.on/)oa
Botteghi, Carloi' Oladiali, Serafbo G M»«.k.».4 ^
OlaxoSSJ-lSrli!^*'^^^ ^^ "^
SSK?i.S^4Xi5S8r ^ - Wall^ ChristopHar J..
"mSsoI^I^ "-' "^ ^"«' ^^^- v.. 4.438.046. a
to. 4,437.7ScL3g32ioor^ *" a ringle haw sp«*t,photoi»,.
Oliemeroth, G«)rr S«»—
„J>S3r<?Si.5SSr^ 0«. - CWIer. Volkmar.
tS-STT; •** ™" Aktiearaellschafl Milling tool for fonn«.
IS?r26.*"a."SS8:o(g~^ "- '^«^^^JSSi
428-113.000^^ ^"*" «».«»»Uag same. 4,438.166. Q.
°"s^is^&£^ '^ "»«-■ B~to. w«»
O«»ojji F^ CorporatioB: Sii>- .w«. - .^
0*bel. Mark B^ and LafaKin. r.....-^ B .
426-379.000 «, „«„
"•■S»!M|c«>««ve Corporatioo: See- Ooetchius. RonaldT ,»*-
4oJ20l!ooa «Pl«ibb ribtaa cvtridga. 4,437,779. a
PI 14
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
Ooguat, Pial, to Mootm Rado &A. Timepiece. M37.770, CL
Ooineni, Andre M.: See—
P^hnrtMK-^. Panl W^ and OoineMi, Andre M., 4.437,301. Q.
S7-2S9.00a
Gold- and SOber-Scheklemtah Obeniein Franz Renchaner See—
Sou. Jnoven; SdiHter. WUbetan; and Wegner, Wilhdm,
4.437.212. CL 24.498.00a
Goldberg. Jorgen. Method and device for the performance of a nipport-
mg Amctioa in a pawagr 4,437.276. 0. S2-12S.S0a
Golde, David W.; and Qoan, 9iMey G.. to Univenity of Cahfomia.
The Regents of the. Unique T-lymphocyte Une and prodncti derived
tbeicfiom. 4.438.032, Q. 260-1 llOOR.
GoUaiein, Joel; and Abrevaya, Albert, to Aquarimn Pharmaceuticala.
lac Animal litter. 4.437.429. CL 119-1.000.
Gohbtein. Seth; and Jones, Robert, to United States of America, Health
and Honan Services. Method and apparatns for trsvernig blood
vessels. 4,437,837. a 604-33.000.
Goazalez, Mkd: S«r—
Baidina, Joan; and Gonzalez, Mikd, 4.437,479, d. 134-68.000.
Goodman. Robert B.. to United Technologies Corporation. Check
valve. 4.437.483. CL 137-22a000.
Goodyear Tire * Robber Company. The: See—
Appleby. Panl E.; and Brinkley. Max D.. 4,437,913, CL 136-126.000.
D%locky. Richard M., 4,438,289. Q. 383-827.000.
Gorman. Richard M. PtaO gain twist ratchet rifling. 4,437,231. Q.
42-78.000.
GoRis, Ratner; HibbeL Josef; Geriiardos, Ubich; and Scheve, Hemnch,
to Kancna GmbH; Rohrchemi AG; and Rohrkdile AG. Plant with
a reactor container, particalarly for the gasification of fossil ftiels.
4,437.864, Q. 48-62.dML
Gosso, Giancarlo: See—
Stabile, Nicola, Motta, Raimondo; and Gosso, Giancarlo,
4,438,276, CL 360-13.000.
Goto, HinAazu: See—
Sawada, Takeshi; Yoneda, Ko; SUnmi. Akin; Goto, Hirokazu; and
Abiko, Shnzo, 4,438,470. Q. 360-113.000.
Goto, Toknjtt: See— .
Sando, Yoshikazn; Goto, Tokuju; Tanaka. Itsuo; Iihidoshiro. Hiro-
ihi; and Minakata. Matsoo. 4.437.324. Q. 68-3.00E.
Gottlieb. Norman: See—
WiOianis. Albert V.. 4.437.318. Q. 166-248.000.
Oottkl, Brian: See— __
Soper. Douglas C; and Gould. Brian. 4.437.494. CL 138-97.000.
GrBafl'RG:Sw—
Dorpmnnd. WilH. 4.437.211, CL 24-287.000.
GndeL Gerhard: See-
Dorr, Wolfgang; GradeL Gerhard; and Peehs, Martin. 4.438.030.
CL 264-0.3007
Graham, Neil B.. to National Research Development Corporation.
Hydiogeb. 4.438.238, a. 328-361.000.
Gniff, L. B.; and Laity. John L.. to Shell Oil Company. Antiknock
additive compositions snd unleaded gasoline containing same.
4.437.436. CL 123-l.OOA.
Gram Research k Development Co.: See—
Mayne, Sherman T., 4.437,999, Q. 210-748.000.
Granges Metallverken Aktiebolag: See—
Jonsaon. Kari G., 4,437,216, CL 29-137.30A.
Grapho Metrooic Mess- und Regehechnik GmbH * Co. KG: See—
^^ Bnrkhaidt; and Preuss. Alfred. 4,437,407, Q. 101-409.000.
Graser, Earl J., to Manvilk Service Corp. Beverage fMckage and
blank with improved locking featnrea. 4,437.606, CL
1.000.
Gray, Charles C: See— _
De Yoong, Simon A.; and Gray, Charles C. 4.43743a CL
18O-73.00a
Graziani. Gabriele: See—
Nardi, Dante; Taiana, Alberto; Motta, Gianni; Carmlani, Pietro;
and Graziani. Gabriele. 4.438,133. CL 424-300.000.
Graenberg, MitcheU H. Valve respiiatar device. 4,437.461. CL
128-203.24a
Greenhouse, Walter V. V.: See—
FrKaloasi. Roland N.; Greeahonse, Walter V. V.; and Buchanan.
Michael S., 4,438,22a CL 321-33.00a
Fracalossi. Roland N.; Greenhouse, Walter V. V.; and Buchanan,
Michael S.. 4,438.221, CL 321-33.000.
Gregory, Oran A. Method and uparatns for dismounting trunnion
beuinp. 4.437.22a CL 29-426.300.
Greiner, Harry hL, to MJLN. Roland Dmckmaichinen Aktieagesell-
achaft. System fbr adjusting printing plates mounted on plate cylin-
den. 4,437,403, O. 101-248.000.
Grdl. Ute:See—
Banke. Karl-Heinz; Hering, Elisabeth; LobeL WUfried; Pollack.
Dieter; Wiedemann. Gunter, Grd. Ute; and Schuler, Ingo,
4,438,033, CL 264-23.000.
GfcatmaBtt. Haaa, to Allied Corporatiaa. Motor having insniationless
anwtare ^ir""-**'^ 4,437,23a CL 29-397.00a
Grew. Edwvd L.; and Wiboo. Nigel D. V.. to Glaxo Group Limited.
Qgalenary ammoohmi lahs. 4,438>M6. a 260-301.130.
Griss. Jdaef: See—
EhnMM. Oritar; RaBch«:k. Manfred; Gries, Jose^
lto|£ i^hwMiH,, Haaa D.; Friedrich, Lndwig; Wi
DM; ZtamerBHB. Fmk; Seitz. WerMr. iVdber. Hans J.;
DeaaeL rmihaiiil. Frank. Wottni; KHMuwdt, Haas<3eorg;
aBdlteiler. Oaas D.. 4,438.131. CL 424-278Xi0a
P.; and Roae, John B.,
GiifDu. Brian P.:
CogsweU, Frederic N.; Griffin, Brian
4,438,236, CL 323-163.00a
Griffin, Freddie, Jr.: See—
Svatek, Katherine H.; WOson. David A.; and Griffin. Freddie. Jr..
4.438,04a CL 26(M39.0aL
Griffith. Richard M.; and Shannski, Henry, to General Tire A Rubber
Company. The. In-moU coating method. 4.438,062. Q. 264-233.000.
Grimsley, R Leroy; and Gawel, Len J., to Conoco Inc. Pyramidal
offthore structure. 4,437,794, Q. 403-224.000.
Grinde, James E., to Yamaha HatsudoU Kabushiki Kaisha. Snow
vehicle. 4,437,334, Q. 180-190.000.
Grt^iler, Gerhard; Ganster, Ott», and Recker. Klaus, to Bayer Aktien-
gesdlschaft Suspensions of isocyanato ureas in isocyanate prepoly-
men. a process for their production snd their use in the production of
hig^ molecular-weight polyurethane fdastics. 4.438.23a CI-
328-66.000.
Grdlier. Jean-Francois; and AUec. Joaiane, to Sodete Anonyme dite:
L'OreaL New cosmetic compositions for hair or akin conditioning,
and the apfriication thereof. 4,438,093, CI. 424-70.000.
Grot. Walter G.: See-
Bissot. Thomas C; Grot, Walter G.; and Reanick. Paul R.
4.437.931, a. 204-98.000.
Grove Valve and Regulator Company: See—
Bianchi, Giuaeppe, 4,437,486, Q. 137-313.000.
Grubb, Lawrence B.: See-
Simpson, Danny E.; Williams. David M.; Chase, Richard A.; and
Grubb, Uwnnce B., 4,437,668, Q. 273-136.000.
Oruber, Pfeter, Schmid, Jochen; Lechner, Horst; and Bauer, Eckhart, to
Dr. Kari Thomae GmbR Bromhezine delayed-release pharmaceuti-
cal form. 4.438,091, Q. 424-21.000.
Grundken, Dieter: See-
Redder, Manfred; Linke, Hors^ Grundken, Dieter; and Temme,
Hehnut, 4,437.364, Q. 198-834.000.
Grynkewich, Gregory W., to Olin Corporation. Phosphorylated and
thiophoairiiorylated poly(oxyalkylated) hydrazines and selected
addncts and their use as corroaion inhibitori. 4,438,013, Q.
232-146.000.
GTE Laboratories Incorporated: See—
Cogan. Adrian L, 4,437,923, CL 136^3.000.
GTE Products Corporation: See-
Hope, Lawrence L.; and Davey, Ernest A., 4,437,966. Q.
204-298.000.
Gueret, Jean-Louis R, to "L'Oreal". Make of unit conmrising a con-
tainer and an apfriicator closing the container. 4,437,477, Q.
132-88.300.
Guhne, Wieland. to Vorwerk * Co. Interholding GmbH. Vacuum
cleaner housing. 4,437,204, CL 13-323.000.
Ouillaume, Paul; and Karinthi. Pierre, to L'air Liquide. Societe Ano-
nyme Pour L'etude et L'en>loitation des Prooedes Georges Claude.
Methods of and apparatus for treating waste products. 4.437.418. CI.
110-246.000.
Guillon, Michel; Mondet, Jean; Papant(»iou, Christos; and Vanden-
boasche, Oaudine, to Societe Anonyme dite: L'OreaL Salts of add
dyes and copolymers havii^ tertiary amine ftmrtions. process for
preparing laid salts and mweiq> cosmetic compositions containing
them. 4i438.14a CI- 424-61.000.
Guimond, Roy A.: See— __ _
GuUikaen, John E.; Guimond. Roy A.; Daly, Charles F.; and
Hamflton. William R. 4,438.483. CL 36M83.00a
Gulf Canada Limited: See^
Johnson, Herbert S., 4.437,706, CL 299-7.000.
Gulf Research ADevdopment Company: See—
HaWb, Mohammad Vf.; and Pretzer, Wayne R., 4,438,02a Cl-
232-l62.00a
Gulhksen, J<dm E.; Guimond. Roy A.; Daly, Charies F.; and Hamilton,
William R, to Kodiler Manufictnring Co. Utility handhBnp and
chargmg component means therefor. 4,438.483. CL 36M83.000.
Gnziec Frank S.. Jr.. to TUokol Corporatioa 4-Dime-
thylaminopyridiniuffl chlorochromate. 4.438.269. CL 346-9.000.
Gyugyi. Laszlo. to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Static VAR genera-
li^ frw «,«««wi— i«w Kn^ fOTJiipiHi—tifi of mlMyBchfoiioua rffsnnance.
4.438.386. Q. 323-210.000.
H A K Computer Corporstioo: See—
StromTAIan R. 4.438.306, a 364-90a000.
Habib, Mohammad M.; and Pretzer, Wayne R., to Gulf Research *
Devdopment Company. Catalyst snttaUe for prqmring aldehydes.
4,438,0200.:
Kari G.; and Naab,
Manfred.
23M62.00a
HaMch, Dieter: See —
Boberg. Michad; Habich. Dieter. Metzger.
Panr4.438.114, CL 424-248.310
Hack. Joachim: See —
Koester. Eberimrd; Hack. Joacfahn; and Steuerwald,
4,438,462. CL 360-2.000
Hackenberg. Hubert- See— _ ..
Fagrismann. Dieter, Hackenberg. Hubert; l^eaiman,V^^WH'
ner. Kari; and Zobd. Sicyfried, 4,437.731. CL 3S4-214XnO
Haeck. Paul J., to Household MannftwHiring Inc. Fhnd shear conpMng
apparatna. 4.437.334. a 192-38.00B.
Haga. Kyosnke: 5er
Nakamura. KcacU; Hap. Kyosuke; and Mori. Yotaka, 4,437.332.
CL 180-142.000
Hague Intenatiaaal: &»-
LaOaye. Panl G.; BtekHe. John W.; and Penty. Robert A,.
4,^7417. CL 29-IS7.40O
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
"^OO?*'*''^'"* ^ Countertop mini-garbage can. 4.437.575. CI. 220-
" bij: ?4?7°fci'°3-S. ''''""°" "^^ '"'"«="'" "- —
Haissig, Manfred: See—
Hain'tl"'s?' !!!*"= ^ "*'"'«• '^""fred, 4.437.509. CI. 164-454.000
354-il7O00*"' ^" dimensional camera system. 4.437.745. CI.
Halcon SD Group. Inc.. The: See—
Bhise. Vijay S.; and Hoch. Robert. 4.437.938. CI. 203-14 000
H.iJ: D • r^A^ I* '"'^ "°^*'' ^°^^' '♦.'♦37.939. CI. 203.14.000!
M38.295I C°. hSa.'''"'^"'"' '°"'^°' '^"^'''°" -PP"""*
Haley. Paul H., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Ultra-high speed pro-
rg"4r45a^75^''cTr6T^"is.^'''«* ^°^ ''^°^*^'"« -gii poKi^h.
" Cm"'588 oST ^■' '° ^"""°" ^'"='"'^ ^ Ce'''"8 P*ncl. 4.437.287.
"*Jl"r«''*f "^ '.""^ i**^"' "^""^ ^ ■'•• '° Societe Nationale d'Etude et
?)f.^? ?"'^'°"r'*! ^°''"" d'Aviation. S.N.E.C.M.A. Device for
eU"M37.7g.S ^To^' ''' '""»' --~^ °^ - '-•»>«
Hallett, Peter: See—
"^Slni. a.'=42T2^.S!S"' "''''' "^ WaJlis. Christopher J..
Collmgton. Eric W; Hallett. Peter; Wallis. Christopher J.; and
Bradshaw, John. 4.438.112, CI. 424-244.000.
"te%?7.6?2. a"fi"r7.5S'' '"'"""" '''°^«="^' *""P ^- P-^-
Hamada. Fumio, to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co.. Ltd. Silver halide
43^505000'°^"''*"'' P*'°'°*«"*"'^« material. 4.438.194. CI.
Hamamatsu Corporation: See
Hamano, Kiyoshi: See
^Mto7j.':.si;2"""cr5e^i^^^^^ ^°^'°= '""• ^•-^'•
"ar4:4T5.°6T4"ci;S8'9"S'°"'' "'''^^ "^""^^ """'^ -"
" 20J.223 oSo"^^* Emergency fire and smoke safety kit. 4,437.568. CI.
Hambrecht. Juergen: See
Brandstetter. Franr; Hambrecht. Juergen; Jung. Rudolf H.; and
Lmdenschmidt. Gerhard. 4.438.237. CI. 525-183.000
"r4Y|'35l:cf73-?6T8,o'^"""^"' '=°'"*"" ^''"« "PP""-
Hamilton. Roland M.: See—
"^"182^0000"°'** ^' ""^ """'''°"' Ro'-nd M.. 4.437.544. CI.
Hamilton, William H.: See—
Gulliksen. John E.; Guimond. Roy A.; Daly. Charles F. and
Hamilton. William H.. 4.438.483. CI. 362-183 000.
nammann. Ingeborg: See —
Lwitzsch, Reinhard; Marhold, Albrecht; Behrenz, Wolfgang; and
Hammann, Ingeborg. 4.438.275. CI. 549-434.000 » »• "
Hammond. William R Signal responsive automatic control for audio
equipment. 4.438.527, CI. 381-107.000.
Hampe. Christoph: See—
'^Ml^f^ii'*'^i."'"P'^^''"?i°P*" Karlowsky. Ingo; Meyersieck.
Manfred; Schwarz, Hans D.; Anding, Norbert; and Uisterer.
* Remhard, 4,438.438, CI. 343-451.000. "=»icrcr.
Hamprecht. Gerhard: See—
Acker. Rolf.D.eter;Ro88y Phillip A.; Hamprecht. Gerhard; and
Wuerzer. Bruno. 4,437.878. CI. 71-90.000.
Hands. David, to Clayton Environmental Consultants, Inc. Apparatus
73-12000 ««best<M fiber release potential. 4.437.333/ CI.
Handy, Roland J.: See—
Tandon. Jagdish C^; Kadekodi, Narayan K.; Ibrahim. Abd-EI-Fat-
S-?iiooo *"'' "'" *"** ^'°""*'' ■''"" ^•' ^•'♦^^•'♦". CI.
Hansen. Glen D.: See—
^'^l'^?' '^°y** ^■' ""* Hansen. Glen D.. 4.437.637. CI. 248-
I03.OOA.
Hansen. Peter: See—
^T<f/',^i'!i^ Marlies; and Hansen, Peter. 4.438.308. CI.
303-122.000.
Hansen. Svenn S.: See—
^'^l^A\f^ SS!'^' S"""" S- **^ Pedersen. Emit L.. 4,438.100.
Cl. 424-104.000.
Haque. Yusuf A.; Saletore. Vikram; and Schuler. Jeffrey A., to Ameri-
can Microsystems, Incorporated. Monolithic programmable gain-
integrator suge. 4.438.354. CI. 307-493.000. H'"""^'^ 8""
Hara, Hideki: See-
Miyamoto. Akira; Shimizu. Senzo; Harada, Maaahiro; AJ«ro.
Tamotu; and Hara. Hideki. 4.438.257, CI. 528-347.000.
Harada, Hiroshi: See-
Abe. Haruhiko; Harada, Hiroshi; Denda. Masahiko; Nagasawa.
Koichi; and Kono. Yoshio, 4,438.368, CI. 315-39.000.
Harada. Masahiro: See-
Miyamoto. Akira; Shimizu, Senzo; Harada. Maaahiro; Ajiro.
Tamotu; and Hara. Hideki. 4,438,237, CI. 328-347.000.
PI 15
Harada, Tosiharu: See—
'^'I'i'.T.'' ^aT ^^^ ^"♦''"'= ""«»•• Tosiharu; Mukaizaka.
H.rh..ir 5) Im*". Tomoyuki. 4,437,881, CI. 75.0.5AA ^^
"5;7"20^5r33'955^r' ^'''-«-"«»'"^ Screwles. terminal
Harco Corporation: See—
Hargis, Richard A., to Day Mixing Company. Lower support for sinsle
screw mixer. 4,437.767, d. 366-287 000 *
"^^t^^^f ^• !? ^""T |"<*'»»ries Limited. Friction lining wear
indicators for shoe-dnim brakes. 4,437,547. CI. 188-1.1 10
J^^^nZ't"" W'- ^'?^- ■'°*'" ^' •"<» Co'«""- Vernon, to
ir f^^'^ ^"''° ^^'^"- '"'^ 'n'^rupuble microprogram control^
ler for microcomnuter systems. 4,438.492. CI. 364-200,000
c!ll™„v r • •'' • "'"1 Komrumpf, W,ll«m P., to General Electric
^TS:^n^2TSS,''"''^" """ ""' "*'""' '^'^ *'p"y
nil^s gfi^fatTon"!?^- ""'^^ """^'"^ '•'''''^' C' «^-" OX).
^-310*000. ^^ ""* ^'^^^' ^*"*^ ^' ♦''♦38.348. CI.
Harris. Uwis k.; and Burrus. Billie S.. to Combustion Engineerina Inc
?3M40(» '' "'"' "'"'^ '°"'™' •y'*™ i^^SSX" CI.
Harry leuan L.. Knshnakumar, Suppayan M.; Jolly. Walter R. Beck
Martin H ; and Pocock, John F. E,, to Continenti^ Group. Inc..^'
Blow molding apparatus. 4.437.825. CI. 425-145.000
narsco Corporation: See—
DeVore. Robert F.. 4.437.512. CI. 165-122.000.
ul^'.. ?'*' "^ • '° .Merck ft Co.. Inc. Triazolopyrazinaminei
useful as adjuncu to radiation therapy 4,438,266. CI, 544-350000
Hartung. Kuhn ft Co, Maschinenfabrik GmbH: See- '^^'""^
Jung, Richard A., 4,437.936, CI, 201-39 000
Hartung, Michael H.; Rieck, Richard E,; and Tayler, Gerald E to
for S ?""""• Machines Corporation Method and apparatus
for venfjang storage apparatus addressing. 4.438.512. CI. 371.60000
Harvey Hubbell Incorporated: See— '-^wu.
^''sSO.'si'oOo'^'"'""' ^' ""^ ^^*"' ^'' ^•' *'*3«'<08' CI.
Harvey. Kenneth: See—
*^222°f37a»''*'*" ^' ""* ""^^' '^"""''' '♦■♦37.584. CL
Hasegawa, Eiichi; and Yamano. Shoji. to Yamato Scale Company. Ltd
Automatic contmuous weighing machine, 4,437,561, CI. 19^504 000
Hascgawa. Kokichi; and Tokiu, f sugio, to Komori Printing Machinery
mi-3500b0 "PP*™'" for an offset press, 4,437,406, CL
Hashimoto, Shunichi: See-
Nagano. Eiki; Hashimoto. Shunichi; Yoshida. Ryo; Matsumoto,
Hirwhi; and Kamoshiu, Katsuzo. 4,437,877, CI. 71-90 000
Maskin, John R., deceased, to Ball, Larry L., a part interest Portable
map display device. 4.437,739. CI. 353-27.obR
Hata, Shun-ichi: See-
Nagano, Hiroyuki; Takagi, Mitiro; Kubodcra, Noboru; Mauunaga.
Isao; Yamazaki, Tamouu; Nabata, Hiroyuki; Sakai, Kazushig?
and Hata, Shun-ichi, 4.438. 1 1 5. CI. 424-250.000 •^"""««'
Hatton, Hiroyuki: See—
Komori Shigchiro; Sakamaki, Hisashi. Hattori, Hiroyuki; lida.
IS;;,'' cii^sTiSb. ""'"'^ ""* ^''"'^""•' '^""••
Haug Werner, to Frama AG. Apparatus for transferring ink to the ink
plate of a metenng machine, 4,437.405. CI. 101-349 000
Hauser. Karl. Process and apparatus for controlling the cutting feed of
band saw machines. 4.437.367. CI. 83-13.000 » ■«=« 01
Hawryluk^ Raymond; Johnson. Clyde R.; and Maiarky, N. Henri, to
4.437?8S g'"}P*;'y^f ^''fo™*- Ore roasting with recycle of gaKt.
Hay. Lloyd F.: See-
Rica. Albert F.; Hay, Lloyd F.; Heron. John R.; Webber. John R •
and Rechutemer. Steven A.. 4.437.315. CI. 62-63 000
Hayami, Satohiro: See—
Nozawa. Tadao; Yamamoto. Takaaki; Nakayama, Tadaahi; Mauu-
moto, Fumio; and Hayami, Satohiro, 4.437,910, CI. 148-1 12 000
"•>■**"• Tadao; Suzuki, Masahiro; Ozawa, Shigeru; and Takeya!
Yoshiaki. to Hitachi Powdered Metals Co., Ltd. Method of the
*A^ma 75^44^^^ ""'"*** '"°^* '"^ °" ''°" "** "'PP*'-
"•y?^' S'"i?'' ^^ S""*"' Shuichi. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabu-
Hayashi. Nobuyuki: See—
'tJ?M9j a^3i«8'!*SS* '^'•"•*'«*^ "^ "-^"^ '''^^
Hayashi, Shoichiro: See—
Hayashi, Yoahihiro: See—
Moriya. Shigeru; Yoshida. Akio; Hayashi, Yoshihiro; Kubota.
Tauushi; and Tsuge. Hirothi, 4,437.683, CI. 280-804.000
1040 O.G.— 53
PI 16
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
Hayes, Thomas E., to Johnson Service Company. Mechanical draft
controller with vent damper. 4,437,454, CI. 126-293.000.
Haynes, Charles W , to Joy Manufacturing Company. Dual camming
action jaw assembly and power tong. 4,437,363. CI. 81-57.180.
Hazeltine Corporation: See—
Burgmyer, Patricia L., 4,438,437, CI. 343-770.000.
Headley, James E., deceased: See —
Headley, James E. R.; Limburg, William R.; Nordmeyer, Robert
A.; and Smith, Jay, III, 4,437,738, CI. 353-26.00R.
Headley, James E. R.; Limburg. William R.; Nordmeyer, Robert A
and Smith, Jay, III, to Yoder, Henry Frank, III; Yoder. Donald
Wilhs, Arthur B., deceased, Title Insurance and Trust Company!
executor; Butler, Dean S., deceased; Fusco, John A., deceased;
Adler, Peter K., deceased; and Headley, James E., deceased, a part
interest. Optical rollfiche reader. 4,437,738, CI. 353-26.00R.
Heberlein, George J. Self-locking truck sideboard lift and dump mecha-
nism. 4,437,705, CI. 298-l.OOR.
Heberlein Hispano SA: See—
Vignon, Louis, 4,437,300. CI. 57-74.000.
Heck, Ronald M.: See—
Dettling, Joseph C; Carr, William F.; Heck, Ronald M.; and Chen,
James M., 4,438,082. CI. 423-235 000.
Hedges, Charles V.: See—
Mark, Victor; and Hedges, Charles V.. 4,438,241, CI. 525-444.000.
Hedrick, Paul L., Jr., to Societe d'AssisUnce Technique pour Produiu
Nestle S.A. Foaming creamer and method of making same. 4,438,147.
CI. 426-570.000.
Heider, Merle J., to Jet Co.. Inc. Wire roller. 4.437.622. CI. 242-86.50R.
Heinrich, Hans J.; and Schutt. Dieter, to International Business Ma-
chines Corporation. Interrupt pre-processor with dynamic allocation
of priority levels to requesu queued in an associative CAM.
4,438,489, CI. 364-200.000.
Heinrich, Horst; Herrmann, Gunter R.; and Schmidt, Manfred, to
International Business Machines Corporation. Separator plate for
type band printer. 4.437,401. CI. 101-93,140.
Heinzle, Otto, to Schalungsverleih Heinzle AG. Bracing unit for con-
crete formwork. 4,437,640, CI. 249-20.000.
Held, Kurt. Driving device for effecting linear motion. 4,438,360, CI.
310-83.000.
Helene Curtis Industries, Inc.: Sec-
Preston, John C. 4,438,096, CI. 424-70.000.
Heifer, Joel N.; and King. Phillip W., to American Home Products
Corporation. Apparatus for monitoring fetal heartbeat and the like
4.437,467, CI. 128-642.000.
Helfman, Robert. Truss construction. 4,437,273, CI. 52-93.000.
Helinski, Edward F., to International Business Machines Corporation.
Serial ring actuator. 4,438,419, CI. 335-261.000.
Helmer, John C: See—
Abu-Shumays, Ahmad; Helmer, John C; and Luchetti, Stephen J..
4.437.812. CI. 417-53.000.
Henkel Corporation: See—
Peerman, Dwight, 4,438,225, CI. 521-172.000.
Henkel Kommanditgcselischaft auf Aktien: See—
Drosdziok, Hermann; Geke, Jurgen; and Germscheid, Hans G.,
4.437.898. CI. 148-6. 15R.
Kiewert. Eva; and Disch. Karlheinz. 4.438.016, CI. 252-174.250
Kuhhng. Dieter; Huppertzl Josef; Krings, Peter; and Reuter, Her-
bert, 4,438,012, CI. 252-131.000.
Hennemann, Lothar: See—
Kollmann, Hans-Josef; Hennemann, Lothar; and Hohorst, Wolf-
gang. 4,437,721, CI. 339-97.00P.
Hensler, John M.: See—
Settineri. William J.; and Hensler, John M., 4,438,242, CI.
Heraeus Quarzschmelze GmbH: See—
Treber, Norbert, 4,437,727, CI. 350-96.300.
Herbert. Everett H.: See—
Volk, Kurt E.. Jr.; Herbert. Everett H.; and Stenner, John W..
4.437,852, CI. 493-216.000.
Herbert Kannegiesser GmbH & Co.: See—
Wiebesiek, Wilhelm. 4.437,247, CI. 38-143.000.
Herbertz, Toni: See—
Reinehr, Ulrich; Herbertz, Toni; and Jungverdorben. Hermann-
Josef, 4,438,060. CI. 264-206.000.
Herd, Sigrid R.: See—
Aboaf, Joseph A.; Klokholm, Erik; and Herd, Sigrid R., 4.438,066,
CI. 420-435.000.
Heredy, Laszlo A.; and Skowronski. Raymund P.. to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation. Molten salt hydrotreatment process. 4.437.980,
CI. 208-235.000.
Hering, Elisabeth: See—
Banke, Karl-Heinz; Hering, Elisabeth; Lobel, Wilfried; Pollack.
Dieter; Wiedemann, Gunter; Grell, Ute; and Schuler, Inao,
4,438,053, CI. 264-25.000. *
Heron, John R.: See—
Rica. Albert F.; Hay. Lloyd F.; Heron, John R.; Webber, John R.;
and Rechuteiner, Steven A., 4,437,315, CI. 62-63.000.
Herrmann, Gunter R.: See—
Heinrich, Horst; Herrmann. Gunter R.; and Schmidt, Manfred.
4,437.401. CI. 101-93.140.
Henen, Rene M. J.: See—
Halin, Yves R.; and Hersen. Rene M. J., 4.437.783, Q. 403-27.000.
Hershberger. Doran D.. to General Electric Company. Laundry ma-
chine. 4.437.325. CI. 68-23.700.
Hertel. Karl R., to Pyro-Gen Corp. Incinerator. 4,437,419, CI.
1 10-259.000.
Herweh. John E.. to Armstrong World Industries. Inc. Polyurethane
polymers comprising macrocyclic crown ethers in the polymer
backbone. 4,438,251, CI. 528-73.000.
Herwig, Walter: See—
Geissler, Ulrich; and Herwig, Walter, 4,438,189, CI. 430-280.000.
Hettche, Albert: See—
0«ler, Dieter; Ziegler, Walter; Daeuble, Manfred; Dietsche. Wol-
fram; Hettche. Albert; and Weiss. Stefan. 4,438.008. CI. 252-
56.00R.
Hetterich, Hermann: See—
Olschewski. Armin; Brandenstein, Manfred; Walter, Lothar Horl-
mg, Peter; Hetterich, Hermann; and Kunkel, Heinrich, 4,437.214.
CI. 29-I49.5DP.
Olschewski. Armin; Hetterich, Hermann; and Horling, Peter.
4.437.330. CI. 72-358.000. *
Heveran. John E.: See—
Fahrenholtz. Kenneth E.; and Heveran. John E., 4,438,207, CI.
436-543.000.
Hewlett-Packard Company: See—
Casale, Michael A., 4,437,489, CI. 137-487.500.
Cloutier. Frank L.; Low, Robert N.; and McClelland, Paul H..
4,438,191, CI. 430-324.000.
Hibbel, Josef: See—
Gorris, Rainer; Hibbel, Josef; Gerhardus. Ulrich; and Scheve,
Heinrich, 4,437,864, CI. 48-62.00R.
Hicks. John M.; and Engel. Joseph C. to North American Philips
Electric Corp. UniUry light source comprising compact HID lamp
and incandescent ballast filament. 4.438,369, CI. 315-49 000
Hill. Ira D.: See—
"-MTSia a.T52'9Y5iS.' '" °= "^ "-""""'"• ^«»'"' ^-
Hilti Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Gloor. Peter, 4,437,526, CI. 175-346.000.
Hinds. James J.; Hoeflich. John C; and Kolodziej, George C. to Na-
tional Can Corporation. Container defect monitoring system
4,437.985. CI. 209-538.000. * '
Hinn. Werner; and Knight. Mark B.. to RCA Corporation. Dual-stand-
ard SECAM/PAL color TV receiver with automatic control of
operating mode. 4.438.451, CI. 358-11.000.
Hino. Masatoshi: See —
Okada. Yoshio; Terauchi. Takashi; Naoki. Makoto; and Hino,
Masatoshi. 4.438.021. CI. 502-341.000.
Hino. Seiichi: See—
Ohto. Takayuki; Yanaga. Yukio; and Hino, Seiichi. 4.438,256. CI.
528-188.000.
Hinojos. Paul R. Retractable automobile sideguard. 4.437.697. CI
293-118.000.
Hinze. Jay W.: See-
Gaul, David J.; Hinze, Jay W.; and Perkins, Richard A., 4,438,518.
CI. 373-39.000.
Hiraga, Masahani: See—
Terauchi, Kiyoshi; and Hiraga, Masaharu, 4,437,820, Q.
Hirano, Hirofumi, to Canon Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha. Printing mecha-
nism. 4,437,776, CI. 400-142.000.
Hirano, Takashi: See—
Omae, Michinobu; and Hirano, Takashi, 4,437.527, CI. 177-25.000.
Hiraoka, Tetsuo; and Kobayashi. Takeo, to Sankyo Company Limited.
Esters of 7-sulfenyliminocephem-4.carboxylic acids. 4,438.265. CI.
544-29.000.
Hirayama. Masashi: See—
Tamura. Hisashi; Ito, Ichizo; Hirayama, Masashi; and Ando, Tet-
suo, 4,437.350, CI. 73-861.240.
Hirooka. Susumu: See—
Masuyama. Masaru; Hirooka, Susumu; and Yamaoka. Nobutateu.
4.438.214. CI. 501-136.000.
Hirose, Kikuji: See—
Saito. Takao; Moriu. Jyun-ichi; Hirose. Kikuji; and Kato. Akitosi,
4.437.947. CI. 204.35.00R.
Hirota, Eiichi: See—
Sakakima, Hiroshi; Satomi, Mitsuo; Senno, Harufumi; and Hirota.
Eiichi, 4,437,912, CI. 148-403.000.
Hitachi Cable Ltd.: See—
Kawai, Kazumichi; Kaneko, Yasuo; Abe, Keizo; Matsuo, Hideo;
Kishi, Yoshinori; Miyake. Yasuhiko; and MaUuyama. Yoshihiro.
4,438,155, CI. 427-49.000.
Hitachi Chemical Company. Ltd.: See—
Ishimaru. Toshiaki; Tsukada. Katsushige; and Hayashi, Nobuyuki.
4.438.190, CI. 430-281.000.
Hitachi, Ltd.: See-
As^, Scteuro, 4.437,321. CI. 62-324.200.
Fukui, Yutaka; and Kashimura. TeUuo. 4.437,913. CI. 148-408.000.
Hosoki. Shigeyuki; Futamoto, Masaaki; Kawabe. Ushio; Ishitani.
Tohru; and Tamura, Hifumi. 4,438,371, CI. 315-111.810.
lUgaki, Tsuguo, 4,438.528. CI. 455-182.000.
Kamata. Yasuji. 4.438,366. CI. 315-1.000.
Kawamura, Sinichiro. 4,438,297. CI. 179-117.000.
Kikkawa. Ryozo; and Takeshima. Masaki, 4,437,933, CI. 159-
17.00R.
Kobayashi, Mamoru; Ishige, Kami; Sasaki, Hideaki; Tani. Mit-
sukiyo; and Kawakami. Yashuhiko. 4.437.603. CI. 228-4.500.
Saito, Yukio; Nogita. Shunsuke; Watanabe. Syoji; and Baba. Kenji.
4.437.992. CI. 210-603.000.
Sato, Hiroyasu; Yamamoto, Kazuaki; and AoUu, Hiroaki.
4,438,385. CI. 322-28.000.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
Sudo. Ryoichi; Shoji, Fusaji; Watanabe, Takeshi; Suzuki, Kenkichi-
and Ooue. Michio, 4,437,731. CI. 350-340.000. ">«"«•"".
Usuda, Koji. 4.438.449. CI. 357-41.000.
4,4S^'^73,S^3T5-3l;.Si"^ "^'^'^'^ "^ ^°'"""' ^*-«»"-
^W-^MOTo"''*'*"'™' ""^ Tsuneno, Hiroshi, 4,437,228. CI.
Hitachi Maxell, Ltd.: See—
Kamei, Hideaki; Yamanaka. Kazuhiko; Fujisawa, Haruhiko and
Oda. Shimchiro, 4.438.468, CI. 360-92.000
Hitachi Powdered Metals Co., Ltd. See—
" v^^^t '^l*i"i°Vo^r"Ji:' "^^^^hiro; Ozawa, Shigeru; and Takeya.
Yoshiaki, 4,437,890, CI. 75-244 000
"Ki m"*'"**-!-'^"!''' ""'«"us; Eigl. Franz: and Langer. Werner, to
Karl Mayer Textilmaschinen fabrik GmbH. Warp knitting machine
M3\T2tcrs4.sr'" ""' ^"""'"'^ p^"^*^'"" --"«--•
Ho, Pang T.: See—
HfJa^RobM^'s^-^ ' ""'^ "°' '"'"^ ^' *'*^*'*"' CI 330-289.000,
nu-**' Yr^^ ! • ""'^ "°^*'' ^°^rx, 4,437,938, CI. 203-14.000
H^uH^kY^'^ S; and Hoch, Robert, 4,437.939, CI. 203-14.000.
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Geissler, Ulrich; and Herwig, Walter, 4,438,189. CI. 430-280000
Idstein. Hermann, 4,437,754, CI. 355-3 OTR
Moraw, Roland, 4,438,321, CI. 219-216.000
Rieck, Hans-Peter, 4,438,081, CI. 423-300.000.
HoefVe, Wolfgang: See—
Stahle, Helmut; Koppe, Herbert; Kummer, Werner; Stockhaus,
A^f^^iPji^^' ^o'f"'"; and Hoeflce, Wolfgang, 4,438.118, CI
424-251.000.
Hoeflich, John C: See—
"M^7,9"8rcr 2(SS'i"c«b.'°'" ""■' ""' ''°'°'"'' °~^«^ ^ •
Hoeke Engineering, N.V.: See—
Van der Velden, Jan H.. 4.438.055. CI. 264-44.000
M57ri43.'?ri25!u^ffi"''«'^"""'' ^° ^'"=' '"J«=''°" ''^'''^^
M"7."572"crj?,.?6:oS. '""• ''°^'"^'' '"'' ^° ^"^'^ ^^'«'"-
Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.: See—
^'iS'is'Ixio'^*'""^'*' Ei and Heveran, John E.. 4,438.207. Cl.^
Hofgen, Gunter; and Ecklundt. Hinrich, to International Standard
SmIoo ""°"" "^^"'^"y ""King system. 4,438,435, CI.
Hogg, Walter R., to Coulter Electronics, Inc Tandem sensing zones for
324-7TfoO* °'"°"* "''" '" '''"''^'' ^""'y"^ 4,438,390, CI.
Hohorst, Wolfgang: See—
Kollmann, Hans-Josef; Hennemann, Lothar; and Hohorst, Wolf-
gang, 4,437,721, CI. 339-97.0OP.
Holden. M. James, to Mobil Oil Corporation. Method and apparatus for
oTrnis^oH a,'2°6S!.£;'" ^'"' "°"-"'' *" ' ^^"'^'^^°^"^"
"4!?3"7'!949,'a,^2b^55'S^^^ ^™"*''' Electrolysis of tin complexes,
Hollister, Kenneth R,: See—
' cl'"438.2f8:'a?6(?2S: '"""''''' "" ' ''"'^ ■^""«- '''''''"'
Holmes-Hally Industries: See—
Halopoff, David, 4,437,692, CI, 292-57,000,
Ho^mwood, Graham; Frohberger, Paul-Ernst; Brandes, Wilhelm; and
Paul. Volker. to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Combating fungi with
I-phenoxy-2-pyndinyl-alkanols, 4,438.122, CI, 424-263 000
4.437!6IJ2!'CL°24^9"I75,S'"''""^' '^' ^""' *^*'"" ^°' """"P ^''"'•
"4.437!259"a,\3'^io55oo',' '"'' ""'^ '"°*'"" °^ '™'''""* '""'"■
Homola. Andrew M,; and Lorenz. Max R.. to International Business
Machines a)rporation. Mono-particle magnetic dispersion in organic
polymers for magnetic recording. 4,438, 1 56, CI. 427-57 000
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
"'^l<2; i^"°' ^^'^- ^*'"*°' ""** ^"'''' M«*afumi. 4,437.304. CI.
"'S^-ufi XS?"°' '^'*'''' ^""f"'"'; and Shimizu. Yozi. 4.437.305. CI.
"'ri°«t.->^f ^ Iwashita. Kanau; and Kimura. Hikaru. 4,437,306,
Honda Motor Co., Ltd,: See—
Fujimori. Yoshitugu; Takabori. Yasuo; Sakano. Hajiroe; and Ito
Akitoshi, 4,438,229, CI, 524-109,000,
Honeycomb Panels Patents Association Inc.: See—
^'■y{'^^^ ^ ^'^ *"** Chevanne. Sylvain V, L,. 4.437.281. CI,
32-309, 100,
Honeywell Inc: See —
Erickson. Roger D,. 4.438.442. CI. 346-153. 100.
Honeywell Information Systems Inc.: See—
C'J^ng^ David E.; and Stanley. Philip E.. 4.438.493. CI.
Mclver. Chandler H.. 4,437.235. CI. 29-840.000.
Wilder, Richard P.. Jr., 4.438.490. CI. 364-200.000.
PI 17
Honma, Toshio: See—
'^St;^'u^'f"°.= ^"'."'''*'*' '^"*"»''': Namekau, Kiyokazu;
InkfroSl °**"'7S*'^"""'' Yashikuni; Kasamura. T«h,rou
Aoki, lomohiro; and Honma. Toshio. 4,437,756, CI 355-14 OOR
Hope. Uwrcnce L.; and Davey, Ernest A , to GTE Pr;)ducts Conwra-
tion. Sputtenng cathode apparatus, 4,437.966. CI. 204-298 000
Hopfcr, Samuel, to General Microwave Corporation. Digital program-
mable attenuator. 4,438,415, CI. 333-81.00A program
Hopmann, Mark E.: See—
^'l^iKOx"" ^' ■'' • '"'' ""P""""' Mark E., 4,437,522, a.
Hoppner, Eberhard: See—
^324-22o'oOo" ""PP""' ^'^^^'ard; and KastI, Hans. 4.438.399. CI.
Hori, Fumihisa to Alps Electric Co., Ltd. Printer having plural type
wheel assembly. 4,437.777. CI. 400-154 200. '^
Horn, Masami: See—
° 400*12*4000'''' "°"'* '^'"'"'' ""'^ '**'"• "idekazu. 4.437.775. CI.
Horling, Peter: See—
OIschewski/Armin; Brandenstein. Manfred; Walter. Lothar Horl-
cf '29^149 SD?"''^' "'""'""• ""'* '^""''c'- Heinrich, 4,437.214,
°4"i\'7^'o;clT358^^ "*=""'""^ '"'' »-""«• •'«'"•
Horvath, Karoly: See—
Galambos Gaza; Simonidesz, Vilmos; Szekely. Istvan; Ivanics.
Jozsef; Kekesi, Krisztina; Kovacs. Gabor; Stadler, Istvan Kor-
H«c«i,'"'^L^' V • ""'^ "orvath. Karoly, 4,438,132, CI. 424-285.000.
Mr.,orr«°'i m"^'"°'°' ^'"'°' ""'^ °**''''««=- Katsunori. to Nissan
nf InL.?^ *i. D'agnostic system for detecting fault in fuel system
73-M9 00A ^'«='^onic fuel injection system. 4,437,342, CI.
Hosier, Brad W.: 5*^—
Budde David L.; Carson, David G.; Cornish, Anthony L.; Hosier.
Cl.i<^200 axT"' ^ • '"'* ''"'"°"' ^"^« ^•' *'*38.494:
Hosoe, Kazuya: See—
Sakai, Shinji; Shinoda, Nobuhiko; Kinoshiu, Takao; and Hosoe
Kazuya. 4,437,743, CI. 354-402.000. '
Hosoi, Takuji: See—
Minami. Ryohci; Okamura, Shozo; Sunami. Yoshihiko; Hosoi.
Takuji; and Kanou. Takuo, 4,437.974. CI. 208-10 000
Hosokawa, Mikio: See—
„ Ozaki; Nobuo; and Hosokawa. Mikio. 4.437.357, CI. 74-475 000
H^ki. Shigeyuki; FuUmoto, Masaaki; Kawabe, Ushio; Ishiuni
Tohru; and Tamura, Hifumi, to Hitachi, Ltd. Source of charged
particles beam. 4,438,371, CI. 315-111.810 cnargea
Hosono, Hidekazu: See—
Fukushima Nobuo; Kitamura, Shuji; Nakae. Kiyohiko; Ogawa,
7,. ^'J'«^'^°'""'' ^°^°' ""'I Hosono. Hidekazu. 4.438.238. CI.
325-240.000.
Hotta, Hiroshi: See—
'*S7'86/^c'r44-"oOR "''°**''' '"'^ ^ishimura. Yoshichika.
Houck. John C- See—
•^'^Jf]',^^ Charles D.; and Houck. John C. 4.438.104. CI.
Household Manufacturing Inc.: See—
Haetk. Paul J.. 4.437.554. CI. 192-58.00B.
Hovsepians, Vigen M., to Vivar, Incorporated Modular furniture with
removable outer fabric. 4,437.704, CI. 297-440 000
Howarth. Thomas T.: See—
Ponsford, Roger J.; and Howarth, Thomas T., 4,438,101, CI
424-114.000.
Howe, Robert K.; and Lee. Len F.. to Monsanto Company. 2.4-Disub-
7*1"^^™^' """'^"^'''^ "^''** '"'^ derivatives. 4.437.875, CI.
Howe. Robert K.; and Ue, Len F.. to Monsanto Company. 2,4-Disub-
V, Jl^fS;^' "°'""*^"''*°*y''*^ *^''** and derivatives. 4,437.876. CI.
71-90.000.
"^!u°!J'r'^"'''"°" ^ • ""'^ ^°^^y- "^ark P.. to Dayco Corporation.
Method for cutting polymeric belt body. 4.437.371. CI. 83-54 000
Howes. John G^ B.. to Smith and Nephew Associated Companies
■r«?"i^vJ«^ °** stenhzing soft contact lens. 4.438.011, CI.
232-106.000.
Hoyne Industries. Inc.: See—
Righetti. Gaetano. 4.437.268, CI. 51-327.000.
HRI, Inc.: See—
Huibers, Derk T. A.; and Kydd, Paul H., 4,437,973, CI. 208-10.000
Hruda, Robert M., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Electrical shorting
Mss.soTa ''mn TOR* " '"' '° °'*" *"' '° '''°^ "'''"* **^"*'''
Hsu, Edward H.: See—
u J,""' H"!^'^??' ""* "*"• Edward H., 4,438.000. CI. 210-786.000.
Hubele. Adolf; Eckhardt, Wolfgang; and Riebli, Peter, to Ciba-Oeigy
4%TS: Ci. 4t;'2^S^. '^'^'""" ""* "" " microbicdes.
"I'^fifl miV? «,''?i;?l?i*'*" Company. Uvatory cleansing block.
*,*j8,U13, CI. 232-174.240.
Huber. Willi; and Metz, Manfred, to J. Waaner AG. Reversible quick
change nozzle holder for spray guns. 4,437,610, CI. 239-1 19.000
Huck Manufacturing Company: Sm—
Smith, Walter J., 4.437.805, CI. 411-361.000.
PI 18
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
HufTnun, Kenneth R.: See—
CaMcy, Donald J.; and HufTman, Kenneth R., 4,438,253. CI.
528-86.000.
Hughes Aircraft Company: See—
Landis. Abraham L., 4,438.273, CI. 549-303.000.
Hugh, Tony E.: See—
Erickson, Bruce W.; and Hugh, Tony E., 4,438,029. CI. 260-
1 I2.50R.
Huguenin, Rene: See-
Bauer, Wilfried; Cardinaux, Francois; Huguenin. Rene; Pless.
Janos; and Sandrin. Edmond, 4,438,103, cT. 424-177.000.
Huibers. Derk T. A; and Kydd, Paul H., to HRI, Inc. Coal hydrogena-
tion process with direct coal feed and improved residuum conversion.
4,437,973, CI. 208-10.000.
Hull, Evan B. Belt buckle. 4,437.598, CI. 224-163.000.
Hung, Chi-Wen: See—
Imai, Tamotsu; and Hung, Chi-Wen, 4,438,288, CI. 585-379.000.
Hung, Frederic N. B.: See—
Foissac, Yves; and Hung, Frederic N. B., 4,437,288, CI. 52-637.000.
Hunkapillcr, Michael W.: See—
Ganfield, David J.; Hunkapiller, Michael W.; Knight, Ernest, Jr.;
and Korant, Bruce D., 4,438,030. CI. 260-1 12.50R.
Hunter, Byron A., to Uniroyal, Inc. Blowing agent composition con-
taining zinc formate and metal salt activator. 4,438,223, CI.
521-92.000.
Huppertzl Josef: See—
Kuhling. Dieter; Huppertzl Josef; Krings, Peter; and Reuter, Her-
bert, 4,438,012, CI. 252-131.000.
Hurcum, Ivan B., to Westinghouse Brake and Signal Company Limited.
Information display apparatus. 4,438,432, CI. 340-825.350.
Hurst, Jerry C, to Western Electric Co., Inc. Tools for handling mag-
netic articles. 4,437,362, CI. 81-43.000.
Husa, Emmett O. Mechanism for tightening and reinforcing the joint of
a folding structure. 4,437,480, CI. 135-74.000.
Husky Injection Molding Systems Ltd.: Sec-
Brown, Paul. 4,438,065, CI. 264-335.000.
Hutchins, Charles K.; Thornton, Donald I.; and Peyton, Richard H., to
Fram Corporation. Separating device and cartridge therefor.
4,437,986, CI. 210-130.000.
Huyck Corporation: See—
Thompson, Charles E., 4,437,496, CI. 139-383.00A.
I.M.A.-Industria Macchine Automatiche-S.p.A.: See—
Romagnoli, Andrea, 4,437,294, CI. 53-553.000.
lannelli, Frank M., to Tannetics, Inc. Beverage dispensins device.
4,437,319, CI. 62-138.000. o t~ e
Ibrahim, Abd-EI-Fatuh A.: See—
Tandon, Jagdish C; Kadekodi, Narayan K.; Ibrahim, Abd-El-Fat-
tah A.; Handy, Roland J.; and StofTel, James C, 4,438.457, CI.
358-213.000.
Ibrahim, Fayez F., to Tyler Refrigeration Corporation. Head pressure
maintenance for gas defrost. 4,437,317, CI. 62-81.000.
Ichidate, Minoru: See —
Kubo, Toshihiko; Ichidate, Minoru; Kawai, Toshiyuki; Yonehara,
Sadao; Koiwai, Yoshihisa; and Endo, Kazuhiko, 4,437,883, CI.
75-0. 50C.
Umino, Masahide; Tamura, Eijiro; Karasuno, Isamu; Ichidate.
Minoru; and Kubo, Toshihiko, 4.437,891, CI. 75-251.000.
Ichimura, Takeo: See—
Fujiu, Takamiteu; Ogino, Makoto; Kariya, Michio; and Ichimura.
Takeo, 4,437, 1 92, CI. 3- 1 .900.
Ichter, William J.: See—
Cribben, James T.; and Ichter, William J., 4,437,284, CI. 52-456.000.
ICI Americas Inc.: See —
Rutledge, Thomas F., 4,438,037, CI. 260-385.000.
Idstein, Hermann, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Apparatus for trans-
ferring toner images. 4,437,754, CI. 355-3.0TR.
IHC Holland N.V.: See—
Verboom, Pieter, 4,437,244, CI. 37-63.000.
lida, Toshihide: See—
Komori, Shigehiro; Sakamaki, Hisashi; Hattori. Hiroyuki; lida.
Toshihide; Miyamoto. Koichi; and Umezawa. Kazumi.
4.437.757, CI. 355-15.000.
lijima, Ikuo: See—
Gaino, Mitsunori; lijima, Ikuo; Nishimoto, Shigeni; Ikeda, Kui-
chiro; and Fujii, Tokuo, 4.438,035. CI. 260-239. 30B.
limura, Yoshitaka: .^—
Yoshieda. Keiichi; and limura, Yoshitaka. 4,437,233, CI. 29-768.000
Iizuka, Yutaka, to Nippon Kogaku K.K. Lenses capable of close-up
photography. 4,437,734, CI. 350-454.000.
Ikari, Kazuo, to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Adjustable diopter type
finder optical system. 4,437,750, CI. 354-155.000.
Ikeda, Kuichiro: See—
Gaino, Mittunori; lijima, Ikuo; Nishimoto, Shigeru; Ikeda, Kui-
chiro; and Fujii, Tokuo, 4,438,035, CI. 26O-239.30B.
Ikemori, Keiji, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Photo metering device for
single lens reflex camera. 4.437.746. CI. 354-479.000.
Ikenoya. Yasuo; Ueda. Shuso; and Araki, Masafumi, to Honda Giken
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Structure for controlling operations of
secondary air supply means and throttle opener in internal combus-
tion engine for motorcycles. 4,437,304, CI. 60-290.000.
Ikenoya, Yasuo; Araki, Masafumi; and Shimizu, Yozi. to Honda Giken
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Exhaust gas cleaning system for internal
combustion engines. 4.437,305, CI. 60-293.000.
Ikenoya, Yaauo; Iwashita, Kanau; and Kimura, Hikaru, to Honda Giken
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Exhaust gas cleaning device of internal
combustion engine. 4,437,306. CI. 60-293.000.
Illinois Tool Works Inc.: See-
Peterson, Francis C, 4,437,784, CI. 403-408.000.
Imai, TamoUu, to UOP Inc. Preparation of alcohols. 4,438.287. CI.
568-909.000.
Imai. Tamotsu; and Hung. Chi-Wen. to UOP Inc. Dehydrogenation of
hydrocarbons with a halogen contacting step. 4.438,288. CI.
585-379.000.
Imai, Tomoyuki: See —
Mishima, Akio; Okuda, Yoshiro; Harada, Tosiharu; Mukaizaka,
Akira; and Imai, Tomoyuki, 4,437,881, CI. 75-0.5AA.
Imazaike, Mikiharu. Gear. 4,437,356, CI. 74-411.000.
IMC Magnetics Corp.: See—
Manson, Harry G., 4,438,361, CI. 310-90.000.
Immeyer, Friu H.; and Wesche, Michael, to Dr. Immeyer GmbH.
Bird-feeding member. 4,437,432, CI. 119-18.000.
Imperial Chemical Industries Limited: See-
Carroll, William G.; Farley, Peter; and Marklow, Raymond J..
4.438.252. CI. 528-75.000.
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC: See-
Cogswell, Frederic N.; Griffin, Brian P.; and Rose. John B..
4.438.236. CI. 525-165.000.
In Situ Technology, Inc.: See—
Stoddard. Xerxes T.; Vaseen. Vesper A.; and Terry. Ruel C,
4,437,520, CI. 166-261.000. y. w,
INA Walzlager Schaeffler KG: See—
Speil, Walter, 4,437,439, CI. 123-90.560.
Inagaki, Masaomi: See —
Maruo, Tsunehiro; and Inagaki, Masaomi, 4.438.398, CI.
Ingersoll Equipment Co., Inc.: See—
Frahsh, Mark R., 4,437,529, CI. 180-69.00C.
Ingersoll-Rand Company: See-
Schwartz, Jeremy; and Frick, Raymond, 4,437,822, CI.
418-122.000.
Ingram, Walter B., to Frick Company. Gas receiving and transmitting
system. 4,437,813, CI. 417-53.000.
Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated: See—
Inoue, Kiyoshi, 4,437,908, CI. 148-108.000.
Inoue, Kiyoshi, 4.438.312. CI. 219.69.00W.
Inoue. Kiyoshi. to Inouc-Japax Research Incorporated. Method of
treating a magnetic material. 4.437,908, CI. 148-108.000.
Inoue, Kiyoshi, to Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated. Method of and
device for conducting machining current to a wire-electrode tool in
a wire-cutting electroerosion machine. 4,438,312, CI. 219-69.00W.
Institut Elektrosvarki Imeni E.O. Patona: See—
Safonnikov, Anatoly N.; and Antonov, Anatoly V., 4,438,313, CI
219-73.100.
Institut Radiotekhniki I Elektroniki Akadcmii Nauk SSSR: See—
Doev, Vitaly S.; Kotelyansky, losif M.; Kravchenko, Valery B.;
Monosov, Yakov A.; Shakhunov, Valery A.; and Kopylov. Jury
L., 4,438,443, CI. 346-153.100.
Institute of Gas Technology: See—
Sammells, Anthony F.; and St. John, Michael R., 4.437.954, CI.
204-129.000.
Intel Corporation: See —
Budde. David L.; Carson. David G.; Cornish. Anthony L.; Hosier.
Brad W.; Johnson. David B.; and Peterson. Craig B.. 4.438,494.
Cl. 364-200.000.
International Business Machines Corporation: See—
Aboaf, Joseph A.; Klokholm, Enk; and Herd, Sigrid R., 4,438,066,
CI. 420-435.000.
Bischoff, Bernard K.; Patrick, William J.; and Stnidwick. Thomas
H.. 4.437,922. CI. 156-603.000.
Caron. Christopher D.; and Schaefer. Donald W.. 4,437.659. Cl.
271-276.000.
GofT. Willie. Jr.; and Jenkins. William M.. 4.437,779. Cl.
400-208.000.
Hartung. Michael H.; Rieck. Richard E.; and Tayler. Gerald E.,
4.438.512. Cl. 371-60.000.
Heinrich. Hans J.; and Schutt. Dieter. 4.438.489. Cl. 364-200.000.
Heinrich. Horst; Herrmann. Gunter R.; and Schmidt. Manfred,
4.437.401. Cl. 101-93.140.
Helinski. Edward F.. 4,438.419. Cl. 335-261.000.
Homola. Andrew M.; and Lorenz. Max R.. 4.438,156, CI.
427-57.000.
Kemlage. Bernard M.. 4.437.897. Cl. 148-1.500.
Schaller. Karl H.; and Zimmermann. Volker. 4.438.467, a.
360-77.000.
Woodworth. George K.. 4.438.472. Cl. 361-13.000.
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.: See—
Boden, Richard M., 4,437.476, Cl. 131-276.000.
Lindauer, Jerome I.; Hill. Ira D.; and Liberman, Arthur L.,
4.438,010, Cl. 252-91.000.
International Harvester Co.: See-
Rock, Meriin A., 4,437,295, Cl. 56-10.200.
International Monopoly Association: See —
Whang, Kyu B., 4.437,862, Cl. 44^6.000.
International Paper Company: See—
Hambleton. Thomas P.. 4.437.634. Cl. 248-97.000.
International Rectifier Corporation: See-
Fleischer. Kenneth H.. 4.438.356. Cl. 307-571.000.
International Standard Electric Corporation: See—
Hofsen. Gunter; and Ecklundt. Hinrich. 4.438.435, Cl. 343-7.300.
Parfree. Colin S.; and Worthington, Peter, 4,437,729, Cl.
350-96.230.
IsbeU. Joe A. Uwn edging device. 4,437,523, Cl. 172-13.000.
March 20. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
ISCO. Inc.: See—
Allin|ton. Robert W.. 4.438.370. Cl. 315-106.000.
Ishida, Hideaki; Ishikawa, Tomohisa; Yamana, Koji; and Kayahara,
mS?M37378"a. £"?r ''°' "-•' ^'"'""''= """''=•' "»'"'■
Ishidoshiro, Hiroshi: See—
^?£°^X°'*''''*^"' '"'' '»*''do8hiro. Hiroshi. 4.437.200. Cl. 15-
306.00A.
Sando. Yoshikazu; Goto. Tokuju; Tanaka. luuo; Ishidoshiro, Hiro-
shi; and Minakau, Matsuo, 4,437,324, CI. 68-5.00E
Ishipmi, Hideo; and Tohci, Nobuo, to Kabushiki Kaisha Meidensha
Shearing machine. 4,437,372, Cl. 83-320.000
Ishige, Kanji: See—
Kobayashi, Mamoru; Ishige. Kanji; Sasaki, Hideaki; Tani, Mit-
. .... sy^'yo; »"d Kawakami, Yashuhiko, 4.437,603, Cl. 228-4.500
Ishii, Hidekazu: See—
Ochiai, Kuniaki; Horii, Masami; and Ishii, Hidekazu, 4,437,775, Cl
400-124.000.
Ishii. Yoshiaki; Kuroe. Tsutomu; Ando, Naoyoshi; and Fujinami,
Shosaku, to Agency of Industrial Science and Technology. Appara-
tus for pyrolyzing. 4,437,416, CI. 1 10-245.000.
Ishikawa, Reiji; Saito. Masaki; Mori, Toshio; and Tamura, Hidemasa to
4438 f6o'''ci"427"2f4 MO^ °'" "^'"^ ' ^^^^^ *"" '*'*''''^ '*'^'"
Ishikawa, Takeharu: See—
Tateishi, Junji; Ishikawa, Takeharu; Nakano, Shozaburo; and Ni-
shiyama, Noboru, 4,437,906, Cl. 148-26.000.
Ishikawa, Tomohisa: See—
Ishida, Hideaki; Ishikawa, Tomohisa; Yamana, Koji; and Kayahara
Takehiko, 4,437,378, Cl. 84- 1 . 1 80. "vdy-nara,
Ishikura, Tomoyuki: See—
Ishimaru, Toshiaki; Tsukada, Katsushigc; and Hayashi, Nobuyuki, to
Hiuchi Chemical Company, Ltd. Photosensitive resin composition
containing unsaturated monomers and unsaturated phosphates.
4,438,190. CI. 430-281.000.
IshiUni, Tohru: See—
Hosoki, Shigeyuki; FuUmoto, Masaaki; Kawabe, Ushio; IshiUni,
Tohru; and Tamura, Hifumi, 4,438,371, Cl. 315-111.810.
Ishiyama, Shozo, to Konishirokou Photo Industry Co., Ltd. Wide
magnification-variable range zoom lens system. 4,437,732, Cl.
350-427.000.
Ishizuka, Tetsuo; Hotta. Hiroshi; and Nishimura, Yoshichika, to Dai-
1. I !^J^° S«iy«ku Co.. Ltd. Coal-deashing process. 4.437,861, Cl.
44-I.OOR.
Isomura. Shigenori; Kobayashi. Akio; Kato, Katsushi; Kowada, Ichiro-
and Nishii. Sachio, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd.; and Toyota Jidosha
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Electronically controlled fuel injection
system. 4,437,446, Cl. 123-492.000. ■'
Issa, Darrell E.: See—
Adkins, Joey B., 4,438,426, Cl. 340-64.000.
Itagaki, Tsuguo. to HiUchi, Ltd. Channel selection system for an elec-
tronic tuner. 4,438,528, Cl. 455-182.000.
Itakura, Hideaki: See—
^7r?fl%,^'';2?'""i .'$?™y?' Hiroyoshi; and Itakura, Hideaki,
4,4J6,315, Cl. 2 1 9- 121. OPE.
Itek Corporation: See-
Hardy, John W., 4,438,330, Cl. 250-201.000.
Ito, Akitoshi: See-
Fujimori, Yoshitugu; Takabori, Yasuo; Sakano, Hajime; and Ito,
Akitoshi, 4,438,229, Cl. 524-109.000.
Ito, Ichizo: See—
Tamura, Hisashi; Ito, Ichizo; Hirayama, Masashi; and Ando, Tet-
suo, 4,437,350. Cl. 73-861.240.
Ito, Shinzo; Kato, Tateshi; Noma, Takumi; Sugimoto, Soichiro; and
Toiyama, Seigi, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Apparatus for measurina
an injection amount. 4,437,341, Cl. 73-1 19.00A.
Ito, Susumu: See-
Suzuki, Takashi; and Ito, Susumu, 4,437,740, Cl. 354-476.000
Ito, Yoji: See—
Nojiri, Tadao; Kanemaru, Kenji; Nishikawa. Takayoshi; Matsu-
yama. Masahiro; and Ito. Yoji. 4.438.422. Cl. 34O.52.00F.
Itsubishi Keikinzoku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
AriU. Yoji; and Seo. Yuzo. 4.437.950, Cl. 204-67.000.
Ivanics, Jozsef: See—
Galambos, Gaza; Simonidesz, Vilmos; Szekely, Istvan; Ivanics,
Jozsef; Kekesi, Krisztma; Kovacs, Gabor; Stadler, Istvan; Kor-
moczy, Peter; and Horvath, Karoly, 4,438,132, Cl. 424-285.000.
Iwai. Sakuya: See—
MoTohashi. Kazuo; K^ikawa. Teruo; and Iwai. Sakuya. 4.437.918.
CI. 156-322.000.
Iwamoto. Kenzi; and Omau. Katsuhiro. to Nippon Soken. Inc. Appara-
tus for controlling the fiow of exhaust gas in an internal combustion
engine with a turbocharger and a catalytic converter. 4.437.31 1. Cl.
60-602.000.
Iwamoto. Yoshinao; Suzuki. Shizuo; and Shirasaki. Yuichi. to Kokusai
Denshin Denwa Co.. Ltd. System for detecting a cable buried under
the seabed. 4.438.401. CI. 324-326.000.
Iwuhita. Kanau: See—
^''ci°60^293'ooo '^"*''*^ '^•™'"' ""* '^n*"'*. Hikaru, 4,437.306.
Iwata. Kazuhide: See—
Shibayama. Shigeki; and Iwata. Kazuhide, 4.438,488. Cl.
364-200.000.
PI 19
Iwata, Minoru; Murata, Yukio; and Shibau, Tomoyuki, to Ebara Cor-
poration; and Ebara Densan, Ltd Submersible pump with alternate
pump operation control means. 4,437,81 1, Cl. 417-8 000
Izutsu, Nozomu: See—
Chibata, Ichiro; Sumi, Akihiko; Ohtsuki, Osamu; and Izuuu.
Nozomu, 4,438,044, Cl. 260-501.120.
J Wagner AG: See—
Huber, Willi; and Metz. Manfred, 4,437,610, Cl. 239-1 19 000
Jacobsen, Ronald L.: See—
T4S,0^?c;?52-1i5."obo''*''°''" "" "' ''^''' '^°'»'^
Jacques, Roland; Reppel in. Michel; and Seigneurin, Uurent, to Rhone-
Poulenc Specialites Chimiques. Preparation of aromatic/aliphatic
nitnles. 4,438,042, Cl. 260-465.00B. i-z-iipnaiic
Jagenberg Werke AG; See—
Philipp, Helmut; and Kurth, Wilfried, 4,437,370, Cl. 83-23 000
James River Corporation of Virginia: See-
Morse, Erwin E.. 4,438,263, Cl. 536-56.000.
Tw?.'i^i'JilS!r '''"^ separator construction and method 4,437.988, Cl.
Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd.: See—
^°r?^?'.h^^^^' Akimoto. Masahiro; and Takahashi, Masayoshi,
4,437,465, Cl. 128-340.000.
''"35S538OO0''' ^' ^^ ^"" ^''^*'"* "PParatus. 4,437,736, Cl.
Jatteau, Michel; Ulong, Pierre H.; and Pergrale, Jean, to U.S. Philips
corporation. Gamma camera comprising a localizing scintillation
intensifier. 4,438.334, Cl 250-363.00S.
Jaunich, Helmut: See—
°4"438'5?5"cM7?88 ^'""''^*'' "«'""": ■"'l SchifTarth, Josef,
Jean Walterscheid GmbH: See—
GeisthofT. Hubert, 4,437,553, Cl. 192-46.000
GeisthofT, Hubert, 4,437,782, Cl. 403-13.000.
Jecker, Gilbert, to Rhonc-Poulenc Specialites Chimique*. Preparation
of titanium/aluminum alloys. 4,437,888, Cl. 75-84.400
JefTeries, James C, to Biegert Aviation, Inc. Spray boom apparatus for
??P Vil^LSv"'"""' dispersants to ocean oil spills. 4,437,630, Cl.
244-136.000.
Jefferson, Clinton F., to Engelhard Corporation. Subilization of solar
lilms against hi temperature deactivation. 4,437,455, Cl 126-417 000
Jeng, David K. H., to Kendall Company, The. Sterile package and
method of making. 4,437,567, Cl 206-210.000.
Jenkins, Thomas E., to General Electric Company. Rack supporting
channel and stop. 4,437,715. CI. 312-348.000. Hf~ »
Jenkins, William M.: See—
GofT Willie. Jr.; and Jenkins, William M., 4,437,779, CI
400-208.000. . . ■ wi
Jensen, Bruce A., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Fractional distilla-
tion process control. 4,438,499, CI. 364-501.000.
Jerobec Industries, Inc.; See—
Weglin. Walter. 4.437.924. Cl. 156-651.000.
Jet Co.. Inc.: See—
Heider, Merle J., 4,437,622, Cl. 242-86.50R.
Jidosha Kiki Co., Ltd.: See—
OhU, Ryuji, 4,437,390, Cl 92-84.000
Jinnai, Koichiro; and Ebi, Yutaka, to Ricoh Company, Ltd. Print-dis-
i°r« L^°^/^""*'"* **^^'" ^°^ ""* '"'' J" Pnnt'ng apparatus.
Joachim, Rudolph, to Werner & Pfieiderer. Mixer having two feed
worms defining upper and lower mixing regions with an intermediate
equilibrium zone. 4,437,766, CI. 366-287.000.
Jodon Engineering Associates, Inc.: See-
Wilson, Scott E., 4,437,338, Cl. 73-116.000.
Johannson, Ame, to Svensk Ideutveckling Handelsbolag. Automatic
damper device. 4,437,609, Cl. 236-49.000.
Johansson, Ronny: See—
Anderson, Inge; and Johansson, Ronny, 4,437,285, Cl. 52-481.000.
Johnson, Charles R. Exhaust recycle to carburetor of an internal com-
bustion engine. 4,437,447, Cl. 123-568.000.
Johnson, Clyde R.: See—
Hawryluk, Raymond; Johnson, Clyde R.; and Masarky, N. Henri,
4,437,884, Cl. 75-7.000.
Johnson, David B.: See—
Budde, David L.; Carson. David G.; Cornish, Anthony L.; Hosier,
Brad W.; Johnson, David B.; and Peterson, Craig B., 4,438,494,
Johnson, Delp W. Insert for foldable concrete building construction
with pivot connections, integral lifting bar, and building height
control bar. 4,437,272, CI. 52-64.000.
Johnson, Fred L., Jr., to Texaco Inc. Selective production of monoalka-
nolamines from alkylcne oxides and ammonia over acidic inorganic
caulysts. 4,438,281, CI. 564-477.000. *
Johnson, Herbert S., to Gulf Canada Limited. Hydraulic mining of tar
sands with submerged jet erosion 4,437,706, Cl 299-7 000.
■'°h"*o"jJ*nic« R • 'o Sor, Inc. Fire resutant pressure switch. 4,438.305.
Johnson k Johnson Baby Producu Company: See-
Simpson. Danny E ; Williams, David M.; Chase, Richard A. and
Grubb, Lawrence B., 4,437,668, Cl. 273-156.000.
Johnson, Kenneth M., to Singer Company, The. Drive roll monogram-
mer. 4,437,420, Cl. 112-103.000.
Johnson, Ralph E., to Singer Company, The. Variable pull ofT for
bobbin thread. 4,437,421, Cl. I12-158.a)R.
Johnson Service Company: See-
Hayes. Thomas E.. 4.437.454. Cl. 126-293.000.
PI 20
LIST OF PATENTEES
Jolly. Walter R.: See—
Harry. leuan L.; Krishnakumar. Suppayan M.; Jolly, Walter R
425-145OTo'" " ' '^'^ ^'^°^^' ■'°''" ^ ^' '♦•*3''"5. Ci:
Jonason. Karl G.. to Granges Metallverken Aktiebolag. Method of
Jones, Robert: See—
Goldstein. Seth; and Jones. Robert. 4.437.857. CI. 604-53 000
Jones. Robert L.; and Wilson. Norman H.. to National Research Devel-
opment Corporation. Prostaglandins. 4.438,136, CI. 424-309 000
224o'l9'000"°''' ° Bicycle/wheelchair carrier. 4,437,599, CI.
Josephs. Richard M.: See—
Flannery William E.; Josephs, Richard M.; Stein. Barry F. Wana
1 . T^ng-Chow; and Young. Peter L.. 4.437.227, CI. 29-589.000
Joy Manufactunng Company: See—
Haynes. Charles W.. 4.437.363, CI. 81-57.180.
Joy Robert D to Ford Motor Company. Vortex flow meter frequency
adjustment. 4.437.349. CI. 73-861.220.
Juengel. Richard O.; Begin, John D.; and Khalaf. John, to Valeron
Corporation. The. Telemetry gage system. 4.437.240. CI. 33-I72.00E
Jung. Michel: See —
Bey. Philippe; and Jung. Michel. 4.438.270. CI. 546-243 000
Jung, Richard A to Hartung. Kuhn &. Co. Maschinenfabrik GmbH
Process for utijizmg waste heat and for obtaining water gas during
the cooling of incandescent coke. 4,437.936, CI. 201-39 000
Jung, Rudolf H.: 5ef—
Brandstetter, Franz; Hambrecht. Juergen; Jung. Rudolf H.; and
Lmdenschmidt. Gerhard. 4.438,237. CI. 525-183.000
Jungheinnch Untemehmensuerwaltung KG. Firma See—
iS^/U^V'l'^A !^]irf f ^ Gottfried; Radeloff. Jurgen; and Rust.
Bemd-Hendnk. 4.437.533. CI. 180-168.000.
Jungverdorben. Hermann- Josef: See—
" jS?4!i'3T^"anS2a."' ^""«-'''-'-"- "«™n-
Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho: See—
^°^^r^^',!!^'^°'' '^°"' Wasaharu; and Ou, Hiroshi, 4,437,682, CI.
^ol>-764. 100.
Kabushiki Kaisha Meidensha: See—
V k'*u ?*^'' "J''^' .*"*^ '^°^^^' Nobuo. 4.437,372, CI. 83-320.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai-Rika-Denki-Seisakusho: See—
Monya, Shigeru; Yoshida. Akio; Hayashi. YoshihJro; Kubota,
Tatsushi; and Tsuge. Hiroshi. 4.437.683. CI. 280-804.000
Monya. Shigeru; Yoshida. Akio; Matsunami. Muneharu; Kubota.
msS'ioO*"**' '' *"** Nishimura. Yuji, 4,437,684. CI.
Kabushiki Kaisha Tomoku: See—
Ono, Masayuki. 4.437.850, CI. 493-89.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Toyoda Jidoshokki Seisakusho: See—
Anahara. Meiji; and Omori. Hiroshi. 4.437.302. CI. 57-333 000
^fnT^ M^""*"^^ ^"'' '^"^'"« 'oo'- 4.437.602. CI. 227-147.000.
Kadekodi. Narayan K.: See—
Tandon. Jagdish C ; Kadekodi. Narayan K.; Ibrahim. Abd-El-Fat-
358-?iiS]0 ■' ' ""^ ^'°""''' "'""" ^- *'*38'*"' CI.
'^^37^^? ci.^46S2 000°*^° ^ ' '"*" '^*^*"'' amusement device.
Kajikawa, Teruo: See—
^cT*i56l322 0)0°' '^"J*"'"*'- ''"*''"°' ""^ '^'"' Sakuya, 4,437,918.
Kakimoto. Toshihiko. to Nissan Motor Company. Ltd. Fluid-filled
engine mount device. 4.437.653. CI. 267-140 100
Kakoki Engineering Service Co.. Ltd.: See—
Nagatsuka, Kenichi. 4.437.202. CI. 15-320.000.
Kalbac. John F.. to Delu Dredge and Pump Corporation. Dredge
pump dnve system. 4.437,814. CI. 417-351.000 i^reage
Kamata, Shigeru: See —
Al^hi. Akira; KaUuma. Makoto; Kawamura. Masahani; Kamata.
Shigeru; and Saito. Syuichiro. 4,437.752. CI. 354-289.000.
4T3?3S'^'' 3'?5"'Sf '• ^'' "^''""""^ ^"^ '*"^"« "PP*"'-
"^ sUfnirhil**^' IT'^M '^«f»J^o; Fujisawa, Hanihiko; and Oda,
Kamiya, Kazuhiro: See—
^rl^if v; '"??'"■ ^"^f^^i' Takashi; Kamiya. Kazuhiro; Mori,
Toshihito; Umezawa, Hamao; Umezawa, Sumio; and Tsuchiya,
Tsutomu. 4.438.107. CI. 424-180.000. 'suwniyB.
Kamoshiu. Katsuzo: See—
^*lf^Ki^""A "«1»"«>'°- Shunichi; Yoshida. Ryo; Matsumoto,
Hiroshi; and Kamoshita, Kateuzo. 4.437.877. CI. 71-90 000
Takahashi. Junya; Takemoto. Ichiki; Kamoshita, Katsuzo; Yoshida.
n-nOoSo "*™^°= *"** ^"""<1*' Seizo. 4,437,880, CI.
^JUt. P^"""_ J : »n<t Sarangapani, Srinivasan, to Union Carbide
Corporation. Process for improved activated carbon having an alumi-
num-h^vy metal spinel. 4.438.216, CI. 502-101.000.
Kampe, Wolfgang: See—
?^.»5f ' "vJ^ampe. Wolfgang; Bartsch. Wolfgang; Sponer.
Gttbert; and Roesch. Egon, 4.438, 1 16, CI. 424-250000.
Wwdemann, Fntz; Kampe, Wolfgang; Dietmann, Karl- and
S^ner, Gisbert. 4,438,li8, CI. 42t273.00N '
Kampf, Fntz: See—
P*^.^ ."f?""= I"> y°"«"K Bareuther. Ernst; Kampf,
Fntz; and Bings, Hubert. 4,438.076, CI. 423-30.000
March 20, 1984
Kanegafuchi Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.: See—
MNMobo ^'"°' *"** '^'**''**'' ''■"^♦••''O' 4.'*38.222, CI.
Kaneko, Yasuo: See—
*^l?[i!hi v'!T''''''*'ii!^*"'l''°'J""°= A*^' *^«'«'; Mauuo, Hideo;
M38:i55 cr°4'2'7!49^' ^""'^''°: *"«* Matsuyama. Yoshihiro,
Kanemaru, Kenji: See—
'^vi'ri' "^^^O; '^'"'^'"a™. Ken^i; Nishikawa, Takayoshi; Mauu-
yama. Mwahiro; and Ito, Yoji, 4,438,422, CI. 340-52.00F
Kanou, Takuo: See —
Minami. Ryohei; Okamura, Shozo; Sunami, Yoshihiko; Ho»i,
Takuji; and Kanou. Takuo, 4.437.974, CI. 208-10.000
KanMs Sute University Research Foundation See—
K-nufi^T*".'**"^;,'"'*.."!!;' ^'^"'^ " • '♦■438,000. CI. 210-786.000.
Kaplan. Lester J., to Upjohn Company. The. Analgesic l-oxa-, aza- and
thia-spirocychc compounds. 4.438.130. CI. 424-274 000
Kappe. Bernard W.: See—
^3^2-YooO ' ■''^" "^ • ""* '^'''P*' ^™*"' ^•' 4.437.710. CI.
Karasuno. Isamu: See—
Umino. Masahide; Tamura. Eijiro; Karasuno. Isamu; Ichidate
Mmoni; and Kubo. Toshihiko. 4.437.891, CI. 75-251 000
fioi"^*rl;"'.5 I' '° ^''""'"' Aktiengesellschaft. Pneumatic mail sU-
tion for the delivery, pneumatically decelerated reception and tran^t
of pneumatic dispatch cases. 4.437.797. CI. 406-1 10 000
Kannthi. Pierre: See —
Guillaume. Paul; and Karinthi, Pierre. 4.437.418. CI. 1 10-246 000
Jl^i, """?"'• '° Dr.-Ing. Rudolf Hell G.m.b.H. Control of eleSric
Kariya M^cWa See- **^""'"« P"T°»«' 4.438.374. CI. 315-362.000.
Kaijalainen, William G.. to Neptune Water Meter Company. Com-
a. 73 fe"!?)?""^ "*'*' "^''^ '^^ "°*»°^" characteri»tiE^,437^.
Karl Mayer Textilmaschinen fabrik GmbH: See—
M37°32tS JS-t'cSi'*^"^ ^'«'' ^"^' "^ ^«-' ^*"-'.
Karlowsky, Inpo: See—
'^M?;fSi''Q*L"'''"P*^^*'"?I°P''= Karlowsky. Ingo; Meyersieck.
?rn?^tt'r4?8."cr34?-45t3S)"«' ^"''^^^ ""* ^"--'
Karrena GmbH: See—
%tnri5rM37"82:';:i.^T6'iS'-'*'»' ^'-»'= -^ Scheve.
Karth. Beat: See—
Buri. Hermann; and Karth. Beat. 4.437,292, CI. 53-357 000
Kasahara, Shin-ichi: See —
Tazima. Yoshihisa; Morishima, Masayuki; Okumura. Hiroshi; and
Kasahara. Shin-ichi. 4.438.31 1, CI. 2I9.I0.49R
Kasamura. Toshirou: See—
Kawakubo. Kazuo; Furuichi. Katsushi; NamekaU. Kiyokazu:
Tanaka. Hidetoshi; Tohyama, Yashikuni; Kasamura. Toshirou^
V . Aoki, Tomohiro; and Honma, Toshio, 4,437,756, CI. 355-14 OOR
Kaseta, Robert G., to DaU General Corporation. Stepping motor
excitation circuitry. 4,438,380, CI. 3 1 8-69^ *^ ^
Kashimura, Tetsuo: See —
Fukui. YuUka; and Kwhimura, Tetsuo, 4,437,913, CI. 148-408.000.
KiBhiwa Nono; Monu. Yoshinori; and Suga. Michihani. to Mitsui •
Petrochemical Industnes. Ltd. Process for producing random ethyl-
ene terpolymer. 4.438,243, CI. 526-125.000. ^
Kasiewicz. Allen B., to GK Technologies. Incorporated. Method and
40M56 Oro™^**""* '^'''* '™" '°*^'"* damage. 4.437,789, CI.
Kastl, Hans: See—
^32T22o'roo' "°PP"*'' ^'*'*'"<*: "d Kastl. Hans. 4.438,399. Q.
Katcher, Jay H.: See—
°f2^579 0d(r*'''' ^' *"** Catcher, Jay H.. 4,438,148, CI.
Kato, Akitosi: See—
^*M37947°CI* 20^35 OOr''"'''" ^"°"' ^'"'^'' ""^ ^^' ^'^*°'''
Kato, Katsushi: See—
Isomura, Shigenori; Kobayashi. Akio; Kato, Katsushi; Kowada.
Ichiro; and Nishii, Sachio. 4,437,446, CI. 123-492.000.
w ' u J " r *?' ""'' "^■*"'' ^*"*aru, to Sunley Electric Co., Ltd
ill iSrlnS '»''"ca"n8 an amorphous silicon film. 4,438,154, CI.
4Z7-J9.000.
Kato, Tateshi: See—
Ito, Shinzo; Kato, Tateshi; Noma, Takumi; Sugimoto, Soichiro; and
Toiyama, Seigi, 4,437,341, CI. 73-1 19.00A.
Kato, Yoshiaki: See—
Fushida, Akira; and Kato. Yoshiaki, 4,438, 1 87, CI. 430-8 1 .000.
Katoh, Haruhiko: See—
Takahashi, Junya; Takemoto. Ichiki; Kamoshita, Katsuzo; Yoshida,
7nioMO° "*™'''''°' *"** Sumida, Seizo, 4,437,880, CI.
Katsuma, Makoto: See—
Alajshi, Akira; Katsuma. Makoto; Kawamura. Masahani; Kamata,
Shigenj; and Saito. Syuichiro, 4,437,752, CI. 354-289.000.
a^sSo? WO**'' '° ^"^ Corporation. Active equalizer. 4,438.409.
Katsutoshi, Ando; and Eiichi, Nishiura, to Toray Industries. Inc. Heat
retainmg sheet. 4.438.172, CI. 428-220.000.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
'^*l?8 00?*'**°" " • ^ "^'^"lyne. Inc. Test pin. 4,438.397, d. 324-
Kaufman, Jeffrey L., to Nicholas ProprieUu^ Limited. Preparation of
dihydroxyalumimum sodium carbonate. 4.438,085, CI. 423-419 OOP
Kawabe, Ushio: See —
Hosoki, Shigeyuki; Futamoto. Masaaki; Kawabe. Ushio; Ishitani
Tohru; and Tamura. Hifumi. 4.438.371. CI. 315-1 1 1.810.
Kawai. Hisasi: See—
^ hS'' J*Al",^"l'iv'S!,'*'y,' Sf"^'^°''"""' ■^°'''o: ""l Obayashi.
Hideki. 4.437.345, CI. 73-204.000.
Kawai. Jyoji, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Digiul phase-
shifting circuit. 4.438.487. CI. 363-129 000
Kawai. Kazumichi; Kaneko. Yasuo; Abe, Keizo; Matsuo, Hideo; Kishi.
Yoshinon; Miyake, Yasuhiko; and Matsuyama, Yoshihiro. to Hitachi
ir{!!fonrtrt "•'"""°" °^ composite meul wire. 4,438.155, CI.
Kawai. Keiichi. to Fuuba Denki Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Automatic
pickle injecting apparatus. 4.437.397. CI. 99-533.000.
Kawai. Toshiyuki: See—
Kubo. Toshihiko; Ichidate, Minoru; Kawai, Toshiyuki; Yonehara
„5f?iJ:°'^''' Yo»h'»"»a; and Endo. Kazuhiko. 4.437.883. CI.
Kawakami. Susumu: See—
°*36oil2^0M"""*' ""* *^**«'«n''. Susumu. 4.438.471. CI.
Kawakami. Yashuhiko: See—
Kobayashi. Mamoru; Ishige, Kanji; Sasaki. Hideaki; Tani. Mit-
sukiyo; and Kawakami, Yashuhiko, 4,437,603, CI. 228-4 500
Kawakubo, Kazuo; Furuichi. Katsushi; NamekaU. Kiyokazu; Tanaka
HidetMhi; Tohyama. Yashikuni; Kasamura. Toshirou Aoki
Tomohiro; and Honma. Toshio. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Double-
side image forming apparatus. 4.437.756. CI. 355-14.0OR.
Kawamatsu. YuUka; and Fujiu. Takeshi, to Takeda Chemical Indus-
tnes, Ltd. Thiazolidine derivatives. 4.438.141. CI. 424-248 510
Kawamura, Masaharu: See—
Akashi, Akira; Katsuma. Makoto; Kawamura. Masaharu; Kamau.
Shigeru; and Saito. Syuichiro. 4.437,752, CI. 354-289 000
,^o?l'i^'"''^*'''°' '° H'tachi. Ltd. Dynamic speaker. 4,438.297. CI.
179-1 17.000.
Kawasaki Steel Corporation: See—
Tateishi, Junji; Ishikawa, Takeharu; Nakano. Shozaburo; and Ni-
shiyama. Noboru. 4.437,906. CI. 148-26.000.
Kayahara. Takehiko: See—
Ishida, Hideaki; Ishikawa. Tomohisa; Yamana. Koji; and Kayahara.
Takehiko. 4.437,378, CI. 84-1.180.
Kaye, Wilbur I., to Beckman Instruments, Inc. Control of detector gain
?^l'?!i?JL^'" ' ""«'" '*•"' spectrophotometer. 4,437.763, CI.
J9O-320.000.
Kaye, Wilbur I.: See—
Glenn, Thomas J.; and Kaye, Wilbur I., 4.437,762, CI. 356-326.000.
Kazama, Toyoki: .See —
^''iil^olJ'nrJJ*''^*''™' •"** '^*«"na. Toyoki. 4.438.188. CI.
Keith, Alec D-; and Snipes. Wallace, to Key Pharmaceuticals. Inc.
Sl^^I^ diffusion matrix containing estrogens. 4,438,139, CI.
Kekesi, Krisztina: See—
Galambos. Gaza; Simonidesz, Vilmos; Szekely, Istvan; Ivanics,
Jozsef; Kekesi, Knsztina; Kovacs, Gabor; SUuller, Istvan; Kor-
V II "IS^fi?'' ^,'^Vi:', ""^ Horvath, Karoly. 4,438,132, CI. 424-285.000.
ri Ao^o?"?iJ^" ^"'herstripping kit for sliding windows. 4,437,266,
Kelly, Richard H., to United Sutes of America, Air Force. High Ulumi-
a"354?m OM '"'*' *'"' ''""* ***>"*"" =°"'™' ">«•"»• 4,437,748,
Kelsey, Jeffrey R., to British Petroleum Company Limited, The. Ma-
nne antifouling coating composition. 4,437,892. CI. 106-15.050
Kemeny, George A.: See—
Deis, Daniel W.; and Kemeny, George A., 4,437.383. CI. 89-8.000.
Kmla^e. Bernard M.. to International Business Machines Corporation
Fabncation process for a shallow emitter/base transistor using same
polycrystalline layer. 4,437.897. CI. 148-1.500.
Kemmesiw. Hartmut, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Integrable demod-
329 MMO **'*"*' *'*"*'* modulated onto carriers. 4,438,407, CI.
Kendall Company, The: See—
Arkans, Edward J., 4,437,408, CI. 101-426.000.
Jeng, David K. H., 4,437,567, CI. 206-210.000.
Kennedy, Maruice E., to Chen-y Electrical Products Corporation
Double throw snap action switch. 4,438,304. CI. 200-67 OOD
MMiOOa^^^ E- Novel hybrid electric vehicle. 4,438,342, CI.
Kern, Glenn A.: See-
Willis. Frederick O.; Radtke, Richard R.; Ellison, Joseph; Fozo,
Steven R.; and Kem, Glenn A., 4,438,497, CI. 364-431 050.
Kemforschungszentrum Karlsruhe: See—
*^?]l'l?'"i,o i(PT#i ^^^"' Hans-Joachim; and Weiss, Eberhard,
4,437,528, CI. 180-9.500.
Kcths, Quentin A.; and Miller, Harold W., to United Sutes of America,
Si"*(?r.^'.?." P°^*' "'*'° frequency attenuation device. 4,438,367,
CI. 315-5.410.
Kerr, George T.: See—
Dessau. Ralph M.; and Kerr, George T., 4,438.215. CI. 502-71.000.
Kershaw. Bernard J.: See—
^&J^^°^' ^•'' ""* Kershaw. Bernard J.. 4,438.180. CI.
428-475.800.
PI 21
Keraten, Hilde: See—
'^"t37.92)';cf2'SI*f8l'^"'' "'"'= •"' '^'«""'"- "'"""'•
Keswick, Paul D.: See—
"^ M3"?,3X,'?,''3^07-?9^.S' ""' ""' "•' ^'"''•"' ''""^y ^ • ^' ■
Key Pharmaceuticals, Inc.: See—
KhaUf' John 'see- '"** ^"''^ ^aHace. 4.438.139. CI. 424-28.000.
^"ci*33.f72 OOE ° ' ^*'"" ■'°*'" °' ■"'^ '^'"'''^' ^°*'"' 4.437.240.
Kiamil, Sinan B.: See—
''°42Y.355^C«o"" °" ""* '^'""''' ^'"'" ^- 4.438.177. Cl.
Kida. Shuji: See—
''sh:;!;'4'J^i?,,'a'i35S!^^'''*'"'' ^'^^^ -^ •^''"•
"^'.TriHr^ t?iP**^*'' '^"'»'f*"'. •« Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft
aul Akt en. Suble aqueous cleaning agenu and a process for their
production. 4.438,016, Cl. 252-174.250 ^^^
Kikkawa. Ryozo; and Takeshima. Maaaki. to Hitachi. Ltd. Apparatus
for treating radioactive liquid wastes. 4.437.933. Cl. 1 59- 17 OOR
Kikkoman Corporation: See—
^43'i'r30 000°*°°' '"** '^'"••'*'»' "^'y"*"' 4.438.206. Cl.
Kimball. Charles D.; and Houck, John C. to Endorphin. Inc. Endor-
424^177 00)"* P''""^ °' pancreatic origin. 4.438.104. Cl.
Kimberly-Clark Corporation: See—
Kim5ia''Hfk7' S ' -'^ ^"^^' ^^^^"'^ " ' 4.437.860. Cl. 604-385.000.
"'cT6ol29"ooo''^"*'''*' '^*"'"' ""* '^'""'"' "*•'""• 4.437.306,
Kinematic Industries. Inc.: See
Spitz, Melvin P., 4,437,197, Cl. 5-13.000.
King. Jcffery J.: See—
Kin^pl;ill!^W.^i.1' •"•"»• ''''"' '■• '•'''''''• C'- «4-33.000.
Heifer. Joel N.; and King. Phillip W.. 4,437,467. Cl. 128-642.000.
King, Roger L.: See —
Cawley. James C; DiMartino. Michael D.; Fisher. Thomas J-
Kina. Roger L.; and Uhler, Marcus H.. 4.438,473. Cl. 361-18.000*
Kinjj, Stephen J,; Moffatt. Bruce S.; and Stewart. John C, to Clark A
r'i"^'U^,.?^™"°" ^<""'P'e hydrocyclone apparatus. 4.437.984.
wl. ^UV-2 11.000.
*^'ri"'.*^"^' ^ Fishennan's hand towel and method. 4.437.253. Cl.
43-1.000.
Kinoshiu. Takao: See—
Sakai, Shinji; Shinoda. Nobuhiko; Kinothita, Takao; and Hokjc
Kazuya. 4.437.743. Cl. 354-402.000. *
Kinyosha Co.. Ltd.: See—
^"f!iiin!J*.'^r,*^' J.*!!?!?*' ^"^°' '"<' Nandate. Masaaki.
4.*JB.U0j, Cl. 204-311.000.
Kishi, Kenichi: See—
"^S M^!93.'S''i(35S!ffi,.''*^'"'' ^''^'' "^ "^'^
Kishi. Yoshinori: See—
^X^^i Kazumichi; Kaneko. Yasuo; Abe. KeIzo; Mauuo. Hideo;
AAi^c',,?*')i.?°H:\^iy!^' Yasuhiko; and Matsuyama. Yoshihiro.
4,438.155, Cl. 427-49.000.
Kitii, Yasushi: See—
^?SrtvSScr423'affii).^*^°' ""*-»'^ *"' ^°~*-
KiUhira, Takashi: See—
Furukawa. Mitsuhiki; Miyahara. Michito; Kitahira. Takashi
V* i!'i'!I';,'^'>'°^"°' Shiroyama. Masaharu; and Wada. Toshiaki!
4.438,213. Cl. 501-92.000.
KitaJima. Masao; Seshimoto. Otamu; Kubotera. Kikuo; and Yamaguchi.
Akira, to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Device for detennining ionic
activity. 4,437,970, CI. 204-412.000.
Kitamoto, Tauuji: See—
Umemura. Shizuo; MaUufuji. Akihiro; Aonuna. Maaashi
Kitamoto. Tatsuji; and Miyauuka. Hajime. 4,437,882. Cl. 75^
Kiumura, Shuji: See—
Fukushima, Nobuo; Kitamura. Shuji; Nakae, Kiyohiko; Ogawa.
;-??Vi?f!lJi«'^°'*"'' '^°'°' ■"** Hosono. Hidekazu. 4.438.238; Cl.
525-240.000.
Kitrell. John V. Mobile travel trunk. 4.437.676. Cl. 280-78.000.
Klauber. Gerald: See—
„. ''*»i*°' Pe'dinand C; and Klauber. Gerald. 4.437.844. Cl. 445-3.000
Kline Manufacturing Company. The: See-
Kline, William L.. 4.437.389. Cl. 91-499.000.
Kline. Sherman S.: See—
^°,'?P'i!2^«l"'°' '^^ "^ •"'"*• Shennan S.. 4,437,660, Q.
271-290.000.
Kline. William L.. to Kline Manufacturing Company, The Axial piston
pump having barrel biasing means. 4.437,389, Cl. 91-499 000
Klinger, Gottfried: See—
Bierkarre, Hartwig; Klinger. Gottfried; Radeloff. Jurgen; and Rust.
Berad-Hendrik. 4,437.533. CI. 180-168.000.
Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Collin, Karl-Heinz, 4.437.314, Cl. 60-738.000.
Klokholm. Erik: See—
Aboaf, JoMoh A.; Klokholm, Erik; and Herd, Sigrid R., 4,438,066.
wit 4*U'4 J9*UUU>
PI 22
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
Kluge, Douglas J. Foamed plastic fishing lure body having a controlled
deiuity and a one-piece wire and a method for its manufacture.
4,437,257, CI. 43-42.450.
Knight. Ernest, Jr.: See—
Ganfield, David J.; Hunkapiller, Michael W.; Knight, Ernest. Jr
and Korant, Bruce D., 4,438,030, CI. 260-1 12.50R
Knight, Mark B.: See—
Hinn. Werner; and Knight, Mark B., 4.438,45 1 , CI. 358- 1 1 .000.
•^nooP' Jack P. Tape roll holder having tab forming device. 4,437,854,
Kobayashi, Akio: See—
Isomura, Shigcnori; Kobayashi, Akio; Kato. Kateushi; Kowada,
Ichiro; and Nishii, Sachio. 4,437,446, CI. 123-492 000
Kobayashi. Mamoru; Ishige. Kanji; Sasaki. Hideaki; Tani. MiUukiyo-
and Kawakami, Yashuhiko. to Hitachi, Ltd. Automatic wiring ma-
chine for pnnted circuit boards. 4,437,603. CI. 228-4 500
Kobayashi, Takeo: See—
Hiraoka Tetsuo; and Kobayashi. Takeo. 4.438.265, CI. 544-29.000.
Roch. David L. Method and apparatus for diversion of downstream
migrating anadromous fish. 4,437,431, CI. 119-3.000
Kodama, Kouichi; See—
Wagu, Masakatsu; Hayashi. Shoichiro; and Kodama, Kouichi
4.438, 106, CI. 424- 1 80.000.
Kodama, Toshikazu: See—
^^f^f^M^^Jf'y"^""*; *"<* Kodama, Toshikazu, 4,438,417, CI
333-193.000.
Koehler Manufacturing Co.: See
Gulliksen. John E.; Guimond. Roy A.; Daly. Charles F.; and
Hamilton. William H.. 4.438.483, CI. 362-183.000.
Koehler, Wolfgang; Blocher, Hans-Joachim; and Weiss, Eberhard, to
Kemforschungszentrum Karlsruhe. Vehicle with variable undercar-
nage geometry. 4,437,528. CI. 180-9.500.
Koenig, C. Fred, III. to Warner &. Swasey Company, The. Chuck with
centrifugal force compensation. 4,437,675, CI. 279-l.OOC.
Koester, Eberhard; Hack, Joachim; and Steuerwald, Manfred, to BASF
Aktiengesellschaft. Document identification employing exchange-
anisotropic magnetic material. 4,438,462, CI. 360-2.000.
Koetters, Daniel: See—
Mallik, Arjun; Koetters, Daniel; and Edelstein, Harold, 4,438,017,
Koga, Hirohisa: 5^—
Ohba, Takeo; and Koga, Hirohisa, 4,438,469, CI. 360-109.000
Kohama, Tokio: See—
^i^j'J^^neyuki; Kawai, Hisasi; Kohama, Tokio; and Obayashi
Hideki, 4,437.345, CI. 73-204.000.
Kohn, Erhard: See—
Colquhoun, Alexander; and Kohn, Erhard, 4,438,445, CI.
357-14.000.
Koiwai, Yoshihisa: See—
Kubo, Toshihiko; Ichidate, Minoru; Kawai, Toshiyuki; Yonehara,
Sadao^oiwai, Yoshihisa; and Endo. Kazuhiko, 4,437,883, CI.
Kokusai Denshin Denwa Co., Ltd.: See—
''4T3°8 401^0 ''32^^6^000'"' ^*^"°' ^** Shirasaki. Yuichi,
KoUnd, David G, to Whirlpool Corporation. Vacuum cleaner nozzle
lift device. 4,437,205, CI. 15-354.000.
Kolbl. Rjch^d; and Mehlan, Bemd. to SielafT GmbH & Co. Coin
collection for vending machines. 4,437,557. CI. 194-l.OOD.
Kollmann, Hans- Josef; Hennemann, Lothar; and Hohorst. Wolfgang, to
Wago Verwaltungsgesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung. Connec-
tion terminal for electrical conductors. 4,437,721, CI. 339-97 OOP
Kolodziej, George C: See—
"%7,9'S"ci' 2(2^3""c!Sb'°'" ""■' "' ^°'°'"*^- ^^''^^ ^••
Komaki, Takao: See—
Komiya. Hiroyoshi: See—
^7AiSMCn'l9-\2°'o&E "'™y°'*''' ""^ '*^"'»' "'**^^*'
Komori Printing Machinery Co.. Ltd.: See—
Hasegawa. Kokichi; and Tokita, Tsugio, 4,437,406, CI. 101-350.000.
kT"w *' °' **''«"*'"• Hisashi; Hattori, Hiroyuki; lida, Toshi-
hide; Miyamoto, Koichi; and Umezawa, Kazumi, to Canon Kabushiki
fsTl^Om ** apparatus with cleaning means. 4,437,757, CI.
Komura, Hirotsugu: See—
"M38,3n*"cril9'^l°30 5'm "''°'*''*"= *"** Mizxmo, Takaji.
Kon, Masahani: See—
^°i'Sv?2*'i<5ll"**°' '^°"' ^"**1>*™; and Ota. Hiroshi, 4,437,682, CI.
*olr» /O^, lUU.
Kondo, Nobuo: See—
Tsuchida, Takashi; Kondo, Nobuo; Okada, Kazukiyo; and Okuda,
Yutaka. 4.438.425. CI. 340-55.000.
Kondow, Makoto: See—
'"^.iS^'sSi!^ ''"°'"^ ""' ^°"''°"' ^•^°'°'
Konmg, Richard W., to Deere A Company. Twine-wrapping mecha-
mam for mechanism for a large round baler. 4,437,399, CI. 100-4.000
Konishirokou Photo Industry Co., Ltd.- See—
lahiyama, Shozo. 4.437,732, CI. 350427.000.
Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd.: See—
Hamada. Fumio, 4,438,194, CI. 43O-SO5.000.
Uonura, Morito; Kishi, Kenichi; Nakagawa, Satoshi; and Kida.
Shuji, 4,438,193. CI. 430-505.000.
Konno, Kunio: See —
^tJS:?^ crfiSS;^.^."""' """"^^^ "^ ^'^ ^°»»'*»''™-
Kono, Yoshio: See-
Abe, Hanihiko; Harada, Hiroshi; Denda, Masahiko; Nagasawa,
Koichi; and Kono. Yoshio, 4.438,368. CI. 315-39.000.
Konoplitskaya, Xenya L.: See—
Lipatova, Tatyana E.; Vasiichenko, Dmitry V.; Pkhakadze Ge-
orgy A.; and Konopliukaya, Xenya L., 4,438,249, CI. 528-61 .000
Koppe. Herbert; Kummer, Werner; Suhle, Helmut; Muacevic, Gojko-
and Traunecker. Werner, to Boehringer Ingelheim KG. l-Aryloxy-3^
alkylamino-2-propanols and pharmaceutical compositions containins
them. 4.438,143. CI. 424-304.000. *
Koppe, Herbert: See—
Stahle. Helmut; Koppe. Herbert; Kummer. Werner; Stockhaus.
Sf^il MO/' °"^™"= ""* "°*"'*' Wo'f»»n«. 4,438,118, CI.
Koppers Company, Inc.: See —
Calistrat, Michael M., 4.437,847, CI. 464-74.000.
Koppers, Manfred; Bohnes, Karlheinz; and Kunzer, Heinz, to Bo-
5!i3r/62^S"!'?8!?33°SS" * "^ ""^ ^•^" '"^''^ «'"-^-
Kopylov, Jury L.: See—
Doev, Vitaly S.; Kotelyansky, losif M.; Kravchenko, Valery B.;
Korant, Bruce D.: See—
Ganfield. David J.; Hunkapiller, Michael W.; Knight, Ernest. Jr.;
and Korant, Bruce D., 4,438,030, CI. 260-1 12.50R.
Kormoczy, Peter: See—
Galambos. Gaza; Simonidesz, Vilmos; Szekely, Istvan; Ivanics,
Jozsef; Kekesi, Knsztina; Kovacs, Gabor; Stadler. Istvan Kor-
moczy, Peter; and Horvath, Karoly, 4.438,132. CI. 424-285.000
Komer. Gerhard; and Rees. Volker. to BBC Brown. Boveri A Com-
???^r""''*^- ^^" P'"°" '^''cuit breaker. 4,438,308, CI. 200-
148.00A.
Komrumpf, William P.: See—
"','?i*^!I' ■'°'"' ^- ^^' ""** Komrumpf, William P.. 4.438,396, CI
324-127.000.
Korzik, James L.; and Wissman, Thomas, to Paradyne Corporation
Rack mountable primary power AC plug. 4,437,717. CI. 339-17.0LC
Koschmek, Gunter: See—
Moderlak, Helmut; Koschinek, Gunter; Zinsser, Rolf; Prehler.
Rtthard; and Kretschmann, Bemd, 4,437,827, CI. 425-378.00S
Kotani, Kozo: See—
Fukushima. Nobuo; Kitamura, Shuji; Nakae. Kiyohiko; Ogawa,
Tadatoshi; Kotani, Kozo; and Hosono, Hidekazu, 4,438,238, CI.
525-240.000.
Kotelyansky, losif M.: See—
Doev, Vitaly S.; Kotelyansky, losif M.; Kravchenko, Valery B.-
Koulbams, Constantin; N'Guyen, Quang L.; Zabotto, Arlette; and Plot,
Josiane, to Societe Anonyme dite: L'Oreal. Mixture of vegetable oils
based on jojoba oil and cosmetic compositions comprising the mix-
ture. 4,437,895. CI. 106-245.000. P g me mix
Kovach, Stephen M., to Ashland Oil, Inc. Immobilization and neutral-
ization of contaminanu in crude oil. 4,437,981, CI. 208-253 000
Kovacs, Gabor: See—
Gdambos, Gaza; Simonidesz, Vilmos; Szekely, Istvan; Ivanics.
Jozsef; Kekesi. Krisztina; Kovacs. Gabor; Stadler, Istvan; Kor-
moczy. Peter; and Horvath, Karoly, 4,438,132, CI. 424-285.000.
Kowa Company, Ltd.: See—
^i"*^' '""": Yamaguchi. Takashi; Kamiya, Kazuhiro; Mori.
Toshihito; Umezawa, Hamao; Umezawa, Sumio; and Tsuchiva.
Tsutomu, 4,438,107. CI. 424-180.000.
Kowada, Ichiro: See—
Isomura. Shigenori; Kobayashi. Akio; Kato, Kateushi; Kowada,
Ichiro; and Nishii, Sachio, 4,437,446, CI. 123-492.000
Kraft werk Union Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Dorr, ^fgang; Gradel, Gerhard; and Peehs. Martin, 4,438,050,
SchnabI, Karl; Hoppner, Eberhard; and Kastl, Hans, 4,438,399, CI.
324-220.000.
Kramer, James H.; Omdorff, Roy L., Jr.; and Stephens, James M., to B.
Vo.SPS^*^*' Company. The. Riser pipe joint. 4,437.688, CI.
285-95.000.
Kramer, Kenneth D.; and Fletcher, Edward H., to Deere ft Company
Electrohydraulic valve system. 4,437,385, CI. 91-361.000.
Krampe ft Co. Fertigung in Bergbaubedarf GmbH: See—
Best, Gerd; and DIugosch, Gunter, 4.437,707. CI. 299-81.000
Krant, Jonathan M.: See—
Nir. Aharon; Amiel. Abraham J.; and Krant, Jonathan M..
4.437,263, CI. 47-l.OOR.
Krause. WUliam F., Jr.; and Hopmann. Mark E., to Baker Oil Tools.
166l382fwJ'^* 'ock for anchoring well tools. 4,437,522, CI.
Krautkramer-Branaon. Inc.: See—
Pittaro. Richard J.. 4,437,332, CI. 73-I.ODV.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 23
Kravchenko, Valery B.: See—
Doev, Viuly S.; Kotelyansky, losif M.; Kravchenko. Valery B.
Kretschmann, Bemd: See—
Moderlak. Helmut; Koschinek, Gunter; Zinsser, Rolf; Prehler.
Richard; and Kretschmann. Bemd. 4.437.827. CI. 425-378.00S.
Kretzschmar, Rolf See-
Ehrmann. Oskar; Raschack, Manfred; Gries. Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; Lehmann, Hans D.; Friedrich. Ludwig; Wuppermann.
Dirk; Zimmermann, Frank; Seitz, Wemer; Treibcr, Hans J
.^^^' Jrerdinand; Frank, Wolfram; Kurbjuweit. Hans-Georg
andMueller.ClausD.. 4.438.131,0.424-278.000.
Knngs, Peter: See—
Kuhling Dieter; Huppertzl Josef; Krings, Peter; and Reuter, Her-
bert. 4,438,012, CI. 252-131.000.
Krinski, Thomas L.; and Coco, Charles E.. to Ralston Purina Company.
Use of soy polysaccharides as a thickening agent for alkali silicate
adhesives. 4.437,893. CI. 106-80.000.
Krishnakumar, Suppayan M.: See-
Harry, leuan L.; Krishnakumar, Suppayan M.; Jolly. Walter R.
Beck, Martin H.; and Pocock, John F. E., 4.437.825. CI
425-145.000.
Kroger. Harry; and Soref. Richard A., to Spcrry Corporation. Refrac-
tive index temperature sensor. 4,437,761. CI. 356-44.000.
Krogsrud. Harald. to Elkem a/s. Means for an electrothermal smelting
fumace. 4.438.516, CI. 373-97.000. '^
Krueger. David C: See—
Suh. Kyung W.; Kmeger. David C; and Zehner. Burch E..
4,438.224, CI. 521-146.000.
^^^j^i ""*• "*"** ■"**/°'' foo' propelled vehicle. 4.437.677. CI.
280-234.000.
Kubo. Daijiro: See—
Smo. Jun; Aoyama. Masahide; and Kubo. Daijiro. 4.438.353, CI.
307-477.000.
•^"'»- Kateuro; Fukagawa, Yasuo; and Ishikura, Tomoyuki, to San-
raku-Ocean Co., Ltd. Amidohydrolase having ability to depantothe-
nylatc an antibiotic. 4,438,201, CI. 435-228.000.
Kubo, Kunimichi; Miyazaki, Yasunosuke; Yoshikawa, Mamoru; and
Miyoshi, Mituji, to Nippon Oil Company, Ltd. Vapor phase polymer-
ization apparatus for olefins. 4,438.073, CI. 422-135.000.
Kubo, Masayoshi, to Miteubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Apparatus
for product transportation in tire-forming machine. 4,437,920, CI.
Kubo, Naoki: See—
'*^4°23^8^00o'' ^"""'■' "•'■°y"'''; »n<l ^ubo. Naoki, 4,438.079.
Kubo. Seitoku; Kuramochi. Koujiro; and Kyushima. Tateuo. to Toyou
Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha. Transmission with torque converter and
!S?^^V^f, i^ ^"'' '"*>ncation and pressurization system. 4.437,358,
CI. 74-867.000.
Kubo. Toshihiko; Ichidate, Minoru; Kawai, Toshiyuki; Yonehara.
Sadao; Koiwai. Yoshihisa; and Endo, Kazuhiko, to Sumitomo Metal
Industnes. Ltd.; and Nippon Oil Co. Ltd. Process for producing
metal powder. 4,437,883, CI. 75-0. 50C.
Kubo, Toshihiko: See—
Umino, Masahide; Tamura. Eijiro; Karasuno, Isamu; Ichidate,
Minoru; and Kubo, Toshihiko. 4,437,891, CI. 75-251.000.
Kubodera, Noboru: See-
Nagano. Hiroyuki; Takagi. Mitiro; Kubodera, Noboru; Mateunaga,
Isao; Yamazaki, Tamoteu; Nabata, Hiroyuki; Sakai, Kazushige-
and Hata, Shun-ichi, 4.438,1 15, CI. 424-250.000.
Kubota, Hitoshi: See—
Morita, Katuhiro; and Kubota. Hitoshi, 4,437,310, CI. 60-562.000.
Kubota, Tateushi: See—
Moriya. Shigeru; Yoshida. Akio; Hayashi. Yoshihiro; Kubota,
Tateushi; and Tsuge, Hiroshi, 4,437,683. CI. 280-804.000.
Moriya, Shigeru; Yoshida, Akio; Mateunami. Muneharu; Kubota.
Tateushi; Tsuge, Hiroshi; and Nishimura, Yuji. 4,437,684, CI.
280-804.000.
Kubotera, Kikuo: See—
Kitajima, Masao; Seshimoto. Osamu; Kubotera, Kikuo; and
Yamaguchi, Akira, 4.437,970, CI. 204-412.000.
Kuhling, Dieter; Huppertzl Josef; Krings. Peter; and Reuter. Herbert,
to Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft auf Aktien. Suble aqueous suspen-
sion of water-insoluble, calcium-binding aluminosilicates and non-
ionic suspending agente. 4,438,012, CI. 252-131.000.
Kuhlman, Ronald H. Controlled exhaust system for low temperature
enclosure. 4,437,868, CI. 62-41 1.000.
Kuka Schweissanlagen ft Roboter GmbH: See—
Zimmer. Emst. 4.438.309. CI. 219-86.700.
Kulak. Walter. Universal float lure. 4.437,256. CI. 43-17.500
Kulesh. Vladimir P.: See—
Moskalik. Leonid M.; Ryadchikov, Vladimir E.; Bykov, Anatoly
P.; Kulesh, Vladimir P.; Opaaov. Stanislav I.; and Orlov, Anatoly
A.. 4,438,393. CI. 324-83.00D.
Kulicke ft Soffa Industries. Inc.: See—
Raion, Ely; and VUenski, Dan, 4,437,604, CI. 228-179.000.
Kulik, Alphonse C, to USM Corporation. Method of articulating a
work supporting surface. 4,437.1M, CI. 12-145.000.
Kume, Tsutomu: See—
Ishii. Yoshiaki; Kume. Tsutomu; Ando. Naoyoshi; and Fujinami.
Shosaku, 4.437.416. CI. 110-245.000.
Kummer, Jan. Milkmeter measuring the weight of the quantity of milk
issued bv a cow, and device for taking samples adapted for use with
said milluiieter. 4,437,346, CI. 73-221.000.
Kummer, Werner: See—
Koppe. Herbert; Kummer, Wemer; Stahle, Helmut; Muacevic,
Gojko; and Traunecker. Werner, 4.438,143. CI. 424-304 000
StaMe, Helmut; Koppe, Herbert; Kummer. Wemer; Stockhaus.
flt^i] 000^ Wolfram; and Hoefke, Wolfgang. 4,438.118, CI.
Kunitz. Friedrich- Wilhelm; and Schranz. Karl-WUhelm, to Agfa-Oeva-
ert Aktiengesellschaft. Photoguphic recording material containing a
developer compound. 4.438,195, CI. 430-566.000.
Kunkel, Heinrich: See—
Olschewski, Annin; Brandenstein, Manfred; Waller, Lothar Horl-
ri*'-»o !lo ?i^!S^"*^*'' "«™*""; *^ Kunkel. Heinrich. 4,437,214.
Kunzer, Heinz: See—
''°4':iT"562'*a'S.73?ir' '^"'""= "" •'"""'• ""^^
Kupferdrahtlsolierwerk AG Wildegg: See—
Voser. Othmar, 4,438,293. CI. 174-79.000,
Kurahashi, Masaru: See—
Mateui, Kanenobu; Uchiumi. Shinichiro; Takahashi, Miteuo Aaada.
Hideki; and Kurahashi. Masaru, 4,438,041, CI. 260-464.000
Kuramochi. Koujiro: See—
'^'i'!?i7«B°)^"f'-,l'2S'!lSS*''' *'°"J'™= *"** Kyushima. Tateuo.
4,437,358, CI. 74-867.000.
Kuranishi, Masaaki; and Togo, Yasuhiko, to Sharp Kabushiki Kaiaha
rf iil^^nr^I" '■*^'"8 information earned on ug cards. 4,438,328,
Kurbjuweit, Hans-Georg: See—
^^™^: 9*^' '^*«cl>ack. Manfred; Gries, Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; Lehmann. Hans D.; Friedrich, Ludwig; Wuppennann,
Dirk; Zimmennann. Frank; Seitz, Werner; freiber, Hans J
Dengel. Ferdinand; Frank, Wolfram; Kurbjuweit. Hans-Georg-
andMueIIer,Claus 0.4,438,131, CI. 424-278.000.
Kureha Kagaku Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
'^4S8,K.'*4"24-';teSE)'.' ''°"''™= "' ''"*^ •^°"''=»"-
Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Okada, Yoshio; Terauchi. Takashi; Naoki. Makoto; and Hino.
Masaloshi, 4,438.021, CI. 502-341.000.
Kurt H. Volk, Inc.: See—
^°}^a\^^II Iv ^«; ?.'/^' ^^*'«" " : ■"<! Stenner. John W..
4,437,852, CI. 493-216.000.
Kurth, Wilfried: See—
Philipp, Helmut; and Kurth, Wilfried, 4,437,370. CI. 83-23.000
Kydd, Paul H.: See—
Huibers. Derk T. A.; and Kydd, Paul H.. 4.437.973, CI. 208-10.000.
Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Tomita, Fusao; Matsuda, Yuzuru; Shirahau, Kunikatsu; Takahashi,
Keiichi; Nakano, Hirofumi; Sato, Tomoyasu; Okubo, Shuji- and
Nakamura, Nobuo, 4.438,197, CI. 435-1 19.000.
Kyushima, Tateuo: See—
'^".'?.:,!^i'°!yf' Kuramochi. Koujiro; and Kyushima. Tateuo,
4,437,358, CI. 74-867.000.
Laboratoire d'Etudes et de Recherches Chimiques L.E.RC. See—
Foissac, Yves; and Hung. Frederic N. B.. 4,437,288. CI. 52-637.000.
LaBruna, Anthony J., to Textron Inc. Positive expulsion fluid storage
tanks. 4.437.590. CI. 222-386.500. ^
Lafaille, J. Pierre: See-
Sanchez, Victor; Espenan. Patrick; Casademont. Emest; and La-
faille, J. Pierre, 4,437,967. CI. 204-301.000.
Laing. Karsten; Laing. Oliver; Laing, Nikolaus; and Ludin, Ludwig,
Utility water system with a pressureless storage container, particu-
larly for solar installations. 4,437,484, CI. 137-W.OOO.
Laing, Nikolaus: See—
Laing, Karsten; Laing, Oliver; Laing, Nikolaus; and Ludin. Lud-
wig, 4.437,484, CI. 137-99.000.
Laing, Oliver: See—
Laing, Karsten; Laing, Oliver; Laing. Nikolaus; and Ludin. Lud-
wig, 4,437,484. CI. 137-99.000.
L'Air Liquide. Societe Anonyme pour I'Etude et I'Exploiution des
Procedes Georges Claude: See—
Barbier, Jean-Paul; and Urouyer, Gilbert. 4,438.152. Q.
427-37.000.
Blot. Roger. 4.438.319. CI. 219.137.0PS.
Guillaume. Paul; and Karinthi. Pierre. 4.437,418. Q. 110-246.000
Laity, John L.: See—
. Graifl", L. B.; and Laity, John L., 4.437.436, CI. I23-1.00A.
La^laye, Paul G.; Bjerklie, John W.; and Penty, Robert A., to Hague
International. Composite ceramic heat exchange tube. 4,437,217, CI.
Lambert, Roger T., to Omnetics, Inc. Rexible pin. 4,437,726, CI. 339-
Landis, Abraham L., to Hughes Aircraft Company. Isoimide containing
oligomers. 4,438,273. CI. 549-303.000.
Lane Company, The: Set—
Mizelle, Ned W.. 4,437,701. CI. 297-85.000.
Laney. Ralph M. Connector for corrugated tubing. 4.437,691, Q.
285-353.000.
Lang, Theodore J.; and Kershaw, Bernard J., to Du Pont Canada Inc.
Procett for coating nylon film with vinylidene chloride copolymers.
4.438. 1 80. CI. 428-475.800.
Langer. Wemer: See—
Hittel, Gerhard; Muhl, Hubertus; Eigl. Franz; and Langer, Werner.
4.437.323. CI. 66-84.00A. »«. .
Langstraat, Warren L., to Minneaou Mining and Manufacturing Com-
pany. Abrading tool. 4.437,270, CI. 51-364.000.
PI 24
LIST OF PATENTEES
^^^:J^'!^ ^' "''••."* ^i** Uboratories. Inc. ImmobUiation of
biocaulysu on granular carbon. 4,438,196, Q. 435-96.000.
LanUich, Remhard; Marhold, Albrecht; Behrenz, Wolfgang; and
Hanunann, Ingeborg. to Bayer Aktiengwellschaft. Combating arthro-
pods with novel benzyl esters. 4,438.275, CI. 549-434.000.
Lardon, Hartmut; and Seybold. Ouenther, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft.
Preparation of sulfides. 4,438,282, CI. 568-58.000
Large, George B. to StaufTer Chemical Company. Tri-mixed alkylsul-
fomum salts of N-pho«phonomethylgylcine and their use as plant
growth regulators and herbicides. 4,437,874, CI. 71-87 000
'1!;^4°m17526; cPni^.jS'^'^' "^ ^"» '^ - f-'
Uurenz, Werner, to Pischinger, Franz. Method and apparatus for
detecting knocking combustion. 4,437,334, CI. 73-35 000
Lajrton, James W.; See—
Caiuulj^^ames W.; and Uyton, James W., 4,437,501, CI. 144-
Leach, Earl A., Jr., to Bendu Corporation, The. Mounting bracket for
a transformer. 4,438,42 1 , CI. 336^5.000. *
Leather, Brian B.. See—
''°2'&459loO*' ^''' "^ ^^^^"' ®"*" ®- ^•♦38.329, CI.
Lechner, Horst: See—
°h£:%?3?ci9?S2iTi'S.^'""' "°"^= ""' ^'"'"- ^''■
L«:ron, Jacques; Manera. Maxime; Faure, Jean-Paul; and Renaudin,
Jean-Pierre, to Societe Vetrotex Saint-Gobain. Method and apparatus
for mulufilament glass strand. 4.437,869. CI. 65-1.000
Lee. Chung J., to Plastics Engineering Company. Fast crystallizing
g^yj^yjejeterephthalate resin composition. 4,438^33, cf
Lm. Garland G.: See—
'^*«Z378axr"" ^' "^ ^' °"'*™* °- ^•'♦^^•^H CI.
Lee. Ivm S.. to Polysar Limited. Carboxylated acrylate styrene butadi-
ene adhesives. 4,438,232, CI. 524-272.000. "^ouw"
Lee, Len F.: See-
Howe, Robert K.; and Lee, Un F.. 4,437,875, CI. 71-90.000.
Howe, Robert K.; and Lee. Len F.. 4.437.876. CI. 71-90.000.
Lee, Robert D.. to Motorola, Inc. Single suge operational amplifier
voltage reference. 4,438,388. CI. 323-313.000 «npii"er
Leer Manufacturing Company. Inc.: See—
Trautsch, Jerrold A., 4.437.412. CI. 108-56.100.
Lefebvrc. Kenneth E.: See—
'^Vs&aX ^' *"** ^'««'^«' ^^enneth E., 4,437,689, CI.
Legille, Edouard: See—
^4S25 000°"' ^*'"** ^°""''= ■"<* ^°«^«'' Je*"' '♦.437.796, CI.
Lehmann, Hans D.. See
^Si?""i' ^^' ^^k Manfred; Gries, Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; Lehmann. Hans D.; Fnedrich, Ludwig; Wuppermann,
Durk; Zimmermann Frank; Seitz. Werner; f reiber; HanTj •
Dengel. Ferdinand; Frank. Wolfram; Kurbjuweit. Hans-Georg-
T ..*?J*^"«""'ClausD.. 4,438.131, CI. 424-278.000 "^'^'»'
Leibcr. Heinz; and Stegmeier, Alwin. to Robert Bosch GmbH. Electro-
magnetic activauon device. 4,438,420, CI. 335-275 000
Leisterer. Reinhard: See—
^KStr^ffSf^^J^^^iP""^^' K"'o^y. Ingo; Meyersieck,
ssi;?d.?4^i!a,^^^^ ^°^«= ^ ^'«-'
Lelong. Pierre H.: See—
^'a*2'5oi63S)S^'°"*' **■*"' "■• *"** '*"*^*' ■'*"• *'«8.334.
^*iw"6oo'°'"* "■ ^"""""^ instrument and method. 4,437,241, CI.
't438.I52°.'"c"l' &.l^%^'''''' '*'^'^' °- "'""^'^"« ''--^
Leong. Sai. See—
Gantwcrker, Scott; and Leong, Sai, 4,438, 1 50. CI. 426-625.000.
Lermann, Peter: See —
Engelsmann. Dieter; Hackenberg. Hubert; Urmann. Peter; Wag-
I -». o '^'i*"** ^^' Siegfned, 4.437,751. CI. 354-214.000.
^iMl'^TlSLfyS^"" °^ ""'^^ componenu from gases.
Lerouyer. Gilbert: See—
^"Vow"'***"'' ""* ^rouyer. Gilbert, 4,438,152. CI.
Leuenberger. Claude-Eric: See—
Leuven Research ft Development V.Z.W.: See—
Delaey, Lucas J.. 4.437.91 1, CI. 148-402.000.
Lever Brothen Company: See—
Huber, Otto. 4.438,015, CI. 252-174.240
^'42^*000""""' ^ ^''' ■"** ®°**°'' ■''"°'' *'*38''*9' CI.
Levine. Peter A.; and Limberg, Allen L.. to RCA Corporation. Electri-
S«^!°^IIf!!'°" f ""«?»«"»»«' of striped color filter in a color
j^^%^-M ^»«=rete sampling elementt. 4,437,764, CI. 358-44.000.
Lewis, David L., to Bendu Corporation, The. High torque chuck
assembly and collet. 4,437.801, 0:409-232.000
March 20, 1984
Uwis, Mack A.; and Spencer, Mike R., to Wilson Trailer Co. Mono-
Li^HsiSTg P.°L^^ "*** construction. 4,437,699, CI. 29^1^81 tST
LibeSr aWl"'^!'''"' "•*"« ^- '*'*^«'°*«' C'- 260-982.000.
''M3roia*^.T52!9YgS: '" ^= "^ ^''*™-' ^'^" L-.
,7ScS2?^'r43^f32'^cif ^^^^^ ^-- '- -
292-23*?0a)° ^ ^'"^'"* ''°°' '^"*' '**"'"*y apparatus. 4,437.694. CI.
Limberg, Allen L.: See—
Limb'lTrgr^vJSS; tS-^™"*'*' ^""' "" *''"''^' ^'- "»-^«»-
Headley, James E. R.; Limburg. William R Nordmever Rnh*rt
A.; and Smith. Jay. Ill, 4,437.738. Cr353:26 Sr '^ ' ^"^
SUfpi """V^""'- '™ ° • "^^ Liberman. Arthur L.. to Intema-
lomd Flavors ft Fragrances Inc. Soap ublet including pirfume^on-
S2-9f.(m """ ^'°^ ^°' P'*'^"* same. 4'538.?ro?a.
Linden, Jeffrey L., Sr.: See—
''''^l^'^l'^!^^'^ """ ° = "^ ^•'«'-' J^'f^y L., Sr..
Lindenschmidt, Gerhard: See—
Brandstetter, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Jung. Rudolf H.- and
Lmdenschmidt, Gerhard, 4,438.237. CI. 525-183.000
Linder, Ernst: See —
LiJei^i^^^fl""^ ^'"'^"' ^™'' ♦.'♦38.363. CI. 310-328.000.
Linderman Noel. Yoke apparatus. 4.437.709. CI. 308-219.000
Lindorfer Walter; Wagner. Fritz; and Schulz, Walther, to w'intershall
AG; and Gesellschaft fur Biotechnologische ForschuM mbH pS
2Kl.Sir"*'""°" °^°"^ hydrocartomi into sand. 4!4?^99'3, ct
Linke, Horst: See—
Lion Corporation: See—
^"S^mIoo?'"' ^' ^''*'' ""** '^•'^^ ^'•"''°' ♦•'♦38.025, CI.
Lipatova, Tatyana E.; Vasiichenko, Dmitry V.; Pkhakadze, Georav A •
and Konoplitskaya, Xenya L. Biodegr Jable polyuret£ne~2^acyi
?4T2W"5/8:6;'Sxr""^"'"^ °' biodeKble alloimpiS
^'Sf.«f"Ai,?"""-'°!f *•!.'"; **??''*• Gerhard; and Bettge, Hans, to Sie-
2aM4^OTB"*"* ' *^ '"^""'" "*'''^''- ♦•'♦38.307, CI.
Liquipak International. Inc.: See—
''74^-m'oOo'*"'"'* ^''' *™* Comiea, Donald O., 4,437,498. CI.
Liu. Heny; Gibson, Donald L.; Cheng, David H. S.; and Rathke, James
E to University of Missoun. The Curators of the. Pipeline trinspo^
Ution system. 4.437,799. CI. 406-198.000. »nui»por
Liu, Ping Y., to General Electric Company. High impact strength
W?f6l.00o' Po'yc^bonate composition. 4,438,231. Cl!
Lobel, wiifried: See—
^iJ^"lL"'"' "*■)?«• Elisabeth; Lobel, WUfried; Pollack,
I?Srci53^?L^2"5.og,""'*^ °'*"' ^'^^ ""* ^''"'"' ^"«°'
Lockheed Corporation: See—
Marmon, Frank E., 4,437,487, CI. 137-322.000.
Lockhoff, Oswald: See—
Petersen, Uwe; Stadler, Peter; Lockhoff, Oswald; Zeiler, Hans-Joa-
cnim; and Metzger, Karl G., 4,438.260. CI. 536-13.900.
Lockwood Techmcal Inc.: See—
^*^i4O0O™" °' ""** ''■"Mart, Robert E., 4,437,488, Q.
Lomas, David A.: See—
^422-K)900o''°"^ °' ""* ^"^ '^"'''' '^■' ♦•♦^8.071, CI.
Londos. Rene; and Barbereau. Jean-Luc. to Compagnie Generale de
Manutention et de Stockage. Apparatus for causing a unit guided on
rectilmear rails to move gradually and a forklift equipped with such
a unit. 4.437.808. CI. 414-667.000.
Long. William B.: See—
Cr3?9"l56 OJR^"*' ^"'"" ^' ■"*' ^'"'*^' '°^'* ^' ♦•♦"•"^25.
Lonnstrom Oy: See—
Vatja, AulU, 4,437.565. CI. 198-851.000.
Lord, Douglas W., to Renfro. Julian C. Partially restrained arrange-
M37.424. CI n4.9?Mo"" °^ ' ""^ P°"e^"8 inherent subilily.
"L'breaJ": See—
Gueret. Jean-Louis H.. 4.437,477, CI. 132-88.500.
436-^ WO ^**'*' ■' • '"*' Abrioux, Andre. 4,438.205. CI.
Lorenz, Max R.: See—
"427°-5^00o"**'*^ M.; and Lorenz, Max R.. 4,438,156, CI.
'iiihtS.";A.?96'c?r4r5S.s» '" '•"'"'^ ' '"~" '° «'• ""^ °f '
Low, Robert N.: See—
''4,"4?8:i9l^4^3i3^"0bo''°^ ''^ "'* '^'=^*"'"''' ^'"' "'
Lucas Industries Limited: See—
Farr, Glyn P. R., 4,437,483. Q. 137-85.000.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 25
Harmcr, George A., 4.437,547. CI. 188-1.110.
Luchctti, Stephen J. See—
Ludin, Ludwig: See—
Uing. Karsten; Uing. Oliver; Laing. Nikolaus; and Ludin. Lud-
wig, 4,437,484, CI. 137-99.000.
Lynn, Vicki A.: See—
^MS:i«"S4'^6-32Tobo'f"'' ^■'' ""' °«""«"«»™- Susan M..
M.A.N.-Roland Druckmaschinen Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Fischer. Hermann. 4,437.402. CI. 101-181.000.
Greiner, Harry M.. 4,437,403, CI. 101-248.000.
Mac Valves. Inc.: See—
Neff. James A., 4,438,418, CI. 335-255.000.
Macaleese. John E., to Stebbins Engineering and Manufacturing Co.
ii5?^7o^A?"c?^^™ structure and method for forming the same.
'*,^3iUiy, \~i. 32-247.000.
^2a?i'^' ^^^"^^- ^°"y° *i<b twist-resistont string. 4,437,261, CI.
MacCraven, Joseph, to Southwire Company. Method for improved
neat treatment of elongated aluminum alloy materials. 4,437,904, CI.
14o- 13, 100.
MacFarland, James M.; and Kappe. Bernard W., to United Sutes of
f 437"7?6 a^ rr/Tboo"'"*'''*' '"*^" 8as-purged. welding chamber.
Machida, Yoshihiro: See—
^*i"j«mj. Hidekatu; and Machida, Yoshihiro, 4.437.759, CI.
355-91.000.
MacMillan Bloedel Limited: See—
Gilroy, Alfred A., 4.437,611, CI. 239-453.000.
Macnak, Philip P.: See—
Smoot^^George W.; and Macnak, Philip P., 4,438,433, CI.
Madden, James A., to General Electric Company. Method and appara-
tus for circumferentially grooving thin-walled cylindrical meul
objects. 4,437,327, CI. 72-94.000.
Madey. John M. J.: See—
^'J2f' «^'',?bix^'**'''' ^°*'" ^ ^' *"** ^'"''b, Todd I., 4,438,513,
CI. 372-2.000.
Madonna, Peter L.: See—
° "437°5"25^c7 175' 218Mo"*' ***'*' ^ ' ""^ ^*"*^e^ Gearld F.,
Maeda Industries, Ltd.: See
Ozaki, Nobuo; and Hosokawa, Mikio, 4,437,357, CI. 74-475 000
Magarian, Gerdd M.; and Friedrich, Ralph S., to Ameron, Inc. Wind-
ing fiber remforced pipe fittings. 4,437,616, CI. 242-7.020.
Maganyama, Kenichi: See—
^*[?i'..i??5i!l*''''°' ""* Magariyama. Kenichi, 4,437,744, CI.
J 5^-442.000.
^??"' i?'""'* A - "«1 McCubbin. Charles E., to Dunham-Bush. Inc
;.^f«'Ji?''""* positive displacement roury pump. 4.437.816, CI.
417-465.000.
Mageriein, Helmut: See—
^4"f37,9Sra°2'SI-^8i*S!"'* ""''^ ""' "*•*"'*'"• """"'^'
Magome, Tamotsu: See—
^*i«Vn!^ Junichi; and Magome. Tamottu. 4,437,755, CI.
3S3-10.000.
Maguire, Paul R., to PIcion Corporation. Modular wall panel fastener
assembly. 4,437,286, CI. 52-506.000.
Mahadev. Kalabeerappa N.: See—
Boorman. Philip M.; Chivers, Tristram; Tavares, Donald F.; and
Mahadev, Kalabeerappa N., 4,438,218, CI. 502-220.000.
Maheo, Jean Y.: See—
., ..Co'ineau, Joseph; and Maheo. Jean Y.. 4.438.375, CI. 315-408.000
Malinowski. Chnstopher W.; and Rinderle, Heinz, to Telefunken Elec-
'ronic GmbH. Oscillator frequency control loop. 4,438,412, CI.
Mallik. Arjun; Koetters. Daniel; and Edelstein. Harold, to Allied Cor-
poration. Scintillation liquid compatible with high performance liouid
chromatography solvenu. 4,438.017, CI. 252-301.170.
Mallinckrodt. Inc.: See—
Mosier. Larry D., 4,438,209, CI. 436-542.000.
Mampaeij, Johannes J. Break bollard. 4,437,427, CI. 114-218.000
Manber. Solomon: See—
^'Vf!?%'oP^'*' ^*"'' ^°*'= *"** Manber, Solomon, 4,438,379, CI.
318-685.000.
Manchem, Limited: See-
Holland, Frank S.. 4,437,949, CI. 204-59.00M.
Mandai, Masaaki: See—
Shida. Masaharu; Ueda, Makoto; Ouwa. Shuji; Mandai, Masaaki
and Sato, Kattuhiko, 4,437,769, CI. 368-204 000.
Manera, Maxime: See—
Lecron, Jacques; Manera, Maxime; Faure, Jean-Paul; and Renau-
din, Jean-Pierre, 4,437,869, CI. 65-1.000.
Mangels. Ralph W. Self-infiating bedpan. 4.437,195, CI. 4-456.000
Mangin, Pierre M.: See—
"i^^^lo^'' ^•' *"** Mangin, Pierre M., 4,438,019, CI.
502- ] 69.000.
Mankouaki, Charles: See—
Pardee, Ernest, 4,437.545, CI. 182-171.000.
Manson, Harry G., to IMC Magnetics Corp. Stepper motor having
rotor with limited axial movement. 4.438.361, CI. 310-90.000
Manville Service Corp.: See—
Graser. Earl J.. 4,437,606, CI. 229-40.000.
Marchadour, Jean-Charles. Machine for crimping in • controlled atmo-
sphere. 4,437,290. CI. 53-97.000. ^^
Marchetti. Mauro: See—
Botteghi. Carlo; Gladiali, Serafino G.; Marchetti. Mauro and
Faedda. Giovanni A., 4,438.033. CI. 260-239.55C.
Mardkha, Michael M.. to Xerox Corporation. TTL Compatible CMOS
mput bufier. 4,438.352, CI. 307-475.000.
Marhold, Albrecht: See—
Untzsch, Reinhard; Marhold, Albrecht; Behrenz, Wolfgang and
Hammann, Ingeborg, 4,438.275. CI. 549-434.000.
MannofT, Gerald P.; and Teague, W. Dorwin. to MarinofT. Gerald P
Fire escape device. 4,437,546, CI. 182-233.000.
Mark Products, Inc.: See—
Woodall, James C, 4,438,292, CI. 174-52.00R.
Mark, Victor; and Hedges, Charles V.. to General Electric Company.
Heat rnisunt polyarylates. 4,438,241, CI. 525-444.000.
Marken, John P. Wave power generator. 4,438,343, CI. 290-53.000.
Marklow, Raymond J.: See—
'^T38,2«;'ci'"52°8:75'S5S^' "''^'^ "'* '^""°"' '^^"°"** ''
Marmon. Frank E., to Lockheed Corporation. Lightning protected
check-type drain valve. 4.437.487, CI. 137-322.000
Marquard, John F.: See—
w ^^\J?^u''.*"'* Marquard. John F., 4.437.619. CI. 242-75.510.
Martens, Wilhelm; and Dilmaghani, Homayoun, to Vereinigte Ru«-
technische Werke Fokker GmbH. Drive for leading edse fiaos of
aircraft wings. 4,437,631, CI. 244-214.000. • » P»
Martin. Clovis L.. to Acos Finos Piratini S.A.; and Metallgeaellschaft
Aktiengesellschaft. Method of and apparatus for measuring the rate at
which gases are blown into a rotary kiln. 4,437,835, CI. 432-103.000
Marim, Henry: See—
^°il!'^^"'' ^*"i"^ "enry; and Pissiotas, Oeorg. 4.437,879, CI,
71-96.000.
Martin, Kenneth L.: See—
^^V^^^°'^ ^- *"*• ^■^"- "Kenneth L. ♦.♦38,320. CI.
2 17-2 16.000.
Martinmaas. Werner W. Nut wrench. 4,437,364, CI. 81-179.000
Martorana, Richard T.. to United Sutes of America. Navy. Heat pipe
control apparatus. 4.437,510, CI. 165-32.000.
Maruo, Tsunehiro; and Inagaki, Masaomi. to Sony Corporation. Posi-
tion detectmg signal generator. 4.438.398. CI. 324-173.000.
Maruyama, Toshinori: See—
Akita, Yoshio; Maruyama, Toshinori; and Muto. Kauuva.
4.438.384, CI. 32048.000. '
Marwil. Stanley J., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Separation of
hydrocarbon and alcohol azeotropic mixtures by distillation with
anhydrous ammonia. 4.437,941, CI. 203-50.000.
Masarky, N. Henri: See—
Hawryluk, Raymond; Johnson, Clyde R.; and Masarky. N. Henri.
4,437,884, CI. 75-7.000.
Masonite Corporation: See—
Slocum, Donald H.; Schairbaum, Albert W.; and Curtis. William
M., 4,437,274, CI. 52-105.000.
MassachusetU Institute of Technology: See—
Saltzer, Jerome H.. 4.438.520. cT. 375-4.000.
Masuyama, Masaru; Hirooka. Susumu; and Yamaoka. NobuUUu, to
Taiyo Yuden Co.. Ltd. Semiconductive ceramic materials with a
voluge-dependent nonlinear resistance, and process for preparation.
4,438,214, CI. 501-136.000. *^
Mathais, Henri; Commandeur. Raymond; Pontoglio, Achille; and Ne-
bel, Sergio, to PCUK Produiu Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann Chlori-
nated alkylaromatic based compounds and new liquid dielectrics
4,438,027.0.252-581.000. ^
MaUuda, Yuzuru: See—
Tomiu, Fusao; MaUuda, Yuzuru; Shirahata, Kunikauu; Takahashi,
Keiichi; Nakano, Hirofumi; Sato, Tomoyuu; Okubo, Shuji; and
Nakamura, Nobuo, 4,438.197. CI. 435-119.000.
Matsufuji, Akihiro: See—
Umemura, Shizuo; Mauufuji. Akihiro; Aonuma, Maaashi
Kitamoto. Tattuji; and MiyaUuka, H^ime, 4,437,882, CI. 75-
0.50R.
MaUui, Kanenobu; Uchiumi, Shinichiro; Takahashi, MiUuo; Asada,
Hideki; and Kurahashi, Masaru, to UBE Industries, Ltd. Proceu for
preparing esters of cyanoacetic acids. 4,438,041, CI. 260-464.000.
Matsumoto, Fumio: See —
Mori. Kensuke; Mauumoto, Hiromi; Suga, Yozo; Nakayama,
Tadashi; and Matsumoto. Fumio. 4,437,909. CI. 148-111.000.
Nozawa, Tadao; Yamamoto, Takaaki; Nakayama, Tadashi; Mauu-
moto. Fumio; and H^ami, Satohiro. 4,437,910, CI. 148-112.000
Mauumoto, Hiromi: See—f
Mori, Kensuke; Mauumoto, Hiromi; Suga, Yozo; Nakayama,
Tadashi; and Mauumoto, Fumio, 4,437.909, CI. 148-111.000.
Mauumoto, Hiroahi: See-
Nagano, Eiki; Hashimoto, Shunichi; Yoshida, Rye; Mauumoto,
Hiroshi; and Kamoahita, Kauuzo. 4,437.877. CI. 71-90.000.
Mauumoto. Seyi: See—
Teraoka, Masanori; Komaki, Takao; and Mauumoto, Seiji.
4,438.333. CI. 250-327.200.
Mauumoto, Toyosaku. to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha. Disk
player system having a disk sucking function. 4.438,510, CI.
369-271.000.
MaUunaga, Isao: See-
Nagano, Hiroyuki; Takagi, Mitiro; Kubodera. Noboru; MaUunaga,
Isao; Yamazaki, TamoUu; Nabata. Hiroyuki; Sakai, Kazushige
and Hata, Shun-ichi, 4,438,1 IS, Q. 424-230.000.
PI 26
LIST OF PATENTEES
Mauunami, Munehani: See—
Moriyi. Shigeru; Yoshida, Akio; Matsunami, Muneharu; Kubou,
liSJiS'^Jl'"*'' ""^°»*»'; ■"<* Nishimura. Yuji. 4,437,684. CI.
Mattuo, Hideo: See—
^^i?^^' '^1™*''''=.'^*''°' "*^""°: Abe, Keizo; Matouo, Hideo;
f ?.b''i« ^r°/l',*?iy-S!if' Ywuhiko; and MaUuyama. Yoshihiro.
4,*J8, 133, CI. 427-49.000.
Matsuo, Masaaki: See—
Ueda, Ikuo; Mauuo, Masaaki; Satoh, Susumu; and Watanabe,
Takao, 4.438,126, CI. 424-272.000. •»•««,
MaUuo, Masashi: See—
Takahashi. Hiroshi; Suzuki, Yukio; Matsuo, Masashi Ono
4,4?7"445"'cM2ft9?oS' ^'^ *^""°' *"*^ ^""''''' **°^^'
Matsushiu Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.: See—
Araki. Shigeru; Taki, Yasuo; Mori, Kazuhiro; Misawa, Yoshihiko;
and Tanaka, Souhei. 4,437,232, CI. 29-740.000.
Sakakima, Hiroshi; Satomi. Mitsuo; Senno, Harufumi; and Hiroto,
Eiichi, 4.437,912. CI. 148-403.000.
Sato, Takeshi, 4,438.529, CI. 455-190.000.
Matsuyama, Kouszou, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha
Power supplying apparatus. 4,438,478, CI. 361-152.000.
MaUuyama, Masahiro: See—
Nojiri, Tadao; Kanemani, Kenji; Nishikawa, Takayoshi; Matsu-
yama, Masahiro; and Ito, Yoji, 4,438.422, CI. 34O-52.00F
Matsuyama, Yoshihiro: See—
*^J*"i' '^""•chi; Kaneko, Yasuo; Abe, Kelzo; Matsuo, Hideo
S'lIrcT °4'2"75J?000' "^''"*''''°= ""^ Matsuyama, Yoshihiro,
'*?etjX°i5l5'2*r.'i:?3^^^^^^ '**"'''^* '^^
Matyas, Tibor: See—
' MY7,4'?rCl.l65-378''oS'^"' '""" ^ = """ ^"^"' ''-^^^'
'*sid'irt?bK.";,43%Tc?'i;i?T^^^
Mayne, Sherman T., to Gram Research & Development Co. Method of
210^741 Om'*"'"*'^ '"soluble organic solid material. 4,437,999, CI.
M^urco, Anthony; and Miller, Richard L., to Mazzurco. Anthony.
SeJf-onenuting fluid container device. 4,437,636, CI. 248-137 000
McAnespie, Don: See —
Russ. Stephen; and McAnespie, Don, 4,437,612, CI. 239-556.000
McAvoy -niomas R., to MinnesoU Mining and Manufacturing Com-
panySmface treatmg pad having a renewable surface. 4,437,271, CI.
McCarthy, Harry £.: See—
^^f590a) ^' ""* McCarthy, Harry E., 4,437.519, CI.
McQelland, Paul H.: See—
''mSu"?? 4^3;^3^4"obo''°'"" ''^ ""' ^'=^"'""'^' '''"" "••
McClenahan, Charles R.. to United Sutes of America, Air Force.
SZ M3t3™,"a.t2Z m.SlS"'" "'"^'"« """"' ^"•^''' --"-
M^nnick, Michael A.; and Gladdish, Peter, to Rolls-Royce Limited
a'C''M?MSf, cr328'^f67'oa^ ''"'"*"''' '"""' •""»"^°' •"** '^
McCubbin, Charles E.: See—
^4?7^500o" ^" *"** McCubbin, Charles E., 4,437,816, CI.
McCue, John P., to Philip Morris Industrial Incorporated. Electrosensi-
r458,im Cr528'"2r7"^. "'' "««*-«-«>- -rfa- topology.
^'Sa^' ?""^* K.; and Norris. Robert D., to FMC Corporation.
42?lMi2 0M °" ""^ '*'""'"'" ^'^ '° '*'*"'"'" <"!)• M38!080, CI.
"^^^I!!!"'."""'**^^ • °"1' •'°''" ^' ""^ P»«""ver, Matthew C, to Sperry
7^862050" "'*''' '"°''* transducer. 4.437,351. CI
McGraw, Isaac R. to Pennwalt Corporation. Use of clotrimazole to
treat herpes labialis. 4.438, 129, CI. 424-273.00R.
McGraw, Isaac R., to Pennwalt Corporation. Use of tolnaftate to treat
herpes labialis. 4,438, 1 34. CI. 424-300.000. »o'™'"W »o treat
McGraw, Thomas F. Continuous tnckle-down distillation unit for
producmg hydrated alcohol. 4,437,937, CI. 202-160.000
McHugh, James D., to General Electric Company. Low axial stiffneu
thrust bearing. 4,438,339. CI. 290.1.00R. ^
Jr^'Vji ^^'^^^" " • to Honeywell Information Systems Inc. Inte-
grated circuit package. 4,437.235, CI. 29-840.000.
McKeen, Jeffrey A.: See—
^'^^I'i^^J},!' ^^^^' ^""^ B-: McKeen. Jeffrey A.; and
Przybylski, William A., 4,437,347, CI. 73.272.00R.
McKenhen, Steven J.: 5ee—
^'^n' • Uh ■?*' F C; McKerihen, Steven J.; Attwala, Hashmuk-
.. », "" ":•.•"<* Cautillo, Antonio L., 4,437,831, CI. 431-177 000
A^SS^J^d' '';.S"?'""'L^.°™" C= "d NiShke 5Sn S.
M^ioToOO "* *'"" '^^ *.437,871, CI.
'^A'2SiS'.'u,"!?;?t^= ^^'^II*'"' ^°"^ ^■■' "I Nit«:hke, John S.
65^104000 ^ ^* tempermg glass sheeU. 4.437.872. CI.
McMullen. John K. Pump, and an apparatus incorporating the pumo for
mfusmg liquid medicine. 4.437.81570. 417.418!oOO.
March 20, 1984
McVeigh, Harry A.: See—
"""^^^-A^a. 2^' ilS.^*"' "^ ^-^ "«* ^'°-'' ^"'^ '^-
MDC Max Datwyler AG: See—
Datwyler. Max, 4.437,942, CI. 204-6.000.
Mead Johnson & Company: See—
M«li!«"'oiS"*f •d"'*' '^'•'•'V ^"« A., 4,438,119, CI. 424-251.000.
SoOB Reciprocating piston engine. 4.437.438. CI. 123-
Medical Engineering Corporation: See—
MedtroSfc 'iS^'swl^*' ^**'* Vaughan B.. 4.437,457. CI. 128-l.OOR.
^S-WOOro"' °' ""* ^*='^"" ^""^ A- <.*37.468. CI.
^_)^'te. David L.. 4.437.475. CI. 128-785.000.
Meeder, Raymond L., to Siemens Gammasonics, Inc. Detector head
mounting apparatus. 4,438,335, CI. 250-363.00S,
Mehlan, Bemd: See—
Kolbl. Richard; and Mehlan, Bemd, 4,437,557, CI. 194-l.OOD
Meister. Alton; and Williamson. Joanne M., to Cornell Research Foun-
dation. Inc. Cysteine delivery system. 4,438,124, CI. 424-270.000.
Me tsch, Hans J.; and Rost, Jan, to Siemens Aktiengcsellschaft. Cable
pTssooR "" *'"'*"" *°^''** of shrinkablc material. 4,438.294, CI.
Memmi, Massimo: See—
Bruno. Roberto; and Memmi, Massimo, 4,437,944, CI. 204-27 000
Menioux Claude C. F., to Societe Nationale d'Etude et de ConTtruc^n
de Moteurs d'Aviation "S.N.E.C.M.A.". Roury alternating pis on
gas generator. 4,437,441, CI. 123-213.000. ^ ^
MMinemann, Karl; Gliemeroth, Georg; and Geiler, Volkmar, to Schott
2,^T«'"ak^"*^ ^'^ ophthalmic glass with refracti;e iSes
CI W1-65 0M """•*">*' *"** densities < 2.75 g/cm^. 4,438,211,
'^405-21" 00?' *"** ^'^"'"' °*""" ^ Protecting means. 4.437.793. CI.
Merck ft Co., Inc.: See—
Hartman, George D., 4,438,266, CI. 544-350.000.
Smith. Robert L., 4,438,123, CI. 424-270.000.
Merkl, Bernard A.: See—
^'528-?7*ax?°'^*' ^ ■ '"*' ^"^' ^™"** ^■' '♦•'♦38.248, CI.
Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals Inc.: See—
Sjoerdsma, Albert, 4.437.873, CI. 71-67.000.
Merrell Toraude et Compagnie: See—
Bey, Philippe; and Jung, Michel, 4,438,270, CI. 546-243.000.
Merngan, Michael A, to United Sutes of America, Energy. Heat
collector. 4,437,456, CI. 126-433.000. *
Mertz, Frank D., to Red-Ray Manufacturing Company, Inc. Infrared
radiating burner article. 4,437,833. CI. 431-329.000
Merz, Johann, to Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen, AG. Controllable
vane pump. 4,437,8 1 9, CI. 4 1 8-26.000. vunirouaoie
Meadan S.p.A.: See—
Truzzi, Ferdinando; and Premi. Mauro, 4,437,298. CI. 57-22 000
Truzzi, Ferdinando; and Premi, Mauro, 4.437.299. CI. 57-22.000'
Mesta Machine Company: See—
Petros, Andrew J., 4,437,223, CI. 29-564.300.
Metallgesellschaft AG: See—
Pietsch, Hartmut; Turke. Wolfgang; Bareuther. Ernst; Kampf.
Fntz; and Bings. Hubert. 4.438.076. CI. 423-30.000.
Metallgesellschaft Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Martin. Clovis L., 4,437,835, CI. 432-103.000.
Metz, Bruce E., to Athena Controls Inc. Seam sealing device and
technique. 4,437,853. CI. 493-302.000.
Metz. Manfred: See—
Huber, Willi; and Metz, Manfred, 4,437,610, CI. 239-1 19.000
Metzelder, Wolfgang, to Friedrich Wilh. Schwing GmbH. Two cvlin-
der viscous matenal pump. 4,437,817. CI. 417-507.000.
Metzger, Karl G.: See—
Boberg, Michael; Habich, Dieter; MeUger, Karl G.; and Naab.
Paul.4,438,114, CI. 424-248.510. u niaao,
Petersen, Uwe; Stadler, Peter, Lockhoff. Oswald; Zeiler, Hans-Joa-
chim; and Metzger, Karl G., 4,438,260, CI. 536-13.900.
Meuleman, Dirk G.: See-
Sanders, Adrianus L. M.; Meuleman, Dirk G.; Moelker, Huibert C
T.; van Dedem, Gysbert W. K.; and van Houdenhoven, Francois
E. A., 4,438,108, CI. 424-183.000.
Meyer, Victor E.; and Dergazarian, Thomas E., to Dow Chemical
«a"\^^^* (Vinylaryl)alkyl polysulfide polymers. 4.438.259. CI.
Meyersieck. Manfred: See—
Arens, Egidius; Hampe, Christoph; Karlowsky, Ingo; Meyersieck.
Manfred; Schwarz. Hans D.; Anding, Norbert; and Leisterer,
Remhard, 4,438.438. CI. 343-451.000.
Michaud. Paul: See—
''°.'2i."',^'' Michaud. Paul; and Pemicka. Martin. 4,437.543, CI.
182-2.000.
Michel, Jean-Georges: See—
Dinger, Rudolf; Michel, Jean-Georges; and Leuenberger, Claude-
Enc, 4,437,773, CI. 374-1 17.000.
Michigan Consolidated Gas Company: See—
Bronsky, Robert J.; Clark, Dennis B.; McKeen, Jeffrey A.; and
w . f"y'>y'*'". William A., 4,437.347. CI. 73-272.00R.
Mick. John R.: See—
"VT«";-,^'!1.'^ ^ • ■'' : Mick. John R.; and Coleman. Vernon,
4.438.492. CI. 364-200.000.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 27
Midland-Ross Corporation: See—
Russ. Stephen; and McAnespie. Don. 4.437.612. CI. 239-556.000.
Miles Laboratories, Inc.: See—
Lantcro, Oreste J., Jr.. 4,438.196, CI. 435-96.000.
Miller, Harold W.: See-
Kerns, Quentin A.; and Miller, Harold W., 4,438,367, CI. 315-5.410.
Miller, Richard L.: See—
Mazzurco, Anthony; and Miller, Richard L., 4,437,636, CI.
248-137.000.
Miller, Roger A., to Coming Glass Works. Optical waveguide fiber
cooler. 4.437,870, CI. 65-12.000.
Miller, Ronald L. Geometric game. 4,437,667, CI. 273-153.00S.
Miller, Scott W.: See-
Schwartz, Lionel H.; Miller, Scott W.; and Severud, Christopher
N., Jr., 4,438,479, CI. 361-213.000.
Miller, Stewart E.: See—
Copeland, John A., Ill; and Miller, Stewart E.. 4,438.447, CI.
357-19.000.
Milliken Research Corporation: See—
Eschenbach, Paul W.; and Goineau, Andre M.. 4,437,301, CI.
J7-289.000.
Milnes. Kenneth B. Carpet seaming Upe activator. 4,438,323, CI.
219-243.000.
Milsmann, Manfred: See—
Weder, Hans G.; Zumbuhl, Otmar; Schwendener, Reto; and Mils-
mann, Manfred. 4,438,052, CI. 264-4.600.
Minakata. Matsuo: See—
Sando, Yoshikazu; Goto. Tokuju; Tanaka, Itsoo; Ishidoshiro. Hiro-
shi; and Minakata, Matsuo, 4,437.324, CI. 68-S.OOE.
Minami, Ryohei; Okamura, Shozo; Sunami. Yoshihiko; Hosoi, Takuji;
and Kanou, Takuo. to Sumitomo Meul Industries, Ltd. Coal lique-
faction process. 4,437,974, CI. 208-10.000.
Minatelli, John A.: See-
Bell, Allyn R.; Doweyko, Arthur M. P.; and Minatelli, John A.,
4,438,271, CI. 546-294.000.
Minemura. Norihiro: See—
Yamaguchi, Taturo; and Minemura, Norihiro, 4,438,151, CI.
427-36.000.
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company: See—
Langstraat, Warren L., 4,437,270, CI. 51-364.000.
McAvoy. Thomas R., 4,437.271, CI. 51-400.000.
Minolu Camera Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Taniguchi. Nobuyuki, 4,437,742, CI. 354-21.000.
Mintus, Raymond E.: See—
Pickens, John W.; Abraham, John K.; Mintus, Raymond E.; and
Thomas, Millicent H., 4,437,902, CI. 148-I2.00F.
Miracle Products, Inc.: See-
Albert, Donald; and Tremaglio, Anthony M., 4,438,344, CI.
307-146.000.
Misawa, Yoshihiko: See—
Araki, Shigeru; Taki, Yasuo; Mori, Kazuhiro; Misawa, Yoshihiko;
and Tanaka, Souhei, 4.437,232. CI. 29-740.000.
Mishima, Akio; Okuda, Yoshiro; Harada, Tosiharu; Mukaizaka, Akira;
and Imai, Tomoyuki. to Toda Kogyo Corp. Acicular ferromagnetic
alloy particles and process for producing said particles. 4,437,881, CI.
75-0.5AA.
Misumi, Kiyohito: See—
Furukawa, Mitsuhiki; Miyahara, Michito; KiUhira, Takashi;
Misumi, Kiyohito; Shiroyama, Masaharu; and Wada, Toshiaki,
4,438.213, CI. 501-92.000.
MiU Industrial Co. Ltd.: See—
Fushida, Akira; and Kato, Yoshiaki, 4,438,187, CI. 430-81.000.
Mitarai, Tsuyoshi; and Sato, Kunio, to Casio Computer Co., Ltd.
Digital electronic musical instrument. 4,437,377, CI. 84-1.010.
Mitomo, Mamoru; Moriyoshi, Yusuke; Sakai, Toshikazu; and Osaka,
Toshiaki, to National Institute for Researches in Inorganic Materials.
Process for producing a translucent ;3-sialon sintered product.
4,438,051, CI. 264-1.200.
Miuubishi Chemical Industries, Limited: See—
OhU, Takayuki; Yanaga, Yukio; and Hino, Seiichi, 4,438,256. CI.
528-188.000.
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Abe, Haruhiko; Harada, Hiroshi; Denda, Masahiko; Nagasawa,
Koichi; and Kono, Yoshio, 4,438,368, CI. 31^39.000.
Kawai, Jyoji, 4,438,487, CI. 363-129.000.
Ogawa, Hitoshi, 4,437,821, CI. 418-104.000.
Ueguri, Shigeo; Komura, Hirotsugu; and Mizuno, Takaii,
4,438,317. CI. 219-130.510.
Miuubishi Gas Chemical Co., Ltd.: See—
Miyamoto, Akira; Shimizu, Senzo; Harada, Masahiro; Ajiro,
Tamotu; and Hara. Hideki, 4.438.257, CI. 528-347.000.
Miuubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kubo, Masavothi, 4,437,920, CI. 156-406.200.
Miuubishi Kakoki Kaisha Ltd.: See—
Nagauuka. Kenichi. 4.437,202, CI. 15-320.000.
Miuubishi Petrochemical Co., Ltd.: See—
Miwa. Naoto; and Naki^ima, Hiroshi, 4.438,199, CI. 435-190.000.
MiUui Petrochemical Industries. Ltd.: See—
KashJwa, Norio; Morita, Yoshinori; and Suga, Michiharu,
4.438.243,0.526-125.000.
Miura, Hirohisa; Satou, Hiroshi; and Nauume, Toshio. to Toyou
Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha. Process for manufacture of metallic mag-
nesium. 4,437,886, CI. 75-67.00R.
Miura, Kenichi, to Fujiuu Limited Decoder and method utilizing
partial and redundant decoding. 4,438,427, O. 34O-347.0DD.
Miura, Yuuyuki: See—
Shiseki, Yuuka; Yagi, Junichi; and Miura, Yasuyuki, 4,438,358, CI
310-51.000.
Miwa, Naoto; and Nakajima. Hiroshi, to Mitsubishi Petrochemical Co..
Ltd.; and Unitika Ltd. Measuring composition. 4,438,199, O.
435-190.000.
Miyahara, Michito: See—
Furukawa, Mitsuhiki; Miyahara, Michito; Kitahira, Takashi;
Misumi, Kiyohito; Shiroyama. Masaharu; and Wada. Toshiaki.
4,438,213. CI. 501-92.000.
Miyake, Yasuhiko: See—
Kawai, Kazumichi; Kaneko. Yuuo; Abe, Kelzo; Matsuo. Hideo;
Kishi, Yoshinori; Miyake. Yasuhiko; and Matsuyama. Yoshihiro.
4.438.155. CI. 427-49.000.
Miyamoto, Akira; Shimizu, Senzo; Harada, Masahiro; Ajiro. Tamotu;
and Hara. Hideki, to Miuubishi Gas Chemical Co.. Ltd. Proceu for
preparing polyamide with molten dicarboxylic acid component
4,438,257, CI. 528-347.000.
Miyamoto, Koichi: See—
Komori. Shigehiro; Sakamaki, Hisashi; Hattori, Hiroyuki; lida,
Toshihide; Miyamoto, Koichi; and Umezawa, Kazumi,
4,437,757, & 355-15.000.
Miyamoto, Yoshiaki. to Nippon Oil Seal Industry Co.. Ltd. Sealing
device. 4,437,673, CI. 277-65 000
Miyamoto, Yoshimi, to Nippondenso Company Limited. Connector for
automotive ignition devices. 4,437.719, CI. 339-91, OOR.
Miyasaka, Kenji, to Citizen Watch Company Limited Movement
structure for an electronic timepiece. 4,437.768. CI 368-88 000
MiyashiU, Takao; Aizawa. Hidekuni; and Takamiya, Toru. to Sony
Corporation. Tape cassette having means for adjusting a Upe segment
length for a thermal pnnter. 4,437,778, CI. 400-208.000.
Miyauuka, Hajime: See—
Umemura. Shizuo; Mauufuji, Akihiro; Aonuma, Masashi;
KiUmoto, Tatsuji; and Miyatsuka, Hajime, 4,437.882, CI. 75-
0.50R.
Miyazaki, Yasunosuke: See—
Kubo, Kunimichi; Miyazaki. Yasunosuke; Yoshikawa, Mamoru
and Miyoshi. Mituji. 4,438,073. CI. 422-135.000,
Miyoshi, Mituji: See—
Kubo, Kunimichi; Miyazaki. Yasunosuke; Yoshikawa. Mamoru
and Miyoshi, Mituji, 4.438.073. CI. 422-135,000.
Mizelle. Ned W., to Lane Company, TTie. Rocker-blocking device for
rocking chair having projecuble/rectracuble footrest. 4,437,701, CI,
297-85.000.
Mizukami, Hidekatu; and Machida, Yoshihiro, to Dainippon Screen
Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha. Contact printer. 4,437.759. CI. 355-91.000.
Mizuno, Takiui: See—
Ueguri, Shigeo; Komura, Hirouugu; and Mizuno, Takaii,
4,438,317, CI. 219-130.510.
Mizusawa. Kiyoshi: See—
Nakajima, Motoo; and Mizusawa. Kiyoshi, 4,438,206, O.
436-130.000.
Mizuuni, Yoshihisa, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha
Method of forming SOS devices by selective laser treatment and
reactive formation of isolation regions 4.437.225. Ci, 29-576,0OB.
Mobil Oil Corporation: See—
Ashcraft. Charles R.; and Albertson, Kurt D., 4,438,175. CI.
428-315,500,
Chester, Arthur W.; McVeigh, Harry A.; and Stover, William A..
4,437.978. CI. 208-120.000.
Derbyshire, Francis J.; and Varghcse, Philip, 4,437,972, CI. 208-
8.0LE.
Dessau. Ralph M.; and Ken^. George T., 4.438,215, CI. 502-71.000.
Gillespie. Bernard M.; Sarli, Michael S.; and Smith. Kenneth W.,
4,437,975, CI. 208-87.000.
Holden, M. James, 4,438,054, CI. 264-40.600.
Oleck, Stephen M.; and Wilson, Robert C. Jr.. 4,437,976, CI.
208-97.000.
Richardson, Emmett M.; Chatas, Angelos T ; and Padilla, Joseph
R, 4.437.521. CI. 166-341.000.
Steiner. Robert H.; and Touhsaent. Robert E., 4,438,176. CI.
428-349.000.
Tsui. Tien-Fung. 4.438.077. Ci 423-7.000.
Moderlak, Helmut; Koschinek, Gunter; Zinsser, Rolf; Prehler. Richard;
and Kretschmann, Bemd, to Davy McKee Aktiengesellschaft Spin-
ning manifold with serial nozzle blocks. 4,437,827, CI. 425-378.00S.
Moelker, Huibert C. T.: See-
Sanders, Adrianus L M.; Meuleman. Dirk O.; Moelker. Huibert C.
T.; van Dedem. Gijsbert W. K,; and van Houdenhoven. Francois
E. A., 4,438.108, CI. 424-183.000.
Moenaert, Christian: See—
Susameyer, Robert; Pluvinage, Alain; and Moenaert, Christian.
4,437,940. CI. 203-49.000.
Moffatt. Bruce S.: See—
King. Stephen J.; Moffatt, Bruce S.; and Stewart, John C,
4,437.984.0.209-211.000.
Molded Fiber Glau Companies: See—
MoUman, Robert E.; and Silva, Ralph, 4,438,059, CI 264-105 000
Mollan, Raymond A. B., to National Research Development Corpora-
tion. Orthopedic diagnostic procedures and apparatus therefor.
4,437,473, CI. 128-773.000.
Mollman, Robert E.; and Silva, Ralph, to Molded Fiber Glass Compa-
nies. Electrically conductive fiber glus trticlet and sheeu. 4,438,059,
CI. 264-105.000.
PI 28
LIST OF PATENTEES
^SS'^SirJ° ?"0" Kabushiki Kaisha. Inverted telephoto
3^^38000 °*'J~*"'* °^ '"«' ^''*"^« aperture. 4.437.735. CI.
**'^M*' ^^-^ J-,^ ""^*=* Engineering Company. BiKmaleamic
acid) derivatives of tnamines. 4.438.280. CI. 562^7 000
Monarch Wine Co., Inc.: See—
ZaJtsman. Efim. 4.437.291. CI. 53-319.000.
Mondet, Jean: See—
Ouillon. Michel; Mondet. Jean; Papantoniou, Chriatos; and Van-
denbossche.Claudine. 4.438.140, CI. 424-61000
Monosov. Yakov A.: See—
Doev. Vitaly S.; Kotelyansky. losif M.; Kravchenko. Valery B
Monsanto Company: See-
Gamer, Albert Y.. 4.438.034. CI. 260-239.30R.
Howe, Robert K.; and Lee. Len F., 4,437,875, CI. 71-90.000
Howe, Rol^rt K ; and Lee, Len F., 4.437.876. CI. 71-90.000!
Montres Kado S.A.: See
Gogniat. Paul. 4.437.770. CI. 368-294.000.
Moore, Paul E.: See—
xaJ^I^^^' f'"^ b' ""** ^°°'*' P«"' E- '♦.'♦37.649, CI. 266-48.000.
Mordau, Manfred: See—
Stolz. Albert; and Mordau, Manfred. 4.437,393, CI. 98-2.170
Mon. Kazuhiro: See—
Araki, Shigeru; Taki. Yasuo; Mori. Kazuhiro; Misawa, Yoshihiko-
. and Tanaka, Souhei. 4.437.232. CI. 29-740.000 "^'""^o.
Ta '^^"*"''^' Matsumoto, Hiromi; Suga. Yozo; Nakayama. Tadashi-
and Matsumoto. Fumio, to Nippon Steel Corporation. P;oceM for
producing a grain-onented silicon steel sheet or strip having excellent
magnetic properties. 4,437.909, CI. 148-1 1 1.000. ^ "ceiient
Mon, Toshihito: See—
Watanabe. Isamu; Yamaguchi, Takashi; Kamiya. Kazuhiro; Mori
loshihito; Umezawa, Hamao; Umezawa, Sumio- and Tsuchiva
Tsutomu, 4,438,107, CI. 424-180.000. ""o- ""O isucJiiya,
Mon. Toshio: See —
IsWkawa, Reiji; Saito. Masaki; Mori, Toshio; and Tamura
Hidemasa, 4.438.160, CI. 427-214.000. '
Mon. Yutaka: See—
^"oTslyilaOOo'' ""*"' ^^°^''^^' """ ^°"' Y"««««. 4.437.532.
Morishima, Masayuki: See—
'■SJrst^ch?4"Sn'*cT^9':^ "'^'"'^ -"'^
r4S£i:r3i£3?8"cS' '^'^"'°"' '^' ^*«*'~'"= -'-•-
Morita, Jun: See—
Mon'S^jtun'^iSS.!"' "^"""^ ^""' '''"•*'^" ^ '^8-*5«»-
't437';5i?°CL 2^35.1^"''^ "^' "^"^^ "'^ ^'°- A*^"-''
^^la^^J^T^T' ""^ '^"'~.'*' ""°»*''' '° Nissan Motor Company.
Limited. Tandem master cylinder with a pressure regulating valvefo^
'^.5il^43!'cr5=26-'?2°5"Sb ^"''"^"^ «"'' '^^ ^-^^'
^liorT^'^ini''' ^f *=^' '^*^'?' *"*' O'"^ T«keo. to Sony Corpora-
~°" J"^*""* *'°"*'°' *y"«'" 'o^ "« infonnation signal rewirdinTand
reproducing apparatus. 4,438,465, CI. 360-22 000 «^™'"« """a
Monya, Shigero; Yoshida, Akio; Mateunami, Muneharu Kubota. Tat-
'^' IW "!f«*»; ?"d Nishimura, Yuji, to Toyou JidX Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha; and Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai-Wka-DeSd-Seffi"
sho. Automatic seatbelt system. 4,437,684. CI. 280-804.000
Monyoshi, Yusuke: See —
Mitomo. Mamoru; Moriyoshi. Yusuke; Sakai, Toshikazu- and
w ^*^?^To8hiaki, 4,438,051, CI. 264-1.200. ™n««z«. ana
Morohashi, K^uo; Kajikawa. Tenio; and Iwai, Sakuya. to Niooon Oil
m^m.OOO: ^"^ °^ ™^« ' «^* tiir4437;9?8. c!
Moroi. Shiro: See—
'^.."ssv.as'S,.''"^' "^' "^ "'"»'•
M^n^?' ^°^'L^ Artificial seaweed. 4.437,786. CI. 405-24.000
^;..r"*^f •• ^ •'■"" ^""^ Corporation of Virginia. Cellulose
Morse, Milton, to APM Corporation. Protective cover for teleohon*
push button array. 4,438,300, CI. 179-184 000 telephone
Morwin^, Bo A to Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson Device for
March 20, 1984
'*SSd^4538"2(S'g^5S4VS&'^'^^ f- ""^o-
'^^'^ \^^ >*;; Ry«dc»»ikov. Vladimir £.; Bykov. Anatolv P
Kuleah. Vl«lunir P.; Opasov. SUnislav I.; and Orlov aSSiv A
Phaae-metenng device. 4.438.393. CI. 324-83^0 ^
Motorola, Inc.; See—
Lee. Robert D., 4,438.388, CI. 323-313.000
Murphy, Earl R.. 4,438,436, CI. 343-16.00M.
Ryan, Carl R., 4.438.413. CI. 332-16.00R.
Selmko. George J.. 4.437.718, CI. 339-61.00M.
340.M5%** ^" "^ ^'^'^' '''•'"P •*•• '♦•'♦38.433. CI.
Motta, Gianni: See—
Nardi. Dante; Tijana. Alberto; Motta. Gianni; Cazzulani. Pietro-
Mot.a.'SlSS^sS!'™'*' '-'''•'''• ^'- *^^^«»
'ti3s.27'j; a°=56i'i?ao '^'"°"*'°= ""' °°^' °-""°-
'^a"?^°'ci.'275!r4S'"^ programmable chess pUy indicator.
MSS Associates: See—
^te's^OOo"' ^'"'* '^°'*' ""* '^'"'*'' ^'°'"°"' *.*38.379. CI.
Muacevic, Gojko: See—
Koppe, Herbert; Kummer, Werner; Stahle, Helmut; Muacevic
Muelle?&"D'.:^S;e-"''"' ^*"'"' '•'''''*'' ^'- *^^^
^^^l^"i' ^^"- ^^^'^}^ Manfred; Gries. Josef; Kretzschmar
Rolf; Lehmann, Hans D.; Friedrich. Ludwig; WuppSS
Dirk; Zimmennann. Frank; Seitz. Wenier; Treiber H«mJ
Dengel. Ferdinand; Frank. Wolfni^; Kurbjuweh Hms G^ra!
M. f"'^ ^'ifr- ^""» °- ^.*38.>3i. a.' 42SK: """-^^'s:
Muenster, Rolf: See— "wu.
'^cf''4?3"-38?O0b^°™"' ^'^'"' ""* '^«"«"' Rolf. 4.438.084.
Muhl, Hubertus: See—
" 4;?37%';'S= Ji"i!'c2x'*'*"'= ^'*'' ^'"^= '"«* '^«"- ^»™--
Muilwijk, Dirk, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Receiver for anaU
modulated carrier signals. 4.43^.524. a. 375-80.000^ "*'*'
Mukaizaka, Akira: See—
'^'i&*',!^*^i°= °x*^ ^??'''°= ""«*•• Tosihani; Mukaizaka,
Muller:'BSard'L'"S;I°'"°^"'"' '•*''•««'• ^'^ ^'-^^'^A.
^'!f3l.f8t'a."6?-4o'S'"' ''°«" ^-^ ""' '^"""' «*"-«' ^ •
Muller, Leo: See—
Brandcnstein. Manfred; and Muller. Leo, 4 437 556 CI IQ9 ofl rwi
^S\4^8lf8""lY?5^^^0S^^^^^^^^^^
"^s^rS^^t: Cl' .1^4?'^ •• '° '^"'^'""'' ^'°^"'^- ^'«*-
^"tlT' '';*"c' ^"•i'''' ^""''°' °*'"'*'''- Toshihiro; and Tamura. To-
sh fumi. to Sumitomo Chemical Company. Limited. Highlydielwtrfc
polysacchandes. 4.438.262. CI. 536-43!oOC). ^ ^ aieiectnc
Murata. Masayoshi: See—
Murata. Yukio: See—
^"cMplsW^""""' ^"'^°' *"** ^''''^'*' "^o'noyki. 4.437,811.
'*S'S.U,%ra3Si6^^^^^^
Muto, Katsuya: See—
^M38.3% 32^18^ '■°'''"°"= "'' '^"'°' K"»"y»'
'*an'g"?Sf'.inS^'?3'?T77*'c!r.'^^^^^^^^^^ --"^"^ -^ f-
''Sen^"^:i38S04^^r"5Vl2l;S'"' '"' ''"^ '"''^''''^ ^"«*°"
Naab. Paul: See—
Nabata, Hiroyuki: See—
'^'iSJI°'v"'™^",^'= J*""*"' ^'''™: »^«bodera. Noboni; Matsunaga,
Isao; Yamazaki, Tamotsu; Nabata, Hiroyuki; Sakai. Kazushia?
and Hata. Shun-ichi. 4.438.1 15. CI. 424-250.000. "-""""se-
Naegele. Paul: See—
'^fiT438:6i."S: l2£9.«Jo'^"= ^*' """'' '^ ^«»*'«'
'^*128!767 00o"^' "^PP"''"* ^°^ collecting fluids. 4.437.472. CI.
'^^K* j'^i^^ Hashimoto. Shunichi; Yoshida. Ryo; Mateumoto. Hiro-
I imif2? ^S*"*** }^^^' '° Sumitomo Chemical Company.
ir4^37.l^?.-?r7'f^'SSS''-"''"'"^ '**"^'^ hydantoinsTd
^C%Si'°^^v'^*^*^' i?'L^°: Kubodera. Noboni; Matsumiga.
IX?i Xr^' Tamoteu; Nabata, Hiroyuki; Sakai, Kazushige; Jhd
f!!i^ .ullS""','"' '° *^^"«" Sayaku Kabushiki Kaisha. Compositions
42t"50 000' '^""« diseases in circulatory organs. 4.438J1 15. CI.
Nagaoka, Tateki: See—
v.»2l!^v'*'*!y°S'"' "** Nagaoka. Tateki. 4.437.656. CI. 271-10,000.
Nagasawa, Koichi: See-
Abe. Hanihiko; Harada. Hiroshi; Denda. Masahiko; Nagasawa.
Koichi; and Kono. Yoshio, 4.438.368, CI. 315-39.000.
Nagatsuka, KenicW, to Mittubishi Kakoki Kaisha Ltd.; Kakoki Ena-
neenng Service Co.. Ltd.; and Genshi-Ryoku Daiko Co.. Ltd. Auto-
inattc wall cjeamng machine. 4.437.202. CI. 15-320.000.
Naitoh. HiromiUu: See—
Nitto. Hajime; and Naitoh. Hiromitsu, 4.437.903. CI. 148-16000
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 29
Nikae. Kiyohiko: See—
Fukushima. Nobuo; Kitamura. ShiUi; Nakae. Kiyohiko; Ogawa,
IfrVi?^''°'*"*' ^°^°'< •"<! Hosono. Hidekazu. 4.438.231; CI.
523-240.000.
Nakagawa. Masao; and Nishida, Tatehiko, to Kancgafuchi Chemical
Industry Co., Ltd. Heat resistant expandable plastic particles and
molded anicles produced therefrom. 4,438.222. CI. 521-60.000.
Nakasawa. Satoshi: See—
Ueinura. Morito; Kishi, Kenichi; Nakagawa. Satoshi; and Kida,
Shuji. 4.438.193. CI. 430-505.000.
Nakj^ima, Hiroshi: See—
Miwa, Naoto; and Nak^ima. Hiroshi. 4.438.199. CI. 435-190.000.
Nak^ima. Motoo; and Mizusawa. Kiyoshi, to Kikkoman Corporation.
Method for determination of formaldehyde. 4.438,206, CI.
Nak^ima. Yoshinori, to Ricoh Co., Ltd. Input signal control device.
4,438.507. CI. 364-900.000.
Ndiamura. Keiichi; Haga. Kyosuke; and Mori. Yutaka, to Toyoda Koki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Steering force controller for a power steerins
device. 4.437.532. CI. 180-142.000.
Nakamura. Nobuo : See—
Tomita. Fusao; MaUuda, Yuzuru; Shirahata, Kunikatsu; Takahuhi.
Keiichi; Nakano, Hirofumi; Sato, Tomoyasu; Okubo. Shuji and
Nakamura, Nobuo. 4.438.197. CI. 435-119.000.
Nakano. Hirofumi: See—
Tomita, Fuuo; Matsuda, Yuzuru; Shirahata, KunikaUu; TakahMhi,
Keiichi; Nakano, Hirofumi; Sato, Tomoyasu; Okubo, Shuji; and
Nakamura, Nobuo, 4.438. 1 97. CI. 435- 1 1 9.000.
Nakano, Hishagi: See—
Aramaki, Minoru; Kita, Yasushi; Nakano. Hishagi; and Moroi,
Shiro, 4,438,086, CI. 423-448.000.
Nakano. Shozaburo: See—
Tateishi. Junji; Ishikawa, Takeharu; Nakano. Shozaburo; and Ni-
shiyama. Noboru, 4.437.906. CI. 148-26.000.
N^tano. Tadashi; Tamura, Hiroyuki; and Kubo, Naoki, to Sumitomo
Metal Mining Company Limited. Method for manufacture of arseni-
ous anhydride. 4,438,079, CI. 423-87.000.
Nakashima. Shinobu: See—
Tanaka, Chiaki; Nakashima, Shinobu; and Kondow, Makoto,
4.438.240. CI. 525-420.000.
Nakayama. Tadashi: See-
Mori. Kensuke; Matsumoto. Hiromi; Suga. Yozo; Nakayama,
Tadashi; and MaUumoto, Fumio, 4,437,909, CI. 148-111.000.
Nozawa, Tadao; Yamamoto, Takaaki; Nakayama, Tadashi; MaUu-
moto, Fumio; and Hayami, Satohiro, 4,437,910, CI. 148-112.000.
Nalewajek, David, to Allied Corporation. Recovery of gadolinium and
gallium oxides. 4,438,078, CI. 423-21.500.
Nail, James B.; and King, Jeffery J., to Brahams, Ronald Jay. Composi-
tion and method of masking. 4.438.227, CI. 524-33.000.
Namekata, Kiyokazu: See—
Kawakubo, Kazuo; Furuichi, Kauushi; Namekata, Kiyokazu;
Tanaka. Hidetoshi; Tohyama. Yashikuni; KaMmura, Toshirou;
Aoki, Tomohiro; and Honma, Toshio, 4,437.756. CI. 355-I4.00R.
Nandate, Masaaki: See—
Suguri. Masavoshi; Yamada, Kazuo; and Nandate, Masaaki,
4,438.063. CI. 264-311.000.
Naoki. Makoto: See—
Okada. Yoshio; Terauchi, Takashi; Naoki. Makoto; and Hino.
Masatoshi. 4,438,021, CI. 502-341,000.
Nardi, Dante; Tajana, Alberto; Motta, Gianni; Cazzulani, Pietro; and
Oraziani, Gabriele, to Recordati S.A. Therapeutically effective
derivatives of cystine. 4,438.133. CI. 424-300.000.
Narita. Ryuho; Yamamori, Keiyi; Oota, Hiroyuki; and Aoshima.
Tenitaka. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Electric rice
cooker. 4,438,324, CI. 219-441.000.
Narozny. Ronald S.. to Thomas A BetU Corporation. Three-row con-
nector for mass terminating flat cable. 4.437.723. CI. 339-99.00R.
Nathaniel, Elmer O,; and Eibert. John. Jr, Skating surface. 4,438,003,
CI. 252-12.000.
National Can Corporation: See-
Hinds. James J.; Hoeflich, John C; and Kolodziej, George C,
4,437,985. CI. 209-538.000. *
National Institute for Researches in Inorganic Materials: See—
Mitomo. Mamoru; Moriyoshi. Yusuke; Sakai. Toshikazu; and
Osaka. Toshiaki. 4,438,051, CI. 264-1.200,
National Research Development Corporation: See-
Graham. Neil B.. 4.438,258, CI. 528-361,000,
Jones. Robert L.; and Wilson, Nonnan H.. 4.438.136, CI.
424-309.000.
Mollan. Raymond A. B., 4,437,473, CI. 128-773.000.
Pham. Due T., 4.437,635, CI. 248-122.000.
Shirley, Martin W., 4,438,097, CI, 424-88.000.
National Starch and Chemical Corporation: See—
Tessler, Martin M.; and Neigel. Dennis V., 4.438.047. 01. 260-
513.00R.
Natsume, Toshio: See—
Miura. Hirohisa; Satou. Hiroshi; and NaUume. Toshio, 4,437,886,
CI. 75-67.0OR.
Naylor. Carter G,: See—
Nieh. Edward C. V.; and Naylor, Carter G.. 4.438.043, CI.
260-301.130.
NCR Corporation: See—
Romano-Moran, Roberto, 4,438.137. O. 427-93.000.
Nebel. Serpio: See—
Mathais. Henri; Comnandeur, Raymond; PontogUo. Achille; and
Nebel. Sergio, 4.438,027, a. 232-381.000.
^^t "1^?.^;^? ^"^ ^■'^'^ 'nc. Low-wattage solenoid. 4.43I.4I8,
CI. 339-233.000.
Ne^osta, Edward Mail box signal. 4.437,607, CI. 232-35.000.
Neiul, Dennis V,: See—
Tessler. Martin M,; and Neigel. Dennis V,. 4.438.047. CI. 260-
N*'!°1',^'^'^'^'y Implement for measuring skin temperatures. 4,437.471.
CI. 128-736.000. - r-
Nelson, Peter: See—
Turro. Jerome; and Nelson. Peter, 4.437,265. CI. 49-57.000,
Nelson, Philip E,; and Takada, Norihisa, to Purdue Research Founda-
A°AAi Method for controlling consistency of tomato producu.
Nelson, Wayne F,, to A, Schulman, Inc. Modified ionomer blend and
application thereof, 4,438,162, CI. 427-318.000.
Neptune Water Meter Company: See—
Karjalainen. William G., 4,437,344, CI. 73-197.000.
NesTier Corporation: See-
Davis. Walter G.. 4,437,434, CI. 119-45.00R.
Netteland, Loyal G.: See—
P^U'V. Robert E.; and Netteland, Loyal O.. 4,437.462, Q.
New Generation Poods, Inc.: See—
Colby. Ronald W.; and Spicer. Araold. 4.438.146. CI, 426-448.000.
Newman, Leon A.: See—
Chenausky, Peter P.; Newman, Leon A.; and Drinkwatar, Erroll
H„ 4,438.514, CI. 372-64,000.
Newman. Oliver M. G ; Palmer, David J.; and Pammenter, Robert V,,
to Electrolytic Zmc Company of Australuia Limited. Proceu for
solution control in an electrolytic zinc plant circuit. 4.437,933, CI.
Newton, Charles L.; and Fuini, Dennis L., to Air Producu and Chemi-
cals, inc. Recovery of power from vaporization of liquefied natural
gu. 4.437,312, CI, 60-648.000, ^
NOK Spark Plug Co., Ltd.: See-
Suzuki, Shin; and Sato. Toshihiko, 4,437.440. CI. 123.143.00A.
N'Guyen, Quang L,: See—
Koulbanis, Constantin; N'Guyen, Quang L,; Zabotto. Arlette; and
Plot, Josiane, 4,437,893, CI, 106-243.000.
Nicholu, Karl W.: See—
Rog, Joseph W,; WaiU. Charles O ; and Nicholas. Karl W..
4.438.391. CI. 324-71.100.
Nicholas Proprietary Limited: See—
Kaufman, Jeffrey L.. 4.438,083, CI. 423-419.00P.
Nicholson, Raymond; and Parker, Donald O. Coin detector apparatus,
4,437.558, CI, 194.97,00R.
Nieh, Edward C Y.; and Naylor, Carter G„ to Texaco Inc. Amphoteric
surfactants. 4,438,045, CI 260-501 130,
Nigmela, Tapio. Means for making a ski trail. 4,437,243, CI. 37-222.000.
Nihon Kaiheiki Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
OhMhi. Shigeo, 4,437,728, CI 350-96.200.
NUhof. W. A, J,, to U. S. Industnes, Inc. Poultry broiler cage. 4.437.433.
CI, 119-18,000.
Nilsson, Kenth: See—
Bolmgren, Jan; and Nilsson, Kenth, 4,438,441, CI. 346.140.00R.
Nippin Shokubai Kagako Kogyo Co., Ltd.; See—
Takata. Maaahiro; Aoki. Ryiyj; and Sato, Takahisa. 4,438,217. CI.
502-205.000.
Nippon Electric Co.. Ltd.: See—
Shoji, Masashi, 4,438,349, CI, 307-362,000.
Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha; See—
Matsumoto, Toyosaku, 4,438,510, CI. 369-271.000,
Okumura, Takatoshi, 4,437,379, CI, 84-1.220.
Nippon Gijutsu Boeki Co., Ltd.: See—
Yazawa. Nobuharu; and Sakaguchi, Yasunori, 4,438.403, CI.
328-152.000.
Nippon Kogaku K.K.: See—
Fuiiu, Takamiuu; Ogino, Makoto; Kariya, Michio; and Ichimura.
Takeo. 4.437,192, CI. 3-1900.
lizuka. Yutaka, 4,437,734, CI. 350-454,000,
Ohno, Masato; and Ohuwa, Keiji, 4,437,747, CI. 334-126.000.
Takahashi, Tomowaki; Konno, Kunio; and Saaaya, Tothihiro,
4.437.733. CI. 350-427,000.
Terui. Nobuhiko; and Magariyama. Kenichi. 4.437.7a. CI.
354-442.000,
Nippon Oil Companv. Ltd,: See—
Kubo. Kunimichi; Miyazaki. Yuunosuke; Yothikawa. Mamoru;
and Miyoshi, Mituii, 4,438,073, CI, 422-135.000.
Kubo, Toshihiko; Ichidate, Minoru; Kawai, Toahiyuki; Yonehara.
Sadao; Koiwai, Yoshihisa; and Endo, Kazuhiko, 4.437,883, CI.
75-0, 50C.
Morohuhi. Kazuo; Ki^ikawa, Teruo; and Iwai. Sakuya. 4,437,911.
CI. 156-322.000.
Nippon Oil and Fau, Co., Ltd.: See—
Araki, Maaatada; and Tanaka, Yukio, 4,437.800, CI. 407-1 19.00a
Nippon Oil Seal Industry Co., Ltd.: See-
Miyamoto, Yoshiaki. 4,437,673, CI. 277-63.000.
Nippon Soken, Inc.: See—
Egami, Tsuneyuki; Kawai, Hisaai; Kohama. Tokio; and Obayaahi,
Hideki, 4,437.343, CI. 73-204.000.
Iwamoto, Kenzi; and Omata. Katouhiro, 4,437.31 1, CI. 60-602.00a
Nippon Steel Corporation: See—
Purukawa. Takashi; and Endo, Michio, 4,437,903, CI I48-12.00F.
Mori, Kensuke; MaUumoto, Hiromi; Suga, Yozo; Nakayama,
Tadaahi; and MaUumoto. Fumio. 4.437,909. CI. 148-111.000.
Nitto. HiOime; and Naitoh. Hiromiuu. 4.437.903, CI. I4t- 16.000.
PI 30
LIST OF PATENTEES
^^^ J"^= Yamamoto. Tikaaki; Nikayinu, Tad«hi; Matsu-
moto, Fumio; and Hayanu, Satohiro. 4,437.910. CI. 148-112.000
Ozawa. Masaichi. 4,437.620. CI. 242-83.000.
^4537!94^ 'c'l °2&icOR'''***' "*"^ ^''^' ""* *^'°' ^'°^'
Sato, Takashi; and Ozawa, Tsutomu, 4.437.907. CI. 148-31.550
Nippon Tungsten Co., Ltd.: See—
Funikawa, Mitsuhiki; Miyahara, Michito; Kitahira, Takaahi-
Nippondenso Co., Ltd.: See—
''%8.3'S; ci: 32'£5'.SSr '■^^"^"^ "" '^'"°' '^^"y*'
Eguchi, Osamu; and Fukui. Tomonori. 4,437,391, CI 98-2 010
Isomura. Shigenori; Kobayashi, Akio; Kato, Katsushi; Kowada,
Ichiro; and Nishn, Sachio, 4,437,446. CI. 123-492 000
Ita Shinzo; Kato, Tateshi; Noma, Takumi; Sugimoto, Soichiro; and
Toiyama, Sagi, 4.437.341. CI. 73-1 19.00A.
Miyamoto. Yoshimi. 4,437,719, CI. 339-91.00R.
Nojin, Tadao; Kanemaru. Kenji; Nishikawa, Takayoshi; Mateu-
yama, Masahiro; and Ito, Yoji, 4,438.422, CI. 340-52.00F
Takahashi^ Hiroshi; Suzuki. Yukio; Matsuo. Masashi; Ono.
"4T7"2'5''cM2ft91 OW' ^^^ *^"°' ""* ^"*"'''' ^°^^*^'
Tsuchida, Takashi; Kondo, Nobuo; Okada, Kazukiyo; and Okuda.
Yutaka, 4.438,425, CI. 340-55.000. ^
Yasui, Toshio, 4,438,424, CI. 34O-52.00H.
Nir. Aharon; Amiel Abraham J.; and Krant, Jonathan M.. to Yeda
Keseuch & Development Co. Ltd. System for heat storage particu-
larly for using m agriculture. 4.437,263. CI. 47-l.OOR.
Nishida, Tatehiko: See—
^'^^t^^'^' ■"** Nishida. Tatehiko, 4.438.222. CI.
321-60.000.
Nishii. Sachio: See—
Isomura, Shigenori; Kobayashi. Akio; Kato. Katsushi; Kowada,
V, ... '*=*"™= ""^^ ^'s''"' Sachio. 4.437.446. CI. 123-492.000.
Nishikawa, Takayoshi: See—
Nojiri. Tadao; Kanemaru. Kenji; Nishikawa, Takayoshi; Matsu-
yama. Masahiro; and Ito. Yoji. 4,438.422, CI. 340-52 OOF
Nishikon, Tsutomu; and Yoshiki, Yasuo, to Toyo Kogyo Co.. Ltd • and
297-?62 000° ^■' ^'**' ^' ^^ reclining mechanum. 4.437.703. CI.
Nishimoto, Shigeni: See—
Gaino, Mitsunori; lijima, Ikuo; Nishimoto, Shigeni; Ikeda, Kui-
KT- .. <='>'ro: fd Fuj". Tokuo, 4,438.035, CI. 260-239 30B.
Nishimura, Masaaki: See—
^'*i^^, nl?'^'''' ^^ Nishimura, Masaaki, 4.438.525. CI.
Jo 1 -03.000.
Nishimura, Yoshichika: See—
'*M37!86?^c'r44-"o0R "''"*''' ""* Nishimura, Yoshichika,
Nishimura, Yuji: See—
Moriya, Shigeni; Yoshida, Akio; MaUunami, Munehani; Kubou,
msS'ioO*"**'' °**''' ""* Nishimura, Yuji, 4,437,684. CI.
Nishiyama, Noboru: See—
Tateishi, Junji; Ishikawa, Takehani; Nakano, Shozaburo; and Ni-
sjuyama, Noboni, 4,437.906, CI. 148-26.000.
Nissan Motor Co.. Ltd.: See—
"M5^34t a: 73-riffil°' ^'^'°'' ""' '^''"«*' ^'^""°"'
Kakimoto, Toshihiko, 4,437,653, CI. 267-140.100.
Monta, Katuhiro; and Kubota, Hitoshi, 4,437,310, CI. 60-562 000
Nozawa, Koji, 4,437.550, CI. 192-324.000.
Yamaguchi. Hiroshi, 4,437,442, CI. 123-417.000.
Yasuhara, Seishi, 4,437.444, CI. 123-458.000.
Nitschke, John S.: See—
T?s,8"7ra. ^iiSss"'' """"^ ""■■• '^' ^•^'^«- ^o""
Nitschke. Norman C: See—
TM/7.8"7ra. feilS'SoS'^' ^°"™" ""■■' "-^ '^•^'"''' ^°''"
**tTAkm,a. wiiS'SS"^' ^°™" ""■■' ""^ ^•'«'^*- '°'"'
Nino, Hajime; and Naitoh. Hiromitsu, to Nippon Steel Corporation.
.m>t437:9S?."cT?i|ll6S5r''"« ' «"'-™"«' '°" "'^^^ «^'
Nogita, Shunsuke: See—
't43^^°^a.tS^S.lSS)"''= ^•'«»'*' sy°j'= "<' 8^ '^-J'.
Ncuin. Tadao; Kanemani, Kenji; Nishikawa, Takayoshi; Matsuyama,
M«ahiro; and Ito Yoji, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd Wa^g mrthod
and system for vehicles. 4,438,422, CI. 340.52.00F.
Noma, Takumi: See—
Itov Shinzo; Kato. Tateshi; Noma, Takumi; Sugimoto, Soichiro; and
Toiyama, Seigi, 4.437.341, CI. 73-1 19.00A.
Nomadic Structures, Inc.: See—
Zeigler. Theodore R.. 4.437,275, CI. 52-109.000.
Nomoto, Reishi; Aldmoto, Masahiro; and Takahashi, Maaayoshi. to
cSn.4^f, S"l'^*3^0b0^'' ""^"^ ^~'""'' "^^"^ -
Nmnurt. Isshi; and AJcmj, Motonobu, to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha.
EtectnoJly dnven flow control valve assembly. 4,437,645. CI.
2jI-O3.U00.
March 20, 191k
Nordco Limited: See—
'"j;r3'7:2H*S."43*i:oS.*^ '°'" ""■■' "^ ^'«=''"' '^'»«" E-
Nordin, Ivan C: See—
^273*0OP ^**™''' *"** '^°''*'"' ^^•n C.. 4.438,092, Q. 424-
Nordmeyer, Roben A.: Set—
Headley James E. R.; Limburg, William R.; Nordmeyer, Robert
A; and Smith, Jay. III. 4.437.738. CI. 353-26.00R
Nordson Corporation: See—
Coker, WUliam R., 4,437,581, CI. 222-54.000.
Sprague, Clyde D., 4,437,594, CI. 222-544.000.
Noms, Roben D.: See—
^4?3"-n2(5o^ ^■' *"** '^°"''' '^°'*" ^•' '♦•*3«'0*0' CI.
North American Philips Electric Corp.: See—
K«,fc"'^'"i ^1°''" ^i '"'' !."«*'• •'°»«P'' C.. 4,438,369, CI. 315-49.000.
«r«.5 ^i^"^ ^•' '° '^''^T."' ^*'*'"*"^ Corporation. Continuous
?.43ro72";cr42;"5foS™*" '"*" ""* ^^'^^ "''" -"«*'•
''d^rg'^p°jirl?.*^37''5rc?^^^^^ "«*"«"•' -•'•'^•^
^ F^Z l^ Yamamoto Takaaki;Nakayama, Tadashi; Matsumoto,
Funuo; and Hayami, Satohiro, to Nippon Steel Corporation. Procesi
CI US^rn 000*'"""°""" electromagnetic steel sheet. 4.437.910.
'*°Ko«;o*"r?,*'''f°./i|Jl"°'t J''*"'''*'°'u'"*' *"»»'*• "'<1«^'' 'o Taiho
29°f49 50r' "* ****''** '""*'• ■♦•'♦37.215. CI.
Nuodex Inc.: See—
Petronella, Joseph, 4,438.038. CI. 260^14.000.
Nutter. Norman E to General Electric Company. Tuniing gear inter-
lock. 4,437,809. CI. 415-41 000
Nyffeler. Corti AG: See—
Buri. Hennann; and Karth. Beat, 4,437,292, Q. 53-357.000.
Oak Industnes Inc.: See—
r»K ^*I!^L"1*?' Anthony J., 4,438,301, CI. 200.16.00C.
Obayashi, Hideki: See—
Egami, Tsuneyuki; Kawai, Hisasi; Kohama, Tokio; and Obayashi.
Hideki, 4,437,345, CI. 73-204.000. "y«ni,
H«:"'°M yfK'^'l^^"y' ^°^ ^' 'o Omnitronics Research Corpora-
3SI.52I 000 '^""*^"°" personal security alann. 4,438,428. CI.
°M38,?2*?,*CI. 424-%"8 000^ Isoquinoline amidoxime derivatives.
°4,437.579?a**22'll2?Oo!. **"P*"""8 apparatus and removal tool.
O'Brian, Edward D.; andPhelan, Charles, to O'Brian, Edward D.
108-ll'foOO™*""''" employing a San-us linkage. 4,437,413, CI.
^?2'So7 00o''^''"' ^ Insulation support hanger. 4,437,282. CI.
Occidental Oil Shale. Inc.: See—
^''l66-S9^ ^' ""* McCarthy. Harry E.. 4.437.519. a.
Ochiai. Kuniaki; Horii, Masami; and Ishii, Hidekazu, to Tokyo Electric
Co., Ltd. Dot pnnter head. 4,437,775, CI. 400-124.000.
O Connor, Rodney J., to Romec EnvironmenUl Research & Develoo-
ment. Inc. Dnbble ring. 4,437,583, CI. 222-108.000.
Oda, Shinichiro: See—
Kamei, Hideaki; Yamanaka. Kazuhiko; Fujisawa, Hanihiko; and
Oda, Shinichiro, 4,438,468. CI. 360-92.000.
Odaka, Kenuro, to Sony Corporation. Method for editing of PCM
signal and apparatus thereof. 4,438,464, CI. 360-13 000
Oeder Dieter; Ziegler. Walter; Daeuble, Manfred; Dietsche, Wolfram;
Hettche, Albert; and Weiss, Stefan, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft
Lubricant, containing esterified ethylene/acrylic acid or ethylene/-
maleic acid copolymers as the active ingredient, for moulding chlo-
rine-containing thermoplastics. 4,438,008, CI. 252-56 OOR
Ofiicine Meccaniche Savi Antonio S.p.A.: See—
Savi. Antonio. 4.437.398. CI. 99-587.000.
Ogawa, Hitoshi. to Miteubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Shaft seal for
pump means. 4,437,821, CI. 418-104.000.
Ogawa, Tadatoshi: See—
Fukushima. Nobuo; Kitamura, Shuji; Nakae, Kiyohiko; Ogawa,
J,T^'i^!lJU'^°'*"'' ^°^' *"<^ Hosono, Hidekazu. 4,438,238. CI.
323-240.000.
Ogino. Makoto: See—
°%7.^?ci. i°60-^331°(So.'^- "-"* ^"'^" ''""" arrangement
Oh. Indong. Protrusio cup. 4.437.193. CI. 3-1.912.
O'Hanlon, Tom A.; Madonna, Peter L.; and Wallace, Gearld F . to
ri°Ti< i''i'?!S!?* ^'^^ ""** *"*'** ^*'*' <*""•"« apparatus. 4.437,525,
Ohashi. Shigeo, to Nihon Kaiheiki Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Photo-
switch. 4,437,728, CI. 350-96.200.
Ohba, Takeo; and Koga, Hirohisa, to Sony Corporation. Deflectable
transducer mounting assembly. 4,438,469. CI. 360-109.000.
Ohba, Takeo: See—
'**?2?'^,&"''*: Eguchi, Takeo; and Ohba, Takeo, 4,438,465. CI.
3OU-22.000.
°'jiLlP?°"°"' f° ^'"*' ^^^ Co., Ltd. Electronic fuel injection
aiMAnox ""^**'°** '"°' interaal combusUon engines. 4,438,496,
MARCH 20. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 31
Ohloff, Gunther: See—
Skonanetz. Werner; and OhlofT, Gunther, 4.438,023, CI. 252-
^*l'^I*4oIC§>"""' '"'* ^°"^' S*'" •' L Ear-cap. 4.437,538, CI.
lo 1*1 29.000.
Ohmura. Hideo, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Thin
sheet sorting apparatus. 4.437,571. CI. 209-551.000.
Ohnishi, Toshihiro: See—
Murase, Ichiki; Fujiu. Fumio; Ohnishi. Toshihiro; and Tamura,
Toshifumi, 4,438,262, CI. 536-43.000.
Ohno, Masato; and Ohsawa, Keiji. to Nipiwn Kogaku K.K. Device for
mounting an electronic Hash unit. 4.437,747, CI. 354-126.000.
Ohsawa, Keiji: See—
Ohno, Masato; and Ohsawa, Keiji, 4,437,747, CI. 354-126.000.
Ohu, Ryuji, to Jidosha Kiki Co., Ltd. Power-servo booster. 4,437,390.
CI. 92-84.000.
Ohu. Takayuki; Yana^a. Yukio; and Hino. Seiichi, to Mitsubishi Chem-
ical Industries, Limited. Copolyamide acid and copolyimide.
4,438,256, CI. 528-188.000. *^
Ohtsuki, Osamu: See—
ChibaU, Ichiro; Sumi, Akihiko; Ohtsuki, Osamu; and Izutsu,
Nozomu, 4,438,044, CI. 260-501.120.
Okada, Kazukiyo: See—
Tsuchida. Takashi; Kondo, Nobuo; Okada, Kazukiyo; and Okuda,
Yutaka, 4,438,425, CI. 340-55.000.
Okada, Yoshio; Terauchi. Takashi; Naoki, Makoto; and Hino. Masato-
shi, to Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Catalyst for dehy-
drocoupling of toluene or xylene. 4,438,021, CI. 502-341.000.
Okamura Corporation: See-
Suzuki, Hideo, 4,438.318, CI. 219-137.0PS.
Okamura, Shozo: See—
Minami, Ryohei; Okamura, Shozo; Sunami, Yoshihiko; Hosoi,
Takuji; and Kanou, Takuo, 4,437,974, CI. 208-10.000.
Okinaka, Yutaka; Smith, Craig G.; and Smith, Lawrence E.. to Bell
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Copper plating procedure.
4,437,948. CI. 2O4-52.0OR.
Okubo. Shuji: See—
TomiU. Fusao; Matsuda, Yuzuru; Shirahata. Kunikatsu; Takahashi,
Keiichi; Nakano, Hirofumi; Sato, Tomoyasu; Okubo, Shuji; and
Nakamura. Nobuo. 4.438.197. CI. 435-119.000.
Okuda. Kuniteru; and Morita. Jun. Consunt flow control valve.
4,437,493, CI. 138-45.000.
Okuda, Yoshiro: See—
Mishima, Akio; Okuda, Yoshiro; Harada, Tosiharu; Mukaizaka,
Akira; and Imai, Tomoyuki. 4.437.881, CI. 75-0.5AA.
Okuda. Yutaka: See—
Tsuchida, Takashi; Kondo, Nobuo; Okada, Kazukiyo; and Okuda,
Yuuka, 4,438,425. CI. 340-55.000.
Okugawa, Michihidc, to Dainichi-Nippon Cables, Ltd. Process for
treating cyanic liquid containing copper(I) cyanide complex ion.
4.437.996, CI. 210-718.000.
Okumura. Hiroshi: See—
Tazima. Yoshihisa; Morishima, Masayuki; Okumura, Hiroshi; and
Kasahara. Shin-ichi, 4,438,311. CI. 219-10.49R.
Okumura. Takatoshi, to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha. Elec-
tronic musical instrument of waveform memory readout tvoe.
4,437,379, CI. 84-1.220. *^
Oleck, Stephen M.; and Wilson, Robert C, Jr., to Mobil Oil Corpora-
tion. Two-stage hydrocarbon dewaxing hydrotreating process.
4,437,976, CI. 208-97.000.
Olin Corporation: See —
Beck. Alexander F.; and Winter. Joseph. 4.437.943. CI. 204-16.000.
Grynkewich. Gregory W., 4,438,013, CI. 252-146.000.
Pryor, Michael J.; and Tyler, Derek E., 4.437.508. CI. 164-418.000.
Olschewski, Armin; Brandenstein. Manfred; Walter. Lothar; Horling.
Peter; Hetterich. Hermann; and Kunkel, Heinrich. to SKF Kugel-
lagerfabriken GmbH. Non-machining method of manufacturing a
solid-bottomed or internally flanged bearing race. 4.437.214, CI.
29-149.5DP.
Olschewski, Armin; Hetterich, Hermann; and Horling, Peter, to SKF
Kugellagerfabriken GmbH. Method of making a thin-walled bearing
bushing. 4,437,330, CI. 72-358.000.
Olson, Floyd V. Particle spreader apparatus. 4,437,613, CI. 239-688.000.
Olson, George E.. to A. O. Smith Harvestore Producu. Inc. Overload
mechanism for the system of a bottom silo unloader. 4.437,806, CI.
414-307.000.
Olson. Raymond E., to Profold, Inc. Bottom sheet feed system.
4.437,658. CI. 271-125.000.
Olympus Optical Co.. Ltd.: See—
Ikari. Kazuo. 4,437.750, CI. 354-155.000.
Sato, Eiichi; Shimizu, Akira; and Yanagisawa, Kazuhisa, 4,438,186,
CI. 430-53.000.
Omae, Michinobu; and Hirano, Takashi, to Yamato Scale Company,
Ltd. Combination weighing machine. 4,437,527, CI. 177-25.000.
Omata, Katsuhiro: See—
Iwamoto, Kenzi; and Omata, KaUuhiro, 4.437,311, CI. 60-602.000.
Omnetics, Inc.: See-
Lambert. Roger T., 4,437,726, CI. 339-252.00P.
Omnitronics Research Corporation: See—
Ober, John W.; and Ferry, John M., 4,438,428, CI. 340-521.000
Omori, Hiroshi: See—
Anahara, Meiji; and Omori, Hiroshi, 4,437,302, CI. 57-333.000.
Omron Tateisi Electronics Company: See —
Uchida. Yasuo, 4,438,326, CI. 235-379iX».
Ono, Hironobu: See—
Takahashi, Hiroshi; Suzuki, Yukio; MaUuo, Masashi; Ono,
Hironobu; Yoshida, Shuzo; Ueda, Kazuo; and Sueishi, Motoharu,
4,437,445, CI. 123-491.000.
Ono, Masayuki. to Kabushiki Kaisha Tomoku. Proceu of manufactur-
ing of reinforced corrugated cardboard type packaging container.
4.437.850, CI. 493-89.000. r- i— • •
Onoda, Shigeyoshi; and Nagaoka. Tateki. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Sheet feeding device. 4.437,656, CI. 271-10.000.
Oota, Hiroyuki: See—
Nariu, Ryuho; Yamamori, Keryi; Oota, Hiroyuki; and Aoshima.
Teruuka, 4.438,324, CI. 219-441.000.
Ooue, Michio: See—
Sudo. Ryoichi; Shoji. Fusaii; Watanabe. Takeshi; Suzuki. Kenkichi;
and Ooue, Michio, 4.437,731. CI. 350-340.000.
Opasov, Sunislav I.: See—
Moskalik. Leonid M.; Ryadchikov, Vladimir E.; Bykov, Anatoly
P.; Kulesh, Vladimir P.; Opasov, Sunislav I.; and Oriov. Anatoly
A.. 4,438,393, Ci. 324-83.00D.
Opelika Manufacturing Corporation: See—
Brocklehurst. Charles E.; and Cooper. Bnice H., 4,437.369, CI.
83-18.000.
Oppenlacndcr. Knut; Strickler. Rainer; Seib. Karl; and Naegele. Paul,
to BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Cosmetic formulations containing oxy-
ethylated diphenylamines u sun screen agents. 4.438.094, CI.
424-59.000.
Oppermann. Wilhelm: See—
8'I*5I'„ J^''"*' Tuebner. Helwig; and Oppermann. Wilhelm,
4.438.264, CI. 536-91.000.
Optical Radiation Corp.: See—
Hahs, Gregory L., 4,437,194, CI. 3-13.000.
Oriol. Marcel. Insullation for monitoring an endless cloth conveyor
belt. 4.437,563, CI. 198-810.000.
Oriov, Anatoly A.: See—
Moskalik. Leonid M.; Ryadchikov. Vladimir E.; Bykov. Anatoly
P.; Kulesh, Vladimir P ; Opasov, Stanislav I.; and Oriov, Anatoly
A., 4,438.393. CI. 324-83.00D.
Om. John F.: See—
McGrann. Harold J.; Oni, John F.; and Pallaver, Matthew C,
4.437.351. CI. 73-862.050.
Omdorff. Roy L.. Jr.: See-
Kramer. James H.; Omdorff. Roy L.. Jr.; and Stephens, James M.,
4.437.688, CI. 285-95.000.
Ome. Laurence E, Variable gain amplifier. 4.438.410. CI. 330-278.000
O'Rourke, Joseph D.; and Katcher. Jay H.. to General Foods Corpora-
tion. Process for making an improved dry inst.int pudding mix.
4.438.148,0.426-579.000.
Osaka. Toshiaki: See—
Mitomo. Mamoru; Moriyoshi. Yusuke; Sakai. Toshikazu; and
Osaka, Toshiaki, 4,438,051, CI. 264-1.200.
Oshiage, Katsunori: See—
Hosaka. Akio; Yamamoto, Akito; and Oshiage, Kauunori,
4.437.342. CI. 73-1 I9.00A.
Oshiki, Mitsumasa; and Kawakami, Susumu. to FujiUu Limited. Mag-
netic head for perpendicular magnetic recording system. 4.438.471.
CI. 360-125.000.
Oswald, Joseph A., Jr.. to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Solder bonding process. 4,437,236, CI. 29-879.000,
Ota. Hiroshi: See—
Yokoyama, Masao; Kon, Masaharu; and Ota, Hiroshi, 4,437,682, CI.
280-764.100.
Ou, Seiiti: See—
Sauuki, Teruhiu; Ou. Seiiti; and Tabata, Setsuko. 4.438.025. CI.
252-545.000.
Ouwa, Shuji: See—
Shida. Masaharu; Ueda. Makoto; Ouwa. Shuji; Mandai. Masaaki;
and Sato, Katsuhiko, 4,437.769, CI. 368-204.000.
Otis Engineering Corporation: See—
Canalizo. Carlos R.. 4.437.514. CI. 166-53,000.
Otto. Gerhard: See—
Bredow. Walter; and Otto. Gerhard. 4.437.224. CI. 29-568.000.
Outboard Marine Corporation: See—
Billingsley. Henry C. 4,437,448. CI. 123-577.000.
Owens-Comin| Fiber^las Corporation: See-
Gaul. David J.; Hinze. Jay W.; and Perkins. Richard A.. 4.438.518.
CI. 373-39.000.
Yeager. Raymond W.; and Weittman, Mark R., 4,437,542, CI.
181-290.000.
Oxon Italia S.p.A.: See—
Subile, Nicolo; Motta, Raimondo; and Gosso, Giancarlo.
4,438,276, CI. 560-13.000.
Ozaki, Nobuo; and Hosokawa, Mikio, to Maeda Industries. Ltd. Double
lever assembly for bicycle speed control. 4.437.357. CI. 74-475.000.
Ozawa. Masaichi. to Nippon Steel Corporation. Method and apparatus
for gathering rings or wire rods into coils. 4.437.620. CI. 242-83.000.
Ozawa, Shigeni: See—
Hayasaka, Tadao; Suzuki, Masahiro; Ozawa, Shigeni; and Takeya.
Yoshiaki. 4.437.890. CI. 75-244.000.
Ozawa. Tsutomu: See-
Sato. Takashi; and Ozawa, Tsutomu, 4,437,907, CI. 148-31.550.
Ozen Co., Ltd.: See—
Shiseki, Yutaka; Yagi, Junichi; and Miura. Yasuyuki, 4,438,358, CI.
310-51.000.
Pace Incorporated: See-
Sylvia. Frank. 4,438,322, CI. 219-236.000.
1040 O.G.— 54
PI 32
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
Packer. Lawrence G.; and Schlossmacher, Edward J., to SUndard Oil
Com^y (Indiana). Fiber-grade terephthalic acid recovered from
the emuent from paraxylene oxidation in acetic acid and the catalytic
hydrogenation of the oxidation effluent in the presence of metallic
platmum family metals. 4,438,279. CI. 562-416.000
Padilla, Joseph R.: See—
Richardson, Emmett M.; Chatas. Angelos T; and Padilla. Joseph
R., 4,437,521, CI. 166.341.000.
"""i^' J^'*'' ^' '° ^""nghouse Electric Corp. Current limiter and
VAR generator utilizing a superconducting coil. 4,438,474, CI.
361-58.000.
Palacios-Mendoza, Eliodoro. Method of recovering silver from solid
and liquid photographic waste. 4,437,889, CI. 75-1 18 OOP
Pallaver. Matthew C.: See—
McGrann. Harold J.; Om. John F.; and Pallaver. Matthew C
4.437.351. CI. 73-862.050.
Palmer. David J.: See—
Newman Oliver M. G.; Palmer, David J.; and Pammenter, Robert
v., 4,437.953. CI. 204-119.000.
Palmer. Dennis L.: See—
Meny. Allan H.; and Palmer. Dennis L., 4,437,793, CI. 405-212 000
PaJotai, JoMef. to Chemokomplex Vegyipari Gepes Berendezes Export-
Import VaJlalat. Apparatus for making particleboard by a continuous
extrudmg technique of particulated materials. 4,437,824, CI
425-131.100.
Pammenter, Robert V.: See—
Newman Oliver M. G.; Palmer, David J.; and Pammenter, Robert
v., 4,437,953, CI. 204-119.000.
Pankratz, Lawrence A.; and Comiea, Donald G.. to Liquipak Interna-
tional. Inc. Carton filling apparatus. 4,437,498, CI. 141-89 000
Papantoniou, Christos: See—
Guillon, Michel; Mondet. Jean; Papantoniou, Christos; and Van-
denbossche, Claudine, 4,438,140, CI. 424-61.000.
Papazian, Harold A., to United Sutes of America, Air Force. Method
of determining battery life. 4.438, 18i, CI. 429-91.000.
Paradyne Corporation: See—
Korzik, James L.; and Wissman, Thomas, 4,437,717, CI. 339-
^^t^lnf^^ '° Mankouski, Charles. Step ladder. 4,437,545, CI.
182-171.000.
Parekh, Dhan N.; and Schweyen. Paul R., to Carborundum Abrasive
Company. Flexible backing material for use in coated abrasives
4,437,865, CI. 51-298.000.
Parfree, Colin S.; and Worthington, Peter, to International Standard
Electnc Corporation. Optical fibre cables. 4,437,729, CI. 350-96.230.
Paris Manufacturing Company, Inc.: See^
Sanko, John R.. 4.437.246. CI. 38-25.000.
Park Ohio Industries, Inc.: See—
Cachat. John F.. 4.438,310, CI. 219-10.430.
^'♦,438!42Tci^34<?539'oS.*'^ "^"^ transceiver for disabled car.
Parker, Donald O. : See-
Nicholson, Raymond; and Parker, Donald O., 4,437,558, CI. 194-
Parry, Richard J.: See-
Potter, WUliam D.; Barclay. Andrew C; Dunning. Reginald; and
Parry. Richard J. 4.438,212. CI. 501-73.000.
Partanen. John F Synthetic asphalt mixtures and processes for makinfi
them. 4.437,896. CI. 106-273.00R. *
Pascoe. Robert D.. to American Standard Inc. Reset apparatus for
railroad track circuits. 4,437.632. CI. 246-34.00R.
Patent-Treuhand Gesellschaft fur elektrische Gluhlampen mbH: See-
Zuchtnegel. Anton, 4,438,372, CI. 315-224.000.
Patrick. William J.: See—
^iS.'ti3t9Tcf V5?Sf.'obo''"'*^ '■' "' ''^^''' ^°"""
Patt, Steven L., to Varian Associates. Inc. Method for suppression of
acoustic ringing in NMR measurements. 4,438,400, CI. 324-312 000
Paul, Marsha A.: See—
°^?i?Jl;«*^~'** ^■'' ■"** ^'^' ^^^"*^ A- ♦.438.254, CI.
Paul. Volker: See—
Holmwood, Graham; Frohberger, Paul-Ernst; Brandes, Wilhelm
and Paul. Volker, 4,438.122, CI. 424-263.000.
Paul Wurth S.A.: See—
^yj^"if •i:5°"= Ugille, Edouard; and Boever, Jean, 4,437,796, CI.
406-25.000.
PCUK Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann: See—
Mathais, Henri; Commandeur, Raymond; Pontoglio, Achille: and
Nebel, Sergio. 4,438,027, CI. 252-581.000.
Pearce, Enc W. J., to Rolls-Royce Limited. Cooled vane for a sas
turbme engine. 4,437,810. CI. 415-1 15.000.
Peche, Gerhard: See—
^Tmyh cnoaTi'oOfi'*"^*'*' °"'^**= ""* ^"8*. Hans,
Pedersen, Ernst L.: See—
^ a''42f 104 000**"' ^''*"" *■' "** ^'^"^ E™" L- M38.100.
Peehs, Martin: See—
^- J*^fi^8; Gndel, Gerhard; and Peehs, Martin, 4,438,050,
Peerman, Dwight, to Henkel Corporation Polyester polyoU from
bishydroxymethyl tricyclo compounds and caprolactone and i»lv-
urethanes based thereon. 4,438.225. CI. 521-172.000.
Peers-Trevarton. Charles A., to Cordis Corporation Method for mak-
',",1 ir»"J!l^"'*"*^'°'' "'■' ""* '♦•« CO'' """Ic thereby. 4.437,474, CI.
1 28-784.000.
Pelz, David T Golf practice putting track. 4.437,669, CI. 273-I86.00C.
felzl, Gerhard: See —
Zaschke. Horst; Schafer. Wolfgang; Deutscher. Hans-Joachim;
I^mus. Dietnch; and Pelzl, Gerhard, 4,438.268, Q. 544-3 1 5.000.
renco, Sergio: See —
Suarato, Antonino; Penco, Sergio; Arcamone, Federico; and
Casazza. Anna M., 4,438, 105, CI. 424- 1 80.000.
Pennwalt Corporation: See—
McGraw, Isaac R., 4,438,129, CI. 424-273.00R.
McGraw, Isaac R., 4,438,134, CI. 424-300.000.
Penny & Giles Transducers Limited: See—
Dixon, James M.; and Witt, Geoffrey R., 4.437,343, CI. 73-182.000.
renty, Robert A.: See —
LalUye, Paul G.; Bjerklie, John W.; and Penty. Robert A
4,437.217, CI. 29-157.400. ^ '
Pergrale, Jean: See—
^*Cr250O63 06S^'°"*' ^'"' " • ""* P^'Krale. Jean. 4,438,334,
Perkin-EJmer Corp.. The: See—
AuMchnitt, Christoper P., 4,437,760, CI. 355-133.000.
Perkin-Elmer Limited: See—
^°256^59'\m'^ ^''' '"*' *^"'"' ^™" 8- 4.438.329, CI.
Perkins, Richard A.: See—
°a.' 3^73^39 iio"'""' ■'"^ ^ • ""* ***'^"*' ^^"^ ^- *'*3«.3>8.
Pemicka, Martin: See—
^"I'^i,"'™'' '^'<^*""d. Paul; and Pemicka. Martin. 4.437,543. Q.
1B2-2.000.
Perrott. Lynn F to Corbett, Scott S., Jr. Wheeled trailer frame carry-
ing unit attachment for lift truck. 4,437.807, CI. 414-620 000
Pesthn, Norman F.: See— "^-o^^uw.
^'^Si^'loR "**"' ^" ""* ^"^''"' ^°™*" ^' 4.437.453, CI. 126-
Peterman, Lee G.; and Staebel, Raymond J., to Atlantic Richfield
tympany. System for temperature control of a Claus sulfur unit
thermal reactor. 4,438,069. CI. 422-62.000
Peters, Albin: See—
Wiczcr, Max; and Peters, Albin, 4,437,664, CI. 273-121.00A.
Peters, John V.: See—
Fancey, Everett G.; Peters, John V.; and Tucker, Russell E..
4,437,254, CI. 43-4.000.
Petersen, Uwc; Stadler, Peter; Lockhoff, Oswald; Zeiler, Hans-Joa-
chim; and Metzgcr. Karl G., to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Sisomicin
compounds. 4,438,260, CI. 536-13.900.
Peterson, Craig B.: See—
^"n***i »f^^? h' ^^^"^n- David G.; Cornish, Anthony L.; Hosier,
of ,^7;:J^-SS?°"' ^■^'** ^' ■"<• Peterson, Craig B., 4,438,494,
CI. 364-200.000.
Peterson, Francis C, to Illinois Tool Works Inc. AdjusUble shim
system. 4,437,784, CI. 4O3-W8.O0O. aj«»«we smm
Pemo, Ferdinand C, and Klauber, Gerald, to United Sutes of America,
7?^-^i,AAX,°^..°l.S^^ organic-retina (pyroelectric) vidicon.
4,437,844, CI. 445-5.000.
Petkovic-Luton. Ruzica, to Exxon Research and Engineering Co.
Thermal mechanical treatment for enhancing high temperature prop-
erties of cast austenitic steel structures. 4,437,900, CI. 148-12 OOE
Petronella. Joseph, to Nuodex Inc. Process for the production of oil-
soluble metal salts. 4,438,038, CI. 260-414.000.
Petros, Andrew J., to Mesu Machine Company. Apparatus for deband-
ing coiled strip. 4,437,223, CI. 29-564.300.
Petrovich, Vojislav. Froth fioution method for recovering zirconium
minerals. 4.437,983, CI. 209-166.000.
Peyton, Richard H.: See—
Hutchins, Charles K.; Thornton, Donald I.; and Peyton, Richard
H.. 4,437,986, CI. 210-130.000.
Pfeifer, Josef; and Rheude, Alfred, to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft
Containers for X-ray films or the like. 4,438,164, Q. 428-35.000.
Pham, Due T., to National Research Development Corporation. Panto-
graph linkage system. 4,437.635. a. 248-122.000.
Phelan. Charles: See—
0'Bjjan.^^ward D.; and Phelan. Charles. 4.437.413. a.
Philip Morris Industrial Incorporated: See
McCue, John P., 4,438,170. CI. 428-207.000.
Philipp Harald, to Tektronix. Inc. Signal sampling system. 4.438,404.
CI. 328-63.000.
Philipp, Helmut; and Kurth, Wilfried, to Jagenberg Werke AG. Method
for the operation of a cross-cutting apparatus. 4,437,370, CI.
oJ-23.0UO.
Phillips, Jeffrey; and Takei, Hirodii. to United Chemi-Con. Inc. Double
layer capacitor. 4,438.481, CI. 361-433.000.
Phillips Petroleum Company: See—
Casperson, John R., 4,438,087, CI. 423-450.000.
Funk, Gary L., 4,437,977. CI. 208-113.000.
Jensen. Bruce A., 4,438,499, CI. 364-501.000.
Marwil, Stanley J., 4,437,941, CI. 203-50.000.
Pollock, Lyle W., 4,438,161, CI. 427-215.000.
WUt, Mason S., 4,438,074, CI. 422-135.000.
Picard, Joseph A. R.: See^
Boy«ijieff^, George I.; and Picard, JoMph A. R., 4.437,524. a.
March 20. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 33
Pickens. John W.; Abraham, John IC.; Mintus, Raymond E.; and
Thomas. Millicent H., to Republic Steel Corporation. Batch-annealed
dual-phase steel. 4,437,902. CI 148-12.00F.
Pickett, Trammell. Camera adapter. 4,437,730, CI. 350-257.000.
Pieper, Henner: See—
Seitz. Hans; Rach. Heinz-Dieter; Pieper, Henner; and Frerichs,
Udo, 4.437.503, CI. 152-209.00R.
Pierburg GmbH & Co.. KG: See—
Baumgartner, Hans, 4,437,386. CI. 9I-363.00R.
Piettch, Hartmut; Turke, Wolfgang; Bareuther, Ernst; Kampf, Fritz;
and Bings, Hubert, to Metallgesellschaft AG; and Vereinigte Alumi-
num-Werke AG. Method of extracting gold and silver from an ore.
4,438,076, CI. 423-30.000.
Piljay, Robert E.; and Netteland, Loyal G., to Figgie International Inc.
Pneumatic head harness. 4,437,462, CI. 128-207.000.
Pilkington Brothers PLC: .See-
Potter, William D.; Barclay, Andrew C; Dunning, Reginald; and
Parry, Richard J., 4,438,212, CI. 501-73.000.
Pinkhasov, Eduard, to Welbilt Electronics Die Corporation. Method of
and apparatus for the vapor deposition of material upon a substrate.
4.438.153. CI. 427-37.000.
Pitchinger, Franz: See—
Uurenz, Werner, 4.437.334, CI. 73-35.000.
Pissiotas, Georg: See—
Fory, Werner; Martin, Henry; and Pissiotas, Georg, 4,437,879, CI.
71-96.000.
PitUro, Richard J., to Krautkramer-Branson, Inc. Ultrasonic thickness
measuring instrument. 4,437,332, CI. 73-I.ODV.
Pkhakadze, Oeorgy A.: See—
Lipatova, Tatyana E.; Vasiichenko, Dmitry V.; Pkhakadze, Ge-
orgy A.; and Konoplitskaya, Xenya L., 4.438,249, CI. 528-61.000.
Plasmine Corporation, The: See-
Emerson, Ralph W., Sr., 4,437,894, CI. 106-238.000.
Plastics Engineering Company: See—
■ Lee. Chung J., 4,438,233, CI. 524-299.000.
Monacelli, Walter J., 4,438,280, CI. 562-457.000.
Plattner, Robert F.; Arend. Raymond J.; and VerBerkmoes, John A., to
Bastian Blessing Co., Inc. Air heated sandwich bin. 4,437,396, CI.
99-475.000.
Pleion Corporation: See—
Maguirc, Paul R., 4,437,286, CI. 52-506.000.
Pless, Janos: See-
Bauer, Wilfried; Cardinaux, Francois; Huguenin, Rene; Pless,
Janos; and Sandrin, Edmond, 4,438,103, CI 424-177.000.
Plot, Josiane: See—
Koulbanis, Constantin; N'Guycn, Quang L.; Zabotto, Arlette; and
Plot, Josiane, 4,437,895, CI. 106-245.000.
Pluvinage, Alain: See—
Sussmeyer, Robert; Pluvinage, Alain; and Moenaert, Christian,
4,437,940, CI. 203-49.000.
Pocock, John F. E.: See-
Harry, leuan L.; Krishnakumar, Suppayan M.; Jolly, Walter R.;
Beck, Martin H.; and Pocock, John F. E., 4,437,825, CI.
425-145.000.
Podszun, Wolfgang: See—
Schmitz-Josten. Robert; Suling, Carlhans; Podszun, Wolfgang;
Bomer, Bruno; Borgardt, Manfred; and Walkowiak, Michael,
4,437,836, CI. 433-199.000.
Polaroid Corporation; See-
Alston, Lawrence E., 4,438,453, CI. 358-78.000.
Pollack, Dieter: See—
Banke, Karl-Heinz; Hering, Elisabeth; Lobel, Wilfried; Pollack,
Dieter; Wiedemann, Gunter; Grell, Ute; and Schuler, Ingo,
4,438,053, CI. 264-25.000.
Pollock, Lyle W., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Iron-containing
refractory balls for retorting oil shale. 4,438,161, CI. 427-215.000.
Polygram GmbH: See—
Bluethgen, Bjoem. 4.438.522, CI. 375-27.000.
Polysar Limited: See —
Lee, Ivan S., 4,438.232. CI. 524-272.000.
Schwarz, Herbert F., 4,438,230, CI. 524-151.000.
Ponsford, Roger J.; and Howarth, Thomas T., to Beecham Group
Limited. Antibiotics. 4,438,101, CI. 424-114.000.
Ponticello, Ijnazio S.; Hollister, Kenneth R.; and Tuites. Richard C, to
Eastman Kodak Company. Polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated
amide compounds. 4.438,278, CI. 560-205.000.
Pontc^io, Achille: See—
Mathais, Henri; Commandeur, Raymond; Pontoglio, Achille; and
Nebel, Sergio, 4,438,027, CI. 252-581.000.
Poore, William H.: See—
Oeppelt, Elmo W.; and Poore. William H., 4,437,329, CI.
72-299.000.
Portec, Inc.: See—
StoUer, David A., Jr.; Robertson, James C; and Matyas, Tibor,
4,437,410, a. 105-378.000.
Pocsati. Mario, to Finike Italiana Marposs S.p.A. Gauge for the dimen-
sional checking of a mechanical piece. 4,437,239, CT. 33-143.00L.
Potter, Charles, to Go-Jo Industries, Inc. Dispensing cartridge.
4.437.589. CI. 222-327.000.
Potter. William D.; and Kiamil, Sinan B., to Smith and Nephew Associ-
ated Companies Ltd. Cured preuure sensitive adhesives. 4.438,177,
a. 428-335.000.
Potter. William D.; Barclay, Andrew C; Dunning, Reginald; and
Parry, Richard J., to Pilkington Brothers PLC. Fluorine-free calci-
um-ilumino«iIicate glattes. 4.438,212, CI. 501-73.000.
Poudrier Frere Ltee: See—
Fortin. Paul; Michaud, Paul; and Pemicka, Martin. 4.437.543, Q.
182-2.000.
Power Spectra. Inc.: See—
Davtt. Steven J.. 4.438.331. CI. 250-21 1.OOJ.
Powers, Edward J., to Fiber Industries, Inc. Adhesive topcoated poly-
ester material and process for incorporating same into rubber.
4.437.919, CI. 156-329.000.
Powers. Edward J., to Fiber Industries, Inc Adhesive activated polyes-
ter fibrous material. 4,438,178, CI. 428-289.000.
Powers. Kerns H.. to RCA Corporation. Transcoder for sampled
television signals. 4.438,452. CI. 358-13.000.
Prehler, Richard: See—
Modcrlak, Helmut; Koschinek, Gunter; Zinsser. Rolf; Prehler,
Richard; and Kretschmann. Bemd, 4,437,827, CI. 425-378.00S.
Premi, Mauro: See—
Tmzzi, Ferdinando; and Premi. Mauro, 4.437,298, CI. 57-22.000.
Truzzi, Ferdinando; and Premi, Mauro, 4.437.299, CI. 57-22.000.
Preston, John C. to Helene Curtis Industries. Inc. Pearlesceni sham-
poo. 4.438.096, CI. 424-70.000.
Pretzcr, Wayne R.: See—
Habib, Mdhammad M.; and Pretzer, Wayne R., 4,438,020, CI.
252-162.000. ,
Preuss, Alfred: See—
Wirz. Burkhardt; and Preuss. Alfred. 4,437,407, CI. 101 -409.000.
Pridy, Whetstine B Poruble oil well turbine collar removinfi device.
4.437.218, CI. 29-240 000
Procter & Gamble Company, The: See-
Bush, Rodney D., 4,438,246, CI. 526-298.000.
DelGreco, Angela G.; Allen, Malcolm L.; and Jacobsen, Ronald
L., 4,438,024, CI. 252-545.000.
Profold, Inc.: See-
Olson, Raymond E., 4,437,658, CI. 271-125.000.
Prost, Jean-Louis, to Battelle Memorial Institute. Process and apparatus
for measuring blood pressure. 4.437.470. CI. 128-679.000
Pryor. Michael J.; and Tyler. Derek E.. to Olin Corporation. Continu-
ous lubrication casting molds. 4.437.508, CI. 164-418 000.
Przybylski, William A.: See—
Bronsky, Robert J.; Clark, Dennis B.; McKeen, Jeffrey A.; and
Przybylski. William A., 4.437,347, CI. 73-272.00R.
Publishers Equipment Corporation: See—
BuIIen. Lee. 4.437.855, CI. 493-424 000
Puccio, Guy S.. to Acme Highway Producu Corp. Elastomeric sealing
member. 4.437,785, CI 404-64.000.
Purdue Research Foundation: See—
Nelson, Philip E.; and Takada. Norihisa. 4,437,934, CI. 159-47.100.
Pweblo, Harry. Pollution hamess. 4,437,866, CI. 55-85.000.
Pyro-Gcn Corp.: See—
Hcrtel, Karl R., 4,437,419, CI. 110-259.000.
Quaker Oats Company, The: See—
Gantwcrker, Scott; and Leong, Sai. 4.438,150, CI. 426-625.000.
Quan, Shirley G.: See—
Golde, David W.; and Quan, Shirley O.. 4.438.032, CI. 260-
II2.00R.
R. W. Hartnett Company: See—
Ackley, Charles E., Sr.; and Ackley, Charles E., Jr., 4,437,559, Q.
198-397.000.
Rach, Heinz-Dieter: See—
Seitz, Hans; Rach, Heinz-Dieter; Pieper, Henner; and Frerichs,
Udo. 4,437,503, CI. 152.209.00R.
Radeloff, Jurgen: See—
Bicrkarre, Hartwig; Klinger, Gottfried; Radeloff, Jurgen; and Rust.
Bemd-Hendrik, 4,437,533, CI. 180-168.000.
Radtke, Richard R.: See-
Willis, Frederick G.; Radtke, Richard R.; Ellison, Joseph; Fozo,
Steven R.; and Kera, Glenn A., 4,438,497, CI. 364-431.050.
Ragaly, Istvan, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Speed limiting roury cou-
pling. 4,437,846, CI. 464-36.000.
Rajagopalan, Parthasarathi, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Com-
pany. Pyridoindolobenzodiazepine tranquilizers. 4,438,120, Q.
424-256.000.
Ralston Purina Company: See —
Krinski, Thomas L.; and Coco, Charlet E.. 4,437,893, O.
106-80.000.
Ramme, Hubertus. Viewer simulating television receiver. 4,437,248, CI.
40-364.000.
Rankin, Michael: See—
Bobb, Lloyd C; Rankin, Michael; and Ferguson, Gerald D.,
4,438,517, CI. 372-99.000.
Rapp, Ouenther; Thomas, Erwin; and Muenster, Rolf, to BASF Aktien-
fesellschaft. Manufacture of hydroxylammonium salu. 4,438,084, CI.
23-387.000.
Rapps, Peter: See-
Drews. Ulrich; Rapps, Peter; and Werner. Peter. 4.437.339. CI.
73-118.000.
Raschack, Manfred: See-
Ehrmann, Oskar; Raschack, Manfred; Cries, Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; Lehmann, Hans D.; Friedrich, Ludwig; Wuppermann,
Dirk; Zimmennann, Frank; Seitz, Werner; Treiber, Hans J.;
Dengel, Ferdinand; Frank, Wolfram; Kurbjuweit, Hans-Georg;
and Mueller, Claus D., 4,438,131, CI. 424-278.000.
Rasmussen, Byron C. Screen and method of eye examination using
same. 4,437,737, CI. 351-237.000.
Rathke, James E.: See-
Liu, Henry; Gibson, Donald L.; Cheng, David H. S.; and Rathke,
James E.. 4.437.799, CI. 406-198.000.
PI 34
LIST OF PATENTEES
Ratach, Eggo: See—
RavTCrl'lWd' sl^' '"'* '^**'*'' ^^°' *'*^^'^^^' ^- 219-121.0PC.
Raymark Industries, Inc.. Set
Myers, Paul A.. 4.438,004. CI. 252-12.000.
Raytheon Company: See —
' Anhurt.i;43?^.?,°^.fe^'-'«' •^--'•^ -«^ Clark.
^IlhS\f^tV^'''^l' °"'' '° *^""'='"= * SofTa Industries. Inc.
228-1790(X) * '^"*' '"*"=°""«:«ions 4.437.604, CI.
RCA Corporation: See—
Hinn. Werner; and Knight. Mark B.. 4.438,451. CI. 358-11 000
M »"'• A .r '^■' ""i* Limberg. Allen L.. 4.437.7H CI. 358-44.000
Mattel. Anthony. 4.438,521. CI. 375-16.000 •>o-^.kam.
Powers. Kerns H.. 4.438.452. CI. 358-13.000.
Shanley. Robert L., II, 4.438.454, CI. 358-31.000
Suvitsky, David; and Beres, Ernest A., 4.437,641. CI. 249-79 000
Rechtsteiner, Steven A.: See— . «. v-i- *•»» ly.wu.
Rica, Albert F.; Hay Lloyd F.; Heron. John R.; Webber. John R
and Rechtsteiner. Steven A.. 4.437.315. CI. 62-63.0ro
Kccker. K.Iaus: See —
° 52& S» '^**' °""^"' ^^°' "•<* ^^^"' Klaus. 4.438.250. CI.
Recordati S.A.: See—
Nardi. Dante; Tajana, Alberto; Motta, Gianni; Cazzulani. Pietro
and Graziani. Gabriele. 4.438. 133. CI. 424.300.000. '
Recycled Paper Bedding. Inc.: See—
Whiteman. Patrick W.. 4.437.615. CI. 241-24.000.
Ked-Ray Manufacturing Company. Inc.: See—
D^^'"»^; ^'r"'^ ^ • '♦•'♦37,833. CI. 431-329.000.
mnf; /S" "'L^i"''/v"°"'' Gn'ndken. Dieter; and Temmc, Hel-
4757.?64° cTlSi'cgr"'""^ ^"'^^•"- ^"^^^- '^"^ ^---
Reed. Dorian. Fish detecting system. 4.437.255. CI. 43-17.000
Kees, Volker: See —
D^T*w^"'!f'^' '"'' ^^' ^°"'"' ■♦.'38.308. CI. 20O.148.0OA.
^' M V*"*^ Compagnucci, Nello B.. to Transamerica DeLaval
CI 29-33 a)K ""°"''^°""*"« " *>'^o"d to « turbine rotor. 4,437.213.
Regie Nationale des Usines Renault: See—
Bamabe, Jean-Louis, 4,437,926, CI. 156-654 000
Rembaum Alan; and Yen, Richard C. K., to California Institute of
Technology. Microsphere coated substrate containSig reactive Sde-
hyde groups. 4,438.239, CI. 525-54 100 reactive aide-
Renaudin, Jean-Pierre: See—
L«;ron, Jacques; Manera. Majiime; Faure. Jean-Paul- and Renau-
din, Jean-Pierre, 4.437.869. CI. 65-1.000.
Renfro. Julian C: See—
RcpS'SKl**'''''''- ^'- •'^''•«»-
''a"3l^?.°!:7'i^6(S2ro!JS; '^''^'^'^ "*' ^«"^"^- ^"«"'
Republic Geothermal. Inc.: See—
Rex. Robert W.. 4.437.995. CI. 210-714.000.
Republic Steel Corporation: See—
Research Corporation: See
^ n&.^"^ ^•' *"** ""«^'' "^""y ^•' *.«8.029. CI. 260.
R««^h Foundation for Microbial Diseases of Osaka University. TTie:
' M&3'S."J24.^cffi^ '^-'^ »'• Sudo. M.«uni.
Resnick. Paul R.: See—
"%7.9?i°'S'2£98°ffi ^'''*' °= "^ '^"-^' ^•»' '^-
Reuter. Herbert: See—
''SS*4.4'?ffi."ci''5ia{'S55: ^^' ^^' -- *-^'- »-
'^^^.i^w**" ^.; "^ '^«5>"J''»c Geothermal, Inc. Treatment of aeother-
4"?3^5?5' ^1'?^?,.^'' "^ ^-«"^ ^''^ precipiut!o?o«1S.
"^ ♦05°195.So'*°* ^" ^^^^ ^°' •'>"*"""'= hose bundles. 4,437,791. CI.
Rheude. Alfred: See—
in,J^^o"\^°^t' *"*^ Rheude. Alfred. 4,438,164. CI 428-35 000
Rhone-Poulenc Specialites Chimiques: See—
Desbois. Michel. 4.438.043. CI. 260465 OOF
252^: J,;3T3.t<?. ss^"* '" "--^sssis;
March 20, 1984
"^S^n*??!! ^"""*'" "^ • *^!?*f*' ^"«''°» "^ : "d P«liH«. Joseph R.. to
i?..K-L r^'P?."""" ^"''^ wellhead connection asseribly and
methods of installation. 4,437.521. CI. 166-341 000 "**"""' ""o
Richter, Simon J; and Aykanian, Ardashus A., to Coca-Cola Company,
The. Tube inserting machine. 4.438.061. CI. 264-249.000. ^
Kicoh Co. Ltd.: See —
Abe, Takeshi, 4.437.336, CI. 73-40.50R.
Jinnai, Koichiro; and Ebi, Yutaka, 4,438,440. CI. 346-75 000
Komada, Kenya; and Tan, Yui-Kuan. 4.438,444. CI. 346-155 000
D Na^jima. Yoshinon. 4.438.507. CI. 364-900.000 '~-'"«"-
Riebh. Peter: See—
"'a^iliXbS:^^'^'' ^°""»*"8= *"'' '^«Wi. Peter, 4.438,125,
Rieck, Hans-Peter, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Process for th^
"4Sa'gl7r-i,SS:''' ''•^•^'* ^■■' ""^ ^'^'"' ^"-^^ E-
Riecke, Wolfgang D., to Fraunhofer-Gesellschaft zur Forderuna der
T^Z""i'"" ^T*^''""^ '^ Corpuscular radiation deJ^S7or%S
25^398.^. '""*™ °" " workpiece. 4.438,336, "^S.
Rieppel, Perry J.; and Moore, Paul E., to Arcair Comoanv Exoth#.pmin
cutting electrode. 4,437,649, CI. 266^8 o(^ '^'"P^y- E^thermic
4.l37;26? cr5°:3r7.oS)°'"' '"'"'""• '"" ^^»""« »PP"«-
Riker Laboratories, Inc.: See—
Barnett. William E.. 4.438,261, CI. 536-21.000.
Rmderle, Hemz: See—
^S"-Ta!o' C''""°P*'" ^ : "-d '^nder'e. Heinz, 4,438,412, Q.
"^'au/.' "'""P" ^ • to.Coming Glass Works. Transparent colorless
ClISS" "'^^ ^ '"*'*'''" ^°' "" " ''^^^ windows. 4^.2 la
RIV-SKF Officine: See-
RoJ^^AITt' """^ °°""' ^'"°"°' 4.437,536, CI. 180-254.000.
Babitzka, Rudolf; and Under, Ernst, 4,438,363, CI. 310-328 000
dIZs' I'Jlri'^"'.'"'* ^^y'' """"'• ^•^37.971 CI. 2ati27.5o6:
73 118X00 "'^ '= ""* ^*™"' ****"• '♦.437.339, CI.
Leiber, Heinz; and Stegmeier. Alwin, 4,438,420. CI 335-275 000
Ragaly, Istvan, 4,437,846. CI. 464-36.000
Stumpe. Werner. 4.437.504. CI. 152-427.000.
Roberts, Roy D., to Texaco Inc. Environmentally safe process for
1 K4!6".000 *°"^ '"°'*'"*' <=N-containing si Jge. 4.437!5f^ S
Robertson, James C: See—
Robertson, John A.: See—
*^"324452%*''' ^' ""* '^°'^rt»on, John A.. 4.438,402, CI.
Rock, Merlin A., to International Harvester Co. Automatic header
height control. 4,437,295, CI. 56-10.200. '^uiomaiic neader
Rockwell International Corporation: See—
"20?.235^'° ^''' ""* S''°^™n*'^- Raymund P., 4,437,980, CI.
Soclof. Sidney I., 4,437,226. CI. 29.577.00R.
aS!^' I'^P''*" S = ""^^ ^"«*"' '^o^" K., to United States of
tz"tJ:^i^a''!^zriiK^^'°' '°' -p"'^"« -y«- ^
Rodberg, Kenneth: See—
^"1 «K ^"n" Vi fj^ V}f"^ ^' Rodberg, Kenneth; and Clark,
Arthur E., 4.438,509, CI. 367-156.000.
D^^'^^^f'!"'^?* Drapery closure. 4,437,505, CI. 160-126.000.
Rodov, Vladimir: See—
"?5j8%,^|"?57'i'3.^'""' ^^'^«*= "^ '^«*-' ^«'^-
Roesch, Egon: See-
Ross, Carl H; Kampe, Wolfgang; Bartsch, Wolfgang: Sooner
Ro» ,£:?'^:*^'^.°««n^E8on.4.438.1l6.C1.424.250!000: '^•
V?;i^^. ^•i„^"<»' Charles G.; and Nicholas, Karl W., to Harco
Corporation. Electncal survey apparatus and method with spinner-
type conductor supply. 4,438,391. CI. 324-71 100
-foS: M?8!3lt a!'T2r2a°' '^'^" '°' ^°'''»* ^^p --P-
'^°.H,^;.t?^" ^.L^c^"« Company, The. Seat structure having an
Si^K** ' '"l**S''.?i?l'"PP°" 'helf especially for accommodating
parachute packs. 4,437,629, CI. 244-122.00R. «»uiig
Rokop Corporation: See—
D«t«» ''?''• •'?f«Ph;»«l Rokop, NikoUus. 4,437,899, CI. 148.9.00R.
wn?; ;°I!^ • ""* ^°^°^' Nikolaus, to Rokop Corporation. Metal
bUlet cutting apparatus and method. 4,437,899, CI. 148-9.00R.
Rokop, Nikolaus: See—
D ii'\°''.2P' •'°^h; and Rokop, Nikolaus, 4.437.899. CI. 148-9.00R.
Rollot, Pierre: See—
Cordier, Jean; and Rollot. Pierre. 4,437,651, CI. 266-193.000.
Rolls-Royce Limited: See—
^twell, Hugh F., 4,437,303, CI. 60-39.281.
328.™'oOO^*'*^' ^''' "** °''«*<*»h. P«e'. 4,438,406, Q.
Pearce, Eric W. J., 4,437,810. CI. 415-1 I5.00a
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 35
Romagnoli. Andrea, to I.M.A.-Industria Macchinc Automatiche-S.p.A.
Volumetric batching device for providing predetermined batches of
a fluent material. 4,437.294. CI. 53-553.000.
Roman. Daniel J.: See—
Bitler. Joel R.; Bodnar, Michael W.; Booth. Raymond H.; Roman.
Daniel J.; Schneider. Fred J.; Seitzer. Philip W.; and Wilkinson.
George F., Jr.. 4,437.229. CI. 29-593.000.
Romano-Moran. Roberto, to NCR Corporation. Process for forming
MNOS dual dielectric structure. 4.438,157, CI. 427-93.000.
Romec Environmental Research & Development, Inc.: See-
O'Connor. Rodney J.. 4.437,583, CI. 222-108.000.
Rose, John B.: See-
Cogswell, Frederic N,; GrifTin, Brian P.; and Rose, John B.,
4.438.236, CI. 525-165.000.
Rosenberg. Irwin, to Aero-Motive Mfg. Co. Positioning reel. 4,437,624.
CI. 242-107.300.
Rosenquist, Niles R.; and Lee, Garland G., to General Electric Com-
pany. Compositions comprising a thermoplastic resin and a vinyl
ether mold release agent. 4,438,234, CI. 524-378.000.
Rosenquist, Niles R.. to General Electric Company. Acyloxy termi-
nated copolyester-carbonates. 4,438.255. CI. 528-176.000.
Rosenthal. Manfred: See-
Weber, Wendelin; and Rosenthal, Manfred, 4,437,780, CI.
400-642.000.
Rosenthal, Paul: See—
Castiglioni. Joseph; and Rosenthal, Paul, 4,437,513. CI. 165-154.000.
Ross, Carl H.; Kampe, Wolfgang; Bartsch, Wolfgang; Sponer, Gisbert;
and Roesch, Egon, to Boehringer Mannheim GmbH. Quinox-
alinyloxy-amino-propanol compounds with blood pressure lowering
and ;3-bIocking properties, their use and pharmaceutical compositions
containing them. 4,438,116, CI. 424-250.000.
Ross, Henry M. Magnetic, force-limited apparatus for tenderizing meat.
4,437.207. CI. 17-25.000.
Rossy, Phillip A.: See-
Acker, Rolf-Dieter; Rossy, Phillip A.; Hamprecht. Gerhard; and
Wuerzer. Bruno. 4,437.878, CI. 71-90.000.
Rost. Jan: See—
Meltsch. Hans J.; and Rost, Jan. 4.438.294. CI. 174-88.00R.
Rotron. Incorporated: See —
Brown. Fred A., 4,438,362, CI. 310-152.000.
Routh, Donald E.; and Sharma. Gian C. to United Sutes of America,
National Aeronautics and Space Administration. Method for sequen-
tially processing a multi-level interconnect circuit in a vacuum cham-
ber. 4,437.961, CI. 204-192.0EC.
Royer, Neal B., to Emerson Electric Co. Dynamoelectric machine
structure and method. 4,438,359, CI. 310-68.00R.
Rubin. Harvey, to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. System
for accessing and testing subscriber loops. 4,438,298, CI. I79-I75.20R.
Rubin, Michael D.; and Ho, Pang T., to Ford Aerospace & Communi-
cations Corporation. Temperature compensating method and appara-
tus for thermally subilizing amplifier devices. 4,438,411, CI.
330-289.000.
Ruhrchemi AG: See —
Gorris. Rainer; Hibbel, Josef; Gerhardus. Ulrich; and Scheve.
Heinrich, 4,437.864. CI. 48-62.00R.
Ruhrkohle AG: See—
Gorris. Rainer; Hibbel. Josef; Gerhardus, Ulrich; and Scheve,
Heinrich, 4,437.864, CI. 48-62.00R.
Ruklic. William. Tamper-resistant bottle cap. 4.437.574, CI.
215-247.000.
Rush-Presbyterian-St. Luke's Medical Center: See—
Djordjevich, Ljubomir; and Sadove, Max S., 4,437.469, CI.
128-672.000.
Russ, Stephen; and McAnespie, Don, to Midland-Ross Corporation.
Floution nozzle. 4,437.612, CI. 239-556000.
Rust, Bemd-Hendrik: See—
Bierkarre, Hartwig; Klinger, Gottfried; Radeloff, Jurgen; and Rust,
Bemd-Hendrik, 4,437,533, CI. 180-168.000.
Rutledge, Thomas F., to ICI Americas Inc. Oxidation of aromatic
compounds to quinones by use of sodium hypochlorite. 4,438,037. CI.
260-385.000.
Ryadchikov. Vladimir E.: See —
Moskalik, Leonid M.; Ryadchikov, Vladimir E.; Bykov, Anatoly
P.; Kulesh, Vladimir P.; Opasov, Stanislav I.; and Orlov, Anatoly
A.. 4.438.393, CI. 324-83.00D.
Ryan, Carl R., to Motorola Inc. Serial minimum shift keyed modulator
including notch and bandpass filters. 4.438.413. CI. 332-I6.00R.
S. C. Johnson & Son, Inc.: See —
Benicek, Jeanne A.; and Schrader, Rodney W., 4.438,009, CI.
252-90.000.
S.I.A.C.O. Limited: See-
Shaw. George. 4.437,269. CI. 51-358.000.
S.I.S.A.S. SocieU Italina Serie Acetica Sintetica S.p.A.: See—
Codignola. Franco. 4,438.285. CI. 568-861.000.
Sabre Safety Limited: See —
Glynn, Michael H., 4,437.460, CI. 128-204.260.
Sadove, Max S.: See—
Djordjevich, Ljubomir; and Sadove, Max S., 4,437,469, CI.
128-672.000.
Safonnikov, Anatoly N.; and Antonov, Anatoly V., to Institut Elektros-
varki Imeni E.O. Patona; and Akademii Nauk Ukrainsko. Electroslag
welding method. 4,438,313, CI. 219-73.100.
St. John, Michael R.: See—
Sammells, Anthony F.; and St. John, Michael R., 4,437,954, CI.
204-129.000.
Saint-Leger. Didier J.; and Abrioux. Andre, to "L'Oreal". Proceu for
sampling and analysis by thin layer chromatography. 4.438.205. CI.
436-71.000.
Saito, Masaki: See—
Ishikawa, Reiji; Saito, Masaki; Mori, Toshio; and Tamura,
Hidemasa, 4.438.160. CI. 427-214.000.
Saito. Syuichiro: See —
Akashi. Akira; Katsuma. Makoto; Kawamura, Masaharu; KamaU,
Shigeru; and Saito, Syuichiro. 4.437,752, CI. 354-289.000.
Saito, Takao; Moriu, Jyun-ichi; Hirose, Kikuji; and Kato, Akitosi, to
Nippon Steel Corporation. Cold rolled steel strip having an excellent
phosphatizing property and process for producing the same.
4.437,947, CI. 204.35.00R.
Saito, Yukio; Nogita. Shunsuke; WaUnabe, Syoji; and Baba, Kenji, to
Hitachi, Ltd. Process for controlling an aeration tank in an activated
sludge sewage treatment. 4,437,992, CI. 210-603.000.
Saizi, Mituhiro: See—
Yanagiuchi. Shigenobu; and Saizi. Mituhiro. 4.438,505, CI.
364-900.000.
Sakaguchi, Yasunori: See —
Yazawa, Nobuharu; and Sakaguchi, Yasunori, 4.438.405. CI.
328-152.000.
Sakai. Kazushige: See —
Nagano, Hiroyuki; Takagi, Mitiro; Kubodera. Noboru; Matsunaga.
Isao; Yamazaki, Tamotsu; Nabau, Hiroyuki; Sakai, Kazushige;
and HaU, Shun-ichi, 4,438,115. CI. 424-250.000.
Sakai, Masaaki; and Yoshihiro. Mitsugu, to Sony Corporation. Stop
control circuit for brushless DC motor. 4.438,377, CI. 318-254.000.
Sakai, Shinji; Shinoda, Nobuhiko; Kinoshita, Takao; and Hosoe, Ka-
zuya. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Signal processing system.
4,437.743. CI. 354-402.000.
Sakai. Toshikazu: See —
Mitomo, Mamoru; Moriyoshi, Yusuke; Sakai, Toshikazu; and
Osaka, Toshiaki, 4.438.051, CI. 264-1.200.
Sakakima, Hiroshi; Satomi, Mitsuo; Senno, Harufumi; and Hirou,
Eiichi, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Amorphous mag-
netic alloys. 4,437,912, CI. 148-403.000.
Sakamaki, Hisashi; See—
Komori, Shigehiro; Sakamaki. Hisashi; Hatton, Hiroyuki; lida.
Toshihide; Miyamoto, Koichi; and Umezawa, Kazumi.
4.437.757. CI. 355-15.000.
Sakamoto, Hitoshi, to Sony Corporation. Tracking control system.
4,438,463, CI. 360-10.200.
Sakano, Hajime: See-
Fujimori, Yoshitugu; Takabori, Yasuo; Sakano, Hajime; and Ito,
Akitoshi, 4,438,229, CI. 524-109.000.
Sakumoto, Akinori, to Daiwa Seiko Inc. Handle folding device for
fishing reel. 4,437,621, CI. 242-84.10J.
Sakurayama, Junichi; and Magome, Tamotsu, to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha. Liquid handling apparatus for an electrostatic copier.
4,437,755, CI. 355-10.000.
Salenbo, Sten A. Method and apparatus for handling and setting up
large size slit-boxes. 4,437.851. CI. 493-124.000.
Saletore, Vikram: See—
Haque. Yusuf A.; Saletore, Vikram; and Schuler. Jeffrey A.,
4,438.354. CI. 307-493.000.
Saltzer, Jerome H., to Massachusetts Institute of Technology System
for regenerating a dau word on a communications nng. 4,438,520, CI.
375-4.000.
Sammells, Anthony F.; and St. John, Michael R., to Institute of Gas
Technology. Fuels production by photoelectrolysis of water and
photooxidation of soluble biomass materials. 4,437,954, CI.
204-129.000.
Sampson, Jacob. Meat tenderizer. 4,437,208, CI. 17-26.000.
Samulski, Thaddeus V. Luminescent decay time techniques for temper-
ature measurement. 4,437.772, CI. 374-129.000.
Sanborn, Philip A.. Jr., to W. R. Grace & Co., Cryovac Div. Method
and apparatus for making a reclosable package. 4,437,293, CI.
53-412.000.
Sanchez, Victor; Espenan, Patrick; Casademont, Ernest; and Lafaille, J.
Pierre, to Centre National de la Recherche Scientifique. Apparatus
for electrophoretically fractionating a solution. 4,437,967, CI.
204-301.000.
Sanden Corporation: See—
Terauchi, Kiyoshi; and Hiraga, Masaharu, 4,437,820, CI.
418-55.000.
Sander, Robert K.: See—
Rockwood, Stephen D.; and Sander, Robert K.. 4,437,958. CI.
204- 157.1 OR.
Sanders, Adrianus L. M.; Meuleman, Dirk G ; Moelker, Huibert C. T.;
van Dedem, Gijsbert W. K.; and van Houdcnhovcn, Francois E. A.,
to Akzo N.V. Anti-thromboticum based on polysacharides. and
pharmaceutical compositions. 4,438,108, CI. 424-183.000.
Sando Iron Works Co.. Ltd.: See—
Sando. Yoshikazu; and Ishidoshiro, Hiroshi, 4.437.200. CI. IS-
306.00A.
Sando, Yoshikazu; Goto, Tokuju; Tanaka, lUuo; Ishidoshiro, Hiro-
shi; and Minakaia, MaUuo, 4.437.324. CI. 68-5.00E.
Sando, Yoshikazu; and Ishidoshiro. Hiroshi, to Sando Iron Works Co.,
Ltd. Apparatus for continuous dehydration. 4,437,200, CI. IS-
3O6.0OA.
Sando, Yoshikazu; Goto, Tokuju; Tanaka. luuo; Ishidoshiro, Hiroshi;
and Minakata, Matsuo, to Sando Iron Works Co., Ltd. Apparatus for
treating a cloth continuously with the use of low-temperature plasma.
4.437,324, CI. 68-5.0OE.
PI 36
LIST OF PATENTEES
Sandoz Ltd.: See-
Bauer, Wilfried; Cardinaux. Francois; Huguenin. Rene- Pleu
sanico, John R.. to Pans Manufacturing Company, Inc. Presaina and
creasing apparatus. 4,437,246. CI. 38-25.000. «^«"ng ana
Sankyo Company Limited: See—
Hiraoka. Tetsuo; and Kobayashi, Takeo. 4,438.265. CI. 544-29.000
Terahara, Akira; Hamano, Kiyoshi; Tsujita. Yoshio; and Tanaka!
Minoni. 4,438.277, CI. 560-119.000. " ««™uui.
Sano. Jun; Aoyama. Masahide; and Kubo, Daijiro, to Tokyo Shibaura
SSi.MJUst'^iJ^SS"" "■"■ • ••^" '"^•» '^'
Sanraku-Ocean Co., Ltd.: See—
''Mi8,5^'fcr435-t8%"' "^"""^ "' •"••""''^ ^"-"^y""*-
Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Tazima, Yoshihisa; Morishima. Masayuki; Okumura. Hiroshi and
Kasahara,Shm.ichi, 4,438.311, CI. 2I9.10.49R '^«»"'. »na
Sarangapani, Srinivasan: See—
*^2'^l'oH»o"" ^ ' '"** Sarangapani, Srinivasan, 4.438.216, CI.
Sarli. Michael S.: See—
°4.?3t97?Sr?08'ilS5" '*'*='^' '^ "■' '™"'' ^"-"^^ ^ ■
Sasaki, Hideaki: See—
Kobayashi. Mamoni; Ishige, Kanji; Sasaki, Hideaki Tani Mit.
sukiyo; and Kawakam., Yashuhiko, 4,437,603, C?228-?S)0
Sasaki. Hiroshi, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Ultrasonic
imagmg apparatus. 4,437.348, CI. 73-625.000 ^"rMonic
Sasaya, Toshihiro: See—
^t:5??i3. a7^7.^."''°' """"'^^ "«* ^^'^ ^°^'''''°-
^^,Sf!?i' Shimizu Akira; ud Yanagisawa. Kazuhisa. to Olympus
Optical Company Limited. Electrophotographic process and photo-
sensitive screen for use in such process. 4,438,186, CI. 430-53.000
I .H A°^.""' J'^o'o- Kazuaki; and Aotsu, Hiroaki. to Hitachi.
I:4l8,3lrcT3?2-28°l3§' "«"'"'°" '^""" ^°' ^^ «««"^''
Sato, Katsuhiko: See—
^'!i^«^."^'?' 1:^?'''.'^?^°'°= ^^'^ Shuji; Mandai. Masaaki;
and Sato. Katsuhiko. 4,437,769, Cl. 368-204 000 ^^
Sato, Kunio: See—
Mitarai, Tsuyoshi; and Sato. Kunio. 4.437.377. Cl. 84-1.010
Sato, Takahisa: See—
^"saSoVS?''"' '^°'''' '^''"^'' ""* ^'°' '^■*^»*' *.*38.2n. CI.
^a™JJS!?''' ^'^ ?"'*'*• ■^'"'O'""' to Nippon Steel Corporation.
Amorphous alloy for use as a core. 4,437.907, Cl. 148-31 550
iato, Takeshi to MaUushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. TV Tuner
circuit. 4.438.529, Cl. 455-190.000.
Sato, Tomoyasu: See
Tomita. Fusao; Matsuda. Yuzuni; Shirahata. Kunikatsu; Takahashi.
Keiichi; Nakano. Hirofumi; Sato. Tomoyasu; Okubo Shuji;ind
c N*^""»'Nobuo, 4,438.197, Cl. 435-119.000.
Sato, Toshihiko: See—
Suzuki. Shin; and Sato. Toshihiko, 4.437,440, Cl. 123-145.00A
^i^T^"^ *°n^°" '^'*""*'"'' ^'^^'^ Light measuring devi^ for
a single lens reflex camera. 4,437,741, Cl. 354-479 000
Satoh, Susumu: See —
^T^l ""fi,^,",^"^^'*^'! ^'°h. Susumu; and Watanabe,
Takao. 4,438,126. Cl. 424-272.000. "«»oc,
Satomi. Mitsuo: See—
'1ShT4.«7"fUrU8-iSS.^^^^^ """'""'^ "^ "-'^
^irZ"I!l'o^"f/°' "^ ''"jj ''*'°'° ''"'" Co- Ltd. Polymen containing
Satou. Hiroshi: See—
'^cf%5'!670OR ^'°"* "*"*'"'• ■"** Nateume, Toshio. 4,437.886.
Satsuki. Tenihisa; Ota. Seiiti; and Tabata. Settuko. to Lion Corporation.
Detergent compositions. 4,438,025. Cl. 252-545 000 P"""""-
Sauison. Stanley H.; Schroeppel, Edward A.; and Tarjan. Peter P. to
Cordis Corporation. Cardiac p«:er with improved batenrsystem
outp^u^^circuitry. and emergency operation. 4.437!S6;^Cl'^S
Saurer-Diederichs (Societe Anonyme): See—
7^862:47o"*" "■■ ""* ^°"*"'*' ^^^^ ^■' *''»".352. Cl.
Savi. Antonio, to OfTicine Meccaniche Savi Antonio S.p.A. Rotating-
drum nuichine for peehng tomatoes. 4.437,398, Cl. 99-587.000
Saw^jda. Takeshi; Yoneda. Ko; Shinmi. Akira; Goto. Hirokazu and
t£°li^Ki°.^'"l^''}'^^'^ "^-^ "^ Canon dSSJiuSi
mifio^^ Magnetic head of magnetic reluctance effect type and a
Sc?«fcr'Si,33t^:S^*'''*'''*'°^
^71°2SoS°'''''' ^' ""^ ^*"*''«'' ^"^d W- 4.437,659, Cl.
Schafer. Wolfgang: See—
Zaschke. Horit; Schafer. Wolfgang; Deuticher. Hana-Joachim
Demus. Dietnch; and Pelzl, OerhiJd. 4.438,268, a.544-315.oS:
March 20, 1984
Schairbaum, Albert W.: See—
'H'^A^Si^Utl^rSSr' ^""" ^^ «- Curti. Wil««„
Schaller. Karl H.; and Zimmermann. Volker. to International Business
Machines CorporaOon. Magnetic disk track following servo bunt
amplitude drop compensation. 4.438,467, Cl. 360.77.000
Schalungsverleih Heinzle AG: See—
Heinzle. Otto, 4,437.640, CI. 249-20.000.
Scheer, Erich; See—
SrhJi^Tn L>«8^'n; and Scheer, Erich. 4.437,555, Cl. 192-70.210.
fo?S!!f; . r/f • '? ^'*'"*"' Aktiengesellschaft. Arrangement
•t^K-- t -? * a^mon'tor to a text sution. 4,437.638, Q. 248-282.000.
&• ^''"°*'yT.. to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., uid C^mpSy
Scheve, Heinrich; See—
Schiffarth, Josef: See— '
''M3l:MS."ci'^T88'oa""''='' "'"""'^ "«• ^""^"^ '^'
Schilbe, Rick: See—
s^i.iP*"'^"' ^'^ ^ • *"** Schilbe, Rick, 4,437,490, Cl. 137-512 400
Schiller Norman H.; and Alfano, Robert R., to HammaUu Coreo«.
tion. Picosecond delay device. 4.438.416. Cl. 333M6oSo(5 ^'P°™
.nS'?.';.^? """ ' ■ ^ ACF Industries, Inc. Valve for discharge ouUet
ScSJlK.'rnTer^e'l!!"'°" '''''"''' ^' ^' "«»•
Wulf, Peter; and Schlecht, Annegret, 4,437.199, Cl. 15-49 00R
f^*tIZ«"'f'."r r',L'^"'*i'° ■^" *"*'"•»""' inc. Method for iSanu-
Schlossmacher, Edward J.: See—
"* c[."62^T6'ooa °' *"** Schlossmacher. Edward J.. 4,438,279,
Schmer, Gottfried, to Trimedyne. Inc. Biochemically active matrix for
use in a bio-artificial organ. 4,438.198. Cl. 435-178^ ^
acnmid. Jochen: See —
°h£?.%?3a??S'j2i?te^''""' "°"^ "^ «•-'• ^^-
Schmidt. Manfred: See—
"t437,'lo"cT,0*!?9rSo"' °""'*' •"•• '"•' ^•»°^*''' '^'"d-
Schmitt, Urban: See—
^f'436^6V 000™"' "'**"• *"** ^'^S^hom, Joachim, 4,438,204.
*'iS*"\S™iI^t?7**= H"** ™"' Alfonsjto Wiersma. Charles M.;
ana Wierama, Jack G., by said Alfons TTuer. Fire retardant and
compounds based thereon. 4.438,028. Cl. 252-609.000 ^'"°"* "°
Schmitz-JMten. Robert; Suling. Carlhans; Podszun. Wolfaana- Bomer
Bruno; Borprdt, Manfred; and Walkowiak. Mich«5TSye?^:
a'm!^^. P''°topolymerizable dental composition. M37,836.
Schnabl, Karl; Hoppner, Eberhard; and KutI, Hans, to Kraflwerk
t^SlS"or^niar"*^*'"^ ^^5; '="""'' testin^viS fS ,^2
MlS.3^:"Sr32S.S(2)""'' "'«»* ~"P''"« ^* ' •«y<»'« '°ck.
Schneider. Connie J.: See—
^52M75.a!S'' *^ • "** Schneider. Comiie J., 4,438,226. Q.
Schneider. Fred J.; See—
Daniel J^ Schneider. Fred J.; Seitzer, Ph p W.; and WUkimon^
George F.. Jr.. 4.437.229. Cl. 29-593.000. wuuiuon,
Schneiter, Fred E.: See—
'"^nyOOQ. ^^ "^ Schneiter, Fred E., 4,437.681, Q.
Schnettler, Shirley I.; and Gilloon. Elinor. Educational aid and method
of using same. 4,437,837, Cl. 434- 1 78.000. •""" "° ana metnoo
Schoder, Bemd: See—
Scho^oliwelSfSSi-'"*' ^^"' ^™* *•*"•"'• ^' ''"•2«°-
'^M?8Tl"'c!^'i-6?000*"^' °~'* "•' °^«'' ^°''^'
Schrader, Rodney W.: See^
^2523o.OM™'* ^'' *"** Schrader. Rodney W.. 4,438,009. CI.
Schranz, Karl-WJlhelm: See—
'^a 'tsalS OOO'^"''*'"' "^ Schranz, Karl-Wilhelm, 4,438.195,
Schreiber, Georg: See—
"4%?5:s7tci.%yf9.S5"''"'' °~'* ""* ^'•«^'' «*^
Schroeder, Heinz: See—
Schroeppel, Edward A.: See—
^'r3?T5rci.''5^.4fe.og,'"'"" "^* ^»^ ^^»™««' '^"«-
Schule, Sheldon D. Automatic animal feeder. 4,437,435, Q. 119-51.130.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 37
Schuler, Ingo: See—
Banke, Karl-Heinz; Hering, Elisabeth; Lobel. Wilfried; Pollack,
Dieter; Wiedemann. Gunter; Orell. Ute; and Schuler, Ingo.
4.438.053, Cl. 264-25.000.
Schuler, Jeffrey A.: See—
Haque, Yusuf A.; Saletorc, Vikram; and Schuler, Jeffrey A..
4.438.354. Cl. 307-493.000.
Schulte-Elte, Karl H.; Snowden, Roger L.; and Muller, Bernard L., to
Firmenich SA. Process for the preparation of hydroxy-ketones.
4,438,283, Cl. 568-403.000.
Schultz, Barry J. Vehicular suspension. 4,437,678, Cl. 280-276.000.
Schultz, Daryl A. Drilling bit bearings. 4.437.774, Cl. 384-92.000.
Schulz, Walther: See-
Lindorfer. Walter; Wagner, Fritz; and Schulz, Walther. 4,437,993.
Cl. 210-631.000.
Schuster, Wilhelm: See—
Stahl, Juergen; Schuster, Wilhelm; and Wegner, Wilhelm,
4.437.212. Cl. 24-698.000.
Schutt. Dieter: See—
Heinrich, Hans J.; and Schutt, Dieter, 4,438,489, Cl. 364-200.000.
Schutz, Carl-Heinz: See-
Weber. Richard A.; and Schutz. Carl-Heinz. 4,437,652. Cl.
266-275.000.
Schwartz. Jeremy; and Frick. Raymond, to Ingersoll-Rand Company.
Radial sealing means for use with, and in combination with, a slotted
rotor. 4,437.822. Cl. 418-122 000.
Schwartz. Lionel H.; Miller, Scott W.; and Severud, Christopher N..
Jr., to Falcon Safety Producu, Inc. Self-contained anti-static adapter
for compressed gas dust blowing devices. 4,438,479, Cl 361-213.000
Schwartz, Marcus, to United States of America, Navy. Position and
restraint system for aircrewman. 4,437,628, Cl 244-122.0AG
Schwarz, Eckhard C. A., to Biax Fiberfilm Corporation. Novel porous
fabric. 4,438.167. Cl. 428-138.000.
Schwarz, Hans D.: See—
Arens. Egidius; Hampe, Christoph; Karlowsky, Ingo; Meyersieck,
Manfred; Schwarz, Hans D.; Anding, Norbert; and Leisterer,
Reinhard, 4,438.438. Cl. 343-451.000.
Schwarz. Herbert F., to Polysar Limited. Carboxylated nitrile rub-
ber/PVC/nylon flux blends. 4.438,230, Cl. 524-151.000.
Schweiss, Dietrich; and Nordin, Ivan C, to Warner-Lambert Com-
pany. 5-Amino-N-(3-chloro- 2-methy|., or 2-fluorophenyl)-l,3-
dimethyl-lH-pyrazole-4-carboxamides and use as an anti-con vulsant.
4,438,092. Cl. 424-273.00P.
Schweitzer, Edmund O., Jr. Fault indicator with combined trip and
reset winding. 4,438,403, Cl. 324-133.000.
Schwendener, Reto: See—
Weder. Hans G.; Zumbuhl, Otmar; Schwendener. Reto; and Mils-
mann. Manfred, 4.438.052. Cl. 264-4.600.
Schweyen. Paul R.: See—
Parekh, Dhan N.; and Schweyen. Paul R., 4,437,865, CI.
51-298.000.
Scientific Circuitry, Inc.: See—
Shepter. Joseph J.. 4.438.350. Cl 307-440.000.
Scott, John W.: See-
Sells, Mary A.; and Scott. John W.. 4.437,945, Cl. 204-35.00N.
Scott, Robert J., to Union Carbide Corporation. Nonionic surfacunts
for automatic dishwasher detergents. 4,438,014. Cl. 252-174.210.
Sears, Roebuck and Co.: See-
Hoffman. Howard O., 4,437.572. Cl, 211-86.000.
See, Jacques L. A.; and Chevanne, Sylvain V. L., to Honeycomb Panels
Patenu Association Inc. Wall construction prefabricated from self-
connectable elements. 4,437,281, Cl. 52-309.100.
Seeger, Hans-Peter, to Ystral GmbH. Dispersion turbine. 4,437,765, Cl.
366-264.000.
Seeley. Robert J. Molding machine. 4.437,507. Cl. 164-173.000.
Seib. Karl: See—
Oppenlaender, Knut; Strickler, Rainer; Seib, Karl; and Naegele.
Paul, 4.438.094, Cl. 424-59.000.
Seigneurin, Laurent; See-
Jacques, Roland; Reppelin, Michel; and Seigneurin, Laurent,
4,438,042, Cl. 260461 OOB.
Seiko Instruments k Electronics Ltd.; See—
Shida. Masaharu; Ueda, Makoto; Ouwa, Shiui; Mandai, Maiaaki;
and Sato, KaUuhiko, 4.437,769. Cl. 368-204.000.
Seitz, Hans; Rach, Heinz-Dieter; Pieper. Henner; and Frerichs, Udo. to
Continental Oummi-Werke Aktiengesellschaft. Tread configuration
for pneumatic vehicle tires. 4,437,503. Cl. IS2-209.00R.
Seitz, Werner: See-
Ehrmann, Oskar; Raachack, Manfred; Grics, Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; Lehmann, Hans D.; Friedrich, Ludwig; Wuppermann.
Dirk; Zimmermann, Frank; Seitz. Werner; Treiber, Hans J.;
Densel. Ferdinand; Frank. Wolfram; Kurbjuweit. Hans-Georg;
and Mueller, CUus D.. 4,438,131, Cl. 424-278.000.
Seitzer. Philip W.: See—
Bitler. Joel R.; Bodnar. Michael W.; Booth. Raymond H.; Roman.
Daniel J.; Schneider. Fred J.; Seitzer. Philip W.; and Wilkinson.
George F., Jr.. 4,437,229, Cl. 29-593.000.
Sekel, Stephen M.; Strange, Rodney G.; and Verrinder, Robert F., to
Tektronix. Inc. Power supply output monitoring method and appara-
tus. 4,438,498. Cl. 364-483.000.
SekJwaga. Youichi: See—
Amano, Kazunori; and Sekiwaga, Youichi. 4.437,832, Cl.
431-304.000.
Selak, Martin, to Astro Machine Corp. Suction cup apparatus for
feeding a sheet from the bottom of a stack. 4.437.657. Cl. 271-100.000.
Selinko. George J., to Motorola Inc. Non-hermetically sealed stackable
chip carrier package. 4,437,718, Cl. 339-61 OOM
Sells, Mary A.; and Scott, John W., to Sprague Electnc Company.
Process for anodizing aluminum foil. 4,437,945, Cl. 204-35.00N.
Senno, Harufumi: See —
Sakakima, Hiroshi; Satomi, Mitsuo; Senno, Harufumi; and Hirota,
Eiichi, 4,437,912, Cl. 148-403.000.
Seo, Yuzo: See—
Arita, Yoji; and Seo, Yuio, 4,437,950, Cl. 204-67.000.
Seshimoto, Osamu; See—
Kiujima, Masao; Seshimoto, Osamu; Kubotera. Kikuo; and
Yamaguchi, Akira, 4,437,970, Cl. 204-412.000.
Scttincri, William J ; and Hensler, John M., to Dow Chemical Com-
pany, The. Reurdation of polymer buildup in monovinyj aromatic
suspension polymerization using sulfur trioxidc as reactor coatins
4,438,242, Cl. 526-62.000. *
Severud, Christopher N., Jr.; See-
Schwartz. Lionel H.; Miller, Scott W.; and Severud. Christopher
N., Jr., 4,438,479, Cl. 361-213.000,
Seybold, Guenther: See—
Lardon, Hartmut; and Seybold, Guenther, 4,438,282, Cl.
568-58.000.
Shaffer, Jesse S., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Combined AC and DC
etching of aluminum foil. 4,437,955, Cl. 204-129.400.
Shakhunov, Valery A.: See—
Doev, Vitaly S ; Kotelyansky, losif M.; Kravchenko, Valery B.;
Monosov, Yakov A.; Shakhunov, Valery A.; and Kopylov, Jury
L, 4,438,443, Cl. 346-153 100.
Shanley, Robert L., II. to RCA Corporation. Adjustable coring circuit
permitting coring extinction. 4,438,454, Cl. 358-31.000.
Shanoski, Henry: See—
GriflTith, Richard M.; and Shanoski, Henry, 4,438,062, Cl.
264-255.000.
Sharma, Gian C: See—
Routh, Donald E.; and Sharma. Gian C. 4.437.961, Cl. 204-
192.0EC.
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha; See—
Kuranishi, Masaaki; and Togo, Yasuhiko, 4,438,328. Q.
235-181.000.
Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu; and Saizi, Mituhiro. 4.438,505, Cl.
364-900 000,
Sharpies, Thomas D.: See-
Stephens, Donald E.; and Sharpies, Thomas D., 4,438.070, Cl.
422-70.000,
Shaw, George, to S.I.A CO. Limited. Abrasive and polishing sheeu
4.437.269. Cl. 51-358.000,
Shay, Joseph J., to Ethyl Products Company. Accumulative pressure
pump. 4,437,588, Cl. 222-321.000,
Shell Oil Company: See—
Graiff, L, B.; and Laity, John L., 4,437,436, Cl. 123-l,OOA.
Sheng, Tan T.; Sinha, Ashok K.; and Vaidya, Sheila, to Bell Telephone
Laboratories. Incorporated. Solid sute device with conductors hav-
ing chain-shaped grain structure. 4,438,450, Cl, 357-68,000,
Shepter, Joseph J,, to Scientific Circuitry, Inc, Logic circuit building
block and systems constructed from same 4,438,350, Cl, 307-440,000,
Sheridan, John P Solar energy absorption and distribution system with
full solar, solar assist, and fireplace heat exchanger modes. 4,437,511,
Cl. 165-485,000,
Shibata, Takashi; and Nishimura, Masaaki, to Sony Corporation, Rever-
beration apparatus, 4,438,525, Cl, 381-63.000.
Shibata, Tomoyuki: See—
Iwata. Minoru; Murata. Yukio; and Shibau. Tomoyuki, 4.437.811.
Cl. 417-8.000.
Shibayama, Shigeki; and Iwata. Kazuhide, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Data processing system with a slave computer
using data registers u the sole operand store. 4.438,488. Cl.
364-200.000.
Shida, Masaharu; Ueda, Makoto; Ouwa, Shuji; Mandai, Masaaki; and
Sato, KaUuhiko, to Seiko Instrumenu A Electronics Ltd. Electronic
timepiece. 4,437,769, Cl. 368-204.000.
Shimada, Kazuo; Akiyama. Masataka; and Sudo, Masami. to Research
Foundation for Microbiai Diseases of Osaka University, The Oral
composition containing dextranase and a- 1,3 glucanaae and a method
for preventing and suppressing oral diseases using the same.
4,438.093, Cl, 424-50.000
Shimano Industrial Company Limited: See—
Shimano, Keizo, 4,437,848, Cl. 474-82.000.
Shimano, Keizo, to Shimano Industrial Company Limited Derailleur
for a bicycle. 4,437,848, Cl. 474-82.000.
Shimatani, Michiro; and Kazama, Toyoki, to Fuji Electric Company,
Ltd. Method for producing photosensitive film for electrophotogra-
phy. 4,438. 1 88. Cl. 430- 1 28.000.
Shimizu, Akira: See-
Sato, Eiichi; Shimizu. Akira; and Yanagisawa. Kazuhisa. 4.438,186,
Cl. 430-53.000.
Shimizu. Senzo: See-
Miyamoto, Akira; Shimizu, Senzo; Harada, Masahiro; Ajiro,
Tamotu; and Hara. Hideki, 4,438,257, Cl. 528-347.000.
Shimizu, Yozi; See—
Ikenoya. Yasuo; Araki, Masafumi; and Shimizu, Yozi, 4,437,305, Cl.
60-293.000.
Shinmi, Akira; See—
Sawada, Takeshi; Yoneda. Ko; Shinmi. Akira; Goto, Hirokazu; and
Abiko, Shuzo, 4,438,470, Cl. 360-113.000.
PI 38
LIST OF PATENTEES
Shinoda. Nobuhiko: See—
Shiraluu, Kunikatsu: See—
^°K«i;^h!^"v,°i;,'^'' »'*'•/""?'= Sh«;ahau. KunikaUu; Takahashi.
Keiichi, Nakano, Hirofumi; Sato. Tomoyasu; Okubo. Shuji- and
Nakamura, Nobuo. 4,438, 1 97, CI. 435- 1 19 000
Shiraaaki, Yuichi: See—
*tei^^*"'" ^ • '° ^"'°™' '^"«"ch Development Corporation
CoccJdiosis vaccines. 4,438.097, CI. 424-88.000 T~raiion.
Shiroyama. Masahani. See—
^VtZf' ic^'T!'^'L^'^^^'''\ ^'''^^°' ^'•hira, Takashi;
4 ir213^a1o'?:9&''"'' "^"^""^ '"'^ ^'«*'' ■^°»''*""'
Shweki, Yutaka; Yagi, Junichi; and Miura, Yasuyuki. to Ozen Co.. Ltd
Means for suppressing vibration and noise in a device driven by a
small electnc motor. 4.438,358, CI. 310-51.000 ^
Shoji, Fusaji: See—
Sudo Ryoichi; Shoji, Fusaji; Watanabe, Takeshi; Suzuki, Kenkichi-
and Oouc, Michio, 4.437,731. CI. 350-340.000 "-^""cni.
subl^Z?.!; % ^'?P°" ^''''"' ^°- ^"^ Hysteresis circuit having a
CI. 307-362 000 "°"* superposed on input signal. 4.438.349,
Shook. William B.. to Thurston. Inc. Assembly for mounting a water
bottle cage on a cycle frame. 4,437,596, CI. 224-39^ *
» • !^?! A;'^.H""*** S'*'" of America. Army. Self-survey
means. 4,438,439, CI. 343-449.000. ^
Shuey, John R.: See—
^Cl'3^9-"'56aJR^"*' ^'"'*" ^■' '*"*^ Shuey. John R.. 4.437.725.
Sibbald. Alasuir: See—
^2ftMO3"600^'**'" ^'' ""^ ^''"'*''*' '^'"*^'' *'*37.969. CI.
Siddiqi Iqbal. to Battelle Memorial Institute. Test strips for analyzing
dissolved substances. 4,438.067, CI. 422-56 000 """'yzmg
Sielaff GmbH & Co : iff—
Si.ifI^S"')^^K^*'"'^'l"c '^f*''*"' ^'■"'^' *-'»37.557. CI. 194-l.OOD.
izt aI^- d' ""** Sunder-Plassmann, Paul, to Chemische Werke
Huels, AG. Process for the production of polymers and copolymers
of vmyl chlonde. 4.438.244. CI. 526-202 000 J^'ymcrs
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Bolmgren. Jan; and Nilsson. Kenth. 4.438.441. CI 346-140 OOR
Brandl, Hans. 4.438,523. CI. 375-30.000
Dangschat. Rainer. 4.438.345. CI. 307-270 000
Gehnng. Gerhard. 4,438,34^, CI. 307-308.000."
Harbauer, Werner. 4.437.720, CI. 339-95.00D
Kardinal, Hans J.. 4.437.797. CI. 406- 1 10.000
Kemmesies. Hartmut. 4.438,407, CI. 329-50 000
^TCS7,?rmm,SB''"''^' ''"''"'' '"'' «'"«»• H-^'
Meltsch, Hans J.; and Rost, Jan. 4.438.294, CI. I74-88.00R.
Munscher. Wolfgang. 4.438.458. CI. 358-254.000.
ScheibenpHug. Konrad. 4,437.638, CI. 248-282.000
Siemens Gammasonics, Inc.: See
-Meeder. Raymond L.. 4.438,335. CI. 250-363.00S.
r>i.^w ii""^ Frick. Richard H., to Kimberly-Clark Corporation.
StmoS). **' tlBSUcizcd leg openings. 4.437^60. CI.
Sigma Instruments. Inc.: See—
Field, John H.. II, 4.438,381, CI. 318-696.000.
Silva. Ralph: See—
«!™-SI°?'?i*"' ?»°'^"5' ""'* S"^"' '^'P''' '*.'»38,059, CI. 264-105.000.
Simon. Lillian D. Card game. 4,437,670, CI. 273-296 000
Simonidesz, Vilmos: See—
°'S2r;f^'"=v''"°"**'"^' '^"'"°«; Szekely, Istvan; Ivanics,
Jozsef; Kekesi, Knsztina; Kovacs, Gabor; Stadler Istvan Kor-
moczy, Peter; and Horvath, Karoly, 4,438.132, CI. 424-285 000
Simpson Danny E.; Williams, David M.; Chiise, Richard A «?d
Grubb Lawrence B., to Johnson & Johnson Baby Products Com-
pany^Puzzle post toy. 4,437,668, CI. 273-156.000.
Singer Company, The: Sec-
Johnson, Kenneth M.. 4.437,420, CI. 112-103.000.
Johnson Ralph E., 4.437.421. CI. 1 12-158.00R.
Sinha. Ashok K.: See—
Siplast Siegerlander GmbH: See—
«i,«^'i^*' i^°F' *c *^ ^*'*'*' ^""■g' '♦.'♦37,78 1 , CI. 402-8.000.
airons, Karlis A.: See —
Brown. James R.; and Sirons, Karlis A., 4,437.249 CI 42-51 flon
Sjoerdsma. Albert, to Xlerrell Dow Pharmac;utiMls Inc.' Meth<2^f
mhibiting algae. 4,437,873. CI. 71-67.000.
SKF Kugellagerfabriken GmbH: See—
Brandenstcin Manfred; and Muller. Leo, 4.437,556. CI. 192-98 000
CI 29 149 5DP • "'""*""• ""^ '^""''''' Heinrich. 4.437,214,
Skonezny. Paul M.: See—
^^wSw" ^■' ""* Skonezny. Paul M.. 4.438.267. 01.
March 20, 1984
Skonanetz, Werner; and OhlofT. Gunthcr, to Firmenich SA. Oxygen-
ated tncyclic dcnvatives of norbomane and use of same as perfumina
ingredients. 4.438.023. CI. 252-522.00R penuming
Skowronski, Raymund P.: See—
"2O8'.235^O0o'° ^'' '"** Skowronski. Raymund P.. 4,437.980, CI.
^''j[^^o?H''•«^'"^™^ ^' ""'* ^^="' ^"' A • 'o ""vey Hubbell Incor-
porated. Signal attenuating apparatus. 4,438,408, CI. 330-51.000
S avetskas, Deborah. Hemi-sling. 4.437,459, CI. 128-94 000
Slocomb, Leon F., Jr.: See— '
^' mI!!!^' ^T'** " ' Schairbaum. Albert W.; and Curtis. William M.. to
Sm^trCraig^'^e*-" * ^'^ 4.437,274, CI. 52.105!oOO.
'''i7i9:^:'i^oi^^f^'''^' °-= -^ Smith. Uwrence E..
Smith, Daniel J.: See—
^'Tftl'ilnrJK'"'" ^■'' ""* Smith. Daniel J.. 4.438.200, CI.
435-193.000.
^"i!hJ\^ ^u '° ^V P'0<1"<:<» Corporation. Multimessage auto-
?79.6 02o'^ '^ * '""*'°^* '"•* apparatus. 4.438,196, CI.
Smith, Jay. Ill: See—
Headley. James E. R.; Limburg, William R.; Nordmeyer. Robert
Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited; See—
. ''4S:i?fcr4i4-?7S' ^''"°" ^■■' "'^ ^°""«' ""^^^y c-
Smith. Lawrence E.: See—
Smith and Nephew Associated Companies Limited: See-
Howes. John G. B., 4,438.011. CI. 252-106.000
428055^CWO"'" ^' *"** '^'"""' ^'"'" ^•' '♦■'♦38.177, CI.
't4'37.5otci. 236^n'oS!' '" '°"""' ""'"^'"^ ^"''"»''°'' 'y"^'"-
Smith, Robert E., to Burr-Brown Research Corporation Bar code
reading system and method. 4,438,327, CI. 235-4^.000
'^'irhn^f.^1^4' '° ^V^^ * ?°- '"*=• Ophthalmic compositions of
carbonic anhydrase inhibitors for topical application in the treatmen
of elevated intraocular pressure. 4,438,123; CI. 424-270 00)
Smith Roger A.; and Withers, Michael S., to Du Pont de Nemours, E
Ln"S45379?2rcf^?oS98'^'""''""^" '='»'°" ««•'"•«« •"-
Smith, Todd I.: See—
^'cf.' ynhrn^^^^' ^°*'" ^ •' = ""^ ^"''*'' '^°**'* '■• ^•'♦38.5 13.
%m" ^4^l36T'oS'""'^^ '^"•""'^ '^"'"«"P f"'-"-
SmithKline Beckman Corporation: See—
Chow. Alfred W.. 4.438.135. CI. 424-300.000.
Smiths Industries Public Limited Company See—
Capaldi, Nicholas R., 4.437,354, cf 74-5 460
Smoot, George W; and Macnak. Philip P.. to Motorola. Inc. Multiad-
Cl 340^115.440 " "°"*^ '"'* ^"°"'y P'«^"« °P''°"- '♦-'♦38.433.
Smulders, Auguste: See—
°405"?98So"''°"' ""^ Smulders, Auguste, 4.437.792. CI.
Sniegoski, Paul J.; See—
T43S63,"cT7i6-S'X''' '"' '■' ""' '^'^""' "•""««'
Snipes, Wallace: See—
SnoiSlIl'^ol^r^L" sSl"''^*' '^"""''' *'*^*''^'' ^' ^24-28.000.
%',43t2«r'a."6?-^'S^^^ •'"^^ ^^ --^ '^"""- ««"'"<' ^••
^"^^f A ^c' ^ ' o -Ji"** Tamboraki. Christ, to United States of Amer-
in -HHiff^/"' P«^"0""«e<J aliphatic polyalkylether lubricant with
an additive composed of an aromatic phosphine substituted with
perfluoroalkylether groups. 4,438,006. cf 252-49 900
iJi"i^^ ^■' D =i^'' Tamborski. Christ, to United Sutes of Amer-
i?'.HHi.L "■ P«^"°""?«ed aliphatic polyalkylether lubricant with
an additive composed of an aromatic phosphine substituted with
perfluoroalkylether groups. 4,438,007, cf 252-49.900
Snyder, Daniel R.: See—
"'hitehouse, Craig W.., , .,.-^. „„,
DanielR., 4,437,859, CI. 604-131.000.
SocieU' Pneumatici Pirelli S.p.A.: See—
Vespasiani, Alberto, 4,437,297, CI. 57-9.000.
Societc Anonyme Automobiles Citroen: See—
Dore, Jacques, 4,437,219, CI. 29-283.000.
Societe Anonyme Automobiles Peugeot: See—
Dore, Jacques, 4,437,219, CI. 29-283.000.
Socicte Anonyme dite: Alsthom-Atlantique: See—
Valibouse, Bernard, 4,437,989, CI. 210-242.300.
Societe Anonyme dite: L'Oreal: See—
° 424-70 000*"''''*"''°''' *"*^ '^"~' ■'°'*"*' '♦•*3*'*'5- CI.
Guillon, Michel; Mondet, Jean; Papantoniou. Christos; and Van-
denbossche, CUudme, 4,438, 1 40, CI. 424-6 1 .000.
Whitehouse, Craig M; Cox^igel; Burt, Allan G.; and Snyder.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 39
Koulbanis. Consuntin; N'Guyen, Quang L.; Zabotto. Arlette; and
Plot, Josiane. 4.437.895, CI. 106-245.000.
Societe Anonyme Engrenages et Reducteurs: See—
Durand. Francois; and Smulders. Auguste, 4.437.792. 01.
405-198.000.
Societe d'AssisUnce Technique pour Produiu Nestle S.A.: See—
Hedrick. Paul L.. Jr.. 4.438.147. CI. 426-570.000.
Societe J. Brochier & Fils: See—
Bompard. Bruno; and Bruyere, Alain, 4.437,221, 01. 29-429.000.
Societe Nationale d'Etude et de Construction de Moteurs d'Aviation.
S.N.E.C.M.A.: See—
Halin. Yves R.; and Hersen. Rene M. J.. 4.437.783, 01. 403-27.000.
Menioux, Claude 0. F.. 4.437.441. 01. 123-213.000.
Societe Vetrotex Saint-Oobain: See—
Lecron. Jacques; Manera, Maxime; Faure, Jean-Paul; and Renau-
din, Jean-Pierre. 4.437.869, CI. 65-1.000.
Soclof. Sidney I., to Rockwell International Corporation. Process for
producing NPN type lateral transistor with minimal substrate opera-
tion interference. 4.437.226. CI. 29-577.00R.
Sole, Jitka, to Dow Chemical Company, The. Retin particles with
magnetic particles bonded to surface. 4,438,179, 01. 428-407.000.
Sony Corporation; See—
Ishikawa, Reiji; Saito, Masaki; Mori, Toshio; and Tamura,
Hidemasa. 4.438.160, 01. 427-214.000.
KatsumaU. Yasushi, 4,438,409, 01. 330-107.000.
Maruo. Tsunehiro; and Inagaki, Masaomi, 4,438,398, 01.
324-173.000.
Miyashiu, Takao; Aizawa, Hidekuni; and Takamiya, Toru.
4.437,778, CI. 400-208.000.
Moriya, Ryusuke; Eguchi, Takeo; and Ohba, Takeo, 4,438,465, 01.
360-22.000.
Odaka, Kenuro. 4.438,464. 01. 360-13.000.
Ohba. Takeo; and Koga. Hirohisa. 4.438,469, 01. 360-109.000.
Sakai, Masaaki; and Yoshihiro, Mitsugu, 4,438,377, 01. 318-254.000.
Sakamoto, Hitoshi, 4,438,463, 01. 360-10.200.
Shibau, Takashi: and Nishimura. Masaaki. 4,438,525, 01.
381-63.000.
Yoshinaka, Tadaaki, 4,438,456, 01. 358-148.000.
Soong, Tsai 0. String load apportioned racket. 4,437,662. 01. 273-
73.00D.
Soper, Douglas C; and Gould. Brian, to British Gas Corporation.
Mains insertion. 4,437,494, 01. 138-97.000.
Sor, Inc.: See —
Johnson, James R., 4.438,305, 01. 200-83.00J.
Soref, Richard A.: See—
Kroger, Harry; and Soref. Richard A., 4,437,761, 01. 356-44.000.
Sorenson, John F., to Champion International Corporation. Shipping
carton with case knife protection for inner cartons. 4,437,569, 01.
206-601.000.
Sorenson, John F., to Champion International Corporation. Shipping
carton with case knife protection for inner cartons. 4.437,570. 01
206-601.000.
Sorenson, Paul D.; and Dickson, Dale A., to Medtronic, Inc. Ultra-
sound scanning system with semi-independent transducer array.
4,437.468. 01. 128-660.000.
Southgate. Roberi; See—
Corbett. David F.; Southgate. Robert; and Ooulton. Steven,
4,438.036. 01. 260.245.20T.
Southwire Company: See-
Gentry. Bobby C. 4,437.901, 01. 148-1 1.50A.
MacCraven, Joseph. 4.437,904, 01. 148-13.100.
Spacesaver Corporation: See—
Dahncn. Dean L.. 4.437,711. 01. 312-201.000.
Speaker, Richard L. Spaghetti and food cooker. 4,437,395, 01.
99-355.000.
SpeU, Walter, to INA Walzlager Schaeffler KG. Valve Uppet.
4,437,439, 01. 123-90.560.
Spencer, Mike R.; See-
Lewis, Mack A.; and Spencer, Mike R., 4,437,699. 01. 296-181.000.
Sperry Corporation: See —
Flannery, William E.; Josephs, Richard M.; Stein, Barry F.; Wang,
Tsing-Chow; and Young. Peter L.. 4.437,227, 01. 29-589.000.
Kroger, Harry; and Soref, Richard A., 4,437,761, 01. 356-44.000.
McGrann, Harold J.; Om, John F.; and Pallaver, Matthew C.
4.437,351. 01. 73-862.050.
Spicer. Arnold: See-
Colby. Ronald W.; and Spicer, Arnold, 4,438,146, 01. 426-448.000.
Spielman. Lyie S.. to Eclipse, Inc. Burner block assembly for industrial
furnaces. 4,437,415, 01. 110-182.500.
Spitz, Melvin P., to Kinematic Industries. Inc. Folding sofa-bed mecha-
nism. 4,437.197. 01. 5-13.000.
Sponer, Gisbert: See —
Ross, Carl H.; Kampe, Wolfgang; Bartsch, Wolfgang; Sponer,
Gisbert; and Roesch, Egon, 4,438,116, 01. 424-250.000.
Wiedemann. Fritz; Kampe, Wolfgang; Dietmann, Karl; and
Sponer, Gisbert. 4.438.128. 01. 424-273.00N.
Sprague. Clyde D., to Nordson Corporation. Retainable cloture.
4.437,594, 01. 222-544.000.
Sprague Electric Company: See-
Bernard. Walter J.. 4.437,946. 01. 2O4.35.00N.
Sells, Mary A.; and Scott. John W., 4.437.945. 01. 2O4-35.0ON.
Sprague, Robert A.; See-
Turner. William D.; and Sprague. Robert A.. 4,438.461. Q.
358-302.000.
Springs Industries, Inc.; See-
Daniels, John Y.; and Stevenson, James C, 4.438.169, a.
428-196.000.
Srinivasan, Nalluwamy; See—
Collins, Arthur K.; Andrews, Edward W.; and Srinivaian, Nallu-
wamy, 4,438,495, CI. 364-414.000.
Subile, Nicolo; Motu, Raimondo; and Gosso, Oiancarlo, to Oxon Italia
S.p.A. Process for synthesizing N-isopropyl-N'-o-carbomethoxy-
phenylsuiphamide. 4,438,276, 01. 560-13.000.
Stadler, Istvan: See—
Galambos, Gaza; Simonidesz. Vilmos; Szekely. Istvan; Ivanics.
Jozsef; Kekesi. Knsztina; Kovacs. Gabor; Stadler. Istvan; Kor-
moczy. Peter; and Horvath. Karoly, 4.438.132. 01. 424-285.000.
Stadler, Peter; See—
Petersen, Uwe; Stadler, Peter; Lockhoff, Oswald; Zeiler, Hans-Joa-
chim; and Metzaer, Kari O., 4,438,260, 01. 536-13.900.
Staebel, Raymond J.: See—
Peterman, Lee G.; and Staebel, Raymond J.. 4,438,069, 01.
422-62.000.
Suhl, Juergen; Schuster, Wilhelm; and Wegner, Wjlhelm. to Gold- und
Silber-Schcideanstalt Oberstein Franz Reischtuer. Clasp for gar-
ments, in particular furs. 4,437.212, CI. 24-698.000.
Stahle, Helmut; Koppe. Herbert; Kummer. Werner; Stockhaus, Klaus'
Gaida. Wolfram; and HoefVe, Wolfgang, to Boehringer Ingelheim
KG. Substituted imidazo[l,2-a]pynmidines and pharmaceutical com-
positions containing them. 4.438,118. 01. 424-251.000.
Stahle, Helmut: See—
Koppe, Herbert; Kummer, Werner; Suhle, Helmut; Muacevic,
Gojko; and Traunecker. Werner. 4,438.143. 01. 424-304.000
Stained Glass Overlay, Inc.: See-
Butler, Donald R., 4,438,165, 01. 428-38.000.
Stallman, Richard 0. Outboard jet drive steering mechanism. 4,437,841.
01. 440-42.000. . . '.
Stamicarbon B.V.; See—
Willems, Michael H.; and Vermys, Winfried J. W., 4,438,083. 01.
423-266.000.
SUndard Oil Company (Indiana); See—
Dobry, Alan M., 4.437,997, 01. 210-727.000.
Packer, Lawrence G.; and Schloumacher. Edward J., 4,438,279,
01. 562-416.000.
Sunley Electric Co.. Ltd.; See—
Kato. Kazuhiu; and Yuui, Maaaru. 4,438,154, 01. 427-39.000.
Sunley, Philip E.; See—
Cushing, David E.; and Stanley, Philip E.. 4,438,493, 01.
364-200.000.
Sunley Works, The; See—
Elmore, James; and West, Robert F., 4,437.375, 01. 83-762.000.
Suuffer Chemical Company: See-
Large, George B., 4437,874, 01. 71-87.000.
Suver, Paul L. Trailer mounted log splitter. 4,437,502, 01. 144-193.00A.
Suviuky, David; and Beres, Ernest A., to RCA Corporation. Mold for
recorded disc. 4,437,641, 01. 249-79.000.
Steag Kemenergie GmbH; See—
Bienek, Heinz; Finkbeiner, Rudolf; and Wick, Wilhelm, 4,437,578,
01. 220-256.000.
Stebbins Engineering and Manufacturing Co.: See—
Macaleese, John E.. 4437,279, CI. 52-247,000.
Steckel, Lester M.; and Thomsen, Valeria J. Tattooing gun. 4,437,361.
01. 81-9.220.
Stegmeier, Alwin: See—
Leiber, Heinz; and Stegmeier, Alwin. 4.438.420. 01. 335-275.000.
Stein, Alvin W. Self-adjusting self-locking hanger for pictures and the
like. 4437,639, 01. 248-558.000.
Stein. Barry F.; See—
Flannery, William E.; Josephs, Richard M.; Stein, Barry F.; Wang.
Tsing-Chow; and Young, Peter L., 4,437,227, 01. 29-589.000.
Steinber^er, Michael L., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated.
Adaptive cross-polarization interference cancellation system.
4,438,530, 01. 455-278.000.
Steiner, Robert H.; and Touhsaent. Robert E.. to Mobil Oil Corpora-
tion. Thermoplastic coated films with anti-sutic properties.
4,438,176,01.428-349.000.
Stempel, John H. Chalkboard with hinged chalk rail. 4,437,839, 01.
434-417.000.
Stenner, John W.: See—
Volk, Kurt E.. Jr.; Herbert. Everett H.; and Stenner, John W..
4437,852. 01. 493-216.000.
Stephens. Donald E.; and Sharpies. Thomas D., to Beckman Inttru-
menu. Inc. Packed column thermal reactor for an analytical instru-
ment. 4,438,070, 01. 422-70.000.
Stephens, James M.: See-
Kramer, James H.; Omdorff, Roy L.. Jr.; and Stephens, James M.,
4437,688, 01. 285-95.000.
Stem, Warren C, to Burroughs Wellcome Co. Reduction of cholesterol
with meu-chloro a-t-butylaminopropiophenone. 4,438,138, CI.
424-330.000.
Steuerwald, Manfred; See—
Koester, Eberhard; Hack. Joachim; and Steuerwald, Manfred.
4438,462, 01. 360-2.000.
Stevens. Perry; and Brown, Robert E., to A.F.O.S., Inc. Feeding appa-
ratus for fish and other animals. 4,437,595, 01. 222-642.000.
Stevenson, James C: See-
Daniels, John Y.; and Stevenson. James 0.. 4,438,169, d.
428-196.000.
PI 40
LIST OF PATENTEES
Stewtrt. John C: See—
Stier. Bernhard. to VDO Adolf Schindling AG. Device for producing
Sti« S2S M "**h"*1^k'''*1'S'7^"°" 4.438.423. CI. 34O-52.00R. *
«h!^ ^ • "^ AIb«ugh Nal P.. to Burr-Brown Research Corpo-
"i3j33'5ra.T5S.«?SS?' """""« '" " optoelectronic mod'SJ
Stockhaus, Klaus: See—
Stahle. Helmut; Koppe. Herbert; Kummer. Werner; Stockhaus.
SfSl^S^ "'^"^ "** "'*"*• ^°'f«"8' '♦>38.n8. Cl!
**^^'*i''*"? T ; Vaseen. Vesper A.; and Terry. Ruel C. to In Situ
^ "S *^', *^ Method for minimizing subsidence effects during
production of coal in situ. 4,437.520. CI. 166-261.000. ^
StofTel. James C: See—
^!^°*- ^^J^"} ^ • Kadekodi. Narayan K.; Ibrahim. Abd-El-Fat-
358-?i3 0OO*^''' "^ ^' '"'* ^*°''''' ■'""" ^- '♦•'♦38'*"' CI.
^'^Hi-' ^r"* ^ • ■''.= RotJertw". J«mes C; and Matyas, Tibor, to
105O78 000 **'* ''*'''*^'* *"** enclosure. 4.437.410, CI.
Stoltefuss. Wilhelm. to GewerkschaA Eisenhutte Westfalia. Cutting
SSToOO ' "*"'"* "** tunnelling machines. 4,437.708. CI
*'S:.i^^^"' ^f ^°'*^"' Manfred, to Daimler-Benz Aktiengesell-
S?«^.^"l '^ compartment arranged between an engine coSpart-
SS 170 ' *'' '*"* °^ ' ""'"^ ''*'''*^'* 4,437,393rCl.
Stone t Webster Engineering Corp.: See—
^"4tw%Tro8''ii?ss^'"'• '''^" "-^ ""* °'^*'*'' '^°'*« ^ •
Storr. Rudolf, to Veb Kombinat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz" Lcip-
?f37.So".'cr2l6-roS'oi"' "^'"«''""'' '°' »'-'"•"« 'PP--'-
Stouffer. Ronald D., to Bowles Fluidics Corporation. Sweeping air
stream apparatus and method. 4.437.392. CI. 98-2 080
Stover, William A.: See—
Strange, Rodney G.: See—
^{.438^!S*' Cl.li^Sgo)'^"'"'^ °' *"** ''"™'*"' '*°'*" ^••
StriSder^FUinei sJj-'''' '"'*''' ''""'*'' *''*^^'*''*' ^- 293-118.000.
'^p^il'rl:69J."s. fjfi'So'^''"^ ^'''' '^'^ -"^ ^««''»-
'1S;^toriySe2.U8.1SS^'eSffi'S!;°" ^«««« --»^"«
«°,'!i.,^.°'*" '^' '°.^'*' 9*"*"^ Company, The. CaUlysts for
oxidative coupling of phenols. 4.438.284. CI. 568-730.000.
^'t^%^'ci{r^'^'6^'^ '■■' "^ Strudwick. Thomas
''r;;£;.T4T7"5bi°c?.°,*^2'!42^ °""'"- ^^*-'"«- -«"'«-«
^T„*^^' m"*^"'"c = ^"*''^' ^'»*°= Arcamone. Federico; and Casazza,
Anna M. to Farmaitalia Carlo Erba S.p.A. 4'.Iododerivativ^f
anthracycline glycosides. 4.438.105. CI. 424-18O.00a
Sudo, Masami: See—
''i3S593''S"4V^c^ "^"^ ^^ '^°' '^"-'•
^i^^°A^**°^' ''^JivWatanabe. Takeshi; Suzuki. Kenkichi; and
^^'.i^Ta'^is^y^'St' "-•" "-^-^ ^'^^ ''»P'*^ -*^-
Sueiahi. Motohani: See—
Takahashi. Hiroshi; Suzuki. Yukio; Mateuo. Masashi; Ono,
Suga, Michiharu: See—
'^4S;.^43.'S°5W?2TSb ^"""'"""^ •"'* '""^ '^'*=»^»-"'
Suga, Yozo: See—
^2!^, Kensuke; Mateumoto. Hiromi; Suga. Yozo; Nakayama.
sugimo'i?tih'?;j:'sr"°"'' ''""'°' *'*"''^- ^' •♦^-•"■o*
Ito. Shinzo; Kato. Tateshi; Noma, Takumi; Sugimoto, Soichiro; and
Toiyama. Seigi. 4.437.341. d. 73-1 I9.00A. ™ro.ana
Sugiura, Fumitoshi: See—
Suzuki. Alura; and Sugiura, Fumitoshi. 4.438.001. CI. 252-8.700
augiura, rlideaki: See —
t^i^ia'lJj^lt.^' "^ m-ufacturing method therefir.
^'SkSi!!? ^^ Kruegen David C; and Zehner, Burch E.. to Dow
Chemical Company. The. Method for the preparation <rf styrwe
sSrStS^'^I^ Prepwd thereby. 4,438,224. CI. 521-146.000.
March 20, 1984
*^Sl^^??*"' ^^^^ ^"""8' Carlhans; Podszun. Wolfgang;
-— — — . "j~^... ^uuu5, ^.wuiaiH; rooszun, woifgi
4^836^Cr43?Xo$. '^"^' "^ '*'*"'°^ ^«^
Sumi, Akihiko: See—
Chibata, Ichiro; Sumi, Akihiko; Ohtsuki. Osamu; and Izuttu.
Nozomu. 4.438.044. CI. 260-501.120. ". «ia izuisu.
Sumida. Seizo: See—
^^[tir'l^' \'V^'J'^TS^°' '*=*^''': K-moshita. Katsuzo; Yoshida,
7Mioo£ ^'"^^°' ""* Sumida. Seizo, 4,437,880, a.
Sumitomo Chemical Company. Limited: See—
*" tI!^!!!'"!' ^^^!^' '^'^"™' Shuji; Nakae. Kiyohiko; Ogawa.
SS2S0OO "°' "«*«^*«»' 4.438.238. O!
'^!ir*««: 'child; FujiU, Fumio; Ohnishi. Toshihiro; and Tamura.
Toshifumi. 4.438,262. CI. 536-43.000. •" i-niura.
Nagano Eiki; Hashimoto. Shunichi; Yoshida, Ryo; MaUumoto
Hiroshi; and Kamoshita. Kattuzo, 4,437,877. CI. 71-90000 '
'T4?8S6.?r''56i8SSr '*''"""^ ""• ^"^' M"-*.
T^tahashi. Junya; Takemoto. Ichiki; Kamoshita, KaUuzo; Yoshida,
?ffio.So° """'"''°= •"** S""'"^ Seizo, 4,437,8M. o!
Sumitomo Metal Industries, Ltd.: See—
^t^J'f'^'^°- v*''u"!'' '^'"°"': '^^•'' Toshiyuki; Yonehara.
^Jc^^oiwai. Yoshihisa; and Endo. Kazuhiko. 4.437.883?Ci:
^^tTIi ^^a^^' O^?""- Shozo; Sunami. Yoshihiko; Ho«>i.
TakujL^and Kanou. Takuo. 4.437.974. CI. 208-10.000.
Umino. Masahide; Tamura. Eijiro; Karasuno. Isamu; Ichidate
Mmoni; and Kubo, Toshihiko, 4,437,891. C! 75-251 000
Sumitomo McUl Mining Company Limited: See—
Cr423^8^00o'' '^'"""'*' "''°y"'''' "«^ '^"'»' Naoki, 4.438.079.
Sumitomo Naugatuck Co.. Ltd.: See-
Fujimori. Yoshitugu; Takabori, Yasuo; Sakano. Haiime- and Ito
Akitoshi, 4,438,229. CI. 524-109.000. •' ' °'
Sumitomo Special Metals Co., Ltd. See—
Furukawa, Mitsuhiki; Miyahara, Michito; Kitahira, Takashi-
Sunami. Yoshihiko: See—
^xfi^i-i '^''h v'= °'^""' Shozo; Sunami, Yoshihiko; Hosoi.
Takuji;andKanou, Takuo, 4,437,974, CI. 208-10000
Suncor, Inc.: See— •".«»«.
Yong Raymond N., 4,437,998. CI. 210-728.000.
Sunder-Plassmann. Paul: See—
^'52&2O0O*"' "^"^ Sunder-Plassmann. Paul. 4,438.244. Q.
Sundseth, Jarl. Air filters. 4.438,057. CI. 264-46.500
Sung, Rodney L.: See—
^°25203 &"^'^'" "' '"*^ ^""*' '^°**"**' ^- *''*3*''»5' CI.
Surprenant. Richard P.: See—
^SUm'soO ^' *"** Surprenant, Richard P., 4,438,039, CI.
Sussmeyer, Robert; Pluvinage, Alain; and Moenaert. Christian, to
Ateliers Sussmeyer SPRL. Process for automatic and (»rSnuou«
vaporization and condensation. 4,437,940, CI. 203-49.000.
Su,u^^™n""?M!J.= "x Sutcliffe, Peter H., 4,438,502, CI. 364-718.000.
Suzukamo, Gohfu; Tamura, Mitsuhisa; and Fukao, Masami, to
?oTMT8,?8t™ri6^Sffi.'-'"''"' '"'»•''•"«' "^" •"«* ••«>■
Suzuki, Akira; and Sugiura. Fumitoshi. to Takemotoyushi Co. Ltd
Oiling agent for treating synthetic fibers. 4.438.001, CI. 252-8 700 '
"^AAm:'?t^,^?^ "^"^ "^ *"«"""• •"-• -
Suzuki. Hideo, to Okamura Corporation. Method and device for auto-
matically controlling welding conditions for use in an arc welding
machine. 4.438.318. CI. 219-137.0PS. weiaing
Suzuki. Kenkichi: See—
Sudo. Ryoichi; Shoji. Fusaji; Watanabe, Takeshi; Suzuki. Kenkichi-
and Ooue, Michio, 4,437,731, CI. 350-340.000. "'™"cm.
Suzuki. Masahiro: See—
"•y«*?!^.T«lw; Suzuki. Maaahiro; Ozawa. Shigeru; and Takeya.
Yoshiaki. 4.437,890. Q. 75-244.000. '
tJ"'?*^^- ^?rf«"?!?'' *^"™o: "«1 Yamamoto. Meguni, to
Toyooko Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Pneumatic-hydraulic system fm
hydraulic actuator. 4.437,309. CI. 60-547.100.
Suzuki Shm; and Sato. Toshihiko. to NGK Spark Plug Co.. Ltd
12'm4?OOA°'" °" chamber preheating device. 4.437.440. d
Suzuki, Shizuo: See—
Suzuki, Shuichi: See—
«,„.5f^-?1: ^u""= ^ ^"i"*"' Shuichi, 4.437.959. CI. 204-159.110.
suziiki, Takashi; and Ito. Susumu. to Canon Kabulhiki Kaisha. Quick
32m76 (So' ' '°'" * '"'*^* **" ""** ""'*^ 4,437,740. CI.
Suzuki. Yukio: See—
TakahasH Hiroshi; Suzuki. Yukio; MaUuo. Masashi; Ono.
4"47;25.^ Cra'lte '''^ *^"°= "" "^' ^°*°*»™'
^"nSl; ^^!^n' ^"»oniP"rj? A; and Griffin. Freddie. Jr.. to
Dow Chemica^ Company. The. Process for making aminopolycar-
boxylic acid cheUtes of iron. 4.438.040. CI. 260-439XWR.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 41
Svensk Ideutveckling Handelsbolag: See—
Johannson. Ame. 4.437.609. cT 236-49.000.
Sylvia, Frank, to Pace Incorporated. Ceramic coated electric heater
•iicmbly for tools. 4.438,322, CI. 219-236.000.
Synthelabo: See—
Obitz. Daniel, 4,438,121, CI. 424-258.000.
Syroco, Inc.: See-
Brescia, Tony; and Deacon, Ross, 4.437.414, CI. 108-134.000.
Szahler, David J., to A Packaging Service Company, Inc. Child proof
container. 4.437,566, CI. 206-1.500.
Szekely, 1st van: See—
Galambos, Gaza; Simonidesz, Vilmos; Szekely, Istvan; Ivanics,
Jozsef; Kekesi. Krisztina; Kovacs, Gabor; Stadler, Istvan; Kor-
moczy, Peter; and Horvath, Karoly, 4,438,132, CI. 424-285.000.
Tabata, Seuuko: See—
Sauuki, Teruhisa; Ota, Seiiti; and Tabata, Setsuko, 4,438,025, CI.
252-545.000.
Tabei. Masatoshi, to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Solid-sute color imager
with three layer four story structure. 4,438,455, CI. 358-44.000.
Taber, Bruce D.; and Wagner, James B., to General Electric Company.
HRSG Damper control. 4,437,313, CI. 60-665.000.
Tabor, Edward; and Gerety, Robert J., to United Sutes of America,
Health and Human Services. Heat treatment of a non-A, non-B
hepatitis agent to prepare a vaccine. 4,438,098, CI. 424-89.000.
Taggari, Robert E.: See—
Taggart, Thomas D.; and Taggart, Robert E., 4,437,488, CI.
137-334,000.
Taggart. Thomas D.; and Taggart, Robert E., to Lockwood Technical
file. Solenoid valve for hot melt material. 4,437,488, CI. 137-334.000.
Taiho Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Nozue, Shigehiro; Fukuoka. TaUuhiko; and Sugiura, Hideaki,
4,437,215, CI. 29-149.50R.
Taiyo Yuden Co., Ltd.: See—
Masuyama, Masaru; Hirooka, Susumu; and Yamaoka, NobuUtsu,
4,438.214. CI. 501-136.000.
Tajana, Alberto: See—
Nardi. Dante; Tajana, Alberto; Motta, Gianni; Cazzulani, Pietro;
and Graziani, Gabriele, 4,438,133, CI. 424-300.000.
Tajkowski, Edward G., to Allied Corporation. Solvent dewatering
composition. 4,438.026. CI. 252-545.000.
Takabori. Yasuo: See-
Fujimori, Yoshitugu; Takabori. Yasuo; Sakano, Hajime; and Ito,
Akitoshi, 4,438,229, CI. 524-109.000.
Takada, Norihisa: See-
Nelson, Philip E.; and Takada, Norihisa. 4,437,934. Q. 159-47.100.
Takagi, Mitiro: See—
Nagano. Hiroyuki; Takagi. Mitiro; Kubodera, Noboru; MaUunaga.
Isao; Yamazaki. TamoUu; NabaU, Hiroyuki; Sakai. Kazushige;
and Hata. Shun-ichi, 4,438,115, CI. 424-250.000.
Takahashi, Hiroshi; Suzuki, Yukio; MaUuo, Masashi; Ono, Hironobu;
Yoshida, Shuzo; Ueda. Kazuo; and Sueishi, Motohani. to Toyota
Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha; and Nippondenso Co.. Ltd. Method and
apparatus for controlling the fuel feeding rate of an internal combus-
tion en^ne. 4.437,445, CI. 123-491.000.
Takahashi. Junya; Takemoto, Ichiki; Kamoshita, KaUuzo; Yoshida,
Ryo; Katoh, Haruhiko; and Sumida, Seizo. to Sumitomo Chemical
Company, Limited. N'-Phenyl-N-methylurea derivatives. 4,437,880,
0.7^120.000.
Takahashi, Keiichi: See—
Tomita, Fusao; MaUuda, Yuzuru; Shirahata, Kunikattu; Takahashi,
Keiichi; Nakano, Hirofumi; Sato, Tomoyasu; Okubo, Shuji; and
Nakamura, Nobuo. 4.438.197, CI. 435-119.000.
Takahashi, Masayoshi: See—
Nomoto. Reishi; Akimoto, Masahiro; and Takahashi, Masayoshi,
4,437.465, CI. 128-340.000.
Takahashi, Mitsuo: See —
Mattui. Kanenobu; Uchiumi, Shinichiro; Takahashi, Mittuo; Asada,
Hideki; and Kurahashi, Masaru, 4,438,041, CI. 260-464.000.
Takahashi, Tomowaki; Konno, Kunio; and Sasaya, Tothihiro, to Nip-
pon Kogaku K.K. Zoom lens. 4,437,733. Q. 350-427.000.
Takamiya, Toru: See—
Miyashiu. Takao; Aizawa. Hidekuni; and Takamiya, Torn.
4,437,778. CI. 400-208.000.
Takaiugi, Hisaahi: See—
Takaya. Takao; Takasugi, Hisashi; Murata, Masayoshi; and Yoshi-
oka, Akiteru, 4,438,113, CI. 424-246.000.
Takata, Masahiro; Aoki, Ryuii; and Sato, Takahisa, to Nippin Shokubai
Kagako Kogyo Co., Ltd. Catalyst for oxidation of propylene.
4,4J8.2 1 7, cr 502-205.000.
Takaya, Takao; Takasugi, Hisashi; Murata, Masayoahi; and Yoahioka,
Akiteru, to Fiuisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. 7-Acylaininoceph-
alosporanic acid derivatives. 4,438.113, CI. 424-246,000.
Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See—
Kawamatsu. Yutaka; and Fujita, Takeshi, 4,438,141, Q.
424-248.510.
Takei, Hiroshi: See—
PhUhps, Jeffrey; and Takd, Hirodu, 4,438,481, CI. 361-433.000.
Takemoto, Ichiki: Sw —
Takahashi, Junya; Takemoto, Ichiki; Kamoshita, Kattuzo; Yoshida,
Ryo; Katoh, Haruhiko; and Sumida, Seizo. 4.437,880. CI.
71-120.000.
Takemotoyushi Co. Ltd.: See—
Suzuki, Akira; and Sugiura, Fumitoahi. 4,438,001, CI. 232-8.700.
Takeshima, Masaki: Sar—
Kikkawa. Ryozo; and Takeshiina. Masaki, 4,437,933, Q. 139-
17.00R.
Takeya, Yoshiaki: See—
Hayasaka, Tadao; Suzuki, Masahiro; Ozawa, Shigeru; and Takeya.
Yoshiaki, 4,437,890, CI. 75-244.000.
Taki, Yuuo: See—
Araki. Shigeru; Taki, Yasuo; Mori, Kazuhiro; Miuwa. Yoshihiko;
and Tanaka, Souhei, 4,437,232, CI. 29-740.000.
Tamborski, Christ: See—
Snyder, Carl E.. Jr.; and Tamborski, Christ. 4,438,006, Q.
252-49.900.
Snyder. Carl £., Jr.; and Tamborski. Christ. 4,438,007, Q.
252-49.900.
Tameris. Hendrikus M.: See-
van der Ploeg. Dirk C. H.; and Tameris. Hendrikus M.. 4,437,717,
CI. 425-84.000.
Tamura, Eijiro: See—
Umino, Masahide; Tamura, Efjiro; Karasuno, Isamu; Ichidate,
Minora; and Kubo, Toshihiko, 4,437,891, CI. 75-231.000.
Tamura, Hidemasa: See—
Ishikawa, Reiji; Saito, Masaki; Mori, Toshio; and Tamura,
Hidemasa, 4,438,160, CI. 427-214.000.
Tamura, Hifumi: See—
Hosolci, Shigeyuki; Futamoto, Masaaki; Kawabe, Ushio; Ishitani,
Tohra; and Tamura, Hifiuni, 4,438,371, CI. 315-111.810.
Tamura, Hiroyuki: See—
Nakano, tadashi; Tamura. Hiroyuki; and Kubo. Naoki. 4.438.079,
CI 423-87.000.
Tamura, Hisashi; Ito, Ichizo; Hirayama, Masashi; and Ando, Tetsuo, to
Yokogawa Hokushin Electric Corporation. Vortex flow metering
apparatus. 4,437.350. CI. 73-861.240.
Tamura, MiUuhisa: See—
Suzukamo, Gohfu; Tamura, Mittuhisa; and Fukao, Masami.
4,438,286, CI. 568-840.000.
Tamura, Toshifumi: See—
Murase. Ichiki; Fujita, Fumio; Ohnishi, Toshihiro; and Tamura.
Toshifumi, 4,438,262, CI. 536-43.000.
Tan, Yui-Kuan: See—
Komada, Kenya; and Tan, Yui-Kuan, 4,438,444, CI. 346-135.000.
Tanabe Seiyaku Co., Ltd.: See—
Chibau, Ichiro; Sumi, Akihiko; Ohuuki, Osamu; and Izutsu,
Nozomu. 4,438,044, CI. 260-501.120.
Gaino, Miuunori; lijima, Ikuo; Nishimoto, Shigera; Ikeda, Kui-
chiro; and Fujii, Tokuo, 4,438,035, CI. 260-239.30B.
Tanaka, Akihiro: See—
Umezawa, Hamao; Umezawa, Sumio; Tsuchiya, Tsutomu; and
Tanaka, Akihiro, 4,438,109, Q. 424-180.000.
Tanaka, Chiaki; Nakashima, Shinobu; and Kondow, Makoto, to Toray
Industries, Incorporated. Polyamide elastomer. 4.438,240, CI.
525-420.000.
Tanaka. Hidetoshi: See—
Kawakubo. Kazuo; Furuichi. Katsushi; Namekata, Kiyokazu;
Tanaka, Hidetoshi; Tohyama. Yashikuni; Kasamura, Toshirou;
Aoki, Tomohiro; and Honma, Toshio, 4,437,756, CI. 333-14.00R.
Tanaka. Ittuo: See—
Sando, Yoshikazu; Goto, Tokuju; Tanaka, Ittuo; Ishidoshiro, Hiro-
shi; and Minakata, Mattuo, 4,437,324, CI. 68-S.OOE.
Tanaka, Minora: See —
Terahara, Akira; Hamano, Kiyoshi; Tsujita, Yoshio; and Tanaka,
Minora, 4,438,277, CI. 560-119.000.
Tanaka, Souhei: See—
Araki, Shigera; Taki, Yasuo; Mori, Kazuhiro; Misawa, Yoshihiko;
and Tanaka, Souhei, 4,437,232, Q. 29-740.000.
Tanaka, Tosio, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Motor
drive wparatus. 4,438,378, CI. 318-280.000.
Tanaka, Yoshio. Expanding proceu. 4,438.058, Q. 264-51.000.
Tanaka, Yukio: See —
Araki. Masatada; and Tanaka, Yukio. 4,437,800, CI. 407-119.000.
Tandon, Jagdish C; Kadekodi, Narayan K.; Ibrahim, Abd-El-Fattah
A.; Handy, Roland J.; and StofTel, James C, to Xerox Corporatioo.
High resolution imager employing staggered sensor stnictuic.
4,438,457, CI. 358-213.000.
Tani, Mittukiyo: See—
Kobayashi, Mamoru; Ishiye, Kanii; Sasaki, Hideaki; Tani, Mil-
sukiyo; and Kawakami, Yashuhiko, 4,437.603, Q. 228-4.300.
Taniguchi. Nobuyuki. to Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaiaha. Camera
capable of automatically responding to dau coded on film. 4,437.742,
CI. 334-21.000.
Tannetics, Inc.: Set
lannelli. Frank M.. 4,437,319. Q. 62-138.000.
Tantalo, Anthony T. Fuel uving device for increasing f^l mikafe oo
a moving vehicle. 4,437.698, CI. 296-l.OOS.
Tao, Thomas M.; and Bean, William C. Control of bulk in air laid
fibrous webs. 4,437.917, Q. 136-296.000.
Tarjan, Peter P.: See—
Saulson. Stanley H.; Schroeppel. Edward A.; and Tarjan. Peter P.,
4,437,466, Q. 128-419.0PS.
Tashiro, Minora, to Bunri Industry Co., Ltd. Filter apparatus.
4,437,991, CI. 210-413.000.
Taskier, Henry T., to Celanese Corporatioa. Hydrophilic polymer
coated microporous membranes capable of use as a battery separator.
4,438,183, CI. 429-230.000.
Tasaie, Douglas P., to General Electric Company. Gun mount
4,437,384,Cr89.37.00A.
Tateishi, Arthur K. Directional air fiow fan. 4,437,394, Q. 9t-4a00V.
Tateishi, Jvaji; Ishikawa, Takehani; Nakano, Shoiabiiro; and Ni-
shiyana, Noboru, to Kawaaalti Steel Corporation. Flux oompoiitioa
PI 42
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
for electro-slag over-lay welding of a cylindrical veuei with a strio T«..»rr,n in^ c..
electrode. 4,437.906. CI. 148-26 OOO ^^ vcaiei wiin a sinp Textron Inc.: S«—
Tauber, Randolph T.: See— t r""™"*' Anthony J.. 4.437.590. CI. 222-386.500.
'^'4S363'a»'' '^' ''"'' '^""'^'' '**"**°'P'' T.. 4.437.838. CI. 'cL 4^5 I S.'^'""'^'' ''''P*"« '**''*'* ^°' ™"«* «"«hi. 4.437.82
Tauber, Robert T.; and Tauber Randolph T to TTif r„-.« . Thermal Systems Limited: See—
SS^V-""- for%;eXrexIirna2.^.5S.1l?rcr Ther^^rrc^"/^:^?;^^' ^'-^''^-^^^
'^'forTKM""*"^'t"^.^?"'''?'"**='J''°''°"y'»'DentalInf,nnary ^S22'l'oM ^' "''• ""** ^'"°' ■'"'"" "• '»''»38.290. CI.
M38'2'S?" 43l?9?OoS" ''' ''"''"^'°" °' glucosylranferas/ Thier. AlTons! SS-
Tavares. Donald F.: See— ^i«"i?S^ Hans-Bemd; and Thier. Alfons, 4,438.028 CI
T.,l«, Gerald E.,i„- ». <-l. TO J2O.O0O. '*'5r';,,°|S' ^' ■"" Sc"""'". Fred E.. 4,437.681, a.
"XSi^.'-^h^io'^''' '""»"' ^-^ ""■ ^■""' °^ E • .^ oSc S S.. „.. 4,43S,2«, a. 54,.,.000.
Kjl": ^vSlir-^'Mrr-'"-' "-" ♦•«'••«• ^'- ■"•"^■'»- «s"i^" F^-lnd ^-... Uo,d C. 4,43,,5„ C,
Brakhage, William L.. Jr.; and Taylor. William M 4 417 f^-i rt -n. n « ■ L
^ . 251-l.OOA. 'aylor. William M.. 4.437.643. CI. Thomala. R.chard O to Conwed Corporation. Automatic volume and
Tuima, Yoshihisa; Morishima, Masayuki; Okumura. Hiroshi and 3 8? 73 OX) '=°"''°"'*' *°"'"1 '"«*''*"8 system. 4.438.526. CI.
fl^^Co'l'L^t'd'u^ct oTh^i^^^^^^^ I°,yS°3h° Tho^l^i^^^etts Corporation: See-
219.10.49R. * coonmg apparatus. 4.438.31 1. CI. Narozny. Ronald S.. 4.437.723. CI. 339-99 OOR
Teague. W. Dorwin: See- ^T,w ^""^'^ ^' ^' ^*" partition locking system. 4.437.278. CI
m°S3.S^"''' ''' *"' ■""«"'• ^ °°"^'"' ^•^"'546. CI. Thom^'Swin: Se.-
Technicon Instruments Corporation: See—
Engler. Philip V.; and Buhl. Steven N.. 4.438.202. CI. 436-8 000
Foirest. Gordon C. 4.438,068, CI. 422-61.00o! '»^''-»«J"-
Technology Marketing Inc.: See—
Dyer. David; and Wise, James L.. 4.437.316. CI. 62-79.000.
Techsight Corporation: See—
Weber, Hermann, 4,438.159. CI. 427-162 000
Teijin Limited: See—
^ 427?36^O0b ^''"™' ""* '^'"«™""' Norihiro. 4.438.151. CI.
Tektronix. Inc.: See—
Philipp. Harald, 4,438.404, CI. 328-63.000.
J.438'iT8!' S.'l^gTgSb.''"'"'' ° = *"' ''"™'*"' '^°'"« ''•
Telebit Corporation: See—
Baran, Paul. 4.438.51 1. CI. 370-19.000.
Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson: See—
Morwing, Bo A., 4,438,392, CI. 324-79.00R.
Telefunken Electronic GmbH: See—
^°357-'l4000 ^^^'^'^"'- '^'^ '^°*"'' Erhard, 4.438.445. CI.
'^ci''4?3"387'Mb^°"""' ^"^'"^ '"'* Muenster. Rolf. 4.438,084.
Thomas. Millicent H.: See—
Pickens. John W.; Abraham. John K.; Mintus, Raymond E and
Thomas Milhcent H.. 4.437.902. CI. 148.12.6oF '
Thompson, Charles E.. to Huyck Corporation. Papermakers fabrics
havmg equalized warp sew-up. 4.437.496. CI. 139-38100A
1 nomsen, Valeria J.: See
^'8iS'220^'" ^' "*** """O""*"' Valeria J., 4.437,361, CI.
Thomson-Brandt: See—
ThomSn-CSpfl^f-!!' *"** ^'^^' '''"' ^ ' *'*^*'"'' ^'- 315-408.000.
Blachot, Denis, 4,438,414, CI. 333-28.00T
Thorn. Brent: See—
■nJ}°^i,^ ^J^*^ """2™' ^^«"^' '♦.'♦37,648, CI. 254-93.00R.
t^ ?4f7;^8'! S°2T4-?3Sr'° ''" ''■ ^'"""P ^ ^" '-"°"'"«
Thornton, Donald I.: See—
Temme, Helmut: See— *=°''^."°" *"<* storage systems. 4,437,987, CI. 2 10- 1 37 000
''^fr;u^"/;5:i«^^g'',si°?3iSo™"^'- °^'^ -^ •^™- r;"-&^; '"K^7,g5rc,. 222.54,.ooo.
^%%5l"?r,2ti,??OR''""'"- ''""™" " "»■■= "*« ■»■•«'■ rKl>!"^»lSrB,4,43,,5«, a. 224-39.000.
Teradyne, Inc.: S^c- Thywen Aktiengesellschaft Vorm. August Thyssen-Hutte See-
Kau, Jonathon H. 4,438.397. CI. 324-1 58.00P. 266-''275 MO ''^ ^''' ""^ ^''"'^' ^^'""e""' '♦.437,652. CI.
Terauchi. Kiyoshi; and Hiraga. Masaharu. to Sanden Cornorafion Timf^.?^""'x "''^"^f."' ^ ^"^' '♦.'♦37.845, Q. 445-39.000.
S/4!K,,2S-a"?[;So""" -■- -*:"-^S':, ^""Sfi/a^- .. x^™.. r.„,, 4,43,,«. a
Terauchi, Takashi: See— _. - ^3 1- '45.000.
Terry. Ruel C: See— _ 285-246.000.
,^354+12^000. PP" «• lor craier.. 4,437,744, CI. Ku™,,^*,,^....!,. „d jogo, Yuuhiko, 4,43«,32«, O.
^heat shield. 4.438° iSTSw^^""^' ^'°™*'"^ ^"P""'* Kawakubo Kazuo; Furuichi. KaUushi; N«nekata. Kiyokazu-
TexMo Inc.: See- kanaka, Hidetoshi; Tohyama. Yashikuni; Kasamura, Toshirou
'502-T33"5&.-'°'" "^-^ •"** ^™"*' "'°'"' ^' J'- '♦•^S'^''. CI. ToiyaWsiiL'lsS- ' "'^'^'"*^°''*'*"'"'^*^'^'"^-'^-«^^
Johnson, Fred L.. Jr.. 4,438.28 1. CI. 564-477 000 Ho, Shinzo; Kato. Tateshi; Noma. Takumi; Sugimoto. Soichiro; and
Nieh. Edward C. Y.; and Naylor Carter G 4 438 04S ri t l ^°'>;"^ S«gi. 4,437.341, CI. 73-1 19.00A. '
260-501.130. '-""yior, v^aner o., 4,438,045, CI. Tokico Ltd.: See-
Roberts. Roy b., 4,437,417, CI. 1 10-346 000 t l,••^'*i*'*• ^asahiro, 4,437,548, CI. 188-289.000.
Schievelbein, Vernon H.; and Zabczuk Paul 4438 002 CI 5« if' T^*"8'0-^-
8.55D. '"'*""' *^»"'' ♦'♦38.002, CI. 252- HaKgawa, Kokichi; and Tokita. Tsugio, 4,437.406, CI. 101-350.000
Zoleaki, Benjamin H.; and Sung, Rodney L 4 438 005 ri ^°''y? Electric Co., Ltd.: See- ^ • J^^-uw-
252-33.400, ""«' ^""^"^^ ^' *'*^^'^^' CI- Ochi«. Kumaki; Horii. Masami; and Wui. Hidekazu, 4.437.775, Q.
Texas Instruments Incorporated: See— t ,. ♦^'^♦OOO.
Woodard, Thomas R.; and Martin, Kenneth L 4 438 320 ri ^°''y? ^anyo Electric Co., Ltd.: See-
219-216.000. *^*""*"' ^- ♦■♦38.320, CI. Tiuima, Yoshihisa; Morishima. Masayuki; Okumura, Hiroshi; and
Kasahara. Shin-ichi, 4,438,311, CI. 219-10.49R
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 43
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Hayase, Shuzi; and Suzuki. Shuichi, 4,437,959. CI. 204-1 59. 110.
Matsuyama, Kouszou. 4.438,478, CI. 361-152.000.
Mizutani, Yoshihisa. 4,437,225, CI. 29-576,008.
Narita, Ryuho; Yamamori, Kenji; Oota. Hiroyuki; and Aoshima,
Terutaka, 4,438.324, CI. 219-441.000,
Ohmura. Hideo, 4,437,571, CI. 209-551.000,
Sano, Jun; Aoyama, Masahide; and Kubo, Daijiro, 4.438.353. CI,
307-477,000.
Sasaki. Hiroshi, 4.437,348, CI. 73-625,000,
Shibayama, Shigeki; and IwaU, Kazuhide, 4,438,488, CI.
364-200.000,
Tanaka, Tosio, 4,438.378. CI. 318-280.000.
Yamaguchi. Tetsuo. 4.437.380. CI. 84-1.260.
Yamashita. Kiyofumi; and Kodama. Toshikazu. 4,438,417, CI.
333-193.000.
Tomim. William L. On-line telephone troubleshooting apparatus.
4.438,299. CI. 179-175.30F.
Tomita, Fusao; Matsuda, Yuzuru; Shirahata, Kunikatsu; Takahashi,
Keiichi; Nakano, Hirofumi; Sato, Tomoyasu; Okubo, Shuji; and
Nakamura, Nobuo, to Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd, Compound
DC-38-V and process for production thereof 4,438,19'?, CI.
435-119.000.
Tomm, Dagwin; and Scheer, Erich, to Fichtel & Sachs AG, Multiple
disk clutch with spring control lift, 4,437.555, CI. 192-70.210,
Tompkins. Elliot N.; and Kline. Sherman S., to Datapoint Corporation.
Word processor — controlled printer output scanner mechanism.
4.437.660. CI. 271-290.000.
Tomura. Teruichi: See—
WaUnabe. Yoshio; Yamane. Mikiya; and Tomura, Teruichi.
4.438,373. CI. 315-334.000.
Tomy Kogyo Co., Inc.: See —
Kaga, Takashi, 4,437,262. CI. 46-242.000.
Toray Industries. Inc.: See —
Katsutoshi. Ando; and Eiichi, Nishiura, 4,438,172. CI. 428-220.000.
Tanaka. Chiaki; Nakashima, Shinobu; and Kondow, Makoto,
4,438,240, CI. 525-420.000,
Torres, Julio B. Stop control mechanism for feeding a material to a
work performing machine, 4,437,422, CI. 112-272.000.
Toshiba Heating Appliances Co., Ltd.: See —
Amano, Kazunori; and Sekiwaga. Youichi, 4,437,832, CI.
431-304.000.
Touhsaent. Robert E.: See—
Steiner. Robert H.; and Touhsaent, Robert E., 4.438.176. CI.
428-349.000.
Toyama, Masamichi, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Spring clutch device.
4.437.552. CI. 192-26.000.
Toyo Kogyo Co.. Ltd.: See—
Nishikori. Tsutomu; and Yoshiki. Yasuo, 4.437.703. CI. 297-362.000.
Toyo Umpanki Co.. Ltd.: See—
Urabe. Sumio, 4,437,531. CI. 180-79.100.
Toyoda, Hiroyasu; Komiya. Hiroyoshi; and Itakura, Hideaki. to VLSI
Technology Research Association. High selectivity plasma etching
apparatus. 4,438,315, CI, 2 19- 121. OPE.
Toyoda Koki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Nakamura, Keiichi; Haga, Kyosuke; and Mori, Yutaka, 4.437.532,
CI. 180-142,000.
Toyomura. Shigeru, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Electronic device
having warning means, 4,438,431, CI. 340-663,000,
Toyooko Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Suzuki. Osamu; Yamaguchi. Kunio; and Yamamoto, Meguru.
4.437.309. CI. 60-547,100.
Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kubo. Seitoku; Kuramochi. Koujiro; and Kyushima. Tatsuo,
4.437.358. CI. 74-867.000.
Miura, Hirohisa; Satou, Hiroshi; and Natsume, Tothio, 4,437,886,
CI. 75-67.00R.
Takahashi, Hiroshi; Suzuki, Yukio; Matsuo, Matashi; Ono,
Hironobu; Yoshida, Shuzo; Ueda, Kazuo; and Sueishi, Motoharu,
4,437,445, CI. 12.3-491,000,
Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Isomura, Shigenori; Kobayashi, Akio; Kato, Kateushi; Kowada,
Ichiro; and Nishii, Sachio, 4,437.446. CI. 123-492.000.
Moriya, Shigeru; Yoshida, Akio; Hayashi, Yoshihiro; Kubou.
Tatsushi; and Tsuge. Hiroshi. 4.437.683. CI. 280-804.000.
Moriya. Shigeru; Yoshida, Akio; Matsunami, Muneharu; Kubou,
Tatsushi; Tsuge, Hiroshi; and Nishimura, Yuji, 4,437,684, CI,
280-804,000.
Transamerica DeLaval Inc.: See-
Reese. Ira W.; and Compagnucci. Nello B.. 4,437,213. CI. 29-
33.00K.
Traunecker. Werner: See—
Koppe. Herbert; Kummer. Werner; Stahle. Helmut; Muacevic.
Gojko; and Traunecker. Werner, 4,438.143. CI. 424-304.000.
Trautsch. Jerrold A., to Leer Manufacturing Company, Inc. Folding
pallet. 4,437,412, CI. 108-56.100.
Treber, Norbert, to Heraeus Quarzschmeize GmbH. Quartz glass enve-
lope tube. 4,437,727, CI. 350-96.300.
Treiber, Hans J.: See-
Ehrmann, Oskar; Ratchack. Manfred; Gries. Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; Lehmann. Hans D.; Friedrich. Ludwig; Wuppermann.
Dirk; Zimmermann. Frank; Seitz. Werner; Treiber. Hans J.;
Dengel. Ferdinand; Frank, Wolfram; Kurbjuweit. Hani-Georg;
and Mueller, Claus D., 4,438,131, CI. 424-278.000.
Tremaglio, Anthony M.: See-
Albert. Donald; and Tremaglio. Anthony M., 4,438,344. O.
307-146.000.
Tri Tool, Inc.: See—
Astic, William H., 4,437,366, CI, 82-4,00C.
Trick, Robert E,; and Weeks, Vaughan B., to Medical Engineering
Corporation, Artificial sphincter with improved pressure control
valve. 4,437.457. CI. 128-1. OOR.
Trimedyne. Inc.: See—
Schmer. Gottfried, 4,438,198, CI, 435-178,000.
Trop, Timothy N. Buoyancy compensator, 4,437,790, CI. 405-186.000.
Trost, Wayne C, to Barber-Colman Company, Triaxial fabric.
4,438,173. CI. 428-221.000,
Truzzi, Ferdinando; and Premi, Mauro, to Mesdan S.p.A. Apparatus for
joining textile threads with the aid of compressed air, for mounting on
an automatic winding machine. 4,437,298, CI. 57-22.000.
Truzzi, Ferdinando; and Premi, Mauro, to Mesdan S.p.A. Apparatus for
joining textile threads with the aid of compressed air. 4.437.299. CI.
57-22.000.
TRW Inc.: See-
Harrington, /Alan L,; Allison, Richard; and Rodov, Vladimir.
4,438,448, CI. 357-23,000,
Tsang, Won-Tien, to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Dou-
ble barrier double heterostructure laser. 4,438,446, CI, 357-17.000
Tsuchida, Takashi; Kondo, Nobuo; Okada, Kazukiyo; and Okuda,
Yutaka, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Multiple signal transmitting appa-
ratus for automobiles. 4,438,425, CI. 340-55,000.
Tsuchiya, Tsutomu: See—
Umezawa, Hamao; Umezawa, Sumio; Tsuchiya. Tsutomu; and
Tanaka, Akihiro, 4,438,109, CI. 424-180.000.
Watanabe, Isamu; Yamaguchi, Takashi; Kamiya, Kazuhiro; Mori.
Toshihito; Umezawa, Hamao; Umezawa, Sumio; and Tsuchiya.
Tsutomu, 4,438,107, CI. 424-180.000,
Tsuge, Hiroshi: See—
Moriya. Shigeru; Yoshida, Akio; Hayashi, Yoshihiro; Kubota,
Tatsushi; and Tsuge, Hiroshi, 4,437,683, CI. 280-804,000.
Moriya, Shigeru; Yoshida, Akio; Matsunami, Muneharu; Kubota,
Tatsushi; Tsuge, Hiroshi; and Nishimura. Yuji, 4.437.684. CI.
280-804.000.
Tsui, Tien-Fung, to Mobil Oil Corporation. Two stage selective oxida-
tive leach method to separately recover uranium and refractory
uranium-mineral complexes. 4,438,077. CI. 423-7.000.
Tsujita, Yoshio: See—
Terahara, Akira; Hamano, Kiyoshi; Tsujita, Yoshio; and Tanaka,
Minoru, 4,438,277, CI, 560-119.000.
Tsukada. Katsushige: See —
Ishimaru. Toshiaki; Tsukada, Katsushige; and Hayashi, Nobuyuki,
4,438.190. CI. 430-281.000.
Tsuneno, Hiroshi: See—
Yamamoto, Hideharu; and Tsuneno. Hiroshi, 4,437,228, CI.
29-590.000.
Tsutsumi, Shigeru. Injection molding process for synthetic resin and iu
apparatus, 4,438,064, CI, 264-328,150.
TTK Communication Products: See—
Tauber, Robert T.; and Tauber, Randolph T.. 4,437,838, CI.
434-363.000.
Tucker, John G.; and Wells, Hugh A., to Western Electric Co., Inc.
Methods of and apparatus for pumping solder. 4,437,605, CI. 228-
180.00R.
Tucker, Russell E.: See —
Fancey, Everett G.; Peters, John V.; and Tucker, Russell E.,
4,437,254. CI. 43-4.000.
Tuebner. Helwig: See—
Balser. Klaus; Tuebner. Helwig; and Oppermann, Wilhelm,
4.438.264. CI. 536-91.000.
Tuites, Richard C: See —
Ponticello, Ignazio S.; Hollister, Kenneth R.; and Tuites. Richard
C. 4,438.278. CI. 56O-2O5.O0a
Turke. Wolfgang: See —
Pietsch, Hartmut; Turke, Wolfgang; Bareuther, Ernst; Kampf,
Fritz; and Bings, Hubert, 4.438.076, CI. 423-30.000,
Turner, William D.; and Sprague, Robert A., to Xerox Corporation,
Integrated input/output scanner for electronic document proceuing,
4.438,461, CI, 358-302.000.
Turro, Jerome; and Nelson, Peter. Safety guard. 4.437.265, CI.
49-57.000.
Ty, Peria J. Separator disc and hypodermic syringe incorporating the
same and method. 4,437,858, CI. 604-90.000.
Tyler, Derek E.: See—
Pryor, Michael J.; and Tyler, Derek E., 4.437,508, CI. 164^18.000.
Tyler Refrigeration Corporation: See-
Ibrahim, Fayez F.. 4.437.317, CI. 62-81.000.
UBE Industries, Ltd.: See—
Matsui, Kanenobu; Uchiumi, Shinichiro; Takahashi, Miuuo; Asada,
Hideki; and Kurahashi, Masaru, 4,438,041, CI, 260-464,000,
Uchida, Yasuo, to Omron Tateisi Electronics Company System for
performing transactions, 4,438.326, CI. 235-379.000.
Uchiumi, Shinichiro: See—
Mauui, Kanenobu; Uchiumi, Shinichiro; Takahashi, Mittuo; Asada,
Hideki; and Kurahashi, Masaru, 4,438,041, CI. 260-464.000.
Ueda, Ikuo; MaUuo, Masaaki; Satoh, Susumu; and Watanabe, Takao, to
Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Lower alkanoic acid derivatives
of 2-oxo-benzoxazolines and aldose reductase inhibiting compositions
thereof. 4,438,126, CI. 424-272.000.
PI 44
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20. 1984
Ueda, Kazuo: Sw—
Tak*h«hi. Hirodu; Suzuki, Yukio; Matsuo. Muashi Ono
Ueda. Makoto: See—
SludiL, Maufaaru: Ueda. Makoto; Ouwa, Shuji; Mandai. Masaaki-
11^ 5?* ^ Kauuhiko. 4.437,769. Q. 368-204000^ ^^*
ueda, Snuio: See —
'^290.000."°* "**^ ^^"^' "^ ^"^' M«««fuiiii. 4,437.304. CI.
"*5^^teh?v?T\"*S'f"«^ "** '^«"™'' T«k«ji. to Mitsubishi
2IM30JU) ^"^ "*" '^*'**"« "*='''"*• '♦.^'.an. CI.
"^1^'1.°"?= ^' ^?'*='": Nakagawa. Sauwhi; and Kida. Shuji,
color photograpluc material. 4,438.193. CI. 430-305.000. "''^"'''
Unler, Kfarcus H.: See—
Cawley, James C; DiMartino. Michael D.; Fisher, Thomas J
King, Roger L.; and Uhlcr. Marcus H.. 4.438.473. Q 36M8o6o'
Ulvelmg^^n; Ugille. Edouard; «k1 Boeve'r. ;;«,.' to Paul Wmh
Sitw^oT* "■'^" procedure and apparatus. 4.437.796. CL
"SlI5/«?^!!!S ^*^°** of manufacturing tape guides for record-
^?S^.S^= ^*'J«"SJ'.'. ^''*i~; Aonuma. Masashi; Kitamoto.
Ta»w "d Miyatsuka. Hajm«. to Fuji Photo FUm Co.. Ltd. Fe^
4":KSS2,S'"?^.50r^ ^'^ " °'^ '^ ^"PO'-l
"aSh^ ^^^^"5"'*'^?T'°= Tsuchiya, Tsutomu; and Tanaka,
Akihiro. to Zaidan Hojui Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenkyu Kai Tvl^
denvauves. 4,438.109. CI. 424-180.000^^ ivcmcyu lui. Tylosui
Umezawa, Hamao: See—
^t'*^: ^"= Yamaguchi, Takashi; Kamiya, Kazuhiro; Mori
Umezawa, Kazumi: See—
*^T^Sw5?**lli"= Sakamaki, Hisashi; Hattori. Hiroyuki; lida.
ISv5^b.1'5?SSb. ''°'^'"= "^ Umezawa.^uS
Umezawa, Sumio: See—
Umezawa. Hamao; Umezawa. Sumio; Tsuchiya, Tsutomu and
Tanaka, Akihiro. 4.438,109. CI. 424-180.000.
T**?^' ^"t?*"^ Yamaguchi. Takashi; Kamiya, Kazuhiro Mori
Toshihito; Umezawa, Hamao; Umezawa, Sumio; and Tiwhrvl
Tsutomu, 4,438.107, a. 424-180.000. «™o. ana i sucniya,
Umholtz, Walter F.: See—
'''3'6oS6.00O*" *• "** "«*o'«^ Writer P.. 4.438.466, O.
" TS°K!S^i.I*I!"^ ^^' *^*™«no. I««nu; Ichidate, Minoru; 136 OOR '
^l^-i^T^Jri'^^rVtSi^'''' ^-^ "-^ Pjiua'kvelopment Company: See-
Unden, Nils R aL HoiKSn inS; ?437 425 S^l 14-102 000 U„i.i?*T!'' ?°^"' '''''•''^' Cl-^^22lS).
Umon Carbide Corporation See- *.*->'.*-J3. U. 1 14-102.000. Umted Technologies Corporation: See-
Ayad. Hafa U, 4.438. 1 10. Q. 424-217.000. H^n ^yTr^'k^V!!^- ^" ^- •"<• Drinkwater. EnoU
Duroyon, Herve. 4.437.209, a. 17-49 000 r-^ 4,438^14, CI. 372-64.000.
^ofSS^ ^' "^ ^"S^i- Srinivasan. 4,438.216, Q. UnitSri?S.'!sjJ- " ^ ' *'''^''*"' ^'^ ^37-220.000.
Scott, Robert J., 4,438,014, Q. 252-174.210. n„iJ!IJ.Tit iiJ'^'?V*"*' '^ijiifJ'S^ """*'•• *.*38.199, Q. 435-190.000.
Zupancic. Ronald L.. 4.437.23 1. Q. 29-623 200 """'i^^'^ °{ California, TTie Regenu of the: See-
Union OU Company of California: See- ^W?i,.7l2Sf ** ' = ■"** Catherwood, Bayard D., 4,438,208. CI
„ . "^&.«S^i^.'"°- ^-^ "-^ "- M^V N. Houi O^M W. ^ ^. s«,., a, 4,«„3. a 26,.
Union Siderurgiaue du Nord et de I'Bit rf* )■ nm,,^. c^ ... '*WK.
. Cordier, Jean; ukI Rollot, Pierrr4,437,651,^ 2M^ OOO l^V^ ^IH^^"^' "Hi* ^""'°" °f *«= **"
Uniroyal, Inc.: See- ^ '"'' ^' -*«*■'««». Liu, Heno'; Gibson, Donald L.; Cheng. David H. S. and Rathke
Bell. Allyn R.; Doweyko, Arthur M P • and Minatelli John a ii "'^•'rl' '»-*37.799. Q. 406-198.000* ' "" **"*^'
4.438.271. CI. 546-294000^ Minatelli. John A.. Umversity of Surrey: See-
Hunter. Byron A.. 4.438.223. CI. 521-92.000 i Tn/?""'*i**' ■'°''*™'" ^ • '♦.*37.495. CI. 138-144.000.
Wefer. John M.. 4.438. 1 7 1 . a. 428-2 1 5 000 t ■ ■^~
United Chemi-Con. Inc. : See- '^" "" ' "*• Jmai. Tamotsu. 4.438.287. CI. 568-909.000.
VniX^J£"r'^'^ I*^' ^'°^' *'«8.481, a. 361-433.000 ^kJ^T^tl^^ ?""«' SH-^"' '♦■l^*'"*' «• 58^379.000.
of^uW^°I2!^'5"'^»°^ Northern IreW The SSary 422^09^^ ' "** ^™* °*^** ^- '♦•'♦38.071, CI.
^Sut* for Indu^ry m Her Bntamuc Majesty's Government of 32 Upjohn^^oSS?, The: See-
— ■ - 9"?™"; ^'""^ ^ • ♦.♦38.274, CI. 549-387.000.
Kaplan, Lester J., 4,438,130. CI. 424-274.000.
Upravleme Sanitamo-Tekhnicheskikh Rabot: See—
IT J'*^ ^"J'i^ ' ♦'♦37.823. CI. 418-219.000.
iiSlTc *^'^' S. Laryngoscope. 4,437,458, CI. 128-11.000.
, ,.,^, ,„ ^, ^3^, ,^ ..„ Urban Systems Streetscape. Inc.: See—
MacFarland. James M.; ud 'Kap^B^SIdW 4 437 710 n 1 1 ^SJ^' "^iJ?*?^ ^^8,484, Q. 362-267.000.
312-1.000. •^•PPC Bernard W.. 4.437,710. a. Umer-WUlie, Marlies; and Hansen, Peter, to U.S. Philips Corporation
MrfT—i.— «.-.!„ » .. MagoetOKiptical memory element. 4.438,508, CI. 365-I22.00a
^42te'600^'^ ''' "** °^**'' '^"^** *•' *'*38.183, a.
^(!ri29j5ir°" ^ • ""* ^"'°"' "^""^ ^ • ♦'♦37.956. CI.
Ekdahl, Carl A.. 4.438.394. Q. 324-126.000.
nt-SMo"^ ^'' *"** '^"'"' "^'** ^ • ♦•♦38.367. CI.
Merrigan. Michael A., 4,437,456. CI. 126-433.000.
TcS'iSt'^i'oR*^''*" ^ • "** ^***'' '^°'*" ^' ♦.♦37.958, CI.
Health and Human Services: See—
SS'^H ^*]?^ "d Jones, Robert, 4,437.857, Q. 604-53.000.
InteJtor:'&Sl!! * ^**^' '^°'*" ^ • *'*38.098. CI. 424-89.000.
Baker, Richard W., 4,437,994, CI. 210-638.000.
^i*-^' ^ S= '^^rtino. Michael D.; Fisher. Thomas J.-
36M8.wS*" ' ^*""' '^•""* "•• ♦.♦38.^^ci.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration: See-
Banks. Bruce A.. 4.437,962. a. 204-192.00C.
I'SlbS"^*' ^' "** ^'"™*' °"" ^' ♦'♦37.961, CI. 204-
Na^**S-I?'"''*" '" ♦•♦37.923, CI. 156-630.000.
^'cK 372"2'oTO***"^' ■^'"'" ^ ^ ' "'^ ^™'''' '^°^** ^' ♦.♦38.513.
Martorana, Richard T., 4,437.510. CI. 165-32.000.
Schwaru. Marcus. 4.437.628. CI. 244- 122.0AG.
4.'i&3."c'ra6S§r^' ""' ^^ "^ ^-"- «^'«*-
U.S. Philips Corporation: See—
faSu°SS''i"7"" ^li;^- "Iv ♦•♦37.626. CI. 242-186.000.
a 2i5aSM.a)s *• ' "** ^"«™'*' "'*"• ♦•♦38.33^.
Lichtenegger. Siegried. 4.438,332, CI. 250-310.000
MuUwijk. Dirk. 4.438.524. CI. 375-80.000.
Shaffer, Jesse S.. 4.437.955. Q. 204-129.400.
Tw-m (!ob. "• "^ "'^"' *'*^'' ♦.♦38.508. a.
^400^42^.***""' "** *°^^. Manfred. 4,437,78a Q.
United Sutes Pipe and Foundry Company: See-
Battle. Billy J., 4.437,242. Q. 33-178.00B.
Caiuula^^ames W.; and Uyton. James W.. 4.437.501. a. 144-
Sec^
U s'taJSiSSTTnc'': '&2.^*''' ^"^ "^^ '•^^^•^^' ^ 364-721.000.
. Njjbof, W. A. J.. 4.437.433. CI. 119-18.000.
Umted States of America
Air Force: See—
"^SlSooa ""^ ^ ' "** "•°^'<>n' ^°^»^ M.. 4,437.544. CI.
m"p ^*^ "•• ♦.♦37.7^8. a. 354-132.000,
312-1.000.
McCknahu, Oiarles R.. 4.438.395. Q. 324-127.000.
PN«aa. Harold A.. 4.438.182, CI. 429-91.000.
V — -'^' ^'grmm ■ ■■ »aa%raaa\/a
USM Corporation: See—
KuUc Alphonse C, 4,437,198, CI. 12-145.000.
Snyder, Carl E.. Jr.; and Tkmborski, oSSt 4438006. n i!.„ii^ ^.^'^^"^•.♦•♦37.'98. CI. 12-145.000.
252-49.900. "^ ^"^ 4,438.006. Q. U«udaJKqji, to Hjtachi, Ltd. Field effect semiconductor device having
.<n«H« r-..! E w . , . . . _ 35?!?!^''* *^^ "^^ reduced internal resistance. 4,438,449. cP
252-49.900.
^2*559.So.' ^' ■''■ "^ Tambonki, Chri«. 4,438,007, Q. 35^7-41.006.
Amy. See- ^^°^^ Y"^ *° Communications Satellite Corporation. Phase
^M.S!*^'*^ C.; and Kl«.ber. Gerald. 4.437,844, a. yS^^^'^ "^^ «^<>^- *'*ii'3ii. (^XfJ-iU-OOO.
^arev^^^hmes S., 4,438.439. a. 343-449.000. ^^f^OOO' ^"^ ^""^ *^' "** ^"""^ ****"* ♦.♦38.450. Q.
Valencia. Jose. Book index marken. 4.437.685. a. 28M2.000.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 45
Valeron Corporation, The: See—
Juengel. Richard O.; Begin. John D.; and Khalaf. John. 4,437.240.
CI. 33-172.00E.
Valibouse. Bernard, to Societe Anonyme dite: Alsthom-Atlantique.
Apparatus for collecting substances floating on an expanse of liquid.
4.437.989, CI. 210-242.300.
Valli, Alberto. Peritoneal catheter device for dialysis. 4,437,856. CI.
604-29.000.
Van F. Belknap Co.: See-
Thorn. E. R.; and Thorn. Brent. 4.437.648. CI. 254-93.00R.
Van Ceulen, Alain: See—
Dreulle, Noel; Van Ceulen. Alain; and Eusebe. Claude. 4.437,965,
CI. 204-290.00F.
van Dedem, Gijsberi W. K.: See-
Sanders. Adrianus L. M.; Meuleman, Dirk G.; Moelker. Huibert C.
T.; van Dedem. Oysben W. K.; and van Houdenhoven, Francois
E. A.. 4.438,108, CI. 424-183.000.
Vandenbossche, Claudine: See —
GuiUon, Michel; Mondet. Jean; Papantoniou, Christos; and Van-
denbossche. Claudine, 4,438,140, CI. 424-61.000.
Van Der Meulen. Leonard. Arrangement for perforating or cutting
foils. 4.437,373, CI. 83-346.000.
van der Ploeg, Dirk C. H.; and Tameris, Hendrikus M.. to Albany
International Plastic B.V. Plutic cheese mold. 4.437,787. CI.
425-84.000.
Van der Velden. Jan H., to Esmil. B.V.; and Hoeke Engineering. N.V.
Method of making a ceramic article and articles made by the method.
4,438,055, CI. 264-44.000.
van der Zel, Joseph M.; and de Groot, Klaas, to Delphi Dental Indus-
tries B.V. Implant of ceramic material. 4,437,191, CI. 3-1.000.
Vangheluwe, Jozef: See —
Bijttebier, Gaspar A. H.; and Vangheluwe, Jozef. 4,437.655. CI.
271-3.100.
van Houdenhoven. Francois E. A.: See-
Sanders, Adrianus L. M.; Meuleman, Dirk G; Moelker, Huibert C.
T.; van Dedem, Gijsberi W. K.; and van Houdenhoven, Francois
E. A.. 4,438.108, CI. 424-183.000.
van Linden. Jan H. L.. to Aluminum Company of America. Briquette
melting apparatus. 4.437,650. CI. 266-144.000.
VanSiclcTe. Eugene R. Coil adapter reel. 4.437,625, CI. 242-129.000.
Van 2^1and. Anthony J., to Oak Industries Inc. Movable member
membrane switch. 4.438.301, CI. 200-16.00C.
Varco International, Inc.: See —
BoyadjiefT. George I.; and Campbell, Andrew B.. 4.437.515. CI.
166-77.000.
BoyadjiefT. George I.; and Picard. Joseph A. R.. 4.437.524. CI.
17343.000.
Varghese. Philip: See-
Derbyshire. Francis J.; and Varghese, Philip, 4,437,972, CI. 208-
8.0LE.
Varian Associates. Inc.: See—
Abu-Shumays. Ahmad; Helmer, John C; and Luchetti. Stephen J.,
4.437.812. CI. 417-53.000.
Patt, Steven L.. 4.438,400. CI. 324-312.000.
Vamovitsky, Marlen. to General Electric Company. Variable slip
controller for an AC motor. 4.438,376. CI. 318-78.000.
Vaseen, Vesper A.: See—
Stoddard, Xerxes T.; Vaseen, Vesper A.; and Terry, Ruel C,
4,437,520. CI. 166-261.000.
Vasiichenko, Dmitry V.: See—
Lipatova, Tatyana E.; Vasiichenko, Dmitry V.; Pkhakadze, Ge-
orgy A.; and KonopliUkaya, Xenya L.. 4,438,249, CI. 528-61.000.
Vatja, Aulis, to Lonnstrom Oy. Conveyor chain. 4,437,565, CI.
198-851.000.
VDO Adolf Schindling AG: See—
Stier. Bemhard. 4.438.423, CI. 34O-52.00R.
Veb Kombinat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz" Leipzig: See—
Storr. Rudolf. 4,437,600, CI. 226-108.000.
Veda, Inc.: See—
Buschbom, Floyd E.; and Hansen, Glen D., 4.437,637. CI. 248-
163.00A.
VerBerkmoes, John A.: See—
Plattner. Roberi F.; Arend. Raymond J.; and VerBerkmoes, John
A.. 4.437,396. CI. 99-475.000.
Verboom. Pieter, to IHC Holland N.V. Method for sucking up soil or
sludge by means of a suction hopper dredge as well as a suction
dredge for applying the method. 4,437,244. CI. 37-63.000.
Vereinigte Aluminum- Werke AG: See—
Pietsch, Hartmut; Turke. Wolfgang; Bareuther. Ernst; Kampf.
Fritz; and Bings, Hubert, 4,43C076, CI. 423-30.000.
Vereinigte Flugtechnische Werke Fokker GmbH: See-
Martens, Wilhelm; and Dilmaghani, Homayoun, 4,437,631, CI.
244-214.000.
Verhagen, Laurentius A. M.; and Bodor, Janos, to Lever Brothers
Company. Spreadable water-in-oil emulsion based on a high-melting
butterfat fraction and a liquid oil. 4,438.149. CI. 426-603.000.
Vermijs. Winfried J. W.: See-
WUlems, Michael H.; and VermUs, Winfried J. W.. 4.438.083. CI.
423-266.000.
Verrinder. Roberi F.: See— v^
Sekel, Stephen M.; Strange, Rodney G.; and Verrinder, Robert F..
4.438.498. CI. 364-483.000.
Versuchaanstalt f. Deutsche Forschungs-u Luft-u Raumfahri e.V: See—
Ackermann. Ulrich; and Ratsch, Eggo. 4.438.316. CI. 219-121.0PC.
Vespasiani, Alberto, to Socieu' Pneumatici PirelU S.p.A. Apparatus for
producing metallic cords in layers. 4,437,297, CI. 57-9.000.
Vickers, Anthony G; and Lomas, David A., to UOP Inc. Fluid catalyst
regeneration apparatus. 4,438.071. CI. 422-109.000.
Victory Equipment Limited: See—
Erdman, Victor B.. 4,437.296. CI. 56-400.000.
Vignon, Louis, to Heberlein Hispano SA. Device for the continuous
spinning of textile yams. 4.437,300, CI. 57-74.000.
Vileniki, Dan: See—
Razon, Ely; and Vilenski, Dan, 4,437.604, CI. 228-179.000
Vinegar, Ralph, to Burroughs Wellcome Co. Pharmaceutical combina-
tion. 4,438,142, C! 424-260.000.
Vivar. Incorporated: See —
Hovsepians, Vigen M., 4.437,704, G 297-440.000.
VLSI Technology Research Association: Set—
Toyoda, Hiroyasu; Komiya, Hiroyoshi; and Itakura, Hideaki,
4,438,315. CI. 2 1 9- 121. OPE.
Vogel. Alfredo, to Cosworth Research and Development Limited.
Method of and apparatus for treating granular material. 4,437.834, CI.
432-14.000.
Voigt, William C. Efficiency switching-mode power supply. 4,438,485,
CT. 363-21.000.
Volk, Kurt E., Jr.; Herbert. Everett H ; and Stenner, John W., to Kurt
H. Volk, Inc. Method of producing mailer with self contained reply
envelope. 4,437,852, CI 493-216.000
Volka, Lubomir J., to Burroughs Corporation. Flat ribbon cable shield.
4,437,724, CI. 339-I43.00R.
Volkswagenwerk AG: See —
Hofbauer. Peter. 4,437,443, CI. 123-446.000.
Volland. Michel P.: See—
Deborde, Albert H.; and Volland, Michel F.. 4.437.352. CI.
73-862.470.
Volna. William M. Spindle squaring tool. 4,437,803, CI. 409-218.000.
Von Duprin, Inc.: See—
Godec, Maksimilijan. 4,437,693, CI. 292-191 000
von Branchel, Helmut; Schreiber, Georg; and Schroeder, Heinz, to
Dynamit Nobel AktiengesellschaA. Process and apparatus for the
production and maintenance of a fluidized layer in heterogeneous
systems. 4,438,075, CI. 422-189.000.
Vondrovsky. Gabriel: See—
Ehgartner, Gabriele; and Vondrovsky, Gabriel, 4.437,749. CI.
354-214.000.
von Schuckmann. Alfred, to Colgate-Palmolive Company. Dispenser
for, in particular, puty substances. 4,437,591. CI. 222-391.000.
Vorwerk A. Co. Interholding GmbH: Set—
Guhne, Wieland, 4,437.204. CI. 15-325.000.
Wuir, Peter; and Schlecht. Annegret, 4.437.199. CI. 15-49.00R.
Voser, Othmar, to Kupferdraht-Isolierwerk AG Wildegg. Cable with
impregnated fiber strength member for non-slip clamping. 4,438,293,
CI. 174-79.000.
Vought Corporation: See-
Fling, George K., 4.437.674. CI. 277-188.00A.
Vuckovich, Michael; Wright. Maynard K.; and Burkett, John P., to
United Sutes of America. Energy. Three phase AC motor controller.
4,438,382, CI. 318-744.000.
W. R. Grace & Co., Cryovac Div.: Set—
Sanborn, Philip A.. Jr., 4.437,293, CI. 53-412.000.
Wada, Toshiaki: See—
Furukawa, Miuuhiki; Miyahara. Michito; Kitahira, Takashi;
Misumi. Kiyohito; Shiroyama. Masaharu; and Wada, Toshiaki,
4,438.213. CI. 501-92.000.
Wagner, Fritz: See—
Lindorfer, Walter; Wagner. Fritz; and Schult. Walther, 4,437,993,
CI. 210-631.000.
Wagner, James B.: See—
Taber. Bruce D.; and Wagner, James B., 4,437,313, Q. 60-665.000.
Wagner, Karl: See—
Engelsmann. Dieter; Hackenberg. Hubert; Lermann. Peter; Wag-
ner. Karl; and Zobel. Siegfried, 4,437,751, CI. 354-214.000.
Wago Verwaltungsgesellschaft mit beschrankter Haflung: Set—
KoUmann. Haiu-Josef; Hennemann. Lothar; and Hohorst, Wolf-
gang. 4.437.721, CI. 339.97.00P.
Wagu, Masakatsu; Hayashi. Shoichiro; and Kodama, Kouichi. to
Kureha Kagaku Kabushiki Kaisha. Inclusion compound of eicosapen-
taenoic acid or docosahexaenoic acid with cyclodextrin. 4.438.106,
CI. 424-180.000.
WaiU. Charles G.: See—
Rog. Joseph W.; Waits. Charles G.; and Nicholas, Karl W.,
4,438,391,0.324-71.100.
Walbrohl, Heinz T. Method and apparatus for the advancing of a sliding
fonn. 4,437,788, CI. 405-146.000.
Walkowiak. Michael: See—
Schmiu-Josten, Roberi; Suling. Carlhans; Podazua. Wolfuni;
Bomer, Bruno; Borgardt. Manfred; and Walkowiak, MicnacT,
4,437.836, CI. 433-199.000.
Wallace. Gearld P.: See—
O^Hanlon. Tom A.; Madonna. Peter L.; and Wallace. Gearld P..
4.437.525. CI. 17^218.000.
Wallis. Christopher J.: See—
CoUington. Eric W.; Hallett, Peter; and Wallis, Christopher J.,
4,438,111.0.424-246.000.
CoUington. Eric W.; Hallett, Peter; WaUis. Christopher J.; and
Bradihaw, John. 4,438,112. CI. 424-244.000.
Walter. Lothar: See—
Olschewski, Armin; Brandenstein, Manfred; Waller, Lothar; Horl-
ing, Peter; Hetterich, Hermann; and Kunkel, Heinrich, 4,437,214,
Cr29-149.5DP.
PI 46
LIST OF PATENTEES
Wang, Tsing-Chow. See—
FlanneryWUlumE^ Josephs. Richard M.; Stdn. Barry F. Wang
w.™. I *"£ ""J^' ""* ^°""«' ''"" J- • ■♦.'♦37.227. CI. 29-589 000
Warner-Lambert Company: See— ■'«"uw.
^2N'3!oOP ^'^"''^' ""* '^°''*"'' ^^" C.. 4.438.092. CI. 424-
Warner ft Swasey Company, The: See—
Koemg, C. Fred. Ill, 4.437.675. CI. 279.1.00C.
!I*'"'ii "^ ^ • '° ^" Encoder Company. Self-sequencing data
bus aJIocation system. 4,438.434. CI. 340-825 5 10 '*^''™*''"8 °"'*
4';S7%8l'°C? mj.Sx?'""" '"" ^P"«'°" °f «"y f™" -al.
^?^w" '*??'"• Yamaguchi, Takashi; Kamiya, Kazuhiro- Mori
?JS1'*°\^?*"^%"""'°= ^'"*»*«' Sumio; Td Suchrya,'
l^^J«g J^yu Kai. Aramoglycosides and use thereof. 4,438.107. CI.
Watanabe, Syoji: See—
't437':^°^ci.ts:6§;.s"''= ^"^'"- ^^°^'= "^ «•»»• '^"j--
Watanabe, Takao: S«—
Watanabe. Takeshi: See—
Sudo, Ryoichi; Shoji, Fusaji; Watanabe. Takeshi; Suzuki Kenkichi
and Ooue. Michio. 4.437,73 1. Cl. 350-340.000: * '^^'•
Watanabe, Yoshio; Yamane. Mikiya; and Tomura, Teruichi, to Hitachi
3 1^34000 '*'"*"'* ^''^' discharge lamp. 4,438.373. Cl.
^llT'^^^'^h '° ^"''^ ^^^ of America, National Aeronautics
M37.l2Tci.'}?"6TSS°" '*"'''""°' """^'"^ P'"« J--«
^"^ISlo"' "^"^^ ^' °^'"^'" "'"^ compressor. 4.437.818. Cl.
Weaver. John D.. to Dow Chemical Company. The. Preparation of
SSL'h iT^^'^'^^^u' ""* fluorinati^^of fluorinffih^Sro-
wSbS S R &e^"* therewith. 4.438.088. Cl. 423-466.000.
Rica. Albert F.; Hay, Lloyd F.; Heron. John R.; Webber. John R
w^ *"u *1^\"'!'"*V ^•'^*" A • ♦.*37,315, CI. 62.63.0OT '
^^'f3ll5"''?r4"27-16°2.000~'"*'^ '^'^"*'°" ^''"^ P'°^
Weber. Richard A.; and Schutz. Carl-Heinz. to Thyssen Aktiengesell-
schaft Vorm.August Thyssen-Hutte. Vessel for The SSSTof
molten metal. 4,437,652. Cl. 266-275 000 ireaimeni ot
^fi?/'r^!!!^'""i ^"'^ Ro*«"'hal, Manfred, to U.S. Philips Corpora-
a. 4S642 OTO ''""'" "^'^^ improved paper guidr 4.437J80.
Webster Air Equipment Ltd.: See—
W«w Tfi^; r"*^" ^.i 1!!'*^*'''*^^ ^''=''' '♦•*37.490, Cl. 137-512.400.
M^frer o VvS1.1"'m*''' ^"""^ Schwendener, Reto; and Milsmann,
Manfred, to Weder. Hans Georg. Process and device for Droducinc
bilayer vesicles. 4,438,052, Cl. 264-4 600 proaucmg
Weder, Hans Georg: See—
Weder, Hans G.; Zumbuhl, Otmar; Schwendener, Reto- and Mils-
m .. T"' W"nf'«l, 4,438,052, Cl. 264-».600. " ' '^"°' "^° '^^^^
Weeks, Vaughan B.: See—
WefJr"ShJS*7n^iJ *"** ^^'"' X""«*^ ^- '♦•'♦37.457. Cl. 128.1.00R.
wefer, John M., to Uniroyal, Inc. Coextruded product of AES-thermo-
plastic graft copolymer. 4,438, 1 7 1 . d. 428-2 1 5.000
Sft.4'^7t2rSlMT^5/"oSS"'"' '"" ^"''«' °^"^"« «-'-
Wegner. Wilhelm: 5«—
'tJ37,'2ircf=2&'8"SS: ^"'""= '"'' ^''^""' ^"''*'"'
Weihe, Georg: See—
WsiK^if'^"'^^ tl^*' J*'^'- °~'8' '♦.♦37.781. CI. 402-8.000.
bt5er''4!53^7'8rcf 40?-7Sb"' '"""' ^^'"''"'" °™''" *'"«
Weiss. Eberhard: See—
March 20, 1984
•"m J7:52'Sf.°cf Tli-?.'Sf "■ "*"*-^°-»^^ -<» ^«i«. Eberhard,
Weiss, Stefan: See—
^^■°H«/;h?**i'f.L^'^^!f' £""'''*• '^»"f'«': Dietsche. Wol-
56^R • ^"^ ^'*'""' *'*38.008, Cl. 252-
Weitzman. Mark R.: See—
^?8*r-290^°"** ^ • """ ^"t^"' Mark R.. 4.437.542. Cl.
Welbilt Electronics Die Corporation: See—
u/ ,r'"l^,"^''u^""* 4,438.153, CI. 427-37.000.
Inr P«r^ • ■'' • ""^ ^*"°' ■'»™«' " • to Thermo Electric Co
1361221^'"'""** "'«™°«'"P'e »«^«c« Probe. 4.438.290. ci.
Wells, Hugh A.: See-
WerSelt^Bin^f'i^i^'"*' ""«\'^ ' *'*37.605. Cl. 228-180.00R.
4T3?;3'l8^7.'62 93'500^"'''°""*"'^ «'"^'°' »^'«" *"** """od.
Werkzeugmaschinenfabrik Oerlikon-Buhrle AG See—
Freymond. Pierre. 4.437.409. CI. 102-364.000.
Werner. Peter: See—
^UiMO^' ^^^ ^^^'' "** ^'™*'' ^^' *-*37.339. Cl.
Werner ft Pfleiderer: See—
Joachim, Rudolph, 4,437,766, Cl. 366-287.000.
Wesche, Michael: See—
Wesl,"ffirtF"seIl:'"** ^*"'"' **'''^^' *'*^'''*"' C'" ' "-'^-OOO-
wiS^^SctSCmilTyn^nc^te"- •• *'*"'"'' ^'^ "■^««»-
° DY;iM ^^^H"' ^*.!lT'c^' ^^''' ^ynond H.; Roman,
Daniel J^ Schneider. Fred J.; Seitzer. Philip W.; and Wilkiioon
George F., Jr.. 4.437.229. Cl. 29-593.000. *^"iun»on.
Hurst, Jerry C, 4,437.362, Cl. 81-43.000.
Tucker, John G.; and Wells, Hugh A., 4.437,605, Cl. 228-180 OOR
Wesunghouse Brake and Signal Company Limit^l: &e_
Hurcum, Ivan B.. 4.438,432, CI. 340-825.350.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See-
Cooper, Gordon J., 4,437,716, Cl. 339-4.000.
UsSIf.' '^°"*'*' ^■' *"** °"™'y' '""" ■'■•• ^■*38.306, CI. 200-
Deis, Daniel W.; and Kemeny, George A.. 4 437 383 ri «o a f«n
Gyugyi. Laszlo. 4,438,386, Cl. 323:2To.OOO ' ^*""-
Haley, Paul H., 4,438,475. CI. 361-82.000. '
Hruda. Robert M., 4,438,302. Cl. 200-17.00R.
Paice Derek A.. 4.438.474. Cl. 361-58.000.
Weston. David. Production of aluminum metal from alumina bauxit*.
Weyl. Helmut: See—
Wh5.Tv^' *i*'*f ",= ""^ ^'y'' "«'""•»■ *.437,971, Cl. 204-427.000
Whang, Kyu B., to International Monopoly AssocUtion Water^oof
Cl 428.24rSo ^"'" ""'*'*''" '""'"'^ ""'*^»' '♦•♦38.174;
Whirlpool Corporation: See—
Whi!^°!??'*'P';;'*' G- M37.205, Cl. 15-354.000.
''S2mSrt3S>Sl,?r#2^0§?' "^""^^ '^'"' '-^"^»'-
White Consolidated Industries, Inc • See—
Whi?'n'*"^'?*'*'*l/.1^''*"'20'' Cl. 15-316.00R.
S«,;?i«H 'u° Medtronic, Inc. Transvenous cardiovascular inte-
s?oii;p'"4tr4?i'^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^— '-^ *-o^"-
^riuin°.Si"v'^^K""' M'- ^^ ^- '° United Kingdom of Great
HerTriunnS u*""? '"J?"**' ^' ^"'^^y of Sute for IndustrJ"
"45^5"otci 3'S!SJg°''"""'"' °''*'' '^'"^^°™ synthesi^rs.
^B ''.''°^n'c^'^« ^ • Cox. Nigel; Burt, Allan G.; and Snyder Daniel
a: S£f3lSM"°" Sy»^"».^"c Hydraulic syri^ige driv^^^ 85I!
"^SS. a.°£!"5i*Ji)."" '''*'"^"' ^"*"' ''• ''"• f"«' ""^y-
Whiteman, Patrick W., to Recycled Paper Bedding, Inc. Process for
u/P're^u* r™/^ '^'**"« 4,437,615. Cl 241-24.000.
Wick, Wuhelm: See—
^'ci' 222256 bS"'''^'""' '*'"*°'^' ""* ^*''''' ^"»'«''n' ^.437.578,
Wicnienski, Michael F. to Baxter Travenol Uboratories, Inc. Uvel
wf^« ^ Jll"!* ^="^0"" ^°' '^'^''^^ 'og''^- 4.438,357, Cl. 307-597.00a
wico t^rporation: See —
Wiczcr. Max; and Peters, Albin, 4,437,664. Cl. 273-121.00A
wftK •„I:^'^\"'^ ?"'"• '^"''"' '° ^'<=° Cor^ration. P „ b3 game
with oscilUtmg shooter. 4,437,664. CI. 273.121.00A. *^
fnS- 'i'^''?' *° ""^" Kannegiesser GmbH ft Co. Apparatus
tor feeding laundry to an iromng machine. 4.437,247, Cl. 38-143 000
Gisbert, to Boehnngcr Mannheim GmbH. Cardioactive aryloxv
propanolamines. 4,438,128, Cl. 424-273.00N. """"^''^^ "T'O'V
Wiedemann, Cunter: See—
^^li.^^^^' "''3?«' Elisabeth; Lobel, Wilfried; Pollack.
4%.S53^S*ir2"5.og,""'*'= °""' ^'^^ '"'^ ^'"""' ^"«°-
Wiersma, Charles M.: See—
^SSwMO "'^^""*= *"<* ™«'' Alfons. 4.438,028. Cl.
Wiersma, Jack G.: See—
Schmittmann, Hans-Bemd; and Thier. Alfons (said Alfons Thier
,„.,^ "*°"- to)' 4.438,028, Cl. 252-609.000.
Wilder, Richard P., Jr., to Honeywell Information Systems Inc. Clock
4738.°49j. a.1Jltoo''SSr'"' ""' '"" " "°""°^ ^^^-^ ""'•
Wilhelm Hegenscheidt Gcsellschaft mbH: See—
Tzl'rio'ooo"*'""'' ""* Buschgens, Valentin. 4.437.328. Q.
Wilkinson. George F.. Jr.: See—
Bitler, Joel R ; Bodnar, Michael W.; Booth, Raymond H.; Roman,
Daniel J^ Schneider, Fred J.; Seitzer. Philip W.; and Wilkinson
George F., Jr., 4,437,229, Cl. 29-593.000. • »"« **"»»»on,
WUIems, Michael H.; and Vermijs, Winfried J. W., to Stamicarbon B V
iTocess for preparing magnesium nitrate hexahydrate and for ther-
lil^. M3te a""423!2S.SK"' •""* ""*""*"" "'"'^ '''"^y
Wm. T. Burnett ft Co.. Inc.: See—
Fracalossi, Roland N.; Greenhouse, Walter V. V.; and Buchanan.
Michael S., 4.438.220. Cl. 521-55.000. "ucnanan.
Fracalossi. Roland N.; Greenhouse. Walter V. V.; and Buchanan.
Michael S.. 4.438.221. Q. 521-55.000. "uchmm.
March 20, 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 47
Williams. Aileen: See—
Williams, Albert V., 4,437,518, Cl. 166-248.000.
Williams, Albert V., to Gottlieb, Norman; and Williams, Aileen. Appa-
ratus and method for improving the productivity of an oil well.
4,437.518. Cl, 166-248.000.
Williams, David M.: See-
Simpson. Danny E.; Williams, David M.; Chase. Richard A.; and
.., .. ^"^^^- Lawrence B., 4,437,668, CI. 273-156.000.
Williamson, Joanne M.: See—
Meister, Alton; and Williamson, Joanne M.. 4,438.124. CI.
424-270.000.
Willis, Arthur B., deceased: See—
Headley. James E. R.; Limburg. William R.; Nordmeyer, Robert
A.; and Smith. Jay. Ill, 4,437,738, CI. 353.26,OOR.
wniis, Fredenck O.; Radtke. Richard R,; Ellison, Joseph; Fozo, Steven
R.; and Kern. Glenn A., to Ford Motor Company. Adaptive strategy
to control internal combustion engine. 4,438,497, Cl. 364-431 050
Wilmers, Gottlieb, to Audi NSU Auto Union Aktiengesellschaft. Elec-
trically oper«ble valve. 4,437,644, Cl. 251-11.000.
Wilson, David A:^See—
Svatek, Katherine H.; Wilson, Daviu A.; and Griffin. Freddie, Jr.,
4,438,040, Cl. 260-439.00R.
Wilson, James H. Waterproof assembly or sealing an aperture housing
a conduit. 4,437,687, Cl. 285-42.000. » »- b
Wilson, Nigel D. V.: Set-
Grew, Edward L.^ and Wilson. Nigel D. V.. 4,438,046, Cl.
Wilson, Norman H.: See-
Jones, Robert ll- and Wilson, Norman H., 4,438,136. Cl.
424-309.000. /
Wilson, Robert C, /r.: See—
Oleck, Stephfli M.; and Wilson. Robert C. Jr., 4.437.976. Cl.
2O8-97.O0a
Wilson. Robert D.: See—
Armantrout, Robert J.; Gerpheide. George E.; and Wilson, Robert
F., deceased, 4,437,672, Cl. 273-185.008.
Wilson, Robert D., personal representative: See
Armantrout, Robert J.; Gerpheide, George E.; and Wilson, Robert
F., deceased, 4,437,672, Cl. 273-185.00B.
Wilson, Robert F., deceased: See—
Armantrout, Robert J.; Gerpheide, George E.; and Wilson, Robert
F., deceased, 4,437,672, Cl. 273-185.00B.
Wilson, Scott E., to Jodon Engineering Associates, Inc. Spark plug
microwave adapter. 4,437,338, Cl. 73-116.000.
Wilson, Thomas J.: See—
Coates, Cameron W.; and Wilson, Thomas J., 4,437,956, Cl.
Wilson Trailer Co.: See—
Lewis, Mack A.; and Spencer. Mike R., 4,437.699. Cl. 296-181.000.
Wilt. Mason S.. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Continuous polymeri-
zation reactor. 4,438,074, Cl. 422-135.000.
Winchell, Frank J.; and Winkelmann, Klaus O., to General Motors
Corporation. Three-track motorcycle with cambering main frame.
4,437,535, Cl. 180-215.000.
Winden, Joseph, to Urban Systems Streetscape. Inc. Lighting bollard
for use in an urban environment. 4,438,484, Cl. 362-267.000
Winfred M. Berg, Inc.: See-
Berg, Winfred M., 4,437,849, Cl. 474-256.000.
Wingate, Clarence W., to Fluid Operations ft Equipment, Inc. Adjust-
able and repairable flow diverter for food processing equipment.
4,437,686, Cl. 285-12.000.
Winkelmann, Klaus O.: See—
Winchell, Frank J.; and Winkelmann, Klaus O., 4,437.535, Cl.
Winkley, Michael W.; and Childress. Scott J., to American Home
Products Corporation. N-(AlkylsulfonyI)-L-prohnc amide and N-(al-
kylsulfonyl)-2-carboxylic acid amide-indoline derivatives. 4,438,031,
CI. 260-1 12.50R.
Winter, Joseph: See-
Beck, Alexander F.; and Winter, Joseph, 4,437,943, CI. 204-16.000.
Winterbotham, Harold. Method of an apparatus for varying the load on
an A.C. generator. 4,438,341, Cl. 290-44.000.
WintershallAG: See—
Lindorfer, Walter; Wagner, Fritz; and Schulz, Walther, 4,437,993,
CI. 210-631.000.
Wirz, Burkhardt; and Preuss, Alfred, to Grapho Metronic Mess- und
Regeltechnik GmbH ft Co. KG. Device for controlling the clamping
of printing plates in correct register on the plate cylinder of an offset
printing machine. 4,437,407, CI. 101-409.000.
Wise, James L.: See-
Dyer. David; and Wise, James L., 4,437,316, Cl. 62-79.000.
Wisner, John A. Cleaning head for wall washing machines. 4,437,203,
Cl. 15-322.000.
Wissinger, John W. Cabinet system. 4.437,712. CI. 312-246.000.
Wissman, Thomas: See —
Korzik, James L.; and Wissman, Thomas. 4,437,717. Cl. 339-
17.0LC.
Withers, Michael S.: See-
Smith, Roger A.; and Withers, Michael S.. 4.437,952, Cl,
204-98.000.
Witt. Geoffrey R.: See—
Dixon. James M.; and Witt, Geoffrey R., 4,437,343, CI. 73-182.000.
Wittkopp. Helmut; and Buschgens, Valentin, to Wilhelm Hegenscheidt
Oesellschaft mbH. Crankshaft glaze or smooth rolling machine.
4,437.328. Cl. 72-110.000.
Woebcke. Hennan N.; Bhojwani, Arju H.; and Gartside. Robert J., to
Stone ft Webster Engineering Corp, Solids quench boiler and pro-
cess. 4,437,979, Cl. 208-153.000.
Wohltjen. Henry; Sniegoski. Paul J,; and Ravner, Harold, to United
States of America. Navy. Method and apparatus for determination of
lubncant stability. 4,438.203. CI. 436-60.000,
Wojnarowski, Robert J.: See—
Eichelbcrger, Charles W.; and Wojnarowski, Robert J., 4,438,158,
Cl. 427-101,000,
Eichelbcrger, Charles W.; Wojnarowski, Robert J.; and Auerbach,
Abraham, 4,438,291, Cl. 136-236.00R.
Wolf, Sten J. L.: See—
u/ ,?^**f,"' '"^'"I'Si.!?'* ^°"'' S'«" ^ L.. 4.437.538, Cl, 181-129.000
Wolf, Wolfram, to E.C.H. Will (GmbH ft Co.). Apparatus for changing
*iot ^'/i?^" °^ "■•"•port of paper stacks or the like. 4.437,560, C*
I Vo -4* 7. 000.
Wolter, Claude: See—
^^T,**!!?^ Jean-Louis; and Wolter. CUude. 4,437,964, Cl.
204-245,000.
Wong, Kwee C, to Dart Industries Inc. Dissolution of meuls utilizing
a lactone, 4,437,927, Cl, 156-666 000,
Wong, Kwee C„ to Dart Industries Inc. Dissolution of meuUs utilizing
a glycol ether, 4.437,928, Cl. 156-666.000, *
Wong, Kwee C, to Dart Industries Inc, Dissolution of meuls utilizins
pyrrolidone, 4,437,929, Ci. 156-666.000
Wong, Kwee C, to Dart Industries Inc, Dissolution of meuls utilizing
«-caprolactam 4,437.930, Cl. 156-666.000,
Wong, Kwee C, to Dart Industries Inc, Dissolution of metals utilizing
a furan derivative, 4,437,932, CI, 156-666,000,
Woodall, James C, to Mark Products. Inc, Waterproof housing assem-
bly for geophones. 4,438,292, Cl, 174.52,0OR,
Woodard, Thomas R,; and Martin, Kenneth L,, to Texas Instruments
Incorporated. Thermal printing apparatus having a thermal pnnthcsd
•""trate with special geometry for bi-directional printing. 4,438,320,
Cl. 219-216,000,
Woodworth, George K., to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Active arc suppression for switching of direct current circuits
4,438,472, Cl, 361-13,000.
Worthington, Peter: See—
Parfree, Colin S.; and Worthington, Peter, 4,437,729, Cl.
350-96.230.
Wright, Maynard K.; See—
Vuckovich, Michael; Wright, Maynard K.; and Burkett, John P..
4,438,382, Cl. 318-744.0a).
Wuerzer, Bruno: See-
Acker, Rolf-Dieter; Rowy, Phillip A.; Hamprecht, Gerhard; and
Wuerzer, Bruno, 4,437,878. Cl 71-90.000.
Wulf, Peter; and Schiecht, Annegret, to Vorwerk ft Co. Interholding
GmbH. Carpet cleaning device. 4.437,199, Cl. 15-49.00R.
Wuppermann, Dirk: See-
Ehrmann. Oskar; Raschack. Manfred; Gries. Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; Lehmann, Hans D.; Friedrich, Ludwig; Wuppermann,
Dirk; Zimmcrmann, Frank; Seitz. Werner; Treiber, Hans J.;
Dengel, Ferdinand; Frank, Wolfram; Kurbjuweit, Hans-Georg-
and Mueller, Claus D., 4,438,131, Cl. 424-278.000.
Wyder, Manfred, to American Safety Equipment Corporation. Inte-
grated weblockcr with program pawl retractor. 4,437,623, Cl.
Wysong. Charles F., to AtlanU Stove Works, Inc. Stove with catalytic
combustor and bypass. 4,437.451, Cl. 126-77.000.
Xerox Corporation: See—
Mardkha, Michael M., 4,438.352, Cl. 307-475.000.
Tandon, Jagdish C; Kadekodi, Narayan K.; Ibrahim, Abd-El-Fat-
uh A.; Handy, Roland J.; and Stoffel, James C, 4,438,457, Cl.
358-213.000.
Turner, William D.; and Sprague, Robert A., 4,438,461, Cl.
Yaari, Yi|al Y. Screwdriver, 4,437,365, CI, 81-436,000,
Yagi, Junichi: See—
Shiseki, Yutaka; Yagi, Junichi; and Miura. Yasuyuki. 4.438.358, Cl.
310-51,000,
Yamada, Kazuo: See—
Suguri, Masayoshi; Yamada, Kazuo; and Nandate, Maiaaki,
4,438,063. Cl. 264-311000.
Yama^uchi. Akira: See—
Kiujima. Masao; Seshimoto, Osamu; Kubotera, Kikuo; and
Yamaauchi, Akira. 4,437,970. Cl. 204-412.000.
Yama^uchi, Hiroshi, to Nissan Motor Company. Limited. Automotive
vehicle engine control system, 4,437,442, Cl. 123-417.000.
Yamaguchi, Kunio: See-
Suzuki, Osamu; Yamaguchi, Kunio; and Yamamoto, Meguru,
4,437,309, Cl, 60-547,100. *
Yamaguchi, Takashi: See—
Watanabe, Isamu; Yamaguchi, Takashi; Kamiya, Kazuhiro; Mori,
Toshihito; Umezawa, Hamao; Umezawa, Sumio; and Tsuchiya.
Tsutomu, 4,438, 107, Cl. 424- 1 80.000.
Yamaguchi, Taturo; and Minemura, Norihiro, to Teijin Limited. Pro-
cess for durably modifying a shaped, synthetic polymer article.
4,438,151,0,427-36,000,
Yamaguchi, Teuuo, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Musi-
cal envelope-producing device, 4,437,380, Cl, 84-1,260,
Yamaha Hauudoki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Grinde, James E., 4,437,534. Cl, 180-190.000.
Yamamori, Kenji: See—
Nariu, Ryuho; Yamamori, Keiyi; Oota, Hiroyuki; and Aoshima.
Tenitaka. 4.438.324, Cl. 219-441.000.
PI 48
LIST OF PATENTEES
March 20, 1984
Yamamoto, Akito: See—
Hosak*. Akio; Yamamoto, Akito; and Oshiage, Kateunori.
4.437,342, CI. 73- n9.00A.
Yamamoto, Hidehani; and Tsuneno. Hiroshi, to Hitachi, Ltd. Method
of mounting a silicon pellet on a ceramic substrate. 4,437,228, CI.
29-590.000.
Yamamoto. Kazuaki: See—
Sato, Hiroyasu; Yamamoto, Kazuaki; and Aolsu, Hiroaki.
4,438.385, CI. 322-28.000.
Yamamoto, Meguru: See —
Suzuki, Osamu; Yamaguchi, Kunio; and Yamamoto. Meguru.
4.437.309, CI. 60-547.100. *
Yamamoto. Takaaki: See—
Nozawa. Tadao; Yamamoto, Takaaki; Nakayama, Tadashi; MaUu-
moto. Fumio; and Hayami, Satohiro. 4,437,910, CI. 148-112.000.
Yamana, Koji. See—
Ishida, Hideaki; Ishikawa. Tomohisa; Yamana, Koji; and Kayahara.
Takehiko. 4.437.378. CI. 84-1.180.
Yamanaka. Kazuhiko: See—
Kamei. Hideaki; Yamanaka. Kazuhiko; Fujisawa. Haruhiko; and
Oda, Shinichiro. 4.438,468. CI. 360-92.000.
Yamane. Mikiya: See—
Watanabe. Yoshio; Yamane. Mikiya; and Tomura. Teruichi.
4.438,373. CI. 315-334.000.
Yamano. Shoji: See—
Hasegawa. Eiichi; and Yamano. Shoji. 4,437,561, CI. 198-504.000.
Yamaoka, Nobutatsu: See—
Masuyama, Masaru; Hirooka, Susumu; and Yamaoka. Nobutatsu,
4,438,214. CI. 501-136.000.
Yamashiu, Kiyofumi; and Kodama, Toshikazu, to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Filter circuit utilizing a surface acoustic
wave filter. 4,438,417, CI. 333-193.000.
Yamato Scale Company, Ltd.: See—
Hasegawa, Eiichi; and Yamano, Shoji, 4,437,561. CI. 198-504.000.
Omae. Michinobu; and Hirano. Takashi, 4,437,527, CI. 177-25.000.
Yamazaki, Tamotsu: See—
Nagano, Hiroyuki; Takagi, Mitiro; Kubodera, Noboru; Matsunaga.
Isao; Yamazaki. Tamouu; Nabau, Hiroyuki; Sakai, Kazushige-
and Hau, Shun-ichi. 4.438, 1 15, CI. 424-250.000.
Yamazawa, Masayuki. to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha. Thread trim-
ming device for a sewing machine. 4,437,423, CI. 112-292.000.
Yanaga, Yukio. See—
Ohta, Takayuki; Yanaga. Yukio; and Hino, Seiichi, 4,438,256, CI.
528-188.000.
Yanagisawa, Kazuhisa: See-
Sato, Eiichi; Shimizu, Akira; and Yanagisawa, Kazuhisa, 4.438.186.
CI. 430-53.000.
Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu; and Saizi. Mituhiro, to Sharp Kabushiki Kai-
sha. Electronic dictionary and language interpreter with auto-search
key for deriving a full-length word and its associated translation word
based on a partial word entered. 4,438,505. CI. 364-900.000.
Yasuhara, Seishi. to Nissan Motor Company Ltd. Fuel injection pump
for a diesel engine. 4,437.444, CI. 123-458.000.
Yasui, Masaru: See—
Kato, Kazuhisa; and Yasui, Masaru, 4,438,154, CI. 427-39.000.
Yasui, Toshio, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Electric apparatus for a vehi-
cle safety device. 4,438,424, CI. 340-52.00H.
Yazawa, Nobuharu; and Sakaguchi, Yasunori, to Nippon Gijuteu Boeki
Co., Ltd. Frequency discriminating device. 4,438,405, CI
328-152.000.
Yeager, Raymond W.; and Weitzman, Mark R., to Owens-Coming
Fiberglas Corporation. Acoustical wall panel and mounting system.
4,437,542, CI. 181-290.000.
Yeda Research & Development Co. Ltd.: See—
Nir. Aharon; Amiel, Abraham J.; and Krant, Jonathan M.,
4,437.263. CI. 47-l.OOR.
Yell. Ralph W.: See-
White. Robert A.; and Yell, Ralph W., 4,438,503. CI. 364-721.000.
Yen, Richard C. K.: See—
Rembaum, Alan; and Yen, Richard C. K., 4,438,239, CI. 525-54. 100.
Yeoman. David R. Apparatus for electrolyzing water. 4.437.963, CI.
204-229.000.
Yerushalmi. Yaakov. Bomb disposal device. 4,437,382, CI. 86-l.OOB.
Yoder, Donald: See—
Headley. James E. R.; Limburg. William R.; Nordmeyer, Robert
A.; and Smith, Jay, III, 4,437,738, CI. 353-26.00R.
Yoder, Henry Frank, III: See—
Headley, James E. R.; Limburg, William R.; Nordmeyer, Robert
A.; and Smith. Jay, III, 4.437.738, CI. 353-26.00R.
Yokogawa Hokushin Electric Corporation: See—
Tamura, Hisashi; Ito, Ichizo; Hirayama, Masashi; and Ando, Tet-
suo, 4,437,350, CI. 73-861.240.
Yokou Co., Ltd.: See—
Ogita, Koichi, 4,437,506, CI. 160-331.000.
Yokoyama, Masao; Kon, Masaharu; and Ota, Hiroshi, to Kabushiki
Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho. Outrigger for use in wheel-type vehicle
4,437,682. CI. 280-764.100.
Yoneda, Ko: See—
Sawada, Takeshi; Yoneda. Ko; Shinmi. Akira; Goto, Hirokazu; and
Abiko, Shuzo, 4,438,470. CI. 360-113.000.
Yonehara, Sadao: See—
Kubo. Toshihiko; Ichidate, Minoni; Kawai, Toshiyuki; Yonehara,
Sadao; Koiwai, Yoshihisa; and Endo, Kazuhiko. 4,437,883, CI.
75-0. 50C.
Yong, Raymond N., to Suncor, Inc. Method for treating oil sands
extraction plant tailings. 4,437,998, CI. 210-728.000.
York. Billie M.. Jr., to Alcon Laboratories, Inc. Spiro-(fluoren-9,4'-
imidazolidine)-2',S'-diones. 4,438,272, CI. 548-308.000.
Yofhida, Akio: See—
Moriya, Shigeru; Yoshida. Akio; Hayashi, Yoihihiro; Kubota,
Tatsushi; and Tsuge, Hiroshi. 4,437.683, CI. 280-804.000.
Moriya, Shigeru; Yoshida, Akio; Matsunami, Muneharu; Kubota.
TaUushi; Tsuge, Hiroshi; and Nishimura. Yuji, 4,437,684, CI.
280-804.000.
Yoshida Kogeisha: See—
Yoshida, Takashi, 4,437,260, CI. 46-l.OOR.
Yoshida Kogyo K. K.: See—
Yoshieda, Keiichi; and limura, Yoshiuka, 4,437,233, CI. 29-768.000.
Yoshida Kogyo K.K.: See—
Fukuroi, Takeo. 4,437,210, CI. 24-435.000.
Yoshida, Ryo: See-
Nagano. Eiki; Hashimoto, Shunichi; Yoshida, Ryo; Mattumoto,
Hiroshi; and KamoshiU, Katsuzo, 4,437.877. CI. 71-90.000.
• Takahashi, Junya; Takemoto. Ichiki; Kamoshita, KaUuzo; Yoahida,
Ryo; Katoh. Haruhiko; and Sumida. Seizo, 4,437,880. CI.
71-120.000.
Yoshida, Shuzo: S^e—
Takahashi, Hiroshi; Suzuki, Yukio; Mateuo, Masashi; Ono.
Hironobu; Yoshida. Shuzo; Ueda, Kazuo; and Sueishi, Motoharu.
4,437,445, CI. 123-491.000.
Yoshida, Takashi, to Yoshida Kogeisha. Domino toppling toy.
4,437,260, CI. 46-1. OOR. kk e y
Yoshieda, Keiichi; and limura, Yoshitaka, to Yoshida Kogyo K. K.
Fastener slider holding device. 4,437,233, CI. 29-768.000.
Yoshihiro, MiUugu: See—
Sakai, Masaaki; and Yoshihiro, Mitsugu, 4,438,377, Q. 318-254.000.
Yoshikawa, Mamoru: See—
Kubo, Kunimichi; Miyazaki, Yasunosuke; Yoshikawa. Mamoru:
and Miyoshi, Mituji, 4,438,073, CI. 422-135.000.
Yoshiki, Yasuo; See—
Nishikori, Tsutomu; and Yoshiki, Yasuo. 4,437,703, CI. 297-362.000.
Yoshinaka, Tadaaki. to Sony Corporation. Time base corrector.
4,438,456. CI. 358-148.000.
Yoshioka. Akiteru: See—
Takaya, Takao; Takasugi, Hisashi; Murata, Masayoshi; and Yoshi-
oka, Akiteru. 4,438,113, CI. 424-246.000.
Young. Alfred G.; Slocomb, Leon F., Jr.; and Bugg, Francis V., to
Acroseal Window Corporation. Alarm system. 4,438.430, CI.
Young, Peter L.: See—
Flannery, William E.; Josephs, Richard M.; Stein, Barry F.; Wang,
Tsing-Chow; and Young, Peter L., 4,437,227, CI. 29-589.000.
Young, Rodney C: See—
Durant, Graham J.; Ganellin, Charon R.; and Young, Rodney C.
4,438.127, CI. 424-272.000.
Ystral GmbH: See—
Seeger, Hans-Peter, 4,437,765. CI. 366-264.000.
Zabczuk, Paul: See—
Schievelbein, Vernon H.; and Zabczuk, Paul, 4,438,002, CI. 252-
Zabotto, Arlette: See—
Koulbanis, Constantin; N'Guyen, Quang L.; Zabotto, Arlette; and
Plot, Josiane, 4,437,895, CI. 106-245.000.
Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen, AG: See—
Merz, Johann, 4.437.819. CI. 418-26.000.
Zaidan Hojin BiseibuUu Kagaku Kenkyu Kai: See—
Umezawa, Hamao; Umezawa, Sumio; Tsuchiya, Tsutomu: and
Tanaka. Akihiro, 4,438,109, CI. 424-180.000.
Watanabe, Isamu; Yamaguchi, Takashi; Kamiya, Kazuhiro; Mori,
Toshihito; Umezawa, Hamao; Umezawa, Sumio; and Tsuchiya,
Tsutomu, 4,438,107, CI. 424-180.000.
Zalewski, Gerald F., to White Consolidated Industries. Inc. Soot
blower. 4,437,201, CI. 15-316.00R.
Zalteman, Efim, to Monarch Wine Co., Inc. Method and apparatus for
stoppering modified bottles with a one-piece corking means.
4,437,291, CI. 53-319.000.
Zaschke, Horst; Schafer, Wolfgang; Deutscher, Hans-Joachim; Demus,
Dietrich; and Pelzl, Gerhard. Liquid crystal substances. 4,438,268, CI.
544-315.000.
iSehner, Burch E.: See—
Suh, Kyung W.; Knieger, David C; and Zehner, Burch £.,
4,438,224, CI. 521-146.000.
Zeigler, Theodore R., to Nomadic Structures, Inc. Collapsible self-sup-
porting structures. 4,437,275, CI. 52-109.000.
Zeiler, Hans-Joachim: See—
Petersen, Uwe; Stadler, Peter; LockhofT, Oswald; Zeiler, Hans-Joa-
chim; and Metzger, Karl G., 4,438,260, C\. 536-13.900.
Zengel, Hans-Georg; Keraten, Hilde; and Ma^erlein, Helmut, to Akzo,
N.V. Method for the crosslinking of cathodically depotitabie coatmg
agents. 4,437,960, CI. 2O4-181.00C.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See-
Atkinson, Paul J., 4.438,365, a. 313-325.000.
Zerpol Corporation: See-
Elliott, Robert H., Jr., 4,437,968, CI. 204-301.000.
Ziegenhom, Joachim: See—
Deeg, Rolf; Schmitt, Urbwi; and Ziegenhom, Jow;him, 4,438,204,
CL 436-67.000.
Ziegler, Walter: See—
Oeder, Dieter, Ziegler, Walter, Dwuble, Manfred; Dietiche. Wol-
fram; Hettche. Albert; and Weiaa. Stefan. 4,438,008, a. 252-
56.00R.
MARCH 20. 1984
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 49
Zimmer, Ernst, to Kuka Schweiasanlagen * Roboter GmbH. Tool
holder for manipulator arm. 4,438,309, a. 219-86.700.
2Ummermann, Frank: See-
Ehrmann, Oskar; Raschack, Manfred; Gries, Josef; Kretzschmar,
Rolf; Lehmann, Hans D.; Friedrich, Ludwig; Wuppermann,
Dirk; Zimmermann, Frank; Seitz, Werner; Treiber, Hans J.;
Dengel, Ferdinand; Frank, Wolfram; Kurbjuweit. Hans-Georg'
and Mueller, CUus D., 4,438,131, CI. 424-278.000.
Zimmermann, Volker: See—
Schaller, Karl H.; and Zimmermann, Volker, 4,438,467, CI.
360-77.000.
Zincroksid S.p.A.: See-
Bruno, Roberto; and Memmi, Massimo, 4,437,944, CI. 204-27.000.
Zinsser, Rolf: See—
Moderlak. Helmut; Koachinek, Gunter; Zinsser, Rolf; Prehler,
Richard; and Kretschmann, Bemd, 4,437.827, CI. 425-378.00S.
Zobel, Siegfried: See—
Engelsmann, Dieter; Hackenberg, Huben, Urmann, Peter; Wag-
_ , ner Karl; and Zobel, Siegfried, 4,437,751, CI 354-214.000
Zoleski, Benjamin H.; and Sung, Rodney L., to Teiaco Inc Marine
2«33 4o8'"' '"•'"""' °^ improved spreadability. 4,438,005, CI.
^"1i7'^o«°IT?? ' • ^ ^"'^*"'*y of Surrey. Pipes and pipe coatings.
^i^j /i^V3, (.fl. 138' 144.000.
^ rt!**!?!'*''' ^"'°"' *° P«tent-Treuhand Gesellschaft fur elektrischc
Oluhlampen mbH. Multiple low-pressure discharge lamp operatina
circuit. 4,438,372, CI. 315-224.000. f k- •
Zumbuhl, Otmar: See—
Weder, Hans G.; Zumbuhl, Otmar; Schwendener, Reto; and Mils-
mann, Manfred, 4,438,052, CI. 264-4 600
Zupancic, Ronald L., to Union Carbide Corporation. Method of mak-
lo**^-.''"^"^'^*'""'"' **" *'"^'"« " "fcty vent closure. 4,437,231, CI.
29-623.200.
Zyo, Hiroshi: See-
Murakami, Naoyuki; and Zyo, Hiroshi, 4,437,540, CI. 181-147.000.
LIST OF REISSUE PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 20TH DAY OF MARCH, 1984
Note— Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
-,...„.__.„, , ,„ Garden State Engine & Equipment Co., Inc.: S«—
Aldnch, Robert G., to Halomet, Incorporated. Separation of high grade Spalluto, Frank P., Re. 31,539. CI. 212-160.000.
, „ ,. . Halomet, Incorporated: See—
magnetite from fly ash. Re. 31,540. CI. 209-172.500. Aldrich, Robert G., Re. 31,540, CI 209-172 500
Antonious. Anthony J. Golf glove. Re. 31,538. CI. 2-161.00A. ''£o;eSordeV°ic?S'a^™ne. fe".'3"l!53*9.?l"Tl"Ti)SSo. '""
LIST OF REEXAMINATION PATENTEES
TO WHOM
CERTIFICATES WERE ISSUED
Air-Flo Manufacturing Co.. Inc.: See—
Musso, Charles S.. Jr.. Bl 4.266,731, CI. 239-676.000.
Ceel-Co.: See-
Helling, Robert W., Bl 3.560.287. CI. 156-218.000.
Del Fabro, Remigio. Stirrup machine. Bl 3,991,600, 3-20-84, CI
72-203.000.
Gardner, Conrad O. Feedback modulation of exhaust gases in internal
combustion engines. Bl 3,788,284, 3-20-84, CI. 123-571.000.
Helling. Robert W.. to Ceel-Co. Method and apparatus for protecting
insulated pipe. Bl 3.560.287. 3-20-84, CI. 156-218.000.
Kal Kan Foods, Inc.: See-
Palmer, Hugh C, Bl 3,808,340, CI. 426-92.000.
Logothetis, Richard. Variable spot stage light. Bl 4,338,654, 3-20-84.
CI. 362-268.000.
Musso, Charles S., Jr., to Air-Flo Manufacturing Co., Inc. Dumo
spreader. Bl 4,266,731, 3-20-84, CI. 239-676.000.
Ohlhausen. Howard G. Method for protecting nonporous substrates
and for rendering them water repellent. Bl 3.579.540. 3-20-84. CI
523-169.000.
Palmer. Hugh C, to Kal Kan Foods. Inc. Meat coated product.
Bl 3.808.340. 3-20-84. CI. 426-92.000.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
A/S Vestfrost: See—
Damkjaer. Erling. 273.114, CI. Dl 5-88.000.
A. W. Faber-Castell: See—
Jankewitz. Axel. 273.143, CI. D28-57.0O0.
Jankewitz, Axel, 273.144. CI. D28-57.000.
Adams Hard-Facing Company. Inc.: See—
Wetmore. Halsey J.. 273,085. CI. D8-354.000.
American Hospital Supply Corporation: See —
Ponsi. Lawrence G.. 273,145. CI. D29-8.000.
Anderson. Franklin R.. to Custom Molders. Inc. VegeUble holder
273.088. 3-20-84. CI. D8-395.000.
Arcair Company: See-
Johnson. David E.; McCall. Kenneth E.; and Coughlin. William J..
273.097. CI. D 12-36.000.
Astra-Syntex Scandinavia Aktiebolag: See—
Lunden. Hans-Goran; and Temerot, Nils-Akc W., 273.093. CI.
D9-389.000.
Automatic Liquid Packaging, Inc.: See—
Pagels. Louis T.. 273.134. CI. D24-56.000.
Babic. Thomas E.; and Pepe, Albert M. Urinal. 273.133. 3-20-84. CI.
D24- 54.000.
Bamsfather, Gebus: See-
Huff, Robert O.; Krome, Edward F., Jr.; and Bamsfather, Gebus.
273.115, CI. DI5-148.000.
Huff, Robert O.; Krome, Edward F., Jr.; and Bamsfather, Gebus,
273.116, CI. D15-148.000.
Batts, John H.; and Duester, Everett L., to John Thomas Batts, Inc.
Sleepwear hanger. 273,072. 3-20-84. CI. D6-254.000.
Batts. John H.; and Duester. Everett L., to John Thomas Batts, Inc.
Sleepwear hanger. 273.073. 3-20-84, CI. D6-254.000.
BEGHIN-SAY S.A.: See—
Minost. Henry. 273,064, CI. D6-96.000.
Bell, Melvin C. Detent coupled drill bit chuck or the like. 273.077
3-20-84, CI. D8- 10.000.
Benedict, Mellen-Thomas. Glass cutter. 273,082, 3-20-84, CI. D8-98.000.
Bodfish, Nigel F., to Gill-Mentor Limited. Handle for a kitchen tool
273,076, 3-20-84, CI. D7-395.0OO.
Boreback, Stig B. Head for a tool for applying and removing cycle tires.
273.078. 3-20-84. CI. D8-3 1.000.
PI 50
Bradberry. Benjamin C. Turning block for glass panels or the like.
273,080. 3-20-84. CI. D8-7 1.000.
Brancher, Rodney: See—
Welsch, John H.; and Brancher, Rodney, 273,070. CI. D6-192.000.
Breger. Carl-Ame, to Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson. Telephone
instrument. 273,107, 3-20-84, CI. D14-53.000.
Breger, Carl-Ame, to Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson. Telephone
instrument. 273,108, 3-20-84. CI, D14-53.000.
Breger. Carl-Ame. to Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson. Combined
control device and display unit for telephone exchange. 273,109,
3-20-84, CI. D 14-58.000. e . -
Briggs. Sam A. Shampoo support drain. 273,142, 3-20-84, CI. D28-
20.000.
Brinson. Geneva L.: See—
Brinson. James, Jr., 273.054. CI. D2-376.000.
Brinson, James, Jr., to Brinson, Geneva L. Hunting glove. 273,034.
3-20-84, CI. D2-376.000.
Brown Group Recreational Products, Inc.: See—
Ziegler, William H., 273,100, CI. D12-1 11.000.
Bustos, Rafael T., to Leggett & Piatt, Incorporated. Display booth.
273,065, 3-20-84, CI. D6- 132.000.
Cabco Research Ltd.: See-
Cousins, George, 273,104, CI. D13-24.000.
Canady, Lanny H. Fishing light. 273,139, 3-20-84. CI. D26-6 1.000.
Canon Kabushikj Kaisha: See—
Hirata. Takashi; Hirose. Kunio; and Katoyama, Hirohiko, 273,111,
CI. D14-101.000.
HiraU. Takashi; and Fushimoto, Hideo. 273,118, CI. D 18-7.000.
Chung Mei Metal & Plastic Factory Ltd.: See-
Mann, Kittson, 273,140, CI. D26-93.000.
Clausen, Mery; and Szaroletta, William K., to Clausen. Mery. Steno-
graphic ruler. 273.094. 3-20-84. CI. pLip-7 1.000.
Cole. Albert, to Thermoforce Limited. Louvre opener. 273
3-20-84. CI. 08-400.000.
Coleman, Neil F. Unitary water ski rope handle and reel. 273,086,
3-20-84, CI. 08-358.000.
Combi Co.. Ltd.: See—
Nakao. Shinroku; Ishii, Yoshiyasu; and Hoshino, Kiyoshi, 273,125,
CI. D21-15O.000.
Cooper Inks. Peggy L. Flag. 273,096, 3-20-84, CI. 011-175.000.
,089N^
.086. ^
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
PI 51
Coughlin, William J.: See—
'°?if?!J,'-,^AY'lF • ^*cCall, Kenneth E.; and Coughlin, William J.,
273,097, CI. DI2-36.000.
Cousins, George, to Cabco Research Ltd. Electrical plug or socket
cover. 273,104, 3-20-84, CI. D 13-24.000.
^'S!i'."'?i'IlJ P'"y'"« surface for a game board. 273,124, 3-20-84, CI.
02 1 -34.000.
Custom Moldera, Inc.: See—
Anderson, Franklin R., 273,088, CI. D8-395.000.
Damkjaer, Erling, to A/S Vestfrost. Combined microwave oven and
refrigerant unit. 273,114, 3-20-84, CI. D15-88.000
Davis, Robert P.: See—
Katz, Ira R.; and Davis, Robert P , 273,057, CI. D3-7I 000
Duester, Everett L.: See—
Batts, John H.; and Duester, Everett L., 273,072, CI. D6-254 000
Batts, John H,; and Duester, Everett L., 273,073, CI. D6-254 000
Evans, James G. Shelf unit. 273,067, 3-20-84, CI. D6-186 000
F.C.F. Limited: See-
Webb, Anthony J., 273,141, CI. D28-13.0OO.
Farr, Grace. Vacuum cleaner intake member. 273,146, 3-20-84, CI
D32-3 1.000.
Florists' Transworld Delivery Assn.: See—
Kaufmann, Donald A., 273,138, CI. 026-23.000.
Fryklund, Gilbert G.: See—
Sliwkowski, Joseph; Fryklund, Gilbert G.; and Parker, Vance A
273,112, CI. 014-103.000.
Fushimoto, Hideo: See—
Hirata, Takashi; and Fushimoto. Hideo. 273,118, CI. 0 18-7.000
Gannett Co., Inc.: See-
Gore, Fred M., 273,123, CI. O20-6.000.
Gatward, Douglas K. Sheet material dispenser. 273,063, 3-20-84, CI.
06-96.000.
Genaro, Donald M.; and Tilley, Alvin R., to Teletype Corporation.
Telepnnter keyboard and telephone. 273,110, 3-20-84, CI. 014-
38.000.
Gill-Mentor Limited: See—
Bodfish, Nigel F., 273,076, CI. 07-395.000.
GKN Kent Alloys Limited: See-
Woodward, Richard R., 273,102. CI. 012-209.000.
Goff, Aldwin K. Rocking chair. 273,061, 3-20-84, CI. D6-49.000.
Gore, Fred M., to Gannett Co.. Inc. Newspaper vending rack or similar
article. 273,123, 3-20-84, CI. 020-6,000.
Green, David T.; Rawson. Paul O.; and Yagami, Richard, to United
States Surgical Corporation. Surgical stapler. 273,130, 3-20-84, CI.
024-26,000,
Hamilton Sorter Co., Inc.: See—
Yauger, Jon A., 273,069, CI. 06-192.000.
Hartman, Kenneth: See—
Knox, Robert M,; Hartman, Kenneth; and Worby, Harold, 273,129.
CI. D24-8.000.
Hartmann Luggage Company: See—
Katz. Ira R.; and Davis. Robert P., 273,057, CI. 03-71.000.
Hayden, Shawn A. Turning utensil for barbecues. 273,075, 3-20-84, CI
07-106.000.
Helmac Products Corporation: See-
McKay, Nicholas O., 273.058. CI. 04-23.100.
McKay. Nicholas D.. 273.059. CI, 04-23,100,
Henkel, Daniel P,, to Square D Company. Electrical outlet cover plate
and closure therefor, 273,084, 3-20-84, CI, D8-353,000
Hirata. Takashi; Hirose, Kunio; and Katayama. Hirohiko. to Canon
Kabushiki Kaisha, Combined dau input terminal and acoustic cou-
pler, 273.111, 3-20-84, CI. DI4-101.000.
Hirau, Takashi; and Fushimoto, Hideo, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha,
Desk-top electronic calculator, 273,118, 3-20-84, CI, 0 18-7.000.
Hirose. Kunio: See—
Hirau, Takashi; Hirose, Kunio; and KaUyama. Hirohiko. 273.111,
CI. O14-101.000.
Hoshino, Kiyoshi: See—
Nakao, Shinroku; Ishii, Yoshiyasu; and Hoshino, Kiyoshi, 273,125,
CI. 021-150.000,
Huff, Robert O.; Krome, Edward F., Jr.; and Bamsfather, Gebus, to
Reliance Electric Company. Variable speed belt drive. 273,115.
3-20-84, CI. D 15- 1 48.000.
Huff, Robert O.; Krome, Edward F., Jr.; and Bamsfather, Gebus, to
Reliance Electric Company. Variable speed belt drive. 273.116.
3-20-84. CI. 015-148.000.
HurletronAltair, Inc.: See-
Knoll, Russell D., 273,113, CI. OI4-1 16.000.
Ibaraki, Howard, to Orion Industries, Inc. Buffer. 273,079, 3-20.84, CI
08-62.000.
lijima, Takekazu, to Pioneer Kabushiki Kaisha. Loudspeaker, 273,106.
3-20-84. CI. 014-30.000.
Imai, Hirotaka, to Pioneer Electronic Corporation. Cassette Uoe re-
corder. 273,105. 3-20-84. CI. D14-6.000.
Imperial. Raymond E. Threshold seal for a door astragal. 273,090,
Ishii, Yoshiyasu: See —
Nakao, Shinroku; Ishii, Yoshiyasu; and Hoshino, Kiyoshi, 273,125.
CI. 021-150.000.
Ito, Kateumi, to Shachihau Industrial Co.. Ltd. Stamp. 273,120.
3-20-84, CI. 018-15.000.
Iverson, Landis. Service stand for automotive service sution. 273.147.
3-20-84, CI. D34-6.000.
Jankewitz, Axel, to A. W. Faber-Castell. Cuticle device. 273,143.
3-20-84, CI. 028-57.000.
Jankewitz. Axel, to A. W. Faber-Castell. Cuticle device. 273,144,
3-20-84, CI. 028-57.000.
Jansen, Rudolph A,: See—
Turza, Peter J,; Jansen, Rudolph A,; and Turza, Frank P.. 273.126.
CI D2 1-234.000.
John Thomas Batts, Inc.: See—
Batts, John H ; and Duester, Everett L,, 273,072, CI 06-254,000
Batts, John H,; and Duester, Everett L,, 273,073, CI. D6-254 000
Johnson, David E,; McCall, Kenneth E.; and Coughlin, William J„ to
Arcair Company, All position tractor for mounting a tool such as a
welding, cutting or gouging torch, 273,097. 3-20-84, CI. 012-36 000
Johnson, Dennis O.: See-
Johnson, Janet B,; and Johnson, Dennis C, 273,087, CI, D8-
382.000.
''°!???^"»'-^*,"^* ^ • '"'^ Johnson, Dennis O, Geodesic dome connector,
273,087, 3-20-84, CI. 08-382,000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Sato: See-
Sato, Yo; and Kashiwaba, Tadao, 273,122, CI, 018-19,000
Kasagi, Taro; and Tamada, Kenji, to Silver Seiko Limited, Typewriter
for European languages, 273,1 17. 3-20-84. CI, D 1 8- 1.000
Kashiwaba. Tadao: See—
Sato, Yo; and Kashiwaba. Tadao. 273.122. CI. 018-19,000,
KaUyama, Hirohiko: See—
"'J^I'V^'''"**''' ^"°^' Kunio; and KaUyama, Hirohiko. 273,1!!.
CI. 014-101.000.
Katz, Ira R.; and Davis, Robert P,, to Hartmann Luggage Company
Luggage design 273,057. 3-20-84, CI. 03-71,000.
Kaufmann, Donald A,, to Florists' Transworld Delivery Assn. Support
for a candle and the like. 273,138. 3-20-84, CI. D26-23.000.
'^'Jiff;??^'' ^' ^' Motorcycle cruise control, 273.101. 3-20-84. CI,
D 12- 174.000.
'^'J^!'^'-.P*^*"* " • '" ^''''* °'^ "'"''•'■ ""'Cle 273.066. 3-20-84. Q.
Do- 179.000.
Knoll, Russell D., to HurletronAIuir, Inc. Optical scanner housing or
similar article. 273,1 13, 3-20-84, CI, 014-1 16,000,
Knox, Robert M,; Hartman, Kenneth; and Worby, Harold, to Meridia
ic,r?!J^'"'"°"' Acupuncture point locator. 273,129, 3-20-84, CI,
D24-8.000.
Koch, Kevin E. Trailer. 273.099. 3-20-84, CI. 012-105.000
Kretz, Edward J., to Owens-Illinois, Inc. Bottle. 273,092, 3-20-84. CI.
09-389.000.
Krome, Edward F., Jr.: See-
Huff, Robert 0.; Krome, Edward F.. Jr.; and Bamsfather, Gebut,
273.115. CI. 015-148.000.
Huff, Robert C; Krome, Edward F., Jr.; and Bamsfather, Gebus.
273.116, CI. 01 5- 148.000.
Kurosaki, Mutsuo, to Nifco Inc. Hole plug or the like. 273,091, 3-20-84,
CI. D8-499.000,
Lee, Spencer. Simulative umbrella, 273.055. 3-20-84. CI, D3-6.000
Leggett &. Piatt, Incorporated: See—
Bustos, Rafael T., 273,065, CI. 06-132.000.
Lennon, Richard C Boat seat box console or similar article. 273.056.
3-20-84. CI, 03-40.000.
Lerma, Rose L. Collapsible cleaning cart. 273,148. 3-20-84. CI. 034-
21.000.
Levine. Arthur L. Sharpening stone holder for knife sharpener. 273.081.
3-20-84. CI. 08-93.000.
Lewellen. Richard R., to Nordson Corporation. Ruid material applica-
tion controller. 273.103. 3-20-84, CI. 013-12.000.
Lunden, Hans-Goran; and Temerot, Nils-Ake W., to Astra-Syntex
Scandinavia Aktiebolag. Pill dispenser. 273.093, 3-20-84, CI. D9-
389.000.
Mann, Kittson, to Chung Mei Meul & Plastic Factory Ltd. Table lamp,
273,140,3-20-84.0.026-93.000. ^
Martin. John H. Combined desk and seat unit. 273,060. 3-20-84. CI
O6-6.000.
Mathieu, Kenneth O. Removable canoe-carried cooler. 273.074.
3-20-84, CI. 07-77.000.
McCall, Kenneth E.: See-
Johnson, David E.; McCall, Kenneth E.; and Coughlin, William J.,
273,097, CI. 012-36.000.
McKay, Nicholas D., to Helmac Productt Corporation. Lint remover.
273,058, 3-20-84, CI. 04-23,100,
McKay, Nicholas O,, to Helmac Products Corporation. Lint remover.
273,059,3-20-84,0.04-23,100,
Mead Corporation, The: See—
Noonan. Daniel T,, 273,119, O. 018-13,000.
Spamer, William S,, 273,068, CI. 06-188.000,
Meister, Robert L. Swimmer's towable diving plane. 273.127. 3-20-84,
Meridia 12 Corporation: See—
Knox, Robert M.; Hartman, Kenneth; and Worby, Harold. 273,129,
O, O24-8.000,
Mestre, Nadine J. Disposable douche bag. 273,135, 3-20-84, CI. 024-
60.000.
Metropolitan Wire Corporation: See—
Welsch, John H.; and Brancher, Rodney, 273,070, O D6- 1 92.000.
Minost, Henry, to BEGHIN-SAY S,A, Towel dispenser. 273,064,
3-20-84. CI, 06-96.000.
Moloff, Alan. Cordless vibrating massager. 273,132, 3-20-84, O. D24-
41.000.
Nakao, Shinroku; Ishii, Yoshiyasu; and Hoshino, Kiyothi, to Combi
Co., Ltd. Animal figure toy. 273,125, 3-20-84, CI. D21-1 50.000.
Nifco Inc.: See—
Kurosaki, Mutsuo, 273,091, CI. 08-499.000.
PI 52
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Noiles, Douglas G.; Rawson, Paul O.; and Yagami, Richard, to United
States Surgical Corporation. Surgical supler. 273,131, 3-20-84, CI.
D24-26.000.
Noonan, Daniel T., to Mead Corporation, The. Ink jet printer. 273,1 19,
3-20-84. CI. D 18- 13.000.
Nordson Corporation: See —
Lewellen. Richard R.. 273,103, CI. D 13- 12.000.
Ohhashi, Teruhiko, to Suzuki Motor Co. Ltd. Automobile. 273,098,
3-20-84, CI. D12-90.000.
Orion Industries. Inc.: See—
Ibaraki, Howard, 273,079. CI. D8-62.000.
Owens-Illinois, Inc.: See —
Kretz. Edward J., 273,092, CI. D9-389.000.
Pagels, Louu T., to Automatic Liquid Packaging, Inc. Medical con-
tainer foi^lnjectable substances. 273.134, 3-20-84, CI. D24-S6.000
Parker, Vance A.: See—
Sliwkowski. Joseph; Fryklund, Gilbert G.; and Parker, Vance A.,
273,112, CI. D14-103.000.
Pepe. Albert M.: See—
Babic, Thomas E.; and Pepe, Albert M., 273,133, CI. D24-S4.000.
Pioneer Electronic Corporation: See—
Imai, Hirotaka, 273,105, CI. D14-6.C00.
Pioneer Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
lijima, Takekazu, 273.106, CI. D14-30.000.
Ponsi, Lawrence G, to American Hospital Supply Corporation. Face
mask. 273.145. 3-20-84, CI. D29-8.000.
Rawson. Charles E. Luggage monogramming machine. 273,121,
3-20-84, CI. D18-15.0OO.
Rawson, Paul O.: See-
Green, David T.; Rawson. Paul O.; and Yagami, Richard, 273,130,
CI. D24-26.000.
Noiles, Douglas G.; Rawson, Paul O.; and Yagami, Richard,
273.131, CI. D24-26.000.
Reliance Electric Company: See-
Huff. Robert O.; Krome, Edward P., Jr.; and Bamsfather, Gebus,
273.115, CI. D15-I48.000.
Huff. Robert O.; Krome. Edward F., Jr.; and Bamsfather, Gebus,
273.116. CI. D15-I48.000.
Richardson. James E., to Waterbury Companies, Inc. Soap dispenser.
273,062, 3-20-84. CI. D6-95.000.
Roddick. Robert T. Handle for a toilet seat or the like. 273,128, 3-20-84,
CI. D23-7 1.000.
Sato, Yo; and Kashiwaba, Tadao. to Kabushiki Kaisha Sato. Hand
operated label applying machine. 273,122, 3-20-84, CI. DI8-19.000.
Schuize, Herbert C Visual marker. 273,095, 3-20-84, CI. D 10- 109.000.
Shachihau Industrial Co., Ltd.: See—
Ito, Katsumi, 273.120, CI. D 1 8- 15.000.
Silver Seiko Limited: See—
Kasagi. Taro; and Tamada, Kenji, 273,117, CI. D 1 8- 1.000.
Sliwkowski, Joseph; Fryklund, Gilbert G.; and Parker. Vance A., to
Telesis Corporation of Delaware, Inc. Display console. 273,112.
3-20-84, CI. D14-103.000.
Sloane, Irving. Wood working plane. 273,083, 3-20-84, CI. D8-101.000.
Spamer, William S., to Mead Corporation, The. Dispenser for cans or
bottles. 273.068. 3-20-84. CI. D6- 1 88.000.
Square D Company: See—
Henkel. Daniel P.. 273,084, CI. D8-353.000.
Stark, Lucille. Pillow. 273,071, 3-20-84, CI. D6-201.000.
Suzuki Motor Co. Ltd.: See—
Ohhashi, Teruhiko, 273,098, CI. D12-90.000.
Szaroletu, William K.: See—
Clausen, Mery; and Szaroletta. William K., 273,094, Q. DIO-
Tamada, Kenji: 5^—
Kasagi, Taro; and Tamada. Kenji, 273,117, Q. DI8-1.000.
Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson: See—
Breger, Carl-Ame, 273.107. CI. D14-S3.000.
Breger, Carl-Ame, 273.108, CI. D14-S3.000.
Breger. Carl-Ame. 273,109, CI. D14-S8.000.
Telesis Corporation of Delaware, Inc.: See—
Sliwkowski, Joseph; Fryklund. Gilbert G.; and Parker, Vance A.,
273,112, CI. D 14- 103.000.
Teletype Corporation: See—
Genaro, Donald M.; and Tilley, Alvin R., 273,1 10, CI. D14-58.000.
Temerot, Nils-Ake W.: See—
Lunden, Hans-Goran; and Temerot. Nils-Ake W., 273.093, CI.
Thermoforce Limited: See-
Cole, Albert, 273,089, CI. D8-400.000.
Tilley, Alvin R.: See—
Genaro, Donald M.; and Tilley, Alvin R., 273,110, CI. 014-58.000.
Turza, Frank P.; See-
Tuna, Peter J.; Jansen, Rudolph A.; and Turza, Frank P., 273,126.
CI. D2 1-234.000.
Turza, Peter J.; Jansen, Rudolph A.; and Turza. Frank P. Golf putting
target. 273,126, 3-20-84. CI. D2 1-234.000.
United Sutes Surgical Corporation: See—
^^'/^rSfX'** ^ ' '^**°"' P""' O ; ■"<* Yagami, Richard, 273.130,
CI. D24-26.00O.
Noiles, Douglas G.; Rawson. Paul O.; and Yagami, Richard.
273,131, CI. D24-26.000.
Varela. Jose. Wall panel. 273.136, 3-20-84, CI. D25-80.000.
Varela, Jose. Wall panel. 273,137, 3-20-84, CI. D25-80.000.
Waterbury Companies, Inc.: See-
Richardson, James E., 273,062, CI. D6-9S.000.
Webb, Anthony J., to F.C.F. Limited. Hair dryer. 273,141, 3-20-84, CI.
Welsch, John H.; and Brancher. Rodney, to Metropolitan Wire Corpo-
ration. Work table top. 273,070, 3-20-84, CI. D6- 1 92.000.
Wetmore, Halsey J., to Adams Hard-Facing Company, Inc. Spacer for
fertilizer tubing. 273,085, 3-20-84, Q. D8-354.000.
Woodward, Richard R., to GKN Kent Alloys Limited. Wheel. 273,102.
3-20-84. CI. D 12-209.000.
Worby, Harold: See—
Knox. Robert M.; Hartman. Kenneth; and Worby. Harold. 273.129,
CI. D24-8.000.
Yagami, Richard: See-
Green, David T.; Rawson, Paul O.; and Yagami, Richard. 273,130,
CI. D24-26.000.
Noiles, Douglas G.; Rtwson, Paul O.; and Yagami, Richard,
273,131, cr D24-26.000.
Yauger, Jon A., to Hamilton Sorter Co., Inc. Furniture top. 273,069,
3-20-84, CI. D6- 192.000. *^
Ziegler, William H., to Brown Group Recreational Products, Inc.
Power assisted bicycle. 273,100, 3-20-84, Q. D12-1 11.000.
LIST OF PLANT PATENTEES
B. V. Handelskweke M. C. van Staaveren, M. C: See-
van Andel, Jacob, 5,208, CI. 68.000.
B. V. Handelskwekerij, M. C. van Staavefen: S«—
van Andel, Jacob, 5,207, CI. 68.000.
Darby, Robert H. Hibiscus plant named "Anne Arundel". 5,209,
3-20-84, CI. 68.000.
van Andel, Jacob, to B. V. Handelskwekerij. M. C. van Staaveren.
Alstroemeria named Stalilas. 5,207, 3-20-84, CI. 68.000.
van Andel, Jacob, to B. V. Handelskweke M. C. van Staaveren, M. C.
Alstroemeria cultivar named Stalluc. 5,208, 3-20-84, CI. 68.000.
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
ISSUED MARCH 20, 1984
NOTE-Firet number, class; second number, subclass; third number, patent number
CLASS2
161 A Re.31,538
CLASS3
I 4,437,191
1.9 4,437,192
1.912 4,437,193
13 4,437,194
CLA8S4
456 4,437,195
S64 4,437,196
CXASSS
13 4,437,197
CLASS 12
145 4,437.198
CLASS IS
49 R 4.437.199
306 A 4.437.200
316 R 4,437.201
320 4.437.202
322 4.437.203
325 4.437.204
354 4.437.205
CLASS 17
I F 4.437.206
25 4.437.207
26 4.437.208
49 4.437.209
CLASS 24
287 4.437.211
435 4.437.210
698 4.437.212
CLASS 29
33 K 4.437,213
149.5 DP 4.437,214
149.5 R 4.437.215
157.3 A 4.437.216
157.4 4.437.217
240 4.437.218
283 4.437.219
426.5 4,437.220
429 4.437.221
527.4 4.437.222
564.3 4,437.223
568 4.437.224
576 B 4,437,225
577 R 4.437,226
589 4.437.227
590 4.437.228
593 4.437.229
597 4.437.230
623.2 4.437.231
740 4.437.232
768 4.437.233
Wi 4.437.234
MO 4.437.235
879 4.437.236
CLASS 30
90.2 4.437.237
272 A 4.437.238
CLASS 33
143 L 4.437.239
166 4.437,241
172 E 4,437.240
178 B 4.437.242
302 4,437,243
CLASS 37
63 4.437.244
222 4.437.245
CLASS 3«
2S 4,437.246
143 4.437.247
CLASS 40
364 4.437J48
CLASS 43
51 4.437.249
59 4.437.250
II 4.437.251
» 4.437,252
CLASS 43
I 4.437,253
4
17
17.5
42.45
57.1
105
CLASS
IR
6
51
CLASS
IR
61
242
CLASS
I R
58
CLASS
62 R
CLASS
57
493
4,437,234
4,437,255
4,437,256
4,437,257
4.437.258
4.437.259
44
4.437.861
4.437,862
4,437,863
46
4,437,260
4,437,261
4,437.262
47
4.437.263
4.437.264
41
4,437,864
49
4,437,265
4.437.266
CLASS 51
34 R 4.437.267
298 4.437,865
327 4.437.268
358 4.437.269
364 4.437,270
400 4.437.271
CLASS S3
64
93
105
109
125.5
202
239
247
285
309.1
407
410
456
481
506
588
637
64
97
319
357
412
553
4.437.272
4,437.273
4.437.274
4.437.275
4,437.276
4.437.277
4.437.278
4.437.279
4.437.280
4.437.281
4.437.282
4.437.283
4,437.284
4.437.285
4.437.286
4.437.287
4.437.288
CLASS S3
4.437.289
4.437.290
4.437.291
4.437.292
4.437.293
4.437.294
CLASS SS
85 4.437.866
233 4.437.867
CLASS 56
10.2 4,437,295
400 4,437,296
CLASS S7
9 4,437,297
22 4.437.298
.4.437.299
74 4.437.300
289 4.43"'.301
333 4.437.302
CLASS 60
39.281
290
293
427
514
547.1
562
602
648
665
738
63
4.437.303
4.437.304
4.437.305
4.437.306
4.437.307
4,437.308
4.437.309
4,437.310
4,437,311
4.437.312
4.437.313
4,437,314
CLASS <2
4.437.315
79
81
93
138
236
324.2
411
504
4.437.316
4.437.317
4,437.318
4.437.319
4.437.320
4,437.321
4,437.868
4.437.322
CLASS 65
I 4.437.869
12 4.437.870
104 4.437,871
4.437.872
CLASS 66
84 A 4.437.323
CLASS 68
5 E 4.437.324
23.7 4.437.325
CLASS 71
67 4.437.873
87 4.437.874
90 4.437.875
4,437.876
4,437,877
4,437,878
96 4,437.879
120 4.437.880
CLASS 72
62 4.437.326
94 4.437.327
110 4,437.328
203 Bl 3.991.600
299 4.437.329
338 4,437.330
360 4.437.331
CLASS 73
1 DV 4,437.332
12 4.437.333
35 4.437.334
37.9 4.437.335
40.5 R 4.437.336
54 4.437.337
116 4.437.338
IJ8 4,437.339
4.437.340
119 A 4.437,341
4.437.342
182 4.437.343
197 4.437.344
204 4.437.345
221 4.437.346
272 R 4.437.347
625 4.437.348
861.22 4.437.349
861.24 4.437.350
862.05 4.437.351
862.47 4.437.352
863.81 4.437.353
CLASS 74
5.46 4.437.354
385 4,437,355
411 4.437.356
475 4.437.357
867 4,437.358
CLASS 75
05 AA 4.437.881
0.5 C
05 R
7
10 R
67 R
68B
84.4
118P
244
251
4.437.883
4.437.882
4.437.884
4.437.885
4.437.886
4.437.887
4.437.888
4.437.889
4.437.890
4.437.891
CLASS 11
3.38 A 4,437.359
3.44
9.22
43
57.18
179
436
4,437.360
4.437.361
4.437.362
4.437.363
4.437.364
4.437,365
CLASS 82
4 C 4,437.366
CLASS 83
13 4.437,367
4,437,368
18 4,437,369
23 4,437,370
54 4,437.371
320 4.437,372
346 4.437.373
454 4,437.374
762 4.437.375
886 4,437.376
CLASS84
1.01 4.437.377
1.18 4,437.378
1.22 4,437,379
1.26 4,437,380
484 4.437.381
CLASS 86
I B 4.437,382
CLASS 89
8 4,437.383
37 A 4,437.384
CLASS 91
4.437.385
4.437.386
4.437.387
4,437,388
4,437.389
CLASS 92
4.437,390
361
363 R
401
446
499
84
CLASS 98
2.01 4,437.391
2.08 4,437.392
2.17 4,437,393
40 V 4,437.394
CLASS 99
4.437.395
4.437.396
4.437.397
4.437.398
355
475
533
587
CLASS 100
4 4.437.399
CLASS 101
18
93.14
181
248
269
349
330
409
426
4,437.400
4.437.401
4,437.402
4.437.403
4.437.404
4.437.405
4.437.406
4.437.407
4.437.408
CLASS 102
364 4.437.409
CLASS 105
378 4,437.410
CLASS 106
15.05 4.437.892
80 4.437.893
238 4.437.894
245 4.437.895
273 R 4.437.896
CLASS lOi
1 4,437,411
56.1 4,437,412
111 4,437.413
134 4,437.414
CLASS 110
182.5 4.437.415
245 4.437.416
246 4.437.418
259 4.437.419
346 4.437.417
CLASS 112
103 4.437.420
158 R 4.437,421
272 4.437.422
292
4,437.423
CLASS 114
91 4.437,424
102 4.437.425
103 4.437.426
218 4.437.427
CLASS 116
137 R 4.437.428
CLASS 119
1
3
18
45 R
51.13
4.437.429
4.437.430
4.437.431
4.437.432
4.437.433
4.437.434
4.437.435
CLASS 123
1 A
42
48 B
90.56
145 A
213
417
446
438
491
492
568
571
577
4,437.436
4.437,437
4,437,438
4.437,439
4,437,440
4,437,441
4,437.442
4,437,443
4,437,444
4,437,445
4,437,446
4.437,447
Bt 3.788.284
4.437,448
22
30
77
182
271.2 R
293
417
433
CLASS 134
4.437.449
CLASS 126
4,437,450
4,437,451
4,437,452
4.437,453
4.437,454
4.437,455
4.437,436
CLASS 138
1 R
11
94
204.26
205.24
207
207.17
303.14
340
419 PS
642
660
672
679
736
767
773
784
785
4,437.457
4,437.458
4.437.459
4,437,460
4,437,461
4,437,462
4,437,463
4.437.464
4,437.465
4,437,466
4.437,467
4.437,468
4.437,469
4,437.470
4.437,471
4.437.472
4.437.473
4,437.474
4,437,475
CLASS 131
276 4.437.476
CLASS 132
88.5 4,437.477
CLASS 133
5 R 4,437,478
CLASS 134
68 4.437,479
CLASS 135
74 4,437.480
CLASS 136
221 4.438.290
236 R 4.438.291
CLASS 137
60 4.437.481
67 4.437.482
85 4,437.483
99 4.437.484
220 4.437.485
315 4,437.486
322
334
487.5
SI 2.4
540
543.13
4,437,487
4,437.488
4.437.489
4,437.490
4,437,491
4.437.492
CLASS 130
45 4.437.493
97 4.437.494
144 4.437.495
CLASS 139
383 A 4,437,496
CLASS 141
1 4.437,497
89 4,437.498
95 4,437.499
CLASS 144
34 R 4.437.500
136R 4.437.501
193 A 4.437.502
CLASS 148
1.5 v^
6I5>
4,437,897
4,437,898
9R
4,437,899
11.5 A
4,437,901
12 E
4,437.900
12 F
4,437,902
4,437,903
13.1
4,437,904
16
4,437,905
26
4.437,906
31.55
4,437,907
108
4,437,908
111
4,437,909
112
4,437,910
402
4.437.91 1
403
4,437,912
408
4,437,913
CLASS 1S2
209 R 4,437,503
427 4.437.504
CLASS 156
54 4.437.914
126 4,437,915
218 Bl 3.560,287
222 4,437.916
296 4,437,917
322 4,437,918
329 4,437,919
406.2 4,437.920
475 4,437.921
603 4,437,922
630 4.437.923
651 4,437.924
653 4,437.925
654 4,437,926
666 4,437,927
4,437,928
4.437.929
4,437,930
4.437.931
4.437.932
CLASS 159
17 R 4,437,933
47.1 4,437,934
CLASS 160
126 4,437.505
331 4,437,506
CLASS 162
103 4.437.935
CLASS 164
173 4,437,507
418 4.437,508
454 4,437.509
32
122
154
485
CLASS 165
4.437.510
4.437,512
4.437,513
4.437.511
CLASS 166
53 4.437.514
PI 53
PI 54
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
77
120
248
259
261
341
382
13
43
52 R
79
88 R
218
346
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
I
I
CLASS
CLASS
25
4,437.515
4.437.516
4,437,517
4,437.518
4.437.519
4,437,520
4.437,521
4,437.522
172
4.437.523
173
4.437,524
174
4.438,292
4,438,293
4.438,294
17S
4.437.525
4,437.526
177
4,437.527
CLASS 179
2 A
6.02
117
175.2 R
175.3 F
184
4.438.295
4.438.296
4.438.297
4,438.298
4.438.299
4.438.300
CLASS ISO
9.5
69C
75
79.1
142
168
190
215
254
313
129
145
147
151
290
2
120
171
233
4.437.528
4.437,529
4.437.530
4.437,531
4.437.532
4.437.533
4,437.534
4,437.535
4.437.536
4.437,537
CLASS 181
4.437.538
4,437.539
4.437,540
4,437,541
4,437,542
CLASS 1S2
4.437.543
4.437.544
4.437,545
4.437.546
CLASS 188
111
289
4.437.547
4.437.548
CLASS 190
109
4.437,549
CLASS 192
3.28
26
46
58 B
70.21
98
324
4.437.551
4.437.552
4.437.553
4.437.554
4.437.555
4.437.556
4.437,550
CLASS 194
1 D
97 R
4,437.557
4.437.558
397
457
504
733
810
834
851
CLASS 19«
4.437.559
4,437.560
4.437.561
4,437.562
4.437.563
4,437.564
4.437.565
CLASS 200
16 C
17 R
51.1
67 D
83 J
144 B
148 A
148 F
39
160
14
49
4.438.301
4.438.302
4.438.303
4.438,304
4.438,305
4,438,307
4.438.308
4.438.306
CLASS 201
4.437.936
CLASS 202
4.437.937
CLASS 203
4,437.938
4,437,939
4,437,940
SO
4,437,941
CLASS 204
6
16
27
35 N
35 R
52 R
59 M
67
98
119
129
129.35
129.4
147
157.1 R
159.11
181 C
192 C
192 EC
229
245
290 F
298
301
403
412
427
1.5
210
223
601
4,437.942
4.437,943
4,437,944
4.437.945
4,437.946
4.437.947
4.437.948
4,437.949
4,437,950
4,437,951
4.437,952
4,437.953
4.437.954
4,437.956
4.437,955
4.437.957
4.437.958
4.437,959
4,437.960
4,437.962
4,437.961
4,437,963
4,437,964
4.437.965
4,437.966
4,437.967
4.437.968
4,437.969
4.437.970
4,437.971
CLASS 206
4,437,566
4,437,567
4.437.568
4,437,569
4.437.570
CLASS 20S
8LE
10
87
97
113
120
153
235
253
5
166
172.5
211
538
551
4.437.972
4.437.973
4.437.974
4,437,975
4,437.976
4.437.977
4,437.978
4.437.979
4.437,980
4.437.981
CLASS 209
4.437.982
4,437.983
Re.3 1.540
4.437.984
4.437.985
4.437.571
CLASS 210
130 4.437.986
137 4.437.987
237 4,437.988
242.3 4.437.989
321.3 4.437.990
413 4,437.991
603 4.437,992
631 4.437,993
638 4,437.994
714 4.437.995
718 4.437.996
727 4.437,997
728 4.437.998
748 4.437.999
786 4.438.000
CLASS 211
86 4.437,572
CLASS 212
160 Re.31.539
263 4.437.573
CLASS 215
247 4.437.574
CLASS 219
10.43
10.49 R
69W
73.1
86.7
98
121 PC
121 PE
130.51
137 PS
216
236
243
441
536
4.438.310
4.438.311
4.438.312
4.438.313
4.438.309
4.438.314
4.438.316
4,438.315
4.438,317
4,438.318
4,438.319
4.438,320
4.438,321
4,438,322
4,438.323
4.438.324
4.438.325
CLASS 220
1 T 4,437,575
90.4
224
256
4.437,576
4,437,577
4,437.578
CLASS 221
25 4,437,579
75 4.437.580
CLASS 222
54
4.437.581
94
4,437.582
108
4,437,583
137
4.437,584
181
4.437,585
4,437,586
207
4.437.587
321
4.437,588
327
4,437.589
386.3
4.437.590
391
4.437.591
402.12 4.437.592
541
4.437,593
544
4.437.594
642
4.437.595
CLASS 224
39
4.437.596
42.45 R 4.437.597
163
4.437.598
319
4.437,599
CLASS 226
108
4.437.600
199
4.437.601
CLASS 227
147
4.437.602
CLASS 228
4.5
4.437.603
179
4.437.604
180 R
4,437,605
CLASS 229
40
4,437.606
CLASS 232
35
4.437.607
CLASS 235
181
4,438,328
379
4.438.326
462
4,438,327
CLASS 236
13
4.437.608
49
4.437.609
119
453
556
676
688
691
24
CLASS 239
4.437.610
4.437,611
4.437.612
Bl 4,266.731
4.437.613
4.437.614
CLASS 241
4.437.615
CLASS 242
7.02
18 EW
^ii
83
84.1 J
86.5 R
107.2
107.3
129
186
4,437.616
4,437,617
4.437.618
4,437.619
4,437,620
4,437,621
4,437,622
4.437,623
4,437.624
4,437,625
4,437.626
CLASS 244
54 4.437,627
122 AG 4,437,628
122 R 4.437,629
136 4.437.630
214 4.437,631
CLASS 246
34 R 4.437.632
CLASS 248
68 R
97
122
137
163 A
282
558
20
79
175
201
4,437,633
4.437.634
4,437.635
4,437.636
4,437,637
4,437,638
4.437.639
CLASS 249
4.437.640
4.437.641
4.437.642
CLASS 250
4,438,330
211 J 4,438,331
310 4,438,332
327.2 4,438,333
363 S 4,438,334
4.438.335
398 4.438.336
436 4.438.337
459.1 4.438.329
551 4.438.338
CLASS 251
1 A 4,437,643
II 4,437.644
65 4,437.645
145 4.437,646
149.9 4,437,647
CLASS 252
8.55 D
8.7
12
33.4
49.9
51.5 R
56 R
90
91
106
131
146
162
174.21
174.24
174.25
301.17
356
522 R
545
581
609
4.438.002
4.438.001
4.438,003
4.438.004
4,438.005
4.438.006
4.438,007
4.438,022
4.438.008
4,438.009
4.438,010
4,438,011
4.438.012
4,438,013
4,438,020
4.438,014
4,438.015
4.438.016
4.438.017
4.438,018
4.438.023
4.438.024
4.438.025
4.438.026
4.438.027
4.438.028
CLASS 254
93 R
4,437.648
CLASS 260
112 R
112.5 R
239.3 B
239.3 R
239.55 C
245.2 T
385
414
429.5
439 R
464
465 B
465 F
501.12
501.13
501.15
513 R
982
4.438.032
4.438.029
4.438.030
4,438,031
4,438,035
4,438,034
4,438,033
4,438,036
4.438.037
4.438.038
4.438,039
4.438.040
4,438.041
4.438,042
4,438,043
4,438,044
4,438,045
4,438,046
4.438,047
4,438.048
CLASS 261
42 4.438.049
CLASS 264
0.5 4.438,050
1.2 4,438,051
4.6 4.438.052
25 4.438.053
40.6 4.438.054
44 4.438.055
45.2 4.438,056
46.5 4,438.057
51 4.438.058
105 4,438,059
206 4.438,060
249 4,438.061
255 4.438.062
311 4.438.063
328.15 4.438,064
335 4.438,065
CLASS 266
48 4,437,649
144 4,437.650
193 4.437,651
275 4.437.652
CLASS 267
140.1 4.437,653
CLASS 269
283 4,437,654
CLASS 271
3.1 4.437.655
10 4,437.656
100 4,437,657
125 4,437,658
276
290
4,437,659
4,437.660
CLASS 273
55 R
4,437,661
73 D
4.437,662
81.2
4,437.663
121 A
4,437.664
138 R
4.437,665
141 R
4,437,666
153 S
4,437.667
156
4,437,668
185 B
4.437,672
186 C
4,437,669
296
4,437,670
372
4.437,671
CLASS 277
65
4.437.673
188 A
4,437,674
CLASS 279
IC
4.437,675
CLASS 280
78
4.437,676
234
4.437.677
276
4.437.678
281 R
4,437.679
460R
4.437.680
733
4.437.681
764.1
4.437.682
804
4.437.683
42
12
42
95
246
272
353
4.437,684
CLASS 281
4,437.685
CLASS 285
4.437.686
4,437.687
4.437.688
4.437.689
4.437.690
4.437,691
CLASS 290
1 R 4.438,339
2 4.438.340
44 4,438,341
45 4.438,342
53 4,438.343
CLASS 292
4.437.692
57
191
235
352
118
4.437.693
4,437.694
4,437.695
CLASS 293
4.437.696
4.437.697
4.438,364
CLASS 312
1 4.437,710
201 4,437,711
246 4.437,712
259 4,437,713
281 4,437,714
348 4,437,715
CLASS 313
325 4,438,365
CLASS 315
1 4,438,366
5.41 4.438,367
39 4,438,368
49 4,438,369
106 4.438,370
111.81 4,438,371
224 4,438,372
334 4,438,373
362 4,438,374
408 4,438,375
CLASS 318
4,438,376
4,438,377
4.438.378
4,438.379
4,438,380
4,438,381
4,438,382
4,438,383
CLASS 320
4,438.384
CLASS 322
4.438.385
78
254
280
685
696
744
799
48
28
CLASS 323
210 4.438,386
260 4,438.387
313 4,438.388
CLASS 324
133
158 1
173
220
312
326
452
8.389
8.390
■4.438.391
4.438.392
8.393
7438,394
4.438.395
4.438.396
4.438,403
4.438.397
4.438.398
4,438,399
4.438.400
4.438.401
4.438.402
1.LASS I9n
CLASS 328
1 S 4.437,698
181 4,437.699
63
152
4.438.404
4.438.405
CLASS 297
167
4.438.406
45
4,437.700
CLASS 329
85
284
4,437,701
4.437.702
50
4.438,407
362
4,437.703
CLASS 330
440
4.437.704
51
4,438,408
CLASS 298
107
4,438,409
1 R 4.437.705
278
289
4,438.410
4.438.411
CLASS 299
CLASS 331
7
81
4.437.706
4,437,707
2
4.438.412
4,437,708
CLASS 332
CLASS 307
16 R
4.438.413
146
4,438,344
CLASS 333
270
4.438,345
28 T
4.438.414
Ml
4,438.346
81 A
4,438,415
308
4.438,347
160
4.438.416
JIO
4,438,348
193
4.438,417
J62
4,438,349
440
4.438,350
CLASS 335
450
4,438,351
255
4.438.418
475
4,438,352
261
4.438.419
477
4,438,353
275
4.438,420
493
511
4,438,354
4,438,355
CLASS 336
571
4.438.356
65
4,438,421
597
4,438.357
CLASS 339
CLASS 308
4
4,437,716
219
4,437,709
17 LC 4.437.717
CLASS 310
61 M
91 R
4,437,718
4,437,719
51
4,438,358
95 D
4.437.720
68 R
4.438.359
97 P
4,437,721
83
4,438,360
4,437,722
90
4.438,361
99R
4,437,723
152
4,438,362
143 R
4,437,724
328
4,438,363
156 R
4,437.725
252 P
CLASS 340
52 F
52 H
.12 R
33
M
347 DD
321
339
347
663
823.35
823.44
823.51
4.438.422
4.438.424
4.438,423
4.438,425
4.438,426
4.438,427
4.438,428
4,438,429
4.438.430
4,438.431
4.438.432
4.438.433
4,438.434
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
CLASS 343
73 4,438.435
16 M 4,438.436
449 4.438.439
431 4,438,438
'TO 4.438.437
CLASS 346
73 4.438.440
140 R 4,438.441
133.1 4,438.442
4.438.443
133 4.438.444
CLASS 350
96.20 4.437.728
•6.23 4.437,729
•6.3 4.437.727
237 4.437.730
■MO 4.437.731
427 4.437.732
4.437.733
434 4.437.734
431 4.437.735
531 4.437.736
CLASS 351
237 4.437.737
CLASS 353
26 R 4.437.738
27 R 4.437.739
CLASS 354
21 4.437.742
117 4.437.745
126 4,437.747
132 4.437.748
133 4,437,750
214 4,437.749
4.437.751
289 4,437,7^2
293 4,437.753
402 4,437,743
442 4.437.744
476 4.437.740
479 4.437.741
4.437.746
CLASS 355
3 TR 4.437.754
4,437,726 66 4,438,466
77 4,438,467
92 4.438,468
109 4.438.469
113 4,438,470
123 4.438.471
CLASS 361
13 4.438,472
1« 4,438,473
58 4.438.474
82 4.438.475
96 4,438,476
119 4.438.477
152 4.438.478
213 4,438,479
278 4.438,480
433 4,438,481
CLASS 362
103 4,438,482
183 4.438,483
267 4,438.484
268 Bl 4,338,654
CLASS 363
21 4,438.483
56 4,438.486
129 4,438.487
CLASS 364
200 4.438.488
4.438,489
4,438,490
4,438.491
4,438.492
4.438.493
4.438.494
414 4.438,495
431.05 4,438,496
4.438,497
483 4.438,498
501 4,438,499
567 4,438,500
717 4.438.501
718 4.438.502
721 4.438.503
724 4,438.504
900 4,438,505
4.438,506
4.438.507
CLASS 365
122 4.438.508
CLASS 366
264 4,437,765
287 4.437,766
4.437,767
CLASS 367
156 4,438,509
PI 55
92
124
142
154.2
208
642
CLASS 384
4,437,774
CLASS 400
4.437,775
4.437,776
4,437,777
4,437,778
4.437,779
4,437,780
CLASS 424
10
14 R
15
41
91
133
4.437.755
4.437.756
4.437.757
4.437,758
4.437,759
4.437,760
CLASS 356
44 4.437,761
326 4.437,762
4,437,763
CLASS 357
14 4,438,445
17 4,438,446
19 4,438.447
23 4.438.448
41 4.438.449
68 4.438.430
CLASS 358
■ 1 4,438,451
13 4,438,452
31 4,438.454
4«- 4,437,764
4,438,455
n 4,438,453
141 4,438.456
213 4.438.457
2M 4.438.458
251 4.438.459
2M 4.438.460
302 4.438.461
CLASS 360
2 4.438,462
102 4.438.463
13 4.438,464
Ji 4,438.465
88
204
294
271
CLASS 368
4.437.768
4.437.769
4,437.770
CLASS 369
4.438.510
CLASS 370
19 4.438,511
CLASS 371
60 M38.512
CLASS 372
2 4,438.513
64 4,43H,SI4
99 4,438,517
CLASS 373
39 4,438.518
88 4.438.515
97 4,438.516
CLASS 374
39 4.437.771
117 4,437,773
129 4,437,772
CLASS 375
4,438,519
4,438,520
4,438,521
4.438.522
4,438,523
4,438,524
CLASS 381
4,438,525
4,438,526
4.438.527
I
4
16
27
30
80
63
73
107
CLASS 402
8 4.437,781
CLASS 403
13 4,437,782
27 4,437,783
408 4,437,784
CLASS 404
4,437.785
CLASS 408
4,437.786
4.437,788
4,437,789
4,437,790
4.437.791
4,437.792
4,437,793
4,437,794
4.437,795
CLASS 406
4,437,796
4,437,797
4.437,798
4,437,799
CLASS 407
4,437,800
CLASS 408
4,437,802
64
24
146
156
186
195
198
212
224
259
25
110
119
198
119
197
7
21
28
50
59
61
70
81
89
93
104
114
130
177
180
CLASS 409
218 4,437,803
232 4,437,801
CLASS 411
4,437,804
4,437,805
59
361
CLASS 414
307 4,437,806
620 4,437.807
667 4,437.808
CLASS 415
41 4.437,809
115 4,437.810
CLASS 417
8 4.437,811
53 4.437,812
4.437.813
351 4,437,814
418 4,437,815
465 4.437.816
507 4.437.817
CLASS 418
9 4,437,818
26 4,437,819
55 4,437.820
104 4.437,821
122 4.437,822
219 4,437,823
CLASS 420
435 4,438,066
CLASS 422
36 4,438,067
61 4,438,068
62 4,438,069
70 4,438,070
109 4,438.071
133 4.438,072
135 4,438.073
4.438.074
189 4,438,075
183
217
244
246
248.51
250
251
256
258
260
263
269
270
272
273 N
273 P
273 R
274
278
285
300
304
309
319
330
84
131 I
145
182
378 S
458
92
297
448
570
579
603
625
4,438.090
4,438,09!
4,438,139
4,438,093
4,438,094
4,438,140
4.438,095
4.438.096
4,438,097
4,438,098
4,438,099
4,438,100
4,438,101
4,438,102
4,438,103
4,438,104
4,438.105
4,438,106
4,438,107
4.438.109
4.438.108
4.438.110
4.438,112
4.431.111
4,438,113
4.438.114
4,438,141
4,438,115
4,438,116
4,438,117
4,438.118
4.438.119
4.438,120
4,438,121
4,438.142
4,438,122
4,438,125
4,438,123
4,438,124
4,438,126
4,438,127
4,438,128
4,438,092
4,438,129
4,438,130
4.438.131
4.438.132
4.438.133
4,438.134
4,438,135
4,438,143
4,438,136
4,438,144
4,438,137
4,438.138
CLASS 435
4.437.787
4.437.824
4.437.825
4,437,826
4.437.827
4.437.828
CLASS 4M
Bl 3.808,340
4.438.145
4.438.146
4.438.147
4.438.148
4.438.149
- 4.438.150
CLASS 427
36
37
39
49
57
93
101
162
214
215
318
4.438.151
4.438.152
4.438.153
4.438.154
4.438.155
4,438,156
4.438.157
4.438.158
4.438,159
4.438.160
4.438.161
4.438.162
407
475.8
571
91
111
181
250
53
81
128
280
281
324
329
303
566
4,438.179
4,438,180
4,438.181
CLASS 429
4,438.182
4,438,183
4,438,184
4,438,183
CLASS 430
4,438,186
4,438,187
4,438,188
4,438,189
4,438.190
4,438.191
4,438,192
4,438,193
4,438,194
4,438,195
CLASS 428
CLASS 423
7
21.5
30
87
112
235
266
300
387
419 P
448
450
466
624
4,438,077
4,438,078
4.438,076
4.438,079
4.438,080
4,438,082
4,438,083
4,438.081
4.438.084
4.438.085
4.438.086
4,438.087
4.438.088
4.438,089
35
38
113
138
193
196
207
215
220
221
247
289
315.5
349
355
4.438.163
4.438.164
4.438.165
4,438.166
4.438.167
4.438,168
4,438,169
4,438,170
4.438.171
4.438.172
4.438.173
4.438.174
4.438.178
4.438.175
4.438,176
4.438.177
CLASS 431
21 4,437,829
34 4,437,830
177 4,437,831
304 4,437,832
329 4,437,833
a.ASS 432
14 4,437,834
103 4.437,835
CLASS 433
199 4,437,836
CLASS 434
178 4,437,837
363 4,437,838
417 4,437,8.19
CLASS 435
96 4,438,196
119 4,438,197
178 4.438,198
190 4,438,199
193 4,438,200
228 4,438,201
CLASS 436
4,438,202
4,438,203
4,438,204
4,438,205
4,438.206
4,438,208
4,438,209
4,438,207
CLASS 440
4,437,840
4,437,841
CLASS 441
4,437,842
4,437,843
CLASS 448
4,437,844
4,437.845
8
60
67
71
130
542
543
27
42
65
96
5
39
CLASS 455
■ 82 4,438,528
190 4,438,529
278 4,438,530
CLASS 464
36 4,437,846
74 4,437,847
CLASS 474
82 4,437,848
256 4,437,849
CLASS 493
89 4,437,850
124 4,437,851
216 4,437,852
302 4,437,853
353 4,437,854
424 4,437,855
CLASS 501
4 4.438.210
65 4.438.211
73 4.438.212
92 4,438,213
136 4,438,214
CLASS 502
71 4,438,215
101 4,438,216
169 4,438.019
205 4.438.217
220 4.438.218
333 4.438.219
341
55
60
92
146
172
175
189-
33
109
131
161
272
299
378
700
54.1
165
183
240
420
62
125
202
249
286
298
4.438.021
CLASS 321
4.438.220
4,438,221
4,438.222
4.438.223
4,438.224
4,438,225
4.438.226
Bl 3,379,540
CLASS 524
4.438.227
4.438.228
4,438,229
4.438,230
4,438.231
4,438,232
4.438.23.^
4,438,234
4,438,235
CLASS S2S
4,438.239
4.438.236
4,438,237
4,438.238
4,438,240
4,438,241
CLASS 526
4.438,242
4.438,243
4,438.244
4,438,247
4,438.245
4,438.246
CLASS 328
57 4,438.248
61 4.438,249
66 4,438,250
73 4,438,251
75 4,438,252
86 4,438.253
89 4,438,254
176 4,438,253
188 4.438.256
347 4,438,257
361 4,438.258
388 4,438,259
CLASS S36
13.9 4,438,260
21 4,438,261
43 4.438.262
56 4.438,263
91 4,438,264
CLASS 544
29 4.438.265
309 4,438,267
315 4,438,268
350 4.438.266
CLASS 546
9 4,438,269
243 4.438,270
294 4.438.271
a.ASS 548
308 4,438,272
a.ASS 549
303 4,438.273
387 4,438,274
434 4,438.275
CLASS 560
13 4.438.276
119 4,438,277
205 4,438.278
CLASS 562
416 4.438.279
457 4,438.280
CLASS 564
477 4,438,281
CLASS 568
4,4)8,282
4.438,283
4.438.284
4,438,286
4,438,283
4,438,287
58
403
730
840
861
909
CLASS 588
379 4,438,288
827 4,438,289
CLASS 604
29 4,437,856
33 4,437,837
90 4.437,858
131 4,437.859
385 4,437.860
PI 56
CLASSIFICATION OF DESIGNS
D2-
376
r3.0S4
273.070
358
273.086
209
273.102
7
273.118
M
273,134
273,135
273.136
D3—
6
273.0SS
201
273.071
382
273.087
D13-
12
r3,l03
13
273,119
<0
40
71
273.057
254
273.072
273.073
395
400
273.088
273,089
D14-
24
6
273.104
273,105
15
273.130
273,121
025-
80
D4—
23.1
273.0SS
D7— 77
273.074
273.090
30
273.106
19
273,122
273,137
273.059
106
273.075
499
273.091
53
273,107
D20—
6
273.123
D26—
23
273,138
O*—
6
273.060
395
273.076
D9-
389
273.092
273.108
D21—
34
273.124
61
273,139
49
273.061
D»- 10
273.077
273.093
58
273.109
IKt
273,125
9J
273.140
95
273.062
31
273.078
DIO-
71
273,094
273.110
734
273.126
D28—
13
273,141
96
273.063
62
273.0T9
109
273,095
101
273.111
216
273,127
20
273,142
273.064
71
273.080
Dll-
175
273,096
103
273.112
D23—
71
273,128
57
273,143
132
273.065
93
273.081
D12-
36
273.097
116
273.113
D24-
8
273.129
273,144
179
273.066
91
273.082
90
273.098
D15-
88
273.114
26
273.130
D29-
8
273.145
IM
273.067
101
273.083
105
273.099
148
273,115
273,131
D32-
31
273.146
lU
273.068
353
273.084
111
273.100
273.116
41
273,132
D34—
6
273,147
192
273.069
354
273,085
174
273,101
D18-
1
273,117
54
273.133
21
273,148
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS
P.-
6S
5J07
iJM
5,209
I
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX
OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
(U.S. Sutes. Territories and Armed Forces, the Commonwedth of Puerto Rico, and the Owal Zone)
AUbama i
Alaska 2
American Samoa 3
Arizona 4
Arkansas 5
California 6
Canal Zone 7
Colorado g
Connecticut 9
Delaware 10
District of Columbia 1 1
Florida 12
Georgia 13
Guam 14
Hawaii 15
Idaho 16
Illinois 17
Indiana ig
Iowa 19
Kansas 20
(Fint number in lilting denotes location
as to inventor name, location, etc.)
Kentucky 2I
Louisiana , 22
Maine 23
Maryland 24
Massachusetts 25
Michigan 26
Minnesota 27
Missittippi 28
Missouri 29
Montana 30
Nebraska 31
Nevada 32
New Hampshire 33
New Jersey 34
New Mexico 35
New York 35
North Carolina 37
North DakoU 3g
Ohio 39
Oklahoma 40
Oregon 41
Pennsylvania 42
Puerto Rico 43
Rhode Island 44
South Carolina 43
South Dakou 46
Tennessee 47
Texas 4g
Utah 49
Vermont 50
Virginia 51
Virgin Islands 32
Washington 33
West Virginia 34
Wisconsin 33
Wyoming 36
U.S. Air Force 37
U.S. Army 3g
U.S. Navy 39
•ccording to above key. Refer to patent number in body of the Official Oaiette to obtain details
PATENTS
4.437.242
4,438,239
4.437.316
4,438.331
4,437.501
4,438,343
4,437,795
4,438,346
4,437,195
4.438.356
4.437.351
4.438.364
4,437,630
4.438.448
4.437.697
4.438,461
4,437,896
4,438,466
4,438,413
4,438.485
4,438.436
4.438.491
4.437,193
4,438.492
4.437.194
4.438.511
4.437,197
4,438,513
4.4374I8
■ : 4,437461
4.437.234
4,437,519
4,437.266
4.437,520
4.437J72
4,437,659
4.437^78
4,437,705
4.437 J86
3,56a387
4,437,315
9 : 4,437J37
4,437.353
4.437.375
4,437.366
4.437,485
4,437,413
4,437.508
4,437,479
4.437.573
4,437,488
4.437.588
4,437,309
4.437.760
4,437,515
4.437.802
4,437,518
4.437.832
4,437,524
4,437.859
4,437,593
4.437,979
4,437,599
4,438.013
4,437,616
4,438.171
4,437,623
4.438.253
4,437,642
4.438,350
4,437,654
4,438.514
4,437,680
01 : 4,437,344
4,437,685
4,437,451
4,437,692
4,437,961
4,437,704
04 : 4.437,235
4.437,723
4,437,251
4,437.812
4.438.337
4,437.841
4.438.338
4,437,842
09 : 4,438.513
4,437,854
06 : 4.437.226
4,437.858
4.437 J43
4,437,874
4,437430
4.437.980
4,437.417
4,437,990
4.437.433
4,437,995
4.437.458
4,438,032
4.437,483
4,438.090
4,437.905
4,438,237
4,437.939
08
09
10
11
13
4,437,549
4.437.568
4.437.595
4.437.997
4,437.738
4,437,753
4,437,762
4,437,763
4,437.828
4,438,022
4,438,070
4,438.156
4.438,159
4.438.165
4.438.181
4.438,308
4.438473
4.438.342
4.438.352
4.438.354
4.438.411
4.438.427
4.438.482
4.437.360
4.437.464
4,437.579
4.437.661
4.438.182
4.438.442
4.437,332
4,437,461
4,437,467
4,437,943
4,438471
4,438.344
4,437,489
4,437,710
4.437.893
4.437.991
4.438,117
4,438,120
4,438428
4.437.238
4,437493
4.437.337
4.437.434
4.437.466
4,437,474
4.437,481
4.437479
4.437.698
4.437,717
4,437,718
13
19
17
4.437.730
4.437.984
4,438.018
4.438.139
4.438,166
4,438461
4,438480
4,438496
4,438.348
4,438.390
4,438.433
4.437.230
4.437499
4.437.410
4,437.434
4,437.487
4.437.981
4.437.994
4,437,901
4.437.904
4.438.061
4.4374 1 8
4.437.666
4.437408
4.437474
4.437,339
4,437,381
4,437,408
4.437,419
4,437,448
4.437.493
4.437.469
4,437.473
4.437.499
4.437.998
4.437.967
4.437.973
4.437.974
4.437.697
4.437.664
4.437.690
4,437.784
4,437.786
4.437.790
4.437.801
4.437,806
4,437,837
4,437,893
4.437.994
4.437,983
4,437.989
4,437,997
4,438,069
18 I
19 :
4,438,071
4,438,096
4.438,146
4,438,190
4,438,173
4,438431
4,438,379
4.438487
4.438488
4.438499
4.438.301
4,438.304
4,438439
4.438.397
4.438.369
4,438.367
4,438.403
4.438.481
3,979.940
4,437.437
4.437,494
4,437494
4,437,693
4.437.699
4.437.774
4.437,934
4.438AM
4,438.119
4.438,196
4,438434
4.438.241
4.438.299
4,438.361
4.438.494
4.437499
4.437.349
4.437.389
4.437.399
4,437,902
4,437.633
4.437.699
4,437.816
4.437.987
4.437,368
4,437,737
33
U
39
31 :
4.438.309
4.438406
4.437,719
4,437,919
4,437,981
4,438,178
44374O6
16 :
4,437417
IU.3143S
4.437.303
4.437.379
4.437.392
4.437,404
4,437,607
4,437,668
4.437,713
4,437413
4.437.847
4,437497
4,438,098
4.438430
4,438,321
4.438.322
4.438.340
4,438.399
4,438,408
4,438,430
4,438.459
4,437,198
4.437477
4,437413
4.437469
4,437,910
4.437.944
4,437,998
4,437,689
4,437.761
4.437,809
4,437,894
4,437,929
4,437,935
4.437,946
4,437,966
4,438,144
4,438,170
4,438,300
4,438494
4,438.330
4,438480
4,438,381
4.438,397
4.438.410
4,438.493
4,438,483
4.438.490
4.438.493
4.438.901
4,438,909
4,438,930
4,437440
PI 57
PI 58
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
4.437.235
33 : 4,437,825
4.437.267
4,438,263
4.437,273
34 : Re.31.539
. 4,437,317
4,437,213
4,437,333
4.437041
4,437.335
4.437.256
4.437,338
4.437.420
4.437.340
4,437.421
4,437,347
, 4.437.430
4.437,374
4.437.455
4,437,396
4.437.463
4.437,411
4.437.476
4.437.452
4.437.497
4.437,535
4.437.513
4,437.624
4,437.577
4,437,648
4.437.641
4,437.667
4,437.677
4,437,696
4.437,764
4.437,716
4,437,789
4.437,739
4.437,793
4,437,916
4,437,822
4,438,049
4,437,833
4.438,092
4,437,840
4,438.130
4,437,900
4,438,179
4.437,938
4,438,192
4,437.939
4,438,226
4.437,948
4,438,235
4,437.972
4,438,242
4.437.973
4.438,248
4,437,975
4,438.259
4,437,976
4.438,274
4.437.978
4,438.284
4.438.010
4,438,418
4.438.017
4,438,484
4.438,029
4,438,497
4,438.030
27 :
4.437,205
4,438.037
4.437,257
4.438.038
4,437,270
4.438.047
4,437.271
4.438,048
4,437,283
4.438.080
4,437.468
4,438.082
4,437.475
4.438.089
4.437,498
4.438.148
4,437,534
4,438,185
4,437.569
4,438.207
4,437,570
4,438.215
4.437,613
4,438,247
4,437,637
4.438.290
4.437.671
4,438.298
4,437,726
4.438.300
4.437,803
4.438.400
4,438,225
4.438.446
4,438,526
4.438.447
28 :
4,437,287
4.438.450
4,437,709
4.438,452
29 :
4,437,371
4.438,479
4,437,537
4,438.504
4,437,6*7
4.438,530
4,437,798
35 : 4,437,456
4,437,799
4.437,958
4,437,814
4,438,183
4.437,875
4,438,269
4,437,876
4,438,394
4,438,003
4,438,395
4,438,034
36 : Re.31,540
- 4,438,209
4,437,264
4,438.359
4.437.265
4.438.527
4.437.279
31 :
4.437,361
4.437.282
4.437.676
4.437,291
4.438.370
4,437,322
32 :
4,437.364
4,437,400
4.437.431
4,437.414
37
4,437,449
4,437,459
4,437,462
4,437,507
4.437.545
4.437.346
4.437.576
4.437.586
4,437,590
4.437.634
4.437.636
4,437.662
4.437.686
4.437.698
4.437.702
4,437.724
4.437.745
4.437.785
4.437,818
4.437.849
4.437.865
4,437.870
4.437.897
4.437.922
4.437.963
4,437,988
4.438.005
4,438.014
4,438,026
4.438.039
4.438.054
4.438.066
4.438.078
4,438.102
4,438,124
4.438,153
4,438,158
4,438,175
4.438,176
4,438,202
4,438,210
4,438.278
4,438,291
4.438,302
4,438.314
4,438,339
4,438,362
4,438,376
4.438,379
4,438,387
4,438,396
4.438.415
4,438.416
4,438,419
4,438,421
4,438,437
4,438,457
4,438,477
4,438,486
4,438.519
4.266.731
4.338.654
4.437.395
4.437.426
4.437.496
4,437.580
4.437,605
4.437,617
4.437.701
4.437,863
4,437,999
4.438.110
4.438.138
39
40
4.438.142
4.438.499
4.438.169
41 : 4.437.280
4.438.267
4.437.807
4.438.295
4.437.994
4,438.434
4.438.191
4.438.500
4.438.404
4.437.230
4.438.494
4.437.231
4.438.498
4.437.249
42 : 4.437,201
4.437.307
4.437.223
4.437.376
4,437,227
4,437,388
4,437,229
4.437,389
4,437.236
4,437.447
4.437.246
4.437.530
4,437,253
4.437.542
4,437,284
4,437,566
4.437,312
4,437,589
4,437,362
4.437.596
4,437,383
4,437.601
4,437,429
4,437.602
4,437,491
4.437.614
4,437,559
4.437.619
4.437.604
4,437.625
4,437,628
4.437.639
. 4,437,632
4,437,649
4,437.650
4,437,675
4,437,663
49
4,437,688
4,437,712
4,437,691
4.437.722
4.437.767
4.437,725
30
4.437.866
4,437,736
31
4,437,871
4,437,772
4.437,872
4,437,838
4.437.873
4,437,867
4.437.902
4,437,884
4.437.915
4,437,899
4.437.923
4,437,952
4.437.927
4,437,968
4.437.928
4,437,982
4.437.929
4,438.020
4.437.930
4.438,031
4.437.931
4,438,056
4.437.932
4,438,123
33
4.437.957
4,438,129
4.437.962
4,438,134
4.438.006
4.438.135
4,438,007
4,438,251
4,438,024
4,438.266
4,438,059
4.438.306
4,438,062
4.438,323
4,438.147
4.438.369
4,438,157
4.438.382
4,438,162
4,438,386
4,438,216
4.438.473
4,438,224
4.438,474
4.438,246
4,438,475
55
4,438.289
4.438.476
4,438,310
4,438,517
4.438.351
4.438.521
4.438.391
44 : 4.437.986
4.438.402
45 : 4.437,293
4,438.426
4.437.301
4,438,428
4,437.319
4.438.460
4.437.369
4,438.518
4,437,955
4,437,329
47 : 4,437,523
4,437.492
4,437,829
4,437,794
4,437,945
4.437.830
4,437,956
4.437.941
48 : 4.437.363
4.437.977
4.437.436
4,438,087
4.437.512
4.438.161
4.437.514
4.437.516
4.437.517
4.437.321
4.437.522
4.437.583
4.437,643
4,437,660
4,437,669
4,437,674
4,437,779
4.437,791
4,437,805
4,437,839
4.437.855
4,438,002
4,438.040
4.438,045
4.438.074
4,438.077
4,438,088
4,438,219
4,438.272
4.438,281
4.438.292
4,438,320
4,438,388
4,437,672
4,437,681
4.438,223
4,437,384
4,437.207
4.437.471
4.437.511
4.437.541
4.437.613
4.437.670
4.437.844
4,437.937
4.438.203
4.438.383
4,438.439
4.438.472
4.437.326
4.437.387
4.437.433
4,437.480
4.437.323
4.437,627
4,437.629
4.437,714
4,437,748
4,437,924
4,438,104
4,438,198
3,788,284
4,437,412
4,437,419
4,437,457
4,437,529
4,437,608
4,437,618
4,437,646
4,437,687
4,437,694
4.437,711
4,437,860
4,437,868
4,437,917
4,438,009
4,438,072
4,438,167
4,438,233
4,438,493
DESIGN PATENTS
03 :
06 :
273.139
273.035
273.077
273.079
273.080
273.086
273,136
18 :
273.134
273.145
273.071
26 :
273,058
273,039
273,067
34 :
273.135
273.146
273.110
40 :
42 :
273,083
273.101
273.070
273.094
273,137
273,090
273.072
273,132
273.0S4
273.121
13 : 273,054
273,115
273.073
36 :
273,081
273.100
273.128
273,061
273,127
273.074
37 :
273.082
273.133
273.148
273,065
19 :
273.056
273.138
273,088
43 :
273.116
09 :
273.062
273,068
21 :
273,096
27 :
273.087
39 :
273,069
47 :
• 273,057
273.130
17 : 273.113
23 :
273,066
273.147
273,092
48 :
273,119
273.131
273.126
273,075
29 :
273.124
273,097
273.123
12 :
273.060
273.129
273,112
32 :
273.095
273,103
273.142
19
5.209
PLANT PATENTS
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : O— 1984
CHANGE OF ADDRESS FORM
NAME— FIRST. LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
STREET ADDRESS
CITr
STATE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
Mail this form to: NEW ADDRESS
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office SSOM
Washington, D.C. 20402
;or) COUNTRY
Attach last subscription
label here.
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
tUISCRIPTION ORDER FORM
ENTER MY SUBSCRIPTION TO:
• $
Oomtttic; <8 $
Fortign.
NAME— riRST, LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
ii^
I STATE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
ZIP CODE
(or) COUNTRY
t I
Q Raminanca Enelotad (Maka
chacht payabia to Suparin-
tandant of Oecumantt)
□ Charga to my Dtpealt
Account No
MAIL ORDER rORM TO:
Suparintandant of Documantt
Covarnmant Printing Offiea
Waahington, D.C. 20402
\
/
Route to:
Vol. 1040 Number 4
OFFICIAL
GAZETTE
Of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
PATENTS
March 27, 1984
V
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE
Malcolm Baldnge, SecTQ\3ry
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
Gerald J. Mossinghoff, Commissioner
DEPARTMENT
OF COMMERCE
3 \
■■■■Mi
Patent
and
Trademark
Office
PMRI IQMPn \AJcci/
PUBLISHED WEEKLY BY AUTHORITY OF CONGRESS
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
March 27, 1984 Volume 1040 Number 4
CONTENTS
Page
Patent and Trademark Office Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1040 OG 32
Reissue Applications Filed 1040 OG 32
Requests for Reexaminations Filed 1040 OG 32
Recordation of Trade Name 1040 OG 32
Errata |040 OG 32
PTO Status 1040 OG 34
Telephone and LiKution Directory 1040 OG 35
Patent Certificates of Correction 1040 OG 49
Disclaimers 1040 OG 49
Dedication 1040 OG 49
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries 1040 OG 50
Condition of Patent Applications , 1040 OG 51
Reexaminations 1391
Reissue Patents Granted (31,541) 1395
Plant Patents Granted (5,210) 1397
Patents Granted
Generil and Mechanical (4,438,531) 1399
Chemical (4,439,201) 1627
Electrical (4,439,630) 1745
Design Patents Granted (273,149) 1829
Index of Patentees PI l
Indices of Reissue, Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees PI 4K
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues and Reexaminations) PI 53
Designs and Plants PI 56
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors
Patents (Including Reissues) PI 57
Designs and Plants PI 58
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form Back Page
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Oovemment
Printing OfTice, Washington, DC, 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), iuued weekly.
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark OfHce at $1.00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color, S8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address
orders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks. Washington, D.C., 20231.
Printing authorized by Section 1 l(a)3 of Title 33, U.S. Code P.TO.
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent Cooperation Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
f.° mS*^"^ '.'I* "°^jf* appearing in the Official Gazette
at 1037 O.G. 12 on Dec. 13, 1983. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent Office as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United States Receiving Office
see the notice appearing in the OJTicial Gazette at 1022
O.G. 52 on Sept. 28, 1982.
Domestic PCT fees were increased on Oct. 1, 1982 by
?m1'^r^'i*",«,^ ^° ^^ ^^^ ^-^^ that was published at
1021 OG. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. International PCT fees
were changed by the PCT Assembly effective Jan. 1,
IoST ^ ^*^^*^ announced at 1037 O.G. 12 on Dec. 13,
1983. The search fee for the European Patent Office was
changed as of Feb. 14. 1984 and was announced at 1039
O.G. 142 on Feb. 21, 1984.
The current schedule of PCT fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee j 125.00
Search fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
• Prior corresponding U.S. national
application filed 250 00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
• All cases ^20.00
International Fees
Basic fee (first 30 pages) 295 00
Basic Supplemental fee (for each
page over 30) ^qq
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) 70.00
I in ,Q«>. GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Jan. ju, 1^84. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
REISSUE APPLICATIONS nLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
,«f'^'°?;.Sf- ^-N '♦^^'273' Filed May 19, 1983. CI.
358/83. ROW GRABBING SYSTEM, Robert H.
Nagel, et al.. Owner of Record: IDR. Inc., a corp. of
N.Y.. Mtorney or Agent: Lawrence G. Kurland, et al.,
Ex. Gp.: 233
mf'?*?,''??/®' ?^,>^-^- ^^^'^26, Filed Dec. 30, 1983, CI.
101/93.05, APPARATUS FOR PRINTING ON
TRANSPARENCY SLIDES, Johannes Lorsch, Owner
of Record: Inventor. Attorney or Agent: Donald A
Kettlestnngs. Ex. Gp.: 337
434,085, Re. S.N. 556,796, Filed Dec. 1, 1983 CI
M^T^ioS^F^i^ ^l^L^NG M^HINE AND
METHOD, Edward E. Ross, Owner of Record: Del
v:°VL^2!!P' ^" Francisco. Calif. Attorney or Agent:
Paul D. Flehr, et al.. Ex. Gp.: 171 *
4,308,919, Re. S.N. 567.900. Filed Jan. 3, 1984 CI
172/240. HINGE-TYPE OFFSET WHEEL HAR-
ROW. Samuel J. Coughran, Jr.. Owner of Record:
Home Industries, Inc., Cedartown. Co.. Attorney or
Agent: George M. Hopkins. Ex. Gp.: 334
'^At'f?}^\?Sj^ ^"'295. Filed Nov. 25. 1983. CI.
346/135.1. METALIZED RECORDING CARRIER
1040 OG 32 ,
^S^^^^^^^^'NG INSTRUMENTS. AND METH-
OD OF ITS MANUFACTURE. Richard Hohn et a"
Owner of Record: Robert Bosch, GmbH., Stuttgart. Ger-
many^ Attorney or Agent: Stephen H. Frishauf. et al..
ex. up.: 211
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requeste and related papers may be obtained by paying the
fee therefor esublished in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR 1.248(aX5) and 1.525(b)). ^
No publications this issue.
Department of the Treasury
United States Customs Senrice
(T.D. 84-38)
19 CFR Part 133
Recordation of Trade Name: Zahnradfabrik Friedrich-
shafen, AG.
Agency: Customs Service, Department of the Treasury
Action: Notice of Recordation
Summary: On Oct. 27. 1983. a notice of application for
^,«./*^°™*''°" ""***'■ section 42 of the Act of July 5.
1946, as amended (15 U.S.C. 1124), of the trade name
"ZAHNRADFABRIK FRIEDRICHSHAFEN io "
was published in the Federal Register (48 FR 49723)
The notice advised that before final action was taken 011
the application, consideration would be given to any rel-
evant data, views, or arguments submitted in opposition
!o(»*i K^®^^'"**"^'®" *"^ received not later than Dec. 27,
1983. No responses were received in opposition to the
notice.
Accordingly, as provided in section 133.14, Customs
Regulations (19 CFR 133.14), the name "ZAHNRAD-
FABRIK FRIEDRICHSHAFEN, AG." is reaJrded m
the trade named used by Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen,
AG., a corporation organized under the laws of West
Germany, located at D-7990 Friedrichshafen 1, West
Germany. The trade name is used in connection with
the following merchandise manufactured and distributed
throughout the world: gear units for machines; machine
parts; brake testing stands; testing instruments and parts
for land vehicles.
Date: Feb. 6, 1984
For Furtiier Information Contact: Harriet Lane, Entry.
Licensing and Restricted Merchandise Branch. U.S.
Customs Service. 1301 Constitution Avenue, N.W..
Washington. D.C. 20229 (202-566-5765).
I „ 100. DONALD W. LEWIS.
Jan. 31. 1984. Director, Entry Procedures
and Penalties Division.
Errata
'All reference to Patent No. D270816 to William A.
Hays, et al.. of Colo, for 'HOUSING FOR OPTI-
mi/niSSSP'^'^ DISTANCE MEASURING
iiNiTKUMENT appearing in the Official Gazette of
March 27, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG 33
Oct. 4, 1983 should be deleted since no patent was
granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,378,811 to Ronald
Levitan of Transvaal, South Africa for 'SURGICAL
DEVICE' appearing in the Official Gazette of Apr.
5, 1983 should be deleted since no patent was
granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4.379,180 to John E.
Baglin, et al.. of N.Y. for 'METHODS FOR MAK-
ING GRADED INDEX ANTIREFLECTIVE
SURFACES' appearing in the Official Gazette of
Apr. 5, 1983 should be deleted since no patent was
granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,385.051 to Yoshikazu
Oka, et al., of Japan for 'BICYCLE COMPOUNDS.
THEIR PRODUCTION AND USE' appearing in
the Official Gazette of May 24. 1983 should be de-
leted since on patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,391,333 to George I.
BoyadjiefT of Calif for 'WELL CASING JACK
MECHANISM' appearing in the Official Gazette of
July 5, 1983 should be deleted since no patent was
granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,392,456 to Robert E. Da-
vis of 111. for 'PREVENTION OF FOULING IN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES AND
THEIR EXHAUST SYSTEMS AND IMPROVED
GASOLINE COMPOSITIONS' appearing in the
Official Gazette of July 12, 1983 should be deleted
since no patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4.394,979 to Bertil Brandt
of Sweden for 'WEAR AND ABRASION RESIS-
TANT WALL STRUCTURE, PARTICULARLY
FOR MILLS FOR GRINDING A CHARGE
COMPRISING MAGNETIC MATERIAL' appear-
ing in the Official Gazette of July 26, 1983 should be
deleted since no patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,402,520 to Gerd Ziegler
of Germany for 'ROLLER SKATE OR THE LIKE
WITH BRAKE ATTACHMENT' appearing in the
Official Gazette of Sept. 6, 1983 should be deleted
since no patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,403,422 to Norman
Sperling, et al., of Mass. for 'STAR FINDER' ap-
pearing in the Official Gazette of Sept. 13, 1983
should be deleted since no patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,404,976 to Lawrence L.
Stewart, Jr. of Va. for 'LOW DELIVERY CIGA-
RETTE' appearing in the Official Gazette of Sept.
20, 1983 should be deleted since no patent was
granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,408,858 to James K. Lee
of N.Y. for 'ELECTROMAGNETIC ACTUATOR
HAVING A COMPLIANT ARMATURE' appear-
ing in the Official Gazette of Oct. 11, 1983 should be
deleted since no patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,409,546 to Cari Shulman
of N.J. for 'MERCURY PROBE AND METHOD'
appearing in the Official Gazette of Oct. 11. 1983
should tkc deleted since no patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4.409,719 to Rudolf R. M.
Muller of Germany for 'METHOD OF PIERCING
AND RIVETING FASTENER TO PANEL' ap-
pearing in the Official Gazette of Oct. 18, 1983
should be deleted since no patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,409,759 to Shinji Sekiya,
et al., of Japan for 'WAFER ATTRACTING AND
FIXING DEVICE* appearing in the Official Gazette
of Oct. 18, 1983 should be deleted since no patent
was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,410,039 to Jack J.
Dewald of La. for 'UNITIZED WELL TESTING
APPARATUS FOR USE IN HOSTILE ENVI-
RONMENTS' appearing in the Official Gazette of
Oct. 18, 1983, should be deleted since no patent was
granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,410,092 to Toshihiko
Satake of Japan for 'AUTOMATIC CONTROL
DEVICE FOR A BOUNDARY PLATE OF A
GRAIN SEPARATOR* appearing in the Official
Gazette of Oct. 18, 1983 should be deleted since no
patent was granted."
"All refe rence to Patent No. 4,410,745 to John G. Vic-
tor of III. for 'ETHANOL EXTRACTION PRO-
CESS* appearing in the Official Gazette of Oct. 18,
1983 should be deleted since no patent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4.41 1,986 to Thomas I. Ab-
bott of NY. for 'RADIOGRAPHIC ELEMENTS
EXHIBITING REDUCED CROSSOVER* appear-
inc in the Official Gazette of Oct. 25, 1983 should be
deleted since no patent was granted.*' .
"All reference to Patent No. 4,413,053 to Thomas I. Ab-
bott of N.Y. for -RADIOGRAPHIC ELEMENTS
EXHIBITING REDUCED CROSSOVER* appear-
ing in the Official Gazette of Nov. 1, 1983 should be
dieted since no patent was granted.**
"All reference to Patent No. 4,418,212 to Marguerite S.
Chang, et al., of Md. for 'SYNTHESIS OF
DIMETHYLMETHYLENE DINITRAMINE* ap-
pearing in the Official Gazette of Nov. 29. 1983
should be deleted since no patent was granted.*'
"All reference to Patent No. 4,419,022 to Robert T. Ely
of Pa. for 'NONCONTRACT TEMPERATURE
SENSING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR
LADLE PREHEATING* appearing in the Official
Gazette of Dec. 6, 1983 should be deleted since no
patent was granted.**
"All reference to Patent No. 4,421,013 to James L.
Hansen of Neb. for 'AERATION FAN MOUNT-
ING SYSTEM' appearing in the Official Gazette of
Dec. 20, 1983 should be deleted since no patent was
granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,421,018 to Gunter G.
Pryputsch, et al., of Canada for 'FORCED CON-
VECTION OVEN' appearing in the Official Gazette
of Dec. 20, 1983 should be deleted since no patent
was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,421,907 to Lawrence R.
Schmidt of NY. for 'A METHOD FOR MAKING
POLYETHERIMIDE* appearing in the Official Ga-
zette of Dec. 20, 1983 should be deleted since no pa-
tent was granted."
"All reference to Patent No. 4,423.217 to Laurent Due,
et al., of Switzerland for 'PROCESS FOR THE
PRODUCTION OF HETEROCYLIC THIO COM-
POUNDS' appearing in the Official Gazette of Dec.
27. 1983 should be deleted since no patent was
granted."
I040CX}34
OFHCIAL GAZETTE
March 27. 1984
Status of PTO Seryjces
The following is an update of the status of PTO services for February 1984:
Senice Item
FY 1984
Performance Goal
(Calendar Days)
22
Filing Receipto:
Patents
Trademarks
Patent/Trademark Copies:
Window Coupons
Mail Coupons
Letter Orders
Date of oldest unfilled order
Certified Copies:
Trademark Registrations
Applications-As-Filed
File-Wrapper/Contents
Walk-up Certification
Trademark Search Library:
Filing Drawings
Filing Reg. Certificates
Assignments:
Patents
Trademarks
Avg. Days from Issue Fee
Payment to Issue Date
Patent Official Gazette:
In Bookstore
Mailed
Patent Grants Mailed
Patent Copies Available
Trademark Copies Available
Trademark Official Gazette:
In Bookstore
Mailed
Trademark Regs. Mailed
• Figures include mail processing and delivery time.
IMPROVEMENTS TO SERVICES
• Patent and Trademark Search Rooms — Our photo-
copier vendor has replaced all photocopiers with
twenty-six new ones.
• Telephone and Location Directory — Following is an
updated directory of current telephone and location
information by PTO organization. This repljxes the
^'rectory published in the Official Gazette of Nov.
REMINDER
• Patent and Trademark Copy Orders — When ordering
other than utility patents, it is imperative that the fol-
30
5
29
34
30
20
N/A
1
21
3
25
25
90-100 -
Issue Date
Issue Date
Issue Date
Issue Date
Issue Date
Issue Date
Issue Date
Issue Date
Actual
28
Comment
Problems due to conver-
sion to the new computer
system.
45
92% within 5 days
99% within 29 days*
99% within 34 days*
Jan. 16, 1984
10
97% within 15 days
99% within 7 days
99% within 1 day
13
3
14
13
92
On schedule
Avg. 1 day late
Avg. 1 day late
Avg. 3 days late
On schedule
Avg. 1.5 days late
Avg. 1.5 days late
Avg. 7 days late
Problems being resolved.
Due to new printing con-
tractor start-up.
lowing alpha prefix is included with the number:
T —Trademark Registration
D— Design Patent
R —Reissue Patent
PP— Plant Patent
DT— Defensive Publication
Additionally, please remember to put your name and
mailing address (or box number) on all coupons.
XA * ,oo. THERESA A. BRELSFORD,
Mar. b, 1984. Assistant Commissioner
for Administration.
March 27. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG 35
IVIephtMie and l.iK'ution Dirvcton
OFFlCi; OF THE ASSISTANT SECRETARY AND COMMISSIONER OF PATENTS AND TRADEMARKS
Assi.stant Secretary and Commissioner Gerald J. Mossinghoff rm IIEIO CP3 537-3071
Administrative Secretary Pat Schmitt rn IIEIO CP3 557-3071
Special Assistant to the Commissioner Barbara Luxenburg rm llElO CP3... 557-3071
Secretary Ruth A. Nyblod rm UEIO CP3 557-3071
Deputy Assistant Secretary and Deputy Commissioner Donald J. Quigg rm I1D27 CP3. 557-3961
Secretary Nancy D. Creel rm 11D27 CP3 557-3961
Assistant Commissioner for Patents Rene D. Tegtmeyer rm 11A13 CP3 557-3811
Secretary Marjorie D. Benjamin rm 11A13 CP3 557-3811
Assistant Commissioner for Trademarks Margaret M. Laurence rm 11C17 CP3 557-3061
Secretary Sheila G. Pellman rm 11C17 CP3 557-3061
Assistant Commissioner for Administration Theresa A. Brelsford rm 11C34 CP3... 557-2290
Secretary Debra Ginther rm 11C34 CP3 » 557-2290
Assistant Commissioner for Finance & Planning Bradford R. Huther rm 11D27 CP3. 557-1572
Secretary Vickie T. Bryant rm 11D27 CP3 557-1572
Assistant Commissioner for External Affairs Michael K. Kirk rm 11C04 CP3 557-3065
Secretary Carla Bowman rm 11C04 CP3 557-3065
OFFICE OF THE SOLICITOR
Solicitor Joseph F. Nakamura rm 12CU-16 CG2 557-A035
Secretary Mary Jo Green rm 12C08 CG2 557-4035
Deputy Solicitor Jere W. Sears rm 12C02 CG2 557-4035
Secretary Olga M. Suarez rm 12C08 CG2 557-4035
Receptionist Karla Fischer rm 12C08 CG2 557-4035
Paralegal Specialist Kathleen Clopper rm 12C12 CG2 557-4035
AssQclate and Assistant Solicitors: .
John W. Dewhirst rm 12D02 CG2 4 557-4035
Robert D. Edmonds rm 12C04 CG2 557-4035
Thomas E. Lynch rm I2B18 CG2 557-4035
Thomas P. Pavelko rm 12C06 CG2 557-4035
Harris A. Pitlick rm I2D04 CG2 557-4035
John F. Pitrelli rm I2CI0 CG2 557-4035
Fred W. Sherling rm 12BI4 CG2 557-4035
Henry W. Tarring rm 12B16 CG2 557-4035
Secretaries:
Shirley Brown rm I2D01/12C11 CG2 557-4035
Susan D. Hughes rm 12C05 CG2 557-4035
Theresa Boggs rm I2C08 CG2 557-4035
Melissa Carter rm 12C08 CGZ 557-4035
Law Library Pamela Bennett rm I2D08 CG2 557-4052
Tsa Henderson rm I2D08 CG2 557-4052
Government Employee Inventions 0. A. Neumann rm 12B12 CG2 557-4035
OFFICE OF ENROLLMENT AND DISCIPLINE
Director William Feldman rm 11E14 CP4 557-2012
Secretary Donna P. Campel rm 11D37 CP4 557-2012
Harry I. Moatz rm 11EI2 CP4 557-3337
Marian E. Ford rm 11EI4 CP4 557-1728
Patricia M. Jordan rm I1E14 CP4 557-1728
3/14/84
1040 OG 36
OmCIAL GAZETTE
March 27. 1984
BOARD OF PATENT INTERFERENCES
Members of the Board:
Chairman' Ian A. Calvert rm lOBU CG2
Secretary Wanda Banks rm lOCOl CG2 .'.*.'.*.*!.*.*.*.'." .' ^v'/nno
James R. Boler rm 10C12 CG2 li-7,n,o
Donald D. Forrer rm 10Ci6 CG2 Ill,
Ronald H. Smith rm 10C08 CG2 .......,..'. llil^^'^
Norman G. Torchin rn 10B14 CG2 .*.*.*.'.*.*.'.*.*.'.'.'.' s^TA '^
Stanley M. Urynowicz Jr. rm 10CI4 CG2 .'.'.'.'!.'.'.' .* ssTAmo
Lorraine A. Weinberger rm lOClO CG2 ll-,,^,-,
Interlocutory: 557-40)7
Michael Sofocleous rm 10C06 CG2
Robert J. Webster rm 10C04 CG2 557-4007
Service Branch and Record Information Center rm* lOCoI 'cci! .* ! SS7~Ann7
Clerk of Board Charles R. Houpe rm lOCOl A-CG2... llj Inni
Deputy Clerk of Board Nannie B. Henry rm I0C03 CG2. ..'.*.';.*.'.'.'.'.'.*.'.'.* .' 557I4007
BOARD OF APPEALS
Examiners-in-Chief :
Chairman Fred C. Mattern Jr. rm lODlO CG2
Secretary Carolyn E. Lynch rm lODlO CG2 .^7 An79
Rodney D. Bennett rm 10D04 CG2 ddz-^u/^
Richard G. Besha rm 10A07 CG2 .' .' lll'^^r.^^
Gerald H. Bjorge rm 12B04 CG2 lll';?/>t
Samuel H. Blech rn I0A02 CG2 ll-jynil
Jerry D. Craig rm 10C20 CG2 lll,nlo
Melvin Goldstein rm 10D08 CG2 Ill Anli
John Goolkasian rm 10A14 CG2 Ill, nil
Paul J. Henon rm 10C22 CG2 '.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'. s^? An a
Murray Katz rm 10A20 CG2... 557-4058
Michael J. Keenan rm I0B04 CG2 !;.'.*.*.' ." lll'^ntl
William F. Lindquist rm I0C18 CG2 .' lll,?X,
Charles N. Lovell rm 10B05 CG2 lll,nin
Fred E. McKelvey rm 12B10 CG2 lll,nl
Evelyn K. Merker rm 10D06 CG2 .'.*.*.*.*.'.*.*.* ss7~An7Q
A. Donald Messenheimer rm 10D02 CG2 .* * lll'jrli
Gordon K. Milestone rm lOAlO CG2 lll,?.Vn
Mark E. Nusbaum rm 10A04 CG2 .' ill a[
Lutrelle F. Parker rn 10A08 CG2 .* .' Q^7~/nfo
Irving R. Pellman rm 10AI6 CG2 Ill , nil
Verlin R. Pendegrass rm I0B02 CG2 Ill inf^l
Eugene C. Rzucidlo rm 10B06 CG2 lll,ntl
James A. Seidleck rm 10A18 CG2 lll,nln
Saul I. Serota rm 12B02 CG2 lli'lno
Richard A. Spencer Jr. rm iOA12 002....'.*.*.*.'.',***"-* lll,^!^
Robert F. Stahl rn 10A06 CG2 ^^7~An^7
Authur J. Steiner rm 10B03 CG2 .*.*.* ' SS7 aoqa
Brereton Sturtevant rm IOA'22 CG2 .'.*.* s^7~AnaQ
Sherman D. Winters rm 12D06 CG2 .* .* ^S7"2n?Q
Clerk of Board T. Maxine Duvall rm i 0C09'cG2 .".'.*.'.* .' SS7 !ini
Deputy Clerk Eunice Price rm 10C09 CG2 SS? Iim
Docket Section Shirley Jefferys rm i0C09 CG2 ...*.'.' .' ss7'Ain
Docket Clerk Groups 120-140-160 Donald Harris Sr. r^* lic69*CG2: .* ! .' .* ! ! .* ' 557I4 08
Docket Clerk Groups 110-210-220-230-240-250-290 Mary E. Thomas rm 10C09
Docket Clerk Groups 170-310-320-330-340-350 Mabel Neal rn 10C09 CG2?": 5571^1^6
3/14/84
March 27. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG 37
OFFICE OF QUALITY REVIEW
Director James D. Tranmell rm lOAll CP2 557-3564
Secretary Vicky Enos rm lOAlI CP2 557-3564
OFFICE OF ASSISTANT COMMISSIONER FOR PATENTS
Assistant Commissioner Rene D. Tegtmeyer rm 1IA13 CP3 557-3811
Secretary Marjorie D. Benjamin rn 1IA13 CP3 557-3811
Special Assistant R. Franklin Burnett rn 11A13 CP3 557-3054
Secretary Sherry D. Brlnkley rn 11A13 CP3 557-3054
Paralegal Specialist Nancy A. Gillen rn 11A13 CP3 557-3054
Manual of Patent Examining Procedure Editor Louis 0. Maassel rm IIA13
^P3 557-3070
Special Program Examination Unit rm 10D04 CP3 557-8384
Deputy Assistant Commissioner James E. Denny rn 1IA09 CP3 557-4279
Secretary Darla Karn rm 11A09 CP3 557-4279
Patent Programs Administrator Edward E. Kubasiewicz rm 11A09 CP3 557-4279
Petitions Examiner David L. Stewart rn 9D01 CP3 557-2621
Petitions Information rm 9D01 CP3 557-2621
Office of Patent Program and Docunentation Control
Director Richard H. Rouck rm 9D19 CP3 557-3955
Secretary Marva Lawhorn rm 11A09 CP3 557-3955
Program Analyst Carolyn Arrington rm 10B16 CP3 557-5143
Patent Training Joan Earyes rn 1240A CP6 557-2086
Paper Correlating Office JoAnn Harris rn lODlO CP3 557-5140
Margaret Seward rn lODlO CP3 557-5139
Palm Coordinator Rolf G. Hille rm 10B20 CP3 557-5146
Automation Affairs Jay P. Lucas rm 10B15 CP3 557-5142
PATENT DOCUMENTATION ORGANIZATIONS
Administrator for Documentation William S. Lawson rn 313 CM2 557-0400
Secretary Lynn W. Smith rn 313 CM2 557-0400
Data Base Adnlniistrator Philip K. Olson rm 313 CM2 557-0400
Patent Depository Library Program Manager Carole A. Phillips rm 313 CM2... 557-0400
Office of Documentation Planning & Support Director Janes W. Shores rm
313 CM2 557-0400
Secretary Ruth L. Gaskins rm 313 CM2 ;.... 557-0400
Docunentation Practice & Systems Division (Acting) Director
George A. Chadwick III rm 313 CM2 557-0400
Practices and System Analysis Staff rm 313 CM2 557-0400
Data Managment Branch (Vacant) rm 306 CM2 557-5907
Information Resources Branch Geraldine Dozier rm 308 CM2 557-5103
Patent Index rm 314 CM2 557-3951
Reclassification/File Integrity Branch Chiquita Clark (Acting) rm 348
Bldg 159 WNY 453-4000
Secretary Cynthia Carter rm 348 Bldg 159 WNY 453-4000
Technical Operations Joseph N. Green rm 300 CM2 557-5108
Preprocessing Section Cornell Boney rm 1G07 CS4 557-0173
Data Preparation and Control Section Carolyn Bush m 348 Bldg 159
WNY 453-4019
Final Processing Section 453-4005
Unit I Janice Burse rn 348 Bldg 159 WNY 453-4013
Unit II Jerry Rednond rn 348 feldg 159 WNY 453-4014
Unit III & IV Jeanette Catling rn 348 Bldg 159 WNY 453-4011
Misc Transfer PO 14 Processing Cornell Boney rm 1G07 CS4 557-0173
3/14/84
'^^38 OFFICIAL GAZETTE ^ M.rch 27. ,984
?o^fr^^^"''^°n ^"PP°" U'^it Head Delora Dlllard rm 348 Bldg 159 WNY 453-4018
Ildg 15"9 W^?'. '""'""°'' ^""'°" '"'^^^^'^ ''"^^^^ "» 348 ^^
File Integrity 'processing 453-4010
Unit I Chiquita Clark rm 348 Bldg 159 WNY A^-i /nno
Unit II Virginia Fletcher rm 348'Bldg 159 1^ i! ts^lnn^
Unit III Naomi Sorrell rm 348 Bldg if 9 WNy!^ ! .* .' .* JsS^"?^?^
New Document Processing Branch Marcia A. Smith rm 344 CM2.. 557-5? n
Preprocessing Section Inez Roberts rm 338 CM2. Ill l\\c
Final Processing Section Duane K. Davis rm 340 CM2 .*.'.*.'.'.' .' SS7 s a
w!!vi T T^"^ ^"'^°" -^^^^^^ Christian rm 344 CM2 ;::; 557Z5 2
Weekly Issue Section Natalie Jackson rm 300 CM2 ....!...*.*.* 557-5117
Chemical Classification Group Director Delmar Metheny rm 902 CM2.... .„ ,«,.
Secretary Sandra Crawford rm 902 CM2.... i.i'll
Unit I Donald J. Hoffman rm 933 CM2 557-3814
Unit II Leslie Wolf rm 928 CM2.. 557-3821
Unit III Daniel M. Pritchett rm*905'cM2.* !.'.*.*.".*;.'.*.* I .' lll'^^^^
•••••••••••...,,, 557—1677
Electrical Classification Group Director Eugene E. Young rm 1D07 CS4 557.01,7
Secretary Gloria J. Henderson rm 1D06 CS4.: llim]l
Unit I Gary G. Solyst rm 1E02 CS4... 557-0117
Unit II Earl C. Folsom rm IDII CS4.. 557-0157
Unit III Kendall J. Dood rm IFOl CS4. .*.*.".'.'.'.' i] .'.*.*.' ] 557-0168
Mechanical Classification Group Director Edward J. Earls rm 1D05 CS4 557.0107
Secretary Deborah Brasel rm 1D07 CS4 c^, n,n.
Unit I Donald P. Rooney rm 1D03 CS4 cc, n o
Unit II Robert Craig rm 1F05 CS4. 557-0182
Unit III John W. Will rm IDOI CSi* ///////////////////.,,',',',[] 557-0140
""" " '''l^:^^^l^^l^^ "-'"- --" --- - -a cs... 357-oeJ
^ 557-0667
Scientific Library Program Manager Henry Rosicky 2nd Floor CP34 .. SS7 ?qs^
Secretary Nadine Tabor 2nd Floor CP34 SS7 9«?
Staff Assistant Joan Mavity 2nd Floor CP 34.... s?7'9«7
Scientific Literature Branch Peter Sof chak 2nd Flo^^'cPsi.* '.'.'.'.'. 557I295S
Collections Development Marguerite Terbush 2nd Floor CP34 557-3092 ^
Technical Services Section Jesse Gibson rm 2C02 CP3 5S7 ?Qfii
User Services Section Dora Weinstein 2nd Floor CP34 557 29^7
Interlibrary Loans 2nd Floor CP34 =„ ,q„
Reference Service 2nd Floor CP34 lli olll
Circulation 2nd Floor CP34 Z ~^^^'
Computer Searching 2nd Floor CP34 .'.".*.*.'.'.*.* ] ss7~9Qq7
Translations Branch Peter Sof chak 1st Floor CP6 .*.*.'.* .' sS7'^iQ^
Receptionist Carol Releford 1st Floor CP6 lli^ilH
Foreign Patents Branch Barry Balthrop 2nd Floor CP34.';.';.* SS7 ?Q7n
Reterence Service Bernard Hamilton 2nd Floor CP34... lliHik
Bindery Unit Ronald Knickerbocker FERN SS7 1 s^n
Copy Services Section Lendora Robertson 2nd Floor*CP34.' ! 557 3sfs
Patent Information Services Section Mae Moore 2od Floor CP34 ! 1 .*.'.*.'.'; .' 557I228O
Microfilm Inventory Control System Beverly Brooks 2nd Floor CP34 557-2280
. 3/14/84
March 27, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG 39
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
110 General Metallurgical, Inorganic, Petroleum and Electrical Chemistry and
Engineering rm 10C17 CP3 557-3606
Director Dennis E. Talbert rm 10C17 CP3 !!!.*!!.*.*!! 557-1360
Secretary Constance L. Morgan rm 10C17 CP3 557-1360
Clerk Phyllis Sisk rm 10C17 CP3 557-3606
111 Metallurgy Metal Treatment Stock Material and Lubricant Compositions
L. Dewayne Rutledge rm 10C17 CP3 557-3578
112 Electrochemistry Winston A. Douglas rm 10C17 CP3 !!!.'.*!!!!.'!!!.' 557-2517
113 Inorganic Chemistry; Refractories Plastics Luminescent & Barrier Layer Comp-'
ositions Edward S. Meros rm 10C17 CP3 557-3597
114 Semiconductor Fabrication and Batteries Brian E. Hearn rm 10C17 CP3 557-3592
116 Carbon Compounds Mineral Oils and Fuels Delbert E. Gantz rm 10C17 CP3 557-9181
120 General Organic Chemistry rm 9C13 CP2 557-3920
Director Charles E. Van Horn rm 9A09 CP2 !.'.'!!!!!!! 557-3637
Secretary Linda M. Feducia rm 9A09 CP2 557-3637
Clerk Kathryn Perry rm 9C13 CP2 557-3920
Chemical Library rm 8C22 CP2
121 Heterocyclic Compounds and Miscellaneous Esters Henry R. Jiles rm 9C13 CP2.. 557-3920
122 Heterocyclic Compounds and Mercaptans Donald G. Daus rm 9C13 CP2 557-3920
123 Bioaffecting Compounds & Compositions Donald B. Moyer rm 9C13 CP2 557-3920
124 Amide Amine Azo Halo Hydrocarbons Heavy Metal and Silicon Compounds
Charles F. Warren rm 9C13 CP2 557-3920
125 Medicines Poisons Cosmetics Albert T. Meyers rm 9C13 CP2 557-3920
126 Herbicides and Organic Acids Esters Oxy and Oxo Compounds Natalie Trousof
rm 9C13 CP2 557-3920
140 High Polymer Chemistry, Plastics and Molding rm 7C17 CP3 557-2421
Director James 0. Thomas, Jr. rm 7C17 CP3 557-3800
Secretary Sharon C. Graham rm 7C17 CP3 557-3800
Clerk Ellen Scott rm 7C17 CP3 557-2421
142 Mixed High Polymers, Aqueous Systems, Radiation John C. Bleutge rm 7C17 CP3.. 557-3745
143 Natural Resins, Urethanes, Condensation, Type Proteins John Kight III rm 7C17
CP3 557-3804
144 Addition Type Carbohydrates Joseph L. Schofer rm 7C17 CP3 » 557-3807
147 General Molding and Treating Donald E. Czaja rm 7C17 CP3 557-2473
160 Coating, Laminating and Photography rm 6C17 CP3 557-3694
Director Samih N. Zaharna rm 6C17 CP3 557-3547
Secretary Anne A. Willey rm 6C17 CP3 557-3547
Clerk Vera Thomas rm 6C17 CP3 557-3694
161 Adhesive Bonding, Misc Chemical Manufacturing, Coating Metal or Coating
Edward Kimlin rm 6C17 CP3 557-3697
162 Coating Processes Norman Morgenstern rm 6C17 CP3 557-1952
164 Miscellaneous Articles and Stock Material George F. Lesmes rm 6C17 CP3 557-1897
166 Photography Processes Compositions & Articles & Special Utility Compositions
John Kittle rm 6C17 CP3 557-1960
3/14/84
1040 OG 40
OFHCIAL GAZETTE
March 27. 1984
Secretary Lynn M. Herbert rm 5cl 7 *CP3 .*.'.*.*!.*.*.*.* .* sS7'ifi«n
Clerk Ruth W. Lyles rm 5C17 CP3 SS7 5^77
rr5C17"?;3!'!?!!!!'?''?^ '"' '^"' ""'"'^^ Associating Robe;;*L: *Sp;;ni* " *
W? o°°^' yr^!)°i°«y ^"^ AnaiyticIi*Chenisi;y*Rw;d'N;'j;;;;'™'5cir «7i677
Ml M^'^!^'?^^ Chemical Arts S. Leon Bashore rm 5C17 CP3 ™ . 557^^77
76 pJ^!o J °*^ ^"^ ?'"^?^" Engineering Thomas Wiseman rm 5C17 CP3. ..::;;;::; i* * lli'-ll]]
rm 5C17 ?P3 °" ^"^°l^i"8 liquids Sorption or Diffusion Charles n! i;;; ''''
* * • • • 557-3677
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
210 Industrial Electronics Physics and Related Elements rm 9C17 CP4 557-2887
Director Samuel W. Engle rm 9D19 CP4 557-2887
Secretary Teresa E. Dugan'rm'goig'cpi! .* .* ! .* .* ] .' .* ^^7'9fQf
Clerk Charles B. Blake rm 9C17 CP4 Ill oll^
211 Acoustics Photography Motion Pictures Photocopying Optics Music'El^trostatic* "^"^^®^
Capacitors L. Thomas Hix rm 9C17 CP4 cietrostatic
''' Ba^tL^'^'id'cL'cito'r^Ch" '''T'''' ^o^^^' siiii;' ai^' k^^^i;,- k;stei." " ''''''''
->,i ^,7 Capacitor Charging Automatic Switches J. D. Miller rm 9C17 rP4 s«;7 <;n^n
2 4 xir'r' ^-"--"Heating Welding Resistors Bruce A. Reyno L r^ 9' Cpt'" 557! 0 S
''' (Va:L'?rrm%'c?7t-I '^^^"^" '^'^ ^^^^^^^^^ ^^"«^« ^-— Sy!teL'''- ''''
''' Brr°SL^^^v?°?Ju^"^ -d^inductors-i;;;i;;;;;-p;i;;;d-ci;;;u;;-p;;;i-- '''-''''
216 Weighing Scales. Electrical Transmission and in;;;;;;;;;a;;'ci;;;u*M;k;;;* ' "^"^^^^
': 9cfrcpT. !":^:!.??'.''''''^'"' protection Systems Elliott A Gotdber.
217 Electric Moto;'s;;t;;;*p;i;;*M;;;;*i;;;;;'pi;;;;*Ei;;;;;;;-M:;i;'^^^^ " "^-^^^^
Horology Computers and Data Processing Systems Gene Z. Rublnson rm 9Cn CP4. . 557-5080
220/290 Special Laws Administration and Designs rm 10D19 CP4... ss7 9A7fi
Director Kenneth L. Cage rm 10D19 CP4 SS7 9R77
Secretary Diana J. Langer rm lODig'cpi! .*!.'.*.* .' ^?7'9«77
Clerk Cecelia J. Krider rm 10C17 CP4 lliolil
97. M K ^^""^^"8 ^"d Review Edward M. Drazdowsky rm 10C24 CP4 .*.*.*.*.*.* .* 557 2lft7
221 Mechanical Richard E. Schafer rm 10C17 CP4 Ill olJ
111 Electrical M. R. Wilbur rmlOC17 CP4 ^c, ooaJ
223 Chemical B. R. Padgett rmlOC17 CP4 * 557-2897
290 Designs rm3C17 CP3 557-2037
291 1 d ''"r^ ^-' s;;;;;;;-s;;;i;;-s;;n;-;;id-;;-3c;7-cn:::::::: 557:2^76
291 Industrial Arts Wallace R. Burke rm 3B18 CP3 SS7 9,?9
292 Household Personal and Fine Arts (Vacant) rm 3B36 CP3 .*.*.*.*.';;.*.*;.'.*.*.* .*.*;.' .* 557I2265
3/14/84
March 27. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG 41
230 Information Transmission Processing Storage and Retrieval 557-2878
Director Earl Levy rm 11C17 CP4 557-5088
Secretary Laura Dorsey rm 11C17 CP4 557-5088
Clerk Katherine A. Nelson rm 11C17 CP4 557-2878
231 Television, Facsimile and Image Analysis John C. Martin rm 11C17 CP4 557-2801
232 General and Special Purpose Data Processing System (Measuring Testing 4
Monitoring) James D. Thomas rm 11C17 CP4 557-2881
233 Radio, Pulse Communications Multiplexing and Computer System Robert L. Griffin
rm 11C17 CP4 557-2801
234 Miscellaneous Signaling and Speech Synthesis John W. Caldwell rm 11C17 CP4... 557-2863
235 Information Storage and Retrieval System Bernard Konick rm 11C17 CP4 557-2867
236 General and Special Purpose Data Processing System Including Control Error
Detection and Miscellaneous Applications Jerry Smith rm llAOl CP4 557-2871
237 General & Special Purpose Data Processing System including Vehicle Control 4
Navigation G. D. Shaw rm 11C17 CP4 557-2881
240 Receptacles, Cleaning, Winding and Measuring rm 7C17 CP4 557-2900
Director Gerald M. Forlenza rm 7D19 CP4. 557-2906
Secretary Deborah P. Leeper rm 7D19 CP4 557-2906
Clerk Doretha A. Bailey rm 7C17 CP4 557-2900
241 Receptacles, Packages William I. Price rm 7C17 CP4 557-3214
242 Fluid Treating, Presses, Foods Treating, General Cleaning, Agitating,
Centrifuges Harvey C. Hornsby rm 7C17 CP4 557-3451
243 Plumbing Fixtures, Conduits, Cleaning by Fluid Fluent Material Handling,
Electrical Switches, Impellers, Rotary Fluid Motors or Pumps
Stephen Marcus rm 7C17 CP4 557-7617
244 Measuring and Testing Gerald Goldberg rm 7C17 CP4 557-2913
245 Textile Machinery, Flexible Shaft Couplings, Pushing and Pulling, Winding and
Reeling, Web Feeding, Bearings Stuart S. Levy rm 7C17 CP4 557-3451
246 Thermal and Fluid Level Measuring and Testing, Geometric Instruments,
Indicators, Image Projection, Sound Recordings, Joint Packing
Charles Frankfort rm 7C17 CP4 557-7617
250 Electronic Systems and Devices rm 8C17 CP4...'. 557-2671
Director Samuel S. Matthews rm 8C17 CP4 557-2671
Secretary Maclovla E. Sanchez rm 8D19 CP4 557-2671
Clerk JoAnn Davis rm 8C17 CP4 557-2671
251 Electric Lamp and Discharge Devices and Circuits Fiber Optic Devices and
Systems David K. Moore rm 8C17 CP4 557-2671
252 Electrical Measuring and Testing Amplifiers Michael J. Lynch rm 8C17 CP4 557-2671
253 Semiconductor Devices Andrew J. James rm SCI 7 CP4 557-2671
254 Oscillators, Modulators, Demodulators, Antennas, Miscellanous Vacuum Tube and
Semicondutor Circuits and Systems Stanley D. Miller rm 8C17 CP4 557-2671
255 Lasers, Optical Measuring and Testing Systems, Photocell Circuits and
Systems William L. Sikes rm 8C17 CP4 557-2671
256 Transmission Lines, Taners, Radiant Energy Systems Alfred E. Smith
rm 8C17 CP4 557-2671
257 Optical Systems and Elements, Vision Testing and Correction John K. Corbin
rm 8C17 CP4 ^ 557-267 1
3/14/84
'^°^*2 OFFICIAL GAZETTE w
**^ March 27. 1984
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
310 Handing and Transporting Media rm 3C17 CP3
Director Bobby R. Gray rm 6C17 CP4 .'.*.' 557-3211
Secretary Betty Rasinussen*rm'6ci7*CP4.* .* lll'l^^^
-,, ,, Clerk Margaret Stevens rm 6C17 CP4... 557-2921
557-3301
320 Material Shaping Article Manufacturing Tools rra 5D17 cpl
Director Stephen G. Kunin rm 5D19 CP4 .. !:!.™ 557-3320
Secretary lyone L. Miles rm 5019 'cP4 557-1890
Clerk Vivian C. Harris rm 5D21 CP4 557-3371
323 Abrading, Workholders and Tools Fred Ti" krhmiAl' 11.' 1:^^',' X^, 557-3317
326 M.tai working. co»i„uti„n a„d wi;;'i;;ki;g-;,;;;;a'N: •Giiii;;^-;;-;^^^-^^::: 111:1111
"" S^Je'ctor'Mchfrd^r''/'"™'' ''""""" '"'"'-tlon ™ 4C17 CP4 557.31,5
uirector Richard E. Aegerter nn 4D17 CP4 33/-J125
Secretary Theresa R. Godfrey';;';D;9*cp4.* .';;.*;;;;;;;:; ;; lll'llln
111 01 . n, ^''^ ^^"^ ^' Desmukes rm 4C17 CP4 c„i?^?
340 Heat Power and Fluid Engineering rm 3C17 CP4
Director Donley J. Stocking rm 3C17 CP4 557-3340
Secretary Sherry K. Bratlie'rm*3ci7'cP4.*.' .'.*.*.*.' .'.';.* lll'llln
Clerk Mary M. Reed rm 3C1 7 CP4 557-3340
341 Power Plants, Fluid Motors Robert E. Garritt'rm'iriTrpI 557-3128
342 Internal Combustion Engines Char es J. Myhre rl 3C cpt lll'^'^'
343 Combustion Power Plant R»«ri.<«« m 1. I 557-0900
rm ??I.^^?P^---"--^^
'" ^:^T^^^l^'^-^^ '-----: -Hif ;i«;;;;i;; "^-^^^^
346 Lt? ^u"^ c^'-bustion Samuel Sc;;;*;m*3ci7'ipi: .* .' .' i;: i;; .' [ .' ] .' * j iii'^^iii
Jm 3cfrcP4'!"* ''°'"' "''*'"" '"' '°"" "'^'^^ wiiiia; r! ci;;; "^"^''^
347 Fluid Handu;;';;d*;;i;;;*i;;a;-p:'s;h;;d;;;';;'3c;rcp;;;::;;::;;^ lllillH
3/14/84
March 27. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 00 43
350 General Constructions, Petroleum and Mining Engineering, Gearing, Joints and
Fasteners, Textiles rm 4C17 CP3 557-3000
Director Al Lawrence Smith rra 4C17 CP3 !.'.*.'!.*!.'!!.*.'.'.'.'.'.'.*.' 557-3000
Secretary Carol M. Sinclair rm 4C17 CP3 !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!.* 557-3000
Clerk Joyce G. Hill rm 4C17 CP3 .*!!!!!.*! 557-3002
351 Joints and Connections, Pipe Couplings, Fences, Earth & Hydraulic
Engineering Cornelius J. Husar rm 4C17 CP3 557-1300
352 Gearing, Machine Elements, Power Transmissions Leslie A. Braun rm 4C17 CP3... 557-1300
353 Textile and Leather Manufacture, Apparel, Textiles Werner H. Schroeder
nn 4C17 CP3 557-3411
354 Building Structures and Components Price C. Faw, Jr. rm 4C17 CP3 557-0570
355 Supports, Racks, Fire Escapes, Scaffolds, Flexible Partitions
Ramon S. Britts rm 4C17 CP3 557-0540
356 Petroleum, Mining and Highway Engineering
James A. Leppink rm 4C17 CP3 557-0540
357 Tables, Chairs, Cabinets, Windows, Doors, Buckles, Buttons, Clasps
William E. Lyddane rm 4C17 CP3 557-0540
358 Fasteners, Locks, Closure Fasteners, Beds Gary L. Smith rm 4C17 CP3. ...'!.*.*!! ! 557-1300
OFFICE OF THE ASSISTANT COMMISSIONER FOR EXTERNAL AFFAIRS
Assistant Commissioner Michael K. Kirk rm 11C04 CP3 557-3065
Secretary Carla Bowman rm 11C04 CP3 557-3065
Congressional Liaison Anita Huffman rm 11C04 CP3 557-1310
Office of Public Affairs
Director William 0. Craig rm IDOl CP3 557-3428
Public Information Specialist Oscar G. Mastin rm iDOl CP3 '.'.'.'. 557-3428
Office of Legislation and International Affairs
Director (Vacant) rm 11C04 CP3 557-3065
OFFICE OF THE ASSISTANT COMMISSIONER FOR TRADEMARKS
Assistant Commissioner Margaret M. Laurence rm 11C17 CP3 557-3061
Secretary Sheila G. Pellman rm 11C17 CP3 557-3061
Executive Assistant Paula T. Hairston rm 11C17 CP3 557-3916
Staff Assistant Ellen J. Seeherman rm 11C17 CP3 557-7467
Budget Analyst Maude Williams rm 11C17 CP3 557-2222
Paralegal Specialist Keturah E. Patrick rm 11C23 CP3 557-2221
3/14/84
1040 OG 44
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27. 1984
TRADEMARK TRIAL AND APPEAL BOARD
Members of the ^oard:
Chairman Daniel L. Skoler rm 1008 CSS -c, -see,
David B. Allen 1008 CSS .* qc?^^!
Robert F. Cissel 1008 CSS .'.'.*!.*!!.* q^7 i^
Louise E. Fruge 1008 CSS .'.*.* 5S7-3SS1
Gary D. Krugman 1008 ^S5 !!.*.'.*.* ^^^"^^^^
Janet E. Rice 1008 CSS .* .' * S57-3551
J. David Sams 1008 CSS .'.*.'.*.'.'.*.'.'.* S57-3SS1
Rany L. Simms 1008 CSS .'.*.*.'.*.*.'.*.*.*.*.'.*.' 557-35S1
Attorney-Examiners: SS7-3SS1
Marc A. Bergsman 1008 CSS
Beth A. Chapman 1008 CSS .'.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.* 5S7-3SS1
G. Douglas Hohein 1008 CSS .'.*.*.*.*.*.*.*.' 5S7-3SS1
T. Jeffrey Quinn 1008 CSS ...'. 5S7-3SS1
Paralegal Specialist Gladys R. Springer* 1008 *CS5 ;.*.*!.* .'i ." 5^7^^^}
Clerk of the Board Evelyn R. Lopez 1008 CSS ss?'^??}
Deputy Clerk Erma S. Brown 1008 CSS .'!!.'.*.'.*.*!.'!!.*.'!.*.'.'.* 557I355I '
TRADEMARK EXAMINING OPERATION
Director Mark M. Newman rm 3C06 CP2
Secretary Marlyn S. Holt *ri*3C06*CP2 .'.'.'.*.*.*.* .'.*.'.*.".* .' ss7"?9aS
Deputy Director Patricia M. Davis rm 3C06 CP2 SST^^Afl
Secretary Betty B. Andrews rm 3C06 CP2 .*.'.'.*.*.* .* SS7 '^^Ja
Procedure & Special Projects Attorney Carlisle Walters'rm*3c66*CP2* " 557I3268
Tradl'^iTL^^.^JL^^r-'^^" '"°^"^^ "^^^^^^ '' ''-' - 3C0fcP2!?;:: SS7-3883
Managing Attorney Law Office I Charles J. Condro rm 2C28 CP2... 557-3271
Lead Attorney Joseph H. Webb ^
Secretary Arnette McGill
Managing Attorney Law Office II John C. Demos rm 2024 CP2.. S57 1977
Lead Attorney (Vacant) jjz-jz//
Secretary Doshie Day
Managing Attorney Law Office III Myra Kurzbard rm 2C22 CP2 " 557.0560
Lead Attorney (Vacant) * ^^°"
Secretary Linda Bates
. Managing Attorney Law Office IV Robert Anderson rm 3C13 CP2.... 557-9550
Lead Attorney David M. Soroka ^^^"
Secretary Patsy McDermott
Managing Attorney Law Office V Paul Fahrenkopf rm 2C11 CP2 557-5380
Lead Attorney Donald Pingeret
Secretary Ravonne Lee
Managing Attorney Law Office VI Ronald E. Wolfington rm 3C27 CP2 557-2937
Lead Attorney Robert M. Feeley
Lead Attorney Christopher Sidotl
Secretary Myrtle L. Robinson
Managing Attorney Law Office VII Peter Harab rm 4C13 CP2. 557 5777
Lead Attorney David Shallant ^:>i-OLii
Secretary (Vacant)
Managing Attorney Law Office VIII Sidney Moskowitz rm 4C14 CP2... 557-5242
Lead Attorney Michael E. Bodson
Secretary Nakita Dates
Trademark Services Division Doreane Poteat rm 4D23 CP2... 557 s7Z.o
Classification Team Edward Hayes rm 4C28 CP2 5575229
IKE & Assembly Team Portia Taylor rm 4D29 CP2. 557 5251
Post-Registration Supervisor Catherine R. Hill rm*4C24'cP2.' ! .* .* .* ." ! .* .' " SS7I1986
Publication & Issue Supervisor Donald Perritt rm 4C23 CP2.. 557-5247
Search Room Supervisor Leon Jackson rm 2C06 CP2.. 557 -joq
Affidavit Examiners rm 4C24 CP2 557 1Q««
Renewal Examiners rm 4C24 CP2 \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ 557I1988
3/14/84
March 27, 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG 45
OFFICE OF THE ASSISTANT COMMISSIONER FOR ADMINISTRATION
Assistant Commissioner Theresa A. Brelsford rm 11C34 CP3 SS7-2290
Secretary Debra Ginther rm 11C34 CP3 557-2290
Deputy Assistant Commissioner for Administration Wesley H. Gewehr rm 11C34 CP3. 557-3055
Secretary Tresea Robinette rm 11C34 CP3 557-3055
Program Analyst Joan S. Griffey rm 11C34 CP3 , 557-2290
Office of General Services
Director John D. Hassett Lobby CPl 557-0183
Secretary Peggy Fewell Lobby CPl 557-0183
Deputy G. William Richardson Lobby CPl 557-0183
Correspondence and Mail Division Alvin Durham rm 1A03 CP2 557-2932
Deputy Willie Bowman rm 1A03 CP2 557-1689
Outgoing Mail Branch Lawrence Ford rm lAOS CP2 557-3233
Incoming Mail Branch Sallye Rayford rm 1B03 CP2 557-3232
Correspondence Branch Mary Allen rm 1A03 CP2 557-3226
Facilities Management Division William Frye Lobby CPl 557-7870
Records and Property Management Branch Janice Pickering (Acting)
Lobby CP6 557-0410
Space and Telecommunications Branch Ed Bogdan rm 509 CPl 557-0183
Office Services Division Constant G. Fearing Lobby CPl 557-1219
Procurement and Travel Branch Janice Carter Lobby CPl 557-1218
Support Services Branch Chief Luther Campbell FERN 557-3560
Transportation Unit Wallace Hall FERN 557-1531
File Information Unit Jacqueline Waldo (Acting) Lobby CP4 557-2977
Office of Patent and Trademark Services
Director Frank V. Caesar rm 7D25 CP2 557-3236
Secretary Norma L. Watson (Acting) rm 7D25 CP2 557-3236
Deputy Michael Baggage rm 7D2S CP2 557-3236
Public Service Center C. Griffen rm 2C24 CP3 557-5168
Secretary Juanita G. Baker rm 2C24 CP3 557-5168
Patent Search Division Bernard Thomas rm 1A03 CP3 557-2219
Secretary Barbara Evans rm 1A03 CP3 557-2276
Patent Search Room rm 1A03 CP3 , 557-2277
Micrographics Branch (Commerce) Al Mundy 377-4968
Micrographics Branch (Crystal) Calvin Pullen 557-3079
Program Control Division (Vacant) 557-3236
PCT International Services Mary E. Turowski rm 7A04 CP2 557-2003
Examination Services Division Peggy Dubose rm 7E30 CP2 557-3256
Secretary Rebecca Faulkins rm 7E30 CP2 557-3717
Application Branch
Classification and Routing Unit John H. Crawley rm 7CI2 CP2 557-3855
Administrative Examination Unit M. Montgomery rm 7C10 CP2 557-3254
Special Handling Unit Arthur Stephens rm 7C20 CP2... 557-3831
Data Input, Quality Control, and Assembly Unit
Everette Oliver rm 7E28 CP2 557-3716
Re-Examination Pre-processing Unit Lucille T. Batchelor rm 7C10
CP2 557-1562
Assignment Branch Emmanuel J. DeMesme, rm 7D13 CP2 557-3266
Deputy Annie Harrell rm 7D13 CP2 557-3266
Secretary Voilet A. McCoy rm 7D13 CP2 557-3266
Examination Unit Virginia Clark rm 7D13 CP2 557-3247
^ Digest and Recording Unit Fred L. Bennett rm 7D13 CP2 557-3259
Title Unit Patricia A. Alexander rm 2C32 CP4 557-3826
Certification Branch Aberdeen Cutler 1627 DOC 377-2270
Certification Section Lannie Anderson 1627 DOC 377-4849
Input Records and Control Mary Grose 1627 DOC 377-3359
-Microfiche and Printing Catherine Jones 1627 DOC 377-4401
Court and Documentation Gladys Dorsey rm7D19 CP2 557-1560
3/14/84
'"*'°°'* OFFICIAL GAZETTE M«c„ 27, ,984
Office of Personnel
Personnel Officer Aaron W. Deitch nn 920 CM2
V^ssistant to the Personnel Officer Hugh i^ ^^^0^ rm 9 2^ hiil'. '.'.'.'.'. lll'llll
Secretary Mildred Jeter nn 926 CM2 Al^ ^^
Classification and Employment Division Thomas 'h! *Neuhauser'm* 92^7^,9* " lll^n^^
Employee Relations Division William H. Grout rm 92? Cm"!'.!^ " '''''" 55' " ''
Employee Development Division Mary Anna Culkin rm 320 CM2 ss7 ?ft?
Operations Division Beverly Boykin rm 900 CM2 .V. ^ .][[.[[','.',',',',][ sll'-nll
)
Office of Publications
Director Stanley J. Bania rm 6C07 CP2
Secretary Gloria J. Goffev*rm*6C07*rp7 557-3794
Deputy Director Richard A. Bawcombe rm 6007 CP2.? "7-379A
Publishing Division Ruth C. Mason rm 6C17 CP2.' .* '' lll'V.r
Deputy Manager Sylvia F. Martin 6C17 CP2.. llnl
Allowed Files and Assembly Branch Yvette e! 'si,i;;*™'6C36'cP2 Ill f,lll
PH?^'.''?\'^°"'"°^ ^""^^ W^^l"** D- Inland rm 6CU CP2 557 L?^
Editorial Branch Marthina Thompson rm 6C06 CP2.... . llAtol
Data Base Query Section Gail Wooten rm 6C06 CP2 .' .* ill f^loo
Patent Copy Inspection Section Annie Kelly rm 6C06 CP2...:;;; 557 6300
Drafting Branch Burton P. Shields rm 6C30 CP2. Ill Jn?
nTr^'l^ """t^^"^' °^^'''°'^ "^^^^^1 Stellabotte nn*6c67'cP2*;; 557I963
Data Base Inspection Branch Melvinia Gary rm 6C10 CP2.. 557 1!?^
TechnL" n"'?' °' Corrections Branch Delores Cherry rm C 8 CP2: .' * * * * 55 Zo'^g
Technical Development Division Edwin P. Hall (Acting) rm 6C07 CP2::;::: 557-m2
Office of Equal Employement Programs
Director R. Jacqueline Dees rm 9D35 CP3
. Secretary Denise Walker ' rii ' 9D32 'cP3.' .*.* .*.*.'.".' .* lll'lnl^^
Affirmative Actions Division Chief Henry J. Ford rm 9D33'cP3 IWlnyt
Complaints Division Chief Rhoda K. Kluge rm 9D31 CP3:.... llilnll
FPn r^^^^Ji'' (Complaints) Charles E. Deskins rm 9EircP3:: 557 3^20
EEO Clerk (Complaints) Robin Mitchell rm 9D32 CP3. ......;....;:: i.' .' 557I3237
Office of Management and Organization
Director Sara E. Bjorge rm 927 CM2
Secretary (Vacant) *rm*927*CM2.' .*.*.*.'.*.*;.*.*.* .* lll'llll
Team Leaders 557-5825
Alvin Dorsey rm 927 CM2
Jean E. Buckhout rm 927 CM2 557-5825
557-5825
3/14/84
March 27. 1984
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1040 OG 47
OFFICE OF THE ASSISTANT COMMISSIONER FOR FINANCE AND PLANNING
Assistant Commissioner Bradford R. Huther rm 11D27 CP3 557-1572
Secretary Vickie T. Bryant rm 11D27 CP3. !.*!!.*!!!!!! M 1 ]]]]]].*][ ] 557-1572
Office of Budget, Planning and Evaluation
Director James R. Lynch rm 2C32 CP3 35^ 30,,
Chief, Execution and Control Division Harold E. "Busweii'2C32 'cP3 557'3875
Chief, Programs and Budget Division Aris G. Harrison rm 2C32 CPiV. '.'.'.'.'.'. '.'.'.'.'.'. 557-3875
Office of Finance
Director Leonard L. Nahme rm 2C32 CP3 557-3051
Secretary Virginia R. Clark rm 2C32 CP3 !.*.'.*.*.'.'.'.'!.'.'.' .* 5S7linsi
Deputy Director L. Jack Ell rm 2C32 CP3 557-3051
Accounting and Cost Analysis Division Thomas 'L."Gas8*rm*2C33'cP3.' 557-2983
Fee Accounting Division Frank S. Lane Sr. rm IBOl CP2 " 557-3230
Deposit Account Branch Delores H. Riley (Acting) rm IBOl CP2! !.*.'.*!.*.'.'.' ! 557-3227
Administrator for Automation
Administrator J. Howard Bryant rm 1108 CP6 557-6000
Secretary Terry D'Amico rm 1108 CP6 557 602A
Director Automation Program Control Group
A. J. Barsanti rm 1108 CP6 557-6009
Secretary Donna Powers rm 1 108 CP6 .'.'.' .' .' .* .' .* ', ' .' .' .' * .* [ * .' .' " * .' ] [ ] ] ' [ [ [ 557I6OIO
Director, Plan, Administration and Support
Douglas F. Cunha rm 1108 CP6 557-6015
Director, Automation Plan Control
Sanford Zarkin rm 1 108 CP6 557-6016
Office of Technology, Assessment and Forecast
Director John Terapane rm 1225 CP6 557-4114
Secretary Judy Dickie rm 1225 CP6 .'.'.*.*.*.'.*.'.'.'.'.*.'.*.*.*.*.* 557-4114
Office of Automation Concepts Implementation
Director Don W. LeCrone rm 1142 CP6 557-6156
Secretary Audrey Jackson rm 1142 CP6 !!!!.*!! 557-6157
Office of Image and Information System
Director L Liddle rm 1142 CP6 557-6154
Secretary Debbi Blackwell rm 1142 CP6. .......*.'.'!.'.*.*.*.*!.*.'[.*['.' ] 557-6154
Office of Search Systems
Director Donald P. Stein rm 1108 CP6 ■ , 557-6024
3/14/84
"^OG« OFRCIAL GAZETTE M«ch 27. .984
Office of ADP
Director William J. Maykrantz nn 5D05 CP2 557-36A6
n^« . n- Program Assistant Sylvia A. Huf fili^n'rm' 5D05*CP2 .'.*.'.*.*.*.*.*.'.*.*.** ] 557I3646
Deputy Director John F. Fancovic rm 5D05 CP2 . . . , 5 = 7 ill:
ADP Systems Technology Division John J. Coch^^n'^^'sDOs'cFZ.* .*.*.'.*.*.*.'.' .'i * 557I3646
ADP Trademarks & Administration Division Raymond R. Rahn rm 5D05 CP2... 557-6330
ADP Operations Division Donald Tynes rm 100 North CMl 557-1071
Production Control Branch Betty J. Wilson rm 100 North CMl..!.*!."** 557-1071
Commputer Operations Branch Louise Hill rm 100 North CMl * 557-1071
ADP Patent Division Raymond R. Rahn (Acting) rm 5D05 CP2 ' 557-6332
CMl
CM2
CPl
CP2
CP3
CP4
CP6
CP34
CS4
CS5
CGZ
EADS
FERN
WNY
Crystal Mall 1, 1911 Jefferson Davis Highway
Crystal Mall 2, 1921 Jefferson Davis Highway
Crystal Plaza 1, 2001 Jefferson Davis Highway
Crystal Plaza 2, 2011 Jefferson Davis Highway
Crystal Plaza 3, 2021 Jefferson Davis Highway
Crystal Plaza 4, 2121 Jefferson Davis Highway
Crystal Plaza 6, 2221 Jefferson Davis Highway
Crystal Plaza 34, 2021 Jefferson Davis Highway
Crystal Square 4, 1745 Jefferson Davis Highway
Crystal Square 5, 1755 Jefferson Davis Highway
Crystal Gateway 2, 1225 Jefferson Davis Highway
1232 South Eads Street
1411 South Fern Street
Washington Navy Yard, 2 & M. Street, S.E., Bldg. 159
3/14/84
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correction for the Week of Mar. 27, 1984
Re. 31,376
D. 270,975
3,655.201
3,947,363
4,030,657
4,056,586
4,074,352
4,202,681
4,239,993
4,269,867
4,294,849
4,296,930
4,309,421
4,328,682
4,333,734
4,338,873
4,349,794
4,352,134
4,353,448
4,354,665
4,369,493
4,372,224
4,375,519
4,379,876
4,380,620
4,380,966
4,382,969
4,383,064
4,383,095
4,383,119
4,384,990
4,385,223
4,385,912
4,386,096
4,386,454
4,386,609
4,387,092
4,388,738
4,389,046
4,389,714
4,390,020
4,392,595
4,393,785
4,394,461
4,394.841
4,395,456
4,395,915
4,397,001
4,397,022
4,399,284
4,400,317
4,400,374
4.402,020
4,402,313
4,402,868
4,402,986
4,403,307
4,403,995
4,404,399
4,404,897
4,405,531
4,406,687
4,406,789
4,408,821
4,409,139
4,409,300
4,409,431
4,410,500
4,410,639
4,410,845
4,411,935
4,411,979
4,412,928
4,413,105
4,413,130
4,415,364
4,416,295
4,416,482
4,416,565
4,416,958
4,417,289
4,417.474
4,417,478
4,417,714
4,418,151
4,418,201
4,418,704
4,419,185
4,419.417
4,419,558
4,420,097
4,420,274
4,420,342
4,420,616
4,421,984
4,422,550
4,423,584
4,423,719
4,424,155
4,424,412
4,424,492
4,424,894
4,426,409
Disclaimers
4,011,572.— Wayne S. Amato, Syracuse; Bhaskar Bandy-
opadhyay, Camillus; Robert Herbert Fitch, Syracuse;
and Bruce Edward Kurtz. Marcellus, all of N.Y. CY-
CLIC ETHYLENE OXYHYDROCHLOR-
INATION PROCESS WITH REDUCED HY-
DROCARBON EMISSIONS. Patent dated Jan. 31,
1978. Disclaimer filed Dec. 8, 1983, by the assignee.
The United States 0/ America as represented by the Ad-
ministrator of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agen-
cy.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claim 1 of said patent.
4,279,326.— Sam W. Meineke and Harold Nedell. Bel-
laire, Tex. EXHAUST MUFFLER. Patent dated
July 21, 1981. Disclaimer filejl Jan. 24, 1984, by the
assignee, Meineke Discount Muffler Shops. Inc.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
4,318,026.— /?a//>/r / D'Amato. Lancaster, Pa. METH-
OD OF MAKING A GRID FOR A CATHODE-
RAY TUBE ELECTRON GUN. Patent dated Mar.
2, 1982. Disclaimer filed Jan. 30, 1984, by the assign-
ee, RCA Corp.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
4,351,533.— yo/r« A. Moore, Peoria. 111. FACE SEAL
WITH ROTATABLE SEAL RING. Patent dated
Sept. 28, 1982. Disclaimer filed Feb. 10, 1984. by the
assignee. Caterpillar Tractor Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
4,385,721.— /JoAerr C Olsen, Cupertino and James R.
Jensen. Fremont, Calif TRAY CORNER STRUC-
TURE. Patent dated May 31, 1983. Disclaimer filed
Jan. 23, 1984, by the assignee. Container Corp. of
America.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to the sole claim of said
patent.
Dedication
4,l62,27i.—Albrecht H. Granzow. Franklin Township,
Somerset County, N.J. FLAME RETARDANT
POLYPHENYLENE ETHER RESIN COMPOSI-
TIONS CONTAINING A PENTAERYTHRITYL
PHOSPHONATE. Patent dated July 24, 1979. Dedi-
cation filed Dec. 14, 1983, by the assignee, American
Cyanamid Co.
Hereby dedicates to the Public the entire remaining
term of said patent.
1040 OG 49
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
njajmain collecions of earlier i»ued patents The iop^ V^ t^umberlSllence ' '"'°"' '" "«""'""' '"
r4'?™1,;°rrof ^^flTrS:, feL"^i°ali''n^ff i-"'?°-3r/pape. copies fro. either nticro-
the patents issued since 1790 °*^ '^^"' '" reader-printers or from the bound volumes in pa-
These patent collections are open to public use and ^n^Sa^^ """^'^ ^'■^^^"erally provided for a fee.
each of the Patent Depository Libraries fn addit"?n of amo^a fhl l^^T^'A '" '^^ "^"^ °^ P^'^"^ collections
fers the publications of the U.S Paten ClaSStion Sn.?rAf ^ '^^'^"^ Depository Libraries and in their
System (eg. The Manual of ClassiflcS Index mS n?T °^'^7"=^ '« the public, anyone contemplating use
U.S. Patent ClassiHcation. cfas Sfon DefinLns Sim H £•«'"'' '' h ^^"'""'1' "^'^'^ '^ advised to contact
etc.) and provides technical staff asSnce in their use o Is o fveVt nn^rMf"' "'^"^ ''' *^°""'=*'°" ^"^ ^ours.
to aid the public in gaining effective access to informa ^"'"'''^ mconven.ence.
State Borneo/ Library _. , ^ ^
Alabama Auburn University Libraries /fif^^i"'^ Contact
Birmingham Public Library ..'.■; J5°J tl^/il^. ^^'-2'
Arizona Tempe: Science Libra;cy. Arizona State University J2S5 QA<i?!n
California Los Angeles Public ^IWy university (602 965-7140
Sacramento: California State Library ..:.■; (q J ??$"I<55 ^''*' ^^^
San Diego Public Library ^ . J^ S ^?^«I?
r«i«r,H« Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse* ".'.'"' fiAgi 7,a1«n
Colorado Denver Public Library ^^^^ 738-5580
Delaware Newark: University of Delaware' :::;:::: ^n^i llllWl
Georgia ^'Sno^o'' ^'^^''^ ^""°"- ' ^'^'"'^y' °"°^8'"^' ^"^"'"'^^ ^^ ■" "
mil. Moscow°u?iversityof Idaho Library ::::::::; ffi !^t1??^
"'•no's Chicago Public Library . 5?V5( 5!^^^^^
... Springfield: Illinois State Library .■:::;;::; ^7 ?5?i55J
ndiana Indianapolis-Marion County pJblic Library J? 7 ?!^?^^
Louisiana Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library. Louisiana State ^ ^ ^^^'^^^
University ...
Maryland College Park: Engineering and Physical' Sciences Library. ^^^^ ^^^'^^'^
.- . Umversity of Maryland ' .,0,, .«. ,_„
Massachusetts Boston Public Library ^•*"') 454-3037
Michigan ^"^i^^hi^^;^^ Engineering Transportation Library'. University of " ' ^^'^ "'''"^ ^"^ ^"
Detroit Public Library' ::.':.'.';: J^j^^ J?t"Jl?J
m!.?.^??'^ Minneapolis Public Library & Information Center 2 n Vllfiin
Missouri Kansas City: Linda Hall Library ^^ 372-6570
St. Louis Public Library . . . .' .'::.';:::;::;:;::; SI$J ltu2m Ext. 390.
Montana BuUe: Montana College of Mineral Science and Technology ^''' ^^'
Slw Yort'" 11^'"'",3''=^ ^"^'/'y °f NewMexicoLibrary :::::::::■• fjg 2'^^:;^?
I>ew York Albany.- New York State Library ... JfTjC :,. .T?]
Buffalo and Erie County Public Library ! .' ! ! ! ! ! ! ^ ! tlf^ij' p„ ,„
North Carolina ^aTig'h°^^ 'H^'SlM'Sf ll^c''lfa,fu'-*'^t^' ■■■■•■- '^'' ''^«"»
oh.o c,„ciL^/Harito:'?o'u^my;*?ubr^^^^^^^^ .:.■;:: gi^j ^-^1^°
Cleveland Public Library ^ f?^ A??'So^n
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries' .':::;:;::;: 64 42^ 6282
Oklahoma . IS^Sl^^S^ST^r i5i^^;:;t^ Library ' ' ' ' g |f ^^ ^'^
Pennsylvania Cambridge Springs: Alliance CollegeYli^a?^ ■ '■ '. '. •' '. '. '. '. . ' - ' ' ml) tit 2m
Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library . . 2 5 448 n?i
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh ! ! ! ! ! ' " " 42 622 3138
Rhode Island ProSc'e'^lur^^^^^^^^^ Pennsylvania State University .' .' f8!4l 865-4861
South Carolina Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina f^l! lU'llio ^'^ ^^^
Tennessee Me^mphis & Shelby County Public Library and information ^^^^ ^'^""'^
Texas Austin: McKinney Engineering Library.' University of Texas.' .' .' .' ml) I7I- 1610
College Station: Sterling C. Evans Library. Texas A & M '
Dai^JSifc Library- ::::::::: S^i 'tum
Washinarnn f °"h°";'^^ ^°."^^«" library. Rice' University' .' ! .' .' .' ! .' ." ' ' " ' 73 527.1 01 Ext 7SR7
wS:S°" Mat^n^"CT"CdtT^ University of WaLngton ...:::: gi6 IIUZ ^'' "''
WiSonsin Engmeering Library, University of
Milwaukee Public Library ! i! i." I! i! :::;:;:; i .' [^5; ^5^-5o43
pr^!c£l:!;:^roS:Ki!;St^;^^ ^^ search Support Infbrmation System), which
•Collection organized by subject matter.
1040 OG 50
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Assistant Commissioner
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF February 18 1984
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual Filing Date of Oldest
New Case Awaiting Action
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY GROUP llO-D F Tai rpbt n .
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY. GROUP 1 20-C E VAN HORN. Director
82
l^_^*'"^^':i^ Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaimmg; Pore-Forming; Com'pos.tions"(Part)'e:g7coaUng Moidmg
-ompositions; Molding. Shaping, Treatmg Pro: •
Jssr?"?^~r^^^
RnlH^!,.T^"*^?v1;PP*"',".*/"'^.'^"^ products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus Stock Materials' Adh^i v..
Fr?A? l7ln'^HPMS^Tl",'v?i^?T^^^^^^^^ ^P^'-'*' ^"'"y Compositions; and Photography '^"'*"""' '^<1»'«'^=
RF WHITE Dt INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING. GROUP 170-
ing; Glass Manufac-
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS. PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS. GROUP 210-S W ENGLF Director
sJ,.h« *"?.^"''"''°". General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heat i ng^d R^laTed Art CoXmrs-
Switches; Photography; Motion Pictures; Horoloev Acoustics- RecnrHi.r« w.ioKi„„ c „ , conductors,
SPECIAL LAWS AdMrNlsTRATION. GROUP 22o'-KESNF?HrCA^^
ordnance. Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors- Acoustics 'cnmmi.n.,Vti«nc ' A-
r!)'/;f''*R'H°"''"°"t!i'^"'?'?= I°^Moes; Seismic Exploiing Ca.hSe Ra> T^be Scu try C^^^^^
?oZSerra^^r;hriS'^=/Bre^r[es^"^''"^«^- ""'^'^^ ^"'^^ '^^^^''^'^' ^^P^o.'^^^^Z:^)>o^.
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION. STORAGE. AND RETRIEVAL. GROUP 230-EARL LEVY Director
''°S:^TJ:!^'t:^tSl:t"''''''' ^^'^^*^'°"= ^--'^"^^ ^^'^ Processmg'^JipSo^n SrSversion;
RECEPTACLES CLEANING, WINDING. AND MEASURING, GROUP 240-
o. M. rUKLENZA. Director -
7.16-73
1-05-83
7-26-82
1-16-76
1-03-82
6-01-81
7-06-81
3-17-82
. Rotary . „,
ELECTRONIC COMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES, GROUP 250-S. S. MATTHEWS Director o in an
^^\™-Srd"5;rorks;fe -'--*^ Compotrc?rcu^;s!^5,reVra„,mis.ion '"^^'^
DESIGN. GROUP 290-k/nNETH L. CAGC Director . ^ , ,^ „
Industnal Arts; Household. Personal and Fine Arts. ' : " ' '''**"'
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA. GROUP 3I0-B R GRAY. Director mu.81
Conveyore; Hoisu; Eevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding Dispensina Fluid Snrin
&; a"* Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; ClassfyiSl and A^^^g^'ScS^ K*
MATErTaL Ihapin^ 'l°RT^r,'*p^5"f M.'rr.'^^'lt^PP""^^ R*"^«y* a^d RaiVsJfy SmJSien ' '
MATERIAL SHAPING. ARTICLE MANUFACTURING, TOOLS, GROUP 320-STEPHEN G KUNlN Director <i.5l »^
K. t. AtUERTER, Director ii fu-7*
Amusement and Exercising Devices; Projectors; Animal and Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvesting Earth Workina and
maJro'n^DiLSnaS. ^"'"""' ^""^ '*''"'*"= °*"''"^^^ "'^^^'^^^ ^^'^^^^ "T^^'^'^y: ^-5; TySewrife^^nlbr'
HEAT. POWER. AND FLUID ENGINEERING, GROUP 340-D J. STOCKING. Director 1 1 20-81
ZZ "ITf^ Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engin« and Pumps- Heat Gener-
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS. TEXTILES. MINING AND GEARING. GROUP 350-
A. L. SMITH. Director
^iil?'!l* ^li^^^l"'"; Racks; Cabinets; Closures; Supports; Furniture'; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe' Couplings: Joinis Miscel-
te"B"'i**'^"5' Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth EngineenVg; S %nlhnT' Min^g
Wells; Roads; Bndges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches. tanning, Mining.
ExpiraHon of patents. The patents within the range of numbers indicated below expire during February 1984 excent fho«* u/hi^i,
may have had their terms curtailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C 553 o"her p«fent?7ssued ;f"r tKe diS of he
rovLl"o7S"u.si"ISL'''°"' ""'' '"^^ ""•'"' '"'°^^ ''' ^"" ''^"" °f '^ y-" f- .hitm??e"i^nror'livrii5L?i^^^^^
Pfltcnts
Plant Patents Numbers 3.302.213 to 3.307.1W, inclusive
Numbers 2,707 to 2.722 inclusive
1040 OG 51
REEXAMINATIONS
MARCH 27, 1984
M«tter encloMd in heavy brwkeu [ ] appear, in the patent but forms no part of thi. reexamination .peciflcation; matter printed in italic indicate.
additioni made by reexamination.
Bl 3,381.046 (ISOtb)
JET AND ROCKET FUEL
Chvles A. Cohen, Wettfleld, and CUfTord W. Mueuig, RoMlle,
both of NJ^ auignon to Emo Research and Engineering
Company
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,119, No?. 27, 1981.
Reexamination CertiHcate for Patent No. 3,381,046, issued Apr.
30, 1968, Ser. No. 577,563, Aug. 15, 1966.
Int. a.3 C07C 5/03, 5/22
U.S. a. 585—253
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
B
group consisting of water and organic compounds which
convert organic isocyanates into the corresponding biur-
ets at elevated temperatures, the substituents of said or-
ganic compounds being inert in the biuretization process
and not forming a constituent of the biuret, at a tempera-
ture of from 60* to 250* C, and
removing excess [unreactedj hexa methylene diisocya-
nate, said process characterized in that the [organic]
hexamethylene diisocyanate and biuretizing agent are used
in proportions corresponding to a molar ratio of diisocya-
nate to monofunctional biuretizing agent of at least 11:1.
The patenubility of claim 14 is conflrmed.
Claims 1-13, 15 and 16, having been finally determined to be
unpatentable, are cancelled.
14. A process for the production of an improved fuel which
may be used in jet and rocket engines which comprises:
(a) hydrogenating an endo dimer of an alicyclic conjugated
diene selected from the group consisting of cyclopentadi-
ene, methylcyclopentadiene, and mixtures thereof to at
least the dihydrogenated derivatives;
(b) thermally treating said dihydrogenated dimer thereby
converting at least a portion of endo isomer to its exo
isomer;
(c) and hydrogenating the said exo dihydro isomer to the exo
tetrahydro isomer.
Bl 4.184,134 (182nd)
ELECTRICAL SWITCHING APPARATUS HAVING
CONVERTIBLE CONTACT STRUCTURE
Hugh Kane. Chagrin FalU. and Bruce A. Oellerich, Mentor,
both of Ohio, anignors to GTE Products Corp., Waltham,
Mass.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000.323, Feb. 4. 191^.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,184,134, issued Jan.
15, 1980. Ser. No. 933.320, Aug. 14, 1978.
Int. a.3 HOIH 1/58
U.S. a. 335—198
Bl 3,976,622 (181st)
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
POLYISOCYANATES WITH A BIURET STRUCTURE
Kuno Wagnen Johannes Eimen Joachim Zimer, all of Leverlcu-
sen; Rainer Raab, Odenthal, and Dietrich Liebsch, Leverlcu-
sen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 441,778, Feb. 12, 1974, Pat. No. 3,903.127.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000.334. Mar. 1, 1983.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3.976,622, issued Aug.
24, 1976, Ser. No. 578,557, May 19, 1975.
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 17,
1973, 2308015
Int. a.i C08G 18/79
MS. a. 528—67
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 2 and 3, having been finally determined to be unpat-
entable, are cancelled.
Claim 1 is determined to be patentable as amended:
Claims 4 and 5, dependent on amended claims, are deter-
mined to be patentable.
1. In the production of a polyurethane resin wherein a poly-
isocyanate is reacted with an active hydrogen containing mate-
rial, the improvement wherein said polyisocyanate has a biuret
structure and a maximum viscosity of 50.000 cP at 20* C. and
is produced by a process comprising
A. reacting (1) excess quantities of [an organic] hexameth-
ylene diisocyanate [having aliphatically bound isocyanate
groups] with (2) a biuretizing agent selected from the
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1 and 2, having been finally determined to be unpat-
entable, are cancelled.
Claims 3 and 4 arc determined to be patenuble as amended:
Claims 5-10, dependent on amended claims, are determined
to be patentable.
New claims 11-19 are added and determined to be patent-
able.
3. An electrical switching apparatus [in accordance with
claim 2] having a convertible contact module for selectively
providing normally open or normally closed contact operation
comprising
supporting structure;
a contact actuator mounted in said supporting structure and
reciprocally movable with respect thereto;
a convertible contact module having first and second contact
terminals on the exterior thereof, said convertible contact
module being removably mounted in said supporting struc-
ture in engagement with said contact actuator m either of two
1391
1392
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27. 1984
positions respectively providing normally open and normally
closed contact conditions between said contact terminals;
first and second conductive members mounted on said support-
ing structure, each having a contact region for making
contact with a contact terminal of the convertible contact
module when the convertible contact module is mounted in
the supporting structure in either of said two positions:
holding means for releasably holding the convertible contact
module in the supporting structure in either of said two posi-
tions with the contact terminals of the convertible contact
module making electrical contact with the contact regions of
the conductive members; and
first and second connecting means on said first and second
conductive members, respectively, for permitting external
connections to said conductive members, each connecting
means being spaced from the associated contact region and
from the holding means whereby when said convertible
contact module is released by said holding means, removed
from the supporting structure, and changed from one position
to the other, the connecting means and external connections
. made thereto do not interfere with release and movement of
the convertible contact module and are not disturbed;
wherein
said contact actuator is reciprocally movable between two spaced
positions;
said convertible contact module includes
a housing,
^ said contact terminals being mounted on said housing at
opposite sides thereof and extending outwardly from said
housing, said contact terminals passing through the hous-
ing to the interior thereof and
contact elements within said housing engaging said contact
actuator when the convertible contact module is mounted
in the supporting structure in either first or second respec-
tively inverted positions, the convertible contact module
being in a normally open condition with the contact ele-
ments providing an open circuit between the contact termi-
nals when mounted in one position and being in a normally
closed condition with the contact elements providing a
closed circuit between the contact terminals when mounted
in the other position; and
said contact actuator moves the contact elements to produce a
closed circuit between the contact terminals of a convertible
contact module in the normally open condition upon move-
ment from one spaced position to the other spaced position,
and moves the contact elements to produce an open circuit
between the contact terminals of a convertible contact module
in the normally closed condition upon movement from the
one spaced position to the other spaced position;
and wherein
the portion of each conUct terminal of the convertible
contact module exterior of the housing has generally flat
planar opposite surfaces, and the corresponding surfaces
of the two contact terminals lie generally in the same
plane; and
the contact regions of the two conductive members lie gen-
erally in the same plane whereby when the convertible
contact module is mounted in the supporting structure in
either of the two inverted positions, a surface of each
contact terminal is in electrical contact with a contact
region of a conductive member.
Bl 4^10,376 (183rd)
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR RECEPTACLE
Donald W. K. Hughes, Mechanicsburg, and Ronald W. Myera,
Landisburg, both of Pa., auignorc to Amp Incorporated,
Harrisburg, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 967,441, Dec. 12, 1978.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,100, Nor. 4, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,210,376, iacued Jut
1, 1980, Ser. No. 14,442, Feb. 23, 1979.
Int. a.3 HOIR 23/72. 23/10. 23/56
U.S. a. 339—17 LC
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1, 4, 6, 8, and 9 are determined to be patentable as
amended:
Claims 2, 3, 5, 7, and 10, dependent on amended claims, are
determined to be patentable.
1. An electrical connector receptacle of the type comprising
an insulating housing having a plug-receiving end and a rear-
ward end, a plug-receiving opening extending into said plug-
receiving end, said opening having opposed internal sidewalls
and opposed internal endwalls, said housing having oppositely
directed external sidewalls and oppositely directed external
endwalls, a plurality of electrical conductors in side-by-side
spaced-apart relationship, each of said conductors comprising
a contact spring portion extending from one of said internal
sidewalls at a location adjacent to said plug-receiving end
diagonally into said opening and towards the opposite internal
sidewall, and each conductor having a lead portion extending
from said plug-receiving end transversely through said housing
[between] from said one internal sidewall [and J to the exte-
rior of the adjacent external sidewall and along said adjacent
external sidewall towards said rearward end, said plug-receiv-
ing opening being dimensioned to receive a connector plug
having spaced-apart contact members therein which engage
said contact spring portions of said conductors, said connector
receptacle being characterized in that:
said plug-receiving end has a circumferentially continuous
frame portion which surrounds said plug-receiving open-
ing,
conductor-receiving aperture means [extending] extends
through said adjacent external sidewall to said one internal
sidewall, said conductor-receiving aperture means being
spaced from said plug-receiving end and adjacent to said
frame portion, said conductor-receiving aperture means
communicating with said plug-receiving opening,
said conductors [extending] extend through said conduc-
tor-receiving aperture means, said contact springs extend-
ing into said plug-receiving opening from said conductor-
receiving aperture means, and
a plurality of side-by-side channels in said adjacent external
sidewall [extending] extend from said conductor-receiv-
ing aperture means to said rearward end, said lead por-
tions of said conductora also extending across said aidja-
cent external sidewall and being in said channels, said
conductors extending from said adjacent external sidewall
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1393
across said rearward end and having end portions which
extend beyond the other one of said external sidewalls,
every other one of said conductors extending subsUntially
normally from said adjacent external sidewall across said
rearward end, the remaining conductors extendmg
obliquely away from said adjacent external sidewall and
across said rearward end whereby said end portions of
said conductors are offset from each other.
Bl 4,321.996 (184tli)
BELT ATTACHMENT FOR TIRE CHAINS
Reni J. Martinelli, Gackamu, Oreg., assignor to Bums Bros..
Portland, Oreg.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 3,273, Jan. 15, 1979, Pat. No.
4,280,545.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,373, May 2, 1983.
Reexamination Certiflcate for Patent No. 4,321,956, issued Mar.
30, 1982, Ser. No. 122,195, Feb. 19, 1980.
Int. a.J B60C 27/00
U.S. a. 152—222
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT;
The patentability of claim 2 is confirmed.
Claim 1 is determined to be patentable as amended;
\. In a tire chain,
a tire chain lateral member adapted to extend adjacent a
lateral side of a vehicle tire,
a first lug secured to a first end of said lateral member,
a second lug secured to a second end of said lateral member,
said second lug having a slot,
a belt having a first end secured to said first lug,
and a buckle for location along said lateral side of said vehi-
cle tire, said buckle having an aperture therethrough and
a hook on one end thereof turned back at an acute angle
[to] outwardly away from a laterally outwardly facing
side of said buckle, wherein said hook is adapted for re-
ception through the slot in said second lug when said tire
chain is secured to said tire,
a loop of said belt between first and second ends thereof
extending through the aperture of said buckle from the
inwardly facing side of said buckle adjacent the lateral
side of said tire, said buckle including a slidable member
passing through said loop for holding said loop in releas-
ably secured relation to said buckle when the second end
of said belt is drawn up,
wherein the second end of said belt extends from said buckle
toward said first end when said tire chain is secured to said
tire while being movable laterally outwardly for routing
said buckle and rapidly releasing said hook from said
second lug to release said tire chain from said tire.
Bl 4,337.117 (185th)
DECAY RESISTANT MATERIAL
Warren J. Bodendorf, Montgomery, and Alphonac R. Presto,
Holyoke. both of Mass., assignors to Texon Inc., South Had-
ley, Mass.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000.294, No*. 22, 1982.
Reexamination Certifleatc for Patent No. 4,337,117, issued Jun
29, 1982, Ser. No. 177.779. Aug. 13, 1980.
Int. a.J D21H 5/22
U.8. a. 162—161
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION. IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1-3, having been finally determined to be unpatenta-
ble, are cancelled.
Claim 4 is determined to be patentable as amended:
Claim 5, dependent on an amended claim, is determined to
be patentable.
New claims 6-17 are added and determined to be patentable.
6. A process for manufacturing a wet laid, synthetic fibrous
sheet material resistant to decay by microbial organisms, accord-
ing to papermaking techniques and comprising the steps of
a. forming a furnish by the steps in the sequence listed and
which consist essentially of:
1. providing a dispersion of fibers consisting essentially of
cellulosic fibers,
2. adding a cationic polymer in an amount sufficient to retain
greater than 99% of the amount of metal quinolinolate
added in step 3. below in said sheet material during forma-
tion,
3. adding an anionic metal-quinolinolate emulsion providing
from 0375 to 0 9 parts by weight metal quinolinolate based
on JOG parts by weight fiber, and
4. adding a polymer colloid in an amount sufficient to prevent
coagulation of the binder added in step C by said metal
quinolinolate,
b. forming the furnish into a web,
c. saturating the web with a binder, and
d. drying the web to form a fibrous sheet with fibers and
quinolinolate uniformly distributed throughout the binder
and where the amount of metal quinolinolate retained in the
sheet material is greater than 99% of the amount of metal
quinolinolate included in the furnish.
9 A process for manufacturing a wet laid, synthetic fibrous
sheet material resistant to decay by microbial organisms, accord-
ing to papermaking techniques and comprising the steps of
a. forming a furnish by the steps in the sequence listed and
which consist essentially of:
1. providing a dispersion of fibers consisting essentially of
cellulosic fibers,
I adding a cationic polymer in an amount sufficient to retain
greater than 99% of the amount of metal quinolinolate
added in step 3. below in said sheet material during forma-
tion,
3. adding an anionic metal-quinolinolate emulsion providing
from 0375 to 0 9 parts by weight metal quinolinolate based
on 100 parts by weight fiber, and
4. adding a polymer colloid in an amount between 5 to 12
parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight fiber,
b. forming the furnish into a web,
c. saturating the web with a binder, and
d. drying the web to form a fibrous sheet with fibers and
quinolinolate uniformly distributed throughout the binder
and where the amount of metal quinolinolate retained in the
sheet material is greater than 99% of the amount of metal
quinolinolate included in the furnish.
15. A process for manufacturing a wet laid, synthetic fibrous
1394
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27. 1984
sheet material resistant to decay by microbial organisms according
to papermaking techniques and comprising the steps of:
a, forming furnish by the steps in the sequence listed and which
consist essentially of:
1. providing a dispersion of fibers consisting essentially of
cellulosic fibers,
2. adding a cationic polyelectrolyte polymer in an amount
from 0.4 to 2. 0 parts by weight based on 100 parts by weight
fiber, the amount of cationic polyelectrolyte polymer being
sufficient to retain greater than 99% of the amount of
copperS-quinolinolate in step 3. below in said sheet mate-
rial during formation,
3. adding an anionic copper-S-quinolinolate emulsion provid-
ing from 0.375 to 0.9 parts by weight copperS-quinolino-
late based on 100 parts by weight fiber.
4. adding a polymer colloid in an amount from 5 to 12 parts
by weight based on 100 parts by weight fiber,
b. forming the furnish into a web,
c. saturating the web with a binder, and
d drying the web to form a fibrous sheet with fibers and copper-
S-quinolinolate uniformly distributed throughout the binder
and where the amount of copper-S-quinolinolate retained in
the sheet material is greater than 99% of the copper-S-
quinolinolate included in the furnish.
Bl 4,344,132 (186th)
SERIAL STORAGE INTERFACE APPARATUS FOR
COUPLING A SERUL STORAGE MECHANISM TO A
DATA PROCESSOR INPUT/OUTPUT BUS
Jerry D. Dixon, Boca Raton; Robert H. FarreU, Coral Spring,
and Francis R. Koperda, Delray Beach, aU of Fla^ aaeignora to
International Buainess Machines Corporation, Amonk, N.Y.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,332, Feb. 18, 1983.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4^4,132, issued Aug.
10, 1982, Ser. No. 103,782, Dec. 14, 1979.
Filed Feb. 18, 1983, Ser. No. 103,782
Int. a.3 G06F 3/00, 5/06
U.S. a. 364—200
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION. IT HAS BEEN
DETERMINED THAT:
Claims 1, 5, and 10 are determined to be patentable as
amended:
Claims 2-4, 6-9, and 11-16, dependent on amended claims,
are determined to be patentable.
5. Serial storage interface apparatus for coupling a serial
storage mechanism to an input/output (I/O) bus of a data
processor and comprising:
address circuitry receiving address information from the
input/output bus for performing an address comparison
operation for locating the proper starting address storage
location in the serial storage mechanism:
a first-in-first-out (FIFO) bulTer storage mechanism;
first dau transfer circuitry for coupling the FIFO buffer
storage mechanism to the daU processor I/O bus;
. ,-.!-.
SXi
-I r'* *
J I J tiKi
second data transfer circuitry for coupling the FIFO buffer
storage mechanism to the serial storage mechanism;
bus utilization monitoring circuitry responsive to the data
transfer activity of the first data transfer circuitry for
generating signals representing values of I/O bus avail-
ability;
and speed control circuitry responsive to the signals
representing values of I/O bus availability for causing the
serial storage mechanism to operate at different speeds for
different values of I/O bus availability [to the serial
storage interface apparatus] during data transfer operations
and responsive to a compare signal from the address circuitry
for causing the serial storage mechanism to operate at a high
speed and maintain the high speed for the entire comparison
operation for locating the proper starting address in the serial
storage.
^
REISSUES
MARCH 27, 1984
Matter encloied in heavy brackeU I 3 appears in the original patent but form, no part of thii reiwue >peciflcation: matter printed in italics
indicates addition! made by reiuue.
Re. 31,541
WEBBED HARNESSING DEVICE
William E. Wood, Hudson, Msm., aasignor to Dennison Manu>
facturing Company, Framingham, Mass.
Original No. 4,137,606, dated Feb. 6, 1979, Ser. No. 801,448,
May 27, 1977. Application for reissue Mar. 24, 1980, Ser. No.
132,732
Int. C\? B65D 63/00
U.S. a. 24-16 PB 11 Claims
9. A harnessing device comprising
a locking head having a channel therethrough,
a webbed strap attached to said head and having rungs joined to
one another by centrally depressiH, stretchable webbing,
said strap being stretched with the spacing between rungs con-
trolled by the extent of stretching of said strap and the stretch-
ing causing a reduction in the thinness of said webbing by a
prescribed amount according to the extent to which the strap
is stretched, said rungs having a profile controlled by stretch-
ing a plurality of segments, including perpendicular segments
that are caused to depart from their initial perpendicularity
by an amount that is controlled by the extent to which the
strap is stretched,
said locking head further including a locking pawl in said head
for securing said strap therein.
Re. 31.542
SAFETY ATTACHMENT FOR LAWN MOWERS
Glenn C. Hetrick, 2045 E. Parkway Dr., Altoona, Pa. 16602
Original No. 4,171,608, dated Oct. 23, 1979, Ser. No. 853.045,
Nov. 21, 1977. Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 729,113, Oct.
4, 1976, abandoned. Application for reissue Oct. 10, 1980, Ser.
No. 196,086
Int. a.3 AOID 55/ IS
U.S. O. 56—295 45 Claims
Re. 31.543
CURABLE COMPOSITIONS
Howard M. Bank, FrMland, and Keith W. Michael. Midland,
both of Mich., aaaignors to Dow Coming Corporation, Mid-
land, Mich.
Original No. 3,971,747, datwi Jul. 27, 1976, Sar. No. 567,148,
Apr. 11, 1975. Application for reiuue Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No.
423,752
Int. a.i C08K 3/40: O08G 77/06
U.S. a. 523-435 jj 0.1^
1. A method of preparing compositions containing silicon-
oxygen-carbon bonds comprising reacting under substantially
anhydrous conditions
A. an organosilicon compound conuining at least one
■tSiOH group with
B. a compound containing at least one cpoxy group, no
hydroxy! groups and selected from the group consisting of
aliphatic, cycloaliphaiic and heirocyclic epoxy reactants.
silylated epoxides and polyglycidyl ethers ofnovalac conden-
sation products, said reaction being carried out in the pres-
ence of a catalytic amount of
C. an aluminum compound selected from the group consist-
ing of
a. Al(OR)3 in which R is either a hydrogen atom or is
selected from the group consisting of alkyl radicals
contaning from I to 20 inclusive carbon atoms or aryl
and aryl-containing hydrocarbon radicals containing
from 6 to 24 inclusive carbon atoms;
!(b)
AKOR)^OCR')j_,
N
o
in which R is as previously defined, R' is selected from the
group consisting of the hydrogen atom, alkyl radicals conuin-
ing from I to 30 inclusive carbon atoms and aryl or aryl-con-
taining radicals of at least 6 carbon atoms, n having a value of
from 0 to 2 and condensates of such compounds;
c. aluminum salts of the formula
H+A|-(0R)4
in which R is as previously defined;
d. aluminosiloxy compounds of the formula
=A1.0SIR)2
in which R2 is selected from the group consisting of —OR
radicals in which R is as defined,
30. A cutting structure adapted to be mounted for rotary move-
ment with a drive shaft, comprising:
a substantially rigid disc portion carried by the drive shetft; and
a cutter bar portion carried by the disc portion on one face
thereof, the cutter bar portion extending in a material cutting
mode across the disc portion without the ends of said cutter
bar portion extending beyond the peripheral edge of the disc
portion.
—OCR
H
o
radicals in which R' is as defined, monovalent hydrocarbon or
halohydrocarbon radicals containing from I to 30 mclusive
carbon atoms, and siloxane moieties of the formula
— OSiOj_,
h
in which R^ is selected from the group consisting of OR radi-
cals in which R is as defined,
1395
1396
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
—OCR'
II
o
mgly charging and discharging at least one capacitor which is
connected in series with said primary winding of said transformer
and which is discharged therethrough, a direct current voltage
intermediate source, and switching means responsive to said con-
^ ' ^"'^ °' ^^°^f o»^ '^opocitor at a frequency which is substantially
inversely proportional to the square of said voltage applied to said
—OCR' current supply unit.
H
o , _
or — OSIR32 bonding, R, R' and R2 being as previously de- ««• 31,545
fined; and FEED-FORWARD AMPLinER
e. aluminum chelates formed by reacting compounds (a). ****'^ck A. Quinn, Beaverton, Oreg., assignor to Tektronix, Inc
(b) or (c) with sequestering agents in which the coordi- »««*erton, Oreg. "
nating atoms are oxygen. Original No. 4,146,844, dated Mar. 27, 1979, Ser. No. 846 743
Re. 31 544
CURRENT UNIT FOR ARC WELDING
John B. G. Hedberg, Hanover, N.H., assignor to Thermal Dy-
namics Corporation, West Labanon, N.H.
Original No. 4,159,409, dated Jun. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 891,821
Mar. 30, 1978. Division of Ser. No. 795,501, May 10, 1977,'
abandoned. Application for reissue Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No'
188,785
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 12, 1976.
19532/76
Int. a.^ B23K 9/10
U.S. a. 219-130.21 ,0 aaims
2. An arc welding current supply unit arranged to be fed with
alternating current voltage and to provide direct current for weld-
ing electrodes, said unit including a controlled frequency converter
operating with a half period which is less than the average duration
of the current and voltage transients caused by short circuits
through droplets of the weld material and adapted to be connected
to the welding electrodes through a transformer, a control device
for controlling said converter in a manner such that the arc power
remains substantially unchanged irrespective of changes in load
caused by the welding operation, wherein current pulses are
formed in the secondary winding of the transformer by alternat-
?S'?J' '^^' ^PP"^^®" '<"■ ""eiMue Jan. 22, 1981^ Ser.' No!
227,286
Int. a.3 H03F 1/26. 3/45
U.S. a. 330-149 8 Claims
6. A feedforward amplifier comprising:
an emitter-coupled pair of input transistors having a predeter-
mined resistance in the emitter path thereof:
a first pair of transistors connected in common-base configura-
tion, the emitters of which are connected to respective collec-
tors of said input transistors:
an emitter-coupled pair of correction transistors having a prede-
termined resistance in the emitter path thereof so as to match
the gain of said correction transistors with said input transis-
tors, the bases of said correction transistors being connected to
respective collectors of said input transistors and the collectors
thereof being cross-coupled to the respective collectors of said
first pair of common-base transistors to provide collector-cur-
rent summing nodes: and
a second pair of transistors connected in common base configu-
ration to provide an output signal, the emitters of which are
connected to respective collector current summing nodes.
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED MARCH 27, 1984 ^
Illustrations for plant patents are usually in color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,210
ALMOND X PEACH HYBRID ROOTSTOCK TREE
(HANSEN 2168)
Carl J. Hansen, deceased, late of Citrus Heights, Calif, (by Betty
C. Hansen, successor), assignor to The Regents of the Univer-
sity of California, Berkeley, Calif.
Filed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,612
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/03
U.S. a. Plt.-30 I a^„
1. A new and distmct variety of almond X peach hybrid
rootstock tree substantially as illustrated and described, par-
ticularly characterized by a high percentage of successful
reproductions from hardwood cuttings, by a deep rooting,
adventitious root system providing excellent anchorage, by
immunity to root-knot nematode infections, Mehidygyne incog-
nita acrita and M. Javanica. and by a tree generally resembling
the Hansen 536 but slightly more vigorous, roots from
cuttings more consistently, and with tree branches which have
tnore green and less red color of the developing leaves and
shoots.
5,211
NECTARINE TREE, "SUMMER RED"
Donald J. Jost, 9633 S. Rio Vista Ave., Reedley, CaUf. 93654
Filed Dec. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 446,851
Int. a.J AOIH 5/03
U.S. a. Pit.— 41 1 Q^„
1. A new and distinct variety of nccUrine tree which bears
generally yellow-fieshed. clingstone fruit of large and uniform
sire and characterized as to novelty by bearing fruit which
ripens a minimum of four days before the Flamekist variety of
nectarine tree, an unpatented variety developed by the U.S.
Department of Agriculture, and by a skin which has at full
maturity a waxy and bright finish and extensive red coloration,
typically spreading over from 60 to 90 percent of its surface
area, with the suture coloration blending into the general skin
coloration.
5,212
RAPHIOLEPIS INDICA CV. MONRUCE
William B. Usrey, Glendora, Calif., assignor to Monrovia Nurs-
ery Company, Azusa, Calif.
Filed Aug. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 411,825
Int. a.5 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 54 1 Q^„
1. A new and distinct selection of Raphiolepis as substan-
tially shown and described herein, that is characterized by a
dense growth habit; a compact inflorescence; flowers double
and with large spreading light pink petals.
/
1397
a
PATENTS
GRANTED MAR. 27, 1984
ERRATA
For ..
See
^^^^^ PATENT NO.
07(M)57 4 43g 35
7\[W7^ 4,438.978
^ITZI 4,439.097
^ ' ^~^^ ~ 4.439,098
414-045
l;T_r.. 4.439.099
/,r_\\: 4.439.100
406^99^ '-'^^''^^
T^ZZn 4,439,200
l^l'ltl 4,439.348
502-180 4 439 349
^"^ ^^ ' 4,439.350
PATENTS
GRANTED MARCH 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4438 531
LOW FRICTION MEANS TO FAaLITATE PUTTING ON
AN UNDERWATER DIVING SUIT
Richard W. Long, and Robert T. Stlnton, both of San Diego,
Calif., anignon to Diving Unlimited International, Inc., San
Diego, Calif.
Filed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,479
Int. a.3 A62B n/00; B63C 11/04
U.S. a. 2—2.1 R
first web space between the thumb and index finger apply-
ing a substantially outward force to the thumb's metacar-
pal phalangeal joint.
4,438,333
INTERLINING FOR GARMENTS AND METHOD FOR
THE MANUFACTURE THEREOF
6 Clainia JoMf Hefele, Grifelfing, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Kufher Textilwerkc KG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,658
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 3,
1980, 3021039
24 Int. a.) A41D 1/00
U.S. a. 2-97 50 Qaims
m^.,imm^^f^fr^-.^,jk^^ ,
1. In an underwater diving suit having an opening therein to
permit a diver to insert a portion of the diver's body there-
through when putting on the suit, said opening having tight
fitting exposed rubber sealing means adjacent thereto for seal-
ing the interior of the diving suit against leakage, the improve-
ment comprising:
a tubular skirt of flexible low friction material affixed at one
of its ends to the interior of said diving suit adjacent said
exposed rubber sealing means, said skirt being of sufficient
length to substantially cover said exposed rubber sealing
means when said unit is being put on;
whereby the diver's body portion slides along said skirt
, shielded from said exposed rubber sealing means with
frictional drag substantially reduced when the diver puts
on the diving suit;
said skirt being manually retractable into the diving suit after
the diving suit is put on to permit said exposed rubber
sealing means to directly engage the diver's body portion
and thereby seal the interior of the diving suit against
leakage.
4,438,532
PROTECTIVE GLOVE
Alexander F. Campaneila, 22 15tb St., Buffalo, N.Y. 14213, and
J. David Bannon, 246 Bryant St., Buffalo, N.Y. 14222
FUed May 23, 1983, Ser. No. 497,055
Int. a.} A41D 13/10
U.S. a. 2-16 10 Oaims
1. A protective glove, comprising:
at least one finger stall poriion enclosing the fingers;
an intermediate poriion enclosing the hand;
a cuff poriion enclosing the wrist;
a thumb stall poriion enclosing the thumb;
a rigid thumb protecting member secured to the glove and
spanning the metacarpal phalangeal joint of the thumb;
and
means secured to the protecting member and located in the
1. In a garment having an interiining for stiffening parts of
the garment, an improved interlining which imparts bulk and a
smooth hand feel to the garment, said interlining comprising:
(a) an interiining backing material,
(b) textile fiock fibres having a fibre length of 0.5 to 2.0 mm.
(c) a Hock binder comprising a screen like applied print
applied to the interiining backing material for anchoring
the fiock fibres, the fiock binder consisting of a polymer
material at least pari of which is cross-linked.
4,438,534
PASSIVE DISPENSER
George B. Keyes, and Randall G. Richards, both of Cincinnati,
Ohio, assignors to The Drackett Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Mar. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 354,485
Int. a? E03G 9/02
U.S. CI. 4-227 7 Gaims
M.
1. A passive dispenser for containing a quantity of a first
solution and a quantity of a second solution and for co-dispens-
ing a predetermined volume of said solutions into a body of
liquid in which said dispenser is placed, in response to the level
of said body of liquid being lowered from a first elevation to a
second elevation, the dispenser comprising:
a first product chamber, said product chamber containing a
water-soluble cake forming, upon dissolution, the first
solution;
a vent conduit extending upwardly from the top of the first
chamber;
1040 O.G.— 56
1399
1400
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
a first refill/discharge pathway providing fluid communica-
tion between said body of liquid and said first product
chamber, said pathway being a siphon conduit;
a second product chamber, said second product chamber
being separate and apart from said first product chamber;
a third product chamber above the second chamber, which
chambers are separate and apart one from the other;
a water-soluble cake being contained in at least one of said
second and third product chambers forming, upon dissolu-
tion, the second solution;
a conduit to provide fluid communication between the sec-
ond chamber and the third chamber, said conduit entering
the second chamber proximate the bottom thereof;
vent conduits extending upwardly from the respective tops
of said second and third product chambers; and
a second refill/discharge pathway providing fluid communi-
cation between said body of liquid and said second prod-
uct chamber, said second refill/discharge pathway being a
siphon conduit, whereby in response to the level of said
body of liquid being lowered from a first elevation to a
second elevation, solution contained within the second
and the third Chambers is dispensed into the body of liq-
uid, and solution contained within the first chamber is
dispensed into said body of liquid.
valve connected along said fresh water supply pipe, a handle
pivotally extending from said high pressure valve for flushing
operation thereof, a control valve along said drain pipe com-
prising a cylinder connected across said drain pipe and a piston
slidable in said cylinder for regulating the flow of used water
4,438,535
SEAT AND COVER ASSEMBLY FOR A TOILET BOWL
Candelario Paredes, 6608 Briarhaven Dr., Dallas, Tex. 75240
Continuadon of Ser. No. 190,374, Sep. 24, 1980, Pat. No.
4,342,124. This application May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,805
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 3, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.5 A47K 13/00
U.S. a. 4-234 9 ci,i„.
through said cylinder, a connecting arm between said piston
and handle, and means for adjustably coupling said connecting
arm along said handle, whereby the proportion of tank water
used per flush is increased by coupling the connecting arm
closer to the free end of the handle and decreased by coupling
the connecting arm closer to the pivoted end of the handle.
4438 537
LIQUID DIRECTIONAL FLOW APPARATUS
Damon R. Bickle, 6 Rustic St., Kenmore, Queensland, Australia
(4069)
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 352,566, Feb. 26, 1982,
abandoned. This application Apr. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 370,067
Qaims priority, applicatioa Australia, Mar. 2, 1981, PE7792
Int. a.J E04H 3/16. 3/18
US. a. 4-492 4ci.in„
1. A seat and cover assembly for a toilet bowl, said assembly
comprising a seat member, a cover member for said seat mem-
ber, means for mounting said seat member and said cover
member relative to said bowl for pivotal movement between
an upright position and a lowered position, spring means oper-
atively engaging said seat member and said cover member for
biasing said seat member towards said cover member and said
cover member towards said seat member in all positions of said
members, and means for quick-releasably securing said cover
member in said upright position.
4438 536
HIGH PRESSURE TOILET WATER FEEDER
CONVERSATION TANK
Aljwto RlTera, 1266 Olmstead Ave., Apt. ^F, Bronx, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 330,029
iBt a.3 E03D 1/02
UA a 4-343 J ciain
1. A high pressure toilet water feeder conservation tank
assembly, comprising in combination, a tank for storing used
water, a drain pipe from said tank being connected at its lower
end to a fresh water supply pipe of a toilet, a high pressure
1. A liquid directional flow apparatus including:
an elongate mounting tube having an inner portion engage-
able in an outlet pipe of a swimming pool and an outer
portion which is enlarged relative to the inner portion and
wherein the outer portion has a side wall that curves
outwardly and then inwardly relative to the longitudinal
axis of the elongate mounting tube; an eyeball shaped
nozzle having a channel extending therethrough which is
mounted in the outer portion of the mounting tube and
wherein the outer surface of the nozzle has a curvature at
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1401
least substantially complementary to the inner surface of
the outer portion whereby said nozzle may be pivoted
relative to said mounting tube; and
an inner clamping ring having a curved inner surface en-
gageable with a curved outer surface of said outer portion
of the mounting tube and pivotable thereto during installa-
tion; and
locking means engageable with said inner clamping ring to
orient the inner clamping ring in a direction substantially
parallel to the plane of an outer wall of the swimming pool
when the liquid directional flow apparatus is installed in
said outlet pipe to enable the eyeball nozzle to be oriented
in' a direction substantially normal to the plane of said
outer wall.
4,438,538
COMBINATION TOOL FOR CARPENTRY
Peter Larsen, 2186 Montgomery, Cardif by the Sea, Calif. 92007
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,338
Int. a.J B25F 1/00: GOIB 19/00
U.S. a. 7-164 14 Gaims
1. A carpentry tool comprising:
a housing of generally elongated rectangular configuration
having at least two orihogonally-related, straight-edged
sides and at least one substantially planar face;
fixed abutment means extending from said planar surface
adjacent one end thereof, said abutment means defining a
plane facing the other end of said housing and being trans-
versely perpendicular to said planar surface and defining a
T-square with pivot points at either end thereof coincident
with the intersection of the ends of said abutment with the
edges of said planar surface;
planar fixed indicia along at least one side of said housing
cooperatively arranged with one of said pivot points on
the opposite side of said housing to indicate and establish
an angle with respect to an external elongated member
when said pivot point is an engagement with the sides of
the external member; and
orthogonally related bubble level elements fixed to said
housing;
whereby when one of said pivot points is engaged with the
edge of a structural member mounted at an angle with
respect to the horizontal and the applicable bubble is
centered, the existing angle or pitch of said structural
member with respect to horizontal may be determined
directly from said indicia.
4,438,539
ACTUATOR FOR GENERATING TOOL HEAD
Raymond A. Stephens, Sterling Heights, Mich., assignor to The
Valeron Corporation, Troy, Mich.
Filed Nov. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,251
Int. a? B23G 1/26
MS. a. 10—120.5 R 18 Claims
1. Apparatus for moving an output member in response to
movement of an input member comprising:
first and second members;
means coupling at least one of the first and second members
to the input member for providing relative linear move-
ment between the first and second members in response to
movement by the input member;
means for imparting rotary movement to the second member
in response to the relative linear movement, the means for
impariing rotary movement comprising at least one helical
key protruding from one of the first and second members
and at least one helical slot in the other of the first and
second members matingly engaging at least a portion of
the at least one helical key; and
means for imparting linear movement to the output member
In response to a rotary movement by the second member.
4,438.540
WRINGABLE MOP ASSEMBLY
Walter H. Scnour, Ada, Mich., anignor to Amway Corporation,
Ada, Mich.
Filed Nov. 20, 1981. Ser. No. 32332
Int. a.J A47L 13/46
U.S. O. 15—119 A 3 Oaims
1. A sponge mop comprising:
a sponge;
a channel pinchingly securing said sponge and including a
first aperiure;
mounting means adapted to receive a mop handle and defin-
ing a pair of second aperiures;
a clamp including a pair of ears extending through said pair
of second apertures to hingedly connect said clamp to said
mounting means;
drawing means for drawing said clamp toward said mount-
ing means to secure said channel between said clamp and
said mounting means, whereby said clamp pivots about
said ears as said drawing means draws said clamp toward
said mounting means;
a detent ub extending from one of said clamp and said
mounting means into said first aperiure in said channel to
prevent said channel from shifting laterally with respect to
said mounting means and said clamp;
a bridge movable relative said sponge and carrying a pair of
parallel wringer members disposed on opposite sides of
said sponge, said bridge defining a third aperiure; and
1402
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
a wnnger handle pivotally mounted to said mounting means
and mcludmg a tab extending through said third aperture
m said bridge, whereby as said wringer handle is pivoted
with respect to said mounting means, said wringer handle
pivots with respect to said bridge about said tab forcing
said bridge to move relative said sponge to cause said
wringer members to wring said sponge.
4438 541
TOOTHBRUSH WITH HEAT SHRUNK SYNTHETIC
HLAMENTS
Joseph Jacob, 1035 Washington St., Wooster, Ohio 44691, and
Charles J. Love, 1221 Tower BIdg., Lorain, Ohio 44053
Division of Ser. No. 946,608, Oct. 2, 1978, abandoned. This
appUcation May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,793
Int. a.J A46B 9/04
U.S. a. 15-167 R 3 cai^
% Pl ^ et\ en
1. A toothbrush having a base and a plurality of bristles, each
of which IS composed of a heat shrunk synthetic filament held
l^nttic* f *'f'"P^'''^ r^"^*^ ^-*^^P«*^ configuration by two
lengths of straight, substantially parallel, closely spaced side
hiir"!' '"'""' '^"'*' '^^ *'^^ '«8s and return bend of each
.hn ll !".* contracted to a reduced size from being heat
shrunk while held over a form rail so as to form tightly adja-
cent filaments with a tight return bend, whereby each bristle
acts as a dry scoop to cut into and scarf away dental plaque.
4,438,542
R .. .. c u . ^^^ STORAGE DRIVE
Bernhard Schuh, St. Georgen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
Cofc^:;::!™?" " '^"-" * ^' '^^' ^*- ^'«-' ^^--
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,584
,,^ ^ Int. a^GllB J/072
UA a 360-97.000 ,0 Claims
mined angular positions of said rotor, is of zero
magnitude, and thus incapable of starting the rotor from
said predetermined positions,'
whereby if, when the motor is shut off, the rotor were to
come to a complete stop in said predetermined positions,
It could not thereafter be restarted by mere application of
current to the stator winding,
said rotor and stator being separated from each other by an
air gap and together forming a magnetic circuit whose
reluctance is a function of the angular position of said
rotor thereby producing a reluctance-torque component,
the reluctance-torque component varying as a function of
rotor angular position and having a magnitude which is of
non-zero value at said predetermined rotor angular posi-
tions at which the electromagnetic-torque component is
of zero value,
said non-zero value of said reluctance-torque component at
said predetermined angular positions precluding the rotor
from becoming stuck at said predetermined positions
during start-up of the motor,
an angular position detector detecting the angular position
of said rotor, and
means controlling fiow of current through said stator wind-
ing m dependence upon the operation of said angular
position detector to cause said stator field to alternate, in
dependence upon rotor angular position, between two
stator-field orientations which are 180 electrical degrees
opposite to each other.
4438 543
u. ..., WINDSHIELD WIPER DEVICE
i!*^ ?^?^' °°*'"' ^^'^ ''"'^*' «"<• Naomi MIyazakI,
I^cJ NisSirC."" °' """' "'^"" *° ^'''^" ^^*"'
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,122
No^tJ^,l5'riisli""" •""""• "*"• "• "^^ "•"'««'
„„ _ Int. a.J B60S //(W
U.S. a. 15-250.42 , c,i„
h «•
1. In a digital information-storage apparatus of the tvoe
having a read and/or write head which inscribes ?nformatS^
b. s onto, and/or reads them from, at least one data sTorage
disk which IS rotated at high speed relative to such head by
means of a rotary disk-holding structure configured ?o be
accommodated in the large central aperture of such disi and
transmit rotation thereto, *"
'^br'u^shlS"" ^f" "^"^ '°'*''y '^"''-holding structure of a
reluc,.^. ;'■ ^*^'"'=^"'=«-^°rq"e motor, said brushless d.c
reluctance-torque motor comprising
a stator. *
a rotor.
said rotor being coupled to said rotary disk-holding struc-
ture to transmit rotation thereto. *
said rotor being a permanent-magnet rotor,
said stator having a stator winding which when energized
^.tlT^""! '''"''"**'''' ^ ''**^°' "«'<1 ^hich in coopera
comXn^ '°'°' P'°^"""^ ^" electromagnetic-torque
component having a magnitude which is a variable func-
tion of rotor angular position and which, at predeter-
I. A windshield wiper device comprising:
a blade rubber formed of a resilient material-
a backing holding said blade rubber in place'
an arm; '
drive means for driving said arm;
a primary lever pivotally attached at its central portion to an
end of said arm;
a pair of secondary levers pivotally attached to opposite
ends of said primary lever, each of said secondary levers
having a third support claw at one end for supporting said
a pair of yokes, one pivotally attached to the other end of
each of said secondary levers, respectively, each of said
yokes having at opposite ends first and second support
c aws for supporting said backing, each said first support
c aw being disposed outwardly from the center of said
W«le rubber with respect to said second support claw;
a spring for loading said arm to force said blade rubber
against the surface of a windshield of a vehicle.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1403
wherein said primary lever, said pair of secondary levers and
said pair of yokes are arranged such that the load applied
to said blade rubber is selected to satisfy the following
relations (1) and (2):
L\>L-i,>L-i
where
(I) and
(2)
J (^ - /2) + /»! - /l
L|: spacing interval between said first and second support
claws of each of said yokes;
L2: spacing interval between each of said second support
claws and a closest one of said third support claws,
L3: spacing interval between said third support claws,
P|: load applied to said first support claws,
P2: load applied to said second support claws,
P3: load applied to the third support claws, and
fl-fs: reactions applied by said backing.
Lx
t
iipi
-/i)+ i(P2-
h)
Li
Pi-
»(/3+/4)
Li
i(P3
-A)+i(Pi-
fi)
Li
i(P2
- fi) + P\-/6
4 438 544
LOOPED ROD SAFETY STOP
Russell W. Waldo, Mendota Heights, Minn., and Cardel E.
Miller, Hudson, Wis., assignors to Ideal Security Hardware
Corporation, Saint Paul, Minn.
Filed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 338,169
Int. a.5 E05F 5/08
U.S. a. 16—85 4 Oaims
1. Apparatus for checking the unrestricted opening of a door
hingedly mounted in a frame, comprising:
(a) a first elongated element having one end thereof mounted
at the door and carrying, spaced from said mounted end,
a member having an aperture formed therethrough;
(b) a second elongated element having one end thereof
mounted at the frame and carrying, spaced from said
mounted end, a member having an aperture formed there-
through;
(c) wherein said aperture in said member carried by said first
element is significantly larger than dimensions of said
second element in a plane normal to an axis of elongation
of said second element, and said aperture in said member
carried by said second element is significantly larger than
dimensions of said firstjelement in a plane normal to an
axis of elongation of sa/d first element;
(d) wherein said first element is received in said aperture in
said member carried by said second element and said
second element is received in said aperture in said member
carried by said first element for relative axial movement of
said first element and said second element;
(e) wherein said first element and said second element com-
prise generally linearly extending wire forms, and wherein
said member of said first element and said member of said
second element comprise looped extensions of said first
element and said second element integrally formed there-
with at ends of said first element and said second element
opposite said ends by which said first element and said
second element are mounted to the door and frame respec-
tively; and and
(0 a wire spring enclosing said first element and said second
element intermediate said member of said first element and
said member of said second element and having a pair of
shoulders, each axially engaging one of said member of
said first element and said member of said second element,
said wire spring having opposite axial end coils, and
wherein each of said coils is sufficiently large wherein it
cannot pass through a corresponding aperture defined by
one of said looped extensions, said wire spring includes a
plurality of intermediate coils and wherein said looped
extensions define planes angled relative to one another so
that as said looped extensions engage said end coils and
compress said spring, said coils are urged away from the
door.
4,438,545
STUFFING METHOD AND APPARATUS
VyUutas Kupcikevicius, and Vytas A. Raudys, both of Chicago,
111., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,278
Int. a.' A22C 11/00
U.S. CI. 17—49 23 Qalms
^'W
1. A method of stuffing a flowable product into casing
lengths deshirred from a shirred casing supply having a closed
first tie end comprising the steps of:
a. stuffing a desired amount of the product into the casing
supply while applying a holdback force to the casing to
achieve a desired stuffed pressure;
b. constricting the encased product with closely spaced first
tie and second tie gates to close the second tie end of the
encased product;
c. prior to completion of the constricting step creating slack
in the casing supply so that the stuffed product displaced
during constricting is forced into the slack casing and the
encased product pressure is not substantially increased;
d. separating the first tie and second tie constricting gates
while gripping the casing more tightly with the second tie
gate than with the first tie gate so that the product dis-
placed during separating is displaced into the slack casing
and the encased product pressure is not substantially in-
creased; and
e. applying second tie and first tie clips, severing the casing
therebetween and releasing the gates.
1404
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4 438.546
HEAD HOLDING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A '"J T °^^''1 ^''^^ °^ '*'^ P'^*^*' °^ '^^ '^'"^ ^''0"^ of
HIDE PULLER '"'* '^°"** *'*'''•"« ^'*'"*^"^' *"'* therein the saw-tooth wire
William F. Couture, Anurillo, Tex., assignor to Iowa Beef Pro-
cesMfs, lac., DakoU City, Nebr. ^
AT \ /r /5
FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,637
VS. CL 17—50
lat. a.3 A22B 5/16
24Qainis
19. A method of holding down the head of an animal carcass
while the hide of the carcass is pulled hindwardly of the car-
cass by a hide puller, comprising the steps of,
supporting the carcass,
moving the carcass on trolleys on a horizontal rail,
engaging the neck of a carcass on the support with a jaw
assembly which includes a pair of jaws which are movable
from an open position to a closed position,
said engaging step being performed by placing said jaws in
said open position, positioning the neck of a carcass be-
tween said jaws, and moving said jaws with an actuator to
a closed position to entrap the neck of a carcass therebe-
tween,
moving said jaw assembly in a direction which is generally
parallel to said rail, said step of moving the jaw assembly
being performed by engaging the trolley with an interlock
member which is connected to the jaw assembly so that
the jaw assembly is driven forwardly by forward move-
ment of the trolley, and
pulling the hide of the carcass in a hindward direction while
said jaws deter movement of the head of the carcass.
sections of said third carding elements are positioned parallel
to a diameter plane of said main cylinder.
4438 548
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING
FLUCTUATIONS IN SLIVER WEIGHT ON CARDS
CARDING MACHINES AND THE LIKE
Werner Grander, Moenchaltorf, Switzerland, assignor to
Zellweger Uster Ltd., Uster, Switzerland
PCT No. PCT/CH80/00117, § 371 Date Aug. 7, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 7, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02029, PCT Pub
Date Jul. 23, 1981
PCT FUed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 293,221
Claims priority, application Switzeriand, Jan. 17, 1980,
U.S. a. 19—105
Int. a.3 DOIH 5/38
16 Qaims
4438 547
CARDING ELEMENT FOR A CARDING MACHINE
Karl H. Schmolke, NeuweUen Joachim Finsterbusch, Backnang,
and Walter Loffler, Neubulach, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Hollingsworth GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,335
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 30.
1981, 3112491; Oct. 28, 1981, 3142780
Int. a.3 DOIG 15/24. 15/88
U A a 19-98 J ci^
1. In a carding machine having a main cylinder with saw-
tooth wire wound therearound and at least three carding ele-
ments each comprising a plurality of saw-tooth wire sections
arranged m parallel relationship on a fixed support and forming
a card clothing cooperating with said main cylinder, the im-
provement wherein the saw-tooth wire sections of a first and
second of said carding elements are positioned at an acute
angle with respect to a diameter plane of said main cylinder
with the pitch of the wire sections of said first carding element
1. A method for controlling fluctuations in sliver weight on
a device for processing a fiber sliver, wherein a fibrous mate-
rial IS fed to a card, or the like and is withdrawn as a sliver,
comprising the steps of measuring the torque or the power of
at least one rotating part of the card, or the like, upon which a
fiber material is leveled and distributed and producing a con-
trol signal indicative thereof; and controlling the rate at which
said fibrous material is fed as a function of said control signal in
a manner that said torque, or said power, is held to a control
value.
4,438,549
ARRANGEMENT OF FTTTINGS FOR FLATC IN A
CARDING MACHINE
Kego SUander, Styrestagatan 8, SE 60229 Norrkoeping, Sweden
FUed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,248
Int. a? DOIG 15/32
\}S a. 19-107 ,4 cud,^
1. A carding machine for carding and for removing contami-
nants from a fibrous material, comprising a routably supported
carding cylinder rotationally driven in a forward direction at a
first speed and having first carding means on the peripheral
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1405
surface thereof, a flat supported adjacent the peripheral surface
of said carding cylinder for movement in said forward direc-
tion at a second speed less than said first speed and having
second carding means on a first surface thereof which faces
said carding cylinder, means defining a first opening in said
first surface of said flat, a second surface provided on said flat
and having a second opening therein, said second opening
communicating with the ambient air surrounding said carding
machine, means defining a passageway through said flat which
communicates with said first opening and with said second
opening, said passageway extending away from said first open-
forward bore, said cover having a keyhole in registry with
said forward bore;
(d) a pull tab pivotably connected to said cover;
(e) a locking member supported within said forward bore
and said rearward recess and having the fore end held
beneath said cylindrical plug for sliding movement along
said cam face, and being movable into and out of said
recessed central portion in response to rotation of said
cylindrical plug in either direction, and having at the rear
end, a locking pawl movable into and out of said guide
channel through said aperture for engagement between
coupling elements; and
(0 a spring member within said forward bore immediately
under the fore end of said locking member and urging the
fore end of said locking member against said cylindrical
plug so that the fore end of said locking member is held by
said spring member against diametrically opposite por-
tions of said flat continuous poriion to hold said pawl
retracted, and is held by said spring member against the
bottom of said recessed central poriion to hold said pawl
in an extended position.
ing at least partly in said forward direction, and means on said
flat defining a filter at a location remote from said first opening
for filtering the air flowing through said passageway, said first
carding means, in response to rotation of said carding cylinder
at said first speed, entraining air situated between said carding
cylinder and said flat and causing it to flow in said forward
direction and into said first opening and said passageway and
through said Alter, contaminants from said fibrous material
being carried by said air flow into said passageway, being
filtered from said air flow by said filter and being thus retained
in said passageway in said flat.
4,438,550
LOCKABLE SLIDER FOR SLIDE FASTENERS
Klyoshi Oda, Namerikawa, Japan, assignor to Yoshida Kogyo K.
K., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,232
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 16, 1981, 56*
35304[U]
Int. a.3 E05B 67/38
U.S. a. 70—57 6 Gaims
20
, 420*0372?° 4133 38y
I \ 1 ; I ■' * ,
.29
22 30«26 320 23 2fl
1. A lockable slider for a slide fastener including a pair of
coupling element rows to which the lockable slider is adapted
to be locked by a separate key, the lockable slider comprising:
(a) a slider body having a Y-shaped guide channel for the
passage of the pair of coupling element rows, an upwardly
opening forward bore, an upwardly opening rearward
recess communicating with said forward bore, and an
aperiure in said rearward recess in communication with
said guide channel;
(b) a cylindrical plug turntable by the separate key and
engageable with its outer end, said plug being rotatably
received in said forward bore and rotatable for 360* in
either direction from any stariing position, and having at
the inner end a cam face including a recessed central
poriion and a continuous flat peripheral portion of con-
stant height surrounding said central poriion;
(c) a cover mounted on said slider body and enclosing said
4,438,551
LOCKING DEVICE FOR VEHICLE SEAT BELT
WEBBING
Hironobu Imai, Chigasaki, Japan, auignor to NSK-Wamcr
K.K., Japan
FUed Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 345,413
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 27, 1981, 56-26804[U]
Int. a.' A62B 35/02; B65H 75/48
U.S. a. 24—68 SB 5 Claims
1. A locking device for vehicle seat belt webbing, compris-
ing a housing; a clamp member fixedly secured on the housing;
a swing arm swingably supported on the housing; a swing
clamp integrally secured on the swing arm having first and
second surfaces which make an acute angle and being displace-
able between a first position where the swing clamp permits
free passage of the webbing and a second position where the
webbing is clamped between the clamp member and the first
surface so as to restrain the webbing from movement; guide
means adapted to guide the swing clamp along the second
surface thereof between the first position and the second posi-
tion; a drum rotatably mounted on a shaft; which extends
between slots formed in the swing arm, and displaceable while
being guided by the slots between a non-engagement position
where the drum is disengaged from the swing clamp and an
engagement position where the drum is engaged with the
swing clamp and prevented from rotation; and the drum being
displaceable from the non-engagement position to the engage-
ment position when a tensile force of at least a predetermined
value is applied to the webbing and, when a furiher tensile
force is exerted on the webbing, the swing arm moving toward
the clamp member and the second surface of the swing clamp
being guided by the guide means so that the swing clamp
1406
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
moves together with the drum which is at the engagement
position, from the first position to the second position.
4,438,552
PLASTIC FASTENER
Nobuaki Omata, Hiroshima, Japan, assignor to NIfco Inc.,
Yokohama, Japan
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,487
Qaims priority, apph'cation Japan, Dec. 12, 1980, 55-174736
Int. a.3 A44B 77/00
U.S. a. 24-297 ^ 4ctai„„
1. A one piece plastic fastener comprising: a resilient inser-
tion leg formed of a pair of leg pieces joined integrally to each
other in the general shape of the letter V and each provided on
the outer side thereof with an engaging part, a fiange formed of
a pair of plate-shaped pieces disposed at the free ends of said
leg pieces, and a head portion consisting of a pair of head
pieces disposed at the leading ends of shanks extended up-
wardly from said plate-shaped pieces, said head portions ini-
tially being spaced apart in predetermined orientation, said
head pieces being interengageable by a twisting movement of
said head pieces past each other to lock behind one another in
reverse orientation, said head pieces being urged toward each
other by said resilient leg. whereby separation of said head
pieces causes movement of said leg pieces toward each other.
4438 553
FULL AUTOMATIC LEASING MACHINE FOR A WARP
BEAM CONTAINING WARPS OF DIFFERENT COLORS
Shoichi Hamada, Otsu, Japan, assignor to Todo Seisakusho
Ltd., Japan
Filed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,195
Int. aj D02H 9/00; D03J 1/13
U.S. a. 28-184 12 Qaims
901-" 902 911
1. A fully automatic leasing machine for a warp beam con-
taining warps of different colors, comprising:
a warp grouping mechanism located at a position down-
stream of said warp beam in the processing direction of
said warps, and adapted for grouping said warps into warp
sheets of different colors and releasably holding ends of
said warps in said warp sheets, said warp sheets being
disposed m substantially parallel planes which are spaced
apart and extend in the width direction of said machine-
a number of warp dividing units equal in number to the
number of warp sheets, each dividing unit being associ-
ated with a respective warp sheet and being movable
along Its associated warp sheet in said width direction of
said machine;
a respective warp dividing unit driving mechanism for each
said warp dividing unit, each said warp dividing unit
dnving mechanism including a main shaft driven for con-
tinuous rotation, means for converting said rotation of said
main shaft into movement of its respective said warp
dividing unit along its said associated warp sheet, and
means for selectively disabling said converting means-
a respective warp separating mechanism arranged on eiich
said warp dividing unit, and including first and second
cooperating needles for separating individual warps from
said associated warp sheet, first operating means for oper-
ating said needles, and a first single revolution clutch
assembly which when energized operationally couples
said operating means to said main shaft of said warp divid-
ing unit driving mechanism;
a respective warp flipping mechanism accompanying each
said warp separating mechanism, and including a warp
nipping carrier for flipping said each warp separated from
said associated warp sheet, second operating means for
operating said warp flipping carrier, and a second single
revolution clutch assembly which when energized opera-
tionally couples said second operating means to said main
shaft of said warp dividing unit driving mechanism-
a program control mechanism for energizing said first and
second single revolution clutch assemblies on each said
warp dividing unit in accordance with a desired stripe
design; *^
a warp leasing unit arranged on the downstream side of said
warp dividing units in an arrangement movable in the
width direction of said machine;
a warp passing mechanism arranged on said warp leasing
unit, and including a crank shaft driven for constant rota-
tion and a hook which is operationally coupled to said
crank shaft and reciprocates horizontally between said
warp leasing unit and said warp dividing units in order to
pass said each warp which is engaged by a said first warp
flipping mechanism through a gap between a pair of warp
leasing cords stretched in the width direction of said
machine;
a leasing cord shifting mechanism arranged on said warp
leasing unit, and including a pair of lifter rods which are
operationally coupled to said crank shaft of said warp
passing mechanism and to said warp leasing cords in order
to alternately locate said warp leasing cords at different
respective levels every time one of said warps has been
passed through said gap;
a second warp flipping mechanism arranged on said warp
leasing unit, and including a flipping bar operationally
coupled to said crank shaft of said warp passing mecha-
nism;
a warp end fixing mechanism arranged on said warp leasing
unit including a pair of rolls of bonding tape which, as said
leasing unit travels in the width direction of said machine
are delivered from said rolls and fixedly hold therebe-
tween each said warp passed through said gap. said flip-
ping bar flipping each said warp passed through said gap
towards said warp end fixing mechanism;
a warp leasing unit driving mechanism accompanying said
warp leasing unit, and including means for converting
rotation of said crank shaft of said warp passing mecha-
nism into movement of said warp leasing unit in said width
direction of said machine; and
a synchronized driving mechanism including a photoelectric
sensor for detecting movement of any said warp dividing
unit in said width direction of said machine, and means
connected to said photoelectric sensor for disabling said
converting means of said warp leasing unit dividing mech-
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1407
anism when no warp dividing unit moves in said width
direction of said machine.
4,438,555
METHOD OF nXING AN ANNULAR ELEMENT ON A
SHAFT
Chiaki Tsumuki; KaUuhiko Ueda, both of Aichi; Hitothl
Nakamura, Toyota; Toshiyuki Nakura, Okazaki, and
Kazuhiko Tsuda, Toyota, all of Japan, aatignort to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Aichi, Japan
Filed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,347
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 22, 1980, 55-130587
Int. a.^ B21D 39/00; B23P 11/00
U.S. a. 29—505 5 Claims
4,438,554
RAM DRIVE CHUCK
Joseph Sciola, 98 Glenwood Dr., North Heldon, N.J. 07058, and
Gabor Nagy, 98 W. First St., Oifton, NJ. 07011
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 265,034
Int. a.3 B23P 5/00; B65H 77/02
U.S. a. 29—57 5 Claims
1. In a ram drive chuck for the driven rotation of workpieces
and including a housing and a drive shaft supported for rota-
tion in said housing, the improvements comprising, workpiece
driving means which are operable to drivingly engage, support
and rotate a workpiece, means slidably supporting said work-
piece driving means at least in part within said housing, means
rotatably supporting said workpiece driving means at least in
part within said housing, said workpiece driving means being
slidably drivingly engaged by said drive shaft for driven rota-
tion of the workpiece driving means by the drive shaft, said
workpiece driving means being slidable relative to said housing
between an extended workpiece driving means position
wherein the workpiece driving means are operable to driv-
ingly engage, support and rotate an appropriately positioned
workpiece, and a retracted workpiece driving means position
wherein the same are not operable to drivingly engage. sup|X>rt
and rotate said appropriately positioned workpiece whereby,
with a workpiece appropriately positioned relative to said ram
drive chuck and said workpiece drive means disposed in the
retracted position thereof, the workpiece drive means may be
slided to the extended position thereof to drivingly engage,
support and rotate said workpiece and. thereafter, slided to the
retracted position thereof to disengage from said workpiece.
said workpiece drive means comprising a drive socket which is
shaped and sized complementally with regard to an end of said
workpiece whereby, movement of said workpiece into said
extended position thereof is effective to engage said workpiece
end in said drive socket for support and rotation of said work-
piece, said workpiece drive means and said chuck drive shaff
being relatively arranged and disposed so that said drive shaff
extends substantially into said workpiece drive means drive
socket when said workpiece drive means are in the retracted
position thereof whereby, said workpiece end will be forced
from said drive socket upon movement of said workpiece drive
means from the respective extended to retracted positions
thereof thus insuring workpiece end-workpiece drive means
disengagement.
1. Method for fixing an annular element onto a shaff, said
element having a through hole into which said shaft is loosely
inserted, said method comprising the steps of: forming an
axially extending groove on an outer wall of said shaff and
forming an axially extending projection on an inner surface of
said hole of said element over the whole length thereof, said
groove and said projection having respective cross sections
being adapted so as to loosely fit together; inserting said shaff
into said hole while engaging said projection with said groove
so as to prevent a relative rotating motion; and after determin-
ing the axial position of said element relative to said shaff,
deforming said outer wall of said shaft adjacent to said groove
at two positions near the terminating ends of said projection so
that said outer wall protrudes into said groove, thereby fixing
said element onto said shaft.
4,438,556
METHOD OF FORMING DOPED POLYCRYSTALLINE
SILICON PATTERN BY SELECTIVE IMPLANTATION
AND PLASMA ETCHING OF UNDOPED REGIONS
Shigeru Komatsu, Yokohama, and Michio Nakamura, Kawasaki,
both of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,973
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 12, 1981, 56-2988;
Apr. 9, 1981, 56-53393
Int. Q.J HOIL 21/302. 21/225; C23F 1/02
UJS. Q. 29—576 B 16 Qaims
jCTy^ .il r»rvrg^»
yyyj^yyf:
ry/yyyh
1. A process of forming a polycrystalline silicon pattern
which comprises the steps of:
selectively ion-implanting an impurity with high concentra-
1408
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
tion into the region of a polycrystalline silicon layer,
which is to remain as a polycrystalline silicon pattern; and
plasma-etching the whole of said polycrystalline silicon
layer, thereby etching ofFthe areas other than said region
mto which said impurity is ion-implanted with high con-
centration.
4,438 557
METHOD OF USING ANAREAL ARRAY OF TUBULAR
ELECTRON SOURCES
Donald L. Parken Wilbur A. Porter, and Robert C. Rogers, all
of College Station, Tex., assignors to Woodland International
Corporation, Panama, Pananu
Division of Ser. No. 34,984, May 1, 1979, Pat. No. 4,333,035.
This application Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,023
Int. a.3 HOIJ 21/263. 37/00: COIN 23/00
U.S. a. 29-576 B , ci^„
1. A method for irradiating a semiconductor body with a
plurality of electron beams for use in the fabrication of inte-
grated circuits, comprising the steps of:
generating a plurality of parallel electron beams within an
evacuated zone which contains said semiconductor body,
said electron beams directed toward said semiconductor
body; and
simultaneously denecting said electron beams to cause each
of said electron beams to track a predetermined pattern on
said semiconductor body.
having an annular array of radially inwardly opening recesses,
said stacked teeth being arranged in an annular array to define
an annular tooth core arrangement having a plurality of wind-
ing slots, said stacked yoke laminations defining an annular
yoke core, said apparatus comprising:
jig means defining a core bar and an annular array of individ-
ual locking pieces disposed coaxially about said core bar;
means for forcibly urging said locking pieces radially in-
wardly toward said core bar, said locking pieces defining
urging means for engaging the base portions of the stacked
teeth to urge said base portions forcibly against said core
bar for temporarily retaining said stacked teeth accurately
in annularly spaced relationship thereon to define therebe-
tween an annular array of winding slots in which a dyna-
moelectric winding may be wound to define a wound
tooth core assembly, said wound tooth core assembly
being constructed to be disposed coaxially within said
yoke core with the head portions of said retained stacked
teeth of the wound tooth core assembly being rigidly
interlocked with said yoke core in said yoke core recesses
to define a rigid, strong dynamoelectric machine core
upon removal of the entire jig means.
4438 559
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATICALLY MOUNTING
NON-LEAD ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS ON
PRINTED-CTRCUTT
Koichi Asai, Nagoya; Kunio Oe, Chiryu, and Mamoni Tuda,
Okazaki, all of Japan, assignors to Fi^i Machine Mfg. Co.
Ltd., Chiryu, Japan
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,105
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 27, 1980, 55-88326:
Aug. 6, 1980, 55-108613; Aug. 9, 1980, 55-109587; Aug. 20, 1980,
Int. a.5 B23P 19/00
U.S. a 29-740 ,0 Qaims
4 438 558
LAMINATED CORE MANUFACTURING APPARATUS
Yoshiaki Mitsui, c/o Mitsui Mfg., Co., Ltd., 980-1 Komine,
Yahatanishi-ku Kitakyushu-shi, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 30,445, Apr. 16, 1979, Pat. No.
4,280,275, which is a division of Ser. No. 819,480, Jul. 27, 1977,
Pat. No. 4,14939. This application Aug. 9, 1981, Ser. No
232,653
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 28,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. C\? H02K 15/085. 15/02
U.S. a 29-732 5 cMmn
1. Apparatus for manufacturing a dynamoelectric machine
wound core from a plurality of stacks of teeth having a shank
portion and a head portion, and stacked yoke laminations each
1. An apparatus for automatically mounting on a workpiece
electronic components having no leads, and thereby forming
an electronic circuit on the workpiece, which comprises:
a supply assembly including a plurality of tape cartridges
disposed on a support means and being equally spaced
along a line of transfer of the electronic components, said
Upe cartridges accommodating a corresponding number
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1409
of electronic component carrying tapes to store and sup-
ply different types of said electronic components, each of
said carrying tapes including a strip member which has a
multiplicity of longitudinally spaced mutually indepen-
dent apertures in which said electronic components of a
respective type are stored, said apertures being covered
with a covering tape disposed over said strip member;
a transfer assembly disposed on said support means including
a transfer member having a plurality of grippers disposed
along said line of transfer to hold a leading portion of said
carrying tapes accommodated in said respective tape
cartridges, and further including drive means disposed on
said support means and being adapted to move in an inter-
mittent manner said transfer member along said line of
transfer for sequential alignment with component supply
portions of said plurality of tape cartridges, the distance of
each movement of said transfer member being equal to the
spacing of said component supply portions;
tape feed assemblies disposed on said support means, said
feed assemblies provided adjacent and corresponding to
said plurality of tape cartridges, each of said tape feed
assemblies being activated when one of said grippers is
stopped in alignment with one of said component supply
portions of said respective tape cartridges, and thereby
feeding in an intermittent manner said carrying tape across
said line of transfer with said covering tape facing up, the
distance of each feeding movement of said carrying tape
being equal to the spacing of said multiplicity of apertures;
covering tape separating assemblies disposed on said support
means, said separating assemblies provided adjacent and
corresf)onding to said plurality of tape cartridges, for
separating said covering tape from said carrying tape and
thereby uncovering at least a leading one of said multiplic-
ity of apertures;
carrying tape severing assemblies, disposed on said support
means and between each of said component supply por-
tions of said tape cartridges and said grippers, for cutting
off said leading portion of said carrying tape which in-
cludes said uncovered leading aperture, and which is held
in said grippers, the cut-off leading portion constituting a
unit carrying tape;
a loading assembly disposed on said support means, said
loading assembly equipped with a pick-up member, for
picking up with said pick-up member said component
from said uncovered aperture in said unit carrying tape
which has been transferred by said transfer member to a
specified position, and mounting said component on said
workpiece; and
a positioning assembly disposed on said support means for
establishing desired relative positions between said pick-
up member and said workpiece before said component is
mounted on the workpiece by said loading assembly.
connecting areas having between each other a spacing of 20R
and adjacent insertion positions in one row having between
each other a spacing of 40R;
that a planar member B is prepared, said planar member B
per se having the same pattern as planar member A, how-
ever, with the two planar members A and B being ar-
ranged one on top of the other in a manner such that the
connecting areas of planar member B bridge the spacing
between those of planar member A, so that associated
connecting positions of the connecting areas on the two
planar members A and B coincide when viewed from the
top;
that a planar member C is prepared, said planar member C
being provided with trains of conductors parallel to the
X-axis with a spacing of 20R between said trains of con-
ductors; that said planar member C is disposed in relation
to planar members A and B in a way such that the center
lines of each of their trains of conductors coincide with
the imaginary connecting line through the center points of
the associated connecting positions with the coordinates
-6R and -6R;
that a planar member D is prepared, said planar member D
being provided with trains of conductors extending paral-
lel to the Y-axis and having a spacing of 20R between
4 438 560
METHOD FOR PRODUCING MULTIPLANE aRCUTT
BOARDS
Giinter Kitten, Issum, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to KoU-
morgen Technologies Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,654
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 28,
1980, 3020196
Int. a? H05K 3/36
MS. a. 29—830 10 aalms
1. Method of producing multiplane circuit boards, charac-
terized by the fact that a planar member A is prepared first on
a layer of suitable carrier material, said planar member A
having connecting areas disposed in rows on said planar mem-
ber A, each of said areas having an insertion position, six inter-
linking positions and two interrupting positions, said interlink-
ing positions, based on the center point of the insertion position
of each connecting area, having the coordinates -8R, O; 12R,
O; O, 8R; O, - 12R; -6R, -6R; 6R , 6R, and said interrupting
positions having the coordinates 7R, O and O, — 7R, with R
being any selectable standard grid spacing, and said rows of
2«--ii-T-
each other, and said planar member D being disposed in
relation to planar members A and B in a way such that the
center lines of each of their trains of conductors coincide
with the imaginary connecting line through the center
points of the associated connecting positions with coordi-
nates 6R and 6R;
that the planar members A, B, C and D disposed as defined
above are combined to form one mechanical unit, if neces-
sary with the use of an intermediately arranged, suitable
insulating material such as prepregs;
that one or a plurality of such units are provided with a
pattern of conductor trains conforming with the desired
circuit;
that defined connecting positions are provided with bores in
accordance with the circuit diagram, said bores being
provided in a manner known per se with a metal coating
applied to their walls;
that bores are provided in the insertion positions determined
by the circuit diagram, said bores being provided with
metallized walls also; and furihermore,
that the trains of conductors on the planar members C and D
are separated into partial pieces insulated against each
other, by means of bores provided in the interrupting
positions determined by the circuit diagram.
1410
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4438 561
METHOD OF REWORKING PRINTED ORCUIT !!l?c°'» '"°""!."' °" **'** ^^^' «»""«=<ed ^° the ratchet and
BOARDS ^'KCUIT gear system and constructed and arranged to actuate the same
Richard W. Mueller, SanU Oara, Calif., assignor to Roaers "*** ^''^"f * ^^f °P*"'*^« '^"P'^^e'nent of the cutter-pressing
Corporation, Rogers, Conn. ^ J*'*' '" ^'^ predetermined direction. , *
Filed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,197
Int. a.3 H05K 3/20 . .„ -.,
^•'•"•'^^ 7 Claims HAND.HELD*S??llNGTOOL
David D Turner, 7845 NE. Bayshore Ct, Miami, Fla. 33138
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 240,082, Mar. 3, 1981
abandoned. This application Dec. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 433,161
„ o ^ '"*• ^-^ ^26B 1/04. 3/08
U.S. a. 30-156 „ c^
1. A method of connecting electrically unconnected conduc-
tors on a printed circuit element with conductors on a flexible
circuit element, including the steps of:
forming said flexible circuit element having a nonconductive
substrate and a predetermined circuit pattern;
deflning at least two through holes in said circuit pattern-
aligning said flexible circuit with respect to said printed
circuit element with said circuit pattern facing said uncon-
nected conductors, said circuit pattern being aligned with
the unconnected conductors on the printed circuit ele-
ment with said at least two through holes aligned with
different ones of said unconnected conductors;
adhering said flexible circuit element to said printed circuit
element with an electrically nonconductive adhesive be-
tween said circuit pattern and said unconnected conduc-
tors; and
establishing electrically conductive paths in said at least two
through holes in contact with said conductors on the
printed circuit element and with said circuit pattern on
said flexible circut element to electrically interconnect
said conductors.
4 438 562
MANUAL PIPE CUTTER
Aurele Courty, 471 Ste. Madeleine St., Montreal, Canada H3K
Filed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 405,943
Int. a.3 B23D 2J/06
VS. a. 30-99 „ cMm
I. A manual pipe cutter comprising a body including a cut-
ting head portion having a pipe passage extending there-
through, a cutting head rotatable in the cutting head portion
substantially around the pipe passage, a cutter-pressing jaw
mounted on the cutting head and displaceable in a predeter-
mined direction transversely across relative to the pipe pas-
sage, a toothed rack fixedly secured to the cutter-pressing jaw
and displaceable bodily with the latter and endwise in said
predetermined direction, a ratchet and gear system connected
to the toothed rack and constructed and arranged to move and
hold the latter relative to operative displacement of the cutter-
pressing jaw in said predetermined direction, and a manual
1. A hand-held cutting tool comprising:
(A) a housing with a top wall, spaced end walls, and a front
and rear wall, said housing defining a bottom to rest in
planar relation on a surface and said bottom having an
open mouth of predetermined dimension,
shaft holding means in the housing defining an axis,
(B) a blade cartridge in the housing, said cartridge compris-
ing,
a shaft, a plurality of blade members on the shaft, and a
plurality of spacer means on the shaft, said blade mem-
bers and spacer means being arranged along said shaft in
staggered relation with respect to one another,
said shaft being secured in said housing by said shaft hold-
ing means,
said plurality of blade members being swingable on the
shaft and each being of a common size and shape and
each having a cutting edge,
each of said spacer means including a blade member ori-
enting means and each one of said blades being capti-
vated by the orienting means of one of said spacer
means for swinging movement about the shaft so that
each of the spacer means may be selectively rotated to
swing its associated blade members about the shaft
between a first position and a second position;
each of said blade members being of a size and shape such
that the cutting edge is exposed beneath the bottom of
the tool housing when in the first position and each of
the blade members is completely within the housing
when the blade member is in the second position;
said housing including stop means to stop swinging move-
ment of the blade members at each of the two positions.
4,438,564
EGG SCOOP OR SPOON
Harold P. Ashton, Providence, R.I., assignor to Dart Industries
Inc., Northbrook, 111.
Filed Jul. 9, 1976, Ser. No. 703,718
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 16,
1994, has been disclaimed.
Int a.J A47J 43/28
U.S. a 30-324 3Ctai„„
1. An egg spoon suitable for the introduction of eggs into or
the removal of eggs from a body of fluid comprising a handle
member integrally formed as a part of a spoon bowl and pro-
truding therefrom, said bowl including a bifurcated and con-
cave wall configuration having frontal edges and an intercon-
nected back wall which is of a substantially vertical disposition
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1411
and wherein said bifurcated and concave wall configuration
and said back wall include bottom edges positioned in the same
plane, and wherein said bifurcated and concave wall configu-
ration includes upper edges, said upper ^ges sloping in an
4,438,566
INNER DIAMETER MEASURING INSTRUMENT
Hideo Sakata; Ichiro Mizuno, and Masao Nakahara, all of
Kawasaki, Japan, assignors to Mitutoyo Mfg. Co., Ltd., To-
kyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,777
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 30, 1981, 56-
62770[U]; Apr. 30. 1981. 56-65705
Int. a.3 GOIB 5/12
U.S. a. 33—178 R 11 Oaims
upward direction from said frontal edges toward said back
wall in such fashion that the imaginary, forward, geometrical
extension of said plane makes an acute angle with the imagi-
nary, forward, geometrical extension of said upper edges
thereby forming the slope of such upper edges.
4,438,565
HANDLE FOR A HAND TOOL
John A. Hough, Auckland, New Zealand, assignor to Hough
Industries Limited, Auckland, New Zealand
Filed Jun. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 160,484
Oaims priority, application New Zealand, Jun. 20, 1979,
190779
Int. a.J B25G 1/00
U.S. a. 30—341 14 Claims
1. In a hand tool having at least one shank and attached
handle, the improvement comprising:
an infill member enclosing and having means to interlock
with the shank, and
a sheath of uniform thickness having a recess and enclosing
both the shank and the interlocked infill member and
having means to be fixed to either,
wherein said infill member has a narrow portion at one end,
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the handle, which ex-
tends across the recess in the sheath to provide an eye
through which an attachment means may pass in order to
be pivotally attached to the handle.
1. An inner diameter measuring instrument wherein a spin-
dle is axially movably incorporated in a cylindrical main body
and measuring elements are made linearly movable in radial
directions perpendicular to said spindle in response to the
movement of said spindle, wherein the improvement com-
prises: a movable member movable in the axial direction of said
spindle; a spring provided between said movable member and
said spindle, said spring being biased in a direction for causing
said measuring elements to project in radial directions with
respect to said spindle; a control member rotatably mounted on
said main body; an interlocking mechanism for transmitting the
rotation of said control member to said movable member to
cause axial movement of said movable member; and control
means for moving said spindle in a predetermined direction
against the action of said spring, said control means being
rotatably secured to said main body.
4,438,567
CENTER LOCATOR FOR ALIGNMENT OF WORK TO
MACHINE SPINDLE
Antti P. Raiha, Rte. #1, Box 512, Sandpoint, Id. 83864
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,923
Int. a.J GOIC 1/00
U.S. a. 33—286 2 Oaims
1. A center locator for use with a drill press or like tool
having a rotatable spindle and a chuck or other tool holder
attached to an end of the spindle:
(a) a case or housing of electrically conductive material
having a shank for coaxial connection to said chuck or
tool holder;
(b) said case having a bore aligned with the shank axis;
(c) a barrel part guidingly mounted in said case bure for
angular movement about said shank and bore axis, as well
as for axial movement therein, said barrel part being made
of electrically conductive material;
(d) said barrel pari having an annular groove;
(e) a retractable hollow screw mounted on the case and
cooperable with said annular groove for limiting axial
movement of said barrel part;
1412
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
member betwen said retention means and said housins
wall. *
(0 An incandescent lamp having a bulb part extending into
the mner end of the barrel and having a flange of electri-
cally conductive material in engagement with the said end
Of the barrel part, said lamp having a conUct button lo-
cated beyond the inner end of the barrel; AAMtna
(g) means cooperable with the lamp bulb for holding the DRAFTINr MArnivr
lamp to the barrel, comprising three relatively soft olastic W-lfr w«.i.- n .. ^ ? MACHINE
screws adjustable to center the lamp at Sif "^ S^^T wl *' "*"•' ""^"' '° ""'^'* ''• ^"•*«'»'«'
(h) a magnifying lens accommodated in the opposite outer FiL S*b an io«^ c. ,u .,o „
end of the barrel and fitted against a shoulder iJTthe barrel; ^ Int CI ^IwSL /i/flO
U.S. a. 33-438 j^cilnu
— »»
(i) a resilient O-ring frictionally fitted in the barrel releasably
to hold the lens in place;
0) said lens having pattern means imprinted or otherwise
formed thereon;
(k) spring contact means carried by the case for engagement
with said lamp contact button upon axial movement of
said barrel;
(I) a coiled contact spring in said screw and in continuous
wiping contact with said barrel part; and
(m) batteries carried by the case and imposing an electrical
potential between the case and said spring contact means.
4,438,568
RECREATIONAL COMPASS
Melvid G. Kramer, and Marlin Iden, both of Riverton, Wyo,
assignors to The Brunton Company, Riverton, Wyo.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 129,907, Mar. 13, 1980
abandoned. This application Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319 208
Int. a.3 GOIC 17/20. 17/12
U.S. a. 33-348 ,8 ^1^^
1. In a compass having a base member and a compass needle
joumaled in a transparent casing, said casing provided with an
outer peripheral wall portion and top and bottom wall por-
tions, said base member including an upstanding annular hous-
mg wall, the improvement comprising:
retention means operative to resiliently mount said casing
within said housing wall of said base member including
tirst and second complementary locking means each in-
cluding a pair of generally ring-like, radially expandible
and contractable members on said retention means, an
external shoulder on said peripheral wall portion of said
casing and an internal shoulder on said housing wall of
said base member, said ring-like members of said first and
second complementary locking means being movable past
said external and internal shoulders to expand outwardly
behind said shoulder into yielding engagement with said
peripheral wall portion of said casing and housing wall of
said base member, respectively, whereby to reuin said
casing against removal from said housing wall while per-
mitting said retention means to be manually rotated by
overcoming the frictional engagement of said ring-like
i^i*^
1. A drafting machine for use with a drafting table having a
drawing surface, which comprises:
a protractor head adapted to be movably mounted on a
drafting table such as to permit horizontal and vertical
movement of the protractor head along the drawing sur-
face of the drafting table;
an elongated first mounting means rotatably mounted on the
protractor head and having an elongated first reference
scale, the longitudinal axis of the first reference scale being
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the first mounting bar-
an elongated second mounting means slidably mounted on
the first mounting means with the longitudinal axis of the
second mounting means being perpendicular to the longi-
tudinal axis of the first mounting means, the second
mounting means having an elongated second reference
scale, the longitudinal axis of the second reference scale
being parallel to the longitudinal axis of the second mount-
ing means;
first and second elongated straight edges, said first straight
edge being slidably mounted with respect to the second
mounting means and the second straight edge, the longitu-
dinal axis of the first straight edge being parallel to the first
mounting means and being perpendicular to the longitudi-
nal axis of the second mounting means and to the second
straight edge, the first straight edge being alignable with
the reference scale of the second mounting means; and
said second straight edge being mounted on the second
mounting means so as to be slidably mounted with respect
to the first mounting means, the longitudinal axis of the
second straight edge being perpendicular to the longitudi-
nal axis of the first mounting means, the second straight
edge being alignable with the first reference scale.
4 438 570
SYSTEM FOR DRYING AND EXPANDING OF FLAT
MATERIALS SUCH AS LEATHER
Jiri Dokoupil, Hochstr. 9, 6251 Giickingen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 241,543
t^^^.^^' appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 15,
IVsU, 3010003
Int. a.3 F26B 3/34. 23/04
^f?-3*-; 10 Claim.
1. Process for increasing the surface and for drying of flat
materials such as leather pieces and hides comprising:
placing the flat material between two foils impervious to air
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1413
connecting the space between the two foils' to a vacuum; and
applying forces substantially disposed in the plane of the
4,438,572
HEAT DUCT SUPPORT ASSEMBLY FOR A FOOD
PREPARATION OVEN AND METHOD
Daniel S. Kaminiki, Fort Wayne, Ind., assignor to Lincoln
Manufacturing Co., Inc., Fort Wayne, Ind.
Filed Jun. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 386,610
Int. a.3 F26B 15/18
U.S. a. 34—218 9 Oaims
two foils for expanding the surface area of the two foils
and of the flat material.
4,438,571
ARRANGEMENT FOR DRY COOLING OF COKE
Wilhelm Jakobi, Essen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Krupp-Koppers GmbH, Essen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,102
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 7,
1981, 3100168
Int.a.5F26B77//2
U.S. a. 34—65 10 Claims
*^
«:2«,.
1. In a food preparation oven having therein mounted a
plenum with a plurality of openings therethrough, and a plural-
ity of heat ducts horizontally disposed from and in communica-
tion with said plenum through respective ones of said open-
ings, each of said heat ducts including a plurality of jets posi-
tioned therein to direct hot air onto food to be cooked, a sup-
port assembly for said heat ducts, comprising:
two stud members, a first one projecting from a side of said
oven and a second one projecting from an opposite side of
said oven,
an elongated bracket being horizontally disposed between
said oven opposite sides and supporting remote ends of
said heat ducts,
a pair of bracket supports being connected to respective ends
of said bracket adjacent respective ones of said oven oppo-
site sides,
said bracket supports each having a slot therein engaging a
respective stud member, whereby said bracket is remov-
ably supported by said studs between said oven opposite
sides, and
means for supporting opposite ends of said heat ducts over
respective ones of said plenum openings.
4,438,573
VENTILATED ATHLETIC SHOE
George P. McBarron, Attleboro, Mau., auignor to Stride Rite
International, Ltd., Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,315
Int. C\? A43B 7/06, 13/20
U.S. a. 36—3 B 8 Gaims
1. An arrangement for dry cooling of coke, comprising
means forming a prechamber for a coke to be cooled and
having a substantially cylindrical prechamber wall with an
axis; cooling means arranged below said prechamber forming
means and having a substantially cylindrical cooler wall, an
upper portion of said cooler wall surrounding a lower portion
of said prechamber wall; means for connecting said precham-
ber walls with said cooler wall and including a plurality of
connecting members spaced from each other and connecting
said walls with each other so that a cooling gaseous medium
can pass between said connecting members; throttling means
arranged between said connecting members and actuated from
outside of said walls; and actuating means extending substan-
tially radially through said cooler wall from outside inwardly
of the latter so as to actuate said throttling means.
1. In an athletic shoe for ventilating the user's foot, having
inside said shoe a resilient slipsole above an insole board, and
outside said shoe a resilient outsole assembly underneath said
insole board, said outsole assembly containing at least one
1414
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
transverse first air channel open at its ends through the side
walls of said outsole assembly to the surrounding air, a system
for conveying air from said first air channel into said inside of
said shoe comprising:
at least one air reservoir cut vertically into said outsole
assembly and spaced from the perimeter of said outsole
assembly, said reservoir being closed at its top and its
bottom and open through its side wall to said first air
channel;
at least one air slot cut longitudinally into said outsole assem-
bly and spaced from the perimeter of said outsole assem-
bly, said air slot being open in one section to said side wall
of said air reservoir;
at least one first air hole cut vertically into the top of said
outsole assembly at a point spaced from said air reservoir,
said first air hole open to said air slot;
at least one second air hole cut vertically into said insole
board said second air hole being arranged to communicate
with said first air hole;
at least one second air channel cut horizontally into the
bottom of said slipsole, said second air channel being
arranged to communicate with said second air hole; and
at least two third air holes cut vertically into said slipsole
said third air holes arranged to communicate with said
second air channel and with the inside of said shoe,
whereby said surrounding air will fiow through said first air
channel into said air reservoir where a volume of air is held
then into said air slot, then into said first air hole, then into said
second air hole, then into said second air channel, then into said
third air holes and then into the inside of said shoe to ventilate
said user's foot, the force of said user's foot against the ground
will enhance the fiow of air into said inside of said shoe, and
the user's foot will be cushioned from shock.
4 438 575
CONTINUOUS EXCAVATING APPARATUS
Jonas L. Roe, Santa Cruz, Calif., assignor to Terradyne Limited,
Georgetown, Cayman Islands
Continuation of Ser. No. 93,020, Nov. 9, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,155
Int. a.3 E02F 5/06
U.S. a. 37—4 , ^ .
2 Qaims
1. Continuous excavating apparatus comprising- '
an endless excavating bucket line having a plurality of excavat-
mg buckets each with teeth for digging;
a boom for carrying said bucket line including at its free end a
pair of sprockets mounted for rotation on said boom
a plurality of hinge pins commonly connected to adjacent
buckets so that both buckets may freely rotate on a pin and
an enlarged end piece at each end of said hinge pins, adapted to
contact said pair of sprockets, in operation, and to roll with
rolling friction on them to cause the rotation of the center
portion of the hinge pins.
4,438,574
ATHLETIC SHOE WITH TWO-PIECE UPPER
FOREPART SECTION
Jeffrey O. Johnson, Raymond, N.H., assignor to Nike, Inc.,
Beaverton, Oreg.
Filed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,061
^•«- ^- "^-^ 31 Qaims
4,438,576
VIBRATING DITCHER PLOW
Ove V. Lundstrom, Box 76, Vuollerim, Sweden S.96030
PCT No. PCr/SE80/00294, § 371 Date Jul. 20, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 20, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01433, PCT Pub
Date May 28, 1981
PCT Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 285,108
Qaims pnority, application Sweden, No?. 19, 1979, 7909545
Int. Q.3 E02F 5/02
^•S«-3^-'« 8 Qaims
1. In an athletic shoe comprising a sole and an upper at-
tached to the sole the improvement comprising:
a multi-layered forepart section of the upper for extending
around the forepart portion of the foot of a wearer of the
athletic shoe, said forepart section including an inner layer
of stretchable and moldable material and an outer layer of
breathable, flexible and nonstretchable material extending
about said inner layer of material, said inner and outer
layers being permanently attached to said shoe, a major
portion of the inner layer being unconnected to the outer
layer whereby the inner layer is free to stretch a degree
limited by the extent of the outer layer of nonstretchable
material to accommodate and mold to the forepart of the
foot of the wearer.
1. A device for ditching a drain in soil, comprising a body
which IS intended to be advanced in the ground, said body
having a substantially V-shaped vertical cross-section with the
base of the V pointed downward and substantially smooth
lower sides, the body at least in the direction of advancement
having a forward portion with a pointed end closed vertically
along the height of the body, the forward portion having a
generally V-shaped horizontal cross-section, the body being
provided with vibrator means for producing striking forces,
said vibrator means being adapted to subject the body to at
least downward directed striking forces, and said forces main-
taining the body pressed down while the body is advanced
through the soil masses, the height of the body being greater
than the depth of the ditch such that the soil masses are pressed
aside substantially laterally and compacted.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
141S
4,438,577
IRONING APPARATUS SUPPORT
Edwin E. Fosten Wilbur A. Foster, and Thomas E. Foster, all of
Austin, Tex., assignors to M^jik-Ironers, Inc., Austin, Tex.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,888
Int. Q.5 D06F 77/00
U.S. Q. 38—107 13 Claims
1. Ironing apparatus for supporting a hand iron above the
ironing surface of an ironing board and characterized by a base
for supportive disposition upon a supporting surface, at least
one upright post member extending upwardly from said base,
means for securing an ironing board in a use position proximate
said post member with said ironing surface horizontally dis-
posed for ironing thereon, an articulated linkage swingably
inter-engaged at one end with said post member and extend-
able by articulation to positions over said ironing surface,
securement means pivotally interconnecting the other, post-
remote end of said linkage with said iron for permitting move-
ment of said iron between first and second orientations respec-
tively in and out of contact with said ironing surface, said
linkage being swingable about said post member and providing
articulation when said iron is in said first orientation for freely
permitting relocation of said iron to desired positions over said
linkage surface, and means associated with said linkage for
preventing articulation when said iron is in said second orienta-
tion to maintain said iron out of contact with said ironing
surface.
4,438,578
PICTURE FRAME AND CORNER BRACKET ASSEMBLY
Malcolm Logan, Barrington, III., assignor to Logan Graphic
Products, Inc., Wauconda, III.
Filed Apr. 21, 1983, Ser. No. 487,316
Int. Q.' G09F 1/12
U.S. Q. 40—152 6 Qaims
1. Components for constructing a picture frame, said compo-
nents comprising:
a plurality of frame sections for being assembled into a pic-
ture frame in which two of said frame sections are adapted
to be oriented at an angle to form a comer of the assem-
bled frame at the adjacent ends of the two sections, each
said frame section having an end portion at each end
containing material that is deformable under the imposi-
tion of a localized force, each said frame section end
portion defining a channel opening rearwardly when the
frame section is assembled with the other frame sections to
form the frame, said channel extending from the end of
said frame section along said frame section end portion,
each said frame section end portion further defining a
cavity communicating with said channel and an adjacent
deformable bearing surface comprising said deformable
material; and
a bracket adapted to be disposed within the channels of said
two frame sections when oriented to form a comer of the
assembled frame, said bracket having two legs disposed at
an angle substantially identical to the angle formed by said
two frame sections at said frame comer, each said bracket
leg having a first portion adapted to be received in one of
said frame section channels, each said bracket leg having
a second portion with an engaging member for being
received in one of said frame section cavities, said engag-
ing member defining an engaging wall to engage said
frame section deformable bearing surface, said frame
section bearing surface and said bracket engaging wall
being oriented at angles relative to the length of the frame
section whereby, when the bracket legs are aligned in
registry with the channels of said two frame sections
disposed to form the comer of the assembled frame, rela-
tive movement between the bracket and the frame sec-
tions can be efTected to dispose the bracket within the
channels and to cause the engaging wall of each bracket
leg to deform the associated frame section beanng surface
and force the two frame sections together at the comer.
4,438,579
THREE-DIMENSIONAL PICTURE WI*™
INTERCHANGEABLE SCENES
Robert W. Engel, 2745 Provincetowne Dr., Toledo, Ohio 43613
Filed May 2, 1983, Ser. No. 490,521
Int. Q.5 G09F 1/12
U.S. Q. 40—160 13 Claims
1. A kit for creating a three-dimensional picture comprising
in combination
a frame with inner sides which, together with a backplate,
make an interior angle, said inner sides circumscribing a
window which establishes a length and a breadth of a
display;
a plurality of substantially planar scenes, each scene having
1416
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1417
a central adomable area shaped to fit within said window
and at least two bendably resilient hinges extending be-
tween zero and the depth of the display beyond opposing
straight edges of said adomable area and adapted to bend
backward along said edges and mate with corresponding
inner sides; said plurality including
(a) a remote scene with the shallowest hinges, the smallest
adomable area, and sized to stack behind all other scenes,
(b) a nearest scene with the deepest hinges, the largest adom-
able area, adapted for cut out, and sized to stack in front of
all other scenes,
(c) any other scene having hinges of intermediate depth and
intermediate adomable area, adapted for cut out. and sized
to suck between said remote scene and said nearest scene
in order according to hinge depth and size of adomable
area;
whereby the three-dimensional picture is created by remov-
ably inserting said scenes into said window in order, the
remote scene first, the nearest scene last, with hinges bent
backward, butted against said backplate, and frictionally
engaging other hinges or said inner sides, thereby setting
the depths of the scenes and anchoring the scenes in said
window.
(c) a sleeve securely affixed to the center of the raised end of
said inclined surface;
(d) a sliding yoked shaft within said sleeve, secured by means
of a set screw; and
(e) tripodal feet portions for stability upon a surface.
4438 580
STACKING TYPE MOVABLE LARGE DISPLAY DEVICE
Mauinura Yamiui; Shozo Fiyita; Shunichi Futatsuishi, and
Takuhi Takushima, all of Nagasaki, Japan, assignors to
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,587
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 20, 1981, 56-114143
Int. a.3 G09F 21/04
UA a. 40-590 5 Claims
4438 582
DOWNRIGGER SYSTEM* MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
Michael G. Lummis, Portage, Mich., assignor to Pacific Atlantic
Products, Ltd., Kalamazoo, Mich.
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,212
Int. a.3 AOIK 89/00
U A a. 43-27.4 8 Claims
1. A display device, comprising: a plurality of movable
display blocks each having a display area segment with said
plurality of display blocks being stackable one onto another
such that together, said display area segments of said plurality
of display blocks form a predetermined display area surface, a
lowermost one of said display blocks being secured to a trailer
having supporting outriggers, remaining ones of said display
blocks being detachably secured to respective trailers, means
for detachably securing said display blocks to each other when
said display blocks are assembled to form said predetermined
display area surface.
4 438 581
BENCH REST DEVICT) FOR HANDGUNS
Bernard A. LaVaUe, 627 E. Queen Ave., Spokane, Wash. 99207
Filed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,413
Int. a.3 F41C 29/00
DS. a. 42-94 , ctain,
1. A bench rest device for handguns comprising:
(a) a rigid, recungular, inclined surface base having top and
bottom surfaces and front and rear ends;
(b) a vertical surface affixed along the side edge of said
inclined surface;
1. A downrigger system for trolling adapted to be mounted
on a boat, comprising:
a frame assembly having a base portion.
a reel rotatably mounted on said frame assembly for dispens-
ing a downrigger line.
first mounting means on the base portion adapted to cooper-
ate with said frame assembly for use in releasably attach-
ing said system to a mounting plate affixed to said boat,
and
second mounting means on the same base portion adapted to
cooperate with said frame assembly for use in releasably
attaching said system to an oarlock affixed to said boat.
said second mounting means comprising fastener means
adapted to extend through the base portion of said frame
assembly and said oarlock for attaching the downrigger
system to said boat,
said frame assembly defining an elongated opening through
which said fastener means extends for accommodating
adjustable mounting of said downrigger system.
4,438,583 4,438,585
nSHING LURE INSECT EXTERMINATING DEVICE
Raymond B. Sullivan, 443 Kendry, Bloomfleld HUls, Mich. B. Dale Slatton, Sheridan, 111., assignor to Ernest Kettelson,
4M13 Joliet, 111., a part interest
Filed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 392,925 Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 242,751, Mar. 11, 1981,
Int a.' AOIK 85/00 abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 89342, Oct 10,
U.S. a. 43—42.06 9 Claims 1979, abandoned. This application Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No.
339,942
Int. a.J AOIM 01/04, 01/06
U.S. a. 43—113 7 Oainu
1. A fishing lure for casting and trolling comprising:
(a) a body with longitudinal flow passage within the interior
of the body, said flow passage having adjoining ingress
and center portions, the axes of said portions aligned with
the longitudinal axis of the body, and an egress portion
adjoining the center portion, the axis of the egress portion
offset from and oblique to the axis of the center portion,
and a baffle at the junction of the center and egress por-
tions;
(b) a means for attaching a fishing line to the body;
(c) at least one hook attached to the body; and
(d) a means for attaching the hook to the body.
TRAP FOR RATS, MICE, AND OTHER VERMIN
Stanley Z. Baker, Mayfield Heights, and Beojamin H. Baker,
Chesterland, both of Ohio, assignors to J. T. Eaton A Com-
pany, Inc., Twinsburg, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 53,381, Ji^n. 29, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,621
Int. a.3 AOIM 23/00
U.S. a. 43—58 4 Qaims
1. A trap for vermin comprised of a generally flat support
formed of a non-porous, thin sheet material, said support hav-
ing at least one positioning surface, at least one indented por-
tion having a given depth below said positioning surface, and
a relatively thick layer of pressure sensitive adhesive material
contained within said indented portion having a thickness of at
least 1/16 inch, a plastic flow temperature above 120* F. and an
upper surface; said indented portion having a greater depth
than the thickness of said layer of adhesive and said positioning
surface being spaced above said adhesive layer upper surface.
1. An insect extemiinating device, comprising support
means, a length of flexible material supported by said support
means for rotation in a first annular zone of rotation, intermit-
tent rotary drive means to route said length of flexible material
in said first annular zone of rotation for a pre-determined
period of time, then stop roution for a predetermined period of
time, and then re-sUrt roution for a pre-determined period of
time, wherein said intermittent rotary drive means includes an
electric motor, thermal means operatively associated with said
motor to provide a temperature rise of a pre-determined
amount after a pre-determined period of time of operation of
said motor, and stitch means operatively associated with said
thermal means to sequentially disconnect said motor from its
power source when said pre-determined temperature rise is
reached and reconnect said motor to its power source when
said temperature has lowered to a pre-determined pre-existing
level.
4,438,586
GAME DEVICE WITH TEMPLATE FOR ARRANGING
OBJECTS
John R. Wildman, North Riverside, and Jeffrey D. Breslow,
Highland Park, both of III., assignors to Marvin Glass A
Associates, Chicago, III.
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,360
Int. CI.' A63F 7/00
U.S. O. 46—1 R 11 Qaims
1. A game device for arranging objects in a predetermined
configuration, comprising:
a plurality of objects;
a frame,
a template removably mounted in said frame, said template
including a plurality of openings that receive said objects,
^
1418
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
said openings arranged in said predetermined configura-
tion; and
means for moving said template from a first position support-
mg said objects to a second position spaced from said
objects including a finger engaging member and a grasp-
ing member, said moving means being actuated by squeez-
mg said finger engaging member and grasping member
together.
4 438 587
BLOWGUN TOY CAR LAUNCHER
Joseph A. Marino, Whitehouse, N J., assignor to Arco Indus-
tries Ltd., Hong Kong, Hong Kong
Filed Nov. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 444,677
Int. a.3 A63H 29/16
U.S.a.46-44 ^Claims
partially infiated can wrap partially around said wheels for
increasing traction area, means for indicating forward orienta-
tion of said vehicle for purposes of said remote control, includ-
ing said ball being at least in part light-conductive, means for
Illuminating said light conductive part of said ball when said
light conductive part is at a particular location generally ahead
of said vehicle, said means for illuminating comprising a light
on a forward part of said vehicle, and said means for indicating
also indicating rotation of said ball and comprising means for
modulating said illuminating when the ball is rotating
I. A blowgun toy car launcher and car comprising in combi-
nation,
a. a base having a bottom surface arranged to be disposed
and manually held preferably upon a horizontal support-
ing surface,
b. a mouthpiece tube extending from said base at an up-
wardly and rearwardly extending angle and having an
outer end adapted to be engaged by the mouth of a person
so as to blow air into said tube and launch said toy car
c. a launching tube extending forwardly from said base and
lower end of said mouthpiece tube and having an outer
end directed away from said mouthpiece tube and in an
opposite direction from said tube,
d. air-conducting means within said base extending between
and communicating with the ends of said tubes which are
connected to said base to establish a through passage
between said outer ends of said mouthpiece tube and
launching tube,
e. a toy car having front and rear ends and freely roUtable
wheels thereon, and
f a longitudinal cavity in said car closed at the forward end
thereof and opening to the rear end thereof and generally
complementary in shape to at least the outer end of said
launching tube and adapted to slidably coengage the exte-
nor of said launching tube for support thereby and projec-
tion therefrom, whereby when said mouthpiece tube has
air blown into it under pressure said air will act against the
closed forward end of said longitudinal cavity in said toy
car to project said car from said launching tube for rolling
movement along said supporting surface.
4,438,588
REMOTE CONTROL BALL
John E. Martin, 5 Belfast Rd., Timoniiun, Md. 21093
FUed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,890
lot a.3 A63H 17/28
UA a. 46-228 jc^
1. In a system of hollow ball and vehicle with wheels, steer-
ing and a power circuit for same, and means for remotely
controlling steering and forward-reverse direction of the vehi-
cle, the improvement comprising: means for increasing wheel
traction on the ball inner surface comprising: said ball beina
inflatable and of soft flexible material which when the ball is
4 438 589
MOVING TOY WITH MOVABLE BATTERY
RECEPTACLE
Yukimltsu Matsushiro, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki
Kaisha Matsushiro, Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 18, 1982, Ser. No. 379,499
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 9, 1982, 57-33100rui
Int. C\? A63H 17/00
U.S. a. 46-251 <j CUU„,
/y/i//////^>\^A-
9 2
■ZV777
1. A moving toy having a body, a battery receptacle, and
movable means for shifting the center of gravity of the toy by
shifting the position of the battery receptacle relative to the
body, comprising:
a stop lever which allows the battery receptacle to pivot and
be supported at any angle of inclination,
a downward projecting stopper which is provided on an
intermediate portion of the stop lever,
a spring positioned between the battery receptacle and the
stop lever for the purpose of urging the stop lever into
contact with a rear portion of the body,
a groove provided within the fixed range of movement of
the stopper, located on a surface of a rear portion of the
body, and
a front groove in a front part of the rear portion of the body
and rear groove in a rear part thereof, each being slightly
deeper than the first-mentioned groove.
March 27. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1419
4,438,590
ELECTRIC MOTOR TOY CAR
Cheuk-Ming Lcc, Hong Kong, Hong Kong, auignor to The
Reflned Industry Company, Limited, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Filed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,550
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 11, 1981,
8133986
Int. a.i A63H 77/00
U.S. a. 46—257 2 Qaims
ing self-locomoted migration of the cells in said reservoir to
said harvest zone, a relatively small area cell growth liquid
containing reservoir, transfer means for transferring concen-
trated cells from said harvest zone to said small area cell
growth liquid containing reservoir, and environmental control
means for controlling the environmental conditions to which
the cells in said small area liquid containing reservoir are ex-
posed.
1. A toy car for use with a slotted or slotless track; said toy
car comprising:
a chassis,
a motor for driving a set of wheels,
a terminal strip for picking up current from a wire in said
track,
a wiper mounted to contact said terminal strip and to contact
said motor so that current passes from said track wire via
said terminal strip and said wiper to said motor,
said wiper comprising a thin metal plate, one end of said
wiper is bent at an angle of approximately 90* to the body
of said plate, said bent end poriion defining a cut-out
portion to receive one end of said terminal strip and a tail
projecting from the angle for contacting an electric brush
of said motor and a lug bent at approximately 90* to the
body of said plate on the other end of said plate to engage
a projection on said chassis, so that said wiper is held in
position on said chassis.
4,438,591
ALGAL CELL GROWTH, MODIFICATION AND
HARVESTING
John O. Kessler, Tucson, Ariz., assignor to The University of
Arizona Foundation, Tucson, Ariz.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 118,585, Feb. 4, 1980, Pat. No.
4,324,067. This application Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,550
The portion of the terra of this patent subsequent to Apr. 13,
1999, hu been disclaimed.
Int. O.^ AOIG 7/00
U.S. a. 47—1.4 28 Qaims
LUOfMU
cuLTiM ram
t NON-eUnuCTM
HMVUT raTEM
^
rto
yy^
— ^^
sasis
r"
J^
1. A system for growing, enhancing the growth of and
harvesting algal cells which multiply by cell division, compris-
ing at least one relatively large area cell growth liquid contain-
ing reservoir in which said cells are initially disposed for multi-
plication by cell division, said reservoir being exposed to pre-
vailing outdoor environmental conditions and being provided
with a concentrated cell harvest zone adjacent the top surface
of the liquid contained therein, cell migration means for effect-
4,438,592
WICK BAR LIFT
Kenneth J. Myers, 1017 Elk St., Beatrice, Nebr. 68310
Filed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,184
Int. a.3 AOIC 15/00
U.S. a. 47—1.5 3 Claims
c^E^^
II !/ ^1^'-'
1. Apparatus comprishig:
a vehicle;
lift arm means having first and second ends separated from
each other by a lift arm length;
mounting bracket means for pivotally mounting the first end
of said lift arm means to the vehicle for pivotal motion in
a vertical plane about a first horizontal pivot axis;
hydraulic cylinder means mounted at one of its ends to said
mounting bracket means at a first location at a first dis-
tance from said first horizontal pivot axis and mounted at
its second end to said lift arm at a second distance from the
first horizontal pivotal axis for pivoting said lift arm in said
vertical plane about said first pivotal axis to selectively
raise and lower the second end of said lift arm in relation
to the extension and retraction of the arm of said hydraulic
cylinder means;
means for mounting said hydraulic cylinder means for piv-
otal motion in a veriical plane in relation to the pivoul
motion in the vertical plane of said lift arm means;
the ratio of said second distance to said length of said lift arm
and said predetermined extensional retraction of said arm
of said hydraulic cylinder means being sufficient to move
the second end of said lift arm only within a range of no
more than 60 inches above the ground;
wick bar means for containing a liquid;
said wick bar means including a horizontally elongated wick
application surface for wetting a horizontally elongated
surface with liquid;
said surface having a vertical arc length from its center of no
more than 180 degrees;
means for pivotally mounting said wick bar means to the
second end of said lift arm about a second horizontal
pivotal axis;
a first sprocket wheel having its center of roution aligned
with said first pivotal axis;
a second sprocket wheel mounted to said lift arm means;
flexible means connecting said first and second sprocket
wheels for causing said second sprocket wheel to rotate
when said first sprocket wheel rotates; and
means connecting said second sprocket wheel and said wick
bar means for causing said wick bar means to be pivoted
about said second horizontal pivotal axis.
1420
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4(438,593
ANTI-FUNGAL PERFORMANCE IN PELLETED SEEDS
THROUGH USE OF HYDROPHOBES
George L. McNew, Hastings on the Hudson, N.Y., and Norman
W. Thomas, Warren, N J., assignors to Celanese Corporation.
New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 782,645, Mar. 30, 1977, abandoned.
This application Jan. 8, 1979, Ser. No. 1,735
Int. aj AOIC J/06; AOIN 43/36. 47/28, 61/00
U.S. CI. 47-57.6 22 Qaims
1. A seed possessing a continuous, adherent coating compo-
sition thereon comprising:
(a) an anti-fungal agent specifically effective against soil-
borne phytopathogenic fungi in an amount of from about
0.1 to 5% by weight based on the weight of the coating
composition;
(b) a particulate non-phytotoxic hydrophobe present in an
amount of about 0.5 to about 30% by weight based on the
weight of the coating composition; and
(c) a non-phytotoxic binder present in an amount at least
sufficient to maintain the mechanical integrity of the coat-
mg until the pelleted seeds are planted.
4,438,595
PLUG DOOR ASSEMBLY
John A. MacDonald, Beaconsfleld, Cuiada, assignor to Ralltech
Ltd., Canada
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 156,631, Jun. 5, 1980. This
application May 31, 1983, Ser. No. 498,037
Claims priority, application Canada, Apr. 2, 1980, 349,055
Int. a.J E05D 15/10
U.S. a. 49-219 4a^^
4 438 594
BALANCED SLIDINGDOOR STRUCTURE
Helmut H. Bunzl, Zumikon, Switzerland, assignor to AG fur
Tiirautomaten, Diibendorf, Switzerland
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,588
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 21,
Int. a.3 E05D 15/22
UA a 49-177 12 ctaiin.
1. Balanced sliding door structure having
an upper support rail (19),
a lower guide track (6, 46),
at least one sliding door (2, 3) suspended from the support
rail and having a lower guide element (30) engaging lower
guide track,
the door including a door frame (10, 11) and a swing door
panel (2a) hmged to the frame and movable about a verti-
cal swing axis,
wherein,
the door frame includes a horizontal frame element (10)
suspended from the support rail, and a vertical frame
element (11) secured thereto and carrying said lower
guide element (30);
a hinge means (8) secured to the vertical frame element and
to the door element to permit relative swinging movement
of the door element with respect to the frame and thus
permit relative sliding of the entire door along the rail as
well as swinging of the door element;
and means are provided for prestressing the vertical frame
element (11) with respect to the horizontal frame element
(10) to balance the weight of the door element when
supported only by the hinge means (8). comprising
a metal angle (12) having a comer (23') positioned in the
vicmity of the hinge means (8) secured to both said frame
elements (10, 11) and applying a force component thereon
which IS counter the weight of the door element as applied
to the vertical frame element by the hinge means, said
angle (12) bemg fitted in the horizontal frame element (10)
and secured to the frame by a fulcrum or pivot bolt (14)
positioned adjacent the comer region (23) of the angle.
1. A door assembly comprising a door for closing an opening
in a wall, first rail means mounted on the wall over the opening
for use in longitudinally moving the door between an open
position alongside the op9rfing and adjacent the wall and an
intennediate position opposite the opening; mounting means
movably mounting the door on the first rail means; the mount-
ing means including at least a pair of vertical crankshafts rotat-
ably mounted on the outer face of the door, the crankshafts
extending past the upper and lower ends of the door; a low
friction elongated carriage member slidably mounted on the
rail means over the opening, the [crankshaftjcrankshafts being
pivotally mounted in spaced joumals provided in the carriage
one of the joumals being in the form of an elongated slot such
that the crankshaft received by the slot can travel along the
longitudinal axis of the elongated carriage relative to the other
crankshaft or shafts; second rail means provided under the
opening on the wall; and guide means on the lower ends of the
crankshafts cooperating with said second rail means under the
opening for guiding the door; said mounting means including
means for laterally moving the door between the intermediate
position opposite the opening and a closed position within the
opening and a closed position within the opening in the plane
of the wall; and locking means on the mounting means for
cooperating with locking means on the wall to lock the door
within the opening.
4 438 596
REMOVABLE BARRIER ASSEMBLY
Johnnie Jones, 4066 Ranchero Dr., Dorr, Mich. 49323; Joseph
A. Einig, 2215 108tii St., Byron Center, Mich. 49315, and
Arthur T. Ackerson, 3879 40tii St., GrandviUe, Mich. 49418
Filed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,318
Int. a.3 E06B 3/32
U.S. a 49-463 ,<j Claims
1. A removable safety barrier, comprising:
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1421
a barrier rail means for preventing passage through a given
area bounded by a first and second support means, said rail
means being elongated and having a first and second end;
a retaining means for releasably supporting said first end of
said barrier rail means and limiting the movement thereof;
a latching means for removably supporting said second end
of said barrier rail means, said latching means having a
releasing means allowing said second end of said barrier
rail means normally to be restrained by said latching
means, said latching means also including release means
for releasing said barrier rail means when said release
means is activated, and said latching means also having a
stationary support element;
said barrier means normally being positioned and supported
by said stationary support element and not in contact with
or supported by said releasing means;
said stationary support element comprises a back wall, a
bottom wall and a lip;
said back wall and said lip extending upward from said
bottom wall to define a U-shaped support area;
said releasing element comprises a top wall extending out-
ward from said back wall and a gate pivotally connected
to said top wall;
said lip extending upward from said bottom wall a distance
less than said back wall extends from said bottom wall,
thereby defining a gap between said lip and said top wall;
said gate spanning said gap between said lip and said top wall
so that said gate abuts said lip when said gate is in a closed
position;
said gate pivotally opening only inwardly of said release
element;
such that said barrier means may be passed through said gap
between said lip and said top wall, supported in said sup-
port area and then confined within said safety latch by said
gate, whereby said retaining means and said latching
means will support said barrier rail means when subjected
to a force from any direction.
4,438,597
ADJUSTABLE HINGE MOUNT
Michael J. Maggart, Cherry Hill, N.J., assignor to E^o Prod-
ucts, Inc., Pennsauken, N.J.
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,210
Int. a.) E06B 3/00
U.S. Q. 49— 501 9aaim8
1. An adjustable hinge mount for hingeably connected bod-
ies such as a door and doorframe, the door to be rotatably
attached to the frame by a hinge having hinge leaves, at least
one leaf to be rigidly attached to a mounting bracket and the
bracket to be adjusUbly attached to the body of at least one of
the door and doorframe, the mount comprising:
a body defining an enclosed area;
a mounting bracket positionable against the body within the
enclosed area, the mounting bracket having means for
rigidly attaching the hinge leaf thereto, the enclosed area
having a cavity encompassing the mounting bracket as
well as clearance for a span of vertical and horizontal
movement of the mounting bracket; and,
a plurality of mounting bolts for adjusubly attaching the
mounting bracket to the body, the bolts extending through
the mounting bracket and through the body via adjust-
ment holes in said body, the adjustment holes having a
periphery larger than the bolts to allow a span of vertical
and horizontal movement, notches in the periphery of the
adjustment holes dimensioned to rest against the bolts,
indicating a known alignment of the mounting bracket
with respect to the body, the bolts operable to rigidly
attach the mounting bracket to the body at the known
alignment and at alignments within the span of vertical
and horizontal movement.
4,438,598
SURFACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL APPARATUS
Clinton J. Wohlmuth, Columbus, Ind., auignor to Cummini
Engine Company, Inc., Columbus, Ind.
Filed Nov. 30, 1981. Ser. No. 325,975
Int. C\? B24B 49/14
U.S. a. 51—165.73 8 Claims
J!Z.
.TUWUTUm
MONITM
IS I-
^
/
MICRO
mOCUKM
lr»
h
JJl
eoNmoi
UNIT
h
.J
1. An apparatus for controlling the temperature of a rotating
first surface when in frictional engagement with a second
surface, said apparatus comprising a rotating member provided
with the first surface; a thermal sensing element mounted on
said member and rotatable therewith as a unit, said sensing
element having a first section exposed on the member first
surface and being adapted to engage the second surface, and a
second section exposed on the exterior of said member remote
from the exposed first section, said second section defining a
predetermined circular path during rotation of said member;
first means for effecting rotation of said first member while the
first and second surfaces are in frictional engagement; second
means for effecting adjustment of the first and second surfaces
from a frictional engagement; and a temperature detecting
means having a fixedly mounted segment disposed in predeter-
mined proximity to the circular path of said second section,
said detecting means being operatively connected to said sec-
ond means whereby adjustment of at least one of the friction-
ally engaged surfaces relative to the other is responsive to the
temperature detected by the detecting means segment from the
exposed second section of the thermal sensing element.
4,438,599
VIBRATION DAMPER FOR MACHINE-CARRIED
WORKPIECE
Joseph T. Kamman, and Mark D. Kohring, both of Cincinnati,
Ohio, assignors to Cincinnati Milacron Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Dec. 28. 1981. Ser. No. 334,964
Int. a.) B24B 41/06
U.S. a. 51—238 S 2 Gaims
1. A vibration damper for machine-carried workpieces,
comprising:
(a) a work contact shoe;
(b) a shoe holder;
(c) a pair of elastomeric elements oppositely disposed be-
1422
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
tween said shoe and said holder, wherein said elements are
preloaded in opposition to each other;
(d) means for mounting said shoe holder to a machine base;
and
(e) means for preloading said shoe against a workpiece in a
direction transverse to the preload direction of said op-
posed elastomeric elements.
follower being adjustable along the length of said horizon-
tal arm;
a floating assembly fixedly attached to said sleeve above said
cam follower to reproduce the up and down motion in-
duced in said sleeve when said cam follower assembly
rotates along said cam;
a positioning assembly fixedly attached to said floating as-
sembly, said positioning assembly including a positioning
crank for making vertical adjustments of said positioning
assembly and a radial positioning device for making radial
adjustment of said positioning device, said adjustments
permitting adjustments of said positioning assembly so
that the apparatus can accommodate workpieces having
different diameters;
means for working along the seam attached to the lower end
of said positioning assembly; including power means for
operating said work means; and
means for rotating said sleeve and attached elements axially
about the shaft, attached to said sleeve for rotation there-
with.
AAMKnn 4,438,601
'wiL'^ir^y.l.^^^^^ *° ^' '^•'^'^'^ * continuation ofSer.No.25U53;Apr.M%iZd;^^
U s 'S' 2*' ?if V°^' ^'^''' "^^ ''/^' ^^'^ ^/^^ us- CI. 51-262 A " ^^^^ 2 Qaim.
UA. CI. 51—241 S 5 Claims v-iwma
1. An apparatus for controlling movement of a metal work-
ing tool along a seam interconnecting a nozzle section and a
shell section comprising:
a mounting plate removably mountable on the end of a
nozzle section away from the joinder of a nozzle and a
shell for holding the apparatus parallel to the axis of the
nozzle;
a shaft fixedly attached to said mounting plate near the
center of said mounting plate and perpendicular thereto;
a cam having a generally saddle-shaped upper cam surface
shaped such that said upper cam surface reproduces the
seam interconnecting a nozzle section and a shell section,
and such that seams formed by different nozzle and shell
intersections are reproduced by said cam surface along
corresponding paths of said cam surface located at differ-
ent distances from the center of said cam;
a routable sleeve concentrically disposed about said shaft
having a length substantially the same as that of said shaft,
for transmitting axial rotation to the metalworking tool;
a horizontal arm fixedly attached to said sleeve;
a cam follower assembly attached to and depending from
said horizontal arm and contacting said cam, said cam
1. A cleaning tool for cleaning sandpaper, comprising,
an elongated horizontally disposed handle having a horizon-
tal longitudinal axis, opposite parallel side portions, and a
horizontally disposed bottom portion,
first and second longitudinally spaed apart brackets secured
to and spanning said handle adjacent said bottom portion,
said brackets being angularly disposed with respect to
each other and with respect to said longitudinal axis, and
a horizontally disposed cylindrically shaped roller wire
brush being parallel to said bottom portion and having a
freely rotatable axle mounted on each of said brackets,
each of said brackets being of a channel construction includ-
ing spaced apart parallel ears and an integral connecting
web, said parallel ears adapted to receive said roller brush
axle, said parallel ears being perpendicular to the longitu-
dinal axis of said brush axle,
said brackets and said rollers extending beyond the side
portions of said handle, and comprising the only struc-
ture on said bottom portion.
4,438,602
LENS CARRIER ASSEMBLY FOR AUTOMATIC LENS
BLOCKING
Charles S. Lannom, Box 270, Grinnell, Iowa 50112
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,159
Int. a.3 E05F 11/00
U.S. a. 51-277 3 Claims
1. A carrier assembly for positioning a finished uncut lens for
blocking, said assembly being adapted for securement to the
vertically movable portion of a vertexometer and comprising:
(a) a base having a top portion, a bottom portion and means
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1423
for removably attaching said base to the vertically mov-
able portion of a vertexometer, said base portions bemg
constructed and arranged for movement fore and aft with
respect to the vertexometer;
(b) means on said base for holding a lens in a position above
said base top portion, said lens holding means including a
pair of spaced-apart, arcuate-shaped arms, each of said
arms extending upwardly from said base top portion and
being biased towards the other arm, and means for allow-
ing rotative movement of a lens held between said arms,
said means for allowing rotative movement of the lens
including a plurality of rollers mounted on said arms, said
plurality of rollers being constructed and arranged to
rotate simultaneously with a lens held therebetween; and
(c) means on said base for decentering the lens a predeter-
mined value in accordance with an optical prescription,
said means including means for moving said base top
portion laterally with respect to said base bottom portion,
thereby causing a simultaneous lateral decentering of the
lens.
4,438,603
STADIUM SEATING
Martin J. Durlum, Jr., 17705 153rd Ave. SE., Renton, Wash.
98055
Filed Jun. 24, 1982, Set. No. 391,553
Int. a.J E04H 3/12
U.S. a. 52—8 18 Qaims
1. In combination with a gradine comprising a generally
vertical surface abutting a generally horizontal surface, a mod-
ular seating assembly comprising; a plurality of integrally
formed plastic pedestals attached in spaced array along said
gradine, and an integrally formed plastic seat section extending
between adjacent pedestals, said seat section interfitting in
respectively congruent recesses in the upper portions of said
pedestals, and each pedestal being attached to said gradine by
bracket means affixed both to the sides of said pedestals and to
the generally vertical surface of said gradine, rearwardly of
said pedestal.
4,438,604
INTERIOR DECORATION SYSTEM
Uwrence E. McGourty, Jr.; Gabriel Audettc, and Jean M.
Audette, all of c/o Woodcraft Industries, Ltd., 7 High St.,
Hudson, Mass. 01749
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,252
Int. a.J A47B 5/00
U.S. a. 52-28 9 Galms
1. Interior decoration system, comprising:
(a) a panel located adjacent a structural wall,
(b) a plurality of vertically-spaced first brackets mounted on
the structural wall,
(c) a plurality of vertically-spaced second brackets mounted
on the rear surface of the panel and locking with the first
brackets to hold the panel in fixed relationship to the
structural wall, a plurality of shelves being mounted on
the front surface of the panel, each shelf having a plurality
of male elements that removably lock into female ele-
ments, and
(d) a lighting fixture mounted on the undersurface of each
shelf, an electrical outlet being located at the front surface
of the panel for connection to the lighting fixture, the
lighting fixture including an electrical connector having
prongs mounted on the undersurface of the shelf, the male
members and the electrical connector being mounted
adjacent one edge of the shelf, the male members and the
prongs of the electrical connector extendmg at an acute
angle to the undersurface of the shelf.
4,438,605
CONTINUOUS, MOVEABLE THERMAL BARRIER
SYSTEM
Paul V. DeLucia, Rte. 82, R.D. 6, Box 85, Hopewell Junction,
N.Y. 12533
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,713
Int. a.3 E04B 1/344; A47G 5/00
U.S. a. 52—71 10 Claims
42 41
1. A hinge assembly for use in a continuous moveable,
paneled, thermal barrier system, enabling the panels of the
system to be moved from in-use position to out-of-the-way
storage or open position, said assembly being constructed in
such manner as to maintain high thermal insulatmg efficiency
thereby greatly increasing the overall thermal insulating effi-
ciency of the system, said assembly and, further, which permits
pivotal motion about two parallel axes, comprising;
a pair of separate, spaced apart elongated hinge members of
thermal insulating material, each of whose configuation is
that of a hollow shell thereby creating an air space which
serves to increase thermal insulating efficiency, said shell
including at least a generally open socket, the angle of the
opening being less than 180'; and,
1424
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
an elongated hinge member of thermal insulating material
whose configuration is that of a hollow shell thereby
creating an air space which serves to increase thermal
insulating efficiency, said shell including at least a pair of
opposed interconnecting inserts;
said inserts adapted to be pressure sealed within a respective
one of said sockets while being capable of relative angular
movement therein, thereby providing a continuity of
thermal insulating performance at the interconnection of
adjacent panels of the system while permitting relative
pivotal motion therebetween and about two parallel axes.
4,438,606
SHELTER FOR PROTECTING LARGE-SIZE OBJECTS
Andre-Marie Chardon, Aux amphores, Courcelles, 89570
Neuvy-Sautour, and Philippe Guibert, 2 Place des Magnolias,
77680 Roissy en Brie, both of France
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 289,054
Oaims priority, application European Pat. Off., Apr. 1, 1981.
NR 81400523.7
Int. a.3 E04L 1/12
U.S. a. 52-79.1 „ a^„s
anchor elements embedded in the foundation in circumferen-
tially spaced relation, the upper ends of said anchor elements
projecting above said foundation, a support member connected
to the upper ends of each pair of anchor members, means for
adjusting the height of each of the support members with
respect to the corresponding anchor elements to thereby en-
able the support member to be leveled, a plurality of generally
curved wall sections mounted on the support members and
arranged in circular configuration, each section having a gen-
erally horizontal member supported on said support members,
one of said members having a plurality of first elongated slots
and the other of said members having a plurality of second
elongated slots disposed at an angle to said first slots, and a
plurality of connectors extending through aligned first and
second slots to connect the sections to the support members,
said first and second slots permitting both radial and circumfer-
ential adjustment of said sections relative to said support mem-
bers.
11 t) 11 9
1. A shelter for protecting large size objects, comprising:
a structure having a shape adapted to the shape of the ob-
jects it is to contain and formed of two spaced vertical,
longitudinal walls, and a rear wall connecting said verti-
cal, longitudinal walls;
a cover fitting over said walls;
a front face, a door pivoted on said face for closing said
shelter;
a fiat flooring defining with said walls a lower compartment,
said flooring being constituted by a removable sheet
metal; and
in said compartment, a heavy mass whose weight bears onto
the walls of the shelter in order considerably to increase
the total weight of the shelter and prevent easy handling
thereof ^
4438 608
STAIRTREAD FOR SPIRAL STAIRCASE
Wilfried Hamm, Im Wiesengnind 28, 4330 Mulheim an der
Ruhr, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,911
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 28,
1980, 8005300[U]
Int. a.3 E04F 11/02. 11/08
U.S. a. 52-187 3 a^^
,1 s
4,438,607
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR LEVELING A
STORAGE STRUCTURE
Deimer R. Nelson, Cordova, 111., assignor to A. O. Smith Har-
restore Products, Inc., Arlington Heights, III.
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,919
Int a.3 E02D 27/00
UA a. 52-126.1 sCh^ms
1. In a storage structure, a foundation, a plurality of pairs of
1. In a staircase of the spiral type having individual treads
projecting radially from a vertical support column, the im-
provement to such treads wherein each tread comprises:
(a) a frame having radially extending sides with inner and
outer ends, a tubular sleeve welded to the inner ends of
said sides, an outer segment welded to the outer ends of
said frame sides, said sides and segment being of T-shaped
cross section with the stem of the T oriented horizontally
and welded to said sleeve at said inner ends of said sides,
(b) a formed steel plate welded to upper marginal edges of
said T-shaped sides and having downwardly bent mar-
ginal side portions welded to margianl edges of said stems
of said T-shaped frame sides, said plate being perforated,
(c) a polyurethane foam covering means encasing said frame
sides and said steel plate to define thickened and rounded
marginal portions along said radially extending frame
sides, said polyurethane foam means defining downwardly
open radially extending slots adjacent said edges, and
(d) carpeting provided on the upwardly facing surface of
said polyurethane covering and marginal edges of said
carpeting received in said slots, said polyurethane cover-
ing means being recessed to receive said carpeting.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1425
4,438,609
URETHANE BONDED WINDSHIELD DAM
Erik I. Nielson, Oakville, and Robert B. Hope, Downsview, both
of Canada, assignors to Schiege! Corporation, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,848
Int. C\? E06B 3/62. 7/16
MS. a. 52—208 12 Oaims
panel having a top surface and a clamp surface spaced
below the top surface and overlying the support plate.
(c) rotatable clamping means releasably interengaging the
support plate and clamp surface for releasably locking the
panels on the pedestal,
(d) a rotary drive tool connector on the clamping means
facing the top surface of the panel, and
(e) a drive tool access hole through the top surface in sub-
stantially vertical alignment with the connector for rout-
ing the clamping means between an operative position
locking the panels on the pedestal and a release position
unlocking the panels from the pedestal.
4,438,611
STUD FASTENERS AND WALL STRUCTURES
EMPLOYING SAME
George E. Bryant, Renton, Wash., assignor to W. R. Grace A
Co., Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 364,079
Int. a.^ E04B 2/30. 2/40
U.S. a. 52—309.2 24 Gaims
^^^ s ro^ f^'<
1. A method of installing windows in vehicles provided with
body cavities for receiving windows and flanges therein for
supporting such windows consisting of the step of
placing an elongated trim provided with a pair of window
engaging ribs onto the flange located within the body
cavity in which the window is to be sealed so that the
window engaging ribs face outwardly away from the
body cavity,
placing a bead of adhesive material about the periphery of
the window,
positioning the window within the body cavity.
and pressing the window into contact with one of the two
ribs while deflecting the other rib thereby forming said
other rib into an internal dam for controlling the flow of
the adhesive as the window is pressed into place thereby
substantially preventing adhesive from flowing outwardly
from the body cavity along the interior surface of the
window and selaing between the outer peripheral edge of
the window and the body cavity.
4,438,610
CLAMPED ACCESS FLOOR PANEL ASSEMBLY
James T. Fifer, #1001 1200 Boylston Ave., Seattle, Wash. 98101
Filed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,371
Int. a.J E04B 5/43
U.S. a. 52—263 14 Qaims
1. A comer clamped access floor panel assembly for mount-
ing an access floor at a spaced distance above a base floor, the
assembly comprising in combina,tion:
(a) a plurality of panel supporting pedesuls positioned at
spaced intervals on the base floor and extending upwardly
to substantially a common height, each pedestal including
a panel-supporting surface adjacent its upper end;
(b) a plurality of polygonal panels arranged side by side in
rows, each panel being supported at each comer by the
panel supporting surface of one of the pedestals, each
1. A fastener comprising a substantially flat elongated strip
having at least one leg depending therefrom, an arm joined
with and extending out from said elongated strip, and an L-
shaped member comprising substantially flat first and second
legs, said first leg depending from said arm and said second leg
extending out from said first leg and away from said elongated
strip, said first leg and each of said legs depending from said
elongated strip being on the same side of said elongated strip.
4,438,612
SYSTEM FOR THE MUTUAL ANCHORING OF TWO
WALLS
Alain Bernard, Marcq-en-Baroeul, and Robert Chedeville, Sail-
ly-lez-Lannoy, both of France, assignors to Couturier S.A.,
Croix, France
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,471
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 14, 1981, 81 07851
Int. a.J E04B 2/00
U.S. O. 52—427 14 Claimi
1 ,
IV 7 M
1. A system for mutually anchoring two spaced-apart walls
comprising a tie-rod extending between said walls, said tie-rod
comprising two sections and tensioning means connecting the
two sections end-to-end and means for connecting opposite
ends of said tie-rod respectively to said walls, said latter con-
necting means comprising integral balls on opposite ends of
said tie-rod. a tubular sleeve at each end of said tie-rod. said
sleeve being open at one end to receive the tie-rod and having
1426
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
internally a socket to receive the ball at the respective end of
the tie rod, said socket presenting around said opening of said
sleeve an annular restriction of interior spherical form to con-
stitute a bearing for said ball at the respective end of the tie-
rod, said sleeve having moreover a threaded portion, and an
anchoring member for anchoring said sleeve to the respective
wall, said anchoring member having threads engaging said
threaded portion of said sleeve to unite said sleeve with said
anchoring member.
4,438,613
SUSPENDED CEILING PANEL SYSTEM
Roy A. Hintsa, Etobicoke, and Tonu Orav, Thornhill, both of
Canada, assignors to Decoustics Limited, Rexdale, Canada
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,166
Int. a.3 E04B 5/52
U.S. a. 52-484 26 Qaims
plates each forming a face and each being bent inwardly at
least at one of its vertical edges and, inwardly recessed from
the face, then upon itself to form a double thickness vertically
outwardly extending flange recessed from the face, the in-
wardly bent portion then terminating in an also outwardly
extending connecting flange parallel to but offset from the face
of each said plate, said face plates at their other ends being bent
inwardly to define a relatively deep female channel having
inturned edge restrictions, and wherein said first and second
connecting flanges of one of said face plates abut the corre-
sponding first and second connecting flanges of the other of
said face plates.
4,438,615
ORBA-HUB
Wendel R. Wendel, Plainvlew, N.Y., assignor to Space Struc-
tures International Corp., Plainview, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,801
Int. a.3 P04H 12/06; F16B 7/J8
U.S. a. 52-648 J Claims
3. A suspended ceiling system comprising a plurality of grid
support members, a plurality of ceiling panels each having a
body member and a reinforcing edge secured about the top
edge of the panel and extending down the side edge thereof,
spring means hingedly secured to each of said panels and
releasably secured to one of said grid members, wherein said
spring means maintains said panel in position against said grid
members in one position and in a second position said spring
means is selectively disengagable for suspending a ceiling panel
generally perpendicular to said grid members, said grid mem-
bers have a downwardly extending alignment stud which
cooperates with the reinforced edge of said panels to accu-
rately align panels with the grid members when positioned
thereagainst, said panels including a decorative cover on the
lower surface of the panel which extends upwardly along the
edges of the panel, whereby when two adjacent panels are
secured to the grid members the alignment stud therebetween
is not visible due to the decorative cover of said panels extend-
ing upwardly along the edges thereof.
4,438,614
DEMOUNTABLE INTERIOR PARTITION SYSTEM AND
COMPONENTS THEREFOR
Richard L. Raith, Solon, Ohio, and Joseph A. Davenport,
Portland, Oreg., assignors to Hauserman, Inc., Geveland,
Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 882,668, Mar. 2, 1978, Pat. No. 4,251,968.
This application Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,540
Int. aj E04C J/W
U.S. a 52-580 ^ 5 ci„„.
1. A panel for a partition system comprising opposite face
1. A strut assembly for joining first and second hubs in a
space frame including in combination a strut member, first and
second bolt means projecting from said strut member, first and
second bore sections of said strut member, first and second
bore openings of lesser diameter than said bolt means commu-
nicating respectively with said first and second bore sections,
first conical shoulder means joining said first bore opening and
said first bore sections, second conical shoulder means joining
said second bore opening and said second bore section, said
first and second bolt means respectively projecting in loose fit
configuration through said respective bore openings and into
respective bore sections, a spherical bearing surfaced nut on
the end of each of said bolt means within each said respective
bore section engaging said respective conical shoulder, first
and second hub abutting means fixed in position on said first
and second bolt means respectively providing a known preset
spacing therebetween and in which a respective cylindrical
collar member surrounding respective bolt means with ends
thereof respectively abutting said strut member and a respec-
tive hub to provide a compressive load transfer path.
4,438,616
SPACE FRAMES
Edwin T. Codd, 87 Albert St., Brisbane, Queensland, 4000,
Australia
per No. PCr/AU81/00089, § 371 Date Feb. 1, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 1, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00311, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 4, 1982
PCT Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 354,081
Claims priority, application Australia, Jul. 11, 1980, PE4480
Int. a.3 E04H 12/00
U.S. a. 52-650 4 ctaj^
1. A space frame of the type having an upper grid of longitu-
dinal chord members and lateral chord members, a lower grid
of longitudinal chord members and lateral chord members, and
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1427
diagonal struts interconnecting nodes at chord intersections of
the two grids, characterized in that at each node;
(a) one chord member of each grid overlies the other chord
member of such grid,
(b) an end of each strut extends from the node and is inter-
posed between the said chord members of each grid.
(c) the strut ends are in adjacent, non-superimposed, rela-
tionship, and
(d) each one of the said strut ends is individually secured by
a connector member passing through the said strut end
and through the adjacent chord members above and
below said strut end.
4,438,617
BELT TRACKING AND TENSIONING ARRANGEMENT
Lawrence W. Ulrich, and Connie W. Walker, both of Boling-
brook. 111., assignors to Durable Packaging Corporation, Chi<
cago. III.
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,011
Int. a.) B65B 61/00
U.S. a. 53—137 10 Claims
means rigidly secured to said channel member intermediate the
first and second ends of said control rod member; biasing
means extending between said support block and said stop
means for biasing said second shaft away from said first shaft;
and skewing means associated with a portion of said control
rod member spaced from said first end thereof for selectively
raising and lowering said portion of said control rod member
so as to pivot said support block about a transversely extending
horizontal axis and thereby skew said second roller member
relative to said first roller member.
4,438,618
APPARATUS FOR STACKING PRINTED PRODUCTS,
SUCH AS NEWSPAPERS, PERIODICALS AND THE
LIKE, ARRIVING IN AN IMBRICATED PRODUCT
STREAM
Werner Honegger, Tann-RUti, Switxerland, assignor to Ferag
AG, Hinwil, Switzerland
Filed Jul. 6, 1981. Ser. No. 280,998
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 15, 1980.
5400/80
Int. a.5 B65B 63/04
U.S. a. 53—430 30 Qalms
1. In combination with apparatus of the type used for sealing
the foldable flaps of cartons, said apparatus including a frame
structure, a sealing head means mounted to said frame struc-
ture, and a pair of facing longitudinally extending side arm
assemblies mounted to said frame structure, said side arm
assemblies including moving endless belts positioned to
contact the side walls of said carton for movement of same past
said sealing head means; an improved endless belt tracking and
tensioning arrangement comprising: a first roller member jour-
nalled for rotation about a substantially vertical first shaft, said
first shaft being rigidly secured to said side arm assembly; a
second roller member longitudinally spaced from said first
roller for rotation about a subsuntially vertical second shaft,
said second shaft being movably mounted to said side arm
assembly for movement towards and away from said first shaft;
an endless belt joumalled around said first and second roller
members; a longitudinally extending channel member rigidly
secured to said side arm assembly adjacent to said second roller
member; a support block positioned within said channel mem-
ber and movable longitudinally therein, said second shaft ex-
tending into said channel member and rigidly secured to said
support block for movement therewith; a control rod member
positioned within said channel member, said control rod mem-
ber having a first end secured to said support block and a
second end extending towards said first roller member; a stop
1. An apparatus for stacking printed products, especially
newspapers, periodicals and the like, arriving in an imbricated
product formation, each of said printed products having a
trailing edge and a leading edge, comprising:
a rotatably driven winding mandril rouuble about an axis of
rotation for winding-up the imbricated product formation
into a wound imbricated package formation;
a separation layer connected with the routably driven wind-
ing mandril and which, during winding of the imbricated
product formation, is wound-up under tension in the form
of individual tensioned coils between package layers of
the wound imbricated package formation;
said separation layer comprising a winding band which is
infed to the rotatably driven winding mandril and is under
tension;
means including the rotaubly driven winding mandril for
infeeding the separation layer under tension to the rotat-
ably driven winding mandril and into the wound imbri-
cated package formation;
drive means for driving the winding mandril such that said
individual coils of the separation layer which are wound
onto the winding mandril are wound thereon under ten-
sion; ^
means for infeeding the imbricated product formation at a
predetermined infeed velocity to the rotaubly driven
winding mandril with the trailing edges of the products of
the imbricated product formation bearing upon the sepa-
ration layer;
means cooperating with said infeeding means for the imbri-
cated product formation and said drive means for accom-
modating a winding-up velocity of the winding mandril as
a function of the predetermined infeed velocity of the
imbricated product formation;
means for regulating driving of the routably driven winding
mandril as a function of the diameter of the wound imbri-
cated package formation; and
1428
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
said rotatably driven winding mandril being positioned rela-
tive to said separation layer such that the leading edges of
the printed products are situated closer to the axis of
rotation of said rotatably driven winding mandril than the
trailing edges of the printed products which bear upon
said separation layer.
4,438,619
CORN HARVESTER COMBINE WITH MEANS FOR
PICKING UP LOOSE EARS
Edward J. Heim, R.R. #2, Box 124B, Hoxie, Kans. 67740;
Stephen B. Hennessey, 216 SE. Greenroad, Tecumseb, Kans.
66542; Curtis R. Janssen, R.R, #2, Solomon, Kans. 67480; R.
Shannon Johnson, 4010 N. Brandywine Dr., Apt. 1023, Peo-
ria, III. 61614; Richard B. League, 917 Moro, Manhattan,
Kans. 66502; Ronald D. Shinogle, 4010 N. Brandywine Dr.,
Apt. 1310, Peoria, III. 61614, and Richard A. Weber, 513J
Main, Seneca, Kans. 66538
Filed Mar. 17, 1983, Ser. No. 476,279
Int. CiJ AOID 45/02
U.S. a. 56-119 15 Qaims
cross bars supported between the chains for rearward
movement with the lower runs of the chains across the
pickup and receiving, and discharge sections of the trough
means;
power means for driving the conveyor drive chains;
each of the cross bars having a plurality of generally radially
extending tines which fit within the spaces between at
least some of the finger-like bars and corresponding skid
runners to thereby fully engage ears of corn on the for-
wardly extending lips and move the ears rearwardly along
the finger-like bars and transfer them to the discharge
section; and
said movable cross bars being effective as conveyor flights
to convey ears along the discharge section to the outlet
end thereof for transfer to the auger conveyor via the
gathering chains.
23 so ^
SO
38^.
4,438,620
METHOD AND MEANS OF SERVICING AN OVERHEAD
LIMB OF A GROWING PLANT
Paul F. Beardsley, Van Wert, Iowa 50262
Filed Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 412,497
Int. a? AOID 46/24
U.S. a. 56—332 14 Qaj^,
fUiMw nHNnii.iRfflilK^
^3s -S- U ^ta
1. In a mobile corn harvester combine having a com head
comprising a frame with a plurality of forwardly extending
horizontally spaced throat portions adapted to be aligned with
and moved along a plurality of rows of corn being harvested,
a transverse auger conveyor behind the throat portions for
conveying com laterally toward processing mec)ianism in the
machine, each of the throat portions having associated there-
with conventional structure including a pair of horizontally
spaced stripper plates with snapping rolls and rearwardly
moving gathering chains for snapping com ears from stalks
and conveying them to the auger conveyor; means for collect-
mg loose ears of com from the ground and conveying them to
the auger conveyor comprising:
a plurality of conveyor trough means supported by the com
head frame and located forwardly of the frame between
adjacent rows of com, each conveyor trough means ex-
tending in a generally rearwardly and upwardly direction
and comprising a lower level pickup and receiving section
and a higher level discharge section;
said pickup and receiving section having an open grid-like
structure comprising finger-like bars parallel to the direc-
tion of movement of the harvester, and a ground-engaging
skid runner at the forward end of each, each of the skid
runners having a forwardly extending lip for picking up
ears of com from the ground, the finger-like bars being
pivotally connected to the discharge section and to corre-
sponding ones of the skid runners enabling the finger-like
bars to move up and down in response to variations in
ground level;
said discharge section comprising a plate having an inlet end
portion positioned to receive ears of com from the pickup
and receiving section, and having an outlet end portion
positioned to discharge ears of com onto the gathering
chains for transferring ears of com therefrom to the auger
conveyor;
a reel having an auxiliary frame supported by the com head
frame above each conveyor trough means, a pair of hori-
zontally spaced conveyor drive chains trained between
forward and rearward sprocket means on the auxiliary
frame for orbital movement in a lower conveying run and
an upper retum run, and having a plurality of movable
."s**
6. A tool for reaching, positioning and holding overhead
limbs of growing plants for servicing, comprising,
an elongated member having opposite ends,
a hook means on one end of said elongated member for
releasably grasping and holding a limb,
and a foot engaging means on the other end of said elongated
member to permit an operator's foot to hold said elon-
gated member and a limb grasped by said hook means in a
stabilized position by exerting downward force on said
foot engaging means, whereupon both hands of the opera-
tor are free to service said limb.
4,438,621
THREAD JOINING DEVICE
Joachim Rohner, Monchen-Gladbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to W. Schla/borst A Co., Monchen-Gladbach, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 225,636, Jan. 16, 1981, abandoned. This
appUcation Jan. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 462,406
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 19.
1980, 3001917
Int a.J B65H 69/06; DOIH 15/00: D02J 1/08
U.S. a. 57-22 6 Claims
1. Thread joining device, comprising a basic body stationary
with respect to threads to be joined, said basic body having a
first channel for compressed air formed therein, a plurality of
splicing heads for accommodating respective threads of differ-
ent type, each of said splicing heads having formed therein a
splicing chamber for inserting and joining threads and a second
compressed air channel for communication between said splic-
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1429
ing chamber and said first channel formed in said basic body, 4,438,623
and means for interchangeably fastening one of said splicing GRIPPER APPARATUS ON A RING SPINNING OR RING
TWISTING MACHINE
/H,, ,, P«t«' Oswald, Matzingen, Switzerland, auignor to Rieter Ma-
'" '" O' chine Works Ltd., WInterthur, Switzerland
per No. PCT/EP81/00174, § 371 Date Jul. 1, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 1, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/01727, PCT Pub.
Date May 27, 1982
'}^ PCT Filed Oct. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 396,915
22 Qaims priority, application Switzeriand, Nov. 13, 1980.
24 8428/80
Int. a.J DOIH 9/00; B66C 1/46
U.S. a. 57—275
12 Qaims
heads selectively to said basic body in accordance with the
type of threads to be joined.
4,438,622
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC CREELING IN RING
SPINNING FRAMES
Roberto E. Pons, Ronda General Mitre, 105,4M<' Barcelona 6,
Spain
Filed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,251
Oaims priority, application Spain, Mar. 10, 1981>J00.247
Int. a.' DOIH 9/18, 15/00
U.S. a. 57—261
6 Claims
I. A gripper apparatus for gripping bobbin tubes each hav-
ing an interior space and placed at a ring spmning or ring
twisting machine, said gripper apparatus comprising:
a movable support beam extending along the machine and
provided with pegs directed towards the bobbin tubes;
each of said pegs having a tapered front end facing a related
one of said bobbin tubes and each peg being insertable into
the interior space of the related bobbin tube; and
each said peg being provided with a substantially cylindrical
extension formed by an elastically bendabic material and
extending forwardly from said tapered front end of said
peg.
''^^^.'
4,438,624
OVERHUNG MOUNTED ROTATABLE CENTERING
SPINDLE
Walter Mayer, and Stephan Wittmann, both of IngolsUdt, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Schubert A Salzer Maschinen-
fabrik Aktiengesellschaft, IngolsUdt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 382.964
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Jun. 2,
1981, 3121759
Int. a? DOIH 15/00: B65H 57/00. 69/00
U.S. a. 57—352 5 Qaims
1. Apparatus for automatic creeling in ring spinning frames
having a plurality of frame spindles for holding bobbins of
roving that passes from the bobbins over roving rods to a
drafting system of a spinning machine, comprising a frame,
means mounting said frame for movement past a plurality of
bobbins of a said ring spinning frame, a body movable verti-
cally on said movable frame, means carried by the movable
frame for detecting missing roving for each of the frame spin-
dles, means for stopping the movable frame at the location of
the missing roving, means on the body for removing the bobbin
on the spindle at the location of the missing roving, means on
the body for creeling a full bobbin in the place of the removed
bobbin, means for retaining the end of the roving from the
freshly creeled bobbin, means on the body for gripping said
roving end and for passing it about said roving rods to said
drafting system, and means for replacing said bobbins on said
movable frame.
1. A centering spindle for centering a yarn at an open-end
spinning position and the like of the type having a central
peripheral groove into which open threaded grooves run to-
gether oppositely from both sides, comprising:
a first longitudinal section of said grooves running into said
central groove from one side thereof;
1430
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
a second longitudinal section of said grooves running into
said central groove from a second side thereof and extend-
ing away therefrom to a free end of said spindle;
said centering spindle being reversibly rotatable so that a
yarn engaged thereby travels from said central groove to
said free end and is there ejected from said spindle; and
said threaded grooves of said first and second sections hav-
ing different core diameters.
at least one quarter turn overlap, overlapping portions of
said bushing being spaced from each other for resilicntly
4,438,625
REHEAT GAS TURBINE COMBINED WITH STEAM
TURBINE
Ivan G. Rice, P.O. Box 233, Spring, Tex. 77373
Division of S«r. No. 954,838, Oct. 26, 1978, Pat. No. 4,272,953.
This application Jan. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 224,496
Int. a.i P02C 6/18
U.S. a. 60-39.17 21 Claims
» « Y^
^kKK\\K<Ik^
accommodating differential thermal loading of said ce-
ramic member and said metallic structure.
1. In an apparatus for the production of useful power includ-
ing a gas compressor for receiving ambient air and for produc-
ing a high pressure air, a generator turbine drivingly connected
by a generator shaft to said compressor, a first combustor
receiving gas generator fuel and said high pressure air and for
forming a combustion gas for driving said generator turbine,
said generator turbine driving said compressor and forming a
high temperature, high pressure first gas. a reheat combustor
for receiving said high temperature, high pressure first gas and
reheater fuel and for forming a high temperature, high pressure
second gas, a power turbine associated with said reheat com-
bustor for receiving said second gas whereby said power tur-
bine is driven to produce work and an exhaust third gas is
produced, the improvement comprising wherein said compres-
sor is capable of producing a pressure ratio of said high pres-
sure air to said ambient air of at least about 18 and a linear axial
flow annular diffuser is interposed between said generator
turbine and said reheat combustor for reducing the velocity of
said first gas, said annular diffuser having a length of at least
about 4 feet to prevent separation and resulting turbulence of
said first gas during deceleration, said generator turbine, annu-
lar diffuser, reheat combustor, and power turbine are sequen-
tially juxtaposed in a linear axial arrangement whereby the
now of gas from said generator turbine sequentially through
said annular diffuser, said reheat combuster and said power
turbine is substantially parallel to the linear axis of said ar-
rangement.
4,438,627
EXHAUST GAS PURIHCATION APPARATUS IN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Osama Gotoh, Higashikurume, and Akira FHJimura, Niiza, both
of Japan, assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,689
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 18, 1980, 55-161432
Int. CIJ POIN 3/22
U.S. a. 60-278 6 Oaims
4,438,626
APPARATUS FOR ATTACHING A CERAMIC MEMBER
TO A METAL STRUCTURE
Stephen B. Berestecki, Lynnfield, Mass., assignor to General
Electric Company, Lynn, Mass.
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,172
Int. a.^ F02C 7/20
U.S. a. 60-39.32 17 Qaims
1. Apparatus for mounting a ceramic member to a metallic
structure in a thermally cyclic environment, comprising:
at least one bore in said ceramic member;
at least one metallic pin passing through said metallic struc-
ture and into said at least one bore;
a scroll-wound metal bushing between each of said metallic
pins and each of said bores; and
each of said metal bushings being formed of a metal sheet
scroll wound at least one and one quarter turns to provide
1. An exhaust gas purification apparatus for a lean mixture
internal combustion engine comprising:
an intake passage means;
an exhaust passage means;
a catalyzer for exhaust gas purification coupled to said ex-
haust passage means;
an external air introducing passage means connected to said
exhaust passage means on the upstream side of said cata-
lyzer;
a first detecting means connected to said intake passage and
operable in response to negative intake pressure above a
predetermined value for detecting deceleration of said
engine;
a second detecting means operable in response to vehicle
speed above a predetermined value; and
a control valve means positioned in said external air intro-
ducing passage means and connected to said first and
second detecting means, whereby said control valve
means is opened upon concurrent operation of said first
and second detecting means to introduce external air into
said exhaust passage means only during deceleration from
high speed.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1431
4,438,628 ^ ^j« ^-p
us. a. 40-374 ,„, i't"' V"™" '° "°™^ """" "»»• KiboikUd lUUb..
- 1 tiaim Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 390,039
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 25. 1981, 56-98976
Int. a.J F15B 7/08
U.S. a 60-579 13 Claims
'! ^r
-J
,».±
•^.^
i^^^l'^^
1. A driving apparatus for a pump jack of the type including
a samson post, a walking beam pivotally mounted on the sam-
son post for rotation around a horizontal axis, a horsehead on
one end of the walking beam for driving connection to a pump
mechanism, said apparatus comprising first cylinder means
pivotally mounted on said samson post; first piston rod means
associated with said first cylinder means and pivotally con-
nected to said walking beam on one side of said horizontal axis
for moving said one end of said walking beam upwardly upon
extension of said first piston rod means with respect to said first
cylinder means; second cylinder means pivotally mounted on
said samson post; second piston rod means associated with said
second cylinder means and pivotally connected to said walking
beam on the other side of said horizontal axis for moving said
one end of said walking beam downwardly upon extension of
said second piston rod means with respect to said second cylin-
der means; adjustable control means for alternately extending
said first and second cylinder means, said control means com-
prising a variable displacement pump, control piston and cylin-
der means mechanically connected to said variable displace-
ment pump for controlling the operation thereof and including
a pair of adjustable limit stops for said control piston and
cylinder means for independently controlling the extension
speed of said first and second cylinder means, a fixed displace-
ment pump for supplying fluid under pressure to said variable
displacement pump and through a pair of solenoid valves to
said control piston and cylinder means, adjustable means for
controlling the flow rate of fluid through said solenoid valves
for independently controlling the acceleration rates of said first
and second cylinder means, switch means actuated by said
walking beam at the top and bottom limits of the stroke
thereof, said switch means being operatively connected to said
solenoid valves for controlling the operation of said solenoid
valves and thereby said control piston and cylinder means and
consequently the feeding direction of said variable displace-
ment pump, whereby said one end of the walking beam and
said horsehead are reciprocated upwardly and downwardly,
the upward and downward movements being at the same or
different speeds according to the extension speeds selected for
said first and second cylinder means.
KWO O.G.— 57
1. Apparatus for simultaneously adjustmg the fluid pressures
in a dual hydraulic circuit arrangement in which in a first
hydraulic circuit pressurized fluid is supplied from a first pres-
sure source to a first fluid pressure activated device and m a
second hydraulic circuit pressurized fluid is supplied from a
second pressure source to a second fluid pressure activated
device, said apparatus comprising:
a cylinder having opposite closed ends and including spaced
bulkheads therein defining a central chamber between the
bulkheads and a pair of chambers on respective opposite
sides of the bulkheads,
a pair of spaced first pistons slidably mounted in said central
chamber and defining a control pressure chamber therebe-
tween and first and second primary fluid pressure cham-
bers between respective pistons and said bulkheads,
said first primary fluid pressure chamber being connected to
said first pressure source while said second primary fluid
pressure chamber is connected to said second pressure
source,
a pair of second pistons secured for common movement with
said first pistons, said second pistons being respectively
mounted between said bulkheads and the closed ends of
said cylinder and defining first and second secondary fluid
pressure chambers between the second pistons and respec-
tive bulkheads,
said first and second secondary chambers being respectively
connected to said first and second fluid pressure activated
devices of said first and second hydraulic circuits, and
means for supplying a pressure fluid at a control pressure
from a third pressure source to said control pressure
chamber between said first pistons for simultaneously
adjusting the pressures in said first and second secondary
chambers and thereby in said first and second pressure
activated devices of said first and second hydraulic cir-
cuits.
4,438,630
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MAINTAINING
OPERATING TEMPERATURES IN A MOLTEN SALT
CO-GENERATING UNIT
George H. Rowe, Windsor Locks, Conn., assignor to Combus-
tion Engineering, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
Filed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,511
Int. a.J FOIK J3/00
U.S. a. 60-676 2 Claims
1. In a molten salt co-generating steam supply system, the
J^32 OFFICIAL
system including first and second steam supply units connected
to a cotnmon load, the first unit adapted for continuous steam
generation in alternating full system power and part system
power output, the second unit adapted for alternating hot
shutdown and partial system power generation, the first unit
having a steam flow line to the load and a feed-water flow line
from the load, the second unit having a primary fluid loop
containing a molten salt and a secondary loop containing water
as the working fluid, with a steam generating heat exchanger
interposed therebetween, wherein the invention is a method of
maintaining the steam generator components of the second unit
in a hot standby condition when steam is being generated only
by the first unit, comprising the steps of:
GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
TUOTINt/
GCNCIUTOM/ LjOO
COMOCNSEK
^200
SOLMSTUM
SCNUATrNS UNIT
placer means defines within an enclosure first and second
chambers of variable volume, and in which a refrigerant fluid
is circulated in a fluid path between the first chamber and the
second chamber by movement of the displacer means, the
improvement comprising chamber means for guiding a slide
connected to the displacer means, a moter connected to said
slide for reciprocating said slide, a valve having a reciprocal
valve member for controlling the flow of high and low pres-
sure fluid, said valve member having a peripheral groove
which is of uniform depth at its ends, said moter being con-
nected to a cam arranged to reciprocate said valve member in
timed relation with reciprocation of said slide so that the valve
member will introduce high pressure fluid via said groove into
said first and second chambers when the displacer means is at
one of the extremities of its movement.
-FOSSIL FUCL
STEAM aCNERlTIIW UNIT
4,438,632
MEANS FOR PERIODIC DESORPTION OF A
CRYOPUMP
Philip A. Lessard, Acton, and Allen J. Bartlett, Milford, both of
Mass., assignors to Helix Technology Corporation, Waltham,
Mass.
Filed Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,120
Int. a.3 BOID 5/00
U.S. a. 62—55.5 7 Qaims
connecting the first unit steam flow lines to the second unit
secondary loop steam flow lines;
connecting the first unit feed-water flow lines to the second
unit secondary feed-water flow lines;
whereby a fraction of the steam generated by the first unit
bypasses the load and enters the steam line of the second-
ary loop, flows in reverse direction through the secondary
steam generator and returns to the first unit through the
secondary loop feed-water lines, such that the steam gen-
erator components are maintained near their normal oper-
ating temperatures.
4,438,631
CRYOGENIC REFRIGERATOR
Domenico S. Sarcia, Carlisle, Mass., assignor to CVI Incorpo-
rated, Columbus, Ohio
Filed Jul. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,482
Int. a? F25B 9/00
U.S. a. 62—6 11 cisams
j» a »4
rot *a £4 "
^^"
1. A cryopump comprising:
a primary cryopanel within the cryopump associated with a
low temperature heat sink having means for adsorbing a
first low boiling point gas,
a secondary cryopanel associated with a higher temperature
heat sink having means for condensing a higher boiling
point gas,
characterized by:
movable means for selectively conducting heat from outside
the cryopump to the primary cryopanel within the cryo-
pump to raise the temperature of the cryopanel above that
which is necessary to cause said first gas to become de-
sorbed from said cryopanel.
I. In an cryogenic refrigerator in which a moveable dis-
4,438,633
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING LOW GRADE
THERMAL ENERGY TO IMPROVE EFnOENCY OF AIR
CONDITIONING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS
Uland L. Hiser, P.O. Box 95, New Braunfels, Tex. 78130
Filed No?. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 4*1,163
Int. a.3 F25B 7/00
U.S. a. 62-116 16 Claims
1. An air conditioning and refrigeration system comprising:
first compressor means;
condenser means for receiving a pressurized refrigerant in a
vapor form from said first compressor means, said con-
denser means converting said vapor form to a liquid form
by giving off heat;
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1433
expansion means receiving said liquid form of said refriger-
ant and allowing passage therethrough;
evaporator means receiving said refrigerant from said expan-
sion means and converting said refrigerant to a vapor form
by absorbing heat, said vapor being received by said first
compressor means for pressurization prior to said receiv-
ing by said condenser means;
jet compressor means operated by an expanding vapor, said
jet compressor flowing said expanding vapor there-
through to draw a lower pressure at a first orifice thereof,
auger means for advancing the slush along the trough;
a first means for damming the slush, said first dam means
adjustably mounted in said trough thereby defining a
recrystallizer section of the trough; and
second means for damming the slush adjustably mounted in
said trough intermediate the first dam means and the ice
crystal discharge means thereby defining a first ice drain-
age section and a second ice drainage section of the
trough.
4,438,635
EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER REFRIGERATION
SYSTEM
William J. McCoy, Jr., 1029 Southgate Rd., Knoxville, Tenn.
37919
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,565
Int. CI. J F28D 5/00
U.S. a. 62-305 12 Claims
said first orifice being in operative communication with
said first compressor means to reduce pressure across said
first compressor means;
boiler means for vaporizing a fluid therein utilizing a heat
source to provide said expanding vapor for said jet com-
pressor means, said boiler means being in flow communi-
cation with said jet compressor means; and
pump means for returning condensed fluid of said expanding
vapor from said jet compressor means to said boiler
means.
4,438,634
FREEZE CONCENTRATION APPARATUS
Rene Merle, New Hope; Myron Uecker, Buffalo, and Robert
Kozlik, Minneapolis, all of Minn., assignors to General Mills,
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Nov. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 439,448
Int. a.J BOID 9/04: C02F 1/22
U.S. a. 62-123 10 Qaims
\^^'^^'^^^'^'^s^v^'^V''''''^v^'?^'^V^'■^'■;^^^^^^^^'■^^^^^^^^''^''V^^''''''^^^;!
1. An apparatus useful in the freeze concentration of par-
tially frozen slush having an ice crystal phase and a liquid
phase, comprising:
a trough having a first end and an opposed second end;
means for elevating the second end relative to the first end;
means for feeding the slush to the trough proximate the first
end;
means for discharging the ice crystal phase proximate the
second end;
means for discharging the liquid phase from the underside of
the trough;
1 \ 1
1. A method of operating an evaporative condenser refriger-
ation system, comprising the steps of:
selecting a suitable condensing temperature diflerential;
selecting a suitable condenser having a sufficient capacity
for operation at the average wet bulb temperature of the
locality of the system and at the selected temperature
differential;
operating the evaporative condenser without capacity con-
trols and at full capacity at all times during operation of
the refrigeration system;
permitting the condensing temperature of the working fluid
in the condenser to continuously follow the prevailing wet
bulb temperature of the locality;
maintaining a seperation between a high pressure portion
and a low pressure portion of the refrigeration system; and
controlling the flow rate of condensed working fluid to an
evaporator with a flow control valve downstream of the
separation between the high and low pressure portions.
4,438,636
HEAT-ACTUATED AIR CONDITIONER/HEAT PUMP
Dean T. Morgan, Sudbury, Mass., assignor to Thermo Electron
Corporation, Waltham, Mass.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,596
Int. a.3 F25B i/00. 29/00
U.S. a. 62—325 9 Claims
1. A heat-actuated air conditioner/heat pump comprising:
a first heat pipe assembly including at least one sealed tube
having a central portion in fluid communication with a
condenser leg and an evaporator leg and adapted to carry
a working fluid therein, said tube being rotatable about an
axis lying substantially in said central portion, said con-
denser leg located at a radius Kc from said axis of rotation,
and said evaporator leg located at a radius R, from said
axis of rotation, R^ being greater than R« and R« being
comparatively small;
a second heat pipe assembly subsuntially identical to said
first heat pipe assembly, said second assembly being axi-
1434
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
ally displaced from said first assembly and rotatable about
said axis;
means for rotating said heat pipe assemblies about said axis
to produce a vapor pressure differential of said fluid in the
condenser and evaporator legs of each assembly, the
speed of rotation being selected in conjunction with the
molecular weight of the working fluid and the values for
therein correspondingly to said vertically oriented com-
partments in said bottom housing;
a coolant disposed in the upper ends of each respective
recessed cavity of said top housing;
flexible means attaching said bottom housing to said top
housing; and
means for carrying said top and bottom housings.
tt-if-
F O-ii
'o-f?-^>»
A
■X
it —
'^^^i?!^"
r~0-ii
J
112
^r"
}
1. A portable cooling container for transporting and cooling
canned beverages, comprising in combination:
a curved bottom housing having a plurality of vertically
oriented conical compartments for holding canned bever-
ages, said housing having walls of insulating material
which surround said compartments;
a removeable center block in said bottom housing for pro-
viding a receptacle for sandwiches surrounded by insulat-
ing material;
a correspondingly curved top housing having walls of insu-
lating material and having a plurality of recessed cavities
4,438,638
REFRIGERATION PROCESS USING TWO-PMASE
TURBINE
Lance G. Hays, Los Angeles; Walter R. Studhalter, Woodland
Hills, and Emil W. Ritzi, Manhattan Beach, all of Calif.,
assignors to Biphase Energy Systems, Santa Monica, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 145,470, May 1, 1980, Pat. No. 4,336,693.
This application Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,397
Int. a.3 F25B 1/06
U.S. a 62-500 ,7 ci,i„.
Rf and R^, such that evaporation of the working fluid in
the evaporator legs will occur at a lower temperature than
that which produces condensation of said fluid in the
condenser legs; and
means for providing separate flows of air at different temper-
atures and for selectively directing said flows onto the
condenser legs and the evaporator legs of said heat pipe
assemblies.
4,438,637
COOLING CONTAINER FOR CANNED BEVERAGES
AND SANDWICHES
Lyle H. Atkinson, 3828 Pavant Dr., Salt Lake City, Utah 84120
FUed Aug. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 409,545
Int. a.J F25D 3/08
U.S. a. 62—457 8 Qaims
1. In a refrigeration system employing fluid refrigerant, the
system including a flow path wherein the refrigerant is com-
pressed and cooled, the system including expansion means to
expand the compressed cooled fluid to a lower pressure level
and lower temperature level, and refrigeration ducting
through which the expanded fluid passes and absorbs heat, the
improvement comprising
(a) said expansion means including nozzle means to receive
the cooled fluid and to produce a liquid and vapor dis-
charge,
(b) and a separator rotor located in such proximity to said
nozzle means as to be rotated in response to said liquid
discharged toward the rotor, the rotor carrying reaction
nozzle means to discharge pressurized liquid for develop-
ing torque acting to rotate the rotor,
(c) at least some of the liquid discharged from said rotor
reaction nozzle means flowing to said refrigeration duct-
ing.
4,438,639
PRESSER FOOT FOR A KNITTING MACHINE
Max W. Betts, Coventry, England, assignor to Courtaulds Lim-
ited, London, England
Filed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,357
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 17, 1981,
8104943
Int. a.3 D04B 7/04
U.S.a.66-64 TCUims
1. A knitting machine with independently operable needles
located in opposed needle beds and comprising:
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1435
a presser foot device including at least one presser foot for
controlling loops during the knitting procedure,
said presser foot having a leading portion and a trailing
portion in relation to a direction of movement relative to
needles of the machine,
said leading portion comprising a stitch contacting member
operative close to both needle beds and stiff so as to resist
deformation by knitted loops whereby said member will
contact and control knitted loops held on needles of both
needle beds, said member including a stitch contacting
surface close to both needle beds,
said stitch contacting surface being smoothly curved down-
wardly and rearwardly in the direction of said relative
"'TuV ■•
movement and having a forward part which is first to
contact knitted loops in operation of said presser foot,
said forward part of said stitch contacting surface being
inclined to the direction of said relative movement at an
angle less than 35%
said presser foot including a junction region between down-
ward inclination of said stitch contacting surface of said
stitch contacting member and rearward extension of said
presser foot in said direction of relative movement,
said junction region being located in advance of flush jack
position in said knitting machine, and
said trailing portion of the presser foot comprising a resilient
elongated element mounted rigid with said leading por-
tion and extending rearwardly therefrom.
4,438,640
PORTABLE DOOR BRACE
Robert E. Willis, 6606 N. Saginaw, Flint, Mich. 48505
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 212,834, Dec. 4, 1980,
abandoned. This application Sep. 13, 1983, Ser. No. 532,083
Int. a.' E05B 64/00; E05C 17/54
U.S. a. 70-94 4 Oaims
►fr— i5.
section, roller means rotatably retained within said mam
body and movable between a first position wherein said
roller means extends below the bottom edge of said main
body and a second position wherein said roller means does
not extend below the bottom edge of said body, and means
for urging said roller means toward said first position such
that said roller means normally extends below the bottom
edge of said mam body.
4,438,641
SHIELDED LOCK ASSEMBLY
Ilya I. Uvkov, 321 W. 94 St., Apt. 6NW, New York. N.Y. 10025
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,058
Int. a.> E05B 65/52. 67/38. 65/08
U.S. CI. 70-95 ,4 cims
1. A shielded lock assembly suitable for joining first and
second members together comprising in combination:
(A) a shackle-bearing element having a body portion and a
shackle carried thereby;
(B) a lock body having a keyhole and having a shackle-
receiving aperture opening in a given direction and
adapted to receive and releasably retain said shackle
therein;
(C) a housing adapted to be secured to the first member and
having an enclosure adapted to receive said lock body and
having access openings communicating with said shackle-
receiving aperture and said keyhole, respectively; and
(D) means operatively connected to said housing and en-
gageable with said lock body for retaining said lock body
in said enclosure;
said shackle-bearing element being adapted to be secured to
the second member such that said shackle is aligned with
and enters said shackle-receiving aperture as the first and
second members approach each other, said body portion
thereof being configured and dimensioned to then cover
substantially all portions of said aperture access opening in
said housing not occupied by said shackle.
1. A door brace adapted to interengage a door knob or the
like on a door and a floor beneath the door comprising:
a plurality of sections interconnected substantially end-to-
end and collapsible with respect to each other into a
compact form;
means adapted to engage the door knob or the like on the
door formed in one end section of said plurality of sec-
tions; and
base means formed in the other end section of said plurality
of sections, said base means including a main body, means
for releasably securing said main body to said other end
4,438,642
ATTACHMENT DEVICE
Hendrik J. De Jong, Groenlo, Netherlands, assignor to N.V.
Nederlandsche Apparatenfabriek Nedap, De Groenlo, Nether-
lands
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,791
Qalms priority, application Netherlands, Dec. 18, 1980,
8006896
Int. a.i F16B 41/00
U.S. CI. 70-232 5 atim
1. Attachment device by means of which a safety device can
be attached to an article, characterized by a hollow sleeve
accommodating a screw member the operation of which ena-
bles to attach the attachment device to an article to be pro-
tected, said sleeve extending beyond the article-averted end of
the screw member and being provided with a transverse bore
hole provided in the corresponding end. which transverse bore
hole is adapted to receive a lock shackle means which renders
the screw member inaccessible to tools and said screw member
1436
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
n
March 27. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
has a screw head which rests against an internal shoulder of the
sleeve by means of a spring washer, and that the head-averted
end of the screw member is provided with a threaded portion
4,438,644
FORGING DEVICE
Tadeusz Rut, Poznan, Poland, assignor to Instytut Obrobkl
Plastycznej, Poznan, Poland
Filed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,783
Oaims priority, application Poland, Jun. 9, 1979, 216275
Int. a.3 B21K 1/08
U.S. a. 72-356 7 ciai^
?• 9 3
extending beyond the sleeve and having a larger core diameter
than the outer diameter of the corresponding end of the sleeve,
which threaded portion is adapted to be screwed in a screwed
hole of an article to be protected.
^
4,438 643
MACHINE FOR FORMING TUBES FROM A STRIP
Stanley W. O. Menzei, Adelaide, Australia; David E. Mominee,
Alpine, and Gilbert W. Vance, Jamul, both of Calif., assignors
to Rib Loc (H.K.) Limited, Hong Kong
Division of Ser. No. 80,044, Sep. 28, 1979, Pat. No. 4,337,564.
This application Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,517
Claims priority, application Australia, Oct. 6, 1978, PD6282
Int. a.3 B21C 37/12
U.S. a. 72-49 16 Claims
1. A forging device for mounting between the vertically
moving head and the base of a forging press comprising a
central work-piece, gripping tool positioned between two
work-upsetting tools; said gripping tool comprising two jaws,
one mounted to the head of the press and moving vertically
therewith and the other mounted to the base and both co-
acting to grip the work piece upon vertical movement of the
head to said base; said upsetting tools moving transverse to the
movement of said head and base, horizontally toward each
other along the axis of the work piece held by said gripping
tool, each upsetting tool comprising an upsetting-die holder
and an upsetting-die mounted thereon, each die holder being
coupled to the head by articulated connectors shaped as angu-
lar elements surrounding said holding tool having horizontal
and vertical arms pivotably connected by bearing members to
the press head, said horizontal arm pressing against the jaw
mounted to the head to press same to said base mounted jaw;
said horizontal arm sliding along said bearing surface directing
said vertical arms transverse to the direction of the moving
press head to converge said upsetting dies upon said work
piece.
1. A machine for forming a tube from a strip which has a rib
and a complementary groove extending longitudinally on the
strip, said machine comprising:
a support;
joining roller means;
means for mounting the joining roller means for rotation on
said support so that the joining roller means can engage
the strip;
means to urge the strip forwardly over said joining roller
means, said joining roller means allowing said strip to be
curved around into a helical convolution with a first part
of said strip being fed entering said convolution and a
second part of the strip leaving said convolution and with
the rib of one of said parts being in registry with the
groove of the other of said parts;
said joining roller being engageable with one side of said first
and second parts of said strip;
pressure roller means for forcing said rib of said one part into
said groove of said other part on the joining roller means
while applying a differential driving force to the other
side of said first part and to the other side of said second
part of said strip which tends to move said first and second
parts of said strip forward at different rates of motion to
progressively form a helical tube from said strip; and
said joining roller means being undriven so that it does not
apply a substantial force to said one side of the strip which
would oppose said differential driving force.
4438 645
LEVELLER FOR MOTOR VEHICLES
Horst Lutz, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Daiml-
er-Benz Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 938,955, Sep. 1, 1978, abandoned. This
application Nov. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 441,059
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Sen. 1.
1977,2739368
Int. a.J B21D J/14
U.S. a. 72-482 11 aaims
1. An aligning stand for motor vehicles with a stand frame
comprising longitudinal beams, with
mounting plates being provided on the longitudinal beams of
said stand frame,
crossbeams connecting the longitudinal beams and with
said mounting plates being opposite one another and being
equipped with fastening holes of a first pattern
1437
intermediate beam means for mounting cross member means,
the intermediate beam means being equipped with a first
configuration of fastening holes of said first pattern, for
mounting to said mounting plates and a second plurality of
holes of a second pattern different from said first pattern,
the disposition of the second plurality of holes is developed
as a regular pattern extending approximately over the
whole length of an intermediate beam means at discrete
positions regularly spaced from adjacent positions repeti-
tively, and
cross member means for mounting to said intermediate beam
means employing holes of at least one of said first and
second patterns.
4,438,646
CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL SURFACE GAUGE AND KIT
THEREOF
C. John Saban, Morton, III., assignor to Caterpillar Tractor Co.,
Peoria, 111.
Division of Ser. No. 225,921, Jan. 19, 1981, abandoned, which is
a continuation of Ser. No. 91,678, May 21, 1979, abandoned.
This application Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,937
Int. a.3 GOIB 21/30
U.S. CI. 73—105 8 aaims
1. A crankshaft journal surface gauge (10,24) for detecting
the surface irregularities of an arcuate surface (11) of a crank-
shaft journal (12) comprising a metallic and magnetized (16)
plate (10,25) having a straight and uninterrupted template edge
means (15,28) for engaging the arcuate surface (11) of said
crankshaft journal (12), in at least substantial parallel relation-
ship relative to a longitudinal axis (X) of said crankshaft jour-
nal (12), and for detecting any irregularities in the surface (11)
of said crankshaft journal (12).
4,438,647
IGNITION RANGE DETECTOR FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Tadashi Ozaki, Gamagori; Tadashi Hattori, Okazaki, and
Hiroaki Yamaguchi, A^jo, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon
Soken, Inc., Nishio, Japan
Filed Jan. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,247
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 8, 1981, 56-705
Int. CI.' GOIM 15/00
U.S. a. 73—117.3 6 Claims
1. An ignition range detector for an internal combustion
engine comprising a pressure sensor for detecting the pressure
in a cylinder of an internal combustion engine, a crank angle
sensor for detecting a first angular position of said internal
combustion engine in compression stroke before a combustion
and a second angular position of said internal combustion
engine in expansion stroke, a processor including a computer
for processing a pressure signal from said pressure sensor at
each combustion and integrating said pressure signal by a
signal associated with the crank angle from said crank angle
sensor from said first angular position to said second angular
position thereby to calculate a value S]-l-S2> said computer
further integrating said pressure signal for a hypothetical case
of misfire under the same conditions thereby to calculate a
value S, said computer further including means of producing
the ratio (Si -♦- S2)/Si and comparing said ratio with a predeter-
mined value a and producing the result of said comparison.
4,438,648
DIFFERENTIAL MASS FLOWMETER
Robert J. Cheney, Jr., Mountlake Terrace, Wash., assignor to
Eldec Corporation, Lynnwood, Wash.
Filed Jun. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 390,070
Int. a.' GOIF 1/82
U.S. a. 73-195 10 aaims
1. An apparatus for measuring the difference between the
mass now rate of a first fiuid stream and the mass fiow rate of
a second fluid stream comprising:
means defining a first flow channel through which said first
fluid stream passes;
means defining a second flow channel through which said
second fluid stream passes;
a first drum member mounted for rotation in said first flow
channel;
a second drum member mounted for rotation within said
second flow channel;
1438
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
driving means associated with said first and second drum
members for rotating said first and second drum members
at identical speed and with a constant phase relationship;
a first impeller means mounted for rotation in said first flow
channel for imparting angular momentum to said first
fluid stream, and first impeller means being resiliently
coupled to said first drum member to allow said first
impeller means to lag behind said first drum member by an
amount proportional to the angular momentum imparted
to said first fluid stream by said first impeller means;
a second impeller means mounted for rotation in said second
flow channel for imparting angular momentum to said
second fluid stream, said second impeller means being
resiliently coupled to said second drum member to allow
said second impeller means to lag behind said second
drum member by an amount proportional to the angular
momentum imparted to said second fluid stream by said
second impeller means;
first impeller pick-off means associated with said first impel-
ler means to produce a first impeller signal representative
of the instantaneous angular position of said first impeller
means;
second impeller pick-off means associated with said second
impeller means for producing a second impeller signal
representative of the instantaneous angular position of said
second impeller means; and
first signal-processing means for receiving said first and
second impeller signals and combining them to produce a
signal representative of the difference in instantaneous
angular position between said first and second impellers
which signal is also representative of the difference in
mass flow rate between said first and second fluid streams.
said cylinders may be aligned with said outlet of said
pressure vessel;
a piston with a ram attached thereto in each of said cylinders
wherein said ram includes a sensing device;
means for rotating said plurality of cylinders about said axis
in said pressure vessel to align any one of said cylinders
with said outlet of said pressure vessel; and
means for moving said piston of said cylinder aligned with
said outlet of said pressure vessel so that said ram thereof
may be inserted into and removed from the reactor
through said passageway.
4,438,650
ANTI-G SUIT TEST RIG
Larry F. Meek, Waterloo, Canada, assignor to Her Majesty the
Queen in right of Canada, as represented by the Minister of
National Defence, Ottawa, Canada
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 354,039
Claims priority, application Canada, Mar. 30, 1981, 374186
Int. a.3 GOIL 7/00
US. a. 73-432 SD g ci,i„.
4 438 649
APPARATUS FOR REMOTELY POSITIONING SENSING
DEVICES IN A REACTOR DURING OPERATION
THEREOF
Harris H. Gilman, Portola Valley, Calif., assignor to Electric
Power Research Institute, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,381
Int. a.3 GOIF 15/ ]4: GOIK 1/14; G21C 77/00
U.S. a. 73-432 R 29 Claims
4. Apparatus for testing an anti-G suit comprising a manikin
shaped to correspond to the portion of the human body upon
which said suit is designed to fit, said manikin being formed
from a flexible material and having fluid inlet means and seal-
ing means to seal said fluid inlet means to retain fluid within
said manikin, and pressure sensing means associated with said
manikin to determine the pressure exerted on fluid in said
manikin by a suit placed upon said manikin.
11. An apparatus for remote positioning of sensing devices in
a reactor under pressure, comprising:
a pressure vessel located adjacent to the reactor, said pres-
sure vessel able to contain the reactor pressure;
a fluid-tight passageway between an outlet of said pressure
vessel and an inlet of the reactor;
valve means in said passageway for closing-ofl" said passage-
way to isolate said pressure vessel from the reactor;
a plurality of hydraulic cylinders rotatably mounted within
said pressure vessel about an axis thereof such that any of
4,438,651
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MEASURING THE
DENSITY OF FLUIDS PARTICULARLY DREDGINGS
Romke van der Veen, No. 87, van Boetzelaerlaan, 2581 AD The
Hague, Netherlands
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 306,958
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Oct. 9, 1980.
8005603 '
Int. a.3 COIN 9/00
U.S. CI. 73-433 3 claims
1. A method of measuring the density of a fluid contained in
a holder, particularly the density of dredgings, in which the
density is derived from volume measuring values and weight
measuring values, characterized in that in at least two different
states t„and t„+ i during measurements carried out on different
fluid layers to be metered, for example, at two different instants
dunng loading of the holder weight measuring values G^ and
G„+i and volume measuring values V„ and V„+| are mea-
sured, that for the state difl^erence dt = t„ + 1 - 1„ the differential
dG/dV of the weight measuring value dG to the volume
measuring value dV is calculated and that the density r is
calculated by multiplication of said difl'erential by the constant
value c determined by filling the holder with a calibration
fluid, for example, water of known density ri during a calibra-
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1439
tion measurement and by subsequently calculating the constant
value c from the product of the known density ri and the
4,438,652
ULTRASONIC DOPPLER FLOWMETER
Koi^i Saito, Katsuta, Japan, assignor to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Mar. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 354,620
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 6, 1981, 56-31358
Int. a.3 GOIF 1/66
U.S. a. 73—861.25 8 Claims
106 ,108
Op5_il
/I04
^n^
20
102
S^
— j I. P F
n
1
3 (;^P7|cawt»Hp.[— 1'
,218
220
1. An ultrasonic Doppler flowmeter comprising:
transmitting means for transmitting an ultrasonic wave of a
fixed frequency into a fluid flow to be measured;
receiving means for receiving a reflected ultrasonic wave
from said fluid; and
signal processing means including a reference signal genera-
tor and a comparator, said reference signal generator
generating a reference signal upon reception of a received
signal from said receiving means in accordance with the
magnitude of the received signal, said comparator being
supplied with said received signal and said reference sig-
nal to compare said received signal with said reference
are suspension means for suspending the sublancc in use and
connections for communication with the interior spaces of the
sublance, to a lower end of the sublance at which a probe is
mounted on the sublance, the sublance further including a
rotational coupling so that the probe is rotauble about a longi-
tudinal axis of the sublance relative to the suspension means the
improvement that:
differential dVi/dGi of the volume measuring value Vi to the
weight measuring value Gi, expressed in a formula:
r=cxdG/dV, wherein c=ri xdVi/dGi.
said rotational coupling is located so as to divide only said
outer tubular member close to said upper end. so that an
upper part of said outer member to which part said con-
nections are attached, is fixed relative to the suspension
means and a lower part of said outer member on which
part said probe is mounted, is rotatable about the longitu-
dinal axis relative to the suspension means and also rela-
tive to said inner and intermediate tubular members which
are not rotationally divided.
4,438,654
DEVICE FOR TAKING GROUND WATER SAMPLES IN
SOIL AND ROCK
Bengt-Arne Torstension, 34, Hfijdviigen, S-186 00 Vallentuna,
Sweden
Filed Mar. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 358,707
Claims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 27. 1981, 8101989
Int. a.J COIN 1/14
U.S. CI. 73—864.52
12 Claims
20-
o-
4,438,653
SUBLANCE FOR MEASURING AND/OR SAMPLING IN
A METALLURGICAL FURNACE
Nicolaas H. Been^es, Uitgeest, Netherlands, assignor to Estel
Hoogovens B.V., Netherlands
Filed Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,710
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jul. 10, 1981,
8103306
Int. a.J GOIN 1/10
U.S. a. 73—863.11 4 Qaims
1. In a sublance for use in monitoring the operation of a
metallurgical furnace, comprising an elongate outer tubular
member an elongate intermediate tubular member located
within said outer member and an elongate inner member lo- 1. A device for taking at least one ground water sample in
cated within said intermediate member, each said member soil and rock, comprising a movable element having an at least
extending from an upper end of the sublance, at which there partially evacuated sampling container, an end of the container
-n
-u
:2
1440
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
facing downward being sealed air-tight by a first member of a
flexible material, the device further including a ground water
collector, a second member of flexible material closing an
upper end of the ground water collector, and a cannula with
two pointed ends arranged between said first and second mem-
bers, means for selectively moving the cannula in its longitudi- ^-S- CI. 74—63
nal direction relative to the two members for selectively pene-
trating the first and second members with a respective one of
the ends for transferring a ground water sample from the
collector to the sampling container.
4,438,656
POWER TRANSFER DEVICE
David R. Hayer, R.R. 1, HofThuui, Minn. 56339
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,894
Int. aj F16H 2I/a 21/48. 25/08: P03G 3/00
4 Oaims
4,438,655
FLEXURE SUSPENSION FOR FREE ROTOR
GYROSCOPES
Thomas R. Quermann, Huntington Station, N.Y., assignor to
Sperry Corporation, New Yorli, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 15, 1976, Ser. No. 742,158
Int. a.3 GOIC 19/22
U.S. a. 74-5 F 5 cuums
1. In gyroscopic apparatus having gyroscopic rotor means
adapted for spinning about a spin axis by means of drive shaft
means, improved rotor suspension means comprising:
first support means radially supporting said gyroscopic rotor
means for rotation with said drive shaft means for univer-
sal tilting about axes substantially perpendicular to said
spin axis,
second support means coupled to said drive shaft means for
rotation therewith substantially about said spin axis and
axially supporting said gyroscopic rotor means for univer-
sal tilting about said axes substantially perpendicular to
said spin axis,
said second support means comprising cylindrical strut
means having a strut axis and a first flexible parallel
sided flat section lying in the plane of said strut axis,
said second support means extending through an aperture
m said first support means with substantially equal parts
of said first flexible parallel sided flat section on either
side of said aperture, and
second and third flexible parallel sided flat sections lying in
the plane of said strut axis and symmetrically spaced on
either side of said first flexible parallel sided flat section,
said second and third flexible parallel sided flat sections
being disposed at right angles to said first flexible paral-
lel sided flat section.
1. An improved power transfer device comprising:
mput means for providing operational power of said device,
said input means including:
a power input shaft;
drive gear means operably attached to said power input
shaft;
ring gear means in operable engagement with said drive gear
means, said ring gear means including a plurality of radi-
ally extending, diametrically opposed extensions having
weight support arm means rotatably attached thereto;
weight means fixedly secured eccentrically to said weight
support arm means;
cruciform support means rotatably mounted on said device
and providing rotatable support to said weight means; and
output means for providing power to a load from said de-
vice, said output means including a power output shaft
connected with the cruciform support means, and means
mounting the ring gear means and support arms means to
perform planetating movement relative to the axis of the
drive gear means responsive to a variation of load on the
output shaft whereby variation of load on the output shaft
will cause shifting of the center of gravity of the weight
means in relation to the ring gear means and cruciform
support means.
4,438,657
SHIFT DEVICE FOR THE DRIVE OF A UTILITY
VEHICLE
Dieter Nobis, Mannheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Deere A Company, Moline, III.
Filed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,327
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 25.
1980, 3044311
Int. a.3 G05G 9/16. 5/10
U.S. a. 74-477 9 q^j^
1. A shift device for a vehicle drive with a shift lever having
a primary shift function for shifting among stages of a multi-
stage transmission, one of the stages being neutral and having
a change-over shift function usable in all of the suges, the shift
lever being mounted pivotally in two directions and being
movable into and out of engagement with shift segments opera-
tively connected to the transmission via shift members, charac-
terized by:
a shift bracket engageable with the shift lever, pivotal in
response to movement of the shift lever and having guide
slots for receiving and positively guiding the shift lever
among the stoges, the guide slots including a transverse
extending branch and at least one fore-and-aft extending
branch, the shift lever being movable to pivot the shift
bracket in a direction parallel to the transverse extending
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1441
branch when the shift device is in one of iu non-neutral said control lever in iu desired position until positively
stages; and moved to another position.
means for preventing the shift lever from pivoting the shift u.S. G. 74—529
bracket in a direction parallel to the transverse extending
branch when the shift device is in the neutral stage.
4,438,659
RELEASE MECHANISM FOR A TRACTION
APPARATUS ACTING ON A CABLE WHICH PASSES
THERETHROUGH
Andre Desplats, Boulogne Biliancourt, France, aMignor to Trac-
tel S.A., France
Filed Jul. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 396,540
Gaims priority, application France, Jul. 9, 1981, 81 13553
Int. G.' G05G 5/06
2 Gaims
4,438,658
ENGINE THROTTLE CONTROL
John A. Carlson, Conroe, Tex., assignor to Capro, Inc., Conroe,
Tex.
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,595
Int. G.3 F16C 1/10
\3S. G. 74—501 R 6 Gaims
4 6
M 9
1. An engine throttle control comprLsing:
a housing having two sections,
one of said sections including a wall having an interior sur-
face and an exterior surface with a peripheral flange being
substantially perpendicular to the interior surface of said
wall, a boss on the interior surface of the wall having an
opening extending through the boss and the wall, said boss
extending substantially perpendicular to the interior sur-
face of the wall, an arcuate rack having ridges on one
surface thereof extending from said wall, and a pivot
projection extending from the wall,
the other of said sections including a wall having an interior
surface and an exterior surface with a peripheral flange
being substantially perpendicular to the interior surface of
the other section wall and adapted to engage the flange of
said one section, a pair of spaced apart fingers having
shoulders on their ends adapted, when said sections are
assembled, to extend through the opening in said boss with
said finger shoulders engaging the exterior surface of the
wall of said one section to releasably retain said sections
together, and a pivot projection extending from the other
section wall and aligned with the pivot projection of said
one section when said sections are assembled, and
a control lever positioned partially between said assembled
sections, extending therefrom and having recesses on
opposite sides of one end thereof for receiving said pivot
projections, an arm extending from said lever with a de-
tent for engaging said arcuate rack to retain said control
lever with a detent for engaging said arcuate rack to retain
1. In a traction apparatus acting on a cable through two
self-clamping jaws by operating either a warping in lever or a
warping out lever, the improvement comprising a release
mechanism which comprises;
(a) a release lever adapted to longitudinally move in the
direction of a longitudinal axis of the apparatus, said re-
lease lever presenting:
(b) a front end portion provided with a first longitudinal slit
within which engages a pin carried by said warping out
lever, and
(c) an intermediate portion provided with another longitudi-
nal slit comprising a portion of reduced width followed by
a portion of larger width,
(d) a release control handle rigid with said release lever, and
(e) a locking mechanism which comprises:
(0 a bolt disposed transversely to the apparatus and passing
through said portion of larger width of said other longitu-
dinal slit of the release lever, said bolt being adapted to
rotate in registering openings of a casing of the apparatus,
(g) a spring co-acting with said bolt to urge same in a locking
position in which said bolt engages a shoulder separating
the two portions of different width of the other longitudi-
nal slit, thus preventing to move the release lever in a
release direction by sliding along said bolt, and
(h) an actuating member extending outside of the casing of
the apparatus and rigid with at least one end of the bolt,
said actuating member being adapted to be rotated by a
user's hand, against the action of said spring, to move said
bolt from its locking position to a position in which the
bolt is directed along the axis of said another longitudinal
slit of the release lever and allows a longitudinal move-
ment of the release lever, so that the release mechanism
can be actuated only by pivoting the actuating member of
the locking mechanism with one hand of the user while
simultaneously the other hand of the user acts on the
release control handle to cause the longitudinal movement
of the release lever in the release direction thus avoiding
any risk of accidental actuation of the release mechanism.
1442
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4438 660
DUAL MODE CONTROL LEVER ASSEMBLY
w ^,: "^'^.f' ^^***" ''■^'*' '*•''■• ""'Snor to Deere & Company,
MoUnc, 111. "^ "
Filed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,704
Int. a.J G05G 5/0(5
U.S. a. 74—531
33 Gaims
fastener means reieasably coupling said retainer means to-
gether;
said retainer means associated with a selected end of said
member mcludes a C-clamping device attached to said
handlebar immediately adjacent to the end of said hand-
grip;
said retainer means associated with said non-selected end of
said member includes an inwardly projecting element
entering the bore of said handlebar to retain said non-
selected end to said handlebar in cooperation with said
handgrip;
said inwardly projecting element is a tapering nub terminat-
ing at Its free end in a rounded end;
said member mid-section incorporates a compound curva-
ture substantially corresponding to the general over-all
shape of a driver's knuckles grasping said handgrip; and
said member and said retainer means are composed of a
resilient material.
-*=^r
1. A control lever assembly comprising:
a housing;
an operator-movable control lever;
pivot means for pivotally supporting the control lever in the
housing;
friction means for frictionally coupling the control lever to
the housing and yieldably resisting relative motion there-
between;
resilient means biased to urge the control lever from a dis-
placed position to a neutral position, relative to the hous-
ing; and
a selecting member movable between a first position
wherein it couples the control lever to the friction means
while uncoupling the control lever from the resilient
means, and a second position wherein it couples the con-
trol lever to the resilient means while uncoupling the
control lever from the friction means.
4,438,662
AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM HAVING MANUAL
CONTROL ENGAGEABLE AT WILL
Eric K. Walton, 1516 Doone Rd., Columbus, Ohio 43221, and
Gary W. Harris, 5120 Thompson La., Delaware, Ohio 43015
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,356
. , o ^. '"*• ^'•' *"'*" ^^^^0; F15B 5/00
U.S. CI. 74-625 ,oci«ms
4,438,661
HAND PROTECTOR
'''91344'' ^" ^""*"' ^^^ """"* '^**' ^"'™**' "'"»- ^"'
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,492
„„ _ Int. a.^ B62K 2y/^<J
U.S. a. 74-551.9 , Claim
I. In a device for exercising control over a further member,
which further member may be remotely located from said
device, wherein said device includes an external power supply
for exercising said control, the combination of a linear stepping
motor and a remotely adjustable pulser for directing the exer-
cise of said control, a coupling means between said linear
stepping motor and said external power supply which is later-
ally movable and retained from rotational movement by sliding
fnction means, and a manually operated means which is capa-
ble of overcoming the friction forces of said sliding friction
means restraining said coupling means and thus directing the
exercise of control.
1. A hand protector for use in combination with a handlebar
and a handgnp which comprises:
an elongated member having opposite ends separated by an
mtegral mid-section;
said mid-section being of aerodynamic shape having a coni-
cal inner surface and substantially arcuate in plan view-
said ends having retainer means for detachably coupling said
member to said handlebar about said handgrip;
4,438,663
PLANETARY TRANSMISSION GEARING AND OUTPUT
SHAFT RETENTION MEANS
Peter Eichenberger, Livonia, and John H. Lodge, Westland,
both of Mich., assignors to Ford Motor Company, Dearborn,
Mich.
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,395
Int. a.3 F16H 5 7/ JO
U.S. CI. 74-760 , Claims
I. in a planetary transmission for an automotive vehicle
having aligned input and output shafts, a transmission case, said
shafts being joumalled within said case;
planetary gearing within said case adapted to provide plural
torque delivery paths between said input shaft and said
output shaft;
said output shaft having a splined connection with a torque
output element of said planeury gearing;
March 27, 1984
a first thrust reaction bearing assembly formed on said Out-
put shaft contacting a reaction wall on said/^sing
whereby inbound thrust forces on said outm»t^haft are
lid casing; y^
a /second thrust reaction bearing~~S55embly^n said output
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
'shaft situated contacting another reaction wall on said
l^ase whereby outbound thrust forces on said output shaft
transmitted directly to said case; and
spring means for cushioning the transfer of outbound thrust
foVces from said output shaft to said case through said
second thrust reaction bearing assembly.
4,438,664
SYSTEM FOR OPERATING THE DRIVE OF A VEHICLE
Ernst Fiala, Wolfsburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Volkswagenwerk Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,662
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 26,
1980, 3036327
Int. C1.3 B60K 41/N
U.S. CI. 74—866 5 Claims
1. In a vehicle drive having an internal combustion engine
coupled through a clutch to an infinitely variable transmission,
the transmission having input cone pulleys and output cone
pulleys and driving a reversible planetary gear train for impart-
ing motive power to an axle, a clutch pedal for acutating the
clutch, and an accelerator pedal coupled to the fuel delivery
mechanism of the engine; a system for operating the drive
comprising:
control signal generating means for controlling the infinitely
variable transmission and including first storage means
responsive to the position of said accelerator pedal for
selecting a first stored value corresponding to a gear ratio
of said infinitely variable transmission according to a plot
of gear ratio vs. accelerator pedal position;
means for adjusting the gear ratio of said infinitely variable
transmission in response to said selected value;
second storage means responsive to the position of said
accelerator pedal for selecting a second stored value for
1443
said fuel delivery mechanism according to a plot of said
second stored value vs. accelerator pedal position;
third storage means responsive to the position of said clutch
pedal for selecting a third stored value for said fuel deliv-
ery mechanism according to a plot of said third stored
value vs. clutch pedal position;
comparison means coupled to said second and third storage
means for selecting the smaller of said second and third
stored values for said fuel delivery mechanism; and
means for adjusting said fuel delivery mechanism in response
to said value selected by said comparison means.
4,438,665
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR AN AUTOMOBILE DRIVE
Dieter Schmidt, Gifborn, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Volkswagenwerk Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,282
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 19,
1980, 3010509
Int. a.3 B60K 41/10
U.S. CI. 74—867 4 Qaims
-?r=r
S-.7-^
1. In combination a hydrodynamic-mechanical transmission
and a control system therefor, for use in an automobile having
an accelerator pedal, a drive select lever having a plurality of
positions, including forward drive, a source of first pressurized
fiuid, and a manual control valve, responsive to the position of
said lever, for selectively delivering said first fluid when said
select lever is in the forward drive position, wherein said
transmission comprises:
(a) a hydrodynamic torque converter having a hydraulically
actuatable by-pass clutch;
(b) a mechanical planetary gear train; and
(c) at least one hydraulically actuatable control element for
selectively coupling said torque converter and said gear
train; and wherein said control system comprises:
(i) a first pressure medium line adapted to be connected to
said manual control valve for receiving said first pres-
surized fluid and communicating with said control
element for supplying said first pressurized fluid to said
element for actuating said control element,
(ii) a main control valve means arranged in said first pres-
sure medium line for selectively interrupting the deliv-
ery of said first fluid to said control element,
(iii) means responsive to at least one automobile operating
parameter for actuating said main control valve means,
and
(iv) means for delivering a pressurized fluid to said by-pass
clutch for selectively actuating said by-pass clutch,
wherein the means for delivering pressurized fluid to
said by-pass clutch are responsive to the actuation of
1444
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
said main control valve means for interrupting the
delivery of pressurized fluid to said by-pass clutch when
said main control valve means is actuated.
4,438,666
SPEED RESPONSIVE REVERSE CONTROL
E. James Laae, Highland, Mich., assignor to Eaton Corporation.
Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,396
Int. aj B60K 41/10. 41/22
U.S. a. 74-868 5 claims
/>//■>
having a chain bar about which a chain having the cutting
elements travels, the sharpening device comprising:
a top guide portion for supporting the file and including at
least one pin projecting therefrom; and
a base portion, said base portion including means for remov-
ably securing said base portion to the chain bar and means
for supporting said top portion for movement from a first
position adjacent the chain for sharpening one of the
cutting elements located at the sharpening device to a
second position away from the chain to permit indexing of
the chain to locate another of the cutting elements at the
sharpening device, said means for supporting said top
portion including a bore in said base portion for receiving
said pin for longitudinal sliding movement therein.
4,438,668
WRENCH
Yeheskel Solomon, JSush Etzion 3, Givatayim, Israel
Filed Jin. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,145
aaims priority, application Israel, Jan. 5, 1981, 61855
int. a.3 B25B 7/12
U.S. a. 81-352.^^ 4 aaims
3. In a transmission of the type including input and output
shafts; a plurality of power paths disconnectable from both
shafts; a plurality of forward speed ratio gears associated with
one path and in constant driving relation with one of the shafts;
at least one forward and one reverse speed ratio gear associ-
ated with another path and in constant driving relation with
the one shaft; clutch means associated with each gear and
selectively engageable to connect one of the gears with the
associated path while the path is otherwise disconnected from
the shafts; a powershift clutch Associated with each path and
alternately engageable to complete driving communications
between the shafts via the selected one gears for up, down, and
reverse shifting the transmission; and an improved control
system comprising:
shift selector means including means moveable between
forward, neutral, and reverse positions;
signal means providing a speed signal proportional to the
output shaft speed; and
means operative to effect engagement of said one clutch
means associated with the reverse gear in response to said
speed signal representative of the output shaft speed
below a predetermined magnitude and independent of said
shift selector means position.
4,438,667
SHARPENING DEVICE FOR A CHAIN SAW
Voris E. Hannah, Rte. 1, Wingo, Ky. 42088
FUed Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368,638
Int. a.3 B23D 63/16
U A a. 76-36 ,3 c,„.„.
1. A sharpening device for guiding and supporting a file for
sharpening the cutting elements of a chain saw, the chain saw
1. A wrench comprising two mutually movable jaws, each
mounted by means of a parallel linkage to a housing constitut-
mg the handle, a rod being axially movable in said handle by
means of an internally threaded sleeve extending into the bot-
tom end of the handle, said rod being connected at its top by a
pivotal link to the top of the outer member of said parallel
linkage, a locking lever being pivotally attached to said hous-
mg and having pivotally connected thereto a wedge-shaped
stop member which is adapted to engage a locking sleeve
loosely mounted on said rod, the rotation of said threaded
sleeve adjusting the distance between the jaws, the engage-
ment of said stop member with the locking sleeve preventing
their movement when said jaws are in working position.
4,438,669
ADJUSTABLE RATCHET PLIERS
Charles E. Hastings, deceased, late of Orlando, Fla., by June
Hastings, heir, 3404 Paris PI., Orlando, Fla. 32808
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 101,552, Dec. 10, 1979, Pat. No
4,269,089, and Ser. No. 963,433, No?. 24, 1978, abandoned. This
application May 14. 1981, Ser. No. 263,749
The portion of the term of tiiis patent subsequent to May 26,
1981, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B25B 7/04
U.S. a 81-410 R 4 Claim,
1. An adjustable ratchet pliers comprising in combination:
a first jaw member including a handle and a jaw portion said
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
144S
first jaw member having an elongated slot formed therein
with a plurality of notches formed in at least one elon-
gated side of said elongated slot;
a second jaw member including a handle and a jaw portion,
said second jaw member being pivotally coupled to said
first jaw member;
slide track means formed along the sides of said elongated
slot in said first jaw member, said slide track means includ-
ing a sunken area located outwardly and along at least two
elongated sides of said elongated slot in said first jaw
member;
slide means for sliding said second jaw member relative to
said first jaw member, said slide means having a shaft and
a sliding member, said shaft being connected to said sec-
ond jaw member and extended through said elongated slot
in said first jaw means, said slide member being attached
to said shaft and slidably positioned on said slide track,
and said sliding member being a fiat member having a
width greater than said elongated slot, substantially equal
to the width of said sunken area and sliding in said slide
track means sunken area adjacent said elongated slot in
said first jaw member thereby laterally positioning said
shaft in said slot regardless of the longitudinal position
therein;
locking means pivotally mounted on said slide mean; shaft
relative to said sliding member and extending into said
elongated slot for engaging said notches thereitt, said
sliding member thereby also laterally positioning the piv-
otal axis of said locking means, biasing means including
means engaging said locking means and pivotally biasing
said locking means about said pivotal axis relative to said
sliding member into engaging position within at least one
of said notches;
releasing means for rapidly releasing said locking means
from a notched position, said releasing means including a
means on said locking means engagable for rotating said
locking means relative to said slide member against the
bias of said biasing means out of engagement with said
notches for permitting said slide member to slide on the
sunken area of said track means thereby permitting said
second jaw to be slid relative to said first jaw for moving
said jaws to open position, said locking means and notches
being shaped to permit said jaws to be slid into closed
position when said locking means is in a notched position
engaging said notches.
4,438,670
HIGH SPEED WELDER WITH MAGNETIC ALIGNMENT
OF WELDING SLUG AFTER CUTTING
Martin D. Johnson, Hadley, Pa., assignor to Electronic Equip-
ment Development Ltd., Toluca Lake, Calif.
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,178
Int. a.3 B26D 3/16; B23D 21/00
U.S.a. 83— 154 1-aaim
1. In a device for cutting slugs from ferromagnetic feed-
stock, a die defining an elongate bore into which the feedstock
is passed, a knife pivotally mounted to rotate in a plane substan-
tially perpendicular to the feedstock as it is oriented by the die,
said knife defining an opening therethrough into which the
feedstock is passed when the bore in the die and opening in the
knife are aligned, said opening in the knife having an edge
adjacent the die definmg a cutting edge, means for rocking the
knife to shear a slug from the feedstock, transfer means for
receiving and clamping the cut slug as it is advanced through
the opening in the knife, the improvement comprising said die
being of a ferromagnetic material and there being a small
permanent magnet positioned with one magnetic pole abutting
the die near the cutting end thereof whereby the slug when cut
free moves to align itself end to end with the feedstock emerg-
ing from the die without losing its orientation.
4,438,671
CUTTER FOR SLOT WEDGES
Stephen Weirich, and James L. Crothers, both of Lenni, Pa.,
assignors to Lenni Products, Inc., Lenni, Pa.
Filed Nov. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 439,730
Int. a.) B26D 5/38
U.S. a. 83—212 13 Qaims
^j
-r
3
« I
1. Apparatus for cutting slot wedges for electrical rotating
machines from wedge stock, the stock consisting of elongated
strips of insulating material having generally U-shaped trans-
verse cross-sections, the apparatus comprising:
shearing means;
means, located on one side of the shearing means, for guid-
ing wedge stock in a predetermined direction toward the
shearing means; and
means located on the other side of the shearing means, and
actuable by an end of the wedge stock extending through
the shearing means, for actuating the shearing means;
the shearing means comprising a frame, a first blade
mounted on said frame and having an external U-shaped
cutting edge lying in a first plane generally perpendicular
to the direction of feed of wedge stock, and a second blade
mounted on said frame and having an internal U-shaped
cutting edge having a rounded end and substantially
straight and parallel sides, said internal edge lying in a
second plane immediately adjacent and parallel to said
1446
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
first plane, the U-shaped cutting edges of both blades
being substantially symmetrical about a plane of symmetry
perpendicular to said first and second planes, the blad«
being relatively movable, in said first and second planes in
the direction of the intersections of said first and second
S ,i ^\^J of symmetry, from a rest position in
which the rounded end and at least part of the straight
s.d« of the cutting edge of the second blade are external
to the curvature of the cutting edge of the first blade to a
cutK>fr position in which the cutting edge of the first blade
IS external to the curvature of the rounded end of the
fi« ' hl?/L°^ '*'" ^"°"^ '''"^^- 'he cutting edge of the
first blade being sufficiently wide in the first plane to
inersect the cutting edge of the second blade during
relative movement of the blades from the rest position to
the cut-off position, and the cutting edges of both blades
being so configured that, when they intersect each other
the cutting edges of the respective blades intersect each
other at acute angles;
whereby relative movement of the blades from the rest
position to the cut-off position causes spreading of the
sides of the U-shaped wedge stock outwardly against the
^tT'u" '"i'r' ^■'*'^P"'^ '^""'"S '^S' °' ^he second
wed e stS ^"""'"^ °''^" insulation wedge from the
mounted to said carriage engaging opposite sides of said
cam rail, for reciprocally moving said carriage longitudi-
longitudiX";" "*^'°" °'"'' ''^"^ ^^"' -^'°-»'
*'ZT' H ''i^r'"^/ ^^" ''^•" ^°"P'^*^ »° ^'d fi««. second
Zh lt"i '^?'* ?' respectively rotating said first, second
and hird shafts about said first, second and fourth longitu-
dinal axes, respectively, said first and second shafts rotat-
ing in opposite directions such that said first blade first
cuts said sht in said pipe and said second pipe then cuts
said pipe at said slit; and
i- a chuck mechanism disposed on said carriage so as to be
^ngitudinally movable therewith, includfng fir t an^
second arms having a clearance formed therein and re
spective third and fourth blades fixed thereto so as to i
closable about and releasable from said pipe, and driv^
means ^r cJosmg said first and second armVso that said
Scond mIh""" ^''^''•«"P ''''' P'P^ ^h«" ^'d first and
SonH h fn "'" ""T"^ '"'° "^'"^ P*P^' "^^d first and
4,438,672
PIPE SHEARING DEVICE
YwhAazu Sa«Uci, 9-1, Sakumdai 4^hon.e, Nerima-ku, Tokyo,
F»ed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330.494
me portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 30,
1999, has been disclaimed.
,, o ^ '"*• ^-^ B26D 1/28. 1/56
UA a 83-319 - ^ .
4 Claims
4,438,673
D .^ ., SLITTER MOUNTING BRACKET
Roy O. Nofflce and Thomas G. Engel, both of Appleton, Wis
assignors to Appleton Papers, Inc., Appleton, Wis
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,131
Int. CU B26D 7/2^
U.S. CI. 83-502 - ^, .
7 Claims
zy
M-^24o
^,
n
1- A pipe shearing device, comprising:
a. a frame;
^'^Z.Tt "^"^ r'"'' 'P""' »'■"'« >'»""« ""1 and
>Kond longitudinal a,« rMpcc.ively ,o,a,ably mourned
To'l.g^udmr/.I" '°""°" "■""' '^«' «"' "^ -"»''
d. means for feeding a pipe to be cut along a third longitudi-
e filT/"'"''.^'' ""' ^"'^ ^-"^ longitud?nZl
^cond iT '°'"^ ?'"^*^ '"°""**^*^ '° "^'d first and
second shafts respectively, and to said carriage for rota-
tion about said first and second longitudinal axes with said
wTh^t spJ'ne shafts and longitudinal movement
with said carnage, said first blade being located so as to
cut a silt in said pipe when rotated, said second blade being
located so as to cut said pipe completely at said slit in one
revolution of said second blade;
r a drum cam having a cam rail, mounted to said frame for
rotation about a fourth longitudinal axis parallel said first
and second longitudinal axes;
g. means, including a pair of follower rollers rotatably
1. An apparatus for slitting a continuous web of material
which comprises in combination a slitter blade and a slitter
having a threaded depth-post assembly for enabling precise
su^'^rti'nf T^'^\°'r^ *""^^ ^'«^«' ^ ^^ -o-t S
he'^ron?r ? ""T *'°"""« ""^^ ^ '"'^^"^ f°^ maintaining
the proper tension between said slitter blade and a cutting
surface, said means comprising a spring tension unit including
a blade spring having a forward end and a rear end. a spring
mounnng band, and a tension regulating means, said 5itte?
blade being mounted to said blade spring at said forward end
hrft .\ 'P""* mounting band being attached to said
bracket housing at a rear portion thereof with said rear end of
sad blade spring being positioned between said housing and
sa d spring mounting band, with said tension regulating means
interacting with said blade spring at the site of location oTs^id
spring mounting band where said band is affixed to said hous-
ing to regulate said blade tension.
4,438,674
MUSICAL EXPRESSION PEDAL
SSJ? i t-if *"**"' * ^^^ ^^•' '^'""•™' New South Wale.
2144, Australia
Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,877
Claims priority, application Australia, Apr. 11, 1980, PE3086
,,„ _ Int. a.3 GIOH 7/02
U.S. a. 84-1.24 . ^ ,
1 A * Claims
n.H»i f *P'^**'°" P«<^*' for a musical instrument wherein the
Sf„. .h' '^"f '^"'"«"t including the pedal is transportable and
thus the pedal is susceptible to detuning by influence from
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1447
different surroundings, said pedal comprising a casing having
enclosing side walls, forward and rear walls, a bottom and a
top all of which comprise capacitive shielding material, an
electrically insulating panel over said top of the casing, an
electrical proximity responsive device mounted within the
casing and towards said forward wall thereof and exposed to
said panel by a hole in said top, and a bevelled edge on an
upper corner of said rear end wall, whereby a user's foot when
pivoted at the heel upon said bevelled edge with the sole of the
foot rising and falling over said proximity device causes vary-
ing electrical response in said proximity device.
4,438,675
CABLING FOR SECONDARY AMMUNITION
Klaus H. Fischer, and Heinz Kroschel, both of Troisdorf, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesell-
schaft, Troisdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,765
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 31,
1980, 3041149
Int. CI.3 F41F 1/00, 5/02
U.S. CI. 89—1.811 20 Claims
1. A cabling arrangement for secondary ammunition ar-
ranged in the form of at least two ammunition elements in
series in a cylindrical casing of a distribution system and being
ejectable therefrom, the cabling arrangement serving for sup-
ply of at least one of electrical energy and information to the
secondary ammunition, the cabling arrangement comprising a
continuous electrical conductor system extending substantially
in the longitudinal direction of the casing, the conductor sys-
tem being provided with terminals at spaced positions along
the conductor system so that respective ones of the spaced
terminals are correlated with respective ones of the individual
series arranged ammunition elements, the terminals establish-
ing defined separating zones between the conductor system
and the individual ammunition elements.
4,438,676
AMMUNITION CONTAINER
Gert Kaustriiter, Augsburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Kuka Webrtechnik GmbH, Augsburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 384,283
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 2,
1981, 3121786
Int. CV F41D 10/14. 10/42; F41F 9/06; F42B 39/12
U.S. a. 89—34 4 Claims
1. Ammunition container comprising:
A. a housing providing a vertical chamber and which is
adapted to be positioned beneath or alongside an auto-
matic weapon said chamber having a transverse cross
section adapted to the length of the bullets to be received
therein and the amplitude of the zigzag placement of the
magazine belt therewithin said housing having opposite
sidewalls provided with longitudinal slots;
B. a lifting platform mounted within said chamber for move-
ment vertically therewithin over a lifting height, said
platform having projections thereon extending through
said longitudinal slots in said opposite sidewalls of said
housing, said slots extending over the lifting height for
said platform within said housing;
C. flexible drive means positioned at least partially exter-
nally of said housing and having one end connected to said
platform projections; and
D. resilient spring biased pulley means acting on said drive
means to maintain the upper level of the ammunition
supply upon the platform at approximately the uppermost
position, within said chamber, said resilient spring biased
pulley means includes spring means being mounted within
a pair of telescopically arranged tube sections of which
one tube section is permanently secured at its lower end
and the other tube section supports at its upper end a
pulley over which is passed the drive means, the other end
of said flexible drive means being fixed at a point remote to
said lifting platform, whereby said spring means is loaded
by loading of ammunition on said platform and raises said
platform as the ammunition is discharged from the con-
tainer.
4,438,677
MUNITION-SUPPLY SYSTEM FOR AN ARMORED
VEHICLE WEAPON
Markus SpoUl; Erich Drosen, both of Munich; Leonhard Pon-
gratz, Karlsfeld, and Ferenc Kotai, Munich, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Krauss-Maffei Aktiengesellschaft.
Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,989
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 6,
1980, 3041866
Int. CI.' F41H 7/06. 5/20; F41F 9/06
U.S. CI. 89-36 K 11 Claims
1. A weapon supply system for a large caliber weapon com-
prising:
means forming a munitions compartment rearwardly of said
weapon and rotatable therewith upon traversing of said
weapon, said compartment having a window opening
toward said weapon and through which munitions rounds
can be fed to load said weapon;
a plurality of holding tubes disposed in said compartment
and adapted to receive respective munitions rounds at
spaced-apari locations in a plurality of substantially hori-
zontal planes whereby loading tunnel is formed in said
compartment in line with said window, said holding tubes
being stationary within said compartment, being provided
1448
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
in arrays on opposite sides of said tunnel, being mutually
parallel within each array and having respective round-
removal openings turned toward said tunnel; and
a loading mechanism in said tunnel common for all said tubes
for removing individual rounds from said holding tubes
and feeding said rounds through said window into said
weapon said loading mechanism comprising:
round-engaging means engageable with a round in a se-
lected one of said holding tubes,
means for swingably displacing said round-engaging
upper position and having spring return means to move
the finger means to its second position when the follower
means is below its most upper position.
4,438,679
AXIAL THRUST COMPENSATING MEANS FOR POWER
STEERING CONTROL VALVE
Armin Lang, SchwMbisch Graund, and Helmut KnSdler, Lorch,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, iMignors to Zahnradfabrik
Friedrichshafen, AG, Friedrichshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,575
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 19.
1981,3137366
Int. a.J F15B 9/02
U.S. a. 91-370 4 Qainw
means about a substantially horizontal axis whereby
said round engaging means is positioned selectively in
said planes,
means for displacing said round-engaging means angularly
about a substantially upright axis for selectively and
individually aligning said round-engaging means with
each of said holding tubes at the respective round-remo-
val openings, and
means for shifting said axes and said round-engaging
means along said tunnel toward and away from said
window.
4,438,678
BOLT STOP AND CARTRIDGE EJECTOR FOR
AUTO-LOADING RIFLE
William B. Ruger, Southport, Conn., assignor to Sturm, Ruger A
Company, Inc., Southport, Conn.
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,437
Int. a.J F41C 15/12
U.S. a. 89—138
4. In a fluid power steering assembly including a housing
enclosing a servomotor (8) having separated pressure cham-
bers (9, 10), and a control valve (13) having inlet and outlet
4 Gaims ports (22 and 23) through which pressure medium is conducted
and a valve body (14) formed with passages through which the
pressure medium is conducted between said ports and the
servomotor, the improvement residing in axial thrust compen-
sating means for the control valve comprising two opposing
pairs of surfaces (24, 25, 26, 27) of equal area formed on the
valve body, a first of said pairs of the surfaces (24 and 25) being
respectively exposed to the pressure medium in the inlet and
outlet ports, and the second of said pairs of the surfaces (26 and
27) being respectively exposed to the pressure medium in the
pressure chambers (9 and 10).
4. In a firearm having a receiver, a bolt mounted for longitu-
dinal path movement in the receiver, magazine means for
delivering a cartridge to the receiver for movement longitudi-
nally in the receiver along a cartridge path and a bolt stop, the
improvement comprising
(a) bolt means configured in cross section so that the cross
sectional path of the bolt and the cross sectional path of
the cartridge are different;
(b) movable finger means mounted adjacent said bolt path
and said cartridge path for movement from a first position
in which the finger means is positioned in both the bolt
path and the cartridge path to a second position in which
the finger means is only in the cartridge path; and
(c) magazine follower means to move the finger means to the
first position when the magazine follower is in its most
4,438 680
GREENHOUSE CONSTRUCTION PROVIDED WITH
SPEOAL RIDGE FOR VENTILATION
Christopher Esposito, West Bay Shore, N.Y., asiignor to Four
Seasons Solar Products Corporation, Fanalngdalc, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 77,786, Sep. 21, 1979, P«t. No.
4,316,405. This application Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,992
Int. C\? AOIG 9/24; F24F 7/00
U.S. a. 98—43 C 18 Claim
1 A greenhouse construction including first means for abut-
ting a supporting structure and defining a first sloped pocket
adapted for receiving the sloped upper extremity of at least one
glazing bar and defining a second sloped pocket above said
first sloped pocket, second means defining a third sloped
pocket adapted for receiving at least one sloped glazing mem-
ber positioned above the sloped upper extremity of said glazing
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1449
bar, and third means coupling said second means to said first
means with the second and third pockets in spaced relation
f30
whereby to define an opening for the venting of said green-
house construction.
4,438.681
INSTALLATION FOR SOLUBILIZING COCOA
Pierre-Benoit Raboud, Monthey; Frantisek Kubicek, Bosson-
nens, and Jean-Pierre Bandi, La Tour-de-Peilz, all of Switzer-
land, assignors to Societe d' Assistance Technique pour Pro-
duits Nestle S.A., Lausanne, Switzerland
Division of Ser. No. 106,529, Dec. 26, 1979, Pat. No. 4,349,579.
This application Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,595
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jan. 5, 1979, 81/79
Int. Cl.^ A23G l/OO
U.S. CI. 99—323.2 7 Claims
1. Apparatus for continuously solubilising cocoa comprising:
(a) a reaction tube having an upstream end and a down-
stream end;
(b) means for continuously advancing cocoa at a predeter-
mined rate into the upstream end of said reaction tube
whereby the cocoa so advanced fiows through said tube
to the downstream end thereof;
(c) discharge control means for maintaining a predetermined
superatmospheric pressure within said tube by restricting
the fiow of cocoa from the downstream end of said tube;
(d) a nozzle having an inlet end and an exit end, said exit end
communicating with said tube adjacent the upstream end
thereof; and
(e) means for supplying steam to the inlet end of said nozzle
under a predetermined pressure more than twice the pres-
sure within said reaction tube; and
(0 means for continuously introducing an alkali carbonate
into said reaction tube.
4438 682
APPARATUS FOR POPPING POPCORN
Michael H. King, Scottsburg, Ind.; Lee W. Poppe, Jr., and Oscar
A. Wurtenbcrg, both of Louisville, Ky., assignors to National
ICEE Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Dec. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 447,276
Int. a.i A23L 1/16
U.S. a. 99—323.7 13 Oaims
1. A corn popping machine adapted for cyclic operation,
said machine comprising:
a. a reservoir for unpopped corn;
b. a transparent bell jar;
c. a popping tube within said bell Jar;
d. an air blower;
e. a heating chamber having a plurality of heating elements;
f air-fiow conveying means coupling said air blower, heat-
ing chamber, popping lube and bell jar;
g. a feed conveyor for transporting unpopped corn from said
reservoir to the base of said popping tube;
h. a manually operable selector switch adapted to be set at a
plurality of set positions;
i. electric means responsive to the position at which said
selector switch is set for operating said feed conveyor for
a preselected segment of a cyclic time period and for
energizing a selected number of heating elements; and
j. means responsive to a change in the setting of said selector
switch for changing said time segment and for changing
the number of heating elements which are energized.
4,438,683
APPARATUS FOR DISPENSING INDIVIDUAL ORDERS
OF A HOT FOOD PRODUCT AND COMPONENTS
USABLE THEREWITH
William Bartfield, Sherman Oaks, Calif., assignor to Prize
Frize, Inc., Sherman Oaks, Calif.
Filed Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,579
Int. CV A47J i7/12
U.S. a. 99-330 17 Gaims
1. An apparatus for dispensing individual orders of a hot
food product comprising:
storage means for storing a supply of food product to be
dispensed and having an outlet;
supply means for transferring an amount of food product
corresponding to the size of an individual order from the
storage means to mixing chamber means;
.;«
1450
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1431
mixing chamber means having an inlet at an upper end
thereof for receiving food product to be mixed and an
outlet at a lower end thereof for dispensing mixed food
product;
liquid dispensing means for adding a predetermined amount
of liquid to said mixing chamber means to thereby provide
a mixed food product;
dispensing means for forcing the mixed food product out of
the outlet of said mixing chamber means;
cutting means disposed adjacent the outlet of said mixing
chamber means for cutting olTa portion of the food prod-
uct forced out of said mixing chamber means;
heating means for receiving and for heating the cut off food
product;
conveyor means including a belt conveyor for removing
heated food product from the heating means and for con-
veying the heated food product towards an outlet of said
apparatus; and
control means for controlling the operation of said appara-
tus.
4,438,685
WAFER BAKING OVEN
Franz Haas, Sr., Gerstlgasse 25, A.1210 Wlen; Franz Haaa, Jr.,
Kreuzgasse, A-2100 Leobendorf, and Johann Haas, Seltweg 4,
A-3400 Klosterneuburg, all of Austria
Filed May 11, 1982, Ser. No. 376,954
Claims priority, application Austria, May 11, 1981, 2093/81
Int. CI.' A47J i7m
U.S. CI. 99-342 ,52 ci.,„,
4,438,684
KINETIC FIREPLACE AND SPIT ROASTER
Robert Geissmann, 153 Rue de I'Universite, 75007 Paris, France
Filed Mar. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 128,036
Qaims priority, application France, Mar. 15, 1979, 79 06545
Int. QV A47J i/704
U.S. CI. 99-341 ,5 Claims
1. A kmetic fireplace comprising a tank-like base, a station-
ary collar supported on said base, and a primary motor
mounted below said collar, a hearth formed by a horizontal
grate, having upwardly vertical bars and downwardly extend-
mg carrying legs, said legs resting on a horizontal carrying
plate having a depending central axle rotatably held in said
stationary collar, the lower end of said axle being coupled to
said primary motor for rotation about its central axis, a plural-
ity of spaced telescoping columns secured at their lower ends
to said base, a hood supported by the upper end of said col-
umns, and panels located between the columns surrounding
said hearth, said panels being at least, in part, removable to
permit access to said hearth, a plurality of tubular arms secured
beneath the horizontal grate and extending radially outward
toward said telescoping columns, each of said arms having a
slide extension at the end of which a cylinder is mounted
provided with a spit, and a secondary motor for rotating each
of said spits about an axis radially spaced from said central axle.
1 A wafer baking oven for making, from batter, baked
wafers such as flat wafers, low hollow wafers, sugar cones,
wafer cups, wafer figures and the like, the baking oven com-
prising:
a baking chamber having the general shape of an elongated
parallelepiped, the baking chamber having a front end and
a rear end. the baking chamber having a plurality of heat-
ing elements therein;
an enclosure which is at least partially equipped with ther-
mal insulation, at least part of the insulated enclosure
enclosing at least part of the baking chamber;
a front port adjoining the baking chamber at the front end of
the baking chamber;
a plurality of baking tongs in the baking chamber, the baking
tongs being movable through the baking chamber and into
and out of the front port in a running direction, the baking
tongs being openable when in the front port for the re-
moval of baked wafers therefrom and for charging the
baking tongs with batter, the baking tongs also being
closeable into a closed state after being charged with
batter in the front port and being movable through the
baking chamber in the closed state;
the front port including a charging station for charging the
baking tongs with batter, and a discharge station for dis-
charging baked wafers along a path;
the baking chamber having two lateral sides, a bottom side
and a top side, which sides extend generally between the
front and rear ends of the baking chamber, the baking
chamber also having a rear side at its rear end;
the insulated enclosure including a pair of lateral walls defin-
ing the lateral sides of the baking chamber, a ceiling wall
defining the top side of the baking chamber, and a rear
wall defining the rear side of the baking chamber; ^
the baking chamber having a baking chamber exhaust for
exhausting gases from the baking chamber;
the insulated enclosure substantially completely enclosing at
least the baking chamber on its two lateral sides, on its
ceiling walls and at its rear wall, with the exception of the
baking chamber exhaust;
the baking chamber also being substantially completely
enclosed at its bottom side.
4438 686
APPARATUS FOR MIXING A COMMINUTED FOOD
MATERIAL AND A LIQUID
Simon A. Pereat, Tucson, Aria., asiignor to Innovatec, Inc.,
Tucson, Ariz.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 342,881, Jan. 28, 1982,
abandoned. This application Jul. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 395,504
Int. a.i A47J 27/00; B67D S/i2
U.S. CI. 99-353 35 Halms
1. An apparatus for mixing a comminuted food material and
a liquid comprising:
(a) a reservoir for storing therein a supply of said liquid and
having a liquid discharge opening for flow of said liquid
therethrough,
(b) a hopper for storing therein a supply of said comminuted
food material and having a material discharge opening for
flow of said food material therethrough,
(c) means associated with said liquid discharge opening of
said reservoir for selectively dispensing said liquid in
discrete measured quantities,
(d) means associated with said material discharge opening of
said hopper for selectively dispensing said food material in
discrete measured quantities, and
(e) control means for actuating simultaneously said liquid
dispensing means and said food material dispensing means
respectively to dispense sequentially respective predeter-
mined pluralities of said discrete measured quantities of
said liquid and said food material into receptacle means
thereby to thoroughly mix respective predetermined total
quantities of said liquid and said food material.
4,438,687
TRIPHAMMER NUTCRACKER
Fred A. McNiel, 611 Bouldin Ave., Austin, Tex. 78074
Filed Aug. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 404.001
Int. Q\} A23N i/00
U.S. a. 99-571 23 Claims
cracked in said cracking chamber between said mortar
and said pestle;
a triphammer having a hammer head which is spring biased
toward said pestle and which forcibly contacts said pestle
to effect cracking of the nut positioned in said cracking
chamber, said hammer head being slideably carried on
said base for movement toward and away from said pestle;
a slideable cracking chamber shield telescopingly surround-
ing said mortar and being slideable with respect thereto to
enclose said cracking chamber during cracking of the nut.
an operating lever having means to retract said hammer
head away from said pestle and to release said hammer
head to cause said hammer head to forcibly contact said
pestle, and means to reciprocate said mortar and said
shield to hold the nut and to enclose said cracking cham-
ber during cracking of the nut; and
means to adjust said spring bias of said triphammer and
means to adjust the distance of travel of said pestle in said
base to regulate the cracking force applied to the nut by
said pestle.
4,438,688
NUTCRACKER
Paul E. Johnson, 4123 Jasper Rd., Springfield, Oreg. 97477
Filed Mar. 7, 1983. Ser. No. 473.127
Int. CI.' A23N 5/00
U.S. a. 99-574 4 Claims
1. A triphammer nutcracker comprising:
a base;
a mortar and pestle slideably carried on said base for rectilin-
ear motion with respect to each other, said mortar and
said pestle being spaced from each other to define a crack-
ing chamber and each having a recess in a face portion,
said recesses cooperating to receive and hold a nut to be
1. A nutcracker for temporary attachment to a supporting
surface during use and comprising in combination,
a base including a clamping member adapted for engage-
ment with a supporting surface, said base having an angu-
lated portion,
a U-shape chute having an inclined bottom wall in place on
said base, a portion of said chute constituting a receptacle
to receive uncracked nuts,
bearing posts in place on said base with each post terminat-
ing upwardly in an eye, mounting means coacting on said
base and said posts and adjustably mounting each of said
posts relative said chute bottom wall,
a drum rotatably carried within the eyes of said bearing posts
and transversely disposed in said chute so as to locate a
portion of the drum periphery adjacent said chute bottom
wall whereby the drum and said bottom wall may coact to
crack a nut therebetween, and
means for imparting rotation to said drum.
4.438,689
-^ MATERIAL BALING DEVICE
Emil Simlch, Chicago, III., assignor to A. J. Gcrrard A Co., Dcs
Plaines, III.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,266
Int. a.' B65B lS/04
U.S. a. 100—25 8 Qaims
1. A baling apparatus for use with bale strapping material
including in combination:
a first press means and a second press means, each of said
1452
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27^1984
press means including a plurality of channel means extend-
ing across said press means;
a return chute assembly having a frame,
a plurality of chute means, each chute means supported on
said frame in juxtaposition to said first and second press
means, said chute means having a curved face and two
sidewalls, said curved face extending radially outward
from said first and second press means, said sidewalls
extending radially inward from the outer edges of said
curved face, said chute means adapted to be aligned in
communication with respective channel means of said first
and second press means to slideably receive bale strapping
opening through which material to be pressed is intro-
duced into the pressing space,
a closure member for the filling opening which is located
adjacent the attachment of the membrane to said wall,
the portion of the drum defining the pressing space, includ-
ing the closure member, being perforated over its entire
curved area between the attachments of the membrane to
the drum,
the air space being defined by said membrane and a further
portion of the drum and being arranged so that air under
pressure introduced into said space causes the membrane
to be urged towards the pressing space.
4438 691
SCREW PRESS ARRANGEMENTS
Per I. Solberg, R§dal, Norway, assignor to Stord Bartz A/S,
Bergen, Norway
per No. PCr/NO8l/00023, § 371 Date Feb. 3, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 3, 1982, PCX Pub. No. WO81/03639, PCX Pub
Date Dec. 24, 1981
per Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 345,379
Qaims priority, application Norway, Jun. 13, 1980, 801755
Int. aj B30B 9/12
U.S. a. 100-117 ,0 aaims
material extending from said channel means of one of said
press means and directing said strapping material along
said curved face into and through said channel means of
said opposite press means where the bale strapping mate-
rial can be secured onto itself; and
at least one frame member extending parallel to said first and
second press means, said frame member including support
means for receiving said chute means and including a
releasable securing means affixing each of said chute
means to said frame member, allowing for movement of
said chute means along the length of said frame member to
facilitate alignment of said chute means with said chan-
nels.
4438 690
PNEUMATICALLY OPERATED PRESS
Wilhelm von AJIworden, Erbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Howard .Machinery Limited, Harleston, England
FUed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,555
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 12,
Int. aj B30B 5/02. 9/22
UA a. 100-116 7 Claims
1. A screw press comprising a press basket having a first
cylindrical portion at a feed end, a second following tapered
portion, a third following cylindrical portion and a fourth
following tapered portion at a discharge end; and
a pair of screw elements extending through said basket from
said feed end to said discharge end in side-by-side relation
on parallel longitudinal axes, each said screw element
having a core and a screw thread extending from said
core, each said core having a minimum diameter within
said first basket portion, a greatly increasing diameter in
the direction of said discharge end within said second
basket portion and a first part of said third basket portion.
and a greatly increasing diameter in the direction of said
discharge end within said fourth basket portion.
1. A pneumatically operated press comprising,
a rotatable drum having its axis of rotation disposed horizon-
tally,
a flexible membrane attached to the wall of the drum inter-
nally thereof and extending parallel to said axis of rotation
so as to sub-divide the interior of the drum into two
spaces, a pressing space and an air space,
the pressing space being defined by said membrane and a
portion of said wall, and said wall portion having a filling
4,438,692
PRINTING APPARATUS WITH COOLING OF HAMMER
PRINTING COILS
MIchio Yanadori, Hachioji; Yiyi Hosoda; Isao Nak^ima, both
of Ibaraki; Kenichi Igarashi; Makoto Kurosawa, both of Kat-
suta; Kensei Hosoya, Ibaraki, and Tsuneki Kobayashi, MIto,
all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd. and Hitachi Koki Co.,
Ltd., both of Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 318,120, Nov. 4, 1981, abandoned. This
application Jun. 20, 1983, Ser. No. 506,067
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 7, 1980, 55-155973
Int. a.' B41J 3/00; HOIF 5/00
U.S. a. 101-93.04 10 Claims
1. A printing apparatus comprising:
a printing section including a substantially horizonully dis-
posed core, a plurality of drive coils for driving printing
hammers arranged longitudinally in a side-by-side rela-
tionship at one side of the core, said drive coils being
arranged in a side-by-side relationship adjacent to and in
conuct with one another so as to form a block having a
pair of opposite surfaces to be cooled;
a support means for supporting the printing section;
a first cooling fiuid passageway defined between one side of
said core and one of said pair of opposite surfaces of said
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
14S3
drive coils to allow a cooling fluid for the drive coils to
flow therethrough, said first cooling fluid passageway
having a substantially constant cross-sectional area in a
flow direction of a cooling fluid and extending substan-
tially straight in a direction in which the drive coils arc
arranged;
second cooling fluid passageway defined between the
other of said pair of opposite surfaces of said drive coils
and a cover member to allow the cooling fluid for the
saddle and a retracted position wherein the silk screen it
withdrawn for changing caps.
drive coils to flow therethrough, said second cooling fluid
passageway being substantially constant in cross-sectional
area in a direction of the flow of the cooling fluid and
substantially straight in a direction in which the drive coils
are arranged; and
at least one fluid machine for forcibly causing the cooling
fluid to flow through said first cooling fluid passageway
and said second cooling fluid passageway whereby the
cooling fluid flows along said opposite surfaces to be
cooled of the block of said drive coils.
4 438 693
SILK SCREEN PRINTING OJVTO THE FRONT PANEL OF
A CAP
Russell A. Serrianne, and Roger L. Jennings, both of Glens
Falls, N.Y., assignors to R. Jennings Manufacturing Com-
pany, Inc., Fort Ann, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 441,672
Int. a.J B41M J/12; B41F 17/08
U.S. a. 101-129 10 Claims
1. A cap printing device for silk screen printing into the front
panel of a cap of the type having a sweatband and a bill com-
prising:
a frame member;
a saddle secured to the frame member for mounting the cap
for printing, said saddle having a flat platen which sup-
ports the front panel of the cap when the cap is so
mounted;
a registration plate against which the bill of the cap presses
when the cap is mounted on the saddle, said registration
plate being secured to the frame in a spaced-apart perpen-
dicular relationship with the platen, the space between the
registration plate and the platen defining a channel for
receiving the sweatband of the cap; and
a means for movably securing a silk screen to the frame for
movement between an advanced position wherein the silk
screen contacts the front panel of a cap mounted on the
4438694
GRAVURE COLOR PRINTING PRESS
David W. Parkins, Bedford; David K. Thomas, Uighton Buz-
zard; Peter C. Pugsley. Pinner, and BeiUamin J. Price, Hay-
wards Heath, all of England, assignors to Crosfleld Electron-
ics Limited, London, England
Filed Sep. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 298,407
Glims priority, application United Kingdom. Sep. 3, 1980,
8028364
U.S. Q. 101—152
Int. CI.3 B41F 5/18
2 Claims
1. A gravure color printing press, comprising:
a printing cylinder;
four printing members (2) each for a different color arranged
around said printing cylinder;
an impression cylinder (3);
means for holding a sheet of substrate (15) to be printed on
said impression cylinder;
four inking assemblies (4), each of said inking assemblies
including a doctor blade (35) movable towards and away
from said printing cylinder, each of said inking assemblies
including an ink channel (31) upstream of its doctor blade
and including a pivoted blade (32), said pivoted blade
seating against said doctor blade to close said ink channel
and cut off" a supply of ink to said printing member;
means (7) for moving said impression cylinder towards and
away from said printing cylinder, said moving means
comprising fluid pressure operated piston and cylinder
assemblies (23) and spring means (26) connected together
in series and acting between said impression cylinder and
said printing cylinder, said spring means defining a final
printing pressure between said impression cylinder and
said printing cylinder;
an ink dryer and cooler, said ink dryer and cooler compris-
ing an upstream duct (44) and a downstream duct (45)
which extend along said impression cylinder, means (46,
47) to supply hot air to said upstream duct, and means (48)
to supply cold air to said downstream duct; and
a control system means (49-59) for controlling the operation
of each of the inking assemblies so that each of said inking
assemblies only supplies ink to its corresponding printing
member and each of said doctor blades contacts only its
corresponding printing member, said control system
means controlling said means for holdihg a sheet of sub-
strate so that the substrate is held in a fixed position on said
impression cylinder until said substrate has been contacted
and printed by all of said different color printing members,
said control system means controlling a rotation of said
impression cylinder and said printing cylinder so that said
impression cylinder continues to rotate in step with said
printing cylinder when said means for moving said im-
pression cylinder has moved said impression cylinder
away from said printing cylinder whereby ink on said
1454
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
substrate held on said impression cylinder is allowed to
dry before said impression cylinder and said printing
cylinder are once again brought together to print the next
color onto said substrate, said inking assemblies always
contacting their corresponding printing member once
during each revolution of said printing cylinder.
4,438,696
MULTI-PURPOSE FLEXOGRAPHIC PRESS MODULE
John W. George, Meriden, and Eugene D. Rudolph, Topeka,
both of Kans., assignors to Express Card & Label Co., Topeka.
Kans.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,116
Int. a.3 B41F 5/06. 5/18
U.S. a. 101-180 9 c,i„.
4,438,695
CYLINDER FOR MACHINES PROCESSING RUNNING
LENGTHS OF MATERIAL
Peter Maier, Worms, and Arnold Niedermaier, Beindersheim,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Albert-Franken-
thai AG, Frankenthal, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 292,782, Aug. 14, 1981, abandoned.
This application Aug. 3, 1983, Ser. No. «19,891
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sen. 4.
1980, 3033230; Apr. 11, 1981, 3114731
Int. a.J B41F 9/06. 13/18. 13/20
U.S. CI. 101-153 9 aaims
17
15
22 23 21
1. An impression cylinder for a printing machine having an
impression and an etched cylinder, said impression cylinder
including:
(a) a cylindrical outer casing supported at its ends on said
machine by first adjustable support means including self-
aligning bearings,
(b) a cylindrical core coaxially disposed in said outer casing
and supported therein by at least one support bearing
disposed symmetrically with respect to the center of said
outer casing, the ends of said cylindrical core extending
beyond the ends of said outer casing,
(c) second adjustable support means engaging the ends of
said cylindrical core which are supported on said first
support means for separate independent adjustment, said
second adjustable support means permitting radial adjust-
ment of said cylindrical core independent of said outer
casing,
(d) an annular oil receiving chamber defined between said
cylindrical core and said cylindrical outer casing partially
filled with oil, said chamber being open with respect to
said support bearing supporting said cylindrical core
within said outer casing, and
(e) at least one strip-off device associated with each support
bearing, supporting said core within said outer casing,
disposed laterally therefrom and secured to said core
extending radially toward said outer casing to strip the oil
therefrom during operation and direct the oil toward said
support bearing, said strip-ofT device including an angled
segment disposed symmetrically with respect to the cylin-
drical outer casing axis, the apex thereof directed toward
the associated support bearing, said angled segment being
contoured to said outer casing and said cylindrical core.
1. For use in combination with a flexographic web printing
press having a pair of upstanding frame plates provided with
fiat end edges, a series of print stations including parallel
driven rolls spanning said frame plates and journalled thereby,
and means for driving a web through said stations, in timed
relation to rotation of said rolls, an add-on, flexographic mod-
ule comprising:
a chassis including a pair of parallel, laterally spaced apart
side plates;
a print station carried by said chassis and including a plural-
ity of parallel rolls spanning said side plates and journalled
thereby;
web guide rolls on said chassis between said side plates in
parallel relationship with the rolls of said print station of
the module in disposition to receive, and return to, a web
from said driving means of the press when the module is
attached thereto;
means for detachably suspending said module from said
frame plates of the press in such a manner that said rolls of
the module are maintained in parallel relationship with
said rolls of the press; and
mechanism for releasably, drivingly connecting rolls of the
module in timed relationship with rolls of the press when
the module is attached to the press,
said side plates having flat end edges disposed for abutment
against said end edges of said frame plates and being
provided with a pair of opposed guide plates projecting
outwardly beyond said end edges of the side plates, said
guide plates being spaced apart by such a distance less
than that between the side plates as to permit the guide
plates to slip between the frame plates of the press and into
surface-to-surface engagement with the frame plates when
the module is attached to the press, said suspending means
including structure for releasably holding said end edges
of the module side plates in abutting relationship with the
end edges of the frame plates.
4,438,697
ROTARY SHEET PRINTING MACHINE
Herbert Doliner, Niederau, German Democratic Rep., assignor
to Veb Kombinat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz" Uipzig,
Leipzig, German Democratic Rep.
Filed Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 384,166
Claims priority, application German Democratic Rep., Jun.
24, 1981, 231096
Int. a.3 B41F 7/06. 13/00
U.S. CI. 101-183 6 Claims
1. A rotary sheet-printing machine, comprising a plurality of
pnnting mechanisms arranged successively in a longitudinal
direction and each having a rotatable cylinder; rotary main
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
145^
drive means providing a predetermined power and having a
rotatable main drive shaft extending through said printing
mechanisms; and transmission means for transmitting rotation
from said rotary drive means to said cylinders of said printing
mechanisms, said transmission means including a planetary
transmission for each of said printing mechanisms and having a
planetary gear carrier, a hollow worm member driven by said
shaft and fixedly connected with said planetary carrier so that
said shaft extends through said worm member, and a worm
gear connected with said cylinder without intermediate gear
means and engaging with said worm member.
and said print producing means for effecting printing on
an item interposed into said passageway;
means for applying fresh ink to said inking member as the ink
is depleted therefrom as a result of the printing operation;
incremental, signal controlled holding force pressure drive
means for said print producing means for advancing said
print producing means in response to an applied signal
representing sequential data desired to be printed upon
each successive item, and for pressing said platen into said
item momentarily stopping said item and means providing
an adjustable legend mount operably associated with said
print producing means for simultaneously applying addi-
tional fixed content printed information to said item as the
item is stopped within said passageway;
said legend mount being vertically, slidably, demountably
captivated in said base and including means for horizon-
tally displacing said mount relative to said item passage-
way and for snap out dismounting from said base for
changing or renewing the data carried thereon.
4,438,698
ENDORSING APPARATUS UTILIZING HOLDING
FORCE PRESSURE
John L. Sullivan, Jr., Fort Lauderdale; Robert D. Pearson, 4,438,699
Pompano Beach, and Donald A. Youngblood, Fort Lauder- METHOD FOR REMOTE POSITIONING OF EXPLOSIVE
dale, all of Fla., assignors to Burroughs Corporation, Orlando, CHARGES IN MINING VOIDS
Fla. Leonard R. Nitzberg, Knoxville, Tenn., assignor to Patent De-
Continuation of Ser. No. 416,650, Sep. 10, 1982, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 182,600, Aug. 29, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 5, 1983, Ser. No. 510,741
Int. CV B41F 7/00
U.S. CI. 101—287 8 Claims
velopment Ltd., Knoxville, Tenn.
Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 193,927
Int. CV F42B 3/00
U.S. CI. 102—313
10 Qalms
1. Holding force pressure type endorsing apparatus for use
with document processing equipment wherein individual
items, such for example as checks or documents, may be
printed upon the obverse or reverse side thereof depending
upon the application requirement, and wherein the complete
endorsing assemblage is demountably removable from its asso-
ciated apparatus for replacement, repair, adjustment and/or
service as required, comprising a supporting base,
print producing means demountable, removable, cantilvered
to said base;
signal controlled impact gimbal mounted platen means dis-
posed adjacent to said print producing means and capable
of deflecting in directions at right angles to one another
and forming together with said print producing means an
item receiving passageway into and through which an
item/document may be moved for receiving a printed
legend or other such information thereon from said print
producing means;
drive means for moving an inking member through said item
passageway between said impact producing platen means
1. A method of remotely positioning explosive charges at
preselected locations in substantially horizontal voids created
by mining in a vein of ore, each of said voids commencing at an
entry proximate the cropping of said vein and continuing
inwardly, said method comprising the steps of:
placing an initial charge proximate the entry of said void,
arming said initial charge by attaching a blasting trunk line
to said charge,
releasably engaging said initial charge with a loading means,
moving said initial armed charge along the length of said
void until said charge is positioned at a first of said prese-
lected locations within said void,
depositing said initial charge with said blasting trunk line
attached thereto at said first preselected location within
said void,
arming a further charge by slidably attaching a detonator
cord of said further charge to said blasting trunk line,
releasably engaging said further charge, and
moving said further armed charge along the length of said
void until said further charge is positioned at a further of
said preselected locations within said void spaced from
said initial charge, said further charge being positioned
closer to said void entry than said initial charge.
1456
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1457
4,438,700
WHITE SMOKE SPOTTING COMPOSITION FOR
TRAINING AMMUNITION
Charld A. Knapp, Wayne, N J., anignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Wash-
ington, D.C.
FUed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,601
Int. a.^ F42B 13/44; C06B 33/12
U.S. a 102-334 7 Claims
lower horizontally disposed flanges deflning for each
engaging member a sideward opening and a ]-shaped cross
section;
drive means for conveying said article carrier and said lead-
ing, front, rear and rearmost trolleys along said trolley
rail;
drive-engagement means having an operative position con-
necting said leading trolley to said drive means to effect
conveyance and an inoperative position disconnecting
said leading trolley and said drive means to inactivate said
conveyance; and
drive disengagement means on said rearmost trolley opera-
ble to displace said drive-engagement means to said inop-
erative position.
1. A pyrotechnic spotting composition consisting essentially
of 30-50% zinc powder, 10-30% aluminum powder, 10-30%
potassium nitrate or sodium nitrate, and 10-30% potassium
perchlorate.
6. In an artillery training projectile shell having a hollow
core, a smoke producing means activated upon pact disposed
in said hollow core, and openings in the aft portion of said shell
for exiting smoke produced from said smoke producing means,
the improvement wherein the smoke producing means in-
cludes a composition consisting essentially of 30-50% zinc
powder, 10-30% aluminum powder, 10-30% potassium nitrate
or sodium nitrate, and 10-30% potassium perchlorate.
4438 702
* ENDLESS CONVEYOR SYSTEM
Arthur B. Rhodes, 7227 Helen Ave., LouisyiUe, Ky. 40258
Filed Jun. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,754
Int. a? B61B 10/00
U.S. a. 104-172 B 15 Claim.
» 34 eO, S. S4 M
4 438 701
TRUCK CONVEYOR
Masasumi Mural; HIrokazu Kondo, both of Tokorozawa, and
Shigekatsu Takino, Hanno, aU of Japan, assignors to
Tsubakimoto Chain Company, Osaka, Japan
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,671
Gaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 20, 1981, 56-
22078[U]; Feb. 25, 1981, 56-24486[U]; Feb. 27, 1981, 56-
Int. a.3 B61B 10/04
UA a. 104-172 B 7 Claim.
1. A truck conveyor comprising:
a leading trolley;
a front trolley;
means connecting said leading trolley with said front trolley
a rear trolley; '
a rearmost trolley;
means connecting said rear trolley with said rearmost trol-
ley;
a trolley rail for engaging and guiding said leading, front,
rear and rearmost trolleys along a conveyance path;
an article carrier for receiving articles for conveyance hav-
mg first trolley-engagement means at the front of said
article carrier for detachably engaging said front trolley
and second trolley-engagement means at the rear of said
article carrier for detachably engaging said rear trolley;
said first and second trolley engagement means respectively
comprising front and rear channeled engaging members
having vertically oriented web portions and upper and
1. A conveyor system for moving load bearing units along a
path defined by the conveyor system, comprising:
endless conveyor means having at least one flight thereof
defining the path to be traveled by the load bearing units,
said at least one path defining flight having a discontinuity
along the defined path;
an endless conveyor transfer device disposed across the
discontinuity in said at least one path defining flight of said
endless conveyor device;
fixed position engagement means attached to each of the
load bearing units said engagement means being adapted
to engage said endless conveyor transfer device for move-
ment of the load bearing units with said endless conveyor
transfer device across the discontinuity;
moveable pin means attached to each of the load bearing
units, said pin means being movable between an endless
conveyor device engaged position, in which engaged
position the load bearing units are connected to said at
least one path defining flight of said endless conveyor
means for movement therewith along the defined path,
and an endless conveyor means disengaged position; and
means for activating said movable pin means to the endless
conveyor means disengaged position proximate the up-
stream end of the discontinuity as said engagement means
engages said endless conveyor transfer device and for
actuating said moveable pin means to the endless con-
veyor means engaged position proximate the downstream
end of the discontinuity as said engagement means disen-
gages said endless conveyor transfer device.
4,438,703
PRIMARY SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR A RAILWAY
CAR
Walter S. Eggert, Jr., Huntington Valley, Pa., assignor to The
Budd Company, Troy, Mich.
Filed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,446
Int. Cl.^ B61F 5/ 26
U.S. 0. 105—224.1 5 Claims
J-
nf
64
T
66
i3
>W'
1. In a railway truck having a side frame for receiving a
wheel-axle unit disposed to ride in a journal bearing,
a primary suspension system clamped to said side frame
between said journal bearing and said side frame compris-
ing:
(a) top and bottom assemblies forming a ring disposed to
fit around said journal bearing to minimize forces trans-
mitted from said wheel-axle unit to said side frame;
(b) said top and bottom assemblies each including elasto-
meric members bonded to pairs of inner and outer plate
members;
(c) said outer plate members including primary and sec-
ondary plate elements;
(d) said primary plate elements having openings therein;
(e) said elastomeric members having recessed portions on
their outer peripheries aligned with the openings of said
primary plate elements;
(0 said secondary plate elements being disposed in said
recessed portions of said elastomeric members in differ-
ent planes than primary plate elements;
whereby said suspension system provides a first spring rate
up to a predetermined loading of said elastomeric mem-
bers when said outer secondary plate elements are inoper-
ative and a second higher spring rate when said secondary
metal plate elements become operative when some of said
elastomeric members are compressed beyond predeter-
mined limits during high load forces.
4,438,704
CASSETTE FOR CURRENCY NOTES OR OTHER
VALUABLE ARTICLES
Alfred J. Hutcbeon, Dundee, Scotland, aMignor to NCR Corpo-
ration, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 207,496
Oalms priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 14, 1980,
8022942
Int. a.3 G08B 13/06
U.S. O. 109—44 8 Claims
1. Apparatus for storing items to be dispensed comprising:
a receptacle for storing said items;
locking mechanism for locking said receptacle in a closed
condition to prevent access to said items and also for
unlocking said receptacle so as to permit access to said
items; and
means for indicating tampering being operatively coupled
with said locking mechanism for giving an indication that
a cycle including an unlocking of said receptacle followed
by a locking of said receptacle has occurred after a said
cycle has in fact occurred;
said tampering indicating means including a latch mecha-
nism which is settable to a first state prior to an unlocking
operation of said receptacle, said latch mechanism being
operatively coupled to said locking mechanism so as to be
set to a second state during a said cycle including said
unlocking and locking operation of said receptacle, said
second state of said latch mechanism being an indication
that said cycle has taken place;
said receptacle having a removeable and lockable cover
which is separate from said locking mechanism, said cover
providing access to said latch mechanism to enable said
latch mechanism to be set to said first state and said cover
also facilitating the loading of said receptacle with said
itettm-lo be dispensed.
4,438,705
INONERATOR WITH TWO REBURN STAGES, AND,
OPTIONALLY, HEAT RECOVERY
John N. Basic, Sr., 41 W. 202 WUtaey Rd., St. Charles, lU.
60174
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,054
Int. aj B09B 3/00
U.S. a. 110—235 249 Claims
1. An incinerator system for bulk refuse and hydrocarbon-
containing liquids comprising:
(A) an enclosed main combustion chamber having:
(1) a first inlet opening for the introduction of solid bulk
refuse; and
(2) a first outlet opening for the egress of the gaseous
products of combustion from said main combustion
chamber;
1458
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
(B) a first rebum chamber having:
(1) a second inlet opening coupled to and in fluid commu-
nication with said first outlet opening;
(2) a second outlet opening for the egress of the gaseous
products of combustion from said first chamber;
(3) burner means, located in proximity to said second inlet
opening, for. burning a fuel in said first chamber, said
burner means having a high and a low setting and, when
m Its high setting, burning more fuel than when in its
low setting;
(4) a first plurality of jets extending into said first rebum
chamber, said jets extending at least about half of the
distance from said second inlet opening to said second
outlet opening; and
(5) first oxygenating means, coupled to said first plurality
of jets, for introducing an oxygen-containing gas
through said first plurality of jets into said first reburn
chamber, said first oxygenating means having a high
and a low setting and. when in its high setting, introduc-
ing a greater volume of gas through said jets than when
m its low setting;
(C) a second rebum chamber having:
(1) a third inlet opening coupled to and in fluid communi-
cation with said second outlet opening;
(2) a third outlet opening for the egress of the gaseous
products of combustion from said second chamber,
(3) a second plurality of jets extending into said second
rebum chamber, said jets extending at least about half of
set point which is not higher than said second set point,
placing said burner means in its high setting;
(H) third sensing means, located in proximity to said second
reburn chamber, for determining a temperature within
said second rebum chamber; and
(I) third control means, coupled to said third sensing means
and to said second oxygenating means, for, when the
temperature determined by said third sensing means is
above a fourth predetermined set point, placing said sec-
ond oxygenating means in its high setting and, when the
temperature determined by said third sensing means is
below said fourth set point, placing said second oxygenat-
ing means in its low setting.
4438 706
PROCEDURE AND EQUIPMENT FOR DESTROYING
WASTE BY PLASMA TECHNIQUE
Otto Boday; Andras Herpay; Ferenc KriUcsovics; Istvan Neverl;
Sandor Pete; Ferenc Poesy; Beta Szikora, and Endre Szirmai,
aJl of Budapest, Hungary, assignors to Villamosipari Kutato
Intezet, Budapest, Hungary
Filed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,397
Qaims priority, application Hungary, Feb. 27, 1982, 485/81
Int. a.3 F23G 7/04
U.S. a 110-238 ,ciai,n,
LU-Lzz^z..^
:3»
the distance from said third inlet opening to said third
outlet opening; and
(4) second oxygenating means, coupled to said second
plurality of jets, for introducing an oxygen-containing
gas through said second plurality of jets into said second
chamber, said second oxygenating means havipg a high
and a low setting and, when in its high setting^troduc-
ing a greater volume of gas through said second plural-
ity of jets than when in its low setting;
(D) first sensing means, located in proximity to said first
rebum chamber, for determining a temperature within
said first rebum chamber;
(E) first control means, coupled to said first oxygenating
means and to said first sensing means, for, when the tem-
perature determined by said first sensing means is above a
first predetermined set point, placing said first oxygenat-
ing means in its high setting and, when the temperature
determined by said first sensing means is below said first
set point, placing said first oxygenating means in its low
setting;
(F) second sensing means, located in proximity to said first
reburn chamber, for determining a temperature within
said first rebum chamber;
(G) second control means, coupled to said burner means and
to said second sensing means, for. when the temperature
determined by said second sensing means is above a sec-
ond predetermined set point, placing said burner means in
Its low settmg and, when the temperature determined by
said second sensing means is below a third predetermined
6 J.
■,r- M
Tt^'vO
I
10
27
26
Jt
h
••Sr-^
J
54 Sf
JV-
1. Process for destroying fluid waste containing vaporizable
organic materials comprising the steps of:
(a) producing air plasma using D.C. energy supply genera-
tor;
(b) transferring said plasma into a plasma torch at one end of
a plasma reactor;
(c) introducing organic waste vapor and preheated oxygen
into said torch for interaction with said plasma- and
(d) discharging end products of said interaction from the end
of said plasma reactor, opposite to the location of said
torch, into gas washing equipment.
4,438,707
APPARATUS FOR DIRECTLY IGNITING LOW-GRADE
SOLID FUEL POWDERS IN COLD COMBUSTION
CHAMBERS
Lucien Delaplace, Sevres, and Jacques Robert, Meudon, both of
France, assignors to Stein Industrie, Velizy-Vlllacoublav
France "
FUed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,708
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 6, 1981, 81 02383
Int. a.J F23D 1/02
U.S. CI. 110-264 ,0 Qaims
1. Ignition apparatus for directly igniting low-grade solid
fuel powders in cold combustion chambers, said apparatus
compnsing at least one pilot burner with at least one pilot
Igniter and at least one main igniter, said at least one main
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1459
igniter being fed with low-grade fuel powders, the improve-
ment comprising:
receive and divide the coal into a first stream of subsun-
tially pure coal and into a second stream of coal with a
highly concentrated content of iron pyrite and other min-
erals,
a furnace having two sets of burners arranged vertically one
over the other, i
means connected between the classifier and the lower of the
two sets of burners to receive and pulverize the first
stream of coal supplied the burners.
and means connected between the classifier and the upper of
the two sets of burners to receive and pulverize the second
stream of coal to an extremely small size ( 5400 mesh) and
supplied the burners,
whereby the combustion generated by the coal of the first
set of burners extends up through the furnace so that the
coal of the second set of burners ejects into the hot tem-
peratures and air-richer zone of the combustion and
thereby roasts the iron pyrites to iron oxide.
means for feeding said pilot igniter with low-grade gas from
a gasifying unit gasifying said low-grade fuel powders to
eliminate adding any auxiliary high-grade fuel.
4 438 708
COMPLETE INCINERATION OF WASTE MATERIAL
Russell E. Duff, Solana Beach, Calif., assignor to S-Cubed,
LaJolla, Calif.
Filed Aug. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 407,787
Int. a.3 F23G 9/00
U.S. CI. 110-346 13 Otlms
'/
/-
XT.
10. A method of disposing of waste material comprising
providing a container and depositing the waste material in
said container.
supplying liquid oxygen to. said container in excess of the
estimated amount required to completely oxidize the
organic and metallic components of the waste material,
submerging said container in the ocean so that said wastes
and liquid oxygen are contained in an unvented underwa-
ter combustion site, and
igniting said waste material to create a rapid combustion,
whereupon substantially all of the waste material is con-
verted to ash and volatile combustion products, said con-
tainer ruptures, the ash and ruptured container sink to the
ocean floor and the volatile combustion products rise
through the seawater, condensing within the seawater or
reacting with chemicals in the seawater so that only rela-
tively harmless volatile products reach the ocean surface.
4438 709
SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HRING COAL HAVING A
SIGNIFICANT MINERAL CONTENT
Richard W. Borio, Somers; Hugh W. Nelson, West Hartford,
both of Conn., and Arun K. Mehta, Los Altos, Calif., assignors
to Combustion Engineering, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
FUed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 423,591
Int. a.3 F23K 1/00; F23D 7/00
U.S. a. 110-347 5 Clalnu
1. A combustion system for mineralized coal, including,
a source of coal having a significant content of iron pyrite
(FeS2) in its total mineral fraction,
a classifier (beneficiator) connected to the source of coal to
Hal'ictAiiOk
'\
cMvcmioiuk.
4. A process for buming highly mineralized coal, including,
dividing raw coal with a high mineral content into a first
stream of relatively low mineral content and a second
stream of relatively high mineral content including py-
rites,
pulverizing the first stream of coal to a conventional size for
combustion in a furnace,
supplying the first stream of pulverized coal to a combustion
zone in the lower portion of a furnace,
pulverizing the second stream of mineralized coal to an
extremely fine size,
and supplying the second stream of finely pulverized miner-
alized coal to the high-temperature upper portion of the
combustion zone in the furnace,
whereby the pyrites of the mineral is roasted to Fe203 and-
/or Fe304and all of the mineral content is prevented from
forming slag in the furnace.
4,438,710
SEEDLING PLANTER
Anthony Paladino, Woodstock, Canada, assignor to Timbcrland
Equipment Limited, Woodstock, Canada
FUed Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 36M53
Int. a.i AOIC 11/02
VS. CI. 111—3 14 Claims
1. Apparatus for planting seedlings comprising a main frame;
wheel support means for supporting the main frame above the
ground; a pair of planting beams each pivoully mounted adja-
cent to a respective one of the opposing sides of the main
frame, each planting beam having a planting dibble adjacent its
free outer end; a pair of packing beams each pivoully mounted
to the main frame adjacent a respective one of said planting
beams and having packing means at their free outer ends for
packing earth around seedlings planted by said dibbles, an
operators' sution disposed on said main frame intermediate the
opposing sides of the main frame whereby, in use, operators
1460
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
located at the operators* station have access to the planting
dibbles in their raised positions for placement of seedlings
thereinto, means for raising and lowering said planting beams
to cause the dibbles carried thereby to move between raised
seedling-receiving positions and lowered earth-penetrating
positions; and ejecting means carried by the respective planting
beams for ejecting individual seedlings out of their planting
dibbles into furrows in the soil cut thereby, and wherein said
4,438,712
STITCHING HEAD HAVING TWO INDEPENDENT
PRESSER FEET
Hugues, J. M. Ducelllcr, MesnU Saint Pere, France, assignor to
Broderie de Mesnll St Pere Sj^.R.L., Troyes, France
Filed Dec. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 326,338
Gaims priority, application France, Dec. 10, 1980, 80 26231
Int. a.3 DOSB 29/06. 53/00
UA a. 112-100 15 Claims
i
wheel support means comprises a pair of elongated walking
beams each pivotally mounted adjacent to a respective one of
the opposing sides of the main frame, a ground engaging wheel
attached to a free outer end portion of each said walking
beams, a pair of module bases, each connected to the main
frame adjacent a respective one of the opposing sides thereof;
one each of said walking beams, planting beams and packing
means being pivotally connected to a respective one of said
module bases.
4,438 711
FUR SEWING MACHINE
Herbert Dietrich, Kalslerslautem, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Pfaff Industriemaschinen GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Oct. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 435,497
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 30,
1981, 3143051
Int. a.3 O05B 15/00. 27/10
U.S. a. 112-16 1, cudms
1. A stitching head for a stitching or embroidering machine
havmg a workplate on which a piece of material may be ad-
vanced, said stitching head comprising a support for fixing said
stitching head to the machine above the workplate; at least one
sewing needle which is slidably mounted in said support; a
mam presser foot having a pressing heel which is pierced with
at least one hole disposed in the path of said sewing needle;
means cooperating with said main presser foot for continu-
ously and automatically forming upwardly directed loops with
a thread on said piece of material, said loop forming means
raising a given length of said thread previously secured to said
peice of material during each upward movement of the main
presser foot, and nipping said length of said thread during each
subsequent downward movement of the main presser foot in
order to turn it down and form a loop which is thereafter
secured on the piece of material through a stitch made by said
sewing needle.
1. A fur sewing machine having a housing and a stitch form-
ing area, comprising: a carrier bracket which is displaceable
relative to the housing; two feed discs, one of which being
mounted on said carrier bracket, said feed discs being rotatably
mounted in a plane; a rod non-rotatobly and axially displace-
ably connected in the housing and connected to said carrier
bracket for displacing said carrier bracket horizontally relative
to the housing; and a trimming mechanism upstream of the
stitch forming area and close above said feed discs, said trim-
ming mechanism comprising a trimming blade mounted for
oscillation parallel to the plane of rotation of said feed discs,
and a relatively sutionary counterblade mounted for engage-
ment with said trimming blade and extending parallel to the
plane of rotation of said feed discs.
4438 713
EMBROIDERY STITCH FORMAHON DEVICE FOR
SEWING MACHINE
Takashi Kato, Kiryu, Japan, assignor to Eltac Co. Ltd., Sizuoka
and Tokai Industrial Sewing Machine Co. Ltd., Kasugai, both
of, Japan, part interest to each
Filed May 13, 1983, Ser. No. 494,555
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, May 18, 1982, 57-83713;
May 18, 1982, 57-83714; May 18, 1982, 57-72212[U]; Jun. 22,
Int. a.3 D05C 3/02. 7/08
UA a 112-100 4 Claims
1. A device for embroidery stitch formation by a lockstitch
sewing machine having a needle bar equipped with a needle
provided with a piece of needle thread through a needle hole
thereof and a lockstitch bobbin provided with a piece of lock-
stitch bobbin thread therein comprising:
an outer cylinder which is mounted around the needle bar
movably upward and downward in unison with the mo-
tion of the needle bar,
a nipple having a passage therethrough fitted to the lower
end of the outer cylinder,
a passageway for needle thread and a passage for a cord
being provided slantwise through a frame and the outer
cylinder,
a rotary ring which is routably arranged on the outer cylin-
der and is rotatably supported by a supporter of a support-
ing rod which is fastened to the frame,
a drive grear arranged on the upper periphery portion of the
rotary ring,
a support arm provided with a tUted shaft on which is
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1461
mounted a bobbin on which bobbin thread is wound being
positioned fixedly on the outer periphery of the rotary
ring at the position lower than the drive gear, and
a guide bar having guide holes for guiding a piece of bobbin
thread supplied from the bobbin being mounted on the
rotary ring,
whereby embroidery stitches are formed by thread mdmbers
comprising: a piece of needle thread supplied through a pas-
sageway to be threaded with a needle, a piece of lockstitch
bobbin thread supplied from a lockstitch bobbin both of which
join in a formation of lockstitch seam and a piece of cord
hanging down in parallel with a needle bar through a passage-
way, which is wound with turns of a piece of bobbin thread
supplied from a bobbin mounted on a shaft of a support arm
which is rotatably fixed on a rotary ring arranged rotatable
around an outer cylinder, said bobbin thread being locked by
said needle thread during the process of stitch formation.
4,438,714
RADIUS BLADE CUTTING APPARATUS FOR A SEWING
MACHINE
Samuel W. Smith, Carlisle, and Harold C. McVey, Paris, both of
Ky., assignors to Blue Grass Industries, Inc., Carlisle, Ky.
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,347
Int. a.3 D05B 65/02
U.S. a. 112—130 14 Oaims
adjacent to the needle, each of the blade members having
a cutting surface which is directed substantially radially
with respect to the blade axis whereby the cutting surfaces
both extend along respective radii from the blade axis in
order to effect shearing along their entire radial extent
substantially simultaneously;
moving means for effecting coordinated counter-rotation of
the blade members from a rest position allowing passage
of the strip of material and the workpiece to a cutting
position in which the cutting surfaces of the blade mem-
bers cooperate to snip the strip of material by a shearing
action after the sewing of the strip of material to the
workpiece is complete and the workpiece is moved away
from the path of the blade members.
4,438,715
BUTTONHOLE SEWING REPAIR
WiUiam H. Dunn, BraachTiUe; WUIiam J. Edwards, Cranbury,
and Philip F. Minalga, Piscataway, all of N J., assignors to
The Singer Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,538
Int. a.5 D05B 3/06. 3/02
U.S. a. 112—158 B 5 Claims
1. A method for repairing an incomplete buttonhole in a
work material on a sewing machine having a needle bar, a feed
system, actuating means for reciprocating said needle bar and
actuating said feed system, means for selectively suspending
needle bar reciprocation, and means for implementing a but-
tonhole from an initiating position, said method comprising the
steps of:
a. repositioning said work material at the initiating position
for said incomplete buttonhole;
b. activating said means for suspending needle bar reciproca-
tion and said means for implementing a buttonhole;
c. actuating said actuating means for actuating said feed
system while suspending needle bar reciprocation during
that portion of said incomplete buttonhole already
stitched;
d. reinitiating needle bar reciprocation substantially at the
point where said buttonhole is incomplete.
1. An improved sewing machine of the type in which a
continuous strip of material is sewn to a workpiece as the
workpiece is moved past a sewing needle, wherein the im-
provement comprises:
a pair of blade members rouubly mounted upon the sewing
machine for rotation about a common blade axis substan-
tially parallel to and spaced from the strip of material and
4,438,716
MU^TI-STITCH SEWING MACHINE
Akio Koide, and Yoshikazu Ebata, both of Tokyo, Japan, assign-
ors to Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 230,600, Feb. 2, 1981, abandoned. This
appUcation May 12, 1983, Ser. No. 493,044
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 1, 1980, 55-9941
Int. a.3 D05B 1/14
U.S. a. 112—168 1 Claim
1. A selecting device for a double-function sewing machme
having a first stitch forming mechanism including a drive shaft
(38) for producing one type of stitch, a second stitch forming
mechanism for producing another type of stitch and a single
1462
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
machine drive motor (6), said selecting device comprising a
first belt wheel (31) mounted on the drive shaft (38) and being
rotatable relative to said drive shaft; first transmission means
(31A) connecting the first belt wheel to the machine drive
motor; first clutch means (20-24) arranged between the first
belt wheel and the drive shaft and being displaceable between
an operative position in which said first clutch means connects
the first belt wheel to the drive shaft and an inoperative posi-
tion in which said first clutch means disconnects the first belt
wheel from said drive shaft, said first clutch means including a
first cam (20); a second belt wheel (36) mounted on the first
belt wheel and being rotatable relative to the first belt wheel
second transmission means (32A) connecting the second belt
wheel to the motor; second clutch means (32-34) arranged
between said second belt wheel and said first belt wheel and
22(23)
13
M 16
through reciprocating and oscillating movements to effect
movement of the looper in an elliptical pathway about the
needle, said sewing machine comprising:
(a) a looper support 15 fixedly mounted on and for move-
ment with the horizontal shaft within the machine's base;
(b) a loop pusher element 21 disposed upstream of the needle
9;
(c) an oscillatable support element 32 operatively associated
with said looper support 15 to support a needle protector
29 on the upper end of said oscillatable support element 32
and move the needle protector toward and away from
operative association with the needle during the recipro-
cating movement of the horizontal shaft, said oscillatable
support element 32 having a lower end that defines a pair
of spaced depending arms 34 between which the horizon-
tal shaft extends; and
(d) said needle protector 29 being disposed downstream of
the needle 9 and mounted on the upper end of oscillatable
support element 32 for preventing a variance in the oper-
ating phase between the needle and looper during the
formation of each stitch and the displacement of the nee-
dle in the direction of advancing the workpiece.
bemg displacable between an operative position in which said
second clutch means connects said second belt wheel to said
first belt wheel and an inoperative position in which said sec-
ond clutch means disconnects said second belt wheel from said
first belt wheel, wherein the first and second clutch means and
the first and second belt wheels are mounted on said drive shaft
(38), said second clutch means including a second cam (32);
and operator-controlled means including a first lever (13) and
a second lever (14) and being selectively operated to cause one
of said first and second levers to cooperate with one of said
first and second cams to thereby displace one of said first and
second clutch means into said inoperative position while the
other of said first and second levers is held in an inoperative
position so that the other of said first and second clutch means
may remain in said operative position.
4,438,718
PHASE INDICATION DEVICE OF SEWING MACHINE
Susumu Hanyu, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Janome Sewing
Machine Industry Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,854
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 28, 1981, 56-
60572[U]
Int. a.3 D05B 69/22
U.S. a. 112-274 5 ciainM
4,438,717
NEEDLE PROTECTOR FOR SEWING MACHINES
Giancarlo Minella; Bruno Motta, both of Milan, and Egidio
Pedone, Corsico, aU of Italy, assignors to Roclcwell Interna-
tional Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,024
Claims priority, application Italy, Nov. 12, 1980, 25918 A/80
Int. C1.3 D05B 55/06. J/10
UA a 112-227 2 Qaims
« ^1
' X 34 26 lB.
1. A sewing machine of the double chain stitch type having
a feed dog and presser foot for advancing a workpiece and a
reciprocating needle bar with at least one needle carried
thereby and at least one looper operatively connected to a
horizontal shaft simultaneously driven within the machine base
1. In a sewing machine having a main drive shaft rotated by
a drive motor to vertically reciprocate a needle, a phase indica-
tion devce comprising;
first detection means for electrically detecting a predeter-
minedf angular position of said main drive shaft, thereby
producing a first electric signal;
second detection means for electrically detecting a condition
in which said drive shaft is deenergized, thereby produc-
ing a second electric signal;
electric circuit means operative to produce an output when
both of said first and second electric signals are produced;
and
an electric indicator receiving said output of said electric
circuit means to be indicative of said predetermined angu-
lar position of said main drive shaft;
said second detection means including a switch which is
closed and opened in association with operation of a speed
controller of said sewing machine to energize and deener-
gize said drive motor, said switch being opened when said
speed controller is not operated and thereby producing
said second electric signal.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1463
4438 719
CONTAINER FOR TRANSPORTING COMPRESSED GAS,
SUCH AS NATURAL GAS, AND METHOD OF
CONSTRUCTING THE CONTAINER
Ulrich Finsterwalder, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Dyckerhofr A Widmann Aktiengescllschaft, Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,590
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 24.
1981, 3111408
Int. a.3 B63B 25/08
U.S. a. 114-74 A 13 Calms
1. Device for transporting gas, such as natural gas, which has
been reduced in volume, such as by one of pressurization and
liquefaction, comprising a buoyant hollow container in the
form of a solid of rotation with a curved generatrix, said hol-
low container is a hollow sphere formed of reinforced con-
crete, a wall forms said container having an outside surface and
an inside surface with at least a watertight coating deposited on
the outside surface, three band-like groups of reinforcing mem-
bers are positioned in said wall for reinforcing said container,
each of said groups comprises a plurality of rings disposed in
spaced parallel relation with the rings in each said group inter-
secting the rings in the other said groups at right angles, said
groups comprise a first said group, a second said group and a
third said group, said first group located in the middle region
of said wall of said container and said second and third groups
are arranged at a number of locations inwardly and outwardly
of said first group.
4,438,720
/ TILT DETECTOR
Worth R. Conn, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Detectors, Inc., Gra-
ham, Tex.
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,559
Int. a? GOIC 9/ JO
U.S. a. 116-215 11 Claims
of an inner apex for trapping said second mass under the
buoyant force of gravity when in a vertical position with
its open end in the opposite direction such that at least part
of said second mass is freed to move out of said baffle
when tilted beyond a pre-determined angle of tilt; the
degre of the sides of said baffle being related to said pre-
determined angle;
d. a thin container having at least a transparent window for
viewing at least said trapping end for ascertaining if said
second mass has been freed;
such that said tilt detector can be affixed to goods, containers
and the like to tell if they have been tilted too much during
transportation and the like; said tilt detector being resettable by
inverting to replace said less dense second mass within said
horseshoe-shaped baffle.
4,438,721
SEALANT APPLYING APPARATUS FOR CAN BODY
BLANKS
Klyoshi Kawamata, Ohmiya, Japan, assignor to Nihon Seikan
Kabusbiki Kaisha, Japan
DivUion of Ser. No. 35,904, May 3, 1979, abandoned. ThU
application Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,677
Int. a.J B05C J/08. 1/J6
U.S. a 118-249 2 Qaims
1. An apparatus for applying a thin coating of sealing sub-
stance to the edges to be side-seamed of a can body blank,
comprising:
a pair of coating rollers on the opposite sides of the convey-
ing path for carrying a can body blank, each located to
face the corresponding longitudinal or lateral side edge of
the can body blank for applying a thin coating of sealing
substance thereto and each having a central circumftfren-
tia! protrusion, side circumferential protrusions, and cir-
cumferentidl recesses all of which surround the periphery
of said coating roller, said central protrusion being slightly
higher than said side protrusions; and
a pair of transfer rollers each spaced from the corresponding
coating roller, each having circumferential V-shaped
recesses surrounding the periphery thereof and located
opposite the corresponding central and side protrusions of
said coating roller, and further having a sealing substance
supply container in which said transfer roller is partly
immersed.
1. A tilt detector for accompanying goods to be transported
to determine whether said good have been transported in a
recommended position without being inclined beyond a prede-
termined angle comprising:
a. a first fluid of a first density;
b. a second mass of a second density less than said first
density;
c. a horseshoe-shaped baffle with a trapping end in the form
4438 722
DEVELOPMENT UNIT FOR ELECTROPHOTOCOPIERS
Riccardo Forlani, Turin, Italy, assignor to Ing. C. Olivetti A C,
S.p.A., Ivrea, Italy
FUed Jul. 15, 1983, Ser. No. 513,815
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Aug. 20, 1983, 68026 A/82
Int. a.3 G03G 15/09
U.S. a. 118—657 8 Claims
1. A development unit for electrophotocopiers, comprising a
magnetic brush (10) in which a rotauble sleeve (16) of non-
magnetic material encloses a plurality of magnets (14) fixed on
to a rouuble shaft (12), and a toner container (20) situated
adjacent to the sleeve in order to feed the magnetic brush
through a slit (36) with the toner freed from any lumps or
foreign bodies, characterised in that the container (20) com-
prises an arcuate base wall (32) embracing a portion of the
1040 O.G.— 58
1464
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
sleeve (16) and bounded by an edge (34) adjacent to and spaced
from a side wall (27) of the container so as to define the toner
feed slit (36) wherein the action of the variable magnetic field
4,438,724
GROOVED GAS GATE
Joachim Doehler, Union Lake; David A. Gattuso, Pontiac, and
Kevin R. Hoffman, Sterling Heights, all of Mich., assignors to
Energy Conversion Devices, Inc., Troy, Mich.
Filed Aug. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 407,983
Int. a.3 C23C 13/10
U.S. a. 118-719 3Ctai^
produced by the rotating magnets (14) urges the toner (T)
along the arcuate base wall (32) towards the slit and breaks up
lumps in the container.
4,438,723
MULTIPLE CHAMBER DEPOSITION AND ISOLAHON
SYSTEM AND METHOD
Vincent D. Cannella, Detroit; Masatsugu Izu, Birmingham, and
Stephen J. Hudgens, Southfield, all of Mich., assignors to
Energy Conversion Devices, Inc., Troy, Mich.
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,146
Int. a.3 C23C 13/10. 13/12
U.S. a. 118-718 24 Qaims
\ll oooooooooo ««
■"■•"'■ 1 1.
7i_i-, ILL _lLt_l V-Lt,iI. 11
1. A system for depositing a body of material upon a sub-
strate, said body having at least two layers of different compo-
sition, said system comprising:
a first chamber including means for depositing a first layer of
material on said substrate;
first source means for providing said first chamber with a
first plurality of gases;
a second chamber including means for depositing a second
layer of material on said substrate, said second layer of
material having a composition differing from the composi-
tion of said first layer by the absence of at least one ele-
ment;
second source means for providing said second chamber
with at least one gas; said at least one gas differing from
said first plurality of gases introduced into the first cham-
ber by the absence of said at least one element;
slot means interconnecting said first and second chambers;
means for transferring said substrate from said first chamber
to said second chamber through said slot means; and
first isolation means for limiting diffusion of said at least one
element from said first chamber to said second chamber,
said first isolation means including means for establishing
a gas flow from said slot means into said first chamber at
a rate sufficient to maintain at least a 10* ratio of the
concentration of said at least one element in said first
chamber as compared to the concentration of said at least
one element in said second chamber.
1. In a gas gate which includes a relatively narrow passage-
way adapted to (1) operatively interconnect a pair of adjacent
deposition chambers and (2) substantially reduce the back
diffusion of gases from the first of the pair of chambers to the
second of the pair of chambers; a relatively thin, relatively
large area substrate adapted to travel from one of the pair of
chambers wherein a first layer is deposited onto a surface
thereof, and into the other of the pair of chambers wherein a
second layer is deposited atop the first layer; means adapted to
introduce at least one gas into the first of the pair of chambers;
means adapted to introduce at least one additional gas into the
second of the pair of chambers; gas removing means for estab-
lishing a pressure differential between the adjacent chambers
whereby the gas flow therebetween is substantially unidirec-
tional; and means for urging the unlayered surface of the sub-
strate toward a passageway wall; the improvement compris-
ing, in combination:
at least one elongated groove formed in the passageway wall
toward which the unlayered surface of the substrate is
urged, said groove being substantially coextensive with
the length of the passageway so as to operatively intercon-
nect the adjacent chambers, whereby a substantially unidi-
rectional gas flow is established through the slit defined by
the space between the gas gate passageway wall and the
unlayered surface of the substrate for substantially reduc-
ing the backfiow of gases from the first to the second of
the chambers.
4,438,725
METHOD OF GROWING MOLLUSCS
Brendan W. O'Sullivan, DubUn, Ireland; Leo J. Leggett, Salis-
bury East, and Maxwell V. Melvin, Brighton, both of Austra-
lia, assignors to lO Australia Limited, Melbourne and State
of South Australia, Adelaide, both of, Australia
FUed Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347,981
Claims priority, appUcation Australia, Feb. 11, 1981, PE7551
Int. a.J AOIK 61/00
U.S.a.119-4 16 Claims
1. In the process of cultivating bivalve mollusc on micro-
cultch, the improvement comprising a first step of preparing
the micro-cultch by screening particulate matter using an
oversize screen and a fines screen to produce particles in the
size range of 50 microns to. 500 microns, a second step of
contacting an aqueous culture containing free-swimming bi-
valve mollusc larvae at the eyed-larvae stage with the said
micro-cultch, a third step of screening the aqueous culture
with a screen of substantially the same dimensions as the said
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
146S
oversize screen when at least 20% of the free-swimmine larvae «im««rt. — ^w u • ^. -
have become spat, and a fourth step of gr^w ^gTe s^re^^d ZJTi . T ? '"* *" "^"'"^ ^""'"^ substantially hori-
V growing me screeneo zonul surf-ace formmg the plane of said upper supports and
said wall surfaces of said lower supports supporting said
fianges are disposed in parallel relation to the plane of said
upper supports, said wall surfaces of said lower supports sup-
porting said fianges of said upper supports form the upper
honzontal wall of said box-shaped section of said lower sup-
port, at least one of said elongated fianges on each of said
upper supports includes a vertically extending pawl strip form-
ing the lower end of said fiange and depending downwardly
from the location where said fiange is supported on the wall
surface of said lower support, said pawl strip is securable in
detachable locking engagement with said lower supports
against being removed from said lower support in the direction
opposite to the insertion direction of said upper supports, and
said pawl strip is elastically defiecuble in the elongated direc-
tion of said lower supports when said upper support is inserted
spat to the seed stage in a culture medium wherein the spat are 1."*° ^^^. '°^^'' ^"PPOrts and for removing said upper supports
maintained in suspension. "O'" s^'d lower supports.
4,438,726 4,438,727
COVER GRATING FOR MANURE REMOVAL CANALS MOBILE TOY FOR KITTEN OR SIMILAR ANIMAl
IN STABLES Kenneth H. Thompson, 4613 Saul Rd., Kensington, Md. 20895
Herbert Osthoff, Lindenstrasse 9, MUhldorf/Ehring, Fed. Rep. Filed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,794
of Germany int. a.' AOIK 29/00
FUed Nov. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 438,959 U.S. Q. 119—29 20 Oaims
aaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 24,
1981, 3146564
U.S. a. 119—28
Int. a? AOIK 7/00
4 Claims
1. A cover grating for manure removal canals in stables
comprising elongated lower supports disposed in spaced apart
relation, elongated upper supports disposed in spaced apart
relation and extending transversely of the elongated direction
of said lower supports, said upper supports supported on and
detachably engaged to said lower supports, said lower sup-
ports having openings therein extending transversely of the
elongated direction thereof, said upper supports having down-
wardly extending flanges extending in the elongated direction
of said upper supports and engageable within the transverse
openings in said lower supports for securing said upper sup-
ports against displacement in the elongated direction of said
lower supports, wherein the improvement comprises that said
flanges are inserted transversely of their elongated direction
into said openings in said lower supports and at least one of said
flanges on each of said upper supports can be lockably engaged
in said lower support against removal opposite to the insertion
direction, said lower supports have a box-like shape in trans-
verse section comprising a number of walls and said upper
supports have a U-shape transverse section with the U-shaped
section inverted relative to said lower supports when said
upper supports are inserted into said lower supports, and at
least one of said flanges on each of said upper support being
inserted downwardly into said transverse openings in said
lower supports, said elongated flanges of said upper supports
form the legs of the U-shaped transverse section and are sup-
ported on a wall surface of said lower support, and said upper
1. A mobile comprising:
a first rod having first and second ends and a longitudinal
center;
first support means for freely suspending said first rod at a
first support point located intermediate said first and sec-
ond ends and displaced from said longitudinal center;
first weighted means secured to said first rod for applying a
first gravitational torque to said rod about said first sup-
port point;
further means secured to said first rod for applying a second
gravitational torque, of lesser value than said first gravita-
tional torque, about said first support point;
wherein said further means includes;
a second rod having first and second ends and a longitudi-
nal center;
second support means for freely suspending said second
rod at a second support point located intermediate the
ends of the second rod and displaced from the longitudi-
nal center of said second rod;
second weighted means secured to said second rod for
applying a third gravitational torque to said second rod
about said second support point; and
additional means secured to said second rod for applying
a fourth graviutional torque, of lesser value than said
gravitational torque, to said second rod about said sec-
ond support point.
1466
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4 438 728
MULTI-STAGE HOT WATER HEATING APPARATUS
Eugene E. Fracaro, 533 E. llth St., Lockport, lU. 60441
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,742
Int. a.3 F22B 5/00
UA a. 122-14 9 Claim.
^^
1. A hot water heater comprising three tanlcs arranged verti-
cally in a casing wherein the upper and lower tanks have a
center Hue disposed vertically therethrough, the middle tank
being imperforate and spaced from the walls of the casing
forming an annular flue with the walls of said casing, burner
means positioned adjacent the bottom of said lower tank and
communicating with the center flue of said lower tank, an
exhaust sUck positioned on said casing and communicating
with the center flue of said upper tank whereby the gases of
combustion flow in a serpentine path from the burner to the
exhaust stack.
transferring heat energy from said flrst and second internal
combustion engines to said coolant fluid;
transferring heat energy from said coolant fluid to said first
fluid in a coolant fluid-to-first fluid heat exchanger; and
exerting a varying load on said second internal combustion
engine and thereby transferring an increased amount of
heat energy from said second internal combustion engine
to said coolant fluid and from said coolant fluid to said
first fluid as said load exerted on said second internal
combustion engine is increased.
4,438 730
PROCESS FOR THE GENERAHON OF STEAM
Gerhard Link, Mainz; Siegfried Jung, Florabeim-Wicken Rein-
hold Zapp, Waldem; Helmut Biir, Offenbach am Main, and
Herbert Mader, Nautaeim, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Ubde GmbH, Dortmund, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 359,152
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 18.
1981, 3110520
Int a.3 F22B 27/00
U.S. a. 122-40 ,9 ctai^
1. A process for producing steam, said process comprising
generating steam by evaporating water at a temperature not
higher than about 115* C. and a pressure not substantially
higher than the vapor pressure of water at the temperature of
evaporation, mechanically compressing the steam generated to
a pressure which is from 3.0 to 4.5 times that at which the
water was evaporated, and further compressing the mechani-
cally compressed steam by means of at least one steam jet
ejector to a pressure of from 3.0 to 6.0 bar which is at least 1.4
times the pressure to which the steam was compressed me-
chanically and a temperature of from 140 * to 165* C.
4 438 731
FLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
Joseph D. Magglo, Cook County, III., assignor to Mercor Corpo-
ration, Franklin Park, III.
Filed Jan. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 342,900
Int. a.3 F02M 25/02
U.S. a. 123-25 N 1, Claim.
«> 4 438 729
FLAMELESS NrTROGEN SKID UNIT
Stanley B. Loescb; James C. St. John, and Danny K. Mints, all
of Duncan, Okla., assignors to HalUburton Company, Duncan,
Okia.
Filed Mar. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 136,047
Int. a.3 F22B 3/06; F17C 7/02
62 Claims
1. A method of heating a first fluid, said method comprising
the steps of:
pumping said first fluid with a main pump means;
driving said main pump means with a first internal combus-
tion engine;
operating a second internal combustion engine;
circulating a coolant fluid through a coolant system means;
■»-0— fii«i^ir|-^>— X j. — ^
fUtL TANK
mra TANK
l«^
I i
1^
1. An improved fuel delivery system for a locomotive diesel
engine having a source of fuel under pressure, a first flow
means for delivering fuel at varying rates to said engine, a fuel
emulsifier incorporated in said first flow means for mixing a
diluent fluid with said fuel upstream of said engine, a source of
diluent fluid under pressure, a second flow means for deliver-
ing diluent fluid to said emulsifier, and a throttle means having
a series of step positions for setting different fuel rates through
said first flow means, the improvement comprising:
selectively controllable valve means in said second flow
means for regulating the flow rate of diluent fluid there-
through and
control means for activaing said valve means as a function of
the step position of said throttle means such that a prede-
termined desired mixture proportion of diluent fluid and
fuel is respectively achieved in said emulsifier for particu-
lar fuel flow rates set by said throttle means.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1467
11. A process for regulating delivery of diluent fluid to a fuel
emulsifier for a combustion engine having a throttle means
having a series of step positions for setting varying flow rates
of fuel through said emulsifier to said engine, comprising:
connecting a source of diluent fluid under pressure in a fluid
path to said emulsifier,
providing selectively controllable valve means in said fluid
path for regulating the flow rate of diluent fluid there-
through, and
activating said valve means as a function of the step positions
of said throttle means such that a predetermined desired
mixture proportion of diluent fluid and fuel is respectively
achieved in said emulsifier for particular fuel flow rates set
by said throttle means.
1. A cooling arrangement for a motor vehicle internal com-
bustion engine accommodated in a sound-absorbing shroud,
the cooling arrangement including a cooling air duct means
having an air intake and air exhaust, a radiator means disposed
in the air duct means, and a fan means cooperable with the
radiator means and disposed at a position downstream of the
radiator means, as viewed in a normal flow direction of cooling
air, characterized in that means are provided for regulating an
air throughflow through the radiator means, the means for
regulating are disposed downstream of the radiator means, as
viewed in the normal flow direction of cooling air, in an area
of the air exhaust of the air duct means, the fan means is dis-
posed exteriorly of the air duct means, means are provided for
communicating the fan means with the air duct means, and in
that means are provided for controlling an operation of the fan
means and a position of the means for regulating such that the
means for regulating closes the air exhaust when the fan means
is operable.
4,438,733
AIR COOLED INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Yoshiblro Sasaki, Katano, Japan, assignor to Yanmar Diesel
Engine Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,909
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 5, 1980, 55-12616
Int. a.J POIP J/08
VJS. a. 123—41.62 9 Qalnu
1. An air cooled internal combustion engine comprising: a
cooling fan unitarily formed on a flywheel fixed to one end of
an engine crank-shaft, a cooling fan case adapted to cover said
cooling fan and to guide the flow of cooling air generated by
said cooling fan towards the engine body, an air cleaner con-
nected to a suction port of said engine, and a silencer con-
nected to an exhaust port of said engine wherein said suction
port is located on the same side of said engine as said flywheel,
while said exhaust port is located on the opposite side of said
engine from said flywheel, and wherein said air cleaner is
formed unitarily with said cooling fan case, the space in said
cooling fan case being divided into two passages by a partition
4438 732
COOLING ARRANGEMENT FOR AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Peter R. Seifert, Sindelfingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 383,187
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 30,
1981, 3121650
Int. a.J FOIP 5/06
VJS, a. 123-41.05 7 Qaims
plate, one of said passages being adapted to guide the flow of
cooling air generated by said cooling fan to the cylinder head
of said engine body in a direction perpendicular to the crank-
shaft axis of said engine, while the other being adapted to guide
said flow of cooling air to the cylinder block of said engine in
a direction substantially parallel to the crank-shaft axis of said
engine.
4,438,734
OVERHEAD CAMSHAFT ENGINE
Yoshimasa Hayashi, Yokosuka, Japan, assignor to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jun. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 384,259
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 5, 1981, 56-86626
Int. a.J FOIL J/04
U.S. a. 123—90.27 9 Qaims
1. An overhead camshaft engine having a camshaft, compris-
ing:
a cylinder head secured to a cylinder block of the engine;
a plurality of cam bracket members disposed on said cylin-
der head for rotatably supporting the camshaft on said
cylinder head;
at least one beam member secured to said plurality of cam
bracket members for securely connecting said cam
bracket members to each other; and
a rocker cover, independent of said beam member and se-
cured to said cylinder block to cover said camshaft, said
plurality of cam bracket members, and said beam member.
1468
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4,438,73S
APPARATUS AND HMING MECHANISM FOR
CONTROLUNG THE VALVE OPERATION OF AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
CorlJn O. Burandt, Plymouth, Minn., assignor to Investment
Rarities, Incorporated, Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,637
Int. a.J FOIL 1/34
VS. a. 123-90.16 4 Qaims
a piston which is biased in one direction and on which a
second end of said lever is pivotally mounted;
a cam which is rotatable in synchronism with a crankshaft of
said engine;
a second lever which abuts said cam at a first end thereof and
which abuts said lever at a second end thereof; and
support means which pivotally supports said second lever at
a location between the first and second ends thereof, said
support means being operative to move an axis about
which said second lever pivots in first and second direc-
tions to increase and decrease the lift of said valve, respec-
tively.
4438 737
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE
VALVE OPERATION OF AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Corliss O. Burandt, Plymouth, Minn., assignor to Investment
Rarities, Incorporated, Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,510
Int. a.J FOIL 1/34
U.S. CI. 123-90.17 17 Claims
1. In combination with an internal combustion engine includ-
ing a crankshaft, a first timing member mounted for rotation
with said crankshaft, a camshaft, a cam on said camshaft, a
second timing member mounted for rotation with said cam-
shaft, an endless member entrained about said first and second
timing members, a third rotatable member about which said
endless member is also entrained, means shifting said third
member toward and away from said second member to angu-
larly displace said second member and said camshaft relative to
said first member and said crankshaft, a rocker arm having a
straight cam follower surface and a curved cam follower sur-
face, and means interconnected with said shifting means for
simultaneously moving said rocker arm to shift said cam fol-
lower surfaces in accordance with the shifting of said third
member toward and away from said second member.
4438 736
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ARRANGEMENT WTTH
AUTOMATIC VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
Seinosuke Hara; Hiromichi Ofuji, and Takahani Gotou, all of
Yokosuka, Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.,
Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,269
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 10, 1981, 56-
32190[U]
Int. a.3 FOIL 1/34
VS. a. 123-90.16 11 Claims
2. Apparatus for operating a valve of an internal combustion
engine having a reciprocable valve member for openmg and
closing a valve port in communication with a combustion
chamber of the engine, the apparatus comprising a rocker arm,
means mounting one end of said rocker arm for pivotal move-
ment about a fixed axis so that the other end of said rocker arm
acts against said valve member, a camshaft, a cam on said
camshaft engageable with said rocker arm, and means for
shifting said camshaft relative to said fixed axis so that said cam
is engageable with various longitudinal portions of said rocker
arm between its said other end and its said one end, said shift-
ing means including bearing means for rotatably supporting
said camshaft and means threadedly engaging said bearing
means for moving said bearing means to effect said shifting of
said camshaft relative to said axis.
47 48
1. In an internal combustion engine,
a valve for controlling a port;
a lever which abuts said valve at a first end thereof;
4438 738
ROCKER ARM AND PROCESS FOR PRODUONG THE
SAME
Hiroyuki Kosuda; Yasuo Kogo, both of SUzuoka; Yasuhiro
Mishima, Aichi, and Masahiro Nakagawa, Shizuoka, all of
Japan, assignors to Toho Beslon Co., Ltd., Tokyo and Toyota
Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha, Aichi, both of, Japan
Filed Nov. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 444,659
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 26, 1981, 56-189762:
Nov. 26, 1981, 56-189763
Int. a.3 FOIL 1/18
VS. a. 123-90J9 22 Claims
1. A rocker arm made from a carbon-fiber reinforced resin
wherein the central axis of a rocker shaft hole through which
the rocker shaft is inserted is referenced as Z-axis, a line paral-
lel to a surface of a valve side of the rocker arm opposite a
surface having a cam contact face and which crosses the Z-axis
at point 0 at a right angle, is referenced as a Y-axis, the line that
is parallel to the surface of the cam side of the rocker arm
opposite the surface having the cam contact face and which
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1469
crosses the Z-axis at point 0 at a right angle is referenced as a
Y'-axis, and the bisector of the angle YOY' is referenced as a
X-axis, and wherein cos^/S, the average of cos^/S of the carbon
fibers present on the Y-axis side with respeact to a X-Z plane
and carbon fibers present on the Y'-axis side with respect to
X-Z plane, is not more than 0.9924, 0 being the angle of orien-
tation with respect to the Y-axis of a first group of fibers as the
fibers are projected onto the X-Y plane and the angle of orien-
spaced relation to said upper wall of said reservoir to prevent
air above the fluid from bemg absorbed by the fluid in opera-
tion.
tation with respect to the Y'-axis of the second group of fibers
as they are projected onto the X-Y' plane, and cos^ o, the
average of cos^ a of the first group of fibers and second group
of fibers is not less than J, a being the angle of orientation with
respect to the Y-axis of the first group of fibers as they are
projected onto Z-Y plane and the angle of orientation with
respect to the Y'-axis of the second group of fibers as they are
projected onto Z-Y' plane.
4,438,739
HYDRAULIC LASH ADJUSTER
Fuminao Arai, Kariya; Hisashi Kodama, Nagoya, and Yoshio
Okabe, Kariya, all of Japan, assignors to Aisin Seiki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,337
Gaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 6, 1980, 55-28481
Int. a.3 FOIL 1/24
VS. a. 123—90.55 5 Qaims
1. An hydraulic lash adjuster comprising a hollow cylindri-
cal body member having a bottom wall at one end thereof, a
hollow plunger member having a bottom wall at one end
thereof and an upper wall at the upper end thereof slidably
disposed within said body member, said plunger and said body
member defining a pressure chamber between the bottom walls
thereof, said plunger member having a reservoir chamber
therein and an aperture in said bottom wall thereof, check
valve means operatively associated with said aperture to per-
mit fluid contained in said reservoir chamber to pass through
said aperture to said pressure chamber while preventing fluid
flow in the opposite direction, clearance means between said
body member and said plunger member and passage means
through said plunger means communicating said clearance
means with said reservoir chamber, spring means located in
said pressure chamber for biasing said plunger member away
from the bottom wall of said body member and a structurally
independent, free floating member disposed on and substan-
tially covering the upper surface of said hydraulic fluid in
4,438 740
VALVE SEAT INSERTS FORINTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINES
Roger H. Slee, Warwick, England, assignor to Brico Engineering
Limited, Coventry, England
Filed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,835
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 23, 1980,
8030688
Int. a.J FOIL 3/06: P02F 1/42
U.S. a. 123-188 S 8 Qaims
1. A reciprocating internal combustion engine comprising:
at least one cylinder,
a valve-controlled inlet for feeding a charge to the cylinder,
a piston slidable within the cylinder for compressing the
charge within the cylinder,
a valve seat insert arranged in said inlet,
an edge formed on said valve seat insert,
means defining an aperture in the insert whose periphery is
formed by said edge,
an annular valve-engaging surface extending around said
means defining an aperture,
a first area of said means defining an aperture lying to one
side of a plane including the axis of said annular valve-
engaging surface, said aperture being bounded by a longer
portion of said edge having the shape of a part of the
circumference of a circle whose centre lies on the axis of
the annular valve-engaging surface,
a second area of said means defmmg an aperture lying on the
other side of said plane, said first area being larger than
said second area,
means bounding said second area including two curved
sections each extending from an end of said longer edge
portion and meeting at a cusp whose distance from the
centre of said circle defining said edge portion is less than
the radius of said circle whereby an incoming charge
passing to said insert in a path generally parallel to the axis
of said valve-engaging surface is deflected from said path
on passage through said means defining an aperture, the
charge, when deflected, travelling in directions having a
velocity profile thereacross which are controlled by the
shape of said two curved sections.
4,438,741
DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING A FLOW IN A HELICAL
TYPE INTAKE PORT
Takeshi Okumura; KiyosU Nakanishi, both of Susono, and
Tokuta Inouc, Mishinia, all of Japan, Ndgnors to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan
FUed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,911
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 7, 1981, 56-51149
Int. a.3 PD2F 1/42
VS. a. 123—188 M 13 OaiM
1. A device for controlling the flow in a helical type mtake
port in an internal combustion engine having a cylinder block
1470
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
containing a cylinder and a cylinder head containng an intake
valve and an exhaust valve for the cylinder, said helical port
being formed in said cylinder head with a helical portion
around said intake valve and a substantially straight inlet por-
tion tangentially contiguous to the helical portion, said device
comprising:
a bypass passage branched off from said inlet portion and
connected to an end portion of said helical portion, said
bypass passage being formed completely within said cylin-
der head;
l2zi^
K/ZA'/Vf^ 5
mg a gas into said combustion chamber during the suction
stroke thereby to generate a swirl of the suction gas to
turn centering around the axis of said cylinder;
the internal combustion engine characterized in that the
outlet end portion of said sub-suction path is constructed
of a pipe member, said pipe member having a first outlet
end which is open and directed toward said suction port
and a second end portion opposite said first outlet end,
said cylinder head further having an outside end face with
a side therein, said pipe member being rotatably press-fit-
ted in an insertion hole in said cylinder head and being
opened in both said suction port and said outside end face
of said cylinder head and which is so shaped that said open
direction of said first outlet end of said pipe member can
be changed when it is routed for adjustment, and in that
a rotationally operating portion for said pipe member is
formed in said second end portion of said pipe member at
said side of said outside end face of said cylinder head.
normally closed valve means arranged in said bypass passage
for controlling the flow area of said bypass passage;
means for detecting the amount of air fed into a cylinder of
the engine to produce a control signal indicating that the
amount of air is increased beyond a predetermined value;
and
actuating measn for actuating said valve means in response
to said control signal to open said valve means when the
amount of air is increased beyond said predetermined
value.
4 438 742
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Yuzuru Namba, and Kenichi Aoyagi, both of Hanuunatsu, Ja-
pan, assignors to Suzuki Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Shizuoka, Japan
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,854
Qajms priority, application Japan, Sep. 29, 1980, 55-135602:
Sep. 29, 1980, 55-135604
Int. aj F02B 31/00; P02M 35/10
U.S. a. 123-308 7 cuina
1. An internal combustion engine comprising:
a combustion chamber defined by a cylinder, a cylinder
head, and a piston fitted in said cylinder;
a main suction path connecting a carburetor with said com-
bustion chamber via a suction port which is formed in said
cylinder head, said combustion chamber having a side and
said suction port having an end portion located at said side
of said combustion chamber, said suction port being
adapted to be opened and closed by a suction valve which
is disposed in said end portion of said suction port at said
side of said combustion chamber; and
a sub-suction path provided separately of said main suction
path and having its outlet end opened into said suction
port immediatley upstream of said suction valve for inject-
4438 743
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Yuzuru Namba, and Kenichi Aoyagi, both of Hanuunatsu, J«.
pan, assignors to Suzuki Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Shizuoka, Japan
FUed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,524
Qaims priority, application Japan, No?. 13, 1980, 55-159716
Int. a.3 F02B 31/00: P02M 35/10
U.S. a. 123-308 satdma
s
1. An internal combustion engine comprising:
A. a combustion chamber defined by a cylinder head, a
cylinder attached to said cylinder head and a piston opera-
bly mounted within said cylinder and adapted to make
both compression strokes and suction strokes; and
B. a carburetor adapted to mix fuel with air to produce an
air-fuel mixture and adapted to provide said air-fuel mix-
ture to the combustion chamber; and
C. a main suction path, through which the air-fuel mixture is
provided to the combustion chamber, terminating in two
suction valves, said suction valves opening into said com-
bustion chamber; and
D. two sub-suction paths provided in the main suction path,
a first sub-suction path terminating in a first nozzle and a
second sub-suction path terminating in a second nozzle,
said first and second nozzles opening into the combustion
chamber in a direction tangential to the axis of the cylin-
der;
wherein the first nozzle and the second nozzle are oriented,
with respect to one another, such that gases passing
through the first nozzle and gases passing through the
second nozzle produce swirls of gases in the combustion
chamber in an identical direction, said swiris centering
around the axis of the cylinder.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1471
4,438 744
IDLING RPM FEEDBACK CONTROL METHOD FOR
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
Shumpei Haiegawa, Niiza, Japan, assignor to Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 10, 1983, Ser. No. 456,866
Clainu priority, application Japan, Jan. 18, 1982, 57-5838
Int. a.3 P02M 23/06
U.S. a. 123—327 2 Qaims
slide valve to control the air flow through the opening to
control the engine speed independently of the angular
1. A method for controlling the quantity of supplementary
air being supplied to an internal combustion engine in a feed-
back manner responsive to the difference between actual en-
gine rpm and desired idling rpm, said engine having an intake
passage, a throttle valve arranged in said intake passage, and an
air passage having one end communicating with said intake
passage at a location downstream of said throttle valve and
another end with the atmosphere, respectively, said supple-
mentary air being supplied to said engine through said air
passage and said intake passage, said method comprising the
steps of: (a) comparing an actual value of engine rpm with a
first predetermined value which is larger than an upper limit of
a desired idling rpm range including said desired idling rpm;
(b) comparing said actual value with a second predetermined
value which is equal to said upper limit of said desired idling
rpm range when it is determined at the step (a) that said actual
value is smaller than said first predetermined value; (c) effect-
ing control of the quantity of supplementary air in feedback
mode when it is determined at the step (b) that said actual value
is smaller than said second predetermined value, (d) determin-
ing whether or not the control of the supplementary air was
effected in feedback mode immediately before the determina-
tion at the step (b) when it is determined at the step (b) that said
actual value is larger than said second predetermined value, (e)
continuing the feedback control of the quantity of supplemen-
tary air when the result of the determination at the step (d) is
affirmative, and (0 effecting control of the quantity of supple-
mentary air in decelerating mode in a predetermined manner
when the result of the determination at the step (d) is negative.
4 438 745
ENGINE IDLE SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
Shunso F. Watanabe, Livonia, Mich., assignor to Ford Motor
Company, Dearborn, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 404,183, Aug. 2, 1982,
abandoned. This application Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,050
Int. a.3 F02D 9/08
U.S. a. 123—339 5 Claims
1. An engine idle speed control device for an automotive
type internal combustion engine having an air throttling body
with an air induction passage therethrough and a disc type
throttle plate mounted for a rotatable movement across the
passage between an essentially closed idle speed position and a
wide open position to control flow of air through the passage,
the device including
an opening through the throttle plate for the passage of air
therethrough, a shuttle type slide valve slidably mounted
for a movement across the opening to variably control the
flow of air therethrough, and power operated means
responsive to engine operating conditions to move the
position of the throttle plate and the air flow around the
throttle plate.
4,438,746
RPM GOVERNOR FOR A FUEL INJECTION PUMP
Max Greiner, Gcrlingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,549
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 22.
1981, 3137520
Int. a.3 P02D 1/04
UJS. a. 123—373 9 Claims
1. An rpm governor of a fuel injection pump for internal
combustion engines having a governor lever which is pivot-
able about a shaft and arranged at one end to actuate a supply
quantity adjusting member of the fuel injection pump, a gover-
nor spring, said governor lever being actuated at another end
counter to an rpm-dependent force by said governor spring
connected thereto by an upper end thereof, a correction lever,
said governor spring further includes a lower end which en-
gages one end portion of said correction lever, a correction
spring, said correction spring including one end that is con-
nected to another end of said correction lever, said correction
spring having another end connected to an arbitrarily adjusting
setting lever, a bearing means provided between opposite ends
of said correction lever, said correction lever being supported
by and pivotable about a fulcrum point formed by said bearing
means, said correction lever being displaceable along its length
with respect to said bearing means thereby changing a length
of said correction lever between said fulcrum point and said
governor spring whereby an rpm force on said governor lever
is changed for adjustment of said supply quantity adjusting
member.
1472
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4,438 747
FUEL INJECTIOn'pUMPING APPARATUS
Robert T. J. Skinner, High Wycombe, and Brian W. Tumber,
Greenford, both of England, assignors to Lucas Industries
Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 379,147
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 28, 1981.
8116307
Int a J P02D 77/00
VS. a. 123-450 „ Qaims
(d) determining on the basis of the sensed engine conditions
whether fuel combustion is talcing place within the engine;
(e) determining a first fuel supply value Tj on the basis of
engine temperature;
(0 changing said first value T2 at a predetermined rate until
fuel combustion within the engine is determined to be
taking place;
(g) opening a fuel injection valve of the engine for a length
of time corresponding to said first value T2; and
(h) after the storter motor is first sensed to be on, repeating
steps (c) through (g) until the crankshaft rotates at a speed
indicative of steady-state operation.
1. A fuel injection pumping apparatus for supplying fuel to
internal combustion engines comprising a rotary distributor
member mounted in a body, plungers carried in a bore in the
distributor member, a cam ring having cam lobes operating as
the distributor member rotates to effect inward movement of
the plungers thereby to cause delivery of fuel by the apparatus,
a low pressure pump for supplying fuel to said bore, said dis-
tributor member being axially movable to determine the
amount of fuel supplied at each delivery stroke of the plungers,
fiuid pressure operable means for varying the axial setting of
the distributor member, said fluid pressure operable means
comprising a resiliently loaded servo valve responsive to a
control pressure, a variable volume chamber defined at least in
part by a surface movable with the distributor member, said
servo valve acting to control the admission of fluid to and the
escape of fluid from said chamber and resilient means for
opposing the force exerted on said surface by the fluid pressure
in said chamber.
4 438 749
FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM FOR COMBUSTION ENGINES
Guusstaaf A. Schwippert, PiJnacker, Netheriands, asiignor to
Nederlandae Centrale Organiaatie Voor Toegepast-Natuur-
wetenschappelUk Onderzoek, The Hague, Netherlands
FUed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,607
Qaims priority, application Netherlanda, Jul. 15, 1980,
8004071
Int. a.J P02D 7/00. P02B 3/00
U.S. a. 123-494 7 ci^^
9 8
4,438,748
METHOD OF SUPPLYINGFUEL TO AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE DURING START-UP
Kenji Ikeura; Hiroshi Yamaguchi; Kunifumi Sawamoto, and
Tatsuo Morita, all of Yokosuka, Japan, assignors to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 353,825
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 4, 1981, 56-29797
Int. a.3 F02N 77/00
U.S. a. 123-491 8 Claims
I. A device for controlling the air-fuel ratio in a fuel supply
system for combustion engines, comprising:
an opto-electronic sensor for measuring the index of light
refraction of the fuel, said opto-electronic sensor includ-
ing a light source, a light conductor positioned at least
partially in contact with the fuel, and a light receiver,
whereby the measurement of the index of light refraction
is based on a critical-angle measurement, and the quantity
of light taken up by the light receiver at least comprises a
variable portion resulting from non-direct irradiation and
dependent on the index of refraction of the fuel;
an electronic circuit responsive to said opto-electronic sen-
sor for generating a control signal in accordance with the
state of aggregation or composition of said fuel; and ^
a temperature detecting element positioned in the fuel sup-
ply conduit and connected to said electronic circuit for
correcting the measured index of refraction and thereby
the control signal in accordance with temperature
changes in the supplied fuel.
ELAPSED TIME AFItR START OF CRANKING (S)
1. A method of supplying fuel to a fuel-injected internal
combustion engine during start-up, comprising the steps of:
(a) sensing whether a starter motor for the engine is on or
off;
(b) sensing engine temperature;
(c) sensing at least one other engine condition;
4438 750
DEVICE FOR FUEL DELIVERY TO INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE WITH VAPORIZATION OF
INJECTED FUEL
Jury B. Sviridov; Alexandr M. Andreev; Vadim V. Kozlovsky;
Alexandr M. Lukin, and Evgeny V. Novikov, all of Leningrad,
U.S.S.R., assignors to Nauchno Proizvodstvennoe Obiediene-
nie Po Toplivnoi Apparature Drigatelei, Leningrad, U.S.S.R.
FUed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,211
Int. a.3 F02M i7/00
VS. a. 123-557 7 Claims
1. A device for fuel delivery to an internal combustion en-
gine with vaporization of injected fuel, comprising an intake
manifold through which the air is sucked into the engine cylin-
der, an exhaust manifold through which exhaust gases are
discharged, a vaporizing element comprising an elongated
member including two end sections, one end section being
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1473
disposed in the exhaust manifold, the second end section being
disposed in and being designed to conform to the walls of the
ducts of the intake manifold receiving said second end section,
said end section including an operating surface extending along
the surface of the intake manifold from the portion of the
second end section closest to the first end section to, at least, a
diametrically opposite portion of said intake manifold, and an
injection nozzle whose orifice is directed onto the diametri-
cally opposite portion of said operating surface of the vaporiz-
ing element as close to the direction of a tangent to the operat-
ing surface as possible, whereby an injected fuel charge moves
circumferentially over the operating surface in the direction of
ite temperature gradient toward the portion of the second end
section closest to the first end section.
4,438,751
HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATING CIRCUIT FOR AN
AUTOMOTIVE IGNITION SYSTEM
Shlnichiro Iwasaki, Troy, Mich., asaignor to Aisin Seiki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 383,607, Jun. 1, 1982, and Ser.
No. 268,889, Jun. 1, 1981, Pat. No. 4,382,430. This application
Apr. 27, 1983, Ser. No. 489,189
Int. a.3 F02P 7/00
U.S. CI. 123-606 14 Claims
— ] I -— — I wnoM
mi{naii wmfomu
SKI
nmme nmmruit.
imumimnum.mj
plug is exceeded and a linearly increasing current is devel-
oped across the electrodes of said spark plug; and
firing angle control means coupled to said controlled high
frequency switching means and said transformer means
for controlling the timing of generation of said high fre-
quency lineariy increasing current between the electrodes
of said spark plug.
4,438,752
VEHICLE IGNITION SYSTEM
William S. H. Cheung, 95B Robinson Rd., Ground Floor, Hong
Kong, Hong Kong
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,490
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 24, 1981.
8122957
Int. a.3 B60R 25/00
U.S. a. 123-630 8 Oaims
_r
t:
1. A vehicle ignition system comprising:
a transformer having a primary winding, secondary winding
and auxiliary winding;
means for alternately connecting said primary winding to a
voltage source whereby a magnetic flux is generated, said
magnetic flux inducing an ignition current in said second-
ary winding;
a security switch means serially connecting a power dissipat-
ing load to said auxiliary winding, said load reducing said
secondary winding current prohibiting an ignition current
of sufficient magnitude for providing ignition to said vehi-
cle;
a comparator for opening said security switch meansin re-
sponse to a unique input code; and
means for supplying a unique code to said comparator
whereby said vehicle ignition current is restored upon
detection of said unique code.
« mm una
amnemvirm
1. A high voltage generating circuit for an automotive igni-
tion system including at least one spark plug, comprising:
a power source;
a current control circuit coupled to said power source for
generating a linearly increasing current signal;
controlled high frequency switching means coupled to said
current control circuit for initiating generation of said
lineariy increasing current signal, said controlled high
frequency switching means having an output in the form
of a high frequency volUge and a high frequency linearly
increasing current;
ignition transformer means adapted to be coupled to said
spark plug and connected to the output of said switching
means for stepping up said high frequency voltage sup-
plied from said switching means for application to said
spark plug such that a breakdown volUge of said spark
4,438,753
COMPOUND BOW
Gary Slmonds, Gainesville, Fla., aasignor to Kidde Recreation
Products, Inc., North Brook, 111.
FUed Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 425,683
Int. a.3 F41B J/00
U.S. a. 124—24 R 10 Claims
1. A compound bow including, a handle section, upper and
lower limbs extending from said handle section and each hav-
ing a tip, pivot means for supporting a displaceable member
mounted adjacent each said limb tip, a cam atuched to each
said pivot means and having an irregulariy configured external
periphery, a cable track in said cam external periphery and
disposed in a single vertical plane, said cam when viewed in
side elevation including an enlarged main body section joined
to an elongated terminal section by a reduced width intermedi-
ate section, a continuous stretch of cable sheaved within at
least a portion of said track, a bowstring atuched to one end of
said cable stretch and a tension cable extendmg from the other
end of said cable stretch, said cable stretch adjacent said bow-
1474
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
stnng engaging said periphery track on said intermediate sec-
tion, said cable stretch adjacent said tension cable engaging
said periphery track on said main body section, portions of said
cam penphery track profiled to yield a specific draw force
when said bowstring is drawn, said cam arcuatcly displaced
substantially 180' as said bowstring is drawn from brace height
less than the determined distance between the pipe and the
saw blade.
4,438,755
WOOD BURNING STOVE HAVING WATER HEATER
Daniel J. Moffett, Route 2, Box 99B, Osceola, Wis. 54020
FUed Jan. 31, 1M3, Ser. No. 446,043
Int a.J F24C Ji/00
U.S. a. 126-34 5 ctoims
to full draw and releasable cable anchor means removably
attachable within a configuration formed by the external pe-
riphery of said intermediate section so that said anchor means
may be forced against said cable stretch in said cam external
penphery track in the intermediate section to adjustably secure
said cable stretch against linear displacement relative said cam.
4 438 754
METHOD FOR SENSING AND REMOTELY
CONTROLLING A TOOL TO WORKPIECE SPATIAL
RELATIONSHIP
Walter C. Nanny; Thomas L. Stewart, and Dean P. Hemphill, all
of Houston, Tex., assignors to Shell OU Company, Houston.
Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 66,366, Aug. 14, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 850,311, Not. 10, 1977
abandoned. This appUcation Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,259
Int. a.3 GOIB 7/14: GOIN 27/72: GOIR 33/12
U.S. a. 125-14 3 ctaims
< 5
1. A solid fuel burning stove comprising
(a) a combustion chamber having openings for introduction
of fuel, intake of air and exhaust of smoke;
(b) a tank adjacent said combustion chamber having the top
thereof open to the atmosphere;
(c) a heat exchange device positioned in said tank adapted to
cause preheating of water circulated therethrough;
(d) a second heat exchange device located in the combustion
chamber adapted to heat said preheated water to an ele-
vated temperature, and
(e) suitable conduit means for carrying a flow of water into
said first heat exchange device, from said first heat ex-
change device to said second heat exchange device and
therefrom to a hot water distribution systentr
4438 756
APPARATUS AND METOOD FOR ACCOMPLISHING
EFnOENT BURNING OF BIOMASS FUEL MATERIALS
Joseph G. Chamberlain, 12350 SW. 124th, Tlgard, Oreg. 97223,
and Paul E. Tlegs, Beaverton, Oreg., assignors to JoMph g!
Chamberlain, Tlgard, Oreg.
FUed Dec. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 449,461
Int. Q\} F24B 7/00
U.S.ai2<^-131 5ctal^
1. A method for cutting and removing concrete containing
embedded reinforcement from about a pipe, said cutting being
effected with a saw blade without cutting the pipe, comprising:
disposing two magnetic field generating probes on opposite
sides of the saw blade, each probe having a north and
south pole face and the saw blade being magnetically
insulated;
generating a magnetic field extending between the north
pole of each probe and the south pole of the other probe;
sensing the massive disturbing effect of the pipe and the
minimal disturbing effect of the reinforcement;
distinguishing between the massive disturbing effect and the
minimal disturbing effect to determine the distance be-
tween the saw blade and the pipe; and
cutting and removing the concrete containing embedded
reinforcement without cutting the pipe by maintaining not
1. A heating apparatus comprising:
a combustion chamber having a fresh air inlet and a grate to
support biomas fuel material thereon;
a passageway having a first end portion originating gener-
ally near the top and a second end portion terminating
generally near the bottom of the combustion chamber;
the first end portion comprising two conduits with the inlet
ends thereof in communication with two openings in the
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1475
combustion chambr and the outlet ends thereof in commu-
nication with inputs to a het exchanger, each conduit
including a catalytic converter positioned to receive hot
combustion product gases produced in the combustion
chamber for transformation to subsUntially pollutant-free
residual exhaust gases that are delivered to the heat ex-
changer to convert for use the heat carried thereby, and
the second end poriion comprising an opening in communi-
cation with a flue and a flow control means in communica-
tion with the outlet of the heat exchanger to vary the
quantity of substantially pollutant-free residual exhaust
gases introduced into the combustion chamber and to
discharge the remaining quantity thereof through the flue.
4438 757
DEVICE FOR REOPENING AN ICE-BOUND WATER
SOURCE
Lyie C. Anderson, Rte. #6, Fergus FalU, Minn. 56537
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,625
Int. a,' F24H 1/20
U.S. a. 126—360 R 7 ngim.
4,438 758
SOLAR HEATING UNIT AND HEAT TRANSFER
APPARATUS
Carroll E. Brekkc, 6130 Monterey Rd., #83, San Joac, Calif.
95138
FUed Jua. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,403
Int. a.' F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126-419 14 Claims
1. A device for reopening an ice-bound water source, com-
prising:
(a) a double-walled hollow tubular member having open top
and bottom ends defining a space between the walls;
(b) at least one tube extending between said double walls
from said top and toward said bottom end for carrying
fluid between said walls;
(c) a first fluid impervious barrier between said walls at the
top thereof, said barrier including upper and lower sur-
faces first and second concentric depressions on its top
surface, said first depression including at least one inlet
aperture sized to receive the upper end of said at least one
tube, said second depression including at least one outlet
passage providing fluid communication through the upper
and lower surfaces of said barrier; and
(d) cover means located atop said barrier and in fluid tight
connection therewith for covering said depressions to
create fluid tight concentric passageways, said cover
means including an inlet in fluid communication with said
first depression and an outlet in fluid communication with
said second depression, whereby warmed fluid can be
circulated from the inlet to the outlet and thereby transfer
heat to the tubular member.
1. A heating unit (10), comprising:
an energy absorber panel (12) having an upper periphery
(14) and a lower periphery (16) and defining an interior
cavity (18);
fluid delivery means (34) for delivering working fluid to the
cavity (18);
a heat exchange unit (44);
means (38) for preventing the delivering of working fluid to
the cavity (18) in response to the working fluid within the
cavity (18) reaching a selected level;
conducting means (42) for conducting a vapor formed iii the
cavity (18) due to vaporizing of the working fluid from a
location in the cavity (18) above the selected level to the
heat exchange unit (44);
a fluid (48) in conuct with an exterior (50) of the heat ex-
change unit (44), the fluid (48) being in a quantity suffi-
cient and the heat exchange unit (44) being of a construc-
tion sufficient to normally condense the vapor into the
liquid working fluid;
fluid conducting means (52) for conducting the condensed
working fluid from the heat exchange unit (44) to the fluid
delivery means (34), the unit (10) being sealed and having
sub-atmospheric pressure therein, the working fluid being
selected to boil at said sub-atmospheric pressure at a tem-
perature in a range from about 27* C. to about 99.5* C;
a space heating unit (74);
vapor directing means (75) for directing vapor formed from
said working fluid to said space heating unit (74) in re-
1476
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
sponse to ambient temperature adjacent said space heating
unit (74) being below a selected value;
means (72) for conducting fluid condensed from said vapor
in said space heating unit (74) to said fluid delivery con-
duit (34);
an auxiliary heat exchange unit (44") having an auxiliary
interior cavity;
an auxiliary fluid delivery conduit (142) for delivering work-
ing fluid to said auxiliary cavity;
an auxiliary valve (144) in the auxiliary fluid delivery con-
duit (142), said auxiliary valve (144) being of a construe-
tion sufficient for preventing the delivery of working fluid
to the auxiliary cavity in response to the working fluid
within the auxiliary cavity reaching an auxiliary selected
level;
auxiliary conducting means (140) for conducting vapor
formed in the auxiliary cavity due to vaporization of the
working fluid from a location in the auxiliary cavity above
the auxiliary selected level to the vapor directing means
(valve in 72);
means (76) for heating the auxiliary heat exchange unit (44")
sufficiently for vaporizing the working fluid within the
auxiliary cavity;
connecting means (62) for connecting the fluid conducting
means (52) with the energy absorber panel (12); and
sensor means (65) for sensing a condition within the cavity
(18) and for controlling the connecting means (62) to
connect the fluid conducting means (52) with the energy
absorber panel (12) in response to said condition indicat-
ing vaporization of working fluid is occurring in said
cavity (18) and for controlling the connecting means (62)
to connect the fluid conducting means (52) with the auxil-
iary heat exchange unit (44") in response to said condition
indicating non-vaporization of working fluid is occurring
in said cavity (18).
11. A heat transfer apparatus (84) which comprises a flexible
first wall member (86a) having first member upper (880), lower
(90a), first end (92o), and second end (94a) portions (88a, 90a,
92a, 94a) a second wall member (86A) having second member
upper (Mb), lower (90b), first end (92b) and second end (94b)
portions (99^, 90b. 92b. 94b), said second wall member (S6b)
being generally parallel to and adjacent to said first wall mem-
ber (86a), said respective first (860) and second (96b) member
upper (88a, 88A), lower (90fl, 90b), first end (92c 92b) and
second end (94o, 94b) portions (88a, 88b. 90a, 90b. 92a. 92b.
94c, 94b) being sealed together to form upper (102), lower
(104), first end (106), and second end (108) peripheries (102,
104, 106, 108) and to define an interior cavity (110) and said
first (86a) and second (S6b) wall members (860, S6b) forming
the major heat exchange portions of said heat transfer appara-
tus (84), said heat transfer apparatus (84) further including a
liquid inlet (112) communicating with said interior cavity (110)
and a vaporized fluid outlet (114) communicating with said
interior cavity (110) adjacent said upper periphery (102), a
structure (118) extending from a respective one (86a or 86b) of
said first (860) and second (86b) wall members (86a, 86b) and
contacting a respective other (86a or 866) thereof, said struc-
ture (118) being of a construction sufficient to provide such
conucting over no more than about 15% of the surface area of
said respective other (86a or 86*) of said first (86a) and second
(86b) wall members (860, 86b) and to allow a fluid in said
interior cavity (110) to flow with substantially no impedence
both from said lower periphery (104) towards said upper pe-
riphery (102) and from said first end periphery (106) towards
said second end periphery (108), said first (86a) and second
(86b) wall members (86a, 86^>) being of sufficient rigidity to not
collapse together when said interior cavity (110) has a pressure
of as little as about one-fifth atmosphere.
4»438,759
HEAT.PIPE TYPE SOLAR WATER HEATER
Soichi Kimima, Nan; Kazuyukj Iwamiira, Ikomii, and
YMuhiko Takeda, Nara, aU of Japan, aasignors to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,516
«2Sl!fM "r**"^*''' •»"«•**<>" J«l«n. Dec. 24, 1980, 55-
186783[U]; Jan. 30. 1981. 56.12940[U]
Int. a.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. a 126-433 5 o,^
1. A heat-pipe type solar water heater comprising:
a main housing;
a plurality of heat pipes arranged longitudinally of said
housing and having vaporizing portions and condensing
portions, said vaporizing portions being positioned inside
said housing and said condensing portions projecting out
from one end of said housing;
a heat exchange Unk mounted to said one end of said hous-
ing for enclosing said condensing portions and
a plurality of heat collector plates arranged inside said hous-
ing in intersecting relation with said heat pipes, each heat
collector plate having an upper portion formed with holes
each provided with an annular flange integral with the
collector plate and a lower portion bent substantially
perpendicular to said upper portion to cover a space be-
tween itself and an adjacent collector plate, the vaporizing
portion of each heat pipe penetrating said collector plates
through corresponding holes and flanges in intimate fixed
and heat conductive contact therewith.
4,438,760
CONCENTRATING REFLECTOR FOR SOLAR
RAmATION OF LOW AERODYNAMIC FRICnON
FORCE AND HIGH AERODYNAMIC BUOYANCY
FORCE
Reinbari Radebold, Quastenhornweg 14a, 1000 Berlin 22, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,062
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct 26.
1980, 730068 7. v»«. *«,
Int a.J F24J 3/02: B64C 3/06
UAa.l26-«8 8 Claims
1. A reflector for concentrating solar radiation, comprising:
a foil having a surface of specular reflection and having a
contour and configuration of a paraboloidal sector, having
accordingly a leading edge and a trailing edge and a plane
of symmetry;
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1477
means disposed above and underneath the foil and providing
a wing-like structure of which the upper surface is trans-
parent, there being a lower surface accordingly complet-
ing, with the upper surface, an aerodynamic, liftproducing
profile;
means including a rudder and rudder support structure and
extending upward from said profile, in said plane of sym-
metry, and contoured so that the rudder support structure
includes a focal area for said paraboloid, the rudder sup-
port structure provided for receiving means for receiving
radiation concentrated by the reflecting foil in said focal
area.
4,438,761
THERAPEUTIC DEVICE FOR A HUMAN BODY
Wayne H. McGowen, 4930 Mill Creek, Dallas, Tex. 75234
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 324,133, Nov. 23, 1981,
abandoned. This application Feb. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 349,451
Int. a.3 A61H 1/02
U.S. a. 128—75 13 Qaims
8. A therapeutic apparatus for the human body comprising:
an elongated planar platform adapted to support the upper
body in a reclining position, said platform being pivotally
mounted on a fulcrum wherein said platform is pivotally
displaceable about an axis transversed to the longitudinal
axis of said platform;
a lower body support mounted to said platform by an elon-
gated frame member, said elongated frame member in-
cluding means for adjusting the mounting of said lower
body support whereby said lower body support may be
adjusted along the longitudinal axis of said platform, said
lower body support including:
first support means mounted on said lower body support
and positioned to extend under each foot;
ankle engagement means mounted on said lower body
support and adapted to surroundingly engage and re-
strain the ankle portion of each foot while disposed in a
first position and adapted to release each foot while
disposed in a second position; and
means for automatically moving said ankle engagement
means from said second position to said first position in
response to a pivotal displacement of said platform.
4,438,762
ORTHOPEDIC HIP nXATION DEVICE
Richard F. Kyle, 825 S. 8th St., Ste. 302, Minneapolis, Minn.
55404, assignor to Richard F. Kyle, MinneapoUs, Minn.
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335^08
Int. a.3 A61F 5/04
VS. a. 128—92 BB 1 Oaim
1. A femur fracture reduction device, comprising:
an elongate shaft having a distal end and a proximal end;
a keeper connected to the proximal end of the shaft;
a guide sleeve including a cylindrical portion having a pas-
sage therethrough for slidably receiving the elongate shaft
therein;
8 flanged head mounted to an end of the guide sleeve;
a threaded end portion mounted on the distal end of the
elongate shaft, the threaded end portion and the keeper
cooperating to retain the elongate shaft inside the passage
in the guide sleeve, the threaded end portion being formed
for threadedly engaging the head of a patient's femur; and
a trochanteric plate including means for permitting atuch-
ment of the plate to the femur and a slot for slidably
receiving the guide sleeve head at a predetermined angle
with respect to the trochanteric plate, such that during
use, the assembled guide sleeve and the elongate shaft
with the threaded end portion mounted thereon are fitted
into an aperture in the patient's femur with the threaded
end portion being threadedly affixed to the head of the
femur to retain the head of the femur in alignment with the
neck of the femur to reduce a fracture thereof and the
elongate shaft being telescopically slidable within the
guide sleeve to accommodate changes which may occur
during healing of the fracture.
4,438,763
AMBULATORY APPARATUS FOR USE IN
COMBINATION WITH AN INTRAVENOUS DELIVERY
SYSTEM
Marshall A. Zablen. 3714 Wbitcspeak Dr., Sherman Oaks, Calif.
91403
Continuation-in>part of Ser. No. 354,503, Mar. 3, 1982. This
appUcation Aug. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 404,505
Int a? A61M 5/14; A45F 5/00
U.S. a. 128—133 11 Claims
1. In combination with an intravenous delivery system, the
combination comprising
(a) a relatively rigid support sheet sized to fit flatly adjacent
the lower central back and middle central back of a human
patient, and having means thereon mounting an upwardly
extending pole member which in turn suspends an intrave-
nous liquid container, said member extending upwardly
proximate the medial extent of said sheet, the sheet having
1478
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
tank may extend through said opening in said case and into
said pocket.
a lower relatively wide portion located adjacent the pa-
tient's lower back and the patient' sides, a narrowed and
upwardly diverging mid-portion extending between up-
wardly diverging lateral edges and located adjacent the
patient's mid and upper back, and terminal left and right
hook shaped portions sized to fit over the patient's shoul- 4 438 76S
(b)'a Wt section adapted to extend adjacent the abdomen of J.ek W,^?« Sl^Ife^T^lf S^SL
the wearer, the beh section having adjustable connection FUed Jm 4 iwi ^r T^'n^^
to lower side extends of the support, the belt section ta/aTJiS /7/Jtf
,.. ^H. UA a 128-303.1 ' locUd^
^ n*tw«*'savc
. ^y
**W>UUI kMHT MuNia
having a mid-portion of a vertical width generally to
cover the patient's abdomen and extending at a level to
provide abdominal support to the patient, after surgery,
and
(c) first flexible strap means connected between the support
sheet and the belt so that the strap means then extends
upwardly between the belt at the front of the wearer
patient, and upper extent of the support, proximate the
shoulders of the wearer patient,
(d) whereby the patient may then move about with his or her
arms free of constraint by the support.
4,438,764
OXYGEN CADDY
Salyatore Eppoiito, 77 Wert Aye., Trenton, N J. 08610
Continuation-in-|Mrt of Ser. No. 255,565, Apr. 20, 1981, Pat. No.
4,383,528. This appUcation Aug. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 413,415
Int. CI.3 A61M WOO
U.S. a. 128-205.22 16 Claims
t»~«««. ««■...■ |.,.« iviT... .^^
1. A target motion sensitive firable device comprising a
surgical laser for firing at a target, user operable switching
means for activating said surgical laser when operated by a
user, motion detector means interconnecting said switching
means and said surgical laser for preventing said switching
means from activating said surgical laser in response to the
operation by a user when a motion is detected in the target.
4 438 766 *
ELECTROSURGICAL GENERATOR
William J. Bowers, Aurora, Colo., assignor to C. R. Bard, Inc..
Murray HiU, N J.
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,204
Int. a.3 A61B 17/39
U.S. a. 128-303.14 15 claim.
100
n-^ n
1. An oxygen caddy which comprises:
(a) a rigid supporting frame adapted to hold and completely
surround an oxygen tank together with its regulator and
valve, said frame including a hinged top portion con-
structed to define a protective cage for a regulator at-
tached to an oxygen tank within said frame;
(b) a fabric case into which said rigid supporting frame is
placed, said case including at least one pocket in which
oxygen delivery means may be stored, and an opening
through said case into said at least one pocket, whereby a
hose connecting an oxygen delivery means to an oxygen
1. In an electrosurgical generator for performing a plurality
of electrosurgical operations having a D.C. power source,
output circuitry for connection to a patient and means control-
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1479
lable by an operating surgeon for selecting one of said electro-
surgical operations, the improvement comprising:
a plurality of switches;
means responsive to said selecting means for connecting said
switches in a bridge configuration;
means responsive to said selecting means for connecting said
bridge across said power source;
means responsive to said selecting means for connecting said
output circuitry across said bridge; and
means responsive to said selecting means for generating
timing signals to control said switches to selectively con-
nect said output circuitry to said power source.
4,438,767
EXFOLIATOR DISC
Priscilla E. Nelson, 11 Brentwood Dr., Peabody, Mass. 01960
Filed Oct. 30, 1978, Ser. No. 956,260
Int. a.3 A61B 77/00
U.S. a. 128—304 2 Claims
needle adapted to engage said needle holder, said needle holder
having separable sections, each of said sections having a face
adapted to abut a face of the other section, means on the abut-
ting faces of said separable sections adapted to conuct said
means on the exterior surface of said needle to hold said needle
in said needle holder, means to retain said separable sections in
a closed relationship with said abutting faces in contact to
clamp said needle in said needle holder, and means on said
needle holder adapted to attach said needle holder to a pa-
tient's neck.
4,438,769
MEDICAL STAPLE DEVICE
Gyde R. Pratt, 5898 U Cumbrc, Somis, Calif. 93066. and Roger
G. Carignan, 219 Mara A?c., Ventura, Calif. 93004
Filed Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368.621
Int. a.} A6ib;7/;«
U.S. a 128-334 R 16 Qalms
1. An exfoliator disc for scraping and removing dead skin
tissues comprising a thin, flat, circular metal blade, opposite
side finger tip engageable grip portions generally centered
relative to the blade, the peripheral edge of the blade including
a continuous, laterially deflected scraping edge projecting
laterally to only one side of said blade, said blade having a
constant thickness and parallel flat surfaces extending to the
deflected edge, said deflected scraping edge being formed
when the blade is sheared from stock metal and having a lateral
dimension in the same direction as the lateral deflection of the
scraping edge that is substantially less than the thickness of the
blade and a minute radial dimension measured along the radius
of the disc, said deflected edge also tapering laterally to a
feather edge with the peripheral side of the deflected edge
forming with the peripheral edge of the blade a cylindrical
surface.
4438 768
EMERGENCY CRICOTHYROIDOTOMY INSTRUMENT
Robert W. Barrickman, R.D. #2, Box 139C, Qarion, Pa. 16214
Filed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,807
Int. a.5 A61F 17/32; A61M 15/08
U.S. a. 128—305.3 11 Claims
1. A cricothyroidotomy instrument comprising an elongated
unitary needle and a needle holder, said needle having a sharp
point on one end and a longitudinal passage extending from the
end of said needle with said sharp point to the opposite end of
said needle, means on a portion of the exterior surface of said
1. A medical staple device for holding, driving and with-
drawing same comprising the combination: an integrally con-
structed staple retaining member having integral, spaced and
opposed portions normally and inherently urged away from
each other and being adapted to receive and retain a medical
staple therebetween, said integral, spaced and opposed por-
tions having force application surfaces to which force may be
applied to overcome the normal and inherent urging away
force to releasably retain a medical staple therebetween; and a
force applying and force reduction member cooperatively
associated with said integrally constructed sUple retaining
member for selective application or removal of discrete forces
upon said force application surfaces.
4,438,770
SKIN INaSING DEVICE
Hans P. O. Unger, VMrtavigen 35, 115 29 Stockholm, and Johan
E. H. Westberg, RfidstuguTigen 14, 181 31 Udingd, both of
Sweden, assignors to Hans Peter Olof Unger aod Johaa Eric
Haydcn Westberg, both of, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 132,409, Mar. 21, 1990, ■bandoned,
which is a continuatioB-iB-part of Ser. No. 945,099, Sep. 22,
1978,. This appUcation Ang. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 406,050
Oaims priority, appUcation Sweden, Mar. 23, 1979, 7902628
Int a.^A61B; 7/i2
U.S. a. 128—637 10 Claims
4. A device for making a skin incision of controlled length
and uniform depth comprising:
(a) a cutter guide having a base surface adapted to be pressed
1480
OmCIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
against the patient's skin, said base surface having a flat
skin-engaging depression of a length for responding to the
controlled length, there being a slot in said base surface
extending across said depression; and
(b) a resiliently biased cutter supported on and guided by
said cutter guide and having a cutting tip projecting
through said slot at said flat depression by a distance
for detection and a second undesired signal, said first
signal being masked by said second signal;
comparison means for receiving said electrical signals from
said first and second sensor means and outputting a com-
parison signal, said comparison signal being the difference
)
■-a
corresponding to said uniform depth, said cutting tip
being in a non-projecting position at both ends of said slot,
said cutter being guided to move parallel to the skin in said
depression from a releasabjy latched retracted position at
one end of said slot under the force of its bias to an ad-
vanced position at the opposite end of said slot, the force
of said base surface against the skin effecting such release.
4 438 771
PASSIVE CONTACTLESS Mb^aTOR FOR DETECTING
CESSATION OF CARDIOPULMONARY
W. Otto Friesen, and Gene D. Block, both of Charlottesville,
Va., assignors to University of Virginia Alumni Patents Foun-
dation, Charlottesville, Va.
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No, 371,933
Int. a.3 A61B 5/08. 5/10
UA a. 128-671 lOQaims
* \.
1. An apparatus for detecting cessation of cardiopulmonary
functioning of a human body, comprising:
a passive conductive means, spaced apart from said body in
which a potential is directly induced by the movement of
said body due to the movement of the charge of said body
when said cardiopulmonary functioning occured;
monitor means responsive to said directly induced potential
to produce a indication of cessation of cardiopulmonary
functions of said body.
4,438,772
DIFFERENTIAL STETHOSCOPE
Martin J. Slavia, Dix Hills, N.Y., assignor to Intech Systems
Corp., Hauppauge, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 366,516
Int a.3 A61B 5/02
U.S. CL 128-715 16 claims
1. A portable stethoscope for listening to internal sounds of
a body comprising:
first and second sensor means for selective application at two
selectively and variably spaced portions of the external
surface of said body and for detecting said internal sounds
and outputting electrical signals in response to said
sounds, said sound signals including a first signal desired
between concurrently received electrical signals from said
first and second sensor means;
output means receiving said comparison signal and output-
ting a sensible signal, said sensible signal corresponding to
said difference comparison signal of said detected sound
signals.
4,438,773
SUBARACHNOID BOLT
Fred Letterio, Philadelphia, Pa., assignor to Pawl L. Sweeney,
Jr., Laurel Springs, N.J.
FUed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,444
Int. a.3 A61B 5/00
U.S. a 128-748 6 Claims
1. A subarachnoid bolt for use in measuring intracranial
pressure including:
a lower bolt half having a top, an enlarged flange and a
coaxially arranged tubular member extending down-
wardly from said flange, said tubular member being
adapted to be inserted into a substantially complemenUry
shaped hole in a patient's skull with said flange overlying
the outer surface of the skull around said hole, said tubular
member having a lowermost end which is radially expand-
able so that the same is adapted to be secured to the pa-
tient's skull;
means on said lower bolt half for allowing the same to be
held to prevent rotation thereof;
an upper bolt half screwed to the top of said lower bolt half,
said upper bolt half having a downwardly extending tubu-
lar element fitted within said tubular member of said lower
bolt half when said upper and lower bolt halves are
screwed together.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1481
4,438,774
aCARETTE CONVEYING DRUMS
Derek H. Dyett, and Rex Harvey, both of High Wycombe,
England, assignors to Molins Limited, London, England
Filed Dec. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,619
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 18, 1980,
8040525
Int. a.3 A24C 5/S2. 5/35
U.S. a. 131-282 8 Claims
comprises introducing a continuous stream of cut or shredded
tobacco into inlet means in the upper portion of a substantially
vertically disposed power, allowing the tobacco so introduced
to fall by gravity from the upper portion of the tower to outlet
means in the lower portion of the tower, momentarily deflect-
ing the falling tobacco by means of a plurality of cooperating,
vertically spaced baffles extending inwardly from opposing
sides of said tower in altenating fashion intermediate the inlet
and outlet means and directing a treating fluid onto the falling
tobacco from a plurality of spraying devices located within the
tower at points intermediate the inlet and outlet means.
4,438.776
OGARETTE FILTER
Charles G. Lamb, Anchorage, and Robert A. Sanford, Prospect,
both of Ky., assignors to Brown A Williamson Tobacco Corpo-
ration, Louisville, Ky.
Filed Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,883
Int. a.3 A24D 3/00. 3/04
U.S. a. 131—336 6 Claims
1. Apparatus for conveying cigarettes by means of one or
more fluted drums comprising a frame including spaced front
and back walls defining between them a suction manifold; a
fluted drum disposed in front of the frame and having ports in
communication with the flutes thereof; a tubular drum-carry-
ing member which extends through an opening in the front
wall of the frame, engages and seals in or around an aperture in
the rear wall of the frame, and has a flange by which it is
secured to the front wall of the frame, the fluted drum being
positioned for rotation around the tubular member; and a drive
shaft which extends axially through the_ tubular member, is
secured to the front end of the drum, is supported by bearings
carried by the tubular member, and carries at its rear end
behind the rear wall of the frame a gear or other means by
which it is driven; said tubular member being provided with a
passage within the thickness of the wall of the tubular member
in the region where it extends through the front wall of the
frame, so that suction may be transmitted to the ports of the
flutes of the drum from the manifold via said passage.
14 It 20 Zt
10
I* 17 t* It
4,438,775
APPARATUS AND PROCESS FOR TREATING TOBACCO
Charles D. Mays, Lewisville; Max A. Wagoner, and Daniel G.
Williard, both of Winston-Salem, all of N.C., assignors to R.
J. Reynolds Tobacco Company, Winston-Salem, N.C.
Filed Jim. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,289
Int. a.J A24B 3/18
U.S. a. 131—300 14 Claims
\\'\ \ ^ -n//,^/
1. A filter for a cigarette comprising:
a permeable filter rod of generally cylindrical configuration
having an upstream end and a mouth end;
means defining a plurality of blind-end channels in said filter
rod, each of said channels being open at one end to the
upstream end of said filter rod and extending therefrom in
generally the longitudinally direction of said filter rod a
predetermined distance less than the length of said filter
rod, said channels being dispersed throughout the cross-
sectional body of said filter rod the closer a channel being
to the perimeter of said filter rod the greater iu predeter-
mined extending distance; and
filter wrapping material extending longitudinally of and
circumscribing said filter rod, said wrapping material
being air permeable to allow ambient ventilating air into
the body of said filter rod and into said blind-end channels.
1. A process for treating cut or shredded tobacco which
4,438,777
FREEZE PROTECTION VALVE WITH IMPROVED
RESETTING CAPABILITY
Fred L. Pirkle, Controls Consultiag Company, R.D. 2, Box 353,
Phoenixville, Pa. 19460
FUed Apr. 29, 1983, Ser. No. 490,153
Int. a.^ E03B 7/12
U.S. a. 137—62 7 Qaims
1. A valve for use in draining a liquid system to prevent the
system from freezing under low ambient temperature condi-
tions comprising:
means providing a valve chamber connectable to the liquid
system, said valve chamber having a drain outlet;
a valve element cooperating with said drain outlet and mov-
able from a closed position in which it closes the drain
outlet to an open position in which the drain outlet is
opened;
means connected to the valve element for urging the valve
element toward its open position;
first latch means for holding the valve element in its closed
^
1482
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
position, said first latch means being releasable to permit
the valve element to move to its open position under the
influence of the urging means;
a temperature sensor including a temperature sensing ele-
ment and means responsive to the temperature sensing
element for releasing the first latch means when the tem-
perature of the sensing element falls below a predeter-
mined level;
means for conducting heat from the liquid system to the
temperature sensing element;
manually operable means, connected to the valve element,
for effecting resetting movement of the valve element
from its open position to its closed position against the
influence of the urging means;
ones of said valve seats and having a stroke less than the
distance between said orifices; and
isfur sioiet OUTPUT i/C\aL
fucieme
(0 sealing means comprising a resilient sleeve positioned
about said ball positioned in said chamber about said
valving element and being in sealing engagement there-
with throughout the stroke thereof
4 438 779
BALL VALVE COUPLING
Alan R. AUread, Jackson, Mich., assignor to Aeroquip Corpora-
«on, Jackson, Mich.
FUed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,433
Int. a.J F16L 37/06
U.S. a 137-614.06 5ci^^
68 70?74^4^
second latch means for holding the valve element in its
closed position following resetting movement thereof
when the temperature of the sensing element is below said
predetermined level, said means responsive to the temper-
ature sensing element also being operative to effect reen-
gagement of said first latch means as the temperature of
the sensing element increases while the valve element is
held in its closed position by said second latch means; and
means responsive to the temperature of the temperature
sensing element for automatically releasing said second
latch means after the temperature of the temperature
sensmg element reaches the level at which the first latch
means becomes operative to hold the valve means in its
closed position.
4,438 778
MAXIMUM PRESSURE SELECTOR DEVICE
WilUam R. Spencer, Springdale, Ohio, assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
FUed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,107
Int. a.3 FI6K 11/06
UA CI. 137-112 15 ci^^
1. A maximum pressure selector device comprising:
(a) a chamber;
(b) a spaced pair of inlet ports communicating with said
chamber;
(c) a spaced pair of circular valve seats disposed between
said inlet ports;
(d) an outlet port disposed between said valve seats and
comprising a pair of spaced orifices communicating with
said chamber, at least one of said orifices being of a prede-
termined cross-sectional area for allowing a predeter-
mined maximum fluid flow rate therethrough for reducing
surge flow between said inlet ports;
(e) a ball-shaped valving element disposed between said
valve seats and being pressure actuaUble toward alternate
1. A coupling comprising, in combination, a first annular
body having a passage defined therein having a longitudinal
axis, said body having a conduit connection end for communi-
catmg with conduit means and a coupling end. said passage
communicating with said conduit connection and coupling
ends, a ball valve rototably mounted within said passage, said
ball valve including a spherical exterior surface and a diametri-
cal bore extending through said valve, a valve actuator at-
tached to said ball valve extending through said body having a
manually operated handle exterioriy accessible of said body for
selectively rotating said ball valve between an open position
wherein said bore is in alignment with said passage axis and a
closed position wherein said bore is tranversely disposed to
said passage axis, an annular valve seat within said passage
concentric to said passage axis sealingly engaging said ball
valve exterior surface, first coupling attachment means defined
upon said first body coupling end, a second annular body
having a passage defined therein having a longitudinal axis,
said second body having a conduit connection end for commu-
nicating with conduit means and a coupling end, said second
body passage communicating with said second body conduit
connection and coupling ends, second coupling attachment
means defined upon said second body coupling end comple-
menUry in configuration to said first coupling attachment
means and connectoble thereto to a fully coupled condition to
align said passages of said first and second bodies, first locking
means defined upon said first body operatively connected to
said valve actuator for selective movement between first and
March 27. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1483
second positions upon rotation of said ball valve between said
open and closed positions, respectively, and second locking
means defined on said second body alignable with and receiv-
ing said first locking means upon said first and second coupling
attachment means being in the fully coupled condition permit-
ting said first locking means to be shifted from said second
position to said first position to permit said ball valve to be
rotated from said closed position to said open position only
upon said first and second bodies being fully coupled, said first
body coupling end including a flat sealing surface perpendicu-
lariy disposed to the axis of said first body passage, said spheri-
cal valve exterior surface being substantially tangential to said
sealing surface when said ball valve is in said closed position to
minimize the volume of voids within said first body passage
adjacent said sealing surface.
4438 780
CLUTCH-CLUTCH-BRAJCE STEERING MECHANISM
FOR TRACTORS
Probir K. Chattcrjea, Mt. Prospect, lU., auignor to Dresser
Industries, Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 176,815, Aug. 11, 1980, Pat. No. 4,372,408,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 951,690, Oct. 16, 1978,
abandoned. This appUcation Oct. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 436,159
Int. a.' F15B 13/06
U.S. a. 137-625.6 2 Qaims
1. Consolidated valving assembly means provided with high
pressure, low pressure, and signal output conduits and control-
lably connecting the high and low pressure conduits to supply
incrementally modulated pressure signals in ranges therebe-
tween and unmodulated signals to the signal output conduits,
said assembly means having:
a common bore (190) hydraulically disposed for communi-
cating with said conduits;
independently slidable, multi positionable hydropotentiome-
ter (44) and satisfied-metering spools (226) in the common
bore for establishing therein signal and modulated pres-
sures, respectively;
said hydropotentiometer spool having a 1st position consti-
tuting its home position and providing unmodulated pres-
sure as an unmodulated 1st signal, a 2d position constitut-
ing a moved position and providing unmodulated pressure
as a 2d signal which is unmodulatable unless the spool is
further moved, and a 3d position constituting a further
moved, braking range threshold, position and providing
modulated pressure as a signal which is further modulata-
ble to a 3d signal with additional spool movement to
introduce the braking range when the 3d signal is inaugu-
rated, all for collectively affording a series of 1st, 2d and
3d signals respectively supplied by the assembly means to
the signal output conduits thereof;
first biasing means (324) associated with said bore along the
line of travel of said hydropotentiometer spool, and being
pre-loaded and having an end engaged by the just-said
spool in said 1st position for unaugmented resistance to the
spool to prevent it from discontinuing the 1st signal;
second biasing means (322) associated with said bore along
the line of travel of said hydropotentiometer spool, and
being pre-loaded and having an end engageable by the
spool in a 2d position in a clutching range, for substan-
tially augmented resisunce to the spool to prevent it from
modulating the 2d signal; and
third biasing means (328) associated with said bore along the
line of travel of said hydropotentiometer spool, and being
pre-loaded and having an end engageable by the spool in
a 3d position at threshhold to a braking range, for fully
augmented resisUnce to the spool to prevent it from inau-
gurating the 3d signal.
4,438 781
SPIRALLY WOUNDFLOW CONTROL VALVE
David L. Brenholt, Dundas, Minn., assignor to Donaldson Com-
pany, Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,688
Int. a? F16K 3/00, 37/00
U.S. a 137-625 J8 12 Claims
1. A fluid flow control valve, comprising:
(a) a conduit member having an orifice formed there-
through, through which orifice a fluid can be conducted;
(b) a first axis extending through said orifice and being
oriented substantially aligned with an intended direction
of fluid conduction;
(c) an elongated control element having a portion thereof
fixed at said first axis, an axial edge, and a remote end,
said element being coiled about said first axis with said
remote end disposed for revolution about said first axis
selectively in opposite directions wherein, as said remote
end is revolved in a first direction, said element is wound
tightly radially inwardly toward said first axis so that said
axial edge can form a substantially continuous surface
occluding said orifice when a sufficient measure of com-
pression is achieved; and
(d) means for imparting said selective revolving motion to
said remote end.
4 438 782
ISOLATION STEAM VALVE WITH ATMOSPHERIC
VENT AND RELIEF CAPABILTTY
Joseph E. KeUy, Vienna, Va., assignor to The United States of
America u represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 153,123, May 27, 1980,
abandoned. This application Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,919
Int. a.3 F17D 1/06
U.S. a. 137-628 12 claims
1. An isolation steam valve arrangement for use between a
1484
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
steam turbine exhaust and another piece of steam-using^ equip-
ment, comprising;
a casing having an inlet and plural outlets;
said inlet adapted to be connected to the discharge side of
the steam turbine;
one of the outlets adapted to be connected to another piece
of steam-using equipment, and another of the outlet
adapted to communicate to the atmosphere;
a main valve between the inlet and one outlet;
means for selectively controlling the main valve from fully
open to fully closed for selectively passing turbine exhaust
steam therethrough;
a normally spring-force closed relief valve between the inlet
and said another outlet adapted to open in response to
steam pressure at the inlet above a predetermined amount;
a normally spnng-force closed vent valve between the inlet
and another outlet; and
means operatively interconnecting the vent valve and main
valve;
whereby, when the main valve is closed, the vent valve is
positively open, thereby esublishing open communication
between the inlet and another outlet for allowing continu-
ous steam venting to the atmosphere.
where a portion of said cylindrical outer component
projects outside of said hole,
said outer cylindrical component being welded to the outer
surface of the wall of said pipe at an intermediate level
where it projects outwardly from said hole,
a cylindrical inner component having a blind hole, and
having an outside screw thread sized to said outer cylin-
drical component inside screw thread, said inner compo-
nent being screwed into the inside screw thread of the
outer component to the extent such that its outside end is
radially flush with the outside end of said outer cylindrical
component, and
a circumferential weld across the flush outside ends of the
outer component and the inner component for fixedly
joining the components, '
4,438 783
PROTECTIVE DEVICE FOR PIPES
WHWed DreyfiMs, Dorfstrasse 52, 0-3111 Eimke, Fed. Rep. of
Germany; Thomas E. Remp, Jr., 5555 Del Monte Dr. T-Z,
Houaton, Tex. 77056, and Kurt Muller, Eicklingen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to WilfHed Dreyfuss, Fed. Rep. of
Germany and Thomas E. Remp, Houston, Tex.
Filed Apr. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 366,981
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Aor 9
1981, 3114368; Apr. 9, 1981, 3114264 ' *
Int. a.J F16L 55/24
UA a. 138-89 j4cuun,8
27 36
1. A protective device for a longitudinal pipe having an
interior comprising thread guards at the ends of the pipe, a rust
guard and a moisture indicator, said rust guard being a dessi-
cant substantially evenly distributed throughout said interior of
said longitudinal pipe such that corrosion of said interior is
prevented.
4438 784
STOPPER FOR A SOURCE FOR AN X-RAY INSPECTION
HOLE IN A PIPE OR OTHER APPARATUS
Jacques Bobichon, Verriercs ie Buisson, and Pierre-Loup Leroy,
Fliaes Lez Mortagne, both of France, assignors to Stein Indus-
trie, Velizy-Villacoublay, France
FUed Jun. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 384,374
Claims priority, application France, Jun. 10, 1981, 81 11367
Int. a.3 F16L 55/10
U.S. a. 138-92 2 Claims
1. A stopper assembly for permitting inspection internally of
a pipe or other apparatus by an X-ray inspection probe having
access thereto, said stopper assembly comprising, in combina-
tion:
a hole within the wall of said pipe being threaded over at
least a portion of its length from the outside of the pipe,
a cylindrical outer component having an external screw
thread and being sized to and threadably engaging said
threaded hole within said wall of said pipe,
said cylindrical outer component including an inside screw
thread,
and said outer cylindrical component being threaded to said
threaded hole within said wall of said pipe to an extent
and wherein said blind hole is equipped with means for
allowing the inner component to be unscrewed from the
outer component after the weld joining the outside ends of
said components is rapidly ground off;
whereby, a high strength, effectively sealed stopper assem-
bly is provided, and wherein the inner component may be
repeatedly screwed back into the outer cylindrical com-
ponent, fixed with its end radially flush with the end of the
outer component and fixed by another weld across the
flush outside ends of said componenu and which weld
also can be readily ground off to permit repetitive access
internally of the pipe by said X-ray inspection probe.
4,438,785
PIPE ENCLOSURE
John D. Morrison, 12233 Lake Erie Rd. SE., Calgary, Alberta,
Canada T2J 2Z3, and Robert McCheyoe, 8307 - 161 St..
Edmonton, Alberta, Canada
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,560
Claims priority, application Canada, Jul. 10, 1980, 355875
Int. a.3 F16L 3/00
U.S. a. 138-103 goaim
1. A pipe enclosure for use above ground comprising:
(a) an elongated casing, including
(i) a generally C-shaped. upwardly opening base defined
by a bottom wall, upwardly and outwardly extending
side walls, and outwardly extending flanges having
downwardly turned edges on upper free ends of said
side walls, and
(ii) a generally C-shaped. downwardly opening cover
defined by a top wall, outwardly and downwardly
extending side walls, and outwardly extending flanges
having downwardly turned edges on lower free ends of
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1483
said side walls for engaging the correspondingly shaped
flanges on said base to define a closed casing;
(b) means for releasably interconnecting said base and cover;
(c) insulation on the interior of said base and said cover, and
(d) first support means having a U-shaped cross section and
supported by the insulation in said base and spaced from
said base for supporting at least one pipe in said casing and
spaced from said casing by said insulation.
4438 786
KNIFE CONSTRUCTION FOR A DOUBLE-LIFT
OPEN-SHED JACQUARD LOOM
Heinz Konigs, Krefeld; Hubert Kremer, Grefrath, and Hans-
Theo Pieters, Krefeld-HUls, aU of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Maschinenfabrik Carl Zangs Aktien^sellschaft,
Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 343,679
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 20.
1981,3106305
Int. a.' D03C 3/00. 3/08
U.S. a. 139-59 19 Claim
zone separated from adjacent card zones by non-perforated
transverse zones, the improved mechanism being cooperative
with a modified loom wherein the number of feeler needles is
reduced to one half the number of needles for which the sUn-
dard perforation pattern is designed and wherein the pattern of
each card is advanced in two successive strokes and read in
two successive half-zones by the reduced number of feeler
needles, the advancing mechanism for driving the drum com-
prising:
1. In a knife construction for a double-lift open shed Jac-
quard loom having two knives movable in opposite directions
passing each other, the knives include a carrier member and at
least one hook member fastened thereto, the hook member
having spaced control hooks thereon, and a movable lifter
member movable in said opposite directions having two main
noses engageable with the control hooks of the hook member,
the control hook and the main noses being inclined from the
direction of movement of the lifter member to permit passage
of the lifter member intermediate the control hooks of the hook
member, the improvement wherein
the hook member is a stamping supported on and clamped to
said carrier member and defines a longitudinal slot to
receive the carrier member.
4438 787
DEVICE FOR SELECTING THE HOOKS OF A WEAVING
MECHANISM BY SUCCESSIVELY FEELING THE TWO
HALVES OF A CARD OF THE JACQUARD TYPE
Ulrich Matschler, 41A rue Pasteur, 69300 Caluire, France
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,733
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 14, 1981, 81 07650
Int. a.J D03C 3/34. 15/04
U.S. a. 139—329 4 Qaims
1. An improved mechanism for intermittently advancing an
endless Jacquard paper on a drum to pass beneath feeler nee-
dles controlling a loom and biased to read perforation patterns
in the paper by passing through the perforations, the paper
being divided longitudinally into transverse extending succes-
sive zones each constituting a standard perforated pattern card
(a) first means connected to be driven continuously in syn-
chronism with the loom; and
(b) second means coupled to drive the drum and to be driven
by said first means to route intermittently and alternately
through two different angular motions respectively dis-
placing the paper through two different successive strokes
to bring the feeler needles into registry with the two half
zones of each card.
4,438,788
PAPERMAKERS BELT FORMED FROM WARP YARNS
OF NON-aRCULAR CROSS SECTION
William J. Harwood, WaycroM, Ga., auignor to Scapa Inc.,
Waycross, Ga.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 192,216, Sep. 30, 1980. This
appUcation Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,047
Int. a? D03D 15/00; D21F 7/10. 1/12
U.S. a. 139-383 A 13 Claims
1. A papermakers fabric comprising:
a first layer defined by a first plurality of weft yams;
a second layer defined by a second plurality of weft yams;
a plurality of stuffer picks; and
a plurality of warp yams of non-circular cross section inter-
woven with said weft yams to define a first surface on said
first layer, a second surface on said second layer, and a
plurality of stuffer pick receiving sheds interposed be-
tween said first and second layers, each shed for receiving
at least one of said stuffer picks, a select number of said
shed defining warp yams extending out of a warp end of
said fabric and being symmetrically rewoven into said
fabric to produce a mirror image of itself when viewed
with respect to the plane defined by said stuffer picks and
to define a number of seam loops, one seam loop being
formed by at least one of a preselected number of adjacent
shed defining warp yams.
1486
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4438 789
WOVEN PIN SEAM IN FABRIC AND METHOD
DomW G. MacBeu, Ottawa, Canada, aasignor to JWI Ltd..
Kaoata, Canada
Cootinnation of Ser. No. 270,341, Jun. 4, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 214,738, Dec. 9, 1980
abandoned. Thii application Jun. 8, 1983, Ser. No. 502,132
Int CI.} D03D 3/04
US. a. 139-383 A ,7 cui„„
pass openings a guide channel for the weft threads in-
serted in a predetermined weft insertion direction;
said guide channel being essentially continuous in the weft
insertion direction;
said thread outlet openings of said lamellae elements, when
m their operative position, being sealed and said guide
channel also being continuously closed in radial direction-
and '
stop means operatively associated with said elastically struc-
tured lamellae elements in order to close said thread outlet
openmgs during interleaving of both of said lamellae
combs.
1. A woven all-synthetic monofilament dryer fabric for use
m a paper-making machine, said fabric being constituted by a
belt woven with warp and weft strands with said warp strands
extending in the machine direction, there being at least two
weft layers and said warp strands being crimped relative to
said weft strands in a non-symmetrical pattern, said belt being
interconnected at opposed ends by a woven single pintle pin
seam formed by reversely turned warp strands to constitute an
endless belt, said warp strands in at least re-woven end portions
of said belt being ftattened strands with the original crimp
configuration being changed in reversely turned portions of
said reversely turned warp strands.
4438 790
APPARATUS FOR GUIDING A FLUID MEDIUM
DRIVEN WEFT THREAD IN THE SHED OF A LOOM
AND USE OF THE APPARATUS AT A MULTIPLE
LONGITUDINAL TRAVERSING SHED LOOM
Alois Steiner, Rieden/SG, Switzerland, assignor to Ruti Ma-
chinery Works Ltd., Ruti, Switzerland
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,934
Claims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Mar. 27, 1980.
2440/80 '
Int. C\? D03D 47/30
U.S. a. 139-435 JO Claims
1. An apparatus for guiding a weft thread within the shed of
a loom and which is driven by a ftowing fluid medium, com-
prising:
two lamellae combs which are capable of dipping into and
out of warp threads;
each of said lamellae combs comprising elastically struc-
tured lamellae elemenU;
each lamella element having a throughpass opening for
guidmg an inserted weft thread and a thread outlet open-
ing;
said lamellae elements when assuming an operative position
where they are immersed into the shed being interleaved
with one anothr and forming by means of their through-
4 438 791
WEFT THREAD-SELECn'oN APPARATUS FOR A
WEAVING MACHINE
Gerhard Oesterie, Koblach, Austria; Rudolf Jaeger, Frasnacht.
Switzerland; Wilhelm Hutter, Roggwil, Switzerland, and
Elmar Zanol, Arbon, Switzerland, assignors to Aktiengesell-
schaft Adolph Saurer AG, Arbon, Switzerland
FUed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,569
itS**"" Pi^oi^ty. application Switzerland, Jun. 9, 1981,
U.S. a. 139—453
Int. a.3 D03D 47/38
lOQaims
1. A weft thread-selection apparatus for a weaving machine
comprising:
a weft thread-infeed device operatively related to each weft
thread to be inserted for bringing each such weft thread,
prior to its insertion into a shed of the weaving machine,
out of a preparatory position into a thread transfer posi-
tion serving for the thread transfer to a weft thread-inser-
tion device;
said weft thread-infeed device comprising weft thread-
infeed rods;
a to-and-fro driven entrainment device with which there can
be operatively connected the weft thread-infeed device by
means of an electromagnetic control;
said entrainment device comprising an oscillatable support
element which can be oscillated in cycle with a predeter-
mined weft thread insertion frequency of the weaving
machine;
said support element having a free end;
said free end of the support element carrying at least a first
part of electromagnetic devices corresponding in number
to the number of weft thread-infeed rods;
said support element having a further end;
a shaft at which there is rotatably mounted said further end
of said support element;
oscillatable arm members;
said shaft simultaneously forming a pivot point for said
oscillatable arm members;
spring means for retaining each of said oscillatable arm
members in a preparatory position;
said oscillatable arm members each being hingedly con-
nected at its fre« end with a related one of the weft thread-
infeed rod; and
each of said oscillatoble arm members carrying a further part
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1487
of the electromagnetic devices intended to be coopera-
tively coupled with a predetermined one of the first part
of the electromagnetic devices.
4,438,792
PRESSURE RELIEF ALERT
George A. Timberlake, Jr., Macungie, Pa., assignor to Air Prod-
ucts and Chemicals, Inc., Allentown, Pa.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,754
Int. a.J B65B 3/04: B67C 5/32
UA a 141-95 13aaims
7. A pressure relief alert apparatus comprising:
(a) a tank containing a stored fluid at a pressure higher than
atmospheric; (b) a pressure relief pipe having an inlet in
communication with said stored fluid in said tank and an
outlet; (c) means for discharging said stored fluid at a
predetermined pressure through said pressure relief pipe;
(d) a pressurized tube containing a control fluid in combi-
nation with a pressurized break-away tube assembly and a
means for detachably connecting said pressurized tube to
the break-away tube assembly wherein said pressurized
tube is held rigidly immovable at a position in close prox-
imity to said connecting means and said pressurized break-
away tube assembly, and wherein said break-away tube
assembly further includes a break-away tube open only at
an end communicating with said connecting means, with a
scored circumference located at a position exterior to said
connecting means, but in close proximity thereto, when
said pressurized break -away tube assembly is connected to
said pressurized line tube; (e) a force plate attached to said
break-away tube assembly and located over said relief
pipe outlet, said force plate adapted to move in response to
a release of fluid through said pipe; whereby a movement
of said force plate in response to fluid release through said
relief pipe breaks said break-away tube and releases said
control fluid; and (0 means for detecting said release of
said control fluid.
radially movable cam elements in said housing engaging the
undersides of said latches;
means operatively connecting said cam elements and said
armature;
in said first position of said armature said cam elements being
4,438,793
AERIAL REFUEUNG BOOM NOZZLE
Albert W. Brown, Newport Beach, Calif., assignor to Interna*
tional Telephone A Telegraph Corp., New York, N.Y.
FUed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 259,838
Int. a? B65B 3/04
MS. a. 141—382 10 Qairas
1. A nozzle for an aerial refueling boom comprising:
a housing having a fluid flow passage therethrough, said
housing containing a solenoid including a coil and an
armature movable parallel to the longitudinal axis of said
housing between first and second positions;
a pair of latches mounted in recesses on opposite sides of said
housing outside of said flow passage each pivotable about
an axis transverse to said longitudinal axis;
spring means normally biasing said latches inwardly into
said recesses into a release position;
located in a retracted position allowing said latches to
assume their release position; and
in said second position of said armature said cam elements
being iorced outwardly via said connecting means to an
extended position pushing said latches outwardly from
said recesses into a locking position.
4,438 794
BARK TOOL AND CONNECTION
Aaron R. Carpenter, Rte. One, Box 238, Chatom, Ala. 36518,
and Robert R. Bagby, Rte. Two, Box 504-M, PeU Qty, Ala.
35125
ContiBuation-in>part of Ser. No. 56,319, Jul. 23, 1979,
abandoned. This application Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 207,477
Int a.J B27L 1/00
U.S. a. 144-208 E 1 Claim
1. Apparatus for removal of bark from logs, comprising: a
debarker rotor; at least one shaft attached to said rotor and
mounted for rotation about the longitudinal axis of said shaft; a
bark tool attached to said shaft, said bark tool having a con-
necting end portion and a tip portion at opposite ends thereof,
said connecting end portion being located adjacent said shaft
and being not substantially narrower than the greatest depth of
the bark tool; said tip portion having means for debarking a log
and being located at the outer end of said bark tool for the
purpose of making contact with bark to be removed from a log;
said bark tool being in the form of a crescent shaped plate of
rigid metal, approximately one-quarter circle in relative con-
figuration; said debarker rotor having moment inducing means
for applying force through said shaft to the tip portion of said
bark tool; said bark tool having a structural shape with moment
resisting capacity increasing substantially lineariy from the tip
end to the connecting end of said bark tool, wherein structural
capacity in resisting moment induced stresses is defined by the
formula
cr=(M/S)
where o- is stress, M is the moment and S is the section modu-
lus, which for recUngular section is determined by the formula
1488
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
AlARCH 27, 1984
S=(bd2/6)
where b is the thickness of the member transverse to the plane
of bending and d is the depth of the member in the plane of
bending; said shaft having a shaft foot production connected
thereto, said shaft foot portion being located adjacent the
connecting end of said bark tool, said connecting end being
connected to said shaft foot by at least one stud connector
whose shear reaction in the plane of the bark tool provides a
moment resisting capacity equal to or greater than that of the
connecting end of said bark tool, said shaft foot being substan-
tially thicker than the bark tool thickness and elongated in the
direction of the bark tool, said stud connector being arranged
along the elongated portion of the shaft foot and fixed therein,
said shaft foot being connected to said shaft by connecting
means having sufficient, moment resisting capacity to transmit
the moment from the debarker rotor to the bark tool.
4,438,795
FLEXIBLE PLATEN PLANER
Iriing L. Plough, Snohomish, Wash., assignor to Kimwood Cor-
poration, Eugene, Oreg.
Filed Apr. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 370,689
Int. a.3 B27C 1/08
U.S. a 144-373 ,8 Qaims
and said stationary platen to accommodate variation in the
thickness of the workpiece; and
after the resilient bias has been exerted, effecting surface
treatment of the workpiece.
4438 796
PNEUMATIC TIRE FOR OFF-ROAD VEHICLES
Masaru Abe, Sayama; Isao Miyoshi, Kodaira; Toshiro Tezuka,
Higashi-Murayama, and Toshio Yoshimoto, Akigawa, all of
Japan, assignors to Bridgestone Tire Company Limited, To-
kyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 781,029, Mar. 24, 1977, abandoned.
This application Aug. 1, 1979, Ser. No. 62,868
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 26, 1976, 51-33266
Int. C\? B60C 9/04. 9/20
U.S. a 152-353 R 14 Claim.
1
T— rt?<
1. An apparatus for holding a workpiece against a fixed
platen during surface treatment of one side thereof by a surface
treatment element spaced a first predetermined distance from
said fixed platen comprising:
an elongated body having a workpiece contact surface ex-
tending parallel to said fixed platen and adjacent said
surface treatment element;
means connected to one end portion of said elongated body
remote from said surface treatment element for locating
the workpiece contact surface a second predetermined
distance from said fixed platen;
said elongated body having the other end thereof adjacent
said surface treatment element free fiexing for movement
relative to said one end;
biasing means connected to said free flexing end for applying
pressure thereto to bias said free flexing end against the
workpiece to maintain contact between the workpiece
and said fixed platen to accommodate variations in the
thickness of the workpiece; and
means for driving the workpiece from said one end portion
toward said free flexing end of said elongated body to
effect surface treatment thereof
18. A method for holding one side of a downstream-moving
workpiece in constant conUct with a stationary platen during
surface treatment of the other side of the workpiece, compris-
ing the steps of:
supporting one end of a semi-rigid elongated surface mem-
ber in a fixed position a predetermined distance from said
stationary platen;
providing a free flexing cantilevered end portion of said
surface member, disposed downstream of said one end;
exerting a resilient bias against said cantilevered end portion
to maintain contact between the one side of the workpiece
lb n
1. A pneumatic tire for off-road vehicles comprising a rein-
forcing element composed of helically formed filaments and
having an excellent side-cut resistant property, comprising a
toroidal-shaped carcass body composed of a plurality of rub-
berized ply layers superimposed one upon the other and each
containing organic fiber cords embedded therein, a side por-
tion formed of a rubber coating made integral with both said
carcass body and a tread portion, and a side portion reinforcing
layer arranged in said side portion and for preventing cuts
subjected to the surface of said side portion, said side portion
reinforcing layer being composed of at least one rubberized
layer containing a reinforcing element embedded therein and
formed of 3 to 30 helically formed filaments, each filament ;
having a diameter 4> of 0.13 to 0.5 mm and made of material
having a tensile breaking strength of at least 140 kg/mm^, said
reinforcing element having an elongation at tensile breaking
strength which is 0.15 to 1.7 times that of organic cord of the
ply of the carcass body, and said rubberized layer as a whole
being extensible, wherein said reinforcing element has a ratio 8
defined by
6 =
{S-(PArd- 4»)}
= 0.11 to 0.7
where S is a pitch in mm between midlines of the two adjacent
reinforcing elements; d is an effective diameter in mm of the
reinforcing element defined by
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1489
1.25 X
NT^
x<^
where N is the number of filaments for constituting the rein-
forcing element, <> is the diameter of a helically formed fila-
ment and D is the average diameter of an outer contour pro-
jected on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction of one
pitch of a filament wherein, D=Dm«w+Dmm/2 is in the range
of2(|>-20<|>.
2. A pneumatic tire for off-road vehicles comprising a rein-
forcing element composed of helically formed filaments and
having an excellent side-cut resistant property, comprising a
toroidal-shaped carcass body composed of a plurality of rub-
berized ply layers superimposed one upon the other and each
containing organic fiber cords embedded therein, a side por-
tion formed of a rubber coating made integral with both said
carcass body and a tread portion, and a side portion reinforcing
layer arranged in said side portion and for preventing cuts
subjected to the surface of said side portion, said side portion
reinforcing layer being composed of at least one rubberized
layer containing a reinforcing element embedded therein and
formed of a helically formed filament bundle of 3 to 30 heli-
cally formed filaments assembled together without twisting at
random, each filament having a diameter <j> of 0.13 to 0.5 mm
and each made of material having a tensile breaking strength of
at least 140 kg/mm^, said reinforcing element having an elon-
gation at tensile breaking strength which is 0.15 to 1.7 times
that of organic cord of the ply of the carcass body, said rein-
forcing element has a ratio 6 defined by
8 =
{S - (Z) -I- </ - <^)}
5
0.11 to 0.7
where S is a pitch in mm between midlines of the two adjacent
reinforcing elements; d is an effective diameter in mm of the
reinforcing element defined by
1.25 X
NT^
><<>
where N is the number of filaments for constituting the rein-
forcing element, <> is the diameter of a helically formed fila-
ment and D is the average diameter of an outer contour pro-
jected on a plane perpendicular to the axial direction of one
pitch of a filament wherein, D=Dm<w-l-Dm/>i/2 is in the range
of 24>-20<^ and said rubberized layer as a whole being extensi-
ble, said reinforcing layer extending from the crown portion of
the tire to a region above the bead region of the tire at a posi-
tion above the point at which the upper edge of a rim on which
the tire is mounted meets the tire.
4,438,797
SEAL FOR A MULTIPIECE WHEEL ASSEMBLY
David S. Suckow, Decatur, 111., assignor to Caterpillar Tractor
Co., Peoria, 111.
PCr No. PCr/US82/00335, § 371 Date Mar. 19, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 19, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO83/03228, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 29, 1983
PCT FUcd Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 375,113
Int a.3 B60B 25/1%
U.S. a. 152—410 6 Claims
1. A multiple-piece tire rim assembly (16) for mounting and
sealing a tubeless tire (10), said tire rim assembly (16) compris-
ing:
an annular rim base (18) having an axial center line (19) and
an outer periphery (30) defining first and second grooves
(32,34), said first groove (32) located in an axially outer
portion of the outer periphery (30) of the rim base (18) and
having a depth greater than said second groove (34), said
second groove (34) defining a bottom surface and being
located axially inward of said first groove (32), said bot-
tom surface having a uniform diameter and opening into
an inner side of said first groove (32);
an annular bead seat member (24) disposed radially outside
said rim base (18) and having an inner periphery (38)
radially adjacent said outer periphery (30) of said rim base
(18), said inner periphery (38) defining an inner surface
(40), a load transferring surface (42), and an inclined ramp
surface (44) located between said inner surface (40) and
said load transferring surface (42), said load transferring
surface (42) extending radially outwardly and upwardly
from said inclined ramp surface (44), said load transferring
surface (42) and said inclined ramp surface (44) being
respectively radially adjacent said first and second
grooves (32,34);
an annular split lock ring (28) having a first portion (46)
disposed in axially restraining engagement with said first
groove (32) and a second portion (50) in load transferring
engagement with said load transfer surface (42) of the
bead seat member (24); and
an annular elastomeric seal (26) having a cross section less
than the width and depth of the first groove and being
disposed in said second groove (34) in axial abutment with
the lock ring (28), said annular elastomeric seal (26) being
in sealing compression with said second groove (34) by
said inclined ramp surface (44) only when the first portion
(46) of the lock ring (28) is fully seated in the first groove
(32) and said load transferring surface (42) of the bead seat
member (24) is in conUct with the lock ring (28) said
annular elastomeric seal (26) freely moves from the sec-
ond groove (34) to the first groove (32) during attempted
inflation of the tubeless tire (10) in the event the lock ring
(28) is omitted during assembly thus ensuring that the tire
cavity does not retain any air pressure during the at-
tempted inflation.
4,438,798
MASTER CARRIER FOR A TRAVERSE ROD
James A. Ford, and Steven R. Haarer, both of Sherman Town-
ship, St. Joseph County, Mich., assignors to Cooper Indus-
tries, Inc., Houston, Tex.
FUed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,553
Int. a.J A47H 7/00
U.S. a. 160—126 14 Claims
1. In combination, a horizontally elongated drapery rod
having wall means defining first and second side-by-side paral-
1490
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
lel channels extending lengthwise of said rod, said wall means
also defining first and second elongated slots extending length-
wise of said rod and respectively communicating with said first
and second channels, said first channel being disposed adjacent
the front side of said rod and said first slot opening down-
wardly from said first channel, a master carrier slidably sup-
ported on said rod for movement lengthwise therealong, and
elongated fiexible propelling means housed within said second
channel and extending therealong for connection to said mas-
ter earner to effect slidable movement thereof along said rod,
the improvement wherein said master carrier comprises:
first and second carrier members which are separate from
one another and are slidably supported in said first and
second channels, respectively;
said first carrier member having a first part which is slidably
supported within said first channel and a second part
which is releasably but fixedly connected to said second
carrier member, said first carrier member also having a
third part which is fixed to said first part and projects
downwardly through said first slot and rearwardly of said
rod for fixed connection to said second part;
first fastening means for releasably but fixedly coupling the
second part of said first carrier member to said second
carrier member, said first fastening means including means
permitting said first carrier member to be fixedly but
releasably attached to said second carrier member at ei-
ther a first location disposed adjacent one end of said
second carrier member or a second location disposed
adjacent the other end of said second carrier member so
that said master carrier can be used for either right-hand
or left-hand operation;
means defining a passageway extending transversely
through said first carrier member for permitting said elon-
gated fiexible propelling means to extend therethrough-
and
second fastening means on one of said first and second car-
rier members for permitting attachment of said propelling
means thereto.
and substantially inwardly of the bottom margin to fonn a free
flap of said material, spaced perforations in said flap along a
hne parallel to the bottom margin forming pull-tabs bridging
each score line between the bottom margin and the line of said
sealing means, the configuration of said perforations providing
said tabs with a wide base nearest to said bottom margin nar-
rowmg to an apex at the respective score lines whereby pulling
said tabs toward said bottom margin to tear said material leaves
an opening along said bottom margin which tenninates at an
apex located at a score line thereby pennitting the remaining
part of said fiap on the side of said opening toward said one
side margin of the shade to be pulled so as to start tearing the
shade material along a selected score line.
4438 800
SURFACE DEHNING SLATS AND ARTICLES
UTILIZING SAME
Clayton J. Hemmerle, 116 NE. 16tta Q., Ft Uoderdale FUi
33305, and Richard A. Basinger, 6318 SW. 26th St., Miramar!
Fla. 33023 '
FUed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,102
ht. a.3 E06B 3/30
U.S. a. 160-371 30 Claim.
4,438 799
TEAR STARTING MECHANISM FOR TEAR SHADES
Paul E. Comeau, Warwick, R.I., assignor to Keiuiey Manufac-
turing Company, Warwick, R.I.
Filed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,595
Int. a.i A47G 5/02
U.S. a. 160-263 g Claims
1. A slat adapted to being securely positioned between op-
posing support members capable of defining at least one sur-
face when a plurality of slats are positioned therebetween, said
slat comprising surface defining means including top and bot-
tom surfaces for defining a portion of said at least one surface,
said surface defining means having two generally opposing
ends, each of said ends including attachment means defining a
substantially closed cavity for receiving a portion of one of said
support members, and biasing means for providing a bias force
thereby biasing said attachment means to a normal substan-
tially closed position and for allowing access to said cavity
upon application of a force in a direction generally opposing
said bias force.
1. A tear shade comprising a sheet of flexible shade material
having top. bottom and side margins, a plurality of spaced
score lines in said material extending from the bottom to the
top margins and parallel to one side margin for weakening said
material to permit hand tearing of said material along any
selected one of said score lines whereby to reduce the width of
said shade to a selected degree, the bottom margin folded
upwardly to form a pocket along the bottom of the shade,
means sealing the shade material of the pocket to itself between
the spaced score lines on a line parallel to the bottom margin
4438 801
PROCESS AND APPARATUSFOR THE TRANSPORT OF
A TRAIN OF FLASKLESS CASTING MOLDS
Eugen Biihier, Schleifweg 3, 8877 Burtenbach, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
PCr No. PCr/DE81/00041, § 371 Date Oct. 23, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 23, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02698, PCT Pub.
Date Oct 1, 1981
PCT FUed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 315,532
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 24.
1980, 3011265; May 29, 1980, 3020349
Int a.J B22D 47/02
U.S. a. 164-130 18 Claims
1. A process for the transport of a mold train of flaskless
molds on movable transporting structures along storing, teem-
ing and cooling stations in a foundry and having at least one
straight conveyor run on which said transporting structures
are supported, new teeming molds joining, one after the other,
a back end of the mold train and filled molds being taken
therefrom at the same rate from a front end of the train, com-
prising the steps of:
(a) lining up said molds in said mold train with their end
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1491
faces resting against each other, said molds having upright
end and side faces normal to the conveyor plane;
(b) transporting said mold train by speeding up and braking
forces adjusted as necessary and as needed, said speeding
up force taking effect at the back end of said mold train
and said braking force taking effect at the front end
thereof; and
(c) transmitting said forces together with any forces acting
against thermal expansion within said mold train along the
full length of the mold train only by said molds, from one
mold to the mold next thereto.
8. Apparatus for casting including flaskless molds and a
conveyor for transporting a mold train of said flaskless molds
along storing, teeming and cooling stations and having at least
7
777X7
127 25
'5 25 6 27 26 17 25
wedges of each of said two pairs of wedges with each
other;
(e) means for withdrawing said casting from said mould, said
withdrawing means including hydraulic cylinders with
rods for withdrawing said casting from said mould;
(0 means for pressing said shoes against said casting, said
pressing means including hydraulic cylinders with rods
for pressing said shoes against said casting;
(g) a crossbar connected with said rods of said means for
withdrawing said casting from said mould and said means
for pressing said shoes against said casting; and
(h) a member of a constant length connecting said other
wedges with said crossbar.
one straight conveyor run, new teeming molds joining, one
after the other, a back end of the mold train and filled molds
being taken therefrom at the same rate from a front end of the
train, wherein said conveyor stretches from a mold-producing
station to a shake-out station and includes turning supports
turning about fixed axes, and said conveyor including transport
structures for supporting one or more molds having a length in
the transport direction smaller than the length of the mold or
molds placed thereon, said mold or molds stretching out to the
back and front of each such transport structure, and said trans-
port structures placed at one of the front or back ends of one
run of the mold train are geared with a driving unit and at the
other end with a braking unit by means of at least one adjust-
able torque limiting slip clutch.
4438 802
CONTINUOUS CASTING WITHDRAWAL APPARATUS
Evgeny A. Korshunov, pereulok Otdelny, 5a, kv. 29, Sverdlovsk;
Maxim B. Ovodenko, ulitsa Gorkogo, 19, kv. 5, Krasnoyarsk;
Alexaodr N. Kuznetsov, prospekt Mira, 118, kv. 49, Krasno-
yarsk; Gcnnady G. Kuzmin, ulitsa Lebedevoi, 147a, kv. 9,
Krasnoyarsk; Valery P. Kostrov, uUtsa Bozhova, 57, kv. 10,
Sverdlovsk; Alexandr N. Timofecv, ulitsa Kachinskaya, 60a,
kv. 3, Krasnoyarsk; Tatyana V. MeMhanlnova, ulitsa Maly-
sheva, 127a, kv. 21, Sverdlovsk, and Valery L. Bastrikov,
ulitsa Malysheva, 127a, kv. 21, Sverdlovsk, all of U.S.S.R.
Filed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,700
Int. a.J B22D 11/124. 11/128
MS. a. 164-443 2 Claims
1. An apparatus for withdrawing a casting from a mould of
a continuous metal casting plant, comprising:
(a) a movable housing;
(b) cooled shoes disposed along the perimeter of said casting
and located within said housing;
(c) two pairs of wedges disposed between each said shoe and
said housing; one wedge of each of said pair of wedges
being rigidly secured on said shoe; the other wedge of said
pair being disposed in a recess in said housing for move-
ment relative to said housing and said one wedge;
(d) a member adjustable in length connecting the other
4438 803
CONTINUOUS CASTINGOF STEEL SLABS AND
BLOOMS FREE FROM SURFACE DEFECTS
Hidemaro Takeuebi; Shogo Matsumura; Ryoichi Hidaka;
Yasunobii Ikehara, all of Yamaguchi, and Tsuyoahi Saeki,
Fukuoka, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,982
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 4, 1980, 55-43628;
Feb. 3, 1981, 56-14647
Int a.' B22D 11/04, 11/07
U.S. a. 164-472 5 Claims
iH IN sr
MKuiai vm ii/ta'
1. A process for continuous casting of a steel slab free from
surface defects by oscillating a mold vertically with a sine-
curved stroke, in which the maximum downward movement
speed of the mold is larger than the strand withdrawal speed,
and the mold is oscillated with an oscillation cycle not less than
1 10 C/min, and an oscillation stroke with a range of from 3 mm
to 10 mm.
1492
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4,438,804
WATER SOLUBLE CORES AND METHOD FOR
MANUFACTURING CAST ROTOR PROVIDED WITH
VENTILATION DUCTS UTILIZING THE CORE
TwUro Aig^ and TosUaki Mttda, both of Yokohama, Japan,
assignors to Tokyo Shibaura DenkJ Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawa-
saki, Japan
Filed No?. 13, 1981, Scr. No. 321,088
Oaims priority, application Japan, Not. 20, 1980, 55-162591
Int. a.3 B22C J/18
U.S. a. 164-522 7 claims
approximately semicircular tube field defmed by a chord, the
manipulator including a rigid carrying body disposed parallel
to the tube sheet, the carrying body having a linear track, a
support disposed parallel to the tube sheet and mounted on the
carrying body so as to extend away therefrom in the direction
of the tube sheet, said support being displaceably mounted on
the track along the carrying body, a boom mounted on a bear-
ing surface of the support facing towards the tube sheet, the
boom being pivotable in a plane parallel to the tube sheet, and
a mouthpiece disposed at a free end of the boom and being
movable therewith for introducing a tube probe into a respec-
tive hejKxchanger tube, said carrying body comprising at
least thr^ clamping devices distributed over the length of the
IV— I
1. A water soluble core comprising a mold product prepared
from a mixture consisting essentially of a sand in an amounl of
100 parts by weight, a first binding agent of potassium carbon-
ate in an amount of 10-50 parts by weight, and a second bind-
ing agent selected from the group consisting of at least one of
barium carbonate in an amount of 1-50 parts by weight and
1-15 parts by weight of alkali silicate, and wherein said water
soluble core is prepared by kneading a mixture of said sand,
said first and second binding agents, and 5-20 parts by weight
of water based on 100 parts by weight of said sand and said
water soluble core is dried after molding.
6. A method of manufacturing a cast rotor of an induction
motor compnsing the steps of preparing a plurality of water
soluble cores each comprising a mixture consisting essentially
of sand in an amount of 100 parts by weight, a first binding
agent of potassium carbonate in an amount of 10-50 parts by
weight, and a second binding agent selected from the group
consisting of barium carbonate in an amount of 1-50 parts by
weight and alkali silicate in an amount of 1-15 parts by weight
each of said water soluble cores being provided with a shaft
hole and a plurality of conductor slots, interposing said water
soluble cores between adjacent laminated core blocks each
having a shaft hole and a plurality of slots corresponding to
those of said water soluble cores so as to align said water
soluble cores and said laminated core blocks to fonn a lami-
nated assembly, positioning said laminated assembly in a cast-
ing mold, pouring electrically conductive molten metal into
said casting mold to form conductors, circuit rings, and cool-
ing fins of said cast rotor, and treating with, by water, a cast
product taken out from said cast mold thereby to disintegrate
said water soluble cores to form ventilation ducts
carrying body and being lockable independently of one an-
other in respective tube mouths of the tube sheet, said clamp-
mg devices being fonned as insertable and retractable expand-
ing mandrels extending from the carrying body towards and
spacing the body from the tube sheet, the boom having a
swivel head by which it is fastened to a rotary shaft of a swing
dnve seated on the bearing surface of the support facing
towards the tube sheet, the mouthpiece being spaced from said
rotary shaft a distance greater than a perpendicular distance of
said rotary shaft from the chord defining the approximately
semicircular tube field, the mouthpiece being thereby pivot-
able with the boom into the space between the carrying body
and the tube sheet for introducing the tube probe into the
respective tube mouths located thereat.
4438 805
MANIPULATOR FOR REMOTE-CONTROLLED
INSPECTION AND, IF NECESSARY OR DESIRABLE,
REPAIR OF HEAT EXCHANGER TUBES
Georg Gugel, Kalchreuth, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Kraftwerk Union Aktiengesellschaft, Mulheim, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,153
..S^J!^°'^^* application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 6,
1980,3029811
Int. a.3 F28G 15/02
VS. a. 165—76 5 ctai^
1. Manipulator for positioning a tube probe at tube mouths of
heat-exchanger tubes by remote-control of the tube probe
which IS connected to a flexible supply line and provided for
inspecting and/or repairing the heat-exchanger tubes, the tube
mouths being disposed in a tube sheet and extending over an
4438806
HEAT EXCHANGER FOR TRANSFERRING HEAT TO A
LIQUID
Dieter Kaehler, Beriin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Alfa-
Laval Agrar GmbH, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 105,769, Dec. 20, 1979, Pat. No
4,305,454. This appUcation Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,816
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany. Dec 20
1978, 2854999 ^' '
Int. a.3 F24H 1/20; F28D 1/04
U.S. a. 165-108 13 Claims
1. A heat exchanger for transferring heat from a warmer
medium to a liquid to be heated, comprising a substantially
upright insulated jacket defining an internal space containing
the liquid to be heated; a hollow heat conducting body dis-
posed in the interior of said jacket and arranged to guide the
liquid to be heated; a heating body traversed by the warmer
medium and at least paritally surrounded by said heat conduct-
ing body, said heat conducting body separating the liquid
which is heated in the interior thereof as a result of heat ex-
change with the warmer medium in said heating body from the
liquid in the internal space of said jacket and said heat conduct-
ing body having a lower end provided with an inlet opening
for admission of liquid to be heated from said internal space
and an upper end provided with a flow restrictor defining an
outlet opening for the liquid which is heated in the interior of
and rises in said heat conducting body, said heat conducting
body and said flow restrictor having thermally insulating
walls; a thermometer for se"«(ing the temperature of liquid in
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1493
said jacket; means for adjusting said flow restrictor; an electric
heater for heating the liquid in the jacket; a thermostot for
controlling the heater; a first pump for admitting liquid into
said heat conducting body; a second pump for admitting warm
y "
a*
4438 807
HIGH PERFORMANCE HEAT TRANSFER TUBE
Achint P. Mathur, Clay; Matti J. Tomiainen, and James P.
Shawcross, both of Chittenango, all of N.Y., assignors to
Carrier Corporation, Syracuse, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,901
Int. a.J F28F 19/00
U.S. CI. 165-133 2 Gaims
1. A heat transfer tube for transferring heat between a boil-
ing liquid in contact with the exterior surface of the tube and a
fluid flowing through the tube, comprising:
at least one helically extending rib on the interior surface of
the tube; and
at least one helically extending fin convolution extending
around the exterior of the tube, said fin convolution hav-
ing a base portion extending generally radially outward
from the exterior surface of said tube and having a tip
portion inclined toward the side of the adjacent convolu-
tion to form a channel of substantially uniform cross-sec-
tion extending around the tube with the sections of the fin
convolution not located approximately above an internal
rib having their tip portions touching the adjacent convo-
lution to form closed subsurface passages which fluidi-
cally communicate with the surroundings of the tube
substantially only through cavities having openings lo-
cated at the sections of the fin convolution located ap-
proximately above an internal rib where depressed tip
portions of the fin convolution do not touch the adjacent
convolution whereby a pattern of closed and open section
are fonned on the exterior surface of the tube.
4,438,808
HEAT EXCHANGER TUBE
Herbert J. Venablet, III, and Herbert J. Venables, IV, both of
Shaker Blvd., Hunting Valley Village, Chagrin Valley Post
Office, Ohio 44022
Continuation of Ser. No. 16,799, Mar. 2, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,882
Int. a.3 F28F 1/36
UA a 165-150 fi Claims
medium into said heating body; and control means operatively
connected to said thermometer, said adjusting means, said
heater, said thermostat and said pumps for maintaining the
temperature of liquid in said jacket at a desired level.
1. A heat exchanger system comprising a heat exchanger
operable to transfer heat between two fluids and means to
cause a flow of one of said fluids over said heat exchanger as a
stream of said one fluid having a substantially predetermined
pattern, the flow rate over the first portions of said heat ex-
changer in alignment with said pattern being substantially
greater than the flow rate over the second portions of said heat
exchanger outside of said pattern, said heat exchanger includ-
ing a substantially smooth tube and a continuous separate strip
of spine fins having separate and distinct spines extending
radially from at least one edge of a continuous uninterrupted
base portion, said base portion being helically wound around
said tube under tension causing stretching of only the base
portion of said strip of spine fins, a plurality of bends in said
second portions, said tube providing a plurality of separate
passes through said stream of said one fluid, said spine fins
being wrapped along said plurality of said passes with a prede-
termined small helix angle and providing a uniform high spine
density along said first portions of said heat exchanger and
with a greater helix angle providing uniform lower spine den-
sity along at least part of said second portions of said heat
exchanger containing said bends, said spine fins being wrapped
around said tube with a substantially uniform amount of mate-
rial provided in each wrap of said spine fin along the entire
length of said tube, said spine fins along said at least part of said
second portions being stretched a greater amount than along
said first portions of said heat exchanger.
4 438 809
TAPERED PLATE ANNULAR HEAT EXCHANGER
Thaddeus Papis, 10115 Victoria Ave., Rivenlde, Calif. 92503
Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Scr. No. 174,362
Int. a.J F28F 3/08
U.S. a. 165-166 6 Claims
1. A heavy duty annular heat exchanger with multiplicity of
parallel, essentially axial fluid passageways of small cross-sec-
tion for heat transfer between a plurality of fluids in a high
pressure environment, comprising:
a multiplicity of solid plates, in plurality of distinct seu, each
said plate having a upered cross-section taken in a plane
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the heat ex-
changer, said plates being selectively provided with a
multiplicity of essentially parallel, longitudinally disposed
1494
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
grooves of relatively small cross-section for defining fluid
passages, wherein grooves adjacent plate edges define
therewith land areas serving as primary plate joining
surfaces and interior grooves define therebetween heat
transfer fins which also serve as load carrying members-
within said elongated portion said longitudinal recesses
generally centered upon the curvilinear portion of said
truncated circular lateral cross-section of said body mem-
ber; and
one or more permanent magnets cooperatively arranged
within said recesses.
4438 811
LATCH FOR USE IN A WELL
Dhir^lal C. Patel, CarroIIton, Tex., assignor to Otid Engineer,
ing Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,455
Int. a.J E21B 23/06
U.S. a. 166-123 ,2 aaim.
said plates being juxtaposed and joined together to form a
self-enclosed structure of annular, radially symmetric
cross-section, defining a heat transfer core and fluid transi-
tion zones with a multiplicity of distinct fluid flow pas-
sageways; and
means for introduction and discharge of a plurality of dis-
tinct fluids to and from their respective passageways.
4438 810
APPARATUS FOR DECENTRALIZING AND ORIENTING
A WELL LOGGING OR PERFORATING INSTRUMENT
Gregory J. Willdnson, Houston, Tex., assignor to Dresser Indus*
tries. Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,821
Int. a.3 E21B 43/119
U.S. a. 166-65 M 6a^^
;
I iTy^
1. A latch for a well tool comprising, a mandrel including a
latch sleeve having an external groove therein, a split latch
ring m said groove, an outer sleeve telescoped over the lower
end of the latch sleeve and having a stop shoulder preventing
upward movement of the latch ring relative to the outer sleeve,
a ring retainer slidable over the latch sleeve and within the
outer sleeve and having an internal retainer land for engage-
ment with said latch ring to retain it in said groove, means
releasably positioning said ring retainer with the retainer land
in engagement with said latch ring, and seal means between
said nng retainer and each of said outer sleeve and latch sleeve
to provide fluid integrity between said latch sleeve and said
outer sleeve.
1. An apparatus for orienting a logging or perforating instru-
ment supported by a cable and disposed within a cased bore-
hole to the lower side of said borehole, comprising;
an elongated body member having a first end portion of
generally circular lateral cross-section adapted to attach
to said instrument;
said body member having an elongated portion wherein the
mass of said body member exhibits a generally truncated
circular lateral cross-section, said truncated circular lat-
eral cross-section being predominantly disposed to one
side of the longitudinal axis of said body member;
said body member having one or more longitudinal recesses
4 438 812
BRUSH TOOLFOR WELLS
Donald P. Hammon, 75 E. Mountain View St., Long Beach.
Calif. 90805 *
FUed Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,815
Int. a.3 F21B ^7/00
UA a. 166-173 sdaims
1. A brush tool for wells including, in combination:
(a) a mandrel for insertion in a well pipestring, said mandrel
having a central bore for maintaining well fluid circula-
tion during a brushing operation;
(b) first and second semi-cylindrical sections, each having a
plurality of holes along its length;
(c) brush means radially extending through said holes, said
first and second sections being dimensioned to surround
said mandrel in coaxial relationship when brought to-
gether from opposite sides of said mandrel so that the
inner ends of the brush means are held secure between the
outer wall of the mandrel and the inner walls of the first
and second semi-cylindrical sections, said brush means
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
149S
including a brush bundle for each hole comprising a rivet
shaped collar and a plurality of wires passing through the
collar to make up the brush bundle, said rivet-shaped
collar having a cylindrical portion dimensioned to be
snugly received in said hole and of an axial length suffi-
cient to hold the wires in a bundle and a radially extending
exterior flange at one end overlapping the entrance pe-
riphery of the hole, said plurality of wires having their
inner ends bent laterally to overlie said flange, said flange
and bent wires being trapped between the outer wall of
said mandrel and the inner cylindrical wall of the semi-
cylindrical section through which said hole passes so that
all the brush bundles are securely held on said mandrel,
said rivet shaped collar further preventing direct contact
of said wires with said holes to thereby minimize wear on
said holes; and
(d) ring means receivable over the ends of said mandrel to
engage about the opposite ends of the semi-cylindrical
sections and thereby hold them together about said man-
drel whereby rapid assembly and disassembly of the brush
means over the length of said mandrel can be realized.
4,438,813
DEVICE FOR APPLYING PLUGGING MIX TO WELL
WALLS
Nikolai I. Nikolaer, U? A. Tcreschenko; Ariu M. YakoTlev;
Vitaly I. KoTalenko, aU of Unlngrwl; Nikolai K. Upatov,
Murmanskaya; Ruben A. Tatcfodan, and Mikhail Y. Tito?,
both of Moscow, all of U.S.S.R., assignors to ProizTodst«
?ennoe GcologicbMkoe Obiedlaenic 'Tscatrogeologia", Moa*
cow, U.S.S.R.
FUed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,284
Claims priority, appUcation U.S.S.R., Mar. 25, 1981, 3257101
Int. a.3 E21B 33/136
U.S. a. 166—177 3 Claims
installed in a drilling string comprising: a piston of a diameter
which is slightly smaller than the nominal inside diameter of
said drilling string; passages for the flow of a fluid in said
piston; spring-biased locking members for fixing the position of
said device with respect to said drilling string, installed on said
piston; a head installed coaxially with said piston and rigidly
coupled thereto; passages for the flow of the fluid in said head
communicating with said passages of said piston; vanes for
applying a plugging mix to walls of said well, said vanes being
made in the form of plates installed on opposite sides in said
head at an angle with respect to iu axis of roution, the vanes
being radially movable with respect to the axis of roution; a bit
for drilling-ofr the plugging mix, said bit being installed at the
distal end of said head; said head and bit being of a diameter
which is slightly smaller than the nominal inside diameter of
said drilling string.
4,438,814
OIL RECOVERY METHOD EMPLOYING ALTERNATE
SLUGS OF SURFACTANT AND FRESH WATER
Issam S. Bousaid, Houston, Tex., assignor to Texaco Inc., Whits
Plains, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 193,323, Oct 2, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation*in>part of Ser. No. 7UU,
Aug. 30, 1979, abandoned. This appUcation Aug. 25, 1982, Ser.
No. 411,172
Int. Q\} E21B 43/22
U.S. a. 166—273 15 Claims
i
I
«J 1^ It 44 » MM
\. A device for applying plugging mix to well walls to be
1. A method of recovering petroleum from a subterranean,
petroleum-conuining, permeable formation penetrated by at
least one injection well and by at least one production well,
said formation containing water having a salinity in excess of
about 20,000 parts per million total dissolved solids, compris-
ing injecting into the formation a predetermined volume of an
aqueous surfactant fluid, said surfactant being slightly soluble
in a fluid having a salinity of from SO to 100 percent of the
salinity of the water present in the formation, and reducing
interfacial tension between the petroleum and water to a value
less than 100 millidynes/centimeter, said surfactant fluid being
injected by the injection well and displacing petroleum in the
formation toward the production from which it is recovered to
the surface of the earth, wherein the improvement comprises:
injecting the surfactant fluid into the formation in from 2 to
IS separate slugs, and separating successive slugs of sur-
factant fluid from one another by injecting sequentially
therewith, separate isolation slugs consisting essentially of
fresh water having salinity leu than 10,000 paru per Bul-
lion total dissolved solids, the volume of each isolation
slug being less than O.S pore volume.
1040 O.G.— 59
1496
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4,438^15
FOAM GRAVEL PACIONG
I D. Elion, CUbo, and Ralph S. Mlllhooe, Brea, both of
CBUf^ aMignon to Cbeirroa Research Company, San Fran-
daco, Calif.
Piled Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,787
Int CL^ E21B 43/04
UJ5. a 166-278 ^ 6CIalnu
4,438317
SUBSEA WELL WITH RETRIEVABLE PIPING DECK
Roger L. Pokladnlk, Honaton, and WilUam A. Valka, Spring.
both of Tex., asrignora to Armco Inc^ Middletown, Ohio
FUed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 426,69S
Int a.3 E21B 43/01
UA a 166-341 12 Claims
4438 816
PROCESS FOR RECOVERY OF HYDROCARBONS
FROM OIL SHALE
Peter Urban, Northbrook; RnsseU W. Johnson, Villa Park, and
Lee Hilflnan. Mt Prospect, aU of HI., assignors to UOP Inc.,
Des Plalaes, DL
Filed May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 378,02«
Ut a.J ClOG 1/04: E21B 43/24
UA a 166-303 16 Claims
1. A process for the recovery of hydrocarbons from oil shale
containing said hydrocarbons which comprises:
(a) first heating said oU shale in the presence of a non-com-
bustion supporting, non-oil miscible gas selected from the
group consisting of nitrogen, hydrogen sulfide, ammonia,
mercaptan, hydrocarbon, sulfur dioxide, carbon monox-
ide, carbon dioxide, water and mixtures thereof at subcriti-
cal conditions of said selected gas and at a temperature of
from about 650* F. to about 825* F. to produce a solvent
extractable material and to liberate at least a first portion
of said hydrocarbon contained therein;
(b) recovering said solvent extracuble material and said first
hydrocarbon portion; and
(c) then contacting said recovered solvent extractable mate-
rial with a normally-liquid solvent at subcritical, reflux
conditions of said solvent to liberate at least a a second
portion of said hydrocarbon contained in said solvent
extractable nuterial.
1. A method for packing particulate material in a well bore
subsurface location comprising the steps of:
(a) generating a stable foam material at the surface above
said well;
(b) injecting said foam through said particulate material
frcMn below to produce a foam-particulate mixture and to
fluidize said mixture of foam and particulate material;
(c) forcing said fluidized foam-particulate mixture into said
well bore and to said subsurface location;
(d) causing said particulate material of said foam-particulate
mixture to be retained at said subsurface location; and
(e) moving said foam of said foam-particulate mixture up-
ward through said well bore.
1. A subsea well, the combination comprising:
a template installed on the seabed and having a plurality of
guide sleeves oriented over a plurality of wells formed in
the seabed;
a plurality of wellheads, each installed in one of said guide
sleeves;
a retrievable piping deck having a plurality of flow lines
coupled thereto and located on the top of said template;
a plurality of Christmas trees, each installed on one of said
wellheads;
means, including vertically oriented connectors, for cou-
pling each of said Christmas trees to one of said flow lines;
a fluid manifold installed on said template;
means, including vertically oriented connectors, for cou-
pling each of said flow lines to said manifold; and
a main flow line coupled to said manifold and extending
from said template to the surface of the sea.
4,438^18
DRAFT CONTROL SYSTEM FOR AGRICULTURAL
TRACTOR
Richard Treichel, and Seaton Moon, both of Cedar Falls, Iowa,
assignors to Deere A Company, Moline, lU.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 209,239, Not. 21, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,012
Int. a.J AOIB 63/112
U.S. a. 172-9 7 ciaima
— w
1. In a tractor having fluid-power adjusting means for effect-
ing adjustment of an associated implement to increase or de-
crease draft load, a draft load control system including a
source of fluid pressure, main valve means operative between
the power adjusting means and the source, a mechanical spring
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1497
on the tractor for balancing the normal draft load of the imple- 4,438^20
ment, a draft responder movable on the tractor in response to GRADE MONITORING AND STEERING APPARATUS
changes m the spnng according to changes in draft load and PmI N. GIbaoa, Rta. 1, Box 153, Salnda, S.C. 29138
providing a mechanical output proportioned to draft load, a Filed Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 32io26
hydraulic force-amplifier on the tractor including cylinder and lat CL* E21B 7/04
piston members and a second valve interposed between the ^•*" ^' 17S— 45 19 ri,i»,
cylinder member and the tractor fluid pressure source, me-
chanical means interposed between the draft responder and the
second valve for effecting changes in position thereof in re-
sponse to movement of the draft responder to cause movement
of one of the force-amplifier members relative to the other, and
means operative between the main valve means and the mov-
able one of the members for operating the main valve to con-
trol the power adjlsting means.
4,438319
RICE LEVEE SHAPER AND PACKER
Lloyd E. Ryals, P.O. Box 98, Dundee, Miaa. 38620
FUed May 21, 1982, Ser. No. 380,686
Int. a.} AOIB 29/00. 49/06
VS. a. 172—536
1. A land shaper and packer assembly for agricultural use in
the construction of rice levees for shaping a ridge of loosely
packed soil into a compacted ridge of uniform width and
substantially flat top, having a furrow of uniform width and
depth adjacent each side thereof, and with said ridge having a
substantially fixed height relative to the bottoms of said fur-
rows, said assembly comprising:
a frame including a tow bar secured thereto, an integral
rpUer-wheel assembly rouubly secured to said frame and
having an adjusuble weight greater than 3.000 pounds,
said roller having first and second symmetrical end parts
connected by a horizontally positioned cylindrical part
having a uniform fixed diameter, said first and second end
parts each being identically frusto-conically shaped and
having a relatively large outwardly facing end base mem-
ber and an inwardly sloping surface extending from said
base to one end of said cylindrical part; an axle extending
through said roller and having opposite ends joumaled in
said frame wheel means integrally coaxially connected to
each said base to rotate therewith for supporting a pneu-
matic tire; first and second pneumatic tires mounted on
said wheel means, said tires having a diameter larger than
the diameter of said bases whereby said tires maintain the
roller in a position off* the ground when towed along a
roadway and form said furrows adjacent said ridge of soil;
said tires having a diameter approximately three times
greater than the diameter of said cylindrical part whereby
rotation of said tires in the formation of a rice levee causes
the roller to be rolled and dragged along said ridge of soil
so that the soil is rolled, graded and pushed forward by
said roller surfaces to completely fill in and compact all
spots in said levee.
1. Apparatus for monitoring the grade of pipe casing being
laid in a bore underground simultaneous with said bore being
cut of the type which includes a cutting head carried by a
2 daims '^'".* ***** attached to the front of said casing, means for
steering said casing head up or down to correct the grade of
the bore, and means for pushing said casing through said bore
as it is formed, said apparatus comprising:
a grade sensor including a reservoir for containing a fluid
medium at a predetermined level and adapted for being
carried by said casing head;
a Ught source carried in said reservoir arranged to transmit
light through said medium;
a light detector carried in said reservoir opposite said Ught
source for detecting the intensity of said light received
through said medium having an output representing said
light intensity;
whereby changes in the intensity of light detected due to
changes in the inclination of-said sensor and of said level
of medium may be utilized to produce indications of devi-
ations in grade of said casing head and said steering means
may be adjusted to return said casing head to grade.
4,438J21
MINING MACHINERY
Henry JoUy, 918 Palmer ATe., Patton. Pa. 16668
FUed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,751
Int aJ E21B 7/OS: E21C 41/00
U.S. a. 175—74
9ClaiBw
c 0
1. Mechanism for mining an underground mineral through a
bore hole comprising a casing made of rotatably connected
cylindrical sections having mitered ends, including means for
locking each casing section with iu adjoining sections, an
articulated drill shaft joumalled therein, and an elongated
auger drill bit connected to the forward end of the articulated
drill shaft, the auger drill bit being formed to cut on iU face and
on its circumference along iu length.
1498
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4,438322
CXAMP^N DRILL COLLAR STABILIZERS
Larry R. RdhcII. M25 EdgMnoor, Suite, Houiton, Tex, T708I
Flkd Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,302
lot a.i E21B 17/00
VS. a 175-325 12 cbta.
1. StabUizer apparatus adapted for releasable connection
around a drill collar, to centralize and guide the drill collar in
a well, comprising tubular sleeve means having passage means
therethrough end to end, a drill collar received through said
passage means, connection means having movable clamping
means disposed substantially entirely within said sleeve for
formmg, when actuated, a releasable clamped engagement
between said sleeve and said drill collar, actuating means for
forceably driving said clamping means in one direction to form
said clamped engagement and including means for forceably
driving said clamping means in the opposite direction to posi-
tively release said clamped engagement.
4,438,824
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CRYPTOGRAPHIC
IDENTITY VERinCATION
Chriattan MueUer-Schloer, Vooriiees, N J., aarignor to Slcincai
Corporation, Iselin, N J. ^^
FUed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,523
Int a.3 H04L 9/00
UA a 178-22.08 g ctafai.
4,438,823
LOAD CELL
BwMTd H. Huaaela, Sooth BorUngtoii, and Charles T. Goctz,
Shclbome, botii of Vt, aaiignon to DBI ladnatrics. Inc..
Soutii Burlington, Vt
FUed Aag. 9, 1982, iSer. No. 406,708
Int a.J GOIG 3/00. 21/23
VS. a 177-210 EM ,4 ci«ta.
1. A load cell comprising a stationary support member, a
movable load bearing member spaced from the stationary
support member, a pair of circular cross section cantUever
spnng arms secured to the stationary support member and
projecting therefrom in spaced paraUel relationship in a com-
mon vertical pUue and connected with and carrying said load
bearing member, and a movement sensing and measuring
means for the load cell including an element connected with
the movable load bearing member.
1. An apparatus for identity verification using a data card
with protection against misuse of said card by unauthorized
users, comprising in combination:
(a) a terminal containing
(al) a first central processing unit having a first memory
for storage of a program, of a public network key, and
of variables;
(a2) a card reader for reading data from said personal data
card and for introducing said data into said first mem-
ory, said data including sensitive data;
(a3) input means for introducing personal identification
information into said first memory;
(a4) a first crypto module connected to said first centeral
processing unit, said first module being adapted to en-
crypt and decrypt data received from said first memory
under the control of said first central processing unit;
(b) a security service station containing
(bl) a second central processing unit having a second
memory for storage of a program, of a secret network
key, and of variables;
(b2) a second crypto module connected to said second
central processing unit said second crypto module
being adapted to encrypt and decrypt data received
from said second memory under the control of said
second central processing unit;
(b3) a comparator connected to said second central pro-
ceasing unit for comparing transmitted personal identifi-
cation information with transmitted reference personal
identification information, and
(c) a communication system connecting said terminal to said
security service station, said communication system trans-
mitting digital data from said terminal to said security
service station, and vice vena, including said personal
identification information and said reference personal
identification information.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1499
4,438328
CAB PITCH RESTRAINT
Donald L. Stephens, King County, Wash., assignor to PACCAR
Inc., BcUerue, Wash.
FUed Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,613
Int CL' B62D 33/06
VS. a 180-89.12 « ctoUns
position and in which, when the cab is in iu ftnt raised position
and the vehicle stands on a horizontal surface, the arms of the
Stay supporting the cab directiy compressively engage each
other at their adjacent ends due to the force of gravity actins
on the cab. -- ' •
s^—i^z^'^:.
1. A vehicle which comprises:
a vehicle frame including left and right frame rails which
undergo vertical deflection when under load;
a front axle attached to the vehicle frame near the front of
the vehicle frame, the front axle including a plurality of
front wheels mounted thereon;
a rear axle attached to the vehicle frame near the rear of the
vehicle frame, the rear axle including a plurality of rear
wheels mounted thereon;
a pair of cab rails coupled to the frame rails at two longitudi-
nally spaced poinu of substantially equal vertical deflec-
tion along the frame rails; and
a vehicle c^ mounted on the cab raUs.
4,438327
SERVO STEERING, ESPECULLY FOR MOTOR
VEHICLES
Armin Lang, SchwMbiseh Gmttnd, Fed. Rep. of Gemany, as-
•ignor to ZshandMtrik Friedrichshafea, AG, Frisdrich-
shitfen. Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 25, 1982, Ser. No. 381,709
Claims priority, appUeation Fed. Rep. of Germany. Jun. 5.
1981, 3122370 '' '
Int a.i B62D 3/08
V.S. a. 180-143 , Claims
4,438326
TILT CAB SUPPORT STAY
Ronald Bewers, Maldon, England, assignor to Ford Motor Com-
pany, Dearborn, Mich.
FUed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,578
Claims priority, appUeation United Kingdom, Jul. 30, 1980,
8024900
Int a.^ B62D 23/00
UA a 180-89.14 6 Claims
^.
1. A tilt cab vehicle having a cab pivotally connected to a
frame of the vehicle so that the cab can be pivoted and thus
raised from a lowered position which it occupies when the
vehicle is to be driven and having a stay comprising a pair of
arms pivotally connected to each other and to Uie cab and
frame of the vehicle, the stay being provided for supporting
Uie cab selectively in each of a first raised position in which the
cab has been pivoted Uirough a first angle from iu lowered
position, and a second raised position in which Uie cab hu been
pivoted through a second and larger angle from iu lowered
1. In a servo power steering system for motor vehicles,
including a servo motor having opposed operating chambers, a
servo pump, a reservoir, a control valve through which fluid it
conducted between the pump, the servo motor and the reser-
voir, and a control mechanism having a restricted cross-sec-
tional flow area that is adjustable as a function of vehicle speed,
said control valve having at leut one movable valve piston and
at least one pair of reaction chambers, the improvement com-
prising means mounting the valve piston (6, 26, 27) for move-
ment in opposite steering directions, fixed flow restricting
means (20, 21) for conducting fluid under preMure from the
pump in series through the reaction chambers (15, 16, 32, 33,
34, 35) and the control mechanism (22) to the reservoir (4), and
one-way valve means (23, 24, 38, 39) operatively mounted
between the pair of reaction chambers (15, 16, 32, 34) and the
servo motor (2) for unidirectional! y conducting the fluid under
pressure between said one pair of reaction chambers and the
operating chambers of the servo motor corresponding thereto.
4,438328
AIR CLEANER DEVICE IN MOTORCYCLES
MiUuo Nakagawi, Tokyo, Japan, aasignor to Honda GUiea
Kogyo KabushUd Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 18, 1982, Ser. No. 379326
Claims priority, appUeation Japan, May 18, 1981, 56-74634
Int a.) BOID 50/00
VS. a. 180-219 2 Claims
1. An air cleaner device in a motorcycle, wherein said mo-
torcycle includes a body frame; a front fork pivotably con-
nected to said body frame; an engine mounted on said body
frame; at leut one meter disposed forwardly of a top portion of
said front fork; and a fairing mounted on said body frame and
subsumtially covering the front of said body frame, said front
fork and said meter; wherein said fairing includes a front wall
supporting a headlight mounted thereon, right and left side
walls extending substantially rearwardly from right and left
sides, respectively, of said front waU and a bottom wall dis-
posed adjacent Uie lower side of said front waU; and wherein
said air cleaner device comprises:
a casing including a U«nsverse portion extending in a trans-
1300
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
vene dirertion of aaid body frame and a longitudinal portion
extending from one end of laid transverse portion in a longi-
tudinal direction of said body frame;
said transverse portion of said casing being disposed rear-
wardly of said headlight, forwardly of said front fork, be-
tween said right and left side walls of said fairing, substan-
tially below said meter and above said bottom wall of said
fainng;
said longitudinal portion of said casing being disposed between
one of said right and left side walls of said fairing and said
front fork;
said transverse portion and said longitudinal portion of said
casing being connected with each other such that said casina
IS substantially L-shaped in plan;
said casing having a wall which defines substantially a rear part
of said transverse portion and a side part of said longitudinal
portion facing said front fork;
said wall of said casing being curved substantially concentri-
cally with the pivoting locus of said front fork;
a filter element disposed within said casing; and '
a connecting pipe connected at one end thereof to said casing
and at the other end thereof to said engine so as to conduct
air from said casing to said engine.
4,438,829
EMERGENCY RESCUE BOX
DmJ^I. Watery 3907 Forrert Park Are., Baltimore, Md.
FUed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,364
,,^ ^ Int. a.J A62B y/Oi
U.S. a. 182-150 , cMm
with top, bottom, sides and ends, means for lifting the rescue
box by a helicopter, first and second doors forming respective
opposed upright sides of the rescue box. means hinging a lower
edge of each of saids first and second doors to the rescue box
permitting said first and second doors to swing outward and
downward from the position in which they form said upright
sides, means for securing said upright sides, forming said up-
right sides when the rescue box is lifted comprising the means
for lifting including a line attaching to an upper edge portion of
each of said first and second doors, the means for lifting further
including at least one line attaching to the rescue box adjacent
each end of the rescue box. means for securing all said lines
together at a central location over said rescue box. all said lines
being proportioned in length for becoming uut when said
rescue box is lifted; each of said first and second doors having
a smaller door therein, means for opening said smaller doore
inwardly mto the rescue box, said means for opening said
smaller doors inwardly including hinge means, attaching to a
lower portion of a respective one of said first and second doors
means for aerodynamically stabilizing the rescue box compris-'
ing a fixed tail fin extending from one of said ends thereof, and
means for cushioning said rescue box when set down after
lilting.
4438830
I A^^^^^ ^"^ ^^^ SAFE POWER LIFT FOR
LADING, THE INHRM, WHEELCHAIR PAnENTO, AND
THE LIKE
Ragnond W. Bom, 4211 FIrrt St, SpMc 121, Santa Ana, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 51,801, Jua. 25, 1979
abandoned. This application Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,424
Int. a.3 B66B 9/06
U.S. a 187-12 34cuum.
1. A system for rescuing people from a burning high-rise
building having flat roofs and sides with openings for windows
and the like, comprising: a rescue box of rectangular shape and
1. Combined stoirway and power lift apparatus comprising:
a main frame supporting and fixed to stairs extending from
end-to-end thereof;
load supporting platform means having means movably
supporting the same on said main frame and including
pressurized hydraulic fluid power means mounted on and
along the underside of said main frame operable to propel
said platform means along said stairs between the upper
and lower levels served thereby and generally even with
said upper and lower levels of said stairs, said platform
means including a first edge relatively close to the tread
edges of said stairway and a second edge remote there-
from, means supporting upright gate means on said plat-
form means for swinging movement of said gate means
between a closed position generally along said second
edge and an open position leaving said second edge unob-
structed and designed and constructed to prevent people
from walking across said second edge of said platform
when said gate means is closed; and
said power means including means for automatically and
smoothly accelerating said platform means while depart-
ing from said upper and lower levels of said stairs by
gradually varying the flow of pressurized fluid to and
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
ISO!
from said hydraulic power means between no flow and
full flow.
1. An elevator system, comprising:
a structure having floors and a hoistway.
an elevator car in the hoistway of said structure for serving
the floors therein,
said elevator car having a passenger compartment for ac-
commodating a load,
motive means for said elevator car including a hydraulic
system which includes fluid means under pressure, with
the pressure of said fluid means being responsive to the
weight of said elevator car and the load in iu passenger
compartment when the elevator car is stationary.
load monitoring means responsive to the pressure of the fluid
means in said hydraulic system when the elevator car is
stationary, with said load monitoring means providing a
predetermined signal when the magnitude of the pressure
in the hydraulic system indicates the load in the passenger
compartment exceeds a predetermined magnitude,
a door on said elevator car operable between open and
closed positions,
and means responsive to the position of said door for inhibit-
ing the load monitoring means from providing the prede-
termined signal unless the door is in the open position.
4438 832
SUDE PIN DEVICE IN A fLoATING CAUPER TYPE
DISC BRAKE
Yoshlhiia Nomura, Toyota, Japan, assignor to Toyota Jidoiha
Kogyo Kabuahiki Kaliha, Alchi, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 147,940, May 8, 1980, abandoned. TUi
appUcation Jun. 2, 1982, Set. No. 384,344
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 9, 1979, 54-72887
lot a.} F16D 65/00
VS. a. 188—73.45 6 Clalmi
1. A slide pin device for guiding a caliper assembly which
functions to urge a pair of braking pad assemblies, disposed on
either side of a disc rotor, onto said disc rotor, in a movement
thereof parallel to the axis of said disc rotor, said slide pin
device comprising:
a substantially cylindrical sleeve for guiding said caliper
assembly along its external surface;
a bolt extending through said sleeve and threaded into a
sutionary torque receiving member at one end thereof for
securing said sleeve to said torque receiving member; and
a generally planar member separate from said sleeve and
having in the center thereof a bolt hole extending there-
through, said planar member being interposed between
one end of said sleeve and the head of said bolt for pre-
4,438331
ELEVATOR SYSTEM
Jamci E. Rohanaa, Gettysburg, Pa., aaaignor to WeatiogbouM
Electric Corp., PIttfburgh, Pa.
Filed Jan. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 110,280
lot a.3 B66B 1/00
VJS. CL 187—30 4 Claims
venting roution of said sleeve about axis of said bolt upon
rotation thereof, said planar member having means en-
gageable with a tool for manually holding said planar
member against rotation upon rotation of said bolt.
4,438,833
PISTON FOR A PNEUMATIC, HYDRAUUC, OR
HYDROPNEUMATIC INSTALLATION
Willi ScbMfer, Koblenz, Fed. Rep. of Germany, aaaignor to Stabi-
lus GmbH, Koblenz-Neuendorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,383
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct 22,
1980, 3039801
Int a.' F16F 9/19
U.S. a. 188—320 7 Clalma
1. In a piston adapted to be used in a pneumatic, hydraulic or
hydropneumatic insullation of the type including a cylinder
filled with gas and/or liquid, comprising a piston slidably
housed within said cylinder and separating the cylinder cavity
into two working chambers, a piston rod connected to said
piston and extending through guiding and sealing means pro-
vided at one end of said cylinder, and damping means in said
piston comprising a constantly open throttled passage between
said working chambers, the improvement wherein said con-
stantly open^hrottled passage includes at least one spirally-
shaped throttled channel, which extends in a plane perpendicu-
lar to the piston axis over an angle of more than 360*, and
which is provided in one front face of the piston body and
covered by one of a piston plate and a piston disc.
1302
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27. 1984
M3M34
^« ^ HYDRO.PNEUMATIC DAMPING UNIT
ftotb of Fed. Rep. of Gtrauay, Mrignon to Flehtel A SmIm
AG, SchweliiAirt, F«d. Rep. of Gemiany
CoatiBaadoii of S«r. No. 145337, May 1, 1980, tbudoned. This
appUcatloo Jon. 2, 1982, S«r. No. 384,384
imfSn^*'' •PPUcttion Fed, Rep. of Geniuuy, Jun. 1.
InU aj FieP 9/36
VS. a 188-323.16 33 cMm
metiu includes a fint annular lupporting member axially
fixed wrth respect to said guiding member and having a
sealmg face directed toward the second end of said cylin-
der member, a second annular supporting member axially
rued with respect to said guiding member and having a
sealing face directed opposite from the second end of said
cylinder member, and an annular cavity sealing member
which tt fitted between the outer circumferential surface
of said guidmg member and the inner circumferential
surface of said container in the radial direction of said
container and between the sealing faces of said first and
second annular supporting members in the axial direction
of said container, at least one of said first and said second
annular supporting members comprising sheet material
which forms a substantially radially projecting first flange
for engaging said substantially axially directed contact
surface of said guiding member, a substantially radially
projecting second flange for supporting said annular seal-
ing member, and an intermediate section extending gener-
ally m the axial direction of said cylinder member for
connecting said first flange and said second flange to one
another, the radial thickness of said intermediate section
being smaller than one-half the difference between said
outer diameter of said part of said guiding member housed
inside said axial section of said cylindrical container and
said inner diameter of said axial section of said container
and said second flange extending radially between said
part of said guiding member and said axial section of said
container.
1. In a hydro-pneumatic damping unit which includes an
elongated cylmder member forming a central cavity between
fint and second ends of said cylinder member, a piston rod
guiding and sea^mg unit including a guiding member arranged
sealing umt having a guiding bore coaxially aligned with said
cylinder member, an elongated piston rod extending through
^e central cavity and within the guiding bore of said guidiJg
and sealmg unit for movement in the axial direction of said
cyhnder member, a piston unit fixed to said piston rod within
said (jentral cvity to divide the central cavity into a first cylin"
derchamber adjacent the first end of said cylinder member and
a second cylinder chamber adjacent the second end of said
cylinder member, first fluid passage means associated with said
fwi^ T\ I P^°^»ding throttled fluid communication be-
Z^ ^ "^ "?? ^''* '**^"** <^y'">**" chambers when said
^XJf'lJS!^^^ moved relative to said cylinder member,
the first and the second cylmder chambers containing a body
of hquid. a cylindrical container coaxially surrounding said
SJS,/'. ^^^'^ V""" '^ ?""*" *^^»y' »»*'* «>"^n"
Z^^L T ^^ '^^'^^ ** ^'"* «"** °f »*id cylinder mem-
ber and a closed, second end adjacent the second end of said
second end of said cylinder member for providing throttied
fluid communication between the annular cavity and the sec-
r.UtS?? chamber when said piston rod is axially moved
reUtive to said cylmder member, the annular cavity bcine
partly filled with a liquid and partly filled with a gas, at least a
part of said guidmg member being housed inside an axial sec-
uon of said cylmdncal container adjacent the first end of said
cylmdricd container and annular cavity bridging means adja-
cent the first end of said container for closing the amiular
cavity m Uie axial direction of said container and for radiallv
centenng said guiding member relative to said container the
unprovement comprising,
at least the part of said guiding member housed inside said
axial section of said cylindrical container has an outer
diameter smaUer than the inner diameter of said axial
section of said container; said guiding member forming a
contact surface which is directed substantially in the aidal
direction of said cylindrical container; and said bridging
4438,835
HAND OPERATED CONTROLS FOR MOTOR VEHICLE
Wmkm Dowden, deceased, late of Loa Angeles, and by Naomi
Muckelroy, executrix, 324 E. 81.t St, Lo. Angeli. Calif.
FUed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,804
Int. a.3 B60K 41/20; G05G 9/08
VS. a. 192—3 M
4ClaIms
1. In a motor vehicle having a conventional automatic gear
transmission, a brake pedal, and a fuel flow control foot pedal
disposed m a driver compartment, the hand operated vehicle
controls comprising:
a first push-pull control rod disposed and separately clamped
to a fuel flow control foot pedal at a first control rod first
temunus,
a clamp rotatably secured to said first control rod first termi-
nus and to said fuel flow foot pedal.
a second push-pull control rod disposed and separately
clamped to a brake pedal at a second control rod first
terminus,
a second clamp rotatably secured to said second control rod
first terminus and to said brake pedal,
a bearing plate extending upright from the floor of said
dnver compartment and adaptively angularly positioned
and secured at a base plate to said floor.
March 27. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1S03
two guiding and sliding apertures disposed in said upright
bearing plate, each one of said apertures holding and
guiding a separate said first and second push-pull control
rod slidable in said apertures,
a brake first lever pivotally secured at a first brake lever
terminus to said bearing plate and pivotally secured at a
mid-lever location to said second push-pull rod second
terminus, the second terminus of said lever formed into a
manual hand handle,
multiple spaced rod position notches on said first push-pull
control rod disposed normal to the rod length on the rod
underside adjacent to the driver compartment floor,
a lock slot stop disposed in said sliding aperture of said
bearing plate, engagable with one of said multiple position
notches of said first push-pull control rod,
a brake second lever pivouUy secured at a first lever termi-
nus to said bearing plate and having a second lever termi-
nus handle curved to route forward and upwardly, lift
said first push-pull control rod from said lock slot stop,
when said brake first lever is cooperatively moved for-
ward, and
at least two spring means, each anchored at a first spring
means terminus of each means to said bearing plate and at
a second terminus of each spring means anchored to said
first push-pull rod and said second push-pull rod, provid-
ing tension means retracting said first and second push-
pull rods to a non-operative position.
4,438,836
FREEWHEEL HUB ASSEMBLY
Tooni Kagata, Toyota, Japan, aaaignor to Alain Scikl if«hii.iiiwi
Kalaha, Kariya, Japan
FUed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,575
Claima priority, application Japan, Apr. 24, 1980, 55>56625:
Apr. 25, 1980, 55-54241
Int. a.' F16D 41/07, 41/08
VS. a 192-36 7 Claims
in said retarder means and complementary to said cut-out in
the cage means.
4,438337
CONVEYOR DRIVE GEAR BOX
Brian R. Stoppaal, Doncastcr, Nigel J. Box, SkcUow, and David
D. Philllpa, Worksop, all of England, assignors to Mining
SuppUaa UmitMi, Balby, England
FUed May 7, 1980, Ser. No. 148,164
Claiffls priority. appUcation United Kingdom. May 10. 1979.
7916281
Int. a.} B65G 19/18
VS. a. 198—735 s Clalns
"'^
-~A^
Je^
* «
T^i
i*ll
"*
'^
m\
^
11/
1. A conveyor drive gear box, comprising:
(a) a gear box casing, said gear box casing extending in a
longitudinal direction in generally symmetrical relation-
ship to a predetermined plane and having an offset nose
above or below the predetermined plane projecting from
a terminal end thereof;
(b) an output shaft located in said casing nose;
and
(c) a gear train located within said casing for transmitting
power to said output shaft, said gear train including a
plurality of shafts with gear wheels mounted thereon,
each of the shafts in said casing being rotatable about
substantially parallel axes with all of the shafts in the gear
train being located within the predetermined plane offset
from the axis of the output shaft whereby the output shaft
is located above or below said predetermined plane.
4438838
CONVEYOR CHAIN FOR USE WITH HNGERED
TRANSFER PLATE
Wasyly G. Hodlewiky. Greendale, and Roger H. Schroeder.
Hartland. both of Wis., assignors to Rexnord Inc., MUwau-
kee, WU.
FUed May 1. 1981. Ser. No. 259,616
lat a.} B65G 17/08
U.S. a. 198—853 7 Oaims
1. A freewheel hub assembly comprising a wheel hub rotat-
ably supported by bearing means on non-rotatable suppori
means, retaining means mounted on said non-rotatable support
means, non-rotatable surface means non-rotatably mounted on
the radial periphery of said retaining means, freewheel means
connecting said wheel hub with rotauble axle means for trans-
mitting rotating torque from said axle means to said wheel hub
but leaving the wheel hub freely rouuble when the axle means
is not rotating, said freewheel means including inner disc
means adapted to be connected with said axle means to rotate
therewith, said inner disc means having a profiled outer periph-
ery, outer housing means rotauble with said wheel hub and
having a circular inner periphery opposed to said profiled
outer periphery of the inner disc means, roller cage means
disposed between the outer periphery of the inner disc means
and the inner periphery of the outer housing means, a plurality
of rollers carried by said roller cage means, retarder means
carried by said cage means and having friction surface means
adapted to be brought into friction engagement with said
non-roUUble surface means, said retarder means being carried
at one axial end of said cage means for axial movement through
an engagement between at leut one cut-out formed in said
axial end of the cage means and at leut one projection formed
1. A chain link comprising:
a base portion, including at least two fint hollow barrels,
said first barrels being axially aligned and having a space
between them, and at least one second hollow barrel, the
axis of said second barrel being radially spaced from and
parallel to the axis of said first barrels, such that said
second barrel is positioned opposite the space between
said first barrels; and
a raised portion integral with and supported by said base
portion, said raised portion comprising:
a plurality of coplanar fork-shaped members, each of said
fork-shaped memben comprising two prongs and a stem,
wherein the prongs of each fork-shaped member are paral-
1504
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
lei to each other and perpendicular to the axes of said
barrels, said prongs substantially spanning the distance
between said first and second barrels, and the width of
said stem is less than the distance between said prongs,
said stem being located over one of said barrels, and said
fork-shaped members being arranged in a regularly-
spaced row such that the fingers of a fingered transfer
plate may be received between said fork-shaped members,
wherein the upper surface of said stems is curved so as to
prevent kick-up, and
wherein each of said fork-shaped members further comprises
a cross-member extending between and attached to both
of the prongs approximately at their midpoints.
4438 839
APPARATUS AND METHODS FOR ASSEMBLING END
SHIELD ASSEMBLIES FOR DYNAMOELECTRIC
MACHINES
James M. Tomson, Fort Wayne, Ind., assigiior to General Elec-
tric Company, Fort Wayne, Ind.
DiTiilon of Ser. No. 128,085, Mar. 7, 1980, Pat No. 4,348,791.
This appUcatioo Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 399,087
lot a.3 BdSG 47/00
U A a 198-345 5 ctatais
3. A method of lifting the end frame of a dynamoelectric
machine from a conveyor at a work station; wherein the end
frame mcludes a centrally disposed bearing supporting portion
and laterally extending portions, at least some of which are
susceptible of being supported on conveyor means; the method
compnsmg: moving an end frame on the conveyor means into
proximity with a lift mechanism and guiding the end frame in
the vicimty of the lift mechanism with guide means; engaging
the end frame m the vicinity of the bearing supporting portion
thereof while holding the end frame in engagement with the
conveyor means by biased guide means; elevating the end
frame above the conveyor means with the lift mechanism
wlule contmumg to engage the end frame with the guide means
and biasmg the end frame against the lift mechanism with the
guide means; performing a work operation on the end frame at
the work station between the time that the lift mechanism
elevates the end frame from the conveyor means and a subse-
quent time at which the lift mechanism has redeposited the end
frame on the conveyor means.
4,438,840
APPARATUS FOR SELECTING CLOSURES
Frandfcus A. Damen, Langeweg, Netherlands, assignor to Res-
slnittechniek B. V. HuideleBd Onder De Naam Calamatic
Dongeo, Netherlaads ^^
Filed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,200
.,22S" ^"^^^ sppUcation Netherlands, Feb. 27, 1961,
8100900
bt a.3 B65G 47/24
U.S. a. 198— 398 ICtolm
1. The apparatus for selecting closures out of a supply of
closures m which they are present in one plane with the back
to one or the other side, which closures have a cylindrical
raised edge comprising:
a hopper that in cross section is rectangular and is provided
with side walls that are mutually spaced in such a manner
that the closures fit therebetween, said hopper also having
side edges and a lower wall, which lower wall slopes and
is provided with an opening,
a first worm disposed below said opening and extending
paraUel to the lower wall of said hopper and having a
profile with a curvature in which the raised edges of the
closure fit, and a side wall of the hopper adjoining the
opening of the lower wall having an opening,
a cylindrical shaft extending into said side wall opening and
having an outer face tangential to the plane of this side
wall, and extending paraUel to said first worm and driven
by said first worm synchronously, which shaft extends
with said first worm until outside the side wall of the
hopper,
a second worm merging with said shaft and having the same
pitch and with a width of thread that is substantially
smaller than the inner diameter of the raised edge of the
closures, the back of said second worm being opposite to
the cavity of the profUe of the first worm,
the first worm and the shaft are driven in the same rotational
direction in such a manner that the first worm down-
wardly discharges the closures that are not correctly
oriented and that do not find support on the second worm,
the closures being discharged between the first and second
worms, and whereby the correctly oriented closures are
longitudinally advanced by said first worm and second
worm to a use position.
4,438,841
OBSTRUCnON CLEARING APPARATUS FOR MINING
CONVEYORS
Gregory Johnson, P.O. Box 166, VIrgle, Ky. 41572
Filed JnL 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,268
lit a.3 B65G 43/00
UAa 198-524 24CIalms
1. A conveyor system comprising a receiving conveyor, feed
means positioned above said conveyor for feeding material
onto said conveyor, means for restricting the fed material to
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
ISOS
the central portion of said conveyor, sensing means to sense a
build up of material cause by an obstruction on said restriction
means for joining the carriage to a single conveyor chain
substantially at the transverse center of the belt and hav-
ing a pair of laterally speced subilizer means flanking said
central connecting means and overlying the stabilizer
operating surfaces when the chain overlies said slide sur-
face bottom wall, the stabilizer means being oriented with
respect to the central connecting means and chain such
that at subsUntially any point along the length of the chain
slide surface when the carriage is laterally evenly
weighted the chain is in force bearing contact with said
slide surface and the stabilizer means are without force
bearing contact with said subilizer operating surfaces; and
(c) wherein the chain is of the type formed from pin links
and intermediate block links, the central connecting
means being joined only to the block links, the block links
being of the type having a transverse hole at each end
thereof for receiving the pin of a pin link and the hole
being sufficiently larger in diameter than the pin that the
block link is capable of a predetermined degree of lateral
tilting before the block link applies twisting torque to the
pin, and wherein the stabilizer means are oriented with
respect to the central connecting means such that a subi-
lizer means will contact an operating surface in force
bearing relationship when the carriage is laterally un-
evenly wieghted prior to the time that a block link applies
subsUntial twisting torque to a pin.
means, and means responsive to said sensing means for remov-
ing the obstruction from said restriction means.
4,438J43
4,438,842 WRAP-AROUND STYLE BEVERAGE BOTTLE CARRIER
SUDE CONVEYOR WITH SIDE STABILIZERS WITH FULLY INTEGRATED PRODUCT SEPARATION
Robert L. AUdredge, 130 Pearl St., Apt 1108, Denver, Colo. MEANS
80203, and Robert J. Deltour, 16227 E. Arkansas Dr., Aurora, ^^1 J* Graser, Monroe, La., assignor to MaB?ille Scrricc Corp.,
Colo. 80012 Denver, Colo.
Continuation of Ser. No. 74,345, Sep. 11, 1979, abuidoDed. This Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,893
appUcation Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,916 Int. Q\? B65D 75/00
Int a.3 B65G 15/60 ^&' CI. 206—148 4 Claims
U.S. a. 198—838 12 Claims
1. An improved conveyor of the type having a convoluted
longitudinally extending belt adapted to follow a laterally and
vertically curved path and a conveyor chain capable of both
lateral and vertical bending with the path of the belt, wherein
the improvement comprises:
(a) a longitudinally extending conveyor track assembly
carrying a longitudinally oriented chain slide surface
defining substantially the full length of the operational
conveyor path and having a bottom and opposite side
walls thereon, and carrying on each lateral side of the slide
surface a subilizer operating surface;
(b) a belt carriage connected to the conveyor belt and ex-
tending transversely thereto, having a central connecting
1. A wrap-around bottle carrier for a plurality of bottles,
comprising:
(a) a bottom panel;
(b) a pair of vertical first side panels hingedly attached to the
bottom panel;
(c) a pair of sloped second side panels hingedly attached to
the first side panels, each sloped second side panel having
formed thereon a plurality of openings along the upper
edge thereof for receiving a protruding portion of the caps
of the bottles to be retained in the carrier;
(d) an outer top panel hingedly attached to one of the second
side panels and having a handle means;
(e) a partial inner top panel hingedly attached to the other of
the second side panels and fixedly atuched to a portion of
the underside of the outer top panel;
(0 an upper product separation means hingedly atuched to
the partial inner top panel, the upper product separation
means comprising first and second separator panels
hingedly atuched to each other along a fold line, the first
separator panel extending downwardly from and beneath
the inner top panel and the second separator panel extend-
ing parallel to and spaced below the outer and inner top
1306
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
panels, a series of generally oval shaped openings aligned
with the fold line and located partially on the first separa-
tor panel and partially on the second separator panel, and
a series of generally semi-circular cutouts along a free
edge of the second separator panel, for positioning be-
tween the caps and the necks of the bottles to be contained
tn the carrier to separate t^e bottles both longitudinally
and transversely in the carrier; and
(g) a lower product separation means comprising a plurality
of tabs hingedly attached to the bottom panel and de-
signed to be positioned vertically between the bottles to be
contained in the carrier in order to provide both longitudi-
nal and transverse bottle separation in the carrier.
4438344
TRAVELING GARMENT BAG
Jacob Ketaelman, 53B Troy Dr., Springfield, NJ. 07081, and
Howard KesMlnian, 628 S. Highland, Merian Station. Pa.
19066
FUed Aug. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 407,087
Int. a.J A45C 3/00, 13/26
VS. a. 206-287.1 „ OMim
tion of said discard chamber, said platform member being
of a sufficient length and width for receiving an elongated
product on top of said platform member and above said
discard chamber, in a packaged position,
(c) an elongated opening formed through, and extending
longitudinally of, said platform member,
(d) said elongated opening having opposed edge portions
defining elastic closure members normally occupying a
closed position in which the spacing between at least some
of the opposed edge portions is less than the transverse
dimension of the elongated product in said package posi-
tion, and said closure members being adapted to support
said elongated product in said packaged position,
(e) said closure members being yieldable to the downward
pressure of an elongated discarded product having a
length less than the length of said opening when said
product IS forced downward from said platform member
into said discard chamber, and
(0 means retaining an elongated product in said packaged
position on said platform member.
1. A novel garment bag for hanging items therein, compris-
ing:
a storage area formed by a front panel, a back panel and a
side gusset;
a means for opening and closing said storage area positioned
on said front panel;
a handle assembly positionable at a terminus of said means
for opening and closing said storage area on said side
gusset of said storage area, said handle assembly com-
prised of a handle member, a hanging member, a closure
member and a means for atUching said handle assembly to
said gusset of said storage area.
4438,846
CASSETTE BOX CONSTRUCTION
Andreas S. Styiianou, 5595 Finch Eait, Scarborough Ontario.
Canada MIB 2T9
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,364
Int. a.3 B65D S/Sa 25/10 25/54. 55/02
U.S. a 206-387 „ ctalBM
•' * B e "^ r^^./^ *
4438 845
CONTROL PACKAGE FOR ELONGATED ARTICLE
Charles M. Mochow, Rte. #1, Iron HUI, Bums, Tenn. 37209
FUed Jul. 18, 1983, Ser. No. 514,553
Int. Q\? B65D %3/10
U.S. a 206-366 9 claim.
2^
1. A package for an elongated product having a predeter-
mined length and transverse dimension, comprising:
(a) an elongated container having closed side and bottom
walls and an upper portion, defining a discard chamber
having a length, width and depth greater than the corre-
spending dimensions of a discarded elongated product
received within said discard chamber,
(b) an elongated platform member covering the upper por-
1. In a box construction which includes an entry tob adapted
to enter a slot, the entry ub having side edges and a leading
edge, the improvement which comprises, on one side edge of
the entry tab, a protrusion which merges smoothly with said
one side edge in both directions, said protrusion being of a size
such as to make the width of the entry tab at the region of the
protrusion greater than the width of the slot, thereby to require
a distorting force to insert the entry tab into the slot, whereby
removal of the entry tab from the slot is discouraged.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1507
4,438A47
FILM CARRIER FOR AN ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVE
PATTERN
Otmar Fritz, Neukeferloh, Fed. Rep. of Gcnnany, assignor to
Siemens AktiengescUscluift, BcrUn and Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Gcnnany
FUed Mar. 2, 1983, Ser. No. 471,311
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 2,
1982, 3207450
Int. a.J B65D 65/30 73/02: H05K 5/O0
U.S. a 206—330 8 Claims
1. A carrier film for use in the manufacture of electronic
micro-packs having conuct arrays comprising a film having
marginal edge perforations along each edge longitudinal side
thereof, the marginal perforations being substantially of the
dimension and spacing of transport perforations for narrow
gauge film, at least two adjustment openings through the car-
rier film, the adjustment openings being positioned on opposite
sides of the film normal to the transport direction of the film,
the adjustment openings being positioned and dimensioned
substantially according to position and size standards for cin-
ema film transport perforations, at least one pair of said adjust-
ment openings being provided for each contact array area of
the carrier film.
ile article in a predetermined position spaced from said
front and rear side, end, bottom, and top wall panels; and
(d) said support structure comprising a pair of cooperating
opposed tubular members spaced from each other at op-
posite ends of said carton and each including:
(i) an upper panel foldably joined at its outer edge to an
upper edge of a related end wall panel and extending
inwardly therefrom;
(ii) an inner side panel foldably joined at its upper edge to
an inner edge of said upper panel and extending down-
wardly therefrom;
(iii) a lower panel foldably joined at its inner edge to a
lower edge of said inner side panel and extending out-
wardly therefrom toward said related end wall panel in
spaced relation to said bottom wall panel, said lower
panel having an integral shelf panel formed by material
of the related said inner side panel, said shelf panel
projecting inwardly toward and adapted to cooperate
with a related shelf panel of the other tubular member
to support the packaged article above said bottom wall
panel;
(iv) an anchor panel foldably joined to an outer edge of
said lower panel and secured to an inside surface of said
related end wall panel; and
(v) a vertical strut formed from material within said upper
panel thereof and extending downwardly therefrom at
right angles to said lower panel and engaging said lower
panel.
4,438349
PACKAGE FOR PROTECTING A GENERALLY
RECTANGULAR PARALLELPIPED ARTICLE
Orison W. Stone, Middlcbury, Vt, assignor to Pack Image, Inc.,
Middlebury, Vt.
FUed Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,035
Int. a.3 B65D %l/02
U.S. a. 206—592 10 Claims
4,438,848
CUSHIONING CARTON
James Montcalegre, St. Paul, and James L. Rader, Bumsrille,
both of Minn., assignors to Container Corporation of America,
Chicago, lU.
FUed Aug. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 410,042
Int. a.' B65D 61/02. 85/30
U.S. Q. 206—588 5 Claims
36 '0
1. A carton, formed of a unitary blank of foldable paper-
board, for holding and cushioning a packaged article, compris-
ing:
(a) a bottom wall panel having pairs of opposed front and
rear side wall panels and end wall panels foldably joined
to side and end edges thereof and to each other and up-
standing therefrom to form a box-like structure;
(b) a cover for said structure which includes a top wall
panel;
(c) an integral, intern^ support structure for holding a frag-
1. In combination with a generally rectangular meuUic
container having peripheral chimes on its upper and lower
surfaces, a protective package comprising
an inner liner surrounding said container and having upper
and lower edge portions extending beyond the chimes at
the upper and lower ends of said container;
inner flanges secured to said upper and lower edge portions
and engageable with the edges of said chimes at respective
ends of said container;
a separate filler member forming a generally rectangular rib
disposed within each chime of said container adapted to
support the end walls of said container against internal
pressure and to maintain said flanges engaged with the
edges of said chimes;
and a rectangular outer carton surrounding said liner and
said ribs at the end of said container wherein the inner
1S08
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
NfARCH 27, 1984
o inner luier. componenu which are not seized, such as leather, cardboard.
4,438,850
MEMBRANE CLOSURE STRUCTURE
Merle S. Kaha, Chcfterfleld Coooty, Va^ assignor to Reynolds
Metals Compuiy, Richmond, Va.
FUed Jul. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 398,672
Int a.3 B45D 43/02. 51/20
U.S.a206— 634
10 Claims
wood boards and thick-walled plastic refuse, are further con-
veyed by the broom or brush.
1. A membrane closure for a container, said membrane
closure being heat scalable to said container and said mem-
brane closure being cajjable of withstanding retort sterilization,
said membrane closure comprising a plastics resin film layer!
said plastics resin film layer providing protection and splatter
resistance for contents of said container after removal of a
barrier layer therefrom, an intermediate adhesive layer bonded
on one side thereof to said plastics resin film layer and a barrier
layer bonded on one side thereof to the other side of said
adhesive layer, said plastics resin film layer having a heat seal
strength to said container greater than the adhesive strength of
said adhesive layer to said plastics resin film layer and said
plastics resin film layer having a tear strength less than the
adhesive strength of said adhesive layer to said plastics resin
film layer, whereby upon peeling of said membrane closure
from said container under hand pressure, failure occurs within
said plastics resin film layer at an outer edge of a heat seal
between said membrane closure and said container, thereby
removing said barrier layer and providing a protective cover-
ing for the contents of said container.
4438 852
MODULAR DESK ORGANIZER AND ADAPTER
THEREFOR
'^Drfor'ii^ wT ^*'*^'' ^'**' ■^'"°' ^ '^" ^'"^ '"*••
FUed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,915
Int a.3 A47F 7/00
UA a. 211-11 J c,^
4,438,851
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE SORTING OUT
OF PLASTIC FOILS FROM A MIXTURE OF REFUSE
Peter Voelskow, Holzinsbaus 15, 78«9 Schdnau/Schw., Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Oct 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,538
ti»2^Jll^*^' •»"«««*o" F««- R«P- of Gtnmmy, Oct 20,
IWO, 3039547
Int a.J B07C 5/U
U.S. a 209-616 5 c,„^
1. Method for sorting out plastic foil from a mixture of refuse
which previously has been divested of at least its components
of heavy materials, such as stone, glass and iron, in which the
mixture of refuse is conducted past spines of a spiked roller
with a direction of movement corresponding so that foil or
textile wastes are seized and more rigid components, such as
paper, are not seized, characterized in that the mixture of
refuse is conveyed in a thin layer using moderate feeding
power in opposite direction of movement past said pointed
spines by means of a broom or brush so that only components
with higher tensile strength remain hanging on the spines while
1. A modular desk organizer comprising two organizing
units (12, 14, 112. 114), each of which is one of a vertical
sorting tray (12, 14. 114) and a horizontal sorting tray (112);
a downwardly extending peripheral skirt (19, 25) formed
around the periphery of each organizing unit;
a pair of spaced, depending legs (22. 28, 122) provided along
two opposite sides of each of the organizing units, the legs
being positioned spaced inwardly of the peripheral skirt
on the organizing unit and all of the legs on the organizing
unit being equal in length;
an adapter (12) joining the two organizing units together and
including a planar, rectangular, horizontal surface (30)
extending between the two organizing units;
a pair of horizontal, planar support shelves (32) extending
outwardly from the sides of the adapter (12) at a lever
lower that the horizontal surface (3) and under the adja-
cent organizing unite with the height of the support
shelves (32) selected to correspond to the length of the
legs on the organizing unite so that the organizing unite
remain horizontal and rest firmly and evenly on all four of
their legs (22, 28), each of the support shelves (32) having
a pair of spaced apertures (34) formed therein to receive
therethrough one pair of the legs of one of the organizing
umte, the apertures (34) being located in the support
shelves so that the peripheral skirt on each of the organiz-
ing unite is pressed against the horizontal surface of the
March 27. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1309
adapter and rette on top of the support shelf (32) so that
the adapter is securely attached to the organizing unite.
4,438,853
ROTATING STORAGE RACK FOR BABY FOOD
CONTAINERS
Jody L. Nnmben, Seottidale, Ariz., aasignor to Monterey Labo-
rttoriea, Inc., Las Vegu, Nev.
FUad Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 325,005
Int a.} A47B 73/00
MS. CL 211—77 10 Oaima
further including a guard arm on a guard arm side and a
knuckle on an oppositely spaced knuckle side, a side wall
extending forwardly from the horn line at the guard-arm side,
and a side wall diverging outwardly from the horn line at the
knuckle side and continuing vertically from a bottom wall
section at a rearwardly-spaccd relation from the thrower hole
along a sufficient height to permit a generally vertical drop-
1. A rotating rack for supporting a plurality of containers,
comprising; a base member, a plurality of shelf unite, a plurality
of vertical support members, means for supporting one of said
shelf unite on said base member in freely rotating fashion,
means for securing said vertical support members to said one
shelf unit for rotation in common therewith, and means for
securing the remainder of said plurality of shelf unite to said
vertical support members in vertically spaced relationship,
each of said shelf unite comprising a generally disc-like panel,
and a plurality of container-engaging depressions formed in
said panel and spaced thereabout to engage the lower portions
of said containers, said depressions being joined by a plurality
of interconnecting channel depressions interposed therebe-
tween, said means for supporting one of said shelf unite on said
base in freely rotating fashion including a plurality of rollers
extending from said base member and adapted to impinge on
the lower surface of said one shelf unit, said container-engag-
ing depressions and said interconnecting channel depressions
forming on said lower surface a continuous closed curved flat
of substantially planar, ring-like configuration, said rollers
engaging said closed curved flat to support said one shelf unit
in freely routing fashion.
4,438354
RAILWAY COUPLER
Donald L. Baughman, and WUUam O. EUlott both of Pitti-
borgh. Pa., aaaignon to McConway A Torlcy Corporation,
Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUad No?. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,273
Int a.) B61G 3/06
U.S. a. 213—127 11 Claims
1. A railway coupler knuckle thrower including a knuckle-
actuating leg for engaging a thrower pad on a knuckle while
pivotally supported by a coupler head, said thrower fUrther
including a lock-actuating surface to engage with a lock for
pivoting said thrower, said thrower fluther including a down-
wardly-extending trunnion for pivotal support of the thrower
by a thrower hole in a bottom wall of said coupler head, the
improvement comprising a thrower retainer engaged with an
end portion of said tnmnion and arranged outside said coupler
head for preventing withdrawal of the trunnion from the
thrower hole.
6. In a raUway coupler housing including a bottom wall
section extending forwardly beyond a horn line to a down-
wardly-inclined back lock chamber wall of a lock chamber,
said teck lock chamber wall including a floor section with a
thrower hole extending therethrough, said coupler housing
ping of a thrower within the interior of the coupler head for
engaging a trunnion of the thrower in the thrower hole, the
combination therewith of a thrower having an elongated trun-
nion for pivotal support by said thrower hole, and a thrower
retainer arranged outeide said lock chamber to engage with the
end portion of the trunnion for preventing withdrawal of the
trunnion from the thrower hole.
4,438,855
RAILWAY COUPLER SHELF CHAMFER
RusseU G. Altberr, Muns|er, Ind., assignor to Amsted Industries
Incorporated, Chicago^ lU.
FUed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,307
Int a.' B61G 3/04, 7/00
U.S. a. 213—153 1 Gaim
1. A railway car coupler comprising a head including a
throat portion, a knuckle pivotally connected to the head at
one side of the longitudinal vertical centerplane of the head,
a generally planar, lower shelf extending from the head
below the knuckle, said lower shelf extending from an
intersection with the throat to a point subsuntially adja-
cent the pivot of the knuckle, said lower shelf having a
front edge surface and a side edge surface, and a chamfer
on the side edge surface and part of the front edge surface
of the lower shelf, said chamfer extending downwardly
and away from the guard arm side of the coupler head on
the edge surface and downwardly and toward the coupler
throat on the front edge surface.
1510
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4.438 8M
COMBINATION BASE CUP AND BOTTLE ^'°^ »aid score line being cut away to form a pull tab extend-
Ii>aiF.CI«ng. SylT.nl., Ohio. ...Ignor to Owau-Illfaol., Inc.. Ilml ' ti'S'^" ^'f^^ *°.^** "^"^ ""'' "^^''"^^y "P°"
Toledo, Ohio ^ " Pu^'na Md tab circumferentially, said outer skirt severs along
— - •".^ »core line, said lower bead being removed as said tab is
pulled, said portion of said outer skirt cut away comprising a
Toledo, Ohio
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 336,000
Int. a.i B65D 23/08
VJS. a 215—12 R
UCIaimt
straight section parallel to and immediately below said score
me, an arcuate section of about 180' extending down to the
lower edge of the outer skirt, and the lower edge of said tab
being cut away at a level above the lower edge of said outer
skirt, the upper edge of said tab being spaced substantially
below the lower edge of said skirt immediately thereabove
1. A pressurized fluid package comprising:
an oriented plastic bottle having a main body that includes a
geiMrally cylindrical side wall,
a neck terminating in a neck finish on the upper end of the
neck for receiving a closure, a hemispherical bottom wall
in which the radius of the hemisphere forming the bottom
wall IS substantially equal to the radius of the main body.
a base of plastic material comprising a standing ring for
engaging a support surface, said base adapted for injection
molding with a reduced molding cycle time, said base
bemg of substantially uniform wall thickness,
said standing ring being so constructed and arranged that it
has a generally planar contacting surface for substantially
full contact with the supporting surface for greater stabil-
ity,
said base including a support ring spaced above said standing
nng, the support ring being so constructed and arranged
that It has substantially full contact with the bottom of the
bottle,
said base having an annular supporting member extending
from the inner periphery of the standing ring and inclined
upwardly and inwardly to the outer periphery of the
support nng, the base initially engaging a support surface
Jong the outer edge of the standing ring, the standing ring
nexing into substantially full contact with the support
surface when the bottle is filled and pressurized,
said annular supporting member being so constructed and
arranged that it is substantially straight in frusto-conical
shape and the member remaining straight when the bottle
IS filled and pressurized to provide the package with im-
proved stability and improved strength against top load
stress. '^
4438 858
HLAMENT WOUND VESSEL WITH IMPROVED POLAR
FITTING
Richtfd L. Gro?er, Lincoln, Nebr., Mcignor to Bnina wick Cor-
por.tion, Skokie, III.
Filed Feb. 3, 1M2, Scr. No. 345,327
lot. a.3 B65D 8/00
VS. a. 220-3 ,0 ctalm.
4438 857
CAP AND NECK STRUCTURE FOR A WIDE-MOUTH
JAR
Joieph J. Bullock, III, Atherton, Cdlf., Mdgnor to Three Sit-
tera Ruich Eoterpriaca, Su Cvloa, CUf.
FUed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,550
lot a.} B65D 41/48
UA a 215-256 7 Ctai^
1. A cap of the type having a central top disc, a thin-walled
substantially cylindrical outer skirt of substantially uniform
thickness depending from said disc, an upper internal circum-
ferential bead on said outer skirt, a lower internal circumferen-
tial bead on said outer skirt below said upper bead, a circumfer-
ential score line in said outer skirt above said lower bead, the
improvement which comprises a portion of said outer skirt
1. In a filament wound pressure vessel which has a generally
spherical portion including a polar opening defined by a fitting,
a composite comprising a plurality of layers of filamente form-
ing part of the thickness of the vessel and wound about the
fitting, said fitting comprising a polar boss having shoulder
means defining a stepped configuration of decreasing diame-
ters m a direction outwardly of the vessel whereby sequential
layers of filaments lay against sequentially smaller diameters of
said fitting, the wind angle of each layer being such as to lay
adjacent to the largest unwound step diameter until the com-
posite thickness reaches the extremity of the step where the
wind angle of the wind pattern is changed such that the layers
lay adjacent the next smaller unwound step diameter.
10. A method of fabricating at least a generally spherical
portion of a filament wound pressure vessel wherein a plurality
of layers of filaments form part of the thickness of the vessel
comprising: '
providing a fitting with a polar opening and with shoulder
means defining a stepped configuration of decreasing
diameters in a direction outwardly of the vessel, and
winding said layers of filamenu about said polar boss
whereby sequenial layers of filaments lay against sequen-
tially smaller diameters of said fitting, the wind angle of
each layer being such as to lay adjacent to the largest
unwound step diameter until the thickness reaches the
extremity of the step, and changing the wind angle of the
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
ISll
wind pattern such that the layers lay adjuent the next
smaller unwound step diameter.
4,438,860
MAGNETIC TAPE CASSETTE
MMstothi Okunura, ud Hvuo Shib., both of Tokyo. J.pui,
mignon to TDK Elaetronlca Co., Ltd., Tokyo, J.pu
Filed Not. 19, 1981, S«r. No. 323,024
Cl.l!iia priority, .ppUcatloB Japu, Fab. 9, 1981, 86-16868rui
Int. a.J GllB 23/06.' B68H 7/48; B68D 6/34, 1/46
U.S. a. 220-4 B 3 ctala.
4438 859
ELECTRICAL JUNcfnON AND OUTLET BOX
LMMk Solek, St'Lunbcrt, Cuwda, uaignor to Coranumdar
Elactricd M.t«ri.la, Inc., St. Jeu, Cuuula
ContinuatioB of Scr. No. 360,121, Mw. 19, 1982, .budoned.
Thia .ppliction Jul. 29, 1983, Ser. No. 517,935
Int. a.3 H02G 3/08
U.S. a. 220-3 J 1 cidm
1. A unitary folded metal electrical wiring box comprising:
a generally flat base portion having a polygonally shaped
periphery defined by a plurality of angularly disposed
straight edges;
an equal plurality of sidewall portions;
said plurality of sidewall portions comprising first and sec-
ond adjacent sidewall portions, each having a first and
second edge;
each of said sidewall portions disposed generally perpendic-
ularly to said base portion and integrally joined thereto
along a portion of said first edge, said first edge being a
fold line coincident with a straight edge of said base por-
tion;
said first and second sidewall portions disposed at an angle
with one another to form a comer region;
said first sidewall portion providing an indented portion
adjacent to said comer region, said comer region being
rounded;
said indented portion being indented inwardly and extending
from said first edge to said second edge of said first side-
wall portion;
said second sidewall portion providing an extended portion
extending from said first edge to said second edge of said
second sidewall portion and being folded around the
comer at said comer region to lie generally parallel to said
first sidewall portion and mate with said indented portion
of said first sidewall portion creating a flat surface;
said extended portion of said second sidewall portion having
means engaging said first sidewall portion;
said means for engaging comprising a tab disposed on said
extended portion of said second sidewall portion, said tab
being folded inwardly over said second edge of said first
sidewall portion gripping said first sidewall portion;
farther including tab engaging means in said second edge of
said first sidewall portion for receiving said tab to prevent
lateral movement of said tab along said second edge;
■ud tab eng.ging means comprising a notch in said second
edge of said first sidewall portion at said indented portion.
1. A resin molded magnetic tape cassette comprising:
(a) a bottom plate of an upper half casing;
(b) a projecting plate which extends outwardly from and is
a continuation of said bottom plate; and
(c) an outer peripheral rib projecting vertically from the
juncture between said bottom plate and said projecting
plate, said outer peripheral rib being formed near the head
receiving portion of said upper half cuing,
wherein:
(d) said projecting plate has an at leut substantially uniform
thickness ti;
(e) the central portion of said bottom plate has an at least
substantially uniform thickness t2 which is greater than the
thickness ti; and
(0 the portion of said bottom plate immediately inwardly of
said outer peripheral rib tapers from the thickneu tj to the
thickneu ti at the point where uid outer peripheral rib
projects from the juncture between said bottom plate and
said projecting plate, whereby a white cloudy pattern in
the resin at the juncture between said bottom plate and
said projecting plate is substantially avoided.
4,438,861
VENTED INLET FOR TANKS LOADED FROM
PRESSURIZED TANKERS
JuBM W. McGuffey, Luaing, Mich., uaignor to Proceu
Equipment Corpor.tion, Bclding, Mich.
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 308,988
Int. a.} B65B 3/04
U.S. a 220-86 R WCUlmi
7. A vented inlet for a tank loaded from a pressurized tanker,
said inlet reducing the possibility of damage to the tank from a
surge of compressed air by venting the compressed air to the
surrounding air before the compressed air enters the tank, said
inlet comprising:
1312
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
NfARCH 27, 1984
a lower pipe having an upper end;
a plurality of generally planar gusset members extending
longitudinally from said upper end of said lower pipe,
each of said gusset members being oriented generally
radially with respect to said lower pipe, each of said gusset
members having a first portion mounted on said lower
pipe and a second portion remote from said lower pipe;
and
an upper pipe having a lower end operatively supported on
said second portions of said gusset members and an upper
end to receive a filler hose connection, said upper pipe
being generally axially aligned with said first pipe,
whereby liquid flowing out of said lower end of said upper
pipe falls through said vent space and into said lower pipe
and any compressed air flowing out of said lower end of
said upper pipe will pass through said vent space and
between said support members to the surrounding air.
4,438 862
DEVICE FOR PREVENTINb THE UNAUTHORIZED
REMOVAL OF FUEL FROM THE TANK OF A MOTOR
VEHICLE
Ellglo Bona, Turin, Italy, aisignor to Fiat Auto S.p.A., Turin,
Italy
FUed Oct. 15, 1981, Scr. No. 311,804
Claima priority, appUcation Italy, Oct 20, 1980, 68604 A/80:
May 15, 1981, 67652 A/81
lot a.} B65B 3/06
UA a 220-86 AT 11 Clainu
lying upon the contained liquid and for attachment to the
container sides in fluid tight relationship, the sheet having
excess material at ite perimeter to form into a depending fold;
flotation means attached to said cover and defining gas collec-
tion spaces for receiving gases evolving from said liquid; and
gas collection means for receiving and carrying away gases
collecting in said collection spaces, said cover being character-
ized in that:
said flotation means comprises generally parallel first and
second strings of floate spaced apart to define a longitudi-
nal passage, certain of said floats in each of said first and
second strings defining transverse passages in communica-
tion with said longitudinal passage;
connecting means extending between and connecting to-
gether said first and second strings and preventing said
first and second strings from moving apart; and,
said gas collection means comprises a conduit resting upon
and mounted between said first and second strings in
coextensive, overlying relation to said longitudinal pas-
sage, said conduit being buoyed in substantially stable
relation by said first and second strings, said gas collection
means further comprising flexible connector means and
piping coupled to said conduit for bridging the perimetri-
cal fold in said sheet of said cover.
4438864
TAMPERPROOF CLOSURE
Charles R. Helma, Mal?eni, Pa., assignor to Container Corpora-
tion of America, Chicago, III.
Filed Jun. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 386,632
Int a.3 B65D 41/32
U.S. a. 220-265 sctotaig
1. Anti-theft device for fitting within the filler pipe of a fuel
tank of a motor vehicle to prevent the introduction into the
filler pipe of a flexible hose for withdrawing fuel to the exterior
of the tank, wherein the device comprises:
a body provided with a cylindrical core and a plurality of
substantially planar closely spaced radial vanes extending
outwardly from said core, said vanes lying in different
planes which intersect each other along a common axis,
and
a rod having a first end connected to the said body and
means at the opposite end of said rod for anchorage within
the filler pipe.
4,438,863
GAS VENTING FLOATING COVER
John V. Wilaon, Islington, Canada, and William B. Kayt, La
Habra, Calif., asaignon to Globe Linings, Inc., Long Beach,
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,701
Int a.3 B65D 51/16
UA a. 220-227 70.1™
1. A gas venting floating cover for a liquid container
wherein said cover includes a sheet of flexible material for
1. In a tamperproof closure arrangement for a generally
cylindrical container with a body wall having, adjacent the
open end thereof, an internal flange presenting an axially in-
wardly facing abutment, an insertable lid comprising:
(a) a central portion, including a generally circular center
panel;
(b) an annular outer rim;
(c) said rim being formed of molded plastic and including:
(0 a base portion joined to said center panel;
(ii) a skirt portion disposed radially outward of and pivotal
with respect to said base portion, said skirt portion
being molded at an oblique angle to said base portion;
(iii) a relatively thin, annular, integral hinge interconnect-
ing said skirt portion and said base portion for accom-
inodating pivotal movement of said skirt portion rela-
tive to said base portion to permit insertion of the lid
into the container;
(d) said skirt portion including:
(i) a generally frusto-conical wall prior to insertion into
the container;
(ii) an integral annular retaining flange extending radially
outward from a lower portion of said frusto-conical
wall for engagement with said container body wall, said
lower portion being spaced axially downwardly from
said hinge;
(iii) a second flange extending radially outward from an
upper portion of said frusto-conical wall and defining
with said retaining flange an annular channel for receiv-
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1S13
ing said container body wall flange, said upper portion
being spaced radially outwardly from said base portion
and being spaced axially upwardly from said hinge;
whereby when the lid is inserted into the open end of the
container, the contact of the container with the lid causes
said skirt portion to pivot with said retaining flange mov-
ing radially outwardly and with said second flange mov-
ing radially inwardly so that said retaining flange lock-
ingly engages with the underside of said container body
wall flange to prevent removal of the lid from the con-
tainer without causing visible damage thereto.
4,438365
ANTI-SPILL UD FOR A DRINKING CUP
Joaeph J. Scattaregia, 112 Mal?em Dr., Normal, lU. 61761,
aaaigiior to Joseph J. Scattaregia, Normal, 111.
Filed Apr. 11, 1983, Scr. No. 483,553
Int. a.J B65D 41/26, 47/10
U A a 220-270 4 ciiin„
mg
1. A lid for mounting on the rim of a drinking cup compris-
a circular disk-like body having a circumferentially continu-
ous, down-turned peripheral channel section engageable
with the rim of the drinking cup;
the body having a stiffening arcuate rib spaced inwardly of
the peripheral channel section, extending less than a full
circle therewithin, and having circumferentially spaced
opposite ends;
the body having a pair of circumferentially spaced stiffening
transverse ribs extending transversely from the ends of the
arcuate rib to the peripheral channel section;
the body having a tear-out drink ub between the transverse
ribs, the sides of the ub being defined by weakened lines
extending along the insides of the transverse ribs, the outer
end of the tab being defined by a weakened line extending
along the inside of the peripheral channel section between
the transverse ribs, and the inner end of the Ub comprising
a manually lifuble portion defined by intersecting weak-
ened lines of a perforauble straw aperture;
whereby the intersecting weakened lines are common to the
drink Ub and the perforauble straw aperture; and
whereby further the lid is optionally usable in one mode in
which a straw is inserted through the straw aperture while
the straw engages the inner end portion of the Ub, and in
another mode in which the Ub is removed to provide a
larger, reinforced drink opening including part of the
straw aperture.
a ring made integral with said dome closure and extending
radially outwardly thereof;
an annular rise disposed adjacent the outer periphery of said
ring; and
said ring having a surface outboard of said dome closure for
receiving a clamping force, which routes said ring about
said annular rise producing compressive forces in said
fibers adjacent the outer surface of said dome closure and
adjacent said ring and tensile forces in said fibers adjacent
the inner surface of said dome closure and adjacent said
ring thereby reducing the forces in said fibers adjacent
said ring when the dome closure is internally pressurized.
4438 867
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DISPENSING TOOL
Da?id L. Mayne, Waterioo, and Darid Jahamaa, SherriU. both
of N.Y., assignors to Industrial Design A Development Core..
Waterloo, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,269
Int. a? B65D 85/42
U.S. a 221-197 24 ciaima
4,438366
PRESTRESSED DOME CLOSURE FLANGE
Albert A. Gegaregian, Sunayrale; Dennis K. Kuruma, MUpitaa,
and Kenneth W. Lengel, Sunnyrale, aU of CaUf., aaaignora to
Weitingbouae Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Aug. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 404,672
iBt CLi B65D 45/02. 45/30
VS. a. 220—319 10 Claims
1. A flange for prestressing the fibers adjacent inner and
outer surfaces of a dome closure and adjacent said flange,
comprising:
1. A manually operated tool for sequentially ejecting, in
predetermined orienution, individual electrical componenu of
predetermined dimensions which are gravity fed from a maga-
zine holding a stacked plurality of such componenu, said tool
comprising, in combination:
(a) a body portion having a first opening for receiving an
open end of the magazine, and a second opening for ejec-
tion of components from the tool;
(b) means for positioning said magazine open end in a prede-
termined location with said body portion;
(c) an actuating member having a portion manually engaga-
ble by an operator for movement of said actuating mem-
ber between first and second positions with respect to said
body portion;
(d) movable means arranged adjacent said predetermined
location for movement between a first position, effectively
blocking exit of components from said magazine open end,
and a second position, allowing exit of componenu from
said magazine open end, in response to movement of said
1S14
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
actuating member between its first and second positions,
respectively;
(e) a component transport member having an end portion
movable between a first position adjacent said second
opening and a second position immediately below said
movable means to receive on said end portion a compo-
nent fed by gravity from said magazine open end when
said movable means is in its second position, in response to
movement of said actuating member between iu first and
second positions, respectively; and
(0 an ejector portion effective to engage a component at said
second opening and eject it from said tool upon movement
of said actuating member to its second position.
4,438,869
DOSING DEVICE WITH BALL VALVE AND OPERATING
METHOD
Peter VicrkStter, LeTerkasen, and Panl-Otto Weltgen, HUden,
both of Fed. Rep. of Gcmuuiy, anignon to Henkel Kobuiuui-
ditgcfcllfchafl aof Aktien, Dnaseldorf-HolduiaicB, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
per No. PCr/EP81/00092, § 371 Date Feb. 8, 1982, § 102(c)
Date Feb. 8, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00348, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 4, 1982
PCT Filed Jul. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 348,065
Ctalma priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Gcrraaoy, Jul. 10,
1980, 3026067
Int. a.» GOIF U/26
UA a. 222-1 jctaimi
4,438,868
ENVELOPE VENDING MACHINE
Raymond M. Edwarda, 1037 Keith Dr., Hurst, Tex. 76053
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,851
Int a.3 B65H 3/26
UA a 221-240 7CI«faif
1. An envelope vending machine for dispensing single envel-
opes, comprising:
a housing having a closed top, a closed bottom, and side-
walls therebetween, and an envelope dispensing slot in
one of said sidewalls;
a sutionary slotted partition having upper and lower sur-
faces and front and rear edges supported in said housing
generally parallel with said closed bottom, said partition
having a recess formed in the front edge thereof in the
shape of an envelope flap, said recess being adapted to
receive the flap of an envelope to be dispensed, said slot-
ted partition having a channel formed in the upper surface
thereof which intersects said recess formed in said front
edge;
a moveable envelope support member slidably received
withm^d channel, said support member having a leading
edj^d opted to engage said envelope flap received in said
partition recess and said support member having a de-
pending flange received within said slot in said partition,
said support member being reciprocable in said channel
between an extended position for dispensing an envelope
and a retracted position for receiving an envelope flap in
said partition recess; and
a coin chute having a coin slide therein, said coin slide hav-
ing a longitudinal extent received within said housing and
engaging said support member depending flange whereby
reciprocal movement of said coin slide in said coin chute
reciprocates said envelope support member on said slotted
partition to thereby dispense an envelope through said
envelope dispensing slot.
1. A dosing device with ball valve for attachment to a liquid
container with a valve ball closing the discharge opening of the
dosing device in a tilted position of the container comprising a
ball valve, a valve ball guide tube having at least one lateral
opening leading towards the container interior over its length,
wherein the inside diameter of the valve ball guide tube is
clearly greater than the ball diameter and the ball diameter is
clearly greater than the width of the at least one lateral open-
ing in the valve ball guide tube, said valve ball guide tube
having a discharge opening, a sealing valve ball seat at its
discharge end and a lower part opposite its discharge end
expanding in funnel shape from the tube wall for a length
corresponding to at least half the ball diameter to a cylinder
having a solid circular bottom, the funnel shaped so that half
the aperture angle formed between the tube centerline and the
surface of the funnel-shaped area of the lower part is between
about 45* and 60*, whereby the ball remains in the funnel-
shaped area of the lower part without dropping into the tube in
a tilted position of the container not exceeding half the aper-
ture angle.
4,438,870
CAPTIVE DISPENSING CAP CONSTRUCTION
Morton StuU, SpUt Rock Rd., Boonton Township, Morris
County, N J. 07005
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,384
Int. a? B65D 47/20
U.S.a222-^ Wdaima
16. A captive dispensing cap construction comprising, in
combination:
(a) a tubular body part adapted to be carried by a container
and having a discharge passage, said body part having a
stopper extending upwardly from said passage,
(b) a screw cap part carried by said body part and surround-
ing said discharge passage,
(c) said screw cap part having a discharge opening into
which the stopper extends when the screw cap part is
screwed to iu full-on position on the body part,
(d) said screw cap and body parts having two pairs of mutu-
ally engageable portions,
(e) one pair of mutually engageable portions comprising
cooperable screw thread means respectively on said parts,
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
ISIS
for moving the screw cap part axially on the body part as
the screw cap part is turned,
(0 a lug disposed on the screw cap part,
(g) a stop shoulder on the body part, engageable with the lug
of the screw cap part to halt turning of the latter as it is
screwed to its full-on position,
(h) the screw thread means of the screw cap and body paru
having sufficient backlash to enable the screw cap part to
have an initial unscrewing turning movement from its
fully scrcwed-on position without outward axial displace-
ment, through an angle essentially in excess of 20* before
tending to cause such displacement,
(i) said other pair of mutually engageable portions compris-
ing a cam track on the body part and a follower portion on
the screw cap part,
0) said cam track having a first portion which lies in a plane
substantially perpendicular to the axis of the screw cap
part, and a second portion of spiral configuration, said
cam track and follower portion becoming effective to
move the screw cap part axially outwardly in response to
the latter being turned through an angle essentially in
excess of 20* , as the follower portion leaves the first por-
tion of the cam track and engages the second portion
thereof
4,438,871
DISPENSER
Joaef Eckert, Mellrichstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Wlscherath and Schreiner KG, Mellrichstadt, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed May 26, 1982, Ser. No. 382,094
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 27.
1981, 3121075 J, J s ,
Int. a.3 B67D 5/52
II.S. a 222-137 lOQaims
second pump chamber 23 of smaller diameter than the first
pump chamber 14, and having a second metering piston 24 u
mounted coaxially of the first pump chamber, the second roe-
tenng piston being connected to the plunger 3 and the second
pump chamber 23 being connected to a second supply tank 27
within the first supply tank 17, and ejection channel means for
material from said second pump chamber.
4,438,872
DISPENSING APPARATUS
Dan W. Dooley, 6182 W. Dawn St., and Robert T. Bromps, 6239
SW. Edgcwood, both of Lake Oswego, Oreg. 97034
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285388
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 15,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 GOIF 11/06; B65D 88/54
UA a. 222-217 3 ctai„„
1. A dispensing apparatus for pressurized viscous material
and comprising,
an elongate body including end caps and defining a bore,
said end caps each defining an air inlet port,
a sleeve slidably disposed within the bore and defining a
chamber closed at its ends by a first plug and a second
plug,
biasing means interposed between said second sleeve plug
and an end cap of the elongate body to bias the sleeve to
a loading position,
a piston within said sleeve,
a material inlet port on the body,
said sleeve defining an inlet port registerable with said inlet
port on the body for the admission of pressurized material
into said sleeve,
a material outlet port on said body,
said sleeve defining a discharge port registerable with said
material outlet port on said body,
valve means in communication with a source of pressurized
air and the air inlet port in said end caps and manually
operable to alternately direct pressure via said end caps to
the ends of said body defined bore, and
said first plug of the sleeve including a metering orifice for
the admission of air in a metered manner to act on the
piston within said sleeve to urge the sleeve to a discharge
position and the piston along said sleeve to discharge
sleeve contents.
1. A dispenser for pasty subsunces and/or liquids having a
supply tank with an axially displaceable follower piston and an
ejection device with an operating plunger, comprising a recip-
rocable metering piston in a pump chamber, the pump chamber
being connected on one side to the supply tank and on the
other to an outlet for the dispenser, a plug in said outlet biassed
in the direction of closure, and further characterized in that a
4,438373
GROUND DRIVEN TOP DRESSER UTILIZING SPEQAL
CLUTCH MECHANISM
William C. Kaercher, Jr., Minneapolis, Minn., assignor to
Turfco Manufacturing, lac, Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed Oct. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,756
Int a.3 AOIC 15/16
\2&. a. 222-616 ,1 ctal^
1. A top dresser adapted to be pulled across the ground
comprising frame means, wheel means supporting said frame
means, a hopper extending transversely of said frame means
1316
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27. 1984
having a lower opening through which material contained in
said hopper is discharged, a conveyor belt mounted for move-
ment beneath said hopper for receiving material discharged
through said opening and moving such material rearwardly
relative to the direction the dresser is pulled, a cylindrical
brush mounted for rotation about an axis generally parallel to
said hopper so as to engage and propel material from said belt
into the ground, said wheel means including at least a flrst
wheel subjacent the left side of said frame means and at least a
second wheel subjacent the right side of said frame means, and
4.43837S
WHEELCHAIR CARRIER
WilUttn E. FritKh, 756 Bnffklo Or^ Carol Stnam, lU. 60187
FIM Apr. 22, 1983. Scr. No. 487.840
Int a.i B60R 9/06
VJS. a. 224—42.03 R 5 cialoM
means connecting said conveyor belt and cylindrical brush to
said wheel means so that said belt and brush are both ground
driven by said wheel means, said means connecting said con-
veyor belt and said cylindrical brush to said wheel means
including a remotely operated clutch comprising a multi-faced
cam and a one-way clutch mechanism, said one-way clutch
mechanism indexing said cam by one face each time it is actu-
ated, and including a flexible actuator for actuating said one-
way clutch mechanism, said overrunning clutches preventing
said conveyor belt and said cylindrical brush from operating
when the top dresser is pushed backwards.
1. A wheelchair carrier comprising: a rigid basket frame-
work, including a pair of sideframe members spaced apart to
receive the width of a collapsed wheelchair therebetween, a
crossbrace joining respective back ends of said sideframe mem-
bers and defining a first outstop, a first pendant, U-shaped
member joining respective front ends of said sideframe mem-
bers to define both a second, opposed outstop and a roll-up step
for use in raising a wheelchair into said framework, and a
second pendant, U-shaped member attached intermediate the
ends of said sideframe members and having substantially
greater depth than said first U-frame member to. define a
wheelchair downstop; and coupling means for releasibly
mounting said framework to an automotive bumper.
of
4,438,874
UNITARY GARMENT HANGER SYSTEM
Jack M. Zuckennao, and Andrew M. Zuckennan, both
110-11 Queens Blvd., Foreat Hills, N.Y. 11375
FUed Aug. 21, 1981, Scr. No. 295,111
Int. a.3 A47J 51/084. 51/097
UA a 223-88 naalms
4,438.876
COMBINATION BACK PACK AND TENT FRAME
Russell G. Ward, 2050 SW. 71st Ave., Portlaod, Oreg. 97225
FUed Jun. 18, 1981, Scr. No. 275.062
Int. a.3 A45F 3/08
U.S. a 224-154 13 Claims
16. A unitary hanger system comprising
first and second hanger elements,
and means formed unitary with and joining together said
first and second hanger elements in a substantially fiat
condition,
and said joining means permitting movements of said hanger
elements relative to each other out of said substantially flat
condition to a selected substantially side-by-side position
and to positions on opposite sides of each other and in-
cluding means permitting their movement to equal and
different heights relative to the other.
1. A back pack frame having separable members which may
be reassembled into a tent frame, said pack frame comprising,
tubular back pack frame members,
means coupling the tubular members to another in a detach-
able manner,
tent frame components stowed in juxtaposition within cer-
tain of said tubular members, said tent frame components
arranged in pairs with each pair axially extractible from
one of said frame members and thereafter positionable to
constitute a part of the tent framework, hinge means
joining the tent frame components into said pairs.
KfARCH 27. 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1517
4.438377
HELMET RESTRAINING DEVICE
WfllittB S. JacksoB, P.O. Box 7370, Ann Arbor, Mich. 48107
Filed JuB. 13, 1983, Scr. No. 503^25
iBt a.) B62J 11/00
UA a 224-275 jcw^
the bottom pivotal arms in a locked relationship with each
other and the central frame member thereby secunng the
skis and ski poles between the pivotal arms and the central
frame member, and
locking means to secure the carrier frame to the rack means.
whereby the carrier frame can be removed from the rack
means and be easily transported while securely retaining
the skis and sli poles.
1. A restrammg device for securing motorcycle helmets or
the like to cycles comprising:
a seat strap;
a pair of anchoring means releasably secured at each end
respectively of the seat strap for engaging the vehicle and
securing the seat strap across a top surface of the vehicle;
means for adjusting the length of the seat strap to insure a
tight fit;
a pair of connector rings slidably mounted upon the seat
strap;
a restraining cup adapted to cover a substantial section of the
top surface of the helmet; and
a pair of fastener means fixedly secured at opposite ends of
the restraining cup, each fastener including means for
releasably securing each end respectively of the restrain-
ing cup to each of the connector rings thereby securing
the restraining cup to the seat strap and the helmet there-
between.
4,438379
SUSPENSION FOR THE PIVOTABLY SEATED TAPE
DRIVE MOTOR IN A CASSETTE MAGNETIC TAPE
DEVICE
Guttom Rudi, FJellharaar, Norway, assignor to Taadbcrg Data
A/S, Oslo, Norway
FUed Mar. 30, 1982, Scr. No. 363,436
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 31.
1981, 3112802
Int. a.' B65H 17/20; F16H 13/10; GllB 15/28
U.S. a 226-188 3Ctai^
4.438378
SKI RACK AND CARRIER
Terence M. Heslop, 331 Sussex La., Lake Forest, lU. 60045
FUed Not. 12, 1982, Scr. No. 441.157
Int. a.) B60R 9/04
UA a. 224-319 21 aaims
1. A earner for skis and ski poles for mounting on a roof of
an automobUe or sinular structure comprising:
rack means,
mounting means on the rack means to securely mount the
rack means to the roof,
a pair of substantially identical carrier frames adapted for
removable mounting adjacent to each other to the rack
means.
each carrier frame having a rectangular central frame mem-
ber and top and bottom pairs of pivotal arms, each pivotal
arm connected at one end to the central frame member,
the pivotal arms spaced apart from each other with the top
pair and bottom pair of arms flanking the central frame
member, each pair of pivotal arms adapted to receive and
secure multiple scu of skis or ski poles at two poinu be-
tween the arms and the central frame member,
a locking end member for securing the top pivotal arms to
1. A suspension for pivoubly seating a capstan motor in a
cassette magnetic tape device, comprising: a bearing fork hav-
ing two free ends and a bearing reuining aperture in each free
end, the bearing fork being shaped so as to receive the capstan
motor in a seating position against a base portion thereof be-
tween the free ends; a spring element connected between the
bearing fork and a portion of a principal frame of the upe
device so that a capstan wheel of the motor it pressed against
a drive wheel of the cassette with a defined force; a bearing
neck freely positioned in and through each of the bearing
retaining apertures, each of the bearing necks having a bearing
end facing and in contact with the motor; opposite ends of each
of the bearing necks being received against respective inside
comer edges of portions of the principal frame of the upe
device; respective sink screws having heads at each of said
opposite ends of the bearing necks and positioned at the respec-
tive corner edges such that an under surface of the head of
each of the sink screws clamps the respective bearing neck at
the inside comer edge; and the sink screws being arranged
such that by turning one of the other sink screws the respective
bearing neck abuts against an end stop at the comer edge while
the other bearing neck is moved along the comer edge by the
action of the sink screw when tuming so as to tightly clamp the
capstan motor between the two bearing ends of the bearing
necks.
4.438 880
ULTRASONIC WIRE BOND TOUCHDOWN SENSOR
Michael C. Smith, and Hal W. Smith, Jr.. both of Costa Mesa,
CaUf., assignors to Orthodyne Electronics Corporation. Costa
Mesa,CaUf.
FUed Aug. 17, 1981. Ser. No. 293303
Int. a.3 B23K 1/06
U.S. a. 228-1 A 24 Claims
1. An ultrasonic bonding device comprising an ultrasonic
bonder having a transducer that is connected to a tool for
ultrasonic bonding or welding that is in tum driven by a gener-
1518
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
ator at a specific voltage to provide ultrasonic vibrations for
welding with a support for said tool that moves upwardly and
downwardly driven by a motor wherein the improvement
comprises:
means for detecting increased impedance when the tool
makes conuct with a work surface by virtue of the fact
that the transducer is dampened; and,
means for stopping the motor when such impedance is in-
creased which is tantamount to touchdown.
4,438 882
NOZZLE, PARTICULARLY FOR BURNERS
Herbert Frehner, Boppelsco, Switzerland, anignor to Satronlc
AG, Regenadorf, Switzerland
per No. PCr/CH81/00075, § 371 Date Mar. 8, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 8, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00333, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 4, 1982
PCT FUed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 359,651
Clalmt priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 10, 1980.
5305/80
Int. a.i B05B 1/14
U.S. a. 239-462 , c,.i„
4438 881
SOLAR ASSISTED HEAT PUMP HEATING SYSTEM
Joaeph C. Pendcrgraaa, 1283 Weaael Rd., Gaineayille, Ga. 30501
FUed Jan. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 228,919
Int a.3 G05D 2i/00: F25B 27/02
U.S. a 237-2 B 31 ctal^
1. A nozzle for atomizing a fluid especially for use in burn-
ers, comprising: a hollow nozzle casing having an inflow side
and an exit bore, a filter located at said inflow side and having
orifices with a free passage, a whiri member in said casing and
having a whirl member head at said exit bore, an annular
channel between the inner wall of said casing and said whirl
member, and an annular protective member formed by a sheet
of sieve material in said annular channel at said whirl member
head and having oriflces with a free passage larger than the
free passage of said filter orifices, said sheet being positioned
between said whirl member head and an assembly sleeve, said
annular channel being defined by the inner wall of said nozzle
casing and the outer wall of the assembly sleeve, whereby
impurities contained in the fluid are retained in the filter, and
impurities originating from the nozzle are retained by said
protective member.
30. In a heat pump including a compressor, an evaporator
and heat exchanger means interconnected in a refrigerant flow
relationship, and a fan driven by motor means for circulating
ambient air over said evaporator to extract heat from the air;
the improvement comprising refrigerant operating parameter
sensing means for detecting a refrigerant operating parameter
after said refrigerant fluid passes through said evaporator, and
modulating means responsive to said refrigerant sensing means
for controlling the flow of ambient air through said evaporator
to maintain a predetermined parameter range of said refriger-
ant fluid, said modulating means being operative to restrict air
flow during periods of high ambient temperature thereby
enabling said heat pump ^o operate at higher than normal
outdoor temperatures.
4438 883
DYNAMIC PRESSURE ATTENUATOR AND METHOD
Stanley W. Ziaon, Irrine, and Robert N. Turer, Long Beach,
both of Calif., auignon to Getty Synthetic Fuels, Inc., Signal
FUed Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,333
Int. a.3 B05B 1/14
U.S. a. 239-553 J 24 Claima
1. A dynamic pressure attenuator comprising:
a housing;
NfARCH 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1319
wall means defining a plurality of wind pasuges extending
through the interior of said housing, said wind pasuges
being open to allow the wind to pau therethrough;
said wall means having a plurality of poru extending
through the wall means and providing communication
between the interior of the housing and at least some of
said wind passages whereby when the wind passes
through said wind passages, the dynamic preuure in said
housing ouuide of said wind puuges is substantially less
than the dynamic preuure within said wind puuges
through which the wind is pauing; and
said housing having means for permitting a gu to be dis-
charged into the interior of said housing whereby such gu
can flow through at leut some of uid ports and usociated
wind pasuges to the atmosphere.
4,438 884
QUICK DISCONNECT NOZZLE
Edward J. O'Brien, Barrington; Gwy A. Paulun, Gene?a, and
Daniel J. FiUcicchia, Aurora, all of lU., auignon to Spraying
Syatenw Company, Wheaton, lU.
Filed No?. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,199
Int. a.i B05B 15/00
U.S. a 239-600 7 ci^^
scoop means to pick up a load of material;
the scoop means including enclosing sidewalls defining an
open front to admit the material therethrough and a right
side and a left side;
auger means rouuble within the scoop means to direct the
material from one side toward the other,
the auger means comprising a shaft and blades rouuble with
the shaft.
1. A quick disconnect coupling comprising first and second
coupling members each having an internal fluid puugeway,
said coupling members being selectively engageable with each
other and at leut one of uid members being adapted for con-
nection to a source of fluid so u to permit fluid transfer
through said puugeways, one of uid coupling members defin-
ing an internal chamber having an annular seat at one end
thereof, an annular sealing member positioned in uid chamber
with one end thereof disposed against uid annular wat, uid
sealing member having an inwardly bowed portion intermedi-
ate its ends defining an annular space between the outer periph-
ery of uid sealing member and uid chamber, the other of uid
coupling members having an annular end that is engageable
with the other end of said sealing member and positionable into
uid chamber for axially compressing the ualing member be-
tween said annular end and annular seat while forcing said
bowed section radially inwardly to accommodate such com-
pression, and means for retaining said coupling members in said
sealing member compreuing relation whereby said sealing
member forms a fluid ual between said annular end and annu-
lar seat and upon an increase in fluid preuure within said
coupling member pasugeways said bowed sealing member
poriion is forced radially outwardly causing an increase in
axial sealing preuure between said sealing member and said
annular seat and annular end.
4,438,885
MANURE LOADER
Menin G. Martin, Myeratown, Pa., aaalgnor to Hedlund Manu'
facturing Co., Inc., BoycevUle, Wis.
Continuation of Ser. No. 119,523, Feb. 7, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,549
Int. a.3 B02C 79/00
U.S. a 241-101 B 16 daims
1. In a loading apparatus suiuble for loading liquid and
semi-liquid materials, the combination of:
at leut some of the blades being provided with openings
suitable to chop the material u the blades are routed;
loading means in material communication with the scoop
means to pick up the directed material and to unload the
material at a location remote from the scoop means, and
drive means to route the auger means and drive the loading
means.
4,438,886
DOUBLE WIRE.WINDING MACHINE WITH
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER
Marc Meiaur, Meyrln; Kurt Weber, Echandens, and Louis
VeyrasMt, RoUc, aU of Switzerland, aaaignon to MaUlefer
S.A., Ecublent, Switzerland
FUed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250.917
Claima priority, appUcation Switzerland, Apr. 11, 1980,
2813/80; Dk. 10, 1980, 9110/80
Int. Ci} B65H 54/02
U.S. a. 242-25 A 19 cizima
1. A double winding machine with automatic transfer for
continuously winding metal wire on reels which each have a
barrel, comprising:
two reel supporu with parallel drive shafts, each equipped
with a snagging mechanism for snagging a leading end of
wire to be wound;
each snagging mechanism comprising a hook-bearing disk
with a hook, an uncoiling member, and bearing means for
1S20
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
supporting said hook-bearing disk and said uncoiling
member coaxially with respect to the reel and for permit-
ting a relative displacement from an initial position to a
displaced position between said disk and said uncoiling
member;
disengageable coupling means for rotationally coupling said
disk, said uncoiling member and said reel;
means for translationally disengaging said coupling means;
means for braking said hook-bearing disk to produce a lag of
said disk with respect to said reel in order to lengthen said
leading end; and
means for performing said relative displacement at the time
of said lag, said lengthened leading end being thus retained
through said hook and said uncoiling member.
width to slide between two of the spaced serrations of said
spline means, said protrusions shaped to seat into the
associated shaped cutout of said serrations for aligning
4,438,887
GROOVED TRAVERSE DRUM FOR USE IN DRUM
WINDER
Masao Mino, and Takeshi Ohno, both of Yao, Japan, assignors
to Kabushiki Kaisha Mino Seisakusho, Osaka, Japan
FUed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 372,004
Int. a.3 B65H 54/4S
U.S. a. 242-43.2 n Qaims
1. A grooved traverse drum having a spiral yarn guide
groove in the peripheral surface thereof, the yarn guide groove
including at least one crossover point where a shallow groove
portion is interrupted by a deep groove portion, said deep
groove portion having sidewalls, wherein a cylindrical abra-
sion-resistant means is inserted into said drum in the inter-
rupted shallow groove portion, said cylindrical abrasion-resist-
ant means having a notch forms substantially the whole of the
shallow groove portion at the crossover point such that yarn
guided by said shallow groove portion only contacts the notch
in said abrasion-resistant means, wherein said notch in the
abrasion-resistant means has a V-shaped cross-section defming
two legs of a V, taking the place of the interrupted shallow
groove portion at the crossover point, and one of the legs of
the V of the notch that serves as a guide for the yam entering
the shallow groove portion, is raised on the drum constituting
material, while the other leg of the V that serves as a guide for
the yam passing out of the shallow groove portion, is indented
beneath the drum constituting material.
4438 888
SELF-ALIGNING WEB REEL
Hugh D. Seelinger, Tucson, Ariz., assignor to International
Business Machines Corp., Annonk, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 10, 1M2, Ser. No. 356,879
Int. a.3 B65H 19/04
VJS. a. 242-56.9 22 Claims
1. Self-aligning apparatus driven by a rotatable shaft for
winding a web of material comprising in combination:
spline means afilxed to the roUUble shaft including at least
one set of serrations spaced around the periphery of said
spline means with a shaped cutout in at least one side of
each of said serrations with each set spaced at the same
axial distance along the shaft;
a reel including an outer circular hub for accommodating
the web of material and an inner circular hub intercon-
nected to said outer hub, said inner hub including elon-
gated protrusions spaced around its inner diameter of a
said reel with the shaft, the web of material and for rotat-
able driving said reel with said spline means and shaft; and
tension means for adjusting the tension of the web of mate-
rial as the web is wound on said reel.
4 438 889
SYSTEM FOR DECELERATING THE DRIVE OF A
WEB-WINDING APPARATUS
Herbert Schonmeier, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Jagenberg Werke AG, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,214
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 17,
1981, 3101360
Int. a.J B65H 17/12. 25/32
U.S. a. 242-67.1 R 3 Qaims
Nominol
Ltngtli
Siipp«t-fUI
OiomiKr
ct.
r 'n Ptctl.rati... I
W-f t^,,
1. In a process for winding a web to obtain a desired nominal
length, wherein the drive of the web winding apparatus is
decelerated to a standstill, the improvement wherein the step
of decelerating comprises: selecting a desired nominal length
of the web, determining the instanUneous web speed; and
decelerating the drive, at a time determined as a function of the
selected nominal length and the instantaneous web speed, with
a preset degree of deceleration obtained from two differenct
curves of deceleration, one of which would result in the nomi-
nal length of the web being undershot, while the other would
result in its being overshot if either curve alone were effective
upon initiation of deceleration, continuously determining the
insUntaneous degree of deceleration and switching between
said two curves whenever the instantaneous degree of deceler-
ation indicates the nominal length would be undershot or
overshot.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1321
4,438,890
BOBBIN LOCK
WUIiam J. Schroder, Spartanburg, S.C., auignor to Milliken
Research Corporation, Spartanburg, S.C.
FUed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,462
Int a.J B65H 49/02; D03J 5/08
VJS. a. 242-130 3 cui^
3. A creel for a yam consuming machine comprising a plu-
rality of yam package support members, each yarn support
member having a creel pin projecting outwardly therefrom, an
elongated, substantially rigid adaptor member mounted on
each of said creel pins, means to secure said adaptor members
to said creel pins, a yam package telescoped over said adaptors
having a core extending therebeyond, a groove in the outer
surface of each of said adaptors, a second means mounted in
each of said grooves between said core and said adaptor mem-
ber engaging the end of said core to prevent said core from
sliding off said adaptor, said second means including an elon-
gated spring steel member mounted to the adaptor member,
said spring steel member having an upstanding flange on one
end engaging the end of said core and a cap member connected
onto the end of said core with a portion thereof engaging and
maintaining said upstanding flange into engagement with said
core.
as it is collected onto the second reel and providing a Upe
tension signal which corresponds to said tensile force;
first and second variable ratio coupling members for rou-
tively coupling the first and second shafts to one another,
whereby rotation of the first shaft is coupled to the second
shaft to route the second shaft at a rate of roution corre-
sponding to the selected ratjo with respect to a rate of
roution of the first shaft, said selected ratio of said rate of
roution of the first and second shafts being selecuble
within a predetermined range of ratios; said variable ratio
coupling members comprising flexible drive transmission
means for mechanically interconnecting said first and
second coupling members, said first and second variable
coupling members each comprising first and second pul-
ley halves, each said pulley half having a central axis of
roution and a respective friction surface for engaging said
flexible drive transmission means, said first and second
pulley halves being coaxially movably arranged with
respect to one another along said central axis of rotation
and
servo motor means responsive to said upe tension signal
from said tension sensing means, said servo motor means
being coupled between said first and second portions of
said second shaft to provide relative rotation between said
first and second portions of said second shaft, said second
portion of said second shaft being coupled to said second
variable coupling member for producing said relative
coaxial displacement between said first and second pulley
halves, thereby to select said selected ratio of said rate of
rotation of the first and second shafts.
4,438,891
TAPE TRANSPORT SYSTEM
Selmer L. Wiig, Plainfleld, N.J., aMignor to Lockheed Electron-
ics Company, Inc., Plainfleld, N.J.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,658
Int. a.3 B65H 59/04: GllB 15/32. 15/28
UA a. 242-190 5 Qaims
4438 892
TAPE CASSETTE, ESPEQALLY A MAGNETIC TAPE
CASSETTE
Horst Fitterer, Mannheim; Hubert Koob, Willstactt, and Bert
NesUer, Seelbach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
BASF Aktiengescllschaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jan. 22. 1982, Ser. No. 341,885
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 22,
1981, 8101456[U]
Int. a.3 G03B 1/04: GllB 15/32
U.S. Q. 242-199 9 cuun.
1. A tension control system for a tape transport arrangement
of the type wherein a first reel having tape wound thereon
supplies upe which is drawn therefrom by a Upe drive mecha-
nism, the drawn Upe being collected on a second reel, the first
and second reels being mechanically coupled to first and sec-
ond shafts, respectively, said second shaft having first and
second independently routable portions, the first portion of
said second shaft being coupled to said second reel, the tension
control system comprising:
tension sensing means for detecting a tensile force in the tape
2. A tape cassette, especially a magnetic wpe cassette, com-
prising a housing, at least one hub rouubly mounted on a
collar on the housing, a roll of tape wound on the said one hub
having at least one central recess, at least one aperture in the
housing which allows a drive spindle to enter the cassette to
drivably engage the said one hub and which is surrounded by
the said collar, and at least one liner located between the said
one hub and the housing and provided with a hole therein to
allow the drive spindle to pass through the said one Imer to
engage the said one hub, wherein adjacent to the hole in the
said one liner, the said one liner is provided with at least one
raised bearing portion which projecu into the said central
recess in the said one hub and thereby resiliently supports the
said one hub radially and axially, preventing it from making
contact with the said collar.
1S22
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
M38^3
PRIME POWER SOURCE AND CONTROL FOR A
GUIDED PROJECnLE
nmotfay B. Sandf, Acton, Maci., and Ronald R. Sinclair, Moul-
toaboro, N.H., assignon to Sandera Anodates, Inc., Nashua,
NJl.
Filed Aug. 10, 1973, Ser. No. 392,715
Int. a.3 F42B 15/02
VJS. a 244— 3J1 11 Claims
of one end thereof, a bent piece bent inwardly of said base plate
and integrally connected to the other end of said base plate,
and a pressing piece folded into between said bent piece and
said base plate and integrally connected to the end of said bent
piece, a holding space being formed between said base plate
and said pressing piece, said fitting comprising a mounting
portion having an upwardly warped end portion bent into an
inverted U-shape, a flat plate portion extending downwardly
from the mounting portion and an abutting portion outwardly
bent from the lower end of the flat plate portion.
4,438,895
VERTICAL SEAT ADJUSTER FOR VEHICLE SEATS
Richard W. A. Rees, West Bloonfleld, Mich., assignor to Gen-
eral Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 383,471
Int. a.3 F16M n/24
U.S. a. 248—396 5 Claims
4. In a projectile including a main housing capable of being
spun at high speeds and a canard frame capable of being de-
spun and having deflectable canards thereon, wherein the
improvement comprises:
a set of windings coupled to said main housing;
a rotor coupled to said deflecuble canards; and
means for applying electrical signals to said windings to
occasion deflection of said canards.
4,438,894
HOLDER
Koichl Yaotani, Aklkawa; Minoni Yoshida, HacbiolUi, and
Sciichi Sato, Yokohama, all of Japan, aMignors to Nissan
Motor Corp. and Kato HatsiUyo Kaisha Ltd., both of
Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,290
Claims priority, appUcation Japui, May 15, 1980, 55-115779
Int. a.3 F16L 3/08
U.S. a. 248—73 4 Claims
10 12
4 7
1. A fltting to be used in combination with a holder compris-
ing a base plate having a hooking projection on the inner side
1. A seat support mechanism for mounting a vehicle seat on
a vehicle for vertical adjustment thereof relative to the vehicle
comprising, in combination,
an elongate seat support for supporting the seat and includ-
^ ing a generally vertically directed slot in a first portion
thereof,
spaced first and second pivot means mounted on the vehicle,
the first pivot means extending through the slot of the seat
support,
a lever having one end thereof rotatably secured to the first
portion of the seat support and the other end thereof
routably secured to the first pivot means,
means pivotally mounting a second poriion of the seat sup-
ix)rt to the second pivot means,
rotation of the lever about the first pivot means causing the
first portion of the seat support and lever to rotate relative
to each other to vertically adjust the first poriion of the
seat suppori as the slot of the seat support moves verti-
cally relative to the first pivot means and the second
portion of the seat support rotates relative to the second
pivot means,
a lock plate including a series of detent means, each detent
means representing a veriical position of the seat suppori
relative to the first pivot means and being selectively
engageable with the first pivot means to lock the seat
support in such position,
cooperating means on the lock plate and the seat suppori
mounting the lock plate on the seat suppori for movement
therewith and sliding movement relative thereto between
(1) a locked position wherein one detent means of the lock
plate engages the first pivot means to lock the seat
support in the vertical position represented by the one
detent means by blocking relative rotational movement
between the seat suppori and lever, and
(2) a released position wherein the one detent means of the
lock plate is disengaged from the first pivot means to
permit relative rotational movement between the seat
support and lever as the seat suppori moves to a differ-
ent vertical position relative to the first pivot means,
return of the lock plate to locked position engaging
another detent means of the lock plate with the first
pivot means to lock the seat support in the veriical
position represented by such detent means,
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1S23
means biasing the lock plate to locked position, and,
release means for moving the lock plate to released position.
4438 896
SEGMENTED COLLAR IIUPOD FOR HOLDING
SURVEYOR'S STAKE
George W. Hall, 3200 Viking Dr., Sioux Qty, Iowa 51104
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 305,916
Int. a.3 F16M J3/00
U.S. a. 248-523 , Qalm
said stake receiving opening in response to rotation of said
thumb screw so as to hold said stake in a vertical position,
each of said legs being pivotable independent of one another
in a substantially unlimited arc about the axis of said bolt
extending through said bolt receiving hole in said leg.
4,438397
HEADRAIL INSTALLATION BRACKET
Francis VecchlareUl, River Edge, NJ., assignor to Hunter
Douglas International N.V., Rooi Catoo^e. Netherlands
Antilles
Filed Aug. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 404,294
Int. a.3 F16M 13/00: A47H 1/14
U.S. a. 248-544 e Claims
1. A tripod for holding a surveyor's stake comprising:
collar means comprising at least three collar segments, each
of said collar segments comprising an arcuate portion
having opposite ends, each of said opposite ends having a
hinge flange extending radially outwardly with respect to
the arc of curvature of said arcuate portion, said flanges
each having a bolt receiving hole therein;
at least three legs, each having an upper end and a lower
end;
said collar segments being positioned in end to end relation
to form a continuous circle with said hinge flanges or the
adjacent ends of said segments being paired in facing
spaced apart relation with said bolt receiving holes of said
paired spaced apart flanges being in registered alignment;
said upper ends of said legs having a surface for mating
engagement with said hinge flanges and each leg being
interposed between one of said spaced apart pairs of
flanges,
said upper ends of said legs each having a bolt receiving hole
in registered alignment with said bolt receiving holes of
said one spaced apart pair of flanges;
a bolt extending through each of said registered pairs of bolt
receiving holes in said pairs of flanges and also extending
through said bolt receiving hole in said upper end of the
one of said legs therebetween;
said bolt having a head at one end thereof and nut means
threadably engaging the opposite end thereof to permit
threadable adjustment of the tightness with which said
head and nut press said pair of flanges and said upper end
of said leg together whereby said legs can be selectively
pivoted into a desired position and locked into that posi-
tion;
said collar segmenu and said legs when fully assembled
forming a stake receiving opening located centrally with
respect to the circle formed by said segments,
holding means connected to said collar means for grasping
and holding a vertically disposed surveyor's stake extend-
ing through said stake receiving opening to a point adja-
cent the ground surface,
at least three thumb screws each threadably extending
through one of said collar segmenu in a radial direction
with respect to said stake receiving opening; each of said
thumb screws having an inner radial end adapted to move
towards and retentively engage a surveyor's stake within
1. A Venetian blind headrail installation bracket for mount-
ing of a U-shaped Venetian blind headrail to a frame member,
characterized in having a body including first and second body
poriions extending parallel to the longitudinal axis of the U-
shaped headrail adapted to be mounted thereby, mounting
means on said body adapted to mount said bracket to a frame
member, an outwardly facing supporting member on said first
body portion adapted to support a first edge of a U-shaped
headrail, abutment means on said body, a slot-like opening in
said second body portion, and a resilient spring member having
an extended portion being supported on one side by said abut-
ment means and on an opposite side by said extended portion
extending through said opening outwardly of said body with
said extended portion being adapted to support a second edge
of said U-shaped headrail and said extended portion being
movable towards said abutment means against the force of said
spring means to allow disengagement of the first edge of a
U-shaped headrail from said outwardly facing supporting
member.
4438 898
CHAIN CONTROL LOCKING ASSEMBLY
Jack R. Knoblauch, Byron Center; Duane M. Bcukema, Grand
Rapids, and Kenneth W. Houski, GraadriUe, aU of Mich.,
auignon to Steclcasc Inc., Grand Rapids, Mich.
FUed May 1, 1980, Ser. No. 145,622
Int. a.' F16M 13/00
U.S. a. 248-561 30 Claims
1. In a chair control having a stationary member for mount-
ing to a base, a tiltable member pivotally mounted with respect
to said stationary member, bias means operably connected
between said stationary and tiltable members for controlling
the rate of tilt of said tiltable member with respect to said
stationary member and for biasing said tiltable member to a
normal position, and means for locking said tiltable member
with respect to said stationary member, the improvement in
said chair control comprising: said locking means including a
rigid member movably mounted on said chair control; a pivot-
ally mounted rod having a deviation therein defining a lever,
said lever engaging said rigid member and pivoting said rigid
member when said rod is twisted, said rigid member being of
such a configuration and having such an orientation in its
mounting to said chair control that when in said locking posi-
tion, it extends from a position of operable engagement with
said tilting member to a position of operable engagement with
1S24
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
said stationary member, thereby preventing relative movement 4,43%fiO0
of the two, and such that when in said unlocking position, it is LOCKING MECHANISM FOR ANNULAR BLOWOUT
PREVENTER
Guy R. Schaeper, and Richard A. Olaon, both of Hoofton, Tcx^
attignon to NL Indastriea, Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Jnn. 5, 1980. Ser. No. 156,722
Int a.J E21B 33/06: F16L 21/08
VS. CL 251—1 B 12 Claims
out of operable engagement with one of said tiltable and sta-
tionary members whereby said tiltable member can tilt with
respect to said stationary member.
4,438,899
TRANSPORT BRACKET FOR OUTBOARD MOTORS
Dale J. Perkins, 704 W. Grand, and Leon L. Lincicum, 222 S.
2nd, both of Union, Oreg. 97883
FUed Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337^9
Int a.' F16M 7/00
U.S. a. 248-642 3 Claims
1. In an outboard motor pivotally connected to a clamp for
securing the outboard motor to a transom of a boat, wherein
the clamp includes a locking pin engageable through aligned
apertures provided in a pair of spaced lock arms and the motor
includes at least one thrust surface for engaging the locking
pin, the improvement comprising means for maintaining the
motor in a desired position of outward tilt with respect to the
locking pin including:
(a) an elongate thrust member for engaging the thrust sur-
face;
(b) a hollow cylindrical pivot member disposable between
the spaced lock arms and of sufficient internal diameter for
receiving the locking pin therethrough and permitting
free pivotal movement of the pivot member about the
locking pin;
(c) a bridging member including opposed ends secured to
substantially the midpoints of the thrust and pivot mem-
bers for defining a generally H-shaped configuration;
(d) the bridging member being of a substantially fiat web-
shaped configuration and of sufficient length for disposing
the motor at an angle with respect to the vertical when the
thrust member is engaged with the thrust surface; and
(e) the pivot and thrust members being of substantially the
same length.
1. In an annular blowout preventer adapted for use on an oil
or gas well rig, and having a lower housing, an upper housing,
a resilient sealing means therein, and a piston for actuating said
sealing means, the improvement in locking means for securing
the upper housing to the lower housing, comprising:
a split circular latch ring having a plurality of teeth on its
outer surface, said teeth angled outwardly and down-
wardly, said ring having a tapered surface on its inner-
surface tapered downwardly and inwardly,
said lower housing having a plurality of locking grooves
contoured to mate with said teeth,
said upper housing having a seating surface for engaging said
lower housing, and having a shoulder for engaging the
lower edge of said latch ring,
a locking ring having a tapered surface on its outer surface
contoured to mate with the tapered inner surface on said
latch ring, and telescopically engaging said upper housing,
and
securing means for securing said locking ring to said upper
housing whereby tightening said securing means produces
downward movement of said locking ring relative to said
upper housing, said downward movement forcing said
latch ring outward and forcing said teeth outward and
down the mating contours of said locking grooves, said
teeth and said locking grooves including surfaces which
are spaced from each other insuring the downwardly
movement of said latch ring and said upper housing to
seatingly engage said seating surface of said upper housing
with said lower housing and to lock together said hous-
ings.
4,438,901
APPARATUS FOR TENSIONING A STUD AND METHOD
OF DOING SAME
Bobby J. Reneau, and Bruce E. Morris, both of Houston, Tex.,
assignors to Gripper, Inc., Houston, Tex.
FUed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,235
Int a.3 E21B 19/00
U.S. a. 254—29 A 9 Claims
1. An apparatus for tensioning a stud extending from a sur-
face, comprising:
a body adapted to be removably mounted about the stud
extending from the surface, said body including a first
body member and a second body member;
said first body member having a surface engaging end and a
chamber end, said surface engaging end for engaging the
surface and said chamber end for receiving said second
body member;
said second body member having a stud bore therethrough
adapted to receive the stud therein;
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1S2S
gripper means surrounding said stud bore of said second
body member for gripping the stud;
pressure force means acting within said body for moving
said gripper means and said second body member, said
pressure force means moving said gripper means into
engagement with the stud, and said pressure force means
moving said second body member from a contracted
position, wherein said gripper means engages the stud, to
arranged about the center line of the central opening but
located substantially not higher than the bottom of the
hull of the surface vessel, and so designed to contact a pipe
supported by the mam support means so that lateral move-
ment is limited in the portion of the pipe extending be-
tween the lateral holding means are the main support
means without providing any substantial vertical support
for the pipe.
4,438,903
OBSTACLE DETECTOR FOR A DESCENDING OR
ASCENDING LOAD
Pierre Gagnon, 5637 Wildcrton A?e., Montred, Canada H3T
ISl, and Pierre Uforest 1945 Bruxellea St., Montreal.
Canada (MIL 5Z5)
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 375,884
Int. a.5 B66D 1/48: E05F 15/02
U.S. a. 254-269 ^ ci„„.
an expanded position, wherein said gripper means tensions
the stud, thereby tensioning the stud;
regulation means operably connected to pressure force
means for automatically regulating radial movement of
said gripper means into engagement with the stud prior to
said second body member moving from said contracted
position to said expanded position; and,
amplifier means operably connected to said pressure force
means for applying an amplified vacuum releasing force.
4 438 902
PIPE STRING LIFT SYSTEM
John P. Latimer, Newport News, Va., assignor to Deepsea Ven-
tures, Inc., Gloucester Point Vs.
Division of Ser. No. 108,122, Dec. 28, 1979, Pat. No. 4,365,787.
This application Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 382,365
Int a.i B66F 1/00
U.S. a. 254-106 12 ctaims
1. A device for detecting the presence of an obstacle in the
path of a descending or ascending load suspended from a pair
of cables trained around a pair of spaced pulleys attached to
the load and each having a dead end, said device comprising
the combination of said cables with a routably-supported rod
and a pair of radially-projecting and oppositely positioned
torque members secured to said rod, each cable having its dead
end secured to a respective torque member and exerting oppos-
itely-directed and counterbalancing torque on said rod,
whereby a decrease or increase of tension in one cable, due to
contact of an obstacle with the descending or ascending load,
respectively, will cause rotation of said rod, and further includ-
ing rod rotation-sensitive means operable to cause stopping of
said cables.
4,438,904
DRAWWORKS
Bobby E. White, P.O. Box 1137, New Iberia, U. 70560
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,748
Int. a.J B66D 1/14. 1/20, 1/26. 5/00
U.S. a. 254-311 4 ctoiBM
1. A system for lifting and supporting a string of down-
wardly extending pipe from a fioating surface vessel, the sys-
tem comprising a floating surface vessel having a hull; a plat-
form pivotally connected to the hull of the surface vessel about
two horizohul, transverse axes of rotation, the platform hav-
ing a central opening therethrough;
main vertical support means, secured to the platform and
arranged about the central opening and designed to verti-
cally support a downwardly extending pipe;
lateral holding means supported from the platform and
1. Drawworks apparatus, comprising a drilling platform
1S26
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
supporting said drawworks apparatus, a cable drum, a drum
shaft rotatably supporting said cable drum between two up-
right support wall members, an input shaft and means for
driving said input shaft in rotation, clutch controlled chain
sprocket and chain transmission means for causing rotations of
said drum shaft and cable drum at any of multiple speeds in
response to rotations of said input shaft, control apparatus
disposed at the outer side of the one of said support wall mem-
bers which is disposed toward the drilling platform to be
readily accessible to the driller for controlling operation of said
drawworks apparatus, said drum shaft having an extension
beyond said one support wall member, a single outboard brake
fixed to said drum shaft extension at the same side of said
apparatus as said control apparatus, said brake controlling
rotations of said drum shaft and cable drum, said brake being
readUy accessible from the drilling platform for inspection,
service and repair.
between the former and the vessel corresponding to the
lining of the vessel to be formed;
(b) filling the space with hardenable refractory lining mate-
rial;
4,438,905
DEVICE FOR MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING CHAIN
BLOCKS
Koji Niihinon, RJttocho, Japan, assignor to Vital Kogyo Kabu-
sUki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
FUed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 327,034
Int. a.3 B66D 3/00
U.S. a. 254-389 9 claims
(c) while practicing step (b) filling the interior of the former
with particulate material;
(d) hardening the lining material; and
(e) drying and firing the lining to produce a metallurgical
vessel lined with refractory lining material.
4438 907
GAS BLOWING NOZZLE, AND PRODUCHON AND .
USAGE THEREOF
Narito Kimura, YokohanuM KiyonU Taguchi, Fukuyama;
Masayuki Hanunyo, Fukuyana; Osamu Terada, Fukuyama;
Teniyuki Hascgawa, Fukuyama; Youichi Nimura, Fukuyama,
and Noriyuki Hiraga, Fukuyama, aU of Japan, assignors to
Nippon Kokaa Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japwi
FUed Jan. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 384,346
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 3, 1981, 56*84321;
Aug. 27, 1981, 56.125950[U]; Aug. 27, 1981, 56-133287
Int. a.i C21B 7/16
U.S. a. 266-217 4 Claims
1. A device for mounting and dismounting chain blocks
comprising:
a support member located at a high place;
a vertical linear suspension member movably connected to
and descending downward from said support member;
a horizontal linear pin inserted through the lower portion of
said suspension member so that the ends of said pin pro-
trude outward on opposite sides of said suspension mem-
ber;
a generally upright U-shaped suspension ring with its two
arm portions pivotally mounted on the opposite protrud-
ing end portions of said horizontal pin so that each said
arm portion is displaced from said linear suspension mem-
ber a sufficient distance to permit a chain block lifting
rope to pass freely therebetween; and
a ring guide for changing the angle of the U-shaped suspen-
sion ring comprising a bridge bar horizontally connected
between the two arm portions of said ring.
4438 906
FORMERS FOR LINING METALLURGICAL VESSELS
Gary F. English, Conacaut, Ohio, assignor to Foseco lotenia-
tionaJ Limited, Birmingham, England
FUed Jun. 20, 1983, Ser. No. 505,818
Int a.J C21B 7/04
U.S. a. 266-44 16 Claims
1. A method of lining a metallurgical vessel for containing
molten metal, comprising the steps of:
(a) positioning within the vessel a hollow, disposable former
comprising a plurality of connected adjoining wall por-
tions of dry wall sheet material so as to leave a space
1. A nozzle for refining molten metal, comprising a non-por-
ous refractory structure positionable at a bottom or a wall of a
converter; a plurality of passageways for transmitting gas
formed in said refractory structure, said passageways being of
metal pipes; an upper metal plate and a lower metal plate
defining therebetween a gas storage area communicating with
said passageways at the bottom of said refractory structure,
said upper plate having a plurality of holes corresponding to
said passageways; a metal cover encircling said refractory
structure and said storage area; and lead pipe connectable to
said lower metal plate, said metal pipes being connected to said
holes in said upper metal plate; wherein said passageways have
a a diameter of from 0. 1 to 5 mm, and have a space therebe-
tween of from 3 mm to 150 mm; wherein said plurality of
passageways have walls of metal with thicknesses of from 0.1
to 10 mm; wherein said meUl cover has a thickness of from 0. 1
to S mm; wherein said gas storage area has a space between
said upper metal plate and said lower metal plate of from 2 mm
to 50 mm distance; and wherein said said plurality of passage-
ways comprises a plurality of outside passageways and a plu-
rality of inside passageways, said outside passageways being
disposed on the outside of said inside passageways, said outside
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1527
KsEailaeials"'""'''' ""'"'' '^ ''' '*'""'''' °^ ''°^ "P°" ^"'^"»'°" °f "^^ ^^'^ *« f^'" »"«>« »»-•«• "
• J__ orifice for providing communication between the inside and
4,438 908
SPRING RECEIVING STRUCTURE FOR HYDRAUUC
SHOCK ABSORBER
Makato Terada, Fukuroi, Japan, assignor to Shows Manufactur-
ing Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 222,718, Jan. 5, 1981, abandoned. ThU
appUcation Jul. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 402,246
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 26, 1980, 55-88835[U]
Int. a.J B60G 13/00
U.S. a. 267-8 R 6 Oaims
outside thereof and an axially extending row of orifices formed
in the seat tube.
1. In a hydraulic shock absorber of the type in which a piston
is fitted in a main cylinder filled with working fluid to thereby
provide a shock absorbing force generating mechanism, a
piston rod carried by said piston and extending out of and
beyond said main cylinder, a spring receiving and protective
structure comprising: ^
a shock absorbing protective rubber seat fitted onto an end
portion of said piston rod remote from said main cylinder
for protectively engaging said main cylinder to limit the
stroke of said piston within said main cylinder; a protect-
ing cylinder fitted on the base portion of said rubber seat,
the leading end of said protecting cylinder having a larger
diameter than the diameter of said cylinder at its central
portion to accommodate any expanded portion of said
rubber seat upon deformation of said rubber seat; a spring
receiving collar fitted onto the outer side of said protect-
ing cylinder; said piston rod end portion being terminally
threaded; and a mounting fixture screwed onto said end of
said piston rod; and a coil spring interposed axially under
compression between said spring receiving collar and said
main cylinder and forcing said spring receiving collar into
contact with said mounting fixture.
4,438,910
SHOCK ABSORBING SNUBBER FOR DERRICK HOOKS
Edward J. McFaddcn, Houston, Tex., assignor to Hughes Tool
Company, Houston, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 184,607, Sep. 5, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Aug. 5, 1982, S«r. No. 405,230
Int. a.3 F16F 9/19
U.S. a. 267—126 2 Qalms
4,438,909
VEHICLE FRONT FORK
Fumio Matsunoto, Shizuoka, Japan, assignor to Shows Manu-
facturing Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,646
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 16, 1980, 55-127315
Int. a.3 F16F 9/06
U.S. a. 267—64.26 4 Qains
1. A front fork for a vehicle comprising a bottom casing
filled with working oil and slidably receiving a fork tube hav-
ing upper and lower ends and carrying a piston at iu lower
end, a seat tube having upper and lower ends and having the
lower end fixed to the bottom portion of the bottom casing and
extending into the fork tube, spring means mounted under
compression extending between the upper ends of said fork
tube and said seat tube and a balance spring mounted under
compression between the upper end of the seat tube and the
lower end of the fork tube so that the fork tube is subilised at
a position where the difference in the compression between the
two springs is balanced with a load, a first check valve carried
by the lower end of the fork tube and operating so as to be
closed upon contraction of the fork and opened upon extension
of the fork, a second check valve overlying the piston and
operating so as to be opened upon contraction of the fork and
1040 O.G.— 60
1. A shock absorbing snubber for a derrick hook of the type
having a housing, a shank axially movable in the housing, and
a load bearing hook connected to the lower end of the shank,
comprising:
a plunger carried by the housing, having a hollow interior
and a lower end;
a sliding barrel having a closed bottom adapted to be con-
tacted by the upper end of the shank, and an open top
telescopingly receiving the lower end of the plunger;
the barrel and plunger containing hydraulic fluid with a
volume less than the volume of the intenors of the barrel
and the plunger when the shank hu pushed the barrel to
an uppermost position;
check valve means mounted in the interior of the plunger for
restricting fluid flow rate from the barrel to the plunger
upon movement of the barrel upward relative to the
1S28
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
plunger, and for allowing an increased rate of fluid flow
from the plunger to the barrel upon movement of the
barrel downward relative to the plunger; and
air passage means in the top of the plunger communicating
with the atmosphere for allowing air to pass in and out of
the plunger above the hydraulic fluid in response to hy-
draulic fluid volume changes to maintain the pressure in
the plunger substantially at ambient.
4,438^11
QUICK SET HYDRAUUC VISE STRUCTURE
Thonwa F. McDougal, 1415 Beech La., Fairmont, W. Va. 26554
FUed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,520
Int. a.3 B23Q 3/08
pyramid having polygonal large and small bases and con-
sisting of metal sections (4. 5, 6. 7, 8, 9) welded along the
direction of the edges of said pyramid, said structure
havmg a plurality of bearing surfaces one of which consti-
tutes the small base of said pyramid and the others ite side
faces;
(b) a crown (12) for support and attachment of said dome
(18) including means (19. 25) for centering and attachment
of said dome (18) onto said crown (12); and
II 13 11 M .'*• iO
U.S. a. 269—32
HQaims
iSb^W
1. A quick set hydraulic work holding vise comprising an
elongated stationary base plate member having a fore-and-aft
longitudinal axis, a front stationary jaw flxed to said base plate
member at a front end thereof and a rear jaw movable toward
and away from said stationary jaw along said longitudinal axis,
an elongated slide plate member of narrower width than said
base plate member overlying and extending centrally along
substantially the length of the latter, means supporting the slide
plate member for a limited predetermined range of longitudinal
movement between a forward gripping position and a rear-
ward release position for the movable jaw. means interfitting
said movable jaw on the slide plate member for sliding move-
ment of the movable jaw to a coarse adjustment position along
the length of the slide plate member disposmg the jaws at a
work release position whereby a workpiece portion to be
received between the jaws may be withdrawn therefrom,
quick acting worm thread means for flne adjustment of the rear
jaw to approach workpiece gripping position including an
upwardly facing screw threaded trough-like channel substan-
tially longitudinally spanning said slide plate member and
rotatably adjustable worm tooth means carried by the movable
\ jaw to interfit in the threads of said channel, means for rotating
said worm tooth means between a release position and an
interfitting position relative to said channel, hydraulic power
means connected to said slide plate member for rapidly moving
the slide plate member and the movable jaw thereon to said
gnppmg position responsive to application of fluid pressure to
the power means, and means for returning said slide plate
member and movable jaw thereon to said release position upon
removal of forwardly moving fluid pressure force from said
hydraulic power means.
(c) a connecting structure (10, 11) for assuring a rigid union
between the large base of said pyramid (1) and said crown
(12) so that the central axis of said pyramid (1) coincides
with the central axis of said crown (12), said large base
located adjacent said crown (12), said dome (18) being
placed on said crown (12) with its axis directed towards
said supporting structure (1), whereby it may be swivelled
in different directions by letting said supporting device
rest upon a horizontal surface by way of its various bear-
ing surfaces.
4438 913
PISTOL MAINTENANCE DEVICE
G«y F. HyUa, 1709 Spruce St., Peru, lU. 61354
Filed Sep. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 423,296
Int a.J B23Q 3/ IB
U.S. a. 269-60 ,2 ctaim.
4|438,912
SWIVELLING DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING A
LARGE.SIZE PART IN THE FORM OF A SPHERICAL
DOME
Georges Gillot, Le Creusot, France, asaignor to Framatome.
CoorbeToic, France ^
FUed Not. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,637
Clainu priority, appUcation Frucc, Dec. 8, 1980, 80 25976
iBt a.3 B23Q 1/06
UA a 269-55 iQiaiBa
■ ^\^ »^ve"»n8 device for supporting a large-size object (18)
m the form of a spherical dome upon which operations are
earned out, comprising:
(a) a supporting structure (1) in the form of a truncated
1. A handgun holding device for maintaining a handgun
havmg a handgrip and barrel in position by the handgrip and
barrel during maintenance, comprising:
a baseplate having a longitudinal slot, said handgrip position-
able thereon at a cleaning position adjacent to said longitu-
dinal slot with said barrel extending in substantial align-
ment with said longitudinal slot;
a pair of angle brackets mounted upon said baseplate at the
cleaning position including first and second angle brackets
rigidly mounted to said baseplate through said longitudi-
nal slot, said first angle bracket abutting one side of the
handgrip;
an adjustable holding means engaging said second angle
bracket and adjustably extendible therefrom to rigidly
engage the other side of the handgrip opposite to said one
side, thereby rigidly maintaining the handgrip in position
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1329
between said adjuauble holding means and said first angle
bracket;
a barrel support member having one end mounted on said
baseplate in substantial alignment with said longitudinal
•lot and the other end supportably engaging said barrel
whUe allowing ready acceu to aU desired cleaning or
repair regions of the handgun;
wherein said barrel support member comprises a support
member with one end engaging said baseplate and a top
end extending upwardly from the baseplate, said top end
including a pillow block having surfaces contoured to
supportably nest said barrel therewithin.
4^38^15
SHEET FEEDING DEVICE
Yoshiyvki Akmnatsii, and Jua Shiaogairara. both of Tokyo,
J«PM, Msignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japnn
Continuation of Sw. No. 155,821, Jun. 2, 1980, abandoned. This
■ppUcation Sep. 13, 1962, Ser. No. 417,389
Clainu priority, appUcation Japnn, Jnn. 1, 1979, 54-69087
Int a.) B65H 3/06
U.S. a 271-9 7 cu^
4,438,914
CLOTH LAYING MACHINE
Rolf Stengle, and Rolf Grupp, both of Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Krauss n. Reicheri GmbH A Co. and
KG Spcziabnaschinenfabrik, both of FeUbach, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 70,712, Aug. 29, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,357
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 2.
1978,2838410
lot. a^ B65H 29/46
U.S. a. 270-31 17 Qainu
1. A sheet feeding device, comprising:
a sheet stack housing for housing stacked sheets, said sheet
stack housing having a pair of separator pawls and means
for pressing said stacked sheets against said separator
pawls;
kick-out roller means provided above said sheet stack hous-
ing for kicking out and feeding an uppermost sheet from
said stacked sheett. said kick-out roller means having a
circular segment cross section and a chordal flat;
means for routing said kick-out roller in a transporting
direction from said sheet stack housing;
clutch means for selectively transmitting a one-way rota-
tional force to said kick-out roller means;
bi-directionally routable feed rollers located proximate to
said kick-out roller means for ftirther feeding said sheet
kicked out and fed from said sheet stack housing and for
return feeding said sheet to said sheet stack housing; and
drive means for driving said feed rollers in one direction to
deliver a sheet from said sheet suck housing, and in the
reverse direction to deliver said sheet back to said sheet
stack housing.
1. A cloth laying machine for laying out on a supporting
surface superimposed layers of cloth drawn off from a web of
cloth supply having two longitudinal edges and a longitudi-
nally extending center area therebetween, said cloth laying
machine comprising a cloth laying carriage for drawing off a
web of cloth from said supply and for guiding said web, means
for reciprocating said carriage above the supporting surface in
two directions of travel for deposition of at least one respective
layer of cloth by said cloth laying carriage at least when said
cloth laying carriage moves in one of the two directions of
travel, said supporting surface being substantially horizontal, a
blower means located above the topmost layer of cloth, said
blower means being supplied with a positive air pressure for
generating an air current flowing from above and directed
downwardly towards a substantially horizontal layer of cloth
that has been laid out, said blower means being disposed so that
the air current has flow components directed outwardly from
said center area to either edge of said layer of cloth.
4,438,916
PAPER FEEDER
Sboichi Kawaguchi, Toride, Japan, assignor to Komori Printtng
Machinery Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 354,102
CUlms priority, appUcation Japan, Mar. 4, 1981, 56/30781:
Mar. 4, 1981, 56/30783
Int. a.} B65H 3/06
U.S. a. 271—93 6 Gains
1. A paper feeder comprising a frame, a separation suction
device mounted on said frame and substantially vertically
movable for picking up stacked sheets one at a time, said sepa-
ration device having a guide nozzle, a transport suction device
mounted on said frame and substantially horizontally movable
for transferring the picked-up sheet from said separation suc-
tion device, and an adjustment device for adjusting said separa-
tion suction device tilubly back and forth and laterally, said
adjustment device including a nozzle support pivotably
mounted on said frame for angular movement about a first axis.
a pin having a second axis transverse to said first axis and by
which said guide nozzle is pivoubly supported on said nozzle
support, a nut pivoUbly mounted on said guide nozzle at an
upper end thereof, an adjustment shaft having a threaded
portion held in threaded engagement with said nut. and an
1530
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
adjustment knob having an axial bore off center with respect to
said adjustment knob and routably mounted on said frame.
^to-
4 438 918
ORIGINAL ALIGNING DEVICE
YmUo Ito, KaiM8>wa; Takeshi Ikeda, Yokohama; Hirodd
Matiuffloto, Kawaaaki, and Minoni Ogata, Yokohama, all of
Japan, aasignora to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Janu
Continuation of Ser. No. 220,045, Dec. 5, 1980. abandoned^i.
application Feb. 28, 1983, Ser. No. 468,809
Claima priority, application Japan, Apr. 20, 1979, 51-48655-
Jun. 12, 1979, 51-73694; Oct. 8, 1979 51-129781; 0« 23^79
5M36727; Oct 24, 1979, 5M37231 *
Int. 0.i B65H 9/16
U.S. a. 271-251 ,ochd«.
said adjustment shaft extending through said axial bore for
angular movement about its own axis.
4,438 917
DUAL MOTOR ALIGNER
Donovan M. Janssen; John P. Mantey; Donald C. Roller, all of
Boulder, and Lance A. Walker, Longmont, all of Colo., asiign-
or» to International Business Machines Corporation, Armonk,
N.Y.
Filed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 311,837
Int. a.i B65H 9/20
U.S. a 271-227 7cUdms
1. A sheet handhng device for adjusting sheet position prior
to entenng said sheet into the sheet processing sution of a
utilization apparatus, said device capable of adjusting said
sheet position (1) for skew misalignment. (2) for lateral (side)
edge misalignment, and (3) for adjusting sheet speed to that
desired for entry into the processing station and for timing the
entry of the leading edge of the sheet into the processing sta-
tion at a desired time, comprising:
a sheet entry sution;
a sheet transport path coupling said sheet processing station
with said entry sution;
independently controlled drive means disposed within said
transport path, a first one of such drive means located
adjacent a first edge of said transport path and a second
one of such drive means located adjacent the opposite
edge of said transport path, said drive means for moving
said sheet along said transport path to said sheet process-
ing sution from said entry sution;
signal generating means disposed within said transport path
for sensing sheet position; and
control means responsive to said signal generating means for
adjusting the speed of said independently controlled drive
nieans to correct sensed positional misalignment of said
sheet for skew misalignment, lateral edge misalignment
and for timing the entry of the leading edge of said sheet
into said sheet processing sution at a desired speed.
5. An original aligning device for automatically alisnine
sheet-hke originals of various thickness in a predetermined
direction so that, when an original is conveyed to a reading
portion for reading image information of the original, the
original IS fed in the predetermined direction with respect to
said reading portion, characterized by a single ball (8, 23. 33.
*4. 91, 71. 75) having no particular roution axis and which
when It receives an external drive force, routes in accordance
with said dnve force, a roller member (22. 29. 50. 70. 76) for
holding a sheet original (14. 25. 81) between it and said ball, an
original guide surface (5) provided in a direction at right angles
7^ J?V^^1 f° "'** ^**<*'"8 P°«'0" (")' means (7. 10. 13. 24.
32, 60) for driving one of said ball and said roller member in a
direction such that the original conveyed by the (^operation of
said ball and said roller member bears against said guide sur-
face, magnetic means (34. 38. 41, 46) for fonning a gap between
said ball and said roller member when the original is inserted
between said ball and said roller member by a magnetic force,
and conveyor means (15) positioned downstream of said ball
and roller member for conveying the sheet original to said
reading portion, said conveyor means being stopped during the
initial feeding of the sheet original to prevent conveyance
thereof to said reading portion, thereby faciliuting the align-
ment of the sheet original in the predetennined direction by the
driving force applied thereto.
4f438919
MECHANICAL BOUNCING.' ROLLING AND SKATING
APPARATUS
Israel Gamzo. 2570 • 35th Atc.. Oiklaod, Calif 94601
Filed Mar. 19. 1982. Ser. No. 359,786
.,« ^ lat. 0.3 A63B iJ/OO
US. a 272-1 B jcMm
''^''^'^ii^Mmii^i,^^.:^^^^^^^
1. A recreational apparatus comprising
means defining an upper housing having generally cylindri-
cal side walls and a top cover,
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1331
a support platform attached to said upper housing disposed
about the outer periphery of said generally cylindrical side
wall proximate the bottom edge thereof,
a bottom support member comprising
a base support,
a plurality of first guide members attached to said base sup-
port and extending upwardly therefrom, said guide mem-
bers adapted to telescopically receive said upper housing,
means defining a base support cover attached to said plural-
ity of first guide members proximate the top ends thereof,
and adapted to be enclosed within said cylindrical side
walls of said upper housing, said base support cover com-
prising
means for controlling the flow of air into and out of the
space between said top cover of said upper housing and
said base support cover, and
means for resiliently biasing said upper housing away from
said bottom support member.
1. An exercise device comprising an elongated, substantially
cylindrical body; first and second sleeve means rouubly
mounted on the ends of said body for manual gripping by a
user, said first and second sleeve means being resilient,
whereby the sieve means can be squeezed against said body to
prevent rotation; cord means fixedly connected at one end to
said body between said first and second sleeve means; and
connector means for connecting the other end of said cord
means to a weight whereby, by squeezing one sleeve, releasing
the other sleeve and rotating the squeezed sleeve and body, the
cord is wound around the body and the weight is raised.
4,438,921
CALIBRATION OF LOAD INDICATOR FOR
ERGOMETRIC EXERaSER
Eugene J. Szymski, Skokie, III., assignor to Schwinn Bicycle
Company, Chicago, III.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,675
Int. a.J A63B 21/00; GOIL 5/28
U.S. a. 272—73 2 Oaims
1. The method of calibration for effecting precise adjustment
of a load indicator in an ergometric exerciser having support
means for said load indicator, a pedal-actuated wheel freely
rouubly mounted on said support means, brake means
mounted on a frame resiliently biased on said support means
for variable frictional engagement with said wheel for move-
ment on said frame by forward roution of the wheel to actuate
said load indicator, including adjusuble resistance control
means for frictionally engaging said brake means with said
wheel, and adjusuble calibration means interposed between
said frame and said support means; comprising the following
steps:
(1) suspending a weight by a cord from the forwardly dis-
posed periphery of said wheel;
(2) raising said weight until the same hangs freely by manu-
ally rotating said wheel backwards;
(3) adjusting said resistance control means to just prevent
said weight from turning said wheel;
(4) manually routing said wheel slightly forward, allowing
slight slippage past said brake means;
4,438,920
EXEROSE DEVICE
Pierre VeiUette, 6 PI. Radisson, Apt. 610, Hull. Quebec J8Z
1T7. Canada
Filed Aug. 11. 1982. Ser. No. 407.063
Int. a.3 AOIB 23/00
U.S. a. 272—67 5 Claims
(3) rapping the side of said wheel briskly several times just
behind said brake means, as with the handle of a screw-
driver, and noting the reading of said load indicator;
(6) slightly routing said wheel backwards, without slippage
of said brake means, and repeating step 5; and
(7) adjusting said calibration means against the resilient
biasing of the frame to compensate for the average read-
ings obuined in steps 5 and 6 to effect a precise initial
setting of said indicator.
4.438.922
TOY FOR STEERING A SIMULATED CAR
Kataro Suda, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Suda Kinzoku Scisaku-
sho Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,445
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 20. 1981.
56/22884[U]
Int. a.' A63F 9/14
U.S. a. 273—1 GA 2 Oaims
1. A toy for steering a simulated car, which comprises two
shafts arranged parallel in a housing; two drums mounted
separately on each of said shafts, one of said drums being
rotauble in relation to the other drum on the same shaft; two
light transmissive endless belts disposed side by side, one said
belt being trained over one drum on each shaft and each said
belt having a number of cars pictured thereon, said endless
belts being provided with the same number of cutouts as the
number of said pictured cars; gears having different numbers of
teeth for drivingly routing one of the drums engaged with one
of said belts and one of the drums engaged with the other belt;
drive means for driving said gears and for selectively interrupt-
ing the drive to one of said gears; a light source arranged
between the drums; an elastic body for pressing one end of
each of a pair of driven elements against cutouts of the two
belts, each of said driven elements being provided adjacent to
its other end with a support portion capable of moving to-
gether with a simulated car operated by a handle, said support
portion allowing one or the other of said one ends of said
1S32
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
"• mounting frame having a pivot shaft-remote portion extending
from said pivot shaft toward said backboard, first coupling
means for providing resilient coupling between said goal
mounting and backboard mounting frames to permit resilient
pivotal rocking movement of said goal about said pivot axis,
and second coupling means for providing shock absorbing
coupling between said goal mounting and backboard mounting
frames during said pivotal rocking movement of said goal
about said pivot axis, said first coupling means interconnecting
said second portion of said backboard mounting frame and said
pivot shaft-remote portion of said goal mounting frame, said
second coupling means interconnecting said first portion of
said backboard mounting frame and said pivot shaft-remote
portion of said goal mounting frame, said pivot shaft-remote
portion of said goal mounting frame and said second portion of
said backboard mounting frame each being of channel section
and of inverted-U configuration and each thereby having side
flanges, said pivot shaft extending through said side flanges,
said goal mounting frame thereby being pivotally secured to
permit rocking movement of said goal about said pivot axis
relative to said backboard upon said goal being displaced
downwardly by external application of force, said first cou-
pling means comprising a spring interengaging said second
portion of said backboard mounting frame and said pivot shaft-
remote portion of said goal mounting frame.
clement and switched on by pressure of said driven element for
causing an electric current flow to said light source.
4438,923
SHOCK-ABSORBING BASKETBALL GOAL UNIT
Charles J. Eagle, St. Louis County, and Robert A. Boitano, St.
lUmi., both of Mo., ...ignor. to G^-ed Corporation, St. Louis, i,.S. Q. 273-58 B
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,960
Int. a.3 A63B 63/08
4,438,924
GAME BALL
Ian Carr, 740 S. Federal, Apt. 1104, Chicago, III. 60605
FUed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,110
lot. a.^ A63B 39/00
32CIaiiiif
U.S. a. 273—1.5 R
SClaims
1. A basketball goal unit for use with a basketball backboard
having a front surface and comprising a rigid backboard
mounting frame adapted to be securely mounted on the front
surface of said backboard, including a first portion configured
for lying against said backboard and for being secured thereto
and a second portion extending outwardly from said first por-
tion, and, thereby, outwardly from the front surface of said
backboard, a goal mounting frame configured for cooperative
mterengagement with said backboard mounting frame, said
goal mountmg frame being configured for overlying the sec-
ond portion of said backboard mounting frame, a goal carried
by said goal mounting frame, a pivot shaft for pivotally inter-
connecting said goal mounting frame with said backboard
mountmg frame to permit pivotal rocking movement of said
goal and goal mounting frame about a transverse pivot axis,
said pivot shaft connecting said goal mounting frame to said
1. A spheroidal projectile for launching into ballistic flight,
said projectile having a continuous outer surface for prevent-
ing fluid from entering within said projectUe, a dense concen-
traUon of aerodynamic roughening elements per unit of surface
area which protrude through the laminar sublayer of the fluid
boundary layer flowing past the projectile in flight, said aero-
dynamic roughening being adapted to cause said projectile,
when spinning at routional speeds attainable by hand launch,
to experience asymmetric lateral drag forces which drive said
projectile through a flight trajectory having a first curved
flight direction followed by a second curved flight direction
having a curve component opposite to said first curved flight
direction, where the curved flight directions are related to the
density of the aerodynamic roughening elements, said projec-
tile further including a mass of magnitude such that said curved
flight directions caused by said aerodynamic roughening are
accentuated at translational velocities below about 100 feet per
second, such as attainable by hand launch.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1533
4,4384)25
HANDLE FOR RACQUETBALL RACQUET
Janet A. Lindstrom, 1595 TroUhagen Dr., Fridley, Minn. 55421
FUed Feb. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 347,102
Int. a.i A63B 49/08
VJS. a. 273—75 10 aaims
1. A handle for a racquetball racquet, comprising:
an elongatad member having a longitudinal axis and includ-
ing front, intermediate, and rear portions, said front por-
tion having a larger cross sectional configuration in at
least two orthogonal directions than said rear portion, said
intermediate portion extending from said front portion to
said rear portion, said rear portion having a length which
is less than said intermediate and front portions combined;
said handle providing for a modified grip wherein said
front portion or a portion thereof makes contact with the
front two fingers of a player's hand and said rear portion
or a portion thereof makes contact with the back two
fingers of a player's hand, such that said front two fingers
cannot extend as far about the periphery of said handle as
said back fingers, and are necessarily positioned farther
away from said longitudinal axis than said back fingers
thereby allowing said back fingers to grip the handle more
tightly than said front fingers.
4,438,926
TIMEPIECE APPARATUS HAVING A GAME FUNCTION
Gunpei Yokoi, Kyoto, and Satoru Okada, Osaka, both of Japan,
usignors to Nintendo Co., Ltd., Kyoto, Japan
Filed JuB. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 161,344
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 28, 1980, 55-24836;
Apr. 4, 1980, 55-44999
Int. a.J A63F 9/00
U.S. a. 273—85 G 48 aaims
1. A timepiece apparatus having a game function, compris-
ing: game associated information generating means for gener-
ating game associated information including at least a symbol
indicating information for use in a game and including game
operation means operable by a player for performing said
game, current time information generating means for generat-
ing a current time information, said time information generat-
ing means including horological means for performing a horo-
logical function for said generating of a current time informa-
tion, display means including game information displaying
means for displaying said game associated information from
said game associated information generating means, apparatus
controlled symbol means adapted for being displayed by said
display means for displaying at least a symbol having a mov-
able or changeable configuration, and numerical value infor-
mation displaying means for displaying said current time infor-
mation from said current time information generating means in
the form of at least a numerical value, mode selecting means
for selecting for said display means a game displaymg mode for
displaying said game associated information or a current time
displaying mode for displaying said current time information,
and display control means responsive to the selection of said
game displaying mode by said mode selecting means for dis-
playing said game associated information, said display control
means being further responsive to the selection of said current
time displaying mode by said mode selecting means for dis-
playing said current time information from said current time
information generating means by said numerical value informa-
tion displaying means, current time correcting means opera-
tively connected to said horological means and responsive to
said game operating means for correcting said current time
information by using said game operation means when said
current time displaying mode is selected by said mode selecting
means, said apparatus further comprising player controlled
symbol means adapted to be displayed on said display means
for interacting with said apparatus controlled symbol means in
response to an operation of said game operation means, means
for imparting to said apparatus controlled symbol means differ-
ent relative movements in a plurality of paths, and means for
causing at least one of said apparatus controlled symbol means
to assume a substantially unknown different relative movement
to another of said apparatus controlled symbol means m said
paths in response to a predetermined positional relationship
between said one of said apparatus controlled symbol means
and said player controlled symbol means.
4,438,927
BASEBALL GAME
Rudolph R. Hefler, 17 E. Main St., Moorestown, N.J. 08057
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,583
Int. a.3 A63B 69/00
U.S. a. 273—90 5 Claims
1. A baseball game comprising:
a substantially horizontally disposed platform having a simu-
lated baseball field on the upper surface thereof with home
plate adjacent one side edge of the platform;
an elongated rod having a ball at the upper end thereof, the
lower end of said rod being spring mounted to said plat-
form adjacent home plate so that it can be moved between
its normally upright position and a plurality of horizontal
positions;
1S34
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
means for temporarily holding said rod in one of said hori-
zontal positions;
means remotely located from said holding means for deacti-
vatmg said holdmg means to thereby allow said rod to
swing to Its upright position under the force of said sprina-
a baseball bat for batting said ball thereby moving said bdi
and said rod to one of said plurality of horizontal posi.
tions; *^
a plurality of sensing means, a different one of said sensing
mMns being located at each of said plurality of positions,
indicating means for visually indicating the position to
which said ball and rod have been batted.
and extendmg laterally thereacross, said notch having an inner
surface disposed substantially parallel to the direction of elon-
gation of said target body, and a cam surface extending out-
wardly from said rear surface adjacent to said one end of said
U.S. a. 273—121 R
4,438J92S
PINBALL GAME WITH GANGED KICKER
MECHANISMS
Max Wiczer, SkokJe, lU., assignor to Wico CorDonition Nllea. k«^ j . . .
m. ^ CO corporation, NUes. body and inclined with respect to said inner surface of said
FUed Aug. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 409,412 notch, said cam surface being intersected by a plane disposed
Int a^ A63D 13/00 "°""*^ *° ^"*^ direction of elongation of said target body and
23 Claims '"^^•^'^^>"8 ^'d notch. '
4438 930
A.U. » ROLLOVER SWITCH APPARATUS
AlWn Peters, Chicago, 111., assignor to WIco Corporation, NUes,
FUed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,117
„„ _ InU Cl.i A63D 13/00
U.S. a. 273—127 R
8 Claims
nUvffriH ^^f I""* '" "^^""^ * ^'^^ ^°"* «lon« an inclined
piayfield board, the improvement comprising a plurality of
kicker mechanisms carried by the piayfield board, each of said
kicker mechanisms including a movable support and a kicker
member earned by said support, each kicker member being
movable with respect to its corresponding support for engage-
ment with the ball to propel the ball therefrom in a predeter-
mined direction, and direction control means coupled to all of
said supports for simultaneous movement thereof, said direc-
tion control meaiis being selectively operable during the nor-
m.H°."^r ^^"^ °^ *^ «*"^ '° ""^ ^'d predetermined
direcuons of said supports, and kicker control means for con-
trolling movement of said kicker members with respect to their
respective said supports, said direction control means and said
kicker control means being operable independentiy of each
4,438,929
An.1 » '>'*OP TARGET WITH CAM MEANS
AlWn Peters, Chicago, HI., assignor to WIco Corporation, NUes,
FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289^71
lat a.J A63D 13/00
UA CI 273-127 R 5 claims
♦. A drop target for a pinball game comprising an elongated
torget body having front and rear surfaces, a rectangular notch
formed m said front surface closely adjacent to one end thereof
1. Rollover switch apparatus for use in a pinball game in-
cluding a piayfield board upon which a pinball rolls and which
has at least one opening therein, said rollover switch apparatus
comprising a switch having two leaf-spring members, one said
leaf-spnng member being movable toward and away from the
other said leaf-spring member, said an elongated one-piece
plastic base for attachment to the underside of the piayfield
board, said base having a body portion and a leg portion ear-
ned by said body portion and a foot portion carried by said leg
portion, said switch being fixedly attached to said foot portion
a stop member carried by said body portion and projecting
therefrom parallel to said leg portion and spaced therefrom, an
elongated ngid one-piece plastic actuator channel-shaped in
transverse cross section along the entire length thereof and
pivotally attached to said body portion for movement between
a rest position and an actuating position, said actuator having a
ball-engaging portion, a leaf-spring engaging member carried
by said actuator, said leaf-spring engaging member being elon-
gated m a direction normal to the direction of elongation of
said actuator and extending between said leg portion and said
stop member for cooperation therewith to limit the pivotal
movement of said actuator, said ball-engaging portion being
adapted to protrude through the opening in the piayfield board
and said leaf spring members being spaced apart when said
actuator is m the rest position thereof, said leaf-spring engaging
member engaging said one leaf-spring member and holding it
m engagement with said other leaf-spring member when said
actuator is m the actuating position thereof, said actuator being
adapted to respond to engagement of said ball-engaging por-
tion by a pinball for moving from the rest position to the actu-
ating position.
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1535
4,438,931
GOLF CLUB HEAD
Tetsuo Motomiya, Tsubarac, Japan, artgiBi to KabushUd Kai-
sha Endo Seisakusho, Tsubame, Japan
Filed Sep. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 4)t,i3«
Int. a.^ A63B 53/04
U.S. a. 273—167 H
output voluge to display segmentally an object for each
failure to match a signal of said second set with a signal of
said first set.
4,438,933
10 Claims HYDRAULIC SET HIGH TEMPERATURE ISOLATION
PACKER
John C. Zimmerman, Duncan, Okla., assignor to HaUiburtoa
Company, Duncan, Okla.
Filed May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,418
Int. a.} E21B 43/04
VJS. a. 277-9.5 18 aaimM
1. A golf club head comprising
two or more sheet-like shell sections secured together edge-
wise to form a one-piece sealed hollow shell structure
- having a shaft mounting section and a bottom section, and
a shaft, the lower end of which is fastened both to said shaft
mounting section and to said bottom section.
4,438,932
APPARATUS FOR ELECTRONIC WORD GAME
Herbert Finkel, 714 Jackpine Q., Sunnyvale, Calif. 94086
FUed Oct. 16, 1978, Ser. No. 951,477
Int. a.3 A63F 3/06
U.S. a. 273—237 15 Qalms
X
J tSuITTW*
■"^'■tMH^T^"
1. An electronic word game comprising:
(a) a comparator circuit;
(b) a first circuit for applying sequentially to said comparator
circuit a first set of signals representing letters of a selected
word;
(c) a second circuit for applying successively to said compar-
ator circuit a second set of signals representing letters
selected to match the letters represented by said first set of
signals;
(d) said comparator circuit producing a first output voltage
for each signal of said second set matching a signal of said
first set and producing a second output voltage for each
signal of said second set failing to match a signal of said
first set;
(e) a word display circuit responsive to said first output
voluge to display a letter for each matched letter; and
(0 an object illuminating circuit responsive to said second
1. A packer, comprising: mandrel means;
a compressible packer element on said mandrel means;
fiuid pressure actuated piston means adapted to compress
said packer element; and
mechanical packer element compression maintenance
means, including:
ratchet means associated with said piston means; and
spring means adapted to exert an axial force on said packer
element and said ratchet means.
4,438,934
SEAL FOR ROTARY CONE ROCK BIT
Gaude R. Gamer, Odessa, Tex., and William J. Neilson, Mur-
rieta, Calif., assignors to Smith International, Inc., Newport
Beach, CaUf.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 378,454, May 14, 1982. This
application Nov. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 438,671
Int. a.J F16C 33/78; F16J 9/00; E21B 10/08
U.S. a. 277—92 19 Qaims
1. A shaft seal for rotary motion between a shafi and a
housing containing said shaft to isolate a lubricated bearing
from an external environment comprising a resilient annular
1S36
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
seal having a greater radial length than longitudinal length in
cross section, said radial length is from about 1.1 to about 1 4
Omes said longitudinal length, said radially disposed annular
seal being confined within an annular chamber, said chamber
being formed between a bearing journal and a rotating part
mounted thereon, by the cooperation of radially extending
surfaces and two concentric longitudinally extending surfaces
formed between said journal and said rotating part and charac-
terized by at least one of said longitudinally extending surfaces
bemg shaped so that the radial dimension of the annular cham-
ber changes gradually from a minimum adjacent the radially
extending surfaces to a maximum at a central region between
the radially disposed surfaces, so that differential pressure
across said radially disposed annular seal moves said seal axi-
ally away from said central region thereby increasing the
squeeze on said seal and resisting egress of lubricant from a
beanng or ingress of a material from said external environment
into said bearing.
4,438,935
FLUID SEALS
Geoffrey C. Lees, Toongabbie, Australia, assignor to J. C
Ludowici tt Son Ltd., New South Wales, Australia
Filed Jul. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 400,112
Claims priority, application Australia, Jul. 29, 1981, PE9968
Int. a.' F16J J3/32
U.S. a. 277-205 9 cud^
ing from a plane perpendicular to the axis of rotation of
the shaft, and pressed into sealing engagement against the
cylindrical surface wall and the shaft by the axial bias of
", ^«
the sliding and adjustment ring against the side of one of
the two arms of the sealing ring and the resulting changes
in the diametric dimensions of the sealing ring.
4,438,937
PISTON RING
Maurice J. Moriarty, 3225 W. Sahuaro, Phoenix, Ariz. 85029
FUed Dec. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 447,237
Int. OJ F16J 9/12
U.S. a. 277-215 „ cMmB
1. A homogeneous self-energising seal comprising an annu-
lar member having side walls, a top and a bottom forming the
trunlc of the seal, the side walls having top chamfered portions,
the upper edges of which merge into Hat portions on the top of
the sed, the bottom edges of said chamfered portions forming
the sealmg lips of the seal, the ftat portions merging into spaced
annular slots or troughs in the top of the seal which are sepa-
rated by a raised centre portion upstanding from the top of the
SCSI.
4438,936
SECONDARY SEALING ELEMENT WTTH U-SHAPED
SEALING RING FOR MECHANICAL SEALS
Rainer Schlegel, Albanstrasse 18, 6234 Hattersheim am Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,941
192^'665'**^' •PPlication Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 29,
Int. CL^ F16J 15/38
UA CI. 277-212 C 20 Claims
1. A secondary sealing device for an axial seal ring assembly
having a chamber therein with a cylindrical surface wall sur-
roundmg the axial shaft, the secondary sealing device compris-
ing:
(a) a biased axial sliding and adjustment ring positioned in
the chamber; and
(b) a sealing ring positioned around the shaft in the chamber
between the cylindrical surface wall and sliding and ad-
justment ring, formed of a material with good sliding
low-elasticity. and non-brittle characteristics, having a
generally U-shaped cross-section with two arms extend-
1. In a piston ring for residing within a ring groove of a
piston, which piston is disposed for reciprocal movem at
within a cylinder, which ring is generally annular and includes
a top surface, an undersurface, an outersurface, and an inaer-
surface, said surfaces defining a cross-section of fixed exterior
dimension, and which ring groove includes an upper surface
for receiving the top surface of said ring thereagainst, and a
lower surface for receiving the undersurface of said ring there-
against, and which cylinder includes a surface for sealingly
receiving the outer surface of said ring, improvements therein
for increasing the responsiveness of said ring, said improve-
ments comprising:
at least one gas loading cavity in said top surface; and
means for decreasing the inertia of said ring while preserving
the fixed exterior dimensions of said cross-section.
4,438 938
SEAL FOR INCORPORATION IN HIGH PRESSURE
LEAK TESTING TOOL
Richard A. ArmcU, Montrose, Scotland, assignor to Boc*Nowsco
Limited and Drexel Equipment Limited, both of London.
England
FUed Feb. 11, 1983, Ser. No. 465,803
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Feb. 12, 1982,
Int a.3 F16J 15/20
UA a 277-230 9 cta^is
1. A high-pressure seal comprising
a hollow cylindrical member of a rubber having a poor
memory, and
multiple, pre-rubberized, woven fabric layers arranged as a
nested stack and embedded in the rubber of the cylindrical
member,
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1537
each said layer being shaped to conform both with a periph-
eral pari of one end face of the hollow cylindrical member
and with an axiaUy extending pari of the outer cylindrical
periphery contiguous with said end face so that each layer
is continuous at the junction between the poriion thereof
contiguous with the end face and the poriion contiguous
O G>
with the cylindrical periphery, the rubber and the rubber-
ized fabric layers being of materials such that they can
withstand multiple high compression loading cycles with-
out permanent deformation, substantially without extru-
sion and with a rapid return to the relaxed condition after
each loading cycle.
4,438,939
ANNULAR SEAL FOR A GAS TURBINE ENGINE
George Pask, Stanton-by-Bridge, and Howard J. Golton, AUes*
tree, both of England, assignors to Rolls-Royee Limited, Lon-
don, England
FUed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,672
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 10, 1980,
8015557
Int a.i F16J 15/08
VS. CL 277—236 5 Claims
ing a higher pressure area of the engine from a lower
pressure area of the engine and comprising a stacked
plurality of frusto-conical Belleville washers, adjacent
washers being of opposite hand and having opposed abut-
ting preipheries, and an annular ring U-shaped in cross-
section for receiving and circumferentially enclosing the
opposed abutting peripheries of said washers, said ring
permitting said washers to be capable of complete angular
displacement of each when there is a change of axial
length of the stack of washers without extreme stresses
and high functional forces being developed therein at the
enclosed abutting peripheries of said washers, said annular
ring enclosing the abutting peripheries of the washers
extending toward said lower pressure area.
4,438,940
PORTABLE ICE FISHING ENCLOSURE
Frederick J. Hunt, 3224 Garden, Royal Oak, Mich. 48072
FUed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,167
Int. a.} B62B 15/00
U.S. a. 280—12 S IS Claims
-* «>
1. A gas turbine engine comprising:
a first generally annular component having an axially facing
annular surface;
a second generally annular component having an axially
facing annular surface coaxial with and opposing said
annular surface of said fvst component;
means permitting relatively large axial movement of said
first annular component with respect to said second annu-
lar component without permitting relative rotational
movement between said first annular component and said
second annular component; and
an annular seal for sealing between the annular surface of
said first component and the annular surface of said sec-
ond component while permitting the relatively large axial
movement of said fint annular component wiUi respect to
said second annular component, said annular seal separat-
1. A transport apparatus for carrying goods in one orienta-
tion and providing shelter in another orientation, comprising:
a container body having base and wall portions and being of
such size and interior volume as to accommodate at least
the trunk portion of a human therein;
ground engaging means for facilitating movement of said
body over a ground surface, said ground engaging means
being connected to said body for transport operation with
said wall portion in a horizontal orienution;
support means connected to the base portion of the body for
subily supporting said body in a shelter position wherein
the wall portion is vertically oriented and the base portion
is spaced above the ground surface to provide comfort-
able seating for a human,
said ground engaging means being configured to slide said
apparatus over snow and ice and functioning with said
support means to support the apparatus on end with the
< wall poriion of said apparatus in an upright and vertical
position.
4,438,941
SUPPORT FOR CHILD
Raymond GuUlaume, Mougins, France, assignor to Baby Relax,
Anglet, France
FUed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,628
Claims priority, appUcation France, Jan. 18, 1980, 80 13481
Int a.} B62B 7/00
U.S. a. 280—47.4 9 Claims
1. A support means transformable into a seat or perambula-
tor, comprising an articulated framework, a bottom supported
by the framework and a body element forming at least a partial
connection between the bottom and the framework, wherein
the framework has a head end and a foot end and includes two
first parallel longitudinal elements, two end hoop elements
articulated on said first longitudinal elemenu, and two second
paraUel longitudinal elements paraUel to said first longitudinal
1338
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
elements and articulated on said hoop elemenu so that, seen in
profile, the hoop element-longitudinal element assembly con-
stitutes a parallelogram deformable from a first position in
which the longitudinal elements and hoop elements subsUn--
tially form a frame contained in a plane to a second position in
which said hoop elements form with the longitudinal elements
three consecutive planes defining the general appearance of a
scat, wherein the end hoop clement located at the foot end of
the framework includes means for defining a footrest, said
footrest means being substantially perpendicular to the plane of
said frame in the first position and being substantially parallel
to said longitudinal elemenu in the second position, wherein
the body element forms a substantially parallelepipedic pouch
coupled at least to the transverse parts of said hoop elements
and to the footrest means, and wherein the bottom includes
two parts articulated transversely to each other, the bottom
part nearer said footrest means being free with respect to the
body element and supported by a first stirrup-shaped cross-
piece coupled to said framework and the other bottom part
being fastened to said pouch.
^ to said central portion and a lower end spaced above said
wheel support;
steering post hinge means at the lower end of said post and
including a hinge and a hinge base above said upper end of
said wheel support, said hinge means defining a pivotal
axis offset to one side of said post for swinging of the post
from a normal upright position over said front wheel
support to a depending folded position in which the post
IS offset laterally and longitudinally from the front wheel
support and extends downwardly alongside and lies
closely against the front wheel;
said steering post hinge means including means for turning
said handlebar from a normal position in which said oppo-
site end portions project laterally on opposite sides of the
wheel to a generally front-to-rear position to lie alongside
the wheel during said swinging movement of the post to
the depending folded condition;
means for connecting said hinge base to said front wheel
support through the front wheel mount;
and selectively operable post locking means for holding the
steenng post securely in its normal upright operating
position relative to said hinge base and releasable to per-
mit the post to swing to its folded position.
4438 943
nPTH WHEEL SAFETY DEVICE FOR TRACTOR
TRAILERS
Alfred M. Hebert, Skidraore Rd., Pleaiant VaUey, N.Y. 12569
FUed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,200
Int. a.3 B62D 53/08
U.S. a. 280-432 3 c^^^
4(438,942
FOLOABLE AND PORTABLE VEHICLE
Dtrid T. Hon, Lot Angeles, Calif., uaignor to Hon Corporation.
Loa Angeles, Calif.
Diflrion of Ser. No. 233,624, Feb. 12, 1981. This appUcation Sep.
29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,435
Int. a.J B62K 15/00
MS. a. 280-278 ^^ cta,^
1. In a foldable and portable bicycle having a frame and a
front wheel mount at the front end of said frame, a handlebar
and steering assembly comprising:
a front wheel support having an upper end and a lower end
portion extending downwardly from said upper end, and
carrying a front wheel with an axle mounted on said lower
end;
a handlebar having a central portion that normally u dis-
posed above said upper end, and laterally projecting op-
posite end portions;
an elongated steering post having an upper end that is joined
3. A safety device for tractor trailers actuable with the truck
brakes comprising:
a bed plate on the trailer having a downwardly extending
king pin and a pair of diametrically opposed slote extend-
ing upwardly into the bed plate on both sides of the kins
pin, •
a fifth wheel mounted on the tractor having a notched por-
tion to engage the king pin and a pair of oppositely situ-
ated pistons each piston having a plunger element which
extends upwardly into one of said slou in the said bed
plate, and,
means for actuating the plunger elements simultaneously
with the brakes to forcefully engage on upper surfaces of
the slots under pressure to prevent jackknifmg of the
trailer, each of said plunger elements including a roller
bearing at the end thereof to conuwt said upper surface.
4,438,944
TOWING AND CARRYING SYSTEMS
LMnard B. Della-Moretta. 1796 RuaseU PI., Pomona. Calif.
Filed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240.199
Int a.) B620 53/00
UAa28a-i60R WCtalm.
1. A towing connection for connecting a trailer having a pair
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1339
of wheels toward its rear end only, to a towing vehicle, includ-
ing in combination:
three linear links, including one upper link and two lower
links, the lower links being generally horironUl;
a first corresponding series of spaced-apart ball joinu con-
necting the links to a forward portion of the trailer; and
a second corresponding series of spaced-apart ball joints
connecting the links to a rearward portion of the towing
vehicle, said second series of joints being closer together
than the first series so that the links converge such that
extended lines upon which the links lie approximately
and wherein said projections of the first and second compo-
nentt have tubular configurations dimensioned for fitted en-
gagement with each other along an axis substantially normal to
the longitudinal axis of the vehicle when the first and second
componenu are in the assembled positions to resist lateral
movement of the second component relative to the first com-
ponent.
4,438,946
SLALOM SKI WITH VIBRATION DAMPER
Yres Piegay, Voiron, France, aasigaor to Skis Rossignol S.A.,
Voiron, France
Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,357
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 9, 1981, 81 07519
Int. a.J A63C 5/00
U.S. a. 280-602 4 Claims
intersect a remote forward generally vertical instiinta-
neous turning axis, and approximately intersect a remote
forward generally horizontal carrying axis; and
wherein the ball joint connecting the upper link to the tow-
ing vehicle is positioned somewhat aft of a transverse
vertical plane passing substantially through the ball joints
connecting the lower links to the towing vehicle, such
that the trailer front is at the same level when the trailer is
in a preselected turning angle in either direction with
respect to the towing vehicle as it is when in the normal
straight ahead towing position, whereby rise and fall of
the trailer front during turning is substantially minimized.
4,438,945
ASSEMBLY FOR MOUNTING A WORK OBJECT ON A
VEHICLE OR THE LIKE
Stanley F. CurtU, Exeter, Calif., assignor to PoUution Controls
Industries, Inc., Tulare, Calif.
Filed Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343.224
Int. a.) B60D 1/00
U.S. Q. 280—501 4 Claims
1. A slalom ski having a body with a tip zone, a heel and a
boot-supporting tread zone, said body having a structure incor-
porating in its interior a band of stressed viscoelastic material
of a length ranging substantially between 13% and 30% of the
length of said body, said band extending from substantially the
middle of said tread zone toward said tip zone and terminating
short of the latter.
4438 947
TOE BINDING FOR SKIS
Roderick A. Cooper, 4310 Grahun Dr., Pierrefond, Quebec,
Canada
FUed Aug. 16, 1982. Ser. No. 408,591
Claims priority, application Canada, Aug. 17, 1981, 383992
Int. a? A63C 9/10
U.S. a. 280—615 5 Gainis
1. An assembly for mounting a work object on a vehicle
having a frame with a pair of transversely extending structural
members disposed in spaced, substantially parallel relation to
each other and in substantially right-angular relation to a longi-
tudinal axis of the vehicle, the assembly comprising a first
component adapted to be mounted in an assembled position on
one of said structural members and having a mounting plate
and projection extending therefrom substantially in a common
direction relative to the first component; and a second compo-
nent having a mount for said work object, a mounting plate
and projection extending therefrom substantially in a common
direction relative to the second component and a support
engageable with the other of said structural members in de-
pending relation in an assembled position with said first com-
ponent wherein the plates and projections of the first and
second componenu can be interlocked with each other to
secure the mount for said work object on the vehicle in sub-
stantial alignment with said longitudinal axis of the vehicle.
1. A toe binding for use with a ski and a boot of the type
including a substimtially T-shaped toe piece extending for-
wardly from the toe end of the boot, said binding comprising
a body for mounting on a ski; a substantially T-shaped groove
in said body for receiving said toe piece; pin means slidable in
1540
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27. 1984
•aid body for movement between a toe piece retaining position
and a toe piece release position; spring means connected to said
body biasmg said pin means toward said toe piece retaining
position; and handle means connected to said spring means for
moving said pin means from the toe piece retaining position to
the release position, whereby the toe piece can be inserted into
or removed from the ski binding.
4,438,948
SOLE-SUPPORT PLATE
UWch Gcrtach, laterlaken, Switzerland, aatignor to TMC Cor-
poration, Baar, Switzerland
FUed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 379,222
i^S^ priority, appUcatlon Switzerland, May 25, 1981,
3390/81
VS. a. 280—618
lat a.J AMC 9/08 J
13Clainu
ntz Ipi9«uni6
a driving force transmitting member movable along said
guide rail; *
an anchor plate connected to an occupant-restraining-web-
bing and movable along said guide rail;
a support device movable along said guide rail and suppoit-
ing said anchor plate on said guide rail for applying a
dnving force of the driving force transmitting member to
said anchor plate to move said anchor pUte along said
guide rail, whereby said webbing is caused to approach or
recede from the occupant; and
a release device provided at a predetermined position in the
longitudmal direction of said guide rail for releasing said
anchor plate from said guide rail when said support device
reaches said predetermined position,
wherein said driving force transmitting member is a flexible
tape movable m a slide groove formed in the guide rail a
portion of said anchor plate is extended through an
opening formed in said flexible tape to receive a driving
force of said tape, and said support device is movable by
being guided by an anchor groove formed in the guide
rail and engaged with the anchor for preventing said
anchor plate from being detached out of the opening of
said tape. "
20 13
1. In a sole-support plate for a release ski binding, including
means for supporting said sole-support plate on the upper side
of a ski so that at least one end thereof is movable laterally of
the ski. and including restoring means for resiliently urging
said plate back into its original position after such lateral move-
ment, the improvement comprising wherein said restoring
means includes at least one first opening provided in said sole-
support plate, and wherein said sole-support plate, at least in
the region of said first opening, is made of a resilient material,
said first opening weakening said sole-support plate in the
region of said resilient material so that said lateral movement is
effected by elastic deformation of the region of said sole-sup-
port plate having said first opening therein and, after the lateral
movement, said sole-support plate is returned automatically to
>ts original position by said resilience of said region of said
sole-support plate having said first opening therein.
4438 949
o^^Pi?^"^^^''^ FACTENING SEATBELT SYSTEM
Hirothi Tsuge, Chiryu; MitsuakJ Katsuno, Toyota; Yuji N|.
sWmura, Nagoya; Tatsushi Kubota, Okazaki; Tadao Yamada,
Chiryu and Yoahihiro Hayaahi, Kasugai, all of Japan, aasian-
ora to Kabushiki Kaiaha Tokai-Rika-Denki-Seiaakuaho, Aichi,
Japan
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309.509
aaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 15, 1980. 55-143974
„^ _ Int. a.3 B60R <?y/yo
U.S. a. 280-804 ,3 ^^^
4.438,950
COMPOSITE LABEL WEB, PRICE TAG AND RE-PRICE
LABEL COMBINATION, AND METHOD OF PRICE AND
RE-PRICE MARKING
Paul H. Hamisch, Jr., FrankUn, Ohio, aaaignor to Monarch
Marking Systems, Inc., Dayton, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 236,414, Feb. 20, 1981, abandoned. Thia
application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,087
Int. a.i B32B 3/ JO
U.S. a. 283-70 ,0 ciaiM
17^
1. An automatically fastening seatbelt system comprising-
a guide rail laid on a vehicle body;
1. Method of re-pncing, comprising the steps of: providing a
pnce tag having an outer side and an underside with price data
printed on its outer side, providing a re-price label having an
outer side and an underside with first and second spaced lines
°!.Vf^T^ d'V'd'ng the re-price label into first, second and
third label parts, the outer side of the re-price label being free
of adhesive, the underside of the re-price label having pressure
sensitive adhesive, printing re-price data on the outer side of
the first label part which differs from the price data on the
price tog, applying the third label part by means of the adhe-
sive to the underside of the price tog with the first and second
abe parts projecting beyond the price tog, and folding the first
label part about the first line of weakening and adhering the
first and second label parts together with the adhesive so that
the re-pnce dato printed on the first label part are on the same
side as the printed price dato on the price tog
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1S41
4,438,951
Patent Not Issued For This Number
4,438,952
PIPE COUPLING
Harry Z. Tabor, Jeniaalera, Israel, assignor to The Scientiflc
Reaearch Foundation, Jerusalem, Israel
Filed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281,094
Claims priority, appUcation Israel, Jul. 11, 1980, 60562
Int. a^ F16L 35/00
VJS. a. 285-39 10 Claims
an edge formed in each of the tool joinU in the space be-
tween the threads and make-up shoulder, the edge extend-
/As
ing continuously around the space between the threads
and make-up shoulder; the edges being located the same
distance from their respective make-up shoulders.
1. A quickly-attochable coupling for pipes, characterized in
that it comprises; a flexible tube having an internal diameter
approximately equal to the outer diameter of the pipe to be
coupled; and a cylindrical spring overlying said flexible tube;
said cylindrical spring including a closely-wound coil of flat
spring material having more than one complete turn, in both an
open and closed position and having an inner diameter in its
relaxed condition less than the outer diameter of the flexible
tube said coil spring being pariially uncoilable under stress to
open same by increasing its inner diameter at least to the outer
diameter of the flexible tube and of the pipe to be coupled the
opposite ends of the flat spring material forming the cylindrical
spring including a toggle mechanism actuatoble to one position
for uncoiling the cylindrical spring under stress to open same,
or to a second position permitting the relaxing of the cylindri-
cal spring to close same and to cause it to compress the flexible
tube into tight engagement with the pipe for the complete
length of the coil spring.
■T
4,438,954
PIPE COUPLING
Tadashi Hattori, Kishiwada. Japan, assignor to Isuzu Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,124
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 26, 1981, 56-44619
Int. a.' F16L; 7/02
U.S. a. 285— 104 9aairas
Mis itoJOlk 0 lib. IS
2» 13 *i»:.*^i>™WD*i.,43
*^ai^'
20b
T^
4J
10 ' ;■" I , ', "^ ' Vi.
*' IS n IJ M 31 »
4,438,953
TOOL JOINT BENCH MARK
Albert C. Tinune, Jr., Houston, Tex., aisignor to Hughes Tool
Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,720
Int. a.3 F16L 35/00
IJJS. a. 285—93 5 Claims
1. An improved bench mark for a drill pipe member having
tool joints on each end of the type having threads spaced from
the make-up shoulder, comprising:
1. A pipe coupling comprising:
a coupling body having at least two sections, at least one of
which is of substontially cylindrical form with an opening
mouth and includes a first and a second internal annular
grooves;
said first internal annular groove being defined by an inner-
most annular wall which extends sutstontially transversely
of a longitudinal axis of said one section in which said first
internal annular groove is formed and is disposed axially
innermost of said one section, and an outermost annular
wall which is topered down toward said opening mouth
and disposed outermost of said one section, and an inter-
mediate annular wall which is of substontially arcuate
1S42
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
profile in cross section and interposed between said inner-
most wall and said outermost wall;
a split clamping ring made of elastic metal and disposed in
said first internal annular groove so as to be slightly dis-
placeable axially of said one section and relatively to said
first internal annular groove;
said clamping ring being of substantially arcuate configura-
tion in cross section and having a pair of spaced circular
sharp edges directed radially inwardly thereof;
a deformable sealing ring disposed in said second internal
annular groove; and
adjustable depressing means provided for adjusubly com-
pressing said clamping ring diametrically;
axial displacement of said coupling body relative to said
clamping ring engages said arcuate configuration of said
clamping ring with said tapered outermost annular wall
for forcing said split clamping ring radially inwardly.
^
exterior wall which is at least in part cylindrical, said
interior body bore having a central axis;
a contoured mounting rim formed integrally with one end of
said main body, said mounting rim being generally ellipti-
cal in configuration and being at a predesignated acute
angle with respect to the central axis of said interior cylin-
drical body bore, said mounting rim being adapted for
welding in a fiush position in an opening in a vessel or
pipeline such that said generally cylindrical main body
and said interior cylindrical body bore extend at said
predesignated angle acute with respect to the surface of
such vessel or pipeline;
said main body having at its other end means for csonnecting
said vessel connector to a branch pipe;
said contoured mounting rim including a generally annular
mounting ledge having an undersurface with an outer
edge which is generally elliptical and an inner edge ap-
proximately concentric thereto, said inner edge being
formed by the intersection of the undersurface of said
generally annular ledge and said interior body bore; and
said inner edge of said generally annular mounting ledge
mcludes a fluid impact zone wherein the radius of curva-
ture of said inner edge is substantially larger than the
radius of curvature of the remaining portions of said edge,
said radius of curvature of said inner edge being measured
in a direction perpendicular to the plane of said curved
undersurface.
4,438,955 4,438,956
ACUTE ANGLED VESSEL CONNECTOR ^ JOINING OF COMPONENTS
Bobby W. Ryan, Houston, Tex., aaaignor to WH International T * ^"^ '"'' ^^^ ^' ^"'**»' ^^ »' Briatol, England,
Inc., Houston, Tex. ' •"*«>">" to Rolls Royce Limited, Undon, England
FUed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,559 ^ . FUed Dec. 2, 1982, Ser, No. 446,256
iBt a.3 F16L 13/02 cSiT f^^*y* appUcation United Kingdom, Dec. 22, 198L
UA a 285-189 scMm "^**^ , ^,
^^ Int CIJ F16L 23/02
UA a. 285-223 sCMm
1. An acute angled vessel connector adapted to be mounted
in a vessel or pipeline and to provide a high pressure angled
connection from such vessel or pipeline to a branch oioe
comprising: *^'
a generally cylindrical main body having an interior body
bore formed of an interior cylindrical wall and having an
1. An assembly comprising two components to be secured
together and between which relative movement is tolerated
Wherein each component is provided with means for securing
the components together at a joint face, at least one of the
components is provided with slots adjacent the joint face to
impart flexibility to that component, and one of the compo-
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1S43
nents is provided with a bridging piece which extends from the
region of its attachment to said one component in a direction
that covers the slots and is provided at an end thereof with a
seal means that engages with the other component thereby to
provide a seal which is operable against the leakage of fluid
through the slots.
sion of said bonded elastomeric material under pressure
and said elastomeric material flexing to accommodate a
predetermined amount of roury motion between said
inner and said outer members without slippage between
adjacent annular rings; and
means for compressing said rings between said radial flange
of said inner member and a portion of said outer member
to provide a fluid-tight seal between said inner and said
outer members.
4,438 958
CLAM-SHELL COUPLING FOR JOINING BEADED
TUBES
Herbert A. De Cenio, 3917 Cannon Ave., Lu Vegas, Nev. 89121
4,438,957 Di?UioB of Ser. No. 1 12,956, Jan. 17, 1980. This application Fab.
CONSTANT MOTION SWIVEL JOINT ♦. 1M2, Ser. No. 345,551
MichMl R. WUliama, Houston, and Albert R. Tucker, Spring, I"*- ^-^ ^^^^ 21/06
both of Tex., asaignon to FMC Corporation, Chicago, lU. ^'^' ^' 285—234
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,169
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 1, 1980,
8010878
Int. a.3 F16L 27/00 j».
U.S. a 285-223 12 Claims // :^.^t^^
-■It
21 Claims
1. A constant motion swivel joint for connecting two lengths
of pipe, said connector comprising:
a generally cylindrical inner member having a bore extend-
ing axially therethrough, and having a flange extending
radially outward from the outer surface of said inner
member;
means for connecting a first length of pipe to communicate
with said axial bore of said inner member;
a generally cylindrical outer member having a bore extend-
ing axially from a first end thereof through a portion of
said outer member, said outer member having an axially
extending passage to receive said inner member, said
passage extending from a second end of said outer member
through a portion of said outer member;
means for connecting a second length of pipe to communi-
cate with said axial bore of said outer member;
a plurality of annular metal rings mounted between an outer
wall of said inner member and an inner wall of said outer
member, each of said rings having a low friction coating
on one side thereof and a layer of elastomeric material
bonded to the other side, said metal rings reducing extru-
1. A split coupling of clam-shell configuration for scaled
lateral application over the radially beaded open end of a tube
section, and including;
a pair of segmental body members separable at a diametri-
cally disposed plane coincidental with a central longitudi-
nal axis and at which plane opposite side faces of the body
members have abutted interface engagement,
a longitudinal bore concentric with said axis and extending
through the pair of body members to open at one end
thereof for the reception of an end portion of the tube
section,
a counterbore in the body members and of greater diameter
than the longitudinal bore to receive the radial tube sec-
tion bead and extending to an inwardly disposed shoulder
engageable with the radial tube section bead thereby to
prevent separation of the tube section therefrom,
one side of the body members being joined by hinge means,
the other side of the body memben being releasably joined
by latch means comprised of longitudinally disposed con-
caved seats formed in radial enlargements outward of the
abutted interface engagement at said other side of the
body members respectively, a link routively carried by
one body member and contiguously engageable over the
radial enlargements of said body members, and a toggle
clamp rotatively carried by the link and releasably en-
gaged with a seat in said other body member,
a circumferential seal carried at said one end of the body
memben and comprised of depressible segments project-
ing radially inward from the bore of each body member to
engage with the outer diameter wall of a tube section
extending therethrough, said seal segmenu having male
and female formation and at least one of which extends
circumferentially from the abutted side interface engage-
1544
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
mcnt of said body members for reception one within the
other.
and a longitudinal seal carried at each abutted interface
engagement of the opposite side faces of said body mem-
bers and comprised of a depressible section projecting
from the side face of one body member to engage with the
side face of the other body member at said abutted inter-
face engagement thereof and extending from the circum-
ferential seal segments at the one end of the body mem-
bers.
4,438,9m
CLAMPING ft SEALING SYSTEM FOR FLANGED
DUCTS
Glenn G. Carroll, ami Joieph C. Fnak, both of Port Hope,
Mich^ anigMrs to AlcoUtc ProdMti Corp^ Mt Ocoicih.
Mich.
FUed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 399,023
Int CL^ F16L 23/00
UA a. 285-367 4Cta,^
4,438 959
TORSIONALLY DEFLECTABLE SEAL RING ASSEMBLY
FOR FLUID-RECEIVING SYSTEMS
Gordon A. Valentine, Denver, Colo., assignor to Stanley Aria-
tion Corporation, Denver, Colo.
FUed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,521
Int a.3 F16L J9/08. 25/00, 35/00
U.S. a 285-340 14 Claims
1. In a fluid-receiving assembly first and second relatively
axially displaceable structures, said first structure having a
tubular configuration for receiving fluid under pressure, said
second structure having at least a portion received in said first
structure, a torsionally defiectable seal ring received in said
first structure and circumferentially surrounding said portion
of said second structure, said seal ring being formed with at
least a pair of diagonally opposite inner and outer comer edges
and being torsionally deflectable to establish a seal between
said first and second structures, an adapter formed separately
of said first and second structures and having a tubular cross
section, said adaptor being received in said first structure for
axial displacement with one of said structures relative to the
other of said structures, and first and second formations delim-
iting a cavity receiving said seal ring and positioned to engage
said inner and outer comer edges, respectively, upon relative
axial displacement of said structures for torsionally deflecting
said SMl ring to iu seal-esublishing condition, one of said
formations being formed in part by said adapter and in part by
a preselected one of said stractures, and the other of said for-
mations being formed on the other of said structures, said one
of said formations being defined by a peripherally extending
surface and by a further surface adjoining said peripherally
extending surface, said peripherally extending surface being
formed on said preselected one of said structures, and said
further surface being formed on an end of said adapter and
being contained in a conical envelope intersecting said periph-
erally extending surface at an obtuse angle such that said pe-
ripherally extending surface and said further surface cooperate
to define a peripherally extending comer which receives one
of said diagonally opposite comer edges of said seal ring.
1. In a system for removably clamping and sealing together
the ends of a pair of connecting ducts of circular cross-section
wherein each duct end is provided with a peripheral flange
which is engageable by a clamping ring adapted to surround
the flanges of the ducts to be joined, the ring being shaped and
dimensioned to engage the flanges and force them together
upon tightening of the clamping ring, the ring being formed
with a short circumferential opening to enable it to be resil-
iently spread apart for assembly over the duct flanges and
provided with adjustable securing means to draw together the
two ends of the ring at the ring opening to tighten the ring
upon the duct flanges to thereby clamp and seal the joint
between the pair of ducts, the improved clamping ring which
comprises:
a first end of the ring having an undercut recess to receive an
integral non-adjustable projection on the second end of
the ring, said recess and projection being shaped and
positioned so that said projection can be inserted into said
recess only by the temporary resilient relative displace-
ment of the first and second ends of the ring in a radial
direction, release of the displacement force permitting said
first and second ends to retum to a position wherein said
recess and projection cooperate to form a temporary latch
which holds the ends of the ring in a predetermined rela-
tive position and prevents the ends from separating in a
circumferential direction;
said predetermined position being selected to provide suffi-
cient clamping force to retain the connected ducts in an
undamped but loosely connected condition while permit-
ting the ducts to be rotated about their common axis for
final position adjustment prior to application of full clamp-
ing force by the adjustable securing means;
adjustable securing means on said clamping ring adapted to
draw the two ends of the ring together after said projec-
tion and recess have estoblished said temporary Utch, to
thereby tighten and clamp the ring onto the duct flanges
and tightly draw the connecting ducts together.
4,438,961
DOOR LATCH MEANS
C. Lyowood Grisham, Memphis, and FMdie A. Grisham,
Bartlett, both of Tenn., assignors to Grisham Corporation,
AriingtOD, Tom.
Filed Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,413
lot a.3 E05C 5/00
VS. a 292-67 2 Claims
1. Door latch means for Utching a swingably mounted door,
said door latch means comprising a boxlike housing, striker
means disposed within said boxlike housing for latchable en-
gagement with suitably established jammounted keeper means
and for enabUng said door ktch means to propedy latch the
door while in the closed position thereof, a rock shaft extend-
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1543
ing through said housing and being coupled with said striker
means and carrying knoblike means at either end thereof for
providing arcuate movement of said striker means thus facili-
tating unlatching the closed door, first striker actuator means
for causing latching action of said latch means by establishing
a rectilinear movement of at least a portion of said striker
means which is caused to operatively engage the keeper means
thus latching the door as it swings toward the closed position
thereof, and second striker actuator means for unlatching said
hitch means by establishing arcuate movement of said striker
means through rotation of said rock shaft, thus said second
striker means enables said door latch means to be unlatched by
a mere tuming action of either of said knoblike means; said
striker means including mainbody means responsive to said
second striker actuator means and being coupled with said
rock shaft for arcuate movement therewith, and tonguelike
means responsive to said first striker actuator means for latch-
like engagement with the keeper means, said mainbody means
being provided with a passageway especially constructed for
matably receiving said rock shaft in such a manner that when
said rock shaft is manually tumed about its longitudinal axis
said mainbody means is caused to be swingably carried there-
with, said mainbody means being further provided with a slot
for slidably receiving said tonguelike means; said first striker
actuator means including first bias means disposed within said
slot for operable engagement with said tonguelike means and
for yieldably urging said tonguelike means toward the keeper
means; said second striker actuator means including second
bias means disposed within said boxlike housing for operable
engagement with said mainbody means and for yieldably
urging said striker means swingably toward the keeper means;
said second striker actuator means including support means for
pivotally supporting said mainbody means within said boxlike
housing; said second bias means including torsion spring means
having a coiled member and a pair of torsion applying leg
members constituted by integrally joined extensions of said
coiled member; said second striker actuator means additionally
including coil pin means fixedly attached to said boxlike hous-
ing for circumflexably receiving and thus supporting said
coiled member, and leg pin support means fixedly attached to
said boxlike housing for engagement with and thus supporting
one of said leg members while the leg member other than said
one of said leg members is bearing against said mainbody
means so as to yieldably urge said striker means swingably
toward the keeper means; said support means including an
elongated sleevelike member provided with an elongated inter-
ruption coextending the length thereof; said mainbody means
including a cylindricallike member which is substantially con-
centrically disposed about said passageway with the diameter
of said cylindricallike member being compatibly sized with
respect to the intemal diameter of said sleevelike member for
contiguous reception therein.
4,438,962
ALTERNATE MANUALLY AND ELECTRICALLY
ACTUATED BOLT
Paul G. SoloTifT, TostiB, Calif., and William C. Lichtenfels,
West Hartford, Cobd., assigaors to Emhart Industries, Inc.,
FaraUngtOD, Conn.
Filed Oct 2, 1981, Ser. No. 308,150
Int a.^ E05B 47/Oa- E05C 1/06
VJS. a. 292—144 36 CUioM
1. In an alternate manually and electrically actuated bolt of
the type having a bolt movable between extended and re-
tracted positions, manual operator means operably connected
to said bolt for moving said bolt between said extended and
retracted positions upon manual actuation thereof, an electric
motor, and gear means operably connected to eacl» of said
electric motor and said bolt for moving said bolt between said
extended and retracted positions upon electrical actuation of
said motor; the improvements including: said gear means com-
prising an oppositely rotatable driven gear operably connected
to said bolt for moving said boh between said extended and
retracted positions upon opposite rotatable movement of said
driven gear, a driving gear segment operably connected oppo-
sitely movable by said electric motor, said driving gear seg-
ment being constructed and arranged relative to said dnven
gear engaging said driven gear moving said bolt between said
extended and retracted positions and totally disengaging said
driven gear upon said bolt moving into either of said extended
and retracted positions; whereby, said bolt may be moved from
either of its extended and retracted positions to the other of its
extended and retracted positions by said manual operator
means without movement of said driving gear segment and
said electric motor.
4,438,963
DOOR LATCH MECHANISM WTTH GENERALLY
LINEARLY MOVABLE OPERATING MEMBER
Peter Fricdrich, 44 Riverside Ave., Lyndhnrst N J. 07071
Filed Jiu. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,876
lot aj E05C J/J6
VS. a. 292—168 16 Claims
.=:?^
1. A door latch mechanism including:
1S46
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
(a) manual operating means adapted for mounting on the
face of a door and including a manually acceuible operat-
ing member generally linearly translatable substantially
parallel to the face of the door;
(b) a door Utch assembly for location within the door be-
tween its faces, the door latch assembly including a mov-
able door latch element for latching the door closed and
operable between an extended, latched position and a
retracted, released position, and door latch actuator means
operatively connected to the door latch clement for ef-
fecting the movement thereof;
(c) means connected between the operating member and the
door latch actuator means for operating the door latch
actuator means and moving the door latch element when
the operating member is moved linearly;
(d) said lineraly translatable operating member being
mounted for rotational movement in addition to said trans-
lation; and s
(e) the mechanism further comprising locking means respon-
sive to rotational movement of the operating member for
preventing retraction of the door latch element.
4,438 964
PADDLE OPERATED VEHICLE LATCH
William S. Petera, Appleton, Wta., assignor to Pierce Manufac-
turing, Inc., Appleton, Wia.
Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 275,006
Int. a.3 E05C 3/26: E05B 13/10
U.S. a 292-2W- 10 Qaim.
F. second biasing means biasing said latch bar toward said
extended position when said latch bar is free to slide;
G. unlatching means to retract said latch bar to said re-
tracted position from said extended position, whereby to
withdraw said first end from said second recess to free said
cam for rotation to said disengaged position responsive to
said first biasing means, and thus to release said latch post
when said unlatching means is operated; and
H. safety latch means to latch said cam in a safety position
between ite engaged and disengaged positions to permit
rotation of said cam toward said engaged position and to
prevent rotation of said cam toward said disengaged posi-
tion, said safety latch means comprising a step formed in
said nearest cam face adjacent said second following edge
to receive said first end of said latching bar when said cam
IS m said safety posiUon, and to clear said first end to allow
extension of said latching bar when said cam is rotated to
said engaged position.
4,438,965
LOCKING DEVICE FOR* VEHICLES EQUIPPED WTTH
SLIDING WINDOWS
Chris Steams, Farmington, N. Mex., assignor to C. K. Locks
Limited, Farmington, N. Mex.
FUed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,582
Int. a.J E05C 19/1%
U.S. a. 292-256.75 g q^^
/*-.
1. A rotary latch mechanism for engaging a latch post,
comprising:
A. a cam pivotaily mounted for rotation between engaged
and disengaged positions about an axis parallel to the
direction of extension of said latch post, said cam having
peripheral edges and first and second parallel faces;
B. first biasing means to bias said cam toward said disen-
gaged position at all times;
C. a first recess, defined by first opposed outwardly extend-
mg leading and following edges formed in said cam, to
receive said post when said door is closed, wherein said
leading edge clears said post to allow said post to enter
said recess when said cam is in its disengaged position, said
leading edge engages said post in said recess to latch said
door when said cam is rotated to its engaged position, and
said following edge engages said post in said recess as said
door IS closed to rotate said cam from its disengaged
position to its engaged position;
D. a second recess, defined by second opposed outwardly
extending leading and following edges formed in said cam;
E. a latch bar having first and second ends, disposed parallel
to said axis, and mounted for sliding lengthwise between a
retracted position clear of said cam, an intermediate posi-
tion wherein said first end bears against the nearest face of
said cam when said cam is in iu disengaged position, and
an extended position wherein said first end passes into said
second recess and engages said second following edge to
latch said cam in iu engaged position;
1. A locking device for securing oppositely movable sliding
panels, comprising;
a first arm attachable to a first one of said panels;
a second arm attachable to a second one of said panels;
a bolt detachably connecuble between said first and second
arms, said bolt having a pivot joint connected to said first
arm and a slot for receiving said second arm; and
a nut threadably engaging said bolt and extending across said
slot for holding said second arm in said slot, wherein said
second arm includes a notched portion engaging said bolt
within said slot.
4438 966
LOCK FOR CARRYING CASES OF RESPIRATORS
William Eckstein, Serectz, and Gerd Pantaieon-Stemberg,
MaiUi, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, anignors to DriigM--
werk Aktiengescllschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,493
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 9,
lyiHJ, 3032915
Int. a.i E05C 19/16; B65D 45/16
U.S. a 292-259 R 12 Claims
1. A lock and seal combination for a carrying case of a
respirator having a container part and a cover member, with at
least one strap having strap ends held together by a toggle
clamp to hold the container part to the cover member, the
toggle clamp having a lever, comprising: a sealing piece (5)
engaged to the cover member and having a recess for receiving
the lever (12), one strap end having a hook portion (14) with an
opening (20) in said hook portion; and the sealing piece having
a portion with a protrusion (19) extending therefrom engaged
into the hook portion opening; the toggle clamp including a
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1547
holding member (13) connected to the other strap end for consisting of a plate vertically positioned across the front of
pivotaUy carrymg the lever; one end of the lever engaged with the trailer for pivotal movement about a vertical pivot at
one
the hook poriion connected to the one strap end and another
end of the lever engaged into the recess of the sealing piece.
side of the trailer and restraining means between the trailer and
the plate for limiting the amount of pivoting of the plate.
4,438,967
BAG HANDLE
Donald L. Fox, 76 Maple A?e., Greenwich, Conn. 06830
FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,408
Int. a.} B65D 33/06
U.S. a 294— 164 .
9 Claims
1. Apparatus for keeping a bag opening closed and providing
handle for carrying the bag comprising:
(a) frame means having a first portion thereof for gripping
the bag and a second poriion thereof for carrying the bag;
(b) means for engaging the bag opening with the frame
means in the vicinity of the first poriion of the frame
means whereby after the bag is engaged, any force tending
to pull the bag off of the frame means places more force on
the engagement means; and
(c) said first poriion of said frame means including a stop,
said engaging means including a non-spring>biased rotat-
able member extending transversely of said frame means
for suppori of the bag, said member being mounted on said
first poriion of said frame means at a site spaced apari
from said stop to provide an entry space for entry of said
bag between said member and said stop and frame means,
said rotatable member having an edge with gripping
means movable towards said stop into said entry space for
gripping the bag upon rotation of said member.
4,438,968
DEFLECTING DEVICE FOR TRUCK LOAD
Ralph WortUiw, P.O. Box 715, Kanloops, B. C, CuuMta (V2C
5L7)
FUed Mar. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 354,330
Claim priority, appUcatioa Cauuda, Apr. 2, 1981, 374486
Int. a> B62D 25/00
U.S. a. 296—1 R 5 Clains
1. A deflecting device for deflecting the load of a trailer.
4438 969
COLLISION RESISTANT CONSTRUCTION FOR A DOOR
OF A VEHICLE
Ken KamUo, Zushi, and Kouio Maeda, Yokohama, both of
Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Filed No?. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 319,102
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Nov. 7, 1980, 55-
160193[U]
Int. a.) B60J 5/04
U.S. a. 296—146 12 Qalms
1. A collision resistant construction for a door of a vehicle
having a door opening defined above a side sill, a hinged side
door operable to open and close said door opening and a seat
assembly located in the vehicle cabin beside said door opening,
comprising:
a sliding mechanism securely mounted on a floor of said
vehicle, said sliding mechanism having mounted thereon a
seat proper frame of uid seat assembly for permitting a
sliding movement of said seat assembly in a fore-and-aft
direction relative to said floor;
first means securely connected to said sliding mechanism
and said seat proper frame, said first means having a rig-
idly constructed extreme end poriion which extends out-
wardly toward said door opening in the vicinity of said
side sill; and
second means provided on said hinged side door to be mov-
able therewith, said second means being positioned at a
portion of the door which faces said extreme end portion
upon normal closing of said side door,
whereby, when said side door tends to be driven into the
vehicle cabin by an external force applied thereto, said
second means is brought into secure engagement with said
extreme end poriion of said first means thereby preventing
said door from continuing the driving-in motion.
1348
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27. 1984
4.438.970
VEHICLE CAB SUSPENSION
Grume B. Boucher. Fenitrce GoUy, Autralia. aatianor to Pac-
ear lac^ Bcllciriic Wnh.
Filed JaL 31, 1981. Scr. No. 288.983
CliiM priority, tppUcatloa Antnlia. Oct 9, 1980, PB5973
Int. CL^ B62D 27/06
VS. a 296-190 23 cbta.
vehicle body structural panels to provide a self-suDoort
body structure; "^
a vehicle body outer panel having a generally planar aper-
tured mounting surface adapted for attachment on the
body structure m spaced relation from the body structural
panels;
an attachment block having a stamped metal housing with a
base adapted for attachment on the body structural panel
and a cylmdncal projecting wall defming a plastic filled
cavity, said cylindrical wall and said plastic being machin-
able to esubhsh a precisely located body outer panel
support face and said plastic being drillable to provide a
fastener hole; and
a fastener installed through the aperture of the body outer
panel mounting surface and into the drilled hole in the
plastic of the attachment block whereby the mounting
surface of the body outer panel is securely attached to the
support face of the attachment block to attach the body
outer panel on the body frame.
9. A cab suspension for a wheeled vehicle comprising a
chassis, a cab on said chassis, pivot means at a first location for
pivotally supporting one end of said cab on said chassis for
movement relative to said chassis, and support means for sup-
portmg the other end of said cab at a second location spaced
from said first location permitting vertical movement of said
cab relative to said chassis, said support means including an
elongated member coupled to one of said cab or chassis for
relative rotational movement thereto at a first position along
said member, coupled to an opposite one of said cab or chassis
for relative rotational movement thereto at a second position
along said member spaced from said first position, and coupled
to said cab or chassis at a third position along said member by
dampmg means for dampening vertical movement of said
member relative to said cab or chassis, said cab thereby being
allowed to oscillate substantially vertically in damped move-
ment about said pivotally supported end.
4.438.972
OPERATING MECHANISM FOR OPERATING A
SLIDING AND TILTING ROOF-PANEL
Yoahinori Katayana, Tokyo; Ryoji Fujiwara, Mizuho, and
TiuaetodU Nlahimaki, Yokoauka, all of Japui, aaaignon to
NImn Motor Company, Limited, Kanagawa and Johnan
Sciaakuaho Company, Limited, Nagano, both of, Japan
FUed Apr. 28, 1981, Scr. No. 258,465
Int. a.3 B60J 7/02; H02P 3/06
UA a 296-223 ^cUim
4,438.971
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PLASTIC BODY
PANEL ATTACHMENT
WIeataw S. Zaydel, Rochester; Hulki Aldikacti, Orchard Lake,
and Janes G. Boack, Clarkaton, all of Mich., aasignors to
General Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
FOtd Sep. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 418.200
Int CLJ B62D 27/02
VS. a. 296-191 2 Ctoims
1- A vehicle body comprising:
a vehicle body structural panel suitably connected to other
1. An operating mechanism for operating a sliding and tilting
roof panel of an automobile and the like, the tilting movement
of the roof panel being started after the sliding movement of
the roof panel to return the roof panel to iu fully closed posi-
tion is completed, the sliding movement of the roof panel being
started after the tilting movement of the roof panel to return
the roof panel to its fully closed position is completed, com-
pnsing:
(a) an electric motor;
(b) a cable connected to the motor, whereby the cable is
moved when the motor is electrically actuated, the cable
being also connected to the roof panel, whereby the motor
drives the roof panel via the cable when electrically actu-
ated;
(c) a rack engaging the cable, whereby the rack is moved
according to the movement of the cable;
(d) a pinion meshing with the rack to be routed according to
the movement of the rack;
(e) a switch-operating member engaging the pinion so as to
be moved according to the rotation of the pinion, whereby
the position of the switch-operating member represenu
the position of the roof panel; and
(0 first and second Umit switches operated by the switch-
operating member, the first switch being operated to cut
off the electrical actuation of the motor when the roof
panel u slid to iu ftilly closed position, the second switoh
bemg operated to cut off the electrical actuation of the
motor when the roof panel is tilted to iU fully closed
position;
whereby the roof panel is automatically stopped at its fully
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1S49
closed position when the roof panel is slid or tilted to iu
fully closed position.
4.438.973
SWIVEL CHAIR WITH BRAKE
Larry P. LaPolntc, LaSallc. Mich., assignor to La*Z-Boy Chair
Company, Monroe. Mich.
FUed Aug. 4, 1981. Scr. No. 290.068
Int. a^ A47C 3/02. 3/00
VS. a 297-349 17 claims
1. A chair comprising a seat frame, a base for the chair, chair
support means swively mounting the frame on the base, and
brake means acting between the support means and the base to
resist swiveling of the chair when it is unoccupied a seat spring
system on said seat frame providing a yieldable top crown
seating surface, said brake means being connected to and ener-
gized by force of the spring system released as it moves to
provide said top crown seating surface when a chair occupant
lifts his weight from the seat.
4,438.974
GUIDE PROnLEFOR INERTIA LATCH
Fred C. Kresky. Richland, Mich, and Gainesville, Fla., assign-
ors to Keiper U.S.A., Inc., Battle Creek, Mich.
Filed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,187
Int a.J A47C 1/025; B60N 1/04
VS. a 297-379 7 Claims
tally displaced from iu pivotal center when the car is on a level
surface to produce a gravity actuated unlatching moment and
vertically displaced to produce a vehicle deceleration inertia
actuated latching moment, positive stop means limiting back-
ward pivotal movement of said seat back bracket to a user
position, cam means responsive to return of said seat back to
user position for overcoming gravity bias of said latch element
and producing pivoul movement to a latch engaging attitude,
said latch element having substantial additional pivoul travel
available in a latch engaging direction to produce full latch
engagement in response to initial seat back forward tilting
under emergency deceleration conditions, and means to mini-
mize any pivotal lost motion angular clearance for said latch
element with said seat back bracket in user position, said hori-
zontal displacement and unlatching moment being reduced
upon parking on a downward slope in proportion to the steep-
ness of slope and being subject to further reduction by any
pivoul lost motion displacement of said latch element, as
might result from applying the brakes in parking on a down-
ward slope, thereby resulting in an ineffective release moment
when the combination of downward steepness of slope and lost
motion exceed predetermined limits, said means to minimize
any pivotal lost motion angular clearance combined with said
horizontal displacement accommodating at least a 15' down-
ward parking angle without loss of effective release moment.
4,438,975
ARMREST FOR A SEAT
Ralph J. WUliana, New Oxford, Pa., aasignor to Denuply Re
search A Development Corp., MUford, Del.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,015
Int. a.J A47C 7/54
VS. a. 297-412 6 CUias
1. Passenger car seat back hinge comprising pivotidly con-
nected brackeu for respective connections to seat and seat
back, inertia latch means for arresting forward seat back tilting
under predetermined emergency vehicle deceleration, said
latch means including a gravity/inertia actuated latch element
pivotally mounted on said seat back bracket for movement
between latching and unlatching positions, a cooperating latch
stop mounted on said seat bracket engageable by uid latch
element, said latch element having a center of gravity horizon-
1. An arm rest arrangement for a seat such u a stool and the
like comprising a seat member, a post extending perpendicu-
lariy relative to an edge of said seat and having sections of two
difterent diameters in axial alignment, a one-way clutch mov-
ably supported upon the upper end of said post, an arm con-
nected to said clutch and extending laterally relative to said
post, said cluteh being circular and being connected to said
arm and movable axially upon said post between said sections
of different diameters thereof and when engaging said section
of larger diameter permitting roution of said arm in one direc-
tion upon said post but preventing reverse direction and when
said clutch is disposed upon the post section of smaller diame-
ter said cluteh is deactivated to permit roution of the arm
about the axis of the post in said reverse direction.
1550
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4,438,976
METHOD OF REPAIR OF SHORT ORCUITS FOR IN
SITU LEACHING
David R. Baughman, Mcaa, Ariz., and Jerry R. Bergeson, Gol-
den, Colo., asiignort to Occidental Rewarch Corporation.
Irrine, Calif.
FUed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 406,022
Int. a.3 E21B 43/26. 43/28. 33/138
UA a. 299-4 3, Claim.
1. A method for reducing leakage of leachant through a
short circuit passage in a subterranean formation between a
first fracture in communication with a first well and a second
fracture in communication with a second well in an in situ
leaching system comprising the steps of:
introducing leachant having a first pH into the subterranean
formation surrounding the short circuit passage;
introducing into the short circuit passage an aqueous solu-
tion having a second pH and containing a sealing material
that gels at the first pH; and
discontinuing liquid flow between the first and second wells
for a time sufficient for residual leachant in the subterra-
nean surrounding the short circuit passage to initiate gela-
tion of the sealing material.
4,438 977
APPARATUS FOR REMOVING MATERIAL
Nimrod T. Chapel, 3804 Green Oaks Way, Edmond, Okla. 73034
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 113,192, Jan. 18, 1980, Pat. No
4,274,676. This application May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,635
Int. a.J A47L 7/02; EOIH 1/08
U A a 299-64 3 c,.,„„
second edge of said bottom wall, said second edge
disposed opposite said first edge of said bottom wall;
a third side wall angularly extending from another edge of
said first side wall, which other edge of said first side
wall is disposed opposite the edge of said first side wall
connected to said first edge of said bottom wall, said
third side wall extending inwardly toward said opening;
a fourth side wall angularly extending from another edge
of said second side wall, which other edge of said sec-
ond side wall is disposed opposite the edge of said
second side wall connected to said second edge of said
bottom wall, said fourth side wall extending inwardly
toward said opening and said fourth side wall having an
outlet port defined therein;
a first end wall connected to first ends of said first, second.
third and fourth side walls; and
a second end wall connected to second ends of said first,
second, third and fourth side walls, said bottom wall,
said first, second, third, and fourth side walls and said
first and second end walls being connected so that said
cavity is defined thereby;
coagulant applying means for applying a coating of a coagu-
lant to the material to be removed, said coagulant apply-
ing means including conduit means for providing a pas-
sageway by which said coagulant can be carried to said
port defined in said fourth side wall for being discharged
therefrom when said fourth side wall is moved adjacent
the surface from which the material is to be removed; and
withdrawing means, associated with said scraping means, for
withdrawing the coagulant coated material which has
been loosened from the surface which is scraped when
said opening of said scraping means is moved adjacent the
surface.
4,438,978
TILT BACK MECHANISM FOR A CHAIR
Tor Arild, P.O. Box 4063, Woodaide, CaUf. 94062
Filed No?. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322^59
Int. a.3 A47C 3/00
U.S. a 297-304 , ci„^
"^
1. An apparatus for removing material from a surface, com-
pnsing:
scraping means for scraping the surface to loosen the mate-
nal therefrom, said scraping means having a cavity and an
opening defined therein and including:
a bottom wall;
a first side wall connected along an edge thereof to a first
edge of said bottom wall;
a second side wall connected along an edge thereof to a
I. A tilt back mechanism for a chair comprising:
a planar yoke having front and rear ends, said yoke including
a pair of upstanding braces formed along the opposed side
edges thereof, and with the yoke further including an
upstanding stop means formed adjacent the rear end along
one side edge thereof;
a rocker plate having front and rear ends and a width less
than the spacing between the upstanding braces of the
yoke enabling the rocker plate to be received therebe-
tween, and with the rocker plate including a second pair
of upstanding braces formed along the side edges thereof,
with adjacent braces of each pair being pivotally con-
nected enabling the rocker plate to tilt relative to the
yoke; and
means for restraining the tilting of the rocker plate in the
rearward direction, the restraining means including a
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1551
torsion bar extending longitudinally along the rocker plate
from the front to the rear end thereof, with front end of
the torsion bar being fixably mounted adjacent the front
end of the rocker plate and with the torsion bar being
supported for routional movement adjacent the opposed
rear end thereof, with the restraining means further in-
cluding a lever arm fixably connected to the rear end of
the torsion bar and extending to said one side edge of the
yoke in a manner to be aligned and abutting with the
upstanding stop means whereby tilting of the rocker plate
in the rearward direction causes a rotational torque to be
placed on the torsion bar through the rotational move-
ment of the lever arm such that the tilt back motion is
torsionally restricted thereby.
4,438,980
PROPORTIONING VALVE WITH PRESSURE PORT
COMMUNICATING WITH STEPPED AREA OF
DIFFERENTIAL PISTON
Sidney A. Lippiatt, Bath, England, asaignor to Bcndix Umitad.
Bristol, England
Filed Mar. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 361,162
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom. Mw. r, 1981,
Int. a.' B60T 15/18
U.S.a.303-6C 4ci.i,B.
4,438.979
WHEEL COVER
Dieter Renz, Rechberghausen, and Bemd L»per, Korb, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, auignora to Daimler-Benz Aktien-
gesellschaft, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,459
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 1,
1979, 2931163 *
Int. C\? B60B 7/06
U.S. a. 301-37 PB 20 Qaims
1. A pressure proportioning valve having a housing having
a pair of opposite ends, said housing having an inlet port, an
outlet port, and an exhaust port, a piston slidable in said hous-
ing, said piston being stepped to define larger and smaller
portions with a shoulder therebetween, first sealing means
sealing the smaller portion of the piston with the wall of said
housing to define a first chamber between one end of said
housing, said smaller portion of the piston and said first sealing
means, said first chamber being communicated with said ex-
haust port, second sealing means sealing the larger portion of
the piston with the wall of said housing to define a second
chamber between the other end of said housing, said larger
portion of the piston, and said second sealing means, said sec-
ond chamber being communicated to one of said inlet and
outlet ports, said shoulder cooperating with the wall of said
bore and said first and second sealing means to define a third
chamber separated from said first chamber by said first sealing
means and from said second chamber by said second sealing
means, the other of said inlet and outlet ports communicating
with said third chamber, and a double valve assembly includ-
ing a valve member carried by said piston and responsive to
movement thereof to control communication between said
chambers, the effective area of said piston responsive to the
pressure level in said third chamber being less than the effec-
live area of said piston exposed to the pressure level in said
second chamber, said double valve Msembly having a suble
lap position to mainuin a predetermined pressure ratio be-
tween said second and third chambers.
1. A wheel cover which includes a mounting means for
enabling mounting of the wheel cover onto a rim of a wheel,
the mounting means including a plurality of U-shaped reuining
springs each including a bent-over section and two legs adjoin-
ing the bent-over section, each of said reuining springs being
adapted to resiliently engage into a channel-like idenution
provided in the rim of the wheel, characterized in that each of
the retaining springs has an unstressed condition and a pre-
stressed condition and is constructed so as to enable a predeter-
mined prestressing thereof by movement of at least one leg of
each retaining spring over a predetermined prestressing dis-
tance, the movable leg of each reuining spring also being
movable from the prestressed condition into an insulled condi-
tion, one point of the movable leg of the reuining spring being
operable to abut at a point of the wheel cover during displace-
ment of the movable leg into the installed condition in such a
manner that the effective free bending length thereof is short-
ened and therewith the spring rate of the retaining spring is
increased.
4,438,981
HINGE JOINT FOR A TRACK CHAIN
Hans-Wllhelm Harms, Ratingen, Fed. Rep. of Gtrmany, as-
signor to Intartractor Viahmann GmbH A Co., Fad. Rap. of
Garmany
Filed Not. 12, 1981, Sar. No. 320,520
Claims priority, application Fad. Rap. of Garmuy, Jul. 9,
1981, 3127104
Int. a.} B62D 55/20
U.S. a. 305—14 9 Claims
1. A hinge joint for a track chain comprising a pin having a
bore therein, a bushing around the pin and slightly spaced
therefrom, a radial or transverse channel through the wall of
the pin communicating with the space between the pin wall
and the adjacent bushing surface, outer chain links encircling
the opposite ends of the pin and having packing receiving
recesses in the inwardly facing link walls, packings in said
recesses beyond the bushing ends, inner chain links encircling
the ends of the bushings and disposed adjacent to but out of
contact with the other chain links, and one end of said bore
terminating in a blind closed terminus and the other outer or
1552
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
mouth end of the bore having a plug of compressible material
Wierted therein and which plug has a channel communicating
with a reduced slit leading to the mouth of the bore the plug
bemg compressed along its entire length by the walls of said
bore such that said plug forms a seal with said bore along the
^^S
1 1 fi
y /',>,-' ^^
entire length of said plug and the plug surfaces forming said slit
rest tightly against each other under residual stress, whereupon
lubncant introduced through said channel of said plug passes
through said slit and into said bore to said packings and
wherein said slit is sealed by the residual stress to prohibit
lubricant from leaking from said bore through said plug.
4,438,982
GROUND-ENGAGING CONTACT ELEMENT FOR
ENDLESS-TRACK VEHICLES
Helge Pettemon, Giskfed, Sweden, asiignor to Gislaved Ak-
tiebolag, Giilaved, Sweden
PCT No. PCT/SE80/00353, § 371 Date Sep. 9, 1981, § 102(e)
D«te Sep. 9, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01988, PCT Pub
Date Jul. 23, 1981
PCT FUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 302,417
Claims pnority, appUcaUon Sweden, Jan. 11, 1980, 8000257
Int. a.3 B62D 55m
U.S. a 305-35 EB 5 claims
3— -I
1. A ground-engaging contact element for endless-track
vehicles, said endless tracks each comprising two separate
drawing-elements that interconnect a plurality of contact ele-
ments and which run substantially in parallel over at least two
wheels ..." a vehicle on each respective side of the vehicle in a
driving direction, said plurality of contact elements of each
track being arranged between said pair of drawing-elements to
connect said pair of drawing elements with each other, each
one of said drawing-elements comprising a chain having artic-
ulately connected links, at least some of said links having end
pomts and at least some of said links comprising releasable
connecting links.
said contact elements each comprising a generally polygonal
pUte of elastic polymer material, said plate being flexible
m the driving direction of the vehicle wheels as well as in
the transverse direction of the vehicle wheels; said contact
elements each having a length in said driving direction
which at least corresponds to the distance between end-
pomto of two links of said chains; and enlarged comers
projecting substantially perpendicular to the main plane of
a«d polygonal plate, said comers having through holes
therein for receiving at least portions of releasable con-
necting links which are connectable to separate adjacent
links in said chains.
4,438,983
LOW FRICTION PIVOT
Roland O. Davis, Santa Ynez, Calif., assignor to Saota Barbara
Research Center, Goleta, Calif.
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,053
Int. a.J F16C U/12
\i&. a. 308—2 A
5Claims
14.
1. A pivot structure comprising:
a cylindrical base member;
a cylindrical pivot pin member;
band means comprising a band having a first portion and a
second portion, with said first portion affixed to one of
said cylindrical members and said second portion affixed
to one of said cylindrical members, said band means hav-
ing first and second portions respectively extending
around one of said cylindrical members in a first direction
and around the other of said cylindrical members in a
second direction, said band means being a metallic band
and the curved surface of said pivot pin and said base, and
the thickness of said metallic band being such that said
metallic band is not stretched beyond its fatigue limit, said
first portion and said second portion of said band means
being configured so that the bending forces said first and
second band portions onto said pivot pin is substantially
balanced.
4438 984
DRILL STEEL GUIDING AND CENTRALIZING
MECHANISM
Matti LeppMlii, Teriiksentie, 33960 Pirkkala 6, Finland
PCT No. PCT/n81/00045. § 371 Date Feb. 12, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 12, 1982, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00171, PCT Pub
Date Jan. 21, 1982
PCT Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 349,086
Claims priority, application Finland, Jul. 2, 1980, 802116
Int. a.J B23Q 3/06: B25B 1/0%, 21/00: E21B 19/20
MS. a. 308-3.9 3 cw^
1. A drill steel guiding and centralizing mechanism compris-
ing a body (14), a first jaw (1), a first lever arm (2) directly
March 27, 1984
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1553
connected by said first jaw. a second lever arm (3) directly
connected to the first lever arm away from the connection of
the first jaw with the first lever, and an extension (16) for the
second lever arm, a first swivel joint (4) connected between the
first and the second lever arms and the body (14). around
which joint the first angled lever (5) formed by the first and the
second lever arms turns, and another jaw (6), cooperating with
the first jaw in order to open and close the jaws, a third lever
arm (7) directly connected to the second jaw. and a fourth
lever arm (8) directly connected to the third lever arm away
from the connection of the second jaw with the third lever
arm, the body (14) between the third and the fourth lever arms.
on which second joint (9) the angled lever (10) formed by the
third and the fourth lever arms is swiveling, whereby the
second lever arm (3) and the fourth lever arm (8) are on the
same side in relation to the first and the second joints, and a
power mechanism (15) to move the arms, the center of the jaws
(1, 6) being positioned on a line connecting the joints (4, 9)
when in a closed position of the jaws and that the jaws are
movable away from and towards the line when the jaws are
opened and closed, the improvement being that the second and
fourth lever arms are connected through a firm connecting rod
(11) that is connected to the second lever arm (3) by a third
joint (12) and to the fourth lever arm (3) by a fourth joint (13)
and that the power mechanism (15) to drive the arms being
coupled to affect only one of the lever arms (2. 3. 7 or 8) or its
extension, or the connecting rod (11) between the second (3)
and fourth (8) lever arms, and the first (4). the second (9), the
third (12) and the fourth (13) joints being corner points of a
parallelogram.
4438 985
BALL BUSHING OF SIMPLIFIED CONSTRUCTION
Denis Borel, Wallisellen, Switzerland, assignor to SRO Kugel-
lagerwerke J. Schmid-Roost AG, Switzerland
FUed Oct. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 436,657
Claims priority, application Switzeriand, Nov. 3, 1981.
7006/81
Int. a.3 F16C 29/06
U.S. a. 308-6 C 14 Claims
^^^
^^^^S^"
^^SS^rtr:^
a circular periphery; the needle being longer than the ball
channel; the balls in the longitudinal sections of the ball
channel being guided along the periphery of the needle,
and in the curved sections of the ball channel, which
partially wrap about the circular periphery of the needle,
the balls being guided around the periphery of the needle,
the curved sections being concavely curved around the
needle;
the needle and the longitudinal sections of the ball channel
being so shaped and so positioned that the centers of the
balls in the longitudinal and in the curved sections of the
ball channel are approximately the same distance from the
center of the needle, the axes of the longitudinal sections
of the ball channel continuously are approximately the
same distance from the axis of the needle, and the balls and
the needle being sized so that all balls in all sections of the
ball channel are always in contact with the needle for
being guided thereby and for being held in the ball chan-
nel.
4438986
BALL SCREW ASSEMBLY CONTAINING A BALL
SPLINE UNIT FOR EXACT SLOW FEED AND POWER
TRANSMISSION MECHANISM COMPRISING SAID
BALL SCREW ASSEMBLY
Hiroshi Teramachi, 34-8, Higuhi-Tamagawa 2-chome, Seta-
gaya-ku, Tokyo, Japan (158)
FUed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,692
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 13, 1981, 56-35418:
Oct. 5, 1981, 56-157454
Int. a.3 F16C il/04, 29/10: F16H 92/20. 1/20
U.S. a. 308-6 R 3 aaims
«6
26 , vnr.isc.,, ;.'
1. A ball bushing, comprising:
a hollow cylindrical sleeve with an exterior surface and an
interior surface; at least one recess in the sleeve extending
from the exterior surface to the interior surface for defin-
ing a ball channel; the ball channel defined in the recess
being comprised of two longitudinal sections extending
generally along the axis of the sleeve and of two curved
sections joining the ends of the longitudinal sections,
thereby forming a complete ball raceway in the longitudi-
nal and curved sections of the ball channel; the longitudi-
nal and curved sections all being shaped for guiding move-
ment of balls therealong; a plurality of balls disposed in the
ball channel for movement therealong;
a circular cross-section needle positioned in the recess and
extending the length of the ball channel, and located
radially outside one of the longitudinal sections of the ball
channel, the needle having a center and being defined by
1. A power transmission mechanism for exact and slow feed
with a ball screw assembly containing a ball spline unit (21).
said ball screw assembly comprising: a shaft (10) consisting of
two pans, one of the two parts being formed as a spline (11)
and the other one containing at least two screws (13, 14),
spaced apart from one another at a predetermined distance,
wherein the respective screws having a different pitch are in
screw engagement with a corresponding ball screw nut (22,
18), and the ball spline unit (21) is fitted into the spline (11), said
mechanism being characterized in that the ball screw nuts
consist of a stationary ball screw nut (22) and a movable ball
screw nut (18). said sutionary ball screw nut (22) bemg held in
a housing, said housing having a front and rear end part, said
spline (11) being in said rear end part, and said movable ball
screw nut (18) being secured to a movable member, the ball
spline unit (21) being rotatably arranged at the rear end part of
the housing with a ring member (33) disposed on the spline,
and, a rotational driving member (46) is operatively connected
to the ball spline unit, said ball spline (21) being fitted onto said
shaft (10) with balls (50) interposed therebetween.
1S54
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
March 27, 1984
4,438,987
MAGNETIC BEARING SYSTEM
Headriku J. KapMU, ^iMclftein, Netherlands, mignor to SKF
ladnftrial Trading A Derelopment Compuy B.V., Nieuwe-
geia, Netherlands
Filed Mar. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 17,111
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, Mar. 8, 1978,
/MI2993
ing and oriented substantially vertically around the pe-
riphery of said ball bearings and in contact therewith,
whereby a bearing assembly is provided having extremely
low rotational friction.
VS. a. 308—10
iBt a.J F16C 39/00
11 Claims
1. A magnetic bearing system comprising a first bearing
member, a second bearing member movable relative to said
first member, and adjusting means for maintaining a distance
between said first and second members substantially constant,
said adjusting means including means for transmitting light
from one of said members to a surface of the other of said
members, means for receiving a portion of said light reflected
by said surface, and electromagnetic means electrically con-
nected to said receiving means for exerting an electromagnetic
force between said members variable as a function of the mag-
mtude of the light received by said receiving means, at least
one of said transmitting means and receiving, means including
a light conducting optical fiber.
4,438,989
BALL BEARING
Richard Negele, Esslingen, and WilheUn Birkenmaler, Weln-
stadt, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to SKF Kneel-
lagerfabriken GmbH, Schweinfiirt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Piled Jun. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 45,648
197?781(Sll[5' *'"*"****°" ^^' "*"• °' ^"»«°y' J""- «.
Int. a.3 F16C 19/J6. 27/04, 33/78
U.S. a. 308-184 R 10 Qalms
4438 988
VERTICAL BEARING ASSEMBLY
Frank Santora, 2301 N. Grant Ave., Wilmington, Del. 19806
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 188,616, Sep. 19, 1980, Pat. No
4,357,015. This appUcation Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,987
Int. a.> 
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11